《To achieve immortality, I cultivate using Qi Luck》 Chapter 1 - Chapter 1: Chapter 1 Lu Yuan chapter 1: chapter 1 lu yuan translator: 549690339 yue country, luling county, dayu mountain. in a deep, long cave, gusts of wind blew in from the outside, making a wailing sound like ghostly howls, causing the burning fire in the cave to shudder uncontrollably. a chilling sensation emanated from his body, and as lu yuan was struck by the cool breeze, he slowly awakened from his slumber. at that very moment, countless memories came flooding in, causing him to scream in pain, his head splitting and his body trembling on the ground. after a while, the pain in his head receded, and as his consciousness returned, lu yuan gasped heavily. gathering some strength, he stared into the dim depths of the cave and muttered to himself, ¡°did i travel through time¡­?¡± as he spoke, he couldn¡¯t help but touch the smooth, cold floor. the slightly damp sensation was clearly transmitted to him, along with the chilling wind that continued to blow in, making him shiver uncontrollably. all these experiences were telling him one thing: he had indeed traveled through time. lu yuan sat motionless on the floor for a long time, almost half an hour passed before he finally accepted this reality. struggling to sit up, he looked around at his surroundings and recalled his current identity. lu dalang, a hunter who lived on dayu mountain, eked out a living by hunting. his father was killed in a hunting accident when lu yuan was twelve years old, and his mother passed away due to overwork and illness two years later. now sixteen, lu yuan had been living alone for two years, residing in the mountains. the cave before him was his home. recalling these memories, bitterness filled lu yuan¡¯s heart. ¡°this is¡­ a nightmare of a beginning.¡± as a modern man of the 21st century who had read countless online novels, the notion of time-travelling was not unfamiliar to him. traveling through time was one thing, but at least let me be reborn as a great luo golden immortal, god emperor dao master, a member of the royal nobility, or even an aristocratic family? at the very least, i could accept being a poor scholar, a landowner, or a merchant. but now, he had traveled into the body of a hunter who had lost both his parents and had no place to call it a home, living in a cave on a mountain like a wild man. what kind of cruel joke was this? being a hunter wasn¡¯t an easy life. days spent wandering through the dangerous forest, seeking prey alongside predators like tigers and wolves, with venomous snakes and wild beasts lurking everywhere. simply put, it was a job that could easily cost him his life if he was not careful. lu yuan didn¡¯t believe that he, a modern man who couldn¡¯t tell grains apart and lazy on physical labor, could survive in this treacherous environment. even if he had a healthy hunter¡¯s body now, he felt his chances for survival were slim. ¡°i have to change. change is essential.¡± a strong conviction surged through lu yuan¡¯s mind, but he was soon brought back to reality by the sudden growl of his stomach¡¯s intense hunger. well, it seemed he hadn¡¯t eaten for a whole day. the more critical survival instincts quickly occupied lu yuan¡¯s thoughts. he got up from the ground and began searching for food. his eyes glanced left and right. in the dimly-lit, three-meter-wide chamber, a wooden pillar stood in the center, with traces of age and grooves on its surface. above the pillar, several branches extended out, with seven or eight pieces of something hanging on them, swaying in the wind. without hesitation, lu yuan approached and took down a piece of preserved meat prepared by his previous self. he found a tree branch nearby, skewered the meat, and began roasting it over the fire. adding some more firewood to the already half-burnt flame, the dying fire in the cave became warm once again. feeling the chill in his body dissipating, lu yuan continued to turn the meat over the fire while contemplating his future. he couldn¡¯t continue as a hunter, it was too dangerous, he never knew when he would be killed by a wild beast. however, if he didn¡¯t become a hunter, what could he do with his current identity? lu yuan pondered the society he now lived in. his previous self was just a hunter, who spent his whole life on dayu mountain. the most he would do was trade the hunted game for silver in the county town at the foot of the mountain and buy necessities to bring back home. so, the previous self knew very little about the outside world. all he knew was that he lived in yue country, within dayu county of luling county, and that he lived on dayu mountain within dayu county¡¯s borders. beyond that, he knew nothing. and as a hunter, he was commonly referred to as one of the mountain people. but the identity of a mountain person wasn¡¯t recognized by the government; they were not official citizens. in other words, lu yuan¡¯s current identity was not registered with the government. though he lived within yue country¡¯s borders, he was neither a subject of the nation nor under the rule of the king. was he an illegal resident? upon realizing this, lu yuan¡¯s vision darkened once more. as a modern man, he certainly understood what kind of fate awaited a person without identity in this world. there would be no protection under the law, and if somebody killed him, nobody would care. he wouldn¡¯t be able to purchase land or a house, nor could he legitimately accumulate assets. he couldn¡¯t take the imperial exams, he couldn¡¯t do business, and he couldn¡¯t even travel for an extended period, as long-distance trips required a special pass. simply put, lu yuan was now an illegal, stateless person, without identity. with this realization, he felt on the verge of breaking down once again. thankfully, after a series of crushing blows, his capacity for coping was now far stronger than before, allowing him to barely hang on. but understanding his current identity dashed all his plans of becoming rich through invention and making a name for himself as a public scholar. there was no other way; a person without a legal identity could crush all his hopes. ¡°so, my only way out now is¡­¡± lu yuan took a deep breath and began to call out desperately in his mind, ¡°system!¡± that¡¯s right, in such a nightmarish beginning, other than the indispensable system of a traverser, he couldn¡¯t think of what else could turn the tables. however, after calling out several times, there was still no response. ¡°god finger!¡± still no response. ¡°grandfather! tathagata buddha! god! daoist lord! all the gods in heaven¡­!¡± lu yuan shouted the names of all the gods and immortals he knew, yet still received no response. despair filled his heart. ¡°could i be the legendary traverse protagonist with the worst starting point and no god finger?¡± even though he kept shouting in the comment section in his previous life about not relying on god finger, insisting that the real protagonist should rise through their own pure strength¡­ but those were trivial matters, mere lip service. at this moment, when faced with reality, only a fool would not want a system or god finger! ¡°could it be that i was punished for shouting too much back then?¡± regretting his previous actions as a keyboard warrior, he wondered if he had brought this upon himself. and as if sensing his thoughts. a burst of blue light suddenly appeared in lu yuan¡¯s mind the moment this idea crossed his mind, illuminating his despair. Chapter 2 - Chapter 2: Chapter 2: Immortality chapter 2: chapter 2: immortality translator: 549690339 [inborn talent: immortality] [talent effect: this person is favored by heaven, granted longevity among heaven and earth, and will not die due to lifespan issues.] [note: although you are immune to the threat of death from exhausting your lifespan due to the luck of heaven and earth, this only eliminates your risk of death from age, not from other causes. you will still die from natural or man-made disasters. therefore, although you are a long-lived person, it does not mean that you can be worry-free forever. throughout your prolonged life, you must learn how to avoid the danger of death from external forces, which is the necessary cultivation for a qualified long-lived person.] lu yuan read the information in his mind, and after reading it all, he couldn¡¯t help but be stunned. inborn talent? immortality? ¡°isn¡¯t this the inborn talent i chose when creating a game character before i passed out? is this my cheat code?¡± lu yuan couldn¡¯t help but recall his previous scene before crossing over. before crossing over, he was playing a game called ¡°eternal immortal path¡±. in this game, when players create a character, they can randomly obtain an inborn talent, which will be the innate characteristic of the character, accompanying them throughout their growth, similar to a cheat code in crossing over. and the inborn talent that lu yuan got was this [immortality]. how should i put it? among all the inborn talents in the game, it can only be considered average, suitable for commoner players, allowing them to use their endless longevity to slowly breakthrough. so they won¡¯t die from age issues before they can make a breakthrough. but for rich players, this talent is meaningless. they can rely on recharge to quickly accumulate and advance their state, and they will never worry about their game character¡¯s lifespan. ¡°so because of playing the game before crossing over, my game character¡¯s inborn talent followed me, then became my cheat code, giving me immortality?¡± lu yuan slowly analyzed, and then felt a mixture of emotions. immortality, for many people, is definitely something they dream of. after all, everyone wants to live long and not die. who would refuse to have eternal life? so, lu yuan was quite satisfied with this talent. this is reality, not a game. who wouldn¡¯t like a lifespan equal to that of heaven? but the problem is, such a cheat code, is almost useless for his current situation. yes, eternal life is indeed attractive. but as this talent note says, eternal life only solves the death threat from your lifespan aspect but does not solve the death threat from other external forces. if you are killed by someone, you will die. if you fall into a river, you will die. if you fall off a cliff, you will die. if you have nothing to eat, you will die. in real life, there are too many dangers that can lead to death. and if you don¡¯t have enough strength to avoid these dangers, what¡¯s the use of having eternal life? maybe one day there will be an accident that you can¡¯t avoid, and you¡¯ll be gone. ¡°so, what¡¯s the use of having such an immortality talent for me now? what i want is a quick-acting cheat code that can directly enhance my strength. not this seemingly eternal, but not guaranteed life.¡± at this time, the smoked meat was ready. lu yuan took the roasted meat with a bit of depression, brought it to his mouth, blew the heat away, and took a bite. of course, the smoked meat made by the hunter in the mountains won¡¯t have any good seasonings, just some salt to keep it from going bad. however, the raw materials were good. this smoked meat was made from a wild deer that the original body hunted in the mountains. the local game didn¡¯t need much processing, and the ingredients itself were already excellent. the smell of smoke mixed with the aroma of grease made lu yuan, who was starving, wolf down the meat quickly. with each bite of roasted smoked meat, his frigid and starving body gradually warmed up. when he finished the last bite, lu yuan walked to a wooden barrel near him, scooped up a spoonful of clear water, and gulped it down. after a long sigh, a sense of satisfaction rose in his heart. but then a gust of cold wind from the outer room made him shiver, forcing him to wrap up his thin clothes and sit back next to the fire to get the only warmth available. looking at the surrounding environment, the light from the fire next to him could only illuminate the inner area of the cave, while the distant tunnel outside was still pitch black. the wind outside seemed to have gotten stronger. some whining and howling sounds, like wild animals crying, came with the distant wind. with the memory of his previous life, lu yuan immediately identified the sounds as coming from several predators in the mountains, who seemed to be reveling in the darkness. ¡°listening to the sound like an old lady wailing, there should be a pack of wild yellow dogs outside looking for food. i just don¡¯t know which poor beasts are having bad luck tonight. judging from the direction of the cries, could it be the wild boars at lonely ridge?¡± lu yuan listened to the sounds of the wild animals carried by the wind, and after identifying them, felt a little nervous. the so-called wild yellow dogs are actually jackals, a group of fierce and powerful animals roaming dayu mountain. they appear in groups, are ferocious and cunning, making even the wolf packs avoid them by a mile. even the king of the mountain, the fierce tigers, are not a match for a group of wild yellow dogs. when such a group of fierce hunters is active outside, as a resident living in the mountains, how could lu yuan not feel nervous and afraid? after thinking about it, he stood up, walked to the stone wall, took down a torch hanging on it, and walked towards the tunnel. after about ten steps, the entrance of the tunnel was in front of him. a simple wooden door made from tree trunks was blocking the entrance. with countless wild animals in the mountains, the original inhabitant living here would naturally need to add extra protection. this wooden door in front of him is the best barrier to block wild animals. the door is made from tree trunks three inches thick and fixed by simple mortise and tenon joints along with ropes, making it sturdy enough to withstand the impact of ordinary wild beasts. last year, a wild wolf sneaked in, seemingly trying to launch a surprise attack. but in the end, it was blocked by the wooden door. after being exposed, the wild wolf tried to force its way through but failed to break through the door after several attempts to ram and bite it. eventually, the original body was awakened and killed the wild wolf with an arrow. the next day, he took the skinned wolf and sold its fur in the city at the foot of the mountain, exchanging it for a month¡¯s supply of rice and salt. therefore, this door has been tested. beyond the wooden door, there is a layer of vines and tree branches covering the entrance, serving as the outermost camouflage. vines, wooden doors, and knives and arrows ¨C these three things are the basis of a hunter¡¯s survival in these mountains. Chapter 3 - Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Wild Yellow Dog chapter 3: chapter 3: wild yellow dog translator: 549690339 after hesitating repeatedly, lu yuan finally decided that a wooden door alone was not secure enough. he needed to add an extra layer of protection. turning around, he came to the back of the wooden door, reached out to the stone wall next to it, and picked up the largest wooden board that had been previously cut. in two steps, he reached the back of the stone door. with a bang, he placed the wooden board behind the door, instantly thickening the originally thin wooden door. when the first wooden board was placed, lu yuan turned around and fetched the second one. by the time he laid down the third board, the original door had already been mostly covered. only a small gap was left in the middle, through which he could observe the outside situation and even stick out a few arrows as necessary. this was a reserved shooting hole. after completing these tasks, lu yuan didn¡¯t stop. he went to the nearby stone wall, fetched several thick columns, placed them diagonally to support the wooden boards, and further secured the door. having completed these tasks, he was somewhat tired from the series of actions. however, after patting his hands, lu yuan looked at the significantly reinforced wooden door and revealed a satisfied smile. he nodded and said, ¡°not bad. now there¡¯s a sense of safety.¡± yes, the sense of safety was what he needed. the damn ¡®immortality¡¯ ability from the golden finger had no value at present and couldn¡¯t be put to any use. the situation in the mountains was very dangerous, and the wild yellow dog was even hunting outside. as a newcomer who had just traversed dimensions, how could he not add multiple layers of protection? although he was new to traversing dimensions, as an avid reader of countless novels, lu yuan knew the importance of taking precautions. upon realizing the dangers around him, he immediately took countermeasures. true, he had always complained about the lack of power granted by the golden finger. however, after all, it had given him an extremely long life, even if he lacked strength. when he thought of the fact that he could live for tens of thousands, millions, or even billions of years, and enjoy an almost endless lifespan, he felt that his life should be preserved at all costs. yes, he now held the lowly status of a hunter, living almost like a savage. but there¡¯s a saying, right? even if you allowed a pig to live for hundreds of years, it would become enlightened at some point. lu yuan was confident that he was stronger than a pig and hadn¡¯t been granted longevity for nothing. with so many favorable conditions, the current difficulties would definitely be temporary. it¡¯s just a matter of lacking a social status, right? he could simply endure a few hundred years until yue country was destroyed. then, in the chaos after its collapse, he could create a new identity and completely whitewash his past. moreover, with a few hundred years of accumulation, would he have any trouble gaining wealth? by making more grand plans, he could spend a few hundred years planning and then rebellions to become an emperor. it wasn¡¯t an entirely impossible idea. and as an immortal emperor, he could rule something emperor qin had only dreamt of¡ªan everlasting dynasty. wouldn¡¯t that be reasonable? so, even if it wasn¡¯t for anything else, to fulfill his future emperor dreams, he couldn¡¯t die now. ¡°injuries cannot be allowed either. if my imperial body is damaged and disabled, it would undermine the very foundation of the kingdom,¡± lu yuan thought, comforting and indulging himself in fantasies. having experienced the bizarre event of dimensional travel and being in such a dangerous environment, he needed to think of something to divert his attention, or he feared he would go insane. finally, after thoroughly checking the wooden door one last time and ensuring that it was tightly closed and couldn¡¯t be broken into from the outside, he felt at ease and returned to the depths of the cave. then, he took out a fur blanket, laid it down next to the fire, and laid down. it didn¡¯t take long for him to fall into a deep sleep. physically, today¡¯s experiences hadn¡¯t been too draining. but mentally, fatigue was unavoidable. perhaps due to the pressure, lu yuan dreamt of struggling in the mountains and eventually becoming a mountain village king. he secretly gathered strength in the mountains and finally, after decades, when the world was in chaos, he participated in the race for power and eventually unified the world, becoming the emperor. he also dreamed of accidentally obtaining an immortal scripture, diligently cultivating it in dayu mountain, and after hundreds of years, he achieved great success in martial arts and ascended. he dreamed that not long after he had traversed, he encountered a fierce tiger during a hunt in the mountains. the tiger opened its bloody maw and leaped towards him. but just as the situation grew perilous, there was a sudden loud bang between heaven and earth, and the world before him shattered. ¡°ah!¡± lu yuan suddenly sat up from the ground, his body already soaked in sweat. the damp and slippery feeling from his skin, blown by the cold wind, immediately sobered him up. a nightmare? this realization emerged in his heart, but before he could settle down, a series of continuous banging sounds instantly attracted his attention. lu yuan turned his head towards the source of the noise. he saw that at the tunnel in front of him, the banging sounds were getting faster and more intense. ¡°something is trying to break down the door!¡± after a brief moment of shock, lu yuan quickly understood the situation. with a gulp, he swallowed his saliva, fear rising in his heart. bang! bang! bang! as lu yuan grew frightened, the impacts continued, even accelerating. ¡°no, this can¡¯t go on. i don¡¯t know what¡¯s outside, but my wooden door, although sturdy, will eventually be broken if this continues.¡± listening to the increasingly rapid impacts, lu yuan¡¯s heart trembled, but he eventually regained his senses and realized the gravity of his situation. looking at the dark tunnel, he felt as if a giant mouth was slowly approaching him, ready to swallow him whole. but at this moment, there was no room for him to cower or retreat. if he hid here motionlessly and waited for the door to break, he would surely die. but if he went to defend it, death was not guaranteed. after considering his options in his heart, lu yuan made up his mind, clenched his teeth, and went to the stone wall to grab a short knife and a set of bow and arrow that hung there. with the weapons on his back and a torch in hand, he headed towards the wooden door of the tunnel. ¡°i want to see what kind of creature dares to trouble me at this late hour. if you wish to kill me, let¡¯s see if you have what it takes.¡± as lu yuan walked through the tunnel, facing danger, his initial fear miraculously subsided after making up his mind, and a fierce determination welled up instead. before long, the wooden door was right in front of him. through the narrow gaps he left earlier, he looked outside at the weak light of the fire and saw several long, dark shadows continuously ramming against the door. so it was these beasts causing trouble? seeing this, lu yuan understood and, without hesitation, drew his knife and rushed forward. with a flick of the sharp blade, it penetrated through a gap in the door. a splat followed as warm liquid splattered onto his hand, giving off a fishy odor. a wild yellow dog had collided with the protruding blade, and the weapon had ripped open a large wound at its waist. its body hung in place, blood pouring out continuously. the beast struggled in pain, emitting a harsh, hoarse cry. its pair of green eyes shimmered with trepidation. watching it, lu yuan¡¯s hand slid down the knife handle, followed by a muffled thud. the wild yellow dog¡¯s waist was nearly severed in half, its body falling to the ground. lu yuan then withdrew the short knife. everything happened naturally. at this moment, the memories of sixteen years of experience from his previous life became lu yuan¡¯s wealth. Chapter 4 - Chapter 4: Chapter 4: Swordsmanship and Archery chapter 4: chapter 4: swordsmanship and archery translator: 549690339 throwing the wild yellow dog to the ground, as lu yuan sheathed his knife, a slight pain flashed through his mind, seemingly accompanied by something new. but at the moment, busy dealing with the ferocious beasts in front of him, he didn¡¯t have the time to check. his gaze remained tightly focused on the wild yellow dogs outside, not daring to be careless. killing a wild yellow dog with just one sword strike, this undoubtedly had a great deterrent effect on the other wild yellow dogs. outside the wooden door, in addition to the one just killed, there were still four wild yellow dogs gathered at the doorway. but at this moment, they were looking at the corpse of their companion who had been killed, their greenish eyes flickering, filled with malice, occasionally glancing at each other and then at lu yuan behind the door. these beasts were still fearless and refused to leave, as if the death of their companion had only incited their aggression, intending to continue their attack. however, their companion had died too miserably earlier, and the door in front of them was too strong, so the wild yellow dogs couldn¡¯t decide what to do, freezing at the doorway. neither advancing nor retreating. just like that, they stared through the gap in the wooden door at the figure behind it. ¡°damn animals, daring to target me,¡± lu yuan looked at the four wild yellow dogs outside with murderous eyes, his face cracked into a smile. earlier, he had killed a wild yellow dog with a single stroke, and his previous experience played a significant role. as a result, he now knew that he had some ability to deal with these beasts. on the contrary, with a sturdy wooden door in front of him, he was in a safe position. with a knife and arrows at his disposal, his combat power was not weak. at least killing these wild yellow dogs in front of him would not be a problem. having some assurance eased lu yuan¡¯s fear. although it wasn¡¯t completely gone, it no longer affected his actions. so, staring back at the malicious wild yellow dogs, he didn¡¯t waste any words. since their focus was on his short knife, they didn¡¯t dare to approach. lu yuan simply put down the knife, took the hunting bow off his back, drew an arrow from the quiver at his waist, and lowered his body to aim through the gap in the door. at the moment, the archery memory of his previous life seemed to be revived, and his body¡¯s muscle memory made a habitual reaction. his eyes narrowed, then he aimed at the closest wild yellow dog, released his fingers, and a breaking sound rang out in the darkness. immediately after, the arrow struck the front leg of the wild yellow dog with a thud. ¡°woo!¡± a painful howl instantly came from the mouth of the arrow-struck wild yellow dog. but it didn¡¯t even have time to cry out twice before two more arrows flew toward it, hitting one of its eyes and waist respectively. it was lu yuan who seized the opportunity, taking advantage of the dog¡¯s injury to deliver a fatal blow and finish it off. being hit by three arrows in succession, even the wild yellow dog¡¯s strong vitality couldn¡¯t withstand it. after struggling for a bit, it lay motionless in a pool of blood. with another companion dead, the remaining three wild yellow dogs let out a roar. two of them looked fearfully at lu yuan and slowly retreated. but the last one had its aggression unleashed and ignored the fate of its companions, directly pouncing on him, aiming for the direction of the wooden door. at this moment, lu yuan had just loaded another arrow onto his bowstring. seeing this, he didn¡¯t hesitate to release the bowstring, shooting directly at the charging wild yellow dog¡¯s belly. ¡°woo!¡± with a painful cry, the wild yellow dog slammed heavily into the wooden door. after making a loud bang, the arrow plunged deeper into its body, causing a second injury. lu yuan took the opportunity and shot another arrow directly into its head. after suffering heavy injuries, the wild yellow dog struggled for a bit before lying motionless. ¡°woo¡­¡± the remaining two wild yellow dogs, retreating, let out a mournful howl as they saw another companion die. however, the sound of two more arrows flying through the air frightened them, and they didn¡¯t dare to stay any longer. after dodging the arrows, they fled like the wind toward the cave¡¯s entrance. watching their silhouettes disappearing into the darkness, lu yuan stood in place, staring for a moment. only after making sure there were no more sounds did he let out a sigh of relief. then, a wave of fatigue washed over him, and he slumped to the ground. the recent battle, although he had been in an absolutely safe position, both stabbing the wild yellow dogs with his knife and shooting them with arrows required a lot of strength. not to mention the mental exhaustion after a life-or-death struggle. so the earlier confrontation, although brief, probably just three to five minutes, had taken a considerable toll on lu yuan¡¯s physical and mental strength. not to mention the psychological impact caused by having to kill three wild yellow dogs for the first time in a desperate fight. so now that he had relaxed, he could no longer hold on and just wanted to rest well for a while. seizing the opportunity, lu yuan began to focus his attention on the thing that had appeared in his mind earlier. [skills: crude knife technique (beginner), crude archery (beginner)] ¡°what is this?¡± looking at the skills that appeared in his mind, just like the ¡°immortality¡± talent from before, lu yuan hesitated for a moment before reacting: ¡°this is the attribute template, experience datatization.¡± he was no stranger to the attribute template and experience datatization, having watched many novels and played games before. by solidifying a skill into attribute data with different experience levels, the skill can be upgraded when the necessary experience is reached, until it cannot be upgraded any further. this is a standard feature for many traversers. ¡°so, is it because i just merged my previous life¡¯s experience and memories, used the short knife and bow and arrow in actual combat, and killed the wild yellow dogs that i learned these two skills?¡± lu yuan looked at the attribute template in his mind, deep in thought. if it was really as he had guessed, it would make the path ahead easier. however, at present, there were no conditions to verify his conjecture, so he just thought about it in his mind and decided not to dwell on it further. after all, with his infinite lifespan and immortality, there would be plenty of time for experimentation in the future, so he didn¡¯t have to rush for now. right now, all lu yuan wanted to do was rest well. in just one day, he had experienced transmigration, life-and-death battles, and more. his body and mind were utterly exhausted, and he didn¡¯t want to think about anything else. after sitting against the wooden door for some time, he felt that his strength had mostly returned. lu yuan decided to get up again. glancing at the wild yellow dog corpses lying outside the door, he contemplated before deciding not to open the door and deal with them. although the two wild yellow dogs from before had left, who knew if they had gone far away? moreover, he didn¡¯t know if there were more dangerous beasts outside. so, for safety¡¯s sake, it would be better to process the remaining corpses tomorrow when daylight came. with that in mind, lu yuan checked the wooden door again before going back to the cave chamber. Chapter 5 - Chapter 5: Chapter 5: Skin Peeling chapter 5: chapter 5: skin peeling translator: 549690339 perhaps it was last night¡¯s brutal slaughter, the strong scent of blood scared off the surrounding wild beasts. after the pack of wild yellow dogs left, no other wildlife dared to disrupt him. lu yuan had a good night¡¯s rest. by the time he woke up, he was completely restored, feeling refreshed and invigorated. he scooped some water from the well for a simple wash, then started the fire and began to cook breakfast. living in the mountains, lu yuan didn¡¯t have many options. aside from half a container of rice and a small amount of wild vegetables, he had nothing else. oh, wait, he still had seven pieces of smoked meat left that in total weighed about ten pounds, not too bad actually. half a bowl of rice, a slice or two of smoked meat, and a handful of wild vegetables made up today¡¯s porridge. ¡°hmm, having both rice and meat isn¡¯t too bad.¡± looking at the bubbling rice and meat in the pot, lu yuan joked bitterly to himself before walking towards the cave¡¯s entrance. the porridge wouldn¡¯t be ready for at least another hour. he could use this time to deal with the corpses outside the cave. but just as he was about to start walking, he paused, went to the stone wall beside him, picked up the hunting bow and short knife he had used last night. only after he had secured his equipment, did he proceed to walk outside. ¡°those three corpses of wild yellow dogs should still be there after a night¡¯s time.¡± lu yuan walked to the door, looking outside through the gaps in the wooden door. spotting three immobile corpses, he nodded faintly. it seemed no other creatures came after he went to sleep last night. however, he never let down his guard. although no creatures had visited the doorway, who knew what dangers lurked outside the cave? wild yellow dogs were cunning, cruel creatures with a strong sense of revenge. animals that offended them were either immediately killed by the pack, or remembered for future vendetta, pursued relentlessly until revenge was exacted. lu yuan had killed three of their companions last night. he found it hard to believe that the wild yellow dogs had given up on vengeance so easily. ¡°hmm, let¡¯s see if there¡¯s an ambush waiting for me.¡± after observing the bodies for a while, lu yuan picked up a stone and threw it towards the outside of the wooden door. bang! the stone landed onto the stone floor, making a clear, resonating sound. the noise echoed down the tunnel, reaching far distances. ¡°if there are any wild yellow dogs waiting outside, they should be able to hear this noise.¡± lu yuan watched as the stone rolled alongside him, giving up once it lost its momentum. after waiting for a long time, he squinted his eyes: ¡°could it be true that there¡¯s no ambush waiting outside the cave? have those wild yellow dogs really left?¡± this thought crossed his mind. but to err on the side of caution, lu yuan picked up a few more stones and threw them outside through the same gap in the door. he put more strength into his throws this time, causing the stones to land further away and make louder noises. nevertheless, even after several attempts, no sound came from outside the door. at this point, lu yuan could finally confirm that there was no ambush waiting for him outside. ¡°it seems that last night¡¯s slaughter genuinely scared off those vicious beasts. they dare not loiter around my cave.¡± recalling the scenes from last night, he still felt a slight tremor in his heart. there was the thrill of the kill, the fear of facing danger, and the bewilderment towards his own feelings. in the past, lu yuan wouldn¡¯t dare to kill even a chicken or step on a caterpillar. but last night, he had killed a wild yellow dog without a second thought, and later shot dead two others without batting an eye. he had performed those acts casually without the slightest ripple in his state of mind, as if he was just eating and drinking ¡°did i reveal my inherently violent personality, or did the instinct of the original body influence my subjective consciousness, or was it a combination of both?¡± faced with this question, lu yuan wasn¡¯t sure of the answer. squeak¡ª¡ª with considerable effort, he removed the wooden boards and column, released the door latch, and the door once again connected the secure tunnel to the outside world. upon reaching the bodies of the wild yellow dogs and inspecting them, lu yuan was assured that these animals were truly dead. after some thought, he grabbed one of the wild yellow dog¡¯s corpses and began dragging it towards the mouth of the cave. the locale of lu yuan¡¯s dwelling was at the base of a cliff, surrounded by a large expanse of dense forest filled with various wild plants and flowers, many of which were taller than a man. it was a truly wild place. further away, there was a stream that extended down from the mountain. the water from the stream was clear and sweet, nourishing countless creatures in the mountains. with a thud sound, he tossed the last corpse beside the stream. ¡°such heaviness.¡± gazing at the scattered corpses at his feet, lu yuan wiped his sweat, took a deep breath, then took out a dagger from his waist and thrust it into the corpse to begin skinning it. among various beasts, the skin of the wild yellow dog doesn¡¯t fetch a high price due to its color and smell. however, the skin of three wild yellow dogs could still earn him a tael or two of silver if sold in the market, which was pretty decent. don¡¯t underestimate a couple of silver taels. according to the recollection of the original owner¡¯s market visits, a pound of pork costs about 20 cents and a pound of rice, 3 cents. according to current silver prices, a tael of silver equals 900 cents and allows you to purchase 300 pounds of rice. 300 pounds of rice is just enough to feed an adult for a year if you¡¯re careful. of course, as a hunter who travels the mountains and fights wild beasts routinely, 300 pounds of rice will not suffice. the original body had a daily requirement of 1.5 pounds of rice and some meat to maintain his strength and combat wild beasts in the mountains. earning half a year¡¯s worth of rice money thus was quite a substantial income. having transitioned to this new life as a hunter, lu yuan must now plan for his future livelihood over the long term. his current stateless identity isn¡¯t conducive to future-development. changing this status¡ªwhether by becoming a registered citizen or pursuing other ventures¡ªwill require money. or even worse, the thought of an immortal dying from hunger is quite unthinkable. hence, making money is of immediate importance. ¡°i need to make money.¡± lu yuan thought to himself as the sharp dagger in his hand tore through the skin of the wild yellow dog. the inherited memories were sparked, and he peeled off the skin from the corpse with ease. with his inherited experience, skinning the dogs presented no challenge despite never having performed this activity before crossing over. only half an hour passed when three complete wild yellow dog skins were neatly stacked to one side. Chapter 6 - Chapter 6: Chapter 6: Trap chapter 6: chapter 6: trap translator: 549690339 after cleaning the peeled skin in the stream and washing the peeled wild yellow dog meat, lu yuan returned to the cave with the skin and meat. unconsciously, an hour and a half had passed after all the work. a rich aroma wafted out from the not-so-large cave. ¡°the porridge is ready.¡± smelling the aroma of the food, lu yuan, who had been busy for a long time, instantly felt his stomach growling. he picked up the bowl beside him, filled it with porridge, blew on it before putting it to his mouth, and then swallowed the first sip which was slightly hot for his taste. the porridge, though simple, was made with smoked meat, sprinkled with wild vegetables, and finally seasoned with a bit of salt. but delicious ingredients often only require simple ingredients and cooking methods. under these all-natural foods, even if it was just a porridge, it was incredibly delicious. at least for lu yuan, who had traversed to this world and became a stranger, being able to drink a bowl of hot porridge after waking up was already a very fortunate thing. after finishing his delicious breakfast and cleaning up the dishes, he began to get busy again. the peeled wild yellow dog¡¯s skin needed to be tanned, otherwise, it would rot. the separated bones and meat also needed to be marinated, smoked, and roasted, otherwise, it would start to smell bad in a couple of days. wild yellow dog meat was tough and sour, and extremely unpalatable. wealthy families would never eat this low-quality meat. it was only those poor people who would buy it to taste the gamey flavor. even if sold at the market, a catty of wild yellow dog meat might only sell for seven or eight cents. converted to rice, it wouldn¡¯t even amount to three catties. after cleaning the wild yellow dog¡¯s meat, about a hundred catties were left. if all were sold, it would only yield about seven hundred cents. such a small amount of money would not be worth the effort of carrying the meat down the mountain to sell, and along the way, it would be extorted several times by gang members and tax officials. in the end, having four hundred cents left would be considered good. the hard-earned money wasn¡¯t worth it, so he might as well keep the meat for himself. at least, no matter how unpalatable the wild yellow dog¡¯s meat was, it was still meat and could supplement one¡¯s physical strength, which was better than eating rice, right? the blazing fire burned, and the salted, marinated meat strips were rolling on wooden branches spread across the fire. as they were smoked by the fire, drops of grease fell from the meat, making the firewood burn even more vigorously. lu yuan sat by the side, occasionally checking the heat and turning the meat. boom! at this moment, a muffled noise came from outside, followed by a series of loud thunderclaps. the sound of rain poured in through the cave entrance. from time to time, a gale howled, carrying the damp rainwater through the vines at the entrance. the raindrops crackled on the wooden door, making a thumping sound. cold wind blew through the gaps, and the fire before his eyes wobbled unsteadily. lu yuan glanced at the dark tunnel in the distance, feeling the cold wind and rain, tightened his collar, turned over the smoked meat on the fire, and muttered to himself, ¡°from now on, i will live this wild life.¡± ¡­ the next day. the clouds scattered, and the sun shone brightly. lu yuan took his knife and bow, opened the wooden door that had been closed for a night, and walked out of his cave. yesterday, he spent a day preparing the hundred catties of wild yellow dog meat for smoking and marinating. in two or three more days, he could completely smoke it. however, having been delayed for these two days and with the heavy rain yesterday, lu yuan was a bit worried about the traps he had set up in the mountains, so he planned to go check them today. as a qualified hunter, to hunt in the mountain forest, it was impossible to directly confront fierce beasts and engage them head-on. that would not only be inefficient but also extremely dangerous. a mature hunter would skillfully use their wisdom to set up concealed but effective traps to capture prey. lu yuan¡¯s predecessor had set up more than ten traps between these mountain ridges, specifically for capturing wild beasts. ¡°yesterday¡¯s heavy rain must have frightened many wild animals. i wonder if any of them got scared and fell into my traps.¡± with that thought in mind, lu yuan couldn¡¯t help but quicken his pace. although a heavy rain might bring him some harvest, the same rain could also wash away or damage his traps. if that happened, even if the prey fell into the trap, it would somehow find a chance to escape. furthermore, other wild predators might discover the prey, seize it, and thus steal it from him. in that situation, all his efforts would be for the benefit of those beasts. two hours later. lu yuan looked at the two struggling gray figures in his trap and let out a sigh of relief. ¡°thank goodness there¡¯s some harvest, not the worst.¡± with that, he reached out, picked up the two gray rabbits trapped inside, and casually threw them into the basket he had brought with him. these two rabbits were his harvest for the entire morning. after restoring the damaged trap, lu yuan concentrated his thoughts before noticing a newly emerged information screen: ¡°hunting traps (beginner)¡± and nodded thoughtfully. ¡°indeed, as long as i have some understanding of a skill, i can materialize it into an attribute panel, then slowly improve it by learning and gaining experience.¡± during this morning, lu yuan had visited thirteen trap locations. among them were ones destroyed by rain, intact ones, and others damaged by wild beasts. after his inspection, all these traps had been repaired. during this whole process, the new skill template in front of him appeared naturally, just like the ¡°archery¡± and ¡°knifemanship¡± templates that had appeared earlier. an complete attribute panel now appeared in lu yuan¡¯s mind. [name: lu yuan] [talent: immortality] [age: 16] [skills: hunting traps (beginner), crude knife technique (beginner), crude archery (beginner)] ¡°they are all just beginner-level,¡± lu yuan sighed after looking at the skill menu. ¡°but it¡¯s understandable. a sixteen-year-old youth who explored everything by himself ¨C having these beginner-level skills is already quite good.¡± shaking his head, he withdrew his thoughts and went on to check his traps and camouflage. after confirming they were well-hidden, he carried his earnings of the day and walked down the mountain. today, he caught two gray rabbits. after skinning and tanning them, their fur could be sold for forty to fifty cents. the remaining meat weighed about two to three catties, which was enough for him to eat for two days. this harvest was not as substantial as the wild yellow dog they had gotten in the past few days. however, this was the norm. the ferocious wild yellow dogs had to be hunted with one¡¯s life at stake. that was trading one¡¯s life for money. on the other hand, hunting gray rabbits with traps, though less rewarding, didn¡¯t require risking their lives, did they? being able to catch two rabbits today was considered good luck. in the past, it was common for traps to have no prey for three to five days. lu yuan was already content with having some harvest the moment he opened the door. Chapter 7 - Chapter 7: Chapter 7: Upgrades and Entering the City chapter 7: chapter 7: upgrades and entering the city translator: 549690339 whoosh¡ª a sharp sound broke the silence in the mountain forest, and an arrow swiftly pierced through the leaves and buried itself in the neck of a rabbit amidst the bushes. the rabbit struggled a couple of times before it was silenced. lu yuan pushed aside the weeds in front of him, picked up the rabbit, skillfully pulled out the arrow, put it back in the quiver, and tossed the prey into a basket on his back. after finishing all these tasks, he glanced at his skills in his mind: [crude archery (minor success)], and couldn¡¯t help but nod in satisfaction. ¡°in the past month, i¡¯ve fired thousands of arrows, killed hundreds of rabbits and wild chickens, and my archery skills have finally improved.¡± lu yuan pondered the feeling of shooting that arrow just now. although the minor success in archery was not much improved compared to the entry-level archery skills. however, at the moment of shooting the arrow just now, he still felt that his grasp of the bow and arrow¡¯s strength and capturing the prey with his eyes were much stronger than before. if an accurate evaluation had to be given, it would probably be one in a scale of ten for entry-level archery and three for minor success. in other words, his improvement had gone from one in ten to three in ten, which is quite remarkable progress. ¡°not only has my accuracy improved, but my vision and arm strength seem to have increased as well.¡± lu yuan casually pulled the bowstring in his hand and felt effortless. but one must know that before the skill improvement, it took all his might to pull the bowstring. but now, it seemed that only about eighty percent of the effort was needed to pull the bowstring that could only be opened at full strength before. ¡°is it because of the increase in my skill that my physical fitness has also improved?¡± lu yuan thought, looking forward to it. this was just the minor success of archery that he had improved. after the improvement, his arm strength had changed so much. however, in the game he prepared to play before crossing, the basic skill levels had four layers: entry-level, minor success, major success, and perfect. if his archery were to advance to major success or even perfect, how strong would the increase be on his body? ¡°i¡¯m afraid that when my archery skills are perfect, my strength would double, right? and this is just crude archery. if i could acquire martial arts secret books or even divine immortal techniques, how much improvement would there be?¡± lu yuan couldn¡¯t help getting excited just by thinking about it. although crossing over initially seemed like an unfortunate event to him, as his golden finger¡¯s effectiveness was discovered, lu yuan felt that things might not be so bad after all. it¡¯s terrible to be a struggling hunter. but if he became an immortal who could travel through heaven and earth, scale mountains and cross seas, and have longevity and freedom, that would be wonderful. ¡°so in the days to come, i must continue practicing archery.¡± lu yuan put away his bow and arrow, glanced at the quiet surrounding woods, and frowned, ¡°but rabbits on the west side of the mountain are almost all hunted down by me. to practice archery next, i have to go to the east side of the mountain.¡± ¡­ seven days later, lu yuan had to put down his bow and arrow, temporarily ending his rabbit-hunting routine, which allowed the rabbits on the east side of the mountain to breathe a sigh of relief. afterward, he only carried a short knife and a large basket, leaving the mountains where he had lived for more than a month. this time, lu yuan planned to go to dayu county at the foot of dayu mountain. since he had crossed over for so long, the original supply of rice had been completely consumed yesterday. as for salt, most of it had already been used up when he made smoked meat earlier. even if he was frugal, it had run out half a month ago. if it were not for the salt content in the smoked wild yellow dog meat he made, which was enough to replenish his body¡¯s consumption, the date to leave the mountains would have been advanced. after all, one could go without rice and just eat some wild vegetables and wild beast meat to replenish the energy. however, without salt, even a strong man with a good physique would lose strength and become weak. this situation was quite fatal for lu yuan, who lived in the deep mountain forest and was always accompanied by wild beasts. he could go hungry, but he couldn¡¯t be without strength, because that could lead to death. dayu county was located at the foot of dayu mountain, and the county town was situated by a large river, about ten miles away from the mountains. however, the place where lu yuan lived was somewhat remote, and to get to the county town, he had to take a detour of more than ten miles, making a total of more than 30 miles. so he set out at dawn, and when he arrived at the county town, it was already two hours later, around ten o¡¯clock in the morning. lu yuan, carrying his basket, wiped the sweat off his forehead and lined up at the gateway. the two gatekeepers took a look at his clothes and checked his baskets. seeing that it was full of pelts, they said with disgust, ¡°a hundred cents entry fee.¡± lu yuan took out a string of coins from his pocket and paid it. actually, the normal entry fee wouldn¡¯t be as much as a hundred cents. after all, he was just one person, not one of those merchant teams that made a living by transporting goods into the city. it was reasonable to charge more for them. ordinary vendors were usually charged only a few cents or up to ten cents, which was the maximum. however, lu yuan¡¯s current status was that of a mountain people hunter. mountain people hunters were unregistered citizens, not on the government¡¯s census rolls, had no identity, and belonged to black households. with such a status, even if someone killed you, the government wouldn¡¯t interfere. however, under normal circumstances, no one would specifically target mountain people hunters just for fun. after all, psychopathic killers were a minority among the vast crowd. but if no one targeted you, you still had to know your place. just like now, these two tax collectors took advantage of your black citizenship and asked for ten times the normal entry fee. would you pay or not? pay it, and be free of further distress. don¡¯t pay, and they would arrest you on the spot. the charge of having no identity as a black citizen would be enough for you to visit the prison. if you dare resist, you¡¯d face execution. however powerful a hunter is, can he really fight against the government? lessons from the past were painful, and lu yuan didn¡¯t want to risk his life to verify this again. after paying honestly, the two tax collectors didn¡¯t make it difficult for him and let him into the city. the market in the city was located in the east, with a large number of merchants and shops gathered there. lu yuan needed to go there to sell his pelts. he knew the way to the market from memory, and after wandering around the city for a while, he arrived at the marketplace. just as he was about to head to a store that bought pelts in the market, a few figures came over to him. ¡°biao ye.¡± seeing the leader, a burly man wearing a large jacket, lu yuan put a smile on his face and greeted him proactively. the man called ¡°biao ye¡± and his men were all members of the black wolf gang in dayu county. this gang controlled the mountain trade in the county, and all those who made a living from the mountains and wanted to do business in the city had to pay them protection fees. now, these people were here to collect the money. Chapter 8 - Chapter 8: Chapter 8: Exploitation chapter 8: chapter 8: exploitation translator: 549690339 ¡°big brother.¡± seeing lu yuan, especially the large basket on his back, the leading biao ye instantly revealed a hint of smile. he walked right up to the basket without any courtesies and opened it to take a look. he pushed aside the worthless rabbit skins, and when he saw the wild yellow dog skins inside, his eyes lit up, clicking his tongue in awe, ¡°three large pelts, you¡¯ve got quite a harvest in the past two months.¡± ¡°it¡¯s all thanks to biao ye¡¯s blessings.¡± lu yuan complimented him, but in his heart, he couldn¡¯t help but curse. he knew he was going to be bled dry by this skinflint. biao ye chuckled and put down the basket lid, saying, ¡°you know the rules, 30% protection fee for the goods. the pelts here are worth about two silver taels, so the protection fee this time is six cents.¡± ¡°the small fry understands.¡± upon hearing the price, lu yuan¡¯s heart bled. he hated not being able to cut biao ye down with a single stroke as he watched his grinning face. but after seeing the sturdy builds of biao ye and his gang of three or five lackeys, that crazy thought immediately vanished. although he is a hunter and quite skilled, it is obviously a joke to think he could single-handedly take on several burly men. not to mention, this is their old nest, the city where the black wolf gang has their base. if anything happened, the black wolf gang would be alerted immediately and arrive in no time. by then, the black wolf gang would cooperate with the government, and most likely he wouldn¡¯t even be able to leave the city before being caught. so, there was no way he could resist them. the only way to safely conduct business was to honestly pay the protection fee. honestly taking out 540 copper coins from his pocket, lu yuan counted them carefully and handed them over. one silver tael was equivalent to ten cents, which was nine hundred coppers. six cents was 540 coppers. he had prepared these copper coins before descending the mountain, knowing he couldn¡¯t avoid this layer of exploitation. ¡°here¡¯s the protection fee, biao ye, please accept it.¡± biao ye weighed the copper coins in his hand, glanced at his remaining coppers, and greed flashed in his eyes, but then it was gone. although there were still quite a few coins left in lu yuan¡¯s hand, possibly several hundred coppers, people in their line of work sought to make a steady profit in the long run. exacerbating that exploitation would be like draining the lake to catch fish, potentially driving this youngster out of business in the county town forever. after all, few could bear that type of skinning and bloodsucking exploitation. everyone needed to make a living. by forcing someone into destitution, leaving them without a single copper, how could they survive? don¡¯t they need to buy rice, salt, and other necessities? don¡¯t they need to save up for marrying or having children? what¡¯s more, the business of being a hunter meant mingling with dangerous beasts, constantly fighting and killing, so the profession tended to attract those with a bit of brutality and fierceness. if these people were not given a way out, they would naturally not give you one either. biao ye did not think that this seemingly timid little guy, who dutifully paid up, was really just as cowardly as he appeared on the surface. who knows, maybe the youngster was secretly plotting to stab him to death. so, the wise biao ye pocketed the money after confirming the protection fee was correct, and patted lu yuan¡¯s shoulder with his other hand, ¡°not bad, honestly paying up is better than those short-sighted people. alright, go about your business.¡± ¡°yes, i understand.¡± lu yuan continued to force a smile, suppressing his urge to cut down the guy in front of him on the spot as he managed to see them off. ¡­ after paying twice, no one else came to bother him. laden with the basket, lu yuan, who had paid his protection fee, headed straight to a tannery he was acquainted with. ¡°manager liu, have a look. these pelts are almost all whole and intact, with minimal damage and scratches, and the fur is very lustrous. they¡¯re quality goods.¡± among the businesses in the market, lu yuan took out several pelts from the basket and strained to promote them to the smiling and chubby manager in front of him. as he listened, manager liu nodded and hummed in agreement, but his eyes sparkled with cunning and avarice. after lu yuan finished speaking, manager liu touched the pelts, feeling their delicate texture, and leisurely said, ¡°indeed, they are of high quality, but these pelts are originally just low-grade pelts that aren¡¯t worth much. even if their quality is exceptional, that doesn¡¯t make them valuable. furthermore, some of these pelts are not even complete.¡± lu yuan¡¯s heart sank. the implication of the manager¡¯s words was clear: he was trying to lower the price. however, he had already anticipated this and was prepared to accept it as long as the price was not too low. as a result, he bluntly asked, ¡°how much are you willing to pay?¡± manager liu chuckled and held up two fingers, ¡°two silver taels.¡± this price was indeed about the market price, just as biao ye had mentioned earlier, but it was the lowest price. lu yuan was not going to accept this, so he shook his head, ¡°too low. you have to add more, otherwise i¡¯d rather sell them myself at a stand.¡± although the four connections tannery specialized in fur trade and was the largest in the county town, even monopolizing the transactions, the market also allowed individual vendors to set up their own stands. since lu yuan had already paid the protection fees to the city gate tax official and the black wolf gang, he abided by the rules. so, even though the tannery was backed by the black wolf gang, they couldn¡¯t force the black wolf gang to keep coming after someone who had already paid the protection fee. therefore, it was possible for lu yuan to set up his own stand to sell his pelts, but he would have to spend more on a place to stay in the city and that would be an extra expense. in order to save money and trouble, hunters usually went straight to big shops like the four connections tannery to make one-time large transactions. of course, if the tannery lowered the price too much, the hunters would naturally not be willing to sell at a loss. they would rather put themselves through the trouble and set up a stand to sell their goods. after all, these were pelts they had risked their lives for; who would be willing to sell them cheaply? manager liu understood this principle, so he hesitated for a moment and waved the two fingers he was holding up, ¡°i¡¯ll add another 200 coppers, at most.¡± two thousand copper coins. lu yuan weighed the offering, which was about the same as his past transaction prices. he knew it was the manager¡¯s bottom line and that he couldn¡¯t ask for more, so he nodded, ¡°alright, deal.¡± manager liu¡¯s face immediately relaxed, and he ordered his staff to take the pelts while he took out the money from the counter and handed it over, completing the transaction. lu yuan couldn¡¯t help but grumble inwardly. he paid 100 coppers for the city entrance tax and 540 coppers for the protection fee. his pelts sold for 2,000 coppers, leaving him with a profit of 1,360 copper coins. after his original self and his own transmigration, all his hard work over two months only earned him one tael and five cents. averaging it out, it was less than one tael a month. even the laborers in the city who did simple work earned over a tael a month. it¡¯s really¡­ ¡°as i thought, being a hunter and an illegal resident is truly not human!¡± lu yuan sighed in his heart, even more determined to get rid of his status restrictions as soon as possible. otherwise, doing things would be too restrictive, and it would be unbearable. Chapter 9 - Chapter 9: Chapter 9: The Suffering chapter 9: chapter 9: the suffering translator: 549690339 with a touch of frustration, lu yuan turned his back on the four directions trading house behind him. walking on the street with an empty bamboo basket on his back, the pelts he had just sold were all gone. the heavy pressure instantly dissipated, making his steps lighter. he turned his attention to a shop on the street and, with the five hundred cents he had just received, lu yuan bought ten pounds of coarse salt. due to its location deep inland and in a mountainous area, dayu county had high salt prices because bringing in salt from other places was a long journey. he had once heard from merchants at the tea stand that in prefectures and counties with salt farms along the coast, a pound of salt could be purchased for just over a dozen cents. compared to the fifty cents per pound here, their salt was basically given away for free. ¡°and yet they sell this coarse salt full of impurities, so full you can even see rocks. with such poor quality and so much fakes mixed in, how dare they charge this much?¡± lu yuan looked at the coarse salt in the jar. the salt was both black and yellow and looked like large pieces of uneven sand. it was really hard to imagine that a person who ate this kind of salt year after year wouldn¡¯t suffer health issues. however, thinking that this was ancient times where the average lifespan was probably only about thirty to forty years. ¡°with such a short lifespan, even if there were health issues from eating this, a person might die before they actually manifested,¡± he thought. having figured this out, lu yuan felt a bit relieved. however, he had made up his mind that once back home, he would certainly filter these coarse salts again. whatever others did with their salt, he himself was an immortal, capable of living as long as heaven itself, and he was not one of those short-lived ordinary people. if he died of disease caused by eating salt after having eternal life, it would be truly ridiculous. what he set his mind to, he did. in order to safeguard his life, lu yuan bought some filtering pottery and gauze in the market, as well as some axes, chisels, and hammers for craftsmen along the way. although he had been in this world for two months and had lived in the cave in the mountains for quite a while, he had to admit that it was truly unbearable to live in such a draughty, broken cave. the former owner of his body was a wild child who grew up in the mountains and lived like a savage, eating raw meat and drinking blood, so he might not have felt anything wrong with living such a hard life in the cave. however, lu yuan was a person who had crossed over from modern times. although his status before crossing over was merely that of an ordinary person. so how did the material conditions in the modern era compare with those in ancient times? even ordinary people today enjoy a variety of material resources that would not be out of place in ancient times, or at least at the level of a wealthy landowner¡¯s lifestyle. for a pampered modern man to adapt to life in the wilderness might be bearable for a day or two, but who could stand it for a long time? ¡°i¡¯m tired of sleeping on a hide mat on the ground every day. i want to sleep on a bed, a soft, cozy bed. i want a tea table, a chair, a cabinet, and all the other amenities that i can get,¡± lu yuan said, laughing as he thought about the life he had been leading these days, unable to stop tears from welling up in his eyes. he really couldn¡¯t understand what the original lu was thinking. was it really so hard to make a bed to sleep on? was spending everyday laying a skin mat next to a fire and sleeping on the ground really so great? was he not afraid of catching cold, getting rheumatism, or feeling the chill in his bones? although it seemed from the past few days that his body was not affected by sleeping on the ground, and this habit did not seem to have any bad results. but instinct, both psychologically and physiologically, made it impossible for lu yuan to accept this poor life condition. so, now that he was in the city and had money in his pocket, he certainly wouldn¡¯t deprive himself of anything. however, the money he had was still a bit short, so he decided to buy tools and make his own furniture, such as beds and chairs. it was impossible to buy everything. even if he wanted to buy, he would need someone willing to deliver it. dayu mountain was vast and filled with dangerous wild beasts, and ordinary people would not dare to venture into it. so instead of spending money on impractical things, it was better to buy tools and do it himself. although there might be a shortage of other things in the mountains, there was an inexhaustible supply of wood. after buying a pile of miscellaneous items, filling more than half of his basket, the two thousand cents lu yuan had just earned were almost half spent. he had five hundred cents left and planned to save it, using it as a reserve fund just as his former self did. indeed, his former self had a small vault, the result of his two years as a hunter, amounting to a total of eight silver taels. it took two years to save eight silver taels. thinking of his predecessor¡¯s hard life in order to save money, lu yuan felt a pang of sympathy in his heart. the life of a hunter was too hard. the former lu, in order to save money, even lived like a wild man, eating and dressing minimally. this wasn¡¯t because he enjoyed being close to nature or had a high level of spiritual cultivation. all of this behavior was based on a simple logic ¨C save enough money, then buy a wife. the occupation of a hunter was too dangerous, and one could be killed by a wild beast in the mountains at any time. their average lifespan was quite short. moreover, because they did not have a registered status, they were unregistered residents, and there were very few channels to get an income. for those with a proper status, even if they were laborers in the city, they could earn one or two silver taels a month. if they were frugal, they could save five or six taels a year. but for a hunter, a steady income of half a silver tael a month was already a lot. even if they were frugal all year round, they could at most save three or four taels. with these conditions, naturally good families¡¯ daughters would not look at them. so wanting to find a wife for a hunter was just wishful thinking. the idea of passing on the family lineage is deeply rooted in the genes of every living being and is an instinct. not to mention the influence of culture. so the original lu, in order to marry a wife, began preparing two years ago. since he couldn¡¯t court a good family¡¯s daughter and he wanted to find a wife, the only way was to buy one. according to the current market situation, the purchase of a wife would cost at least sixty taels of silver. if it was a little more, over a hundred taels was not impossible. given the original saving speed of four taels a year, it would take at least fifteen years to save enough money to buy a wife. by then, lu would already be twenty-nine, fast approaching thirty. in these times of low life expectancy, by the time one reached thirty, they might even be a grandfather already. ¡°working hard for a whole lifetime, only to take a wife at the age of becoming a grandfather,¡± he said. remembering the life plan of his original body¡¯s owner, a complex feeling welled up in lu yuan¡¯s heart, and he didn¡¯t know how to describe it. in the end, he just sighed and said, ¡°how bitter.¡± Chapter 10 - Chapter 10: Chapter 10: Recognizing Characters and Tea Stall chapter 10: chapter 10: recognizing characters and tea stall translator: 549690339 after selling his goods and making his purchases, lu yuan¡¯s errand in the city was just about done. he glanced at the sky, and saw that the sun was at its highest point, and it was the hottest time of the day. traveling at this time would surely make him sweat several pounds. carrying a heavy load on his back under the scorching sun and climbing back up the mountain was not a delightful task. as he had been busy all morning, his stomach was grumbling hungrily as well, so without hesitation, he followed his usual routine and arrived at a modest tea stall in the south of the city. the tea stall was called chen¡¯s tea shop, with a white cloth banner bearing its name hung as a sign outside. lu yuan stared at the banner for a while, repeating the words ¡°chen¡¯s tea shop¡± over and over again in his mind. after transmigrating to this world, he initially didn¡¯t realize his problem, but after entering the city and seeing various shop signs, he suddenly discovered that he couldn¡¯t recognize the characters of this world. although this world seemed to be similar to his previous life¡¯s ancient times, with similar social systems and local customs, the similarities only went so far. leaving aside other differences, the writing of this world was very different from that of his previous life. although the characters in this world bore some resemblance to the chinese characters from his previous life, both their radicals and pronunciations were completely different. their appearances might be similar, but their meanings were vastly different. this was not a simple difference between simplified and traditional chinese characters; it was more like the difference between chinese and japanese, but even greater. take the words ¡°chen¡¯s tea shop¡± for example; if lu yuan hadn¡¯t asked the shop owner, he would have racked his brains in vain to figure out what they meant. by extension, this meant that the characters he knew from his previous life had become useless in this one. he would have to learn to read again from scratch. ¡°it seems like i¡¯ll need to find a tutor to teach me how to read when i get the chance,¡± lu yuan thought to himself, immediately followed by a headache. learning to read was no simple matter. with fees for the tutor, stationery costs, and the inability to be productive while studying, it certainly added up to a significant expense. although he had some savings now, it was questionable whether his eight silver taels would be enough to cover it all. but if he couldn¡¯t read, he would be unable to delve deeply into this world, which was also absolutely unacceptable. ¡°there are still three or four months until the new year, when the heavy snow will block the mountain and hunting will be impossible. i¡¯ll come back to the city then and ask how much it will cost to enroll in a private school to learn to read. i hope my silver will be enough by then,¡± lu yuan calculated in his heart. after taking another look at the words ¡°chen¡¯s tea shop¡± and making sure he wouldn¡¯t forget, he finally entered the tea stall. there was a simple kitchen at the stall, where the shopkeeper prepared some tea and snacks. a large tent was set up outside, under which seven or eight wooden tables were placed. the tables and chairs were old and shabby, with stains and grooves all over, showing their age. such roadside stalls had always been popular among the lower class. laborers working in the city, farmers and hunters entering the city, all couldn¡¯t afford to go to fancy restaurants or teahouses, so they could only resort to these small roadside shops for their meals and drinks. because the stall catered to the lower class, all the food and drink were very cheap. the shopkeeper¡¯s homemade rice wine, half diluted with water, cost three cents a bowl. coarse tea brewed with mixed tea residues cost one cent for three bowls. plain yangchun noodles cost three cents a bowl. if you wanted some meat slices, it would be ten cents a bowl. there were also small dishes of beans, peanuts, and melon seeds for one cent a plate. moreover, there were other items like pastries, meat pies, and boiled pork, with varying prices. lu yuan always enjoyed having some meat in his meals, and considering the long journey back to the mountain, he needed to be full to have enough energy. so as soon as he entered the tea stall, he immediately called out, ¡°old chen, give me two meat pies, a bowl of yangchun noodles, a plate of braised meat, and a bowl of rice wine.¡± speaking, he took out fifty cents and handed it over. meat pies cost seven cents each, a plate of braised meat thirty cents, and including the yangchun noodles and rice wine, the total cost was exactly fifty cents. with just this meal alone, a regular family¡¯s daily expenses would be gone. businessmen had always valued customers, and the original owner of the body had frequented chen¡¯s tea shop every time he entered the city. although each visit was separated by a month or two, there were still nearly ten visits a year. over the years, old chen had come to recognize him as a regular customer. so when he saw lu yuan, he immediately smiled and said, ¡°alright, sir, please have a seat; your meal will be ready shortly.¡± the meal was served quickly. after all, the food was pre-prepared; the meat pies and braised meat just needed to be heated up. the rice wine could be served as is, and the yangchun noodles only needed a quick blanch and a sprinkle of salt and chopped green onions. they were all simple dishes. having been busy all day, lu yuan was starving, so as soon as the food arrived, he wolfed it down. in no time at all, the food in front of him was completely gone. with his stomach full, he picked up his wine bowl, took a light sip, and then leisurely pricked up his ears, listening to the idle chatter of the people around him. choosing to eat at a tea stall like this wasn¡¯t just about the cheap fare. all sorts of people mixed together in the tea stall: city laborers, farmers from outside the city, merchants traveling from place to place, and even occasionally down-and-out martial artists clad in sturdy clothing. people from every corner of the world could be found gathered here. as a result, news from all over circulated here as well. any news happening within the city or any major events happening in other places could generally be heard in a tea stall like this. ¡°i heard that liu, the rich merchant in the east of the city, has taken in a beautiful young concubine who looks like a heavenly immortal,¡± said a laborer-looking man. ¡°old liu is already over sixty, who knows if he can still handle it, but at his age, having such a lovely young wife really makes people envious.¡± ¡°what¡¯s envious about it? that concubine of his was an eastern city tofu beauty. she¡¯s only fourteen now, but i saw her when she was selling tofu previously, her skin was as soft and tender as tofu, white and delicate, it made people want to touch her just by looking at her,¡± said a ruffian with a thin, monkey-like face and a lewd expression. ¡°heh, look at your character; you think you could touch her? you¡¯d be better off doing more good deeds in this life, and trying for a better next life,¡± said another man. as those words were spoken, the stall erupted in laughter. everyone looked at the lewd ruffian and jovially teased him, their fatigue from the day seemingly swept away in the laughter. lu yuan couldn¡¯t help but laugh as well. an old husband and a young wife had always been a hot topic among gossips, something that transcended time and remained ever popular. the atmosphere within the tea stall gradually became lively. ¡°ah¡ª¡ª¡± suddenly, a scream rang out from the street, followed by a flurry of chaotic noise, as people scattered, running and barking, smashing and crashing. this commotion instantly attracted the attention of those in the tea stall. lu yuan also turned his head to look and tensed up. he saw a man in blue clothes wielding a long sword; with a single leap, he swung his sword and a man in black clothes in front of him spurted blood and fell to the ground. in broad daylight, someone was actually killing someone else on the street! Chapter 11 - Chapter 11: Chapter 11: Killing in the Streets chapter 11: chapter 11: killing in the streets translator: 549690339 ¡°zhang biao, you¡¯ve exploited and oppressed the villagers. today, i, ma ji qing, will enforce justice on behalf of the heavens, and rid the people of dayu county of the menace you¡¯ve become.¡± after finishing off a black-clothed man with a single sword stroke, the blue-clothed swordsman didn¡¯t let up. he raised his weapon and approached the burly man in front of him, speaking coldly. watching from the side at a tea stall, lu yuan looked at the man targeted by the blue-clothed swordsman, his expression a mix of surprise. this man was none other than biao ye, who had just extorted 540 cents from him earlier in the morning as protection money. ¡®didn¡¯t he have the backing of the black wolf gang? he was pretty arrogant in the morning; how come in just a short while, he¡¯s found himself in such trouble?¡¯ ¡®and this enemy seems like no pushover¡­¡¯ he recalled the scene just now: the swordsman by the name of ma had flown in from the street, leaped effortlessly across at least five or six meters. in just a few short jumps, he covered more than a hundred meters. moreover, his sword speed was so fast. the experienced brawler in front of him didn¡¯t even have time to put up a defense before his throat was slit. even the olympic champions lu yuan had seen in his previous life wouldn¡¯t be able to match this agility. ¡°so¡­this must be martial arts, definitely martial arts.¡± having travelled through time himself, and having gained a golden finger, lu yuan had no reason to believe that this world was an ordinary one. even if this world had martial arts secret books and miraculous methods for immortals, it would all be quite normal to him. he wouldn¡¯t be surprised at all. however, what did surprise him was that he¡¯d barely been here in this world for very long, and he¡¯d already encountered a martial artist from the legendary jianghu. alerted by the commotion, the pedestrians on the street had long fled to safety, leaving a wide-open space large enough for the swordsman and biao ye to carry on their confrontation. every few steps along the street, one could see a corpse either stabbed through the heart or with their throat slashed. there were four bodies in total, sprawled along this small street in the south of the city. a kill every ten steps, leaving no trace over thousands of miles. this must be an example of it. with the ruthless killing of four people, the swordsman named ma ji qing, blood dripping from his long sword, stepped closer and closer to biao ye. black wolf gang¡¯s.¡± ¡°don¡¯t¡­don¡¯t kill me. i have the backing of the black wolf gang,¡± biao ye said, his face turning pale with fear. he stepped backward while loudly proclaiming, ¡°our gang leader is a disciple of the iron sword sect. if you kill me, you¡¯ll be provoking the iron sword sect.¡± however, ma ji qing wasn¡¯t frightened by the threat and just sneered as he continued to close in. his speed had slowed down considerably compared to earlier, and he no longer used the seemingly effortless acrobatics of his light skill to leap forward. instead, he chose to step forward one step at a time, as if he wasn¡¯t in a hurry to kill biao ye but rather wanted to torture him psychologically before the final blow. ¡°i have money, i¡¯ll give you money,¡± biao ye said, his voice trembling in fear. seeing that his own background couldn¡¯t scare off the swordsman, biao ye changed tactics, pleading, ¡°one thousand silver taels, no, two thousand silver taels. spare my life, and all my money will be yours.¡± ¡°money in exchange for life?¡± upon hearing the offer, ma ji qing seemed to be swayed and paused. seeing this, biao ye¡¯s face lit up in relief. however, the next moment, a flash of murderous intent crossed ma ji qing¡¯s face. ¡°money, huh? you think everything can be solved with money? today, you will die.¡± with that, ma ji qing raised his sword and lunged at biao ye. ¡°go to hell!¡± biao ye saw that even after offering money, the swordsman still refused to spare him, and he was both fearful and angry. at this life-and-death moment, he hardened his heart, threw his hands forward, and suddenly a dozen dark, shadowy figures flew from his sleeves toward ma ji qing. without even looking, he turned and ran towards the distance. however, ma ji qing seemed to be prepared for this move. facing the hidden weapons, his sword danced, producing a series of clangs, and the dozen plus darts fell to the ground. at this point, biao ye had only escaped about ten meters. with a few leaps, ma ji qing quickly caught up. his long sword stabbed forward, and before biao ye could even react, he was struck in the chest. ¡°ah¡ª¡ª¡± with a scream, biao ye fell to the ground. ma ji qing sheathed his sword, then crouched down and searched biao ye¡¯s body, taking out a large money bag. he glanced at the frightened people hiding in the corners of the room, his expression cold. with a leap, he ran in a certain direction. watching the fading figure, the people who had been hiding nearby slowly emerged, trembling in fear. they looked at the corpses of biao ye and the others, their expressions varied but mostly frightened. the crowd gathered around the bodies, not daring to get too close. ¡°who was that man just now?¡± ¡°judging from his moves, he must be a martial artist in the world of swordsmanship.¡± ¡°what did biao ye do to provoke such a desperate man?¡± ¡°hmph, zhang biao always bullied and oppressed people. it¡¯s not unusual for someone to seek revenge.¡± ¡°shush, do you have a death wish? the black wolf gang won¡¯t let this go easily. that swordsman doesn¡¯t care about your identity, aren¡¯t you afraid they¡¯ll vent their anger on you?¡± in the teahouse, the tea guests who had witnessed everything began to chat after everything had settled. lu yuan listened for a while, but when he noticed that none of the information being shared was of any value, he stopped listening. picking up his bowl, he drank the last of his wine. with his backpack slung over his shoulder, he turned and headed for the south gate of the city. the recent events had greatly shocked lu yuan. the dangers of this world had been brutally revealed to him. jianghu martial arts, seeking revenge and fighting. even in broad daylight, in a bustling marketplace, those martial artists didn¡¯t hesitate to kill people in the streets. more importantly, all five of biao ye¡¯s men were skilled fighters. but when facing that blue-clothed swordsman named ma ji qing, they couldn¡¯t even resist and were easily killed like chickens. is there such a big gap between martial artists and ordinary people? ¡°and what biao ye said in the end, about his black wolf gang leader being a disciple of the iron sword sect¡­ is that the legendary martial arts sect? can martial arts be learned there?¡± lu yuan recalled biao ye¡¯s words before his death and couldn¡¯t help feeling excited. having crossed over into this world with the advantage of an attribute template, he naturally yearned to become a martial artist. now that he had finally heard some news, he couldn¡¯t help but have his heart set on it. ¡°but even if i want to find a sect to learn from, that¡¯s something i can only try for later. as a poverty-stricken hunter like myself, i¡¯m afraid nobody would be willing to take me in if i simply showed up.¡± lu yuan didn¡¯t think that martial arts sects were charitable and would accept just anyone. joining a sect would require a clean background, a wealthy family, and extraordinary talent. otherwise, why would they accept you? there¡¯s a difference between tv dramas and reality. after living in this world for several months, lu yuan had come to deeply understand this fact. Chapter 12 - Chapter 12: Chapter 12: The Outside World is Too Dangerous chapter 12: chapter 12: the outside world is too dangerous translator: 549690339 soon, lu yuan arrived at the south gate of the city. normally, gatekeepers only inspected those entering, not those leaving, so he didn¡¯t encounter any problems and easily left the city. the sun above was still scorching hot, and it was around one or two in the afternoon, the hottest part of the day. but lu yuan could no longer care about that. being hot was far better than staying in the city and facing troubles. ¡°the black wolf gang members were killed, and this gang that controls all the trade in dayu county will not let it go.¡± and the county government office too. under broad daylight, someone killing in the city streets, even if the master of the government office is corrupt and incompetent, he absolutely won¡¯t allow such a blatant challenge to the imperial authority to happen. so, the joint search and elimination by the black wolf gang and the officials will most likely happen soon.¡± lu yuan tightened the luggage on his back, and his pace quickened on the flat official road. the reason he did not want to stay in the city was to avoid these problems. the swordsman in blue, named ma jiqing, might belong to some unknown sect, but his sword techniques were indeed sharp and extraordinary. if the black wolf gang members and the government officials were at the same level as those like zhang biao, then even if they had more people, they still might not be able to defeat the enemy. against these martial arts swordsmen who risk their lives, lu yuan did not think that the gang members and the greedy government officials would honestly pursue them to the death. ¡°the upper-class people have to consider their dignity and maintain their rule, so they will absolutely not let ma jiqing off. but those people at the bottom, why risk their lives to pursue such a dangerous person?¡± lu yuan had seen many tv shows and novels about such matters in his previous life, so he had some shallow understanding of the dirty tricks played: ¡°in the end, it is the common people who will suffer.¡± ¡°sigh, this wicked feudal society.¡± lu yuan sighed and looked back at the city gate, seemingly able to see the miserable scenes that were about to happen in the city. ¡°hurry up and seal off the city gates immediately, no one is allowed to enter or leave,¡± just at that moment, a team of officials and a group of men dressed in black rushed out from the city and quickly sealed off the city gate. one of the leading arresters shouted: ¡°the murderer is likely still in the city. the county master has ordered that this bandit must be caught to demonstrate the power of the law.¡± among the group of men in black, a fierce-looking man added: ¡°our gang leader has said, whoever captures the bandit who killed zhang biao will be rewarded with a thousand taels of silver. if we don¡¯t kill him, how can we continue to survive in the jianghu?¡± as they spoke, these government officials and gang members teamed up to seal off the city gate. some of them approached the traveling businessmen who were about to leave and asked menacingly: ¡°tell me, do you know someone named ma jiqing? what, you don¡¯t know him? i think you¡¯re lying since you look so guilty. come on, arrest him and search him for any stolen goods.¡± ¡°yes!¡± several officials and black wolf gang members laughed and surrounded the small businessmen they had just detained at the gate. since the murderer is dangerous, they didn¡¯t dare to look for trouble and risk their lives. their masters didn¡¯t dare to mess with the powerful, but these common people, who could they bully if not them? although the county master and the gang leader had lost face, for the people at the bottom, this was just the beginning of a carnival. if they didn¡¯t take advantage of this great opportunity to squeeze every last drop from these commoners, then they would truly be letting this golden opportunity slip away. from a distance, lu yuan¡¯s face twitched as he felt a sense of relief. ¡°if i had been just a little bit later, i would have been the one detained there, right?¡± seeing those people who had all their belongings confiscated and were even treated as suspects and likely to be sent to prison, he felt a chill. he immediately left without daring to stay any longer, turning and quickly walking away. he left the area around the city gate quickly, and when he could no longer see it behind him, he started running. after running for three to five miles and feeling that he had completely left the county town¡¯s area, lu yuan finally stopped. while catching his breath, he wiped off the sweat on his face. ¡°this world is too dangerous with not only street-killing swordsmen, but also greedy officials and gangs. compared to the brutal and terrifying human beings outside, the wild beasts in the mountains are much lovelier.¡± originally, he was unhappy and discontented with being a hunter. but at this moment, after his experience in the city today, lu yuan felt that being a hunter might not be so bad after all. at least, he wouldn¡¯t have to worry about encountering sudden disasters and hardships on normal days. being confronted by a group of government officials, wrongly accused, and beaten up. and then being thrown into prison, having his property confiscated, and becoming a prisoner at their mercy. in the mountains, he only had to deal with the cunning but not too smart wild beasts. could the wild beasts ever be more dangerous than humans? ¡°once i return to the mountain, i¡¯ll immediately begin closed-door cultivation. i won¡¯t leave until i¡¯ve maxed out both my crude archery and crude knife technique skills, and have enough strength to protect myself,¡± lu yuan thought to himself. this time, he had bought a whole ten pounds of salt, enough for a grown man to eat for two or three years. he had originally thought it was just in case, but now it seemed like a wise move. there are endless wild beasts in the mountains, as well as plenty of fruits and vegetables, all of which can sustain a person¡¯s needs. for a hunter, as long as they aren¡¯t restrained by salt, they can continue to survive. ¡°anyway, i have an infinite life span. even if i stay in the mountains for a few years, it would just feel like the blink of an eye for a normal person.¡± the conditions in the mountains might be harsh, requiring him to endure a few more years of hardship. however, when compared to the alternative, suffering a little is much better than losing his life for no reason.¡± ¡­ lu yuan¡¯s physical condition was still quite strong. walking along the official road for more than ten miles to the south while carrying more than thirty pounds of weight only took him a little over an hour. even after walking so far with such a heavy load, he only felt slightly tired but not unbearable. the easy-to-walk official road soon reached its end. at a small village, lu yuan looked at the rugged and steep mountain road that branched out from the official road and felt a sense of familiarity. reaching this point marked the area of dayu mountain. finally, he had returned to his own territory. ¡°but before i return to the mountain, i need to go to the village to buy some rice first.¡± lu yuan tightened the luggage on his back and followed a fork in the road towards the village. although he had just said that there were wild beasts and fruits and vegetables in the mountains, people could not eat these things all the time. when it was time to eat rice, he still had to eat rice; otherwise, he would be too hard on himself. Chapter 13 - Chapter 13: Chapter 13: The Black Wolf Enters the Mountain chapter 13: chapter 13: the black wolf enters the mountain translator: 549690339 the weather was gradually getting colder. in the mountains, the cold always arrived earlier than outside. although it was only october, the plants outside the mountain were withering and frost was beginning to form. but within the mountain, the first snowfall of the year had already begun. roar! a leopard leapt down from the tree, like a gust of wind, pouncing at the prey before it. the winter had now begun. as a fierce beast in the mountains, the leopard¡¯s stomach was not yet full, and its body fat was still not thick enough. that was not good. without sufficient body fat, it would not be able to survive the harsh winter. it might even die of starvation in the middle of hibernation. so, the days leading up to winter were the last chance for the animals in the mountains to accumulate body fat for the winter. before it was a grey rabbit, which looked a bit silly, squatting beside a tree and continuously moving in circles. although the rabbit was not very heavy, at least it was meat, and it could still help to stave off hunger. following the principle of not wasting, the leopard decided to swallow this silly prey in one bite, sparing it pain. as if sensing the imminent danger, the grey rabbit below the tree heard the wind and saw the leopard pouncing. its fur bristled up and it jumped. but halfway through the jump, a barely visible rope pulled it back. its airborne body slammed onto the ground with a thud. with no way to escape, the grey rabbit¡¯s red eyes stared at the approaching leopard, despair flashing in its eyes. in response, the leopard remained unmoved. as a top predator since birth, it had seen the desperate eyes of its prey many times before, and it was all too familiar. it landed next to the tree, moving gracefully and slowly towards the grey rabbit, preparing to feast on its prey. whoosh¡ª a breaking sound came from the side, followed by a white spot flying across the snowy ground. seemingly sensing something, the leopard¡¯s fur bristled up just like the grey rabbit¡¯s had. but the sudden attack was too swift. just as the leopard attempted to jump away and dodge, it was already too late. thud! the arrow pierced through its neck, breaking its thick skin and passing through the inner muscles, emerging from the other side. ¡°whimper¡­¡± intense pain surged from its neck, and although the leopard wanted to cry out, it was instead forced to let out a weak whimper due to the pain. but soon its suffering came to an end. whoosh, whoosh, whoosh! several more breaking sounds came, and more arrows pierced the leopard¡¯s skull and heart with deadly accuracy, snuffing out its life in an instant. this apex predator of the mountain had paid for its greed and carelessness with its life. ¡°after three months, i¡¯ve finally leveled up my archery skill,¡± lu yuan emerged from his hiding place and walked over to the lifeless leopard. at that moment, he felt a tingling sensation in his body and then noticed that both his strength and vision had improved. his vision was now so good that he could see a tiny insect a hundred meters away. he nodded in satisfaction and let his consciousness sink into his mind. [name: lu yuan] [talent: immortality] [age: 16] [skills: hunting traps (beginner), crude knife technique (entry), crude archery technique(advanced)] ¡°my archery skill is improving smoothly. at this rate, perhaps in another half a year, i¡¯ll be able to elevate my crude archery technique to the perfect level. but even so, i still don¡¯t feel secure,¡± lu yuan withdrew his attention from the attribute panel in his mind and sighed as he felt the changes in his body. what he had witnessed with his own eyes in the county town that day¡­ that swordsman called ma ji qing, with the ability to move along roofs and walls, could kill with just ten steps. zhang biao and his group were also considered fierce in the eyes of ordinary people. but when facing ma ji qing, who possessed martial arts skills, they had no power to resist and were killed one by one. the difference between having martial arts and not having martial arts is just that significant. ¡°although i¡¯ve greatly increased my strength after the transformation of my archery skills, i can now throw a punch with about 300 pounds of force. at the same time, my reaction speed has also improved somewhat. now even empty-handed, i should be able to fight three to five people my age.¡± but this enhancement is still far from enough.¡± lu yuan shook his head. maybe ordinary people who can fight three or five people are already impressive in the eyes of others, enough to be a local bully in the village. but such a level of strength is not enough in front of true experts. he recalled the performance of ma ji qing a few months ago and couldn¡¯t help but comment: ¡°i guess i¡¯m just enough for him to take down with a single sword.¡± yes, his five months of hard work and he still couldn¡¯t withstand a single sword strike. reality was just that cruel. ¡°so, my strength is still not enough. i need to train on the mountain for another two years. maybe when my archery and knife skills are leveled up to the maximum, i should be able to fight ten ordinary people, right?¡± lu yuan thought and couldn¡¯t help but comfort himself in this way. although being able to fight ten ordinary people couldn¡¯t do much against a martial arts expert. ¡­ picking up the slowly cooling cheetah on the ground and holding the frightened gray rabbit, lu yuan turned and walked back to his cave. as time went by, especially as the sun climbed high overhead, the first snow from last night began to melt slowly. snow melted into the soil, making the mountain road muddy and even more difficult to walk. splash! lu yuan lifted his leg from the mud with difficulty and stepped onto the grass ahead, diving into the bushes, and let out a sigh of relief in his heart. ¡°i finally left that muddy road behind, and now the grass on the road ahead, even if wet, is much easier to walk on since it won¡¯t get stuck.¡± he wiped the sweat from his forehead and looked around habitually. there were dangers everywhere in the mountain, and poisonous insects and fierce animals could be lurking anywhere. if one is not vigilant enough, they could easily lose their life. ¡°huh¡­ what is that?¡± suddenly, as lu yuan¡¯s gaze swept across the foot of the mountain, his eyes instantly became focused. he saw a group of people dressed in black and holding weapons walking through the forest about a mile ahead. with the enhancement of his archery skills, his eyesight had also improved, so even from a mile away, he still recognized the people¡¯s attire. ¡°black wolf gang.¡± lu yuan quickly identified these people, but was confused: ¡°what are they doing in the mountains? and it seems like they¡¯re looking for something.¡± after noticing this, he didn¡¯t hesitate in the slightest and, crouching down, turned around and left the area. no matter what the black wolf gang was looking for, one thing is certain, it won¡¯t be of any benefit to him and might bring big trouble even. so it¡¯s better to avoid them if possible. ¡°this shortcut is not an option anymore. for safety, i should take a longer route back to my cave.¡± thinking this, lu yuan dropped the cheetah and grey rabbit in one of his food storage areas, then quickly and quietly climbed the mountain path. the strong smell of blood from the cheetah would leave too many traces. carrying it all the way would inevitably be discovered by the black wolf gang and they might chase after him. for safety¡¯s sake, he had to put down his prey first. ¡°now that it¡¯s snowing in the mountains, the meat of the cheetah won¡¯t rot due to the cold. i just hope that other wild animals won¡¯t eat it when i come to pick it up in a few days.¡± lu yuan sighed in his heart, as he had already walked four or five miles, leaving the black wolf gang far behind. Chapter 14 - Chapter 14: Chapter 14: Uninvited Guest chapter 14: chapter 14: uninvited guest translator: 549690339 after spending more than an hour and covering nearly ten miles of mountain road, lu yuan finally bypassed those black wolf gang members and returned to the vicinity of his cave dwelling. whoosh! in the cold stream, he grabbed a handful of icy water to wipe his face, and took the opportunity to wash away the bloodstains on his body. the freezing water from the melting early snow merged into the stream, bringing a bone-piercing chill. the exhaustion from lu yuan¡¯s long trek through the mountain was immediately relieved by this cold sensation, and he instantly felt much more refreshed. after briefly cleaning himself up, he picked up his bow and arrow and began walking towards his cave dwelling. the distance between the stream and the cave was very short¡ªit was only about a hundred steps away. however, when he was still ten steps away from the entrance, his gaze swept across the doorway, and his attention fell on the vines he used for concealment. in that instant, lu yuan¡¯s eyes narrowed. ¡°someone has been here.¡± he noticed that the dense vines originally arranged meticulously by him had shifted positions. although someone had tried to reset the placement of some of the vines, they were now different from how he had left them before. seeing this, lu yuan immediately took several steps back, staying far away from the vines. ¡°who entered my cave?¡± almost instinctively, he thought of the black wolf gang members he had encountered earlier. although the black wolf gang controlled the trade in dayu county, they were only interested in the terminal commerce in the county town, and showed no interest in the mountain where goods originated from. in the past few years, there had been no reports of any black wolf gang members venturing into the mountains. but now, a large group of black wolf gang members have entered dayu mountain, seemingly searching for someone, there must be a reason for this abnormal situation. ¡°those black wolf gang members were chasing whoever entered my cave.¡± lu yuan did not think it was the black wolf gang that had entered his cave, because, with their overwhelming numbers and domineering attitude, they would have had no reason to discreetly cover their tracks by fixing the vines at the entrance. the timing of someone entering his cave and the arrival of the black wolf gang in the mountains was too close to be a coincidence. having figured this out, lu yuan looked at his cave dwelling hidden by the vines, appearing somewhat indecisive. he had always hated trouble. he possessed an infinite lifespan, and even if life was tough at the moment, he believed that things would eventually get better, and there would be a brighter future waiting for him. but even after hiding in the mountains, trouble still seemed to find him. ¡°trouble comes uninvited.¡± lu yuan murmured in a low voice. suddenly, he raised the hunting bow in his hand, nocking an arrow and releasing it. the arrow shot out and pierced right through the vines. ding! a crisp metallic sound echoed, and a figure burst through the vines, quickly emerging from behind them. however, just as the figure reached mid-air, a series of whooshing noises sounded, signaling the arrival of three more arrows, all accurately aimed at him. although they could not find any leverage in mid-air, the figure somehow managed to twist their body around while simultaneously swinging a long sword in their hand. with several swipes, two arrows were cut down. but the arrows came fast and furiously, and while he managed to deflect two of them, the third one hit him directly in the shoulder. the enormous impact sent him flying backwards in mid-air before crashing down to the ground. yet before he could even land, several more arrows came ¡°whooshing¡± towards him, hitting his chest and thigh. one even pierced through his neck. ¡°heh heh¡­¡± the figure collapsed on the ground, blood gushing from his throat. after struggling for a moment, he was silent. seeing this from a distance, lu yuan¡¯s eyes slightly narrowed. although he had shot down the man, he did not rashly approach directly. instead, he raised his hand and continued to shoot another arrow towards the motionless figure on the ground in the distance. with a puff, the arrowhead pierced through the man¡¯s temple and entered his brain directly. this time, even if he were the king of heaven¡¯s father, he couldn¡¯t be more dead. ¡°phew, that was close.¡± after confirming the man¡¯s death, lu yuan put down his hunting bow, wiped his sweat, and looked frightened. if it wasn¡¯t for his earlier vigilance and maintaining a safe distance from the cave entrance when he discovered something was wrong, he might have been killed directly by the ambushing person as he entered the cave. thinking about the speed at which the man swept through the air earlier, his sharp swordsmanship, and his bizarre body movements in mid-air, lu yuan couldn¡¯t help but palpitate. ¡°this is definitely a martial arts expert.¡± being sure of this, he hurriedly went up and came to the corpse on the ground. when he approached and could see the man¡¯s face clearly, lu yuan froze and recognized, ¡°ma ji qing.¡± this man was actually the martial arts swordsman who killed zhang biao and four others on the street that day. ¡°how could he be here?¡± he wondered, but soon thought, ¡°that¡¯s right, there are still black wolf gang members in the mountains. could it be that he was chased by the black wolf gang for revenge, so he fled into the mountains to hide?¡± ma ji qing had killed people from the black wolf gang, and they would not let it go easily. on that day, zhang biao said before his death that the black wolf gang leader was a disciple of the iron sword sect and should also come from the martial arts world. ¡°so, he was hunted down for revenge?¡± as lu yuan spoke, he had already reached out to search the body of ma ji qing and soon found several bloody scars on the man¡¯s body. the man had traces of sharp objects cutting through his thigh, chest, and back. most of his clothes were soaked in blood, as he had obviously lost too much blood earlier. if it weren¡¯t for that, lu yuan thought it would not be easy for him to kill this martial arts expert with his major success in ¡°crude archery.¡± ¡°it seems he had already suffered serious injuries and hid in my cave. coincidentally, i returned, and he intended to kill me to silence me, right?¡± lu yuan didn¡¯t think that ma ji qing, quietly hiding behind the vine, was trying to greet him. the man was a ruthless jianghu person, who had killed zhang biao and the others without giving them any mercy. it was straightforward and efficient. how could such a desperado spare a living person to ensure his safety? had lu yuan fallen into the man¡¯s hands, a swift death would be considered lucky. ¡°you wanted to kill me, but i killed you. it¡¯s fair and just.¡± looking at the corpse on the ground, lu yuan held a book and a large money bag in his hands, his face full of smiles. although this time was a bit risky, at least it wasn¡¯t in vain. after securing the book and money bag close to his body, he picked up the long sword that had fallen on the ground, and after taking his spoils of war, he dragged ma ji qing¡¯s corpse towards the back of the mountain. of course, he couldn¡¯t bury a person where he lived. doing that would not only risk leaving clues but also make it uncomfortable to live there. fortunately, there was a nearby mountain cliff with a deep pit of vegetation underneath, which has always been uninhabited and has hidden dangerous things in it. it was just right for disposing of the corpse. it took him more than an hour, and lu yuan dragged the corpse to a mountain cliff five miles away from his cave. he raised his leg, kicked, and the corpse rolled down the cliff. ¡°hmm, when the wild beasts smell the blood and come over, the traces will disappear in a couple of days.¡± lu yuan stared at the pitch-black bottom of the cliff for a while, shuddered when he felt a cold wind blowing, and turned his head to go back to his cave. busy for a day, he was already tired. now he just wanted to return to the cave, fill his stomach, and then have a good night¡¯s sleep Chapter 15 - Chapter 15: Chapter 15: Grandpa Won’t Stay chapter 15: chapter 15: grandpa won¡¯t stay translator: 549690339 boom, boom, boom. muffled thunder echoed through the mountains, followed by the torrential downpour. the winter rain mixed with fine snow before being whipped up by a gale slammed mercilessly onto the earth. plants quivered, wild beasts shuddered. all the living creatures in the mountains trembled under awe of the weather. inside the sealed cave, lu yuan relied on the fire pit, turning over the leftover rabbit meat from yesterday while skimming through the book he had just acquired today. ¡°the pages have human body diagrams with some text beside them, which looks like annotations. there are lines drawn within the body diagrams, corresponding to the various acupuncture points.¡± lu yuan flipped through the book page by page and made a judgment after reading its content: ¡°this is probably a martial arts secret book.¡± although he knew what the book might be, his heart still felt restless. the reason was simple. ¡°i can¡¯t read¡­¡± with a bitter smile on his face, lu yuan sighed. the text in this world was similar to the chinese characters in his previous life, but the meaning and pronunciation of each character belonged to a different system. facing these completely unfamiliar characters, even if he knew that the book before him was a legendary martial arts secret book, he was helpless. thanks to his previous life, watching tv dramas and reading novels involving martial arts, he had some understanding of practicing martial arts. therefore, he knew that learning martial arts was never an easy task ¨C in some ways, it could be even more difficult than academics. because for academics, you only need to be literate and then study the classics. with enough talent and determination in that direction, success can always be achieved. otherwise, where did the thousands of scholars and juren (imperial examination title holders) come from in this world? but martial arts are different. practicing martial arts requires a strong physique and constant honing of your body, which in itself is an extremely demanding task. besides physical exercise, if you want to learn martial arts, you must be literate, recognize illustrations and know how to study these martial arts secret books, right? so being literate is the first obstacle a martial arts practitioner must overcome. but just recognizing characters isn¡¯t enough. during martial arts practice, in order to aid the training and nourish the body, some herbs are needed. at the same time, spending your days with swords and daggers means getting injured is a common occurrence. therefore, whether it¡¯s for training or healing, a competent martial artist must have a basic understanding of medicinal knowledge. all of these are just the basics. according to martial arts novel logic, when martial arts are practiced deeply, they will involve one¡¯s mental state, which is quite mysterious. so, to break through advanced realms, those grandmaster martial artists will study buddhist and taoist classics, and pursue breakthroughs in their spirituality. as a result, the truly powerful martial artists are usually also masters of metaphysics, proficient in the laws of the three religions ¨C confucianism, buddhism, and taoism, and can be considered grandmasters. ¡°although i don¡¯t know if the logic in the martial arts novels of my previous life is correct, based on the current situation, if i want to learn the martial arts secrets i got from ma ji qing, literacy is a hurdle i can¡¯t escape.¡± under the glowing red firelight, lu yuan gazed at the book in his hand, lost in thought. although three months ago, when he had gone to dayu county, he had already discovered the cruel reality that he couldn¡¯t read. at that time, he also secretly resolved to find a chance to learn to read. however, due to financial constraints, it could only be a long-term plan, waiting for the right conditions to execute. but now that he had a martial arts manual, the original plan had to be changed. ¡°as an ordinary person like me, even if i practice archery and swordsmanship to the highest level, i still stand no chance against martial arts experts who have actual martial arts skills. even though my lifespan is infinite, i can still die when faced with various lethal external forces. now that i have martial arts, it¡¯s a perfect opportunity to make up for my lack of power. once i master the secret manual, maybe i can change my current life.¡± lu yuan has been in the mountains for half a year, not because he loved the rustic life, but because he had no choice. the outside world was too dangerous. there were not only the black wolf gang, but also greedy officials, and fugitives like ma ji qing. any of these three posed a threat to his life. so, faced with these threats, even if lu yuan knew that the probability of antagonizing these parties even if he left the mountains was actually low, he still had to be cautious. better safe than sorry. he had an everlasting life with great prospects ahead. he couldn¡¯t risk even the slightest danger. ¡°now the mountains are not safe anymore.¡± lu yuan added a piece of wood to the fire and began to ponder his current situation: ¡°although i disposed of ma ji qing¡¯s corpse, who knows how long the black wolf gang will search the mountains? if they search thoroughly, they might find me here.¡± only the wearer knows where the shoe pinches. although his dwelling in this remote cave was well-hidden, he had been living here for a while, and traces of his life were bound to be left behind. the black wolf gang, as the local power in dayu county, surely wouldn¡¯t enter the mountain hastily. they might hire hunters who were familiar with the mountain to serve as guides. while his cave may remain hidden to outsiders, it wouldn¡¯t be able to fool his fellow hunters. so, it was certain that he would be found by the black wolf gang. although even if they found him, they probably wouldn¡¯t discover much from him and there wouldn¡¯t be much danger. but without danger, to be held captive for labor wasn¡¯t pleasant either. lu yuan didn¡¯t want to be suddenly captured by someone. ¡°now the mountains are blocked by heavy snow, and hunting is impossible. it¡¯s the perfect opportunity to go outside and find a scholar to learn to read.¡± he thought about it. now that he had obtained a secret manual, he had a cognitive need for literacy. and with the threat from the black wolf gang in the mountains, it was time for him to leave and perhaps avoid danger. why not seize this opportunity to leave the mountains? not only would it allow him to learn to read, but it would also help him dodge this storm. ¡°and the biggest problem with learning has also been solved for me.¡± lu yuan took out a large money bag from his chest, tossed it casually, and the silver inside clinked as it collided. it was taken from ma ji qing. he had checked earlier, and there was quite a lot of silver inside ¨C about thirty taels or so. with this money added to what he originally had, he now had over forty silver taels. with so much silver, let alone reading, it would be enough to buy a small mansion with four rooms in dayu county. what does it feel like to carry enough money to buy a mansion? the answer is: very refreshing, very blissful. glancing around the gloomy, damp cave, he once felt everything was tolerable when he was poor. but now that he had money, lu yuan felt annoyed at the sight of his surroundings and couldn¡¯t stand it for another moment. thus. ¡­ on the second day, the thunder and rain outside slightly ceased. seizing this rare opportunity, lu yuan carried a bundle, secured the wooden door of his cave, and carefully covered it with vines. finally, after one last look at the home he had lived in for half a year, without any hesitation, he turned to walk towards the road down the mountain. this time, the young master was on his way to learn new skills. as for this broken cave, whoever wants to stay, stay ¨C he wouldn¡¯t. Chapter 16 - Chapter 16: Chapter 16: New Home chapter 16: chapter 16: new home translator: 549690339 one day later, yangmei town. this is a small town built in the mountains, with a three-mile plum forest next to it, hence the name. yangmei town is also within dayu county, but it is one of the poorer small towns in the county. there aren¡¯t any special products except for the yangmei fruit and yangmei wine produced here, and nothing else. even due to its location in the mountains, the grain production is scarce, unable to support many people. the entire town has only about a thousand people. such a small town does not attract much attention in the whole county. similarly, the black wolf gang did not extend their reach here. ¡°this is a quiet and peaceful small town.¡± lu yuan arrived here and was very satisfied with the environment and atmosphere of the town located in the valley. it took him a full day to investigate and finally decide on this new residence. because it¡¯s poor and sparsely populated, the black wolf gang has not shown any interest. there are only a few small hooligans, if any. also because of its poverty, there aren¡¯t even any officials here, so there¡¯s no need to worry about encountering those petty officials. the security of the town is maintained by a local militia formed spontaneously by the villagers. the number is small, only about a dozen people, managed by the town¡¯s mayor. there are no jianghu gangs, no corrupt officials, and all uncontrollable factors are kept at bay. this place is simply perfect. ¡°who are you?¡± the quiet town has always been self-sufficient and rarely had outsiders coming in. as a result, when they saw lu yuan at the entrance of the town, several militiamen soon surrounded him. their duty is to patrol for thieves and guard the village. ¡°sir, i am a hunter from the mountains. i would like to request an audience with the mayor.¡± seeing the vigilant militiamen, lu yuan revealed a slight smile and said with a hint of flattery. ¡­ a short while later. ¡°you want to settle in the town?¡± the mayor of yangmei town, whose surname is sun. most of the townspeople share this surname. he has a slightly round body but looks affluent. at this moment, upon hearing the request from the hunter before him, his eyes lit up and he stared intently at lu yuan and said, ¡°you don¡¯t have a household registration and you¡¯re a black household. this is a bit difficult.¡± although his words expressed difficulty, lu yuan could understand the meaning by looking at the mayor¡¯s eyes. fortunately, lu yuan was prepared when he arrived. he took out two silver taels from his bosom and handed them over, saying, ¡°please, sir, be lenient and think of a solution.¡± mayor sun glanced at the silver handed over to him and took a sip of tea from the teacup beside him without speaking. seeing this, lu yuan felt bitter in his heart, knowing that he had met a greedy man. without satisfying the mayor¡¯s appetite, getting his household registration settled would be difficult! he sighed, took out another tael of silver from his bosom, and said, ¡°sir, i was negligent just now and brought too little tea money.¡± after a long time. with the newly acquired household register in hand, lu yuan quickly left the mayor¡¯s residence. after he had gone some distance and saw that there were no people around, he cursed under his breath, ¡°damn, what kind of mayor? he¡¯s just a corrupt official, a skin-ripper. just to allow me to register and settle in, he charged me five silver taels. that¡¯s too much!¡± for local officials, an increase in the population under their jurisdiction is their political achievement. lu yuan took the initiative to come and request household registration. this was like sending political achievements to them on a silver platter. despite this, mayor sun still tried to exploit him. five silver taels, that¡¯s really too much! ¡°i¡¯ll remember this loss. if there¡¯s an opportunity in the future, i¡¯ll definitely get it back. my money is not that easy to take.¡± after cursing a few times in his heart and drawing some small circles for mayor sun, lu yuan turned his head and went to a guesthouse in the town. no matter how unhappy he felt, at least his household registration was done. but in order to have his registration truly implemented, he still needed to buy a house in the town and settle down completely. having no choice, mayor sun¡¯s exact words were: ¡°you have no fixed residence. how will the court levy taxes on you? what if they can¡¯t find you? without buying a house, you¡¯d better go back to the mountains and be a wild man. at least then, no one would bother you, and you¡¯d be at ease.¡± with the words reaching this point, for the sake of turning his household registration into reality, lu yuan had no choice but to spend a fortune and endure future exploitation. although the life of a hunter may be free, it is also very bitter. living in mountain caves and surrounded by dangerous wild beasts and poisonous insects that threaten their lives. when they leave the mountains, they suffer from the exploitation of gangs and the bullying of small officials. there is really no human rights, and they are simply being bullied. compared to that, being an ordinary citizen, although inevitably being taxed by the court every year, at least there is some security, and someone will take care of you when you die. one option is not to be human, and the other is to be human. if it were you, which would you choose? the answer, of course, is to be human¡ªeven if it¡¯s the lowest type of person. ¡°fortunately, i got ma jiqing¡¯s fortune. even if i subtract the money for household registration, i still have more than thirty-eight silver taels.¡± staying at the inn and ordering a room and some food, lu yuan thought while eating, ¡°with so much money, even if i buy another house, the remaining savings would be enough to last me two or three years for food, daily expenses, and taxes.¡± this huge sum of money gave him the confidence to register his household. the house purchase went smoothly. it was just a matter of asking the innkeeper and hearing that he was new and intended to settle in the town. the innkeeper purposely introduced him to a residence. there was a family in town whose son had become the owner of a liquor store in the county town and made a name for himself. they wanted to bring the old couple to the city to enjoy their blessings. however, when the people left, the house was still there, unoccupied and going to waste. as a result, they wanted to sell it. the house had two bedrooms, one hall, one courtyard, one kitchen, and one side room, covering more than four hundred square meters. because it was in a rural town, and the original owner wanted to move to the county town and sell it urgently, the price was not expensive. it was sold for thirteen silver taels. later, lu yuan took out another two silver taels, buying furniture and items that were difficult for the homeowner to move. this saved him the trouble of acquiring them himself. in this way, fifteen silver taels later, he finally owned his first real house in this world. although it¡¯s not big and still out in the countryside. but compared to when he first crossed over¡ªliving in a cave, sleeping on the floor, and warming himself by the fire¡ªhaving a house that provides shelter from the wind and rain and a warm bed to sleep in now makes life feel like heaven. with an identity and a secure place to live. lu yuan is very satisfied with his current life. ¡°however, even though i have my own house, sitting idly is not a solution. i can¡¯t give up my hunting skills, as it¡¯s the only means i have of making a living now. also, there are those smoked meat and hides i left in the mountains¡ªthat¡¯s also a great fortune. in a few days, i¡¯ll ask around and see if the black wolf gang people have left. i¡¯ll find a chance to go back and bring all of it back.¡± ¡°it¡¯s a pity about the leopard i killed the day before yesterday. i didn¡¯t have time to handle it. i don¡¯t know if it rotted or if some wild beast got it for free.¡± nighttime. after cleaning the house all day and working up a sweat, lu yuan took a shower, laid out a cotton quilt, and comfortably laid down on the soft bed. he soon fell asleep, thinking about his plans. asleep in the safety of the town and in his own house, he felt at ease. Chapter 17 - Chapter 17: Chapter 17: Pursuit of Knowledge chapter 17: chapter 17: pursuit of knowledge translator: 549690339 the next morning came early. lu yuan woke up at dawn. perhaps it was the absence of mobile internet that caused him to have no form of entertainment in this world. it became a routine for him to go to bed early when night came and wake up naturally at cock-crow. this regular sleep schedule was something he could not have imagined in his past life. lu yuan fetched a ladle of water from the water jar in the yard and took out the wooden toothbrush he had crafted months ago, dipped it in coarse salt, and began brushing his teeth. the fact that he had travelled into a different era was something he could not change. however, he saw his life as potentially infinite, and therefore began gradually improving his living conditions in this inevitably long journey. the brush he was using demonstrated such a change. with the abundant wolf hair unique to the mountains, omnipresent wood, along with a little wisdom and craftsmanship, he fashioned a homemade toothbrush. after freshening up, lu yuan proceeded to his physical training. having come to terms with the perilous nature of this world, he realized that in order to survive, he would need to develop a robust body. his daily routine began with warm-up radio calisthenics, followed by push-ups, squats, spot jogging, sit-ups, and so on. he developed and organized every possible exercise he could think of, even naming it ¡°lu¡¯s exercise method¡±. over half a year, the results were evident. not only did he grow stronger, but his stamina increased, especially his core strength, which had been honed to an unprecedented level. before you can master the bow, you have to master your waist. the essence of lu yuan¡¯s archery skills, making significant progress in little time, was largely due to his strengthened core. after an hour of strenuous workout, he was drenched in sweat. after fetching a bucket of water from the well, lu yuan showered, not bothering to remove his clothes, to wash off the sweat. after pouring several buckets of water over himself, the heat dissipated, taking with it the odour of sweat. he preferred being in the mountains where he could wash off in the creek outside the cave right after exercising. it felt much more satisfying. however, living in town, he had to make do with showering bucket by bucket of well water. after a little over an hour, the porridge he had been cooking was ready. all he needed was water, rice, meat, vegetables, salt, a pot, and a stove. after travelling to this world, lu yuan began to appreciate this simple and convenient method of cooking. no matter what, he would just stew everything together or barbecue it. the life of a mountain hunter was simple and boring. although he now lived in town. his habits from his past still influenced him, and he still prepared these easy and straightforward meals. ¡°now that i have a home and an identity, and even money, everything¡¯s ready. it¡¯s about time to learn to read.¡± sitting on a wooden stool in the courtyard, lu yuan was musing about this as he finished his porridge and took a sip of his coarse tea. he had already thought this through while buying his house the previous day. today, he could put his plan into action. ¡­ the town wasn¡¯t very big, with only one main street. lu yuan¡¯s house was located on the mountain side, on the eastern end of the street. his new neighbors were local farming households who relied on cultivating plum groves in the mountain and their two-acre land outside of town for a living. as he ventured further into the town past the outskirt, there were four alleyways in the eastern street, each housing around twenty households. having bought some pastries on the street and with a string of his own smoked meat, lu yuan made his way towards one of the alleys in the town, gift box in hand. a few moments later, having traversed several streets and lanes, he quickly arrived at the location of the third lane on the east side of the street. outside a small courtyard, with the gate closed, lu yuan knocked on the door of a house and called out, ¡°is mr. sun at home?¡± considering he needed to learn to read, he¡¯d have to find a teacher, of course. the inhabitant of this house was a scholar named sun siwen. he had asked the innkeeper the day before. the scholar was apparently the poorest and most destitute in town, with quite inferior skills. despite studying for over ten years, he hadn¡¯t managed to obtain even a scholar¡¯s degree. being degree-less and unskilled, sun siwen was not well-off. his usual work was limited to writing letters for the townsfolk and composing couplets during festivals to make ends meet. even this meagre income was under threat as other scholars in town competed for the same tasks. consequently, the money sun siwen earned from this work was scarce and insufficient even to meet his basic needs. now he was forced to sell off his family¡¯s ancestral possessions to survive. be a teacher? who would trust their children with a man who had failed to pass the scholar¡¯s exam? wouldn¡¯t that be disastrous for them? when people sent their children to school, they aimed for them to earn degrees. if their children were to learn from sun siwen, not only might they not learn well, but they might even be affected by his stupidity and bad luck, which would be a significant misfortune. yes, in the eyes of some parents, education sometimes seemed like an esoteric discipline. in conclusion, due to various disadvantages, sun siwen the scholar led a miserable and destitute life. however, this also meant that he would likely charge the lowest fee for teaching. this alone was enough. after all, lu yuan did not intend to study confucian classics exhaustively or strive for any degrees; he merely wished to become literate. as for other knowledge¡­ in his previous life, he had gone through more than a decade of hard study, from elementary school to college. he had enough of it; he didn¡¯t need a poor scholar¡¯s teaching now. therefore, the stupidity of the scholar, avoided by everyone else, turned out to be a delicacy in his eyes. ¡°nothing beats ¡®cheap¡¯ in this world. it¡¯s so tempting.¡± as lu yuan mused, footsteps sounded behind the door, followed by a creaking sound; a man in his twenties opened the door. this man wore a green scholarly outfit, faded from washing and patched here and there, giving him an overall shabby appearance. ¡®this must be sun siwen,¡¯ lu yuan guessed. sun siwen looked at the stranger before him in confusion, unable to recall ever meeting him previously, hence he asked, ¡°may i know who you are?¡± ¡°my name is lu yuan, a newcomer who has recently moved to town.¡± lu yuan bowed slightly and introduced himself, then moved on to the main subject, ¡°i heard that brother sun possesses profound knowledge and is the most learned person in town. thus, i have come to learn from brother sun.¡± having said so, he handed over the gift box he had brought. in this world, when beginning an apprenticeship, in addition to paying tuition fees, one usually presented the teacher with some fruit preserves and cured meat. this custom was said to have originated from the first great teacher. originally, when the sage taught his disciples, he would not discriminate against those who couldn¡¯t afford tuition fees. those disciples, being poor, would carry some fruit preserves and cured meat they had made themselves and present them to their master as tuition. since then, this practice had gradually become a tradition and now it had evolved into a ceremony. ¡°learn from me?¡± looking at the gift box in front of him and then at the respectful lu yuan, sun siwen¡¯s heart skipped a beat. someone sought to study under him? could he actually be a tutor? a sudden disbelief flooded sun siwen¡¯s mind, causing his eyes to widen. Chapter 18 - Chapter 18: Chapter 18: The Price of Knowledge chapter 18: chapter 18: the price of knowledge translator: 549690339 ¡°yes, brother sun, i want to learn to read with you.¡± seeing his chosen teacher looking a bit dazed, lu yuan thought to himself that, just like the rumors, this guy seemed a bit slow-witted. however, considering that he was only learning to read, and as long as the other party could teach him to read, it didn¡¯t matter whether he was clever or not, so he didn¡¯t care. ¡°oh¡­ oh.¡± sun siwen came to his senses and, realizing what had happened, felt a surge of joy. he quickly stepped back, opened the door, and said, ¡°please come in, young master lu. this is not the place for conversation. let¡¯s talk inside.¡± lu yuan followed him in and looked around. just like the rumors, sun siwen¡¯s home was indeed quite poor. in the spacious courtyard, apart from a planted plum tree, there was nothing else. on the walls of the houses on both sides, the earthy mud walls had large patches of peeling and pockmarks, which showed that they had not been maintained for a long time. entering the reception room, there were just two bamboo chairs on the west side of the empty hall, while a bamboo table was placed in the middle, with two bamboo cups on it. there was nothing else. such a large space had so few pieces of furniture. it was evident that it hadn¡¯t always been like this. remembering the rumors in town, lu yuan had a rough idea: ¡®with this empty and desolate home, it seems this scholar is truly poor.¡¯ ¡°please take a seat, young master lu, and i¡¯ll get you some¡­¡± sun siwen led lu yuan to the bamboo chair and was about to prepare tea after letting him sit down. but thinking about how he didn¡¯t even have enough rice to eat, sun siwen realized that he hadn¡¯t any tea left. with no other choice, he fetched some well water from the courtyard and served it to his guest. after sitting down, he said with a bit of embarrassment, ¡°i¡¯m afraid our home is too poor to offer you any good tea, so i can only serve well water.¡± ¡°it¡¯s all right,¡± lu yuan didn¡¯t mind, shaking his head. ¡°it¡¯s my sudden visit that has disturbed you.¡± seeing that the other party wasn¡¯t angry, sun siwen felt relieved. then he remembered what had been said earlier and carefully asked, ¡°just now, young master lu mentioned wanting to learn from me. is this true?¡± his family had been struggling to make ends meet lately. however, it was not a festive season, so no one was asking him to write couplets. writing letters on behalf of others was even rarer, with opportunities only coming once every ten days or a month. seeing that there was no more income, he was planning to take some more of the family¡¯s belongings and exchange them for silver. at this critical moment, someone actually came to learn from him, which was truly a heaven-sent opportunity. nevertheless, regarding the town¡¯s rumors about him, sun siwen had heard a thing or two, and he knew there weren¡¯t many good words about him. as the saying goes, one knows one¡¯s own affairs best. he was really worried that the other party would dislike him and miss the opportunity to make money. indeed. although a gentleman shouldn¡¯t be so greedy for money, he couldn¡¯t even maintain his livelihood, so those thoughts had to be abandoned. ¡°of course it¡¯s true.¡± seeing the other person¡¯s nervous appearance, lu yuan couldn¡¯t help but find it amusing and nodded with a smile. hearing this, sun siwen felt more at ease but still hesitated, ¡°but i haven¡¯t even obtained the scholar¡¯s degree, and i¡¯m not proficient in the classics. i¡¯m afraid i¡¯ll hinder your progress if i teach you.¡± although he wanted to make money, mr. sun still possessed some integrity. he knew he had some knowledge, but he was far from being qualified to teach others. otherwise, he wouldn¡¯t still be struggling to obtain the scholar¡¯s degree. he was worried that his teaching would misguide the other person, which would be a great sin. so he mentioned it beforehand. ¡°that doesn¡¯t matter.¡± lu yuan was a little surprised by sun siwen¡¯s concern and felt that he had indeed found the right person. after considering the issue, he stated his intention, ¡°i never planned to take any exams for a degree. i only want to learn to read from brother sun, not delve into the classics. about the tuition fee¡­¡± lu yuan looked around at the surrounding poverty and pondered for a moment, then said, ¡°how about this: if brother sun teaches me one character, i will pay one cent. the more you teach, the more i pay. how does that sound?¡± his tuition fee was thoroughly considered. according to the knowledge from his previous life, people¡¯s commonly used and less commonly used characters were roughly around 3,000. once this number of chinese characters was mastered, most texts could be read without any obstacles, and smooth written communication could be had with others. although he didn¡¯t understand the writing of this world, through his observation, he found that it was similar to the chinese characters of his previous life. the only difference was each character corresponded to a different meaning. so by inference, he only needed to master about 3,000 characters in this world, and that would be enough. as for other uncommon and obscure characters, they could be learned gradually in the future. while he had some money now and still had more than twenty silver taels after spending some on housing, learning martial arts also required expenses. lu yuan was not sure if the secret book he had obtained would require a large amount of herbs to help with cultivation. if so, it would be a significant expense. therefore, for future planning, it¡¯s better to save money whenever possible. he had already calculated that the secret book contained over 20,000 characters in total, and after deducting the repetitions, there were over 2,000 different characters. if he could learn these more than 2,000 characters, understanding the secret book would be a breeze. at the price of one cent per character, 3,000 characters would cost him only a little over three silver taels. after deducting the tuition fees, lu yuan would still have twenty taels in savings. ¡®this should be enough to cover the initial expenses of learning martial arts,¡¯ he thought, turning his eyes to sun siwen. this plan, which involved only learning characters and not the classics, was something he had specially tailored for his own needs. but whether he could carry it out depended on whether the scholar was willing to agree. after all, implementing this plan would mean that he would only be hiring someone to teach him how to read. he would not be involved in any other aspects of impartation of knowledge and guidance. there would be no teacher-student relationship between the two parties in this arrangement. this was something lu yuan had thought about early on, as he never intended to find a teacher who he was supposed to respect as much as a father. his idea was simple: he would provide the money, and the other party would provide the knowledge, and it would be an equitable exchange, with nothing else involved. ¡°one cent tuition fee per character¡­¡± upon hearing lu yuan¡¯s proposal, sun siwen was also slightly taken aback, feeling that it was a bit unconventional and against the rules. he was somewhat resistant at first. but thinking about the fact that he wouldn¡¯t be able to afford food in a few days and that he still hadn¡¯t achieved the scholar¡¯s degree, his initial resistance quickly dissipated. after hesitating for a moment, he finally nodded, ¡°all right. i¡¯ll only teach you the characters, and for each character, i¡¯ll charge a one-cent tuition fee.¡± however, after saying that, he added, ¡°since i won¡¯t be teaching the classics, only the characters, there will be no teacher-student relationship between us, and we don¡¯t need to observe any teacher-student etiquette.¡± life, after all, prevailed over ideals. Chapter 19 - Chapter 19: Chapter 19: Literacy, Surveillance and Mastering the Flowing Cloud Palm chapter 19: chapter 19: literacy, surveillance and mastering the flowing cloud palm translator: 549690339 three days later. sun siwen¡¯s residence. in the empty courtyard, lu yuan was holding a book and listening attentively to the teacher¡¯s explanations. ¡°today we are going to study the third chapter of the thousand character classic, this chapter also has a hundred characters, i will read it to you first¡­¡± the thousand character classic is an enlightenment book used in this world. sun siwen was initially enlightened by this book. he was already very familiar with it, so he didn¡¯t need to look at the book. he put his hands behind his waist, squinted his eyes, and paced in the yard, reading it out straightaway. while the teacher was reading, lu yuan focused on the text of the day¡¯s lecture, comparing it word by word. soon, the third chapter was finished. turning his head, sun siwen saw his student¡¯s serious demeanor and couldn¡¯t help but be moved. originally, he accepted this student just to earn some money for living. but after three days of teaching, he found that this hunter who came out of the mountains had surprisingly high innate talent. he clearly didn¡¯t recognize any characters at the beginning, but he had learned two hundred characters in just two days. moreover, those two hundred characters were not only recognized, but he had also mastered their meanings. he could even write some short sentences. although those sentences couldn¡¯t be used in formal situations. but for someone who had only been studying for two days, it could be considered phenomenal. what more could he expect? this kind of talent naturally shocked sun siwen and even caused him to question himself. because when he began learning literature enlightenment, it took more than ten days to learn two hundred characters. and that was just recognition alone. as for the rest, such as constructing sentences, drawing inferences, and understanding meanings, it didn¡¯t come into play until one or two years later. but now the student before him achieved what took him one or two years to do in just two days. this kind of gap, this kind of blow, is simply not enough for outsiders to describe. ¡®with my talent, even being a xiucai is so difficult, not to mention juren and jinshi. but young master lu is different. his talent exceeds mine by far and his intelligence can be described as divinely gifted. given his talent, if he studies the classics diligently for several years, he can surely achieve officialdom, and even topping the list would not be out of the question.¡¯ being an official is every scholar¡¯s obsession. at this moment, what he craved but could not attain, he seemed to see the possibility of realization in lu yuan. therefore, an expectation emerged from his heart. ¡®my lofty aspiration that i can¡¯t fulfill by myself, perhaps i can entrust it to him.¡¯ with this thought in mind, sun siwen squatted down, picked up a tree branch from the ground, and started writing characters on the ground: ¡°let¡¯s learn the first character of this chapter, which has three ways of writing¡­¡± such a promising talent, he must cultivate it, and can¡¯t let this talent go to waste. meanwhile, lu yuan was watching sun siwen write, and he was carefully taking notes. he already had a solid foundation, he just didn¡¯t recognise the characters in this world. now that he could confirm the writing and meaning of each character, it was easy to learn by comparing the characters from his past life. learning a hundred characters a day was actually slowing down the pace. two hours later. it was noon when the sun was at its zenith. sun siwen finished writing the last stroke, put down the tree branch in his hand, stood up, stretched his somewhat sore and tired waist, then looked at his student and said: ¡°that¡¯s all for today¡¯s study. you take your book home and review it, we will discuss the fourth chapter tomorrow.¡± ¡°yes.¡± lu yuan stood up, and then saluted sun siwen: ¡°thank you, brother sun.¡± as they had agreed earlier, the two were just learning characters, not discourses on classics, so they addressed each other as brothers and young master, not as teacher and student. ¡°you don¡¯t have to thank me. you just need to study hard and not neglect your studies.¡± sun siwen waved his hand. lu yuan nodded, then turned around and left. he finished reading today¡¯s book, memorised all hundred characters, and it was time to start working for the day. one hundred characters a day means spending a hundred cents. and along with recognizing more characters, he started to read the secret book he had obtained these past two days. although he only recognized two hundred characters, lu yuan managed to barely make out some of the content of the secret book through these two hundred characters. now he could confirm that it was indeed a martial arts secret book. as for what kind of martial arts it was, he still couldn¡¯t confirm. but one thing he could already be certain of. that was, learning from the secret book really required the aid of various herbs. because it was clearly written in the book, and several prescriptions were listed above. although he could not recognize all of them, he knew they were expensive at first glance. ¡°so even if i¡¯m studying, i can¡¯t neglect hunting to earn money.¡± as he walked home, lu yuan thought back to his increasingly thin purse and seemingly foresaw the day it would be completely drained. no, that day would never come. he clenched his fist, he wouldn¡¯t sit and wait to be penniless. he soon arrived home. after studying for a whole morning, lu yuan was also hungry. it was time to start a fire and cook. he sliced a piece of smoked meat and steamed it with rice. after hastily eating a meal, he cleaned up the dishes and chopsticks, grabbed his bow and knife, and went out again. although it was snowing, it was still early winter. during this season, although many wild beasts in the mountains had started hibernating, there were still some that had not stored food for the winter and would still come out and be active. Chapter 20 - Chapter 20: Chapter 19: Recognizing Characters, Surveillance, and Cloud Palm_2 chapter 20: chapter 19: recognizing characters, surveillance, and cloud palm_2 translator: 549690339 seizing this final stretch of time, lu yuan planned to push himself to hunt more animals and earn money for his martial arts practice. ¡°and there¡¯s also the black wolf gang. a few days have passed, and i wonder if they are still in the mountain?¡± at the foot of the mountain, looking at the vast expanse of snow-covered landscape, he thought to himself as he confidently walked into the mountain. ¡­ in the following days, besides studying, lu yuan went into the mountains every day to hunt. at the same time, he occasionally crossed mountains to return to his previous residence, confirming whether or not the black wolf gang had left, and monitoring their movements in the process. the black wolf gang seemed to be very determined to find the swordsman ma jiqing, as if they would not let go until they found him. even now, when the heavy snow had sealed off the mountain, they didn¡¯t give up. with hunters from the mountains, they crossed the rugged terrain in a desperate search for any traces of their enemy. however, dayu mountain was vast, stretching over several prefectures and counties, with countless towering mountains and ridges. even if the black wolf gang mobilized every member they had, they could only gather around a couple of hundred people for the search. with such a small group, how could it be easy to find a single person among these boundless mountains? moreover, the hunters who were captured by the black wolf gang were quite unfortunate. they had to follow a rough search in the mountains during the freezing winter days, all while being scolded and beaten by the gang members. some even lost their lives, wronged beyond words. fortunately, their arduous days didn¡¯t last long. half a month later, during one of lu yuan¡¯s routine surveillance missions, he discovered that the gang had vanished from the mountains. after searching the mountains for more than two weeks and unable to find their target, the black wolf gang finally left begrudgingly. yet, even though he noticed their departure, lu yuan didn¡¯t act carelessly. given the treacherous nature of the jianghu, who knew if they were just setting a trap? lu yuan, with all the time in the world and an unlimited lifespan, wasn¡¯t in a hurry. he focused on hunting for prey while waiting patiently. after another ten days had passed, and it was confirmed that the black and blue gang had truly left with no further movements, he finally decided to return to his cave dwelling in the mountain. ¡­ the morning mist still lingered in the mountains, and despite the sun shining brightly overhead, the thick tree shadows shielded this stubborn fog that clung between the foliage. by the babbling stream, mountain springs gathered and flowed away into the distance with a gentle murmur. among the snow-covered plants, lu yuan moved cautiously, his stare vigilantly fixed on the slightest movement around him, assessing the situation. ¡°it seems that the people have really left.¡± after a while, he emerged from the plants and walked to the stream nearby. upon reaching the stream, he scooped up a handful of clear water, fiercely rubbing it on his face, instantly washing away the exhaustion with a long-missed cool sensation. having regained his composure, lu yuan headed toward his cave dwelling. taking into consideration his previous experience, he carefully approached the cave¡¯s entrance again, one cautious step at a time. about ten steps from the disguised vines, he stopped. ¡°it looks the same as when i left, with no traces of movement.¡± after studying the vines for some time, lu yuan breathed a sigh of relief. it seemed that during his absence, the black wolf gang hadn¡¯t discovered this place, so his dwelling remained secure. ¡°no, it may not be that it wasn¡¯t discovered, but that someone intentionally misled them,¡± he thought of the hunters who were forced to search the mountains in the dead of winter. of course, the vast dayu mountain wasn¡¯t inhabited solely by lu yuan as the only hunter. in fact, in the region of dayu county¡¯s mountains, there were hundreds of scattered hunters. these hunters occasionally interacted with one another, knowing each other¡¯s whereabouts, and even joined forces to hunt fierce beasts. they shared a bond. when the black wolf gang entered the mountains to search, they relied on the local hunters for guidance. however, having been captured for no reason as labor, the hunters were naturally resentful. at such times, it was difficult to say how many hunters would be willing to give their all to help the black wolf gang, or if they instead led them to other hunters¡¯ homes? after all, the black wolf gang¡¯s mountain search was temporary, but the hunters were active in the mountains for a lifetime. if one offended their neighbors now, would they not fear being shot with a cold arrow while hunting in the future? ¡°one can only say that the black wolf gang has done too much evil, and both people and dogs despise them.¡± lu yuan shook his head, pushed aside the vines, and stepped into his own cave dwelling. in his haste when he left, he had taken away money and valuable items, but had also left behind over a hundred pounds of smoked meat and several hundred hides in the mountains. these, added together, were worth about five or six silver tales. by now, he had already learned three thousand characters from sun siwen, and had recognized all the characters in the martial arts secret book he had. he could now understand it. all he had to do now was spend some time studying, understanding the meanings, and he could almost start cultivating. it could be predicted that there would be a large expenditure of silver tales once more. practicing martial arts is, after all, like a bottomless pit. he packed a large amount of fur and cured meat into a bamboo basket and arranged them neatly. the empty basket suddenly gained fifty or sixty pounds. ¡°it¡¯s all because of the money.¡± carrying the heavy bamboo basket, lu yuan sighed and turned to walk out of the cave. there was still a lot of stuff left inside, and it would not be possible to carry it all at once. he would probably have to do it two or three more times. sigh, running back and forth over tens of miles on mountain roads, there would be a few days ahead of him. ¡­ three days later. under the dim red sunset, lu yuan carried a large backpack on his back, a wild rabbit in his hand, a hunting bow on his back, a short blade at his waist, and walked briskly along the mountain path. in front of him, the peaceful small town had already risen in wisps of cooking smoke, and some farmers working in the fields around the town were gradually wrapping up their work, carrying their tools, and preparing to go home. ¡°brother lu is back.¡± ¡°little yuan caught some game again today, so impressive.¡± on both sides of the path, some farmers who were still busy in the field saw lu yuan and greeted him one after another. ¡°good luck, good luck,¡± lu yuan responded with a smile, ¡°you¡¯re all welcome to come to my house for rabbit meat.¡± in the past few days, the residents of the small town had gradually learned of the arrival of a hunter from the mountains. to settle down in the town and blend in, lu yuan had deliberately made friends with the neighbors and occasionally gifted some game he had caught. after a month, his relationship with some of the closer residents had gradually grown closer. at this point, although he couldn¡¯t say that their relationship was very good, they were willing to help each other out in small matters. even a few of the neighbors who had received his game would offer him homemade green plum wine or some eggs in return. one could say that by now, lu yuan had completely integrated into yangmei town. walking through the fields and into the town, he quickly returned home by passing through the alleyways. bang! after closing the courtyard door, lu yuan put down the bow and arrow, went to the kitchen next door, and then unbuckled the backpack and placed it on the ground, making a dull thud. opening the basket¡¯s lid, it was filled with smoked meat. he picked up a few strips of smoked meat and hung them on the prepared wooden racks in the kitchen, letting out a sigh of relief. ¡°after spending three days, i finally managed to move all my belongings from the mountain.¡± he peeled and cleaned the rabbit meat he caught today, added some vegetables, and threw it all into the pot to stew. seeing that dinner would take a while, lu yuan took the opportunity to draw water from the well and take a bath. after washing away the sweat and putting on clean clothes, the sky had already begun to darken, and night quietly descended. he took a book from the house, walked to the stove in the kitchen, and began flipping through the book by the light of the fire. ¡°i never thought that ma jiqing was actually practicing a palm skill. at first, when i saw him holding a sword, i thought he was a swordsman practicing swordsmanship. it turns out that it was all just a disguise.¡± lu yuan flipped through the martial arts secret book that he had acquired from ma jiqing. now that he could recognize the three thousand characters, he could already understand the content of the book. after understanding the content, he discovered that it was actually a secret book of palm skills. ¡°cloud palm, it doesn¡¯t sound that impressive.¡± flicking through the secret book, he made a few sarcastic comments, but his heart was filled with joy. martial arts! now that he can finally practice martial arts, will he also become a martial arts expert? Chapter 21 - Chapter 21: Chapter 20: Practice and Consumption chapter 21: chapter 20: practice and consumption translator: 549690339 ¡°according to this book, the cloud palm is inspired by the flowing clouds and water, a superior palm skill with continuous movements like water and elusive unpredictability like mist.¡± under the red glow of firewood, lu yuan flipped through the general outline of the secret book in his hands and read the content on it: ¡°this set of palm skills contains eighty-one moves, covering defense, offense, ambush, and the use of palm strength. it can be said that it covers everything and encompasses all. moreover, in addition to these moves, the skill also comes with an internal cultivation method that can train the six meridians in the human body, namely hand¡¯s three yin meridians and hand¡¯s three yang meridians.¡± according to the book, the internal cultivation method is divided into three levels. the first level trains the hand¡¯s taiyin lung meridian and hand¡¯s yangming large intestine meridian.¡± once these two meridians are trained, one can generate inner strength, and when combined with the palm skill, their strength will be enough to rank among the third-rate in the jianghu.¡± the second level trains the pericardium meridian and the triple energizer meridian. when these two meridians are trained, one¡¯s strength can reach the peak of the third-rate in the jianghu. then he could be considered a martial arts expert in the outside world.¡± the third level trains the heart meridian and hand¡¯s taiyang small intestine meridian. once these two meridians are trained, it will connect the hand¡¯s three yin meridians and hand¡¯s three yang meridians.¡± by then, the inner strength in the body will flow like a stream, and their inner strength will reach minor success. in the jianghu, they would be regarded as a second-rate expert.¡± a second-rate expert could hold the position of a sect leader in some small sects and schools.¡± after flipping through the entire book, lu yuan closed it, feeling somewhat disappointed in his heart. although the cloud palm looked quite impressive, not only with its brilliant palm skills and accompanying inner strength cultivation method, it was considered powerful. yet even so, it cannot conceal the fact that it can only train the six primary meridians in the body.¡± lu yuan knew that there were twelve primary meridians and eight bizarre meridians in the human body. having read numerous martial arts novels and watched tv dramas, he was equally aware that the truly superior internal cultivation method can train all twelve primary meridians and eight bizarre meridians. however, the internal method in his cloud palm can only train six of the primary meridians, not even all twelve.¡± ¡°so, the cloud palm is indeed as it is described, just a second-rate palm skill, and the highest level it can reach is the second-rate.¡± lu yuan concluded with a speechless heart: ¡°as expected, just like its name, this skill is not that remarkable.¡± sigh! with a slight disappointment, lu yuan put away the book and opened the pot. the rabbit meat and rice inside had cooked for a long time and were already cooked. the cuisine with little seasoning would not taste too good. fortunately, having gotten used to this kind of life, his demand for food had been reduced to merely filling his stomach. after finishing his dinner, he reluctantly started to clean the stove and utensils. cooking and eating, these were the most annoying parts. compared to having to deal with ingredients and clean kitchen utensils by himself, lu yuan preferred to eat ready-made meals prepared by others. unfortunately, under such current conditions, he had to do all these tasks himself. ¡°perhaps i should consider finding someone to propose marriage, and bring a wife home to cook for me?¡± while washing the basin, lu yuan rubbed it with one hand as his mind couldn¡¯t help but wander. having been single for more than half a year and now being a young man full of vitality, it would be purely false to say that he had no physiological needs. ¡°no, no, i can¡¯t do this.¡± however, this idea had just emerged for a moment before it was quickly snuffed out because he thought of one thing. according to the logic of martial arts novels, some secret divine skills have requirements for practitioners to maintain their pure yang or yin bodies, and if they are not virgins, they cannot practice them at all. although he didn¡¯t know if it was the same in this world, just to be cautious, he should remain a virgin until he reaches the great achievement in martial arts.¡± ¡°anyway, i have an infinite lifespan. i can spend a few hundred years practicing divine skills until i become unrivaled in the world. once the safety issue is resolved, i will have thousands and tens of thousands of endless years to find the female heroines, demonesses, rich young ladies, and imperial celestial ladies in the martial arts world and try them one by one. at that time, i will have a huge harem¡­¡± thinking about that wonderful scene, he couldn¡¯t help but chuckle.¡± ¡­ the night was deep, and lu yuan did not follow his usual habit of going to bed immediately. instead, he lit a lamp he made from animal fat and took out the secret book of the cloud palm to continue his night reading.¡± although he had read the outline of this skill, he still hadn¡¯t thoroughly studied the specific details of the cultivation, the precautions during practice, the techniques of using various moves, the corresponding prescriptions, and the annotations on the skill itself.¡± although the cloud palm has only more than twenty thousand words and more than a hundred practice diagrams, the content is extremely rich.¡± take the palm moves, for example, there are a total of eighty-one moves, each with a diagram and more than a hundred words of explanation.¡± in just a hundred words, the explanation needs to clarify how to practice the move and the precautions during use, the techniques of exerting force, how to coordinate inner strength with palm skills, etc. the text is concise, and it is not an exaggeration to say that it speaks volumes.¡± for lu yuan, it meant that he had to study the meaning behind these classical texts, summarize a feasible solution and then slowly experiment on his own.¡± he couldn¡¯t afford to be careless in the slightest.¡± after all, it involved the body¡¯s meridians, and any mistake could result in damage to the body.¡± Chapter 22 - Chapter 22: Chapter 20: Practice and Consumption_2 chapter 22: chapter 20: practice and consumption_2 translator: 549690339 for him, who had already achieved immortality, even the slightest possibility that could endanger his life was unacceptable. if safety was not absolute, it would be absolutely unsafe. ¡°so, i¡¯d better spend half a year studying the first technique and the first meridian, making sure there are no problems before starting cultivating.¡± lu yuan looked at the ancient chinese text in front of him, with no punctuation, which was extremely difficult to read. if it wasn¡¯t for his foundation, he might have had trouble understanding it. however, after reading for a while, he gained some insights into the first cloud palm technique, the submerging water technique, and had a general idea of how to practice it. but this understanding was still not enough, and he needed more refinement, as some flaws remained. if it were an ordinary person, like the dead ma jiqing, knowing the specific practice methods would undoubtedly lead them to start practicing without hesitation. after all, their lives were short, and time was of the essence. they could only strive for martial arts progress within their limited lifespans and then enjoy wealth and rank. but lu yuan valued his life and had no limits to his longevity. so, for these body-affecting martial arts, he naturally had to be cautious and prudent. at this moment. he wouldn¡¯t dare to practice the submerging water technique until he had researched it thousands of times, understood it more deeply than its creator, and eliminated hidden dangers. all for the sake of longevity and his own life. ¡­ winter has passed, and spring has come. in the blink of an eye, the scorching heat and cold autumn have passed, and dayu mountain is covered with a layer of white snow again. outside the cave in the mountains, a clear, icy stream flows slowly. the melted snow from the sunlight seeps into the stream from the crevices between the broken stones by the side of the stream. whoosh, whoosh, whoosh. a strong wind pierces through the air, bringing with it a slightly piercing sound. lu yuan¡¯s figure jumps on boulders and trees, swinging his palms up and down, turning like a phantom, elusive, and difficult to trace. after a while, the numerous palm shadows in the sky disperse, and he swings out a fist, hitting a tree with a boom. the tree trembles violently, and countless snow and leaves fall from the sky. he finishes his exercise, but the tree trunk, where he struck, has shattered bark and a clearly visible palm print. ¡°it¡¯s still not enough. even if i¡¯ve practiced the submerging water technique to perfection, my current palm strength is still not enough to penetrate an inch into the wood and leave a handprint on the trunk.¡± looking at the traces left by him, lu yuan slowly exhales, his eyes calm, and he has already considered in his heart, ¡°as i thought, in the end, i still need to cultivate the mental technique and develop inner strength.¡± as he speaks, his consciousness has already gathered in his mind. [name: lu yuan] [talent: immortality] [age: 17] [realm: innate (not in the stream)] [martial arts: cloud palm (not yet started)] [skills: hunting traps (completed) simple swordsmanship (perfect) simple archery (perfect)] he lowers his eyes to the martial arts section of the cloud palm, and in an instant, many sub-sections appear below it. [palm skill: submerging water technique (perfect)] [mental technique: hand¡¯s taiyin lung meridian (not yet started)] during this period, after he researched thoroughly how to practice the first regular meridian, this new subsection suddenly appeared in the attribute interface. as for this, lu yuan guessed that it should be because his understanding of the hand¡¯s taiyin lung meridian was already sufficient, so even though he hadn¡¯t started cultivating the internal cultivation method yet, it still showed up in the martial arts interface. this could be considered as a small exploration of his golden finger. however, with this already known information, he just took a glance and moved on directly, his eyes returning to the realm level. after practicing martial arts for so long, lu yuan gradually came to understand the various realms of martial artists. according to the information he knew so far and the various martial arts novels he had read in his previous life, the martial arts realm in this world should be divided into two major aspects. the first is the houtian realm, mainly practicing various meridians, such as the twelve main meridians and the eight bizarre meridians. as these meridians slowly become unblocked, the martial artist¡¯s inner strength increases, and the realm gradually improves. the specific divisions of the realm should have three streams, two streams, one stream, and so on. however, he didn¡¯t know how many meridians needed to be refined in order to reach the requirements of these small realms. he could only slowly verify it later. and the second realm should be innate. although lu yuan had read many descriptions of the innate realm in martial arts novels, he had never really come into contact with it in this world. cloud palm technique was too low-level and didn¡¯t involve any innate content. even xiantian realm was just a speculation by lu yuan himself, and no one knew whether it was true or not. ¡°forget it, why think so much? i will slowly explore the jianghu once i learn cloud palm and have the means to protect myself.¡± lu yuan shook his head, walked to the nearby stream, washed his face, and then sat down on a large blue stone next to it. at this time, a small stove was set up on the blue stone, with a teapot boiling on the stove. the tea fragrance floated out under the heat. holding the handle with a cotton cloth, lu yuan poured himself a cup of hot tea, took a sip, and felt the cold instantly dissipate. he then took the skewered rabbit meat that had been cleaned from the side of the blue stone and started roasting it on the stove. although practicing martial arts is important, enjoying life is also important in the long run. lu yuan¡¯s life is very long. although he is still a beginner in terms of longevity, he has already begun adapting and planning for his long life. in order not to let himself be driven by his endless lifespan to self-destruction due to mental problems, cultivating some interests and hobbies would make a great adjustment. martial arts, life, and cooking alike. after more than a year of practice, lu yuan¡¯s roasting skills had become excellent, particularly after he found several spices in the mountains and solved the dilemma of only having salt for seasoning his dishes; his skills had improved immensely. the rabbit meat, which lu yuan had eaten countless times, was now quickly processed under his exquisite skills. the golden color was pleasing to the eye, and the dripping oil sizzled on the stove, releasing a rich aroma that stirred one¡¯s appetite at the first whiff. he picked up the roasted meat, blew on it, and then took a bite. as expected, the slightly high temperature left his mouth slightly open and his tongue constantly pushing the meat around to dissipate the heat. but for the sake of deliciousness, he refused to spit it out. enjoying the pleasure of striving for good food, lu yuan squinted his eyes and smiled happily, slowly thinking to himself: ¡°i have fully understood the route of the hand¡¯s taiyin lung meridian and can guarantee no problems. it¡¯s about time to start practicing the internal cultivation method.¡± practicing only moves, no matter how good, was still not considered good enough. he had been practicing martial arts for half a year, and his realm remained no better than mediocre, which was extremely embarrassing. he should at least cultivate his inner strength first. even though he would only be practicing one meridian, cultivating internal strength would still keep him mediocre. but, having inner strength is not the same as having none, right? ¡°to practice internal strength, i need a new prescription, which means i need to buy new herbs.¡± thinking of this, lu yuan felt a headache building. some time ago, he spent more than two silver tales on a batch of herbs to help him practice his palm skill. during the entire six months of practicing the submerging water technique, he had to purchase herbs every month, spending almost twenty silver tales. in the past year, although lu yuan had earned some silver through hunting, it only amounted to eight tales, less than half of his expenses and the extra money had to be deducted from his savings. now, his savings had been reduced to less than fifteen silver tales through continuous consumption. ¡°the medicines needed for cultivating internal strength are more expensive than those needed for practicing moves. according to the current market price, it will cost five silver tales a month to supply the medicinal consumption for cultivation. my savings can only support it for up to three months.¡± it is said that practice makes perfect. although lu yuan was not ill, he often needed to go to the pharmacy to buy herbs for practicing martial arts. gradually, he became very familiar with the various medicines¡¯ properties and prices. he had been paying attention to this before, so he knew the approximate cost after calculating it now. Chapter 23 - Chapter 23: Chapter 21: Inner Qi chapter 23: chapter 21: inner qi translator: 549690339 dayu county, east market. ¡°scarface, here are the protection fees this time.¡± lu yuan carried a basket on his back, took out six hundred cents from his bosom, and honestly handed them over to a man with a scar on his face. this was the new leader sent by the city¡¯s black wolf gang to replace the dead biao ye to collect the protection fees. scarface looked fierce, and it was said that he used to be a strong bandit in his early years. somehow, he joined the black wolf gang and became one of the famous fighters in the gang. since biao ye was killed on the street last year, the black wolf gang increased the manpower collecting the protection fees. at this moment, six black-clothed men stood behind scarface, each with a short knife at their waist, glistening in the sunlight, making people feel fearful at the sight of them. ¡°not bad, you¡¯re smarter than the others, not trying any tricks.¡± scarface walked up to lu yuan, casually flipped through his basket, quickly estimated the value of the items inside, and the protection fee he handed over was exactly 30%. scarface nodded with satisfaction: ¡°pay honestly, it¡¯s good for both of us.¡± ¡°you¡¯re right.¡± lu yuan made a flattering smile. scarface patted his shoulder, took the money, and left with his men. passersby on the street moved aside in fear when they saw this group of fierce men, leaving a clear path for them. ¡°a bunch of bloodsuckers.¡± watching their retreating figures, lu yuan cursed in his heart. being stripped by these bloodsuckers every time he entered the city, three-tenths of his hard-earned harvest for several months were taken away for nothing, making anyone feel heartache. that was all his blood and sweat money. especially since he started practicing martial arts, his expenses and consumption increased sharply, making it even more painful. as for not paying? although he had started practicing martial arts and even perfected the submerging water technique, his combat power had increased many times. but lu yuan knew that his current strength was still far from a match for his opponents. ma ji qing, who had practiced inner strength and was good at walking on walls and eaves, was a powerful figure. however, facing the pursuit and killing of the black wolf gang, he was still seriously injured, fled into dayu mountain in panic, and eventually died by lu yuan¡¯s hands ¡°ma ji qing was at least a person who had gone through two meridians, which was enough to be regarded as a jianghu third-rate strength. he was defeated by the black wolf gang. i haven¡¯t even practiced my inner strength yet, and my strength is nowhere near theirs. fighting against the black wolf gang would definitely be a dead-end.¡± lu yuan has always been clear about his own strength. so even if he was very dissatisfied with being exploited, he still held back for the sake of his life. the humiliation he was experiencing now would only be temporary. when he accumulated enough strength, it would be time for him to settle old scores. ¡°but considering my current progress, by the time my cloud palm skill becomes a major success, it might be thirty or fifty years from now. it¡¯s a question whether scarface and black wolf gang would still be around.¡± lu yuan suddenly thought of this problem, but soon shook his head: ¡°no matter. by the time those guys are dead, i¡¯ll just find their sons or grandsons to take revenge. it¡¯s fair and right for descendants to pay for the sins of their ancestors.¡± ¡­ after making a mental note of this grudge, lu yuan turned to enter the sichuan trading company. after bargaining with liu papi in the store as usual, he sold the fur he had brought with him and got two taels and five silver coins for his three months¡¯ harvest. with the newly acquired silver coins, he proceeded to the medical clinic next door. ¡°dr. zhou, please prepare some herbs for me according to this prescription.¡± as usual, lu yuan took out a prescription and handed it to dr. zhou, who was doing his accounts behind the counter. dr. zhou, named zhou ze, was around thirty years old, with a short beard on his chin. he looked like a scholar. this zhou family medical clinic had been run by his family for generations, and it was said to be over a hundred years old. since lu yuan began to practice martial arts, he frequently visited the city almost every month, usually coming here to buy medicine and becoming a regular customer. after half a year, the two sides had grown quite familiar with each other. zhou ze took the prescription and looked at the ingredients in it, frowning slightly: ¡°it¡¯s different from the prescriptions before. these are all herbs for nourishing blood and regulating inner qi. did you hurt your internal organs?¡± zhou ze knew a little about this regular customer¡¯s martial arts practice and medicine purchases. seeing the change in the prescription and judging the specific effects of the new prescription based on his rich experience, he subconsciously thought that the other party had made a mistake while practicing martial arts, so he was buying medicine for recuperation. ¡°no, i just feel the way i practiced before was wrong, so i changed to a different method.¡± lu yuan had prepared a reason beforehand and now put it forward. zhou ze frowned: ¡°although these herbs won¡¯t harm your body when taken, a large dose will still burden your body. the human body is delicate, and if you mess around with it, it¡¯s easy to get sick. let me advise you, jianghu is not easy to mix in, and martial arts are not easy to practice. with all the fighting and killing, one may lose one¡¯s life if not careful. instead of dreaming of these unrealistic martial arts practices, you might as well save up money, marry a wife, and live a stable life.¡± dr. zhou proved that doctors do have a benevolent heart. even though he was facing a customer buying medicine, he was more concerned about the other party¡¯s health than his business. lu yuan shook his head and smiled: ¡°it¡¯s alright, i know my limit.¡± zhou ze sighed: ¡°alright, your own business is your own business. what¡¯s the point of me saying all this? wait here, i¡¯ll get the herbs for you.¡± he then started to go around to each medicine cabinet according to the prescription and prepared the herbs. Chapter 24 - Chapter 24: Chapter 21: Inner Qj_2 chapter 24: chapter 21: inner qj_2 translator: 549690339 he¡¯s a good doctor, and also a good man. looking at his busy figure, lu yuan thought silently, his mind wandering. dayu county is a small place, with only one medical clinic in town. therefore, this was the only place he could come to buy herbs for martial arts training. fortunately, doctor zhou was a physician. with his inherited profession, he enjoyed a rich income from treating the patients in the entire county and had no worries about making a living. so, for training martial arts, killing and fighting, such demanding and dangerous tasks, he had no interest at all. after several interactions, lu yuan had come to trust doctor zhou and no longer worried about him coveting his secret book of martial arts. he even openly admitted that he was buying herbs to train martial arts. after all, all he gave out was the prescription, not the secret book, and the most that could be guessed from the herbs was that he was training martial arts. but as to what kind of art he was practicing, outsiders have no idea, there was no concern about revealing secrets. ¡°after all, who would care about a hunter blindly practicing something they read about? they might even just laugh it off.¡± thought lu yuan. for a hunter like him who tried to change his fate by practicing martial arts, it won¡¯t seem strange to anyone. perhaps the only strange thing was how this hunter had not killed himself with his training yet. while lu yuan was aimlessly thinking, doctor zhou had already prepared the medicine. he put several packages on the counter and flicked the abacus, ¡°here, according to the old rules, a month¡¯s worth, five taels and two coins of silver. ¡± ¡°that¡¯s expensive.¡± hearing this price, lu yuan¡¯s mouth twitched. while reaching into his pocket for money, he said, ¡°can¡¯t it be a little cheaper?¡± doctor zhou looked at him and said with a smile, ¡°my shop is small and we don¡¯t offer discounts. if the customer thinks it¡¯s expensive, why not stop practicing martial arts? that way you don¡¯t have to spend so much and don¡¯t need to complain about the cost.¡± alright, doctor zhou was still worried about lu yuan practicing himself to death, and was indirectly advising him. lu yuan instantly shut up. he honestly took out the money. the newly acquired two taels and five coins of silver hadn¡¯t even warmed up in his pocket, and they were going to be spent straight away, leaving him to owe two taels and seven coins more of silver. ¡°practicing martial arts really costs a lot of money!¡± putting the herbs into his basket, lu yuan left the pharmacy, looking at the bright sunlight outside. the glaring sun seemed like a huge copper coin in his his savings had decreased significantly and his wallet was even more deflated. he was becoming poorer and poorer, and he could almost see the day when he would become penniless because of martial arts and end up on the streets. ¡°no, if i run out of money and sell my house, i can still go back to living in the mountains, i won¡¯t end up on the streets.¡± lu yuan hastily shook his head and then walked towards the city gate. he even stopped eating in the restaurant in the city in order to save more money and avoid the day of going bankrupt. what if he gets hungry? he had prepared smoked meat rice balls in advance and put them in the basket, it was a long distance between the county town and yangmei town, a full 70 miles. lu yuan only arrived back home close to dusk. after returning home, he placed the herbs in his bedroom, in a hidden compartment dug under his bed, together with the silver he had on him. these were bought for five taels of silver, so precious, he couldn¡¯t afford to have them stolen away. after locking up the small golden box, lu yuan went to the kitchen. he cooked as usual, put the rice and meat in the water, and started to prepare dinner. taking advantage of the cooking time, he went to the yard and swung around with the submerging water technique, practicing his palm skills. after one set, he stopped training and relaxed. he was already sweating all over. after bathing with a few buckets of water and finishing dinner, lu yuan went back to his bedroom and sat cross-legged on his bed. he didn¡¯t lie down to sleep but sank his consciousness into his body and began to contemplate. ¡°the so-called inner strength, according to the book, is the fusion of the soul and the essence-blood in the body. this thing is elusive, seeming real and unreal, has no substance, yet can resonate with life. therefore, some people call it ¡®qi¡¯. when the soul and blood combine, they form ¡®qi¡¯; the essence, qi, and spirit are the three treasures of the human body. therefore, those who train inner strength, when their inner strength increases, their body is robust and their spirit is abundant, when the inner strength declines, they become weak and that¡¯s why in the martial arts world, some people become sick and weak after their inner strength is wasted, and die prematurely in a short time. and some people, when their inner strength is exhausted, lose their soul and blood, and die instantly.¡± lu yuan was very familiar with the general source of inner qi. as he thought about it, every word and phrase leaped out vividly in his mind. ¡°so, the key to training inner qi is to make the soul resonate with the body, leading to profound changes, eventually integrating into ¡®qi¡¯. and this method of resonance, is the technique of internal cultivation.¡± lu yuan was recalling the mental technique of cloud palm, a method he had watched thousands of times, which he had long since developed his own understanding of. now, as he began to resonate, he didn¡¯t need to think much before naturally immersing himself in it. ¡°the mental technique of cloud palm stems from observing the meaning of clouds and water and expands from there. therefore, when using this technique to feel the essence and blood within the body, the key is to move like floating clouds and flowing water. imagine the spirit as a cloud, spreading throughout the body. imagine the essence of blood as a flowing river, surging through various meridians. when the cloud and river unite, the inner qi is released, and the entrance to the mental technique is opened.¡± in the midst of emptiness, lu yuan cleared his mind, began to imagine his mental will as a cloud. the cloud gathered and dispersed along with the wind of thought, moving along the route pointed out by the mental technique within his body. meanwhile, within the body, the rich essence and blood nourished for more than a year, now appeared to be flowing like a creek in the blood vessels under the guidance of his thoughts. the sound of blood circulating, the feeling of its flow, under the perception of the spiritual cloud, was all so clear now. the scenery, impossible to perceive before, was now appearing in his heart. it was as if a magnifying glass were projecting the places crossed by the spiritual cloud and blood essence into his view. the inner vision mentioned in the mental technique was now being realized by lu yuan. the blood continued to flow, and the spiritual cloud floated above it, moving along with them through the meridians. gradually, some clouds, driven by the pulse, detached from the void and entered into the blood vessels, merging with the blood. boom. a blast that seemed to exist only in the spirit. a force, seemingly illusory, yet tangible, appeared in lu yuan¡¯s meridians. inner qi was born. after a year of studying the mental technique, he finally cultivated inner strength and entered the door of the mental technique. three days later. on the streets of yangmei town. with a basket on his back and a hunting knife and arrows in hand, lu yuan was ready to go hunting in the mountains. even though it was snowing now and most of the animals in the mountains had hidden in their dens to hibernate, there were hardly any wild beasts to be seen outside, and it was not the hunting season. but outside while there were no wild beasts, their dens still remained. ¡°originally, for the dens of those wild animals, like wild rabbits and foxes, these small animals, their dens were too hidden and hard to find. but for other large predatory animals like jackals, wolves, tigers, and leopards. their dens are easy to find, but they are all very aggressive. if you go to trouble them in the snow, it¡¯s not clear who¡¯s hunting whom.¡± while walking, lu yuan thought: ¡°but now i have cultivated inner qi, and both my strength and speed are much stronger than before, almost twice as powerful. now, i think i can take on a solitary fierce tiger or a wild bear. but to be safe, it¡¯s better not to mess with these kings of the mountains. we should pick some leopards and wolves, it¡¯s better to squeeze these soft persimmons.¡± after cultivating inner strength, because inner qi is formed by the fusion of spirit and essence and blood, each generation of inner qi increases the drain on one¡¯s self, one¡¯s body, and one¡¯s blood. therefore, in order to maintain this consumption, he naturally had to find a way to replenish the lost essence and blood. in reality, lu yuan¡¯s appetite had suddenly increased. the amount of food he used to eat no longer satisfied him. now, two or three pounds of meat and four or five pounds of rice for a meal were normal. additionally, with the daily consumption of various nourishing herbs, his daily expenses flowed out like an unstoppable flood. according to lu yuan¡¯s conservative estimate, he would need at least ten silver tales a month to barely cover his expenses. in this situation, of course, he was racking his brains to earn some extra income. even now, in the middle of the winter, he wanted to go to the wild beast dens and earn some extra money.. Chapter 25 - Chapter 25: Chapter 22: Iron Bow chapter 25: chapter 22: iron bow translator: 549690339 one month later. the cold wind from the north became increasingly fierce. the howling snowflakes drifted between heaven and earth, and the inside of the mountains were covered in a layer of snowvy-white. the thick snow weighed heavily on the trees, causing them to creak in the wind. a figure approached from the distance, stepping on the thick layer of snow but, surprisingly, not sinking in. instead, only a thin footprint was left on the surface of the snow. ¡°this inner strength is truly extraordinary. i¡¯ve only practiced for a month, but my physical abilities have already improved in various aspects. even my body movement has increased to a certain extent.¡± lu yuan jogged with small strides, occasionally glancing back at his footprints, feeling satisfied in his heart: ¡°walking on snow without leaving a trace, perhaps when i finish practicing the twelve meridians, i¡¯ll be able to do it.¡± although cloud palm is a set of palm skills, it doesn¡¯t involve aspects such as body movement techniques. but it must be said that inner strength is a panacea. wherever the inner qi reaches, his physical attributes will be enhanced. for example, now lu yuan concentrated his inner strength on his feet, and thus his foot strength increased significantly. not only did his walking speed increase, but the force exerted on his feet became even lighter. at this moment, stepping on the snow, the weight of his own body was reduced to about twenty or thirty pounds after being reduced by the layers of inner strength. and under the influence of the increased speed, his weight became even lighter when he stepped on the surface of the snow, probably weighing only ten pounds, or even less than that. ¡°now i understand how those martial arts experts can walk on walls and soar through the sky. with inner strength as a panacea, even if newton jumped out of his coffin, he would have to be suppressed.¡± lu yuan thought in his heart but shook his head quickly: ¡°no, i don¡¯t even know if this world has newton. and the worlds are different, the foundations are different, and whether gravity really exists is also a problem.¡± since he had practiced inner strength, he had harbored great doubts about the various rules of this world and then turned to great expectations. if there are martial arts and inner strength in this world, is it possible that there are also dao law and immortal techniques here? although martial arts are already great. but being able to travel through heaven and earth, overturn rivers and seas, manipulate stars and planets, and control the sun and moon, which of these is not more attractive than martial arts? however, these expectations were all suppressed in lu yuan¡¯s heart. at this moment, he hadn¡¯t even mastered martial arts, and it was too ambitious to expect these things. ¡°i¡¯ve arrived.¡± while thinking, lu yuan quickly approached an indentation covered with ice and snow, with a trace of joy on his face: ¡°after chasing you for three days, i¡¯ve finally found you.¡± with that, he stretched out his hand and gently pressed down on the snow covering the indentation. with just a little bit of force from his hands, a large area of the snow layer collapsed, revealing a tunnel entrance in front of him. hoo hoo hoo. suddenly, an opening appeared, and the gale outside immediately found its target, and it howled as it rushed in. ¡°i have to act quickly, or it¡¯ll be challenging to deal with the leopard once it wakes up.¡± lu yuan couldn¡¯t help but shiver as he was blown by the wind, glanced into the cave, and quickly followed. having been in the mountains for more than a month, he had already developed a set of mature techniques for exploring the dens of hibernating animals. his movements were nimble and swift, and within a few breaths, he rushed deep into the cave. turning inside, he saw the flower leopard lying on a pile of forage in the center of the cave. suddenly exposed by the gale, with the rapid drop in surrounding temperature, the sleeping leopard was stimulated, its eyelids trembled, and its body twisted as if it was about to wake up. seeing this situation, lu yuan didn¡¯t hesitate, took off the hunting bow from his back, drew the bow, and aimed at the leopard¡¯s eyelids. with a ¡®puchi¡¯ sound, the sharp arrow whizzed past, piercing the eyelid and sliding into the leopard¡¯s brain along its eye socket. ¡°roar ¡ª¡± the sudden pain instantly awakened the flower leopard, who was still in a deep sleep. it roared and jumped up, its one long eye opened and saw a blurred figure in front of it, then immediately rushed forward without hesitation. the short distance of more than ten meters was a mere leap for the agile flower leopard. in less than a second, it would tear up the despicable person who had attacked it. but as fast as it was, someone was faster. the moment the flower leopard was startled, lu yuan had already prepared the second arrow. as it leaped towards him, he quickly stepped back, his entire body floated lightly, locked onto the other eye with the arrow in his hand, and let go. the perfect archery technique was, of course, accurate within such a short distance. the flower leopard¡¯s forward-jumping body was like deliberately crashing into the arrow, and its other slightly drowsy eye was destroyed just like its previous there was a ¡®bang¡¯ sound. the severely injured flower leopard¡¯s body crashed to the ground where lu yuan had stood before. the two arrows lodged in its brain were still shaking slightly at the end of their tail feathers. ¡°roar¡­¡± a series of painful howls, like the life force of the flower leopard, gradually weakened as time went by, until it ceased. after shooting the arrow, lu yuan stood vigilantly by, watching this scene coldly, thinking in his heart: ¡®my simple hunting bow is still too weak. it only has six-strength power and is not as good as the ordinary eight-strength bow in the army.. Chapter 26 - Chapter 26: Chapter 22: Iron Bow 2 chapter 26: chapter 22: iron bow 2 translator: 549690339 with my current strength, only a one-stone bow, or even a two-stone bow, can fully display my archery skills.¡¯ as he entered the mountains for these days, his continuous hunting slowly confirmed this. he also gradually understood what his strongest means were now. the answer is archery. indeed, even if he had practiced martial arts, for lu yuan, his strongest ability to save his life was still the archery he first encountered. there is no other reason. only relying on the cloud palm technique, even though he had already mastered the submerging water technique, and initially penetrated the hand¡¯s taiyin lung meridian, practicing some inner strength. however, these methods were still not enough when facing a fierce wild beast. about half a month ago, lu yuan tried to use martial arts to deal with an injured leopard. but in the first encounter, even though his palm power was amazing and his speed was swift, he was almost hit by the leopard¡¯s sharp claws, which almost left a few marks on his body. since then, he knew that his current martial arts skills were still not worth much. it makes sense. it¡¯s just a palm technique, and barely developed inner strength. in lu yuan¡¯s attribute panel, his strength is still low-level. with such a little ability, challenging the top hunters in the mountains for close combat is indeed a bit arrogant. so, after that, lu yuan put aside some of the pride he had developed due to practicing martial arts and became cautious again. since then. several subsequent hunts were mainly ambushes, supplemented by bow and arrow shooting. indeed, this worked wonders. just like before, he hunted in succession, two leopards, and one fierce tiger, all of them were killed without even getting close. ¡°this is all thanks to my superb archery skills.¡± lu yuan touched his hunting bow and felt quite proud. he is confident that relying on his own archery skills, as long as he keeps his distance and has a suitable environment, he can kill dozens of enemies one by one. and these are not what the current martial arts can provide. ¡°therefore, i still need to change to a good bow. a good bow is necessary for good archery.¡± lu yuan touched his somewhat worn-out hunting bow, and his desire to change to a better bow grew stronger. but now he is in the mountains, and this matter cannot be rushed for the time being. however, he had long planned for this. once he returns from this trip, he can implement it. putting away the bow and coming to the leopard¡¯s side, he pulled out the arrow from its eyeball and, after a slight cleaning, put it back in the arrow quiver. after completing these tasks and checking the cave, making sure nothing was overlooked, lu yuan carried the leopard on his back and walked out of the cave step by step. leopard skin is very valuable, and selling it on the market would fetch at least ten silver tales. not to mention the meat that would bring in one or two silver tales more. since entering the mountains, including this one, he has obtained three leopard skins, one tiger skin, and five wolf skins. the total value is more than a hundred silver tales. by selling these, sixty silver tales would not be difficult to obtain. as for the other various meats, he has a total of five to six hundred jin, which lu yuan has preserved. when he was practicing martial arts, his consumption of various meats was enormous. these meats may seem abundant, but they are only enough for him to eat for three or four months. ¡°however, with these gains during the winter, the needs for next year¡¯s martial arts training should be almost met.¡± under winds and snow, lu yuan carried the leopard on his back and faced the frost, feeling very happy. one month later. outside the blacksmith shop in yangmei town. lu yuan carried some dried meat and arrived early at master sun¡¯s house. ¡°uncle six, are you home?¡± he shouted from inside, and after a while, a burly man with a bushy beard came out. this man was a blacksmith in town, and because he ranked sixth in his family, he was called sun six by everyone. ¡°it¡¯s little lu,¡± sun six looked at the man at the door and immediately smiled: ¡°come in, i¡¯ve heated up some plum wine, let¡¯s have a drink together.¡± ¡°alright.¡± lu yuan came in and then handed over the dried meat he brought. master sun directly took it to steam, and in a short while, he served it as a side dish for drinking. after the two drank for a while, lu yuan brought up the main issue: ¡°uncle six, how is the matter i asked you to take care of a month ago?¡± ever since a few months ago, when he had the idea of changing to a better bow, he had been preparing for it. however, since he couldn¡¯t make bows himself, he had to find someone to help him. and the person to help him was naturally the only blacksmith in town ¨C uncle six. nowadays, ordinary people hiding knives, arrows, and hunting bows may not be a big deal, and the court would not pursue it. but if one were to hide armor and strong bows and crossbows, it would be considered a major crime, equivalent to rebellion. once exposed, the whole family would suffer as a result. therefore, lu yuan knew this would be difficult to accomplish, and if the relationship wasn¡¯t good, others definitely wouldn¡¯t help. so, half a year ago, he began to interact with the blacksmith master sun. he occasionally gifted him game that he hunted, and after a long time, their relationship made significant progress, becoming close friends. it wasn¡¯t until a month ago that lu yuan finally dared to ask the other party to forge an iron body bow for him, thinking their relationship was close enough. but even so, it still scared uncle sun quite a bit at the time. it was only when lu yuan offered ten silver taels as payment and promised not to leak any information that he finally persuaded uncle sun, along with some soft persuasion. forging an iron body bow wasn¡¯t an overnight task. plus, uncle sun had no prior experience, so he needed time to figure out how to do it. therefore, they agreed to deliver it in a month. the time had come for the one-month deadline. ¡°it¡¯s done.¡± hearing lu yuan¡¯s words, uncle sun put down his wine glass, got up, went to the back room, and returned shortly, holding a long box. placing the box on the table, he looked up and said, ¡°take a look. i put quite a bit of effort into making this!¡± lu yuan immediately showed interest. upon opening the box, he saw a dark-colored, ice-cold longbow, about 1.2 meters long, quietly lying inside. next to the longbow, there were ten prepared arrowheads which, once attached to the arrow shafts, would become deadly weapons. he picked it up and felt the coldness and heaviness of the bow. without much testing, he knew this was a powerful weapon, not suitable for ordinary use. however, after continuous training and the boost of his inner strength, lu yuan, in some sense, was comparable to a naturally strong warrior. ¡°great bow! great bow!¡± caressing the iron bow, lu yuan could already imagine himself holding it, hunting countless powerful enemies in the jungle. while martial arts skills are powerful, even martial arts experts are still vulnerable to strong bows and crossbows, and would not dare to confront them head-on. take ma jiqing, for example, with his cultivation of inner strength. so what if his sword techniques were superb? when facing him, ma jiqing still fell victim to his arrows. ¡°here¡¯s the remaining payment, five silver taels. check to make sure, uncle six.¡± previously, he had already given five silver taels as a deposit. now that lu yuan received the merchandise, he promptly paid the balance without hesitation. uncle sun took the silver, and his eyes lit up when he saw the shiny color. however, remembering something, he warned, ¡°xiao lu, let¡¯s get this straight: once you¡¯re out there, you must never say i made this bow for you. you didn¡¯t come to me, and i didn¡¯t accept your money, understand?¡± he did not mention not using the bow to do harm. it was clear that hunting bows were sufficient for hunting, and there was no need for iron bows. such a powerful weapon was obviously not for hunting, but for bigger accomplishments. ¡°i know and promise not to get uncle six involved.¡± lu yuan nodded, then closed the wooden box, carried it out, and left. with this iron bow, he could finally sell the valuable beast skins and tiger whips stored at home, worth hundreds of silver taels. originally, he had been hoarding these valuable items, not daring to exchange them for money. a hunter couldn¡¯t make a transaction worth hundreds of silver taels; doing so would be no different from a child flaunting gold in a marketplace. ¡°but with this iron bow, everything is different.¡± at home, lu yuan attached arrow shafts to the ten arrowheads, picked up the iron bow, and pulled the bowstring made of tiger tendons. the iron bow body slightly bent under the tremendous pulling force. he released his fingers. with a hum, the sharp arrow flew out, instantly sinking into the mud wall. the iron bow trembled, and the bowstring bounced. under the tremendous force, the air seemed to vibrate. this bow could be used to kill people. it could even kill martial arts experts¡­ ¡°good bow.¡± lu yuan chuckled, wrapped the iron bow in a cloth and fastened it to his waist. he picked up a short knife, checked the nitrate-treated skins in his backpack, and left the house. he was off to sell his merchandise.. Chapter 27 - Chapter 27: Chapter 23 Bait chapter 27: chapter 23 bait translator: 549690339 dayu mountain separates the north from the south, a famous large mountain in the south of yue country. south from here lies southsea¡¯s nanxiong prefecture, while to the north is yuzhang¡¯s luling prefecture. these two prefectures, divided by a large mountain, are not only different in geographical administration but also in culture and customs. the simplest difference. yuzhang is still developing, densely populated, and is a famous land of fish and rice. however, southsea prefecture is located in the wilderness, scarcely populated, and is notoriously a place of exile. a single mountain divides the south and north, creating two entirely different worlds for the people on each side. ¡°so what does the dayu mountain arrow god¡¯s actions have to do with me, yuzhang luyuan? after half a month of journeying south from dayu mountain, crossing numerous dangerous peaks, luyuan finally reached the nanxiong prefecture of southsea prefecture, enjoying the county town¡¯s view from the mountain foothills with a smile. he certainly picked a good place, particularly because he was planning to sell valuable fur. luyuan had already gathered the necessary information. luling prefecture serves as the iron sword sect¡¯s territory, with 18 counties under it. they all belong to the sect¡¯s territory. groups like the black wolf gang at dayu county are periphery powers of the iron sword sect. within this area, avoiding the gaze of the black wolf gang while selling fur is almost impossible. so, if he wanted to make a deal unnoticed, he must find a foreign prefecture and keep away from the territories of luling prefecture. but no prefecture is safer than the one separated by another jurisdiction. so, at first, when he decided to avoid the black wolf gang and fend off their exploitations, luyuan opted for nanxiong prefecture as his selling channel. how to deal with the gangs in nanxiong prefecture? ¡°i don¡¯t plan to do business here long-term. after i enter the county town, avoid gang members, sell my goods, and run away from town, who would know who i am?¡± luyuan said with a smile. hit once, and then disappear ¨C a proven great strategy. he took the iron bow and arrows he carried and buried them in a hidden area about five miles from the county town. after making the necessary safety preparations. luyuan, with his backpack, entered the county town of nan¡¯an, under nanxiong prefecture, after paying twenty copper coins as a city entry tax. seeing the county town much less populated than dayu county, he couldn¡¯t help but sigh. the same type of county town, nan¡¯an county is obviously poorer than dayu county, and likewise, the city entry tax is also much less here. ¡®of course, it is also possible that the officials here are not as corrupt as those in dayu county.¡¯ thought luyuan, he looked at the bustling street, found a bun shop, bought two buns while casually asking the shop owner for directions during the short journey, he was very cautious, avoiding or distracting anyone who looked suspicious and could possibly be a gang member. he made every effort to ensure that no one realized he was selling fur. perhaps because luyuan was unfamiliar to them, or his actions on the road were effective. by the time he arrived at the city¡¯s only fur shop, no one had noticed he was selling fur. luyuan safely entered this shop named tonghai trading company. ¡°are you new here?¡± the shopkeeper was a lean, sharp-looking old man who squinted at luyuan when he came in and asked. ¡°indeed, i haven¡¯t been here often.¡± luyuan replied casually, not wanting to talk more, immediately set down his backpack, opened the lid and said to the shopkeeper, ¡°i have some furs, do you buy them?¡± the old shopkeeper came over, flipped through the skins in the backpack, and showed surprise after seeing a wealth of wolf skins, leopard skins, and tiger skins. he had never seen so many high-quality goods coming from the same person. ¡°all of my skins are of excellent quality, and they are all rare. can you take them all?¡± luyuan keenly observed the shopkeeper¡¯s every move and asked earnestly. ¡°yes, of course we can,¡± the old shopkeeper looked away, turned to luyuan, and replied with slight enthusiasm. although the wolf skins and leopard skins were special, they weren¡¯t rare commodities. they only attracted attention because of their excellence and lack of damage. but the tiger skin was different. as the king of the mountain, the tiger is always immensely fierce. even if the hunters were to hunt the tiger, they would not even think about it without getting a group of more than ten people and being prepared for some fatalities. but even then, after such a brutal fight, if the tiger was captured, its skin would have been largely destroyed. in contrast, this flawless tiger skin in front of him was considered a rare good wherever it was placed. able to secure this deal, he could instantly make a profit. even more so, if he found the right client, he could make a profit up to ten times its original price. therefore, this old shopkeeper would not miss this big deal. ¡°five wolf skins, excellent quality, each can be priced at one silver tale. ten fox skins, excellent quality, each can be priced at three silver tales. three leopard skins, excellent quality, each can be priced at five silver tales. one tiger skin, excellent quality, priced at¡­¡± the old shopkeeper paused at this point, looked at luyuan, seemed to be considering that if he offered too low, he could turn away and leave, so he hesitated for a moment and said, ¡°the tiger skin is priced at eighty silver tales, okay?¡± ¡°okay.¡± luyuan nodded. his original expectation was sixty silver tales, and getting an extra twenty silver tales was already a great deal.. Chapter 28 - Chapter 28: Chapter 23 Bait_2 chapter 28: chapter 23 bait_2 translator: 549690339 seeing that the price was agreed upon, the old shopkeeper¡¯s heart eased slightly, and then he continued counting: ¡°so, there are a total of nineteen pieces of fur, which are worth a total of one hundred and thirty silver taels. do you want a silver note or current silver?¡± ¡°i want current silver.¡± lu yuan replied directly. silver notes in yue country were issued by various large banks. the banks collected the current silver from customers and then issued checks, which could be used to withdraw cash at banks in various merchant locations, with the bank collecting a certain handling fee. under this process, not only were there many procedures, but there was also a risk of leaving traces when withdrawing money, which increased the risk of exposure. therefore, even knowing that silver notes were more convenient, he still chose current silver. however, upon hearing this choice, the old shopkeeper¡¯s face showed difficulty, ¡°we don¡¯t have that much current silver in the store right now. if you choose current silver, we will need to go and get it, which may take some time.¡± lu yuan¡¯s eyes were fixed on the other party, but the old man still looked troubled and difficult to read. after hesitating for a moment, he nodded and said, ¡°fine, but i won¡¯t wait long, no more than a quarter of an hour.¡± a quarter of an hour was about fifteen minutes. there was a silver bank right next to the fur shop, and it would only take two or three minutes to get there from here. a quarter of an hour was more than enough to fetch some current silver. ¡°alright.¡± the old shopkeeper quickly nodded, then called an assistant, handed a few silver notes to the assistant, whispered some instructions into his ear, and let him go. lu yuan watched the scene silently, waiting without saying a word. after a while, the assistant returned with a large bag of current silver. ¡°here is the payment,¡± the old shopkeeper opened the package and pushed the silver towards lu yuan. the dazzling glow of the silver was captivating. lu yuan picked up a silver ingot and weighed it. these were all large ingots worth ten taels each, and the weight seemed accurate. he nodded, ¡°alright, looks like we¡¯re settled.¡± thirteen large silver ingots worth ten taels each weighed more than eight catties (roughly 8 lbs). for ordinary people, this was quite a burden. perhaps this was one of the reasons for using silver notes. but now, his physical fitness was incomparable to when he had just crossed over. with his inner strength, the weight of eight catties in his hand was no heavier than holding an egg. after leaving the shop, he glanced left and right. the market was bustling with people, and it seemed like today was a market day for the locals, which had attracted quite a few people from outside the city. the vendors and the villagers who came for the market made this place extremely noisy. however, lu yuan¡¯s sharp hunter instincts still enabled him to detect a few glances. he was very familiar with this kind of gaze. it was the gaze of a hunter when targeting prey. someone was watching him. ¡°it seems that the old man really took the opportunity to spread the news secretly when he went to fetch the current silver,¡± lu yuan quickly realized this, but he didn¡¯t panic, as he had already anticipated this and was not too surprised. without doing anything unusual, he calmly headed towards the city gate, looking like an ordinary hunter who had just made a fortune and was anxiously wanting to go home. soon, he passed through the crowd and left the market. after walking through two more streets, the city gate was in sight. all the way, there were still hidden gazes hiding in the darkness, but they only stared intently and did not take any action. apparently, the people in the shadows were still somewhat cautious in the city and dared not directly kill and rob in broad daylight. taking a large step out of the city gate, the guards glanced at lu yuan and then lost interest after seeing the quilt on top of his backpack used to cover up. for people like this who only bought a quilt for the winter during the new year, they were not worth a second glance from the masters. ¡°come on, follow me,¡± lu yuan turned his head and looked back. compared to the dense crowd inside the city, there were far fewer people outside the gate. at a glance, he saw two figures in gray clothes, and the familiar feeling surged instantly. it was these two people who had been following him just now. those two people seemed to have noticed that they had been discovered as well. but instead of panicking and hiding, they no longer concealed themselves and looked straight at him. that gaze was outrageous, just like lu yuan¡¯s own gaze when sizing up prey on the brink of death. seeing this, he couldn¡¯t help but sneer twice, ¡°soon you¡¯ll know that not only do you want to hunt me, but i also want to hunt you.¡± having said that, he turned around and left immediately, his figure disappearing at the crossroads without delay. the bait had been set, and now it was time to see how many fish he could catch. not long after lu yuan left, five figures hurriedly came to the city gate. the leader was a burly man with a well-built figure, fierce eyes, and ferocious-looking muscles, resembling a man-eating wild beast. ¡°big brother.¡± the two gray-clothed men who had been watching lu yuan approached hurriedly upon seeing the arrival of the burly man. ¡°where is that man?¡± the burly man glanced at his subordinates and asked gruffly. ¡°he went towards the official road, probably planning to escape back to the mountains.¡± one of the grey-clothed men pointed at the endless official road and mocked, ¡°he thought he had discovered us, so he tried to hide. little did he know that zhao er had already set up an ambush on the road earlier, blocking his escape route. this time, it will be difficult for him to escape even if he grows wings.¡± another person beside him chimed in with a laugh, ¡°this guy must be from out of town, trying to avoid extortion, so he came to our nan¡¯an county to do business. but what he doesn¡¯t know is that he can avoid the extortion over there but not over here. well, it¡¯s good for us, as we¡¯ll get an easy hundred and thirty silver tales.¡± although they knew that they wouldn¡¯t get all of the silver, they knew that the bigger share would have to be handed over to their gang. but as the ones directly involved, they could still at least get three to five silver tales, more than enough for them to enjoy themselves for a while. ¡°to do business in our qingzhu gang¡¯s territory without paying tribute, disregarding our rules and regulations.¡± the burly man sneered, ¡°this time, we will teach him a lesson. but as for his tuition fee, i¡¯ll take his money and his life.¡± upon hearing this, the others beside him laughed as well. they had already killed many who refused to follow the rules, with no hesitation nor mercy, even making it a fun pastime. now they were just thinking that they shouldn¡¯t be too ruthless, lest the man dies too soon, spoiling their fun. ¡°let¡¯s go, let¡¯s catch up to him. zhao er only has three people with him; there isn¡¯t enough manpower, so let¡¯s not let the prey within our grasp get away.¡± the burly man waved his hand and led his subordinates as they hurriedly chased towards the mountain. meanwhile, five miles away from the county town, under a bush, lu yuan bent down, dug into the mud with his hands, and retrieved the iron bow and arrows he had buried. he looked back at the direction of the town, which was already blurry in the distance. he could barely make out some black shadows, confirming the location of the county town. ¡°estimating the time, those guys should have just left the town and are chasing towards me.¡± there were only two people who had been watching lu yuan earlier, although they still outnumbered him. however, considering his identity as a hunter, who often fought fierce beasts in the mountains, the opponents most likely wouldn¡¯t dare to approach him. when he had been trading in the shop earlier, he only gave the shopkeeper a quarter of an hour. this might have been enough time to tip off the local gangs, but not enough for them to gather a larger force. as a result, the local gangs should have only just received the news and were now anxiously rushing out of the city. ¡°i still have time.¡± lu yuan muttered to himself. he took out the silver, stored it securely next to his body, threw away his carrying basket, and headed towards the mountain. compared to the open plain at the foot of the mountain, the densely complex forest in the mountains was his true territory. as he held the cold and heavy iron bow in his hand and felt the quiver filled with arrows at his waist, excitement and strong self-confidence swelled in his heart. his perfect archery skill gave him great confidence, and the inner strength coursing through his body further enhanced his speed and agility. with these two abilities, he was the king in the mountain forest. those who pursued him would become his prey to be hunted down. the hunt had begun.. Chapter 29 - Chapter 29: Chapter 24: Hooked chapter 29: chapter 24: hooked translator: 549690339 at the end of the official road in xiaoyu village. zhao er and his two brothers hid in a clump of grass beside the road at this very moment. they peered intently at the vast official road through the gaps between the plants, watching every single person passing by. ¡°brother zhao, we¡¯ve been waiting here for half an hour, and that guy hasn¡¯t shown up yet. do you think he would¡¯ve decided not to take this road?¡± hu zi, the youngest of the brothers, asked after they had waited for quite some time. he asked not out of loyalty to the gang but out of concern about losing the silver coins that were practically in his grasp. ¡°impossible. ¡± zhao er shook his head decisively, ¡°that undisciplined hunter made a fortune of 130 silver taels by selling fur and animal skins in the town. carrying such a large sum, he must be eager to get home.¡± this official road in xiaoyu village is the shortest and fastest route to the mountain within dozens of miles. if they chose to take smaller rural paths, their journey would be half as short or even take twice as long. he is new to this place and wouldn¡¯t dare stay in our territory longer than necessary. besides, among the vast area of dayu mountain, only the region nearby xiaoyu village has been explored and cleared by hunters and is relatively safe. entering the mountain ridge through other areas is not impossible, but those areas are ridden with ferocious animals and venomous insects. even experienced hunters wouldn¡¯t be able to guarantee coming out alive if they ventured into those areas. now, you tell me, if you¡¯ve just made a fortune of 130 silver taels, would you risk your life to cross dayu mountain through such places?¡± the younger brother immediately shook his head, ¡°of course not. only a fool would do that. with so much money, it¡¯s better to find a safe place to buy a house, marry a wife, acquire some land, and live a comfortable life.¡± zhao er nodded approvingly, ¡°that¡¯s why as long as we wait here, the kid won¡¯t be able to escape. even if he is daring enough to risk taking another route into the mountain, once our eldest brother and his men arrive, we will gather our gang members to track him down. we¡¯ll definitely catch him.¡± ¡°the kid¡­won¡¯t be able to esca-¡± zhao er¡¯s words were cut off when his gaze snapped to what seemed like something flying towards him from a distance. before he could get a better look, pain seared through his eye and a tremendous force slammed into his head. with that, he was flung out of the grass and crashed into the ground. ¡°brother zhao!¡± ¡°what¡¯s happening?¡± the sudden turn of events left the two younger brothers bewildered. they quickly got up from the hiding place in the grass, intending to rush to zhao er¡¯s side to check on their eldest brother. but as soon as they stood up, one of them felt a sharp pain in the back of his neck followed by blood spewing everywhere, before a powerful force sent him crashing to the ground as well. only then did hu zi realize that two arrows, shot from an unknown location, had struck down his two companions. ¡®it must be that hunter!¡¯ almost instantly, hu zi thought of who their enemy could be. however, even though he knew who it was, he didn¡¯t have the courage to face the enemy for revenge. instead, he bolted and ran for his life. his two companions were killed by the enemy¡¯s arrows before they even spotted them. the expertise of the hunter¡¯s archery skills was evident. a deep sense of dread had already shrouded this member of the qingzhu gang. he couldn¡¯t care less about the silver coins now, with only one thought left in his mind ¨C escape with his life. yet, the well-prepared hunt had just begun. how could a skillful hunter let their prey slip away so easily? after taking only two steps and barely running ten meters, he felt a sharp pain in his heart. as his body flipped through the air, his eyes glanced at his two lifeless companions, and only one thought remained in his mind, ¡°am i going to die now?¡± with a thud, his body fell to the ground, his eyes fixed on the blue sky, and his pupils gradually dilated. in the distance, beneath some low ridges, lu yuan lowered his bow. having already anticipated that he would be hunted down, it was impossible for him not to consider that there might be an ambush on his way back. so, while returning along the official road earlier, lu yuan had carefully avoided walking directly on the path, instead choosing to move closer to the adjacent areas, feeling his way forward along the terrain. sure enough, this caution paid off. when zhao er and his fellow qingzhu gang members were guarding the official road, he had discovered them hiding from a secret spot on the side. once he found them, there wasn¡¯t much for him to say. lu yuan raised his hand and shot three arrows, sending them straight to the underworld. ¡°now that these guys are dealt with, there should be no more ambushes on the way into the mountain.¡± lu yuan thought as he walked towards the corpses of zhao er and his companions. he quickly arrived at the area where their mangled bodies lay. crouching down, he searched the corpses and soon had three cloth coin bags in his hands. upon opening the bags and counting the money inside, he found that the total sum was less than ten silver taels. zhao er¡¯s bag held the most money, a total of six silver taels. ¡°a bunch of poor fools, who¡¯d think they¡¯d even dare to join a gang.¡± lu yuan spat in disgust as he looked at their corpses, then pocketed the money bags, retrieved the arrows from the bodies to reuse, and turned to enter the mountain. his steps were light, and his face held a smile. although he had just scorned zhao er and the others for being poor, nearly ten silver taels of extra income was still a joyous event.. Chapter 30 - Chapter 30: Chapter 24: Hooked_2 chapter 30: chapter 24: hooked_2 translator: 549690339 ¡°after all, just relying on honest hunting, being exploited, i normally need to earn ten silver taels. it would take at least half a year of time. but now, it only took a few minutes to get ten silver taels.¡± indeed, as the old saying goes. killing and arson brings gold belts, building bridges and roads leave no corpses; the ancients never deceive me.¡± murmuring, lu yuan burrowed into the mountain ridge. those qingzhu gang members could catch up any moment, better run into the mountain, so that there is enough sense of security. only in the big mountains can excellent hunters, like fish entering water, play to their full strength without restraint. he was looking forward to the qingzhu gang people chasing in. just now, ten silver taels were a bit less, our dayu mountain arrow god, wanted to fish for more. a moment later. at the entrance of xiaoyu village, that strong man who was originally at the city gate, du qing, hurriedly came with his seven younger brothers. ¡°where are zhao and the others?¡± their gazes scanning left and right on the wide official road, a few shadows were nowhere to be seen. du qing frowhea ana askea. logically, regardless of whether someone was ambushed or not, upon seeing him coming, those men should have come out to greet him. ¡°big brother, look!¡± at that moment, a younger brother next to him discovered corpses beside the distant grass pile, and immediately exclaimed. ¡°zhao er¡­¡± du qing led people to the corpse¡¯s location, and as soon as he saw the dead were his men, his face suddenly turned ugly. ¡°who killed zhao er?¡± ¡°they were ambushing the hunter here. could it be him who made the move?¡± the younger brothers next to him looked shocked at the corpse. their voices trembled, clearly frightened. whoever had killed zhao er and the others so cleanly could also kill them just as cleanly. those gang underlings who joined the gang only wanted to have their way in the market and bully the powerless commoners. at this moment, meeting a ruthless person who dares to kill and is capable of killing, they suddenly became a bit timid. why bother? they usually only earn a few bucks, is it worth the risk to play with such a murderous person? this thought suddenly rose in many people¡¯s minds. what? jianghu chivalry? please, they are gangsters, there wouldn¡¯t really be anyone who thought that gangsters would have any jianghu chivalry, right? ¡°that¡¯s right, it¡¯s that hunter.¡± du qing squatted down, turned over the wounds on zhao er¡¯s corpse, confirmed the trace, indeed it was an arrow wound, his face turned completely blue with anger, gritted his teeth and said: ¡°that kid dares to kill my people, daring to violate my qingzhu gang, we can¡¯t let him go. otherwise, what face will i have as du qing, and what face will qingzhu gang have?¡± he stood up and said to a younger brother next to him: ¡°li si, you return to town immediately and report this to the gang leader. let the gang leader mobilize manpower and search the mountain for that hunter.¡± the mountains are vast, it¡¯s not easy for them to find people with just a few of them. only by organizing a large-scale manhunt and catching a few hunters familiar with the environment as guides, can there be a chance to catch that audacious hunter. ¡°yes.¡± that gang member named li si, upon hearing the order, felt as if he had been pardoned, and immediately ran towards the city. the other gang members looked at his fading figure, their eyes filled with envy. but soon they had no time to envy, because du qing was looking at them: ¡°someone killed our brother, we must avenge zhao er and the others. follow me to chase into the mountain. zhao er¡¯s bodies are still warm, the person hasn¡¯t gone far. if we chase now, we might catch his tail. i want to skin that kid alive, torture him viciously, only then can i vent my hatred.¡¯ with their boss staring at them like a fierce beast, the younger brothers felt their scalp go numb and dared not say no. they hurriedly nodded in agreement. ¡°follow me.¡± du qing nodded in satisfaction, then led the six younger brothers into the mountain forest. lu yuan was weaving through the dense forest. his steps were light, his figure agile, like a ghost, patrolling his own realm of death. a year of mountain life, coupled with the original body¡¯s decades of experience, had long fused him with the mountains. but after running through the forest for a while, his speed gradually slowed down, finally stopping on a hidden grassland covered with ice and snow. his eyes looked at the unremarkable snow surface, his highly-perfected [hunting trap] skill allowed lu yuan to keenly sense that beneath this snow surface was a trap meticulously set by someone. hunters hunting wild beasts rely not only on archery and brute force; actually, their most used method is traps. ¡°there are hunters in this mountain area, and they must have set many traps in the mountains for hunting, and they are distributed in nearby areas.¡± lu yuan stared at the trap, lost in thought. he didn¡¯t know how many of the qingzhu gang were chasing after. although he wanted to use the familiar mountain forest to hunt down all these people, facing them head-on, even if it was just archery, was still a bit risky. ¡°but if i can use the traps, i don¡¯t even have to face them, and can directly eliminate these people, that would be perfect.¡± at the thought of this, lu yuan was instantly tempted. he hesitated no more and followed the traces of the trap in front of him, searching for other traps nearby.. Chapter 31 - Chapter 31: Chapter 24: Hooked_3 chapter 31: chapter 24: hooked_3 translator: 549690339 how many traps would a skilled hunter set up in the mountains? lu yuan didn¡¯t know how others operated, but as for himself, he laid at least twenty traps in his hunting grounds. therefore, even if other hunters set up half of that amount in their hunting grounds, there would still be at least ten traps. so, there are actually many traps scattered throughout the vast mountains. in just one hour, lu yuan found six suitable traps in a five-mile radius of his area. after memorizing the positions of each trap in his mind and designing a perfect route, he turned and headed towards the direction of the mountain entrance. he had spent so much time in the mountains, but the qingzhu gang members hadn¡¯t caught up yet. it was obvious that these scums only knew how to oppress the common people at the foot of the mountains and collect protection fees. once they entered the mountains, they became like blind men¡ªa bunch of headless flies that didn¡¯t know how to track an experienced hunter. as someone with a helpful spirit, lu yuan felt obligated to remind them and give them some clues so they wouldn¡¯t lose their way. ¡°where the hell is that little brat hiding?¡± with a single chop, du qing cleared the obstructing tree branches in front of him and leaned on the trunk, looking at the vast expanse of snow in the vicinity. the sunlight shining on the snow made it blinding and painful to look at. the junior members also stopped for a rest, their eyes alertly watching their surroundings as if they were concentrated on finding the enemy. but anyone familiar with them would know that these old foxes were not looking for an enemy but observing the area for potential dangers. they were afraid the expert archer was hiding nearby, waiting to send an arrow through their heads the moment they least expected it. du qing wasn¡¯t unaware of his subordinates¡¯ thoughts, but he didn¡¯t care. subordinates were for doing odd jobs and boosting their numbers. they were there to test the waters for potential danger and distract their enemies. weren¡¯t they? otherwise, what was the point of spending tens of silver taels each month to keep them around? so, du qing didn¡¯t care much for his subordinates¡¯ lives. if someone died, he would simply recruit a new one. there were always plenty of impoverished people in the world who were willing to gamble their lives away for a better future. human lives were cheap in this world. similarly, du qing didn¡¯t care much about the deaths of zhao er and the other two. his anger stemmed from the fact that his men were killed, and his and his gang¡¯s authority had been violated. at the same time, there was a little worry: ¡°now that there was a mishap with my men, ma hong and his guys would definitely not let this opportunity slip by. they would kick me while i¡¯m down in front of the gang leader, trying to make trouble for me. i¡¯m going to have to cough up some money to smooth things over for this mistake. when i catch that damned hunter, i¡¯ll make sure to cut him into a thousand pieces. ¡± du qing gritted his teeth, his determination to catch the audacious hunter growing stronger. just then, a flash of black dashed past his vision, startling him awake. a junior member gasped in horror. du qing turned to see that one of his gang members had been shot through the temple by an arrow. the arrow went into the brain and came out of the temple on the other side. seeing this scene, he knew who it was: ¡°it¡¯s him!¡± du qing quickly scanned the surroundings and caught a glimpse of a fleeting figure under a tree in the distance. ¡°he¡¯s over there. follow me.¡± without waiting for a response, he charged forward. the qingzhu gang members, dazed by the sudden turn of events, finally came to their senses. seeing their boss had already charged forward, they could only harden their resolve and follow, regardless of their fear. meanwhile, at the forefront¡­ lu yuan swiftly maneuvered through the dense forest, casting a quick glance towards the six pursuers behind him, a smirk appearing on his face. the prey had taken the bait.. Chapter 32 - Chapter 32: Chapter 25: Harvest and Returning Home chapter 32: chapter 25: harvest and returning home translator: 549690339 ¡°chase him, he¡¯s just ahead!¡± within the vast snowy forest, du qing led his subordinates, determinedly pursuing the fleeing silhouette in front of them. as a middle-level manager of the qingzhu gang, his strength was naturally not bad. not only had he practiced the gang¡¯s green snake stick technique, but he had also cultivated one of his meridians and developed inner strength. although his strength was still insignificant in the greater jianghu, it was already considered remarkable in the countryside of nan¡¯an county. with a pair of iron rods in his hands, he could easily take on twenty armed men without breaking a sweat. it was precisely because of his martial prowess that du qing dared to pursue without any hesitation. ¡®just a lowly mountain hunter, with nothing more than brute strength¡­ hm, decent archery skills too, but all of this will turn into dust under my iron rod.¡¯ with violent thoughts flashing through his mind, du qing licked his lips, already desperate to use the iron rod to crack open the damned hunter¡¯s skull. the spectacle of the hunter¡¯s brains scattering everywhere would be a sight to behold. ¡°ah!¡± just as du qing was considering how to torture the hunter after capturing him, another scream resounded through the air. he looked to find one of his underlings, who had been chasing after him, suddenly disappeared into the ground below, falling into a deep pit. ¡°damn it!¡± du qing cursed in a low voice and hurriedly went over to check. as he approached, he saw his subordinate dazhuang lying in the pit, his body pierced by more than ten sharpened wooden stakes, and blood flowing from his mouth, nose, and wounds. with such severe injuries, it was clear he wouldn¡¯t survive. ¡°save me¡­ cough¡­ cough¡­¡± as dazhuang saw his boss approaching, a flicker of hope flashed through his eyes. he tried to raise his arm for help but eventually dropped it halfway and stopped moving entirely. this scene shocked the other qingzhu gang members gathered around the pit, leaving them a mix of angry and afraid. seeing yet another one of his underlings die, the rage inside du qing¡¯s heart reached a boiling point. roaring fiercely, he bellowed, ¡°i will never let you escape! i will never let you go!¡± after shouting twice, he turned to face his remaining subordinates, eyes red and face twisted with fury, ¡°follow me, we¡¯re not stopping until we catch that kid!¡± ¡°yes!¡± the remaining four gang members answered with trembling voices, their hearts full of apprehension as they continued their pursuit. little did they know that they would soon come to regret their decision. the dangers in the mountains are often far more terrifying than what people outside could imagine. under the guidance of an adept hunter, the qingzhu gang members quickly realized that danger lurked everywhere, and death followed them like a shadow. traps, poisonous insects, fierce beasts¡­ during their short journey through the mountains, lu yuan had laid numerous hunting traps for their pursuers by following his preordained route. and under the meticulous treatment of an expert hunter, the qingzhu gang members fell one by one along the way. unbeknownst to them, five of their comrades had fallen during the chase. now, only two remained. during the pursuit, du qing¡¯s face had become twisted with rage, driven nearly mad by the continuous deaths of his subordinates. but behind him, the last ordinary gang member suddenly turned and fled, screaming, ¡°i can¡¯t take it anymore, i¡¯m leaving the mountain!¡± ¡°stop, don¡¯t run!¡± seeing one of his men attempt to flee, du qing was furious and immediately shouted in reprimand. but the man did not listen and continued to run desperately towards the mountain¡¯s exit. ¡°you¡¯re courting death!¡± having been tormented by the chase to the point of losing his balance, du qing could contain his murderous intent no longer and finally snapped. he clenched his iron rod, turned and closed the distance within a few strides, then raised it to ruthlessly smash the deserter¡¯s head. with a loud thud. just like smashing a watermelon, the deserter¡¯s skull shattered into countless fragments and splattered onto the ground. ¡°tsk, tsk, so ruthless.¡± far away, hidden behind dense foliage, lu yuan peered through the gaps and could not help but exclaim at the sight. these gangsters were ruthless not only to their enemies but also to their own people. his decision to avoid close combat with the man was the right one; who knows what horrible things these cruel men would do if they got too close? he was just a weak and helpless hunter, and against these evil men, he could only rely on his wits to triumph. ¡°but judging from the performance of that leader, he¡¯s likely practiced martial arts and may even have cultivated inner strength. i wonder if he¡¯s a notable figure?¡± lu yuan furrowed his brow. he had only learned a palm skill and barely cultivated one meridian. with such limited strength, confronting the green bamboo gang leader directly, given his display of power so far, might not be a winning proposition. ¡°looks like i need to find a way to wear him down some more.¡± with that thought, lu yuan raised his bow and aimed at du qing, who had just crushed the skull of his own man and was momentarily in a daze. shooting the arrow without hesitation.. Chapter 33 - Chapter 33: Chapter 25: Harvest and Returning Home 2 chapter 33: chapter 25: harvest and returning home 2 translator: 549690339 the dense jungle provides the best cover for hunters. the countless trees and bushes offer optimal conditions for launching sneak attacks with arrows. at this moment, an arrow shoots out, silently piercing through the distance of over a hundred meters, heading straight for du qing. the warrior¡¯s heightened awareness alerts him to the approaching danger. however, his brief moment of distraction causes the qingzhu gang leader to miss his best chance to dodge the attack. the best he can do now is to twist his body to avoid the vital areas, but his arm is still pierced by the arrow. the sharp iron arrowhead punctures his left upper arm bone, causing him intense pain and forcing him to drop the iron rod he was holding. with his left arm injured, his iron rod martial art skills are rendered useless, greatly reducing his strength in an instan t. under such pain, du qing quickly snaps out of his fury. he immediately realizes that it is now impossible for him to catch the elusive hunter, given his injured state. even now, he finds himself in grave danger. ¡°escape, i must escape from this mountain.¡± having lost all of his underlings and being injured himself, du qing soberly realizes that he is not dealing with an ordinary hunter. rather, he faces a terrifying foe who possesses great patience, cunning, and strength. confronting this kind of existence, even he feels a chill in his bones. in an instant. like the subordinate whose head he had just crushed, du qing¡¯s body desperately races back down the path he came from. in these mountains, he has no familiarity with the terrain and is at a disadvantage against the hunters who grew up in the mountains. he vows that if he can escape, he will report to the gang leader and have him bring all gang members to capture all the hunters in the vicinity and enter the mountain with overwhelming force. once they find that despicable and treacherous culprit, he will take his revenge. after all, when there are green hills left, there will always be firewood to burn. at this point, du qing must preserve this flame of revenge. in the distance. lu yuan watches as the qingzhu gang leader suddenly turns and flees and is momentarily stunned. however, he quickly understands that his prey wants to escape. he has painstakingly laid so much groundwork and spent so much time luring his prey¡ªhow could he let the quarry slip away now? without any hesitation, he raises his bow and arrows and gives chase. he pursues the fleeing gang leader while launching a continuous barrage of arrows. when the qingzhu gang was more numerous, lu yuan had refrained from using his deadly archery skills to launch sneak attacks, fearing that it would scare off his prey. that said, given their numbers, he would have had a hard time leaving no one behind. as a result, lu yuan had repressed his urge earlier, leading the prey in circles through the forest while using traps to harm them. the primary purpose of this was to eliminate the small fry first. now that the goal has been reached, du qing is frantically running. the more enjoyable the pursuit had been, the more miserable the escape now is. however, the paths of flight and pursuit are not smooth ones. barely visible, the hunter relentlessly drives the quarry, his presence only marked by the occasional arrows silently shooting out from between the dense trees. lu yuan takes great pleasure in the thrill of the hunt. he guides his prey like he would during a usual hunt, using arrows to herd them towards the traps he has set up beforehand. finally. as du qing is desperately trying to escape, he stumbles, falling off balance and plunging towards a snow-covered surface. after chasing him for so long, the prey has finally stepped into the prepared trap. seizing the opportunity, lu yuan immediately takes out three arrows from his quiver, releasing them one after another towards the off-balanced du qing. unable to defend himself, one arrow pierces his neck, another pierces his chest, and the last strikes an indescribable spot between his legs¡ªa tribute from lu yuan in return for the relentless pursuit earlier. a huge pain mixed with an indescribable soreness, two strong sensations engulfed du qing¡¯s last remaining consciousness in an instant. with a heavy thud, his body fell into the pit, the sharp wooden stakes below piercing his body once again. ¡°it¡¯s finally over.¡± near the deep pit, lu yuan looked at du qing¡¯s impaled body below, sighed in relief, and his racing heart gradually slowed down. although he had made thorough preparations for today¡¯s life and death hunt, ensuring no risk to his life, it was still an unprecedented experience for him. anxiety, excitement, blood boiling¡­ a murderous impulse surged from the bottom of his heart, as if it had been ignited from within his very blood. he indulged himself in hunting and killing. ¡°no, no, what am i thinking?¡± recalling his earlier emotions, lu yuan shivered and quickly shook his head, discarding those terrifying thoughts: ¡°i am a longevity seeker, an immortal. in the future, i will have an endless life and a wonderful life to enjoy; how can i immerse myself in such dangerous fighting and killing? what¡¯s the point of fighting with others? one misstep, and my life would be gone. if i die, i¡¯ll lose everything. how can that be worth it?¡± he suppressed those horrible thoughts, secretly thinking that perhaps he had hunted and killed too many prey recently, and his emotions had been affected. hmm. in that case, he would give up hunting for the rest of the winter. during the new year¡¯s festival, he would properly enjoy the festive atmosphere and adjust his mindset. lu yuan made arrangements for the next stage of his life, jumped down into the pit, and began his usual post-fight operation of looting the body. after searching the corpse briefly, he quickly found a large money pouch and removed a jade ring from du qing¡¯s hand. only then did he leave, satisfied. the leader of the qingzhu gang was quite rich. from the money pouch, lu yuan took out more than twenty silver taels, already a huge sum of money. ¡°there are still six ordinary gang corpses in the mountains. they must have a lot of money on them, too. indeed, making money from hunting is the fastest.¡± touching the heavy money bag in his hand, lu yuan¡¯s thoughts drifted once again. but then he sobered up quickly: ¡°no, hunting is good, but for safety reasons, i cannot use this identity as the arrow god of dayu mountain too often. this time, it was for money and i had no choice but to do it. in the future, i should be cautious whenever possible. as a longevity seeker, safety is the most important thing; everything else is an illusion.¡± lu yuan warned himself once again in his heart. half an hour later, with an additional twenty silver taels he had looted from the corpses, the arrow god of dayu mountain left southsea territory, entered the vast mountain range, and began his journey home. during this hunting trip, he earned fifty-three silver taels. including the one hundred and thirty silver taels earned from selling fur, his total profit for this southsea trip amounted to one hundred and eighty-three silver taels. together with his existing savings, he had finally accumulated more than two hundred silver taels. with such a fortune, he would not have to worry about the expenses for his martial arts training in the next two years. ¡°no, during normal times, i can hunt my own meat and don¡¯t have to buy it, saving some expenses. plus the money i earn from regular hunting, two hundred silver taels should be enough to last for at least five years.¡± ten days later, with a relaxed pace and walking on thick snow, lu yuan left the mountains with a smile on his face. yangmei town¡¯s cooking smoke curled in the distance, the fields were covered in white snow, and children were playing under the plum trees at the street corners. two elderly men with white hair watched the scene with kind eyes, their faces full of happy smiles. ¡°this world is so peaceful, tranquil, and joyful; it¡¯s wonderful.¡± feeling sentimental, lu yuan stepped into the small town, greeting familiar people along the way. suddenly, a burst of firecrackers sounded nearby. he asked around and found out it was the celebration for a wealthy man named sun, who owned a soy sauce shop on the west street, who just had a big, fat son. after a short walk, he finally arrived at the entrance of his home. the lock on the gate was covered in a layer of snow, and it seemed that ice had formed inside the lock. with some effort, he managed to open the lock. pushing the door open, he looked at the courtyard covered in snow and his eyes filled with warmth. ¡°i¡¯m home.¡± in the empty house, lu yuan muttered softly. the fatigue that had accumulated over time seemed to vanish with those words. his heart was filled with tranquility.. Chapter 34 - Chapter 34: Chapter 26: Anecdotes of Immortals, Busy Retreat chapter 34: chapter 26: anecdotes of immortals, busy retreat translator: 549690339 life in the countryside, in fact, is very slow and peaceful. with the arrival of winter, the busy farming season has ended, and the villagers in town, apart from being busy with some trivial matters, have no major rarmmg work to nanale. after a year of hard work, people finally have some leisure time to enjoy this rare tranquility. taking advantage of this atmosphere, lu yuan also gave up his plan to hunt in the mountains and stayed at home every day. in addition to regular palm skill practice, and expanding his meridians and cultivating inner strength, he would occasionally bring some cured meat and appetizing dishes to share with his cheap teacher, sun siwen, while enjoying a chat and a cup of boiled wine. lu yuan really liked talking with sun siwen. although sun siwen was despised by the townspeople for being in his twenties and still unable to pass the scholar¡¯s degree, they considered him a disgrace to scholars. however, lu yuan was not interested in the classics of the imperial examination. things like ¡°the master said, knowledge is power¡± were simply uninteresting to listen to. compared to these, his interest mainly lies in chatting with sun siwen about yue country and the customs of different regions. there is a saying. a scholar does not need to leave his house to know the world¡¯s affairs. compared to farmers who spend their whole life in the fields and merchants who travel within a certain range, sun siwen, who can often meet with other scholars and engage in higher-level discussions, has more knowledge and a broader perspective than others. for example. through sun siwen¡¯s words, lu yuan learned that yue country had eight provinces, seventy-two prefectures, and over a thousand counties, covering a vast territory. he also learned that yue country was not the only dynasty in the world. to the north, there were liang and zhou countries, both great powers that were no less formidable than yue country. liang and yue countries were at odds, with occasional skirmishes on their borders, but no full-scale war had broken out. around the three nations, there were also several small countries with varying strengths, each of which either paid tribute to or confronted the three nations. lu yuan also learned that it was the 19th year of longqing. emperor longqing had ruled for thirty years. longqing was his third title, and the one he had used the longest, for almost twenty years now. all of the above information was not available in the local teahouses. therefore, he visited his cheap teacher more frequently. on this day, lu yuan brought wine and met sun siwen at the plum forest outside the town. they boiled wine together in a small pavilion by the roadside. today¡¯s topic was myths, legends, and rural tales. since learning that there were martial arts in this world, and that he had even practiced them himself, lu yuan became extremely interested in the immortal techniques in the legends. however, he was not sure whether this was a martial arts world or an immortal martial world. in the past year or so, he had never encountered any spirits or monsters while wandering through the mountains. the fox spirits and wild gods were only to be found in the legends. but none of this hindered him from exploring the truth about the world. and the best way to do so at this time was naturally through sun siwen. fortunately, brother sun, though not proficient in classical studies and unable to become a scholar, had a good knowledge of rural legends and bizarre tales, having read many related collections in his spare time. especially in the stories of scholars encountering fox spirits and having romantic encounters for one night, mr. sun spoke eloquently. lu yuan speculated privately. this might be due to professional empathy, or perhaps it was because brother sun had been frustrated for so long that he had a deep repression in his heart, and so he was particularly keen on these stories of scholars suddenly becoming rich through a beautiful woman¡¯s embrace. fortunately, he didn¡¯t mind these stories. after all, men¡­ how could the conversation between them not have a hint of color? even when discussing which of the various erotic stories was better, whether fox spirits or mermaids, they would argue passionately and eventually laugh it off. however, sun siwen was still a scholar after all. these sensual stories were just casual fun, and after talking about them once, they didn¡¯t delve further. the topic gradually shifted to the state of the world and the current affairs of buddhism and taoism. emperor longqing was an advocate of buddhism and taoism, and had even granted several titles to masters and true persons. they were said to have mysterious powers, able to walk on water and control fire, like real immortals. to support these masters and true persons, emperor longqing spent a fortune, levied corvee labor, and built several large palaces and temples near the capital for them to live in. at the same time, he built numerous taoist temples and monasteries throughout the country, granting them tax exemption. it could be said that they were very well looked after. ¡°the current peaceful world is all thanks to the wise governance of our confucian scholars. those monks and taoists don¡¯t engage in corvee labor, don¡¯t pay taxes, shelter fugitives, indulge in temple debauchery, and disrupt the imperial order.¡± when sun siwen talked about the current chaos in the court, although he had no accomplishments or titles, and was still just a commoner, he had the demeanor of a great sage in lu yuan¡¯s past life. at this point, after drinking a cup of green plum wine, he began to criticize the government: ¡°it¡¯s a pity that the emperor has been bewitched by these demons. this indulgence cannot go on, or else the nation will be no more.¡± what is the greatest sorrow for a scholar? of course, it¡¯s the fact that his knowledge is not valued by the emperor, and his lifelong ambitions are never realized. for a scholar with aspirations but no achievements, this sorrow is even greater.. Chapter 35 - Chapter 35: Chapter 26: Anecdotes of Immortals, Busy Retreat 2 chapter 35: chapter 26: anecdotes of immortals, busy retreat 2 translator: 549690339 for he would find that his rigorous study for over a decade was considered less valuable in the emperor¡¯s eyes than those demons who only knew how to deceive and bewitch people¡¯s minds. at least those demons are exempt from tax, they can become honored guests of high officials, and are worshiped by countless people. yet he himself is impoverished, still burdened with corvee and taxes. a single word of ¡®hardship¡¯ hardly describes his plight. therefore, it is understandable that sun siwen is frustrated and disappointed at this moment. a few complaints are only human nature. although lu yuan feels that if he were to report brother sun to the government, he would definitely not escape a crime of banishment based on these words. but who is he? a novice seeker of longevity, the arrow god of dayu mountain, one who shares the same lifespan as heaven, how could he commit such an act of betraying a friend? therefore, this thought simply passed through his mind and was completely suppressed when he found that there was no benefit in doing this, and it would also damage his reputation. an action with no benefits, i, lu yuan, will not take. however, compared to sun siwen¡¯s grumbling, the true person sorcerer he mentioned earlier quickly caught his attention. walking on water, controlling flames¡­ although sun siwen scoffed at these divine powers and perceived them as deceptive tricks employed by the demons to blindfold and manipulate the emperor¡¯s judgment. to lu yuan, his understanding of the whole matter instantly shifted to another level. ¡°although my current exploration of this world has not found any mountain spirits, wild monsters, fox ghosts or fairies. but since inexplicable powers such as martial arts and internal strength that defy common sense exist in this world. then the appearance of some people who have mastered immortal techniques is not that incomprehensible and impossible. these so-called true person sorcerers who are able to walk on water and control fire, since they are so highly revered by the emperor, might actually possess real abilities, wielding cryptic powers that are difficult for ordinary people to comprehend.¡± lu yuan was deep in thought, then went along with sun siwen, criticizing the demons. from his words, he obtained some rumors about the demons. for example, there was once a sorcerer who claimed to be impervious to water and fire. in a crowded market, he directly plunged his hand into a boiling oil pot, then pulled it out completely unscathed. another true person claimed he could read minds, randomly pulled a stranger on the street and was able to recount exactly what the person had done earlier, leaving people astonished. and an even more remarkable one was a true person from the celestial master¡¯s mansion whose divine power was shocking and could control thunder to banish evil spirits. at the time, a high official¡¯s house in the capital was said to be haunted and they asked this true person for help. this true person from the celestial master¡¯s mansion came to the courtyard of the high official¡¯s home, and after casting a spell, thunder seemed to sound around them, interspersed with the wailing of a woman. after that, the true person said that the evil spirit had been obliterated by thunder. since then, the high official¡¯s house really hasn¡¯t experienced any eerie incidents, which startled people at the time, and became widely spread. lu yuan also heard this story from a merchant while having tea in the county town two months ago, but the version had varied so much that it was beyond recognition, sounding more and more bizarre. at that time, he just took it as a myth, laughing it off, not really paying much attention to it. only after listening to mr. sun¡¯s account did he realize the stories were actually about the real-life incidents of the true people of the current dynasty. but after listening to these tales, he started to feel slightly uncertain. because they sounded too much like superstitions used by charlatans to deceive people, pretentious and deceptive. for instance, putting one¡¯s hand into boiling oil, lu yuan knew a scientific method to easily achieve this. as for the so-called mind-reading, setting up a few stooges in advance or collecting information with a bit of thoughtfulness wouldn¡¯t be challenging. as for banishing ghosts with the law of thunder, it¡¯s even simpler. naturally occurring evil spirits might not exist, but man-made ones, wouldn¡¯t they be easy to create? in a nutshell, the stories sounded too much like the tricks of charlatans he had encountered in his previous life, and it was hard not to make connections after hearing them from someone else. ¡°so perhaps this is truly just a world of martial arts, and there are no immortals?¡± remembering the stories he just heard, lu yuan couldn¡¯t help but hesitate. however, this doubt only lasted for a moment before he pushed it to the back of his mind. regardless of whether these are scams, and whether those true person sorcerers can or cannot use immortal techniques, these things are way too distant from him. the capital is a thousand miles away from dayu county, and the events over there to this remote small county, really only exist in rumors. ¡°instead of worrying about these elusive issues, it would be more pragmatic to concentrate on improving my cloud palm technique,¡± lu yuan mocked himself with a smile, raising his wine cup again to toast with sun siwen. since their wine-soaked discussion that day, both lu yuan and sun siwen had less time to interact. it wasn¡¯t because of disagreements or worsening relations between them. it was mostly because each was busy with his own pursuits. sun siwen, who had been a student for over a decade, was now thoroughly immersed in his scholarly studies, even forgetting to sleep and eat. this scholar, preparing for his twelfth attempt at the spring examination next february, once again aimed for the scholar¡¯s degree. would he succeed this time? looking at the past, it seemed doubtful. on the other hand, lu yuan was busy with martial arts practice. his trip to southsea not only brought financial gains but also provided him with a clear understanding of his own strength. ¡°the leader of the qingzhu gang, whom i killed, also possessed inner strength. seeing him wielding the iron rod, he must have practiced some martial arts. in terms of overall strength, he should be equal to me,¡± lu yuan thought, recalling his previous encounter, allowing a nebulous concept to become clear in his mind. ¡°yet, such a person, within the qingzhu gang, was merely a low-level leader, at best a middle manager, not even ranking amongst the top brass. if we speculate based on this, then the high-rank members of the qingzhu gang, the gang leaders and elders, must at the very least be third-rate martial artists who have mastered two meridians and one martial arts technique. given that dayu county is clearly wealthier than southsea county, and the black wolf gang control such a territory, their strength may exceed that of the qingzhu gang. perhaps, the leader of the black wolf gang has achieved minor success in inner strength by mastering six meridians, making him a second-rate martial artist.¡± upon reaching this conclusion, lu yuan couldn¡¯t help but recall ma jiqing. with cloud palm technique, ma jiqing was evidently stronger than lu yuan. probably having mastered the second layer of the mental technique, unblocking three or four meridians, his strength was near the peak of third -rate. yet, such a good martial artist was severely wounded and forced to flee. the person capable of such a feat must be a second-rate master who has achieved minor success in inner strength. however, this thought soon led lu yuan to another concern: ¡°it ma jiqing was severely injured, he must have fought with the high-ranks of the black wolf gang. they must have someone who recognizes the cloud palm technique. even though i got ma jiqing¡¯s martial arts by killing him and looting his body, the black wolf gang don¡¯t know that, do they?¡± according to common logic, the gang might likely assume that lu yuan was ma jiqing¡¯s disciple who inherited his technique, has been practicing fervently, and is out to avenge his master. that¡¯s the typical narrative in martial arts stories. even if he tried to argue he had nothing to do with ma jiqing, that he helped the black wolf gang by killing their enemy. even if the gang members believed him, a second-rate martial arts secret book alone would be enough to incite greed and murderous thoughts. lu yuan felt as if a massive accusation had been placed upon him out of nowhere, ready to drop down at any moment. ¡°therefore, i must practice even harder. without mastering the cloud palm technique and achieving minor success in inner strength, i should not risk mingling in the jianghu.¡± he silently cheered himself on. he had already resolved to limit his trips to town, avoid the people from the black wolf gang as much as possible, and never reveal his martial arts skills in front of them. otherwise, trouble would be inevitable. the jianghu was too dangerous, disturbing the peace with violence and killing at every turn. as a person of noble lineage dedicated to longevity, he had no reason to risk his life fighting these brutes. he should use his advantages, outlive his opponents, and wear them out. when they are old and their descendants are still not powerful enough, he can send the entire family to the cemetery. isn¡¯t that a better plan? Chapter 36 - Chapter 36: Chapter 27 New Year chapter 36: chapter 27 new year translator: 549690339 in the blink of an eye, it was the 24th of the twelfth lunar month, the time of xiao nian. xiao nian is also considered the beginning of the busy new year season. from this time, people start to prepare for the new year¡¯s goods, cleaning their houses, offering sacrifices to the kitchen god, and gearing up for the upcoming new year. every household in yangmei town began to get busy. women stayed at home to clean up the dirt in their houses. the children who loved to play were, under the orders of their elders, reluctantly joining the cleanup process. however, their playful nature soon took over, and they started to find fun in the work, turning it into play and laughter. men went to the town market to buy new year¡¯s goods. although yangmei town was just a small remote town, there were still more than a dozen villages nearby. as the festive season approached, the residents of these nearby villages and the town congregated in the market, using their hard-earned savings from the year to buy their desired new year¡¯s goods. merchants from all around were drawn to the town, bringing with them various goods and setting up market stalls. because there were too many people attending the fair, the town¡¯s market could not accommodate everyone, so some businessmen simply set up makeshift stalls on a flat piece of land outside the town and started doing outdoor business. seizing this opportunity, lu yuan carried his large bamboo basket filled with smoked cured meats to the market and set up a stall. the bustling market covered the open space outside the town, with countless people gathered inside, and the noisy chatter was deafening. walking through the lively market, he noticed that there were all sorts of stalls, selling snacks, tea, needles and threads, cloth, dried fruits, liquor, meat, couplets, papercuts¡­ anything needed for the new year could be found here. lu yuan walked around and found that most of the spaces in the market were already occupied, leaving only a few marginal corners with some vacancies. however, even these vacancies were exploited by some sharp-minded people who had set up empty stalls and were not selling any goods, simply leasing these spaces. you didn¡¯t have to rent from them, but with no empty spaces left in the market, there was simply no room for you to set up shop. as for forcibly taking the space? those who could do this business certainly had connections, with the town mayor being the biggest backer. could you fight against them? feeling helpless, lu yuan muttered ¡°rip-off¡± under his breath, reluctantly handed over fifty cents for the booth fee, and started his business. this year he had quite a bounty from his hunting, not including rabbits and wild chickens, he had at least dozens of large prey such as wolves, tigers, and leopards. these animals contributed more than two thousand pounds of cured meat besides their fur. there was no way lu yuan could finish eating all of this meat by himself, and it would go bad if left for too long. so, naturally, he took the opportunity to sell it in exchange for money. ¡°cured meat, cheap and delicious cured meat!¡± he arranged the meat he brought in his basket on the stall and began to call out to customers. soon, a customer was attracted: ¡°how much is this meat?¡± lu yuan looked at the customer, a simply dressed farmer who probably rarely ate meat, and with a smile, said, ¡°this is cured tiger meat, fifty cents a pound.¡± hearing the price, the man was startled and quickly pointed to the next item: ¡°it¡¯s too expensive, what about this?¡± ¡°this is wild boar meat, thirty cents a pound.¡± ¡°is there something cheaper?¡± ¡°there is. this is wild yellow dog meat, ten cents a pound.¡± ¡°ok, i¡¯ll take two pounds of this.¡± watching the customer walk away with a string of meat, lu yuan¡¯s first order was completed. perhaps it was because of the low prices, people continuously came to patronize the meat stall throughout the day. in no time, cheaper fox meat, wild yellow dog meat, wolf meat, leopard meat, and so on were quickly sold out. even the expensive tiger meat was purchased by some wealthy households in the town who sent their servants to buy it. this forced him to make another trip back home to fetch more inventory and continue selling. after repeating this three times and half a day, the two thousand pounds of cured meat were finally all sold. as for the remaining two hundred pounds of meat in his home, lu yuan did not sell it, intending to keep it for himself to eat. after all, martial arts training takes a toll on the body, requiring an ample supply of meat for energy. the day¡¯s business earned lu yuan another forty-three silver taels, increasing his savings by a fifth. with a substantial sum of money in his possession, he felt a surge of pride. after paying for his stall, he didn¡¯t rush home but instead strolled around the market. it would soon be the second new year since he had traveled to this world. last year, lu yuan was penniless and forced to skimp on the new year¡¯s celebration in order to save money for martial arts training, making it a very frugal affair. but now that he has over two hundred silver taels, money is no longer an issue, and he decided to treat himself well, as a way to comfort his loneliness. he found a crowded tea stall in the market and ordered a variety of cheap, tasty dishes, enjoying the food while listening to the idle chatter and gossip around him. time passed in this way all afternoon. feeling satisfied with his meal, lu yuan bought some dried fruits, couplets, and fresh new year¡¯s goods, and went to a cloth store in the town to order a few sets of new clothes to be picked up in two days, before leisurely returning home. upon arriving home, he didn¡¯t have time to relax. since he had decided to celebrate the new year properly, he needed to create a festive atmosphere and do all the necessary preparations.. Chapter 37 - Chapter 37: Chapter 27 New Year_2 chapter 37: chapter 27 new year_2 translator: 549690339 in the town, other people¡¯s wives and children help with the cleaning, so they tidy up the house by late morning and then spend the afternoon enjoying the festival with the family and the new year¡¯s goods their fathers and husbands bring home. however, lu yuan is a bachelor and has no one to help with household chores. so, after being busy all morning, he still had to work in the afternoon, tirelessly cleaning the house. fortunately, he lived alone, and there wasn¡¯t much stuff in his house. besides a few pieces of furniture, the kitchen was the only area that needed a lot of cleaning, as he cooked often and had many stains. it was relatively easy to clean up. after an hour, he finished cleaning and dumped the last bucket of dirty water in the yard. lu yuan wiped his sweat and sighed with relief. ¡°finally done.¡± he turned and looked at the freshly cleaned room behind him, a smile appearing on his face. cleaning the house before the new year, preparing for a clean and fresh start, actually symbolizes a beautiful wish ¨C bidding farewell to the old, welcoming the new, embracing fortune and good luck. this is the simplest wish in everyone¡¯s heart. through this round of cleaning, although a bit tired physically, lu yuan really felt that the gloom and frustration in his heart had been swept away along with the dirt he had cleaned. ¡°although i am a traverser, whose soul is in a foreign land, i now have my own home, where i can make money by hunting and practice martial arts, and even enjoy longevity. everything doesn¡¯t seem so bad after all.¡± he smiled, opened the door, and stared into the distant sky, his eyes deep. after the ¡°little new year,¡± it¡¯s new year¡¯s eve. on this day, the new year¡¯s eve night is celebrated. in order not to feel so lonely, lu yuan and sun siwen agreed to spend the new year together. he took the wine and meat he had prepared in advance and two large food boxes and went to mr. sun¡¯s home. the reason they celebrate the new year at his place is mainly because sun siwen¡¯s house is spacious. his family used to be minor landlords in the town, owning a hundred acres of fertile land, and they had a big house with ten rooms. but then misfortune befell on the family, and during his generation, their remaining wealth had to support his education despite failing the scholar¡¯s degree examination twelve times. you must know that the imperial examinations were not cheap, they were very costly. they had to buy books to study classics daily, spend on ink, brushes, and paper for writing, and buy past examination papers to study before the examination, all while paying a hefty registration fee. after all, the examination venues provided them with ink, brushes, and paper, and they needed money to buy them. oh, and the imperial examination also follows the ancient recommendation system. to register for the examination, you need at least two scholars to jointly recommend you to get that qualification. so, this recommendation fee is another expense. ¡°brother lu, you don¡¯t know, but every year before the annual imperial examination, i buy the volumes issued by the education official. each volume costs at least two hundred cents. the education official is responsible for the studies of county students, and the annual county examination questions are all set by him and the county lord. the examination volumes he issues usually contain some questions for the next year¡¯s exam. so, which student aiming for official status would dare not buy them? but the education official in our county is too greedy, and he issues as many as three to five volumes every year. just buying those volumes costs a silver tale each year. add in the daily practice of calligraphy and examination of the volumes, the consumption of ink, brushes, and paper, and it costs at least two silver tales a year. enrollment fees for the imperial examination are 300 cents. and because i fail to pass exams time after time, those other students don¡¯t want to be associated with me, and no one wants to recommend me. in order to obtain the examination qualification, i had to spend a silver tale to ask two old scholars to vouch for me. every year during the imperial examination, there are also accommodation fees in the county town and gatherings with fellow students¡­¡± it¡¯s getting late, and lu yuan and sun siwen are drinking heartily. mr. sun seemed to have drunk a little too much and looked flushed. he gulped down a glass of wine and slammed it heavily on the table, saying painfully, ¡°every year, i need to spend eight silver tales on imperial examinations and studying alone. if you include the cost of food and drink throughout the year, it would be even more than ten silver tales. yet i couldn¡¯t make up the money and had to sell my family¡¯s assets to maintain my studies. i know how people outside see me ¨C they say i¡¯m ruining my family, and i¡¯m incompetent. those fellow students who call me their brother act friendly on the surface, but they must be secretly laughing at me, despising me, and not wanting anything to do with me. after all, who would appreciate someone who couldn¡¯t pass the scholar¡¯s degree after trying twelve times?¡± sun siwen raised his head and looked at lu yuan in front of him, a hint of gratitude in his eyes, ¡°brother lu, only you are willing to truly be friends with me and willing to learn to write from me. in this lifetime, you might be the only friend i¡¯ll ever have.¡± under the stare of sincere eyes, lu yuan¡¯s face remained unchanged, but he felt somewhat guilty in his heart. in fact, he wasn¡¯t as sincere as the other party had said. his main purpose in making friends with mr. sun was to obtain high-end information from him and to learn more from him. because as his study of the liuyun palm heart method deepened, lu yuan found that with his current knowledge, it was still somewhat difficult to fully understand this mental technique. the main issue was the lack of understanding of various ancient texts, as well as some unique terms and allusions within this world¡¯s mental technique. it was difficult to understand thoroughly based on his knowledge from his previous life. in this case, finding a teacher with a deep understanding of ancient texts and a strong familiarity with various allusions became essential. so for lu yuan, the wine and food he had brought to mr. sun over the past year were not free, but rather tuition fees. in his opinion, their relationship could still be considered as one of wining and dining friends. ¡°i just didn¡¯t expect brother sun to regard me as a close friend.¡± for this, lu yuan didn¡¯t know what to say. perhaps it was because the other party had suffered too much discrimination and disdain for a long time, which had affected his heart. suddenly encountering a friend like himself who didn¡¯t despise him and was easy to talk to, sun siwen might have quickly opened his heart to him. ¡°but having a true friend might not necessarily be a bad thing.¡± looking at the increasingly drunken sun siwen, there was a smile on his face. being alone in a foreign land, one feels even more homesick during the festive seasons. how could lu yuan not feel lonely and isolated when he had traveled alone to this unfamiliar world? the feeling that nobody in the world could understand him was not easy to bear. having another friend he could get along with now, though he might not be able to reveal the true secrets in his heart, simply drinking and talking in his daily life could alleviate the melancholy in his heart. ¡®i¡¯ll accept this friendship.¡¯ as lu yuan muttered to himself, he heard sun siwen¡¯s drunken, somewhat bewildered words. ¡°this time, i must pass the imperial examination and attain a scholar¡¯s degree. i want to show those who look down on me that i, sun siwen, can also become a scholar. i will also become a juren, a jinshi, and bring honor to my ancestors. father, mother¡­¡± in the midst of his drunken murmur, he fell asleep. at this very moment. unbeknownst to lu yuan, the still night outside was suddenly filled with countless bright lights, followed by the continuous crackling sound of fireworks. all the families who could afford it were now lighting firecrackers to celebrate the new year. unbeknownst to him, new year¡¯s eve had passed, and it was now the new year. lu yuan walked into the courtyard and looked up at the vast night sky. the bright moonlight hung high above, casting its white radiance down, falling on the freshly-laid snow in the clean courtyard, reflecting sparkling white light, aazznng to tne eye. ¡°lu yuan, happy new year.¡± he whispered a new year blessing to himself and then, with a smile, picked up a bundle of firecrackers already prepared in the courtyard, lit the fuse, and ignited them. the cracking sound immediately appeared in the courtyard, mingling with the festive sounds outside. the peaceful and tranquil small town welcomed the new year. a new beginning, a time for renewal. ¡°has new year¡¯s eve passed?¡± watching the firecrackers explode in the courtyard, sun siwen, seemingly awakened by the noises outside, also stumbled out, looking at the firecrackers and asked in a dazed manner. ¡°yes, it¡¯s the new year.¡± lu yuan replied with a smile. ¡°is that so?¡± sun siwen murmured, then looked at him and said with a smile, ¡°well, happy new year, brother lu.¡± lu yuan was taken aback, but then also smiled, ¡°happy new year, brother sun.¡± this year, he wasn¡¯t alone; he had someone accompanying him. i am not lonely. he thought to himself.. Chapter 38 - Chapter 38: Chapter 28 Aphrodisiac Medicine chapter 38: chapter 28 aphrodisiac medicine translator: 549690339 once new year¡¯s day was over, it was time for the spring festival. this year, lu yuan didn¡¯t celebrate it with sun siwen. though they were friends, they were not family, and the spring festival was meant to be spent with family. it was also a good time for him to enjoy some alone time. on the second day of the first month, it was time to visit friends and relatives. lu yuan didn¡¯t have many relatives, but aside from sun siwen, he had a few friends like blacksmith sun six and others. so, visiting their homes was his only option. as they were all neighbors, maintaining a good relationship was important, so he brought along a few strips of bacon to give as gifts during his visits. by the time he returned home, he had received quite a few red envelopes and thank-you gifts. on the third day, lu yuan went to the county town. it was the beginning of the month, and he had just finished using the medicinal herbs he bought last month for his martial arts training, so he needed to replenish his stock. the morning sun was particularly bright, and the accumulated snow on the roads couldn¡¯t handle the warmth, so it melted into the soil, making the roads muddy. after spending an hour on the road, lu yuan finally saw the city gate, and he couldn¡¯t help but feel relieved. in an ancient society similar to his previous lifetime, road construction technology was terrible. even the official roads had potholes after being soaked with water, making it a difficult journey. ¡°fortunately, this leg of the journey is finally over.¡± lu yuan shook his head, shook his backpack, and headed happily into the city. although it was during the holiday season, the gatekeeper officials didn¡¯t forget their professional ethics. they stopped anyone who entered the city, ready to earn some extra money for the festivities. however, lu yuan now had a registered residence and was no longer undocumented, so he didn¡¯t fear any threats. his backpack contained only an empty strip of bacon and nothing else. so, the officials begrudgingly took the basic five cents as an entrance fee, pushed the ¡°poor guy¡± in, and let him enter the city. pretending to be afraid and intimidated, lu yuan sneaked a glance at the officials, memorizing their faces. he would make sure to pay them back for their long-term ¡°care.¡± zhou¡¯s pharmacy. although it was during the holiday season, injuries and diseases didn¡¯t pay attention to such things. when someone got seriously ill, they still needed treatment. that¡¯s why the pharmacy opened right after the spring festival. doctor zhou zhe was relaxing in his chair, watching his son zhou qing handle the herbs with a smile. ¡°doctor zhou.¡± lu yuan knocked on the door of the pharmacy and walked in. he took out a strip of bacon from his backpack and handed it to zhou qing, who had curiously walked over, saying with a smile, ¡°here, xiaoqing, this is a new year¡¯s gift for your family.¡± this young man was now twelve years old and quite tall, looking like a little adult. zhou qing took the bacon and complained, ¡°i¡¯m not a little kid anymore. i¡¯ve learned how to handle herbs and can even help dispense medicine.¡± lu yuan laughed and said, ¡°yes, yes, you¡¯re not a little kid anymore. in just two more years, you¡¯ll be able to marry and have children.¡± in this era, it was normal for children to get married and have children at the age of fourteen or fifteen. even a twelve-year-old like zhou qing getting married wasn¡¯t uncommon. ¡°you¡­ what are you talking about! who¡¯s getting married¡­¡± zhou qing, still a bit thin-skinned, blushed at the teasing and promptly turned and ran away. watching his retreating figure, lu yuan laughed even harder. ¡°alright, young master lu, stop teasing my boy.¡± zhou zhe, amused as well, tried to maintain the dignity of a father, quickly changing the subject, ¡°are you here to buy medicine today?¡± lu yuan had made a habit of coming here at this time every month to buy medicine. ¡°yes, i am.¡± lu yuan nodded, took out the five silver tales he had prepared, and handed it to zhou zhe, ¡°it¡¯s for a month¡¯s supply, here¡¯s the money.¡± you really don¡¯t know if it¡¯s useful to keep practicing like this? after a year, you still haven¡¯t made a name for yourself and can only continue being a hunter. if you had saved the money you¡¯ve spent on medicine over the past year, you could have bought a few acres of land in the countryside and built a mansion by now. with that kind of property, you could find a good wife and start a family. isn¡¯t that better than pursuing these elusive martial arts skills?¡± zhou zhe advised once again, getting up from his reclining chair, prepared to dispense the medicine personally. the herbs lu yuan bought were, in a sense, an exclusive secret prescription of doctor zhou¡¯s. as the doctor didn¡¯t avoid helping him purchase the medicine, it was a sign of trust. to maintain professional ethics and not betray the trust, doctor zhou always dispensed the medicine by himself. otherwise, his son might be entrusted with the task, but at his young age, who knew if he could keep the secret? ¡°martial arts do have their uses.¡¯ having interacted with zhou zhe for a long time, lu yuan had quite a good impression of the doctor with his solid work ethic and incessant chatter. as a result, he felt no need to hide some less confidential matters and explained while laughing, ¡°take hunting for example. in the past, when encountering ferocious beasts like wolves, tigers, and leopards, i could only rely on traps and dare not fight them directly. but now, even if i faced a fierce flower leopard head-on, i could kill it with just my bare hands.¡± zhou zhe took some medicinal herbs from a cabinet and, somewhat doubtful, asked, ¡°you¡¯ve only been training for a year, and you¡¯re doing it by yourself.. you¡¯ve really made progress?¡± Chapter 39 - Chapter 39: Chapter 28 Sedative Medicine_2 chapter 39: chapter 28 sedative medicine_2 translator: 549690339 seeing the disbelief on the other person¡¯s face, lu yuan looked around and happened to see a small stepping stone at the doorway. so he walked over, picked up the stone, came in front of zhou ze, and shook his hand: ¡®watch.¡± having said that, he mobilized his inner strength and gripped it forcefully. there were a few creaking sounds from the palm of his hand. when his hand opened, the stone had been crushed into powder. ¡°this¡­¡± zhou ze, watching this scene, couldn¡¯t help but widen his eyes in surprise, ¡°you¡¯ve really made a name for yourself in practice.¡± as he spoke, he looked up and down at lu yuan, his eyes more serious than ever, as if he was seeing this seemingly strange mountain hunter for the first time. lu yuan laughed and said, ¡°yeah. so now you know why i¡¯ve always insisted on practicing martial arts, right?¡± ¡°no wonder you¡¯re never willing to save money when i keep advising you.¡± zhou ze nodded in sudden realization, ¡°indeed, with this martial arts, ordinary wealthy farmers in the countryside, those rural women, how could they possibly look up to you. you do have better options; i¡¯ve been too nosy before.¡± however, despite knowing that the other party had made a name for themselves in martial arts practice, he didn¡¯t pay too much attention to it. being a doctor, there were always patients. and those who practiced martial arts were always prone to injuries. zhou ze had been a doctor for over ten years and had treated martial artists in the past. those real martial artists, in terms of martial arts, were far stronger than lu yuan in front of them. crushing a stone with his hand was not a big deal. at most, it changed his impression of lu yuan from an interesting hunter to an interesting hunter with some martial arts skills. when it came to value, for dr. zhou, martial arts skills were worth less than being interesting. it didn¡¯t take a moment, and a month¡¯s supply of herbs was packed: ¡°here, this month¡¯s supply.¡± lu yuan hesitated, reached out to take the herbs, put them in his basket, and couldn¡¯t help but ask a question that had been on his mind, ¡°dr. zhou, do you have any of those sedatives that can knock people out?¡± ever since he speculated that the leader of the black wolf gang might be a second-rate master, and that the other side might harbor ill will towards him if they discovered his identity. lu yuan had felt insecure. but relying solely on martial arts practice, it would take him an unknown number of years to reach the second-rate realm and have enough self-defense power. so at this point, he had no choice but to find a way to add a few more self-defense measures for himself. and the sedative was one of his chosen methods. zhou ze had just returned to his recliner and was about to lie down when he heard this. he immediately turned his head and frowned, ¡®what do you want that for?¡± lu yuan explained, ¡°i¡¯m a hunter, right? as i just said, when hunting, i can deal with strong beasts like leopards and jackals with just my hands. but facing fierce tigers and black bears, my strength is somewhat inadequate. when i was drinking tea in the teahouse, i heard people talking about a knockout drug that is used to knock people out in the jianghu. so i wanted to ask if there was such a drug. if there is, it would be perfect for dealing with fierce beasts like tigers. a single tiger is worth as much as dozens of wild wolves. if i could catch one, i could rest for a whole year.¡± he laid out the excuses he had prepared in his heart. but zhou ze didn¡¯t believe any of it, and sneered, ¡°i think you want to use it to drug people. hunters use traps, not sedatives, to deal with wild animals. do you really think i¡¯m a three-year-old child? how is it that just as you¡¯ve achieved something in martial arts, you can¡¯t wait to kill and plunder, and make some quick money?¡± lu yuan¡¯s expression didn¡¯t change; he just looked at zhou ze and said, ¡°dr. zhou, you know me. i¡¯ve always been timid, so how could i dare use sedatives to drug people, let alone do business without a capital? all of these would lead to execution. the reason i want to buy sedatives is just to have some means of self-defense, that¡¯s all. if doctor zhou doesn¡¯t want to sell them, then forget it, as if i never said anything.¡± although he said this, he had already made up his mind that if zhou ze finally refused, he would have to leave for another place today. there¡¯s no other reason, than just being cautious. once the foundation of trust is broken, all past relationships will only become a catalyst for hatred. zhou ze seemed to be aware of this as well. he looked up and down at lu yuan, recalling their past interactions. the person in front of him didn¡¯t seem to be a cunning and evil person. after hesitating for a moment, he still asked, ¡°are you really just using it for self-defense?¡± lu yuan solemnly nodded his head, ¡°i guarantee it¡¯s just for self-defense.¡± well, purchasing the sedative was indeed for self-defense. but in order to protect myself, if i used the sedative to take out my enemies beforehand, that wouldn¡¯t be considered breaking my promise, right? after all, it was for self-defense. staring at lu yuan¡¯s eyes for a long time, zhou ze couldn¡¯t figure out his intentions and took back his gaze, sighing in his heart, ¡®this boy, he¡¯s really a little fox.¡¯ after lamenting for a moment, he shook his head and said, ¡°i do have a sedative. it¡¯s a ¡°seven-step fragrance¡± that was left behind by a patient who came for treatment seven years ago. he was so badly injured that he died before i could treat him, leaving only the sedative. although i¡¯ve never made it, i¡¯ve studied the formula, and it should be the sedative spoken of in the jianghu..¡± Chapter 40 - Chapter 40: Chapter 28 Sedative_3 chapter 40: chapter 28 sedative_3 translator: 549690339 at this point in the conversation, zhou ze began referring to lu yuan as a jianghu person instead of a hunter. apparently, asking for the sedative has changed his impression in the other party¡¯s mind. however, for lu yuan, he didn¡¯t mind. since he had prepared himself and had asked for the sedative, it already meant he had stepped into the jianghu. in fact, he had already become a jianghu person after the slaughter during his southsea journey. but this jianghu person was still weak and could only use a hunter¡¯s identity as cover. ¡°how much?¡± lu yuan asked. ¡°one hundred silver tales.¡± zhou ze looked at him, with a trace of complexity flashing in his eyes as if to use the price to discourage him one last time. but it was bound to be futile. ¡°alright, i¡¯ll buy it.¡± lu yuan reached out and took a large bag of silver tales from his bosom and placed it on the counter. since he planned to buy a sedative, he had brought most of his savings with him. as for spending a hundred silver tales on sedatives? having an extra means of self-preservation and enhancing his chances of survival was more important to him as a longevity-seeker than anything else. in comparison, wealth could be gradually accumulated over time. ¡®at worst, the arrow god of dayu mountain will go on another jianghu adventure in southsea,¡¯ he thought to himself. alright, some things, once done, are like opening a switch that can¡¯t be turned back. like hunting. zhou ze heard the reply and looked away disappointedly. he then went to the back hall and returned with an aged yellow paper and a large bag of herbs in his hands. ¡°take it, this is the formula and a certain amount of herbs, enough for you to make sedatives for more than ten people.¡± ¡°thank you, dr. zhou.¡± lu yuan¡¯s face brightened, and he reached out to take it. zhou ze pressed his hand on the bag of herbs, looked into his eyes, and said earnestly, ¡°remember, after you leave the pharmacy, everything you do has nothing to do with me. your affairs in jianghu won¡¯t involve me either. can you do that?¡± lu yuan looked at the doctor with a serious expression and said, ¡°yes. after i leave, i¡¯ll just be a regular hunter who often buys medicines. i only came to dr. zhou for treatment because living in the mountains for a long time has taken a toll on my body.¡± zhou ze nodded and said, ¡°as long as you know. i don¡¯t like trouble, and i¡¯m not interested in the affairs of jianghu. i just want to be a peaceful doctor who treats illnesses and eventually pass this shop on to xiaoqing.¡± as he said this, dr. zhou couldn¡¯t help but sigh inwardly. perhaps one day, he would no longer see this interesting guest in front of him. jianghu. these two characters seem to have magic, attracting countless hot-blooded young people to step in. but how would these young people know? once one enters jianghu, it¡¯s nothing but a heap of white bones. no one knows when they¡¯ll fall and become one of them. like the owner of the ¡°seven-step fragrance¡± sedative, even though he had it with him, he still couldn¡¯t hold on to his life and died directly in the clinic, possessing nothing. as a doctor who treats illnesses and injuries, zhou ze had seen many people who died due to jianghu feuds. now, looking at lu yuan, it was as if he saw those dead people he had seen in the past. as for dr. zhou¡¯s thoughts, lu yuan didn¡¯t know. even if he knew, he wouldn¡¯t care. are you kidding? as a longevity seeker and the arrow god of dayu mountain, would he be one of those involved in the messy jianghu fights? when it comes to cherishing life, no one can compare to him. if he really endured, by the time all of zhou ze¡¯s descendants were gone, he would still be alive. so, any grudges, for lu yuan, could be endured through time. time would erase everything and kill all enemies. he didn¡¯t need to fight life and death with others. he just needed to endure. so, buying the sedative was really just for self-defense. someone just thought too much. ¡°thank you for today, dr. zhou.¡± at the doorway of the pharmacy, the smiling lu yuan bowed to zhou ze and said, ¡°i¡¯ll come again next month, take care dr. zhou.¡± after saying that, with a backpack on his back, he turned and walked towards the outskirts of the city.. Chapter 41 - Chapter 41: Chapter 29: Seven-step Fragrance chapter 41: chapter 29: seven-step fragrance translator: 549690339 having obtained the seven-step fragrance, lu yuan¡¯s goal for this trip was accomplished, and he lost interest in strolling around the city. instead, he felt uneasy, as if he were carrying a treasure and feared that others might rob him. despite knowing that this feeling was just his imagination, he couldn¡¯t help it. but in order to calm his nerves, he hastened his steps back to yangmei town. it wasn¡¯t until half an hour later when he saw the small town nestled in the valley that he finally breathed a sigh of relief. upon returning home, lu yuan began boiling the herbs needed for his inner strength cultivation while simultaneously studying the seven-step fragrance formula he had purchased for a hundred silver taels. ¡°according to the formula, there are two ways to make seven-step fragrance. one is to make it into incense sticks, which can be lit to release a sedative smoke. the other is to make it into sedative powder that can be added into food or drink to deceive people. both types of seven-step fragrance have their advantages¡­¡± lu yuan flipped through the yellowed sheets of paper in his hand. the paper was covered in over two thousand characters, detailing all sorts of formulas and production processes. it even kindly provided several methods of using a sedative, making it a mini-guide to sedatives. after roughly reading through the formula, he put it away and took out the drug ingredients that zhou ze had gifted him when he bought the formula. he began to verify and confirm them. having consumed various herbs for over a year, lu yuan had gained a certain understanding of them. though this understanding was still limited, he was no longer completely in the dark when it came to identifying herbs. he may not be able to diagnose and prescribe medicine to treat people¡¯s illnesses, but recognizing a few herbs was not difficult. at this point, he pulled out his w?n f?ng y?o g?ng, a medical manual he had purchased for a silver tael, and with thick pages opened, he slowly identified each herb. ¡°red line snake venom, seven illusion petals, four-legged insect skin, bitter scale fruit¡­¡± after checking all the ingredients, lu yuan confirmed that the herbs listed in the formula were all present. relieved that he didn¡¯t have to search for and purchase them himself, he couldn¡¯t help but praise zhou ze as a kind -hearted man. it was no simple task to gather the 31 ingredients needed for the seven-step fragrance formula, not to mention that purchasing the herbs alone would be quite expensive. having bought various herbs for a year, lu yuan had a rough idea of their prices. to gather all the herbs needed for the seven-step fragrance, at least 60 or 70 silver taels would be required at a minimum. and this figure only reflected the cost price. ¡°especially for bitter scale fruit and ghost face tree resin, which are quite rare and only found in the xichuan region thousands of miles away. acquiring them would take a lot of effort. the fact that zhou ze managed to gather these ingredients indicates that the seemingly gentle and elegant doctor has a hidden side unknown to others.¡± lu yuan recalled zhou ze¡¯s refined and gentle face, then looked at the various sedatives in front of him, feeling a sense of dissonance. should it serve as a reminder not to judge a book by its cover, and never underestimate anyone? if he hadn¡¯t purchased the sedative from zhou ze today and witnessed it with his own eyes, he might not have believed that the seemingly well-mannered man was secretly producing sedatives. ¡°nonetheless, it makes sense. as a doctor, he often treats people from the jianghu. those people are ruthless and engaged in life-threatening work. though they may not be murderous, they are certainly ruthless and cunning. consistently interacting with these people would make one wonder if he was protecting himself. ¡± at this point, lu yuan was sure that zhou ze must have prepared sedatives, perhaps both powder and incense stick forms. but to this, he had no objection. both he and zhou ze were producing sedatives in private for their own self-preservation. they were not actively using them to harm others. what could be wrong about someone using effective means to protect themselves? whether others agreed or not, lu yuan felt there was nothing wrong with it. not only was it not wrong, at that moment, he was prepared to have such insurance for himself. ¡°so, zhou ze is indeed a kind-hearted person.¡± with a sigh, lu yuan picked up a bitter scale fruit and threw it into the copper bowl used for grinding medicine. he then took up a copper pestle and started grinding according to the instructions in the formula. zhou ze had collected all the ingredients needed for the seven-step fragrance, so when lu yuan bought the formula, it was essentially the same as buying the ingredients. the ingredients costing 60 or 70 silver taels, plus various other costs, made the purchase of the seven-step fragrance for 100 silver taels quite justified. although it seemed like he was buying a sedative today, in reality, it was zhou ze who did a good deed by giving him the sedative formula for free. such an act deserved to be called kind-hearted. creating the seven-step fragrance was an extremely tedious and lengthy process. according to the formula, there were as many as thirteen steps involved in processing the various herbs. these steps included drying, soaking, grinding, boiling, roasting, purifying, and so on. just going through these processes would take a considerable amount of time. once the herbs were processed, the subsequent steps, like adjusting the proportion of the ingredients, blending their properties, controlling the temperature and timing, were also time-consuming. if there is even a slight error in any of the multiple processes above, the drug-making would fail. previously when lu yuan dealt with herbs, he would simply cook the cultivation herbs he bought in a sand pot and drink the concoction.. Chapter 42 - Chapter 42: Chapter 29: Seven-step Fragrance_2 chapter 42: chapter 29: seven-step fragrance_2 translator: 549690339 one could say, aside from boiling medicine, he had no other experience handling herbs. starting with no foundation at this time, the success rate of a newcomer in making medicine was naturally imaginable. he had failed several times in making sedatives at the beginning. a series of failures forced lu yuan to temporarily stop trying to make more medicine. the reason was simple ¨C it wasn¡¯t the herbs that were failing, but the money. they had spent hundreds of silver taels on the medicinal ingredients. even though zhou ze was a generous person and had given him enough ingredients to make about ten portions of seven-step fragrance, he couldn¡¯t afford to waste them like this. after four failures, forty silver taels had been lost. his hard-earned money burned away just like that ¨C who wouldn¡¯t feel heartache? ¡°so from now on, i can¡¯t just grope around blindly like a headless fly. after the painful realization, he changed his previous strategy. he began summarizing the experiences from his previous failures. then he studied the wanfang medicine compilation seriously, focusing on researching the properties of the various ingredients for the seven-step fragrance sedative, and prepared to start from there. after several days of this, he finally gained some insights. he gained a deeper understanding of the properties of various medicinal ingredients and the control of temperature. feeling more confident about his improved mastery, lu yuan began a new attempt to make medicine. this time, his results were better. although he still couldn¡¯t make the seven -step fragrance, at least he managed to make some sedatives. however, these sedatives were either too weak or not secretive enough. they could only be considered as inferior products, far from what he wanted. ¡°these things can only fool those stupid wild beasts. as for the jianghu people, there¡¯s no way they¡¯d fall for it,¡± he reasoned. lu yuan picked up a pile of heavy-smelling powder, frowned as he looked at it, and poured it directly into a small bottle nearby to save it. these were the sedatives he had made with great effort and money. even if they were inferior, they couldn¡¯t be wasted. he decided to use these inferior sedatives to lure prey. the smell of these sedatives was too strong for use outside the mountains, as the people there would easily detect them. it was of poor practicality. but the wild beasts in the mountains lacked human wisdom. moreover, they were just wild animals that ate raw food. the bloody smell from hunting and eating animals was enough to overpower the smell of these sedatives. ¡°i remember that just before winter, while hunting in the mountains, i discovered a dens of fierce tigers and wild bears. i was afraid of their ferocity at the time and didn¡¯t dare to take any risks,¡± lu yuan thought. ¡°but now with these inferior sedatives, i can catch a few rabbits, smear the sedatives on the meat, and throw it in front of their dens. i don¡¯t believe that those hungry animals, who just went through the winter, will not eat meat delivered to their door.¡± after planning the spring hunt in his mind, lu yuan turned to pick up his homemade pencil and began to record his failed experiences in the medicine-making manual. failure is the mother of success. he did not fear failure. as a long-lived person with a lengthy life ahead of him, there was plenty of time to learn various knowledge slowly. failure in the present was not terrible. what was terrible was not making any progress despite the failures. a truly strong-willed person would face failures, learn from them, accumulate experience, and then defeat them the next time they face them. lu yuan didn¡¯t know if he counted as a strong-willed person. but whether he was or not, he was slowly trying to become such a person at this time. and currently, making the seven-step fragrance would be his first step towards success. lu yuan believed that he would succeed. spring cold lingers, and warmth comes and goes. in a blink of an eye, the bitter winter had passed. on this day, lu yuan went to a small pavilion beside plum forest outside the town to bid farewell to sun siwen. ¡°brother sun, i wish you success and get what you desire in this spring examination,¡± lu yuan offered as he raised his glass in blessing. ¡°with brother lu¡¯s auspicious words, i must achieve honor and fame on this journey,¡± sun siwen also picked up his wine glass and downed it while looking at plum blossoms around, which were wilting as the season was almost over. in the next few days, he would stay in the county town and participate in the spring examination. having endured long, grueling years of study, he didn¡¯t know whether he could weather the cold winter like these plum blossoms and finally bloom. ¡°i¡¯m off.¡¯ with a loud laugh, sun siwen picked up his book-box and gradually disappeared along the official road. as he watched sun¡¯s disappearing figure until he could no longer see him, lu yuan turned back to walk home. in the blink of an eye, it was already february. early spring had arrived. sun siwen had embarked on his path to pursue fame and fortune, and lu yuan should also prepare for the new year¡¯s hunting. ¡°i spent one hundred silver taels at the beginning of the year on sedatives. this expense is too large. i need to catch more prey this year and earn it back,¡± he thought on his way home. lu yuan was now in dire need of money. the consumption of money for his training was one reason, and the production of sedatives was another reason. ¡°although i can now successfully make the seven-step fragrance, one dose costs ten silver taels. it¡¯s just too expensive,¡± he said, his mouth twitching at the thought of the horrifying costs to make the sedatives. that¡¯s right, during this winter, after eight consecutive failures, he had finally succeeded in making the seven-step fragrance.. Chapter 43 - Chapter 43: Chapter 29: Seven-step Fragrance_3 chapter 43: chapter 29: seven-step fragrance_3 translator: 549690339 the two remaining medicinal compounds, one was ground into a powder, readily available for use in people¡¯s meals. the other was fashioned into incense sticks, designed for use while others were deep in their slumber at night. one was direct, the other indirect, perfectly compatible. no, it wasn¡¯t really perfect ¨C they were just too scarce. two portions of the sedative could only be used twice at most, and then they would be gone. but with lu yuan¡¯s nature, how could he be satisfied with just two portions of something that could save his life? the sedative, an essential item for self-defence ¨C no, for murdering¡­ when travelling or staying at home, the more the better. so, ever since he successfully crafted the sedative a few days ago. he took the opportunity when he was going to the city to buy some herbs for martial arts practice and asked zhou ze to buy some more seven-step fragrance compounds, intending to make a few more sedatives. unfortunately, doctor zhou didn¡¯t have any spare compound in his hands. the ten portions of the compound he had initially were the only stock in his nanas. after all, for zhou ze, practicing medicine and treating illnesses was his main business, enough to support his whole family. other things like sedatives were also handy, just as a means of self-defence in case of emergencies. not being able to buy the medicine compound, zhou ze had some ready-made seven-step fragrance in his hands, but that was someone¡¯s last-ditch lifesaving means, lu yuan couldn¡¯t possibly ask for it. this was not only due to embarrassment but also the fact that he knew that even if he requested it, he wouldn¡¯t get it. so, he could only entrust the other party to purchase some medicine compound. if it depended on him gathering it slowly, with no channel or connections, only god knows how many years it would take to gather it all. for this, lu yuan paid another one hundred silver taels as a deposit. there was no choice. those herbs were all rare items, purchasing them requires a cost. without sufficient money, why would people help you buy them? that zhou ze was willing to spend time on his behalf, was already a huge favor. in addition to gratitude, lu yuan could only be thinking about how he could repay doctor zhou in the future. well, the premise of repayment was that it would not harm himself. after all, the prospective longevity practitioner still cherished his life very much. all in all, after two purchases of the sedative, lu yuan spent a total of two hundred silver taels like a running water. taking into consideration the martial arts practice expenses, his savings suddenly dropped below one hundred again, leaving only thirty-seven silver taels. this money, even if spent sparingly, could at most only cover half a year of expenses. if there is no income by then, his martial arts progress would have to stop. this was unacceptable. ¡°so, now that spring has started, the few doses of subpar sedative in my hands should come in handy.¡± returning home, lu yuan fetched several small bottles from the cupboard, looked at the sedative inside, and a smile appeared on his face. although these sedatives were the inferior products of failure, he had conducted tests over these days. even less than half a dose could stun a sturdy bull. on this point, one could consult the suddenly extremely sleepy water buffalos in the town this winter. they were speaking from personal experience. looking at the slightly yellow medicinal powder, lu yuan seemed to see the prey waving at him. among these prey, fierce tigers, wild bears, wild boars, etc., all of them that he previously found difficult to handle were included. whether he could amass wealth again depended entirely on these lovely powders in front of his eyes. he believed that they would not let him down. because these were the crystallization of his own sweat and wisdom. hard-working people always have good luck and succeed. lu yuan firmly believed in this.. Chapter 44 - Chapter 44: Chapter 30: Something’s Not Right chapter 44: chapter 30: something¡¯s not right translator: 549690339 early spring, february. although the cold winter had passed and the earth still retained a little chill, the tender green grass had already begun to sprout. the season of revival had arrived, and the creatures of the mountains, which had been hibernating in their dens, were gradually awakening. it was already sunset. da huang, ravished by hunger, was leaping in the jungle, where countless shadows of trees passed by, but his originally strong limbs were weak and feeble now. he was the king of the mountain forest on the west ridge, and within this region, all the beasts would tremble and bow their heads in his presence. but even the king of the mountains, without a filled belly, could not avoid feeling lightheaded. da huang, who had been starving all winter, had just woken up a few days ago. however, he might have woken up a bit too early, it seemed that his usual prey was still hibernating in their lairs. after wandering around, he didn¡¯t even see a single rabbit. in the end, driven by extreme hunger, he caught a fat fish in the river, which barely filled his stomach. but a lone fat fish was far from making up for his energy expenditure. if he didn¡¯t find more prey soon, the fate awaiting him was to starve to death in the mountains, and eventually become food for other wild beasts. faced with this outcome, da huang was not willing. as such, he decided to return to his cave to rest for a while, after digesting the fat fish. he planned to venture out again in the evening; perhaps he could find some delicious snacks. soon, he was back at the cave. taking a few steps forward, da huang prepared to enter and rest. however, the enticing scent of a bloodied meal wafted from the cave¡¯s entrance. advancing a few steps towards the scent, he soon found its source. there, lying in the undergrowth near the cave¡¯s entrance, was a lifeless gray rabbit. the key point was its flesh was still fresh and had not decayed ¡ª this rabbit had died not long ago. this suggested one thing: the rabbit was food, edible food. hunger festered, the sensation of starvation from his belly sent a signal to his brain. quickly, da huang used his not-really-sharp brain to make a decision ¡ª to lower his head, open his mouth. with a ¡°woof¡± sound, the motionless gray rabbit found its way into his mouth. after a few crunches, the sound of torn flesh and chewing could be heard. every few bites, accompanied by a comforting swallow, da huang went back to the den with satisfaction. with the addition of this gray rabbit, he could survive for another couple of days. having two more days to hunt increased his survival chances significantly, which pleased the forest overlord considerably. in a good mood, his pace even quickened. striding elegantly in the pitch-black cave, he walked, and walked ¡­ suddenly, a wave of vertigo swept over him from his brain, followed by a wave i weakness emanating irom every done his bouy. faint and dizzy, da huang swayed, walked two more steps forward, and suddenly collapsed, lying on the ground motionless. a little while passed. perhaps after only a moment, a figure appeared at the entrance of the cave. ¡°hmm, another one. my savings can increase by another hundred taels.¡± standing in front of the fallen tiger was lu yuan, he looked at the motionless king of the mountains, with a smile on his face. this was already the third tiger he had caught since he entered the mountains. apart from them, he also got five black bears, a litter of wild boars, and several unlucky foxes. if all these game were exchanged for silver taels, the total would be six or seven hundred taels without doubt. it could be said that as long as he exchanged these hunting gains for liquid cash, his original financial troubles would be instantly solved. he leaned over, pulled out a short knife, and plunged it into the tiger¡¯s eye. he stirred it around inside the brain, ending the reign of the king of the mountains. he heaved the tiger onto his shoulders, turned around, and began to walk out of the cave. ¡°with this tiger captured, it¡¯s the last of the large beasts in the east mountain ridge territory. i don¡¯t know whether, with the death of these top-tier predators, the smaller animals like rabbits and wild chickens will overrun the mountains?¡± he wondered about these ecological issues momentarily before chuckling to himself. with him, a top-tier hunter around, even without the large beasts, those small game had no chance to proliferate. after all. in these vast mountains, he was the ultimate predator. everything else was merely his prey. carrying the tiger on his back, after a trek through the mountains and ridges and after an hour, he finally returned to his own cave in the mountain. expertly skinning and deboning the tiger, removing the intact pelt and tendons. lu yuan also cut off the tiger¡¯s penis. after processing it slightly, he threw it into a jar of fiery liquor that had already been prepared by his side. the tiger¡¯s penis was a valuable item, highly sought after by the wealthy families. especially for those with unspeakable needs, the price of a tiger¡¯s penis could rival a tiger¡¯s pelt, selling for a tremendous price. last year, he killed a tiger and obtained a tiger¡¯s penis. initially, it was soaked in liquor, preparing to keep it for his own use. later on, because he needed money to buy sedative, he had to sell the tiger¡¯s penis liquor to a wealthy family in the neighboring prefecture, eventually receiving sixty silver taels in return. from this, one can see how extremely profitable this business was. hence, lu yuan, once having tasted the sweetness of this, took a heightened interest in hunting tigers. with that, this time he entered the mountain, he made sure to hunt down all the tigers he could find within a hundred-miles radius, leaving no traces behind. after carefully cleaning and preparing the tiger, lu yuan spent five to six days to nitrate, smoke, and dry the skins and meats he obtained recently. once everything was properly prepared, he taken those skins and the tiger penis liquor with him, and headed south. these goods were all very valuable. selling them near luling prefecture would attract too much attention, making it easy for others to trace him. therefore, lu yuan decided it was time for the dayu mountain arrow god, who had been silent for a winter, to appear once again. he planned to go to the south sea prefecture again and sell his goods in separate amounts. yes, he won¡¯t go to nan¡¯an county this time. his last trip there to sell goods had already alarmed the local qingzhu gang. he managed to hunt down a wave of gang members who were chasing him, making a small fortune in the process. after their loss and lesson from that time, the qingzhu gang would undoubtedly be on their guard. if he went this time, he could easily be subject to retaliation. lu yuan was a cautious person, therefore he wouldn¡¯t take such a risk. a real man never backtracks. if he wanted to sell his goods, he would do it elsewhere. with the experience from a previous trip, he was completely relaxed about this trip to south sea, after he had made all the preparations. he was as easy and comfortable as could be. everything was just so proficient. a month later. nanxiong prefecture, mei county. lu yuan, carrying his backpack, entered the small city of south sea after paying thirty cents of city entrance tax. as he entered the city and roamed the streets for a while, he instantly perceived that something was off about the atmosphere of the city. the pace of the pedestrians on the streets was a little too hurried, even several shops on either side of the streets were closed in broad daylight, not doing business. even those usually idle gangsters who bullied men and women, collecting protection money were nowhere in sight on the streets. ¡°something¡¯s wrong. really wrong.¡± lu yuan watched the pedestrians on the street, being in the middle of these slightly strange vibes, his eyebrows slightly furrowed. almost instinctively, he sensed that something big might have occured in mei county? or else, the city wouldn¡¯t have been under such weird circumstances.. Chapter 45 - Chapter 45: Chapter 31: Black Wind Gang chapter 45: chapter 31: black wind gang translator: 549690339 ¡°what on earth has happened?¡± gazing at the hurried stream of people in the street, a huge confusion arose in lu yuan¡¯s heart. the atmosphere in mei county was different from the other southsea county towns he had visited before, giving him an unusual feeling of danger in his heart. he was eager to leave immediately. as a being of longevity, it was quite normal for him to resist anything that might pose a threat to his life. however, now that he had come all this way, to simply flee at the sight of danger seemed rather pathetic. ¡°moreover, looking at the stream of people on the street, though many of the townspeople¡¯s faces show anxiety, overall, they seem calm. it¡¯s just that the atmosphere is a little tense. there should be no major issues in the short term.¡± lu yuan thought so, and temporarily put aside the urge to flee right away. but even so, he didn¡¯t intend to stay in the city longer than necessary. he asked people on the street for directions and went straight to the fur shop located within the city. no matter what had happened in mei county, it was always right for him to sell his goods quickly and then slip away. no matter how great the danger brews, as long as he escapes before it erupts, the danger will always fail to become a real threat. the market of mei county was situated in the east of the city, where more than ninety percent of the shops were located. due to its position as the transportation hub between southsea and yuzhang, mei county also served as a distribution center for supplies from the two jurisdictions. merchants traveling north and south would usually pass through here. as a result, the market was bustling, with numerous shops of various sizes and street vendors as far as the eye could see. there were three fur shops in the market. perhaps due to competitive pressures, this time the fur that lu yuan sold fetched an exceptionally high price. the last tiger skin and two bear skins sold for a whopping 200 silver tales. even the two jars of tiger whiskers wine that he brought with him were eagerly pursued by some opulent merchants, and they sold for 200 silver tales as well. after just one transaction, he had already received 400 silver tales in his hands. the trading profits of fierce beasts¡¯ fur like tigers and bears were evident. having received such a large sum of money all at once, based on his previous experiences in trading, the local gangs in the city should have immediately received the news and then come looking for trouble. lu yuan was already accustomed to this. keeping a low profile, he quickly left and headed straight for the city gate. then, he took out his prepared iron bow outside and began a new hunt, earning another small fortune. all the steps mentioned above were part of the usual routine. however, the moment he left the fur shop, he immediately noticed that something was different. ¡°no one is watching?¡± lu yuan scanned the surrounding marketplace. although the atmosphere in the city was a bit off, the hustle and bustle in the east market area remained unchanged. traveling merchants gathered in this area, the flow of people surged and swarmed. however, amidst the sea of heads, even after using all his skills to gauge and sense his surroundings, he still couldn¡¯t detect the familiar watchful gaze. ¡®the people from the fur shop just now didn¡¯t inform the local gang!¡¯ in that instant, it all became clear to him. immediately followed by enormous confusion. during this expedition to southsea, including mei county, lu yuan had visited a total of four county towns. in the previous three towns, local gangs had covetously pursued them out of the city, trying to do business without spending a dime. however, faced with the well-prepared dayu mountain archer, these dregs, who only bullied the good and kind on ordinary days, soon followed the footsteps of the qingzhu gang members, left behind in the vast mountain forest. during his journey as a merchant, he couldn¡¯t remember how many skeletons he had left behind on the road. at least twenty or thirty of them, that¡¯s for sure. in this cruel and dark world, especially with the extraordinary power at hand, there were always people willing to risk their lives for wealth and gain. no need to say more. in the eyes of those gangs, they were maintaining ¡°normal rules¡± and correcting order, belonging to the ¡°just¡± side with good reason. moreover, they had a stronger presence and superior strength, so they were capable of maintaining order. ¡°it seems that no one is really following¡­¡± after thorough searching, lu yuan finally confirmed that there were indeed no gang members behind him, and he could not find the local gang members within the market. seeing this, he immediately dismissed the idea of leaving the town immediately. if no one was following him, there would be no danger for a short time. with no threat to his life, lu yuan changed his original plan and decided to stay in town for a while to find out what happened, and then leave. speaking of which, after seeing the streets inside the city, he was a bit curious about what had happened. since there was free time now, it wouldn¡¯t hurt to listen. as usual, he found a tavern on the market street. it wasn¡¯t one of those low-class street stalls in the city. but neither was it an elegant restaurant, as those were too expensive. lu yuan had chosen a cheap but well-flavored place frequented by merchants and wandering martial artists. this kind of place, undoubtedly, was where the news was the most informative. he found a seat in the first-floor hall, ordered a few of the tavern¡¯s signature dishes with a bottle of yellow wine, and listened to the conversations of merchants and martial artists as he ate lunch. before long, he had gathered some information. ¡°the county catch officers and the plum blossom gang members have been gone for three days, haven¡¯t they wiped out the black wind gang yet?¡± a merchant sighed after taking a swig of wine, ¡°the commercial route has been blocked for seven days. my goods have been piling up in the city and cannot be transported out. if it drags on for a few more days and the season passes, they will rot in my hands.¡± ¡°how can it be so fast?¡± a burly man in black, dressed as a martial artist from the jianghu, scoffed: ¡°the leader of the black wind gang is a second-rate expert in the jianghu. his six brothers are all third-rate masters. their martial arts skills are top-notch, and they¡¯ve practiced a combined attack saber technique. after more than ten years of cultivation, the technique has achieved major success. the seven of them working together could even challenge the first-class old-timers in the jianghu. wang butoa of mei county, though a disciple of the ¡®golden eye eagle¡¯ li shenbu, is also only a second-rate expert, just like the leader of the plum blossom gang.¡± the burly man in black seemed to be well-informed, with a deep knowledge of various jianghu secrets. at this moment, as he spoke these rarely heard secrets, he immediately attracted the attention of many people in the hall. with all those eyes on him, the burly man in black felt very proud and indulged himself for a moment, before finally giving in to the urging voices around him and continued: ¡°in my opinion, this time the government and the plum blossom gang¡¯s joint operation against the black wind gang can only drive this great bandit away at most. to kill him is simply impossible¡­¡± thud! lu yuan took a sip of wine and set down his cup. after listening to the people in the hall for so long, he finally understood what had happened in mei county. ¡°so, half a month ago, the black wind bandits came from the south, robbing houses and blocking the business route here. finally, they attracted the attention of the government and local gangs, who began to suppress these bandits. that¡¯s why local gangsters can¡¯t be seen in the city. since everyone has been sent to hunt down the black wind bandits, they can¡¯t be bothered with me, a hunter who slipped in to sell hides. this is a good time indeed¡­¡± organizing his thoughts, lu yuan got up, paid the bill, packed his things, and left the tavern. government, plum blossom gang, black wind gang¡­ of these forces, not one was easy to provoke, and each was infinitely troublesome. being on the side of their jianghu conflicts was not something he was interested in. now that he had gotten a clear understanding of the situation, he decided to leave the city as quickly as possible for his safety.. Chapter 46 - Chapter 46: Chapter 32: Did Brother Sun Pass the Scholar Exam? chapter 46: chapter 32: did brother sun pass the scholar exam? translator: 549690339 at the city gate. like other pedestrians, lu yuan queued up and walked out of the gate. perhaps because of the bandits in the county, the inspection at the city gate was much stricter than usual. eight city guard tax officials stood at the entrance, checking the people coming in and out. however, this kind of inspection mainly targeted those entering the city. those leaving the city were only briefly checked before being allowed to go. but lu yuan could clearly feel that this strictness was only superficial. otherwise, why would these petty officials not stop and inspect those martial artists with swords and spears entering and leaving the city, instead directly allowing them passage? and those honest and easy-to-bully farmers and foot traders were all stopped, strictly inspected, and extorted for bribes. ¡°that¡¯s why these corrupt officials are all bullies and cowards. killing every one of them would be justified,¡± thought lu yuan as he prepared to leave the city when he heard a shout from the side. ¡°stop there.¡± the two gate officials remembered lu yuan, knowing that he had made a fortune by selling tiger and leopard skins in the city. they exchanged glances and approached him with the intention of making a quick buck. however, before the two greedy officials could get close, lu yuan¡¯s eyes fiercely stared at them. having spent more than a year in this environment, traveling between mountain ridges and facing countless wild beasts, he had developed a fierce and savage aura. in addition to practicing martial arts for more than a year and cultivating inner strength, his temperament was now vastly different from the past days. even though he was dressed as a hunter now, his muscular body exuded a ferocious aura that made him seem unapproachable. especially his eyes, which seemed to have gained a murderous intent commonly described in novels after killing hundreds of lives. feeling the fierce gaze, the two officials shivered as if cold water had been poured on their hot bodies. their greedy thoughts instantly dissipated, replaced by a chill. their steps froze. just like animals at the bottom of the food chain encountering a powerful predator, the two officials were filled with dread. ¡°this man is a ruthless killer.¡± with years of experience as gate officials, they realized this almost instantly. driven by their instinct for self-preservation, the two officials¡¯ courage quickly crumbled, avoiding conflict with the hunter before them. ¡°there¡¯s a stone on the ground that¡¯s in the way.¡± one official, thinking quickly, spotted a small stone on the ground, picked it up and threw it aside. he retreated to the side and opened up the path for lu yuan to leave the city without any interference. with a forced smile on his face, he said, ¡°take care, master.¡± ¡°trash!¡± lu yuan walked with his head held high, and when he passed by the two officials, he mocked them with disdain. he was actually prepared to kill them if they tried to extort money from him just now. at present, the main forces of the government and the local gangs were surrounding the black wind gang. there weren¡¯t many forces left behind in the city. the gate was guarded only by a few greedy petty officials who weren¡¯t skilled in martial arts. with his strength, lu yuan could easily smash their heads with his bare hands. ¡®it¡¯s a pity they backed down,¡¯ lu yuan thought with slight disappointment. honestly, after being oppressed by the government and gangs since crossing over, it was only natural to bear resentment toward them. he had already killed many members of the gangs, but not a single one of the government¡¯s lackeys. what a pity. contemplating murder, the two officials sensed danger and instinctively retreated a few more steps, shivering while leaning against the city wall. the other officials nearby pretended not to notice, keeping their distance. seeing this, lu yuan sneered and walked towards the mountains without paying them any mind. after walking for about ten steps, before leaving the city gate area, he heard rustling from afar. dust and smoke approached, and a messenger in official uniform rode in on a fast horse. ¡°victory at fairy maiden ridge! victory at fairy maiden ridge!¡± ¡°wang butoa joins forces with liu meihua gang leader, defeating the black wind gang. over a hundred heads were taken. a great victory in exterminating the bandits!¡± the messenger rode on his horse, announcing the good news to the people around him. the pedestrians near the city gate made way for the messenger when they saw him coming. after the brief commotion, their faces lit up with joy upon hearing the news. the collaboration of the government and the plum blossom gang to eliminate bandits was a great success! this news was a huge celebration for everyone in mei county. cheers and discussions began to sound. ¡°so, they succeeded in eliminating the bandits?¡± after the news, lu yuan inexplicably thought of the jianghu secret revealed by the black-clothed man in the tavern earlier. although the man looked unreliable and the source of information was questionable, it was hard to say how much of it was true. similarly, as a victim of the government and gang oppression, lu yuan knew their true nature. the words of these scum were also not trustworthy. they claimed a big victory now, but who knew the real situation? perhaps they were just hiding the truth from the people! ¡°anyway, this doesn¡¯t concern me anymore.¡± lu yuan shook his head and quickly walked toward the mountains. now that they claimed victory, whether it was true or not, the black wind gang issue should be more or less resolved. the plum blossom gang and the government personnel would likely return to the city soon, and it was not safe to linger here any longer. after leaving the city, and spending an hour, lu yuan turned into the mountains. after entering the mountains, he found the original hiding place and took out the iron bow and a big bag of silver. the silver weighed heavily, about several tens of jin. during his trip to southsea, he sold goods four times, selling more than ten rare furs and three jars of tiger whip wine, making more than a thousand silver taels profit. his depleted savings were restored in an instant and even expanded several times over. their family fortune became impressive. ¡°a thousand silver taels, with today¡¯s prices, are enough to buy hundreds of acres of farmland in the countryside, build a big mansion, and become a small landlord. that is to say, my current fortune can make people call me a master,¡± said lu yuan, tallying his earnings, 1,123 silver taels, his face beaming with happiness. of course. although this money was enough for him to buy a large piece of land and comfortably be a landlord. but as an ambitious seeker of longevity, he has no plans to do so. being a landlord sounds nice, but without enough power, even if one is rich, it¡¯s like a rootless duckweed. after all, if you stockpile food while i stockpile weapons, your house becomes my granary. although the above statement is hard to hear, it is undeniable yet true. just like the recent black wind gang incident in mei county, lu yuan had heard in the county town teahouse that thirteen big landlords outside the city were wiped out by these fierce bandits and their families were completely plundered. the bloody example in front of him made lu yuan soberly aware that this is a cruel society where the strong prey on the weak. you need martial strength to live well. without martial strength, you can only be a sheep waiting to be slaughtered. just for example, when he left the city earlier, if lu yuan were an ordinary hunter, would those greedy officials have let him go out of the city so easily? they would have framed him for colluding with the black wind gang and confiscated the several hundred silver taels he had earned from this trip. ¡°so, martial strength is the only guarantee. this is ultimately a martial feudal society!¡± lu yuan sighed, keeping the silver in his backpack and moved swiftly, like a dark shadow, quickly shuttling through the dense forest. there were still two hours until dusk. before that, he had to find a safe place to stay in the mountains first. the mountains are not safe at night. even if he had practiced martial arts, he could not guarantee complete safety, so he had to be cautious. more than ten days later. after having been away for more than a month, lu yuan finally returned home. but soon after returning to yangmei town, he heard some news. ¡°brother sun got the scholar¡¯s degree?¡± listening to his neighbor aunt niii¡¯s chatter, lu yuan looked surprised. his good-for-nothing friend finally passed the exam and became a scholar! like many people in the town hearing it for the first time, he was also somewhat shocked and amazed. no wonder. mainly because sun siwen¡¯s previous attempts left quite a strong impression. taking the scholar¡¯s exam twelve times, for twelve years in total, and finally passing it this time? the shock of this news. it was like in modern society, a high school student, who has taken a college entrance exam for twelve years, and has been rejected each time, suddenly tells you that they have passed and been accepted by a university. however, after the initial shock, calm soon returned. ¡°brother sun finally became a scholar, fulfilling his wish. the hardships of more than a decade finally paid off. this is a great joy. i should visit him to congratulate him.¡± lu yuan thought, starting to consider what to give his friend as a gift. his instinct was to offer some cured meat he had prepared himself, but he thought that it was just ordinary food they had shared during meals and wasn¡¯t solemn enough for the occasion. therefore, he quickly dismissed the idea. ¡°hmm, brother sun is a scholar, and now that he has become one, i should give him something that scholars would use. for example, brushes, ink, paper, inkstones, precious ancient books, etc. ¡­ ¡± as lu yuan thought about it this way, his ideas became clearer. for his only friend, his feelings were important. especially since he has now become a scholar, it seems that his luck is reversing and he is rising. this makes it even more crucial. after all, this is ultimately a feudal dynasty. the rulers here, in addition to those high-flying martial arts heroes. are those scholars with a degree. and sun siwen has become a scholar, which in modern terms, means he has passed the provincial civil service exam. he could directly look for a petty official job in the government office, serve as a staff member for a county magistrate or prefect, or teach in a county school. although these are all low-level jobs, they are still part of the governing class. not to mention, if he continues to work hard and becomes a juren (imperial examination title), his level would instantly rise to that of a deputy director, and he could become an official. facing such a potentially promising, budding official, making some early investments seemed necessary for lu yuan.. Chapter 47 - Chapter 47: Chapter 33 Reading Scriptures chapter 47: chapter 33 reading scriptures after being out for a month, there was quite a bit of dust accumulated in the house, so after spending some time cleaning, lu yuan felt hungry. he cooked two pounds of bacon and ate it, then he took a shower and began practicing his internal martial arts. he didn¡¯t know how profound the internal cultivation method of the cloud palm was, as he had no other techniques to compare it with. however, based on his own experience, he felt that this method was, without a doubt, on par with the level of the palm technique, simply a second-rate technique. since he comprehended the first meridian and started cultivation, lu yuan made sure to cultivate for at least two hours every day. however, from october last year to february this year, five whole months had passed, and his cultivation of the first meridian still only achieved an initial clearing effect. he was not much stronger now than when he just started to train his inner qi. the attribute template in lu yuan¡¯s mind was not in specific numbers, but in realms such as perfect, minor success, major success, and so on. but as the actual practitioner of the technique, he had some idea of the precise progress of his cultivation. at the moment, he was cultivating the hand¡¯s taiyin lung meridian, which had eleven acupuncture points in total: middle mansion, cloud gate, heavenly palace, horizontal white, cubit marsh, maximum hole, insufficient hole, channel gutter, great abyss, fish border, and lesser shang. up until now, besides the lesser shang point that he unlocked when he first started cultivating inner qi, in five months, lu yuan had only managed to unlock the second point, the fish border. as for the third point, the great abyss, he estimated that it would take about three more months to unlock. this meant that it would likely take about four months for lu yuan to unlock one acupoint. it would take a total of forty-four months, or about three and a half years, for the entire hand¡¯s taiyin lung meridian. ¡°using three and a half years to complete one meridian, this kind of progress¡­¡± lu yuan calculated the number of the meridians he needed to practice. one meridian would take three and a half years, and there were twelve ordinary meridians. multiplying the time would result in forty-two years. in other words, it would roughly take him forty-two years to complete the twelve ordinary meridians. then there were the eight bizarre meridians and the two primary meridians. it was feared that it would take at least a hundred years to complete these ten additional meridians and fully open all the meridians in his body. ¡°in a hundred years, a person would already be dead.¡± lu yuan imagined an old man who had achieved great martial arts achievement and shook his head at the thought. even if he achieved great martial arts success, he probably would only have a couple of years left to enjoy it. would it even be possible to boss around the martial arts world for a couple of years? furthermore, would it be possible to kidnap righteous heroines from famous sects or the demonesses from evil cults? it was not known whether or not he would even have the strength, so what was the point? ¡°no, i am immortal. my lifespan is unlimited. even after a hundred years, i¡¯ll still be youthful, and my strength will not be inferior to my younger self. in tn1s case, spending a nunarecl years practlcmg internal martial arts doesn¡¯t seem like an issue.¡± he suddenly remembered this and immediately felt happier. as the saying goes, when you¡¯re unhappy, you tend to feel better when you see others who are more unhappy than you. at this moment, as an immortal, lu yuan felt entitled to be happier than ordinary martial artists in the jianghu. ¡°besides, my talent should be considered neither too poor nor too good. from the martial arts experts i¡¯ve encountered, the strongest among them should be ma jiqing from the beginning. however, at twenty-seven or twenty-eight years old, he only reached the peak of third-rate strength, probably training no more than five meridians. it would only take me fifteen years to achieve this level. in this way, my cultivation talent should belong to the ordinary or intermediate level. not a genius, but not a fool either. that¡¯s not bad.¡± lu yuan nodded in satisfaction. as an immortal, he only hoped his talent wasn¡¯t at the level of hopeless stupidity. as long as his abilities allowed him to cultivate, everything else could be accomplished through his endless lifespan. he, as a lofty immortal, wouldn¡¯t need to compete with those short-lived individuals for temporary gains and losses. cultivating his inner strength for two hours, lu yuan felt that his acupoints had cleared up somewhat, and he felt closer to unlocking the great abyss point. with that, he went to sleep satisfied. the next day, after having breakfast, he went to the town bookstore and bought some quality stationery. with the gift in hand, he went to visit sun siwen. upon arriving at sun siwen¡¯s house, he found that he was not the earliest guest. ¡°brother lu is here.¡± welcoming lu yuan in, sun siwen looked very happy and warmly introduced him, saying, ¡°come, brother lu, let me introduce you to my friend.¡± he pointed to a male scholar in blue clothes beside him, ¡°this is xu ce, brother xu from the xu family in town. he¡¯s my classmate. he passed the scholar examination seven years ago and is a famous talent in the county.¡± after that, he turned to xu ce and said, ¡°brother xu, this is brother lu yuan, my good friend. although he appears to be a hunter, his martial arts skills are extremely high, and he¡¯s a hermit of our town.¡± lu yuan looked at sun siwen up and down. his complexion was rosy, and he looked radiant, vastly different from the gloomy and melancholy appearance two months earlier. ¡®it seems that after obtaining his long-awaited desire, brother sun has left behind his previous troubles, and he has changed for the better as well.¡¯ with a smile on his face, he bowed his hand to xu ce next to him and said, ¡°brother xu. ¡± the xu family was the most prominent family in the town, with 300 acres of fertile land, and they also owned two shops in town and even a wine shop in the city. their wealth and social status were far beyond that of lu yuan and sun siwen, so they hardly ever interacted.. Chapter 48 - Chapter 48: Chapter 33 Reading Scriptures_2 chapter 48: chapter 33 reading scriptures_2 translator: 549690339 he never expected that such a person would come to visit after sun siwen passed the exam and became a scholar. indeed, achieving status in the current society was like a magic cure, with immediate results. ¡°brother lu.¡± xu ce returned the greeting nonchalantly , while in his heart he couldn¡¯t help but think: ¡®sun siwen is truly a disgrace to our scholarly class. he used to be so foolish, and now he¡¯s even willingly demeaning himself by associating with a mere hunter. he has lowered his own status and defied propriety.¡¯ my father said that he had become a scholar and was from the same hometown, so he wanted me to make friends with him. but now it seems that after today, it¡¯s better to keep my distance from him. he¡¯s like a muddy mess that can¡¯t be cleaned up. if i stay with him for too long, i might end up tainting myself too.¡¯ master xu had secretly made up his mind. as for sun siwen¡¯s description of lu yuan¡¯s martial arts prowess and being a hermit, he directly ignored it. for orthodox scholars, even in the world of martial arts, they still looked down on those so-called martial artists in the jianghu from the bottom of their hearts. even repulsed by them. after all, it¡¯s not an empty phrase that martial artists violate the law. it is a consensus among all scholars. ever since lu yuan arrived, xu ce¡¯s conversation with sun siwen had become somewhat cold. in the end, after a few hurried conversations and polite exchanges, he directly took his leave. his disdain for lu yuan, the hunter, was barely hidden, which made sun siwen feel very awkward. ¡°brother lu, it¡¯s not that brother xu looks down on you, it¡¯s just¡­¡± lu yuan interrupted him, shaking his head with a smile: ¡°brother sun need not explain, it¡¯s normal for that self-righteous scholar to look down on a hunter like me. coincidentally, i don¡¯t think highly of those pedantic sorts either.¡± at that moment, he turned his head and joked, ¡°so, brother sun, you won¡¯t look down on me, a poor fellow, after becoming a scholar, will you?¡± hearing this, sun siwen immediately shook his head, declaring passionately, ¡°brother lu, where is this coming from? our friendship started in poverty and humble beginnings, and we are truly close friends. can such a bond be obstructed by mere status?¡± ¡°just having sun-brother¡¯s words is enough.¡± lu yuan laughed heartily and then, as usual, invited the other to drink and chat. now that brother sun has achieved his status, his access to various information should have increased. it¡¯s an excellent opportunity to thoroughly investigate his knowledge and insights. this time, our great seeker of immortality, lu yuan, came with a different purpose in mind. in the following days, lu yuan and sun siwen drank and chatted together, quietly gathering information from his friend while listening to his confessions and insights after passing the exam. sometimes, in the midst of talking, sun siwen couldn¡¯t help but cry. to that, lu yuan could only offer a few extra cups of wine, showing his understanding. this kind of life didn¡¯t last long. because sun siwen was very busy. having passed the examination and now a scholar, he had to make friends with his fellow exam candidates, visit other scholars in the county, and attend various gatherings held by literati. he also needed to integrate into the scholar¡¯s reading circle. apart from that, perhaps becoming a scholar has given sun siwen confidence. he is determined to continue his efforts and take the autumn exam this year. yes, you heard that right, mr. sun plans to take the test for juren (imperial examination title). the reason he had this idea, according to him, was because an elderly juren in the county complimented him a fortnight ago, saying that mr. sun had a solid foundation, enough accumulation, and could take the imperial examination to become a juren. regarding this, lu yuan didn¡¯t comment. although in his heart, he basically believed that this was just a courteous remark from the elder juren. but since his friend took it seriously and was so spirited, naturally, as a friend, he supported and encouraged him. ¡°at most, when his name falls behind in the exam, i¡¯ll invite him for a few more drinks to console him,¡± thought lu yuan. sun siwen began to make friends with literary figures, prepare for the imperial examination, and strive for the scholar¡¯s achievement. lu yuan, on the other hand, found himself with more free time. after two months of working hard since the start of spring, he now had substantial wealth, with over 1,150 taels in savings. basically, as long as there were no significant expenses in the future, he wouldn¡¯t face any financial crisis for the next ten years or so. in this case, there was no financial crisis. thus, during these days, he became even more careless about hunting. apart from occasionally going into the mountains to practice his skills so that his hunting technique wouldn¡¯t become rusty, his daily routine involved buying and reading poetry, anecdotes, buddhist and taoist classics. the reason for reading these was mainly due to lu yuan¡¯s past experience of learning the mental technique. although the cloud palm was a mediocre secret book, as lu yuan began to study it after learning to read, he slowly found it to be more obscure and difficult. because he discovered that this martial art was not only written in literary chinese but was also half a taoist classic. yes, a taoist classic. many core concepts and vocabulary of cloud palm¡¯s internal cultivation method are heavily influenced by taoist knowledge. there were many crucial aspects that, without understanding the relevant taoist knowledge, it was impossible to comprehend its mysteries, let alone cultivate and practice. as lu yuan continued to deepen his cultivation of the mental technique, he increasingly felt this situation. for now, it was not too bad with only the first meridian, as there was less involvement with various taoist concepts. by relying on his current knowledge, he could just barely understand them. however, as the cultivation became deeper and reached higher levels, without a solid cultural foundation, it would be impossible to cultivate to a high-level realm.. Chapter 49 - Chapter 49: Chapter 33 Reading Scriptures_3 chapter 49: chapter 33 reading scriptures_3 translator: 549690339 the simplest example. for the body¡¯s various meridians and acupoints, many taoist terms are used for naming in the mental technique, and then the direction and operation rules of inner qi in the meridians and acupoints are also described using taoist concepts. if you aren¡¯t clear about these terms and concepts, and just follow a book of drawings to manipulate your inner strength, it¡¯s no wonder things would go awry. ¡°if i don¡¯t understand the taoist classics, with my current knowledge, i can only practice the first layer of the mental technique and complete two meridians at most, reaching the peak of a third-class martial artist. to make further progress, i must study the classic of daoist internal medicine.¡± lu yuan was speechless in his heart, strongly criticizing this method of forcefully setting up knowledge barriers. but after the criticism, he honestly picked up a copy of the ¡°tongxuan sensation true scripture¡± and read it carefully. although there is still a long time before he cultivates the second layer of the mental technique, which should be about six years later. but precisely because of this, he should accumulate knowledge and prepare in advance at this time. and not to mention. with the study of various poems, songs, strange stories, and buddhist and taoist scriptures, lu yuan has gained quite a lot of insights and feels that his state of mind has improved a lot. question: how to improve a person¡¯s self-cultivation? answer: read more books. in the blink of an eye, another month has passed. today, lu yuan temporarily put down his books, and the martial arts medicine and herbs at home were used up, so he needed to go to the city to replenish some. because this month, he didn¡¯t go hunting and there was no fur, so he didn¡¯t carry that big bamboo basket, but just went lightly, which was much faster. after an hour¡¯s journey and paying ten cents for entering the city, he went straight to the zhou family pharmacy. however, just arriving at the market, several people blocked his way. ¡°lu yuan.¡± scarface from the black wolf gang, along with several underlings, stood in front of him. ¡°scarface.¡± lu yuan had a calm expression, not showing his compliant smile as in the past, and casually made a saluting gesture. ¡°how dare you, what¡¯s the way to speak to our scarface?¡± seeing his attitude, several black wolf gang hooligans were immediately furious and wanted to teach him a lesson. however, before he could take a step, lu yuan looked at him coldly. after killing thousands of animals in the mountain and dozens of south sea gang members, lu yuan naturally has a certain aura. simply put, it¡¯s a kind of momentum. it¡¯s probably like the feeling of an ordinary person standing in front of a tiger. you can imagine it in your mind. at this moment, when he slightly releases it, the cursing hooligan is instantly intimidated, and his movements slow down. scarface is a knowledgeable and experienced person. after sensing this momentum, he waved his hand to restrain his underlings. then, looking at lu yuan, he scrutinized him up and down and said coldly, ¡°you aren¡¯t selling goods this time you entered the city?¡± ¡°ah.¡± lu yuan said lightly: ¡°i¡¯ve changed my line of work and don¡¯t want to be a hunter anymore.¡± now that he has made enough money, he certainly won¡¯t continue being a humble hunter, entering the city to smile obsequiously and allow these people to take advantage of him. so, after returning from south sea prefecture, lu yuan decided not to be a hunter anymore. from now on, hunting is not a way of making a living, but a hobby. scarface¡¯s face darkened: ¡°you¡¯ve been practicing martial arts?¡± he sensed from lu yuan a similar aura as those high-level martial artists with martial arts and internal strength in the gang. equally strong, equally murderous. ¡°yes, i practiced for a year, and i¡¯ve made some progress.¡± lu yuan smiled and admitted generously. previously, he had to keep a low profile, so he had to back down. now, since he has practiced martial arts and gained strength, he naturally wouldn¡¯t continue to be submissive. otherwise, he would really become a pushover. and even though he couldn¡¯t reveal the cloud palm technique, the basic strength and the support of internal energy alone would be more than a match for ordinary people. with this strength, it is enough to deter those who like to buzz around him. otherwise, if he keeps getting annoyed by these flies, he is afraid that one day he won¡¯t be able to hold back and will take lives. despite the fact that killing these people is what lu yuan wants in his heart. but it¡¯s not the right time yet. he¡¯s not strong enough to deal with the black wolf gang, nor is he ready to live on the run. crushing these ants will have to wait for another ten years or so. ¡®i hope these people can live until then.¡¯ with a smile, looking at scarface and his men, lu yuan¡¯s eyes are deep.. Chapter 50 - Chapter 50: Chapter 34: Forcing Submission chapter 50: chapter 34: forcing submission translator: 549690339 hearing that lu yuan had truly practiced martial arts, scarface¡¯s heart jumped. he never expected that a hunter who was once as insignificant as an ant could actually turn his fate around through martial arts. however, as a leader within the gang, he had some composure and insight. he didn¡¯t completely lose his footing and instead asked tentatively, ¡°have you cultivated inner strength?¡± for a martial artist, the difference between having cultivated inner strength and not having done so is vast. a martial arts expert who only knows some boxing skills is just a small fry in jianghu, serving as cannon fodder to make a show of force and raise morale. they are at the lowest rank. the ordinary members of the black wolf gang belong to this level. scarface, on the other hand, is an elite at this level, so he took the position of a leader. moving up, martial artists who have cultivated inner strength through their meridians are different. for martial artists, inner strength is like an amplifier. a martial artist without inner strength might only have the power of two hundred catties in one punch. however, a martial artist with inner strength can punch with the power of four or five hundred catties. the above is just an increase in power. other attributes like speed, reaction, and defense will also experience significant improvements under the enhancement of inner strength. therefore, even if a martial artist has only opened one meridian and cultivated inner strength but has not reached the third-rate level, they are still transforming and are no longer in the same rank as those without inner strength. the simplest example is: in the black wolf gang, the strongest strength is the second-rate leader. below him, a few vice leaders are third-rate experts who have opened two meridians. further below, the elders and hall masters opened one meridian and cultivated inner strength, making them no-name martial artists. as you can see, even in a small gang like the black wolf gang, one needs to cultivate inner strength to be part of the management. having inner strength is almost equivalent to whether a scholar has a title or not, representing the difference between two classes. lu yuan is, of course, aware of this, so when he heard scarface¡¯s probing question, he calmly smiled and said, ¡°by chance, i have cultivated some inner strength.¡± as expected, upon hearing this reply, the color drained from scarface¡¯s face. yet, he still stubbornly asked, ¡°where did you learn martial arts? where did you get the money to learn martial arts? did you secretly sell furs behind our backs?¡± he couldn¡¯t accept that he had been humiliated by a hunter whom he had once looked down on. so, he now wanted to grab onto the issue of secretly selling furs and hold lu yuan accountable. however, times have changed, and lu yuan had no interest in playing a game of presenting evidence and debating with such a small-time thug. lu yuan coldly laughed, ¡°of course, i learned martial arts in jianghu, and i earned money in jianghu. as for the furs?¡± he scoffed, ¡°if you¡¯ve learned good martial arts, would you bother to pick up that measly fur money instead of doing great business?¡± after briefly explaining and giving a passable reason, lu yuan impatiently said, ¡°alright, i have things to do, and i¡¯m not interested in wasting time with a small-time character like you. if you have nothing else to say, get lost, or do you want to try my business?¡± with that said, he looked at scarface and his men with the eyes of a predator, as if calculating how much meat they had on their bones. the gaze of a top hunter naturally sent chills down scarface¡¯s spine. he felt as if he were being targeted by some terrifying creature, as if one wrong move could cost him his life. recalling the fate of his predecessor, the head of the black wolf gang shuddered. just over a year ago, the former biao ye had also been killed by a jianghu martial artist right on this street, along with several gang brothers. that moment was just like this one. scarface felt that he seemed to understand the feelings of his predecessor at that time. therefore, although he was extremely frustrated and resentful at heart, when he faced lu yuan¡¯s cold gaze, he shivered and forced a smile, ¡°lord lu is joking. i am of humble status and wouldn¡¯t dare to compete with you. since lord lu has other matters, we will leave you be. farewell.¡± scarface stepped aside and signaled his subordinates to make way, their obsequious attitude readily apparent. after weighing everything, he ultimately decided not to push his luck any further. those who mingle in jianghu are all full of blood and passion. if you truly push someone to the limit, they will come at you with deadly force. scarface finally managed to climb to his current position as a gang leader, and he still had a taste for wealth and luxury that he was not ready to give up on just yet. ¡°at least you know when to back off.¡± lu yuan glanced at him, then walked away without paying any more attention to these guys and headed directly towards the market. once his figure vanished, the smile that scarface had managed to squeeze out faded instantly. ¡°scarface, are we just letting him go like that?¡± one of the underlings, who had just escaped from the terrifying atmosphere, asked with some dissatisfaction. ¡°what else can we do?¡± scarface snapped back, anger in his voice. ¡°dare to cause him trouble? not afraid of dying, huh? think about how wang biao died.¡± ¡°uh¡­¡± the underling was reminded and recalled biao ye, who had died a year ago, and couldn¡¯t say anything more. after scolding his underling, scarface looked back at lu yuan¡¯s departing figure, his eyes shifting and pondering in his heart. he was hesitating. he was unsure whether or not to report lu yuan to the higher-ups in the gang, and have a few hall masters and elders teach this arrogant hunter a lesson. however, after thinking it through, he still couldn¡¯t quite gauge the opponent¡¯s strength. in the years prior, the gang spent considerable effort in suppressing ma ji qing, which involved several hundred gang members, including various hall masters, elders, and even the gang leader and his assistants. despite all this effort, they lost three hall masters, two elders, and one deputy gang leader. as for the ordinary gang members, their casualties reached the dozens. such heavy losses were undoubtedly a huge blow to the black wolf gang, practically leaving them severely injured. after investigating the cause of these casualties, they found that it all started because biao ye couldn¡¯t collect a meager amount of two or three silver taels in protection fees in the city and ended up killing one of ma ji qing¡¯s brothers. consequently, they were targeted for revenge. a catastrophe in the gang was caused by just two or three silver taels? this ironic truth naturally led to some introspection among the high-ranking members of the gang. as a result, after experiencing the incident with ma ji qing, the black wolf gang issued a rule that when collecting protection fees, their members must be sure to investigate if their targets have any background or relatives skilled in martial arts. if they did, then they could reduce or even waive the protection fees. after all, the government did grant tax exemptions to accomplished scholars. naturally, the various gangs in jianghu should show respect and special treatment to those with martial arts and internal strength. in the end, power speaks the loudest in jianghu. this circle valued strong practitioners even more than others. ¡°you¡¯re lucky.¡± after weighing the pros and cons, scarface figured that even if he reported this, the higher-ups would most likely ask him to let it go and avoid causing trouble. ultimately, he dismissed the idea, but threatened bitterly, ¡°just don¡¯t let me catch you when you¡¯re down on your luck. if i do, there will be hell to pay.¡± having said that, he vented his anger on his underlings, saying, ¡°what are you waiting for?¡± ¡°yes, sir.¡± the underlings quickly followed suit. the black wolf gang¡¯s members went on to threaten and intimidate other weaker individuals, hoping to regain their lost face. having suffered such humiliation today, they secretly vowed that once they found someone easy to bully, they would make sure to give them a proper ¡°welcome treatment.¡± only then could they vent their frustration.. Chapter 51 - Chapter 51: Chapter 35: It’s Just Like You chapter 51: chapter 35: it¡¯s just like you translator: 549690339 ¡°after today¡¯s incident, scarface and his black wolf gang underlings should not dare to cause trouble for me again.¡± on the street, lu yuan, who had just forced scarface and others into submission, was weaving through the crowd and reflecting in his heart. today¡¯s confrontation involved neither physical violence nor the drawing of blood. but in terms of effectiveness, it would not be any less powerful. the most direct effect was to make scarface and his gang realise that he was no longer the old hunter they could bully at will. indeed, how could a martial artist who has cultivated martial arts and internal strength be seen as a mere hunter anymore? even if the opponent was still hunting, as long as they didn¡¯t openly provoke the black wolf gang, turning a blind eye to the issue of protection money would not be a problem for the gang. after all, as a martial artist who has cultivated martial arts and belongs to the jianghu, he deserves to be given the appropriate status and respect. otherwise, wouldn¡¯t they be denying themselves, who also possess martial arts and internal strength? for a martial artist with internal strength to pay protection money to a non-skilled fishmonger is absurd, no matter how you look at it. if this goes public, can the black wolf gang still operate in the jianghu? if so, escaping the reputation of strict jianghu fellows would be impossible. in the jianghu, you won¡¯t make a name for yourself without a good reputation. therefore, even if it¡¯s for the sake of their own reputation, the gang can¡¯t take action against him as long as lu yuan doesn¡¯t directly provoke the black wolf gang. ¡°so, frequenting taverns and running around the jianghu can be helpful.¡± after carefully recalling his own handling of the situation and confirming there were no problems, lu yuan nodded satisfactorily. yes, he came up with many of the rules after traversing two prefectures, running through several county towns, and listening to countless conversations of jianghu martial artists in taverns over the past few months. although not all of it is necessarily correct, he was certain about at least 90% of it. it is because he understood some of today¡¯s martial arts rules that lu yuan dared to directly confront scarface today, even forcing this black wolf gang leader to submit to him. all his confidence came from the four-word rule: follow the jianghu¡¯s rules. in the jianghu, if you want to get along well, you have to follow the rules. be it the rules of the righteous or the underworld. now, lu yuan is also playing with the rules within this framework. ¡°although rules are said to be used by the strong to restrain the weak, it is undeniable that, in some cases, they can also be an umbrella to protect the weak.¡± he laughed lightly and strode towards the entrance of the medicine shop. ¡°doctor zhou!¡± as soon as he entered the shop, lu yuan immediately shouted. in the hall, there seemed to be no patients today, only zhou qing was arranging herbs. hearing someone yelling, he looked up, saw it was him, and immediately said unhappily, ¡®what¡¯s the noise? this is a medicine hall, not a tavern, be quiet.¡± it has been almost two months since he paid a hundred silver tales to order seven-step fragrance ingredients. with such a long time, zhou ze should have already gathered all the herbs. so this time when he came to the county town, lu yuan not only came to buy martial arts herbs but also to collect his order. zhou qing slapped his hand away, snorted and said, ¡°my father has gone out to collect herbs. he won¡¯t be back soon. you should come back at noon.¡± ¡°he went out?¡± lu yuan was slightly startled. ¡°yes.¡± zhou qing gave him a glance and snorted, ¡°is it not because someone spent a lot of money, asking my father to help collect herbs? for this matter, my father has often been out these past two months, even going to fu city. just yesterday, a batch of goods arrived from chi river county, so my father rushed over to receive them and hasn¡¯t returned yet.¡± ¡°qing¡¯er.¡± as they spoke, a gentle voice came from the entrance of the pharmacy. both of them quickly turned around and saw dr. zhou with a medicine box on his back, apparently he had returned. upon entering the pharmacy and taking a look around, dr. zhou was slightly taken aback when he saw lu yuan, but he immediately smiled and said, ¡°it¡¯s quite fortuitous that young master lu is here. the batch of goods you entrusted me to buy just arrived today, i can hand them over to you now.¡± ¡°really?¡± with joy in his heart, lu yuan swiftly expressed his gratitude, ¡°thank you, dr. zhou.¡± ¡°no need for thanks, i¡¯m merely carrying out a normal transaction with you.¡± zhou shook his hand dismissively. lu yuan had given him a deposit of a hundred silver taels. out of this amount, zhou spent seventy silver taels on purchasing herbs and another fifteen on greasing the wheels. in the end, he had made a profit of the remaining fifteen silver taels. earning fifteen silver taels in two months was a pretty lucrative venture. not to mention, it only cost him less than ten days during these two months to manage this task. all this totaled up to him earning about one and a half silver taels a day, which was basically equivalent to an average adult male¡¯s income a month in the city, this was indeed very substantial. ¡°here are your herbs.¡± after organizing and then retrieving the herbs he had previously bought from the medicine box, zhou handed them over to lu yuan once they were packed. ¡°thank you, dr. zhou.¡± lu yuan once again expressed his gratitude. ¡°it¡¯s no trouble,¡± dr. zhou shook his head, undeterred by the effort, but sighed somewhat, ¡°this should be the last batch. i¡¯m afraid i won¡¯t be able to help you if you need more in the future.¡± hearing this, lu yuan was startled and couldn¡¯t help but ask, ¡°what¡¯s the matter? has the supply run out?¡± he had just made a fortune, with thousands of silver taels in hand, and was thinking about ordering more goods to enhance his means of self-preservation. unexpectedly, he couldn¡¯t buy it anymore. zhou sighed, ¡°not exactly. it¡¯s just that our yuzhang prefecture has been infested with bandits who are stealing, robbing, killing, and committing arson all around. the counties to the east and south of the prefecture are all suffering greatly from this. the ingredients for the seven-step fragrance are mostly purchased through the channels in the east and south. now that the bandits have blocked the roads there, my suppliers don¡¯t dare to transport goods here, and i don¡¯t dare to go there to collect the goods. on my trip to chi river county just now, i heard about bandit activity to the east of the county. upon hearing this news, i decided to return to dayu county right away. compared to the surrounding counties, our area is relatively remote and poor. those bandits probably won¡¯t care about us, so it should be safe overall.¡± saying this, dr. zhou looked at lu yuan helplessly, ¡°so, until the bandits are quelled, even if you want to buy medicinal ingredients, i won¡¯t be able to help.¡± ¡°bandits?¡± hearing the reason, lu yuan¡¯s heart sank. he remembered his past experiences in southsea, twitching the corners of his mouth, he tested the waters, asking, ¡°dr. zhou, these bandits, is their name the black wind gang by any chance?¡± at this, zhou looked surprised, ¡°how did you know the bandits were called the black wind gang? has the news already spread over here?¡± lu yuan¡¯s eyelid twitched, his heart a tangle of emotions, leaving only one thought. alright then. it seems the mei county government and the plum blossom gang¡¯s so-called solution to the bandit problem was to push the bandits to yuzhang prefecture. surely, driving people to another jurisdiction and not having to deal with it in their own territory could be considered solving the problem, right? shifting trouble onto others, indeed. ¡°as expected, you didn¡¯t disappoint me, these officials and gangsters operations are just as i had anticipated.¡± lu yuan was surprisingly calm at the moment. unruffled by the waves.. Chapter 52 - Chapter 52: Chapter 36: Survival and Rules chapter 52: chapter 36: survival and rules translator: 549690339 ¡°hmm, i just heard about it from two merchants at the tea stall in the market.¡± lu yuan casually responded. could he say that he heard the news about the black wind gang in mei county, south sea prefecture? of course not, that would expose him. so for now, he could only bluff his way through the conversation. fortunately, doctor zhou didn¡¯t seem to mind too much, only lamenting, ¡°we common people are already struggling to make ends meet. now with these bandits running rampant and adding to our misery, life is really difficult.¡± lu yuan glanced at him and unmasked the truth, ¡°you¡¯re a doctor, and now with the bandits causing trouble, the government and local gangs will inevitably take action. there will definitely be fights, and fights will inevitably lead to injuries. when people get injured, won¡¯t they come to you for treatment? and i¡¯ve heard that this black wind gang is a gang of horse thieves with hundreds of members. it won¡¯t be easy to suppress them. who knows, this suppression might even drag on for months. so someone like me, a lowly commoner, might indeed have a hard time making a living because of this banditry. but you, a doctor who saves lives, will definitely have an unending stream of business and make plenty of money.¡± upon hearing this, zhou ze¡¯s eyes grew wide with anger, ¡°i am a doctor, and my purpose in practicing medicine is to save lives. if i could, i would rather not accept these patients or make money from them. i only wish for peace and prosperity for the world.¡± as a compassionate and ambitious doctor, zhou ze felt belittled by others. was he the kind of person who would disregard human life in order to make money? of course not. otherwise, he wouldn¡¯t have persistently persuaded lu yuan earlier. although it turned out in the end that persuasion was of no use and even mistaken, it didn¡¯t negate zhou ze¡¯s good intentions. ¡°alright, alright.¡± lu yuan quickly surrendered, ¡°don¡¯t be angry, don¡¯t be angry. i misunderstood you. i shouldn¡¯t have said that.¡± seeing that his supplier was upset, lu yuan immediately stopped talking. he was still counting on doctor zhou to provide herbs in the future, so he couldn¡¯t afford to offend him. zhou ze snorted lightly, ¡°i think you¡¯re the one who seems to be more excited about this banditry. just because you¡¯ve learned a bit of martial arts, you want to play the hero and kill bandits?¡± ¡°of course not.¡± lu yuan waved his hand, ¡°i¡¯ve only just started to make some progress in my training, and my life has improved a little because of it. i haven¡¯t enjoyed enough of the good days yet. let those people of the jianghu deal with the killing and chaos. i¡¯m not one of them, i¡¯m just an ordinary hunter who wants to live a peaceful life, make money, practice martial arts, and accumulate wealth so that i can enjoy life to the fullest.¡± he was just joking. the banditry in luling didn¡¯t affect any of his interests. so what if trade routes were blocked? he wasn¡¯t doing business and had no goods to transport, so there was no loss. he didn¡¯t care if the black wind gang was committing murder and arson. as long as it didn¡¯t affect him, only those who were full would think of risking their lives against such desperate criminals. lu yuan wasn¡¯t a great saint, and he didn¡¯t have much chivalrous spirit in his heart. he had never thought about saving the world. all he ever wanted was to practice martial arts for self-defense and happily live out his endless days. zhou ze looked at lu yuan approvingly, ¡°although your way of thinking lacks ambition, it is indeed a good way to ensure longevity.¡± doctor zhou had seen many chivalrous young heroes who stood up for justice when needed, but with very few exceptions, these people did not last long in the jianghu, and most of them lost their lives after a short time. the ones who really survived in the jianghu were those who knew how to keep a low profile. ¡°what¡¯s the use of ambition? can it be eaten?¡± lu yuan retorted. as an immortal, what he needed wasn¡¯t ambition, but goals and ideals. the ambition that motivated others to strive harder was useless to him. because with the passage of time, all achievements would slowly accumulate. for example, while others encouraged themselves to master an unparalleled sword technique within a year, lu yuan, on the other hand, could practice just one move a year and still master an unparalleled sword technique after hundreds or thousands of years, and even excel at it. so ambition and aspiration held no meaning for him. ¡°oh, right.¡¯ lu yuan suddenly remembered something and quickly pulled out three large silver ingots, each weighing ten taels, from his pocket and placed them on the table, ¡°please prepare six months¡¯ worth of medicine for me this time. since there are bandits outside, i¡¯ll buy more medicinal materials for safety reasons, so i won¡¯t have to come every month.¡± he was reminded of the black wind gang¡¯s ruthlessness. this gang of thieves was notorious for their brutal methods, killing countless people. they had already slaughtered more than a dozen wealthy households in mei county, and now that they were in luling, who knew how many local tyrants in the countryside had been wiped out. even lu yuan couldn¡¯t help but shiver at the thought of their actions. though there was no news of the black wind gang in dayu county, lu yuan decided to minimize his outings just in case and planned to stay at home to avoid any trouble. ¡°however, yangmei town only has a dozen or so militia members for defense, and even i could easily defeat them. if the black wind gang really comes, it won¡¯t be safe either. actually, the best option would be to hide back in the cave in the mountain. the vastness of the mountains and seas, once i dive into the woods, no one can find me. forget it. the situation hasn¡¯t reached that point yet; let¡¯s wait and see what happens. if things really go south, it won¡¯t be too late to run then.¡± lu yuan thought to himself. while he was thinking, zhou ze had already prepared the medicinal herbs he needed for his martial arts practice. half a year¡¯s worth of herbs, plus the additional ones for the seven-step fragrance, was a huge amount. seeing that lu yuan didn¡¯t bring his own carrying basket this time, zhou ze found one for him in his own home to carry the herbs. however, it wasn¡¯t for free. it cost 50 cents. for the already-wealthy lu yuan, naturally, he paid willingly. and so, carrying a large basket on his back, he left the medical clinic. he had acquired all the medicines he wanted. after hearing the news about the black wind gang, lu yuan no longer wanted to stay in the city and planned to return quickly. walking down the street, he suddenly saw a large crowd gathered at an intersection up ahead. curious, he approached. before he even got close to the crowd, he heard mournful cries and wails of pain. when he got there, lu yuan saw several strong men beating an old man in the center of the crowd, and it was scarface¡¯s group. ¡°please stop hitting him, i beg you, don¡¯t beat my father anymore.¡± on the side, a shabbily dressed young man was being restrained by two strong members of the black wolf gang, desperately sobbing, ¡°we know we were wrong, we really don¡¯t want to refuse to pay, but we have no money on hand now. once we sell the hides and have the money, we¡¯ll pay immediately, we¡¯ll pay double. i beg you, please stop hitting my father.¡± however, no matter how much he pleaded, the black wolf gang members did not stop. instead, seeing his desperate state, they showed sadistic smiles and hit even harder. under their beating, old chen was rolling and writhing on the ground, wailing constantly, with blood splattering all over the ground. the old hunter¡¯s struggles gradually weakened. but no one cared about any of this. the bystanders outside even seemed excited, cheering quietly, as if watching a great show. some kind-hearted people showed sympathy but didn¡¯t dare speak up. even when some black wolf gang members looked at them, they were frightened and lowered their heads. this was exactly what they wanted. to see these commoners desperately begging for mercy and then the look of despair on their faces. having been bullied by these commoners today, the black wolf gang wanted to vent their anger. scarface stood by, not saying anything, but the excitement in his eyes couldn¡¯t be hidden. in the crowd, watching all this, lu yuan¡¯s brows furrowed: ¡°old chen and little chen?¡± he recognized the father and son who were being beaten. they, like him, were hunters from dayu mountain. however, they didn¡¯t have much interaction on a daily basis, and only knew each other¡¯s faces, and didn¡¯t have a close relationship. ¡®are these mad dogs biting others since they can¡¯t bite me?¡¯ that¡¯s what lu yuan thought as he took one last look at the scene before turning to leave. he had no intention of stepping in to help. although old chen and his son might be the ones paying for his actions. but like he said before, they aren¡¯t close. moreover, lu yuan was relying not only on his strength but also the ¡°rules¡± of jianghu. he had driven off scarface and his group based on the rules of jianghu. now, scarface and his group were beating old chen according to the same rules. and for that reason, lu yuan would never dare to go against those rules until his strength could break them all. because that meant danger. as a pursuer of longevity, danger is what he feared most. as for old chen and his son? lu yuan could only mentally mourn them and then put the matter out of his mind. two strangers died and he had spared them two moments of mourning; that was already good enough, what more do you want? alright, he indeed has a cold-blooded nature. but perhaps it¡¯s because of this that he might live a long life.. Chapter 53 - Chapter 53: Chapter 37: Wanton Destruction chapter 53: chapter 37: wanton destruction translator: 549690339 after returning to yangmei town, lu yuan stayed at home, focusing on practicing palm skills and cultivating inner strength. there are a total of eighty-one cloud palm techniques, covering various aspects of defense, strong attacks, and sneak attacks. the previously used submerging water technique is just one of the attack skills. by now, lu yuan had already mastered both the submerging water technique and another defensive technique called fubo style after several months of research and practice. therefore, he now intended to practice the powerful and decisive yunwu style which is quite unexpected and highly concealed. after researching for about ten days, he was able to start practicing it. ¡°it should take about a month to master this move.¡± lu yuan thought as he performed a set of yunwu style, pulling back his palms after a swift strike. as he continued to study various scriptures of buddhism, taoism, and confucianism over the days, he gained a superficial understanding of them. although it was only a basic understanding and not a great achievement, it was astonishingly helpful in comprehending and learning palm techniques and inner strength as the depth of understanding increased. before, it took lu yuan half a year to fully understand a single palm technique. now, he only needs half a month to understand and a month to practice and master it. moreover, this time is far from the limit. ¡°when i have practiced more palm techniques, gained more experience, broadened my horizons, deepened my understanding, and improved my state of mind, i will be able to learn other various palm techniques by analogy and build upon them. at that time, perhaps it will really be possible to master one technique and understand all others. just like in martial arts novels where one can learn various palm techniques at a glance and use them at will. if it really comes to that step, i wonder what kind of scene it will be?¡± lu yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel excited as he thought about that scene in his mind. for him, who was half a martial arts fan, becoming a peerless martial arts expert who dominates the martial arts world and becoming a modern-day legend would undoubtedly be extremely attractive. ¡°no, with my lifespan being as long as the heavens, it won¡¯t be a modern-day legend, but a permanent legend.¡± with this thought, lu yuan couldn¡¯t help but look forward to that day even more. ¡°so now, to prepare for that day in the future, i must practice martial arts and strive diligently in practicing martial arts.¡± bringing back his focus, his body suddenly moved, his palms shot out swiftly, and the rapid afterimages flew by as he practiced his palm technique again. well, it must be said that compared to other immortals in novels, lu yuan is more outstanding when it comes to diligence. after all, he practiced palm techniques for two hours a day, and inner strength for another two hours. who can compare to this level of effort? time always flies by quickly. two months passed in the blink of an eye. lu yuan still stayed in yangmei town without going out, tirelessly cultivating his martial arts. however, as the saying goes, the world will not change just because of one person. while our arrow god and aspiring immortal from dayu mountain were working hard on their growth, the outside world was gradually becoming more turbulent. to be precise, it was in luling prefecture that things were starting to get chaotic. the threat of the black wind gang grew larger and larger. on the eighth day of march, the black wind gang entered luling prefecture, breaking into a wealthy household in the countryside and wiping out the entire family. on the tenth, the black wind gang rampaged through quannan county, breaking into three wealthy households and killing dozens of people. on the thirteenth, they entered dingnan county, destroying two wealthy households. on the fifteenth, they entered annan county, and three wealthy households were robbed¡­ in april, the black wind gang plundered the southern five counties ot luling prefecture, destroying more than ten households. in the middle of the month, the government rallied catch officers from various counties, and even mobilized 500 local garrison troops to encircle and suppress the black wind gang. unfortunately, the news was leaked, and the black wind gang was informed beforehand. they gathered more than a hundred horse bandits and over three hundred bandits who came from all over the place after hearing the news, ambushed the government troops, and annihilated more than two hundred garrison troops. countless patrol officers and catchmen were killed or injured. afterwards, bandits from all over the place flocked to join the black wind gang, and this group of bandits was on the verge of sweeping across the land. by the end of the month, thousands of bandits led by the black wind gang began to rampage across various counties of luling prefecture, which the government was unable to suppress. at the beginning of may. wang quan, the commander of luling prefecture, shao desheng, the chief catch officer of luling prefecture, and mo baichuan, the head of the iron sword sect, gathered together the local garrison forces, patrol officers, and local sects to jointly attack the black wind gang. both sides fought three battles, with countless casualties. among them, four of the seven leaders of the black wind gang were killed in battle, and more than half of the gathered bandits were defeated, with hundreds killed. on the government side, several generals, officers, and catch officers were killed. even the iron sword sect had reportedly lost several elders. it was precisely through this battle that the world came to know that the leader of the black wind gang had become a first-rate master, on the level of a renowned jianghu expert. even several of his subordinates had reached the second-rate level of strength. with such martial arts skills, let alone being a local bandit leader, they could even find a famous mountain treasure, establish their own sect directly, and pass down a lineage of the dao inheritance. for a time, the leader of the black wind gang, fang tianying, had instant fame in the jianghu and was respectfully called the [eagle king]. in the middle of the month, the leader of the black wind gang, fang tianying, challenged mo baichuan, the head of the iron sword sect and holder of the title [iron sword], to a duel on fairy maiden ridge scheduled for the end of the month, which immediately attracted the attention of countless people in the jianghu. martial arts experts from the surrounding four prefectures and thirteen counties were immediately alerted and rushed to watch the battle. they wanted a glimpse of the [eagle king] and [iron sword] in action. at the same time, the government and the army also began to prepare. on may 20th, lu yuan, carrying his own basket, came back to dayu county town. at this moment, seeing many people on the street dressed as jianghu martial artists, he couldn¡¯t help but sigh, ¡°the jianghu is restless, and the local areas are in turmoil.¡± in truth, he never thought that the chaos caused by the black wind gang would last so long. from the beginning of march to the end of may, nearly three months had passed, and the government and iron sword sect had not yet quelled this bandit rebellion. ¡°moreover, the black wind gang¡¯s fang tianying and his subordinate leaders are all first-rate and second-rate masters. previously, no one knew about their strength.¡± lu yuan recalled the news he had heard in the past few days, feeling somewhat incredulous. a first-rate master could be called a renowned jianghu presence, and their status and strength were naturally beyond question. the simplest example was mo baichuan, the current head of the iron sword sect, who held the title of [iron sword], and was only a first-rate master. at most, in the first-class sphere, he was an old-school renowned expert with even deeper strength. however, fang tianying and mo baichuan actually belonged to the same level of characters. the iron sword sect had a mo baichuan, and firmly ranked among the top jianghu sects in the prefecture. the black wind gang had a fang tianying, who, in theory, could easily find a county without a famous sect and establish his own sect there. with the support of several leaders with second-rate martial arts, fang tianying would be able to set up a famous jianghu sect in the blink of an eye. after managing it for two or three years, it would become a renowned martial arts sect. wouldn¡¯t it be better to be the head of a famous martial arts sect than to be a notorious bandit leader who was hunted by everyone? many people in the jianghu didn¡¯t understand this and made various speculations. lu yuan wasn¡¯t sure either. however, he could understand one thing, and that was that there must be some trick behind fang tianying¡¯s doing so. ¡°there¡¯s a problem, there must be a problem in this.¡± behind this, there must be some other factor driving the [eagle king], making him choose what appeared to be the worst path.. Chapter 54 - Chapter 54: Chapter 38: From the Heart chapter 54: chapter 38: from the heart translator: 549690339 lu yuan felt that the turmoil caused by the black wind gang, which ravaged the entire luling prefecture, was definitely not as simple as it seemed on the surface. behind this chaos, there must be some secret unknown to the public. and this secret was the reason for fang tianying¡¯s actions. ¡°so, is this another play of a great jianghu figure meddling in local affairs, resulting in bloodshed?¡± as a fan of martial arts novels, tv shows, and movies, lu yuan was already quite familiar with such plots and events. therefore, to those jianghu people who were in the dark, the appearance of the black wind gang and fang tianying¡¯s choice might be puzzling and incomprehensible. but for him, who had experienced countless films and novels, this scene seemed all too familiar. ¡°if i¡¯m not mistaken, there should be some great power behind the black wind gang. that power should be one of the top sects in jianghu. they plan to use the black wind gang as a pawn and cover, to do some things they can¡¯t do in the open¡­¡± at this moment, lu yuan recalled some of the novels he had read, where classic scenes appeared before him. when these scenes were put together, it suddenly had an outsider¡¯s effect, allowing him to step out of the current chaos in luling prefecture and review the current situation from a higher and unrelated perspective. in the end, he came to a conclusion. after all, the black wind gang started in south sea prefecture, suddenly emerged from there, and didn¡¯t stay there long before coming to luling prefecture in yuzhang prefecture. as for their purpose¡­ it might be to strike at the iron sword sect. it could also be that the martial arts forces of south sea prefecture want to invade yuzhang prefecture and expand their influence. this would make sense.¡± lu yuan touched his chin, and a perplexing question in his heart was answered. he was puzzled as to how such a powerful black wind gang, with a top-notch expert and several second-rate experts, and even hundreds of bandits, could have emerged. such a formidable force didn¡¯t seem to belong to ordinary bandits. but if there was a major jianghu sect secretly cultivating them as a ¡°black hand¡±, it wouldn¡¯t be surprising. it made sense. ¡°and there¡¯s that incident in mei county.¡± lu yuan recalled another piece of evidence: ¡°at that time, the plum blossom gang and the local officials teamed up to drive away the black wind gang. a group of second-rate experts and a bunch of nobodies managed to repel a top-tier expert ¨C it sounds ridiculous. but if the black wind gang cooperated, it would be normal.¡± it must be said that the incident in mei county, where the local forces drove away the black wind gang, left a deep impression on him. and it was because of this that he found the appearance of the black wind gang more and more suspicious. they left too many traces along the way, which could not withstand scrutiny. ¡°however, even though everyone knows there¡¯s something wrong with the black wind gang, as long as the people behind them don¡¯t expose themselves and admit it, who can do anything? all they have to do is use the black wind gang to wipe out the forces they want to target, like the iron sword sect, a famous jianghu sect. with the victims gone, so are the grievances. as for the friends of the iron sword sect, who cares, who dares to meddle? in the end, jianghu is all about strength.¡± the current situation reminded lu yuan of a martial arts novel he had read, which was vividly depicted. that novel was called smiling, proud wanderer. the black wind gang for the hidden manipulator, just like the criminals raised by songshan sect¡¯s zuo lengchan in the novel. the black wind gang¡¯s massacre of innocent people in luling prefecture and the iron sword sect was eerily similar to the lin family¡¯s annihilation in the story. ¡°this jianghu, it¡¯s too dark!¡± remembering the plot of the novel, lu yuan couldn¡¯t help but shiver and tighten his clothes. for an innocent, kind, and adorable little hunter like him, this ruthless and bloodstained jianghu was simply too dangerous. the outside world is so scary; i want to go back to the mountains. that¡¯s what he thought at this moment. ¡°well, this time i will buy half a year¡¯s worth of medicinal herbs for training, and then i will hide in the mountains. let this chaotic world be. it has nothing to do with me anymore.¡± at this moment, lu yuan felt that he should make good use of the advantage of being a long-lived person and lay low for a while. he soon arrived at zhou¡¯s medical clinic. when lu yuan entered, he was greeted by an overwhelming smell of medicine and the stench of blood. in front of his eyes were scenes of injury and wailing. he saw five or six patients lying on temporary wooden beds in the lobby, moaning in pain. beside them were martial arts experts with varying degrees of anger and pain on their faces. ¡°brother zhou.¡± lu yuan found zhou ze and his son, who were busy at work. doctor zhou was busy changing dressings for the patients, while zhou qing was frantically preparing various prescribed medications on the side. both of them were extremely busy, and the hall was in chaos. ¡°it¡¯s you.¡± at this moment, zhou ze was bandaging a man with a severed hand. the man¡¯s wrist had been chopped off at the root, and blood was flowing non-stop, soaking most of his clothes. his face was pale due to excessive blood loss, and he was extremely weak. but when the doctor uncovered the wound, the pain still made the man howl. the despair in his hoarse voice was chilling to hear. two of his companions held down his struggling body, and zhou ze seized the time to apply medicine to stop the bleeding. it wasn¡¯t until a while later that the bandaging was finally completed. letting out a long sigh of relief, doctor zhou wiped his sweat and didn¡¯t care about the blood that had splashed all over him. he turned his head and asked, ¡°what do you want this time?¡± ¡°what¡¯s going on with these people?¡± lu yuan asked softly, worried that people nearby would hear him. zhou ze maintained a calm expression: ¡°they¡¯re all outsiders who came to watch the battle at fairy maiden ridge. they¡¯re short-tempered and got into conflicts in the city, which resulted in this.¡± having said that, he looked up and down at lu yuan and commented, ¡°see, i told you before, the martial arts world isn¡¯t that easy to get by in. fortunately, you¡¯re a scaredy-cat who¡¯s afraid of death, and you haven¡¯t run into any problems. perhaps you¡¯ll be able to live longer.¡± ¡°are you mocking me or praising me¡­ ¡® lu yuan looked at the doctor, somewhat speechless. was he really that cowardly and afraid of death? that¡¯s called being cautious and prudent. he didn¡¯t understand any of it, yet he still made random judgments. at this moment, another patient nearby could not bear the pain and screamed. lu yuan was startled. frankly speaking, having heard so many screams and witnessing the shocking scene before him, he felt shaken. he couldn¡¯t help but think in his heart. ¡®this is the outcome of venturing into the martial arts world. if i were a reckless and inexperienced youth, i might have ended up like them if i rushed into the martial arts world.¡¯ with that thought, he felt extremely relieved. ¡®fortunately, i am a cautious person.¡¯ lu yuan had always used long-range attacks with his bow and arrow and traps in combat. now, he had the added advantage of using sedatives for sneak attacks. overall, he had always avoided engaging in close combat and focused on maintaining stability. at this point, zhou ze was really getting a bit impatient with him and asked outright, ¡°alright, what do you want? i still have patients to attend to!¡± ¡°i¡¯m here to buy medicine, half a year¡¯s worth¡­¡± lu yuan revealed a habitual smile, but glancing at the injured people in the hall, he immediately changed his mind: ¡°no, make it a year¡¯s worth.¡± it must be said. the cries of pain in the hall indeed frightened him a bit. therefore, as someone who values longevity, he made a last-minute decision. to buy more medicine. this time, the dayu mountain archery god planned to lay low for an extended period. after all, being called the dayu mountain archery god, he should spend more time in the mountains, otherwise, he would appear to be neglecting his duty, right? yes, this was definitely not because he was frightened. it was heartfelt. ¡°here, i knew you¡¯d come to see me, so i prepared in advance. these are the herbs you need.¡± a moment later, zhou ze, who understood lu yuan well, placed a large bag of herbs into his backpack. ¡°nobody knows me like doctor zhou.¡± lu yuan nodded with satisfaction, quickly paid the silver taels, and then turned to leave. the atmosphere at the ghost clinic was too creepy. plus, the martial artists with faces full of hatred and anger were quite intimidating. he always felt that if he looked at them, they would target him. what are you looking at? what if i¡¯m looking at you? and then¡­ lu yuan didn¡¯t want to experience that famous scene. time to go, time to go. under the noon sun on the official road, with a cheerful stride and a heavy backpack, the dayu mountain archery god embarked on his journey home.. Chapter 55 - Chapter 55: Chapter 39: Chaos chapter 55: chapter 39: chaos translator: 549690339 chaos, utter chaos, everything was in disarray. as the news of the duel between fang tianying and mo baichuan on fairy maiden ridge spread, the entire martial arts world of yue country and lingnan began to boil. top-notch experts, renowned throughout the world, were typically sect leaders, holding esteemed positions and possessing formidable strength. such figures would not engage in battles lightly. in the regions of jiangzuo and lingnan, it had been nearly ten years since people of such calibre had fought in a decisive battle. thus, when the news spread, all martial artists who had heard about it rushed to the scene, whether they could make it in time or not. in order to take shortcuts, some even traversed dayu mountain like hunters. anyway, they were all skilled martial artists; encountering tigers or wolves in the mountains would only require a sword strike or two, hardly posing a threat. under these circumstances, even remote places like yangmei town saw martial artists emerging from the mountain forests from time to time. this spectacle caught the attention of many and left them amazed. however, this also left lu yuan complaining bitterly. ¡°it¡¯s just a duel, isn¡¯t it? why are they so crazy, venturing into the mountains? they should be heroes instead of competing with me, a mere hunter, for my livelihood. ¡± that¡¯s right, those jianghu martial artists taking shortcuts through the mountains disrupted lu yuan¡¯s plan to retreat there. according to his original plan, dayu mountain was vast and remote, an ideal hiding spot to avoid the external turmoil and guarantee his safety. but now, with the influx of martial artists from lingnan, dayu mountain was no longer as peaceful as before. keep in mind. the jianghu society was not entirely composed of good people; in fact, it could be said that over 90% were not good people. even orthodox martial arts sects like the iron sword sect held secret alliances with local gangs like the black wolf gang to collect money for them, right? if that¡¯s the case with the so-called righteous martial arts experts, the bandits, gangs, and even the demonized characters dubbed as ¡®demonic cultivators¡¯ were even more ruthless and bloodthirsty. ¡°these martial artists of jianghu, regardless of black or white, should be killed even if they committed no crime.¡± recalling the encounters in the mountains, lu yuan¡¯s heart raced. a few days ago, he still harboured some hope, thinking that those martial artists crossing the mountains were just passing through and shouldn¡¯t pay attention to an insignificant hunter like him. at present, entering the mountain and laying low should not pose any problems. however, this notion only lasted for less than a day in lu yuan¡¯s mind before it vanished entirely. it was because he saw death. yes, death, massive swathes of death. ¡°old an and old spotted head¡­ they died so unjustly.¡± lu yuan¡¯s cave was located in the deeper parts of the mountains. thus, to access his cave, he would have to pass through several hunting grounds of other hunters. over time, they became familiar with each other. however, this time, when he passed through the hunting grounds of old an and old spotted head, he discovered their corpses at their dwelling places. both were killed by sword, dying without a chance to fight back. without a doubt, the killers were jianghu people. their houses were looted, as if someone had ransacked them. clearly, some of the jianghu people had used the residences of the two hunters as temporary resting points while crossing the mountains, killing them and seizing their wealth in the process. apart from the unlucky hunters, lu yuan also found the corpses of some martial artists scattered in the mountain ridges. without much speculation, recalling what he had seen at the zhou medical clinic, it was probably another typical jianghu conflict, like the ¡®you looking at me?¡± kind. the duel between eagle king and iron sword had not yet begun, but the area around luling prefecture had already seen countless lives sacrificed as a warm-up before the main event. without saying more. having seen the scenes in the mountains, lu yuan dared not stay any longer and immediately fled back to town. not only him, many other hunters in the mountains, the lucky ones who didn¡¯t get killed or the smarter ones, panicked like animals fleeing natural disasters, escaping the mountains in droves. even in yangmei town, two hunters from the mountains had settled temporarily. ¡°staying alone in the mountains, weak and vulnerable, no one would know if you¡¯re killed by those jianghu people. so naturally, there would be no concerns. however, outside, in towns and cities. under the enforcement of the imperial law, the restrictions of jianghu ethics, those renowned martial arts experts would, of course, refrain from wanton killing considering their reputation. as for the demonic martial artists, they dare not make things too big under the constraints imposed by the government and their rivals. after all these, it turns out that the desolate mountains are more dangerous than the safety of the town.¡± at this point, lu yuan could only feel the satirical irony of reality hitting him. nevertheless, he didn¡¯t feel frustrated or upset that his plan had failed. compared to not being able to hide in the mountains, having a safe place to stay in town, with some protection, was still a silver lining amidst the misfortune. at least, he didn¡¯t have to worry about his personal safety. ¡°no, i should say, there¡¯s a high probability that i won¡¯t be in danger.¡± after thinking about it, lu yuan changed his words.. Chapter 56 - Chapter 56: Chapter 39: Chaos_2 Chapter 56: Chapter 39: Chaos_2 Translator: 549690339 After all, life is unpredictable, and the Jianghu is dangerous. No one knows when disaster might strike unexpectedly. After leaving the mountain, Lu Yuan stayed cautiously in Yangmei Town, not even going out of his house, focusing on practicing martial arts at home. Two days later, Sun Siwen returned. Scholar Sun has been busy attending various literary and social gatherings, visiting classmates and colleagues, meeting senior juren, and expanding his social circle since he gained his title. He was extremely busy. Finally having time to rest, he began to study hard, researching exam questions, and preparing for this year¡¯s Imperial Examination. With all these things going on, the number of times he met with Lu Yuan decreased. It used to be once every two or three days, then it changed to once every five days, then to once every ten days or half a month, and now, they hadn¡¯t seen each other for almost a month. Today. At noon, Lu Yuan brought his homemade Green Plum Wine and cured deer meat to Sun Siwen¡¯s home to meet with his friend. After they had a few rounds of wine and tasted various dishes, they started to talk about things. Scholar Sun drank a glass of Green Plum Wine poured by Lu Yuan, then slammed the glass on the table with a bang, his face flushed red, and said, ¡°Brother Lu, you have no idea how arrogant and unbridled those Jianghu martial artists are¡ªthey openly kill people on the streets of Fu City, with no regard for the law!¡± As a scholar, especially one who had just passed the examination and entered the ruling class, Sun Siwen was extremely disgusted and angry with the reckless behavior and blatant disregard for the law displayed by the people from the Jianghu. What did the imperial court rely on to rule the world? It relied on various rules and regulations, and the obedience of the common people under those rules. Only if the common people obeyed and dare not resist, scholars like him with titles and the ability to become officials could enjoy their positions, oppress and exploit others. But now, what did Mr. Sun see? He saw various sword-carrying and knife-wielding martial artists from the Jianghu appearing openly in the highest-ranking city in one province. They fought bloody duels in public, occasionally brutalized the common people, abducted women on the streets, and wrecked shops. Once, when Scholar Sun and his classmates were having a party at a brothel, a martial artist from the Jianghu barged in. Not only did he act rudely and speak obscenely, but he even snatched away the sought-after courtesan they were pursuing and took her away. The next day, the courtesan¡¯s naked, bruised corpse was unceremoniously dumped at the west gate of the city, attracting a crowd. Scholar Sun also went to see it. Seeing his former goddess with a gaze of utter despair and a tormented corpse that was unbearable to look at, he felt like his entire world was collapsing. What was even more frustrating was that the Prefect, who was supposed to maintain order in the city, did nothing. Not only did he not interfere, but he also issued orders for the city¡¯s patrol officers and officials to restrain and avoid conflict with those Jianghu martial artists. According to the information Scholar Sun received during a gathering, The reason the Prefect issued such an order was that he was threatened when someone sent a bloody human head to his bedroom while he was sleeping with his concubine at night. The head of the province was threatened. The threat would have been bad enough, but the fact that he submitted and became afraid was even worse. The mighty imperial court was being bullied to such an extent by Jianghu ruffians. For Sun Siwen, who had been studying the classics since childhood and pursuing loyalty to the emperor and service to the country, this was like shattering his worldview and crushing his beliefs. As a result, the city became increasingly chaotic with the officials turning a blind eye to it. Jianghu martial artists fought everywhere, and local thugs took advantage of the situation to rob and plunder. A once orderly city was now filled with turmoil and chaos. In such a situation, it was impossible to hold literary gatherings or study in peace. With no other choice, Sun Siwen packed his bags and returned to his hometown, Yangmei Town. ¡°If I become an official in the future, I will definitely restore order in the local area, enforce the law rigorously, and eliminate these bandits. If I have the good fortune to enter the imperial court, I will petition the emperor to ban martial artists all over the world and eliminate these rebellious elements, leaving no one behind!¡± Sun Siwen said with a resolute and indignant expression. ¡°Brother Sun, I admire your great aspirations, allow me to raise a toast to you,¡± said Lu Yuan, showing his respect upon hearing Sun¡¯s words. Truth be told, with the arrival of martial artists from the Jianghu, who turned Dayu County, which was originally peaceful and harmonious, into something resembling Gotham in Yue Country, he was quite discontented in his heart. No matter what, Dayu County was the first place Lu Yuan stayed in when he traveled from another world, and it could be considered as his half hometown. Now that his hometown has been made smoky and polluted by others, and he can¡¯t even return to his own home in the mountains, it¡¯s only natural for anyone to get angry. Moreover, the boldness, contempt for order, and brutality of the Jianghu people have gradually left a deep impression in Lu Yuan¡¯s mind through what he has seen and heard these days. It can be said that, He had no good feelings for such social groups that brought no benefit to society, could only be an unstable factor, continually causing destruction and chaos, seriously threatening the lives of others, especially his own. As one who seeks longevity, what he likes most is stability. Because stability represents safety, and safety means no major threats to one¡¯s life. Stability is the most important thing. As for those martial artists from the Jianghu who disrupt stability, Lu Yuan naturally wanted to eliminate them, preferably in one clean sweep, to prevent them from unexpectedly coming out in the future and indiscriminately stabbing him with a sword. ¡®However, this kind of thing can only be thought of in my heart, and it is impossible to achieve in reality.¡¯ He sighed in his heart. Lu Yuan knew that in this world of martial arts, it was unrealistic to ban martial arts. For a simple reason: In this world, those who possess the highest martial power are the Jianghu martial artists who have mastered martial arts. They are the highest rulers of this world, and the emperor is just one of their spokespersons. It was naive to think that these martial artists would overthrow themselves. Moreover, Lu Yuan had been practicing martial arts for more than a year, had opened up only one meridian, and knew only two palm techniques. Even so, in close combat, he felt he could defeat an ordinary army of more than ten people. You must know that he was just a low-level martial artist. Above him, there were third-rate, second -rate, and first-rate martial artists. Even above first-rate martial artists, there were legends about grandmasters and great grandmasters. A low-level martial artist can be a match for an army of more than ten people. What about those first-rate experts who stand at the top of Jianghu, and the grandmasters and great grandmasters who are in the legend? ¡®I¡¯m afraid only the Earthly Gods and Immortals described in novels, who can be an army by themselves and be invincible to tens of thousands, can be used to describe them, right? But who can balance such characters? Those scholars who are powerless, or the ordinary army that is like grass in their eyes?¡¯ Lu Yuan thought to himself. The more he knew, the more he revered the world. Similarly, his understanding of this world became clearer. Therefore, unlike Sun Siwen¡¯s naive ideal, Lu Yuan was acutely aware that as long as martial arts exist for a day, it would be impossible to eradicate the martial artists of Jianghu. Even if there is oppression in this world, it is impossible to clean it up. The only thing humans can do is to try their best to delay, suppress, and alleviate the situation. Sun Siwen, in Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes, was just such a person trying to delay, suppress, and alleviate the situation. ¡°Come, Brother Sun, let me toast you a glass.¡± He smiled, raising his glass and happily drinking with his friend who had lofty ideals. Lu Yuan could not save the world. For one, he was not that selfless and was not willing to sacrifice himself for others. Secondly, he was lazy and did not want to do things that were destined to have no results. Just because he didn¡¯t do it himself didn¡¯t mean he hated and despised those who were willing to do it. On the contrary, he admired people who had such altruistic ideas. At this time, as a friend, he did not mind adding fuel to the fire for Mr. Sun¡¯s ideal path, so that the other party could walk farther and smoother. ¡°Anyway, it¡¯s just a few words of encouragement, and it doesn¡¯t cost money.¡± Drinking fine wine, Lu Yuan narrowed his eyes, thinking beautifully in his heart. Next to him, Mr. Sun was inspired by the words of encouragement and his blood was boiling. His eyes were shining with light. Perhaps, in a few years or more than ten years, there will be such a prime minister who can save the world under the sky! Who knows? Everything is possible.. Chapter 57 - Chapter 57: Chapter 40: Duel Outcome, Exaggeration, Truth? Chapter 57: Chapter 40: Duel Outcome, Exaggeration, Truth? Translator: 549690339 In the blink of an eye, it was the 25th of May. That afternoon, Lu Yuan invited Sun Siwen to the tavern in town for a drink. It had become a new habit for the two of them in recent days. The main reason was that Lu Yuan wanted to gather more information in the tavern. Keeping an eye on the trends in Jianghu was one of his preparations. With the start of the duel between Eagle King and Iron Sword, no one knew how the waves in Jianghu caused by the Black Wind Gang would turn out. But one thing Lu Yuan was sure of was that this duel, even if it ended with a victory or defeat, would not be the end of the chaos but the beginning of a greater turmoil. ¡°After all, the duel seems to be between Black Wind Gang and Iron Sword Sect. But the real game behind it is the martial arts world of South Sea Prefecture and Yuzhang Prefecture. The South Sea Prefecture wants to expand northward, while Yuzhang Prefecture wants to defend its territory. This chaotic fight is just the beginning, and it¡¯s still a long way from the end¡­¡± During this time, Lu Yuan had grasped some clues and figured out some truths behind the chaos caused by Black Wind Gang after sorting through various pieces of news, real or fake, that had circulated from all over the place. He figured out that the martial arts struggle between Yuzhang Prefecture and South Sea Prefecture was happening. As for whether there was a deeper secret behind it, it was unknown due to the limitations of the current news and intelligence. With these thoughts in mind, Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen arrived at the tavern. As soon as they reached the entrance, a waiter saw them and immediately greeted them warmly. ¡°Lord Lu! Scholar Sir!¡± The county of Dayu was a small place with a small population, and everyone was familiar with each other. Previously, Lu Yuan had repelled Scarface from the Black Wolf Gang in the county town, which happened directly at the bustling entrance of the market. On that day, countless people had come and gone, including two people from Yangmei Town.. When the two people from Yangmei Town saw Lu Yuan¡¯s heroic deed, they were amazed and spread the news when they returned to the town. The Black Wolf Gang was the largest gang in the county, and in the eyes of the common people, they were like the government, the sky in Dayu County. If Lu Yuan could force them to retreat, wouldn¡¯t that mean he was as powerful as the heavens? Almost overnight. By the time Lu Yuan reappeared in front of the townspeople, their gazes contained not only closeness but also a touch of awe. The title of ¡°Lord Lu¡± spread at this time. As for Sun Siwen? After obtaining the Scholar¡¯s Degree, he was now a semi-official figure. Facing the ruling class, the town residents who had once looked down on him now feared and flattered him, and the shout of ¡°Scholar Sir¡± became the norm. ¡°We have reserved your usual seats in the tavern. Would you like the usual?¡± The waiter led the two to a corner table inside the tavern, wiped it clean, and asked. This tavern had three specialties. The first was Green Plum Wine, which was a specialty of the town. The second was braised pig¡¯s feet, made with the tavern¡¯s unique recipe and a taste that was absolutely superb. The third was sour plums, a great appetizer. Whenever the two of them visited, they always ordered these three. ¡°Yes,¡± replied Scholar Sun in a reserved tone. After passing the scholar examination, Scholar Sun maintained his usual friendly and approachable attitude towards Lu Yuan, but he had a different face when dealing with ordinary townspeople. Although he did not consider himself above them and saw them as mere ants, he no longer thought of himself as one of the common people. As Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen were regulars at the tavern and always ordered the same dishes, the tavern had already prepared their meal before they arrived. A few minutes after ordering, steaming hot pig¡¯s knuckles and sweet and sour plum dishes were served with warmed Green Plum Wine. It was around 11:30 in the morning, when the lunch rush had just begun but was not yet at its peak. At this time, there were only two rich men in the tavern besides Lu Yuan, leisurely having a drink. The chaos caused by the Black Wind Gang had deeply affected the peace and prosperity of the various places in Luling Prefecture. Many business deals and businesses had been halted or dwindled as a result. So, many wealthy merchants who ran shops and businesses began to pay attention to the decisive battle on Fairy Maiden Ridge. These days, Lu Yuan had often heard the town¡¯s rich men cursing and condemning Eagle King Fang Tianying in the tavern, hoping for his death at the hands of the Iron Sword Sect leader and removal of this scourge. In a sense, Iron Sword MO Baichuan was now the popular choice, coming with the momentum. Unfortunately, this kind of verbal support would not affect the outcome of the duel. The landlords could only curse secretly in the tavern and then, like Lu Yuan, listen obediently to the news brought by passing merchants and travelers, in order to learn the outcome of the battle. ¡°Yesterday was the 24th, the day of the scheduled battle. By now, the battle on Fairy Maiden Ridge should have a result, and it will soon be known.. I wonder, what could be the outcome of this battle?¡± Chapter 58 - Chapter 58: Chapter 40: Duel Outcome, Exaggeration, Truth? 2 Chapter 58: Chapter 40: Duel Outcome, Exaggeration, Truth? 2 Translator: 549690339 Lu Yuan was drinking and casually chatting with Sun Siwen next to him. However, the focus of both clearly wasn¡¯t on their conversation. Their minds had drifted to the Battle of Fairy Maiden Ridge. But to find out what happened, they had to wait for any passing merchants or travelers from the Jianghu to bring the news. Yangmei Town was somewhat remote, causing news to spread a bit slow. If they were in Fu City, the results of the Battle of Fairy Maiden Ridge would have been heard that night. Even in Dayu County Town, the news should have arrived this morning. Time slowly passed. Some people had come and gone in the tavern, but they were all locals, no visitors. It was almost one o¡¯clock, midday had almost passed and no one had arrived. At this time, about a dozen people had gathered in the tavern. The food and drinks on their table had almost finished, but everyone stayed, chatting absently, occasionally glancing towards the tavern door. Clearly, they were all waiting for news from the Battle of Fairy Maiden Ridge. This battle had indeed touched the hearts of many people in Luling Prefecture, it was fair to say it stirred up clouds and winds. Lu Yuan was a bit anxious, considering if he should go to the county town to find out the news himself. But thinking about the recent chaos, he dismissed his thought and chose to play safe. After all, it was just news. Even if the waiting was hard, it wasn¡¯t worth the risk. Even if that risk was very small. Luckily, when many people were starting to get impatient, a customary merchant who frequented the town arrived with a huge box of goods for women¡¯s makeup. When he wiped his sweat and found something off, he looked up and noticed that all eyes in the hall were fixated on him. He was shocked, and asked awkwardly, ¡°Gentlemen, did I do something wrong?¡± No sooner had he finished speaking than a fidgety fat landlord nearby blurted out, ¡°Li Er, since you often shuttle between the county and countryside, do you know who won the Battle of Fairy Maiden Ridge?¡± Upon hearing this, everyone brightened up, their eyes enthusiastically fixed on Merchant Li Er. Such grand postures somewhat startled Li Er, but he stuttered back, ¡°I¡­ I know. In this battle¡­ Sect Leader MO and Chief Capture Shao joined forces, defeated the Rebel leader Fang Tianying, leaving him severely wounded and on the run.¡± ¡°We won?¡± ¡°Why did they join forces? Weren¡¯t they supposed to duel?¡± ¡°Of course they had to team up against such cunning thieves, who would play fair with them.¡± ¡°But how did they let Fang Tianying escape?¡± ¡°As long as that rebel isn¡¯t eliminated, our Luling Prefecture will never have peace. ¡± ¡°Sigh, winning this fight is futile anyway.¡± Upon receiving the result, the people in the hall immediately began to discuss loudly. At this moment, the fidgety fat landlord who asked the question earlier slapped the table hard, and turned to the others behind him, ¡°Stop arguing! Can¡¯t you let Li Er finish talking about the battle first?¡± After speaking, the fat landlord turned to Li Er and with a forced smile, he said, ¡°Li Er, you can talk at your own pace. I¡¯ll cover your drinks today. Order as much food and drink as you want, just tell us more about the details of the battle. How did Master MO defeat the Eagle King, why did Chief Capture Shao help, how badly is Fang Tianying injured, was he chased out of Luling Prefecture? Tell me all about it.¡± Upon hearing this, an elated Li Er quickly thanked him, ¡°Thank you, Master Sun,¡± Then he summoned the tavern¡¯s staff and ordered several dishes, as well as a few pots of good wine. He then looked at the eager men around him, cleared his throat, and launched into his narration, ¡°The Rebel Head Fang Tianying challenged the Iron Sword Sect Leader MO Baichuan, and the battle was set to commence at around 5 0¡¯clock in the morning. On that day, the martial arts heroes of the world.. As a merchant, Li Er was naturally good at talking. He took all the rumors and gossip he heard from the county, added some of his own interpretations, and vividly relayed them. There were tales of how Sect Leader MO was like an immortal being, leaping hundreds of feet high, and with one stroke of his Iron Sword, sliced a piece off a mountain top. And how Fang Tianying was so formidable, his single strike on the river surface could stop the river flow. They talked about how the voice of the two could transmit hundreds of miles, just like thunder. They even said the Eagle King could fly in the sky, like a mighty eagle, the king of the air. All sorts of exaggerated descriptions were reported by Li Er. The landlords in the hall listened attentively, marveling and praising his tales. Even some appeared to fully believe Li Er, viewing MO Baichuan and Fang Tianying as immortals and holding them in complete reverence. Even those with occasional doubts only questioned the exaggerated descriptions of flying and thunderous voices. They seemed to believe the stories of slicing mountains and breaking rivers. For the people of Luling Prefecture, Iron Sword Sect Leader MO Baichuan, who commanded the martial arts world in the prefecture, was indeed akin to an immortal. When they looked at his achievements, they naturally viewed them through a lens of awe. That kind of posture was somewhat understandable. Lu Yuan, listening to Li Er¡¯s account, was dumbfounded. He turned his head to look at Sun Siwen, only to find that the scholar was also stupefied like him.. Chapter 59 - Chapter 59: Chapter 40: Duel Victory or Defeat, Exaggeration, Truth?_3 Chapter 59: Chapter 40: Duel Victory or Defeat, Exaggeration, Truth?_3 Translator: 549690339 ¡°Brother Sun.¡± Lu Yuan tentatively asked. At this time, Sun Siwen¡¯s demeanor was somewhat off as he kept muttering under his breath, ¡°Nonsense, nonsense, how could there be such immortal beings in this world. Flying high and burrowing deep, cleaving mountains and splitting rivers, truly ignorant and foolish, to believe in such absurdities.¡± Well, Mr. Sun seemed to be a bit shaken at this moment. Seeing this, Lu Yuan could only shake his head, take a sip of wine, and think to himself. Unlike the countryside landlords who were only amazed by the fascinating stories and never probing into their authenticity. As someone who had practiced martial arts and made some achievements, Lu Yuan had no doubt about the various amazing things that martial arts could achieve. But if you made him believe that martial arts could accomplish things like flying and burrowing, cleaving mountains and splitting rivers, it would be a bit insulting to his intelligence. ¡°Maybe those grandmasters, or even great-grandmasters, who claim to be able to cleave mountains and split rivers, I can reluctantly accept, after all, they are truly legendary figures.¡± But saying that a martial arts leader who is only a first-rate name in the Jianghu can fly and tunnel, cleave mountains and split rivers, is just treating people as fools.¡± Lu Yuan, of course, didn¡¯t believe what Li Er said. The Cloud Palm skill that he himself practiced was a second-rate palm skill, capable of being cultivated to the entry-level of the second-rate. However, even if the Cloud Palm is practiced to its pinnacle, and he himself enters the second-rate realm, Lu Yuan thought he could only break a piece of bluestone with one palm, and that would be his limit. But for a first-rate master, just a large realm higher than the second-rate, it is said that they could fly and tunnel, cleave mountains and split rivers, isn¡¯t this nonsense? ¡°It can¡¯t be that the difference between the first-rate and the second-rate is like the difference between mortals and immortals, right? Where one could ascend to immortality upon passing?¡± It was precisely because he had practiced martial arts that Lu Yuan knew at a glance that Li Er¡¯s exaggerated descriptions had been heavily modified by many people. It makes sense. As the news spread from Fairy Maiden Ridge, it would have to pass through the mouths of several people and several places along the way. As for rumors, once they ferment, there would naturally be countless interpretations, and then people would spread them again according to their own understanding. Eventually, the story would become completely unrecognizable, which is not surprising at all. ¡°However, although the news is exaggerated, the information is not entirely useless and allows me to confirm a few points.¡± Lu Yuan sipped his wine, wearing a solemn expression, and his mind was rapidly processing, slowly extracting the false information that had been exaggerated and artistically modified, and sifting out the true information he wanted. ¡°First, it is true that Fang Tianying was defeated.¡± ¡°Second, the Eagle King is only severely injured, but not dead. The Black Wind Gang hasn¡¯t been driven out of Luling Prefecture, which means that the bandit crisis will continue for some time.¡± ¡°Third, Li Er said that Wang Quan, the local commander of the Luling Prefecture garrison, had also wanted to attack the Eagle King. But somehow, a mysterious masked man in black appeared out of nowhere and stopped Wang Quan.¡± Because of this, the original plan for a three-pronged attack turned into a two-pronged one, allowing the Eagle King to escape.¡± As Lu Yuan pondered the three pieces of information he had extracted, he already had an answer in mind: ¡°So, as expected, the people behind Fang Tianying intervened in the duel.¡± And it¡¯s precisely because Fang Tianying knew that he had someone backing him, he initiated the duel, knowing he wouldn¡¯t die. As for the purpose of his duel, was it to provoke? To demonstrate? Or something else?¡± Lu Yuan furrowed his brows, feeling that it was veiled in heavy fog, making it difficult to find the truth and clues within. This answer seemed to be only revealing the surface layer to him.. Chapter 60 - Chapter 60: Chapter 41: Talent Development, Scholar’s Distress Chapter 60: Chapter 41: Talent Development, Scholar¡¯s Distress Translator: 549690339 As expected, the situation unfolded just like Lu Yuan had anticipated. Fang Tianying¡¯s defeat did not put an end to the chaos caused by the Black Wind Gang. On the contrary, the turmoil seemed to expand even further. After defeating Eagle King, the Iron Sword Sect and the government forces took advantage of their victory and launched an offensive. A large number of Iron Sword Sect disciples cooperated with the government and hunted down the Black Wind Gang members. However, the core leaders of the Black Wind Gang were all swift-acting horse thieves. They rode fast horses and came and went like the wind, striking one place and then immediately retreating, without staying in one place for long. This grand encirclement operation, in addition to eliminating some peripheral bandits, hardly killed any of the core leaders. It was as if they were taking the Iron Sword Sect disciples and government soldiers for a walk around Luling Prefecture. A cat-and-mouse game of chasing and fleeing was staged everyvvhere. However, it was clear to discerning eyes. Facing the Iron Sword Sect and the government forces with the advantage of being local snakes, even if the Black Wind Gang members could run fast, they would eventually be slowly eliminated. By then, no matter how powerful Fang Tianying, the Eagle King, was, without a large number of followers, he could only become a bare commander and wouldn¡¯t cause any huge waves. Eventually leaving in disgrace should be the only outcome for the opposing side. Unless. At this time, the Black Wind Gang could produce another top-notch expert to level the gap between the top combat powers, which would allow them to stand up against the Iron Sword Sect and the government forces. But is that possible? It¡¯s already a miracle for a group of nomadic bandits to have one top-notch expert. If another one appeared, making it two, even a fool could see that there must be a problem behind the scenes. Of course, as long as you have absolute strength and a clean enough approach, even if there are problems, others will choose to turn a blind eye and not dare to question. ¡°It¡¯s just unknown whether the person behind the Black Wind Gang has that Many people wondered. As for the cat-and-mouse game between the Black Wind Gang and the Iron Sword Sect and the government forces, besides going to the tavern every day to hear the latest news from the merchants, Lu Yuan did not pay much attention to it. Since hearing about Fang Tianying¡¯s defeat, he knew that there wouldn¡¯t be any significant changes in Luling Prefecture for a short period of time. Without changes, it means stability. Stability represents a certain degree of order and safety. Even if this order and safety were built on the killings outside, as long as there were no major issues in Yangmei Town, wouldn¡¯t that be enough? Compared to paying attention to the killings in the Jianghu, Lu Yuan preferred to spend his time on martial arts training. ¡°In this world, the lack of strength is a sin. One must be at the mercy of others.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t want to sin, and I don¡¯t want others to control my fate, so I must make myself stronger. To become stronger, I need to practice martial arts ¡ª this is the foundation of securing my life.¡± He understood this early on. Jianghu is dangerous. The recent turmoil has given Lu Yuan a vivid lesson. What will happen to those without strength? Old Chen and Old Spotted Head were the most obvious examples. Both of them had honest personalities and were warm-hearted. In their daily life, they would help each other with any problem and were the standard good-natured people. However, these good people were killed in their own homes, even though they lived peacefully in the mountains. The danger of Jianghu, the ruthlessness of society, and the cruelty of people¡¯s hearts were all vividly displayed. ¡°This is a lesson from the past.¡± Lu Yuan was awakened in his heart and put it into action. The most obvious change was that the time he spent practicing Inner Strength every day increased from two timings to four. As for the time he spent practicing Palm skills, it remained unchanged at two timings. He needed six timings a day just for practicing martial arts, which already accounted for half the day. He was very diligent. However, as a result, Lu Yuan¡¯s consumption of meat and medicinal herbs suddenly increased dramatically. Inner Strength was the combination of the soul and the essence of the body. There was no issue in the soul aspect. Lu Yuan had absorbed the original soul when he crossed over, so his soul power was already much stronger than ordinary people. A powerful soul not only brought strong perception, allowing him to sense the location of prey and danger in hunting but also provided a solid foundation and recovery speed, enough to support the high-intensity consumption of practicing Inner Strength. But there was no helping the physical aspect. After all, he had a soul transfer, not a body transfer. There wasn¡¯t another body for him to integrate with. ¡°The physical body is the source of essence and blood. If I forcibly extract the essence from my body to transform it into Inner Strength, it will inevitably lead to a serious consequence of blood depletion and severe damage to my vitality.¡± ¡°By then, I would become a dried corpse, and death would not be an exaggeration. ¡± ¡°In order to practice Inner Strength, one must not squeeze oneself into a dry person, for this goes against the purpose of martial arts practice and should not be pursued.¡± Lu Yuan saw things clearly. He was an immortal, with an infinite future. There was no need to risk one¡¯s life for momentary strength. Otherwise, it would be like throwing the helve after the hatchet ¨C an utterly stupid choice. Luckily, he had the talent for immortality, which besides giving him endless life, had another invisible benefit. That was the solidification of his physical fitness. It was only after two years of careful observation and experience that Lu Yuan discovered this invisible benefit. After he crossed over and inherited the original body, from that moment on, his physical time was forever fixed at that moment.. Chapter 61 - Chapter 61: Chapter 41: Talent Development, Scholar’s Distress 2 Chapter 61: Chapter 41: Talent Development, Scholar¡¯s Distress 2 Translator: 549690339 That is to say, Lu Yuan¡¯s body will, from now on, always retain the age of sixteen. Sixteen, what a flawless age. What man doesn¡¯t want to go back to his youth? Who isn¡¯t a youth at heart? Others may only be able to daydream with regret. But Lu Yuan is here to loudly tell them, ¡°You can only dream of it, but I will always be a sixteen-year-old boy.¡± ¡°My golden finger says so.¡± Time has frozen. What¡¯s frozen isn¡¯t just youth or lifespan, but also the physical foundation of Lu Yuan. Under this frozen timeline, he will forever maintain the youthful vigor of a sixteen-year-old, and likewise, his body will also retain the peak quality of a sixteen-year-old. In other words, as long as his body isn¡¯t completely destroyed in one go, making life thoroughly impossible, then minor problems like overexerting oneself during inner strength practice wouldn¡¯t exist for this immortal body of his. Isn¡¯t it just a lack of vitality? Eat more meat, provide some energy supply, and then the body will recover to its peak instantly. The body is eternal, this is the ability given by the gift of immortality, and it will never change. And what Lu Yuan needs to do is to provide energy to this ability to maintain its operation. ¡°Therefore, while others can only practice inner strength for two hours a day, I can now practice four, six, or even twelve hours a day without stopping. As long as energy supply is guaranteed to maintain this lock, the body will have no problems at all.¡± People who often watch martial arts dramas or read novels will probably often come across these sentences. So-and-so has twenty years of inner strength, so-and-so has fifty years of inner strength, the protagonist even simply has a hundred years of inner strength. These are concepts proposed by novels and dramas. As for Lu Yuan, who has actually practiced martial arts and collected a lot of information from the Jianghu, he can tell everyone accurately that in this world, such a concept exists. The specific principle is probably the theory of essence and blood mentioned above. Because the human body has a limit, and the soul and blood in many people¡¯s bodies can only support a person to practice inner strength for two hours a day, any more and it will harm the body and bring a shorter life. In this way, the increase in the intensity of a person¡¯s inner strength each day is actually limited. So, under the condition that most people have similar increases, those who have practiced longer have higher inner strength, right? Therefore, you have twenty years of inner strength, I have fifty years of inner strength, while everyone¡¯s skills and techniques are of similar level, isn¡¯t it possible to directly crush the opponent with one¡¯s profound inner strength? So the depth of a person¡¯s inner strength, how many years of foundation they have, in the Jianghu, is actually one of the standards to measure whether a person is strong or not. Of course, some people are exceptionally gifted and naturally have better foundations, able to practice for longer periods of time. Some people just have better luck than others. Able to practice for three hours a day, or even four hours, achieving the same achievements as others in half, or even less time. Practicing martial arts, in fact, also requires a lot of talent. ¡°Fortunately, with the gift of immortality, I can barely count as a genius.¡± Smoothing out these thoughts, Lu Yuan immediately felt better: ¡°Then there¡¯s no problem.¡± But be happy as he might, thinking about the protagonists of the novels he read before crossing over, he still felt a bit disappointed towards his lock-on ability, ¡°Compared to diligently practicing everyday, grinding time, leveling up, I really don¡¯t want to work hard. When will I get a chance like those protagonists who fell off a cliff and not only learned divine skills, but also gained exotic fruits and beasts to increase their internal strength? I just want to have a good cheat¡­ Recalling his research on his own golden finger and the exploration of buff like transverser¡¯s qi luck aura over the past two years, Lu Yuan felt full of complaints. In fact, ever since he obtained the Cloud Palm and discovered that this was a martial arts world. When he was hunting in the mountains, he hadn¡¯t stopped running towards cliffs and caves. But after running through twenty or thirty cliffs and caves , and thoroughly searching mountains within hundred miles, he had found no senior¡¯s remains or inheritance of divine skills whatsoever. Even the shadows of the exotic beasts were nowhere to be seen. What was everywhere were fierce wild beasts and disgusting poisonous insects, which nearly got him several times. In the end, after bumping into dozens of walls and confirming that he really didn¡¯t have any protagonist¡¯s aura, Lu Yuan gave up and accepted his fate. Since then, he has set his feet on the ground, day after day, diligently practicing martial arts. ¡°However, according to the current progress, the time to practice internal strength has doubled every day, and the accumulation of inner strength and the opening of meridians have also become faster. Perhaps I could master the Hand¡¯s Taiyin Lung Meridian in just a year and a half, instead of the three years I originally thought it would take. If I work even harder, I might be able to master it within a year,¡± Lu Yuan thought to himself. The acceleration of internal strength training brings benefits in all aspects. It¡¯s not just about the accumulation of inner strength, but breakthroughs in my own learning curve. If I could master the Hand¡¯s Taiyin Lung Meridian in one year, and then spend another year mastering the Hand¡¯s Yangming Large Intestine Meridian, I could become a third-rate talent in the Jianghu. ¡°In that case, it would take me five years to become a third-rate character in Jianghu after traversing time. If I think about it, it sounds like a decent accomplishment¡­¡± Lu Yuan thought about the exploits of other traversing seniors and felt a bit bitter, saying, ¡°Forget it, at least I went from being non-existent to being part of the martial arts world. Being third-rate is better than having nothing.¡± ¡°Train, train, I love training.¡± Humming a random, out-of-tune song, Lu Yuan performed a routine palm technique to warm up before retiring to his room to cultivate his inner strength. Without the protagonist¡¯s Qi Luck or the ability to enrich himself with gold, as a regular longevity-seeker, all I can do now is rely on my hard work and outlast everyone else. But considering the progress I¡¯m making now, maybe I can do it? The martial arts world gradually fell into calm. While Lu Yuan was busy cultivating his inner strength, Sun Siwen, on the other hand, had less time to spend with him. He began to buckle down and prepare for the Imperial Examination that would take place in a few months. It¡¯s already late May, and there are only four months left until the Imperial Examination in early October. For Sun Siwen, who is set on earning the scholastic title of Juren, there isn¡¯t much time left for him to prepare for the imperial exam. However, studying exam questions isn¡¯t too difficult for someone like him, who has been praised for his thorough preparation and potential. Well, at least Sun Siwen thinks it¡¯s not too difficult. Once he passed the Scholar¡¯s Examination, he became a little conceited. While the exam isn¡¯t a big issue, problems outside the exam room are giving Sun Siwen a headache. If he just had to study exam questions and prepare for the imperial exam, he could just study quietly at home. However, the Juren Examination isn¡¯t like the previous Scholar¡¯s Exam that he could take in the county town. The Juren Examination is held in the prefectural city. The Yuzhang Prefecture is over 700 miles away from Dayu County. The journey alone will take half a month. But what¡¯s the situation now? It¡¯s not quite a war-torn mess, but it¡¯s not far off with all the bandits running amok. Right now, the entire Luling Prefecture is teeming with bandits. The notorious Black Wind Gang attracted numerous bandits from the martial arts world, and they¡¯ve joined forces, wreaking havoc over Luling Prefecture. They¡¯ve even stirred up chaos in the surrounding prefectures. Under such circumstances. You¡¯re asking Sun Siwen, a frail scholar, to travel a long distance to the prefectural city to take an exam. Isn¡¯t that like asking for his life? These bandits don¡¯t care if you¡¯re a scholar or if you have a Scholar¡¯s Degree. They kill people for two reasons: wealth and pleasure. Funnily enough. Examinees usually carry quite a bit of travel money. Besides, scholars are often fair-skinned and handsome, some even more attractive than country girls. For some unscrupulous robbers, this is quite appealing. While at the tavern, Lu Yuan often hears about handsome scholars who fell into the hands of the Black Wind Gang. They lost their money, and some even lost their lives, becoming laughing stocks. As a regular at the tavern, Sun Siwen obviously heard these stories too. Therefore. Considering himself a pretty boy, Sun Siwen began to worry. ¡°Being good-looking can sometimes be troublesome.¡± With this thought, he became even more worried.. Chapter 62 - Chapter 62: Chapter 42: Luck? Dream? Chapter 62: Chapter 42: Luck? Dream? Translator: 549690339 A few days later, Sun Siwen approached Lu Yuan and shared his concerns. Looking at his good friend¡¯s face for a long time, Lu Yuan really wanted to tell him that he was too worried. With that face of yours, no one would be interested. Unless they were a gluttonous beast. Wait, a beast? Thinking of the reputation of the Black Wind Gang, Lu Yuan¡¯s certainty wavered, and he hesitated before finally saying, ¡°Brother Sun, isn¡¯t there still four months left until the imperial examination? Let¡¯s wait a little longer. Aren¡¯t the government and Iron Sword Sect suppressing the bandits now? Fang Tianying has been defeated, and I think the Black Wind Gang won¡¯t be rampant for much longer. Maybe in another two months, this group of bandits will be wiped out.¡± From the current situation, the prospects for the government and the Iron Sword Sect were still very good. As long as they could maintain their current momentum, it would only be a matter of time before they dealt with the Black Wind Gang. ¡°I guess we have no other choice.¡± Sun Siwen knew that he couldn¡¯t do anything about the current situation. Talking to his friend today was just a way for him to vent his frustration and worries. ¡°Brother Sun, don¡¯t worry too much. I know your abilities. Even if you don¡¯t pass the imperial examination this year, we can always try again next year. We¡¯ll prepare well this year, and next year directly rank first, becoming a top scholar, won¡¯t that be great?¡± Lu Yuan comforted. ¡°Brother Lu, don¡¯t flatter me. I know my own strength. It¡¯s possible for me to become a juren in the imperial examination, but to be the top scholar is way beyond my abilities.¡± Sun Siwen shook his head with a bitter smile. Although he became slightly arrogant after becoming a Scholar, even daring to take the imperial examination to become a juren, this bit of arrogance was still within a reasonable range. Similar to when they had visited the old juren previously, the latter had told him that after more than ten years of hard study, his accumulation was enough, and he could try for the juren¡¯s imperial examination. Everything was just a choice based on their own strength. But discussing the top scholar position was a bit exaggerated. That would be equivalent to Lu Yuan¡¯s previous life¡¯s college entrance examination champion, or even higher in value. Becoming a juren in this world was probably similar to being a Master¡¯s Degree student, while a jinshi was similar to a PhD student. Lu Yuan saying that Sun Siwen could rank first was like claiming that he could surpass all the jurens in the county-level imperial examination. Even with his exaggerated confidence, he wouldn¡¯t dare to make such a boast. ¡°Not to mention ranking first, even becoming a juren, if I miss this chance, it¡¯s a problem whether I can pass the examination in the future,¡± Sun Siwen looked at his friend and shared one of his conjectures. ¡°In fact, deep down, I have always had a feeling that I have never told anyone before¡­ I suspect that this year might be the best time for me in terms of fortune, and everything I do may go very smoothly, just as I wish. It seems that this is indeed the case. After becoming a Scholar, I made many friends from the same period, received guidance from a juren, and my studies progressed very quickly¡­ In just a few short months, it seems like my life has changed completely. It feels like I¡¯m dreaming¡­¡± Sun Siwen¡¯s eyes appeared to be lost in a dream. ¡°Sometimes I can¡¯t tell if it¡¯s a dream or not. But even if it is a dream, it¡¯s a beautiful one. So, I want to take advantage of this dream, riding on this wave of fortune, and take the imperial examination in one go, and see if I can suddenly become a juren That way, even when the dream ends¡­¡± Sun Siwen turned his head and looked at Lu Yuan, revealing his thoughts, ¡°I can at least have my wish fulfilled, and have no regrets.¡± The so-called talk of accumulating enough knowledge and being taught by an old juren were just excuses for deceiving others and boosting his own confidence. Because he had a feeling that his good fortune would not last long. If it passed this year and the fortune is gone, then becoming a juren would be a lifelong unattainable dream. ¡°It¡¯s weird. I know this feeling is illusory and even conjecture, but I can¡¯t help but believe it. It¡¯s as if deep in my heart, there¡¯s a voice constantly saying: ¡®Go ahead, time is running out, you¡¯ve got to seize it.¡¯ That voice is urging me to take the imperial examination, very urgently, very urgently. And strangely, I have a strong sense of closeness to it, as if¡­¡± Sun Siwen thought for a moment, then naturally said, ¡°As if the voice¡¯s owner is connected by blood, like a relative of mine. Do you know that feeling? He wanted to describe it, but when he looked back, he found that his friend was looking at him with a very strange expression. Sun Siwen felt a chill, and the emotions he had been simmering vanished in an instant. He tugged at the corner of his mouth and swallowed, ¡°Brother Lu, Brother Lu, are you listening to me?¡± It seemed like he was awakened by his own call, and his friend finally came to his senses. ¡°Yes, I am.¡± Lu Yuan responded with a nod, suppressing the strange feeling and some excitement in his heart, and said, ¡°Brother Sun¡¯s¡­uh, premonition sounds truly extraordinary. But whether it¡¯s a conjecture or a premonition, it¡¯s not a bad thing from what we see now, right? So Brother Sun, just follow the guidance of the voice in your heart and take the imperial examination. Perhaps, it¡¯s just as you said. This year may be the year of your fortune and you might just achieve greatness in one fell swoop!¡± Lu Yuan smiled, but his heart was filled with relentless waves. As a traverser, and one who had traversed to the world of martial arts, he had a high degree of understanding and acceptance of various mysteries. In addition, he had read countless novels in his previous life, so when Sun Siwen described his fortune and dream, Lu Yuan readily accepted it. ¡®So, Brother Sun really is blessed with good fortune, and the source of this blessing may be his so-called dream and the voice in the dream? He analyzed in his heart. He had suspected before if there would be immortals in this world since there were martial arts practitioners. However, after studying and trying for so long, Lu Yuan had never discovered any higher energy like spiritual energy, nor had he ever really met an them. But Sun Siwen¡¯s words today undoubtedly gave him a piece of explosive information. Fortune! ¡°Thinking about it carefully, Brother Sun¡¯s luck has indeed improved a lot since this year, even defying the heavens. Picking up money when going out, making good friends abroad, meeting the old juren while studying¡­ Even during such turbulent times, he managed to safely return from Fu City to the countryside without encountering any bandits? All of these events may not seem incredible individually, but gathered upon a single person, especially someone who was previously down on his luck and unremarkable, it appears too extraordinary.¡± After analyzing it in his heart, Lu Yuan stared at Sun Siwen, looking intently at his friend. There was definitely something going on with him. Something must have happened, that¡¯s why his luck improved so much.. Chapter 63 - Chapter 63: Chapter 43: The Legacy of Emperor Gaozu? Chapter 63: Chapter 43: The Legacy of Emperor Gaozu? Translator: 549690339 ¡®So, what is this thing that affects Brother Sun¡¯s Qi Luck? Immortal blessing? Possessing a treasure? Or having a weak fate?¡¯ As an avid reader of novels, Lu Yuan came up with several possibilities in a brief moment. However, there were too many possibilities, and he could not be sure which one it was in such a short time. For now, he could only experiment slowly. After a thought, Lu Yuan asked, ¡°Brother Sun, I wonder if there is anyone in your family who has sought immortality or any other great figures? Previously, Sun Siwen had mentioned that the voice in his dream gave him a sense of intimacy, as if they were connected by blood. Considering that after the changes in Sun Siwen¡¯s body, he had always experienced good fortune and nothing bad had happened, it was not difficult to imagine that the voice that caused these changes was likely to be closely related to Sun Siwen. And this connection was mostly related to bloodline. An ancestor of Sun Shusheng had practiced immortality. Or someone in his ancestry left this special ability to change fate under some specific circumstances. And somehow, it became activated by Sun Siwen unwittingly. Among all the guesses, this one seemed to have the highest possibility for Lu Yuan. ¡°Seeking immortality?¡± Sun Siwen hesitated, not understanding why they were suddenly discussing such an elusive matter related to seeking immortality while they were originally talking about the imperial examination and dreams. However, they were good friends, and since Lu Yuan had asked, Sun Siwen saw no reason to hide anything. Frowning, he recalled for a while and finally answered, ¡°When I was young, I heard my father mention that my great-grandfather loved to travel to famous mountains and rivers, seeking immortality everywhere- However, he never found what he was looking for during his ten years of searching. Later, when he was approaching middle age, he returned home, got married, and had children. But only a few years after my grand -grandfather was born, my great-grandfather abandoned his family property to continue his search for immortality. This time, he never came back. Fortunately, my grand-grandfather was intelligent and outstanding since his childhood, excelling in literary skills. Later, he received the scholar¡¯s degree at the age of twelve, became a juren at sixteen, and a jinshi at twenty. After that, he became an official and finally achieved the position of a county magistrate, only to be framed by a traitor, dying in sorrow and returning to his hometown. By the time of my grandfather, although he was not as outstanding as my grand -grandfather, he also passed the imperial examination and became a juren, eventually rising to the position of a prefect. Lastly, there was my father. Despite studying all his life, he could only achieve the scholar¡¯s degree in the end. And then there is me. As for the people Brother Lu asked about who sought immortality or were great figures, after contemplation, I think it¡¯s just my great-grandfather and grand ¨C grandfather. ¡± By the end of his account, Sun Siwen¡¯s voice was somber, and his expression was somewhat ashamed and desolate. It was no wonder. His grand-grandfather had become a county magistrate, and his grandfather had become a prefect. His family used to be quite prestigious. However, he and his father¡¯s generation stopped at being scholars, not even achieving the title of juren. What¡¯s worse, the once-prosperous family had fallen into nothing under his father¡¯s and his own management, and he even had to sell his ancestral property to make a living. If it hadn¡¯t been for the scholar¡¯s degree that he had finally achieved, giving him some sense of accomplishment, Sun Siwen might have died of shame, unable to speak about his ancestors. Unknowingly, Sun Shusheng sank into the memories of the past. When his grandfather was alive, his family was not like this. As Sun Siwen ruminated, Lu Yuan was overwhelmed with excitement on the other side after hearing his story. ¡®There¡¯s no mistake, this is it.¡¯ This pattern of seeking immortality and achieving fortune for the offspring was all too familiar to Lu Yuan. Whether it was in novels or mythological stories, there were countless tales of immortals seeking immortality and then blessing their descendants with fortune. Now that Sun Siwen had experienced these turn of events, everything could be explained. How could his ancestor, who had achieved immortality, let his descendants live in such a dismal state? It was only reasonable for him to step in and help his descendants change their fortune. ¡®But what I still don¡¯t know is whether the helper in question is Brother Sun¡¯s great-grandfather, who is still alive, or if he left something behind to protect his descendants. These two possibilities need to be figured out,¡¯ thought Lu Yuan. With the prospect of the Dao of immortals right before him, he couldn¡¯t help but be eager. Who would want to suffer the hardships of martial training if they could practice immortality? Entering the heavens, traveling across the seas, and being carefree in the world¡ªdoesn¡¯t that sound appealing? However, whether he could seize this opportunity or not, and if this opportunity would involve any risks, all needed to be carefully considered and explored step by step. Although Lu Yuan was eager to become immortal instantly, He knew that there was no free lunch in the world. Sun Siwen could change his fortune because he was the descendant of that immortal seeker, naturally receiving care because of their blood connection. But Lu Yuan had no blood relation to him. Just being good friends with Sun Siwen wasn¡¯t a good enough reason for Lu Yuan to expect an immortal-like destiny. Therefore, he needed to stay calm and test the waters. He had to figure out whether Brother Sun¡¯s great-grandfather was still alive or not. With this thought in mind, the idea took root in Lu Yuan¡¯s mind, spreading rapidly and refusing to go away. After a thought, he laughed, ¡°Perhaps the change of fortune Brother Sun is experiencing today has something to do with his great-grandfather. Your great-grandfather went to seek the Dao, didn¡¯t he? Maybe he achieved immortality and wanted to benefit his descendants. Brother Sun, you also said that the voice in your dream feels like a family member, very close and intimate. Perhaps it really was a family member, but one from Brother Sun¡¯s ancestry?¡± In case of any unforeseen circumstances, Lu Yuan did not dare to directly inquire and investigate, so he could only beat around the bush and probe slowly. Hearing this, Sun Siwen hesitated. Unexpectedly, he didn¡¯t simply dismiss it as ¡°superstition and nonsense¡± as usual. Instead, he thought about it seriously and nodded, ¡°Maybe it is just as Brother Lu said, this is the blessing of my ancestor. ¡± After he finished, he smiled, ¡°Regardless of whether it is the blessing of my ancestor or not, talking about my worries with Brother Lu today has made me feel much better. My original worries have mostly dissipated. If I were really blessed by my ancestor for this imperial examination, I would not have to worry about those bandits. It would be reasonable for me to rank among the scholars. Now that I think about it, I feel much more confident.¡± Sun Siwen laughed heartily in the end. The sorrow from before was gone in an instant. Lu Yuan also laughed, but there was a different meaning behind his laughter. ¡®Indeed, just as Brother Sun said. If he truly has the blessing of his ancestor, then the Black Wind Gang and the imperial examination will not be a threat at all. Now, it¡¯s time to see whether Brother Sun can safely reach the county town, and whether he can become a successful juren in the end. If he can do both, then it can be confirmed that there is indeed a great secret in him, and that he has received the blessing of the immortals. If not, then it can be chalked up to the wild dreams of a scholar about to take the exam, and it¡¯s all in vain. Which is it, Brother Sun?¡¯ Looking at Sun Siwen, Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes were deep.. Chapter 64 - Chapter 64: Chapter 44: The Banditry Subsides Chapter 64: Chapter 44: The Banditry Subsides Translator: 549690339 After sharing some of his thoughts with Lu Yuan, Sun Siwen¡¯s mood improved a lot. After chatting for a while, he bid farewell and returned home. Although he felt like his luck was at its peak right now. But as the saying goes, opportunities always favor those who are prepared. Without enough strength, even if you stand at the doorway of opportunities, you won¡¯t be able to fly. Reading books and reviewing exam topics must continue as usual. Sun Siwen went back home and embarked on a new round of diligent studies. He decided to review all the exam questions from the past three years. He also planned to read two or three times all the articles that the main examiners had previously written. Mr. Sun didn¡¯t believe that with so much preparation and such great luck, he would fail to pass the juren examination. After sending Mr. Sun away, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t wander around. Instead, he stayed at home practicing martial arts. Since he discovered his longevity cheat, he dramatically increased the time spent on cultivation, and his inner strength grew rapidly. He could feel the enhancement of his strength almost every moment. This feeling was intoxicating. So after minor hesitation, he happily decided to extend his inner strength training time by another ¡°hour,¡± making it ten hours a day. Heh! ¡°Did you expect that not only do I have a cheat, but I also work twice as hard? I¡¯m going to outcompete all you geniuses. ¡± Sometimes Lu Yuan would think this to himself, and then he¡¯d practice his inner strength cultivation even more diligently. In such a dangerous world, it was truly unsettling to lack strength. Time flew, and the blistering summer of June arrived quickly. The intense heat wave baked the earth, making people feel as if they were about to be cooked, and their hearts also became restless. This was destined to be an unsettled month. Indeed it was. Just when Luling City was dealing with another wave of Black Wind Gang members, some news that shocked the Jianghu spread out. Yin Huixuan, the Sect Leader of the Liuyang Sect and Martial Arts Leader of Yuzhang Prefecture, officially decided to travel to South Sea Prefecture at the beginning of the month to visit fellow martial artists of Nanhai Wulin. The news sparked a sensation amongst the martial arts world in both prefectures. Everyone knew that the Sect Leader of Liuyang Sect, Yin Huixuan, was not really going to South Sea Prefecture to visit ¡°fellow Daoists,¡± as claimed. The chaos caused by the Black Wind Gang in Luling Prefecture, after brewing for several months, had already spread. All 28 prefectures in the surrounding four counties were aware that there¡¯s certainly some Jianghu force from South Sea Prefecture behind this gang. Seeing that the chaos caused by the Black Wind Gang was escalating, with these bandits being inexhaustible and indestructible. In Luling Prefecture, every time a group of bandits was eliminated, a new gang would soon emerge. These bandits seemed to produce themselves endlessly like leeks being cut and regrowing, with each new growth not any weaker. By now, the Black Wind Gang had become a wound on their body, continuously draining the blood from Yuzhang Martial Art World. There were definitely people supporting the Black Wind Gang from behind, and it¡¯s the Jianghu forces in South Sea Prefecture. They aimed to use these bandits to weaken and infiltrate Yuzhang Martial Art World, thus expanding their Ctranot-h Others were attacking right at their doorstep. Facing such a situation, the Liuyang Sect, as the leader of Yuzhang Martial Art World, naturally could not ignore it. Therefore, the Sect Leader of the Liuyang Sect, Yin Huixuan, stepped forward and visited the South Sea Prefecture Martial arts community. The aim of this Sect Leader was clear. You can¡¯t get rid of the Black Wind Gang no matter how hard you try, can you? If that¡¯s the case, I don¡¯t bother dealing with these small fries anymore. I¡¯m going straight to your doorstep now, to confront the forces behind you, defeating them one by one. Without any support, the Black Wind Gang will naturally quiet down. Lo and behold, the first stop of Sect Leader Yin Huixuan of the Liuyang Sect in the south was the famous sect of the Nanhai martial arts world, the Nanhai Sect, which occupied the South Sea Prefecture. This sect monopolized the maritime trade of South Sea Prefecture, engaged in business across the four seas, and made an incalculable amount of money from sea trade every year. With money comes influence. With the money earned from business, the Nanhai Sect claimed to have tens of thousands of helpers spread across the four seas. Every boat at sea had a disciple of the Nanhai Sect on board. Their glorious prestige was famous across the world. Yin Huixuan chose such a marine giant for his first stop, which showed his high ambitions and enormous momentum, as if he did not put the Nanhai Wulin in his eyes at all. But if you think about it, as the leader of Yuzhang Martial Art World, he indeed has the qualifications and strength. When Yin Huixuan challenged the Nanhai Sect and invited Sect Leader Qiu Guanbai to a sword fight on the tenth day of June, it attracted the attention of all martial artists from Yue Country River to the Left of Lingnan. C countless martial arts leaders and giants in Jianghu, hearing the news, rushed to the Nanhai Sect, wanting to witness this major event in the martial arts world. As for ordinary martial artists and disciples of various sects, they flocked to the Nanhai Sect, spontaneously heading there to see this event. A grand event of Yue Country martial arts world thus began. In Plum Flower Town, inside the tavern. ¡°Recently, the martial artists in the outside world have been much less. And there¡¯s also much less news about the Black Wind Gang.¡± Lu Yuan was drinking fine wine on his usual spot, listening to the discussions in the main hall and started to ponder. Over the past few months, he had become accustomed to hearing every day about where and when the Black Wind Gang would kill someone, and where law enforcement from the government and martial arts heroes would combat a major criminal the next day.. Chapter 65 - Chapter 65: Chapter 44: Quelling the Chaos _2 Chapter 65: Chapter 44: Quelling the Chaos _2 Translator: 549690339 All sorts of chaotic news were constantly coming in, and all kinds of tragedies were happening without pause. However, during this week, the frequency of these events suddenly decreased. Although news of the Black Wind Gang still spread, the actual happenings and frequency of it were much less than before. Even the actions of the government and the Iron Sword Sect seemed to have reduced by more than half. ¡°Is it because the Liuyang Sect Leader, Yin Huixuan, has taken action?¡± Lu Yuan thought about the most prevalent piece of news he had heard these days. As the leader of the martial arts world in Yuzhang, Liuyang Sect Leader Yin Huixuan¡¯s every move attracted the attention of countless people. His plan to strike directly at the Nanhai Sect and attack the core of the martial arts world in the South Sea would naturally draw the attention of many. Not to mention anything else. In just one night, countless supporters of Yin Huixuan, the Liuyang Sect Leader, emerged in the small Yangmei Town. These people gathered every day, enthusiastically discussing the past achievements of the Sect Leader, their faces filled with admiration when talking about the exciting moments. Of course, while praising Yin Huixuan, they didn¡¯t forget to belittle the Nanhai Sect and step on the South Sea martial arts world from time to time to make themselves look stronger. Apparently, with the ravaging of the Black Wind Gang that had fled from the South Sea, the people in Luling Prefecture, from the wealthy gentry to the common foot soldiers, had a negative perception of the South Sea Prefecture, even turning hostile towards them. Too many people had died in Luling Prefecture during this turmoil, and too many people¡¯s interests had been affected. The evil results produced by the martial arts world of South Sea Prefecture were already beginning to show. However, this hatred and strife were taken seriously by the martial arts world and the common people of Yuzhang Prefecture. But for Lu Yuan, that was it. After all, he was a traverser, so you couldn¡¯t expect him to have a strong sense of identity with Yuzhang Prefecture or this world. Now, after hearing this news, Lu Yuan¡¯s first reaction was, ¡°The world is finally quiet.¡± If everything goes as planned, this two-month-long chaos caused by the Black Wind Gang will come to an end with Yin Huixuan¡¯s journey to the South. If they win, there will be no doubt that the South Sea martial arts world will retract its hand, and the Black Wind Gang will vanish. They may even have to pay compensation. If they lose, then the expansion of the Nanhai martial arts world in Yuzhang Prefecture will be hard to contain. Luling Prefecture might even have to give up, as the price of the failure in this martial arts contest. Anyway, no matter the result. The protagonist in this turmoil will no longer be the Black Wind Gang. This could be seen from the Black Wind Gang¡¯s low-key actions in recent days. And that was enough for Lu Yuan to be happy about. ¡°Anyway, win or lose, Luling Prefecture should not be in a mess anymore. Even if the martial arts world of South Sea and Yuzhang are willing to continue fighting, the imperial court cannot continue to turn a blind eye to its own prefectures and counties being turned into a mess and becoming a haven for bandits. Otherwise, if the situation here deteriorates, and a righteous army emerges, it would be a big problem. The power of the imperial court in this world is strong. It can even be called crushing against the various martial arts sects. With such an overriding power in existence, the sky of Da Yue cannot be turned upside down.¡± After all, every local government had a force stationed in their cities, as well as two top-ranking experts from the catch officers¡¯ yamen. This was not something that everyone had. Not to mention the deterrence of the grandmasters and great grandmasters in the prefecture cities and the imperial court. Dozens of top-ranking experts and several grandmasters and great grandmasters were the strength and foundation of the Da Yue court to suppress the world. In comparison, even the foremost sects in the Jianghu world like Liuyang Sect only had configurations of several top-ranking experts and one or two grandmasters. The gap between the court and the Jianghu was indeed huge. Of course, it was a comparison between a single sect and the entire court. If you compare the whole Jianghu with the court, the two sides would be evenly matched, and even with the Jianghu being slightly stronger. However, one was loose sand, and the other was a single power. Comparing the two sides¡¯ strengths and weaknesses, it was clear at a glance. ¡°Now let¡¯s see what steps Liuyang Sect Leader can take and what surprises he can bring.¡± Lu Yuan took a sip of wine, looking forward to the grand event. Although he didn¡¯t lead the event himself or even participate in it, being in such an era was still exciting. He even started to wonder, once he achieved great success in his divine skills, whether he should follow in Yin Huixuan¡¯s footsteps and stir the winds and clouds of Jianghu with his sword. Just the thought of it excited him. However, as he was pondering, Lu Yuan suddenly remembered something, ¡°No, that¡¯s not right. Yin Huixuan¡¯s martial arts challenge in Southsea has attracted the martial artists who were originally gathered in Luling Prefecture. Even the Black Wind Gang has gradually calmed down.¡± Now the situation was gradually stabilizing, and order began to be restored. This change perfectly relieved Brother Sun¡¯s worries. So couldn¡¯t it be possible that behind Yin Sect Leader¡¯s actions, there was a portion of Brother Sun¡¯s Qi Luck? Influence of the immortal? Or fate?¡± Recalling the dream Sun Siwen told him a few days ago and the worries he mentioned, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel a sudden shock in his heart. The previous scene was still fresh in his mind. With such rapid and strong changes happening now, it was hard not to associate it with the Qi Luck of Sun Siwen. ¡°No, it should not be. That would be too exaggerated, even to say the Heaven and Earth are in favor. Even if the immortal is powerful, it cannot be this powerful,¡± Lu Yuan shook his head after careful consideration. He admitted that there must be some secrets about Sun Siwen, even involving some immortal fate. But to say that his immortal fate was so great that it could influence so many people, that was a bit too exaggerated. Take the simplest example: If Sun Siwen¡¯s ancestor was really that powerful, then why did his descendants end up in such a predicament? Directly blessing the offspring with wealth and prosperity in every generation would be much simpler, right? Why bother with self-inflicted hardship like it is happening now? ¡°I must be overthinking it.¡± After taking a sip of wine to calm himself, Lu Yuan put the idea aside. However, in his heart, he became even more curious and eager about the immortal fate surrounding Sun Siwen. But without knowing if it was safe or dangerous, he wouldn¡¯t dare to get close to it no matter how much he was intrizued. After all, it was an immortal. Even though he wasn¡¯t sure about the composition of this ¡°immortal,¡± there was one thing Lu Yuan could be sure of: that immortal could easily crush him to death. After all, everyone knows what the gap between martial arts and immortal arts means. ¡°I¡¯ll just wait a bit longer. I have plenty of time, and I can wait a hundred years. When Brother Sun passes away and I achieve great success in my divine skills, it won¡¯t be too late to explore that immortal fate.¡± Steadying his mind, Lu Yuan ceased thinking about it and continued to dine, listening to all sorts of news in the tavern. In a blink of an eye, more than a month had passed. During this time, Yin Huixuan swept through the Southsea martial arts world, undefeated. Nanhai Sect, Cangwu Sect, Jiujiang Sect¡­ One after another, the major Southsea martial arts sects were defeated when facing the Liuyang Sect leader, and simply couldn¡¯t hold their ground. As more powerful opponents fell, Yin Huixuan¡¯s reputation resounded throughout Southsea, and even the martial arts world of Yue Country was shocked and amazed by it. The subsequent impact also gradually spread. The most obvious one was that Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t heard about the Black Wind Gang for over ten days now. At some point, this once notorious gang had quietly disappeared from the sight of the common people in Luling Prefecture. Even the once-infamous Eagle King, Fang Tianying, had completely vanished, as if there had never been such a character in Jianghu. Luling Prefecture¡¯s tranquility was restored completely, and security rapidly improved. The original trade routes were opened again, and people from various places started to mingle once more. It was at this time that Sun Siwen came knocking. With the safety issue resolved, the scholar finally prepared to leave early for the Prefecture City. And before he left, he delivered a surprise to Lu Yuan.. Chapter 66 - Chapter 66: Chapter 45: Borrowing Money Chapter 66: Chapter 45: Borrowing Money Translator: 549690339 ¡°Brother Sun.¡¯ As Lu Yuan opened the door, he saw his good friend standing outside. He immediately greeted him with a gesture to come in. ¡°Brother Lu.¡± Sun Siwen returned the greeting and then seemed to pause, rooted in place, not walking in as he usually did in the past. Looking back, Noticing that Sun seemed worried and hesitant, as if overwhelmed with something, Lu Yuan¡¯s heart stirred, and a smile appeared on his face as he invited, ¡°Brother Sun, your timing is perfect. I just made some salty bone porridge and was about to have breakfast. Now that you¡¯re here, let¡¯s enjoy it together. Please, come in.¡± Having said that, he took Sun Siwen¡¯s hand and dragged him inside to sit down at the stone table in the courtyard. Lu Yuan could see that the other had something on his mind, so he did not hurry to ask. After seating his guest, he immediately served a cup of hot tea. Then he went into the kitchen and soon emerged with a large clay pot and two sets of bowls and chopsticks. Just as he had said before. When it was time for breakfast, Mr. Sun arrived just in time. As for whether breakfast for one would be enough for two? Since he began martial arts training, especially with the help of his golden finger, which increased his time training Inner Strength, Lu Yuan¡¯s appetite had grown enormously. He needed to take in massive amounts of food and medicine to maintain his body¡¯s consumption. Therefore, the large clay pot in front of him was filled with a portion meant for five people. With Mr. Sun¡¯s appetite, having him eat would only mean a few less bites for Lu Yuan. After finishing three large bowls of porridge and feeling five or six points full, Lu Yuan put down the bowl and looked up to see his friend lost in thought. The porridge that had been poured earlier had gone cold, with only a few bites taken and more than half left. Narrowing his eyes, Lu Yuan asked, ¡°Brother Sun, is there something you need from me so early today?¡± As he asked, he thought to himself, could it be that some change had happened in Sun¡¯s dreams, but it didn¡¯t look that way. At his words, Sun Siwen snapped back to attention, his face showing a hint of hesitation, and he stammered, ¡°Indeed, indeed there is.¡± Lu Yuan laughed, ¡°Considering our relationship, why be so hesitant? If Brother Sun has something to say, I¡¯ll listen.¡± Perhaps it was his words that had an effect. Remembering that the other was his only close friend, Sun Siwen gritted his teeth and said with a hint of embarrassment, ¡°Actually, I came to ask Brother Lu a favor today.¡± ¡°A favor?¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s expression changed slightly, and he said solemnly, ¡°Please tell me straight away, Brother Sun. If I can help, there will be no evasion.¡± With the conversation going smoothly, Sun Siwen no longer hesitated and revealed his request: ¡°I¡¯ve told Brother Lu before that I plan to participate in this year¡¯s imperial examination. I¡¯m also preparing for it now.¡± ¡°However, the exams are hard, and they require a lot of money. The journey to the county town is eight hundred miles away, and the expenses required for food and accommodation are numerous. Once in the city, there are registration fees, lodging fees, gatherings, bribes, and so on. I come from poverty and have no extra money. In my past 20 years of struggle, I¡¯ve known few close friends, and the only one I have is Brother Lu. So, this time I can only shamelessly seek help from Brother Lu. I hope Brother can lend me some money for the exam. In the future, when I pass the exam and become successful, I will repay it tenfold.¡± So he came to borrow money! Lu Yuan immediately understood after hearing Sun Siwen¡¯s explanation. However, he didn¡¯t change his demeanor like those fair-weather friends who harshly rejected people when asked for money. In fact, as a wealthy man with thousands of silver taels, Lu Yuan did not mind lending money to his good friend to help in difficult times. After all, who doesn¡¯t face hard times? Furthermore, ever since discovering Sun Siwen¡¯s uniqueness, his interest in getting to know and interact with him had grown. Now, borrowing money presented a good opportunity to do just that. After all, he wasn¡¯t worried about not being repaid. One reason was that he trusted Sun Siwen¡¯s character, and the other reason So, after thinking for a while, Lu Yuan immediately smiled and asked, ¡°Brother Sun, how much silver do you need for your exam?¡± Sun Siwen immediately replied, ¡°I need five silver taels for travel expenses, five for lodging fees, one for the registration fee, two for bribes, and two for socializing and gathering, a total of fifteen silver taels.¡± Mr. Sun disclosed his carefully calculated expenses. In reality, fifteen silver taels were barely enough for an imperial exam in a faraway county town, but he also had one or two silver taels on hand, which could make up the shortfall and just get him through. Most importantly, Mr. Sun¡¯s face was a bit thin, and he was embarrassed to make exorbitant demands from his good friend. After all, though he knew his friend had made more money due to his martial arts training, He was still just a hunter, and how much could a hunter really make? Sun Siwen couldn¡¯t bear asking for too much. A good friend can be generous, but one shouldn¡¯t abuse their kindness with an endless list of demands. That¡¯s the basic principle of being a person. ¡°Brother Sun¡¯s examination is a big deal. How can fifteen silver taels be enough?¡± Hearing Sun Siwen¡¯s request, Lu Yuan¡¯s heart, which had originally braced for a small loss, suddenly relaxed. He felt his friend was truly honest. Lu Yuan muttered in his heart, then took out his money pouch and extracted thirty silver taels, putting them on the table with a smile, saying, ¡°Here are thirty silver taels. That should be enough. Brother Sun, please take it.¡± ¡°This is too much, way too much,¡± Sun Siwen¡¯s face flushed, and his heart warmed as he quickly waved. ¡°Hey,¡± Lu Yuan held his friend¡¯s hand and said sincerely, ¡°Brother Sun, you¡¯re my good friend. How can I not help when you¡¯re in need? Just take the thirty silver taels. Like you said, when you pass the exam, you can repay me more.¡± Sun Siwen was deeply touched, feeling that no one in the world could be as good to him as Lu Yuan. With that thought, he gritted his teeth, took out a long, slender, green jade plaque from his bosom, and handed it to Lu Yuan. ¡°Brother Lu, I don¡¯t know how to thank you for your sincerity,¡± Sun said. ¡°At the beginning of the year, when my family¡¯s old house was in disrepair, this jade fell out of the wall. It was preserved in a wooden box at the time. I examined the contents of the box, and there was a letter left by my great-grandfather, saying that if his descendants ever fell on hard times, they could take the items in the box and pawn them for silver. There were a few other things in the box, which I¡¯ve already pawned in the town¡¯s pawnshop for silver expenses. But I¡¯ve kept this jade piece, which is not only my favorite but also the last item left by my great-grandfather, as a sentimental keepsake. Lu Yuan, you¡¯re always curious about immortals and gods, right? My great-grandfather also liked searching for immortals and visiting ancient paths. Today, I offer this jade plaque as a gift to you. If you ever need anything from me in the future, just bring this jade plaque, Sun Siwen or my descendants will do everything in their power to help, with no objections.¡± Sun Siwen offered the jade plaque and made a solemn promise.. Chapter 67 - Chapter 67: Chapter 46: Jade Tablet Chapter 67: Chapter 46: Jade Tablet Translator: 549690339 Lu Yuan looked at the jade piece in front of him, feeling an unstoppable excitement beneath his calm demeanor. What did Sun Siwen just say? The old house¡¯s wall was in disrepair, and a wooden box left by their ancestor fell out from it, containing an item meant to help future generations through hardship. At first glance, this seemed ordinary, as many families with a deep foundation had similar stories. But, if they considered the changes that Sun Siwen himself had gone through and his ancestor¡¯s legends, it was entirely different. ¡®Brother Sun¡¯s ancestor enjoyed searching for immortals and walking the path of cultivation. It is suspected that he was a cultivator. And Brother Sun said earlier that this jade box appeared because of the damaged wall at the beginning of the year. That was precisely the time when Sun¡¯s fortune began to change. From then on, Brother Sun¡¯s luck started to change. He not only became extremely intelligent, but he also successfully became a Scholar. He made many valuable connections and gained friends.¡¯ So, was this change due to the contents of the wooden box? With this thought, Lu Yuan¡¯s gaze at the jade piece became more burning. Sun Siwen said that of all the items in the jade box, he felt the closest to this particular object and couldn¡¯t bear to pawn it. Considering this, it wasn¡¯t hard to guess that the jade piece was likely the most precious item in the jade box, or perhaps the one most closely connected to Sun Siwen. It could be the item that changed his fate. And now, this jade piece was given to me. ¡°I understand your intention, Brother Sun.¡± Lu Yuan immediately took the jade piece, carefully placed it in his bosom, then clasped both of Sun Siwen¡¯s hands sincerely and said, ¡°From now on, our two families will become close friends for generations. We will assist and support each other as brothers.¡± His words were heartfelt and genuine. This could potentially be an immortal fate, and it was given directly to him. Although Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t sure if it was really an immortal fate and even if it was, whether he could actually make use of it, regardless, he had accepted it wholeheartedly. Moreover, Sun Siwen¡¯s ancestor, who was suspected of being a cultivator, often had a longer life span than an ordinary person. If that ancestor indeed achieved success in cultivation, who could say for certain that he was already dead? What if he were still alive? If Lu Yuan could become close friends and allies with Sun Siwen¡¯s family¡ªa family connected to a cultivator¡ªit would bring great benefits to him no matter how he looked at it. At this moment, the calculations in Lu Yuan¡¯s heart were rapidly unfolding. ¡°Brother Lu¡­¡± Unaware of his friend¡¯s inner thoughts, Sun Siwen was touched and moved to tears by Lu Yuan¡¯s sincerity and said, ¡°Alright, from today onwards, our two families will become close friends for generations, never to betray each other.¡± After saying this, Sun Siwen couldn¡¯t help but cry. He had been alone for so long, and now that he had a close friend, he felt that he was no longer lonely. He was overwhelmed with emotion. ¡°Don¡¯t cry, don¡¯t cry.¡± Lu Yuan patted his friend¡¯s shoulder and urged him to sit down, then added another spoonful of porridge to his bowl and comforted him, saying, ¡°Come on, drink some porridge, eat until you¡¯re full, and you¡¯ll feel better. You won¡¯t be miserable.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Sun Siwen took a deep breath, then picked up the bowl and began drinking the porridge. After finishing a large bowl, he was already quite full. At this point, he felt embarrassed to stay any longer after the emotional outburst, so he stood up and said, ¡°Today, I¡¯m fortunate to have Brother Lu to help me. I will never forget your kindness. I have some matters to attend to, so I won¡¯t disturb you any longer. I¡¯ll take my leave now.¡± Having said that, he wiped away his tears, picked up the thirty silver tales on the table, and turned to leave. Lu Yuan stood up to see him off and, after Sun Siwen was out of sight, immediately closed the door. He returned to the stone table and sat down. He took out the jade piece from his bosom and began to examine it with great concentration. The jade piece was half an inch wide, three inches long, and thin like a bamboo slice. It had a green hue, appearing slightly cloudy, as if it were made from the leftover pieces of jade. It didn¡¯t seem valuable. Perhaps it was because of this that Sun Siwen didn¡¯t want to use this jade piece as a pawn to exchange for money. For it wouldn¡¯t fetch too many silver tales. ¡°Is this the ¡°immortal fate¡±?¡± Carefully rubbing the jade piece, Lu Yuan stared at it closely, examining every inch and detail on it. But after looking again and again, even to the point of straining his eyes, he couldn¡¯t find anything remarkable. It seemed like an ordinary jade piece, with no peculiar features whatsoever. This made Lu Yuan begin to doubt himself. Did he make a mistake? Perhaps this was not an immortal fate at all, and everything was just his imagination. However, remembering Sun Siwen¡¯s uniqueness, he suppressed his thoughts and continued to explore the jade piece. ¡°Some divine objects are concealed and do not appear extraordinary at first glance. Perhaps this jade piece is one of those. I¡¯ll try another method.¡± After some thought, Lu Yuan channeled the Inner Strength within him and transferred it into the jade piece. This time, there was indeed a change. With the infusion of his Inner Strength, the jade piece¡¯s green patterns lit up with a faint glow. Little by little, a green light radiated from the jade piece. ¡°It works!¡± Seeing this, Lu Yuan¡¯s face lit up with joy. The changes in the jade piece undoubtedly told him that he hadn¡¯t made a mistake. This jade piece was indeed a magical object linked to an immortal fate. With the thought of the immortal fate right before him, he couldn¡¯t resist channeling even more of his Inner Strength into the jade piece. This time, as more Inner Strength flowed in, more patterns on the jade piece lit up, and its outer glow became even brighter. However, that was the extent of the change. The jade piece shone brilliantly, but apart from emitting light, it showed no signs of any other transformation. Eventually, after transferring the last bit of his Inner Strength without leaving any behind, all the green patterns on the jade piece were illuminated. But still, there was no further change. ¡°What¡¯s going on?¡± Watching this, Lu Yuan held the jade piece and furrowed his brow. This shouldn¡¯t be the case, should it? According to the usual course of events, his transfer of Inner Strength should have awakened the jade piece by now. He should be getting a chance encounter now, or even getting a Divine Skill from the jade piece, or perhaps a storage space or even a Blessed Land and Cavern Heaven would appear¡­ and so on. But there was no reaction whatsoever. What was happening? Was this some kind of joke? ¡°Could it be missing this?¡± Suddenly, an idea struck Lu Yuan. He hurriedly extended his hand, with his fingertip aimed at the jade piece, and forced out a drop of blood from his slightly recovered Inner Strength, letting it fall onto the jade piece. Then¡­ The blood drop slid across the jade piece and landed directly on the table. ¡°It¡¯s useless?¡± Lu Yuan, wide-eyed, was somewhat dumbfounded by the scene. What happened to the blood acknowledging the master? Why did it turn out like this when it came to him? For a moment, he had difficulty accepting this. After a while, Lu Yuan finally regained his composure. He didn¡¯t continue to study the jade piece any further. Since he had already obtained the jade piece, he could slowly research it in the future. Right now, he didn¡¯t want to experience any more setbacks. Casually putting away the jade piece, Lu Yuan picked up his bowl and scooped another large serving of porridge from the clay pot, then started eating ravenously. Just like how he consoled Sun Siwen earlier, when one feels upset, eating something would make them feel better. At this moment, he wanted to vent his frustration into his appetite.. Chapter 68 - Chapter 68: Chapter 47 Pure Inner Strength Chapter 68: Chapter 47 Pure Inner Strength Translator: 549690339 In the following days, besides his regular martial arts training, Lu Yuan spent all his energy and thoughts on studying the jade piece. He tried all sorts of peculiar and bizarre methods to activate the jade piece. From enchantments, meditation, blood refining, burning, smashing with stones, trying to influence with his aura¡­ all he could think of and had seen in novels before were attempted. He even tried some of the magic circles and instrument tracks recorded in the Taoist classics he read in this world. However, all were to no avail. Except for proving that the jade piece was indeed extraordinary, impervious to fire and water, indestructible by external forces, and incredibly solid, Lu Yuan made no further progress. This result left him quite despondent. But along with this despondency, Lu Yuan gradually realized what he was lacking. ¡°This jade piece should be the magical artifact mentioned in cultivation novels; it¡¯s not a mere ordinary object. Hence, if I want to awaken it and use it, I would naturally need to use the methods of an immortal. Such as magical power, spiritual power, and divine sense. Without these, the jade piece cannot be controlled by my mundane methods. So, if I want to exploit the jade piece, I need to find an immortal technique that can cultivate these powers. But the problem is, where can I find a book of immortal techniques to practice from?¡± When Lu Yuan thought about this, he was overwhelmed with frustration. What is it like to have a treasure mountain but unable to use it? It¡¯s exactly like the present case. Knowing that the chance of becoming an immortal is right before his eyes but is unable to seize it, is simply indescribable. However, this frustration only lasted for a moment, Lu Yuan collected his emotions, held the jade piece, and showed a smirk: ¡°Even though I cannot genuinely use the jade piece now, it¡¯s not entirely useless.¡± With that, he held the jade piece, infused his inner strength into it, and the green patterns inside the jade instantly lit up. Half an hour later, when his inner strength had circulated inside the jade piece, illuminating all the patterns, and then retrieved back into his body. A sense of comfort was felt from the meridians through which his inner strength had flowed. With imaginary introspection, Lu Yuan could clearly notice that his inner strength, which had just been sent into the jade piece, had become a bit more refined and condensed than before after going through one round. Although this refining and condensing wasn¡¯t significant, only improving about one-thousandth. But that doesn¡¯t change the fact that this refining process can be repeated indefinitely. That is to say, if Lu Yuan repeatedly refines his inner strength in the jade piece a thousand times, the quality of his inner strength could double. Although it seems to be only doubling, in reality, this kind of improvement is rather terrifying. One should know that inner strength is a combination of essence, energy, and spirit combined, a doubling in the quality of inner strength means a doubling in Lu Yuan¡¯s essence, energy and spirit. The effect of this kind of improvement is reflected in various aspects of the body and soul. ¡°After the increase in inner strength, I need some time for my body to adapt before I can perform the second refining. Therefore, it¡¯s best to do this refining process once every day. At this rate, in about three years, the quality of my inner strength can double. A doubling in the strength of essence, energy and spirit! Oh, by then, I guess I can overpower those at the same level with my refinement, right?¡± When Lu Yuan imagined the scene of being unrivaled among peers, he couldn¡¯t help but get excited. Which man hasn¡¯t fantasized about being invincible to his peers? And now, in three years, he could potentially achieve this goal. Of course. Even if he has such power, Lu Yuan won¡¯t show off. After all, being unrivaled among peers doesn¡¯t mean being unrivaled under heaven. There¡¯s a saying. If you beat the young, the old ones will come. Many young heroes in Jianghu didn¡¯t understand this and offended many people in their constant show of strength. In the end, they were suppressed by the old monsters and even paid with their lives As someone who had seen many similar plots and had a stable personality, Lu Yuan naturally wouldn¡¯t make such a low-level mistake. Keeping a low profile and being sneaky is the true meaning of strength. Collecting his slightly inflated thoughts, he calmed down his heart and started to study the jade piece again: ¡°However, this kind of improvement in the quality of inner strength should have its limit. Once the jade piece reaches its limit, it should stop.¡± Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t naive enough to think that once he had the jade piece, he could rest easy. Everything has its limits. Like a human¡¯s lifespan, even for those who live a long life, usually exceed one hundred years, and then they die. Uh, Lu Yuan? He¡¯s just an exception, can¡¯t be regarded as normal, just ignore him. Of course, you can say that you can continually strengthen yourself and then break through the limit. Just like cultivators who practice to break their lifespan limit and achieve longevity through cultivation. But the prerequisite for enhancement through cultivation is the ability to absorb external nutrients and nourishment by sacrificing the world to benefit oneself, thereby breaking the limit. But the problem is, where can Lu Yuan find something that can improve the quality of the jade piece and nourish it? ¡°So far, I¡¯d better not aim too high. Just honestly practice martial arts and then use the jade piece to refine my inner strength. I¡¯m currently incapable of genuinely using this immortal destiny, but I believe that as my strength increase, there will come a day when I can use it properly.¡± Pumped up, Lu Yuan continued his training. He still had an hour left for his internal power cultivation today. Time flew by, and it was already mid-Autumn in August. At this time, the heat of summer was over, and cool autumn is coming. On the evening of the full moon on August 15, it was supposed to be a time of reunion. However, Lu Yuan had transmigrated into this world, and his past life had become history. His parents had died long ago, so even if he wanted to reunite, he didn¡¯t know who to find. Fortunately, his good friend, Sun Siwen was in the same situation. His parents had also died early. They decided to spend the Mid-Autumn Festival together. But there are more goodbyes than reunions in this world. After the night of the full moon, Sun Siwen packed his belongings and prepared to depart for the county town to start his journey of test-taking. The imperial examination in October was not far away, leaving just over a month. The county town was eight hundred miles away from Yangmei Town. If Sun Siwen wanted to catch up with the examination period, he had to leave early. Outside the town, by the road. Into the adjacent Plum Forest, some plums hadn¡¯t fallen off yet; they were ripely red at this time. Lu Yuan picked a handful of them in the forest, wrapped them in oilcloth, and then put a few into the wine cup. Then he raised his cup and wished Sun Siwen: ¡°Brother Sun, we part ways here, I wish you a successful journey and to make a name for yourself.¡± After that, he put the wrapped plums into Sun Siwen¡¯s hand and earnestly said: ¡°These are plums from our hometown. Brother Sun, take them with you. When you miss home, you can take them out for a taste to alleviate your homesickness. ¡± Sun Siwen took the oilcloth wrapped plums, carefully tucked them close to his body, then lifted his cup, and with a touched expression, he said: ¡°I will heed brother Lu¡¯s words, I will not let you down in the county town. On this year¡¯s autumn list, my name will be there for sure.¡± After speaking, he looked deeply at Lu Yuan, and then took a glance at Yangmei Town behind him, he turned around and left. Under the golden morning sun, the slender figure of the scholar looked so determined.. Chapter 69 - Chapter 69: Chapter 48 They’ve All Grown Up Chapter 69: Chapter 48 They¡¯ve All Grown Up Translator: 549690339 After Mr. Sun left, with the loss of such a good friend, Lu Yuan¡¯s daily life became increasingly monotonous. Every day, he practiced martial arts and nothing else, having virtually no other schedule. With months of diligent practice, his inner strength grew rapidly. As his inner strength increased, Lu Yuan did not neglect to use jade pieces to refine it. Even with a daily refinement, when the inner strength gradually became purer and started to nourish his body, he experienced an unexpected joy. That is, the pure inner strength actually provided extra help in breaking through the acupoints. Originally, these acupoints were quite difficult to break through, but under the impact of pure inner strength, they became increasingly relaxed. Now, with his cultivation progress in the Hand¡¯s Taiyin Lung Meridian, he has broken through to the fifth Lie Que Acupoint at an accelerated pace. Given the current breakthrough speed, he could probably achieve one acupoint in about a month and a half. Furthermore, this breakthrough time could be further shortened as his inner strength becomes even more refined in the future. ¡°At this rate, I will have broken through the remaining six acupoints by around the third or fourth month of next year. During early summer, I can begin cultivating the Hand¡¯s Yangming Large Intestine Meridian. Once I have cultivated this meridian, I will have become a third-rate master in Jianghu.¡± Lu Yuan estimated that with his current progress, it would take him about two more years to enter the realm of a third-rate in Jianghu. Compared to the original seven-year time frame, he has already reduced it by two-thirds, which is a terrifying speed. He was very satisfied with this. Having a cultivation speed three times that of an ordinary person is something that cannot be achieved even by the so-called martial arts prodigies in Jianghu. What more could he want with such treatment? In early September, Lu Yuan finally left his home and visited the county town. Triple the martial arts training speed brought about triple the consumption of food and herbs. The herbs Lu Yuan had prepared for a year had already been consumed within four months. It¡¯s not impossible to continue training without herbs, but without the nourishment of medicinal power, certain injuries to the body, especially during Qi cultivation and inner strength impacting acupoints, would become irremediable. Gradually, minor injuries would accumulate into major ones, turning into hidden ailments within the body and ultimately limiting the body¡¯s development and improvement ot the cultivation level in the future. Moreover, taking medicinal soup during cultivation can also refine medicinal power, nourish inner qi, and speed up the growth of inner strength. In short, having inner strength and not having it during cultivation are two different situations. When he visited the Zhou Medical Clinic once more and saw Doctor Zhou Ze, Lu Yuan found that the doctor¡¯s temper had improved significantly. Previously, he was already a good person, albeit somewhat reserved. But now, upon meeting again, his reservation had disappeared, and he wore a smile the whole time, laughing and talking with everyone he met, his words filled with happiness and joy. Seeing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but be surprised, and asked, ¡°Doctor Zhou, your face is beaming with joy. Is there some good news?¡± ¡°Well, of course, there is good news.¡± With a brighter smile, Zhou Ze glanced at his busy son, Zhou Qing, in the hall and chuckled, ¡°Just a few days ago, I proposed marriage on behalf of my son to Master Zhao¡¯s daughter in the city. We just got a reply yesterday, and they are willing to marry their daughter into our family. The engagement has been settled, and they just need to wait for Qing¡¯er to turn fifteen and grow up a bit before starting a family.¡± To see their children grow up and establish themselves in life is indeed a gratifying affair for any parent. Therefore, it¡¯s only natural for Doctor Zhou to be so happy. ¡°Little Qing¡¯er is engaged?¡± Upon hearing the news, Lu Yuan was somewhat astonished, and then looked at Zhao Qing, who was handling herbs not far away, with a smile on his face, ¡°It seems I was right at the beginning of the year. Little Qing¡¯er has grown up, and now he¡¯s about to get married. He is twelve years old now, right? There are still three years until he turns fifteen. ¡± Lu Yuan calculated the time, then turned to look at Zhou Ze and congratulated him in advance, ¡°Doctor Zhou, it seems that in four more years, you¡¯ll have grandchildren.¡± Hearing this, Zhou Ze burst into laughter: ¡°Thank you for your kind words, Young Master Lu. When it¡¯s time to hold my grandchildren, I¡¯ll definitely invite you to the celebration.¡± Lu Yuan teased, ¡°Just when you have grandchildren? Won¡¯t you invite me to Xiaoqing¡¯s wedding day?¡± Zhou Ze laughed again and promised: ¡°Of course, I¡¯ll invite you. When the time comes, I¡¯ll personally deliver the invitation to you.¡± At the side, Zhou Qing listened to her father and Lu Yuan discussing her marriage without any reservations, feeling both embarrassed and annoyed, yet there was also a hint of expectation. With various thoughts swirling in her mind, she could only lower her head even more, pretend to be an ostrich, and suppress her urge to listen to those embarrassing words as she focused on her work. A twelve-year-old young man is at the age of shyness and embarrassment. With great joy, Lu Yuan bought enough herbs to last him four months and then teased Zhou Qing again, making the young brat run back to the backyard in embarrassment before finally leaving with a hearty laugh. Upon returning, Lu Yuan immersed himself in martial arts practice again until the tenth day, when he finally stopped. Then, he stared at his attribute panel in a daze. [Name: Lu Yuan] [Talent: Immortality] [Age: 18] [Realm: Innate (Not in the Stream)] [Martial Arts: Cloud Palm (First Level)] [Skills: Hunting Traps (perfect), Crude Knife Technique (perfect), Crude Archery (perfect), Medical Skill (Beginner), Cooking (Beginner)¡­] Compared to before, his attribute panel had changed slightly. Cloud Palm had reached the first level, and there were more skills listed. However, aside from these improvements, the most eye-catching part was his age. ¡°I¡¯m 18 years old now, already an adult,¡± Lu Yuan sighed, feeling an inexplicable sense of loneliness in his heart. The age of 18 wasn¡¯t his original age, but the age of this body. When he first arrived in this world, he was only 16 years old. In the blink of an eye, he had become an 18-year-old adult. And he had been in this world for two years. ¡°Time flies so fast. It feels like yesterday when I first arrived, but I haven¡¯t felt any change¡­ Oh, I¡¯m immortal and don¡¯t experience the passage of time, so it doesn¡¯t matter,¡± he muttered to himself, dispelling the loneliness in his heart, and decided to give himself a break today. After all, it was his 18th birthday, and he should celebrate it. Pondering for a moment, he carried some silver taels and went out. ¡°I¡¯ve always heard people talk in the taverns that the girls at the Red Sleeves Pavilion in Fu City are the most talented and versatile in singing, playing instruments, painting, and calligraphy. I¡¯ve been itching to see it for myself.¡± Yes, the rite of passage chosen by Lu Yuan was a place where men longed to be _a brothel. However, don¡¯t misunderstand. Although he visits a brothel, he only goes sightseeing and doesn¡¯t do anything intimate. As an ambitious immortal, without martial arts that would allow him to preserve his pure Yang energy, he wouldn¡¯t give up his pure Yang body. To this day, Lu Yuan still remembered the plan he had made in the past. He¡¯d practice martial arts for the first hundred years, become unrivaled in the world, and only then enjoy himself. As for now¡­ ¡°Well, I¡¯ll just look, listen, and touch. I won¡¯t do anything more profound. I¡¯m a person with a bottom line and determination.¡± He said these words with righteous indignation and a serious expression.. Chapter 70 - Chapter 70: Chapter 49 Scholar Sun Returns to His Hometown Chapter 70: Chapter 49 Scholar Sun Returns to His Hometown Translator: 549690339 Gals at the Red Sleeves Pavilion indeed match up the reputation, multi-talented and pretty with sweet voices. After Lu Yuan went to listen to a song, he felt as if he was floating in the air, entranced. All his previous feelings of loneliness and melancholy vanished when he returned. ¡°Miss Xiaoyu danced with her clothes off, and I had to force myself to resist. It was really uncomfortable.¡± On the way back to Yangmei Town from Fu City, Lu Yuan still felt a little embarrassed when he remembered the look in Miss Xiaoyu¡¯s eyes last night. Althouqh Xiaovu zentlv nezotiated and didn¡¯t sav anvthinq after beinz rejected, the feeling of sympathy and doubt could not be concealed. Being doubted for one¡¯s capability, especially by a beauty, is no doubt a great shame for a man. But the thing is, he couldn¡¯t say anything. ¡°Clearing up the misunderstanding, though making people feel even weirder. But proving my competency is undoubtedly more important.¡± Lu Yuan confirmed this and then concentrated his thoughts, no longer thinking about such amorous matters. Love affairs are not comparable to the temptation of martial arts and strength. As said before, going to the Red Sleeves Pavilion was just for relaxation on his adult birthday. Real happiness in the long run should come from practicing martial arts and feeling constantly stronger, which gives far more thrill than anything else. This is what makes people get addicted. Snowflakes fluttering and icy wind howling. In the blink of an eye, the ground is covered with a layer of snow. This year, winter came around in early November. In the courtyard, after cleaning up last night¡¯s accumulated snow, Lu Yuan, with an uplifted mood, practiced his Palm skill again. Palm shadows flew, accompanied by the sound of the strong wind, a skillful palm technique was easily employed. ¡°It took me a month to perfect the Skyfall Technique. Now, I have mastered five palm techniques. I¡¯m one step closer to completing the eighty-one palm techniques. ¡± As Lu Yuan tidied up his moves and calmed his energy, he glanced at his attribute board and nodded approvingly. Since starting to study the Taoist Classics, Lu Yuan¡¯s learning speed has increased dramatically as he deepened his understanding of the Daoist classics. Not only is he able to grasp the essence of various palm techniques much faster, but he can also master a new technique in no time. Now, he can learn a new palm technique every month. At this rate, it will only take five to six years to learn the remaining 76 palm techniques. By then, his Cloud Palm martial arts technique will likely reach perfection before his Internal Cultivation Method. Lu Yuan, of course, is pleased with this. What makes him even happier is that in the past two months, he has opened up two more meridian points, leaving only four in the Hand¡¯s Taiyin Lung Meridian. Both palm techniques and inner strength have progressed rapidly. Nothing could be more satisfying than this. ¡°Huh, it¡¯s almost noon. It¡¯s the end of the year, more merchants are coming and going. It¡¯s time to go to the tavern for lunch and get some news from the outside.¡± At this point, his energy has calmed down. Lu Yuan looked at the time, and without further practicing, he prepared to go out for a meal. After a busy morning, he felt a bit fatigued and hungry. It was the right time for a break. Walking through the street where he lived, greeting familiar neighbors, Lu Yuan headed towards the main street. When he reached the street corner, suddenly a loud noise came from the entrance of the town, attracting many pedestrians to gather there. Seeing this scene, Lu Yuan¡¯s attention was piqued. He stopped one of the townspeople going to the entrance and asked, ¡°What¡¯s going on? Why are so many people heading to the entrance of the town?¡± The one he stopped was the rice shop owner in the town. He then put on his professional smile and said, ¡°Lord Lu, you didn¡¯t know? Today is the day Scholar Sun returns to our town. He is the first juren (imperial examination title) to come out of our town in twenty years. This is a manifestation of the literary star and glory to our ancestors.¡± ¡°Now that Scholar Sun is coming home, everyone has heard the news and is rushing to greet him, hoping to benefit from his scholarly aura.¡± Perhaps with this stroke of fortune, my own son could become a Scholar too!¡± The Rice Shop Owner was excited and proud. ¡°Scholar Sun¡­¡± Upon hearing this title, Lu Yuan¡¯s heart skipped a beat, and he immediately asked, ¡°Is it Sun Siwen?¡± The Rice Shop Owner nodded, ¡®Yes, it is your good friend, Sun Siwen. Lord Lu, you truly are exceptional. Back then, none of us could see Sun¡¯s abilities and potential. Only you became friends with him. We even laughed at you back then, but who would have thought that in just a couple of years, Sun would become a juren.¡± Becoming a juren means he can be an official now. An official like Sun is now in a different league from us commoners.¡± The Rice Shop Owner wore a look of envy and longing. Lu Yuan loosened his grip on the man¡¯s hand, who, seeing that Lu Yuan had no more questions, didn¡¯t linger any longer and followed the growing crowd towards the entrance of the town. ¡°Brother Sun has become a Juren.¡± Lu Yuan stood still, recalling the news, his emotions a mixture of surprise and awe. He hadn¡¯t forgotten the two conversations he had with Sun Siwen before Sun left for the examination. In the first, Sun mentioned that one of his ancestors was a cultivator and spoke of a dream message. In the second conversation, Sun gifted him a jade piece. Over the past few months, Lu Yuan had greatly benefited from the jade piece¡¯s effect. His ability to open his meridians and increase his Inner Strength so quickly was thanks to the jade piece¡¯s pure power. The latter had been proven effective and was indeed a treasure from the immortals. So, was what Sun Siwen said about the message from his dream coming true? ¡°So that message from the dream, was it really from Brother Sun¡¯s ancestor, the one who helped him become a Juren?¡± Lu Yuan felt a surge of excitement mixed with a touch of fear. Immortals are to mortals as humans are to ants. Even the slightest contact with such a being could be incredibly dangerous. An ant coming close to a human hand, even if the human had no intention of being malicious, the slightest touch could deprive the ant of its life. At this moment, Lu Yuan felt like an ant approaching a human. He longed to make contact with an immortal, yet feared being harmed by their unintentional actions. Especially since he was unsure whether Sun¡¯s ancestor had kind or malicious intentions towards him, this made him even more apprehensive. ¡°In the end, it¡¯s because I¡¯m too weak.¡± After a roller coaster of emotions, Lu Yuan finally calmed down a bit and sighed helplessly. He was still too weak. If he were strong enough, he wouldn¡¯t have to worry about so many things and could just try to make contact directly. On the other hand, if he were truly strong enough not to care about any of this, would he still be interested in Sun Siwen¡¯s connection to the immortal world? That was also an unknown. ¡°Forget it, don¡¯t think about all that. I don¡¯t have the strength to explore it now, so I won¡¯t. Right now, I¡¯m just a good friend of Brother Sun. As his friend, how could I not congratulate him on becoming a Juren?¡± Lu Yuan shook his head and cast away the distracting thoughts. He then followed the flow of people towards the entrance of the town. He was actually quite curious to see the grand entrance of the Juren¡¯s return to his hometown and wanted to witness it for himself.. Chapter 71 - Chapter 71: Chapter 50: Awakening from the Dream Chapter 71: Chapter 50: Awakening from the Dream Translator: 549690339 At the entrance of the town, a crowd of people had already gathered densely by the few willow trees by the riverbank. At the front of the crowd, Sun Siwen stood on a bullock cart, constantly bowing to the townspeople, saying something with a face full of accomplishment and pride. For the first juren Master of the town in twenty years, the townspeople were thrilled and felt honored, all wanting to join in the celebration. Lu Yuan laboriously pushed through the crowded people and finally heard clearly. ¡°Fellow elders, fortunately protected by our ancestors, and with your support, I have become a juren in this imperial examination. In the future¡­¡± Amidst the cheers, Sun Siwen happily spoke with formalities on stage. In the past, even when he became a Scholar, his status increased tremendously, yet there wouldn¡¯t be so many people in the town listening to him speak. But now, once he became a juren, the world felt entirely different. Once one reached the position of juren, if one didn¡¯t want to continue with the examinations, they could apply to the court for an official post. Although the available posts were minor ones, they were incomparable to those held by jinshi(imperial examination title), who could directly start as County Magistrates or County Captains. But they were still officials nonetheless. Even a small ninth-rank official was far superior to an ordinary person, making them part of separate social classes. Perhaps it was due to a lack of experience. Sun Siwen¡¯s speech this time was full of erudite quotations that the uneducated commoners couldn¡¯t understand. Nevertheless, whenever he finished speaking, the surrounding crowd would follow along and cheer, ¡°Master Juren, say a few more words!¡± and ¡°That was great!¡± Such flattery made Sun Siwen¡¯s head swim, his words flowing out like a broken dam that couldn¡¯t be stopped. He spoke for over an hour. It wasn¡¯t until his mouth became dry and parched, and the townspeople around him showed signs of fatigue, that Master Juren¡¯s lecture slowly came to an end. By this time, Lu Yuan had already gone to the town tavern, bought some cooked food and wine, returned home, and hurried back again. Seeing the crowd gradually thinning, he stepped forward with a smile. ¡°Brother Lu!¡± Coming back to his senses from his excitement, Sun Siwen saw his good friend whom he hadn¡¯t seen for several months and immediately jumped off the bullock cart, running up to him. ¡°Brother Sun.¡± Lu Yuan hugged him and laughed, ¡°As I predicted, Brother Sun succeeded in the imperial examination and has earned a prestigious name. In just a short two months, you have soared high to become an official.¡± With his friend mentioning his success as juren, Sun Siwen felt very pleased and laughed, ¡°This time I was able to pass, and it wouldn¡¯t have been possible without Brother Lu. Even with my one-thousand talents, I could never have succeeded without your help.¡± This was his way of thanking Lu Yuan for helping him financially with the exam fees. Mr. Sun was also hinting that he woulld not forget the favor and would not distance himself from their friendship due to chanzes in status. Lu Yuan caught the meaning in his words and felt even happier. Often, people forget their roots and the kindness they received after they become successful in life. Sun Siwen¡¯s actions showed his true nature. Having such a friend indeed brought joy. However, he didn¡¯t say much more, simply gesturing, ¡°We have prepared a banquet at home, just waiting for Brother Sun. Would Master Juren be willing to grace us with his presence?¡± Hearing Lu Yuan mention their get-together later, Sun Siwen couldn¡¯t help but be restless. Unable to contain himself, he grabbed Lu Yuan¡¯s sleeve and dragged him towards the alley, ¡°I¡¯ve attended many gatherings during my time in the prefecture city, but none of them had close friends. Waiting until we meet, it¡¯s all just formalities. Separated for two months, I¡¯ve long been looking forward to drinking and discussing with Brother Lu. You truly know me.¡± Between their words, their attitudes were no different from before. At Lu Yuan¡¯s home. On the stone table in the courtyard, more than half of the small dishes had been eaten, and the pot of fine wine was nearly empty. The two reunited friends, wine cups in hand, talked endlessly as if they had a never-ending supply of stories to share. Lu Yuan talked about his recent experiences but didn¡¯t say much more, mostly listening to Sun Siwen¡¯s stories. The new juren spoke of his journey to the examinations, the geography of Yuzhang Prefecture, his experiences in the prefectural city, the anxiety and tension before the examination, the new friends he met, and how wonderful and vast the world outside was. After speaking for a long time, Sun Siwen drank a cup of wine and suddenly said, ¡°Brother Lu, after I became a juren, I have requested the prefectural government to grant me an official post. My name has been submitted, and as soon as there¡¯s a vacancy, I can assume my post.¡± Lu Yuan was taken aback and asked in surprise, ¡°Brother Sun, are you not going to continue taking the imperial examinations?¡± Although becoming an official as a juren had a lower starting point than a jinshi, and their career peaks were limited to ranks four or five, those who became officials as jinshi began their careers at the eighth rank. In the future, whether they became high ranking officers or entered the court to serve as prime minister, they had great prospects. Thus, the difference between a juren and a jinshi, whether in terms of tangible benefits or future prospects, was like night and day. Lu Yuan knew this well, but how could this newly appointed juren not know? Nevertheless, Sun Siwen just gave a bitter smile, ¡°I am not taking any more exams.¡± Seeing his expression, Lu Yuan frowned and asked, ¡°What happened?¡± Sun Siwen sighed, ¡°Brother Lu, do you remember that I told you about the whispers I heard in my dreams?¡± Lu Yuan felt a slight movement in his heart and nodded, ¡°I remember. Brother Sun, you said that there was a voice in your dreams, urging you to take the imperial examination. ¡± Sun Siwen helplessly said, ¡°Yes, that voice was urging me to take the examination. I must tell you, actually, since I became a juren a month ago, that voice in my dreams has suddenly disappeared. Since the disappearance of the voice, I have felt empty as if I have lost something. The feeling of being invincible also vanished with it. Now, to have me take the Imperial Examination, frankly, even if I had already taken it, I am not confident that I could pass it again if I were to retake it. Previously, when I took the exam, my pen flowed smoothly without any blockage. Every time there was a difficult question, the answer would immediately come up in my heart. Thinking back, it felt more like someone was using my eyes to look at the exam, solving it, and then announcing the answer in my mind. However, at that time, I was focusing on passing the exam and didn¡¯t think much about it, assuming I had done it myself. Perhaps what succeeded this time was not me, but the voice in my heart, or the person within me.¡± As he spoke, Sun Siwen looked despondent, and his eyes were filled with a complex mix of emotions that were hard to interpret.. Chapter 72 - Chapter 72: Chapter 51: The Vicissitudes of Human Relationships Chapter 72: Chapter 51: The Vicissitudes of Human Relationships Translator: 549690339 Having gained so many benefits and experienced so many things, even today, Mr. Sun, who has always been reading ¡°Zi Bu Yu Gui Li Luan Shen,¡± now understands what happened to himself. Similarly, when he noticed that the abnormality in him had disappeared, he quickly realized that he had returned to the ordinary poor scholar he used to be. Previously, passing the Scholar and juren exams was all thanks to the person in his dream; he was merely a medium. Now that the person in the dream has gone, he has returned to his true form. It feels like a big dream. ¡°Brother Sun, are you saying that you feel that the luck in you has dispersed?¡± Lu Yuan asked with a shocked face, not expecting such a result. ¡°Yes, it¡¯s gone.¡± Sun Siwen nodded calmly. In these days, he has verified that point through various examples, and he has already accepted it: ¡°That¡¯s why I gave up the exams in time.¡± Although he has made rapid progress in his studies these days thanks to the help of the person in the dream, Sun Siwen still feels that his knowledge is not up to the mark compared to before, let alone that of a jinshi (imperial examination title). But even so, with his current knowledge, it is only enough to be an outstanding Scholar. This knowledge is not enough to secure his juren status, let alone to take the jinshi exams. And to wait for his knowledge to slowly accumulate to the level where he can take the jinshi exams, who knows how many years later that will be, or even if it¡¯s just a wishful thought. Instead of relying on such a vague possibility, it¡¯s better to give up the extravagant hopes now and serve as an official with the juren title. Lu Yuan understood the reason and could empathize with it. He couldn¡¯t help but comfort him: ¡°If Brother Sun doesn¡¯t take the exam, it¡¯s no big deal. With Brother Sun¡¯s talent, even if he starts out as a juren, he can still contribute to society and have a smooth career. It might not be long before I need to address you as ¡®county magistrate.¡¯ Even though the career path of a juren is not a long one, they can still reach a level where they can be a local Prefect, at best. With a smooth path, Sun Siwen has a chance to become a county magistrate within ten years. ¡°Thanks for Brother Lu¡¯s kind words.¡± Sun Siwen smiled and nodded, then said expectantly, ¡°My grandfather¡¯s career ended as a local Prefect. If I, as a grandson, can achieve the same position, I would not disgrace my ancestors. In the future, when we meet in Huangquan, I will have something to say.¡± Lu Yuan wished, ¡°Brother Sun will certainly have his wishes come true.¡± Sun Siwen waved his hand, ¡°Forget it, let¡¯s not talk about these. We¡¯re here to drink and enjoy each other¡¯s company. Right now, the appointment hasn¡¯t come yet, so you and I, good friends, still have plenty of time to gather together. Once I¡¯m appointed as an official, I¡¯ll be in government service in a foreign land, with a lifetime of uncertainties. Who knows when we¡¯ll meet again?¡± To prevent officials from colluding with locals, scholars who enter the government service have always avoided working in their hometowns. That is to say, if Sun Siwen wants to be an official, he can only work in a different region, not in the same prefecture or county where he was born. Once his appointment comes, this newly appointed juren will have to go to another place to start his career as an official. At that time, Sun Siwen could only return to his hometown if he was demoted and lost his post or retired to his hometown. This farewell, for the people of today, really has some meaning of the last gathering. Seeing Sun Siwen so sentimental, Lu Yuan laughed and comforted him, ¡°What¡¯s the big deal about that? Brother Sun will have official duties and won¡¯t be able to leave at will. But I am all alone, free and easy. Once Brother Sun becomes an official, when I miss you, I can directly go to you.¡± ¡°Just don¡¯t think I am annoying if I visit too frequently,¡± Lu Yuan said. As for the vast and beautiful world, Lu Yuan has long yearned to travel and explore it. However, he now feels that his strength is not enough. It might be dangerous to venture out at random, so he has restrained his restless thoughts. But right now, his martial arts training is progressing rapidly, and he should be able to reach the level of a third-rate martial artist within two years. In five to six years, second-rate is also possible. By then, his Cloud Palm technique will be complete. With this strength, as long as he does not cause trouble and simply travels the world in a low-key manner, there should be no problem. Sun Siwen said happily, ¡°No, not at all. Brother Lu¡¯s visits would be a great pleasure. How could I ever be annoyed?¡± Lu Yuan decided, ¡°Well, that¡¯s settled then. In the future, when I¡¯m free, I¡¯ll come to visit Brother Sun and have fun together.¡± With that, the two made a promise to meet again in the future. In the following days, Sun Siwen¡¯s home was as busy as a marketplace. All the prominent people in the town, having heard the news, flocked to the new Juren¡¯s home to pay their respects. Even Xu Ce, who had previously visited and then distanced himself from Sun Siwen, now eagerly came forward, no longer daring to address him as ¡°Brother Sun¡± but instead changed to ¡°Master Sun¡± with an attitude of humility. Some officials and scholars in the county, upon hearing that a new juren had emerged in the county, either personally visited the Juren¡¯s Home, or sent their servants to deliver gifts as congratulations. The once-deserted Sun Shusheng¡¯s Home turned into a place sought after by everyone simply because of one more juren. The fickleness of the world and the reality of human nature were vividly displayed. Sun Siwen spent a full half month just accommodating these visitors, and it wasn¡¯t until the lunar month arrived that he finally had a respite. Then he came to find Lu Yuan to comDlain. In the Plum Forest outside the town, the snow-dressed scenery was covered in white, and some buds were already growing on the tree branches amidst the bitter cold. The two met in the forest to enjoy the snow-covered plum blossoms and drink wine together. ¡°In the past, people always said that the poor are unnoticed in the city, while the rich are sought after even in the deep mountains. Now I finally understand this point,¡± said Sun Siwen, looking as if he had seen through the ways of the world. ¡°Since I became a juren, all those classmates and fellow students whom I¡¯ve never met or even heard of, distant relatives, and even ¡°fellow villagers¡± in the county, all swarmed to me, talking about emotional connections. What emotional connections do I have with them? They simply see that I have become successful and want to ask for some benefits. Fortunately, besides those poor relatives, the other gentry and powerful families in the county have indeed sent me quite a few gifts. All in all, I ended up with three or four hundred silver tales? No wonder people always say that every three years, a Prefect earns 100,000 snowflake silver tales. This world¡­¡± Sun Siwen sighed. Not knowing whether he should be happy or angry about this phenomenon, he didn¡¯t even know if he would become one of them someday. Lu Yuan patted him on the shoulder, ¡°Brother Sun, just do your best, that¡¯s all that matters. Why worry about anything else?¡± ¡°Indeed, just doing my best is enough.¡± Sun Siwen looked up at Lu Yuan and said with a smile, ¡°Actually, I have something to tell Brother Lu today as well. I¡¯ve received my appointment from the prefecture. I¡¯ve been appointed as xueyu (education official) of Changning County in Dongting Prefecture, starting from the ninth rank. My term begins in early February next year. After the New Year, I¡¯ll have to go to my new post.¡± The xueyu is in charge of a county¡¯s students and their studies, somewhat like a county school principal. Above the xueyu is the position of jiaoyu, a regular eighth-rank official, who oversees the education, culture, and rituals of the entire county. As a subordinate and assistant to the jiaoyu, the xueyu is truly a small and insignificant official. Lu Yuan was slightly stunned when he heard this, ¡°Dongting Prefecture?¡± Dongting Prefecture is to the west of Yuzhang Prefecture, with the two prefectures adjacent to each other. Working there is not too far away, and overall, it¡¯s a relatively good location. This would make it convenient for him to visit his friend in the future.. Chapter 73 - Chapter 73: Chapter 52: Third-rate Chapter 73: Chapter 52: Third-rate Translator: 549690339 In the blink of an eye, it was New Year¡¯s Eve. Perhaps thinking of the separation after the New Year, Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen still spent the New Year¡¯s Eve together this year. The two of them drank wine, exchanged blessings, but unlike last year, they didn¡¯t get drunk this time. They only had a few cups. When it came time for the New Year¡¯s Eve, they set off firecrackers with the residents of the town, happily ushering in the New Year together. Finally, Sun Siwen took out the fireworks he had bought from Fu City through someone else, and set off the brilliant fireworks under the quiet night sky. As the fireworks bloomed, the excited cheers of the children outside were heard. The children in the countryside had never seen such a dazzling sight, and they couldn¡¯t help but shout excitedly. Their parents, perhaps also stunned by this scene, just watched the fireworks and didn¡¯t even try to stop them. So the small town, which had quieted down during the crackle of firecrackers, became lively again. After the several boxes of fireworks had been set off, and ten or so silver tales had been spent, the night did not quiet down immediately, but became noisy for a while, and then quietened as the parents scolded the children. And so the night fell into silence. On the second day, after Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen had a meal together and exchanged New Year greetings, they returned to their respective homes. Everyone stayed at home on the first day of the new year. On the second and third days, they began to visit relatives and friends. By the fourth day, after visiting several important people, Sun Siwen came to see Lu Yuan and began to say goodbye. There was less than a month left before he would become a xueyu (education official) far away in another county, so he had to leave early. Lu Yuan accompanied Sun Siwen out of town for five miles before turning back. Although they had said before that they would visit each other on a later day, Lu Yuan knew that the so-called future day would be at least five or six years away. Given the current terrible social environment, they didn¡¯t know if they would ever see each other again after saying goodbye today. After sending his only friend to his post, Lu Yuan returned to his previous solitary state, with no outside distractions, all his thoughts were focused on his martial arts training. Every day, his schedule was arranged like this: Wake up in the morning, practice Cloud Palm for one hour, eat breakfast, then spend one hour drinking tea and reading. At noon, go to the tavern to listen to news, come back and nap for half an hour, wake up and practice Inner Strength for two hours, practice Cloud Palm for one hour, and then have dinner. In the evening, practice Inner Strength for another hour, read for a while, then go to bed. In this way, Lu Yuan¡¯s daily schedule was strictly followed. As for his old hunting trade? After spending a year of the thousand silver tales he had made last year, there were still more than eight hundred tales left. According to his current spending rate, it would take three or four years to spend it all. So, with no financial crisis, he had no motivation to hunt. As for money, it was enough for now. Although Lu Yuan also wanted to live a luxurious life, that would have to wait until he achieved great success in martial arts and made a name for himself. At present, he was in the struggling stage, and he could still bear a little hardship. As the saying goes, Suffer first, enjoy later. Now was the time for suffering, and once it passed, it would be time to enjoy the sweetness. Lu Yuan had the determination to endure. Spring turned to autumn, winter turned to summer. Lu Yuan was still living in Yangmei Town, and apart from going to the county to buy medicine every few months, he spent his days as a homebody. He occasionally received letters sent by Sun Siwen from across the country letters containing greetings as well as the new Xueyu¡¯s complaints. Dongting Prefecture was a mountainous area, and it had always been known as Seven Mountains, Two Rivers, One Field. From this, one could tell that it was not a prosperous place. And indeed, it wasn¡¯t. After taking up his post, our Grand Tutor Sun discovered the true state of Changning County for himself. As the popular saying goes, the more you lack something, the more you emphasize it. Changning, Changning, it¡¯s said to be for long-lasting peace and stability. But in reality, this place is full of barbarians and ethnic groups, with troublemakers causing disturbances from time to time, and the local customs are extremely fierce. One can only imagine the difficulties Sun Siwen faced working in such a place. When he arrived at the County Academy, he counted all the registered students, and found that there were less than a hundred literate people in the whole county. Among them, there were more than a dozen scholars, but not a single juren. What does this mean? Let¡¯s take Dayu County as an example. Dayu County, already considered a remote and poverty-stricken county in Yuzhang Prefecture, still has four to five hundred students and three to four jurens, although few in number. Compared to Changning County, it¡¯s much stronger. In such a place where the literary atmosphere is in decline, Sun Siwen serves as a Teaching Assistant in charge of education, and it¡¯s not hard to see how difficult it is to advance his work. Anyway, judging by the complaints in the letters he sent, one can tell that his good friend is living a miserable life. In response, all Lu Yuan could do was to tease him and comfort him in his replies. Reading letters every few months was just a diversion in his life. Lu Yuan¡¯s daily life was quite uninteresting, but he was used to it and couldn¡¯t accept anything else. Two years passed in the blink of an eye in such a bland life. Today, it¡¯s early summer again. Thunder and rain roar in the night sky outside the window. The first muffled thunder of the summer comes with an extraordinary shock. The candlelight in the room flickers, and the wind outside blows through the gaps in doors and windows, causing the flame to sway, making one worry that it might go out any moment. Lu Yuan sits cross-legged on the bed, eyes slightly closed, both hands resting on his abdomen, his inner strength fluctuates within his body, and the Cloud Palm¡¯s mental technique is pushed to the extreme, as if wave-like raging against the unmovable meridians before him. Time slowly flows. In a blink of an eye, the thunder outside has stopped, but the heavy rain continues to pour, making a sound as it patters on the roof tiles. Lu Yuan is still practicing. To him, time seems to have no meaning. Finally, At around midnight, after practicing for two hours, his arms tremble slightly, and the surging inner strength in his body faces no further obstruction, flowing into his dantian from his arms, converging in one place. ¡°I¡¯ve finally broken through.¡± Opening his tightly closed eyes, Lu Yuan feels the increased inner strength in his body, unable to suppress a smile on his face. His divine sense sinks into his mind, and the content on the Attribute Panel has changed. [Name: Lu Yuan] [Talent: Immortality] [Age: 20] [Realm: Post-celestial (Third-class)] [Martial Arts: Cloud Palm (Second Layer)] [Skills: Hunting Traps (Perfect), Crude Knife Technique (Perfect), Crude Archery (Perfect), Medical Skill (Minor Success) ¡­J After practicing for three years, today, at last, he has broken through the second layer of the Cloud Palm, reaching the third-class realm in the Jianghu world. ¡°This is great news, worth celebrating.¡± Unable to help himself, Lu Yuan laughs and gets out of bed, feeling extremely pleased. Who could understand the joy of finally advancing from a nameless, low-level martial artist to a third-class martial artist after three years of hard training and hardship? That sense of accomplishment is truly intoxicating. However, it¡¯s already late at night, and outside it¡¯s still raining heavily. Even if he feels restless, there¡¯s nothing else to do. In the end, he takes out his homemade fine wine, cooks a small dish for himself, and starts eating happily. ¡°When the rain stops tomorrow¡­ Well, once the rain stops tomorrow, I¡¯ll go to Fu City again. It¡¯s been two years since I¡¯ve been to the Red Sleeves Pavilion to see Miss Xiaoyu, I wonder if she¡¯s still there?¡± Taking a bite of the small dish, sipping the fine wine, Lu Yuan squints at the storm outside, his heart wandering far away.. Chapter 74 - Chapter 74: Chapter 53 Invitation Chapter 74: Chapter 53 Invitation Translator: 549690339 Lu Yuan ultimately didn¡¯t manage to see the Lady Xiaoyu he had been longing for. By the time he hurriedly arrived at Fu City on the second day, he found out that last year, Lady Xiaoyu had already been redeemed by a wealthy merchant and became his sixth concubine. Although a concubine, being able to leave such a place was a blessing in disguise. Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan could only sigh and wish her well before heading to Lady Xiaohong¡¯s tea house. Unlike the skilled dancer, gentle and sister-like Xiaoyu, Xiaohong was a young, beautiful and cool-tempered lady. Of course, there were many beauties in the Red Sleeves Pavilion. Xiaohong¡¯s allure and high standing led the Pavilion to provide her with an exclusive room, indicating her exceptional talent. Xiaohong excelled in tea artistry, earning her the praise of many renowned tea masters in the citv. even suggesting she could 0Den her own tea garden and establish a career. Regrettably, Xiaohong, a talented tea artist, was confined to the Red Sleeves Pavilion and could not pursue her passion, only able to serve tea and entertain guests. Besides her tea skills, she was also well-versed in poetry and literature, able to compose rhythmic verses and discuss classical texts. According to the Madame of the Pavilion, Xiaohong came from a noble background but lost her prestigious status after her grandfather committed a crime, resulting in her being sold as a slave before ending up in the Red Sleeves Pavilion. Most clients who sought her company were scholars and literati. They enjoyed watching the beautiful Xiaohong brew tea while they indulged in the accomplishment of being served by someone of noble birth. Moreover, they loved discussing poetry and literature with the cool-tempered lady and flaunting their own talents. The only regret for these clients was that Xiaohong only provided company and not her body. However, the so-called ¡°art for sale, but not her body¡± could be swayed with the right price or high status, even the coolest of immortals would yield. As for that price¡­ Curious, Lu Yuan asked about it, but once he heard the astronomical figure, he immediately closed his mouth, not daring to think further. Not being able to experience her intimately was just as well. In fact, this suited Lu Yuan¡¯s preferences. After all, Lu Yuan¡¯s martial arts training only allowed him to look and touch, but not engage intimately. Having that restriction imposed by others was even better for him. Brewing tea and discussing philosophy with a beautiful woman, expressing emotions while observing etiquette ¨C it had its charm. ¡°As a gentleman, how could I be like those vulgar men who only care about appearances and have no taste?¡± Lu Yuan secretly laughed at those who only desired flesh as he took a sip of tea, happily engaging in conversation with Xiaohong about the Taoist Classics he had been studying recently. Studying the Taoist Classics on his own was quite challenging. Unexpectedly, as he discussed them with Xiaohong, he found that she was indeed familiar with the texts. Initially planning on maintaining a clean mind, he found himself so engrossed in the conversation that he cast away his impure thoughts and focused on discussing knowledge. Living up to her reputation, Xiaohong proved to be highly Imowledgeable, easily addressing the doubts of a beginner like Lu Yuan. With just a few words, she solved many of his conundrums. Once he returned home, Lu Yuan was confident that he would master the palm technique he had been practicing for nearly a month within a few days. ¡®Learning martial arts is about acquiring knowledge; without it, you can¡¯t even qualify as a warrior. I still have a long way to go.¡¯ Seeing Xiaohong in a new light, Lu Yuan held her in high esteem. To show his gratitude for her guidance, he decided to support her business in the coming days, continuing to seek counsel from her in tea artistry and the Taoist Classics. It was just a few dozen silver taels, after all. He, Lu Yuan, could certainly afford it. If left with no money, he could simply ask the Dayu Mountain Archer to venture into the mountains and Southsea again. It was really no big deal! After spending seven days in Fu City, learning from his teacher and gaining much knowledge, Lu Yuan reluctantly returned home, bidding farewell to her. Upon arrival at Yangmei Town, he greeted a familiar face and was stopped by his neighbor Erniu at the doorway, who handed him a letter and an invitation. He returned home after expressing his gratitude and opened them to find out what they were about. Lu Yuan vaguely recalled two years ago when he went to the county town to buy medicine; Doctor Zhou mentioned his son, Xiaoqing, was engaged. At the time, he mentioned that Lu Yuan would be invited to the wedding. And so, two days prior, Zhou Ze had fulfilled his promise, personally visiting Yangmei Town to deliver an invitation to Lu Yuan. Unfortunately, he was in Fu City, indulging in Xiaohong¡¯s company and unable to leave the Red Sleeves Pavilion, causing him to miss this important occasion. Fortunately, Zhou Ze left the invitation with Erniu, ensuring Lu Yuan didn¡¯t miss the event. ¡°In the blink of an eye, two years have passed, and Xiaoqing, now fifteen, is preparing to get married,¡± Lu Yuan thought as he read the invitation, his heart filled with emotions. It was normal for Xiaoqing to get married and start a family at fifteen, fitting the era¡¯s conventions. However, compared to him, who was already twenty and still single, he appeared rather strange in the eyes of others. Thankfully, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t care about other people¡¯s opinions; in his eyes, ordinary people were nothing more than fleeting beings with a short lifespan. The life of an immortal was something mortals could never comprehend. Even after four years, Lu Yuan¡¯s appearance remained unchanged, as if he was still a sixteen-year-old boy. To keep his secret, he learned makeup artistry and frequently adjusted his appearance, concealing the fact that he did not age. As long as he disguised himself well and kept to himself, nobody would discover his secret. ¡°Someday, I might witness Doctor Zhou with four generations under one roof, holding his great-grandson,¡± Lu Yuan thought. Doctor Zhou was a friend and somewhat of an elder figure to him, comparable to Sun Siwen. Thus, he was genuinely happy about the wedding: ¡°I hope he can live to see that day.¡± As he thought about this, he remembered the few streaks of silver in Zhou Ze¡¯s sideburns he saw a few months ago. Unlike Lu Yuan¡¯s eternal youth, Doctor Zhou was a regular person nearing forty, already surpassing the average lifespan of this era. Nobody knew how many years he had left; he was living on borrowed time. ¡°Doctor Zhou, as a physician, takes good care of himself; he should live a long life of sixty or eighty years,¡± Lu Yuan thought, wishing him well before carefully storing the invitation, prepared to attend the wedding on the fourteenth of the fifth month with a gift in hand.. Chapter 75 - Chapter 75: Chapter 54: The Wedding Chapter 75: Chapter 54: The Wedding Translator: 549690339 May 14th came quickly. On this day, Lu Yuan arrived in the city as promised to attend Zhou Qing¡¯s wedding. ¡°Bow to Heaven and Earth.¡± ¡°Bow to the parents.¡± ¡°The couple bows to each other.¡± A resounding voice echoed in the hall, and as the last announcement fell, a wave of congratulations rose. Crackle! Snap! Firecrackers appeared outside right on time, pushing the festive atmosphere to the extreme. Lu Yuan stood in the crowd applauding. He couldn¡¯t help but smile at Zhou Qing who led the bride in the center of the hall. The once naive and innocent child had now grown into a man who could marry and start a family. ¡°Doctor Zhou, it won¡¯t be long before you can hold your eldest grandson. Let me congratulate you in advance.¡± With the arrival of guests, Lu Yuan sent out his blessings. ¡°Thank you, thank you.¡± Zhou Ze looked very happy, his face full of smiles. As there were many guests to entertain, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t say much to Doctor Zhou. After exchanging pleasantries, he walked to the prepared seat in the courtyard and began to eat. The table was an Eight Immortals Table, and several people were already seated, some of which had started eating. Lu Yuan looked around, and seeing he didn¡¯t recognize anyone at the table, he assumed they were friends and family of the bride and groom. Not interested in getting to Imow them, he started eating on his own. However, he still maintained some restraint. With Lu Yuan¡¯s appetite now, let alone sharing with several people, the dishes on this table would barely be enough to fill him seven or eight-tenths full. So after taking a few bites, he found the meal somewhat uninteresting, and stopped eating much. He poured himself a glass of wine, picked up a peanut, and leisurely savored the drink in his mouth. He secretly thought that after the wedding was over, he¡¯d definitely go to the city¡¯s finest restaurant and enjoy a hearty feast. The wedding festivities continued. The bride had already been sent to the bridal chamber, but the groom couldn¡¯t remove himself from the banquet, going from table to table to toast the relatives and friends. After a while, when Zhou Qing arrived at Lu Yuan¡¯s table, he was already red-faced and drunk, his eyes glazed over. It seemed he was quite intoxicated. Seeing him in this state, Lu Yuan wondered if the groom would be able to stand up when it came time for the bridal chamber that night, in more ways than one. ¡°Brother Lu, let me toast you. Over the years, thank you for taking care of our Medical Clinic¡¯s business.¡± With a slur, Zhou Qing excitedly raised his glass to Lu Yuan. ¡°Haha, I should also thank you for your care.¡± Lu Yuan stood up, laughed, and then reminded the excited Zhou Qing, ¡°Groom, you should drink less and save some strength for tonight. The bride just entered your home, don¡¯t let her complain that you neglected her.¡± The people around were all grown men and understood what he was implying. They chuckled and teased Zhou Qing upon hearing this. As expected, the groom was thin-skinned. Even under the influence of alcohol, he struggled to handle the situation, and quickly fled to the next table in a fluster. As mentioned earlier, the groom¡¯s time was reserved for the bride. After toasting, Zhou Qing retreated to the backyard to rest and prepare for the ¡°battle¡± that night. Not long after, seeing the banquet coming to an end, Lu Yuan took his leave from Zhou Ze and went straight to the city¡¯s restaurant. Just now, in order to not shock everyone, he had forcefully suppressed his hunger. Now, it was time to comfort his own stomach. Time passed, and before he Imew it, more time had elapsed. After attending Zhou Qing¡¯s wedding, Lu Yuan returned to his recluse life, practicing martial arts diligently in Yangmei Town every day, rarely leaving home. Under this perseverance, he had opened up three acupoints in his third meridian and practiced five more moves in the Cloud Palm skill, getting a few steps closer to mastering it. Aside from being satisfied with his progress, Lu Yuan naturally became more diligent and practiced his martial arts even harder. In July, he went to the county town again to look for Doctor Zhou to replenish his herbs. During this visit, he heard some good news. After two months of Zhou Qing¡¯s unwavering efforts, his wife was pregnant. Doctor Zhou personally checked her pulse and confirmed that she was already one month pregnant. Zhou Qing would become a father in April next year. Similarly, Doctor Zhou would also be promoted to a grandpa. Naturally, Zhou Ze was overjoyed, and his face was full of smiles and laughter with everyone he met. ¡°In my opinion, Lu kid, you¡¯re already twenty and older than my son Zhou Qing. Now that Zhou Qing is about to become a father, you¡¯re still a bachelor. How can that be acceptable? You¡¯re not short of money, and now you¡¯ve made a name for yourself in martial arts, which can be said as an accomplishment. I think it¡¯s time for you to start planning for your marriage and to establish your career as soon as possible.¡± Upon seeing Lu Yuan, Doctor Zhou couldn¡¯t help but babble: ¡°Is it because you don¡¯t have a suitable match? If that¡¯s the case, I know several good families with daughters to marry off, and I can introduce you to them.¡± Hearing Zhou Ze¡¯s nagging like an old mother, Lu Yuan felt overwhelmed and hurriedly waved his hands: ¡°Stop, stop. Haven¡¯t I told you? I only want to practice martial arts in this life and have no great interest in romantic affairs. Doctor Zhou, you don¡¯t need to persuade me anymore.¡± Zhou Ze knew his old friend¡¯s character well, and seeing that he still hadn¡¯t changed his mind, he backed off but still shook his head, saying, ¡°I don¡¯t know what¡¯s so good about practicing martial arts that could make you so obsessed. As far as I can see, other people who practice martial arts also get married and have children. Nevermind, Xiaoqing, bring the prepared herbs to Brother Lu.¡± ¡°Alright.¡± Zhou Qing replied from inside the medicine hall and ran to the backyard. In a short while, he brought a big basket and handed it to Lu Yuan: ¡°Brother Lu, here.¡± After getting married, especially knowing that he was about to become a father, Zhou Qing seemed to have changed entirely. He appeared less impulsive and naive, but more mature and responsible. ¡®This young man has truly grown up.¡¯ Looking at Zhou Qing¡¯s calm face, Lu Yuan sighed in his heart, took the basket with a smile, and left. No wonder there was a saying in his previous life that women can make a man mature, and marriage is an accelerator. Looking at the current situation, it was indeed true. Upon returning home, Lu Yuan received another letter from Sun Siwen. He opened it and read it. After working for two years, our Grand Tutor Sun had finally adapted to his job and no longer complained as much as he did at the beginning. In the letter, Sun Siwen happily mentioned something. After taking office, his diligent efforts over two years had increased the number of students in the County Academy by dozens and produced several scholars. Consequently, the prefecture government assessed his performance and was very satisfied, leading to his promotion. He continued to hold the position of xueyu (education official) with the ranking of Regular Ninth Grade. In addition to the promotion, Sun Siwen also mentioned that he found a talented student, who, at only sixteen, had already become a scholar. With this momentum, after a few more years of cultivation, this talent might take the juren (imperial examination title). If his County Academy could indeed produce a juren, it would undoubtedly be a significant achievement. According to Sun Siwen, with this merit, he could even be directly promoted and rise one or two ranks without any issue. Grand Tutor Sun was full of enthusiasm. He had his sights set on the position of education official in the county, which was a Regular Eighth Grade official. Whether he could take it or not depended on nurturing a juren. His friend was full of confidence, looking forward with great anticipation. ¡°Everything is moving in a positive direction.¡± After reading the letter, Lu Yuan took great care to put it away. His mood was quite pleasant. Both of his good friends, Zhou Ze and Sun Siwen, had good news ¡ª Zhou Ze was about to become a grandpa, and Sun Siwen had been promoted. As a friend, he was naturally happy for them.. Chapter 76 - Chapter 76: Chapter 55: Waves Rise Again Chapter 76: Chapter 55: Waves Rise Again Translator: 549690339 As it turned out, Lu Yuan¡¯s happiness did not last long. Life sometimes does not go as smoothly as one might hope. After returning from the county town, everything seemed peaceful, just like before, as if the world were to remain peaceful forever. But this peaceful life only lasted for two months before it was abruptly shattered. ¡°Business is tough lately.¡± ¡°Isn¡¯t it? There are more and more martial artists from the Jianghu everywhere. They¡¯re fighting private duels with people everywhere, and some have even become bandits, cutting off the roads. I fear for my life every time I step out of the city. Who dares to do business under such circumstances?¡± ¡°Why are there so many people from the martial arts world all of a sudden? Are there big events happening in the martial arts world?¡± ¡°The situation now feels a lot like the Black Wind Gang trouble two years ago. Our Luling Prefecture isn¡¯t going to be in chaos again, right?¡± ¡°Hush¡­ Don¡¯t talk nonsense. Everything is peaceful in our Luling Prefecture, and our days are getting better by the day. Don¡¯t jinx it.¡± At noon, as usual, Lu Yuan came to the tavern, and unsurprisingly, several merchants were lamenting the difficulties they¡¯ve been facing lately. About half a month ago, ripples began to emerge in the Luling Prefecture¡¯s martial arts circle, which had just calmed down for two years. These people¡¯s origins were unknown, but they were all extremely fierce. They seemed to be hostile to one another, as many of them began fighting to the death upon encountering each other. Such a large gathering of martial artists, accompanied by frequent private duels, inevitably caused the public safety in Luling Prefecture to deteriorate rapidly. Even in Yangmei Town, Lu Yuan ran into a passing Jianghu martial artist two days ago while practicing palm techniques in the Plum Forest outside the town. Fortunately, he discovered the intruder early and was able to conceal himself in time, avoiding detection. It was then that Lu Yuan truly understood the concept of having more martial artists around, as mentioned by the merchants. As a result, in the following days, he no longer dared to practice outside and could only stay at home, unable to go out for fresh air. In fact, if there were just more Jianghu martial artists around, that would be fine. Having experienced the Black Wind Gang turmoil before, Lu Yuan knew what to expect and believed that things would return to normal after some time. But the subsequent events in Luling Prefecture were somewhat unsettling. For some unknown reason, while the large number of visiting Jianghu martial artists were gathering in Luling Prefecture, the local martial arts factions began to mobilize and unite as well. It was as if they were preparing for a major battle. The various gang powers in Luling Prefecture were desperate to assemble their forces, mobilize, and prepare for life-and -death struggles. As far as Lu Yuan knew, Two peripheral members of the Black Wolf Gang in Yangmei Town, who usually did odd jobs and manual labor, were surprisingly summoned by the gang at this time. They were even instructed to bring their swords and knives, which was outrageous. Determined to gather strength, they spared no one, not even the menial laborers. Lu Yuan would not believe that nothing had happened in Luling Prefecture. ¡°With the gathering storm, I¡¯ve got the feeling something big is about to happen in Luling Prefecture. But those local gangs and visiting martial artists either don¡¯t know what¡¯s going on or are tight-lipped about it, so there hasn¡¯t been any hint of what¡¯s to come. It makes it difficult to prepare in advance if one wants to steer clear of trouble.¡± Thinking of the current atmosphere, Lu Yuan¡¯s brows were furrowed. He hated turmoil. And now, the environment in Luling Prefecture was starting to make Lu Yuan doubt if it was a suitable place to live at all. It had only been two years since the last bout of chaos, and now it started again. Luling Prefecture seemed to possess some strange power, attracting all sorts of demons and monsters to stir up trouble, making a mess of everything. ¡°I¡¯ll wait and see.¡± Lu Yuan sighed wearily. If it weren¡¯t for the fact that this was his hometown and that he had managed to establish a foothold here, he might have been in danger in another unfamiliar environment. He would have left this broken place long ago. At least Lu Yuan is a homebody, and no matter how chaotic it was outside, it didn¡¯t affect his practice. Although Yangmei Town was poor, it wasn¡¯t all bad. It was remote, so even if the outside world was in chaos, it would hardly affect the town. The Black Wind Gang turmoil last time was quite fierce. But throughout the entire chaos, not a single bandit made it to Yangmei Town. Their safety had already been proven. Therefore, staying in the town gave Lu Yuan some confidence. After staying in the town for a few more days, Lu Yuan focused more of his energy on watching the outside world, in addition to practicing martial arts. He spent even more time in the tavern than usual. In doing so, he reaped quite a few benefits. At that moment, Lu Yuan and the other diners in the tavern were silent, and the usually noisy main hall was dead quiet. In the center of the hall, at a table, a traveling fortune-teller had just taken a sip of tea and cleared his throat before saying leisurely, ¡°I believe you all have heard of the duel between the Eagle King and the Iron Sword two years ago, right?¡± ¡°Of course we know. In that great battle, Master MO showed his great prowess, defeating the Eagle King with a single sword strike and winning the duel.¡± The town¡¯s landlord, Old Master Sun, chimed in. ¡°Heh heh¡­ won?¡± The fortune-teller laughed twice, then said sarcastically, ¡°That¡¯s just a lie used to fool you outsiders.¡± After that, seeing the people in the hall looking astonished, he continued, ¡°That day¡¯s great battle, though nominally a duel between Fang Tianying and MO Baichuan, MO Baichuan actually had help: none other than Shao Desheng, the leader of our Luling Prefecture. These two were both top-notch martial artists in the Jianghu world, but even when combined, they were barely able to fight Fang Tianying to a draw. Had it not been for the reinforcements from the Iron Sword Sect and the government, who surrounded and frightened Fang Tianying away, the outcome of that duel might still be uncertain.¡± The people in the hall were visibly shocked when they heard this. Even Lu Yuan was astonished. Because what the fortune- teller said was vastly different from what they had heard before ¡ª it could even be described as two extremes. One couldn¡¯t help but wonder if what the fortune-teller said was true or false. And why was he slandering MO Baichuan like this? Did he have a grudge against the Iron Sword Sect? ¡°How dare he boldly denigrate MO Baichuan, the leader of the Iron Sword Sect, right in their territory? Is he not afraid of the sect¡¯s retribution?¡± The entire Luling Prefecture could be considered the territory of the Iron Sword Sect. In this area, while the Iron Sword Sect may not have tendrils everywhere, their eyes and ears certainly stretched far and wide. Even in a remote place like Yangmei Town, there were peripheral forces of the Iron Sword Sect, such as the Black Wolf Gang members. It was evident just how vast the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s power was in Luling Prefecture. This fortune-teller, daring to speak ill of the Iron Sword Sect leader in their domain, was not just courageous; he was simply courting death.. Chapter 77 - Chapter 77: Chapter 56: Hidden Worries of Internal Strife Chapter 77: Chapter 56: Hidden Worries of Internal Strife Translator: 549690339 ¡°If the people from Iron Sword Sect were to find out, this fortuneteller wouldn¡¯t live to see the next sunrise.¡± Lu Yuan didn¡¯t think that the people from Iron Sword Sect would let go of someone who had slandered their Sect Leader and tarnished their reputation. Even though the fortuneteller only said a couple of harsh words, too loose with his tongue. But don¡¯t you know, what kind of people are those who wander in the Jianghu? Despite the fact that Iron Sword Sect appeared a proper and orthodox sect in Jianghu, well-known good forces, they usually did some evil-exterminating and way-defending deeds to keep up appearances. But when it comes down to it, they are also a bunch of desperate people who rely on killing for a living. Otherwise, where would the Black Wolf Gang have come from? ¡°So, either this fortuneteller doesn¡¯t care about his life or he¡¯s pretty confident he can handle the repercussions of his words,¡± Lu Yuan realized after the initial shock. Then, he examined the fortuneteller closely but did not find any signs of a death wish. So was it deliberate? What is his motive? Is someone behind this? New doubts emerged. However, the fortuneteller didn¡¯t seem interested in providing answers. While everyone was shocked and even a little angered, he continued, ¡°So, that great battle that day, MO Baichuan did not win against Fang Tianying.¡± ¡°In fact, MO Baichuan was at a disadvantage when he fought with Fang Tianying, and even suffered a lot.¡± ¡°In the last few confrontations, MO Baichuan was exploited by Fang Tianying¡¯s broken defences and was hit badly, ending up severely injured and on his deathbed.¡± The fortuneteller continued to express his radical theories. Someone couldn¡¯t take it anymore and got up, exclaiming, ¡°Nonsense! What kind of character is Master MO? How could a lowly Fang Tianying ever defeat Master MO? Let alone injure him.¡± Having settled in Luling for many years, the Iron Sword Sect was deeply rooted in local affairs, with numerous established relationships. Even in this remote Yangmei Town, there were many people who had collaborations with the Iron Sword Sect. Now as someone slanders Master MO, some people couldn¡¯t help but speak up. In fact, not just those with vested interests, even others who had no issues with Iron Sword Sect were frowning at the fortuneteller, harboring dissatisfaction. They didn¡¯t have any particular affection for the Iron Sword Sect. The main reason was Iron Sword Sect being the face of the martial arts world in Luling, always carrying the face of the Jianghu, and bearing the responsibility of fighting against the Black Wind Gang. Even though they weren¡¯t doing very well, they were, after all, one of us, and had always been doing something. Thus, many were rather angry at this fortuneteller who tarnished the name of their local sect. At this moment, apart from the person who stood up to refute him, a few others glared at the fortuneteller, seemingly ready to fight if he dared to speak again. Yet, the fortuneteller showed no fear in the face of people¡¯s ¡°threatening¡± looks, and replied to one of the objectors, ¡°You say I am talking nonsense. I ask you, since the duel on Fairy Maiden Ridge, have you heard any news about MO Baichuan in the Jianghu?¡± Mr. MO must be in his forties, at the prime of his life. He can¡¯t possibly be immobilized, can he?¡± ¡°Yet as the leader of a sect, he has been quiet for more than two years. What do you think is going on?¡± The crowd in the hall was startled upon hearing this. Upon reflection, it did seem that over the past two years, there had been little talk of Master Mo¡¯s achievements. This was indeed abnormal. As the number one martial artist in Luling, MO Baichuan had a lot of socializing to do, both in the Jianghu and in the government. In the past, everyone would hear about some great thing Master MO had done or some high-profile person he had met every few months. But for the past two years, all such news had disappeared. Could it be that Master MO was really injured by Fang Tianying? Was he absent for these two years because he was recuperating? These doubts and speculations rose in everyone¡¯s hearts, making them think deeply. But the fortuneteller was quite tactful and provided an answer immediately after posing the question. ¡°So, as I said, the reason for MO Baichuan¡¯s silence is not because he is cultivating his mind and nourishing his nature, but because he was seriously injured, unable to move, and could only linger on his deathbed.¡± This fortuneteller had a rather impolite way of speaking, no reverence for a Sect Leader, and his words were always full of attack: ¡°And now, do you see all those Jianghu people flocking to Luling? Let me tell you, these Jianghu people, they¡¯re actually here for a funeral.¡± Because after two years of endurance, MO Baichuan finally couldn¡¯t hold on and passed away not long ago.¡± The news has just been suppressed and hasn¡¯t gotten out, so you wouldn¡¯t know. ¡± Bang! It felt like a deafening thunder had exploded in their minds. Everyone was shocked by this news and stunned. MO Baichuan is dead? The Sect Leader of Iron Sword Sect is dead? Lu Yuan was also startled by this news. He never expected that the ending of the fortuneteller¡¯s story would take such a dramatic twist. However, if MO Baichuan is indeed dead, it would explain some of the chaos in Luling at the moment. The biggest sect in Luling has lost its head, at the key moment of power transition, bound to stir many hearts in the martial arts world. ¡°No, something¡¯s off.¡± As he pondered, Lu Yuan felt like he was missing something. With a frown, he turned his eyes to the fortuneteller, who was hounded and questioned by a few other customers in the hall. Not everyone could accept that MO Baichuan was dead. Dead, dead¡­ Upon thinking this, Lu Yuan realized, ¡°Of course, MO Baichuan¡¯s death and the changing of the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s leadership are major events. But even so, it wouldn¡¯t cause all the factions in Luling to gather forces, and the martial arts world to be filled with the smell of gunpowder. And the martial artists from other places have also come here. If they were here to attend MO Baichuan¡¯s funeral and bid him farewell, they shouldn¡¯t be so worked up. But why are they acting like enemies, people from different places meeting for the first time, yet immediately fighting to the death? This scene seems like Luling¡¯s martial arts world is about to undergo a reshuffle. ¡®l¡¯nat¡¯s wny various tactlons are gearing up tor war like madmen. outlanders are also filled with anger, not seeing eye to eye with each other. Could there be a problem with the succession of Iron Sword Sect?¡± After threading together all information, Lu Yuan quickly noticed the unusual things. A civil war might break out within the Iron Sword Sect. This was the conclusion he¡¯d come to after weighing his thoughts. With the conclusion in mind, Lu Yuan watched the under-fire fortuneteller with a deep gaze. This man knew too much and his words heavily criticized MO Baichuan. But he didn¡¯t involve the Iron Sword Sect too much. This attitude, if said there¡¯s no problem, that¡¯d really be an anomaly¡± ¡°So there¡¯s someone behind him, possibly even someone from within the Iron Sword Sect.¡± After deeply observing the fortuneteller, Lu Yuan took a sip of his wine, left some silver taels, turned around, and left.. Chapter 78 - Chapter 78: Chapter 57: Zhou Ze Seeks Help Chapter 78: Chapter 57: Zhou Ze Seeks Help Translator: 549690339 After leaving the tavern, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t go home but headed straight outside the town. The waters of Jianghu are too deep. Conflicts have arisen again, and it even involves the internal strife within the Iron Sword Sect, which seems unlikely to be resolved peacefully. As the leader of Luling¡¯s martial arts world, when Iron Sword Sect is in chaos, the entire Luling will be in chaos as well. Once the chaos starts, no one knows when it will end. So, Lu Yuan planned to make another trip to the county town to get some herbs from Doctor Zhou, just in case they become hard to buy once chaos erupts. He would buy enough herbs for a year and then stay at home to practice martial arts in seclusion. Regardless of whether the Iron Sword Sect will eventually fall into internal strife or if the Luling martial arts world will go to war, as long as he stays at home, how could the chaos outside still affect him? This territory is still ruled by Da Yue! As long as the court and the officials are present, the sky of Luling couldn¡¯t be overturned. Upon arriving at the county town again, Lu Yuan could clearly feel the atmosphere here was different. First, at the city gate. Originally, there were only a few officials guarding the gate, but now there were more than ten men in black. Just by looking at their outfits, one could tell they belonged to the Black Wolf Gang. These Black Wolf Gang members stood on both sides of the gate, staring fiercely at every passerby who entered or exited, as if they wanted to eat them alive. ¡°Lu Yuan!¡± As he was about to enter the town, someone called out his name. Turning his head, he saw Scarface. ¡°What¡¯s the matter?¡± Previously, he wasn¡¯t afraid of this small gang leader even after only opening one meridian. Now that he has reached the third meridian, being considered a good hand among the Jianghu, he looked down on this little punk even more. ¡°You¡­¡± Scarface was infuriated when he saw his nemesis looking indifferent. He wanted to attack, but considering Lu Yuan¡¯s strength, he didn¡¯t dare to. However, their posture caught the attention of someone nearby¡ªa slightly thin middle-aged man from the Black Wolf Gang. He took a couple of steps forward and asked Lu Yuan, ¡°May I know your name, sir?¡± Lu Yuan glanced at the middle-aged man, seeing that his demeanor was reserved, his back strong, and his stance steady¡ªa clear sign of a skilled martial artist. However, facing this man, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t feel threatened at all. He probably had only opened one or two meridians and wasn¡¯t worth fearing. Therefore, Lu Yuan calmly replied, ¡°I¡¯m just an insignificant man named Lu Yuan. Who might you be?¡± The middle-aged man saw that Lu Yuan didn¡¯t want to reveal much about himself and didn¡¯t press on. He smiled and said, ¡°My name is Tian Mao, an elder of the Black Wolf Gang.¡± ¡°Elder Tian.¡± Lu Yuan clasped his hands and asked, ¡°Is there anything else? I¡¯m still waiting to enter the city.¡± Tian Mao stared deeply at him and then stepped back, gesturing with his hand, ¡°No, please go ahead.¡± Lu Yuan nodded and walked away, disappearing into the city streets in a blink of an eye. After he left, Scarface approached Tian Mao and said in confusion, ¡°Elder, should we just let him go like that?¡± Tian Mao glanced at his subordinate and snorted, ¡°What else can we do? This man¡¯s inner Qi is well-hidden, and his steps are like a swallow, clearly a master with considerable inner energy. To me, he seems no less skilled than a few of our vice leaders. Do you want to mess with someone like that?¡± Scarface could hardly believe what he heard, ¡°Are you saying that he¡¯s already a third-rate master?¡± ¡°Most likely,¡± Tian Mao nodded and then asked once more, ¡°Was he really just a mountain hunter a few years ago?¡± Scarface responded blankly, ¡°Yes. Back then, he had to call me ¡®Master.¡¯ He was definitely a hunter.¡± Tian Mao frowned, ¡°That¡¯s strange. How could a mere hunter achieve the realm of a third-rate master in just three or four years? How many vice leaders in our gang spent over a decade or even two decades to reach that level? Could it be that this kid has some exceptional talent for martial arts and had some fortuitous encounters, which allowed him to improve so quickly?¡± The Black Wolf Gang elder¡¯s thoughts were in disarray, but he couldn¡¯t figure it out no matter how hard he tried. In a state of confusion, he simply ordered a few of his subordinates, ¡°Remember, if you see this Lu Yuan, never provoke him. If anyone offends him and brings trouble, you know the consequences.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± The Black Wolf Gang members immediately nodded in agreement. Scarface nodded his head like pounding garlic. He knew that when the elder was giving orders to his subordinates, they were mainly directed at him, and he dared not to take it lightly. In this process, Lu Yuan¡¯s importance in the minds of these Black Wolf Gang members suddenly approached that of the vice leaders in the gang. He became someone who should not be offended. After entering the city, the streets were still bustling with people, as prosperous as ever. However, underneath all the prosperity, one could vaguely sense a turbulent undercurrent and a hint of murderous atmosphere lurking beneath. As for the source of these abnormalities. ¡°Not only at the city gate, but there are also more Black Wolf Gang members on the streets,¡± Lu Yuan observed as he watched the groups of three to five patrolling gang members, becoming more certain about his speculation concerning the internal conflict within the Iron Sword Sect. If it weren¡¯t for something as significant as an internal conflict, the Black Wolf Gang located in a remote area wouldn¡¯t be so tense. With this in mind, he quickly arrived at the Medical Clinic. Upon arriving at the Medical Clinic. As soon as he entered the door, Lu Yuan noticed that something was wrong with the atmosphere. At that moment, there was a patient in the clinic, whom Dr. Zhou was diagnosing, but his face didn¡¯t have the usual cheerfulness. Instead, it was filled with worry. His attitude made the consulting patient feel uneasy. However, everyone could tell that Dr. Zhou wasn¡¯t worrying about the disease, but rather he had something on his mind. Therefore, even though the patient felt uncertain, they managed to maintain a level of composure and continued with the consultation. The tense consultation finally ended, under the strange state of the doctor¡¯s worrying and the patient¡¯s uneasiness. After finding out the cause of the illness and receiving the prescription, the patient seemed relieved, and quickly left, not wanting to remain in this unnerving place any longer. It was at this moment that Zhou Ze, who had been distracted all along, finally noticed the presence of another person in his clinic. ¡°Lu Yuan.¡± Seeing him, Zhou Ze did not call him ¡°Young Lu¡± as he had in the past but simply greeted him hoarsely. ¡°Dr. Zhou.¡± Lu Yuan looked at Zhou Ze and noticed something was wrong with him. He couldn¡¯t help but ask worriedly, ¡°What happened? Where¡¯s Xiaoqing?¡± He looked around. Zhou Qing, who should have been helping in the hall, was not there and nowhere to be found. ¡°Xiaoqing¡­¡± At the sound of his son¡¯s name, Zhou Ze came back to his senses, but his face became even paler. He subconsciously wanted to glance in a particular direction but held it back. He simply said weakly, ¡°He¡¯s in the backyard. Accompanying his wife.¡± Seeing Dr. Zhou¡¯s performance, Lu Yuan had even more questions. After glancing around, he leaned in a little, and whispered, ¡°Dr. Zhou, what on earth happened? Is there anything I can do to help?¡± ¡°Help?¡± Zhou Ze looked at Lu Yuan, his pupils moved, and the lifeless look in his eyes suddenly gained some shine, ¡°Yes, you can help. You can help me.¡± He whispered a few more words, but his eyes grew brighter. It was as if he had seen the light and grasped hope. Zhou Ze subconsciously looked around, and after making sure everything was safe, he leaned in a little more and whispered, ¡°Save me, save my family..¡± Chapter 79 - Chapter 79: Chapter 58: Being Kidnapped Chapter 79: Chapter 58: Being Kidnapped Translator: 549690339 Save me? Lu Yuan never expected that when he asked Dr. Zhou if he needed help, he would get such an answer. But after reacting, just like Zhou Ze just now, he subconsciously glanced around. When he had made a full circle, and confirmed that he had discovered nothing unusual, he dared to look back at Dr. Zhou and cautiously asked, ¡°Save you, Dr. Zhou? What do you mean?¡± ¡°My family is being held hostage. The person is in the backyard right now, Xiaoqing and Huaping are being held hostage by him.¡± Zhou Ze quickly explained the current situation. ¡°Who is the person?¡± Lu Yuan asked. ¡°I don¡¯t know.¡± Zhou Ze shook his head, and then lowered his voice even more, ¡°But that person is a martial arts expert. I¡¯ve treated countless people in the Jianghu martial arts world and seen many experts, so I have some eye for it. But among the people I¡¯ve treated, very few can compare to that person.¡± At this point, Zhou Ze recalled, ¡°If I really had to make a comparison, the leader of the Black Wolf Gang gives me a similar feeling as that person.¡± ¡°The leader of the Black Wolf Gang feels the same as that person?¡± Lu Yuan was surprised, with his expression changing. The leader of the Black Wolf Gang was a second-class martial artist in the Jianghu world who had cultivated six or more meridians. Although Lu Yuan now had minor success in martial arts, he had only just unlocked three meridians, making his strength barely third-rate. ¡®How did Zhou Ze provoke such a person?¡¯ For a while, Lu Yuan felt like sitting on pins and needles, and almost wanted to flee. Luckily, he somewhat cared for his friendship with Zhou Ze and suppressed the urge to run away, managing to calm down and hear the rest. However, in his heart, he was already considering how to refuse Dr. Zhou later. This was not because Lu Yuan didn¡¯t value his relationship with Zhou, but because asking a third-rate martial artist like himself to deal with a second-rate expert seemed like a suicide mission. Zhou Ze was very clever and had seen countless people, so he immediately realized what Lu Yuan was thinking. In his urgency, Zhou Ze hurriedly said, ¡°I¡¯m not asking you to die, but you genuinely have a chance to save me. The person I mentioned is seriously injured right now, which is why he came to my house to force me to treat him. He may be a second-rate expert, but he¡¯s suffered more than a dozen wounds from swords, and his internal organs have been severely hit, causing his inner strength to scatter. If he can use two or three percent of his strength, that would be considered impressive.¡± ¡°Seriously injured, can only use two or three percent of his strength¡­¡± When Lu Yuan heard this, his tone became a bit more hesitant. Facing a second-rate expert who was seriously injurer, given his current third-rate strength, there was indeed a chance to kill. But while there was a chance, there was still risk involved. A seriously injured second-rate expert was not easy to kill. One misstep could cost him his life. As a person pursuing longevity, he hated taking risks the most, so after weighing the risks in his heart, he decided to refuse. Although doing so would be somewhat unfair to Zhou Ze¡¯s family. However, friendship is one thing and life is another; the two cannot be mixed together. ¡°Dr. Zhou, it¡¯s not that I¡­¡± Lu Yuan tried to refuse. ¡°I have Seven-step Fragrance.¡± To save his own life, Zhou Ze couldn¡¯t care less and added, ¡°I have a large amount of Seven-step Fragrance stored at home, some of which I have carefully prepared. It is absolutely colorless and tasteless when added to food and drink. I can drug that person, and when he¡¯s been affected by the sedative and his limbs are weak, you can strike from the side. Facing a drugged person, you should have some confidence, right?¡± Zhou Ze looked at Lu Yuan expectantly. In fact, using the Seven-step Fragrance to drug that person had been crossing his mind. But for the effectiveness of the sedative, although Zhou Ze had tested it and it could easily drug a strong bull, he wasn¡¯t sure if it would work on a second-rate martial artist from the Jianghu world. After all, a second-rate expert¡¯s inner strength was plentiful enough to resist ordinary sedatives and poisons. Whether the Seven-step Fragrance would work on such a person was a question mark. With his family¡¯s safety at stake, Zhou Ze didn¡¯t dare gamble. It wasn¡¯t until he met Lu Yuan today that he saw some hope and decided on this plan. ¡°If the sedative will help, then indeed, I have confidence.¡± Lu Yuan was convinced. He also possessed the Seven-step Fragrance and even once experimented with it on himself, so he was well aware of the powerful and domineering nature of this sedative. It really made people collapse within seven steps. Although inner strength could somewhat resist the effects of sedatives, the second-rate expert who was holding the Zhou family hostage was seriously injured. Heavy injuries coupled with a sedative, if he still couldn¡¯t kill the enemy, then his martial arts practice would have been in vain. Thinking of the help Zhou Ze had given him over the years, Lu Yuan nodded and said, ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll do it.¡± ¡°Good.¡± Zhou Ze¡¯s face lit up with excitement, and he immediately said, ¡°You should hide around my house first. At noon, I will need to prepare the medicine for that person, and I will seize the opportunity to add the sedative to the medicinal soup. Once he drinks it, I will blow the whistle, and you can burst in from the outside and eliminate the bandit.¡± Dr. Zhou had been planning to get rid of the bandit for a long time. Right after Lu Yuan agreed, he immediately laid out a complete plan. ¡°No problem.¡± Lu Yuan had no objections. Although the plan was simple, it had to be admitted that it was quite effective, with a high chance of success. Moreover, Zhou Ze was the one who proposed the plan, and since it pertained to the safety of his entire family, Lu Yuan believed that the doctor would not dare to be careless or negligent in this regard. After finalizing the plan to eliminate the bandit, the two immediately went their separate ways. Lu Yuan turned around and exited the medical clinic, glanced at the sky, and realized that there wasn¡¯t much time left before noon. He dared not delay any longer, so he went around to the alley behind the clinic, found a relatively concealed spot, and hid there, staring closely at the direction of the clinic¡¯s backyard. According to the agreement, when he heard the whistle from the backyard, he would barge in and kill the bandit holding the Zhou family hostage. While waiting, Lu Yuan also began adjusting his Inner Qi, fine-tuning his state to Its pertect peak. Even though the plan was to face an injured and drugged second-rate expert soon, which should not be difficult, one must still be cautious and vigilant when dealing with a second-rate expert. ¡®Actually, the best way to deal with such people is not to get close, but to use a strong bow and crossbow to shoot from a distance. It¡¯s a pity that we¡¯re in the city now, and I cannot bring my Iron Body Bow with me, otherwise, a few arrows would save a lot of trouble.¡¯ He sighed in his heart, regretful that he could not face the enemy with his best methods. While Lu Yuan made his preparations, Dr. Zhou also began his own actions on the other side. In the front hall, after Lu Yuan left, there were no more patients. Zhou Ze then followed his usual routine and shut the door of the clinic, heading to the backyard through the back door. The backyard of his house was quite large, with two sections. The front section was full of various herbs drying in the sun, and there were several rooms on the side used for storing herbs. In the back section, that was where the Zhou family¡¯s living quarters were located. As soon as he entered the yard, he saw a figure sitting at a stone table in front of him, who, upon hearing the noise, opened his eyes and looked over.. Chapter 80 - Chapter 80: Chapter 59: You Are Right Chapter 80: Chapter 59: You Are Right Translator: 549690339 ¡°No more patients?¡± A cold voice came from the figure at the stone table. Zhou Ze looked over and saw a man with sword-like eyebrows and starry eyes, a resolute face, and dressed in blue clothes who looked like a righteous young martial artist in Jianghu. Yet it was this man, who appeared to be a Jianghu youngster, who had taken his whole family hostage and forced him to treat his injuries under the threat of their lives. Filled with hatred in his heart, Zhou Ze dared not show any on his face and respectfully replied, ¡°Yes, the patient has just been treated. I will prepare the medicinal soup for you.¡± The man in blue nodded, ¡°Go ahead.¡± Preparing medicine was not originally Zhou Ze¡¯s responsibility; his son Zhou Qing could handle it. However, a few days ago, this man suddenly appeared in their house and directly took Zhou Ze¡¯s daughter-in-law, Tang Huaping, hostage. Young and impulsive, Zhou Qing could not bear to see his pregnant wife being held hostage and directly wanted to fight the man. The result was needless to say. Facing a second-rate martial arts expert, Zhou Qing, a man who had never practiced martial arts, was severely injured, with countless broken bones throughout his body. Now, thanks to Zhou Ze¡¯s rescue, Zhou Qing¡¯s life was no longer in danger, but it would take at least half a year for him to recover from his injuries. To prepare a medicinal soup that could treat the internal injuries of a martial arts expert was not a simple task; one needed to have some knowledge of medical herbs and control the heat properly. So, the task of preparing medicine fell into Zhou Ze¡¯s hands, as his daughter-in-law Tang Huaping was unable to do it. But because of this, he had the opportunity to add a sedative to the medicine. In the kitchen, Tang Huaping was preparing lunch. The young pregnant woman glanced at her father-in-law with an expression full of worry and fear, ¡°Father.¡± ¡°It¡¯s fine, go on with your cooking.¡± Zhou Ze nodded at her reassuringly, then lit the stove to begin preparing the medicinal soup. Preparing medicine takes a lot of time. Tang Huaping finished cooking lunch, while Zhou Ze was still only halfway through the medicine preparation. She took the cooked meal out to the man in blue clothes. Zhou Ze remained in the kitchen, taking advantage of the absence of people. From his pocket, he took out a prepared pouch of Seven-step fragrance and poured it into the soup. Watching the powdery substance dissolve into the thick black bitter soup, his eyes flashed with satisfaction, but he quickly hid it. Continuing to add the herbs in order and after a while, the medicinal soup was finally ready. Instead of serving it right away, Zhou Ze estimated the time, waiting for when the man in blue was at his most relaxed and sluggish after eating his meal. Only then did he pour out the medicinal soup and serve it. ¡°Your medicine is ready.¡± Zhou Ze set the soup on the table and stood to the side, his face maintaining its usual dull calm, but his heart beating rapidly. The man in blue picked up the medicine and sniffed it at the tip of his nose. As always, the bitter, spicy, and pungent smell had no abnormalities. But he still cautiously glanced at Zhou Ze, but it was impossible to see anything from the old fox¡¯s face, so he soon withdrew his gaze. ¡°You may leave.¡± The man in blue waved his hand, signaling Zhou Ze to leave. He wanted to recuperate after taking the medicine and did not want anyone around. Zhou Ze obediently turned to leave, and as he did so, he saw from the corner of his eye that the man in blue had already drunk the medicine. Upon seeing this, his heart beat even faster. One step, two steps, three steps¡­ Zhou Ze counted his steps and waited for the effects of the drug to take effect. According to past experiments, the sedative would take effect after about seven steps, which is the origin of the name Seven-step fragrance. But he had only taken five steps when he suddenly saw the man in blue beside him abruptly swing his sleeve, splashing the soup on the table onto the ground. Upon hearing the noise, Zhou Ze quickly turned his head. Then, he saw the man in blue¡¯s pale face distort in an instant, his eyes filled with murderous rage, as he roared, ¡°You dared to poison me!¡± With that, he drew the Long Sword from his waist, leaped forward and thrust it straight at Zhou Ze. Facing the sudden attack of a second-rate martial arts expert, an ordinary person like Zhou Ze had no chance to dodge, and he could only watch helplessly as the sword pierced his chest. With a soft ripping sound, a wave of intense pain flooded his senses. As the Long Sword was pulled out, Zhou Ze¡¯s body fell to the ground. The original judgment made by Doctor Zhou was correct. Even with the help of sedatives, ordinary people like him had no power to resist in the face of a true martial arts expert. Just like now, even with a plan in place. But when it came time to execute it, mistakes were made due to a lack of strength. And the price was his own life. Lying on the ground, Zhou Ze looked up at the sky, his eyes gradually becoming unfocused as he lost himself in his thoughts. After stabbing Zhou Ze, who had poisoned him, the man in blue clothes suddenly felt dizzy, with a wave of nausea coming over him, and his limbs gradually growing weak. The intense activity just now had spread the sedative throughout his body, and now was the time for it to take full effect. At that moment, Tang Huaping, who had been in the kitchen washing dishes, heard the commotion and came out, and let out a scream when she saw her father-in-law killed by a single stroke of the sword at the doorway. Her scream immediately caught the atten tion of the man in blue clothes. At this point, he knew that he had already fallen victim to the sedative and would most likely be knocked unconscious later. If he were to leave a person with a grudge against him at this point, it would undoubtedly be a death sentence after he fell unconscious. And so, he didn¡¯t hesitate. Feeling too dizzy to rush and kill the person, he still raised the Long Sword supporting his body and threw it at the screaming Tang Huaping. He sent the sword out with a grudge, striking Tang Huaping in the abdomen with great force, and the impact sent her, along with the baby in her belly, flying back, and both were pinned to the wall by the sword. Painful moans emanated from her, and fresh blood streamed down. After struggling for a few moments, Zhou family¡¯s daughter-in-law eventually dropped her head in exhaustion. After killing another person, the man in blue clothes still wasn¡¯t satisfied. There was still one more son in this family. Although he was lying on the bed, unable to move, it would still be dangerous to leave him alive. He planned to eliminate this last hidden danger as well. However, as he tried to move his feet, a bigger wave of dizziness came over him, making his steps wobble like a drunk, and his vision darken. The man in blue clothes quickly mobilized his Inner Strength to resist. But just then, a gust of wind came from behind him, causing him to sense danger and try to dodge. But in his current state, there was no way he could do that. He had barely shifted his body when a powerful palm strike hit him squarely in the back. With a loud bang. With a terrifying force accompanied by a domineering Inner Strength, the palm strike directly penetrated the man in blue clothes¡¯ heart meridian, cutting off his life force. His body swayed for a few moments, before crashing to the ground. Lu Yuan, having killed the man in blue clothes with a single palm strike, quickly withdrew his hand and ran to Zhou Ze¡¯s side. ¡°Old Zhou, Old Zhou.¡± He held up Zhou Ze, who was weak and soaked in blood, and called out to him. ¡°Cough, cough¡­¡± Groggily, Zhou Ze regained some clarity, glanced at Lu Yuan, and asked with a cough, ¡°Is that guy dead?¡± ¡°Dead.¡± ¡°Then ¡­ good, Xiaoqing ¡­ is he alright?¡± ¡°He¡¯s fine.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s expression was full of grief. ¡°Thank you.¡± Feeling relieved that his son was safe, Zhou Ze turned to look at his sorrowful friend, and with great difficulty, managed a smile. ¡°You were right. In this world, without martial arts, you can¡¯t even protect your family. I was wrong, learning medicine is useless. It can save others, but not myself. Can I ask you for one more favor?¡± ¡°Speak.¡¯ ¡°Can you take care of Xiaoqing for me?¡± Hope flickered in Zhou Ze¡¯s eyes. ¡°Don¡¯t worry. Xiaoqing is like my little brother, I will take care of him.¡± Lu Yuan nodded solemnly. ¡°That¡¯s good ¡­ that¡¯s good ¡­¡± With a smile on his lips, Zhou Ze¡¯s breath faded away, and he was gone.. Chapter 81 - Chapter 81: Chapter 60: People of Iron Sword Sect Chapter 81: Chapter 60: People of Iron Sword Sect Translator: 549690339 Holding the gradually chilling corpse in his arms, Lu Yuan felt a hint of sadness in his heart, remaining silent and taciturn. In actuality, he had been extremely attentive to the movements in Zhou¡¯s backyard while he waited outside. And so, when Tang Huaping screamed in fright, Lu Yuan managed to respond promptly, killing the man in blue attire. Yet, even so, when faced with Zhou Ze who was at his last breath, he was utterly helpless. The plan was sound. Yet, when put into action, it went awry. Who could have anticipated that the man in blue attire would detect the poison so quickly and act so decisively? He didn¡¯t hesitate for a moment before ending Zhou Ze¡¯s life. Zhou Ze¡¯s plan to poison him first and then alert Lu Yuan to wrap up the situation was in vain. If it hadn¡¯t been for Zhou Ze¡¯s daughter-in-law¡¯s scream which alerted Lu Yuan who had been anxiously waiting, he might have continued to wait until everyone in the courtyard were dead, not hearing the whistle. ¡°Dr. Zhou, Dr. Zhou, you¡¯ve been careful and astute all your life, yet in the end you died at the hands of the martial arts you always belittled and considered useless. Is this fate?¡± Lu Yuan sighed, reaching out to close Zhou Ze¡¯s eyes. For a friend to die before his eyes in such a horrific manner left an awful taste in his mouth. The Jianghu is indeed cruel. Even those who honestly stay at home, dutifully conducting their businesses, never know when disaster will strike and involve the entire family. Dr. Zhou is the most obvious and bloody example of such a scenario. ¡°Thus, my unwavering belief is correct. In this world, one must practice martial arts. Only with martial arts, with strength, can one control their destiny. Otherwise, despite all your contrivances, wealth, and power, you can¡¯t defend your own life against an enemy within three steps.¡± Lu Yuan has long been able to profit from hunting, he could live in comfort with the silver taels he earned. Yet, why hasn¡¯t he done so? Isn¡¯t it because he deeply understands that in this world that respects martial power, mere wealth does not constitute real strength. If you hoard grain, and someone else hoards weapons, your house will become their granary. In this society where the weak are prey to the strong, only by mastering martial arts and concentrating power in oneself can one possess real strength. Other wealth, power, these are but illusions. Consider Zhou Ze¡¯s last words. Saying Lu Yuan was right, it¡¯s not unlike a regret-filled lament having understood this point. Letting down Zhou Ze¡¯s body, Lu Yuan got up and walked to the corpse of the man in blue. As an experienced Hunter, butchering his game after a hunt was instinctive to him. Suppressing the impulse to dismember the corpse in front of him, Lu Yuan began to search the body. In no time, a pile of items appeared on the ground next to him. A bag with silver taels, a silver token, and a scroll. There were only a little over thirty silver taels, Lu Yuan just glanced at it and put it in his robes. Then he picked up the token, flipping it over a few times, his expression becoming somewhat stunned. [Iron Sword] The two large characters stamped on the token were particularly conspicuous. Turning it over, a small sword pattern was printed on the back, and next to it were a few small characters. [Fourteenth Generation True Disciple, Guan Yunfei] ¡°This person is a true disciple of the Iron Sword Sect?¡± Lu Yuan carefully studied the token several times, then took a closer look at the dead man¡¯s hands. After confirming they were those of a swordsman who practiced regularly, his mind went blank. Wasn¡¯t it supposed to be bandits who held Zhou¡¯s family hostage? Wasn¡¯t it supposed to be ruthless murderers who wouldn¡¯t spare even pregnant women? How did it suddenly turn into a true disciple of the Iron Sword Sect? Since when did disciples of the Iron Sword Sect stoop so low that they needed to kidnap doctors¡¯ family members to heal themselves? And how could an Iron Sword Sect disciple¡¯s moral character become so depraved? Many questions and uncertainties attacked Lu Yuan¡¯s mind. But he simply couldn¡¯t afford to seek answers now. Because at this time, Lu Yuan had realized something, something very important. ¡°I killed a true disciple of the Iron Sword Sect.¡± Thinking of this, his vision began to darken. Not because he was cowardly, but because the matter was just too serious. Killing a home-invading thief is quite different from killing a true disciple of the Iron Sword Sect. If Lu Yuan were to kill the former, with his own strength and Zhou¡¯s testimony, he would be considered a hero. He could even go straight to the officials and, who knows, he might be rewarded. As for the latter, even if this Guan Yunfei was a home-invading thief, killing Zhou Ze and Tang Huaping in the process, would Lu Yuan still dare to go to the officials? Death would be certain. ¡°How dare a mere civilian like you, a Hunter, kill one of ours?¡± Lu Yuan could already envision the backlash he¡¯d face if the matter got out. The consequences would undoubtedly be pursuit and execution from both the Iron Sword Sect and the official forces. Looking at Guan Yunfei¡¯s actions, it¡¯s clear. Even the so-called disciples of prominent martial arts sects have such a deplorable character in private. And the Iron Sword Sect that could produce such disciples is also quite obvious. Lu Yuan would not gamble on them deciding not to pursue him for killing their member due to their feelings of guilt. Placing one¡¯s fate in the hands of others is an extremely foolish thing to do, no matter how you look at it. One needs to control their own fate. That¡¯s the choice a wise person would make. ¡°It looks like I¡¯ll have to apologize to Dr. Zhou.¡± Lu Yuan put away the token, his gaze falling on the bodies next to him, feeling helpless. Originally, he planned to report to the authorities and let Zhou Qing handle his father¡¯s affairs slowly after approval from the officials. But now that Guan Yunfei¡¯s identity is clear, this plan cannot be carried out. This true disciple of Iron Sword Sect died at Zhou¡¯s house, no doubt. Basing only on this point, Zhou Qing can¡¯t escape involvement. So Zhao Qing being implicated, no, it should be said that Lu Yuan was implicated by Zhou¡¯s family, could be ascertained. Hence, if he really were to report this to the officials, not only would Lu Yuan die, Zhou Qing would not survive either. The choices left to the two of them came down to one, to covertly dispose of the bodies and then flee. ¡°I¡¯ll have to give Xiaoqing a good talk later.¡± Lu Yuan sighs, then picks up the third item he found on Guan Yunfei¡¯s body, the scroll. Upon glancing at the title of the scroll, [Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra], he immediately knew this was a martial arts secret book.. Chapter 82 - Chapter 82: Chapter 61: Replenishing Qj Heart Sutra Chapter 82: Chapter 61: Replenishing Qj Heart Sutra Translator: 549690339 Looking at the ¡°Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra¡± in his hand, Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes instantly became burning and his breathing a little rapid. No wonder he was so excited. Last time, he killed Ma Ji Qing and got a second-rate technique, the ¡°Cloud Palm.¡± Now, a direct disciple of the Iron Sword Sect is dead. Could this ¡°Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra¡± be a higher-level technique? Lu Yuan¡¯s heart was pounding, his hand trembling as he opened the book and started to read the secret manual. Introduction, general principles, meridian circulation, Qi regulation techniques¡­ With each page and sheet of paper, a vast amount of content entered his mind as he flipped through the pages. Finally. A moment later, Lu Yuan gently closed the book and carefully tucked it into his chest, his heart beating wildly, his face full of excitement. ¡°A first-rate mental technique, a first-rate mental technique, I can¡¯t believe I actually got such a chance.¡± Recalling the content he had just read, he could not help but feel overwhelmed. Even though he had only skimmed the surface, Lu Yuan could already confirm that this ¡°Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra¡±¡ªundoubtedly¡ªa top-notch first-rate mental technique. Originally, he was a little worried that the Cloud Palm Heart Method has already reached the third meridian, and the remaining three meridians could be practiced within five or six years. At that time, where would he go to find a new advanced technique? Now it seems that there is no need to look for advanced techniques; just switch to this Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra. ¡°No, switching is possible, but I must not leave the Cloud Palm Method behind,¡± Lu Yuan suppressed his excitement. The ¡°Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra¡± is just a mental technique and does not have corresponding martial arts moves. Practicing this secret technique can only increase one¡¯s inner strength and has no other means of dealing with enemies. However, the ¡°Cloud Palm¡± is different. It not only contains palm skills but also has a corresponding internal cultivation method. Only when the two complement each other can it be called a complete second -rate martial art. With only the ¡°Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra,¡± it can be called a first-rate mental technique, but it is far from being a first-rate martial art. Therefore, while practicing the mental technique, one must not neglect the Cloud Palm skill. Even to complement the palm skill, the Cloud Palm Heart Method must be continued to maximize the power of this martial art. ¡°But with this, the workload has significantly increased.¡± Lu Yuan thought about practicing the Cloud Palm alongside the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra and felt a headache coming. However, he soon felt relieved, ¡°Fortunately, I have longevity and an unlimited lifespan. Otherwise, ordinary people would not be able to handle it.¡± If an ordinary person were to practice two mental techniques simultaneously, it would undoubtedly be an incredibly time-consuming and foolish thing to do. Take the Cloud Palm Heart Method as an example. Ordinary talent cultivation requires three to four years to practice one meridian. Even talented geniuses need two years. Thus, to complete all six meridians, one would need at least twelve years at the earliest. On this basis, you still devote time and energy to learning a new mental technique. Even if the two mental techniques assist each other and can get twice the result with half the effort, it will undoubtedly increase the time for yourself to breakthrough the realm. But a normal person practices martial arts to stand out and make a name for themselves in the Jianghu, enjoying an illustrious life. Who wants to wait until their forties or fifties to achieve great success in martial arts if they can achieve it in their twenties or thirties? Even if they can be successful, how many years can they enjoy success? Therefore, for ordinary martial artists, the best solution is to specialize in one mental technique and other martial arts moves that complement it. Before mastering one mental technique, they will not consider practicing a second one. ¡°So for me right now, Cloud Palm is still the main focus. The Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra can only be a supplementary practice for when I have spare time,¡± said Lu Yuan, organizing his thoughts and making plans for the future. For him at the moment, the most important thing was to improve his strength as much as possible to protect his own life. As for other potential abilities, relying on his long lifespan to endure, he would naturally endure through it. The Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra can be practiced slowly after completing the Cloud Palm and encountering a bottleneck. Thump¡ª Turning his head, he only then realized that the sound was coming from inside the room. ¡°Xiaoqing! ¡± Lu Yuan suddenly woke up and remembered that he had been preoccupied with future plans and secret books. He had forgotten about the only survivor, Zhou Qing, in the house. Feeling a bit ashamed, he hurried towards the room. When he entered the room and came to the side room, he saw Zhou Qing¡¯s struggling body on the ground and the broken stool nearby. ¡°Xiaoqing, are you okay?¡± Lu Yuan quickly went over to help him up and asked with concern. ¡°Brother Lu?¡± Zhou Qing¡¯s voice was very weak. Seeing the visitor, he paused and then immediately asked, ¡°My father and Ping¡¯er, are they all right?¡± Facing Zhou Qing¡¯s hopeful gaze, Lu Yuan hesitated, not knowing what to say. Because no matter what he said, it would be a devastating blow to the young man. However, upon further thought, he decided to tell the truth because the other party had to face it sooner or later: ¡°Doctor Zhou and the others¡­ ¡± A moment later, Lu Yuan recounted his plan with Doctor Zhou, what had just happened, his discovery of Guan Yunfei¡¯s identity, and so on. ¡°That¡¯s it, you should grieve¡­ ¡± Looking at Zhou Qing, who was completely stunned after hearing the whole story, he sighed and patted his shoulder. Zhou Qing suddenly woke up, his eyes red and crazed, ¡°No, you¡¯re lying. My father can¡¯t be dead, Pinger and the child in her stomach can¡¯t be dead. They¡¯re out there, you take me to see them, they¡¯re still alive.¡± Looking at the agitated Zhou Qing, Lu Yuan remained silent. He didn¡¯t say much, only supporting him to walk outside the courtyard. Then¡­ Looking at his father soaked with blood and lying on the ground, and his wife nailed to the wall in the kitchen, Zhou Qing, who was just full of madness, was instantly dazed again. His eyes were lifeless, his face pale, and deathly dull¡­ All the negative words Lu Yuan could think of could be applied to Zhou Qing at this moment. A silent tear slid down the young man¡¯s cheek. This kind of pain from losing one¡¯s family and the pain of extermination, Lu Yuan had not experienced and did not know how to console. At this time, words were merely weak consolation. He could only quietly support him, waiting for him to recover. After a long time. The silent and lifeless Zhou Qing finally made a sound. He whispered hoarsely, emotionlessly asking, ¡°The person who killed my family, Guan Yunfei, is he from the Iron Sword Sect?¡± Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°Yes, he is a direct disciple of the Iron Sword Sect.¡± Zhou Qing hummed, then turned his head to look at Lu Yuan and said, ¡°Brother Lu, I want to learn martial arts.¡± Lu Yuan readily agreed, ¡°Of course, I¡¯ll teach you.¡± Zhou Qing could no longer hold back his tears, crying out loudly, ¡°Father¡­ Ping¡¯er¡­. ¡° Chapter 83 - Chapter 83: Chapter 62: Escaping to the Ends of the Earth Chapter 83: Chapter 62: Escaping to the Ends of the Earth Translator: 549690339 After this cry, Zhou Qing cried for a full hour, until his eyes were swollen, his tears were dry, his throat was hoarse, and his body was tired. Only then did he stop crying. Meanwhile, Lu Yuan was beside him, waiting for a full hour as well. When Zhou Qing¡¯s cry was tired and his mood calmed down a little, he finally spoke up about his own thoughts. ¡°Xiaoqing, I know doing this will make you sad. But I have to tell you that we are in great danger right now. The true disciple of the Iron Sword Sect has died here, and you and I are both involved. If the news gets out, we will face the double pursuit of the Iron Sword Sect and the government.¡± Lu Yuan briefly mentioned the situation the two were in, and then said, ¡°So now what we should do is to deal with the corpses, and then escape the city before anyone else notices, or even leave Luling Prefecture.¡± The Iron Sword Sect¡¯s roots in Luling Prefecture are too deep, intertwined with the local area, and their ears and eyes are everywhere. In this place, even if you hide really well, you can¡¯t avoid being found. So to escape the pursuit of the Iron Sword Sect, it¡¯s best to flee to somewhere the Iron Sword Sect can¡¯t reach, only then can we be safe. After a bout of crying, Zhou Qing¡¯s emotions had also stabilized somewhat, enabling him to think about things. When he heard what Lu Yuan said, he immediately realized something and hurriedly asked, ¡°What about my father and the others? What about their funeral?¡± Lu Yuan said helplessly, ¡°You know.¡± Zhou Qing was stunned, and after a moment of silence, he nodded and said, ¡°I understand. I have to trouble Brother Lu.¡± His body was broken in countless places, and even if he wanted to dispose of the corpses, he was powerless to do so. So these tasks had to be handed over to Lu Yuan for resolution. The solution was simple. Since they couldn¡¯t make too much noise and also wanted to save time, Lu Yuan found a room in the courtyard and simply dug three large holes to bury the three corpses one by one. After burying them and cleaning up the traces, and making sure that there was nothing visible on the surface, he was satisfied with his work. Then he cleaned up the courtyard and kitchen, removed the bloodstains, and finally finished cleaning up the entire scene. By the time all this was done, it was already dark. It was impossible to leave the city at this time, so Lu Yuan simply made a quick dinner, and after he and Zhou Qing finished eating, they went to bed early. When the two woke up the next day, he found Zhou Qing. ¡°We shall leave today.¡± Lu Yuan looked at Zhou Qing, who still had red eyes after a night¡¯s sleep, sighed, and said, ¡°If you want to take anything as a memento, get it now. Also, take any gold, silver, and other valuables with you. Practicing martial arts is very expensive, so if you really want to learn martial arts with me, you can¡¯t do it without money.¡± Zhou Qing was silent for a moment, then said, ¡°I don¡¯t need mementos. As for money, there¡¯s a hidden compartment in the wall next to my father¡¯s bed, where my Zhou family¡¯s savings are stored. There¡¯s also some silver buried under the stone table in the yard. Oh, and there are also some valuable herbs stored in the medicine room. There are some with a hundred-year-old history, which are worth a lot. They are stored separately in redwood boxes, and can also be taken with us.¡± ¡°Alright.¡± Lu Yuan nodded his head, then turned around and searched for everything according to what Zhou Qing said. A moment later, he found all the items, with more than a dozen boxes in his hands, as well as nearly three thousand taels of gold and silver. These were basically all the accumulated wealth of the Zhou family throughout the generations. Of course, the biggest property was this medical clinic, and the countless herbs stored in the clinic, which was the greatest treasure. But since the clinic couldn¡¯t be taken away, they could only sadly take away a small part of the floating wealth. After packing everything up, there was already a cart waiting at the door of the pharmacy. After closing the pharmacy door and locking it, Lu Yuan hung up the prepared sign, which read, ¡°The shop is closed from today.¡± This decision was made last night. Since Doctor Zhou had died, the pharmacy couldn¡¯t continue to operate. In order not to expose this matter, they used a closing sign to stall for as long as possible. Maybe they could really deceive everyone? Carrying Zhou Qing and the bags, the two got on the cart. The carter was an old acquaintance in the city and had known the Zhou family for a long time. Seeing the pharmacy closed, he was somewhat surprised and asked the reason, ¡°Why has Young Doctor Zhou closed the shop?¡± from the carriage, Zhou Qing coughed twice, ¡°A few days ago, I caught a serious illness that my father couldn¡¯t cure, so he went out to find a friend to help. Today, I am going to find my father and follow him to get treatment. So the pharmacy in the city has to be closed for a while. I can only come back and open it again after my illness has been cured. I apologize to everyone.¡± ¡°No problem, no problem.¡± The carter glanced at Zhou Qing, who was pale and shivering with every cough, and had no doubt, believing right away. He hurriedly said, ¡°Young Doctor Zhou, go treat your illness, and get well soon. When you take over Doctor Zhou¡¯s mantle, we will still need you to treat us in the city for decades to come.¡± For generations, the Zhou family had been treating people in the city, especially Doctor Zhou, who was kind, helpful, and had helped countless people in the city. The carter had been helped by him before, so his words were heartfelt. The cart traveled to the city gate without incident but was stopped. After the tax collectors and members of the Black Wolf Gang came to inspect the carriage, Zhou Qing repeated what he had said earlier, and with his appearance that he was about to run out of breath, they really believed him. Adding to that the presence of Lu Yuan, who was not to be provoked by the orders of the Black Wolf Gang elder, no one dared to make things difficult for them, and they were quickly let out of the city. Once they were out of the city, the carter followed Lu Yuan¡¯s instructions and headed to Yangmei Town. Upon arriving in the town, Lu Yuan went home to get the silver and the secret book of Cloud Palm, then returned to the carriage and continued on their way. It was now afternoon, and after the carter had driven for more than an hour, it was getting dark, so they stopped in a small town on the road. On the second day, they let the carter go, found another cart, and continued their journey. They changed carts at the next stop and continued on their way. After changing seven or eight carts and several routes, making sure that no one could track them any longer, Lu Yuan finally relaxed a bit. It couldn¡¯t be helped. The power of the Iron Sword Sect in Luling Prefecture was just too great. Although they¡¯d concealed themselves when they left, who knew whether they would be exposed or not? Without being cautious and careful, they might not even be able to save their lives. ¡°But after doing so much protection and concealment, there shouldn¡¯t be any major issues.¡± Three hundred li to the west of Dayu County, in a small town inn near the border of Luling Prefecture, Lu Yuan looked out at the sparse lights outside the window and felt a bit more at ease.. Chapter 84 - Chapter 84: Chapter 63: Reunion in Changning Chapter 84: Chapter 63: Reunion in Changning Translator: 549690339 By the second day, after swapping to a new carriage, Lu Yuan, accompanied by Zhou Qing, continued their journey. They had now reached the border of Luling Prefecture and even Yuzhang Prefecture. Heading west from here, they would be outside the prefecture boundary within fifty miles. As they could see their hometown getting further and further away, the rotating wheels of the carriage made the car shake rhythmically. Zhou Qing, who had been silent for the past few days, finally couldn¡¯t help his curiosity and asked, ¡°Brother Lu, where are we heading?¡± Lu Yuan glanced at the coachman driving outside. They were about to leave the territory of the Iron Sword Sect in Luling Prefecture, which somehow relieved him. Of course, even though he felt slightly relaxed, he remained vigilant. Consequently, he lowered his voice to a volume that the outside coachman could not hear and said, ¡°I have a good friend in Dongting Prefecture, who holds an official position there. Aren¡¯t we seeking refuge? Fortunately, I haven¡¯t seen this friend of mine for over two years, so we can go seek refuge with him.¡± The said friend was naturally Sun Siwen. Ever since the day he decided to escape, the first place Lu Yuan thought of escaping to was Dongting Prefecture. Firstly, because it didn¡¯t fall under the same Jianghu power as Luling Prefecture. Once there, they could effectively avoid pursuit by the Iron Sword Sect. Secondly, Sun Siwen was an official there. Even though he was only a petty official, seeking refuge in him could offer some protection. The third reason was of course the fact that having not seen his friend for two years, Lu Yuan somewhat missed him. Visiting him now was a perfect opportunity to honor the promise he made back then. Zhou Qing nodded. Having learned their destination, he did not ask any further. At this time, Lu Yuan paid no more attention to him and instead lost himself in thought, looking at the scenery receding outside the carriage window. ¡°I wonder what Brother Sun looks like now after not seeing him for two years?¡± He pictured the scene when the two would reunite in a while, a smile appeared on his face, and he was pleased. Dongting was a hilly region, with many uneven hills and valleys can be seen everywhere. There were steep hills and gentle valleys, some of which were accessible bv vehicles. while others didn¡¯t even have Dedestrian oaths. There were countless streams flowing through the region, with varying water speeds. Some streams were navigable, while others could only be crossed by suspension bridges. Lu Yuan, with Zhou Qing, traveled through these mountains and rivers, sometimes by carriage, sometimes by boat, sometimes on foot. They experienced different landscapes and felt overwhelmed by the grandeur of nature and human power. The fascinating scenes slowed their travel speed a bit. Fortunately, after more than twenty days of circling around, they finally reached their destination, Changning County, where Sun Siwen held his post. Changning County, located in the western part of Dongting Prefecture, was one of the poorest counties in the prefecture, even by its own standards. Upon entering the city, Lu Yuan felt this deeply. There were few people on the streets, many of whom had patches on their clothes, few were dressed in silk and satin. Even more surprising was the sight of several barbarians wearing foreign attire or animal skins mingling among the people. The locals seemed to have gotten used to this and comfortably carried on their business with these barbarians without any discomfort. The local dialect was also interesting. In Yuzhang Prefecture, whether in the city or the countryside, everyone communicated in the official language of Da Yue. People from all prefectures and counties could communicate without barriers. However, in Changning County, fewer people spoke the language of Da Yue. This unfamiliar language, coupled with barbarians wearing exotic attires, mixed in the crowd, gave Lu Yuan a strangely vivid sense of being in a foreign land. While it was mildly discomforting, he was intrigued by this exotic culture. Yet, Lu Yuan had Zhou Qing and loads of baggage with him at the moment, and they were not there for a visit. The priority was to find Sun Siwen quickly and settle down. Fortunately, it was the middle of the month, a rest day for the government officials. Lu Yuan gave the coachman an address, and they headed towards Sun Siwen¡¯s home. The city of Changning Couny wasn¡¯t large , just five or six streets. After passing two alleys, they quickly arrived at the Changning Fang in the west part of the city. This was where the rich and officials of the city lived. As the education official, Sun Siwen had a residence arranged by the government and was living there. Just as Lu Yuan approached the address, he saw Sun Siwen coming out of his house wearing casual blue clothes, looking like he was about to go somewhere. He immediately shouted, ¡°Brother Sun!¡± When Sun Siwen heard the familiar voice, he turned around to see Lu Yuan standing next to a carriage, smiling at him. He was momentarily stunned, and then ran over with a look of surprise on his face, ¡°Brother Lu.¡¯ Sun Siwen grabbed his friend¡¯s hand and looked him up and down, then said happily, ¡°Ever since we parted two years ago, I¡¯ve been wondering when Brother Lu would come to visit me. Now after waiting for so long, day and night, you¡¯ve finally arrived.¡± Lu Yuan laughed, ¡°Didn¡¯t I say that I would come to see you when I had time? However, now that Brother Sun is an official, I hope you won¡¯t mind me, a poor friend, coming to freeloading off you?¡± Sun Siwen pretended to be angry, ¡°Brother Lu, what kind of person do you think I am? We met during hard times, as close as brothers. What does it matter if one of us is an official or a commoner? Come on, I¡¯ve already reserved a room for you at my home.¡± But when he opened the trunk, he was stunned to find someone else sitting inside, looking quite sickly. ¡°I knew Brother Sun hasn¡¯t changed.¡± Lu Yuan laughed loudly, walked into the carriage, helped Zhou Qing out, and then introduced him to the puzzled-looking Sun Siwen. ¡°This is Zhou Qing, the son of a good friend of mine. Now that his father has passed away, I have promised to look after him.¡± Sun Siwen paused for a moment, then realized who Lu Yuan was referring to. He looked at Zhou Qing with a sympathetic expression, ¡°Dr. Zhou once treated my father¡¯s illness. I knew him to be a skilled and kind-hearted palace doctor, I didn¡¯t expect that he has passed away. Don¡¯t worry, since Lu Yuan has made it his mission to look after you, as Lu Yuan¡¯s friend, I will treat you as my nephew. From now on, you are my family, so just stay at our place in peace.¡± Upon hearing that Sun Siwen was an old friend of Dr. Zhou, Zhou Qing was again reminded of his father, and his previously calm mood turned sorrowful again, his eyes red. However, having experienced the sorrowful past few days, he was able to hold back his tears. ¡°That¡¯s enough, we¡¯re in a new place, let¡¯s leave the past behind.¡± Lu Yuan patted his shoulder, gave some comforting words, then turned to Sun Siwen and said, ¡°Brother Sun, help me with the luggage, I need to support Xiaoqing, I can¡¯t carry everything.¡± ¡°Alright.¡± Sun Siwen replied, took the luggage, and then led the way.. Chapter 85 - Chapter 85: Chapter 64: Never Forget the Original Intention Chapter 85: Chapter 64: Never Forget the Original Intention Translator: 549690339 The official residence arranged for Sun Siwen by the county government was very large, with three courtyards, sixteen rooms, and a small garden in the back yard. Such a big place could not only accommodate two more people, but also another ten, although it would be a bit crowded. Entering the courtyard, Sun Siwen immediately called for help. An old man and an old woman came over, calling him an official. The old man quickly took the luggage from his hands. ¡°Chunmama, please clean up two rooms quickly. My good friend is coming and will be staying at home. Lao Gu, you help with the luggage.¡± The two hurriedly responded and went to work. Sun Siwen turned to Lu Yuan and said, ¡°Chunmama and Lao Gu are the parents of that good student I told you about. Their family is poor, and in their early years, they sold almost all their property to support their son¡¯s education. When I arrived in Changning County, their family had already been forced to sell their house by debt and were about to be homeless. At that time, I was investigating the family situation of the students in the county school. After learning about it, I took the responsibility of bringing them to my house and letting the student¡¯s family live with me. It just so happened that I was alone in Changning, and there was no one to take care of me on weekdays, so I let them help with cooking and cleaning for one silver tael a month. In this way, I can solve my daily trivial matters and help the student solve their worries, which is a beautiful talk.¡± With a complacent tone, Sun Siwen proudly boasted to Lu Yuan at the end. Indeed, this story of good deeds and insightful discernment of talent made our Grand Tutor Sun feel quite proud and inspiring. Lu Yuan looked at his friend with amusement, half teasing and half serious, and said, ¡°Brother Sun is indeed dedicated. No wonder you got a good evaluation at the end of the year for the prefecture and were promoted. In the future, if Brother Sun can really teach a few Juren and Jinshi, I¡¯m afraid today¡¯s story will become an allusion and widely praised by the literati all over the world.¡± At that time, Brother Sun would be considered famous for all ages.¡± ¡°Ha ha!¡± Sun Siwen laughed heartily when he heard this. In front of his friend, he always seemed relaxed and without any airs, unlike on weekdays: ¡°What famous for all ages? Song Yun is just a newly promoted scholar, not even a Juren yet, still far away from becoming one. To be famous for all ages, one must at least be a jinshi ranked Prime Minister.¡± My goodness. Lu Yuan was just joking around, but Grand Tutor Sun took it seriously. He wasn¡¯t even interested in Juren, aiming directly for jinshi Prime Minister. Could it be that he really thought he could teach someone like that? Looking seriously at his friend¡¯s expression, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel a little worried. His friend was actually serious. ¡®Could it be that this good seedling is really so good that it can make Brother Sun think he has the talent to be a jinshi Prime Minister?¡¯ He didn¡¯t think it was because Sun Siwen¡¯s teaching ability was that strong, and he knew how much his friend weighed. He believed that Sun Siwen knew his limits. So the only thing that could give him this much confidence was that good seedling student. ¡®That student is called Song Yun, right?¡¯ For a moment, Lu Yuan developed a strong interest in Sun Siwen¡¯s unseen student. But there was no hurry, as they were all living under the same roof, they could slowly get to know each other later. At this time, the room was tidied up, and Lu Yuan first helped Lu Qing to his room and put away his luggage. Then he turned around and left to get his own stuff. By noon, Sun Siwen had Chunmama prepare a table of good food, and the long-separated friends chatted happily in the backyard garden, just like old times. They had not met for two years, and both had a lot to talk about. If they could, they would continue lying around until evening, and even stay up all night. But just after noon, Lu Yuan took the initiative to stop the feast. The reason? He needed to find a doctor for Zhou Qing and have him checked. When they left Dayu County, Zhou Qing had already suffered serious injuries, with broken bones all over his body, unable to move even by himself. Although Lu Yuan had tried his best to choose to travel by carriage during the month to reduce Zhou Qing¡¯s pain, the shock absorption function of the carriages in those years was just passable. So after nearly a thousand miles of travel, Zhou Qing, instead of recovering, would consider it good if his body did not deteriorate. If it wasn¡¯t for occasionally taking him to see a doctor on the road and treating his injuries, this only son left by Dr. Zhou might have died halfway before reaching Changning County. Fortunately, now that they had arrived in Changning and settled down, they no longer had to run around, and Zhou Qing could finally have a good rest and recuperate. When Sun Siwen heard that they were looking for a doctor for Zhou Qing, he knew the matter was urgent, so he stopped drinking and asked, ¡°Brother Lu, I see that Xiaoqing is still young and unable to move. What kind of illness is this that prevents him from walking even with help?¡± There was nothing to hide from his friend, so Lu Yuan directly told Sun about Zhou¡¯s family¡¯s situation: ¡°That day¡­¡± A little while later, after Sun Siwen heard the whole story, he was furious and slammed his hand on the table, cursing, ¡°I said long ago that those Jianghu martial artists do not obey the king¡¯s law, indulge in private fights, hurt many lives, and are the source of chaos. The Zhou family practiced medicine for good, benefited one side, and what a great kindness they were! Yet in the end, they fell victim to the evil hands of these bandits. For such bandits, if I truly one day have the opportunity to enter the imperial court, I will request for the emperor to ban the use of force. I will clean up those Jianghu criminals one by one and restore peace to the world.¡± Sun Siwen was reminded of the courtesan who had been abducted in front of him in Fu City back then. Now hearing of Zhou Qing¡¯s ordeal, he couldn¡¯t help but feel angry and empathetic. He turned to Lu Yuan and said, ¡°Brother Lu, you can rest assured that you two can live with me. What Iron Sword Sect? I just want to see if this so-called righteous sect dares to lay a hand on a court-appointed official like me.¡± As a court official, Sun Siwen was quite confident when facing those Jianghu martial artists. After all, no matter how powerful those martial artists were, didn¡¯t they still have to obey the court and bureaucracy? They dared to kill Dr. Zhou from their family, because he was just an ordinary civilian. But if they dared to kill a court official, they would have to be prepared to be an enemy of the court, and not even ten Iron Sword Sects would dare to do so. Seeing that his friend had not changed his original intention, Lu Yuan felt relieved, but still asked, ¡°So are there any highly skilled doctors in the city that Brother Sun can recommend?¡± Sun Siwen thought carefully and said, ¡°There is an old doctor named Dr. Li in the city. I heard that he practiced martial arts in his early years and retired from Jianghu. He is very good at treating fractures. I¡¯ll have Lao Gu invite him now.¡± Having said that, he called Lao Gu to go out and ask the doctor to come over. As a government official, just like those landlords and elderly, they were all masters. Even when seeking medical treatment, the master would ask the doctor to come to their home. They would not go for a check-up in person unless it was absolutely necessary. Although Sun Siwen had not been in office for long, he had quickly integrated into this class, and all his behaviors and actions were quite proficient.. Chapter 86 - Chapter 86: Chapter 65: Healing Injuries and Taking a Master Chapter 86: Chapter 65: Healing Injuries and Taking a Master Translator: 549690339 Indeed, Dr. Li was a divine doctor. After Lao Gu invited him, this divine doctor identified Zhou Qing¡¯s bone fractures as the work of a martial arts expert just by giving a quick examination. Having experienced the Jianghu, Old Doctor Li deeply understood the principle that knowing too much could bring trouble onto oneself. So, he only identified the cause of the illness without digging deeper. After examining the bone injuries, the old divine doctor couldn¡¯t help but say: ¡°With twenty-one fractures all over his body, three of which are actually breaks, it would be a wonder if an older individual could survive. Fortunately, this young boy is lucky. His injuries were handled by a master when they occurred. Therefore, combined with his youth, there is hope for a complete recovery. ¡± Lu Yuan, standing beside him, sighed in relief and quickly asked: ¡°Ancient Doctor, how long will it take for Xiaoqing to recover?¡± Old Doctor Li smoothed his goat beard and said with a grin: ¡°If it were someone else, even with treatment, it would take at least half a year. However, by some stroke of luck, treating wounds like these is my specialty. I have a secret medicine blend that is administered orally once a day and applied topically every three days. With this dual approach, the young lad will be up and about in less than a hundred days.¡± The Old Divine Doctor boasted about his remedy and then rubbed his hands together, his voice lingering: ¡°However, this secret remedy is extraordinary in its effects, and naturally, the ingredients required are also quite precious. The oral medication costs two silver tales per dose. The topical treatment is five silver tales per dose. A complete course of treatment lasts for one month and three courses will be required in total. I wonder¡­ ¡± ¡°No problem.¡± As soon as Lu Yuan heard the doctor quote his price, he immediately accepted it. He then removed a prepared amount of silver from his pocket, took out eighty tales from it, and passed it on: ¡°Let¡¯s start with one course of treatment for now. Old Divine Doctor, please prepare the secret medicine.¡± Although the price of one tale for the internal medication and five tales for the external one seemed astronomically high, the cost in practice would be eighty silver tales per month. But consider Zhou Qing¡¯s current condition? A promising young man¡¯s body is now full of severe fractures that may end up being completely incapacitating. If any mistakes are made, he might be crippled for life. If it really is as Old Doctor Li said, that after using this secret medicine, he could return to his former state in a hundred days. Then, even if the cost of three months of treatment is more than two hundred silver tales or even if it were to multiply tenfold, it would still be worth it to Zhou Qing. In any case, Young Master Zhou is not lacking in money. The savings he brought out from the Zhou family are worth more than three thousand silver tales, along with a dozen types of precious herbs. All these are of astonishing value. Compared to the possibility of curing one¡¯s-self for just over two hundred silver tales, it was an absolute bargain. In fact, the quote from Old Doctor Li seemed cheap to Lu Yuan as well. He was prepared to spend a large sum to cure Zhou Qing, but he didn¡¯t expect that just over two hundred tales would be enough. One might say that Changning County is truly a remote and impoverished place. Not only are the people poor, but the prices are equally humble. ¡® Alright then.¡± Looking at Lu Yuan, who was readily handing out money, Old Doctor Li was momentarily stunned ¨C regretting his underestimation of the man¡¯s wealth and that he had quoted a lower price. However, facing the education official, he didn¡¯t dare renege on the agreement. He honestly took the silver and went to prepare the secret medicine. Since it was a secret medicine, naturally, it was an unshared secret. Therefore, it could not be prepared or prescribed in advance. For the next month, whether Zhou Qing was taking the medicine orally or topically, Dr. Li personally supervised everything and wouldn¡¯t delegate any part of the process to an outsider. Even the dregs of the medicine, once boiled, he would handle himself. He was cautious about the formula being leaked. Seeing the old doctor leave, Lu Yuan turned around and looked at Zhou Qing lying on the bed, comforting him: ¡°Xiaoqing, you heard it as well. Your injuries can be healed, and you will get better soon. Once you¡¯re recovered, I¡¯ll teach you martial arts.¡± Zhou Qing nodded approvingly, his voice chocked up, ¡°Thank you, Brother Lu.. no, thank you, Master.¡± Since Lu Yuan was willing to teach him martial arts, naturally, he considered him as his disciple. Therefore, according to the rules of this world, Zhou Qing had to regard Lu Yuan as his master and show his utmost honor and respect from then onwards. Otherwise, how would he repay such a generous act? Since Zhou Qing¡¯s family ran a medical clinic, he understood this deeply and was genuinely grateful for Lu Yuan. Hence, every time he called him ¡®master¡¯, it was heartfelt. ¡°Good.¡± When Lu Yuan heard someone call him ¡®master¡¯ for the first time, he was a little startled. But once he understood it, he couldn¡¯t help but laugh: ¡°Good disciple, you just focus on recovering. Once you¡¯re healed, I¡¯ll make sure to train you into a famous martial artist in Jianghu.¡± He has a second-rate martial art, Cloud Palm, and a first-rate mental technique. If one could master both, they could barely enter the ranks of the first-rate of the martial arts world. & a first-rate expert could dominate an entire city and claim the title of a well-known figure of Jianghu. ¡°Understood.¡± Zhou Qing, seeing Lu Yuan accept him, was also happy and shouted with a weak voice: ¡°At that time, the disciple will not let down the master¡¯s expectations.¡± For a moment, the room was filled with an atmosphere of mentorship and respectful discipleship. The treatment of Zhou Qing¡¯s injuries was progressing rapidly. The old divine doctor didn¡¯t deceive Lu Yuan. After administering the secret medicine, Zhou Qing¡¯s injuries saw significant relief within just three days. Although he still had to stay in bed, he could already move his arms a little. Seeing the efficacy of the treatment, Lu Yuan finally relaxed. Apart from daily check-ups on the recovery progress, he left everything to Old Doctor Li, focusing his energy on training himself. When he had previously been on the run, Lu Yuan had spent most of his time traveling. However, during the evenings, he had still managed to dedicate two hours each day to cultivating his inner strength. However, after a month, he hadn¡¯t made much progress. He had only polished an acupoint he was working on to be more unified, bringing it a step closer to breaking through. Having neglected his martial arts training for a month, now that he finally had some stability, he wanted to resume his old routine. Lu Yuan returned to his regular schedule of practicing Cloud Palm for five hours each day. In addition to that, he devoted an extra hour each day to studying the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra. Although, according to the plan, he was still majorly focusing on Cloud Palm, the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra was the next step after reaching the limit of Cloud Palm. But since he had spare capacity now ¨C unlike the ordinary people who could only train for two hours a day ¨C he needed to use his talent to improve his strength as much as possible. Therefore, Lu Yuan¡¯s daily training time increased to six hours. Spending half a day training in martial arts, his diligence probably ranked among the top in the community of immortals, right? After all, many people who became immortals had no pressure on life expectancy, so they naturally decayed and ended up as a ¡®salted fish¡¯ (lazy). Those immortals with consciousness and motivation like him should be the exceptions. But it couldn¡¯t be denied that this feeling of steadily and slowly enhancing his strength was rather fulfilling and satisfying.. Chapter 87 - Chapter 87: Chapter 66: Outstanding People Chapter 87: Chapter 66: Outstanding People Translator: 549690339 Lu Yuan¡¯s arrival with Zhou Qing did not cause much of a stir. Aside from a few neighbors near Sun Siwen¡¯s residence knowing that the County School Adviser had a few friends visiting, it did not disturb anyone else. After reuniting with Sun Siwen for two days, Lu Yuan went his separate way once more. According to Da Yue¡¯s system, there are two types of sources for scholars. One is self-study at home. These scholars need to study on their own or hire a tutor, which is expensive and only affordable by wealthy families. However, it is a one-on-one teaching method with high efficiency. The other is the County Academy. These students only need to pay a tuition fee to enter the academy set up by the county government. There are specially invited teachers in the academy to teach the classics, review past examination questions, and generally provide comprehensive instruction. However, with one teacher responsible for twenty or thirty students in a classroom, it is impossible to cover everything, and most of the time, they can only teach from the textbook and let students understand the material on their own. Therefore, students studying at the County Academy have a lower learning efficiency compared to those who hire private tutors. Sun Siwen, as the County School Adviser, is in charge of all affairs of the academy. Sometimes he even has to personally teach classes, so naturally, he cannot stay away from the academy for long. So after three days off, he had to return to work. Since his good friend was busy with work, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t know anyone else and the small town of Changning County did not have much to offer. Thus, he continued to stay home and practice martial arts. His martial arts skills were progressing rapidly. Considering his current pace and the foundation he had laid during the month spent on the run, he estimated that he would be able to break through another acupoint by the end of the month. With his goal in sight, Lu Yuan, as a ruthless cultivator, began a new sprint. Time slowly passed. In the blink of an eye, nearly half a month had passed. At the end of the month, after relentless effort, Lu Yuan finally broke through another acupoint, bringing him one step closer to completely opening the third meridian. The growth of his cultivation made him quite happy. Just in time, it was the end of the month, and the county school was finally on break. So Lu Yuan temporarily put aside his martial arts practice and asked Lao Gu about the route to the academy. He left to pick up his friend who was getting off work at the County Academy. Changning County was a small county town, with a city perimeter of only eight or nine miles and a relatively small area. After accommodating the government offices, a few commercial streets, and residences, there was no space left for other buildings. Therefore, Changning County Academy was not built in the city, but at the foot of a green mountain three miles outside the city. Below the not-so-high hill, more than twenty buildings were connected, consisting of houses, pavilions, and platforms. In the center, there was a pond and a garden, surrounded by a wall, enclosing a quite spacious academy. ¡°I didn¡¯t expect this remote county town to have such a nice academy. It seems that people can¡¯t be judged by their appearance. Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but exclaim as he looked at the peaceful and elegant academy in the distance. No wonder Brother Sun could stay in the academy for half a month. Living in such a place, let alone half a month, even two or three months would not be a problem. With mountains, water, books, and tea, and free food and drink, who wouldn¡¯t be comfortable living in such a great place? As it was still morning and the students were in class, the academy gate was tightly closed and not open to the public. At this point, there was already a group of people waiting at the entrance. Judging by their attire, they were servants, scholar boys, and students¡¯ parents who had come to pick them up. Because there were quite a few people, about thirty or forty, two vendors had even come along. One set up a booth to sell noodle soup, while the other was selling candied haws on a stick. Surprisingly, the two vendors were doing good business. Those who could afford to read usually had a good family background. Even the servant boys from wealthy families would not lack their monthly allowances and rewards. By now, many of them were tired and thirsty, so they bought food and waited while eating. Lu Yuan, finding the wait boring, simply joined in, ordering a bowl of local specialty diced mutton soup and buying two candied haws. Then he ate and waited for the school to let out. Because of the large number of people, those who ordered food basically had to share tables. The person sharing the seat with him was a servant from a wealthy family, who talked a lot. Though he was eating, he couldn¡¯t stop talking and liked to chat with people. After exchanging a few words with Lu Yuan and breaking the ice, his mouth wouldn¡¯t stop, and he dug up all sorts of stories. And at the entrance of the academy, naturally, the topics revolved around the students. At this point, the servant said, ¡°Brother Lu, let me tell you, our County Academy wasn¡¯t as lively as it is now. Not only were there fewer students, but the teachers inside were also terrible. It might be an exaggeration to say they were misleading students, but they were pretty much mediocre and incompetent. Fortunately, two years ago, a new Teaching Assistant came to our county. Since this man took office, not only did he apply for funding from the county magistrate to renovate the school, but he also established rules, strict discipline, and adjusted the curriculum. Finally, after clearing out a few mediocre teachers and recruiting a new group of tutors, the atmosphere of the academy was completely renewed. Moreover, unlike his predecessor, the Teaching Assistant was hands-on and even taught the students himself. Under his guidance, our academy produced five Xiucai (successful candidates of the imperial examination at the county level) in just two years, a record comparable to the achievements of the past decades. It was precisely because of the Teaching Assistant¡¯s teaching abilities that my young master enrolled this year, hoping to attend his classes. Having studied for only two months, my young master said that he had made much more progress than before. If he continues like this, he will become a Xiucai in a few more years. My master was so delighted that I even received a reward myself. This year, dozens of new students enrolled in the academy, all attracted by the Teaching Assistant. Really, in my opinion, this Teaching Assistant is like the incarnation of the God of Literature and Culture, here to save the students of Changning County.¡± Perhaps it was because he had received a reward that the servant boasted about Sun Siwen so incessantly, gushing endlessly and with great enthusiasm. It was as if the Teaching Assistant was him. Listening to the long speech, Lu Yuan felt both amused and proud. As a friend, he was naturally delighted and proud of his friend¡¯s achievements, which had earned the admiration of the academy students. After all, the two were close friends, and Sun Siwen¡¯s excellence only meant that Lu Yuan, who was friends with him, was equally outstanding. The saying goes that dragons do not dance with snakes, and extraordinary people naturally only have extraordinary friends. Of course, Lu Yuan had no doubt about this. Considering that he had surpassed all those Jianghu martial artists in just three years, he was indeed remarkable.. Chapter 88 - Chapter 88: Chapter 67: After-school Compensation Chapter 88: Chapter 67: After-school Compensation Translator: 549690339 Perhaps because it touched on a topic of interest to Lu Yuan, he gradually became more engrossed in the conversation and no longer found it boring, so he was patient and continued to listen. Through the servant¡¯s words, he learned some interesting tidbits about the academy. For example, there were three highly regarded students within the academy. One was the young master of the largest rice trader in the city, the Li Family, who controlled the rice business. This young master was said to be incredibly intelligent, and by the age of fifteen, he had become a scholar. At only eighteen years old now, he had accumulated three years of experience and was very likely to become a juren in the imperial examination next year. Another student was from Guo Ju-ren¡¯s Home, a family known for being scholarly. Guo¡¯s son was especially prodigious, being renowned for his elegance and talent, as well as for being admitted as a scholar in this year¡¯s spring examination at the age of sixteen, which became one of Sun Siwen¡¯s achievements. The last student was naturally Gu Songyun, who was taken in as Sun Siwen¡¯s disciple and was highly regarded by him. Although Gu Songyun came from a poor background and had faced difficulties in his pursuit of education, his diligence and good study habits were undeniable. Two years ago, he had nearly been expelled from the academy due to his inability to pay tuition fees. However, thanks to the wisdom of the teaching assistant who recognized Gu Songyun¡¯s talent, he not only took him in as a disciple but also provided support to his entire family. After two years of instruction, Gu Songyun finally became a scholar during this year¡¯s examination. Furthermore, he was the same age as Guo¡¯s son, both sixteen years old, and the youngest of their cohort. They were temporarily nicknamed the ¡°Top Scholars of Changning¡± and attracted much attention. However, according to rumors, Guo¡¯s son was quite unhappy with the title, believing that Gu Songyun was not worthy of being mentioned alongside him. Nevertheless, out of respect for the teaching assistant¡¯s face, Guo¡¯s son had not made a fuss about it. But the sense of competition between the two had indeed become more intense. Apart from interesting stories about the academy, the servant also shared gossip about various families in the city, which were eye-opening to Lu Yuan. However, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t pay much attention to the gossip. Once he realized that it was just a bunch of petty squabbles over favored concubines, infidelity, and inheritance disputes, his interest waned. Just then, a dull bell rang from inside the academy, prompting the crowd waiting outside to stir and move immediately after a few dings. It was noon, and the academy was finally letting out for recess. A moment later, the tightly closed gate opened, and a swarm of students clad in blue uniforms poured out. People waiting outside lifted their necks to identify the students, and soon they had found their targets and directed them to their destinations. With the students on break, the previously empty vendor seats nearby were instantly filled up again. Having studied tirelessly for half a month cooped up in the academy, though they were provided with food and drink, the taste of the academy¡¯s meals left much to be desired except for the specially prepared dishes for the headmaster and other higher-ups. Many students had become fed up with the bland fare. Now that they were finally free, some couldn¡¯t wait to enjoy a delicious meal. The congested crowd gradually dispersed, and as time passed, aside from the students who were eating and drinking with their classmates and servants at the nearby stalls, there were hardly any people left at the academy entrance. Lu Yuan, who had not seen Sun Siwen among the crowd earlier, guessed that he might still be in the academy and prepared to search for him. However, he was stopped by the gatekeeper as soon as he reached the entrance. The academy was considered a sacred place, and apart from teachers and students, even family members of the students were not allowed to enter on regular days. As a complete stranger, the gatekeeper would certainly not let Lu Yuan in. After all, he might hurt the teachers and students or damage the academys property. To this, Lu Yuan could only give his name and ask the gatekeeper to pass the message to the teaching assistant. A short while later, Sun Siwen hurriedly appeared with the gatekeeper. ¡°Brother Lu,¡± Sun Siwen said, looking both happy and puzzled upon seeing his friend. ¡°What are you doing here?¡± Lu Yuan chuckled, ¡°I¡¯ve been staying at your home for half a month since I arrived in Changning. It¡¯s been a little dull being cooped up indoors the whole time. It¡¯s the end of the month, and I thought you¡¯d be on break, so I came to find you to hang out. Brother Sun, you have to show me around Changning as the host here. My friend traveled all this way, after all.¡± Hearing this, Sun Siwen patted his forehead, slightly embarrassed, and quickly apologized, ¡°I¡¯ve been neglecting you, Brother Lu. I¡¯ve been too occupied with teaching duties lately. It¡¯s my fault, my fault.¡± He then pulled Lu Yuan¡¯s hand and led him into the academy, ¡°It¡¯s a good thing you¡¯re here, Brother Lu. I¡¯ve been wanting to introduce you to my disciple. As it happens, Song Yun grew up nearby, so he¡¯s quite familiar with the local scenery. This time, let him be our guide and take us on a tour around the mountain. By the way, Brother Lu, don¡¯t you like hunting? Our academy not only teaches poetry and literature, but also shooting archery. There are a few bows available at the archery range. Let¡¯s go hunting in the mountains!¡± In this martial arts world where strength is valued highly, the scholars of Da Yue, influenced by this culture, could not merely rely on their academic Imowledge. Aside from their regular studies of classics, disciplines such as swordsmanship, archery, and horsemanship were also taught, with larger academies typically establishing those courses. As a result, the students of this world were not only skilled in poetry and literature but could also wield the sword, pull the bow, and ride a horse. Of course, just as in Lu Yuan¡¯s previous life where physical education classes were secondary, the main focus for the students here was still on studying, while the additional disciplines were only supplementary and taught sporadically. Students could choose to learn those skills outside of class, but the academy did not make it mandatory, and it was purely voluntary. Under this teaching model, the martial prowess of the students naturally had its limits. For instance, Sun Siwen would often boast about learning archery. However, when Lu Yuan had previously let him try his hunting bow in Yangmei Town, Sun Siwen couldn¡¯t even pull it, resulting in much ridicule. But since he was trying to make up for his negligence towards his friend, Sun Siwen didn¡¯t mind being mocked a bit more, as long as Lu Yuan had fun. Sure enough, Lu Yuan¡¯s interest was piqued upon hearing the mention of hunting, and he asked, ¡°Are there many game animals in the mountains? He hadn¡¯t been hunting for nearly a year and realized that his skills had become somewhat rusty. This wouldn¡¯t do. As the top archer of Dayu Mountain, he decided to practice his hunting skills in the coming days. Not only would this help him relax and unwind, but it would also bring in some extra income. The more than a thousand silver taels he had earned from selling fur in Southsea a while ago had dwindled to just over four hundred taels after expenses from the past two years. This imposed some financial pressure on Lu Yuan, so he was preparing to get back to work and earn back the money he had spent. ¡®Hopefully, there will be plenty of tigers, leopards, bears, and wolves in the area,¡¯ he thought to himself.. Chapter 89 - Chapter 89: Chapter 68: Disciple Song Yun Chapter 89: Chapter 68: Disciple Song Yun Translator: 549690339 ¡°Of course, there are plenty of prey.¡± As the two chatted, they had already arrived at the archery range. They saw a spacious, open area with a corridor occupying the edge. Beyond the corridor, several targets were set up on the open ground for shooting. When they reached the corridor, Lu Yuan found that a small room had even been built here. At this moment, the room was wide open with many bows and accessories displayed inside, and someone was inside choosing among them. ¡°Song Yun!¡± Sun Siwen looked at the figure in the room and called out before turning to Lu Yuan, ¡°Song Yun comes from a poor family, so he hunts in the mountains to earn extra money during the academy breaks. No one knows the distribution of prey in the surrounding mountains better than he does.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but nod, ¡°He supports himself, which is admirable.¡± At the same time, he thought to himself that the young man was indeed a fellow hunter. Because of this, he was even more excited for the upcoming hunt. As for dangers? As a third-tier archer, Lu Yuan was no longer impressed by mere Fierce Tigers and bears. Whether it was hunting at long-range with bows and arrows or engaging in close combat, with his iron palms, he could easily kill those beasts. That was the arrogance of the Archer God after his strength breakthrough. ¡°Teacher.¡± Gu Songyun was preparing hunting tools in the small room when he heard someone calling from outside. Realizing it was his teacher, he hurriedly ran over to greet him. ¡°Song Yun,¡± Sun Siwen nodded and asked, ¡°You¡¯re going hunting in the mountains again? Gu Songyun was somewhat nervous, ¡°Yes. But don¡¯t worry, Teacher. I won¡¯t venture too deep into the mountain ridges, and I¡¯ll avoid danger. I¡¯ll return to the academy to continue my studies in two days.¡± As a student, Gu Songyun thought that his teacher disapproved of him indulging in hunting and neglecting his studies, so he came to warn him. Thus, he felt a bit guilty as if he was a thief caught in the act. ¡°Don¡¯t be nervous, I¡¯m not against you hunting.¡± Sun Siwen waved his hand with a smile to appease his student. Having also come from a difficult background, he greatly admired students who could support themselves. In fact, Gu Songyun wouldn¡¯t be able to take the academy¡¯s bows for hunting and use them privately without the permission of Sun Siwen, the xueyu (education official). In a tacit understanding, they had already made their stance clear. It was just that Gu Songyun was young and hadn¡¯t realized this yet. Gu Songyun visibly relaxed after a few words of comfort, and his face was no longer tense. Seeing this, Sun Siwen turned and said, ¡°Brother Lu, this is the outstanding disciple I mentioned, Gu Songyun.¡± Then he spoke to his disciple, ¡°This is Lu Yuan, my close friend and confidant. He came all the way from Luling City to visit me.¡± Hearing that Lu Yuan was his teacher¡¯s good friend, Gu Songyun hurriedly bowed, ¡°Mr. Lu.¡± It was always comforting to see a polite junior. Lu Yuan smiled and nodded, ¡°Get up. I am your teacher¡¯s friend, and I¡¯m only a few years older than you. We¡¯re all family here, so there¡¯s no need for so much formality.¡± ¡°Yes,¡± Gu Songyun nodded in agreement, but judging by his expression, he clearly didn¡¯t take Lu Yuan¡¯s words to heart. Of course, in this society that values respecting teachers, observing rites and practices, not everyone can let go of worldly views and be bold enough to interact with their elders as equals. In a way, Lu Yuan is quite exceptional in today¡¯s society. Sun Siwen and Zhou Ze, his close friends, also have open-minded characters and don¡¯t pay much attention to rites and statuses. ¡®And that¡¯s probably why we can come together.¡¯ With that thought, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t dwell on it. He had Zhou Ze and Sun Siwen as intimate friends, and though Doctor Zhou is gone now, he still had Brother Sun in this life, which was enough. As Lu Yuan fell silent, Sun Siwen next to him spoke up, ¡°Song Yun, Brother Lu and I came here to ask for your help to guide us on a hunting trip in the mountains.¡± ¡°Teacher wants to go hunting?¡± Gu Songyun was astonished after hearing this. Although not completely inept, it wouldn¡¯t be an exaggeration to say he¡¯s physically weak. Such a frail scholar wanted to go hunting? Who wouldn¡¯t be surprised? For a moment, Gu Songyun hesitated, wondering if he should advise his teacher to give up the idea. After all, he knew the dangers of the mountains better than anyone as a semi-hunter. Taking his ill-equipped teacher to the mountain would only increase the risks. His teacher had been very kind to him, taking him in as a disciple, teaching him despite his poverty, and even supporting his entire family. Gu Songyun had great respect and love for Sun Siwen and didn¡¯t want his teacher to face any dangers. As if sensing his disciple¡¯s concerns, Sun Siwen pointed to Lu Yuan and said with a smile, ¡°Don¡¯t worry, the main purpose of this hunting trip is to accompany my friend Lu Yuan here. Though he may be young, he has a lot of experience in the mountains and is an outstanding hunter. Hunting bears and tigers is a piece of cake for him. With him around, nothing will go wrong.¡± Mr. Lu is a hunter? Gu Songyun looked at his teacher¡¯s friend with a slight surprise. From his point of view, it was difficult to understand how his teacher, an official, could have a relationship with a hunter and even become friends. But after learning of Lu Yuan¡¯s identity, Gu Songyun believed that those who could become friends with his teacher, even if they were hunters, would not be ordinary hunters. Because his teacher was so outstanding, those who could be friends with his teacher must also be outstanding as well. So after figuring out Lu Yuan¡¯s identity, Gu Songyun no longer hesitated and agreed, ¡°In that case, students have no problem. Teacher, Mr. Lu, there are bows, arrows, and swords in this equipment room. If you go hunting in the mountains, you can¡¯t be short on weapons. Please come in and choose some.¡± ¡°Alright,¡± Sun Siwen laughed and energetically entered the room to start choosing suitable weapons. It had been a long time since he had used a bow and sword, and he couldn¡¯t help but feel eager as he began to reminisce about his youthful days of learning. Today¡¯s hunting trip with his friend would be a perfect opportunity to relive those days. Lu Yuan also walked in, scanning the room with his eyes, only to see dozens of swords and bows hanging on the walls in the limited space. He casually picked up a Long Sword, which turned out to be rather ordinary, and not even sharp enough, befitting its title as a ceremonial weapon. As for the bows, the strongest he could find was an Eight-strength bow, and not even a single one-stone bow could be found. It was understandable since these weapons were for scholars and students who were not fighting to the death or engaging in close combat. Their purpose was to foster physical fitness, so there was no need for them to be excessively powerful.. Chapter 90 - Chapter 90: Chapter 69 Miao People’s Gu Worm Chapter 90: Chapter 69 Miao People¡¯s Gu Worm Translator: 549690339 Lu Yuan casually picked a long sword, as well as an eight-strength bow and a quiver of arrows, before leaving the room. Standing in the corridor, he drew the bow and notched an arrow, aiming at the center of a target one hundred meters away. He intended to test out his skills and get reacquainted with archery. With a swoosh. The arrow flew out, cutting through the air with a thud, it hit the red bullseye. ¡°Hmm, not bad, my skills haven¡¯t deteriorated.¡± Looking at the arrow still vibrating slightly in the distance, Lu Yuan nodded in satisfaction. Then he fired off three more arrows, each hitting the bullseye. Off to the side, Gu Songyun, who had witnessed all this, stood gaping in disbelief. He never expected that his teacher¡¯s friend was such a skilled archer. Indeed, anyone who could befriended his teacher, even if it was a hunter, must be an uncanny hunter. With this archery skill alone, he could easily earn a rank in the military, right? Suddenly, Gu Songyun¡¯s impression of Lu Yuan changed dramatically. This was a force to be reckoned with, capable of hitting the bullseye with three arrows, one after another. Thanks to the societal values that honored martial prowess, in the mundane society, individuals with exceptional martial abilities or academic aptitude enjoyed high statuses, almost on par with each other. Thus, to Gu Songyun, Lu Yuan¡¯s archery and martial skills alone would have placed him on par with his own teacher, who had official stature. Of course, his own teacher was still a bit more powerful. Even if they were both the teacher¡¯s friend, it was still necessary to distinguish who was closer and who was distant. ¡°Bravo!¡± At this moment, Sun Siwen started to clap and commend enthusiastically, ¡°Brother Lu¡¯s archery skills are still as extraordinary as before. Every time I witness it, I can¡¯t help but admire.¡± ¡°Haha!¡± Lu Yuan laughed heartily: ¡°In order to honour Brother Sun¡¯s praise, I¡¯ll have to put my heart into it this time we enter the mountains. I promise to shoot down bears and tigers, for Brother Sun to enjoy the bear paws and tiger tendons, it¡¯ll be a good tonic for your body. You have been reading so much, your body has weakened a little.¡± He put away his bow, came to Sun Siwen¡¯s side, and lightly patted his somewhat frail body. His words were half-jesting and half-serious. Faced with his friend¡¯s words, Sun Siwen¡¯s face turned slightly red, and he objected, ¡°Nonsense. This time in the mountains, I will definitely show my skills. I will hunt dozens of beasts to show you who¡¯s weak.¡± His words were full of grandeur, but one couldn¡¯t help but feel that his resolve was somewhat lacking. Gu Songyun, standing aside, watched this scene with wide eyes. He was surprised to see that his usually refined, gentle teacher could have this side too. It was truly eye-opening and he couldn¡¯t help but want to laugh. Sun Siwen noticed the expression on his disciple¡¯s face, turned his head and glared. He put on his air of authority as a teacher and said crossly, ¡°What are you laughing at? Enough. Since we¡¯ve all chosen our weapons, and it¡¯s getting late, let¡¯s get on the mountain now.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Gu Songyun suppressed his laughter, afraid of being scolded by his teacher. He quickly jogged ahead to lead the way. Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen exchanged glances and smiled simultaneously, then quickly followed. The mountains of Changning County were far less rugged than those of Dayu mountain. The difference was like that of a giant, burly man compared with a gentle, delicate woman from the south. But despite the woman¡¯s gentleness, beneath that frail appearance lurked a captivating, dangerous heart. One false move and one could fall prey to it, completely entrapped. The two followed Gu Songyun into the mountains. Although wandering through each mountain ridge, Lu Yuan¡¯s greatest feeling was not the danger posed by the beasts in plain sight. Instead, it was the deadly traps hidden in the forest under the decomposition of fallen leaves, such as the mud pools scattered around, and the deadly poisonous insects lurking in the shadows, ready to strike at any moment. These forests were untouched by human hands, and in such virgin woods, poisonous insects and mud pits were as abundant as stars in the night sky, nesting in every corner of the ridge. Silent and deadly traps lurked in every corner, baring their sharp teeth, waiting for the prey to come. Just as Gu Songyun had said, in such a wild and dangerous place, even the locals faced great risks. One careless move, and one would be lost in the mountains forever. ¡°Actually, this is not the most dangerous part. The area we are in now is just the peripheral part of the mountains. In the depths of the mountains, there are not only more poisonous insects and mud piles, but there are also many terrible miasma beasts, which are far more dangerous than the outside. There are also the Miao people who live deep in the mountains. These Miao people have different customs from us, the Yue people. They do not admire civilization and are barbarically fierce. It is said that some of the Miao people like to raise poisonous insects and can perform Gu techniques. They can cast Gu that can harm people. They are more dangerous than the mountains themselves.¡± While hunting in the mountains, Gu Songyun also explained the mountain cultures to his teacher and his teacher¡¯s friend. ¡°More dangerous than the mountains?¡± Sun Siwen was surprised to hear his student describe the Miao people who live in the mountains this way, ¡°I see many Miao people coming and going in the city. I have also interacted with them. Although these people are somewhat ferocious, they are generally quite obedient. How are they dangerous? Lu Yuan was also curious. But he wasn¡¯t curious about the danger, but about the Gu technique that Gu Songyun mentioned. Since coming to this world, he had experienced martial arts and even received a jade pendant related to immortals from Sun Siwen, although it was not yet of much use. With these extraordinary experiences, Lu Yuan naturally wouldn¡¯t consider the Gu technique described by Gu Songyun to be nonsense. Rather, he suspected it was likely true. Now that he was residing in Dongting, a place mixed with the Miao people, and most likely would have to stay here for a long time in the future. Then, just in case, for safety¡¯s sake, it seemed necessary to learn about Gu technique in advance. Seeing that his teacher seemed to have some misunderstandings about the Miao people, Gu Songyun, fearing that his teacher might fall into danger due to his misconceptions, quickly explained, ¡°The obedient Miao people mentioned by the teacher are actually the fully integrated Miao, or Shumuiaos. These Shumuiaos have either moved out of the mountains and live like us, the Yue people, by farming. Or they live on the outskirts of the mountains, like the mountain people hunters, and make a living by hunting. These Miao people obey the transformation of civilization, pay taxes, and accept the management of the court. But in addition to these Shumuiaos, there are also Shengmuiaos. Not only do they not accept the transformation of civilization, but they often come out of the mountains to attack the villages and the common people outside the mountains, carrying out acts of arson and plundering. The frequent reports of Miao people causing chaos refer to these Shengmuiaos. Among us who often enter the mountains, we often hear rumors about these Shengmuiaos. It is said that they are ignorant and worship some evil gods. They perform human sacrifices and use human bodies to breed Gu insects. They attack villages to kidnap people for their cult rituals and to cultivate insect larvae. Therefore, the mountain people often say that they would rather encounter tigers than run into Shengmuiaos. One can imagine how evil and terrifying these people are.¡± Gu Songyun said with a solemn expression. Obviously, as someone who had grown up hearing these stories, his dread for the Shengmuiaos had been deeply ingrained in him.. Chapter 91 - Chapter 91: Chapter 70: Returning with a Bountiful Harvest Chapter 91: Chapter 70: Returning with a Bountiful Harvest Translator: 549690339 ¡°Does my Da Yue still harbor such barbaric tribes?¡± After listening to his student¡¯s narration, Sun Siwen wore a face of astonishment, his whole worldview shattered. Always having lived under the imperial laws, he found it hard to imagine that such a bloodthirsty and cruel barbarian tribe of Shengmiao even existed under imperial rule. This is not because he was overly naive. If one were to argue that the Shengmiao are naturally free-spirited, unwilling to be restricted or exploited by the courts, and therefore often rebelled, Sun Siwen could understand. But the practices of human sacrifice and breeding insects in the human body are too sensational. Seeing his teacher seemingly alarmed, Gu Songyun hurried to comfort him, ¡°Sir, there¡¯s really no need to worry about Shengmiao. They mostly live in the depths of the mountains, rarely venturing out. Even the local mountain people barely see them. We only hunt on the outskirts of the mountains, there is no need to worry about encountering them.¡± ¡°Hmm.¡± Sun Siwen nodded, his complexion improving somewhat. Seizing the opportunity, Lu Yuan curiously asked, ¡°Song Yun, you mentioned that the Shengmiao are proficient in insect techniques. Is it only them? What about the Shumuiao? And what exactly can these insect techniques do? Do you know?¡± Gu Songyun was taken aback, not expecting that their teacher¡¯s friend would be intrigued by this. Reflecting on his hunter identity and the possible frequent trips to the mountains, Gu Songyun understood his desire to be better informed and vigilant about the legends of Shengmiao. After pondering, he replied, ¡°I have heard that in Shumuiao¡¯s villages, some women cast love insects on their lovers. If the lover is unfaithful, the insect would activate, causing the lover to die from heart-devouring insects. But these are only rumors. I¡¯ve also heard tales of men who fell in love with Shumuiao women but later had a change of heart. Yet I have never heard of them actually being killed by these love insects. However, the Shengmiao¡¯s practice of cultivating insects in human bodies may breed some toxic insects. This may not necessarily be an insect technique. There are some deadly insects in the mountains. Being bitten can quickly result in death if no antidote is available. Therefore, the matter of insect techniques should only be baseless rumors that the Miao people use to scare away outsiders.¡± After reflecting, Gu Songyun shared what he believed to be the most reasonable judgment. ¡°A rumor?¡± Lu Yuan furrowed his brows, he did not agree with this viewpoint. There is no smoke without fire. If the Miao people have been able to pass down stories about insect techniques for hundreds of years, then there must be some factual basis, at the very least a prototype. So, who can say with certainty that insect techniques do not exist? Even considering otherwise, martial arts and immortals have appeared. The addition of mere insect techniques is not surprising at all. However, these thoughts were merely in Lu Yuan¡¯s mind and he did not voice them out loud. Brother Sun and Gu Songyun were ordinary people with their understanding and regular cognition instilled within the range of a commoner¡¯s life. Things beyond their knowledge should not be mentioned to them. The more you know about certain things, the more dangerous it can be. Like insect techniques. Suppose one of them, having heard about it from Lu Yuan, became interested and decided to inquire about it from the Shengmiao. What if they got killed by an insect technique? The consequences would be severe. ¡°Alright, Brother Lu, I know you are always intrigued by peculiar and exotic matters, but today we are hunting, so don¡¯t dwell too much on these things.¡± Seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s pensive look, Sun Siwen couldn¡¯t help but pat his forehead in annoyance. ¡°Master, look, there¡¯s a rabbit.¡± At this moment, Gu Songyun¡¯s low voice and pointed finger directed their attention towards a grazing rabbit hiding in a bush nearby. ¡°Rabbit¡­¡± Lu Yuan snapped out of his thoughts, looking at the direction indicated, he instantly saw a gray figure and his hunter instincts awakened. He pulled his bowstring and released an arrow. With a swift ¡°Swoosh!¡±, the arrow flew out. In the blink of an eye, the distant wriggling silhouette of a gray rabbit was pinned into the underbrush. Even though he had left Dayu Mountain, true to his title as ¡°Bunny Destroyer¡±, his skill in arrowing rabbits remained unchallenged¡ªone arrow, one rabbit. ¡°That was supposed to be mine.¡± Sun Siwen, who had already taken aim, had intended to bag the first hunt of the day, but he was irked when someone swooped in and stole his prey. ¡°Brother Sun, I shot only because I was afraid you would scare away the prey. I was only trying to help.¡± Lu Yuan chuckled, ignoring his friend¡¯s disgruntled glare. Swiftly, he stepped forward and picked up the prey. Coming to terms with his mediocre archery skills, Sun Siwen grumbled a bit and then let it go. The main purpose of today¡¯s hunting trip was to make amends to Lu Yuan. So long as his friend was happy, nothing else mattered. The first successful shot took down a gray rabbit, as if opening up a good fortune. In the hours that followed, under the guidance of Gu Songyun, they traversed several mountains and visited various places abundant with game. In the end, thanks to Lu Yuan¡¯s divine archery skills, they secured a hefty haul. While crossing mountains and ridges, Lu Yuan also took the opportunity to learn about the landscaDe from Gu Songvun. He asked about everything from the terrain of the mountain ranges, the venomous insects and fierce beasts in the mountains, the dangerous places, and so on. Since they had taken Sun Siwen hunting today, Lu Yuan, in consideration of his friend, didn¡¯t aim to hunt fierce beasts like tigers or leopards. Therefore, he noted down the activity areas of the game for future solo hunting trips in the mountains. The satisfying hunting expedition concluded quite quickly. As evening drew near, the three of them retraced their path and returned from the mountains. When they had set out, their hands held only weapons, entering the fray light as a feather. But upon returning, they were loaded down with their spoils, absolutely laden with bounty. A mountain goat, three wild chickens, five grey rabbits; this was their haul from the hunting trip. Even though Lu Yuan deserved most of the credit, Sun Siwen too, under his friend¡¯s guidance, successfully shot a rabbit. Thus, everyone had a great time. By the time they returned from the mountain, it was getting dark. They were too lazy to go back to the city and decided to stay in the academy at the foot of the mountain. The academy also possessed a canteen equipped with plenty of condiments. At Sun Siwen¡¯s command, who functioned as a Teaching Assistant, all these items were readily supplied. Even the cook on duty was temporarily recruited, and a barbecue party was held in the academy¡¯s garden. Two scholars who stayed in the academy heard that the Teaching Assistant had returned from a hunt and had obtained a generous haul, so they joined the fun. When they saw the plentiful catch, they immediately lent a hand in preparing the ingredients. Who says gentlemen stay away from the kitchen? When it comes to good food, delightful smell and taste can literally make the most refined gourmet cook for you. Otherwise, how do you think Dongpo Pork came into existence? Lu Yuan¡¯s culinary skills, honed over the years, had reached major success level on his attribute panel. This level, although not perfect, is comparable to the renowned chefs of famous buildings. At this point, he was preparing the wild game, deft and effortless. The skewers of well-prepared ingredients, under his grilling, were aroma-filled; the oil dripping off them gave them a delicious extent, utterly seductive. Those waiting to eat by the side were salivating at the sight. As each person savored the juicy delicacies, predictably, Lu Yuan earned heaps of praise, and then attracted a swarm of foodie fans.. Chapter 92 - Chapter 92: Chapter 71: Imperial Examination Plan Chapter 92: Chapter 71: Imperial Examination Plan Translator: 549690339 A barbecue night feast left everyone happy and satisfied. However, after the revelry, everything eventually returned to tranquility. On the second day, as Gu Songvun said, he did not continue hunting in the mountains but stayed in the academy to study hard. This impoverished student really cherished the current learning opportunities, desperately trying to improve himself, hoping to stand out through learning and change his own destiny. Lu Yuan admired this very much. So, he gave the fur he got from yesterday¡¯s hunt to the other party, as a form of assistance from an elder. A sheepskin and five rabbit skins could sell for a hundred cents or so. He didn¡¯t care about this small sum of money, and since Gu Songyun participated in the hunt yesterday and also shared so much knowledge about the mountain, it could be considered payment. In response, he naturally gained more gratitude from the students, who felt that their teacher¡¯s friend was even more approachable. While the students were busy working hard, Sun Siwen, as a teacher, was not idle either, and began to work on his own tasks. He was going to the county government to have a small meeting with the county magistrate and the education official. It was already the end of August, which meant it was time for the yearly Imperial Examination. During these days, the county magistrate and the education official were worrying about whom to arrange for the Scholar exam to aim for the title of juren. Apart from the livelihood and taxation, the assessment of a county¡¯s governance by the prefecture also placed a high proportion on education. Therefore, the prefecture had a fixed requirement for each county to cultivate a certain number of scholars and recommend them for the juren exam. The evaluation of local officials¡¯ achievements depended on whether the recommended scholars could pass. Producing more scholars and having at least one juren during their tenure would naturally lead to an excellent evaluation, which could be used as the basis for promotion. On the contrary, if the teaching was unsuccessful, and the officials were severely derelict in their duties, either a reprimand order or demotion would ensue. Facing such important matters that concerned their future, the county magistrate and the education official naturally attached great importance to it. However, Changning County was inherently disadvantaged in its scholarly environment, and in the past, it had always failed to meet the standards, always being part of the bottom-ranked counties. Fortunately, their superiors also knew about their unique situation here, so they were not overly harsh on them. But the situation has changed now. Since Sun Siwen¡¯s arrival and the implementation of a series of educational reforms, the scholarly atmosphere of Changning County has changed. Not only did the number of students in academies increase, but several scholars have also been cultivated, breaking through the barrier of twenty and bringing the total to twenty-one. With such achievements, the County Magistrate and Education Official naturally harbored some ambitions. They didn¡¯t expect to have a juren come out of their county in this year¡¯s Imperial Examination, as that would be unrealistic. What the two officials wanted were for more scholars to take the juren examination than in the past. Although passing the juren exam was the biggest achievement. But having more Scholars take the juren exam was also an achievement. In previous years, there were only four or five Scholars from Changning County who took the juren exam, which placed them at the bottom of all the counties. But this year, the county magistrate wanted to make a big push, recommending all twenty-one Scholars for the juren exam. This was undoubtedly a bold move. So, when Sun Siwen heard the county magistrate¡¯s plan, he frowned and cautiously reminded his superiors: ¡°Your Honors, it is a good thing to let more students participate in the Imperial Examination. However, many students come from poor families and may find it difficult to raise the funds for the exam. Forcing them to participate in the Imperial Examination may lead to a catastrophe. ¡± In the past, Changning County had always had more than ten scholars. But why were there only a few who took the imperial examination? Wasn¡¯t it because of the money? Like Sun Siwen, it took him borrowing thirty silver tales from Lu Yuan last time to barely gather enough funds for the examination. Thirty silver tales, in Changning County, was already equivalent to the entire income of an ordinary household for three years without eating or drinking. But a household always had to eat and drink and had various expenses to bear. For them to raise thirty silver tales, they would need nearly ten years of savings. Ten years of saving up for the examination fees were the norm for poor students. Due to the difficulties in accumulating examination funds, many ordinary scholars, even after finally gathering enough funds, would not dare to participate in the imperial examination until they were confident of passing. It is because they fear that if they fail, they will have to accumulate funds for several years or even a decade again, which, for a hopeful scholar, is really an unbearable burden. Therefore, using the number of people participating in the Imperial Examination to evaluate local officials¡¯ achievements is to some extent reasonable. If a place can have more students participating in the Imperial Examination, doesn¡¯t it just prove that your local economy is strong, well-developed, and can support more students to take the exam? It is not wrong to use this standard to evaluate achievements. Of course, if the local officials force the students to take the imperial examination for their achievements, regardless of the students¡¯ life or death, that is another matter. Sun Siwen was officially worried about this, so he gently reminded them at this time. The county magistrate was also a graduate of the imperial examinations, so he couldn¡¯t fail to understand the meaning of the other party¡¯s words. He smiled and said, ¡°I know how difficult it is for students to take the imperial examination. To raise the funds needed for the examination, many students spend several years or even a decade in hardship. I am not a tyrant, and I will not force the students into poverty for my own achievements. That¡¯s why I made this proposal, planning to allocate funds from the county government and asking the major households in the county to donate, raising enough examination funds for all the students, and sending them to take the Imperial Examination.¡± Grand Tutor Sun, what do you think?¡± Having said that, how could Sun Siwen possibly object? After all, if more people participated in the Imperial Examination, he, the person in charge of education, would also have merits. So he immediately bowed and said, ¡°If that is the case, all the students in the county will be grateful for your kindness, and I, on behalf of them, would like to thank your honor.¡± Being praised by others naturally made him happy, so the county magistrate laughed heartily. Then he looked at Sun Siwen sincerely and said, ¡°I can solve the problem of money. But since we have spent so much money, we must achieve some results. Grand Tutor Sun is a recent juren, so he knows more about the imperial examination-related matters than us out-of-date old-timers. There are still two months until the Imperial Examination, and even after deducting one month of travel, there is still one month left. So please, Grand Tutor Sun, be more mindful during the next month, and teach the Scholars in the academy well, so they can learn more and shine in the Imperial Examination.¡± The county magistrate was not only providing the money but also looking for people to invest; of course, he was not doing charity. His three-year tenure was about to end, and it was time for him to be evaluated for promotion or demotion. However, the county magistrate¡¯s achievements in his previous two terms had been very poor. If he didn¡¯t have any achievements this time, he might lose his position as county magistrate. How could he accept that? Since he had tasted power, he could not bear to lose it. So, he pinned his hopes on this year¡¯s Imperial Examination, hoping to offset his negative points in other areas with his achievements in education. This required the help of Sun Siwen, the skilled and beloved education official. As for this, Sun Siwen naturally agreed happily. After all, if he achieved good results, he would also have merits. Grand Tutor Sun had his eye on a higher education official position, hoping to improve his rank in the next few years. What he did not expect was that the opportunity had so quickly presented itself before him. When a duck is delivered to your doorstep, how could you not seize it? Let¡¯s do it.. Chapter 93 - Chapter 93: Chapter 72: Blood Shadow in the Mountain Chapter 93: Chapter 72: Blood Shadow in the Mountain Translator: 549690339 After attending a meeting at the county government, Sun Siwen started busying himself with his teaching plan. He summoned all the scholars in the county and gathered them into a separate class, where he began an intensive course on all the knowledge points related to the imperial examination. Although Sun Siwen¡¯s own scholarship was limited, he had just barely consolidated his juren level after two years of intense study. But when he took the imperial examination, he had received guidance from an immortal soul in his dreams. As a result, Sun Siwen might have been deficient in other areas of knowledge, but he was not lacking in the various knowledge points of the imperial examination. Although it had been two years since his last examination, there were not many changes in the two years with the current pace of society. The knowledge and experience from before were still valuable and applicable. Thus, Sun Siwen, as the grand tutor, was dedicated to teaching for his own career and achievements. The scholars he had recruited were also striving for their own futures and studying with all their energy. Especially when they found out that the knowledge points taught by the Teaching Assistant were so incredibly valuable, they listened obsessively and intently, not daring to miss a single point. After all, it was guidance from an immortal. No matter how Sun Siwen understood and processed it, it was still extraordinary. Recently, Sun Siwen had been busy teaching students and had no free time. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t rest either. While Sun Siwen was giving lectures at the academy, he took advantage of this time to venture deep into the mountains and begin his hunting trip. With the experience from the last time and Gu Songyun¡¯s reminders, this time he ventured into the mountains much more smoothly. However, unlike last time, during this hunting trip, Lu Yuan did not go after small prey like wild chickens, rabbits, mountain goats, or wolves. Although these prey were good, they wouldn¡¯t fetch a high price, so they were not his target. After entering the mountains, Lu Yuan¡¯s goal was clear: He went straight to the extremely dangerous area where Fierce Tigers and wild bears were active, as mentioned by Gu Songyun last time. What were rabbit and mountain goat worth? The real value lay in hunting tigers and bears, with tiger whiskers and bear paws being the delicacies pursued by the wealthy. Tiger skins and bear skins were symbols of status, and these items were worth a fortune. As for hunting the king of the mountain forest, Lu Yuan already had a lot of experience. He would lock onto their range of activities, track their traces, and after finding the target, use a long-range bow to shoot them down. If they could be dealt with directly, it would be the best outcome. If not, getting close and smacking them with his third-rate Cloud Palm would be enough to take them down in one blow. After several days, the few fierce tigers and big bears active within a hundred miles of the nearby mountains had basically all become Lu Yuan¡¯s prey. And those wealthy families in the city suddenly found that the previously hard-to-find tiger whiskers and bear paws, as well as tiger and bear skins, had become readily available in the market. Of course. They bought them all. If they missed this opportunity, they wouldn¡¯t know when they would see them again. Of course, such a high-profile sale of mountain goods naturally attracted the attention of the local gangs. There was a local gang made up of Miao and Yue people that was the largest Jianghu force in Changning County. When they found out that the goods were being sold by the close friend of the popular Grand Tutor Sun Siwen, their original plan was instantly extinguished. Having produced several scholars and even starting a scholar crash course to cultivate one or two jurens, Sun Siwen was seen as a saint sent by heaven to change the situation of weak literary atmosphere in Changning County by the local gentry. Anything Sun Siwen wanted to do could receive the support of the entire county. Being his friend, attacking Lu Yuan was almost like attacking the entire county¡¯s gentry. Even if they were a Jianghu gang, offending the local forces of the whole county would be a situation they could not handle. So with this official relationship, Lu Yuan could carry out some activities in Changning County without worrying too much, as long as they were not too outrageous. Of course, with his current strength as a third-rate martial artist, he wouldn¡¯t be afraid of anyone coming after him. The tigers and bears on the outskirts of the deep mountains were soon hunted clean. After selling them all, Lu Yuan quickly made a profit of more than 800 taels, and together with the savings in hand, his wealth once again surpassed the 1,000 taels mark. But perhaps it was because he hadn¡¯t hunted for a long time. After picking up his old skills again, he became somewhat addicted. So after hunting down the tigers and bears in the outer mountain areas of Changning County, he continued to hunt further afield, extending his hunting area to the nearby Xiaxi County. This mountain area belonged to another region, and the common knowledge and taboos he had learned from Gu Songyun had less influence here. Wanting to move here, he could only slowly explore step by step, and as a result, it became much more dangerous. Of course. As a child of the mountains, even if the terrain was different, as long as he was in the mountains, Lu Yuan had nothing to fear. Some swamps and poisonous barriers were no obstacles for him. As for dangerous fierce animals, encountering them was actually a pleasant surprise, as his savings would become more substantial. So traveling between mountain ridges, Lu Yuan only felt at ease, filled with a sense of freedom that suited his nature. Until this day. While traversing the dense forest, avoiding areas possibly inhabited by poisonous insects, Lu Yuan followed the tracks of a wild bear, preparing to hunt the prey he had been stalking for a few days. The early-stage activities of narrowing down the range and tracking scents were completed. He had already confirmed the location of the bear¡¯s lair. Now, he simply needed to go there and finish off the bear with the bow and arrow in his hand, then claim his spoils. Plows of dense forest fell behind him, and after a while, a dark cave entrance appeared before him. As the king of the mountain forest, the wild bear did not conceal its lair in any way. Its own scent was the greatest deterrent to the mountain hunters and shielded it from all danger. Except for the hunters who targeted it. At this moment, the hunter had arrived. Stepping forward quietly, Lu Yuan prepared to move into the cave. But as he approached the cave, still three steps away, his hunter¡¯s intuition kicked in, his body raised all its hair, an alarm went off in his body, and his sixth sense sensed imminent danger. Without any hesitation, his advancing body instantaneously retreated. Almost at the very moment of retreating, a pale red shadow streaked past where Lu Yuan was just standing at an electrifying speed, making his eyelids twitch. With a hissing sound, he retreated several more steps, only stopping when he was about ten meters away from the cave entrance. At this point, the sense of danger had mostly subsided. Turning his gaze back, he saw a blood-red centipede wriggling its body, gnashing its teeth, and hissing a terrible, frightening noise at the spot where he had just been standing.. Chapter 94 - Chapter 94: Chapter 73: Different Species Bloodline Chapter 94: Chapter 73: Different Species Bloodline Translator: 549690339 The thing that had almost successfully ambushed him and taken his life was such a small creature? And its speed was so fast! Lu Yuan looked at the blood-colored centipede as thin as a finger, cold sweat dripping from his forehead, feeling incredibly lucky. If he had been less alert, his reaction slower, he might have fallen victim to this little monster and gotten bitten by it. Given the terrifying appearance of this centipede, there was no need to think about what would happen if it bit him; he would either die or be left crippled. ¡°Something is strange.¡± As he stared at the centipede, thoughts raced through Lu Yuan¡¯s mind, and he immediately sensed that something was off. He had seen quite a few centipedes in these mountains during the past few days. Indeed, some were very poisonous, capable of knocking down a large wild bear with just one bite. However, none of those highly venomous centipedes had such speed. Not to mention flying speed, he had never seen one that could even fly. But the blood-red centipede in front of him attacked at such a speed that even Lu Yuan was terrified. ¡°A different species with unique blood, or was it raised by someone?¡± Gazing at the blood-red centipede, Lu Yuan was somewhat uncertain. At this moment, he thought of those monstrous different species and the Miao people¡¯s witchcraft he had heard about from Gu Songyun earlier. It was said that the Miao people were skilled at raising and breeding poisonous insects, and centipedes seemed to belong to the insect category. Encountering such a formidable centipede in this place, it was hard not to think of it as a product of witchcraft. As he thought of witchcraft, terrifying legends surfaced in his mind. Lu Yuan¡¯s face twitched, and his body, which had been stationary, slowly began to retreat again. Although there was only one centipede in front of him, any act involving risk was not worth taking. It was just a wild bear in a cave after all. Can¡¯t he just not want it anymore? Cursing his bad luck, Lu Yuan quickly retreated and fled into the distance. However, something didn¡¯t want him to leave. Seeing Lu Yuan trying to escape, the blood-colored centipede screeched and rushed after him at an incredible speed. ¡°This damn beast is actually targeting me.¡± Lu Yuan glanced back and saw the blood-red shadow pursuing him. His eyes twitched, and he was suddenly furious. He had already given up on the prey, yet the beast still wouldn¡¯t relent. It even seemed to consider him its prey, hunting him down. The legendary archer of Dayu Mountain was now being hunted by a creature¡­ no, an insect. Lu Yuan found this extremely humiliating. A surge of anger rose from his heart, and the thought of hiding from trouble instantly vanished. Since the insect obviously didn¡¯t intend to let him go, continuing to flee would only make him more vulnerable. He knew that defending for too long would only lead to failure. To resolve the problem, he needed to take the initiative, eliminating the troublemaker. Glimpsing the rapidly approaching blood-colored centipede behind him, a vicious light flashed in Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes as he drew his bow and shot an arrow. However, the centipede was incredibly fast and had quick reflexes. Though the arrow had been aimed at it, the centipede merely twisted its body and dodged it with ease. Not only did this arrow fail to hit it, but it also enraged the creature. It screeched even more violently, and its already incredible speed increased even further, closing the gap between it and Lu Yuan. Seeing its vicious demeanor, how could Lu Yuan indulge it? Whoosh, whoosh, whoosh! Three consecutive shots flew out, instantly targeting the centipede from three different positions and completely sealing off its retreat. However, this centipede was incredibly agile; even if its body was almost suspended in the air, it twisted its joints like a phantom, avoiding two of the arrows. Unable to dodge the last one, the centipede wasn¡¯t afraid; it let its back collide with the arrowhead, making a dull sound as the sharp arrowhead scraped along its shell, creating some sparks in the process. The centipede¡¯s shell was so hard that even the Eight-Strength Bow couldn¡¯t pierce it. Lu Yuan¡¯s eyelids twitched, not expecting this beast to possess such a skill apart from its speed. Fortunately, although the centipede blocked the arrows, it was confused and disoriented by the collision and fell to the ground, wriggling its feet, unable to regain its senses for a while. How could Lu Yuan miss such an opportunity? Whoosh, whoosh, whoosh, a few more arrows were fired in succession. This time, the centipede didn¡¯t have time to dodge. Three arrows hit its body, making a series of ¡°ding, ding, ding¡± sounds, and two more were bounced off. Finally, one of the arrows found its way through the gap between its joints, piercing into its body and coming out through its abdomen, pinning it to the ground. ¡°Hiss The immense pain made the beast wail loudly as its body twisted and writhed in agony. Being pinned to the ground by the arrow, it could only shudder and cry out. Seeing that the beast had been subdued, Lu Yuan still didn¡¯t dare to approach carelessly and instead took out a jade bottle from his bosom, tied the bottle to an arrowhead, aimed at the centipede, and fired another shot. With a ¡°plop¡± sound, the bottle smashed onto the centipede¡¯s head, shattering and sprinkling the powder inside. Instantly, a good amount of it flew into the open mouth of the centipede. The carefully prepared Seven-Step Fragrance quickly took effect. In the blink of an eye, the centipede, which had been rampaging with pain, became a dead insect, lying motionless on the ground. Seeing this, Lu Yuan breathed a sigh of relief. He had been worried that his sedative might not work on this poisonous creature. As it turned out, the ten silver taels he spent on the sedative weren¡¯t wasted. However, as a precaution, he didn¡¯t approach but set up the last arrow in his quiver, aiming at the centipede¡¯s head and fired another shot. The arrow flew through the air, arriving in an instant. After a ¡°ding¡± sound, as expected, the arrowhead was deflected by the centipede¡¯s front fangs, leaving only a shallow scratch. The sight of this made Lu Yuan¡¯s eyelids twitch once more. Fortunately, after this test, the centipede still showed no sign of movement, confirming that it was indeed sedated. With his heart now at ease, he quickly stepped forward and arrived in front of the centipede. On closer inspection, he discovered that the body of this ferocious insect that had been relentlessly pursuing him was actually crystal clear and ruby-like in appearance, with a centipede shape that resembled a work of art. Such a display made Lu Yuan even more certain that this was definitely a different species. It was unclear whether it was naturally born or cultivated by someone else. ¡°No matter which kind, it¡¯s your bad luck to fall into my hands today, you beast, ¡± said Lu Yuan, thinking back to the perilous experience he had just gone through. Without hesitation, he drew the Long Sword from his waist, aiming the blade at the centipede¡¯s head; he channeled his Inner Strength into his palms and then stabbed viciously. With a ¡°plop¡± sound, the centipede¡¯s formidable shell failed to protect its brain this time. The sword tip broke through its defenses, splitting its head in two as a small amount of red juice flowed out, giving off an exotic fragrance. Indeed, even in death, this different species remained incredibly mysterious and extraordinary. ps: Chapter 71 was just blocked, it has been unblocked now. Friends who haven¡¯t seen can go back and have a look.. Chapter 95 - Chapter 95: Chapter 74: The Strange Scented Holy Insect Chapter 95: Chapter 74: The Strange Scented Holy Insect Translator: 549690339 Smelling the fragrance emanating from the centipede¡¯s head, Lu Yuan¡¯s expression changed suddenly. He held his breath and stepped back in a hurry, afraid that he might have been affected by some poisonous barrier. However, after retreating more than ten feet away and no longer smelling that scent, there was no issue with his body. On the contrary, after smelling that exotic fragrance, his inner strength unexpectedly became slightly more active than before. This activity was very significant, and Lu Yuan noticed it immediately. ¡°Is it the effect of that exotic fragrance?¡± He paused for a moment, and quickly thought of the reason. An exotic fragrance that could make his inner strength more active; this discovery instantly made Lu Yuan excited. As someone who has read various novels, he immediately realized that he had stumbled upon the kind of adventure plot where one encounters a treasure. ¡°That¡¯s right. That centipede was so unusual, clearly a different species with unique bloodlines. Perhaps if I ate it, like the protagonists of those novels, my divine skills would advance and my inner strength would soar.¡± As a traverser, Lu Yuan naturally put himself into the role of a protagonist, feeling that he deserved this adventure. Heaven¡¯s pity. After waiting for such a long time, he finally received this protagonist treatment. Suppressing the excitement in his heart, he slowly moved closer to the centipede¡¯s corpse by a bit. At this point, he could smell a bit of that exotic fragrance again. Lu Yuan stopped in his tracks, not moving any closer. He just sniffed the scent, slowly experiencing the changes in his body. Just like before. There were no adverse reactions in his body, and instead, the circulation speed of his inner strength increased slightly. The scent acted like an amplifier, allowing him to absorb vital energy and mental strength more efficiently. Originally it was at 100% efficiency, but after smelling the scent, it increased to around 102% or 103%. ¡°Just by sniffing a few mouthfuls of fragrance, there is such an effect.¡± Feeling the effects of the fragrance, Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes lit up, and without hesitation, he strode to the centipede¡¯s corpse. He took out a jade box from his bosom, originally intended for storing a tiger¡¯s penis, drew his sword and picked up the arrow branch. He carefully placed the centipede¡¯s corpse that was hanging on the branch into the jade box. After gently placing it, he closed the box like a treasure and put it back into his bosom. After finishing this, he looked at the soil soaked with centipede brain fluid and full of fragrance. Thinking about the effect of this fragrance, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t bear to throw this piece of mud away. He took out a money bag from his body, poured the coins inside into his bosom, and used the empty bag to store the mud, treating it like a fragrance pouch. After such a series of actions, he had finally dealt with the spoils of war. After finishing everything, Lu Yuan looked around. The lush woods and deep flowers and grass surrounded him, with only the sounds of insects and birds chirping, and the occasional wind blowing. Although the centipede had been eliminated, there was no more obstacle between him and hunting that wild bear. But with such a valuable treasure, how could he care about that mere wild bear? On the contrary, having gotten his hands on this unusual creature, Lu Yuan felt somewhat uneasy, as if possessing something valuable but not quite secure. The experience he had just gone through had also taught him a lesson. So, he decided not to linger any longer in the mountain. He retraced his steps along the path he had just come from, and after retrieving the arrows he had shot out, he turned and ran towards the outside of the mountain. However, although he left the mountain, Lu Yuan remained cautious and did not head directly towards Changning County. Instead, he took a detour and headed toward Xiaxi County, planning to circle around outside before returning to Changning. Although the centipede was dead. But he hadn¡¯t forgotten his suspicion. This fierce insect suddenly appearing in the mountains was likely cultivated by someone. Otherwise, how could one explain the cen tipede¡¯s brain fluid, which helped people cultivate their skills? And now that he had killed this centipede and taken its corpse, if there was indeed a cultivator behind its existence, how could they let it go easily? So, out of caution, he had to cover his tracks to avoid being pursued. Although all these were guesses, being cautious had managed to keep Lu Yuan alive for a long time, and this time was no exception. It was fortunate that despite taking a long detour and the extra effort required, he could still smell the exotic scent from the centipede in the pouch. Even without circulating his inner strength deliberately, Lu Yuan could still feel his inner strength slowly growing. This experience of running on the road while constantly increasing his inner strength made him feel extremely comfortable, so much so, that he didn¡¯t feel tired at all. He ran more than thirty miles from the mountains and was about to reach Xiayi County City when the scent in the pouch finally dissipated. Seeing that there was no use for the pouch anymore, Lu Yuan directly emptied the dirt inside, then lit a fire and burned the pouch, as well as his bow and arrow, and the Long Sword he had been carrying. Finally, he threw the remnants into a river, completely destroying any evidence left behind. Not leaving any trace that could expose his identity. Then he entered Xiayi County City, where he wandered around various crowded places. Only after making a few rounds and visiting each location did he leave. After that, he circled around other nearby county towns, even visiting Fu City, traveling hundreds of miles in total. At each location, he used his disguise skills to change his appearance, covering his tracks. It wasn¡¯t until five days later when he was sure that no one would come after him that Lu Yuan changed his attires again and headed back to Changning County. While Lu Yuan was busy playing hide-and-seek, two days after he left the mountain, a group of unexpected visitors arrived at the spot where the centipede had been killed. A group of people dressed in Miao nationality clothing were searching through the mountain forest and finally confirmed the location. ¡°Holy Maiden, the trace of the sacred insect is cut off here.¡± An emaciated old man holding a green long bug that resembled a bamboo stick sniffed around the location where the centipede had died and said with an unpleasant expression: ¡°It¡¯s the Red Marrow Fragrance. Someone has killed the sacred insect.¡± In the crowd, a young girl was surrounded, her head adorned with silver ornaments and wearing a blue Miao nationality costume. Her exposed skin was snow-white, and her figure graceful, making it clear at first glance that she was a stunning beauty. However, such a stunning beauty had a white gecko crawling up her collar, a purple spider in the palm of her hand, a blue scorpion with a cold, flickering tail on her head, and a golden toad croaking on her shoulder. Four of the Five Poisons rumored in folklore were gathered around this girl at this moment. But, she was used to this scene. She even reached out and touched the spider in her palm with a teasing expression. Only when she heard the old man¡¯s words did her face turn cold: ¡°Do you know that without the Blood Jade Centipede, I won¡¯t be able to complete my Five Sacred Gu training? To cultivate a new one again, it would take hundreds of Medicine Men and three years.¡± ¡°Right now, the Yue people¡¯s officials are watching our Holy Sect, trying to seize people for Miao cultivation; it won¡¯t be that easy anymore.¡± ¡°Currently, our Holy Sect is not yet prepared to confront the Yue People¡¯s Court. Elder Qing, you were responsible for watching over the sacred insect; do you understand the consequences of losing it?¡± The emaciated old man called Elder Qing listened to the Holy Maiden¡¯s words, shuddered, and his face turned pale.. Chapter 96 - Chapter 96: Chapter 75: The Wrong Direction Chapter 96: Chapter 75: The Wrong Direction Translator: 549690339 In the woods. As the Sacred Girl¡¯s cold voice echoed, the surrounding air seemed to stagnate, and the temperature dropped several degrees instantly. Eeveryone¡¯s body slightly trembled, holding their breath and not daring to make a sound, fearing the Sacred Girl¡¯s gaze upon them. Swallowing hard, Elder Qing looked desperate and said hoarsely, ¡°It was me who ruined the Sacred Girl¡¯s plan and the Holy Sect¡¯s plan. To atone for my sins, I am willing to offer my body as food for the insects and use my cultivation and Inner Strength to cultivate a Blood Jade Centipede for the Sacred Girl. However, I ask that the Sacred Girl leave my clan and family out of this, as I alone bear the responsibility for my actions.¡± Hearing this statement, the Sacred Girl¡¯s expression softened somewhat, and she nodded, ¡°Very well, as long as the sacred insect is cultivated successfully, I will not seek revenge on your family and tribe.¡± ¡°Thank you, Sacred Girl,¡± Elder Qing bowed in gratitude and then retreated to the side, looking despondent. After dealing with him, the Sacred Girl turned to the fearful others and said, ¡°The death of the sacred insect cannot go unanswered. The sacred insect was a carefully cultivated different species within our sect, and ordinary people are incapable of dealing with it. Those who could slay the sacred insect are no ordinary individuals. You must immediately investigate the surrounding area and see which martial arts experts above the second-rate level have entered the mountains recently. When found, immediately kill them and retrieve the sacred insect. Even in death, the sacred insect cultivated by our Holy Sect cannot be allowed to fall into the hands of others.¡± ¡°Yes!¡± The people around complied, then hurried away as if they had been granted amnesty. Only Elder Qing remained, his face ashen, beside the Sacred Girl, motionless. The Sacred Girl watched her subordinates leave, her eyes still cold. The Five Sacred Insects were the highest level of insects cultivated by their Five Sacred Sects. It required the selection of five different insects with unique bloodlines, which were then meticulously nurtured from a young age, fed with countless rare spiritual objects from Heaven and Earth, refined with the world¡¯s poisonous substances, and catalyzed with human essence and blood. After three years, a sacred insect would finally be produced. The cultivation of each sacred insect consumed a vast amount of financial and material resources, as well as numerous lives. The cost was immense. More crucially, when the five sacred insects were produced, they could be further refined by catalyzing the insects and forcing them to fight each other to the death. The last one standing would become the Five Sacred Scarabs. This scarab possessed the bloodlines of five different species, the essence of numerous treasures from Heaven and Earth, the refinement of the world¡¯s poisons, and the essence of a thousand people. It was undoubtedly a peerless treasure. When consumed by a martial artist, not only would they become impervious to poison and capable of bringing the dead back to life, but they could also enhance their Inner Strength and achieve major success in their cultivation instantly. In fact, the Five Sacred Sect had refined the Five Sacred Scarabs specifically to assist the Sacred Girl in her cultivation and prepare her to break through to the Innate Realm. Everything had been going smoothly. After consuming the countless treasures of the sect and even capturing hundreds of Medicine Men from the outside world, several years were spent before they finally cultivated the Five Sacred Insects, all in preparation for the refinent of the Five Sacred Scarabs. Who could have predicted that at this crucial moment, Elder Qing, who had been entrusted with guarding the sacred insects, would abandon his duty and return to care for his suddenly-ill grandson, allowing the Blood Jade Centipede to escape after killing several disciples. By the time the sect responded and tracked it down, the sacred insect had already been killed by someone else. Without the Blood Jade Centipede, the Five Sacred Insects were incomplete, and the Five Sacred Scarabs could not be refined. Even if Elder Qing was willing to sacrifice himself to re-cultivate the sacred insect, it would still take at least a year. Just thinking about being delayed by a year before breaking through to Innate made the Sacred Girl¡¯s blood boil. Furthermore, her breakthrough to Innate Realm was connected to a major event that the sect had been planning for more than a decade, making her frustration even greater. Suppressing her anger, she turned to Elder Qing and said coldly, ¡°Let¡¯s go. We shall return to the sect and cultivate the Blood Jade Centipede again.¡± If it hadn¡¯t been for the old man¡¯s willingness to risk his life to cultivate the sacred insect, how could she vent her anger without decimating his entire clan for his grave mistake? Elder Qing¡¯s body trembled again, but he dared not say anything and could only follow obediently. In the blink of an eye, the figures of the two disappeared into the vast forest sea. In the following days, Jianghu of Dongting County was stirred up a little bit. The local martial arts powers found that the Five Poisons Sect members, who had always hidden in the deep mountains and rarely went out, suddenly emerged and spread across all the big and small towns. As a major sect among the Miao people, the Five Poisons Sect always claimed to be the Five Holy Sect. However, because they raised poisonous insects, practiced Gu art, and acted bizarrely and cruelly, they had committed many shocking bloodshed incidents. Therefore, they were commonly recognized as the Demon Sect, and the Jianghu also called them the Five Poisons Sect. Now the members of this demon sect had reappeared in Jianghu and seemed to be searching for something. This caused alertness among the martial arts world in Dongting County. Many forces dispatched special personnel to closely monitor the trail of these Five Poisons Sect members, fearing that they might cause trouble in their own territory. Of course, they merely watched, and no further action was taken. As a major sect of the Miao people, the influence of the Five Poisons Sect covered all areas of Dongting County. Wherever there were Miao people, there would be traces of the Five Poisons Sect. Aside from their reach, the actual strength of the Five Poisons Sect itself was also extremely strong. It was rumored that the sect leader and their Holy Maiden were both top martial artists in Jianghu. Within the sect, there were also the left and right elders, both of whom were first-rate figures. Below them, there were dozens of secular elders, all of whom were second-rate martial artists. With tens of thousands of ordinary followers, the strength of the Five Poisons Sect could almost be said to be at the top of Jianghu. Faced with such a behemoth, those local Jianghu forces had no choice but to stay away, let alone provoke it. They all hoped that the Five Poisons Sect members would quickly find what they were looking for and then leave without causing any turmoil in their territory. However, what they didn¡¯t know was that this wish was bound to be unfulfilled. Because the goal of the Five Poisons Sect was wrong from the beginning. Frankly speaking, the Blood Jade Centipede that Lu Yuan killed had astonishing speed, defense, and possibly even highly poisonous. A normal third -rate martial artist from Jianghu wouldn¡¯t have been able to deal with the Blood Jade Centipede based solely on their own martial arts. If their luck was even slightly worse, they would fall into the hands of the centipede, let alone kill it. So it was based on this understanding that the Holy Maiden of the Five Poisons Sect deduced that it was a second-rate Jianghu martial artist who killed the sacred insect. There was no problem with that, as it was in line with the normal understanding of Jianghu. But the problem was, Lu Yuan was not an ordinary Jianghu martial artist. He didn¡¯t engage the centipede in close combat at all. He fought from a distance, even using a sedative. He killed the centipede from afar, without having to engage it in close combat. Against Lu Yuan, the Blood Jade Centipede¡¯s greatest advantage could not be used, and it was completely subdued. However, the Miao people and their Holy Maiden were not aware of this. Therefore, they did not know that they had made an incorrect estimation and raised the strength of their enemy to a higher level. Searching for the wrong answer from the wrong angle, they were bound to get no results. With their current method of searching, even if they turned Dongting County upside down, they would never find the person they were looking for. It was unknown if they could ever discover this issue and locate their target accurately in the end. However, all of this no longer had anything to do with Lu Yuan. At this time, he had already returned to Changning County Town with his spoils of war, humming a tune and walking with a leisurely pace.. Chapter 97 - Chapter 97: Chapter 76: How to Deal with It? Chapter 97: Chapter 76: How to Deal with It? Translator: 549690339 Once again back in Changning County town, it had been a full five days since he left. Obviously, not returning for five days caused concern for Sun Siwen and Zhou Qing. In particular, Zhou Qing almost thought that the Iron Sword Sect had traced him and found his Master, so he almost got up from the bed to look for his Master. Fortunately, Sun Siwen was older and became more mature, especially after becoming an official. He comforted his friend and apprentice, assuring them that there would be no problems. Because according to Sun Siwen¡¯s impression, when he was in Yangmei Town, Lu Yuan often had records of going hunting for several days, or even several months. Now that he hadn¡¯t returned for five days, it was probably just because his friend had become addicted to hunting and had forgotten about the time. Of course, considering the threat from the Iron Sword Sect, Sun Siwen still had some worries deep down. Fortunately, with Lu Yuan¡¯s return, all these concerns were dispelled. ¡°Brother Lu, next time you leave for so long, remember to give us a heads up. Otherwise, someone will worry to death.¡± After confirming safety, Sun Siwen said this during their first meeting. ¡°Worry to death?¡± Lu Yuan looked slightly astonished and then looked his friend up and down, shook his head, and said, ¡°That shouldn¡¯t be the case. Brother Sun should know my habits. Going into the mountains for just a few days shouldn¡¯t cause too much worry.¡± ¡°Who says it¡¯s not worrisome? Don¡¯t forget that you have a debt on your back from the Iron Sword Sect.¡± Sun Siwen glared at him and then said unhappily, ¡°I am fine, but it¡¯s the kid Xiaoqing. Seeing that his Master hadn¡¯t returned for a few days, he was so anxious that he couldn¡¯t even eat. He kept saying it was his fault, feeling extremely guilty.¡± ¡°Xiaoqing¡­¡± Lu Yuan was stunned, and then smiled bitterly, ¡°I really neglected that.¡± In past days, he had been all alone and carefree. Now he had forgotten that he had an apprentice. ¡®Xiaoqing has just experienced the pain of losing his family, and he¡¯s more sensitive to this. It seems that I need to pay more attention to this in the future.¡¯ Thinking of the deceased Doctor Zhou, Lu Yuan sighed and went to find Zhou Qing. It wasn¡¯t easy to take in an apprentice, so he couldn¡¯t let the kid worry himself to death. When he saw Zhou Qing again, the boy was lying in bed, and Old Doctor Li was next to him changing his medicine. ¡°Xiaoqing, I heard that you haven¡¯t been eating well these days.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s voice reached the room before he entered. ¡°Master!¡± Upon hearing the familiar voice, Zhou Qing immediately sat up excitedly, but then the unhealed bones acted up, and he cried out in pain. At the same time, the medicine being applied to his body fell off, dropping to the bed and floor, scattering all over. ¡°Ah, ah, ah!¡± Old Doctor Li, seeing this action, was suddenly angry. He blew his beard and stared fixatedly, heartbroken, ¡°My medicine, my medicine. Regardless, this time it¡¯s your own fault, and it has nothing to do with me. You¡¯ll have to give me another five silver tales, and I¡¯ll make you a new batch of medicine.¡± The old miser was afraid he would have to add more medicine, so he quickly separated himself from the situation. ¡°Old Li, I¡¯m sorry.¡± Zhou Qing came to his senses and remembered what he¡¯d done, his face flushed, and he immediately apologized. ¡°It¡¯s okay.¡± Lu Yuan smiled and waved his hand, then looked at Old Doctor Li, ¡°Prepare another batch of medicine. I¡¯ll pay for the medicine.¡± ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll prepare it right away.¡± Hearing that he could earn another batch of medicine money, Old Doctor Li¡¯s eyes lit up with joy, and he happily went to prepare it. After Old Doctor Li left, there were only two people in the room, and Zhou Qing timidly looked at Lu Yuan, ¡°Master, just now, just now¡­¡± Seeing his appearance, Lu Yuan went up to him, patted Zhou Qing on the head, and comforted, ¡°Don¡¯t think too much, just focus on healing. From what I can see now, you¡¯re already recovering well and can sit up by yourself. That¡¯s a good sign, keep at it. Once you¡¯re able to get out of bed and completely recover, I¡¯ll teach you martial -3Yi-c? Seeing that his Master wasn¡¯t angry, Zhou Qing¡¯s face immediately showed a smile, ¡°Yes.¡± Having comforted his little apprentice, Lu Yuan quickly left and started getting busy with his own business. Returning to his own room, he briefly closed the doors and windows, sat down at the desk, and carefully took out the jade box from his chest. He placed it on the table and slowly opened the box. The moment the lid was cracked open, a strange fragrance wafted out. In an instant, the Inner Strength within Lu Yuan¡¯s body became more lively. He suppressed the urge to immediately cultivate his Inner Strength and examined the Blood Jade Centipede in the box with patience. The crystal-clear centipede, like a piece of crystal, had long since lost its life. The corpse lay in the jade box, and although several days had passed, there was no sign of decay. ¡°How amazing.¡± Seeing this scene, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but marvel. Could it be said that this world is indeed a Martial Arts or Immortal Martial World? Without treatment, the corpse would not rot. This Blood Jade Centipede was indeed extraordinary, definitely a different species of bloodline. ¡°But, having said that, how should I deal with this corpse now?¡± As he stared at the crystal-clear centipede body, Lu Yuan could not help but feel worried, unsure how to handle it. This centipede was clearly a different species of bloodline and had great benefits for him. But because of this, he did not know how to properly utilize this mysterious creature. ¡°Could it be that I should simply swallow it raw, or should I boil it first, or even stir-fry it?¡± After a few complaints, Lu Yuan refocused his thoughts and began to seriously consider how to handle the problem. Firstly, swallowing raw was definitely not an option. Although the fragrance of the centipede had been proven to be harmless and actually helps activate Inner Strength and assist in cultivation, the centipede is still one of the Five Poisons. This Blood Jade Centipede is even more extraordinary among centipedes, who knows if its body is highly toxic? Just because the scent is harmless doesn¡¯t mean the body is harmless. With the peculiar nature of the centipede, even a small problem could be a matter of life and death. ¡°So, I can¡¯t take any risks. I have to find a proper solution and find a reasonable way to deal with the centipede. But where to find a proper solution¡­ Lu Yuan furrowed his brows in deep thought; his first instinct was to search through medical books. If he could find a record of the Blood Jade Centipede in medical texts, he would naturally know how to deal with it. Even if he couldn¡¯t find it, by studying pharmacology, he might be able to find a suitable method to utilize this centipede corpse. ¡°But searching like this is like looking for a needle in a haystack. It would be too slow to rely solely on my medical knowledge to find a feasible method. Although the centipede looks like it won¡¯t decay or spoil now, who knows if it will go bad as time drags on? It would be a joke if the thing spoils before I can figure out a proper method.¡± So, the best choice is to find a highly skilled old doctor and ask him for a solution.¡± As soon as he thought of this, an image of a greedy old doctor appeared in Lu Yuan¡¯s mind.. Chapter 98 - Chapter 98: Chapter 77: Divine Blood Variant Chapter 98: Chapter 77: Divine Blood Variant Translator: 549690339 When it came to dealing with the Blood Jade Centipede, the first person that Lu Yuan thought of was Dr. Li. Dr. Li was known for his exquisite medical skills and was hailed as a divine doctor. As a local, he was familiar with the native customs and should have some knowledge of various insects. Besides, he had a Jianghu background and had seen a lot in life; he might have even heard of the Blood Jade Centipede before. With such an experienced doctor around, dealing with the centipede should not be a problem. ¡°It¡¯s easy to ask for his help, but getting him to keep a secret would be difficult.¡± Lu Yuan didn¡¯t believe that Old Doctor Li, who appeared to be kind and approachable on the surface, was genuinely a nice person. Not everyone was like Zhou Ze. For Old Doctor Li to have retired from Jianghu and lived a stable life this far into his sixties, who would believe he came without any cunning? And in the face of such an old fox, normal tactics were simply not enough. He didn¡¯t have the strength to make him comply. Yes, he didn¡¯t have the strength. If Lu Yuan were a top martial artist in Jianghu, or if Sun Siwen held the office of Prefect, then they would have the strength to make Old Doctor Li do their bidding without any second thoughts. However, Lu Yuan was a third-rate martial artist and Sun Siwen, though an official, was a low-ranked ninth-grade education official. How can their identities and strength intimidate a veteran of Jianghu? ¡°The Blood Jade Centipede is just too valuable. Such an item that can increase Inner Strength would be worth thousands of taels of gold in Jianghu. People would be willing to buy it at any cost. Although Dr. Li is suitable, he is an outsider, and it¡¯s hard to trust that he can be depended on. It¡¯s hard to say if he might just risk it all. After all, just one deal could guarantee wealth and security for his descendants for generations, and maybe even secure a promising future.¡± As Lu Yuan thought over and over in his mind, he finally decided to veto Dr. Li¡¯s option. But without him, who else would be the next best person to find and trust? After pondering for a while, still being clueless, he sighed in resignation, ¡°If only Doctor Zhou were here. He would definitely be able to help me with this Blood Jade Centipede. But wait, Doctor Zhou¡­ ¡± It suddenly occurred to Lu Yuan that he seemed to have forgotten someone. Although Zhou Ze was gone, the heir to the Zhou Family¡¯s medical techniques ¨C Zhou Ze¡¯s son ¨C was still around. ¡°Xiaoqing has been learning medical techniques from Doctor Zhou since childhood. Although he is not yet qualified, I remember he had already started diagnosing and treating patients at the clinic before Doctor Zhou¡¯s death. In that case, Xiaoqing¡¯s medical skills should be decent, at least not inferior to a regular doctor. And taking into account the heritage of the Zhou Family¡¯s medical techniques, his knowledge might be even more extensive. If I seek his help, there might be a way.¡± As Lu Yuan¡¯s thoughts cleared up, his eyes sparkled even brighter. The problem that had been troubling him finally had a good solution, and he immediately felt excited. Without any hesitation, he picked up the Jade Box in his hands and turned to leave the room. Once again arriving at Zhou Qing¡¯s room, Old Doctor Li had already finished changing the medicine and left. Zhou Qing was sitting on the bed, deep in thought about something. ¡°Xiaoqing.¡± Lu Yuan stepped into the room. ¡°Master.¡± Zhou Qing saw his master had come and smiled happily, ¡°Are you here to check on me? I¡¯ve been applying the medicine properly.¡± ¡°Hmm, good.¡± Lu Yuan checked the medical treatment on Zhou Qing¡¯s body and nodded with satisfaction. Then he put away his smile for a moment, looking at his apprentice, ¡°I¡¯ve come to see you because I have a request for your help.¡± Hearing that he could assist his master, Zhou Qing instantly became spirited and solemnly nodded, ¡°Master, if I can help, I will do everything I can.¡± Lu Yuan waved his hand, ¡°Don¡¯t be so nervous. I just want you to have a look at something and figure out how to handle it properly.¡± As he spoke, he brought out the Jade Box with the Blood Jade Centipede and opened it. Immediately, an odd fragrance wafted out. Upon smelling the scent, Zhou Qing felt as though his entire body had lightened, and the heaviness in his chest seemed to clear up significantly. Lu Yuan placed the Jade Box in front of Zhou Qing, asking him to take a good look at the Blood Jade Centipede, ¡°Help me see what kind of centipede this is. Is it poisonous? If I want to use it, how can I do so without getting harmed?¡± Zhou Qing stiffened slightly, shifted his body a bit, and with the strange fragrance still lingering around him, tried to calm down and examine the centipede in the box. After staring for a while, he hesitated and asked, ¡°Is this a Divine Blood Variant?¡± A Divine Blood Variant? Hearing this new term, Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes lit up instantly and he quickly asked, ¡°Xiaoqing, do you recognize this centipede?¡± Zhou Qing shook his head, ¡°I don¡¯t recognize the centipede itself, but I¡¯ve heard my father speak of something similar. It is said that among Heaven and Earth, there are always some different species that possess the sacred bloodline of the ancients. Due to their bloodlines, these different species are often incredibly powerful and miraculous, hence they are called Divine Blood Variants.¡± According to the medical books, these Divine Blood Variants often possess various incredible feats due to their bloodlines.¡± Some are even like the elixirs of legends, able to bring the dead back to life and regrow bones. There are even rumors that consuming a Divine Blood Variant could grant its bloodline, allowing for Feathered Ascension.¡± However, these are just hearsay. Although recorded in the medical books, no one has ever truly seen them. At least, none of the generations in the Zhou Family had.¡± But today, seeing the centipede in his master¡¯s hand, he realized that such a miraculous bloodline indeed existed in the world. ¡°Just by smelling its fragrance, I feel as if I am about to become an Immortal. Truly wondrous.¡± Zhou Qing spoke with a sigh of wonder. At this moment, he was certain that this was indeed a Divine Blood Variant and one that could heal injuries no less. If he were to consume it, his wounds would heal instantly, and there might even be other great benefits. However, this item belonged to his master, and even knowing its effects, he had not the slightest desire to covet it. ¡®My master has shown me immense kindness and deep affection. Even if I can never stand up again, I will not covet what belongs to him.¡¯ He silently vowed in his heart. Lu Yuan, on the other hand, didn¡¯t notice his disciple¡¯s inner thoughts. Just as Zhou Qing would never betray him, Lu Yuan also fully trusted the disciple he had raised since childhood. At this moment, not thinking too much, he was even more excited to learn the origin of the Blood Jade Centipede and said eagerly, ¡°I didn¡¯t expect the centipede to have such an extraordinary origin. Xiaoqing, I won¡¯t lie to you: this item holds divine powers and can help me in my cultivation, but I had no idea how to use it. Since you know its origin, do you have a solution?¡± Zhou Qing listened and thought carefully. After a while, he replied, ¡°There might be a way, but I would need two or three days to figure it out.¡± ¡°Alright, I will leave this matter to you then.¡± Lu Yuan agreed immediately. Looking at the Blood Jade Centipede, it didn¡¯t seem like it would spoil within just a few days. He could wait for this small amount of time.. Chapter 99 - Chapter 99: Chapter 78: Poison Removal Medicine Making Chapter 99: Chapter 78: Poison Removal Medicine Making Translator: 549690339 Three days passed in the blink of an eye. On this day, after Lu Yuan had finished an hour¡¯s exercise in the morning, he went, as usual, to check on his apprentice. Upon entering the room, the strong scent of herbs still attacked his senses, but to accompany, a faint aroma of ink also hung in the air. In the room, Zhou Qing was propped up on the bed, with a small table setup in front of him, strewn with paper and ink, and he was feverishly writing. Seeing this scene, Lu Yuan frowned, ¡°Xiaoqing, didn¡¯t I tell you? There is no urgency, if there aren¡¯t any ideas now, none will come. Anyway, the Blood Jade Centipede won¡¯t spoil so soon, there¡¯s plenty of time to think.¡± Ever since he had given his apprentice a task three days ago, the young man had been thinking about it day and night, pushing aside the needs of sleep or food, completely. He was engrossed in thinking of a solution to the issue of handling the Blood Jade Centipede. His apprentice¡¯s obsessive state moved Lu Yuan, stirring a feeling of sympathy. He had tried many times to force Zhou Qing to rest. But with each attempt, Zhou Qing would nod his agreement, only to get busy again as soon as Lu Yuan turned his back. Simply refusing to listen to advice. ¡°I¡¯m fine.¡± Zhou Qing raised his head when he heard Master arrive, flashed a smile over his slightly pale face. Despite the tiredness on his face, his eyes were brimming with excitement. He said excitedly, ¡°Master, I thought of a way.¡± ¡°You¡¯ve found a solution.¡± His apprentice¡¯s words surprised Lu Yuan immensely, immediately forgetting all else. Zhou Qing nodded vigorously, ¡°Yeah, while researching the Blood Jade Centipede, I¡¯ve flipped through many medical books and remembered a lot of medical skills my father talked about in the past. I finally came up with a feasible solution. The specific method and procedures, I have written them all down. As long as the Master follows the process mentioned, it shouldn¡¯t be a problem. ¡® Lu Yuan took the paper and began to read it intently. His gaze quickly skipped over the lines, the contents rapidly emerging in his mind. After looking through a dozen or so pages, he tucked the papers away, his face unable to suppress his excitement. In order to practice martial arts, Lu Yuan had spent the last two years reading many of medical books, so he had a broad enough understanding of herbal medicine. So it was obvious at this moment that the method Zhou Qing had come up with was absolutely feasible. His apprentice had proposed such a feasible plan in just three days, which brought Lu Yuan immense surprise. ¡°Good, I read your solution, it¡¯s excellent. Looking at his apprentice, Lu Yuan spared no praise, ¡°Xiaoqing, your medical skill has certainly inherited the real merits of Dr Zhou. In a few years, I¡¯m sure you can completely inherit your family medical skills. ¡± Zhou Qing blushed a little at the praise, ¡°Not yet, I just want to help Master. And my medical skills are still far from my father¡¯s, I still have much to learn.¡± Lu Yuan encouraged, ¡°Indeed, you should continue to learn. Learning medical skills is indeed beneficial to martial arts. In the future, in terms of medical skills, I will need your help.¡± Jianghu is dangerous, and people are unpredictable. An apprentice like Zhou Qing, a trustworthy medical expert, is undoubtedly extremely important to Lu Yuan. Having such a person around not only helps in healing injuries or researching secret medicine but also lends significant support. Like now. If it weren¡¯t for Zhou Qing, even if he had the Blood Jade Centipede in his hands, without a proper way of using it, he could only use it like an incense. It wouldn¡¯t be as beneficial as it is now. Responding to his master¡¯s motivation, Zhou Qing nodded solemnly and said, ¡°I will strive to learn medical skills.¡± He actually will study medicine diligently. Not only to help his master, but also for himself to practice martial arts, and more importantly, to carry on the family tradition. ¡®The medical skills of the Zhou family cannot end in my hands.¡¯ That¡¯s what Zhou Qing thought in his heart. With the method to handle the Blood Jade Centipede in hand, Lu Yuan no longer disturbed his apprentice¡¯s rest. After procuring all the pens, inks, papers, and inkstones, he let Zhou Qing rest properly. Returning to his room, Lu Yuan took out the medicine-making process that his apprentice had compiled and started reading it meticulously. The method Zhou Qing used to handle the Blood Jade Centipede is divided into two steps. The first step is detoxification. The method of detoxification is a refinement method secretly passed down in the Zhou family, which can refine the poison of the Blood Jade Centipede, rendering it harmless. The specific process is written in the pages, detailing which steps and herbs to use. Lu Yuan just had to follow these steps. The second step is to neutralize medicinal properties. As the name suggests, it involves a variety of medicine formulations, to neutralize and optimize the medicinal effect of the Blood Jade Centipede, and bring it to its most effective state. About this aspect, Zhou Qing had already formulated a complete prescription after researching the properties of Blood Jade Centipede for three days. As long as the medicine is configured and processed according to this prescription, the centipede can be made into an important medicine. Even the rare herbs required in the prescription, Zhou Qing had them in place from the inventory of his family¡¯s clinic. Lu Yuan could just take them and use it. This showed Zhou Qing¡¯s initial plan and intentions from the start. At this, Lu Yuan was moved again, secretly making up his mind to train his apprentice well, to make him a top martial arts master within Jianghu. Only in this way can he repay his apprentice¡¯s filial piety. With the foolproof guide compiled by Zhou Qing, and Lu Yuan¡¯s basic knowledge on herbal medicine, it was not difficult to execute the operations mentioned within. So, on the next day, after fully understanding the guide, he immediately started dealing with the Blood Jade Centipede. Because Zhou Qing had a stock of rare primary medicines and the common auxiliary medicines could be directly purchased from the city clinic, it was not troublesome to prepare. It took only half a day to prepare all the medicines. He began extracting the poison from the Blood Jade Centipede. The process was smooth, and after making suitable medicine, and using the mature refining method of the Zhou family, Lu Yuan spent an afternoon to successfully extract the poison from the Blood Jade Centipede. ¡°This poison too is a treasure, can¡¯t waste it. I¡¯ll store it, it¡¯ll definitely be of use later. ¡± Looking at the small plate of dark red powder, the waste from extraction, Lu Yuan carefully scraped them into a little jade bottle, and secured it at his side. The effects of various drugs in Jianghu, Lu Yuan had already intensely experienced after the use of seven-step fragrance. The poison extracted from the Blood Jade Centipede, whether be its potency or its value, far exceeded that of the seven-step fragrance divine medicine. Despite this, it can only be used for poisoning, but that what makes it valuable. After all, in Lu Yuan¡¯s hands, this little bit of poison, at the critical moment, could become a deadly weapon. Naturally, it needs to be treasured. Having kept away the poison, Lu Yuan cleaned up everything and then took out the detoxified Blood Jade Centipede to start the second step ¨C neutralizing medicinal properties. In this step, the Blood Jade Centipede will be converted into a strong medicine. Upon consumption, it can make significant progress in divine skills and achieve major success in martial arts. With this motivation, Lu Yuan intensively began making the medicine.. Chapter 100 - Chapter 100: Chapter 79: Breaking Through the Second Tier Chapter 100: Chapter 79: Breaking Through the Second Tier Translator: 549690339 rlWvo days later. The sky is slightly clear, and the sunlight is just right. Lu Yuan sits under the corridor pavilion outside his room, the autumn wind blowing gently, rustling the curtains and bringing a refreshing coolness. At the end of summer and the beginning of autumn, outside in the garden pond, the insects are releasing their last bit of enthusiasm, screeching loudly. However, this symphony in the courtyard fails to attract the attention of the master in the pavilion, not even a glance. Lu Yuan¡¯s gaze is firmly fixed on the jade bottle on the table in front of him. Under the translucent warm white jade, one can see the brilliant red inside the bottle. Taking a deep breath, he opens the jade bottle, and a wave of exotic fragrance greets him. Inside the bottle, there are five peanut-sized red pills lying quietly. This is the result of his efforts during this time. The entire Blood Jade Centipede, along with a large amount of auxiliary medicine, has been transformed into these five pills in front of him. ¡°Let¡¯s see how divine this Divine Medicine I¡¯ve worked so hard for really is¡­¡± Muttering to himself, Lu Yuan takes out a pill, swallows it, and ingests the fruit of his labor over the past few days. One breath, two breaths, three breaths. Three breaths after the pill enters his stomach, the medicinal power spreads rapidly. A warm current emerges from his abdomen and quickly flows throughout his body along his meridians. As this warm current moves, every cell in his body seems to be awakened, rejoicing and absorbing the warm flow. ¡°Mmm¡­¡± An indescribable pleasure, accompanied by the movement of the warm current, quickly envelops Lu Yuan¡¯s entire body, making him involuntarily moan. However, compared to this pleasure and warmth, what excites him even more is that his inner strength starts to circulate automatically along his meridians without his own control due to the effect of the warm current. Each time it circulates through the meridians, a portion of the active warm current in the body is integrated into the inner strength, making it even stronger. Round after round, in the blink of an eye, his inner strength has autonomously cycled through more than ten rounds. During this process, it has also increased by nearly ten percent. The sudden rapid growth in inner strength makes Lu Yuan feel as if his meridians can barely withstand it, swelling and aching. This sensation jolts him back to his senses from the trance. Not daring to hesitate, he immediately uses his Divine Sense to take control of the rampaging inner strength within his body. He then directs it to start breaking through the acupoints of his meridians. Within his inner vision. With a seemingly ¡°pop¡± sound, the acupoints that had been blocking Lu Yuan from making further progress were broken open in an instant under the onslaught of the rapidly growing inner strength. The delighted inner strength suddenly finds a new outlet, rapidly pouring in, and begins to circulate and perfect the new meridian network. At the same time, the warm current within his body follows. Under the warmth, the slight damage caused by the violent breakthrough of the acupoints is immediately healed by the warm current. Not only is it restored to its original state, but it is even stronger than before. The recovered acupoints quickly start to function. The qi and blood in his body, activated by the warm current, instantly begin to combine with Lu Yuan¡¯s Divine Sense under the guidance of the acupoints, giving birth to new inner strength. This newly born inner strength, in combination with the swelling inner strength within the warmth, instantly replenishes the meridians throughout his body. The sense of swelling and pain that had just been relieved returns once more. With the previous experience in mind, this time Lu Yuan does not hesitate, continuing to mobilize his surging inner strength to break through the next meridian. ¡°Pop! Pop! Pop!¡± Within his inner vision, crisp sounds, one after another, continuously resound in his mind. Meanwhile, the acupoints in his meridians are continually being broken open one after another. The raging inner strength seems to have no end, rushing forward relentlessly. Under the onslaught of this torrent of inner strength, the remaining three acupoints of the triple energizer meridian are instantly broken through. And the third meridian that Lu Yuan has been cultivating is officially cleared. With the triple energizer meridian unblocked, the surging inner strength within his body shows no signs of stopping. If anything, it becomes even more ferocious with the three newly broken acupoints assisting it. Lu Yuan dares not obstruct it, so he continues to mobilize his inner strength to assault the fourth meridian, the pericardium meridian. With several more ¡°pop¡± sounds, four acupoints are broken through. Fortunately, by this time, the warm current within his body has gradually subsided, and the raging inner strength has slowly calmed down. The remaining warmth heals the four acupoints and then completely dissipates. After calming his inner strength and eventually returning it to his dantian, Lu Yuan slowly opens his closed eyes, looks around the quiet world, and breathes a long sigh of relief. Immediately, feeling the inner strength in his body that has increased by nearly half, he can¡¯t help but have an expression of joy on his face: ¡°The potency of this medicine is indeed incredible.¡± Just now, a single pill helped Lu Yuan clear a meridian, saving him a year of hard work. If it were an ordinary person, that would be three years saved. This effect truly deserves the title of Divine Medicine. Looking at the time, the sky has already turned dark. After all the breakthroughs and acupoint-opening during the cultivation session, although refreshing, time has passed quickly. Perhaps it’s because the pills supplied all the necessary resources for this consumption that, although Lu Yuan¡¯s inner strength has increased by nearly half, he does not feel hungry at this moment. He had instructed beforehand that he should not be disturbed during these days of closed-door cultivation, and now this little garden has become his exclusive territory. ¡°Since that¡¯s the case, let¡¯s continue taking medicine and cultivating.¡± His gaze moves to the table, and he takes out another pill from the jade bottle, swallows it, then closes his eyes and begins a new round of cultivation. Sunrise and sunset, the stars shift. As the sky darkens and brightens, the pills in the jade bottle disappear one by one, leaving only one remaining. In the blink of an eye, another three days have passed. At this moment, a layer of fine dust has accumulated on Lu Yuan¡¯s body, and a little morning mist has condensed on it, staining him with dirt. However, he is completely unaware of all this, his eyes tightly closed, as if immersed in his inner world, untainted by the outside. As time trickles by, eventually, when the sun is at its zenith near noon, Lu Yuan¡¯s tightly shut eyes finally slowly open, and he awakens. ¡°How long has it been?¡± Lu Yuan emerges from his trance, looks at the dust on his body, and then the sky outside, for a moment, he is somewhat lost. But soon, he stops dwelling on those thoughts. Instead, he sinks his Divine Sense into his mind and finds that the data in his attribute panel has changed again. [Name: Lu Yuan] [Talent: Immortality] [Age: 20] [Realm: postnatal (second-rate)J [Martial Arts: Cloud Palm (Peak of Third Layer)] [Skills: Hunting Traps (Perfect) Crude Knife Technique (Perfect) Advanced Archery (Major Success) Medical Skill (Minor Success)¡­] ¡°Finally¡­ second-rate.¡± Gazing at the realm and martial arts displayed in the attribute panel, as well as the information there, Lu Yuan can¡¯t help but shed tears. After nearly five years since his transmigration, he has finally become a formidable force in the world of Jianghu.. Chapter 101 - Chapter 101: Chapter 80 Brother Lu, Lust for Women, Moderate it…… Chapter 101: Chapter 80 Brother Lu, Lust for Women, Moderate it¡­¡­ Translator: 549690339 Channeling six meridians ranks one as a secondary tier in the Jianghu, also known as a secondary martial arts master. In those prestigious sects, such strength is enough to hold a senior position like an elder. Locally, a secondary martial arts master can establish a gang or sect and be the king of the area. If a hierarchy must be drawn. Primary martial arts masters, can be termed as Fu-Level, with this strength, they can rule a Fu City. For more information, refer to the Iron Sword Sect. Secondary martial arts masters can be classified as county-level, with this strength, they can rule a county. For details, refer to the Black Wolf Gang. As for the third tier, they are merely errand runners, barely having enough power to delve into the Jianghu, hardly worth mentioning. ¡°So with my current strength, I could find a small county town, establish a gang, enjoy being surrounded by followers, and live my days as a king.¡± Lu Yuan compared his current strength with the people of the same level he had met, and suddenly felt a bit satisfied with himself. Don¡¯t underestimate the county-level. Being able to dominate a Jianghu county scene, that¡¯s pretty awesome, isn¡¯t it? In Da Yue, a local small county has at least tens of thousands of people, and some even have more than a hundred thousand people. If I could dominate a county, I could at least gather hundreds of people under me, in terms of prestige, am I not already on par with the County Magistrate who is referred to as the lord of a county? ¡°Brother Sun is now a ninth-grade education official. Above him, there are officials such as teaching advisers, chief clerks, county magistrates, and county captains, and on the same level, there are officials like catch officers and inspectors. In officialdom, in terms of power, he is just five tiers down, and could even possibly get squeezed out of the top ten.¡± But if I were to establish a gang, I would be the master of the gang and the leading figure in Jianghu.¡± Isn¡¯t this saying that my current achievement has surpassed Brother Sun?¡± Thinking of this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but chuckle. After Sun Siwen was promoted, he often boasted in his letters to him. Although he didn¡¯t say it outright, the intention to show off was quite obvious. When they met in Changning, he also mentioned it intently, obviously wanting to brag in front of his old friend. After these encounters, even though Lu Yuan didn¡¯t say anything, he had already been holding a breath of air in his heart, wanting to do something and then put his old friend in his place. But now. ¡°Hey, even though I am already a secondary martial arts master, able to rule a county, I won¡¯t tell him about it. Eh, I just love watching him show off.¡± Lu Yuan was suppressing a wicked thought in his heart: ¡°When I reveal it later, when I stop pretending, Brother Sun¡¯s expression will be absolutely priceless.¡± Thinking about the scene he might see in the future, he made up his mind not to tell Brother Sun about his breakthrough. After all, his good friend is only interested in officialdom, and doesn¡¯t know much about what happens in Jianghu, so whether he tells him or not doesn¡¯t really matter. Moreover, suddenly breaking through to secondary tier is a bit shocking to the world. To be cautious, it is indeed necessary to keep the news under wraps. In contrast, it would be more interesting to keep up the act and then show off later. After all, isn¡¯t that a must-have trait of the protagonist? As a traverser, Lu Yuan reluctantly considers himself half a protagonist. But he hasn¡¯t had the chance to show off and slap faces, which he felt was lacking some flavor. Lu Yuan was already looking forward to that day. Only he didn¡¯t know who would be unlucky enough to cross paths with him and become the face to be slapped. Having broken through to the secondary tier, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t rush out immediately, but spent half a day solidifying his increased Inner Strength. After resting for an afternoon and adjusting to the new realm, he ended his isolation. Then the first thing he did was to take a bath. Couldn¡¯t help it, he had been in isolation for several days, and there was a strong smell on his body, which was impacting his image. After the bath, he asked his mom to cook him a big table of food to reward his stomach and to offer to the gods of his five internal organs, which hadn¡¯t been offered to in days. Right after that, Lu Yuan went out and headed straight for the Red Phoenix Building in the city. Now that his cultivation had advanced, how could he not celebrate? Just so happened he hadn¡¯t been with a lady for a few months, so he planned to relive the experience today. Of course, it¡¯s the kind of experience that starts from emotions and stops at respecting customs. Lu Yuan was a principled and determined person. Things that he should not do, he absolutely will not do, no matter how tempting. Although Red Phoenix Building has the word ¡°phoenix¡± in it, it must be said that the quality and number of girls here are a notch below those in the Red Sleeves Pavilion. But it is understandable. The Red Sleeves Pavilion is the top-notch brothel in Fu City, while the Red Phoenix Building is merely the top-notch one in a remote small county. It would be strange if there wasn¡¯t a big gap between the two. Luckily, the girls here, although not good at playing chess or painting, nor can they brew tea or read scriptures, maybe it¡¯s the local feature, the girls here sing in an exceptionally ethereal and pleasant way. Especially those Miao girls, their personalities are much more lively than Yue women, and they are also much more passionate. For that voice, he couldn¡¯t help but book her for three straight days, doing nothing but listening to Miss Xiao Li sing for him from morning till evening. Sometimes when he was pleased, Lu Yuan would even teach Xiao Li a few songs that he liked to listen to in his previous life. For instance, songs like being Fox Charming, Itchy, Moon and Wind etc. Or he would ask her to sing some Yunnan folk songs, it was a whole lot of fun. After singing a few songs, even Xiao Li, who has seen some things, couldn¡¯t help being embarrassed, and several times she broke her defense and directly scolded Silver Music. But even so. Although these songs are odd and old, they are extremely enticing when sung by the girls. Quite a few of them specifically ran to Lu Yuan to learn, planning to sing to their guests to boost business after they¡¯ve learned. Lu Yuan was very generous in teaching them. When it came to teaching, he was definitely not inferior to anyone. Happy time always causes people to indulge. Lu Yuan ended up staying in the building for ten days, and each day he lay in his debauchery, he nearly couldn¡¯t get up. In the end, it was Sun Siwen who, having nearly finished his exam cram school, was left with some free time. Then, when he heard that his good friend was hiding in a brothel all day and not striving for progress, he couldn¡¯t stand it anymore, fearing something might happen, and came to pull him out on purpose. ¡°Brother Lu, you are a person with a firm mind, practicing martial arts day in day out, how could you be so addicted to beauty? On the way back, Sun Siwen scolded: ¡°It¡¯s actually no big deal fancying beauty. Even sage once said, ¡®food and sex are human nature.¡¯ If you like women, you might as well find a good family, I can be your matchmaker.¡± Just remember not to indulge yourself in it, everything should be in moderation.¡± Know this, drink is intestinal poison, and sex is a bone scraping knife. Overindulgence in sex for a long time will cause the body to deteriorate. Brother Lu, as a martial artist, you should understand this principle better than I do.¡± You need to engage with women in moderation¡­¡± Grand Tutor Sun had a tone of a person with experience, imparting it to Lu Yuan.. Chapter 102 - Chapter 102: Chapter 81: Cultivation Method Conversion Chapter 102: Chapter 81: Cultivation Method Conversion Translator: 549690339 In response to his best friend¡¯s sincere advice, Lu Yuan expressed that he would definitely accept it with humility. In fact, he also felt that he had been a bit indulgent these days. He had agreed to only indulge for three days, so how could he have been immersed for ten days? That was ten whole days. When he thought about how he had spent the last ten days listening to songs and being a teacher, without practicing martial arts for even a day, Lu Yuan felt a bit guilty. Over the years, he became accustomed to a daily routine and practiced martial arts accordingly; this was the first time he had neglected his practice for ten days. It should be known that the last time he went to see Miss Xiao Hong, he only stayed for seven days. Moreover, at that time, he was learning Taoist Classics, which fundamentally belonged to martial arts practice and thus did not neglect his true calling. ¡°Could it be that I¡¯ve degraded?¡± Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but think, then quickly shook his head. How could that be? He would never degrade himself; it must have been that the demonesses like Xiao Li had cast their charm spells on him, bewitching him. ¡°Yes, that¡¯s it, there¡¯s no doubt about it.¡± As Lu Yuan continually reaffirmed this, the guilt in his heart suddenly reduced by more than half. After leaving the Red Phoenix Building and returning to Sun Residence, Lu Yuan¡¯s life returned to normal. The martial arts practice he had abandoned was picked up again. However, although he resumed martial arts practice, his daily schedule had subtly changed. The reason was simple; Lu Yuan had mastered the Cloud Palm Mental Technique. Cloud Palm was originally just a second-rate martial skill; the Mental Technique recorded in it had only three levels, each level practicing two meridians. Before he went into seclusion, Lu Yuan had already practiced the third meridian. After obtaining the Blood Jade Centipede and using this Divine Blood Variant to cultivate the Divine Medicine, his strength significantly increased. Basically, one piece of Divine Medicine helped him break through a meridian. Lu Yuan went into seclusion for four days and consumed four pieces of Divine Medicine, breaking through a total of four meridians. As a result, the six meridians recorded in the Liuyun Palm Heart Method were all completed. From then on, he needed to cultivate other techniques. It was for this reason that, although there was still one piece of Divine Medicine left, Lu Yuan did not continue to go into seclusion. Because he had already cultivated all the meridians he could. Continuing to take the Divine Medicine would only increase his Inner Strength and have no other effect. Using such a valuable medicine to help break through and only using it to increase Inner Strength would be too wasteful. ¡°So the next priority is to first understand the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra, a first-rate Mental Technique, and grasp the operating principles of its meridians before cultivating it.¡± Lu Yuan confirmed his next plan and began to execute it. As a first-rate Mental Technique, the content recorded in the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra was undoubtedly more profound and subtle than the Cloud Palm. The most obvious point was the various Taoist-specific terms that almost ran through the entire Mental Technique. Every page, every line, contained various Taoist terms, with numerous metaphors, literal meanings, and real meanings. It was for this reason that, despite having received this Mental Technique for three months, Lu Yuan was still unable to begin practicing it. This was not because he didn¡¯t want to, but rather because he hadn¡¯t learned it properly and didn¡¯t dare to practice recklessly. Practicing martial arts was not a safe thing. One misstep could lead to meridian disorder, which was life-threatening. ¡°In the coming days, I must find someone to systematically teach me Taoist Classics. Otherwise, relying solely on learning by myself, my progress will be too slow.¡± Lu Yuan also studied on his own during his daily life. Every day after practice, he devoted the time from 8:00 to 10:00 pm to self-study. During this time, he would read the Taoist Classics he had collected, as well as some miscellaneous and unusual books of this world, to enrich his experience as much as possible. But again, relying solely on self-study and with such a short time, the results were not significant. After four years of study, it was already a stretch for Lu Yuan to complete Cloud Palm¡¯s Mental Technique. Now, trying to practice the higher-level Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra required more than his current abilities. ¡°However, finding a good teacher to study Taoist Classics is an issue. The choice of candidate is a problem¡­¡± When Lu Yuan thought of a teacher, the first person that came to his mind was Sun Siwen, who had been teaching supplementary courses to all the scholars in the county these days. But as soon as Sun Siwen came to mind, Lu Yuan ruled him out. ¡°Brother Sun won¡¯t do. Although he¡¯s a juren and knowledgeable enough, his learning is focused on Confucian classics and doesnt involve Taoism.¡± Lu Yuan recognized Sun Siwen¡¯s knowledge. However, he was not a superhuman who had mastered all three religions; he was just a scholar who was proficient in Confucianism. Although Confucianism and Taoism had some connections, they essentially belonged to two different schools, and there were significant differences between them. Turning to Sun Siwen would only lead him in the opposite direction. Other than Sun Siwen, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t think of anyone suitable for the job. ¡°Forget it. I¡¯ll study the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra myself for a little while longer and become more familiar with it, laying the foundation. A few days later, when Brother Sun has some time off, I¡¯ll ask him if he knows any Taoist experts nearby.¡± Lu Yuan suppressed his impatience and began to focus on studying the Mental Technique. Although his foundation in Taoism was not deep, after four years of study, he had some groundwork in place. When it came to the first two superficial layers of the Mental Technique, he encountered little difficulty in learning them. So for Lu Yuan, now was the time to start practicing, transforming the Internal Strength of Cloud Palm according to the circulation route of Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra¡¯s Internal Strength, and breaking through once again. These tasks were not difficult. After all, the human body has only twelve main meridians and specific acupoints, which are fixed. The circulation routes of various Mental Techniques must pass through those meridians and acupoints. The only differences were the order, route, urgency, angle, etc., of the circulation of Inner Qi. However, these differences were secondary and belonged to the realm of details. For martial artists, the real focus was to open up acupoints and connect meridians. Having connected six meridians by now, Lu Yuan had overcome the most challenging aspect of martial arts, with all the corresponding acupoints broken through. At present, all he needed to do was to adjust his Internal Strength once more according to the habits of Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra, change the nature of his Internal Strength, and complete the transitional cultivation of the technique. Although this process was a bit tedious, it was not difficult and merely time -consuming. According to Lu Yuan¡¯s estimate, it would take about a year to complete the transitional cultivation of the Mental Technique, which was already fast, considering the substantial differences between the two unrelated Mental Techniques. ¡°So I still have a year of buffer time. Within this year, I can first transform the Internal Strength of the six meridians, and then continue to practice more advanced Mental Techniques after the transformation is complete.¡± As there was still plenty of time, Lu Yuan was not in a hurry. Moreover, having broken through to a second-rate Internal Strength, his own abilities had significantly improved, and the pressure to ensure his safety was greatly relieved in the short term. As a result, his pace naturally slowed down at this point. After all, one cannot always be on edge.. Chapter 103 - Chapter 103: Chapter 82 Seeking the Dao in Qjngyun Chapter 103: Chapter 82 Seeking the Dao in Qjngyun Translator: 549690339 After deciding to slow down his own pace, Lu Yuan¡¯s daily schedule finally took shape and turned into this. He would get up at six in the morning to practice palm skills for an hour, then have breakfast, and then read for an hour. After lunch, he would take a short break at noon and spend two more hours practicing mental techniques in the afternoon. After dinner, he would practice mental techniques for another hour, read for an hour, and then go to bed. His schedule was still packed, practically filling up all of his time. The only difference from before was that the hour he used to practice mental techniques in the morning was now replaced by reading. Well, even though he decided to slow down his pace, the already busy Lu Yuan just couldn¡¯t stop. However, this daily schedule which was packed with constant effort and progress had its appeal. Hard work and self-discipline were the essence of a person¡¯s strength. It was because of this that Lu Yuan was able to break through the second-rate realm in just four years, accomplishing what others would take twenty years to achieve. What, did he rely on external assistance? Or the Blood Jade Centipede? Yes, both of these were indeed of great help to him, Lu Yuan admitted. But the talent of immortality allowed him to have several times more cultivation time than ordinary people. The problem was, without willpower, even if you had several times more time, could you really spend it on the right things? One would be afraid that most people, even with their unique talents, would not cherish and utilize them well, instead squandering their precious time on pleasure-seeking activities. Willpower alone has stumped countless people throughout history. As for the Blood Jade Centipede. If it weren¡¯t for Lu Yuan¡¯s hard work in the first four years, he would have been killed by the centipede the moment he saw it. There would have been no chance for later counterattacks, the acquisition of fortuitous encounters, and the rapid progress in his martial arts skills. ¡°So, I, Lu Yuan, have made it to where I am today, all due to my own efforts, and all other external support and fortuitous encounters are just icing on the cake,¡± Lu Yuan often couldn¡¯t help but think in his late-night training sessions. Subsequently, he would become more motivated in his practice. Of course, Lu Yuan did not spend every day practicing and recharging, occasionally he would relax as well. After more than a month of cramming at the tutoring class, Sun Siwen finally announced the end of the tutoring sessions as the Imperial Examination approached. All the students who participated in the tutoring classes held a graduation banquet at the County government office, and after that, the local capture officers personally escorted them to the examination. The county magistrate treated this Imperial Examination as his guarantee for maintaining his position. Not only did the County government office provide three hundred silver tales, but it also mobilized the local gentry to donate another three hundred silver tales, for a total of six hundred silver tales, which served as the travel expenses for the twenty-one test-takers from the county. During this time, Sun Siwen, the xueyu (education official), held the tutoring sessions, and this time, the patrol and capture officers escorted the test-takers with ten men from the county government office, showing extreme consideration. All of this was to hope for good results in the exam, so that the county magistrate could continue to hold his position, and at the very least, not be demoted. Now that all the efforts and preparations have been completed and the test-takers are on their way, their fate is in their own hands. Meanwhile, Sun Siwen was finally able to take some time off after a month of continuous teaching. During his break, Lu Yuan also took a break from his daily schedule to spend time with his good friend, chatting, drinking, and having fun, to relax. The days seemed to go back to the time they spent in Yangmei Town. Good friends gathering together, talking about everything under the sky while boiling wine with green plums, it was very enjoyable. One day, during their time in the flower garden watching the fish, Lu Yuan mentioned his recent distress. ¡°Brother Lu wants to find someone to study Taoist Classics?¡± Sun Siwen was surprised when he heard of this request. He knew that his friend had a fondness for the matters of immortals and gods, but that was only limited to enjoying some mythical stories. What was going on now? Could it be he had listened to too many tales of the elusive immortals and had become obsessed with pursuing the Tao, wanting to become a monk? Thinking of this, Sun Siwen couldn¡¯t help but worry and wanted to persuade his good friend otherwise. This was not because he didn¡¯t believe in the existence of immortals and gods. In fact, after experiencing two mysterious examinations, Sun Siwen¡¯s belief in the existence of immortals and gods was almost certain. However, even though he believed, it was not easy to find immortals. He was worried that after all the trouble his friend would go through, he would end up with nothing to show for it after losing a fortune and half a lifetime, leaving him in a pitiful situation. Such an outcome would be too heartbreaking. Fortunately, Lu Yuan¡¯s next words eased his concern: ¡°Yes. As my martial arts progress. I have gradually encountered bottlenecks and feel Dowerless. The contents of the mental techniques I practice have become increasingly difficult to understand, and it is difficult for me to continue practicing on my own. So, I thought about finding an experienced teacher in Taoist Classics and learning from them. If I can learn more about the Daoist knowledge, it would help me in my martial arts practice. Brother Sun, you have been in Changning for a long time, do you happen to know anyone like that?¡± ¡°I see.¡± Sun Siwen understood after hearing the explanation and began to ponder. As a scholar, his studies were mainly in Confucian classics, and the people he usually dealt with were also scholars. He knew very little about Buddhism and Taoism. So, when he was asked, he was somewhat at a loss for an answer. However, after thinking about it for a long time, Sun Siwen did remember someone and said thoughtfully, ¡°There is someone like that. The county magistrate who works in the county government office has some free time and likes to study Taoist classics. He often visits the temples to ask for guidance. I remember once in a casual conversation with him, he mentioned his favorite place to go was a Qingyun View in the county. He said that there was a Daoist named Qi Yun there who was very skilled in Dao Law, well-versed in the internal alchemy method, and was a true cultivator. These two would often get together to study the Way of Alchemy. If you want to study Taoist classics, you should definitely go find this Qi Yun Daoist.¡± ¡°Are there such figures in Changning County?¡± When Lu Yuan heard Sun Siwen¡¯s description of the Daoist Qi Yun, he couldn¡¯t help but be amazed. He knew that there were immortals and gods in this world. However, he had always been unable to find one because of the lack of connections. But this Daoist Qi Yun, skilled in Dao Law, the internal alchemy method, and cultivation, seemed very powerful. Could it be that he was one of the fabled cultivators? For a while, Lu Yuan became very interested in Qingyun View and Daoist Qi Yun. Are you interested in him, Brother Lu? As a good friend, seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s expression, Sun Siwen knew what he was thinking and laughed, ¡°By coincidence, the County Magistrate and I have both taken these few days off, and he should be going to the Qingyun View as well. We can make an appointment to go to the Qingyun View together. As a friend of Qi Yun Daoist, his recommendation would be good to meet the Daoist and see if he¡¯s really asg powerful as he seems.¡± Lu Yuan was overjoyed and immediately said, ¡°Then I¡¯ll rely on you, Brother Sun.¡± Upon seeing his friend¡¯s excited expression, Sun Siwen couldn¡¯t help but shake his head and laugh, ¡®You¡­.¡± Chapter 104 - Chapter 104: Chapter 83: County Magistrate Kong Chapter 104: Chapter 83: County Magistrate Kong Translator: 549690339 Because he had promised Lu Yuan, Sun Siwen went out to visit the county magistrate that afternoon. All the official residences of Changning County are built together, just like the residence of the education official, all are located in Changning Fang. So if Sun Siwen wants to go to the county magistrate¡¯s house, he just needs to walk a few hundred meters out the door. Today is a day off, so if there¡¯s nothing special, most officials would stay at home to rest. After all, according to Da Yue¡¯s official system, officials can take two days off each month, each lasting three days, in the middle and at the end of the month. That is to say, an official has to work for twelve consecutive days before they are allowed to have three days off. Although official work is generally not tiring, especially in remote small counties like Changning, there are fewer tasks and it¡¯s actually quite relaxing for officials. But doing even light work for twelve days in a row, just clocking in every day would be exhausting. So if nothing important is happening, most people would choose to stay at home with their families and not bother to wander outside! Of course, all of this does not apply if they are going to a brothel. After all, they are scholars. Even if they¡¯re officials, they¡¯re also scholars, how could they lack romanticism? The county magistrate of Changning County is named Kong Yuzhu. Just like his name suggests, he is a gentleman like warm jade and green bamboo, and he also likes to cultivate and seek the Dao. Therefore, he is not very interested in worldly temptations. Therefore, after his day off today, he stayed at home, immersed in reading the Taoist Classics in his study, paying little attention to the resentful gaze of his wife. County Magistrate Kong often claims that as long as he can enjoy a cup of tea and read half a book in his leisure time, his life is fulfilled. This reveals his personality. Kong Yuzhu was somewhat surprised by Sun Siwen¡¯s visit. As the nominal deputy in the county, the county magistrate¡¯s position seems honorable, ranking seventh in the hierarchy, just below the county magistrate who is seventh in rank. But the relationship between the first-hand and the second-hand has always been complicated. It has always been the case in the officialdom of Da Yue that a county is managed by the county magistrate who takes charge of all affairs, while the county magistrate, in name only, doesn¡¯t really do much. In comparison, it¡¯s somewhat like the relationship between the emperor and the crown prince. Before the county magistrate leaves, the county magistrate is nothing more than a decoration and has no power at all. That¡¯s why the county magistrate of Changning County indulges in cultivation every day and often goes to the Taoist temple. Apart from his heart being inclined towards Taoism, it¡¯s also because he has nothing to do and has a lot of free time on his hands. Inside the living room, after serving the tea, Kong Yuzhu looked at Sun Siwen sitting opposite him and asked directly, ¡°Does Grand Tutor Sun have some private matters to discuss with me today?¡± As a deputy in the county town, he is well aware that he is just a figurehead, so he has accepted reality and has not competed for power with the county magistrate. Similarly. Since Sun Siwen, a subordinate of the county magistrate, has come to him, the unused deputy, it¡¯s certainly not for official business, but most likely for personal reasons. Indeed, after he asked, Sun Siwen laughed and said, ¡°I do have a request. Previously, when I had a gathering with Mr. Kong, I heard that Mr. Kong liked to study the Taoist Classics in his daily life. Coincidentally, a friend has recently come to my house. Although he is a martial artist, he also likes to study the Taoist Classics every day. However, in the last few days, my friend told me that he had many doubts after reading the classics alone, but due to his dullness, he has been unable to comprehend them. So he asked for my help to find a good mentor who can solve his doubts. So I thought about it and remembered that Mr. Kong once said that there was a Qi Yun Taoist in Qingyun View who was a real practitioner with profound knowledge of the Dao. Isn¡¯t he the best candidate? But my friend and I have no previous relationship with Qi Yun Taoist and we fear we would be turned away if we showed up uninvited. So, I am asking Mr. Kong for help and hope that you could introduce us. After he finished speaking, Sun Siwen stood up and deeply bowed to Kong Yuzhu. ¡°Mr. Sun, there is no need for such formalities.¡± Kong Yuzhu quickly stood up, helped Sun Siwen up, and then smiled, ¡°What¡¯s to fret about? It¡¯s just an introduction. Rest assured, I will take care of this. I was planning to go to Qingyun View tomorrow. If Mr. Sun and your friend are available, you can go with me.¡± Sun Siwen happily said, ¡°Of course, I am available. Thank you very much, Mr. Kong.¡± ¡°Hey, no need to thank me.¡± Kong Yuzhu waved his hand dismissively, then curiously said, ¡°I heard that Mr. Sun¡¯s friend had arrived a few days ago. However, I didn¡¯t expect him to be a martial artist who also likes to study the Taoist classics. This is quite surprising.¡± Because of his different status, Kong Yuzhu has a deep understanding of the martial artist of Jianghu and does not have the prejudice of ordinary scholars. He knows that these people, who possess terrifying martial arts, hold a position in the world that isn¡¯t inferior to scholars like him. In fact, because martial artists hold all power within themselves, they act more freely when carrying out tasks. Compared to officials with power in their hands, they couldn¡¯t be more free. A strong martial artist is not inferior to an official. Since Mr. Sun¡¯s friend can befriend such an education official, he must be one of these strong martial artists. Therefore, Kong Yuzhu does not discriminate against the still unseen Lu Yuan, but instead looks upon him favorably. For those who work as officials, having a few strong martial artists as friends isn¡¯t a bad thing. On the contrary, it¡¯s very convenient and a great benefit. ¡®Blessed is Mr. Sun for befriending such people.¡¯ Looking at Sun Siwen, Kong Yuzhu¡¯s impression of him changed a bit. After receiving a clear reply from Kong Yuzhu, Sun Siwen chatted with the county magistrate for a bit longer before saying goodbye. When he returned home, he told Lu Yuan the good news. Lu Yuan was extremely pleased and said gratefully, ¡°This is all thanks to Brother Sun. Otherwise, it would be impossible for me to persuade the county magistrate to introduce us.¡± From the topics of their final conversation, it seemed that Mr. Kong was quite interested in Lu Yuan and even suggested that befriending a martial artist would be beneficial to his career. It was clear from his words that he valued Lu Yuan highly. ¡®It seems I still know too little about these Jianghu martial artists.¡¯ Sun Siwen sighed and shook his head, ¡°It¡¯s nothing. Actually, County Magistrate Kong is quite interested in you too. You should prepare well for tomorrow, Brother Lu. If you can make friends with Mr. Kong, it would be very beneficial for you in the future.¡± Although Kong Yuzhu is now the second in command, his position as county magistrate is only temporary. After his three-year term, he will definitely be promoted and sent out. By then, he will be a county magistrate of his own jurisdiction. Being able to build a good relationship with an incoming county magistrate is, of course, beneficial for anyone.. Chapter 105 - Chapter 105: Chapter 84: Heart Towards the Dao Chapter 105: Chapter 84: Heart Towards the Dao Translator: 549690339 On the second day, at the agreed-upon time, Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen set out on time, planning to meet up with Kong Yuzhu. After being reminded by Sun Siwen yesterday, Lu Yuan today deliberately changed his attire. He went from wearing a white martial artist¡¯s outfit to wearing a light blue scholar¡¯s robe. Moreover, with his now-perfected makeup skills, coupled with his scholarly appearance, Lu Yuan actually looked like a refined young gentleman. If he appeared on the streets, he could definitely charm countless ladies. However, Lu Yuan¡¯s ambitions were no longer focused on this. Otherwise, with his talents, he could have left behind a legendary tale of chivalry and romance in Jianghu. His appearance indeed had the desired effect. When he met with Kong Yuzhu, the county town official looked at Lu Yuan¡¯s refined appearance and was immediately impressed. Without waiting for him to speak, he took the initiative to say, ¡°This must be Layman Lu. My name is Kong Yuzhu, and I have long admired your reputation.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s public identity was that of a martial artist in Jianghu. According to the customs of the time, he would normally be referred to as a young master or a chivalrous hero. However, he was now interacting with Sun Siwen, a scholar, and was currently studying the Taoist Classics. His appearance was even more like a scholar at this moment. No matter which aspect one considered, there was no trace of his Jianghu background. On the contrary, he looked more like a scholar than the average scholar. Therefore, Kong Yuzhu changed his original address of chivalrous hero to Layman Lu, showing a sense of closeness with the Daoist title. Lu Yuan understood the other party¡¯s intentions and immediately adjusted his original words, smiling and saying, ¡°My name is Lu Yuan, nice to meet you Kong Layman. ¡± ¡°Hahaha! ¡± Kong Yuzhu was indeed very pleased with Lu Yuan¡¯s appellation, laughing heartily and turning to Sun Siwen, saying, ¡°Mr. Sun, I have prepared the carriage. It¡¯s getting late, let¡¯s hit the road.¡± He did not address Sun Siwen as Mr. Sun. Today¡¯s purpose was not official business but rather discussing the mysteries of the Dao, so there were no officials, only laymen seeking the Dao together. Sun Siwen also understood his meaning, following with a smile, ¡°In that case, please lead the way, Kong Layman.¡± The three of them laughed heartily and boarded the carriage together. Qingyun View was quite far from the county town, about twenty miles away. It would take approximately half an hour to get there even by carriage. Considering the tedious journey, Kong Yuzhu had prepared some snacks in the carriage. The few of them sat in the carriage, enjoying the snacks and chatting. Although they were just chatting casually, the main topic between Lu Yuan and Kong Yuzhu was about the Taoist Classics. Originally, Kong Yuzhu thought that Lu Yuan¡¯s interest in the Taoist Classics was limited to studying spells and stories of gods and ghosts, as this was the impression most people had of the Classics. However, after a detailed conversation, he was pleasantly surprised to discover that Lu Layman before him actually had his own understanding of the Taoist Classics. Although these understandings were still superficial, and there were even some errors in his basic knowledge, it was enough to confirm that he was genuinely studying and understanding the Classics. This made Kong Yuzhu feel extremely happy. Because it proved that Lu Yuan truly had a heart towards the Dao. For someone like Kong Yuzhu, who also had a heart towards the Dao, it was exhilarating to find a fellow Daoist. It is said that cultivation involves Wealth, Comrades, Ways, and Places. These are the four essentials of cultivation. Although Lu Yuan¡¯s current understanding of the Dao was still far from reaching the level of a Daoist companion, His desire for the Dao was commendable. Kong Yuzhu believed that as long as he guided and cultivated Lu Yuan diligently, he could soon have another fellow Daoist. As a result, his attitude towards Lu Yuan became increasingly respectful and amiable. Lu Yuan also held great admiration and respect for this county official who was deeply knowledgeable in the Dao. Because during their conversation, many of the doubts and questions he had while studying the Daoist books were answered by Kong Yuzhu in just a few words. Even in the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra, where the knowledge points involved in cultivation were not in the scope of Kong Yuzhu¡¯s practice, he was still able to provide some guidance and direction. With such an outstanding teacher, Lu Yuan even thought that there was no need for him to seek out Qi Yun Taoist and consult him about the Taoist Classics. Just learning from this County Magistrate Kong would be more than enough. However, as much as he thought this way, he knew that Kong Yuzhu, being a government official, could not possibly have much free time to teach him, even if his position was just for show and he had to go to the Government Office on time. To truly study the Taoist Classics, he would still have to find the real Daoist, Qi Yun Taoist. And after receiving Kong Yuzhu¡¯s guidance, he couldn¡¯t help but become even more curious and expectant about Qi Yun Taoist, whom Kong Yuzhu praised and admitted to being inferior to. Kong Layman was already so formidable. Then, what kind of demeanor must Qi Yun Taoist have? With such thoughts in mind, the three of them arrived at Qingyun View. Contrary to what Lu Yuan had imagined, when they arrived, he found that the Qingyun View he had been looking forward to was just a broken temple in the mountains. On the hillside, a low mud wall was full of pits, the main entrance was mottled, and after entering, there was a simple main hall for venerating god statues and a few small rooms next to it. These buildings were Qingyun View. ¡°surpnsea, aren¡¯t your¡± Kong Yuzhu noticed the astonishment of Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen. He stroked his beard and smiled, ¡°Actually, I was also quite surprised when I first came here. I never thought that there would be such a Daoist temple in this remote countryside. Moreover, what amazed me even more was that in this small Daoist temple, there was a real cultivator like Qi Yun Taoist.¡± But after talking with the Taoist, I gradually came to accept it. The glitz and glamour of the world are like fleeting clouds. If you can¡¯t attain longevity, you will turn to dust in a short few decades. In this case, what¡¯s the point of having more worldly possessions and wealth today? It¡¯s all just an illusion. So instead of wasting time on worldly distractions, why not focus on practicing the Dao, refining elixirs, transcending the mundane world, and achieving Feathered Ascension? When you become an Immortal, you can roam the heaven and earth, enjoying a long life. Wouldn¡¯t that be carefree and leisurely? Qi Yun Taoist understands this deeply, which is why he chose such a secluded and quiet place to get rid of external disturbances, commit to his heart, and practice the Dao Law. Compared to him, I can¡¯t let go of my worldly status and continue to waver in the official world. I¡¯m far from his realm.¡± Kong Yuzhu spoke of these things with a longing expression on his face. Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen looked at each other and had their thoughts about it. However, there was one thing they could see clearly. Their best friend didn¡¯t seem to agree with Kong Yuzhu¡¯s ideas and beliefs. However, people are different and have different ideals and pursuits, which was normal. They didn¡¯t say anything, just nodded with a smile, as if to say you¡¯re right. Kong Yuzhu didn¡¯t care about that either. Once he was in the Daoist temple, his mind drifted from focusing on Lu Yuan to this place. As soon as he entered, he laughed and said, ¡°Qi Yun Taoist, are you here? I, Kong Yuzhu, have come to discuss the Dao with you.¡± As his words fell, Soon, a long-bearded Daoist in a dark robe appeared, walking out from the front temple hall and approaching them.. Chapter 106 - Chapter 106: Chapter 85: The Immortal Fate is Profound Chapter 106: Chapter 85: The Immortal Fate is Profound Translator: 549690339 ¡°Fellow Daoist Kong.¡± Qi Yun Taoist looks about forty years old and gives off a worldly aura. As he sees Kong Yuzhu, he greets him cheerfully and looks at Lu Yuan and the others, puzzling, ¡°And these few are¡­¡± On hearing the query, Kong Yuzhu cheerfully replies, ¡°This is Layman Lu Yuan, who is also a person of the Daoist path. He has heard of your renowned name, Qi Yun Fellow Daoist, and thought of paying a visit. The one beside him is Layman Sun Siwen, a friend of Lu Yuan, who accompanied him.¡± Kong Yuzhu¡¯s emphasis in the introduction is placed on Lu Yuan, while Sun Siwen is mentioned in passing. Sure enough, upon hearing these words, Qi Yun Taoist¡¯s attention is primarily drawn to Lu Yuan. The Taoist¡¯s gaze briefly lingers on Sun Siwen. Sensing the scholar-like aura emanating from him, he quickly loses interest and swiftly moves on. Ultimately, when his gaze falls on Lu Yuan, his eyes light up. He perceives some characteristics in Lu Yuan that are somewhat similar to his own. Worldly, ethereal. These are the vibes one emanates after practicing the Taoist Classics. ¡°Layman Lu.¡± Qi Yun Taoist immediately perks up, greeting Lu Yuan with a smile. Finally realizing that he seems to have overlooked Sun Siwen, he turns his head and greets, ¡°Layman Sun.¡± ¡°Greetings, Daoist Leader.¡± ¡°Greetings, Temple Master.¡± Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen hurriedly return the salute. The Qi Yun Daoist Leader nods with a smile, ¡°No need for too many formalities; I am delighted to meet both laymen today. No need to stand here, please join me inside for a chat.¡± Concurrently, Kong Yuzhu has already entered the guest room like it was his own home, masterfully pushing open the door. Qi Yun Taoist chuckles as he sees this, ¡°Ah, this Kong Fellow Daoist.¡± Subsequently, he refrains from speaking further, proceeding to lead Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen into the room. The guest room of the Taoist temple is quite simple. There¡¯s little to no furniture and only a few straw mats are spread out. A small tea stove stands in the middle, with a few futons placed beside, serving as seats. Upon entering, Kong Yuzhu has already started to brew tea with considerable proficiency. While doing this, Kong Yuzhu starts to converse in a casual tone, explaining the purpose of Lu Yuan and the others¡¯ visit to the Qi Yun Taoist. ¡°The Layman wishes to learn the Taoist Classics from me?¡± said Qi Yun upon hearing this. Surprisingly looking at Lu Yuan. ¡°Yes.¡± Lu Yuan nods seriously and earnestly says, ¡°In recent days, I have been reading Taoist Classics and found them increasingly obscure. Each essence and Dao-law in the scripture is more challenging to comprehend. As I immerse myself in the vastness of Heaven and Earth, I increasingly realize the insignificance of human beings. I alone am unsure how long it will take to understand Dao-law. Having heard that Daoist Leader Qi Yun possesses profound knowledge in Dao-law and is a true Dao cultivator, I have sought Kong Layman¡¯s help in introducing me in the hope of learning Taoist Classics from you and resolve my confusion.¡± Upon hearing the request, Qi Yun Taoist does not respond immediately, instead scrutinizing Lu Yuan in detail. We have already mentioned previously. There is an aura similar to his own emanating from Lu Yuan. Looking closely now, Qi Yun Taoist¡¯s recognition of the similarity intensifies. Truth to be told. Since Lu Yuan started martial arts, beginning with Cloud Palm, what he practiced was the Daoist Mental Technique. The Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra, which he is currently transitioning to, is without a doubt an excellent Daoist Mental Technique. After practicing these two techniques for years, Lu naturally acquired a unique ethereal aura of Daoists. Furthermore, Lu Yuan has been studying the Taoist Classics for years. Although he hasn¡¯t accomplished a significant breakthrough, it has aided his cultivation of Qi The combination of the two yield exceptional results. If he were to walk down the street, even without wearing his Taoist robes, people might mistake him for an Immortal. It¡¯s for this reason that Kong Yuzhu and Qi Yun Taoist react differently upon meeting Lu Yuan. They subconsciously perceive him as a fellow Daoist. However, the Qi Yun Taoist is not the same as Kong Yuzhu; his level of cultivation is much higher. Living in such wilderness, alongside wild beasts and bandits, Qi Yun Taoist isn¡¯t just a simple Taoist. In reality, Qingyun View has a few Daoist Techniques passed down within. With martial arts abilities, Qi Yun Taoist could settle down in peace here. At this moment, Qi Yun Taoist, who practices Daoist Techniques, senses the same Daoist aura emanating from Lu Yuan. The intensity of this aura overshadows his own. The ethereal aura exceeds the purity of his internal strength, honed over decades of practice. This realization causes Qi Yun Taoist to feel deeply shocked. ¡®Either he possesses an Immortal Root or has an elite Daoist heritage. No, merely possessing heritage isn¡¯t sufficient. My Qingyun View¡¯s heritage isn¡¯t inferior and can be ranked among the top Daoist paths, yet it can¡¯t compare to Layman Lu. He must indeed have Immortal roots. This man has profound Immortal fate.¡¯ Of course, Qi Yun Taoist doesn¡¯t know that the purity of Lu Yuan¡¯s Qi derives from the jade piece gifted by Sun Siwen, and it isn¡¯t due to any Immortal root. Nonetheless, if you consider he is nearly immortal, having achieved longevity, then he is not entirely wrong. But one thing Qi Yun Taoist has indeed guessed right. Lu Yuan indeed possesses Immortal fate, with the jade piece acting as his Immortal fate. However, it cannot be utilized for now and can only be used to refine his Inner Strength. After making the above deduction, Qi Yun Taoist looks at Lu Yuan increasingly delighted and kindly, even a bit eagerly. As a cultivator, he naturally has a great affection for those who have Immortal roots and profound Immortal fate. If it weren¡¯t for him believing that Lu Yuan should have an existing mentor and that his Inner Qi achievement didn¡¯t seem weaker than his own, he would hardly be able to resist taking him as a disciple. This made Lu Yuan feel slightly uncomfortable by his gaze, subtly shifting his position and apprehensively thought if Qi Yun Daoist Leader had some strange habit. Thankfully, just as he was feeling uncomfortable, Qi Yun Taoist, who had been staring at him for a long time, finally spoke. All he heard was, ¡°If Fellow Daoist is willing to come and exchange Daoism Imowledge with me, it naturally is a good thing. You don¡¯t need to mention anything about asking for guidance. As a person of Immortal roots and profound Immortal fate, even without me, you will achieve great things in the future. If Fellow Daoist does not mind in the future, you can come and converse about the mysteries of the Dao and exchange cultivation experiences anytime, just like Fellow Daoist Kong. The grand doors of my Qingyun View will always be open for Fellow Daoist.¡± After confirming Lu Yuan¡¯s uniqueness, Qi Yun Taoist¡¯s address changes from the original ¡®layman¡¯ to ¡®Fellow Daoist¡¯. Everyone present is quite meticulous, quickly noticing the change. Kong Yuzhu glances at Lu Yuan, full of surprise, secretly thinking he originally thought he already valued Layman Lu enough, but it seems like it still wasn¡¯t enough. Qi Yun Fellow Daoist¡¯s cultivation far surpasses his own, and he must have noticed something, hence the change. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t think much of it; seeing Qi Yun Taoist agree with his request, he was overjoyed and immediately responded, ¡°Then from time to time, I shall come to bother Fellow Daoist.¡± Sun Siwen, who was on the side, watches all this unfold, smiling, feeling happy for his friend¡¯s wish being fulfilled.. Chapter 107 - Chapter 107: Chapter 86: Discussing the Path at the Dharma Assembly Chapter 107: Chapter 86: Discussing the Path at the Dharma Assembly Translator: 549690339 Qi Yun Daoist¡¯s willingness to acknowledge Lu Yuan as his fellow Daoist immediately put the atmosphere at ease in the room. Just then, the tea Kong Yuzhu brewed was ready, and she distributed it to everyone. As they sipped the fragrant tea, just like old times, Kong Yuzhu began discussing the Taoist Classics with Qi Yun Daoist. They talked about a scripture called the ¡°Jade Hua True Mysterious Flying Immortal Scripture,¡± which tells of a True Person named Jade Hua, detailing his methods and experiences of becoming immortal. This scripture is widely circulated in the Daoist community, and the Jade Hua True Person even passed down several Dao veins, all of which seem to be developing quite well. Many Daoist disciples revere Jade Hua True Person as their ancestor. Jade Hua True Person was also known as one of the twelve Jade Immortals in the Daoist sect, with a very high status. Qi Yun Revered Teacher enshrined Green Cloud True Person in his temple, hence the name Qingyun View. This was one of the True Persons in Daoist legends ¨C an immortal who became a True Person. However, whether it was status or strength, it was inferior to the Jade Hua True Person. Therefore, Qi Yun Daoist did not hold any prejudices and held great respect for the more highly regarded Jade Hua True Person in the Daoist sect. He also revered the scriptures left by him and studied them earnestly. As he talked with Kong Yuzhu, their various insights and understandings came naturally, and they often enlightened each other, thrillingly so. Even listening from the side, Lu Yuan was deeply engrossed. He had also read the ¡°Jade Hua True Mysterious Flying Immortal Scripture,¡± but the contents of the scripture were too profound, discussing various aspects of the Ascension Path, with many obscure and mysterious allusions, leaving the reader baffled. Even though he had read it several times, Lu Yuan could only understand the words on the surface, but the meaning and realm behind them were all lost to him. Listening to Kong Yuzhu and Qi Yun discussing the scripture at this moment, only then did he realize its true meaning and awakened from his earlier confusion. With these two great cultivators right in front of him, Lu Yuan naturally did not miss the opportunity, and started asking various questions about the difficulties he encountered while studying the scriptures. Seeing his earnestness in learning, Kong Yuzhu and Qi Yun looked at each other and smiled. They then put their own discussion aside and began answering questions for their young friend. Especially since this junior had an Immortal Root and a firm heart towards the Dao, they were all the more happy. The two of them believed that it wouldn¡¯t be long before their young friend would become their fellow Daoist, and at that time, they would have one more person to discuss the Dao with. How fortunate! How joyful! While Lu Yuan and the others were having a lively discussion, Sun Siwen, sitting next to them, found their exchange on the Taoist Classics and exchanging profound methods rather dull and wearying. As a pure scholar, he had no great interest in these mysterious Daoist practices. Instead of learning them, he would rather study the classics of the sages, learning more about the principles of governing a country. However, he came today as a guest accompanying his friend and could not act rudely. So, he endured and continued listening attentively. Forcing oneself to listen to things one dislikes is a painful affair. Thankfully, this suffering did not last too long. The debate only lasted till noon and then rested for a while. Following that, Qi Yun Daoist prepared lunch for their guests, As a martial arts practitioner, Qi Yun naturally enjoyed meat with every meal. Just like Lu Yuan, the Daoist Leader would occasionally go into the mountains to hunt for game to satisfy his cravings for meat. Today, they happened to arrive just as Qi Yun Daoist had hunted a wild deer in the mountains yesterday. To celebrate meeting a new fellow Daoist, Qi Yun Daoist decided to cook a whole deer feast for everyone himself. It must be said. The Daoist¡¯s cooking skills were quite good, at least Lu Yuan did not think the other¡¯s culinary skills were inferior to his own. Great culinary skills naturally led to great food, and everyone enjoyed the meal, leaving with full stomachs. After lunch and a short rest, in the afternoon, Lu Yuan and the others gathered again to passionately discuss the Dao. Sun Siwen excused himself, saying he was too full from lunch and needed to digest; he went for a stroll around the Taoist temple instead of participating. The other people noticed during the morning that Sun, the Layman, had little interest in the Taoist Classics, so they understood. Qi Yun Daoist, however, warned him not to stray too far from the Taoist temple, as he might encounter wild beasts and face danger. Lu Yuan sent an apologetic glance to his friend and continued to ask his questions. The discussion continued until it was evening again. Everyone reheated and filled their bellies with the leftovers from the deer feast at noon, then retired to their guest rooms in the Taoist temple to rest. In the night, Lu Yuan entered his inner vision, concentrated his mind, and started his practice according to his planned routine for the night, with an hour¡¯s worth of meditation. Time flowed slowly, and in the blink of an eye, an hour had passed. Lu Yuan drew his breath, gathered the scattered Inner Strength back into his Dantian, and opened his eyes, revealing a hint of joy in his eyes. ¡°It seems that my decision to seek guidance on the Taoist Classics was indeed right. Having just studied for a day with Daoist Qi Yun, I¡¯ve already received much help in my practice of the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra. At this rate, perhaps as I learn more and refine my understanding of the Dao, the speed of my transition could become even faster. It is possible that I may not need a year to complete the transition.¡± As he gained insights from the Taoist Classics he studied, his many unresolved questions were answered, and it drove Lu Yuan to further deepen his understanding of the Liuyun Palm Heart Method and the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra. As a result, the benefits he attained made his transitioning between the two mental methods smoother and more efficient, with a significant increase in efficacy. And this benefit was just the beginning. Lu Yuan believed that as he delved deeper into the study of the Dao, the benefits he would gain would only increase. With this thought in mind, After completing the transfer of Inner Strength, he picked up a Taoist Classic and began to study it carefully. To catch up with Friend Kong and Daoist Qi Yun, and to change the situation where he had to ask questions constantly and rely on their answers, he had to work hard to enrich himself as well. The night passed quickly. On the second day, due to eating greasy food the day before, Qi Yun Daoist prepared a light breakfast, which was nonetheless delicious. After breakfast, the three of them gathered again to discuss the Dao. Sun Siwen could only watch briefly before going outside for some fresh air. Fortunately, by noon, the discussion finally came to an end. Since the three-day vacation was ending today, Sun Siwen and Kong Yuzhu needed to head back to their posts at the government office. Although practicing the Dao in the mountains was leisurely, people could not avoid various concerns in life, and life still had to go on. Now, it was time for them to return to reality.. Chapter 108 - Chapter 108: Chapter 87: Seeking Scriptures Inside the Chapter 108: Chapter 87: Seeking Scriptures Inside the Palace Translator: 549690339 ¡°Brother Lu, are you really not leaving with us?¡± At the doorway of the Taoist temple, Sun Siwen and Kong Yuzhu stood outside the door, looking at Lu Yuan, who was seeing them off, and asked again. Both of them had decided to return to the city in the afternoon, but their companion had told them he wasn¡¯t going back so soon, which surprised him a little. Lu Yuan smiled and nodded, ¡°Brother Sun and Friend Kong, you go back first. I still have many doubts in my mind and need to consult with Daoist Qi Yun, so I¡¯ll stay here for a few more days.¡± Although he had resolved many puzzles and learned a lot in this day and a half of discussion, only a small part of the doubts in his heart had been resolved, and there was still much he needed to know. So he decided to stay until his doubts were resolved. Anyway, there was food and lodging here, and Qi Yun Taoist¡¯s cooking skills had impressed Lu Yuan. With a true cultivator explaining the classics and resolving doubts, such a life was very carefree and leisurely. In less than two days, he was somewhat addicted to it. Sun Siwen reluctantly said, ¡°Alright then.¡± ¡®Let him stay. Studying Taoist classics in a Taoist temple is better than teaching girls to sing in the Red Phoenix Building. At least he¡¯s learning something good, not something bad.¡¯ Layman Sun thought so and finally descended the mountain with Kong Yuzhu. After seeing off his friends, Lu Yuan plunged back into the Taoist temple to consult with Qi Yun Taoist about the Taoist Classics. There were no discussions today. After parting with Daoist Kong Yuzhu, Lu Yuan, the new ¡°Fellow Daoist,¡± was clearly not enough to discuss with Qi Yun Taoist on his own. Therefore, the relationship between the two was more like teacher and student. The student asked questions, and the teacher answered. Then one by one, the puzzles and doubts gradually vanished. Lu Yuan had been studying scriptures for four years and had read more than a hundred Taoist classics, producing countless puzzles during that time. It would be an exaggeration to say there were thousands, but there were certainly several hundred. In the past two days, three discussions had solved only twenty or thirty of those puzzles. He still had many more questions waiting for the teacher¡¯s answers. Fortunately, as a teacher, Qi Yun Taoist had a strong moral character and was not impatient. He carefully explained each question without any impatience. Moreover, his answers were to the point, giving listeners an enlightening feeling. With such a teacher, Lu Yuan¡¯s Daoist learning was quickly improved, and he felt a sense of purification in his body and mind, as if he were undergoing a transformation. This made him realize that he had met an excellent teacher, and he cherished this learning opportunity even more. Qi Yun Taoist was also very satisfied with his student. First of all, his comprehension was excellent, and his attitude towards learning and seeking the way was admirable. If it were not that he himself was not qualified to accept Lu Yuan as his apprentice, he would have wanted to entrust all his teachings to him. Nevertheless, Qi Yun Taoist treated Lu Yuan like his own apprentice, teaching him diligently and without reservation, except in matters related to the temple¡¯s heritage. Time flies when you are learning. In the blink of an eye, Lu Yuan stayed in Qingyun View for a month. During that time, Sun Siwen, worried about him, visited once during a break and left with peace of mind when he saw that Lu Yuan was fine and had no intention of becoming a monk. Of course, Lu Yuan had no intention of becoming a monk. He was studying Daoist texts to improve his martial arts, and improving martial arts was meant to enhance his self-preservation skills and better enjoy his leisurely life. With this premise, Lu Yuan naturally would not abandon prosperity and choose to retire to the mountains and become a monk, that would be going against the purpose of his quest. After all, Daoists like Qi Yun aimed at cultivating themselves away from the mortal dust to focus on cultivating the Dao, ascending to immortality and enjoying long-lasting leisure. But now, Lu Yuan was already immortal. Qi Yun¡¯s lifelong pursuit was nothing but his starting point. Now that he has achieved what countless cultivators dream of, he doesn¡¯t need to pursue immortality through asceticism, monasticism, etc. Lu Yuan stayed in the Daoist temple, not seeking longevity, but to learn the protective techniques despised by Qi Yun and other Daoists as merely minor details of the Dao. However, all learning eventually comes to an end. After a month of consultation, all of Lu Yuan¡¯s accumulated doubts were finally resolved. Now he was confident that he would have no difficulty practicing the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra. The seventh and eighth meridians recorded in the Mental Technique could even be directly practiced. The remaining positive meridians and two bizarre meridians would become more understandable as his learning deepened. Having achieved his goal, Lu Yuan timely asked for leave from Qi Yun Taoist. This was not because he didn¡¯t want to learn from the old teacher anymore. But rather, he wanted to return home and study the Taoist scriptures for a while longer. After gaining some experience and accumulating some questions, he would consult his teacher again. He wasn¡¯t Qi Yun Taoist¡¯s apprentice after all, so he couldn¡¯t just stay in someone else¡¯s house indefinitely, wasting his time being taught like an apprentice. Qi Yun Taoist didn¡¯t say anything, but Lu Yuan figured he should have some sense of propriety. After all, Qi Yun Taoist aspired to become an immortal as well. Although it was unclear if he could become an immortal, There was no doubt that the time Qi Yun Taoist spent teaching Lu Yuan would reduce the time he spent cultivating immortality. Lu Yuan¡¯s staying here occupied his time, which would go against his purpose of coming to the mountains to escape the world, wouldn¡¯t it? ¡°You¡¯re leaving already?¡± As a matter of fact, that was exactly the case. Faced with Lu Yuan¡¯s request to leave, Qi Yun Taoist sighed with emotion, not trying to keep him longer, but only reminding him, ¡°Fellow Daoist Lu, your talent and Dao heart are the best I have ever seen. Your destiny with immortality is very deep, and your future achievements will be above mine.¡± ¡°I hope you do not waste this immortal fate, strive to cultivate the Dao, and maybe even provide some guidance for me at that time. That would count as my fate with immortality.¡± Qi Yun Taoist was very open-minded, and half joking, half seriously said. The fact was, it was precisely because of his expectations for Lu Yuan that he was so diligently teaching him. Otherwise, his determination to study alone would not be enough for him to go this far. Lu Yuan solemnly said, ¡°If I achieve anything in the future, I will never forget the grace of Fellow Daoist Qi Yun teaching me.¡± Facing such a devoted teacher, his heart was filled with deep gratitude and affection. Qi Yun Taoist immediately said with pleasure, ¡°Excellent, excellent! Your word is enough for me!¡± Then he waved his hand, ¡°Go, go. The mountains are no place for you; your world is out there.¡± ¡°My Poor Daoist takes his leave.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan stood up, paying him a respectful salute, then turned around and left. As Qi Yun Taoist said, this narrow mountain Taoist temple, which belonged to Qi Yun, was his haven and not suitable for Lu Yuan. The vast world outside, the bustling world, belonged to his own leisurely life.. Chapter 109 - Chapter 109: Chapter 88: The Difficulty of Revenge Chapter 109: Chapter 88: The Difficulty of Revenge Translator: 549690339 After leaving the Taoist temple and finishing a month of learning, arriving in the vast mountains, Lu Yuan instantly regained the carefreeness of being a Hunter, and couldn¡¯t help but let out a long roar in the mountains, feeling extremely joyful. In the excitement, he hunted several rabbits in the mountains, and then carried his spoils, heading to the county town. It took him half an hour to return to the town. Entering Sun Residence, he handed the rabbits to Auntie Chun and asked her to cook them well. After lunch, Lu Yuan went to find his apprentice. Having not seen him for more than a month, Zhou Qing¡¯s body had recovered very well, not only able to walk but even capable of running slightly. According to Old Doctor Li, who was changing his medicine: ¡°In another ten days or so, with some nourishment, he can be restored to full health and be bouncing around.¡± Hearing this, Lu Yuan was overjoyed, and immediately rewarded Old Doctor Li with 5 silver tales, making the latter¡¯s beard tremble with happiness. Haven¡¯t seen his Master for more than a month, Zhou Qing missed him a little. Lu Yuan chatted with his apprentice for a while, and then, to appease the latter, took out the already transcribed first layer of the Cloud Palm secret book and gave it to his apprentice: ¡°This is the martial art technique I practice, called Cloud Palm; it is considered a second-rate martial art in Jianghu. This is the first Mental Technique, which you can read and familiarize yourself with in the next few days. But do not cultivate it, your body is not ready for practicing martial arts yet. If you have any doubts or questions, write them down, and I will come to check and answer them for you in a few days.¡± Zhou Qing took the Secret Book and solemnly put it away, excitedly saying, ¡°Master, don¡¯t worry, I will study hard and not let you down.¡± Getting the martial arts secret book he had been wanting made Zhou Qing very happy. He could finally practice martial arts. Thinking about this, he couldn¡¯t help but smile. However, his smile did not last long, it quickly faded, and his expression became somber. Zhou Qing thought of his father and wife. Their family used to live a peaceful life, treating illnesses and saving lives, doing good deeds, and having no conflicts with the world. But such a good family met with a sudden disaster. He hated the unfairness of fate and the rampant evil in the world. So, that¡¯s why he wanted to learn martial arts. He wanted to become proficient in martial arts and then look for the Iron Sword Sect, who had killed his family, to seek justice. He wanted to ask them, why did they harm his family and what did they do wrong? With this idea in mind, he didn¡¯t give up hope even when he was almost a cripple and accepted treatment with determination. Now he is more determined to learn martial arts and make himself stronger. All of this was for justice. Watching the changes in his apprentice¡¯s expression, how could Lu Yuan not know what he was thinking? He took two steos forward. Datted Zhang Oinc¡¯s shoulder, and said, ¡°Take it slow, don¡¯t think too much. I will teach you well and cultivate you into a first-rate martial artist.¡± Zhou Qing nodded firmly, ¡°Yes, Master.¡± Seeing his serious appearance, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but sigh in his heart. Of course, he would definitely do his best to train his apprentice, after all, the latter was Doctor Zhou¡¯s son, and he had also helped him a lot previously, providing immense benefits. But the problem is, some things, even if you teach seriously, don¡¯t necessarily have good results. Although Zhou Qing hadn¡¯t started practicing martial arts yet, even if he was a martial arts genius who could practice twice as much as an ordinary person every day, it would still take him two years to master a meridian and twelve years to master Cloud Palm at the fastest. All of this still only under the premise that he is a genius. If his aptitude is mediocre, then it will take twenty years. Spending twenty years to become a second-rate martial artist in Jianghu is already equivalent to half a person¡¯s life. But even with a second-rate expert, when dealing with a major sect like the Iron Sword Sect with first-rate masters, it¡¯s hardly worth mentioning. To seek justice from the Iron Sword Sect, you need to be at least a first-rate master. To break through the second rate and continue to improve to the first rate, Lu Yuan was not clear about what conditions were needed. However, since he had obtained the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra, these conditions became clear. In Jianghu, third-rate masters need to cultivate two meridians; second-rate masters need to cultivate six meridians; and first-rate masters need to cultivate twelve main meridians and at least one of the eight extraordinary meridians. In other words, the difference between a second-rate master and a first-rate master lies in whether they have cultivated one of the eight extraordinary meridians. The Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra records the internal Qi pathways of the twelve main meridians and four of the eight extraordinary meridians. Having four of the eight extraordinary meridians¡¯ internal Qi pathways is already considered good enough, and can be ranked among the mid-level first-rate Mental Techniques. The top-tier first-rate Mental Techniques naturally contain the practice of six of the eight extraordinary meridians, excluding the Ren and Du meridians. However, even the Iron Sword Sect does not have records of such advanced Mental Techniques, and they are only mentioned in the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra. The realm above first-rate is called Inborn. The Inborn realm is already the pinnacle of today¡¯s martial arts world. For example, Yin Huixuan, the Sect Leader of the Liuyang Sect that once dominated the Southsea, was an Inborn Grandmaster, a martial arts giant standing at the pinnacle of Jianghu, and a powerful figure who dominated a region and stirred up the world. It can be said that any Inborn Grandmaster can easily dominate a region and disturb the world. However, such people are extremely rare, mostly cultivated by true top-tier sects. Even some top-tier sects with lost inheritance may face the embarrassing situation of having no Inborn Grandmaster in the sect. From this, it can be seen how rare Inborn Grandmasters are. Above the Inborn Grandmaster is the legendary Grandmaster realm, which has become a legend in the martial arts world. For many years, no one knows where a Grandmaster has appeared. So, in summary, to break through to the first rate, one needs to cultivate the twelve main meridians and one extraordinary meridian. Only when these thirteen meridians are cultivated can one be considered a first-rate master. Let¡¯s assume that it takes an ordinary person three to four years to cultivate a meridian. In order to fully cultivate the thirteen meridians, it would take forty to fifty years. Given Zhou Qing¡¯s age, by the time he reaches the first-rate realm, he will likely be sixty years old. Faced with a man seeking revenge, the Iron Sword Sect, which has thousands of disciples, will not talk about one-on-one fair duels and martial arts virtues. They will definitely attack en masse. A sixty-year-old first-rate master, even with that level of strength, how many people can he fight? ¡°So Zhou Qing wants to take revenge; it¡¯s difficult! Difficult!¡± Lu Yuan said the word ¡®difficult¡¯ twice, and then understood something even more profound: ¡°Those Jianghu sects must have their own secret methods for cultivating strong warriors. Like the Divine Blood Variant of the Blood Jade Centipede, which can shorten the time it takes for a martial artist to practice. If not, those geniuses would not be able to become first-rate masters or even Inborn Grandmasters in their thirties and forties..¡± Chapter 110 - Chapter 110: Chapter 89: Zhou Qing Recovers Chapter 110: Chapter 89: Zhou Qing Recovers Translator: 549690339 Mourning and sighing in his heart for his disciple, Lu Yuan chose not to reveal the cruel truth. At present, much of Zhou Qing¡¯s motivation for living was for revenge. If he were to tell the truth now, it would only shatter his will to live, which would be too cruel. For that reason, he could only keep it a secret for now and let his apprentice gradually learn martial arts, allowing him to discover the difficulty on his own. Perhaps, through the process of practicing martial arts, he would be able to let go of his resentment and peacefully overcome this obstacle. ¡°I just hope that Xiaoqing can truly understand when the time comes.¡± Lu Yuan shook his head and left his apprentice¡¯s room. Everyone has their own fate, and everyone has their own thoughts. Even as a master, he could not interfere too much in the lives of his disciples. Other than offering some comfort, everything really depended on the other party¡¯s own understanding. The next day, at the end of the month, Sun Siwen also took a break and returned home. Seeing his friend return, he was very happy. That night, he couldn¡¯t help but invite Lu Yuan for a drink under the moonlight, joking: ¡°I thought Brother Lu had seen through the mortal dust and was ready to become a monk, ignoring us commoners. Now I know, it turns out that you can¡¯t let go of this world¡¯s prosperity and finally came back.¡± Lu Yuan heard this and laughed bitterly, constantly raising his glass in apology: ¡°It¡¯s my fault, my fault, I will punish myself with three cups.¡± Seeing this, Sun Siwen laughed heartily. They drank late into the night, and a night passed quickly. The next morning, Sun Siwen woke up from his drunken stupor, quickly cnanged Into new c10tnes, straigntenea nls appearance, ana went out. It wasn¡¯t until close to noon that he returned home. During lunch, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but ask curiously. ¡°Isn¡¯t it October now? Today is the day of the Imperial Examination.¡± Sun Siwen took a bite of food, shook his head and sighed: ¡°The county magistrate has gone through a lot of effort for this Imperial Examination, and he is naturally very worried. So he called me over to ask how well the county exam candidates are likely to perform.¡± Lu Yuan laughed: ¡°So what did Brother Sun say?¡± Sun Siwen rolled his eyes: ¡°What else could I say? Naturally, I told him that the students will do their best and won¡¯t be negligent or disrespectful.¡± Lu Yuan laughed out loud upon hearing this. The anxious county magistrate had resorted to seeking help from anyone available. With the examination venue thousands of miles away, it would be futile for him to ask Sun Siwen, the education official, for help. And what could he tell him about the performance of the candidates? As the county magistrate, didn¡¯t he have an idea about the level of the scholars in Changning County? No wonder Sun Siwen couldn¡¯t help but complain. In the following days, the county magistrate virtually dragged Sun Siwen to his office every day to inquire about the exam candidates¡¯ conditions. Despite having already given his answers, the county magistrate wanted to ask them over and over again as if he had forgotten them after each inquiry. Everyone could understand his feelings. After all, the results of this Imperial Examination were crucial for determining whether the county magistrate could keep his current position, so naturally, he was nervous. However, Sun Siwen, as the person involved, was quite annoyed with it all. But who could blame him? The county magistrate was his superior¡¯s superior, and as a mere ninth-ranked education official, Sun Siwen couldn¡¯t afford to offend him, who was a seventh-ranked county magistrate. So to try and please him, Sun Siwen had to muster patience and repeat the same answer every day. When Lu Yuan, as a good friend, heard about it, he naturally laughed heartily in an unsympathetic way. In the end, he gave his friend an encouraging look that said ¡°I support you,¡± which would cheer him up instantly throughout the day. Time passed slowly, and in the blink of an eye, ten days had passed since Lu Yuan had returned to the city. On this day, early in the morning, he came to his apprentice¡¯s room. At this time, in the room, along with Zhou Qing, there was also Old Doctor Li. At this moment, the old divine doctor was carefully unraveling the medicine on Zhou Qing¡¯s body. His expression was focused, and his movements were slow, as if he were handling a fragile piece of art. As it turns out, in the old divine doctor¡¯s eyes, Zhou Qing was indeed a fragile and precious piece of art. Otherwise, where would he have earned nearly three hundred silver tales over the past three months? Wasn¡¯t it from the God of Wealth right in front of him? ¡®What a pity that the God of Wealth has healed from his illness, and there¡¯s no more money to be made. I won¡¯t be able to buy the promised jewelry for the newlywed concubine at home.¡¯ Old Doctor Li, who was still vigorous and active despite being over fifty years old, couldn¡¯t help but feel a sense of loss and sigh. After spending some time unravelling the medicine, Old Doctor Li looked at Zhou Qinz and said, ¡°You¡¯re all better now, vour bones have recovered and are no different from an ordinary person. From today on, you are fully recovered.¡± ¡°Thank you, Divine Doctor.¡± Hearing these words, Zhou Qing, who had been lying on the bed for a hundred days, sprang up, jumped straight to the ground, and had an excited look on his face. ¡°Watch yourself, be careful. If you continue like this without restraint, you¡¯ll end up getting injured again in the future, even if you¡¯re better now.¡± Old Doctor Li looked at Zhou Qing, quickly grabbed him with a concerned look on his face. However, what he was really thinking was, why couldn¡¯t Zhou Qing have another fall? It would be even better if he broke a few more bones, so I could make more money happily again. Alright, in order to make money, our old divine doctor had run out of scruples. What about medical ethics? What was that? Could it be used as money? No matter what this unscrupulous divine doctor was secretly thinking, it was impossible for it to happen. However, Zhou Qing did calm down. Because his master¡¯s eyes had shifted to him, giving him a stern look. As his apprentice, he naturally became well-behaved instantly, hiding in the corner like a quail, daring not make any more fuss. Lu Yuan cleared his throat, satisfied with his authority as a master, then turned to Old Doctor Li and said, ¡°Thank you, divine doctor; if not for you, we wouldn¡¯t know for how long Xiaoqing would have needed to recover.¡± He said this before taking out a prepared red envelope from his sleeve and handed it over: ¡°Here are ten silver notes as a token of gratitude for treating the illness; please accept it.¡± Hearing about the silver, the old divine doctor¡¯s eyes lit up instantly. ¡°How can I accept this?¡± Old Doctor Li also coughed a few times, twisted his body, and put on a guilty face. However, his hands didn¡¯t hesitate, quickly accepting the red envelope and putting it away in his pocket. In his heart, he was delighted; his concubine¡¯s jewelry could be bought now. After receiving the red envelope and realizing there was no more money to be made, he smoothly made his excuses to leave. Then he hurriedly left, returned home, and prepared to have a good time with his bewitching concubine. After sending off the old divine doctor, Lu Yuan returned to the room. He then looked at the well-behaved Zhou Qing, cleared his throat, and said with a smile, ¡°Now that you¡¯ve fully recovered from your injuries, Xiaoqing, it¡¯s time for me to fulfill my promise and teach you martial arts. Tell me, how is your understanding of the mental techniques in the secret book I showed you ten days ago? If there¡¯s anything you don¡¯t understand, tell me now.¡± Hearing this, Zhou Qing¡¯s eyes lit up. He rushed to his bed, took out the first level Cloud Palm mental techniques from under his pillow, and approached Lu Yuan with the book in his hand: ¡°Master, there¡¯s something I don¡¯t understand here¡­ The atmosphere in the room immediately turned into that of a master¡¯s benevolence and a disciple¡¯s filial piety, harmonious and full of joy.. Chapter 111 - Chapter 111: Chapter 90: Juren Disciples Chapter 111: Chapter 90: Juren Disciples Translator: 549690339 It took Lu Yuan less than half a day to clarify some confusion in the technique for Zhou Qing, and to guide his disciple through the first round of Inner Strength practice. His disciple¡¯s comprehension was quite good. For many questions, Lu Yuan only needed to give a slight hint, and his disciple would quickly understand it. The following cultivation would be a tedious process of grinding time. How long a person could cultivate Inner Qi depended on their talent and comprehension, and outsiders could not help much. So, Lu Yuan realized that waiting would be useless. He instructed his disciple to continue cultivating and to find him after achieving Inner Qi. With that, he clapped his hands and gracefully left. Lu Yuan himself had many things to be busy with. He had mastered the Cloud Palm Mental Technique, but he had only learned about thirty moves of the related Palm skill. He still had more than forty moves to practice and master at a slow pace, A martial arts expert¡¯s strength is not solely based on their high Inner Strength realm. Matching that would require corresponding techniques and moves. At present, Lu Yuan¡¯s mental technique was at the second-rate realm, but his actual combat strength remained at the third-rate realm. At most, he could be considered as a half second-rate now. Only after mastering the eighty-one moves of the Cloud Palm would he be considered a complete second-rate expert. So, to make up for this shortcoming, Lu Yuan had been practicing the Palm skill diligently in recent days. Fortunately, as his mastery of the Taoist Classics deepened, his various mental realms also improved, thus his comprehension of the Cloud Palm accelerated as well, allowing him to practice much faster than before. Now, it took him about ten days to half a month to master each Cloud Palm move. With more than forty moves left, he would need just over a year to complete them. Besides the Palm skill, Lu Yuan¡¯s speed in cultivating the mental technique also slightly increased with his study of the Taoist Classics. Originally, he had estimated it would take a year to complete the transition of his Inner Strength. However, it now seemed possible to finish it in just eight or nine months. The above two goals, practicing the Cloud Palm and cultivating the mental technique, were Lu Yuan¡¯s primary focus for the coming days. In addition to these main targets, he continued to study the Taoist Classics in his leisure time during practice. At the beginning of studying the Taoist Classics, Lu Yuan found it quite difficult and painful. The illusory and obscure content was too dull to read, while the various scriptures and spells seemed more like mystification. As for the flying immortals¡¯ stories of real beings, they seemed like mere imaginings and boasting. Suffice to say, he initially did not appreciate the Taoist Classics. If it was not for the cultivation practice¡¯s requirement, he would never read such an incredibly boring book. However, as he read more and understood deeper, he gradually grasped some principles behind the Classics and came to accept them more. Most importantly, with these new insights, his martial arts cultivation benefited qreatlv, allowinz him to learn techniques quickly. With these advantages, Lu Yuan began to genuinely shift from reluctance to acceptance, and finally to the passionate study of the Classics. So it is. All motivation and love are driven by interests. Who could spend a considerable amount of time researching a subject they do not like without reaping any benefits? Lu Yuan had gained benefits and progress from studying the Taoist Classics, which fueled his keen interest, evolving into the present state where he could not go a day without reading a volume and finding every meal tasteless without it. This could be considered going from one extreme to another. While Lu Yuan and his disciple were immersed in their daily martial arts practice, Sun Siwen had finally gotten some respite from the county magistrate¡¯s annoyance after half a month. That was not because the county magistrate had a change of heart. Mainly, more than half a month had passed since the Imperial Examination, and the results had come out. The patrol and capture officer dispatched by the county magistrate to protect the candidates had rushed back to report as soon as the results were released. Somewhat unexpectedly, out of the twenty-one candidates, someone really won the juren title. The county magistrate¡¯s gamble and Sun Siwen¡¯s crash course had actually worked. There was no need to say more. Upon hearing the news, the county magistrate immediately burst into laughter. With this juren title, his position was secured. With the worry of the past few days resolved, how could he not be happy? He held a banquet that night, inviting officials from the county to celebrate the good news together. It was said that many of those invited not only congratulated the county magistrate but also toasted Sun Siwen out of respect. Although Sun Siwen¡¯s position as the county official was not high, his success in teaching a juren could not be ignored. A juren was considered an official. Teaching an official was a remarkable accomplishment. Just for that reason, he had garnered everyone¡¯s respect. Many even thought of sending their children to the County Academy to be taught by Sun Siwen, hoping they might win the juren title in next year¡¯s Imperial Examination. They, as officials, feared their descendants would lack ambition. If their generation could pass the examination and secure an official position, but their next generation failed to pass even the juren title, the family¡¯s legacy would be at risk of decline. A perfect example was Sun Siwen himself. His family¡¯s decline started with just one generation of not having an official. By the time it reached Sun Siwen, the third generation, they had become a poor family. With so many examples before them, it was natural to be concerned. Moreover, apart from being admired, Sun Siwen had another hidden advantage. The students who took the exam had all gone through his crash course. As a result, the newly crowned juren would have to address Sun Siwen as ¡°Master Sun¡± and maintain the student-disciple relationship from now on. In other words, Sun Siwen had taken the first step in his career of having students and former officials all over the world and had celebrated an auspicious start. In the future, if more of his disciples could win the juren and jinshi titles, it would be of great assistance to Sun Siwen¡¯s prospects. Although Sun Siwen was happy about this, upon returning home after the banquet, he told his close friend in a realistic tone: ¡°This time, it¡¯s Lu Yan who won the juren title. He is an experienced scholar, and being over forty years old, he has accumulated enough knowledge and skills for the past twenty years. Outsiders always think that Lu Yan¡¯s low profile enabled him to win the juren title because of my teaching. But I know that¡¯s not the case. Otherwise, why didn¡¯t Song Yun, Li Qian, and Guo Yun, who I valued more, win the juren title despite being more intelligent and prominent in reputation? So, while I may have contributed to Lu Yan¡¯s success, it is secondary. The real reason is that he himself had the ability..¡± Chapter 112 - Chapter 112: Chapter 91: Congratulatory Gifts for Joining Chapter 112: Chapter 91: Congratulatory Gifts for Joining Translator: 549690339 Although Sun Siwen sometimes liked to show off his achievements and abilities in front of Lu Yuan, this mostly belonged to the jokes between friends. When faced with real issues, he had a clear understanding of himself. Just like this time, when everyone thought Lu Yan¡¯s juren title was due to his efforts, he thought otherwise. On the contrary, he felt a bit unhappy about the misunderstanding from outsiders: ¡°It¡¯s obviously Lu Yan¡¯s decades of hard study that led to his achievements today, yet people attribute the credit to me. It¡¯s really unfair for those of us who have struggled to become students step by step.¡± ¡°When Lu Yan returns, I will definitely clarify this point.¡± Although being known as a teacher who produced a juren would benefit Sun Siwen¡¯s future development, he did not want to use other people¡¯s efforts for his own career progress, which would be too shameless. As for his friend¡¯s thoughts, what could Lu Yuan say? Besides being more relieved that his friend could stick to his principles, he could only admire: ¡°Brother Sun¡¯s aspirations and mind are worthy of being a role model for the world.¡± Upon hearing this, Sun Siwen shook his head with a bitter smile: ¡°What role model? I¡¯ve also thought about pretending not to know about this, but I can¡¯t pass my heart¡¯s hurdle. Nor can I thicken my face.¡± The night meeting ended with Sun Siwen clarifying his intentions. A few days later, Zhou Qing excitedly ran over. ¡°Master, I¡¯ve cultivated Inner Strength.¡± This young apprentice ran in front of Lu Yuan, excitedly stretched out a finger, and then with a divine intention, moved his Inner Strength to the fingertip. His slender finger immediately turned slightly red and swelled a little. ¡°Not bad, not bad.¡± Seeing this scene, Lu Yuan showed a smile on his face and praised generously: ¡°Being able to cultivate Inner Strength in twelve days, your talent is already good.¡± Although he praised Zhou Qing, Lu Yuan sighed in his heart. Zhou Qing had his teachings and solved his confusion earlier, but in the end, it still took him twelve days to cultivate Inner Strength. Although it took Lu Yuan half a year to cultivate Inner Strength, most of that time was spent exploring the technique. If he excluded those exploratory factors and under the same conditions, Lu Yuan believed that he could cultivate Inner Strength within ten days. ¡®So Xiaoqing¡¯s talent should be mediocre, a little better than ordinary people, but limited in how good it is,¡¯ he deduced. Then he felt that the hope of his apprentice avenging himself had become even smaller. Zhou Qing didn¡¯t know about the pity in his master¡¯s heart. He had just cultivated Inner Strength, and with his master¡¯s praise, he was excited at this moment. Seizing this opportunity, he recalled some difficulties and problems he encountered during his cultivation in these days and said, ¡°Master, I¡¯ve been cultivating for the past few days and encountered some confusion. I beg Master to enlighten me.¡± Seeing his disciple¡¯s sincerity in seeking advice, Lu Yuan nodded, restrained his thoughts, and smiled: ¡°Go ahead. I¡¯ll teach you whatever you don¡¯t understand.¡± No matter whether Zhou Qing could avenge himself or not, as a Master, he would teach what he should teach seriously and would not deceive or ignore his apprentice. This is a principle. That morning, Lu Yuan spent the day explaining and dispelling doubts. In addition to Zhou Qing¡¯s note of confusion, he also pointed out in advance the various problems that might be encountered when practicing the First Mental Technique. By solving the difficulties first, he saved his disciple from slowly exploring and provided some help as a master. In the end, everything that should be taught was taught. Lu Yuan looked at the sky and decided it was almost time for lunch, then stood up and said: ¡°That¡¯s it for today¡¯s lesson. Remember what I said, it will save you a lot of effort.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Zhou Qing immediately got up and saluted. ¡°Well,¡± Lu Yuan nodded and thought for a moment, then hesitated for a while before taking out a jade bottle from his chest and placing it in Zhou Qing¡¯s hand: ¡°This is the Blood Jade Divine Medicine that I refined using the Blood Jade Centipede you provided. At that time, I made a total of five pills, and now I¡¯ve taken four already, leaving one for you. Consider it a congratulatory gift from your master for cultivating Inner Strength.¡± This Blood Jade Divine Medicine was refined with the help of Zhou Qing, and during the refining process, Zhou Qing had contributed many rare Herbs that were cherished by the Zhou family¡¯s ancestors. Although Zhou Qing said at the time that these were given to his master as an apprentice payment, Lu Yuan felt that he should be conscientious about this in his heart. Some part of this medicine belonged to Zhou Qing, so as a master, he didn¡¯t have the thick skin to claim it all. Moreover, just one pill could help Lu Yuan break through and save a year¡¯s effort at most. To reach the top, he needed to break through at least seven meridians. A single Blood Jade Divine Medicine would not help him much with his current progress. Compared to that, it was better to give it to his disciple. For a beginner like Zhou Qing, one pill could help him break through a meridian, saving him three or four years of hard work, which was a tremendous aid. But I can help my disciple save three or four years and provide some assistance,¡¯ thought Lu Yuan. ¡°Master.¡± Seeing the Blood Jade Divine Medicine in his hand, Zhou Qing didn¡¯t expect his master to give him such a precious thing. He knew how much effort and attention his master had put into refining this medicine at the time. But now his master was giving the treasure to him. Zhou Qing was touched and almost shed tears. He quickly tried to return it: ¡°This is the divine medicine that Master painstakingly refined. I can¡¯t accept it.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s face darkened: ¡°Accept the gift I give you. Are you going to disobey Seeing this, Zhou Qing didn¡¯t dare to defy and reluctantly accepted with gratitude. Lu Yuan nodded in satisfaction, then said: ¡°This Blood Jade Divine Medicine can help you break through a meridian, it¡¯s extremely valuable. However, since your Inner Strength cultivation is still shallow and you are not familiar with the operation of Inner Qi in your body, don¡¯t take this medicine yet. Otherwise, I¡¯m afraid you won¡¯t be able to control the surging Inner Strength and might damage your meridians. Wait until you¡¯ve practiced a few more months, then take it when you¡¯re familiar with the meridians in your body. Don¡¯t be hasty, understand?¡± Zhou Qing felt the warmth of these words in his heart and nodded heavily: ¡°I understand, I will definitely remember Master¡¯s teachings and not take the medicine unless I¡¯m sure.¡± ¡°I believe in you.¡± Lu Yuan showed a smile upon hearing Zhou Qing¡¯s words: ¡°But wipe the tears off your face first. A grown man shouldn¡¯t be crying all the time. We¡¯re going to eat soon, and it would be a shame if people saw your tears.¡± Zhou Qing listened, quickly wiped his tears and tidied up his appearance. Then, he went to the dining hall with his master to have lunch.. Chapter 113 - Chapter 113: Chapter 92: I Got Promoted Chapter 113: Chapter 92: I Got Promoted Translator: 549690339 Half a month later, the catch officer from Changning County escorted the students who had returned from the imperial examination, including the newly promoted juren, back to the county town. On the day of their return, the county magistrate led the officials of the town, as well as the local gentry and commoners, to welcome them three miles outside the city. The celebration was extremely grand. According to Sun Siwen, he did not receive such an honor when he became a juren and returned to his hometown. Lu Yuan carefully recalled that he was not present when Sun Siwen returned to the county town, so he didn¡¯t know the situation at that time. But when they returned to Yangmei Town, he saw that the townspeople gathered at the entrance of the town and watched for an hour or two. There was no such reception a few miles out of town. But it made sense. In Dayu County, there was a rich literary tradition, and a juren emerged every two or three years. However, in Changning County. It was said that no juren had emerged for more than twenty years. Now that they finally had one, it was not too much to give him extra attention. So, all Lu Yuan could do was pat his slightly envious friend, comfort him a little, and tell him not to think too much about it. Lu Yan¡¯s promotion to juren could only be attributed to good timing and good luck, as well as the unique circumstances in Changning County. After him, no one will have such a grand event as today when they become juren. Upon returning to the city, a banquet was held for the new juren as well as for the students who had returned from the examination. During the banquet, the main characters were naturally the county magistrate and the newly promoted juren, Lu Yan, who received congratulations from everyone present. At the same time, Lu Yan did not forget his teacher, Sun Siwen. He came to Sun Siwen several times with wine, addressing him as his teacher and showing great respect. However, just as he had said before, Sun Siwen did not take the credit for his student¡¯s success. Instead, he claimed that it was all due to Lu Yan¡¯s hard work in studying, and he had merely added some finishing touches. Unfortunately, few people present believed Sun Siwen¡¯s words about giving all credit to Lu Yan. Many saw it as the Teaching Assistant¡¯s humility and admired him even more for being modest and not taking the credit for himself. This made it even harder for Sun Siwen to explain his stance, and in the end, he just sighed and didn¡¯t bother to refute it further. Meanwhile, Lu Yan, seeing Sun Siwen¡¯s attitude, became even more respectful and seemed genuinely like a student. Those who are close are better aware of their own matters. Lu Yan knew that his success in passing the juren examination was mostly due to his own efforts, but Sun Siwen¡¯s help had also played a part. That¡¯s why he called Sun Siwen his teacher and regarded himself as a disciple. However, it was hard to know how much of this was genuine and how much was just for show. But at this moment, seeing Sun Siwen¡¯s modesty and sincerity and refusing to take credit for his success, Lu Yan couldn¡¯t help but feel touched. Such a gentleman of good character is indeed rare in this world. ¡®Being a disciple of such a gentleman wouldn¡¯t be a bad thing.¡¯ With this thought in mind, Lu Yan¡¯s respect for Sun Siwen grew even stronger. After the banquet, the students who returned from the examination either went back home to continue their studies or started visiting friends and gatherings, resuming their normal lives. The fact that Lu Yan became a juren had a significant impact on the students in Changning County. Now they saw that after more than twenty years, literary talent once again emerged in the form of a juren in Changning County, where the literary tradition had been weak for a long time. Influenced by this, many students who had been neglecting their studies or lacking confidence began to work even harder. As the representative of late bloomers, Lu Yan naturally became even busier. He visited the retired old juren in the county, socialized with the officials, attended the banquets of the local gentry, and re-experienced everything that Sun Siwen had gone through before. And in all these social interactions, Sun Siwen, as a teacher, was naturally indispensable. Lu Yan visited him in person three times. Each time, he was extremely courteous and respectful. Even in front of Lu Yuan, Sun Siwen¡¯s good friend, he maintained a junior¡¯s attitude and respect, despite being older in age. This made Lu Yuan feel even better about Lu Yan and praised Sun Siwen for gaining a good student. However, after the last visit, during a casual conversation between Sun Siwen and Lu Yuan, Sun Siwen lamented, ¡°Like me, Lu Yan didn¡¯t continue with the examinations and chose to become an official instead. Now the appointment from the prefecture has arrived, and he will soon go to South Sea Prefecture as a Tax Examiner, taking charge of the taxation in the county, starting from rank nine. At the beginning of next month, he will begin his new post.¡± According to the regulations in Da Yue, the maximum age for taking the imperial examination is forty-five. Once exceeded, one cannot participate in the examination anymore. After all, the purpose of the imperial examination system is to increase talent for the imperial court. Employing an official who is too old would limit their years of service to the court. Nowadays, Lu Yan is forty-one years old. With the jinshi (imperial examination title) spring examination held every three years, he can only take the examination for jinshi once. Apparently, like Sun Siwen, the newly promoted juren wasn¡¯t confident about taking the jinshi examination and chose to become an official instead. In Da Yue, officials retire at sixty, giving Lu Yan almost twenty years to serve as an official. If he performs well during this period, he can hope to become a county magistrate before retirement. Luyan would be content to become a rank seven official and a father to his jurisdiction. Lu Yuan could understand this. However, Sun Siwen then mentioned something else that stirred Lu Yuan¡¯s heart. ¡°Twenty-one scholars from the county took part in the imperial examination, and one juren was chosen. Not only did the county magistrate receive recognition from his superiors and secure his position, even I benefited from it. A few days ago, I met with the county magistrate and he hinted that the prefecture is very satisfied with my teaching abilities and intends to promote me. Maybe in a short time, I will receive a new appointment. Once the teaching assistant in the county is about to retire, I may take his place and serve as the county teaching assistant. This is a promotion beyond the normal rank. However, I think it is unlikely to be a significant promotion. Instead, it may grant me the temporary rank of associate eight and the position of acting teaching assistant. Afterwards, I will either wait for a few years or help another one or two collogues to become juren in order to be promoted to a full rank of eight and eliminate the ¡®acting¡¯ condition.¡± Sun Siwen spoke in an extremely calm tone about a matter that was clearly intended to boast. Obviously. His old problem had recurred, as he boasted to Lu Yuan about his prowess. Upon hearing this. Lu Yuan almost couldn¡¯t help wanting to tell the other party straight out that he was already a second-tier expert in the Jianghu world and was on par with a county magistrate. Fortunately, he managed to restrain himself and didn¡¯t say it out loud. Leter, when he calmed down and saw Sun Siwen boasting, he felt as if he was looking down from a high atmosphere. You never thought, did you? You think we¡¯re on the same level or even above me. With this in mind, Lu Yuan was no longer angry. Instead, he laughed and played along with his friend¡¯s boasting, fully supporting him. Sun Siwen, on the other hand, was completely oblivious to this. He was even happy that he had gained some face in front of his friend and seemed to have come out on top. He ate two more bowls of rice than usual, and had an excellent appetite that day.. Chapter 114 - Chapter 114: Chapter 93: I am the King of Competition Chapter 114: Chapter 93: I am the King of Competition Translator: 549690339 Although Sun Siwen was working hard to catch up with his good friend without knowing it. However, when it came to the inner struggle, no one had ever scared Lu Yuan, the King of Competition. Please tell me, which traverser who wants longevity and immortality can strive as hard as him? I, as a long-lived person, already compete so much, don¡¯t you short-lived people still get defeated by me? ¡®Even if I can¡¯t surpass you now, even after you improve a few decades or so, I can improve for thousands or even tens of thousands of years. So two or three will be counted as five, and in the end, I will still win.¡± Lu Yuan feels quite proud in his heart. Half a month passed, and Lu Yan¡¯s appointment came. He visited many friends and relatives one by one, and then took charge of his new position with a newly hired servant. Along with it, Sun Siwen¡¯s promotion letter also arrived. By the end of December, at the most festive time of the year, he finally did as he had said before, and was promoted by one level to become the Education Official of Changning County. The old Education Official retired this year, and after handing over his work at the end of the year, he would return to his hometown to enjoy his old age. Soon, the end of the year came. In the last few days before the Government Office closed for the holidays, Sun Siwen finally completed the handover of his work. Being promoted by one grade and level was naturally a happy event. Therefore, during the last few days of the year, everyone in Sun Residence seemed joyful. Lu Yuan was also happy for his good friend. On New Year¡¯s Eve, he even personally cooked a large New Year¡¯s Eve feast, taking over the work usually done by Chun Ma, to celebrate the arrival of the New Year. This year was different than the previous quiet ones. There were three members of the Gu Family, Lu Yuan and his apprentice, and Sun Siwen, a total of six people, celebrating the New Year together. After setting off firecrackers and watching fireworks, the new year arrived. After the New Year, Sun Siwen, as a newly appointed official, naturally visited his colleagues in the county without a break, and received local gentry and scholars who came to send their New Year¡¯s greetings at home, busying himself all the time. Gu Songyun, influenced by Lu Yan, became even more diligent in his studies, and it was said that he did not even spare his evenings and continued to study by lamplight. The level of his determination almost caught up with Lu Yuan. Seeing his friend and his friend¡¯s apprentice working hard, with promising careers and a bright future ahead, Lu Yuan, who was waiting in front, also felt some pressure and became even more determined. He not only devoted more time to practicing palm skills and cultivating Inner Strength, but also spent half an hour more reading Taoist Classics than in the past. In this way, the time he spent studying and practicing martial arts every day reached seven hours, which was quite terrifying. Of course, with such dedication and hard work, Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation advanced rapidly, and his understanding of the Taoist Classics also increased quickly, gradually reaching a higher level. The New Year¡¯s festivities were over. Although now promoted to Education Official, Sun Siwen¡¯s main focus remained on teaching students. As for the other tasks of the Education Officials, most were delegated to subordinates for execution; he was mainly responsible for setting the general direction and did not interfere too much. As for this, the county magistrate naturally supported it, and the others in the county had nothing to say. Sun Siwen¡¯s ability to teach students had been verified multiple times and received everyone¡¯s affirmation. For the achievements of the students he taught, it did not matter whether it was the county magistrate, other county officials, or even local gentry and powerful families; everyone benefited. Therefore, why wouldn¡¯t they support Sun Siwen¡¯s choice? On the contrary, these people were afraid that Sun Siwen would lose interest in teaching after being promoted, leaving the academy without such a good teacher, which would be a loss for the whole Changning county. Now that Sun Siwen chose to continue teaching, they were relieved. Having been promoted but still choosing to stay at the academy, Sun Siwen naturally had his own ambition. According to his conversation with Lu Yuan, the newly appointed Education Official planned to spend a few years training one or two juren, then use this achievement to raise his rank again. Striving to be promoted to the County Magistrate Seal within five years and becoming a Seventh Rank Deputy, and then endure for another three years to vie for the position of county magistrate. Lu Yuan, who had already reached such a level in the Jianghu, naturally showed his affirmative attitude towards his friend¡¯s ambition of being promoted to the county magistrate within eight years. He even greatly praised and encouraged his friend to keep working hard. Then he turned around, continued to practice hard. Time flew by like this. In the blink of an eye, half a year had passed. By June, Zhou Qing, who had barely opened up the first of the meridians and two acupoints after practicing Inner Strength for half a year, finally became familiar with the operation of Inner Strength inside his body. Under the care of Lu Yuan, he took the Blood Jade Divine Medicine and began his breakthrough. The process went smoothly, and with the help of Blood Jade Divine Medicine, Zhou Qing¡¯s Inner Strength skyrocketed, breaking through the first meridian barrier instantly. He then attacked the second meridian and broke three more acupoints before the medicine¡¯s effect dispersed, stopping the breakthrough. In just one day, he achieved what would have taken four years without the medicine, completing it in an instant. However, such treatment was only available once. With the Blood Jade Divine Medicine used up and no more in stock for Lu Yuan, Zhou Qing would have to follow his master¡¯s example and practice through closed-door meditation to make breakthroughs in the future. However, Zhou Qing was quite happy about this. He, who had not practiced for a long time, had not yet realized the difficulties and boredom of martial arts practice, and was now immersed in the joy of rapid progress in his cultivation. Fortunately, as a master, Lu Yuan was quite attentive to his apprentice. Knowing that his disciple had average talent and would need a long time to struggle, he took Zhou Qing with him to study Taoist Classics together. At this time, Zhou Qing¡¯s previous comprehension and talent came into play. Although he had just started learning, Zhou Qing had made rapid progress and, in a short time, gained some understanding of the various principles and spiritual aspects of the Taoist Classics. At this rate, it may take him less than two years for his Daoist knowledge to catch up with his master. This made Lu Yuan very happy. The good comprehension of the Taoist Classics by his apprentice, to some extent, could narrow the gap in talent and help him improve his cultivation more quickly. Moreover, while teaching his apprentice the Taoist Classics, Lu Yuan also felt as if he was revisiting and sorting out the insights he had learned himself. This made him gain a deeper understanding of the Taoist Classics, and his perspective broadened. In this way, Not only was he teaching Zhou Qing, but Lu Yuan was also learning in the process of teaching. Under their mutual confirmation, his understanding of the Taoist Classics progressed rapidly. During the latest visit to Qingyun View, when discussing the Dao with Qi Yun Taoist and Kong Yuzhu, Lu Yuan even surprisingly had a back-and-forth exchange, arguing with each other. This progress made both Daoists exclaim that he was a monster and then express their delight. Within less than a year, they had one more genuine fellow Daoist, who was taught by themselves, who wouldn¡¯t be happy about that? Chapter 115 - Chapter 115: Chapter 94: Ten Years Chapter 115: Chapter 94: Ten Years Translator: 549690339 By the end of July, Lu Yuan had completed the transformation of his cultivation method after a year of practice. The original Cloud Palm Inner Strength had been thoroughly transformed into the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra. As a result, although using the Inner Strength of the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra to perform the moves of the Cloud Palm would decrease its power slightly, his potential had been raised, allowing him to continue breaking through. Without a doubt. As King of Competition, Lu Yuan naturally began practicing the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra that day. These months, his understanding of the Taoist Classics had deepened, and likewise, comprehending the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra was no longer an obstacle for him. There are eight levels in total to the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra, each level focusing on cultivating two meridians. Lu Yuan had already comprehended the mental techniques of the first six levels, which focused on the twelve main meridians, and could cultivate them at any time. As for the latter levels, which involved cultivating the bizarre meridians, Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t dived into this area in the past, so his knowledge was somewhat lacking and had some difficulty gaining traction. However, in response to this, he had already intensified his studies in related fields, and he believed that within a few months, he should be able to continue his insight into the remaining two levels of the mental technique. Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t in a hurry about this. Currently, after switching, he had reached the perfect realm of the third level of the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra. To cultivate the six meridians from the fourth to the sixth levels would take at least six years. There was enough time in these long years to gain insight into the last two levels, and there was no need to rush. Thus, Lu Yuan continued to live his life according to his own plan every day, diligently cultivating Inner Strength, practicing Palm skills, studying Taoist Classics, and occasionally visiting the Red Phoenix Building to teach Miss Xiao Li how to sing. He lived a leisurely and comfortable life. When October arrived. Inspired by Lu Yan¡¯s juren title last year, this year, ten more Scholars went to the provincial capital to participate in the Imperial Examination. However, these students who took the examination for the second time still didn¡¯t achieve any results and all missed out on a high rank. With this setback, many aspirational Scholars were discouraged, and those who were originally eager to try began to dampen their enthusiasm. Many people in the county began to face reality. They knew that in the county, although there was Teacher Sun, who was good at teaching, his time in managing the educational system was still too short. It was impossible to change the atmosphere within two or three years; it was just slightly better than before. Last year, producing a Lu Yan had already exhausted Changning County¡¯s foundation for more than twenty years, and it would be challenging to produce a second juren in a short period now. Nevertheless, the local gentry in the county still did not neglect or underestimate Sun Siwen because of this. Instead, they became even more proactive in dealing with this newly appointed education official. Within three to five years, it might be difficult for Changning County to produce another juren. But with this education official, the probability of producing a juren after three to five years is much higher. Who wouldn¡¯t wish for themselves or their children to pass the Imperial examination? Now, it¡¯s essential to have a good relationship with the education official so that he will pay more attention to teaching their children when giving instruction. Wouldn¡¯t it increase the chances of their children passing the examination compared to others? Sun Siwen was naturally both pained and joyful about this. While enjoying the praise of everyone, he also got somewhat tired of those people who were trying to use the back door, making him feel like he had no peace and quiet in his life. Fortunately, this was just a wave of enthusiasm that only lasted for half a month and passed. Sun Siwen could finally calm down and continue to educate his students wholeheartedly. In fact, contrary to the opinions of others in the county, he had strong confidence that one of his students could achieve the title of juren again in a short period. Lu Yan¡¯s achievement last year was the result of years of accumulation and late blooming, and it was difficult to replicate. However, among the now two hundred students in the County Academy, there were still many talented and promising students. Gu Songyun, Li Qian, and Guo Yun were the ones that Sun Siwen considered as juren seeds. They all had talent, innate ability, and were diligent enough to learn the classics and articles quickly. In particular, Li Qian, who had been a Scholar for four years, had a wealth of knowledge reserves that already met the standard for a juren at only nineteen years old. Sun Siwen believed that Li Qian differed from him by just a little. Although Li Qian¡¯s participation in the Imperial Examination this year still ended in failure, Sun Siwen saw this as a kind of sharpening experience. By next year, in October, when the Imperial Examination begins, Li Qian would be sure to succeed. As for Gu Songyun and Guo Yun, they were still young and had only passed the examination for a Scholar for more than a year, and they needed more polishing. It would take another two or three years of study if they wanted to pass the examination for a juren. Apart from the three genius seeds in the Academy, Sun Siwen also had high hopes for the thirty-year-old Scholars. Although these older Scholars had limited talent and aptitude, their knowledge in various disciplines was well-rounded. They were more crafty than skillful, but if they encounter a suitable main examiner, they would have a chance to pass the examination. Therefore, Sun Siwen continued to hold exam preparation classes for these people, emphasizing essential examination points, and even invited Scholars who had passed the examination for magistrates earlier that year to study together. They analyzed the changes in recent years¡¯ examination questions to help these students stay as relevant as possible with the trends. To teach his students well and pave the way for their official career, Teacher Sun spared no efforts. Such efforts indeed produced remarkable results. Another year passed, and it was now the 24th year of the Longqing Era. In October, a new round of Imperial Examination took place. Under Sun Siwen¡¯s encouragement, thirteen Scholars from Changning County participated, including Li Qian. As Sun Siwen had predicted, Li Qian passed the examination in one swoop, becoming the second individual in over twenty years from Changning County to achieve the title of juren. Upon hearing the news, the county was instantly in an uproar. Sun Siwen¡¯s reputation as a good teacher began to spread outside the county, and many students who heard of his fame flocked to Changning County to study under him. This resulted in the student population in the Academy exploding to more than three hundred, showing signs of becoming a renowned local educational institution. With this achievement, the ¡®temporary¡¯ in Sun Siwen¡¯s temporary teaching title was officially removed, and his rank was also formally promoted to the eighth grade. It was quite an extraordinary story in the officialdom for someone to be promoted three times in four years, moving up one rank every year. Sun Siwen officially began his period of success in the official career. Time passed quickly again. It was already the Longqing¡¯s 28th year. On this day, Lu Yuan finally broke through the acupuncture point that had been obstructing him for nearly a month, fully unblocking the last Foot Shaoyin Kidney Meridian in the twelve main meridians. [Name: Lu Yuan] [Talent: Immortality] [Age: 26] [Realm: Post-natal (Second-rate Peak)] [Martial Arts: Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra (Sixth Level Peak) Cloud Palm (Third Level Peak)] [Skills: Advanced Archery (Complete) Basic Medical Skills (Great Success) Advanced Cooking (Minor Success) ¡­ ] ¡°After transmigrating for ten years, I can finally attempt to break into the first-rate.¡± Looking at the Attribute Panel in his mind, Lu Yuan felt a mix of emotions. Time flew by, and he had already been in this world for ten years, and he was almost at the level of being the master of a powerful, influential sect. As a traverser, he could finally say with confidence that he had made a name for himself.. Chapter 116 - Chapter 116: Chapter 95: Longqing 28th Year Chapter 116: Chapter 95: Longqing 28th Year Translator: 549690339 The twenty-eighth year of Longqing¡¯s reign. It was a dreadful year for the people of Da Yue. In this year: In January, Jinghai Country, a tributary state of Da Yue, accused the prefect of Da Yue¡¯s border prefecture of humiliating their ruler, seeking unlimited tribute, and arbitrarily killing its citizens. Jinghai declared that it was severing its ties with Da Yue, refusing to pay tribute, and breaking away as a vassal state. In the same month, Jinghai mobilised an army of 100,000 troops and invaded Yulin County of Da Yue. In February, the news reached the capital, causing Emperor Longqing to be furious. He ordered the formation of a southern expedition army of 200,000 troops to launch a punitive campaign against Jinghai Country. At the same time, he issued a decree to levy a ¡®Pacify the Bandits¡¯ tax on all prefectures and counties to fund the southern expedition force. In March, the weather across Da Yue took an unexpected turn ¨C hailstorms in March, causing a delay in the agricultural season, ruining crops and plunging the common people into unease as rumours began to spread. By the end of the month, Jian¡¯an County was laden with the collection of the ¡®Pacify the Bandits¡¯ tax. The people of Jian¡¯an made a living from tea-growing, and the March hailstorm had already frozen and killed off many spring tea plants, causing many households to fall into bankruptcy and debt. Now with the added tax burden, countless people were forced to sell their children and themselves into servitude to survive. At this time in the Jianyang Mansion, Chi Mingzhu, a practitioner of the Demonic Path, proclaimed himself the Red Sun Immortal, come to save the world. He had supernatural abilities, could control water and thunder, and could cast spells. He even had more than ten thousand followers. He then raised a rebellion, killing government officials and taking control of the prefecture and numerous cities within iust a few davs, shakinz the southeast. The news reached the capital and caused an uproar amongst the court. Emperor Longqing then ordered the Southern Expeditionary Army to temporarily postpone their southern march and instead suppress the Jian¡¯an rebels before dealing with Jinghai. By April, the Southern Expeditionary Army had completed its formation and was ready to embark. But just then, news came from the north. Liang Country, Da Yue¡¯s old enemy, had a newly enthroned prince. The youthful Liang Emperor, as soon as he ascended the throne, declared his intention to march south with an army of 500,000 to expel Da Yue. Now as Liang¡¯s forces were assembling, the vanguard had reached the border, and the war had already begun. Emperor Longqing had no choice but to rename the Southern Expedition Army as the Northern Expedition Army and send them to the northern border to resist Liang¡¯s forces. As for the unrest in Jian¡¯an County and Jinghai¡¯s invasion, a new expeditionary force had to be assembled to tackle them. In the same month, the governor of Yuzhang Prefecture reported continuous heavy rainfall, leading to many floods, with disaster-stricken refugees scattered everywhere. The governor requested aid from the government. In early May, the governor of Xichuan Prefecture reported ground tremors in his territory, causing walls in cities and counties to collapse, damaging over a hundred thousand homes, and causing tens of thousands of casualties. By mid -month, the governor of Linhai County reported that pirates from the East Sea were causing disturbances in the region. With an army of ten thousand men at their disposal and using the mobility of their vessels, they attacked cities and plundered land, moving swiftly. The county government found it difficult to respond and requested assistance from the navy. At the end of the month, news came from the palace in the capital about a major case of witchcraft. The Crown Prince and the Seventh Prince were accused of conspiring with a witch, Yan Daoyu, to place a curse on Emperor Longqing in order to take over the throne. However, the plot was leaked by a servant within the Crown Prince¡¯s residence. When Emperor Longqing heard of this, he was irate and immediately ordered the arrest and execution of the witch Yan Daoyu. Simultaneously, he placed the Crown Prince under house arrest to rethink his actions. Even though the witchcraft case was eventually resolved, Longqing had ascended to the throne in his thirties and was now in his seventies after forty years of reign. His already advanced age, the continuous stream of bad news and the witchcraft case involving the Crown Prince had taken a severe toll on his energy. As a result, shortly after the resolution of the witchcraft case, Longqing spat a mouthful of blood and lost consciousness during a court assembly. He fell ill and lay bedridden, partially unconscious for most of the time. He couldn¡¯t survive past June and died on the thirteenth day. Subsequently, the ministers agreed to crown the Crown Prince as the new emperor. This Crown Prince, who had been under house arrest for less than a month, suddenly turned into the Heavenly Son of the new dynasty and issued a new reign title, Hongdao. Due to the close timing of the witchcraft case, rumours circulated among the common people that Emperor Longqing did not die of illness, but was cursed to death by the Crown Prince. Therefore, the newly enthroned Hongdao Emperor was widely criticised by the people, some even mockingly referred to him as the ¡°Witchcraft Emperor,¡± which was quite ironic. When the rumours reached the ears of Emperor Hongdao, he was extremely furious. However, he no longer had the time to deal with these rumours and gossip. Because the mess left behind by Emperor Longqing¡ªJinghai¡¯s invasion, Jian¡¯an¡¯s rebellion, Liang¡¯s southern invasion, Yuzhang¡¯s flooding, Xichuan¡¯s earthquakes, Linhai¡¯s pirate attacks, these six massive holes¡ªwere all waiting for the new emperor to fix. After forty years as the Crown Prince and finally ascending the throne after allegedly cursing his predecessor to death, Emperor Hongdao, after only a month on the throne, was already exhausted by the demands of the imperial office. He even began to feel that being an emperor was not as good as being a Crown Prince. It was a lot more carefree back then. However, there was no reversing tonic in the world. Once someone ascends the throne, he can¡¯t get off. Whether or not Da Yue¡¯s ship, battered by storms and afloat amidst numerous loopholes, can continue to sail in the raging storm, would depend on the capabilities of this new emperor now. Da Yue, oscillating and seemingly on the verge of capsizing. Outside, there was unrest everywvhere. Dongting Prefecture was not spared either. Due to the hailstorm at the beginning of the year, agricultural production in all parts was damaged. It seemed inevitable that this year¡¯s yield was going to short. At the same time, the sudden drop in temperature caused by the hailstorm also resulted in the death of many animals in the mountains who had just come out of hibernation and hadn¡¯t had the chance to regain their health. They froze to death. As a result, the Miao People, who lived in the mountains and relied on hunting for a living, also began to show signs of instability. By May and June, a rebellion started among the mountain people¡ªthey attacked the county town and rebelled. Fortunately, the prefecture had predicted this earlier and had arranged a large army. Whenever there was any disturbance, the soldiers were sent to put it down. The dozens of uprisings from the mountain people that had just started were not given the chance to spread¡ªthey were already eliminated. However, even with swift responses, many county cities were broken into by the rebels. Officials and people in the cities were slaughtered and plundered. People died or got severely injured. Thus, time moved on to July. One day, after giving his lecture at the Academy, Sun Siwen returned to his house. As soon as he entered his home, he saw his friend for once not practicing martial arts in the garden but rather, having a drink and humming a strange tune. ¡°In my hand, I wield the swirling Moon Blade, shouting the clear mantra, who dares to stand against me¡­¡± The melody was strange, unlike any contemporary verses or song rhythms, it sounded more like folk songs from the mountains, but even then, it was still vastly different. Especially the words he used to sing, which were different from any language at that time, Sun didn¡¯t understand a word. It felt like a foreign language. Curiously, he asked, and his friend said that he was just humming casually, thinking it sounded good, so he were singing it out, and it was not any foreign language. Sun didn¡¯t believe this in the slightest. But if his friend was not going to say, he did not question further and resigned to just listen. And indeed, although he didn¡¯t understand Lu Yuan¡¯s song, and the tune was odd, it didn¡¯t bother him, and he found it exceptionally pleasant, leading him to appreciate it. Upon entering the courtyard and hearing the song, Sun couldn¡¯t help but stop to listen closely without interrupting. After the song had ended, Lu Yuan turned around, seeing his friend and laughed: ¡°Brother Sun, you are back.¡± His voice was filled with nonchalant humour and a carefree air.. Chapter 117 - Chapter 117: Chapter 96: Turmoil Gradually Arises Chapter 117: Chapter 96: Turmoil Gradually Arises Translator: 549690339 Influenced by his close friend, much of the frustration originally accumulated in the academy had dissipated. Sun Siwen answered, ¡°Yes. Recently, due to unrest in various places, there are fewer students in the academy. Classes end earlier.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but ask curiously, ¡°I remember that after years of expansion, there should be over 500 people at Changning Academy, right? How is it that the number of people has now decreased?¡± Since reaching the peak of the second-class level earlier this year, he had been busy practicing the Bizarre Meridians Eight Channels. He spent every day in his home, studying ancient texts and not paying attention to the outside world. Sun Siwen and the others knew he was busy, so they didn¡¯t bother him too much. As a result, even though he had heard about the chaos outside, he didn¡¯t have a clear impression of the situation because he hadn¡¯t been out much. Now, according to what Sun Siwen said, could it be that this chaos had also affected the academy and disrupted the students who were focused on their studies? ¡°Yes.¡± Sun Siwen sighed and said worriedly, ¡°Just a few days ago, the Miao People in the mountains suddenly gathered and caused a disturbance. They descended from the mountains and attacked a small town in Xiaxi County, killing hundreds of people before looting and leaving.¡± Most of the students at our academy come from several nearby counties, including Xiaxi County. After hearing about the attack on their hometown by the Miao People, many students were worried about their families and returned home. Some students from other nearby counties also left due to their worries. The academy, which initially had 500 students, is now left with just over 200.¡± Used to the bustling atmosphere of the academy, the sudden quietness and the empty, expanded school buildings inevitably made this instructor, accustomed to the lively atmosphere of the academy, feel a sense of emptiness. Lu Yuan was slightly surprised, ¡°Is Dongting Prefecture so chaotic now?¡± He remembered that Dongting Prefecture seemed to be quite stable at the beginning of the year. The people were not exactly living in peace, but at least they could survive. However, in just half a year, incidents like the Miao People causing chaos and looting the towns started to happen. Sun Siwen looked at his bewildered friend and said with a bitter smile, ¡°You¡¯ve been at home for the past few days and haven¡¯t been out much, so you¡¯re not aware. The world today is unstable, and there are wars everywhere. The Liang people invaded the north, and the court dispatched 200,000 troops to resist. Although they barely held off the Liang people, the war had affected Guangling Prefecture in the north, causing a large number of refugees. The rebellions in Jianan Prefecture, though suppressed by the 100,000 imperial troops sent by the court, still had remnants of bandits causing disturbances in the local prefectures and counties. In the south, Jinghai Countrv has captured half of Yulin Prefecture¡¯s territorv, and now they are starting to advance towards Southsea, posing a threat to annex Southern Border. The court has urgently dispatched the 100,000 troops that had suppressed the rebellion in Jianan Prefecture to provide relief, hoping to repel this invading country. Disasters have frequently caused civil unrest in other prefectures throughout the world. There were always news of rebellions breaking out and new rebel kings emerging. Compared to those, Dongting Prefecture is still considered better off. At least only a few county towns were attacked by the rebels, and the Fu City has not been breached, still maintaining its basic stability. But I¡¯m afraid if the world continues to be chaotic, the turbulent times will not be far away.¡± As Sun Siwen spoke, he seemed at a loss. He couldn¡¯t understand why yesterday was a time of peace and prosperity, and now suddenly, turmoil had engulfed Da Yue¡¯s eight prefectures. In addition to the confusion, what made him feel even more worried and fearful was the arrival of the troubled times. If Da Yue were to collapse, it would be devastating news for him and for all the people in the world. Better to be a peaceful dog than a person in chaos. In times of chaos, people die. After listening to what Sun Siwen had said, Lu Yuan was also secretly shocked. He really didn¡¯t expect that the world would turn out like this when he emerged from seclusion. However, despite the surprise, seeing his close friend¡¯s worried expression, Lu Yuan still comforted him, ¡°Brother Sun, don¡¯t worry too much. Even if the time of chaos really is upon us, with me around, I can definitely ensure your safety.¡± He said this with confidence because he indeed had a solid foundation. During these six months of closed-door practice, Lu Yuan had made great strides. Not only had he thoroughly comprehended the last two layers of the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra¡¯s Mental Techniques, but he also made significant progress in researching the Bizarre Meridians Eight Channels, beginning his breakthrough two months ago. With thorough preparations, the breakthrough was naturally a success. Just yesterday, Lu Yuan successfully unblocked the Yangjiao Meridian among the Bizarre Meridians Eight Channels, entering the seventh layer of the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra and officially stepping into the first-class realm in the Jianghu. Of course, this was only the first-class realm in terms of Inner Strength, while his martial arts abilities were still at the peak of the second-class level. But even so, a half-first-class martial artist was still considered a formidable figure in the Jianghu and could dominate a city. With such strength, as long as he wasn¡¯t besieged by thousands of soldiers cutting off his escape route, he could go anywhere in the world. Protecting Sun Siwen, a scholar, was a piece of cake. Feeling the concern and sincerity of his best friend, Sun Siwen felt warmth in his heart. Then he brought up another matter, ¡°Let¡¯s not talk about these annoying things, let¡¯s talk about some happy news. Recently, there was news from the prefecture that, due to frequent civil unrest in various prefectures and counties, officials have suffered heavy casualties, and there are vacancies everywhere. Therefore, the prefecture plans to promote a group of officials to fill the vacancies in various places. I have been an instructor for five years and have produced three juren while establishing Changning Academy. My merits are more than enough. Last October, after five years of accumulation and polishing, Sun Siwen¡¯s disciples Gu Songyun and his student Guo Yun participated in the Imperial Examination together and both passed. The name of Changning Shuangjie once again spread throughout the land. With this huge accomplishment, Sun Siwen was able to firmly secure a promotion. In addition, after serving for five years, it was indeed time for him to get promoted. Upon hearing this good news, Lu Yuan immediately congratulated him, ¡°Congratulations, Brother Sun, on your promotion. It won¡¯t be long before I have to address you as the chief official of a region.¡± ¡°Thank you for your kind words, Brother Lu.¡± Sun Siwen¡¯s face was full of smiles. After being promoted to County Magistrate, all he had to do was serve for three more years, and as long as he didn¡¯t make any mistakes, he would be assuredly promoted to County Magistrate. As an official for ten years and governing the region, he naturally felt the joy of success. However, after being happy for a while, Sun Siwen thought of something, and his smile faded, ¡°The only issue is that Changning County already has a County Magistrate, so if I were to be promoted, I would have to go to another county and could no longer stay in Changning.¡± Having lived in Changning County for seven years, Sun Siwen had long considered it his semi-hometown. Now that he had to leave, he couldn¡¯t help but feel reluctant. ¡°Is that so? We have to leave?¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help feeling sad. If Sun Siwen were to leave for duty, Lu Yuan would definitely accompany him. With the current chaotic times and civil unrest everywhere, already over a dozen county officials and deputy officials have died in Dongting Prefecture alone. Lu Yuan was truly worried for his friend going off alone, fearing he might be killed by the chaotic people. These damn times.. Chapter 118 - Chapter 118: Chapter 97: Recruiting Soldiers and Taking Office Chapter 118: Chapter 97: Recruiting Soldiers and Taking Office Translator: 549690339 In early August, the appointment from the prefecture arrived. After receiving his official appointment letter at the Government Office, Sun Siwen hurried back home after a brief conversation with his colleagues. ¡°The prefecture has promoted me to the county magistrate of Wugang County in Shaoyang Prefecture, and as the county magistrate, I shall be in charge of all the affairs in the county,¡± Sun Siwen said to his friends after arriving home. Lu Yuan was slightly taken aback: ¡°How come you¡¯re taking over as county magistrate? Isn¡¯t there a County Captain assigned to Wugang County?¡± Sun Siwen sighed with a bitter smile: ¡°There was an arrangement. But the appointed county magistrate, upon hearing that he was to serve in Wugang County, immediately fell ill and apologized to the prefecture, saying he was unable to assume office. Lu Yuan frowned: ¡°Is Wugang County in chaos?¡± Sun Siwen nodded: ¡°I heard that the previous county magistrate and other officials were killed by the Miao People who came out of the mountains two months ago. These chaotic people pillaged the county town for a month before being repelled by the prefecture¡¯s forces. The troops have already left, and there¡¯s no one to maintain order in Wugang County now. It¡¯s said that the county town has been taken over by local gangs, local bullies, and those Miao and Mountain People. They fight each other, causing endless chaos in the area. The officials appointed to Wugang County are all afraid of being killed by the chaotic forces, so no one dares to take up the appointment.¡± As Sun Siwen spoke, his tone became very indignant. He was not only angry at the bandits for their rebellion but also at the officials who, at a time when the court needed them, were too cowardly to fulfill their duties due to fear of death. Seeing his friend¡¯s expression, Lu Yuan knew exactly what he was thinking and asked, ¡°Brother Sun, are you going to take up the appointment?¡± Without hesitation, Sun Siwen replied: ¡°Yes. Although my colleagues in the county advised me not to accept the appointment, saying that going to Wugang County would be inviting death, I believe that during such chaotic times, as an official of the court, if I don¡¯t shoulder this responsibility, who else will? Should I count on the chaotic people? People in Wugang County are suffering now, and as a scholar, it¡¯s naturally my duty to save them from their suffering. I¡¯m determined to go to Wugang.¡± The newly appointed County Magistrate spoke resolutely. Lu Yuan sighed: ¡°There are many chaotic people over there, many of whom are ruthless killers. Even with your official identity, those chaotic people, who have just experienced the chaos and even killed the county magistrate, won¡¯t be afraid of you as a new county magistrate. With the protection of your official identity gone, what good can you do in Wugang County as a single person?¡± Sun Siwen was indeed a valuable friend ¨C honest, sincere, and dedicated to helping others and the greater good. However, it was precisely because of these qualities that he was bound to face far more trials and hardships than ordinary people. Like this time. As the situation in Wugang County was considered dangerous, many officials from the prefecture feared being sent there and losing their lives. Yet, Sun Siwen was not afraid and was determined to brave the danger. How many could display such great benevolence and courage? At this point, facing his friend¡¯s question, Sun Siwen calmly replied: ¡°I¡¯ve thought about what you said. Agreeing to the appointment isn¡¯t just a result of impulsive passion. I¡¯ve carefully considered my decision, taking into account the help offered by the prefecture along with my appointment. The prefecture promises that if I go, they will provide me with 3,000 silver tales to recruit soldiers in the region, and use these soldiers to escort me to my new post. The prefecture has given me the authorization to have a force of 500 men. They¡¯ve also promised that I can recommend someone to become County Captain, responsible for commanding these 500 men. The official appointment letter has already been sent down. All I have to do is sign it, and I can assume my new position quickly. Moreover, numerous vacant positions in Wugang County can be filled with my recommendations, which will then be reviewed by the prefecture authorities, and those recommended can be directly appointed, regardless of merit.¡± Sun Siwen looked at his friend confidently: ¡°I¡¯ve done the calculations. According to today¡¯s prices. recruiting one soldier requires 20 silver tales for resettlement, which is essentially a life-saving payment, and a monthly salary of 5 silver tales. This way, the 3,000 silver tales are enough for me to hire 150 soldiers. As for the salary, I¡¯ve been teaching in the county town for many years and have accumulated quite a few students and a local reputation. I can raise funds from the local gentry, and I should be able to get a thousand or so silver tales, enough to cover half a year¡¯s salary.¡± With 150 soldiers by my side, even if Wugang County is in chaos, there is still a chance to restore local stability.¡± In a normal situation, a county would generally have about a hundred personnel, including officials. If Sun Siwen were to bring 150 soldiers with him, it should be enough to maintain order in a normal situation. But is this a normal situation? The region has already entered a semi-chaotic state. In times of chaos, the local Grass Head Kings often have hundreds or even thousands of followers, wreaking havoc across the land. How capable are those temporary soldiers that Sun Siwen will recruit, and will they stand a chance against the chaotic forces? Looking at his friend¡¯s confident face, Lu Yuan knew that this was merely an act put on by the other party to ease his worries. Wouldn¡¯t Sun Siwen think of things that he himself had thought of? Despite having thought of these things, Sun Siwen still chose to act like this, showing that he was determined to take up the responsibility. Lu Yuan sighed, ¡°I have no choice but to admire your courage. Fine, you still have one County Captain recommendation to give, right? I¡¯ve been wanting to taste the life of an official and experience the glamour, you can give it to me.¡± ¡°Brother Lu.¡± Sun Siwen was touched by his friend¡¯s words, but couldn¡¯t help but advise, ¡°This is my burden. You don¡¯t need to go there for my sake.¡± Lu Yuan waved his hand dismissively and said: ¡°What do you mean ¡®for your sake¡¯? I just want to be an official, that¡¯s all. And isn¡¯t it just a small county full of chaotic people? I want to see what kind of trouble a bunch of local monkeys can stir up. Enough talk, where¡¯s the official appointment letter? Hand it over.¡± He said this not out of arrogance, but because he genuinely looked down on the chaotic people in Wugang County. In a small county like that, especially one so poverty-stricken, how many skilled people could there be? Would there even be a mediocre Jianghu expert across the entire county? Not to mention the high-end combatants, even gathering a thousand people from those chaotic local militias would be a challenge, let alone their organization and fighting capacity. In such a place, Lu Yuan¡¯s strength, just below the first-class level, would be enough for him to move around with little to fear. Seeing his friend¡¯s insistence, Sun Siwen was increasingly touched, and no longer tried to dissuade him. Instead, he took out two copies of the official appointment letter from his bosom: ¡°This is the County Captain appointment letter, in duplicate. You should keep one copy, and the other will be returned to the prefecture to be filed and recorded.¡± Lu Yuan took the appointment letter, filled in his personal information, and then handed one copy back to his friend. ¡°Alright, take this appointment letter and submit it to the prefecture.¡± After speaking, he couldn¡¯t help but laugh: ¡°Heh, as of today, I am an eighth-grade County Captain. Brother Sun, it took you five years to attain this level, but now I have achieved it in just one day.¡± As the Chief of the military in a county, the County Captain was ranked eighth-grade and was the third most powerful officer in the county, below only the County Magistrate and the County Magistrate. Such a rapid promotion was simply astonishing. Of course, as a price for such promotion, one would have to risk one¡¯s life to secure the position.. Chapter 119 - Chapter 119: Chapter 98: Wholesale Selling of Officials Chapter 119: Chapter 98: Wholesale Selling of Officials Translator: 549690339 After signing the Official Appointment Letter, and assuming his duty, Lu Yuan now shared the same advances and retreats as his good friend. As the newly appointed County Captain, responsible for maintaining law and order in the area, even though he had not yet taken up his post, he had already begun planning his duties. ¡°Normally, one hundred and fifty officers and men for a county is more than enough. But Wugang County is different as there are chaotic people there. Therefore, they won¡¯t be pacified with such a small number of officers and soldiers. We need to recruit more.¡± Lu Yuan expressed his opinion. ¡°Brother Lu makes a strong point.¡± Sun Siwen agreed and nodded his head, then spread his hands and said: ¡°But I only have three thousand silver tales at my disposal. Even if I add up my savings over the years, it is a little over a hundred. It¡¯s just not possible to recruit more people with little funds.¡± Lu Yuan glared at him, resentfully saying: ¡°You really got a bargain. Fine, now that I have assumed the post of County Captain, for the sake of justifying the position given to me by the court, it is only right that I also contribute a bit more. I can contribute three thousand silver tales for recruitment of soldiers. However, you, County Cheng¡¯s adults, will be in charge of resolving the issue of monthly pay for the one hundred and fifty recruits.¡± Over the years, Lu Yuan, in addition to his solitary cultivation, would occasionally go hunting in the mountains to relax his mind. Over the years, by selling the game hunted in the mountains, he had managed to accumulate over five thousand silver tales. Now it was as easy as turning his hand to use three thousand silver tales to help his friend recruit soldiers.¡± ¡®Just consider it spending three thousand silver tales to buy the position of County Captain.¡¯ He thought, slightly melancholy. ¡°Thank you, Brother Lu, for your help.¡± Sun Siwen knew about his friend¡¯s wealth and was aware that his friend could easily earn hundreds or even thousands of silver tales just by hunting. Hence, he did not question this and instead voiced his gratitude immediately: ¡°If we can successfully pacify Wugang County, I will certainly recommend Brother Lu for his merits to the prefecture¡± Lu Yuan waved his hand: ¡°Enough, don¡¯t say anymore. I¡¯m content with being the County Captain, I¡¯m not interested in promotion or wealth. However, let¡¯s make this clear. Since I¡¯m paying for the recruitment, the soldiers recruited will be under my command. Furthermore, I should have the power to recommend all sizes of military positions in the county.¡± Thinking from the standpoint of getting value for his money. At this moment, Lu Yuan intended to make the most out of the money he was spending. ¡°No problem, I was originally planning to leave this matter to Brother Lu anyway,¡± Sun Siwen agreed on the spot. Lu Yuan was right in his previous claims, he was just a weak scholar. Telling Sun Siwen to teach and foster people was fine, even managing a land was plausible. But leading soldiers to fight, that was beyond him.¡± At this time, Lu Yuan was willing to take over these troubles, Sun Siwen was more than relieved. As for the risk of being marginalized? Sun Siwen had never worried about these things with his good friend. ¡°Alright then, it¡¯s settled¡± Lu Yuan nodded in agreement, then gave a side glance to Sun Siwen and gave orders to his own superior: ¡°Since I¡¯m responsible for the military affairs, bring the three thousand silver tales for soldier pay, I will handle the recruiting. In the meantime, use this opportunity to recruit some assistant officials in the county. As County Magistrate, having only a County Captain to assist is not enough. Other Chief clerks, xueyu (education officials), tax examiner ¡­etc, assistant officials, also need to find the right people.¡± A local county town generally has twelve to seventeen officials from ninth rank and above, with the majority being civilian officials. Lu Yuan could solve the military officials¡¯ section, but as for the civilian officials, it depended on Sun Siwen to find the right people. ¡°Okay, I have a few students in my Academy who would have a hard time passing the imperial examination. This time there are official identities from the county government, which present a great opportunity to them, and they should be willing to take the risk and assume office with me.¡± Sun Siwen, being directed by his friend, had no resistance at all, immediately energized, he said: ¡°I will contact them right away.¡± With that, he promptly left the room in a hurry. Watching him leave, Lu Yuan shook his head, then called for his student Zhou Qing. ¡°I have now assumed the position of County Captain of Wugang, and plan to recruit five hundred soldiers in Changning County to assume office with Brother Sun.¡± After briefly explaining the situation to his apprentice, Lu Yuan told him: ¡®You come with me when the time comes, I will ask Brother Sun to assign you the job of an Inspector, and you will assist me in managing these soldiers as my deputy. Go to the city now and ask around for someone who is proficient in training soldiers, recruit them if possible. At the same time, spread the word that County Cheng is preparing to assume office with soldiers and that the army lacks several Inspectors and patrol officers to lead troops. Those who want the vacancy of these positions, to claim an identity, give five hundred silver tales to get the position of a patrol officer from the ninth rank. Give a thousand silver tales to get the position of Inspector of the ninth rank. Only a limited quantity is available, until stocks last. Those who are interested should come to me, the County Captain, to pay.¡± Lu Yuan immediately used the promise he had just obtained from his friend with three thousand silver tales. According to Yue¡¯s control, the patrol officer from the ninth rank can manage fifty soldiers. The Inspector of the ninth rank can manage a hundred soldiers. This time, in order to pacify the Wugang County, the prefecture has given Sun Siwen a troop quota of five hundred men. This means that Sun Siwen has an Official Appointment Letter of a County Captain, five Inspectors, and ten patrol officers in his hands. Out of these sixteen positions, Lu Yuan took the position of County Captain, and gave his disciple the position of an Inspector, leaving fourteen positions to be sold. If all Dositions are sold. an estimated nine thousand silver tales can be earned. He gave out three thousand silver tales, and earned back six thousand silver tales. In a blink of an eye, it¡¯s a three-fold profit, can this kind of business be found anywhere? What? What if those purchasing the positions are good for nothing? Not to mention those good-for-nothings, would they dare to follow the mighty army into battle, after all, that can be lethal. Even regarding them as incompetent, Lu Yuan felt that he could pacify Wugang County on his own. After all, the strength of one powerful person should not be underestimated. So whether the recruited soldiers are strong or not, it doesn¡¯t matter a bit to him. Being an army of one and having a world of strength at his disposal, it was such a great feeling. ¡°Yes, I will handle it right away.¡± After several years of training, Zhou Qing was already twenty years old, and had matured a lot. Especially since cultivating martial arts, his cultivation breakthrough had led to his mastery of the third meridian, classifying him as a decent Jianghu martial artist. The growth in strength had led to changes in temperament, and the birth of self-confidence. As of today, Zhou Qing, when seen outside, also seemed to be quite a heroic young man, who could possibly earn a reputation as a young heroic Jianghu martial artist by wandering in the Jianghu martial arts world. However, with his present strength, Lu Yuan was not yet confident enough to let his apprentice array out. As Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen were advancing their respective actions, their officer team, going to assume office in Wugang County, was quickly taking shape. Those long-time unpassed students of Sun Siwen, some of them, tempted by their future prospects and official positions, made the decision to assume office with their teacher. On Lu Yuan¡¯s side, with Zhou Qing¡¯s propagation, it wasn¡¯t long before people wanting to buy positions found their way to him.. Chapter 120 - Chapter 120: Chapter 99: Reviewing the Troops on the Drill Ground Chapter 120: Chapter 99: Reviewing the Troops on the Drill Ground Translator: 549690339 Zhou Qing¡¯s efficiency was quite impressive. After receiving his Master¡¯s order, he immediately went to the bars and teahouses in the city to spread the news of Lu Yuan¡¯s intention to sell official positions, so as to attract customers. At the same time, he started walking the streets and alleys, looking for people in the city who knew about training soldiers. Surprisingly, this search led him to a suitable target. There was an old veteran in the city who had retired from the county army, although his highest position in the army was only a Company Commander, and he didn¡¯t even have an official identity. However, he had served in the army for thirty years and had fought in more than a dozen battles. Moreover, what¡¯s even more rare is that this old soldier had practiced martial arts and cultivated Inner Strength in his body. Although he had only refined one of his meridians, he was still considered a decent fighter. The only downside was that this man was a bit old, he was already forty-five. By the standards of today¡¯s society, he would not have many years left. But Lu Yuan didn¡¯t care about that. He just needed someone to help him train soldiers, and if they had some strength, that was even better. This old soldier named Liang Hu perfectly met Lu Yuan¡¯s requirements. So after learning about him, he asked his apprentice to bring an Official Appointment Letter for a rank nine Catch Officer and went to recruit him. Although he had already retired and was tired of fighting, Upon seeing the rank nine official identity, the already half white-haired Liang Hu immediately felt rejuvenated and was full of vitality. He accepted the position without a second thought, and then eagerly followed Zhou Qing to meet his direct superior. Wasn¡¯t it just fighting some chaotic people? He had already fought against the invading enemies from the north, so a ragtag army like this was nothing to fear. ¡°Liang Hu, right?¡± Inside Sun Siwen¡¯s Mansion, Lu Yuan sat in the Teacher¡¯s chair, looking down at the somewhat nervous old man, smiling, ¡°Don¡¯t be nervous. As long as you work for me, I won¡¯t treat you unfairly. Did you sign the official letter of appointment? Since you have taken up the position of Catch Officer, you should first take Inspector Zhou to recruit some mountain people in the villages below and enlist them into the army. These mountain people are used to fighting wild beasts, and most of them are quite tough and good at archery. They live a hard life and many of them don¡¯t even have an identity. You can promise them that if they join the army, they will be given twenty silver taels for settling down, and five silver taels as monthly salary afterward. At the same time, the army will help them arrange for an official identity, and when they reach Wugang County, as long as we eliminate the bandits, I, as the County Captain, will make sure they have a piece of land to settle down and establish a livelihood. As for the number of soldiers to be recruited, let¡¯s set it at three hundred.¡± Lu Yuan did not plan to fill the five-hundred quota, and even the fourteen official positions he had, including Liang Hu¡¯s, only sold five. One inspector and four catch officers were sold, and since Liang Huts position was given, a total of 2,500 silver taels were earned. People who are not afraid to die for their future are ultimately limited. Liang Hu climbed up from the bottom and knew very well the hardships of the mountain people at the bottom of society. Therefore, after hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s conditions, he quickly admired, ¡°With such conditions, the mountain people will certainly join the army enthusiastically and feel grateful for your kindness.¡± Lu Yuan smiled, ¡°I don¡¯t need them to thank me, as long as they help me eliminate the bandits. Go, fill the ranks as soon as possible. We can only stay in Changning County for a month at most, and we have to set off after a month. ¡°Yes, I¡¯m on it,¡± After taking up the military position, Liang Hu regained some of the feelings he had in the Barracks, and immediately saluted. Oddly enough, being saluted made Lu Yuan feel quite comfortable, and his smile deepened. Then he ordered his apprentice, ¡°Xiaoqing, you go with Catch Officer Liang to recruit soldiers. Although Catch Officer Liang is your subordinate, he is a senior with experience, so you should learn from him.¡± ¡°Yes, I¡¯m on it,¡± Zhou Qing saw that his Master seemed to like being called this way, so he immediately followed suit. With the help of the old veteran Liang Hu, and the fact that Changning County had already been dealt with by Zhou Qing, recruiting soldiers went smoothly. The mountain people in the county, hearing the generous conditions offered by Lu Yuan, all saw a chance to change their fate and eagerly joined the army. The three hundred soldiers were recruited in just ten days. In the end, there were even too many people joining the army, and after consulting with Zhou Qing, Lu Yuan agreed to temporarily recruit another fifty people, making up a total of three hundred and fifty soldiers. On the other hand, Sun Siwen started to use his connections and influence to raise 1,500 silver taels from the gentry and wealthy families of the county for military salary. Five years of reputation for producing three juren was just that terrifying. In addition to raising funds, Sun Siwen also applied to the county office for a batch of arms to equip the new soldiers. The county office instructed the local Hengyang government to allocate and pay for them. After recruiting the soldiers, it was time to begin training. For this training, Lu Yuan left it to his apprentice and Liang Hu, and acted as a hands-off manager. In the county town, when they saw the soldiers escorting Zhou Qing to his post, the number had already reached three hundred and fifty, it immediately bolstered the confidence of many people. Four more people went to Lu Yuan and bought one inspector and three catch officer positions, just enough to fill the three hundred and fifty positions in the army. Lu Yuan earned another 2,500 silver taels, totaling 5,000 silver taels including the previous sales. His original investment of 3,000 silver taels was not only recovered but also made a net profit of 2,000 silver taels. Finally, when he was selling the official positions and making money here, the newly recruited soldiers in the Barracks were ready to move after more than half a month of training. So, on the day before the army set off, Lu Yuan, as the military supreme commander, invited Sun Siwen and the bureaucrats and gentry of Changning County to come to inspect the army. On that day, The northern wind was blowing, and the flags were fluttering. After being trained in basic drills for more than half a month, the new soldiers who had barely learned to differentiate between left and right were divided into seven rows and formed a slightly twisted line. Liang Hu and Zhou Qing, along with the newly bought inspectors and catch officers, were all dressed in armor, with their hands on the bows and arrows at their waists, shuttling between the ranks to maintain order. Due to the limited time for training, Lu Yuan did not ask them to perform any battle formation changes. Instead, they just walked a few circles in formation and shouted ¡°Kill! Kill! Kill!¡± a couple of times before calling it a day. However, although it looked unbearable in his eyes, the many spectators present were actually quite impressed. Here, it was necessary to mention the special advantage brought by the soldiers that Lu Yuan had chosen. Those mountain people who were used to fighting wild beasts in the mountains might be lacking in discipline and experience, but their ferociousness and willingness to fight for their lives were not inferior at all. When these hunters and mountain people collectively shouted ¡°Kill! Kill! Kill!¡± , the audiences truly felt a strong killing intent, rushing towards them. The thick killing intent made them shiver, their backs grew cold, and their expressions changed.. Chapter 121 - Chapter 121: Chapter 100: Stunning the Whole Audience Chapter 121: Chapter 100: Stunning the Whole Audience Translator: 549690339 ¡°What do you all think of my trained army?¡± At the stage, Lu Yuan smiled and asked the surrounding officials and gentry who had been stunned and slandered him for selling official titles these days. ¡°A true iron army.¡± ¡°In just a few days, with such military power, the County Captain Lu¡¯s ability to manage the army is admirable.¡± ¡°With this army, Sun County Magistrate can rest assured on his trip to Wugang.¡± Even if they were not well-versed in military affairs, just seeing this momentum, the officials and gentry at the scene knew that this was absolutely an iron army that dared to fight and dared to kill, so they couldn¡¯t help but praise it. ¡°Haha! Thank you for your high praise.¡± Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help laughing loudly when he heard the praises. At this time, he wore armor and a red cloak. With a wave of his wide sleeve, the cloak fluttered, and he leaped onto a well-prepared steed. On horseback, the steed let out a long roar while Lu Yuan loudly said, ¡°The soldiers are in full spirits, making everyone amazed. As the County Captain, I¡¯m not too shabby either. Please watch!¡± With that said, he rode his steed, running back and forth on the drill ground, holding a two-stone Iron Bow in his hand. While galloping, he aimed at the targets on the drill ground and shot seven continuous arrows. Under perfect archery skills, every arrow hit the bull¡¯s eye. This divine archery immediately caused a sensation on the stage. Not only the officials and gentry but also the soldiers lined up below were dumbfounded at the sight. These soldiers were Mountain People, and they often went hunting in the mountains, so they were well-versed in archery. At this moment, seeing their County Captain¡¯s divine archery, they were all greatly shocked. Only those who were insiders knew how difficult it was to achieve such archery skills. Instantaneously. Their awe of Lu Yuan shifted from fear of his official position to respect for his strength. It was like this in the army ¨C everything was based on strength. Among the more than 300 soldiers on the scene, none could achieve Lu Yuan¡¯s level of divine archery when asking themselves. With that being the case, it was only natural for them to feel admiration and awe. Even the catch officers and inspectors who had bought their way in were not useless. Among them, there were quite a few capable martial artists from Jianghu. Originally, they respected the cunning Lu Yuan, who had entered through Sun County Magistrate¡¯s back door, on the surface, but scoffed and cursed at him in private, lamenting that Sun County Magistrate¡¯s reputation had been ruined by his treacherous friend. But now, seeing his divine archery, they were all amazed with their mouths hanging open. A villain who they thought relied on connections suddenly became a powerful person relying on his own ability, and such a huge change of image was bound to be surprising. It was as if their worldviews were being overturned. At this time, any contempt they had in their hearts vanished into thin air. Any small thoughts they had were also restrained. But that wasn¡¯t the end. After showing his superb riding and shooting skills, Lu Yuan patted the horse¡¯s back, and then the whole person soared into the air. At the same time, the Long Sword was drawn out from his waist and slashed diagonally toward a huge bluestone on the drill ground. The sword¡¯s aura was cold, and with a flash of white light, the huge, heavy bluestone was split in half and rolled to both sides. Looking at the smooth cut in the middle, one could see that it was as smooth as a mirror, without any flaws. The soldiers knew how heavy the bluestone was from their daily training in the drill ground. It was a huge stone weighing a thousand pounds. But now, such a heavy object was easily split by their County Captain¡¯s sword. This level of swordsmanship, for the ordinary soldiers, was shocking and incredible. It was hard for these people of Mountain People origins, with their limited experience, to imagine that there were people in the world with such strength. Didn¡¯t this seem no different from the immortals in the legends? After breaking the bluestone with his sword, Lu Yuan returned his sword to its sheath, glanced at the expressions of the soldiers, smiled slightly in his heart, and secretly delighted. The reason he put on this show today was not merely to show off his martial arts prowess. ¡®After seeing my strength, the originally restless and disobedient military hearts should be much more stable. From now on, it might be a bit exaggerated to say that I will have full control over their actions, but defiance of military orders is basically out of the question.¡¯ This extraordinary world has this advantage. You don¡¯t need to control power directly. As long as you have a strong force, even the most ambitious people can only restrain their thoughts and obediently follow orders in the face of the gap in individual strength. It was like this now. ¡®And those gentry and masters, their attitudes should change a bit too, right?¡¯ Lu Yuan glanced at the stage and walked towards it, with a hint of a smile on the corner of his mouth. Unlike the opinions of ordinary people. Those who practiced martial arts or had slightly more experience, after seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s swordsmanship, recognized what level of power it was and were even more shocked. ¡°Brother Zhang, you are a third-rate expert in Jianghu. Can you figure out what level Lu County Captain¡¯s swordsmanship is?¡± In the crowd of officials and gentry on the stage, an old gentleman dressed as a gentry pushed a nearby catch officer and asked curiously. Inspector Zhang had always boasted that he was the number one martial expert in the county and had a low opinion of other martial artists in the county. He was incredibly arrogant. But after seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s swordsmanship and hearing the question, he swallowed his saliva and said dryly, ¡°If we only talk about swordsmanship, County Captain Lu¡¯s sword skill isn¡¯t even an entry-level.¡± However, discussing his inner strength, it can be described as the first in Changning County, no, the first in Hengyang Prefecture. When the specialist spoke, the people nearby couldn¡¯t help gasping and being awed. As gentry, they naturally knew that the chief catcher and commander of Hengyang Prefecture were second -rate experts in Jianghu, who were capable of establishing their own sects. But even these two, in Zhang the Catch Officer¡¯s eyes, had less inner strength than County Captain Lu. Doesn¡¯t that mean that County Captain Lu belongs to the very strong group among second-rate experts? What a second-rate expert represents, no one knew better than them. That was a position in Jianghu comparable to or even surpassing that of county magistrates. They had always thought that Sun Siwen forging a friendship with Lu Yuan was a step down and self-degradation. But now, it seemed that it wasn¡¯t self-degradation at all. This was nothing short of recognizing talent, like a dragon refusing to dance with snakes. Only these two outstanding young men could play together and become good friends. With such a powerful friend, what danger could there be on this trip to Wugang County? If only relying on County Captain Lu, he could directly crush his opponents with his immense strength, right? In contrast, they were short-sighted and made fools of themselves. Everyone¡¯s minds were turning, and unconsciously, after Lu Yuan successively demonstrated his powerful archery and inner strength, many people¡¯s impressions and attitudes had changed.. Chapter 122 - Chapter 122: Chapter 101: Identity Revealed Chapter 122: Chapter 101: Identity Revealed Translator: 549690339 When he returned to the center stage, the people who were once cold towards Lu Yuan suddenly became enthusiastic. Their enthusiasm was even more evident than when they were dealing with Sun Siwen. It made sense. Sun Siwen was indeed a good educator. Having such a teacher was certainly helpful for their local gentry in terms of culture and education. But what was the current situation? Da Yue¡¯s imperial court seemed to be in disarray, and the world was gradually falling into chaos. In such turbulent times, the words of scholars did not carry as much weight as those of martial artists. Making friends with a powerful martial artist in the chaotic world could be a significant factor in the rise and fall of many people¡¯s families. Lu Yuan did not resist this idea either. Getting along with these local tycoons would make things easier for him when he wanted to accomplish anything in Changning in the future. Just now, after seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s martial prowess, several more gentry approached him with requests to buy official positions. The significance of going to a post led by Sun Siwen, a scholar, and a Jianghu martial artist of secondary rank was entirely different. The former was an outsider leading soldiers, while the latter might not be as good at fighting battles, but they had enough strength! Moreover, having a fierce general in the army was a tremendous morale booster. With Lu Yuan in charge of military affairs, the people in Changning County who had doubts about Sun Siwen¡¯s ability to safely take up his post now suddenly became optimistic again. Almost instantly, the remaining inspector and three catch officer positions in Lu Yuan¡¯s hands were sold off, earning him 2,500 silver tales. After making such calculations, excluding the cost of repurchasing, Lu Yuan had made about 4,500 silver tales in just one month, almost equal to his five years¡¯ savings. ¡°No wonder those ancient emperors liked to sell official positions ¨C it¡¯s such a quick way to make money! I¡¯d do it too!¡± Lu Yuan sighed in his heart and then looked at his patrons with an increasingly friendly expression. Just now, besides those who bought official positions, some local gentry said they were willing to donate more money for the imperial court¡¯s sake in suppressing bandits. Their earnest demeanor made it hard for him to refuse, so he gratefully accepted the offer instead. The grand review of the troops came to a perfect conclusion. The next day, the officials and soldiers set out on their journey, and the newly-appointed catch officers and inspectors, who had bought their positions, also hurried over. They did not come alone. Those who bought official positions yesterday were mostly wealthy local gentry with substantial household wealth. Now that they had bought positions for their sons, they naturally would not send them to their deaths. Most of these gentry sons who bought positions had martial arts skills, with many even possessing Inner Strength. Among them were even two Jianghu martial artists of primary rank. Apart from the gentry sons who joined the army in person, many of them also sent their own household servants to accompany and protect them. These servants were all trained in martial arts and could be brought out to kill at any time. More than a dozen catch officers and inspectors brought various servants to ensure a convenient and efficient team, totaling more than a hundred people. These people were their private soldiers who did not need to be paid by Lu Yuan. With free labor available without spending money, he naturally would not refuse and accept it happily. As for the possibility of being sidelined, it did not exist. Lu Yuan¡¯s official position was higher than theirs, and his strength was greater. Under the dual pressures of righteousness and power, who could resist? Who dared to resist? So, he only needed to use this free labor force with peace of mind. With the addition of these family servants who brought their own rations for the journey, the full complement of 500 soldiers and officials under Sun Siwen was filled. Now, the well-equipped and high spirited army was no longer intimidated by the former fearsome reputation of Wugang County. On the official roads, the army marched with dust flying around. The bystanders and commoners on both sides of the road would make way when they saw the approaching procession, stretching their necks in curiosity and discussing where this large army had come from. In the mile-long procession, Sun Siwen sat in the carriage, lowered the window curtain, and turned his head to his friend, saying, ¡°With such a mighty army escorting us on this journey to Wugang, there should be no worries. This is all thanks to Brother Lu¡¯s contributions.¡± Lu Yuan smiled and modestly replied, ¡°It¡¯s too early to say that. Maybe there are powerful people in Wugang County itself. Keep in mind that many county towns have no shortage of secondary-rank Jianghu martial artists.¡± His words were not false. Although Lu Yuan had made a ranking system, the second rank was for county level, the first rank was for Fu City level, and the Inborn Grandmasters were for the prefecture level. However, such rankings were not entirely accurate. In places such as Southsea¡¯s Nan¡¯an County and now Changning County, these impoverished areas did not even have a secondary-ranking martial artist in their county towns. Even in Hengyang¡¯s Fu City, the strongest individuals were of secondary rank, lacking even a single first-ranking individual and weak in strength. In prosperous places like Mei County and Dayu County, there were definitely secondary-ranking martial artists. Although Wugang County was said to be even poorer than Changning County, there would always be exceptions like the appearance of a flood dragon in such a poor place. Who says that secondary-ranking martial artists must covet wealth and prefer to go to richer places? What if they like to live poor? Lu Yuan¡¯s friend, Daoist Qi Yun from Qingyun View, was a living example of this. That¡¯s right, after several years of contact, Lu Yuan had naturally come to understand that Qi Yun could practice martial arts, and his skill was not weak he was actually a secondary-ranking martial artist in the Jianghu world. Such a secondary-ranking martial artist would hide in remote mountains for cultivation, which was quite a surprise for him when he first learned about it. But then he quickly became more appreciative. With such strength, Qi Yun could still endure hard times. His determination to follow the Dao was beyond ordinary people. No wonder Lu Yuan always made significant progress whenever he learned from him. The other party was already an accomplished martial artist in the field of martial arts, with enough accomplishments, so instructing Lu Yuan was naturally simple and easy, hitting the nail on the head. Because it was based on the other party¡¯s experience. Having seen Qi Yun¡¯s example, if a secondary-ranking martial artist showed up in Wugang County, Lu Yuan would not be surprised at all. However, after yesterday¡¯s drill ground review, Sun Siwen seemed to have gained more confidence in his friend and now just laughed, saying, ¡°Even if there¡¯s another secondary-ranking martial artist, with Brother Lu here, they can¡¯t cause any real trouble. I¡¯ve heard that Brother Lu¡¯s strength is among the top tier in the Jianghu¡¯s secondary rank.¡± Speaking of this, Sun Siwen recalled the times he had boasted about his promotions in front of his friend and couldn¡¯t help but feel embarrassed by his past actions, complaining, ¡°And Brother Lu, since you had such strength, you should have told me earlier. I¡¯m sure when I bragged in front of you in the past, you must have been laughing secretly in your heart, right?¡± Thinking of the past events, the County Magistrate¡¯s face turned slightly red, and he felt somewhat irritated.. Chapter 123 - Chapter 123: Chapter 102: Planning to Eliminate the Thief Chapter 123: Chapter 102: Planning to Eliminate the Thief Translator: 549690339 ¡®I¡¯ve waited for a long time, and finally, the day has come. I¡¯ve dreamed for a long time, and finally, the dream has come true.¡¯ At this moment, these lyrics suddenly appeared in Lu Yuan¡¯s mind. Seeing the embarrassed appearance of Sun Siwen, he couldn¡¯t help but burst into laughter: ¡°Not at all, not at all. I just saw Brother Sun so happy at the time and couldn¡¯t bear to dampen your spirits.¡± ¡°You¡­¡± Sun Siwen was flustered by Lu Yuan¡¯s cheeky manner. ¡°Alright, alright, it¡¯s all my fault. Please don¡¯t be angry, Brother Sun.¡± Seeing his friend angry, Lu Yuan quickly said, ¡°At this point, I¡¯ve only advanced a little bit more than you. Haven¡¯t you also become the acting county magistrate? If we can successfully stabilize Wugang County this time, with your merits, Brother Sun, you¡¯ll surely be promoted to a full-fledged county magistrate. By that time, won¡¯t our achievements be about the same?¡± Hearing these words, Sun Siwen felt much more at ease. He was glad that he had not fallen too far behind his friend. Otherwise, seeing his friend¡¯s achievements far surpassing his own would have left him feeling both happy and frustrated. So Sun Siwen snorted and let the matter go: ¡°I¡¯ll let you off the hook this time, but if you ever deceive me again, I will not forgive you.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, it won¡¯t happen again.¡± Lu Yuan smiled and nodded. However, while saying this, he thought in his heart: ¡®Being halfway to the top rank doesn¡¯t count as being in the top rank, so I¡¯m still only a second-rate expert.¡¯ And since Brother Sun never asked, it doesn¡¯t count as deception. Yes, a perfect logical loop. I am looking forward to Brother Sun¡¯s reaction next time.¡¯ Sun Siwen was completely unaware of his friend¡¯s psychological activity. Otherwise, upon knowing it, he would definitely have jumped up and cursed Lu Yuan for being shameless and despicable. At this moment, after having let Lu Yuan off the hook, Sun Siwen focused again on the matter at hand: ¡°Enough joking around. Brother Lu, tell me honestly, do you have any chance of handling those Jianghu experts in Wugang County?¡± Lu Yuan thought for a moment and replied: ¡°Unless there are top-level experts in Wugang County, no one can make waves under my watch.¡± While he was only half a step away from being a top-level expert, he was confident in dealing with second-rate experts. However, if he were to face a top-level expert, he would most likely be unable to win. Of course. He was leading a large army to take office this time, with five hundred armored soldiers by his side. Combined with his own strength, even if he encountered a top-level expert, he could attempt to besiege them. But that would be taking a big risk. For the always cautious and protective of his life Lu Yuan, this was something he would never do. If he were to meet a top-level expert, he would only take his friend and retreat immediately, without a thought of risking his life in combat. ¡°Now I can rest assured.¡± Sun Siwen felt relieved hearing this promise. Top-level experts were so rare that even Shaoyang Prefecture didn¡¯t have any. It was virtually impossible for such characters to appear in a remote small mountain town like Wugang County. Having confirmed his confidence in his side, Sun Siwen started thinking about how to settle the unrest. He asked, ¡°Brother Lu, do you have any good methods for settling the unrest in Wugang County when we arrive for your appointment?¡± At this moment, various tactics that appeared in historical records, like winning people over, combining grace with majesty, wielding both soft and hard power, and so on, floated in Sun Siwen¡¯s mind. As he thought about these, he couldn¡¯t help but get excited. Scholars always dream of themselves being like the great sages recorded in history, who could plot the world with a single thought, make the world prosper with a single word, and stoke the world¡¯s fear with their anger. Lu Yuan glanced at Sun Siwen, then simply said without thinking: ¡°What methods could there be? You go to the county town to take office, summon the heads of the chaotic people and just execute them all. Chop them down, one by one. Then send the army to hunt down their followers and eradicate them all. This way, Wugang County will naturally return to peace.¡± Lu Yuan learned this move from reading The Romance of the Three Kingdoms. In the story, Liu Biao went alone to take office in Jingzhou. At that time, there were still many bandits causing chaos in the area, just like the current situation in Wugang County. As a result, this relative of the Han imperial family, under the guise of a special envoy, summoned the local bandits and bullies to a banquet, where he ambushed them. With a signal, he had them all killed on the spot. He then sent out the army, taking advantage of the headless chaos among the bandits, to aggressively hunt down and attack their remnants. In less than a year, the formerly bandit-infested Jingzhou prospered under his rule, bringing peace and happiness to the people. Although this is a plot from the story, Lu Yuan found that it had actually happened in history. Moreover, there were many successful imitations in later generations. Now, he could simply follow the example of his predecessors. After all, he had the righteousness of the imperial court and powerful military force on his side. He could fully replicate Liu Biao¡¯s success. Upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s simple and straightforward method, Sun Siwen couldn¡¯t help but be stunned. He hesitantly said, ¡°Won¡¯t this be a bit too brutal? Some bullies are loyal to the imperial court. Killing everyone indiscriminately could cause unrest in the region.¡± Lu Yuan scoffed coldly, ¡°In these chaotic times, heavy penalties are needed. Those who cause chaos are chaotic people, bandits, and criminals. Killing them is tantamount to protecting the people. How is that brutal? With them gone, the local hidden dangers will be eliminated, and there will be no more unrest. Besides, Brother Sun, would you preach morality, kindness, and goodness to these bandits at this time?¡± ¡°Brother Sun, remember your aspirations: to suppress martial forces and crack down on those who bully others with martial arts in Jianghu. Now is the time. Why are you hesitating?¡± Although both were Jianghu martial artists, Lu Yuan had no affection for those who oppressed and exploited the people. In fact, due to his past experiences being oppressed by such figures, he harbored deep hatred towards them. In the past, he didn¡¯t want to cause any trouble or seek it out, so he didn¡¯t play the role of a chivalrous hero, righting wrongs and helping people. But now that he had become County Captain, whether for the sake of his friend or his new responsibilities, he felt it necessary to clean up the Jianghu in Wugang County. And the first step of this cleanup was to kill these bandits. At this moment, Sun Siwen recalled the courtesan who had been taken away by Jianghu martial artists when he was in a brothel in Luling Fu City. He also thought of his friend¡¯s apprentice, Zhou Qing, and his tragic fate with his family. He even remembered the lofty aspirations he had originally set out with. With his emotions stirred, Sun Siwen clenched his fists and gritted his teeth, ¡°Brother Lu, you¡¯re right. I have been too softhearted. Let¡¯s do it your way. When we arrive in Wugang County, I will summon the local strongmen and gather them for a banquet. Then we will strike decisively, eliminating these local cancers.¡± Speaking to this point, Sun Siwen bowed slightly to Lu Yuan: ¡°When that time comes, I¡¯ll have to trouble Brother Lu to take action.¡± His position as a county government official could at most summon those people, but to actually get things done, he had to rely on Lu Yuan, the Martial Arts Expert. Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°Leave this matter to me.¡± As they were merely low-level, at best, second-rate local experts, it would be a piece of cake for him.. Chapter 124 - Chapter 124: Chapter 103: Prefect’s Financial Aid Chapter 124: Chapter 103: Prefect¡¯s Financial Aid Translator: 549690339 The troop marched for five days, covering nearly two hundred miles, finally entering the jurisdiction of Shaoyang Prefecture. Wugang County was under the jurisdiction of Shaoyang Prefecture, so as the newly appointed County Magistrate, Sun Siwen naturally had to pay a visit to the Prefect of Fu City first. The Prefect of Shaoyang was named Liang Xiwen, a middle-aged man of around forty with an elegant scholarly air. He looked just like the traditional scholar-official. Indeed, such was the case. Prefect Liang was well-versed in academics but not so much in governance. He had a considerable reputation in the literary world, being hailed as a learned scholar. However, his local governance was in such a mess that even Wugang County, which was under his jurisdiction, had lost control. Not only Wugang County, but chaos also erupted in many places in the other nine counties under the jurisdiction of Shaoyang Prefecture, showing signs of losing control. In addition, the Miao People from the mountains would often cause trouble. This all left Prefect Liang, who liked to write articles, in an extremely difficult situation. He even composed several poems, angrily criticizing the disorderly people for being immoral, shameless, and cruel to the common people. However, that¡¯s what scholars do. Beyond giving their criticism, they can do little else. The situation continued to worsen, and he received more and more rebukes from the Prefecture, the learned Prefect was already exhausted and was preparing to apply for a transfer, wishing to return to court and be a peaceful court official. Seeing Sun Siwen bring such strong escorts for his appointment, he was surprised and then overjoyed, taking Sun Siwen¡¯s hand and saying, ¡°I have heard that a new academy in Changning County of Hengyang Prefecture has gathered hundreds of students, rejuvenating local education.¡± And Teacher Sun, who is the director of the academy, is also a great talent in educating students. I have always wanted to meet you. Now that I have met you, I realize that not only are you good at education, you are also skilled in military affairs. With such a strong and formidable team, it should be no problem to pacify Wugang County.¡± Although he wanted to apply for a transfer, Liang Xiwen naturally hoped that his political achievements would not be too unsightly before he left. If he could pacify Wugang before he left, he could also explain this when he returned to the court and secure a better position. Therefore, he was quite proactive about this matter. Upon hearing that this great scholar, Liang Xiwen, knew his name, Sun Siwen was pleasantly surprised. Then hearing the latter discuss work, he immediately assured, ¡°Rest assured, Your Excellency. With me here, we will not let those bandits continue to wreak havoc in the county.¡± Liang Xiwen nodded repeatedly, then took Sun Siwen¡¯s hand and said forcefully, ¡°You must deal with those bandits harshly when you go. These people are lawless and prone to violence. They are all evil and should not be spared. If possible, they should all be executed to ensure peace in the region.¡± The Prefect¡¯s words were filled with murderous intent, which surprised Sun Siwen and made him understand the severity of the bandit problem in Shaoyang Prefecture. Even a great scholar was asking him to kill the bandits mercilessly. Referring to the plan to eliminate the bandits that was set a few days ago, he immediately assured, ¡°Please rest assured, my lord. I will not let any bandits go. I promise.¡± Prefect Liang was very satisfied with the attitude of his new subordinate, a rare smile appeared on his face. He let go of his hand and said, ¡°If all the people under my command were as competent as you, Brother Sun, why would the situation in the Prefecture be so chaotic? You¡¯re about to take up your post and there¡¯s much to be done. Do you need any help? If you do, just let me know and I¡¯ll see what the Prefecture can do.¡± Seeing the graciousness of the Prefect, Sun Siwen immediately expressed his joy, ¡°In fact, I do need your assistance. For this assignment, I have spent all the three thousand silver taels allocated by the Prefectural government as stipends. Furthermore, I have solicited funds from local gentry in Changning County, enabling me to recruit five hundred brave soldiers. But now all this money has been spent. Once this month passes, we will not be able to pay the soldiers¡¯ salary next month. I kindly request that you could allocate some silver, just enough to cover two or three months should suffice. Once Wugang is pacified and the region stabilized, and taxes are collected, I will be able to pay the army stipend from the county¡¯s finances.¡± Upon hearing that money was needed, Prefect Liang¡¯s expression stiffened slightly. If the prefecture had money, he would have already recruited troops and eliminated those bandits himself, rather than waiting for Sun Siwen. But considering the promise he just made and that he actually liked Sun Siwen, and how hateful those bandits were, he gritted his teeth and said, ¡°Indeed, an army cannot fight without silver. Although the prefecture is not rich, I can give you five thousand silver taels as a military stipend. You can use it to reward your soldiers. Remember, you must kill those bandits this time.¡± The issue of face, coupled with the hatred for the bandits, led the Prefect to grant half of the already scarce treasury silver. As for whether this would create a deficit? The Prefect, ready for a transfer, couldn¡¯t worry about that anymore. His successor could deal with that headache. Hearing about such a large amount of money, Sun Siwen was overjoyed. His voice much brighter as he said, ¡°Thank you, Your Excellency. Rest assured, I will not let a single bandit escape.¡± Prefect Liang nodded, feeling that his money was well spent. An hour later, the army left Fu City and continued south towards Wugang County. In the carriage, Lu Yuan listened to Sun Siwen¡¯s recount and the sight of a large box of silver in the carriage, and couldn¡¯t help but smile, ¡°So, Brother Sun, you made a trip and brought back five thousand silver taels.¡± Sun Siwen also smiled and nodded, ¡°Indeed. I did not expect the Prefect to be so generous. In order to suppress the bandits, he even allocated two thousand more silver taels than the Prefecture.¡± Lu Yuan laughed, ¡°It seems that the Prefect has been driven to desperation by those bandits, hence his desire to quickly resolve the issue with money. That¡¯s good. With this military expenditure, the soldiers¡¯ stipend for the next three months is assured.¡± According to this world¡¯s military benefits, a soldier¡¯s monthly stipend is five silver taels. They had recruited five hundred people this time. Deducting one hundred and fifty people who did not require a stipend, there were still three hundred and fifty people to pay. This would amount to one thousand seven hundred and fifty silver taels in a month. Five thousand silver taels could only support three months. Of course, the soldiers in Lu Yuan¡¯s camp could certainly not be compared to the real soldiers. But the problem was that they were going to take up their posts, which was fraught with dangers, with great risks of death and injury. If he didn¡¯t offer a higher salary, who would be willing to risk their lives for him? ¡®No wonder the Da Yue court stipulated that a county can only support one hundred soldiers. I originally thought that was a little too few. But now that I¡¯m in charge, I realize how expensive it is to keep an army.¡¯ Lu Yuan sighed inwardly, then made up his mind. After arriving at Wugang County, he must kill more people, confiscate more properties, and he wouldn¡¯t stop until he made a few tens of thousands of silver taels. And these soldiers were quite numerous. He would look for an opportunity to send them out to suppress the bandits. By doing so, he would also reduce some of them, thereby saving costs. He had spent all his money, it had to be worth it.. Chapter 125 - Chapter 125: Chapter 104: The Impressive Dismount and the Feast at Hongmen Chapter 125: Chapter 104: The Impressive Dismount and the Feast at Hongmen Translator: 549690339 Three days later, after traveling more than a hundred miles, Wugang County was finally in sight. Before entering the county, Sun Siwen had sent someone ahead to inform the county town that the new county magistrate was coming. In fact, the local factions in Wugang County had already learned of the arrival of the new county magistrate two days ago, through spies embedded in Fu City. Not only did they learn of the news, but they also found out that the new county magistrate was coming with an official force of 500 troops. Upon hearing this news, many local influential families were shocked. For a small county with a population of twenty or thirty thousand, a force of 500 troops was a significant number. Previously, the army sent by the prefecture to quell the rebellion was only around two thousand strong. As a result, many individuals who had initially harbored ulterior motives held back, planning to first observe the direction of the winds and test the new magistrate before deciding on their next course of action. Thus, early in the morning, escorted by the messengers, representatives of the five major families in the county, two gangs, and several Miao People¡¯s villages outside the city, had gathered at the city gate. With them, hundreds of ordinary citizens who had been forcibly gathered to inflate the crowd had come to welcome the arrival of the County Magistrate. The sun slowly rose, and soon it was noon. The crowd at the city gate had been waiting for more than an hour, their feet weary and foreheads covered in sweat. These lords, who were used to sitting in high positions and living in luxury, started to grow impatient, grumbling under their breath about the yet-to-arrive County Magistrate¡¯s arrogance. Even the hot-tempered gang leaders, who normally mixed with the Jianghu underworld, no longer wanted to wait around and were thinking of leaving. Fortunately, the representatives of the big families from the county managed to restrain them, persuading them, ¡°Perhaps the County Magistrate is late because of a delayed departure, so that¡¯s why he hasn¡¯t been able to arrive yet. As a new official, if we local gentry don¡¯t come to greet him, he might think we¡¯re being neglectful. Brother Zhao, let¡¯s wait a bit longer.¡± This Zhao Brother was the leader of the Qinghua Gang in the city. Originally a small gang with only dozens of members, the Qinghua Gang took advantage of the chaos in the county town to expand rapidly in a short period of time, with the number of gang members ballooning to three or four hundred. Now controlling two streets, two or three residential blocks in the city, they maintained their hundreds of gang members by extorting protection fees from businesses and residents in the streets and residential blocks. Yet, undeniably, this was stealing the government¡¯s interests. As a result, Zhao, the gang leader, was very dissatisfied with the arrival of the new county magistrate, and the least he wanted was for him to take office. He had initially planned to ambush and kill the newly appointed official on the way to taking office. Unfortunately, the newly arrived county magistrate was escorted by a large army of 500 troops, which was even more than the gang members he had after several rounds of expansion. Thus, the original plan had to be abandoned. Thinking about all of this, Zhao the gang leader was fuming, but after being persuaded, he descended his stance and said sarcastically, ¡°Ning Family Master, we are afraid of neglecting the new county magistrate, but I wonder if he has ever thought about neglecting us? Everyone here are the elites of Wugang County, and the new county magistrate is being disrespectful to us. I wonder if he has ever thought that without our help, he, an outsider, would have a hard time governing such a large county?¡± Hearing this blatant provocation, the expressions of the representatives from various factions present changed accordingly. There were those who sympathized, those who remained expressionless, and those who frowned secretly¡­ Seeing this, the gang leader¡¯s heart lifted. The reason why he acted this way was not simply because he felt slighted. He wanted to take this opportunity to unite the various factions and then collectively sideline and resist the new county magistrate. He refused to believe it. If all the factions in the county combined their forces to gather two or three thousand warriors, even if the new magistrate had 500 troops, what could he Taking advantage of the situation, the gang leader wanted to say more, but at that moment, a cloud of dust rose in the distance. Then, the ground trembled slightly as the soldiers marched towards the county town in a formation that stretched for a mile. After several days of training, Lu Yuan¡¯s troops in the formation had gradually taken shape. At this point, from a distance, they looked quite like a powerful and valiant army. The mountain people¡¯s inherent fierceness was further enhanced by the armor they wore, making them even more intimidating. Initially wanting to speak, the gang leader eyed the scene and found his throat choking, his mouth opening and closing, but in the end, no words came out. At this moment, three or five riders suddenly broke away from the main group and galloped towards the city gate. The rider in the lead was wearing black armor and riding a red horse, exuding an extraordinary air of authority. Lu Yuan rode up to the crowd of people waiting, his sharp gaze sweeping over them, causing everyone to tense up. Then, in a calm tone, he asked, ¡°Have all the local heroes from the major families in the county come?¡± Although his words were plain, they carried a strong sense of authority, amplified by the large army behind him, which put great pressure on the crowd. Gulp! The sound of people swallowing nervously could be heard all around. ¡°In reply to General, all the five major families, the two gangs, and the three clans of the Miao People in the city have arrived,¡± said the Ning Family Master who had previously persuaded Master Zhao. ¡°Really?¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s gaze roamed as he sat high on his horse, glancing down at the crowd. Seeing their nervous expressions, a faint smile appeared on his face: ¡°That¡¯s good. On the way here, County Magistrate heard that bandits were causing chaos in the county and was worried that there were bandits everywhere, defending the city. It seems that there are still some good people in the city.¡± Hearing these sarcastic words and Lu Yuan¡¯s condescending attitude, the faces of these ¡°important figures¡± who were used to being powerful and influential in the county turned displeased. However, seeing the approaching army in the distance, they dared not act rashly, not even daring to retort a word. Lu Yuan sneered at the cowardly appearances of these people, then waved his horse whip and said, ¡°Alright, since the County Magistrate has arrived, you have fulfilled your duty to welcome him. Now, step aside. From today on, the city¡¯s defense will be taken over by my troops.¡± ¡°Do any of you have objections?¡± As he spoke, his gaze rely upon she crow a Dewy Those who initially wanted to protest against the takeover of the city¡¯s defense shrank back and lowered their heads under his stare. Many people could tell that this general was demonstrating his authority. But. Seeing his imposing figure and the army behind him with flying banners, no one dared to be the bird that stuck its head out. Because no one knew if they would end up being the sacrificial chicken to warn the other monkeys. At this time, the army in the rear had already reached the city gate. Following Lu Yuan¡¯s earlier arrangement, they swiftly entered the city, dispersed the ragtag army guarding the gate, and took over the city¡¯s defense. As the city gate¡¯s defense was taken over, Sun Siwen¡¯s carriage also arrived. The carriage stopped at the entrance of the city, and Sun Siwen stood up from inside. Looking around, he saw the local heroes from the major families, their faces slightly pale from Lu Yuan¡¯s intimidation. A smile appeared on Sun County Magistrate¡¯s face, and he said with a bow, ¡°Thank you all for waiting. I have traveled a long way and am exhausted from the journey, so I won¡¯t say much now. ¡± ¡°Tonight, there will be a banquet at the county office, and I hope you will all grace us with your presence. During the banquet, I hope to discuss plans for governing the county together with all of you.¡± Seeing the new county magistrate¡¯s refined demeanor, the frightened local heroes finally relaxed. At this point, it seemed that he intended to work together with them to govern the county, and they couldn¡¯t help but feel secretly pleased. ¡°County Magistrate, if you are tired, please rest first. If you are worn out, it would be our fault.¡± ¡°Sir, rest assured, I will definitely attend the banquet tonight.¡± ¡°Exactly! If the County Magistrate invites us, who dares not to attend would be going against me!¡± The people immediately made their statements. As they watched, Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen exchanged glances, both seeing the amusement in their friend¡¯s eyes. The trap of the Hongmen Banquet was set; they were just waiting for the fish to take the bait. Afterward, Sun Siwen excused himself for his fatigue and returned to the carriage. Lu Yuan escorted him and proceeded towards the county office. Since they had decided to hold the Hongmen Banquet, preparations had to be made. Otherwise, if things were chaotic and a mistake was made, what would they do? In this aspect, the two friends were quite serious about it.. Chapter 126 - Chapter 126: Chapter 105: Breaking the Cup as a Signal Chapter 126: Chapter 105: Breaking the Cup as a Signal Translator: 549690339 That night. The county government office was a dazzling sight, with carriages and horses coming and going. Over ten prominent families and heroic heroes from the city received invitations and swarmed to the office, many of them arriving in pairs, clearly having gathered together beforehand. The grand entrance of the County Magistrate at noon had unsettled many people. Therefore, after welcoming the new County Magistrate, many family heads and heroes gathered to discuss countermeasures. Now that it was time for the banquet, they readily tagged along together. ¡°Ning Family Master.¡± ¡°Leader Zhang.¡± ¡°Chief Bai. ¡± These people, who had either been acquaintances or adversaries in the past, ran into each other at the entrance and greeted each other with smiles. At the meeting of gazes, the old foxes saw each other¡¯s intentions and felt reassured. Although the new County Magistrate¡¯s entrance at the city gate had made them realize his strength, they knew that this new official was not easy to fool. However, no one wanted to give up the power they had gained. Therefore, many had already decided that, when negotiating with the new County Magistrate later, they would work together in a united front. Of course, this was not to completely undermine the new County Magistrate, but to negotiate how much power should be given away and how much interest should be divided among them. Twenty soldiers guarded the entrance, all of whom were powerful and extraordinary, handpicked by Lu Yuan, and led by an Inspector named Ma Ying, whose strength had reached the third rank. The signal to close the doors and ¡°deal with the fleeing dogs¡± was about to be given. If they did not strengthen their guard at the entrance, what would they do if the gluttonous and cruel dogs managed to escape? At this moment, Ma Ying saw the gathering of people at the entrance and, already aware of the plan, could not help but reveal a hint of mockery in his eyes. Seeing that it was about time, he stepped forward and spoke to the crowd that was still chatting, ¡°Gentlemen, the time for the banquet has arrived. The feast has been prepared inside the county office; please enter without making the County Magistrate wait too long.¡± Hearing this, those who were still chatting stopped and glanced at Ma Ying, ignoring the Inspector and instead saying to each other, ¡°Gentlemen, since the county office has already urged us, let¡¯s go in.¡± ¡°Yes, yes, let¡¯s not make the County Magistrate wait too long.¡± ¡°Even though we had to wait for the County Magistrate for a long time at noon, we are here to make it up to him. We won¡¯t behave like this.¡± Seemingly emboldened by the unity of all the city¡¯s powerful figures, those who had been humbled earlier in the day began to regain their confidence and arrogance as they engaged in conversations. Their determination to resist the County Magistrate surfaced once more. Seeing himself being ignored, Ma Ying, who had recently taken office, could not help but feel a surge of anger. However, thinking of the outcome for these people once they entered, he no longer felt angry. Instead, he stepped aside with a smile, making way for the arrogant fellows. Seeing his yielding attitude, the local city bullies gained confidence and became even happier, believing they had intimidated him with their combined power. Striding confidently, just as they always had, they entered the county government office with their noses in the air. Some even looked at Ma Ying with mockery in their eyes as they passed him by. As for this¡­ Ma Ying: I can bear it for now. However, he was determined that when the time came to take action, he would gouge out the eyes of those who had looked down on him, and only then would his anger be sated. Inside the county government office. These city bullies had come to the government office countless times during the city¡¯s occupation, and many of them had grown familiar with the teacher¡¯s chair where the county magistrate held court. Thus, they comfortably navigated the county office without needing guidance and arrived at the banquet hall. Once in the hall, they saw that the food and wine had indeed been prepared. Perhaps due to the County Magistrate¡¯s recent arrival, there were no serving girls in the hall, only rough soldiers wielding knives and swords, standing guard on both sides of the main hall. Many looked at them with either laughter or disdain, while others, remembering the events of the day, felt uncomfortable. But since they were already at the banquet and had bigger plans in mind, they paid little attention to these matters. As more people took their seats, the hall grew crowded and soon all places were filled. All those who were invited had arrived. However, the man who should have appeared long ago, the County Magistrate they had seen during the day, was still nowhere to be seen. After waiting for another moment, the County Magistrate still did not appear. ¡°What¡¯s going on with the County Government? They promised us a banquet, but we have been waiting here for so long, and the County Magistrate has yet to arrive.¡± Speaking was still Leader Zhang; perhaps it was the imbalance brought about by his sudden rise to power, but he seemed to enjoy expressing himself. ¡°Exactly, the guests are here, but the host hasn¡¯t arrived. What kind of hospitality is this?¡± ¡°Although the County Magistrate is not a county magistrate yet, he doesn¡¯t seem to care about us, the local gentry. Does he not want to properly govern this county? As people began to speak up, a chorus of agreement followed. It was at this moment that heavy footsteps echoed from outside the main hall. The noise of the crowd subsided, and then they saw the brave general who had ridden his horse during the day, now holding a sword in one hand and an Iron Bow in the other, entering through the doorway. Seeing him, those who had been making noise in the hall quieted down. They couldn¡¯t help but remember the general¡¯s prestige and feel a bit afraid. However, given the current atmosphere, many felt a growing sense of unease. Lu Yuan walked in, looked around at the agitated guests, and said with a smile to their doubtful expressions, ¡°It seems everyone has arrived. However, as you have mentioned, the County Magistrate won¡¯t be attending. Tonight¡¯s host is me, the County Captain.¡± Upon hearing these words, the quiet hall erupted into noise once more. People talked in hushed tones, wondering what was going on. The seemingly calm Ning Family Master stood up, cupped his hands, and asked, ¡°County Captain, may I ask why the County Magistrate isn¡¯t attending? Is he unwell?¡± Lu Yuan glanced at the old man and then raised his bow, placing an arrow on the string. With a smile, he said to the shocked Ning Family Master, ¡°Of course, the County Magistrate is in good health, but given his status, how can he dine with you bandits? By the County Magistrate¡¯s order, the ten major crime families of Wang, Cheng, Ning, Liu, and Zhou in the county, as well as the nefarious Qinghua Gang, Hongshan Gang, and the Miao people from outside the city ¡ª Bai, Lan, and Qing ¨C are all found to be in collusion with rebel bandits, wreaking havoc in the county, and oppressing the people. Now that their crimes have been exposed, these ten rebel heads shall be put to death and all others involved shall be implicated with no mistake. Guards, kill them all.¡¯ As he finished speaking, Lu Yuan released the bowstring, and the sharp arrow pierced through Ning Family Master¡¯s chest, sending him flying through the air, crashing into tables and dishes along the way until he landed heavily on the ground. This appeared to be a signal. A group of archers surged in from outside the door, their bows drawn and arrows aimed at the startled crowd inside the hall.. Chapter 127 - Chapter 127: Chapter 106: The Bloody Long Night Chapter 127: Chapter 106: The Bloody Long Night Translator: 549690339 ¡®We¡¯re innocent!¡± ¡°We are all loyal citizens, it¡¯s impossible for us to be rebels!¡± ¡°Where is the County Magistrate? I want to see the County Magistrate!¡± Seeing that Lu Yuan actually dared to take action and really did so, the initially triumphant and arrogant heads of the families instantly panicked and began to plead for mercy and explain themselves. Of course, there were also those who were more hot-blooded. Seeing that these government officials were not planning to show any mercy, and that there was no peaceful ending today, they shouted loudly. ¡°Everyone, these government dogs are not going to spare us. Since death is certain, let¡¯s fight them!¡± ¡°That¡¯s right, waiting here for death is worse than charging with me. If we can escape and survive, I will assemble people to kill all these dog officials.¡± ¡°I knew we couldn¡¯t trust these Yue dog officials, follow me and kill!¡± While the heads of the five big families were still pleading, those mixed up in the Jianghu like Leader Zhang, as well as the Miao people of the three surnames, had already started roaring and rushing towards the door. But they had barely taken a few steps when they heard the thrum of bowstrings being let loose, and then dozens of arrows rained down upon them. These people were all here for the banquet, and none of them had expected the County Magistrate to be so bold as to target them, the leaders of local county powers, so they hadn¡¯t brought any weapons with them. At this time, they were unarmed, and although some with good martial arts skills could use their bare hands to deflect the arrows.¡± However, there were only five or six of them charging forward, whereas Lu Yuan had arranged for thirty archers, all skilled in archery from the mountains. Now that they were equipped with the strong bows of the army, dozens of people fired volleys together. It didn¡¯t matter whether these third-rate or even lesser figures were present; even second- rate masters would have inevitably been filled with regret at this sight. ¡°I hate!¡± Sure enough, under the haphazard rain of arrows, those who charged forward were instantly pierced and looked like beehives, unable to get any closer. Of course, there were also one or two clever ones who didn¡¯t rush forward, but instead tried to escape through the windows on both sides of the hall. However, Lu Yuan had long placed armored warriors on both sides of the hall. They were all carefully selected, either having developed Inner Strength or being third-rate martial artists themselves. At the same time, as the County Captain began to take action, these martial artists who made up the armored soldiers also drew their weapons to work together and kill the escaping bandits. Facing the siege of several martial artists of the same level who also had weapons and armor, those unarmed people were naturally no match, dying within a few moves under the chaotic blade. At this time, after killing those who had tried to break through the siege, the archers didn¡¯t stop. Another rain of arrows passed by, and the heads of the families who had been pleading for mercy in the hall were similarly sent to their deaths. From the moment of home signal by throwing a cup, it took only a short while for more than ten people who participated in the gathering to be completely wiped out by the well-prepared government soldiers. From the beginning to the end, Lu Yuan only shot the first arrow. For dealing with these people, there was no need for him, a top-tier master, to take much of any action. The government soldiers and armored warriors were enough. ¡®Even if they are Jianghu masters, facing the siege of a large army and the strong bows multi-shot, they can¡¯t hold up! I should learn from this and never dare to get involved in danger like they did.¡¯ He looked at the corpses all around and couldn¡¯t help but sigh, then turned to his subordinates and said, ¡°Zhou Qing, Ma Ying, Tian Wei, Su Biao.¡± Lu Yuan listed four names in a row, all of them his inspectors, and then ordered, ¡°You will immediately follow the original plan and take people to eliminate those remaining rebel remnants. Now that the Rebel Head is gone, those people are like headless dragons, lost and confused. It¡¯s just like what I said before, all the key rebels will be executed, and the bandits¡¯ wealth will be confiscated.¡± I want that by the end of this night, there will be no more rebels in Wugang County.¡± ¡°Your subordinates obey.¡± Zhou Qing and the others stepped forward, accepted the order, then turned and left the door. They each led a hundred men under their command and started cleaning up the rebels house by house according to the original plan. The first to suffer were the servants and coachmen waiting at the entrance of the county government office. These close associates of the rebel head were naturally the first to be cleared, directly killed by the county soldiers who came out. Afterwards, Zhou Qing and the other three inspectors each led their subordinates and headed in different directions within the county. In no time, various places throughout the county were filled with one wave of shrieks and wails after another, as some fires started and lit up the night sky. The people living in the houses within the city, awakened by the noise, were so scared that they thought bandits had entered the city and hastily blocked their doors. They then crouched by the window, peeking through the cracks, terrified to look at the outside. A bloody sleepless night had begun. While Zhou Qing and the others were leading the troops to kill the bandits, Lu Yuan had someone clean up the living room and had the remaining inspector, Su Biao, guard the county government office with his subordinates, guarding against a bandit attack. After handling the situation, he returned to the backyard of the government office to see his friend. In the pavilion under the garden in the backyard, Sun Siwen stood on the railing, his hands behind his back, pacing back and forth. Hearing the sound, his friend came over and asked, ¡°Is everything done?¡± Lu Yuan nodded with a smile: ¡°Of course it¡¯s done. With me taking action, can¡¯t you trust me?¡± Sun Siwen felt relieved, but was still worried: ¡°According to the bandit spies captured in the county government office today afternoon, the city¡¯s five families, and those two gangs, have gathered about a thousand men. Zhou Qing and the others only took four hundred people. With the enemy outnumbering us several times, don¡¯t you think there are too few people?¡± Lu Yuan shook his head and smiled: ¡°Brother Sun, you¡¯re overthinking it. Four hundred men are more than enough. In fact, I think it¡¯s too many.¡± He had made thorough preparations tonight, and Zhou Qing and the others were all third-rate experts in the Jianghu world, each leading a hundred armored warriors. How could those ragtag groups in the city, whose leaders had been killed and were completely unprepared, be their opponents? So now all he had to do was wait for Zhou Qing and the others to kill the backbone of the rebels, remove the troublemakers, and the rest of the traitors would scatter. Right now Sun Siwen was just concerned and confused. After tonight, everything would settle down, and he could be at ease. ¡°I pray to the heavens for a smooth success tonight.¡± Sun Siwen rarely made a prayer, then forcibly calmed down and sat in the pavilion, waiting patiently. Lu Yuan looked at his friend¡¯s appearance, smiled, and sat beside him, practicing his Inner Strength in silence. Although he said it was fine and believed tonight¡¯s operation would go smoothly, he was still afraid of any fish slipping through the net. If these bandit remnants were restless and tried to assassinate Sun Siwen, it would be a big mess. If he wasn¡¯t watching his friend¡¯s back, he wouldn¡¯t feel at ease. The night slowly passed in waiting. The screams and chaos within the city gradually subsided, and fires died down. Soon the pale light of dawn appeared on the horizon. Having practiced Inner Strength all night, Lu Yuan heard the noise and opened his eyes, his gaze falling on his disciple who had entered from the courtyard. Zhou Qing¡¯s armor was mostly stained with blood, and his face still showed a trace of excitement. At this moment, he walked to his master and saluted, saying, ¡°Master, the backbone of the city¡¯s five families and two gangs have been largely killed in the overnight fight.¡± By his side, Sun Siwen had stayed up all night, just dozed off, and was startled awake again. On hearing these words, he was instantly wide awake. Immediately, his face lit up with joy.. Chapter 128 - Chapter 128: Chapter 107: Two Hundred Thousand Taels Chapter 128: Chapter 107: Two Hundred Thousand Taels Translator: 549690339 ¡°Are the bandits all eliminated?¡± Sun Siwen looked at Zhou Qing, suppressing his excitement, and asked. ¡°Yes.¡± Zhou Qing highly respected Sun Siwen as his Master¡¯s friend and elder, nodded and said, ¡°However, there are still some scattered remnants of the bandits. Inspector Ma and his team are currently searching for them in the city. The city gates have been sealed, and these people won¡¯t be able to escape for long.¡± ¡°Good, good, good!¡± Sun Siwen patted his hands and cheered repeatedly. After a night of torment, it was finally at this moment that the weight on his heart lifted. Lu Yuan looked at him with a smile, then turned to his disciple and said, ¡°Now that the bandits from all the families have been eliminated, you will immediately lead a team to take inventory of the rebels¡¯ properties. After you have a rough idea of the numbers, report them to me. Moreover, send another team to maintain order on the streets. If anyone in the city dares to take advantage of the chaos, Show no mercy and kill them as rebels.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Zhou Qing immediately acknowledged the order and went on to carry out the tasks. After he left, Lu Yuan looked at Sun Siwen, who had relaxed considerably, and said, ¡°Brother Sun, although the rebels in the city have been eliminated, they are actually just small- time bandits and easy to dispose of. Without them, the rest of the people in the city are law-abiding and will naturally submit. However, last night we killed the chieftains of the three Miao surnames. Those Miao People live near mountains and rivers and are active between the mountain ridges, therefore, they were hardly loyal to the government. Now that their chieftains are dead, we have broken with them completely, and there is no room for reconciliation. If not handled properly, they would simply hold their ground in the mountains and raid the nearby regions, causing endless troubles for Wugang County.¡± Handling the barbarian tribes living in the mountains has always been a headache for the imperial court. They provide little in terms of taxes, are impoverished and uncivilized, and even occasionally rise to revolt. Sending troops to subdue them would result in the troops unable to pursue the tribes as they retreat into the mountains, leaving the empire unable to do anything. That¡¯s why the Miao People have been constantly submitting and rebelling, rebelling and submitting. They have always been a persistent problem in Dongting District, and impossible to eradicate. But under the circumstances of last night, Lu Yuan could not have spared the lives of the Miao chieftains. Otherwise, the Miao People, who fear power but lack virtue, would think that the government is afraid of them and become even more arrogant and unruly. Thus, it is better to simply kill all of them and be done with it. However, while killing is enjoyable, dealing with the aftermath is not. There are a total of ten thousand people among the three Miao surnames in Wugang County, forming a formidable force. If not handled properly, the situation can easily escalate.¡± ¡°The Miao People problem has always been a chronic issue. The current turmoil throughout Dongting District is mainly caused by these Miao People¡¯s rebellion. ¡± At the mention of the Miao People, Sun Siwen also felt a headache. As a civil official skilled in educating, dealing with such military affairs was like solving a huge puzzle for him. With no other options, he could only seek Lu Yuan¡¯s help: ¡°Brother Lu, do you have any plans to handle this situation?¡± Lu Yuan had already planned for this and smiled, saying, ¡°The Miao People¡¯s resistance to the government relies on the advantages of the mountain ridges. By relying on the fact that the government is unfamiliar with the mountain environment, they are able to defy the imperial forces. However, the soldiers I recruited are all mountain people hunters who navigate through the mountain ridges. When it comes to familiarity with the mountains, they are no worse than the Miao People. With these soldiers available, the Miao People¡¯s advantage of the mountain ridges is greatly diminished. Moreover, the city gates are now closed, and the Miao People should not yet know that their chieftains are dead. I plan to wait until the remnants of the bandits are cleared from the city today. Tomorrow, I will send troops to attack them, wiping out their villages one by one before the Miao People can react. Once we have breached the Miao villages, controlled their family members, and killed the leaders, they will not be able to rebel even if they want to.¡± Similar to the Hongmen Banquet, Lu Yuan¡¯s solution was still to kill. He always believed that problems in the world were endless and many could not be resolved. Alternatively, some resolutions could not satisfy everyone. However, all problems and troubles first arise from people before they occur. Therefore, since the problems cannot be resolved, it is better to eliminate the troublemakers so that there are no problems left.¡± As with the slaughter of the five major families and the Jianghu gangs the night before, the same goes for the current three Miao surnames. Hearing about more killings, Sun Siwen felt somewhat uncomfortable, but he also knew that this was the best solution, so he said, ¡°As previously agreed, I will handle civil affairs in the county, while Brother Lu will handle military affairs. I am unfamiliar with military matters, so I will leave this to you, Brother Lu.¡± Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°Leave this matter to me.¡± Afterward, Sun Siwen, who had barely slept the night before, could no longer endure and got up to bid farewell, returning to his bedroom to rest. Lu Yuan looked at the bright sky and continued his cultivation. Having cultivated to his level, his energy was far superior to ordinary people¡¯s, and staying awake for several days without sleep was not a problem at all. It was not time to rest yet, as there were still matters to be handled. By the afternoon, Zhou Qing returned. Busy for a day and a night, even for a third-rate martial artist like his apprentice, he was also somewhat tired. However, he still seemed somewhat excited after killing so many people. At the moment, he was directing people to carry boxes of gold, silver, and jewelry into the backyard. He then reported to his Master, ¡°Master, after counting the wealth of the seven houses, there are more than 1,700 taels of gold, more than 39,000 taels of current silver, and over 700,000 copper coins. In addition, there are other antiques and valuables worth over 50,000 taels. There are also land deeds, fields, houses, shops, and other assets. Roughly counting, the value is no less than one hundred thousand silver taels. The total assets confiscated from the bandits amount to at least two hundred thousand silver taels. However, it will take some time to liquidate the full amount. ¡± Zhou Qing was quite excited as he spoke. For him, two hundred thousand taels of silver was an unimaginable amount. Even Lu Yuan was astonished that such a small county town could amass so much silver. He had just managed to accumulate over ten thousand taels of silver after several transactions and relying on his original wealth. Now, in less than a day, he had seized assets worth two hundred thousand taels of silver. Of course, he could not take all of this silver for himself. Some of it had to be distributed to the soldiers as rewards, fulfilling the promise made earlier to assist them in settling down. Some had to be left to Sun Siwen to serve as funds for the recovery of the city. Nevertheless, even after deducting the above, Lu Yuan could still easily acquire a hundred thousand taels. An asset increase of ten times in a day was surprising to anyone who heard it. ¡°Very well, seal and store all of this money, and personally guard it with your men.¡± With so much money in one place, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t trust anyone to guard it except for his most trusted disciple. As for himself? He would be attacking the Miao People tomorrow. Such an important operation must be personally supervised and could not be entrusted to his subordinates. ¡®Yes.¡± Zhou Qing knew the importance of the matter and solemnly nodded.. Chapter 129 - Chapter 129: Chapter 108: The Movement of the Five Poisons Sect Chapter 129: Chapter 108: The Movement of the Five Poisons Sect Translator: 549690339 On the second day, the city gate, which had been closed for two full days and nights, finally opened early in the morning. However, there were still no civilians daring to venture out on the streets of the city. People outside the city gate seemed to have sensed something wrong too, and nobody guarded the entrance. Lu Yuan, riding his own date-red horse and wearing armor, led his four hundred-strong army out of the city after making sufficient preparations. In yesterday¡¯s battle, since the leaders with the highest martial prowess had been encircled and killed beforehand, the seven allied families were caught off guard. On the other hand, the county soldiers had excellent equipment and had made advance preparations. Moreover, they were led by martial artists who had practiced Inner Strength and third-rate experts to charge forward, making them invincible. So the casualties of his subordinate soldiers were not high. In the end, only seven unlucky souls died, and about ten others were injured. These wounded soldiers and some others were left in the county town by Lu Yuan to guard the home. As for the rest of the well-conditioned county soldiers, they were led out today, ready to eliminate Miao People¡¯s villages. At this time, the soldiers¡¯ morale was high, left hand holding a knife, right hand holding a bow, wearing a leather armor, stepping steadily, and following the County Captain on their journey. It is no wonder they were so excited. Before leaving the camp today, the County Captain had distributed the rewards for the battle of yesterday. All soldiers were granted ten silver tales, and officers were promoted accordingly. With the reward money in their hands and the exhilarating battle experience from the day before, these new soldiers, though inexperienced, had gained an impressive momentum. At least. As for the Miao People¡­ Being mountain folks themselves, these soldiers had no shortage of interactions with them on ordinary days, and couldn¡¯t be more familiar with their impoverished background. They were somewhat brave and dared to kill people with a momentary burst of energy. But were they worse off? Not to mention that they now represented the official position and righteousness of the court, which gave the soldiers a natural sense of superiority. Furthermore, with the excellent equipment, assembled army formations, and the boost of confidence from yesterday¡¯s great victory, their belief was even more resolute. For this expedition, everyone firmly believed that they could eliminate the Miao people. As Lu Yuan rode his horse, his senses had been sharply upgraded to the first-rate realm. Naturally, he could keenly detect the high spirits of the surrounding soldiers, so he couldn¡¯t help but nod slightly: ¡°With high morale, this battle is sure to be won.¡± Just like the lower-ranking soldiers, he also believed that the task of eradicating the Miao people would not pose any problems in this battle. With such a large number of troops, high spirits, and himself as a first-rate expert leading the charge, and a surprise attack at that, if they could lose with such a luxurious lineup, it would be a real surprise. So this battle would never have any accidents unless the Miao People had hidden some trump cards or found external help. ¡°However, the chances of that are too slim. In this remote county town, no matter how strong those countryside Miao People are, how much background could they hide? What help could they find? ¡± Lu Yuan thought about it for a moment before breaking into a smile at his own thoughts: ¡°Just my unnecessary worries.¡± There won¡¯t be any problems this time, and there can¡¯t be any problems. On the other side. Just as the county town dispatched troops to eliminate the remaining three Miao surnames, in one of the three Miao settlements, the White ethnic village, the elders of the clan gathered in the largest hall to welcome an esteemed guest from the mountain. ¡°Elder White Eye, it¡¯s not that our clan does not want to cooperate with the Holy Sect. It¡¯s just that a new County Magistrate has arrived in the county town just the day before yesterday. And he didn¡¯t come alone, he brought five hundred official soldiers. With so many soldiers guarding the city, even if we exhausting all of our adult men, we still can¡¯t take down the county town.¡± In the meeting hall, an old man with a wrinkled face said to a middle-aged man dressed in white robes with pale eyes. This man in white robes was the elder known as White Eye. At the same time, he was an elder of the Five Poisons Sect in the eyes of the Jianghu people and the Five Holy Sect in the eyes of the Miao people. The first time the Shengmuiao came down the mountain, they took advantage of the unguarded Wugang County town. However, they hadn¡¯t occupied the county town for long when the relief army from the prefecture came and drove the Shengmuiao out. But in these days, the Five Poisons Sect had heard that due to an earthquake in Xichuan, a group of Qiang people in the region couldn¡¯t survive there and decided to rebel. Afterward, they attacked cities and towns everywhere, causing a huge uproar after occupying many prefectures and counties, making it difficult for the local authorities to control the situation. As of now, two prefectural cities in Xichuan have fallen and more than ten small county towns have been captured, with the local officials unable to control the situation. Therefore, the prefecture petitioned the court to send troops for reinforcement. However, at the moment, the court was dealing with invasions from Liang in the north, Jinghai Country in the south, coastal pirates, and frequent rebellions in various places. With this situation, there were not enough troops to spare for Xichuan. As a result, they looked around and noticed that Dongting Prefecture had a relatively stable situation and a capable force of county soldiers. Therefore, an imperial decree was issued, ordering 30,000 Dongting county soldiers to march west and assist Xichuan County in suppressing the Qiang rebellion. That¡¯s why Sun Siwen was appointed to his position this time. Although the prefecture knew that Wugang County had chaotic people, they could not dispatch any military protection. They could only provide three thousand silver tales for him to recruit his own troops and take up his new position. It¡¯s because once the 30,000 county soldiers left, there were no more firefighting teams available for emergency support throughout Dongting Prefecture. The Five Poisons Sect, which had been instigating the Miao people to rebel all this time, saw this situation and, with the heavy pressure gone, immediately detected an opportunity to rise up again. So on the one hand, they gathered the Shengmuiao in the mountains, while on the other hand, they dispatched messengers everywhere, preparing to incite the Shumuiao in various places to launch a massive rebellion together. This time, Elder White Eye came down the mountain with the intention of uniting the three Miao surnames within the county to attack the county town together. But now, just as he made contact with the local Miao people, he heard such sudden news. Elder White Eye frowned: ¡°How come there are so many soldiers suddenly? I remember that all the county soldiers in the jurisdiction were withdrawn, weren¡¯t they? Where did these people come from?¡± The old man who spoke before shook his head: ¡°I¡¯m not sure about the specifics. However, many people in the city did indeed see the five hundred soldiers. Our chieftain is now meeting with the chieftains of the other two surnames to discuss the future administration of the county with the new County Magistrate. A few days ago, he even sent someone back to inform us that the new soldiers didn¡¯t look like they could be easily provoked and appeared to be an elite force. He warned us that people in our clan should stay quiet these days, not cause any trouble, and avoid attracting the attention of the soldiers.¡± The old man from the White Miao clan informed Elder White Eye of everything he knew and then kindly reminded him, ¡°There are five hundred Yue State Soldiers, and they have the protection of city walls. To defeat them, we would need at least four to five thousand people. Though all three of our Miao clans can gather that many men, there are also those large Yue families and Jianghu factions within the city, and these forces can gather one to two thousand people as well. They are all Yue people and won¡¯t help us Miao people. If we besiege the city, we might arouse the resistance of the city¡¯s Yue people. This time, they are prepared. Like last time when we launched a surprise attack at the county town, capturing it easily won¡¯t be possible anymore..¡± Chapter 130 - Chapter 130: Chapter 109: How Dare He Chapter 130: Chapter 109: How Dare He Translator: 549690339 The last time the Shengmuiao people in the mountains easily captured the county town was primarily due to the surprise attack they launched. Before the soldiers in the city could react, they had already seized the city gate and poured into the city. This allowed the Miao people to kill the leading officials and soldiers in the city. By the time the local factions and clans wanted to make a move, it was already too late. Finally, the rebellious Shengmuiao offered them some benefits, so these factions and clans, joined the Miao people in pillaging the city and amassing wealth, becoming chaotic people. This time, the court brought soldiers and a new County Magistrate. The elder of the Bai family of the Miao people found it hard to believe whether those local factions and clans would still side with them to confront the court. After all, being forced into banditry and proactively attacking court officials are entirely different matters. On the same note, those clans and factions are ultimately Yue people, not of the same ethnicity as the Miao people. Who would be willing to betray their own ethnicity and side with the enemy, if given a choice? The elder with white eyes was aware of this, but he had come with responsibility and had promised the higher-ups in the Holy Sect that he would recapture Wugang County again. If he returned empty-handed this time, let alone the punishment, he would lose face. So, after considering all the factors, he gritted his teeth and asked, ¡°What if I personally don the armor and lead a raid on the city gate? Could it be successful?¡± This white-eyed elder was a second-tier martial artist in Jianghu. A second-tier martial artist on the battlefield could hold off dozens of ordinary soldiers. If not confronted by a corresponding expert, leading a team of soldiers on the battlefield, he could virtually sweep all opposing forces. Of course, on the battlefield, the sword could cut without choosing, and if he were surrounded, even a second-tier martial artist in heavy armor would be killed. Therefore, under normal circumstances, even if they consider themselves highly skilled, martial arts masters would not easily lead a charge. The decision made by this white-eyed elder showed his desperation and determination. The elder listened to this and pondered for a moment, responding ,¡±lf the white-eyed elder leads the charge, then naturally the success rate would increase. However, this requires the cooperation of elite warriors. While there are some warriors who have cultivated inner strength in our village, there are only about a dozen of them, and among them, there are only three with a third-tier achievement. These people are the brave men of our tribe, and we can¡¯t just risk deploying them recklessly. The situation in other villages is similar to ours. So, if you want to raid the city, the white-eyed elder would have to personally lead enough warriors. We can only assist in the attack once the city gate is open.¡± The elder had to stand his ground for the benefits of his village even if the opposing party was an elder from the Holy Sect, he had to be responsible for his village. ¡°Okay, when the time comes, I¡¯ll bring six third-tier warriors with me. You¡¯ll also send some warriors who have cultivated their inner strength to charge at the city with me.¡± The white-eyed elder¡¯s expression changed as he heard these terms. He bit his teeth, made the decision, and then stared at the elder, ¡°I am paying the brunt, you all have to pay a price, right? This is the order of the Holy Sect.¡± Upon hearing the words ¡°Holy Sect,¡± the elder, who initially wanted to bargain further, opened his mouth but didn¡¯t dare to continue to bargain. He simply nodded and said, ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll start gathering the brave ¡­¡± As he was about to say something, a noise suddenly came from outside the guest hall. This was followed by various shouts and screams of horror. The unexpected change caught everyone by surprise. ¡°What¡¯s happening outside?¡± An elder from the village stood up and was about to go outside to ask. Just then, the tightly closed door of the guest hall was kicked open, and a well-known warrior from the village rushed in, staggered to the elders, and said, ¡°Elders, the Yue soldiers are attacking.¡± At these words, everyone present was startled. The white-eyed elder jumped up to the warrior, grabbed his collar, and asked, ¡°What did you say? The Yue are attacking?¡± The warrior was startled by the sudden appearance of the figure, but when he reacted, he said with a hint of panic on his face, ¡°Yes. Just now, a batch of Yue people infiltrated our mountain village and suddenly killed those guarding the village gate, including Liang. Then they opened the village gate and let the Yue soldiers in. After entering the village, these Yue soldiers killed anyone they saw and set fires everywhere. Now more than half of the village has fallen, and they are fast approaching this side.¡± Hearing this, the elders all rose to their feet, their faces showing some panic. And the elder who had been speaking before now showed a face full of shock and anger, trembling as he said, ¡°How dare they, how dare these Yue people¡­¡± These Miao elders, who were just discussing plans to capture the Yue city and make a fortune, were all frightened and disoriented by the sudden onslaught from the Yue people. While they call themselves Miao elders, in reality, they are just leaders of a village of two to three thousand people. Each of them is only in charge of a few hundred people, equivalent to a small village head under the rule of the Yue court. Facing this disaster of extinction, they were momentarily at a loss as to how to deal with it as the village¡¯s head was not there. Fortunately, the white-eyed elder from the Five Poisons sect was worldly and had a relatively high status in Jianghu. Naturally, he wouldn¡¯t panic like these people. He looked at these panic-stricken elders, and a flash of disgust and disdain crossed his eyes as he thought about how he had just been discussing big issues with these men. But now, the most important thing was to repel the Yue people. These elders were still useful for capturing Wugang County, so he shouted, ¡°Calm down, everyone. The most important thing right now is to repel those Yue people. Elder Yu, you need to immediately gather the remaining ¡­¡± The white-eyed elder was about to make some arrangements, but before he could finish, he suddenly sensed a crisis. His experience in Jianghu allowed him to dodge to the side at the right moment. Then, in the next instant, dozens of dark shadows whooshed past where he had just been standing. ¡°Ahh!¡± With the screams, the white-eyed elder turned around to see the three elders from the village and the warrior who had brought the news, each pierced by several arrows, screaming in pain on the ground, before falling silent. Seeing this, he felt a jolt in his heart and quietly thanked his luck. But before he could breathe a sigh of relief, he was struck by a sense of danger again. He turned his head and saw, at the entrance of the hall, a few dozen Yue soldiers led by a general, holding bows and arrows. The chill-glinting arrows were all aimed directly at him. ¡°A martial arts expert?¡± Lu Yuan looked surprised as he saw the white-eyed elder who had just barely evaded the arrows, like a phantom. With his experience, he could tell that the white-robed man in front of him was not a weakling but had reached the second -tier level in the martial arts world. He hadn¡¯t expected an expert like this to be in a small Miao mountain village. With this thought flashing in his mind, he immediately gave the order. ¡°Shoot! ¡± No matter how powerful the martial arts expert is, against the strong bow and crossbow, he has to fall just the same.. Chapter 131 - Chapter 131: Chapter 110 The Holy Sect Will Not Let You Go Chapter 131: Chapter 110 The Holy Sect Will Not Let You Go Translator: 549690339 Since his arrival in this world, Lu Yuan knew what his greatest advantage was. It wasn¡¯t his formidable palm skills, nor his profound inner strength, but his transcendentally masterful archery. No matter how skillful the opponent¡¯s martial arts, before my flurry of arrows, all creatures are treated equally, they all become souls ready for departure. Whether it was a wild beast in the mountain or martial artists from the Jianghu outside the mountain, when faced with his strong bows and hard arrows, they all ended up as prey, awaiting slaughter. His strategy of hoisting spears at a distance has always worked until now. Now that he has become a County Captain, leading his troops, he naturally brought his excellent experience to the army. Luckily, these soldiers in the army were all hunters by background, each one proficient in archery, with some even possessing exceptional skills. Therefore, they were quite adept at this haphazard arrows strategy, without any discomfort. Two nights ago. Under the soldiers¡¯ hail of arrows, those aristocratic martial artists, even if they were third-rate in the Jianghu, all drank a cup of bitterness. At this moment. Before his eyes, that man in white, although he was a second-rate master, under dozens of arrows, was made to escape in a frantic and ragged manner, not daring to fight directly. A second-tier Jianghu master was still a mortal. He¡¯d bleed if cut by a knife and a sword could pierce a hole in him. If struck by an arrow, he¡¯d become a beehive. However, a second-tier master was still a master. Within the narrow hall, the elder with white eyes leapt left and right, flipped up and down, his figure as quick as a phantom. Though the arrows came thick and fast, he could evade them before they got close. Later on, when used to this rhythm, the soldiers would only just make a move, the bowstrings hadn¡¯t even been fired, and the elder had already made a pre-judgement, flashing early to a safe place. After several rounds of arrows, the archers¡¯ shooting speed noticeably slowed down. Drawing a bow was physically demanding, after repeated draws, their arms were sore and swollen. These archers were all ordinary people, firing six or seven rounds was already their limit. At this point, after several rounds had passed, their limit was reached, and they could barely hold on anymore. ¡°What a pity.¡± Seeing his gradually weakening subordinates, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but sigh in his heart. The meeting hall¡¯s space was a bit too small, limiting the display of more archers. Moreover, the complex environment inside provided evasion space for that man in white. Otherwise, if he could mobilize a hundred archers on an open plain, however formidable the man in white was, he would still turn into a hedgehog. While he was feeling regretful, another side was rejoicing. ¡®Opportunity!¡¯ The elder with white eyes who had been evading arrows all along inside the hall, noticing the archers¡¯ frequency and number of shots significantly reducing, immediately realized that they were reaching their limit. His eyes brightened. Then he glanced at Lu Yuan surrounded by numerous archers. ¡®This young captain must be the leader of these Yue state soldiers, capture him, maybe I can threaten them to retreat. Or possibly he can directly open the doors of Wugang County.¡¯ Thinking this, the elder with white eyes felt a fiery passion in his heart. The shortcut to completing his mission was within sight, and he couldn¡¯t control his thoughts any longer. He grabbed a wooden table and shielded himself with it, then leapt towards the group of exhausted archers. His target was directly pointing at Lu Yuan. Being a second-rate master, he naturally could take on a hundred ordinary people. Even more so considering these archers were already exhausted. The elder with white eyes had conviction that he could effortlessly deal with those archers once up close, then capture that Yue captain amidst the troops. That¡¯s the confidence of a second-tier master. ¡°Daring. ¡± Seeing the figure getting closer rapidly, Lu Yuan knew exactly what the man was thinking, and he immediately sneered. ¡°Treating me like a pushover. I want to see if you can handle me.¡± He scorned in his heart and swiftly strung his bow with an arrow, with a speed as fast as a phantom. Depending on his instincts and experience, ¡°whoosh whoosh whoosh¡± he fired a seven arrows in succession. Furthermore, to enhance the power of his arrows, Lu Yuan even channeled his internal strength and attached it to the bow and the arrows. How powerful would the arrows shot by a top-tier Jianghu archer with internal strength be? Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t previously tested this much, so he couldn¡¯t answer this. But as the arrows shot out like thunder, everything became clear. Like a white light shadow, in the blink of an eye, seven arrows penetrated the wooden table that the man in white was holding in front of him. The gigantic force blew the table into pieces. Could the elder behind the table ever expect that the pushover he saw would suddenly become a handful? The old man¡¯s experience played against him, meeting a won in sheep¡¯s clothing. He was instantly caught off guard. By the time he perceived the incoming danger and instinctively wanted to escape as he had before, it was already too late. How formidable was Lu Yuan when he shot with full force? His arrow speed amounted to reaching the target as soon as it¡¯s released, leaving no time for reaction. The elder with white eyes only had time to slightly turn his body, then the seven arrows targeting him arrived before his eyes and pierced his body. Then it was followed by a series of ¡°boom boom boom¡± explosions. The arrows enhanced with inner strength emitted a power and speed comparable to a large caliber bullet in Lu Yuan¡¯s previous life. The moment they entered the elder¡¯s body, the added inner strength on the arrowheads exploded instantly, leaving behind a massive bloody hole. All seven arrows hit, with none missing. Seven trails of blood blossomed on the elder¡¯s body. A powerful force pushed him backward. He rolled on the ground twice before crashing into a beam, producing a ¡®thud¡¯ sound, and then he finally stopped. Fresh blood flowed out profusely, the elder trembling. His chest, shoulder, abdomen, arm, even the inside of his thigh, all became bloody and mangled. Huge agony came from all over his body. The loss of blood rapidly weakened him. Even more desperate was the fact that in this state, he couldn¡¯t save himself anymore. Between the weakness and pain, a blurred figure appeared before him. Leaning against a pillar, the elder mustered the last bit of his strength to see that the young black-armored general had arrived before him. Seeing his own murderer, he used the last of his strength to shout: ¡°You obstructed our grand plan, the Holy Sect will not let you go. I¡¯ll wait for you down there.¡± With these words, his body stiffened, then plumped down. In front of the corpse, Lu Yuan watched the white-robed person say his last words and was stunned. ¡°Holy Sect? Grand Plan?¡± Recalling these two words, he took a serious look at the man in white and realized: ¡°He¡¯s from the Five Poisons Sect..¡± Chapter 132 - Chapter 132: Chapter 111: Jianghu Rules Chapter 132: Chapter 111: Jianghu Rules Translator: 549690339 In Dongting County, a place like this, the only sect that would call itself the Holy Sect was the Five Poisons Sect, a demonic sect that played with worms and bugs. Right, speaking of it. It could produce a second-rate expert in a small broken stronghold, which turned out to be from Jianghu sent by the Five Poisons Sect. However, thinking of the white-robed man¡¯s words just now, Lu Yuan could not help but frown. What big plan does the Five Poisons Sect have? And now that he had killed this white-robed man, he had disrupted the plan. Thinking about this, his heart tightened involuntarily. The Five Poison Sect is not a small force. As the only major Jianghu sect among the Miao people, the Five Poison Sect has extremely strong strength, not only having several first-rate experts, but also dozens of second-rate experts. In particular, in recent years, the Five Poison Sect has been increasingly active. They are constantly launching attacks in the Jianghu world, successively destroying and subjugating dozens of big and small forces within Dongting County. Only a few first-class sects formed alliances could barely resist the Five Poison Sect, but that was just a lingering existence, and not becoming a climate again. After subduing many second and third-rate Jianghu forces, the Five Poison Sect had the tendency to become the dominant figure in the martial arts world in Dongting County. It was said in Jianghu that the current Five Poison Sect, except for the absence of one Inborn Grandmaster, had already met the strength of the top sect in other aspects. Many people were watching it. They wanted to know whether the Five Poison Sect could produce an Inborn Grandmaster after a continuous expansion, and they would completely secure their position as a top-notch sect. ¡°It¡¯s a bit troublesome. Although I am now half a step from being a first-rate martial artist, and my strength is enough to be proud of Jianghu, the Five Poison Sect is not an ordinary Jianghu force, and it¡¯s not easy to deal with.¡± Thinking about the rumors about the Five Poison Sect, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel a headache. He was only half a step from being a first-rate martial artist. Belonging to the intermediate level where he could beat second-rate players and even compete with the first-rate players. Normally, with this kind of strength, one could already roam the Jianghu world freely and enjoy themselves. But the Five Poison Sect is a huge force that meets all aspects of top sects except for the top combat power. There are four known first-rate experts on their side. It can be said that none of these four people are Lu Yuan¡¯s opponents when they are pulled out. If two or three first-rate experts were to team up, then his life would be in danger. Thinking of the possibility, Lu Yuan could not help but hesitate, wanting to run away. Although the possibility of the Five Poison Sect sending two or three first-rate experts to deal with him at the same time is small, it is not worth gambling on any possibility at all. But this idea only lasted for a while, and he eventually gave up on it. ¡°It should not have reached this point yet.¡± Lu Yuan made a judgment as his thoughts were flying: ¡°Not to mention whether the Five Poison Sect knows that I killed the person, even if it knows that I killed the person, they don¡¯t know how I did it.¡± On the surface, the strength demonstrated by Lu Yuan was only second-rate. So those who came to investigate from the Five Poison Sect could only find this layer of information that he had deliberately released. As for killing the white-robed man this time. On the surface, he did not use any martial arts, but killed the opponent with archery, only the power of the bow and arrow was a bit stronger. ¡°So, if the people of the Five Poison Sect really want to come to me for trouble, they will only arrange for revenge candidates based on these two pieces of information.¡± Thinking of this, Lu Yuan showed a faint smile. A second-rate expert in Jianghu, no matter how good he is at archery, under normal logic, sending two or three experts of the same level to besiege him would be sufficient. Even if the Five Poison Sect hated him to death, they would only send a first-rate expert at most. In these two cases. If it¡¯s the former, two or three second-rate experts, even if they come together, it would be like sending food to Lu Yuan. If it¡¯s the latter, with his strength of half a step into the first-rate, even if he couldn¡¯t beat a first-rate martial artist, he could still manage to escape and save his life. ¡°Not to mention, I am still holding a force of five hundred soldiers in my hands, with the heavy protection of the soldiers, even if the Five Poison Sect wants to take revenge, it won¡¯t be that easy.¡± Inferring up to this point, Lu Yuan had already let go of his worries. According to the current information, even if the Five Poison Sect really sent people to revenge, he should be able to cope with the next round of attacks. So there is no need to run now. The real need to run is after the next round of attacks when he is completely exposed. ¡°And after all, whether the Five Poison Sect will come to take revenge or not is just a word from this white-robed man. I still have an official identity on me from the Imperial Court now. Although the deterrence of the Great Yue imperial court has declined a lot nowadays and rebellions are frequent in various places, they can¡¯t even draw troops to quell the rebellion here in Dongting County. But not being able to draw troops does not mean that the Great Yue imperial court can¡¯t draw Jianghu experts. In various local jurisdiction offices, the Great Yue imperial court still retains a lot of Jianghu first and second-rate, and even Inborn Grandmaster level of martial artists. Not to mention other places, in Dongting County, Lu Yuan knew that the magistrate there, who was an Inborn Grandmaster with two meridians already penetrated. And in the ten jurisdictions of Dongting County, the imperial court has five cities with first-rate experts stationed in them. Only in terms of their Jianghu strength on the surface, the imperial court would be more than enough to crush the Five Poison Sect. It is for this reason. In the past six months, even though the Five Poison Sect has caused many troubles for the imperial court, they have not dared to make a move openly. They can only instigate the Miao people to rebel secretly and weaken the imperial court¡¯s strength from the side. ¡°So under this kind of situation, the possibility of the Five Poison Sect taking revenge and taking action directly is not high. The greater possibility is to continue instigating the Miao people to rebel, and then take advantage of the chaotic situation when the rebels break through the city walls and take action against me. In this way, they won¡¯t leave a trace or pretext for the imperial court to take direct revenge.¡± Although the imperial court has the upper hand between Jianghu and the imperial court, Jianghu is not without the power to fight back. If we were to compare using a numerical value. Then, of all the martial artists divided into ten parts, the imperial court can account for three parts, and Jianghu can account for seven parts. However, the imperial court¡¯s side belong to one power and has the support of the government, so it can suppress those Jianghu martial artists who are scattered in power. But based on the huge base, even if the power of the Jianghu martial artists is scattered, the overall strength is still higher than that of the imperial court. So both sides are wary of each other and restrain each other, ultimately forming some tacit understanding. The imperial court doesn¡¯t care about Jianghu grudges, and the Jianghu grudges can¡¯t be brought to the official¡¯s doorstep. If either side violates this rule, they will provoke the other side¡¯s counterattack, and the world will attack them together. Of course. The so-called common attack of the world is not necessarily true either. Whether it is to be implemented and how to operate it still depends on the strength of both sides and the specific situation at that time. In summary, the situation is quite complicated. But there is one thing that Lu Yuan can be sure of. That is, before his official identity is stripped off, the Five Poison Sect is unlikely to make a direct move on him, and the Inborn Grandmaster and the five first-rate experts within the jurisdiction are his amulet.. Chapter 133 - Chapter 133: Chapter 112: Cleaning Up the Aftermath Chapter 133: Chapter 112: Cleaning Up the Aftermath Translator: 549690339 After carefully considering the situation and confirming that he was not in immediate danger, Lu Yuan let go of his worries and stopped dwelling on the matter. His gaze then shifted to the corpse on the ground, and a hint of coldness flashed in his eyes. Although he wasn¡¯t in any immediate danger, this guy had still brought trouble upon himself, planting a ticking time bomb that could explode at any moment. He snorted coldly. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t bother arguing with a corpse. He just drew out the Long Sword from his waist and began to fiddle with the white-robed man¡¯s collar. Since he knew that this guy was from the Five Poison Sect, he naturally didn¡¯t dare to touch the corpse like he used to do. Members of the Five Poison Sect liked to dabble with poisons and insects, and they were all experts in scheming against others. Even the martial art experts in the Jianghu could lose their lives if they were not careful with the sect¡¯s tricks. With a gentle flick of the Long Sword, Lu Yuan imbued it with his inner strength and quickly tore open the corpse¡¯s clothes in just a few strokes. At that moment, a sharp sound rang out, and a sense of danger surged upon him. Lu Yuan¡¯s reaction was quick. With a single step, his body instantly leaped several meters away. Only when he retreated did he notice a thumbnail-sized green spider in mid-air trying to entangle him. Looking at the spider¡¯s bright color and ferocious teeth, he didn¡¯t need to think twice to realize that this was definitely a deadly poison. If Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t been cautious and directly touched the corpse, he would have been ambushed by this little creature hidden in the collar. ¡°These guys who play with poisonous insects are all dirty-minded,¡± he thought. Lu Yuan felt fortunate, then with a swipe of his sword, a sword energy burst out, instantly smashing the little green spider into mush. After dealing with the poisonous creature, he cautiously approached the corpse again, becoming even more wary. He delicately continued opening the white-robed man¡¯s clothes. After confirming that there was nothing like a secret book or scroll on the body, he no longer continued his search. Although there might still be some good things hidden on this old, toxic body, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t want to bother with it at the risk of getting exposed to the poison. Glancing at the corpse on the ground, he grabbed a candle from the room, poured the oil on the body, and threw the candle. Suddenly, the raging fire burned. Since he had to conceal his true strength, he could not leave even the corpse behind. Otherwise, who knew if the Five Poison Sect might have some means to deduce his true strength from the wounds on the body? The world of martial arts was full of strange techniques; it was best to be cautious and not take any chances. While he was busy destroying the evidence, the fighting outside the village was gradually coming to an end as well. After the massacre, over seven hundred men in the village capable of holding a weapon had died. Among them, those who practiced martial arts and possessed inner strength were all eradicated without exception. Without these men, Bai¡¯s Miao Village would be crippled even with the remaining two to three thousand inhabitants. Although they harbored deep resentment and hatred, they could no longer stir up any trouble in the face of the authorities. Although this method was cruel, considering that those who died could potentially become part of a scheme to kill him under the instigation of the Five Poison Sect, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t care. His own life was paramount. The presence of that white-robed man in the village proved that these villagers were not innocent. If they chose to be someone else¡¯s tools, they had to be prepared for the risk of being destroyed. ¡°Gather the valuables from the village, then set off for the next one,¡± Lu Yuan instructed his subordinates as they gathered before heading out of the village. In the next two days, Lu Yuan led the county soldiers to raid and sweep the remaining two Miao villages. After clearing out the backbone forces and men from the villages, he took the soldiers back to the county town. However, while many people were killed this time, the loot was meager. The total was just over 20,000 silver taels, only one-tenth of that seized in the county town. No wonder the Miao people wanted to rise up in rebellion; living in such poverty, who wouldn¡¯t want to make a fortune? Upon returning to the town, he gave the army a bonus and then granted them a long vacation. Since being conscripted, the soldiers had been training non-stop and had marched hundreds of miles. Upon arriving in Wugang County, they were engaged in frequent battles. People were not made of iron. After so much fatigue, they needed some rest. Back at the county government office, Lu Yuan met with Sun Siwen to discuss the progress and gains of the recent battles. When they met, the County Magistrate was gathering his subordinates to discuss the restoration of the town and local construction projects. After several months of turmoil, Wugang County had suffered one disaster after another. First, they were plundered by the Sheng Miao people from the mountains, resulting in over a thousand deaths. Later, gangs in the city fought for territory, leading to another round of arson, murder, and plunder with another few hundred deaths. But then, Lu Yuan led the troops to clean up the local gangs, killing even more people. In the end, more than 2,000 people died in the city. For a small town with a population of just four to five thousand, more than half were now empty. What was worse, Lu Yuan had eliminated the large families and gangs in the city. Although they tyrannized the people in their daily lives, they were responsible for the city¡¯s various businesses and overall operation. With these people gone all of a sudden, the shops and markets in the city were left without people to run them. It was fine if other businesses could not be started for now, but rice and salt shops had to remain open at least! So, out of helplessness, Sun Siwen had to urgently order his subordinates to open these essential shops and then deal with other matters one by one. During the two days when Lu Yuan was busy suppressing bandits, his good friend was also restless, working tirelessly to the point of not even being able to get a good sleep. ¡°So, the Miao people outside the city are no longer a threat?¡± Sun Siwen finally revealed a hint of a smile upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s account, having maintained a serious expression for days. The last unstable factor in the county had been eliminated. Wugang County would now be able to maintain stability for an extended period. As long as they could maintain stability, they could slowly overcome the hardship, no matter how difficult life was at the moment. ¡°That¡¯s right. The Miao people have lost an entire generation of strong men. Without these adult men, they won¡¯t be able to cause any trouble for at least a decade or so,¡± Lu Yuan confirmed.. Chapter 134 - Chapter 134: Chapter 113: Getting on the Right Track Chapter 134: Chapter 113: Getting on the Right Track Translator: 549690339 ¡°Brother Lu, do you plan to stay at the barracks?¡± Sun Siwen was surprised by Lu Yuan¡¯s idea: ¡°The bandits in the county have been eliminated, and there are no major problems now. I was planning to disband some soldiers in a few months when the county is stable. Why do you bother training more troops?¡± There are currently 500 county soldiers in the county, and the money needed to pay their salaries alone amounts to 1,750 silver taels per month, totaling 21,000 silver taels per year. 21,000 silver taels may not seem much; it is only a tenth of what Lu Yuan seized from the city. However, the fact that 200,000 silver taels could be confiscated from the city was made possible by the decades of accumulation by several local power families and factions. What took others decades to accumulate, you were able to plunder and make a fortune. In a normal year, a remote mountain county like Wugang County would only have an annual financial income of silver taels. This amount of money is barely enough to cover the salaries of officials and maintain the daily operations of the government office, with only an extra 1,000-2,000 silver taels left over¡ªnowhere near enough to support 500 soldiers. Usually, a small local county would only support 100 county soldiers, and their salaries would not be as high as 5 silver taels per month; 2 silver taels per month would be considered acceptable. At present, the structure and financial expenditure of Wugang County is quite unbalanced and distorted. For this reason, after resolving the bandit issue, Sun Siwen considered disbanding the army. His objective was to restore a normal structure and balance expenditures. However, when he mentioned his idea to his friend, Lu Yuan immediately objected: ¡°Although the bandit leader in the county has been eliminated, there are still many remaining bandits who continue to harass the local area. Moreover, the world is turbulent, and disturbances occur frequently. There may be no bandits now in Wugang County, but what about outside Wugang County? Remember, the last time Wugang County was attacked, it was not done by the people in the county, but by the savages from the mountain.¡± ¡°During our campaign against the bandits, we captured a messenger from the Mountain Savages in a Miao People¡¯s mountain village. This person was here to make contact with the Miao people in the county and plan to recapture the county town. If we disband the army now and there are no soldiers to guard the town, who will defend it when the savages attack again? The Shengmiao in the depths of the mountains in Dongting County have always been deeply connected with the Five Poisons Sect, often even simply acting as the peripheral forces of the Five Poisons Sect. Therefore, Lu Yuan does not think it is a coincidence that the Five Poisons Sect¡¯s people appeared in the Savage mountain village. Considering the previous example of Wugang County being attacked, it is not hard to guess that this is yet another attempt by the Five Poisons Sect to weaken the government. Sun Siwen also learned of this news for the first time, and upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s speculation, he could not help but nod seriously: ¡°You¡¯re right, Brother Lu. The appearance of the savage messenger in the Savage mountain village is definitely plotting something, and they may have even targeted the county town again.¡± Thinking of the possibility that the savages who had previously attacked the county might return, he suggested with a heavy heart: ¡°In that case, we should not disband the army yet. Luckily, we have reaped considerable gains from eliminating the bandits this time. Even with the high cost of maintaining the army, the county¡¯s finances can hold for two or three years, so there is no need to worry for now.¡± At this point, Sun Siwen could not help but look at his friend. During the suppression of the bandits both in and outside the city, over 200,000 silver taels of movable property were seized by the government office. Of this money, over 10,000 silver taels were divided up and used to reward the officers and soldiers. Additionally, land worth over 20,000 silver taels was also prepared to be distributed to the soldiers as promised, to help them settle down. However, besides these expenditures, the lion¡¯s share of assets, amounting to as much as 130,000 silver taels in gold, silver, and jewelry, was taken by Sun Siwen¡¯s friend. What remained in the hands of the government office was a sum of around 70,000 silver taels¡¯ worth of less-liquid assets such as antique houses and shop deeds. So, in terms of wealth, the richest person in the county is still his friend. Fortunately, Sun Siwen was aware that he was able to take up his post smoothly thanks to Lu Yuan¡¯s help. The other party taking away the lion¡¯s share of assets was what had been agreed upon beforehand and was entirely justified. As a result, he was only slightly disgruntled, but soon pushed the thought out of his mind. ¡°Since Brother Sun has no objections, let¡¯s settle on this.¡± Seeing that his friend supported his idea, Lu Yuan was delighted and immediately said: ¡°From now on, I will be in charge of training the troops at the barracks, and you will be in charge of governing the city. I will oversee the military affairs, and you will oversee the civil. Thus, our responsibilities are divided.¡± He was happy for a good reason. Having offended the Five Poisons Sect and killed their people, Lu Yuan judged that they should not dare to retaliate for the time being. However, it¡¯s better to be safe than sorry. Just to be cautious, Lu Yuan decided to stay in the barracks with the soldiers firmly guarding him, ensuring his safety to the greatest extent possible. ¡°Let it be.¡± This was the same as what had been agreed upon before; Sun Siwen had no objections and agreed with a nod. Wugang County originally did not have a barracks, as it was just a small mountain county. The number of county soldiers and government officials in the city would never exceed 100. These 100 people would take turns on duty and typically go home after their shift, so there was no need for additional accommodations for them. However, since Lu Yuan brought 500 soldiers with him, the question of how to accommodate them needed to be addressed. Fortunately, after the bloody night, the families of the five clans in the county were all dead, and their mansions were confiscated and taken over by the state. Just like in Changning County, Wugang County had arranged residences for officials in the area where the wealthy families and clans lived. Therefore, Lu Yuan simply modified and joined a few of the confiscated mansions to turn them into barracks. Anyway, the mansions of the wealthy families were spacious enough to accommodate so many people, and the environment was well arranged, making it comfortable to live in. Lu Yuan felt that this place was much better than the houses he had lived in before. The soldiers who had always been struggling also felt the same way. So after more than ten days of renovations, the County Captain moved in with his county soldiers and happily settled into their luxurious new barracks. Time gradually passed. The closed shops in the city slowly reopened, and the people who had been hiding in their homes gradually dared to go out to the streets. A few merchants from other regions, having heard that everything was stable, came to do business. Sun Siwen took this opportunity to find some wealthy merchants and negotiate the sale of the large number of shop deeds held by the government office, in exchange for current silver. From the conversations Lu Yuan occasionally had with him, it seemed that these transactions were quite successful. Since they were selling at a reduced price, many wealthier merchant buyers were attracted, bringing in a large amount of operating capital for the government office. Everything was slowly getting back on track. After several months of turmoil, Wugang County finally welcomed a time of peace and stability.. Chapter 135 - Chapter 135: Chapter 114: The Plan of the Five Poisons Sect Chapter 135: Chapter 114: The Plan of the Five Poisons Sect Translator: 549690339 To outsiders, the Shengmiao natives are seen as a group of barbaric, cruel, and evil people who eat raw meat and drink blood. They live among the mountain ridges, dwell in caves, coexist with wild beasts, worship evil gods, raise poisonous insects, and even practice human sacrifice and cannibalism. Any abominable deeds in the world can seemingly be attributed to them. However, there is actually some misunderstanding in this. Because, in reality, the Shengmiao natives do not eat humans. There are plenty of wild animals, endless wild fruits and vegetables, and some farmland they have cultivated in the mountains ¨C all providing ample food. There is no need for them to eat humans. Aside from not eating humans, though, other descriptions of them are true. These Shengmiao natives, who live amid the mountains and are cut off from the outside world, are indeed a group of evil people with a wild beast-like existence beneath their human skin. However, not everyone can endure this beastly way of life. So some Miao people have decided to move out of the mountains and become the Shumuiao (settled natives) known to the outside world. These Shumuiao natives have accepted the king¡¯s rule, learned farming, settled in established locations, paid taxes, and are no different from the majority of Yue people. As such, although Shengmiao and Shumuiao share common origins, they have essentially become two separate groups, apart from their bloodline connection. Some even view each other as enemies. Upon meeting, they would often not hesitate to kill each other, showing no mercy. Fortunately, despite being divided into two groups, all Miao people still retain some common customs. For example, raising Gu insects. This ability, which originated from the mountains, was not forgotten by the Shumuiao natives. On the contrary, many Shumuiao have come to research Gu techniques even more due to being oppressed by outsiders, using it as a means of self-preservation. As a result, a massive organization known as the Five Poisons Cult has emerged, spanning across both Shengmiao and Shumuiao natives and encompassing the entire Dongting region, with Gu techniques as the connecting point and bloodlines as the foundation. The headquarters of the Five Poisons Cult is located amid vast mountain ridges, secluded and unknown to outsiders. However, there are always some lucky ones who have been there and returned alive. According to their descriptions, the headquarters is a place where flowers bloom abundantly ¨C a valley filled with numerous wooden houses where many native Miao people live, enjoying an idyllic life. These mountain-dwelling natives call it Wansheng Valley, considering it a sacred place. This is the perspective of those who are on good terms with the Five Poisons Cult. Another description is circulating in the Jianghu world. The headquarters of the Five Poisons Cult is considered the most dangerous and evil place in the world, filled with all kinds of poisonous insects, poisonous flowers, and even terrifying miasma. Just one wrong step could cost one¡¯s life in this place. Amid this forbidden zone of life, dwell a group of Gu practitioners who can control countless poisonous insects ¨C these people are considered human demons that breed Gu insects with living humans and nurture all kinds of terrifying and evil beings in the eyes of ordinary people. These individuals call the headquarters WanDu Valley, seeing it as a forbidden zone of life and something to keep distance from. Amid the chaos and confusion, the rumors about the Five Poisons Cult have been circulating in the Jianghu world time and time again, adding countless mysterious colors. In reality, both rumors are true. Because this place is both a valley full of blooming flowers and beautiful scenery, known as Wansheng Valley, as well as a land filled with poisonous insects and miasma known as Wandu Valley. There are merely two faces to the headquarters of the Five Poisons Cult. It is just that the people looking at it have different perspectives, and thus see different scenes. On this day. Within the peaceful Wandu Valley, the incumbent religious leader of the Five Poisons Cult, Lan Zhaoyun, was handling the affairs of the organization. As the leader of a religion with a strong presence throughout the Dongting region and a following of millions, Lan Zhaoyun¡¯s daily tasks were hardly any less than those of the powerful Yue officials of the borderlands. Especially these days, as their Holy Sect had launched a major operation, planning to use it to further weaken the power of the Dongting region¡¯s court and cause the local government¡¯s control over the area to decline, ultimately achieving the goal of the Holy Sect¡¯s revival. Yes, the revival of the Holy Sect is the ultimate goal of the Five Poisons Sect. Actually, thousands of years ago, when the Dongting territory was not yet called Dongting territory, it was known as the Miao region. But then the ancestors of the Yue people arrived. They launched one war after another, killing or driving the original Miao People who had lived here for generations into the mountains, seizing the land that originally belonged to them. Now, thousands of years have passed, and the hatred of their ancestors has gradually been forgotten by their descendants. Even many Miao people have forgotten their origins and think they have always lived in the mountains. Only those Yue people outside may occasionally see in historical records that their predecessors achieved a glorious Southern Expedition and conquered this territory. But those deep-seated resentments, which could be forgotten by the people below, would not be forgotten by the higher echelons of the Five Poisons Sect like Lan Zhaoyun. Because the establishment of the Five Poisons Sect is closely related to that battle to defend the Miao borderland. However, they eventually lost that war. But the Five Poisons Sect did not perish. They went into the deep mountains, turned underground, and prepared for revenge at all times. And now. The decline of the Yue People¡¯s Court has given the Five Poisons Sect an opportunity. An opportunity to drive away Yue people and take back their homeland. ¡°Once this operation is over, we should be able to seize many cities from the Yue people. If we seize the opportunity well, we might even take down a Fu City. In doing so, we will be able to deal a heavy blow to the Yue officials in the Dongting territory, making the local area more and more turbulent.¡± After finishing a task, Lan Zhaoyun stretched his waist and couldn¡¯t help but think excitedly. These days, every time he was exhausted from handling tasks, he would think like this, and then instantly be filled with energy. The situation was no exception. However, just as Lan Zhaoyun was about to continue processing the next task, a figure hurriedly entered from outside and saluted him. ¡°Sect Master.¡± Lan Zhaoyun raised his head and saw that it was the Right Protector of the sect and couldn¡¯t help but ask, ¡°Right Protector, what brings you here?¡± The Right Protector¡¯s face was serious and said, ¡°I just received news that a new County Magistrate has arrived in Wugang County of Shaoyang Prefecture. He brought five hundred troops with him. As soon as he arrived, he used lightning measures and immediately wiped out the local gangs of bandits.¡± Later, he sent troops to attack and slaughter the three Miao families outside the city. Elder White Eye was sent to Wugang County to prepare for the uprising of the three Miao families, but now there is no movement. I suspect he might have been killed by those troops.¡± ¡°Elder White Eye is dead?¡± Upon hearing this news, Lan Zhaoyun¡¯s good mood vanished instantly. The Right Protector nodded solemnly and said, ¡°Sect Master, shall we send someone to investigate and confirm the situation? If it really was the troops who did it, do we need to retaliate?¡± Although the Five Poisons Sect had dozens of second-rate martial artists, when distributed across the entire Dongting territory, it wasn¡¯t a lot. Now, losing one suddenly and at this critical moment was a bit painful for them. ¡°Retaliation¡­ Lan Zhaoyun thought for a moment and asked, ¡°Are you sure it was the troops?¡± The Right Protector affirmed, ¡°Eight or nine out of ten. I heard from a scout who came back that the new County Captain of Wugang County is a second-rate martial artist. White Eye probably fell to him.¡± ¡°County Captain, second-rate martial artist¡­¡± After pondering for a moment, Lan Zhaoyun finally shook his head and said, ¡°Forget it, this time White Eye just bumped into the troops, he can only be considered unlucky. The local governor of Dongting territory is still there, and if our Holy Sect openly acts against the Yue government officials, I¡¯m afraid it will attract his attention. Although the Holy Maiden has now reached the Inborn realm after ingesting the Five Sacred Gu, she is still in retreat and consolidating her realm. At this moment, everything should revolve around the Holy Maiden, and we shouldn¡¯t create any more issues. Let¡¯s just end this matter here. We will take note of White Eye¡¯s vengeance, and deal with it when we battle the Yue people after the Holy Maiden emerges from seclusion.¡± After careful consideration, the Sect Master of the Five Poisons Sect decided to be cautious for the time being. ¡®Yes.¡± The Right Protector obeyed and left.. Chapter 136 - Chapter 136: Chapter 115: Supporting Sword Technique Chapter 136: Chapter 115: Supporting Sword Technique Translator: 549690339 After turning his home into a barracks, Lu Yuan stayed in the camp and became a homebody. Life returned to what it had been before, consisting of eating, sleeping, practicing martial arts, reading scriptures, and studying medical books. The earlier practice schedule for Palm skills was gone. After his previous five years of practice, the original 81 palm techniques of Cloud Palm had already been completed. Through this, Lu Yuan successfully mastered a second-rate martial art. However, at this point, he had reached the limit in terms of practicing. Before finding a new technique, there would be no breakthrough in combat skills. Finding new martial arts techniques was not easy. During the cleansing of Wugang County this time, Lu Yuan obtained several martial arts secret books, but they were all third-rate, or even lower-ranked techniques. For him, these were meaningless. It only served to increase his knowledge and enrich his collection of books on martial arts. Moreover, even if it were a second-rate technique, its significance to Lu Yuan was minimal. A complete martial art requires both the internal cultivation method and combat skills. Only by combining the two can a complete technique be formed. Without the internal cultivation method or combat skills alone, it would not be possible to bring out the full potential of a martial art. Just like Lu Yuan now. He had already learned a first-class mental technique, but because he lacked the corresponding combat skills, he could only use Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra¡¯s inner strength to practice the Cloud Palm. Although both techniques were of the Daoist school, they ultimately belonged to separate martial arts, and there was a considerable difference in their concepts, techniques, and strength coordination. Therefore, even though Lu Yuan could use his strong inner strength as a first-class martial artist to make the Cloud Palm technique more potent than ordinary second-class martial arts, it was still far from a genuine first-class martial art. The simplest category. A complete first-class technique could bring out a power of 10, while Lu Yuan¡¯s configuration of combining a first-class internal strength with second-class combat skills could only bring out a power of 6 or 7 at most. Although the gap was not too significant, it could still affect the outcome of a showdown between masters. If six and seven could not beat ten, then they simply could not beat it. This was the reason why Lu Yuan had always mocked himself as being only half a step into the first-class realm. Compared to those who had a complete martial art, his first-class technique was truly like a lame man with only one leg ¨C taking only half a step! ¡°So for now, I either need to find and transition to a first-class martial art or slowly research and create a set of techniques that match the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra.¡± After much consideration, Lu Yuan came up with these two conclusions. However, he couldn¡¯t help but smile bitterly. How could a first-class technique be so easily found? In the Jianghu, people with first-class techniques were prestigious sects, dominating their respective territories. Not to mention the fact that first-class masters were incredibly powerful, capable of defeating a thousand opponents on their own. Even the smallest first-class force had thousands of disciples, and their power was immense. With the little strength Lu Yuan possessed, how could he possibly snatch a technique from them? ¡°But¡­ there might still be a chance.¡± Thinking about stealing a technique, Lu Yuan thought of a target and couldn¡¯t help but ponder, ¡°Moreover, this technique should be very suitable for me. After all, it comes from the same school as Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra, which is a part of the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s legacy.¡± That¡¯s right, he was talking about the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s Tiejian Sword Technique. Ever since he obtained the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra, Lu Yuan had been paying close attention to the news of the Iron Sword Sect. He did this both to guard against the Iron Sword Sect seeking revenge and to take advantage of the situation to obtain the technique that matched the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra. Having a first-class mental technique, how could any normal person not want to collect the corresponding first-class combat skills? Thus, Lu Yuan had his eyes on the Iron Sword Sect early on. Instead of finding any signs of the Iron Sword Sect seeking revenge on him, the Sect itself experienced major internal turmoil. It turned out that ever since Sect Leader MO Baichuan came to power, there had been tension between him and some of the other sect members. MO Baichuan was a strong-willed person with great ambitions. He wanted to reform the gradually declining Iron Sword Sect and revitalize it. However, having been passed down for hundreds of years, the Iron Sword Sect had various factions and branches, each with its own interests. MO Baichuan¡¯s attempt at reforming the sect threatened these factions¡¯ interests, which naturally caused many people to resent him. Initially, with MO Baichuan being the only first-class master in the Sect, the various factions had to endure their dissatisfaction. However, due to a duel with the Eagle King, MO Baichuan returned with severe injuries, and after struggling for two years, he eventually died. Under such circumstances, the factions naturally celebrated. The saying goes, ¡°The teacher¡¯s debt is repaid by the student, and fortune turns. ¡± During MO Baichuan¡¯s time, his faction had been arrogant and offended many people. Now that their strongest supporter was gone, the miscellaneous factions naturally wanted to take revenge, settling both old scores and new grudges. Members of MO Baichuan¡¯s faction were not fools either. Sensing the situation, they began to prepare for a counterattack. This led to the situation where many people from various forces of Jianghu flocked to Luling Mansion. This was because MO Baichuan¡¯s faction and others started calling upon friends and allies to help them gain victory in this struggle. The outcome was clear. MO Baichuan¡¯s weakened faction was directly purged by other factions. MO Baichuan¡¯s disciples were either killed or forced to flee, and the Iron Sword Sect was taken over by others. It was said that in this internal conflict, over a hundred members of MO Baichuan¡¯s faction died, as well as nearly a hundred members from other factions. Among them, five second-class masters were killed. These were the core members of the Iron Sword Sect. Their deaths directly led to a significant drop in the Sect¡¯s strength, which almost fell from its first-class status. But that wasn¡¯t all. During this internal conflict, MO Baichuan¡¯s direct disciple took the Sect¡¯s highest mental technique out of the Sect, causing the Iron Sword Sect to lose its only first-class mental technique. Now, the Iron Sword Sect only had one first-class technique remaining, the Tiejian Sword Technique. However, without the matching mental technique, the full potential of the sword technique could not be unleashed. Although the Iron Sword Sect could still achieve impressive results using other second-class mental techniques, it was just like Lu Yuan- only being half a step into the first-class realm, unable to compare with a genuine first-class master.. Chapter 137 - Chapter 137: Chapter 116: Future Planning Chapter 137: Chapter 116: Future Planning Translator: 549690339 First of all, let¡¯s not talk about the perfect match between the Tiejian Sword Technique and the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra. Without the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra, the strongest strength of Iron Sword Sect would at most only be half a step away from the top tier, similar to Lu Yuan. There won¡¯t be a significant gap in strength between the two sides. Furthermore, the Iron Sword Sect is in a vulnerable state after internal conflicts, with the death of several second-rate martial artists and hundreds of disciples, greatly damaging their vitality. Looking at the entire Jianghu, Lu Yuan could not think of any other top-tier sect weaker than the Iron Sword Sect. Who else would he squeeze if not such a soft persimmon? ¡°However, even if it¡¯s a soft persimmon, it¡¯s still a bit difficult for me to squeeze it now.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s heart was moved, but he suppressed his restlessness. Even though the Iron Sword Sect has become a soft persimmon, they still have a half-step top-tier expert. And no matter how much the sect declines, there would still be several, or even more than ten second-rate experts that they can rely on. Moreover, there are still hundreds of disciples. With Lu Yuan¡¯s current strength, it¡¯s hard to say who would be the one getting squeezed if he goes to challenge them. He wants to find surprises, not to give surprises to others. ¡°So, I can¡¯t make a move yet. I need to stabilize first. Wait until my strength becomes stronger and finish the entire Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra before attempting to seize the Tiejian Sword Technique.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s determination was strong. As a cultivator of longevity, what he did not lack was time and patience. At the same time, he also realized some of his shortcomings. ¡°As a top-tier martial artist, even if only half a step away, I should try to establish my own force now.¡± Lu Yuan understood this in his heart. If he had a powerful force under his command, he could directly attack the Iron Sword Sect and forcefully snatch their sword technique, instead of being careful about getting besieged when he visits them. Apart from this, having a large force could help Lu Yuan earn money, gather cultivation resources, and handle trivial yet time-consuming tasks on his behalf. ¡°Perhaps I can start recruiting subordinates now. The 500 soldiers under my command would be good candidates. I can try to select suitable ones from them and teach them martial arts. As for daily management, I don¡¯t have to worry about it. I can leave it all to Xiaoqing, it won¡¯t take up much of my time.¡± Lu Yuan thought about it carefully and decided that the plan was quite good, so he firmly decided to start implementing it in the next few days. Of course. Although he mentioned teaching martial arts, he would naturally not teach the top-secret Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra. Even the second-rate Cloud Palm would not be casually taught. It would only be given as a reward, divided into three parts according to the first to third layer of the technique and offered to meritorious subordinates. As for the third-rate techniques he had recently collected, they could be directly bestowed. In a short while, Lu Yuan had figured out a plan for encouraging and training his subordinates. Just like stealing the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s techniques, training subordinates also requires a lot of time and patience. Thus, these plans won¡¯t be of much help in increasing Lu Yuan¡¯s strength for now. ¡°So, stealing techniques is not an option¡­ should I create my own set of moves instead?¡± After ruling out the first option, Lu Yuan fell into deep thought as he looked at the second option. Creating martial arts techniques is not that simple. In Jianghu, all martial arts techniques have their own lineage and origin. Every technique, even if it¡¯s just of the third-class, has gone through the arduous efforts of its creators and the continuous trial and error of its inheritors. Predecessors have used themselves as test subjects for decades or even centuries, with countless people dying or suffering severe injuries, before a complete and refined third-class technique can be created. And this is just for third-class techniques. If it¡¯s the more profound second-class techniques, the exploration of the human meridians becomes more complicated, requiring further trial and error, and thus, more people to die. Moreover, when it comes to second-class techniques, martial arts begin to delve into the mysterious realm of the spirit, focusing on the cultivation of one¡¯s spiritual state. Some people with insufficient spiritual realm would have difficulty understanding the artistic conception of techniques and cultivating them to advanced levels. If they force themselves to cultivate, they may be affected by the techniques, either causing drastic changes in their personality or turning them into madmen. It is precisely because of these risks that Lu Yuan decided to read Taoist classics when he first started learning martial arts, aiming to improve his own spiritual realm. It takes a lot of effort to practice an already complete second-class martial art. Thus, one can only imagine the hardships and dangers involved in the creation of a second -class martial art by the predecessors. Countless deaths and insane people would be inevitable. Without these sacrifices, there would be no perfected and controllable martial arts today. These repeated explorations, trial and error, and starting anew would inevitably consume time, usually measured in centuries. Creating second-class and third-class martial arts is extremely difficult, let alone even higher-class techniques and Inborn martial arts, which are even more dangerous and difficult to cultivate. One could say that any sect with a first-class martial arts inheritance has a history of hundreds of years. Inborn martial arts can only be acquired by sects that have existed for a thousand years. ¡°So, creating martial arts techniques is not impossible for me. But the time it would take would probably be longer than simply stealing a first-class technique by several times.¡± Lu Yuan recalled the various challenges in creating martial arts and finally shook his head, giving up the idea. He would consider creating martial arts, but not at the moment. Right now, his priority was to quickly enhance his strength and achieve the title of Unrivaled in the World. After that, when he had exhausted all possibilities under the existing conditions, he would consider integrating all his knowledge to create an even more powerful and suitable Divine Skill. The path of creating martial arts techniques is temporarily unavailable. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t dwell on it for too long and quickly moved on. However, for him, even without a matching set of first-class techniques, the current Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra he was cultivating would be enough to last him for a while. He has now reached the seventh layer of this mental technique, and there are still two more layers and three meridians to be cultivated. It would take at least four or five years for him to cultivate these bizarre meridians. ¡°According to the current situation in Da Yue, by the time I finish cultivating these meridians, it might be the Declining Years of the Dynasty.¡± Lu Yuan had a pessimistic outlook for Da Yue¡¯s future, so he anticipated, ¡°When chaos arises in the world, various opportunities will emerge. Old powers will be reshuffled, and new forces will rise. Perhaps by then, a first-class sect would decline, or even collapse entirely, leaving their martial arts techniques to be scattered and obtained by others.¡± At that time, perhaps he wouldn¡¯t need to put in much effort, and the techniques would come to him on their own accord.¡± The odds were quite high. Take the recent example of the Iron Sword Sect. Didn¡¯t they decline in strength due to internal strife, causing their supreme heart techniques to be leaked and eventually benefiting Lu Yuan? With such a personal experience, it¡¯s no wonder he started to have high hopes.. Chapter 138 - Chapter 138: Chapter 117: Zhou Qing Resigns Chapter 138: Chapter 117: Zhou Qing Resigns Translator: 549690339 Having determined his future plans, Lu Yuan began to implement them. He was already practicing Inner Strength, and all he needed to do was follow the process step by step. It was time to start implementing the plan to cultivate talents. Lu Yuan found his disciple, Zhou Qing, and explained his plan to him, intending to entrust this task to him. However, Zhou Qing, who always obediently followed his master¡¯s instructions, chose to refuse this time. ¡°Master, I have long wanted to ask for your permission to leave,¡± said Zhou Qing in the study, his face full of shame. ¡°Over the years, I have diligently practiced, but I have only reached the second level of Liuyun Palm Heart Method, and I am still working hard to break through the third meridian.¡± My talent is really terrible. At my current progress, it takes me four years to break through a single meridian. It will take me at least another fourteen years to complete the Liuyun Palm technique. Master, you should know that my martial arts practice is not solely for the purpose of strengthening my body and health, but also to seek justice against the Iron Sword Sect. But at this rate, even after forty years, I may not be able to reach the first-class level. Not to mention taking revenge on the Iron Sword Sect.¡± As Zhou Qing said this, he thought of his murdered father and wife, as well as the unborn child who had died, and his eyes reddened involuntarily. He was now twenty-two years old, and after forty years, he would be sixty. At that age, even if he reached the first-class level, could he still fight? Seeing his disciple¡¯s pained expression, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but frown, ¡°Do you want to seek revenge against the Iron Sword Sect?¡± Realizing that his tone was not quite right, he softened his words: ¡°Xiaoqing, it¡¯s not that your master wants to stop you. But you should be aware that without first-class strength, if you seek revenge against the Iron Sword Sect now, you are only going to your death. Master promised your father that I would take good care of you. Are your actions in line with your father¡¯s expectations and in recognition of my nurturing? If you really want revenge, you can wait a little longer. Master¡¯s martial arts skills are improving rapidly, and I should be able to break through to the first-class level within twenty years. By then, you will only be forty years old and should be able to break through to the second-class level. Your master will accompany you on your quest for revenge then.¡± Lu Yuan said sincerely. He had already set his sights on the Tiejian Sword Technique of the Iron Sword Sect, and he himself had practiced the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s supreme Mental Technique. Naturally, there was an irreconcilable hatred and conflict between them. Therefore, on the issue of dealing with the Iron Sword Sect, Lu Yuan¡¯s interests were aligned with those of his disciple. ¡°Thank you, Master.¡± Zhou Qing was deeply moved by his master¡¯s consolation and promise, and couldn¡¯t help but shed tears. However, he still shook his head and said, ¡°This is my own affair, and it is up to me to seek revenge. Master, you saved my life and taught me martial arts, which is a great kindness that I can never repay in this lifetime. At this moment, how can I involve my master in my personal vendetta and let him take risks for me? If I do that, I would never have peace of mind. Even in the afterlife, my father would scold me.¡± This filial disciple wiped away his tears, then looked at his master and implored, ¡°I want to deal with this matter myself and not bother Master. Moreover, Master can rest assured that although I want vengeance, I will not blindly seek it and throw my life away at the Iron Sword Sect. I¡¯ve thought it through. Relying on diligence and hard work alone, there¡¯s no hope for me to avenge my family in this lifetime. To realize my long-cherished wish, I must find a way to rapidly increase my strength. Previously, Master gave me the Blood Jade Divine Medicine, just one of which enabled me to break through a meridian. If I want to advance rapidly in my Cultivation, I can only count on such divine items. Therefore, I would like to ask for Master¡¯s permission to venture out into Jianghu and seek such divine items. Though I may be disobedient and arrogant, I hope Master will grant his permission.¡± Zhou Qing knelt down and kowtowed to Lu Yuan, begging for his consent. Looking at his disciple, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but fall silent. He could understand his disciple¡¯s feelings, but precisely because he understood, he found it difficult to dissuade him at this moment. Should he persuade him to abandon the idea of revenge? Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t utter such words, nor did he want to. After much contemplation, he sighed helplessly, ¡°Do you know that divine blood variants like the Blood Jade Centipede are extremely rare in the world? Even your master only got this item by a fluke chance. Without luck and destiny, even if you search for them, most likely you will find nothing and return empty-handed.¡± In fact, over the years, Lu Yuan had been investigating the origin of the Blood Jade Centipede. After all, who in the world wouldn¡¯t want such divine items that could increase one¡¯s skills? But after careful investigation, he was almost certain that this divine blood variant was closely related to the Poison Sect. Because the characteristics of the Blood Jade Centipede were very similar to the descriptions of the centipede among the so-called Five Sacred Insects of the Poison Sect in the Jianghu lore. However, for precisely this reason, Once he knew this, Lu Yuan abandoned the idea of going to the mountain to try his luck and see if he could find a second divine blood variant. The Poison Sect was not to be trifled with. Just by killing one of their ¡°Five Sacred Insects,¡± he had already offended them to death. At present, he should not reveal his identity, and should be cautious in hiding himself. He would only court death by going out to confront them openlY> Furthermore, by extension, If the Blood Jade Centipede was raised by the Poison Sect, then it could be deduced that other divine blood variants in the world might also be tamed by powerful factions, right? Seeking divine blood variants meant they would inevitably clash with other powerful forces, which was extremely dangerous. Lu Yuan did not want his beloved disciple to wander into Jianghu and end up provoking some powerful sects, only to be slapped to death by them. That would be too tragic indeed. Yet, Zhou Qing seemed determined. Hearing his master¡¯s advice, he shook his head firmly and said, ¡°Disciple knows that chances are slim on this journey. But if I don¡¯t go, there will be no hope at all. ¡± He continued, kowtowing again: ¡°Master, I feel immense guilt for not being able to repay your kindness in person. However, I cannot forget my family¡¯s blood feud. If I am fortunate enough to gain a fortuitous encounter, master a divine skill, and avenge my slain family, Then I will return to my master¡¯s side, beg for forgiveness, and devote myself to serving you in your old age.¡± As he finished, his head fell to the ground, and he did not rise again. Gazing at this scene, Lu Yuan knew that he could no longer dissuade his disciple. He sighed in his heart and helped Zhou Qing up before handing him the copied book: ¡°Xiaoqing, when a young bird grows up, it longs to soar through the sky on its own. Your master will not stop you from venturing into Jianghu to avenge your family.¡± Putting the book into Zhou Qing¡¯s hand, he encouraged, ¡°This is a copy of the ¡®Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra¡¯ that I prepared for you earlier, along with some of my cultivation insights. Since you¡¯re leaving, take this with you. I don¡¯t ask you to be completely safe while surviving in the dangerous world of Jianghu, where dangers are everywhere. However, I do ask you to promise me this: when faced with a difficult situation, think carefully, do not act rashly, and always prioritize your own life..¡± Chapter 139 - Chapter 139: Chapter 118 Longevity is Lonely Chapter 139: Chapter 118 Longevity is Lonely Translator: 549690339 ¡°Master¡­¡± Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s emotional words, Zhou Qing couldn¡¯t help but cry again. Seeing him like this, Lu Yuan hesitated for a moment and then said, ¡°If it really doesn¡¯t work out, and you run into troubles you can¡¯t handle, you can come back to me, and I¡¯ll help you out. I can¡¯t make big promises, but I should be able to manage a fight with ordinary martial artists. Well, at least a fifty-fifty chance.¡± For his only disciple, Lu Yuan was somewhat desperate, not hesitating to say such words that invited trouble. Of course. The so-called help would naturally be within his own abilities. If he couldn¡¯t handle the trouble either, Then there would certainly be no choice but to flee with his disciple. However, considering his disciple¡¯s temperament, if he really encountered a massive problem, he would definitely not come to drag his master down. So if he really came to seek help from his elders, then it must be a problem that the elders could handle. On this point, Lu Yuan was quite confident. ¡°Yes, disciple understands.¡± Zhou Qing wiped away his tears, solemnly put away the secret book, gratefully looked at his master, his heart full of warmth. ¡°Alright, go.¡± Lu Yuan waved his hand, telling his apprentice to leave: ¡°Master needs time to be alone.¡± Perhaps when he first took in Zhou Qing, it was because of Doctor Zhou¡¯s request. But after living together for so many years, Xiaoqing had always treated him as a father, so how could there be no feelings? His disciple, who he had taught for six years, was leaving, which made him, as the master, feel very upset, as if his own disciple no longer belonged to him. ¡°Master, take care, your disciple takes his leave.¡± Zhou Qing also felt very sad, but with determination in his heart, even though it was difficult to let go, he still turned and left. Lu Yuan turned around and silently stared at the character ¡°Tao¡± he had written on the wall of the study. That day, Zhou Qing left. Before leaving, in addition to bidding farewell to Lu Yuan, he also said a word in Slip Siwpn and then left As for this, Sun Siwen specially took a day off from his busy official duties to accompany his friend. As a fellow disciple-taker, Sun Siwen deeply understood his friend¡¯s feelings. Because not long ago, when he left Changning and separated from Gu Songyun, he had a similar feeling. A disciple would always grow up and part ways with their master. Just like how parents raise their children painstakingly, in the end, they always have to let them go to start their own families and businesses. ¡°Brother Sun need not worry about me.¡± By the pond in the garden, Lu Yuan watched the fish swimming in the water, turned his head to his friend and said, ¡°It¡¯s better to forget each other in Jianghu than to live with each other in poverty. I can¡¯t provide Qing¡¯er with better conditions here, nor can I help him reach greater heights. In such a case, it¡¯s better to let go and let him find his own future. And from another perspective, isn¡¯t this also letting me let go?¡± Lu Yuan looked at his friend, watching his appearance already in middle age, his eyes filled with confusion and struggle, finally returning to calm. At this moment, As an immortal being, he deeply realized one thing. That was the fact that there was an insurmountable gap between himself, who would live forever, and these relatives and friends. Lu Yuan could wait for decades, even longer, for the secret book of the Iron Sword Sect. But his disciple Zhou Qing was just an ordinary person who couldn¡¯t wait that long. That¡¯s why this time he proposed to part ways, wanting to find a faster and more effective way to seek revenge. Even his current friend, whom he had known for nearly a decade, from when he was just a poor scholar to now, Sun Siwen was beginning to age. When they first met, he was in his twenties, and now that ten years have passed, he has entered the age of thirty. With the current lifespan of people, his friend has at most only thirty or forty years left to live. ¡°But thirty or forty years is just a blink of an eye for me.¡± Lu Yuan sighed in his heart, feeling increasingly melancholy and lonely. For many people, eternal life is indeed a good thing. But in some ways, how could it not be a curse? Watching one¡¯s close ones die or leave one by one, leaving oneself alone in the world, how painful must that be? Just thinking about the scene of Sun Siwen and Zhou Qing leaving one after another in a few decades makes Lu Yuan feel heavy. ¡°Brother Lu? Brother Lu?¡± Sun Siwen touched his face and then waved in front of his friend who had been staring at him, asking curiously when he saw the other regain consciousness, ¡°Did you keep staring at me because there¡¯s something on my face?¡± ¡°Nothing.¡± Lu Yuan shook his head and then looked at his friend, smiling, ¡°I just suddenly realized that Brother Sun is not young anymore. At the age of thirty, you should find a wife, get married, and establish a career.¡± Before, because he had remained unaging and unchanged in appearance, he didn¡¯t have much feeling for the passage of time. Besides, in the society before his time- traveling, it was perfectly normal for many men in their thirties not to be married, So he didn¡¯t think there was anything wrong with Sun Siwen not getting married. But now, looking back, he realized how absurd this was. Suddenly talking about his own marriage, Sun Siwen was caught off guard, but he soon smiled bitterly, ¡®Why are you suddenly talking about this?¡± With a serious face, Lu Yuan said, ¡°You¡¯re not young anymore, you really should find someone to marry. Otherwise, do you want the Sun family¡¯s incense to be cut off in your hands?¡± In Da Yue, a man in his thirties, like Doctor Zhou, could already be a grandfather. And this Sun Siwen, he¡¯s still single, without even a wife. This, to the contemporary social atmosphere that emphasizes passing on lineage and continuous incense, is simply absurd. Even more serious, one could say it¡¯s unfilial. Sun Siwen had obviously considered this issue, so he seriously said, ¡°I¡¯ve thought about getting married, of course. But, there are no suitable families for one thing, and I also want to achieve something in my career first, which is why I haven¡¯t gotten married yet. I plan to follow in my grandfather¡¯s footsteps, first become a county magistrate, establish a foothold in the officialdom, then find a suitable family, get married, establish a career, and pass on the incense.¡± As for the late marriage, Sun family has a tradition. From their great-grandfather¡¯s generation, they began with traveling in search of immortality for more than a decade, and only got married and had children when they were nearly forty. Grandfather followed suit, passing the jinshi (imperial examination title) at the age of twenty, then managing officialdom, and only getting married at the age of thirty after he had firmly secured his position. The father followed the same path, and they all waited until they were in their thirties before marrying and having children. So, to Sun Siwen¡¯s generation, it was natural for them to follow the example and not be in a hurry to get married like ordinary families. After finishing speaking about himself, Sun Siwen also looked at his friend and asked back, ¡°What about Brother Lu? You¡¯re also in your late twenties, right? People your age usually have children already attending County Academy. When do you plan to get married?¡± Seeing his friend¡¯s teasing, Lu Yuan shook his head and said calmly, ¡°I¡¯m different from you all. I don¡¯t plan to get married in this life, nor do I want to.¡± Yes. What about him, who is an immortal being and has to watch his lover grow old and die with his own eyes? That would be too sad and heartbreaking. Not only did Lu Yuan not plan to get married, but even friends and those who were too close to him, he didn¡¯t plan to have many more in the future. For this lifetime, having close friends like Doctor Zhou, Sun Siwen, and Zhou Qing is enough. No more is needed. Otherwise, he¡¯s afraid his heart wouldn¡¯t be able to handle it. Immortality is lonely.. Chapter 140 - Chapter 140: Chapter 119: Changing the Mindset Chapter 140: Chapter 119: Changing the Mindset Translator: 549690339 After sending Zhou Qing away, Lu Yuan gradually adjusted his mood after experiencing a few days of discomfort. Humans are creatures of habit. They can quickly adapt to the presence of a new person and just as quickly adapt to the absence of someone. Of course, this is just a habit of the body and mind. Whether one can emotionally adjust and accept changes depends on the individual. Fortunately, Lu Yuan had read many Taoist Classics and had been friends with Daoist Qi Yun and others for a long time, so his own Cultivation was deep. Now, a simple separation couldn¡¯t bother him. Only when he thought of the possible life-and-death separation in the future did he feel a slight sense of regret. People must live their lives. Although his good apprentice left, Lu Yuan¡¯s plan still needed to be carried out. If no one could do it for him, he would simply do it himself. However, since there was no one to assist him, Lu Yuan did not select candidates from the entire group of soldiers as originally planned. Instead, he chose those who were not too old, lacked a master, and already had a foundation in Inner Strength to be his own disciples. As a result, the number of people available for selection had greatly decreased. After all, among the entire army of 500 people, only about twenty of them had developed Inner Strength. After several rounds of screening, only five people met Lu Yuan¡¯s requirements in the end. These five were around twenty years old, had practiced a basic martial arts technique, but had no master. Lu Yuan took them as nominal disciples and taught each of them the first Mental Technique and moves of the Cloud Palm, then sent them off to study and practice on their own. He didn¡¯t have high expectations for these nominal disciples, as long as they reached the second -rate realm in twenty years. These disciples could also be used to train additional apprentices, expanding the influence of their sect. Then, in twenty years, it would be time for Lu Yuan to challenge the Iron Sword Sect. By then, with himself as the leader, along with five second-rate disciples, dozens of third-rate apprentices, and a group of friends, they could barely challenge the Iron Sword Sect. As for Zhou Qing? Braving the dangers of Jianghu is a matter of risking one¡¯s life. Lu Yuan was unsure if his good apprentice would survive in Jianghu for another twenty years. So, this plan to attack the Iron Sword Sect did not include him. However, even without a disciple, Lu Yuan believed that with his current strength, he could definitely defeat the Iron Sword Sect after accumulating strength for twenty years. ¡°Even if we don¡¯t succeed, it¡¯s okay. We can just wait another twenty years,¡± Lu Yuan said indifferently. ¡°By the time my apprentices have grown up, with dozens of second-rate fighters, I don¡¯t believe we can¡¯t take down the Iron Sword Sect.¡± As a long-lived person, he always had this kind of flexibility when it came to time planning. He didn¡¯t believe that he couldn¡¯t outlast a declining Iron Sword Sect. After passing on the martial arts techniques, Lu Yuan let the five nominal disciples fend for themselves. Besides setting aside one day per month to answer their questions and give lectures, he didn¡¯t pay much attention to them. Having recently realized emotional issues, he was slowly correcting his behavior and thought, beginning to think according to a long-lived person¡¯s Inair He could not invest too much emotion into everything, lest it hurt someone¡¯s body, mind, or feelings. Look at the bigger picture. For matters that cannot be solved in a short time, stretch the timeline to ten, twenty, or even hundreds of years. Time can eventually erase everything. Lu Yuan felt that his mindset had been somewhat unbalanced in recent years. He had gone from being carefree to gradually becoming eager for quick success. As a long-lived person, he had begun to pursue rapid growth in power like ordinary people, which was truly a case of putting the cart before the horse. ¡°Is it because of my emotions?¡± Lu Yuan pondered in his heart, scrutinizing incessantly, and finally concluded: ¡°Because I wanted to help Doctor Zhou and Xiaoqing, I became eager to deal with the Iron Sword Sect. And because of the turmoil in recent years, I began to worry about Brother Sun, which eventually led me to face the threat of the Poison Sect. It was these dangers that constantly appeared, which caused the pressure and anxiety in my heart, making me want to enhance my strength.¡± Upon careful consideration, all the changes he had gone through in recent years were due to his emotions. It was because he cared that things changed. Otherwise, given Lu Yuan¡¯s nature, he would have found a place to hide in the face of these troubles and dangers, waited for decades or even a hundred years, achieved major success in his martial arts, and then sought revenge. He wouldn¡¯t be like this now. Even knowing the threat of the Five Poisons Sect, he still stayed in Wugang County Town without leaving. ¡°However, even though I know the causes of these disturbances in my state of mind, I still don¡¯t want to change.¡± Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but sigh. There are some things you should do and some things you shouldn¡¯t. During these difficult and dangerous times, he couldn¡¯t bring himself to abandon his friends and run away, focusing solely on himself. Fortunately, his current strength was enough to face most dangers and protect the wellbeing of both his friends and himself. However, even so, Lu Yuan became more determined to separate himself from his emotions. For the sake of his initial aspirations, he could take a few risks with his friends now. But he couldn¡¯t do this in the long years to come. Otherwise, even as a long-lived person, he couldn¡¯t guarantee that he wouldn¡¯t suffer a setback. ¡°To be compassionate to oneself and indifferent to all things, that is my way.¡± Lu Yuan read the Taoist Classics, and could understand the Immortal experiences more deeply. It is said that Immortals are immortal and enjoy the same lifespan as heaven. Did those pioneers who became Immortal also go through a similar journey of emotional growth like him? With this resonance, Lu Yuan delved deeper into the Taoist Classics and could understand their true meaning more easily. Time flies. In the blink of an eye, it was the end of the year, and Wugang County Town had regained stability and prosperity by December. After the prefecture¡¯s inspection, Sun Siwen¡¯s contributions were recognized, and his rank was elevated by one level at the end of the year, making him a Seventh Rank County Magistrate. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t pay much attention to the promotion of his official rank. He had no interest in officialdom. He became an official mainly for Sun Siwen. Of course, now he had another reason- to make money. After all, in just a few months, he had made 130,000 silver taels, which could only be achieved by being an official and robbing the people. But while others become rich through officialdom for luxury and wealth, Lu Yuan, though also enjoying some of it, did not invest much energy in it. His main focus and financial resources were on enhancing his strength. The biggest part of that was spending money on making medicine.. Chapter 141 - Chapter 141: Chapter 120 Research on the Elixir Method Chapter 141: Chapter 120 Research on the Elixir Method Translator: 549690339 In fact, as early as six years ago, right after Lu Yuan, with the assistance of his disciples, had developed the Blood Jade Divine Medicine, he had a similar idea. Could there be a way to develop an elixir that, just like the divine medicine, can enhance cultivation? After all, in many martial arts novels, there are elixirs with similar effects¡ª such as the Great and Minor Rejuvenating Elixirs. This world seems to be an Immortal Martial World, it is impossible for such things to not exist. However, due to limitations in energy and resources, and considering that the recipe for elixirs with such effects are extremely rare, involving ingredients like the Blood Jade Centipede, a divine species variant, Lu Yuan eventually gave up the idea. Divine blood variants like the Blood Jade Centipede are hard to come by, making them nearly impossible to duplicate. But with Zhou Qing¡¯s departure, this previously abandoned thought resurfaced in Lu Yuan¡¯s mind. ¡°I don¡¯t need to develop an elixir that has the exact same effect as the Blood Jade Divine Medicine right away. Even if the efficacy was one tenth, or even just one percent of the medicine, it would be acceptable to me.¡± Lu Yuan was open-minded. One Blood Jade Divine Medicine pill was equivalent to a year of his bitter cultivation. If an average person were to take it, it would be equivalent to four or five years of cultivation. An elixir like this, even if it only has one percent of its medicinal effect, could equate to three to four days of his cultivation. For ordinary people, one pill could be worth half a month. Lu Yuan knew that he was still at the martial stage and didn¡¯t anticipate eating some Nine-Turn Golden Elixir and ascending directly to immortality. Being able to increase his cultivation speed by three to four times was sufficient for him. Food needs to be eaten one bite at a time, the journey has to be walked step by step. Those elixirs with infinite mysteries could wait till he¡¯s ready to cultivate immortality. It wouldn¡¯t be too late by then. For now, it was best to stay grounded and steadily build his strength. Formulating elixirs wasn¡¯t overly difficult for Lu Yuan. After all, he was a man with an attribute panel, which was like a cheat code that removed any barriers in learning anything. Over the years, he had been learning the medical skills from Zhou Qing, and Zhou Qing didn¡¯t have anything to hold back. He had taught him everything about the Zhou family¡¯s inherited medical skills. Since he had a descendant of a medical aristocratic family as his tutor and there was no sky ceiling in a strict sense, Lu Yuan made speedy progress in learning medical skills. Within a mere three to four years. He exhausted all the knowledge Zhou Qing had. Later, when there was nothing more Zhou could teach, he took the initiative to study medical books. Two years later, his medical skill surpassed that of Zhou Qing and reached a major success. Lu Yuan felt that his current medical skills were not far from Dr. Zhou¡¯s from the past. Maybe even better. With such medical skills, exploring the method of pill refining would, of course, not be too difficult. However, while it was not difficult, it was not exceedingly easy either. After all, there were several types of elixirs. If we were talking about refining detoxifying elixirs or simple injury healing elixirs, Lu Yuan could easily do it. Not a problem! Even some Qi replenishing elixirs were not a big deal. But the kind of elixir that could increase the speed of cultivation, now that was a blind spot in his knowledge. After all, cultivation involves the three treasures of essence, energy, and spirit. If you wish to increase the speed of cultivation, the elixir naturally has to involve these three and be able to produce a certain enhancing effect on them. The reason why the Blood Jade Divine Medicine has this kind of medical effect is due to the divine blood lineage of the Blood Jade Centipede. That is a thing leaning towards immortal mythology, it¡¯s not surprising that it has such an effect. But for common medicinal herbs, to achieve this, how hard would that be? In the beginning of pill refining. Lu Yuan took the approach of improving and enhancing some of the auxiliary medicines he needed for cultivation, to see if it could increase the speed of cultivation. But this plan was abandoned after being tested for a while. Because those medicinal materials, after being adjusted and enhanced, either saw a decrease in the effects or developed defects that caused problems during cultivation, or the medicinal effects increased too strongly, resulting in toxicity and harming the body instead. He later understood. The formulations of his cultivation medicinal materials were a result of thousands of trials by the pioneers, leading to the current proportions. The problems that he could think of would already have been considered by those of the past. To rush for success and try to improve the formulations now to increase cultivation speed was purely underestimating the predecessors. After extinguishing these thoughts, Lu Yuan began to think of other methods. For example, using a variety of herbs that enhance the body¡¯s essence and nourish the spirit to create elixirs for qi, essence, and spirit replenishment. Refining this balanced tonic elixir naturally wouldn¡¯t pose much problem. And with his power, he didn¡¯t have to worry about not being able to receive the tonics. No matter how much supplemental medicine he consumed, he could digest it. But the practical effects of these tonics proved difficult to elaborate on. The replenishment of Qi did work. After consuming dozens of tonic elixirs, Lu Yuan felt that his blood qi had indeed become more vigorous, even occasionally giving rise to the impulse to expend energy. But these were just physical excitements, without significant stimulation of the soul. The total amount of his spirit had reached its limit, and the efficiency of each day was fixed. The amount of spiritual consciousness he could separate to refine inner strength was just that fixed amount, it was impossible for it to suddenly explode. It seemed that these ordinary elixirs could only work on the body and could not function on the mysterious spirit. This result made Lu Yuan somewhat disheartened for a while. After a period of time, the heavy blow to his confidence caused him to temporarily stop the medicine refinement experiments. It was not until a few months later when he was reading a Taoist classic titled ¡°True Monarch Bai Xiang¡¯s Examination of Different Species¡± that he had a moment of inspiration. ¡°All things have spirits; the longer they persist, the more essence accumulates. When essence is full, a spirit is born. Therefore, monsters and spirits in this world are mostly transformed from long-lasting objects.¡± The meaning of these phrases is quite straightforward. Everything in the world has spirit, thus the longer an organism lives, the more essence and energy it accumulates. Once this amount reached a certain level, a spirit would be born. Hence, monsters and spirits in the world are generally objects that have lived for a long time. What Lu Yuan paid attention to was the part about ¨C full of essence gives birth to spirit. ¡°My predicament lies in the fact that ordinary medicinal herbs can only enhance essence and qi but are unable to nurture spirit. As a result, pills made from ordinary medicinal herbs are unable to enhance cultivation. If interpreted according to this Taoist scripture, objects with a longer lifespan have a fuller spirit. In Taoist concepts, spirit is actually no different from the soul of humans. Therefore, if I use medicinal materials that have been aged for at least a hundred years or more to refine the elixir, it might indeed be possible.¡± Previously Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t thought in this direction. Firstly, because he lacked examples in this area and lacked guiding thoughts. Secondly, medicinal materials that were centuries old were very expensive. Often, one ingredient would cost dozens or hundreds of silver tales. Even though his family was wealthy, they still couldn¡¯t afford to waste money in such a manner. But now, after reading the Taoist scripture and having the flash of insight, he felt as if a new door had opened, presenting a new direction. That was¡­ to spend money.. Chapter 142 - Chapter 142: Chapter 121: Replenishing Yuan Pill Prescription Chapter 142: Chapter 121: Replenishing Yuan Pill Prescription Translator: 549690339 As the saying goes, Money can¡¯t solve all problems, but it can certainly solve most of them. Isn¡¯t it just money? For Lu Yuan, who has a fortune of over a hundred thousand silver taels, he doesn¡¯t care about spending any amount of money as long as it can enhance his strength. So after spending a huge amount of money to gather the required century-old herbs, Lu Yuan began a new round of refining spiritual elixirs. Perhaps it was because of the money he spent. Or maybe it was because he found the right direction. In any case, just as he started refining the elixir, he achieved good results. It was only the first round, but the elixir was already effective. ¡°This new pill, refined from century-old Kunming grass, century-old Black Crow Lotus, century-old Autumn Frost Flowers, and so on ¨C a total of eight ingredients ¨C was worth the more than five hundred silver taels I spent; it can actually enhance my spirit and vital energy.¡± Lu Yuan took the first pill and then meditated to refine it. Half an hour later, he digested the medicine¡¯s effects and opened his eyes with joy, ¡°Although the effectiveness of this pill in enhancing strength is not strong, with one pill roughly increasing an hour¡¯s worth of power, it is equivalent to an ordinary person practicing for half a day. But this is just my first attempt at refining; I could continue to improve the formula and dosage in the future. and the effectiveness will graduallv increase.¡± Ordinary people practicing martial arts can only cultivate for two hours a day due to physical limitations. Thus, increasing an hour¡¯s worth of strength is equivalent to an ordinary person¡¯s half-day growth. Although the pill currently costs five hundred silver taels and can only enhance half a day¡¯s worth of strength, it is already a breakthrough worth celebrating for Lu Yuan. He doesn¡¯t fear spending money on refining pills; he¡¯s just afraid of refining pills without any effect. It¡¯s just a little over five hundred silver taels. With Lu Yuan¡¯s current financial resources, he can support this kind of consumption for refining pills for more than two hundred times, and it¡¯s not in vain. Moreover, it¡¯s not like he only refines one pill at a time. For example, with this new attempt at a formula, Lu Yuan produced a total of eight pills. On average, refining one pill can increase his strength for four days. This amount has already reached his original expectations. What he needs to do now is to change from winning by quantity ¨C with eight pills increasing four days of strength ¨C to winning by quality, where one pill increases four days of strength. ¡°The results are good, the future is promising, and all I need to do now is to continue to work hard.¡± With this in mind, Lu Yuan spent a day consuming the newly-refined pills, and after increasing his Inner Strength by four days, he began a new round of formula research. In the Pharmacopoeia of Myriad Herbs, there are more than three hundred types of herbs that can nourish the spirit and vital energy. Now he¡¯s only tried eight, and there are many more options to explore. He refuses to believe that by trying each and every one of them, he won¡¯t be able to come up with the perfect prescription. Time slowly passed. Lu Yuan stayed in the barracks, constantly refining pills. Occasionally, he would take some time to teach his apprentice disciples and patrol the training of the soldiers. He does possess professional ethics, after all. Since he became a county captain and received a stipend, he¡¯d still do some work and not simply let go of everything. However, with the help of his cheap disciples, he doesn¡¯t have to deal with some of the tasks in the county, such as investigating bandits and patrolling security. His five apprentices naturally work on behalf of their master, solving problems in advance. As he wasn¡¯t bothered by official duties, Lu Yuan naturally had more time to focus on refining pills. Under his full dedication, time quickly moved forward, and it was already Hongdao¡¯s second year in July. After spending more than fifty thousand silver taels and trying various combinations of medicines, Lu Yuan finally determined his ultimate elixir formula in this month, taking into account the difficulty of obtaining the herbs, the compatibility of their properties, and their medicinal strength. The elixir, named [Replenishing Spirit Pill], was developed using seventeen types of century-old herbs, supplemented by dozens of common medicines, and was eventually finalized. This elixir requires a thousand silver taels per round and roughly produces ten pills per round, with each pill increasing the strength of the user by five days. In other words, a thousand silver taels can help Lu Yuan save fifty days of cultivation time. On average, that¡¯s twenty silver taels a day. Alright, this is certainly a luxurious way to cultivate through spending money. If you¡¯re not a true tycoon, you can¡¯t afford such a lavish cultivation style. If it weren¡¯t for Lu Yuan plundering the wealth of a county town, he wouldn¡¯t dare to play such a big game. However, even with this, his remaining savings of ninety thousand taels are only enough for ninety refining sessions. That¡¯s only enough to increase his strength by four thousand five hundred days, or roughly twelve years. ¡°With ninety thousand silver taels, I can increase my strength by twelve years, which is equivalent to only three or four years if I were to just practice. But this is enough.¡± Given Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation speed, three or four years are enough to complete the seventh and eighth levels of Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra and the remaining three meridians. That is to say, if everything goes smoothly, and as long as there are enough herbs for refining elixirs, he will be able to complete the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra and cultivate all sixteen meridians by the end of this year. Those who can cultivate all sixteen meridians are considered to have profound Inner Strength even among top-notch experts. In the Jianghu, even those children from major sects ¡ª who have various spiritual medicines ¡ª usually take fifty or sixty years to achieve this. Now that Lu Yuan is able to reach this goal at the age of twenty-eight, it is truly a shocking feat. However, Lu Yuan does not take pride in his imminent achievement. He remains as steady as ever, simply staying at home refining pills and cultivating. His disciples, on the other hand, were sent out to various places to purchase herbs for him. Century-old herbs are not easy to find. Many of them are considered treasures of pharmacies and are not easily sold. Purchasing these herbs requires time and financial investment. In order to fulfill their master¡¯s orders ¡ª and also for the reward of learning the second Cloud Palm Mental Technique ¡ª the disciples rack their brains and put a lot of effort into finding these rare herbs. However, even so, it would be a stretch to collect ninety sets of herbs within this year. Fortunately, Lu Yuan has a calm mindset and does not feel too rushed about this. He has already figured out the formula for [Replenishing Spirit Pill], and even if he has to chew the duck in his mouth a few more times before swallowing, it doesn¡¯t matter much. He considers it as a way to help digestion by chewing slowly. If he can¡¯t complete the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra this year, then so be it. He has plenty of time and is in no rush. While Lu Yuan¡¯s progress is going smoothly, his good friend Sun Siwen also experiences a new turning point in his life. Having procrastinated for nearly a year as the prefect, Liang Xiwu was finally called back to the court, having pulled some strings in the imperial government. The new prefect, Cui Changqing, was a former Assistant Minister of Rites who had been exiled from the capital for daring to directly criticize today¡¯s Hongdao Emperor. Regardless of whether he was demoted or not, Sun Siwen, as a subordinate of the new prefect, had to meet him in person. So on the twenty-fourth of July, County Magistrate Sun went to Shaoyang Prefecture City.. Chapter 143 - Chapter 143: Chapter 122: Stepping Up to Qjngyun Chapter 143: Chapter 122: Stepping Up to Qjngyun Translator: 549690339 Actually, Sun Siwen initially wanted to take Lu Yuan with him to give a good recommendation to the newly appointed Prefect about his good friend. But Lu Yuan had always been carefree and did not want to meet any superiors, nor did he want to show submission to others. Secondly, he also worried about the possible reprisal from the Poison Sect, fearing that they might ambush him on the way to Fu City. So, he chose to stay at home and let Sun Siwen go to Fu City alone. Of course, he arranged for reliable guards to accompany Sun on the road. Sun Siwen was away for quite some time. He thought it would take only three days for the round trip, but he did not expect that it would take a full seven days for him to return. During this time, Lu Yuan began to suspect that something might have happened to his friend and had almost decided to set out to find him personally. Fortunately, Sun Siwen returned in the end. ¡°Brother Lu, let me tell you.¡± Sun Siwen, who had just returned, was delighted to see Lu Yuan. He eagerly said, ¡°The newly arrived Prefect Cui is truly a capable official. Whether in governing the country or in literary accomplishments, he is among the best of his time.¡± Seeing Sun Siwen¡¯s admiration, Lu Yuan could not help but become somewhat curious. It was very rare for his friend to be so impressed with someone they had just met for only seven days. No, it was the first time he had seen such a thing. ¡°Is Prefect Cui that remarkable?¡± Lu Yuan could not help but ask. ¡°He is more than just remarkable,¡± Sun Siwen was still excited. ¡°Prefect Cui was famous for his poetry and prose in his younger days¡­¡± County Magistrate Sun seemed to have become a bit of a fanboy. At this moment, he was passionately explaining Prefect Cui¡¯s exploits, such as the poems and articles he had written, and even reciting them fluently. Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan could not help but show a look of realization. He had heard these poems and articles numerous times in brothels and other places where scholars and young men gathered, and could even recite some of them from memory. The poems and articles were indeed well -written, but he had not expected that they were originally penned by Prefect Cui. Beyond the poems and articles, Sun Siwen also mentioned Prefect Cui¡¯s scholarly achievements, such as his annotations on certain classics and his compilation of various books. In the Confucian tradition, he was regarded as a Grandmaster in his own right. In addition to his literary achievements, Cui Changqing was also a highly competent official in terms of governance. During his time in the imperial court, he repeatedly criticized current abuses without mentioning his reforms on the local level, which led to many accomplishments. For example, although he had only recently arrived at Shaoyang Prefecture, as a newly appointed Prefect, Cui Changqing had already launched reforms to address the problems left behind by his predecessor. He disciplined a group of officials who did not do their jobs, arrested corrupt officials who were violating the law, and began to reform the prefectural government system. Moreover, it was even said that he was planning to establish a new militia to address the increasingly chaotic security situation within the prefecture. It could be said that in just a short month, the new Prefect had almost completely resolved the problems left by his predecessor, which had accumulated over several years. If one could not call him a capable and diligent official, then there would truly be no good officials in the world. ¡°By the sound of it, the Prefect¡¯s appointment will greatly improve the situation in Shaoyang Prefecture in the future.¡± After hearing his friend¡¯s account, Lu Yuan could not help but feel a sense of relief and happiness in his heart. The new Prefect¡¯s competence would help to bring order and prosperity to Shaoyang Prefecture, which would only benefit him. Although the Poison Sect had not troubled him in the past year, Lu Yuan felt that the Poison Sect¡¯s threat was like a hanging sword of Damocles overhead, not knowing when it would fall. If Prefect Cui could consolidate the authority of the court in Shaoyang Prefecture during this time, As an official appointed by the imperial court, he would naturally be protected by this authority, giving him more confidence in dealing with the threat posed by the Poison Sect. ¡°Yes, the previous Prefect Liang, although a clean and diligent official who was also good at scholarly pursuits, his ability to govern was¡­ ¡® Upon mentioning this, Sun Siwen recalled how Liang had donated five thousand taels of military funds to him last year, and could not bring himself to criticize him any further. Instead, he changed his words and said, ¡°But Lord Cui has a very high opinion of me. During this meeting, he highly praised my efforts in suppressing bandits in Wugang County. He said that I demonstrated loyalty and bravery by taking risks when the court faced danger. Then, he said that I had restored the prosperity of Wugang and brought peace to the area in just one year, setting an example for other officials in governance.¡± Looking at his friend, Sun Siwen said with a faint smile, ¡°Brother Lu, perhaps it won¡¯t be long before I receive another promotion.¡± County Magistrate Sun still remembered that one year ago, around this same time, his friend¡¯s strength was revealed, and the triumphant look on his face as he watched him make a fool of himself. But who would have thought? It only took one year for him to be promoted again. From the Deputy Seventh Rank of county magistrate, the next promotion would be the Prefect and other official positions in the prefecture. At that level, within the entire Da Yue bureaucracy, he would already belong to the middle layer of local officials. A few steps further, and he would even reach the position of Prefect. The highest position that Sun Siwen¡¯s grandfather had ever held was now within reach for him, his grandson. ¡°Then, congratulations to Brother Sun!¡± Lu Yuan forcibly restrained the urge to tell Sun that he was already on another level and congratulated him with a smiling face, ¡°To be promoted to hold a position in the prefecture at such a young age, your rise is truly meteoric.¡± Setting aside any factors of wanting to see his friend embarrassed, Lu Yuan was genuinely happy about Sun Siwen¡¯s promotion.. Chapter 144 - Chapter 144: Chapter 122: Stepping Up to Qjngyun_2 Chapter 144: Chapter 122: Stepping Up to Qjngyun_2 Translator: 549690339 ¡°How can I regard my little achievement as something significant?¡± It was full of modesty in Sun Siwen¡¯s words. If it wasn¡¯t for that pleased smile on his face, just by listening to these words, one might actually believe him. But while pride filled him, he didn¡¯t forget his good friend: ¡°Brother Lu, aren¡¯t you also just twenty-seven years old, and already considered a second-rate expert in the Jianghu? With your innate talent, it should only be a matter of a few years before you enter the ranks of first-rate experts. By then, your achievements will be no less than those of a prefect. Moreover, when I met Lord Cui this time, he highly praised you as the County Captain who personally led the county soldiers to quell the rebellion. From what I gathered in his words, it seems he wants to transfer you and me back to Fu City together, in preparation for a promotion. There is a plan to establish an army in Fu City, and Lord Cui is currently in need of capable people. Brother Lu, once you go there, you may be able to directly take up the position of Commander of the Fu City Army. That¡¯s a sixth-grade post, one rank higher than my promotion. ¡± Sun Siwen said this with a touch of envy in his eyes as he looked at his own good friend. The promotion system for martial artists is different from that of civil officials like them. Because military officials always talk about strength within themselves, which is different from the civil officials who rely on the system¡¯s power to do their work. A powerful martial artist can become an army all by himself, a single person able to form a team. So, when they join the imperial court, they usually enjoy preferential treatment. The old practices of seniority and focusing on the generation are rare in the military official system. If you¡¯re a second-rate expert, then you¡¯ll hold the post of a second-rate expert. If you¡¯re a first-rate expert, you¡¯ll hold a first-rate post. If your strength is not enough, but you still want to hold that position, not only will you cause dissatisfaction among others, if a real crisis arises and you need to face it, that would be courting destruction. ¡°It¡¯s just a little fame.¡± As for the news that he may be promoted, Lu Yuan appeared quite indifferent and said, ¡°Even if I get promoted, it doesn¡¯t mean much to me. Brother Sun, you should know my ambitions.¡± Sun Siwen admired, ¡°Brother Lu, your heart towards the Dao in martial arts is well known, but every time I see you, I can¡¯t help but feel amazed.¡± In Sun Siwen¡¯s eyes, his friend was extraordinary in strength, even in the Jianghu he could be called a top-notch martial artist. Ordinary people in the Jianghu with his abilities would have already established a sect, enjoyed wealth and glory, had followers surrounding them everywhere, and lived a life of ease. But Lu Yuan didn¡¯t dwell on these mundane things. Even with his strength, wealth, and low profile in daily life, he continued to practice martial arts diligently at home. As a County Captain, he didn¡¯t covet power, only dedicated himself to practicing martial arts. Such behavior made anyone who saw it couldn¡¯t help but thumbs up and call him a true expert. So sometimes, Sun Siwen felt ashamed when facing Lu Yuan. He felt that as a worldly man who craved fame, it somewhat tarnished the character of his noble friend. ¡°Brother Sun praises me too highly, I am just a mortal.¡± Lu Yuan could guess some of his friend¡¯s inner thoughts, but he could only respond with a smile. What could he say? Could it be that he practiced martial arts so diligently for over a decade solely because he was afraid of death? It wasn¡¯t that he didn¡¯t want to enjoy glamour and fame, but because he lacked strength and didn¡¯t dare do so. Thus, a conversation between friends gradually came to an end. After that, Sun Siwen and Lu Yuan busied themselves with their own tasks. Lu Yuan remained the same, continuing to practice martial arts at home. As for refining pills, just as he had predicted earlier, the progress was quite limited. Although he had already sent his disciples to various places to purchase herbs, and some were even sent to other counties. Nevertheless, the herbs Lu Yuan was able to obtain were still limited. From the beginning of the eighth month to the end of the year, he was only able to refine eleven furnaces of pills, yielding a total of one hundred and twelve Rejuvenation Pills. However, even with that, after cultivating for more than a year since he advanced to the first-rate level and with the help of these Rejuvenation Pills, Lu Yuan managed to fully unlock one more bizarre meridian, entering the eighth layer of the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra. With this breakthrough in his martial arts technique, his strength greatly advanced. Nowadays, based on his increased strength, Lu Yuan felt that although he still lacked a first-rate martial arts technique, he could already contend with bottom-ranking first-rate experts with his profound inner strength. This made him very happy. According to this trend, once he fully unlocks the two meridians on the eighth layer and further deepens his inner strength, Then, relying on his inner strength, he might be able to reach the level of a senior first-rate expert. By that time, even without a first-class martial arts technique or many helpers, He might dare to directly break into Iron Sword Sect¡¯s territory and snatch their Tiejian Sword Technique solely relying on his strength. Of course, this still had some risks. Therefore, he probably wouldn¡¯t choose to do so unless he had no alternative. However, the increase in strength that the breakthrough in inner strength brought still gave Lu Yuan great joy and security. In order to increase his strength as quicldy as possible, he even took out the second level of the Cloud Palm Technique and specially rewarded it to the named disciple who bought the most herbs this year as an incentive.. Chapter 145 - Chapter 145: Chapter 122: Stepping Up to Qjngyun Chapter 145: Chapter 122: Stepping Up to Qjngyun Translator: 549690339 Naturally, the effect was remarkable. Seeing that one of their fellow disciples had already obtained the second level mental technique, the others naturally began to feel envious and eager. So, they didn¡¯t even bother to celebrate the New Year, instead taking people out to purchase herbs at the end of the year. Even the disciple who had won the martial arts technique joined his fellow brothers in their quest. After all, he had gained the second level technique, but aimed to obtain the next, the third level. Motivated by such ambitions, he joined the others in their actions. Lu Yuan was quite satisfied with the enthusiasm of his tools, no, his disciples. A second-rate mental technique, which he now looked down on, could help him advance to a senior first-class realm a few years earlier, and however he looked at it, it was a good deal. Not to mention these disciples, who, even if they gained the techniques, would still be his apprentices in the end, right? In this world where respecting the teacher and following the path was valued, when the time came for him, the master, to speak, could these people not obediently listen? In the end, they were still his laborers and fighters. As for the problem of disobedience and betrayal of the master? As a government official and a first-class expert, Lu Yuan had no worries about this. And if these disciples knew what was good for them, they would not choose these dead ends either. Wouldn¡¯t it be better to follow their own master in martial arts training and achieve promotion and wealth with proper diligence? Only a fool would become a traitor! As Lu Yuan¡¯s side was passionately practicing martial arts, Sun Siwen¡¯s achievements in his official career were also impressive. Although Sun Siwen said that the Prefect appreciated both of them and planned to promote them to work in the Fu City. But despite his appreciation, Prefect Cui had just taken office, and it was not easy to promote two officials in such unfamiliar circumstances. However, although Sun Siwen had some expectations of being promoted quickly, he still dedicated himself to public welfare. So after waiting for a while without any replies, he soon became lost in his political affairs. Last year, Wugang County had suffered several calamities, and reconstruction had only just begun. Although a year had passed since those events, many problems remained unresolved. In addition to the reconstruction, Sun Siwen also wanted to do more good deeds for the people and was planning to gather civilian workers after the busy farming period to repair some of the reservoirs and river channels throughout the county. These were all matters that required considerable effort. Whenever Sun Siwen had free time, he would take his team to the countryside and villages to prepare for these tasks to be accomplished as his political achievements. According to County Magistrate Sun. It was better to seize the opportunity when the county government had just confiscated a large sum of current silver from bandits and use it for political achievements and real benefits for the people. Should he wait until he was gone, leaving the silver behind for his successor to embezzle? Alright, as a fellow official, Sun Siwen did not trust other bureaucrats of Da Yue very much. However, his dedication did produce outstanding results. Thanks to the abundant funds at his disposal and his willingness to spend them, the project proceeded at a rapid pace. In just two or three months, reservoirs, river channels and even some small irrigation canals were built, irrigating thousands of acres of farmland. Beyond that, Sun Siwen, eager to spend all his funds, later focused on repairing the official roads, the already dilapidated road system, and even restoring the post station system, which had been destroyed during the chaos of war. Thecontinuation of these large-scale projects attracted countless merchants and travelers to cover the expenses of the civilian workers. As Sun Siwen paid the civilian workers for their labor, rather than simply relying on corvee labor, their wallets bulged after completing the two projects. With financial resources, people naturally wanted to buy things to improve their lives, further attracting even more merchants from other places. Within a short six months, by the end of the year when the projects were completed, Wugang County was bustling with merchants and travelers, and a large number of people from other places came here to do business. Even some of the displaced people from other places, due to unrest, had heard of the prosperity here and migrated to this area, restoring some of the vitality that was lost during the chaos and bringing back the population of Wugang County. For this, Sun Siwen spent more than 40,000 silver tales. With such spending, the county¡¯s finances shrank drastically, and the remaining silver on the account books was just over 10,000 tales. This small amount of money would not last long if they did not find a way to increase their income, and they would soon go bankrupt due to excessive spending. However, Sun Siwen didn¡¯t care about this anymore. By the end of the year, the annual performance assessment of the prefecture government office had come out. Prefect Cui had not misled them. When he said he would promote Sun Siwen and Lu Yuan, he truly followed through with action and made efforts in that direction. At the end of the year¡¯s assessment, Sun Siwen¡¯s political achievements ranked first among the hundreds of county magistrates in the county. Of course, this was due to his willingness to spend money. It would be difficult for a small county, with an average annual income of only four or five thousand silver tales, to spend the equivalent of a decade¡¯s income on six months¡¯ worth of political achievements. With such achievements, and whatever connections Prefect Cui had used, the prefecture government office finally ordered the exceptional promotion of Sun Siwen. He was promoted from a seventh-grade county magistrate to a sixth-grade official, assisting Prefect Cui Changqing in handling the affairs of the entire prefecture. As for Lu Yuan¡¯s promotion, it was a simple matter. The prefecture government had long heard of his second-class strength, and that he was a formidable force in the Jianghu. With such a powerful individual serving the court at a time when the nation was in decline, it was naturally something to celebrate. Thus, they gladly agreed to Prefect Cui¡¯s request. A direct transfer order was issued, appointing Lu Yuan as the Commanding General of Shaoyang Prefecture with a sixth-grade rank. In this way, both he and his good friend were promoted to the level of prefecture officials by the end of the year, truly soaring to the heights of Qingyun in their careers. In the official circles, their achievements became a celebrated topic of conversation.. Chapter 146 - Chapter 146: Chapter Chapter 146: Chapter Translator: 549690339 After receiving his new appointment, Sun Siwen was, of course, overjoyed. Within a month, he had risen from a regular seventh-ranked official to a sixth-ranked one, skipping two levels in total ¨C even more importantly, he had been promoted from a low-level official to a mid-level one. One could say that this was a qualitative leap. Not many county magistrates could be promoted one more level after decades stuck at their current position. But now, at the age of thirty-two, he had achieved this. How could he not be delighted? Even Lu Yuan was happy about his own promotion, which saw him rise three levels to become an Imperial Commander. This was not because he was obsessed with power or status; it was mainly because by reaching the position of Imperial Commander, he would now become the Chief of the military in one of the Fu cities. With this identity, it would be easier for his disciples to purchase herbs in other prefectures and counties, as they would have a higher standing among officials. Not only could they gain more resources, but there would also be less trouble from others ¨C the benefits were self-evident. Having spent their last New Year in Wugang County, time went by, and after three years of Hongdao, they handed over power at the end of January to the new county magistrate and County Captain. From the county soldiers he was in charge of, Lu Yuan left behind eight or ninety who had already settled down locally and were unwilling to leave with him. Then he led an army of four hundred with Sun Siwen to Shaoyang Prefecture City for their new positions. The reason they took the soldiers with them was mainly at the suggestion of Prefect Cui Changqing. As a newly promoted Imperial Commander, Lu Yuan, by convention, was entitled to command one thousand prefectural soldiers. But the original Shaoyang Prefectural soldiers had been deployed to fight rebels in Xichuan Prefecture, leaving the city without any soldiers apart from a few officials. Thus, these one thousand soldiers had to be recruited from scratch after he took office, for now, they only had that nominal quota. So Prefect Cui thought about it, since Wugang County was already stable and a small county town could not afford to raise five hundred county soldiers, he decided to simply reassign the remaining four hundred elite soldiers to the city, formally converting them into prefectural soldiers. Naturally, Lu Yuan had no objections to this. It was a good thing to be able to bring his familiar subordinates with him as he took up his new post. Moreover, since the soldiers had been converted into prefectural soldiers, neither he nor Sun Siwen would need to support them financially; Prefect Cui would be responsible for their military salaries. Thus, he could save a considerable amount of money. Nowadays, with all the local hundred-year-old herbs purchased, Lu Yuan had to send people to buy suitable herbs from further away, raising the expenditure and risk factor. With his expenses increasing, he had no choice but to find ways to generate more income and save money. Now that someone was covering military expenses, it perfectly suited his purpose. Here, a small matter must be mentioned. That was what his friend Sun Sima did before the handover ¨C he specifically transferred five thousand silver tales from the county government¡¯s account, leaving only three thousand for the next county magistrate. According to Sun Siwen¡¯s intentions: No one knew whether the next county magistrate would be corrupt or honest however, given the current state of affairs among officials, he was most likely a corrupt official. In that case, it was better to transfer the majority of the funds to Lu Yuan for maintaining the army. The soldiers patrolling the local area, maintaining public order, and suppressing bandits were working hard. There was nothing wrong with giving them an extra five thousand silver tales to improve their food. Anyway, this money was not public funds and was never recorded. It was a special fund allocated to the county office ¨C even after being transferred, no one would know. Of course, Lu Yuan gladly accepted it. Improving their food was not feasible, but he could use it to buy more herbs for himself. What, living off soldiers¡¯ blood? The salary he provided to each soldier was five silver tales per month, which was five times the income of an ordinary household. Moreover, it was paid monthly, without any arrears. The special donation made by his friend to the camp only took a share of the expenses. Could this be considered living off soldiers¡¯ blood? After several days of traveling with the soldiers, they finally arrived in Shaoyang Prefecture City on the second day of the second month. The Prefect had already sent officials to wait for them. After arranging for the soldiers to be stationed in the city¡¯s barracks, Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen went to meet with the Prefect. Inside the Prefectural government office: Cui Changqing was currently dealing with official business. This practical reformer had been busy dealing with internal corruption in the prefecture for more than half a year and worked until midnight every day. Although he was very tired, this fifty-year-old man seemed to have boundless energy and enthusiasm for his work. However, due to his dedication, he had discovered the extent of corruption in Shaoyang Prefecture after a thorough investigation. Corrupt officials were rampant, local bandits were rampant, the common people were becoming more impoverished, and the Miao mountain people were frequently rebelling¡­ In a nutshell, the entire prefecture was rotten to the core. No, not all of it was rotten. At the very least, in Wugang County, though they had recently experienced chaos, the newly appointed county magistrate had overseen a significant restoration of the local area. Not only were the number of registered households increasing and commerce flourishing, but the local finances and public security were also remarkable. Especially given the turbulent times they were living in, Sun Siwen had even led efforts to repair water conservancy projects and roads, making him stand out even more among the mediocre and corrupt officials. Perhaps that was why, seeing a lone bright light in the darkness, this heartbroken Prefect found hope. So, after meeting Sun Siwen, he strongly recommended him to the Jingfu Prefecture for promotion, bringing him to his side with plans to cultivate this rising star in his eyes. ¡°Greetings your Excellency.¡± ¡°Greetings Prefect..¡± Chapter 147 - Chapter 147: Chapter Chapter 147: Chapter Translator: 549690339 In the Administration Hall, Lu Yuan finally met this friend, the prefect Cui he had heard so much about. His hair was half-grey, his face graceful, indicating that he must have been a handsome man in his youth. His demeanor was upright but also carried the aura of a scholar. With an affable and refined air about him, he didn¡¯t act arrogant like most government officials. ¡°Mr. Sun, I have been waiting for a long time, finally you¡¯ve arrived.¡± Upon hearing the voice, Cui Changqing put down the brush in his hand and looked up, immediately seeing the young man he held in high regard. A smile crept onto his face. ¡°I apologise for my late arrival, please forgive me, Lord Prefect.¡± Sun Siwen admired Lord Cui immensely. Upon seeing the man, Lu Yuan clearly noticed his friend¡¯s breathing became rapid, his heartbeat quickened, revealing an obvious fan¡¯s reaction. This reaction from his friend was quite surprising to Lu Yuan. ¡°No harm done, Official procedures indeed take some time.¡± Cui Changqing waved his hand, reassuring his anxious fan. Then he turned to look at Lu Yuan, staring at him for a moment before saying with a surprised but hearty smile: ¡°So this must be Mr. Lu. Everyone in the mansion says that Mr. Lu is superb in martial arts. Two years ago, you personally led the team with great courage, eliminated the bandits in Wugang County and quelled the local Miao People¡¯s rebellion. In Shaoyang, no one surpasses you in bravery. ¡°I have heard so much about you.¡± ¡°It is indeed an honor to meet you today. As expected, your martial arts skills are extraordinary. True heroes of the world.¡± Unlike the casual and friendly conversation he had with Sun Siwen, Lord Prefect was obviously more respectful when talking to Lu Yuan. Seeing his attitude, Sun Siwen who was standing nearby appeared visibly surprised. He didn¡¯t expect his friend to have such a high status in the Prefect¡¯s heart. ¡°It¡¯s just a brute force. It¡¯s not worth the Prefect¡¯s praise.¡± Lu Yuan didn¡¯t feel excited about being treated with importance. He responded calmly to Cui Changqing¡¯s praise. And he had reasons. Now, he was firmly situated at the top tier, his position was comparable to those of high-ranking prefects. What was there to be delighted about when faced with praise from a prefect from a remote and poor mansion? Moreover, his desire for promotion wasn¡¯t much. Mainly because if the Commander continues to rise, he would either become a county commander or a general of the Forbidden Army under the direct control of the court. The county commander of Dongting county was an Inborn Grandmaster. Lu Yuan admits that even if he practiced for another twenty years, he might not be able to reach the Inborn realm, so naturally he dared not think about usurping the position of that Grandmaster. As for becoming a general of the court, that would mean being subjected to more restrictions, and freedom would be even less than what he enjoys now. Seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s neither humble nor arrogant demeanor, Cui Changqing didn¡¯t get angry. He knew that Jianghu martial artists have always been like this. Competent people always have special privileges. So, he continues to smile and say: ¡°Jianghu¡¯s top second-class master, this can not be described by just a bit of brute strength. Especially Mr. Lu is still so young, it¡¯s a matter of time when you will be among the top class. A top class martial artist, that is the leader of all martial artists in a prefecture, a respected person in Jianghu. Even for me, I would have to treat you as equals, dare not act big.¡± As an official from the court, Cui Changqing¡¯s information channel and horizon were far more extensive and broad than local officials. So some secrets that are rarely heard in local places, he knew very well. For example, the war has been going on between the court and Liang and Jinghai countries for three years, it¡¯s not only the frontal confrontation on the battlefield, but also the ongoing private duel with the martial artists of the two countries. Over the past three years, many of the court¡¯s martial artists have been killed on the battlefield. Even some court martial artists were so frightened by the horrific casualties that they fled in secret. At the same time, with the great rebellion in Xichuan county and local unrest in various parts of Da Yue territory, it has consumed a lot of energy from the court¡¯s masters, resulting in a lot of casualties. With multiple layers of casualties, the power of the martial artists in the court has weakened significantly. The deterrent power of Jianghu martial artists has also declined sharply. At present, many local Jianghu martial artists, and even Jianghu sects, are becoming restless and showing signs of rebellion. Under such circumstances, the court¡¯s emphasis on the top Jianghu martial artists has risen sharply. Originally, a Jianghu second-class martial artist¡¯s position in local areas was just the same as that of a county magistrate. But now, with the loss of the court¡¯s top martial artists, in official circles, the position of a second-class master is substantially higher than that of a county magistrate. Similarly, the position of a first-class master naturally surpasses that of a prefect. Therefore, Cui Changqing is not wrong. If Lu Yuan is indeed a top-class master, then he needs to treat him with respect. Well¡­ It seems that this Lord Prefect has inadvertently spoken some truths. However, Lu Yuan just continued to smile in response. He wasn¡¯t about to reveal his identity. As a traverser, a being who seeks longevity, always maintaining a few hidden cards to be able to take out at crucial times, that is the clever way. In comparison, trivial fame is not worth mentioning, not worth mentioning. After enthusiastically chatting with Lu Yuan for a few moments and receiving limited responses, Prefect Cui realized that the highly skilled martial artist Mr. Lu, seems to be a man who doesn¡¯t like to talk much. So, he tactfully didn¡¯t bother any further. Instead, he turned to Sun Siwen and began to chat about poetry, his experience in governance, and the current situation in the world. Compared to Lu Yuan¡¯s cool demeanor, this little fan was utterly excited when his idol was conversing with him.. Chapter 148 - Chapter 148: Chapter Chapter 148: Chapter Translator: 549690339 And so, the two of them began chatting passionately. From noon to afternoon, their conversation continued, until evening when it was time for dinner. Night was almost upon them. At this point, somebody in the Prefect¡¯s residence couldn¡¯t sit idly. ¡°Father, you¡¯re working so late again.¡± From afar, a crisp and pleasant voice was heard. Lu Yuan, who was meditating nearby, opened his eyes upon hearing the noise. He saw a yellow dress fluttering in, followed by a fragrant breeze. A beautiful young woman, around the age of 28, walked into the room with an irritated look on her face as she looked at Cui Changqing. ¡°Wenxiu.¡± Upon hearing the voice, Prefect Cui came back to his senses and looked a little embarrassed as he realized it was his daughter. ¡°There are guests.¡± Cui Wenxiu noticed the presence of two people in the room, realizing that she had come at an inopportune time and became somewhat embarrassed. As an aristocratic daughter, it was considered impolite to disturb her father during official affairs. This was common courtesy. Fortunately, Cui Changqing came to his daughter¡¯s rescue. Glancing at the darkening sky outside, he said to Sun Siwen and Lu Yuan: ¡°Mr. Sun, Mr. Lu, it¡¯s getting late. Why not stay here and dine with me?¡± ¡°Ah¡­¡± Sun Siwen hesitated and glanced at the woman in the yellow dress before hesitatingly saying, ¡°This is a family feast at your home, it wouldn¡¯t be right for outsiders like us to join, would it?¡± Although Da Yue¡¯s martial arts were strong and the customs were relatively open, it was still somewhat inappropriate for strangers to join in a private family gathering. ¡°Hey.¡± Prefect Cui waved his hand and laughed, ¡°Since I, the host, have no problem with it, why would you, the guest, be worried? Alright, it¡¯s settled. You¡¯ll have dinner with us tonight.¡± He then turned to his daughter and said, ¡°Wenxiu, go and instruct the kitchen to prepare extra dishes; I would like to entertain our two distinguished guests tonight.¡± Curiously, Cui Wenxiu glanced at Sun Siwen and Lu Yuan, surprised by her father¡¯s actions, as he had never invited anyone to dine with them before, nor had he been so polite to anyone in Shaoyang. Wondering what their special qualities were, she agreed and said, ¡°I¡¯ll go right now. Please wait a moment, honored guests.¡± She then hurried off. Arrival and departure were equally swift. Watching his spirited daughter, Cui Changqing looked at the two men and smiled bitterly, ¡°Having no sons, I dote on my one and only daughter. Since she was little, I couldn¡¯t bear to scold her, allowing her mischievousness to develop. I apologize if it has caused any offense to you two gentlemen.¡± Being a fan, Sun Siwen quickly replied, ¡°Not at all, Sir. Your daughter is intelligent and filial. Her innocence is endearing rather than annoying.¡± Lu Yuan nodded and added, ¡°Her personality is quite likeable and doesn¡¯t invite any dislike.¡± Hearing their praise, Cui Changqing chuckled. His gaze lingered on Lu Yuan for a moment but eventually turned to Sun Siwen, and as he looked at Sun, he asked, ¡°If I remember correctly, you are still single, Mr. Sun, right?¡± At thirty years old, and an unmarried official, Sun Siwen indeed attracted attention. Sun Siwen thought his superior was reminding him to settle down soon, and he replied somewhat shyly, ¡°I made a vow in my early years to achieve my ambitions first, like my ancestors. I wanted to establish a career before discussing marriage, so as not to let love distract me from my aspirations. Later, when I was appointed as a county magistrate, I thought it was time to find a suitable match, but none had been found. Thus, the matter was put aside until now. ¡± Cui Changqing smiled, stroking his beard, ¡°I see. It¡¯s commendable for a young man to have great ambitions. With your accomplishments and talents, it¡¯s only a matter of time before you find the right woman. There¡¯s no need to rush things.¡± Sun Siwen gratefully replied, ¡°Thank you for your understanding, Sir.¡± Lu Yuan, watching the conversation out of the corner of his eye, couldn¡¯t help but feel that something was amiss. Shortly after. Someone from the Prefect¡¯s residence arrived, but this time it was a servant, announcing that dinner was ready. The three of them then headed to the dining area. At the dining table, Cui Changqing invited his wife and daughter to join them. During the meal, the Prefect whispered something to his wife, who began to frequently glance at Sun Siwen with an occasional smile on her face. Sun Siwen, perhaps preoccupied with dining with his idol, was slow to notice her attention. After finishing dinner, Lu Yuan accompanied his friend and Cui Changqing for some tea and chat before leaving. As they exited the Prefecture office and walked through the city streets, brightly lit lamps illuminated their way. As the capital of a prefecture, Shaoyang Prefecture City¡¯s prosperous streets were a sight to behold, even in an impoverished area. Stepping out of the back door and taking in the cool night breeze, Lu Yuan turned to his still-dazed friend and said with a smile, ¡°Brother Sun, it seems your romantic luck is just around the corner.¡± The events of the night clearly indicated that Prefect Cui held Sun Siwen in high regard and wished to make him his son-in-law. To make matters more official, even the woman¡¯s mother was present, practically introducing the family. From the scene at dinner, it was evident that the mother-in-law was quite satisfied with her prospective son-in-law, and she even helped serve him food a few times throughout the evening. This was a level of courtesy that Lu Yuan, despite his handsome appearance, never received. As a result, Sun Siwen, despite his plain appearance and scholarly nature, remained blissfully unaware of what was occurring around him. Considering how beautiful Miss Wenxiu was, it was a terrible waste for someone like him to win her heart. Feeling somewhat indignant, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel wronged. ¡°What romantic luck?¡± Sun Siwen still appeared to be confused. Having had a bit too much to drink, his head was still slightly hazy, and he had yet to fully recover from meeting his idol. Seeing his friend still clueless, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but laugh, ¡°It¡¯s nothing. You¡¯ll find out soon enough.¡± He then walked towards the sedan chair that had been prepared for them. ¡°What is it exactly? Why don¡¯t you just tell me?¡± Sun Siwen. feeling somewhat displeased. hastily followed suit.. Chapter 149 - Chapter 149: Chapter Achieving the Right Result Chapter 149: Chapter Achieving the Right Result Translator: 549690339 Upon arriving at the mansion prepared by the government office, Lu Yuan walked around after entering, feeling quite satisfied. As the Chief of the military with the rank of commandant, he held power and status only second to the Prefect and the vice-prefect in the office. Being the third highest in the office, his living conditions were naturally favorable. The residence covered thousands of square meters, including work areas for handling government affairs, private living quarters for the owner, guest rooms to entertain visitors, and a garden and pond for relaxation. It was not much different from his Mansion in Wugang County. However, the two could not be compared as one was in Fu City and the other was in a county town. The only slight deficiency was that there were no servants in the mansion. Although the government office had sent people to clean up, the empty and vast residence made Lu Yuan, who was already accustomed to being served, feel a bit uncomfortable. ¡°I¡¯ll transfer my personal guard here tomorrow and also hire some maids and servants in the city to make the place lively. Otherwise, I would not look like a respectable official without anyone to serve.¡± After returning to his bedroom, Lu Yuan thought about this, and then began to practice his martial arts. The only martial art he was currently practicing was Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra. Therefore, the time he could allocate to this practice had increased significantly. Lu Yuan spent two hours in the morning, afternoon, and evening for cultivating this technique. The remaining free time was used to read Taoist Classics and miscellaneous books, enriching his cultural knowledge. The six hours of daily practice, combined with Rejuvenation Pills and precious jade inner strength tempering, allowed his strength to grow rapidly. Ordinarily, it would take two to three times longer to break through a bizarre meridian than a regular meridian. But now, with Lu Yuan¡¯s triple cultivation time and assistance of jade plates and Rejuvenation Pills, his breakthrough speed was increased to the point where he could break through a bizarre meridian every six months. This was only because the supply of Rejuvenation Pills couldn¡¯t keep up with the low efficiency of the disciples¡¯ medicine purchases. If there were enough Rejuvenation Pills, he could even progress at the speed of breaking through a bizarre meridian every three months. However, even at one bizarre meridian every six months, Lu Yuan was already quite satisfied. Now he had reached the final layer of Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra. With only two meridians left unbroken, even if it took six months each, he would complete this top-tier Mental Technique by the end of this year. ¡°But once I reach that point, without more profound arts, my cultivation will stagnate.¡± After finishing two hours of practice tonight, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but furrow his brows as he thought about his impending dilemma of arts techniques. It¡¯s not that he couldn¡¯t continue to cultivate after reaching the peak, but he would face two issues. First, he would need to explore other unpracticed meridians, such as the remaining four bizarre meridians not recorded in Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra. But in cultivating these meridians, Lu Yuan lacked stable circulation routes, and practicing rashly could lead to physical damage and even entering the devil¡¯s realm. Not exploring other meridians and only cultivating within existing meridians could only increase his Inner Strength but not his realm. The problem, however, is that each meridian has a limit to how much Inner Strength it can handle. Once his real Inner Strength reached the ultimate limit of the meridians, it would inevitably begin to compress his body, eventually breaking the meridians and causing his body to explode. ¡°Given my current rate of Inner Strength growth, when I finish breaking through the eighth layer of meridians, it won¡¯t take half a year for me to accumulate enough Inner Strength to reach the limit. Then there will be no more growth or progress.¡± After calculating the time, Lu Yuan estimated that around the end of next June, he would reach the limit that his current martial arts could improve upon. Upon reaching the limit, he would either have to stop cultivating or find a more advanced martial art. ¡°That¡¯s the dilemma.¡± Lu Yuan was somewhat troubled: ¡°My disciples are just third-rate, and none of my grand-disciples are any good. It¡¯s unrealistic to think of going after the Iron Sword Sect with them. No, even if I defeated the Iron Sword Sect, it wouldn¡¯t help solve my current predicament.¡± At this moment, he suddenly realized that what troubled him was the lack of more advanced martial arts techniques. With this constraint, even if he managed to recover the Iron Sword Technique, it would only improve his combat skills. It would still have little effect on solving his problem of increasing Inner Strength. ¡°Do I really have to start researching and creating martial arts?¡± Now, Lu Yuan had no choice but to face this plan which he once gave up and thought was far away. He pondered with a frown, still feeling overwhelmed and directionless. In the end, he could only shake his head and put the matter aside. ¡°Forget it, I still have a year and a half until that point anyway. I¡¯ll think about it when that day comes.¡± He closed his eyes and went to sleep. No matter if it was creating martial arts or plundering them, sufficient strength was required. Right now, he hadn¡¯t reached the peak yet, and there was no use in worrying any further. It was better to sleep. After a night¡¯s sleep, Lu Yuan got up early the next day and headed to the barracks in the city. Shaoyang Prefecture¡¯s barracks were already well-established, as the previous local soldiers were stationed in the city. Upon entering, Lu Yuan found the barracks quite large. There were drill grounds, barracks, canteens, conference halls, armories, and other facilities well in place. Though the environment could not compare to the luxury of the Wugang County¡¯s barracks, it was not bad, and the soldiers, who had experienced hard times, were not dissatisfied.. Chapter 150 - Chapter 150: Chapter 124: Achieving the Right Result_2 Chapter 150: Chapter 124: Achieving the Right Result_2 Translator: 549690339 After conducting an inspection on the drill ground to observe the soldiers¡¯ morale, and making sure nothing had changed, Lu Yuan felt relieved to leave. Before he left, he selected twenty personal guards to take back to his residence. Over the past year, even though Lu Yuan had spent most of his time not attending to his duties, he still devoted some effort to the training of his army. When he had previously taken in disciples in the army, he eliminated the majority of unqualified people. However, he didn¡¯t abandon all of the eliminated ones. Among the outstandings, Lu Yuan picked some of them and formed a team of about fifty personal guards. These personal guards were between the ages of sixteen and twenty, with great potential, and were all skilled in divine archery, making them valuable talents. As for these guards responsible for his protection, he had also passed on his martial arts skills to them. However, it was not Cloud Palm, but some other miscellaneous martial arts that he had previously confiscated in Wugang County, third-rate skills. Even though they were third-rate, these skills were still a rare opportunity for these personal guards who came from a hunter background. As a result, everyone practiced diligently and earnestly. Furthermore, Lu Yuan also spent generously on them, spending a hundred silver tales each month on herbs to assist them in their training and to toughen their bodies. Now, after more than a year¡¯s time, these fifty personal guards had all cultivated inner strength. Although they only had the inner strength and had not even opened up one meridian, they were still at the bottom of the bottom. However, no matter how low-level they were, having inner strength was better than not having it. With fifty skillful divine archery guards with inner strength, even a second-rate expert could be surrounded by them and end up dead under their arrows. If these personal guards develop into third -rate martial artists, then fifty of them forming an arrow formation would be enough to restrain a first-rate expert. Although they still couldn¡¯t win, they could at least tie up the enemy for a while. But waiting for them to become third-rate martial artists would take at least another seven years, which was still too long. As of now, these personal guards could not be put to much use yet. These personal guards were actually another hidden card prepared by Lu Yuan. Whether it was for protecting himself or taking them to assassinate others, they were a powerful support. ¡°There are too few personal guards. Now that I am a commander, I can manage an army of a thousand. In a few days, I will send people to recruit soldiers and fill the vacancy of six hundred people. At that time, I will pick fifty more people from the new recruits and form a hundred personal guards. When the martial arts are passed down and trained for a year or two, even if the individual strength of the guards is weak, a hundred of them forming an array can still have some effect.¡± On the way back, Lu Yuan was planning and preparing. Recruiting soldiers was definitely necessary, as he had the organization, and naturally, it should be filled. However, now that he was in Fu City, even though he was the chief military official, he could only rank third in the city. The person in charge of the city now was the Prefect, Cui. To recruit six hundred people, it would mean an increase in the expenses of twenty thousand silver tales in a year. This was not a small amount. So deciding when to recruit, how many people to recruit, and whether to recruit had to be discussed with the Prefect. It was impossible for things to go as smoothly as they did in Wugang County, where whatever Lu Yuan said, Sun Siwen would agree. Unless you pay for the soldiers yourself, then naturally no one can object. But now, to purchase herbs for refining pills every month, Lu Yuan had to spend a tremendous amount of silver. It was like an endless pit that seemed impossible to fill. He even had to use 5,000 silver tales of Sun Siwen¡¯s rewards for the soldiers. How could he possibly afford to pay for the soldiers for the court? ¡°Sigh, officialdom, troublesome.¡± Whenever Lu Yuan thought of these interpersonal relationships and worldly affairs, he couldn¡¯t help but feel a headache, so he stopped thinking about it altogether. Anyway, the soldiers belonged to the court, and whether the quotas were full or not had nothing to do with him. Whether to recruit soldiers or not would depend on the Prefect¡¯s urging. The days of skiving at work were actually quite nice. While Lu Yuan was skiving at work, Sun Siwen¡¯s situation was not as relaxed. As the deputy of the Prefect, he had to help the Prefect deal with various affairs in the mansion every day. Cui Prefect was a person who wanted to do things, could do things, and would do things. Consequently, they were currently busy implementing reforms. As a result, the workload was piled up, and the official documents were as high as a small mountain. Sometimes, even when a batch was processed, more documents were brought in, as if there was no end to the work. It had only been a few days since Sun Siwen, who was previously energetic, had become pale and exhausted. He looked like he hadn¡¯t rested well and was overworked. However, although he was exhausted, Sun Siwen¡¯s ability to handle affairs was still quite high. With his assistance, Cui Prefect¡¯s speed of handling official documents was noticeably faster than before. Moreover, Sun Siwen also provided a lot of useful suggestions when dealing with difficult issues, which made the Prefect very happy, openly praising him as a good assistant. Even the people inside the Prefect¡¯s back house had a good impression of the newly arrived Sun Siwen. Since Sun Siwen¡¯s arrival, the time the Prefect spent on handling documents had reduced, and he was able to maintain a normal work schedule every day. Things were not like they had been in the past when he often had to work overtime and stay up late, causing him to have more white hair. On several occasions, Miss Wenxiu had brought tonics for her father and also prepared a portion for Sun Siwen. Upon seeing him, she would always greet him warmly, praising him as a good official and a great talent, and gratefully acknowledging his help and care to her father. Whenever this happened, the Prefect would watch with a smile, and then reveal a motherly grin.. Chapter 151 - Chapter 151: Chapter 124: Achieving the Right Result—3 Chapter 151: Chapter 124: Achieving the Right Result¡ª3 Translator: 549690339 Sun Siwen was actually quite happy. Although the job was indeed a bit tiring, Prefect Cui could be considered a grandmaster of the Confucian school in this world, and he had a lot of experience in the officialdom. Working and learning under such a great man, Sun Siwen learned a lot. What¡¯s more, Prefect Cui appreciated Sun Siwen, often giving guidance on work and knowledge, which benefited Sun Siwen greatly. Moreover, Prefect Cui¡¯s daughter, Miss Wenxiu, was a gentle and virtuous woman. From time to time, she would come to visit and inquire, and every time Sun Siwen heard Wenxiu¡¯s melodious voice, it would refresh his soul like rain and eliminate all his fatigue. As time went by, they spent more time together, and a crazy thought began to form in his mind: he wanted to be with Miss Wenxiu forever. But Sun Siwen was a man who strictly adhered to propriety, so every time this thought arose, he would chant ¡°do not entertain disrespectful thoughts¡± in his heart, not daring to think any further. However, this made him act somewhat restrained in front of Wenxiu, often being teased as a bookworm. At this, Sun Siwen could only blush and stammer, unable to respond. What could he say? Should he say ¡°I like you, and I want to be with you forever¡±? Such bold words would still be considered shocking even in the open-minded Da Yue. Sun Siwen, who had been deeply influenced by traditional etiquette, would definitely not say, nor dare to say such words. But romantic feelings are something that the more you try to suppress and stifle, the more they drive you mad. Lu Yuan noticed that Sun Siwen seemed a bit off during several meetings with his good friend. But when he asked Sun Siwen what was wrong, Sun Siwen acted like a closed-mouthed bottle, blushing and not saying anything. After carefully observing a few times, Lu Yuan suddenly thought of something, smiled mysteriously, and stopped asking. This state lasted for two months, until the fifteenth day of the eighth month, during the Mid-Autumn Festival, when Sun Siwen suddenly came to him. In the back garden. Lu Yuan stood gazing at the equally bright and round moon in the sky, reminiscing about his past life before crossing over, feeling somewhat melancholy. At that moment, he sensed movement behind him, felt the familiar presence, and immediately turned around, smilingly asking, ¡°Brother Sun, did you come to accompany me for this festival when you saw how lonely I was? Behind him, Sun Siwen quickly walked over, his face showing some excitement. ¡°Brother Lu¡­ Brother Lu, let me tell you¡­ His breath slightly labored, his face flushed with excitement, and his eyes full of hope and happiness, it was clear that something great had happened. ¡°Ah, let me guess.¡± Lu Yuan interrupted Sun Siwen, who had just recovered and wanted to continue speaking, and said with a smile, ¡°Did Miss Cui choose you? And is she going to marry you, the wooden block?¡± Lu Yuan looked at Sun Siwen¡¯s still astonished expression and couldn¡¯t help but chuckle, ¡°Senior Brother, have you forgotten? The night we first arrived in Fu City, I told you something after we left the Prefect¡¯s residence.¡± ¡°After we left? What did you say?¡± Sun Siwen recalled, ¡°Peach blossom luck, right, peach blossom luck. How did you know about the events that happened a few months later, Brother Lu?¡± At this point, he paused, finally realizing, ¡°So it¡¯s actually been a few months since Prefect Cui intended to take me as his son-in-law?¡± ¡°What else?¡± , Lu Yuan looked at him with amusement, ¡°I really don¡¯t know what Lord Cui saw in you, such a dull person. And Miss Wenxiu, too, such a heavenly immortal, marrying this stupid donkey of yours.¡± As for his initial rejection, our Lu was still somewhat upset. ¡°Hehe¡­hehe¡­¡± Regarding his good friend¡¯s sarcastic comments, Sun Siwen just grinned foolishly, not objecting, appearing to be quite happy. Seeing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel even angrier. After the laughter and joy subsided, Sun Siwen told Lu Yuan about his experiences today. Today, after he and Cui Changqing finished their official duties and were about to leave as usual, they were stopped by their superior, who then took Sun Siwen to the backyard for dinner. This kind of thing had happened many times over the past few months, and Sun Siwen was used to it. But today was special because Miss Wenxiu was not present, which left him somewhat disappointed. He had been looking forward to seeing Miss Wenxiu again, but it didn¡¯t work out. However, the disappointment didn¡¯t last long, as a huge surprise soon arrived. ¡°Lord Cui first asked about my marriage situation, and then suddenly mentioned that Wenxiu had not been betrothed to anyone yet, asking me if I was interested in her¡­¡± At this point, Sun Siwen¡¯s face reddened slightly, as if recalling some embarrassing memories, and he skipped over it, then excitedly continued, ¡°Of course, I had no objections. It¡¯s my honor to marry Miss Wenxiu. Then Lord Cui laughed loudly, and Lady Cui was delighted. We drank some wine, and then Lord Cui and his family suggested setting a wedding date, hoping that Miss Wenxiu and I could get married soon.¡± Upon saying this, Sun Siwen looked at Lu Yuan, ¡°Brother Lu, I don¡¯t have any close relatives or elders. You are the only good friend I have in this lifetime, so I came to ask you to act as my matchmaker. Then I hope you can help me propose marriage to the Cui family, finalize our birthdates and arrange the marriage contract, and act as my matchmaker. I wonder if Brother Lu would be willing?¡± To be a matchmaker? Lu Yuan was slightly taken aback by this request, but seeing the hopeful look in Sun Siwen¡¯s eyes, he immediately replied with a smile, ¡°What¡¯s there to be willing or unwilling? You are my good friend, and now you¡¯re facing a major life event. I¡¯ll naturally help if I can. When is the day of the proposal? Miss Wenxiu is a good girl and also a lady of high status. We need to plan and prepare carefully for the marriage proposal and not let her family feel slighted. As for the wedding, since we¡¯re going to have it, it needs to be grand. How can my good friend¡¯s wedding be shabby! I want everyone in Fu City to join in our blessings and celebrations.¡± The 5,000 silver tales Sun Siwen had given him last time were still unused. Lu Yuan planned to add his own 5,000 silver tales, making a total of 10,000 silver tales, to hold a lavish wedding. In this remote city, such a large sum of money was more than enough to celebrate the entire city. ¡°Thank you, Brother Lu.¡± Sun Siwen was moved by Lu Yuan¡¯s concern, and then they began to discuss the details of the wedding proposal and the wedding arrangements together. Looking at his friend¡¯s enthusiastic manner, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel emotional. The two had known each other for more than ten years, and now, his good friend was finally getting married. On the other hand, he was still single. He enjoyed the benefits of longevity, but at the same time missed out on the beauty of ordinary people¡¯s lives. Encountering and knowing one another, committing their hearts to each other, supporting each other, and growing old together. ¡°It¡¯s something to be envied.¡± For a moment, there was a flicker of doubt in Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes, but in the end, he remained firm. The feelings between men and women were ultimately not as wonderful as longevity. He was a determined seeker of the Immortal Path.. Chapter 152 - Chapter 152: Chapter 125: The Decline of National Power Chapter 152: Chapter 125: The Decline of National Power Translator: 549690339 The two of them chatted all night. After a night¡¯s time, they finally decided on the various etiquette for the marriage proposal. Only then did Sun Siwen feel at ease to sleep. Today was his day off, and he could sleep for three days to relax properly. Lu Yuan, on the other hand, was full of energy. With his advanced martial arts realm, even if he didn¡¯t sleep for three or five days, he wouldn¡¯t be the least bit tired. His good friend was about to get married, and as Sun Siwen¡¯s only friend, he naturally had to get busy preparing. So when the sky lightened up, he called for his personal guard, took out the silver taels, and instructed them to go to various shops in the city to purchase all kinds of items for the marriage proposal. Later on, he asked someone to call for the Master of Ceremonies from the Government Office who was in charge of the rituals and asked him how to hold a wedding and what etiquette to follow. Hearing that it was the Prefect and his daughter¡¯s wedding, with the groom being a high ranked official and the matchmaker a higher commander, this ninth-grade official dared not be negligent. And so, he enthusiastically introduced Lu Yuan to the various precautions of the wedding ceremony. However, ancient wedding rituals were indeed cumbersome, requiring three letters and six rites. The three letters were the betrothal letter, the formal gift letter, and the welcoming letter. The six rites were betrothal, name asking, choosing an auspicious date, presenting betrothal gifts, proposing marriage, and welcoming the bride. Each of these rituals was of utmost importance and could not be overlooked. After listening to the introduction, Lu Yuan felt that he indeed couldn¡¯t handle it himself, so he simply handed over the preparations to the Master of Ceremonies. He would only be responsible for following the procedures on the day of the wedding. After hurriedly learning all he could for several days, Lu Yuan took the betrothal letter and went to the Prefect Cui¡¯s Government Office to propose marriage. Since both families had agreed, Prefect Cui did not make things difficult and happily approved the proposal. In the following days, Lu Yuan carried out the three letters and the six rites, according to etiquette. Soon, the time to welcome the bride had come. On this day, the groom would go to the bride¡¯s house to escort her back to his home, and it would be the time for the bride to officially pass through the door. In order for his friend to save face, Lu Yuan directly set up open-table banquets in the city. Three thousand tables were set up in pubs and open spaces along the streets, all with food and drinks available for anyone to enjoy. As long as there was wine and meat, and a table full of inexpensive dishes, it would only cost a few hundred cents. With a daily expense of four hundred silver taels, more than a thousand silver taels would be enough to treat tens of thousands of people in the city for three days. The welcoming procession was formed by pulling out the city soldiers, lining up in an army formation, dressed in red, looking quite impressive. Everyone who saw the procession was amazed. In fact, according to Sun Siwen¡¯s nature, he didn¡¯t want to be so ostentatious. But with one sentence from Lu Yuan, his thoughts were eliminated. ¡°If you¡¯re getting married, it should be done grandly. Don¡¯t you want to give Miss Wenxiu the best wedding possible?¡± When he thought of Wenxiu, Sun Siwen¡¯s resistance instantly disappeared. For that girl who had captured his heart, he was willing to give her the best of everything he could offer. So in the end, he could only look at Lu Yuan and gratefully say, ¡°Thank you, Brother Lu.¡± When they arrived at Yang Mansion, The Cui family had already prepared the bride. As soon as the welcoming procession arrived, they sent the bride off in a sedan chair. As they were about to leave, Lu Yuan looked at the somewhat complicated emotions of Prefect Cui and understood the father¡¯s feelings of parting with his daughter. He smiled and comforted, ¡°Lord Cui, congratulations on finding a perfect son-in-law. ¡± Cui Changqing put away a trace of loss in his heart, looked back at Lu Yuan, and helplessly said, ¡°I have found a good son-in-law, but Lu, for the wedding, you brought out the city soldiers and even set up three thousand tables of open banquets in the city. This kind of arrangement is somewhat excessive.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s grand arrangements were not announced in advance, so Cui Changqing was shocked when he heard of them. First, he was amazed at Lu Yuan¡¯s financial power. Second, he was amazed that Lu Yuan was willing to go to such lengths for Sun Siwen. However, having such a grand wedding for his daughter made him, as a father, feel proud as well. As for whether it exceeded the bounds of etiquette¡­ He glanced at Lu Yuan, knowing that Jianghu martial artists could not be too demanding in this respect. ¡°As my friend welcomes his bride, there must be boundless splendor,¡± Lu Yuan met Cui Changqing¡¯s gaze, laughed, and then got on his horse, saying, ¡°Lord Cui, I have to escort the procession and cannot chat any longer. We¡¯ll meet again another day.¡± As they returned to the Sun Residence, it was already filled with friends and guests. Those students who had learned from him in Changning County came rushing over when they heard the news of their teacher¡¯s wedding. All those who could make it were here. Even his former colleagues and gentry from the county were present, having heard the news of Sun Siwen¡¯s promotion and marriage to the Prefect¡¯s daughter, either sending congratulations or coming in person. As for the people from Shaoyang Prefecture, there was no need to mention them. Former colleagues from Wugang County and the city¡¯s gentry, of course, would not miss the wedding of the city¡¯s top official¡¯s daughter and the fifth-ranked official. With everyone gathered at the Sun Residence, there were hundreds of people in attendance. There were loud sounds and a joyous atmosphere. It was indeed lively. After the greeting and entertaining guests, it was already dark. Lu Yuan helped to ward off those who came to offer alcohol and play pranks in the bridal room and said to his slightly dizzy friend, ¡°Brother Sun, the night is short, and the bride awaits. Don¡¯t keep her waiting for too long. Go on, I¡¯ll take care of things here.¡± ¡°Thank you, Brother Lu.¡± Sun Siwen¡¯s face was flushed, but it was unclear whether it was from embarrassment or excitement. He glanced gratefully at Lu Yuan and then, as if granted amnesty, rushed lightly towards the backyard. With the host leaving, the remaining guests stayed for a while before gradually departing.. Chapter 153 - Chapter 153: Chapter 125: Decline of National Power 2 Chapter 153: Chapter 125: Decline of National Power 2 Translator: 549690339 The next morning. When the sun was three bamboo sticks high, Sun Siwen woke up. His footsteps were a little floaty, and he wobbled out of his room. Upon arriving at the dining hall, he saw Lu Yuan leisurely sipping his morning tea, who then teased him as he entered, ¡°Oh, the groom is awake. How was yesterday¡¯s experience? Was it heavenly bliss?¡± Sun Siwen thought about last night, his face changed slightly, blushing a little bit, but then he looked at his friend, and retorted, ¡°To know whether it¡¯s heavenly bliss or not, Brother Lu, you simply need to find yourself a wife.¡± ¡°Haha, I¡¯ll pass. I¡¯ve got used to living freely; I don¡¯t want someone bossing me around.¡± Lu Yuan laughed, skipped the subject, and turned to inquire, ¡°Where¡¯s the bride? It¡¯s early morning, and although she doesn¡¯t have in-laws to see, as Brother Sun¡¯s friend, I¡¯m basically her little brother-in-law. Shouldn¡¯t she come and greet me?¡± Sun Siwen hesitated a little: ¡°Wenxiu was too tired last night and is having trouble getting up. Let her meet Brother Lu later. I have to bring her some food in a while.¡± Hearing this, Lu Yuan looked at his friend¡¯s thin frame with some astonishment, then revealed an ambiguous smile, ¡°I understand, I understand. Since my sister-in-law is tired, let her rest more. It doesn¡¯t matter when she meets me, her little brother-in-law, no need to rush, no need to rush.¡± Sun Siwen could no longer hold back. His face flushed with embarrassment, he took some food, put it in the food box, and rushed out of the dining hall like he was running away. Behind him, Lu Yuan laughed heartily. After Sun Siwen¡¯s wedding, as the three-day banquet in the city drew to a close, everything began to return to normal. Besides the townspeople still talking passionately about that grand wedding when they were free, no one else paid any attention to it. After Wenxiu met Lu Yuan on the third day following their marriage, she started calling him her little brother-in-law. As for how Lu Yuan felt about this, he was both pleased and somewhat complicated. Seeing the loving and happy couple, with expressions of happiness on their faces. Truthfully speaking, it was impossible not to be envious. But he also knew that, given his nature as a longevity seeker, love was something that he could not afford to play with. ¡°The elusive nature of love arouses envy in those who cannot attain it; it brings happiness in the beginning but becomes burdensome after loss, wearing away one¡¯s spirit and will.¡± Lu Yuan sighed inwardly, then smiled on his face, ¡°True love is hard to come by, too extravagant for someone like me. Better to just indulge in the mortal dust of Little Phoenix Pavilion¡¯s ladies.¡± With his close friend¡¯s grand wedding, Lu Yuan felt overjoyed and decided to celebrate for ten days at the Little Phoenix Pavilion as a form consolation. Having been living in Fu City for several months, Lu Yuan had discovered that the ladies of Little Phoenix Pavilion were skilled in singing and dancing. Their dancing was especially captivating. Every time he saw the ladies¡¯ passionate performances and graceful dancing, he felt a great satisfaction. Then his mentor-like nature kicked in once more. In the past, he longed for the era of thigh dance and was able to bring it over here, where he personally designed the dance costumes and poses for the ladies, satisfying his heart¡¯s desires. ¡°This time, let¡¯s try An Elysium.¡± Sitting in a carriage guarded by his personal guards, Lu Yuan had already started to think about which dance he would teach his female students this time. Previously, he had taught them some thigh dances; the seductive flair was there, but it always seemed too direct and lacking in charm. This time, he would try teaching some house dances, with subtle emotions and implicit temptations, which made him excited just thinking about it. Lu Yuan stuck his head out and told the carriage driver to speed up. After staying in Little Phoenix Pavilion for ten days, Lu Yuan, leading by example, gathered his immense willpower and left the building. He said ten days, and it was only ten days. A real man never goes back on his word. After coming out, he went on a patrol of the barracks. As the Commander, of course, he couldn¡¯t forget his duties. After walking around and discovering that everything was fine and there were no problems, he left satisfied. After resting at home for a few days and gradually adjusting to his regular routine, Lu Yuan was about to resume his secluded cultivation when someone from the prefect¡¯s office came. ¡°Commander Lu, the Prefect requests your presence.¡± So, Lu Yuan went to the prefect¡¯s office. Upon his arrival and upon seeing Cui Changqing, he realized that the Prefect had a peculiar look on his face, a mix of happiness and worry. The combination of emotions was very unsettling. Now that they were relatives, both sides became closer, and he lost whatever concern he had and asked directly. ¡°Commander Lu may be unaware, but today, I received intelligence from the court that the Pingnan Army has achieved a great victory, annihilating 50,000 Jinghai soldiers. Jinghai is a small nation, and it¡¯s not even as big as one My Da Yue¡¯s prefectures. Since the 28th year of Longqing, when the country provoked border disputes and invaded our Southern Border, three years have passed. During these three years, our Pingnan Army has been fighting with the Jinghai bandits repeatedly, capturing considerable gains. This time, after annihilating their 50,000-strong army, it¡¯s an even greater victory. Now, if we add it all up, in this national war, Jinghai has lost no fewer than 150,000 soldiers over the past three years. At present, the Pingnan Army has already regained its lost territories, and is leading troops deep into Jinghai. I heard that the new Emperor¡¯s intention is to seize this opportunity to conquer Jinghai, and completely resolve the Southern Border crisis.¡± Cui Changqing¡¯s tone was somewhat excited. Since the late emperor¡¯s passing and the new Emperor¡¯s enthronement, Da Yue has had three major problems for three years. Firstly, there¡¯s the war with the Northern Ruffians from the Liang state. Ever since the young Liang Emperor ascended the throne and began the Southern Expedition, Liang and Yue Country have been engaged in constant battles. In the beginning, Yue Country was caught off guard, and the Liang troops directly seized a thousand miles of territory, but then the imperial courts¡¯ northern troops arrived, and the frontlines stabilized. Moreover, by relying on their naval forces, they were slowly able to drive the Liang troops back. But that young Liang Emperor was also very ruthless.. Chapter 154 - Chapter 154: Chapter 125: Decline of National Power_3 Chapter 154: Chapter 125: Decline of National Power_3 Translator: 549690339 In the early years of his reign, the Southern Expedition failed. He then directly ordered the relocation of the capital, moving it southward to the Luo Capital near the front line. This move directly shifted the political center southward and resolved the problem of the country¡¯s aristocratic ministers. Leveraging war, the consecutive annals of the elite army were enlisted in the country, constantly launching Southern Expeditions against Yue Country and releasing various contradictions of the relocation to the outside world. As a result, the war between the two countries grew longer and larger. Liang maintained a large army of five hundred thousand on the southern front for years. Yue Country had no choice but to follow suit. Although the number of troops in use was smaller due to defense reasons, it remained at more than three hundred thousand for years. As the Northern Border war had become an open wound for Yue Country, incessantly draining its vitality, the dynasty gradually fell into a state of weakness. However, things were not much better for Liang Country either. Liang and Yue¡¯s national power were basically equivalent. If supporting an army of three hundred thousand was somewhat difficult for Yue Country, how could Liang Country be in any better situation? In recent years, the intensity of the battles on the borderlands of both countries has gradually diminished, with an implicit trend toward rests. According to the consensus within and outside the Yue State court, the Northern Border wars may come to an end after one or two more years. However, before the end, Yue Country would still need to persevere and endure these tough times. This first major problem would have to be eradicated over time. Yue Country¡¯s second major affliction was the war with Jinghai Country. ¡°However, Jinghai Country has been defeated and is on the verge of losing its national destiny, let alone posing a threat. This problem can be considered as settled.¡± Cui Changqing said. Lu Yuan agreed. Jinghai was a small country, with a population of only a few million. In just three years, its elite troops had suffered a devastating loss of 150,000 men, leaving it severely damaged. Even though they could not destroy this country, due to this disastrous defeat, it would be impossible for them to recover their vitality for the next twenty to thirty years. They would not be a threat any longer. ¡°But according to this, two of the three major problems facing Yue Country have been resolved. Liang Country is gradually losing steam to support a large-scale war, and in one or two years, the war will come to a halt. Jinghai has already been defeated and may become a Jinghai Prefecture of Yue Country at any time.¡± Calculating this in his mind, Lu Yuan was startled, ¡°In that case, with two of the three major problems resolved, most of the trouble faced by the Yue State court has been eliminated. Without these external hindrances, wouldn¡¯t that mean the dynasty could continue to exist?¡± He still remembered his previous assessment that the dynasty would not last more than a few years whenever he saw how chaotic Da Yue was. But somehow now, it displayed some signs of rejuvenation. Was he going to be proven wrong? While he was thinking about this, Cui Changqing continued, ¡°Both Liang and Yue countries pose little threat. However, the rebellion in Xichuan Prefecture within our country has grown even more popular. Half a month ago, a report from the Prefecture of Xichuan arrived. The thirty thousand troops sent from our Dongting Prefecture to quell the rebellion were defeated by the rebels. The rebelling Qiang people had even colluded with the barbarians of the highlands, and when their forces combined, the rebel troops had caught the anti-rebellion army off guard. At present, more than half of the army has been lost, and the remaining ten thousand-plus troops have retreated to the prefecture city, besieged there with only a few thousand local forces. The exterior rebel troops have already taken control of seven prefectures, and everything west of the prefecture city has been occupied by the bandits. Only the three regions east of Dongting remain under the government¡¯s control. The rebel head Li Xiong has even proclaimed himself as the Heavenly Son, establishing Shu State with an Elite Army of two hundred thousand men, making them a severe threat in the Western Region.¡± At this point, the Prefect¡¯s face turned ashen with anger in his eyes, clearly infuriated to the extreme. As expected. As a government official, hearing about someone rebelling and occupying most of the land and even declaring himself emperor within the government-controlled territory naturally angered him. Even Lu Yuan was a bit surprised. ¡®It seems my judgment was correct. Jinghai Country has been defeated, but a Shu State has appeared as well. Moreover, the southern prefectures Yulin and Southsea have been devastated by the invasions of the Jinghai Country war. Due to the civilian uprising a few years ago, Jian¡¯an Prefecture has also become ruins. The northern Guangling Prefecture has reportedly become white land due to the war with Liang Country. Plus, you can also count Xichuan Prefecture in the west, which I estimate is also struggling after years of fighting. Considering all this, only three of Yue Country¡¯s eight prefectures, Yuzhang, Dongting, and Linhai Prefectures, are in slightly better conditions and can provide tax revenue. At present, the three armies of the imperial court receive their provisions solely from these three prefectures.¡¯ Upon further calculation, Lu Yuan realized that the beaten-down Yue Country was indeed doomed. This dynasty would not last much longer. However, he still had some doubts, as Jinghai Country was defeated and Xichuan Prefecture had become Shu State. These matters were far away from the prefectures and hundreds or even thousands of miles away from Shaoyang Prefecture. What did they have to do with them? With this confusion in mind, he asked, ¡°Lord Cui, is this the only information you have for me today? Or is there something else?¡± Cui Changqing nodded, ¡°Nowadays, the country is in decline and the rebellious Shu Thieves in Xichuan have grown rampant. I have a feeling that even the city of Xichuan cannot hold for much longer. However, after years of war and chaos, the court is out of money and provisions. Even if they intended to summon troops to suppress the rebellion now, there would be no army to call on and no money to distribute. Thus, His Majesty had no choice but to issue an edict ordering local prefectures and counties to recruit their own local militias to defend their homeland and repel enemy invasions.¡± When he mentioned this, the Prefect paused, seemingly aware of the consequences that would inevitably follow once the edict was issued. Given the current national situation, however, he was powerless to do anything and had no choice but to continue, ¡°So, I thought, shouldn¡¯t we take this opportunity to recruit 600 men and fill up the vacancy in our prefecture¡¯s security force? Don¡¯t worry about the money and provisions; I will arrange for that. Over the past year or so, I have implemented local reforms to rectify local revenue accumulations, which are now sufficient to support the military provisions.¡± When someone offered Lu Yuan Army Leader funding to recruit soldiers, he naturally had no objection, and said, ¡°As long as the money keeps up, within a month, I can recruit a thousand men. After half a year of training, they can become battle-ready troops.¡± He spoke with confidence. Lu Yuan had some experience with training soldiers. All he needed to do was recruit good soldiers, ensure military provisions, and then lead the troops to suppress bandits a few times to turn them into elite troops. That was precisely how he had trained the current 400 -men unit. All he needed to do now was replicate the process.. Chapter 155 - Chapter 155: Chapter 126: Primordial Emperor Chapter 155: Chapter 126: Primordial Emperor Translator: 549690339 ¡°All right, I¡¯ll leave this matter to you.¡± Prefect Cui nodded, quite satisfied in his heart. As for Lu Yuan¡¯s ability to lead troops, he had considerable trust in him. After all, it was this man who had led the troops to suppress the bandits in Wugang and eliminate the Miao rebellion. These were genuine achievements, which could not be faked. The two then discussed other matters, mainly about how much money to provide, how many installments, and which soldiers to recruit. Lu Yuan naturally demanded more money and early payment. Prefect Cui promised to handle it as soon as possible. As for the source of soldiers, it was still the usual way, recruiting hunters from the mountains. After all, what Shaoyang Prefecture¡¯s mountainous region was least lacking in were these valiant Mountain People. It was not until almost noon that all these issues were finally settled. Cui Changqing invited Lu Yuan to stay for lunch and then let him leave. Back in his residence, Lu Yuan called for Liang Hu, who arrived quickly. ¡°Sir, you were looking for me?¡± Liang Hu saluted. ¡°The Prefect has asked me to recruit six hundred more soldiers, and I plan to leave this task to you,¡± Lu Yuan instructed, looking at Liang Hu. ¡°Recruit Mountain People who are young and good at archery.¡± ¡°Yes, sir, rest assured. There is plenty of chaos outside and ordinary people are having a hard time. Many of them want to join the army for a better life. In less than ten days, I will recruit enough people for you,¡± Liang Hu replied in a loud, clear voice. This old official, since becoming a catch officer, has become more and more vigorous. Working hard in the army, he does not show any signs of aging, but rather appears rosy and healthy. Last year, he even married a young concubine at the age of forty-seven and wasn¡¯t afraid of being drained dry by that young woman. Not long ago, it was said that the young concubine had given birth to a fat son for him, and the old man was delighted and even sent candies to Lu Yuan to celebrate. ¡°Well, go ahead. I trust you,¡± Lu Yuan nodded and waved for him to leave. Having arranged the recruitment, Lu Yuan continued to stay at home and cultivate in seclusion for the next few days. Today¡¯s conversation with Cui Changqing served as a wake-up call for him. As the situation in Da Yue deteriorates, no one knows when it will collapse. When that happens, the world will be leaderless, and there will be no peace. Even Lu Yuan may not be able to avoid the chaos just by hiding. After all, even if he cultivates now, it requires a lot of assistance from herbs. And to buy the herbs, he will inevitably have to deal with the outside world. The chaos will affect his cultivation, too. Unless he could wholeheartedly hide in the mountain for decades, wait for the turmoil to pass and then roam the world freely when peace returns. However, such an option is the least desirable for Lu Yuan. He would never choose it unless he had no other choice. ¡°Although the world is in chaos, it also represents opportunities. If I can¡¯t avoid competing with others, can those great forces and Jianghu factions avoid it?¡± Thinking of the mental technique he was gradually mastering, a cold light flashed in Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes. He needed to kill in times of chaos. The collapse of order in the world might not be a bad thing for him after all. ¡°After all, strength is supreme in troubled times. If one has enough strength, no one will care about how many people they kill.¡± The current stability of Da Yue provides protection for Lu Yuan, but it also restrains him to some extent. With the imperial court putting pressure on him, even if Lu Yuan wanted to kill people in those major factions and seize their achievements, he would have to worry about being hunted down by the Jianghu and the court. But without the court, the thousand soldiers under Lu Yuan¡¯s command will answer to no one but him. He could use them as he pleases. ¡°I need to pay more attention to military training this time,¡± Lu Yuan thought. Originally, he planned to train a hundred personal guards, but now it seems that this number can be increased to two or even four hundred. Doing so would increase his annual expenses by several thousand silver tales. But considering the benefits of training these personal guards, the additional costs were well worth it. ¡°It¡¯s settled, then.¡± With the decision made, Lu Yuan¡¯s mood improved. Should Da Yue fall, he must ensure he survives. This time, he would seize the opportunity when the court is gone to enjoy himself and, if possible, eat to his fill. A few days later, Liang Hu, who was in charge of recruiting, returned to Fu City with six hundred young men who had just been recruited from the mountains. Lu Yuan personally went to the barracks to receive them. After confirming that these new soldiers were between fifteen and twenty years old and highly receptive, he couldn¡¯t help but nod his head in satisfaction. Then, turning to Liang Hu, he said, ¡°You did a good job with this. Go to the silver room and collect fifty silver tales as a reward.¡± As a catch officer, Liang Hu earns twenty-five silver tales a month, and now he received two months¡¯ salary at once. He was immediately overjoyed and thanked Lu Yuan repeatedly, ¡°Thank you, sir, for the reward.¡± Then, he went to collect the silver. Now that Liang Hu had a legitimate wife, a concubine, three children, and five servants at home, his monthly expenses were not small. Even with a monthly salary of twenty-five silver tales, it was not easy for him to live a decent life. Now that he could receive fifty silver tales, it would be enough for him and his family to live comfortably for a long time.. Chapter 156 - Chapter 156: Chapter 126: Primordial Emperor 2 Chapter 156: Chapter 126: Primordial Emperor 2 Translator: 549690339 After receiving the new recruits, Lu Yuan did not return home but stayed in the barracks, personally supervising the training of the new soldiers. The truth is, he didn¡¯t know much about training soldiers. In the barracks, different formations and signals were managed by dedicated personnel. Lu Yuan¡¯s main purpose in sticking around was to let the new soldiers know who their leader was, who paid them, and whose commands they should follow in the future. In short, it was to get these big-headed_soldiers to recognize their master and know their place. However, even though he didn¡¯t interject in the training, while supervising, Lu Yuan selected 250 men from both new and veteran soldiers. Together with the fifty personal guards he had previously recruited, he set up a barrack of three hundred men. After passing down the martial techniques to these 250 personal guards, Lu Yuan spent time instructing them for two days. He then assigned each of the older personal guards to teach five newcomers. After a month of such training, these selected personal guards had made substantial improvements. Some, with exceptional talent, even developed internal strength. This filled Lu Yuan with great delight. He even contemplated selecting some promising individuals from them and make them his registered disciples. After all, having only one true disciple and five registered disciples was somewhat embarrassing for a top fist in Jianghu. In spite of this thought, he never put it into action. Instead, he decided to wait and see. Once these individuals perform exceptionally and stand out among the personal guards, he would make them his registered disciples. In this way, not only could he gain disciples, but also use their achievements to motivate other soldiers, stimulating them to train harder and more diligently. It¡¯s a win-win situation. As Lu Yuan was training his soldiers intensively, news arrived in October from Xichuan Prefecture. After a two-month siege by the Shu Army, Xichuan city wall was breached. The Emperor of Xi Shu, Li Xiong, established his capital in Xichuan city. He not only held another grand oath-taking ceremony to the heavens but also declared his sovereignty over Xichuan Prefecture. Then, the Xi Shu army of one hundred thousand soldiers advanced eastward, successively occupying the remaining two prefectures under the imperial control in Xichuan. It was only when the imperial court dispa tched some reinforcements urgently from Dongting Prefecture,and took advantage of the local terrain in Wushan Prefecture, they barely managed to stop Xi Shu¡¯s huge army, preserving the last prefecture in Xichuan Prefecture. But even so, nine out of ten prefectures in Xichuan had been occupied by the Shu State, and half of Xichuan Prefecture had fallen. Facing West Shu that has already established itself and growing in power, the imperial court would find it quite difficult to regain Xichuan Prefecture from this rebel. However, as a martial artist from Jianghu, although Lu Yuan was shocked by the news of the fall of Xichuan city and the loss of Xichuan Prefecture, he was more concerned about the details of the city¡¯s breach. ¡°The imperial court initially had twenty thousand elite soldiers stationed in Xichuan Prefecture. Later, they urgently conscripted the local men, gathered fifty thousand defenders, and had ample food and money that could last more than a year, enough to wait for the imperial reinforcements next year. Yet, the result was that the defenders only held out for two months before the city was taken. This is very suspicious.¡± Although it¡¯s not uncommon for defenders¡¯ morale to plummet and the city being easily conquered. But Lu Yuan always felt that the imperial soldiers in Xichuan Prefecture shouldn¡¯t be so vulnerable. There must be some unknown problems in it. Indeed, just as he was feeling something was off, Cui Changqing came looking for him. ¡°The impostor emperor of Shu Thieves, Li Xiong, broke through to Innate Realm three months ago and personally went onto the battlefield, breaching Xichuan Prefecture.¡± The first sentence from Prefect Cui shook Lu Yuan to his core. Li Xiong had broken through to the Innate Realm? Hearing this news, Lu Yuan was taken aback. No wonder, no wonder. Innate experts possess profound martial arts skills, and in martial arts, they can be considered as grandmasters. They can single-handedly defeat an army and come and go freely even when facing an army of ten thousand. If an Innate expert took action to sneak into the city, then it would not be surprising that Xichuan city was breached. After all, the Xichuan army was just a remote border region of Da Yue. Although it was wealthy, due to the isolated terrain, the area never became renowned for its martial arts, hence no innate grandmaster had ever been born there. ¡®Now that Li Xiong has broken through to the Innate Realm, should we say that this is a case of ¡°the times making the hero,¡± or is it ¡°the hero making the times?¡±¡® Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but envy him a little in his heart. Others have already become Innate, becoming emperors. But he had traversed for more than a decade and is still only a senior first-rate fighter, without even having the martial techniques to advance further, not to mention the Innate Realm. Li Xiong¡¯s path even illuminated a direction for him. ¡®Maybe I can Chapter 157 - Chapter 157: Chapter 126 Inborn Emperor_3 Chapter 157: Chapter 126 Inborn Emperor_3 Translator: 549690339 ¡®No, rebelling and proclaiming myself emperor would be too eye-catching. That would be like going from the back to the front, drawing attention from everyone in the world. This doesn¡¯t align with my sneaky development strategy.¡¯ Lu Yuan used great determination to suppress this somewhat crazy thought. One who sticks his head out gets shot, Li Xiong has become emperor and even broken through the innate realm. But his actions will undoubtedly trigger Da Yue¡¯s court¡¯s furious retaliation. Although many places in the world of Da Yue have been beaten up. Even relying on the remaining power, annihilating a Xi Shu rebel is not difficult at all. As for the Inborn realm? Not to mention anything else, there is an Inborn Grandmaster lurking in Dongting Prefecture, right? It¡¯s worth noting that the Inborn official of the prefecture is also one of the reasons Lu Yuan doesn¡¯t dare to rebel. Because it¡¯s too close. If he dares to rebel, the official might just come over the next day and take his head off amidst thousands of troops. Don¡¯t doubt the power of an Inborn Grandmaster who could or could not achieve this point. Too many unlucky people have died because of this in the past, and Lu Yuan doesn¡¯t want to be the next example to warn others. As various thoughts were racing through his mind, Cui Changqing on the side continued, ¡°With the fall of the Xichuan Prefecture, we Dongting Prefecture now face the Shu Thieves directly. So, the Prefect ordered that all the local militias should be organized and trained immediately to defend the territory. So I decided, in addition to the originally recruited 1,000 prefecture soldiers, to recruit G.OOO more village braves in Fli C.ity. and each of the other counties will also recruit 1,000. Including the prefecture soldiers, a total of 15,000 people can be gathered. Apart from the prefecture soldiers, these village braves should work as civilians during farming and as soldiers during leisure time, never ceasing their training and guarding their homes. You are the commander here, the chief of the military officials, so you should be responsible for this matter.¡± It seems that the establishment of Xi Shu has indeed put a lot of pressure and shock on this Prefect. At this time, he has even changed his conservative style of the past and is aggressively recruiting so many soldiers. Even though they are only peasant soldiers, for a small prefecture with a population of only over 200,000, the recruitment of 15,000 people at once is a huge burden. As for this, Lu Yuan naturally has no objections and gladly agrees, ¡°No problem, I will take care of this.¡± As the commander, the more soldiers he has in the prefecture, the stronger his strength and the greater his power. As for the highest military and political officer of the prefecture being Cui Changqing, who has nominal control over all the soldiers and horses while he is only a subordinate? It¡¯s not a problem. A mere civil official, when the time comes to issue orders, whether the army will execute or not still depends on his own approval as the commander, right? Of course, if he really disobeys the order, it would be almost like rebelling. Because of Sun Siwen¡¯s relationship, the relationship between Lu Yuan and Cui Changqing is harmonious, and he will not do so unless it is necessary. However, after accepting the order, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but ask, ¡°Lord Cui, apart from our prefecture, do all the other prefectures within the jurisdiction also have to recruit village braves?¡± Cui Changqing nodded, ¡°That¡¯s right. The prefect decided to recruit a total of 200,000 troops in the ten prefectures to resist the invasion of Shu Thieves and also to eliminate the rebellion in the future.¡± 200,000 troops¡­ Hearing this number, Lu Yuan fell silent and became even more determined to be a good and loyal official to the court. Just in Dongting prefecture alone, there are 200,000 troops. Facing such a scale, even if he fully controls the 15,000 troops of Shaoyang Prefecture, it would still not be enough to make much of a difference. Not to mention, more imperial troops would be dispatched later, making it even more terrifying. Facing the already infuriated court¡­ He really couldn¡¯t afford to provoke it. Just by comparing the strength of the two sides, Lu Yuan had already given up. How wonderful would it be if the world were peaceful? Why think of rebelling all the time? As a good official who cares about the well-being of the people, he felt it necessary to contribute to the stability of the locality. While Lu Yuan was determined to be a good official and began to actively train soldiers, his good apprentice had also made a decision that would impact his life. Dongting Prefecture, Tianmen Prefecture. The surging great river, like a galloping dragon, flows eastward without stopping. A tower ship was drifting on the great river, looming in the mist. Zhou Qing sat on the deck at the bow of the ship, took out a rough cloth, and wiped the sword in his hand. After wiping it twice, he threw away the blood-stained cloth and sheathed the sword. Suddenly a gust of wind blew, carrying with it the strong smell of blood. On the distant deck, scattered corpses laid on the ground, and the large amount of blood had dyed the deck red. However, Zhou Qing remained unfazed, his expression calm. He just turned his head and asked the person sitting next to him, ¡°Brother Guo, are you sure you want to go back to Xichuan?¡± The man next to him was named Guo Yunshan, a young man in his twenties dressed in blue, with a handsome appearance. However, his expression was a bit bitter and gloomy at the moment, making his temperament greatly diminished. Upon hearing the inquiry, he nodded and said, ¡°Yes, I want to go back.¡± Zhou Qing frowned and said, ¡°Now that Xichuan has been captured by the Shu Thieves, and their Emperor Li Xiong is the sworn enemy who destroyed your entire family. Going back to Xichuan now and entering his territory is like entering a dragon¡¯s den and a tiger¡¯s lair. If you are discovered, you will face certain death.¡± His newly-acquainted friend these past days was from a famous martial arts family in Xichuan Prefecture, a direct descendant of the Yuzhong Guo Family. With such a background, Guo Yunshan was supposed to be a prodigy of the Jianghu world. However, all of that changed with the Qiang people¡¯s rebellion three years ago. As Lu Yuan had guessed. Li Xiong¡¯s ability to break through the innate realm in such a short period was achieved by plundering the resources of various martial arts families and sects and accumulating them. The Yuzhong Guo Family, being a martial arts family, had powerful inheritance techniques, but more importantly, their family had controlled the Divine Blood Variant called Qingxue Spirit Snake for generations. With this spirit snake, the Guo Family could produce geniuses in generation after generation, ensuring that the family would never lack top-notch experts and maintain their wealth for thousands of years. But this very spirit snake became the fuse for the downfall of the Guo Family when the order was broken and rebels attacked. Because the Emperor of the Shu Thieves, Li Xiong, came to their door asking for it.. Chapter 158 - Chapter 158: Chapter 127 Family Treasure Chapter 158: Chapter 127 Family Treasure Translator: 549690339 Having a treasure at home and someone coming to take it away, no one would agree to it. Moreover, the Clear-Blood Spirit Snake is the root of the Guo Family¡¯s generations of wealth, ensuring the family produces top martial artists in each generation. Without it, the Guo Family would instantly fall from a first-class martial arts family to an ordinary martial arts family. This lifeblood would not be handed over even more so. But who is Li Xiong? He¡¯s a heroic figure who dares to rebel, and if you say you won¡¯t hand it over, will he just give up? So on the same day the Guo Family refused, Li Xiong led tens of thousands of troops to besiege this martial arts family. In the end, hundreds of people from the Guo Family, including the head of the family, who was a first-class martial artist, were all killed in the chaos. All the wealth of the Guo Family, including the Qingxue Spirit Snake, the family¡¯s martial arts techniques, farmland, and stored money, were plundered. In the end, only Guo Yunshan and his siblings, who were traveling outside, narrowly escaped. But even after the narrow escape, Li Xiong didn¡¯t let them go. Just like earlier, the assassins sent by the Shu Thieves had tracked down Guo Yunshan¡¯s whereabouts and planned an assassination attempt. If Zhou Qing hadn¡¯t been traveling with Guo Yunshan and the two of them hadn¡¯t worked together to deal with these assassins, this young master from the Guo Family would have been killed. ¡°Even if I don¡¯t go back, that thief Li Xiong won¡¯t let me go.¡± Guo Yunshan spoke of Li Xiong with red eyes and gritted teeth, ¡°Today, he can send people to assassinate me, but if it doesn¡¯t work, he will send more people tomorrow. Can I hide for a day and not hide for a lifetime?¡± Having a similar family tragedy, Zhou Qing empathized with Guo Yunshan¡¯s situation, but still advised, ¡°Li Thief¡¯s actions are going against the orders, and he dares to usurp the title of emperor, the court will not let him go. How can a mere province resist the world? There won¡¯t be two years left, and the court will send troops to attack him, and by the time the celestial soldiers arrive, Li Thief will be destroyed.¡± Because his own master and his good friend were officials of the court, Zhou Qing, unlike ordinary martial artists in Jianghu, had some goodwill towards the Da Yue court. Therefore, unlike those who enjoyed the affairs of the Jianghu, Zhou Qing tended to wait for the court¡¯s army to crusade against Li Xiong. This attitude surprised Guo Yunshan, but he didn¡¯t waver and resolutely said, ¡°Li Xiong killed my entire clan, and took away my centuries-old foundation, this hatred can¡¯t coexist under the heavens. And even if the court wants to crusade against him, it will take at least two or three years to destroy him. I can¡¯t wait that long.¡± Guo Yunshan, with bloodshot eyes and a ferocious expression, said, ¡°Li Thief is brutal, massacring my fellow martial artists in Xichuan. It¡¯s not just my Guo Family that has been destroyed, and there are many others like me scattered around. I plan to return to Xichuan, contact the patriotic martial artists, and call on everyone to unite and resist Li Thief. With the power of many heroes assembled, we can surely eliminate this villain.¡± Zhou Qing remained silent. Hatred filled the heart of Guo Yunshan, leaving no room for anything else. Seeing this, Zhou Qing couldn¡¯t help but wonder if, without meeting his master, he would have ended up like Guo Yunshan, blinded by hatred and lost on his path. ¡®It¡¯s been more than two years since I left my master, I wonder how he¡¯s doing now?¡¯ Zhou Qing thought of his master and felt a sudden longing. Initially, he chose to leave his master and venture into Jianghu to seek a faster breakthrough in his realm. But over the past two years, although he experienced many things and witnessed the danger and magnificence of Jianghu, the breakthrough he sought never materialized. Even now, he had heard no news of Divine Blood Variants, let alone rumors of ordinary rare spiritual medicines. ¡®However, my cultivation has progressed a bit over the past two years, as I¡¯ve opened up a third meridian and become a third-rate practitioner.¡¯ Zhou Qing laughed at himself. His grand ambitions had led to this outcome, and he couldn¡¯t help but wonder what kind of situation he would be in when he returned to see his master. ¡®No, maybe I wouldn¡¯t even dare to go back. Without achieving anything, how could I have the face to see my master?¡¯ Zhou Qing felt lost and didn¡¯t know which path to take. But at that moment, Guo Yunshan looked at him and said earnestly, ¡°Brother Zhou, I know you¡¯ve been looking for the Divine Blood Variant that can increase your cultivation. In fact, my Guo Family has such an item.¡± Guo Yunshan quickly explained for fear that Zhou Qing would misunderstand, ¡°I¡¯m not talking about the Qingxue Spirit Snake that was taken by Li Xiong. In reality, as a millennial aristocratic family, how could my Guo Family have only one residence in the family territory? Jianghu is unpredictable, and feuds never end. Even us millennial aristocratic families can¡¯t guarantee safety for all generations. So our ancestors had the foresight to build many other safe havens in various places in Xichuan as a backup for descendants to escape and hide. Within these safe havens are some elixirs refined from the divine blood of the Clear-Blood Spirit Snake that were stored in advance. If Brother Zhou is willing to help me return to Xichuan, I can make a decision and share some of these elixirs with you to help you achieve a breakthrough. I can¡¯t promise more than that, but it shouldn¡¯t be a problem to ensure that Brother Zhou reaches the second-rate level. So, Brother Zhou, are you willing to join me in taking this chance for wealth?¡± Chapter 159 - Chapter 159: Chapter 127 Family Treasure_2 Chapter 159: Chapter 127 Family Treasure_2 Translator: 549690339 Guo Yunshan lifted his head, staring intently at Zhou Qing, waiting for the latter¡¯s reply. In fact, if it were possible, he would rather not share the elixir with others. But the problem is¡­ At present, Guo Yunshan is only at the beginner level of third-rate, having only cultivated two meridians. With such strength, he can barely move around in Jianghu. Previously, he spoke of high aspirations and deep hatred, but those were just to satisfy his mouth. Guo Yunshan knew clearly that with his own strength, returning to Xichuan would mean going to his death. But as the family feud was not avenged yet and the clan awaited his restoration, how could he die so easily? Thus, after careful consideration, at this moment, he had no choice but to find a trustworthy person with decent strength to escort him back to Xichuan. At this moment, Zhou Qing was the only one who met this requirement. First, he seemed to be devoted to the court and had no affection for the rebel Li Xiong. Secondly, after several months of acquaintance, Zhou Qing¡¯s character and temperament had gained Guo Yunshan¡¯s trust. Lastly, both of them were at the third-rate cultivation level. One was slightly stronger, the other slightly weaker, but essentially, there was not much difference. With this level of strength¡­ Guo Yunshan believed that after receiving the family treasure, he could quickly catch up and close the gap. By that time, he wouldn¡¯t have to worry about Zhou Qing¡¯s intentions anymore. Moreover, Divine Blood Elixirs were the foundation of many first-rate forces and were never spread outside. Considering Zhou¡¯s martial arts foundation, it¡¯s only at the second-rate level. With such a background, he probably only heard about the Divine Blood Variant¡¯s information and has never actually come into contact with it. By the time it¡¯s needed, Guo could give some weakened elixir to Zhou to create a pretext. Anyway, even a weakened Divine Blood Elixir would still be a divine medicine to ordinary Jianghu people, and there is no need to worry about arousing suspicion. In summary, under various guarantees, Guo Yunshan naturally hoped that Zhou Qing would accompany him back to Xichuan. ¡°Divine Blood Elixir?¡± Upon hearing Guo Yunshan¡¯s invitation, Zhou Qing¡¯s eyes instantly became focused, the previous melancholy disappearing as his heart heated up. Unlike Guo Yunshan¡¯s wild guesses, Zhou had actually consumed Divine Blood Spirit Medicine. It was a divine pill that could break through a meridian with just one dose. If the Guo family treasure really contained such divine pills and was willing to give him a few¡­ No, even three pills would be enough. Breaking through to the second-rate realm would be no problem for him. If he could use divine pills to break through meridians, even just three, it would save him at least twelve years of time. This would undoubtedly be a great help for Zhou Qing¡¯s revenge plan. With this in mind, he stared at Guo Yunshan and said seriously, ¡°You really can give me Divine Blood Elixir? You don¡¯t need to deceive me, I¡¯ve had Divine Blood Elixir before and know that it¡¯s a divine medicine that can help people break through a meridian in one dose. So let me ask you again, were there any falsehoods in what you just said?¡± Guo Yunshan felt a bit nervous under Zhou Qing¡¯s intense gaze, especially after hearing his words, and he suddenly realized he had underestimated his companion. However, with deep hatred right in front of him, he didn¡¯t have time to ponder too much. Though Guo Yunshan did not know how many Divine Blood Elixirs were stored in the family¡¯s treasury, he knew they would be enough to help breakthrough to the first-rate realm. ¡®At worst, I¡¯ll just give some elixirs to Zhou. Otherwise, I won¡¯t be able to return to Xichuan, and the elixirs in the family treasury would only decay.¡¯ It¡¯s better to use them. Even if the two of them end up dividing the elixirs, and neither can reach the first-rate level, having a second-rate strength is always better than the current third-rate.¡¯ Having thought this through, Guo Yunshan no longer hesitated, held up three fingers, and swore to the heavens: ¡°I swear on the name of my Guo family ancestors that if Zhou assists me in returning to Xichuan and opening the treasure¡­ Then I shall give him Divine Blood Elixir to help him break through to the second-rate. If I break this oath, may I be struck by lightning and die horribly. May the Zhou family¡¯s lineage be extinguished, and the incense be completely cut off.¡± This was indeed a poisonous oath. With such a statement, even people who don¡¯t believe in ghosts and spirits would hesitate when considering whether or not to break it. Therefore, after hearing it, Zhou Qing felt reassured and nodded, saying, ¡°Alright. Since you¡¯ve said so, I¡¯ll help you return to Xichuan this time.¡± However, despite saying this, he didnt completely trust Guo Yunshan. Having wandered the Jianghu for two years, Zhou Qing had seen many insidious people and even experienced betrayal firsthand. If not due for his current strength and some luck, he might not have made it to today. So he decided in his heart¡­ After escorting Guo Yunshan back to Xichuan, he must leave some precautions in place. For example, leave a letter detailing the reasons, find a person, and set a time. If he does not return by the agreed time, the letter should be sent directly to his Master. ¡®With my Master¡¯s first-rate strength, even if Guo Yunshan gets the family treasure and consumes the elixirs, increasing his power, he still won¡¯t stand a chance against my Master.¡¯ Zhou Qing had faith in the reliability of his Master. He was confident that a small fry like Guo Yunshan, even if he broke through to the first-rate, would never be able to compete with the cunning old fox like his Master. ¡®Besides, if it really comes down to that, the Divine Blood Elixir and Zhou family treasure would be the last gifts I give to my Master.¡¯ Zhou Qing knew that by the time his Master needed to intervene, it would mean he had already met with misfortune.. Chapter 160 - Chapter 160: Chapter 127 Family Treasure—3 Chapter 160: Chapter 127 Family Treasure¡ª3 Translator: 549690339 Master¡¯s great kindness, he failed to repay it fully. He could only offer these things as a token of his filial piety. The morning mist gradually dispersed, and golden sunshine scattered. In the blink of an eye, two hours had passed. The two people, each with their own thoughts, rested on the ship for a while. When they felt their inner strength and physical strength recovered, they immediately set off towards Xichuan County. The journey ahead was uncertain, but they both had high hopes. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t know that his good disciple was preparing to do something big, with a do-or-die determination and even making preparations for a grand gift to him. At this moment, he was bothered by the busy training of soldiers. With a stroke of his pen, Prefect Cui Changqing recruited 14,000 of the Village Braves in the prefecture. However, such a large-scale recruitment basically gathered all the young men of the right age, and the quality of the soldiers that were recruited can be imagined. For these illiterate farmers, who might have been farming just a moment ago, it would not be easy to teach them the concepts of front and back, left and right, and how to use spears and short knives. Why did Lu Yuan previously recruit Mountain Folk Hunters? It¡¯s because they were used to using knives and arrows on a regular basis, and after recruitment, they didn¡¯t require much training. With a little disciplining, they would be able to form a formidable fighting force. However, the farmers were used to farming tools. While they could use hoes to dig soil, using a long spear to stab someone was difficult for them. Even if they managed to do the action correctly, overcoming the psychological barrier would be quite challenging. Lu Yuan tried training a group of militia for a few days, but then gave up. It¡¯s not that these people were stupid. It¡¯s just that being resourceful and having the courage and discipline are totally different. The Mountain Folk Hunters, who lived among wild beasts, naturally had the courage to fight life or death with people. They were also used to cooperating during their hunts, so they understood the importance of discipline. Therefore, training these hunters in military formations and martial arts went smoothly as they caught on quickly. But for ordinary farmers, all they needed to know was how to farm. Courage and discipline are different matters entirely. Why do you need to learn these things? So that the Master can collect taxes more easily? At one point, Lu Yuan even guided a farmer through using a spear to stab a straw man. However, even with such guidance, the farmer still trembled as he held the spear, and hesitated when confronted with the inanimate straw man, fearing what he was doing. As if he was not just piercing a straw man but breaking the psychological limitation of taking a life. Not everyone has the courage to kill or even perform an act of killing another person. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t Imow what to say about this situation. Perhaps the only way to change their mindset would be to find someone to kill in front of them, allowing them to break through the psychological barriers, and then seeing if there¡¯s a change. But whether the outcome would be a good soldier or a demon is difficult to tell. After all, lunatics driven insane by killing are not a rarity in the world. With their physical and mental foundations too weak, they were simply not suitable for combat roles. In the future, if he wanted to recruit soldiers, he needed to focus on Mountain Folk Hunters. They were more efficient to work with. With a thousand well- trained mountain folk hunters, he had the confidence to confront a mixed army of ten thousand farmers. This was the gap in power. Worn out from the failed training of soldiers, Lu Yuan simply stopped trying. He handed over the task of training soldiers to his subordinates. After all, those people were the experts and were keen to experience the feeling of commanding thousands of troops, so they had no qualms stepping up. As for Lu Yuan, he just needed to manage his one thousand elite soldiers. As long as these elite soldiers were with him, he didn¡¯t have to worry about the Village Braves causing trouble. However, this failed attempt at training made Lu Yuan less apprehensive about the huge armies of the imperial government and other countries. If the tens of thousands-strong army were just farmers like these, Lu Yuan would dare to take them on even with just a force of ten thousand men. It¡¯s not that he was arrogant, but the simple fact that these farmer soldiers were just too weak. ¡°I heard that Emperor Li Xiong of Xi Shu has an army of a hundred thousand strong, with an air of invincibility. But I guess out of those hundred thousand, if there were ten thousand as elite as my soldiers, it would already be quite impressive. By this estimation, the central government would only need two Inborn Grandmasters to completely conquer Xichuan.¡± After suspending military training, Lu Yuan continued to practice martial arts in seclusion at home and sometimes couldn¡¯t help thinking this way. According to the conversion rate of one Inborn Grandmaster equaling the power of ten -thousand elite soldiers. Xi Shu only had one Inborn Grandmaster, Li Xiong, and then another ten thousand elite soldiers. Indeed, they could be destroyed by just two Inborn Grandmasters. Of course. Such thoughts were merely wishful thinking. Enacting such a plan would not be as simple as it seemed. Not to mention that the Inborn Grandmasters of the imperial court were needed to suppress various regions and could not be mobilized so easily. Even Xichuan¡¯s stronghold would not be easily toppled by just two Inborn Grandmasters if a battle were to take place. If things were indeed so simple, the imperial court would have long taken the risk, gathered the Inborn Grandmasters, and executed a beheading strategy. ¡°In the end, this is still a world of martial arts. The power of martial arts has its limits, and one person can¡¯t truly suppress the world.¡± Lu Yuan sighed helplessly. Taking the jade piece from his chest, he had this magical relic for more than a decade now. But even now, the only use it had was to temper his inner strength. Although this in itself had already helped him a great deal, the feeling of being unable to fully utilize the jade piece remained frustrating.. Chapter 161 - Chapter 161: Chapter 128: The Saintly Body Chapter 161: Chapter 128: The Saintly Body Translator: 549690339 ¡°Spiritual power, Divine Sense, are these two immortal techniques really attainable through martial arts practice?¡± Thinking about his speculations on how to activate the jade pieces, Lu Yuan felt a little lost for a moment. He had already trained to the peak state, but for things like Divine Sense and spiritual power, he still had no clue. Could it be that only when they reached the Innate Realm could their spiritual power and Divine Sense be born? Or even Inborn Grandmasters wouldn¡¯t work. It wasn¡¯t until they reached the Grandmaster Realm above the Innate Realm that Divine Sense could be born, or similar powers of the divine soul could appear. But how long would it take to wait for that day? Lu Yuan calculated his current cultivation progress¡­ Fifty years? A hundred years? Although he had already trained to the mid-term of peak Inner Strength, he was only six meridians away from the next level, the Innate Realm. But for Lu Yuan, breaking through the meridians was the simplest predicament, with the bigger problem being how to obtain the next Mental Technique. However, higher Mental Techniques were undoubtedly in the hands of stronger people. Trying to snatch Mental Techniques from people stronger than him would prove extremely difficult and even suicidal. Thus, how to seize the Mental Technique became an obstacle for Lu Yuan to become stronger. ¡°The strongest person in Dongting Prefecture is undoubtedly the Inborn Grandmaster of the dynasty. He must have the Inborn Technique in his hands, but trying to acquire it from him would be wishful thinking. Besides this person, the government has three peak experts in Dongting Prefecture. However, these three people are of average reputation in Jianghu and not outstanding among the peak experts, so their learned techniques should not be strong either. There are five local Jianghu forces in Dongting Prefecture with peak inheritances. However, among these five families, four are of average strength, not even as strong as the Iron Sword Sect of Yuzhang Prefecture, and their heritage would not be much use to me. What¡¯s left is the Poison Sect. The Poison Sect has a long-standing inheritance. It¡¯s rumored that there are secret techniques within the sect that directly point to the Innate Realm, although no one has ever been able to confirm this. But even without secret techniques, it is certain that one can cultivate top peak martial arts within the sect. However, this Poison Sect¡­¡± Lu Yuan had had numerous interactions and grievances with the Poison Sect. However, whenever he thought of the four peak experts of the Poison Sect, all of his thoughts and ideas evaporated. Whether it was that Inborn Grandmaster or the Poison Sect, both were untouchable existences for Lu Yuan. As for other peak forces in neighboring prefectures, they too had top-notch legacy techniques. However, those forces were either Innate Great Sects or like the Poison Sect. Getting their legacy techniques would be extremely difficult in terms of risk. ¡°Could it be that the only way left is to create my own technique?¡± Lu Yuan thought of this possibility. Upon careful consideration, creating his own technique seemed to be the safest and most fitting path for him. Even if it took him hundreds of years to develop a top peak technique, a time-consuming process. Ordinary people couldn¡¯t afford that. But for Lu Yuan, there was no problem. Time, for an immortal, is the cheapest thing. ¡°Let¡¯s wait a bit.¡± Although his heart was already swaying, Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t fully made up his mind: ¡°I can prepare to create my own technique, but if possible, it is still best to obtain existing techniques. Now that the troubled times have begun, various opportunities abound. If Li Xiong can rob himself into being an Inborn Grandmaster, why can¡¯t I? In any case, there¡¯s no hurry, so let¡¯s just wait and see if there are any opportunities.¡± At this moment, Lu Yuan decided to make use of his trump card, patience. As his lifespan is unlimited, even if he wasted a few decades waiting for the opportunity, it would not matter to him. There is not much difference between starting to create techniques now and decades later. While Lu Yuan sauntered, time continued to pass outside. Now it is the cold winter, with heavy snowfall and no busy farming period. As a result, local militias from various regions are starting major exercises under the summons of the government. Every village, town, and city has large groups of adult men gathered, learning basic military combat techniques under the shouts of the officials. Though he had given up on the militias, Lu Yuan would occasionally patrol and check on them when he was tired from practicing. But every time he came back, he couldn¡¯t help shaking his head. Those village braves had too weak of foundations. Even with arduous training, their ultimate achievements would be limited, let alone this intermittent training. After losing hope in the village braves, Lu Yuan stopped worrying about these matters altogether. He had higher-ups to deal with any crisis that came their way. If foreign enemies truly invaded, the regular army of the dynasty would naturally be there to stop them. If they couldn¡¯t resist, there was nothing to say. He would naturally run away with Brother Sun. The rise and fall of the Yue Dynasty didn¡¯t matter to Lu Yuan, as he never thought about dying with a mortal dynasty. As for whether Brother Sun was willing? As a peak expert, Lu Yuan believed that the opinions of weak scholars were unimportant. From then on, Lu Yuan focused on training and having get-togethers with Sun Siwen whenever he was tired from practice.. Chapter 162 - Chapter 162: Chapter 128 Holy Body_2 Chapter 162: Chapter 128 Holy Body_2 Translator: 549690339 But after a few visits, he didn¡¯t want to go there anymore. Every time he saw that guy and his new lovely wife cooing over each other, their faces full of happiness, it was simply too nauseating. Deeply affected, Lu Yuan could only go to the Little Phoenix Pavilion in the city to continue teaching himself, consoling his wounded soul. Thus, the fulfilling and leisurely days went by slowly. In the blink of an eye, it was the end of the year. A new year was just around the corner. Perhaps wishing to offer a gift to the emperor before the holiday, the Pingnan Army, which had already been fighting in the Southern Border for three years, brought good news before the end of the year. They claimed to have leveled Jinghai Country, breached its capital of Longbian City, and the ruler of Jinghai Country had burned himself to death in the Royal Palace when the city fell. Even the Inborn Grandmaster of Jinghai Country had been beheaded in the midst of the Southern Expedition Army under the siege of the two Inborn Grandmasters of the Southern Expedition Army. The capital city had been broken, and the Grandmaster had died. Under these two blows, the resistance of Jinghai Country was completely shattered. The remaining prefectures and counties in the country soon surrendered under the deterrence of the army. ¡°Thus, Jinghai Country is destroyed. The emperor has ordered that Jinghai Country be changed into Jiuzhen Prefecture, with nine prefectures established on its former territory, directly governed by the imperial court. Out of the one hundred thousand Southern Expedition Army, fifty thousand will remain to guard the Southern Border, with the Deputy Marshal of the Southern Expedition Army, Marquis Wuping, Xie Ning, serving as the first Governor of Jiuzhen Prefecture, leading the army to stabilize the new territory. The remaining fifty thousand army will be led by the Marshal of the Southern Expedition Army, Wuan Marquis Bai Mengyang, who will head to their home base after the holiday, preparing for the war to destroy Shu State in the coming spring. With the arrival of Wuan Marquis, the end of the Pseudo-Shu Li Thief is near.¡± In the yamen, on the last day before closing for the holiday, Cui Changqing told Lu Yuan the latest news from the imperial court, his face full of excitement. Hearing the news, Lu Yuan was also quite astonished. He knew why Prefect Cui was so excited. It turned out that both Marquis Wuping, Xie Ning, and Wuan Marquis, Bai Mengyang, the two generals of the imperialist expedition to the south, were well-known Inborn Grandmasters in Jianghu. Especially Wuan Marquis, Bai Mengyang, who was said to be among the strongest of the Inborn Grandmasters. This time, with the Marquis leading the troops, the combination of the two Inborn Grandmasters and the local Governor, Dongting, would be another dream team for the Pingnan Army. But it was clear to anyone with eyes that the newly established Xi Shu, whether in terms of national strength or the Inborn Emperor Li Xiong, were far inferior to Jinghai Country. So based on the current strengths, by the end of next year, this Xi Shu State, which had only been established for a year, would have been extinguished. With the destruction of Xi Shu, the last rebellion within Da Yue¡¯s territory would be quelled. Even by then, the war between Da Yue and Liang might come to a halt. Thus, from the outbreak of the war in Jinghai Country in the 28th year of Longqing, to the end of the war next year, Da Yue would not only not lose any territory, but also annihilate Jinghai Country, opening up a new prefecture, with its territory increasing from eight to nine prefectures. If we ignore the fact that six of these nine prefectures had been scorched earth, then, on the surface, Da Yue could even be considered to be at the pinnacle of martial arts success, and the dynasty revitalized. Such a resurgence, of course, filled the hearts of every talent and aspirant loyal to Da Yue with joy. ¡°With Wuan Marquis leading the troops, the Shu thieves will soon perish.¡± Lu Yuan saw the excitement in Cui Changqing¡¯s face and echoed it. At the same time, he felt relieved in his heart, glad that he had resisted the temptation to rebel earlier. Otherwise, the original Governor of the county would have been a nightmare. If the Marquis of Wuan had also come, it would have meant certain death. The news of the imperial court¡¯s conquest and destruction of Jinghai Country soon spread through the official publicity channels. Needless to say. From the gentry and powerful, down to the common people, everyone was thrilled. In recent years, with Da Yue¡¯s decline in power and frequent local unrest severely threatening public order and security, many people had already begun to feel uneasy. Moreover, as war and turmoil raged, the heavy taxes weighed heavily on many people, leaving them breathless. Now that one of the three major war zones of the imperial court had ended, the cessation of war would allow many people to take a breath of relief. The imperial court could also mobilize more resources to gradually deal with the Xi Shu bandits and the war in the Northern Border, resolving these disasters. With things moving in a positive direction, everyone felt a brighter future ahead, and thus, there was happiness. But everything in the world is relative. When some people are happy, naturally, others are not happy. As the news of Jinghai Country¡¯s destruction and the imminent northern shift of the Pingnan Army to fight against Xi Shu spread, so did the undercurrents in Dongting Prefecture. Wandu Valley. As the headquarters of the Five Poisons Sect, there was a hidden, deep pool in the depths of the valley. Even within the Five Poisons Sect, this place was listed as a forbidden area, inaccessible to all but the highest-ranking sect members, the sect leader, and the left and right protectors. Even the elders below them could not approach it. Such a mysterious place naturally aroused the curiosity of countless sect members. But no matter how curious they were, they dared not breach the sect¡¯s rules and explore it. This was due not only to the heaviest punishment within the sect, the Ten Thousand Poison Devouring Body, for defying the rules, but also to the fact that no one who had entered the deep pool had ever come out. The importance placed on it within the sect, and the mysterious legends surrounding it, made this deep pool a taboo. No one wanted to mention it, and no one dared to mention it. And today, this taboo in the minds of the Five Poisons Sect¡¯s members welcomed three visitors.. Chapter 163 - Chapter 163: Chapter 128: The Saintly Body_3 Chapter 163: Chapter 128: The Saintly Body_3 Translator: 549690339 Five Poisons Sect Master Lan Zhaoyun, along with his Left and Right Protectors, walked the mysterious path through the dense forest, heading towards the deeper part of the valley. Thick shadows from trees loomed on both sides, and from the dense foliage, one could occasionally hear a rustling sound. As they walked, these three high-ranking members of the Five Poisons Sect felt countless cold gazes from the shadows of the forest, watching them intently. These gazes were restless and fierce, as if filled with boundless brutality, wanting to pounce on them and tear them apart at any moment. However, every time the agitation became unbearable, a faint fragrance would drift from the three people, infiltrating the dense forest. As the fragrance appeared, those restless gazes in the forest began to retreat, seemingly disgusted and afraid of the smell. But once they retreated a certain distance and escaped the range of the fragrance, the gazes would break free of the disgusted and fearful emotions, surging forward again, only to be driven back by the fragrance. This cycle continued endlessly, as if it would never tire. These gazes were so persistent, seemingly wanting to rip apart anyone who dared to enter this forest. ¡°The Sacred Insects in the Sacred Insect Forest have become more ferocious and difficult to control,¡± the Left Protector, who was in charge of the sect¡¯s external affairs, remarked. Due to his work in the Jianghu, he rarely returned to the sect, and when he did, it was usually to report to the sect master before rushing off again. As a result, it had been over a decade since he had last set foot in this place called the Sacred Insect Forest within the sect. Now, upon returning and witnessing the forest¡¯s Sacred Insects more fierce than before, he couldn¡¯t help but lament, ¡°Even the aura of our own Sacred Insect Technique can¡¯t suppress these Sacred Insects.¡± The legends of the bottomless pit in this valley originated from these Sacred Insects in the forest, or more precisely, the ten thousand poisonous insects. Anyone who entered the forest would be attacked by these poisonous insects. Even the top martial artists in Jianghu could not escape death if they fell into this swarm. This place, naturally, was considered forbidden ground. Upon hearing this, the Right Protector nodded in agreement, ¡°That¡¯s true. Left Protector, you rarely return to the sect and visit the Sacred Insect Forest, so you don¡¯t know much about the changes in the Sacred Insects. I¡¯ll tell you, the last time I entered this forest alone, the Sacred Insects came within almost ten yards of me. Even the aura of my Sacred Insect Technique alone was barely enough to suppress them, and they almost reached me. I feel that in a few more years, the forest¡¯s Sacred Insects will become even more powerful. Even our top-level Sacred Insect Technique practitioners may be attacked.¡± The Sacred Insect Technique mentioned by the two Protectors was the supreme Mental Technique passed down through the Five Poisons Sect for thousands of years. Within the sect, only the Sect Master, the Holy Maiden, the Holy Son, and the Left and Right Protectors could cultivate it. The core concept of this technique was refining the Ten Thousand Sacred Insects, also known as the Ten Thousand Poisonous Insects, into one¡¯s body, ultimately creating a Ten Thousand Saint Body immune to all poisons. After gathering the Ten Thousand Poisons, the Sacred Insect Technique would achieve major success, and the cultivators would become a Ten Thousand Poison Body, with poison accompanying their every breath and movement. It was said that at this level, even a single hair from the Ten Thousand Poison Body could poison a strong bull, and a drop of blood could poison an entire village. At this point, a person would become the most toxic substance in the world. Once someone became such a poisonous creature, they would naturally begin to take on inhuman characteristics. As a result, rumors began to spread in the Jianghu that the Five Poisons Sect¡¯s Sacred Insect Technique could only be cultivated to the Innate Realm. The basis for these rumors was the Ten Thousand Poison Body. ¡°Enough. The forest¡¯s Sacred Insects have become more powerful because of the resources our sect has spent over hundreds of years cultivating them.¡± Now that the Holy Maiden has broken through to the Innate Realm and begun cultivating the Ten Thousand Saint Body, once it is fully cultivated, all the Sacred Insect Forest¡¯s poisons will be absorbed into her body. At that time, these Sacred Insects will naturally be gone. There¡¯s no need to worry about them overpowering your techniques.¡± Hearing his subordinates¡¯ conversation, Sect Master Lan Zhaoyun leading the way could not help but turn around and reprimand them. Both Left and Right Protectors immediately nodded their heads, no longer speaking and continued their journey in silence. In silence, the three of them quickly passed through the dense forest. As they left the forest, a wide-bottomless pool appeared before their eyes, with steam and mist rising from its surface. Below the pool¡¯s surface, countless deadly poisonous insects that would change an outsider¡¯s complexion were immersed: centipedes, spiders, venomous snakes, toads, lizards, poisonous ants, wasps, mantises, and more, both named and nameless, all soaked in the deep pool. Besides the insects soaked in the pool, numerous poisonous insects continuously emerged from the dense forest nearby and then entered the pool without any hesitation. Witnessing this grand sight of countless insects entering the pool, even Lan Zhaoyun and the two Protectors, who were adept at manipulating poisonous insects, could not help but feel their eyelids twitching. Although this was not their first time seeing it, Lan Zhaoyun could not help but feel his heart palpitate every time he saw it. He took a deep breath, restraining the tremor in his heart, and then looked towards the young girl floating on the pool¡¯s surface, calling out, ¡°Cai¡¯er.¡± The young girl sat cross-legged on the surface of the pool, her feet submerged in the water. An invisible force emanated from her soles, attracting the myriad poisons of the insects in the pool. The poison flowed into the girl¡¯s body through her soles, turning her feet into a dazzling array of colors, which then spread throughout her body along her meridians, rendering her entire body in various colorful hues. Upon hearing the call, the girl, who had her brows knitted in concentration, slowly opened her eyes and looked towards the distant caller. Seeing who had arrived, her face, now dyed with various poisonous colors, broke into a smile: ¡°Father.¡± Her crisp voice, like the song of an oriole, was extremely enchanting. However, Lan Zhaoyun¡¯s Left and Right Protectors, upon seeing the Holy Maiden¡¯s current appearance, couldn¡¯t help but shudder in fear. Even though they knew her current appearance was only a temporary transformation during cultivation and that she would regain her beautiful looks once her Ten Thousand Saint Body was fully formed, they couldn¡¯t deny that her current appearance was truly terrifying to behold.. Chapter 164 - Chapter 164: Chapter 129: Fond of Teaching Others Chapter 164: Chapter 129: Fond of Teaching Others Lan Cai¡¯er didn¡¯t care about others¡¯ opinions on her appearance. In fact, apart from the people she cared about, how others thought and looked at her was unimportant to this Saintess. Fortunately, she was both a Saintess and an Inborn Grandmaster, so even if others had thoughts about her, they would never dare to show them in front of her. Just like the two Law Protectors. Although outsiders might care about their appearance, as a father, Lan Zhaoyun would never despise his daughter. He took two steps forward, walked to the edge of the pool, looked at his daughter whose body had turned colorful due to the poisonous power, and said with a trace of compassion in his eyes: ¡°Cai¡¯er, how do you feel? Is your cultivation technique okay?¡± Lan Cai¡¯er felt her father¡¯s concern, showing a slight smile on her face, confidently said: ¡°There is no problem, don¡¯t worry about it, Dad. I have now integrated the poisonous power of a thousand poisonous insects into my body, and the first layer of Ten Thousand Saint Body has been cultivated. Now I have successfully cultivated Ten Thousand Poison True Qi, and I can harm people with poison between my gestures. Among the Innate Grandmasters, I can already stand firmly on my feet. Next, I just need to spend another five years refining three thousand more kinds of poisonous insects, and then I can cultivate the second layer. By then, even the top Grandmasters of the Yue people can be challenged by me.¡± In the Sacred Insect Technique, initially, cultivating one kind of poisonous insect into the body would mix the poison with the inner strength and form the poisonous cultivation technique, which means the cultivator has just entered the door. Afterward, refining ten kinds of poisonous insects will further enhance the poisonous cultivation technique, which means the inner strength can cause poisoning through a person¡¯s skin when the poison is released, and this is considered a minor success of the technique, stepping into the Jianghu third-rate realm. Then it is refining thirty kinds of poisons, strengthening the inner power and toxicity, and reaching the Jianghu second -rate level. Once a cultivator has refined a hundred poisons, their entire inner strength blends with the poison, and they can release the poison with every move; the Sacred Insect Technique is considered to have achieved major success. In the Jianghu world, it¡¯s a powerful first-class technique with poison attacks. Finally, if you can refine a thousand kinds of poisons into your body, you can cultivate the Ten Thousand Poison Body and cultivate a strand of Ten Thousand Poison True Qi in your body. This poison is extremely vicious, and even a first-class expert in Jianghu can be poisoned to death in the blink of an eye without countermeasures. Those who can cultivate to this realm are all Innate Grandmasters. At this moment, Lan Cai¡¯er, the Saintess of the Five Poisons Sect, is at such a realm. To go further in this realm, she needs to refine the power of three thousand kinds of poison insects, which will further increase the strength of Ten Thousand Poison True Qi to a degree that even Innate Grandmasters dare not lace unecuy. At this level, within the Innate Grandmasters, it can be called veteran. As for refining ten thousand kinds of poisonous insects, it is only a rough description and guess in the Five Poisons Sect, but the specific method of cultivation has not yet been deduced and verified. However, even having only two layers of Innate cultivation techniques before it, it is enough for the Five Poisons Sect to look down upon other sects in the Jianghu. After all, it¡¯s rare to achieve Innate, and many Inborn cultivators in the world are just at the entrance level. It is already impressive that the Five Poisons Sect has a more advanced technique among the Innate cultivators. ¡°Good, good, worthy of being my Lan Zhaoyun¡¯s daughter. At only twenty-four years old, she has broken through the Inborn and has a stable realm. In the future, she can suppress the Grandmasters and look down upon the heroes before thirty.¡± Sect Leader Lan laughed happily when he heard his daughter¡¯s words. However, after laughing for a while, he restrained his smile and said with a solemn expression: ¡°Cai¡¯er, your cultivation progress is rapid, and Dad is very happy. If possible, Dad would actually like you to continue concentrating on your cultivation, and then enter the Jianghu world after reaching the highest realm of the Sacred Insect Technique. Thus, with the Second Layer of Ten Thousand Saint Body, you can have enough power to suppress other heroes and look down upon the world. But now the situation has changed too fast, and the time left for our Holy Sect is running out.¡± Lan Cai¡¯er frowned when she heard what her father said: ¡°Dad, has something happened outside?¡± Lan Zhaoyun nodded, his face solemn: ¡°I just received the news in the past few days. The Jinghai Country in the south has been destroyed by the Yue people, and the commander of the Yue People¡¯s Pingnan Army, Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang, will lead the troops northward and prepare to attack Xi Shu next year. This man is ranked among the top three masters in Yue Country, and his strength is extremely strong throughout his life. The guardian Grandmaster of Jinghai Country was killed under his sword in the army. Now that he is leading the army to attack Xi Shu, along with the assistance of the Grandmaster from Dongting region, I¡¯m afraid Xi Shu won¡¯t be able to hold on next year. When Xi Shu is gone, the Yue people will completely eliminate the internal troubles. The Liang people in the north will probably withdraw their troops as well. In this way, the opportunity our clan has been waiting for thousands of years will be lost. Therefore, Xi Shu cannot fall, and the Yue people cannot win their expedition to Xi Shu next year. I need you to take action to stop all of this.¡± Sect Leader Lan looked at his daughter, his eyes burning. After hearing Dad¡¯s request, the Saintess thought for a moment and asked: ¡°What should I do, Dad?¡± Lan Zhaoyun said: ¡°I want you to take action, assassinate the Innate Grandmaster of Dongting region before Bai Mengyang arrives. As long as this person dies, Yue people¡¯s biggest support in Dongting region will be gone. Afterwards, even if Bai Mengyang is a Second-Echelon Grandmaster, it would be absolutely impossible for him to defeat Xi Shu by himself.¡± Upon hearing this plan, Lan Cai¡¯er shook her head: ¡°I have just entered Innate level, even though I have a stable realm now, which is not inferior to other ordinary Innate cultivators, it is still too much to expect me to assassinate a senior Grandmaster..¡± Chapter 165 - Chapter 165: Chapter 129: Fond of Teaching Others_2 Chapter 165: Chapter 129: Fond of Teaching Others_2 This sacred woman was well aware of her own abilities. Although her special Ten Thousand Poison Body bestowed her with a certain advantage among the Inborn, She didn¡¯t deceive herself into thinking that she, a novice who had only broken through a few years ago, could directly confront and kill an old master who had been famous for decades. Lan Zhaoyun said: ¡°Of course, I understand this point, which is why we are not planning for you to act alone. My father intends to send someone to form an alliance with that Qiang Ethnic Emperor in Xi Shu. This time Bai Mengyang is going after the opposition directly. We do not want our plans for rebirth to fail, and even more so, he does not want to lose his life and his country. Hence, it will involve you and Li Xiong working together. Our two families will send out our strongest fighters to surround and kill the grandmaster of Dongting county together. With such combined force and their lack of preparation, there is a high probability of success.¡± Lan Cai¡¯er contemplated for a while and then nodded: ¡°If that¡¯s the case, we might be able to succeed.¡± She then added,¡± Father, have you already contacted Li Xiong?¡± Lan Zhaoyun shook his head: ¡°The situation arose suddenly. I just heard the news and planed to discuss with you before sending someone to Xi Shu.¡± Lan Cai¡¯er said: ¡°Then go ahead, Father, and send someone to do so. After all, I¡¯m going up against a seasoned grandmaster, so it wouldn¡¯t be that easy to kill him. In the coming days, I will also have to make some arrangements and preparations.¡± ¡°Alright, that¡¯s settled then. I¡¯ll send someone to connect with Xi Shu immediately.¡± Seeing his daughter agreeing with his plan, Lan Zhaoyun felt relieved and promptly left in high spirits. Li Xiong now is, after all, an emperor of a nation. Even though he leads a puppet government, he is begrudgingly considered to be of great worth. However, persuading him to risk taking part in an assassination plan along with the Poison Sect wasn¡¯t going to be easy. Oratory skills were going to come to the fore. After finalizing the plan, Lan Cai¡¯er continued to practice the Sacred Insect Technique in meditation, preparing for the imminent assassination plot. Lan Zhaoyun, accompanied by two subordinates, left on his journey. After leaving the Sacred Insect Forest and returning to the main hall, Sect Leader Lan and the Left Protector responsible for foreign affairs began their discussion. They prepared to send him to Xi Shu as the messenger to reach out to Li Xiong. However, before they managed to sort out a plan of action, an elder responsible for foreign affairs led a man inside. ¡°King of Anyang of Dachu, General Li Shou, salutes Sect Leader Lan.¡± In the main hall, a man dressed in purple, whose features were slightly different from those of the Yue people but who possessed extraordinary valour, presented a brief salute to Lan Zhaoyun. ¡°You are Li Xiong¡¯s younger brother, aren¡¯t you?¡± Lan Zhaoyun, sitting on his leader¡¯s chair, looked at the heroic man standing before him and reiterated his query. He had never expected that while they were making plans to seek Xi Shu, the latter had already made a move ahead of them and sent their messenger. ¡®Indeed, the one who¡¯s hard hit is in a hurry. Clearly, in this round of negotiations, I will have the upper hand.¡¯ These thoughts sparked a trace of a smile in the eyes of Sect Leader Lan. ¡°My brother has already become the Emperor of Shu State.¡± Seeing his country¡¯s ruler being called by name, Li Shou puts emphasis on one point but did not dwell further. He promptly nodded and said, ¡°However, I indeed am his younger brother, King of Anyang of Dachu, and the General.¡± ¡°Alright, then he is the Emperor of Shu State.¡± Though he didn¡¯t think too highly of the makeshift government, considering their prospective alliance, Lan Zhaoyun reluctantly offered his respect by calling him Emperor, then asked, ¡°So, King of Anyang of Shu State, what brings you to me?¡± ¡°I came to save your Sect,¡± Li Shinned spoke candidly and provocatively. But with his words barely out of his mouth, Li Shou noticed the elders of the Five Poison Sect changing expressions. However, the sect leader above still smiled amiably at him without uttering a word. Realizing he was dealing with an old fox, Li Shou¡¯s preemptive strike didn¡¯t work. So he had to bluntly state, ¡°I believe the sect leader must have heard the news that the Southern Expedition Army will soon move towards Dongting County, and its commander is none other than Bai Mengyang?¡± Lan Zhaoyun gave a slight nod: ¡°I have indeed heard of this.¡± Li Shou said, ¡°I understand that in the past few years, your sect has secretly incited local Miao people to attack prefectures and counties. Although carried out covertly, it won¡¯t escape the attention of the Yue officials. Previously, the Yue people were troubled by wars on all fronts and couldn¡¯t handle it, so they turned a blind eye and endured it. But now, Jinghai in the Southern Border has been destroyed, the Yue people have freed their hands, ready to attack my country. Though my Dachu is newly established with only one county, we have no intentions of submitting and will resist till the end. However, the tide of war may be difficult to turn, and my country may not remain immune. When my country is destroyed, the Yue People¡¯s Court, bearing in mind the actions of your sect, would they keep you out of their crosshairs after they have subjugated us?¡± Slightly touched by the words of Li Shou, Sect Leader Lan took them seriously, ¡°What is your suggestion?¡± Li Shou smiled and said, ¡°My Emperor¡­¡± In the hall, a secret conspiracy for an alliance was in progress. In a blink of an eye, the New Year had passed. Lu Yuan fawned another New Year¡¯s Eve dinner at the Sun Family. However, compared to previous years, this New Year¡¯s Eve dinner appeared to be happier and warmer. The reason was simple. After several months of trying, Cui Wenxiu was pregnant. The pregnancy had just been confirmed a few days before. Over the next couple of days, Cui Wenxiu became the most cherished member of the Sun Family, and not just the Sun Family, but the Cui Family as well. Lady Cui had already moved to the Sun Residence. The moment she received the news of her daughter¡¯s pregnancy, she immediately rushed over to take care of her and pass on experiences.. Chapter 166 - Chapter 166: Chapter 129: Good at Being a Mentor_3 Chapter 166: Chapter 129: Good at Being a Mentor_3 Prefect Cui came over to take a look, and after seeing his daughter looking well, he finally left with peace of mind. On the way back, anyone could see that he was in an excellent mood, even walking with a spring in his step. He was soon to have a great-grandson, which for Cui Changqing, who only had a single daughter, was the greatest joy. Sun Siwen became even more precious to his wife. Wherever Cui Wenxiu went, he followed, never wanting to be half a step away, fearing something might happen to his wife. Even Cui Wenxiu couldn¡¯t stand his behavior, and several times, she had to order him to leave and focus on his work. As a bystander, Lu Yuan watched silently, feeling somewhat at a loss. However, this feeling didn¡¯t last long. Because soon, the new sisters of the Little Phoenix Pavilion filled the emptiness in his heart. Last year, several girls who were greatly admired by Teacher Lu learned a few secret dances from him and tried to perform them for other guests. These conservative and traditional guests had never seen such a scene in a brothel before. The bold and spicy, the subtly suggestive, the deadly temptation¡­ Needless to say. How those later generations of perverted otaku were conquered by thigh dances and house dances, is how these bumpkins were also once again ensnared. Of course. There were also some scholars who had become dull from reading too much, who could not help but criticize the dance, which they considered indecent even by brothel standards, as a sign of the decline of social morals. Some even went so far as to ridicule the fact that the dance was personally designed by the commanding officer of Fu City, calling him a coarse and vulgar martial artist. Naturally, those who didn¡¯t understand the sentiment, were found with broken teeth and limping legs by the moat outside the city the next day. After that, there was much less of this kind of talk. However, such old-fashioned people were in the minority. Most people, after appreciating the dance, couldn¡¯t help but praise Lu Yuan in their hearts for understanding them! Then they happily opened a private room, to explore the dance with the beauties alone. Riding the wave of this trend, several girls in the Little Phoenix Pavilion became famous and earned a lot of silver taels. Then they were redeemed by the wealthy gentlemen of the city and brought home to become private tutors. However, as more and more people were redeemed, rumours somehow began to circulate in the city that the commanding officer Lu ¡°was clean, and didn¡¯t indulge in the company of beautiful women.¡± This gave many people some gossip over tea and meals. Lu Yuan was naturally furious at this, ordering a strict investigation into who was ruining his reputation. Was he not into beautiful women? He was just strictly adhering to his teacher¡¯s ethics and not overstepping his bounds. What were those lustful men thinking every day? Furious, Lu Yuan had no choice but to reluctantly teach a new generation of beautiful students, under heavy financial sponsorship from the Little Phoenix Pavilion. It can¡¯t be helped. The achievements Of the previous batch Of Students Were so outstanding that even the Little Phoenix Pavilion, after earning a lot of silver taels, couldn¡¯t help but admire him as the instigator. The madams in the pavilion ordered that from now on, whenever Sir Lu visited the pavilion, drinks and private rooms were free and even paying him extra to teach the girls. Not paying when visiting a brothel was one thing, but earning money in a brothel was something unique to him. When the news spread, it was enough to make many people envious. In the following period, ¡°Teacher Lu¡±, who loved teaching others, spent his time happily teaching between the Little Phoenix Pavilion and his own mansion. During this time, one night when he returned home from the Little Phoenix Pavilion, he took a Rejuvenation Pill in high spirits and successfully practiced another bizarre meridian. Finally, he had reached the last meridian of the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra. As long as he could remove the last Yin Wei Vessel, then Lu Yuan would have completely mastered this first-rate Mental Technique. Naturally, this was cause for celebration. So, the next day, he went to the Little Phoenix Pavilion again to share his joy with his good students. After all, it¡¯s better to bring joy to everyone than just to oneself. In such fulfilling and happy days, time quickly passed to the fourth year of Hongdao, the second month. On this day, Lu Yuan, who had been teaching students for over a month, finally felt a little tired and, in a rare occurrence, didn¡¯t go to the Little Phoenix Pavilion but instead went to the Fu City Barracks, which he hadn¡¯t visited for quite some time. After inspecting the soldiers in the camp, he found that they had trained hard during his absence, and made great progress in formation drills and personal martial arts. In particular, the 300 personal guards selected by Lu Yuan had developed Inner Strength after several months of cultivation, and even the newcomers had mastered it. Although none of the 300 people could master one complete meridian, even so, it was enough to make them happy. After all, these were 300 soldiers with Inner Strength, military formation skills, cooperation and expertise in archery. Such a force, when deployed in a formation, would pose a tricky challenge even for a first-class expert. Seeing his personal guards advance to such a level in such a short time, Lu Yuan was naturally delighted. Feeling generous, the commanding officer waved his hand and rewarded each member of his personal guards with five silver tales, winning their cheers. As Lu Yuan¡¯s practice had reached the last meridian, the workload of his disciples who had been tasked with collecting and purchasing various century-old spiritual medicines had greatly decreased, and even many of them had been called back. After more than a year of collecting and purchasing, the amount of money Lu Yuan had was just over 10,000 silver tales. It was almost below the five-digit mark. However, he wasn¡¯t worried. That¡¯s because Lu Yuan still had enough Rejuvenation Pills left to complete the remaining Yin Wei Vessel. Even when he finished, there would still be quite a lot left. Without this huge expenditure, there wouldn¡¯t be many places to spend money. If he calculated his official salary and the tutoring fees from the Little Phoenix Pavilion, there would still be an income of-about one hundred silver tales a month, right? With his finances increasingly stable, Lu Yuan even considered whether to share some of the remaining Rejuvenation Pills with his best disciples. After all, they had risked their lives to travel all over the world for him, working tirelessly, and their efforts deserved some recognition. Plus, being first-rate masters with disciples who were only considered third-rate was a bit of a stretch. ¡°At least they should have second-rate strength to be considered disciples, and to bear the burden.¡± Lu Yuan thought so, and considering his future plans to steal techniques, finally decided. Just let it be. He could just give away the Rejuvenation Pills that were worth several thousand silver tales as a reward. He wouldn¡¯t want his disciples to say that he, as their master, didn¡¯t care about them. Is this not a rich enough expression of love, made of true gold and silver? Who would have thought that I, Lu Yuan, would be such a good teacher? Chapter 167 - Chapter 167: Chapter 130: The Rebellion of the Five Poisons Chapter 167: Chapter 130: The Rebellion of the Five Poisons Translator: 549690339 While Lu Yuan was happily playing the role of a teacher here, the Poison Sect and Xi Shu State had also begun their actions on the other side under the imminent threat of Bai Mengyang. Baling City. As the capital of Yueyang Prefecture, the city was built beside Jun Mountain and Thousand Miles of Dongting Ze, sitting next to the Yangtze River waterway, controlling the traffic from east, west, south, and north. It was undoubtedly a first-class important town. As a result, the administrative center of Dongting Prefecture was established in Baling City. Although the world was in chaos and battles could be seen everywhere in the southeast, northwest, these disputes seemed far away in the distance and could not hinder Baling City¡¯s prosperity. Baling City, following the Yangtze River waterway, could directly reach Zhou Country¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture to the north. To the east, it could directly reach Yuzhang Prefecture, Linhai County, and Guangling Prefecture. To the south, it could directly reach all parts of Dongting Prefecture along the tributaries of the Yangtze River. To the west, it would be going upstream against the river and directly reach Xichuan Prefecture. Located at such an important junction connecting north and south, Baling Prefecture naturally became extremely prosperous. Merchants and travelers thrived here, and the pier outside the city saw a thousand sails rising and falling. Goods from all directions arrived here, and then trade took place, and then they were sent to various countries under the sky. Although the business from the west had been temporarily halted due to the rebellion in Xichuan Prefecture, this had not impacted the prosperity of Baling City. On the contrary, the scarcity of goods from various places led to competition among merchants and travelers, resulting in the surrogate prosperity of the business. No matter how chaotic the world is or how difficult it is for ordinary people to afford food, the wealthy and privileged people always seem to be spared from suffering. As those merchant families in the city said, as long as the high-ranking officials under the sky are still around, Baling City will never decline, and there will always be money to be made. ¡°I didn¡¯t expect Baling City to be so prosperous in this chaotic era.¡± In a private room on the second floor of Fuhai Tavern in the city, eight people gathered. Among them, a middle-aged man from a different race with a dignified appearance and different looks from the Yue people stood by the window, sighed at the sight before him, and said to the people around him, ¡°In the past, I thought the city¡¯s reputation was somewhat exaggerated. But today, as I see it with my own eyes, its reputation is well deserved. Even Jinguan City can¡¯t compare to it.¡± Jinguan City is the administrative center of Xichuan. This place is famous for its cloud brocade silk, which is unique in the world. Therefore, the court established the ¡°Jinguan¡± in the city, and later the city was named after the official title. As time went on, the prosperity of commerce attracted a large number of households. At its peak, the city became one of the most famous cities in the world, with a population of a hundred thousand households. Of course, Jinguan City today has become the capital of Xi Shu State. The Jinguan still exists in the city, but its prosperity can no longer be compared to its past days. So at this moment, this middle-aged man from another race could not help but sigh when he saw Baling City, which used to be on par with Jinguan City. ¡°Jinguan City is also a famous city in the world even though it has declined at the moment. But I believe the Emperor of Shu only needs to make minor adjustments, and it will be able to restore its prosperity within a few years. There is no need to envy others here.¡± Next to him, Lan Zhaoyun, who had already changed his appearance and dressed up, replied with a faint smile upon hearing this. Indeed, the middle-aged man from the other race who was there was none other than Li Xiong, who had conquered the Western Chuan region and proclaimed himself emperor. He personally came here for the collaboration with the Poison Sect a month ago. ¡°Sect Leader Lan, don¡¯t worry. I know your sect has always considered Dongting Prefecture as its territory, and maybe you have been eyeing Baling City for a long time.¡± Li Xiong glanced at Lan Zhaoyun, who was somewhat on guard, and explained with a smile, ¡°Rest assured, my only desire is to secure the Xichuan Prefecture so that my Qiang people can have a piece of land to call our own. As for the matters of conquering other lands and competing for hegemony in the world, I have never thought about them. Dongting Prefecture will always belong to the Miao brothers.¡± Upon hearing this, Lan Zhaoyun smiled, but deep in his heart, he did not really believe the other¡¯s words. In this chaotic world, every ambitious man and heroic figure would not be content just to stay in a corner. Who would willingly become a guarding dog? Provided there was an opportunity, who wouldn¡¯t dream of ruling the world, of uniting the nine prefectures under the sky? If Li Xiong had no intention of unifying the world, why did he, after capturing Jinguan City last year, declare himself emperor and establish a country, neglecting the consolidation of domestic affairs, and instead hurriedly led an army of a hundred thousand eastward? Wasn¡¯t it because of his ambition? It¡¯s not just the Emperor of Shu State. Even Lan Zhaoyun himself could not help but think about, after uniting Dongting Prefecture, continuing to fight wars in the north and south, replacing the court of the Yue people, and becoming the ruler of the nine prefectures of the world. But for now, the focus was on cooperation, and everything else had to take a backseat to the main goal of defeating the Yue People¡¯s Court. So Lan Zhaoyun just smiled and changed the subject, ¡°This time, I personally led the team with the Left and Right Protectors of our sect, and the Saintess also joined us. What about your country?¡± In order to eliminate the Inborn Grandmaster in Baling City, the Poison Sect can be said to have spared no effort. The only three first-class masters in the sect and the one Inborn Grandmaster all took action, wanting to achieve their goal in one go. ¡°Since your sect has gone to such lengths, my country will certainly not fall behind. Like your sect, we have one Inborn and three first-class masters, including myself ¨C all of us are here.¡± Li Xiong confidently smiled and then shifted his gaze to the veiled young woman behind Lan Zhaoyun, remarking with some admiration, ¡®What I didn¡¯t expect was that your sect secretly had an Inborn Grandmaster, and you managed to keep the news so well concealed. In the past several years, there have been no rumors about it in Jianghu. It¡¯s truly surprising. Your sect must have some big plans with such secrecy.¡± Having said that, the Emperor of Shu paused and then addressed Lan Cai¡¯er, ¡°In fact, I only achieved Inborn status last year, and it wasn¡¯t until recently that I stabilized my realm. My understanding of the mysteries of hte Inborn realm is still not deep enough.. Chapter 168 - Chapter 168: Chapter 130: The Rebellion of the Five Poisons (Part 2) Chapter 168: Chapter 130: The Rebellion of the Five Poisons (Part 2) Translator: 549690339 However, the Saintess has already been in the Innate Realm for several years, and if we consider the path of the Innate, the Saintess is indeed my senior. After years of hard work, her cultivation should be even more profound, far surpassing mine. The prefect of Dongting County, Wuyang Marquis Li Gui, is an Inborn Grandmaster who has been in the Innate Realm for thirty years. Although it is rumored that he has always been in the first realm of Innate and has been unable to break through to the second realm, his strength is still profound and far beyond that of a newcomer like me. I heard that the Poison Sect has the Ten Thousand Poison Body, with the Saintess¡¯s innate talent, she must have already cultivated it and can now defy the world of Jianghu. How about this time we assassinate with the Saintess taking the lead, and I will assist by her side, acting as a pawn.¡± Li Xiong¡¯s face was filled with a smile, speaking humbly. However, Lan Zhaoyun, who was standing beside him, was displeased upon hearing this and said, ¡°The Emperor of Shu has a good plan. Hiding behind while letting our Saintess, a woman, take the brunt of the danger. Aren¡¯t you afraid that the news will get out and be laughed at by the world?¡± The so-called bird who sticks its head out gets shot. Even in assassination, the first person to take action will undoubtedly attract the most counterattacks from the target. Li Xiong spoke humbly, but in reality, he wanted Lan Cai¡¯er to act as his shield. Lan Zhaoyun, with his deep scheming, would not let his daughter take such a risk. ¡°Sect Leader Lan, you¡¯re joking. I¡¯m just admiring the Saintess¡¯s cultivation and don¡¯t dare to show off in front of her. If you don¡¯t want to, then forget it.¡± Seeing that the other party did not take the bait, Li Xiong did not press further, but quickly changed the subject, ¡°In that case, we will both take action at the same time. Facing our simultaneous killing moves, it would be difficult for Li Gui to react, increasing our chances of success.¡± Although Lan Zhaoyun was still somewhat dissatisfied, this was indeed the fairest way, so he reluctantly nodded and said, ¡°Then let it be.¡± Seeing the other party¡¯s agreement, Li Xiong smiled in satisfaction, and then said, ¡°So it¡¯s decided. We will take action tonight at midnight, when most people in the city are asleep, and Li Gui¡¯s guards are at their weakest. This is when our chances of success are greatest.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± As for the time, it was indeed the favorite choice of assassins in Jianghu, and Lan Zhaoyun had no objection. Thus, the two sides reached a consensus in this regard. Afterward, Li Xiong said, ¡°With the eight of us taking action together, Li Gui will undoubtedly be doomed tonight. However, this man is only the weakest among the five Inborn Grandmasters of Da Yue¡¯s court. Even after killing him, it will still be difficult for us to succeed. Before leaving for this mission, I had already mobilized my army in the country, and I¡¯m preparing to command an army of one hundred thousand soldiers this spring, to capture the last Wushan Prefecture of Xichuan, and open up a passage to Dongting County.¡± This reigning Emperor of Shu shared his plan and then turned to look at Lan Zhaoyun and continued, ¡°I hope that your sect can mobilize the Miao People at that time, and launch uprisings in various places in Dongting, seizing prefectures and counties to cooperate with our side.¡± Last year, when Li Xiong led an army of one hundred thousand to attack Wushan Prefecture, they ultimately failed due to the reinforcements of Dongting County and the intervention of Li Gui, the Inborn Grandmaster. However, if they could successfully assassinate Li Gui this time, they would eliminate the Inborn Grandmaster and shake the morale of the defenders of Wushan Prefecture. If unrest erupted in the rear of Dongting County, it would be easy to break through Wushan Prefecture. ¡°No problem.¡± Hearing Li Xiong¡¯s proposal, Lan Zhaoyun readily agreed. He had already planned on taking advantage of Li Gui¡¯s elimination to raise troops. Now, their thoughts just happened to coincide. However, after agreeing, in order to demonstrate his strength and deter allies, he said, ¡°This time, I will mobilize one hundred thousand Miao Soldiers within the county to launch uprisings within the seven prefectures. The unprepared Yue People will certainly find it difficult to resist. By then, our two forces will join together, commanding a total of two hundred thousand elite soldiers; even if Bai Mengyang leads his troops, he will not be able to resist us.¡± As expected, upon hearing that the Poison Sect could mobilize one hundred thousand Miao Soldiers, Li Xiong¡¯s eyes flashed with surprise. He needed to know that he controlled the entire Xichuan County, and the total number of troops he could deploy was only one hundred thousand. ¡®It seems I have underestimated the Miao People.¡¯ So thought Li Xiong, but his face was filled with smiles, saying, ¡°Then I would like to take this opportunity to congratulate your sect in advance on a successful uprising and jointly establishing a new country with me.¡± Hearing the words about establishing a country together, Lan Zhaoyun laughed and waved his hand, saying, ¡°It¡¯s too early for Emperor Shu to say these things. Whether the uprising will go as planned remains unknown.¡± Despite his words, the confidence and determination in his tone were unmistakable, and could not be concealed. Even the two guardians and the Saintess of the Poison Sect beside him had smiles on their faces, clearly having no doubts about their ability to establish a new country. Seeing this, a hint of wariness and vigilance flashed in Li Xiong¡¯s eyes. Lan Zhaoyun¡¯s previous guess was correct. As the founder of a powerful kingdom and an Inborn Grandmaster, how could Li Xiong not harbor ambitions in unifying the world? However, due to the current strength of the Yue People¡¯s Court, he still needed Miao People¡¯s help and had no choice but to tolerate them for now. But once the pressure from the Yue People was gone, who would eventually control the vast land of Dongting with its ten prefectures and thousands of miles, that would be a matter for discussion. Of course, these were all matters for the future. At present, the priority was to eliminate Li Gui. So the several people looked at each other and couldn¡¯t help but laugh together. As the saying goes, people¡¯s hearts are separated by their stomachs, so who knows who has malicious intentions. At this moment, the two allies, each with their ulterior motives, began to wait for the arrival of midnight.. Chapter 169 - Chapter 169: Chapter 130: The Rebellion of the Five Poisons (Part 3) Chapter 169: Chapter 130: The Rebellion of the Five Poisons (Part 3) Translator: 549690339 That night. Bloody scenes filled Baling City, accompanied by the wails of thousands of people. Countless people heard the thunderous boom, followed by the collapse of houses and the ground sinking, leaving a trail of dead bodies. The two Inborn Grandmasters of the Qiang People and Miao People joined forces, giving the Yue people a horrifying New Year surprise. This New Year surprise was received by Lu Yuan two days after it happened. ¡°What? The Commander was assassinated!¡± In the Prefecture Yamen, the flustered Lu Yuan was stunned upon hearing the message conveyed by Cui Changqing. The Commander of Dongting County was an Inborn expert and a grandmaster. It was a joke that a man who had reached the pinnacle of martial arts through his physical prowess would be assassinated. ¡°There is no mistake about the news. This is an order personally handed down by the Prefect. Just two days ago, at midnight, the Commander was assassinated in his mansion. His corpse has been examined, and it is indeed confirmed that he is dead.¡± The Prefect Cui also looked shocked and saddened after recovering from the shock. During this difficult time, the loss of an Inborn Grandmaster was like losing a giant pillar that supported the heavens. This was especially true for Dongting County. Without the deterrence of an Inborn Grandmaster, it was hard to imagine what chaos would ensue here. Gulp! Once again confirming the accuracy of the news, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but swallow his saliva. Then, suppressing the shock in his heart, he asked, ¡°Who did it, has it been found out?¡± Cui Changqing replied angrily, ¡°According to the traces left at the scene and the injuries on the victim, the attacker should be the false Emperor of Xi Shu, Li Xiong. His Cotton Yuan Sword is very distinctive. At the same time, the Five Poison Sect in our county is suspected of assisting the assassination.¡± Among the bandit corpses left at the scene, in addition to two famous top-notch experts from the Shu State, the left and right protectors of the Five Poison Sect were also found. These demonic sect members were utterly heinous, wantonly poisoning within the city. Besides the death of the Wuyang Marquis, thousands of innocent civilians were also poisoned and killed by these sect members. It was truly a crime against heaven.¡± Li Xiong and the Five Poison Sect were behind this? Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but be shocked again when hearing this news. It was understandable for Li Xiong to be involved since he was an Inborn Emperor and had the qualification to assassinate an Inborn Grandmaster. But when did the Five Poison Sect become so bold as to participate in such a plan? Weren¡¯t they afraid of the imperial court¡¯s reprisal afterward? Even if one Wuyang Marquis had died, there were still four other Inborn Grandmasters left in the imperial court. Moreover, the strength of each of the remaining four was said to be even stronger than that of the Wuyang Marquis. Marquis of Wuan, Bai Mengyang, was about to arrive at Dongting County with his troops. Weren¡¯t the Five Poison Sect afraid of being attacked by this Marquis after committing such a crime? With the strength of the four top-ranked members of the Five Poison Sect, were they really confident that they could withstand the retaliation of an Inborn Grandmaster? ¡®I always feel that the Five Poison Sect shouldn¡¯t be so foolish. If they really wanted to rebel, they would have done so when Jinghai Country was not yet conquered. Why would they wait until now? So this time, their actions must be based on certain assurances. But what kind of confidence and assurances could allow them to withstand an Inborn Grandmaster¡­¡¯ As this thought crossed his mind, Lu Yuan¡¯s heart tensed up, and his eyes widened as a possibility occurred to him. Taking a deep breath, he turned to look at Cui Changqing and asked, ¡°Has the Five Poison Sect produced an Inborn Grandmaster?¡± The Prefect nodded solemnly, ¡°Although there is no clear information yet, judging from the traces left in the great battle that night, the Five Poison Sect should have someone who has reached the Innate Realm. That¡¯s why they were able to envelop an area of hundreds of feet in a short time, poisoning thousands of people. Only when two Grandmasters join forces could the successful assassination of the Wuyang Marquis be explained.¡± Hearing this speculation, Lu Yuan¡¯s heart sank, and he asked with a grim expression, ¡®What does the county government plan to do now?¡± Cui Changqing replied solemnly, ¡°The Prefect believes that since the Five Poison Sect dared to join the Shu thieves in assassinating the Wuyang Marquis, they must have rebellious intentions. This sect has always been restless, frequently inciting local Miao People to rebel. This time, they probably saw that Marquis Wuan would soon arrive in the county with his army and feared being held accountable by the court. Hence, they committed such treasonous acts. Therefore, the Prefect thinks that since the Five Poison Sect dared to assassinate the Wuyang Marquis, they will not stop there. Considering their influence among the Miao People, they may soon stir up rebellion and create chaos in various places. Thus, the county government immediately sent an order to inform all prefectures and counties to fortify their city defenses and be on guard against Miao People¡¯s rebellion.¡± At this point, Prefect Cui looked at Lu Yuan and said, ¡°Commander Lu, as the Chief of the Military Officials of the Prefecture, you are in charge of guarding against the Miao People¡¯s rebellion. Rest assured, the Prefecture will fully support and coordinate all logistical and military provisions, so you won¡¯t have any worries.¡± Lu Yuan knew that the situation was critical and important, and although he had some concerns, he nodded and said, ¡°Sir, rest assured, with me here, the city will definitely be protected¡­¡± But before he could even finish his sentence, there was a sudden urgent shout from outside. ¡°Report¡ª A man dressed as a postman burst in from outside, and upon seeing the two, he knelt down and handed over an urgent message, ¡°Sirs, urgent news from Xinhua County. The local Miao People have rebelled, and now thousands of them have surrounded the county town. Due to the sudden outbreak of the rebellion, there are only a hundred county soldiers and a few temporary recruits defending the city. The County Magistrate sends an urgent request for the Prefecture to dispatch reinforcements quickly. Otherwise, it will be too late, and the city may fall.¡± With a hint of despair, the postman brought the two men terrible news. ¡°The Miao People¡¯s rebellion has come so quickly?¡± Prefect Cui couldn¡¯t believe the news. Lu Yuan was also deeply shocked, but he had practiced martial arts for a long time and reacted more quickly. He immediately said, ¡°Sir, the top priority right now is to quell the rebellion..¡± Chapter 170 - Chapter 170: Chapter 131 Observing the Wind Direction Chapter 170: Chapter 131 Observing the Wind Direction Translator: 549690339 No matter how fast the Five Poisons Sect¡¯s rebellion was, there was one thing Lu Yuan was certain of. That was, he could not let this demonic sect succeed. Otherwise, with the grudges between him and the Five Poisons Sect, once the situation stabilized, they would never let him off. As such, It was only natural for him to take advantage of this opportunity when the sect was just starting to cause trouble and suppress them ruthlessly. Rebellion, right? Inborn, right? ¡®I want to see what kind of waves your Five Poisons Sect can make in Shaoyang Prefecture while I am around!¡¯ After recovering from the initial shock, at this moment, Lu Yuan instantly realized that the opportunity he had been waiting for had finally arrived. The rebellion caused by the Five Poisons Sect would inevitably sweep across the entire Dongting Prefecture. And in this chaos, he, who commanded tens of thousands of elite soldiers and was already a first-class martial artist with the backing of the entire court, finally had the opportunity to show off his abilities. The advanced martial arts and Divine Blood Variants he had been longing for, might now be within reach. As for whether there would be any danger in facing the Five Poisons Sect head-on, Lu Yuan felt that, at the first-class level and below, with his current strength having refined three bizarre meridians and having a large army to protect him, he was more than safe. ¡°As for encountering an Inborn, let alone the Five Poisons Sect¡¯s Grandmaster, after assassinating Wuyang Marquis, there might not even be enough strength left to make a move. Given such a change in Dongting Prefecture, the court will definitely not sit idly by. Maybe it won¡¯t be long before Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang arrives hastily to settle the overall situation in Dongting Prefecture. This Marquis is said to be a second-level Inborn expert, whose strength cannot be compared to that of a first-level Inborn like Wuyang Marquis. With Wuan Marquis present, the Five Poisons Sect won¡¯t be able to make any waves.¡± Lu Yuan speculated in his heart, and felt much more at ease. It had never been heard before that the Five Poisons Sect possessed an Inborn Grandmaster. The sudden appearance of one now probably meant that they had recently broken through. As for the emperor of Shu State, Li Xiong, he had just broken through to Inborn last year. The two newly-birthed Inborn assassinating an old-timer Inborn, even if they managed to succeed by a fluke, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t believe that they wouldn¡¯t have to pay a price. The facts also proved this point. According to the news from the prefectural government, on the night of the assassination, besides the death of Wuyang Marquis and many innocent people caught in the crossfire, the assassins also left behind four corpses, two from Shu State and two from the Five Poisons Sect, all of whom were first-class martial artists. First-class martial artists are not common. The Five Poisons Sect originally only had four, and now there might only be one left since another has become an Inborn. At this point, losing two first-class members dealt a devastating blow to the Five Poisons Sect. ¡°So before Wuyang Marquis died, he fought back desperately, causing pain to the assassins. Besides the corpses of the four first-class martial artists, it is estimated that those who survived, including the two Inborn who executed the assassination, also suffered injuries.¡± Otherwise, if the two Inborn Grandmasters were unharmed, why would they have to flee immediately after the assassination that night? With the combined strength of the two Grandmasters and the assistance of others, their intimidation would be no less than tens of thousands of elite soldiers. They could have taken advantage of the situation to continue assassinating the Prefect and other officials in the city, completely paralyzing the central heart of the court in Dongting Prefecture. But they didn¡¯t do that. Such an outcome would not be due to kindness. Therefore, there was only one conclusion left. Their condition was very poor. They were afraid that if they stayed and faced the court¡¯s counterattack, more people would die and fall, so they had to withdraw.¡± Putting oneself in another¡¯s shoes, as a cautious cultivator of longevity, Lu Yuan could naturally deduce some of the thoughts of the assassins. And after deducing, he was naturally overjoyed. The top combat strength of the Five Poisons Sect had been severely damaged, and they would need to heal for a short period of time, rendering them unable to take action. Meanwhile, the Wuyang Marquis of the prefectural government was dead, along with a first-class official martial artist in the city. The two strongest Inborn Grandmasters in Dongting Prefecture, one after the other, were retired. The other first-class Grandmasters were also severely damaged. Apart from the Wuyang Marquis and the Five Poisons Sect, the other first-class forces in Dongting Prefecture had average heritage. The highest mental techniques within the sect could only cultivate to the extent of one or two bizarre meridians. After all, this prefecture belonged to the pioneering prefectures of Da Yue, which had been developing for hundreds of years and had never been prosperous. The sects established here were also relatively new, with a heritage of only a few hundred years. They couldn¡¯t compare to those sects with a history of thousands of years in other parts of Yue. With Lu Yuan¡¯s current practice of the fourth bizarre meridian, and his inner strength refined by the mysterious jade piece, even without the corresponding first-class moves, he could already suppress the ordinary first-class martial artists in the prefecture. ¡°So, after calculating all these factors, doesn¡¯t that mean I have become the strongest martial artist in Dongting Prefecture?¡± Lu Yuan was somewhat incredulous. He never thought that he would become the number one in Dongting Prefecture in such a way. ¡°I must remain steady, it is still necessary to be steady. My position as number one is just a temporary one, like a monkey that becomes king in the absence of a tiger in the mountains. I must not really think of myself as number one, and I should remain low-key when it¡¯s necessary.¡± Lu Yuan warned himself secretly, but the joy could not be hidden. While he said so, this was still the first place, after all. He didn¡¯t care much about the title itself, but the benefits brought by this temporary number one position were worth his attention. The simplest point.. Chapter 171 - Chapter 171: Chapter 131: Observing the Wind Direction_2 Chapter 171: Chapter 131: Observing the Wind Direction_2 Translator: 549690339 With Lu Yuan¡¯s current strength, along with the thousand elite soldiers he held, and even considering those tens of thousands of Village Braves. With such strength, as long as he wanted, no Jianghu sect within Dongting could resist, except for the Poison Sect. ¡°I once thought about imitating Li Xiong and seizing control of the territory directly. Actually, I have the means to do so now. But, attacking the Jianghu sects without reason doesn¡¯t have a good foundation and can easily invite opposition and hidden dangers. Maybe I should wait and see which Jianghu sects can¡¯t sit still and join the rebellion with the Poison Sect. At that time, I can use the support of the court, claiming righteousness and suppressing the rebellion. Then, I can claim both merits and seize those rebels at the same time. Wouldn¡¯t that be beautiful?¡± Lu Yuan doesn¡¯t think that those Jianghu sects are all honest and good-natured people. In this chaotic world, there¡¯s no shortage of ambitious individuals. Even a prudent person like himself was tempted to imitate Li Xiong¡¯s success. As for those short-lived species with a lifespan of only a hundred years, their limited lives would make it even more so. It is estimated that after a short while, when they see the decline of the court, there will be a proliferation of rebellion and fighting amongst the Prefectures and Counties. At that time, these rebels would provide him the nourishment and stepping stones on the road to becoming an innate expert. Having a rough assessment of the situation, Lu Yuan naturally executed his own plan. To suppress those upcoming rebels, he must possess sufficient strength. There are two types of strength. One is personal strength, and the other is collective strength. As for personal strength, Lu Yuan had almost reached his limit. Without the next method, he would not be able to progress much. But the collective strength could be manipulated much more extensively. Although the rules stipulated that a single Prefecture could only support a thousand soldiers, local governments couldn¡¯t exceed that number, otherwise, it would be considered harboring rebellion. Lu Yuan still planned to use the banner of Da Yue, and the current strength of the court was indeed quite strong. Naturally, he didn¡¯t want to make mistakes on such principle issues, which could bring the court¡¯s targeting. So, he dared not expand his army. However, the limit of one thousand soldiers only applied to the Fu City soldiers, not including the lower-level county soldiers. Shaoyang Prefecture had ten counties, and each county had a quota of one hundred county soldiers. Regardless of the county soldiers or Fu City soldiers, in essence, they were all regular soldiers, paid by the court. They were fundamentally different from the temporarily conscripted village braves. So after consulting Cui Changqing, and with the approval of the Prefect, Lu Yuan ordered all the county soldiers from each county to gather at Fu City and prepare to participate in the rescue of Xinhua County. Just wait for these county soldiers to arrive, along with the one thousand Fu City soldiers he had, the total force will be one thousand nine hundred elite. By then, adding some skilled fighters from the villages to form a five thousand strong army would be entirely possible. With such a large army and Lu Yuan, a first-class expert, as the backbone, even if an innate expert came, they might not necessarily be able to defeat them. It was precisely because of this solid strength that he dared to go beyond the norm during these turbulent times. The orders were passed down. Because the Fu City officials supervised the order transmission, the prefectures and counties handled it with astonishing efficiency. The order for the deployment of county soldiers and the selection of county elites was executed quite quickly. In just five days, besides the besieged Xinhua County, the county soldiers and village braves from the other nine counties had gathered in Fu City. However, after these people arrived, Lu Yuan discovered that the hundred county soldiers from the nine counties were not fully staffed. In the slightly better counties, like Wugang County where he had once served, there were still about seventy or eighty able county soldiers. But in other more poorly equipped counties, there might be only twenty or thirty capable county soldiers. In such a situation, the original nine hundred county soldiers had only five hundred in reality. Moreover, among these five hundred people, more than two hundred were unqualified, and their martial arts skills were even worse than the temporarily conscripted village braves. Seeing this, Lu Yuan was naturally furious. He regarded these soldiers as his shield, relying on their numbers to resist and wear down the enemy in times of danger. With the shield now showing flaws and potential problems with his life-saving measures, his anger was immense. A furious commander naturally shook the entire army. Lu Yuan directly ordered the dismissal and disbandment of all the unqualified county soldiers. These soldiers, who only knew how to oppress the common people and retreated from danger, were useless to keep around and would only harm the army. After removing these troublemakers, he ordered the selection of elite warriors from the conscripted village braves to fill the ranks of the county soldiers. Surprisingly, this task proceeded quite smoothly. Those chosen village braves had already practiced martial arts and were fierce individuals, including many mountain folk hunters who had experienced fighting. Thus, selecting the elite from these people was not very difficult. After selecting six hundred people or so, the nine hundred county soldiers were finally completed.. Chapter 172 - Chapter 172: Chapter 131: Observing the Wind Direction_3 Chapter 172: Chapter 131: Observing the Wind Direction_3 Translator: 549690339 Later, Lu Yuan began to think that Xinhua County was unlikely to hold on until his rescue, it was probably done for. So he simply upped his expense allotment and recruited an additional hundred men. Thus, after supplementing the prefecture troops and county soldiers, they now numbered two thousand. After selecting another three thousand sturdy village braves, Lu Yuan had a five-thousand-strong army. The massive army had been assembled, but he didn¡¯t immediately order a departure. Firstly among the county soldiers, many new ones had been supplemented, they varied greatly in quality and desperately needed training to familiarize the new soldiers with the battlefield. Not to mention those three thousand village braves, they were all a disorganized mess, unable to even stand in a proper formation. Of the five thousand-strong army, only the thousand Prefecture troops personally led by Lu Yuan, having been trained for almost half a year, seemed barely presentable. With such troops, going out to fight a war would only mean sending them to their death, wouldn¡¯t it? Of course, the rebels everywhere now were none other than the Miao people. These Miao people were originally commoners, albeit somewhat fierce. But when it came to the quality of soldiers, it was probably only equivalent to the three thousand village braves selected by Lu Yuan. It shouldn¡¯t be much better than that. He stood a high chance of success in leading his five thousand soldiers to rescue Xinhua county. ¡°But since we are all the government¡¯s administrative divisions, why should I be desperate to rescue them?¡± One day, after concluding the training of new soldiers, Lu Yuan had such thoughts in his mind when he dismissed again the messenger that Prefect Cui had sent to urge him to deploy his troops. Although he had made up his mind to take advantage of the chaos during the rebellion of the Poison Sect to reap considerable benefits. But how prudent was Lu Yuan? Previous conjectures were just that, conjectures. Without personally seeing the changes in the situation, he would not recklessly lead his troops to quell the rebellion, he would definitely not be the one to stick his neck out. So Xinhua county should be saved, but not now. At the very least, he had to wait until Marquis of Wuan, Bai Mengyang, arrived at Dongting Prefecture and took charge of the overall situation in the county before he could mobilize his troops. By that time, how the situation was in the county, whether the court was winning or losing, whether the rebellion was big or small, they should become clear. Then as the army leader of five thousand troops, Lu Yuan could decide his course of action based on how the situation evolved. One could advance or retreat, that was the art of using soldiers. What? What if Xinhua county can¡¯t hold out until then, and gets taken by the rebels? Well, if it was taken, it was taken! Afterall, the territory doesn¡¯t belong to Lu Yuan, it belongs to the court. If it¡¯s gone, it¡¯s gone, he doesn¡¯t care. Maybe if Xinhua county is breached, it could further stimulate the prefecture, allowing them to lift restrictions on his authority, and permit the expansion of the army? Having come to this world and become a general, Lu Yuan felt that if he didn¡¯t play this hand, he wouldn¡¯t be doing his painstakingly achieved position any justice. Moreover, Lu Yuan had a very compelling reason for not deploying his troops. The local military preparedness was lax, the prefecture soldiers were newly formed, and the county soldiers were too disorganized for war, hence more than half were disbanded. The remnants were village braves and a militia. This mess of a situation is such that, who could take it, prepare the military equipment, and dare to lead them onto the battlefield. Otherwise, if the rebellion is not successfully quelled and this five- thousand- strong army is lost. At that time, it won¡¯t be the small county town of Xinhua that is surrounded, but Shaoyang Prefecture directly besieged by the rebels. One must know, the Miao Rebel Army that surrounds Xinhua county now is said to number in the thousands. Five thousand against ten thousand, double the strength. Considering the well-known ferocity of the Miao barbarians, who would dare put the existence of his army on the line? The moment you dare to take on this responsibility, Lu Yuan won¡¯t say a word, he¡¯ll immediately deploy the troops. And naturally, that¡¯s not gonna happen in reality. Even Prefect Cui Changqing doesn¡¯t dare to take this responsibility at this moment. It¡¯s not that he fears the responsibility, but he is mainly worried that if this war is lost, Fu City would be affected. The result would be not just his death but losing Fu City, that would indeed be a great sin. So whoever comes along, Lu Yuan puts forth this recourse, to silence them. In fact, the effect is quite noticeable. At least, Prefect Cui, though urgent, also understands the severity and has not dared to directly command him to send out his troops. Obviously, he also realized that the newly formed rebellion-quelling army was indeed not very combat-ready. In the meantime, Lu Yuan continued to train his troops while watching the wind direction outside. Under normal circumstances, for the officials of the Da Yue Royal Court, the fourth year of Hongdao should have been a good year. Because at the end of last year, Jinghai Country had been destroyed and pacified. The financial deficit that had been engulfing the royal court, was suddenly filled in parts, leading to a significant improvement in the royal court¡¯s financial situation this year. However, this joy did not last long. Because right after that, on the twenty-third day of the second month in the fourth year of Hongdao, news came from Dongting Prefecture that Wuyang Marquis Li Gui, who had been suppressing the prefecture, was assassinated by Thief Shu false Emperor Li Xiong and the Poison Sect. This rebellious faction, the Poison Sect, had somehow birthed a Primordial Being. Without even waiting for the royal court to digest the shocking news of Wuyang Marquis being assassinated unexpectedly, on the twenty-fifth day of the second month, more news came from Dongting Prefecture. In less than two days after the assassination of Wuyang Marquis, there was a massive Miao rebellion in the ten Prefectures in the prefecture. According to the news sent by local prefectures and counties, there were at least thirty to fifty-thousand rebels within their boundaries, and in some areas as many as a hundred-thousand. The total number of Miao rebels within the prefecture was astonishingly five to six-hundred-thousand. Naturally, the court officials did not believe this number. The entire Miao population in Dongting prefecture, including men, women, elderly and children, was barely over a million. How could there be so many hundreds of thousands of rebels? Would they have even pulled the women onto the battlefield? That¡¯s too exaggerated. No matter how fierce the Miao people were, they would not be so fierce as to have their women go to battle. It was customary for local officials to exaggerate the number of bandits to cover up their own faults. The officials in the court were all promoted from the lower ranks and naturally they deeply understood this. Even though there might not be five-hundred to six-hundred thousand, even after halving and halving again, there should still be a hundred and two-hundred thousand Miao rebels. And that was enough to scare the officials. Even if these were chaotic people and not long-trained soldiers, given the natural ferocity of the Miao people, a hundred to two hundred thousand rebels would already be a terrifying number.. Chapter 173 - Chapter 173: Chapter 132: Dongting Savior Chapter 173: Chapter 132: Dongting Savior Translator: 549690339 So upon hearing the news of the rebellion, the court officials all had one thought. That is¡­ suppression, it must be suppressed. Never let these rebels build up momentum, so that they can join forces with the Xi Shu rebels. Otherwise, by that time, with the joint forces of both parties, an army of three to four hundred thousand can be formed. At that time, it would be truly an endless task for the court to suppress the rebellion, eliminate Xi Shu, and recover the Xichuan Prefecture. Seeing that the court had just begun to show signs of revitalization, and that he himself would also leave a glorious name in history for assisting in this revitalization. How could the court officials bear to watch the Miao Rebel Army destroy everything they had achieved? No need for further discussion. The moment the news of the rebellion was received, Emperor Hongdao issued an edict, ordering Marquis Wuan Bai Mengyang, who was resting his army in South Sea Prefecture, to depart immediately and head to Dongting Prefecture to stabilize the situation. As for the 50,000 Pingnan Army who were in the midst of rest and recuperation, they no longer had the leisure to continue, but instead were immediately redeployed to march northward, rushing to Dongting Prefecture to quell the rebellion. After all the arrangements like this had been made, the court officials and Emperor Hongdao could finally breathe a sigh of relief. With Bai Mengyang, a Second Realm Inborn Grandmaster, present, it was enough to make up for the loss of high-level combat power in Dongting Prefecture caused by Li Gui¡¯s absence. The subsequent 50,000-strong army was also elite, having fought both northward and southward. Last year, it even annihilated Jinghai Country, making it a well-acclaimed fighting force. With such an elite army in place, combined with local prefectural and county soldiers in Dongting Prefecture, it should be no big problem to suppress the Poison Sect¡¯s rebellion. However, not many days had passed since these deployments were arranged when, on the first day of the third month, an urgent report arrived from Wushan Prefecture in Xichuan Prefecture, stating that the Shu thieves and their Emperor had led a hundred thousand enemy soldiers in invading Guan City. Nowadays, there were continuous firefights under Wushan Pass. Wushan Prefecture defenders, whether they could be considered village braves or not, only numbered over twenty thousand, facing an enemy five times their number, they simply could not support for long, begging the court to quickly send reinforcements. But now where could the court find any reinforcements? More than three years of war had long since drained the treasury. Out of the nine prefectures of Da Yue, except for the occupied Xichuan Prefecture, five of the remaining eight prefectures had been completely ravaged. As for the better-off three prefectures, they had already been levied one after another, with some of the more extreme areas being taxed up to ten years in advance. The people could not bear the heavy burden, and many were already fleeing. Under such circumstances, where could the court find the money and food to form a large army, and where could it find the spare capacity to support the front line? In the end, with no other choice¡­ Emperor Hongdao had to issue an edict, allowing local officials and gentry in Dongting Prefecture to organize their own militia corps to defend their hometown. As for these local militiamen, they were all officially recognized by the court. At the same time, the wealthy gentry who had organized the militia were also granted corresponding official positions one by one. The bottom line that the court originally insisted on, not allowing the local regions to raise private troops, was broken in the crisis of Miao rebellion and Xi Shu¡¯s eastward expedition. Once this door is opened, the Dongting Prefecture localities, which already showed signs of warlordism due to the recruitment of village braves, may not take long before regional militias become ubiquitous. But the court could not care so much anymore. Let there be regional militias everywhere. No matter how unruly those regional militias may become, they still obey the orders of the court. Handing Dongting Prefecture over to them would be better than to the Poison Sect and the Pseudo-Shu rebels. So after issuing this ¡°local self-recruiting militia order,¡± the court left the matter to the original Dongting prefecture magistrate and ordered him to handle local affairs properly and fully support Marquis Wuan¡¯s anti-bandit campaign. After that, the court let go of the rebellion in Dongting Prefecture and the eastward expedition of Xi Shu thieves. With no money and no troops, they couldn¡¯t manage it at all. Everything was left to the local authorities of Dongting Prefecture to decide. Just as the uncertain nobles in the court were having a headache over the increasingly worsening situation in Dongting Prefecture¡­ At Dongting Prefecture, the prefecture government was also having a headache over the increasingly deteriorating situation below. The current magistrate of Dongting Prefecture was named Lu Fangai. Being able to hold the position of head of a prefecture and rule over thousands of miles of territory, this Magistrate Lu was naturally not an ordinary person. He was born in the Jinling Lu family, a family of prominent nobles in the capital, who had inherited the title of Ning Guogong for generations. They were among the top nobles in Da Yue. Lu Fangai was the current Ning Guogong, and it was precisely because of this illustrious title and the fact that the Lu family shared the same fate with the country that he was able to sit in the position of prefecture magistrate. Otherwise, for other people, let alone whether their background was prominent enough, even the issue of loyalty alone would make the court worry. Originally, Lu Fangai was quite satisfied with his current position. After all, although a prefecture magistrate is only a local post, it ranks as high as the second rank, and is not far off from the capital¡¯s various department secretaries. Although the city of Baling, the seat of Dongting Prefecture, is not as prosperous as Jinling City, it is still a famous city in the world and will not be too far off. What was even rarer was that in Dongting Prefecture, Lu Fangai was the highest-ranking official, and nobody could control him. It was not like in the capital, where although he was also a top gentry, there were many other dukes of the same rank, princes above him, and the emperor above him, making him feel completely uncomfortable. Therefore, Lu Fangai was quite happy about his appointment to Dongting Prefecture. But since a few years ago, this kind of happiness has been gradually diminishing. The rebellions and wars in various parts of Da Yue made the situation in this dynasty increasingly show signs of its final days. As the Ning Guogong, who shared the same fate as the country, Lu Fangai naturally watched this scene with worry in his heart. Unfortunately, although he was not a prodigal son, he had some knowledge, but he still couldn¡¯t do anything about the current collapsing situation in the world..

How could one not progress significantly in such an environment? Lu Yuan decided at that moment that he would not miss any future debates during the Tianluo Grand Meeting and would attend them all. There was still a month left before the Tianluo Grand Meeting ended. Listening to debates every day was equivalent to a month of intensive training. If he were to simply analyze his progress in terms of his Dao Law cultivation, this journey would be worth it. Time slowly passed. In the following days, as Dao Veins from various countries and regions arrived for the Inescapable Meeting, the small town at the foot of Tianluo Mountain became increasingly crowded with Daoists. Now, every inn in town was fully booked. Even those who arrived later and could not find rooms had to be accommodated in the homes of local residents to barely fit everyone. With the arrival of many Dao Veins, conflicts and contradictions between them became even more evident. The Inescapable Meeting was not a recent event ¨C it occurred once every ten years. In previous meetings, many Dao Veins had formed disputes, grudges, or even blood feuds. Naturally, when these Daoists met again, tensions ran high, and there was an unmistakable smell of gunpowder in the air. In the past two years, the Three Nations of Liang, Yue, and Zhou had been engaged in constant warfare, causing turmoil in the surrounding smaller countries as well. As a result, this conflict between nations began to spill over into the Dao Veins affiliated with each country, causing those who initially had no grievances to become hostile due to national and family hatreds. All these conflicts of interest and deep-rooted enmities had made the atmosphere of this Inescapable Meeting even more explosive. Various lecture platforms sprung up like bamboo shoots after a rain, set up in the inns and restaurants of the small town. Dao Veins from various countries found their targets and vied for supremacy, setting up numerous challenges and debates. At any given time, there were more than a dozen lecture platforms hosting philosophical debates, with representatives from various Dao Veins discussing their doctrines and showcasing their principles to the audience. This was a delight for Lu Yuan. During this period, he spent his days attending various debates, listening to the arguments of the Daoists on stage. He felt his mindset expand, his insights improve rapidly, and his understanding of Dao Law reached new depths like an accelerator had been applied.. Chapter 261 - Chapter 261: Chapter 165: The Dharma Assembly Begins_3 Chapter 261: Chapter 165: The Dharma Assembly Begins_3 Translator: 549690339 Such a grand Daoist gathering was truly a heaven-sent opportunity for this cultivator. Even the Shangguan siblings who had been clinging to Lu Yuan, after listening to a few discussions on Dao Law, began to look for their favorite Lecture Platforms and listen to various Dao masters and Grandmasters¡¯ lectures. As talents from various Daoist Paths appeared one after another, the Divine Officer Path Qingying Master, who had previously defeated the martial artists from various countries, finally met his match. The Taoist Immortal Path Master from a foreign land fought three rounds with him, from dawn to dusk, finally winning two rounds and driving him down from the platform. This event was widely regarded by many cultivators attending as one of the most outstanding among the hundreds of lectures, even rivaling the formal lectures in past years. The high quality of this debate could be seen from this. As for Lu Yuan, who had listened to the entire debate, he gained a lot and felt it was well worth the trip. Both the Green Shadow Master and Master Taoxian Dao were not only experts in Dao Law but had also reached the Innate Realm in martial arts. Their debates were not only about Dao Law but also about martial arts cultivation methods. Unconsciously, some ideas about martial arts cultivation were revealed in their debate, and the insights of the Inborn Grandmasters were invaluable for those like Lu Yuan who had reached the peak of martial arts and were approaching the Innate Realm. After the debate, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t dare to claim a direct breakthrough, but he already had a vague concept and direction on how to break through the Innate Realm. In the future, given some time to consolidate, it would certainly yield some results. With these gains in martial arts, Lu Yuan became more enthusiastic about attending other gatherings. However, unfortunately, the quality and realm of the other gatherings were far below that of the debate between Master Taoxian Dao and Green Shadow Master. Not to mention the lack of martial arts ideas, even the Dao Law Realm was far behind. Nevertheless, there were still some gains for Lu Yuan. Thus, he continued to attend the lectures while looking forward to the official opening of the Inescapable Meeting. The prelude to the event had already yielded such good results and gains. When the event finally began, Lu Yuan believed that his gains would be at least double what they were now. While he anticipated the opening, time soon came to the 15th of August. On this day, the bells rang continuously on Tianluo Mountain, and the drums and firecrackers resounded. A faint mist drifted down from the mountain, gathering between the small paths leading up the mountain, obscuring the layered steps like the celestial ladder of the Immortal Realm. ¡°Open the Inescapable Meeting!¡± At the end of the steps at the foot of the mountain, a purple-robed Daoist from Tianluo Mountain shouted loudly. The Daoists from various sects who had been waiting for a long time had already lined up in two rows according to their status, all heading up the mountain. This scene truly resembled the gathering of ten thousand immortals, with an extraordinary momentum. The prestige of Ziyun Dao and the status of the Daoist factions were clearly displayed here. Halfway up the mountain, Lu Yuan, who was in the middle and rear of the line, blended into the crowd. He glanced at the front, where among the mist, the clear figures of many cultivators were barely visible. Then he looked back at the long line which seemed to have no end, feeling a little moved. ¡°I can roughly understand why Ziyun Dao wants to hold such a grand gathering every ten years.¡± The gathering of the ten thousand immortals was merely a scene of hundreds of Daoist Paths paying respects to Ziyun Dao, which was enough to absorb the Qi Fate of the entire Daoist world. While this act of mountain Dilzrimaze acknowledged that thev were lower in status than Ziyun Dao, it also established their place in the hierarchy. Which of them, encountering a Ziyun Dao cultivator in the future, could stand up to them? ¡°I heard that Feishuang Tao (Flying Frost way), Liang Kingdom¡¯s Cang Long Way (Azure Dragon Way), Zhou Country¡¯s Yuchan Tao (Jade Toad Way), and the overseas Juling Tao (Giant Spirit Way), which all possess Immortal Techniques, also organize their own Daoist gatherings every ten years, inviting various Daoist Paths from all over the world to participate. When these six Dao gatherings take place, they don¡¯t have to wait at the foot of the mountain like us. Instead, they can go directly up the mountain and avoid the queue. Whether they possess Immortal Techniques or not truly determines the status between the various Daoist Paths. Among the Nine Provinces and ten domains, the Daoist Paths of Ziyun and the six others reign supreme, while the other Daoist Paths can only meekly submit to the arrangements. Although masking it as a gathering for learning, the reality of the strong preying on the weak and the hierarchy between monarchs and ministers were already established.¡± As Lu Yuan walked, his understanding of the true meaning of the Inescapable Meeting deepened. Although it was a grand Daoist debate, it was also a summit between Daoist factions, an acknowledgment of the Ziyun Dao¡¯s supremacy. Turns out, Ziyun Dao had its own motives for holding such a grand gathering. ¡°I wonder what the participating Daoist Paths think about this?¡± Lu Yuan looked around and saw in those within thirty feet of him, no resentment on the faces of the many cultivators in line. What they often saw was delight. Among the lower-ranking Daoist Paths, it seemed that many had already accepted the disparity in status and acknowledged Ziyun Dao as their master. He couldn¡¯t help but wonder what Daoist Paths slightly below the six others, such as the Divine Official Way and Taoxian Dao, were thinking. With these thoughts in mind, Lu Yuan finally reached the clouds after walking on the Cloud Ladder for half a day. He saw a splendid palace on a vast platform near the top of the mountain, a square in front of him with ten high platforms and rows of neatly arranged meditation cushions in front of them. By now, the many Daoists who had already lined up had entered the venue under the arrangement of Ziyun Dao¡¯s cultivators, taking their seats one by one. Close to a thousand meditation cushions had been set out, with more than half already occupied. ¡°Fellow Daoist, please take a seat here.¡± As Lu Yuan followed the crowd to the back row of meditation cushions, a Ziyun Dao cultivator pointed to a spot in the distance and said with a smile. ¡°Thank you, Fellow Daoist.¡± Lu Yuan nodded slightly and walked straight to his designated spot without further ado.. Chapter 262 - Chapter 262: Chapter 166: Meeting the Dao Master Chapter 262: Chapter 166: Meeting the Dao Master Translator: 549690339 Seated in his place, Lu Yuan looked left and right. Apart from Qi Yun, who had accompanied him, everyone else was unfamiliar to him. As for the Shangguan siblings. Due to the background of the Shangguan family, they were arranged to sit near the front rows early on, and currently sat in the first two rows, giving them the best view of the high platform. This worldly power and status pervaded even the Ziyun Path and was impossible to avoid. At this moment, Qi Yun was sitting on his cloth cushion with half-closed eyes, breathing evenly as he casually meditated. Many Daoists nearby were also doing the same thing. Seeing this scene, Lu Yuan figured the conference wouldn¡¯t start that soon and followed suit, meditating with closed eyes. After a short wait, when everyone had taken their seats, a resounding gong was struck, hanging among a small pavilion in front of the palace on the high platform. ¡°Heaven and Earth have Dao, and immortals illuminate it.¡± A resonant voice sounded from the front. Opening his eyes, Lu Yuan saw six figures appear at the steps in front of the palace door on the high platform. ¡°Today, our Inescapable Meeting begins, and I am greatly pleased to see all of you fellow Daoists gathered here. This grand meeting aims to provide a place for fellow practitioners of the world to exchange ideas and allow us Daoist cultivators to make allies and pursue the Dao together. Hence, the focus of the meeting is on making friends and promoting harmony, as well as discussing the Dao without involving disputes. I hope you fellow Daoists can deeply understand this and not harm the harmony for your fellow practitioners out of momentary righteousness. ¡± Among the six figures in front, an elder with a white beard stood in the first row, stroking his beard and smiling as he said, ¡°That¡¯s all that needs to be said. Now, I declare that the meeting formally begins at this moment. Next up is the first part of the meeting, exchanging knowledge on Dwelling with the Dao. We are cultivating in seclusion, and our knowledge is limited and can lead to narrow-mindedness. One must know that there are numerous paths in the world, the grandeur of mountains and rivers in the world, and the marvels of Heaven and Earth, all of which contain the true essence of the Dao. Therefore, as our generation of cultivators, we should travel extensively, observe and learn from the world, melting all things in Heaven and Earth into our Dao heart. Fellow Daoists, in the next three days, you can freely seek like-minded people here to make friends with and broaden your acquaintance among Daoist cultivators of the world, strengthening your own Dao heart.¡± After the white-bearded elder finished his opening remarks, he chuckled and said, ¡°As the host, let me introduce myself first. I am Zhen Xuan, the master of the Ziyun Path. Today, I am here to gather friends from all over the world. Fellow Daoists, if you are interested, you are welcome to discuss the Dao with me. I would be delighted to make new friends.¡± After the master of the Ziyun Path spoke, the other five figures next to him also opened their mouths in turn. ¡°I am a Law Elder of the Feishuang Tao, Jinyun. Fellow Daoists¡­¡± ¡°I am an elder of the Dan Ding Path, Anqiu. Fellow Daoists¡­¡± These five people introduced themselves in succession, all of them elders from the other five paths, and their words were similar to those of Zhen Xuan, welcoming fellow Daoists to make their acquaintance. However, although they said so, many Daoists in the audience didn¡¯t show much change in expression after listening to their words, except for some with odd looks in the front row. ¡°Taoist Lu, if you are interested later, you can go to the stage, find other Daoists, and establish relationships with them,¡± Qi Yun turned and said to Lu Yuan, ¡°At present, Daoists from more than ten countries have gathered, and the ideologies of various Dao veins in different places also vary greatly. Associating with them will help you broaden your horizons and gain a lot.¡± ¡°As for the true person, such as the master of the Ziyun Path, even though we all have the opportunity to get to know them, it¡¯s better for you not to bother them.¡± When he spoke, the six masters and elders from the six major factions had already finished their speech and had taken their seats, waiting in front of the stage for Daoists to come and mingle. Meanwhile, many people below the stage began to take action, rising from their seats and talking to fellow Daoists around them, gradually creating a lively atmosphere. Lu Yuan looked around and saw that among the more than a thousand people, nobody went to the stage and approached the master of the Ziyun Path and the others. He understood their mindset and reassured Qi Yun, ¡°Fellow Daoist, don¡¯t worry. I¡¯m not one who fails to know the difference between right and wrong, and I have my own plans.¡± Though he said so, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel regretful in his heart. When he heard earlier that the master of the Ziyun Path said the people in the audience could also seek to befriend him, he was very moved. That master of the Ziyun Path was a person who had cultivated the Immortal Technique, with unfathomable strength. It would be tremendously helpful to be able to ask him for guidance, not to mention the possibility of being brought into the Immortal Sect, but even to simply ask about breaking through the innate barriers. But as it seemed now, the so-called befriending was just empty words. They said they welcomed fellow Daoists from all over the world to get to know each other, but considering the level of the other party, the gold content of this ¡°fellow Daoist¡± could be easily imagined. If you didn¡¯t have the self-awareness and forced yourself in, they might not say anything out of politeness. But if any trouble or problems arise in the future, don¡¯t blame others for it.¡± With a sigh in his heart, Lu Yuan also gathered his energy and began to search for worthy fellow Daoists around him. Although he couldn¡¯t get to know and chat with the master of the Ziyun Path and others, which was quite regretful, there were still more than a thousand Daoists on the ground who came from all over the world and were invited here, and the vast majority of whom had enough strength. For the simplest example, having looked around the venue, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t find a single person with less than second-rate strength. Such strength, when demonstrated elsewhere, would have been hard even for the Da Yue Dynasty court to gather. Yet now, they gathered together at a single meeting.. Chapter 263 - Chapter 263: Chapter 166: Meeting the Dao Master_2 Chapter 263: Chapter 166: Meeting the Dao Master_2 Translator: 549690339 The influence of the Inescapable Meeting in Ziyun Dao can be seen in the world of the Daoist Path. For Lu Yuan, the gathering of so many powerful experts was a great opportunity. Becausethe more experts there were, the more top-level experts would be present. Indeed, just by browsing around, Lu Yuan had already encountered no less than ten top-tier experts, including even one Inborn Grandmaster. However, upon closer inspection, he found that these top-tier experts all had their own small circles and only conversed with acquaintances, not really willing to accept outsiders. So, he wisely chose not to force his way in. Wandering aimlessly, he suddenly caught a glimpse of Qi Yun who had already happily joined a group of three Daoists and was engaged in lively conversation. It seemed like a reunion of old friends who had known each other for a long time. ¡®Those must be fellow Daoists he met at the previous meetings,¡¯ Lu Yuan thought, not approaching the group. Qi Yun¡¯s fellow Daoists might not necessarily be his own. It might sound cruel, but that was the reality. With Lu Yuan¡¯s current strength, the Daoist friends Qi Yun could make at his level were no longer of much significance to him. Perhaps that was why, after reminding Lu Yuan, Qi Yun went off to find his fellow Daoists without inviting him along. ¡°Brother Lu. ¡± Just as Lu Yuan was looking for suitable Daoist friends, a familiar voice called out to him from the side. Turning his head, he saw that it was Shangguan Haimoon and her brother, who had separated from him. They were now gathered with about a dozen others, and Shangguan Haimoon waved at him cheerfully. Glancing at the people gathered around the Shangguan siblings, Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes narrowed slightly. In this group, he saw six top-tier experts, one of them even at the peak of top-tier experts. Although their aura seemed weaker than his own, they were still very close to the Innate level. With nearly half of the small circle being top-tier experts, the Shangguan family¡¯s social circle was truly extraordinary. Lu Yuan walked over to them after a brief moment of reflection and greeted the Shangguan siblings, ¡°Brother Shangguan, Miss Shangguan.¡± ¡°Has Brother Lu found any Daoist friends yet?¡± Shangguan Haimoon walked over to Lu Yuan, asking curiously. ¡°Not yet. Finding fellow Daoists is not an easy task.¡± Lu Yuan shook his head. ¡°Is that so?¡± Shangguan Haimoon smiled and then pulled Lu Yuan to introduce him to the others, ¡°Since Brother Lu is here, why not join us?¡± Seeing Shangguan Haimoon¡¯s attitude towards Lu Yuan, especially taking the initiative to get closer to a man, everyone couldn¡¯t help but be surprised. Some people were already curious about Lu Yuan¡¯s identity. ¡°Haimoon, who is this gentleman?¡± A middle-aged man in a white robe asked at this time. ¡°Uncle Yang, let me introduce you: this is the Pingxi General of the court and the Marquis of Luyang, Lu Yuan.¡± Shangguan Haimoon introduced Lu Yuan to everyone while holding his hand. Then she turned to Lu Yuan and said, ¡°Brother Lu, everyone here is from our six surnames and seven families. This is Uncle Yang Jing, the Taichang Temple Minister and the spokesperson of the South Ridge Yang Family. ¡± Taichang Temple Minister was in charge of the ancestral temple worship of the court. It was a third-rank official, the same rank as Lu Yuan¡¯s Pingxi General. It seemed that the court was not completely indifferent to the Ziyun Dao event by sending this Taichang Temple Minister to attend the gathering. ¡°Pingxi General!¡± ¡°Marquis of Luyang?¡± At this moment, amongst the crowd, some of the younger generation began to whisper to each other. Many people even appeared surprised and enlightened since Lu Yuan¡¯s reputation was something they had long heard of. As one of the few victorious generals in the court¡¯s recent military defeats, Lu Yuan naturally attracted widespread attention. Even his conferment as Marquis had been discussed extensively among the people present. Now that they saw him in person, it piqued the interest of many. Although the younger ones were surprised, envious, and even jealous, the older generations, especially the representatives from various families, and those top-tier experts were shocked after seeing Lu Yuan. Lu Yuan could perceive their strength, and these people were naturally able to perceive his as well. Moreover, because of their prominent backgrounds, they had even broader knowledge. At this moment, they could see that Lu Yuan was at the peak of top-tier experts and close to breaking through to the Innate realm. Realizing this, their gaze towards Lu Yuan changed instantly. An army leader who was merely capable of commanding some troops, previously, wouldn¡¯t have been valued highly by these noble families. However, when combining those qualifications with the potential of becoming a future Inborn Grandmaster, it made a huge difference. From once not being suitable for socializing with the six surnames and seven families, their attitude changed to view him as an equal and worthy of forging relationships with. Among them, Yang Jing felt the deepest impact. That was because he was the one identified as having reached the peak of top-tier experts and was qualified to challenge the Innate realm. But precisely because they both were at the peak of top-tier experts, Yang Jing could feel even more deeply how fearsome Lu Yuan was. ¡®This young man has an elusive and agile aura, naturally mysterious ¨C a characteristic only possessed by innate experts. Yet, at the peak of top-tier experts, he already has the qualities that belong to innate experts.. Chapter 264 - Chapter 264: Chapter 166: Meeting the Dao Master_3 Chapter 264: Chapter 166: Meeting the Dao Master_3 Translator: 549690339 With such strength, he could probably break through Inborn in just a few months if given the right method.¡¯ Yang Jing thought this in his heart, looking at Lu Yuan, taking him very seriously. He looked at Shangguan Haimoon, who was still holding onto Lu Yuan¡¯s hand, and thought to himself that the Shangguan family really moved fast. He showed a smile on his face and greeted, ¡°I was wondering which family¡¯s young man could attract Miss Shangguan¡¯s attention. So it¡¯s Lu Pingxi. Indeed, a beauty is a perfect match for a hero. General Lu is a heroic man, and he deserves a beauty by his side.¡± Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t afford to neglect this Taichang Temple Minister who was of the same rank as him, from a big family background, and possibly carrying a special mission from the court. He withdrew his hand from Shangguan Haimoon and returned the greeting, ¡°I am just a coarse military man, not worthy of being called a hero. Lord Yang, you praise me too much.¡± ¡°General Lu is being modest.¡± Yang Jing was not fooled by Lu Yuan¡¯s modesty. He looked at Lu Yuan and then glanced around, smiling as he said, ¡°Is the general here to meet Master Ziyun? If so, you can come with us. We, people from the six surnames and seven clans, are just about to pay our respects to Master Ziyun and present our greetings from each family.¡± Lu Yuan was worried about how to meet Master Ziyun. At this moment, seeing people from the six surnames and seven clans, they could actually directly go and pay their respects, he was overjoyed and hurriedly said, ¡°I indeed want to meet True Person Zhen Xuan. If Lord doesn¡¯t mind, let¡¯s go together.¡± As he spoke, his gaze looked towards Ziyun Master¡¯s direction. At this time, he saw that some people had already gone up to pay their respects to the six of them. Actually, Lu Yuan recognized these people too. They were Dao masters from various Dao Veins who had previously set up lecture platforms to discuss the Dao at the foot of the mountain, including the Green Shadow Master. Those who could pay their respects to Master Ziyun were indeed of high rank and status. Either they had to be people from the six surnames and seven clans like Yang Jing, or they had to be masters of various Dao Veins. Those with lower backgrounds, even if they were first-class experts, didn¡¯t have the qualifications to approach them. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t know if his status as Pingxi General and Marquis of Luyang was enough to qualify. But if he went with the people of the six surnames and seven clans, then he should be qualified. ¡°Since the general doesn¡¯t mind, let¡¯s go together.¡± Seeing that Lu Yuan was willing, Yang Jing smiled and stroked his beard, knowing in his heart that he had successfully sold a favor to Lu Yuan. At this time, the Green Shadow Master and others, who were paying their respects in front of the hall, seemed to have finished their greetings and were walking down from the front of the hall. There was no one else around in other areas who seemed interested in paying respects to Master Ziyun and the others, leaving an opening. So Yang Jing said, ¡°Since the others have finished their greetings, let¡¯s go and see Master Ziyun now.¡± No one had any objections, so they followed Yang Jing to the stairs, preparing to meet Master Ziyun. Along the way, the other people from the six surnames and seven clans greeted Lu Yuan and introduced themselves. Through these introductions, Lu Yuan understood why these people were qualified to meet Master Ziyun. The older people from the six surnames and seven clans present were officials above the third or fourth rank in the court, occupying high positions and wielding great power. The younger ones were all legitimate heirs of the major families, destined to become family leaders in the future. Moreover, these people from the big families all had titles. Whether they were dukes or marquises, their ranks were higher than Lu Yuan¡¯s. Even Shangguan Haimoon had the title of County Princess of Guanghai. These were the real people of power. To put it bluntly, the fate of Da Yue for the next hundred years was in the hands of these people in front of them. Such a group of people, of course, were qualified to pay their respects to Master Ziyun. After conversing with these people, Lu Yuan gained a deeper understanding of the background of the six surnames and seven clans. Let¡¯s not mention their knowledge and cultivation, as they were all standard features of big families and would not be too different. In terms of strength alone, every outstanding young man present, whether an aspiring junior or a pillar of the family, was second or top-tier. The growth rate of these people was not inferior to Lu Yuan¡¯s and Zhou Qing¡¯s, and some were even stronger than the two of them at the same age. Take Yang Jing for example, he was only in his early forties and had already reached the pinnacle of the first-class. Considering the background of these big families, breaking through Innate for him was almost a certainty. The only question was whether he would break through within five years or ten years. It seemed that his pace was slower than Lu Yuan¡¯s, but you had to consider the many medicines Lu Yuan had taken, the help of the Jade Immortal Fate, and even the experience solidification of his Attribute Template. With many golden fingers, he was only ten years faster than Yang Jing, which showed the power and depth of the latter¡¯s foundation. And not just Yang Jing, other first-class experts present were also not weak in terms of strength, though their innate talent and gift were slightly worse than Yang Jing¡¯s. Breaking through Innate might be difficult for them in the future, but it should not be too challenging for them to reach the pinnacle of the first-class. As for the younger disciples of the various clans present, it was too early to tell as they were too young. However, given their background and status, a first-class pinnacle level of strength would be guaranteed in the future. Breaking through Innate was not impossible. When Chu Wei said that he was just average in terms of talent within his family, it was not him being sarcastic; he really was just average.. Chapter 265 - Chapter 265: Chapter 166: Meeting the Dao Master_4 Chapter 265: Chapter 166: Meeting the Dao Master_4 Translator: 549690339 As Lu Yuan was thinking this, he couldn¡¯t help but feel more cautious towards the court and the six major and seven minor families. At this time, everyone had already passed the nine hundred and ninety steps and arrived in front of the grand hall. Ahead, Dao master Ziyun and others looked over attentively. ¡°Nanling Yang Family Yang Jing, paying respects to the True Persons.¡± Yang Jing stepped forward quickly, arriving in front of the True Persons and saluting respectfully. ¡°You may stand.¡± Among the True Persons, Dao master Ziyun glanced at Yang Jing, then smiled and lifted his hand: ¡°Taoist Yang, it¡¯s been ten years since we last met. You have already reached the edge of the Tongxuan Realm. In no time, you will break through the Heavenly and Earthly Mysterious Barrier and enter the Innate Realm. This is truly a joyous occasion.¡± Upon hearing Dao master Ziyun say this, Yang Jing¡¯s face showed a smile, but he still humbly said: ¡°Such a small accomplishment is laughable in the eyes of Dao master.¡± Dao master Ziyun simply chuckled, and the other True Persons by his side also laughed. In the world of Martial Arts, the Inborn is the ultimate limit, and only then can one become a Grandmaster. Although they cultivated the Immortal Method, their knowledge of Martial Arts was not deep. However, among the six True Persons present, except for Dao master Ziyun who could easily defeat an Inborn Grandmaster, the other five, although they knew some Immortal Techniques, were merely on par with Inborn Grandmasters. If Inborn accomplishments are considered insignificant, what do they themselves count as? Therefore, the way everyone looked at Yang Jing was indeed as a Fellow Daoist. As a Martial Arts Grandmaster, he was on equal footing with these True Persons. After paying his respects, Yang Jing stepped aside, leaving room for his companions behind him. The others then came forward one by one to pay their respects. ¡°Shuyang Bai Family Bai Ling, paying respects to the True Persons.¡± ¡°Lihu Li Family Li Mingyu, paying respects to the True Persons.¡± ¡°Shangguan Family from the Golden Hall, Shangguan Guangbai/Shangguan Haimoon, paying respects to the True Persons.¡± Soon, the people from the six major and seven minor families had paid their respects to the True Persons. But apart from Yang Jing, the six True Persons simply nodded their heads when faced with others, offering at most a few words of advice, and then not saying much more. The difference in attitude was so evident that even Lu Yuan, who was standing behind, could feel it clearly. So when it was his turn, he couldn¡¯t help but feel a little nervous. With the attitudes of these True Persons, was there really a chance to ask them some questions when he went up to pay his respects? If not, what was the point of this visit, just to exchange a few words? ¡°Junior Lu Yuan, paying respects to the True Persons.¡± Lu Yuan was the last one to come forward to pay his respects. He didn¡¯t add any background or origin to his name because he didn¡¯t have one to begin with. As for official titles and ranks, after seeing the treatment of the children from those big families, he knew that such things didn¡¯t matter to these True Persons. So it was better to just honestly call himself a junior. After speaking, he stood upright, waiting for a few words of encouragement from the True Persons before he could obediently withdraw. However, things did not seem to go as he wished. After Lu Yuan introduced himself, he noticed Dao master Ziyun at the forefront suddenly stared at him intensely, exclaiming: ¡°Eh!¡± Not only him, but the other True Persons also showed a few hints of astonishment after their gazes passed over Lu Yuan. ¡°How is it possible?¡± ¡°The aura of the Immortal Spirit!¡± A few of the True Persons couldn¡¯t help but blurt out. The attitudes of the six True Persons immediately caused astonishment on the faces of the others from the six major and seven minor families. They looked at Lu Yuan and at the True Persons, not knowing what had happened. As for Lu Yuan, when he heard the phrase ¡°Immortal Spirit,¡± his heart raced. Vaguely, he already had an inkling of what might have happened. ¡®Could it be that my jade piece has been discovered by these True Persons?¡¯ This thought emerged in his heart, followed by a wave of nervousness. Facing so many True Persons, especially with Dao master Ziyun among them, he would not have a chance to resist if they wanted to do something to him. Just then, Dao master Ziyun, who had first exclaim in surprise, finally withdrew his gaze from Lu Yuan and spoke: ¡°Taoist Lu, may I ask if you have practiced any Immortal Techniques and are a cultivator of my Immortal Method?¡± At these words, the whole hall was filled with astonishment.. Chapter 266 - Chapter 266: Chapter 167: Cave Heaven and Blessed Land Chapter 266: Chapter 167: Cave Heaven and Blessed Land Translator: 549690339 Have I cultivated the Immortal Technique? Faced with this inquiry, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel shocked for a moment. He soon realized that it was probably due to his altered inner strength after the jade piece transformed his body, which misled the other party. He was well aware that the jade piece was an extraordinary encounter. However, Lu Yuan had been unable to activate it all along, only using it to enhance the purity of his inner strength. Could it be that his refined inner strength was somehow connected to the legendary Immortal Technique after all? With this guess in his mind, Lu Yuan showed confusion after his astonishment, ¡°Why would True Person say this? Although I yearn for the Immortal Method, I¡¯ve been seeking it in vain. I¡¯ve only practiced some martial arts and achieved little success. Where does this Immortal Technique come from?¡± Zhen Xuan True Person looked at him, his eyebrows slightly furrowed, and examined him again. Upon closer inspection this time, he indeed noticed a difference in the aura of Lu Yuan in comparison to the other True Persons present. Although there was an elusive Immortal Spirit, it essentially had a few more traces of turbid life force that resembled martial arts inner strength, rather than the pure Immortal Spirit. ¡°It seems I made a mistake.¡± Zhen Xuan True Person looked at Lu Yuan with an apologetic smile on his face, ¡°Just now, I saw similarities between Fellow Daoist¡¯s aura and that of fellow cultivators of the Immortal Method, so I thought you were also from the Immortal Method. It seems now that I have misjudged. However, the Immortal Spirit on Fellow Daoist¡¯s body cannot be faked. May I ask, did you have any extraordinary encounters related to Immortal Techniques in the past?¡± Realizing that his question was perhaps too abrupt, Zhen Xuan quickly added, ¡°Fellow Daoist, please don¡¯t misunderstand. Poor Daoist here does not covet your experiences, but this is the first time I¡¯ve seen such a situation, which has left me puzzled. If Fellow Daoist could explain, I would appreciate the clarification. Of course, if you cannot speak about it, it is not a big deal. It is your own fortune, and outsiders like us should not inquire.¡± Upon hearing Zhen Xuan¡¯s words, the curious gazes of the others in the vicinity were involuntarily drawn towards Lu Yuan. Especially those from the six families and seven clans, who looked at him with astonishment in their eyes, as if they were about to jump out of their sockets. Originally, to these people, Lu Yuan was a future Inborn Grandmaster with limitless potential. However, it seemed as if they still underestimated this Pingxi General, as the secrets surrounding him appeared even more numerous than previously imagined. An extraordinary encounter with an Immortal, something that one can only chance upon but not seek out. Had he really obtained it? When they thought about this, many people couldn¡¯t help but feel envious and jealous, wishing they could take his place. Having drawn the attention of so many eager stares, Lu Yuan knew that he couldn¡¯t avoid it this time, whether he spoke or not. So after some careful consideration, he finally spoke up amidst the silence, ¡°I do not dare to hide the truth from True Person for this minor fortune. It is true that I, Lu, experienced a stroke of luck in my early years. I was originally a hunter born on Dayu Mountain, who struggled for life against wild beasts while crossing mountains and ridges every day. One day, while hunting in the mountains, I stumbled upon a cave and found within it several books, an Elixir, and some silver taels. Later, I used the silver taels to study and read the obtained books, discovering that they were a martial arts secret book, a memoir, and a Taoist classic. Through the memoir, I learned that these books, the Elixir, and the silver taels were left by a casual cultivator named Qingyu who had lived in seclusion in the deep mountains, desperately seeking the Immortal Method but ultimately found nothing. In the end, he left behind a self-written Taoist classic and the remaining Elixir he had refined, hoping to pass on his legacy to future generations. As for the martial arts secret book, he knew that even with this legacy, it would be difficult to cultivate immortality, so he passed it down to protect oneself. Since then, I have cultivated martial arts myself, and with the help of the Elixir, reached my current level of cultivation. After I consumed the Elixir, I discovered that it helped enhance my cultivation, and my Inner Strength became more refined and ethereal than an ordinary person¡¯s. Perhaps the Immortal Spirit that True Person mentioned comes from this?¡± Lu Yuan pondered and finally gave an answer after much deliberation. After all, his background as a hunter was true, and it was also true that he used money to learn to read and began practicing martial arts during that time. As for the improvement of his inner strength, it indeed began after he started practicing martial arts. All of the above was true, and even if someone investigated, the outcome would be no different from what he said. He merely attributed the silver taels and secret books he obtained from Ma Jiqing and the Immortal modality jade piece obtained from Sun Siwen to a nonexistent cave dwelling and the nonexistent legacy of Qingyu Taoist. His real hidden cards remained concealed. Such a half-true and half-false explanation was undoubtedly the most difficult to see through. Besides, it was not uncommon for practitioners to live in seclusion and cultivate in the deep mountains. The most obvious example was Lu Yuan¡¯s friend, Qi Yun Taoist, who was living proof of such. So after speaking, the expressions of those present varied, but many of them believed it to be true. Among those from the six families and seven clans, quite a few knew of Lu Yuan¡¯s background, as the court would not grant him a title without a background check. Lu Yuan¡¯s life experiences and his ancestry had been thoroughly investigated. Now, comparing the two backgrounds, the trajectory matched perfectly, and they immediately believed him. The remaining two points of suspicion lay in whether Lu Yuan had any other secrets, such as whether the Immortal opportunity was solely an Elixir or if it also contained some Immortal Techniques? Chapter 267 - Chapter 267: Chapter 167: Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens 2 Chapter 267: Chapter 167: Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens 2 Translator: 549690339 Of course. even if thev had doubts, no one could iust directlv ask. After all, Lu Yuan was a top-notch master, as well as a lord who held tens of thousands of mighty soldiers. With such status, it was already good enough that he was willing to reveal his secrets. You really shouldn¡¯t be so tactless to question him further. What are you trying to do, acting as if he has no temper? Unlike the thoughts of these aristocratic families, Ziyun and other True Persons couldn¡¯t help but exchange glances, doubt flashing in their eyes after hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s words. ¡°Qingyu Taoist?¡± True Person Zhen Xuan frowned upon hearing this name, thought for a while but still had no impression, so he turned his head and asked the other True Persons: ¡°I have no impression of this person, have any of you heard of him?¡± The other True Persons also thought for a while and shook their heads one after another. Jinyun, the True Person from Feishuang Tao, furrowed his brows and said, ¡°To refine a celestial elixir that can help purify Inner Strength and enhance Cultivation, a large amount of Divine Blood Variant must be used, along with the Essence of the sun and the moon, and refined with Celestial spirit qi. Only then can it be successful. Even our various Daoist Paths might have to exhaust our treasuries to afford such an expenditure. This Qingyu Taoist being able to gather all these heavenly treasures cannot be an ordinary cultivator without background. He must be a senior from some Daoist Path. However, if he is a senior from a Daoist Path, we would have definitely heard of his name. Therefore, I think that this Qingyu Taoist might be an alias used by a senior when they were traveling in the world.¡± As Jinyun said this, his eyes glanced at Lu Yuan, and his gaze was somewhat off. Other True Persons naturally knew why he was acting like this. The reason was already clear ¨C Jinyun simply didn¡¯t accept Lu Yuan¡¯s statement, feeling that the latter was deceiving everyone. The so-called guess of a senior using an alias was just a reason for guessing without directly pointing out the truth. However, Anqiu, the True Person from Dan Ding Path, argued at this moment: ¡°In today¡¯s world, it is indeed difficult to refine a pot of celestial elixirs without being from a larger Daoist lineage. But in the past, let alone during the ancient times, even just a few hundred years ago, gathering materials to refine celestial elixirs was much simpler than it is now. Perhaps this Qingyu Taoist was from five or six hundred years ago, or even seven or eight hundred years ago? At that time, refining celestial elixirs was not difficult for our respective Daoist Paths, was it? Even for a loose cultivator, if their Cultivation truly reached a profound level, collecting all the materials wouldn¡¯t be impossible. As for those who can refine celestial elixirs, storing them with special methods for several hundred years is also not difficult. And even if it was five or six hundred years ago, it would be normal not to have heard of this person due to the loss of various historical records.¡± When Anqiu True Person said this, the expressions of the other True Persons indeed showed agreement. A few hundred years ago, the resources for Cultivation in the Nine Provinces were indeed much more abundant than they are now. Even the last True Person to ascend in the Nine Provinces was only eight hundred years ago. It¡¯s indeed a high probability that celestial elixirs have been passed down since then. Even Jinyun True Person, after hesitating for a moment, nodded and said, ¡°¡®l¡¯nere IS sucn a poss1D111ty.¡± ¡°Alright.¡± Seeing the discussion reaching this point, True Person Zhen Xuan finally spoke up and stopped everyone from continuing: ¡°What Taoist Anqiu said is actually not wrong. It¡¯s not impossible for things from our ancestors to be left behind for hundreds of years. Haven¡¯t there been several examples in the past hundred years? Moreover, Taoist Lu has already told us about his adventure, which is quite magnanimous of him. How could we, with the heart of a petty person, presume to speculate on his intentions? Let¡¯s end this matter here.¡± Having lectured the True Persons next to him, Zhen Xuan turned his head towards Lu Yuan and apologized, ¡°We got too obsessed with discussing the origins of Qingyu Taoist and made a fool of ourselves in front of you. Please forgive us for any offense.¡± Lu Yuan quickly shook his head: ¡°No harm done. Actually, I am very curious about that Qingyu Taoist myself. I owe everything to him, and if I could know his origins, it would fulfill a long-held wish.¡± True Person Zhen Xuan smiled: ¡°If, as you said, Qingyu Taoist is really an independent cultivator, then his strength would not be inferior to ours. Even if placed a few hundred years ago, he would still be a senior in the Immortal Method. ¡± Just now, Fellow Daoist mentioned that Qingyu Taoist did not leave behind any Immortal Techniques, but only a martial arts secret book for later generations to inherit the Dao Inheritance and cultivate.¡± Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°Indeed, only a martial arts secret book was left. I have always regretted not being able to witness the Immortal Technique. Over the years, I have thought about looking for it, but after searching for more than a decade, I still haven¡¯t found it. My heart is filled with regret.¡± Hearing this, the people from the six surnames and seven families beside him couldn¡¯t help but show their sympathy. Not only was it Lu Yuan, but even these aristocratic families had thought of looking for the Immortal Techniques over the years, but they could not find them no matter how hard they searched. Apart from regret, there was no other way. Among the True Persons, the others remained calm and expressionless, without any intention to speak up. The reason why outsiders couldn¡¯t find the Immortal Techniques was indeed partly due to their efforts. After all, there is only so much Essence of the sun and the moon and Celestial spirit qi between Heaven and Earth, and once it is used, there will be less. Allowing more people to cultivate Immortal Techniques would only mean more competition for resources. Nowadays, even their own cultivation is still not enough, right? How could they let others join and share the resources? Anqiu True Person, who was standing next to him, looked at Lu Yuan with a slightly different expression, but he didn¡¯t say anything. Like the other True Persons, he remained silent and didn¡¯t show any reaction. Zhen Xuan True person then laughed and said, ¡°Actually, what Elder Qingyu said is indeed true. In today¡¯s world, even if the Immortal Techniques were passed down, Fellow Daoist would not be able to cultivate them. Have you heard of the decline of the Heavenly spirit qi?¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan was slightly taken aback and then replied solemnly, ¡°Indeed, I have heard others mention this. It is said that the Celestial spirit qi of Heaven and Earth is diminishing daily, making it increasingly difficult for future generations to cultivate and achieve the Dao. It has even become impossible.¡± Zhen Xuan True Person nodded, ¡°Indeed, the Celestial spirit qi of Heaven and Earth is being reduced day by day. It is not just achieving the Dao, but even cultivating is becoming tens or even hundreds of times more difficult than it was for our predecessors.¡± When it comes to cultivating, we cultivators can no longer draw upon the Celestial spirit qi of Heaven and Earth, and absorb the Essence of the sun and the moon with our own strength alone. To cultivate the Immortal Techniques, one must rely on external forces, that is, the Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens.¡± In this world, there are seventy-two Blessed Lands and thirty-six Cavern Heavens. These Cavern Heavens and Blessed Lands are the World¡¯s Meridians that bridge the gaps between Heaven and Earth.¡± Therefore, cultivating in them allows one to directly connect with Heaven and Earth, breathe in the Celestial spirit qi, and extract the Essence of the sun and the moon.¡± However, as the Celestial spirit qi continues to diminish, even the Essence of the sun and the moon contained within the Cavern Heavens and Blessed Lands is becoming increasingly scarce. Of the seventy-two Blessed Lands, not a trace of Celestial spirit qi remains, and even the Essence of the sun and the moon is too sparse to nourish cultivation. As for the thirty-six Cavern Heavens, although there is slightly more Essence of the sun and the moon compared to the Blessed Lands, the Celestial spirit qi is still scarce and insufficient. Nowadays, only the top ten Cavern Heavens still have enough Celestial spirit qi to barely support cultivation. Anything beyond the tenth rank is no longer able to sustain the cultivation of the Immortal Techniques.¡± That is to say, in the present world, if one wishes to cultivate, one must find one of the top ten Cavern Heavens.¡± However, these top ten Cavern Heavens already have masters.¡± Our Ziyun Dao¡¯s Tianluo Mountain is one, Feishuang Dao¡¯s Miluo Mountain is another, and the Dan Ding Path¡¯s Tiannan Mountain is also one. The rest of the Cavern Heavens also have their own masters.¡± As for us, we are already dissatisfied with the insufficient Celestial spirit qi, so how can we possibly share it with others? Therefore, what Elder Qingyu said is indeed the truth.¡± After his time, it has become impossible for the world to cultivate the Immortal Techniques.¡± Instead of wasting time on the Immortal Path, it is better to study Martial Arts.¡± If one can achieve the rank of Inborn Grandmaster in Martial Arts, the profound skills will be no less than those of the Immortal Techniques.¡± Even for someone like me, I may not care much about confronting an ordinary Inborn Grandmaster, but if I were to encounter an Innate Great Grandmaster, an Earthly Godlike figure, I would still need to be cautious.¡± So nowadays, while it¡¯s difficult to achieve success in the Immortal Path, Martial Arts are easier to cultivate. Elder Qingyu has also devoted much thought to the welfare of future generations.¡± Perhaps it is to make up for the secret that Lu Yuan openly revealed earlier, or perhaps it is to deter and suppress the unwanted thoughts of outsiders. At this moment, Ziyun Daoist openly revealed these secrets of the Immortal Path..¡± Chapter 268 - Chapter 268: Chapter 168: Martial Arts External Body Chapter 268: Chapter 168: Martial Arts External Body Translator: 549690339 Ziyun True Person, after revealing these secrets, turned his gaze to the people gathered around. The other True Persons from various Dao Veins also cast their gazes over. Those from the six families and seven clans, as well as Lu Yuan, all lowered their heads to avoid the gaze. Indeed, as Ziyun Daoist said, the top ten Cave Worlds are all occupied. And their owners are these True Persons standing here. If an outsider wants to cultivate and seek the Dao, they must snatch a Cave World from these True Persons first. As vested interests, how could these True Persons give up their own path of cultivation to make way for outsiders? A life-and-death struggle is inevitable. However, to compete with these Dao Veins for the Cave Worlds, led by True Persons with strength comparable to the Innate Realm, the chances of success¡­ It can only be said that even if the Da Yue court exhausts all its strength and risks its national fortune, it may not necessarily succeed. After all, Ziyun Daoist said it. His strength alone could rival an Innate Great Grandmaster in martial arts. Such figures, known as Earthly Gods and Immortals, are nearly indistinguishable from gods. Speaking of such beings, not to mention the Da Yue court, no one in the world has ever heard of even one. In other words, these Immortal Sect Dao Veins possess an absolute advantage on top combat power. In an Immortal Martial World where all great powers converge together, a single top-tier fighter can be enough to determine the overall situation of the world. Therefore, unless the owners of the top ten Cave Worlds fight each other, the current arrangement of the Immortal Cultivation World is fixed and is unlikely to change. However, judging by the synchronized movements, unity, and coordination of the six True Persons, it¡¯s evident that they¡¯re mostly on the same side. If the ten major Cave Worlds are united, then the later generations¡¯ chances of embarking on the path of immortality are indeed gone, and it will be impossible to enter the Immortal Method again. ¡®So, is my path to immortality severed before I even begin cultivating?¡¯ Lu Yuan had this thought, and then immediately denied it: ¡®No, that¡¯s impossible. I still have the jade token of Immortal Fate. According to what Ziyun Dao Master said, the force that transformed my Inner Strength inside the jade token should be the now rare Immortal Spirit energy. That is to say, my jade token should contain a considerable amount of Immortal Spirit energy, which makes it equivalent to a Spiritual Stone in the cultivation novels. With this jade token, I still have a chance to practice Immortal Techniques. The most challenging part now is figuring out how to activate the jade token. According to my previous speculation, the reason I can¡¯t activate the token is that I lack something similar to Divine Sense, which prevents me from breaking the seals within the jade token and unlocking its power. When one¡¯s Martial Arts reach the Innate Realm, they will gradually touch upon their spirit. By then, I may be able to develop something similar to the Divine Sense in the Immortal Method, which should allow me to activate the jade token. Once the jade token is activated, I may be able to obtain the Immortal Technique and use the Immortal Spirit energy within the jade token to begin my path of cultivation.¡¯ Lu Yuan quickly comforted himself and, as he did so, thought of another plan. ¡®Even if I cannot rely on the jade token to cultivate, it doesn¡¯t mean it is the end of the road. Didn¡¯t the Zhen Xuan Elder Daoist say that his strength is equivalent to a Martial Arts Grandmaster? So, as long as I can cultivate to the level of a Martial Arts Grandmaster and cultivate several Inborn Grandmasters, I will then have the strength to seize a Dao Vein¡¯s Cave World. Although I am not sure why, in the words of Elder Zhen Xuan, it is difficult for a Martial Arts Grandmaster to arise in this world where it is easier to practice martial arts and harder to cultivate immortality. But with my infinite lifespan, I could very possibly breakthrough to the Martial Arts Grandmaster level in just a hundred or two hundred years. By then, there should still be some Immortal Spirit energy left in the top ten Cave Worlds, which should allow me to practice Immortal Techniques. This is a safe plan, albeit a time-consuming one. However, waiting too long might lead to the depletion of all Immortal Spirit energy, with all the spiritual energies being consumed. The world would then enter the Age of Dharma Decline, which carries great risks. So, unless necessary, this plan can only be the last resort.¡¯ Lu Yuan¡¯s mind raced, and in an instant, he thought of two escape routes. Thus, his heart, which had wavered slightly due to Ziyun Daoist¡¯s revelation, became determined once again. Unlike others, he truly has a way out. Since he has an escape route, he has nothing to fear. Even if he cannot become immortal, just being a Martial Arts Grandmaster in such an Age of Dharma Decline would be enough to be unrivaled in the world. If he cannot be like Li Xiaoyao, then being Emperor Shitian is also not bad at all. Seeing that Lu Yuan and the others tactfully stepped back, the likes of Zhen Xuan and other True Persons were quite satisfied in their hearts. It is not that they deliberately want to show off, but the representatives of the biggest challengers to their Dao Veins are here ¨C namely Lu Yuan and the others. Not to mention Lu Yuan, who¡¯s about to break through to the Innate Realm, his strength alone could rival any of the True Persons here, apart from Zhen Xuan. Furthermore, the combined strength of the six families and seven clans could also create several Innate experts, not to mention countless first-rate and second-rate ones. Such combined power indeed poses a threat to any Dao Veins. If they don¡¯t suppress and intimidate these people, the likes of Zhen Xuan and other True Persons would inevitably be restless at night. Therefore, demonstrating their power and unity, maintaining a coordinated stance before outsiders, and confirming their own position and influence in the Dao through the assembly are all necessary means to consolidate their status and safety in the Dao Veins.. Chapter 269 - Chapter 269: Chapter 168: Martial Arts External Body_2 Chapter 269: Chapter 168: Martial Arts External Body_2 Translator: 549690339 Now, it was nothing more than repeating the old methods once again. However, it was all about tactics and strategy. Merely using threats alone wasn¡¯t enough, as pushing to the limit would always cause problems. So after slightly shocking everyone, Zhen Xuan showed a smile on his face and said amiably, ¡°I see that Taoist Lu is only a step away from breaking through Innate. I wonder if there are any doubts in your cultivation?¡± Although I practice the Immortal Method, there are many disciples in my sect who practice martial arts, and when Immortal-Martial cultivation reaches a deep level, different paths converge. So when it comes to breaking through Innate, I do have some insights. If Taoist Lu doesn¡¯t mind, I can give you some guidance.¡± After hitting with a stick, giving a sweet date, Dao Master Ziyun really understood the game. As for his words, the expressions of the people of the six surnames and seven clans changed slightly. The secret of breaking through Innate had always been monopolized by their aristocratic families and the major factions of the Jianghu. After seeing that Lu Yuan was not far from breaking through Innate, many people in the field had already thought about whether they should use some secrets of breaking through Innate to gain the favor and control of this Pingxi General, so that they could reach some benefits in exchange with him. But now it seems that Dao Master Ziyun¡¯s move has dashed all their hopes. Lu Yuan was overjoyed and immediately bowed and said, ¡°Thank you, Ancestor Dao for your grace. Frankly, the secret book I obtained only goes up to the peak of the first-class realm and doesn¡¯t even touch on how to break through Innate. If the dao master can give me some guidance to help me breakthrough Innate, I will never forget this kindness.¡± What was Lu Yuan¡¯s main purpose in attending this gathering? Experiencing the Immortal Techniques and broadening his horizons was only secondary. Finding the method to break through Innate and enhance his strength was the most important thing. Originally, he thought that finding the secret of breaking through Innate was impossible. Unexpectedly, at the end, things took a turn, and there was such a gain. Zhen Xuan looked at the excited Lu Yuan, deep in his heart he smiled. Guiding the other party to break through Martial Arts Xiantian was what he wanted. Only by attracting all the heroes of the outer world to martial arts and having them explore how to break through Innate and how to advance further in martial arts, can the competition pressure of these cultivators, like them, be greatly reduced. So at this time, seeing Lu Yuan taking the bait, Zhen Xuan was delighted in his heart and said with a smile, ¡°Since Taoist fellow is willing to listen, then let this old Daoist show his disgrace. Martial arts is essentially the way of blood and energy. However, blood and energy are also crucial. If it¡¯s deficient, the body will be weak, and if it¡¯s abundant, it will be excessive. Therefore, to balance these blood and energies, we need to add spirit as the helm. In this way, the combination of the three spirits would result in martial arts Inner Qi. However, the human body has limits, and when the Martial Arts Inner Qi grows to the limit, the mortal body gradually becomes unable to contain it. If it is forced to grow further, then it will overflow and the body will explode and die. Therefore, after reaching the peak of the first-class realm, if you want to continue to improve your martial arts cultivation, you need to replace the limited body with an unlimited body. This transformation process is what the martial arts call breaking through the Heavenly and Earthly Mysterious Barrier and entering Innate. What is the Heavenly and Earthly Mysterious Barrier? The connection between the body and Heaven and Earth. The physical body can shield our souls from the external wind, rain, and sun, serving as a layer of protection. But if we look at it from another perspective, the physical body is also a shackle that binds the soul and the Heaven and Earth, making the inner soul free and unbounded. Similarly, the physical body has limits and cannot accommodate the increasing Inner Qi, which is another constraint. Therefore, martial artists who want to make further progress must break the shackles of the physical body, integrate their souls with Heaven and Earth, cultivate Martial Dao True Intent, and transform their Inner Qi into Heaven Thus, Heaven and Earth become the physical body, and Martial Dao True Intent becomes the soul. By transforming the inner Heaven and Earth into the outer Heaven and Earth, the realm naturally becomes unlimited, and Martial Arts Xiantian is achieved.¡± As he said this, Zhen Xuan looked at Lu Yuan and sensed an extremely strong Hao Yang Qi from the latter¡¯s body. He said with a smile, ¡°Ordinary martial artists who want to condense their Martial Dao True Intent need to gather the Spiritual Blood of various Divine Blood Variant species, purify and refine their Inner Qi, and condense their external aura. They need to polish their state of mind and cultivate their souls so that they can merge with the external aura and form Martial Dao True Intent, building an Outer World body. With the help of the Elixir, Taoist fellow¡¯s Inner Qi has already been condensed, and his external appearance has been manifested, approaching the threshold of condensing Martial Dao True Intent. In the future, all you need to do is further purify your own Inner Qi and external aura, and make your soul and external aura more closely integrated, and you will be able to condense Martial Dao True Intent. Once the True Intent is formed, you will naturally break through the Ren Du meridians and open up the Heavenly and Earthly Mysterious Barrier. At that time, Innate will be achieved.¡± When Zhen Xuan uttered these words, they were like a bolt of lightning in the dark night, instantly illuminating the path that had been elusive to Lu Yuan, making him instantly enlightened. So this is what Innate is like. By condensing the external aura, strengthening the soul, and combining the two outside the body to form Martial Dao True Intent, an Outer World Body could be created, and that would be Innate. There are limits to human life and no limits to Heaven and Earth. Breaking through Innate is that simple. For a moment, Lu Yuan was enveloped by tremendous joy, and he became somewhat dazed. That¡¯s because what Zhen Xuan just said about the secrets of Innate had always been what he had been doing in practice. Using the Divine Blood Elixir to break through cultivation, refining Inner Strength with jade pieces, and secretly practicing Dao Law to enhance his state of mind, then after transmigration, his soul was stronger than that of ordinary people. Unknowingly, all these conditions added up, and he had already met the requirements for breaking through Innate.. Chapter 270 - Chapter 270: Chapter 168: Martial Arts External Body_3 Chapter 270: Chapter 168: Martial Arts External Body_3 Translator: 549690339 The only difference was breaking through this layer of insight, allowing him to utilize various conditions he possessed to form an outer world around his body. ¡®My Inner Strength and external aura have almost become substantial, which should meet the requirements for constructing the Outer World. With my state of mind and soul strength developed over the years of cultivation, I should be able to control the external aura.¡¯ Essentially, he could now attempt to break through Innate and condense an Outer World body, breaking the Heavenly and Earthly Mysterious Barrier.¡¯ Lu Yuan thought so, and felt restless, but he knew that now was not the time to break through Innate. Moreover, breaking through Innate cannot be that simple. The most important point was that he didn¡¯t know how to construct an outer world body at this time. If he rushed to break through Innate without understanding this, the risk of failure would be extremely high and might even cost him his life. After all, both the outwardly manifesting spirit and the soul condensed Martial Dao True Intent were matters directly related to his life¡¯s foundation, and they were not to be damaged. So, after contemplating, Lu Yuan bowed to Ziyun Dao Master and asked, ¡°True Person, after fulfilling various conditions, how can I condense the body of the Outer World?¡± If he didn¡¯t know, then it was best to ask someone who did. Lu Yuan was quite flexible in this regard. True Person Zhen Xuan stroked his beard but shook his head, ¡°As for how to condense the body of the Outer World, I¡¯m not sure either. All our martial arts, personal dispositions, and soul strengths are different. Therefore, the condensed martial arts external bodies are naturally different, and there has never been a fixed formula. However, every Grandmaster who breaks through Innate is said to choose a symbol of Heaven and Earth as their Outer Dao body to condense their martial arts external body. This symbol of Heaven and Earth could be the sun, moon, stars, rivers, mountains, plants, flowers, rainbow and thunder, or anything in the world. The so-called martial arts external body is just a dwelling place for accommodating True Intent and True pneuma, and a bridge for communication between Heaven and Earth. As long as it meets this condition, it is not bound by external appearances. Even if the Fellow Daoist¡¯s practiced martial arts external body is a drop of water, a flame, a grain of sand, or a piece of iron, it doesn¡¯t matter. As long as it conforms to Fellow Daoist¡¯s wishes, to Fellow Daoist¡¯s cultivation method, to Fellow Daoist¡¯s soul, and to Fellow Daoist¡¯s realm, then it is a good martial arts external body.¡± This amorphous theory left Lu Yuan stunned. ¡°Not constrained by external appearances?¡± He muttered in a daze, feeling an epiphany in his heart. If there wasn¡¯t a fixed structure and one only needed to base it on their own wishes, cultivation method, soul, and state of mind to condense an external body. Then, what was the external appearance that best suited him? Lu Yuan practiced the Chi Yang Divine Skill, which was a cultivation technique created by imitating the fierce sun in the sky. Moreover, his Inner Strength had been transformed twice before, and its nature was not pure Chi Yang energy. To refine his Inner Strength, he used jade slabs containing Immortal Spirit Qi that was ethereal and otherworldly. Furthermore, the state of mind used to control his Inner Strength was condensed through reading thousands of Taoist Classics. His own soul was a product of transmigration, and he wasn¡¯t sure if it was pure or not. ¡®It feels like such a complex mix.¡¯ After recalling everything, Lu Yuan felt dazed and unsure of the shape his martial arts external body should take. This was destined to be a question worth pondering once he returned. At this moment, it was impossible to figure out. After receiving the reply, Lu Yuan composed himself and respectfully bowed to Ziyun Dao Master, ¡°Thank you for the technique, True Person. I will not forget your guidance today. In the future, if you have any instructions, as long as I can do it, I will not refuse.¡± Although Lu Yuan had originally met various conditions to Break through Innate and was only one step away from it. Without help, he might not break through that barrier for decades or even hundreds of years. Who knew when he would truly break through Innate? Today, with Ziyun Dao Master¡¯s help in breaking through that layer of fog, Lu Yuan¡¯s time was undoubtedly saved, and he was even shown a safe path, helping him avoid the risks of blindly groping on his own. This kindness couldn¡¯t be ignored. So Lu Yuan committed to this relationship and made his statement at this moment. However, on the other hand. To be able to establish a relationship with Ziyun Dao Master because of this kindness was indeed a good thing many people envied. It was difficult to say whether Lu Yuan had really lost out. ¡°Fellow Daoist, you do not need to be overly polite.¡± True Person Zhen Xuan was quite satisfied with Lu Yuan¡¯s statement, as it eliminated a competitor for cultivation resources and avoided internal consumption. At the same time, to obtain the friendship of a future innate expert was also a joyful thing for him. Therefore, he cheerfully said, ¡°The Inescapable Meeting is meant for exchanging ideas among fellow Daoists. Today I had the opportunity to discuss with Taoist Lu, and I am very fortunate. I hope that at the next conference, Fellow Daoist will have broken through Innate and can truly sit and discuss Dao with us.¡± At this point, True Person Zhen Xuan and others, although calling Lu Yuan their Fellow Daoist, it was clearly a polite statement. Just like when Qi Yun first met Lu Yuan and called him a Fellow Daoist, it was merely a matter of courtesy. To truly sit and discuss the Dao with True Person Zhen Xuan and others, Lu Yuan had to become an Inborn Grandmaster first. Because only Inborn Grandmasters could be on par with these cultivators. Lu Yuan also understood this principle, so he said, ¡°After I return, I will concentrate on cultivation, and during the next conference, I will sit and discuss Dao with True Person.¡± ¡°Then we shall wait for that day.¡± True Person Zhen Xuan and others nodded with a smile. After the conversation, it was almost time to end. There were already some people waiting below the palace gate, ready to visit Ziyun Dao Master and others. Seeing that Lu Yuan had finished speaking with Ziyun Dao Master, Yang Jing stepped forward and said, ¡°Today we have had the pleasure of meeting True Persons, and we feel very fortunate. There are other fellow Daoist friends waiting below, so we will not disturb you anymore. May the True Persons make progress in Immortal Techniques and ascend soon.¡± ¡°Fellow Daoists, take care.¡± True Person Zhen Xuan also smiled and said, ¡°I hope the next time we meet, both Fellow Daoists will have broken through Innate and achieved the Grandmaster status.¡± After paying respects to one another, Lu Yuan¡¯s party left the hall.. Chapter 271 - Chapter 271: Chapter 169: The Ten Great Masters Chapter 271: Chapter 169: The Ten Great Masters Translator: 549690339 After they left, there were far fewer people on the square. This conference session would last a full three days. Naturally, it was impossible to spend all that time in the square below. Otherwise, the wind, rain, and exposure to the elements would make this gathering of martial arts experts a sorry sight. Thus, on the mountain, Ziyun had already opened up a large area for their fellow daos to wander and appreciate the scenery. Moreover, many palace halls were prepared for them to rest in when they were tired. As for the food and drink, it was all available, of course. In short, with Ziyun¡¯s resources, satisfying the needs of more than a thousand people was more than sufficient. ¡°General Lu, there are eight scenic spots in Tianluo Mountain: Xiangbi Mountain, Rock Terrace Moon, Hundred Crown Trees, Thousand Rock Cave, Bao Gai Facing Cloud, Jade Rock Night Moon, Mirror Flower Water Moon, and Thousand Feet Cloud Fall, all of which are wonders of the world. Now that our meeting with Ziyun Dao master is over, why not join me in seeing the beautiful scenery of the mountains and rivers to appreciate the beauty of our Great Yue?¡± When they reached the square and saw the sparse crowd, Yang Jing looked at Lu Yuan and warmly invited him. Lu Yuan, of course, was happy to oblige. He had just learned the method of breaking through Innate and was now worried about how to establish his martial arts external body, as he hadn¡¯t figured it out yet. Yang Jing was similarly at the peak of his strength, not far from breaking through Innate, and talking with him might give Lu some insights. So he nodded and said, ¡°I¡¯ll have to trouble Lord Yang to guide me then.¡± Yang Jing laughed, ¡°Fear not, General Lu, I¡¯ve been to Tianluo Mountain several times and have seen all the beautiful places. I won¡¯t disappoint you.¡± Finished, Yang Jing turned to the other people from the six and seven families, ¡°I have something important to discuss with General Lu, so you all can mingle on your own for now. Don¡¯t follow us.¡± Hearing this, everyone exchanged looks, realizing that their leader had some confidential matters to talk about with Lu Yuan. Before the impending Innate breakthrough of Yang Jing, others from the aristocratic families dared not act pompously, so they could only agree. Even the Shangguan siblings, who were reluctant to be separated from Lu Yuan, had to relent and leave helplessly under Yang Jing¡¯s pressure despite having a congenital father. ¡°General Lu, let¡¯s go.¡± After arranging for the others, Yang Jing turned back with a smile and said to Lu Yuan. ¡°Thank you,¡± Lu Yuan nodded and followed him. Yang Jing led Lu Yuan to the first scenic spot, the Thousand Feet Cloud Fall. Not far from here, there was a cliff, a thousand feet high and shrouded in mist. A river flowed over it, falling as a magnificent waterfall, hence the name Thousand Feet Cloud Fall. Lu Yuan and Yang Jing walked along the path toward the waterfall. Before they even reached the place, they could hear the thunderous roar growing louder and louder. As they got closer, the sound of water crashing seemed to fill the space between heaven and earth, leaving hearts pounding. By the time they arrived, there were already many daoists appreciating the scenery, their faces filled with awe. The wonders of nature seen with mortal eyes were truly incredible, like a godly technique. The spot Yang Jing had brought Lu Yuan to was secluded, farther from the waterfall but still offering a beautiful view, with less noise and fewer people. After watching the waterfall for a while, Yang Jing turned his eyes away, still looking in front but suddenly asking, ¡°General Lu, how do you view the current national situation?¡± Ever since Yang Jing had deliberately driven away the others, Lu Yuan had known that the man must have something important to say, so he was mentally prepared. Lu thought the matter would be some secret of Innate, or some experience of the state of mind since this was a Daoist conference. But he was somewhat stunned when Yang Jing suddenly brought up the state of the nation. Nevertheless, he recovered quickly. Glancing at Yang Jing¡¯s solemn face, Lu Yuan pondered, then replied, ¡°Mountains and rivers are in decline, and chaos is frequent. The provinces are unstable, and the people are uneasy. Foreign enemies press the border, and internal unrest continues. The common people are exhausted, and the country is in poverty. The signs of a dying nation are already present.¡± Having come this far in his strength, especially now that he had found his way to breaking through Innate, Lu Yuan was much less apprehensive in his heart. Even in the face of Yang Jing, a courtier of the state, he didn¡¯t hesitate to speak boldly of the country¡¯s situation. After all, Yang Jing probably didn¡¯t want to hear flattery and was aiming for something else. ¡®I just don¡¯t know if Yang Jing is representing the court or himself. But as long as I keep watching, I¡¯m bound to find out.¡¯ Lu Yuan thought. At the moment, Yang Jing listened to Lu Yuan¡¯s blunt evaluation without any anger, even showing a hint of a smile: ¡°Indeed, General Lu is a straightforward person from the martial arts world.¡± Upon hearing this, Yang Jing then became serious and said solemnly, ¡°Yes, the current situation of the Great Yue is indeed deteriorating. Not only can you see the signs of its imminent demise, but so can we courtiers and even the Heavenly Son himself.¡± However, although the country is in decline, it is not yet over for our Great Yue and the Altars of Soil and Grain. There is still hope for revival. ¡°General Lu, you must have heard of the two commanders of the Miao Conquering Army, Wucheng Marquis Shangguan Ming and White Phoenix Temple¡¯s Holy Monk Jihui, right?¡± Lu Yuan nodded, rubbing his temples, ¡°Indeed, and the Wucheng Marquis even sent his son and daughter to train under my guidance..¡± Chapter 272 - Chapter 272: Chapter 169: Top Ten Grandmasters_2 Chapter 272: Chapter 169: Top Ten Grandmasters_2 Translator: 549690339 Upon hearing this, Yang Jing thought about the way Shangguan Haimoon was clinging to Lu Yuan when they had just met, and couldn¡¯t help but laugh, saying, ¡°Shangguan Ming really has a sharp eye for people, wanting to make you his son-in-law. If it weren¡¯t for the fact that this old man has no daughters, I would have wanted to recruit you as my son-in-law as well. However, if General Lu doesn¡¯t mind, I do have a few older brothers with legitimate daughters who have yet to be married.¡± Yang Jing said half-jokingly and half-probingly. Lu Yuan quickly waved his hands, saying, ¡°Lord Yang, I am currently only focused on breaking through to the Innate level, and have no interest in any romantic relationships before achieving major success in the Martial Arts.¡± ¡°Alright, it seems that Shangguan Ming and I have thought too much.¡± Seeing that Lu Yuan did not want to discuss the matter of matrimonial alliance, Yang Jing did not push any further, quickly switching the topic back to more serious matters: ¡°Outsiders say that our six surnames and seven clans have formed alliances and marriages for generations, and in reality, that is indeed Lile case. Our thirteen families prosper or suffer together. The royal family of the Da Yue, the Xiao Family, is one of our six surnames as well. It¡¯s just that they are the royal family, while the rest of us are only ministers. However, in reality, apart from the royal lineage, there is not much difference between our twelve families and the Xiao Family. Even going back two hundred years, the Hai Tomb Wang Family among our twelve families was once the ruler of the Qi State. And three hundred years ago, my South Ridge Yang Family was the ruler of the Chu State as well.¡± As for the other families, many of them were once royal families of various states. But despite the passing of thousands of years, the dynastic transitions, our thirteen families¡¯ Ancestral Temple Inheritance has never been extinguished. Why is that? It is because our thirteen noble families stick together and help each other. Therefore, even if the national power declines and the world becomes chaotic, as long as we are united, the chaos won¡¯t get out of hand. At most, we could just eliminate the royal family that has been doing a poor job, replace it with another family, and establish a new dynasty to appease the people.¡± Yang Jing spoke in a casual tone. Meanwhile, Lu Yuan was stunned after hearing his words. What the hell? Each of the six surnames and seven clans are descendants of royalty, taking turns to be the emperor as if it¡¯s a game called ¡°next year is my family¡¯s turn.¡± Can the Altars of Soil and Grain and the land for imperial hegemony be played with like this? Lu Yong learned something new. After sarcastically commenting in his mind, Lu Yuan digested the information. He then had a deeper understanding of the situation in Da Yue. If what Yang Jing said was true, and the six surnames and seven clans practiced this kind of democratic election system, then their relationships needed to be viewed from a different perspective. The current Da Yue also needed to be seen with different eyes. He could no longer simply think that Da Yue is just the Xiao Family¡¯s property, but rather, see it as the collective property of the six surnames and seven clans. ¡°It¡¯s as if Da Yue is a company, the Xiao Family is the current chairman, but they do not hold absolute shares. They just hold a slightly larger, or even just a small portion of the shares, with a CEO title. In the entire company, the other five surnames and seven clans also hold shares, and their combined shares are several times or even ten times more than that of the Xiao Family. Therefore, when they unite, they can remove the chairman and replace the CEO or, in other words, the emperor. And then the Xiao Family would be demoted from being a royal family and chairman to a common aristocratic family, director, and shareholder. Hence, Da Yue can change its skin and go public again under a different name like Great Chu or Great Wu, but it must not collapse completely. Otherwise, it would harm the interests of all shareholders, namely, all the noble families.¡¯ Lu Yuan quickly figured out the relationships among the six surnames and seven clans. He then felt a surge of trepidation in his heart. Dealing with a single Xiao Shi dynasty is a far cry from dealing with an entire interest community in terms of the pressure and difficulties faced. At the very least, if Lu Yuan was asked to rebel against the court, he could grit his teeth and possibly succeed. But if he was asked to oppose the entire six surnames and seven clans, despair would fill his view. After all, there are currently five Inborn Grandmasters among the six surnames and seven clans. With Yang Jing, who is about to break through to the Innate level, that makes six. And if there is one Yang Jing, are there others as well? Having understood the origins and background of the six surnames and seven clans, Lu Yuan could not afford to underestimate these descendants of royalty any longer. He weighed all these factors in his heart and asked, ¡°Lord Yang, what is your intention in telling me all this?¡± Yang Jing mentioning all this must have an ulterior motive. For a moment, Lu Yuan could not figure out what the other party was thinking. As expected, when he asked, Yang Jing smiled and then calmly said, ¡°Now that Da Yue is declining, the rest of us twelve families, as officials, will naturally have a hard time as well. The Xiao Family, being the royal family, has allowed the country to fall to such a state that they no longer deserve to rule the world as the Heavenly Sons. Therefore, after discussions, the five surnames and six clans have decided to depose the Xiao Family and pass the throne to the Longzhou Shen Clan. The current head of the Shen Clan is an Inborn Second Realm Grandmaster, and even the Third Realm Grandmaster is within reach for him. This makes him the undisputed number one person in our Da Yue Martial Arts. With the Shen Clan as the Heavenly Sons, it should be possible to stabilize the world and quell the unrest.¡± Lu Yuan was shocked again. Did the Yang Jing in front of him understand what he was saying? Chapter 273 - Chapter 273: Chapter 169: The Ten Great Masters Chapter 273: Chapter 169: The Ten Great Masters Translator: 549690339 A change of dynasty. Is this something you can decide just by having a meeting? Although he had some psychological preparation for this due to the previous foreshadowing, it was still too sudden for Lu Yuan. He swallowed and asked, ¡°Lord Yang, when do you plan to carry out this abdication¡­?¡± Unconsciously, Lu Yuan¡¯s tone carried some respect. There was no way around it; facing someone who casually changes emperors, no one could dare to treat it lightly. Yang Jing noticed the change in Lu Yuan¡¯s attitude and was very satisfied. When he brought up the matter today, besides the appearance of Lu Yuan, who would become an Inborn Grandmaster in the future, forcing these aristocratic families to make some changes to their plans. He also wanted to deter Lu Yuan more so that the soon-to-break through Innate would know his own weight and not mess around. At this point, it seemed that the desired effect had been achieved. So Yang Jing continued with their next plan, ¡°The abdication will not take place so soon, the earliest would be after pacifying the Five Poisons religion rebellion and repelling the Zhou army.¡± In order to achieve this goal, we officials have discussed and devised a strategy of the Ten Grandmasters. As the name suggests, it is to gather ten Grandmasters and then suppress the world. Shangguan Ming is one of the Inborn Grandmasters cultivated by this strategy, and I am one of them. The Saint Monk Jihui from White Phoenix Temple is also one of them. So, now the court already has six Grandmasters, and I should be able to break through in one or two years, making it seven. So there are only three spots left. Originally, these three people were meant for the court to continue to recruit Innate Grandmasters from the major Jianghu sects. But now, since General Lu is about to break through Innate, being one of our own, he is naturally closer than those Jianghu people. So if the general is willing, I can recommend you to become one of the ten Grandmasters, alongside the rest of us. How about it, what do you think, General?¡± After explaining the plan, Yang Jing looked intently at Lu Yuan, waiting for his reply. Lu Yuan¡¯s heart surged upon hearing the plan. The strategy of Ten Great Grandmasters. The court plans to cultivate ten Grandmasters and then use them to pacify the world? Just hearing about this grand plan made even Lu Yuan feel overwhelmed. This was not a matter of just any ordinary people, but ten Inborn Grandmasters! These were figures at the top of Jianghu, capable of suppressing an entire region and standing up to tens of thousands of soldiers. Now the court wanted to gather ten of them together, push forward, suppress rebellions, and repel foreign enemies. It must be said that this kind of broad-mindedness and ambition really made people admire it. But after the admiration, Lu Yuan soon returned to reality. Looking at Yang Jing, who was waiting for his reply with a mature demeanor, he thought for a moment and asked, ¡°Lord Yang, what benefits would I get from becoming one of the Ten Great Grandmasters? And what would I need to give up?¡± Lu Yuan has always been very practical. Although the title of Ten Great Grandmasters sounded impressive, and being backed by the Da Yue dynasty, power and status were certainly not lacking. But with just these alone, they were not enough to make him work for the court. And what price would the court expect him to pay for these benefits and titles? It was unpredictable. There¡¯s no such thing as a free lunch in the world; without clarifying the conditions, Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t easily commit. However, Yang Jing seemed to have been prepared for this, and confidently smiled when the question was asked, ¡°What benefits will the court give? Do you think the world and the Altars of Soil and Grain are good enough?¡± Lu Yuan was stunned. ¡°What does Lord Yang mean by that?¡± Yang Jing solemnly said, ¡°1 mean it in a literal sense. The court can divide the land and grant fiefdoms, setting aside a territory for General Lu to establish his own country and become the king of a region. This time the court has offered to divide the land and grant fiefdoms in order to recruit Jianghu Inborn Grandmasters. As long as the general is willing to serve the court, the court can give you half the land of a region and five prefectures to establish your own country, and from then on, you can be a king in your own right. However, after founding the country, you must submit and become a subject of the New Dynasty.¡± Is this condition enough for you, General? And as for the cost, you only need to help pacify the Miao frontier rebellion after you have attained Innate and assist the court in repelling the invasion of the Zhou Country.¡± Dividing the land and granting a fiefdom? Lu Yuan never expected that the court¡¯s conditions would be so magnanimous. A tune of half a region and five prefectures for one Inborn Grandmaster. So if the court recruits four Jianghu Innates, would they not directly give away two regions¡¯ worth of land? The court might as well just negotiate with the Zhou Country directly and cede the land of Xichuan and Dongting if they are to be so generous. After all, they would be losing two regions anyway; giving them away now would save the trouble of fighting. ¡®No, I can¡¯t say that. The Zhou Country is on the same level as the Yue Country. If it were to take two regions, the disparity between the Zhou and Yue countries would be as much as four regions after one increases and one decreases. Once the Zhou Country has digested Xichuan and Dongting, their size and greed will not allow them to let go of the significantly weakened Yue Country. By then, even with a new dynasty in place, the Yue Country would still have to face the threat of destruction after losing the Yangtze River Natural Barrier. Therefore, the Six Surnames and Seven Clans cannot accept this end result. That¡¯s why they came up with this Ten Grandmasters Plan.¡± The idea is rather than give up their territory to the Zhou Country, they would prefer to assign it to Jianghu Innates of the same Yue nationality, letting those major Jianghu sects take the front line and help them share the pressure. The court retains the core essence of the seven regions while gaining four subordinate states at the same time. On the surface, the actual power does not seem to have diminished too much. What a good calculation.¡¯ After analyzing the thoughts of those court officials in his heart, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but admire them silently. Then, looking at Yang Jing, he replied readily, ¡°Since Lord Yang recommends it, it would be ungrateful of me to refuse. I accept the position of one of the Ten Grandmasters. However, I have a condition ¨C the land designated for my fiefdom must be in Jiuzhen. ¡± Jiuzhen Region is located in the southern border of Da Yue, surrounded by small countries. Going there to establish a nation would not face much pressure. Although Yang Jing didn¡¯t explicitly say so, Lu Yuan inferred that besides Jiuzhen, which was newly conquered, the other land granted by the court for the fiefdom must be Xichuan without a doubt. And what is the current situation in Xichuan? The whole region has been devastated, and with deserted places everywhere, it is directly facing the front line of the Zhou Country. Establishing a nation there is not a luxury but a suffering. Not only would he have to exhaust his mind and body to restore local production, but he would also have to keep a vigilant guard against the invasion of the Zhou Country. Lu Yuan would be a fool if he agreed to go to such a place. And in the face of his request, Yang Jing pondered for a moment before nodding, ¡°I can discuss this matter with the other officials of the court; it shouldn¡¯t be too much of a problem.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s face broke into a smile. ¡°I¡¯ll leave it to you then, Lord Yang.¡± At this point, an agreement had been reached between both parties. The atmosphere became much more cheerful.. Chapter 274 - Chapter 274: Chapter 170: I Have a Method Chapter 274: Chapter 170: I Have a Method Translator: 549690339 After reaching an agreement with Yang Jing on the matter of the top ten Grandmasters and establishing a common interest, the relationship between the two sides became much more harmonious. With high spirits, Yang Jing stopped discussing serious matters and took Lu Yuan on a tour of the eight scenic spots of Tianluo Mountain. When night fell during the journey, they would find a cave on the mountain, or simply sleep under the moonlight. If they happened to be at a place with a Ziyun Dao terrace, they would rest there and enjoy a delicious meal. Having enjoyed themselves so much, by the time they had visited all eight scenic spots, nearly three days had passed for the Daoist gathering. ¡°Next is the preaching session, where people from various Dao veins will take the stage to lecture on Dao Law,¡± On the way back, after having played together for three days, the relationship between the two progressed rapidly, and their addresses to each other had changed over the days spent together. Yang Jing turned to Lu Yuan and advised, ¡°Virtuous brother, you¡¯re about to break through to Innate, and it¡¯s the right time to contemplate your martial arts external body. Listening to these high scholars¡¯ lectures will be of great benefit to forming your martial arts external body.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan quickly expressed his gratitude, ¡°Thank you, elder brother, for your guidance. I will definitely study these experts¡¯ Dao Law with diligence.¡± This was the benefit of joining the top ten Grandmasters¡¯ plan. Now Lu Yuan would be able to learn some secrets and experiences of breaking through to Innate from Yang Jing, which would have been difficult for him to access otherwise. These two days, he hadn¡¯t been playing the entire time. While enjoying the scenery, Lu Yuan would also indirectly pry some knowledge about Innate from Yang Jing. Yang Jing would mostly answer his questions, only avoiding answering those topics that were truly crucial and core. Even so, the overall gains were already very rich. At the very least, Lu Yuan now had a general idea of how to form his martial arts external body, rather than being completely clueless as before. He finally had a direction in which to work hard. Zhen Xuan¡¯s statement was indeed correct; when it came to martial artists breaking through to Innate, there were a thousand faces for a thousand people, and each person¡¯s martial arts external body was different. There was no completely feasible example that one could refer to and learn from. However, there were at least eight thousand, if not ten thousand, martial artists who had broken through to Martial Arts Innate throughout history. With so many successful experiences available, one could find some commonalities through a large-scale data analysis. It wasn¡¯t necessary to be identical to the others. One only needed to explore and comprehend slowly, following the points with a higher probability of success or greater universality. In doing so, one¡¯s own probability of breaking through to Innate would naturally be much higher than that of others. As it happened, over the past thousand years, the Five Families and Seven Clans had cultivated hundreds of Innate Fighters. With so much data gathered, it was a simple matter for them to give Lu Yuan a little guidance. Therefore, the longer the inheritance of a sect or power, the deeper its foundation. This wasn¡¯t only reflected in material aspects, but even more so in the experiences of their predecessors. Anyway, after interacting and conversing with Yang Jing, Lu Yuan had deeply experienced the gap between the grassroots and aristocratic families. Although this gap was not insurmountable, solely relying on one person¡¯s exploration would take him at least a century or two, even for someone as talented as him. Now, by joining the top ten Grandmasters and becoming a sort of insider among those aristocratic families, Lu Yuan could also freeload on some of their inheritance secrets, which was the greatest benefit of all. Following Yang Jing, the two returned to the gathering venue. At this point, there were more people in the venue. Daoists who had scattered throughout the mountain earlier had gathered back together, but like before, they had divided themselves into various groups and formed their own small circles. Moreover, unlike before, as Lu Yuan observed, he could clearly sense an undercurrent of eagerness pulsating through the crowd. It was not merely eagerness, but some Daoist groups had also become increasingly hostile to one another, engaging in conflicts and mutual confrontation. However, this confrontational phenomenon mostly appeared among the larger Dao veins with more people. The smaller Dao veins with fewer people didn¡¯t seem to have such a situation, and they were still harmonious. ¡°Currently, in Yue State Daoism, Ziyun Dao is undoubtedly the leader. Below Ziyun Dao, Feishuang Dao is unquestionably the second,¡± Seeing that Lu Yuan seemed to be concerned about the atmosphere in the venue, Yang Jing laughed and said, ¡°But after the first and second, there is also a third. Even though being the third is far less prestigious than being the first or the second, it is still a top-three ranking, not something that the rest can compare with.¡± ¡°For any Dao vein, obtaining the third place in Yue State Daoism would bring great honor and help boost the Dao Inheritance.¡± ¡°Besides Ziyun Dao and Feishuang Dao, the remaining famous ones in Yue are Taoist Immortal Path, Golden Tripod Dao, Path of Ten Directions, and Red Star Dao.¡± ¡°These four major Dao veins each dominate a province, with hundreds of thousands of believers across counties, with extensive influence.¡± ¡°For them, if they can secure the third place in Yue State Daoism, they can then use it to expand their Daoist influence.¡± ¡°If they can develop millions of believers, occupying the faith of half a province or even a whole province, even without methods of cultivation, it would not be impossible to nurture a few Innate Grandmasters.¡± ¡°By that point, could it be said that their power is weaker than that of Ziyun Dao or Feishuang Dao?¡± ¡°By the same logic, our Yue Country consists of nine provinces, and the chief Dao sects have been determined in six of them. The remaining three provinces, however, still lack a leading Dao vein..¡± Chapter 275 - Chapter 275: Chapter 170: I Have a Method_2 Chapter 275: Chapter 170: I Have a Method_2 Translator: 549690339 Those Dao Veins of the three prefectures, upon witnessing the prestige of the Taoist Immortal Path, the Path of Ten Directions, etc., wouldn¡¯t they want to emulate them? Looking at the nations in the world, the Dao Veins of these nations want to compete in the top three, all to gain benefits for their own Dao Veins. The most useful venue for the countless Dao Veins to determine their victors would be events like the Inescapable Meeting, hosted by the Six Great Dao Veins of the Nine Provinces. Therefore, the ambitious Dao Veins cannot wait to compete. They want to express their own Dao Vein¡¯s ideas in the two sections of lectures and debates, debate against the Dao Veins of the world, gain recognition by the Daoists in the world, and thus lay the foundation for the Qi Fate of their own Dao Veins. That¡¯s why in every Inescapable Meeting, or other similar events, the lecture and debate sections are the most fiercely contested and where the most conflicts arise. There are quite a few Dao Veins that have lost in debates, their reputations in decline as a result. On the other hand, there are also numerous Dao Veins that have won and soared to great heights. The rivalry between these winning and losing Dao Veins has led to deep-seated hatred, and who knows how many conflicts. Upon saying this, Yang Jing couldn¡¯t help but sigh with emotion, ¡°Just by organizing one meeting, the six major Dao Veins managed to make the Dao Veins of the world compete against each other, truly amazing¡­¡± Lord Yang didn¡¯t finish his sentence. But Lu Yuan was not a fool, he understood the meaning behind Yang Jing¡¯s words. It¡¯s nothing more than the Six Great Dao Veins trying to prevent other Dao Veins from advancing and seizing their interests. They deliberately set up such events to make the servants below fight over the leftovers that they throw them, creating deep hatreds and disunity among them. Trapped in this situation, the Dao Veins in the world will never be able to unite and climb up to challenge their positions. It has to be said, although such a move is a blatant scheme, those with some foresight can easily see through it. However, at the same time, people are shortsighted by nature, or at least most of the time people have no choice but to be shortsighted. Facing the leftovers thrown out by the Six Great Dao Veins, not fighting over them would be far-sighted. But once your competitors get their hands on them, before you even get the chance to challenge the Six Great Dao Veins, you might be taken down by your competitors, never to rise again. Therefore, for the sake of their own survival, the Dao Veins have no choice but to participate, even if they know they have no chance of success. Everything is done for the sake of survival, after all. ¡°The lecture and debates will officially begin tomorrow.¡± After discussing the interests behind the lectures and debates, the two had arrived at Ziyun Palace, where Daoists attending the conference were to stay. Yang Jing said to Lu Yuan, ¡°Virtuous brother, you¡¯d better find a place to rest first. I have something to do and won¡¯t be able to keep you company.¡± Lu Yuan hurriedly bowed, ¡°If brother has things to do, then go ahead. I have gained much insight from your teachings these past few days, and I should taKe rms opportunity to retreat ror a wnne. Yang Jing nodded, ¡°Then, I will take my leave.¡± With that, he floated away. Lu Yuan watched his departing figure, stood in place for a while, then turned and headed to an empty room nearby. Just as he was doing so, a pair of eyes from the distance confirmed the room where he would stay before quickly turning and leaving. Once inside his room, Lu Yuan brewed a cup of fragrant tea for himself and then sat at his desk, deep in thought. Attending the conference this time had undoubtedly been the wisest decision he had made in recent years. The biggest gain was obtaining a method to break through the Innate Realm, which had troubled Lu Yuan for a long time. He finally saw hope in breaking this barrier. It could even be said that all he needed was to retreat for several months, or a year, and breaking through the Innate Realm should be quite possible. As long as he achieves the Innate Realm, the threat of the Saintess of the Five Poisons, and any other threats, would instantly vanish. With the threat to his life resolved, it naturally put him in a good mood. ¡°And there¡¯s also the court¡¯s plan to cultivate ten Grandmasters.¡± Lu Yuan felt a chill when he thought of this court strategy that he had discussed with Yang Jing in the past few days. It was a huge undertaking for the court to gather and cultivate ten Inborn Grandmasters all at once ¨C truly an ambition that swallowed the skies. What¡¯s even more terrifying is that the court has already gathered six Inborn Grandmasters and is in the process of cultivating one more. As for the progress of recruiting the remaining Jianghu Grandmasters, who knows when it¡¯ll be completed. It could be said that with each passing day, the court could have one more, two more, or even three more Grandmasters. If the court were to succeed in this effort, Then Lu Yuan¡¯s original intention of ruling over Dongting and living as a carefree vassal, Would probably be targeted by the court before he could even enjoy his carefree life, facing numerous Grandmasters and being wiped out in a single wave of attacks. Wuyang Marquis Li Gui, after all, had lost his life to the assassination attempt by the Saintess of the Poison Sect and the Emperor of Shu, Li Xiong, due to a moment of negligence. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t think that he could have a lucky escape when facing the court¡¯s carefully planned assassination. The court has many second layer Innate experts after all. Facing these veteran Innate masters, even if he could break through to the Innate realm, he might not have much power to resist. Overcoming opponents from higher realms is a common event in novels, but Lu Yuan, who had been fighting on the Jianghu battlefields for so long, had never seen a real-life example. Since such examples were not seen in reality, even though he was a traverser with certain advantages, Lu Yuan did not believe he could really overpower opponents from higher realms in combat.. Chapter 276 - Chapter 276: Chapter 170: I Have a Method_3 Chapter 276: Chapter 170: I Have a Method_3 Translator: 549690339 Even taking a step back. Even if he could unleash his power in a berserk manner, it often meant falling into a desperate situation, and as an immortal with an infinite lifespan, that meant the greatest danger. Never take risks if they can be avoided. This is the principle that immortals should adhere to. ¡°However, now I have joined the imperial court¡¯s Ten Grandmasters plan and have become one of the court¡¯s own.¡± In the future, even if the court assembles the Ten Inborn masters, it will be me following the other grandmasters of the court, ganging up to assassinate others together. I don¡¯t have to worry about others ganging up on me.¡± Thinking of the future, where he would cling to powerful figures, teaming up to beat up the Holy Maiden of the Five Poisons Sect, and Li Xiong of Xi Shu, Lu Yuan felt a surge of excitement. As for Li Xiong, it didn¡¯t really matter. Although the Qiang Ethnic Emperor was on the opposite side of the camp, there was basically no conflict between them. Neither had a deep grudge nor much motivation to fight against each other. But the Holy Maiden of the Five Poisons Sect was different. Lan Cai¡¯er, ever since breaking through Innate, had always been a great hidden danger and threat to Lu Yuan¡¯s life. And the Five Poison Sect, the Great Miao Sect, had been a powerful enemy of Lu Yuan all along, as they had fought and killed each other countless times. Both sides have already formed a relationship between life and death. Now that his side had the opportunity to beat up their enemies and even eliminate them, it was naturally a pleasant matter. ¡°I heard that the Holy Maiden of the Five Poison Sect has a stunning appearance and a world-shaking beauty. She is both a Holy Maiden and an Inborn Grandmaster. Such rare beauties are truly¡­tsk tsk!¡± As he thought about it, Lu Yuan¡¯s thoughts began to wander a bit. He was about to break through Innate soon. Upon achieving Innate, he would be able to lock up his essence and secure his vital energy without worrying about losing it. At that time, the issue of sexual relations between men and women that had troubled him would no longer be taboo. Having traveled through time and endured for fifteen years, Lu Yuan finally saw hope for his harem and could not help but let his mind wander. ¡°It¡¯s a pity that even if I break through Innate, I probably won¡¯t be able to subdue the Holy Maiden of the Five Poison Sect given her position. If she were really captured, the greatest possibility is that she¡¯d be offered to the new dynasty¡¯s Shen family¡¯s emperor, and she won¡¯t be available for me to enjoy.¡± After indulging in his fantasies for a while, Lu Yuan sighed. Then, he changed his line of thought: ¡°However, according to the agreement, after I help the court suppress rebellion and repel invaders, I will be able to establish my fiefdom and be a king in a corner of the land. At that time, acting as a supporting king, with a territory of thousands of miles and governing millions of people, I would have my own Altar of Soil and Grain. ¡± I can build palaces, expand the harem, carry out large-scale construction projects, indulge in wine and feast, have three thousand beautiful women, and happily be an incompetent ruler. Shangguan Haimoon is not bad, although her strength is not enough to be the queen, but she can be given the position of a noble concubine at that time.¡± Also, the other six surnames and seven families can be married one by one. Didn¡¯t Yang Jing, that old fellow, always want to recommend his niece to me? At that time, I will also take in two of them and give each a consort¡¯s position¡­Hehe¡­¡± As he thought about it, he laughed. Lu Yuan never forgets his life¡¯s ideals. Cultivation is just to have a strong martial force to protect oneself, and after ensuring one¡¯s own safety, being able to enjoy life carefree and unrestrained is the key point. For an immortal with an infinite lifespan, without the pressure of death, not enjoying life to the fullest would be doing oneself an injustice, right? I, Lu Yuan, traveled to this world and suffered so much, not to let myself suffer, but to enjoy life. At this moment, Lu Yuan felt quite justified in his heart. However, just as he was thinking about it, his smile vanished, and he looked towards the doorway, sensing something. Dong dong dong. A series of knocking sounds rang out. ¡°I wonder, is Fellow Daoist Lu here?¡± Outside the door, a familiar voice came in. Lu Yuan frowned, recalling the events of the past few days, and quickly thought of someone. Dan Ding Path, Anqiu. Thinking of the identity of the person outside the door, Lu Yuan¡¯s expression changed, and he immediately got up, went to the door, opened it, and saw Anqiu True Person with a smiling face. ¡°Greetings, True Person.¡± Seeing that the person outside was indeed who he had guessed, Lu Yuan was slightly shocked and quickly saluted. ¡°I hope I didn¡¯t bother Fellow Daoist Lu by visiting unexpectedly.¡± As Anqiu heard this, he smiled and returned the salute, then looked left and right and said, ¡°Won¡¯t you invite me in to have a cup of hot tea?¡± ¡°Please come in, True Person.¡± Lu Yuan quickly stepped aside and invited him in. Once inside the room, both of them took their seats, and after serving premium tea, Lu Yuan asked, ¡°True Person, what brings you to me this time?¡± The person in front of him was a True Person of the Dan Ding Path, possessing Immortal Techniques, and was not on par with Martial Arts Xiantians. After that visit, he thought that he might never see him again. Now that such person came looking for him, it was hard not to wonder what his intentions were. Upon hearing the question, Anqiu¡¯s expression turned serious. ¡°Fellow Daoist Lu, I see that your Heart Towards the Dao is very firm. Have you ever thought of practicing Immortal Techniques and enjoying eternal freedom?¡± Upon hearing this question, Lu Yuan was slightly taken aback. His heart stirred, giving birth to many guesses. However, he wore a wry smile on his face, saying, ¡°Of course, I have thought about it. Wasn¡¯t True Person Zhen Xuan saying a few days ago?¡± In this world, all the Cave Worlds have owners, and for us scattered cultivators on the side paths who want to cultivate immortality, there is no way.¡± Having said that, Lu Yuan¡¯s face showed reluctance and helplessness. Seeing his troubled appearance, Anqiu chuckled and then said in a melancholic tone, ¡°But what if I tell you that I have a method that will allow you to cultivate immortality even without Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens? Would you be willing to try it, Fellow Daoist?¡± Could one cultivate immortality without Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens? Upon hearing these words, even Lu Yuan, with his level of mental cultivation, couldn¡¯t help but have a change in his expression. He then thought of thousands of possibilities, and his gaze turned solemn as he looked at Anqiu, asking seriously, ¡°Is what True Person said true?¡± Anqiu calmly nodded, ¡°Of course, it¡¯s true.¡± As his words fell, the breathing in the room paused for a moment.. Chapter 277 - Chapter 277: Chapter 171: The Taiping Dao Book Chapter 277: Chapter 171: The Taiping Dao Book Translator: 549690339 ¡°¡±Whoosh! Whoosh! Whoosh! After taking several deep breaths, Lu Yuan suppressed the agitation in his heart and looked at Anqiu, asking solemnly, ¡°What does True Person want me to do?¡± Anqiu came to his door, offering to give him the Immortal Technique. It seemed to be a great thing, but Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t believe that the other party was here to show kindness. There is no love in the world without reason. The other party was willing to give out the Immortal Technique, even without using the Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens, no matter how he looked at it, there were problems. So, even though Lu Yuan¡¯s heart was moved, he dared not agree without asking. Without asking the other party¡¯s purpose, he dared not taste this seemingly delicious sweetness. ¡°Poor Daoist does not need Taoist Lu to do anything,¡± Anqiu said with a smile. However, upon hearing this, Lu Yuan became even more uneasy. The most expensive one is always the free one. What is it about giving out an Immortal Technique without asking for anything that doesn¡¯t seem right? ¡°Isn¡¯t True Person joking?¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s tone was calm. ¡°I know what Fellow Daoist is thinking, but don¡¯t be in a hurry. Listen to what I have to say.¡± Anqiu knew what Lu Yuan was worried about, and at this moment, he shook his head and then said leisurely, ¡°Indeed, this Immortal Technique can be given to Fellow Daoist for free, without the need for you to do anything. However, there are some shortcomings in practicing this technique.¡± Lu Yuan frowned: ¡°Shortcomings? Anqiu nodded and said, ¡°Yes, shortcomings. I don¡¯t know if Fellow Daoist remembers the Taiping Dao Rebellion in Jianan Prefecture at the end of the 28th year of Longqing?¡± Lu Yuan said, ¡°I remember that when Chi Mingzhu rebelled, it was the first time for us in Da Yue to rebel, and since then, there have been frequent uprisings in various places.¡± At the end of the twenty-eighth year of Longqing, Chi Mingzhu, the founder of Taiping Dao in Jianyang Mansion of Jianan Prefecture, pretended to be the Red Sun Immortal, and led tens of thousands of followers to rebel in the name of the decadent court and the imminent collapse of the Yue Dynasty. Within a short period of half a month, he had captured cities and broken counties, occupying the two prefectures¡¯ lands and launching the first rebellion in Da Yue. It was under the influence of Taiping Dao that various prefectures in Da Yue began to have people come forward to rebel. However, the so-called first rebels to die were the pioneers for the king. The first one to take the lead, Taiping Dao, soon received a thunderous blow from the Da Yue court. Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang led a hundred thousand troops to Jianan Prefecture to suppress the rebellion, and within a few months, he had put down the great uprising that claimed to have hundreds of thousands of people. As for the Demonic Path leader Chi Mingzhu, he died of illness before the uprising was put down. Thus, such a massive rebellion ended in a fizzle. Lu Yuan still remembered that when the news of the suppression of the Taiping Dao Rebellion came, his good friend Sun Siwen invited him to drink a few cups of wine in celebration of the court¡¯s victory. However, what does that uprising of a defeated Dao Vein have to do with this Immortal Technique? Could it be that Taiping Dao possesses the Immortal Technique? As Lu Yuan was puzzled, Anqiu continued, ¡°On the surface, the Taiping Rebellion seems to be a rebellion. However, among our six major Dao Veins, there is actually another layer of explanation. In fact, one could argue that the chaos within Taiping Dao was actually an experiment conducted under the watchful eyes of us.¡± ¡°Experiment?¡± Upon hearing this term, Lu Yuan felt a slight chill in his heart. Could it be that the forces behind the Taiping Dao Rebellion are the six major Dao veins? And what is the experiment? Continuous confusion emerged, making it impossible for him to guess for a while. Luckily, Anqiu didn¡¯t let him guess for long and simply gave him the answer: ¡°Yes, it¡¯s an experiment. Now that the Celestial Spirit Qi is greatly dwindling, even our six major Dao veins, within the Cave World, are finding it increasingly difficult to absorb the essence of the sun and the moon. In the long run, within a couple of hundred years or even two to three hundred years, the last few of the ten Cave Worlds will no longer be able to absorb the Celestial Spirit Qi. And if another four or five hundred years pass, even the top three Cave Worlds will be unable to cultivate Immortal Techniques. This means that after five hundred years, there will not be a single Cultivator within the Nine Provinces and Five Continents and Four Oceans.¡± Anqiu looked sharply at Lu Yuan, his voice trembling slightly, filled with fear and anger, and spoke with some unwillingness, ¡°We, the cultivators of this generation, seek Cultivating Immortality and Refining Dao, and the freedom of longevity throughout our lives. But now, there is no hope for Ascension. After a while, even cultivation itself has become an illusion. Having tasted the life of an Immortal, how can we bear to fall back into the mortal world? If we cannot practice Immortal Techniques, then what is the difference between us, the six major Dao veins, and the other Dao veins in the world? Even the other Dao veins that have been practicing martial arts all the year round have more accumulation in this aspect than us. Compared with them, our six major Dao veins may not even have the slightest advantage. By then, it will not be just a problem of the decline of the Dao veins. I am afraid that the other Dao veins that have been suppressed by us will all jump out and tear us to pieces.¡± As he spoke, Anqiu¡¯s tone became indifferent. ¡°So, in order not to fall into the mortal world as well as to protect ourselves, we naturally have to find other ways to ensure that we can continue to practice even after the Celestial Spirit Qi in the Cave World is exhausted. Thus, all of our six major Dao veins have our own plans. Not to mention the tactics of the other several Dao veins, the scheme of my Dan Ding Dao is the Taiping Dao Rebellion. However, the rebellion was obviously a failure.¡± As Anqiu mentioned failure, his eyes turned to Lu Yuan, shining brightly. Lu Yuan felt a chill down his spine as he was stared at by the other¡¯s menacing gaze. Having listened to the entire story, he almost understood that the six major Dao veins were not as glorious and carefree as outsiders thought. At this moment, the Dao veins with the Immortal Technique¡¯s inheritance were also troubled by the problem of The Age of Dharma Decline, and even faced the danger of terminating their Dao inheritance..¡± Chapter 278 - Chapter 278: Chapter 171 Taiping Dao Book_2 Chapter 278: Chapter 171 Taiping Dao Book_2 Translator: 549690339 Therefore, before they completely declined, these Dao Veins began to save themselves one after another. But their method of self-preservation¡­ ¡®The Taiping Dao rebellion was actually supported by the Dan Ding Dao. The reason has to do with the Last Dharma Cultivation Immortal Method? But the rebellion failed. The other party¡¯s experiment failed, and they¡¯re looking for a new test subject. So they¡¯re targeting me?¡¯ Lu Yuan secretly felt horrified in his heart, believing that he had encountered a major problem. Subconsciously, he wanted to cut off this topic and send the person away. He couldn¡¯t continue discussing this. But before Lu Yuan could speak, Anqiu seemed to have seen through his thoughts and smiled: ¡°Fellow Daoist, rest assured, Poor Daoist won¡¯t force you to agree to participate in this experiment. Even if you refuse, I can still give you the Immortal Technique for free. This Inescapable Meeting is a place for fellow daoists to exchange Dao Law with each other. I came this time without any ill intentions, just wanting to make friends with Fellow Daoist. As for the gift of the Immortal Technique, consider it a Gift.¡± As he spoke, Anqiu unexpectedly took out a package from his bosom, and after opening it, handed over a book: ¡°This is the Immortal Technique I mentioned, called the Taiping Dao Book. This Dao Law is what I painstakingly obtained from the remains of an ancient Dao vein. Because it is too old, some parts are missing and incomplete. Now many of the contents are slowly filled in by my Dao seniors. Nevertheless, the book still contains a path that can directly point to five perfect qi, allowing for Ascension. I will give it to Fellow Daoist today.¡± Taiping Dao Book? Five perfect qi? Upon hearing what Anqiu said, Lu Yuan¡¯s heart was slightly moved, but he did not reach out to accept it. Instead, he said solemnly, ¡°Anqiu True Person, may I ask what exactly is the experiment you mentioned earlier? Is there any major hidden danger in cultivating this book?¡± Anqiu smiled faintly and did not conceal anything, openly saying, ¡°Cultivating this book indeed has hidden dangers. As the name Taiping Dao Book suggests, it cultivates the method of world peace. As Fellow Daoist now understands, we cultivators need to absorb the celestial spirit qi, draw in the essence of the sun and the moon. However, with the decline of celestial spirit qi and the gradual difficulty in initiating the essence of the sun and the moon, cultivation is becoming increasingly difficult. To practice, you must rank among the top ten Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens. However, this is not the only way to cultivate. In ancient times, during the era of the Three Emperors, they collected gold from the world and refined three Heavenly Pillars. This Heavenly Pillar anchors the thoughts and qi luck of the world¡¯s people. Connecting with the celestial stars, sun, and moon, it is a bridge between Heaven and Earth. By using this Heavenly Pillar, our generation of cultivators can directly connect with the essence of the sun and the moon, without relying on the Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens, to cultivate Immortal Techniques. To take advantage of this Heavenly Pillar, one must collect the thoughts of the people and bring together the qi luck of the dynasty. Only then can it be placed in the Heavenly Pillar to replace the Immortal Spirit qi, leverage the essence of the celestial stars, sun, and moon, and become part of oneself. The Taiping Dao Book is a Dao method that gathers the wills of the people and the qi luck of the world to help oneself cultivate. It is precisely because of this feature that my Dan Ding Dao chose this method as a backup plan to maintain the Dao inheritance after the decline of the Cavern Heavens.¡± Anqiu was too candid. So candid that he laid out the secrets of his sect. However, the more Lu Yuan listened, the more anxious he became. It was this open and aboveboard conspiracy that left him defenseless. Do you hear what the other party is saying? Ancient Three Emperors, Heavenly Pillars, bearing the minds of the people, gathering the qi luck of dynasties, connecting with celestial stars, and assimilating the essence of the sun and the moon¡­ Each of these, just from their names alone seemed extraordinary. As a mere mortal, how could he get involved with these things and expect a good outcome? Furthermore, the Dan Ding Dao had such a great thing, but instead of cultivating it themselves, they were distributing it like cabbage. Clearly, there was a problem with it. ¡°True Person Anqiu, it is a blessing for your sect to have this Immortal Method to continue cultivating during the decline of Cavern Heavens. However, I, Lu Yuan, am currently focused on martial arts and have little interest in cultivation. Fellow Daoist, please take this book back.¡± At this point, Lu Yuan wanted to withdraw, not even wanting to participate in the later part of the gathering. He felt that if he continued to stay here, troubles would come one after another. However, Anqiu held onto Lu Yuan like a leech, refusing to let him go: ¡°Fellow Daoist, there¡¯s no need to be in a hurry to decline. As I said, I¡¯m giving this book to you without any conditions. If Fellow Daoist is willing to cultivate, then cultivate. If not, then so be it, why be so afraid? Wait until I finish explaining the drawbacks of this method, then making a decision won¡¯t be too late.¡± With the other party saying so much, Lu Yuan had no choice but to nod and say, ¡°True Person, please continue.¡± Anqiu nodded and said, ¡°Although the Taiping Dao Book can cultivate Immortal Techniques without relying on celestial spirit qi, this is not without a price. Heaven and Earth have constancy, and there is a fixed number. We cultivators, in our pursuit of the Dao and immortality, are inherently defying the natural order. Such defiance of the heavenly path will naturally bring retribution. In the dark. tribulations will come down. Normally, the tribulations faced while practicing Immortal Techniques are Wind Tribulation, Fire Tribulation, Thunder Tribulation, and Heart Demon Tribulation. Although these tribulations are terrifying, they are not without countermeasures. However, after cultivating the Taiping Immortal Method, the tribulation that falls is the Life Tribulation. The Taiping Dao Book can gather the hearts of all people in the world, and this act is undoubtedly majestic as it gathers the world¡¯s qi luck for oneself. However, at the same time, you are equivalent to bearing the tribulation of fate for the countless people in the world. Therefore, cultivating this Immortal Method not only allows you to take advantage of the power of all the people in the world, but you also have to bear the tribulation of all the people in the world.. Chapter 279 - Chapter 279: Chapter 171: Taiping Dao BookJ Chapter 279: Chapter 171: Taiping Dao BookJ Translator: 549690339 How can the ordinary fate of a person withstand the fate of all the world¡¯s people? If one cannot bear this fate, they will immediately suffer divine retribution and die on the spot. In the original book, there should be a solution for this inability to bear the fate. But when I obtained the Taiping Dao Book, it was already missing a lot, and some of the methods to resolve it were also lost. My successors and I have amended some of it, but there are still some flaws left. Although the problem of dying on the spot due to the inability to bear the fate has been solved, it has only been reduced and converted into another cost lifespan. The more one practices this method, the more life will be shortened. The fate that one cannot bear will turn into a Life Tribulation, reducing one¡¯s lifespan. Therefore, during the previous Taiping Dao chaos, Chi Mingzhu only survived for two months and then died of illness. This is because he could not bear the fate of the hundreds of thousands of people in the rebel army, and his lifespan was completely reduced. As a result, the main problem with practicing the Taiping Dao Book is the consumption of lifespan. However, according to the deductions and optimizations of our true ancestors, the stronger one¡¯s strength, the stronger their fate, and the more they can withstand the world¡¯s Qi Luck and Destiny backlash. So theoretically, the stronger an individual¡¯s strength is, the weaker the Life Tribulation¡¯s reduction of lifespan will be. Previously, the Taiping Dao master Chi Mingzhu, who started the rebellion, had just entered the first-rate level of strength, which was extremely weak. That¡¯s why he only lasted for two months and then his life was exhausted and he died. However, if it were a peak first-rate practitioner or even an Inborn Grandmaster, practicing this method would last even longer. One year, several years, it¡¯s not impossible. And if one can comprehend the first realm of this book before one¡¯s life is exhausted, condensing a stream of Five Elements Qi in one¡¯s chest, they can enjoy another two hundred years of life. Not only will their lifespan be doubled compared to ordinary people, but their strength and fate will also be greatly enhanced, making them more resistant to the backlash of fate. At that time, lasting for a decade or two, or even twenty to thirty years, will not be impossible. Therefore, practicing this book is not necessarily a death sentence, nor is it impossible to become immortal. There is always a glimmer of life.¡± Saying this, Anqiu stood up, walked in front of Lu Yuan and placed the Dao Book in his hands on the table. He earnestly said, ¡°Fellow Daoist Lu, I have explained the pros and cons of this matter.¡± My Dan Ding Dao gives you this book without any major ill intentions. We just want to find an Inborn Grandmaster willing to practice this book and see if they can hold up against the Life Tribulation with their lifespan and destiny of one hundred and fifty years. When we saw you at the event, we noticed your youth and unlimited future, that¡¯s why we came forward.¡± Whether or not you practice this Dao Book is up to you, and we will not force you.¡± We are not only looking for you as a partner, but we will also seek other Inborn Grandmasters in the future. Moreover, for all Inborn Grandmasters who practice this method, at the time of the uprising, my Dan Ding Dao will provide huge financial support, as well as various Divine Blood Elixirs and martial arts secret books, to ensure their success.¡± This is our investment and sincerity.¡± Silence. Still silent. Lu Yuan never expected that Dan Ding Dao would have this idea. Because the technique is so life-consuming, they dare not try it, so they sought some Inborn Grandmasters to serve as cannon fodder, helping them to be test subjects and gather experimental data. So, Lu Yuan is not unique. There are others targeted by Dan Ding Dao? After hearing Anqiu¡¯s open and aboveboard plan, Lu Yuan had to say, his heart was moved. A cultivation technique that can make one immortal even at the end of the law era, with the only side effect being the inability to bear the extra Fate of Qi Luck, which will reduce one¡¯s lifespan, leading to an early death. This side effect, this Taiping Dao Book, no matter how you look at it, seems like an excellent cultivation technique tailor-made for him. Life, Lu Yuan has an almost infinite lifespan and cannot be exhausted. Qi Luck and Destiny, he is now the Pingxi General, directly controlling a domain and having another attached to him, ruling over hundreds of thousands of people, so he has no shortage of Qi Luck and Destiny. So, with this Taiping Dao Book, Lu Yuan can start practicing almost immediately. And if he can cultivate this immortal technique, who would bother with martial arts? Is cultivating martial arts as good as cultivating immortality? His heart thumped twice. Suppressing the urge to laugh out loud, Lu Yuan showed a solemn and hesitant expression on his face. After feigning hesitation, he finally stretched out his hand and accepted the Dao Book. Then he looked up at Anqiu, with a slightly troubled voice, ¡°I¡¯ll accept this book for now. But I can¡¯t guarantee whether I will practice it or not.¡± Anqiu looked at the Dao Book in Lu Yuan¡¯s hand, with a smile on his face, ¡°Of course, I¡¯ve said that whether you want to practice this book or not is entirely up to you, and I won¡¯t force you.¡± While saying this in the conversation, Anqiu¡¯s heart was full of smiles. Lu Yuan, being young and energetic, had reached the peak level of first-rate strength at the age of only thirty, and it seemed that in another year or two, he would be able to achieve the Martial Arts Grandmaster realm. Such a talented young man, with no chance to come into contact with Cultivation, would have been fine. But now that he has brought Cultivation to him, Anqiu doesn¡¯t believe that he will be content to remain in obscurity and confined to the small world of martial arts for a lifetime, without being moved by the Taiping Dao Book. ne IS movea, men ne will ran Into Anqlu?s scneme. By then, a Martial Arts Grandmaster in his early thirties practicing the Taiping Dao Book will surely last much longer than those in their fifties or sixties. Such an excellent test subject is not easy to find under the sky. ¡®This time it¡¯s just luck, participating in a gathering and encountering Lu Yuan. Once I return to my sect, I will report to the Dao Master and ask for more resources and effort to be spent on monitoring Lu Yuan¡¯s development. Taiping Dao Book, Taiping Dao Book¡­ I wonder if a Martial Arts Grandmaster can withstand the backlash of fate? And how old would it take to achieve the Inborn realm? Can this backup plan of my Dan Ding Dao really succeed?¡± Anqiu sighed inwardly, then put on a smiling face and chatted with Lu Yuan for a while longer. During that time, they agreed that if Lu Yuan decides to practice this method, he can come to Dan Ding Dao and ask for assistance at any time. After that, Anqiu took his leave. Lu Yuan escorted Anqiu out the door and returned to his room after watching him disappear from sight. He then closed the door tightly. Afterward, he took out the Taiping Dao Book and began reading it with great excitement. The dream of cultivating immortal technique has finally come true.. Chapter 280 - Chapter 280: Chapter 172: Three Flowers and Five Gases Chapter 280: Chapter 172: Three Flowers and Five Gases Translator: 549690339 [All cultivators in the world strive for longevity through Qi refining.] Qi refiners refine the Celestial Spirit Qi of Heaven and Earth, absorbing the essence of the sun, moon, and stars into their bodies, and merging with their body¡¯s essence and soul. Heaven and Earth, sun and moon are everlasting; thus, those who consume Qi can achieve immortality.] Lu Yuan was flipping through the Taiping Dao Book in his hand, looking at the opening chapter, which introduced the essence of cultivation. Seizing the essence of Heaven and Earth, refining Qi for longevity. This was the general principle. As he turned the pages, the content varied. [The realm of cultivation is divided into four steps: Qi Refining, Qi into Spirit, Spirit Returning to Void, and Void and Dao Fusion. It also mentions the concept of Three Flowers Gathering and Five Qi towards Primordial. Qi Refining realm. At the beginning of a cultivator¡¯s Qi refining, they gather Celestial Spirit Qi of Heaven and Earth, refine the essence of the sun and the moon into their bodies, and merge it with their five internal organs. As a result, the essence within their body merges with the essence of the sun and the moon, transforming it into the Five Elements Qi. Once the Five Elements Qi is refined, they have achieved the Immortal Path Entry stage. At this point, they begin to shed their mortal bodies and enjoy a lifespan of 200 years. Refining two strands of Five Elements Qi further deepens the foundations of the Immortal Path. At this stage, the mortal body is halfway shed, and the lifespan increases by another 100 years. Refining three strands of Five Elements Qi establishes a foundation for the Immortal Path. The body forms a small world of the Five Elements within, attaining minor success in magical powers, and enjoying a lifespan of 500 years. Refining four strands of Five Elements Qi, the Five Elements approach perfection, the Dao foundation stabilizes, and the lifespan increases by 100 years. Refining five strands of Five Elements Qi, the Five Elements reach perfection, the Dao foundation matures, the magical powers achieve major success, and the lifespan increases to 800 years. This is called Five Qi Towards Primordial. After reaching the Five Qi Towards Primordial stage, the essence in the body transforms into Five Elements Qi, and the Immortal Path foundation reaches perfection. At this point, one is ready to refine Qi into Spirit. To cultivate this realm, one must refine their soul into their Dao foundation, nourishing it with the Five Qi, and cultivating the Yin Spirit. In doing so, they can form a flower atop their head, becoming a True Man of Immortal Path and entering the realm of Three Flowers Gathering. A True Man is an Immortal. Immortals are divided into three types: Heavenly Immortal, Earth Immortal, and Human Immortal. When a cultivator refines Qi into Spirit, they must form a single flower on the top of their head. This flower is called the Person Flower, and those who attain this realm are referred to as Human Immortals. Once a Human Immortal is achieved, they can enjoy a lifespan of 3,000 years and boundless freedom. Afterward, a cultivator can refine Spirit and return to Void, forming the second flower on top of their head. This flower is called the Earth Flower, and those who achieve it are known as Earth Immortals. When an Earth Immortal is achieved, they can enjoy a lifespan of 10,000 years and witness mountains, seas, and the cycle of life. Finally, a cultivator achieves Void and Dao Fusion, forming the third flower on top of their head. This flower is called the Heaven Flower, and those who attain it are known as Heavenly Immortals. Once a Heavenly Immortal is achieved, their lifespan becomes indefinite. They may live for tens of thousands of years, or even tens or hundreds of millions of years. It is not impossible to live even longer. Thus, the wonders of the Immortal Path are embodied in Three Flowers Gathering and Five Qi Towards Primordial.] After finishing the introduction, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help putting down the book and furrowing his brow in deep thought. ¡°Three Flowers Gathering, Five Qi Towards Primordial, so this world¡¯s cultivation follows this path.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s fingers traced over the Taoist book, glancing at the lines describing the cultivation realms. A wave of emotion welled up in his heart. Although not many words were written in this introductory chapter, just a little over a thousand, it already laid out the cultivation concept and Immortal Realm, providing him with a direction for the future. In fact, the theories of Three Flowers Gathering, Five Qi towards Primordial, Qi refining, Qi into Spirit, Spirit Returning to Void, and Void and Dao Fusion were all mentioned in the numerous Taoist Classics Lu Yuan had read in the past. However, the content was mostly abstract or descriptive, without giving any guidance on how to achieve these realms. Merely providing names and meanings without any practical guidance seemed pointless. Therefore, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t pay much attention to these terms and realms before, treating them as mere imaginative hypotheses. Things one couldn¡¯t achieve were useless, no matter how much they read or studied. It would just be a waste of time. However, little did he know that after encountering true Immortal Techniques, he realized the truths mentioned in the Taoist Classics were accurate. ¡°Actually, I did have some speculations about this before. After all, so many Taoist Classics mentioned these realms with high consistency. It would be unlikely to be a hoax. The True People who were rumored to have ascended also claimed to have condensed Five Qi and Three Flowers. But in the Taoist Classics, there were no specific cultivation methods described related to them. Even if one read those texts, they would be of no help.¡± Lu Yuan thought of the thousands of Taoist Classics he had read, and once again realized the Dao Veins¡¯ monopoly on Immortal Techniques. Without practical cultivation methods, even if you were given Taoist Classics and guided on a path, what could you do? You still couldn¡¯t cultivate to be an Immortal. You could only look at the achievements of your predecessors and envy them. ¡°Fortunately, now I have Immortal Techniques and can begin cultivating, no longer relegated to the realm of mere envy.¡± Lu Yuan felt slightly comforted, but then frowned as he remembered something: ¡°Previously, when I read the ¡®Yunxiaozijingmingqianxuanjing,¡¯ I calculated that the successive generations of Ziyun Dao Masters could live for roughly 200 years. With such a lifespan, based on the knowledge of the Three Flowers Gathering and Five Qi towards Primordial realm, doesn¡¯t this mean that the past generations of Ziyun Dao Masters basically only achieved the realm of refining one strand of the Five Elements Qi? Even the 7th -generation Ziyun Dao Master Yun Xiao Zi, who wrote this scripture, seemed to have mentioned that he established his Immortal foundation, formed Heaven and Earth within himself, and then ascended on clouds. But according to this description, this is nothing more than the achievement of three Qi, barely establishing a Dao foundation and having a small in-body world of the Five Elements. Moreover, his magical powers had only achieved minor success. Could someone with this level of strength actually ascend on clouds?¡± Thinking of the ¡®Yunxiaozijingmingqianxuanjing¡¯ that had once greatly broadened his horizons, Lu Yuan felt even more that something was amiss when comparing its contents to the Taiping Dao Book he was reading now.. Chapter 281 - Chapter 281: Chapter 172: Three Flowers and Five Gases 2 Chapter 281: Chapter 172: Three Flowers and Five Gases 2 Translator: 549690339 According to the Taiping Dao Book¡¯s theory of three flowers and five qi, to ascend to immortality, one must cultivate at least the five elements of qi within their body, with the five qi converging at the primordial state, then transform the yin spirit and refine the person flower above the head, only then can one become a True Man of Immortal Path and be ranked among the Human Immortals. However, according to the Yunxiaozijingmingqianxuanjing, there is no need for five qi to converge at the primordial state or for three flowers to gather at the top, just directly condensing three paths of five element qi would suffice. The conflicting content of the two books brought a strong sense of absurdity to the readers. After noticing this contrast, Lu Yuan began to recall the other Taoist Classics he had read in the past and suddenly found even more issues: ¡°Not only in Yunxiaozijingmingqianxuanjing, but in other Taoist Classics that I have read before, the realm of ascension seems to be different as well. Some require the convergence of five qi before they can ascend. Others say that refining four qi, three qi, or even two qi could lead to ascension. The lowest ascension requirement simply requires the condensation of a single qi. Could the flexibility of ascension conditions be this great, and simply be changed at will?¡± Upon reflection, it seems that the thousands of Taoist Classics Lu Yuan had read each have significant discrepancies in their vague descriptions of the realm of ascension. Previously, he had used the Taoist Classics for cultivating his state of mind, and considered the descriptions of the immortal realm as anecdotes, not paying much attention to them. However, after focusing on this issue and comparing the details, more and more inconsistencies emerged. ¡°There is definitely a problem.¡± Instinctively, Lu Yuan detected a hidden thread that had not been explicitly mentioned in the many inconsistent descriptions. This hidden thread, lurking beneath the realms of ascension, seemed to be guiding the mysteries of these different ascension theories in the Taoist Classics. ¡°But what exactly is this hidden thread?¡± As Lu Yuan pondered this question, he stood up subconsciously and walked over to the bookshelf in the room. In the various restrooms prepared by the Ziyun Dao, as well as in the small town below the mountain, guest rooms were equipped with numerous Taoist Classics related to Ziyun Dao for guests from all corners of the world to peruse. Ziyun Dao always spared no effort in promoting itself. Without any surprise, Lu Yuan found the Yunxiaozijingmingqianxuanjing among the books on the shelf, and in addition to this sutra, there were dozens of other Taoist Classics. His gaze quickly scanned through the various classics, and he soon found several that he was interested in and took them all out together with the Yunxiaozijingmingqianxuanjing. With a dozen books in hand, Lu Yuan began flipping through them. He ignored various curses and prayer texts, and paid no attention to the sections on cultivating the state of mind through quiet meditation. Lu Yuan¡¯s goal was to look directly at the personal autobiographies and cultivation experiences of those who had authored the classics, with a focus on the realm of ascension. Two qi ascension. Three qi ascension. Two qi ascension. Four qi ascension. Single qi ascension¡­ As he read through each book, the ascension realm of those who authored the classics was quickly uncovered by Lu Yuan. ¡°These are different realms again. Are the ascension realms of the successive Dao masters and inner True Persons in Ziyun Dao different as well?¡± After going through the thirteen Taoist Classics in his hand, Lu Yuan looked at the thick stack of books and the names of the authors on them, his brow furrowed. Staring at them for a moment, a flash of inspiration crossed his mind, and he flipped through the books again, focusing on the opening prefaces. When he had gone through them all again, he put down the books, a thoughtful expression on his face. ¡°Among those who have ascended in these Taoist Classics, although their ascension realms are different, their realms from high to low are in chronological order from ancient to recent times. The further apart from the present time, the higher the ascension realm. The most recent one is the sixteenth-generation Dao master of Ziyun Dao, who ascended only four hundred years ago with a single qi realm. And the most distant one is the third-generation Dao master of Ziyun Dao who ascended three thousand years ago with a five qi converging at the primordial state realm. So it can be inferred that the further back in time, the higher the requirements for ascension. And the causes for this change¡­¡± Lu Yuan pondered with a frown, considering various thoughts before finally sighing, ¡°Is it the decline of Spiritual Energy of Heaven and Earth?¡± He confirmed this possibility. The decline of spiritual energy, the coming of the end times, all the ascension times and conditions in these Classics are changing along with the shifting of the Heaven and Earth situation. ¡°But theoretically, isn¡¯t it supposed to be more difficult to ascend as spiritual energy declines and the end times approach? How can it be easier to ascend as the spiritual energy declines and the end times become more difficult? This is too illogical. Unless this so-called ascension is just a scam. The True Persons in these Classics did not ascend but either directly transformed or left the world in some other form, then donned the name of ascension. ¡± Lu Yuan entertained many speculations, but after going around in circles, he still couldn¡¯t figure it out. Because any speculation is possible. And his current condition cannot confirm which possibility is correct. He couldn¡¯t just go directly to the Six Dao Veins, point to their noses, and ask which one is real and which one is fake, could he? As it involves the core interests of the Six Dao Veins and the secret of ascension, how could they possibly divulge it to an outsider like him? ¡°So for now, I still can¡¯t find the answer..¡± Chapter 282 - Chapter 282: Chapter 172: Three Flowers and Five Gases Chapter 282: Chapter 172: Three Flowers and Five Gases Translator: 549690339 Thinking about this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but sigh, then shook his head in resignation: ¡°Forget it. If there¡¯s no answer, then there¡¯s no answer. Anyway, with my current situation, I¡¯m still far from the day of ascension.¡± I haven¡¯t even started cultivating immortality yet, thinking about these things is just asking for trouble.¡± If I really want to find the answer, I¡¯ll have to wait until I master the Immortal Technique, condense two or three qi, and form a small Five Elements world within my body, before I can go and ask the six great Dao Veins.¡± After obtaining the Taiping Dao Book, Lu Yuan naturally understood that Zhen Xuan, Anqiu, and other True Persons of today are not at the level of real True Persons at all. These guys can only be considered to have just cultivated the Immortal Technique. Apart from Zhen Xuan, the other five True Persons in this gathering might have not even cultivated a single qi. Now they can carry the title of True Person only due to The Age of Dharma Decline. In a land without a tiger, a monkey becomes the king.¡± If it were in ancient times when Immortal Techniques were prosperous, these small fishes who could only refine one qi at most would not dare to call themselves True Persons even if they had ten thousand guts. So judging by this strength, Lu Yuan would need to condense only two or three qi at most before he can sweep across all cultivators in the world. At that time, Zhen Xuan and his ilk would be nothing to worry about. ¡°No, by that time, it¡¯s not certain whether this old daoist Zhen Xuan will still be alive or not. Maybe by then, he¡¯ll also have an ¡®ascension¡¯ and leave a Taoist Classic for future generations.¡± Lu Yuan jokingly complained and then pushed aside other Taoist Classics to continue reading his Taiping Dao Book. The question of ascension was temporarily set aside. At this moment, what he cared more about was how he should cultivate and how to enter the Immortal Dao Gate. Opening the Taoist Classic, skipping over the preface that he had read before, Lu Yuan went straight to the main cultivation text. Then in the main text, there was a small preface. [The Taiping Dao Book is a legacy of ancient Tranquil Daoist School, passed to my Dan Ding Dao after my search of its ruins. Through generations of amendments, the contents have been perfected to become this book. However, this book is missing too much and only goes up to the Five Qi Towards Primordial realm. Qi Refining is still possible, but the next step, Qi into Spirit, is already cut off.] ¡°Only able to cultivate to Five Qi Towards Primordial?¡± Seeing this introduction, Lu Yuan was slightly startled, but quickly accepted it. Previously when Anqiu had given him this Taoist book, it was said that it could directly point to perfect Five Qi, so he had been mentally prepared. But on second thought, with the current world¡¯s remaining Celestial spirit qi, it is a problem whether or not one can even cultivate to the small perfection of Three Qi, let alone perfect Five Qi. ¡°Moreover, with perfect Five Qi, one is only one step away from becoming immortal. This level of Taoist Book is actually quite good.¡± Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t very disappointed, he skipped over this preface in the main text and looked at the content below. Within the entire cultivation text, Lu Yuan glanced over the specific methods of inhaling and exhaling spiritual energy without paying too much attention to them. His focus was on the key aspect of attracting spiritual energy. [The one who attains Taiping (peaceful), brings peace to the world. In ancient times, the Three Emperors opened up Nine Provinces, established Ten Realms, erected the Heavenly Pillars, connected immortals and mortals, and became the Human Emperors of their respective eras. Our sect has bestowed the grace of the Three Emperors, created the Taiping Daoist Method, gathered the world¡¯s Qi Luck, and cultivated the path of longevity and immortality. To cultivate this method, one must gather a multitude, as this Immortal Method requires a mass assembly. Gather a million people to hold a small ceremony, open the gates of Heavenly Pillars, and invite immortal spirits into their bodies. The spiritual energy from this small ceremony can provide our Daoist cultivators with the first qi of Five Qi Towards Primordial. After that, gather ten million people to hold a medium ceremony, which will provide the second qi for cultivation. Then gather one hundred million people to hold a grand ceremony, which will provide the third qi for cultivation. The three ceremonies above are called Human Ceremonies. The Heavenly Pillars opened up in those ceremonies were established by the ancient Emperor Hua Guang. If one can unite the Nine Provinces, one can hold an Earth Ceremony, which will provide the spiritual energy needed for the cultivation of Five Qi Towards Primordial realm. This is the Earth Ceremony, and the Heavenly Pillars opened were established by the ancient Emperor Xia Xi. If one can unify the Ten Realms, one can hold a Celestial Ceremony, which will provide the spiritual energy needed for the cultivation of Qi into Spirit realm and Three Flowers Gathering. This is the Celestial Ceremony, and the Heavenly Pillars opened were established by the ancient Emperor Hao Tian.¡± Like this, repeating the great achievements of the ancient Three Emperors and reopening the Three Heavenly Pillars, immortals and mortals of both realms shall submit.] ¡°So, to attract spiritual energy and cultivate immortality, I have to open the Three Great Heavenly Pillars, following the footsteps of the ancient Three Emperors, and unify the Nine Provinces and Ten Realms?¡± After reading the content of attracting spiritual energy, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but complain. This Taiping Dao Book passed down by the Taiping Dao really lives up to its name of the peaceful world. Nowadays, the Nine Provinces and Ten Realms are full of countless countries and endless chaos. If I practice the Dao Book and unify them all, wouldn¡¯t that be a peaceful world?¡± ¡°When practicing the Taiping Dao Book, the more people and land you have under your control, the more spiritual energy you can attract, and the faster you¡¯ll be able to cultivate. Currently, I rule over two prefectures, Shaoyang and Luyang. According to the statistics before my departure, Shaoyang Prefecture has been cultivating for several years and has attracted many refugees from other places. Now there are 270,000 people. Luyang Prefecture, on the other hand, has experienced war and hasn¡¯t had a detailed census of the population. However, according to Sun Siwen¡¯s rough estimate, it is not even at 70% of its population before the war, perhaps only 130,000 or 140,000 people. So in total, there are only about 400,000 people. This number is still less than half of the minimum requirement of a million people needed to open the Heavenly Pillars of Emperor Hua Guang¡¯s Human Ceremony. If I want to cultivate immortality, I need to conquer at least a few more prefectures to gather enough people.¡± Thinking about this, Lu Yuan¡¯s head began to throb slightly. Although Lu Yuan has an agreement with the court that after achieving the Inborn realm and helping Da Yue stabilize the internal strife and repel foreign enemies, the court will grant him the territories within half of a province and five prefectures. But Lu Yuan¡¯s territory is in the newly developed Jiuzhen Province of Yue Country, the old land of Jinghai Country. That place had been at war for several years before. With hundreds of thousands of soldiers, Lu Yuan doubted whether the people in the half province and five prefectures of Jiuzhen Province could even gather one million people.. Chapter 283 - Chapter 283: Chapter 173: Discussing and Debating the Law Chapter 283: Chapter 173: Discussing and Debating the Law Translator: 549690339 Jiuzhen County is located in the Southern Barbarians area, with little development, making it not very prosperous. Such a place naturally has a sparse population. Before Jinghai Country was destroyed, it was said to have a territory of a thousand miles, with a population of 500,000 households, capable of fielding 300,000 troops. However, this bragging was just for show; if you took it seriously, you would be foolish. As Lu Yuan estimated. Jinghai Country¡¯s so-called 500,000 households were mostly exaggerated; if halved, having 300,000 households was considered good enough. As for fielding 300,000 troops, it seems like all adult men would be counted. Taking into consideration the above two sets of data, Jinghai Country¡¯s so-called territory of a thousand miles, having a population of 1.5 to 1.6 million would be considered good enough. This population figure is from before the country¡¯s destruction. Now that this country has been destroyed and suffered several years of war, the current population is estimated to be around one million. And out of this one million population, Lu Yuan has to share it with White Phoenix Temple. At most, each person would have only 500,000 people. 500,000 people¡­ Thinking about this, Lu Yuan felt speechless: ¡°Anyway, after I establish my fiefdom, I¡¯ll focus on developing the people¡¯s livelihood and recuperating for several decades. I don¡¯t believe I can¡¯t raise the population to one million. After all, with my life span, I can wait. There¡¯s no need to rush.¡± What kind of situation was this! It was not easy to obtain an Immortal Technique, but when starting to cultivate it, there were still many difficulties. Indeed, nothing in the world was easy. ¡°Fortunately, even if I can¡¯t temporarily gather one million people, I still have other methods to cultivate if I want to.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s eyebrows furrowed but quickly relaxed. Soon, a smile appeared on his face as he took out a jade pendant from his bosom. It was the Immortal Fate he had obtained from Sun Siwen. He had this Immortal Fate for more than ten years. However, for such a long time, he had been trapped by the lack of a path and could never utilize it. But now, after reading the Taiping Dao Book and some of the Immortal methods within it, Lu Yuan finally understood why he couldn¡¯t open the jade pendant. ¡°Just as I thought earlier, this jade pendant has an Immortal¡¯s Restriction on it, used to protect the Spiritual Energy and information inside. To open it, you need a special method and Divine Sense.¡± Lu Yuan stroked the jade pendant while reading the Taiping Dao Book. This Dao scripture contained many marvelous methods. Among them were mantra techniques and refining qi, cultivating Divine Sense, refining tools and talismans, and so on. It was almost like an encyclopedia of the Immortal Method. Among these marvelous methods, there was a record on how to break the restriction of a jade pendant. ¡°However, opening the restriction requires the cooperation of Divine Sense. Now that I don¡¯t have Divine Sense, I can¡¯t even try to use it, because it¡¯s like a skilled woman without rice to cook; it just can¡¯t be done. So I can only wait for now. Wait until I break through Inborn, condense Martial Dao True Intent, which can compare to Immortal Sense. Only then can I attempt to open the jade pendant.¡± Earlier, when Lu Yuan had a conversation with Yang Jing, he had learned some descriptions of Martial Dao True Intent from him. Now, comparing it to the description of Divine Sense in the Taiping Dao Book, he found that these two types of mental power were quite similar. Therefore, by inference, what Divine Sense can do, Martial Dao True Intent should also be able to do. By then, using the method of breaking the restriction in the Taiping Dao Book, opening the jade pendant with Martial Dao True Intent would be a natural progression. ¡°In this jade pendant, what can now be confirmed is that a large amount of Immortal Spirit Energy has been stored inside. If I can open it, then relying on this Immortal Spirit Energy, I might not even need to gather millions of people, and I can directly cultivate the Taiping Dao Book. After all, the Taiping Dao Book requires the gathering of people to use the power of their Qi Luck to worship the Heavenly Pillar, then attract the Immortal Spirit Energy from the outside world and the essence of the sun, moon, and stars for one¡¯s own cultivation. Now that I have Immortal Spirit Energy, I can skip that step. I can completely rely on the Immortal Spirit Energy in the jade pendant to directly cultivate the Taiping Dao Book. As for the Qi Luck needed when mentioned during the cultivation of the Dao Book, I now have several hundred thousand people under me, so it¡¯s barely enough for cultivation.¡± As Lu Yuan pondered, he became more relaxed. Anyway, he had many options to choose from. The limitations of the Taiping Dao Technique didn¡¯t bother him much, and there was no need to rigidly follow the rules and requirements for cultivation. After reading the Dao Book several times and pondering the key points of cultivation, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t indulge himself further, but put the book away and picked up the jade pendant, infusing his Inner Strength into it and started to refine it once again. For him, Cultivation was no longer a problem. However, to cultivate, he still needed to break through Innate first. Without the Martial Dao True Intent, he couldn¡¯t open the jade pendant, and everything would come to an end. Therefore, the primary objective at this point was to refine his Inner Strength to the limit, then break through Innate. Lu Yuan always had a clear plan for himself, and at this time, he wouldn¡¯t lose his focus and chase after minor things. So, he began to slowly cultivate. Having cultivated for a night, Lu Yuan felt his Inner Strength had become somewhat purer. Looking at the sky, it was already a hazy white, and it was early morning. Today was the start of the preaching conference. At that time, representatives from various Dao paths from all over Tiannan and Northsea will take the stage to preach, except for the six major Dao paths. Earlier, Yang Jing had mentioned that listening to more preaching can greatly benefit one¡¯s cultivation mindset and breakthrough to Innate. At this moment, Lu Yuan was busy breaking through to Innate, so he wouldn¡¯t miss this conference.. Chapter 284 - Chapter 284: Chapter 173: Discussing and Analyzing the Chapter 284: Chapter 173: Discussing and Analyzing the Law 2 Translator: 549690339 After collecting the jade pieces, he washed up a bit, then went to the canteen prepared by Ziyun Dao and had breakfast, following other Daoists who had breakfast together, he went to the outer square. By the time they arrived at the square, quite a few people had already gathered. Everyone sat down according to their original seating arrangements, and even the Ziyun Dao master and others had already arrived. Seeing this, the many Daoists did not dare to make too much noise. They quickly took their seats and waited quietly. Lu Yuan returned to his seat and saw Qi Yun again after three days apart. Seeing his fellow Daoist again, he found that the man had a slight smile on his face, obviously in a good mood. At this time, Qi Yun saw Lu Yuan coming and hurriedly greeted him: ¡°Taoist Lu, come and sit.¡± Lu Yuan smiled and nodded, sitting down and teased: ¡°Looking at Qi Daoyou¡¯s expression, I think you must have gained quite a bit in these three days, and made many new friends.¡± Qi Yun laughed and said, ¡°Indeed, I have reaped a lot. I have met several friends whom I haven¡¯t seen for ten years and made some new ones, traveling and discussing Dao with them, gaining great insights.¡± Lu Yuan praised, ¡°It seems that your Daoist mindset might have improved. When this conference is over, I will definitely ask for your guidance on the way back.¡± Qi Yun laughed, ¡°If Daoist friend is willing, I will naturally be willing to discuss Dao with you.¡± ¡°Then I will look forward to that day.¡± Lu Yuan smiled and nodded, then saw that by this time, many Daoists from around had gradually arrived. At the high platform, Ziyun Dao master and others also got up from their seats and came forward. Seeing this, the numerous people below ceased their small conversations, including Lu Yuan. ¡°Fellow Daoists, after the three day Dao Gathering, you must have gained a lot and made many new friends in the same path. Now that three days have passed, the conference enters the next stage, the lecture. We practitioners of cultivation have different methods and concepts in the way of Dao. However, despite the differences, we all belong to the Daoist Path and are striving to become Immortals. Hence, this conference is held to increase the knowledge of Daoists all over the world and to resolve disputes among various Dao Veins.¡± Those who are interested can come on stage to lecture and preach their own Daoist ideas, in order to spread the name of the Dao Inheritance.¡± This conference will last five days, and we hope that everyone can make friends through Dao and spread their fame through the law without causing disputes.¡± After Elder Daoist Zhen Xuan had spoken, he looked at the many expectant Daoists below and smiled slightly, ¡°So now, the Elder Daoist announces that the Lecture Platform Conference begins.¡± After saying this, he led the other five True Persons back to their seats. As soon as they had just sat down, some people among the many Daoists below couldn¡¯t wait to jump out. With a few faint sounds, then the sound of breaking through the air, four people had already gone up to the ten platforms in the front. ¡°Poor Daoist from Divine Official Path Qingying, today I will talk about the Ascension of the Divine Official¡¯s Dao, willing to be instructed by fellow Daoists¡­¡± ¡°Poor Daoist from the Taoist Immortal Path¡­¡± ¡°Poor Daoist from the Path of Ten Directions¡­¡± ¡°Poor Daoist from the Red Star Dao¡­¡± The four masters who went up first started lecturing at the four Lecture Platforms. With them leading the way, the masters of other Dao Veins who had been hesitating before also stopped hesitating and went up one after another, occupying the remaining six platforms. Because there were too many people going up, some platforms even had several Dao Veins, all wanting to lecture here. Some Dao Veins even had grievances with each other, and when they came together at this moment, neither side was willing to give in, and disputes arose. Luckily, Ziyun Dao had organized countless conferences before and had prepared for such situations. Soon, dedicated personnel came forward to mediate, and the extra people were invited down from the platform. In this way, the lecture proceeded smoothly. The purpose of this conference was to allow Dao Veins from all over the world to promote their Dao and Dao Inheritance, expand their fame, and gain recognition from Dao Veins all over the world. For such a grand event, it was naturally impossible to let people arbitrarily occupy positions on the platform, so the conference had its own rules. For those who went on stage to lecture, one hour was one round. After each round of lecturing, they would ask their fellow Daoists in the audience to vote. There were ten platforms and a thousand spectators. Those who could get at least one hundred votes could continue on the stage for another round. Those who win three rounds will be promoted, and the winners can then participate in the next discussion of the conference. Therefore, for the many people who went on stage to lecture, if your Daoism was not profound and fascinating enough to attract enough audience votes, it would not only fail to achieve the effect of spreading your fame, but also cause embarrassment and loss of face. After all, if others have hundreds of votes and you only have a few dozen or even just over ten, with such a huge gap visible to everyone, it¡¯s enough to make a person¡¯s Dao heart collapse. So generally speaking, Dao Veins who lack confidence and certainty would not go on stage to lecture. Now that the lectures had begun on stage, Lu Yuan and Qi Yun, together with the crowd, went to the nearest platform. At this time, the man on the stage was from the Red Star Dao of Linhai County in Da Yue. The Dao master of this Dao vein was a middle-aged Daoist in his forties, with a quite strong aura, showing an intermediate first-class strength. Lu Yuan listened to his lecture for a while, he was practicing the Star Constellation Path, mainly pursuing one of the many celestial stars, the Red Star. He was now talking about how to comprehend the Red Star and how to 0Dserve tne metnocl or star constellations. It must be said that this Red Star Dao master indeed had a deep Daoist knowledge, and his lecture was truly profound and subtle. But the Dao he preached was too limited. After listening to him for a while, Lu Yuan felt that it was not very useful for his self-improvement, so he turned around and left.. Chapter 285 - Chapter 285: Chapter 173: Discussing and Analyzing the Chapter 285: Chapter 173: Discussing and Analyzing the Law_3 Translator: 549690339 Qi Yun, on the other hand, was quite interested in the comprehension of the stars and stayed to listen to the lecture. Lu Yuan then visited the remaining nine lecture platforms one by one. After carefully listening to the lectures, he eliminated six platforms, Finally, he chose the Divine Official Way, the Path of Ten Directions, and the Thousand Cranes Path as the main places for his lectures. Among the three, the Divine Official Way was his favorite. It was undeniable that the Green Shadow Master of the Divine Official Way had real abilities, which garnered him the praise of Liang State¡¯s imperial court, allowing him to establish such a large Dao Veins. After filtering out the rhetoric about ascending to the heavens and becoming a god, the remaining cultivation mental states, martial arts techniques, and even some Inborn comprehension were extremely beneficial. Lu Yuan was at the stage of breaking through Innate, and it was precisely the time he needed all these insights and experiences. The teachings of the Green Shadow Master were the most in line with his intentions. In a moment, three rounds of lectures had passed. Ten platforms quickly received their promotion quota. Divine Official Way, without a doubt, had the highest number of votes in the three rounds, making it the top performer in the lecture competition so far. Followed by the Path of Ten Directions and the Taoist Immortal Path. Fei Xia Way, one of the first round¡¯s competitors, supported two rounds but was defeated in the third round. Not only it but other competitors from later Dao Veins also experienced failures. Some couldn¡¯t even get through the first round, and they lost face in front of the fellow Daoists from all over the world. As a result, after witnessing these horrible results, other Dao Veins planning to take the stage for lectures became much more cautious, and the number of people on stage significantly decreased. The Dao Veins striving for fame resorted to secret calculations and were anxious and troubled. Meanwhile, people like Lu Yuan, who were there to listen to the lectures, were utterly engrossed and deeply immersed in them. During the five-day lecture event, Lu Yuan stayed at more than ten different lecture platforms, listening to over ten Dao masters¡¯ teachings that suited his preferences, and then his understanding rapidly improved. It was true, as Yang Jing had said, that listening to those Dao masters¡¯ lectures greatly benefited the Breaking through Innate. At this point, after listening to a full session, Lu Yuan felt that his chances of breaking through Innate had increased significantly. If before, he only had a sixty percent probability of breaking through Innate, now it must be at least seventy percent. Although it may seem like just a 10 percent increase, it is still the breakthrough of the Innate stage! Any slight improvement in the odds of breaking through at this stage is something to be celebrated for martial artists. What¡¯s more exciting is that this event isn¡¯t just about the lectures but also features an even more fascinating discussion session. After listening to the lectures for five days and resting for one night, Lu Yuan eagerly awaited the upcoming discussion session with high spirits. During the previous five-day lecture period, nearly a hundred Dao Veins from twenty-three nations across the world and several overseas regions went on stage. However, only eleven of them successfully survived three rounds and advanced to the discussion session. In the discussion session, the six major Dao Veins also personally competed. However, to maintain their prestigious status, they all had fixed lecture platforms and did not need to participate in the lecture competition. This means that the remaining eleven Dao Veins could only compete for the remaining four platforms. Eleven advancing to four meant that seven had to be eliminated, with an elimination rate of over 60%. In order to ensure that their own Dao Veins would remain and secure a place among the top ten, the eleven progressing Dao Veins naturally utilized all their capabilities, resulting in fierce competition. Such intense battles naturally enthralled the spectators below, especially some of the ingenious discussions, which secretly amazed and captivated people. The discussion session lasted for six days, with one debate taking place every half day. With four platforms, a total of forty-eight debates were available for the audience to witness. As for the six major Dao Veins, no one dared to challenge their platforms to show support. However, in order to demonstrate their strength, these six major Dao Veins did not participate in the debates but shared their own cultivation experiences instead. However, their insights were different from those of other Daoists. They were more abstract and focused on the profound mysteries, much like the Taoist Classics, and were often hard to comprehend. Lu Yuan heard from the audience around him that the teachings of the six major Dao Veins were indeed cultivation insights for Mental Techniques. These were the true teachings of Immortals, which naturally gathered many listeners. Those who attended the event were Daoists, and their lifelong pursuit was to seek Immortality. Now that someone was preaching the Immortal Technique, it naturally attracted a large crowd. But no matter how many people gathered, they didn¡¯t have access to actual Immortal Techniques or the Immortal Spirit Qi, so what could they achieve by mere listening? Aside from further disappointment and frustration, there was nothing they could do. Upon learning that these six major Dao Veins were giving lectures on Immortal cultivation, Lu Yuan began to pay attention to their teachings stealthily. Other Daoists might not have been able to cultivate immortality, but he could. Hearing about others¡¯ cultivation experiences at this time would undoubtedly help Lu Yuan in the future, helping him avoid detours in his practice. Thus, he ignored the intense debates on the side and focused on listening to the lectures. With his spirits lifted, Lu Yuan began to listen to the Immortal cultivation experiences shared by the six major Dao Veins at their lecture platforms. However, he was left confused as he listened. As mentioned before, these cultivation experiences were remote and profoundly mysterious, just like the Taoist Classics. Without specific cultivation, it was impossible to understand what the speakers were talking about. Even if he could understand some terms and references, he still could not grasp the subtleties. However, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t give up but continued to listen carefully and tried his best to memorize all the content he heard, turning it into notes after. Through sheer force of memory and rote learning, he was able to jot down a significant portion of the teachings from the six major Dao Veins, with a thick notebook full of information, which could be considered a rich harvest. And so, during these painful, busy, and fulfilling days, the six-day discussion session finally came to an end. The time had come for the final day and the last session of the Dao assembly the Declaration of the Dao. At this point, the True Persons of the six major Dao Veins would take the stage and perform the Dao. They would demonstrate what true Immortal Techniques were before the assembled Daoists and proclaim why they deserved their positions. Who wouldn¡¯t envy the Daoist abilities and Immortal Techniques? To be blunt, countless people attended the assembly just for this event. On that day, Lu Yuan, like many other Daoists, arrived at the square with an excited heart.. Chapter 286 - Chapter 286: Chapter 174: Zhou Bing Crosses the River Chapter 286: Chapter 174: Zhou Bing Crosses the River Translator: 549690339 ¡°Fellow Daoists, the Fa Conference has been going on for a half month already. During this time, I, Elder Daoist, am very pleased to have made many good friends.¡± Atop the high platform, Elder Daoist Zhen Xuan looked at the many Daoists stretching their necks to look up at him and said loudly, ¡°However, there is no banquet in the world that doesn¡¯t end. After today¡¯s announcement of the Dao Law, we will all go our separate ways, and we may not meet again for another ten years. I hope to see all my fellow Daoists in ten years, with further progress in their Dao Laws and eternal growth in their Immortal Methods.¡± Today, as an elder on the path of immortality, I shall shamelessly demonstrate my own Immortal Technique to my fellow Daoists, hoping to inspire you.¡± With that, Zhen Xuan¡¯s wide sleeve fluttered as he formed hand seals, standing before him, and said, ¡°Today¡¯s technique, called the Mirage Art, can summon rosy clouds to conceal one¡¯s movements. Watch.¡± Bixia flying light, protect my body, Bei Yun command, Rosy clouds come!¡± Elder Daoist Zhen Xuan recited an incantation and then pointed his finger at the air. Suddenly, under the golden sunlight, a rosy light came. The rosy light was blurred as it fell on Elder Daoist Zhen Xuan, and then, like a dream, after a few flashes, the surroundings returned to normal. The rosy light disappeared, and so did the figure of Elder Daoist Zhen Xuan. The Daoists below watched this scene, and many newcomers were left dumbfounded. They stretched their necks, widened their eyes, looked left and right, but saw no trace of Ziyun Dao master on the original high platform. A living person just vanished into thin air in front of thousands of people. The mystique of the Immortal Technique immediately amazed countless people. Lu Yuan, seeing such a sophisticated invisibility technique for the first time, was also greatly shocked. Because his top-notch perception and eyesight as a peak expert couldn¡¯t tell how Ziyun Dao master disappeared. Even now, after vanishing, he couldn¡¯t find the other party¡¯s figure. ¡°With such a mysterious invisibility technique, if it¡¯s used for sneak attacks and assassinations, I¡¯m afraid there are few people in the world who can escape it, right? Now that I can¡¯t see through the invisibility, I wonder if those Inborn Grandmasters can?¡± Lu Yuan thought, and couldn¡¯t help but feel extremely cautious. The mysteriousness of the Immortal Method alone was enough to make many Martial artists feel intimidated. Think about it, an invisible opponent can secretly sneak up to you without being noticed. Aside from when they launch a killing blow, you may not even know that there¡¯s another person hiding by your side. Just thinking about it sends shivers down one¡¯s spine. ¡°The limitations of Martial Arts are too great. To live well, I must cultivate immortality.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s determination to cultivate immortality only grew stronger after thinking about such a scene. Not for anything else, but to be able to detect someone trying to approach him stealthily in the future, protecting his life. While he was feeling cautious, Qi Yun, who was next to him, couldn¡¯t help but frown after watching Ziyun Dao master¡¯s demonstration and said, ¡°The Mirage Art performed by Ziyun Dao master this time seems a bit inferior compared to the previous two times.¡± Lu Yuan turned his head and asked, ¡°Qi Daoyou, do you think this Mirage Art is not as good as the previous two times?¡± Qi Yun said, ¡°Twenty years ago, during the announcement of the Dao Law, Ziyun Dao master showed the Heavenly Fire Art. I still remember that time when the sky was covered with blazing heavenly fire, within a radius of ten Zhang, everything was burnt, and it was unparalleled. Ten years ago, during the announcement of Dao Law, it was the Thunder Sound Art. Everything within a hundred Zhang was affected by thunder sound, and thousands of Daoists in the field were all convinced. Although today¡¯s Mirage Art is mysterious and can make one invisible, it seems a lot worse compared to the previous two times.¡± After saying this, Qi Yun laughed and said self-deprecatingly, ¡°Of course, it may also be that my realm is too low. I do not understand the mysteriousness between the three techniques and limit my view to my own perspective. This is just idle talk. Fellow Daoist, don¡¯t worry about it.¡± Lu Yuan listened and looked at the empty high platform again, pondering, ¡°Perhaps Qi Daoyou is right. This time it might really be worse than the previous two.¡± Yesterday, Lu Yuan had read the Taiping Dao Book and had a rough understanding of some of the Dao Laws inside. Through this, he gained quite a bit of understanding of the spells. In the Taiping Dao Book, spells were divided into many grades. High -grade spells need not be mentioned, as they can change the world, with endless possibilities. Lesser ones, like the Heavenly Fire Art and Thunder Sound Art mentioned by Qi Yun, can wield the power of heaven, and their power is also endless. Today¡¯s Mirage Art, although it can be invisible and looks quite mysterious, is essentially a smoke and mirrors trick. When encountering practitioners of the same level, it is easy to be seen through and will not have much effect. It can only deceive ordinary people and belongs to the lowest category of spells. There is also a clear difference between the various spells from high to low. That is, the spell power consumed in casting each level of spell decreases progressively. The Thunder Sound Art consumes less than the Heavenly Fire Art, and the Mirage Art consumes even less than the Thunder Sound Art. ¡®Elder Daoist Zhen Xuan¡¯s casting of the Dao Law consumes less spell power than the previous time. Could it be that he is deliberately reducing his spell consumption?¡¯ Lu Yuan thought, feeling that it was highly likely. The reason was simple. Now is the Age of Dharma Decline, and even characters like Elder Daoist Zhen Xuan who are sitting in a Cave World find it increasingly difficult to absorb the Spiritual Energy of Heaven and Earth. The overall trend of the world is that the aura of immortality is becoming less and less, making it harder to stimulate the essence of the sun and moon.. Chapter 287 - Chapter 287: Chapter 174: Zhou Bing Crosses the River_2 Chapter 287: Chapter 174: Zhou Bing Crosses the River_2 Translator: 549690339 If that¡¯s the case, after Zhen Xuan and the others expend their magical power, the time and cost to recover will undoubtedly increase. Under these circumstances, they might choose to demonstrate spells with relatively low consumption to conserve magical power, which is not unreasonable. ¡®If my guess is indeed correct, then the spells demonstrated by the other five True Persons who follow will probably be similar to those of Elder Zhen Xuan. To mortal eyes, it appears mysterious, but it consumes very little power and can only deceive mortals.¡¯ With that thought, Lu Yuan continued to watch. After performing the Mirage Art, Zhen Xuan disappeared and reappeared after a short while, his figure emerging amidst a haze of rosiness. ¡°Fellow Daoists, that was the Mirage Art. Now, let us welcome Fellow Daoist Anqiu from the Dan Ding Path to demonstrate an immortal technique for us.¡± Elder Zhen Xuan smiled and saluted the audience before leaving the stage gracefully. Soon after his departure, True Person Anqiu took the stage. After saluting the many Daoists below, he began: ¡°Fellow Daoists, today I will demonstrate the art of creating life from paper.¡± As he said this, Anqiu took out a piece of white paper from his sleeve and with a flick of his hand, cut the paper into a person. He then threw the paper figure onto the ground, and it immediately transformed into a graceful woman in court dress dancing enchantingly, making the audience captivated. The countless Daoists in the venue could not help but marvel at the art of creating life, something that they had only read about in Taoist Classics. However, with Qi Yun¡¯s reminder, Lu Yuan was still unable to discern the truth of the paper woman with his naked eyes, but he could conclude that she was just an illusion. Because the Taiping Dao Book also had a similar art, clearly stating that it was an illusion. In other words, the creation of life from paper and the Mirage Art are of the same nature, both forms of deception and both consuming very little magical power. Even in the realm of Immortals, such arts are merely used for casual entertainment, utterly insignificant. After performing with the paper woman for a while, Anqiu retrieved her when her dance came to an end and then happily descended from the stage. The other four True Persons also took turns in demonstrating their spells. Similar to the first two, they demonstrated many deceptive arts found in the Taoist Classics, which looked impressive but had limited practical use. ¡°It seems that the six Dao Veins are also struggling in their daily lives.¡± Lu Yuan sighed inwardly after watching the performances of the six True Persons. No wonder Anqiu from the Dan Ding Path was eager to offer the Taiping Dao Book when he saw Lu Yuan, showing no pride befitting the Six Dao Veins. Only now, after watching their demonstrations, did he realize how difficult their lives were. That¡¯s why the Dan Ding Path was desperate to improve and develop the Taiping Dao Book, as they were on the verge of extinction. ¡°Fellow Daoists, the performance has ended. The Inescapable Meeting, a grand event that occurs every half a month, comes to a close now.¡± After the last True Person demonstrated their Dao Law, Zhen Xuan returned to the stage and announced to the restless Daoists, ¡°The Meeting is officially over from this moment onwards. All of you may leave the mountain in order now. Arrangements have been made by my Disciples, and I hope that all of you will cooperate. We, fellow Daoists, shall meet again in ten years.¡± With these words, the once-in-a-decade Inescapable Meeting officially ended. After Zhen Xuan finished speaking, he left with the other True Persons, not staying any longer. Meanwhile, the many Daoists in the audience followed the guidance of the Ziyun Daoists and queued up to leave the mountain in order. Just as respected guests were the first to ascend the mountain, they were also the first to descend. Watching row after row of guests leave, Lu Yuan and Qi Yun patiently waited in the back. It took almost half an hour for them to leave, and with the crowd, they descended the mountain, bringing life back to the long-deserted town. Everyone reaped great benefits from this Daoist gathering. Whether it was the various Daoist lectures and discussions or the performances of the six True Persons, everyone was satisfied and gained profound insights. Some even seemed still caught up in the excitement of the event. Judging by their plans, they wanted to stay in town for a while longer. After all, the Inescapable Meeting occurs every ten years, gathering countless Daoists from across the land, and many people were reluctant to leave. Making new acquaintances and exchanging Daoist knowledge was an excellent opportunity. Of course, there were also those with a cold disposition or lofty aspirations who maintained their composure. After descending the mountain, they simply returned to the inn to collect their luggage and left swiftly. Lu Yuan and Qi Yun were among these people. Since Qi Yun was patient with solitude and hardship and had deep cultivation, he had no regrets from the Inescapable Meeting and saw no need to stay. As for Lu Yuan, he was not interested in getting to know the various Daoists who remained in the town.. Chapter 288 - Chapter 288: Chapter 174: Zhou Bing Crosses the River_3 Chapter 288: Chapter 174: Zhou Bing Crosses the River_3 Translator: 549690339 He is about to reach the Inborn level and cultivate immortal techniques, essentially setting him apart from many Daoists. Only the true persons like Zhen Xuan, who are high above, are Lu Yuan¡¯s targets. Thus, the two of them returned to the inn, packed up, and prepared to leave. When both had packed their things and were about to leave, Shangguan siblings were already waiting at the entrance of the inn. During this half-month conference, apart from the first encounter, Lu Yuan and the Shangguan siblings had been separated and didn¡¯t get together again. Seeing Lu Yuan again now, Shangguan Haimoon¡¯s eyes lit up, and she happily ran over, hugged his arm, and said, ¡°Brother Lu.¡± Shangguan Guangbai glanced at his little sister, then smiled and greeted Lu Yuan: ¡°Brother Lu.¡± ¡°Haimoon, Guangbai.¡± Lu Yuan nodded in response, and unlike before, he did not actively reject Shangguan Haimoon¡¯s closeness but let her hold his arm. After the conversation with Yang Jing, the two reached a consensus to join the Ten Grandmasters and bind themselves more closely with the court. Lu Yuan¡¯s attitude towards the Shangguan siblings, or the Shangguan family behind them, had changed significantly. Although he was about to advance to the Inborn level, even an Inborn Grandmaster couldn¡¯t have much say in the court without sufficient foundation and allies. He will soon serve the court for the sake of his fiefdom. At this time, having someone from the court, whether for the interest of the fiefdom or the safety of their service to the court, would undoubtedly be a great benefit. From the current perspective, the Shangguan family is undoubtedly the best choice for friendship. ¡®If possible, I may try to get in touch with the Wucheng Marquis in due course. If we can cooperate well, it¡¯s possible to form a marriage alliance with them.¡¯ With this thought in mind, Lu Yuan looked at Shangguan Haimoon and his smile became even gentler. ¡°Brother Lu, are you planning to leave?¡± At this moment, seeing the packages carried by Lu Yuan and Qi Yun, Shangguan Guangbai asked. ¡°Indeed, now that the conference has ended, I have military and political affairs to deal with, and Brother Qi also has apprentices waiting for him in his sect, so we can¡¯t stay outside any longer.¡± Lu Yuan nodded and then asked, ¡°Guangbai, are you going back with me?¡± Shangguan Guangbai showed a trace of apology on his face and shook his head: ¡°No, actually, I was waiting for Brother Lu to say goodbye. After descending the mountain, I received a message from my father that the Zhou soldiers in Tianmen Prefecture have crossed the river and headed south, joining the Miao soldiers led by Lan Zhaoyun of the Five Poisons Sect. They have now united in an army of 100,000. Nowadays, this 100,000-strong Zhou-Miao united army has approached Yueyang City and joined forces with the defenders led by Lan Cai¡¯er inside the city. Currently, over 200,000 troops from both sides are confronting each other, fighting fiercely, and the front line is short of manpower. My father asked my sister and me to go back and help him suppress the Miao rebellion. ¡± ¡°The Zhou soldiers have crossed the river?¡± Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but be surprised when he heard the news. If he remembered correctly, the latest news he received before leaving was that the Zhou army had captured Changling County, the northern gate of Tianmen Prefecture, and besieged the city. At that time, there were more than 10,000 defenders in Tianmen Prefecture City, and Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang had also sent 50,000 elite soldiers to support them. With more than 60,000 troops defending the city, it had only been two months, so could it be that they had lost so quickly? What are those 60,000 troops eating? Shangguan Guangbai saw the doubt in Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes and said with a bitter smile, ¡°The city of Tianmen Prefecture has not yet fallen. The reason why the Zhou army was able to march in and cross the river southward is that they have reinforced their troops. My father received the news that the Zhou State court had transferred another 100,000 troops from Nanyang Prefecture to follow along Xiangyang Prefecture and then enter Tianmen Prefecture. I heard that the leader of this army is the Grand General of the Pillar State of Zhou, who is a renowned Inborn Grandmaster. He left 50,000 soldiers to continue besieging Tianmen Prefecture. Then he led the remaining 50,000 southward across the river, joining the Miao people and advancing to the city of Baling Prefecture. Now at Tianmen Prefecture, there are over 100,000 Zhou soldiers besieging the city. Under the city of Baling Prefecture, there are also over 100,000 Zhou-Miao united troops, and their side has two Inborn masters ¨C the Saintess of the Five Poisons Sect and the Grand General of the Pillar State of Zhou. Even with the aid of the Jihui saint monk, my father¡¯s 100,000-strong army didn¡¯t have much advantage against the united Zhou-Miao army.¡± It has to be said that perhaps Zhou Country saw the opportunity to swallow two Yue Country prefectures in one fell swoop, so they really put a lot of effort into this southern expedition. There were 100,000 troops in Xichuan Prefecture, and 200,000 in Dongting Prefecture¡ªa total of 300,000 troops, plus three Inborn Grandmasters. This strength is enough to be called the force of half a country. ¡®Zhou Country must win against Da Yue. No wonder it can force the aristocratic families and gentlemen in the court to split the territory and change dynasties, creating the plan for the Ten Grandmasters. They have truly been forced to a dead end.¡¯ Unlike the previous Liang Country¡¯s southern expedition to Yue Country, which only aimed to seize the border friction in Guangling Prefecture, this time Zhou Country¡¯s southern expedition to Yue Country was really aimed at national extermination. Without Guangling Prefecture, Yue Country would have lost the northern territory along the Yangtze River, but there was still the Yangtze River¡¯s natural barrier, which allowed them to maintain a stable national territory and no risk of extermination. But if they lose Xichuan Prefecture and Dongting Prefecture, they will lose the natural barrier of the Yangtze River, and Zhou can directly go south along the river and march towards Jinling, destroying Yue Country. The risks and threats of the two are not on the same level. Thinking of this, Lu Yuan¡¯s expression became solemn: ¡°If that¡¯s the case, it¡¯s indeed necessary to make preparations early. Guangbai, Haimoon, you go back first. If there is any news, remember to keep in touch with me. I have to go back as well and prepare for war. This time, the Zhou army crosses the river, and it¡¯s a great disaster for Dongting Prefecture. If there is any negligence, it will be the peril of national extinction. We must not let those Zhou people and Miao people succeed.¡± Whether it is Zhou Country or the Five Poisons Sect¡¯s Miao people, they are absolutely irreconcilable enemies for Lu Yuan. Because neither the Five Poisons Sect nor Zhou Country would allow Lu Yuan to split the territory and establish his fiefdom after they succeed. For Lu Yuan, who has now obtained the Taiping Dao Book and is preparing to cultivate, this is absolutely unbearable. Therefore, the Yue State court must be protected. Because only the currently disadvantaged Yue Country can offer the terms of splitting the territory and establishing a fiefdom to Lu Yuan, which no other party can provide.. Chapter 289 - Chapter 289: Chapter 175: Planning for the Future Chapter 289: Chapter 175: Planning for the Future Translator: 549690339 ¡°Brother Lu, we¡¯ll leave first. When I have time, I¡¯ll come to see you again.¡± At this moment, Shangguan Haimoon hesitantly let go of Lu Yuan¡¯s hand, speaking unwillingly. In fact, the reason for the siblings¡¯ departure was ostensibly that their father had called, and they had no choice but to serve in the army. However, in reality, both siblings were only of secondary strength. In a battle involving hundreds of thousands of soldiers, how much of an effect could they have? The actual reason for their farewell was due to Yang Jing¡¯s persuasion afterwards. For Yang Jing and the court, the most pressing matter at hand was to gather the ten Grandmasters to suppress the rebellion and defend against foreign enemies. In order to achieve this goal, it was crucial for Lu Yuan to break through Innate as soon as possible. Therefore, after learning that Lu Yuan was about to break through Innate, Yang Jing, in the name of his uncle, ordered the Shangguan siblings not to disturb Lu Yuan during this time to avoid any influence, especially due to love affairs. This was also why Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t seen the Shangguan siblings during the entire conference. Later, Yang Jing sent a letter to Shangguan Ming, stating the seriousness of the situation, leading to today¡¯s summoning to the frontline and the farewell between the two parties. ¡°After suppressing the rebels, Guangbai and Haimoon, we can meet freely.¡± Lu Yuan nodded with a smile. In fact, he could probably guess part of the reason for the siblings¡¯ departure, but he didn¡¯t try to keep them. As Yang Jing considered, although Lu Yuan now wanted to marry into the aristocratic families, the most urgent task was to break through Innate first. At this time, any factor that would affect his breakthrough must be compromised. Now it was time to do so. After bidding farewell to each other, the Shangguan siblings set off quickly, heading west. The journey to Baling City was much shorter than Lu Yuan¡¯s journey back to Luyang. Heading west, they only needed to pass through Yuzhang Prefecture to reach Yueyang Prefecture, where the imperial army was stationed, a mere four or five hundred miles away. Lu Yuan, on the other hand, had to travel south along the waterway, through Yuzhang Prefecture, Yichun Mansion, and Luling Prefecture, then turn southwest to reach Luyang County, with more than a thousand miles of journey on water and land, having to travel an extra thousand miles compared to the Shangguan siblings. On the way back, there was no longer the leisure of coming here. Lu Yuan was concerned about the situation in Dongting Prefecture, fearing that the foundation he had laid would be disrupted. Qi Yun was worried about his apprentice¡¯s safety under the chaotic war situation. As a result, the two of them rode fast horses, traveled day and night, and finally returned to Luvang Prefecture after more than ten davs. When Qi Yun was in Luling Prefecture, he separated from Lu Yuan due to different paths, returning to Hengyang Prefecture alone without continuing the journey. However, with their abilities, they were still able to ensure their safety even when traveling alone in this chaotic world. There was no significant problem with that. Two months later, upon returning to Luyang Prefecture, Lu Yuan was surprised to find that its appearance had changed greatly compared to when he had left. There were many new construction sites outside the city. The government was organizing farmers, who had been unable to farm this year, to rebuild water conservancy projects and level roads in exchange for relief. A large number of men were sweating on various construction sites, thoroughly appeasing the people who might have become unstable due to the disasters. Fields by the roadside were also full of lush green seedlings, and the second round of autumn rice after the rush planting was growing vigorously. Entering the city, the streets were no longer as desolate as before but were full of people, merchants, and travelers. Listening to these people¡¯s accents, not all of them were local to Luyang. There were many dialects from other places, some of which were quite familiar to Lu Yuan, coming from his former hometown of Luling Prefecture. Seeing all these scenes, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel gratified. The rapid recovery of Luyang Prefecture was undoubtedly a strength for him. Entrusting Luyang Prefecture to Sun Siwen was indeed the right decision. Upon returning to the government office and meeting with Sun Siwen, Lu Yuan became even more certain of this decision. ¡°In the past two months, as the local governments have been rebuilt and improved, local production has also resumed. The autumn rice has been sown, and it will be ready for harvest in a month or two. At the same time, with the funds provided by Brother Lu, I have started building water conservancy projects and roads in the local area, gathering many of the local people who were unable to survive. This series of projects cost a total of 150,000 silver taels. Meanwhile, this year, Yuzhang Prefecture had a bumper crop of summer rice, making the price of grain much cheaper than in previous years. Therefore, I sent letters to various prefectures in Yuzhang, sending people to specifically purchase new rice there. By now, a total of 500,000 stones of grain have been collected, which is enough for the food needs of 100,000 people in the whole prefecture for one year. Even supplying the army, it would be enough for 20,000 people to eat for four years. However, buying so much rice also required a huge amount of silver. Nowadays, there are wars everywhere. Even though Yuzhang Prefecture had a bumper harvest of summer rice, the price of rice is still six cents a pound. Purchasing 500,000 stones of grain cost a total of 300,000 silver taels. Before Brother Lu left, he instructed us to gather as many refugees as possible to increase the local population. In the past few months, the Northern Yueyang Prefecture has been plagued by wars, even affecting Changsha Prefecture greatly. The turmoil in these two prefectures has left many people displaced and fleeing in all directions. Although most of the refugees have fled to Yuzhang Prefecture, there are also many who have fled south. I sent people to gather some, a total of 10,000 households, with more than 40,000 people. They have now been settled in various places within Luyang Prefecture. This project cost 50,000 silver taels.. Chapter 290 - Chapter 290: Chapter 175: Planning for the Future_2 Chapter 290: Chapter 175: Planning for the Future_2 Translator: 549690339 Meanwhile, I took this opportunity to order the inspection of the household registration in each county. The statistics showed that there are a total of 34,000 households and 145,000 residents in the ten counties of the prefecture. Including the newly relegated 10,000 households of refugees, the entire prefecture has a population of 45,000 households and 190,000 residents. However, both the local people and the refugees need relief from the government. Most of the 500,000 stones of grain purchased this year will be put into use, leaving at most 100,000 stones of food and fodder for military supplies. During these months, the county soldiers and county government officials also spent 200,000 silver tales on salary. Considering these expenditures, for the six months, a total of 700,000 silver tales have been spent in the entire prefecture. Due to the purchase of food and the appeasement of the refugees, the expenses have exceeded the original budget. Previously, Brother Lu allocated 800,000 silver taels, and now only 100,000 silver taels are left, which can only be maintained for two months at most. Therefore, it is inevitable to increase the input of silver taels to ensure the current development trend. So, Brother Lu needs to allocate funds again. However, the refugees have been taken in, and the grain purchases have been completed. The local area is gradually restoring production. There will be no more such expenditures in the future. In the future, the expenditure of the entire prefecture should remain at 50,000 silver tales per month, and there will be no increase.¡± In the study of the county government office, Sun Siwen took out a thick account book and reported his work in the past six months since taking office to Lu Yuan. Lu Yuan listened and looked through the account book, nodding his head from time to time. It has to be said that Sun Siwen¡¯s performance during his half-year as prefect is outstanding, although it is based on a large investment of silver tales. But having money or not is one thing, and whether one can use the money well is another matter. Some people can¡¯t achieve anything even if you give them billions of wealth, they can only squander and do nothing. Putting the money to good use and into practical matters requires talent. Sun Siwen has such talent. Lu Yuan is also very satisfied with his friend¡¯s talent. At this moment, he nodded and said, ¡°You don¡¯t need to worry about money matters. I will allocate another million silver tales to you later. You can use this money to purchase more grain.¡± Upon hearing this, Sun Siwen was somewhat puzzled: ¡°Now we have enough grain in the prefecture to appease the refugees and supply the military. There is no need to spend more silver to buy grain.¡± As a civil official, from Sun Siwen¡¯s perspective, the prefecture is now recovering, and by the end of this year, it will be able to resume production. By then, instead of purchasing grain, it would be better to wait and return financial support to Lu Yuan from the prefecture¡¯s own tax revenues. So, at this moment, it seems like an unprofitable deal to buy grains at a high price. Lu Yuan can understand his friend¡¯s idea, but as a military officer and power leader, with the ambition of cultivating the Taiping Dao Book, he cannot just think about it this way. At this time, he explained: ¡°Nowadays, there are constant wars in the prefecture. Even Zhou People¡¯s forces have crossed the Henan River and confronted the army from the court at the Baling City. There are daily battles of various sizes. In Shaoyang Prefecture, there are continuous wars, too. Although Poison Sect leader Lan Zhaoyun has led a 50,000-strong army to Baling City, 60,000 Miao soldiers remain, and they are constantly fighting with the forces of Shaoyang Prefecture. Even in Yangshan Prefecture to the south of Luyang, Miao People have gathered 30,000 troops, constantly watching this prefecture. Nowadays, Miao People and their 170,000-strong army are stationed at the three battlefields in the prefecture. Together with the Zhou Soldiers crossing the river, there are a total of 230,000 enemy soldiers in the prefecture. As for the court¡¯s military forces in the entire prefecture: There are 30,000 soldiers in my division, and 40,000 militiamen in the counties. The two prefectures of Hengyang and Changsha to the north have 20,000 militiamen. The court¡¯s Miao-fighting forces have 100,000 men. With these three combinations, there are only 190,000 in total, including 60,000 militiamen who cannot fight outside their counties. There are only 130,000 soldiers who can actually fight outside, which is 100,000 fewer than the enemy.¡± It is difficult to defeat the enemy, which is nearly twice as strong as I am.¡± Moreover, Zhou People had the intention of destroying me. They can send 50,000 soldiers across the river to the south. In the future, who knows if they will send 50,000 or even 100,000 soldiers across the river? Therefore, in my judgment, it will take three to five years to quell the rebellion in Dongting Prefecture and repel the Zhou People.¡± Lu Yuan analyzed his perspective on the situation in the prefecture. From the surface, the combined strength of Zhou and Miao forces is almost twice that of the court forces. With the court¡¯s current strength in the Dongting Prefecture, it is almost impossible to defeat the enemy. Therefore, unless the court continues to invest in troops, causing a sudden change, or an event that causes a significant gap in the strength of both sides and quickly decides the outcome, the war can only be a long lasting war of attrition, and the winner will be the one who can¡¯t hold on for the longest time. With the current strength of the Yue State court, it is hard -pressed to assemble 100,000 troops to fight the Miao rebellion, as it would require support from the six-tribes and seven-clans. After all, the previous battle with the Liang forces lasted for three years, involving a total of 560,000 troops. Later, over ten thousand Pingnan Army soldiers supported the fight against Jinghai Country for nearly three years. And before that, there were over ten thousand Army of Pacifying Shu soldiers who were supported for more than a year. These four times involve a million-strong force, and it is easy to imagine how huge the expenses of money and fodder were. In the countless battles within this million-strong army, more than 400,000 died in battle. Even if the six-tribes and seven-clans have a strong foundation, the court cannot afford to lose so many elite soldiers in just four years.. Chapter 291 - Chapter 291: Chapter 175: Planning for the Future_3 Chapter 291: Chapter 175: Planning for the Future_3 Translator: 549690339 That¡¯s why, Ge Shouguan Ming, who led the army of 100,000 imperial soldiers, was the last batch of war army that the court could put together after selling everything. It is impossible to form a new large army within three or five years, or even within ten years. On the one hand, there is no silver, and on the other hand, there are no more eligible soldiers to be found. The court¡¯s nine counties, Jianan, Southsea, Yulin, Jiuzhen, Dongting, Xichuan, and Guangling, are either trapped by bandits, engulfed in war, or newly attached, resulting in heavy casualties, local production disruption, and inability to provide soldiers and money. That is why the only place that can still provide money and food for the court now is its core territory, Linhai County and Yuzhang Prefecture. These two counties have provided seven or eight hundred thousand soldiers and countless supplies for the court, helping maintain the current situation. Despite the heavy bloodshed, these two jurisdictions, as wealthy as they may be, would struggle to provide any more soldiers and money. Once the local area regains its composure, and a new generation grows up, the court will be unable to form a larger army. It is precisely because the conventional forces cannot change the situation that the six sects and seven families began to think of the ten Grandmasters. They plan to crush the enemy with high-end combat power and turn the situation around. For this reason, they are willing to cut out the lands of the two counties to accommodate the Innate Grandmasters of Jianghu. For the court to negotiate with the Grandmasters of Jianghu and win them over, it would take at least two or three years. After all, they are all part of the Jianghu, and they are part of the Innate Sect, which has its own foundation. Even if the court does not give them half a county¡¯s land, they still have their influence and interests in the local area as usual. Some powerful Innate Sects may have even more influence than the Poison Sect in Dongting County. Do you still dare to touch their cake? Are you not afraid that these Jianghu sects will immediately rise up and reenact the rebellion of the Poison Sect? That¡¯s why these people have enough bargaining chips and may not actually be interested in what the court has to offer. A mere half a county¡¯s land may not necessarily be of much interest. Only White Phoenix Temple, an Innate Sect in the core area of Linhai County, constantly squeezed by these aristocratic families, struggled to breathe, would eagerly respond to the court¡¯s relocation offer. Other Innate Sects may not be so easy to talk to under such conditions. Otherwise, ever since the court announced its intention to win over the Innate Sects, a year has passed. In one year, besides White Phoenix Temple, there has been no movement from other Innate Sects, has there? This is simply because other people are not so easily fooled. It is also the reason why Yang Jing came forward when he saw Lu Yuan¡¯s potential to break through Innate, and took the initiative to pull him into the plan of the Ten Grandmasters. It¡¯s not that other Jianghu Grandmasters have their own businesses and look down on the court, so they have no choice but to choose Lu Yuan, an up-and-coming, yet-to-be-Innate stock. It¡¯s all about realism. All of the above are what Lu Yuan slowly figured out on his way back. Based on these interests, some of his original strategies against the court have also changed. Since the court is more demanding of him now, and the deterrent power has naturally been greatly reduced after seeing the other side¡¯s bluff, the conditions he originally promised when he was intimidated by Yang Jing naturally need to be changed. For example, the fiefdom could be changed from Jiuzhen County to Dongting County, and the land of the fiefdom could be increased from the original Five Prefectures¡¯ lands to one or two more prefectures, or even directly occupying an entire county. After obtaining the Taiping Dao Book, Lu Yuan felt that, whether for his own cultivation, or his strength after becoming a cultivator, he was now in a position to ask for more. So, that¡¯s why he said all this. Sun Siwen, of course, did not know what was going on in Lu Yuan¡¯s heart, nor did he know that his good friend had already reached a cooperation agreement with the court and had the idea of establishing a fiefdom. However, after listening to Lu Yuan¡¯s analysis, he slowly shifted his focus from the limited vision of one prefecture to the whole county, and even the whole country, and naturally realized the crisis. Therefore, after careful consideration, Sun Siwen nodded and said: ¡°To quell the rebellion and repel the enemy, it is indeed not a short-term effort, but a long-term one.¡± Lu Yuan agreed and said: ¡°It will take countless years to defeat the bandits, and it cannot be achieved without them. During such a long period, agricultural production in the counties will inevitably be affected, and food shortages are not far away. At that time, if there is no food and fodder to support the people, even if the local area is peaceful, turmoil will inevitably rise again. Moreover, in order to cope with the bandit forces and assist the court in quelling the rebellion, I intend to expand the army by another 20,000 and form a 50,000-strong force to cope with the changing situation. This also requires food and fodder support. Therefore, we should buy food outside the province without hesitation. If there is not enough silver, you can get it from me at any time. I still have three million silver taels of assets in my hands. Even if I give you one million taels, there will still be two million silver taels left. No matter how we squander it, it will be enough for a year. After a year, I will have a way to earn new silver.¡± Now that he has switched to another line of thought, the original conservative strategy is naturally no longer viable. Although there is still the Immortal Destiny Jade Piece as the bottom line, which can still be cultivated to the worst when breaking through Innate, How much immortal spirit is in the jade piece is still an unknown. To be on the safe side, achieving the conditions of a million people, worshiping the Heavenly Pillars, and attracting heavenly and earthly spiritual energy cannot be abandoned. So Lu Yuan has already decided to expand his army by 50,000, and then lead his troops to attack the three prefectures of Yangshan, Jiuyi, and Lingling in the south of Dongting County, which are occupied by the Miao people. Although these three prefectures are mostly mountainous and very poor, they have a total population of seven or eight hundred thousand. Even if the Miao people are removed, there are still three or four million native Yue people. If this place can be captured, together with Luyang and Shaoyang, they can almost make up a million people, meeting the minimum conditions for the worship of the Heavenly Pillar. Moreover, through the expansion of external territories, Lu Yuan can also expand his territory, obtain more food and money, and raise more soldiers. The land of the two prefectures cannot support a 50,000-strong army. But five prefectures¡¯ lands might not be impossible. Therefore, external expansion has become an unchangeable established strategy for Lu Yuan since obtaining the Taiping Dao Book. Seeing his friend¡¯s statement like this, and buying food is indeed not a bad thing, Sun Siwen nodded at this time and said, ¡°It can be done. Yuzhang Prefecture still has a lot of food, I can try to buy more. I can¡¯t guarantee that there will be a lot, but two or three hundred thousand stones can be guaranteed.¡± Lu Yuan smiled and said: ¡°Then I will leave it to Brother Sun.¡± With that, the strategy for Lu Yuan¡¯s camp for the next few years has been settled.. Chapter 292 - Chapter 292: Chapter 176: Growing Ambition Chapter 292: Chapter 176: Growing Ambition Translator: 549690339 After communicating with Sun Siwen and encouraging him to be bold, Lu Yuan returned to his mansion. Now, with the arrival of the imperial army, especially the two Inborn Grandmasters, the assassination threat from the Poison Sect¡¯s Holy Maiden that had been looming over him was finally less worrying, With two Inborn Grandmasters in the united army of Zhou and Miao, and two more on the imperial side, the chances of unconventional assassinations would be greatly reduced, as the four Grandmasters would be balancing and restraining each other. Lu Yuan finally didn¡¯t have to stay cooped up in the barracks every day, living like a tortured monk. Tired from half a month of continuous travel, he instructed the maids to prepare a bath for him when he returned home, and then he curled up in his blankets and had a good sleep. On the morning of the next day, following his usual routine, Lu Yuan got up punctually, freshened up a bit, and practiced his palm skill. Even though he was close to breaking through the Innate and was about to start practicing the Immortal Technique, Lu Yuan had not neglected his martial arts training. He continued to practice the palm skills he should be practicing, and he also began to explore the sword and finger techniques contained within the Chi Yang Divine Skill. However, with such a short amount of time, it would be impossible to master these martial arts techniques in ten years. Luckily, Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t in a hurry. As long as he could break through the Innate, he could suppress those below the Innate realm with his powerful Martial Dao True Intent, making the use of specific techniques unnecessary. As for how to deal with other Innates? Lu Yuan thought that, given his cautious nature, even after breaking through the Innate, he would most likely not actively challenge experts of the same level. What was the point of fighting and killing? One slip could cost him his life. In comparison, he preferred to command the great army, drive the troops to attack the enemy, let others die for him, and sit behind the scenes, waiting for the results. In Lu Yuan¡¯s mind, having Innate cultivation was more about serving as a deterrent, like a nuclear bomb. It didn¡¯t matter if they could be used or not, as long as he had them, he would be qualified to sit at the negotiating table with other Inborn Grandmasters. No matter how others did it, in Lu Yuan¡¯s case, the importance of Innate martial power was more symbolic than practical. He would either not take action, or he would make a decisive strike when he did, rather than engaging in endless battles with others. ¡°Hmm, there¡¯s also the Taiping Dao Book. After breaking through Innate, I can try to practice it. At that time, I would appear to be an Innate Martial artist to others, but secretly, I would be a Cultivator. If I could combine martial arts with Immortal Techniques, perhaps I could create an Immortal Martial Method? If others don¡¯t know my real abilities and rashly challenge me, they would definitely suffer a big loss and even lose their lives to me.¡± Thinking of the possibility of such a scenario in the future, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but smirk. As a cautious person, he loved the idea of having an extra card up his sleeve and secretly outwitting others. Hidden cards were something that could never be too many or too few. Now, even though he would soon have Innate Martial Dao True Intent and Immortal Techniques, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t neglect his martial arts techniques and continued to practice diligently. After all, life is full of uncertainties and changes. No one knew whether the extra martial arts techniques he practiced now would play a significant role in the future. As a precaution, it was always right to practice more when there was time. After practicing his palm skill for an hour, he freshened up and changed into clean clothes. Following a hearty breakfast, Lu Yuan headed towards the barracks outside the city. Having been away for some time, he had left his 20,000-strong army to his disciple Li Liang, who was in charge of training the recruits and preparing its equipment. Now that he had returned and was about to mobilize the troops, it was natural for him to take a good look at their progress. In the barracks. With continuous shouts, drums occasionally blasting, banners waving, and soldiers who had already formed their formations on the drill ground slowly changing their formations to the beat of the drums and the movements of the banners. Lu Yuan stood on the commander¡¯s platform, watching the army changing formation below with a serious expression. It was evident that for these soldiers, changing formation was still quite difficult, even just simple left or right turns and changes in formation were challenging to perform. At this point, some soldiers with poor foundations would fall behind, collide with others, and cause chaos. However, in general, with the help of the original 5,000 veteran soldiers, they could at least maintain a certain formation. ¡°Master, I have been diligently training the troops every day, with one small drill each day and one large drill every three days. After two months, there is no problem with the formation and movement, but there is still some difficulty in changing the formation,¡± said Li Liang, who had been responsible for leading the troops for the past two months, with a slightly nervous tone as he watched the chaotic army formation below. Lu Yuan had entrusted the training of the large army to him, which was an expression of trust and recognition. But now, when the master came back to inspect the army, this wasn¡¯t an impressive result, which was undoubtedly a cause for concern. ¡°You¡¯ve done quite well already.¡± Lu Yuan turned his head and smiled at his nervous disciple, saying, ¡°It¡¯s only been two months since the new recruits joined the army, but they can already understand formations and recognize banner commands- they have shown considerable progress. It they train like this tor another halt a year, they will be ready to join the battlefield and face the enemy in formation. Entrusting the training of the army to you was not a mistake on my part.¡± Over the years, Lu Yuan had commanded armies and was not ignorant of military affairs. Previously, he had stayed in the camp, overseeing the training of the soldiers every day, which still wasn¡¯t enough. Later, he took them out to fight for half a year before they achieved the glorious victory in suppressing the Seven Star Sect rebellion in just three months.. Chapter 293 - Chapter 293: Chapter 176: Growing Ambitions_2 Chapter 293: Chapter 176: Growing Ambitions_2 Translator: 549690339 It was precisely because of this experience that he knew how much effort and time it took to train good soldiers who could fight in formations without breaking in the face of the enemy. It was impossible without a great deal of hard work and investment in silver Now that Li Liang had achieved such results in just two months, he could already be considered a skilled trainer of soldiers. Lu Yuan was so impressed with his disciple that he had no time to blame him. ¡°All of this is due to the high-quality soldiers recruited by my Master and the help of many fellow disciples in the camp. I dare not take credit for it.¡± In the face of his Master¡¯s praise, Li Liang was happy in his heart but showed modesty on his face. ¡°Don¡¯t be so humble. Your contribution is yours. Can I, as your Teacher, mistreat my own disciples?¡± Lu Yuan praised his disciple and then said, ¡°You have done well in training soldiers. You should be rewarded. I have a martial art skill here. You can copy it and learn from it. Afterward, return the original to me, and that will be your reward.¡± As he spoke, Lu Yuan took out the Chi Yang Divine Skill that he had prepared in advance and handed it to his disciple. The Chi Yang Divine Skill he took out only had the first seven levels, the last two levels had been removed, and only one sword technique was included. Even so, this abridged version of Chi Yang Divine Skill could cultivate the second bizarre meridian, and combined with the sword technique, it already belonged to the top-ranked martial arts in Jianghu. ¡°Thank you, Master, for bestowing the skill.¡± Li Liang looked at the martial arts passed to him, and when he saw the four big characters of Chi Yang Divine Skill on it, his body trembled. As one of the closer registered disciples to Lu Yuan and Zhou Qing, he naturally knew that his Master and Senior Brother mainly practiced this Chi Yang Divine Skill. ¡®When the Master bestows this skill upon me, is he planning to take me as a true disciple?¡¯ Li Liang¡¯s excitement at this thought almost couldn¡¯t be hidden. Heaven knows how awkward and difficult it was for these registered disciples when facing Lu Yuan and Zhou Qing. Just look at the treatment of the official disciple Zhou Qing? Then look at what treatment they receive? Although they were nominally disciples, they were in fact no different from subordinates and were not considered part of their own. It was needless to say how much Lu Yuan¡¯s dozens of registered disciples envied Zhou Qing and how much they wanted to become true disciples. Was their dream coming true now? Li Liang, with trembling hands, took the Chi Yang Divine Skill and said with a trembling voice, ¡°Master, rest assured, as soon as I return, I will copy the secret book, and I will return the Divine Skill tomorrow.¡± ¡°There¡¯s no need to rush. Just copy it slowly, and don¡¯t let the technique spread.¡± As a master, Lu Yuan naturally knew about his disciples¡¯ thoughts, and now he smiled and said, ¡°When you finish copying the technique, remember to practice diligently. If you can break through to the top level, I will take you into my door and make you a true disciple.¡± After getting the Taiping Dao Book, Lu Yuan knew that his idea of sneakily growing stronger was largely impossible. But even so, it didn¡¯t mean that he had to fight hard. It was much better to cultivate more disciples, let them become talented and make a name for themselves, and then let them fight for the world on behalf of their teacher? As for the Chi Yang Divine Skill, it was no longer the most core martial arts secret for Lu Yuan, who was about to break through Innate and cultivate immortal methods. Now, like the Cloud Palm and Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra before, it could be used to reward the disciples and enhance their strength. At this time, having only Zhou Qing as a first-class disciple was not enough. If a few more first-class disciples are trained to have independent strength, Lu Yuan may not even need to worry about the affairs of conquest. He could simply let these disciples fight on his behalf and let them lead the troops to fight on their own. Therefore, Lu Yuan imitated the court¡¯s plan of ten Grandmasters and also planned to cultivate ten great disciples. Cultivate ten first-class disciples and 100,000 soldiers. With each disciple leading ten thousand troops, they could match an Inborn Grandmaster. With such a foundation, conquering a prefecture was no longer a dream for Lu Yuan. After all, Ten top-class experts with a hundred thousand troops were worth two or three Inborn Grandmasters. And with Lu Yuan¡¯s strength included, as long as he didn¡¯t rebel openly, even if he dominated Dongting Prefecture, the court would have to hold their noses and accept it. ¡®And I can expand while I contact other Grandmasters whom the court attracts, forming alliances. By then, several parties will join forces and protect their territories, and even if the court is dissatisfied, they will have to swallow the bad feelings.¡¯ Allying and manipulating with several other Grandmasters from Jianghu was a solution that Lu Yuan came up with during these days. Compared with those six surnames and seven families from the court, Lu Yuan and those Jianghu Grandmasters were clearly not the same kind of people. Even if they temporarily united, it was just for interest, and there was no real friendship involved. And since it was for interest, the interests given by the court were interests as were the interests they wanted to fight for. Why should the land of nine prefectures in Da Yue be divided among only two prefectures for people like Lu Yuan? Four out of the ten Grandmasters in the plan were from Jianghu, accounting for 40% of the power. Yet they could only get the territory of two prefectures, both of which were badly broken. The allocation plan was obviously unreasonable. Regions like Yuzhang Prefecture and Linhai County were so prosperous that they could virtually be worth three poor counties alone.. Chapter 294 - Chapter 294: Chapter 176: Growing Ambition_3 Chapter 294: Chapter 176: Growing Ambition_3 Translator: 549690339 That¡¯s why the court seemed to have divided two prefectures, but in reality, the loss of money, food, and population may not even be a tenth of the total. It¡¯s not a big deal at all. Lu Yuan thought that among the nine prefectures of Da Yue, the four Jianghu Grandmasters could each occupy one prefecture. The court could just defend the five core and prosperous prefectures. Only then would it be considered fair. Of course, all of the above are just Lu Yuan¡¯s temporary thoughts. Whether they can be done or not, they still have to see how the situation changes. Nothing in life is certain, and anything can change. Until that moment, he didn¡¯t know what the outcome would be. However, even so, it doesn¡¯t prevent Lu Yuan from gradually strengthening his strength according to this plan. At this time, the cultivation of Li Liang is such a case. As for the results¡­ ¡°Master, don¡¯t worry, the disciple will diligently practice and strive to break through to the top rank as soon as possible and join your sect.¡± Li Liang, after being encouraged by Lu Yuan, knelt down immediately, his expression extremely excited. Becoming a top-rank would actually not be too difficult for Li Liang. After all, he has already practiced to the eighth standard meridian, and only needs to cultivate the remaining four standard meridians and one bizarre meridian to break through to the top rank. Just five meridians in total, even if he doesn¡¯t rely on external forces and just diligently trains on his own, it will only take 15 years to break through to the top rank. However, the reality is clearly not the case. Not to mention that Lu Yuan occasionally grants Rejuvenation Pills or other Divine Blood Elixirs to disciples who have made achievements in order to cultivate their strength. Even in private, Li Liang and other disciples would actually buy Rejuvenation Pills from Zhou Qing on their own initiative. In this day and age, most of those who can practice martial arts have wealthy backgrounds. Though many of Lu Yuan¡¯s named disciples were promoted from the bottom and didn¡¯t have rich backgrounds, there are still some who come from wealthy families. Among the forty or so named disciples under him, half come from poverty and half from wealthy backgrounds. Generally, the strength of disciples from wealthy backgrounds is better than those from impoverished backgrounds. After all, they have practiced martial arts since childhood, have a solid foundation, and are willing to spend money on medicines to improve their cultivation. It¡¯s normal for them to outpace their poorer fellow disciples in terms of cultivation progress. Interestingly enough, Li Liang belongs to the category of those with wealthy backgrounds. Though his family is not as rich as a nation, it is still quite affluent. Spending three to five thousand silver tales for Li Liang to buy medicine for cultivation should not be a problem. Coupled with his own income, being able to afford one bottle of Rejuvenation Pills every month is not unattainable for him. And in comparison to these investments, if he could break through to the top rank and join Lu Yuan¡¯s sect, then everything would be worth it. With the identity of a top-ranked expert and an Inborn teacher, aren¡¯t they afraid of making money? At this point, Li Liang had already decided that as soon as he returned, he would persuade his parents to sell most of their family assets and use the proceeds to buy Rejuvenation Pills to aid his cultivation. Wealthy prospects are right in front of him, and if he doesn¡¯t take the risk now, he¡¯ll undoubtedly regret it in the future. ¡°I¡¯m very pleased that you have such ambition; I look forward to the day you become my second true disciple.¡± Lu Yuan is very fond of Li Liang¡¯s attitude and then continues, ¡°In some time, I will send more people to recruit soldiers, and there should be 20,000 new recruits joining the camp.¡± I¡¯ll leave their training to you. I don¡¯t expect you to train them well in a short period, as long as they can be deployed into battle formations and fight after a year, that¡¯s fine. You can do that, right?¡± Having been enticed by Lu Yuan¡¯s words, Li Liang wouldn¡¯t refuse at this point. He immediately took up the Military Order and said, ¡°Master, rest assured, the disciple can swear under the Military Order; if I fail to train the soldiers within a year, let military laws punish me.¡± Lu Yuan nodded with satisfaction, ¡°In that case, it¡¯s a done deal.¡± After that, he didn¡¯t continue speaking with Li Liang. He turned his head and continued to watch the training drills of the soldiers below. After inspecting the army, Lu Yuan stayed in the barracks again. Although there is no need to fear the threat of an Inborn Grandmaster for the time being, the training of the army must not be neglected. Moreover, due to his cautious personality, Lu Yuan chose to stay in the barracks, overseeing the training of the new recruits, and at the same time, it was more convenient for him to handle military affairs such as expanding the army. Recruiting 20,000 soldiers is related to Lu Yuan¡¯s strategic planning, so on the second day after his return to the camp, he had already sent personnel to recruit soldiers in other areas. However, with continuous wars, every corner of Da Yue is now exhausted. It is difficult to find the required recruits. Places like Linhai County and Yuzhang Prefecture, after the court conscripted hundreds of thousands of troops, hardly have any qualified recruits left. Even the few remaining recruits in Yuzhang Prefecture were taken away by the people Lu Yuan had sent earlier. According to disciples who had gone to recruit soldiers, there are no more brave men left in Yuzhang Prefecture. Seeing this, one can imagine what the situation is like there. As for Dongting, it¡¯s even worse than Yuzhang. In order to recruit soldiers, Lu Yuan had no choice but to go further afield. He sent two teams of disciples through Yuzhang Prefecture to Jianan Prefecture and South Sea Prefecture in a long detour to recruit soldiers from these places. Although Jianan Prefecture and South Sea Prefecture have experienced war, they have been at peace for three years. After three years of recuperation, their vitality has been restored to a great extent, and the population has been well preserved. Recruiting soldiers from these two places will still yield considerable gains. Considering the future, Lu Yuan even specifically instructed that if there are more qualified soldiers in these two places, they can recruit more and not be limited to 20,000 troops. Nowadays, in times of chaos and strife, the population is decreasing, and elite soldiers are becoming fewer. In the future, it will become more and more difficult to recruit qualified soldiers. So why not take advantage of this time to recruit more and later not even know where to conscript? As for how to support more recruits¡­ ¡°With soldiers and horses, what¡¯s there to fear about finding money to support them?¡± Lu Yuan wrote his own recruitment documents as the Pingxi General, handed them over to the waiting disciples down below, and thought to himself. In times of chaos, having soldiers means being able to rob territory and money. With territory and money, you can naturally support your troops. Even if they can¡¯t rob the territory, it doesn¡¯t matter. While trying to grab territory, they can consume the excess troops they can¡¯t afford, thus reducing expenses and allowing them to support their remaining forces. At the same time, through continuous warfare, they can eliminate the weak and leave behind experienced soldiers through natural selection. Regardless of the outcome, it¡¯s acceptable to Lu Yuan ¨C either way, he won¡¯t lose, and it¡¯s a surefire win-win situation. This logic is sound and unproblematic.. Chapter 295 - Chapter 295: Chapter 177: The Fifth Year of Promoting Tao Chapter 295: Chapter 177: The Fifth Year of Promoting Tao Translator: 549690339 Having supervised the training of the troops for several days and written the official documents requesting for assistance from various regions in recruiting soldiers, Lu Yuan was finally able to relax and spend some time for himself after the documents were distributed to his disciples to go recruiting. With a self-disciplined personality, he did not waste any time. Thus, after just one day of rest, Lu Yuan began to ponder on how he could break through the innate realm. He already had some clues about breaking through the innate realm. To reach the innate realm, one must cultivate the martial arts external body with the Martial Dao True Intent; when the two are combined, it is the state of a Grandmaster. As for the martial arts external body, Lu Yuan had already understood that there was no fixed number after listening to Dao Master Ziyun¡¯s words; it could take any form. For example, the current situation in Dongting County is plagued by the Poison Sect, which advocates the Ten Thousand Poison Body, and the doctrine of Ten Thousand Poison True Qi. According to the intelligence obtained by the court from the recent encounters with the Saintess of the Poison Sect: Yang Jing once speculated that Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s cultivated external body should be the Ten Thousand Poison True Qi, which she used to assassinate Wuyang Marquis Li Gui. On the day when Wuyang Marquis Li Gui perished, the area within a hundred feet surrounding his residence turned into a poison domain, causing the death of over a thousand people and affecting several hundred residents nearby. Previously, at the fall of Baling City, the several hundred defenders at the city gate were killed by Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s poison gas, causing the city gate to open, and the city was lost. Survivors from these two incidents managed to escape. Hence, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s specific means were known to the public. The Ten Thousand Poison True Qi should be her external body of martial arts. Similarly, the famous Wuan Marquis Bai Mengyang of the court in recent years was said to have cultivated the martial arts external body with the army¡¯s unique Soldier¡¯s Evil Qi. By using the murderous intent of countless soldiers to form an external body, one can receive the boost of military Qi while in the army, making their strength several times stronger than usual. Because of this, Bai Mengyang has been almost invincible in all the battles he led, earning him the title of the Military God of Da Yue. Even in recent years, although Bai Mengyang suffered heavy setbacks and consecutive losses in Xichuan County: He was still able to block the united Zhou Shu army from entering Yuzhong Prefecture using strong fortifications, despite facing an enemy force that had almost three times the number of troops and four times the number of Inborn Grandmasters. There was also Yin Huixuan, the first martial arts expert of Liuyang Sect, who cultivated the sect¡¯s Six Yang Qi. In the six months between the eleventh month of one year and the fourth month of the following year, the Yang Qi rises; these months are collectively referred to as the Six Yang Months. During these six months, the Yang Qi is at its peak. Based on the changes in the Yang Qi in each month, the Liuyang Sect refines and combines the Qi with the Three Yang meridians in their hands and feet, and forms their external bodies with the Yang Qi of Heaven and Earth. Moreover, due to the combination of the external body and one¡¯s flesh, practitioners of this technique do not need to extract their spirit from their bodies. They can directly combine their spirits with the Six Yang Qi within their bodies to form the Martial Dao True Intent. This method provides a double layer of protection for the flesh and the external body, greatly improving the safety of the Martial Dao True Intent. And it can even serve as a bridge for further integration of the flesh and the external body, making them almost indistinguishable from one¡¯s own body. With this ingenious method of cultivating an external body for martial arts, the Liuyang Sect has risen to the top of the martial arts world. Their sect has produced countless experts in the second realm and has flourished for thousands of years. Even Yang Jing himself practiced the ¡°Lotus Tactics¡± of his clan, which used the clarity of the Qingshui Lotus to form the external body of the Lotus, making it a top defensive divine skill in the Jianghu. Not limited to these four people, the martial arts external bodies and Martial Dao True Intents of the other innate sects and aristocratic families in the Jianghu are all unique and numerous. From the many examples, it is evident that Dao Master Ziyun¡¯s words hold true. The forms of external martial arts bodies can be anything in heaven and earth. However, there is actually one general pattern among these examples. The martial arts external bodies of the grandmasters of various families are mostly based on their respective techniques. For example, the Poison Sect inherited the Sacred Insect Technique and cultivated the Ten Thousand Poison True Qi as their martial arts external body. Liuyang Sect inherited the Chi Yang Divine Skill, and they cultivated the Six Yang Qi. Bai Family inherited the Soldier Transformation Technique, and they cultivated the Soldier¡¯s Evil Qi. Yang Family inherited the Clear Water Lotus Secret and cultivated the Lotus external body with a pure Qi. Although the Grandmasters of these sects and families may have differed over generations, their external bodies remained quite similar overall. Crafting the external body of martial arts with one¡¯s technique as the core was the common choice made by these families. Lu Yuan did not know the exact principles behind this choice for now. However, considering the fact that so many families have chosen this path and managed to maintain it for hundreds and thousands of years, even if it¡¯s not the most optimal, it must be the easiest, most popular, and easiest to achieve solution based on experientialism. So, after learning this, Lu Yuan¡¯s choice for cultivating his martial arts external body was actually quite straightforward. He would use the Chi Yang Divine Skill as the core to create his own martial arts external body. The essence of Chi Yang Divine Skill lies in the imagery of the red sun on top of one¡¯s head, and it cultivates mighty and blazing energy. In fact, the True Qi external form that Lu Yuan has cultivated now is the Red Sun Fire, with the main focus on burning. ¡°So, based on this deduction, when I cultivate my martial arts external body, I should take the Red Sun Fire as the form of my external body, then control it with my Martial Dao True Intent to form the Chi Yang External Body and use it to break through the innate realm.¡± Lu Yuan thought while looking through the secret book of Chi Yang Divine Skill and speculating about the innate realm.. Chapter 296 - Chapter 296: Chapter 177: Hongdao l s Fifth Year_2 Chapter 296: Chapter 177: Hongdao l s Fifth Year_2 Translator: 549690339 In fact, regarding how to break through the Innate Realm, after thousands of years, the Yuzhong Guo Family had their own deductions and speculations. Although they were not clear about the secrets of the martial arts external body, the path of martial arts itself was a process of gradual progression. With other external sects and foreign nations¡¯ Inborn Grandmasters as examples for reference, some conjectures and secrets about the martial arts external body were roughly inferred by the Yuzhong Guo Family. Thus, according to these inferred goals, the Yuzhong Guo Family began to slowly improve their own inherited Chi Yang Divine Skill three hundred years ago. One of the results of these improvements was the increasingly closer resemblance of Inner Strength¡¯s external manifestation to the martial arts external body. Moreover, the fruits of these improvements, as well as various other improvement ideas, were naturally inherited by Lu Yuan at this time. With the Yuzhong Guo Family¡¯s hundreds of years of accumulation, coupled with some secret information that Lu Yuan had obtained from Yang Jing and Ziyun Dao master, as well as the fulfillment of his own conditions, summarizing a system of martial arts external body was no longer a problem. Even following the Yuzhong Guo Family¡¯s deductions, Lu Yuan could now construct a prototype of the martial arts external body and begin attempting to break through the Innate Realm. However, this prototype was still somewhat crude and rough, and not yet fully refined. Moreover, this external body prototype was adapted to the original pure Chi Yang Divine Skill. At present, Lu Yuan¡¯s Inner Strength had undergone three transformations and been tempered by Immortal Spirit Qi. Using this Inner Strength, which had changed most of its properties, to adapt to the prototype deduced by the Yuzhong Guo Family¡¯s inner strength, the compatibility was bound to be low. Therefore, in order to make himself more closely integrated with the martial arts external body and better utilize the power of the external body, some necessary modifications and optimizations to make it more suitable for himself were also indispensable. Thus, after determining the Chi Yang Divine Skill as the foundation of the martial arts external body, Lu Yuan began his path of external body transformation and optimization. Every day, he would stay in his camp, following the Yuzhong Guo Family¡¯s ideas, and using his own Inner Strength to slowly optimize and adapt, bit by bit improving his martial arts external body. This process was bound to be lengthy. According to Yang Jing, even with a suitable reference, it would take at least a year, or as long as three to five years, to condense an external body that matched their heart¡¯s desires. The saintess of the Five Poison Sect had also spent three years to condense the Ten Thousand Poison True Qi. And the Emperor of Shu, Li Xiong, was a Heaven¡¯s Gifted Talent but had also taken more than a year to break through the Innate Realm. Although Lu Yuan was assisted by the accumulation of the Yuzhong Guo Family at this time, he estimated that it would take at least a year or two to perfect the martial arts external body and break through the Innate Realm. This timeline also coincided with the imperial court¡¯s plan. The grand plan devised by the court officials, which aimed to create ten great Grandmasters, could not be achieved overnight. The original plan was to execute this matter over the course of three years. Now, only a year had passed, and there were still two years left, with ample time. ¡°Moreover, in two years, the army under my command will also be almost trained. Once I break through the Innate Realm, I will transform like a fish becoming a dragon, no longer bound by constraints.¡± At present, the only reliable soldiers and horses in Lu Yuan¡¯s hands were the original 15,000 veterans. Even among these 15,000 veterans, the 10,000 that Zhou Qing had taken to Shaoyang Prefecture had already lost thousands of members due to the continuous attrition caused by the Five Poisons Sect. In other words, Lu Yuan had only just over 10,000 soldiers he could use. With such limited strength, even if he became an Inborn Grandmaster, wanting to establish his own territory was impossible. Individual martial arts power, although it can bring status and wealth, is not enough to establish a kingdom single-handedly. Just like a mighty eagle, if it has no wings to help it, then no matter how strong it is, it cannot take flight. At this moment, Lu Yuan was like an eagle about to grow into its full might, and the soldiers and horses under his command were his wings. Now, not only did he need to grow and progress, but his wings must also become stronger in the process. Using two years¡¯ time to train a 50,000-strong army, forging them into wings. Once the time came to ride the wind, he would be able to soar high into the heavens. While Lu Yuan was diligently perfecting his martial arts external body, the outside world was also slowly developing according to its own trajectory. In Hongdao¡¯s fifth year, on the sixth day of the tenth month, Zhou Qing, who had been fighting the Miao people in Shaoyang Prefecture for half a year under Lu Yuan¡¯s command, sent back a military report. The report stated that after attacking Shaoyang Prefecture for half a year, the Miao people were gradually exhausted, and the Miao soldiers surrounding the Fu City had retreated, thus lifting the siege of the city. However, in the southern part of Shaoyang Prefecture, the two counties of Resources and Suining had fallen to the thieves, with tens of thousands of bandits occupying the counties, unable to leave the southern part of Shaoyang Prefecture for a long time. At the same time, the three counties in the north of Shaoyang Prefecture were still under the control of the Miao people, with ten thousand soldiers stationed in the three cities, making it extremely difficult to recover. Shaoyang Prefecture had lost five of its ten counties. And the original 30,000 county soldiers and militias in the prefecture had been reduced to less than 20,000 after half a year of attrition. Zhou Qing¡¯s 10,000 soldiers were left with only a little over 7,000. All the soldiers combined amounted to only 25,000. This was more than enough to defend the city, but insufficient for conquest. Although the Miao thieves within the prefecture had suffered heavy losses due to the constant siege battles, with two to three thousand dead or injured, the remaining forty thousand still posed a formidable threat. In response, Lu Yuan ordered them to continue to defend. There was no other way, as he only had 20,000 soldiers at his disposal, most of which were new soldiers who couldn¡¯t be taken out for battle.. Chapter 297 - Chapter 297: Chapter 177: Hongdao Year Five_3 Chapter 297: Chapter 177: Hongdao Year Five_3 Translator: 549690339 Even if they wanted to provide assistance, they were simply powerless to do so. Fortunately, with the strength of Zhou Qing¡¯s side, although they could not repel the Miao thieves, they had enough strength to defend the city. Twenty-five thousand troops were divided into five cities, with five thousand people in each city, which was enough to guard the cities. Zhou Qing also mentioned this in his war report. His caring apprentice said: Disciple is enough to protect the land, Master need not worry, and can find opportunities outside to defeat the bandits. What could Lu Yuan say to this? All he could do was to study martial arts external body and devote more effort to urging Li Liang to train soldiers, hoping to train the army as soon as possible and then lead them to assist in quelling the thieves. As the situation in Shaoyang Prefecture became more stable, on the 16th day of the 10th month of the fifth year of Hongdao. North of Baling City, the Imperial Army and the Zhou-Miao United Army, which had been confronting each other for several months, finally broke out in a fierce battle. Approximately one hundred thousand troops from both sides faced each other in battle outside the city. Wucheng Marquis Shangguan Ming, despite the heavy rain of arrows, led his elite troops to break through the enemy lines, defeating three formations of the Miao people¡¯s left wing and forcing the Grand General of the Pillar State of Zhou Country to confront him personally in a duel within the army. In the meantime, the Poison Sect¡¯s Holy Maiden, Lan Cai¡¯er, led the defenders out of the city to help in the battle. But she was intercepted by the holy monk Jihui and his troops at the city gate, as both Inborn Grandmasters began their duel. Shortly after, Shangguan Ming, despite his best efforts, could not match the Pillar State Grand General as a newly promoted Grandmaster. Therefore, after a half-hour-long fierce battle, he was inevitably seriously injured and forced to retreat and escape. However, the opportunity was seized by the elite imperial troops to defeat the Miao people. Those Miao soldiers consisting of Mountain People, even after several years of training, could not change their nature as militia. Facing the elite imperial troops at this time, they couldn¡¯t hold on. After only half an hour, tens of thousands of Miao soldiers on the enemy¡¯s right wing were defeated. Due to this, the elite Zhou people who had crossed the river southwards were also caught in the Miao soldiers¡¯ retreat and followed them. The Pillar State Grand General of Zhou Country, despite winning the duel and repelling Shangguan Ming, was powerless to reverse the tide of the retreating army. In order to avoid being surrounded by a besieging army, he had no choice but to retreat. At the same time, the Holy Maiden of the Five Poisons, was also defeated by the Holy Monk Jihui and retreated back into the city. With the defeat of their army outside the city and their Holy Maiden defeated by the enemy, the morale of the Miao defenders in the city was greatly shaken. The Holy Monk Jihui seized the opportunity to break open the city gates with the miraculous methods of the Buddha¡¯s light and led his troops into the city. Lan Cai¡¯er had no choice but to come out and confront them once more. However, after a few dozen exchanges, she was defeated again, and if it were not for the desperate resistance of the sect members in the city, she would have lost her life. From then on, Lan Cai¡¯er no longer dared to linger in the city. Taking advantage of the fact that the imperial army had not completely surrounded the city, she left a portion of the troops to cover their retreat and led the remaining ten thousand or so remnants to escape from the city, heading in the direction of the defeated united army. Jihui was able to take this opportunity to recapture Baling City, and the city of Dongting was thus restored. In this battle, the Imperial Army beheaded twenty thousand enemies and captured twenty thousand more, while suffering less than ten thousand casualties themselves ¨C it was a great victory. The most critical aspect was the recapture of the prefectural city, which undoubtedly boosted the morale of the imperial forces throughout the area. For the Army of Pacifying Shu, who had their western rear route cut off, it meant that their lifeline was now unimpeded. With Baling City, the court could now attempt to send troops and transport grain to the north of the Yangtze River, restoring the supply line for the Army of Pacifying Shu. However, achieving this would still be somewhat difficult. That was because after their defeat, the Zhou-Miao United Army did not completely withdraw from Yueyang Prefecture. Instead, they gathered eighty thousand remnants and still entrenched themselves in Shiyang and Anxiang, threatening the Yangtze River and the prefectural city. Until this group of thieves was completely driven away, the rear route of the Army of Pacifying Shu could not be considered secure. However, after this battle, the Zhou-Miao United Army completely extinguished their desire for a field battle with the imperial forces. After retreating to Shiyang and Anxiang counties, they set up camps and defended themselves in the fortified cities, refusing to engage in a frontal battle with the imperial forces. With their strength, the remaining ninety thousand imperial soldiers could not defeat them. The situation within Yueyang Prefecture once again fell into a long-standing stalemate, and it was still uncertain which side would emerge victorious. In this tormented and protracted standoff. By the earlier part of the 11th month in the fifth year of Hongdao, the disciples sent by Lu Yuan to recruit soldiers in Jianan Prefecture and South Sea Prefecture finally returned one after another. Upon the return of the last person, there were 30,000 new soldiers at the Barracks outside Luyang Prefecture. That¡¯s right. Following Lu Yuan¡¯s instructions, the disciples sent to recruit soldiers did not strictly adhere to the limit of 20,000, but instead recruited anyone who met the requirements. As a result, the number of newly recruited soldiers exceeded twenty thousand, amounting to thirty-two thousand people. At the same time, the autumn rice harvest in neighboring Yuzhang Prefecture was abundant again, causing a drop in grain prices. Following Lu Yuan¡¯s instructions, Sun Siwen sent people to purchase grain, spending six hundred thousand silver taels to buy seven hundred thousand stones of rice. Adding the autumn harvest in Luyang Prefecture, the grain for the newly recruited army was barely solved. On the 17th day of the 12th month of the fifth year of Hongdao, Lu Yuan received the news that Grandmaster Yan Wangqiu of the Nanhai Sect in South Sea Prefecture had accepted the court¡¯s invitation to assume the position of National Master. After the White Phoenix Temple, the Nanhai Sect became the second Grandmaster sect to form an alliance with the court. One more person was added to the plan for the Ten Grandmasters. By now, the imperial camp already had seven Inborn Grandmasters. If Lu Yuan and Yang Jing were also included, there would be nine. With only one more to complete the Ten Grandmasters. At the end of the same month, Lu Yuan received news from Jinling that the court had sent envoys to the Liang State in the north, apparently intending to negotiate peace and form an alliance. Faced with the existential threat of extinction by Zhou Country, the mortal enemies Liang and Yue gradually moved towards cooperation. The court was doing its utmost to protect the country¡¯s fate. The entire fifth year of Hongdao came to an end amidst tumult and turmoil. As in previous years, Lu Yuan celebrated the New Year at Sun Siwen¡¯s home, and because of the addition of a chubby baby boy to the Sun Residence, this year brought even more joy. After the joyful celebration, the sixth year of Hongdao arrived.. Chapter 298 - Chapter 298: Chapter 178: Shangguan Seeks Reinforcements Chapter 298: Chapter 178: Shangguan Seeks Reinforcements Translator: 549690339 As soon as the New Year passed, Lu Yuan began to busy himself again. By now, half a year had gone by. Before participating in the Inescapable Meeting, he had recruited 15,000 new recruits, who had trained for half a year and were now barely considered an army. According to usual practice, once new recruits had reached this level of training, they needed to be taken outside for some actual combat experience, facing some enemies in several battles and accumulating battlefield experience. Mere closed-door training couldn¡¯t produce elite soldiers. Only by combining training and actual combat would one produce veterans. However, with the current situation, whether or not to send troops left Lu Yuan somewhat torn. Currently, although there were constant disturbances throughout Dongting jurisdiction, the main battlefields in both Yueyang Prefecture and Shaoyang Prefecture were more or less stable. On these two battlefields, neither the imperial court nor the enemy forces could force the other¡¯s hand, with both sides equally matched. From the current situation, this stalemate could last for a very long time. Lu Yuan was now at a crucial moment to break through the Innate realm, and stability was the priority; he didn¡¯t want to cause any major changes that could disrupt his breakthrough process. If he rashly mobilized troops at this time, it would undoubtedly disrupt the stable situation and create unpredictable variables. So as to whether or not to send troops, he inevitably wavered a bit. ¡°The current situation in Dongting jurisdiction has risen to the level of the Innate realm. With my current strength, recklessly breaking the balance may attract the attention of an Inborn Grandmaster. At that time, I would no longer be able to cultivate in peace as I do now. It would be almost impossible. Undoubtedly, it would slow down my breakthrough to the Innate realm. But, if I don¡¯t do anything, I won¡¯t be able to support my 60,000 soldiers any longer,¡± Lu Yuan furrowed his brows tightly. It was costly to maintain soldiers. A soldier¡¯s monthly salary was five silver taels. He had 60,000 soldiers, and merely paying their salaries required 300,000 taels per month. Half a year had passed, and just for salaries, he had spent 1,800,000 taels. By now, Lu Yuan only had about 500,000 taels left. This money would only support them for two more months at most. If they still couldn¡¯t find a new source of funding after two months and couldn¡¯t issue salaries, even if the army could still be maintained for a while, the collapse of military morale would be inevitable. Then, all the soldiers he had trained with great difficulty would be wasted. Whether to send troops or not left Lu Yuan quite entangled. However, his entanglement did not last long. Soon, a piece of news from the north came, leading him to make a decision. In Hongdao¡¯s fifth year, twelfth month, and sixteenth day, after being cut off from the supply lines for nearly a year, the Army of Pacifying Shu, stationed in Xichuan Prefecture, was desperately short of supplies. Their monthly salaries had not been paid for months, and food and fodder were scarce. Out of necessity, the daily meals of the soldiers were reduced from two to one, consisting mostly of porridge. As a result, the soldiers started to complain incessantly. On the sixth day of the first month of Hongdao¡¯s sixth year, soldiers in Yuzhong City caused a disturbance and plundered the people. Subsequently, Marquis of Wuan quelled the riots, beheaded nearly a hundred soldiers, and finally managed to suppress the military. However, just this once, the city was already on edge, with suspicion and distrust among the soldiers. On the sixth day of the first month, the defending generals in Liujing County, north of Yuzhong Prefecture, led a rebellion, drove out the county commander, and took 5,000 soldiers with them in rebellion. These rebel soldiers looted the county town, and after having their fill, sent people to contact the Zhou Country¡¯s army to the north, offering to surrender and hand over the city. As a result, Yuzhong Prefecture¡¯s northern barrier was lost. On the tenth day of the same month, in Wushan Prefecture behind Yuzhong Prefecture, there were defenders dissatisfied with the lack of food and salaries who raised a ruckus and caused a disturbance that affected several counties. The Prefecture government could not control the situation, and it decayed. Left with no choice, Marquis of Wuan sent a trusted general to lead 10,000 troops on an expedition. However, halfway there, some officers and soldiers clamored that if they did not distribute food and salaries, they would not move forward. The leading general became furious and commanded his personal guard to suppress them. This led to a backlash, and the various battalions of soldiers and officers attacked him, killing the general and subsequently rebelling, looting the nearby counties. Upon hearing this news, Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang immediately wanted to personally lead troops to suppress these rogue soldiers. But just at this moment, the Zhou¡ªShu United Army finally spent half a year dealing with the aftermath of the earthquake and suppressing the rebellion in the rear. During this half a year, they had even replenished enough food, fodder, and troops to launch an attack. Seeing the internal unrest in the Army of Pacifying Shu, the United Army naturally would not miss this opportunity and immediately dispatched 150,000 troops to attack Yuzhong Prefecture. Faced with the pressing enemy forces, Bai Mengyang could no longer attend to suppressing the unrest, and could only gather his troops to defend the city. However, after two successive rebellions, there were only 20,000 defenders left in Yuzhong City. Having been hungry for a long time, how much fighting strength did they have left? So, after barely holding out for half a month, some lower-level officers and soldiers sought a chance to defect after being forced to defend the city wall. They turned their coats and opened the gates for the enemy army outside the city. Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang, who had heard this news, acted personally, trying to take back the city gate. However, he was intercepted by four prepared Inborn Grandmasters outside the city and besieged once again. This time, without the protection of a large army, Bai Mengyang¡¯s belligerent energy couldn¡¯t be fully utilized. After only a brief exchange with the four grandmasters, he was defeated and escaped, injured. He didn¡¯t dare to stop on his way and went straight to Tianmen Prefecture. After that, the city¡¯s defenders did not resist much and surrendered in large numbers. Thus, Yuzhong City fell. Three days later, the Zhou-Shu United Army pursued their victory and killed their way to Wushan Prefecture. More than 10,000 rebels who caused the unrest there directly surrendered and joined them. As the Zhou-Shu United Army continued to annex territory along the way, they quickly marched to Tianmen Prefecture and joined the 100,000 Zhou soldiers stationed there.. Chapter 299 - Chapter 299: Chapter 178: Shangguan Seeks Help_2 Chapter 299: Chapter 178: Shangguan Seeks Help_2 Translator: 549690339 For a time, the united army swelled to three hundred thousand, a formidable force that seemed to block out the sky. At this moment, Bai Mengyang finally stopped and stayed in Tianmen Prefecture. This place, because it was close to Yueyang Prefecture, could receive certain guarantees in terms of money and food, so the morale of the troops could be maintained without causing chaos and mutiny. So this Wuan Marquis gathered the court¡¯s troops in Tianmen Prefecture and led fifty thousand men to defend the city, blocking the advance of the thirty thousand enemy troops and preventing them from crossing the river at will. However, with a six-fold difference in strength, Bai Mengyang, at best, could only defend the city, and it was hard to say how effective he would be in blocking the enemy. Even how long the city could be defended was now a question mark. Perhaps in a few days, or two months, Tianmen Prefecture would follow the footsteps of Yuzhong Prefecture and Wushan Prefecture, falling to the bandits. Regardless of the fate of Tianmen Prefecture, the presence of the three hundred thousand enemy troops across the river in Dongting District undoubtedly exerted immense pressure on Shangguan Ming. Even the originally shrunken Zhou-Miao united army in Anxiang and Shiyang began to stir after hearing the news from the north, showing signs of wanting to attack Baling City again. The Poison Sect mobilized twenty thousand troops from the rear to reinforce the front line, restoring the Zhou-Miao united army in Yueyang Prefecture to one hundred thousand strong. In this way, there were three hundred thousand enemy troops in the north of the river and one hundred thousand in the south. With four hundred thousand troops bearing down the borders, the court¡¯s defenders in the north consisted of Bai Mengyang¡¯s fifty thousand troops in Tianmen Prefecture City and Shangguan Yang¡¯s ninety thousand troops in Baling City. As for the Inborn Grandmasters, there were six from the alliance of Zhou, Shu, and Miao factions, while the court had only three. With more than twice the numerical disparity in troops and twice the gap in top-notch combat strength, the situation for the court was far beyond terrible. Under such circumstances, Lu Yuan¡¯s old acquaintances, the Shangguan siblings, came to Luyang City again. ¡°Wucheng Marquis hopes that I will lead my troops to attack Wuling Prefecture?¡± In the reception hall, Lu Yuan looked at Shangguan Guangbai, who was explaining his purpose, and couldn¡¯t help but frown slightly. ¡°Yes, Brother Lu.¡± Shangguan Guangbai nodded and said earnestly, ¡°Now that the Zhou, Shu, and Miao bandits have joined forces with a total of four hundred thousand strong, my father has only ninety thousand troops and is hard-pressed to resist. In order to avoid the collapse of the battlefront and the bandits¡¯ rapid advance, my father hopes that you can lead your troops to attack Wuling Prefecture and strike directly at the Poison Sect¡¯s Old Nest. If we can force the Poison Sect to withdraw from Yueyang Prefecture, then without the sixty thousand Miao soldiers, the pressure on Baling City will be greatly reduced. In this way, my father will then be able to sweep away the Zhou soldiers in Jiangnan and set up a defense along the river to block the enemies in the north.¡± The ten prefectures of Dongting District were divided into two parts by the Yangtze River. The north of the river was Tianmen Prefecture, while the south was made up of the other nine prefectures, headed by Yueyang Prefecture. So, if Lu Yuan could attract the six thousand Miao soldiers from the Poison Sect, the Zhou soldiers in the south would be left with less than forty thousand men. As such, Shangguan Ming could quickly sweep away the forty thousand Zhou soldiers in the south with his ninety thousand troops. After getting rid of the Zhou people entrenched in the south of Jiangnan, with no one to assist them there, and relying on the advantages of Yue¡¯s navy, they could set up defenses along the river and keep the thirty thousand united troops of the Zhou and Shu factions north of the Yangtze River. It must be said that this was an excellent strategy. Lu Yuan looked at Shangguan Guangbai and said calmly, ¡°Guangbai, although I have sixty thousand troops under my command, forty thousand of them are new recruits who have been trained for less than a year and do not have much combat strength. The Miao people in Wuling Prefecture, despite having been repeatedly dispatched, still have over ten thousand troops stationed there as far as I know. To break into this place, at least thirty thousand elite soldiers are needed to shake it up. But in my jurisdiction, Shaoyang Prefecture is still being attacked by tens of thousands of Miao people, with tens of thousands of soldiers tied down there and unable to move. Even in the south of Luyang Prefecture, there are thirty thousand Miao soldiers eyeing us closely, so this place also needs to be watched.¡± Under these circumstances, I am unable to mobilize my troops.¡± Although what Shangguan Guangbai said made sense and the strategy devised by Shangguan Ming was not flawed, Why, for the overall situation, should Lu Yuan draw fire for the other party and attract the main force of the Poison Sect? That¡¯s a whopping six thousand Miao soldiers! By attracting these people back, wouldn¡¯t it be tantamount to Lu Yuan taking on the pressure that originally belonged to Shangguan Ming? Even when the main force of the Poison Sect returned, and joined forces with Miao soldiers from Wuling Prefecture and Shaoyang Prefecture, Lu Yuan would face an army of over one hundred thousand Miao people, which might even include Inborn Grandmaster Lan Cai¡¯er. So what is Lu Yuan¡¯s strength? Over ten thousand battle-hardened veterans, about fifty thousand new recruits, and perhaps one or two more ten thousand militiamen from the prefectures and counties Yes, this nearly eighty thousand force would indeed be enough to contend with the Poison Sect and even fight back and forth. However, after fighting such a battle, it¡¯s clear how much damage Lu Yuan¡¯s strength would suffer. If we count the almost certain assassination attempt by Lan Cai¡¯er, the risks increase exponentially. Although Lu Yuan had joined the court¡¯s Ten Grandmasters plan and had become a partner in interests with Shangguan Ming, No matter how deep the ally was, there was no way he could pay without bottom line, right? What right did Shangguan Ming have to make him pay such a price? Was it the title of superior or his slightly attractive daughter? ¡°Brother Lu¡­¡± Shangguan Haimoon also pleaded at this moment, trying to step forward but was quickly stopped by an indifferent gaze, her face turning slightly pale.. Chapter 300 - Chapter 300: Chapter 178: Shangguan Seeks Help_3 Chapter 300: Chapter 178: Shangguan Seeks Help_3 Translator: 549690339 Lu Yuan just glanced at her and then withdrew his gaze. Although he was about to break through Innate, he had already started considering getting married and getting close to women. However, a single woman trying to make him risk his life was just wishful thinking on her part. Seeing this scene, Shangguan Guangbai next to him sighed in his heart, Imowing that the strategy of using beauty and affection to move the other party was no longer effective. Although in reality, there wasn¡¯t much affection between them and Lu Yuan in the first place. But even if this strategy did not work, the strategy set by the father had to continue. Therefore, Shangguan Guangbai changed his attitude and said, ¡°Brother Lu, you must know clearly, if my father retreats defeated, the whole Dongting Prefecture will fall into enemy hands. You, Brother Lu, live in Dongting Prefecture and are isolated from the Miao People in the north and south. The Five Poisons Sect has long hated you. When they gain power, will they easily let you go? At that time, when hundreds of thousands of troops head south, how can Brother Lu stop them? Therefore, my father and Brother Lu are dependent on each other like lips and teeth. Neither can leave the other.¡± However, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t buy into this argument, just a faint smile, ¡°If Wucheng Marquis really leads his troops to retreat, I can just retreat as well. Luyang Prefecture is not far from Yuzhang Prefecture, just a few days¡¯ journey, and I can retreat to Yuzhang Prefecture. At that time, if I give up this place, can those Zhou people catch up? Even if they really catch up, are they more willing to chase the court¡¯s main forces led by Wucheng Marquis or chase my small side army? When Shangguan Guangbai heard this, he paused for a moment. What Lu Yuan said made sense. Zhou soldiers crossing the river southward were aiming to destroy the country. It¡¯s impossible for them not to chase the main court army and instead divert their energy to trouble Lu Yuan, who had always been slack in his duties as a sidearm. By then, the Zhou people will have already crossed the river, and the court, wanting to cope with this national crisis, will have exhausted all their energy, so naturally, they won¡¯t have the spare energy to trouble Lu Yuan. On the contrary, they will have to appease him, the local lord holding heavy troops, so that he doesn¡¯t lead his men to join the Zhou people directly. After all, an Inborn Grandmaster, especially an Inborn Grandmaster with tens of thousands of soldiers, has such strength that even Zhou Country will give good treatment. At least it won¡¯t be worse than Li Xiong and the Five Poisons Sect. At this point, regarding Shangguan Ming¡¯s crisis and the court¡¯s crisis, it may not necessarily be a matter of life and death crisis for him. Seeing that this last resort also didn¡¯t work, Shangguan Guangbai was completely out of options. Looking at Lu Yuan, who didn¡¯t care about face at all, he could only sigh bitterly, ¡°If Brother Lu really does that, I have no choice but to accept it. However, Brother Lu is from Yue, don¡¯t you really want to see the Southern people being destroyed by others? I came here without any malicious intentions, only to save our country from its predicament. As long as our Yue Country¡¯s reign continues, I think it should be a good thing for Brother Lu, right?¡± Lu Yuan looked at Shangguan Guangbai and saw that he finally stopped playing dumb with him, so he said, ¡°As a person of Yue Country, I naturally don¡¯t want to see Yue Country destroyed. However, just by moving his lips, Wucheng Marquis wants me to dispatch troops, which is a bit too much. You must know that the soldiers under my command are all paid for by me. And fighting against the Miao People also involves risk. War is dangerous and risky. An incautious move can cost one¡¯s life. So I can send troops, and I can understand the difficulties of the country, but some compensation and assistance should be given, right? You can¡¯t expect people to sacrifice their lives for the court with nothing in return, can you?¡± The implication of his words was that he could send troops, but money would have to be given. After all, Da Yue belonged to the six families and seven clans, and the court also belonged to these aristocratic families. Lu Yuan was not a beneficiary, so why should he supply his own rations to fight for these families? How cheap would one have to be to make such a mistake? Seeing Lu Yuan finally relent, Shangguan Guangbai was overjoyed and immediately said, ¡°Whatever Brother Lu wants, just say it. As long as we can manage it, the court will not shirk its responsibility.¡± Lu Yuan said, ¡°First, there is the military salary. Before the army moves, food and fodder must be provided. The court must provide some startup funds. When one million silver tales are sent to me, I can set out on the expedition. Furthermore, when the soldiers fight for the court and give their lives, the court must also bear the burden of their military salaries in the future, right? For my sixty thousand soldiers, 300,000 silver tales per month, the court must provide this and not delay. Can this be done?¡± Raising troops is like burning money, and Lu Yuan has a deep understanding of this. With a monthly expenditure of 300,000 silver tales, his wallet was almost emptied. Just when he was about to go bankrupt, Shangguan Ming came knocking at the door, so naturally Lu Yuan wanted to seize the opportunity to shift this pressure onto the court. Originally, those sixty thousand soldiers were Lu Yuan¡¯s private army, and he had no reason or excuse to ask the court for money. But now, he was helping the court fight battles. The court couldn¡¯t just not give him money, could it? As expected, after hearing this condition, Shangguan Guangbai hesitated for a moment and still nodded his head, ¡°Yes. The one million silver tales of military salary will be sent to you shortly. From now on, the court will also provide monthly noises for the soldiers under Brother Lu¡¯s command.¡± With the disastrous defeat of the Army of Pacifying Shu, the court lost nearly a hundred thousand troops. Without these soldiers, the court¡¯s finances naturally had a surplus. Taking some of this surplus and giving it to Lu Yuan to serve as military salaries is not difficult. The only thing that¡¯s a bit unpleasant is that the court is paying for the maintenance of his troops. But now, with the country in danger, as long as they can repel the Zhou soldiers, they can¡¯t care about so much. First, deal with the immediate crisis. Hearing his condition accepted, Lu Yuan immediately showed a smile on his face. He had finally found a solution to the financial crisis that had been troubling him, so his mood was naturally quite good. Taking advantage of his good mood, he proposed a second condition: ¡°I will lead the Five Poison Sect away, and the Saintess of the Sect may follow. But there is no Inborn Grandmaster in my army, so if we encounter Lan Cai¡¯er on the battlefield, we will inevitably suffer a big loss. So if I am to send troops, the court must also send an Inborn Grandmaster to support me, to counter Lan Cai¡¯er.¡± Is this possible?¡± Chapter 301 - Chapter 301: Chapter 179: Setting out to pacify the Miao Chapter 301: Chapter 179: Setting out to pacify the Miao Translator: 549690339 Lan Cai¡¯er, an Innate Grandmaster, is also a long-standing rival of Lu Yuan. Although the two have never met face to face and have not had any direct conflict, the disputes and struggles between the forces they belong to began several years ago. Since the news of Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s achievement of Innate spread, she has been like a sword hanging over Lu Yuan¡¯s head, threatening his life at any moment. The reason it didn¡¯t fall is mainly because Lu Yuan had been low-key and didn¡¯t provoke or force the other party too much to come and kill him directly. But now, Lu Yuan is going to lead an army and attack the old nest of the Five Venoms Cult. This action is certainly pushing the other party to an extreme. By that time, Lan Cai¡¯er, the Holy Maiden, would almost certainly personally take action to eliminate Lu Yuan, the long-time enemy who has been aconstant headache to the Five Venoms Cult. Even with an army to protect him, Lu Yuan still feels insecure at that time. So without an Innate Grandmaster by his side to protect him, it is impossible for him to march forward. Having a Grandmaster to protect him is his bottom line. However, the Imperial Court is barely managing its top war power; whether it can send an Innate Grandmaster is still a question. So, Lu Yuan is unsure whether the Imperial Court will agree to this. But to his surprise, Shangguan Guangbai, who was in front of him, agreed without any hesitation: ¡°Yes, the Imperial Court can agree to this.¡± This decisive answer made Lu Yuan pause for a moment. Seeing his expression, Shangguan Guangbai couldn¡¯t help laughing: ¡°Brother Lu should have already known that Elder Master Yan Wangqiu of Nanhai Sect has agreed to the court¡¯s invitation and took the position of National Master. Now, as the state is facing difficulties, the Imperial Court and National Master Yan have discussed it, and he has agreed to lead the Nanhai Sect¡¯s disciples to the north of Dongting Province to assist the Imperial Court in suppressing the rebellion. If Brother Lu is willing to march, my father can transfer the National Master to your army. Elder Master Yan has been a renowned figure in Jianghu for over a hundred years, and his sect has more than ten top-notch experts. With him and his disciples, even if the Holy Maiden of the Five Venoms Cult comes in person, they can protect Brother Lu without any worries.¡± Yan Wangqiu is one of the several Innate Grandmasters in Yue Country¡¯s Jianghu. However, although he has been famous for a long time, his strength is only at the first level of Innate. Thus, when the forces from Lingnan Jianghu tried to infiltrate Yuzhang Prefecture earlier, they encountered a fierce counterattack from Yin Huixuan of the Liuyang Sect. When Yin Huixuan went to Lingnan to challenge the martial arts world, Yan Wangqiu even avoided the battle. Before his opponents attacked his doorstep, heaverted an early fight by leaving on a long journey. This kind of behavior was once despised by the martial arts world. Through this incident, it is clear that Yin Huixuan¡¯s strength is far above Yan Wangqiu¡¯s. However, Yan Wangqiu¡¯s cowardice is not without reason. Once a martial artist breaks through Innate, they can live up to 150 years. Yan Wanqiu has been a Grandmaster for ninety years, and he broke through at the age of fifty. That is to say, Elder Master Yan can only live for another ten years at most, if not less. Even ten years ago, his physical condition wouldn¡¯t have been much better. Back then, fighting the rising star Yin Huixuan with his frail body would have likely cost him his life after just one battle. Behind Yan Wangqiu is a sect. Tens of thousands of people from Nanhai Sect depend on this Grandmaster to thrive. If he had an accident, the sect would disintegrate. Jianghu has always spread rumors that the Nanhai Sect¡¯s younger disciples are incompetent, and that none of the disciples from the last four generations have become successful. That¡¯s why Yan Wangqiu, who is over 140 years old, still has to stand up and support the sect. It seems that Nanhai Sect¡¯s heritage has really run into problems. Maybe Yan Wangqiu agrees to the court¡¯s terms to help the sect¡¯s younger generation secure a foundation in half of the prefecture by helping the Imperial Court repel Zhou People and quell the rebellion while his old bones can still move. After all, if they can¡¯t survive in Jianghu, establishing a country with a solid foundation is also a good way out. At least, with a stable territory and the backing of the Imperial Court, the sect will not be immediately annihilated after his death by the enemies he had offended in the past. Lu Yuan, guessing this in his heart, shows a smile on his face and says to Shangguan Guangbai: ¡°If it can be done, once the military salary from the Imperial Court and Master Yan arrive, I will send fifty thousand troops to attack Wuling Prefecture.¡± Shangguan Guangbai was delighted and quickly said: ¡°Brother Lu, rest assured, the one million taels of military salary and Master Yan¡¯s group will arrive by next month. By then, we hope Brother Lu can immediately dispatch the troops, as the Imperial Court really can¡¯t wait any longer.¡± At present, there are very few soldiers to mobilize inside and outside the court. In the whole Da Yue, there are fifty thousand troops in Jiuzhen Prefecture, but these fifty thousand people need to suppress the entire Lingnan three prefectures, so they can¡¯t move at all. Jinling, the capital, also has fifty thousand Capital Armed Forces, but these five thousand soldiers also need to suppressing Linhai, Yuzhang, and Jianan Prefectures. Besides, it is where the Imperial Capital is located. So it cannot be moved either. In the north of Guangling Prefecture, there are two hundred thousand frontier soldiers. However, those two hundred thousand troops must guard against an equal number, or even more, of Liang soldiers across the border. Once these troops are mobilized, Liang forces will be able to drive straight into Guangling, threatening Jinling City from across the river. This is an even worse situation than losing control of Dongting Prefecture. That was why the border army of Guangling Prefecture could not move either, and why the Imperial Court sent envoys to Liang Country, hoping to make peace with it.. Chapter 302 - Chapter 302: Chapter 179: Setting Out to Pacify the Miao 2 Chapter 302: Chapter 179: Setting Out to Pacify the Miao 2 Translator: 549690339 Not making peace with Liang Country and letting them withdraw their troops from the border means that the imperial court will always face great pressure on Guangling County and have to station a large number of troops here. If the two countries reconcile, at the very least, the imperial court can draw another hundred-thousand-strong army from Guangling County. If the negotiations go even more smoothly, they might even persuade Liang Country to send their troops together to fight Zhou Country. If it could be done, the imminent danger of national calamity that Da Yue is facing now would be easily resolved in an instant. ¡®I just hope that the Liang people can understand the principle that if one falls, the other will be in danger. Once my Yue Country is destroyed, the Zhou people will come to seize the southern land and attack Liang country from both the west and the south directions. By then, Liang country will be faced with enemies on both sides, and their destruction will not be far away.¡¯ At present, only those tens of thousands of troops under Lu Yuan¡¯s command can be used to provide some support, Shangguan Guangbai thought. Since their military resources are limited, the imperial court has no choice but to suffer such humiliation. At this time, Lu Yuan also assured: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, as long as my two conditions can be met, sending troops will be just an easy task.¡± ¡°Then let it be settled like this,¡± Shangguan Guangbai finally confirmed. ¡°It is settled,¡± Lu Yuan solemnly nodded. After agreeing on this matter, the atmosphere between the three became much better instantly. Lu Yuan¡¯s face regained his previous smile when facing Shangguan Haimoon. Shangguan Haimoon also put on her smile again and continued to be close to him as she had in the past. However, given the emergency of the military situation, after confirming the conditions for Lu Yuan to send troops, Shangguan siblings only stayed here for a meal, and then hurriedly left to report back to their father. Whether it¡¯s the one million silver tales or Elder Master Yan Wangqiu, they needed their father¡¯s decision before they could mobilize the troops. Given the difficult situation, if they could arrange these conditions a day earlier and let Lu Yuan send troops a day earlier, it would be a great thing for Shangguan Ming. The Shangguan siblings dare not delay. Having sent off the Shangguan siblings, Lu Yuan summoned his generals that same afternoon and announced the order to set out on the campaign soon. There are now 5,000 old soldiers and 15,000 new recruits who have been trained for half a year, as well as 32,000 completely new soldiers who have trained for two months. In total, there are 52,000 men. No matter how many of these troops are capable, at least they are imposing enough> At least they are a group of 50,000 people, and all of them are strong young men According to Lu Yuan¡¯s recruitment standards, those who can be recruited into the army, even new soldiers, basically have some martial arts and archery skills. With this foundation, it cannot be said that they are really incapable. ¡°Those Miao soldiers were originally just mountain people. Some of them do not even qualify as mountain people, but are simply farmers. Regarding the quality of soldiers, I am not sure if they are even better than mine.¡± Lu Yuan is quite confident in his troops. Perhaps they are no match for the imperial elite or the Zhou elite, but they are not weak when fighting against the same level, or even worse, the Miao people. This superiority complex comes from the past several times when they defeated the Miao people. The only thing that worries him is the Inborn Grandmaster and Saintess Lan Cai¡¯er among the Miao people. But now, the threat from Lan Cai¡¯er will be neutralized by Yan Wangqiu. Although Elder Master Yan is old and unable to fight, Lan Cai¡¯er is only a newly promoted grandmaster who may not be so powerful. With the old lord by his side, Lu Yuan is not afraid of Lan Cai¡¯er at all. So now that he has secured the conditions with the imperial court, Lu Yuan has prepared himself to face the Miao people properly. Previously, Shangguan Guangbai was right. Letting the Zhou people cross the river is not good for Lu Yuan. Just losing Shaoyang Prefecture and Luyang Prefecture would make him very upset. Without his own territory, how can he practice the Taiping Dao Book? Lu Yuan has been suffering from the pain of not being able to cultivate immortality for more than a decade and does not want to continue suffering. Moreover, Shaoyang Prefecture has been constantly attacked by the Miao people and has already lost five counties and half a prefecture. It¡¯s time to save them. ¡°Those Miao people have become complacent, thinking I can¡¯t do anything to them. This time, let them see that I, Lu Yuan, am not someone they can bully at will,¡± an icy glint flashed through Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes. As he thought, after arranging the campaign, he left the barracks and went to Fu City. An army of fifty-thousand needs a substantial amount of daily supplies, which is not a small number. Preparation of military food, conscription of civilian workers for transportation, all of these require the support of local officials. Similarly, with Lu Yuan and his army leaving, the local defense of Luyang Prefecture could only rely on the local militia from the prefectures and counties. Therefore, the local defense could only rely on Luyang Prefecture itself. There are still 30,000 Miao people watching in the southern part of Yangshan Prefecture, which is a significant threat and a significant problem. As for how to deal with these issues, it would be impossible for Lu Yuan to decide on his own by just discussing with Sun Siwen, the prefect. ¡°Don¡¯t worry about the defense of Luyang,¡± Sun Siwen said in the Governor¡¯s Mansion. ¡°With Brother Lu¡¯s help last year, the local militia in each county of this prefecture is now well -prepared. ¡°In addition, with the newly arrived refugees, the population of this prefecture has gradually increased, and the situation has returned to its pre-war state..¡± Chapter 303 - Chapter 303: Chapter 179: Setting Out to Pacify the Miao_3 Chapter 303: Chapter 179: Setting Out to Pacify the Miao_3 Translator: 549690339 Now, if needed, Luyang can mobilize up to 30,000 militia at any time. With an additional 2,000 county soldiers as the backbone, the 30,000 Miao people from Yangshan Prefecture are of no concern. However, this would mean that the number of civilian workers available to assist in the transportation of food and fodder would be insufficient. To withstand the 30,000 Miao people, at least 20,000 militia must be prepared within the prefecture. Therefore, a maximum of 10,000 people from the local area could be used as civilian workers. I¡¯m afraid that these people won¡¯t be enough to support the army¡¯s logistics.¡± Sun Siwen also couldn¡¯t help but feel troubled as he said this. After continuous expansion, the population of Luyang Prefecture had exceeded 200,000, especially with the recruitment of some refugees at the end of last year. However, even with such numbers, it was still difficult to cope with both defending against foreign enemies and dispatching civilian workers to accompany the army on expeditions. Lu Yuan understood Sun Siwen¡¯s dilemma and said: ¡°No need to worry about this. I¡¯m campaigning on behalf of the court, and support should come from other prefectures in the region. Don¡¯t forget, I am the Pingxi General, overseeing military affairs against the Miao people in the region. I can send a letter to Hengyang Prefecture, asking them to recruit civilian workers to help transport military food. Hengyang Prefecture is located at the rear and has not suffered much from the war, except for the Seven Star Sect rebellion. Their population remains relatively intact. The prefecture can easily mobilize 50,000 civilian workers, which should be enough to transport food for the entire army. Moreover, there is no need to transport military food from Luyang. Hengyang is a grain -producing area, and we can requisition supplies directly from there, making the process more convenient.¡± Hengyang Prefecture is one of several major grain-producing prefectures within Dongting. Since the Seven Star Sect rebellion moved north to Hengyang, the regional government placed pressure on Lu Yuan to suppress the rebels swiftly, aiming to protect Hengyang Prefecture, a vital grain-producing area. Having an abundant grain yield allowed a larger population to be supported. At its peak, Hengyang Prefecture had 100,000 households and 500,000 residents. Though it has suffered losses due to wars, it still has a population of 400,000. Mobilizing 50,000 civilian workers would not be difficult; supplying food for Lu Yuan¡¯s 50,000-strong army would be even easier. After all, Hengyang Prefecture¡¯s grain reserves were initially intended to support the 100,000-strong Army of Pacifying Shu. Now that the Army of Pacifying Shu is gone, the surplus grain will be used by Lu Yuan. Sun Siwen had previously held office in Hengyang Prefecture, so he was well-aware of the situation there. Seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s plan, he nodded, ¡°If that¡¯s the case, there should be no problem.¡± With 20,000 militia stationed in Luyang Prefecture, as long as they do not engage in field battles, the Miao soldiers will be unable to threaten them. Zhou Qing was able to hold off over a hundred thousand Miao people with just 40,000 soldiers at shao yang yrerecture for rms very reason. Though they held military superiority in both numbers and elite fighters, the Miao people still failed to capture Shaoyang Prefecture. Their combat capabilities had their limits. Therefore, Lu Yuan was not worried. Even a civilian like Sun Siwen was not worried. What made the Miao people frightening was never their combat capabilities, but their massive numbers ¡ª which could reach hundreds of thousands ¨C and the numerous highly skilled fighters within the Five Poisons Sect. This is what made the court and people like Lu Yuan feel so headache-inducing. The decision to go to war was ultimately made. As a result, things began to get busy in the barracks. Previously, soldiers on leave returned to the camp after being summoned by their officers. Upon learning that the army was about to go on an expedition, soldiers in the camp began to intensify their training. This was particularly true for the new recruits who would benefit from learning an additional combat skill, formation, or signal command, each increasing their chances of survival on the battlefield. Wasn¡¯t there an old saying? ¡°To sharpen one¡¯s sword before the battle is better than nothing.¡± At this moment, the new recruits were like the sharpened swords. Not only in the barracks, but also in the local area of Luyang Prefecture, the ordinary people who had just emerged from the festive atmosphere were quickly mobilized by various levels of local officials and county military officers. At this time, the benefits of the militia system in the prefectures and counties were revealed. With one command from the top, the entire prefecture¡¯s manpower could be mobilized instantly, rallying a sufficient number of troops. Putting aside whether these people could fight, their sheer presence provided powerful deterrence. Not to mention that during the slack farming season, these militiamen would also receive some military training. Although the efficacy of this training is debatable, using them to defend the city shouldn¡¯t pose any major issues. So, by the end of the first month and the beginning of the second month, Luyang Prefecture found itself enmeshed in a large-scale mobilization. More than just Luyang Prefecture, the mobilization also rapidly expanded in Hengyang Prefecture after receiving Lu Yuan¡¯s letter, collecting food and rallying civilian workers to prepare for the military expedition. This massive mobilization inevitably aroused the vigilance of all parties within Dongting. The Zhou people were less concerned, as they remained far from Luyang Prefecture and did not feel significantly threatened. However, the Miao people immediately became alert. The Miao populations in Yangshan, Jiuyi, and Lingling Prefectures, all bordering Luyang Prefecture, entered a new round of mobilization. Large numbers of Miao people were recruited to reinforce the border of Yangshan Prefecture. What was originally 30,000 Miao troops increased to 50,000, guarding against Lu Yuan¡¯s invasion from the south. At Shaoyang Prefecture, the 20,000 Miao soldiers who had previously been attacking Wugang County also retreated because they sensed danger, consolidating their defenses within the city. Dark clouds of war gathered over the southern part of Dongting, with signs of impending conflict at every turn. In the midst of this tense and oppressive atmosphere, on the 11th day of the second month of Hongdao Year Six, the court¡¯s one million taels of army silver, Yan Wangqiu and others from the Nanhai Sect arrived in Luyang Prefecture, closely planned and coordinated. Upon seeing this, Lu Yuan had nothing more to say. The preassembled 50,000-strong army immediately set off, with 10,000 civilian workers from Luyang Prefecture joining them. Upon reaching Hengyang Prefecture, 60,000 civilian workers from that area joined the cause, expanding the entire army to 120,000 strong. Lu Yuan declared himself commander of 200,000 troops, intent on defeating the Miao thieves. He led the massive army towards Shaoyang Prefecture. For a moment, the entire Dongting area could not help but be overwhelmed by Lu Yuan¡¯s momentum.. Chapter 304 - Chapter 304: Chapter 180: Advancing and Retreating in a Dilemma Chapter 304: Chapter 180: Advancing and Retreating in a Dilemma Translator: 549690339 Having received the imperial court¡¯s money and promised to set off, Lu Yuan certainly would not deceive anyone. Isn¡¯t it just attracting the Miao People back to their army, guarding their old nest? It¡¯s a small matter. Lu Yuan¡¯s intention was to make his expedition a huge deal so that the more people who knew about it, the better. With an army of 200,000 directly pressing down on them, would they be scared or not? Moreover, not all of Lu Yuan¡¯s 200,000 soldiers were just for show. Now, including civilian workers, the army has 120,000 people. When he arrives at Shaoyang Prefecture and meets Zhou Qing, the number of soldiers and horses will expand to nearly 150,000. 150,000 people, just 50,000 short of 200,000. Having so many troops at the southern border of Wuling Prefecture, glaring at the old nest of the Poison Sect, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t believe that the Poison Sect could remain unmoved. On the wide official road, smoke and dust filled the air. The extensive army, like a long dragon, rushed towards the distance. On both sides, the pedestrians and merchants gave way, hiding in the villages and towns, clicking their tongues in awe at the magnificent army before them. Such a large military, it¡¯s rare in the entire Dongting Prefecture. It was only in recent years, with the increasingly grand battles, the imperial army¡¯s expedition against the Miao People, the northern Zhou People¡¯s crossing to the south, and the junction of the Zhou and Miao forces that such a scene could be seen. However, it had only been seen near Yueyang Prefecture and Tianmen Prefecture. In the middle and southern prefectures of Dongting Prefecture, it had never been witnessed before. Thus, as Lu Yuan led his troops on an expedition, as the army spread out in a line and advanced forward, the surrounding prefectures were immediately filled with awe. Have you ever seen a procession of soldiers, passing by for two or three days non-stop? During this time, those who hid by the roadside waited for the army to leave before resuming their journey. However, after waiting for a full three days, the moving army finally left their sight. This seemingly endless wait had an undoubtedly tremendous psychological impact on people. Such open and explicit moves naturally allowed those who were watching to quickly grasp the number of Lu Yuan¡¯s army. As a result. ¡°The Yue bandits have over 100,000 people, passing through in three days, the roads cannot be blocked.¡± ¡°More than a hundred thousand Nan people, with sharp military power, the southern part of Dongting Prefecture might change.¡± ¡°Lu Pingxi leads tens of thousands of people, this time to quell the Miao rebels and restore Wuling.¡± News like the above suddenly spread like snowflakes, buried by the spies on both sides of the road, and reported back to the rear. From this, various reactions began to arise surrounding the matter. Baling City. Inside the prefectural government office, many generals gathered at this moment, divided by their ranks in literary and martial arts. At the top sat a general in red armor, with a red-robed monk sitting beside him. These two were none other than the Grand General Shangguan Ming and the national master with deep opportunities. At this time, Shangguan Ming was holding a piece of silk cloth and finished reading its content. He then laughed and said to the generals below, ¡°Gentlemen, the news has been sent back from the south. This time, Lu Pingxi led an army of 200,000 to the Western Expedition, directed at the old nest of the Poison Sect bandits in Wuling Prefecture. Upon hearing this news, those Miao rebels will surely panic and flee. Without the assistance of the Miao people, the strength of the Zhou people in Jiangnan will be greatly reduced, and their military morale will undoubtedly waver.¡± I intend to take this opportunity to send troops to subdue them and break them in one fell swoop. This time, I am determined to capture and kill Li Yanjing.¡± Speaking to this point, Shangguan Ming¡¯s tone was filled with resentment. Last time, he personally led the vanguard. At that time, the one who came to block them was Zhou Country¡¯s Left Pillar State Grand General, Li Yanjing. Although the imperial court had broken the Zhou-Miao united army in a pitched battle and achieved a brilliant victory, the prefecture city was also completely recovered. But correspondingly, Shangguan Ming, who had not been a master of the Inborn realm for long, was nearly killed in a duel with Li Yanjing. Having recuperated for several months and spent a lot of medicine, his injuries had barely recovered. Even so, his vitality had been severely damaged. Based on Shangguan Ming¡¯s estimation, the loss of vitality suffered this time might shorten his lifespan by several years. Thinking that he might live a few years less than others, who wouldn¡¯t be angry? In addition to the great enmity of nearly being killed. So for Li Yanjing, Shangguan Ming really held a grudge. Meanwhile, the many generals below did not pay much attention to their boss¡¯s emotional changes. At this time, they were all shocked by the 200,000 strong army mentioned by their own commander. Actually, the news that Lu Yuan would launch a war in the south to echo their army¡¯s actions had been heard by many in the hall more than a month ago. However, regarding Lu Yuan¡¯s strength, many people present did not know much about it. There were rumors of 30,000 to 50,000 soldiers, some said only 10,000 to 20,000, and others even 100,000 soldiers. But which piece of information was more accurate, everyone privately speculated that the number of 20,000 or 30,000 was more reasonable. After all, that Lu Pingxi only had two prefectures¡¯ lands in his hands. How many soldiers could such a small territory support? Twenty or thirty thousand would be the limit. All the people present had led soldiers for many years or had managed politics for many years. The ability to gauge the opponent¡¯s strength based on local financial resources was there. But what was Shangguan Ming talking about now? 200,000 strong army! When did that Lu Pingxi have so many troops in his hands? If he really had so many soldiers, why bother fighting the Miao people? Directly bring them to Yueyang Prefecture and join forces with their main imperial force, to push the Zhou-Miao United Army in one go.. Chapter 305 - Chapter 305: Chapter 180: Advancing and Retreating in a Dilemma 2 Chapter 305: Chapter 180: Advancing and Retreating in a Dilemma 2 Translator: 549690339 After annihilating them, why not cross the Hebei River and confront the main force of the Zhou people head -on? So instinctively, upon hearing this number, many people present subconsciously felt something was wrong. ¡®Could that 200,000-strong army be just a bluff? And could the composition of the expeditionary force be made up of nothing but random conscripts? Just like the Miao people.¡¯ Many people had this thought in their hearts. They had been in Dongting for some time now and had encountered the Miao people on several occasions. Through these long-lasting confrontations, they naturally understood the true strength of the Miao people¡¯s 100,000-strong army. It was nothing more than temporarily conscripted strong farmers. Although the Miao people¡¯s momentary bravery could not be said to be without any fighting strength, they were still essentially just a ragtag army. So last time they lined up and openly confronted the Zhou-Miao alliance in a real battle. As a result, those Zhou people were able to fight back, while the Miao people collapsed in just one hour. The defeated troops swept the Zhou people, shaking their morale and directly leading to the total defeat of the entire battle. Otherwise, if only the Zhou people had fought, even if there were only 50,000 of them, and this side was twice the number of the enemy, they would not have been able to defeat the enemy in such a short time. Even after the entire battle, it was not certain whether the Zhou people would be defeated. There is a huge gap in strength between professional soldiers, semi-professional soldiers, and ordinary civilians. Zhou people and the imperial army are both professional soldiers. However, those Miao people may not even be considered semi-professional soldiers. If General Pingxi¡¯s troops are all civilians, then even if there are 200,000 of them, they will not be of much use. On the contrary, the more people there are, the more likely things might go wrong. Upon thinking of the consequences, many people worried about the nation¡¯s politics could not help but step forward and say, ¡°General, is it true that there are 200,000 people on Lu Pingxi¡¯s side? If so, how many of them are soldiers, and how many are civilians? With its strength, can it really sweep the Miao people away?¡± As soon as this question came out, many people present looked at Shangguan Ming. The fame of Lu Yuan¡¯s 200,000 -strong army had already been spread. If a major defeat were to take place, even if it did not harm their strength, the news of the court¡¯s 200,000-strong army being defeated would probably shake the hearts and minds of the people in Dongting and even the whole country, causing local unrest and giving ambitious people a chance to rise. This would be a terrible thing for everyone. If this were the case, they would rather not have support from Lu Yuan. Shangguan Ming glanced at his subordinates and knew what they were worried about. He also understood that if he did not give a clear explanation, it might shake the morale of the South An army. So he thought about it and decided to reveal some details, saying, ¡°Don¡¯t worry about this matter, everyone. In recent years, Lu Pingxi has recruited and trained 60,000 soldiers. Although this expedition is said to be 200,000 strong, there are actually only 150,000 people. Among these 150,000 people, there are those 60,000 soldiers, and the rest are mostly county soldiers and militias. With this strength, even if the main force of the Miao people returns to Wuling Prefecture, they will be no match for Lu Pingxi. Remember, those barbarian Miao soldiers are just ordinary mountain people. In terms of fighting strength, they are not much stronger than the civilians and militias under the court¡¯s rule. And the Miao people in Wuling Prefecture are no more than 100,000 in number. With the presence of those 60,000 soldiers, supplemented by 90,000 civilian forces, they already outnumber the enemy. Even if they are unable to conquer Wuling Prefecture, they will certainly not suffer defeat. Moreover, to ensure victory, I have ordered Innate Grandmaster Yan Wangqiu from the Nanhai Sect to assist Lu Pingxi. With his presence, even if the Holy Maiden of the Five Poisons Sect herself takes action, she will not be able to cause any waves. With this, there is no need to worry, right?¡± Shangguan Ming shared the information he knew and made some reasonable embellishments with a smile on his face. Upon hearing what he said, the worry on his subordinates¡¯ faces indeed diminished by more than half. Indeed. If what Shangguan Ming said was true, then Lu Pingxi¡¯s actions this time would be enough to give those Miao people a powerful blow. This time, even if these Miao people were not completely wiped out, they would be unable to make a move and interfere with their ongoing war against the Zhou people before dealing with Lu Pingxi¡¯s offensive. Without the Miao people¡¯s help, this would indeed be an excellent opportunity for them to drive the Zhou people back to the north of the river. So someone excitedly said, ¡°If this is true, then I would like to be the vanguard and fight the north people for the general.¡± ¡°Haha, General Lu, don¡¯t be impatient. Those Miao people haven¡¯t left yet.¡± Shangguan Ming laughed loudly, then turned his head to look at the Saint Monk Jihui beside him and said, ¡°National Master, once the Miao people of the Five Poisons Sect retreat, I will lead the army to attack. But Li Yanjing is too powerful for me to handle. At that time, I would like to ask the National Master to come forward with me and destroy this evil together.¡± Saint Monk Jihui solemnly nodded: ¡°Amitabha, Zhou people are good at using weapons and harming the innocent. Li Yanjing is their leader of sin. Even if the poor monk becomes Wrathful Vajrapani, we will help the general remove this demon.¡± Shangguan Ming laughed and said, ¡°With the words of the Saint Monk, there is no worry about this battle.¡± Afterward, Shangguan Ming immediately distributed tasks on the spot, letting many subordinate generals prepare for the expedition. Speed is essential in expeditions. Although it is impossible to hide the news of Lu Yuan¡¯s deployment, the scale and direction of his deployment have indeed been strictly concealed.. Chapter 306 - Chapter 306: Chapter 180: Advancing and Retreating in a Dilemma_3 Chapter 306: Chapter 180: Advancing and Retreating in a Dilemma_3 Translator: 549690339 So this time, sending an army of two hundred thousand to attack Wuling Prefecture has completely caught Wu Du Sect and Zhou People off guard. They never expected that Lu Yuan could send out so many soldiers, and that the target would be Wuling Prefecture. In such a sudden situation, these two groups of bandits are undoubtedly in a difficult position to respond properly. And this is Shangguan Ming¡¯s opportunity. As long as the Miao People retreat, he will lead the army to strike, and aim at the demoralized Zhou People for a fierce attack. Driving them all back to the river. Humph, a group of northerners on horseback dares to cross the river? Who gave them the courage? Some rejoice, some worry. While Shangguan Ming¡¯s army is filled with excitement and making preparations to attack the Zhou People, Lan Zhaoyun from Wu Du Sect has also arrived at Anxiang County, where Zhou People are stationed. ¡°General Li, our main sect is being attacked by a large number of Yue People, and Wuling Prefecture is in danger. We must withdraw our troops to help defend our headquarters and cannot stay here any longer.¡± In the county government office, Lan Zhaoyun proposed to leave when he met Li Yanjing. Li Yanjing¡¯s face looked somewhat difficult upon hearing this: ¡°Sect Leader Lan, the so-called massive army of two hundred thousand from Zhou People is nothing but bluff. Moreover, most of them are forcefully gathered civilian workers.¡± ¡°Now, they are making a lot of noise because they want to force you to withdraw your troops. If you really withdraw at this time, you will fall into the enemy¡¯s trap. Sect Leader, please think thrice.¡± Li Yanjing, the commander of the Zhou People who crossed the river to the south, naturally knew his situation clearly, as well as what could be expected by Shangguan Ming and his soldiers. If he loses the Miao People as his wings and the local power to back him up. His own soldiers, who are not accustomed to the southern land and water, would not be a match for the massive Yue army, even if they are well-trained. Therefore, once the Miao People leave, Li Yanjing himself is afraid that he won¡¯t be able to hold on for long. But this southern expedition is crucial to whether Zhou Country can annihilate Yue and unify Jiangnan. Such a heavy responsibility, even as an Inborn Grandmaster, he feels unbearable. So he naturally doesn¡¯t want Lan Zhaoyun to take people away at this time. But at this critical moment, while Li Yanjing is considering himself. Lan Zhaoyun also has the same intention. The Sect Leader of the Five Poisons spoke resolutely: ¡®Whether the Yue People have a conspiracy or not, I¡¯m clearer on this than General Li. I have been fighting against Lu Yuan for several years now. I know his nature well: he is always cautious and acts after careful planning. Now that he has launched an attack, he must have complete confidence, believing that even if I lead my army to help, he can still face me directly, or even defeat me in battle. Such a person, even if his so-called army of two hundred thousand is just a bluff, there must be at least one hundred thousand troops.¡± And since he has taken control of Luyang Prefecture, he has been constantly recruiting soldiers and horses. I heard that as early as last year, he recruited tens of thousands of soldiers. Although the training of those soldiers is relatively short, their strength is already something I cannot ignore.¡± As the saying goes, your enemy knows you best. In the Five Poisons Sect¡¯s list of enemies, Lu Yuan may not be the top enemy, but he is definitely the one they want to kill the most. Therefore, although the Five Poisons Sect hasn¡¯t targeted Lu Yuan as their main objective, they have always been sending people to observe his every move. As for what Lu Yuan has done in Luyang Prefecture, whether it is managing the local area, recruiting soldiers and horses, or purchasing food and fodder from other places on a large scale, they have a good understanding. It is precisely because they know so much that Lan Zhaoyun knows that if this mortal enemy really goes all out, it is possible he could overturn his Old Nest. If he thinks of his headquarters, which had been handed down for thousands of years, may be occupied by the Yue People, and the Miao ancestral land may fall into the hands of the Yue People, the Sect Leader of the Five Poisons can¡¯t sit still any longer. So, in the name of an ally, he comes to bid farewell, and after a thought, he speaks to Li Yanjing: ¡°General Li, Lu Yuan¡¯s strength is far from as weak as it seems on the surface. If we underestimate him, we will definitely suffer a great loss. General, you better make preparations early. This time I will lead my soldiers back, and I have no confidence in repelling Lu Yuan. If I fail here, your flank will also be lost. So, if possible, please relay a message to the north of the river, and ask them to send reinforcements.¡± If you and I fail, it may not be far away.¡± Having fought against the court for so long, Lan Zhaoyun was somewhat traumatized by the elite troops of the court. He knew that with his civilian-worker-like Miao Soldiers, the gap between the military strength of his soldiers and those of the regular army was huge. So at this time, when he thought that there might be tens of thousands of elite soldiers under Lu Yuan¡¯s command, he couldn¡¯t help but feel scared. The last time they confronted the imperial army directly at Baling City, they were defeated miserably. His fifty thousand Miao Soldiers were engaged in a head-on battle with twenty thousand imperial elites. Despite having twice as many soldiers, they were defeated in less than an hour. This reality has bitterly poured cold water on Lan Zhaoyun¡¯s original ambitions. So when he returns to Wuling Prefecture this time, he has little confidence in defeating Lu Yuan. All he can think of is holding the city until the enemy¡¯s food supply runs out and they retreat. Didn¡¯t Lu Yuan claim to have an army of two hundred thousand? With two hundred thousand people, they would consume a huge amount of food and fodder daily. They couldn¡¯t support such a large-scale army for a long time with the little land they controlled. As long as they could hold out for three to five months, the other party would be unable to support and retreat. This is where the hope lies. Li Yanjing could see that Lan Zhaoyun was determined to leave, and he knew in his heart that he couldn¡¯t persuade the other party. So, with a difficult expression on his face, he said: ¡°I understand. Sect Leader Lan, if you want to go, then go. I will hold up the Yue People here.¡± Lan Zhaoyun¡¯s words sounded good, asking the Jiangbei to send reinforcements again. However, since he led his soldiers across the river, the Yue People reacted quickly and immediately dispatched hundreds of warships to blockade the water routes between Jiangnan and Jiangbei. Nowadays, the river is full of Yue boat masters. Where can the Zhou soldiers from Tianmen Prefecture send people? But Lan Zhaoyun got one thing right. If something goes wrong on his side, it won¡¯t be easy for him here either. Li Yanjing, who had his retreat route cut off, now entirely depended on the supplies from Wuling Prefecture¡¯s Miao People for his whole army¡¯s logistics. If Wuling Prefecture is captured by Lu Yuan, then the food supply of his army will be cut off. In that case, even if he can hold off Shangguan Ming¡¯s fierce attack, without logistical food and fodder, he¡¯s bound for destruction. ¡®This perfect situation has been ruined by an unknown figure named Lu Yuan, leaving me trapped. This Yue People¡¯s Pingxi General really doesn¡¯t make a move, but when he does, it¡¯s a deadly one.¡¯ Thinking of the current terrible situation, Li Yanjing couldn¡¯t help but grit his teeth in hatred towards Lu Yuan, who caused all this. If he gets the chance to meet this bandit in the future, he must kill him.. Chapter 307 - Chapter 307: Chapter 181: The Saintess Assassination Chapter 307: Chapter 181: The Saintess Assassination Translator: 549690339 On the sixteenth day of the second month of the sixth year of Hongdao, Lan Zhaoyun led sixty thousand Miao soldiers to withdraw from Shiyang County, returning to his old base in Wuling Prefecture. Zhou Country¡¯s Pillar State Grand General Li Yanjing assembled his troops and set up four camps outside Anxiang County, leading a forty thousand strong army to defend the city. The following day, upon receiving news, Shangguan Ming immediately left ten thousand men to guard Baling City. He then personally led an eighty thousand-strong army, first recapturing Shiyang County, then advancing to Anxiang to surround the city. In Yueyang Prefecture, the city was shrouded in the clouds of war. On the seventeenth day of the second month of the sixth year of Hongdao, on the official road to Shaoyang Prefecture within the Shuangfeng County of Hengyang Prefecture, dust swirled and banners clouded the sky. This place was nearing Shaoyang Prefecture, close to Wuling Prefecture, and even nearer to Changsha Prefecture. It is indeed a border area of the four prefectures. In the past days, the Miao People frequently raided this place. Hengyang Prefecture also stationed a few thousand militiamen here to guard the territory. Many battles took place between the two sides here, and coupled with local bandits, it was indeed a chaotic area. Hence, upon reaching this location, Lu Yuan sent out reconnaissance cavalry in all directions, investigating the nearby area day and night, wary of bandits¡¯ surprise attacks. However, evidently, his careful precautions were in vain. The local Miao People and bandits had long heard of the news that several hundred thousand troops would be passing through; they had scattered before Lu Yuan¡¯s army even arrived. The civilian group officials who were stationed were ready with provisions to reward the troops. As soon as the army arrived, they mobilized the citizens, providing food and drink to welcome the royal teacher. So the journey was uneventful, apart from the scouts capturing some Miao People and bandits who were too late to escape. The army did not experience any fighting. This state of affairs made Lu Yuan feel relieved, yet also unsubstantial. He felt like he had thrown a punch into cotton, the sensation of missing his target. Fortunately, he was still within the territory of Hengyang Prefecture, under the emperor¡¯s control. Sense he was still some distance from Wuling Prefecture and Shaoyang Prefecture, not encountering Miao People was within reason. Therefore, he wasn¡¯t too disappointed. Even though Lu Yuan felt something was off, from the perspective of others, the army¡¯s departure was filled with impressive might. Inside the Central Army¡¯s troop carriage, customarily luxurious for the chief command, Lu Yuan closed the window and diverted his gaze from outside. Just as he turned back, an elderly man with white hair stood before him, beaming, ¡°General, your display of elite troops terrifies Dongting. The Five Poisons Miao People will surely flee in terror. This time, you may wipe them out, restoring peace to the counties. Your achievements will be unparalleled among generals.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but shake his head humbly, replying, ¡°Your praises are unwarranted, sir. Although there are many soldiers in my command, none of them could be called elite. It¡¯s just enough to intimidate the Miao People, if faced against a truly elite army, we would fall short.¡± The white-haired old man standing before him was Grandmaster Yan Wangqiu, the current national teacher who came from Southsea. Since the arrival of this old lord, Lu Yuan had him ride in the same carriage each day. At night, he arranged for the old lord¡¯s tent to be positioned within ten feet of his own. It could be said that he always kept the old lord close. Having such a guard produced evident results. With such a powerful bodyguard around, Lu Yuan felt much safer sleeping every day. Since returning from the Inescapable Meeting, he had had several peaceful nights of sleep and was finally able to relax. Relieved of his worries, his state of mind unexpectedly made some breakthroughs. During these days, he made noticeable progress in his understanding of the martial arts external body. His gains were considerable. Given these benefits, Lu Yuan became increasingly kind and friendly towards Yan Wangqiu. And his benevolence was naturally perceived by the old lord. Befriending a rising star in the military court was undeniably beneficial for the Southsea Sect, which was siding with the imperial court and planning to establish its own country. Moreover, upon his arrival, Yan Wangqiu had learned from Shangguan Ming that this Pingxi General, who ruled the southern territory of Dongting, was one of the ten grandmasters planned by the court, currently facing the threshold of breaking through the Innate. In some ways, the two of them could be considered allies. Given these relationships, Yan Wangqiu did not resist Lu Yuan¡¯s closeness in recent days and responded with enthusiasm. At times, he would even actively guide Lu Yuan, teaching him some Innate Requirements, thereby creating a good relationship. As such, their relationship rapidly escalated. While they couldn¡¯t be called close friends, at least, on the surface, they could be regarded as good friends. ¡°Elite soldiers in the world are all built through battles. Even if your troops lack elites now, with a few battles in the upcoming campaign against the Miao, experience will weed out the weak and retain the strong to forge elite soldiers,¡± Yan Wangqiu, stroking his beard, said with a touch of flattery towards the extremely young Lu Yuan. Although he, being a well-known, hundred-year-old grandmaster, had individual martial power that far surpassed the Pingxi General¡¯s. On the one hand, Yan Wangqiu was getting older, with just a few years left to live. On the other hand, Lu Yuan¡¯s strength was not weak at all. Whether considering his peak first-rate cultivation or his impending breakthrough into the Innate, either one was enough to be taken seriously by any grandmaster. Lastly, Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t a simple martial artist, but a chieftain leading armies into battles to control territories. As of now, he could summon an elite army of two hundred thousand men with a single command. Although most of the two hundred thousand men were civilian militiamen, the ability to rally so many people demonstrated his strength.. Chapter 308 - Chapter 308: Chapter 181: The Holy Woman’s Assassination 2 Chapter 308: Chapter 181: The Holy Woman¡¯s Assassination 2 Translator: 549690339 In any case, Yan Wangqiu thought that even with the influence of the Nanhai Sect in South Sea Prefecture, even if there were tens of thousands of disciples, if they really tried to raise an army, they could only muster a force of about 100,000 people. And in terms of strength, this kind of force might not be as strong as Lu Yuan¡¯s current troops. So, as Yan Wangqiu said earlier, Lu Yuan¡¯s deployment of troops and his ability to shock Dongting was not boasting. Being able to raise 200,000 troops was truly terrifying without a doubt. Anyway. the heart of this old master was somewhat scared. So at this time, Yan Wangqiu didn¡¯t dare to underestimate the Pingxi General, who was less powerful than himself, treating him as an equal and even sometimes humbling himself, not daring to offend. There was no other reason. He was old and had only a few years to live, while Lu Yuan had a boundless future and was not someone an old man like him, who was in the twilight of his life, could afford to offend. ¡°War is cruel, and soldiers face danger. My soldiers all have wives, children, fathers, and mothers. If they die in battle, it is no doubt a great tragedy for their parents to lose a child, for their wives to lose a husband, and for their children to lose a father. This is all great sadness in the human world. If there could be fewer wars and more peace in the land, that would be my true wish.¡± Lu Yuan said sincerely. To cultivate the Taiping Dao Book, the primary requirement is the population. For him, the people under his governance are the population, which contributes to his Qi Luck and Destiny. The same goes for the troops under his command. Hence, whether it was the public or the troops, it was best if there were fewer casualties. ¡°I hadn¡¯t expected the general to have such a kind heart.¡± Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s words, a look of respect appeared on Yan Wangqiu¡¯s face. In today¡¯s chaotic times, military leaders everywhere are cruel to the people, forcibly recruiting and taking resources without regard for the lives of the people. As he travelled and especially after seeing the reconstruction and development of Luyang Prefecture, Yan Wangqiu¡¯s impression of Lu Yuan had changed greatly. Being able to rebuild a war-torn area into a peaceful haven, not to mention his superior ability to govern compared to many other military leaders. Now that he heard Lu Yuan reveal some of his thoughts, he couldn¡¯t help but be moved. As an Inborn Grandmaster, Yan Wangqiu¡¯s senses and insights were extremely sharp, and he could naturally tell that Lu Yuan¡¯s words were genuine and not a show. Yan Wangqiu was trying to arrange for his descendants, plan for their future, and naturally valued someone as kind and generous as Lu Yuan even more. ¡®Lu Pingxi is so kind-hearted. If I can forge a good relationship with him and even arrange the fiefdom granted by the court to be close to him, then with such a kind and generous ruler as a neighbor, my foundation may be much more stable.¡¯ Thinking this in his heart, Yan Wangqiu looked at Lu Yuan and kindly reminded him, ¡°General, it is compassionate to care for the lives of the soldiers, but even in compassion, there is a distinction between small kindness and great kindness. Considering the lives of the soldiers is small kindness. Seeking peace for a region and stability for the world is great kindness. Now that the Miao People are causing chaos and colluding with enemy countries, causing trouble in the world, if we do not eradicate them with thunderous might, I fear there will never be peace in the world. Now is the time to use troops, General, please don¡¯t be lenient with the Miao People for the sake of not wanting to sacrifice the lives of the soldiers.¡± As a senior veteran from Jianghu, Yan Wangqiu had seen many cases where a moment of leniency left a lasting disaster. At this time, he naturally didn¡¯t want to see Lu Yuan repeat the same mistakes. However, he was clearly overthinking it. ¡°Thank you for pointing that out, Old Master.¡± Lu Yuan humbly accepted Yan Wangqiu¡¯s well-meaning advice and then said, ¡°I know that being merciful ¡°Thank you for pointing that out, Old Master.¡± Lu Yuan humbly accepted Yan Wangqiu¡¯s well-meaning advice and then said, ¡°I know that being merciful cannot command the army, and I won¡¯t hesitate in my heart. It¡¯s a matter of life and death on the battlefield, and everything depends on fate, which is natural. I have been a general for many years and have experienced this long ago. I was just moved by the moment.¡± Although he cared about the population, it didn¡¯t mean that he was soft-hearted. If it was really necessary to use human lives to fill the gap, Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t hesitate to do so to achieve victory in the war. Back then, he was able to put an end to the Seven Star Sect¡¯s rebellion by employing the First Camp for successive attacks on cities and forts. Now, he could naturally use the lives of soldiers and militias to seize the fruit of victory against the Miao People. On this point, Lu Yuan was crystal clear. Better a short sharp pain than a long-drawn-out agony, better a brief chaos than a prolonged one. If the Five Poisons Sect and the Miao People were not pacified and the root cause of the chaos was not eliminated, Dongting Prefecture would never have peace, and the local people would never feel safe to produce. For the sake of overall peace and a long-lasting future, a momentary sacrifice was bearable. And for Lu Yuan, he was only trying to achieve his small selfish goal while accomplishing the greater good and justice. ¡°Well said.¡¯ Seeing that Lu Yuan was willing to listen to advice, Yan Wangqiu couldn¡¯t help but clap and laugh, ¡°The general knows when to advance and retreat, and understands the greater good; there is no¡­¡± As the old master was talking, his expression suddenly changed, and a terrifying aura erupted from his body. A streak of deep blue seawater appeared around them, protecting the interior of the carriage. Lu Yuan also reacted quickly. The moment Yan Wangqiu¡¯s aura erupted, his long-established composure made him instantly aware that they were under attack. So, the increasingly perfected Red Sun Qi field emerged from his body, tightly covering him and protecting him. At the same time they prepared their defenses, there was a loud bang, and a tremendous force fell from the roof, instantly turning the entire carriage into fragments.. Chapter 309 - Chapter 309: Chapter 181: The Saintess Assassination_3 Chapter 309: Chapter 181: The Saintess Assassination_3 Translator: 549690339 After that, a humming sound echoed between heaven and earth, and a huge shock wave emanated from the shattered vehicle in all directions. Smoke and dust rolled, and the wind roared. When the smoke cleared, Lu Yuan saw a rainbow-colored smoke coming from all directions, rolling towards himself and Yan Wangqiu. On the side, there were also turbulent waves of water, now forming a circle, layer upon layer, blocking the colorful smoke outside. No matter how turbulent the colorful smoke was, it could not overcome the sea water. At this moment, a beautiful figure appeared in front of them from behind the colorful smoke. ¡°Lan Cai¡¯er!¡± Gazing at the woman¡¯s figure, Lu Yuan almost instantly recognized her identity. At this moment, an Inborn Grandmaster capable of attacking him with such a distinctive technique could only be the Saintess of the Five Poisons Sect. ¡°Lu Yuan!¡± Lan Cai¡¯er, hiding in the colorful smoke, stared at the red figure protected by layers of sea water in front, and said through gritted teeth: ¡°I didn¡¯t expect the Yue People¡¯s Court to value you so much that they even sent an Inborn Grandmaster to protect you. Good! Very good!¡± The meticulously planned assassination was unexpectedly hit by such a variable, and Lan Caver¡¯s heart was filled with hatred. She glared at the white-haired old man ahead who was calmly manifesting his martial arts external body and setting up multiple layers of out-facing sea water, scolding: ¡°Yan Wangqiu, are you not ashamed of yourself for being an old man in Jianghu and being reduced to acting as a guard for a junior? You were once a dignified Grandmaster.¡± However, in the face of these taunts, Yan Wangqiu¡¯s expression did not waver at all. Having already chosen to side with the court, he had long anticipated some of the scolding from Jianghu. But what did it matter compared to the continuation of his sect¡¯s younger generation? Just like the young woman of the Five Poisons Sect, in front of them now could only scold a few times, and what else could she do? ¡°Monster, don¡¯t be so wild with your words. If you can break my Ten Thousand Waves Profound Intent and destroy my external body, come and kill me.¡± Yan Wangqiu stared coldly at Lan Cai¡¯er, and said indifferently, ¡°If you can¡¯t break it, then today, don¡¯t even think about leaving.¡± As he spoke, he looked around. The nearby guards and soldiers had finally recovered from the shock of the assassination attempt on the commander. A large number of Lu Yuan¡¯s personal guards had already surrounded them from all sides. At this moment, he and Lu Yuan were in the midst of the army¡¯s protection. If they continued to hold out until the nearby soldiers surrounded them, even if Lan Cai¡¯er was an Inborn Grandmaster, she would not be able to escape today. Lan Cai¡¯er naturally noticed this too. As she looked at the rapidly approaching personal guards, a murderous intent flickered in her eyes as she shouted, ¡°Court dogs, die!¡± With her words, the colorful smoke that had been constantly hitting the sea water was swept away by the pneumatic gust, quickly spreading outwards. The personal guard soldiers who had been rushing toward the inner circle were instantly mowed down by the poison smoke, unable to fight back at all, and were killed on the spot. The gap between the common soldiers and the Inborn Grandmaster was so vast. In just a breath¡¯s time, hundreds of personal guards were killed. The soldiers who were rushing over were frightened by this sight. Some of them even stopped their advance, not daring to go any further. Facing this godlike monster woman, the ordinary soldiers had no idea how to deal with her. Seeing that his soldiers were hesitating, Lu Yuan concentrated his Inner Strength and ordered in an amplified voice, ¡°All soldiers, listen to my command! Surround this area in formation, summon strong bows and crossbows, and shoot down this monster woman!¡± This woman of the Five Poisons Sect had actually dared to assassinate him. And with Yan Wangqiu, the Old Lord by his side, and thousands of soldiers accompanying him. Taking advantage of this godsent opportunity, Lu Yuan was determined to capture this woman, besiege her here, and remove the great threat in his heart. At this moment, even at the cost of thousands of lives, he must not let her escape.. Chapter 310 - Chapter 310: Chapter 182: Severely Wounded and Escaped Chapter 310: Chapter 182: Severely Wounded and Escaped Translator: 549690339 Upon receiving Lu Yuan¡¯s order, the surrounding personal guards quickly reacted and did not rashly rush forward anymore. Instead, they lined up according to their normal training, on all four sides, pulling out the powerful bows and crossbows they carried on their backs. They formed several lines of attack, each aiming at Lan Cai¡¯er. ¡°Fire!¡± At the command of the outer personal guard officers, wave after wave of black arrow showers came flying toward Lan Cai¡¯er, reminiscent of a rainstorm. Lu Yuan¡¯s personal guards were all carefully selected. The primary requirement during the selection was proficiency in archery. Basically, within a hundred steps, precision was not insisted upon, but hitting the target four or five times out of ten was a minimum requirement. After being selected as personal guards, Lu Yuan provided them with abundant meat and medicine, teaching them some basic martial arts. As a result, each of them primarily developed some Inner Strength, and each of them knew one or two martial arts skills. Such an army composed of martial artists may not fare well in close combat against top-tier grandmasters, let alone Inborn Grandmasters. However, at long ranges, equipped with powerful bows and crossbows and assisted by inner strength- ¨C even an Inborn Grandmaster would not dare to claim they could come out unscathed against hundreds and thousands of archers. This was precisely the situation now. Facing an arrow shower coming from all directions, each projectile whistling through the air with sheer force, even Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s expression changed slightly. She gritted her silver teeth and waved her hands, and large swaths of colorful smoke formed a protective circle around her like a ribbon. This colorful smoke was made of her Innate zhenqi. If she wished, it could harden as formidable as Yan Wanqiu¡¯s sea-shaped defensive aura, forming an unbreakable defense to fend off attacks from all directions. With the strength of an Inborn Grandmaster¡¯s Zhenqi and the control of Martial Dao True Intent, not just the average warriors without any ranks, even if a top-ranking expert exerted full power, they might not be able to penetrate it. However, the number of arrows was just too overwhelming. The personal guard under Lu Yuan was strictly trained daily and had a remarkable mastery of various military formations and arrow formations. Now, thousands of personal guards had spontaneously formed ten or so lines, each with three or four lines releasing arrows in a single volley. Five or six hundred arrows flew out, swapping and rotating, almost without rest. A single arrow may have limited power, but when the number increases to five or six hundred, and with a continuous attack, it becomes terrifying. You could see each arrow carrying inner strength, ricocheting off the zhenqi ribbon with a clattering sound, exploding upon impact, and turning into clouds of dust. Under such intense and dense collision, the originally floating zhenqi ribbon began to shake and thin rapidly. This ribbon was maintained by zhenqi and was Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s outward manifestation. But now, under the simultaneous attack of hundreds of martial artists, just defending against these required her to expend a considerable amount of zhenqi. Although the zhenqi of an Inborn Grandmaster, regardless of its quality or quantity, is far superior to that of warriors below the Inborn level- such superiority has its limits. Being drained by hundreds of martial artists simultaneously, even an Inborn Grandmaster could not bear it. And at this moment, it is not just hundreds of martial artists. One wave of arrows falls, followed by the second wave, the third wave, the fifth wave, the tenth wave, even hundreds of waves¡­ They were relentless and endless. By the time she had barely withstood the fifth wave of arrows, Lan Cai¡¯er was already in a predicament. But she didn¡¯t dare to withdraw the protective aura. Because at this time, all around her, observers were everywhere. If she withdrew her protective aura, then thousands of arrows would aim directly at her body. Seeing the situation becoming increasingly perilous, Lan Cai¡¯er begrudgingly stared at Lu Yuan, who was still hiding under the protection of Yan Wanqiu, and yelled, ¡°Lu, if you have the guts then come out and fight me one-on-one. Are you, the Pingxi General, afraid of facing a young woman?¡± However, Lu Yuan paid no attention to her taunts. He¡¯s joking. At this moment, the situation was extremely favorable for him. He would be a fool to venture out and duel with an Inborn Grandmaster. And a one-on-one duel? What an outdated and barbaric mindset. He, the illustrious Pingxi General, commanding countless soldiers, wouldn¡¯t engage in a close combat with a rebel if his soldiers were still alive. So Lu Yuan didn¡¯t even bother responding to Lan Cai¡¯er. He just focused on transmitting orders with his mental power, loudly instructing, ¡°Li Liang, gather the armored warriors for me, seal all directions, we must not let this woman escape. Duan Yi, bring more archers here. Aim at this monster woman and shoot her to death for me. Everyone else, bring the front and rear armies over quickly. This woman is formidable, not an ordinary enemy, we must surround her with a large army.¡± As the orders were issued one by one, the disciples and officers under Lu Yuan¡¯s command began to deploy quickly. And as the Chapter 311 - Chapter 311: Chapter 182 Seriously Injured and Escaping_2 Chapter 311: Chapter 182 Seriously Injured and Escaping_2 Translator: 549690339 By the time these people arrived, even the powerful Saintess of the Five Poison Sect would succumb to the onslaught of tens of thousands of soldiers and die here today. Yan Wangqiu was a veteran Jianghu. At this moment, he noticed the changing situation. Seeing Lan Cai¡¯er busy fighting him while also fending off the arrow formation, he decided not to focus on defense alone and began to counterattack. His waves changed from their previous steady state, transforming into massive sea waves that surged towards Lan Cai¡¯er. How mighty was the True Qi of an Inborn Grandmaster who had cultivated for a hundred years? Lan Cai¡¯er felt it now. As she faced the fierce onslaught from the old lord Yan Wangqiu, her outer layer of colorful mist was almost instantly shattered. Fortunately, in the nick of time, she urgently withdrew her True Qi, rearranging two more layers of mist to barely block the oncoming waves. But as her True Qi was redistributed here, it was naturally diminished elsewhere. The True Qi ribbons in other directions weakened dramatically after a significant portion was urgently relocated. After facing several more rounds of arrow attacks, the already deteriorated True Qi ribbons could no longer hold up. With countless ¡°thuds,¡± one direction¡¯s ribbons finally shattered and could not support itself any longer. A dozen or so arrows with residual force flew towards Lan Cai¡¯er. However, before they even came close, she swung her fist, shattering them with a gust of wind. Yet, even so, faced with an open vulnerability in one direction, the Saintess had no strength left to remedy it. After all, she was still a newly promoted Grandmaster, and her True Qi accumulation was not abundant. Now, facing the consumption of thousands of inferior martial artists and the entanglement of a century-old Grandmaster, the drawbacks of insufficient True Qi became apparent. She had only been fighting for half an hour, and she was already struggling to hold on. Lan Cai¡¯er knew the situation was dire, looking at the reinforcements gradually approaching and slowly forming their battle array. She glanced at Yan Wangqiu, who had once again launched a new round of attacks after his previous one was unsuccessful. She also saw another volley of arrows flying towards her. She Imew that it was impossible to assassinate this traitorous general today. With resentment, Lan Cai¡¯er glared at Lu Yuan before making up her mind, turning around to flee: ¡°You dog of a general, I will kill you someday!¡± Right now, the surrounding soldiers were gathering in ever-increasing numbers. If she didn¡¯t take advantage of the fact that they hadn¡¯t fully assembled, and the surrounding military formation hadn¡¯t completely sealed off this place, she would not be able to escape later. As the Saintess of the Five Poison Sect, she was burdened with the great mission of restoring the Miao People; she couldn¡¯t die here. Moreover, as a Grandmaster under thirty years old, Lan Cai¡¯er had a boundless future ahead. She still had hundreds of years to live and didn¡¯t want to die in such a place. So at this moment, when her assassination attempt failed, she no longer insisted but instead decided to retreat. However, others wouldn¡¯t let her leave so easily. ¡°Stop her!¡± Seeing Lan Cai¡¯er turning to flee, Lu Yuan was furious and immediately issued orders. Then, he dug out his concealed strong bow from the ruins, aimed at Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s fleeing figure, and fired three arrows in a chain. The three arrows, engulfed in scorching flames, tore through the void like three heavenly fires. These three arrows caught up to Lan Cai¡¯er, who had escaped over a dozen yards, in an instant. Sensing the tremendous threat behind her, The Saintess of the Five Poisons instinctively performed an agile mid-air flip to narrowly avoid two of the arrows. Unable to avoid the third arrow completely, she used the colorful ribbon surrounding her to wrap around it instead. But the moment the two made contact, the Red Sun True Intent contained within the arrow by Lu Yuan instantly erupted. A scorching blaze exploded in mid-air, turning the surrounding area into a sea of fire. Having studied the martial arts external body for half a year, Lu Yuan now possessed profound knowledge of this path. Although he had not yet reached the requirement for breaking through to the Innate realm, he was infinitely close. He had also studied some techniques to temporarily imbue his Martial Dao True Intent into arrows, achieving a long-range attack effect. Now, Lan Cai Er was ¡°fortunate¡± enough to be the first person to experience this technique. Needless to say, the experience was undoubtedly intense. The explosion of the arrow, which was nearly at the power level of an Inborn Grandmaster, instantly inflicted heavy damage to Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s True Qi ribbons, which had already been weakened numerous times. She was blown away by the fiery blast, but she managed to stabilize herself in the air after a few spins and continued to flee. But at this moment, another round of arrow rain came, blocking all directions with countless dense black spots, leaving no dead angles. Left with no choice, Lan Cai¡¯er selected a direction to charge head-on through the rain of arrows. After breaking through this blockade, she finally reached the edge of the battlefield. Several military formations surrounded the area, blocking her path. The soldiers inside the formations, though afraid seeing the monstrous woman approaching, still fought against her under the constraints of military law. However, just like the personal guards who wanted to circle around and kill Lan Cai¡¯er earlier, these charging soldiers collapsed one after another before they even got close, engulfed by the colorful smoke.. Chapter 312 - Chapter 312: Chapter 182 Seriously Injured and Escaping_3 Chapter 312: Chapter 182 Seriously Injured and Escaping_3 Translator: 549690339 In just a short moment of breath, hundreds more fell to their deaths. Lan Cai¡¯er plunged into the army formation without bothering with the ordinary soldiers, aiming in one direction and rushing forward with all her might. Along the way, any soldier who tried to stop her had their lives snatched away by the colorful smoke. Five Poison Sect¡¯s Ten Thousand Poison True Qi was best suited for group battles. Previously, Lan Cai¡¯er was suppressed by an attack from far away, giving her opponents the advantage. At this moment, amongst the crowd, she was like a fish in water, unstoppable in her advancement. In just a short span of a dozen breaths, she had broken through three army formations, killing hundreds of soldiers and reaching the edge of the battlefield. However, killing so many people at once took its toll on the Ten Thousand Poison True Qi. Added to her constant weakening before, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s colorful smoke around her body had dimmed to its extreme, turning transparent. Even the smoke band around her body had become tattered and seemed ready to shatter at any moment. Clearly, under the continuous consumption of the fierce battles, the Holy Maiden¡¯s True Qi had been almost depleted and could barely maintain her anymore. However, at this moment, there were not many imperial soldiers around her, which gave her a slight sense of relief. But this little relaxation didn¡¯t last long. When Lan Cai¡¯er fled just now, Yan Wangqiu had reacted swiftly and chased after her immediately. However, during the chase, he saw that Lu Yuan and the many soldiers and officers had already intercepted Lan Cai¡¯er, so he didn¡¯t continue to take action. Instead, he hid on the side, quietly waiting for an opportunity. Now, seeing that Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s True Qi was exhausted, he knew that the opportunity he had been waiting for had arrived. Thus, seeing Lan Cai¡¯er about to escape from the encirclement, Yan Wangqiu didn¡¯t hesitate any longer and immediately flew out from the soldiers¡¯ crowd, raising his hand for a sharp sword strike, assassinating her with roaring waves. An assassination attempt by an Inborn Grandmaster was naturally extraordinary in its power. The rich killing intent almost caused the air to stagnate. Lan Cai¡¯er felt the fatally perilous threat almost instantly. Without even thinking, she raised her hand and a red light flew out, while the remaining True Qi in her body was desperately gathered in front of her, rushing towards the incoming sword. Yan Wangqiu¡¯s flying immortal sword arrived in front of Lan Cai¡¯er in an instant. But before he could kill her with a single sword strike, he suddenly felt a wave of danger. Seeing the red light coming before his eyes, he immediately sensed a huge threat and his expression slightly changed. The Old Lord didn¡¯t dare to be careless, so he converged his True Qi to deal with the red light. However, his long sword¡¯s momentum didn¡¯t decrease, and still stabbed towards Lan Cai¡¯er. However, this slight delay gave Lan Cai Er a chance to catch her breath, rendering the originally fatal sword ineffective. As a result, the Holy Maiden swayed a little to avoid the sword that was originally aimed at her chest. The sword instead passed through her shoulder, drawing a spray of blood. Although it was a serious injury, her life was ultimately saved. On the other hand, Yan Wangqiu, who had stabbed Lan Cai¡¯er, couldn¡¯t continue the attack. It turned out that the red light that flew towards him actually had the ability to consume True Qi. Yan Wangqiu¡¯s True Qi, originally used for blocking, was effortlessly pierced by the red light, and then it came charging towards him. It was only at this moment that he could finally see that the red light was actually a hair-thin insect. This insect¡¯s origins were unknown, but not only could it fly, it wasn¡¯t affected by True Qi and was extremely fast. In the blink of an eye, it was in front of Yan Wangqiu. Such a variable instantly terrified him. At this moment, he couldn¡¯t care less about continuing to assassinate Lan Cai¡¯er, focusing all his energy on dealing with the red light insect. However, Yan Wangqiu had learned from the previous encounter and didn¡¯t use his Inner Strength to block directly. Instead, he severed his sleeve and reinforced it with True Qi, turning it into countless chaotic blades, slashing towards the insect. As he expected, facing a direct physical attack, the insect no longer dared to be as arrogant as before. Instead, it evaded in fear. However, after only a few attempts to dodge, it was found to have a flaw by Yan Wangqiu. Having been impaled by the blades, it was minced into several segments. After eliminating the insect, the Old Lord turned his head to look in front of him. At this point, the figure of the Five Poison Demoness was long gone, and it was unknown where she had escaped to. ¡°Demoness, damnable!¡± Thinking that as a distinguished Old Lord, he still let a younger generation escape under such advantageous circumstances, Yan Wangqiu¡¯s face turned red with anger, and he cursed angrily. However, after cursing for a while, since the person was gone, there was no way for him to catch her again. Helpless, he could only return to report to Lu Yuan. ¡°This old man is ashamed, actually being fooled by a junior.¡± Yan Wangqiu immediately apologized upon seeing Lu Yuan: ¡°I failed the trust of General this time.¡± Lu Yuan didn¡¯t expect that Lan Cai¡¯er could escape even at this point. However, he had seen Yan Wangqiu¡¯s exchange with her earlier, so he knew that it wasn¡¯t the Old Lord¡¯s fault. Moreover, the opponent was an Inborn Grandmaster and a national teacher, with rank and status equal to his own. This time, he entered his army only with orders to protect him, and Lu Yuan had no control over him. Therefore, even though he was somewhat disappointed with the Old Lord, he still pacified him, ¡°The Old Lord has done his best. The Demoness is cunning, and the Five Poison Sect is adept at using Gu insects, which allowed her to escape. Although she managed to escape surprisingly this time, let¡¯s make preparations for the next time and besiege her again.¡± However, although he said this, when Lu Yuan thought of the many subordinates killed by Lan Cai¡¯er just now, his heart still bled. It was only a brief exchange, not even half a day¡¯s time. But the soldiers who died in the hands of Lan Cai¡¯er had already reached seven or eight hundred. Among those seven or eight hundred, nearly half were Lu Yuan¡¯s personal guards. Losing so many elite soldiers at once, how could he not be heartbroken? Yan Wangqiu also knew that he was in the wrong, so seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s depressed expression, he hurried to comfort, ¡°General, although I failed to kill that Demoness, she was injured by my sword containing Ten Thousand Waves Profound Intent. With such a heavy injury, she will not make a full recovery in a year and a half. This time in the battle, we can rest assured that their Grandmaster will not take action.¡± For a Grandmaster, ordinary flesh and blood injuries were not a big deal. With a Grandmaster¡¯s Inner Strength and vitality, it would take only some time to heal. However, if the injury was inflicted with Martial Dao True Intent, even Grandmasters would not be able to heal until the Martial Dao within their wounds was dispelled. Yan Wangqiu, a hundred-year-old Grandmaster, had condensed his Ten Thousand Waves Profound Intent to its purest form. He considered that, with the Demoness¡¯ cultivation, it would take at least a year and a half for her to dispel his True Intent. This was the confidence of an Old Lord. Chapter 313 - Chapter 313: Chapter 183: Losing Courage at the Slightest Breeze Chapter 313: Chapter 183: Losing Courage at the Slightest Breeze Translator: 549690339 ¡°If that¡¯s the case, letting this woman escape this time is not entirely a loss.¡± Upon hearing Yan Wangqiu¡¯s words, Lu Yuan¡¯s face looked slightly better. Although he regretted not being able to kill Lan Cai¡¯er, after all, she was an Inborn Grandmaster, and it was not easy to kill her, which was expected. However, if their side suffered heavy injuries and could not participate in this battle, then at least there would be some gains from this encounter. With one less Inborn Grandmaster on the side of the Five Poison Sect and Miao People, and with Old Lord Yan Wangqiu still on their side, the balance of power would virtually shift by two Inborn Grandmasters. Perhaps there was really hope in suppressing the Miao People this time. Thinking of this, Lu Yuan¡¯s heart warmed a little, and seeing the generals gathering around, he said, ¡°The Monster woman has escaped, but she has suffered heavy injuries. The Five Poison Sect has lost the protection of its Inborn Grandmaster. You all should immediately reorganize your units, treat the wounded, collect the corpses of the soldiers, and then continue marching. This battle, I will surely suppress the Miao thieves.¡± Lu Yuan said decisively. He would not let such an exceptional opportunity slip through his fingers now. ¡°Yes.¡± The surrounding officers heard the order, saluted immediately, and then left to prepare. Afterward, Lu Yuan and Yan Wangqiu got on the newly prepared carriage and continued to lead the army. The attack just now was really sudden. Just now, if it hadn¡¯t been for Yan Wangqiu¡¯s early warning, he wouldn¡¯t even have noticed the assassination attempt. It was really difficult to detect an Inborn Grandmaster who is hidden and not taking the initiative to act. This made Lu Yuan deeply feel the danger and horror of Inborn Grandmasters. He also deeply understood how fortunate and safe it was to have an Inborn Grandmaster serving as his bodyguard. Therefore, after such an experience, he came to regard Yan Wangqiu even more highly. He¡¯d already decided in his heart that, during this battle, he must not be more than ten feet away from him at any time. Otherwise, he would feel too insecure. It was precisely because of this that he did not blame Yan Wangqiu for his mistake just now, but tried to comfort him instead. He couldn¡¯t help it; he still had to rely on Yan Wangqiu to protect his life in the future! At this time, offending him would be like playing with his own life, which Lu Yuan, not being stupid, would never do. The Ten Thousand Poison True Qi was indeed terrifying. The smoke made by it could kill ordinary soldiers with just a single breath. So although Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s attack was fierce, most of the casualties were caused by direct death, and there were not many wounded. Aside from a dozen lucky ones who narrowly escaped death, most were corpses. After leaving a part of the army to collect the corpses, bury them on site, and arrange for the treatment of the wounded, the army quickly reassembled and continued to march. Lan Cai¡¯er had been reckless in attempting to assassinate Lu Yuan without knowing the details, resulting in her own serious injury and escape. Seeing as the opponent had created an opening that had left their own top-level strength in a dire situation, Lu Yuan naturally wanted to capitalize on it and repay them with a huge gift. He had almost been assassinated, so it was only fitting to seek revenge for such great hatred. Otherwise, all his years of experience would have been for nothing. Now was the time to kill as many Miao People and seize as much territory as possible before Lan Cai¡¯er recovered from her injuries. If they didn¡¯t make good use of this time, they wouldn¡¯t be doing justice to the generous gift that was given to them. Now was the time to seize every moment. ¡­ Just as Lu Yuan was preparing his troops and marching swiftly, After escaping the battlefield, Lan Cai¡¯er hastily treated her wounds and hurried back in spite of the fatigue she felt in her body. Just as Yan Wangqiu had said, the Five Poison Sect Saintess had been severely injured by his Ten Thousand Waves Profound Intent. Without at least a year and a half, it would be impossible for her to recover. The reason why Lan Cai¡¯er was able to estimate the recovery time so accurately was because she had been through this before. Last time, she and Li Xiong cooperated in assassinating Dongting¡¯s Wucheng Marquis Li Gui and both of them were in the early stages of the Inborn realm. Although they had the upper hand in that assassination, they were both severely injured after fighting against the well-established Grandmaster Li Gui. So after the assassination, they both rushed back to recover and dared not venture out again. That time, it took Lan Cai¡¯er a full year to recover, and it took her another half-year to regain her vitality. A single deadly blow from a Grandmaster had left her in such a state. This time, the attack by Yan Wangqiu, whose cultivation was even higher than Li Gui, had caused even more severe injuries to Lan Cai¡¯er than last time. ¡®I¡¯ve suffered a great loss this time.¡¯ As she rushed on her way, Lan Cai¡¯er stared at the wound on her left shoulder, her heart filled with intense frustration. She felt it would take her at least a year to recover to the point where she could fight normally again, and another half a year to fully heal. It would take yet another half-year to regain her vitality. But looking at the current situation, the Five Poison Sect was in imminent danger, and the survival of the Miao People hung in the balance. Would the court and Lu Yuan give the Five Poison Sect two years? Therefore, fighting despite being injured was already an inevitable matter. The only question was how much time her enemies would give her to recover from her injuries. Before she could recover from her injuries and fight again, the Five Poison Sect would have to strategically retreat and buy time. Chapter 314 - Chapter 314: Chapter 183: Losing Courage at the Slightest Breeze_2 Chapter 314: Chapter 183: Losing Courage at the Slightest Breeze_2 Translator: 549690339 With that thought in mind, Lan Cai¡¯er finally arrived in Shao Yangfu¡¯s Xinhua County after a full day¡¯s hurried journey. Previously, when Lan Zhaoyun led his troops to attack Shaoyang Prefecture from both south and north, he managed to conquer three counties in the north within half a year, threatening Shaoyang Prefecture City itself. Unfortunately, Shaoyang Prefecture City was too well defended. Within the city, there were tens of thousands of soldiers brought by Zhou Qing, as well as another ten thousand local militia assisting. In addition to Zhou Qing, who had thoroughly assimilated Lu Yuan¡¯s seal of reliability, he ignored Lan Zhaoyun¡¯s provocations and refused to sortie out of the city for battle, regardless of any insults or challenges thrown his way. Hence, even though Lan Zhaoyun launched several fierce attacks over the months, sacrificing tens of thousands of men in the process, the city still remained impenetrable. In the contrary, he himself suffered great losses in troops and morale. The Miao People¡¯s militia, essentially a casual group, just wasn¡¯t cut out for hardcore warfare. Thus, in the end, they could only bitterly withdraw their troops after witnessing Lan Cai¡¯er successfully attacking the county city stealthily, and move north to reinforce their own daughter. However, even though they retreated, Lan Zhaoyun did not completely abandon the fruits of his southern expedition. The three counties in the north of Shaoyang Prefecture that they had conquered ¨C Xinhua, Xin Shao, and Dragon Return ¨C still had thousands of soldiers stationed in each county, leaving a total of ten thousand men behind. The elder who was responsible for this area¡¯s defense was Bai Shu Xuan, who had been newly promoted to be in charge of the area around Shaoyang Prefecture. Therefore, upon arriving in Xinhua County, Lan Cai¡¯er went straight to seek Bai Shu Xuan, who was stationed there. ¡°Sacred Maiden?¡± The moment Bai Shu Xuan saw Lan Cai¡¯er looking pale and covered in blood, he was instantly taken aback. He anxiously asked, ¡°Are you okay? Do you need medical attention? I can immediately provide you with medicine to heal your injuries.¡± ¡°There¡¯s no need.¡± Lan Cai¡¯er stopped Bai Shu Xuan¡¯s movement and went straight to the point: ¡°I attempted to assassinate Lu Yuan, but I didn¡¯t anticipate an Inborn Grandmaster being by his side. The assassination attempt failed, and I was surrounded by his large army. After a fierce fight, I managed to break away from the encirclement. However, I¡¯ve been severely injured, and I won¡¯t be able to make a move for at least a year and a half. Now that Lu Yuan has an Inborn Grandmaster on his side and there is no one to check his power, the ten thousand men under your command won¡¯t be able to hold the three northern counties of Shaoyang. That¡¯s why I¡¯m here to tell you to withdraw your troops. The Holy Sect is in grave danger, and we cannot afford to squander even a single soldier anymore. Withdraw your forces back to the main sect in Wuling Prefecture. When I¡¯ve recovered from my injuries, we¡¯ll deal with the Yue people.¡± For an Inborn Grandmaster, as long as the enemy¡¯s numbers don¡¯t exceed ten thousand, their entrance into the battlefield would be akin to a massacre. It¡¯s just like this time, when Lan Cai¡¯er escaped from the encirclement of Lu Yuan¡¯s thousands of troops effortlessly since Yan Wangqiu wasn¡¯t there to restrict her. If one adds troops to an Inborn Grandmaster, it¡¯s equivalent to adding wings to a tiger, with their power multiplying several times over. With an experienced Grandmaster like Yan Wangqiu, Lu Yuan just needs to use him as a Trojan horse and charge directly at the city. Regardless of how many men Bai Shu Xuan has, they would most likely be wiped out in a charge. Lan Cai¡¯er, leading a ragtag army, was able to stealthily attack and conquer the county city. This time, with a host of elite troops by his side, conquering places like Xinhua will be even simpler for Lu Yuan. This was exactly why Lan Cai¡¯er, even after being wounded, decided not to immediately return to the headquarters of the Five Poisons Sect for recuperation but instead came straight to Xinhua and urged Bai Shu Xuan and his men to withdraw. Her intent was to safeguard the remaining assets to the best of her ability. ¡°Yes.¡± Hearing that the Sacred Maiden had failed in her assassination attempt and fled back, Bai Shu Xuan¡¯s face instantly turned serious. He realized the severity of the situation and responded promptly, ¡°I¡¯ll assemble the troops and withdraw back to the sect right away.¡± ¡°Good, go on then.¡± Lan Cai¡¯er nodded, and then said, ¡°I will stay here for a few days. Once you¡¯ve gathered the troops, I will accompany you back to the sectarian capital. Gather your men quickly; Lu Yuan could come after us at any time. Don¡¯t delay.¡± Since the Five Poisons Sect initiated the rebellion, they¡¯ve been following Xi Shu¡¯s Li Xiong¡¯s example, seizing the opportunity to destroy several Jianghu sects within their territory, looting their historical assets to strengthen themselves. In the range of Jiuyi Prefecture in the south, there was a first-rate sect that was wiped out by them. The accumulated wealth of this sect, which included Divine Blood Variants and all kinds of elixirs, naturally made their way into the hands of the Five Poisons Sect. Thanks to these gains, the treasury of the Five Poisons Sect, which had been completely depleted in order to support Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s breakthrough to becoming an Inborn, had once again become replenished. Moreover, after the assassination of Li Gui, the Left and Right Protectors of the sect had both died in battle, causing severe losses among their top fighters. Therefore, after careful consideration, Lan Zhaoyun distributed the Divine Blood Elixir and Divine Blood Variants that they had seized, among the outstanding younger generation in the sect, in order to enhance their strength. Among them, Bai Shu Xuan was one of the beneficiaries. Including him, the Five Poisons Sect had newly promoted four first-rate fighters, filling the gaps left by the death of their Left and Right Protectors. However, as a result, the rewards gained from destroying that first-rate sectarian clan, as well as the final remaining treasury of the sect, were all completely squandered. Moreover, the expansionist aspirations of the Five Poisons Sect, had met with consecutive setbacks due to the crackdown of the royal court, as well as Lu Yuan¡¯s intervention. Their original plan of annihilating first-rate sects one by one and harvesting their wealth, had now been completely foiled. Therefore, for the Five Poisons Sect, Bai Shu Xuan and the other three first-rate fighters were the only high-end forces remaining. Anyone¡¯s death would be irreparable for the next few years. Taking into account the tens of thousands of troops following them, this large force was incredibly significant to the Five Poisons Sect in its present state. Hence, although Lan Cai¡¯er knew that staying could be dangerous, she still didn¡¯t want to leave. She wanted to stay and provide some more support, at least escorting them back to Wuling Prefecture. Chapter 315 - Chapter 315: Chapter 183: Losing Courage at the Slightest Breeze_3 Chapter 315: Chapter 183: Losing Courage at the Slightest Breeze_3 Translator: 549690339 Fortunately, Bai Shu Xuan did not disappoint her expectations. This local elder spent only half a day to gather up five thousand soldiers and horses in the city, then set fire to the local food and fodder storehouse. Under the protection of the Holy Woman, he led people to Xin Shao and Dragon Return counties. In the next two days, Lan Cai¡¯er and Bai Shu Xuan gathered another five thousand soldiers and horses from two other counties, additionally setting fire to two county storehouses, and then journeyed north towards Wuling Prefecture. Upon reaching Wuling Prefecture, their army did not rest. Instead, they gathered the defenders from two southern counties and retreated to the important city of Chenxi in the south of Wuling Prefecture. Here, they staked a stand with fifteen thousand soldiers and horses. However, these soldiers were still too few to withstand an enemy force of two hundred thousand. It was extremely challenging. Lan Cai¡¯er had personally attempted to assassinate Lu Yuan and had personally seen his grand army that was vast and boundless. So even though their claimed number of two hundred thousand might be exaggerated, they would still most likely have more than a hundred thousand men. With such a large army, ten times the number of the defenders of Chenxi, even with the help from Innate Master, it was too dangerous for Chenxi with only fifteen thousand soldiers, even with the presence of an expert like Bai Shu Xuan. Neither Lan Cai¡¯er nor Bai Shu Xuan felt confident about their defense. Especially the latter, who was already prepared for the possibility of dying in battle in order to repay the grace shown upon him by the Holy Sect. Fortunately, Lan Zhaoyun with his sixty thousand troops finally returned to Wuling Prefecture at this time. After receiving the news of his daughter¡¯s unsuccessful assassination attempt, and that she had been seriously injured, and that the southern part of Wuling Prefecture was in crisis, Sect Leader Lan was extremely anxious and urged his army day and night to retreat quickly towards the south. Luckily, each of the Miao People of the Five Poisons Sect was used to hardship, having come from difficult backgrounds. They were accustomed to the challenges of traveling across mountains and ridges. Although their combat effectiveness was not particularly high, their endurance and tolerance were extremely strong. So, even if they were pushed too hard, they bore their grievances and traveled day and night. Thus, after three days of non-stop travel, the army finally arrived in Chenxi. After arriving here and being reinforced by sixty thousand troops, Lan Cai¡¯er and Bai Shu Xuan finally relaxed. The Holy Woman quickly briefed her father on certain matters, explaining what she had learned about Lu Yuan when she tried to assassinate him, then she left with peace of mind to return to the Main Hall for recuperation. Her injuries were so severe this time that they had worsened by dragging them out for so long. If she didn¡¯t nurse them now, she really would damage her foundations. After sending his daughter off, Lan Zhaoyun, burdened with heavy concerns, began to arrange the defenses. He left the Left Protector and Bai Shu Xuan behind, and let them command forty thousand troops to station themselves in Chenxi County Town. Then, he took the remaining thirty-five thousand troops and retreated into the territory of Qianling County, where their headquarters was located. He planned to fortify their Old Nest there. As for Linyuan Prefecture City and other cities, he withdrew the defenders and gave them up. As a result, both Chenxi and Qianling counties each had forty thousand troops. Each city also had a top expert to guard them so that they could be prepared even for the sudden attack of an Inborn Grandmaster. Moreover, the two counties were less than a hundred miles apart. They could support and complement each other. If there were any issues on one side, the other side could come to support in timely fashion. Having arranged the defenses in this manner, Lan Zhaoyun finally felt a bit more at ease. Then he handed over the city defense affairs to the Right Protector, who had been urgently called back from the three prefectures in the south. Lan Zhaoyun himself returned to the Main Hall to see his daughter. Amid the fearful and uneasy atmosphere that Lu Yuan had stirred up among the Five Poison Sect in the north. On the 20th of February in the 6th year of Hongdao, Lu Yuan led his army into Shaoyang Prefecture, and then directed his troops north towards Xinhua County Town, which had already fallen to the Miao thieves. On the 22nd, the army arrived in Xinhua County. The Miao people had already abandoned the city, and the county was recaptured. On the 23rd, Lu Yuan divided his forces into two. He commanded his disciples to lead two forces of five thousand each separately to recapture Xin Shao and Dragon Return counties. On the 24th, word came from the two counties that the Miao thieves had fled and the county towns were recaptured. On the 25th, Zhou Qing, who had received the news from the south, led ten thousand soldiers from Shaoyang Prefecture City to meet up with his master. The master and disciple, who had been separated for more than half a year, finally met again. Both were extremely happy. ¡°Disciple pays respect to Master,¡± Zhou Qing immediately knelt in front of Lu Yuan upon seeing him. ¡°Get up.¡± Lu Yuan stepped forward, helped up his disciple, then examined him carefully and couldn¡¯t help but laugh, ¡°Not bad, not bad. In the past half a year, even though I have not been by your side, you did not neglect your martial arts. Your martial arts skills have improved, and your Inner Strength is steady. You can now attempt to cultivate the next bizarre meridian.¡± The intense trials of the past half year, especially the responsibility of handling military affairs alone, has led to a lot of progress in Zhou Qing¡¯s transformation. Not only does he seem more steady and mature now, his Cultivation has also greatly improved since last year. If only he had the Divine Blood Elixir now, he could reward his disciple with one, and his disciple would be able to break through a meridian immediately. ¡°It¡¯s all thanks to Master¡¯s good teaching. Without Master arranging for me to go through this trial, I would not have been able to grow as much as I have,¡± Zhou Qing was as respectful toward his master as always. ¡°You¡­ ¡± Lu Yuan, hearing these familiar words, couldn¡¯t help but shake his head and smile before saying, ¡°You came just at the right time. I have a significant mission for you in this campaign against the Miao thieves.¡± Zhou Qing, hearing this, immediately replied solemnly, ¡°Please command me, Master.¡± Lu Yuan said, ¡°According to the reports I have received from our scouts, the Miao People of Wuling Prefecture have all abandoned the prefectures and counties and have concentrated all of their troops in their strongholds Chenxi and Qianling. Both places now have forty thousand troops stationed each. Even with my sharp troops and even with the help of the Grandmaster, it¡¯ll be hard to capture them. Moreover, even if we can capture them, there will inevitably be tens of thousands of casualties.¡± Saying this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel frustrated. His main concern at the moment was that the population was insufficient. How could he waste soldiers just to get tens of thousands of people killed at Chenxi and Qianling cities? So, it¡¯s impossible for him to risk casualties and forcibly attack the cities. As the classic military strategy goes, the best strategy is to attack the enemy¡¯s plans, next is to attack their alliances, next is to attack their military, and last is to attack their cities. Though Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t strictly a military officer, he¡¯s been leading troops for years and had attacked many cities. He fully understood the horrors of siege warfare. At this time, of course, he wouldn¡¯t act rashly and attempt to do so. So, he continued, ¡°Therefore, I plan to let you command the militia soldiers in our army, recapture the counties and cities abandoned by the Miao thieves in a high-profile manner, while slowly advancing to Chenxi and Qianling, feigning an intention to move north. I plan to lead the elite troops, along with the Grandmaster, back to the south to launch a surprise attack on Jiuyi Prefecture.¡± The Miao People have troops either marching to Yangshan Prefecture, currently invading Luyang and fighting with Brother Sun, or have already stationed at the southern part of Shaoyang Prefecture to guard against our army. Now both Jiuyi and Lingling Prefectures are undefended as the Miao troops are deployed elsewhere. There¡¯s even a lack of troops to defend these places. If we can lead tens of thousands of elite troops to infiltrate, we¡¯ll quickly take over the rear of the Miao troops in the three southern prefectures. The Miao will then surely be defeated. Lu Yuan said with absolute certainty. Chapter 316 - Chapter 316: Chapter 184: Losing the Territory Again Chapter 316: Chapter 184: Losing the Territory Again Translator: 549690339 Previously, the Miao People of the Five Poisons Sect played a trick of openly repairing plank roads while secretly crossing Chen Cang. On the surface, Lan Zhaoyun led hundreds of thousands of troops, attacking Shaoyang Prefecture from the north and south, with the intention of eliminating it and establishing a north-south passage. In secret, Lan Cai¡¯er led 30,000 Miao soldiers in a sneak attack on Baling County town, catching the defenders off guard and capturing the city. Such a bloody example was right in front of their eyes. As an eyewitness to this scene, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but think of the enemy¡¯s cunning strategy when he saw the Five Poisons Sect, as stubborn as Shaoyang Prefecture was before, now hiding and not coming out. Anyway, he now had a large number of troops, with hundreds of thousands of soldiers and horses. The Miao people had just lost their top-level strength after he injured their Holy Maiden and were now in a panic, fearful of the Inborn Grandmaster¡¯s deterrence. Just like Lu Yuan last year, they could only stay in the city and defend, not daring to venture out and have an open battle with the enemy. If that¡¯s the case, there¡¯s nothing more to say. Just repeat the same trick that the Miao people had used before. Let Zhou Qing lead the majority of the militia, moving northward, recovering the abandoned prefectures and county cities, making a show of force, and deceiving the enemy. He would select a few tens of thousands of elite soldiers, then bring Yan Wangqiu and the experts from the Nanhai Sect, to launch a surprise attack on the poorly defended Jiuyi Prefecture, cutting off the southern Miao people¡¯s retreat. Wuling Prefecture may be good, but it¡¯s just the Miao people¡¯s ancestral land and the headquarters of the Poison Sect. Even if it¡¯s captured, it would be difficult to assimilate and the rewards would be limited. The three southern prefectures are different. Although there are also many Miao people there, the territory in the south is much larger. Three prefectures are undoubtedly better than one. If he could capture the three southern prefectures, Lu Yuan would instantly have a large rear area, allowing his territory to expand to five prefectures, and bring them all together. One option is easy to capture and brings great rewards, while the other is extremely difficult and offers limited rewards. The choice is clear. ¡­ Hongdao Year 6, February 28th. Three days after the army camped in Xinhua County town, Lu Yuan picked 30,000 soldiers, 20,000 of whom were assigned to his disciple Li Liang, and another top-ranked expert from the Nanhai Sect, to station in Wugang County. They would confront the 50,000 Miao Soldiers entrenched in the resources and Suining counties. After that, he personally led 10,000 elite soldiers, accompanied by Yan Wangqiu and several experts of the Nanhai Sect, traveling day and night back to Hengyang Prefecture. Hongdao Year 6, February 30th. Zhou Qing, who had taken over the army, led the two high-ranking experts of the Nanhai Sect assigned to him, 30,000 newly recruited soldiers, and 70,000 civilian workers, totaling 100,000 people, with great momentum northward towards Wuling Prefecture. Two days later, the army successively arrived in Xupu and Yuanling counties, recovering the two counties that the Miao people had given up. Zhou Qing then stationed his army in Yuanling and sent 10,000 soldiers and 20,000 civilian workers separately to recapture the eastern and northern counties of Wuling Prefecture, such as Wuling Prefecture City, Longyang, and Cili. When the news that all but Chenxi and Qianling counties had been recovered in Wuling, Zhou Qing finally felt relieved. After leaving 20,000 civilian workers to defend Xupu and Yuanling and secure the army¡¯s rear, he led 20,000 soldiers and 30,000 civilian workers north to Chenxi and surrounded the city. However, considering that there were 40,000 Miao defenders in the city and his purpose was merely to attract and distract the Miao, Zhou Qing didn¡¯t send his troops to attack the city. Instead, he ordered his men to blockade the city from all sides, cutting off communication between the city and the outside world. The Miao people retreated in such haste this time that they managed to gather their manpower but not their supplies. Furthermore, Wuling Prefecture had been in constant battle for years, with hundreds of thousands of Miao people conscripted into the army several times, leaving them no time to care for local production. They could only rely on the conquered Yue people to provide them with food and weapons. After several years of turmoil, Wuling Prefecture had become quite impoverished. There were 40,000 defenders and 30,000 civilians in Chenxi City, totaling 70,000 people. The horrifying amount of food and fodder consumed daily by so many people was a terrifying figure. Zhou Qing didn¡¯t believe that the food in the city would last long enough to feed these tens of thousands of people. He feared that within two months, people would be starving to death inside the city. When his troops besieged Luyang City, Zhou Qing relied on cutting off the food supply and undermining the enemy¡¯s morale with the rebels¡¯ families, eventually conquering the city a few months later. And now, he was just applying the same strategy to Chenxi. ¡°Within three months, if there¡¯s no external assistance, the city will surely fall.¡± Standing on a newly built tall platform outside Chenxi City, Zhou Qing stared coldly at the connected city and the fortresses in the distance. In his eyes, the fate of the city and the Miao people inside had already been sealed. All that was left was to wait for the fruit to ripen. While Zhou Qing led the main force northward to Wuling Prefecture with great fanfare. Hongdao Year 6, March 1st. Having marched over 400 miles day and night for three days, crossing the border between the two prefectures, Lu Yuan finally led his troops to Dali County in Jiuyi Prefecture. On the deserted road, a group of tired soldiers trudged with heavy steps towards the south. They had been on the move for three days and nights, with only two short naps, each less than two hours, and were already extremely exhausted. If it weren¡¯t for their extensive training and many who were skilled in martial arts, they would not have been able to endure such high-intensity marching. In fact, out of the original 10,000-strong troops, nearly a thousand had fallen behind after the 400-mile journey. But even so, the soldiers were still full of fighting spirit as they watched the determined figure on horseback in front of them. Chapter 317 - Chapter 317: Chapter 184: Losing the Territory Again _2 Chapter 317: Chapter 184: Losing the Territory Again _2 Translator: 549690339 As long as we follow the general, we are sure to achieve victory this time. Isn¡¯t it just the Miao People? Even if we march for three days straight, we¡¯ll beat them without any hesitation. This is the spirit of elite soldiers, their pride. What has created this is the strong confidence brought by Lu Yuan leading them, dozens of times, to severely beat the Miao people and the rebel army in the past. ¡°Master, after contacting Prefect Jiang, Hengyang Prefecture has already urgently conscripted 20,000 civilian workers. According to Prefect Jiang, only three days are needed to send 10,000 civilian workers ahead to Jiuyi Prefecture. Five days later, the remaining 10,000 can also be assembled. At the same time, the food and fodder needed for the army will also be transported with them.¡± Among the troops, a disciple rode a horse from a distance and reported to Lu Yuan the results of this communication with the Hengyang Prefecture government. After listening, Lu Yuan nodded with satisfaction: ¡°Good. This time, we only brought 10,000 elite soldiers on our surprise attack on Jiuyi Prefecture. This small number of people, distributed throughout the entire prefecture¡¯s ten counties, averages less than a thousand people per city. My use of troops this time is to cut off the Miao People¡¯s supply routes in the two counties of the resource and Suining, as well as the two routes that have now invaded Fu City. There are 50,000 Miao soldiers in each of these two places. If we can cut off their supply lines and eliminate them, without these 100,000 Miao soldiers, Jiuyi, Lingling, and Yangshan Prefectures can be easily pacified. In this way, the south of Dongting will be completely stabilized.¡± Surprise attack is all about efficiency and speed. Lu Yuan cannot afford to waste troops on city defense and city attacks. However, he also cannot leave his rear completely exposed, recklessly charging through enemy territory. That would be too dangerous. Therefore, it is necessary to conscript some civilian workers from Hengyang Prefecture to help defend the city, maintain the rear, and transport the food and fodder. Although this would mean conscripting another 20,000 men for Hengyang Prefecture, which has already conscripted 60,000 men, it would be equivalent to drafting all the men over the age of fifteen in the entire prefecture. Especially during this time of spring planting, such a large-scale drafting of strong labor will undoubtedly affect the summer harvest and make the lives of the people in Hengyang Prefecture extremely difficult. But isn¡¯t this the time for the people to suffer a little? After suffering this year, once the Miao people in the southern three prefectures have been wiped out, and there are no more rebels causing chaos, the local area will naturally be peaceful. And when the local area is peaceful, the lives of the people will naturally gradually improve. By then, with no wars to fight, the people of Hengyang Prefecture will no longer have to worry year after year about when the rebels will attack. They will also not have to be conscripted and sent off to fight in other prefectures and counties every year, risking their lives on the battlefield. That¡¯s what it means to suffer before reaping the sweet rewards. The army marched on, quickly approaching within ten miles of Dali County City. ¡°General, after scouting the city, we found that there are very few Miao soldiers in the city, just over a thousand. They have weak defenses and have not yet discovered that our army has arrived.¡± At this time, the scouts sent out earlier returned to report. ¡°Over a thousand people?¡± Upon hearing the number of defenders, Lu Yuan nodded slightly. According to the intelligence he had gathered earlier, after deploying 50,000 Miao soldiers to Shaoyang Prefecture and Fu City, the remaining Miao soldiers in the three occupied Jiuyi prefectures numbered less than 10,000. The fact that there were over a thousand people in Dali County was probably because this county was a key point guarding the northern part of Jiuyi Prefecture and bordering Hengyang Prefecture, serving as the region¡¯s barrier. In other counties of the prefecture, except for Fu City, having one or two hundred people would be considered pretty good. It was precisely because Lu Yuan saw this that he devised this surprise attack strategy. With such weak defenses in the three Jiuyi prefectures, it would be a shame not to take this opportunity to strike. ¡°The Miao people¡¯s defense is so weak, this is a heaven-sent opportunity. Give the order for the vanguard to prepare; I will personally lead the charge on the city, and we will spend the night in the city tonight.¡± Lu Yuan issued the order and then turned to Yan Wangqiu: ¡°Grandmaster, I may have to trouble you to take action later.¡± Of course, the old lord willingly agreed: ¡°Rest assured, General, if necessary, I will take action.¡± ¡°Then I¡¯ll rely on the Grandmaster.¡± Lu Yuan smiled and nodded. He always did things with great care and seriousness. Although the scout had already said that Dali County¡¯s defenses were weak and that the defenders had not yet discovered their arrival, It was still safer to bring an Inborn Grandmaster as a backup, just in case. In this way, even if the defenders find out that a large army is approaching, at that time, with the power of an Inborn Master, the defenders at the city gate would probably be killed clean in just a few moves. Previously, Lan Cai¡¯er was able to slaughter hundreds of Lu Yuan¡¯s followers among the thousands of troops without breaking a sweat, an effortless feat as if she was in an uninhabited land. Now, with Yan Wangqiu¡¯s help, it should be just as easy to kill the over one thousand Miao soldiers in the city. When dealing with ordinary soldiers at the bottom, an Inborn Grandmaster like him can do it with ease and pleasure. As long as it doesn¡¯t reach a certain scale, an Inborn Grandmaster can slaughter ordinary soldiers at will. Why else would they say that Inborn Grandmasters are pillars of the state, capable of determining a nation¡¯s rise and fall? That¡¯s the reason. If you don¡¯t have an Inborn Grandmaster to rely on, others can kill hundreds of you today, a thousand tomorrow, and even your million-strong armies can be wiped out over a year and a half. But you can¡¯t do anything about it. What¡¯s the point of having your country stand? Just let it fall apart sooner rather than later. Once the orders were given, more than a thousand vanguards quickly armored up and gathered their weapons. Lu Yuan checked the number of men, and then led them towards Dali County city, not far away, where the inhabitants had no idea what was about to happen. Chapter 318 - Chapter 318: Chapter 184: Losing the Territory Again _3 Chapter 318: Chapter 184: Losing the Territory Again _3 Translator: 549690339 The facts proved that the scout¡¯s words were true. Perhaps they felt that there was no danger on their side, after all, to outsiders, Lu Yuan¡¯s army was in Wuling Prefecture to the north, hundreds of miles away, separated by several prefectures and counties, a great distance away. The northern Shaoyang Prefecture has 50,000 troops defending it. The Lu Yang Prefecture in the south and east is also under attack day and night by 50,000 troops. Under such circumstances, who could have imagined that Jiuyi Prefecture, located at the rear, would be targeted? What about Hengyang Prefecture? Those guys who pulled tens of thousands of civilian workers, would they have the guts to challenge me? The Miao people of Jiuyi Prefecture, who had become used to making periodic trips to Hengyang Prefecture to loot food, goods, and fodder, really looked down on the wimps of Hengyang Prefecture. So because of all these reasons, when Lu Yuan¡¯s army arrived at the city, the city gate was still wide open, and some Miao people and city residents were going in and out. With the door wide open like this, inviting you in, there¡¯s nothing more to say. Lu Yuan personally led the charge, taking the lead and rushing in with his army. The pedestrians going in and out of the gate were immediately scattered and driven away. The dozens of Miao people responsible for guarding the city were also killed instantly. In just a few breaths, the entire city gate was controlled. Then the army entered the city, and those Miao soldiers who reacted and tried to mobilize troops to retake the city gate were directly killed in the streets. Perhaps Yan Wangqiu wanted to regain some face that he had lost previously because he was unable to keep Lan Cai¡¯er. This time, he took the initiative to fight, killing over three hundred Miao people on his own. This directly frightened the enemy to the point of collapse and retreat. Lu Yuan was also killing enthusiastically. Although he could not match Yan Wangqiu¡¯s killing efficiency, once his Red Sun¡¯s aura field was activated, he could also take away a dozen lives casually. The entire man killed all the way, leaving more than a hundred people dead under his hands. And both of these commanders were so valiant. The vanguard soldiers who were inspired by them rushed forth, eager to fight, afraid of falling behind. Jokingly. In such a divine battlefield led by immortals, if they don¡¯t show their worth and earn some merit at this time, they are really fools. Be aware that Lu Yuan always rewarded merit and punished mistakes. He offered very tempting rewards to his troops who had rendered meritorious service. Not to mention the gold and silver rewards. The other secret martial arts books, promotions, and wealth, even accepting them as disciples, were more of a shortcut to achieve a leap of life status and earn glory and wealth. There have been too many examples before, placed in front of the soldiers. There are precedents, naturally, there are too many people who want to follow suit, and become the next person to succeed rapidly. As a result of the efforts of the two gods and over a thousand brave men, the Miao defenders in the city were virtually annihilated in less than half an hour. Yes, all killed, not one left. This time, Lu Yuan was fighting a surprise attack, and the reinforcements behind him were all civilian workers. Therefore, leaving these Miao aged men would only leave hidden dangers to the rear. Other than burying the unknown time that it would explode, there was basically no other benefit. As for ruling over them and collecting taxes? Before the flag of the Poison Sect fell, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t feel that he could get the Miao people¡¯s allegiance. Even aside from allegiance, whether they can settle down and produce locally is a question. If these Miao people were really honest, how could they have provided the Poison Sect with a continuous stream of troops over the past several years, nearly three hundred thousand in total front and back. You know, there are only over a million Miao people in the whole Dongting county. With three hundred thousand Miao soldiers coming out, almost every adult man has joined the rebellion with them. For such a rebellious ethnic group, although it is not impossible to surrender and integrate, it is too difficult and taxing to do so. And during this period, it is unknown how much risk and loss will have to be borne. Rather than that. Lu Yuan chose to do what he had done before in Shaoyang Prefecture. Kill those adult Miao men, physically eliminate the enemy. Then grant the captured Miao women to meritorious soldiers and local militias. After 20 or 30 years like this, even if there are still Miao people in Dongting Prefecture, they will never become a significant force again. To annihilate their clan, take their wives and daughters, and destroy their culture, this is the most effective and straightforward method of assimilation. Lu Yuan is not sure what is happening in other places. Anyway, he did this in Shaoyang Prefecture, and for five or six years, there was very little trouble, the place was very stable. This proved it was effective. So now in Jiuyi, Lingling, and Yangshan, the policy is to carry it out according to this policy. As for whether this will cause a heavy loss of population in these three prefectures? Lu Yuan feels that for the sake of his own stable rule, for the hundreds of thousands of good people in the three prefectures, the sacrifice of these one to two hundred thousand people is acceptable. He firmly believes this point. After capturing Dali County, Lu Yuan led his troops to rest for a day, then left a hundred people to guard the city, waiting for the civilians from Hengyang Prefecture to arrive. He himself led the main force directly south to Jiuyi Prefecture. In the meantime, they passed Dao County, where the city¡¯s defenders were scant and easily conquered. Then, without stopping, they continued to rush to Jiuyi Prefecture. Finally, they reached Jiuyi Prefecture in the evening. There were over a thousand defenders in the city, but like Dali County, they had no idea an enemy army was coming. So when they saw the imperial troops coming, they were all panicked. Lu Yuan, as usual, led the charge with Yan Wangqiu, leading the men into the city easily. It took half an hour to recover this prefecture city which had been occupied by thieves for two years. After resting in the city for one night, Lu Yuan split his troops into two. He let his disciple, Gu Wei, who had previously commanded the Vanguard Army, lead four thousand troops to the east, going to attack Yangshan Prefecture, cutting off the rear of the Miao thieves who were attacking Lu Yang Prefecture. For safety, the last remaining first-class expert from the Nanhai Sect was also assigned to Gu Wei. With four thousand elite soldiers and a first-class high-level practitioner, attacking Yangshan Prefecture, which has at most only two thousand defenders, is more than enough. Lu Yuan himself, meanwhile, led Yan Wangqiu and four thousand elite soldiers to the west to attack Lingling Prefecture. Chapter 319 - Chapter 319: Chapter 185: Pacifying the Three Mansions Chapter 319: Chapter 185: Pacifying the Three Mansions Translator: 549690339 After sending Chu Wei to Yangshan Prefecture, Lu Yuan continued to stay in the Fu City for another day before receiving ten thousand civilian workers from Hengyang Prefecture. The nearly thousand soldiers who had fallen behind also caught up one after another. He left a thousand soldiers and five thousand civilian workers to defend Jiuyi Prefecture, and sent the remaining five thousand civilian workers to Yangshan Prefecture to follow Chu Wei¡¯s army and take over the conquered cities. After arranging all of this, Lu Yuan led Yan Wangqiu and the remaining five thousand elite soldiers to attack Lingling Prefecture in the west. After spending two or three days in Jiuyi Prefecture, news of the imperial army¡¯s attack had reached Lingling Prefecture. Therefore, although Lu Yuan had tried to be as fast as possible, by the time he attacked Lingling Prefecture, the Miao People there were clearly prepared for the attack. However, even with their defenses, there were only just over three thousand Miao People in Lingling Prefecture. With such few soldiers, spread out over ten cities, no matter how prepared they were, their strength was limited. Under Lu Yuan and Yan Wangqiu¡¯s leadership and with the elite soldiers following in their city attack tactics, there was hardly any resistance within Lingling Prefecture. Even though the Miao People in Lingling Prefecture City had gathered two thousand soldiers to guard it, they were still killed by the hundreds under Yan Wangqiu¡¯s Wanta¡¯s external influence. Their entire army then disintegrated, and the Prefecture City was taken immediately. By this time, only two days had passed since Lu Yuan¡¯s entrance to Lingling Prefecture, yet three cities had been conquered. With the remaining Miao soldiers guarding the various counties in the Prefecture now all but depleted, only a hundred or so soldiers needed to be sent to take over the city¡¯s defenses easily. However, Lu Yuan had no interest in doing those flag-planting tasks himself and instead handed them over to the second batch of Hengyang civilian workers who arrived. After assigning five thousand civilian workers and letting several named disciples lead them to take over the county towns, Lu Yuan¡¯s attention shifted. Lingling City, in the Prefecture Yamen. In the main hall, Lu Yuan, with a cold expression, stared at the bound Miao man kneeling below and asked, ¡°Is what you said true?¡± This Miao man was none other than Lei Tongtian, the Poison Sect¡¯s elder in charge of Lingling Prefecture. His strength was at the peak of the second-rate, having cultivated ten meridians. When the city was taken earlier, this man was instantly frightened upon seeing Inborn Grandmaster Yan Wangqiu and didn¡¯t dare to resist. He immediately knelt down and begged for mercy. So, instead of killing him outright, Lu Yuan spared his life and interrogated him for information. Unexpectedly, doing so yielded valuable results. ¡°General, every word this humble one speaks is true,¡± Lei Tongtian kowtowed heavily while trying to please. ¡°Just two days ago, after learning of General¡¯s attack on Jiuyi Prefecture, I immediately sent people to inform Elder Yang and urgently asked for reinforcements for defense. By now, two days have passed, and the message should have reached the Shaoyang Prefecture army. At this moment, Elder Yang should have led his troops back and will be able to withdraw to Lingling Prefecture in less than two days. If General leads the troops north now, it may be possible to intercept the army in Dong¡¯an County. There are many mountains in Dong¡¯an County, and the road to Lingling is blocked by the Xiang River. Elder Yang¡¯s return to Lingling with his troops will have to pass through mountain ridges and rivers. If General seizes this opportunity to ambush, it is certain to cut them off and attack them while they are crossing, ensuring their defeat.¡± In order to save his life, Lei Tongtian no longer cared about appearances. He began to actively offer strategies, helping Lu Yuan think of ways to defeat his fellow tribesmen and sectmates. ¡°Good!¡± Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but be pleased after listening. He appreciated the Miao elder below, personally untied his ropes, and offered, ¡°If this time you can truly help me defeat the fifty thousand Miao soldiers led by Yang Yukjin as you said, Then after this battle, I will not only pardon your crime of rebellion but also grant you a high official position as a military officer.¡± Yang Yukjin, mentioned by Lei Tongtian, was a newly-appointed Left or Right Elder and a top martial artist in Jianghu. After the Right Protector responsible for the southern three prefectures was transferred back to Qianling Main Hall, this Left Elder became the de facto governor of the southern three prefectures, in charge of all military and political affairs in Jiuyi, Lingling, and Yangshan Prefectures. So, if they could defeat this Poison Sect Left Elder and capture or kill Yang Yukjin, the three southern prefectures occupied by the Miao People would be completely thrown into a headless chaos. This would undoubtedly greatly benefit Lu Yuan¡¯s plan to quickly eliminate the Miao People and recover the three prefectures. Originally, Lu Yuan¡¯s plan to deal with Yang Yukjin was to defend Lingling Prefecture City after capturing it. After Yang Yukjin had suffered head wounds and morale losses from attacking the city, with depleted troops, Li Liang would lead twenty thousand soldiers from Wugang County to support them, and the master and disciple, with a combined force of twenty-five thousand elite soldiers, would defeat Yang Yukjin¡¯s fifty thousand Miao soldiers. But now, With the help of this traitorous Miao, perhaps there was no need for such trouble. They could use the five thousand soldiers and five thousand civilian workers in their hands to clean up the fifty thousand Miao soldiers under Yang Yukjin¡¯s command. After accomplishing such a feat, awarding Lei Tongtian a military officer position was not a big deal; it was just a sixth-ranked official. Furthermore, the Miao People were so vulnerable that after winning this battle so easily, perhaps the original plan to massacre all the Miao People in the three prefectures could change. Although the Miao People were arrogant and untamed, not all of them were hard-boned and unafraid of death. If they could win over some of the cowardly ones, and then pick out some people to lead them, they could have a decent disposable force Chapter 320 - Chapter 320: Chapter 185: Pacifying the Three Mansions_2 Chapter 320: Chapter 185: Pacifying the Three Mansions_2 Translator: 549690339 This Lei Tongtian might be worth trying to see if the plan is feasible.¡¯ Lu Yuan thought so in his heart. After obtaining his promise, Lei Tongtian below was overjoyed and kowtowed several times, saying, ¡°Please rest assured, General, I have long been fed up with the Five Poisons Sect. The reason why I joined the bandits before was that I was forced to do so under duress. Now that I have encountered the imperial army and been granted clemency by the general, I will devote myself wholeheartedly to serving the court and the general, not hesitating to die a hundred times!¡± Lei Tongtian was full of gratitude and solemnly swore. Lu Yuan listened to his words, just smiled, and did not respond much, only said, ¡°Elder Lei can give up the dark and join the light, breaking with those rebels, which shows that he knows the current situation. Elder Lei is the local guardian, so you must know where to ambush and where to attack at half-crossing. Since Elder Lei has surrendered to the court, why not work with me to devise a plan.¡± This is asking for a show of allegiance. As long as Lei Tongtian goes through with this, he, who has stained his hands with so much of his fellow people¡¯s blood, will no longer be able to turn back. Lei Tongtian also understood this naturally, knowing that this was his last test before surrendering to the court, so he replied solemnly, ¡°General, in Dong¡¯an County, Yuecheng Mountain is naturally the first choice for ambush in the mountains. This mountain is located to the east of the county town¡­¡± In the hall, Lei Tongtian opened the map of Lingling Prefecture and began to explain the local geography and his ambush plan based on the geography in detail to Lu Yuan. Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but nod his head as he listened. It had to be said that in setting up ambushes, Lei Tongtian, a local snake, was far more adept at it than an outsider like himself. Moreover, after surrendering, in order to gain a future, the opponent¡¯s attack on his own kind was really ruthless. At this time of ambush, some vicious tricks. After gathering the Miao captives, how to counterattack, who to eliminate, and who to win over, were all spoken of in an orderly and logical manner, which greatly impressed Lu Yuan. According to Lei Tongtian¡¯s stratagem, it would be really simple to defeat Yang Yukjin¡¯s fifty thousand Miao soldiers this time. And after defeating the Miao soldiers, there was still much to be done in terms of surrendering captives. Although it was not possible to accept all fifty thousand, there was still hope of retaining twenty thousand reliable traitors. Seeing such a promising future, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but make a decision: ¡°Alright, do as you say.¡± The next day, Lu Yuan left over a thousand civilian workers to stay in Lingling Prefecture City, then led five thousand elite troops and four thousand civilian workers westward to Dong¡¯an County. Upon arriving at this county, they were greeted by a vast Xiang River that divided Dong¡¯an County into east and west. According to the plan, Lu Yuan left two thousand elite troops and six thousand civilian workers here, led by a disciple, to ambush in the woods east of the river, watching the crossing. Then he led three thousand elite troops, along with Yan Wangqiu, to go upstream, cross the river, and head south to Yuecheng Mountain behind the crossing, laying ambush on both sides of the mountain. Yang Yukjin would inevitably pass through Dong¡¯an County when withdrawing his troops from Shaoyang Prefecture to return to Lingling Prefecture City. Moreover, in order to rush from Dong¡¯an County to Lingling Prefecture City, they would have to pass through Yuecheng Mountain and then cross the river from east Yuecheng Mountain crossing. So, Lu Yuan stationed his troops on the east side of the crossing, waiting for Yang Yukjin¡¯s army to cross the river, while laying an ambush on the mountain behind the crossing, waiting for the enemy troops to pass by, ready to launch. In this way, the bandits¡¯ army would be divided into two parts and attacked from both sides, inevitably leading to chaos. Moreover, with Lu Yuan and Yan Wangqiu leading the charge, it wouldn¡¯t be difficult to defeat the Miao people, who were five times their own number. At the same time as Lu Yuan¡¯s tight preparations for the ambush began, a tens of thousands strong army was hurrying along the border between Xinning County in Shaoyang Prefecture and Dong¡¯an County in Lingling Prefecture. Elder, those Yue scouts are moving in again.¡± In the marching army, Yang Yukjin rode his horse, and a subordinate came up beside him, pointing to a group of more than ten Yue cavalry in the distance. Since Yang Yukjin received the news of the Yue people¡¯s surprise attack on Jiuyi Prefecture in the rear, which is causing rampant attacks on cities and territories, with their troops directly pressing towards Lingling Prefecture. The Left Elder of the Five Poisons Sect, who was responsible for overseeing the three southern prefectures, couldn¡¯t help but be taken aback. Yang Yukjin was well aware that if the three prefectures in the rear were lost, No, even if just Jiuyi Prefecture is lost, Lingling Prefecture and Yangshan Prefecture will be plunged into a difficult isolated situation where each has to fight for themselves. It would be convenient for the Yue people to mobilize troops and deal with Lingling Prefecture and Yangshan Prefecture calmly, breaking them one by one. If this really happened, Yang Yukjin, who was deeply trusted by the Sect Leader, would really be at a loss for redemption. So, upon receiving the news, he did not hesitate in the slightest and no longer had any intention of entangling with the Yue army in Wugang County. Leading the troops, he began to withdraw. But the Yue army in Wugang County seemed to have anticipated his withdrawal long ago. Upon seeing Yang Yukjin trying to flee, they immediately sent troops to pursue him, forcing him to leave five thousand dead soldiers behind to hinder and obstruct the Yue people¡¯s pursuit. Then they left three thousand troops at both Zuizhong and Suining Counties as nails to constrain the Yue people. This prevented them from advancing all the way and following them closely. After making all these preparations, Yang Yukjin finally managed to lead less than forty thousand troops out of Shaoyang Prefecture and retreat. Chapter 321 - Chapter 321: Chapter 185: Pacifying the Three Mansions_3 Chapter 321: Chapter 185: Pacifying the Three Mansions_3 Translator: 549690339 Nevertheless, platoons of Yue cavalry, ranging from a few to hundreds, still chased after them like flies. From time to time, the cavalry would harass the large army, desperately slowing down their retreat. This behavior of the Yue people only made Yang Yukjin feel more anxious. There was no doubt that the Yue people were so unwilling to let him retreat, they were trying to buy time for the Yue State soldiers who had penetrated into Jiuyi Prefecture. If his side allowed the Yue people to succeed and their escape¡¯s pace slowed down even for a moment, it would be all over once the soldiers captured Jiuyi Prefecture and even threatened Lingling Prefecture. Yang Yukjin glanced at the distance, where the Yue cavalry pretended to attack but quickly retreated, intending to intimidate him. He snorted and said, ¡°Don¡¯t worry about those Yue people. There are only ten or twenty of them, they can¡¯t do any harm. Let some of the Jianghu experts in the sect be on guard, and if they really dare to attack, just kill them.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± The subordinate who came over agreed and then went to arrange for manpower. When it came to martial arts experts, especially second and third-rate martial artists, the Five Poisons Sect had no shortage of them. Among the tens of thousands of soldiers under Yang Yukjin¡¯s command, there were twenty or thirty second-tier experts and over a hundred third-tier ones. Drawing out a few people would be enough to deal with the Yue light cavalry. Ignoring the harassing cavalry, Yang Yukjin led the army quickly towards Dong¡¯an County Town. By noon, the large army had arrived at the county town. Yang Yukjin summoned the town¡¯s defending general to inquire about the current situation. Due to the rapid capture of Lingling Fu City by Lu Yuan and the subsequent news blockade, the situation in Dong¡¯an County was not clear. In response to Yang Yukjin¡¯s inquiry, it was reported that Yue people had already appeared outside Lingling Fu City, their enemy troops were formidable, and there were two thousand defenders in the city, but the current battle situation was unknown. Hearing this news, the elder grew even more anxious. ¡°Now that the Yue people have attacked Lingling Fu City, Jiuyi Prefecture must have fallen. The enemy troops have arrived so quickly that if they capture Lingling Fu City too, we will all die without a proper burial place.¡± Yang Yukjin sighed and then abandoned his original plan to rest and eat in the town for a while longer before setting off again. Realizing that the situation in Lingling Fu City was now critical, he decided to force his troops, who were already exhausted, through a wave of resentment to continue on their way if they did not arrive soon. In order to arrive at Fu City as soon as possible, he could only let the soldiers tire themselves out a bit more. Since communication was cut off, Yang Yukjin believed that there were still two thousand defenders in Lingling Fu City who should be able to hold out against an attack. After all, unless there was an innate expert or a top-notch first-rate martial artist, it would not be easy for an ordinary first-rate martial artist to break through a city guarded by two thousand defenders. So at this time, Yang Yukjin unconsciously assumed that the Yue people should be still busily besieging the city, and there should be no enemy forces in Dong¡¯an County. Therefore, he led his army at full gallop to save time, not bothering to scout ahead and instead decided to rush on impetuously with his large force. By the time it was nearing dusk, the army¡¯s vanguard had finally reached the Xiang River crossing at the foot of Yuecheng Mountain. At this time, there were no visible people on the crossing, and it was silent. However, it was normal for the people to hide and not dare to go out during times of war and unrest. Yang Yukjin observed for a while and didn¡¯t find any problems. He then ordered the large army to cross the river and camp on the east bank for the night before setting off again the next day. After crossing the river, the Lingling Fu City area would be on the other side, where there might be Yue scouting cavalry. Since his soldiers had been on the road all day and were exhausted, and it was getting dark, it was no longer possible to take the risk of suddenly arriving at Fu City. So the safest approach was to spend the night and then set out for battle after daybreak on the second day. Upon receiving this order, the Miao soldiers below cheered and rejoiced. After a day of exhaustion, they could finally rest. Despite their fatigue, they mustered their spirits, gathered the boats at the pier, and began crossing the river to the east bank. But the Miao people were lax, without much military discipline. Some of them, who were good swimmers, even jumped directly into the river and swam across the river while playing in the water, using it to wash away the sweat and exhaustion on their bodies. Yang Yukjin watched this scene but did not stop them. His brothers were tired, and if they wanted to take a bath to cool down, how could he stop them? In this way, after about half an hour, nearly ten thousand people had crossed the river. Moreover, more than half of the rear army had passed through Yuecheng Mountain. Then. ¡°Kill the bandits!¡± ¡°There¡¯s an ambush!¡± ¡°Kill them!¡± Boom, boom, boom! Rumble, rumble, rumble! A series of noisy shouts, golden drums, screams, and roars suddenly sounded from the back of Yuecheng Mountain. Yang Yukjin turned around and saw countless Yue State soldiers rolling down stones, logs, torches, and arrows from the mountain onto his army below. Caught off guard, the already exhausted Miao soldiers were immediately thrown into chaos and broke into a rout. While this sudden change was happening, the Miao soldiers who had already crossed the river suddenly discovered that countless Yue people were surging out from the riverbanks. Then, they launched a brutal attack on the scattered Miao soldiers, some of whom were still frolicking in the river. Caught between attacks from the front and the back, the Miao soldiers who still had the will to resist were completely panicked. At this moment, under the directive of Lu Yuan, Yan Wangqiu also led a thousand elite soldiers down the mountain, aiming straight for Yang Yukjin in an attempt to capture and kill the Miao commander. A moment later, the fierce battle came to an end. Yang Yukjin lay in a pool of blood, his eyes vacant as they took in the blue splashes of water and the endless blood. In the surging Xiang River, countless corpses and blood, wailing cries, and screaming, cruelty, and hell all floated and drifted, eventually heading to an unknown destination where they would find peace. On both banks, countless cheers also rang out. In the sixth year of Hongdao, on the seventh day of the third month. Yue State General Pingxi, Lu Yuan, at the banks of the Xiang River in Dong¡¯an County, led his army to a great victory against the Miao army of 40,000. The Miao commander Yang Yukjin was beheaded, 30,000 bandits were killed, and 10,000 were captured. Subsequently, General Pingxi divided his forces for further attack, and within three days, all counties of Lingling Prefecture were conquered. During this time, Li Liang, the Hengye General, joined them with 20,000 soldiers. Later, General Pingxi led a 40,000 strong army to the east, advancing to Yangshan Prefecture and defeating more Miao people and capturing tens of thousands of them. By then, all the Miao men from the three prefectures were killed, their main force exhausted, and they no longer posed a threat. The three prefectures of Jiuyi, Lingling, and Yangshan were pacified and returned to the rule of the court. Since the Miao uprising, the five prefectures in the south of Dongting have once again become united. Chapter 322 - Chapter 322: Chapter 186: Preparations for the Founding of the Country Chapter 322: Chapter 186: Preparations for the Founding of the Country Translator: 549690339 Yangshan Prefecture City. On the streets, people hurried about, and dark brown bloodstains could still be faintly seen in the cracks of the stone brick pavement. At the entrances of streets and alleys, squads of armored and armed soldiers could be seen patrolling the city from time to time. The civilians in the city subconsciously avoided these soldiers when they saw them. Sun Siwen rode his horse through the streets, accompanied by more than a dozen attendants. Seeing the desolate scene, he couldn¡¯t help but feel an endless amount of emotions. Yangshan Prefecture, among other prefectures in Dongting region, was originally a wealthy one. Adjacent to South Sea Prefecture and connected to Yuzhang Prefecture, it was the trading hub of the three prefectures, bustling with merchants and travelers. At its peak, Yangshan Prefecture boasted 60,000 households and 300,000 people, making it a truly large and prosperous place. Now, after being occupied by the Miao thieves for just two years, the city has fallen into such ruin. ¡®Now the Yangshan Prefecture probably has less than 30,000 households, let alone 60,000.¡¯ Sun Siwen looked at the emaciated civilians on the streets and couldn¡¯t help but think to himself. When the Miao people first revolted, they slaughtered and pillaged the local Yue people, seizing their wealth and abducting women. During that catastrophe, hundreds of thousands of civilians in Dongting region perished. After the Miao people started their uprising, they never stopped waging wars for two years, employing as many as 300,000 troops at their peak. Such a large number of Miao soldiers couldn¡¯t be supported by just the Miao population of over a million. The majority of their expenses had to be covered by oppressing the Yue civilians in the prefectures they occupied. But during the peak of the Five Poisons¡¯ reign, they only controlled five prefectures. Even with all their territories combined, the total population barely reached two million. With a soldier-to-civilian ratio of more than ten to one for two consecutive years, the ruthless exploitation of the civilians can only be imagined. As a result, Yue people across the three southern prefectures of Dongting region abandoned their homes and fled in all directions. When Sun Siwen governed Luyang, he had already taken in many refugees from Yangshan. According to them, working on the land or as laborers in Yangshan, they had to give up to 90% of their income as taxes. On top of that, they were often coerced into doing Corvee labor, helping the Miao people fight wars. Women in their families were also frequently harassed by the Miao, prompting some to resist against the humiliation, only to be slaughtered by the Miao in retaliation. This harsh treatment, provoking the wrath of both heaven and human, naturally led the civilians to flee in fear and panic. If it hadn¡¯t been for the Miao people setting up checkpoints to intercept fleeing civilians, there would have been even fewer people left in their territories. However, the situation in the three prefectures of Jiuyi, Lingling, and Yangshan had hardly improved. ¡°The population in these three prefectures has suffered yet another catastrophe. Many Miao soldiers have died in battle, and chaos and slaughter have broken out in some places, causing even more loss of population,¡± Sun Siwen sighed, ¡°The people suffer so much in this chaotic era, what did these innocent civilians do to deserve this?¡± After saying this, he couldn¡¯t bear to look any longer, and spurred his horse towards the government office. This time, the reason Sun Siwen, the Prefect of Luyang, went to Yangshan wasn¡¯t to wallow in sorrow, but to fulfill Lu Yuan¡¯s summons and official duties. Though his best friend didn¡¯t explicitly say it, Sun Siwen had his own suspicions during the journey. His best friend probably wanted Sun to take over Yangshan Prefecture and turn the situation around like he did in Luyang. In this matter, Sun was experienced and confident in his abilities. If it meant helping the people suffering in these chaotic times, he was more than happy to do so. Even on his way there, he had come up with several management strategies, ready to discuss with his best friend upon meeting him. Upon arriving at the government office, Lu Yuan¡¯s personal guards naturally recognized their general¡¯s friend. As Sun Siwen was also the Prefect of Luyang and a high-ranking official, they didn¡¯t dare to offend him. They quickly greeted him with a smile and ushered him inside. As soon as they entered the government office, what greeted them was a constant stream of busy attendants, officials, and hurried soldiers and officers. The entire government office was filled with an air of busyness. Sun Siwen could understand why. After all, his friend had just captured the three prefectures, and there were many urgent matters to attend to: the rewards and punishments for the soldiers and officers, maintaining stability and order, and dealing with the fugitive rebels¡­ Back when he first arrived in Luyang, he had experienced this busy period himself. Following the personal guards through the halls and corridors, Sun Siwen soon met his friend in a study. ¡°Brother Sun, welcome. Please take a seat while I finish this document, and then we can catch up,¡± Lu Yuan said while reviewing official documents. In Jianghua County of Jiuyi Prefecture, a group of Miao fugitive soldiers had taken control of a Miao People¡¯s Mountain Village, openly confronting the county¡¯s garrison and causing severe disturbances to local law and order. Most of the garrison troops in Jianghua County were civilian workers from Hengyang Prefecture, and they numbered only around 500, clearly insufficient to deal with this group of Miao fugitive soldiers. As such, they sent a request for additional military support. Lu Yuan could only reply: ¡°Your request has been acknowledged, and our troops will arrive shortly.¡± And then, he started wondering which troops should he dispatch to suppress the rebels. There were far too many similar situations lately. Having defeated 100,000 Miao soldiers across three prefectures, it was impossible for Lu to execute or capture them all. In the end, more than 10,000 Miao soldiers dispersed and fled to various counties in the three prefectures. After they scattered, these Miao soldiers didn¡¯t dare to confront the government forces directly, so they retreated to their own villages and defended themselves in fortress-like settings. Chapter 323 - Chapter 323: Chapter 186: Preparations for the Founding of the Country_2 Chapter 323: Chapter 186: Preparations for the Founding of the Country_2 Translator: 549690339 Or perhaps simply flee into the mountains, taking advantage of the geographical advantage of the mountains, and occasionally come out to attack the local area, plundering the people, just like a fly, impossible to guard against. This kind of endless security battle, no doubt is the most time-consuming and energy-consuming. In order to deal with these fugitive soldiers, Lu Yuan even had to disperse the 50,000 troops and civilian workers on hand to the three prefectures, and then send out the experts from the Nanhai Sect to constantly fight security battles and guerrilla warfare with the Miao soldiers. In this way, the other party¡¯s rampant momentum was slightly curbed. But even so, manpower is still somewhat insufficient. As a result, Lu Yuan had to transfer 20,000 of the 30,000 militias that had been gathered in Luyang Prefecture to assist in handling security. With this, the manpower was sufficient to cope with the local security situation. After some deliberation, Lu Yuan finally decided to deploy a battalion of soldiers in Lianshan County, Yangshan Prefecture, who had just suppressed a Miao people¡¯s village, to Jianghua County. Firstly, the two places are not far apart, and secondly, a battalion of soldiers has 500 people. Co-operating with the local civilian workers should be enough to suppress the hundreds of fugitive soldiers. He approved the documents, wrote another transfer order, and handed it to the personal guard waiting by his side. After the order was passed, Lu Yuan finally put down the pen in his hand, got up, and came to Sun Siwen¡¯s side. He brewed a cup of tea for his friend and then laughed: ¡°I have been so busy with my official duties recently that I even forgot to sleep and eat. I have neglected Brother Sun.¡± Sun Siwen shook his head: ¡°Brother Lu is governing for the people, it is a great public-hearted act. I just waited for a while; it is not a big deal.¡± ¡°I knew Brother Sun would say that.¡± Lu Yuan laughed, then went straight to the point: ¡°Brother Sun, your visit here, I guess you have some speculation on the way. I invited you here because I have an important task to entrust.¡± Sun Siwen nodded: ¡°Brother Lu probably wants me to serve as the Prefect of Yangshan, to govern this place, right?¡± Lu Yuan nodded and then shook his head: ¡°Indeed, but my intention is not only to make you the Prefect of Yangshan, but also to help me oversee Jiuyi and Lingling¡¯s two prefectures, to be the Governor of these three southern prefectures.¡± ¡°Governor of the three southern prefectures!¡± Upon hearing this term, Sun Siwen was immediately taken aback, and stood up to look at his good friend, hurriedly advising, ¡°Brother Lu, I know you have great ambitions. But the position of Governor has always been appointed by the court, and it is a high-ranking official. Its rank is even higher than the General of Pingxi, so how can it be appointed by a local official? And with my position, how could I have the authority to oversee the two prefectures of Jiuyi and Lingling? I¡¯ll serve as the Prefect of Yangshan. Brother Lu, you should arrange for someone capable to be the Prefect of the other two prefectures.¡± Facing such a rebellious arrangement, Sun Siwen was genuinely afraid. The first reason was due to personal integrity; he did not want to betray the court. The second reason was that he did not want to see his good friend heading toward the extreme, becoming a rebel. Otherwise, if caught between his friend and the court in the future, he really wouldn¡¯t know which side to choose, and he would be in an awkward situation. ¡°Brother Sun, please be calm for a moment.¡± Lu Yuan saw the panic on Sun Siwen¡¯s face and couldn¡¯t help but smile, then he said, ¡°When did I say I wanted to rebel?¡± Upon hearing this, Sun Siwen felt slightly relieved, steadied his mind, and asked, ¡°Brother Lu, if you don¡¯t want to rebel, then why are you saying all this?¡± Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but laugh, ¡°Haven¡¯t you heard me say before that I have an agreement with the court¡­¡± He proceeded to tell his good friend about the court¡¯s plan for the Ten Grandmasters and the fiefdom plan. Of course, Lu Yuan made some modifications in the part about the land for the fiefdom. The original Jiuzhen Prefecture, which had been confirmed as the land for the fiefdom, was naturally replaced with Dongting Prefecture. Even the original plan for half a prefecture was changed to starting with half a prefecture and capping it at one prefecture. As for whether the court would accept these conditions against its own plan- would the increasingly weak court not want to make trouble with him now that his strength was rapidly expanding, and would eventually agree with it? As for what to do if they don¡¯t agree in the end? Naturally, each will rely on their own means. Anyway, Lu Yuan was not planning to leave Dongting Prefecture. As a warrior, we always let our strength do the talking. In the end, there will be a battle to see who can defeat whom. ¡°So, with the court¡¯s agreement, I have acquired half a prefecture¡¯s land for fiefdom.¡± Lu Yuan spoke calmly, ¡°Now, Brother Sun, along with you supervising the three prefectures, we are merely setting up the central framework in advance, in preparation for the fiefdom in the future.¡± After hearing such a secret, Sun Siwen was completely stunned. As a traditional scholar, he never thought that the court would do such a thing in order to extend its national reign, suppress rebellion and defend against foreign enemies. Fiefdom. If what his friend said was true, then wouldn¡¯t the court have to cede at least two or three prefectures, or even as much as four? Without these few prefectures, would Da Yue still be Da Yue? In the midst of such confusion, Sun Siwen looked at Lu Yuan, his throat slightly dry, and asked, ¡°Brother Lu, is what you said¡­true?¡± Lu Yuan nodded naturally: ¡°Of course it is. Otherwise, why do you think the Holy Monk Jihui of the White Phoenix Temple is willing to serve as the National Master? Elder Master Yan of the Nanhai Sect, who is over 140 years old, is still willing to fight for the court?¡± Both of them have tens of thousands of disciples, and they are both powerful figures in the Jianghu who dominate a whole prefecture. In terms of status, they are not much different from a prefecture governor, right?¡± But now they are willing to work for the court and serve as the so-called National Master with no real power. Do you really think they care about the plight of the nation and want to serve the court?¡± Chapter 324 - Chapter 324: Chapter 186: Preparations for the Founding of the Country_3 Chapter 324: Chapter 186: Preparations for the Founding of the Country_3 Translator: 549690339 Moreover, speaking of myself, this time I mobilized 200,000 troops to suppress the bandits for the court. Does Shuangxiu really think I am wholeheartedly doing this for the country? If the court hadn¡¯t offered such conditions, why should I exhaust my own strength to suppress Miao thieves for the court?¡± These bloody facts shattered the last illusion in Sun Siwen¡¯s heart. As a close friend, he naturally understood Lu Yuan¡¯s character; the latter was not a blindly loyal person. He didn¡¯t have much loyalty to the court. Lu Yuan initially agreed to take up an official position only because he was concerned about his own safety, so he reluctantly did so. Such a person would certainly not selflessly dedicate himself and harm his own interests to suppress bandits for the court. So, there is only one reason why he sent troops. The court offered a great advantage, and this great advantage was to divide the land and seal the country. ¡°How could it be¡­ how could it be¡­¡± Although Sun Siwen already knew that the court¡¯s national affairs were deteriorating, it is still difficult for him to accept when he really saw this scene. Seeing his friend¡¯s slightly dispirited appearance, Lu Yuan sighed, then walked up and patted him on the shoulder, saying, ¡°The replacement of dynasties has always been a common occurrence. Brother Sun, you worry about the court, but what you really want is to settle the world and do good things for the people so that they can live better lives. However, the current court is unable to fulfill your wishes.¡± At this point, Lu Yuan paused and then said earnestly, ¡°I know Brother Sun¡¯s abilities and ambitions. When we were in Yangmei Town, Brother Sun once said that one day, when serving as an official, you would strictly govern the local area, eradicate bandits, prohibit the use of force, and bring peace to the people. Now that I am about to divide the land and establish a country, I don¡¯t have many talents to use. If Brother Sun is willing, I would like to make you the Prime Minister of the country, help me stabilize Dongting Prefecture, and lay the foundation for peace. What do you think, Brother Sun, are you willing to help me?¡± Lu Yuan held his friend¡¯s hand and sincerely requested for help. Assistants like Sun Siwen with both talent and ability whom he could trust were extremely rare in the world. So rare that apart from Sun Siwen, he could only think of Zhou Qing. Although Zhou Qing¡¯s cultural cultivation was not bad since he read the classics every day, his knowledge could not be too poor. However, his current path was heading towards becoming a great military officer. Lu Yuan had already decided that after the founding of the country, the position of Grand General would belong to his disciple. So there is already a head of military officers. However, the head of civilian officials is still temporarily vacant. Looking at his surroundings, the only one suitable for the position of prime minister was Sun Siwen. This time, Lu Yuan invited Sun Siwen to entrust the founding of the country, hoping to convince his friend to help him establish the foundation of the country. After all, the court¡¯s Ten Grandmaster Plan would be completed in more than a year. By that time, when the ten grandmasters gathered, it would be the moment of the decisive battle between the court and the Zhou People, Shu Thieves, and Miao People. No matter how much this battle was delayed, it would end in at most two or three years. By then, it would be time for the court to fulfill its promise and divide the land and fiefdoms for the four great masters of Jianghu. Therefore, if calculated carefully, Lu Yuan¡¯s founding of the country might be just three or four years away. Time is tight, and it is important to build a framework now rather than waiting until a complete set of civilian and military officials cannot be found. So it is necessary to prepare in advance and let Sun Siwen take charge of the administration of the southern three prefectures first, and set up a unified administrative framework. Once the framework is set up, Lu Yuan would merge Luyang Prefecture and Shaoyang Prefecture into it as well. At that time, after a period of adjustments, the south¡¯s five prefectures would be integrated into Dongting Prefecture, and Lu Yuan would incorporate the military system into it, truly transforming the local area into a country. This whole set of steps was carefully considered by him and decided to be carried out gradually. Now is the first step of the plan. And the most crucial part of this first-step plan is the help of his friends. Otherwise, if Sun Siwen couldn¡¯t agree, for a while, Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t really know where to find someone who could replace him. So what is Sun Siwen¡¯s opinion? At the beginning, our Prefect Sun was naturally disappointed and angry at the court¡¯s various compromising actions. But after the anger and realizing that nothing could be changed, he became lost. Because he didn¡¯t know where to go after Yue Country ceded Dongting Prefecture. After all, he was an official of the court, and when others established a country and sealed territories, they might not necessarily accept him. But when he heard that Lu Yuan was going to establish a country in Dongting Prefecture and was also preparing to let himself serve as the prime minister of the new dynasty. One cannot deny it. Our Prefect Sun¡¯s heart couldn¡¯t help but pound. Don¡¯t laugh at him for being weak. If you were in his position with the prime minister of a country in front of you, could your heart not be moved? Not to mention, the founding monarch of this country is also his close friend. So faced with his friend¡¯s invitation, Sun Siwen struggled in his heart for a few seconds, and then solemnly bowed down and saluted: ¡°Sun Siwen has seen the lord, and from now on is willing to run for the lord and serve loyally, without evasion.¡± Well, at this moment, Sun Siwen didn¡¯t act as a friend but directly established a master-slave relationship with Lu Yuan, defining their roles. After all, in the future, one will be the monarch, and the other will be the minister. With this relationship, even if the monarch is close to you, the necessary etiquettes and protocols must still be followed and not neglected. As a traditional Confucian scholar, Sun Siwen particularly valued this. ¡°Hahaha!¡± When Lu Yuan saw Sun Siwen¡¯s statement, he burst into laughter. Having his friend¡¯s support resolved a big problem in his mind. At this moment, he quickly helped Sun Siwen up and said happily, ¡°With Brother Sun¡¯s help, I have no worries about the political affairs of the new country.¡± Sun Siwen also said happily, ¡°It is my fortune to be able to assist a wise monarch and exert my talents.¡± From the moment the master-slave relationship was set, Sun Siwen no longer considered himself Lu Yuan¡¯s friend. The conversations between the two have since been marked by distinction between monarch and ministers, adhering strictly to etiquette. Lu Yuan noticed this and couldn¡¯t help but sigh. However, knowing what was right and that his friend likely wouldn¡¯t be convinced otherwise, he could only feel helpless and grieve in secret. Fortunately, the preparations for the early stage of founding the country have now begun to take shape. Chapter 325 - Chapter 325: Chapter 187: Governance Strategy Chapter 325: Chapter 187: Governance Strategy Translator: 549690339 Having established their roles as monarch and minister and laid the foundation for the future establishment of their nation, Lu Yuan suppressed the sadness in his heart and began discussing with Sun Siwen the management of the southern three prefectures. ¡°Brother Sun, now that the southern three prefectures have just been established, there are many bandits in the area. Although I have deployed troops to suppress them, this is not a long-term solution.¡± Lu Yuan mentioned his current headache of dealing with the Miao People¡¯s escape, and said somewhat helplessly: ¡°Now I have 70,000 troops stationed in various prefectures and counties, consuming an unimaginable amount of food and resources daily. This can be sustained for a short period of time, but in the long run, it would be difficult to continue financially.¡± Therefore, I hope that after Brother Sun takes office, arrangements can be made quickly for officials to be appointed, population records to be updated, refugees resettled, production resumed, and local order established.¡± At the same time, I will also leave troops to assist Brother Sun in establishing a prefectural and county militia to maintain local stability.¡± As for the Miao People¡¯s deserters, those who can be recruited should be recruited, and those who cannot be recruited should be eliminated. I can leave 10,000 elite soldiers to assist the three southern prefectures in eradicating bandits.¡± Lu Yuan stated his current needs. That is to establish a stable order in the southern three prefectures so that the troops under his command can be freed up. After all, the need for troops is not limited to the southern three prefectures alone. In the northern Wuling Prefecture and even Yueyang Prefecture, there are still large-scale battles involving hundreds of thousands of people taking place. Especially in Wuling Prefecture. Now that the southern three prefectures have been pacified, the news must have reached the Poison Sect. Therefore, Zhou Qing¡¯s situation should have been exposed to the enemy.¡± Zhou Qing has only 30,000 new recruits who have been trained for less than half a year and about 70,000 civilian workers, totaling 100,000 soldiers. Although this force looks impressive, it should be noted that there are still 80,000 troops from the Poison Sect in Wuling Prefecture.¡± Although the combat capabilities of the Miao People are just average, Zhou Qing¡¯s troops may not be much stronger.¡± If the Miao People are bold enough to take a gamble and fight Zhou Qing at this time, then the outcome of this battle is really uncertain.¡± Even Lu Yuan thought that the odds of the Miao People winning might be slightly higher.¡± The reason is simple: the Miao People, mostly Mountain People, have lived with wild beasts for many years and are naturally fierce. Over the past few years, they have not been too idle following the Poison Sect on their Southern Expedition campaigns, so they do have some battlefield experience.¡± In comparison, Zhou Qing¡¯s 30,000 soldiers, who may be slightly better off, are carefully selected and have been trained for a few months. But the remaining 70,000 militia have questionable combat capabilities.¡± Therefore, if a real battle erupts, Zhou Qing may not necessarily win.¡± So it is urgent to withdraw from the southern three prefectures as soon as possible, taking advantage of the fact that the Poison Sect has not yet made up its mind to fight back.¡± Leading troops to reinforce Zhou Qing in the north has now become extremely urgent.¡± To achieve this, it is essential to establish a defense force and a rule of law in the newly pacified southern three prefectures.¡± Only in this way can we ensure the stability of local security and the pacification of the region. These tasks depend upon Sun Siwen. Facing the earnest expectations of both his good friend and his sovereign, Sun Siwen did not flinch or hesitate but directly agreed: ¡°If the general gives orders, his minister dares not to disobey. However, stabilizing the region, recruiting refugees, and restoring production all require a lot of silver tales.¡± Although the treasury of Luyang Prefecture is abundant now, there is only a surplus of more than 50,000 silver tales per month.¡± This sum is far from sufficient to support the three prefectures.¡± Without enough money, none of the above tasks can be accomplished.¡± It must be said that Sun Siwen is willing, able, and devoted to getting the job done.¡± However, some tasks, especially those related to governance, require a lot of money to be accomplished¡ªespecially to be accomplished well.¡± Without money, what will you use to pay the local officials¡¯ salaries? Without money, what will you use to recruit and appease refugees? Without money, what will you use to restore production? Without money, what will you use to establish the prefectural and county military and civilian units? In short, in this world or society, you can¡¯t get things done without money.¡± People can¡¯t be expected to generate love out of thin air, can they? What about the money from Luyang Prefecture and Lu Yuan? Sun Siwen is well aware of the situation on his end; in order to support the troops, nearly all of the money and grain have been exhausted.¡± If it hadn¡¯t been for the support from the court in the past two months, Lu Yuan would have gone bankrupt due to economics, unable to distribute military pay, and morale would have plummeted.¡± So the idea is good, but without money, it¡¯s impossible to do all these things.¡± ¡°You don¡¯t need to worry about the money and grain.¡± Seeing the distressed look on Sun Siwen¡¯s face, Lu Yuan chuckled: ¡°During the conquest of the three southern prefectures, although we didn¡¯t gain much in terms of food and fodder, we did reap a rich harvest of silver.¡± Upon counting the wealth of the three prefectures and confiscating the Miao People¡¯s property, a total of more than 8 million silver tales have been collected.¡± In addition, there are countless farmland and house land.¡± I can leave 5 million silver tales and those land properties for the usage of the three southern prefectures.¡± Because they were labeled as traitors by the court, the Miao People of Dongting had a lot of silver in their possession, but they couldn¡¯t spend it.¡± Although there were those who sought to profit from the national crisis by bravely selling weapons and grain to the Miao People, such smuggling activities could only deliver limited supplies.¡± Therefore, after looting the three southern prefectures, the Miao People of Dongting had most of the silver they had obtained left to gather dust in their treasuries and homes. As a result, when the southern three prefectures were captured, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t gain much in terms of supplies and resources, if any, but he didn¡¯t lose any silver assets either. In this regard, it could be said that his financial problems have been greatly alleviated. Chapter 326 - Chapter 326: Chapter 187: Governance Strategy_2 Chapter 326: Chapter 187: Governance Strategy_2 Translator: 549690339 Hearing that Lu Yuan had seized eight million silver taels and could leave five million silver taels and local industries, a smile emerged on Sun Siwen¡¯s face: ¡°With five million silver taels as support, there would be no problem.¡± In this world, many things can be solved with money. If they can¡¯t, it¡¯s probably because there is not enough money, or the money you give is squandered and not used for the intended purpose. Lu Yuan provided enough money, and Sun Siwen was an honest official. With these two factors combined, things were bound to work out. In fact, Sun Siwen took the initiative and immediately suggested: ¡°Linavvl Verisure From my journey from Luyang Prefecture all the way here, I have seen that the people in Yangshan Prefecture are all pale and hungry. It is obvious that they are living under the rule of the Miao rebels and in extreme hardship. Now that the three prefectures have experienced war chaos, famine is inevitable this year. South Sea Prefecture has always been a granary, but its southern location makes it difficult for grain transportation, so the price of rice here is very cheap. I heard that it is only four wen per catty. Now that we have opened up Yangshan Prefecture and restored communication with South Sea Prefecture, To protect the livelihood of the people, I propose that since we have pacified the three prefectures, we can send people to Lingnan County to collect grain. In this way, there will be enough supplies for the military and the people. With food for both the army and the people, the local stability will be restored.¡± Facing such a good suggestion, Lu Yuan naturally had no objections, and nodded: ¡°This is acceptable.¡± Having settled on the purchase of grain, Sun Siwen continued: ¡°Now that the three prefectures have been pacified, a large number of officials are needed to rebuild the government if we want to restore local order. Countless clerks may be needed, but more than 400 officials are required for the thirty counties within the three prefectures. Although I can recommend some talented people, at most a few dozen, which is far from enough to fill this gap. My lord, you must think of a way to solve this problem.¡± According to the custom of the dynasty, even for the lowest ninth rank, one must have the background of a juren. The newly reclaimed three prefectures have lost all of their original officials, so where can they find more than 400 juren in a short period of time? If this difficult problem is not solved, the framework of the government in the three prefectures and their counties cannot be established, let alone restoring local order. Of course, Lu Yuan can seek the help of the imperial court as he lacks sufficient officials. The imperial court owns eight prefectures throughout the world, with tens of thousands of juren and jinshi on the roll. Each year, they hold examinations and add thousands of juren each time. With such a large pool of talents, not only can more than 400 officials be easily replaced, but even if the number is increased tenfold, the imperial court can easily fill the vacancies. However, Lu Yuan has fought hard to win the three prefectures and is ready to establish a foundation here. Therefore, the appointment of officials here must be done by himself. Otherwise, when the imperial court assigns officials to you, deliberately placing troublesome people to passively resist and hollow out your power would mean inviting trouble for yourself, right? Sun Siwen has already acknowledged Lu Yuan¡¯s leadership, so when considering issues, he naturally prioritizes his good friend¡¯s interests. Therefore, seeking help from the imperial court was ruled out at that time. ¡°This is indeed a problem.¡± Lu Yuan frowned as he listened to Sun Siwen¡¯s explanation of the difficulties, and then said after a moment of thinking: ¡°In that case, you and Prefect Cui discuss conducting an examination in Shaoyang Prefecture and Luyang Prefecture. Those who pass can be promoted two ranks, transferred to the southern three prefectures, and serve as officials above the eighth rank. As for the remaining ninth-rank and regular ninth-rank junior officials, they can be selected through the examination in my five prefectures, picking capable and outstanding scholars for extraordinary promotion and granting official status. In this way, we should be able to gather enough officials for the three prefectures.¡± Both Shaoyang Prefecture and Luyang Prefecture are places that Lu Yuan has been operating for a long time. The officials in these two places are mostly loyal and trustworthy. As for the students, let¡¯s not talk about Luyang Prefecture as it has been under control for a short period of time. But in Shaoyang Prefecture, where Lu Yuan has ruled for several years, who among the local gentry and common people doesn¡¯t praise him? Therefore, the combination of internal and external examinations can be used to win over the hearts of the people in the South, as well as the scholars of Luyang and Shaoyang prefectures. In fact, these examination methods for selecting officials are almost equivalent to the imperial examination. However, the imperial examination belongs to the power of the imperial court. Lu Yuan is neither a local governor nor a central official, so he has no power to start the imperial examination. Therefore, he could only hold an irregular and unconventional examination for selecting officials. Nevertheless, as long as the list of names is submitted to the court, approval is almost guaranteed. As long as they can become officials, and the court can endorse them, there will be no problems. Moreover, there is an added benefit. All those who become officials or are promoted will naturally regard Lu Yuan as their benefactor. They will be grateful to him for allowing them to become officials, rather than being grateful to the court. With such a layer of sentiment in place, Dongting jurisdictions in the southern five prefectures would be considered stable from a bureaucratic standpoint. Upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s plan, Sun Siwen couldn¡¯t help but praise: ¡°If this is done, the gentry and students in the southern five prefectures will all admire the general¡¯s virtue.¡± This sentiment was genuine. What do scholars want when they study? Naturally, it is to become officials. Take Shaoyang Prefecture as an example: there are only about 400 scholars with a Scholar¡¯s Degree. Among these people, only five or six, or at most more than ten, can pass the prefecture examination and be granted the title of juren each year. Chapter 327 - Chapter 327: Chapter 187: Governance Strategy_3 Chapter 327: Chapter 187: Governance Strategy_3 Translator: 549690339 That is to say, among all the scholars in Shaoyang Prefecture, only one out of fifty people each year can be an official. Although this admission rate can¡¯t be considered too low, it¡¯s definitely not high. But when expanding the scope to the whole South Sea Prefecture, there is no need to mention the South Sea Prefecture itself, which has been devastated by the Miao People. Probably, there aren¡¯t many scholars left. But considering the size, there should still be about two or three hundred scholars. The situation in Luyang Prefecture is relatively better, and there should be about three or four hundred scholars. So putting all five prefectures together, there will be more than a thousand scholars. Lu Yuan held a selection examination and offered more than four hundred official positions for the candidates from the population of just over a thousand scholars, so the probability of being selected was almost a one-to-one choice. If the probability of becoming an official has increased by twenty or thirty times, isn¡¯t it good news for those scholars? They would probably kneel down and sing praises for Lu Yuan after hearing the news. And those who can read are usually powerful and influential people in the local area. Isn¡¯t it equal to stabilizing the local government if they are grateful for Lu Yuan¡¯s help? Therefore, Lu Yuan¡¯s move is an excellent strategy in winning people¡¯s hearts. But while secretly admiring him, Sun Siwen still raised a little suggestion: ¡°General, the examination for selecting officials is only carried out in the five prefectures of South Sea Prefecture. I think the scope is still too small. ??????,???????? ??????? ????? ?????? ??????. ????? ???? ???? ???????? ?? ????. In the five prefectures across the river, there are only a thousand scholars to participate in the selection of officials. This will inevitably result in a large number of people without talents getting official positions and repeating the cycle. Moreover, General has ambitions in Dongting. How can your grace be limited to the Nan River prefectures only? In my opinion, the decision of selecting officials should be extended to the whole prefecture. Even now, despite the disturbances in Dongting Prefecture, there are still three thousand to five thousand scholars left in various places. General can issue a decree seeking talents, allowing them to come to the examination. This will not only spread your reputation but also let the people of the prefecture know your rules and regulations and realize the legitimacy of the government. Furthermore, it could show kindness to the gentry and powerful families in the prefecture and win their loyalty. In the future, when you raise an army to revolt, wouldn¡¯t the local rich and powerful welcome the royal teacher with food and drinks? Moreover, if the whole prefecture can hold exams, then one person can be selected from ten candidates, thus promoting the best among them and making them useful. This will also be helpful to local governance. My humble opinion, please decide, General.¡± After saying this, Sun Siwen bowed and then waited for a reply. Lu Yuan listened and thought: ¡°Expand it to the whole prefecture?¡± Actually, the examination range could be extended to the whole prefecture. But in this way, it would also be like declaring to the court that he wants to separate the entire Dongting Prefecture. Such a thing, of course, the court would never accept. By that time, the court would take measures to suppress and disrupt the situation indispensably. And even more extreme, the court might directly regard him as a rebel and suppress him. After all, unlike the already ravaged Xichuan Prefecture and Jiuzhen Prefecture, although Dongting Prefecture has experienced long-term turmoil, the population is still quite large, and the output is abundant. If managed properly for a few years, it would be a major source of wealth and food. How could the court let go of such a big piece of fat meat? However, Sun Siwen has a point. If he can take advantage of the official selection this time and win the hearts of the entire prefecture¡¯s gentry and powerful families, it would undoubtedly be greatly beneficial to his future rule of Dongting Prefecture. So, what should be the choice? Lu Yuan stretched out his fingers and tapped on the table, falling into deep thought. After a while, he looked up and said, ¡°There is no need to rush the selection of officials for the whole prefecture. Let¡¯s do it this way. The exam for scholars will be postponed for half a year. For now, let¡¯s hold a selection for local officials within the three southern prefectures and set up the framework there first.¡± The half-year period is the time Lu Yuan currently estimates for himself to break through the Innate realm. As long as he waits for half a year, he can achieve the Inborn Grandmaster realm and become the pinnacle of martial artists in the world. By then, he would have enough strength to negotiate more terms with the court. ¡®In half a year, I can have a good talk with Yan Wangqiu about the conditions as well. I don¡¯t believe that the old man really likes to move to the poor Xichuan Prefecture and face the threat of the Zhou People all the time. Isn¡¯t it better to stay in the South Sea Prefecture and be a king here than in Xichuan Prefecture? If I can win him over, my bargaining chips in negotiating with the court will increase even more.¡¯ Lu Yuan thought in his heart, gradually becoming somewhat confident about his plan. Seeing his appearance, Sun Siwen didn¡¯t understand why he wanted to postpone the selection of officials for half a year, but he could also see that his lord and good friend had his own considerations. So he nodded and said, ¡°That¡¯s a possibility, but if we can¡¯t select officials immediately, relying only on officials above rank 8 to maintain local order, it may take longer for the South Three Prefectures to recover.¡± Lu Yuan waved his hand: ¡°No need to be anxious. All I need from you is to maintain the stability of the South Three Prefectures. Matters related to the restoration of people¡¯s livelihood can be carried out slowly.¡± Sun Siwen said, ¡°Then there should be no problem.¡± After discussing this issue, the topic of local governance in the South Three Prefectures had been almost settled. Sun Siwen wanted to leave, but Lu Yuan stopped him and brought up another matter: ¡°During this battle, I wiped out sixty thousand Miao Soldiers and captured another thirty thousand. Now, there are more than ten thousand Miao soldiers who have been dispersed and need to be eliminated.¡± As for the surrendered Miao Soldiers, their families can be pardoned. But those killed Miao Soldiers¡¯ families and the families of the scattered Miao Soldiers cannot be spared and must be dealt with. There are sixty thousand soldiers under my command, nearly fifty thousand of whom have no wives or homes. In the past, I promised the soldiers wealth and stability in the army, and now their wealth is abundant due to the loot. But their stability is still somewhat lacking. So, my intention is to distribute the wives and daughters of those sinful Miao People to my soldiers in batches. In this way, not only can the local population be replenished, but also the family members of the sinners won¡¯t be left uncontrolled, causing trouble. It will also allow my soldiers to have a family and fight for me wholeheartedly. As you return, count the numbers and then start implementing it. First, I will start with the tens of thousands of soldiers I left in the South_three_prefectures as a pilot.¡± There are at least fifty thousand to sixty thousand families behind the hundred thousand Miao Soldiers in Nanshan Prefecture, which is a population of more than three hundred thousand people. So many people, if left unchecked, facing Lu Yuan who killed their fathers, sons, and husbands, would naturally harbor resentment. But if they are rewarded to Lu Yuan¡¯s soldiers, then everything would be fine. With those loyal soldiers watching, those Miao People¡¯s wives and daughters would give birth to a few children for the soldiers, and eventually become content with their lives. In this way, local stability can be achieved, the populace can be replenished, the livelihood of the Miao People who have lost their men can be resolved, and the loyalty of the soldiers under his command can be gained, which is a win-win situation on four sides. Lu Yuan would naturally not let go of such a great opportunity. Of course, Sun Siwen could also understand this point, so after listening to Lu Yuan¡¯s words, he immediately said, ¡°This is a good policy, and I will immediately deal with this matter once I return.¡± ¡°Good, let¡¯s keep it that way.¡± Lu Yuan nodded in satisfaction and waved to let Sun Siwen leave. After the person left, he continued to bury his head at the desk and began to deal with the painful task of paperwork. There was no other way. Although Sun Siwen had come, the political affairs and military affairs of the South_three_prefectures still needed to be handled by him before the framework could be established. For now, he had to endure it. Chapter 328 - Chapter 328: Chapter 188: South of the Governor’s County Chapter 328: Chapter 188: South of the Governor¡¯s County Translator: 549690339 Sun Siwen left the government office and then led a group of his trusted followers to head back to Luyang. They galloped all the way, traveling day and night, very swiftly. As the people followed him saw that their lord was in high spirits and smiling since he had left the government office, they could not help but feel curious. Having hurried for two days and leaving Yangshan Prefecture, Su Tai, a guard who had followed Sun Siwen for nearly five years, couldn¡¯t help asking, ¡°My lord, I noticed that you couldn¡¯t help but smile after meeting General Pingxi and then hurried back to Luyang. Could it be that something great has happened?¡± Su Tai was a Jianghu guest whom Sun Siwen had taken in from Shaoyang Prefecture when he was newly promoted to be the magistrate of Wugang County a few years ago. With strength ranked third-rate and having trained four meridians, he had always served as Sun¡¯s personal bodyguard. After several years of staying together, Su Tai gradually gained Sun Siwen¡¯s trust. Likewise, Su Tai knew how close their lord was to General Pingxi. It wouldn¡¯t be an exaggeration to call them close friends who entrusted each other with their lives. So this time, after General Pingxi defeated a hundred thousand Miao thieves and regained control of the southern three prefectures, he hastily summoned their lord. There must be an important matter to entrust, and this was clear. But Su Tai couldn¡¯t quite understand that even if General Pingxi had an important matter to entrust, at most he would only ask his lord to move from being the Prefect of Luyang to that of Yangshan or one of the other two newly recovered prefectures. This was just a lateral move, and even the southern three prefectures had just been recovered and were in a state of decline, far less prosperous than Luyang. Coming here would only mean doing more work and trouble, not happiness. It¡¯s true that their lord was a good official who worked hard for the people and was willing to do practical work. But he wouldn¡¯t be happy all the way to now. Including Su Tai, more than ten people in the entourage felt puzzled. In fact, for them, leaving the increasingly prosperous Luyang Prefecture to suffer in the poor southern three prefectures was not a pleasing choice. However, if their lord were really transferred here, they would follow him out of loyalty. But they wouldn¡¯t be as happy. Hearing the inquiry from his trusted followers, Sun Siwen turned around, looked at everyone, and naturally understood what they were thinking. However, he wasn¡¯t angry. People followed him not only out of affection but also for the sake of a promising future and wealth, and no one wanted to follow someone to suffer hardships everywhere. Thinking that he would do many big things in the future and needed close people to help, he said with a smile, ¡°Well, there is indeed a great event. This time, I met with the general, and he appointed me as the Prefect of Yangshan Prefecture and asked me to take charge of the government affairs of Yangshan Prefecture. After returning, I will prepare to transfer officials and accompany me to Yangshan Prefecture for my new post.¡± Upon hearing this, Su Tai and the others thought, as expected. However, before they could continue to feel worried, they heard their lord say, ¡°In addition to serving as the Prefect of Yangshan Prefecture, the general also asked me to supervise the southern three prefectures. Besides Yangshan Prefecture, the other two prefectures of Jiuyi and Lingling will also be under my supervision. With such an important responsibility, I will naturally do my best to govern the three prefectures well and live up to the general¡¯s trust. Do you not think this is worth being happy about?¡± At these words, Su Tai and the others were all taken aback. After they had recovered, smiles also appeared on their faces. Some of them even looked happier than Sun Siwen. ¡°Didn¡¯t expect my lord to be entrusted with such an important task.¡± ¡°Yes, supervising three prefectures. Isn¡¯t this position comparable to a small governor?¡± ¡°Indeed, I always knew that the relationship between General Pingxi and my lord is very strong. This meeting was not to make my lord suffer. What other prefect in the world has the honor of supervising three prefectures?¡± ¡°With our lord receiving such an important position, we who follow him will also be prosperous and honored.¡± The many accompanying guards could not help but beam with joy, congratulating and flattering him. As the saying goes, when one man ascends, everyone around him benefits. With Sun Siwen supervising the three prefectures, the status and position of these trusted guards would naturally rise. High officials had high-ranking officials in front of their doors, and although their lord could not be compared with the prime minister, they could at least mix with officials of the seventh or eighth rank, right? How could they not be happy about that? ¡°Alright, don¡¯t be happy.¡± Seeing the guards getting carried away, Sun Siwen had to put on a serious face and said, ¡°I am telling you right now, you all know my personality. I was entrusted with such an important responsibility by the general and given the chance to supervise the three prefectures; this is his trust in me. So after taking up the post in Yangshan, you all must be cautious and not use my name to act recklessly, accept bribes or cause harm to the region. Otherwise, if I find out, everyone will be punished by the law, and I will show no mercy.¡± Hearing this, the guards looked solemn. Having followed Sun Siwen for a long time, they knew his temperament. They knew their lord was serious, not joking. So they all said, ¡°My lord, rest assured, we have followed you for so long, and you don¡¯t know our character? We would never do anything excessive that tarnishes your reputation.¡± Hearing their words, Sun Siwen relaxed slightly and smiled again, saying, ¡°You can also rest assured. I will not treat you poorly if you follow me. The southern three prefectures have just been established, and there is still a lack of various officials, inspectors, catch officers, and patrol inspectors in the prefectures and counties. If you can establish achievements, as close comrades, how could I mistreat you? Chapter 329 - Chapter 329: Chapter 188: Governor’s County South_2 Chapter 329: Chapter 188: Governor¡¯s County South_2 Translator: 549690339 By that time, when they are sent out, they could hold an official position and have a decent background.¡± Catch officers and Inspectors are ranked as Regular Ninth Rank officials. Chief Catch officers and Chief Inspectors are ranked as Regular Seventh Rank Officials. Although these positions are considered military, they mainly deal with local security and thief apprehension; hence, they are the direct armed forces that Prefects and County Magistrates can command. These are the official positions that Sun Siwen has the authority to appoint and recommend. Other positions such as County Captain and Commander-in-Chief, which are the heads of the military positions in a region, belong to the military system. It has always been Lu Yuan who chooses military personnel and assigns them to local positions. Local civil officials cannot interfere with these military positions. Nevertheless, having an official identity is quite exciting for many attendants. Therefore, everyone exclaimed, ¡°It is truly our fortune to follow Master.¡± Sun Siwen pointed at them with a smile, ¡°It seems to me that you consider it fortunate to be able to hold an official position.¡± However, this was just a joke, after which he didn¡¯t mention it again. After this episode, all the attendants had increased confidence in the future of their Master. On the way back, they were more positive than ever, putting in twelve times the spirit and effort into their work. Sun Siwen watched them secretly and constantly observed who among his attendants and guards could be selected for an official position outside. As the head of government affairs in the three counties, he naturally needs trustworthy people to help him. Therefore, cultivating some confidants at the local level is actually a common practice. On the contrary, not doing so would be considered strange. How can you supervise officials, promote policies, and achieve political accomplishments without a single trustworthy person? Not forming cliques may sound like an upright and decent thing, but it often means failing to achieve anything. For the state, that may not necessarily be a good thing. It¡¯s okay to form cliques, but don¡¯t be overly self-interested; being able to do this much already makes one a good official. After three days of non-stop travelling, Sun Siwen finally returned to Luyang City. Then, after taking a rest for one night in his mansion without much time to spend with his wife and children, he gathered the officials of Fu City the next day and announced Lu Yuan¡¯s order. A large selection would be carried out among officials in Shaoyang and Luyang prefectures. Those who are outstanding and selected can be promoted by two ranks and transferred to the newly recovered Southern Three Prefectures, taking on important positions. The exam, which lasts for a month, will combine past political achievements, reputation, and personal written tests to finally select qualified candidates. Upon hearing the news, many officials were extremely excited. This is a chance to get promoted two ranks higher. According to the normal promotion speed, even if an official achieves excellent results every year, it would take at least six years to advance two ranks. However, in reality, without a background and opportunities, there are very few officials who can achieve two promotions within six years. And not to mention, in the newly recovered Southern Three Prefectures, where everything still needs to be built, a little effort could easily lead to political achievements. With these accomplishments, wouldn¡¯t future promotions be much easier? So, if one could pass the exam, it would undoubtedly be a great opportunity to change one¡¯s destiny and rise rapidly. Even for those with a background, saving six years at once is an opportunity that is hard to come across in normal days. As a result, upon learning of this news, more than a hundred officials from Luyang Prefecture couldn¡¯t help but praise the benevolence of Pingxi General. Around the same time, Cui Changqing, who had received Lu Yuan¡¯s orders in Shaoyang Prefecture, also gathered local officials after a long sigh and announced the selection. Then, upon receiving expressions of gratitude, officials in the two prefectures began to prepare for the selection with great enthusiasm. The selection of officials this time mainly targets positions of Eighth Rank and above in the Southern Three Prefectures. With this rank, there are no more than a hundred officials in the entire Southern Three Prefectures. However, there are more than three hundred officials participating in the selection. This means that out of nearly four officials, only one may be chosen to advance two ranks. The competition can be considered fierce. Of course, when the selected people are transferred to other prefectures, some positions will naturally be left vacant within the two prefectures, and other unsuccessful candidates may still have a chance to advance. In general, everyone benefits in some way. But can these small benefits compare to larger ones? Therefore, all those with a bit of ambition have now begun to work harder. What is the direction of their efforts? Naturally, it is making use of this one-month period to achieve more, improve their reputation, become more familiar with government affairs and prepare for the examination. As a result, the local gentry and commoners in Shaoyang and Luyang quickly noticed that the once-highly aloof officials had become surprisingly diligent. Original procrastinated local projects were suddenly like donkeys whipped into action, with the officials racing forward at full speed. Long-neglected cases were suddenly handled by county officials addressing the grievances of the common people. Local petty thieves and criminals were met with a severe crackdown, and within a short time, countless prisoners were captured, filling the jails to the brim. The list simply goes on. It just goes to show how attractive the prospect of promotion is for these officials. The officials in the two prefectures, hung by Lu Yuan¡¯s carrot of promotion, immediately turned into fast-moving machines, racing forward at full speed. Chapter 330 - Chapter 330: Chapter 188: Governor’s Prefecture South_3 Chapter 330: Chapter 188: Governor¡¯s Prefecture South_3 Translator: 549690339 As time went by, amidst the bustle, the sixth year of Hongdao, the tenth day of the fourth month arrived. On this day, In the spacious hall of Yangshan Prefecture¡¯s Yamen, Lu Yuan sat at the main seat above while nearly a hundred officials, according to their ranks, stood in line and saluted him. ¡°We pay our respects to General Pingxi!¡± A neatly shouted greeting confirmed the master-servant relationship between them. In the days following the news that officials from Shaoyang and Luyang¡¯s two prefectures were to be selected, Within the South Sea Prefecture, it was rumored that the court intended to divide the land into fiefdoms and bestow the Jianghu Inborn Grandmasters with the title of sovereigns, and Pingxi General was one of them. The news came as a surprise, making people question its source. However, considering the court¡¯s moves in recent years and the fact that one Inborn Grandmaster after another had become the court¡¯s national teacher, it made them ponder deeply. Now, there is General Pingxi blatantly violating court regulations and selecting officials within the prefecture, yet the court had no reaction to this. The complacency of this gesture could not help but make many people realize that this news might be true. Some officials with even more accurate news had contacted disciples of the Nanhai Sect in advance, and they also confirmed this from them. The court¡¯s recruitment of the Nanhai Sect came with the condition of a fiefdom. As this news broke out, everyone realized that the heavens of Da Yue or Dongting Prefecture were about to change. From then on, the master would no longer be the court, but the current General Pingxi. So, facing Lu Yuan, who was not only their benefactor for promotion but also possibly their future sovereign, Many of the officials who had been selected in the past month performed the rituals reserved for their ruler, declaring their allegiance openly. Lu Yuan naturally felt very happy about this and said with a smile: ¡°Very well. You are all talented people from Dongting, and now I command you by the decree of the court to govern the South Sea Prefecture. I will need your help. Today, I will set up a banquet in the Yamen to treat you all. Drink and be merry, for the future governance of the three prefectures of the South is in your hands.¡± As Lu Yuan spent a busy month settling the three prefectures and selecting officials, the news of his conquering the three prefectures finally arrived at the court after being sent back to the prefectural capital. First of all, the court naturally praised his merits, affirming Lu Yuan¡¯s severe blow to the spirits of the Miao people in Dongting Prefecture after his great victory over the hundred-thousand-strong Miao army. At the same time, after the three prefectures were pacified, the Poison Sect lost its southern support, retreated to Wuling Prefecture, and saw its momentum greatly weakened, making it difficult to cause large-scale unrest. The court urged Lu Yuan to quickly defeat the Miao people in Wuling Prefecture and then return to assist Shangguan Ming in dealing with the Zhou people who had crossed the river southward. That¡¯s right. Almost two months had passed, and Shangguan Ming, with an army of eighty thousand, had still not been able to capture Anxiang County, which was garrisoned by the Zhou people, and force them to retreat across the river. The reason was simple: after a fierce attack on the city of Tianmen Prefecture for nearly a month, the Zhou-Chu United Army in Jiangbei, with a force of three hundred thousand, made a decision after discussing with several Zhou Inborn Grandmasters that they would urgently dispatch two Inborn Grandmasters southward to reinforce Anxiang County. In doing so, Anxiang County became home to a total of three Inborn Grandmasters, including Li Yanjing. As a result, the Zhou people now surpassed the court¡¯s forces in terms of top-tier strength. In addition, as the Zhou were defending the city and Shangguan Ming only had twice the number of troops, it was difficult for him to defeat his opponents without superiority in top-tier strength. After fighting for two months, Shangguan Ming had recruited tens of thousands of civilian workers from Yueyang Prefecture and led an army of more than one hundred thousand soldiers, resulting in the deaths of tens of thousands of people while still failing to capture Anxiang County. By now, the court¡¯s army was exhausted and had suffered heavy losses, with complaints all over the military and no strength to continue the offensive. Out of desperation, Shangguan Ming requested reinforcements from the court while sending a letter to prompt Lu Yuan to quickly deal with the Miao people and come to their aid. In response, the court made compromises. They agreed to Lu Yuan¡¯s request to be promoted to General of Pingnan, the Southern Commander of Dongting Prefecture, and the Chief Commander of the South Sea Prefecture¡¯s military and political affairs. At this moment, in terms of rank, Lu Yuan was now on the same level as Shangguan Ming. The two no longer had a master-servant relationship in terms of their positions. It was precisely because of this compromise made by the court that Lu Yuan openly received the homage of his ministers, putting on an assertive demeanor on this day. Because he knew that the court needed him at this moment and dared not turn against him. What was there to say then? Those who are needed often have nothing to fear. Lu Yuan seized this opportunity to expand his influence greatly; while selecting those loyal to him, he also spread rumors and step by step turned the five prefectures of South Sea into his iron-clad territory. Now, his efforts were beginning to bear fruit. After meeting with the officials of the three southern prefectures, Lu Yuan returned to the barracks outside the city after the banquet and left the Yamen to Sun Siwen. With his good friend managing the three prefectures, Lu Yuan was finally able to free himself from the tedious government affairs and concentrate on military matters without dealing with anything else. One could say that it greatly relieved his pressure. Sun Siwen also quickly took charge, and the next day he arranged for officials to take up their posts in each county and prefecture, setting up the framework for local governments. The many governance measures agreed upon with Lu Yuan before were also quickly implemented. It had to be said that after being promoted, perhaps hoping to get a good position in the new dynasty, the enthusiasm of these southern prefecture officials for their work was extremely high. In just one month, they bravely endured long days and nights of overtime labor, without a single day off, and implemented Sun Siwen¡¯s many policies. Inventory of the population, recruitment of refugees, initiation of local infrastructure, organization of people to resume production, establishment of the county¡¯s militia, sending people to South Sea Prefecture to purchase grain, arranging marriages between soldiers and Miao women¡­ One by one, piece by piece, although it cannot be said that they were all completed, they had almost begun, and subsequent steps only needed to be followed through to be completed. Among them, the first two items, the inventory of households and the recruitment of refugees, were quickly completed under Lu Yuan¡¯s close attention. Chapter 331 - Chapter 331: Chapter 189: Breaking through Innate Chapter 331: Chapter 189: Breaking through Innate Translator: 549690339 ¡°After a month of counting, Yangshan Prefecture has 23,000 households, with a population of 110,000. We have appeased 3,000 households of refugees, which is around 10,000 people. In total, the prefecture has 120,000 men and women.¡± Jiuyi Prefecture has 17,000 households, with a population of 85,000. We have appeased 2,000 households of refugees, which is around 8,000 people. In total, the prefecture has 93,000 men and women.¡± Lingling Prefecture has 38,000 households, with a population of 190,000. We have appeased 5,000 households of refugees, which is around 20,000 people. In total, the prefecture has 210,000 men and women.¡± In addition, within the three prefectures, there are 54,000 households of captured Miao people, with a population of 270,000 men and women.¡± Among them, there are 13,000 households or nearly 70,000 people who are families of surrendered soldiers. Due to the general¡¯s grace, they are granted amnesty and are now being registered as citizens to replenish the local population.¡± The remaining 41,000 households, with a population of 200,000, are being selected for suitable matches for soldier marriages.¡± As such, the total Yue and Miao population within the entire prefecture amounts to around 132,000 households, with 700,000 men and women.¡± Inside the barracks, Sun Siwen brought a stack of newly counted household registers and reported the work of the past month to Lu Yuan. ¡°Very good, not bad.¡± After hearing Sun Siwen¡¯s report on the population, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but clap his hands in joy, and then asked, ¡°Brother Sun, I remember that in Luyang Prefecture, by the end of the previous year, there were already 43,000 households and 220,000 people, right?¡± Sun Siwen had previously served as Prefect of Luyang and knew the situation there better than anyone. He nodded and replied, ¡°Indeed that¡¯s the case. However, two months ago, Miao people attacked Luyang Prefecture from the three southern prefectures. Although they didn¡¯t capture any county towns, many rural areas suffered and many people were killed or injured. During this period, there were also continuous battles, causing considerable losses among the local militia forces. By now, there should only be 210,000 people left in Luyang Prefecture.¡± Upon hearing the exact figures, Lu Yuan nodded repeatedly, muttering to himself, ¡°According to these numbers, the population of the three southern prefectures totals 700,000. There are 210,000 people in Luyang Prefecture. Before the Miao attack, I remember Shaoyang Prefecture¡¯s reported population was 51,000 households, with 260,000 people. Although currently Shaoyang Prefecture has experienced heavy losses due to the war, I believe that 200,000 people should have survived. In that case, adding up all the numbers from across the five prefectures, we have a total of 1,100,000 people. If we consider the territories of Wuling Prefecture¡¯s eight counties that I have already recovered, the population could be increased by another 100,000.¡± After doing these calculations, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but stand up and pace around the tent in excitement. Seeing this, Sun Siwen was slightly puzzled, wondering what his good friend and lord was thinking about. However, despite his confusion, he didn¡¯t interrupt and merely watched quietly. In the tent, Lu Yuan paced back and forth several times, his face changing expressions more than a dozen times, before finally stopping and turning to Sun Siwen, ¡°Brother Sun, I have a task for you.¡± Seeing the serious attitude of his friend and lord, Sun Siwen¡¯s expression turned grave, and he nodded, ¡°Please tell me, General.¡± ¡°I want to build an Altar for Worshipping Heaven, and the rules require that I need¡­¡± At that moment, Lu Yuan began to tell Sun Siwen about his requirements. As he continued speaking, words became insufficient to describe things plainly, so he simply picked up some paper and started drawing. Soon, an hour had passed, and the two had been talking for a long time, with many sketches piling up. Once everything was explained clearly, Lu Yuan handed the sketches to Sun Siwen, then solemnly said, ¡°Brother Sun, this matter is crucial to my future cultivation and must be treated with great care. Moreover, we must not draw attention to this affair. Look for a suitable location and have someone build it in secret. I am not in a rush for completion. As long as it¡¯s built within one or two years, it will be fine. Is this doable?¡± Perhaps you all have guessed by now. That¡¯s right, the altar Lu Yuan asked Sun Siwen to build was the very one mentioned in the Taiping Dao Book, used for worshipping the Heavenly Pillar and knocking on the Heavenly Gate. Now that Lu Yuan had unified the five prefectures of the south, he ruled over a population of one million. With this number, he had already met the minimum requirement to worship the Heavenly Pillar, which will allow him to perform a small-scale worship ceremony with a million people participating and draw the essence of the Immortal Spirit into his body for cultivation. That is to say, although he had not yet broken through the Innate realm and could not activate the Jade Immortal Fate, Lu Yuan had already satisfied the requirements for cultivation and could attempt to practice the Way of Taiping. He certainly wouldn¡¯t miss such an opportunity. And so, after listening to Sun Siwen¡¯s population report, Lu Yuan immediately asked him to start building the altar, preparing to try and worship the Heavenly Pillar and practice Immortal Techniques. However, it is still unwise to attract too much attention to such matters. From the previous example of how the Dan Ding Path openly spread its teachings far and wide, Lu Yuan could see that this cultivation technique was probably no secret in the entire Immortal Cultivation World of the Nine Provinces. Furthermore, not only the Immortal Realm, but also possibly the larger forces beyond the Six Great Daoist Gates might have some understanding of it. As a result, if Lu Yuan were to build the altar without hiding anything, it would be like telling the world that he was practicing cultivation. This kind of situation did not suit his steady nature. Because then there would be no way to explain why he practiced the Way of Taiping but, unlike others, he didn¡¯t die of old age. Immortality was Lu Yuan¡¯s biggest secret, and he would never allow it to be exposed. Therefore, secretly building the altar and secretly practicing cultivation became a necessity. As for this matter, Lu Yuan could bear slowing down the construction progress of the altar and the completion time, as long as it could be secretly finished in the end. ¡®After all, in another two or three months, I should be close to breaking through the Innate realm. By then, I¡¯ll have the Immortal Fate contained within the jade piece to explore its secrets, which should keep me busy for a year or two. I can wait patiently.¡¯ Chapter 332 - Chapter 332: Chapter 189 Breaking through the Innate_2 Chapter 332: Chapter 189 Breaking through the Innate_2 Translator: 549690339 With these thoughts in his heart, Lu Yuan remained calm. On the other hand, Sun Siwen, after hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s request, carefully considered it and said, ¡°The southern three prefectures are full of mountains and dense forests. If we want to keep it hidden, we can build an altar in the mountains. As for the builders, we can use those captured Miao prisoners. Once the altar is built, we can dispose of them to prevent leaks.¡± At this time, Sun Siwen, who was originally compassionate, had become ruthless and heartless for the sake of his friend. Of course, it could also be because he did not see the Miao people as human beings at all. After all, the destruction and killings caused by the Miao people in Dongting Prefecture over the years were all too evident. The once prosperous and peaceful Dongting had been ruined by them. Anyone with a conscience would feel unable to bear such resentment upon witnessing this. It was not strange for Sun Siwen¡¯s attitude to change as a result. As for Lu Yuan, he cared even less and decided to accept the plan, saying, ¡°Let¡¯s do it this way.¡± To him, building the altar at the expense of some Miao people¡¯s lives was nothing at all. Perhaps the death of these Miao people would bring even more stability to the local area. This could be considered a good way to make use of them. With this in mind, the construction of the Heavenly Pillar Altar was left to Sun Siwen to execute. Thus, the cultivation of the Taiping Dao Book finally took its first step. The door to the Immortal Method was not far away. Although the construction of the Altar for Worshipping Heaven has begun, it was destined to be a lengthy process. As Sun Siwen later reported, the location he chose was indeed secluded, but as a result, the transportation of various materials was extremely inconvenient. Moreover, in order to avoid drawing attention, the number of builders could not be too large. So in the end, only one thousand Miao prisoners were chosen, sent into the depths of the mountains under the supervision of Lu Yuan¡¯s trusted men, and began the construction of the altar. At this pace, it was estimated that the altar would not be completed until two years later. For the time being, relying on the cultivation of the Taiping Dao Book was wishful thinking. So, aside from devoting some effort in the beginning to pay attention to the situation, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t show much interest in the later stages, and instead focused his energy back on military matters. Now, with the arrival of officials like Sun Siwen in the three prefectures, local governments were gradually reestablished, and the basic order was maintained by slowly recruiting grassroots officials and official workers. Meanwhile, as Lu Yuan spent more than two months suppressing and purging the Miao rebels entrenched in the vicinity, who openly opposed the local government, these Miao rebel villages were eradicated one by one. Except for a few Miao people who were hiding in the mountains and were difficult to eradicate, there were no organized Miao rebel armies left in the three prefectures. The remaining Miao people hiding in the mountains numbered only a dozen or so, and this small number posed little threat. Thus, after assisting the local government in establishing militias in the prefectures and counties, the task of eradicating the Miao rebels in the mountains was gradually handed over to the local government. Lu Yuan¡¯s primary focus was then on reorganizing his army. As the local situation gradually stabilized, the fifty thousand civilian workers from Luyang and Hengyang Prefectures had long been released by Lu Yuan, allowing them to participate in spring farming. Of the thirty thousand soldiers under his command, ten thousand veterans were dispatched northward to join Zhou Qing, assisting him in encircling and suppressing the Miao rebels in Wuling Prefecture, as soon as the situation in the southern three prefectures stabilized two months prior. As it turned out, this move proved to be extremely effective. Because within the last two months, as news of the southern three prefectures being pacified reached Wuling Prefecture, it caused a tremendous psychological shock to the Poison Sect Miao Rebel Army. Upon learning that he had been played, Lan Zhaoyun felt both ashamed and deeply worried for his future prospects. So, in order to seek survival in the midst of death, Sect Leader Lan, upon confirming that Lu Yuan¡¯s elite troops were indeed not in Wuling Prefecture, immediately led his big forces in a massive attack against Zhou Qing¡¯s army. With the aid of the defenders in Chenxi County, Zhou Qing suffered several defeats after several battles. His civilian workers drafted from Hengyang Prefecture were utterly useless and terrified of the Miao people like they were of fierce tigers, often crumbling at the slightest touch. If it were not for the thirty thousand newly recruited soldiers supporting him, Zhou Qing would have most certainly faced a total defeat. However, even with the substantial reduction in his forces after tens of thousands of civilian workers were killed or dispersed by the Miao people, Zhou Qing was still forced to remain on the defensive and led his remaining forty thousand plus soldiers to stay in their camp, never daring to engage the Miao people in a direct battle. Nevertheless, Zhou Qing still felt somewhat overwhelmed in the face of the Miao people¡¯s ferocious onslaught. After all, while the soldiers under his command were called soldiers, they were, in fact, merely new recruits who had only been trained for three to four months. Aside from the title, they might not necessarily be stronger than the Miao people. As for the remaining civilian workers, they were even worse off. Although the Miao people had also suffered considerable losses after several major battles, leaving only over sixty thousand troops, Zhou Qing only had a camp to rely on, not even a city wall. Although he was on the defensive, his advantage was actually not significant. Under these circumstances, holding out was incredibly difficult. At the time, he had even made up his mind to lead his troops to retreat to Shaoyang Prefecture and hold out there. Fortunately, at this moment, the ten thousand elite veterans sent back by Lu Yuan had a lifesaving effect on the situation. These ten thousand elite soldiers of Lu Yuan were veteran troops that had been in the army for several years and had fought in more than a hundred battles. In terms of strength, they were in no way inferior to the world¡¯s powerful armies. The arrival of this army immediately cheered Zhou Qing up. He abandoned the camp defense, rebuilt his forces, and directly used the veteran soldiers as the backbone and the new soldiers as wings, leading a total of more than thirty thousand troops to formally engage with the Miao rebels of the Poison Sect . Chapter 333 - Chapter 333: Chapter 189 Breaking through the Inborn_3 Chapter 333: Chapter 189 Breaking through the Inborn_3 Translator: 549690339 And once again, reality proved that although the Miao people of the Five Poisons Sect were brave, their strength was not strong. In a head-to-head battle, more than 30,000 against 50,000, even with the advantage of numbers, the Miao soldiers were still badly defeated. During the battle, Lan Zhaoyun bravely fought as the vanguard, trying to turn the tide with his peak first-class strength. However, eventually, Zhou Qing gathered the experts of the Nanhai Sect and, with the help of the army, trapped Lan Zhaoyun in the midst of the soldiers. If it were not for the desperate rescue of the Miao soldiers and the sacrifices of the Five Poisons Sect¡¯s experts, the Sect Master would not have been saved. Otherwise, the Five Poisons Sect would have had to change their leader. Despite this, the left protector and right elder Bai Shu Xuan of the Five Poisons Sect died on the battlefield. Including the left elder who died in the southern three prefectures, the left and right protectors and the left and right elders of the Five Poison Sect were suddenly left with only the right protector. Originally, the first-class experts, who had just increased to five people, were left with only two in one day. As for the Miao soldiers, it goes without saying. More than 50,000 soldiers were directly killed on the spot and more than 10,000 were captured, leaving the rest to flee. Seeing the main force defeated, the defending soldiers in Chenxi County City didn¡¯t even dare to defend the city. They abandoned the city defense and fled. By the time Lan Zhaoyun retreated to Qianling County¡¯s old nest, only 30,000 people were left in his hands upon counting the remaining soldiers. More than 10,000 fugitives directly fled and scattered in the countryside and mountains, never daring to meddle in this matter again. ¡°Is the foundation of my Holy Sect and the Miao people¡¯s bloodline going to end here?¡± It was said that after returning to Qianling County, Lan Zhaoyun let out this lament and then spewed blood and fainted. Whether this was true or not, no one knew. But one thing was for sure, from then on, Lan Zhaoyun concentrated on hiding in Qianling County City, without showing any signs of sending out troops again. As for Zhou Qing, after defeating Lan Zhaoyun¡¯s army, he stationed his troops in Chenxi County City to recuperate and recover. After these consecutive battles, Zhou Qing had only 30,000 soldiers left under his command. As for the civilian workers, only more than 10,000 were left after the three prefectures¡¯ 30,000 people were divided. After this battle, nearly 10,000 soldiers and nearly 40,000 civilian workers were lost. With more than 50,000 casualties, the army suffered heavy setbacks, and it was impossible to fight without recuperating for a period of time. Moreover, even if they could fight, relying on the remaining 70,000 people, it was impossible to defeat the 30,000 Miao people stationed in Qianling County City. Therefore, Zhou Qing did not recklessly continue to mobilize troops but chose to rest and recover, waiting for his Master to bring reinforcements. However, on Lu Yuan¡¯s side, after receiving news of the victory in Wuling Prefecture, he had lost much interest in continuing to lead the troops northward to suppress the Miao thieves. In the entire Wuling Prefecture, out of one prefecture and ten counties, nine counties had been reclaimed, including the main city. Only the remaining Qianling County City was left, which was the Miao people¡¯s stronghold, with few Yue civilians among them. Yet there were so many Miao soldiers stationed there, making it clear that it was a tough nut to crack. Faced with such a place, Lu Yuan naturally didn¡¯t want to waste his troops and horses to fight bitterly against the enemy. After all, the Miao people had already lost 150,000 to 160,000 soldiers and lost the territories of four prefectures, their strength severely damaged and could hardly recover afterwards. If it weren¡¯t for the existence of the Inborn Grandmaster and some remaining strength, no one would take them seriously anymore. However, even with an Inborn Grandmaster, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s injury was recovering, and facing such a disparity in strength comparison, it was difficult to make any more waves. Therefore, Lu Yuan did not want to fight against those poor ghosts, forcing them into desperation. Instead, he planned to let them go. Otherwise, if he annihilated these Miao people, wouldn¡¯t it be the end of his excuse to stall for time when the court demanded that he lead his troops to assist Yueyang Prefecture? The situation in Yueyang Prefecture had become increasingly fierce recently. The reason was that the Northern Zhou people took advantage of the court¡¯s negligence and secretly sent a group of soldiers across the river. Although there were not many people, only 10,000. But even so, it greatly alleviated the predicament of insufficient soldiers in Anxiang County and the Zhou people. Now, after the replenishment, the Zhou people there had recovered to 30,000 soldiers. Shangguan Yang¡¯s army of the court, on the other hand, had been reduced to 40,000, with more than half dead or injured. If the gap in the grandmasters at the top level was taken into account, the strength of both sides had reached the same level. Therefore, Shangguan Yang did not even continue to besiege Anxiang County City at this time but instead led his troops back to Baling City to lick his wounds and slowly recuperate. In contrast, the Zhou people took advantage of this opportunity to regain several surrounding county cities, recover a large amount of food and fodder, and alleviate their own food crisis. The situation in Yueyang Prefecture had fallen into a deadlock. At this time, if Lu Yuan brought his troops over, wouldn¡¯t he just be cannon fodder for the court, letting his hard-trained army be wasted on this battlefield where nothing could be gained? So even though Shangguan Yang and the court kept sending messages urging him on. He continued to make excuses, saying that there were still Miao bandits causing trouble in the southern three prefectures and Wuling Prefecture, and he had to lead his troops to suppress them. Moreover, the heavy losses suffered by the soldiers under his command in the two battles meant that they urgently needed rest and recuperation, and were powerless to fight again. So he continued to stall in this manner. Therefore, at this time, the Miao people in Wuling Prefecture could neither be wiped out nor ignored, from any perspective. Under these circumstances, Lu Yuan remained in Yangshan Prefecture, training the 20,000 new recruits under his command while reorganizing the 30,000 Miao soldiers he had recruited from the southern three prefectures. Unexpectedly, the next time he went north, the 50,000 soldiers, along with the 30,000 soldiers under Zhou Qing, would total 80,000 soldiers, becoming his main force. The quality of these soldiers¡¯ training would determine his bargaining capital with the court and whether he could smoothly occupy the entire Dongting region, so it could not be underestimated. Time passed in this way, and another three months passed until the 15th day of the eighth month of Hongdao¡¯s sixth year. It was the Mid-Autumn Moon Festival again. On this day, late at night, with the full moon in the sky, Lu Yuan was unusually not staying at the barracks but had come alone to a quiet deep mountain. Under the pale moonlight, he sat on a green stone at the peak of the mountain, his eyes slightly closed. His body was surrounded by a blazing red light, gradually turning into a sea of fire, burning everything around him to ashes. After a year of hard work, Lu Yuan¡¯s lifelong Martial Arts cultivation had finally manifested an external body. At this moment, the Martial Dao True Intent condensed in his mind and suddenly rose above the sea of fire, gradually gathering and solidifying the originally disordered sea of fire into a flame shining with a bright red light. The fusion of True Intent and external body marks the completion of the outer cycle and the achievement of the inborn state. ¡°After sixteen years of bitter cultivation, today I finally understand the wonders of Heaven and Earth.¡± With his soul blessed, Lu Yuan got up, holding the red flame in his hand, surrounded by red light, and couldn¡¯t help but shout loudly towards the mountain ridge. ¡°I have succeeded in my path!¡± Chapter 334 - Chapter 334: Chapter 190: Northern Underworld City Chapter 334: Chapter 190: Northern Underworld City Translator: 549690339 [Name: Lu Yuan] [Talent: Immortality] [Age: 31] [Realm: Innate (Red Sun External Body)] [Martial Arts: Chi Yang Divine Skill (Mental Technique perfect, Palm skill major success, Finger technique, Sword technique beginner)] ¡°After sixteen years of transmigration, I have finally achieved the Innate Realm and reached the pinnacle of Jianghu.¡± Lu Yuan looked at his attribute panel and nodded with satisfaction while looking at the various attribute data, feeling extremely carefree. The Innate Realm, the pinnacle of Jianghu martial arts. Although there are subdivisions of First Innate Realm, Second Innate Realm, and Third Innate Realm of the Grandmaster Realm above this realm. However, these realms are still within the Innate Realm, belonging to the same major realm, and there is no essential difference between them. Therefore, when Lu Yuan reached the Innate Realm, he could already say that he had already reached the limit of martial arts. At the age of thirty-one, how could he not feel carefree with such an achievement? After a loud whistle for more than ten seconds, Lu Yuan finally expressed his joy, and stopped. Shortly afterward, he looked around. At this time, within ten meters of the bluestone ground beneath him, everything had turned into scorched earth. It had been roasted by his martial arts external body to the point of being unbearable. Seeing this, he retracted the released external body phenomenon, the surrounding redness disappeared instantly, leaving only the scorching temperature. With this, Lu Yuan sat down again and began to think about what came next after breaking through the Innate Realm. ¡°Now that I have achieved the Innate Realm, my Martial Dao True Intent has condensed.¡± Unconsciously, I feel a connection with Heaven and Earth. By releasing my thoughts, I can perceive everything within ten meters.¡± This is almost identical to the legendary Immortal Sense.¡± ¡°Now, maybe I can try to explore the Jade Immortal Fate.¡± As Lu Yuan thought so, he took out the jade from his bosom, placed it in his hand, and looked at it carefully. From the jade, a warm sensation spread through his palm and entered his body. The dark green jade, under the moonlight, appeared somewhat dark. However, with his true intent perception, he could now clearly sense that under the ordinary jade body, it contained an extremely huge energy. This energy seemed illusory, as if it existed in the mysterious and also in the touchable reality. ¡°Is this the Immortal Spirit Qi?¡± Lu Yuan felt the somewhat ethereal energy, a little excited and a little lost. The power rumored to change heaven and earth was simply obtained by him, but how could he use this power? Upon thinking of this, Lu Yuan closed his eyes, gathered his spirit, and began to slowly permeate his Martial Dao True Intent into the jade according to the methods in the Taiping Dao Book about how to unlock the spiritual restriction. Time slowly passed. In a blink of an eye, a moment passed. At this moment, Lu Yuan¡¯s body trembled slightly, his complexion slightly pale, and his eyes opened, the divine light in them difficult to cover. He looked excitedly at the jade in his hand. In the originally dim jade, a dazzling and eye-catching brilliance suddenly emitted at this time. This brilliance transformed into colorful hues, rendering the cold night sky into a beautiful painting. Then, these colors converged into a stream, turning into a small river, flying towards Lu Yuan¡¯s forehead. The brilliance touched his skin, emitting a warm sensation, and just as it flashed for a moment, the light entered his mind, melding with his mysterious soul. Immediately, there was a loud noise in the divine mansion, followed by a bolt of lightning. Endless information flooded Lu Yuan¡¯s soul. Breathing method, spirit gathering technique, magical artifact refining, Five Thunders Law¡­ Just like when he saw the Taiping Dao Book, Lu Yuan¡¯s mind seemed to have received a divine gushing from the lightning at this moment, directly transmitting a complete set of Immortal Technique inheritance. This transmission process lasted for more than ten seconds. Outside, the jade stopped emitting brilliance, and finally ceased. At this point, Lu Yuan still did not wake up immediately, but took another ten or so seconds to exhale. After closing his eyes and recuperating for a while, he opened his eyes and said quietly, ¡°Five Thunders Scripture, I couldn¡¯t have imagined that Brother Sun¡¯s ancestor left such an immortal fate.¡± Just a moment ago, the brilliance transmitted from the jade was actually a divine inheritance in the cultivator¡¯s world. This inheritance recorded a section of immortal divine intent in an object, waiting for future generations to trigger, and directly obtain the divine enlightenment, thus directly obtaining a part of the inheritance. The divine inheritance recorded in the jade was a Dao Law called the Five Thunders Scripture. The Five Thunders Scripture, the five elements of thunder: Gold, wood, water, fire, and earth. Cultivating this scripture can condense the thunders of heaven and earth and gather in the five organs, refining the five-element qi into a magnificent power. In short, this is a thunder technique. Cultivating this technique can control the five-element thunder and exert the power of heaven and earth, making it a superior and mysterious technique. The most precious thing is that the heavenly thunder is righteous and powerful. Thunder techniques are not only sharp and powerful, but can also ward off evil and eliminate filth. They are superior methods for dealing with Yin evil ghosts and demons or other evil creatures. ¡°According to the scripture, the Five Thunders Scripture originates from the ancient immortal sect, the Wind and Thunder Path, and is the basic cultivation method for disciples of the sect.¡± This cultivation method focuses on condensing the Five Element Thunders. The Five Element Thunders are the product of the interaction between the thunderbolts of heaven and earth and the spiritual energy of the five elements. Cultivators can breathe in these thunderbolts and spiritual energy, and according to the cultivation method in the scripture, condense the Five Element Thunders within their body. Chapter 335 - Chapter 335: Chapter 190 Beiming Youdu_2 Chapter 335: Chapter 190 Beiming Youdu_2 Translator: 549690339 For every Five Elements Thunder one condenses, one can practice a strand of Five Elements Thunder Qi within the five viscera. When the five kinds of thunder gather, it signifies the Five Qi Towards Primordial.¡± Like the Taiping Dao Book, this Book of Five Thunder is also an Immortal Technique directly pointing to the Five Qi Towards Primordial. However, the Taiping Dao Book is innately incomplete, and even after numerous repairs by later generations, it still has many defects and severe side effects. This Book of Five Thunder, on the other hand, has been sorted out by generations of ancestors and has been perfected to the extreme. Not only is it without any defects, but it also has many wonderful uses, making the two incomparable to each other. When Lu Yuan thought of this, he couldn¡¯t help but sigh, ¡°Brother Sun¡¯s ancestor was really lucky to obtain the inheritance of the ancient Wind and Thunder Path. This kind of opportunity is on par with the Six Great Dao Veins that are passed down in the world today.¡± Just now in that inheritance, there was not only the cultivation method of the Book of Five Thunder, but also the autobiography of Sun Siwen¡¯s ancestor. Sun Siwen¡¯s ancestor was named Sun Qingyi. According to his own account, he had been hearing various anecdotes about immortals since he was a child, learning about the magical Immortal techniques and legends, which then gave birth to his Heart Towards the Dao. When he grew older, he bid farewell to his parents and went out to seek adventures and investigate the traces of Immortals. During that time, by chance, he exchanged a Daoist book of the Immortal family with a blind elder Taoist in a broken-down Taoist temple, thus stepping into the door of Cultivation. However, that Dao Law was nothing more than the most ordinary entry-level Immortal Technique in the Immortal Cultivation World, which could only let a person draw Spiritual Energy into the body and cultivate magical power. It was even unable to condense a Qi. As a result, after more than ten years of painstaking cultivation and fruitless effort, Sun Qingyi could only return home in despair, disheartened from pursuing the path of cultivation. Later, at the command of his parents, he married a wife at the age of forty, and after a couple of years, he fathered a son, continuing the family line. But perhaps he was born to be a seeker of the Dao. After less than two years of newlywed bliss, Sun Qingyi grew increasingly disgusted with the tedious life. So, in the third year after his marriage, he resolutely left home once again, disregarding the scolding of his parents, the entreaties of his wife, and the tears of his son, embarking on another journey to search for immortality. Perhaps it was his firm Heart Towards the Dao that attracted the favor of his Qi Luck. Only a year after leaving home this time, Sun Qingyi and a Fellow Daoist whom he met explored an ancient ruin together, where he obtained the inheritance of the ancient Wind and Thunder Path. Overjoyed with this inheritance, he found a quiet and secluded place by himself, and relying on the gains from the exploration of the ruins, he started a whole new cultivation. Thirty years later, he achieved minor success in his cultivation, condensed the Golden Thunder Qi, and enjoyed another two hundred years of life. However, Sun Qingyi¡¯s era was only a hundred years from the present, and the Heavenly and Earthly Aura had already declined at that time. His cultivation had already reached the limit in this environment. Therefore, after realizing that he was trapped in this world and could not break free, Sun Qingyi developed the desire to leave, wishing to ascend to the Immortal Realm. However, before his Ascension, he thought of his wife and children, so he made a special trip back home. After seeing his wife and children and finding out that his son had passed the imperial examination and made some achievements, he couldn¡¯t help but feel proud and relieved. However, when he thought of his selfish actions over the years, he couldn¡¯t help but feel ashamed. Under a sense of shame, he left behind the inheritance Dao book he had obtained from the ruins, and even used a rare piece of Storage Spirit Jade to store enough Immortal Spirit Qi for a cultivator to reach the One Qi realm, along with the Dao book, which he left at home. He then instructed his son that any descendants of the Sun Family seeking to cultivate could obtain the Immortal Technique from the jade piece and lend them a helping hand. After leaving these words, Sun Qingyi drifted away, looking for his own ¡°Ascension¡± path. ¡°The Immortal Spirit Qi stored in this jade piece is much less than what Sun Qingyi initially said, at most only about one-third left.¡± Lu Yuan touched the jade piece, sensed the Immortal Spirit Qi it contained with his own true intent, and saw that the original fully stored Immortal Spirit Qi was now only less than one-third left. This small amount of Immortal Spirit Qi was clearly not enough. ¡°Although I have been giving my Inner Strength to the jade piece regularly over the years, borrowing the Immortal Spirit Qi inside to refine my Inner Strength, My Inner strength could not have consumed that much Immortal Spirit Qi.¡± So it seems that in the past, one of Sun Qingy¡¯s descendants listened to his teachings, took the jade piece, and practiced the Immortal Technique.¡± I remember when Brother Sun gifted the jade piece to me, he mentioned that he vaguely felt as if there was a voice urging him in his heart to take the imperial examination.¡± At that time, I guessed that it might have been his Immortal ancestor appearing to him in a dream, or perhaps being possessed by a ghost. Now it seems that this was most likely his ancestor who practiced the Immortal Technique from the jade piece, and did so as a remnant soul. Brother Sun is Sun Qingyi¡¯s fifth-generation descendant, and he has a father, grandfather and great-grandfather above him.¡± His father and grandfather lived in recent times, and they both lacked any inclination to cultivate in Brother Sun¡¯s memory.¡± Only Sun Qingyi¡¯s son, Brother Sun¡¯s great-grandfather, whom he had never met and had no impression of. It seems that it was his great-grandfather who was influenced by his father and decided to use the jade piece in order to cultivate.¡± Lu Yuan slowly speculated in his heart, gradually outlining the general picture. Sun Siwen¡¯s great-grandfather returned home after abandoning his wife and son for thirty years. At that time, Sun Siwen¡¯s great-grandfather was already over thirty years old. As an official with a bright future at that time, he probably didn¡¯t focus his attention on cultivating. Chapter 336 - Chapter 336: Chapter 190 Beiming Youdu_3 Chapter 336: Chapter 190 Beiming Youdu_3 Translator: 549690339 Therefore, that ancestor of the Sun family must have only felt fear when he was old and about to retire, approaching the end of his life, and ultimately decided to cultivate immortality. But at the age of fifty or sixty, his vitality had greatly declined, and it was too late to start cultivating immortality. So, even with the profound Immortal Technique of the Five Thunder Books and the vast amount of Celestial Spirit qi left by his father, that ancestor of the Sun family still failed in his cultivation. Eventually, he died in depression, leaving behind a fragment of his soul in a jade piece. Decades passed until the buildings in Sun Siwen¡¯s home collapsed due to disrepair, the jade piece was exposed to daylight once again. ¡°For this reason, after the fragment of his soul guided Brother Sun to become a Scholar and juren, it dissipated since it was no longer nourished by the jade piece. That¡¯s why Brother Sun no longer heard the illusionary voice after achieving his success.¡± Lu Yuan sorted out all the causes and effects, and couldn¡¯t help but feel a tinge of sorrow for that ancestor of the Sun family. When he was young, his father went out to seek immortal cultivation, leaving him to be raised solely by his widowed mother. Despite this, he was diligent in his studies, became a juren in his early teens, a jinshi (imperial examination title) at the age of 20, and eventually became the guardian of a county, displaying great innate talent. Later on, his father achieved success in Immortal Techniques and returned to his hometown to visit his family. If only Sun Qingyi asked for Immortal Techniques from his father at that time, he would have definitely been taught generously due to his father¡¯s guilt. With such a father to teach him, as long as he studied earnestly, he had an excellent chance to achieve a long life of 200 years. If he could have achieved this, wouldn¡¯t his accomplishments have far surpassed being a county guardian? But in the end, he ultimately missed that opportunity. Even though he realized his mistake later, it was too late, and he lost his chances at the Immortal Method. ¡°Cultivation to immortality, a single moment of contemplation makes the difference between immortality and mortality ¨C the fixed fate that has already been planted.¡± Lu Yuan shook his head and stopped thinking about the matter concerning the ancestor of the Sun family, instead shifting his attention to another matter. ¡°According to the inheritance, after Sun Qingyi had met with his family, he left again to seek the method of ¡°Ascension.¡± And the so-called Ascension method, as he said, was actually just passing through a place called Beiming Youdu to reach the Immortal Realm. In ancient times, the Immortal Realm and the mortal realm I now reside in were actually interconnected. The hub connecting the two worlds was Beiming Youdu. The Celestial Spirit qi of the Immortal Realm was transmitted to the mortal realm through Beiming Youdu, providing mortal cultivators with cultivation resources. But as time went on, for unknown reasons, Beiming Youdu, which was responsible for the connection between the Immortal and mortal realms, gradually began to close and the Celestial Spirit qi that could be transmitted became increasingly scarce, even drying up completely. This is the true cause of today¡¯s age of Dharma Decline, the depletion of Heaven and Earth¡¯s spiritual energy. Therefore, cultivators in the mortal realm, seeking progress, would go to Beiming Youdu in an attempt to enter the Immortal Realm through that place ¨C which is called ¡°Ascension.¡± Lu Yuan read through the inheritance memory in his mind, and couldn¡¯t help but feel strange at this point: ¡°So in order to ¡®Ascend,¡¯ Sun Qingyi went to find Ziyun Dao and made an appointment with the current Ziyun Daoist Master to seek Beiming Youdu together and ascend to the Immortal Realm.¡± It¡¯s Ziyun Dao again. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t expect to encounter Ziyun Dao again in Sun Qingyi¡¯s inheritance memory. Yue Country¡¯s number one Dao vein seemed to have far deeper hidden secrets than he had imagined. With that thought, he couldn¡¯t help but feel more wary of Ziyun Dao in his heart. But right now, he had no conflicts or intersections with Ziyun Dao, so he didn¡¯t think too much about it and continued reading through the inheritance memory. ¡°According to Sun Qingyi, although he had inherited the Wind and Thunder Path, the inheritance only briefly mentioned Beiming Youdu without specifying the exact location or direction. After all, in ancient times, Celestial Spirit qi was abundant in both Heaven and Earth, and even without going to the Immortal Realm, cultivators were able to cultivate all the way to the True Person realm within the mortal realm. At that time, only True Persons would specifically go to the Immortal Realm, and no one else would bother. And since they had cultivated to the realm of True Person, they naturally knew how to find Beiming Youdu, so the inheritance wouldn¡¯t specifically mark the location of Beiming Youdu. Fortunately, Sun Qingyi, after numerous inquiries, learned that the Ziyun Dao¡¯s previous generations always had Daoist masters who ascended, making them the most knowledgeable about Beiming Youdu¡¯s whereabouts among all the major Dao veins in the world. So he paid a huge price to obtain the opportunity to ascend with the Zhenyun Daoist Master, the master of the real Xuan elder Daoist, who was the predecessors Ziyun Daoist Master. The two agreed on a time, went out to sea together on the 23rd year of Datong, and searched for Beiming Youdu in order to ascend to the Immortal Realm.¡± The above is the last content of Sun Qingyi¡¯s self-narration in the inheritance. How they went to Beiming Youdu, and the outcome, are all undocumented. By that time, the person himself had left, so the inheritance could not naturally record the future events. ¡°Beiming Youdu, Two Realms of Immortals and Mortals, Ascension Channel¡­¡± Lu Yuan kept muttering these words to himself, his heart feeling complicated and indescribable. He never expected that the real reason behind the Age of Dharma Decline was merely the closure of the connection between the Immortal and mortal realms. Beiming Youdu, this place that Sun Qingyi could not forget, a place that has haunted countless cultivators over the past thousands of years, is it the truth behind Ascension? As the channel closed, the Celestial Spirit qi of the Immortal Realm could not enter the mortal realm, and that¡¯s why countless people wanted to Ascend. ¡°So when the mortal realm¡¯s last remaining Celestial Spirit qi is exhausted and can no longer support cultivators, will I too have to Ascend to that place?¡± Lu Yuan thought of the current state of Heaven and Earth¡¯s depleted spiritual energy, and couldn¡¯t help but contemplate his own future. Although he had the Taiping Dao Book, the book could only draw upon the existing Celestial Spirit qi in the mortal realm through the worship of the Heavenly Pillar. If all the Celestial Spirit qi in the mortal realm were to be exhausted, then even worshipping the Heavenly Pillars wouldn¡¯t draw even a trace of spiritual energy. At that time, if Lu Yuan wanted to continue cultivating, he would have to find Beiming Youdu, traverse the Immortal-mortal channel, and try to Ascend to the Immortal Realm. ¡°But is that channel really that easy to find? And even if found, is it really that easy to cross?¡± He couldn¡¯t help but think so, followed by a sigh. Chapter 337 - Chapter 337: Chapter 191: Five Thunders Dao Law Chapter 337: Chapter 191: Five Thunders Dao Law Translator: 549690339 Obviously, with a little thought, one can deduce that the path to Ascension is not easy to traverse. Otherwise, in ancient times, only those who had already achieved True Person status would venture to explore the Beiming Youdu. Now a group of people who are only in the Five Qi Towards Primordial Realm, not even Immortals yet, are heading to that place, intending to pass through the Two Realms¡¯ channel. No matter how you look at it, it¡¯s a case of nine deaths and one life; no, it should be a result of a hundred deaths without life. Even so, countless cultivators throughout history have stepped forward one after another for that elusive chance at immortality, gambling their lives away. The word ¡°Immortal¡± has indeed driven countless proud children of Heaven mad. Perhaps the pursuit of immortality and eternal life is an obsession and instinct embedded in the essence of human beings. ¡°Fortunately, I have already achieved this goal that countless cultivators are pursuing without formally starting my cultivation.¡± Upon thinking this, Lu Yuan¡¯s previous sigh of emotion instantly turned into relief. Not having to fight with Heaven for his fate or risk his life in adventures like others, how good it is! After feeling slightly thrilled and relieved for a moment, Lu Yuan let go of these distracting thoughts and focused on studying the specific cultivation methods in the Five Thunder Book. Unlike the Taiping Dao Book. When cultivating according to the Taiping Dao Book, the goal is to gather strength from the masses, and the final product is an aura of Taiping, which is a naturally emperor-like energy. On the other hand, when cultivating in the Five Thunder Book, the practitioner cultivates the Qi of Heavenly Thunder. This Qi is formed from the combination of Immortal Spirit Qi and the might of celestial thunder and lightning. ¡°So, to cultivate this book, one needs to find an appropriate thunderstorm day, and then use the Immortal Spirit Qi to infect the might of thunder, attracting it into the body, refining it and turning it into Heavenly Thunder Power.¡± Lu Yuan examined the cultivation tips within the Five Thunder Book, carefully studying the Qi Induction Art, Thunder Transformation Art, and Thunder Refining Art, gradually gaining insight. Following the above three methods, a complete set of procedures can transform the Immortal Spirit Qi into the unique Heavenly Thunder Qi, cultivating the Heavenly Thunder Power, and naturally employing the Dao Law would have an additional layer of thunderbolt might. Moreover, the Five Thunder Book also records a number of Five Thunder spells, some of which require little magical power to invoke. For example, the Thunder Sound Art displayed by the elder Zhen Xuan. If Lu Yuan were to cultivate the Heavenly Thunder Power, he could create Thunder Sound at will, terrifying people¡¯s minds and destroying evil spirits and ghosts, making it a very practical and basic spell. Alternatively, during thunderstorms, he could use the Lightning Attraction Technique to attract and direct lightning at specified targets. He could even directly unleash the Heavenly Thunder Power, creating a palm-sized bolt of lightning to attack his enemies. Aside from these, the Five Thunder Book contains over thirty other spells. Among them are strong and weak, high and low. For each of the Five Qi Towards Primordial Realm, there are five or six spells in each Qi Realm, which is sufficient for cultivators to utilize. Apart from these spells, the Five Thunder Book also records the refining methods of three magical artifacts. The first is the Five Thunder Seal, made by refining metallic materials of the Five Elements, then tempering by an immense celestial thunder for a thousand days. During this period, various lightning-attributed spiritual objects are added, and forty-nine prohibitions are inscribed to obtain this Upper Grade Magical Artifact. The second is the Lightning Attraction Sword, made with a thousand-year-old Thunderwood as its core and tempered by heavenly lightning for a thousand days. Various corresponding lightning-attributed spiritual materials are also added, with thirty-six prohibitions inscribed, making it a Middle Grade Magical Artifact. The third is the Wind Thunder Banner, weaved with spirit silk possessing both wind and thunder attributes and a rod made from one hundred years¡¯ worth of lightning-attributed materials. With twenty-seven prohibitions inscribed, it becomes a Lower Grade Magical Artifact. All three magical artifacts are infinitely powerful, and any cultivator who can refine one of them can dominate their peers at the same realm. ¡°However, it¡¯s a pity that in this Age of Dharma Decline, spiritual materials are scarce, and I fear that not even one of these three artifacts can be refined. I can only read about them now.¡± After reading the descriptions of the refining conditions for the three magical artifacts, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but shake his head and give up completely. In this world nowadays, people can neither play with nor need magical artifacts. Just possessing spells alone is enough to dominate the world. After all, cultivators like Anqiu who had cultivated some magical power were already on par with Martial Arts Grandmasters. And if it were a cultivator like Zhen Xuan who had condensed one Qi, that would be equivalent to a Martial Arts Great Grandmaster. With the decline of the Immortal Dao and the deterioration of Martial Arts, as long as Lu Yuan can cultivate magical power and combine it with his martial arts cultivation, he would be virtually invincible as long as he doesn¡¯t encounter a being who has condensed a Qi. If he can advance his Immortal Dao cultivation to the condensation of one Qi and his Martial Arts to the third realm of Great Grandmaster, then he would truly be unrivaled in the world, standing alone, and reaching the pinnacle of loneliness. Therefore, compared to the elusive magical artifacts, it is more realistic to cultivate step by step, and gradually enhance one¡¯s strength. ¡°According to the recent climate and astral positions, there should be a thunderstorm in seven days. Perhaps that would be the time to attempt the Qi Induction and Thunder Transformation, trying to cultivate this book.¡± Lu Yuan calmed down, looked at the night sky, and calculated the time meticulously, deep in thought. Having traveled with the army and battled for many years, he had a fair understanding of geography, climate, and astronomy. Now being at the Inborn Major Success realm, his senses toward the changing climate within Heaven and Earth had become more acute. With just a little calculation, he could deduce the fluctuations in the weather. Having confirmed the occurrence of a thunderstorm in seven days, Lu Yuan nodded inwardly before regulating his breath slightly and then headed down the mountain. Now that he had achieved Inborn Success, it would be difficult for him to make significant progress in martial arts within a short period of time. And it is not yet the right time to cultivate the Five Thunder Book. Lu Yuan, of course, would not choose to stay on the mountain and waste his time in the cold wind. There were still many things he needed to deal with himself. Chapter 338 - Chapter 338: Chapter 191 Five Thunder Dao Technique_2 Chapter 338: Chapter 191 Five Thunder Dao Technique_2 Translator: 549690339 On his way down the mountain, Lu Yuan remained low-key and did not draw attention to his breakthrough to the Innate realm. He was used to keeping a few hidden cards up his sleeve. Now that he had broken through to the Innate realm, keeping this a secret could potentially draw in a big fish. Just like last time, when Lan Cai¡¯er tried to assassinate Lu Yuan, she was full of confidence. However, due to outdated information, she didn¡¯t know that Yan Wangqiu was by his side, and her assassination attempt failed. As a result, the saintess herself was severely injured and had to retreat, which directly led to the massive defeat of the Poison Sect. Having experienced this personally and even tasted the sweet fruit of the situation, Lu Yuan was eager to replicate such an occurrence. His breakthrough to the Innate realm could be his new trump card, hidden from others. ¡°I¡¯m curious to see if there will be any new big fish hooked in, coming to take the bait,¡± said Lu Yuan with a sneer, somewhat proud. Watching his hidden cards accumulate more and more always brought satisfaction and joy, making it hard to resist feeling happy. After breaking through to the Innate realm, Lu Yuan¡¯s inner strength transformed into true pneuma, making his light body skill faster than before. So, what used to be a half-day journey only took him a few hours to complete, walking hundreds of miles of mountain roads to return to the barracks. When he returned to the camp, the sky was already bright. After having breakfast, Lu Yuan asked for Yan Wangqiu to be called to him. Just a little later, while Lu Yuan was drinking half a cup of tea, Old Lord Yan was already brought into the tent. After meeting him, Yan Wangqiu¡¯s heart couldn¡¯t help but be shocked. ¡°General¡­ General Lu has already broken through to the Innate realm?¡± Yan Wangqiu stared wide-eyed, his face losing composure as he looked up and down at Lu Yuan, growing more astonished the more he looked. Because with his keen vision and true intention perception, he could see that the South Conquering General in front of him had clearly achieved perfect pneuma and Martial Arts Xiantian. Although he had expected Lu Yuan to break through to the Innate realm, it was much sooner than expected. It had been just a few months since they had met and not even half a year ago, and now, Lu Yuan had already reached the Innate realm. Yan Wangqiu couldn¡¯t help but feel dazed by this realization. Was it really that easy to break through to the Innate realm? But if it was, why hadn¡¯t his sect cultivated an Innate practitioner even after decades of hard work? It must be because General Lu had an extraordinary innate talent that enabled him to break through to the Innate realm so quickly. But why did this thought make his heart even more sour? At this time, Lu Yuan smiled and said modestly, ¡°I was fortunate enough to have some insights recently and managed to break through to the Innate realm last night. I apologize if my achievement seems laughable to you, Master.¡± Yan Wangqiu couldn¡¯t help but feel even more disgruntled as he forced a smile and congratulated, ¡°General, with your Martial Arts reaching great success and breaking through to the Innate realm, you will become a Grandmaster in the future and dominate the world.¡± Lu Yuan waved his hand and said, ¡°Not at all. I have only just reached the First Heaven realm. I still have no clue how to practice for the Second and Third Heaven realms. I¡¯m far from dominating the world.¡± The highest level of his Chi Yang Divine Skill mental technique could only reach the pinnacle of the first class. The reason for his breakthrough to the Innate realm was the Immortal Spirit¡¯s energy in the jade slip, his unusually powerful soul since his transmigration, the natural accumulation of attributes, and the Yuzhong Guo Family¡¯s generations of research on the Innate realm¡­ Only with all of these conditions met could Lu Yuan smoothly break through to the Innate realm. But the resources gathered by these conditions barely supplied enough for him to make the breakthrough, using up almost everything they had. With no guidance or direction on how to proceed after reaching the Innate realm, Lu Yuan could only rely on his own comprehension and understanding. However, how difficult would it be for him to comprehend the post-Innate realm techniques on his own? Without any references, it would likely take him hundreds of years just to figure out where to start. Lu Yuan understood this clearly. Yan Wangqiu also knew the difficulty of this and said with bitter resignation, ¡°It is indeed difficult to progress after reaching the Innate realm. Our sect has been researching for hundreds of years, but we are still stuck in the First Heaven realm, with little progress toward understanding the Second Heaven realm. Not to mention the Grandmaster realm of the Third Heaven.¡± There are actually quite a few Innate sects in the Jianghu world. In Yue Country alone, there are as many as six in the Jianghu world. But among these six, except for the Liuyang Sect, all of them only have the inheritance of the First Heaven realm. Now, looking at the whole world and the Nine Provinces, there might be over a hundred Innate Grandmasters, but among them, only about ten people might be able to reach the Second Heaven realm. But among these ten or so people, not a single one has reached the Third Heaven realm. This is the reality, showing how difficult it is to break through to the Second and Third Heaven realms. ¡°It¡¯s a well-known fact that the further you go in Martial Arts cultivation, the more difficult it becomes. So for me to break through to the Innate realm and have a 150-year lifespan, I¡¯m already satisfied and won¡¯t desire more,¡± said Lu Yuan, echoing Yan Wangqiu¡¯s words. After talking for a while, he changed the topic and continued, ¡°However, there are many worldly achievements besides Martial Arts. Outside of Martial Arts, people pursue fame, fortune, and wealth as well.¡± ¡°Nowadays, the Court has established the Ten Grandmasters Plan, offering the incentive of splitting land and establishing fiefdoms to recruit people like us to serve them.¡± Chapter 339 - Chapter 339: Chapter 191: Five Thunder Dao Technique_3 Chapter 339: Chapter 191: Five Thunder Dao Technique_3 Translator: 549690339 However, the fiefdoms that were granted to them were either located in the barren wilderness or on devastated lands. As the Grandmaster has been living in Southsea for a long time and has become accustomed to its prosperity, can he truly bear to leave behind the fertile lands of the vast sea? Would he go to the remote Xichuan with his disciples and followers to fight to the death against the Zhou People?¡± Now that Lu Yuan¡¯s strength has broken through the Inborn realm, he has been promoted from half a chess player to a true chess player. In addition, with the support of over a hundred thousand soldiers under his command, his confidence has grown immensely. At this point, he no longer intends to continue hiding his true intentions. He begins to implement his original plan to unite with the grandmasters of Jianghu, support each other, and negotiate better terms with the court. The person before Lu Yuan, Yan Wangqiu, is his first target. ¡°What do you mean, General?¡± Although Elder Master Yan is older and has a great deal of self-restraint, he can¡¯t help but change his expression somewhat upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s almost treasonous words. But Lu Yuan just smiles, ¡°The Grandmaster should understand what I am saying. The court wants us to serve them, and they expect us to die for them, to fight for our lives. But the rewards they give us are very stingy. I have thought about it privately and found it very unfair. Why should we sacrifice so much, make such great efforts for the nation, and only be rewarded with half a county? Their six or seven families have produced only six grandmasters, but they occupy seven counties in the world. The four of us grandmasters can only share two broken border counties. As martial artists, we have always used our strength to speak for us. The court and those aristocratic families no longer have the strength, so naturally they don¡¯t have the qualifications to continue occupying such large territories. In my opinion, the nine counties of the world can each be governed by one of the four grandmasters. Only in this way can the distribution be fair and reasonable. The South Sea Sect, led by the Grandmaster, boasts tens of thousands of disciples and dominates Yulin and South Sea Prefectures. All the martial artists in Lingnan bow down to them. What a magnificent momentum it is! But now, for the sake of the court¡¯s meager profits, they have to give up their thousand-year foundation, abandon these two prefectures and take only half of a county, scattering their disciples even further. Isn¡¯t it tragic? In my view, even if the Grandmaster cannot obtain South Sea Prefecture, it is possible to negotiate for Yulin County from the court. At that time, although it would still involve moving away from their homeland, at least it would still be within Lingnan, not too far away. The disciples would be more willing to follow. Wouldn¡¯t that be nice?¡± Lu Yuan sincerely advises him. Yan Wangqiu listens, and his expression gradually changes from surprise to calm, then from calm to frowning, and finally from frowning to being moved. It must be said that Lu Yuan¡¯s words have indeed touched his heart. The leadership of the Nanhai Sect in the martial arts world of Lingnan is naturally substantial. There are more than 30,000 named disciples in the sect, and if the peripheral followers are included, the number is said to reach 100,000. Being able to gather so many people, the Nanhai Sect has naturally become deeply intertwined with the various factions of Lingnan, and they have merged into one indivisible entity. If Yan Wangqiu insists on moving away from Lingnan and goes to Xichuan Prefecture, thousands of miles away, the benefits that the sect originally had in the region will have to be severed completely. After such a cut, only a handful of the original 100,000 disciples will remain ¨C perhaps no more than 10,000 at most, and possibly only two or three thousand core disciples will be taken. In this way, even if the Nanhai Sect eventually moves to Xichuan, and establishes a kingdom there with half a county of land, the remnants of their strength will not be enough to maintain the newly built kingdom. A few years after establishing the new nation, it could easily be wiped out by others. There is a high probability of this happening. It is precisely because of seeing this possibility that after witnessing Lu Yuan¡¯s strength, Yan Wangqiu is eager to make friends with him. Unlike the Nanhai Sect, which is made up of a combination of various local forces, the troops under Lu Yuan are professionally recruited soldiers from various places. With a highly disciplined and unified structure, and with strict military law in place, there are no complex local benefit chains. As long as the General gives an order, all soldiers can move their families to any location at once. This is something Yan Wangqiu cannot do. Therefore, if he can form a good relationship with Lu Yuan, the two fiefdoms will be able to support each other, creating a win-win situation where Lu Yuan provides the basic soldiers and the Nanhai Sect provides high-level combat power. To achieve this, Yan Wangqiu is willing to risk making concessions. But it seems that things may change now. ¡®This newly promoted commander of the southern expedition has a big ambition.¡¯ Yan Wangqiu secretly thinks to himself, revealing an interested expression on his face. He says, ¡°General Lu, do you intend to turn against the court?¡± Lu Yuan corrects him: ¡°This is not turning against them, but rather seeking reasonable treatment and negotiating with the court. Are you willing to help me, Grandmaster?¡± Yan Wangqiu ponders for a moment: ¡°How confident are you, General?¡± Lu Yuan replies: ¡°As long as we can unite all the Jianghu grandmasters, we may not have a hundred percent chance of success, but I¡¯d say we have a five or six-out-of-ten chance.¡± The probability of success is calculated based on the court¡¯s actual strength and the immense external pressure. As long as the court does not want to burn along with the jade, there is indeed a more than fifty percent chance of getting the other party to compromise. Hearing this, Yan Wangqiu finally gives in and nods, ¡°If that¡¯s the case, I¡¯m willing to give it a try with the General.¡± As Lu Yuan said, who would want to leave their homeland and relocate thousands of miles away? If the Nanhai Sect moves to Xichuan, less than one-tenth of its strength can be taken along. However, if they only move to Yulin County, which is also part of the traditional territory of the Nanhai Sect, the area might be inferior to that of South Sea Prefecture, but it is still considered their homeland. If the Nanhai Sect relocates to this county and establishes a kingdom, at least half of the original strength can be preserved. With the support of tens of thousands of disciples, the foundation of the new country will become solid within a few years. By that time, who knows, perhaps the transformed Nanhai Sect will usher in a new era of prosperity? Needless to say, it is clear who has more potential between the 100,000 disciples and the millions of people, and which is more beneficial: having influence in two prefectures or effectively controlling one. If they can really obtain these benefits by following Lu Yuan, it is worth taking some risks. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Sect Master Yan. The court today is not the same as before. Following me, you won¡¯t be disappointed.¡± Seeing Yan Wangqiu finally agree, Lu Yuan can¡¯t help but feel overjoyed. Then he also changes the way he addresses the other party from ¡°National Master¡± to ¡°Sect Master¡±, indicating the change in their relationship. From now on, the two will be part of a smaller circle of allies within the larger group of the ten grandmasters. They will be considered close friends within their own circle. This intimate relationship is, of course, extraordinary. Yan Wangqiu also understands this point, so he smiles and says, ¡°From now on, I, along with the Nanhai Sect, will be relying on Sect Master Lu¡¯s care.¡± In the words of the Lord Master, he also dispenses with Lu Yuan¡¯s official position and directly refers to him as a suitable Grandmaster. ¡°Of course, of course,¡± Lu Yuan pats his hand, and then the two look at each other and can¡¯t help but laugh loudly together. Chapter 340 - Chapter 340: Chapter 192: Seeking Help from the Dan Ding Chapter 340: Chapter 192: Seeking Help from the Dan Ding Translator: 549690339 After forming an alliance, many things became easier to discuss. Lu Yuan looked at Yan Wangqiu, hesitated for a moment, and said, ¡°Sect Master Yan, since we have decided to negotiate with the imperial court, we must have bargaining chips and strength, so as to make the imperial court yield. Your sect dominates Lingnan, how many people can you gather with your full effort?¡± Yan Wangqiu thought for a while and replied, ¡°If the whole sect is mobilized and our vassals are called, I can gather a hundred thousand people, all of whom are brave heroes. If we involve more civilians, then gathering two or three hundred thousand people is not a problem.¡± The so-called brave heroes referred to those who had practiced one or two martial arts techniques. It¡¯s not that these people are necessarily very powerful; they may not even have Inner Strength and can only perform one or two simple moves. However, you have to admit that when these people fight, they are indeed much stronger than ordinary farmers in one-on-one battles. If there are a hundred thousand such heroes, then the strength of the Nanhai Sect is indeed formidable, worthy of being called the dominant Innate Great Sect in Lingnan. Lu Yuan was slightly surprised in his heart, looking at Yan Wangqiu. He didn¡¯t expect that this old man, who seemed to be old and declining, could pull out two or three hundred thousand people at any time. This level of strength was, frankly, not inferior to the Five Poisons Sect at its peak. ¡®No wonder the imperial court is so wary of those Innate Sects, always keeping their distance from one another on ordinary days. If every Innate Sect has such strength, If the five Innate Sects in Da Yue were to rebel together, wouldn¡¯t they be able to muster a million soldiers in an instant?¡¯ After roughly calculating the strength of those Jianghu sects, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but marvel and was subsequently overjoyed, ¡°Now in my hands, there are fifty thousand soldiers and thirty thousand Miao Soldiers. In addition, the various prefectures and counties can also gather up a hundred thousand county militias. With the combined power of our two families, we can gather four hundred thousand troops. With this strength, even if it is just two of us, the imperial court has to take us seriously. If the other two Grandmasters also have the same strength as Sect Master Yan, then the four of us teaming up can easily gather a million troops. With these troops as our wings and strength, and the four Inborn Grandmasters as strategic deterrence, This strength is no less than that of the imperial court.¡± At this moment, Lu Yuan had an unprecedented optimistic outlook on his plan¡¯s vision. With this kind of strength, is the imperial court still not willing to compromise? Even preparing for the worst, after they clearly-state their terms, the imperial court is still stubborn and won¡¯t agree to Lu Yuan and the others¡¯ opinions. Then the four of them could simply raise troops and revolt, seizing the territories they desired, and perhaps even more than they wanted at the time. After all, the main force of the imperial court now is either held down in Dongting County and Guangling County, or is far away in Jiuzhen County. The capital¡¯s troops can¡¯t move either. There are simply no soldiers available and no soldiers to dispatch. ¡°The other two Grandmasters should not have my level of strength.¡± Compared to Lu Yuan¡¯s optimism, Yan Wangqiu was more cautious, reminding, ¡°The White Phoenix Temple is located in Linhai County. It has always been the center of the six major families and seven clans, acting as the foundation for their power, and has always been strictly guarded against outsiders¡¯ interference. So under the repression of those aristocratic families, even though the White Phoenix Temple is an Innate sect, its actual strength is equivalent to that of a first-class sect. If the temple were to make an all-out effort, mobilize its monks, and rally its followers, it might not be impossible to gather twenty or thirty thousand people. However, gathering a hundred thousand troops is simply impossible. Moreover, within Linhai County, there are fifty thousand elite Forbidden Army troops and an Inborn Grandmaster guarding the area. If there is any disturbance in Linhai County, troops can be sent to quell the rebellion at any time. Therefore, that bald monk Jihui will never stand with us against the imperial court. He does not have the capital to confront the imperial court.¡± Lu Yuan said nothing in response. In fact, regarding the White Phoenix Temple, he originally didn¡¯t have high hopes for their support. The temple is located in the stronghold of the six major families and seven clans. Any disturbance would attract their combined firepower, making it extremely difficult to instigate any uprising. For this reason, the White Phoenix Temple was eager to break away from that cage, being the first to come forward and accept the court¡¯s solicitation. So, after a moment of silence, Lu Yuan asked, ¡°We don¡¯t need to worry about the White Phoenix Temple, what about the remaining sect?¡± Compared to Lu Yuan, who had always stayed in Dongting County and rarely ventured into the Jianghu world, Yan Wangqiu was much more familiar with the other sects. He responded, ¡°At present, there are still three sects in the Jianghu that have not accepted the court¡¯s invitation. One is Guanhai Villa, one is the Nine River Sword Sect, and one is the Liuyang Sect. First, let¡¯s talk about Guanhai Villa in Guangling County. Although the Qiao Family, the owner of the villa, is a Jianghu family, Guangling County is located at the intersection of Liang and Yue, and countless battles have taken place here between the north and south rivers for hundreds of years. Although the Qiao Family is in the Jianghu world, in the face of hundreds of thousands of troops, they could not remain neutral and had to choose sides to support. Therefore, Guanhai Villa is known as a Jianghu family, but in reality, they are closer to the imperial court¡¯s aristocratic families, frequently intermarrying and becoming close relatives. So, if the last of the imperial court¡¯s top ten Grandmasters is able to persuade Guanhai Villa, the Qiao Family will never join us in resisting the imperial court. On the other hand, the Nine River Sword Sect, which occupies Jianan County, is surrounded by no imperial power and has fairly good strength. But Jian¡¯an County, with only eight prefectures in its territory, has many mountains and few plains, and is generally impoverished and sparsely populated. Even if the Nine River Sword Sect occupies this county, they can¡¯t support too many disciples. With all their efforts, they might only be able to mobilize a hundred thousand people.¡± Chapter 341 - Chapter 341: Chapter 192: Seeking Help from Dan Ding _2 Chapter 341: Chapter 192: Seeking Help from Dan Ding _2 Translator: 549690339 As for the Liuyang Sect, that Master Yin possesses the strength of the second realm of Innate, and the Liuyang Sect also occupies the wealthy Yuzhang Prefecture. Unless one can take out the entire Yuzhang Prefecture, a mere fiefdom reward from the imperial court would be of no interest to them.¡± At this point, Yan Wangqiu paused and said sincerely to Lu Yuan, ¡°So, even in the best-case scenario, we can only unite with the Nine River Sword Sect, having three grandmasters and a force of five hundred thousand. The four grandmasters and a million-strong force you envisioned are fundamentally impossible to achieve. On the other hand, even if the imperial court is opposed to us, they can have at least seven grandmasters. In terms of strength, they are still much stronger than us.¡± To prevent his newfound allies from getting overly arrogant and making mistakes, Yan Wangqiu had no choice but to pour a bucket of cold water. As a result of this cold water, Lu Yuan also calmed down quite a bit. His previous pride and arrogance, which had emerged from breaking through Innate, were immediately washed away, and he became sober. ¡°Thank you Sect Master Yan for the wake-up call.¡± Lu Yuan bowed to Yan Wangqiu, thanking him for the reminder. ¡°No need for that.¡± Seeing that Lu Yuan had come to his senses, Yan Wangqiu couldn¡¯t help but smile and stroked his beard, ¡°You and I are now one; we shall share honors and disgrace together. This old man is still hoping that Grandmaster Lu can lead me in occupying a prefecture and establishing a kingdom.¡± To be honest, even though he was fully aware of the strong strength on the imperial court¡¯s side, Yan Wangqiu still had high hopes for Lu Yuan. Not to mention his personal strength as an Inborn Grandmaster, which is a deterrent anywhere he goes. More importantly, it was Lu Yuan¡¯s ability to lead troops. Traveling back and forth thousands of miles with Lu Yuan, Yan Wangqiu had witnessed firsthand how he defeated a hundred thousand Miao People and reclaimed three prefectures. Not only him, but Lu Yuan¡¯s eldest disciple under his command was also equally adept at commanding troops and fighting wars. Leading a ragtag army, yet still able to fight back and forth with the Eighty Thousand Army of the Five Poisons Sect, and eventually defeating them. Being good at using troops, with many capable generals under his command, and having over a hundred thousand soldiers and horses. In truth, the threat Lu Yuan poses to the imperial court is much more significant than that of the Nanhai Sect with their two to three hundred thousand men.¡± It is precisely because he has seen this clearly that Yan Wangqiu has so much confidence in Lu Yuan. With such a capable ally by his side and the imperial court being heavily pressured by the Zhou People¡¯s military force, what difference does it make if the ten grandmasters of the imperial court are assembled? If they were forced to, the two of them could join forces with the Zhou People. What could the imperial court do then? With this last resort in place, Yan Wangqiu still had some confidence. So, as long as Grandmaster Lu could remain steady, the proposal from the other party could indeed be done. Lu Yuan did not realize that in Yan Wangqiu¡¯s heart, he was of such weight and value. But now that he had calmed down, he had once again regained his steady character. After pondering over it in his heart, Lu Yuan said to Yan Wangqiu, ¡°I never imagined that the situation in Jianghu would be so complicated. With this in mind, I need to make some adjustments to my original plans. Sect Master Yan, what is your relationship with the Nine River Sword Sect?¡± Yan Wangqiu stroked his beard and said, ¡°Both our sects are located near the sea, and in the past, we had quite a few maritime trade transactions, so I would say our relationship is pretty good.¡± Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°In that case, regardless of whether the Nine River Sword Sect will join the alliance of the ten grandmasters, please ask Sect Master Yan to send someone to contact them, and try to persuade them to join my alliance. Jian¡¯an Prefecture is impoverished, and I suppose the Nine River Sword Sect is not content to be stuck here, is it not? Would it not be better for them to join the alliance and be granted a large prefecture as a fiefdom in the future than to be stuck in Jian¡¯an Prefecture?¡± Yan Wangqiu thought about it and said, ¡°I can do this, but I can¡¯t guarantee success. The Nine River Sword Sect is not like us; with a worry-free inheritance within the sect, they may not be willing to take risks.¡± Lu Yuan said, ¡°Whether it can be done or not, it¡¯s always right to try.¡± After finishing, he said, ¡°Since the imperial court¡¯s strength is stronger than we thought, now is not the time to confront them openly. In that case, Sect Master Yan, there should still be half a year before the ten grandmasters of the imperial court gather. Take advantage of this time for us each to build up more strength and increase our bargaining chips in negotiations. Sect Master Yan can accumulate arms and men in South Sea Prefecture, and I will take this opportunity to recruit more soldiers as well. Strive to gather more strength by the time we lay our cards on the table.¡± Since they couldn¡¯t rely on others now to achieve their ambitions, they had no choice but to strengthen themselves. So before laying their cards on the table, having more troops would be the best way to increase their strength at this time. ¡°This is a prudent plan.¡± Yan Wangqiu smiled and said, ¡°If we prepare half a year in advance, it will be easy for us to gather an army of three hundred thousand.¡± Hearing this, Lu Yuan nodded and said, ¡°Alright, by then, I will also raise an army of two hundred thousand to respond.¡± After saying that, he stretched out his hand, Yan Wangqiu also stretched out his, and the two of them struck a deal with a handshake. After discussing the plan to deal with the imperial court with Yan Wanqiu, both sides began to take separate actions. Yan Wanqiu dispatched his disciples on secret missions to return to the Nanhai Sect, and began to contact the sects and powerful families in various parts of Lingnan that had good relationships with them, making some preparations in advance under various names. Meanwhile, the Nanhai Sect also began to infiltrate various prefectures and counties in Lingnan, preparing to seize cities and create momentum once a conflict with the imperial court occurred. As for Yan Wangqiu himself, he secretly set out for Jian¡¯an Prefecture, intending to visit the Nine River Sword Sect. With Lu Yuan breaking through his Innate limits, his ability to protect himself had also greatly increased. Chapter 342 - Chapter 342: Chapter 192: Seeking Help from Dan Ding _3 Chapter 342: Chapter 192: Seeking Help from Dan Ding _3 Translator: 549690339 Therefore, with a large army protecting the surrounding area, he no longer needed the close protection of Yan Wangqiu. Yan Wangqiu¡¯s temporary departure only meant that he lost an Inborn Combat Power, and it was not a big deal as long as it didn¡¯t attract the attention of the court and outsiders. On the other hand, if he could persuade the Nine River Sword Sect to form a secret alliance, it would bring even more help. As Yan Wangqiu was taking action on his side, Lu Yuan also quickly started his move here. ¡°With this letter, head to Jiangxia County of Liang Kingdom. In the county¡¯s government office, there is a Five Lakes Business Association. Hand over the letter to the owner of the Business Association, and tell him it¡¯s from an old friend of Anqiu True Person, and he¡¯ll know what¡¯s going on.¡± Lu Yuan exchanged a registered disciple of his own and handed over a letter he had just written, carefully instructing the other party. ¡°Yes, I will definitely deliver the letter,¡± the disciple bowed and took the order and turned away. Looking at the departing figure, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but nod. When Anqiu True Person found him and presented the Taiping Dao Book at the Inescapable Meeting, he had once mentioned: If Lu Yuan was prepared to practice the Taiping Dao Book, he could send someone to deliver a letter to the Dan Ding Path, and they would provide financial support to help him succeed. Now that he was preparing to face off with the court, he was in desperate need of accumulating strength. Maintaining an army is really expensive. Although Lu Yuan¡¯s current soldiers and horses were temporarily supported by the court, he didn¡¯t have to worry about military pay before they officially turned against each other. But since he¡¯s planning to recruit more troops and continue to strengthen his own strength, it¡¯s inevitable that he¡¯ll have to face a new expense. The court won¡¯t support these extra soldiers and horses that he recruited. Previously, to cope with the emergency, the court reluctantly supported Lu Yuan¡¯s troops. At this time, why would they spend their own money to help this local Army Leader expand his strength? If they have spare money, wouldn¡¯t it be better for the court to recruit more soldiers and horses? So if Lu Yuan wants to expand his troops, he can only think of ways to raise money himself. Even after turning against the court in the future, when they cut off military pay, he will still have to think of ways to raise money to support the current fifty thousand soldiers. Although the previous conquest of the southern three prefectures earned Lu Yuan over 8 million silver tales, 5 million of them were already promised for restoring the local area under Sun Siwen. There are only 3 million silver tales left, which can be used for military expenses. Although the money is a lot, it can only support fifty thousand more soldiers and horses for a year at most. It¡¯s clear that Lu Yuan¡¯s financial situation is far from enough for his future expenses. Therefore, in order to avoid having no money to support the army in the future, it is necessary to take advantage of the present and get more silver before turning against the court. And looking at all aspects, the best candidate to do so is the Dan Ding Path, which had once promised him and also has enough strength to draw funds from. If he can get financial support from the Dan Ding Path, there is no doubt that it would alleviate Lu Yuan¡¯s urgent needs and give him more financial leeway. ¡°After all, the Dan Ding Path is the largest Dao Vein in Liang Country, and its status in the Daoist Path is not inferior to the Ziyun Dao Since they want to find me and conduct experiments to help them verify the Immortal Techniques, they can¡¯t be stingy. I don¡¯t ask for tens of millions of silver tales in support, but a couple of millions should be easy for them to take out. At any rate, I am an Inborn Grandmaster, and I am worth this price. As long as I can get 5 million silver tales, it will be enough for one hundred thousand soldiers for a year¡¯s expenses. With this money, I¡¯ll have more confidence when it comes to turning against the court.¡± Lu Yuan murmured to himself with a smile on his lips. Actually, he had never thought of revealing his practice of the Taiping Dao Book to others. Otherwise, by the time he practiced the Taiping Dao Book, his Lifespan would not be reduced, and it would be difficult to explain. So this time, asking Dan Ding Path for assistance is essentially deceiving them, making it a one-time deal. If the Dan Ding Path sends someone to investigate, just directly lead them to the secret altar that Sun Siwen is currently building. With such an altar there, it¡¯s enough to deal with the Dan Ding Path and deceive them into providing aid. By the time the silver arrives, and the Dan Ding Path asks why he hasn¡¯t gone to practice and sacrifice yet, there will be plenty of excuses. But no matter what excuse, Lu Yuan will never admit that he practiced the Taiping Dao Book. After all, with his position in Jiangnan, in control of a strong army, and as an Inborn Grandmaster, wouldn¡¯t he be untouchable as long as Dao Master of Dan Ding Path doesn¡¯t take action? And for the sake of just a few million silver tales, could it be that the Dao Master of the Dan Ding Path would travel thousands of miles to find trouble with Lu Yuan? That¡¯s just making a big fuss over a small matter. Therefore, considering all aspects, this business of deceiving aid is practically risk-free. Even if Dan Ding Path found out they were being deceived, they could only suffer the loss. Of course, just because he couldn¡¯t reveal the fact that he was practicing the Taiping Dao Book doesn¡¯t mean Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t demonstrate Immortal Techniques in front of others. For example, his newly acquired Five Thunder Book is very good. Complete inheritance, no drawbacks, great power, and it can be brought to light as a cover. ¡°I can secretly practice the Taiping Dao Book, draw Immortal Spirit Qi from the Heavenly Pillars, and then use this Spirit Qi to practice the Five Thunder Book. In this way, on the surface, I won¡¯t have much to do with the Taiping Dao Book, but I am a legitimate practitioner of the thunder technique. Moreover, the origin of the Five Thunder Book is easy to explain. Brother Sun and I are old family friends, and his great-grandfather Sun Qingyi was accompanied by the former Dao Master of Ziyun Dao to ascension. These are all things that can be checked, and maybe even Elder Daoist Zhen Xuan knew Sun Qingyi. Therefore, my obtaining the Five Thunder Book from Brother Sun has a foundation and origin, and it won¡¯t raise suspicions from others. And with the superior Immortal Technique of the Five Thunder Book, people can easily understand that I would not want to practice the life-shortening Immortal Technique of the Taiping Dao Book.¡± Maybe I can even use this as an excuse to stall for Dan Ding Path, saying that I got a new Immortal Technique halfway and didn¡¯t want to practice the Taiping Dao Book anymore. To answer where I got the Immortal Spirit Qi to practice the Five Thunder Book, I can just present the Immortal Fate Jade Plaat as the best evidence. Sun Qingyi left behind an Immortal Fate Jade Plate for his descendants, which I got and used the stored Immortal Spirit Qi to set foot on the path of Cultivation, which is logical.¡± Lu Yuan happily thought so in his heart and couldn¡¯t help but give a compliment to his own wit. With one ring after another, layers of covering would make it impossible for outsiders to guess that the Heavenly Pillar Altar was real, and he practiced the Immortal Technique of the Taiping Dao Book, with his Lifespan being reduced. Outsiders will only see a lucky person who got an Immortal inheritance left by his predecessors and miraculously embarked on the Cultivation path. Then, this lucky person, upon discovering that the path to immortality was broken, began to pursue the expansion of his power in the mundane world, wanting to become a king and emperor. All the truths will be hidden under the fog created by Lu Yuan. And his secret to longevity will be concealed forever. Everything is perfect. Chapter 343 - Chapter 343: Chapter 193: Five Thunder Enters the Door Chapter 343: Chapter 193: Five Thunder Enters the Door Translator: 549690339 After the previous series of battles, Lu Yuan¡¯s army, originally expanded to 60,000 veterans and new soldiers, had suffered a loss of 10,000 and was now left with only 50,000 men. Fortunately, through the big battle, the new soldiers had experienced bloodshed, and their courage and experience had been tempered. After several months of training, even the youngest among them had served for one year and could be rightfully called elite soldiers. However, 50,000 elite soldiers were still too few in number. At the court in Baling City, there were 50,000 elite soldiers, and throughout the country, there were more than 200,000. The Zhou people had even more, with hundreds of thousands of troops stationed on the river. Both sides far surpassed Lu Yuan. Therefore, to gain the qualification to negotiate with these two sides, achieve the goal of securing a prefecture for himself, and expand his army in the next round was already imminent. After arranging for people to go to Dan Ding Path to collect grain and silver, Lu Yuan then dispatched his disciples to visit three counties, Jianan, Southsea, and Yulin, to start recruiting soldiers. The recruitment quota was 50,000 people. Wait, why not recruit in Dongting and Yuzhang Prefectures? After successive recruitment by the court and Lu Yuan in these two prefectures, there were no more suitable soldiers left. While it was not impossible to recruit by force, the leftover rabble brought to the battlefield would be no different from the militia Zhou Qing had previously led: they would crumble in a single blow, unable to even defeat the Miao people and would not serve any significant purpose. Haven¡¯t you seen the difficulty the court faced in Yueyang Prefecture? Shangguan Ming did not even conscript civilian workers, knowing full well their inability to be utilized effectively. After these years of fighting, anyone with vigor and courage willing to choose a soldier¡¯s life had either died or already joined the various armies. Those who remained were either too afraid to take up arms or had been passed over by others. Thus, Jianan, Southsea, and Yulin counties, which were not core areas under the court¡¯s rule and had been less affected by the war, still had quite some vitality left. Throughout the entire Da Yue world, it was only these three prefectures that still had a substantial number of suitable soldiers available. As such, Lu Yuan could only recruit from these three places. However, he had already recruited quite a number of people from these places in the past. This time around, by the time 50,000 were recruited, there would likely not be many good soldiers left in these three prefectures. But that was just right. With all the elite soldiers and strong generals recruited, others would be left with nothing but rabble. As Lu Yuan¡¯s strength grew, others would become weaker in comparison. Under such circumstances, the gap between them would gradually accumulate. After settling the recruitment matters, Lu Yuan had more or less dealt with the military affairs at hand. Meanwhile, after half a year of governance by Sun Siwen, the southern three prefectures had gradually come back to life. Refugees in the region had been properly resettled. This year¡¯s autumn rice had been urgently planted and it was soon the harvest season. With the harvest at hand, and grain supplies purchased by Sun Siwen¡¯s people from Yuzhang Prefecture and South Sea Prefecture coming in, the livelihood of the people in the southern three prefectures was more or less guaranteed. During this time, Lu Yuan¡¯s earlier plans to hide his troops and assign Miao wives and daughters to his subordinates had been gradually implemented under Sun Siwen¡¯s arrangements. The 20,000 Miao households had quickly been assigned to the 20,000 soldiers stationed in Yangshan Prefecture, along with dozens of acres of farmland and houses. The southern three prefectures had long suffered from war, causing a significant decrease in population; furthermore, a large number of the local rich families had been killed by the Miao people, leaving behind empty and unclaimed lands. As a result, Sun Siwen had no trouble carrying out land redistribution in this area. With the establishment of new families, the population of Yangshan Prefecture instantly increased by 20,000 households. Soldiers hailing from all over the world now had families, putting down roots in Dongting Prefecture, and naturally developed loyalty for Lu Yuan as they were provided with wives, land, and houses. His foundation in the army grew even deeper. After the distribution of 20,000 Miao households, there were still 21,000 households left undivided. So Lu Yuan planned to recall some soldiers from Zhou Qing¡¯s side to change with the settled soldiers here; it was not reasonable to let them fight on the front line indefinitely. This took two months, and once the soldiers in the front and back lines had been alternated, the remaining 21,000 Miao households had also been assigned. As the new families were formed, the soldiers who supported Lu Yuan started to settle across the southern three prefectures. With the backing of these loyal soldiers, Lu Yuan¡¯s rule over Nanshan Prefecture gradually stabilized. During this time, Lu Yuan¡¯s disciples, who had been sent to recruit in the three prefectures, returned with 50,000 new soldiers. At that time, Zhou Qing sent a message from Wuling Prefecture, stating that the situation in the North was unstable and that the Zhou people and the Poison Sect seemed to be making some moves. To avoid any unexpected events, he requested reinforcements. So Lu Yuan simply took the 50,000 new soldiers and moved to Shaoyang Prefecture, training the soldiers while closely monitoring the situation there. As for the five prefectures in the south, they were left in the hands of the 30,000 soldiers who had just been rotated out, with no major problems expected. Shaoyang Prefecture City. Lu Yuan trained the soldiers in the barracks outside the city, focusing on the training of new recruits. Since breaking through the Innate realm, his martial arts cultivation had slowed down significantly. Without the next step in his technique, his Chi Yang Divine Skill had reached its peak at the Innate realm, and to progress further, he needed either to find a complete Innate technique or to switch to a new one. Chapter 344 - Chapter 344: Chapter 193: Five Thunder Enters the Door_2 Chapter 344: Chapter 193: Five Thunder Enters the Door_2 Translator: 549690339 Either he would rely on his own exploration to slowly figure out the next step in his technique. Neither could be done in a short period of time. Therefore, Lu Yuan withdrew his time from cultivating Inner Strength, focusing more on practicing the palm, sword, and finger techniques associated with the Chi Yang Divine Skill. However, for innate experts, the competition is more about external martial arts, and they don¡¯t use other techniques and martial arts as often as innate martial artists do. So, Lu Yuan just spent some time practicing these techniques every day, adding some hidden cards to his arsenal without overly investing energy. But with his current realm, even just practicing casually, the progress of these techniques was extremely fast. After several months of training, his palm skill was close to perfection, while his sword and finger techniques had achieved minor success, which could be considered quite fruitful. However, compared to these achievements, the results obtained in his immortal cultivation were truly gratifying. [Name: Lu Yuan] [Talent: Immortality] [Age: 31] [Realm: Innate (Chi Yang¡¯s external body); Five Thunder Books (Initial Mana)] [Martial Arts: Chi Yang Divine Skill (Mental Technique perfected, Palm skill perfected, Finger Technique, Sword Technique minor success)] His gaze swept across the rows of attributes and eventually landed on the realm page of the Five Lightning Books. Seeing the specific data in the details page, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but nod in satisfaction. Since he broke through the Innate realm, he had been diligently cultivating the Five Lightning Books after opening the jade slip containing them. However, Lu Yuan had never had any experience before, and even following the instructions in the book, his cultivation was still extremely difficult. Especially for the techniques in the Five Lightning Books, one needs to resonate Immortal Spirit Qi with thunder, and ultimately obtain Heavenly Lightning Qi for cultivation. This step of resonating with lightning almost made him vomit blood. First of all, one must cultivate on stormy days, let alone pick the right ones. The success rate of resonating with lightning alone was infuriatingly low. Lu Yuan mobilized the Immortal Spirit Qi in the jade slip with his true intent and tried more than a hundred times to resonate with lightning as described in the Five Lightning Books, but all ended in failure. Not only did this waste time, but it also consumed a lot of precious Immortal Spirit Qi, which pained him greatly. It must be known that this Immortal Spirit Qi is used up bit by bit. In this mortal world, they are limited. Once wasted, they will no longer be available for future cultivation. Fortunately, these countless failures were not in vain. Last month, during the first rumble of winter thunder, Lu Yuan was suddenly enlightened about the wonders of resonating with lightning and successfully transformed a trace of Heavenly Lightning Qi. He then guided the Qi into his body and cultivated his first bit of mana, which opened the Immortal Dao Gate. Once this gate was opened, it could not be stopped. In the past month, Lu Yuan took advantage of three stormy days to cultivate more than ten strands of Heavenly Lightning Qi, further increasing his mana. ¡°Now, my mana should be sufficient to perform some basic spells. However, since I¡¯ve never practiced any spells before, I¡¯m afraid using them directly would result in failure and waste the mana I¡¯ve cultivated so painstakingly.¡± Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel speechless at this thought. In the Age of Dharma Decline, cultivating immortality is indeed difficult. Accumulating mana requires careful calculation. Practicing spells requires even more precision. One wishes to split each bit of mana into several parts for use. Despite that, life is still quite tight. ¡°Forget it, before I worship the Heavenly Pillars, cultivate the Taiping Dao Book, and obtain another source of Immortal Spirit Qi, I should just focus on accumulating mana for now. As for other spells, don¡¯t think too much about it. After all, I¡¯m already an innate martial artist now. Even without spells, I may not be worse off than those cultivators who know how to use them.¡± With these thoughts, Lu Yuan¡¯s mood improved considerably. The external body of Innate Fighters can manifest various phenomena and cover an area of ten zhang radius. In a sense, this technique is already equivalent to divine powers and spells. Compared to low-level spells, it is not necessarily inferior. What¡¯s more, the external body of Martial Arts consumes True Qi, which can be restored by martial artists with some time to recuperate. But for cultivators who have exhausted their mana, it is unknown how much Immortal Spirit Qi they have to cultivate, and how many years and months it will take to recover. In the Age of Dharma Decline, the constraints on cultivators are much greater than those on martial artists. This is also the reason why Lu Yuan, despite starting his immortal cultivation, did not give up martial arts but continued to invest time and energy in it, aiming for a deeper realm. Although the power and potential of martial arts are far less than immortal cultivation, the advantage of martial arts is its lower consumption. In this world, having such an advantage is enough. Therefore, apart from stormy days when Lu Yuan would practice resonating with lightning on time, he spent more time practicing martial arts on ordinary days. He practiced various techniques and continued to study Taoist scriptures, trying to research the next level of techniques after the Innate realm. However, this matter was destined to be lengthy. Without decades or even hundreds of years, it would be difficult to achieve any results. But in order to achieve something in immortal cultivation, it seems that it will take decades or even hundreds of years to see any results at the current pace. With both sides progressing slowly, Lu Yuan could only take his time and let time grind away. Fortunately, his lifespan was long, so he didn¡¯t have to worry about running out of time and could afford to be patient. This year, for the people of Wuling County, whether from the Yue or Miao ethnicities, life was difficult to endure. When the Poison Sect was still around, the Miao people had to contribute men for war, while the local Yue people had to pay money and food, being squeezed for every last drop of blood and fat. Chapter 345 - Chapter 345: Chapter 193: Five Thunder Enters the Door_3 Chapter 345: Chapter 193: Five Thunder Enters the Door_3 Translator: 549690339 Now that the Five Poisons Sect had retreated to their old nest, the imperial troops had returned. But the situation didn¡¯t seem to have improved. Although the Miao people¡¯s exploitation was gone, the imperial levies followed closely. This year, due to the conscription of too many civilian workers in Hengyang Prefecture, the grain production of summer and autumn was greatly reduced. There was not only insufficient grain supply for the army, but even feeding their own families had become a problem. Under such circumstances, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t continue to exploit the people either. After all, they had sent 80,000 people to help him in the war, providing grain and money in the process, doing everything they could. To levy grain and taxes on them now would be driving the people of Hengyang Prefecture to their deaths. Lu Yuan now regarded Dongting County as his own territory, and the people of Hengyang Prefecture would be his people in the future too. Driving people to death now would only give him a mess to deal with when he took over. It would also provoke the resentment of the local people, making his rule unstable. He would, of course, not do such a thankless task. But the dilemma was that the army still needed food. To feed over a hundred thousand people, the imperial court could supply a portion, but most of it still needed Lu Yuan to figure it out. Fortunately, over the past two years, he had continuously bought grain from other prefectures, and through several purchases in Luyang Prefecture and Yangshan Prefecture had already stored more than a million Shi of grain. In addition to that produced by Luyang Prefecture, it was barely enough for the use of his army. However, transporting it from Luyang Prefecture and Yangshan Prefecture over long distances caused great losses. So, it was better to use locally sourced grain than to go through long-distance transportation. As a result, the people of Shaoyang Prefecture and Wuling Prefecture were the ones who had to suffer. But, fortunately, this kind of hardship would not last too long and wouldn¡¯t really drive people to death. On this day. Zhou Qing hurried back from Wuling County and arrived at the barracks outside Fu City. After meeting Lu Yuan, he brought some news. ¡°The Five Poisons Sect wants to make peace with me?¡± Lu Yuan was astonished to hear the news his disciple had brought back. ¡°Yes. In Qianling County, the Five Poisons Sect sent people to send a message, tentatively asking for peace.¡± Zhou Qing nodded and continued, ¡°They offered the condition to leave only Qianling County as a place for the Miao people to live. In return, they were willing to offer money and grain to the imperial court and even provide soldiers, sending the Miao people to fight for us.¡± Upon hearing these conditions, Lu Yuan could not help but sneer: ¡°Now the Five Poisons Sect is like a trapped fish in a jar, a corpse in a tomb. If I were to eliminate them, wouldn¡¯t all their promises be mine? Why would I need them for tribute and supply of soldiers when I can collect levies and taxes myself for even more?¡± ¡°Do they think I would agree to keep such a hidden threat and maintain a state within a state in Wuling Prefecture?¡± No matter how submissive the Five Poisons Sect might sound now, offering money and soldiers like a vassal, the grudges between the two parties have long been as deep as the sea, impossible to wash away. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t believe the other party would submit willingly and serve him wholeheartedly. The reason they were submitting now, too, was only because of having exhausted their strength and only to gain some time to recover their strength. How could he fall for such an obvious plot? As the saying goes, ¡°Take advantage of one¡¯s sickness and seek one¡¯s life.¡± Taking advantage of the Five Poisons Sect¡¯s weakest moment to destroy them was the only correct choice. But, the Five Poisons Sect must have considered this too. Zhou Qing then said, ¡°The Five Poisons Sect is indeed calculating to their advantage. But in their hands, there is still an Inborn Grandmaster. The messenger from the Five Poisons Sect said to me: If we do not agree to make peace, even if their sect can be destroyed and their people wiped out, Lan Cai¡¯er, the Saintess of the Five Poisons Sect, will escape into Jianghu and target us exclusively for assassination and sneak attacks from then on.¡± ¡°So whether it¡¯s war or peace, let us think it through.¡± Zhou Qing couldn¡¯t help but smile bitterly when he said this. Even Lu Yuan¡¯s expression changed slightly. It had to be said that the Five Poisons Sect had hit his weak spot with this tactic. Although Lu Yuan was now an Inborn Grandmaster and no longer feared Lan Cai¡¯er of the Five Poisons Sect, she might not be able to do anything to him personally, but she could hurt the soldiers and officers under his command. A single Inborn Grandmaster, as long as they were willing to stoop to carrying out assassinations and sneak attacks, could cause destruction beyond imagination. All Lan Cai¡¯er had to do was kill a county officer one day, then another county the next day, and within a year all the officers under Lu Yuan¡¯s command would be wiped out. Similarly, if she killed a hundred of Lu Yuan¡¯s soldiers today and another hundred tomorrow, the army would eventually crumble within a year or two. This kind of bottomless destructive tactic, combined with the martial prowess of an Inborn Grandmaster, would be as intimidating as a walking nuclear bomb, causing great anxiety once detonated once or twice. Previously, the Inborn Grandmasters of various forces had families and businesses under them, so they were wary of each other and dared not engage in such bottomless acts. But now the impending doom of the Five Poisons Sect and the threat of annihilation for the Miao people, had clearly driven them to desperation. So, they used Lan Cai¡¯er, their Saintess, to threaten Lu Yuan. But, once this tactic was employed, it really hit his weak spot. After a long grim silence, Lu Yuan reconsidered his options and felt that his chances of successfully hunting down an Inborn Grandmaster were still too low. Finally, he raised his head and said, ¡°I can talk about making peace with the Five Poisons Sect. But their conditions are too low, and without any guarantee, how can I believe they really want peace and are not trying to deceive me? So, if they want to negotiate and make peace, it¡¯s possible. But to show sincerity, let the leader of the Five Poisons Sect come and talk to me personally. I¡¯ll be waiting for him here.¡± Lu Yuan laid out his conditions. He wanted Lan Zhao Yun to come over and talk to him personally. As for Lan Cai¡¯er, he didn¡¯t mention her name. It was clear that now that she had issued the fierce threat, this nuclear deterrent would not be placed in front of him, giving him the opportunity to take advantage of the situation and eliminate her. ¡°Alright, after I return, I will immediately contact the Five Poisons Sect and inform Master of the conditions.¡± Zhou Qing nodded and agreed decisively. Chapter 346 - Chapter 346: Chapter 194: Discussion on Extermination of the Clan Chapter 346: Chapter 194: Discussion on Extermination of the Clan Translator: 549690339 After finishing the conversation about the Five Poisons Sect, Lu Yuan turned his gaze towards his disciple, carefully observing him for a few moments before laughing, ¡°You did a good job this time. Even as your master, I didn¡¯t expect that, when faced with the massive invasion of the Five Poisons Sect, you¡¯d not only be able to withstand the assault but also achieve a large-scale victory. You even managed to force Lan Zhaoyun to retreat back to his old nest, and now he¡¯s come to seek peace.¡± He was genuinely satisfied with this disciple of his. Not only was he filial, but his abilities were also extraordinary. Whether it was practicing martial arts or leading an army, he was top-notch. Having Zhou Qing¡¯s assistance saved Lu Yuan a lot of effort and allowed him to benefit greatly. Even his breakthrough to the Innate realm now was partly due to the other party¡¯s contributions. All of these factors made him feel even more affection and protection towards this disciple. ¡°It¡¯s thanks to the timely reinforcements sent by Master. If it wasn¡¯t for the arrival of those ten thousand soldiers at the last moment, I wouldn¡¯t have been able to defeat the Miao thieves, let alone defend Wuling Prefecture,¡± said Zhou Qing, remaining humble as ever in front of his master. ¡°Even so, being able to seize the opportunity and defeat the enemy is beyond the capabilities of the average person,¡± Lu Yuan laughed, quite pleased with his disciple¡¯s modesty. In this Jianghu world, the ability to maintain a level-headed mind and not be arrogant was a great quality to have, as it gave him a better chance of survival than most people. This was a good character trait. Feeling comforted, he pondered for a moment before saying, ¡°Now that I have broken through to the Innate realm, I have the strength to wipe out the Iron Sword Sect. Xiaoqing, I know that you have long harbored hatred towards the Iron Sword Sect and have always wanted to destroy them. In a short time, I intend to take action and clear out the Iron Sword Sect. Would you like to accompany me?¡± As for Zhou Qing¡¯s hatred towards the Iron Sword Sect, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t want to say much. Although the person who massacred his entire family had long been dead, it was quite normal for his disciple to escalate his hatred towards the entire Iron Sword Sect in the current climate of the Jianghu. After all, it was someone from the Iron Sword Sect who killed his entire family, wasn¡¯t it? So, in turn, what¡¯s wrong with him wanting to destroy the entire Sect? If you really want to blame someone, blame yourself for not exterminating the roots in the first place. Blame yourself for not teaching your disciple properly. A victim filled with hatred in his eyes has no interest in hearing any high-minded principles. It¡¯s not your entire family that was killed, so of course, you can criticize from your high moral ground. But whether they listen or not is up to them. As expected, the moment Zhou Qing heard Lu Yuan¡¯s words, his eyes immediately turned bloodshot and he gritted his teeth, asking, ¡°When does Master plan to take action?¡± Lu Yuan pondered and then replied, ¡°It should be within the next two months.¡± The reason for planning to attack the Iron Sword Sect wasn¡¯t entirely because of his disciple. He had been considering wiping out the Iron Sword Sect for some time. Initially, he wanted to seize the Tiejian Sword Technique, which complemented his Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra, from the Iron Sword Sect. But after obtaining the top-tier secret book, the Chi Yang Divine Skill, from Zhou Qing, Lu Yuan naturally lost interest in the Tiejian Sword Technique. Therefore, dealing with the Iron Sword Sect had become a matter of supporting his own disciple. But now¡­ Lu Yuan¡¯s desire to attack the Iron Sword Sect was purely for its wealth. It couldn¡¯t be helped. Recruiting fifty thousand new soldiers, and within just two short months, the expenses, including settling them in, had reached nearly one million silver taels. This consumption was truly horrifying. Meanwhile, the disciple he sent to Jiangxia County in Liang Country to find the Dan Ding Path had not sent back any news. It was unclear how the situation was progressing and whether any financial support could be gained from Anqiu. Seeing his savings dwindle by the day and the future expenditure continuously increasing, Lu Yuan, who was already responsible for the livelihood of over a hundred thousand people, had no choice but to start thinking about how to raise a sum of money quickly. So, what¡¯s the fastest way to make money? Of course, it¡¯s by killing and arson. After some contemplation, as Lu Yuan looked around, he found that among those with whom he had conflicts and who were also wealthy, the Iron Sword Sect in Luling Prefecture seemed to be the only one. Firstly, the Iron Sword Sect was at odds with his disciple, so destroying them would be a form of revenge for his disciple. Secondly, the Iron Sword Sect was wealthy. Just how rich was the Iron Sword Sect? Take this for example: the entire Luling Prefecture had over a hundred thousand households, totaling more than six hundred thousand people. Moreover, the prefecture was a land of fish and rice, always abundant in grain, and a hub connecting four counties, making it prosperous in terms of commerce and trade. Lu Yuan, originally from Luling Prefecture, knew very well the wealth of the prefecture. It wouldn¡¯t be an exaggeration to say that the financial income of a single Luling Prefecture was on par with the five southern prefectures in his hands. And the Iron Sword Sect occupied such a fertile land. Imagine the wealth accumulated by the Iron Sword Sect over hundreds of years. ¡®If I manage to eliminate them, even if those assets like fields and shops cannot be immediately monetized, I should still be able to gain at least three to five million silver taels from their liquid assets. With this money, the pressure of supporting my army can be alleviated.¡¯ Lu Yuan confidently thought about this and was certain that the Iron Sword Sect possessed this much wealth. After all, when he previously wiped out the Seven Star Sect, the income from the silver, jewelry, and antiques alone exceeded one million silver taels. As the territory occupied by the Iron Sword Sect far surpassed that of the Seven Star Sect, it was reasonable to expect several times more profit. Zhou Qing, after getting a definite time-window, immediately said, ¡°In that case, I will return and handle the transition of military affairs. I¡¯m sure the army will be fine under the supervision of my junior-disciple Deng.¡± The disciple named Deng mentioned by Zhou Qing was Deng Zhaoxing, an outstanding registered disciple of Lu Yuan¡¯s, and his strength had already reached the second-rate level. Chapter 347 - Chapter 347: Chapter 194: Discussion on Extermination of the Clan – 2 Chapter 347: Chapter 194: Discussion on Extermination of the Clan ¨C 2 Translator: 549690339 Previously, he was assigned to assist Zhou Qing as his deputy. Having such a disciple familiar with military affairs by his side ensures that there won¡¯t be any problems with the army after Zhou Qing leaves. ¡°Alright.¡± Lu Yuan nodded, having no objection to this, and instructed, ¡°Make sure to keep your departure a secret; it cannot be leaked. In destroying the Iron Sword Sect, we must be cautious and not reveal our identities.¡± Iron Sword Sect may seem like an independent sect, but in reality, its establishment in Yuzhang Prefecture and occupying a mansion in the county could not have been achieved without the support of Liuyang Sect. This was evident from the fact that when the Black Wind Gang wreaked havoc in Luling Prefecture more than a decade ago, Liuyang Sect¡¯s Sect Leader Yin Huixuan quickly intervened. Thus, in a way, annihilating this sect is equivalent to slapping Liuyang Sect in the face. And Liuyang Sect is a prominent Innate Sect within the Innate Sects. Yin Huixuan, a powerful expert at the second realm of Innate, is not someone to be trifled with. Lu Yuan is going there to seek wealth, not trouble for himself. If Yin Huixuan were to come knocking at his door, even he would find it a huge headache. Therefore, the operation to destroy the Iron Sword Sect must be done discreetly, and their identities must not be revealed to outsiders. Having been mingling in the Jianghu battlefield for so many years, Zhou Qing has become an old fox who naturally understands this principle. He nods and says, ¡°Master, rest assured, I know my place.¡± Lu Yuan slightly nodded: ¡°Then there¡¯s nothing more to say.¡± He believes that his disciple will not disappoint him in this regard. ¡°If that¡¯s the case, I will take my leave to inform the Five Poisons Sect and hand over the military affairs,¡± Zhou Qing requests permission to leave at this point. The matter of annihilating the Iron Sword Sect has already thrown his heart into turmoil. At this moment, he desperately needs to return and quietly ponder matters while preparing for his revenge. ¡°Go ahead,¡± Lu Yuan waved his hand. Zhou Qing bowed and took his leave. Watching his disciple leave, Lu Yuan remained seated, supporting himself against the table, and continued to contemplate. This time, in addition to the financial gains from annihilating the Iron Sword Sect, there were other significant benefits such as the Divine Blood Elixir and the Divine Blood Variant. Near Luling, there is a Dragon Mountain, which ranks eighth among the seventy-two blessed lands of Daoism. And this mountain is the exact location of the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s Mountain Gate. Occupying this place, the Divine Blood Variants raised by the Iron Sword Sect can absorb a much higher level of immortal spirit qi compared to other spiritual mountains and blessed lands. With sufficient immortal spirit qi nourishment, the resulting spiritual blood provided by the Divine Blood Variants would naturally be greater in quantity. Consequently, after annihilating the Iron Sword Sect, the Divine Blood Elixir that Lu Yuan can obtain should be more than what he got from the Seven Star Sect. ¡°I eliminated the Seven Star Sect last time and obtained a total of twenty-six Pure Water Profound Pills from them. This time, after destroying the Iron Sword Sect, I should be able to get at least thirty or forty, right? Considering the Divine Blood Variant, I should be able to refine even more directly after killing it. Gaining fifty or sixty should be achievable. With these Divine Blood Elixirs, I should be able to cultivate three or four top-notch disciples.¡± As his influence expands, Lu Yuan¡¯s expectations for his disciples¡¯ strength gradually increase. In today¡¯s chaotic world, it¡¯s not enough to have only one top-notch expert guarding an area. But now, including Wuling Prefecture, he has nearly half of the territory in six prefectures. Such a vast territory, but without enough people to guard it. With just him and Zhou Qing, they can only manage to oversee two or three prefectures at most. More than half of the territory remains without a top-notch expert to guard it. At present, Lu Yuan relies on the top-notch experts sent by the Nanhai Sect to help maintain his territory. However, the people of Nanhai Sect will eventually leave and cannot possibly help and stay permanently. Moreover, even though Yan Wangqiu regards them as allies and is willing to spare some manpower to help, they are ultimately outsiders and not as trustworthy as one¡¯s own people. Hence, the matter of cultivating disciples is becoming increasingly urgent. Lu Yuan wants to destroy the Iron Sword Sect not only for the silver taels but also for their highly coveted Divine Blood Elixir. If he can seize the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s centuries of accumulation to help him cultivate three or four top-notch disciples, the situation of insufficient personnel to guard various territories will undoubtedly be greatly alleviated and improved. By then, Lu Yuan will be able to let his disciples take charge on their own. He, on the other hand, can save time to devote himself to cultivation. So no matter how you look at it, attacking the Iron Sword Sect is highly beneficial to him, so much so that it¡¯s a must-do. ¡°However, speaking of Divine Blood Variants, I¡¯ve already been raising that Pure Water Xuan Niu for more than a year. But despite eating my century-old spiritual medicine for more than a year, living a life of luxury, it has yet to produce any spiritual blood for me. With such a low production rate, raising it serves little purpose.¡± As soon as Lu Yuan thought of the Pure Water Xuan Niu he was still raising in Mount Yuanluo, his brow furrowed involuntarily. At the time, Feng Zhijie, one of the Seven Star Sect¡¯s three Elders, had mentioned that due to the increasingly scarce essence of the sun and the moon that could be absorbed from Mount Yuanluo, the amount of spiritual blood the Pure Water Xuan Niu could produce each year was also dwindling. This, in turn, resulted in a sharp decline in the number of Pure Water Profound Pills that could be obtained by the Seven Star Sect each year. By the time Lu Yuan attacked the Seven Star Sect, it could only produce one or two pills annually. However, it was also because of this situation that the Pure Water Xuan Niu was brought out of the Seven Star Sect¡¯s main altar during the attack. Chapter 348 - Chapter 348: Chapter 194: Discussion of the Extermination of the Clan – 3 Chapter 348: Chapter 194: Discussion of the Extermination of the Clan ¨C 3 Translator: 549690339 Although the final hiding place was still within the range of Mount Yuanluo, the Essence of the sun and the moon that could be obtained there was much less than that in the main area of the sect. According to Feng Zhijie, who was currently raising Lu Yuan¡¯s Xuan Niu. When the Seven Star Sect hid the Pure Water Xuan Niu, the Xuan Niu was injured due to insufficient support, and it might take two or three years of healing, as well as a large number of hundred-year-old spiritual medicines to support its recovery. Therefore, during this period of recuperation, it would be impossible to produce Spiritual Blood. In this case, for Lu Yuan, it was like spending money to raise a Xuan Niu that would only have an effect after two or three years. Furthermore, once this Pure Water Xuan Niu was healed, it would only be usable for at most another thirty years. Considering that the rate at which the Xuan Niu was producing Spiritual Blood was getting slower and slower. Even if it was raised for thirty years, it would be considered good luck if it could provide him with twenty Profound Pills in the end. If the luck was not good, it might only provide ten or so. ¡°So, it seems that it is better to kill this cow now and drain the Spiritual Blood from its body, which would allow for the refining of seven or eight Profound Pills. If the spiritual meat, spiritual skin, and other materials of the Xuan Niu were also considered, the harvest would be even greater. Compared to that, although the long-term income might be slightly worse, the short-term income would still be considerable. Moreover, a lot of time would be saved, which would alleviate my pressing needs.¡± When Lu Yuan thought of this, he made up his mind. Seven or eight Pure Water Profound Pills were not many in number, but the second-tier disciples under his tutelage had already increased to four. The one with the highest strength had already reached the stage of mastering seven meridians. For Lu Yuan, if he had seven or eight Pure Water Profound Pills, it would be enough to help a disciple with sufficient potential to break through the first tier among the four second-tier official disciples. Moreover, he could also spare two or three Pure Water Profound Pills to help the disciples who had reached the breakthrough stage of the second tier, break through the second tier, thereby allowing him to make use of more talents. If they could produce such strength at this time, the benefits it would bring would undoubtedly be far greater than taking their time with the Pure Water Xuan Niu over a period of thirty years. Therefore, it was indeed time to kill this cow. As Lu Yuan thought about it, he wrote an order with his brush, then called his trusted aides to take it to Mount Yuanluo and convey the matter to Feng Zhijie. This old Feng, who had betrayed his sect, had rich experience in how to kill the cow, how to draw blood, and how to refine pills. It was better to let him handle this matter than for himself, an outsider, to rashly step in. All he needed to do was to provide various material support. Having dealt with this matter, Lu Yuan thought carefully in his heart to make sure there was nothing urgent to deal with, then picked up the Taoist Classics and began to read them slowly. Time passed slowly. In the blink of an eye, it was November of Hongdao¡¯s six years. During this time, Lu Yuan still maintained his usual routine, practicing the Red Sun Sword Technique and finger techniques, studying the Taoist Classics, and pondering the next step in cultivation after the Inborn stage. Occasionally, when there was a thunderstorm, he would go out to interact with the thunder, cultivating the Five Thunder Techniques. From time to time, when the mood struck him, he would also patrol the camp and review the training results. Life was ordinary yet fulfilling. During this period, news from all sides had also arrived. First, there was Yueyang Prefecture. After the failure in driving out the Zhou People, Shangguan Ming changed his strategy from eagerly eliminating the Zhou People in Jiangnan to a long-term attrition. He began to deploy troops around the Anxiang County occupied by the Zhou People, and started to besiege the opposing party, cutting off their path of expansion. At the same time, he sent people to harass the area around Anxiang County from time to time, preventing the local population from producing normally. As a result, the Xia harvest and autumn harvest in the counties around Anxiang had been affected, to the point where there was no harvest at all. Furthermore, the Zhou People had stationed 30,000 troops in Anxiang County. With so many people not engaged in production, the consumption of food and fodder was astronomical. Now that they occupied several counties in Anxiang, but were unable to farm normally due to Shangguan Ming¡¯s harassments, they could not provide food. Having been besieged for half a year, they were suddenly plunged into a situation of food scarcity. Even the local populace in the several counties of Anxiang, who were unable to escape, were driven to cannibalism. Meanwhile, the food of the Zhou People in Jiangbei could not be transported over due to the blockade of the court¡¯s naval forces. At this point, the Zhou People could no longer hold on. The Zhou Country¡¯s Grand General of the Left Pillar, Li Yanjing, had already begun to lead his troops to actively seek battle, wanting to find Shangguan Ming to fight. However, seeing the dire situation of the Zhou People, Shangguan Ming didn¡¯t want to fight them. Instead, he began to shut himself up, only sealing off the opponent¡¯s route, but not fighting them. This was intended to starve the Zhou troops to death. With no other choice, Li Yanjing could only lead the troops to attack forcefully and fight to break through the encirclement. However, the court had blocked his troops with 50,000 soldiers, while Li Yanjing only had 30,000 soldiers. As the current aggressor, it was a problem whether he could break through or not. However, no matter how bleak the prospects were, as the Zhou People had actively started the war, Yueyang Prefecture once again went up in flames. At this time, which was close to the year-end festivities, the local people could not get a breather, and they were still suffering. On the other hand, Lu Yuan seized this opportunity to take in nearly 100,000 displaced people from Anxiang County and relocate them to Shaoyang Prefecture and the southern three prefectures, restoring some of the population that the four prefectures had lost and taking advantage of the situation. While Yueyang Prefecture was fighting fiercely. Zhou Qing, on the other hand, had contacted the Miao tribe messenger after returning and conveyed Lu Yuan¡¯s message to him. Upon receiving the request that Lu Yuan wanted Lan Zhaoyun to come and meet him in person, the other party was furious and left in a huff. However, after only a few days, the person returned to Zhou Qing, saying that the leader was willing to come and meet Lu Yuan. However, the meeting place needed to be changed to a more suitable location. For example, the border between the two sides would be very suitable. As for this, Lu Yuan naturally ignored him and simply told the person to leave. Chapter 349 - Chapter 349: Chapter 195: Strength Reversal Chapter 349: Chapter 195: Strength Reversal Translator: 549690339 For Lu Yuan, being able to hold his nose and agree to the peace-seeking terms of the Five Poisons Sect was already a great concession. To put it bluntly, without their Holy Maiden, what did they count for, considering the strength of the Five Poisons Sect at this moment? Merely just over thirty thousand civilian-workers-like soldiers, now stranded and besieged in a small county area. This level of strength, in contrast to Lu Yuan¡¯s situation, possessing a hundred thousand soldiers, and with Miao soldiers and militia numbering over a hundred thousand under his command, was no longer on the same level. The Five Poisons Sect thought they were in a position to negotiate terms with Lu Yuan, but in reality, this was just their wishful thinking. If it weren¡¯t for Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s involvement, these remnants would have been eliminated long ago. But unfortunately. They do have Lan Cai¡¯er, and they do have an Inborn Grandmaster in their ranks. So, Lu Yuan had no choice but to suppress his temper and sit down to talk with them. However, his willingness to talk didn¡¯t mean he would indulge the Five Poisons Sect. After all, it¡¯s the Five Poisons Sect who is anxious now, not Lu Yuan; he can wait patiently. It¡¯s just that while he can afford to wait, it¡¯s not so certain whether the Five Poisons Sect can do the same. Just like the people of Anxiang County, the Five Poisons Sect, trapped in Qianling County for more than half a year, consumed astronomical amounts of grain with tens of thousands of people not engaged in production every day. Although they should be able to hold out for some time with their previous reserves, even the most abundant grain reserves can¡¯t withstand this rate of consumption. The more they delay, the more unbearable it becomes for them. Now they are still putting on airs, wanting to negotiate with Lu Yuan. He just needs to keep pushing them, and sooner or later they will have their arrogance subdued. Upon deciding to keep dragging, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t bother with them anymore. Because three months after Yan Wangqiu left, he finally returned from Jianan Prefecture, bringing news of the Nine River Sword Sect. Seeing the Old Lord again, Lu Yuan found his demeanor quite good, not only in high spirits but also looking very pleased with himself. ¡°General Lu, I have met Su Xuange, the master of the Nine River Sword Sect. I hinted at forming an alliance, and he showed great interest in it. After several months of discussions, he has been persuaded to join our alliance and has already begun preparations. When the time comes for us to really make a move, Su Xuange is willing to raise an army of 150,000 in Jianan Prefecture, echoing our efforts from afar.¡± Yan Wangqiu recounted his experiences and gains of the past few months with a hint of ease. ¡°Great! With the help of the Nine River Sword Sect, our side will have one more Inborn Grandmaster and an additional 150,000 troops.¡± Lu Yuan listened to it all with joy, looked at Yan Wangqiu, and praised him, ¡°Your Lordship¡¯s contribution to our alliance in this trip to Jianan Prefecture is indispensable.¡± Yan Wangqiu stroked his beard with a triumphant expression: ¡°Actually, it¡¯s not that big of a deal. It¡¯s just that our Nanhai Sect and the Nine River Sword Sect had a good relationship in our early years, so they were easy to persuade.¡± ¡°Bah! There are many people in the world with good relationships, but not many who can turn their relationships into advantages. Old Lord, don¡¯t be modest.¡± Lu Yuan waved his hand dismissively, then looked at Yan Wangqiu and spoke with a smile: ¡°Since the Old Lord has been gone for several months, there have been quite a few happenings here. There¡¯s also a piece of good news I¡¯d like to share with you.¡± Seeing his solemn expression, Yan Wangqiu became curious: ¡°What could it be?¡± ¡°Last month, the Five Poisons Sect sent someone to find me¡­¡± So, Lu Yuan told Yan Wangqiu about the peace-seeking negotiations with the Five Poisons Sect. After summarizing the events, he continued: ¡°So this time, if we can conquer the Five Poisons Sect, our side will have an additional 30,000 Miao soldiers. Also, I can use the Five Poisons Sect and the Miao people to force their Holy Maiden into submission. In this way, when it¡¯s time to reveal our cards, our side will be able to deploy 300,000 soldiers and have two Grandmasters. If we count the Old Lord¡¯s side, our three-family alliance will have nearly 800,000 troops and four Grandmasters. With such strength, the court would have no choice but to make concessions if they want to avoid complete destruction.¡± Theoretically, if Lu Yuan and Yan Wanqiu choose to betray the Imperial Court, the so-called ¡°Ten Grandmasters Plan¡± would become a joke. Without the two of them, the court would have eight Grandmasters left, even if they managed to pull in the Qiao Family from Guanhai Villa. Among these eight Grandmasters, three need to be stationed in various places, unable to act. Putting all these constraints together, the court can deploy a maximum of five Grandmasters at most. But on Lu Yuan¡¯s side, they already have four Grandmasters. As for the number of troops, the three-family alliance on Lu Yuan¡¯s side can field 750,000 troops. Regardless of the quality or the fighting ability, at least the numbers and momentum are in place. What about the court? Marquis of Wuping, Xie Ning, has 50,000 troops in Jiuzhen Prefecture. However, these 50,000 men, not only have to maintain the security of Jiuzhen Prefecture and prevent the resurgence of Jinghai Country remnants but also need to suppress Yulin and Southsea, ensuring stability in Lingnan. Moreover, they have to deter several neighboring small countries near Jiuzhen Prefecture to prevent them from following in Jinghai Country¡¯s footsteps and causing trouble. Maintaining the above multiple situations with 50,000 troops is already stretched thin, and there is no possibility of deploying more troops to quell the rebellion. In Dongting Prefecture, Yueyang Prefecture still has 50,000 left, while Bai Mengyang in Tianmen Prefecture, after being besieged for so long, probably has only 10,000 or 20,000 remaining(¡± There are still 150,000 border soldiers in Guangling Prefecture, but in recent days, as the Liang Country sees the Zhou people continuously winning battles in Yue Country, they have already taken Xichuan and are about to hit Dongting Prefecture. Chapter 350 - Chapter 350: Chapter 195: Strength Reversal_2 Chapter 350: Chapter 195: Strength Reversal_2 Translator: 549690339 The initial firm embargo on peace negotiations gradually showed signs of softening. If peace could be achieved, perhaps eighty or ninety thousand of the one hundred and fifty thousand soldiers of the Guangling Prefecture could be extracted. Then, from the fifty thousand forbidden soldiers in the capital, twenty to thirty thousand could be drawn out, possibly forming another army of a hundred thousand and deploying them to Dongting Prefecture. But this final army of one hundred thousand was already the limit. By such calculations, the troops that the imperial court could muster were around only one hundred and fifty thousand. Struggling to increase their troops further would merely resemble Lu Yuan and his allies forcibly conscripting civilian workers. This might enhance their forces, and even with the capabilities of the imperial court, amassing an army of one million might not be impossible. Yet, in terms of quality, this group of soldiers was only at par with Lu Yuan¡¯s, a case of six of one and half a dozen of the other. Under such circumstances, the imperial court had no absolute advantage in strength compared to Lu Yuan¡¯s alliance. In fact, it could be said that both sides were at the same level of power. After Lu Yuan and Yan Wangqiu had counted all the above details separately, Lu Yuan laughed and said, ¡°But the enemies of the imperial court are not only us. They also have to face Zhou People. At present, Zhou People have stationed three hundred thousand troops to the north of the river, and counting Li Xiong, have deployed five Inborn Grandmasters. This power is enough to turn out in full force. If the imperial court does not ally with us, and they found out that we were collaborating with Zhou People, then nine Inborn Grandmasters will advance west along the river with a million soldiers. At that time, the earth will shake, mountains and rivers will break, and even the six surnames seven clans, this time will face national extinction and genocide, their bloodlines extinct.¡± The situation is clear now. The real power that the imperial court can command is the one hundred and fifty thousand soldiers, and perhaps the fifty thousand navy on the river. With these two hundred thousand troops and five grandmasters, it would not be difficult for the imperial court to repulse Zhou People along the river. But if Lu Yuan¡¯s external forces were also considered, whichever side they support, the other side is doomed to fail. If they support the imperial court, then nine Grandmasters will march out together, with Lu Yuan¡¯s side supplying an additional one hundred thousand soldiers. They would not only repulse Zhou People, but might even restore Xichuan Prefecture with a single strike. If they support Zhou People, as previously mentioned, Yue Country would be annihilated, and the ancient families would be obliterated. Therefore, Lu Yuan and his allies have become the weight external to the balance, and whichever side they lean towards will determine the victor in this war. At present, it is a matter of whichever side, Zhou Country or the imperial court, offers better terms, to purchase this weight. ¡°I had not expected that General Lu would have accomplished such a feat in such a short time.¡± Yan Wangqiu appeared stunned after listening to Lu Yuan¡¯s analysis and plan. His joy welled up from his heart, even his beards trembling with laughter. ¡°If we can indeed win over the Poison Sect, then even if the imperial court does not wish to accept our terms, they will have to. In fact, our terms can be raised further, and the imperial court might have to concede to them.¡± Yan Wangqiu¡¯s initial goal was to transfer the site of the country¡¯s establishment to Yulin County. But on their side, they suddenly gained two Grandmasters and two hundred thousand soldiers. On the imperial court¡¯s side, three potential Grandmasters were lost in response. This shift in power balance had taken place. So according to the principle of Jianghu where the amount of food you eat depends on your strength, If we have grown stronger and the court weaker, then it is only right for the latter to surrender more benefits. After all, Yulin County is somewhat remote and impoverished. South Sea Prefecture is more suitable for us. ¡®Southsea Sect, South Sea Prefecture, this auspicious name, doesn¡¯t it foretell that I am liable to establish a Southsea Kingdom?¡¯ With such thoughts in mind, Yan Wangqiu¡¯s heart started throbbing in excitement. If he truly established a kingdom in Southsea Prefecture, then the full strength of the Southsea Sect could be preserved. There would not be the slightest loss, and they could even develop at a rapid pace. Such a broad prospect is enough to thrill anyone. Lu Yuan watched Yan Wangqiu¡¯s enthusiasm and had a rough grasp of what was going on in the other person¡¯s mind. However, he didn¡¯t mind at all. It was normal for Yan Wangqiu to want Southsea Prefecture. Just like how he wanted Dongting Prefecture, no one wants to abandon their own base. Who would risk moving to a new nest while they could stay in their old one? Therefore, he said at this time, ¡°So after some time, I should go and negotiate terms with the Poison Sect. At that time, I hope that Elder Master Yan can go with me to deter those Miao People.¡± Yan Wangqiu nodded, ¡°This is easy.¡± Whether they could win over the Poison Sect now related to whether their alliance could smoothly make the court back down. So for this, Elder Master Yan was very concerned about this. After agreeing to this, he thought for a while and then said again, ¡°I can also send someone to Nine River Sword Sect to see if we can invite Su Xuange. Since the three of us have already formed an alliance, we should find a chance to have a talk. ¡± ¡°When the three of us Grandmasters unite, the Poison Sect should be more willing to surrender more quickly.¡± The deterrence of three Inborn Grandmasters and the deterrence of Lu Yuan, an Inborn Grandmaster, signified different things. The former represented that if Lu Yuan and his allies were willing, they could gather the power of three Inborn Grandmasters, spend a few years to desperately pursue and kill Lan Cai¡¯er, and eliminate this hidden danger. The latter represented that Lu Yuan was a lone wolf, a newly promoted Inborn, without absolute military strength. Lan Cai¡¯er could recklessly seek revenge on Lu Yuan for destroying their family, fully utilizing her nuclear deterrent military power to kill his subordinates everywhere and disgust him to death. Chapter 351 - Chapter 351: Chapter 195: Reversal of Strength_3 Chapter 351: Chapter 195: Reversal of Strength_3 Translator: 549690339 The difference between the two and the shock given to the Miao people is completely in different levels. So, when Lu Yuan heard this, he couldn¡¯t help but laugh and said, ¡°Then I will leave this matter to the old lord.¡± Yan Wangqiu said, ¡°I will take care of this affair.¡± Having set the strategy, Lu Yuan and Yan Wangqiu started their respective activities. Yan Wangqiu sent his trusted disciple to Jianan Prefecture to invite Su Xuange. On Lu Yuan¡¯s side, he continued to drag out the Five Poisons Sect and wore down their patience. Even if the Five Poisons Sect sometimes retreated, he still refused to meet and talk. He continued to grind time. Yan Wangqiu was right. The shock value of having three grandmasters vs. two grandmasters is entirely different for the Five Poisons Sect. Before Su Xuange¡¯s arrival, Lu Yuan would not consider meeting Lan Zhaoyun. After all, going from Dongting to Jianan Prefecture, it takes less than a month for a round trip if the speed is fast. Dragging on for another month at this point wouldn¡¯t be too long. On the Five Poisons Sect side, let them continue to suffer for a while. While Lu Yuan was waiting for Su Xuange to arrive, new news came in from the Imperial Court. After more than half a year of negotiation, Liang finally agreed to the request for peace talks. Not only that, after the Imperial Court agreed to cede the northern three regions of Guangling Prefecture, Liang formed an alliance with the Imperial Court. They decided to send 200,000 troops south, aiming directly at Zhou¡¯s southern Nanyang Prefecture. Thus, threatening the retreat route of the 300,000 troops in the north. It seems that the continuous battles and the expansion of the territory between Zhou and Yue have already caused Liang¡¯s anxiety, which led them to start interfering in the war between Zhou and Yue. The war clouds between Zhou and Liang are slowly spreading. On the side of the Imperial Court, its reaction was extremely quick after receiving successful peace talks. After confirming that Liang had fulfilled the treaty and deployed heavy troops around Guangling Prefecture to the west to prepare for the war against the Zhou¡¯s southern Nanyang army, the Imperial Court directly moved the 80,000 frontier troops of Guangling Prefecture to the south to join the 20,000 Forbidden army of the Capital. They are now in training, and it seems that they will be advancing westward in no time. The most immediate response is that Lu Yuan has received constant urging from Yang Jing, asking whether he has broken through Innate or not? And if he hasn¡¯t, when will he break through? As Yang Jing said, he broke through Innate a month ago and is now consolidating his realm. Among the top ten grandmasters, the only one left is Qiao Kangquan, the owner of Guanhai Villa in Guangling Prefecture. Now nine out of the ten grandmasters have gathered, with only Lu Yuan left. At this time, the Imperial Court is already preparing a western expeditionary army. In at most three months, troops will be sent to siege the west and expel the Zhou people. If Lu Yuan cannot break through Innate in this last period, the ten grandmasters will be missing one person. At that time, the benefits promised to him by the Imperial Court would be gone. After a long pondering on this urging, Lu Yuan finally decided to inform the Imperial Court that he had already broken through Innate. It¡¯s about time to face the cards. It¡¯s no longer necessary to hide the news that he has broken through Innate. The Five Poisons Sect is about to surrender, and the Zhou people are even more irreconcilable with the Imperial Court. Even if he wants to fish, he has no fishing ground. On the contrary, the news of his breaking through Innate might create more deterrence if it is released. Thus, a message recording his breakthrough of Innate was sent back to the Capital by a fast horse. Not long after the message was sent, Lu Yuan received another reply that he had been waiting for. The disciple who had been sent to Jiangxia Prefecture for more than three months had finally returned, and not just him; even the much-anticipated Elder Daoist Anqiu personally came back. ¡°At the beginning, we were right about Taoist Lu. In just one year of separation, fellow Daoist has broken through Innate and achieved success in martial arts, thus becoming a grandmaster in one region.¡± In the reception hall, while receiving Anqiu, Lu Yuan had just sat down, took a sip of tea, and immediately greeted him with congratulations. At the same time, Anqiu looked up and down at Lu Yuan, secretly admiring him. Because compared to ordinary Innate grandmasters, that similar immortal spirit to cultivators on Taoist Lu¡¯s body is getting richer. However, after careful distinction, it is still a little different from cultivators and not as pure. Therefore, for this reason, Elder Daoist Anqiu could only guess in his heart that the cultivation fate he obtained back then might be of great origin, thus resulting in such a vision. But with this in mind, the elder daoist became even more happy. The closer Lu Yuan gets to cultivators, the more reliable and useful the experimental data he produces will be. By then, cultivating the Taiping Dao Book should be more convenient than ordinary martial artists. ¡®With this momentum, he should not die as early as the other chosen pieces.¡¯ Anqiu sighed secretly as he thought of the other experimental pieces he had found over the past year. Since the Inescapable Meeting, he had returned to Liang and also selected a few top martial artists to practice the Taiping Dao Book. However, these people couldn¡¯t last half a year. They had only practiced the Taoist scriptures for a short period before dying of exhaustion. Through these experiments, the Dan Ding Path became even more confident that under Innate, martial artists cannot support the cultivation of the Taiping Dao Book. To experiment with the Taiping Dao Book, inborn grandmasters are needed. But inborn grandmasters are so rare! Within the entire Liang Country, there are only about ten of them. All these people have an equal status to Anqiu and come from distinguished places. To ask these people to test the short-lived martial art techniques of the Dan Ding Path, it can be said that even as one of the six major Dao Veins in the world, the Dan Ding Path is not worthy enough. So, at a glance, the experiment had fallen into a deadlock, and the Dan Ding Path was worrying about what to do next. Just when he was thinking about sleeping, someone brought him a pillow. Initially, Lu Yuan who was just a casual piece of the layout surprisingly broke through Innate. Not only did he break through Innate, but he also naively tried to practice the Taiping Dao Book. Upon receiving the news, the Dan Ding Path was naturally overjoyed. Chapter 352 - Chapter 352: Chapter 196: Cauldron’s Assistance Chapter 352: Chapter 196: Cauldron¡¯s Assistance Translator: 549690339 It was to prevent the much-needed Inborn Grandmaster from fleeing and also to demonstrate their sincerity. After receiving Lu Yuan¡¯s request for support, The Dan Ding Path deliberated and finally, the Dao master made the decision to provide him with exceptional support. True Person Anqiu was personally deployed for this mission. This was not only to emphasize its importance but also to confirm whether the situation at Lu Yuan¡¯s end was genuine. Certainly, the Dan Ding Path held reservations about Lu Yuan renouncing a profitable Inborn Grandmaster, in favor of cultivating the short-lived Immortal Technique, which arguably requires a streak of madness. Hence, before confirming Lu Yuan¡¯s real intentions, the Dan Ding Path would not arbitrarily deliver aid. After verifying that Lu Yuan had reached the Inborn stage, True Person Anqiu was slightly pleased. Yet, this was not enough to win their support. So, after praising him a little, True Person Anqiu asked straightforwardly, ¡°Taoist Lu, you had someone relay a message that you want to cultivate the Taiping Dao Book. Is this true?¡± Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°Indeed, it is true.¡± Upon hearing this, True Person Anqiu felt relieved. But after eyeing Lu Yuan for a moment, he asked, ¡°Then why haven¡¯t you cultivated the Dao Book?¡± Originally, he had given the Dao Book to Lu Yuan. If Lu Yuan really wanted to cultivate it, he could have done so long ago with the territory and population he currently controls. Lu Yuan had a pre-prepared explanation for this, so he said, ¡°To follow the Dao Book, I must first prepare the Altar. The Altar is still under construction, the Heavenly Pillar has not been worshipped yet, there is no Immortal Spirit Qi; how am I supposed to cultivate the Dao Book?¡± Given the limitations of the Taiping Dao Book, or rather the limitations in the present Immortal Cultivation World, it is impossible for anyone to cultivate without initiating the Heavenly Pillars, attracting the Immortal Spirit Qi, and without possessing Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens. This has become a consensus among the cultivators. True Person Anqiu slightly nodded, approving of this statement before asking, ¡°Taoist friend, have you started constructing the Altar?¡± Lu Yuan nodded and said, ¡°It¡¯s still under construction and it will take a few more months to complete.¡± True Person Anqiu frowned, ¡°It¡¯s just an Altar for Worshipping Heaven. Building one only requires ten of thousands of people and can be completed in a few months, why is it taking so long?¡± Lu Yuan gave him a glance and answered with a hint of annoyance, ¡°You should ask that question to yourself. The chaos brought about by you in Jianan has already shocked the world. Do you think you can hide your deeds from everyone? If I openly construct the Altar, it will definitely draw attention. If people recognize it as the ritual Altar of the Taiping Dao Book, won¡¯t everyone know that I¡¯m cultivating the Taiping Dao Book? If that¡¯s the case, how can the court stand me? And how would the likes of Ziyun Path view me? Therefore, unless absolutely necessary, I would never reveal that I am cultivating the Taiping Dao Book. Hence, the Altar for Worshiping the Heavenly Pillar needs to be constructed discreetly, without the use of a large workforce. I started this project early this year, and now it is halfway done. It will probably take another three to five months to finish.¡± Upon hearing this reason, True Person Anqiu couldn¡¯t help but feel slightly embarrassed. Indeed, the incident that they, Dan Ding Path, initiated in Jianan made them completely reveal the Taiping Dao Book both to the Yue State court and the Ziyun Path. If Lu Yuan starts cultivating this book, inevitably, he would embark on the path of world domination. If so, the Yue State court, which controls Jiangnan, would naturally not be able to accommodate him. And it¡¯s pretty common to dispatch troops for conquest. At the Ziyun Path¡¯s end, On an earlier occasion, True Person Zhen Xuan planned to make Lu Yuan abandon his idea of cultivation, by teaching the Secret of Inborn, to prevent more people from cultivating and monopolizing their already scarce Immortal Spirit Qi. If Lu Yuan chose the path of cultivation and exposed that he was cultivating the Taiping Dao Book, it¡¯s hard to predict what Ziyun Path¡¯s attitude towards him would be. Taking these two considerations into account, it does make sense for Lu Yuan to be cautious. And since he has taken these factors into consideration, it indirectly proves that he indeed wants to cultivate the Taiping Dao Book. Otherwise, why would he need to hide his intentions? Keeping this in mind, True Person Anqiu was quite convinced that Lu Yuan truly wanted to cultivate the Taiping Dao Book. Yet, to be certain, he planned one last verification. ¡°Taoist friend, you said you are constructing an Altar, may I know where this Altar is and can I see it?¡± asked True Person Anqiu. ¡°Of course.¡± There was no reason for Lu Yuan to refuse. Given the Dan Ding Path¡¯s position, it was unlikely that they would harm his Altar. He readily assented, ¡°The Altar is within the territory of Yangshan Prefecture, not far from here. If the fellow Daoist doesn¡¯t mind, you can accompany me to inspect it. Moreover, since I ordered the construction of the Altar, I¡¯ve been busy with military and political affairs and haven¡¯t had time to patrol. It would be a great time for a visit.¡± Delighted by this proposition, True Person Anqiu said, ¡°Then I¡¯ll have to trouble you, friend.¡± Lu Yuan gestured dismissively, ¡°It¡¯s a trifling matter.¡± Afterwards, the two didn¡¯t delay any longer; Lu Yuan gave a brief explanation of affairs before taking True Person Anqiu on his fast horse, and they set off for Yangshan Prefecture together. Tempering day and night, they reached Yangshan Prefecture in just three days. Without pausing, they headed straight to the Lianshan mountain range within the territory of Yangshan Prefecture. The location chosen by Lu Yuan for Sun Siwen to build the Altar was in the depths of these mountains. It took them a day to pass through the endless mountains, and the two reached a valley. This valley was originally a Miao stronghold. However, after Lu Yuan crushed the Miao people in the southern three prefectures, this mountain village was also not spared and was raided and occupied directly. Later when Lu Yuan needed a secluded place to build the altar, Sun Siwen chose this place in Yangshan Prefecture as it was the most suitable. He gathered the Miao captives and, under the supervision of Lu Yuan¡¯s trusted team, started the slow construction of the altar at this location. Chapter 353 - Chapter 353: Chapter 196: Cauldron Assistance_2 Chapter 353: Chapter 196: Cauldron Assistance_2 Translator: 549690339 Now, time has swiftly passed, half a year has gone by. ¡°Master, the altar¡¯s foundation has been built. All that is left is to continuously raise the height by adding more layers, laying out the instrument tracks you have provided, and decorating the patterns of the heavenly pillars, then the altar will be completed,¡± On both sides of the valley, one of the registered disciples responsible for the area came to greet them upon knowing Lu Yuan had arrived. At this time, he led the two to inspect the progress of the project. After hearing this, Lu Yuan and Anqiu focused their gazes on the project. At this moment, in the valley, over a thousand robust Miao men were seen transporting soil and stones in baskets and bamboo baskets under the supervision of more than a hundred soldiers, building the altar. At the same time, specially crafted instrument tracks were being laid out within the altar. The altar was vast, covering hundreds of acres of land and was an enormous project. It was already impressive that this project was able to progress to this extent within half a year with only a thousand Miao people working on it. So, Lu Yuan nodded in satisfaction and said to his disciple, ¡°You have done well, but the construction time needs to be accelerated.¡± As he spoke this, he glanced at Anqiu beside him, clearly intending for the remark to reach his ears. The disciple listened to his master¡¯s instructions and quickly replied, ¡°Yes, I will tell them later to have the Miao people work an extra hour each day to have it completed sooner.¡± After inspecting the altar and taking back his gaze, Anqiu witnessed Lu Yuan and his disciple¡¯s performance. He couldn¡¯t help but smile and said, ¡°The altar is a delicate matter related to worshipping the Heavenly Pillars; there can¡¯t be any mistakes. If the construction is rushed and it results in problems with the altar, it will be all for naught. Taoist friend, you have just made a breakthrough into the Inborn stage. You have plenty of time; there¡¯s no need for haste.¡± Now that it was confirmed that Lu Yuan was really invested in building the altar, Anqiu no longer had doubts whether Lu Yuan was cultivating the Taiping Dao Book. So, after achieving his goal, he began to pay more attention to the quality of Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation of the Dao Book. It was a rare encounter to find an Inborn Grandmaster who was willing to practice the Taiping Dao Book, and True Person Anqiu certainly didn¡¯t want Lu Yuan to die prematurely due to hasty cultivation. Being able to make Lu Yuan live a few more months and provide more cultivation data would be of great significance to the Dan Ding Path. Now, Anqiu was actually encouraging Lu Yuan not to rush into cultivating the Dao Book. Since the main person involved wasn¡¯t in a hurry, Lu Yuan, who already intended to deceive the other party, was even more reluctant to rush. So, he glanced at his disciple and said indifferently, ¡°Did you hear that? Since True Person Anqiu has spoken, proceed as he said. Slow down the construction and be meticulous. Don¡¯t create any chaos.¡± Seeing that his master changed his mind with just a single remark from True Person Anqiu, the disciple was slightly surprised but didn¡¯t dare to ask further, only answering, ¡°As you command. I will instruct them to reduce their daily work hours by an hour so they can put more energy into refining the altar.¡± ¡°Hmm, just do that.¡± Lu Yuan nodded and then waved his hand, ¡°There¡¯s nothing more for you here, you may leave.¡± The disciple bowed and quickly retreated. After the people around left and only the two of them remained, Lu Yuan looked at True Person Anqiu and said, ¡°Now that you have confirmed that everything is in order on my end, I wonder if Fellow Daoist can give me a clear answer regarding the assistance I need.¡± Cultivating the Taiping Dao Book requires the founding of a nation, gathering the luck of the people as a king, and offering sacrifices to the Heavenly Pillars. Doing this is tantamount to tearing apart relations with the royal court. Now that the royal court is gaining momentum, with an army of over a hundred thousand marching west towards Dongting, and several grandmasters accompanying them, I wouldn¡¯t rashly turn against the royal court without sufficient strength. That would be akin to seeking death. Therefore, if Fellow Daoist doesn¡¯t offer enough benefits, the matter of cultivating the Taiping Dao Book will be indefinitely postponed.¡± The reason Lu Yuan was going while agreeing with True Person Anqiu, showing his innate strength, leading people to inspect the altar, and running around busily was for the sake of benefiting from the other party. If after all this effort, the other party didn¡¯t give enough benefits, Then, sorry, Don¡¯t blame Lu Yuan for not serving. True Person Anqiu knew Lu Yuan¡¯s thoughts, and laughed at this moment, confidently saying, ¡°Taoist friend Lu, do not worry. Previously, all these tests were just to confirm your dedication to cultivation. Now that it is confirmed, we will not do any further verification. Furthermore, the assistance I have prepared for fellow Daoist Lu this time will surely satisfy you.¡± Seeing that True Person Anqiu was speaking such confident words, Lu Yuan became even more curious. Could it be that the other party had truly prepared ten million silver taels for him? Thinking about this, his heart leaped, and he asked, ¡°Fellow Daoist, you said that, now I am curious. What exactly have you prepared to help me?¡± Anqiu stroked his floating beard and said with a faint smile, ¡°Ten million silver taels, two million stones of grain, ten thousand sets of iron armor, ten thousand strong crossbows, thirty thousand strong bows, fifty thousand pieces each of knives and spears, fifty Divine Blood Elixirs, and three top-tier martial arts. I wonder if all these are sufficient?¡± After hearing the list, Lu Yuan was stunned. Too much, it was too much. What the Dan Ding Path had given was simply too much. With ten million silver taels and two million stones of grain, these supplies alone could support the needs of a hundred thousand soldiers under Lu Yuan¡¯s command for about a year and a half of campaigning. And with ten thousand sets of iron armor, ten thousand strong crossbows, thirty thousand strong bows, and fifty thousand pieces each of knives and spears, these items were even more helpful to Lu Yuan than silver taels and grains. Chapter 354 - Chapter 354: Chapter 196: Cauldron Assistance_3 Chapter 354: Chapter 196: Cauldron Assistance_3 Translator: 549690339 The reason is quite simple. Under his command are 100,000 soldiers, apart from the initial 10,000 veterans, the remaining 90,000 people were all recruited within the past year. It is not difficult to feed an additional 90,000 soldiers, but equipping them with armor and weapons is a challenge. Lu Yuan¡¯s six prefectures have basically all been devastated by war, local production destroyed, treasury reserves drained, unable to supply enough weapons and armor. So among the 90,000 new soldiers, apart from a few tens of thousands who have some captured leather and iron armors, the rest don¡¯t even have a single set of armor. And as is well known. On the battlefield, whether one has armor protection or not makes a world of difference. A soldier clad in armor can under the same conditions, take on three to five unarmored opponents. As for the strong bows and crossbows, it goes without saying. Creating a good bow or crossbow takes at least one to two years of time. It is impossible for Lu Yuan to supply so many bows and crossbows to his army in such a short time. This has also led to many of his subordinates, who are hunters and mountain people, still only able to use weak hunting bows, making them quite pitiful. If they had 10,000 strong crossbows and 30,000 strong bows, they could be issued to his troops. By enabling his skilled shooters in the army to exchange their bird guns for cannons, their long-range striking power would instantly increase several times over. As for the other 50,000 spears and swords, although they are not as good as armor and strong bows, they could substantially alleviate the shortage of ordinary weapons for Lu Yuan and equip his army with new gear. In short, if all of the above military aid is in place, it would at least enhance the combat effectiveness of 100,000 soldiers under Lu Yuan by 50%, or even double it. And this is just the aid to the army. The 50 Divine Blood Elixirs and three top-grade martial arts techniques that followed were equally impressive. These top-grade martial arts techniques need not be mentioned, as Lu Yuan has no shortage of them and isn¡¯t particularly interested. However, if used correctly, the 50 Divine Blood Elixirs could directly cultivate nearly ten top-notch experts for Lu Yuan. If they could be assisted by so many top-notch experts, the top-level combat power he originally lacked would instantly become abundant. Not to mention securing the existing territories, controlling a whole region would be more than enough. In conclusion, the assistance provided by Dan Ding Dao this time is so extensive and generous, that it is no wonder it left Lu Yuan speechless. ¡°Gulp¡­¡± Lu Yuan swallowed difficultly and, after returning to his senses, looked at Anqiu True Person¡¯s smiling face and couldn¡¯t help verifying, ¡°Is what that True Person just said true?¡± He could hardly believe that Dan Ding Dao could offer so many good things in such an assistance deal. Really. Originally, Lu Yuan thought just 1,000 silver tales of assistance from Dan Ding Dao would be enough. But now it seems that this is not just 1,000 silver tales at all. All the assistance added together, 1,000 silver tales ten times over would hardly be enough to compare. The benefits were so great that Lu Yuan became a little uneasy in his heart. ¡®I was originally thinking of cheating Dan Ding Dao and going back on my word after getting the benefits, so that they would suffer a loss. But now that their investment is so huge, if I went back on my word, Wouldn¡¯t the Dao Master of Dan Ding Dao, upon hearing the news, be unable to resist coming down from the mountain to take my life?¡¯ As Lu Yuan pondered this possibility, his head began to ache. The more importance Dan Ding Dao attaches to this matter, the greater the risk and backlash he would face when turning against them in the future. At this point, he was somewhat deterred. After all, even without the assistance of Dan Ding Dao, he would be able to destroy the Iron Sword Sect given enough time. Although the gains would not be as great as this time¡¯s aid, it would still be about one-quarter or one-fifth. Although these gains are not significant, they would still be enough to support his army and last for several months or half a year. Later on, if they could win over the Miao people smoothly, they could also obtain their wealth from their previous plundering of the Dongting Prefecture, which would be a considerable income. If it was still not enough, they could even ask Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange to lend some money and grain for support. With multiple sources of funds and grains, it would be enough for Lu Yuan to wage war for a year or so. There really was no need to provoke Dan Ding Dao and offend such a powerful sect. But just as he thought so, ¡°Of course, all these promises are true,¡± Only to see Anqiu True Person affirming Lu Yuan¡¯s doubts and then explaining, ¡°The reason why my Dao has been slow to respond to the Fellow Daoist¡¯s request is that we have been gathering this aid for you. Now, ten million silver tales have been transported from Liang country to Dongting Prefecture. Two million stones of grain have also been purchased through our Dan Ding Dao channels from various regions of Yue Country and can be transported to your location at any time. As for the weapons and armors, due to suspicion of smuggling, transportation is a little difficult. But within two to three months, they can arrive.¡± As Anqiu True Person spoke, he drew out a jade box and three booklets from his bosom, waving them in front of Lu Yuan, ¡°As for the fifty Divine Blood Elixirs and three top-grade techniques, Elder Daoist has already brought them for Fellow Daoist, and you may take them.¡± After speaking, Anqiu True Person handed over the items. As Lu Yuan watched this scene, the words that originally came to his lips were swallowed back down. With Dan Ding Dao¡¯s preparations already in place, it was unlikely they would agree to his withdrawal now. After all, the amount of material aid in this instance was so vast. To gather and transport them would consume a lot of resources, presumably not a small amount. Lu Yuan even believed that they might amount to half of the aid supplies. When someone has paid such a high price, you can¡¯t just say no and expect them to concede, do you think they are easy to bully? Most likely, as soon as the words left his mouth, the Anqiu Elder Daoist in front of him would instantly turn hostile and attack him. Considering the other¡¯s identity as a senior cultivator, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but swallow his saliva. Although he too has cultivated and is also a Xiantian martial artist, However, if he really had to face Elder Daoist Anqiu, to be honest, he wouldn¡¯t be confident in defeating him or even surviving in his hands. With this in mind, he could only reveal a faint smile and reach out to accept the jade box and secret book, saying, ¡°Then thank you, Fellow Daoist.¡± Chapter 355 - Chapter 355: Chapter 197: Testing the Disciples Chapter 355: Chapter 197: Testing the Disciples Translator: 549690339 Lu Yuan accepted the gift, and upon seeing this, True Person Anqiu could not help but rejoice. Thus, smiles appeared on both of their faces. However, one was from the heart, while the other¡¯s was from bitterness. ¡®After waiting for so many years, I finally found an Inborn Grandmaster to cultivate the Taiping Dao Book.¡¯ ¡®It will be difficult to deal with Dan Ding Path in the future.¡¯ These thoughts arose in both of their minds. Nevertheless, both Lu Yuan and Anqiu were tacitly silent, their faces filled with beaming smiles. Looking at each other, their eyes were extremely kind, like close friends. After exchanging glances with Elder Daoist, Lu Yuan disliked staying in this broken place any longer and said, ¡°Since the matters here are resolved and there¡¯s nothing worth seeing in this wilderness, Fellow Daoist Anqiu, let¡¯s go back.¡± This time, Dan Ding Path caught him off guard with their unpredictable move. The original plan was no longer feasible. Taking advantage of Dan Ding Path seemed unlikely now. However, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t expose his secret of immortality. Thus, the inevitable rift would still occur. At this moment, they needed to prepare for future confrontations with Dan Ding Path. Otherwise, when the time comes and Dan Ding Path Master actually attacks at their doorstep, they would be defenseless, and it would be game over. As True Person Anqiu achieved his goal and confirmed Lu Yuan would cultivate the Taiping Dao Book, he naturally lost interest in their location, nodding and saying, ¡°I will listen to my fellow Daoist.¡± At this time, for Lu Yuan, who was a valuable test subject, those from Dan Ding Path cherished him more than anyone else in the world. As long as they could fulfill any reasonable conditions that Lu Yuan presented, Dan Ding Path would rarely refuse. And so, with different feelings, both hurriedly arrived and left just as quickly. Not even staying for half a day, they set off for the return journey. After returning to Shaoyang Prefecture City, Lu Yuan and Anqiu temporarily separated. He was too busy with other matters to deal with the Elder Daoist. Like the Poison Sect negotiations, impending military expeditions from the imperial court, coordinating responses with the Nanhai Sect, training new soldiers within the barracks, and even handling various government affairs¡­ There were many things that needed Lu Yuan¡¯s attention. Even while dealing with these matters, he still needed to find time to practice martial arts, research Inborn martial arts, and cultivate the Five Thunder Dao Law. Although he had a lot of time, there was also a lot to do. Now, another issue weighed on him: how to handle the upcoming Dan Ding Path matter. There were thousands of intertwined issues, like a chaotic mess. However, although Lu Yuan didn¡¯t have time to deal with Anqiu, the Elder Daoist wouldn¡¯t leave yet. True Person Anqiu needed to coordinate things here, urging his people to transport supplies that had been promised to Lu Yuan. Since so many supplies were involved, even if Dan Ding Path provided them all at once, it would be a massive loss. Nearly all of their recent accumulation would be depleted. Without staying here and personally witnessing the supplies arrive, True Person Anqiu couldn¡¯t feel at ease. Thus, both sides became busy independently. As for the supplies transported by Anqiu who was racking his brain, Lu Yuan only paid brief attention and lost interest quickly. Now that the alliance with Dan Ding Path was established, there was no turning back for him. Having accepted reality, Lu Yuan decisively let go of this thought and started using Dan Ding Path¡¯s funding to enhance his strength. No matter if Dan Ding Path would cause trouble after discovering they were fooled, first, they needed to increase their strength to deal with any future confrontations. Therefore, taking advantage of this opportunity, Lu Yuan summoned all fifty-six of his registered disciples, performing cultivation inspections. This time, he had obtained fifty Divine Blood Elixirs from True Person Anqiu, a tremendous fortune to quickly increase the strategic resources of his side¡¯s expert reserves. Since it was now in hand, he naturally wanted to make use of it immediately. Thus, Lu Yuan planned to first examine his disciples¡¯ mental states and pick a few outstanding ones to try and cultivate into top experts. Over the past year, many of his disciples had performed meritorious deeds in battles, which needed to be rewarded. Mere titles and wealth were not enough; they also needed support in martial arts resources. As his disciples grew stronger, Lu Yuan¡¯s job as a teacher would become easier, wouldn¡¯t it? However, the reality was that even with resources, cultivating talents was not necessarily easy. On the twenty-first day of the tenth month in the sixth year of Hongdao. Inside the big tent of the Shaoyang Prefecture City barracks. ¡°Didn¡¯t I always tell you to pay attention to your mental cultivation, read more Taoist classics daily, and not neglect your progress? Have you taken my words to heart?¡± ¡°All you ever do is abuse your power and enjoy wealth. Have you forgotten your Martial Arts cultivation?¡± ¡°In this chaotic world, without martial strength, how can you achieve success and gain wealth?¡± ¡°Get out of my sight!¡± ¡°If you still don¡¯t show any improvement in mental cultivation next time, don¡¯t consider yourself my disciple anymore. I can¡¯t afford to lose face.¡± Lu Yuan was furious, scolding one of his kneeling disciples who dared not argue back and was frightened pale. Chapter 356 - Chapter 356: Chapter 197: Testing the Disciples_2 Chapter 356: Chapter 197: Testing the Disciples_2 Translator: 549690339 Hearing this, he was as if granted a great amnesty, escaping in a flurry of scrambling and crawling. Seeing this disciple in such a sorry state, the personal guards at the doorway could not help shaking their heads in secrecy, showing quite a bit of sympathy. Some couldn¡¯t help but think: ¡®This must be the last one.¡¯ ¡®These generals¡¯ disciples, usually so pompously intimidating, now know how humiliation tastes.¡¯ Yes. Over the past few days, Lu Yuan had recalled his disciples to evaluate them. However, upon examination, out of the fifty-six registered disciples, there were less than nineteen who had earnestly practiced cultivating their minds, while the rest were all indulging in enjoyment and neglecting their cultivation. And among these nineteen dedicated practitioners, only four had truly achieved anything and were worthy of use. That is to say, only four people passed his evaluation after Lu Yuan¡¯s assessment and were able to take the Divine Acupuncture Elixir to break through the first-class realm. Among these four disciples, two of them, Chu Wei and Li Liang, were highly valued by Lu Yuan from the beginning and were given special attention in their training. The other two named, Han Shun and Zhang You. These two were originally unremarkable, but their sudden emergence as dark horses was rather surprising. Among the four, Chu Wei had cultivated six meridians, just reaching the second-class realm. Li Liang had cultivated seven meridians, a bit higher. As for Han Shun and Zhang You, they had both cultivated five meridians, with relatively low cultivation. However, now that these four people have passed the evaluation, Lu Yuan will naturally give them special training. So he granted them the Divine Blood Elixir. He gave Chu Wei seven, Li Liang six, and Han Shun and Zhang You eight each, just enough to help them break through to a first-class state. Then he sent these four to Zhou Qing, to have this Senior Brother instruct them on what they needed to be aware of when breaking through. As a result, twenty-nine Divine Blood Elixirs were bestowed on these four people. Then Lu Yuan rewarded the other fifteen disciples who had earnestly cultivated their minds with one Divine Acupuncture Elixir each as encouragement. Zhou Qing was also given one more. This disciple, after more than a year of cultivation, had made a great enhancement in his mental state, which would be enough for him to break through one more meridian and make further progress. In this way, after several rounds of rewards, the fifty Divine Blood Elixirs given by True Person Anqiu had been reduced to only five remaining. And Lu Yuan didn¡¯t keep this remaining five elixirs either. During this time, as he unified the five prefectures in the south of the province and captured Wuling Prefecture, commanding the territory of six prefectures, his momentum became increasingly enormous. Many local heroes had seen this, and quite a few came to pledge their allegiance. However, for these people, Lu Yuan usually assigned them to places to serve as inspectors and catch officers. Until they had passed his examination, he wouldn¡¯t give them the chance to wield military power. As an army leader, he held a high grip on military power. However, this was the time of need and circumstances dictated expediency, so these people who were still under instruction could be utilized now. Therefore, Lu Yuan began to sort out the list of inspectors and catch officers in the various prefectures and counties, selecting suitable candidates. Eventually, after several rounds of selection, one person named Zhuang Hua was chosen. This man was a local from Shaoyang Prefecture. He grew up in a small Taoist temple, studying the Taoist Classics from a young age, with a high level of mental cultivation. At the same time, he also practiced martial arts in the temple and his cultivation had reached the second-class level, having unblocked as many as eight meridians. Perhaps it was due to his martial arts training, that this man could not stand loneliness. After taking care of his aging master who had raised him since childhood till his death, he left to venture out in hopes of achieving wealth and honor. At that time, Lu Yuan had just crushed the Miao Thieves in Shaoyang Prefecture and had been conferred the title of Brave General. Hearing the news, Zhuang Hua hurried over to pledge allegiance and was then assigned the post of inspector, in charge of maintaining law and order in several counties. He then accumulated merits along the way and rose to his current position of Catch Officer, responsible for law enforcement and maintaining order in all of Shaoyang Prefecture. In summary, he could be considered one of Lu Yuan¡¯s old subordinates. In terms of ability and loyalty, he was quite reliable. Moreover, the fact that he cared for his aging master till his death before setting out to seek adventure speaks volumes about his character. However, just because he hadn¡¯t managed to break into the core group, he could only be left circling at the local level. Now that he was in dire need of talents, and there was such a suitable candidate, Lu Yuan simply called him over for an assessment. After the assessment, Lu Yuan could not help but nod in satisfaction. At this moment, looking at Zhuang Hua on the ground, who was starting to suspect what was happening and was slightly breathless, Lu Yuan smiled and said, ¡°Zhuang Hua, your mental cultivation is top-notch, and you¡¯re a talent. I wish to take you as my disciple and include you in the true line of transmission. Are you willing?¡± Phew phew phew! Hearing that his conjectures had come true, Zhuang Hua took several heavy breaths. Having a grandmaster of the Inborn realm as a master was a huge stroke of luck. Not to mention that this Inborn Grandmaster also held a large number of soldiers and was a lord dominating one side. Such luck couldn¡¯t even be described as the ancestors¡¯ graves billowing with green smoke, only barely fitting to say it was the luck of several lifetimes accumulated. With such a great opportunity presented before him, Zhuang Hua, who had always desired wealth and prestige, didn¡¯t hesitate at all and immediately knelt down to perform a ritual of respect: ¡°Disciple Zhuang Hua, greets Master.¡± ¡°Good, good, good!¡± Seeing this, Lu Yuan could not help but laugh heartily: ¡°Good disciple, rise quickly.¡± Hearing this, Zhuang Hua finally stood up. Looking at the disciple he had carefully selected, Lu Yuan was quite satisfied. He picked up a manuscript that someone had copied and a jade bottle from his desk and with a wave of his hand, they floated over. Chapter 357 - Chapter 357: Chapter 197: Testing the Disciples_3 Chapter 357: Chapter 197: Testing the Disciples_3 Translator: 549690339 ¡°This is the Chi Yang Divine Skill I have cultivated, a top-notch martial art. What the bottle contains is the Divine Blood Elixir, a miraculous medicine for martial training that can help one break through a single meridian. There are five pills in the bottle, which are precisely enough for you to break through the top rank. Take these martial skills and return home. Once you transfer your cultivation to this skill, take the elixir. When you have broken through to the top rank, come find me. At that time, I will personally accept you into the inner circle as a true disciple.¡± According to the rules previously set by Lu Yuan, his disciples must possess strength beyond the top rank to be listed as true disciples. Otherwise, no matter how close the relationship, they are merely nominal disciples. Although Zhuang Hua is someone he plans to nurture, he can only be a nominal disciple until breaking through the top rank. He cannot be accepted as a true disciple. However, with his cultivation skills, it will only take half a year to transfer his cultivation to the new skill. After taking the elixir, he will be able to break through the top rank with ease. Including him, along with Chu Wei and the four others, and Zhou Qing, Lu Yuan will have six true disciples. Of course. While Zhuang Hua and the others are indeed true disciples, their standing has only nominally and officially improved. Naturally, they can¡¯t be compared to Zhou Qing. Amongst everyone, the only people Lu Yuan truly trusts are Sun Siwen and Zhou Qing, the two friends and disciples who have accompanied him all the way. All the others are merely tools. ¡°Disciple thanks Master for bestowing the cultivation method and elixir.¡± When Zhuang Hua heard what Lu Yuan had bestowed upon him, he immediately knelt down to express his gratitude. ¡°You don¡¯t need to be so formal.¡± Lu Yuan laughed and said. Then he thought of something else and continued, ¡°However, since you are my disciple, you naturally cannot stay in the region. After you return, turn over public affairs to Prefect Cui, and then come serve in the camp. We¡¯ve recruited many new soldiers here, and we¡¯re short on military officers. You can start by holding this position. Then get familiar with military affairs in the camp. Once you¡¯ve done something noteworthy, I¡¯ll promote you.¡± For those true disciples, Lu Yuan¡¯s arrangement is to command armies, conduct campaigns, or defend a region. Only with a large army can a top-rank expert¡¯s strength be most effectively utilized. However, Zhuang Hua, who had been arresting bandits at a regional level, lacks experience in commanding troops and can¡¯t take on significant responsibilities yet. Before he is sure that Zhuang Hua has enough experience commanding troops, Lu Yuan won¡¯t easily hand over tens of thousands of troops to him. That¡¯s a large army of ten thousand soldiers, after all. To train them requires an investment of millions of silver tales. If they were led by a mediocre person and resulted in heavy losses, it would be a bitter outcome. ¡°Disciple obeys.¡± Zhuang Hua could naturally offer no dissent towards the commands of his newly acknowledged Master. Besides, he was extremely pleased to be able to join the core group in the army, and there was no way he could refuse. ¡°Alright, I don¡¯t have anything else for you now. You can leave.¡± After finishing the discussion, Lu Yuan, who still had other things to do, waved his hand to dismiss him. Zhuang Hua quickly retreated. After spending nearly ten days on assessing all the disciples and even accepting a new one as a potential true disciple, Lu Yuan finally took a breather from his busy days. Then, things returned to normal. He went back to practicing his skills and reading scriptures every day, inspecting military affairs when he had time, and his days became quiet again. By early December, after nearly half a month of transportation, the ten million silver tales promised by True Person of Anqiu had finally arrived at Shaoyang Prefecture. Part of the two million stones of military food had also been delivered to Luyang Prefecture. The rest will be delivered to his various prefectures within this month. In the meantime, after Lu Yuan spread his elixir to his disciples, there have been many good news from those who received the elixir. The first to report were Chu Wei and his group. They were given the Chi Yang Divine Skill early on and had Zhou Qing as their mentor. Their progress was naturally swift. In just half a month, they have all broken into the ranks of top-tier experts. Among the other fifteen disciples who were awarded one elixir, seven were close to breaking into the second-tier. After receiving the elixir, they successfully broke through and stepped into the second tier. As a result, Lu Yuan now has five top-tier experts and ten second-tier experts under his leadership. Although this number is still far from those of the Innate Sects, it, at least, carries the demeanor of an Innate Grandmaster. It¡¯s no longer like before, where there was no difference between him and a lone Innate cultivator. His disciples were continually bringing good news. In another area, more good news had also arrived. In the middle of the twelfth month, Su Xuange, whom Yan Wangqiu had previously sent someone to invite, finally arrived at Shaoyang Prefecture after nearly a month. And Lu Yuan finally met his ally. The three of them met at Lu Yuan¡¯s mansion in the city. The venue for the meeting was a small garden in the backyard. Su Xuange was dressed in white, dashing and handsome. Although he was over eighty, he still looked as youthful as a forty-year-old man. Perhaps it was due to him being a master of the sword, on Lu Yuan¡¯s first sight, he could feel an air of defiance about him. He seemed restless. But then again, if he were an obedient type, he wouldn¡¯t have agreed to his invitation to stand against the Court. With this thought in mind, Lu Yuan greeted Su Xuange with a bright smile. ¡°Sect Master Su, I have long heard of your eminent name.¡± Su Xuange, who was also looking at Lu Yuan, hid his approval and chuckled, ¡°General Lu, I have also long heard of your name.¡± Seeing that they had exchanged greetings, Yan Wangqiu, who had introduced them earlier, chimed in with a smile, ¡°General Lu, Sect Master Su, since all three of us are gathered here, let¡¯s take this opportunity to discuss forming our alliance.¡± Bringing Su Xuange here wasn¡¯t just about having him help them control the Poison Sect. More importantly, the leaders of the three forces needed to meet up and discuss their strategies in dealing with the Court, who would exert how much effort, and who would be responsible for what area. They also needed to outline their own interests to use as negotiating terms with the Court. All of these are things that need to be sorted out and confirmed before confronting the Court. And for these major matters, it wouldn¡¯t work unless the leaders of the three forces met and discussed everything clearly. This is the main reason why Su Xuange traveled a great distance from Jianan Prefecture. The Poison Sect is, after all, only incidental. Chapter 358 - Chapter 358: Chapter 198: The Tripartite Alliance Chapter 358: Chapter 198: The Tripartite Alliance Translator: 549690339 Lu Yuan and Yan Wangqiu had discussed their interests many times before. Lu Yuan wanted Dongting Prefecture, while Yan Wangqiu wanted South Sea Prefecture. Of course, if it really couldn¡¯t be done, taking over Yulin County would also be acceptable. So there was no need to say more about this between the two. The key was Su Xuange¡¯s side. The Nine River Sword Sect dominated Jianan Prefecture, making it a hegemon in the southeastern martial arts world of Da Yue. Although when it came to real strength, Su Xuange was inferior to both Lu Yuan and Yan Wangqiu. After all, both of them could deploy 300,000 soldiers, while Su Xuange could only deploy 150,000, which was where the gap lay. ¡°I need a prefecture¡¯s territory, no matter which one.¡± Su Xuange clearly expressed his interest demands: that is, the three of them should be treated the same, and each should be able to start a country with his own prefecture. ¡°Nowadays, Xichuan Prefecture is occupied by Liang people, and only eight prefectures remain in the hands of the court. Linhai Prefecture, Yuzhang Prefecture, and Guangling Prefecture are the core hinterlands of the court, which absolutely cannot be ceded. The remaining Dongting Prefecture and South Sea Prefecture are divided between me and Sect Master Yan. On the side of Jiuzhen Prefecture, the court has already promised it to White Phoenix Temple. If we fight against them, we will definitely offend the temple and add an enemy. In this case, Sect Master Su, if you want a prefecture¡¯s territory, you can only choose between Yulin and Jianan.¡± Lu Yuan analyzed. ¡°Jianan Prefecture is not possible.¡± After hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s words, Su Xuange said directly: ¡°Jianan Prefecture is bordered by Linhai to the north and Yuzhang to the west, both adjacent to the court¡¯s hinterland. If I establish a country here, it would be like a sharp sword stabbing the court¡¯s heart. The court will never allow it. Even if they allow it, the court is facing danger at the moment, and perhaps forced by the crisis of life and death, they will agree. But once they get through today¡¯s crisis, they will send troops from the north and west, with hundreds of thousands of troops facing the border. How can Jianan Prefecture¡¯s poverty resist?¡± Jianan Prefecture has only eight prefectures, and within them, there are eight mountains, one river, and one field, which cannot support many people. So far, there are only 300,000 households in the whole prefecture, reaching 1.5 million people. With such a small population, such a narrow border, and such harsh conditions, even if Su Xuange tried his best, he could only raise at most 50,000 to 60,000 full-time soldiers. If the militia is included, perhaps tens or hundreds of thousands of people can be pulled out. However, this strength is still not enough to see, and it is impossible to withstand the court¡¯s attack. Therefore, staying in this place to establish a country, although it can retain the greatest strength of the Nine River Sword Sect, it also means falling into an awkward deadlock, facing the risk of being attacked by the court at any time. Who can sleep soundly by the side of the couch? For the court, Jianan Prefecture is that side of the couch. Next to it, Yan Wangqiu stroked his beard and said, ¡°In this case, Sect Master Su can only choose Yulin Prefecture.¡± Su Xuange nodded slightly when he heard Yan Wangqiu¡¯s words: ¡°If it is Yulin Prefecture, it is indeed possible.¡± Yulin County actually has many mountains, and there are quite a few barbarian tribes, but the geographical conditions are much better than those in Jianan Prefecture. The most direct point. At its peak, Yulin County had 500,000 households, with more than 2.7 million people. In terms of population alone, it is almost twice that of Jianan Prefecture. Nowadays, Yulin County, though it has suffered from Jinghai Country¡¯s atrocities in recent years, the remaining population should still be about 2 million, which is still stronger than Jianan Prefecture. The most important thing is that Yulin County borders Dongting and South Sea Prefecture, and establishing a country here can join forces with Lu Yuan and Yan Wangqiu to provide mutual assistance. At that time, the three families could jointly cope with external pressures, which would be enough to survive in troubled times. Lu Yuan personally agreed with Su Xuange¡¯s choice to establish a country in Yulin County because it would maximize the strength of the three territories. The Trio can form a small circle, advance and retreat together, and cope with emergencies. But in this way, he becomes the one with the greatest disadvantage. The two have both moved to the south of the mountain, and now it¡¯s Lu Yuan who is blocking the front. He is responsible forblocking the pressure from Zhou Country to the north and the court to the east. Neither of these enemies is easy to deal with. If it relies solely on the strength of Lu Yuan¡¯s Dongting Prefecture, it simply cannot withstand it. So, seeing that Su Xuange chose the land to establish his country, Lu Yuan looked at the two and said: ¡°Both of you choose to establish your countries in the south of the mountain, which is indeed appropriate. But by that time, I will be alone in the north of the mountain, facing Zhou people and the court alone. After several years of war and destruction, Dongting Prefecture is already in ruins, and I¡¯m afraid that there are only more than 1 million people in the whole prefecture. It¡¯s difficult to maintain it in such a desperate condition. By that time, even the soldiers and horses in my hands won¡¯t be able to support them. As both of you are in the rear, the south of the mountain is rich and has no worries of foreign enemies, so you need to help me resist the enemy when the time comes. After all, I, in Dongting Prefecture, help you block the enemy coming from the north.¡± Lu Yuan has six prefectures now, with a total of only 1.2 million people. The remaining Yueyang, Hengyang, and Changsha prefectures under the court¡¯s control are estimated to have 6 or 700,000 people. As for Tianmen Prefecture in the north of the river, several hundred thousand soldiers are waiting there. After repelling Zhou people, it is uncertain whether there will be any people left. So, with such a small population, it is simply unrealistic to support Lu Yuan¡¯s more than 100,000 soldiers and horses. At present, with various support and extra income, it can be temporarily maintained. But after two or three years, when the money is used up, Lu Yuan¡¯s finances will collapse. However, the situation in Dongting Prefecture requires him to maintain this massive army. Because to the north of Dongting Prefecture is Zhou Country¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture, to the east is the court¡¯s Yuzhang Prefecture, and to the west is the Xichuan Prefecture. Chapter 359 - Chapter 359: Chapter 198: The Tripartite Alliance_2 Chapter 359: Chapter 198: The Tripartite Alliance_2 Translator: 549690339 Western, northern, and eastern enemies exist on all three sides, the military pressure from which can be imagined. By the time the kingdom is truly established, whether the current 100,000 soldiers would be enough is still a question. Thus, reducing the army and saving expenses is fundamentally impossible. If Lu Yuan wanted to maintain rule in Dongting Prefecture, he must have an army of over 100,000 troops in place to suppress internal strife and fend off external enemies. However, to do so, he could not rely on himself and needed help from outsiders. These outsiders are naturally the two allies right in front of him. ¡°General Lu, rest assured, as we¡¯re allies, if our countries are established in the future, we will support each other. As a general, you will need supplies and funding, and we will provide assistance.¡± In response to Lu Yuan¡¯s request, Yan Wangqiu agreed very readily. ¡°That¡¯s right. As a general, you shield us from the north by blocking Zhou and Yue, and we won¡¯t hesitate to help you,¡± said Su Xuange, clarifying his stance at this moment. These two leaders knew very well that the most crucial part of this alliance was Lu Yuan. Without Lu Yuan holding the line in the north to separate Zhou Country from the royal court, they wouldn¡¯t stand a chance against the hundreds of thousands of troops descending from the north. Thus, Lu Yuan must not fall, especially without his tens of thousands of troops as a barrier. Without this barrier, the two of them, even if they established countries, would not last long. It might not be long before their countries are destroyed. Rather than face the consequences of a destroyed state, it was better to spend some money and food to let Lu Yuan block the threat from the Zhou Country and the royal court. As for how Lu Yuan would grow his strength with their money and food? Both of them were confident that by controlling the money and food, they would control Lu Yuan¡¯s lifeline. As long as they held this lifeline, they didn¡¯t have to worry about Lu Yuan turning against and swallowing them up. With their combined forces, having two Prefectures against one, weren¡¯t they afraid they wouldn¡¯t win? In this way, the three parties checked and balanced each other, while working together to handle most crises. ¡°With both of your assurances, I can rest at ease,¡± said Lu Yuan, smiling as they both made their positions clear. After setting the tone, the three discussed how much aid they would provide to Lu Yuan after the founding of the country. Eventually, they reached an agreement. Lu Yuan would need six million silver tales every year to support his 100,000 soldiers, and would consume approximately five million tons of grain. Yan Wangqiu would contribute three million silver tales and three million tons of grain. Su Xuange would provide two million silver tales and one million tons of grain. The remaining one million silver tales and one million tons of grain would be provided by Lu Yuan himself. It was clear from the division that Yan Wangqiu bore the most responsibility, followed by Su Xuange, with Lu Yuan contributing the least. The reason for this allocation was the wealth of the territories they occupied. South Sea Prefecture was the richest, with convenient sea trade and prosperous businesses. Plus, it has a vast plain as a major grain-producing area, so there were many households and over 3.7 million people. This single Prefecture was worth as much as the combined territories of Dongting and Yulin. As such, it was only natural that Yan Wangqiu, who had the most significant advantages, took on the most responsibility. Otherwise, Lu Yuan and Su Xuange would be working for him for free. Having the worst territory, the smallest population, and facing the harshest situation, Lu Yuan needed the least support. With the distribution of benefits settled, the trio discussed how to deal with the royal court. For example, if the court disagreed with their demands, how would they respond? After some discussion, they reached a conclusion. If the court were indeed hostile, then Su Xuange would lead his troops north to attack Linhai County. Yan Wangqiu would mobilize his forces to the west and south, attacking Yulin County and Jiuzhen County. Meanwhile, Lu Yuan would command his troops to the east, attacking Yuzhang Prefecture. In this way, they would act on three fronts simultaneously, echoing each other¡¯s movements. However, by that time, whatever territory each side could seize would be dependent on their individual abilities. With their faces torn with the court, there was no need to limit themselves to just three Prefectures. When the time came, they would take what they could seize. ¡°Since there¡¯s no disagreement, let us drink blood as a pledge here and now!¡± With every oath negotiated, Lu Yuan used his power to extract a few drops of blood, which he dropped into three wine cups that had been prepared. Lifting one up, he said, ¡°From now on, the three of us will face the Da Yue court and Zhou together. We will advance or retreat as one, share hardships, and support each other as allies. If we break this oath, we shall be punished by heaven and man alike!¡± Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange also dripped blood into their own cups, and together they said, ¡°If we break this oath, we shall be punished by heaven and man alike!¡± Having said this, the three drank and smashed their cups, then looked at each other and laughed heartily. The alliance of the three nations was thus formed. Following the establishment of the alliance, the relationship between the three men, Lu Yuan, Yan Wangqiu, and Su Xuange, quickly deepened. They all understood that a close personal relationship among the three families would be essential for their mutual support in the future. So they took advantage of this opportunity to strengthen their friendship as much as possible. Within a few days, they started calling each other brothers. Although they hadn¡¯t sworn their allegiance yet, at least on the surface, their relationship was undoubtedly like that of the closest friends. At this time, after grinding at the Five Poisons sect for several months, they finally loosened their grip. Lan Zhaoyun, the leader of the Five Poisons sect, finally bowed his head and sent a message that he was willing to come to Shaoyang Prefecture City to pay his respects. Satisfied, Lu Yuan agreed to receive him. The two parties then agreed to meet at the Shaoyang City barracks on the twenty-third day of the twelfth lunar month. Time passed quickly. In the blink of an eye, the day of the meeting arrived. On that day, Lu Yuan called Yan and Su to assemble their troops outside Shaoyang City, making a grand display of martial prowess. Chapter 360 - Chapter 360: Chapter 198: Alliance of the Three Kingdoms_3 Chapter 360: Chapter 198: Alliance of the Three Kingdoms_3 Translator: 549690339 Later, they also invited Anqiu True Person, who was also in Fu City, to come and observe the ceremony. The reason for inviting this Elder Daoist was mainly to continue the pretense of the military review and deceive the other party, to make them more firmly believe that he planned to cultivate the Taiping Dao Book. As much as possible, delay the day of confrontation. At the same time, through today¡¯s military review, they could display their strength, making Dan Ding Path know that he was not someone they could easily manipulate. If the effect was good, it might even deter the other party, so that when it came time to turn against them, they would not dare to retaliate. Moreover, Anqiu True Person was a cultivator who could be on par with a Martial Arts Xiantian, not only with strong strength but also representing Dan Ding Path. Bringing such a person as a deterrence would undoubtedly be more advantageous when negotiating terms with the Five Poisons Sect and Lan Zhaoyun. After making all these preparations, at around nine o¡¯clock in the morning, the army had already lined up in the wasteland outside the city, practicing their formations and skills. At this moment, the news came from outside the camp that the Five Poisons Sect Master Lan Zhaoyun had finally arrived. Lu Yuan, upon hearing the news, showed no change in his expression and did not show any intention to greet him. He just said indifferently, ¡°Bring the man in.¡± After that, he turned back and continued to chat with Yan Wangqiu and others, laughing and watching the soldiers below. Of the three guests who were invited to observe the ceremony, Yan Wangqiu was actually fine, as he had been following Lu Yuan in battles before and was well aware of the situation of his soldiers, knowing that they could be considered elite. However, for Su Xuange and Anqiu True Person, it was their first time seeing the strong soldiers under Lu Yuan¡¯s command. Upon seeing them, they couldn¡¯t help but be amazed. This was not because they were shocked by the elite nature of Lu Yuan¡¯s soldiers. It must be said that of Lu Yuan¡¯s 100,000 soldiers, only 50,000 veterans could be regarded as truly elite. The remaining 50,000 were newly recruited soldiers, most of whom had never seen blood. They were still far behind the elite soldiers of the imperial court and the Liang and Zhou countries. What truly shocked the two of them was that Lu Yuan could support such an elite force with the power of just half a county. Although there were only 50,000 people, with such elite forces and the combination of new and veteran soldiers, the current 100,000-strong army could become an elite force within a year. With 100,000 elite soldiers in hand, even the major countries like Zhou, Liang, and Yue could not neglect them. After all, these countries usually had only five to six hundred thousand regular soldiers, who had to be stationed and guarded in various places, and could not all be concentrated together. Lu Yuan had 100,000 soldiers, which was enough to engage in a head-on confrontation with these countries in a certain direction. Wasn¡¯t such military power impressive for half a county? After the shock, Su Xuange regained his composure and his heart was naturally filled with joy and excitement. Since the three of them were already allies, the tremendous strength of their ally would undoubtedly increase the chances of success and security when it came to founding a country in the future. Knowing this, how could they not be happy? Anqiu True Person was also delighted. Lu Yuan¡¯s training of elite soldiers undoubtedly showed that he had the ambition to dominate the world. To compete for hegemony, one needs to have sufficient strength. This strength referred not only to military power but also to high-level combat power such as Inborn Grandmasters. Thus, from this point of view, it further confirmed that Lu Yuan was seriously preparing to cultivate the Taiping Dao Book. ¡®And it¡¯s not just that.¡¯ Anqiu True Person averted his gaze from the army formation below and looked toward Su Xuange and Yan Wangqiu, amazed: ¡®This Lu Yuan has such a close relationship with these two Inborn Grandmasters.¡¯ Their appearance seemed far more than just a good relationship. It resembled the six families and seven clans of the Yue State, who mutually made alliances with each other. If my guess is correct, then there might already be unknown agreements between the Nine River Sword Sect, Nanhai Sect, and this conquering general.¡¯ Anqiu True Person thought to himself, chuckling mischievously. Although he was a cultivator, a person beyond worldly affairs. However, it must be said that as a Dao vein of Liang Country, he was rather happy to see the Zhou and Yue countries, his two enemies, having a hard time. Otherwise, Dan Ding Path would not have chosen Chi Mingzhu for its support back then and deliberately started a rebellion in Jianan of Yue State. Moreover, Lu Yuan¡¯s eagerness to find allies was more in line with the interests of Dan Ding Path. With so many allies, once he launched an attack, he wouldn¡¯t immediately be wiped out by the Yue State court. In this way, he could hold out for a longer time, or even capture a larger territory, which would be invaluable data for cultivating the Taiping Dao Book. All these factors were extremely favorable for Dan Ding Path. And so, in high spirits, Anqiu True Person looked at Lu Yuan next to him and began to praise him: ¡°General, you truly deserve to be a famous general of our time, able to train such elite soldiers. No wonder that in just a few years, you have broken the chaos of the Miao people and achieved great military accomplishments¡­¡± As soon as the words were spoken, the man who had just arrived at the scene, his face suddenly darkened and he couldn¡¯t help but let out a faint snort. Hearing the sound, everyone turned their heads and saw a burly man dressed in Miao nationality clothing standing behind them, looking at them with displeasure. Without a doubt, everyone immediately understood the other party¡¯s identity¡ªit was the Five Poisons Sect Master Lan Zhaoyun who had come to seek peace. Thinking of this, everyone¡¯s expressions and gazes immediately became strange. As Lan Zhaoyun was stared at by various gazes from the crowd, his heart was extremely uncomfortable. When had he, the leader of a sect, the leader of the Miao people, ever suffered such humiliation? He wanted to glare back and show some of his dignity. To tell them that even if he was defeated, he wasn¡¯t someone they could easily humiliate. But as his gaze swept over the four people, his heart grew colder and colder. Because Lan Zhaoyun discovered that among the three people present, all of them were Inborn Grandmasters. As for the remaining one, although he wasn¡¯t a Grandmaster, his aura was not much worse than that of the Grandmasters by his side, and even seemed to be faintly stronger. As the leader of a sect, he naturally had some experience. He knew that this should be those people from the Daoist Path, who were even more terrifying than the Inborn Grandmasters. ¡°Gulp¡­¡± After recognizing the strength of the people in the field, the anger in Lan Zhaoyun¡¯s heart was instantly extinguished like a bucket of cold water, and he couldn¡¯t help but swallow a dry mouthful of saliva, feeling desolate and bitter. Chapter 361 - Chapter 361: Chapter 199: Marriage with the Holy Maiden Chapter 361: Chapter 199: Marriage with the Holy Maiden Translator: 549690339 How could this be? This question floated back and forth in Lan Zhaoyun¡¯s heart. Previously in his eyes, Lu Yuan was merely an ordinary military commander who could fight wars and had tens of thousands of soldiers and horses under his command. Although difficult to deal with, when compared to himself, he was not at the same level of power. After all, the original Poison Sect had 200,000 troops, nearly the territory of five prefectures, and an Inborn Grandmaster in the sect. No matter how you looked at it, it was far stronger than Lu Yuan. But just this year, everything changed. In response to Zhou People, Lan Zhaoyun led an army of 60,000 from Wuling Prefecture to help attack Shangguan Ming, with the original intention of recapturing the county city. But who would have thought that this would force Lu Yuan out. A sudden 200,000 army expedition, shaking the entire Dongting Prefecture, forcing Lan Zhaoyun back to Wuling Prefecture. But who knew this was only a smoke screen, after an unexpected surprise attack, they lost the three prefectures in the south, with one hundred thousand soldiers scattered, and the situation reversed in an instant. The once formidable Poison Sect, which could stand against the court in Dongting Prefecture, was instantly knocked down into the dust. Reduced to a candle in the wind that could only hold onto one corner, shrinking in Wuling Prefecture, completely lost hope of hegemony. But even so, for Lan Zhaoyun, it wasn¡¯t the end of the road yet. Because within the Poison Sect, there was still his daughter ¨C the Saintess, an Inborn Grandmaster. On the other hand, even though Lu Yuan had hundreds of thousands of soldiers and horses, he was just an ordinary top-tier expert. When facing an Inborn Grandmaster, there wasn¡¯t much advantage. So as long as his daughter remained, Poison Sect still had some cards to play and hope for self-preservation. That was why, even though the Poison Sect had asked for peace earlier, they still held a superior attitude, attempting to negotiate on equal footing. Because in terms of power distribution, the Poison Sect had the advantage in terms of top-tier experts, whereas Lu Yuan had the advantage in terms of military force. Though there was a gap between the two sides, they were generally of the same level. And then this last hope was shattered as well. Just last month, with the news of Lu Yuan breaking through to Innate, the last shred of superiority in Lan Zhaoyun¡¯s heart was completely trampled upon. He knew that his side, in the face of Lu Yuan, no longer possessed any advantage. Be it in terms of military force or high-end combat power. So after realizing this, Lan Zhaoyun chose to submit, gave up on the stubborn border negotiation, and agreed to Lu Yuan¡¯s request to meet him personally. This was initially extremely humiliating for him. However, this humiliation turned into fear when he saw the several people standing beside Lu Yuan. Four Innate Combat Powers, what kind of concept was that? Now with the decisive battle between the Yue State court and Zhou Country, within Dongting territory including Lu Yuan and Yan Wangqiu, there were only five Inborn Grandmasters. As for Zhou Country, they also had five. Now there were four on Lu Yuan¡¯s side, almost equivalent to these two great countries. ¡®If they all come together to besiege Cai¡¯er, even if she is an Inborn Grandmaster, I¡¯m afraid it would be difficult to resist, right?¡¯ Previously, when Lan Cai¡¯er cooperated with Li Xiong, they could assassinate Li Gui. Now on Lu Yuan¡¯s side, the number of people is double that of that time, and the members are also stronger than that time. So to chase and kill a Lan Cai¡¯er who is weaker than Li Gui, it would only be easier, not harder. Thinking of the situation his daughter might face, Lan Zhaoyun felt terrified. This was not only a concern for his daughter. But also the worry for the future of the Poison Sect and the Miao People after his daughter was gone. Under the strong fear, the last persistence in his heart vanished, and he took the initiative to admit his guilt and bow down, saying: ¡°The sinful Lan Zhaoyun has seen the general.¡± Seeing Lan Zhaoyun submitting, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but smile, knowing that his intimidation today had worked. But thinking that he would still need to rely on the other party later, he didn¡¯t put on too much of an air and directly stepped forward to help him up, smiling: ¡°I¡¯ve been waiting for Sect Leader Lan for quite a while now, I¡¯m finally able to meet you in person.¡± Lan Zhaoyun hurriedly said: ¡°It¡¯s a crime for me to keep the general waiting, I deserve ten thousand deaths, please forgive me, general.¡± ¡°Well, don¡¯t talk about that. It¡¯s good that Sect Leader Lan has arrived.¡± Lu Yuan waved his hand and then introduced the three people around him to Lan Zhaoyun: ¡°This is Yan Wangqiu, the old Sect Leader Yan, the Sect Leader of Nanhai Sect, and a good friend of mine. This is Sect Leader Su Xuange of the Nine River Sword Sect, my good friend. This is True Person Anqiu of the Dan Ding Path, the number one Path within Liang Country, my fellow Daoist.¡± Lu Yuan pointed to the three people, introducing them one by one, and then said to everyone: ¡°This is Sect Leader Lan Zhaoyun of the Poison Sect, you can get to know each other.¡± ¡°Sect Leader Lan.¡± ¡°Sect Leader Lan.¡± Su Xuange and Yan Wangqiu both knew about Lu Yuan¡¯s plan and that Lan Zhaoyun¡¯s daughter was an important force in forcing the court to compromise. So at this moment, they didn¡¯t put on an angry face towards Lan Zhaoyun, and like Lu Yuan, their attitude was quite good. Seeing the other party voluntarily submit, they also greeted one another in a friendly manner. ¡°I¡¯ve met Sect Leader Su and Sect Leader Yan.¡± Facing the Sect Leaders of two Innate Great Sects, Lan Zhaoyun dared not be arrogant at all. He quickly returned the courtesy, his attitude very respectful. Even though, theoretically speaking, once Lan Cai¡¯er was out, the Poison Sect could also be called an Innate Great Sect. But with the current situation of the Poison Sect, there was always the danger of being destroyed, so when Lan Zhaoyun met the others, he didn¡¯t have a shred of confidence, and he held an attitude as low as possible. ¡°Sect Leader Lan, I spoke out of turn before and offended you. I hope you won¡¯t take offense.¡± At this time, True Person Anqiu saw the attitude of Lu Yuan and the others towards Lan Zhaoyun, and realized something. After thinking for a moment, he also took the initiative to apologize. Chapter 362 - Chapter 362: Chapter 199: Marriage with the Holy Maiden_2 Chapter 362: Chapter 199: Marriage with the Holy Maiden_2 Translator: 549690339 Anyway, the other party was the father of an Inborn Grandmaster, and with such a status, he did not consider himself demeaned. ¡°Not at all. What the True Person said earlier is true. General devotes himself with divine power, and I was overconfident earlier in resisting the heavenly soldiers, which led to this end. It¡¯s fate. On the contrary, it is my narrow-mindedness that offended the True Person.¡± Lan Zhaoyun hurriedly stepped aside and spoke at this time, not daring to accept an apology from a True Person. Frankly speaking, if the various Inborn sects in the world are at the apex of the martial arts world, the Inborn Grandmasters in the world would be at the apex among martial artists. Then the six Dao Veins of the mysterious gate are at the apex of those Inborn sects, and the True Persons of the six major Dao sects are the apex of the Inborn Grandmasters. EvenCountries like Zhou, Liang, and Yue treated the six major Dao Veins with great reverence and dared not show any disrespect. Since even these major countries were like this, how could the Five Poisons Sect not be? However, seeing a True Person from a great Dao Vein apologizing to himself for being momentarily speechless made Lan Zhaoyun even more surprised. He looked at Lu Yuan in front of him, and his emphasis on this court general rose again. Lan Zhaoyun was clear that the reason why the attitudes of the three True Grandmasters before him were so good was not because of his identity as the Sect Leader or because of his daughter who was a Grandmaster. Although these factors contributed, a greater likelihood was that it came from Lu Yuan¡¯s attitude. A newly promoted Inborn Grandmaster could make two veteran Grandmasters and an Immortal True Person treat him like this, which was thought-provoking for the hidden meaning behind it. At the same time, this also made Lan Zhaoyun feel even more-convinced that it was the right decision to come and negotiate for peace today. Otherwise, it would not just be about preserving their Dao Inheritance and tribesmen. Even his own daughter might have had difficulty surviving in the world. ¡°Alright, since Sect Leader Lan has come, it means that you are willing to turn enemies into friends. So let¡¯s put the past behind us.¡± Lu Yuan also took the initiative to interrupt and change the subject. After talking about the past, he began to talk about the main point: ¡°Sect Leader Lan, you should have no problem understanding the terms I proposed today since you came to negotiate for peace, right?¡± Earlier Lu Yuan had already put forward his attitude when negotiating with the Five Poisons Sect, which was to ask the other party to surrender without conditions, hand over their troops and horses and completely eliminate their separatist forces. In return, he would allow the Five Poisons Sect to continue to exist as a martial arts force in the martial arts world. This condition was already very lenient for a rebel. After all, rebellion is a crime punishable by the extermination of nine families. Now that Lu Yuan was able to pardon and protect them, how could it not be considered as an act of kindness? However, for the Five Poisons Sect who was ambitious to restore the Miao Tribe, this condition was equivalent to giving up their thousand-year aspiration, which was not easy to accept. Therefore, the previous negotiations faced many difficulties. It was because the Five Poisons Sect wanted to retain their military forces, and even to retain the territory of Qianling County, to continue to exist as a separatist force. However, while maintaining separatism, they would also act as a vassal, offering money and military forces to Lu Yuan. But the existence of a country within a country would undoubtedly shake the foundation of his rule, so how could Lu Yuan allow it? Therefore, in the face of the unrealistic expectations of the Five Poisons Sect, he had already refused categorically, leaving no room for negotiation. However, now that Lan Zhaoyun had taken the initiative to come, it seemed that he had accepted the reality and was willing to disarm, hand over the city, and return to a normal martial arts force. As expected Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s inquiry, Lan Zhaoyun quickly bowed down and said, ¡°The general is kind and pardons our crimes of rebellion. Our sect and tribe are grateful. We are willing to hand over Qianling County, disarm our troops, and await the general¡¯s disposition.¡± Lu Yuan nodded in satisfaction upon hearing this and laughed, ¡°It is comforting to my heart that your sect understands this. Military campaigns are dangerous. A slight accident can result in the death of millions of people. Now that we can make peace and end war, whether it is Miao or Yue, it is a blessing for the people of Dongting. Sect Leader Lan, please stand up.¡± ¡°The general¡¯s kindness is admirable.¡± Lan Zhaoyun did not stand up but continued to bow, and then said, ¡°However, there has been deep-rooted hatred between Miao and Yue, with tens of thousands of casualties. Between our two tribes, there has long been deep hatred. Today, as we lay down our arms and surrender, we fear in our hearts. We ask General to grant our request to reassure us.¡± Lu Yuan didn¡¯t expect that at this moment, the other party would still have such a trick, and couldn¡¯t help but frown. But he still asked, ¡°What request?¡± Lan Zhaoyun took a breath and then said solemnly, ¡°The resentment between Miao and Yue has existed since ancient times, and today it has only deepened. If it continues like this, it will inevitably erupt again in the future, bringing disaster. We have thought about it, and instead of endless hatred, why not shake hands now, resolve the grudges, and become a family? Therefore, we boldly ask General to form an alliance with our tribe through marriage and marry our daughter. As such, the two families would become one, and there would be no distinction between them, and naturally, there would be no more grievances.¡± When these words came out, there was silence on the scene. Yan Wangqiu and the others looked at each other, and after exchanging glances, they all saw the shock in each other¡¯s eyes. Lu Yuan looked at Lan Zhaoyun with astonishment in his heart as well. He never imagined that Lan Zhaoyun¡¯s condition would be this. Marrying the Holy Girl of the Five Poisons Sect and forming an alliance with the other party through marriage. Indeed, if the two families could form an alliance through marriage and become one, then the resentment between the Five Poisons Sect and the Yue people would naturally dissipate. Furthermore, as the son-in-law of the Five Poisons Sect, Lu Yuan would naturally become the half-owner of the Five Poison Sect and the entire Miao Tribe. The entire Five Poisons Sect and Miao Tribe would become Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s dowry, gifted to him, the son-in-law. Chapter 363 - Chapter 363: Chapter 199: Marriage Alliance with the Saintess_3 Chapter 363: Chapter 199: Marriage Alliance with the Saintess_3 Translator: 549690339 With this integration into his own territory, Lu Yuan naturally wouldn¡¯t take any action against the Poison Sect and the Miao people anymore. This was indeed the perfect way to put both sides at ease. However¡­ The suddenness of their proposal caught him off guard and left him unable to react for a moment. Although Lu Yuan once thought about capturing all the female heroines and wicked women in the Jianghu to start a harem for himself after becoming proficient in martial arts. Among them, the Holy Woman of the Poison Sect was one of his targets. But now that it has become a reality, it feels, well¡­ Quite tempting, actually. He had seen Lan Cai¡¯er before, and she was indeed beautiful. As the Holy Woman of the Miao people and an Inborn Grandmaster, her status and strength were not inferior, making her a fitting match for him. Facing such a woman, it would be a lie to say that he wasn¡¯t moved. His heart skipped a beat as he looked at Lan Zhaoyun with a stiff expression and calmly asked, ¡°Is Sect Leader Lan not joking?¡± Lan Zhaoyun kowtowed and said, ¡°The sinner knows that this request is somewhat abrupt and excessive. But this is truly the wish of my sect and my tribe. Without it, we would not feel at ease. General, I ask for your consent.¡± Sect Leader Lan¡¯s words were heartfelt. However, his words only represented their so-called wishes for the entire sect and tribe, which was just a fabrication. Even the idea of the marriage alliance was just a sudden inspiration for Lan Zhaoyun and proposed on a whim. And the reason why he thought of it was simple: he was attracted to Lu Yuan¡¯s strength and potential. Lan Cai¡¯er broke through Innate four years ago when she was only twenty-six, so the Holy Woman Grandmaster was only just thirty. Meanwhile, Lu Yuan was only thirty-two. The two were close in age and both Inborn Grandmasters, an excellent match of talent and beauty. At the same time, Lu Yuan had hundreds of thousands of soldiers under his command and controlled six prefectures, making him incredibly powerful. Furthermore, he had the support of two Grandmasters and a True Person, giving him unfathomable influence and connections. Lan Zhaoyun had been worried about finding a suitable match for his daughter. After all, as a Holy Woman and a Grandmaster, very few people under the sky were worthy of his daughter¡¯s hand. And even if there were suitable candidates, due to various factors, it was impossible for them to form an alliance with the Poison Sect through marriage. So, Lan Zhaoyun had given up hope for his daughter¡¯s marriage and merely wanted to find a suitable young man within the sect to serve as a son-in-law and continue their incense offering. But now, with the sudden change in the situation and the rapid decline of the Poison Sect, their original plans for his daughter¡¯s marriage were indefinitely shelved. However, upon meeting Lu Yuan today, whether it was for interests or personal strength, no other son-in-law would be more suitable. If the Poison Sect and the Miao people could rely on him, they wouldn¡¯t worry about their safety, let alone their revival. Thus, after Lan Zhaoyun came up with this idea. The more he thought about it, the more suitable it seemed, and the more brilliant it became. By this time, he had already voiced the idea, treating it as a prerequisite for the Poison Sect¡¯s surrender to ensure that Lu Yuan agreed. As for the success of the matter¡­ Lan Zhaoyun had a lot of confidence. After all, his daughter was talented, beautiful, and a Grandmaster. Add to that the entire Poison Sect and the Miao people as dowry gifts. Could there be a better woman out there than her? Even those princesses of dynasties probably couldn¡¯t compare. ¡°This¡­¡± Seeing Lan Zhaoyun¡¯s resolute attitude, Lu Yuan hesitated. He then turned to look at Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange, only to find them staring intently at him. As their gazes met, they subtly encouraged him and nodded slightly. It seemed that these two allies also approved of the marriage. After all, marrying the Poison Sect would undoubtedly tie them to their war chariot, ensuring that their alliance moved forward together. This would be a great boon for the entire coalition, giving them no reason to refuse. Then he looked at Anqiu True Person. But he saw Elder Daoist with a smile on his face, full of mischief in his eyes. Well, forget about this old fellow. With just this encounter, Lu Yuan confirmed the position of his allies. Feeling a little more at ease, he looked back to Lan Zhaoyun, stepped forward to help him up, and reluctantly said, ¡°Sect Leader Lan, please stand up. I agree to the marriage alliance.¡± Having agreed to the marriage, the old man would become his father-in-law. Though people like them didn¡¯t value familial affection and cared more about the hierarchy of power. However, letting his father-in-law kneel down would be somewhat disgraceful. ¡°Thank you, General, thank you!¡± Hearing Lu Yuan agree to the marriage alliance, Lan Zhaoyun couldn¡¯t help but show his joy. He knew that this time, the Poison Sect and the Miao people were finally safe. With a wry smile, Lu Yuan may have gained a wife, but he didn¡¯t forget his main goal. He said, ¡°Now that I¡¯ve agreed to the marriage, there should be no more problems with your sect¡¯s surrender, should there?¡± Lan Zhaoyun nodded repeatedly, ¡°General, rest assured. Once I leave, you can send your troops to follow along with me and jointly take over Qianling County City.¡± After the marriage alliance, Lan Zhaoyun didn¡¯t care much about Qianling County and the soldiers there. After all, what was a small county city and thirty thousand remnants worth in comparison? Once his daughter and Lu Yuan were married and had a child, Wouldn¡¯t everything of his eventually become that of their grandchild? By then, with this connection, wouldn¡¯t it be easy for the Poison Sect and the Miao tribe to revive? ¡®Once we return, I will tell my daughter about this and let her give birth to a child soon after the marriage. Lu Yuan hasn¡¯t married yet and has no children, so if my daughter bears children, they would be the legitimate heirs and future crown princes who must inherit the family business.¡¯ Thinking this way, Lan Zhaoyun saw a new world opening up before him. As for whether his decision would be accepted by Lan Cai¡¯er without any consultation with her, As his daughter and the Holy Woman of the Poison Sect and the Miao people, she would naturally serve their interests when they needed her. Moreover, such a good son-in-law wouldn¡¯t disgrace their daughter. Lan Zhaoyun believed that his daughter would agree. He trusted her. Chapter 364 - Chapter 364: Chapter 200: Husband and Wife Meet Chapter 364: Chapter 200: Husband and Wife Meet Translator: 549690339 With the confirmation of the marriage alliance, the relationship between Lu Yuan and Lan Zhaoyun became much closer. Even the people standing nearby, like Yan Wangqiu, couldn¡¯t help but hold Lan Zhaoyun in higher esteem out of respect for Lu Yuan. Therefore, amidst the friendly atmosphere, Lu Yuan discussed the specific details of the marriage alliance with his future father-in-law, Lan Zhaoyun. For example, they discussed the engagement, bride reception, and formalities. Ultimately, under the guidance of the Daoist True Person Anqiu, it was determined that they would decide on the engagement on the third day of the First Month in the seventh year of Hongdao, and the wedding would take place at the same time in the eighth year of Hongdao. Counting from now, it would be one year before the formal wedding ceremony, which was quite good. Having a one-year buffer would also allow both sides time to adapt to each other¡¯s personalities. Most importantly, it was expected that Lu Yuan would be very busy during the entire seventh year of Hongdao, due to the anticipated battle between the imperial court and Zhou Country. By then, no matter if he goes against the imperial court or forces a compromise, there would be no year without battles. The only difference would be whether those battles were with the imperial court or with Zhou Country. After the battles, there would be nation-building, which would also consume a significant amount of time and energy. Lu Yuan even doubted if he could finish all these tasks within the next year without having them spill into the following year. Since there were too many things to worry about, he naturally wouldn¡¯t have much time or energy to commit to marriage. Lan Zhaoyun understood and agreed, stating that as long as they decided on the engagement and established a formal relationship, everything else could be handled later. Even if the wedding had to be postponed further, it would not be a problem. If they were willing, he could even send his daughter over before the marriage to live with Lu Yuan, so that both of them could improve their relationship. Lan Zhaoyun, as a father-in-law, showed great understanding and reason. As for this arrangement, Lu Yuan agreed that moving her in before marriage was unnecessary since it didn¡¯t fit the norms. However, letting her come earlier to get to know each other and communicate was acceptable. This was not because he was greedy for her body, but because Lan Cai¡¯er, an Inborn Grandmaster, would inevitably be involved in the upcoming battles and plans. The strength of an Inborn Grandmaster was what Lu Yuan truly valued, and it was the reason he was willing to form a marriage alliance with her. Everything else was secondary. Faced with this request, Lan Zhaoyun had no objections and was even happy. However, before agreeing, he made a small request. That was for both sides to decide on the engagement first and then announce it to the world before sending his daughter over. Alright. Even though the marriage alliance had been verbally agreed upon, Sect Leader Lan was still not at ease, fearing that everything going on now was just a plot to lure his daughter. Therefore, before allowing his daughter to come over, Lu Yuan was required to provide additional reassurance by publicly announcing the marriage alliance. At their level, as long as they still wanted to maintain a presence in the world, face and reputation were essential. As long as Lu Yuan agreed to the alliance and announced it, unless he lost all his face and reputation, it would be impossible for the girl¡¯s side to renege on the deal as long as no major problems occurred. In this way, his own daughter and the Poison Sect would be protected. ¡°This can be easily arranged. I will have a matchmaker send the betrothal gifts shortly,¡± Lu Yuan expressed his understanding and said with reason. He genuinely wanted to incorporate the Poison Sect into his plans and highly valued Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s Innate Combat Power. Now, by strengthening the relationship between both parties through a marriage alliance, he had every reason to accept without any objections. After all, he would not be at a loss by gaining a wife for free. As for the little schemes that Lan Zhaoyun was harboring¡ªlike taking advantage of his son after his death¡ªLu Yuan had some idea about, but he just thought they could wait and see who would outlast the other. Moreover, even if he were to marry Lan Cai¡¯er or other women in the future, it wasn¡¯t certain whether he would even want to have children. As an immortal being, the need to procreate and continue his lineage did not naturally exist within him. As Lu Yuan could live forever, why would he need children to look after him and carry on his lineage? If he really did have children, he might end up seeing them off one by one as they aged, making it truly a human ¡°comedy¡±. For this situation, Lu Yuan was naturally vigilant and would not allow it to happen. However, regarding this matter, he wouldn¡¯t talk too much about it and would just let people discover it on their own. So, upon hearing his words, Lan Zhaoyun was overjoyed. Even Anqiu, the Daoist True Person sitting next to him, seemed to be interested. After calculating the auspicious dates, he proactively said, ¡°If Fellow Daoist Lu is willing, this Poor Daoist can serve as the matchmaker and help propose the marriage on your behalf.¡± The elder Daoist¡¯s initiative came from remembering the sacrifices Lu Yuan made for their Dan Ding Path, and he wanted to make up for it. After all, the Inborn Grandmaster, who was initially expected to live for another 120 years, might only have two or three years left after fixing the Taiping Dao Book. Therefore, in Anqiu¡¯s eyes, even though Lu Yuan was currently an Inborn Grandmaster with hundreds of thousands of soldiers at his command and ruling over half of the region, it would all soon disappear since his death was imminent. Now, by taking advantage of these last few years to marry a good wife, have a son, and carry on his lineage, he could say that his life hadn¡¯t been in vain. Thus, with this slightly guilty conscience, Anqiu wished to make amends to the great benefactor, Lu Yuan, before his death. Chapter 365 - Chapter 365: Chapter 200: Husband and Wife Meet_2 Chapter 365: Chapter 200: Husband and Wife Meet_2 Translator: 549690339 Isn¡¯t it just a matter of matchmaking? If I, a True Person of the six major Dao Veins, personally propose a marriage for you, would that be enough to give face and display a grand scene? As expected, when Anqiu True Person said this, Lan Zhaoyun became even more delighted. With such a True Person as a matchmaker, the marriage between her daughter and Lu Yuan would gain an additional layer of treasure. Even Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange were slightly surprised, not expecting Anqiu to be so proactive. They exchanged glances, and their estimation of each other¡¯s relationship with Lu Yuan also increased by a few points. It seemed that General Lu¡¯s relationship with these Daoist cultivators was not as simple as they had imagined. Lu Yuan looked at Anqiu True Person curiously, not knowing why the old Daoist was so proactive. He didn¡¯t guess the other party¡¯s thoughts. After all, he never intended to cultivate the Taiping Dao Book, so he wouldn¡¯t think deeply about it. But with an extra helping hand for nothing, Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t refuse, and he nodded with a smile: ¡°In that case, I¡¯ll trouble the True Person.¡± Anqiu True Person stroked his beard and said, ¡°It¡¯s a small matter, not a bother at all. Being able to propose a marriage for Taoist Lu is also a blessing for Poor Daoist.¡± So, the matter of marriage proposal was settled. After such an incident, the friendly atmosphere between the few people became even more harmonious. Then, Lu Yuan led them to continue inspecting the army under his command. The Zhouyue Decisive Battle was to take place next year. For a battle happening right at his doorstep, Lu Yuan could not possibly stay out of it, nor would he want to. By then, to preserve his interests in the great battle, he would naturally need enough strength. This strength was not only from Inborn Grandmasters like them but also from the tens of thousands of elite soldiers in front of them. So, for the inspection and training of the soldiers, he took it very seriously. Not only him, but Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange, who had jointly established the alliance, as well as Anqiu True Person, who had special expectations for Lu Yuan, and Lan Zhaoyun, who had just settled the marriage, all watched with great seriousness. The strength of Lu Yuan¡¯s army directly affected the interests of these four people, so they would not take it lightly. Fortunately, after an inspection, the four of them were extremely satisfied. These one hundred thousand elite soldiers did not disappoint, showing the qualities and values they should have. It was not until nightfall that the inspection finally came to an end. In the end, Lu Yuan announced rewards for the army to commend the soldiers, and the inspection ended amidst waves of cheers. During the inspection, Lu Yuan reviewed the army, strengthened the confidence of his allies, subdued the Five Poisons Sect, and even gained a wife for free. Overall, the gains were bountiful. However, after the inspection, he did not bother to continue supervising the training of the army and immediately got busy. As the date of the court¡¯s expedition approached, Lu Yuan¡¯s workload grew more and more. For example, sending someone to take over Qianling County and recruiting the thirty thousand Miao soldiers from the city. Or preparing betrothal gifts for Anqiu True Person to take for the marriage proposal. And starting to arrange for mobilization in various prefectures and counties, recruiting militia, gathering food and fodder, and preparing for the upcoming battle next year. As for the deployment of local defenders during the war. Lastly, receiving the supplies continuously brought by Dan Ding Path and distributing them for practical use. Such matters and more simply could not be handled without the coordination of General Lu himself. Apart from these official duties, the date of the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s destruction was also slowly approaching. Lu Yuan was planning to start the action during the First Month after the New Year. The Iron Sword Sect was entrenched in Luling Prefecture, with nearly a thousand direct disciples and even more affiliated forces spread across the land. To annihilate such a massive force with a widespread presence, it was not something that could be achieved with a heated head and a simple clap of the hands. Lu Yuan needed to gather enough manpower, devise a perfect plan and prepare the personnel and channels for the transportation of the seized treasures after the annihilation, only then could he be fully prepared. As for the transportation of treasures, he turned to Anqiu True Person. Currently, Dan Ding Path was busy transporting supplies for him, having numerous channels and personnel. Adhering to the idea of deceiving more since he had already deceived, Lu Yuan directly used the personnel and channels of Dan Ding Path. For Anqiu True Person, who had a slight sense of guilt and wanted to compensate, this request was naturally not a problem. As soon as Lu Yuan brought it up, he patted his chest and agreed, immediately arranging his subordinates to coordinate with Lu Yuan. With this, the problem was solved. Regarding manpower. Lu Yuan mobilized his own disciples. After the previous bestowment of elixir, the overall strength of his disciples had made a qualitative leap. There were now five first-rate experts, ten second-rate experts, and forty-two third-rate experts. This scale was far superior to the Iron Sword Sect. So, after careful consideration, Lu Yuan left Chu Wei and Li Liang to guard Dongting County. He then took Zhou Qing, Han Shun, and Zhang You, the three first-rate disciples, along with six second-rate disciples and twenty third-rate disciples to Luling Prefecture to carry out the plan of annihilation. Joining them were Lu Yuan¡¯s five hundred personal guards. After years of continuous nurturing and his willingness to spend money, Lu Yuan¡¯s personal guards now numbered three thousand, with more than half of them having cultivated Inner Strength. The rest would also be able to cultivate Inner Strength in a year or two. Selecting five hundred guards with Inner Strength, plus himself and those twenty-nine disciples as a sharp blade, combined with powerful bows and crossbows, it would be more than enough to uproot the small Iron Sword Sect. Chapter 366 - Chapter 366: Chapter 200: Husband and Wife Meet_3 Chapter 366: Chapter 200: Husband and Wife Meet_3 Translator: 549690339 However, to avoid any problems and ensure caution, Lu Yuan sought the help of the Five Poisons Sect, requesting his father-in-law to join the action. As time passed¡­ By the end of the year, or on the 27th day of the twelfth lunar month, Zhou Qing, Lu Yuan¡¯s disciple, finally took control of Qianling County City with twenty thousand troops and reorganised the thirty thousand Miao People in the city. The chaos caused by the Five Poisons Sect, which had haunted the region of Dongting for over two years, finally subsided. Lu Yuan fulfilled his responsibility to the court ¨C quelling the rebellion of the Five Poisons Sect and restoring local peace. The experts of the Five Poisons Sect retreated back to their old nest and licked their wounds in secret after handing over their forces. After the devastation of the war¡­ Not only did the Yue people of Dongting suffer heavy losses, but the Miao people also suffered greatly. The strength of the Five Poisons Sect, based on the Miao people, also suffered a great loss under these circumstances. The newly restored Right Protector and elders only left one Right Protector alive. Including Lan Zhaoyun, there are only two first-rate experts left in the Sect. Moreover, those second-rate experts, originally numbering around fifty or sixty, and third-rate experts, who originally numbered in the hundreds, were gradually wiped out in the war. By now, there are only twenty-one second-rate experts and sixty-seven third-rate experts left in the Five Poisons Sect. As for the ordinary members of the Sect, their numbers have also dwindled from tens of thousands to less than a thousand, leaving only seven or eight hundred. It could be said that, after the war, the strength of the Five Poisons Sect diminished by more than eighty percent. The foundation of this once-preeminent sect was reduced to that of a common first-rate sect in the blink of an eye. This loss cannot simply be described as tragic. To be more accurate, it is on the verge of losing its Dao inheritance and being extinguished as a sect. If they hadn¡¯t managed to keep the Saintess, a born Grandmaster, this rebellion of Five Poisons Sect would have left them destitute. The loss was so great that Lan Zhaoyun didn¡¯t have the energy to fight anymore. Now, he could only lead his people to retreat to the Main Hall, lick their wounds slowly and recuperate. At most, some people would be sent to maintain the branches in Wuling Prefecture to keep up appearances. Nothing more could be done. After all, they lost the fight, and Dongting is now under Lu Yuan¡¯s control. If the Five Poisons Sect were to act arrogantly, wouldn¡¯t they be disrespecting their new son-in-law? Lan Zhaoyun wouldn¡¯t be so thoughtless as to force his son-in-law to take up arms again so soon after laying down his weapon. Feelings, relationships, are not as reliable as one might expect in the face of interests. However, even though the Five Poisons Sect has suffered such a loss, it still has much stronger combat power at the middle and top levels compared to Lu Yuan¡¯s side. For example, their twenty-one second-rate experts and sixty-seven third-rate experts are almost double the number of disciples under Lu Yuan¡¯s command. This force is still very powerful. It was optimally utilized at this time. Since it¡¯s free labour, why not use it? And to think pessimistically¡­ If these experts of the Five Poisons Sect were left on their own, Lu Yuan would worry about what they might be doing behind his back. He would have to devote some energy to monitoring them. Rather than do that, it would be better to keep them all within his reach so that their every move was under his scrutiny, which feels much safer. Upon receiving Lu Yuan¡¯s order, Lan Zhaoyun didn¡¯t object and agreed readily. He didn¡¯t just agree ¨C he brought out most of the remaining forces of the Sect. After the New Year, on the third day after receiving the betrothal gifts of True Person Anqiu, the Five Poisons Sect and Lu Yuan announced their decision to form marriage alliance to the public. In the fifth year of Hongdao, on the fifth day of the first lunar month. Leaving some people to guard the Main Hall and branches, Lan Zhaoyun brought his daughter, along with fifteen second-rate experts and fifty third-rate experts to Lu Yuan¡¯s army to follow orders. In the main hall of Lu Yuan¡¯s mansion in Shaoyang City. ¡°Come, daughter, come here.¡± After Lan Zhaoyun entered the hall and saw Lu Yuan, he beckoned to his daughter behind him and asked her to come forward, smiling, ¡°This is General Lu, your future husband. Say something.¡± ¡°General Lu.¡± Lan Cai¡¯er spoke coldly, only slightly acknowledging Lu Yuan, and then remained silent. It was clear that the Saintess, though she agreed to the marriage, had no feelings for her future husband. It¡¯s understandable. Just last year, Lan Cai¡¯er dared to breach an army of ten thousand, attempting to assassinate Lu Yuan. Now, not even a year has passed and she is suddenly going to marry her former enemy. It¡¯s a difficult adjustment for anyone. ¡°General, don¡¯t be offended. Cai¡¯er is just a bit cold¡­¡± Seeing this, Lan Zhaoyun glanced reproachfully at his daughter, then turned to Lu Yuan and said with an awkward smile. ¡°It¡¯s fine.¡± Lu Yuan stopped Lan Zhaoyun¡¯s words, smiled, and didn¡¯t mind. Then, turning to Lan Cai¡¯er, he said warmly, ¡°Miss Lan, it¡¯s been years since we last met, but Miss Lan is still as charming as ever.¡± To this day, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s assassination attempt was still vivid in his mind. Being a newly promoted innate, able to escape alive from the midst of a great army, even under the constraint of another innate Grandmaster. Not to mention, simply this strength is enough to make one gasp in admiration. Even if she were to submit temporarily, and was about to marry him, Lu Yuan could not truly disrespect her. The appropriate respect must be offered. Otherwise, after the two became husband and wife, if the Saintess took the opportunity of their intimate moments to poison or plant a Gu (a legendary curse), what would he do? The Gu worms of the Five Poisons Sect are very powerful. Old Master Yan Wangqiu had to expend great effort to deal with the Gu insect suddenly thrown out by Lan Cai¡¯er, and even managed to let the Saintess escape. With the previous lesson in mind, Lu Yuan naturally became cautious this time. In truth, once the two marry and become husband and wife. During their conjugal moments, he¡¯d probably be anxious and afraid to proceed. Resignedly, having such a wife requires maintaining a good relationship with her for survival ¨C would you really dare to let your guard down? Maybe he¡¯ll be dead and cold before he knows what¡¯s happened. Chapter 367 - Chapter 367: Chapter 201: Starting to Reveal Cards Chapter 367: Chapter 201: Starting to Reveal Cards Translator: 549690339 ¡°General, just after eight months, you have already stepped into the Innate realm and become a Grandmaster. Truly a hero of our time.¡± Since Lu Yuan mentioned Lan Cai¡¯er by name, she could no longer remain aloof and had to respond, offering a slight compliment as she did so. At the same time, she couldn¡¯t help but take a few more glances at Lu Yuan. Truth be told, when she tried to assassinate Lu Yuan last time, he was protected by Yan Wangqiu, and she didn¡¯t have a direct confrontation with him. However, at that time, Lu Yuan¡¯s Inner Qi field revealed when facing the assassination already showed some signs of being an external body. From that moment on, Lan Cai¡¯er knew that it would only be a matter of time before he broke through the Innate realm. However, even so, she never expected that day to come so quickly. Moreover, not only did that day come quickly, but she also became the fianc¨¦e of this man she had been trying to kill, all within a year. She couldn¡¯t quite accept the massive change in her identity and the strangeness of the situation. She really didn¡¯t know how to face this man who was both her enemy and her future husband. Especially since she still harbored hatred towards Lu Yuan, the discrepancy and conflict of her emotions made her even more uncomfortable. ¡®However, before my father left, he asked me to get closer to this man. If possible, consummate our relationship, creating a true bond between husband and wife, and bearing his child. Only then could the Holy Sect and our clan gain some protection and support.¡¯ To agree to this marriage and marry an enemy was already difficult. As a girl, there was no way she could do something so shameful. When Lan Cai¡¯er thought of what her father had said previously, she felt both ashamed and angry as well as miserable and resentful. The unraveling of her life, from once being a Holy Sect saintess, an Inborn Grandmaster, to now being reduced to entertaining a man, was nothing short of a tragedy. Yet, for the sake of her clan and the Holy Sect, she had no choice but to submit and obey her father¡¯s instructions. But ultimately, it wasn¡¯t her wish. So when facing Lu Yuan, she could only maintain a cold and standoffish demeanor, clinging to what little dignity she had left. Fortunately, the enemy General in front of her had not humiliated her too much. On the contrary, he had shown her considerable respect, which gave her some relief and made her feel not so miserable. As for the many thoughts in the heart of this saintess, Lu Yuan was unaware and could not fathom them. However, after hearing her compliment, he shook his head modestly and said, ¡°It took me over thirty years to accidentally break through the Innate realm, far less talented than Miss Lan. I am ashamed, truly ashamed.¡± Lu Yuan was genuinely in awe of Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s martial arts talent. He had encountered many adventures, so after sixteen years of martial arts practice, he broke through the Innate realm at the age of 31, which could be considered a rare feat. However, Lan Cai¡¯er was even more exceptional. She broke through the Innate realm at the age of 26, five years younger than Lu Yuan. Although it had a lot to do with the support of her entire sect and clan, which enabled her to save a considerable amount of time accumulating Inner Strength. However, even so, while Inner Strength could be supplemented by the Divine Blood Elixir, the realm of mind and cultivation were not things that could be made up for externally. Lan Cai¡¯er had to cultivate herself to a mental state capable of supporting a Grandmaster before she could wield the power of the Innate realm. As for Lu Yuan, he read Taoist Classics for sixteen years and relied on the accumulation of the Attribute Panel to bridge this gap. However, this saintess did not have such means to cheat. To reach such a mental state at the age of twenty-six was purely due to talent. Therefore, praising her for her talent and intelligence was by no means excessive. This woman was truly stronger than him. Hearing Lu Yuan express his sincere admiration, Lan Cai¡¯er couldn¡¯t help but feel a little delighted in her heart. After all, this was the acknowledgement from an enemy, and a Grandmaster of the same level as her. Although she was happy, she remained level-headed and didn¡¯t become smug. She simply said, ¡°I have been fortunate to have famous teachers since childhood, and the support of the Holy Sect¡¯s thousand years of accumulation. Today¡¯s achievements are not my own. On the other hand, General Lu started from humble beginnings, and his achievements today are all due to his own efforts, far surpassing someone like me who relies on the legacy of others.¡± While Lu Yuan admired Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s talent and intelligence, In fact, this saintess also somewhat admired his rags-to-riches story. Today, Lu Yuan¡¯s background and encounters in recent years have come to light. Anyone with some power could investigate his background. And anyone who saw this investigation had to admit one thing. That this former mountain hunter, although fortunate, worked hard and was talented enough to achieve what he has today. This was a true Heaven¡¯s Gifted Talent. Otherwise, how could an illiterate hunter think of learning to read, practicing martial arts, studying Taoism, learning how to command soldiers and fight in wars¡­ How could he seize all these opportunities and achieve such martial arts and success today? Any of these accomplishments alone would have made a person a local hero. When all of these achievements are combined, if this isn¡¯t Heaven¡¯s Gifted Talent, what else could it be? At any rate, Lan Cai¡¯er reflected that if she were at Lu Yuan¡¯s starting point, most likely, she would have earned enough money hunting to buy land and property at the foot of the mountain and then gotten married and had children. At the very best, she would have practiced some martial arts and made a name for herself locally. And that would have already been her limit. Chapter 368 - Chapter 368: Chapter 201 Start to lay cards on the table_2 Chapter 368: Chapter 201 Start to lay cards on the table_2 Translator: 549690339 Even more so, it surpassed the vision and knowledge that a hunter could possess. The awe of Lu Yuan is not solely on his diligence. More importantly, his seemingly heaven-given perception and understanding, and his decisive nature to seize the moment when opportunity arises. This continues to bewilder the outsiders, utterly unable to comprehend. Many have difficulty understanding. How could a hunter, who spent his days gallivanting around the mountains, suddenly achieve such a wide world view, greater than many from noble families, making the right decisions one after the other, leading him to his current position? There are many speculations out there, even some that are quite bizarre. However, no matter how they speculate, everyone is still unable to see through Lu Yuan, attributing it to divine providence in the end, and end their discussions with a sigh. As for the speculations about him from the outside world, Lu Yuan was naturally privy to them. However, he has never offered explanations to these rumors, nor he would ever do. Would he be expected to tell everyone that he is a traverser, someone from another world, and that is why he possesses such a seemingly divine understanding? That he knows how to act in his best interests, making the most beneficial choices? Obviously, he wouldn¡¯t. So, keeping silent about these speculations is the best course of action. Let them continue guessing. Perhaps in their guessing game, they might end up leading themselves astray. Looking at the Holy Maiden in front of him, Lu Yuan felt that she seemed to be leaning towards such an inclination. While he found it amusing, he didn¡¯t feel like explaining and only said: ¡°Miss Lan and Sect Leader Lan have traveled a long way to give your aid, I am truly grateful. ¡°Today, I have prepared a banquet in our residence. I hope you and the Holy Sect members can eat, drink and be merry. Please make yourselves at home. ¡°I hope that in the future, I can count on your help in many matters.¡± Lan Zhaoyun, who had been observing from the side for a while, promptly said: ¡°Being able to serve the General is our honor. From now on, we will do our utmost to serve unto death.¡± Lan Cai¡¯er also nodded slightly and said: ¡°Whatever martial skills I possess, I would gladly use for the general.¡± Lu Yuan laughed heartily: ¡°Then, I would like to express my gratitude in advance.¡± On that day, a grand banquet was held at Lu¡¯s residence, welcoming dozens of martial artists from the Five Poison Sect. After the banquet, Lu Yuan arranged for them to be accommodated in the barracks outside the city where they could interact with the personal guard disciples he had selected for the extermination plan. The idea was for them to familiarize themselves with their teammates in advance. As for Lan Zhaoyun and Lan Cai¡¯er, naturally, they were staying at Lu Yuan¡¯s residence. After all, the two had just gotten engaged and according to the old gentleman¡¯s will, it was natural for them to spend more time together and deepen their bond. To this, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t refuse. On the contrary, he was happy to see it. As previously said. If he were to marry such a wife, it would be a good idea to deepen their affection right now in order to avoid any untoward incident in their future conjugal bed. Under such mutual attraction, their affections for each other quickly warmed. Within a few days, they hadn¡¯t exactly fallen head over heels in love, but it was no longer cold between them, and they didn¡¯t lack for conversation topics. Occasionally, Lan Cai¡¯er even laughed a few times when Lu Yuan mentioned something interesting, gradually taking on the aspect of a love-struck couple. Although it¡¯s unclear how much of this affection is genuine and how much is fake, and how much of it comes from the heart or is forced. But Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t bother to care too much about these things. Because in addition to dealing with Lan Cai¡¯er, he had many other matters to attend to. With the arrival of the people from the Five Poison Sect, the disciples under Lu Yuan from various places, who had been deployed, gradually handed over their military and political duties and started to assemble. Meanwhile, shortly after New Year, the court sent a directive, asking him to gather a large army in preparation to launch an attack along with the imperial army on the Zhou people in Jiangnan in February. During the autumn and winter of the previous year, Li Yanjing, the commander of the 30,000 Zhou people, actively sought battle with Shangguan Ming, but was ignored. With no choice left, he began to aggressively attack in one direction, hoping for a breakthrough. After two to three months of intermittent fighting, Li Yanjing finally broke the blockade on one side, escaped from Shaoyang Prefecture to Changsha Prefecture, and successfully besieged a county town there. Then, they looted the food stores and, with the remaining 8000 or so remnants, he continued to hold out in Yiyang County, south of Dongting Lake. Shangguan Ming, on the other hand, promptly led an army of 30,000 and laid a tight siege around the county, trapping them inside the city. Although the Zhou people now have food, they only have a little over 8,000 surviving soldiers left. Even with the help of three Innate Grandmasters in the army, they couldn¡¯t possibly stir up trouble in Jiangnan. The measures they¡¯re taking now are nothing more than desperate measures. Shangguan Ming clearly understood this, so he simply besieged the county town, and had no plan of launching a full-scale attack. The support from the court was coming soon. By then, there would be an army of 100,000 soldiers and two Innate Grandmasters arriving. Once they gather with the soldiers from Lu Yuan¡¯s side, Shangguan Ming would have six Innate Grandmasters and over two hundred thousand soldiers. With such a strong force, wouldn¡¯t it be easy to capture the small Yiyang county? Perhaps by then, there would be no need to deploy the army. The six Innate Grandmasters could easily penetrate the circle of Zhou people inside the city. With such an easy option available, why risk lives and waste soldiers in attacking the county at this moment? So, after besieging Yiyang county at the beginning of December, Shangguan Ming has been camping outside the city, patiently waiting for the reinforcements from the court. Chapter 369 - Chapter 369: Chapter 201: Laying the Cards on the Table_3 Chapter 369: Chapter 201: Laying the Cards on the Table_3 Translator: 549690339 Later, while waiting, he received news that Lu Yuan had surprisingly made an engagement with the traitorous Poison Sect to marry their Inborn Saintess Lan Cai¡¯er. Needless to say, when this news reached Shangguan Ming, he was infuriated. Putting aside his plans to marry his daughter to Lu Yuan and the resentment from losing an excellent prospective son-in-law, he was also furious at the feeling of being played. Now, about the Poison Sect ¨C these rebels had managed to stir Dongting County into its current disastrous state, and even the court¡¯s current difficult situation couldn¡¯t deny their achievements. However, their General of the Southern Expedition would disregard all of this, privately reconcile with the rebels, and even form a marriage alliance. What was he trying to do? Did he want to emulate the Poison Sect and plot a rebellion? Shangguan Ming thought that General Lu Yuan, having broken through to the Inborn realm, had become too arrogant. He didn¡¯t understand his true position and even had the audacity to attempt to challenge the court¡¯s authority. ¡°Does this child think that by becoming an Inborn Grandmaster, he can defy the court?¡± What would it matter even if he marries the Poison Sect¡¯s Saintess? Even so, they would only have two Inborn cultivators. Now that the court¡¯s army of 100,000 is pressing in, even without him, there are still six Inborn Grandmasters in Dongting County. With such strength, wouldn¡¯t he think that his mere two Inborn cultivators and a ragtag army of tens of thousands could stand against them?¡± This was Shangguan Ming¡¯s words on the day when he received the news of Lu Yuan¡¯s engagement to the Poison Sect, smashing his book in rage. After cursing a few times, he quickly penned letters to Lu Yuan, reproaching him for his actions. He wanted to persuade the General of the Southern Expedition not to make such a foolish move at this time, lest he would lose everything and fall into an irreparable state. At the same time, Shangguan Ming urgently sent letters to the court, informing them of the current events so they could be prepared. However, when these letters reached Lu Yuan, they naturally sank like stones into the ocean. ¡°At this point, Shangguan Ming still wants me to break off the engagement with Poison Sect and capture the rebels, sending them to the court for punishment.¡± That day, as Lu Yuan gifted Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange with a garden stroll, he casually took out the letter Shangguan Ming had sent just yesterday, and laughed, ¡°It seems that our actions have yet to be noticed by the court, which is a good thing.¡± Yan Wangqiu also took out a letter and said to the two, ¡°What a coincidence. Shangguan Ming has also sent a letter to me, saying that I should keep an eye on Brother Lu¡¯s movements. And if Brother Lu has any ulterior motives, I shouldn¡¯t hesitate to take him down directly.¡± He continued, ¡°He will lead his troops to come and assist in controlling the situation, taking over the six government offices in the county.¡± Over the past few days, the relationship between the three had grown closer, and they began to address each other as brothers. Seeing this, Su Xuange couldn¡¯t help but smile: ¡°The court¡¯s slow reaction is the best news for us. By the time their large army arrives and sees the combined forces of our three allies and the support of the Poison Sect, their faces will be quite interesting.¡± In his heart, Sect Master Su was somewhat discontent with the court. The reason for this discontent was very simple. That was, the court¡¯s plan to gather the ten great Grandmasters and establish four nations did not include his Nine River Sword Sect. Such a grand plan, which promised kingdom-building for the four Grandmasters, had not involved his Nine River Sword Sect. Indeed, the last person of the ten Grandmasters¡¯ plan was from Guanhai Villa, not the Nine River Sword Sect. Did they look down on Su Xuange or think that the Nine River Sword Sect wasn¡¯t up to par? Although it was possible that the court thought the Nine River Sword Sect was hard to persuade and decided to support their closer Guanhai Villa, this still left Su Xuange unhappy. It made him feel disregarded and humiliated. Especially when facing Lu Yuan and Yan Wangqiu, who were both invited as allies, he felt even worse that only he was not invited. To a martial artist, a person from the Jianghu, feeling that they have lost face will naturally seek to recover it. At this point, Su Xuange thought the way to regain face would be by giving the court a good slap in the face. Hey! Were they looking down on him, not even offering him half a county? Fine, he wouldn¡¯t want a half-county this time, as he wasn¡¯t interested in that. He would just take an entire Yulin County from them. How surprising would that be? Su Xuange thought maliciously in his heart. Yan Wangqiu, on the other hand, chuckled and said, ¡°Naturally. Who would have thought that the court originally believed they could muster seven Grandmasters and more than two hundred thousand troops. But when they arrive in Dongting County, they¡¯ll find they can only muster five Grandmasters and just over a hundred thousand troops. And what they¡¯ll face is not only five Grandmasters and three hundred thousand troops from the Zhou People but also four Grandmasters and seven hundred thousand troops from our side.¡± The enemy¡¯s strength had doubled, while their own had greatly diminished. Yan Wangqiu thought that if he were the court, he would surely be fuming on the spot. Speaking of which, Yan Wangqiu waved the letter in his hand and asked, ¡°Brother Lu, do I need to reply to this letter to deceive Shangguan Ming and prevent our intentions from being exposed too soon?¡± Lu Yuan shook his head, ¡°There¡¯s no need to bother with him. We have reached this point, and hiding our intentions any longer would be useless. We might as well take this opportunity to show our cards to the court. Let them have some time to clearly understand the situation and carefully weigh their options ¨C whether to fight or negotiate with us.¡± Yan Wangqiu asked, ¡°Should Brother Su and I release some information first?¡± Su Xuange also came forward. ¡°Yes, test the waters over there first.¡± Lu Yuan nodded in agreement, and then brought up another matter, ¡°Starting tomorrow, I will have to leave for Luling to eliminate the Iron Sword Sect. I will be gone for more than ten days, so the situation here will be in the care of my two elder brothers.¡± Lu Yuan shared the matter of wiping out the Iron Sword Sect with his allies without hiding anything. The external excuse was also quite simple, as the large army was running out of supplies and needed to take down this top-tier sect to borrow their resources for emergency use. With such a justified reason, Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange naturally had no objections, agreeing to it early on, and even offering their tacit support. However, amidst their silent support, they couldn¡¯t help but feel worried. Chapter 370 - Chapter 370: Chapter 202: Destroying Iron Sword Sect Chapter 370: Chapter 202: Destroying Iron Sword Sect Translator: 549690339 ¡°Iron Sword Sect has always been a vassal of Liuyang Sect. This time, our destruction of the sect might annoy Liuyang Sect, right?¡± At this moment, Yan Wangqiu showed a trace of worry on his face and said, ¡°Now that we are in a crucial moment, if we provoke Liuyang Sect to ally with the court, I¡¯m afraid it will not be beneficial for our success.¡± Actually, Yan Wangqiu had some opinions about Liuyang Sect in his heart. After all, when Yin Huixuan went south, he swept through the martial arts world of Lingnan unbeaten, which severely damaged the reputation of Nanhai Sect. At that time, to avoid Yin Huixuan¡¯s sharpness, Yan Wangqiu even had to go out to escape from the battle, losing a lot of face. So if he could strike against Liuyang Sect, Sect Master Yan would be very happy to see it. But as the saying goes. He wanted to see Liuyang Sect suffer, but was also afraid of them causing trouble. Being apprehensive like this, he was still hesitant to interfere. Lu Yuan glanced at his increasingly cautious ally and said indifferently, ¡°This time our action is extremely careful. We will destroy the Iron Sword Sect in one fell swoop. In two or three days, we can resolve this matter. By then, the entire Iron Sword Sect will be wiped out. Even if the news goes out, how could Liuyang Sect know who did it? By the time they find out, I¡¯m afraid it will be several months later. Moreover, there is also Dan Ding Path involved this time. For any of us, Liuyang Sect is indeed not easy to provoke. But when it comes to Dan Ding Path, what does Liuyang Sect count as? I¡¯m afraid that when Yin Huixuan finds out that the murderer has a part of Dan Ding Path, he will be too scared to investigate further. Even if we take a step back and talk about it. Even if he really finds us, so what? We have four Inborn Grandmasters, hundreds of thousands of troops, such strength, and a mere Liuyang Sect can really give us a hard time?¡± As for annihilating the Iron Sword Sect, Lu Yuan had thought it through carefully. Although Liuyang Sect posed some threat, it really wasn¡¯t much of a threat, at least not as much as Dan Ding Path. Now he even deceived Dan Ding Path and owed a debt on his body, wasn¡¯t he still afraid of a Liuyang Sect? Moreover, for Liuyang Sect, was a mere Iron Sword Sect really worth taking such a big risk in finding trouble with Lu Yuan and others? After all, Lu Yuan and the others simply annihilated the Iron Sword Sect. They only took some floating wealth, but didn¡¯t touch Luling¡¯s territory at all. As long as they didn¡¯t reach into the martial arts world of Yuzhang Prefecture, they wouldn¡¯t touch the core interests of Liuyang Sect. Once this point was clear, Liuyang Sect was not likely to make a big move, and most likely, they would just swallow this loss in the end. Therefore, the whole extermination operation was not very risky, and everything was under control. Upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s explanation, Yan Wangqiu nodded his head and said reluctantly, ¡°Maybe it¡¯s like that.¡± ¡°Brother Yan, we martial artists have done what we¡¯ve done. Being timid and fearful is exceptionally contemptible. Isn¡¯t it just Liuyang Sect? If I destroy their vassals, what can they do about it?¡± Su Xuange glanced at the old man with some disdain and then looked at Lu Yuan. ¡°Virtuous brother, do you need more manpower in this attack against Iron Sword Sect? If needed, I can help.¡± Lu Yuan shook his head with a smile and said, ¡°Thanks, Brother Su. However, for this extermination, Saintess Lan and I, two Inborn Grandmasters, are already enough. On the contrary, this side will be defenseless when I leave, so I still need you two to look after it for me. You two may stay here and watch our backs.¡± Su Xuange said with some regret, ¡°Is that so? Alright, virtuous brother, rest assured. With me and Brother Yan here, there won¡¯t be any chaos in Shaoyang Prefecture.¡± Lu Yuan saluted, ¡°I trust you both.¡± And so, the matter of attacking and destroying the Iron Sword Sect was settled. Then the three talked about some other matters, mostly concerning the court, and talked for another hour, not dispersing until nearly noon. On the second day, after arranging everything, Lu Yuan called Lan Zhaoyun and her daughter, and went to the barracks together, where they met up with Zhou Qing and the others who had been prepared. With these selected disciples and personal guards, as well as the experts from Five Poisons Sect, Lu Yuan led a group of more than six hundred people, riding fast horses, and headed eastward mightily. The road was covered with frost and snow, and the atmosphere was cold and murderous. ¡°Sect Leader, the total expenses for the sect¡¯s celebrations during this year¡¯s festival and the annual bonuses given to the disciples and elders have been calculated. It¡¯s a total of 12,230 silver tales.¡± Ding Xihua was reclining on a couch, playing with two large iron beads in his hand. Below him, an accountant was holding an account book and reporting to him as he flipped through the pages. Upon hearing these accounts, Ding Xihua¡¯s hand playing with the iron beads paused for a moment. He asked, ¡°How much did the sect earn last year? How much is left in the account?¡± The accountant replied, ¡°Last year, the sect¡¯s trade in the north and south made a profit of 157,300 silver tales. Local affiliated gangs contributed 82,000 silver tales. The income from the farms and shops totaled 75,400 silver tales. In total, last year¡¯s total income was 314,700 silver tales. Last year, the monthly salary given to the sect¡¯s inner disciples and elders was 123,000 silver tales. The expenses for various supplies within the sect were 50,000 silver tales. The costs of various festivals were 37,000 silver tales. The expenses for dealing with the martial arts world were 25,000 silver tales. The total spending was 235,000 silver tales. The annual surplus is 79,700 silver tales, which has been stored in our public account.¡± Chapter 371 - Chapter 371: Chapter 202: Destroying Iron Sword Sect_2 Chapter 371: Chapter 202: Destroying Iron Sword Sect_2 Translator: 549690339 Ding Xihua couldn¡¯t help but nod in satisfaction upon hearing this, ¡°Not bad, We made nearly 80,000 silver tales. By now, there should be close to a million silver tales in the public account, right?¡± The accountant said, ¡°It has already exceeded one million silver tales. As of now, there are 1,039,921 silver tales in the public account.¡± ¡°Good, we have surplus year after year. This is a good omen.¡± Ding Xihua put down the iron sphere in his hand, sat up, and waved to the accountant, ¡°You¡¯ve done a good job with the accounts. Go and collect ten silver tales from the public account as a reward for your annual service. You may leave.¡± Upon hearing this, the accountant showed a delighted expression on his face, repeatedly thanking Sect Leader Ding, ¡°Thank you, Sect Leader. Thank you, Sect Leader.¡± Then he walked away to collect his money. Watching the accountant¡¯s retreating figure, Ding Xihua couldn¡¯t help but smile with a sense of accomplishment in his heart. It has been twelve years since he teamed up with many elders in the sect and purged his deceased predecessor Mo Baichuan¡¯s disciples, becoming the new Sect Leader of the Iron Sword Sect. At that time, the Iron Sword Sect was struggling to survive. During the internal conflict, the supreme Mental Technique of Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra, which had always been held by the Sect Leader Mo Baichuan, was somehow lost. Although the side sects cultivated the supreme Sword Technique of the Iron Sword, which was only first-rate in terms of moves, without the Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra, it couldn¡¯t be considered a complete first-rate martial arts skill. So at that time, due to the lack of a first-rate Mental Technique, although these side sects successfully usurped power, they couldn¡¯t produce a first-rate expert to represent the sect. This weak appearance naturally attracted the covetous eyes of many outsiders. If it hadn¡¯t been for Ding Xihua and his side sects inviting a first-rate elder from Liuyang Sect to sit in charge of their sect by offering a generous reward, they would have lost even their current foundation to outsiders. Fortunately, after overcoming the initial difficulties, they were able to locate the treasure trove within the sect through the investigation of Mo Baichuan¡¯s disciples and the sect¡¯s ancient books. The treasure trove contained the lost Replenishing Qi Heart Sutra and some Divine Blood Elixirs. Having acquired these, Ding Xihua finally managed to break through to the first-rate level and secure his position as the current Sect Leader. Now, more than a decade has passed, and the wounds from the past internal strife have long been healed. Even in the wider Jianghu world, people have long forgotten Mo Baichuan¡¯s name. Now, in the Martial arts world, there is only one ¡°Iron Sword¡± title, and that belongs to Ding Xihua.¡± He is the legitimate Iron Sword Sect Leader, and the so-called rebellion to seize power has long become a past memory as time went by. Under Ding Xihua¡¯s leadership, the Iron Sword Sect has regained its reputation. With the growth and replenishment of new disciples, the sect¡¯s large force of thousands of disciples has been restored. The sect¡¯s various businesses and sources of income have been growing over the years. By now, not only has the public silver account recovered to the amount it was before the internal strife, but it has also increased substantially. And all of this was accomplished in just twelve years. ¡°Back then, when the sect¡¯s funds were dwindling, Mo Baichuan kept blaming it on our corruption, and he planned to suppress our side sects in an attempt to regain control. But now that we are in power, according to his logic, the situation should have gotten worse. However, the fact is that under my leadership, the sect has become more prosperous and flourishing. There¡¯s simply no issue of funding shortages.¡± Standing in the spacious Sect Leader¡¯s Hall, Ding Xihua touched his sect leader seat with a hint of intoxicated mockery on his face, ¡°It was clearly Mo Baichuan¡¯s incompetence. He was only focused on martial arts cultivation and didn¡¯t know how to manage the sect¡¯s business, which led to the decline of the sect. Now that we have rectified the situation, the sect has regained its prosperity, and I am the one responsible for this revival. In the future, when I meet the sect¡¯s past leaders under the nine springs, I will enumerate Mo Baichuan¡¯s crimes to show how he was unworthy to face our ancestors.¡± Even after Mo Baichuan¡¯s death, Ding Xihua¡¯s hatred toward him remained deeply ingrained in his bones. However, when he mentioned his own accomplishments, he forgot one thing. That is, the prosperity of the sect was due to the exploitation of the disciples from Mo Baichuan¡¯s Sect Leader lineage, seizing their property and businesses. It was only after they divided the properties and businesses of Mo Baichuan¡¯s lineage that the sect had a new source of funding and was able to achieve prosperity. However, on the other hand, What they did to Mo Baichuan¡¯s lineage was precisely what Mo Baichuan had planned to do to their side sects. As long as either the main branch or the side branches were eliminated, a new cake would naturally be provided for the sect to enjoy. And the revival would naturally follow. However, the difference lies in who died and who sacrificed. Now that their side sects have triumphed, they might as well enjoy the prosperity of this revival in peace. With his eyes slightly closed, Ding Xihua spread his hands out in front of him as if he was embracing something. This was the habit he developed after becoming the Sect Leader. Because it made him feel as if he was embracing the entire Dragon Mountain and everything in the Iron Sword Sect was in his arms. Feeling such bliss, Ding Xihua didn¡¯t want to open his eyes. But just then, A gentle breeze seemed to blow into the hall. The wind seemed to come from the back mountain, carrying a rich floral fragrance. This fragrance was very unique, something he had never smelled before. Were some new flowers blooming in the back mountain? Chapter 372 - Chapter 372: Chapter 202: Destroying Iron Sword Sect_3 Chapter 372: Chapter 202: Destroying Iron Sword Sect_3 Translator: 549690339 Ding Xihua¡¯s eyebrows furrowed slightly, as he thought to himself. Ever since he ascended to the position of Sect Leader, he meticulously explored every inch of Dragon Mountain to patrol his territory. Thus, he was intimately familiar with everything on the mountain. He could even distinguish all the scents of the flowers and grasses. At this moment, however, the unfamiliar fragrance immediately aroused some dissatisfaction in the heart of the Iron Sword Sect Master. This was because it made him feel that something unfamiliar and not under his control had intruded into his territory. He hated the feeling of not being in control. Nevertheless, Ding Xihua still did not open his eyes. It was just a whiff of floral fragrance that came from the gap in the door. Once the wind had passed, the scent would naturally disappear. As for the unfamiliar fragrance, he could walk to the back mountain later, find the flower, and naturally become familiar with it and have it under his control. Thinking this way, Ding Xihua then felt a wave of fatigue emanating from his body. His eyelids seemed to grow heavier, as if countless cells were telling him. I¡¯m so tired; I¡¯m so sleepy; I must sleep. By this time, he finally realized something was wrong and woke up abruptly. His eyes shot open, and he looked around the hall in horror, before feeling his heart thump. Because he saw two figures standing side by side in a corner of the room. At the moment, the owners of those shadows were quietly looking at him. ¡°Who¡­ are you¡­¡± Ding Xihua stared at the two figures in terror, instinctively wanting to question them. However, when he opened his throat, a dry pain shot through it, and a feeling of burning weakness spread from his heart and lungs throughout his body. This sudden realization terrified him even more, as he knew he was already poisoned. He quickly mobilized his Inner Strength to suppress the toxin, and as his gentle Inner Strength flowed through his limbs, the burning weakness was finally somewhat contained. But it was only contained. Because the toxin was still slowly spreading inside his body, only at a slightly slower speed than before. ¡°Ah!¡± ¡°Who are you?!¡± ¡°Thieves!¡± ¡°Enemy, kill them!¡± At that moment, numerous shouts and sounds of combat rang out from outside the hall and through Dragon Mountain. Hearing these continuous cries of battle, Ding Xihua¡¯s face turned instantly pale. The new Sect Leader of the Iron Sword Sect finally realized that there were more than just two intruders. The enemy had targeted not just him, but the entire Iron Sword Sect. This revelation brought boundless fear, causing his vision to almost go black. ¡°It seems we have been discovered, huh.¡± At this moment, the two shadowy figures in the corner stepped out of the darkness. A young man dressed in black couldn¡¯t help but shake his head. ¡°After all, he is a top-notch expert. It wouldn¡¯t be easy to take him down without his knowledge.¡± Another figure emerged, a young girl dressed in Miao nationality clothing, and her cold voice said, ¡°That is true.¡± Lu Yuan nodded in agreement and laughed, ¡°Well, it doesn¡¯t matter. Since poison won¡¯t kill him, we can just burn him with a little more effort.¡± Hearing this conversation, Ding Xihua¡¯s face changed again, and he quickly shouted, ¡°Spare my life! Let¡¯s talk¡­¡± But Lu Yuan simply ignored him. He stretched out his hand, and a crimson flame instantly ignited in the middle of the hall¡ªa manifestation of his external Red Sun Martial Arts body. Lu Yuan pointed his finger, and the Red Sun flame instantly flew towards Ding Xihua. Seeing this distinctive flame, Ding Xihua immediately recognized the strength of his foe: ¡°Inborn!¡± Despair engulfed him. However, facing life and death, Ding Xihua did not give up resistance entirely. Instead, he exhausted all his internal strength to transform it into a pale mist, enveloping his body in an aura of Inner Qi. But it was useless. The Red Sun fire fell and immediately ignited the entire mist. Ding Xihua tried his best to transport his Inner Strength to maintain the protective Qi aura, but as soon as his internal strength weakened slightly, the terrifying toxin would strike again. Then it directly affected his meridians, causing his Inner Qi circulation to falter, and the inner Qi aura was lost ¨C the Red Sun fire consumed it. Without the protection of the Inner Qi, the red flame engulfed him, instantly reducing him to ashes. All of this happened in just a few short moments. Faced with the joint sneak attack of two Inborn Grandmasters, Ding Xihua, a mere top-ranked martial artist, had no chance of resistance. Even hoping to live for a few more moments was beyond his reach. ¡°Alright, it¡¯s done.¡± Lu Yuan looked at the pile of ashes on the ground and dismissed his external Red Sun Martial Arts body¡ªthe red flames disappeared instantly. He retracted his extended hand and turned to Lan Cai¡¯er with a smile, ¡°It seems that Miss Lan and I will make a good pair in the future. You¡¯ll intoxicate people with poison, and I¡¯ll burn them alive. Under our combined Twin Swords United, even Inborn Grandmasters might fall to our hands.¡± Hearing his words, Lan Cai¡¯er understood his insinuation and snorted lightly, turning her head away, ¡°With your current power, General, even an Inborn Grandmaster would not dare to trouble you. If you want to deal with someone, you can have countless subordinates do it for you; there¡¯s no need to do it yourself.¡± Lu Yuan laughed, ¡°That¡¯s true. But there¡¯s nothing wrong with being prepared for everything. You and I should practice more together in the future, who knows when it might come in handy?¡± After he finished speaking, he did not wait for Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s reply and strode out. By this time, the various shouts and cries of battle outside Dragon Mountain had begun to fade. This time, he had brought four elite First-Rank experts, twenty-one Second-Rank experts, seventy Third-Rank Martial Artists, as well as five hundred elite personal guards with internal strength. With such a massive force, it was more than enough to eliminate the remaining six to seven hundred disciples of the Iron Sword Sect on Dragon Mountain. It could even be said that their showdown was a one-sided slaughter. The opponents barely put up a fight before becoming dead souls under the intruders¡¯ onslaught. ¡°Master!¡± Observing the situation outside for a while, Zhou Qing came over with a sword in hand and saluted. Lu Yuan looked at his disciple. Zhou Qing¡¯s eyes were bloodshot, his face flushed, blood-soaked all over, and his hair disheveled. The Long Sword in his hand even had some notches. He seemed to have just emerged from a fierce battle. Chapter 373 - Chapter 373: Chapter 203: Breaking Through the Sky Chapter 373: Chapter 203: Breaking Through the Sky Translator: 549690339 ¡°Are you hurt?¡± Lu Yuan finished looking at his own disciple and asked. ¡°Thank you for your concern, Master. I¡¯m fine.¡± Zhou Qing shook his head, his voice slightly hoarse. ¡°That¡¯s good.¡± Lu Yuan nodded, then sighed as he looked at his disciple¡¯s appearance. ¡°Iron Sword Sect leader Ding Xihua is dead, and Dragon Mountain has also been annihilated. You have avenged your family¡¯s grievances and can let go of your grudge.¡± Zhou Qing was stunned when he heard this, and then his body collapsed as he burst into tears. Lu Yuan shook his head, walked up to his disciple and patted him on the head, comforting, ¡°Alright, stop crying, get up. The Iron Sword Sect has been destroyed, your father-in-law can rest in peace.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Zhou Qing wiped his tears and stood up, his voice choked, ¡°I¡¯ve lost my composure, and made Master laugh.¡± Even though it¡¯s been over ten years, the memory of his wife and father-in-law¡¯s tragic death was still fresh in his mind, and his heart was filled with grief. Lu Yuan sighed again but said nothing. At this moment, Han Shun and Zhang You, the two disciples, had also finished cleaning up their areas of Iron Sword Sect members and hurried over. ¡°Greetings to Master.¡± After the two had bowed, they looked at their senior brother who had red eyes and tear-streaked cheeks, as if he had just cried, and they couldn¡¯t help but feel puzzled. Neither Lu Yuan nor Zhou Qing had ever mentioned his past experiences to the other disciples. So at this moment, Han Shun and Zhang You were unaware of Zhou Qing¡¯s hatred for the Iron Sword Sect. They could only speculate in their minds whether their senior brother had been scolded by Master, but it didn¡¯t seem likely. However, no matter how puzzled they were, they could only keep their thoughts to themselves and never dare to voice them aloud. ¡°Your arrival is timely.¡± Seeing the other disciples arrive, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but nod and then ordered, ¡°According to what Iron Sword Sect leader Ding Xihua just said, there are a million silver taels in the public accounts of the Iron Sword Sect. You should seize them immediately. Also, you should interrogate the captured Iron Sword Sect disciples and elders thoroughly, and find out where their wealth and treasures are hidden. The most important thing is to find out where Iron Sword Sect¡¯s treasure is. I want you to find all the Divine Blood Elixir and wealth accumulated by the sect throughout history. That is the most important goal of this trip. Do you understand?¡± Han Shun and Zhang You heard the strict tone of their master and hurriedly agreed, ¡°We will follow your instructions, Master.¡± After that, both of them left hastily, each leading a group of elite disciples to search for treasures and interrogate prisoners. After they left, it wasn¡¯t long before Lan Zhaoyun arrived. This Sect Leader seemed relaxed and didn¡¯t show any signs of intense activity. He appeared leisurely, as if he had come for a vacation. Upon seeing him, Lu Yuan asked, ¡°Sect Leader Lan, how was the harvest this time?¡± Lan Zhaoyun smiled easily, ¡°These Iron Sword Sect people are of no use at all. With a little use of my poison skills, they all fell. But that¡¯s good too. This time, I captured three elders of the Iron Sword Sect, as well as two of their Sect Leader¡¯s disciples. Quite a rewarding harvest.¡± Lu Yuan laughed, ¡°That¡¯s great. My disciples were a little too ruthless earlier and didn¡¯t leave much alive. I was worried about how to interrogate prisoners and find the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s treasures. Sect Leader Lan¡¯s actions have just relieved my anxiety.¡± Lan Zhaoyun said with some pride, ¡°Not only me, my Poison Sect disciples have also captured quite a few people. I will hand them over to General later.¡± Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°Thank you, Sect Leader.¡± As the two chatted, the sounds of fighting in the mountains gradually subsided. With their swift and lethal attack, the Iron Sword Sect, the number one sect in Luling Prefecture, was caught off guard and its Mountain Gate was instantly breached. Now, only an hour had passed, and the entire sect had been wiped out. As Lu Yuan watched this scene, he felt deep emotions and a sense of vigilance. Today he destroyed the Iron Sword Sect, but if he were not careful in the future, he might be destroyed by someone else. ¡®If the entire Dan Ding Path sect attacks, with the Dao master and the other two True Persons together, as well as other martial artists within the sect, it would catch me off guard.¡¯ ¡®Without any preparation, the possibility of me failing would be no smaller than that of Iron Sword Sect.¡¯ Thinking of this, Lu Yuan decided to bring his wife with him when going out in the future. With the two inborn level experts together, even if the entire sect of Dan Ding Path attacked, they would be able to counter. This would greatly enhance their chances of survival. Of course, due to past grievances, in some ways, Lan Cai¡¯er couldn¡¯t be truly trusted. But as long as he could maintain his strength and be loving towards his wife, even giving her a child and a promising future, Lan Cai¡¯er and the Five Poisons Sect could be considered reliable allies for Lu Yuan. Therefore, in many aspects, the Five Poisons Sect was actually quite trustworthy after the marriage alliance. Even in some aspects, this trust outshines his own disciples, except Zhou Qing. As Lu Yuan thought about this, he carefully considered his future treatment and arrangements with the Five Poisons Sect. In the following time, Lu Yuan, worried about his disciples, took Zhou Qing and the Lan father and daughter together to tour Dragon Mountain. Chapter 374 - Chapter 374: Chapter 203: Breaking Through the Sky _2 Chapter 374: Chapter 203: Breaking Through the Sky _2 Translator: 549690339 As a famous Daoist blessed land, the scenery of Dragon Mountain was undoubtedly splendid. Especially at the top of the mountain, which took the shape of a dragon¡¯s head, soaring into the sky like a real dragon flying through the clouds. Standing at the summit, people would gaze at the vast sea of clouds and feel a sense of insignificance, as well as an inkling of the expanse of Heaven and Earth. For those seeking immortality and pursuing the Dao, standing here would evoke an illusion of wanting to ride the wind and soar through Heaven and Earth. The group arrived at the summit and could not help but be captivated by the breathtaking scenery before them. Even Zhou Qing, after admiring the majestic landscape, felt the pain and frustration in his heart dissipate quite a bit. His mood had clearly improved a lot. So when evening approached, and they saw the rosy glow of the sunset spread across the sea of clouds, everyone reluctantly bid farewell to the view before leaving the mountain under the remaining twilight. However, their emotions quickly settled once they returned to the Iron Sword Sect. ¡°Master, during the raid on the Iron Sword Sect, a total of 572 members were killed. In addition, 27 high-ranking members, including true disciples and elders, were captured. These captives are currently being interrogated, with questions about their personal wealth and the location of the sect¡¯s treasures. Additionally, an inventory of Iron Sword Sect¡¯s resources revealed over 1.7 million silver taels in current silver. Moreover, there are various valuable items and treasures with their values yet to be determined. The Divine Blood Variant Green-headed Dragon Armor from the Iron Sword Sect has also been captured and is ready to be killed and harvested for its blood.¡± Upon returning, Han Shun had already completed the tasks assigned by his master. He promptly reported the gains they had made. After hearing about the spoils, Lu Yuan frowned: ¡°Only a little over 1.7 million taels? Why is the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s foundation so weak?¡± Having anticipated this question, Han Shun was already prepared to answer: ¡°Master, the reason for the weakness of the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s resources is due to the internal strife twelve years ago, followed by a series of unfortunate events. At that time, Ding Xihua and his faction had just usurped control and their foundation was unstable. Many outside forces were eager to seize the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s assets. In order to protect themselves, they were forced to gather 3 million silver taels to present to the Liuyang Sect for recognition of the sect leader¡¯s position change. This recognition, as well as inviting a Liuyang Sect elder to oversee things, helped them overcome the crisis. The huge sum of money they spent had drained the coffers of many within the sect. Even after more than a decade, they have not yet fully recovered.¡± Upon hearing this explanation, Lu Yuan felt a pang of pain in his heart. That was 3 million silver taels! If all of that went to him, it would be enough to support an army of 50,000 soldiers for an entire year. Yet now, the Liuyang Sect had taken it all, squandering the money away with the Jianghu martial artists. Though feeling slightly displeased, Lu Yuan did not show it. He simply instructed: ¡°In that case, let it be. Go and inform the people from Dan Ding Path that they can start preparing to move the riches from the mountain.¡± Han Shun nodded immediately: ¡°Yes, disciple will arrange for someone to notify them.¡± This time, after raiding the Iron Sword Sect and collecting so much wealth, it would be impossible for Lu Yuan and his few hundred men alone to transport it out without raising suspicion. Without the Dan Ding Path¡¯s connections, they could not have covertly moved such a large sum of money undetected. So on the day the operation began to exterminate the Iron Sword Sect, Lu Yuan had already contacted the people from Dan Ding Path, asking them to be ready to assist at any time. ¡°After annihilating the main branch of the Iron Sword Sect, we still need to deal with their various footholds and affiliated forces throughout Luling Prefecture. These are also resources. We can¡¯t move their properties, but the wealth within, as well as the assets of their affiliated forces, is not an insignificant amount.¡± Lu Yuan continued, addressing several people beside him: ¡°Sect Leader Lan, Zhou Qing, Han Shun, after cleaning up the mountain¡¯s wealth, you and Zhang You will each lead a team to different locations, according to the plan. Eliminate the remaining Iron Sword Sect forces and collect their wealth. People from Dan Ding Path are already waiting in the various counties. You know how to contact them. Once you¡¯ve dealt with each location, let them help transport the goods. Act quickly and aim to finish within three days. Don¡¯t let it drag on for too long.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± They accepted the order without hesitation. Lu Yuan nodded and waved his hand: ¡°Then go and carry out the plan.¡± The gains from attacking the Iron Sword Sect were less than expected, with only a mere 1.7 million silver taels. This amount could only support their army for three months. Given that they had mobilized two Inborn Grandmasters, four top-level experts, dozens of second and third tier fighters, and 500 elite personal guards for this operation, the returns were quite disappointing. ¡®I hope cleaning up the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s branches and affiliated forces will bring in more profit. Otherwise, taking this risk to offend the Liuyang Sect and attacking the Iron Sword Sect will have been a loss.¡¯ With these thoughts in mind, Lu Yuan summoned Feng Zhijie. Ever since this old man decided to follow him, he had become the only expert in raising Divine Blood Variants in his ranks. Of course, with the allegiance of the Poison Sect, there were even more people in the millennial school skilled in this field. Nevertheless, the allegiance of the Poison Sect was still recent, and Lu Yuan had not yet officially married Lan Cai¡¯er. Thus, it was not as comfortable working with their people compared to his own subordinates. Chapter 375 - Chapter 375: Chapter 203: Breaking Through the Sky_3 Chapter 375: Chapter 203: Breaking Through the Sky_3 Translator: 549690339 Therefore, in order to attack and destroy the Iron Sword Sect, they could not take the Divine Blood Variant away, and Lu Yuan could not possibly stay in Dragon Mountain forever. So the final choice was to slaughter the divine dwelling different species, extract its blood and skin, and directly take away its corpse. ¡°Greetings, General.¡± Soon, the old man arrived. Lu Yuan looked at him and ordered, ¡°Feng Zhijie, the green-headed dragon armor in Dragon Mountain has been captured. You take some people, slaughter it, extract its blood and flesh, and bring it back to Dongting Prefecture with those treasures.¡± When Feng Zhijie came, he knew his responsibility and had prepared well. He immediately carried out the order: ¡°The subordinate will do it now.¡± Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°Go ahead.¡± As for Feng Zhijie¡¯s ability to handle the Divine Blood Variant, he was quite confident and at ease. A few months ago, Lu Yuan asked the old man to deal with the Pure Water Xuan Niu and slaughtered it to refine pills. In the end, Feng Zhijie successfully fulfilled the entrusted task and refined seven Pure Water Profound Pills using the entire Pure Water Xuan Niu. However, because most of his disciples were uncompetitive and few met the mental requirements for breakthrough, Lu Yuan did not bestow these Profound Pills to them but kept them in his own hands for future use. Additionally, the skin, flesh, tendons and bones of the Xuan Niu were also processed. The beef and bones were offered to Lu Yuan, who enjoyed the Xuan Niu Combo Meal for quite a while, greatly increasing his vitality and foundation. The cowhide was made into a suit of armor and became his standard equipment for conquest. The tendons and horns were made into a divine bow, and now Lu Yuan always took this bow with him whenever he went to battle. One could say that the maximum value of a Pure Water Xuan Niu was fully realized by Feng Zhijie. Now, having harvested a green-headed dragon armor, he was very much looking forward to the surprises this old man could bring him. After assigning various tasks, Lu Yuan did not sit idle in Dragon Mountain, but took Lan Cai¡¯er with him and picked one of Iron Sword Sect¡¯s branches to clean up. With their actions, the entire martial arts world in Luling Prefecture soon faced a major catastrophe. Many people often went to sleep in their homes, only to wake up the next day and find that the local sect that dominated the city had been annihilated overnight. Not only were the people left behind in the sect killed, but even the various treasures and shops in the city belonging to those sects were plundered in the same night. Such astonishing cases involving the local martial arts leaders naturally drew the attention of the local county government. The government officials, under orders, tremblingly went to investigate. Then, after not looking for too long, they escaped like they were fleeing back to the county government office, directly reporting that it was the work of martial arts experts. Otherwise, they wouldn¡¯t have been able to kill the second-rate gang leader in the county who had reached a considerable level of strength. Moreover, there were quite a few of these experts. Because the wounds on the dead varied in size, shape, and weapons used, it was clear that many people were involved. So, it was a large-scale robbery case beyond the capacity of the county government to handle, and help would be needed from the prefectural government. Only the top catcher in the prefecture, who had already attained a first-class level of strength, was qualified to handle this case. Then, the county magistrate smoothly forwarded the case upwards. Afterward, numerous similar cases, like snowflakes, floated from various places to Fu City. Even the cases at the local level were not limited to these. Since Lu Yuan was prepared to take action this time, he was determined to make big money and get rich. As such, he naturally would not let go of the wealthiest Fu City. Therefore, the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s branches and shops in the city, along with several local martial arts gangs affiliated with the Iron Sword Sect, were all taken down by his men, leaving none behind. Committing such a crime in Fu City inevitably shocked the prefectural government office. The chief catcher of the city, Shao Desheng, and the commander, Wang Quan, were both alarmed and came to investigate. Then, after examining the corpses, both looked grim. ¡°The culprits are first-class experts,¡± Shao Desheng said in a deep voice, standing up from the corpses. ¡°And there¡¯s more than one first-class expert,¡± Wang Quan added bitterly. ¡°Why would they commit such a major crime?¡± Shao Desheng was puzzled. ¡°Who knows?¡± Wang Quan shook his head. ¡°No matter what, with so many dead and the involvement of more than one first-class expert, this case is tough,¡± Shao Desheng said with a bitter smile. ¡°Let¡¯s go back and report to the Prefect first,¡± Wang Quan sighed. Shao Desheng nodded, and the two went back to the government office together. However, as soon as they arrived at the government office, they received the shocking news that there were major cases happening simultaneously in various parts of the prefecture and counties. After the two checked the specific identities of the victims in these major cases, they were even more horrified. Because they found that all the victims were martial artists, and these martial artists all shared a common key point ¨C they were related to the Iron Sword Sect, either as their branches or as their affiliated forces. In short, all these annihilated sect cases were aimed at the Iron Sword Sect. Upon realizing this, the two were instantly shocked and hastily dispatched people to investigate the Iron Sword Sect. Then, in less than a day, they received astonishing news. The Iron Sword Sect, a first-class sect that had dominated Luling Prefecture for hundreds of years and whose influence spread throughout the prefecture, had been wiped out. They didn¡¯t know either the sect headquarters had been destroyed or even all the branches and affiliated forces in various places had been wiped out. ¡°Things are out of control.¡± After receiving the news, Shao Desheng looked at Wang Quan, his longtime collaborator and friend, and said bitterly, ¡°Send someone to notify the Prefect and convey the message to the Liuyang Sect. The martial arts world in Yuzhang Prefecture has been pierced through.¡± ¡°There¡¯s no other choice,¡± Wang Quan said bitterly. A first-class sect was destroyed, and it happened so quickly and silently. Whoever carried out such an act could never be an ordinary force, and could only be one of the Innate Great Sects. Since their own affiliated sects were destroyed in this way and faced such blatant humiliation. As the foremost sect in the martial arts world of Yuzhang Prefecture, the Liuyang Sect would certainly not tolerate this when they learned the news, would they? Of course not. With the Liuyang Sect retaliating and the two Innate sects clashing, no matter who won or lost, the martial arts world in Yuzhang Prefecture would never be as peaceful as before. If this wasn¡¯t piercing the sky, what was it? Chapter 376 - Chapter 376: Chapter 204: Reactions from All Sides Chapter 376: Chapter 204: Reactions from All Sides Translator: 549690339 Dayu County, a graveyard outside the city. ¡°Father, Ping¡¯er, I have avenged you, now you can rest in peace.¡± Zhou Qing knelt in front of the graves, looking at the two tombstones, and couldn¡¯t help but burst into tears. Lu Yuan, who was watching from the side, also felt a wave of sadness. After he and Zhou Qing had fled from Dayu County back then, things did not go as planned, and the bloody incident at Zhou¡¯s Medical Clinic was exposed. The Iron Sword Sect did not trace the incident to Zhou¡¯s Clinic, nor was their killing of Iron Sword Sect disciple Guan Yunfei exposed. Instead, the disappearance of the Zhou family caused much concern in the city. However, when Zhou Qing left back then, he used the excuse that he had gone for treatment, thus many eyewitnesses in the city only thought that there was some delay in his treatment and therefore he could not return. It was Zhou Qing¡¯s father-in-law, a scholar and Ping¡¯er¡¯s father, who made several inquiries about Zhou Qing¡¯s whereabouts but to no avail. After waiting for a few years, Lu Yuan sought Zhou Qing¡¯s consent before returning to transfer Doctor Zhou and Ping¡¯er¡¯s remains to a grave outside the city. As for Zhou¡¯s Clinic, it was taken over by some distant relatives of the Zhou family who reopened it a few years later, but their medical skills were far inferior to Doctor Zhou¡¯s, and they tarnished the reputation of the century-old Zhou¡¯s Clinic. Nowadays, the clinic barely makes ends meet. The Zhou family gradually faded from the memory of the citizens of Dayu County over the years. Now, looking back at everything that happened, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but sigh. Time, indeed, is the best tool to wear everything away. ¡°Sigh, Qing¡¯er, get up.¡± Seeing Zhou Qing crying in front of the grave for more than an hour, Lu Yuan finally couldn¡¯t help but step forward and pat his shoulder, pulling his disciple up. He comforted, ¡°Now that your family feud has been avenged, and Doctor Zhou and Ping¡¯er¡¯s grievances have been redressed, they should be able to rest in peace. As for you, if you continue to be depressed, it would only sadden them. Now you should pull yourself together and move on with your life.¡± ¡°That is the best way to comfort the deceased.¡± Hearing his master¡¯s words, Zhou Qing wiped his tears, but as he wiped, he couldn¡¯t help crying again. He hugged Lu Yuan tightly, embracing the person he respected and loved most in the world, ¡°Master¡­ ¡± Bearing his apprentice¡¯s tearful embrace, Lu Yuan showed a helpless expression on his face. He patted Zhou Qing¡¯s shoulder like he would a child, ¡°Alright, alright, don¡¯t cry anymore.¡± ¡°Doctor Zhou and Ping¡¯er may be gone, but you still have your master. I¡¯ll be with you from now on.¡± Lu Yuan treated Zhou Qing almost like his own son. As for Zhou Qing, he repaid his master¡¯s love with filial piety and devotion. Over the years, he not only offered his master the Chi Yang Divine Skill but also helped him lead the army, accumulating numerous military achievements. So, seeing his apprentice in such a distraught state, Lu Yuan felt distressed and could only keep comforting him. Fortunately, Zhou Qing had grown up. Now a 27-year-old young man, after years of trials and battles in the Jianghu, he had gained a lot of experience and steely determination. After crying for a while, he managed to calm down and, realizing that he was holding his master, he quickly stepped back, a blush on his face, ¡°I¡¯m sorry for losing my composure earlier and making you uncomfortable, Master.¡± Lu Yuan shook his head, ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter, as long as you¡¯re feeling better, I¡¯m happy.¡± Zhou Qing wiped the remaining tear stains from his face and said with determination, ¡°I¡¯m fine now.¡± Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°That¡¯s good. The Iron Sword Sect and its remnants have been eliminated, and news of it has spread. It won¡¯t be long before the Liuyang Sect arrives. It¡¯s no longer safe to stay in Luling for long, we should return.¡± Zhou Qing bowed, ¡°Yes.¡± Then, the master and disciple left the mountain and returned to the main road, where they met up with Lan Cai¡¯er and the others who were waiting and rode away together. In these days, Luling was in complete chaos. The chaos was mainly reflected in people¡¯s hearts. With the consecutive collapses of the Iron Sword Sect and its affiliates, resulting in over two thousand deaths, the impact directly caused panic among the people in Luling. When the common folks went out, they would walk hastily, not daring to linger. Even the officials patrolling the streets seemed shaky and nervous, as if the next step would be their doom. Even the hoodlums who used to make trouble in the streets were frightened by the series of tragic events, and they dared not cause any more ruckus. This was mainly because many of the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s affiliates were local gangs. These gangs controlled various underworld businesses in the area, making a fortune every day. Lu Yuan had suffered greatly at their hands when he was a hunter. Now that he wanted to strike at the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s affiliates, he naturally wouldn¡¯t let them go, and they were all on the cleanup list. This was especially true in Dayu County, where many rogues like Scarface once bullied Lu Yuan. He and Zhou Qing personally took care of them one by one, eliminating them completely. Back then, Lu Yuan promised to seek payback from those who had bullied him, and it wasn¡¯t just an empty promise. Chapter 377 - Chapter 377: Chapter 204: Reactions from All Parties_2 Chapter 377: Chapter 204: Reactions from All Parties_2 Translator: 549690339 Now he has fulfilled that promise. And in the process of such a crackdown against the gang forces, it was inevitable that some young rogues were implicated. As a result, those little ruffians who liked to be domineering in their daily lives, also became low-key and timid. They were afraid that if they were too exuberant, they would be mistaken as members of the Iron Sword Sect by passing experts and dealt with directly. This, on the one hand, caused many of the local people who had suffered from them to secretly applaud. By eliminating the Iron Sword Sect, Lu Yuan can be considered to have removed a scourge for the people. Amidst such chaos and suppression, carriages laden with various treasure and supplies were also marked with the banners of various business associations and were transported to Dongting Prefecture. Some of the carriages of the business associations even had official documents issued by Lu Yuan¡¯s side, stating that these supplies were for military use, and that local officials were not allowed to obstruct them, making the transportation more convenient. In just seven or eight days. Thanks to the efforts of the carriages from the business associations, the spoils of defeating the Iron Sword Sect were transported back to Dongting Prefecture. By this time, the reports from Luling Prefecture had hurriedly arrived in Yuzhang Prefecture and Xunyang Prefecture, handed over to both the prefectures and the Liuyang Sect. The prefecture. When the incumbent Yuzhang prefect Feng Bo received the report, he was listening to a play in his backyard. Although it is a chaotic time now. However, there have never been any major robberies in Yuzhang Prefecture. The external military disasters have barely affected this area, so the place has been relatively stable. As a result, although the imperial court has imposed higher taxes year after year, the local people have become more and more distressed, but overall, it can still be called a peaceful time. What Feng Bo has to do here is to maintain the stability of the region while providing more and more taxes and grain to the imperial court. As long as these two points are achieved, it can be considered qualified, or even outstanding. Yuzhang Prefecture is a large prefecture, with millions of households and a prosperous region. Therefore, the chief commandants and chief arresters of the various prefectures are mostly first-rate experts. Each prefecture can basically have one first-rate expert stay put. At the same time, the local county soldiers have sufficient money and grain to maintain full strength. With all these forces in place, plus the full 10,000 county soldiers on the prefecture side, it is enough to maintain local stability. As for providing tax revenue and grain, that goes without saying. Yuzhang Prefecture has always been known as the Land of Fish and Rice. With the wealth here, even providing the taxes demanded by the imperial court every year does not require the people to be starved, and the supply can be completed. Thus, it was easy for Feng Bo to complete the two tasks by passing them on to his subordinates, and they would handle it for him. And as the lord of the prefecture, all he had to do was to take a moment every day to deal with official business, and then he could enjoy his leisure and peace. But today, this leisure and peace are destined to be broken. ¡°The Iron Sword Sect is wiped out?¡± When Feng Bo heard his aide read the report sent by the local area, he was so surprised that he jumped up from his chair and let out a shriek. This sudden commotion startled the actors in the play on the stage, who all stopped in their tracks, not knowing what to do. ¡°Yes, my lord. According to Luling Prefecture, the culprits are ruthless, detailed, and premeditated.¡± ¡°Besides being able to eradicate the Iron Sword Sect and kill hundreds of members overnight, they also attacked in various counties of Luling Prefecture, wiping out more than thirty Jianghu gangs in just a few days.¡± ¡°The strength of the culprits, and the manpower they mobilized, is by no means ordinary bandits.¡± Luling Prefecture initially speculated that there are at least a thousand strong culprits with high martial arts skills, and there may even be as many as six top martial artists among them. That¡¯s because within the same time frame in Luling Prefecture, there were six different places where traces of top martial artists¡¯ actions were left. Besides these, Luling Prefecture also found that many of the victims¡¯ corpses had injuries from crossbows. Those culprits, in addition to being highly skilled in martial arts, also had powerful bows and crossbows. These are all prohibited items.¡± The aide¡¯s face was somewhat pale, and his voice trembled slightly as he spoke. After listening to these reports, Feng Bo immediately turned to the actors on stage and shouted, ¡°All of you get out of here!¡± The actors also realized that something was wrong and hurriedly bowed before quickly leaving the scene. When only the two of them were left in the garden, Feng Bo paced back and forth for a while before murmuring, ¡°Six top martial artists, a thousand highly skilled bandits, and a large number of forbidden powerful bows and crossbows¡­ These bandits¡­ Are they really just bandits?¡± In the end, when Feng Bo reached this point, his heart suddenly realized something, and his words stopped abruptly, his expression turning serious. His aide naturally knew what his master was thinking and trembled, ¡°To be able to mobilize so many people, it takes an innate sect even among the Jianghu sects. Nowadays, those Inborn Grandmasters in Dayue have basically accepted the imperial court¡¯s recruitment.¡± This attack is targeting the Liuyang Sect. My lord, I¡¯m afraid it¡¯s not the current National Teacher or some general¡­¡± ¡°Silence!¡± Before the aide could finish his words, Feng Bo immediately shouted, ¡°The National Teacher and the generals are the pillars of the imperial court. How can they be slandered by your nonsense? It¡¯s one thing now, but if you dare to spread this rumor in the future, I won¡¯t spare you.¡± ¡°It was my mistake, my mistake. My lord, please don¡¯t take offense. Chapter 378 - Chapter 378: Chapter 204: Reactions from Various Parties_3 Chapter 378: Chapter 204: Reactions from Various Parties_3 Translator: 549690339 Upon hearing this, the staff member pretended to be drunk and then asked, ¡°In that case, Sir, the Lu Ling Prefecture has requested that we dispatch a specialist to investigate the case, what do you think¡­?¡± Such a major incident had occurred in the local area, and it must be dealt with, whether it was for the sake of the government¡¯s dignity or to give an explanation to the Liuyang Sect. Feng Bo pondered for a moment and said, ¡°Send Wang Criminal Punishment Envoy to handle the investigation.¡± As the head of criminal prosecution in a prefecture, the Criminal Punishment Envoy was responsible for handling any major case. At this time, with so many deaths in Lu Ling Prefecture, it was reasonable for the Criminal Punishment Envoy to conduct the investigation. The staff member immediately replied, ¡°I will inform him right away.¡± ¡°Wait.¡± Feng Bo stopped him and instructed, ¡°Tell him to only investigate the case, and only look for those criminals who committed the heinous crime. These criminals are extremely vicious, and they have nothing to do with the national masters and generals of the court. Do you understand?¡± The staff member nodded repeatedly, ¡°Yes, Sir, I understand.¡± Feng Bo nodded, ¡°Go ahead.¡± The staff member quickly left, leaving Feng Bo alone in the garden. Feng Bo paced back and forth on the ground for a few rounds before returning to his recliner. Unable to bear the headache, he rubbed his temples and cursed, ¡°Damn, I don¡¯t know who did this, but they¡¯ve caused me so much trouble for nothing.¡± ¡°Since the Iron Sword Sect has been wiped out, the Liuyang Sect must seek an explanation. How am I supposed to appease them?¡± ¡°If I find out who did it, I¡¯ll report it to the court in secret and have them reprimanded.¡± ¡°In such a turbulent world, why not cause more trouble and wipe out sects? Do they think the court is not chaotic enough?¡± Indeed, just as the staff member had said, Feng Bo was convinced in his heart that it was one of the National Masters or Generals from the court who had taken action. However, even if he knew the truth now, As both sides were important court officials, he, as a local governor, couldn¡¯t possibly help the Liuyang Sect arrest the National Masters or Generals, right? Not to mention whether he could catch them, even if he could, he wouldn¡¯t dare to engage in such in-fighting! So now, he could only help his troubled colleagues and clean up the mess for them. He could only try to deceive the Liuyang Sect for the time being. Sigh. Why is it that in such an eventful autumn, there are nothing but annoying things happening? The frustrated Prefect Feng, who had no entertainment to distract him, was filled with anger. Nine Waters Lotus Flower Area. This was a place where nine streams of water converged, located within the vast Pengli Lake district. Due to the abundant lotus flowers in the lake, it was also known as Lotus Flower Area. Of course, this was only what the local people or the scholars and writers who passed by called it. In the Jianghu, this place had an even more resounding name: Liuyang Sect. Yes. The headquarters of the Liuyang Sect, the number one sect in the martial world of Yue Country, was situated within the Nine Waters Lotus Flower Area. Today, a knight hurrying from the south arrived quickly at the lakeside pier. He then presented a letter marked urgent, and a speedboat swiftly picked it up and sent it back to the Liuyang Sect headquarters deep within the lake. A few moments later, the letter arrived in the hands of Yin Huixuan, the current Sect Leader of the Liuyang Sect. At this time, Yin Huixuan was playing chess with his fellow disciples in the Lotus Lake Pavilion. Upon receiving the urgent letter from the disciple, he opened it and read it, the usually gentle Sect Leader Yin suddenly flew into a rage, slamming the table and shouting, ¡°This is outrageous!¡± This sudden outburst startled the disciple beside him. Not caring about the disrupted chess game, he hurriedly asked, ¡°Senior Brother, what happened?¡± ¡°See for yourself.¡± Yin Huixuan pushed the letter forward, placing it in his disciple¡¯s hands. After the disciple had finished reading it, he couldn¡¯t help but slap the table and exclaim, ¡°This is preposterous!¡± He then looked up at his Head Brother and said anxiously, ¡°Senior Brother, this is a provocation against our Liuyang Sect. By wiping out the Iron Sword Sect, they have destroyed our sect¡¯s southern gate in Yuzhang Prefecture. This act is almost akin to declaring war on our Liuyang Sect. We must not tolerate this.¡± Yin Huixuan raised his hand, and with his anger subsiding considerably, his tone turned chilling, ¡°The Iron Sword Sect has experienced internal strife and has declined in recent years, but it still has thousands of disciples, and Ding Xihua has already reached the first-class level. Those who could wipe out the entire Iron Sword Sect overnight within their sect could not be ordinary Jianghu first-class sects.¡± Furthermore, the fact that they were able to eliminate the remnants of the Iron Sword Sect in just a few days further confirmed this point. Those who took action this time are either Innate Great Sects or those Coastal Aristocratic Families.¡± Upon hearing this, the disciple¡¯s anger subsided, and he furrowed his brows, saying, ¡°Now that the Yue State court is recruiting Jianghu Grandmasters and implementing the Ten Great Grandmasters Project, awarding fiefdoms to them, If it is the Innate Sects that took action, since they are backed by the court, we will have to face the court if we want to seek justice. If it is the Coastal Aristocratic Families that took action, then it is undoubtedly tantamount to taking action against the court.¡± He then looked up at his Senior Brother, worry evident in his voice, ¡°Senior Brother, could this be the court¡¯s retaliation for our previous refusal of their invitation?¡± Two years ago, when the court had just initiated the Ten Great Grandmasters Project, they had approached the Liuyang Sect. However, they were refused outright. Afterward, the court did not send anyone to pester them again, thinking the matter was settled. But now, it seemed that they had been too presumptuous. ¡°It is a possibility,¡± Yin Huixuan replied darkly, nodding, ¡°If it is indeed the work of the court, then our Liuyang Sect is facing an unprecedented crisis in its history.¡± Now that the court¡¯s Ten Great Grandmasters Project has been completed, the top combat power is more abundant than ever before. Although the Liuyang Sect had Yin Huixuan, an Inborn Second Realm master, he couldn¡¯t help but feel a sense of powerlessness in his heart when facing the ten Inborn Grandmasters. If the court really wanted to take this opportunity to eliminate the Liuyang Sect, He couldn¡¯t think of any good way to escape the calamity, no matter how hard he tried. ¡°This matter is of great importance and must be thoroughly investigated.¡± The disciple beside him also realized this, and immediately stood up, saying, ¡°I will go to Lu Ling Prefecture right away to get to the bottom of this matter. Chapter 379 - Chapter 379: Chapter 205: Great Prestige Chapter 379: Chapter 205: Great Prestige Translator: 549690339 Yin Huixuan nodded and said, ¡°You have to make a trip there, so you go ahead first.¡± With that, he couldn¡¯t help but remind, ¡°If you really find out something, don¡¯t make a fuss. The imperial court is now powerful, and I cannot resist them. Even if they are indeed the ones who did it, as long as they don¡¯t go too far next time, we will let it be. The Iron Sword Sect, they¡¯re just unlucky to have run into the guns of the imperial court. I just hope that after letting off steam this time, the imperial court will calm down. Otherwise, my Liuyang Sect will have to fight to the death.¡± At this point, Yin Huixuan had some regrets in his heart. Had he accepted the imperial court¡¯s invitation earlier, would he still be in such a predicament today? Thinking like this, he sighed deeply in the end. There¡¯s no such thing as a regret medicine in the world, so now he can only take one step at a time. The great expert at the second stage of the Inborn realm felt an unprecedented sense of powerlessness at this moment. ¡°Then, Disciple will go and prepare first.¡± The disciple bowed and hurried away. While Feng Bo and Yin Huixuan were worrying, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t know that the Liuyang Sect, which had originally troubled him, had already admitted defeat. Not only did they not dare to come looking for trouble, but they also took on a turtle-like, ostrich mentality. The trouble that had been anticipated disappeared just like that. If he knew about it, Lu Yuan would definitely be very happy. However, even if he doesn¡¯t know now, he is still very happy at this moment. ¡°Master, according to the statistics, we have taken the affiliated strongholds of the Iron Sword Sect, confiscated those industries, and obtained a total of more than 13 million current silver. In addition, there are countless treasures, calligraphy, and paintings. Under coercion, the elders of the Iron Sword Sect also provided quite a bit of their hidden assets. After confiscating them, we also obtained more than 15 million silver taels. There are also a large number of treasures, calligraphy, paintings, and antiques. The treasure trove of the Iron Sword Sect has also been found, and we have obtained more than 22 million taels¡¯ worth of gold, silver, pearls, and treasures. In addition, we have collected over a thousand various martial arts manuals from the Iron Sword Sect. However, the Divine Blood Elixir ordered by Master, had been used by Ding Xihua and others to restore their strength after the internal strife in the Iron Sword Sect in the past few years. We have only obtained fifty-two pellets after reopening it.¡± On the way back to Dongting County, Zhang You, who was in charge of coordinating the gains, presented the completed list to Lu Yuan. Lu Yuan took the list and examined it carefully. After listening to his disciple¡¯s report, he couldn¡¯t help but nod in satisfaction and show a smile, ¡°Not bad, not bad. Including the previous gains from wiping out the Iron Sword Sect¡¯s main altar, we have now obtained a total of 6.7 million silver taels from the destruction of the Iron Sword Sect. There are also various antiques, calligraphy, paintings, pearls, and treasures. These could be sold for another two or three million silver taels after being liquidated. Adding it all up, the total gain this time is nearly ten million silver taels. With this money, combined with the current treasury, it is enough to support an army of 100,000 soldiers for four or five years.¡± Lu Yuan originally had more than 20 million silver taels stored in his treasury. Later, the Dan Ding Path funded another ten million silver taels. After forcing the Five Poison Sect to submit, Lan Zhaoyun proactively contributed the remaining assets of Dongting County that he had collected over the years, totaling over five million taels. Now, with the nearly ten-million-tael income from the destruction of the Iron Sword Sect, Lu Yuan has almost 27 million silver taels in his account. According to a soldier¡¯s salary of five taels per month and 60 taels per year, his 100,000 soldiers would require six million taels per year. With 27 million taels, it would be enough to support a large army of 100,000 for four and a half years. Even if the army continued to expand later on, these funds would still be sufficient for another two or three years. With such abundant resources, even if the future relationship with the imperial court sours and they cut off his grain and money, Lu Yuan will have enough confidence to wage a protracted war against the imperial court. Having money in his hands and not feeling anxious at heart, Lu Yuan¡¯s mood was naturally good at this moment. Even the fifty-two Divine Blood Elixir pellets obtained from the treasure trove of the Iron Sword Sect seemed insignificant in comparison. After all, including the Five Poisons Sect, he now had an Inborn Grandmaster, seven first-class masters and so the top-level combat power was not lacking. As for the second-rate masters, there were over a hundred of them, including his own disciples, members of the Five Poison Sect, and those from the local prefectures and counties, such as the catch officers, inspectors, and the chief catch officer. There were nearly five or six hundred capable third-rate masters as well. With so many second and third-rate masters and skilled fighters, it was enough to fill the gap in his mid-level fighting power. Add to that the 100,000 ordinary soldiers. Thus, Lu Yuan had already perfected the three-tiered structure of his forces, with no obvious weaknesses. Under these circumstances, the effect that the fifty-two Divine Blood Elixirs could bring was not as significant as before. Of course, it is not to say that these Divine Acupuncture Elixirs are useless. On the contrary, they are still very useful. After all, if used properly, Lu Yuan could have six or seven more first-class masters. However, it was a pity. Although he tried to take as many apprentices as possible over the years, time was still too short. In just a few years, the training could not catch up. Many of the disciples¡¯ mental states were not enough to support the strength of a first-rate, or even a second-rate master. In this case, no matter how many Divine Blood Elixirs he had, he couldn¡¯t make full use of them, because he couldn¡¯t even find people to train. However, if he didn¡¯t look for his own disciples and sought others instead, Lu Yuan could not trust them. Chapter 380 - Chapter 380: Chapter 205 Great Prestige_2 Chapter 380: Chapter 205 Great Prestige_2 Translator: 549690339 In this world full of war and chaos, people are scattered, etiquette and music are destroyed, and morality is lost. Loyalty and betrayal often just hinge on a single thought. Just like himself. At this moment, he is on the side of the imperial court, but in a few days, he might find himself against it. Having come this far, how could he trust others who have no close relationship with him and have no deep interests entwined with his own to serve him loyally? In comparison, Taking in more nominal disciples, though they still might not be reliable, At least adds a layer of name, giving them martial arts teachings, granting elixirs, and as his disciples, they can gain fame and fortune¡­ With these various reasons, favors, and interests binding them together, the possibility of disciples betraying becomes significantly reduced. In this way, Lu Yuan can use them with more confidence and be more willing to cultivate them. So now, the fifty-two Divine Blood Elixirs and the previously stored seven Pure Water Profound Pills, as well as the Green-headed Dragon Armor Pills that Feng Zhijie is refining, have no use for the time being. To make use of these elixirs to their full potential, at least two or three years must pass. However, by that time, it remains to be seen whether Lu Yuan still needs to continue cultivating top-notch martial artists. With their gains, Lu Yuan¡¯s extermination squad returned to Shaoyang Prefecture twenty days after they left. Most of the time spent was actually on the road. However, upon returning to Shaoyang Prefecture, he received a piece of news. ¡°The imperial court has sent a hundred-thousand-strong army to march, led by Wuan Marquis Yang Jing as the commander, and the head of the Guanhai Villa in Guangling, Qiao Kangquan, serves as the deputy commander.¡± ¡°The two of them led the army to Yuzhang Prefecture, but their soldiers are stationed in Xunyang Prefecture and have not made any further moves.¡± Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange, who had stayed in Shaoyang Prefecture, immediately informed Lu Yuan of the news they had received in recent days after he returned. Wuan Marquis, this is Yang Jing¡¯s title, right? Lu Yuan remembered Yang Jing, the person in charge of the South Ridge Yang Family, who had pulled him into the top ten grandmasters plan back then. Now, more than a year later, the other party had already been granted the title of Wuan Marquis and was the commander of a hundred-thousand-strong army. It is even very likely that the two would split camps and meet in armed confrontation. On the other hand, according to the imperial court¡¯s convention, If someone in the country breaks through to the Innate realm, they would be given a marquis title starting with ¡°Wu¡± (meaning martial). Like Wucheng Marquis, Wuan Marquis, etc. Although they are named marquis, their ranks are higher than that of princes, much more significant than those of ordinary dukes and princes. At this time, Lu Yuan has also broken through to the Innate realm, but the imperial court has not conferred a title upon him yet, could it be that they forgot? ¡®Or, does the imperial court think that I am about to establish a fiefdom soon, and by then, I won¡¯t need a title, so they are too lazy to give me one?¡¯ Lu Yuan thought to himself and felt somewhat disappointed. He was quite eager to get a marquis title beginning with ¡°Wu¡± after all, this title would symbolize official recognition from the imperial court and strength. Now that it¡¯s gone, it¡¯s quite a pity. With these random thoughts flashing through his mind, Lu Yuan quickly dispelled them and returned to the main topic. Looking at the two allies who were staring at him intently, he pondered for a moment and asked, ¡°Is the imperial court on guard against us?¡± Before Lu Yuan went to Luling Prefecture, he had already signaled Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange to start spreading the news of their alliance to the imperial court¡¯s side, to test their reaction. Now, twenty days have passed, and if the news was sent back to Jinling¡¯s imperial court by boat along the river without stopping, it should reach the Western Expedition Army, which had already set off. At this point, Yang Jing and the others probably have already received the news and know that the situation has changed. That¡¯s why they stopped in Xunyang and didn¡¯t recklessly lead the army into Dongting Prefecture.¡± Yan Wangqiu nodded, ¡°That should be the case.¡± In these days, the Old Lord and Su Xuange had also speculated about the reactions of the imperial court. So, upon hearing the news that the Western Expedition Army was stationed in Xunyang, they immediately concluded that the imperial court was guarding against them. After all, with the addition of Su Xuange and Lan Cai¡¯er, and their own betrayal against the imperial court, Lu Yuan¡¯s camp now had four Inborn Grandmasters. And considering Lu Yuan¡¯s roots in Dongting Prefecture, there was an army of a hundred thousand soldiers ready to serve him. Moreover, he could easily muster more than two hundred thousand Miao and Yue militia if he wanted to. With these four Inborn Grandmasters and three hundred thousand troops stationed here, their attitude is now ambiguous, even leaning towards hostility. Even if Yang Jing had ten times the courage, he wouldn¡¯t dare to come to Dongting Prefecture! After all, on this side, even if he led the troops here, the imperial court only has four Inborn Grandmasters and about thirty to forty thousand soldiers in Dongting Prefecture and Jiangnan. Their strength may not even be as strong as Lu Yuan¡¯s side. As for Wucheng Marquis Bai Mengyang? He is still leading more than twenty thousand remnants, hiding in Tianmen Prefecture, and being besieged by hundreds of thousands of Zhou troops! If it weren¡¯t for Tianmen Prefecture City being near the river, and Bai Mengyang could continuously receive the aid of the imperial court¡¯s water forces and supplies, he would have been defeated long ago. However, even so, the Wucheng Marquis can barely defend himself and has no hope of getting involved in Jiangnan¡¯s situation. Under these circumstances, The imperial court naturally hesitates, not daring to act carelessly. Otherwise, if Lu Yuan sided with the Zhou, and the Nanhai Sect and Nine River Sword Sect followed suit, the entire situation in the world would collapse instantly. Not to mention protecting Dongting Prefecture, the entire Da Yue might not be able to be preserved. Chapter 381 - Chapter 381: Chapter 205: Great Prestige_3 Chapter 381: Chapter 205: Great Prestige_3 Translator: 549690339 At this moment, Su Xuange also laughed and said, ¡°I guess the court is now swearing and agonizing over how to deal with us rebels. I just don¡¯t know if the court is going to suppress or pacify us.¡± Lu Yuan was well aware of the court¡¯s predicament at this time, and after hearing Su Xuange¡¯s mocking words, he also smiled slightly and said, ¡°It¡¯s probably impossible to suppress us, since the court wouldn¡¯t want to end up ruined with us. Those aristocratic families in Linhai County, aren¡¯t they all very wealthy? This world of the landscapes and the domination, for them, is nothing more than a game where their families take turns being in charge. Now that the chessboard is about to be overturned, and the game cannot continue, how can the six families and seven clans be willing to accept this? There hasn¡¯t been much movement in the Xunyang Prefecture army camp at this time, probably because they are discussing strategies internally and talking about how to appease us. Just watch, it won¡¯t be long before envoys from the court come to negotiate terms with us.¡± Yan Wangqiu laughed, ¡°I wonder what conditions the court will offer. If they still treat us like beggars by giving us half a county like before, that would just be giving charity.¡± Su Xuange also nodded and said, ¡°That¡¯s right. This time, with the three of us, if they don¡¯t give each of us a county, the court shouldn¡¯t expect any peace.¡± Lu Yuan laughed, ¡°Let¡¯s just wait and see.¡± And so, amid the laughter and conversation about the court, the curtains on the session came to a close. Lu Yuan was waiting for the court¡¯s appeasement. But in the meantime, he wasn¡¯t just sitting idly by. First, he sent 10,000 soldiers under his command, led by his disciple Zhang You, to Luyang Prefecture to deter and intimidate Yuzhang Prefecture. Then, he left 20,000 men to have his disciple Chu Wei guard Wuling Prefecture, guarding against the Zhou people and the court¡¯s navy from the north. At the same time, he sent some of his troops to take over the western parts of Yueyang Prefecture, such as Anxiang and Shiyang, and build a defensive line along the Linjiang River. After that, he left another 20,000 soldiers, ordering his disciple Han Shun to guard the three southern prefectures. He also sent 10,000 soldiers under his disciple Li Liang to occupy Hengyang Prefecture, officially taking control of this Prefecture under the court¡¯s rule. Later, Lu Yuan personally led 40,000 soldiers, as well as 60,000 Miao defectors, along with his disciples Zhou Qing, Yan Wangqiu, Su Xuange, Lan Zhaoyun and his daughter, and with a total force of 100,000, they advanced to Changsha Prefecture. In the meantime, hearing the news, Shangguan Ming immediately led his 30,000 soldiers surrounding Yiyang County of Changsha Prefecture to withdraw to Baling County overnight, not daring to face Lu Yuan at all. On Lu Yuan¡¯s side, he continued to besiege Yiyang County, surrounding the 8,000 remaining soldiers of Li Yanjing in the city. While surrounding these Zhou soldiers, Lu Yuan also began to send troops to take over the various counties of Changsha Prefecture. He later sent Zhou Qing with 10,000 soldiers and 20,000 Miao soldiers to occupy several counties to the north, taking control of the southern part of Yueyang Prefecture and establishing a northern barrier for Changsha Prefecture. In a series of such actions, the entire Dongting and Jiangnan regions, except for Baling County in the Prefecture and the counties of Linxiang and Huarong around the county, fell under Lu Yuan¡¯s control. With these series of big moves, Shangguan Ming could only rely on the Yangtze navy with his 40,000 soldiers, barely maintaining a foothold like the Marquis of Wu¡¯an, Bai Mengyang, cramped between the Yangtze River and the city. The situation in Dongting, Jiangnan changed dramatically overnight. Originally belonging to the court, the Southern Conquering General and the Marquis of Luyang, now led an army of more than 100,000 people and confronted the court across the Yangtze River and the Dongting Lake. Although both sides had not yet torn their faces, and Lu Yuan was still using the court¡¯s banner, almost anyone with some insight could see that the wind and the situation had changed. But this was not the end. After taking control of Dongting and Jiangnan, in order to further pressure the court, Lu Yuan finally began the selection of officials that he had previously been dragging his feet. This time, the scope of his selection expanded to the nine prefectures of Dongting, Jiangnan. He issued a public announcement for the examination of all scholars and juren. This blatant imperial examination, with its naked bid to win over people, virtually revealed Lu Yuan¡¯s intentions to the world without any concealment. Naturally, there was an uproar within the Dongting jurisdiction. Even not only in Dongting but also upon hearing of Lu Yuan¡¯s actions, the kingdoms of Zhou and Liang in the north of the river, and the various prefectures of Yue in the south of the river, were all shocked and astonished. However, after the shock, especially in the Zhou Kingdom, they immediately sent emissaries to communicate with Lu Yuan. They wanted to join forces with the suddenly rebellious Southern Conquering General and strike at the Yue Kingdom from both the north and the south, completely breaking through the Yangtze waterway to let the hundreds of thousands of troops in the north cross the river. On the court¡¯s side, they couldn¡¯t sit still any longer after Lu Yuan¡¯s series of actions. On the 14th day of the 4th month of the 7th year of Hongdao, a small boat came from the east, crossing the Yangtze River and Dongting Lake, and arrived at Yiyang County where Lu Yuan was stationed. Outside the Yiyang County military camp, Lu Yuan opened the camp gate wide and led Su Xuange and others to greet the envoy from the court. Upon meeting, this envoy looked up and down at Lu Yuan, and then looked at Su Xuange, Yan Wangqiu, and Lan Cai Er behind him. After a long time, he finally withdrew his gaze and said with mixed feelings, ¡°General Lu, it¡¯s been more than a year since we last met, and your demeanor is even better than before.¡± Lu Yuan looked directly into the envoy¡¯s eyes, calm and composed, smiling faintly, ¡°General Yang, you too. It¡¯s been more than a year since we last met, and you¡¯ve been promoted from the court¡¯s Taichang Temple Minister to the Northern Conquering General and Martial Proclamation Marquis. Now you¡¯re even commanding a 100,000-strong army, deterring the northern invaders, making a resounding reputation, and shaking the world.¡± Upon hearing this, Yang Jing¡¯s expression turned cold, and he said in an unfriendly tone, ¡°If it weren¡¯t for General Lu¡¯s actions today, then this time I might have truly deterred the northern invaders, recaptured lost territory, and made a resounding contribution to shaking the world during trip with these troops. But at present, General Lu has deployed hundreds of thousands of soldiers in Jiangnan. My mere 100,000 troops have been overwhelmed by General Lu¡¯s prestige and can only stop at Xunyang, not daring to advance any further. General Lu, what great power, courage, and ability you have!¡± With three consecutive bursts of praise, Yang Jing¡¯s anger and dissatisfaction in his heart were fully displayed. Chapter 382 - Chapter 382: Chapter 206: The Aristocratic Families’ Submission Chapter 382: Chapter 206: The Aristocratic Families¡¯ Submission Translator: 549690339 Yang Jing had every reason to be angry. After all, he came across Lu Yuan, a man of great potential, at the Inescapable Meeting. Out of goodwill, he brought him into his plan and actively recommended him to the court, ultimately including him in the list of potential candidates. This should have been beneficial for everyone. The court could gain an Inborn Grandmaster, and Lu Yuan would have more prospects for his future. It was a win-win situation. However, who would have thought that Lu Yuan, who seemed loyal and sincere, would become an Inborn Grandmaster, with just a little bit of maturity. Instead of serving the court, he was the first to rise in rebellion. Now, Lu Yuan commands hundreds of thousands of soldiers, occupying the land of Dongting Prefecture in Jiangnan. He confronts the court across the river, terrifying the Western Expeditionary Army into immobility at Xunyang. Tell me, who wouldn¡¯t feel angry in such a situation? At this moment, Yang Jing remembered how, over the past two months, the officials and aristocratic families from the court incessantly sent him accusatory letters, asking what went wrong? On the way here, he was chastised by Shangguan Ming for his selections of the top ten Grandmasters. Those accusatory words, the countless letters, and the imperial orders were like knives constantly scraping at his heart¡­ Scraping away his pride, his confidence, and his self-esteem. Therefore, when the court summoned him, the instigator, to resolve this predicament, he was already full of anger when he met Lu Yuan for the first time. However, when Lu Yuan heard this, he remained indifferent. He simply responded, ¡°I am merely answering the call of the court to restore peace in the military. Since I was appointed as the South Conquering General two years ago, I have defeated a hundred thousand enemy troops, suppressing the rebellions in Yuzhang and three other states, and subduing the Miao rebellion in Wuling.¡± Ever since the fourth year of Hongdao, I have been delaying this for years, causing havoc all over the prefecture. The rebel Miao, who had gathered hundreds of thousands, creating chaos over four years, were quelled under my command.¡± Such great achievements are indeed due to my military prowess.¡± As the above statement indicates, Lu Yuan did not feel the slightest shame over his service to the court. If Lu Yuan had not decisively suppressed the tens of thousands of Miao rebels in Shaoyang Prefecture during the initial rebellion, Shaoyang Prefecture would not have been held. Had the Five Poison Sect revolted at that moment, the five prefectures, both north and south, would have been united. By that time, hundreds of thousands of Miao soldiers would have been able to flow unimpeded, marching eastwards, invading Changsha, Hengyang, and Luyang. If those prefectures were lost, Dongting Prefecture would have inevitably fallen as well. At that point, with hundreds of thousands of Miao soldiers occupying eight prefectures, and with granaries like Changsha and Hengyang, they would be able to support an army of three or four hundred thousand. How could their momentum be the same as before? It couldn¡¯t be¡­ at that point, the court might not only have been unable to defend the prefecture, but Southsea and Yuzhang would also be ravaged by the Miao soldiers. If the Miao really succeeded, not to mention the court¡¯s standoff with the Zhou People across the river, even the Altars of Soil and Grain could have collapsed. Hence, Lu Yuan raising troops to sever the Miao rebels¡¯ north-south connection in Shaoyang Prefecture and preventing their massive armies from merging was truly a great service to the court and Dongting Prefecture. Following the rebellion of the Seven Star Sect, it¡¯s highly likely that without Lu Yuan, the court wouldn¡¯t have been able to protect Hengyang and Changsha. And without these two prefectures¡¯ supply, Bai Mengyang¡¯s Army of Pacifying Shu probably would have been defeated sooner. Then, Shangguan Ming would have had to transport food supplies from hundreds of miles away in Yuzhang Prefecture, at great cost. Within Dongting Prefecture, another rebel force of tens of thousands spanning three prefectures would have risen. By that time, it would be a question of whether the court could even defend the Yangtze Defense Line. Lu Yuan crushing the rebellion of the Seven Star Sect was another great service in restructuring national fortunes. Let¡¯s talk about the recent situation, specifically, the desperate battle against the north-south Miao forces last year. At that moment, Lan Zhaoyun led sixty thousand Miao soldiers, merging with Li Yanjing¡¯s forty thousand Zhou soldiers, directly confronting Yang Jing with a force of a hundred thousand at the Yang Mansion. At that time, with the Miao People¡¯s assistance, Zhou People¡¯s army flourished. Even though the court¡¯s river navy blocked the Yangtze River, they still found opportunities to transport troops and supplies from the northern side of the river from time to time. If the situation had been prolonged, I¡¯m afraid that by now, the Zhou army in Jiangnan would have already exceeded a hundred thousand. This is precisely why Shangguan Ming constantly urged Lu Yuan to dispatch his troops, to help him lighten the pressure and dislodge the Zhou People. Hence the subsequent meritorious act of mobilizing two hundred thousand men by Lu Yuan, pacifying the three rebel prefectures in the south, stabilizing Wuling in the north, receiving the surrender of the Miao People, and the marriage alliance with the Five Poisons. This incident was once again Lu Yuan rescuing the court from collapse. Adding up these three incidents, three times he saved the country from peril. How could anyone deny the greatness of Lu Yuan¡¯s achievements and his prestige? Thus, in regards to the court, Lu Yuan could confidently say that he bears no debt whatsoever. After all, apart from the secret tips to breakthrough to Innate that Yang Jing had shared with him during the Inescapable Meeting, the court truly offered him nothing else. What about titles and official positions? Yes, the court did confer him the Military General and the South Conquering General titles. But every one of these ranks and honors were only awarded by the court after Lu Yuan had distinguished himself with his exceptional contributions. In other words, all these were achieved through his battles, with the blood of his enemies, and countless victories. Even if the court did not offer these titles and honors, with his soldiers and weaponry, Lu Yuan could have still achieved his current success. The only difference would have been that, if that were the case, the court would have been left with even more embarrassment than they face now. Therefore, given his many contributions and the lack of any debt to the court, it could even be said that it¡¯s the court that owes him. Chapter 383 - Chapter 383: Chapter 206: Aristocratic Families Submit _2 Chapter 383: Chapter 206: Aristocratic Families Submit _2 Translator: 549690339 So now, if Lu Yuan feels that the rewards given by the court are not enough and wants a little more, what¡¯s there to be ashamed of? After all, without him, the court would not only fail to protect the current eight prefectures, but it would also be a question of whether it would even exist. With such great merit, is it too much to ask the court for a small Dongting County? No, it is not excessive. On the contrary, it is the court that, when faced with such a great contributor and a vassal with hundreds of thousands of troops, offers only half a county as a reward. Is this how they treat a beggar? Yang Jing has dissatisfaction in his heart, and Lu Yuan has even more dissatisfaction! So after responding to a sentence from above, seeing that Yang Jing seemed to want to say something back, he immediately said: ¡°General Yang, is your purpose in coming here to quarrel with me on behalf of the court? If so, then I have important matters to attend to and cannot entertain you. Please go back on your own and report to the court. If not, then restrain your temper. This is Dongting County, not Linhai County, not Jinling City, and no one will tolerate the temper of your court aristocratic families.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s decisive and unfeeling words immediately choked Yang Jing, who had wanted to vent his anger through their friendship: ¡°You¡­¡± Realistically speaking, what kind of friendship does Lu Yuan have with him? Back at the Inescapable Meeting, it was nothing more than a naked transaction. The court gives a title of one of the top ten Grandmasters, and Lu Yuan provides assistance with his power of Inborn for the reward of half a county. As for the secret of Breaking through Innate, even without the help Yang Jing provided, Lu Yuan¡¯s accumulation would have been sufficient, at most two or three months slower, not a significant favor. Moreover, to be honest, half a county in exchange for the combat power of an Inborn Grandmaster is not considered unreasonable. This is also the reason why Grandmasters Jihui, Yan Wangqiu, and their generation agreed to the court¡¯s terms. But in addition to Lu Yuan¡¯s Innate combat power, he has under his command a hundred thousand soldiers, two hundred thousand militia, and six fiefdoms! According to the ¡°Decree on Local Self-Recruitment of Militias to Resist Bandits¡± issued by the court, all these territories belong to those who reclaim lost lands and can be ruled by them. Legally, they already belong to Lu Yuan. Now that he is asked to give up the territories he already possesses, and move to the desolate Nine River Sword Sect, where birds don¡¯t even defecate, and still desperately help the court repel the Zhou invaders, only then can he get half a county. You tell me, who can accept such a thing? Others may not agree, but Lu Yuan will not. So, the current situation is to unite the Nanhai Sect and the Nine River Sword Sect, and put pressure on the court together. Having analyzed all these points, Yang Jing¡¯s desire to talk about favors with Lu Yuan was purely wishful thinking. So when he realized this, although he was still in a hurry, he could only say, ¡°So, what do you want? To directly turn against the court? Don¡¯t you even want to talk to the court?¡± Seeing that his tone had softened, Lu Yuan finally relaxed his expression and looked towards the left and right: ¡°This is not a place for conversation. Let¡¯s go into the camp first.¡± Having said that, he led Yang Jing, along with several imperial deputy envoys, into the main tent to discuss business. Upon arriving at the tent, the personal guards served good tea and went out with a knowing look. Then, following Lu Yuan¡¯s previous instructions, they immediately blocked off the area around the tent for ten meters, declaring it off-limits and allowing no one to approach. Inside the camp, there were only four Inborn Grandmasters, Lu Yuan and the others, as well as Yang Jing and the two deputy envoys from the court. Everyone took their seats and sipped their tea heavily, feeling emotionally settled as Lu Yuan finally said: ¡°This time, Brother Yan, Brother Su, and I ask for three counties to establish our fiefdoms. We have chosen Dongting, Southsea, and Yulin.¡± Having thought about it, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t mention any twists and turns, and directly stated his own conditions. ¡°This is impossible!¡± Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s conditions, the anger that Yang Jing had just suppressed suddenly flared up again, and he slammed the table with his hand: ¡°The court now has only eight prefectures. How dare you ask for three of them all at once? The court can at most give you half a county per person, and nothing beyond that is possible.¡± For the court, if they give Lu Yuan and the others a county each, what will the White Phoenix Temple and Guanhai Villa think when they hear about this? Wouldn¡¯t they also want one county per family? If it really comes to that, the court would have to give out five counties all at once, leaving only three in their hands. And if that happens, would Da Yue, with just three counties left, still be called Da Yue? So, from Yang Jing¡¯s point of view, the demands of Lu Yuan and the others are simply delusional and unreasonable. ¡°I now hold a whole county, and the court wants to give me half a county, do they want to take away half a county from me?¡± Seeing Yang Jing¡¯s reaction, Lu Yuan was also quite angry and said: ¡°If that¡¯s the case, then fine, let the court give me half a county of Yuzhang. I will only ask for half a county, and have no complaints.¡± Considering the wealth of Yuzhang Prefecture, even half a county would be richer in population and finances than the whole of Dongting. So if the court were willing to give up this half-county as an exchange, Lu Yuan could accept it. But can the court? Yang Jing immediately shook his head: ¡°Yuzhang is close to the Capital, and it is the gateway to the Capital. It cannot be given to someone else. General Lu, please stop with the wishful thinking.¡± Chapter 384 - Chapter 384: Chapter 206: Aristocratic Families Submit _3 Chapter 384: Chapter 206: Aristocratic Families Submit _3 Translator: 549690339 Lu Yuan sneered, ¡°If this isn¡¯t allowed, and that isn¡¯t allowed, then what can the court offer?¡± Yang Jing said, ¡°South Sea Prefecture is rich and prosperous. If the general is willing to accept soldiers, the court can give half of the South Sea Prefecture as your fiefdom.¡± Upon hearing this, Yan Wangqiu¡¯s face changed abruptly, and he subconsciously glanced at Lu Yuan, fearing that his ally might be tempted. Fortunately, this was just an unnecessary worry. Lu Yuan laughed at the condition. How could the court still want to use such divisive tactics at this time? And did they think that just half of the South Sea Prefecture could satisfy his appetite? Thinking of this manipulation, Lu Yuan sneered, ¡°If that¡¯s the case, then there¡¯s nothing to talk about. Let¡¯s array our troops and fight a battle against each other. I have raised an army of 300,000 in Dongting Prefecture, and I am eager to fight someone. With one order in South Sea Prefecture, Nanhai Sect can gather 300,000 people. In a short time, the entire South Sea Prefecture can be taken. In Jianan Prefecture, Nine River Sword Sect can also gather 200,000 people. With one lift of the banner, Jianan can change hands. My three families form an alliance, four Inborn Grandmasters, and 800,000 sharp knights. If the court is confident that they can defeat us, then send troops to fight. I really want to see. By then, I¡¯ll either get what I want and establish a new state with one prefecture, or even occupy two or three more prefectures. Or the court will suppress us and restore prosperity once again.¡± At this point, Lu Yuan stood up, pressing his hand on the hilt of his waist, and looked unkindly at Yang Jing. Upon seeing his movement, Yan Wangqiu and others on his side also stood up one by one, staring at Yang Jing and his party without dispersing their eyes. It seemed as if they were unwilling to agree, and they planned to leave several people in the camp today. If a falling out with the court really happened, it would be beneficial to first eliminate one of their Inborn Grandmasters today to significantly weaken the court¡¯s strength. Thinking of this, Yan Wangqiu¡¯s people were itching for a fight. Previously, the Old Lord had been played by Yang Jing¡¯s divisive strategy, and he already held some grudges against him. He genuinely wanted to defeat him. Even if they didn¡¯t kill him, they could still teach him a lesson. Being stared at like this by the four Inborn Grandmasters, even Yang Jing couldn¡¯t help but feel his hair on end, raising alarm bells. If he felt this way, let alone the two deputy envoys who hadn¡¯t reached the Inborn stage. At this point, they were frightened and pale, trembling with fear. If it wasn¡¯t for their strong willpower, they might have collapsed to the ground. ¡°Do you really want to rebel?¡± Although Yang Jing was also slightly afraid, he still braced himself to scold loudly, trying to display the court¡¯s authority. However, clearly, there was no authority to speak of in the current scenario. After his scolding, all he received was mockery in the eyes of the four people opposite him. Seeing this, Yang Jing¡¯s face alternated between red, white, and green, eventually turning bitter. He conceded, ¡°There¡¯s no need to be like this. We can talk it out. I came here to discuss terms with you, not to go this far.¡± Lu Yuan sneered, not buying it, ¡°In the world of martial artists, we¡¯ve always settled matters with strength. Talking too much is useless. Brother Yang, we¡¯ve known each other for quite some time. Just be straightforward. I¡¯ll just ask you: can the court fight and suppress us with our four Inborn Grandmasters and 800,000 strong troops?¡± Being pressed for an answer so mercilessly, Yang Jing¡¯s face became even more difficult to look at, but facing Lu Yuan¡¯s insistence, he could only nod, ¡°With the current situation of the court, we can¡¯t suppress you.¡± ¡°Good!¡± Seeing that the other party wasn¡¯t playing tricks, Lu Yuan shouted and nodded. He continued, ¡°We will raise troops in three prefectures. I will lead my troops north and east, attacking the Yangtze River and advancing to Yuzhang. Brother Yan will lead his troops west and south, attacking Yulin and Jiuzhen. Brother Su will command his troops to the north and invade Linhai. I just ask you, can the court withstand our onslaught?¡± Upon hearing these words, Yang Jing¡¯s face changed drastically, exclaimed in horror, ¡°You dare to do this?¡± If they followed Lu Yuan¡¯s strategy, the court would most likely collapse, not to mention maintaining its current state. The Da Yue empire would be on the verge of collapse in an instant. Lu Yuan coldly said, ¡°If the court isn¡¯t willing to compromise, do you think I wouldn¡¯t dare? Enough with that. Can the court withstand it or not?¡± Seeing his serious attitude, Yang Jing finally realized that they were serious. As his heart tightened, he could only close his eyes in despair and reluctantly say, ¡°We can¡¯t withstand it.¡± ¡°Good.¡± Lu Yuan said it again, then nodded in satisfaction, ¡°As Brother Yang said, if we really do this, there¡¯s no need to mention just three prefectures ¨C we can even take down six or seven prefectures. By that time, what the court has to give won¡¯t be just three prefectures; it will be the entire territory of Da Yue.¡± By agreeing to our terms, the Coastal Aristocratic Family can at least keep the four prefectures of Jiangdong. With a foundation, the court can maintain a degree of dignity even if they are in a desperate situation. But if the court doesn¡¯t agree, not only will Da Yue be on the verge of collapse, but your Coastal Aristocratic Family can¡¯t even save your millennia-old family business.¡± With each sentence, Lu Yuan¡¯s words became sharp knives, slowly uncovering the last line of defense in Yang Jing¡¯s heart. Seeing the increasingly pale face of the other side, he delivered the final blow. ¡°I don¡¯t mind telling Brother Yang this. During this time, the northern Zhou Country has been constantly sending people to contact us. Their conditions are much more generous than the court¡¯s. Not only have they promised me two prefectures, but they have also agreed to everything that Brother Yan and Brother Su asked for. If the court insists on making things difficult for us, Don¡¯t blame us for opening the Yangtze River, Inviting 300,000 Zhou soldiers across the river. By then, how the court will end up and how you six families and seven clans will fare, I think you should know better.¡± Lu Yuan reminded them seemingly kindly. The words broke Yang Jing¡¯s last psychological defense. ¡°No, absolutely not,¡± Yang Jing was well aware of the outcome for the court and their six families and seven clans once the Zhou soldiers crossed the river. It was likely that when the Zhou soldiers arrived, the entire Coastal Aristocratic Family would have been slaughtered. Thinking of this, Yang Jing seemed to see the bloody scene before his eyes. His eyes reddened, ¡°We can talk things out. Don¡¯t let the Zhou soldiers cross the river. What you ask for isn¡¯t up to me alone to decide. I will report to the court, and a satisfactory answer will be given to you.¡± The new Martial Proclamation Marquis finally bowed his proud head and compromised. Chapter 385 - Chapter 385: Chapter 207: Agonizing Wait Chapter 385: Chapter 207: Agonizing Wait Translator: 549690339 ¡°Brother Yang, that¡¯s the attitude for discussing matters.¡± Looking at Yang Jing¡¯s slightly lowered head, a smile finally appeared on Lu Yuan¡¯s face. He said with satisfaction, ¡°Brother Yang, rest assured. If the court can truly meet our demands, then not to mention letting Zhou¡¯s army cross the river. Our three families can dispatch troops and help the court repel Zhou¡¯s army, even to help retake Xichuan County without any problem. In this way, doesn¡¯t the court also gain an extra piece of territory, which can be used to reward the meritorious officials?¡± Seeing Yang Jing yielding, Lu Yuan also changed his previous tough attitude and started tempting with gentleness. If Xichuan County can be captured, the court will regain control of nine counties. By then, with these three families taking three counties, the court will still have six counties left. Whether these six territories are still given half a county to Guanhai Villa and White Phoenix Temple, or one county to each of them, it will be the court¡¯s matter. But no matter which choice the court makes, the core four counties of Guangling, Linhai, Yuzhang, and Jianan can always be preserved. With these four core territories, the court¡¯s basic foundation remains. In ten or twenty years, it can easily raise an army of fifty to sixty thousand. With such a large army, as long as the situation changes, there is still a chance for the court to recover the relinquished territories. This gives the court a hope to rise again, leaving behind enough temptation. As for whether this temptation can come true, it depends on who has the better skills in the end. At this moment, Lu Yuan just wanted to secure the three territories in his hands first. To seize the immediate benefits. Sure enough, hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s words, Yang Jing¡¯s expression looked a lot better. Although it was still unpleasant, it was not as lifeless as before. He took a few deep breaths, slightly calming his emotions, and then said, ¡°I will convey your demands to the court truthfully. Whether they can agree to it depends on the discussions among the officials in the court. An answer can only be given after they finish discussing. This will require time. So before giving an answer¡­ ¡± Yang Jing stopped here, looked at Lu Yuan, and said earnestly, ¡°The uprisings of the Nanhai Sect and Nine River Sword Sect, as well as your plan to open up the Yangtze River, must not be carried out.¡± The Martial Proclamation Marquis was really afraid that what Lu Yuan just said would become reality. If that were the case, even if there were real negotiations, it would be a devastating blow and loss for the court that would be difficult to reverse. Thus, this must not happen. At this point, Yang Jing had no choice but to repeatedly urge. Lu Yuan nodded and said, ¡°Of course, we can understand the difficulties of the court. However, there must be a deadline for negotiation. We cannot wait indefinitely. Let¡¯s wait for a month. From Dongting County, along the Yangtze River all the way south, it takes ten days to reach Jinling City. It will be a bit slower on the way back, but fifteen days should be enough. We give the court five days to discuss, and in these five days, the officials and the emperor can discuss and make a decision, right?¡± Both sides have now broken the fa?ade, and if they continue to be aggressive, they will have to resort to war. Most importantly, Lu Yuan has already revealed his hidden cards. So in order to prevent the court from reacting in time, he had to shorten the time for both sides to negotiate and prepare. A month¡¯s time is just enough for the news to reach the court, but not enough for the other party to make countermeasures. This is a safe time both sides can accept. Going beyond this time frame, the court will have preparations in place, and it won¡¯t be so easy for Lu Yuan to instigate an uprising. Within this time frame, the court will not have time to make arrangements, so even if they are alert, the uprising here will still be effective. Yang Jing knew this too, but he also understood that this should be the bottom line for the other party, and there wouldn¡¯t be room for negotiation. So, in the end, he could only say with a difficult expression, ¡°Fine. There will be a response within a month.¡± Hearing these words, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but laugh, ¡°Since that¡¯s the case, let¡¯s settle on this. Brother Yang, we have prepared a feast in the camp, specially for the envoy. Come, let¡¯s have a drink together since the matter is settled!¡± As he said this, Lu Yuan tried to pull Yang Jing. However, the Martial Proclamation Marquis directly side-stepped and said with a bow, ¡°No need. I have other urgent matters to attend to. The timeGeneral has given is also pressing, so I won¡¯t be attending this feast. I will take my leave now.¡± Yang Jing bowed his hands, then turned around and left directly. Seeing this, the other two vice envoys hurriedly followed him. Lu Yuan watched this scene, just smiled, and then stepped forward to send the guests out of the camp. He accompanied Yang Jing all the way out of the barracks, and then returned to the camp. On the way back, he said to his disciple Zhou Qing who came up to him, ¡°Disperse the prepared troops in the camp. This negotiation went smoothly, and there is no need for bloodshed.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Zhou Qing obeyed immediately and went on his way. Lu Yuan was prepared for both a feast and an execution during this meeting with the envoy. It was all for the sake of being able to strike hard if things didn¡¯t work out. Luckily, now that the matter had been settled, these arrangements proved unnecessary, and a bloody disaster was averted. While Zhou Qing went to disperse the troops, Lu Yuan turned to Yan Wangqiu and others nearby, ¡°Now that the matter is settled, since the envoy refuses to join our celebrations, let us enjoy the music and dance ourselves. Don¡¯t waste the well-prepared feast; use it as a semi-victory celebration.¡± ¡°Very good!¡± Yan Wangqiu and the others laughed happily when they heard the words, agreeing. Just a moment ago, the meeting was full of heated exchanges and invisible sword play, and now, their side had emerged victorious. It was indeed worth celebrating. Chapter 386 - Chapter 386: Chapter 207: Agonizing Wait _2 Chapter 386: Chapter 207: Agonizing Wait _2 Translator: 549690339 However, on the way to the banquet, Yan Wangqiu still couldn¡¯t help but ask with some uneasiness, ¡°Brother Lu, will the court agree to our terms?¡± Although Yang Jing had just surrendered, his surrender could only represent the attitude of one of the six surnames and seven families, the Yang Family. As for the remaining twelve aristocratic families, would they agree to compromise? It was still uncertain. Lu Yuan gave his ally a reassuring look and confidently smiled, ¡°Don¡¯t worry. We¡¯ve prepared so well this time that the court has no choice but to compromise. Unless they really want to see Zhou soldiers cross the river and for both sides to suffer. Otherwise, they must agree to our demands.¡± In fact, their greatest reliance in pressuring the court this time was not the alliance of the three families. Instead, it was the three hundred thousand Zhou soldiers who were being stopped by the court¡¯s navy from crossing the river to the north. If it weren¡¯t for these Zhou soldiers stationed in the north, coveting the territory of Yue Country, Even if the alliance of three families could raise eight hundred thousand rebels, it would have only been another rebellion war for the Yue State court. With the strength of the court, suppressing Lu Yuan and his allies would not be impossible without outside interference. Even the possibility was quite large. After all, the court still had the moral high ground, nearly three hundred thousand soldiers, seven Inborn Grandmasters, and it was possible that the six surnames and seven families had hidden resources¡­ With so many advantages, it would not be impossible to defeat the eight hundred thousand ragtag army led by Lu Yuan and the others. Unfortunately, Now there are three hundred thousand Zhou soldiers pressing along the court¡¯s northern boundary, and in the south, there is the alliance of three families led by Lu Yuan. The court could actually deal with either side on its own. But when confronted with both sides, it would be a disaster that they could barely handle. So, if Lu Yuan really let the Zhou soldiers cross the river, it would be the end of Da Yue. And once Da Yue is destroyed, with Zhou soldiers crossing the river, the coastal aristocratic families and the six surnames and seven families would be finished as well. The Zhou People would not spare them. The reason is simple. These six surnames and seven families, these millennial aristocratic families have deep roots in Jiangnan, especially in the four counties of Jiangdong. Leaving them in Jiangnan would make it hard for Zhou Country, so far away, to control the newly acquired Jiangnan territory without issues. It is feared that Jiangnan would not be stable for long before these aristocratic families would rise up in rebellion and restore the Jiangnan court. By that time, Zhou Country would be thousands of miles away, and it would take months or even half a year to mobilize troops to suppress the rebellion. When the suppression army arrives, the Jiangnan court would have already been established, and it would all be a done deal. Therefore, in order to avoid this situation, and in order to make their war of annihilation not in vain, exterminating the aristocratic families in Linhai County, and wiping out the six surnames and seven families, would become the only option for Zhou Country. And these rebels, led by Lu Yuan, would also have to eradicate the six surnames and seven families to prevent their enemies from rising again. It is necessary to cut the grass and remove the roots. It was precisely because of these objective conditions that Lu Yuan mentioned letting the Zhou soldiers cross the river earlier, causing Yang Jing¡¯s reaction to be so great that his defenses were instantly shattered. That¡¯s because the Martial Proclamation Marquis knew that if the Zhou soldiers crossed the river and went south, Lu Yuan and the others might not have any problems. After all, it would be impossible for Zhou Country to digest and annex all nine counties of Da Yue at once, so it would be possible to cede a few counties to Lu Yuan and the others as rewards. So, there is a basis for cooperation between Lu Yuan and Zhou Country. But there is no such foundation for cooperation with these coastal aristocratic families. After all, Zhou Country wouldn¡¯t be able to destroy Yue Country and then give these aristocratic families a share of the land to let them establish their own fiefdoms, right? Then my war of annihilation would have been in vain. It is precisely because of this irreconcilable conflict that the coastal aristocratic families and Zhou Country are mortal enemies, with no possibility of reconciliation. ¡°Thus, the court now has only two choices,¡± At the banquet, Lu Yuan analyzed these matters and then looked at everyone with a smile, ¡°Either accept our terms, cede the three prefectures and maintain the rule and family lineage, or turn against us and let the Zhou soldiers cross the river, leading to not only the country¡¯s destruction but also the demise of their families. Tell me, if it were you, how would you choose?¡± Upon hearing this, Su Xuange next to him couldn¡¯t help but take a long drink and laughed heartily, ¡°Naturally, I would choose to compromise and survive.¡± Yan Wangqiu also felt relieved and nodded, ¡°Indeed! Indeed! Giving out three prefectures is better than losing eight. At least the country doesn¡¯t have to be ruined, and the family doesn¡¯t have to be destroyed.¡± The others also smiled. Seeing the joyful atmosphere filling the room, Lu Yuan raised his cup and said, ¡°Then let us wait here for the court¡¯s decision in one month, and then each of us will establish our own countries and stand alone. Come, let¡¯s drink this cup to the full.¡± ¡°Drink up!¡± Everyone stood up and raised their cups, drinking the wine. After negotiating with the court envoy, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t make any major moves. Except for continuing to lead his troops to besiege Yiyang City, the busiest thing he was dealing with was the ongoing selection of officials. Due to previous political considerations, the southern three prefectures had been subdued for a year, but they were still lacking a large number of lower-level officials. Wuling Prefecture, on the other hand, was even still under military control, with no local government administration. As for the newly acquired Hengyang, Changsha, and Yueyang prefectures, many officials chose to leave and not serve under Lu Yuan after he openly declared his intentions against the court, leaving many positions empty. Chapter 387 - Chapter 387: Chapter 207: Agonizing Wait _3 Chapter 387: Chapter 207: Agonizing Wait _3 Translator: 549690339 As a result, there were hundreds more vacant official positions. Lu Yuan¡¯s control of the entire Dongting Prefecture and the nine other prefectures in Jiangnan resulted in a staggering number of vacancies, reaching a thousand. It was indeed an insane situation. Moreover, if he were to establish his own governing system in the future, he would need at least three to five hundred central officials for even a small nation of one prefecture size. With these vacancies, the shortage of officials became even more severe. By now, holding the imperial examination to select qualified officials was a step Lu Yuan had to take. It had become a necessity. If he wanted to maintain his rule in Dongting Prefecture and establish his own nation, he would need so many officials to support him. Regarding this, Sun Siwen had repeatedly written letters in the past half-year, urging Lu Yuan to expedite the matter and not delay any further. So now, after laying his cards on the table with the court, Lu Yuan no longer concealed his intentions and immediately issued the selection order, announcing that all scholars of Scholar rank and above from every prefecture and county could go to Shaoyang Prefecture City to participate in the official selection examination. Those who pass the examination will be granted the title of juren under the name of General Jinan, and assigned an official position. It could be said that this was a blatant attempt to win over the people. However, despite Lu Yuan¡¯s efforts to win their hearts, many local scholars in Dongting were apprehensive about him as the rebellious General Jinan. After all, these lower-class scholars did not know that Lu Yuan had the powerful support of the Nanhai Sect and the Nine River Sword Sect as his allies. All they could see was that the imperial court¡¯s Western Expedition Army was stationed in Yuzhang Prefecture, Xunyang City, and was about to enter Dongting Prefecture. Although Lu Yuan had many troops at his disposal, his power was limited to one prefecture. With such limited strength, it seemed very unlikely that he could resist the central government¡¯s large army and the entire Da Yue world. In fact, many people secretly mocked and scorned him, believing that the General Jinan was seeking his own death by rebelling against the court at this time. They believed that he was a typical short-sighted warlord who only saw profits and had no vision for the future. At present, in the eyes of those scholars in Dongting Prefecture, Lu Yuan¡¯s reputation was more or less like this. Of course, in the long-established Shaoyang Prefecture, although many people were also worried and puzzled about his rebellion against the court, many local scholars had already formed ties with Lu Yuan, and he had bestowed his grace upon them for a long time. As a result, in this area, Lu Yuan¡¯s reputation among scholars was still acceptable. However, even so, very few people responded to his official selection examination in Shaoyang Prefecture. Among those scholars, the prestige of the Da Yue court remained strong. After all, the court had supported the scholars for hundreds of years, and the prestige of the Jinling Orthodox was very attractive to scholars. When Lu Yuan finally received the report on the number of Scholars participating in the examination, he learned that only a little over a hundred people had gone to Shaoyang Prefecture City to take the examination. He couldn¡¯t help but feel frustrated by this result. However, through this, he was able to see just how much enduring influence the Da Yue court still had after more than two hundred years of existence. Forcing the court to compromise now seemed to have its uses. Perhaps only when he had been officially recognized by the court, openly establishing his authority over a prefecture and founding his own nation, would the local scholars and other powerful groups truly recognize the reality of the situation. They would finally see that the times had changed and that the Da Yue court was no longer what it once was and could no longer control the local areas. And only when that time came, would the scholars and powerful figures of Dongting Prefecture truly let go of their illusions about the court and lean towards Lu Yuan, completely winning their loyalty. Only then would he have truly secured his foothold. ¡°For now, let¡¯s just wait a bit longer.¡± Lu Yuan instructed the Shaoyang Prefecture to proceed with the official selection examination regardless of the number of participants who signed up for the examination. But the strictness of the examination could be slightly relaxed to ensure that there would still be a decent number of qualified candidates. At this moment, those scholars who were still willing to join Lu Yuan were either truly loyal to him or seeking wealth and honor. No matter which category they fell into, Lu Yuan had to offer them benefits to win them over, as a demonstration of his commitment to them. Of course. He wasn¡¯t going to take just anyone, even though he was buying people¡¯s hearts. So although the difficulty of the examination was lowered, the basic standards still had to be upheld. After all, selecting an incompetent person who couldn¡¯t even do the job of an official would only cause more trouble for himself, wouldn¡¯t it? Thus, the official selection examination ended quietly on the 30th day of the fourth month in the seventh year of Hongdao. Meanwhile, Lu Yuan was busy winning people¡¯s hearts. Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange had not been idle either, returning to Jianan Prefecture and Southsea Prefecture according to their previous agreement to prepare for the uprising. The three of them had agreed that if a satisfactory answer from the court had not been received within a month, Lu Yuan would immediately send word to the other two. The two of them would then raise their armies in Southsea Prefecture and Jianan Prefecture. They would march north and south according to their previously planned strategy and wage war against the court. Both of them had been preparing for several months, so it wouldn¡¯t be difficult for them to raise their armies at this point. If the court insisted on being stubborn, they would show them what they were capable of. However, deep in their hearts, all three of them hoped that it would not come to that. After all, they were people of Jiangnan and would never truly align themselves with the Zhou people from the North. Moreover, without the court acting as a buffer, even if they were temporarily appeased by Zhou, allowing them to establish their own nations, once the Zhou had assimilated the land of Jiangnan, their next target would inevitably be their newly established Three Nations. When that time came, Lu Yuan and the others would face a Zhou that was even more powerful than Yue. Nobody wanted to see that happen. They just hoped that the court wouldn¡¯t force them to take that step. In their respective territories, Dongting, Southsea, and Jianan, the three allies who were thousands of miles apart occasionally gazed at the heavens and the earth, the mountains, and the rivers, and couldn¡¯t help but think of this. And then, it was time for the agonizing wait. Chapter 388 - Chapter 388: Chapter 208: Jinling Aristocratic Families Chapter 388: Chapter 208: Jinling Aristocratic Families Translator: 549690339 However, when Yang Jing left Lu Yuan¡¯s main camp, he headed straight for Dongting County City. Once in the city, he quickly found Shangguan Ming. Then he told this Western Conqueror General about the conditions put forth by Lu Yuan. As expected, Shangguan Ming, like Yang Jing in the beginning, was filled with uncontrollable anger. ¡°Who does he think he is? Nothing more than a mere hunter from the mountains. If it weren¡¯t for the court¡¯s favor and promotion, how could he possibly have reached his current position of power? Now that he has achieved some success, he has begun to harbor traitorous thoughts and bite the hand that feeds him. Indeed, such lowly people have no integrity or loyalty. He should never have been promoted in the first place, which has led to his current arrogance. Previously, I even considered marrying my daughter to him. Fortunately, that plan never came to fruition. Otherwise, wouldn¡¯t my daughter have suffered needlessly?¡± At this moment, Shangguan Ming had completely lost his previous admiration for Lu Yuan. In the hall where they discussed matters, he paced back and forth, cursing without cease. It is clear how difficult it is for him to accept the conditions put forth by Lu Yuan. Yang Jing, who was standing beside him, listened to his old friend¡¯s tirade and waited for a short while after the other party silenced. Then he said with a forced smile, ¡°Indeed, Lu Yuan is truly unscrupulous, but now that his power has been established, what can we do about it?¡± Hearing this, Shangguan Ming¡¯s anger flared up again. He looked at Yang Jing and accused, ¡°It was because of you that Lu Yuan was brought into the ranks of the ten Grandmasters. If not for this, how could he be so arrogant today?¡± From Shangguan Ming¡¯s perspective. If Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t been included in the plan of the ten Grandmasters, without Yang Jing¡¯s help, he would naturally not have broken through to the Innate realm so quickly. And not being in this circle, he would naturally have no way of knowing about this plan involving the ten Innate Grandmasters. Thus, he wouldn¡¯t have been able to go from the inside to win over and divide Yan Wangqiu and others. So, a large portion of Lu Yuan¡¯s current influence has to be attributed to Yang Jing and his initial wrong decision. ¡°Indeed, it was my fault.¡± Facing the accusation, Yang Jing accepted responsibility but quickly said, ¡°However, at that time, if you had found someone suitable for the plan who was also a court official, would you have been able to resist from recruiting them? Besides, I remember that at that time, Brother Shangguan, you sent both your children to participate in the contest, hoping to find a promising son-in-law. Did you not? Without that, how could I have introduced Lu Yuan to Grandmaster Ziyun and let him learn the secrets of the Innate realm? And, if it hadn¡¯t been for your niece and nephew, I wouldn¡¯t have been so trusting of him and brought him into the ten Innate Grandmasters. Moreover, this time. If you hadn¡¯t sent Yan Wangqiu to join forces with Lu Yuan, how could that youngster have had the opportunity to buy off that double-crossing old dog and win over Su Xuange, thus resulting in today¡¯s situation? All of this happened right under your watch, step by step. Haven¡¯t you noticed it? I admit my mistake, but do you not have any fault in this, Brother Shangguan?¡± Yang Jing could take the blame, but the loss of the three provinces was too big a responsibility to bear. Even as an Innate Grandmaster and the head of a noble family, he could not afford to shoulder it. So at this moment, he had no choice but to find another person to share the burden of this huge blame. And when looking around, the most suitable person was none other than his brother Shangguan, who once wanted to marry his daughter to Lu Yuan. After all, it was Shangguan Ming who had initially given Lu Yuan the trust of the court. Moreover, Shangguan Ming had the scandal of trying to marry Lu Yuan to his daughter. It was also he who singlehandedly condoned the collaboration between Lu Yuan and Yan Wangqiu. With so many shortcomings, Shangguan Ming could never escape this blame. Sure enough, upon hearing Yang Jing listing these mistakes, Shangguan Ming¡¯s righteous expression instantly collapsed. His face changed several times, and eventually, he sighed in resignation and said, ¡°This boy¡¯s success is partly my fault. But now that things have come to this, what can we do about it?¡± Shangguan Ming was now repeating Yang Jing¡¯s words: ¡°what can we do about it?¡± As the Western Conqueror General stationed in Dongting County, Shangguan Ming fully understood Lu Yuan¡¯s strength. He knew even more than people like Yang Jing. So, Shangguan Ming was the most qualified to comment on how powerful Lu Yuan was. In terms of soldiers, he had one hundred thousand battle-troops, sixty thousand Miao warriors, and an even more vast number of county soldiers and militias that could reach up to two hundred thousand. Moreover, he had five top disciples along with the Miao experts he had gained by subduing the Poison Sect. Add to that his alliance with the Saintess of the Five Poisons, and that¡¯s another two Innate Grandmasters. All of these various powers are enough to cause headaches when taken individually. But when combined, they are enough to drive one to despair. All of this was why Shangguan Ming did not hesitate at all when he heard that Lu Yuan was leading forces to attack Changsha Prefecture. He immediately took his army to flee hundreds of miles away and returned to Yueyang Prefecture City. This was not due to cowardice or fear of the enemy but merely acknowledgment that he was no match for Lu Yuan. At this time, it was best to evacuate the army before the opponent arrived. Otherwise, once surrounded by the enemy and cut off from retreat, the court¡¯s last remaining tens of thousands of troops in Dongting County would likely be lost here. All these were nothing but bitterness and helplessness. Now that Lu Yuan has joined forces with Yan Wangqiu, Su Xuange, and the remnants of the Poison Sect, his power is already hard to suppress. Besides, he is located in Dongting County, and if he is forced to rebel, he can attack the Yangtze River in the north and invite the Zhou People to cross the river, making the situation truly irreparable.¡± Chapter 389 - Chapter 389: Chapter 208: Jinling Aristocratic Families_2 Chapter 389: Chapter 208: Jinling Aristocratic Families_2 Translator: 549690339 Yang Jing¡¯s expression was tinged with grief, his voice bitter and choking with emotion, ¡°As it stands today, for the preservation of our nation, our family heritage, and our lives, we have no choice but to agree to his terms. We have to cede three provinces and hand this land over to him.¡± Upon hearing this, Shangguan Ming was stunned, ¡°These are three provinces¡­¡± Yang Jing looked at him and retorted, ¡°Yes, three provinces. However, if you refuse, are you ready for the ruin of our nation and destruction of our families?¡± Faced with Yang Jing¡¯s gaze, Shangguan Ming lowered his head, falling silent. He understood that between two evils, one must choose the lesser. This was indeed the only option left. Yang Jing continued, ¡°I plan to return to the capital to persuade other families to agree to this. But, I alone cannot accomplish this. So, I need your full support. We need to convince those who are against this, and carry this through.¡± In the Coastal Aristocratic Family, although the status of his Yang family and Shangguan family had been elevated because of their inborn status, other families were still influential. There were still three families with inborn strength within the six surnames and seven clans. Furthermore, some other families without inborn strength were not to be underestimated in their capabilities. These were the people who could converse on equal terms with them. It was uncertain if someone, not recognizing the reality of the situation, would obstruct the cause. So, receiving Shangguan Ming¡¯s support was a necessity. The alliance of the Yang family and the Shangguan family, two clans with inborn status, had to make this happen. Hearing this request, Shangguan Ming¡¯s expression changed quite a bit. But after some considerable thought, he finally nodded and said, ¡°Agreed. I will stand with you, whatever comes.¡± After saying this, Shangguan Ming hesitated, then continued, ¡°Besides me, you should also go to Tianmen Prefecture City, to meet Marquis of Wuan. Brother Bai has been battling the Zhou people for a long time. He is firmly defending our last stronghold north of the Yangtze River. Facing danger firsthand and being on the frontline, he is more aware of the threat of Zhou people than anyone else.¡± Explain the situation to him, Brother Bai understands the overall situation. He will, just like the rest of us, decide to compromise.¡± With his assistance, if we, the three families, join hands, it won¡¯t be difficult to carry out this matter.¡± Marquis of Wuan, Bai Mengyang, suffered a series of defeats in the last few years. But two years prior, he was one of the most famous generals in Da Yue, with the reputation of being a military god. The former Jinghai Country was destroyed by this very Marquis of Wuan. In the wars with the Zhou and Liang people in the past years, Bai Mengyang had performed exceedingly well, defeating strong enemies time and again. The reason for his continuous defeats now was primarily the decline of Da Yue¡¯s national strength and domestic issues that made it impossible to support this military god. What could be done about this? It wasn¡¯t a fault of warfare. So, Bai Mengyang¡¯s prestige in Da Yue and in the Nine Provinces was still extremely high. With his assistance, a large number of the aristocratic families in the capital would likely change their stance and lend their support. Yang Jing was also clear about this. So when he heard the proposal, he immediately responded, ¡°That idea is a good one. I will sail north to meet the Marquis of Wuan.¡± The situation was urgent, time was of the essence. After persuading Shangguan Ming, Yang Jing did not delay. He left the same day and continued his journey by fast boat to Tianmen Prefecture City. The city of Tianmen Prefecture was close to the water, and the Zhou people had not managed to completely encircle it. As Da Yue had an advantage in naval power, it would just be a round trip for him to enter the city to meet the Marquis of Wuan. In less than half a day, Yang Jing crossed the Yangtze River and reached the city north of the river. After entering the city, he explained the situation and expressed his and Shangguan Ming¡¯s opinions, asking for the support of Marquis of Wuan. As expected, just as predicted by Shangguan Ming. Looking out over the river, he stroked the mottled city wall with a long sigh, ¡°Today we have given up Dongting and handed this place over to Lu Yuan. I wonder if I will live to see the day when I can lead soldiers to this city again, to see the royal banner flying over the city.¡± Listening to this, Yang Jing was also secretly disheartened and remained silent. Marquis of Wuan, Bai Mengyang, had been a renowned figure for a hundred years. He was now 130 years old and he seemed to have another twenty years of life left. But given the current declining situation of the court and the daily deterioration of the river, it was really hard to say whether it could recover and rejuvenate in twenty years. If you count the hidden injuries Bai Mengyang had suffered from many years of warfare, whether he could live another twenty years would be a problem. A few years or a decade from now, this Marquis of Wuan who had battled for the court all his life would just fade away and die of illness. The possibility of him leaving the city today, was indeed, as he said, he might never see the day when the royal banner continued to fly here again. The beauty is aging, the hero is getting old, the mountains and rivers are declining. This Da Yue, this world, this is so damn annoying! Looking at the rolling Yangtze River and taking along the seals given by Shangguan Ming and Bai Mengyang, Yang Jing cursed in a boat on his way back to Jinling. Time, like the Yangtze River, continued to surge forward. The early May of the seventh year of Hongdao era. While Lu Yuan had just finished the official selection exam, after several days of traveling, Yang Jing returned to Jinling city with the results of his trip. The Cloud Ascending Leisure Pavilion of the city. Located by the river, it would often be enveloped in river fog that floats from the water in the morning or evening. It bestowed an enchanting aura of levity, as if floating in the clouds. It was why many elegant and aspiring Immortal Method nobles liked to gather and discuss matters here. It gave them a sense of unlimited pleasure, like an immortal person sitting in the clouds and pointing to the world. Chapter 390 - Chapter 390: Chapter 208: Jinling Aristocratic Families_3 Chapter 390: Chapter 208: Jinling Aristocratic Families_3 Translator: 549690339 Today, Yang Jing returned to Jinling City, but he did not directly enter the palace to meet with the emperor and report his initial gains. Instead, he first summoned several people outside the palace to discuss the matter here. In the Jiang Pavilion, Yang Jing looked at the people in front of him and said solemnly: ¡°Lu Yuan is determined. Without granting him the three counties, there is absolutely no possibility of him backing down.¡± Before him were the current Shangshu Ling Huo Tingyu, the Minister of Personnel Tan Fengzhu, Taiwei Meng Nai, Taifu Xie Yu, and Grand General Shen Qiu. The first two were outstanding representatives of the six surnames and seven families, while the latter three were representatives of the Inborn Grandmasters¡¯ families. At this moment, the six people gathered together, and if you count Shangguan Ming and Bai Mengyang behind Yang Jing, it could be said that the whole Da Yue court is represented. If these six people reach a consensus, it will be enough to determine the opinion of the entire court. As for the emperor? The current Xiao Imperial Family has now become a puppet, just waiting to be dethroned and returned to the status of a low-ranking aristocratic family. ¡°What does Lu Yuan think he is, that he dares to make such outrageous claims?¡± ¡°Asking for three counties, is it not truly thinking that the court can do nothing about him?¡± Shangshu Ling Huo Tingyu and Taifu Xie Yu, after hearing Yang Jing¡¯s recount, their faces changed, and they could not help but scold loudly. ¡°We must not compromise.¡± ¡°He claims to have raised an army of 800,000? Let¡¯s fight him over there then. I don¡¯t believe it. With the might of the court and the vast territory, hundreds of thousands of elite soldiers, he can¡¯t resist even a single rebel.¡± At this moment, Taiwei Meng Nai couldn¡¯t help but slap the case and exclaim. Seeing this scene, Yang Jing sighed inwardly. Indeed, he had already foreseen this. These aristocratic representatives before his eyes, who had been living in Jinling City for many years and hardly ever went to the lower counties and prefectures, had lost their true understanding of the current situation in Da Yue. So at this time, they refused to give up their pride and did not want to make concessions, recover losses, or consider using military force to suppress it. But Da Yue, as it is now, could not really withstand much turmoil. If they truly try to suppress the rebellion with all their might, Da Yue might perish even before they manage to suppress the rebellion. ¡°Enough!¡± Fortunately, at this moment, the Grand General Shen Qiu, who was sitting at the top, slammed the table and shouted, ¡°Shut up, all of you!¡± As soon as these words came out, an overwhelming majesty emanated from this grand general. The three people who were scolding earlier were caught by this aura, their expressions changed slightly, and they immediately lowered their heads and stopped talking. Even Yang Jing was slightly uncomfortable, twisting his body to avoid the other¡¯s sharpness and daring not to clash with him. Forcing an Inborn Grandmaster to make way, the current Grand General Shen Qiu is naturally an extraordinary person. He is now the first master of the court, a Second Innate realm grandmaster, and the one who will be pushed out by the Coastal Aristocratic Family to replace the Xiao family in Yue country and establish a new dynasty in the not-too-distant future. Such a person¡¯s words cannot be ignored. All the people present obediently bowed their heads and listened to the grand general¡¯s words. Seeing that everyone had stopped their clamor, Shen Qiu shifted his gaze to Yang Jing and asked: ¡°Nephew Yang, is Lu Yuan really unstoppable?¡± Shen Qiu is an Inborn Grandmaster of the previous generation, just over a hundred years old, which is the prime time for an Inborn Grandmaster. Compared to him, Yang Jing and the others, who were only fifty or sixty years old and had just broken through Innate, were juniors. Facing the questioning of a senior superior, Yang Jing did not dare to neglect and quickly performed a ceremony saying, ¡°Uncle, I have discussed this matter with Wucheng Marquis and Wuan Marquis. The two believed that the situation in Dongting is now beyond saving.¡± ¡°Lu Yuan, Nanhai Sect, and Nine River Sword Sect ¨C these three alliances are now difficult to contain. If we do not agree to their demands, I¡¯m afraid the Altars of Soil and Grain may collapse, the Ancestral Temple may cease to exist, and we will all die without a place to bury ourselves. Therefore, we three think it necessary to accede to Lu Yuan¡¯s request to cede the three counties. In this way, we can stabilize the situation and preserve the Altars of Soil and Grain.¡± Hearing these words, Shen Qiu hesitated for a moment: ¡°Does Wuan Marquis also think that we should cede the mountain counties?¡± Wuan Marquis Bai Mengyang was an Inborn Grandmaster even older than Shen Qiu. When he met Bai Mengyang, he also had to call him uncle and perform the ceremony of a junior. Moreover, due to the special nature of his cultivation technique, when he led an army, Wuan Marquis¡¯ strength was no less than that of a Second Innate realm, and he was not weaker than Shen Qiu. So at this time, hearing that such an old senior had the same idea, Shen Qiu could not help but be surprised. The other four people beside him were also shocked. Obviously, they were also shocked by Bai Mengyang¡¯s statement. ¡°Here are the tokens of Wuan Marquis and Wucheng Marquis, entrusted to me when I left Dongting County.¡± At this moment, Yang Jing took out the tokens representing Bai Mengyang and Shangguan Ming from his bosom and handed them up. Shen Qiu took them over, glanced briefly, and confirmed that they were indeed Bai Mengyang and Shangguan Ming¡¯s tokens. Holding the seal representing Wuan Marquis¡¯ status, Grand General Shen Qiu was silent for a long time, finally returning the seal and sighing: ¡°Since Wuan Marquis has said so, let¡¯s do it. If Lu Yuan wants the three counties, let¡¯s give them to him. Taifu and Shangshu Ling, please draft a decree later and let the emperor sign it and issue a Royal Decree.¡± Shangshu Ling Huo Tingyu and Taifu Xie Yu, hearing these words, their faces changed, their hearts full of reluctance, but seeing Shen Qiu¡¯s eyes, they did not dare to say anything. They could only say: ¡°According to the order of the Grand General.¡± However, when they spoke, there was a touch of sorrow in their voices. The rest of the people also felt sad. Has their Da Yue and coastal aristocratic family really fallen to such a level? At this moment, they were being threatened and forced to cede almost half of their territory. This humiliation and pain made these aristocratic high doors cringe. Shen Qiu looked at the depressed atmosphere and sighed inwardly, but forced himself to maintain a stern expression, saying: ¡°Why are you all crying? Today, we have no choice but to cede the three counties due to the situation. But this does not mean that we have completely lost. When we recover and recuperate, raise our soldiers and horses, we can take back the ceded territories. At that time, we can find the traitors one by one and punish them for their crimes.¡± Shen Qiu¡¯s tone was passionate, and his words full of fighting spirit and confidence. Chapter 391 - Chapter 391: Chapter 209 Founding and Ascension to the Throne Chapter 391: Chapter 209 Founding and Ascension to the Throne Translator: 549690339 Shen Qiu truly had the confidence and determination to fight. He was only 102 years old this year, an age at which ordinary people might have already reached their limits. But for an Inborn Grandmaster, this period of life was the prime time, with nearly fifty years left to live. What was even rarer was that his current cultivation had reached the second stage of Inborn, and he had a slight chance of touching the third stage, the legendary Great Grandmaster realm. Given all these conditions, for Shen Qiu, the temporary failure and concession were entirely tolerable. He looked at those discouraged and dispirited fellows and scolded them loudly. ¡°Isn¡¯t it just giving away three counties? Let Lu Yuan and those thieves delight in it for now. When I become the emperor and inherit the throne, I can recuperate for twenty or thirty years, and with the wealth of Linhai County and Yuzhang Prefecture, gather millions of strong soldiers without any trouble. By then, I will personally lead the soldiers and eliminate those bandits one by one.¡± In Shen Qiu¡¯s heart, he was filled with great ambitions and aspirations. He could afford to wait. He could use twenty or thirty years to recuperate, and another twenty or thirty years to conquer the world. By then, the lost territory of the former Xiao Yue Dynasty would be recaptured by the new Shen Dynasty, undoubtedly proving the legitimacy of the Shen Dynasty over the Xiao family. With such merits, his Shen Clan of Changzhou would gain the support of other aristocratic families. It would be natural for him to hold the throne for another hundred or two hundred years. So even if he lost three counties when he took office, it was terrible. But for Shen Qiu, it wasn¡¯t too terrible either. Upon hearing his words, people like Yang Jing couldn¡¯t help but feel a little more spirited, finally regaining some confidence. Indeed, given the strength and life expectancy of this Grand General. As long as they could catch their breath, there would be no big problem in reassembling the old territory based on the four prefectures of Jiangdong in another twenty or thirty years. With this in mind, Yang Jing also encouraged himself, ¡°When the time comes, I am willing to be the vanguard for the Grand General, wipe out the Lu bandits, and reclaim Dongting County.¡± Twenty or thirty years later, Yang Jing would only be eighty or ninety years old, in the prime of life, with his strength at its peak. By then, he would personally resolve the mistake he had made. Upon hearing his words, Shen Qiu laughed heartily, ¡°By then I will appoint Yang Qing as the General of the Western Conquest, leading an army of 300,000 to eliminate Lu Ni.¡± Shen Qiu still valued Yang Jing very much. After all, he was one of the six Inborn experts among the aristocratic families. And by then, he might be one of the top five. Because the Marquis of Wuan, Bai Mengyang, was nearing the end of his days and would not live long enough to see the court revive and conquer the world. By that time, Shen Qiu himself would also grow old and gradually weaken. By then, it would be up to the younger generation like Yang Jing and Shangguan Ming to shoulder the responsibility of the dynasty. Seeing the younger generation with such determination now, Shen Qiu was naturally very happy, as it represented the vitality and vigor of the future New Dynasty. ¡°I hereby congratulate the Grand General.¡± Seeing the two of them so spirited, others like Shangshu Ling Huo Tingyu could not help but congratulate them. However, compared to the two of them, they were not as excited. Besides Shen Qiu and Yang Jing, the other four were not Inborn, and could only live as long as ordinary people, eighty or ninety years old, or maybe a hundred. Being in such high positions now, they were already in their fifties or sixties, or even older. The prosperity of the New Dynasty that Grand General Shen Qiu spoke of was something they were destined not to see or participate in. On the contrary. Before the prosperous New Dynasty arrived, during the difficult days of the fall of Da Yue and the early establishment of the New Dynasty, these few people had to go through. Such a thing was not worth celebrating. Of course, if the Grand General and Yang Jing could have such fighting spirit, and if the New Dynasty could really regain the lost territories of the three counties in the future, that would be a good thing for these people. After all, they could not enjoy the prosperity, but their families and their descendants could indeed enjoy it. The prosperity of the New Dynasty would be a good thing for them and the entire Coastal Aristocratic Family. With this consensus, the six people, including Shen Qiu, reached a compromise, and the imperial edict to confer Lu Yuan and the other three as kings was quickly drafted by the court and sent down with the seal of Emperor Hongdao. However, it is said that Emperor Hongdao choked and sobbed several times when sealing the edict, crying out that he was unfaithful to his ancestors and did great harm to the Altars of Soil and Grain, with an extremely sad expression. Apparently. Although they could continue to be one of the six or seven aristocratic families after abdicating and hold high positions in the New Dynasty, looking down on all living beings from on high. But having been accustomed to being the royal family and sitting on the throne as the supreme ruler, and having been used to being bowed to by everyone in the world. It was still a bit hard for the emperor of the Xiao family to accept this sudden fall from power. But there was no way out, as the consensus reached by the entire Coastal Aristocratic Family represented the opinions of the entire court. Under this trend, as a puppet emperor, he was helpless. He could only act as a rubber stamp and couldn¡¯t do anything else. In the fifth month of the seventh year of the Hongdao era, on the fifteenth day, Yang Jing, who had been away for nearly a month, quickly returned to Dongting County after receiving the court¡¯s canonization decree and then traveling day and night. And again he met with Lu Yuan outside Yiyang City. ¡°The court has agreed to confer you as the King of Changsha, with Dongting County as your nation. Yan Wangqiu is to be conferred as the King of Nanhai, with Nanhai County as his nation. Su Xuange is to be conferred as the King of Ninghai, with Yulin County as his nation.¡± Upon meeting, Yang Jing went straight to the point and informed Lu Yuan of the court¡¯s canonization. King of Changsha? Dongting County as a nation. Upon hearing these two key pieces of information, Lu Yuan, who had long hoped for this, could not help but laugh, ¡°I thank the emperor for his grace and the court for its generosity here.¡± Chapter 392 - Chapter 392: Chapter 209: Founding the Nation and Ascending the Throne_2 Chapter 392: Chapter 209: Founding the Nation and Ascending the Throne_2 Translator: 549690339 Yang Jing reached out his hand and said solemnly, ¡°Don¡¯t thank me yet. The court¡¯s granting of this reward is not without conditions.¡± After your fiefdoms are established, you must each mobilize 100,000 troops within half a year to assist the court in attacking Zhou Country.¡±. ¡°Help the court repel the Zhou People and recover the lost territory of Xichuan.¡± This time, Lu Yuan and his allies caught the court off guard with a sudden rebellion. Although they temporarily compromised and granted each of them a prefecture as a fief, it doesn¡¯t mean that the court will readily admit defeat and give up on recovering the territory. The retreat is only temporary. When Yang Jing returned to the capital, he consulted with Grand General Shen Qiu and others. They agreed on a strategy to first repel the Zhou People, preserve the dynasty, recuperate, and then suppress the rebels. In order to achieve this strategy, the court decided to reclaim the half prefecture of Jiuzhen that was originally intended to be granted to the White Phoenix Temple. White Phoenix Temple and Guanhai Villa will be moved to West Chuan Prefecture. As for Jiuzhen Prefecture, the court will continue to control it, with Marquis Wuping, Xie Ning governing it, and accumulating food and fodder for the army. When the court decides to suppress the rebellion in the future, the powerful northern army of the court will march southward, and Marquis Wuping, Xie Ning will lead his troops from Jiuzhen Prefecture to the north, and they will pincer Southsea and Ninghai Countries together with the court. Therefore, the court is absolutely unwilling to let go of Jiuzhen Prefecture, which has a highly strategic position behind the two prefectures of Lingnan. However, the conditions promised to the White Phoenix Temple and Guanhai Villa must be fulfilled. So with no room to maneuver in the four prefectures of Jiangnan, the court could only repel the Zhou People and then snatch back Xichuan Prefecture from their hands to settle the White Phoenix Temple and Guanhai Villa. However, to achieve this goal, the court¡¯s current strength alone is not enough. Therefore, the help of Lu Yuan and others is essential. Since the reality of bestowing the fiefdoms to Lu Yuan and his allies cannot be changed now, the court might as well use the fiefdoms as a condition to exchange for their substantial assistance and maximize the use of these rebels. Upon hearing these conditions, Lu Yuan immediately agreed, ¡°No problem. As long as the court announces the edict and publicly confers me as the ruler of the country. After the founding of the country, I can command an army of 100,000 and go north to the Tianmen Prefecture to help the court repel the Zhou People.¡± He answered very decisively. In fact, Lu Yuan was also very worried about the Zhou People. After all, to the north of Dongting Prefecture is Zhou Country¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture, and to the west is Xichuan Prefecture, also controlled by Zhou Country. At present, the Zhou People have 300,000 troops in the north of the Yangtze River, watching intently and eager to cross the river to the south. For Lu Yuan, who has always treated Dongting Prefecture as his own territory, how could he ignore such a huge threat? Not to mention that the court has now granted Dongting Prefecture to him and allowed him to establish Changsha Country. And the territory of Changsha Country includes Tianmen Prefecture. Currently, the 300,000-strong Zhou army is in Tianmen Prefecture, ravaging Lu Yuan¡¯s land. If he doesn¡¯t drive them away, his Changsha Country would be unstable even if established. At this time, it would be a good thing for Lu Yuan to drive away the Zhou People with the help of the court. Furthermore, it would be an even better thing to take back Xichuan Prefecture. By regaining this prefecture, the threat from the Zhou People on the west side of Dongting Prefecture can be eliminated. As for whether the court will pose a threat to Dongting Prefecture after taking this prefecture? Realistically, this threat does exist. But it is not very big. After all, to the north of Xichuan Prefecture is Zhou Country¡¯s Hanzhong Prefecture. The court¡¯s primary goal in taking back this prefecture is not to attack Lu Yuan, but to figure out how to withstand Zhou Country¡¯s subsequent retaliation. With Zhou Country restraining them from the north, it is a question of how many troops the battered Xichuan Prefecture can spare to threaten Dongting Prefecture. Therefore, repelling the Zhou People and taking back Xichuan Prefecture is a good thing for the court. And for Lu Yuan, it¡¯s an even better thing. Facing such a win-win cooperation, he naturally would not refuse. Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s agreement, Yang Jing breathed a sigh of relief and finally showed a slight smile, ¡°If this is the case, there should be no problem. When does the general plan to accept the edict and establish the fiefdom?¡± Lu Yuan smiled and said, ¡°There¡¯s no rush for that matter; it can be put off until later. Instead, I have something I¡¯d like to ask for Brother Yang¡¯s help.¡± Yang Jing asked, ¡°What is it?¡± Lu Yuan smiled without answering immediately. Instead, he took Yang Jing out of the military tent and pointed to the Yiyang County Town beside the lake in the distance, ¡°Brother Yang, as you can see, there are only these remnant forces of Zhou People left in Jiangnan. Since we are planning a Northern Expedition, we must first remove this thorn. So, in my opinion, Brother Yang, as the General of the Northern Expedition, why are you still leading an army in Xunyang? You should come and join us under the city. Wucheng Marquis should also come, as he is the General of the Western Expedition. With Dongting¡¯s territory still unsteady and confined in the prefecture city, what does that look like? He should also lead his troops here. By then, our three forces joining hands, bringing 300,000 troops together, we can collaborate to break through the city and kill the Zhou People. After we use the blood of the Zhou People in the city to pay our respects, we can lead the army northward, cross the river to the Tianmen Prefecture. Isn¡¯t that a brilliant plan?¡± Inside Yiyang County Town, there are only 8,000 remaining troops of the Zhou People, but there are three Inborn Grandmasters. With Lu Yuan¡¯s current troops, it is not impossible to take the city. However, under a strong attack, there would inevitably be a lot of casualties. It is impossible to break the city without losing tens of thousands of corpses. Now that he is about to establish a country, it is time to employ an army. How could he waste his troops under this city? Since they have reconciled with the court now, isn¡¯t it silly not to use this powerful ally? Chapter 393 - Chapter 393: Chapter 209: Founding the Nation and Ascending the Throne_3 Chapter 393: Chapter 209: Founding the Nation and Ascending the Throne_3 Translator: 549690339 But those were four Inborn Grandmasters and 140,000 elite soldiers, weren¡¯t they? Such a massive show of strength; just bring them to Yiyang City, and the city would be effortlessly seized, right? After hearing what Lu Yuan had to say, Yang Jing knew exactly what he was planning. However, there was some truth to Lu Yuan¡¯s words. This Zhou thorn planted deep within Jiangnan, if not uprooted, will be a threat to the court and its rear flank. And if this city is not besieged, it¡¯s unlikely that this Southern Conqueror General before me, the future ruler of Changsha, will be marching north. After some pondering, he nodded at last: ¡°It can be done. Upon my return, I will lead the army with Wucheng Marquis and join forces with the King of Changsha.¡± Even though the official announcement of his enfeoffment had not yet been declared, Yang Jing was already addressing Lu Yuan as ¡°king¡±. Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but roar with laughter: ¡°Good. At that time, I will await the arrival of Yang Brother¡¯s mighty army. Come, let¡¯s celebrate. There is a feast prepared in camp. Join me for a toast of goodwill!¡± ¡°I thank the King of Changsha.¡± This time, Yang Jing accepted willingly instead of declining the invitation. Despite the mutual suspicion, given that he would need the help of the King of Changsha to fight against the Zhou in the future, he might need to be on the battlefield with him. Therefore, it¡¯s necessary to build rapport and maintain friendly relations on the surface for the time being. The feast not only bridged the gap between them but also discussed official business. During the banquet, Lu Yuan and Yang Jing agreed that Yang Jing would bring troops with him after a month. At that time, in front of the gathered armies, Yang Jing will publicly read the edict of enfeoffment. And on that day, Lu Yuan will indeed ascend to the throne and accede to the king of Changsha. After a round of joyous drinking, both host and guest wended their merry way until the depths of the night before dispersing. The next day, Yang Jing made his excuses about being busy with official business and left. This time, Lu Yuan was exceedingly gracious, personally seeing Yang Jing off for ten miles to the lake pier, before turning back to camp. After sending off Yang Jing, Lu Yuan returned to camp and immediately set to writing dispatch orders. The difficulties from the court have already been resolved, and the imperial edict of enfeoffment has already been delivered. Now that the founding of the nation is imminent, preparations naturally have to begin. And amongst all the preparations, what¡¯s most crucial is, without a doubt, consolidating public sentiment¡ª announcing to all within the county that he has received approval from the court and will soon ascend to the throne. It hasn¡¯t even been half a month since the abrupt conclusion of the official selection exams, has it? Based on this, Lu Yuan has truly come to understand the importance of public sentiment and justice. Now that the court has already extended this moral high ground to him, he naturally can¡¯t let this perfect opportunity slip by. Now he must summon representatives of the local elites, and influential scholars, to participate in the event, to personally witness the court¡¯s enfeoffment. He will let everyone know that the sky in Dongting was really changing. So he wrote a dispatch, instructing local prefecture heads to bring along local influential figures to participate in the founding ceremony. The matter is urgent and needs to be dealt with immediately. Therefore, as soon as he finished writing the dispatch orders that day, he immediately assigned fast riders to convey the orders to each prefecture. And with these fast riders delivering the orders to the localities, the whole of Dongting and the nine prefectures of Jiangnan was unavoidably stirred. The founding of a nation. The court has actually recognized this, and enfeoffed the Southern Conqueror General as King of Changsha, thereby formally establishing the nation and indeed becoming the sole authority? Upon hearing this news, countless people were left in bewildered shock, weeping in despair or exhilarated with joy. But everyone agreed on one thing. Anyone who received an invitation via dispatch order immediately set about packing their belongings and started heading towards Changsha. A new nation is now established, and Da Yue is failing. The future of Dongting belongs to Lu. This invitation from King Lu; anyone who wants to survive in Dongting under the rule of the new King of Changsha, who would dare to refuse to show face and not come to Changsha? Not only are the invited people on the move. There are also many who have sensed the change in the wind and want to strike it rich in the new dynasty who have begun making moves. Like fish scenting blood, they were all moving towards Changsha. The official selection exam just concluded last month. Although it ended abruptly, and the execution was very poorly done. Even so, many people have come to realize that Lu Yuan¡¯s side was desperately short of officers. If you could win the favour of the future ruler of the new nation now, then a meteoric rise, overnight rise to the top, was not out of the question. Isn¡¯t the reason these scholars are studying to become officials? Now that the only shortcoming of Lu Yuan¡¯s had been smoothly resolved with the court¡¯s enfeoffment. So what reason do these scholars have to refuse Lu Yuan¡¯s recruitment and not consent to serve as officials? The public sentiment in Dongting was surging like a great wave, converging towards Lu Yuan. When they were busy planning the founding ceremony of the nation, in other places. In Jianan Prefecture¡¯s Nine River Sword Sect, and South Sea Prefecture¡¯s Nanhai Sect, they also received envoys from the court. After the court read out the enfeoffment edict, Nanhai Sect¡¯s Yan Wangqiu took one step ahead of Lu Yuan. On the twentieth of the fifth month of Hongdao¡¯s seventh year, he announced the founding of the Nanhai Country in South Sea Prefecture, commencing the Da Yue fiefdom enfeoffment sequence. Upon receiving the edict, the Nine River Sword Sect moved swiftly too, declaring on the same day that they were relocating their sect to Yulin County. Su Xuange himself was rather eager. He led some core disciples of the sect, and in just ten days, they had rushed to Yulin County. Then, under the witness of the court¡¯s messenger, he announced the enfeoffment edict in Yulin City, and officially declared the founding of the country, establishing the Ninghai Country. The establishment of two countries in Lingnan one after the other sent ripples of shock throughout the nation. Especially amongst the people of Da Yue, it was as if thunder had struck on a clear day. From that moment on, everyone recognized that Da Yue was truly in dire straits. Not only was it unable to retain its present territory, but it was also failing to maintain its orthodox dignity. Now that two nations have been established, how many more nations will be established in the future? No one knows. But everyone is clear that the wind has changed in this world. Chapter 394 - Chapter 394: Chapter 210: The Virtue of the Five Elements Chapter 394: Chapter 210: The Virtue of the Five Elements Translator: 549690339 Lu Yuan has been very busy these days. With the establishment of the new state, various matters, such as the bureaucratic system, military system, etiquette, laws, etc., all need to be reorganized and determined. Even if he were to copy and borrow everything from the current system of the Yue State court, it would still be a troublesome process. It would be impossible for Lu Yuan to figure it all out on his own. He doesn¡¯t even have the energy to do so. So, he needs assistance. Sun Siwen has arrived early. Since receiving his summons, Sun Siwen, a friend responsible for overseeing the administration of the southern three prefectures, rushed over in three days. Not only him, but Sun Siwen¡¯s father-in-law, Shaoyang Prefect Cui Changqing, was also summoned by Lu Yuan five days ago. With the help of this father-in-law and son-in-law duo, Lu Yuan finally managed to get a grasp of the matters concerning the founding of the new country. One day, after Sun Siwen and Cui Changqing had sorted out some ideas, they met with Lu Yuan to report on their work. ¡°According to Your Majesty¡¯s requirements, after the establishment of our Changsha state, we shall not change the laws, but follow the original laws of Yue, with slight modifications. Hence, this matter is not urgent and can be slowly amended by the Punishment Department after the founding.¡± Sun Siwen first chose the simplest and easiest issue to solve as a starter. Then he switched topics and said, ¡°However, with the establishment of the new state, in addition to the laws, we need to determine the etiquette system. Even if Your Majesty wants to copy from the Yue¡¯s, the orientation of the Five Elements of our country must be confirmed. Only then, as this foundation, can we revise and confirm the etiquette system of Changsha state. Nowadays, the Yue respects fire, hence red. Zhou respects wood, hence green. Liang respects gold, hence white. All three nations have their respective Five Elements orientations, and based on this, they determine their etiquette system. Etiquette is the foundation of everything and is of utmost importance. Without etiquette, there is no foundation for a new dynasty. So when the new dynasty is established, the rituals and laws must be determined first.¡± In today¡¯s society, the foundation of a dynasty¡¯s local rule lies in the rituals, etiquette, and rules. By using etiquette to regulate people¡¯s behavior, and clan relationships to enforce the adherence to these rules, local stability can be maintained. Hence, if the etiquette is not confirmed, the foundation of the dynasty would be unstable, and it would be difficult for the Altars of Soil and Grain to last long. Lu Yuan is naturally aware of this reasoning. Etiquette, in fact, is the source of power; it¡¯s about authority and justification. The power of authority makes people follow, and the justification makes them approve. With both added, his new dynasty would be considered stable. Moreover, the role of etiquette is not just limited to the above. Lu Yuan practices Immortal Techniques, and after studying the Taiping Dao Book, his understanding of Heaven and Earth has deepened. In the midst of this, he can also sense some of the directions of Qi Luck. If he truly cultivates this book, establishes a new country and chooses the right Five Elements, it will greatly benefit the cultivation of this book. After all, this book concentrates on cultivation of people¡¯s hearts and the dynasty¡¯s Qi Luck. The cultivation of this technique is itself influenced by Qi Luck. Therefore, choosing the right Five Elements orientation is crucial, both for the stability of the country and the cultivation of the Dao Law. So, Lu Yuan thought for a moment and asked, ¡°According to the etiquette, what kind of Five Elements should my Changsha state belong to?¡± At this point, Cui Changqing next to him said, ¡°If we follow the traditional practices, after the previous dynasty is overthrown, the new one will take the Five Elements that subdue the previous one. If the Yue¡¯s element is fire, water subdues fire, so the new dynasty should have the water element. However, as the Yue still exists, if we take the water element, we might be resented by the court of Yue. Moreover, we didn¡¯t overthrow the previous dynasty, but were granted by the court of Yue, so it doesn¡¯t meet the requirements of taking the water element.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan remained silent. If he takes the water element, wouldn¡¯t it mean he doesn¡¯t get along with the Yue? At present, it isn¡¯t the time for conflicts with the Yue when they have just reconciled and are about to fight against the Zhou together. With that in mind, he couldn¡¯t help but ask again, ¡°If we¡¯re not considering the subduing Five Elements, what other options do we have for selecting the Five Elements orientation?¡± ¡°If not the subduing Five Elements, there¡¯s also the option of choosing the same Five Elements.¡± Cui Changqing continued, ¡°Since our Changsha state is established by the court of Yue, we can adopt the same fire element as the court of Yue to show our common origin. If so, the element of our Changsha state should be fire. Establishing a country with the fire element is the simplest. Our Changsha state¡¯s etiquette system does not need to change much, we can directly adopt the one from the court of Yue. However, if we take the same fire element as the Yue, our country would inevitably be influenced by them after the founding. As the two countries have similar etiquette systems and customs, if the Yue intends to manipulate us in the future, they will be able to do so. Moreover, the position of the Yue court is now declining, and taking the same element might affect the Qi Luck of the new dynasty. So, whether to choose the element in this way, Your Majesty, please consider carefully.¡± Etiquettes are essentially political systems and cultural concepts. If Lu Yuan chooses to adopt the same political system and cultural concept as the Yue, and fully accept their logic and way of thinking, then, when the Yue attacks in the future, they could exploit this aspect to subvert, entice, and divide them. To put it simply, they could use the justification of the Heavenly Son to initiate attacks. As both Changsha and the Yue belong to the same system, accepting the same set of etiquette, Changsha would naturally be at a disadvantageous position regarding justification. So, the key to the system of etiquette is to distinguish between different people and cultures using different rules. Chapter 395 - Chapter 395: Chapter 210: The Virtue of the Five Elements _2 Chapter 395: Chapter 210: The Virtue of the Five Elements _2 Translator: 549690339 Even if Yue Country attacked Lu Yuan, intending to use his Heavenly Son¡¯s status, not many people in Changsha would recognize it, such is the importance of etiquette. That is also why Cui Changqing said that although using Yue Country¡¯s etiquette is simple, it would leave endless trouble. As for the later issue of Qi Luck being accumulated, it is nothing but a tactful warning. However, compared to his earlier concerns, Lu Yuan valued the issue of Qi Luck more. Because the fall of Yue Country, in fact, has already entered the countdown. In two or three years, the current Grand General was likely to replace the Xiao Family and ascend to the throne as Emperor. By that time, the Fire Virtue of Yue Country would have waned and the New Dynasty would probably adopt the Water Virtue. The etiquette would also change accordingly. At that time, Lu Yuan¡¯s Changsha Country would be disconnected from the New Dynasty, and the righteousness of the Heavenly Son of the other party would naturally not affect him either. On the contrary, the collapse of the Fire Virtue of Yue Country might affect him, who inherited the Fire Virtue of Yue Country, which worried Lu Yuan more. ¡®Under an overturned nest, there will be no intact eggs. My Taiping Dao book is about cultivating the Qi Luck of human minds. If I take the Fire Virtue, it would be equivalent to a branch separated from the main trunk of the big tree of Da Yue. When the towering tree of Da Yue falls, being a branch, how much better could I be? What if there is a Qi Luck backlash and my cultivation regresses? That would truly be a wrongful death.¡¯ Thinking of this, Lu Yuan had a decision in his heart and said to Cui Changqing, ¡°Yu¨¨sh¨¬¡¯s decline and the waning of the Fire Virtue are signs of certain doom. I have no intention of taking this Virtue; are there other ways to choose from the Five Elements?¡± Cui Changqing nodded and said, ¡°There are two other methods to choose from. One is to use the position of the country as a basis for choosing the Virtue of the Five Elements. According to the theory of the Five Elements, the east and southeast are of the Wood Element; the north is of the Water Element; the south is of the Fire Element; the northeast and southwest are of the Earth Element; and the west and northwest are of the Metal Element. The Three Emperors in ancient times divided the world into Nine Provinces and Ten Regions. As for the Ten Regions, they are inhabited by barbarians, so let¡¯s not talk about them. The Nine Provinces are Xu, Qing, Ji, Yan, Yu, Yang, Yong, Liang, and Jing. These Nine Provinces, excluding the southern barbarians, are occupied by the nine districts of Da Yue, which cover a large part of Yangzhou, the ten districts of Liang Country in the north occupying a large part of Qingzhou, and eight districts of Zhou Country occupying more than half of Yongzhou. Based on Yangzhou¡¯s position, as a region of the south, my Dongting belongs to Fire Virtue. Considering the Nine Provinces¡¯ positions, Yangzhou belongs to the southeast, which is Wood Virtue. So, my king, if you determine the Five Elements based on the position, you have the Fire and Wood Virtues to choose from. Apart from the position, there is another choice, which is to determine the Five Elements based on the individual. If Your Majesty had celestial signs when raising an army, you could determine the Five Elements based on these signs. If Your Majesty is blessed by Divine Spirits, you could determine the Five Elements based on these spirits. You could also determine the Five Elements based on your own birth. Even your ambitions could be used to determine the Five Elements. Depending on which of these conditions applies to Your Majesty, you can decide for yourself. However, choosing the Five Elements in this way is too rudimentary, lacking traditional principles. To determine the Five Elements in this way, it may be difficult to win the hearts of the people in the world.¡± Cui Changqing listed the four popular ways to determine the Five Elements in the world, one by one, and gave his own opinions. After listening to him, Lu Yuan furrowed his brows and pondered. The previous Five Elements¡¯ mutually defeating relations and the same Five Elements have been rejected. Now, there are only the remaining choices of the Five Elements¡¯ positions and affinities. ¡®However, if it¡¯s the Five Elements¡¯ positions, according to Yangzhou, it¡¯s still Fire Virtue, which still can¡¯t escape the influence of Yue Country. But based on the position of the Nine Provinces, it¡¯s Wood Virtue. However, Zhou Country, which is Wood Virtue, is a large country and is close to me. If I choose Wood Virtue, I¡¯m afraid the Qi Luck will be suppressed when fighting Zhou Country in the future. Moreover, not to mention the vague notion of Qi Luck¡¯s mutual suppression, just on the subject of Wood Virtue, my whole body, even my life experience, has no connection with Wood Virtue. Choosing this as the Virtue of the Five Elements, apart from occupying one position, there really isn¡¯t much connection. Having the Wood Element as the Five Elements has the least connection to me, and it won¡¯t bring much benefit to my cultivation of the Taiping Dao book. So, the last remaining option is to choose one of the Five Elements that is closely related to me as the foundation of the kingdom¡­¡¯ As Lu Yuan thought about it, he began to ponder which of the Five Elements was closest to him. Upon such thought, he found out that the closest Five Element Virtue to himself was still Fire Virtue. The reason is simple: he cultivated the Chi Yang Divine Skill, and his martial arts external body is the Red Sun¡¯s fire. The achievements Lu Yuan has today are nothing more than his power of the Innate and the soldiers under his command. Those soldiers were recruited by him using his official name under the court, and in essence, they also gained the light of the court¡¯s Fire Virtue. As for his Chi Yang Divine Skill, there is no need to say more, it¡¯s definitely Fire Virtue. Therefore, from this perspective, whether it¡¯s inheriting the previous dynasty or the regional positions or even personal achievements, Fire Virtue is the best fit for Lu Yuan. However, due to various reasons mentioned above, he cannot choose the Fire Virtue. ¡®Martial Arts Techniques, Martial Arts Techniques¡­¡¯ Lu Yuan frowned, thinking about the connection between his techniques and the Five Elements, and he suddenly had an epiphany, ¡®That¡¯s right. If I really determined the Five Elements according to my techniques, my martial arts have now reached the Innate Realm, and I have almost reached the peak in this aspect. Even if I choose the Fire Virtue that is compatible with the Chi Yang Divine Skill, it won¡¯t help me much. After all, I am going to cultivate Immortal Techniques in the future. So even if I were to choose the Five Elements based on techniques, I should choose the Immortal Techniques instead of Martial Arts Techniques. Now I practice the Five Thunders Book, which contains all Five Elements; none of them stands out individually. Chapter 396 - Chapter 396: Chapter 210: The Virtue of the Five Elements _3 Chapter 396: Chapter 210: The Virtue of the Five Elements _3 Translator: 549690339 However, it is currently in preparation, the Taiping Dao Book I am about to cultivate, which does include the Five Elements. What¡¯s more, the theory of Five Elements Qi Luck is a great concern to me because I worry about the cultivation issues of the Taiping Dao Book, which might affect future cultivation. In that case, why not simply choose the Five Elements that share the same attributes as the Taiping Dao Book. That should solve the problem. The more Lu Yuan pondered this, the more excited he felt, as if a whole new world had opened up before him. Indeed, the Taiping Dao Book does have attributes of the Five Elements. The Taiping Dao Book, also known as Yellow Sky Daoist Scripture, the law of the Yellow Sky, is a spiritual cultivation text based on earth. If you cultivate this book, upon major success, you can condense Taiping Yellow Sky, which can be used as a method to achieve True Person status. The content mentioned above, according to the Taiping Dao Book, is some description of the subsequent realms of this book. Of course, these are merely descriptions. When the Dan Ding Path first obtained the Taiping Dao Book, this Immortal Technique, which was excavated from the Taoist Ruins of Tranquility, was already incomplete. Most of the content of the Taiping Dao Book that Lu Yuan currently holds is the result of the Dan Ding Path¡¯s generations of exploration and restoration. To this day, it has only been perfected to the level of Five Qi towards Yuan. As for finding the realm beyond Five Qi Towards Yuan, the method to achieve True Person through Three Flowers Gathering, there are only some descriptions in the damaged Dao Book. After all, out of the generations of Dao Masters on the Dan Ding Path, aside from the first two or three who achieved True Person status after the establishment of the faction, the later generations of Dao masters only revolved around the realm of Five Qi towards Yuan. Since they themselves have not reached that realm, how could they deduce the method for reaching the True Person status. However, even without the following methods, the current Taiping Dao Book is almost enough for Lu Yuan. And to be realistic. If he is truly able to complete the entire Taiping Dao Book, then the realm of Five Qi towards Yuan perfection is already enough to suppress the now-decaying Nine Provinces. They don¡¯t even need to reach Five Qi towards Yuan. Achieving Three Qi¡¯s minor completion is enough. By using this method as Lu Yuan¡¯s Five Elements virtue for his future dynasty, it¡¯s more than enough to suppress a country¡¯s Qi Luck. ¡®In addition to this method, my birth data also belongs to the Five Elements of Earth, which makes it an even better fit.¡¯ When Lu Yuan thought of this, he had already made up his mind. Regardless of anything else, it must be Earth Virtue. With this thought in mind, he looked at Cui Changqing and Sun Siwen and said, ¡°I have been a mountain hunter since I was a child. Fortunately, I found an Immortal treasure in the mountains, which opened my spiritual orifices. I then started studying and practicing martial arts, which led to today¡¯s achievement. When I obtained the Immortal treasure, the Daoist who left it called himself Yellow Sky Daoist in the book. The Yellow One is also Earth. It happens that my birth data also belongs to Earth. Isn¡¯t this Heavenly Mandate? Hence, I have decided that the Five Elements of the new country will be determined by Virtue, and there will be no more discussion about this.¡± Lu Yuan repeated the story he once told about meeting an Immortal in the mountains, reconstituted it, and told his two ministers again. Set Earth Virtue based on the compatibility of the Five Elements? Upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s explanation, Cui Changqing and Sun Siwen unwittingly frowned a bit. They are slightly worried about their king choosing the least superior method out of the four ways to determine the Five Elements. And Yellow Sky Immortal? For this Immortal which they have never heard of, let alone being told by their king, both ministers don¡¯t believe it at all. They believe it is simply a product of Lu Yuan¡¯s spur of the moment to determine the Five Elements based on his birth data. ¡°Your Majesty, we have never heard about the Yellow Sky Immortal. And to determine the Five Elements by the birth data, although the king should correspond to the Heavenly Mandate in the upper class and the human heart in the lower class however¡­¡± Cui Changqing wanted to dissuade him, but was interrupted by Lu Yuan halfway through. ¡°I¡¯ve already said, there¡¯s no room for further discussion on this matter.¡± Looking at his two ministers, Lu Yuan had to repeat, ¡°And I will establish a new country with Earth Virtue. In the future, after the Yue Country perishes, the New Dynasty will definitely be Water Virtue. And Earth restrains Water. Establishing the country with Earth Virtue is an excellent counter to the New Dynasty that will succeed Yue Country, which is a great advantage for the nation. I have made up my mind, so there¡¯s no need to dissuade me.¡± Cui Changqing opened and closed his mouth, totally unprepared, could determining Earth Virtue be explained in such a way? Although it¡¯s sophistry, it cannot be denied that it sounds somewhat reasonable. Thinking about it, he didn¡¯t want to continue to argue with Lu Yuan on this matter. Just determine the Five Elements by the king¡¯s birth data. After all, the kingdom of Changsha was established by the king, and it is barely acceptable to determine Earth Virtue based on his birth data. In the future, just publicize a bit more about the Yellow Sky Immortal, making this Immortal known to the world, and this can also give the king additional rationale. So, in the end, Cui Changqing said, ¡°Respect your Majesty¡¯s command.¡± Upon seeing this, Lu Yuan could not help but smile, ¡°That¡¯s more like it. Cui Qing, Sun Qing, you are my confidants, and in the future, you will also be the New Country¡¯s Ministers. Don¡¯t you understand my temperament? If I choose Earth Virtue today, there must be my own justification. This is absolutely not a hasty decision made on impulse. Changsha is the country I established, don¡¯t I want it to last for thousands of years? You don¡¯t need to worry.¡± Regarding the matter of the Taiping Dao Book, Lu Yuan absolutely cannot tell outsiders. Even the title of Yellow Sky Immortal is just to fool outsiders, especially to deceive the Dan Ding Path. But for these matters, there¡¯s naturally no need to tell the two civil officials. Upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s words, Cui Changqing and Sun Siwen thought about their king¡¯s temperament and couldn¡¯t help but nod their heads. Indeed, with their king¡¯s cautious nature, he would never do anything harmful to himself. The decision to choose Earth Virtue today must serve his own purpose, it¡¯s just that he can¡¯t reveal it to us. Thinking this way, although reluctantly, they did feel relieved. ¡°Since Your Majesty has given it deep thought, we can rest assured.¡± Sun Siwen bowed to Lu Yuan and proceeded to the next area of discussion, ¡°Now that the laws and etiquettes are settled, next we have to discuss the military and bureaucratic systems. The king will handle the military system and we don¡¯t presume to suggest anything. ¡°However, in terms of bureaucratic system, the present world¡¯s nations mostly adopt the Three Departments, Six Ministries, Nine Temples, and Five Supervisors as the mainstream. These twenty-three departments, if fully staffed, would require at least over five hundred people. ¡°Now, our country only governs one county, Nine Temples and Five Supervisors can be streamlined, and the Three Departments and Six Ministries can also reduce staff. ¡°But no matter how we streamline and reduce, to set up the framework of the new country, we cannot go without three hundred officials. ¡°In addition to the vacancies in local prefectures and counties, currently our kingdom of Changsha has a shortfall of over seventeen hundred officials. ¡°Therefore, I suggest, after the establishment of the country, for the king to hold imperial examinations to recruit scholars from the world, so as to fill up the vacancies in our country.¡± Sun Siwen asked for the mandate. Chapter 397 - Chapter 397: Chapter 211: Two Countries Join Forces Chapter 397: Chapter 211: Two Countries Join Forces Translator: 549690339 The issue of the lack of officials is a common topic. Since the pacification of the three prefectures last year, Lu Yuan has been plagued by this problem. Now, more than a year has passed, and the problem still remains unresolved, becoming a burden for him in founding his kingdom. However, now that the court has officially conferred him as the King of Changsha, and his legitimacy issues have been resolved, this matter can be dealt with more easily. Therefore, after hearing Sun Siwen¡¯s words, Lu Yuan said at this time: ¡°As for the issue of the imperial examination, I will issue a decree after I am officially ennobled and establish the kingdom. The Enke examination will be widely available within the national boundaries, and this will be used to select officials.¡± ¡°As for the inner affairs of the court, each ministry head and department head should be selected from the local officials who are talented. This will establish the framework for each ministry and department.¡± ¡°After their departure, the local areas will promote replacement officials.¡± ¡°First, set up the frameworks of the central court and local prefectures and counties, arrange the officials of each ministry and department, each prefecture, and county, and maintain their operation.¡± ¡°For the remaining vacant positions, wait for the imperial examination results, and then fill them with the newly appointed officials.¡± As for selecting officials, it is the easiest solution for Lu Yuan at this time. Just hold an imperial examination, and thousands of scholars and juren will naturally flock to serve him as if they were fish returning to the sea. However, after listening to Lu Yuan¡¯s words, Sun Siwen was not as optimistic, and said with some distress: ¡°Your majesty, the problem of the shortage of officials can be solved by holding a new imperial examination. However, after years of war and chaos in Dongting Prefecture, the local area is exhausted, and the people are weary and scattered.¡± ¡°It is already difficult for the people to have enough food to eat, let alone study.¡± ¡°In these days, I have read the documents and household registers sent from the local areas.¡± ¡°After checking, I found that in the past four years, there are only about 2,300 scholars with Scholar¡¯s Degree titles in our entire Dongting Prefecture and the nine prefectures of Jiangnan. This is not enough to fill the more than 1,700 vacant positions.¡± Hearing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel a headache, and then asked: ¡°How did Dongting Prefecture maintain so many officials with so few scholars in the past years?¡± Sun Siwen replied: ¡°Among the prefectures in Da Yue, apart from Linhai and Yuzhang, the other prefectures have not historically had strong academic atmosphere. In the past, the imperial court often selected scholars from Linhai and Yuzhang Prefectures to be assigned to various prefectures as officials.¡± ¡°For example, after I passed the juren examination, I was assigned from Yuzhang Prefecture to Dongting Prefecture.¡± ¡°Officials like me from Linhai and Yuzhang Prefectures account for half of the total number of officials in the prefectures of Da Yue. The remaining half are filled by scholars from the other six prefectures.¡± ¡°Now that Your Majesty is establishing a new country, many local officials from Linhai and Yuzhang Prefectures have abandoned their posts and left.¡± ¡°These scholars have their families and relatives in Linhai and Yuzhang Prefectures and are under the control of the imperial court, making them untrustworthy.¡± ¡°Therefore, if Your Majesty wants to select officials, unless they are willing to wholeheartedly serve Da Yue in the future, it will be impossible to obtain help from the imperial court.¡± ¡°But without the scholars from Linhai and Yuzhang Prefectures, there is a lack of officials in Dongting Prefecture, and suitable people cannot be found.¡± ¡°Please make the decision, Your Majesty.¡± Without enough officials, Lu Yuan¡¯s Changsha State cannot operate. But if he only seeks officials from the imperial court, does his territory belong to him or the imperial court? This decision is tough, and Sun Siwen dares not make it on his own, so he can only ask Lu Yuan, the ruler, to make the choice. After hearing this, Lu Yuan also fell silent. In the past few years, Dongting Prefecture has suffered severe losses due to wars and chaos. Not only did the population drop from its peak of 600,000 households and 3 million people to just 360,000 households, and 1.8 million people, losing nearly half of its population. Even local scholars were either killed by rebels or forced to move and flee to other prefectures in the succession of wars and chaos. So now that Lu Yuan is establishing a nation, after counting, there are only more than 2,300 scholars left in the entire country ¨C a true cultural desert. Facing such a desolate scene, Lu Yuan could only sigh deeply, think carefully and finally said: ¡°Scholars from the imperial court cannot be used, but scholars who do not belong to the imperial court can always be used.¡± ¡°Now that Nanhai Country and Ninghai Country have been established, although they have also experienced war and chaos, several years have passed, and they have already restored peace.¡± ¡°Especially Nanhai Country, which was not deeply affected when it was invaded by Jinghai Country, and has now fully revitalized.¡± ¡°I am in an alliance with both countries, and I will send envoys to them to describe our current difficulties, requesting them to allow their scholars to participate in our imperial examinations and serve as officials.¡± ¡°Given the current situation in these two countries, they should agree to it.¡± When Lu Yuan and Yan Wangqiu, Su Xuange formed an alliance, they had agreed to help each other and assist Lu Yuan in maintaining his country against the threats from the north, Zhou Country and Yue Country. Now, as Lu Yuan¡¯s country is without sufficient officials, he sends a letter to seek help, and the likelihood is that the two would not refuse. After hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s compromise solution, Sun Siwen hesitated slightly before nodding and smiling, saying, ¡°If we can seek help from Nanhai and Ninghai countries, there should be no problem.¡± On the side, Cui Changqing also smiled and teased: ¡°It has been heard that when Nanhai and Ninghai countries were first established, the martial artists from Nanhai Sect and Nine River Sword Sect couldn¡¯t wait to jump out and grab key positions in the two countries.¡± ¡°Not only occupying more than half of the central court positions, they also filled local government positions with their trusted followers and planted their factions.¡± ¡°According to rumors, within just half a month of the establishment of the two countries, more than half of the local officials from their respective original prefectures were dismissed or forced to leave.¡± Chapter 398 - Chapter 398: Chapter 211: Two Countries Join Forces _2 Chapter 398: Chapter 211: Two Countries Join Forces _2 Translator: 549690339 Nowadays, countless scholars in both countries are greatly disappointed by this. If the king issues a call for talents, the scholars of these two countries would be overjoyed upon hearing it, and would not hesitate to travel thousands of miles to join.¡± The main reason why Sun Siwen and Cui Changqing laughed at this was that the actions of the Nanhai Sect and the Nine River Sword Sect in recent times were too chaotic and unseemly. Unlike Lu Yuan, who single-handedly established today¡¯s foundation without much restraint, being penniless and destitute. The Nanhai Sect and the Nine River Sword Sect have been established for over a thousand years. During this long period, the number of disciples in both sects has exceeded ten thousand, with countless interests and factions intertwined. Now that both sects have turned into countries, Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange have reaped the greatest benefits, becoming the royal family. But what about the disciples and elders under them, and even the affiliated sects? Wouldn¡¯t they want enough interests and benefits to be appeased? Otherwise, the sect that originally belonged to everyone suddenly becomes a country belonging only to the two of them. They can¡¯t take all the benefits for themselves, right? If that were the case, who would be willing to work for Su Xuange and Yan Wangqiu? Therefore, considering these factors, Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange had to take out more than half of the official positions in the country, use them as the interest cake, and allocate them to their subordinates. However, South Sea Prefecture and Yulin County are only so big, with only ten prefectures and a hundred counties. Even now that the country has been established and a central court added, how many positions can be distributed to their followers? Yet under their control, there are thousands of people who are eagerly looking forward to obtaining an official position. As a result, in order to come up with so many official positions, Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange had to choose to downsize and dismiss the original local officials, leaving most of their positions vacant for their confidants. Such behavior was justified by them as cleansing the court¡¯s influence, sharing benefits with all the people in the world. But who are those people? Naturally, they are their own relatives, friends, and acquaintances. Such behavior naturally disgusted the local literati of the two counties. Originally, the founding of Southsea and Ninghai was not resisted by the local scholars of the two counties, and some even looked forward to it. After all, once the two countries were established, the princes of foreign countries would naturally be unable to serve in their own counties. As a result, the two countries would have to select officials from among their own people. Sun Siwen had mentioned this before. Originally, half of the local officials were occupied by scholars from Linhai and Yuzhang counties. Now that half of the quota has been vacated, the scholars of their own country can naturally go and compete for it. Such a great opportunity naturally elates the local literati. However, the operation of Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange has not only occupied nearly half of the vacated quota but has also taken up much of what was originally left for them. The benefits they had originally hoped for in the founding of the country were gone, and their own interests were damaged instead. Just imagine, the local scholars of the two counties must be furious. It is likely that in the literary world, those scholars are privately complaining and cursing at the two countries as tyrants. Under such public opinion, a series of actions by Southsea and Ninghai quickly spread to all counties in the world and became widely known. As traditional literati, Sun Siwen and Cui Changqing naturally disapprove of the martial style of the two countries. At this moment, seeing Lu Yuan bring it up, they couldn¡¯t help but scoff a few words. While mocking, both of them couldn¡¯t help but feel fortunate that they had encountered a ruler like Lu Yuan. If they had come across martial men like Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange, let alone become prime ministers and control a country, they were afraid they wouldn¡¯t even be able to hold official positions, and could only pack up and return home to be mere farmers. Seeing the attitudes of his two chancellors, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but be speechless and then laughed helplessly, ¡°Although the literary atmosphere of Southsea and Ninghai is not as flourishing as in our country, there are still six or seven thousand scholars in total. As long as more than half of them come to our country, along with our own scholars, we should have enough. Even if there is still a shortage, it will not affect the overall situation. We can slowly fill in the gap in the future.¡± Sun Siwen nodded and said, ¡°The king is wise. With the help of Southsea and Ninghai, there should be no problem in selecting officials.¡± Lu Yuan laughed, ¡°In that case, the two of you can go back and prepare. The founding ceremony, the choice of etiquette, diplomatic matters, and preparations for the imperial examination are all state affairs that both of you need to be busy with. I thank you in advance.¡± When Lu Yuan reached this point, he stood up and bowed to the two of them. He had no problem with military affairs, but if it weren¡¯t for this father-in-law and son-in-law duo helping him in political affairs, he wouldn¡¯t be able to manage the logistics on his own. If he tried to manage it forcefully, at best, he would just become a second Southsea or Ninghai, or even worse off than them. Therefore, whether it is out of sentiment or necessity, his bow is genuine and sincere. And Sun Siwen and Cui Changqing dared not accept such a salute, hastily avoiding and saying, ¡°We are entrusted by the king with state affairs and are obliged to do our utmost for the king. We dare not accept such a salute.¡± Thus, under a harmonious atmosphere of monarchs and ministers, the framework and keynote of founding a country were settled. With a clear goal ahead, Sun Siwen and Cui Changqing¡¯s efficiency naturally ensured swift execution. All the tailors and embroiderers in Changsha Prefecture were summoned, and fabrics from all the big cloth shops were purchased. The new dynasty needs a new look. Since Lu Yuan is founding a country, he naturally needs to prepare new royal robes and official uniforms to determine the color and etiquette of their attire. Although there is still some time before the official founding, although rushed, it is still possible to make some simple robes and attend official functions temporarily. Chapter 399 - Chapter 399: Chapter 211: Two Countries Join Forces _3 Chapter 399: Chapter 211: Two Countries Join Forces _3 Translator: 549690339 At the very least, important central officials of the new dynasty should wear their own official uniforms with their colors. Otherwise, how will they show their legitimacy? How will they distinguish themselves from Da Yue? Should they be like the kings of Southsea and Ninghai, wearing a yellow robe and underneath having ministers wearing all kinds of messy robes with different styles, like bandits and rebels, when establishing a new country? If that¡¯s the case, then Sun Siwen and Cui Changqing should find a block of tofu to hit their heads against, all those years of education and serving as the Prime Minister would have been in vain. In addition to preparing the new dynasty¡¯s uniforms, the construction of the Altar for Worshipping Heaven outside of Changsha is also underway, with civilian workers working overtime, and proper preparations are being made according to the regulations. Uniforms, etiquette, enthronement, and worshiping heaven ¨C the two most important matters in the establishment of a nation are slowly being perfected under the efforts of the two chancellors. Apart from these two matters, the other central officials, consisting of three provinces, six ministries, nine temples, and five jurisdictions, were quickly selected by them and appointed by Lu Yuan, who then promoted them from their positions in the local authorities. In just over half a month, more than a hundred principal officials of these various central offices have been reassigned from the local prefectures and counties. After they left, local supporting officials were promoted to fill the vacancies. Although there are still many basic officials at the grassroots level, at least the framework has been set up and it is barely enough to maintain the most basic daily operations. Now they just need to get through the difficult times of the founding of the nation and wait for the new juren to fill the positions, which will naturally alleviate the shortage of officials. As for the hardships during this time. When Lu Yuan founded the country, nearly a thousand officials under his administration were promoted by one or two levels, and some were even promoted by four or five levels. Moreover, with the establishment of the new dynasty, there is a general celebration and Lu Yuan is now not short of money, and there are generous rewards for everyone. Under promotions and wealth, these officials are not complaining, but rather, they are all extremely happy and full of enthusiasm. After all, there are vacancies everywhere in the country, and if you do slightly better, you can be promoted. Who could miss such a good opportunity for promotion? Who would want to miss it? And amid all this busyness, the preparations for Lu Yuan¡¯s founding of the nation have gradually been completed. In the seventh year of Hongdao, on the fifteenth day of the sixth month. On Dongting Lake, thousands of battleships dock on the river, covering the entire lake like a dark cloud. Yang Jing and Shangguan Ming, leading the imperial army, arrived at Yiyang County as promised after a month and united with Lu Yuan. Having already received notice, Lu Yuan had someone wait on the pier to welcome the soldiers who were disembarking from the battleships in turns and heading to the already established camps. Amidst the busyness, Yang Jing, Shangguan Ming, Jihui the Holy Monk, and Qiao Kangquan finally met with Lu Yuan. In a lakeside restaurant on the pier, which had been cleared out, Lu Yuan, accompanied by Lan Cai¡¯er, welcomed these guests from afar. ¡°This time, we are leading an army of 140,000 and are accompanied by four Grandmasters, at the request of the King of Changsha. We have come a long way.¡± In the restaurant, Shangguan Ming sat at the table, staring directly at Lu Yuan, looking at the person he had been dealing with for a long time but had never met. After a long while, he asked, ¡°Now that the soldiers have arrived, when will the King of Changsha establish the nation and unite his forces with ours to march north?¡± Lu Yuan smiled slightly and shook his head, saying, ¡°The establishment of the country has been set for the 20th of this month, which is an auspicious day. On this day, I will worship heaven outside Fu City.¡± I will formally announce to the world the establishment of the nation and the founding of Changsha.¡± At that time, I would like to invite the generals and national teachers to come and witness the ceremony.¡± Inviting Shangguan Ming and other important officials of the court to attend the founding ceremony of the nation was something that Lu Yuan had planned long ago. Having these people present at the founding will make Changsha a more prestigious country. Because it represents the recognition of Da Yue¡¯s court for the Changsha nation. With this symbolic meaning, it will undoubtedly help Lu Yuan better unite the hearts of the Dongting Prefecture¡¯s people. As for this request, Shangguan Ming would not make things difficult. After all, they had already granted the nation, and they would not be bothered by this small matter, so he nodded slightly and said, ¡°That¡¯s no problem. On that day, the four of us will be there in person.¡± However, after finishing these words, Shangguan Ming continued to ask, ¡°Previously, the King of Changsha had said that after the establishment of the nation, our two countries would unite to break through Yiyang County, eliminate the Zhou people in the city, and then march northward with the army. Now that our 140,000 strong army has arrived, I wonder how the 100,000 strong army promised by the King of Yichang is preparing?¡± In Tianmen Prefecture of Jiangbei, Zhou Country has 300,000 soldiers. Among these 300,000 soldiers, 200,000 are elite soldiers of Zhou Country. The remaining 100,000 are Qiang soldiers under Li Xiong¡¯s command and defectors from the Yue people who have been gathered in Xichuan Prefecture. This force is not weak. Now Shangguan Ming has 140,000 soldiers on his side, and in Tianmen Prefecture City in Jiangbei, Bai Mengyang also has 20,000 soldiers. Together, they have only 160,000, which is just half the number of Zhou¡¯s soldiers. As for the Inborn Grandmasters, counting Li Yanjing and others in Yiyang City, Zhou has five Inborn Grandmasters. On the court side, there are also five people, just even with them. Therefore, going north with this strength, the court¡¯s hope of repelling Zhou and retaking Xichuan Prefecture is nothing more than wishful thinking. It is even questionable whether they can recapture Tianmen Prefecture. That is why the promise of 300,000 soldiers by Lu Yuan, Yan Wangqiu, and Su Xuange became an important force for the court to recover Xichuan Prefecture. Among the three, Lu Yuan¡¯s 100,000 soldiers are the most important. Who else can have an elite army of 100,000 soldiers under his command? This is also why, although they may be unhappy in their hearts, Shangguan Ming and others still come with respect at this time. Since they have given so much respect, Lu Yuan will naturally not refuse in return. At this time, he said, ¡°There are already 60,000 soldiers stationed outside Yiyang City, and 40,000 soldiers stationed outside Changsha City.¡± These 100,000 people are elite soldiers skilled in battle.¡± After the establishment of the nation, the army will set off, attack and break through Yiyang City, and eliminate the Zhou people here.¡± My 100,000-strong army will then head north.¡± Lu Yuan replied succinctly. Hearing him say this, Shangguan Ming finally showed a bit of a smile, ¡°Good! I will wait for the King of Changsha to go into battle.¡± Yang Jing and others on the side also showed smiles. Chapter 400 - Chapter 400: In Chapter 212, A Real Man Should Be Like This Chapter 400: In Chapter 212, A Real Man Should Be Like This Translator: 549690339 Hongdao, the seventh year, on the twentieth of the sixth month. Outside Changsha City, in the northern suburbs, at the Altar for Worshipping Heaven. Banners fluttering, long spears standing like a forest. A sea of red, divided into several groups, neatly spread across the plains. ¡°Screech!¡± A magnificent eagle circled in the sky, occasionally casting its sharp gaze below as it flapped its wings. In the mind of this airborne ruler, confusion abounded: What were these human beings below gathered for? Suddenly. Waves of sound rolled through the crowd below. ¡°Long live the victory! Long live the victory!¡± The soaring waves of sound startled the dancing eagle in the air. With fluttering wings, it swiftly headed towards a distant place, seeming to flee from this spot. On the plain. Lu Yuan, mounted on a red steed, wore bright yellow armor and slowly advanced through the open area between the large armies. Behind him followed a group of robust knights, clad in yellow armor and wielding long spears. Wherever the team passed, the soldiers on both sides would cheer, slamming their long spears on the ground, creating a rhythmic rumbling sound. In a sea of cheers, he walked through the long lines of soldiers and arrived at the Heavenly Altar in the forefront. Below the Heavenly Altar at this time, over a thousand invited scholars and local elites bowed their heads in reverence towards the approaching Lu Yuan. In this chaotic world, martial might reigns supreme. Even when founding a country, without an overwhelming display of martial force, it would not suffice to maintain the nation. The one about to ascend the throne, standing above all others, undoubtedly possessed the strongest martial power. Only a king of this caliber could protect the territories and ensure the safety of the people. In Dongting District, ravaged by war for several years, such a king was needed to appease the region. Lu Yuan¡¯s gaze swept over these local gentry, with none daring to meet his eyes. On this day, during this king¡¯s coronation, he became the protagonist for all, the sole radiance under the Heavenly Vault. A sense of indescribable accomplishment and pride surged from within Lu Yuan¡¯s heart. At this moment, he understood Liu Bang¡¯s remark after seeing Emperor Qin¡¯s processions: ¡°A great man should be like this.¡± He knew the grandiosity of sweeping the world and defining Heaven in the future. This supreme power, where every person bows low, and all heed the king¡¯s commands, is indeed intoxicating. Dismounting from his horse, Lu Yuan handed the reins to an attendant behind him. Pressing his hand on the sword at his waist, he climbed the red-carpeted steps before him. On both sides of the red carpet, civil and military officials¡ªalready clad in their New Dynasty official uniforms¡ªbowed and pledged their allegiance as he passed. Step by step, he walked with unwavering strength and determination. Soon, the 135 steps of the three-tiered stairway erected as per protocol were traversed. Upon reaching the highest level, Heavenly Envoy Yang Jing, contemplating the newly-crowned king before him, took the imperial edict and read aloud: ¡°By orders of Heaven¡­ ¡­General Lu Yuan of the Southern Expedition, who has conquered rebellion and stabilized Dongting¡­ For such merit and virtue, there is no greater reward than the establishment of a nation¡­ The imperial edict is clear and grants thee in Heaven¡¯s name. Today, bestow upon thee the land of Dongting, in recognition of Lu Yuan¡¯s contributions, to found the nation of Changsha, and ascend as king, establishing the foundation of the vassal state under the imperial court¡¯s jurisdiction. May you maintain secure governance¡­¡± After a brief moment, Yang Jing completed the reading of the several hundred characters of the imperial edict, then folded it and handed it to Lu Yuan, saying, ¡°King of Changsha, receive the edict.¡± ¡°I, King of Changsha, Lu Yuan, receive the edict.¡± Lu Yuan stared at the proffered edict, took a deep breath, and then firmly took it. An attendant quickly took it from him, then helped him remove his armor and replace it with a king¡¯s robe, donned the crown, and handed over the royal seal, thus completing his transformation in status. After these preparations, an attendant handed him a document containing prayers for worshipping Heaven. Seeing this, Yang Jing silently sighed, then retreated to the side with Shangguan Ming and others who had come to watch the ceremony, their emotions mixed. The two court-appointed noblemen were understandably saddened and concerned, lamenting the decline of the Altars of Soil and Grain. However, both the monk Jihui and Qiao Kangquan felt a sense of joy and envy. These two had also been promised by the imperial court the privilege of founding their own nations and ruling over their territories. And now, Lu Yuan and Yan Wangqiu had successively established their nations and fulfilled their ambitions. Especially today, with the enthronement of Lu Yuan presiding over thousands of troops, numerous officials, and his subjects, he was at the height of prestige and power. Witnessing this scene, both of the aspiring lords felt inspired to follow suit. They secretly pledged to surpass the grandeur of this event when they ascended to the throne. At that time, they would invite fifty thousand, no, one hundred thousand people to celebrate and request the imperial court¡¯s presence for the ceremony. They must not let Lu Yuan¡¯s splendor overshadow their own. As these thoughts swirled in their minds. Lu Yuan before them had already begun reading the prayer for worshipping Heaven: ¡°I, King of Changsha, Lu Yuan, in a message to the Heavenly Emperor¡­ Today, at this place, I establish the nation of Changsha and become its king. May Heaven witness and Earth support me, blessing my dynasty.¡± Having finished reading the last line of the prayer, Lu Yuan flung the document towards the bronze cauldron representing the Altars of Soil and Grain, located in the center of the Heavenly Altar. In an instant, the document was thrown into the cauldron and consumed by the flames within, offering the prayer to Heaven and Earth. As the document was consumed by the fire, Lu Yuan turned around, his tiger-like eyes fixed upon the countless officials and soldiers below. Then, summoning his true pneuma, he shouted, ¡°I hereby announce, as of today, the nation of Changsha is established, and I am its king!¡± Chapter 401 - Chapter 401: Chapter 212, A Real Man Should Be Like This_2 Chapter 401: Chapter 212, A Real Man Should Be Like This_2 Translator: 549690339 The sound was as loud as thunder, propelled by the True pneuma, it echoed instantly across the wilderness. The army of officials below who heard this sound instantly knelt and worshipped as if rehearsed beforehand, shouting in unison, ¡°Long live Changsha! Long live the king! Congratulations to the king!¡± Three phrases, neatly synchronized, echoed between Heaven and Earth. Lu Yuan, hearing these cheers, stood on top of the Heavenly Altar, looking down at the figures kneeling and bowing, feeling a surge of ambition, couldn¡¯t help but ponder. ¡®Among all these people below, is there anyone who wants to replace me?¡¯ The throne of a king not only represents power and wealth but also represents duties and dangers. Today, he was the king of Changsha, enjoying the prosperity of a region, ruling over a million people. But who knows if within this land, there is no one eyeing his position, coveting his power, wanting to replace him? ¡®But no matter if there is a Xiang Yu or not, as long as this king is here, this Changsha and this territory of Dongting cannot be turned upside down.¡¯ With such thoughts in his mind, Lu Yuan closed his eyes slightly, facing the sunshine falling from the sky, starting to enjoy the cheers. Since he crossed over, seventeen years had passed. This body was thirty-two years old. Today, he finally ascended the throne and became the king, commanding a region alone. When he first crossed over, in that cold cave, he vowed to be a king, to lead a million troops, to have saints and witches as wives, to have three thousand beauties in the palace, to achieve major success in martial arts, to be unrivaled in the world. His dreams today are half fulfilled. What a pleasure and joy it is to achieve this as a man! A great man should be like this. On this day, in the seventh year, the sixth month, and the twentieth day of Hongdao, Lu Yuan performed a sacrificial ceremony outside Changsha city, ascended the throne, and established the Kingdom of Changsha. After that, he conferred ranks on all the officials, assigning his disciple Zhou Qing as the Grand General, in charge of military affairs. He appointed Cui Changqing as the Left Chancellor and Sun Siwen as the Right Chancellor, and the two jointly managed governmental affairs. All other military officers and officials were also appointed to countless ranks. Later that day, on top of the Heavenly Altar, Lu Yuan personally announced that he would lead 100,000 troops to carry out the Northern Expedition against the Zhou People to recover Tianmen Prefecture, the lost territory of the kingdom. The army of forty thousand troops arrayed below instantly moved, heading north, straight towards Yiyang. Several days later, outside Yiyang City. As soon as Lu Yuan led his troops here, the gates of Yiyang city were already wide open. ¡°Your Majesty, three days ago, when the news of Your Majesty¡¯s ascension to the throne and the northern expedition of our troops was received. The Zhou¡¯s defenders in Yiyang city deserted the city and fled north. We pursued them for hundreds of miles, killing more than two thousand bandits and capturing more than four thousand, while a thousand bandits scattered and ran rampant, and we were able to pursue and capture them. However, the Rebel Head Li Yanjing and others escaped with hundreds of surviving soldiers, and we failed to catch up. Please punish me.¡± At the city gate, Lu Yuan¡¯s disciple, Chu Wei, who had been left behind to guard the place, reported and sought for punishment. After listening, Lu Yuan was slightly surprised. He did not expect Li Yanjing and the others to flee without fighting. But on second thought, it made sense. Previously, although he had surrounded Yiyang city with his troops, he did not launch a strong attack and just surrounded the city. Given this situation where he was also cautiously monitoring the move of the imperial court across the river, the Zhou People naturally believed that they had room for negotiation. So, they sent messengers to try to persuade Lu Yuan to surrender. During that period, he had shown goodwill to gain the Zhou People¡¯s support and even allowed the Zhou People in Yiyang city to leave the city for firewood and water, showing a friendly relationship. At that time, even though Li Yanjing and the others were surrounded, they did not panic because they had hope. However, now that the news of Lu Yuan¡¯s acceptance of the imperial appointment and the establishment of the Kingdom of Changsha has been confirmed, all their hopes and illusions naturally crumbled. Especially a few days ago, when the imperial court gathered hundreds of thousands of troops and put up the flags of Shangguan Ming and Yang Jing, it made Li Yanjing and the others panic even more. After all, in addition to Lu Yuan¡¯s besieging army outside the city, it would amount to more than two hundred thousand strong troops and six Inborn Grandmasters. This, whether in terms of ordinary soldiers or inborn combat power, already surpassed Li Yanjing and the others. If these Zhou Grandmasters stayed in the city, then when Lu Yuan¡¯s troops arrived, they would most likely be trapped. If these three Zhou inborn grandmasters could be detained at once, Lu Yuan would not let go of this opportunity. As long as Li Yanjing and the others can be kept here and eliminated. The Zhou would lose three inborn grandmasters at once, half of their top combat power would be lost directly, and they would no longer pose a threat. By that time, the pressure on Lu Yuan¡¯s northern borders would be greatly relieved. He would no longer have to worry all the time about when the Zhou People would cross the river to attack his kingdom. What a pity. It seems that Li Yanjing and the others also understood this point, so they deserted the city and fled as soon as Lu Yuan officially turned to Yue Country. Now that the three inborn grandmasters have left Yiyang, they have a vast world to escape to. Catching them would be extremely difficult, almost impossible. ¡°Never mind. Recovering Yiyang County Town is a good thing.¡± With such a sigh in his heart, Lu Yuan looked at his disciple and shook his head, ¡°As for Li Yanjing and the others, they are all inborn grandmasters. It is normal for you to not be able to stop them without the help from an Innate Master. Get up.¡± With the strength of an Inborn Grandmaster, unless the person is stubbornly resisting a large army. It is still very easy to find a direction to break out in a large army. Not to mention that there were as much as three inborn grandmasters in the city. It¡¯s perfectly normal for his disciple not to be able to stop them. Even if he could stop them, it would be abnormal. Chapter 402 - Chapter 402: Chapter 212: A Real Man Should Be Like This_3 Chapter 402: Chapter 212: A Real Man Should Be Like This_3 Translator: 549690339 ¡°Thank you, King Xie, for your understanding.¡± When Chu Wei heard his Master, who had already ascended the throne as king, speak like this, he breathed a sigh of relief in his heart. Actually. There was indeed some worry in this disciple¡¯s heart that with the new dynasty established and failing to stop Li Yanjing and others, would his Master become angry out of shame and make an example of him by killing him. It seems now that he had overthought it. Feeling somewhat relieved, he quickly ordered the city gate to be opened, and then led Lu Yuan¡¯s team into the city and towards the already tidied up government office. After entering the city and settling down, Lu Yuan called Yang Jing and others together to discuss matters at the county government office. ¡°Now that the Li Yanjing heard of our mighty army coming, they fled in fear and abandoned the city, and Yiyang County was recovered without effort.¡± Lu Yuan looked at the several generals and the national advisor of Yue Country and said seriously, ¡°Since this is the case, the enemy in Jiangnan has scattered. In my opinion, we should seize the victory and march northward, cross the river, and fight the enemy.¡± After the founding of the country, Lu Yuan¡¯s desire for battle with Zhou Country began to rise sharply. Among the ten prefectures of Dongting, only Jiangnan has nine prefectures under his control. The remaining Tianmen Prefecture in the north is still in enemy hands. Even the original Baling County city, the capital of the county, is not under his control and is still held by the court. This is also one of the conditions agreed upon by the court and Lu Yuan in their discussions. The court granted Lu Yuan the title of king and allowed him to establish a country, and in return, Lu Yuan temporarily entrusted the control of Dongting County city to the court, serving as a logistical support base for the court¡¯s northern army. Before repelling the Zhou People and recapturing Xichuan County, neither Baling County city nor Tianmen Prefecture would be returned by the court. So in order for Lu Yuan to make his territory complete, particularly to take back the highly symbolic Baling city, he must first help the court repel the Zhou People. As a result, after the founding of the country, Lu Yuan naturally became extremely active in launching the Northern Expedition. He planned to use Baling City as the capital and wanted it under his control. How could this make sense if the capital of his country was controlled by the court? What? Why is it called Changsha Country, but not choosing to establish the capital in Changsha Prefecture, and instead run to Baling city? This brings us to the advantageous conditions in Baling. First of all, economically, the city is situated by the river, with the Yangtze River waterway linking the North and the South, and connecting the three nations, making it very prosperous. Secondly, in terms of agriculture, Yueyang Prefecture, where Baling City is located, also benefits from the irrigation of the Yangtze River, with fertile land and high-quality grain production. Lastly, in terms of military, Baling City controls the Yangtze River waterway. As long as this city is well-guarded, the Yangtze River can be cut off, and it can also guard against the invasion of enemies from the north and maintain a distance from the area north of the river. With these three aspects, Baling is an extremely advantageous major city, and it is naturally the best choice for a capital city. It was precisely because of this advantage that the court of Yue Country chose to place the county government in this location. As for choosing Changsha Prefecture, it would have worse economic and agricultural conditions, and it would not necessarily be safer from a military perspective. Only Lu Yuan¡¯s brain could have come up with such an idea. However, when facing his active request for battle, Shangguan Ming and others, who had always urged Lu Yuan to send troops, suddenly lost their momentum. ¡°King Changsha, there¡¯s no need to rush.¡± Shangguan Ming looked at Lu Yuan and shook his head, ¡°It¡¯s natural to fight the enemy. But at present, the major armies from all directions have not yet arrived, and it is not easy for us to repel the enemy with our limited power. Let¡¯s wait for the arrival of the armies of King of Nanhai and King of Ninghai. When our four-sided armies gather, we can launch the Northern Expedition. By then, we will have an army of nearly 500,000 soldiers and nine Inborn Grandmasters. With such a mighty force crossing the river and heading northward, what¡¯s there to worry about the Zhou People not being defeated?¡± The court had originally agreed with Lu Yuan and the other two parties that after the establishment of the Three Nations, they should each send 100,000 troops to help the court repel the Zhou People. Now that Lu Yuan, who is closest and established his kingdom the latest, has fulfilled his promise to lead an army of 100,000 to join the forces. He even brought along an Inborn Grandmaster Lan Cai¡¯er, which shows his utmost sincerity. But what about the two people, Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange, who had established their countries early and were in Lingnan? Where are the 200,000 troops they promised? If the court and Lu Yuan led the army northward at this time, It wouldn¡¯t be impossible for both sides to fight the Zhou People together on their own strength. However, isn¡¯t this just letting Ninghai Country and Nanhai Country use them as cannon fodder, sending their own troops and horses to fight a war for the two countries? There¡¯s no such easy thing in the world. Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan frowned and said, ¡°Both Nanhai and Ninghai countries have just been established, and their national affairs are not yet well-handled, let alone gathering troops. Wouldn¡¯t we have to wait another six months for them to lead their troops from Lingnan? We have hundreds of thousands of troops stationed here, with people eating and horses chewing away at supplies every day. How can we afford to wait? Moreover, the soldiers of Lingnan are simply not capable of fighting. Counting on the 200,000 troops from these two countries is worse than us going directly north and fighting a life-and-death battle with the Zhou People.¡± Sometimes, having more troops isn¡¯t always better. In a major war with direct confrontation, the truly useful forces are still those well-trained, experienced, elite soldiers and strong generals. But in Lingnan, there has been peace in recent years, and since the fall of Jinghai Country, there have been no major wars. Over the years, apart from some local prefecture and county soldiers, are there any other elites in the country? As for those local prefecture and county soldiers, it would already be an issue for both countries combined to even gather 20,000 of them. In this situation, what can they do for Nanhai and Ninghai countries to send 100,000 troops each? They probably wouldn¡¯t even have the ability to forcibly conscript strong men to fill the numbers, let alone now. By the time the two countries¡¯ internal affairs are sorted out, it will take several more months. And for them to send troops to march northward, the time will only grow longer. Chapter 403 - Chapter 403: Chapter 213: Deploying Troops for the Northern Expedition Chapter 403: Chapter 213: Deploying Troops for the Northern Expedition Translator: 549690339 During such a long time, Lu Yuan was waiting to gather troops. His 100,000-strong army, stationed here every day, saw several tens of thousands of silver tales flow out. How could he bear such expenses by merely waiting? What he was waiting for was not time but silver tales. Unless your court helps me pay for this expenditure, Lu Yuan won¡¯t be willing to suffer this loss. However, regarding Lu Yuan¡¯s words, Shangguan Ming just smiled: ¡°In military campaigns, prudence must always come first. Consider defeat before considering victory. Now that the troops haven¡¯t arrived yet, how can we move the army rashly? As for the consumption of food and fodder. My command of more than 100,000 troops, from Linhai and Yuzhang Prefectures, have never complained about the long-distance supply of food. Given that Changsha has only 100,000 troops and is within the country, they can be supplied locally. So how can they not be supported?¡± For the Da Yue court, after experiencing a series of failures and the death of a substantial number of troops under its command, the loss of cities and territories and shrinking control was significant. But correspondingly, the original huge financial pressure suddenly vanished. Especially for Lu Yuan¡¯s 100,000-strong army, since his independent founding of the nation, the finances and army provisions were raised by the state of Changsha. Without the burden of these 100,000 people, the financial expenditure that the court had to bear consisted of only Shangguan Ming¡¯s and Yang Jing¡¯s 140,000 troops, 50,000 Yangtze Navy soldiers, and Bai Mengyang¡¯s 20,000 Tianmen defenders. Although these three forces added up to 210,000 soldiers, For the court controlling Yuzhang and Linhai Prefectures, there was more than enough supply to support these troops¡¯ financial expenses. By taking out only half of the annual fiscal revenue, it would be sufficient to support these troops. Under such circumstances, let alone waiting for half a year, even if it took three or ten years, the court would not feel threatened. Even with darker thoughts. Actually, by dragging it out like this, it might not be a bad thing for the court. Because Yuzhang and Linhai Prefectures are wealthy, and the court also controls Guangling and Jianan Prefectures, with the foundation of these four prefectures. After ten years of recuperation, more than half of their vitality could be restored. By then, the court could muster another 200,000 or 300,000 troops to fight the world. At that time, if Lu Yuan¡¯s army was still being dragged down and constantly bleeding and consuming resources, he would have difficulty recovering his vitality. How would he resist when the court attacked their forces? Once Lu Yuan is defeated, without his protection, both Southsea and Ninghai nations may surrender without a fight. By then, perhaps it would not need Shen Qiu¡¯s proposal to spend twenty or thirty years recuperating and reclaiming their lost territories within another two or three decades. Perhaps in just ten years, the court could regain the past territories and once again prosper. Therefore, for the court at this time, dragging out the conflict for a longer period was actually a good thing. However, with Shangguan Ming¡¯s calculations, there was no way that Lu Yuan would genuinely comply with the other¡¯s wishes. Although his current financial strength could support his army of 100,000 for five or six years. Even with the initial agreement with Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange, with their help in sharing the military expenses, the possibility of fighting for ten years was not out of the question. But if he had so much money, wouldn¡¯t it be better to raise an additional 100,000 troops and use it to develop local infrastructure and strengthen national power? Why waste it here? So, after hearing Shangguan Ming¡¯s words, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but sneer, ¡°If the court thinks this way, then don¡¯t blame me for disbanding my troops and refusing to accompany you. Moreover, if you don¡¯t want to fight, just return Baling City to me. This place is of great importance to my country, and I can¡¯t have irrelevant people stationed here.¡± According to the agreement with the court, Baling City was leased to them until the Zhou people were repelled. Since the court no longer has any intention of fighting the Zhou people, the conditions for leasing the city naturally become invalid. By then, Lu Yuan would certainly not tolerate others stationing a hundred thousand troops on his land and would naturally want to drive these people out. As for whether these people would abandon Tianmen Prefecture City and the Yangtze Defense Line after leaving? Regarding this, Lu Yuan just wanted to say. If the court dared to do so, he would dare to have his entire nation surrender. At worst, he could just submit to the Zhou people and found a fiefdom elsewhere while keeping his kingship. As for the court¡¯s side, that might not be the case. ¡°You¡­¡± Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s words, Shangguan Ming stood up in anger as his calculations couldn¡¯t be achieved. Yang Jing, who was next to him, quickly stepped forward to mediate, ¡°Alright, Brother Shangguan, King of Changsha, don¡¯t quarrel. We are all on the same side, and this display does not befit our status.¡± Holding Shangguan Ming back, Yang Jing looked at Lu Yuan and said, ¡°General Lu¡¯s words do make sense. Our hundreds of thousands of troops are stationed here, consuming resources every day without making a move. It is indeed difficult to justify. How about this? Let¡¯s lead our troops to Baling City first. Then we can each allocate a portion of our troops to cross the river in advance and assist Wuan Marquis. Once the situation in the city has been stabilized, we can continue to send troops northward to gradually reclaim the lost territories of Tianmen Prefecture. In the meantime, we can also wait for reinforcements from Southsea and Ninghai nations. What does King of Changsha think of this arrangement?¡± Hearing these words, Lu Yuan pondered and finally nodded slowly, ¡°If that¡¯s the case, I have no objections.¡± Upon receiving the response, Yang Jing looked at Shangguan Ming, who snorted coldly, ¡°So be it.¡± As his words fell, the atmosphere in the room instantly eased. Then both sides resumed discussions on how to deploy troops to Baling City. Eventually, due to limited trust between the two parties, it was finally decided. Shangguan Ming¡¯s court soldiers would take the same boat northward, as they had come. Lu Yuan, on the other hand, would travel by land, taking the official road to Baling City. Chapter 404 - Chapter 404: Chapter 213: Deploying Troops for the Northern Expedition_2 Chapter 404: Chapter 213: Deploying Troops for the Northern Expedition_2 Translator: 549690339 Both sides eventually met under the city of Baling. With a plan in place, Lu Yuan and Shangguan Ming, who could not see eye to eye, stopped spending time together and went their separate ways. Shangguan Ming even boarded his warship and led his troops north that very day. Lu Yuan, on the other hand, continued to stay in Yiyang City and did not rush to leave. This was not because he was saying one thing and doing another, talking about inviting battle but actually shrinking back in fear. The reason for Lu Yuan¡¯s stay here was that the weapon and equipment assistance promised to him by Dan Ding Path had finally arrived after more than half a year. On the surface of Dongting Lake outside Yiyang City, dozens of ships floated in, one by one, entering the pier. Lu Yuan and True Person Anqiu boarded the ship, came to the cabin, lifted a large box, and then pointed at the iron armor sealed inside with waxed paper, saying, ¡°My king, I promised 10,000 sets of iron armor, 10,000 strong crossbows, 30,000 strong bows, and 50,000 knives and spears. They have all been sent here. Your Majesty only needs to let people take the supplies from the ship and equip them for the army.¡± Lu Yuan looked at the iron armor in the middle, his heart rejoicing, and couldn¡¯t help but touch it. It felt cold in his hand, smooth on the armor surface, and heavy in quality. It was obviously top-notch defensive equipment. Having this batch of weapons and armor sent over before the army set off, his chances of winning this northern expedition would be even greater. Thinking about this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but be joyful, ¡°With the help of your Dao, I have nothing to worry about defeating the Zhou people.¡± Upon hearing this, True Person Anqiu, who was next to him, also showed a smile, but couldn¡¯t help but remind him, ¡°Your Majesty, all the assistance that our sect should give has been sent. A few years have passed, shouldn¡¯t there be some progress in your cultivation of the Taiping Dao Book?¡± Dan Ding Path¡¯s help for Lu Yuan was not for charity. Their goal from the beginning was to have Lu Yuan practice the Taiping Dao Book and then use him to verify the modified techniques. Essentially, they were using Lu Yuan as a guinea pig. Now that the guinea pig had been fattened, wasn¡¯t it time to take it out and carry out experiments? Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan looked serene and said, ¡°True Person, don¡¯t worry. Over there in Yangshan Prefecture, the altar for worshiping the Heavenly Pillar is almost completed, and it will be done before the end of the year. When the time comes, I will make time to go, worship the Heavenly Pillar, and then begin cultivating.¡± True Person Anqiu was satisfied with this specific time and did not push any further, but smiled and said, ¡°Your Majesty, don¡¯t blame us, it¡¯s just that the Taiping Dao Book is truly important to our sect¡¯s future and we had to urge you. It¡¯s not that we don¡¯t trust you.¡± Lu Yuan shook his head, smiling and said, ¡°I understand. Dan Ding Path has helped me a lot, there is no need for True Person to explain further.¡± True Person Anqiu smiled, ¡°In that case, Your Majesty, hurry up and let someone transport these arms down. The army is about to set out, and the situation is dangerous, so there must be no delay.¡± Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°That¡¯s exactly right, I¡¯ll make arrangements here.¡± Afterward, the two of them left the ship together. Then Lu Yuan arranged for people to transport the supplies from the ship. It took a few more days to distribute all the newly arrived arms and equipment. This time, the weapons and armor provided by Dan Ding Path were enough to arm thirty or forty thousand people. For this northern expedition, the 100,000-strong army led by Lu Yuan consisted of 40,000 soldiers and 60,000 Miao soldiers. This batch of military aid was just enough to meet the needs of the soldiers. So he gave all these military supplies to his own soldiers, re-equipping them completely, and then distributed the equipment replaced by the soldiers to the Miao soldiers who only had crude weapons. As a result, the entire 100,000-strong army had changed their weapons and armor, greatly increasing their chances of survival, and morale soared. Lu Yuan took this opportunity to announce the army¡¯s march to the north. Suddenly, the 100,000-strong army marched forward, with an overwhelming momentum, shaking both heaven and earth. Hongdao the Seventh Year, Seventh Month, Twelfth Day. Lu Yuan led his army to Dongting Prefecture, where he joined forces with Shangguan Ming and others who had arrived earlier. After discussions between the two armies, Lu Yuan dispatched 10,000 soldiers and 30,000 Miao soldiers, led by General Chu Wei, to cross the river. Shangguan Ming also sent 40,000 soldiers led by Yang Jing to cross the river together. The combined forces of the two armies, totaling 70,000, crossed the Yangtze River in three days and entered Tianmen Prefecture City under the protection of the court¡¯s navy. With this assistance, Bai Mengyang¡¯s forces in the city instantly increased to 100,000. The precarious situation of Tianmen Prefecture City stabilized in an instant. Subsequently, Wuan Marquis voluntarily led his troops out of the city to fight. He fought three battles with the Zhou people outside the city, with tens of thousands of casualties on both sides, eventually forcing the Zhou people to retreat from Tianmen Prefecture City and lifting the siege. The besieged Tianmen Prefecture City was finally relieved after two years. Taking advantage of this opportunity, both Shangguan Ming and Lu Yuan each reinforced their armies from Jiangnan with 20,000 more soldiers to aid Wuan Marquis. The joint forces took the opportunity to launch a large-scale offensive, recovering two county towns near the prefecture city and stationed heavy troops in the cities, which were mutually reinforcing with the prefecture city. In this way, the joint forces had three strongholds in the north of the river and finally established a foothold. After regrouping, the Zhou people also led their remaining forces of more than 200,000 to confront the joint forces. Small and large battles between the two sides continued every day, and the smoke of war remained unabated. They both continued to consume each other in this manner. While the northern region of Dongting Prefecture was in the midst of fierce fighting. In Lingnan, Nanhai Country. Inside the royal palace of Nanhai, rebuilt from the former emperor¡¯s palace, Yan Wangqiu was also dealing with his own messy situation. ¡°Your Majesty, the court over there is urging again, saying that the war with Zhou people in the north is becoming more intense, with thousands of casualties among soldiers every day, and the troops and horses are getting more and more scarce. They ask when we will send troops to reinforce the north.¡± Below, a former sect greeter elder who had now become the new dynasty¡¯s Assistant Minister of Rites, complained to Yan Wangqiu at this moment. Chapter 405 - Chapter 405: Chapter 213: Deploying Troops for the Northern Expedition_3 Chapter 405: Chapter 213: Deploying Troops for the Northern Expedition_3 Translator: 549690339 Now it is already August, the beginning of autumn, and it has been three months since the establishment of Nanhai Country. Such a long time may only be a short moment for a newly established country, not even enough to sort out its internal affairs. But for a battle involving hundreds of thousands of people, it is already a considerable length of time. Some quickly concluded battles have even finished within the three months¡¯ time. Therefore, even though Nanhai Country is still in a mess, the messengers from the court have been coming in waves every few days, and have not stopped since the founding of Nanhai. Listening to these reports, Yan Wangqiu said with a hint of premonition: ¡°Haven¡¯t I already said it? Let your response to the court be that Nanhai Country has just been established, and we have not even properly arranged the appointments of our government officials. Even our troops are still only from the original local county soldiers. Together they barely exceed ten thousand; how can I gather a hundred thousand troops for them?¡± The official below said: ¡°I have said this, but the court¡¯s messenger said that the country of Changsha, which was established later than ours by two months, has already gathered a hundred thousand soldiers and has even led the troops northward across the river to fight against the Zhou people. If Changsha can do it, why can¡¯t we? Hence, the court¡¯s messenger insisted that we are deliberately delaying and refusing to send troops. He even threatened that if our country does not send troops, it would be a breach of promise. By that time, the imperial edict would not favor us and Nanhai Country, which has already been sealed, would be taken back. He advises our country to think thrice.¡± ¡°How dare he!¡± Yan Wangqiu was furious upon hearing this, but after his anger subsided, he fell into despondency. Having established the country for three months, after the initial excitement, this old lord finally experienced the troubles of being a ruler with numerous tasks to handle. The distribution of interests within the country, the appointment of local officials, the establishment of central institutions, and so many other issues seemed endless, leaving the former grandmaster exhausted and overwhelmed. After the difficult task of filling the positions of the country¡¯s officials and the local governments was completed, another major problem arose: how to run the national affairs and get the machinery of Nanhai Country up and running. Although in this world, martial artists who want to cultivate to a profound realm cannot help but study, read Buddhist and Taoist scriptures, and cultivate themselves. Considering cultural accomplishments alone, most second-rate martial artists are not bad, even comparable to ordinary scholars. Furthermore, first-rate martial artists are not necessarily worse off compared to Juren and Jinshi (candidates who passed the imperial examinations). However, cultural accomplishments are one thing, and handling government affairs is another. The martial artists of Nanhai Sect originally studied to improve their martial arts for fighting and killing. Their cultural accomplishments were mostly aimed at enhancing their state of mind. But to govern the country, it¡¯s far from enough to have only state of mind and culture. How should local affairs be managed, how should taxes be levied on the people, how should cases of injustice be pronounced, how should water conservancy projects and official roads be repaired, how should local security be maintained, how should labor be reasonably recruited, how should the interests of the local grassroots be maintained, and how should they deal with the demands of the court officials?¡¯ And so on, all these issues cannot be dealt with by just a cultured martial artist. In fact, had the Nanhai Sect wholly taken over the officials left behind by the court, they could have efficiently established a new dynasty. But the experienced officials left behind by the court were mostly kicked out by the Nanhai Sect. As a result, the only shortcut for the Nanhai Sect was gone. For these originally professional martial artists to successfully transform into qualified court officials would take an unknown number of years. The various losses, wasted time, and costs during this period are unimaginable. At this moment, Yan Wangqiu even regretted dismissing those local officials and envied his ally Lu Yuan. He wondered how Lu Yuan was able to clear up domestic affairs within a short month and send troops northward. Not to mention anything else, just this control over the domestic situation was far stronger than his Nanhai Country. How good it would be if he could do the same. But after his envy, he could only sigh and return to reality, looking at the official below and saying, ¡°Never mind. Let the Military Department issue a document ordering the local governments and counties to start recruiting civilian workers and gather a hundred thousand soldiers.¡± Let¡¯s gather a hundred thousand soldiers first, and then let General Qian lead them northward to respond to the court.¡± With the preliminary sorting of the court and local institutions, although there is still a lot of discordance, They can barely manage to mobilize a hundred thousand civilian workers. However, this way there should be no expectations on how much combat power these civilian workers will bring.¡± The official below heard the words and breathed a sigh of relief, responding promptly: ¡°The official obeys.¡± Having finished discussing this matter, Yan Wangqiu wished to continue handling government affairs, but noticing that the official below had not left, he asked: ¡°Is there anything else?¡± The official hurriedly replied: ¡°There is a letter from Changsha Country. When Changsha was first established, more than half of the domestic officials were short-staffed, and there were not enough scholars to fill the positions in the country. Therefore, the King of Changsha sent an envoy to ask for our country¡¯s permission to let our scholars go to Changsha for the imperial examination and fill the shortage of officials. This matter has been urged several times by the other party. Your Majesty was busy with government affairs before and did not reply. Since they have been waiting for nearly a month now, it really can¡¯t be dragged on any longer. Please make a decision, Your Majesty.¡± ¡°Oh, that matter¡­¡± Upon hearing the reminder, Yan Wangqiu recalled the matter of Lu Yuan sending an envoy earlier and asking for support with scholars. At that time, he was busy allocating interests to various parties within the country and could not spare any attention to this matter, so he did not reply. Now that everything else is taken care of, it is indeed time to give him a reply. Otherwise, it would not be proper for him to act as an ally. Chapter 406 - Chapter 406: Chapter 214 The Heart’s Desire Chapter 406: Chapter 214 The Heart¡¯s Desire Translator: 549690339 After pondering for a moment, Yan Wangqiu said, ¡°As far as I remember, there are over six thousand people in our country who have obtained a Scholar¡¯s Degree or higher, right?¡± The minister below immediately answered, ¡°Indeed, your Majesty. Across our ten government offices and hundred counties, there are five thousand six hundred and thirty-one scholars and eight hundred and twenty-three Jurens.¡± ¡°Hmm, eight hundred and twenty-three Jurens, that is a bit too much,¡± Yan Wangqiu slightly frowned. In the entire Nanhai Country, even considering all government vacancies created since the founding of the Kingdom, we only have about two thousand positions. Of these two thousand positions, more than seventy percent are occupied by the Nanhai Sect¡¯s trusted pioneers. The remaining over five hundred positions need to be allocated to the local gentry and influential magnates of the South Sea Prefecture. Therefore, only about three hundred vacancies are left for those Jurens. Obviously. Such few positions are far from enough to accommodate the current Jurens. Let alone the more than five thousand scholars beneath them. These people have spent ten years studying and taking exams with the aim of becoming officials. Would the Jurens and scholars be content if you do not provide them with official positions? Currently, they may not dare to openly protest against Yan Wangqiu due to his powerful inborn grandmaster¡¯s strength, even if they harbor resentment and dissatisfaction. But, don¡¯t forget. Yan Wangqiu does not have many years left to live. The old grandmaster¡¯s original reason to get involved in politics was because there was no one qualified to succeed him in his sect, so he sought a way out through the officialdom. Now that a way out has been found, whether this path can be followed successfully and for a long time depends on his ability. But judging from the current situation, the Nanhai Sect obviously lacks the ability to effectively integrate the country¡¯s forces and ensure the stable inheritance of this new nation. Leaving other things aside, the over six thousand scholars have now become a major hidden danger of Nanhai Country. Who amongst those who study and pass the scholar exam don¡¯t come from families with some wealth and power? In their localities, they are regarded as prestigious individuals. If you deprive them of their future prospects and harbor deep resentment, wouldn¡¯t they retaliate when they have the chance? So for Nanhai Country, appeasing these scholars has become an urgent issue. But for these scholars, the best way to appease them is naturally to give them official positions. However, the key problem is that Nanhai Country has no official positions left to distribute. Exactly because they lack official positions to appease them, the scholars within the country are so antagonistic towards this little Nanhai government. Yan Wangqiu had been racking his brains about how to deal with this issue. But after dealing with trivial matters and reexamining Changsha Country¡¯s request, his perspective suddenly changed. Right. Even if there are no official positions in his own country, there are plenty in the neighboring Changsha Country. Having spent a year in Changsha Country, Yan Wangqiu knew its sorry state all too well. Being harassed by the Miao people for four years, Changsha Country had not only lost their scholars but also many common people. Song Lu, the leader of a nomadic sect, who had just established a new country, was looking for trustworthy hands, so he had to seek help from the world¡¯s scholars. Isn¡¯t this a happy coincidence? On one side, there are positions without people to fill them, and on the other, there are more people than available positions. By complementing each other, there could be a perfect cooperation. In an instant, Changsha would have people to fill in their vacant official positions, and he could eliminate potential threats and appease his scholars. After quickly calculating it in his heart, Yan Wangqiu waved his hand and said, ¡°Seeing as the King of Changsha has sent a messenger to form an alliance with us, I cannot refuse. Let¡¯s do it this way, disseminate an announcement to our scholars stating that Changsha Country is widely recruiting talented scholars. All those with ambition in our country can go there to seek a government position. Aren¡¯t all these scholars complaining to me about not giving them official positions? ¡± Now I have provided them with an opportunity. If they are capable, they should go to Changsha Country to compete for it. Changsha Country has over a thousand government vacancies, right? If they fail to secure a position this time, they can no longer blame anyone else.¡± The ministers below immediately responded with admiration, ¡°Your Majesty is sage and insightful. We admire you.¡± One day after. In the capital of Nanhai Country. Newly written notices were posted outside city gates, government offices, markets, and the palace. The announcement officers banged the gongs a few times to attract a large crowd. At this moment, outside the palace gate. The leading palace guard pointed at the red notice and said to the gathered crowd, ¡°Changsha Country was newly established and currently has over seventeen hundred vacancies. Their sovereign asked our country for assistance, and our king agreed. Therefore, a talent recruitment notice has been issued. All scholars or higher in our country who have ambition can go to Changsha Country to seek a government position through the imperial examination. The date of the imperial examination in Changsha Country is tentatively set for the first day of November, which is two months away. If there are Jurens or scholars in your family, they can go to Changsha Country to take the exam. This time Changsha Country has over seventeen hundred vacancies for government positions. As long as you make a little effort, it should not be difficult to secure a position. Even if you don¡¯t have a scholar degree, it doesn¡¯t matter. As our country the Nanhai Country has formed an alliance with Changsha Country, the academic degrees obtained by scholars of both countries will be mutually recognized. If you have studied and feel that you can become a scholar, you can also go to Changsha Country for the imperial examination. If you pass, whether you stay there to prepare for the next round of examinations or return to Nanhai Country, it will be a good thing. All of these are due to the grace of our king and the wisdom of Changsha¡¯s king. If any of you are interested, you can tell your family members or start preparing. This opportunity only comes once, and if you miss it, there will be no more chances.¡± Chapter 407 - Chapter 407: Chapter 214 The Heart’s Desire_2 Chapter 407: Chapter 214 The Heart¡¯s Desire_2 Translator: 549690339 The guard leading the crowd was eloquent, and as more people gathered, his words became increasingly captivating, filling the listeners with intense excitement. Many scholars in the crowd, or those with scholars in their family, listened with glowing eyes and became extremely excited. Many began to discuss. ¡°Is this recruitment of talented people in Changsha Country real? Could there really be more than seventeen hundred government vacancies?¡± ¡°Of course, it¡¯s real. Didn¡¯t you see it written on the announcement?¡± People nearby whispered, ¡°It¡¯s written in the announcement, but who knows how much of it is true and how much is false, you have to know, our¡­ ¡± ¡°Don¡¯t say, don¡¯t say, too many people here, we dare not say this.¡± Someone quickly interrupted. Some knowledgeable merchants nearby heard these noisy voices and couldn¡¯t help laughing, ¡°A group of ignorant people. Let me tell you, I just took a trip to Dongting, no, Changsha Country earlier this year and sold over a hundred carriages worth of rice. From what I saw on the journey, the entire Changsha Country was dilapidated, with a large reduction in population, and the people were destitute. After such years of war, even if they had a solid foundation and plenty of scholars, they¡¯ve been decimated. Now, after finally subduing the Miao people and establishing the so-called Changsha Country, everything needs to be rebuilt from scratch, how could they not lack officials? Let me tell you. Originally, when I sold rice, I went to Yangshan Prefecture. At that time, Sun Siwen, the Prefect of Yangshan Prefecture, who also overseen the Nanshan Prefecture of Dongting, personally received me. While in his office, I personally witnessed that there were only thirty or so officials in the vast government office, less than a third of the full staff. After inquiring around, I found out that the whole Southern Three Prefectures, and even the entire Dongting jurisdiction, was like this. For local prefectures and counties, apart from the main officials of prefectures and departments having incumbents, all other subordinate officials have no one to assume the positions and can only be performed concurrently by the chief officials. I¡¯ve heard that the entire Dongting Southern Three Prefectures are short of more than three hundred officials. Now that the King of Changsha has united Dongting and established a country, not only is the territory twice as large, but there is also a central court. Don¡¯t you think there will be more vacancies for officials? In my opinion, more than seventeen hundred official vacancies are mostly true. Even if it¡¯s less, that¡¯s because we went too late, and the positions were already taken up by others. After all, the recruitment decree of the King of Changsha has been issued for two months now. Two months have passed, who knows whether they have accelerated the imperial examinations due to a lack of officials and recruited batches of people to fill the positions?¡± Hearing this, someone nearby couldn¡¯t help but ask, ¡°This recruitment notice is only issued now, how do you know it was issued two months ago?¡± The merchant heard this and proudly said, ¡°Of course, I would know. Truth be told, I received the news two months ago. I had already sent my two sons to Changsha Country. ¡± Now both of them have sent back news that they had participated in a special imperial examination, called Enke, held in September by the Lord of Changsha Country, and both of them passed. According to my two sons, over five hundred people participated in the September Enke, and more than one hundred and sixty people passed. Nearly one in three or four could pass. Let me ask you, which dynasty¡¯s imperial examination could be this easy? Moreover, now with the imperial examinations, upon passing, the priority assignment is for central government officials. Can the prospects of central government officials and local officials be the same? Now that the new dynasty is being established, if you make some achievements under the eyes of those ministers in Changsha Country, wouldn¡¯t it be easy to get promoted? But my two sons are ambitious. After they passed the examination, they didn¡¯t choose to become officials, but instead they plan to participate again in the imperial examination in November, aiming to get the title of jinshi for a better future. All of you are still debating whether it¡¯s true or not. You don¡¯t realize that the truly smart people have already packed up their things and gone to participate in the imperial examination. Now, of the seventeen hundred official vacancies, more than one hundred and sixty have been taken. What¡¯s left is just over fifteen hundred. If you don¡¯t hurry, this number will continue to decrease. Moreover, this recruitment order from Changsha Country was not only sent to our Nanhai Country, but also to Ninghai Country. When the talented scholars from the Three Nations arrive, the competition will be even more intense. If you don¡¯t go now, even if an official position fell from the sky, you wouldn¡¯t be able to catch it.¡± Upon hearing this, everyone was greatly shocked. They all hadn¡¯t expected that what was written in the announcement was actually all true. However, there were still some people looking at the merchant with uncertain eyes, doubting whether he was a stooge hired by the government. But just then, a considerable amount of people nearby stood up to support this point. ¡°That merchant is right. I just returned from Changsha Country this month, they are indeed seeking talent everywhere, and indeed, they conducted imperial exams in September.¡± ¡°Yes, the recruitment order of Changsha Country was dispatched two months ago. It¡¯s just that it has only been issued within our country now.¡± ¡°If we don¡¯t expedite now, we will really miss this opportunity.¡± ¡°Why tell them all these? I have already sent my younger brother, if these people are coaxed to go, won¡¯t it mean that they will be competing against my brother?¡± A middle-aged man dressed as a man of wealth glared at the people speaking around him, then looked at the crowd and said, ¡°Everyone, don¡¯t believe what these people are saying. They¡¯re all talking nonsense. Is there any imperial examination or recruitment order in Changsha Country? None of you should go.¡± His words would have been better left unsaid. As soon as he said this, those who were hesitating previously, suddenly started to take action. Without making a sound, the crowd was short of a dozen people. By the time someone noticed, a large group of the people who were originally gathered in front of the official list had left. Chapter 408 - Chapter 408: Chapter 214: The Will of the People_3 Chapter 408: Chapter 214: The Will of the People_3 Translator: 549690339 Among the crowd that remained, the merchant who opened their mouths to speak earlier and the others such as the official who followed suit, exchanged knowing glances with each other before quietly retreating and moving on to the location of the next official notice. Yes. The people who had guessed correctly in the crowd earlier were indeed plants. However, they were not arranged by Southsea Country but by Changsha Country. The purpose was to, to the best extent possible, encourage the scholars of Southsea and Ninghai countries to serve Changsha Country. These moles were arranged two months ago and should have been activated long before. But at that time, Southsea Country was busy managing internal affairs and had no time to pay attention to Lu Yuan¡¯s request for help, so the matter was delayed. It dragged on until now. These arranged spies and plants finally began to take action. As for the effect? So far, it seemed to be quite good. Nanhai City, Yongning District. ¡°Brother Chen, Brother Chen.¡± Wei Qingsheng pushed open the door of his friend¡¯s house and rushed in excitedly. ¡°Brother Wei.¡± Chen Wenbin came out and looked helplessly at his restless friend, asking, ¡°What¡¯s the matter?¡± Wei Qingsheng excitedly asked, ¡°Did you hear about the recruitment order from Changsha Country?¡± Chen Wenbin nodded, ¡°I¡¯ve heard about it.¡± Wei Qingsheng hurriedly asked, ¡°Are you planning to take the exam, Brother Chen? There are more than a thousand openings!¡± Chen Wenbin replied, ¡°Of course I am planning to go. I was just packing my luggage, preparing to say goodbye to Brother Wei, and then head north to take the exam.¡± Wei Qingsheng was dissatisfied as he said, ¡°When Brother Chen goes to take the exam, why not invite me along?¡± Chen Wenbin said helplessly, ¡°Your uncle serves as an official in the country and has even become a county magistrate. He has connections. You can develop within the country, so why bother traveling thousands of miles to serve like me?¡± Wei Qingsheng snorted coldly, ¡°My uncle barely managed to keep his position as a county magistrate due to his jinshi (imperial examination title) status. But even so, his position is being watched by those Jianghu ruffians. How could he have the energy to help me find a way? Moreover, Southsea Country does not make use of scholars like us, but instead lets those who only know fighting and killing govern the country. In the past, any of us who held the juren (imperial examination title) could become officials, couldn¡¯t we? But now, even seeking a minor position is unattainable. With such chaotic national politics, I think Southsea Country won¡¯t last long. On the other hand, the King of Changsha is said to have entrusted all national affairs to the Left and Right Chancellors, who are all scholars like us, and has managed to restore the previously devastated Changsha country to prosperity. Now he is even more courteous to scholars and has issued a recruitment order. His thirst for talented scholars is no less than that of the ancient wise kings. I have also heard that the King of Changsha is leading the troops northward, defeating the Zhou people in the north of the river, and gaining continuous victories. Such a character, skilled in both civil and martial arts, is a wise monarch that we seek in troubled times. In comparison. The ruler of Southsea Country is stupid, old, and full of treacherous people in the country. This doomed country is of no use. Being an official here is a self-inflicted calamity.¡± After hearing these heartfelt words, Chen Wenbin couldn¡¯t help but express his agreement, ¡°Brother Wei, what you said is exactly what I think. In that case, why don¡¯t you go back and prepare? Let¡¯s head north to Changsha together tomorrow to find a wise monarch and realize our ambitions.¡± Wei Qingsheng laughed, ¡°That¡¯s more like it. Brother Chen, you continue packing, and I¡¯ll go back to prepare. We¡¯ll set off together tomorrow.¡± Laughing, Wei Qingsheng hurried in and hurried out, eager to go back quickly and prepare. At the same time. Similar scenes were happening in various places in Southsea Country, and even Ninghai Country, one after another. A large number of Lingnan scholars began to gather friends and pack their belongings, heading toward the northern holy kingdom of their dreams. Under the neglect or deliberate abandonment of Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange, the hearts of scholars and even the popular sentiment in Southsea and Ninghai countries were like surging tides, sweeping along the momentum of the imperial examination and heading toward Lu Yuan. However, at the time when this huge wave was sweeping through. On October 20th in the seventh year of Hongdao, Lu Yuan temporarily entrusted his own disciple Zhou Qing with the army in Baling County. He then left the battlefield with Anqiu True Person, and the two silently returned to Yangshan Prefecture. The reason was simple. Just two days ago, he received a message from over there that the altar for worshiping the Heavenly Pillar was finally built properly after more than a year. Now, it was time to go and worship once to settle the mind of Anqiu True Person. And then send away this person who had been following him all the time, reminding him to cultivate the Taiping Dao Book as soon as possible. Truth be told. Having been urged by this true person of Dan Ding Path all these days, Lu Yuan had also become quite annoyed. Fortunately, the altar was finally built, and he could finally get rid of this trouble. Even if it was only temporary. Chapter 409 - Chapter 409: Chapter 215: Sacrifice to the Heavenly Pillars Chapter 409: Chapter 215: Sacrifice to the Heavenly Pillars Translator: 549690339 Lianshan, the Deep Valley Altar. After traveling for two days and nights, Lu Yuan and his companion finally arrived at their destination. ¡°Greetings, Your Majesty.¡± Li Qian, the disciple in charge of overseeing the construction here, hurriedly came forward to greet his master and king upon their arrival. ¡°Rise, there¡¯s no need for excessive formalities.¡± Lu Yuan waved his hand and looked at the completed altar in the valley. He asked, ¡°You sent a message back saying that the altar has been built, is this true?¡± Li Qian hastily replied, ¡°Your Majesty, it is true. I have spent over a year to complete this altar as per your command. You can verify its authenticity immediately.¡± Lu Yuan said, ¡°Then let¡¯s go take a look together.¡± He turned to the True Person Anqiu and said, ¡°Take a look and see if there are any issues.¡± True Person Anqiu nodded: ¡°Fellow Daoist, rest assured, this altar also concerns the great plan of my own Dao. I will carefully examine it.¡± Under Li Qian¡¯s guidance, the two went to the altar in the valley. There are three types of altars for worshipping Heaven in the Taiping Dao Book, corresponding to offerings for Man, Earth, and Heaven. Each kind of offering requires different altars. The altar being built now is for the Man offering. This offering corresponds to the Heavenly Pillars established by Emperor Hua Guang in ancient times. Among them, the altar Lu Yuan built is the smallest of the Man offering altars. Despite its size, the altar is still a thousand steps wide and built with nine layers of foundation. Each layer of the altar¡¯s platforms was covered with a large number of precious gold and silver objects, various spiritual materials, and a large number of runes and instrument tracks, displaying an ingenious design. Above the nine-layer foundation, an enormous stone pillar stands tall in the center of the altar. The surface of the pillar is carved with intricate patterns, and its thickness requires three people to hug it together. It reaches straight into the sky, making the altar appear even more majestic and magnificent than the Heavenly Altar Lu Yuan had used during his ascension outside Changsha City. This is also why building this Man Offering altar required the efforts of thousands of people and took over a year to complete. Lu Yuan and True Person Anqiu started their examination from the bottom layer of the altar¡¯s foundation, carefully checking every detail of the altar. Were there any problems with the formation patterns and instrument tracks laid on the ground? Were those specially prepared gold and silver objects placed in the right locations? Were the bricks and stones on each platform arranged in the designated direction? Were there any deviations in the position of the altar¡¯s various parts? Were there any errors in the various runes and drawings on that central stone pillar? Any mistakes in these many details would affect the effect of the Heaven Worship, and may even lead to the failure of the ceremony. Therefore, both of them were extremely careful in their examination. Some runes, instrument tracks, and objects had already been buried deep below the steps, invisible and untouchable to the naked eye. Fortunately, one of them was an Inborn Grandmaster and Cultivator, and the other was a Cultivator, both of whom had basically developed their Divine Sense. So they were able to employ their Divine Sense to carefully examine the deeper aspects of these hidden objects, confirming their accuracy. After inspecting everything for nearly four hours, they finally finished their examination as it began to get dark. ¡°Well done, you have not disappointed my trust in you.¡± After Lu Yuan completed inspecting the last part of the stone pillar on the altar and exchanged a glance with True Person Anqiu, confirming that there were no problems, he turned to his disciple Li Qian with a smile on his face: ¡°You¡¯ve experienced a lot of hardship overseeing the construction in this remote place for more than a year.¡± ¡°Now that you¡¯ve successfully completed the task entrusted to you, you¡¯ve made a great contribution.¡± I remember that your previous military rank was that of a camp leader, right? From today onward, you will be a military officer. Go to the Military Department after you return. As for your martial arts, you are about to reach the second level. Here are two Divine Blood Elixirs for you to take at the right time, which will help you break through the bottleneck.¡± Lu Yuan tossed out two jade bottles, each containing an elixir. Li Qian quickly caught them, kneeled down and thanked him: ¡°Thank you, Your Majesty, for your graciousness.¡± Lu Yuan made a gesture: ¡°Enough, get up. Since the altar has been built, have your men tidy up and immediately evacuate the valley. Then seal off the surrounding area within ten miles and allow no one to enter.¡± ¡°Yes, I obey your command.¡± Li Qian nodded quickly, but hesitated for a moment before he asked, ¡°Your Majesty, now that the altar is built and the laborers are no longer needed, how should the Miao People be dealt with?¡± It was clear to Li Qian that the valley altar was a secret location. The Miao laborers who knew its secret would pose a risk if they were released without proper handling. Therefore, Li Qian dared not make the final decision himself and could only consult his king. Hearing this question, Lu Yuan furrowed his brow and asked, ¡°How many of the Miao people are left now?¡± Li Qian replied, ¡°After more than a year of hard labor, over two hundred of the original thousand Miao people have died, leaving more than seven hundred remaining.¡± ¡°Over seven hundred¡­¡± Mulling over the number, Lu Yuan hesitated for a moment but finally said, ¡°Forget it. Detain these people for now and temporarily place them nearby. This altar of mine will not be used just once; it will serve future purposes as well.¡± ¡°After this period, someone will need to watch over it.¡± Since the altar was built by the Miao people, have their families relocated here to serve as guards for the altar.¡± Chapter 410 - Chapter 410: Chapter 215: Sacrifice to the Heavenly Pillars_2 Chapter 410: Chapter 215: Sacrifice to the Heavenly Pillars_2 Translator: 549690339 Now that Lu Yuan has formed an alliance with the Five Poisons Sect through marriage, the Miao People, who once bore a deep hatred for him, are no longer as uncontrollable as before. It would be rather cruel to kill all of these more than 700 Miao workers for the sake of keeping secrets. Furthermore, indiscriminate killing would only reduce his own population. In that case, it would be better to make these people the guardians of the altar. After all, these Miao people live in the mountains, and their families can be relocated here to establish a new mountain village near the altar. With a Miao village nearby, the altar can be maintained, and outsiders can be prevented from destroying it, saving Lu Yuan the trouble of sending additional guards. Given the Miao people¡¯s preference for living deep in the mountains and their reluctance to venture far, coupled with his strict orders, they could be trusted to keep the secret. In this way, there would be no need for killing, the Miao people could serve a purpose, and secrecy could be maintained ¨C a perfect solution. Seeing that the king had made up his mind, Li Qian naturally didn¡¯t dare to say anything and simply said, ¡°Yes, I will obey your orders.¡± Then, Li Qian led a battalion of soldiers and drove the Miao people out of the valley together. Afterward, following Lu Yuan¡¯s instructions, a few teams of soldiers were sent to various places in the mountains to seal off the area within ten miles centered on the valley. They guarded this secret location tightly. After everyone else had left, only Lu Yuan and True Person Anqiu remained in the valley. The mountain breeze was slightly cold, especially in the late autumn season. The afterglow of the setting sun had disappeared, and the crescent moon in the sky was just beginning to show its sharp edges. ¡°To worship the Heavenly Pillar, you need the help of the altar. Use your soul to draw the power of Qi Luck, which gathers towards you from the people. Then use this power to communicate with the Three Great Heavenly Pillars standing between Heaven and Earth in this realm. Once the Heavenly Pillars respond and imprint your soul within them, a connection will be established. In this way, the worship will be successful. From then on, Fellow Daoist, as long as you are within a thousand miles of this altar, you can sense the Heavenly Pillars and draw on the Immortal Spirit Qi without restraint,¡± said True Person Anqiu, explaining the precautions to be taken during the upcoming worship ceremony. Lu Yuan looked at the stone pillar on the altar for a while, quietly enjoying the mountain breeze. Then he turned to True Person Anqiu and said, ¡°Fellow Daoist Anqiu, if there are no problems, I will begin worshiping the Heavenly Pillar now.¡± Looking at Lu Yuan with a solemn expression, True Person Anqiu said, ¡°Please do, Fellow Daoist.¡± Lu Yuan nodded, closed his eyes and concentrated his mind. As described in the Taiping Dao Book, his soul began to sense the external Qi Luck and people¡¯s emotions. Within a short time, his meditation was enveloped by a milky white glow that surrounded him and emanated from countless spots of light. Each spot of light contained an emotion, with good and evil, joy and sorrow, bitterness and happiness, worry and joy all filling the spots. Each spot represented a person¡¯s emotions, and together they formed an ocean of emotions, like the Milky Way, making Lu Yuan feel insignificant like a speck of dust. He gently approached a spot of light, and immediately the emotion within it was transferred over. ¡°Ah, it¡¯s so bitter, why hasn¡¯t this bitter world come to an end, and why do we have to fight again?¡± A huge sentiment of sorrow enveloped Lu Yuan¡¯s soul, almost making him unable to hold back his tears. As he touched other spots of light, various emotions also emerged. ¡°Haha, it¡¯s a good time to be alive. Back when Da Yue was around, I tried for ten years to pass the juren examination but never succeeded. Now that Da Yue is gone and Changsha has been established, I finally passed the exam and can become an official.¡± ¡°I will be on the battlefield tomorrow. I wonder how many people I will be able to kill and whether I will survive.¡± ¡°The year is almost over, and I still haven¡¯t earned enough money. It seems there will be no meat for the New Year again.¡± ¡°The harvest was good this autumn, so I should be able to eat well next year.¡± Different identities, emotions, and beliefs all appeared in Lu Yuan¡¯s mind at the same time. As their souls touched each other, he felt empathy for the emotions within the spots of light. Several emotions surged through him at once, nearly driving Lu Yuan mad. He quickly withdrew from those perspectives, not daring to touch them again. ¡®The power of Qi Luck and people¡¯s hearts is truly terrifying. I only touched a few of them, and my mind and heart were barely able to withstand it. If the combined Qi Luck of a million people were to surge at me all at once, I would probably shatter my soul and die instantly!¡¯ Lu Yuan looked around at the dazzling points of light that resembled the Milky Way, a tremor flashing in his eyes. No wonder those who cultivated the Taiping Dao Book before could not last for two months and perished prematurely. Who could withstand the torture of such poisonous Qi Luck and human hearts, even for a short time? Even though the Taiping Dao Book had methods to shield them from the poison of Qi Luck and human hearts, keeping their minds unaffected, the cost was an extremely high toll on their bodies, continuously depleting their life force. It might not be lethal in a few days, but they wouldn¡¯t live long either. Cultivating this technique was indeed purely a suicidal path. Those from the Dan Ding Path who dared not cultivate this suicidal technique were only too eager to let others do it instead. Their malicious intent was evident. It was a pity for Anqiu, who always wore a smiling face before. Yet, everyday, he pushed Lu Yuan to cultivate the Taiping Dao Book. Wasn¡¯t this just urging him to hurry up and die? ¡®So it was right to use the Five Thunders Book to cover up the Taiping Dao Book before, even risking a rift with the Dan Ding Path, and not exposing my strategy of being unaffected by life-shortening effects.¡¯ Otherwise, given the viciousness of those from the Dan Ding Path, if they were to discover my secret¡­ I¡¯m afraid they would do everything in their power to capture me and then probe the secrets within me.¡¯ If Lu Yuan had only deceived the Dan Ding Path for some aid, it would be a significant loss for them. But given Lu Yuan¡¯s current strength, even if the Dan Ding Path wanted revenge, they would have to weigh the cost. So it¡¯s unlikely they would directly cause trouble for him; at most, they would secretly employ some small schemes, such as inciting rebellion among his subordinates, or instigating Yue Country and Zhou Country to attack him. Lu Yuan had ways to deal with and resolve these troubles. But if he faced the pursuit and assassination from the entire Dan Ding Path, that would be a different matter. Facing the threat of several cultivators, even with an army of a hundred thousand to protect him, Lu Yuan could not say he was completely fearless. Not to mention, in reality, he could not always have a hundred thousand soldiers with him. ¡®So for now, I¡¯ll have to be cautious, and keep a low profile. First, I¡¯ll finish worshipping the Heavenly Pillar and obtain the entry ticket to freely use the Heavenly and Earthly Aura.¡¯ As for how long I can fool them, it depends on when the Dan Ding Path discovers the truth. I hope that day comes later.¡¯ With this in mind, Lu Yuan hesitated no more and immediately guided the vast starry river before him according to the Taiping Dao Book. Then, as the Milky Way circulated, an intangible rhythm spread from it, diffusing between Heaven and Earth. After doing this three times. In an instant, an immense divine power descended from the sky and followed the connection to land on the altar where it entered the stone pillar. In Lu Yuan¡¯s meditation, a majestic Heavenly Pillar emitting golden light appeared, piercing through the Milky Way. With just a slight stir, it absorbed the countless points of light, forming specks of light on its surface. After completing this task, the Heavenly Pillar disappeared again. The darkness in the void of meditation returned. After a while. Lu Yuan came back to his senses, still marvelling at the magnificent Heavenly Pillar. Then he found that he had a faint connection with an enormous power, as if he could draw strength from the Heavenly Pillar and obtain Immortal Spirit energy at any time he wished. Although this was the case, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t try to do so, and instead, slowly opened his eyes. Entering his sight were the stone pillar emitting a brilliant golden light, and the delighted face of True Person Anqiu beside him. Well, seeing the latter, those brief feelings of joy in Lu Yuan vanished instantly. Chapter 411 - Chapter 411: Chapter 216: Cultivation Method to Expel People Chapter 411: Chapter 216: Cultivation Method to Expel People Translator: 549690339 ¡°Fellow Daoist, have you connected with the Heavenly Pillars?¡± Seeing Lu Yuan awake from his meditation, True Person Anqiu hurriedly approached and asked eagerly. Lu Yuan remained silent in his heart, but nodded in response, ¡°Indeed, fortunately, I succeeded.¡± True Person Anqiu asked again, ¡°What did you experience during the sacrificial meditation just now?¡± Lu Yuan recalled his encounter with the thoughts of the people when he first connected and almost suffered a mental breakdown. He said with lingering fear, ¡°Dangers lurked on all sides, and there was a constant risk of losing my Dao if I were not cautious.¡± Hearing these words, True Person Anqiu was slightly moved and asked, ¡°What dangers did you encounter?¡± Lu Yuan had no reason to conceal anything, so he directly said, ¡°When I entered the meditation, I saw the thoughts of a million people coming at me. Their thoughts were malicious and could harm one¡¯s mind and spirit. With my strength of Dao heart and soul, I could only handle five or six people¡¯s thoughts. If there were more, my spirit would be in danger of collapsing. Thus, if someone with a weak Dao heart and spirit touches these thoughts, they would probably not be able to withstand the corruption of these people¡¯s thoughts in their meditation and ultimately die from the collapse of their spirit.¡± Upon hearing this explanation, True Person Anqiu¡¯s expression slightly changed, and he murmured thoughtfully with a furrowed brow, ¡°So that¡¯s what happened. I wondered why people in our sect often died during the sacrificial offerings. That¡¯s the true reason.¡± Upon hearing these words, Lu Yuan¡¯s expression darkened, and he asked, ¡°So, some people died during previous sacrificial offerings? Why didn¡¯t you tell me?¡± If Anqiu had known about the danger of the sacrificial offerings, then he should have warned him when he was performing the sacrifice earlier. This was a bit too much. After all, he was the one helping Anqiu conduct experiments. To use my life to provide you with data and for you to hide crucial information from me, is that not treating my life as if it were a game? Although he also knew that the reason Anqiu didn¡¯t say anything was most likely because he was afraid that he would be too scared to perform the sacrificial offerings, no matter what, he felt a sense of dissatisfaction from being treated like this. Seeing Lu Yuan getting upset, True Person Anqiu quickly explained, ¡°Fellow Daoist, please don¡¯t be angry. It wasn¡¯t Poor Daoist¡¯s intention to hide it from you. As I have asked previously, before you, no one has ever been able to provide a clear explanation of the details of the sacrificial meditation. With such confusion, even though I told you about it, I didn¡¯t know what to say. Not only would it not be helpful, but it would also make our fellow Daoist unnecessarily worried, causing your state of mind to be disturbed and unable to achieve a peaceful meditation. Wouldn¡¯t that be an ill-advised good intention? Just like now, I didn¡¯t tell you, but didn¡¯t you still manage to meditate successfully? That¡¯s because you were not affected by external influences.¡± After a series of sophistry, True Person Anqiu managed to turn his dishonest act into something beneficial for Lu Yuan. The thick-skinned and cunning words were just like that. But Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t fall for it. ¡°Fellow Daoist, don¡¯t try to argue with me.¡± He snorted coldly, wanting to scold a few more words, but after thinking about it, he shook his head and said, ¡°Forget it. Let¡¯s not talk about this anymore. As you said, I managed to complete the sacrificial offerings and woke up safely, which is fortunate. However, in the future, if you deceive me again, don¡¯t blame me for turning against you.¡± Lu Yuan didn¡¯t want to have a completely strained relationship with Dan Ding Path at this time. He would wait until he couldn¡¯t get away with it in the future, and then it would be the right time to break up completely. To him, Dan Ding Path was still somewhat helpful at this stage. Seeing that Lu Yuan didn¡¯t press further, True Person Anqiu let out a sigh of relief and hurriedly promised, ¡°Fellow Daoist, please rest assured. From now on, Poor Daoist won¡¯t deceive you and will inform you about everything.¡± He was sincere in his words. The reason why he concealed the danger of sacrificial meditation from Lu Yuan previously was mainly because he was afraid that Lu Yuan would be afraid of dying and refuse to perform the offerings. Now that the Heavenly Pillars were offered, so long as Lu Yuan cultivates the Taiping Dao Book, there¡¯s no turning back. Once the cultivation technique is practiced, the lifespan will start decreasing, and if you don¡¯t break through to the next realm and increase your lifespan before it runs out, then you can only wait for death from sickness. Thus, at this point, True Person Anqiu was completely reassured. The fellow Daoist Lu in front of him can¡¯t turn back anymore. All he needs to do now is to let the other party cultivate the Dao Law and enter the final stage. That will be the completion of the task. Next, he just needs to wait and see how long this Inborn Grandmaster can last under the lifespan reduction of the Taiping Dao Book. With this thought in mind, True Person Anqiu eagerly said, ¡°Now that Fellow Daoist has connected with the Heavenly Pillars, you should have sensed the Immortal Spirit Qi between Heaven and Earth. It¡¯s the right time, so why not immediately enter into meditation, sense the Immortal Spirit Qi, and absorb it to create magical strength?¡± Seeing Anqiu¡¯s eager and enthusiastic manner, Lu Yuan waved his hand, ¡°There¡¯s no need to rush. Before I cultivate the Taiping Dao Book, I have a matter to discuss with you.¡± He stared into the eyes of True Person Anqiu, and asked seriously, ¡°As long as I develop magical strength, I¡¯ll have fulfilled my promise with your Path, right?¡± Upon hearing this question, True Person Anqiu was stunned, then quickly realized why Lu Yuan was asking this. Most likely, it was because of his constant urging over the past few days that had annoyed Lu Yuan, prompting him to dislike Anqiu. However, as far as True Person Anqiu was concerned, it didn¡¯t matter if Lu Yuan liked him or not. As long as Lu Yuan practiced the Taiping Dao Book, what did it matter if he was disliked? Chapter 412 - Chapter 412: Chapter 216: Cultivation Method to Expel People_2 Chapter 412: Chapter 216: Cultivation Method to Expel People_2 Translator: 549690339 Anyway, this person probably won¡¯t live more than two or three years, so just let him be annoying. Thinking like this, True Person Anqiu hesitated for a moment, then nodded and said: ¡°Indeed, as long as Fellow Daoist cultivates magical powers, our agreement will be considered complete.¡± Lu Yuan nodded: ¡°Very well, Fellow Daoist, remember what you said. Once I have cultivated magical powers, you can return to the Liang Kingdom. Our transaction is completed, and I have to deal with a lot of military affairs every day. I have no time to entertain you, so I won¡¯t keep you.¡± True Person Anqiu hurriedly said: ¡°This won¡¯t do. If I leave, how will I know about your cultivation progress? And don¡¯t you want someone to give you pointers? Although I have not practiced the Taiping Dao Book, I have spent decades practicing other Immortal Techniques, and I am confident that I can provide some guidance to you.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s expression turned cold: ¡°Cultivation matters are related to life and death and are my personal secret. Although you are acquainted with me, it¡¯s not appropriate for you to interfere in this matter, is it? Besides, our agreement was that you would provide me with supplies, and I would practice the Taiping Dao Book. I have already done this, so the agreement has naturally ended. As for other things like paying attention to my cultivation progress and daily insights, I don¡¯t remember agreeing to this condition. As for how I should cultivate, I alone have to decide, so there¡¯s no need for anyone else to interfere. What Fellow Daoist said just now, I will pretend I haven¡¯t heard it. If you say it again, don¡¯t blame me for treating you as someone with ulterior motives.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s tone had a hint of murderous intent. Any cultivator, whether practicing martial arts or cultivation, keeps their skills a secret, and even their own spouses and children are not told about it. Why? For fear of exposing their own weakness, leading to disaster. But in front of him, True Person Anqiu wants to know the details of his cultivation and even wants to record them. I don¡¯t know if I should say that the other party is too naive or that the Dan Ding Path has been too smooth, even daring to make such a request. Seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s attitude that he would turn his face if one word was wrong, True Person Anqiu¡¯s excitement suddenly stagnated, feeling the slightly wrong atmosphere nearby, and eventually calmed down. Then he immediately apologized: ¡°Just now, the Poor Daoist spoke out of line. Please forgive me, Fellow Daoist. But what I said was sincere. You cultivating the Taiping Dao Book, I assure you, I will not harm you. I can only help you cultivate better and longer. So please, Fellow Daoist, consider this matter carefully.¡± Lu Yuan firmly refused: ¡°Don¡¯t bother discussing this matter again. I will start cultivating the Taiping Dao Book in the next few days. Once I have cultivated magical powers, you can leave. You have been away from the Liang Kingdom for more than a year, and it¡¯s time for you to return.¡± Seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s resolute attitude, True Person Anqiu realized that the situation could not be remedied, so he could only sigh: ¡°Since Fellow Daoist is so insistent, I will follow your wishes. As long as you can cultivate magical powers, I will leave Changsha and return to the Liang Kingdom right away.¡± Although he could not stay by Lu Yuan¡¯s side and collect all his information in detail, persuading this Inborn Grandmaster to practice the Taiping Dao Book was a great success already. With this achievement, it was enough to report back to the Dao Master in the sect. Seeing that True Person Anqiu was no longer stubborn, Lu Yuan¡¯s face eased a little, and then he waved his hand: ¡°Since that¡¯s the case, I am going to start practicing the Taiping Dao Book now. If Fellow Daoist has no business here, you may leave first. I need to seclude myself here alone, and I don¡¯t like having people around.¡± Faced with this reason, True Person Anqiu naturally wouldn¡¯t say anything, but only expressed his concern: ¡°Fellow Daoist, be careful in your cultivation and take your time. If there is anything you don¡¯t understand, you can come to me for advice.¡± Then, Elder Daoist flicked his sleeve and left. Lu Yuan watched True Person Anqiu¡¯s departing figure until he disappeared into the mountains, leaving the valley, before retracting his gaze. At this time, within the vast valley, it was empty and silent, with only him remaining. The surrounding mountain ridges were pitch black, and those dark shadows looked like monsters lying on the ground, waiting to devour people. Lu Yuan sat among them, his expression calm, without any fear. He regulated his true pneuma and magical powers for a while, and when he felt that his spirit had recovered to its peak, he closed his eyes slightly and began to recall the qi-guiding method of the Taiping Dao Book while practicing this Immortal Technique. Previously, what he said to True Person Anqiu was not false. Lu Yuan genuinely planned to cultivate the Taiping Dao Book. After all, this technique, which could attract the heavenly and earthly aura at any time, was extremely attractive to cultivator at this time, without considering the drawbacks of the shortened lifespan that this technique had. It could even be called the First Divine Skill. Although Lu Yuan had practiced the Five Thunder Technique, the cultivation conditions were too demanding, requiring thunderstorm weather to practice. But, how many thunderstorm days can there be in a year? Unless you can find a place where there are thunders all year round, the cultivation of this book can¡¯t be accelerated. However, with Lu Yuan¡¯s current status, it is impossible for him to abandon his homeland and find a place to focus on cultivation. As a result, Granduncle Wulei¡¯s cultivation could only maintain the status quo. However, the lack of thunderstormy weather has also led to the extremely slow progress of his cultivation. Although he has been practicing this book for a year, he has barely accumulated a few strands of magical power, not even reaching the entry level. This bit of magical power can only display the most basic spell at best. One year of cultivation, and the magical power for only one small spell has been accumulated. To be honest, Lu Yuan felt a bit embarrassed. Fortunately, his lifespan is sufficient, so he doesn¡¯t have to worry about having enough life to cultivate this book. He could take it slowly. It¡¯s just that the Wulei book can be used slowly due to special conditions, but Lu Yuan does not treat the Taiping Dao Book in the same way. When cultivating this book, he accumulates the Qi of the Yellow Sky, This qi, is evolved from the Immortal Spirit Qi that has been tainted by human luck and Taiping Daoism. So, to cultivate this method, Lu Yuan only needs to continuously gather people¡¯s hearts, expand territories, and he can meet the requirements for cultivating this method, and obtain the continuous luck of human hearts. Therefore, in theory, the cultivation of this book is much more convenient than that of the Wulei Book. If the convenience of being able to directly draw Immortal Spirit Qi from the Heavenly Pillars after the cultivation of this technique is taken into account, then this is even more convenient. This is why after Lu Yuan activated the Wulei Book, he didn¡¯t find a place to hide and concentrate on cultivating this Daoist method. It is because the Taiping Dao Book is much more useful than the Wulei Book in this era, and it can be cultivated to a deeper level. Facing such a Daoist method that can help him quickly form new combat power and hidden cards, Lu Yuan will naturally not miss it. At this time, he started to study and cultivate seriously. The moon was bright and the stars were sparse, the mountain breeze was cold, In the cold, a thin mist spread, and frost appeared. Night slowly flowed. Several days later. Lu Yuan rode a fast horse alone, heading north. ¡°This time cultivating the Taiping Dao Book, the situation is much smoother. In just three days, the progress has caught up with my nearly a year of cultivating the Wulei Book, I don¡¯t know if it is because of the sufficient human luck I have gathered, which can assist in cultivation, Or perhaps it is because I have used the Heavenly Pillars to mobilize a lot of heaven and earth aura, making the refining and transformation of magical power even simpler and easier. But no matter what, At this rate, I may be able to enter the door in less than two years. At that time, my Immortal Dao cultivation would probably be close to that of Elder Daoist Anqiu.¡± Waving his horsewhip, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but let out a long laugh as he sped along the road. In two years¡¯ time, being able to catch up with Anqiu, who has cultivated for fifty or sixty years, is certainly an exciting thing. And if he really enters the Immortal Path by that time, with this strength, even if Dan Ding Dao comes, At that time, even if I still can¡¯t beat the master of Dan Ding Dao, with the strength of both immortal and martial arts, I can at least protect myself even if I can¡¯t win.¡± With such a broad future ahead, how could one not be in a good mood? Not to mention, Yesterday, after showing his magical power to Elder Daoist Anqiu, he successfully got rid of the fly and finally had some peace. This matter is even more worth celebrating. At this moment, Lu Yuan could hardly wait to return to Changsha City and have a good celebration. Chapter 413 - Chapter 413: Chapter 217: I Absolutely Do Not Covet Women Chapter 413: Chapter 217: I Absolutely Do Not Covet Women Translator: 549690339 When Lu Yuan returned to Changsha Fu, the place was filled with an atmosphere of excitement and tension. As the eleventh month approached, it was soon the time for the inaugural imperial examination that Lu Yuan had previously set. Now that the announcements from both Southsea and Ninghai countries were sent one after another, the scholars from both countries had arrived in Changsha Fu in succession after more than a month of travel. At present, more than 10,000 scholars had gathered in Changsha Fu, all pouring in to participate in the imperial examination on the first day of the eleventh month. The arrival of such a large number of outsiders suddenly made Changsha city prosperous. After all, those who could afford the travel expenses and come to the imperial examination from thousands of miles away generally had some money. The consumption of these people naturally boosted local businesses. There were even so many scholars from outside that the inns in Changsha city were not enough for them to stay. Many scholars had to spend money to ask the local residents to vacate a room for themselves to live in. But even so, many people still couldn¡¯t find a place to stay. This had become a serious problem. ¡°Your Majesty, although Changsha is a Fu city and even a large Fu city, it originally only had more than 10,000 households and about 50,000 to 60,000 people. Now that more than 10,000 scholars have flooded into the city, it¡¯s almost equivalent to adding one person to each family, which is difficult to accommodate.¡± With a bitter smile, Cui Changqing mentioned this problem, ¡°But fortunately, the barracks previously built by your Majesty outside the city are still there. The camp is quite spacious and can accommodate them. I have cleaned up some houses and rented them out to those visiting scholars at a price of three cents per room.¡± Lu Yuan nodded slightly, quite satisfied with this arrangement, and then asked, ¡°The accommodation issue has been resolved, but are those scholars who are staying in the barracks complaining?¡± Cui Changqing immediately replied, ¡°That won¡¯t happen. Not all of the scholars who came here have money. Many of them borrowed money from others and traveled thousands of miles for the imperial examination. For these people, a room that costs three cents per day is the ideal place to stay. Otherwise, if they were to stay in the city, they would be dissatisfied with the cost of renting a room, which has increased to 20 or 30 cents per room. Compared to that, having a room that provides shelter from wind and rain and hot water is already quite good. Now, it¡¯s just that the rich people stay in inns, the ordinary people live in local residents¡¯ homes, and the poor people live in the army camps outside the city.¡± As someone who also came from the imperial examination, Cui Changqing had a firm grasp on the mentality of these scholars. These literati would not object or care too much about the present difficulties in the examination conditions. As long as they could pass the examination and become officials, they could endure these hardships for the time being. On the contrary, if you didn¡¯t let them take the examination or become officials, even if you provided them with the best inns to stay in, they wouldn¡¯t be grateful, but would resent you further. Everyone has spent ten years studying, traveling thousands of miles for the examination, all for the purpose of becoming officials. As long as they can become officials, they won¡¯t retreat from living in barracks, even if it means staying on the streets, being exposed to the cold winds and freezing. Although Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t fully empathize, he could understand their predicament to some extent. However, he still smiled and said, ¡°Regardless of whether these candidates are satisfied, we need to treat them well since they have traveled thousands of miles to come here. This is not only for the purpose of selecting officials and holding examinations but also for winning over people¡¯s hearts. The vast world goes beyond Dongting. My ambitions also go beyond Changsha. Now that Southsea and Ninghai countries cannot win the hearts of domestic scholars, causing a loss of talent and people¡¯s disaffection, since they have given us this opportunity, we should seize it well. If we can win over the hearts of the scholars from both countries this time, then in the future, if there are changes in Lingnan, when we raise our flag and march south, those scholars who were bought recently will become our supporters in the future. This is the key point, Minister Cui should understand this and focus on winning people over.¡± Lu Yuan looked thoughtfully at his Prime Minister as he spoke. Although they had already formed alliances with Southsea and Ninghai countries, there was a saying that there were no permanent allies in the world. Now, the three nations appeared to be close as a family, and Southsea and Ninghai countries even supported Lu Yuan with so many test-taking scholars and large sums of money and grain. But all this was only for the present. Now that the two countries have just been established, they face immense external pressure and need Lu Yuan to stand in the front. Therefore, they can support him in many things. But what about in three to five years, five to six years, or even ten years? After such a long time, when the two countries have stabilized, amassed enough soldiers, and integrated domestic interests with sufficient self-protection, will they still unconditionally support Lu Yuan as they do now? If these two countries stop helping Lu Yuan, who will support the hundreds of thousands of soldiers under him? With the current broken state of Changsha, even if it recuperates for three to five years, the population and grain supply can only support 50,000 to 60,000 soldiers at most, which is far from enough to feed Lu Yuan¡¯s 100,000 soldiers and tens of thousands of Miao soldiers. Therefore, without far-sightedness, there is no lasting success. It¡¯s always good to make some preparations in advance. When Cui Changqing heard his Majesty¡¯s plans, he was taken aback at first, but then he became excited and said, ¡°Your Majesty¡¯s intention to conquer Lingnan is an excellent and wise strategy.¡± Chapter 414 - Chapter 414: Chapter 217: I Absolutely Do Not Covet Women_2 Chapter 414: Chapter 217: I Absolutely Do Not Covet Women_2 Translator: 549690339 I Changsha has experienced wars and is now in poverty, far inferior to the two countries of Lingnan. Surrounded by enemies on three sides, we are constantly fighting. It is difficult to maintain stability. If we can annex these two countries, we would immediately gain millions of households, countless wealth and resources, enough to support a 200,000-strong army for wars. If we can march forward and conquer Jiuzhen County, we will completely seize the southern land and eliminate our worries of being attacked from behind. Thus, Your Majesty will have the land of four counties, thousands of miles of territory, tens of millions of people, and 300,000 armored soldiers. If we lead these soldiers north, the Zhou people will tremble with fear. If we lead them west, we will conquer Xichuan. If we lead them east, Jiangdong will lose courage. This is indeed a foundation to strive for supremacy, and it is necessary to plan carefully for it in advance.¡± For Cui Changqing, a traditional Confucian scholar, self-cultivation, governing the country, and ensuring peace throughout the world are almost their highest ideals, in his view. Now, with the decline of the Yu¨¨sh¨¬ family and the disintegration of the world, it is already in the declining years of the dynasty. It was because he saw this situation that Cui Changqing, originally a court official, chose to accept Lu Yuan¡¯s invitation and become the Left Prime Minister. This was not only based on their friendship, but also driven by his disappointment with the court. However, recognizing the reality does not mean that Cui Changqing has resigned himself to fate. Now, Lu Yuan proposes a strategy. Conquer Lingnan and annex the two countries, seizing their land and resources, and absorbing their people and soldiers. I find this strategy very appealing to Cui Changqing. If it can be successfully carried out, with the three counties of Lingnan as a supply base and Lu Yuan¡¯s elite soldiers, Changsha can launch wars in all directions. With such a strong foundation, there is the potential to unify Jiangnan. Even if we cannot unify Jiangnan, it is enough to share the benefits of the Yangtze River with Jiangdong¡¯s minor court.¡± How can such a prospect and glorious achievements not excite Cui Changqing? ¡°Southsea and Ninghai are our allies, how can we attack them without reason? Now I only want to win more people¡¯s hearts. Minister Cui, don¡¯t mention your previous words again, and do not let them get out.¡± Fearing that Cui Changqing might do something inappropriate in his excitement, Lu Yuan hurriedly tried to calm him down. Although planning for the conquest of Lingnan was an idea that he already had at the beginning of the alliance between the three countries, it was basically impossible for him to take action on Lingnan before Yan Wangqiu¡¯s death. At present, the innate combat power that Lu Yuan possesses is only himself and Lan Cai¡¯er. The two of them combined would most likely lose if they were up against Su Xuange and Yan Wangqiu. In this way, there is no advantage in terms of top-level combat power. In terms of normal troops, given the two countries of Lingnan a few years, they should be able to muster tens of thousands of soldiers. Whether these soldiers can fight is another question. As long as they can defend the city against external enemies, that would be enough. Considering the complex environment Changsha faces, with the defense line spanning thousands of miles to the north and east, at least 60,000 to 70,000 soldiers are needed to guard it. That¡¯s to say, even if troops were dispatched for the Southern Expedition, Lu Yuan could only spare about 50,000 to 60,000 men. With no advantage in top-level combat power, it¡¯s not guaranteed that these forces can even conquer one country, let alone two. The chances are slim that he could succeed in annexing Lingnan. Therefore, before Yan Wangqiu¡¯s death, Lingnan could not be targeted. At this moment, he has no intention of turning his two allies into enemies, let alone swallowing them up. Moreover, Lu Yuan does not want to tarnish his reputation by attacking his allies at this time. Since Southsea and Ninghai are bound to break the alliance and sever ties with him sooner or later, why not wait until they do so? Why should he be the one to do the dirty work? As Yan Wangqiu hasn¡¯t much time left to live, it is better to let him enjoy his last years in peace. In some respects, Lu Yuan does have his limits. Cui Changqing seems to have understood his King¡¯s limits, and upon being reminded, he immediately said, ¡°Your Majesty, rest assured that I am not a man who talks too much. I will not speak of this matter to anyone. As for those scholars living in the barracks outside the city, their conditions are indeed a bit poor. How about this: I will have someone prepare ginger soup and then personally send it to them, in Your Majesty¡¯s name, to show gratitude for their hard journey to take the exam and to help warm their bodies. What do you think, Your Majesty?¡± Approving of this considerate suggestion, Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°It¡¯s a good idea. Let¡¯s do it that way. Oh, and make sure the money for the ginger comes from my Inner Treasury. If it¡¯s in my name, I should pay for it. I must not use public funds for private gain.¡± With a look of admiration on his face, Cui Changqing replied, ¡°Your Majesty¡¯s kindness will surely impress the scholars, and they will devote their hearts to you from then on.¡± Lu Yuan waved his hand with a smile, ¡°It¡¯s just a small amount of money. If it can make those scholars happy during the exam, I will be satisfied.¡± Although this series of actions to win people¡¯s hearts is for long-term planning, it may not be needed at this time. However, in the future, when the two countries turn against him and even resort to armed conflict, won¡¯t the preparations made today come in handy? As a man with longevity, Lu Yuan does not mind making some hidden preparations for events that may happen in a few or even a dozen years. Just in case, it is necessary to be prepared. After all, he has the patience to wait for the day when these preparations come into play. So the matter of sending warmth to the examination scholars was finalized between the King and his Prime Minister. As for the subsequent series of actions to win people¡¯s hearts, Cui Changqing and professionals would handle them, so Lu Yuan would not need to worry about them. Chapter 415 - Chapter 415: Chapter 217: I Absolutely Do Not Covet Women_3 Chapter 415: Chapter 217: I Absolutely Do Not Covet Women_3 Translator: 549690339 However, based on the subsequent reports, Lu Yuan¡¯s actions appear to have been very effective. Many of the scholars who received his warmth were all grateful, just like Cui Changqing said. A king who cares so much for scholars, isn¡¯t he the best wise ruler for those who study? So Lu Yuan¡¯s good reputation among the literati, has only improved in leaps and bounds after this event. Under such atmosphere, the imperial examination began on the first day of November. However, Lu Yuan did not show up for this first imperial examination of the new dynasty. The chief examiner of the examination had been decided long ago, it was Cui Changqing. The other deputy examiners and assistants had also been decided long ago, and there was no need for him, the king, to do anything. Lu Yuan just needed to wait patiently until the examination ended and the new jinshi were selected. He would only need to show up for the palace examination afterward. For now, he just needs to wait. Although Lu Yuan attaches great importance to the imperial examination, at the moment, he is too busy to handle it. Because his energy is now consumed by handling another matter. Within the royal palace in North City, which was once the Da Yue palace. ¡°Cai¡¯er, what do you think of this wedding dress?¡± Lu Yuan held Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s hand, smiled, and pointed at the bright red ceremonial robes displayed before them by several palace servants, asking for the opinion of his fiancee. ¡°I will follow my husband¡¯s decision.¡± Lan Cai¡¯er blushed slightly, glanced at the wedding dress, and lowered her head. Even as an Inborn Grandmaster, she could not keep her composure like a young girl when faced with the big matter of marriage. ¡°Haha¡± Seeing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but laugh out loud, waving his hand and saying, ¡°Then this one it is.¡± In his laughter, he also expressed some anticipation and excitement for his upcoming wedding. When Lu Yuan and Lan Zhaoyun decided on the engagement, they agreed on the third day of the first month in Hongdao¡¯s seventh year, and one year later, which is the third day of the first month in Hongdao¡¯s eighth year, they would be married. Now that more than half a year has passed, there are only two months left until their wedding date. Lu Yuan is the founding monarch, and as his wife, Lan Cai¡¯er is considered the founding queen. Furthermore, both of them are Inborn Grandmasters, and their positions in Jianghu are very high. If one takes into account that one of them is Yue people and the other is Miao People, this marriage has extremely important significance in stabilizing the country. Therefore, the two¡¯s marriage must not be taken lightly, and must be well-organized. In fact, the announcement of their wedding and invitations were sent out early on. The Yue Country, Southsea, Ninghai, and some Yi countries in the southwest, Liang Country and Zhou Country in the north, and some countries in the East Sea. Lu Yuan sent people to notify anyone who had any relation with the Changsha Kingdom. No matter whether they come or not, the first wedding of his life must be grand. He was not afraid to spend millions of silver tales for this, the equivalent of the military expenses for a hundred thousand soldiers for a year, just to organize a grand wedding. With the massive amount of silver tales spent, preparations for various matters have begun. But after delegating a lot of tasks to his subordinates, Lu Yuan also had to put in some effort in planning his own wedding. Such as spending time with his bride-to-be and deepening their bond. This is indeed a matter of national importance. After all, his queen is not only an Inborn Grandmaster but also the Holy Woman of the Miao People. If he doesn¡¯t appease her, wouldn¡¯t the stability of the nation be at risk? This is not him clouding official matters with personal ones, nor is it because Lu Yuan wants to spend more time with his charming bride, look at her blushing face, and listen to her lovely voice. Although it must be said. Toying with an Inborn Grandmaster and watching the high and mighty Holy Woman show various postures does give Lu Yuan a sense of accomplishment. But let¡¯s make this clear three times. He was doing this for the nation, for the Altars of Soil and Grain, for the people under his rule. It was not an act of lust. Chapter 416 - Chapter 416: Chapter 218: Great Increase in Luck Chapter 416: Chapter 218: Great Increase in Luck Translator: 549690339 ¡°Your Majesty, a total of 17,725 people participated in this imperial examination, which lasted three days and has all been completed.¡± On the third day of November, Cui Changqing came to report the results of the examination to Lu Yuan. Lu Yuan nodded satisfied after hearing the news: ¡°Not bad, to have so many scholars come, it seems that our preparations have not been in vain.¡± Having tens of thousands of people participate in the imperial examination was not an annual occurrence, even in Linhai County and Yuzhang Prefecture of Yue Country. It wasn¡¯t that the two prefectures couldn¡¯t gather so many scholars, but not every scholar was confident that they would become a juren after participating in the examination. Therefore, many people from less well-off families would often spend several years preparing before participating in the examination, in hopes of becoming a juren on their first try. The opportunity that Lu Yuan was able to gather so many scholars this time was mainly due to the unique circumstances. Both Southsea and Ninghai countries handled matters oddly, and the number of official positions offered by him was too many, making them irresistible. These combined conditions created the grand event now. Cui Changqing was also delighted. The prosperity of the new dynasty with so many scholars participating in the imperial examination showed the thriving fortunes of Changsha Country and the will of the people. If it were any other Southsea or Ninghai countries, you wouldn¡¯t see so many people participating in the imperial examination. In his delight, the Chief Minister of State also asked: ¡°Now that the examination is over, how many new jurens should be admitted this time? Your Majesty, please show the way.¡± After finishing the examination, it is time to grade the papers and select the best from among them to determine who can become a juren. And once these scholars are selected, they can become officials. In other words, the number of people Lu Yuan admits determines how many positions he needs to arrange for them. Otherwise, if people come to take the examination and there¡¯s no office position after they finish, what¡¯s the point? How would Changsha Country be different from Southsea and Ninghai countries then? So, the admission quota is a big consideration. Lu Yuan thought for a while and gestured, ¡°This time, let¡¯s set the admission quota to one thousand.¡± In the outside world, it has always been rumored that Changsha Country has a severe shortage of officials, with various departments only in the set-up stage and unable to operate normally. Actually, this rumor could not be said to be false. But the rumor that there is a need for more than 1,700 officials is an exaggeration. Before the founding of the country, even though Lu Yuan unified the nine prefectures, there was only a shortage of about 900 officials. After the founding of the country, the gap of officials increased, but at most, there was only a shortage of about 1,300 people. Now, after several months of preparation, supplementation, and adjustment, many of those 1,300 vacancies have been filled. At this point, there¡¯s a shortage of about 1,000 officials. This time, of the ten thousand scholars who participated in the examination, one thousand would be admitted, which is about one in ten. Although the admission rate is not very high, it is much stronger compared to the previous imperial examinations of the court, where one in dozens would be selected. Admitting one thousand people in one go, such a scale and momentum, is enough to shock people¡¯s hearts. As the left minister, Cui Changqing is naturally aware of the shortage of domestic officials. He has no objections to the admission quota set by Lu Yuan, and after nodding, he said, ¡°In that case, I¡¯ll go back later and instruct the examiners to start grading the papers.¡± ¡°Alright, go ahead.¡± Lu Yuan nodded, then waved for Cui Changqing to leave. Grading the papers is the responsibility of the examiners and doesn¡¯t need His Majesty to worry about. He only needs to set the admission quota and decide how many people can become jurens. Compared to this, Lu Yuan has other matters to deal with. After Cui Changqing left, Lu Yuan picked up a military report and began reading it with furrowed brows. The military report had just been delivered today. It was sent by his disciple Zhou Qing through a fast messenger. The report only recorded one event: a day ago, at the invitation of Shangguan Ming, Zhou Qing led the last 40,000 troops stationed in Jiangnan and crossed the river along with the court troops. By now, all of the 100,000 northern expedition troops sent by Lu Yuan had crossed the river. As for the court¡¯s side, with 140,000 troops, except for the 10,000 left to guard the rear in Baling Prefecture, they all crossed the river and headed north. At present, in the northern region, there were more than 200,000 troops assembled on both sides of the Zhou and Yue camps. Heavy troops were gathering on both sides, and the dark clouds of war hung over everyone¡¯s head. ¡°According to Qing¡¯er, at present, facing the aggressive attitude of the court, the Zhou people did not choose to directly resist, but continued to retreat.¡± Not only did they give up several peripheral county towns of Tianmen Prefecture, but their main forces also withdrew to Jingmen Prefecture in Xiangyang County and Wushan Prefecture in Xichuan County. It seems that they are determined to defend these two places and completely block the possibility of the army advancing north and west. Under the command of Wuan Marquis, the United Army tried to forcefully attack the two prefectures, but apart from losing more than 10,000 soldiers, they could not break through the defensive line. Now the army is blocked in Tianmen Prefecture, and there is no possibility of breakthrough for the time being.¡± After reading the military report, Lu Yuan put it down and pondered. Currently, at the front lines, with Lu Yuan and Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s departure, the battlefield has five inborn Grandmasters on both the court side and the Zhou side. Both sides are evenly matched, and neither can gain an advantage. As for the soldiers, after the historical battle, both the court and his United Army still have about 200,000 troops left in the north of the river, and their morale is extremely high, continuously advancing, and at their peak. Chapter 417 - Chapter 417: Chapter 218: Great Increase in Luck (Part 2) Chapter 417: Chapter 218: Great Increase in Luck (Part 2) Translator: 549690339 As for the Zhou People, they have a slightly larger number of troops at around twenty-three to twenty-four thousand, but their morale isn¡¯t very high. At present, they have all retreated to their old nest and started avoiding battles. Generally speaking, the situation is evenly matched between the two sides, and neither can gain an advantage. ¡°So now, if we want to break this deadlock, we need more resources and forces to be put in.¡± This force can be top combatants like me, Lan Cai¡¯er, and Yan Wangqiu, who are Inborn Grandmasters. It can also be ordinary soldiers, like the two hundred thousand troops from Nanhai and Ninghai countries. Either of these forces can be put in to influence the outcome of the war. What matters now is the outcome of the war between Nanhai and Ninghai countries. When Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange bring their troops, the war will most likely be over by then.¡± Lu Yuan concluded this and then threw the military report aside, not paying much attention to it anymore. Because ten days ago, he had received a letter from Nanhai Country stating that after dragging their feet for several months, Yan Wangqiu had finally put aside his domestic duties and had set out northwards with the hundred thousand troops he had assembled. At the same time, seven days ago, Ninghai Country sent a similar letter stating that Su Xuange had also set out with 100,000 troops to fulfill his promise to the court to send troops northwards. Now the two countries have dispatched a total of two hundred thousand troops. According to the timeline, the earliest departing troops from the closest Southsea Country may have already reached the border of Yangshan Prefecture in Changsha Country. Ninghai Country might be a little slower, but it will not take more than five days. Now, Lu Yuan only needs to wait for one more month, and the two countries¡¯ troops should be able to reach Changsha. At that time, he and Lan Cai¡¯er will join forces with the two countries, and the four Grandmasters and two hundred thousand fresh troops will head north. Such a massive force is enough to break the hard-built defense line by the Zhou People now. ¡°Perhaps, if it¡¯s fast enough, we can even end the war before the New Year and have a happy wedding.¡± If he could achieve a great victory and return triumphantly before the wedding in two months, it would undoubtedly be the best gift for the wedding. Time passed quickly. In the blink of an eye, it was five days later, the day when the results of the imperial examination were announced and names were posted. In the city, scholars who had stayed all this time got up early that day and gathered at the examination center converted from an outside military barracks. In the center of the examination site, at the drill ground where the army used to train, several large signboards had been erected, with red roll posted on them, listing the names of successful candidates. Several similar places were also arranged within the barracks. A total of seven notice boards were set up to announce the ranking list to the scholars who participated in the exam. ¡°Don¡¯t squeeze, don¡¯t squeeze! I can¡¯t see!¡± ¡°Where¡¯s my name? Where¡¯s my name?¡± ¡°I must have passed this time! There are a thousand slots!¡± Hundreds of scholars stretched their necks to look at the posted lists in front of them. Some anxious people pushed and shoved to get to the front to check for their names, causing some chaos. Fortunately, there were sentries maintaining order near the lists, and they immediately stepped in to handle the situation as soon as they noticed any issue, so no stampede incidents occurred. In this chaos, some lucky individuals soon found their names on the list and shouted excitedly, ¡°I passed! I passed! Oh, I passed!¡± At this time, someone beside them also spotted their name and became even more excited, jumping up and saying, ¡°I passed! Hahaha, I passed! I¡¯m going to be an official!¡± These reactions were due to being overwhelmed with emotions. Many envious glances were cast at these people, who blushed but couldn¡¯t help but giggle foolishly. Some people with better composure and self-discipline didn¡¯t lose their composure when they saw their names on the list, although they were excited. After looking at it a few more times, they turned around and left. Since they passed the examination today, their ten years of hard study were not wasted. It was time to return home and celebrate with friends at a banquet. At that time, one could slowly let loose. There was no need to lose face here. Where there is joy, there is sorrow. Some people in the field had looked at ten lists in a row, but they couldn¡¯t find their names among the thousands of slots. They couldn¡¯t help but burst into tears. ¡°Why didn¡¯t I pass? Why didn¡¯t I pass? I have been taking exams for more than a decade. There are so many slots this time; why didn¡¯t I pass?¡± ¡°My name must have been accidentally left out. It must have been left out. How could I not pass with my great talent?¡± ¡°Oh, heavens, I borrowed money from someone to travel thousands of miles for this exam. Why didn¡¯t I pass? If I don¡¯t pass, I can¡¯t be an official, and I won¡¯t have the money to go back.¡± ¡°Ahhhhhh¡­¡± Voices of breakdowns and crying abound in the examination site. Many scholars nearby felt sympathetic and empathetic. After all, only one in ten candidates would pass this exam, and those who did were still a minority. More people failed to get the juren title after the exam. At this point, many scholars from Nanhai and Ninghai countries couldn¡¯t help but feel the sorrow of traveling thousands of miles to take the imperial examination in a foreign land, only to go back empty-handed. With such thoughts, even more people broke down and cried. Thus, there were laughter and tears, noise and chaos, and all aspects of life were performed together in the examination site. Amidst the chaos, the officials and soldiers responsible for announcing the list at various locations also began to shout, ¡°Attention, scholars! In ten days, the palace examination will be held. Those who have passed the imperial examination and obtained the juren title are eligible to participate.¡± Chapter 418 - Chapter 418: Chapter 218: Great Increase in Qi Luck_3 Chapter 418: Chapter 218: Great Increase in Qi Luck_3 Translator: 549690339 This time in the exam, one in ten will be selected, which will determine the hundred Jinshi. Those who are interested in taking the imperial examination can go and register.¡± Upon hearing this news, many scholars in the venue couldn¡¯t help but be happier, while those who were sad and miserable became even more so. Even the number of people crying increased. Perhaps seeing too many people crying, the shouting officials and soldiers couldn¡¯t help but comfort them: ¡°Even if you didn¡¯t pass the exam, it¡¯s not a big deal. Next year the imperial examination will be held again, and everyone can participate. If you didn¡¯t pass the first time, try a few more times, and you¡¯ll surely pass eventually. There¡¯s no need to be too sad.¡± Upon hearing this, the scholars of Changsha felt much better. Indeed. If they didn¡¯t pass this time, it was no big deal, and they could try again next year. However, it was even more bitter for the scholars from Ninghai and Southsea. In their country, the military was in power, and it was not only difficult to become an official, but it was even a question whether there would be imperial examinations in the coming years. And they traveled thousands of miles to attend the examinations in Changsha, which took them two to three months round trip. The expenses for food, accommodation, and traveling were not cheap. Many people wouldn¡¯t be able to take the exam again without a few years to recover. Thinking of this, some resolute individuals suddenly yelled out, ¡°Forget it! I might as well not go back. Starting now, I¡¯ll live in Changsha. I don¡¯t believe I won¡¯t pass next year¡¯s imperial examination.¡± ¡°You¡¯re right. I think there are plenty of job opportunities in Changsha, where things are just beginning to develop. At the very worst, we can live here and find a job while preparing for the exam on the side. This time, we came all the way here and didn¡¯t even manage to score half a decent achievement. To return home in disgrace would be too humiliating to face our hometown.¡± If we don¡¯t pass the Juren exam, we won¡¯t leave.¡± ¡°Exactly! Exactly! If we don¡¯t become Juren, we won¡¯t leave.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s all stay together!¡± Inside the examination venue, many of the unsuccessful exam candidates started encouraging each other. Inspired by their determination, some of the previously dispirited cheered up as well. Particularly some of the would-be returnees who were now infected by their enthusiasm began to seriously consider whether or not to stay.¡± After all, from what they have seen and heard in this period of time, Changsha is indeed stronger than Ninghai and Southsea in all aspects.¡± If they stay here, even if they only help others write letters for a living, there won¡¯t be as much competition.¡± Both making money and the pressure of life will be much easier.¡± As their minds were changing, Lu Yuan, who was walking with Lan Cai¡¯er in the Royal Palace garden, suddenly stopped in his tracks and looked into the distance.¡± ¡°What¡¯s wrong, Your Majesty?¡± Lan Cai¡¯er noticed something off about her companion and turned to ask curiously.¡± ¡°Nothing. I just suddenly feel much better.¡± Lu Yuan turned back and looked at his future queen before teasing, ¡°Perhaps it¡¯s because of being with you, my lady.¡± ¡°Your Majesty.¡± Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s face reddened, and she became slightly displeased.¡± ¡°Hahaha!¡± Lu Yuan laughed heartily and spontaneously embraced Lan Cai¡¯er as his spirits lifted.¡± Of course, the reason for Lu Yuan¡¯s halt wasn¡¯t his claimed cause, Lan Cai¡¯er. Although being with her did indeed cheer him up.¡± What really caught Lu Yuan¡¯s attention was the sudden influx of Qi Luck from his practice of the Way of Taiping.¡± The Qi Luck gathered around him surged significantly, drawing his attention.¡± ¡®It looks like the source of this Qi Luck is coming from the southern barracks, which, if I recall correctly, is where the exam venue is located. That¡¯s right, today is the results announcement day. It seems that after this examination, I¡¯ve gathered a lot of people¡¯s Qi Luck. Many examinees have already become attached to me.¡¯ To gather people¡¯s Qi Luck, Lu Yuan either had to directly rule over people or have them sincerely admire him.¡± As a large number of scholars in the exam venue were foreigners not under his rule, any Qi Luck from there meant that someone regarded him as their true ruler and began to devote themselves to him.¡± Looking at the amount of Qi Luck he gathered, there must be at least two to three thousand people who had devoted themselves to him this time.¡± With one examination, so many people¡¯s hearts were gathered. How could this not make him happy? Thus, Lu Yuan and his soon-to-be queen enjoyed themselves even more as they continued their walk in the garden. Chapter 419 - Chapter 419: Chapter 219: The Dream of the King Chapter 419: Chapter 219: The Dream of the King Translator: 549690339 On the 7th year of Hongdao, the 11th month, and the 13th day, the city of Changsha held the provincial examination. This time, a thousand new Juren candidates and more than a hundred previous candidates participated in the examination, which eventually decided the top 100 Jinshi. Three days later, these Jinshi candidates participated in the palace examination and the top three leaders were selected. At this point, after the three rounds of the county, provincial, and palace examinations, more than a thousand new Jinshi candidates were successively granted official positions, filling the vacancies in local and central government. After this examination and appointment, Lu Yuan¡¯s Changsha government became recognized as the legitimate regime by local scholars, firmly establishing its foundation. In terms of cultivation, it was just that when he practiced Taiping Dao Book, his gathered Qi Luck skyrocketed again. In just a few days, it kept rising, adding nearly 20% more than before. This abundant Qi Luck made Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation of the Taiping Dao Book much faster than before. In just half a month, he had achieved minor success in his cultivation. Inside the royal palace¡¯s main hall. Lu Yuan sat alone on a high seat, with his knees placed on the couch and both hands forming hand seals, closing his eyes and cultivating. Silently around his body, a mysterious and pure Qi descended, transforming into colorful lights that drifted and lingered around him. In this dreamlike state, Lu Yuan followed the breathing method of refining Qi in the Taiping Dao Book. With each inhalation and exhalation, he gathered the colorful lights, absorbing them into his nose and mouth. After swallowing and breathing a few times, when the descending pure Qi was completely refined, the aura around him dispersed, and Lu Yuan¡¯s body contained a bit more cultivation strength. Still maintaining a calm breath, after refining his cultivation strength, Lu Yuan adjusted his breath a few times before slowly opening his eyes. A hint of joy appeared on his face as he secretly pondered: ¡°In recent days, as the country¡¯s political affairs have been sorted out and the people have gathered, the country¡¯s prosperity has increased and my cultivation has become increasingly smoother. In just half a month, my cultivation gains have been stronger than in the previous two or three months. I heard that during the time of the ancient Three Emperors, they ruled with benevolence, the people of all races were referred to as wise, and millions of people submitted. Their military prowess was also unmatched, and the barbarians in the Nine Provinces and Ten Domains feared them. As a result, the Three Emperors had a peaceful rule in both Heaven and Earth. Numerous Immortals paid homage, gods respected them, and the seas and people acknowledged their rule. Their power was invincible. I previously thought that the historical records and ancient Immortal¡¯s stories were exaggerated. But now, after personally cultivating the Qi Luck Dao, I realized that the rumors might not be false, and the Three Emperors might indeed have ruled over the Immortals with their influence reaching the realm of the underworld, becoming the emperors of the Three Realms.¡± At this point, Lu Yuan ruled only one province, controlling a territory of a thousand miles and a population of barely two million people. However, even so, when he practiced Taiping Dao Book and benefitted from Qi Luck, his cultivation progress was very fast. The ancient Three Emperors ruled over the Nine Provinces and controlled vast land and billions of people. The prestige and Qi Luck they amassed were millions of times greater than Lu Yuan¡¯s. With such Qi Luck, their cultivation progress must have been terrifying, as one could imagine. ¡°However, although the Three Emperors were awe-inspiring and dominating, various records and legends all indicate that their lifespans were not long, with none of them living more than a thousand years. In the ancient times, when immortals were abundant and many of them lived for thousands or even tens of thousands of years, the Three Emperors¡¯ lifespans were considered short. After all, once a cultivator achieves the Five Qi Towards Primordial, they can have a lifespan of 800 years. Once they condense the flower on the top of their head, they can become True Persons, join the ranks of the Immortals, and live freely for three thousand years. Even though the Three Emperors had such power to subdue Immortals, in terms of lifespan, they were nothing more than Five Qi Towards Primordial cultivators who had not yet become Immortals.¡± Could it be that the reason for their short lifespans was due to cultivating Fortune Dao, which resulted in lifespans being affected and hampered, causing them to leave the world prematurely?¡± As Lu Yuan thought about the biggest drawback of cultivating Qi Luck Dao, his brows furrowed. With the deepening of his cultivation of the Taiping Dao Book, his understanding of Qi Luck Dao had become increasingly profound in recent days. Although his cultivation time was still short, Lu Yuan gradually realized that the so-called drawback of the Taiping Dao Book might not be due to incomplete techniques, but because the Qi Luck Dao was inherently flawed and difficult to achieve longevity. After all, cultivating this Dao was so much faster than other ordinary Qi cultivators. It would be impossible for Heaven to favor someone so much. If benefits are provided on one side, disasters and prices will naturally come with the other side in order to maintain the balance of Heaven and Earth. Obviously, the price to be paid for cultivating Qi Luck Dao is the cultivator¡¯s lifespan. That¡¯s why those who practiced the Taiping Dao Book previously had great power and strength at the beginning, but after reaching their peak, they could not survive for more than two months. That was the price they paid. ¡°Moreover, unlike those who practiced the Taiping Dao Book before, I am now the ruler of a province, and I have gone through the steps of establishing the system, ascending the throne, and conducting the imperial examinations. Through this process, the Qi Luck and popular support I have gathered far surpasses those Grass Head Kings supported by the Dan Ding Path before. The more Qi Luck I have gathered, the stronger the backlash will be. Even though I have only been cultivating the Taiping Dao Book for twenty days, my lost lifespan during this short period, under the backlash of the Qi Luck from the people, is estimated to be no less than two years. Almost every ten days or so, I lose about a year of my lifespan. At this rate, even if I am an Inborn Grandmaster, after cultivating the Taiping Dao Book, my maximum lifespan will be merely about three more years.¡± Chapter 420 - Chapter 420: Chapter 219: The Dream of the King_2 Chapter 420: Chapter 219: The Dream of the King_2 Translator: 549690339 From 120 years of life reduced to just three years, almost a forty-to-one ratio, this Taiping Dao Book is truly a life-stealing technique.¡± Although Lu Yuan¡¯s life was endless, he was affected by Qi Luck¡¯s backfiring every day and was somewhat aware of the loss of his own lifespan. When he calculated the loss at this time, he couldn¡¯t help but be shocked. With the lifespans accelerated forty-fold, even an Inborn Grandmaster couldn¡¯t withstand it. Previously, Elder Anqiu of Anqiu had consoled Lu Yuan, saying that even if his lifespan was shortened rapidly after cultivating the Taiping Dao Book, as long as he could break through the realm and cultivate in one breath before his life was exhausted, he could add another fifty years to his life, based on the foundation of an Inborn Grandmaster, and live a little longer. If he continued to break through like this, as long as he could cultivate Five Qi Towards Primordial, it wouldn¡¯t be possible to live as long as the ancient cultivators who lived for 800 years. But living for two or three hundred years should be no problem. Originally, Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t cultivated this Book and didn¡¯t have a general understanding of how terrifying the consumption of life was. Now that he had practiced, he realized how ridiculous Anqiu True Person¡¯s words were. ¡°With my strength and fate as a Martial Arts Grandmaster, I can only bear it for three years. If it were someone else or if the breakthrough was late, I¡¯m afraid it would only be a matter of one or two years before they meet their demise. One or two years, at most three years of time. Even with a rapid success method like the Taiping Dao Book, it¡¯s still difficult, if not impossible, to condense a single breath and break through the cultivation. Thus, the Dan Ding Path¡¯s plan has been nothing but a delusion from the beginning.¡± Unless they could reduce the backlash of Qi Luck on their lifespan by improving it, or find other ways to resist the backlash. Otherwise, relying solely on the slow trial and error approach of the Dan Ding Path now would be a long shot, let alone perfecting the Taiping Dao Book.¡± At this point, Lu Yuan can basically conclude that the plan of the Dan Ding Path is impossible to achieve. After all, even during the prosperous times of the Immortal Method, the ancient Three Emperors couldn¡¯t solve the problem. Now that the Age of Dharma Decline has come, where does an insignificant Dan Ding Path get the confidence and self-assurance to achieve what the ancient Three Emperors couldn¡¯t have achieved? However, looking at the current situation of the Dan Ding Path, they don¡¯t seem to be aware that they have fallen into a dead-end. After all, most of the people who were initially chosen for the Dan Ding Path¡¯s experiments were only second-rate in strength, and not even an Inborn Grandmaster was among them. For those people in the Innate World, with their strength and fate, not to mention their remaining lifespans, I¡¯m afraid that as soon as they start practicing the Dao Book, they will quickly deteriorate and, in just a few days, become ill enough to be no longer human. By that time, with their weakened bodies and blurred wills, even taking a breath would be an ordeal. Where would they have the ability and skills to slowly summarize patterns from the passing of life like Lu Yuan and come up with numerous insights like he did? And it¡¯s precisely because they don¡¯t get this kind of positive feedback that the Dan Ding Path cannot detect this hidden aspect. Eventually, they¡¯ve fallen into a cycle of finding a test subject and then having the test subject die of illness in less than a month before looking for the next one. Maybe it¡¯s only when they find the next Inborn Grandmaster, preferably a younger one, and have that person experiment with their methods, that the Dan Ding Path will finally realize that they¡¯ve chosen a dead-end and cut off their thoughts early on.¡± ¡°The Dan Ding Path may also have realized the problem, which is why they found me. But my secret cannot be exposed. Even though I have already cultivated the Taiping Dao Book and gained some harvest, I will never tell the Dan Ding Path about any of it, but will hide it as a secret. As for the Dan Ding Path, it¡¯s a mutual use, not dedication. Since they haven¡¯t played me yet, they will admit their loss and continue on this dead-end path for a while longer.¡± Lu Yuan didn¡¯t have much liking for the Dan Ding Path. Although they had made it clear that the Taiping Dao Book had problems when they first found him, the extent to which they had revealed the truth was now very questionable. Not to mention the recent Sky Pillar Offering Ceremony, when Elder Anqiu had hidden his malice from Lu Yuan. Moreover, having someone constantly urging you to practice a short-lived technique every day, even though there was a deal in place between you, was disgusting enough. After going through all of these events, it¡¯s natural for him to develop a little distaste for the Dan Ding Path. At this point, if he could manage to scam them, Lu Yuan certainly wouldn¡¯t mind. ¡°As for the Taiping Dao Book, such a powerful weapon might be of great use in the future.¡± Lu Yuan took out the Taiping Dao Book from his bosom, slowly feeling the texture of its cover, and began to ponder. He cultivated this technique because he had an endless lifespan and wasn¡¯t afraid. But other people didn¡¯t have this talent, did they? ¡°So if I see someone I don¡¯t like in the future, maybe I could trick them into practicing this technique, just like the Dan Ding Path tricked me. As long as they take the bait, there¡¯s no need to waste effort to eliminate a powerful enemy. Isn¡¯t this approach much more comfortable than painstakingly killing an enemy? I just don¡¯t know if others would be as easy to fool as I was. Maybe I should change the name of the Taiping Dao Book, so I might have a chance to deceive a few with shorter vision.¡± As Lu Yuan thought this, several plans emerged in his mind, and he gradually had an idea. However, these things will have to wait for the future. Right now, the most important thing is to diligently cultivate this technique and strengthen his own strength as much as possible. Having finally come across such an Immortal Technique that could quickly enhance his own strength and was immune to defects, Lu Yuan naturally cherished it greatly. Chapter 421 - Chapter 421: Chapter 219: The Dream of the King_3 Chapter 421: Chapter 219: The Dream of the King_3 Translator: 549690339 At this point, Lu Yuan felt somewhat like he did after just traveling through time, practicing martial arts and reading each day, feeling the fullness of his schedule. Now, Lu Yuan¡¯s daily routine included spending some time handling political affairs and spending time with Lan Cai¡¯er, while the rest of his time was dedicated to practicing the Taiping Dao Book. The decisive battle in the north of the river was imminent, and he would join Yan Wangqiu and others who were leading the army to cross the river and have a final battle with the Zhou People. Even if he had the advantage in strength, there was no absolute safety in the battlefield, was there? At this moment, every bit of strength he could improve would give him a greater chance of self-preservation during the battle. Lu Yuan was quite experienced in such matters, and he approached them with great steadiness. Time flew by, and soon it was Hongdao 7th year, month 11, day 23. That day, after nearly a month¡¯s journey, Yan Wangqiu finally arrived at Fu City with the army. ¡°King of Changsha, it¡¯s been half a year since we¡¯ve seen each other. Your majesty looks even more imposing than the past.¡± The two allies met again, and Yan Wangqiu seemed very happy, greeting him enthusiastically. ¡°King of Nanhai also looks much better than before.¡± Lu Yuan looked Yan Wangqiu up and down, noting his far healthier complexion than ever before, and remarked with amazement: ¡°Indeed, the king¡¯s aura is nourishing. The Lingnan King Qi has really invigorated you, my lord.¡± He also greeted Yan Wangqiu with a smile. After all, not long ago, Yan Wangqiu allowed his scholars to participate in Lu Yuan¡¯s imperial examination, which was a great favor. It was only right for him to compliment Yan Wangqiu. As expected, upon hearing this, Yan Wangqiu heartily laughed and said: ¡°King of Changsha is right. Since becoming king, the noble aura has indeed made me feel different. I don¡¯t mind telling you, King of Changsha, that even though I have only been king for half a year. Within these six months, thanks to my efforts, three concubines in the harem are pregnant with my children. In the decades before that, besides the children born in my early years, I had no other offspring. Now, within half a year of becoming king, my offspring has multiplied. This is a sign from Heaven that my Nanhai Country will enjoy everlasting reign and never-ending generations.¡± Yan Wangqiu spoke with pride and profound meaning. Standing beside him, Lu Yuan was deeply impressed. If he wasn¡¯t mistaken, the King of Nanhai standing before him was already 144 years old. At such an old age, he was still able to father children within half a year. This vigor and vitality were truly fitting of the old lord, displaying a deep-seated foundation and inspiring admiration. While admiring him, Lu Yuan responded to the other¡¯s subtle hope for the enduring reign of Nanhai Country and for generations to come without end. ¡°King of Nanhai, rest assured that as long as your country practices benevolent governance, bringing internal peace and prosperity to the common people and maintaining good relations with neighboring countries, your Nanhai Country will be able to enjoy lasting reign and generations without end.¡± Lu Yuan cryptically assured him. Hmm. As long as there were no internal troubles in Nanhai Country, and they maintained good relations with them, they could indeed enjoy long-lasting rule and enduring generations without end. However, if Nanhai Country¡¯s rule led to the people suffering, while also severing their good relations and breaking their alliance, then such a tyrannical country ought to be eliminated. The final outcome depended on how their good ally, full of vigor and strength, would educate their successors. However, at this time, the two were indeed allies in good faith. This fact was clear to both Lu Yuan and Yan Wangqiu. Therefore, after receiving Lu Yuan¡¯s promise, Yan Wangqiu, the King who fathered three children in a row, laughed happily and gratefully: ¡°I¡¯ll take your word for it, King of Changsha.¡± After laughing, he looked at Lu Yuan and couldn¡¯t help teasing him: ¡°However, I have already fathered children and strengthened my country¡¯s foundations. King of Changsha, you are younger than me, and you should also start planning to have more children to stabilize the hearts of the people within your country.¡± For the people of this world, a monarch having many children would be a good thing, as it would allow better choices for the successors and provide a stable foundation for the realm. Moreover, Lu Yuan was already preparing for his wedding and was about to get married, so no one urged him. Otherwise, if he was still single, Cui Changqing, Sun Siwen and others would have run over to submit their advice, asking the king to expand his harem, indulge in nightly revelries, and have more children for the country¡¯s sake. Lu Yuan naturally understood this, too. However, at the moment, he shook his head and smiled bitterly: ¡°King of Nanhai must know how unique my queen-to-be is. I would like to follow your example and father children one after another. But I don¡¯t know whether my queen will agree! I don¡¯t want to cause discord in the harem, or I would be the one to suffer in the end.¡± These days, Lu Yuan had been spending time with Lan Cai¡¯er, and with his efforts, their relationship as husband and wife had improved to the point where they were gradually resembling a couple. However, Miao People¡¯s customs were traditionally monogamous. Lan Cai¡¯er was an Inborn Grandmaster, and her dignified personality was not comparable to that of an ordinary concubine. Lu Yuan felt that if he wanted to expand his harem, his queen might not refuse due to etiquette. However, the hard-won good relationship these days would probably be ruined as a result. From then on, they would basically be having separate dreams on the same bed. He might even have to face the risk of being suffocated in his sleep. He still wanted to have a good relationship with his queen and add some excitement to their lives, instead of dealing with a cold, lifeless fish, which would be much less interesting. So the question of how to approach this issue and how to do the groundwork became a difficult problem for Lu Yuan. Seeing his troubled expression, Yan Wangqiu couldn¡¯t help but sympathize and understandingly said, ¡°With such a queen, it must indeed be tough for you.¡± In all fairness. If Yan Wangqiu were in Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s shoes, the Inborn Grandmaster would naturally be unwilling to share her husband with others. Alternatively, she might agree to share on the condition that he finds another Inborn Grandmaster, in which case, she would have no objections. If not, how could an ordinary woman compare with her and share her husband? This was the pride of being an Inborn Grandmaster. Listening to this, Lu Yuan sighed, ¡°Every family has its own difficulties. For the time being, I can only make do with my situation.¡± After traveling through time, he struggled to build a dynasty, declaring himself king and establishing his empire. However, he couldn¡¯t expand his harem and indulge in the pleasures of the Three Palaces and Six Courtyards, which was indeed unfortunate. Lu Yuan felt frustrated at that moment. He also made up his mind that, in the future, he would work more on Lan Cai¡¯er. He didn¡¯t want his dream of being a muddled monarch to be crushed like this. And so, the struggle for one who dreams of being a muddled monarch continues. Chapter 422 - Chapter 422: Chapter 220: The Might of Wu An Soldiers Chapter 422: Chapter 220: The Might of Wu An Soldiers Translator: 549690339 After some casual conversation, Yan Wangqiu, leading Lu Yuan, began to discuss serious matters. ¡°When I, the Lonely King, was in the Southsea, I repeatedly heard about Yue Country¡¯s great king making repeated victories in the north of the river, recapturing several cities and reclaiming Tianmen Prefecture. Such bravery is awe-inspiring.¡± Yan Wangqiu first flattered him before shifting the topic, asking, ¡°The great king has achieved consecutive victories, so you should have a deep understanding of the battles in Tianmen Prefecture. We two countries are allies, and I ask that you share the full picture ¨C how are things over there? Having marched the army northward, is it possible to engage in battle now?¡± While in Nanhai Country, in order to urge Yan Wangqiu to action, messengers from the court repeatedly sent news of victories, without any breaks. But things in the world aren¡¯t always as they appear on the surface. Despite the court¡¯s claims of continued victories, Yan Wangqiu still had doubts about the war in Tianmen Prefecture. He well remembered that half a year earlier, when he left Dongting County, the Zhou People¡¯s huge army, numbering tens of thousands, seemed like they were about to cross the river and march southward at any moment. At that time, how formidable were the invading forces from the north? How is it that just a few months later, the Zhou people are finished? This certainly did not make sense. Therefore, under Yan Wangqiu¡¯s contemplation, he naturally felt worried. Finally, having met Lu Yuan, he decided to ask his ally directly, hoping to understand the truth behind these matters. Lu Yuan contemplated for a moment upon hearing Yan Wangqiu¡¯s inquiries, before finally saying, ¡°Leading the army northward, it is naturally possible to fight though it might not be as easy as outsiders might think.¡± Yan Wangqiu furrowed his eyebrows, ¡°What do you mean by this?¡± Lu Yuan sighed, ¡°While the recapture of Tianmen Prefecture seems like the court¡¯s consecutive victories over the Zhou people to outsiders, it is not what it seems.¡± Looking at his ally, he revealed the truth: ¡°In this Northern Expedition, although our allies fought bravely, we indeed won several battles and pushed the Zhou People back. However, each victory came at a great cost. In the battles in the north of the river, seven major fights involved more than a hundred thousand troops. Even though we won each, we also captured over seventy thousand Zhou soldiers. However, our own losses also exceeded fifty thousand. Moreover, after interrogating prisoners it became clear that the casualties on Zhou¡¯s side consisted primarily of the original Yue¡¯s surrendered troops and irregularities from the Qiang People. The loss was not significant amongst the Zhou¡¯s elite troops.¡± Therefore, although they faced multiple defeats, the main force of Zhou¡¯s army sustained no substantial damage and they still have two hundred and forty thousand troops.¡± Even now, they have retreated to a rear position, shortening their logistical supplies, and are defending their strong cities. It will not be as easy to break through as before.¡± ¡°Therefore, it is possible to fight this time going north. But if we want to see results, we can¡¯t expect it to happen without losing tens or hundreds of thousands of lives.¡± Just as Lu Yuan intended to deplete the domestic Miao People¡¯s surrendered troops with the Northern Expedition, this time the Zhou people were also planning to exhaust a wave of miscellaneous troops. While the multiple grand battles made the United Army appear to be in a strong position, in reality, they didn¡¯t gain much advantage.¡± Even the retreat of Zhou¡¯s troops was not out of fear of the United Army. After all, the Zhou people still maintained twenty-three to twenty-four thousand soldiers, while theUnited Army roughly had two hundred thousand.¡± With a larger number of troops, how could the Zhou People be afraid? On hearing these words, Yan Wangqiu couldn¡¯t help drawing a sharp breath, ¡°In this case, out of my hundred thousand Lingnan brothers, I wonder how many will be able to return.¡± Standing by him, Lu Yuan shook his head, ¡°Forget about the Lingnan brothers. Even among my Dongting soldiers, nearly twenty thousand losses have already been incurred since the Northern Expedition. By the time the war ceases, who knows how many will survive, and whether half the forces can return.¡± Even though the majority of these casualties were Miao People, in Lu Yuan¡¯s view, these losses still cause a heartache.¡± Wouldn¡¯t these troops be better utilised elsewhere? These casualties were needless deaths that ended up happening in the north of the river. Upon hearing these words, Yan Wangqiu, realising the extent of Lu Yuan¡¯s losses, couldn¡¯t help but sigh, ¡°The warfront is quite perilous. I can only hope this Northern Expedition ends soon. Then all our countries can dismiss their troops and restore peace. From then on, peace and joy.¡± This King of the Southsea, advancing in years, was increasingly finding this violence unpleasant, and simply wished for quiet in his later years. The stable transition and inheritance of Southsea Country had already become his persistent ambition. Looking at his aging ally who had already shown signs of decline, Lu Yuan sighed in his heart, ¡°Let¡¯s hope so.¡± Although he said this, Lu Yuan knew in his heart the other¡¯s wish would by no means be realised.¡± Because he was unwilling, and so were the courts. Even Zhou Country and Liang Country would never want to see a peaceful world.¡± There is only one way for all countries to achieve peace and that is for a powerful country to eliminate other countries, unify the world and integrate all territories.¡± Only then can peace be achieved without fighting.¡± But is this possible? Or rather, how many wars need to be fought, how many people need to die, to achieve this goal? And until this goal is achieved, wars will never cease.¡± The conversation between the two fell into melancholy and drew to a close from there. Three days later, with Yan Wangqiu¡¯s arrival, Su Xuange finally led his troops to Changsha City. As Lu Yuan led Yan Wangqiu to greet him, he also took the opportunity to look at the forces under his command before shaking his head in private. Just like the army from Nanhai Country, the forces from Ninghai Country that were due to march northwards were also cobbled together by civilians. Both these nations had established themselves recently, as expected, they could barely pull together any elite forces. They could only forcibly recruit some able-bodied men to make up the numbers.¡± Chapter 423 - Chapter 423: Chapter 220: The Might of Wu An Soldiers_2 Chapter 423: Chapter 220: The Might of Wu An Soldiers_2 Translator: 549690339 Fortunately, Lu Yuan had never expected both nations to help in this regard. What he truly valued were the two Inborn Grandmasters, Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange. If these two were there, coupled with himself and Lan Cai¡¯er, their united army would form an absolute advantage in ultimate combat strength against Zhou people, outnumbering them with four Inborn Grandmasters. Four Inborn Grandmasters, that is certainly not a small force. Based on the idea that a single Inborn Grandmaster can easily defeat ten thousand soldiers, four Inborn Grandmasters gathered together could match forty thousand elite troops in a narrow battlefield. These are just basic numerical conversions. Reality is, on the actual battlefield, in a restricted range, the effectiveness of these four grandmasters would be far superior to that of forty thousand soldiers. Take the simplest example. A fortified city can only station thirty to fifty thousand soldiers at most. Stationed at a specific section of the city wall or gate, the number is reduced to just hundreds or thousands. In the face of these hundreds or thousands of soldiers, don¡¯t even mention four Inborn Grandmasters working together. Even if only one goes into action, he can overcome these defenders in just a dozen breaths. Thus, as long as one Inborn Grandmaster leads the charge, he can swiftly clear the defenders within a section of the city wall, resulting in the fall of the entire city. Four of them working together, without the interference of an equal powerhouse, what city in the world could withstand their assault? This is the power of intimidation that belongs to the Inborn Grandmaster. It¡¯s precisely because of this power that even though the Nanhai Sect and the Nine River Sword Sect didn¡¯t have elite troops originally, the court still made concessions in the face of their threats. The court knew that if these sects¡¯ demands were ignored, even if they could only muster a ragtag army, they would indeed be able to conquer and sweep all opposition with the cooperation of the Inborn Grandmasters. And now, with people like Lu Yuan being enlisted and bought over by the court, this pressure shifted from the court to the kingdom of Zhou. The only question is, would Zhou be tough enough this time, would they be able to resist? On the 27th day of the eleventh month in the seventh year of Hongdao, the army of Ninghai Country rested in a large camp outside the city for one day, then joined forces with the army of Nanhai Country. The combined forces of the two countries continued to march northward. On the third day of December, the joint force of 200,000 from the two countries arrived at Baling City. After resting for two days, they crossed the river north under the escort of the Yue country¡¯s navy. On the seventh day of the month, the army arrived at Dangyang battlefield in Zhou¡¯s Jingmen prefecture. Upon hearing the news, Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang personally led the military officers out of camp gate to meet them. At this point, Lu Yuan finally met this prestigious Marquis. ¡°Greetings to the King of Changsha, the King of Nanhai, and the King of Ninghai.¡± Although they were all Inborn Grandmasters, and even Bai Mengyang was more powerful, there was a clear distinction between the monarch and his subjects. Therefore, before Lu Yuan and the others, Bai Mengyang still adhered to the customs of a diplomat. ¡°Marquis Wang.¡± Lu Yuan had great respect for this highly accomplished senior. After receiving the courtesy of a subject, he immediately returned a bow. On the other hand, Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange¡¯s performance was much worse. In response to Bai Mengyang¡¯s salute, they did not dare to receive it, avoiding it instead. They treated him as an equal, demonstrating no royal demeanor at all. Compared to Lu Yuan, these two seemed to fear and dread the Marquis far more. Witnessing this, Lu Yuan could not help but be surprised. He did not understand why his two allies would take such a stance and lose their spirits needlessly. From the looks of their allies, Su Xuange and Yan Wangqiu both felt bitter. They would have wanted to be tough with the Marquis, but deep down, they found it impossible to do so. The reason was simple. During the previous Taiping Dao riots in Jian¡¯an Prefecture, it was indeed this Marquis of Wuan who led the troops in suppressing the riots. And the Nine River Sword Sect, being a local power in Jian¡¯an Prefecture then, naturally had quite a few encounters with the Marquis of Wuan. During their interactions, Su Xuange saw firsthand just how formidable this ¡°War God¡± Marquis was. The memory of those days, even think about it now, would still make one feel slight trepidation. The same goes for the Jinghai Country¡¯s rebellion that gradually expanded into Lingnan due to its great momentum. In the end, it was also the Wuan Marquis who personally quelled the chaos; he even directly annihilated Jinghai Country and designated this land as the Jiuzhen Prefecture under the court¡¯s authority. The Yulin and South Sea prefectures suffered severely under the calamity brought by Jinghai Country. As the local bullies, the Nanhai Sect suffered many casualties among its disciples during this unrest. I still remember that time when, enraged by the killing of disciples and the calamity befalling his hometown, Yan Wangqiu even discarded his usual timid image, took the initiative to confront an Inborn Grandmaster of the Nanhai Country, and fought him. However, the result was¡­ It became clear from the subsequent developments. Yan Wangqiu was no match for his opponent and was beaten so badly that he had to flee in disgrace, never daring to get involved in these matters again. Therefore, it can be said that the King of Nanhai knows very well the power of Jinghai Country. It was a force to be reckoned with ¨C armed to the teeth and filled with formidable warriors. However, this mighty enemy was driven out of the South Sea Prefecture in a short span of time after the arrival of the Wuan Marquis, leading an army of one hundred thousand. The once almighty Jinghai Country who used to cause havoc in two prefectures, was driven out and defeated in several major battles by Bai Mengyang, suffering tens of thousands of casualties. Within just over a year, they were driven out of Yue country territory. Later, Bai Mengyang marched right into Jinghai Country, leading his troops in an invasion. After another year, he defeated this ruler of the southern barbarians, besieging their capital. Later, he even personally killed the Inborn Grandmaster of Jinghai Country amidst a massive army. This was a genuine battlefield execution of a Grandmaster! Especially considering that the one who was executed was not a novice who had only recently reached the Inborn level, but a renown, formidable veteran Grandmaster. Can you imagine the shock it caused in the hearts of other Inborn Grandmasters when the news spread? Especially for people like Yan Wangqiu, who had once been defeated by the Grandmaster of Jinghai Country. Because he knew very well. That if the Wuan Marquis, standing before him, was able to execute the Grandmaster of Jinghai Country among a vast army, then he could certainly do the same to him in the midst of a large army. The mere presence of such a figure was a strong deterrent in itself. At this moment, these two newly appointed rulers of Lingnan were deeply deterred. As a Grandmaster, Bai Mengyang naturally noticed the changes in their expressions. With a laugh, he didn¡¯t specifically target these two ¡°old acquaintances¡± and warmly said: ¡°Your Majesties, your arrival with the troops has truly relieved me of a pressing concern. A feast has been prepared in the camp, please come inside.¡± As he spoke, Bai Mengyang gave Lu Yuan a meaningful look, his eyes flashing with a hint of surprise. This King of Changsha, who has been making a name for himself in recent years, truly stands out from the crowd. He, the Wuan Marquis, felt it wasn¡¯t his place to comment on other aspects of Lu Yuan, but when it came to courage and composure, Lu outshone the other two by a distance. At least, he didn¡¯t lose his composure in front of a war god like him. Ever since he became famous, how many people in the world could honestly say they were not afraid of facing the Wuan Marquis? At least, in Bai Mengyang¡¯s memory, there weren¡¯t more than ten people who could remain calm and composed in his presence. Whether Lu Yuan was just being young and reckless, or trying hard to conceal something, the fact that he could put forward this kind of disposition indicated his extraordinary nature. ¡®This young man is indeed a threat to the court; he should be eliminated as soon as possible.¡¯ Bai Mengyang thought to himself. Of course, Lu Yuan was unaware of the Wuan Marquis¡¯ thoughts, but even if he were, he would most likely laugh it off. To want to eliminate him, Bai Mengyang would probably never see the day ¨C even on his deathbed. When the Wuan Marquis dies, the court¡¯s strength will decline further, making it even more difficult, if not nearly impossible, to eliminate him. This is exactly why Lu Yuan had no qualms. Upon hearing Bai Mengyang¡¯s invitation, he laughed and said, ¡°The military prowess of the Wuan Marquis is renowned the world over, and I have long admired it. It is indeed a fortunate occasion to meet today! As I have been familiar with military affairs for a long time and have some insights, I would look forward to receiving guidance in our future campaigns.¡± His words were confident and composed, and he even proposed to learn military affairs from the Wuan Marquis. This was Lu Yuan trying to save the situation as he saw his allies¡¯ morale waning. Chapter 424 - Chapter 424: Chapter 221: The Plan of Surprise Attack Chapter 424: Chapter 221: The Plan of Surprise Attack Translator: 549690339 Lu Yuan had a certain apprehension towards this Wuan Marquis, but he was far from feeling fear. Bai Mengyang, as an Inborn Grandmaster of the Second realm, is naturally formidable. However, I, Lu Yuan, am not too shabby myself. Let¡¯s not talk about the combat power of the Inborn Grandmaster. Now, as for my current Immortal Dao Cultivation, although it is still inferior to True Person Anqiu, I can now perform three or five Dao spells. Never underestimate a person who cultivates both Immortal and martial arts. Especially this person, who is practicing dual cultivation of Immortal and martial arts, and has not yet discovered his Immortal Dao Cultivation. In any case, Lu Yuan is confident. If he ever was to cross hands with this Wuan Marquis and got a bit lucky, with his opponent not being prepared for his magical attack, then he could possibly have a 30% chance of killing him. If his opponent is prepared, he still has a 50% chance of ending in a draw. Even if his luck is bad and the opponent¡¯s strength is beyond his imagination, he would still have no problem saving his own life and escaping. Given these considerations, there is naturally no need to be too apprehensive about Bai Mengyang. And such an attitude, as expected, had its effect. Yan Wangqiu, who was next to him, saw Lu Yuan¡¯s stance and couldn¡¯t help but feel ashamed. Then they also started to look straight at Bai Mengyang, no longer showing the fear and respect they had previously. They finally had some semblance of a king¡¯s momentum. Bai Mengyang noticed the change in the atmosphere, and he couldn¡¯t help but admire Lu Yuan even more, the one who caused it all. Then in Bai Mengyang¡¯s heart, it became even more resolved. He wanted to get rid of this man. However, the most pressing task at hand is to repel the Zhou People, not internal conflict. Hence, Bai Mengyang also showed a friendly attitude, took the three of them, and entered the camp to join the banquet. The armies of the King of Nanhai and the King of Ninghai naturally have their own well-arranged camp quarters. After a day of grand feasting, washing the dust away for Lu Yuan and the others, the next day, Bai Mengyang summoned his commanders to discuss military affairs. ¡°Gentlemen, at present, the twenty-five thousand Northern Invaders, according to my investigation, have all been identified in their respective distributions.¡± In the main tent, Bai Mengyang looked at the assembled kings from the three nations and their various levels of commanders. He pointed to the map behind him and said, ¡°This is Jingmen Prefecture, the south gate of Zhou country¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture, which guards the heart of Jianghan. If this place is held, Xiangyang Prefecture will be safe. If this place is lost, our army can directly march in, right under Xiangyang City. Therefore, in Jingmen Prefecture, the Zhou People have stationed a hundred thousand strong army, led by their former Pillar State Grand General Zhang Chanyi and Left Pillar State Grand General Li Yanjing. Now, the bulk of this hundred thousand strong army is stationed in and around the city of Dangyang, standing in our path. Beyond Jingmen Prefecture, to the west, lies Xiangyang Prefecture¡¯s Guining Prefecture. This place is the western shield of Jingmen Prefecture, and it borders Wushan Prefecture of Xichuan Prefecture. It is a critical location for connecting Xiangyang Prefecture and Xichuan Prefecture, a position of utmost importance. Therefore, here has the Zhou People¡¯s Right Pillar State Grand General, Gui Lianyun, commanding a fifty thousand strong army in defense. Further to the west lies Wushan Prefecture. This Prefecture is the eastern gate of Xichuan Prefecture; the mountains and rivers are steep, and more critically, there is Wushan Pass within its territory. This place is known as one that even a single soldier could defend against ten thousand. Now, Zhou People¡¯s Rear Pillar State Grand General Yuwen Chong, and Shu thief Li Xiong, lead an army of hundred thousand men stationed in this place. So in this way, with Guining Prefecture as the center, Jingmen Prefecture and Wushan Prefecture to east and west, Zhou People¡¯s 250,000 strong army, led by five Inborn Grandmasters, is spread over this five-hundred-mile territory.¡± Bai Mengyang explained the current situation to everyone. As Lu Yuan and the others heard his explanation and looked at the map, they immediately understood the current situation. After explaining the enemy¡¯s situation, Bai Mengyang elaborated on his own side¡¯s arrangements: ¡°Currently, my Elite Army is on a Northern Expedition with two hundred thousand soldiers. The Wucheng Marquis has already led seventy thousand soldiers and with two National Mentors, they have advanced into Wushan Prefecture, to contain the Zhou People there. The remaining one hundred and thirty thousand of our army, commanded by me and the Martial Proclamation Marquis, have gathered at Dangyang City, facing off against the Zhou People. With such an arrangement, one would be able to resist the Zhou People, but advancing further would be difficult. Now that we have the King of Nanhai and the King of Ninghai leading their armies to join us, and the King of Changsha himself is at the front line, this current arrangement can be changed.¡± Bai Mengyang came to this point, then looked at Lu Yuan and others, and said: ¡°A few great kings, the Zhou People have a broad range of alliances and mutual support, which makes them rather tricky. In this Northern Expedition, if we want to break the Zhou People, we must first break their alliance. To break their alliance, we must first break through Guining. I intend to dispatch an army to attack Guining, conquer it, and then hold it in order to cut off the Zhou People¡¯s communication between Wushan and Jingmen, making it difficult for their front and rear to support each other. Then, north from Guining, attack Fangling Prefecture in Xiangyang Prefecture. Fangling is located upstream of the Han River. Once this place is broken, one can follow the Han River downstream, and in two days, one will be right at the city of Xiangyang. In this way, with our army threatening the city, the defenders in Jingmen Prefecture on the front line of the Zhou People will surely be terrified and unable to hold on for long. Under such circumstances, we will launch an attack which will certainly break this city. Then, leading the army to advance north, Xiangyang City might be captured in one fell swoop, capturing this key stronghold in the south of the Zhou People. If Xiangyang Prefecture falls, the Zhou People will be panicked, and it will naturally be difficult for Xichuan Prefecture to hold out. Perhaps we don¡¯t even need to send our troops to attack it; the Zhou People themselves might send envoys to seek peace and voluntarily cede the prefecture, recovering our lost territory for us.¡± Bai Mengyang elaborated on his strategies, then turned his gaze onto the crowd, finally resting on Lu Yuan. Everyone saw this and naturally turned their gazes onto Lu Yuan. Under the numerous gazes, Lu Yuan remained as calm as ever. In his heart, he figured out. This Wuan Marquis, was counting on him to lead this special army, to execute this special plan. It also made sense. Now, within this joint military camp at Dangyang battlefield, there seem to be three hundred and thirty thousand soldiers. Chapter 425 - Chapter 425: Chapter 221: The Plan of Surprise Attack – 2 Chapter 425: Chapter 221: The Plan of Surprise Attack ¨C 2 Translator: 549690339 However, among these 330,000-strong army, 200,000 are civilian workers from the Southsea and Ninghai countries, and their fighting power is weak. They could only serve as cannon fodders to consume the enemy¡¯s strength, and could not really play a major role. Of the remaining 130,000 troops, 80,000 are directly under Lu Yuan. Previously, when he was not around, Bai Mengyang, acting as the commander of the United Army, could command them. But now that Lu Yuan has arrived, the command authority of these 80,000 troops would naturally be returned to the hands of the King of Changsha himself. The same applies to the other countries, Southsea and Ninghai. That is to say, at this point, the only troops that Bai Mengyang could truly command are the 50,000 imperial soldiers. However, these 50,000 imperial soldiers, staying in the main camp and cooperating with the United Army to fight a war of attrition against the current Danyang enemy forces, might not be a big problem. But to rely on these 50,000 people to break through Guining Mansion and launch a surprise attack on Xiangyang City hundreds of miles away would be too difficult. Heading north from Guining Mansion and passing through Fangling Mansion, they would travel downstream along the water route. Along the way, there are many mountains and rivers, requiring them to cross mountains and ridges, and traverse rivers. The journey spans over 600 miles, all in enemy territory. Without enough strength, how could they accomplish such a feat? Moreover, going all the way, any accident could lead to the complete destruction of the entire army. To carry out this mission, they need an army that is good at crossing mountains and ridges, fighting in the mountains, enduring hardships, and having a certain level of water skills. Upon considering the united army, the only viable option would be the troops under Lu Yuan, many of whom hail from the Mountain People and have often traversed across mountains and waters. So to carry out this plan, no one else but Lu Yuan could do it. After looking at Lu Yuan for a while and seeing that the King of Changsha still did not express his stance, Bai Mengyang couldn¡¯t help but stand up, come to his side, and salute earnestly: ¡°This plan is very risky and requires a strong army. The soldiers under the King of Changsha have always been elite and are used to crossing mountain ridges, making them the best choice for carrying out this plan. I know that this might be a bit excessive. But for the sake of the united front and defeating the Zhou People, please, King of Changsha, take command and lead your troops to attack and break through Xiangyang.¡± At the end of Bai Mengyang¡¯s words, he bows down to Lu Yuan. Behind him, the other officers of the court look at each other and also stand up, bowing to Lu Yuan and saying, ¡°Please, Your Majesty, give priority to the overall situation and take command.¡± Upon witnessing this, Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange couldn¡¯t help but feel astonished, looking at the court camp and Lu Yuan not knowing what to say. Fortunately, at this moment, Lu Yuan, who was being pressured by Bai Mengyang with greater good, finally had a response. ¡°Ha!¡± With a light chuckle, he stood up, helped Bai Mengyang up, and then smiled, ¡°Why so serious, Wuan Marquis? Isn¡¯t it just commanding an expedition? I accept this task.¡± Overjoyed to hear this, Bai Mengyang quickly replied, ¡°Your Majesty¡¯s noble intentions are truly admirable. Please rest assured, I¡­¡± As Wuan Marquis was about to say something as a guarantee, Lu Yuan interrupted him, ¡°Don¡¯t talk about that yet. I can lead the troops on this expedition, but the Wuan Marquis must agree to a few conditions first.¡± Bai Mengyang hesitated, but since he had expected this, his reaction was quick, and he directly nodded: ¡°Your Majesty, please state your conditions. As long as they are achievable, I will not shirk.¡± Lu Yuan nodded and then said, ¡°First, relying only on the troops under my command, it would be too thin. Therefore, this expedition must have at least 100,000 elite troops. So the remaining 20,000 people must be provided by the court, and the Martial Proclamation Marquis must lead them to follow along.¡± He was actually asking Bai Mengyang for hostages. Although they are now allies with the court in name, Lu Yuan knows deep down that his previous collusion with Yan Wangqiu and others has been resented by the court. Now, with this expedition, he does have some concerns, fearing that Bai Mengyang might intentionally sabotage him and try to annihilate his 80,000 troops. Therefore, to be on the safe side, he needed to involve Yang Jing and the other side¡¯s 20,000 elite soldiers to use them as hostages. Having these hostages with him, he could go on the expedition with peace of mind. Bai Mengyang understood that trust was limited between their side and that of Lu Yuan, and so he thought about it for a while and nodded: ¡°This can be done.¡± Hearing the agreement to this condition, a smile appeared on Lu Yuan¡¯s face, and he continued with the next one: ¡°Secondly, I will personally take risks in this expedition, as will the soldiers under my command who will bear the danger of losing their lives. With such sacrifice, there must be a reward. So, in this expedition, the cities and towns that I conquer along the way should be owned by my Changsha country after the war. Is this possible?¡± Lu Yuan knew that if he could really carry out this surprise attack and arrive at Xiangyang City. Then it¡¯s highly likely that Zhou Country would lose Xiangyang Prefecture. Xiangyang is a major prefecture located in Jianghan, with fertile land, 600,000 households, and is a top-ranked wealthy land. If such a vast territory were to fall into the hands of the court, after a few years of rest, it could raise a 100,000-strong army based on this land. Moreover, with its geographical location, situated to the north of Dongting Prefecture, Thus, they could surround Lu Yuan from three directions: western Xichuan, northern Xiangyang, and eastern Yuzhang. He couldn¡¯t tolerate such a dire situation. Therefore, at this point, it¡¯s necessary to clarify the post-war distribution of Xiangyang Prefecture beforehand. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t ask for much, only wanting to take over a few poor mountain counties on the west side of Xiangyang Prefecture. By taking advantage of their geographical location, he would cut off the connection between the court and Xichuan Prefecture, preventing the two sides from cooperating with each other. Chapter 426 - Chapter 426: Chapter 221: The Plan of Surprise Attack – 3 Chapter 426: Chapter 221: The Plan of Surprise Attack ¨C 3 Translator: 549690339 The other wealthy lands to the east and south of Xiangyang Prefecture can be given to the imperial court. After all, although these territories are wealthy, they also directly face Nanyang Prefecture of the Zhou People and Jiangxia Prefecture of Liang Country, making the situation extremely complex. If Lu Yuan takes these territories, he would need at least a hundred thousand troops stationed there, otherwise it would be impossible to defend it. But where would he get so many soldiers and horses? Instead of that, it¡¯s better to defend the three prefectures to the west of Xiangyang Prefecture. Although the place might be poorer and the population smaller, the mountainous terrain is perfect for deploying their troops. Here, they would only need to stockpile thirty to fifty thousand troops, and with the defenders of Tianmen Prefecture, as well as an Inborn Grandmaster watching over them, it would be enough to hold onto this territory in the north of the river. Fortunately, Lu Yuan meets all of these conditions. Now, with the addition of the Miao Soldiers, he still has 140,000 troops. Even if he loses some in battle, having 110,000 to 120,000 left would not be a big problem. As for the Inborn Grandmaster, it¡¯s his own Queen. At that time, they could leave fifty to sixty thousand soldiers in the north of the river, led by himself or Lan Cai¡¯er, to guard the territory. The remaining people would guard Jiangnan. In this way, the distribution is just right to maximize the combat advantage stemming from having two Inborn Grandmasters on their side. The plan is indeed perfect. However, the only problem is whether Bai Mengyang, or the imperial court behind him, can agree to it. That¡¯s why after proposing these conditions, Lu Yuan looked at Wuan Marquis and waited quietly for his reply. If the other party doesn¡¯t agree with his self-preservation condition, then their intentions towards him and the imperial court would be quite obvious. It could be said that there was no sincerity for cooperation at all. In that case, what¡¯s the need for any further cooperation? Lu Yuan might as well lead his troops back to Tianmen Prefecture, defend the city, and fight a war of attrition against the Zhou People. As for the imperial court and the two state masters that came with it, what can they do? Let them be. Lu Yuan doesn¡¯t believe that these people would dare to go against him. If they really do dare, he will surrender directly to Zhou Country and invite the Zhou People to march southward. Won¡¯t they just be hurting each other then? Who¡¯s afraid of whom! Luckily, the worst-case scenario did not occur. After hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s request, Bai Mengyang¡¯s expression changed slightly, but after careful consideration, he finally nodded: ¡°This matter can be done, I can represent the imperial court and agree to Your Majesty¡¯s conditions.¡± As the Wuan Marquis, he is now the person with the highest position in the imperial court besides the Grand General Shen Qiu. Bai Mengyang¡¯s words still carry great weight. Therefore, when he speaks, Lu Yuan immediately feels relieved, knowing that the matter has been settled. Thinking of possibly expanding his territory by three prefectures after this war, he couldn¡¯t help but feel elated. As his cultivation of the Taiping Dao Book deepens, Lu Yuan becomes more and more aware that the more territory and people he rules, the greater the benefits it has for his cultivation of this Dao Law. That¡¯s why this time, he proposes these demands. The main reason is to occupy more territory so that his cultivation of the Taiping Dao Book can progress more rapidly. At this moment, this plan has been achieved. As a result, he cannot help but smile, ¡°In that case, I have no other conditions. Tomorrow, I will lead the army northward, attacking and breaking through Guining Prefecture and advancing towards Xiangyang City.¡± Lu Yuan said this and looked to Bai Mengyang: ¡°At that time, Wuan Marquis, please cooperate closely on this side.¡± He alone cannot launch a surprise attack. In order to keep the Zhou People from discovering this side¡¯s true intentions, the cooperation of Wuan Marquis in this matter is extremely important. Otherwise, the Zhou People would catch on to his intentions and send troops to rescue before he had even captured Guining Prefecture. At that time, let alone a surprise attack, whether they could capture Guining Prefecture at all would be a problem. Bai Mengyang also understands this principle, so he looked at Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange, saying: ¡°Isn¡¯t it? The two great kings have heard King Changsha¡¯s words.¡± When King Changsha leads the troops tomorrow, please send your troops and follow me in a fierce attack on Dangyang City. In this way, we will attract the attention of the Zhou People and create an opportunity for King Changsha.¡± When Lu Yuan leads his troops away, he¡¯ll even take twenty thousand of Bai Mengyang¡¯s elite soldiers. In that case, there will only be thirty thousand left under Wuan Marquis. With this number of soldiers and horses, it¡¯s impossible to attract the attention of the Zhou People. Accomplishing this naturally requires the cooperation of Nanhai and Ninghai Countries. Lu Yuan also understands this, so he looks at his two allies as well. Being watched by both the enemies they dread and the allies they rely on, Su Xuange and Yan Wangqiu naturally feel immense pressure. Fortunately, the two of them had come prepared to lose their hundred thousand troops in the north, fully aware of their cannon fodder status. Thus, when facing this request, the two hesitated very little. At that moment, Yan Wangqiu readily agreed: ¡°King Changsha and Wuan Marquis can rest assured that tomorrow I will have the soldiers ready and hand them over to Marquis Wuan¡¯s command.¡± ¡°I do not fully understand the ways of war, but whatever Wuan Marquis thinks is the best way to use them, please proceed and arrange it. My country¡¯s soldiers will have no complaints.¡± For Yan Wangqiu, he just wants the war to end quickly and return home to enjoy his leisure time. Now that there is a quick way to end the war, he naturally won¡¯t let it pass and supports the plan wholeheartedly. Although it may require him to pay a little more, he can bear it. The loss of a hundred thousand people is nothing to Nanhai Country. With 700,000 households and over 3.7 million people, losing a hundred thousand soldiers is not a big deal. After five to six years of recuperation, they can fully recover. His own safety, on the other hand, is more important to Yan Wangqiu. Seeing that Yan Wangqiu had expressed his stance, Su Xuange was also somewhat unwilling in his heart. But since Lu Yuan had made such a sacrifice, as an ally, he couldn¡¯t just sit back and do nothing. So Su Xuange had no choice but to say, ¡°I can also hand over my military power to Wuan Marquis¡¯s command.¡± ¡°Good!¡± Bai Mengyang, hearing these words, could not help but feel gratified. Clapping his hands, he laughed, ¡°With the help of the three great kings, the defeat of the Zhou People is not far off.¡± On hearing this, Lu Yuan and the other two revealed smiles. However, the meaning behind these smiles is known only to themselves, like drinking water and knowing its warmth or coldness. Regardless, the strategy to conquer the Zhou People has been settled this morning, and all that remains is to carry it out. May Heaven bless them, and victory will be theirs in this battle! Chapter 427 - Chapter 427: Chapter 222: Desperate Battle Chapter 427: Chapter 222: Desperate Battle Translator: 549690339 The next day, Lu Yuan led his army and left Dangyang¡¯s main camp. At the moment he left with his troops, tens of thousands of soldiers in the main camp were also mobilized. Civilian workers from Southsea and Ninghai countries were driven out and headed towards Danyang City for the attack. According to the agreement made previously, before Lu Yuan launched a surprise attack, the main camp here would create enough movement to attract the attention of the Zhou people, creating an opportunity for him. Now, it was happening. When Yan Wangqiu first asked Lu Yuan whether this battle would be easy, Lu Yuan¡¯s answer was that to win this crucial battle in Jiangbei, at least over a hundred thousand lives would have to be lost. Today this answer has been proven true. In order to attract the attention of the Zhou people and create the illusion that the main force was here, it is impossible to create such an atmosphere without launching round after round of strong and fierce attacks. And on the battlefield, it was a siege warfare. Each round of fierce attack was basically equal to countless corpses. Perhaps this time, the two countries of Ninghai and Southsea were truly going to lose more than a hundred thousand corpses under Dangyang City. However, no one cared about this. The court didn¡¯t care, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t care, and even the rulers of the two countries didn¡¯t care at all. The only ones who might care were probably the lowest-level civilian workers who were still carrying weapons and braving arrows and rolling stones in the cold winter as they screamed and rushed towards the city walls. But these people¡¯s voices were destined to be ignored by people. So everything was cyclic. But one thing was clear that the sacrifices of these people did indeed attract the attention of the Zhou people, making them focus on the Danyang battlefield here. As a result, the other side was more or less overlooked. On the way to Guining Province. All the way there was smoke and dust, banners covered the sky, and the movement was huge. It was impossible to cover up the whereabouts of an army of one hundred thousand soldiers. And Lu Yuan had never thought about covering it up. Because he knew that it was impossible to hide, but he couldn¡¯t let the Zhou people focus on himself. So what should he do? The answer was to make the other side make more noise, attracting the attention of Zhou people. This was also the purpose of the Dangyang battle. It seemed that the strategy had been successful so far. Lu Yuan led the troops from Dangyang¡¯s main camp towards Guining Province and passed through Anyuan and Xingshan counties without encountering any Zhou troops sent to stop him. So after capturing these two counties under Guining Province, he successfully arrived under Ningfu City. When they arrived, it was obvious that Ningfu City had been prepared for the onslaught of the army. Not only the Grand General of the Right Pillar State of the Zhou Country, Gui Lianyun¡¯s fifty thousand troops were present, but also twenty thousand local conscripts were gathered in the city to help with the defense. A total of seventy thousand Zhou troops, including Gui Lianyun himself, constituted the entire defense force of Guining Province. Under the city. While arranging his men to set up camp, Lu Yuan led Lan Cai¡¯er and Yang Jing on the newly built high platform to observe the arrangement of soldiers and horses in Guining City. Seventy thousand Zhou troops obviously could not be stationed in the city, and the city could not accommodate so many people. Moreover, a single city is impossible to defend. The best strategy for defending a city is often to intertwine and interlock, with external reinforcements. Therefore, in addition to leaving troops to guard the city, the Zhou people also built four large camps outside the city, placed respectively on the east, south, west, and north sides of the city as a peripheral barrier. And the city served as the central hub, supporting everywhere at all times. It must be said that such an arrangement was indeed very clever, maximizing the strength of the Zhou people. After all, there was only one Inborn Grandmaster in the city, and it was impossible to cover all places at once. By setting up four camps outside the city and taking the city as the core, the Right Pillar State Grand General of the Zhou people, Gui Lianyun, could sit in the city. Then, wherever there was a problem in the four large camps, wherever there was an attack by an Inborn Grandmaster, he could rush to help and resist. Such a defense strategy was naturally wonderful. When facing an enemy with only one Inborn Grandmaster, it can perfectly block the opponent. Even if the enemy has two Inborn Grandmasters, and fights for their lives, it is not impossible to block one. But if there are three Inborn Grandmasters in the enemy, then this arrangement would be a bit strained. Not everyone is like Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang, who can wield the power of the Second Stage of Inborn Realm with the help of the force of the evil soldiers, and can withstand three or four Inborn Grandmasters of the same level. As far as Lu Yuan knew, Gui Lianyun in the Zhou city was just an ordinary Inborn Grandmaster who had achieved Inborn Realm for just over a decade. In terms of combat power, it might not be much stronger than Lan Cai¡¯er and Yang Jing. Compared to himself, who cultivated both immortal and martial arts, it was even farther behind. So after seeing Gui Lianyun¡¯s defensive arrangement, Lu Yuan looked back at the two people next to him and laughed, ¡°Gui Lianyun wants to imitate Marquis Wuan and defend the city alone.¡± ¡°But he forgot that he is an ordinary man, far from worthy to be compared with Marquis Wuan.¡± ¡°He has set up four camps outside the city this time, trying to block my army.¡± ¡°I will teach him what it means to be a mantis blocking a car and overestimating his own abilities.¡± As he said this, Lu Yuan¡¯s expression became serious, and he turned to Yang Jing and said, ¡°Martial Proclamation Marquis, you will lead your troops later and attack the bandits¡¯ western camp.¡± Hearing that he was assigned to lead the charge, Yang Jing did not say much, but just nodded solemnly: ¡°I obey.¡± Lu Yuan nodded, then turned to look at Lan Cai¡¯er and said, ¡°Your Majesty, later you will lead twenty thousand soldiers to attack the bandits¡¯ southern camp.¡± Chapter 428 - Chapter 428: Chapter 222: Desperate Battle_2 Chapter 428: Chapter 222: Desperate Battle_2 Translator: 549690339 Lan Cai¡¯er nodded slightly, ¡°I shall obey.¡± Lu Yuan continued to address his disciple Zhou Qing at his side, saying, ¡°Qing¡¯er, you will also command twenty thousand soldiers to attack the bandit¡¯s eastern camp.¡± Zhou Qing stepped forward, saying, ¡°I accept the order.¡± Once these instructions were over, Lu Yuan looked at his few right-hand men he laughed, ¡°Later, I will personally lead the army, attacking the the bandit¡¯s northern camp. I want to see, Gui Lianyun has set up four camps to block me, and I will attack from all sides, fiercely charging, if he could possibly resist?¡± Upon hearing this, the three people at his side all let out a hearty laugh. Furthermore, Yang Jing said, ¡°This time, the three of us who are Inborn Grandmasters will act together, and even if Gui Lianyun has great abilities, he would be overwhelmed and unable to help everywhere. The rest of the Zhou people, without his help, facing us who are Inborn Grandmasters, would all be easy prey. Maybe tonight, we can sleep in the city.¡± The Martial Proclamation Marquis, was very optimistic about the ability to take down Ningfu City. In actuality, he should indeed be optimistic. Why did Bai Mengyang believe that only Lu Yuan could complete his miracle plan, ambushing hundreds of miles behind the Zhou people, and finally approaching under the walls of Xiangyang City? This was not only because the soldiers under Lu Yuan¡¯s command, met the requirements to execute this miraculous plan, but also because the in Lu Yuan¡¯s army, there were two Inborn Grandmasters, himself and Lan Cai¡¯er. If you also include Yang Jing, who came to support, it was a total of three people. There were three Inborn Grandmasters in the whole army, and the enemy they faced, had only one Inborn Grandmaster, Gui Lianyun of Ningfu City. With an advantage of three times in top military strength, and twice the number of soldiers, if they couldn¡¯t complete the miracle plan under such almost crushing advantage. Then Lu Yuan and the others, might as well wash up early and go back to the countryside to farm, and stop messing around in this world. This game of dominating the world, is not so easy to play, and does not tolerate incompetence. Hearing Yang Jing¡¯s words, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help laughing: ¡°If one wishes to sleep in the city tonight, then everyone later, must really do their best. Kill a few more Zhou bandits, kill your way into the city, only then can you do so.¡± When Zhou Qing heard this, he immediately said, ¡°I will surely exert all my efforts.¡± Lan Cai¡¯er also chimed in, ¡°I shall do the same.¡± Looking at their expressions, they were all like Yang Jing. They had no doubts about breaking into Ningfu City. Everyone was very relaxed. Seeing that the morale was high, Lu Yuan seized the opportunity to issue the order for the army to attack the city. Then, out of the hundred thousand soldiers, except for leaving twenty thousand to build up the camp and guard the supplies, the remaining 80,000 was divided into four parts. Each was led by Lu Yuan and his men, attacking the four camps outside the Zhou people¡¯s city. On the wide plain, the drums of war roared, the Xuanlong Banner of Da Yue was waving, and a large number of soldiers surged toward the camp like a tide. Yang Jing, sitting in his war chariot, led his own twenty thousand soldiers, obeying Lu Yuan¡¯s order, and was the first to move, preparing to launch the first wave of attack on the Zhou people. The Zhou people inside the western camp quickly noticed this, and then a shout of warning quickly woke up the soldiers inside the camp. ¡°We are under attack!¡± ¡°The Yue people are coming.¡± ¡°Prepare rolling stones and wooden blocks, archers prepare, when the bandits get close, throw and shoot them.¡± ¡°Get everyone in the camp up and ready to defend the camp, sharp.¡± ¡°The cavalry get ready, once the enemy is repelled, attack and kill the enemy.¡± The Zhou general defending the western camp, after receiving the notification, immediately got to the gate of the camp, and then a series of orders were issued from his mouth. Without fault, the Zhou people were elite, and not long after receiving the order, groups of warriors arrived at the side of the camp wall. And below the camp wall, formations quickly gathered one after another, ready to rush up to replace their comrades at any time. In less than half an a hour, the tens of thousands of defenders in the camp had fully mobilized. In fact, not only here, but also in the city, Gui Lianyun, the main general of this place, was notified in the first place and learned that there were Yue troops attacking the city from the west. ¡°The Yue troops have appeared in the west of the city, and the symbol on the commander¡¯s flag is a ¡®Yang¡¯?¡± Upon hearing the situation described by the messenger, Gui Lianyun¡¯s brows furrowed, ¡°The main direction of the Yue people¡¯s attack is the west of the city? And that ¡®Yang¡¯ flag, could it be that the commander is the Martial Proclamation Marquis Yang Jing of the Yue people?¡± This was because when Lu Yuan was leading his army to march west, for the sake of concealment, he didn¡¯t fly his flag openly, allowing only Yang Jing to display his commander¡¯s flag. So in the eyes of outsiders, the head of the westward marching army of a hundred thousand men, was indisputably Yang Jing. At this moment, hearing that Yang Jing¡¯s commander¡¯s flag had appeared in the west of the city, Gui Lianyun¡¯s heart rose suddenly. If he were to ignore an Inborn Grandmaster, the mere ten thousand soldiers at the western camp could not stop him. Thinking of this, Gui Lianyun immediately said to the messenger, ¡°You go back and tell Wei Yan to keep an eye and check whether it is Yang Jing himself taking action. If it¡¯s him, don¡¯t try to resist strongly, let people into the camp first, and surround them with the main forces. I will come to aid promptly.¡± To be on the safe side, Gui Lianyun did not immediately rush to the Western Camp, but planned to observe more. For soldiers are deceptive, who knows if this is a distraction strategy by the Yue people. If he was fooled and rushed to the west of the city, but neglected other directions. Allowing the Yue people to find an opportunity, and to break into the city, then it would be too late for regrets. ¡°Yes.¡± After receiving the order, the messenger saluted and then hurried away to deliver the message. After sending the messenger, Gui Lianyun also quickly mobilized, calling up five thousand soldiers in the city. All were armored and ready to fight, ready to strike at a moment¡¯s notice. Chapter 429 - Chapter 429: Chapter 222: Desperate Battle_3 Chapter 429: Chapter 222: Desperate Battle_3 Translator: 549690339 Just as the city began to stir, a bloody massacre was quietly unfolding in the Western Camp. ¡­ The wilderness outside the Western Camp was not very vast. Leading his army, Yang Jing approached the camp in a short time, quickly reaching the area a hundred steps away from it. Then, he spent a little more time organizing the troops, so that what was originally a somewhat chaotic formation was once again in order. ¡°Attack!¡± Seeing that his army was ready, Yang Jing didn¡¯t hesitate and ordered the war chariot to charge towards the enemy¡¯s camp. Behind him, thousands of armored sharp knights also moved instantly, not carrying any siege equipment but at most a ladder, following the charge. Seeing this domineering posture, the Zhou defenders on the walls were taken aback, and some veteran soldiers, staring at the war chariot at the front, began to show fear. As elite soldiers of the Zhou, many veterans had seen and heard of Inborn Grandmasters slaughtering in all directions, like mowing down soldiers¡¯ lives like grass. Now the Zhou people were attacking the camp without bringing any siege weapons. Even the one leading the charge was a war chariot, more symbolic than practical, and it seemed that it was carrying a Yue commander. A commander charging at the front meant something, and the more experienced veteran soldiers understood it in their hearts. And so. As the war chariot approached the gate closer and closer, some clever veteran soldiers were already beating the retreat drum and trying to escape. But before they could take action under the watch of the military officer, Yang Jing had already reached the camp gate. ¡°Shoot! Shoot him!¡± ¡°Throw stones at him! Crush him!¡± The Zhou military officer guarding the gate, seeing the war chariot getting closer and closer, roared. The surrounding soldiers immediately responded. The sound of bows trembling filled the air, and then hundreds of arrows flew towards the oncoming war chariot. However, just as the arrows reached the war chariot, a white lotus, tens of meters wide, bloomed inside it with layers of petals wrapping around it, blocking the incoming arrows in an instant. Despite the rain of arrows outside, the war chariot remained unscathed under the protection of the white lotus. In a blink of an eye, the war chariot had reached the entrance of the camp. Seeing this, the Zhou soldiers on the wall wanted to pour molten gold and unleash rolling logs downwards. But before they could throw their hands, the white lotus, which had originally wrapped the war chariot, suddenly bloomed. The white lotus shimmered as countless droplets sprayed out in all directions. The droplets seemed to weigh a thousand pounds each, as any soldiers and walls they touched turned into dust. With a rumbling sound and amid the smoke, the gate of the Zhou¡¯s western camp disappeared, leaving a gap more than ten meters wide in its place. As for the hundred or so defenders at the gate, they were all buried under the dust, their corpses strewn about in a mess. ¡°Kill!¡± With a single blow, Yang Jing broke through the gate and laughed loudly as he looked at the terrified Zhou soldiers. He then drove the war chariot towards a place where there were more Zhou people. As they saw this killing machine coming, the Zhou¡¯s formation in that position began to waver. But with military discipline pressing down, even if they knew they were facing death, these soldiers did not collapse immediately. Instead, they continued to put up a desperate fight, with faces resigned to death. Yang Jing, however, did not care about this. It was even better for him that these Zhou people did not retreat. When he rushed closer, he could kill more of them, and it wouldn¡¯t take much effort anyway. The war chariot charged, as Yang Jing plunged headfirst into the formation, followed by the blooming white lotus, which carried a mist of blood with it. Amid countless screams, the formation of Zhou people finally collapsed. At the same time, the thousands of armored soldiers who had followed Yang Jing¡¯s charge actually entered the camp through the gap he had created. They exchanged blows with the shaken Zhou soldiers. By now, if no reinforcements arrived, the fall of the camp was only a matter of time. ¡°The Yue commander attacking the city is an Inborn Grandmaster, quickly ask the Grand General for help!¡± Wei Yan, hiding in the army, saw Yang Jing wreaking havoc everywhere and his eyes filled with anger, shouted at the guard beside him. At that moment, the guard looked panicked and hurriedly left. In a short while, the news reached the city. Gui Lianyun, who had been waiting for a long time, stood up upon hearing the news: ¡°As expected, it¡¯s Yang Jing. All soldiers, follow me to the west and rescue General Wei!¡± In an instant, the already prepared five thousand elites followed Gui Lianyun towards the western city. Military matters were urgent, and in a short while, they reached the entrance of the western city. However, at this moment, another cavalryman came running in panic from the south of the city. ¡°Reporting to the general, a large Yue army has appeared in the south, led by a woman who is skilled in using poisonous gas. With a wave of her hand, she took the lives of hundreds of people. General Zheng guessed that this should be the Poison Sect¡¯s monster, Lan Cai¡¯er. This is an Inborn Grandmaster. The southern camp cannot hold. Please, General, hurry to help.¡± The rider was lying on the ground, his voice trembling, and his panicked expression clearly showed that he was terrified by the Inborn monster in his mouth. ¡°Lan Cai¡¯er?¡± Upon hearing this news, Gui Lianyun felt his vision go black, knowing that he had encountered the worst situation. There was not just one Inborn Grandmaster among the Yue people, but two. ¡®I have to fight for my life.¡¯ Realizing this, Gui Lianyun turned his head and glared at the rider, viciously saying, ¡°You tell Zheng Chuan, even if it means fighting for his life, he has to hold off Lan Cai¡¯er for half a day. Within half a day, I will eliminate the enemy in the west and go to the south to deal with Lan Cai¡¯er. No matter what, he has to hold on until then.¡± Both Yang Jing and Lan Cai¡¯er were newly promoted grandmasters who had only broken through in the past few years Although Gui Lianyun had not been an Inborn for long, he had been one for more than a decade longer than the two of them, and his skills were deeper. If he went all out, it was not impossible to defeat Yang Jing in half a day. However, doing so would mean fighting for his life. Gui Lianyun¡¯s heart was filled with a bitter sense of helplessness and resignation. Chapter 430 - Chapter 430: Chapter 223: Slaying the Inborn Formation Chapter 430: Chapter 223: Slaying the Inborn Formation Translator: 549690339 If given the choice, no one would wish to fight to the death with others. Especially for someone like Gui Lianyun, an Inborn Grandmaster, with a high status and plenty of years left to live, who hasn¡¯t enjoyed enough wealth and honor. Who would willingly engage in a life-or-death battle with others? But there is no choice. At this moment, the Yue people have attacked their doorstep. As the defending general of Guining, if he were to lose this position, his army would be humiliated, and even his Inborn Grandmaster status would not be enough to explain himself to the court. Therefore, at this time, even if unwilling, he could only clench his teeth and face the situation head-on. Fortunately, with his strength, even if fighting desperately, he could still hold on. ¡°However, this time my vitality will be severely damaged, shortening my lifespan by several years.¡± Gui Lianyun sighed in his heart, then clenched his teeth and angrily rushed out of the city gate. As he opened his eyes and scanned the area, he quickly spotted the extremely eye-catching war chariot that was rampaging everywhere. There¡¯s no need to say more. Seeing a formidable foe face to face only heightens one¡¯s animosity. Gui Lianyun immediately employed a secret technique. Instantly, a long sword appeared in the air, shining with a dazzling white light and carrying a sharp sword aura, as it rushed towards the lotus flower. This time, as revenge for his previous defeat, Gui Lianyun showed no restraint and used a deadly killing move when making his first attack. Now that he was forced to fight desperately and had to shorten his lifespan¡­ Having paid such a heavy price, Gui Lianyun had grievances in his heart. If he was going to suffer, then this bandit, who had forced him to fight desperately, also shouldn¡¯t expect to escape unscathed. This time, he not only intended to repel the opponent but also to inflict severe damage on them. He wanted to ensure that this Yue Martial Proclamation Marquis would be unable to take action for several months. Only in this way could he repay the heavy price he had paid. Therefore, this sword¡¯s momentum was unstoppable, displaying the blade¡¯s sharpness to the fullest. There was a strong feeling that it would determine life and death in a single strike. At the moment when Gui Lianyun¡¯s sword aura flew out, Yang Jing sensed the danger. Looking back, he saw that a white sword aura was coming towards him. Even though he had the protection of the White Lotus Guard, he still felt a faint stabbing pain. There was no need for more words. In just an instant, Yang Jing realized that it was the great Zhou Pillar State¡¯s Grand General in the city who had come to fight him. Upon understanding this, he felt both joy and shock. The joy was that his goal had been achieved, and he had successfully lured Gui Lianyun over. The shock was that the other party¡¯s attack was so fierce that it seemed intent on fighting him to the death. Gui Lianyun was older than Yang Jing and was more unwilling to lose his life in a fight to the death than Yang Jing. Yang Jing, who was only in his forties, had a hundred years left to live, and thus was even more unwilling to fight others to the death. Therefore, upon noticing Gui Lianyun¡¯s intention, the Martial Proclamation Marquis¡¯s heart was greatly alarmed, and his sweeping momentum instantly dissipated as he drove the war chariot violently. In an instant, the initially scattered lotus petals surrounding him gathered together, forming a thick flower bud that enveloped his entire body. When the last petal closed, Yang Jing¡¯s heart instantly settled. The Yang Family¡¯s Inheritance of the Clear Water Lotus Secret was the world¡¯s strongest defensive technique. With layers of lotus petals guarding him, even when facing Gui Lianyun¡¯s sharpest sword aura, Yang Jing didn¡¯t have too much fear in his heart. He had confidence that, if he faced Gui Lianyun head-on, he might not be able to defeat him. However, for Gui Lianyun to break through his defense was also not so simple. At worst, they would just have to continue this stalemate. After all, there were attacks on the other three city gates. As long as he held back Gui Lianyun here, the North and South cities would face the attacks of Inborn Grandmasters, and without equivalent experts to block them, the cities would eventually fall. Time was on his side, so Yang Jing could slowly wear down Gui Lianyun. However, while he could afford to stall, Gui Lianyun did not have the luxury of time. As mentioned earlier, facing this crisis, the Zhou¡¯s Pillar State¡¯s Grand General had to end the battle within half an hour and then rush to the South City. Thus, facing Yang Jing¡¯s deliberate delay, Gui Lianyun single-mindedly urged his sword aura to slash the turtle shell, splashing up countless lotus petals and desperately trying to pierce the lotus¡¯s interior. Meanwhile, Yang Jing was doing his utmost to drive his true pneuma, quickly repairing any damaged petals outside the lotus. So two Inborn Grandmasters, one desperately attacking and one desperately defending, were locked in a stalemate. However, if one looked closely, it could still be seen that the damage caused by the sword aura to the lotus flower was greater than the repair of the petals. At this point, neither side could overwhelm the other. However, it was inevitable that Gui Lianyun would ultimately overpower Yang Jing after a long period of time. But it was impossible to see who would win or lose within a short period of time. While the two of them were at a complete stalemate, the Zhou soldiers in the West City camp, who had originally been scattered and fleeing due to Yang Jing¡¯s attack, now saw the arrival of their commander and the fact that he had managed to hold back the ferocious enemy and even appeared to have the upper hand. Their morale couldn¡¯t help but surge. Soon after, under the leadership of the elite soldiers brought by Gui Lianyun, they counterattacked the Yue soldiers who were gradually pouring into the camp and tried to take back the lost camp zone. Instantly, not only Yang Jing and Gui Lianyun, but the fierce battle between the lower-level soldiers also unfolded. It wasn¡¯t just here. Just as the West City was in the midst of fierce fighting, colorful poisonous smoke accompanied the fluttering figure of a beautiful woman at the South City camp, continuously weaving through the Zhou soldiers. Wherever the beautiful figure passed, colorful smokes swirled in the air, then large groups of Zhou soldiers fell with green and black faces. Just like cutting rice. As the colorful smoke passed by, people fell down. In just a short period of time, more than a thousand soldiers in the South City camp fell under the poisonous smoke. Such a horrifying death toll immediately caused panic among the Zhou soldiers and a wave of collapses ensued. Chapter 431 - Chapter 431: Chapter 223: Slaying the Inborn Formation_2 Chapter 431: Chapter 223: Slaying the Inborn Formation_2 Translator: 549690339 However, those who fled hadn¡¯t escaped far before they were quickly stopped by military officers behind them, and then driven back, rushing again towards the colorful smoke. This was entirely using people¡¯s lives to delay the enemy¡¯s advance. Even when all the soldiers were dead, the military officers had to grit their teeth, lower their heads, and charge forward. Though they were able to hold on longer than the soldiers, they also often couldn¡¯t endure for more than a few breaths before collapsing within the colorful smoke. It has to be said that Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s Ten Thousand Poison True Qi might not perform outstandingly when facing opponents of the same level. But when used to harvest the low-level soldiers, it¡¯s an unparalleled sharp tool. At this time, with just a slight display of her prowess, she took away thousands of lives. If she continued killing for a while longer, more than half of the ten thousand Zhou soldiers in the camp would surely die. The reason only half would die was because Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s true pneuma was insufficient. If she had enough true pneuma, even if there were tens of thousands of people, she would kill them all. Against an Inborn Grandmaster, low-level soldiers were simply powerless. Fortunately, although there was no ability to fight back, the South City managed to pin down Lan Cai¡¯er using the method of completely using up people¡¯s lives, preventing the battle situation from collapsing all at once. At the same time, a similar scene was also taking place in North City. Lu Yuan transformed into a Red Sun, with raging flames following his every moment, burning everything in the vicinity to ashes. Zhou soldiers who were approached by him were burned to ashes before they could even let out a scream. Behind him, a large number of soldiers followed closely, ruthlessly slaughtering into the scattered formation of the Zhou people. The entire North City camp had already approached the brink of collapse. ¡°Hahaha, thrilling! Thrilling!¡± Lu Yuan quickly moved, burning Zhou soldiers who were fleeing in panic around him to ashes, and then looked around at the scorched earth, unable to help but burst into laughter. After killing for a moment, more than a thousand Zhou people had already died at his hands. If one were to count those who were killed by his own soldiers due to the breach in the formation, the casualties of the Zhou people would be even greater. At this time, looking around, in just a short while, almost half of the Zhou camp in North City had been broken through by him. Furthermore, the Zhou people¡¯s casualties amounted to three or four thousand. The remaining defeated soldiers were hiding in the remaining camps, trembling and looking around in a panic. It seemed that after experiencing this ruthless killing, the Zhou people had already lost their courage. However, after dispersing this wave of Zhou warriors, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t continue searching for the next target. Instead, he stopped to recuperate, and at the same time started to calculate the time in his heart. ¡°Calculating the time, there should be results over there at the western city by now.¡± According to the arrangements made before the battle, Yang Jing led twenty thousand troops to launch the first attack to attract Gui Lianyun¡¯s attention. After a while, Lan Cai¡¯er launched the second round of attacks at the southern city. Then it was Lu Yuan here, after a while, launching an attack at the North City. As for Zhou Qing, he was waiting for the result of Lu Yuan¡¯s side before launching an attack at the eastern city to finish the job. Now that Lu Yuan¡¯s side had launched an attack and even fought for a while, according to the time calculation, it had been almost half an hour since the Southern City launched the attack, and there should be news coming by now. As he was thinking this, Lu Yuan recuperated for a while, slightly recovering some true pneuma, and finally news came from the rear. ¡°Reporting to Great King. News comes from Martial Proclamation Marquis that the Marquis attacked Western City and fought the Zhou Pillar State Grand General.¡± However, after hundreds of fights, the Marquis was injured and had to retreat. Gui Lianyun has already led his troops south, and the Marquis said that Gui Lianyun¡¯s strength had suddenly increased, so he must have used a life-threatening secret technique which couldn¡¯t last long. After the secret technique, his vitality would be greatly damaged and it would be the weakest time. The Marquis hopes that Great King can seize the opportunity, strike the enemy when he is weak, and severely wound this thief.¡± The personal guard who came from Western City passed on Yang Jing¡¯s information. After hearing this, Lu Yuan nodded and said, ¡°I understand. You go back and tell Martial Proclamation Marquis that with me here, Gui Lianyun, this thief, won¡¯t get away with it.¡± ¡°Yes!¡± The personal guard replied and hurried away. Watching his departing figure, Lu Yuan stared at him for a while before retracting his gaze and continuing to recuperate. He had just fought for a while, and although he had wiped out thousands of Zhou people, his own true pneuma consumption was also extremely great. In just a short period of time, more than thirty percent of his true pneuma was consumed. Using martial arts external body to kill enemies is thrilling, but sustaining it is still a problem. ¡°With my current true pneuma, I can only maintain the martial arts external body for half an hour at most, and then I won¡¯t be able to hold on any longer.¡± Lu Yuan thought of his own or most Inborn Grandmasters¡¯ shortcomings and couldn¡¯t help shaking his head and sighing, ¡°Maybe it¡¯s only at the second state of Inborn that one can sustain the consumption of martial arts external body for more than an hour.¡± He had previously chatted with Lan Cai¡¯er and Yan Wangqiu about how long they could maintain their martial arts external body at full strength. However, whether it was Lan Cai¡¯er, who had just advanced to Inborn, or Yan Wangqiu, who had been in Inborn for a hundred years, neither of them could answer that they could last more than an hour. As an old lord, Yan Wangqiu had a deep true pneuma and could hold on for a longer time than Lu Yuan and the others. But even he could only last for an additional quarter or two quarters of an hour, far from reaching a transformative level. They had discussed this issue with each other and, with reference to the records of the Nanhai Sect, Nine River Sword Sect, and Five Poisons Sect, had finally come to a conclusion. Chapter 432 - Chapter 432: Chapter 223: Slaying the Inborn Formation_3 Chapter 432: Chapter 223: Slaying the Inborn Formation_3 Translator: 549690339 Only a Grandmaster from the second realm of Inborn could maintain the Five External Bodies for more than an hour¡ª it¡¯s impossible for those from the first realm. Only then could it make sense for Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang to be able to defend the solitary city against four Inborn Grandmasters, making the city¡¯s defense impeccable and unbreakable. Not to mention the difference in combat power between the second realm and first realm Grandmasters, the ability to maintain the Martial Arts External Body alone has more than doubled in duration. With such an advantage, it¡¯s enough to wear down many first-realm Grandmasters. If the difference in combat power is also taken into account, it is understandable that a second-realm Grandmaster can face four first-realm Grandmasters in battle with the help of a large army. ¡°However, although I don¡¯t have the strength of an Inborn second-realm, I do have the aid of Immortal Techniques. Over the past month, I have been cultivating the Taiping Daoist Method and have gradually solidified my magical power so that I can now use three to five powerful spells. Plus, with the accumulated power of the Five Thunder Scrolls, I can launch two thunder spells as well.¡± Armed with these, if I suddenly use them, my enemies won¡¯t have time to react, and one misstep will lead to their deaths.¡± Gui Lianyun, who used his secret technique and fought two powerful enemies on a par level, will be extremely fatigued and weak when facing me. In this state, he would have to face both my Martial Arts External Body and my Immortal Techniques. Hehe, with this double-edged attack, I don¡¯t believe this fierce person will not fall.¡± When Lu Yuan thought of this, he couldn¡¯t help but give a cold smile. That¡¯s right. His action this time was not only to repel Gui Lianyun and seize Guining City. Zhou People are located to the north of Changsha, and this time if the surprise attack on Xiangyang is successful, they would even have to swallow up three more cities in western Zhou Country, directly becoming enemies. Under these circumstances, with such a powerful enemy lurking in the north, how could Lu Yuan sleep peacefully? So, to have a sound sleep, he naturally wanted to take this opportunity of the Northern Expedition to defeat more Zhou Country forces, leaving them weakened like Yue Country, unable to look south. The best opportunity to weaken Zhou Country was naturally during the battle for Guining City.On one side, there are three Inborn Grandmasters, and on the other side, just one bandit. Such a golden opportunity, if not seized to slay Gui Lianyun beneath this city, would make it much more difficult in the future to face other partnered Zhou People Grandmasters. It can even be said that it would become impossible. Thus, right now was the only chance to take down Zhou¡¯s Grandmaster and probably the last. To seize this opportunity, Lu Yuan is even willing to take a small risk by using his hidden Immortal Techniques. Fortunately, at this time, there are no other Inborn Grandmasters around him, so even if he uses Immortal Techniques, they would appear as ordinary martial artist soldiers and nobody would notice. After all, in the eyes of these people, the Martial Arts External Body of an Inborn Grandmaster is no different from the legendary divine powers. Unless there is another Inborn Grandmaster present, ordinary martial artists and even top martial artists would hardly recognize that Lu Yuan is using Immortal Techniques rather than Martial Arts. In this way, as long as Gui Lianyun is killed and prevented from escaping, the risk of exposure would not be too great. ¡°So, there¡¯s only one chance.¡± Lu Yuan thought of this and muttered to himself before continuing to recuperate and restore his True pneuma. He wanted to recover his strength and adjust to his peak state before Gui Lianyun arrived. Only then would it show the basic respect required to slay a Grandmaster. Time passed slowly. Soon after a brief moment, a messenger from the South City hurriedly arrived. ¡°Your Majesty, the Queen sends me to deliver a message. She fought with the Zhou People commander, but after hundreds of exchanges, she retreated. Now Gui Lianyun is heading north¡­¡± Halfway through his speech, Lu Yuan interrupted him with a wave of his hand: ¡°It¡¯s fine, I know, no need to say more.¡± After saying that, he turned his head and looked in the direction of the city gate in the distance. He saw a dazzling Sword Qi, rapidly approaching from the city gate. It seemed that the Grand General of the Pillar State on the right was in a hurry. Having just taken a short break from the battle at the South City, he rushed to the North City without a moment¡¯s rest; his tireless effort deserved to be praised. ¡°However, after winning two consecutive battles against grandmasters at the same level, he doesn¡¯t take a break and comes after me. Does he think we are all worthless now?¡± Lu Yuan stared at the rapidly approaching white sword aura, and the figure beneath it. His gaze became sharper. ¡°Since you are so bold, don¡¯t leave this time. Leave your life behind.¡± As soon as the words fell, a burst of flame suddenly rose around him, so intense that it twisted the air. With one move, a fireball formed and then roared towards the sword Qi that was rushing towards him. There were several loud explosions, the air torn apart, and the flames danced with the sword light. The white sword light broke through several layers of smoke, crossed tens of feet, and attacked Lu Yuan. However, it was evident that after being hindered earlier, the sharpness of the sword Qi had been greatly reduced, losing its original power. It was reduced to this with just one contact. It looked like Gui Lianyun¡¯s strength had been depleted after the previous encounters with Yang Jing and Lan Cai¡¯er. It seemed that he was at his limit, almost unable to hold on. Lu Yuan probed and quickly perceived this. In his eyes flashed a cold light, and the flames around him burned hotter, without holding back his true pneuma, using it with all his strength. In an instant, the surroundings, within a radius of more than twenty zhang, had turned into a sea of intense flames. Even Lu Yuan¡¯s true pneuma couldn¡¯t sustain this for long; he¡¯d run out of strength in a short while. At that point, without pneuma, facing a same-level expert, he would have no choice but to surrender. Gui Lianyun had never seen such tactics and was momentarily flustered. His sword Qi was instantly engulfed by the flames. Although he panicked, Gui Lianyun¡¯s heart was filled with joy. Just as Lu Yuan had guessed, he had reached his limit and couldn¡¯t last much longer. He initially worried that his opponent would desperately cling to him like the previous two, trying to exhaust his pneuma. But now it seemed that this concern was unnecessary. Not only that, but with the opponent¡¯s current strategy, even if he exhausted himself in three consecutive battles, the enemy would collapse first. And when that time came¡­ ¡®Perhaps there would be an opportunity to kill this monster!¡¯ With this thought, Gui Lianyun¡¯s heart burned. The sword Qi around him unknowingly weakened. No longer maintaining an aggressive approach, he tried to minimize consumption and protect himself, hoping to drag on until the enemy ran out of strength. Lu Yuan, being extremely sharp, had instantly noticed the change in his opponent. He couldn¡¯t help but sneer when he thought about the other party¡¯s intentions. Then he saw Gui Lianyun, who was actively reducing his defenses and cautiously maintaining his consumption. Lu Yuan clasped his hands together, performed a technique, and shouted, ¡°Suppress!¡± There was a sudden boom, and a thunderous sound rang in the air. Then, a tremendous thunderclap appeared in Gui Lianyun¡¯s mind, instantly stunning the unprepared Inborn Grandmaster. Gui Lianyun¡¯s original sword Qi was instantly scattered, leaving openings. Lu Yuan then performed another technique, and in the midst of the surrounding flames, a prepared yellow light flashed. It instantly shattered Gui Lianyun¡¯s protective sword Qi, breaking his last line of defense. The surrounding flames surged in immediately. It exploded, turning the Grand General of the Pillar State of Zhou into ashes. Everything happened in an instant. An Inborn Grandmaster was decapitated and killed in the battle. Chapter 433 - Chapter 433: Chapter 224: That is Light Chapter 433: Chapter 224: That is Light Translator: 549690339 Surrounded by raging fire, Lu Yuan¡¯s figure appeared within, seeming like a heavenly god descending to earth. At this moment, this heavenly god had just decapitated another Sword God in everyone¡¯s eyes. The shock brought about by this incident instantly shattered the resistance of the surrounding Zhou people who were still holding on. ¡°The Grand General is dead!¡± ¡°The Grand General was burned to death by someone!¡± ¡°That¡¯s not a human; that¡¯s a Fire Demon!¡± ¡°Run!¡± Almost in an instant, many Zhou soldiers who had witnessed with their own eyes how Lu Yuan burned Gui Lianyun to death turned pale with fright, their courage shattered. They threw away their weapons, not daring to fight the Yue soldiers face to face, and turned to flee. However, the plains were filled with enemy armies marching in formation, leaving no place to escape. The only way left for these Zhou soldiers to escape was the narrow area near the city gate. Hundreds and thousands of people rushed over in single file. But the narrow place couldn¡¯t accommodate so many people. To fight for the path of escape, some people even drew their swords and started hacking at each other right there. Zhou soldiers who had already been frightened, dared not fight with the enemy face-to-face, but were swift and decisive in killing their own. ¡°None of you are allowed to leave, go back!¡± ¡°Kill the enemies! Kill them for me!¡± ¡°The Grand General has been kind to us, now that the bandit has killed him, we must take revenge for him!¡± There were also a number of stubborn individuals who still wanted to resist. Some Zhou generals, with their personal guards, tried to intercept and rally the fleeing soldiers, attempting to continue their resistance. However, those who resisted soon became the primary targets of Lu Yuan. Watching those who were still trying to organize the soldiers to fight back, Lu Yuan¡¯s figure flickered, and in an instant, he reached their side. Several clusters of Red Sun fire flew out, and with a bang, more than ten nearby people were burned to ashes. After doing this a few times and killing more than a hundred people, the last batch of Zhou people who tried to resist were eventually eliminated. ¡°The Fire Demon is coming! Run!¡± Some people saw Lu Yuan chasing after them, and they couldn¡¯t help but become even more terrified, desperately trying to escape into the city. But there were also some who knew they couldn¡¯t escape, or who were too scared to move. Upon seeing Lu Yuan chase after them, they threw their weapons down one by one, knelt on the ground, and kowtowed, begging for mercy. ¡°Spare me, please! I surrender!¡± ¡°Please don¡¯t kill me, I surrender, I surrender!¡± Watching the scene of Zhou soldiers¡¯ complete loss of morale in the North City camp, Lu Yuan finally stopped his pursuit and held back from killing more. He looked around at the frightened and restless Zhou soldiers, took a deep breath, and then, using his True Pneuma to amplify his voice, said: ¡°Those who surrender will not be killed, those who dare to escape will die!¡± His resounding voice instantly spread throughout the entire battlefield. All the Zhou people who heard these words immediately dropped their weapons, knelt on the ground, and pleaded for mercy. ¡°We are willing to surrender!¡± ¡°General, please spare our lives!¡± ¡°We are willing to surrender, willing to surrender!¡± One by one, cries for mercy kept echoing from all directions. Lu Yuan looked at the scene and a smile finally appeared on his face. At this point, several of his disciples who had fought their way into the camp with him saw their Master and King force the surrender of so many Zhou soldiers and couldn¡¯t help but gather around. They looked at their Master with eyes full of awe. The battle just now, for these disciples, was simply godlike and demonic. And their own Master could kill another god-like being, making this achievement and prowess seem even more divine. Facing the admiring gaze of his disciples, Lu Yuan¡¯s expression remained calm, without much smugness. After all, Gui Lianyun had been in two consecutive battles, and after using a secret technique, he was at the end of his tether when fighting against Lu Yuan. His strength was no more than thirty percent. And even with just that thirty percent of strength, the man made a misjudgment because of Lu Yuan¡¯s actions, weakening his defenses and revealing a flaw. Under these conditions, using his full martial arts prowess and consecutive sneak attacks with Thunder Method and Taiping Daoist Method, Lu Yuan dealt a fatal blow. If Gui Lianyun hadn¡¯t died from that, Lu Yuan would¡¯ve lived in vain. But today¡¯s experiment confirmed my original conjecture. An ordinary Martial Arts Xiantian is at a significant disadvantage when facing someone like me who cultivates both Immortal and Martial arts.¡¯ Moreover, the other party didn¡¯t know about my Immortal Technique cultivation, and was completely unprepared for it. Gui Lianyun died because of this. If he had been cautious and aware of my Immortal Technique, it wouldn¡¯t have been so easy to kill a Martial Arts Xiantian expert in such a casual manner. This method of sneak attack is a good hidden card for a future trump card assassination. I should make good use of it in the future.¡¯ With these thoughts in mind, Lu Yuan decided to further refine the integration of martial arts external body and Immortal Technique, making this hidden card assassination more mature. However, perfecting this would have to wait until the future. His priority now was to take down Gui Ningfu City before his eyes. Having gone through the trouble of killing Gui Lianyun, this final prize of war must not slip away. ¡°Immediately send someone to inform Martial Proclamation Marquis, the Queen, and the Grand General that the bandit Gui Lianyun has been killed by me. Order them to hasten their soldiers, defeat the enemies before them, and join me in attacking the city.¡± Lu Yuan instructed his personal guard to go to the other three battlefields and report the news. Then he turned to the disciples beside him, ¡°Leave five thousand people to gather these prisoners. The rest of the troops will follow me into the city to take over the defense.¡± Chapter 434 - Chapter 434: Chapter 224: That is Light_2 Chapter 434: Chapter 224: That is Light_2 Translator: 549690339 ¡°Yes!¡± ¡°Your servant obeys!¡± All the disciples responded in unison, then surrounded Lu Yuan, leading the charge into the city. By this point, the city gates were wide open, and the Zhou soldiers who had fled in beforehand were nowhere to be found. Those who didn¡¯t have time to run were kneeling on either side of the entrance, choosing to surrender. Lu Yuan led a force of over ten thousand, entering through the North Gate without a single obstruction. In a short while, he took control of the entire North City. He then led the troops deeper into the city, reaching the government office. Here, they encountered a group of Zhou soldiers, numbering in the thousands, but they evidently had already received the news of Gui Lianyun¡¯s death. Upon seeing the approaching Yue people, especially the distinctive red flame symbol of the man leading them, they were instantly terrified. All of them, numbering in the thousands, scattered and fled without a hint of resistance. Lu Yuan let part of his troops chase and capture these fugitive soldiers, then led the rest into the government office, leaving some to guard. After that, he continued leading the troops towards the East City. But as for West City and South City, Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t concerned. Although Lan Cai¡¯er and Yang Jing had sent people saying that they had been seriously injured in the fight with Gui Lianyun and had to retreat. However, even a severely injured Inborn Grandmaster can¡¯t be defeated by those in the Innate World. With the two of them leading, it wouldn¡¯t be difficult to take South City and West City, which no longer had Gui Lianyun¡¯s protection. On the contrary, Zhou Qing only had first-rate skills, and didn¡¯t have an absolute advantage over the Zhou soldiers in East City. Taking East City might encounter some twists and turns. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t want to see the situation where they killed Gui Lianyun and even broke into the city, only to be defeated by the remnants of the Zhou soldiers. That would be a joke. Therefore, it was necessary for him to lead his troops to East City and help his disciple capture it to play it safe. By the time they arrived at East City, Lu Yuan realized he might have been overly cautious. These Zhou people weren¡¯t as resilient as he had imagined, and his disciple performed exceptionally well. Gui Lianyun, as the Grand General of the Right Pillar State of the Zhou, as well as the Commander of Ningfu City, had a much higher prestige among the Zhou army than Lu Yuan had imagined. Thus, when the East-City Zhou soldiers received the news of Gui Lianyun¡¯s death from the fugitive soldiers of the North City, the morale of the originally steadfast East-City soldiers collapsed immediately, and many fled and scattered. Zhou Qing, leading the large army, was attacking East City¡¯s camp fiercely. Noticing the unusual movements of the Zhou people, he seized the opportunity and led his elite team to attack in the direction of the fleeing Zhou soldiers. By the time Lu Yuan arrived at East City with his troops, his own big disciple had already led his men to break through East City¡¯s camp and was heading towards the city gate. Seeing this situation, Lu Yuan naturally had nothing more to say. Reassured, he also led his troops to meet the soldiers of his own disciple, quickly defeating the last group of Zhou soldiers in the East City area who were still resisting. Then it was time to take over the city¡¯s defense and capture the captives. At this point, messages were sent from the West and South Cities. Lan Cai¡¯er and Yang Jing had already broken through the two city gates with their troops and were driving the Zhou soldiers of their respective areas. They would soon be able to clear the two areas and come to join forces. Lu Yuan was naturally overjoyed at the news. Seeing that East City was now cleaned up, he left Zhou Qing in charge of mopping up the remaining resistance, leading his own troops to South City this time. Earlier, his wife had sent someone to spread the rumor that she had been seriously injured. As a husband, Lu Yuan naturally had some concerns in his heart. Now that the situation was settled and the city was broken, he naturally had to rush over to check and comfort his wife. He wouldn¡¯t miss such a great opportunity to gain favor.Time trickled on. By dusk, the shouting in the city gradually quieted. The remaining Zhou soldiers in the city were finally cleaned up, with these fleeing soldiers either killed or captured. By this time, the commanders Lu Yuan had assigned to attack the four city gates were finally gathered in the government office in the city. ¡°Greetings to the King.¡± When Yang Jing arrived, Lu Yuan was busy fussing over his queen. Just earlier, when he led the troops to South City and saw Lan Cai¡¯er, he realized that her claim of being seriously injured wasn¡¯t false. She had truly fought to the death with Gui Lianyun and even went all out with her true fire, ending up severely injured. Although this injury wasn¡¯t life-threatening, it would still take two or three months to recover. Seeing his wife on one hand and his only Inborn combatant on the other, Lu Yuan naturally felt great concern upon seeing Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s injuries. After a good deal of reproach, comfort, and caution against recklessness, he took out copious amounts of healing medications he had with him, assisted her to the government office for rest, and good care. Lan Cai¡¯er also enjoyed this, finding her husband¡¯s concern comforting. Any woman would consider this a pleasant thing. Yet now, seeing Yang Jing intruding their world of two, the Saintly Queen couldn¡¯t help but knit her brows, but she didn¡¯t say anything and continued to enjoy her husband¡¯s company happily. ¡°Martial Proclamation Marquis has arrived!¡± Seeing Yang Jing hurriedly arriving, a smile appeared on Lu Yuan¡¯s face. He then complimented, ¡°This time, thanks to the efforts of the Martial Proclamation Marquis, we forced Gui Lianyun to use his secret techniques. Chapter 435 - Chapter 435: Chapter 224: That is Light – 3 Chapter 435: Chapter 224: That is Light ¨C 3 Translator: 549690339 Thus, when I fought him, the traitor was at his weakest and was killed by me. Today, attacking and breaking through Fu City, the Martial Proclamation Marquis should be given the first credit.¡± Lu Yuan acknowledged Yang Jing¡¯s contribution. This could be seen from the numerous injuries on his body. Looking at Yang Jing in front of him, especially the several bloody wounds on his body, the pale face, and the somewhat decayed breath. How could Lu Yuan not know that the Martial Proclamation Marquis¡¯ claim of being seriously injured was true? Even those injuries were more severe than those of his queen. It makes sense. Yang Jing faced Gui Lianyun at his peak state, and also when his fury was at its highest. Under such circumstances, after the two fought, it would be strange if Yang Jing didn¡¯t suffer heavy losses, wouldn¡¯t it? For such a hero who had made great sacrifices and finally helped him kill Gui Lianyun, Lu Yuan naturally respected and appreciated him. The more advanced cannon fodders like this, the better for his side. Anyway, they are not his own people, so he doesn¡¯t feel heartache if they get hurt or die. Even if they made contributions and were given the first credit, how to reward them would be a headache for the court. Don¡¯t forget that the commander of the United Army of the Four Nations this time was Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang. When Lu Yuan sent the war report, it was Bai Mengyang and the court who had to give rewards to Yang Jing as the first credit. Since the wool doesn¡¯t come from his own body, he can freely write checks as the one who pays in the end is not him. In this regard, Lu Yuan, who had already received benefits, was still very generous in saving face. Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s words, Yang Jing quickly shook his head. He glanced at the other party with a bit of envy and awe, and finally couldn¡¯t help but bitterly smile: ¡°How can I, in my humble position, dare to claim to be the first? This time, Your Majesty killed Gui Lianyun in battle. Your martial arts are remarkable and among the best in the world. Such credit can be called the first. I only fought with Gui Lianyun once and was defeated and retreated. I really don¡¯t dare to take credit for it.¡± Yang Jing was sincere when he said this. This was the beheading of an Inborn in an army of thousands! In recent years, the only person with such a record was Li Xiong when he led the army against Jinghai Country and killed the Grandmaster of the country in an army of thousands. Besides that, looking around, there was no such record in the neighboring countries over the past ten years or so. Now, such a record that could be praised by the world has been achieved by Lu Yuan. Yang Jing didn¡¯t need to think much to know that after this battle, Lu Yuan¡¯s name would surely spread throughout the tens of countries in Yang-Yong-Qing States. Facing such a great achievement, even if he had ten faces, he couldn¡¯t have the nerve to obscure the first credit. Moreover, Lu Yuan said that it was because of the weakening of Gui Lianyun by himself and Lan Cai¡¯er that he was extremely weak and was killed by him by chance. But at this moment, Yang Jing asked himself that even if he faced Gui Lianyun who had fought two battles in a row and had lost his strength, he still didn¡¯t have much confidence in killing him. It could even be said that he had no confidence at all. He had fought with Gui Lianyun and knew his true strength. He was absolutely one of the top experts in the first realm of Inborn. Even though such an expert had lost his strength, couldn¡¯t he escape if he couldn¡¯t beat Lu Yuan? Just like when he fought with Gui Lianyun earlier, although he couldn¡¯t beat him, he could still retreat from Gui Lianyun¡¯s hands unscathed. It¡¯s not that easy to keep an Inborn Grandmaster under normal circumstances. However, Lu Yuan was able to do this, and from this perspective. ¡®This King of Changsha must still be hiding some means to kill Inborn. It seems that we underestimated him earlier. As for the Changsha Kingdom, we need to carefully plan our tactics.¡¯ With such thoughts in his heart, Yang Jing¡¯s inadvertent glance at Lu Yuan became even more profound and solemn. Not only him. Even Lan Cai¡¯er, who was listening to the conversation between the two at this moment, looked at her husband with a strange color in her eyes. Unlike Yang Jing, Lan Cai¡¯er once had the record of killing Inborn Grandmasters as well. Wucheng Marquis Li Gui, the original Dongting County Magistrate, was killed by her and Li Xiong. But for that killing of Li Gui, the two used ambush tactics. Under the condition that Li Gui was completely unguarded, Lan Cai¡¯er first used the poison insects carefully cultivated by the Poison Sect to launch a surprise attack and severely injured him. Then she and Li Xiong joined forces with many first-class subordinates, and after paying a heavy price, they barely killed Li Gui. However, even so, both she and Li Xiong were heavily injured, unable to fight for one or two years, and had to stay in their old nest to recuperate. But now Lu Yuan. He killed Gui Lianyun, who was stronger than Li Gui, and did so alone. Even after killing him, he didn¡¯t have any injuries. With such achievements and strength, how could one not think deeply about it? ¡®It seems that there are still many things my husband is hiding from me, and my understanding of him is ultimately insufficient.¡¯ Lan Cai¡¯er thought to herself, feeling a little unhappy. However, being an intelligent woman, she did not intend to ask directly. Even if she asked, her husband might not answer. Even if he did, the answer might not be the truth. On the contrary, it can be confirmed that such behavior will definitely cause a rift between their hearts and damage the hard-won affection they have now. So after thinking about it, Lan Cai¡¯er still decided to observe and understand her husband¡¯s secrets slowly in the future. In any case, she didn¡¯t believe it. In the future, as they live day and night together, sharing a bed, how could she not find out her husband¡¯s secrets? Maybe she wouldn¡¯t even have to actively look for it. After the wedding, when she consummated her marriage and became a real husband and wife, her husband might voluntarily tell her his secrets. Men, after all, always think about trivial matters. As long as they are comfortable and happy, it¡¯s not difficult to know anything. Lan Cai¡¯er was confident in her charm. No matter her looks, strength, or status, she was all among the best in the world, or even unmatched. Is there really any man who can resist a stunning beauty with both status and temperament, who personally tries to seduce them? Lan Cai¡¯er looked at Lu Yuan next to her, and no matter how she looked at it, her husband didn¡¯t seem to be the kind of person who could resist the allure of beauty. ¡®Well, let¡¯s do it this way!¡¯ She smiled faintly, as if to see the scene of Lu Yuan falling under her pomegranate skirt in the future. I may not be able to beat you in reality, but in marital fun, I don¡¯t believe that you won¡¯t be a captive of mine. It¡¯s still what dad said. As long as she wins over Lu Yuan, everything he possesses today will belong to her child in the future. The harder he works and the bigger Changsha gets, the more her child will inherit in the future. ¡®So for the future child, in this Northern Expedition, Mom will work harder to fight for more future for you.¡¯ Lan Cai¡¯er rubbed her flat belly and began to look forward to the future. That¡¯s the light! Chapter 436 - Chapter 436: Chapter 225: The Key to Victory Chapter 436: Chapter 225: The Key to Victory Translator: 549690339 ¡°Enough arguing about this. I¡¯ll record our respective contributions in the military report and submit it to Wuan Marquis for evaluation later.¡± Seeing that Yang Jing was still arguing about merits, Lu Yuan quickly intervened and changed the topic. Then he looked at the two of them and said slowly, ¡°Now that Guining Fu City has been captured in a day, the city¡¯s defending general Gui Lianyun has been killed, and the fifty thousand Zhou soldiers inside the city have either surrendered or died.¡± ¡°There is no obstacle from Zhou soldiers to the north now until we reach the border with Fangling Prefecture.¡± ¡°Hence, my decision is that since it¡¯s already late today and our soldiers are exhausted from the long battle, we shall rest for a night in this city.¡± ¡°Tomorrow at dawn, I will lead the troops to Fangling Prefecture.¡± ¡°What do you think, Martial Proclamation Marquis?¡± Upon saying this, Lu Yuan looked at Yang Jing. Among the hundred thousand troops under him, eighty thousand were his direct subordinates, while the remaining twenty thousand were under Yang Jing¡¯s command as royal court soldiers. In addition, Yang Jing represented Wuan Marquis and the royal court, and he was also an Inborn Grandmaster. Given these factors, Lu Yuan needed Yang Jing¡¯s input when making decisions and couldn¡¯t act unilaterally. However, Yang Jing usually behaved reasonably and did not raise any objections to Lu Yuan¡¯s decisions as long as they didn¡¯t involve core interests. He would follow the commander¡¯s ideas without causing any conflict. So, upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s plan, Yang Jing said, ¡°Your Highness¡¯ arrangements are prudent and cautious. I have no objections.¡± ¡°Good. Since Martial Proclamation Marquis has no objections, we will proceed accordingly.¡± Seeing that Yang Jing did not object, Lu Yuan revealed a smile and then turned to Lan Cai¡¯er, saying, ¡°Your Majesty, now that Guining Fu City has been taken, it is a strategic location that not only separates the east and west territories of the Zhou People but also secures the rear of our surprise attack force. We must have someone guard this place.¡± ¡°So, my plan is that after I lead the army away tomorrow, you will stay behind and lead twenty thousand soldiers to guard this city.¡± ¡°While guarding the rear of our main army, you can also keep an eye on the captives in the city.¡± ¡°Do you have any objections, Your Majesty?¡± In reality, the two cities of Wushan Prefecture and Jingmen Prefecture were already held up by the royal court reinforcements, making it highly unlikely that the Zhou People would send reinforcements here. So, leaving twenty thousand soldiers and an Inborn Grandmaster at Guining Fu City wasn¡¯t actually necessary. But who could blame Lu Yuan for being concerned about his injured wife? Since his wife had fought hard for him and sustained severe injuries, how could he bear to let her continue fighting on the battlefield given the circumstances? So, letting Lan Cai¡¯er stay behind in Guining Fu City to heal her injuries and guard the rear in case of an emergency seemed appropriate. Furthermore, it wasn¡¯t just about letting Lan Cai¡¯er recover. This northern expedition was fraught with great risks. Even the slightest mistake could lead to the annihilation of the entire army. Of the eighty thousand troops remaining in Lu Yuan¡¯s northern expedition, thirty thousand were his direct soldiers and the other fifty thousand were from the Miao People. Having lost ten thousand soldiers in the northern expedition, Lu Yuan was already heartbroken. Now, while preparing a surprise attack on Xiangyang City, he couldn¡¯t bear to risk his direct troops. So, by leaving twenty thousand soldiers behind in Guining Fu City, he would only have ten thousand soldiers remaining for the northern assault. In this way, even if the surprise attack failed, he would only lose ten thousand soldiers and fifty thousand Miao People at most. Although this outcome would still pain him, the preservation of twenty thousand soldiers¡¯ vitality was somewhat more acceptable. With these considerations and concerns, Lu Yuan made this arrangement. As for Lan Cai¡¯er, who wasn¡¯t aware of the detailed plan, she naturally believed her husband was genuinely concerned about her well-being. Feeling touched, she didn¡¯t refuse his kindness and nodded, saying, ¡°I will follow Your Highness¡¯ arrangements.¡± Yang Jing hesitated after seeing this scene, but ultimately didn¡¯t speak up against it. What reason could he have for objecting? Lu Yuan¡¯s reasons for leaving Lan Cai¡¯er behind were valid indeed. Guarding the rear of the army and blocking the Zhou People¡¯s communication between east and west were crucial tasks. Just because it was difficult for the Zhou People on both sides to send reinforcements didn¡¯t mean this place was invulnerable to attacks, right? They were able to launch a surprise attack on Guining Fu City, so who was to say the Zhou People couldn¡¯t do the same? Therefore, leaving twenty thousand soldiers and an Inborn Grandmaster here was indeed a prudent strategy. Yang Jing sighed in his heart, thinking, ¡®Well, it¡¯s just one less Inborn Grandmaster and twenty thousand soldiers. We still have more than seventy thousand troops, and with both Lu Yuan and me, we should still be able to carry out the surprise attack.¡¯ Seeing no objections from Yang Jing, Lu Yuan nodded and smiled, ¡°In that case, the matter is settled. Tomorrow, the Queen will lead twenty thousand soldiers to guard this city and the rear.¡± ¡°Marshal Proclamation Marquis and I will take the rest of the troops and continue northward.¡± After that, the military meeting came to an end. Yang Jing returned to his own camp to prepare for tomorrow¡¯s battle, while the injured and exhausted Lan Cai¡¯er was ordered by Lu Yuan to rest. Lu Yuan remained in the tent, both writing the war report to be sent to Dangyang¡¯s main camp and handling post-battle military affairs. After working hard for more than an hour, when it was almost midnight, Zhou Qing hurried in. Chapter 437 - Chapter 437: Chapter 225: The Key to Victory_2 Chapter 437: Chapter 225: The Key to Victory_2 Translator: 549690339 ¡°Your Majesty.¡± Lu Yuan raised his head, looked at his disciple with a smile on his face, and then scolded: ¡°Didn¡¯t I say that when we are in private, just call me Master as usual?¡± ¡°Master.¡± Zhou Qing felt the warmth of his master¡¯s words and immediately changed his address: ¡°I have counted the number of captive Zhou People overnight. Today¡¯s battle killed 13,000 Zhou People. Among them, 8,000 were soldiers, and 5,000 were civilian workers. We also captured 56,000 Zhou soldiers, including 41,000 soldiers and 15,000 civilian workers. Also, there are more than a thousand fugitive soldiers, either still hiding in the city¡¯s civilian houses or have escaped in the chaos, with their whereabouts unknown.¡± Zhou Qing reported the results of the night¡¯s work. ¡°41,000!¡± Lu Yuan was slightly surprised by this number. He ignored the civilian workers and focused directly on the number of soldiers. Civilian workers were basically of little use. They couldn¡¯t fight tough battles or inflict much damage. They were only useful for bolstering strength. If he wanted, he could mobilize three to five hundred thousand from Changsha Country¡¯s two million-plus population at any time. But is this useful? No. For example, in the Southsea and Ninghai countries, they mobilized two hundred thousand troops, which seemed to be a formidable force. But most of them were civilian workers. What use could they be? This time when launching a surprise attack, Bai Mengyang thought of Lu Yuan first. Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange had never been considered by the Wuan Marquis. Why? He had seen through the useless fact of the opponent¡¯s civilian army, and therefore had never hoped for the opponent¡¯s cooperation. So, while Lu Yuan attacked Guining¡¯s Fu City, Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange could only command their soldiers and horses as cannon fodder in Dangyang. By stacking up lives, they were fighting for an opportunity for their side. From this different treatment, one can see how big the gap is between soldiers and civilian workers. So when he heard Zhou Qing¡¯s report that they had captured 41,000 Zhou soldiers, Lu Yuan was full of surprises in his heart. At the same time, he immediately said, ¡°Arrange for personnel to send these 41,000 soldiers back to Jiangnan. Let Li Liang properly sort them out and make them our own as much as possible.¡± He had just lost 10,000 soldiers and was still hurting. Now, 41,000 soldiers were delivered, which was like being hungry and having someone hand over a chicken leg to him. Although these Zhou soldiers were from the enemy country and it was basically impossible to use them as his own loyal soldiers, they were still very reliable when placed in Jiangnan and not assigned to areas bordering Zhou Country. Anyway, send them to Jiangnan first, and then keep them separated from Zhou Country by a long distance. Even if these Zhou soldiers are unwilling, they can only serve him obediently when facing such a situation. In the future, arrange for their marriages in Jiangnan, let them settle down, and with their wives and children, their loyalty should be ensured, right? Dealing with these captives, Lu Yuan has plenty of means, and is not anxious at this time. The only concern he has is how to support the extra 40,000 soldiers? But now he still has a lot of silver taels. Even after the expenses of founding a country and weddings, there are still 20 million silver taels in his account. With so much money, he can support 40,000 soldiers for at least eight years. Not to mention, Lu Yuan receives support from Southsea and Ninghai countries, and now has captured the territory in Zhou Country¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture. The taxes from these territories can also support more soldiers and horses. So now supporting an additional 40,000 people is still sustainable. Zhou Qing heard his master¡¯s instructions, thought about it, and immediately said, ¡°Then I will arrange for 5,000 men to escort these captives back to Jiangnan tomorrow.¡± Guining Prefecture is adjacent to Tianmen Prefecture. All the prefectures and counties in Tianmen Prefecture have been reclaimed by the United Army, so it is safe for the army to pass through there without fearing attacks from Zhou People. So, only 5,000 people are needed to escort the captives to ensure their safe passage to Jiangnan. ¡°Just do it like that.¡± Lu Yuan nodded, thought about it, and then said, ¡°Also, send someone to find out if there are locals among these captive soldiers. If so, let them also report their families and move to Jiangnan with them. Tell these Zhou People clearly that there will be no chance to return to the north this time. If they don¡¯t bring their families now, they will never see them again in the future.¡± As a major southern stronghold of the Zhou People, Xiangyang Prefecture has always stationed more than 100,000 soldiers, so there should be a lot of locals among the captives this time. Anyway, it is better to bring their families along while taking these captives back to Jiangnan, letting them marry, have children, and settle down. This saves time and effort, and also fills up his territory¡¯s population. It¡¯s simply a win-win situation. As for how to bring the family members of the captive Zhou People in other prefectures and counties not under his control, that¡¯s another issue. Chapter 438 - Chapter 438: Chapter 225: The Key to Victory_3 Chapter 438: Chapter 225: The Key to Victory_3 Translator: 549690339 Lu Yuan felt that when he would ask Bai Mengyang, the latter should not refuse, and he could send someone to take away the captured soldiers¡¯ families as requested. Thus, the problem would not be significant. Concerning this matter, Zhou Qing naturally nodded, ¡°Disciple understands, and will do so later.¡± With that, the handling of the prisoners of war had been settled. The next morning, due to the sudden decision to escort the prisoners away, Lu Yuan arranged for five thousand men to transport the prisoners back to Jiangnan. As a result, only fifteen thousand soldiers remained in Guining Mansion. Lan Cai¡¯er led these men, staying in the city and guarding the army¡¯s rear. As for the remaining fifteen thousand civilian captives, Lu Yuan disbursed travel expenses and sent them home directly. Now that Guining Mansion had been captured, according to the previous agreement with Bai Mengyang, this place would become the territory of Changsha State in the future. Therefore, the fifteen thousand civilian workers forcibly enlisted from all around Guining Mansion were naturally his subjects. Lu Yuan would not be too harsh on the people under his rule, nor would he arbitrarily kill them. Moreover, there was no need to worry about Zhou People coming back at this point. Releasing these civilians who were ordinary people bore little risk. With this, he could reduce the killing and add some benevolent and righteous reputation to himself, which he was naturally happy to do. After making these arrangements, Lu Yuan led the remaining seventy-seven thousand men, together with Yang Jing, northward to Fangling Prefecture. On the way north, the army moved with incredible speed. Lu Yuan left fifty thousand main forces and ordered Zhou Qing to catch up with the baggage train at a slower pace. On the other hand, he and Yang Jing led the remaining twenty thousand elite troops on a fast run, marching day and night towards Fangling Prefecture. Crossing mountains and ridges on the way took two days and two nights, passing through Gaoyang, Yongqing, and Baokang counties before arriving at Fangling Prefecture City on the third day. At this point, the news of the fall of Guining Mansion and the loss of a series of county towns in the south had not yet reached the city. Only a thousand city guard soldiers were defending the whole city. These men were no match for Lu Yuan and Yang Jing, the two Inborn Grandmasters. With just a slight use of their martial arts external body, they killed hundreds of people, and the city¡¯s defenders collapsed, leading to the fall of the city. After capturing Fangling Prefecture City, the soldiers were exhausted, and since Zhou Qing had not yet arrived, Lu Yuan did not rashly attack Xiangyang but took some men and continued attacking to the west. Over three days, they successively captured the cities of Xicheng Prefecture to the west of Fangling. By this point, the entire Xiangyang Prefecture to the west had been captured by Lu Yuan, including Guining, Fangling, and Xicheng Prefectures. After that, he led the troops back to Fangling, and several days later, Zhou Qing finally arrived with the main force. Lu Yuan left more than twenty thousand exhausted soldiers to his disciple. He then instructed his disciple to recuperate the troops while trying to continue attacking the Zhou Country in Hanzhong Prefecture to the west of Xicheng Prefecture and seizing the city. If they could capture it, it would be best. If not, they could also plunder the local population and migrate them back to Jiangnan. Nowadays, in Changsha State¡¯s jurisdiction, Dongting Prefecture had lost more than two-fifths of its population due to years of war. Various prefectures and counties were sparsely populated. The desolate landscape was not pleasant to look at. Moreover, the more people there were, the stronger the national strength, and the more Qi Luck Lu Yuan could gather. So, in addition to the initial goal of this Northern Expedition, Lu Yuan also planned to seize the opportunity to plunder some of Zhou Country¡¯s population and move them to his own territory. Now, it was just implementing the established plan. Having arranged the task for Zhou Qing, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t stop. Instead, he led the fifty thousand soldiers brought by Zhou Qing, taking advantage of the ships collected in Fangling Prefecture over the past few days, and sailed down the Han River towards Xiangyang Prefecture. At this time. After several days of buffering, Xiangyang Prefecture finally received news that the Yue army was coming from the west and had already captured Fangling Prefecture. This news caused great panic in Xiangyang Prefecture. The governor of Xiangyang immediately ordered the mobilization of civilian workers, county soldiers to assemble in the city, while also enlisting the local strong men to participate in guarding the city. These responses were extremely rapid and correct. However, in such a hasty situation, how many troops could be gathered in the city? By the time Lu Yuan¡¯s troops arrived at the city, only a little over fifty thousand people had been gathered in Xiangyang Prefecture City. Although the number of soldiers and forces under Lu Yuan was equal, the defenders in the city were mostly civilian workers, with only over seven thousand real soldiers, including prefectural, and county troops. Such combat power was considered weak. The only thing worth attention was that the Grand General of the Eastern Pillar State of Zhou, who was stationed in Nanyang Prefecture nearby, arrived in Xiangyang City in a hurry during these days. With this Inborn Grandmaster present and the cooperation of more than fifty thousand defenders, it would be a bit difficult to break the city. But that¡¯s okay. The real purpose of Lu Yuan¡¯s surprise attack was not to take Xiangyang City. Initially, Bai Mengyang¡¯s plan was just to station troops at Xiangyang to cut off the Zhou People at Dangyang, causing turmoil and difficulty to fight. Now that Lu Yuan had reached Xiangyang, this strategic goal had been achieved. What was left to see now was Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang¡¯s reaction. Therefore, Lu Yuan stationed his troops outside Xiangyang City, tried to attack a few times, and found it was difficult, so he did not continue to force the attack. Instead, he set up camp outside the city, besieging it, and waiting for news from Danyang. At this time, hundreds of miles south of Xiangyang, on the battlefield of Dangyang. In the main camp of the United Army, Bai Mengyang finally received the news from Lu Yuan several days later due to the long distance. After learning that Fangling Prefecture City had been captured, Marquis of Wuan saw the opportunity for victory, and in his elation, immediately assembled the generals to discuss military affairs. ¡°Gentlemen, four days ago Changsha Wang sent news that he had captured Fangling Prefecture City. According to the time estimate, Changsha Wang should have already led his army eastward by now, and his troops would have been near Xiangyang Prefecture City.¡± Bai Mengyang, holding a piece of brocade silk in his hand, smiled at everyone. Chapter 439 - Chapter 439: Chapter 226: Different Paths, Dead Ends Chapter 439: Chapter 226: Different Paths, Dead Ends Translator: 549690339 Upon hearing Bai Mengyang¡¯s words, everyone in the tent was stunned, and when they recovered, they were excited beyond measure by the good news. ¡°That¡¯s great. The King of Changsha truly lives up to his reputation.¡± In the camp, after digesting the news from Bai Mengyang, Yan Wangqiu¡¯s face broke into a delighted smile, saying, ¡°King Changsha has already established his martial arts prowess with the earlier defeat of Gui Lianyun, and now he has captured Fu City, truly a general of his time. ¡°With his help, capturing Xiangyang City may not be far off.¡± Yan Wangqiu naturally praised his ally generously. However, as they listened to his praises, although the people in the tent showed smiles on their faces, their eyes were full of different colors. Since the news of Lu Yuan beheading an Inborn Grandmaster in front of the army came a few days ago, Many people in the United Army began to see the King of Changsha in a different light. There were those who were happy, those who were jealous, those who were fearful, and those who were worried¡­ Regardless of their attitudes, one common thing was that everyone¡¯s focus on Lu Yuan had reached a new level. If previously people viewed Lu Yuan as just an ordinary newly promoted Inborn who could fight wars, commanding some strong soldiers, and not possessing particularly extraordinary abilities, At this moment, Lu Yuan had become, in the eyes of the people, an incredibly terrifying Grandmaster with overwhelming strength and extraordinary military skills. Well, looking at these opinions, doesn¡¯t it seem familiar? Yes, at this point, to everyone¡¯s eyes, Lu Yuan had become the second Wuan Marquis. The reason he is second is only that Lu Yuan is still young, and his strength is not as great as Bai Mengyang¡¯s, and he has only killed one Inborn, which is not as impressive as Bai Mengyang¡¯s war record over the years. Yet, judging by the strength and potential he has shown now, in thirty years, he will likely achieve what Bai Mengyang has achieved today. Such a character with strength, potential, and a king of a country, leading a group of strong soldiers, Who wouldn¡¯t be afraid of him? Who wouldn¡¯t be frightened? At any rate, the people from the court camp were deeply worried about Lu Yuan¡¯s sudden display of formidable strength, Even including Su Xuange in Lu Yuan¡¯s camp, who had also begun to worry about his well-performing ally. Just as Lu Yuan never truly believed in his heart that the Three Nations Alliance would last very long. In the heart of the Monarch of Ninghai, he didn¡¯t believe that the Three Nations Alliance would last very long either. At this time, with powerful external pressure, the Three Nations could temporarily band together for support. But if the external pressure were to lessen, such as at this moment, when Zhou Country was repelled, and then Yue Country stopped its aggression, Without the powerful external pressure, the intimate alliance of the three countries would become a problem as their crises were significantly reduced. As for what the other two allies thought, Su Xuange didn¡¯t know, But in his heart, he had ambitions to take advantage of Yan Wangqiu¡¯s death to swallow up Southsea and unify Lingnan Region. Su Xuange was only in his eighties, and even if he had to endure a few more years until Yan Wangqiu¡¯s death, he¡¯d be in his early nineties at most. For an Inborn Grandmaster, this age was in the prime of life. With more than sixty years still ahead of him to live, if he didn¡¯t make any achievements during that time, he¡¯d be wasting the title of a founding monarch. Su Xuange¡¯s ambitions went far beyond just Ninghai Country. With the decline of Yue House, chaos was reigning throughout the world, the people were displaced, and grass-roots heroes were rising. It was a time for heroes to flex their muscles. Su Xuange asked himself, since he had achieved a little in his life, not only being an Inborn Grandmaster but also a founding monarch, could he not be considered a hero? If he was a hero, why should he be confined to the small land of Ninghai? The land of Lingnan, or even the whole Jiangnan nation, was where he could truly show his abilities. It was precisely because of these various ambitions that Su Xuange harbored doubts about this Northern Expedition. As for Lu Yan¡¯s exceptional performance and emergence, he was even more worried. Judging others by oneself, Su Xuange thought that since a person like himself had ambitions to swallow up Lingnan, Luyuan, who was younger, more accomplished, and stronger than him, Would someone who seemed like a heroic youth, be truly content to be confined to Changsha, guarding a place worse than Ninghai, and live out his life in loneliness? If it were any normal person, wouldn¡¯t they be unwilling? That¡¯s why Lu Yuan had proposed that all the captured territories be under his control during the surprise attack. This proposal, to begin with, exposed the other party¡¯s ambitions. This was not a person who could be content with his lot and bear loneliness. Now that Lu Yuan demanded the land of Xiangyang Prefecture in Zhou Country, how would he not covet the land of Lingnan Region if he had the opportunity? With the current state of the two nations in Lingnan, what could they use to resist, given the strength and the strong soldiers of the other party? ¡®It seems I should make some preparations early, to guard against any future threats.¡¯ Su Xuange thought to himself, resolved to immediately prepare for raising an army capable of fighting when he returned to his country, It would be best if the number of troops could reach one hundred thousand. Only then could they compete with Changsha. Also, it would be to accumulate strength for the future to conquer Southsea. ¡®However, maintaining an army is expensive. Based on Lu Yuan¡¯s military expenditures, maintaining a hundred thousand troops would cost six million silver taels a year just for their salaries. Chapter 440 - Chapter 440: Chapter 226: Different Paths, Dead Ends_2 Chapter 440: Chapter 226: Different Paths, Dead Ends_2 Translator: 549690339 Considering the miscellaneous items including food, fodder, and military equipment, the expenses would probably exceed eight million silver tales. At this thought, Su Xuange couldn¡¯t help but feel a headache. Although it was not impossible for the kingdom of Ninghai to raise such funds and supplies with its national strength, it was not easy. Nowadays, he had to allocate two million silver tales and one million stones of grain to Lu Yuan every year as protection money. At the same time, the salaries of bureaucrats at all levels, local administrative expenses, and local prefecture and county military salary would also take up to three or four million silver tales per year. Adding up these expenses, the annual expenditure of Ninghai Country amounted to almost six million silver tales, which was already more than half of his total annual income. Even if there was some surplus left, it would be no more than over a million silver tales. Maintaining an army of ten thousand to twenty thousand soldiers would be the limit. Where could he find the military salary for a hundred thousand troops? ¡®Regrettable! Why, if my fiefdom was South Sea Prefecture, would I worry about these? A hundred thousand troops could be raised at any time.¡¯ Su Xuange cast a surreptitious glance at Yan Wangqiu, his eyes flashing with jealousy. The wealth of Nanhai Country, in terms of fiscal revenue and the number of registered households, was almost twice that of Ninghai Country. It is such a waste to bestow such a rich territory to an old man on the verge of death. If it were in his hands, he would have fortified his army, stockpiled food and fodder, and prepared for the struggle for hegemony. How hateful, how hateful! Heaven is blind! Su Xuange¡¯s heart was filled with resentment at this moment. This was not only aimed at Yan Wangqiu, who was occupying a valuable piece of land and hoarding heavenly resources. But because he had been compromising with the court and Lu Yuan, he was forced to follow suit and pay as well, causing the already meager bottom line to be further consumed. These grievances combined have made Su Xuange¡¯s animosity towards Yan Wangqiu extremely deep. In just half a year, two good friends, who were once friendly, now one of them was already secretly resenting the other. This could not help but make people sigh. Power really drove people crazy. This was just the rule of one prefecture. Su Xuange had already become like this. If the territory was larger, it would be hard to imagine what this person would become. However, the thoughts of the Monarch of Ninghai were always kept deep in his heart, never revealing them, and outsiders naturally did not know this. Yan Wangqiu, on the other hand, noticing that Su Xuange seemed to be staring at him, looked over with some puzzlement. The latter quickly showed a smile, nodded kindly, as always. Seeing this, perhaps it was his old age, Yan Wangqiu only thought that the other side was happy because of Lu Yuan¡¯s achievements and did not think much of it. He just looked at it, smiled, and nodded back, then turned his gaze to Bai Mengyang. At this moment, Wuan Marquis, seemingly unaware of the subtle atmosphere in the tent, said resolutely, ¡°With our army surrounding Xiangyang, Zhou people¡¯s retreat is cut off. When the news of our victory reaches them, the bandits will surely panic. To prevent the bandits from fleeing and attacking Changsha King in a pincer movement, I have decided that from today onwards, our army will relentlessly attack the Zhou Peoples¡¯ camp. This battle must not let Zhou people escape. I want to keep all eighty thousand of them in Dangyang.¡± Bai Mengyang looked around at everyone, speaking decisively. As it was a proposal for a strong attack under such favorable conditions, all present in the tent naturally agreed and nodded their approval. After seeing the hope of a swift end to the war, Yan Wangqiu said, ¡°I will soon reorganize the army and send troops to attack the city in order to assist Changsha King.¡± Although in recent days, there have been continuous strong attacks, the one hundred thousand civilians that Nanhai Country brought along have already lost more than thirty thousand in the battle. But for victory, Yan Wangqiu felt that his own troops could endure a bit longer and make sacrifices. Even he, who didn¡¯t want to come to a realization, was now watched by everyone in the camp. Su Xuange had no choice but to grit his teeth and say, ¡°I will also count the soldiers and lead the troops to attack the city personally.¡± The foundation of Ninghai Country was far weaker than that of Nanhai Country. Thus, Yan Wangqiu could disregard the lives of his people and force those civilians to die. But Su Xuange was not so generous. To reduce some losses, he had to lead the troops personally at this moment. With an Inborn Grandmaster at the helm, perhaps fewer people would die, and more vitality would be retained. ¡°Excellent! With the assistance of the two great kings, the Zhou people will have nowhere to escape!¡± Bai Mengyang looked at their morale and was very pleased. He praised the two monarchs generously. With this, the three sides in the main camp of Dangyang reached a consensus. On the following day, under the initiative of Yan Wangqiu, the troops of Nanhai Ninghai quickly reorganized fifty thousand soldiers. Then, under the supervision of the two monarchs, these troops, with gritted teeth, once again stormed the heavily guarded Dangyang City Camp, stepping onto the road of death. A bloody and brutal offensive and defensive battle began once more. At the same time, a carefully selected messenger left the United Army main camp, heading north. He would pass through Jingmen Prefecture and head to the northern Xiangyang Prefecture to deliver Bai Mengyang¡¯s Military Order to Lu Yuan, who was besieging a city. At the same time, when the United Army on this side was launching a large-scale operation again. Inside Dangyang City, a gloomy atmosphere slowly spread among the Zhou people. ¡°Report, Grand General! The Yue people have dispatched a large army and have launched a strong attack outside the city again.¡± The messenger from the city hurriedly entered and saw the two great generals in the Government Office, promptly reporting the urgent military situation outside. However, after saying that, the messenger waited left and right, but no orders came from the two great generals. Chapter 441 - Chapter 441: Chapter 226: Different Paths to the End_3 Chapter 441: Chapter 226: Different Paths to the End_3 Translator: 549690339 The situation was urgent, and he couldn¡¯t help but carefully raise his head, glancing at the two Generals ahead. But he saw that their faces had lost their usual dignity and determination, replaced by an ugly, somber expression. Seeing this, the messenger couldn¡¯t help but feel puzzled. The Yue people outside the city were pressing their attack, but in the previous days, they had experienced this as well and never saw the two Generals in such a state. As he thought about this, the two Generals ahead seemed to notice his gaze. The Left Pillar State Grand General Li Yanjing turned his head and coldly waved his hand, saying: ¡°Alright. I already know the situation. As usual, command the city to strengthen its defense. Unless the Yue people¡¯s Inborn Grandmaster makes a move, there is no need to report to us anymore.¡± Realizing his private actions had been discovered, the messenger felt a chill in his heart. But upon hearing the order, he immediately nodded: ¡°Yes, I will go and relay the command.¡± With that, the man hurried away. After he left, only Li Yanjing and the other Grand General, Zhang Chanyi, remained in the room. After a long silence¡­ Zhang Chanyi finally said: ¡°The Yue people have launched a fierce attack.¡± Li Yanjing¡¯s expression remained cold, but his tone was full of resentment: ¡°They launched a surprise attack on Guining and Fangling, and now they are besieging Xiangyang City, about to capture the Prefecture. Naturally, they won¡¯t let us go.¡± Zhang Chanyi said with some pain: ¡°No one could have expected that Gui Lianyun would die at the hands of the Yue people. With his death, Xiangyang Prefecture¡¯s western defenses have been left wide open, allowing the Yue army to march in and put us in this difficult situation.¡± Indeed. Originally, a single Inborn Grandmaster leading 50,000 troops to defend a city should have been unassailable. But the result was beyond everyone¡¯s expectation. Gui Lianyun not only failed to defend Guining City, but also lost his own life there. With his death, not only was communication between Xiangyang Prefecture and Xichuan Prefecture severed, but also a huge gap appeared in Xiangyang Prefecture¡¯s defenses. Now, the Yue army is making its way deep into our territory, laying siege to Xiangyang and cutting off the supply line for our front-line army at Dangyang. At this moment, even the slightest mistake could result in the loss of troops, land, and a complete collapse. Under such immense pressure, it was no wonder that Zhang Chanyi and Li Yanjing were feeling distressed. ¡°No one is to blame for Gui Lianyun¡¯s death. Who would have thought that the Yue people would suddenly have four more Inborn Grandmasters and 200,000 more soldiers this time? Moreover, after receiving this support, they dispatched three Grandmasters and 100,000 elite troops to launch a surprise attack on Guining City. It¡¯s only normal that Gui Lianyun couldn¡¯t hold Guining City against such an enemy.¡± Upon saying this, Li Yanjing paused, and then continued with a hint of disbelief and trembling in his voice: ¡°What I didn¡¯t expect was that even though Gui Lianyun faced three Inborn Grandmasters, with his strength, he should have been able to escape unscathed if he couldn¡¯t win.¡± However, this time he couldn¡¯t even escape, and was directly killed in front of the entire army. Could the person who took action be the Yue Country¡¯s Grand General?¡± Due to the difficulty in transmitting information, the front-line forces at Dangyang had also received news of Gui Lianyun¡¯s battle. But all they knew was that he had fought with three Inborn Grandmasters before dying in the northern part of the city, as told by the fugitive soldiers who had escaped. But how exactly did he die, and what were the details of the battle? They still didn¡¯t know. So at this moment, Li Yanjing could only make guesses based on his own knowledge and understanding. It was the Grand General of Yue Country who had taken the action. Only a Second Realm Inborn expert, aided by two Inborn Grandmasters, could kill an Inborn Grandmaster and not allow him to escape, decapitating him in front of an entire army. As for Yue Country¡¯s known Second Realm Inborn experts, there were only two. One was Grand General Shen Qiu, and the other was Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang. But Bai Mengyang had been on the front lines all along, and even had a skirmish with them a few days ago. They knew he couldn¡¯t have gone to attack Gui Lianyun. So the only explanation left was Shen Qiu. What about Lu Yuan? Don¡¯t be kidding. A guy who had only broken through Innate a little over a year ago, you say he could kill a man who had been Inborn for more than ten years among tens of thousands of soldiers? Are you crazy, or am I crazy? From beginning to end, the possibility that Lu Yuan killed Gui Lianyun never crossed the minds of Zhou People. Even now, when news from Xiangyang clearly stated that the leading Yue generals laying siege to the city were King of Changsha Lu Yuan and Martial Proclamation Marquis Yang Jing. ¡°Regardless of whether it was Shen Qiu or not, our current priority is to quickly withdraw our troops and lead them back to Xiangyang City.¡± Zhang Chanyi couldn¡¯t figure out how Gui Lianyun died either, but it had already happened, and there was no use lamenting it. What needed to be done now was to find a way to remedy the situation. Therefore, at this time he said: ¡°At present, there are only 50,000 defenders in Xiangyang City, of which fewer than 10,000 are real soldiers, and the rest are civilian workers. If it weren¡¯t for the timely arrival of the East Pillar State Grand General, the city would have fallen long ago. But even so, facing the powerful Yue army, Xiangyang City remains in danger. Moreover, our reinforcements have been cut off now, and we must return to Xiangyang as soon as possible to reestablish contact. I¡¯m afraid that if we don¡¯t, the front-line army here will lose heart and be unable to continue the fight.¡± Withdrawing the troops has become the most pressing matter now.¡± Li Yanjing, who was well aware of the current situation, furrowed his brows and said: ¡°We want to withdraw, but the Yue people won¡¯t let us go. That¡¯s why they are fiercely attacking our camp now. It¡¯s impossible for us to retreat with tens of thousands of front-line troops. In the end, we may have to sacrifice some of them, cut off our tail to survive, and seek a slim chance of survival.¡± Zhang Chanyi said firmly: ¡°At this moment, making some sacrifices is better than losing everything. You go and arrange who stays behind to cover our retreat, who serves as bait, and who to take with us. Make sure everything is properly arranged.¡± p>Upon saying this, Zhang Chanyi stared at Li Yanjing and said word by word: ¡°There¡¯s not much time left, get everything ready within the next two days. Be discreet and don¡¯t let the news leak out in the army.¡± Hearing this, Li Yanjing¡¯s eyes flashed with pain, but he nodded: ¡°I understand, I¡¯ll go arrange it right away.¡± Zhang Chanyi nodded, then took a deep breath and closed his eyes: ¡°Go on.¡± Li Yanjing got up, and then walked out of the room with heavy steps. Under the rising morning sun, the golden light should have been full of vitality, but the silhouette of the Left Pillar State Grand General seemed particularly desolate. Chapter 442 - Chapter 442: Chapter 227: Slaying the Inborn Again Chapter 442: Chapter 227: Slaying the Inborn Again Translator: 549690339 On the 16th day of the twelfth month of Hongdao¡¯s seventh year, the United Army launched a massive attack with King of Ninghai Su Xuange leading the charge, attacking Dangyang City with 50,000 troops. In the meantime, they tried to undermine the morale of the Zhou People¡¯s army by spreading rumors that Xiangyang City had fallen to the defenders. However, these rumors were not believed by the Zhou People, and their soldiers continued to stand strong. After a fierce battle, the Zhou People lost more than 3,000 soldiers, while the attacking United Army lost over 10,000. During this time, Su Xuange had a fierce battle with Zhang Chanyi, but ultimately lost and retreated. The next day, the United Army again launched an offensive with 50,000 troops, this time led by Yan Wangqiu, who still aimed to seize Dangyang City. By this point, the rumors of Xiangyang City being surrounded had gradually spread overnight, although there were still very few people who believed them. Both sides engaged in another fierce battle, with the United Army still losing over 10,000 soldiers, while the Zhou People lost 4,000. During this time, Yan Wangqiu fought against Li Yanjing, who was defeated and then forced to retreat, only to have Zhang Chanyi step in once more, eventually forcing Yan Wangqiu back. On the third day, the United Army still marched on with 50,000 troops, fiercely attacking Danyang City. By this time, some fugitive soldiers from the Xiangyang front had already made it to Dangyang City, bringing news that Xiangyang was surrounded and that their path had been lost. Upon hearing this terrible news, the morale of the Zhou People¡¯s army in Dangyangt¡¯s main camp was greatly shaken, and many soldiers panicked, already showing signs of imminent defeat. As a result, during that day¡¯s offensive and defensive battle, the Zhou People began to shrink back and avoid battle, no longer as spirited and daring as the previous two days. After a day of siege, the United Army still lost over 10,000 soldiers, but the Zhou People¡¯s losses had already exceeded 6,000. This battle was personally commanded by Bai Mengyang. On the battlefield, the Wuan Marquis crossed swords with Zhang Chanyi and inflicted heavy damage to him on the spot. But in the end, it was Li Yanjing¡¯s desperate rescue that barely fended off Bai Mengyang. Nevertheless, the Commander was heavily injured, and after more than half a month of continuous fighting, the Zhou army had lost more than 30,000 soldiers. At this point, there were less than 50,000 troops left in the entire Dangyang camp. Moreover, with the rear already lost and people panicking, collapse seemed not far away. So that night, Zhang Chanyi and Li Yanjing met once again. Zhang Chanyi had an unusual flush on his face at this time. During the daytime battle, he had crossed swords with Bai Mengyang, who, as a Military God comparable to the second realm of Innate Fighters, only took a brief moment to severely injure the former Pillar State¡¯s Grand General of Zhou People. The gap between the first and second realms of Innate was indeed quite large. However, Zhang Chanyi could no longer afford to nurse his wounds at this point. Looking at Li Yanjing, he asked, ¡°Are the troops and horses ready?¡± Li Yanjing looked at Zhang Chanyi worriedly, then nodded: ¡°A total of 30,000 elite soldiers have been arranged, armored, and ready to withdraw at any time.¡± Hearing this, Zhang Chanyi nodded, and then asked, ¡°Those Yue people will not find out, will they?¡± Li Yanjing replied, ¡°Apart from the troops and horses withdrawing tonight, I have left behind more than 17,000 people arranged at various outposts and some outside camp personnel who have not been mobilized. With these people in place, it should be enough to deceive the Yue people. Even if they attack the city again tomorrow, we can hold on for a while before they realize what¡¯s going on.¡± Zhang Chanyi breathed a sigh of relief and immediately said, ¡°Since there is no problem, then immediately issue orders to each unit to withdraw as previously planned.¡± ¡°Alright.¡± Li Yanjing nodded and immediately turned to carry out the arrangements, but his heart was filled with a sense of sadness. To facilitate their withdrawal, the two of them had to abandon a large number of troops stationed at the periphery. With these smokescreens and bait in place, and with the darkness of midnight as cover, if they still couldn¡¯t conceal their withdrawal, then they would have commanded their troops in vain all these years. It was just a pity that they had to leave behind those soldiers. There were more than 17,000 of them, weren¡¯t there? When you count the more than 10,000 wounded soldiers left in the camp, the number even approached 30,000. These were all elite soldiers skilled in battle, but now they were being abandoned, which was a great loss to the nation. However, there was no choice. In order to withdraw from this desperate situation and to support the rear, to save Xiangyang City, the sacrifices they were making now were inevitable. Hopefully they could preserve these last 30,000 elite soldiers. With a heavy heart, Li Yanjing went on to arrange the withdrawal. That night, in complete silence, under the cover of darkness, 30,000 Zhou troops quietly withdrew from Dangyang City, heading north. For this withdrawal, they had indeed made extensive preparations. Not only did they select the best soldiers to act as scouts, spreading in all directions and specifically killing the nearby Yue people¡¯s spies, but also Li Yanjing and Zhang Chanyi personally used their Divine Senses to search out the hidden Yue people¡¯s informants. Under such actions, they successfully created a blind area and led their troops to retreat. By the time the United Army¡¯s main camp realized that something was wrong and sent scouts to investigate, the Zhou troops had already advanced more than ten miles away. Upon hearing the news that the Zhou People had fled, Bai Mengyang, who had been keeping a close watch on their movements, immediately convened a meeting of the generals. ¡°Gentlemen, the Zhou People have fled. At this moment, Dangyang City¡¯s defense is weak. We can attack quickly.¡± After everyone had arrived, Bai Mengyang announced the news, then turned to Su Xuange and said, ¡°King of Ninghai, gather your troops immediately and lead all forces to attack Dangyang City. Now that only a few tempting remnants of the Zhou People¡¯s army are left inside the city, there aren¡¯t many people left. Can we take it over tonight?¡± When Su Xuange heard the military order, his eyes shifted as he stepped forward and responded, ¡°Wuan Marquis, don¡¯t worry. If there are only remnants in the city, I will break through tonight.¡± While speaking, Su Xuange was indeed thinking to himself. ¡®If there are not many Zhou people left in the city, and if we can conquer it, capturing the remaining soldiers and wounded people inside, and then bring them all back to our country. Won¡¯t the elite soldiers I¡¯ve been worrying about be handed to me on a silver platter?¡¯ Chapter 443 - Chapter 443: Chapter 227: Slaying Inborn Again_2 Chapter 443: Chapter 227: Slaying Inborn Again_2 Translator: 549690339 Yes, indeed, at this moment, like Lu Yuan, King Ninghai had set his sights on attacking the Zhou people¡¯s soldiers. After all, the Zhou people in the city, even though they were just bait, should amount to 20,000 or so, right? Considering those wounded soldiers who couldn¡¯t move, their numbers would be even greater. Su Xuange didn¡¯t have high demands; as long as he could capture more than 10,000 Zhou prisoners, and then combine them with the local soldiers from his homeland¡¯s prefectures and counties, he would be able to reorganize an elite force of 20,000 soldiers. With this force as a foundation, a slight expansion could easily result in an elite force of 50,000 people. As long as they had 50,000 soldiers and his own strength, Ninghai country could barely protect itself. As for the original plan of having 100,000 elite soldiers to conquer the world, it was just a grand vision for the future. For now, the main concern was to solve the issue of survival before considering the future. Seeing Su Xuange accept the mission, Bai Mengyang continued, ¡°The Zhou people escaped overnight, and their main force is no longer in the city. This army must not be allowed to escape back to Xiangyang. Otherwise, Xiangyang¡¯s high walls and deep pools, along with a heavy garrison, would be difficult to assail even with all our strength.¡± Therefore, I will lead the elite forces in pursuit through the night.¡± At this point, Bai Mengyang looked at Yan Wangqiu and said, ¡°King Nanhai, I will take my 30,000 troops ahead to chase the Zhou people. However, to be safe, King Nanhai, please mobilize your forces as well and follow me a little later. In the end, we will rendezvous under the walls of Xiangyang City with King Changsha, and together we will break the city.¡± Compared to Bai Mengyang¡¯s elite court soldiers, Yan Wangqiu¡¯s ordinary civilian workers, although they had undergone bloody battles over the past half month and had gained a bit of ferociousness, were still inadequate. Without training, without understanding the team, and even lacking physical fitness, they wouldn¡¯t be able to keep up. Such an army couldn¡¯t be expected to chase at night, so this responsibility could only be placed on Bai Mengyang¡¯s 30,000 elite court soldiers. As for Yan Wangqiu¡¯s troops, they could only march slowly and follow from behind. Yan Wangqiu didn¡¯t have as many thoughts as Su Xuange. When he saw the Zhou people fleeing, the opportunity to defeat the enemy had come, and he happily replied: ¡°Wuan Marquis, rest assured, this king will gather his troops immediately and set off soon.¡± Bai Mengyang nodded slightly, and then looked at the excited people in the tent. He said loudly, ¡°Gentlemen, this time the Zhou people are defeated, and Xiangyang is shaken. This is a rare opportunity in a hundred years. Whether we, the Nan people, can break Xiangyang, and whether we can hit the northern people so they dare not look south, depends on this encounter. If Xiangyang is defeated and the city is taken, the Zhou people will lose more than 200,000 soldiers, a Pillar State general will die, and their southern defensive line will be wide open. The Zhou territories Nanyang and Hanzhong will be threatened by our forces, allowing us to take what we please. At that time, don¡¯t even mention recovering Xichuan; it wouldn¡¯t be impossible for the Zhou people to lose another territory or two. With the Zhou people losing soldiers and territory in succession, they will suffer heavy losses and no longer have the strength to invade the south. Our threats to the north will also be resolved with ease. This matter concerns our survival, and it is a matter of vital importance for a hundred years. Hence, I hope you all will have the courage to fight, and together we will destroy the Zhou people. For the sake of our future generations, we will achieve a hundred years of peace.¡± Upon hearing this, the people in the tent were all stirred with enthusiasm, and they said with emotion, ¡°We are willing to follow the general, destroy the Zhou people, and achieve a hundred years of peace for our future generations. Bai Mengyang laughed loudly, ¡°That¡¯s good. In that case, proceed with the military orders.¡± At this point, the military conference concluded. Afterward, Su Xuange returned to his own barracks, summoning the remaining 50,000 soldiers in the camp, waking them all up, and once again led the troops to attack the city. Yan Wangqiu was also gathering his troops, but after fighting for more than half a month, he had fewer soldiers left compared to Su Xuange, only about 40,000. Moreover, these people had low morale and were weary of war. They were becoming unstable. Fortunately, at this moment, the military order was relayed, announcing that the Zhou people had fled and that they were going to pursue them. This news finally cheered the soldiers, who started rejoicing. The Zhou people had already fled. Didn¡¯t that mean they wouldn¡¯t have to risk attacking the city anymore and wouldn¡¯t have to worry about dying in a cruel fight? Instead, the Zhou people had lost their courage, so they could give a knockout blow, chase them, and take advantage of the situation to make gains along the way. Yes, that¡¯s what it was, making gains. Don¡¯t expect soldiers in those days to have lofty ideals. Regular soldiers who have undergone extensive training, have military discipline, and receive their salaries on time can usually behave well and avoid harming civilians as long as military law is enforced strictly. But those forcibly conscripted civilian workers didn¡¯t receive any salary, had to risk their lives in dangerous battles, and expected to loot after winning a battle. Not letting them do so would be truly inhumane. Believe it or not, even if you¡¯re an inborn king, if you push them too hard, they might just stand up and bite you. So at this time, the many soldiers of Nanhai Country were already starting to calculate in their minds how much money and goods they could seize and how many women they could sleep with as they passed through towns and villages while pursuing the enemy. Yes, the wishes of these ordinary soldiers were just that simple and straightforward. Meanwhile, on the side of the court forces, who had already begun mobilizing the troops before the military conference, 30,000 soldiers had been assembled by the end of the conference. Therefore, Wuan Marquis led the troops in person, tracing the Zhou people¡¯s withdrawal and chasing them northward all the way. Chapter 444 - Chapter 444: Chapter 227: Slaying the Inborn Again_3 Chapter 444: Chapter 227: Slaying the Inborn Again_3 Translator: 549690339 After such a wild charge through the night, the vanguard cavalry of the main army chased up to a group of Zhou soldiers about seventy miles away. There¡¯s nothing more to say. Bai Mengyang personally led the charge and broke a military force of more than a thousand men in the first encounter. Then, after learning the location of other Zhou soldiers from the captives, he continued to lead the troops forward. Over thirty miles, they chased and broke five groups of Zhou soldiers, crushing and capturing more than five thousand men. Finally, in the northernmost Changlin County of Jingmen Prefecture, they caught up with Zhang Chanyi who was temporarily stationed there, gathering local soldiers. A great battle ensued between the two sides, Zhang Chanyi was still defeated, severely injured and fled by Bai Mengyang. At last, clinging to a shred of life, he managed to escape with thousands of remnants. However, his tens of thousands of troops were left behind in Changlin County. Those not scattered in defeat were either killed or captured. At this time, after a two hundred mile chase, although Bai Mengyang was still vigorous, his soldiers, after a day and a night of hard chase, were immensely exhausted. Therefore, even though he was reluctant, Bai Mengyang had to stop the chase. He sent men to search for scattered Zhou people and settled in Changlin County to rest and wait for the main force of Yan Wanqiu. In this relentless chase, he defeated and captured nearly 20,000 Zhou people, and even won two counties on the way; the gain was already immense. Those Zhou people who escaped wouldn¡¯t be able to cause much trouble, even if there were tens of thousands of them left. ¡°Besides, I still have contingencies up my sleeve.¡± Bai Mengyang looked towards the north, which was the direction of Xiangyang City. He gazed at the scorching noon sun and murmured to himself, ¡°The messenger should have reached the King of Changsha a few days ago. Now, let¡¯s see what surprises this startling junior can bring me.¡± Standing on the wall of Changlin County, the Marquis Wuan had expectation and worry in his heart. Two hundred miles south of Xiangyang City, was Shiliang Mountain. Lu Yuan stood in the mountain forest, watching more than a hundred Zhou soldiers in disarray escaping from the official road below, he said, ¡°This should be the third batch of Zhou people, shouldn¡¯t it?¡± The officer beside him replied, ¡°Yes, Your Majesty, this is the third batch.¡± Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°With so many Zhou deserters escaping from the direction of Danyang, it seems that Zhou forces have been defeated in the battlefield of Danyang. The Wuan Marquis was not lying when he sent a message to me earlier to keep an eye on this place.¡± The officer said, ¡°The Zhou people should have been defeated. However, there have been only about a hundred deserters in each of the three waves. We don¡¯t know whether we can expect any big fish while waiting here.¡± ¡°It would be a waste if we let these small fish slip by before catching any big fish.¡± After hearing this, Lu Yuan laughed and said, ¡°No problem. I have already set up three ambushes on the water and land routes a hundred miles behind Shiliang Mountain.¡± ¡°Those Zhou soldiers who pass here will face several ambushes along the way. They won¡¯t be able to escape.¡± ¡°Our main force is here to ambush the big fish. We can¡¯t reveal our position now.¡± A few days ago, Lu Yuan received a letter from Bai Mengyang saying that the coalition would launch a fierce attack in the near future to break Dangyang City in one fell swoop. He was to set up defenses here to intercept Zhou deserters. After receiving the letter, Lu Yuan immediately ordered Yang Jing to remain outside Xiangyang City with the troops, continuing to besiege the city. He personally led ten thousand combat troops southward to Shiliang Mountain to set up an ambush. After waiting for four to five days, Zhou deserters finally appeared. However, the previous groups had only been around a hundred deserters. They were too few, certainly not worth him personally leading the main force of five thousand near Shiliang Mountain to make a move. These deserters will be taken care of by the people lying in ambush behind. What Lu Yuan was really eyeing was the main force of the Zhou. ¡®If we don¡¯t take this great opportunity and capture tens of thousands of Zhou soldiers, then it would be a wasted journey.¡¯ With these thoughts in his mind, he soon saw a large amount of dust rising in the distance, and a long dragon-like shape appeared on the official road in front, heading towards them. ¡°Order to be relayed, the big fish has arrived, prepare for it!¡± Seeing this, Lu Yuan abruptly rose to his feet and immediately gave the command. In an instant, the nearby mountains on both sides were lined with over five thousand ambush soldiers, readying their bows and arrows, lifting their boulders and logs, ready to act at any moment. In the midst of the large army, Zhang Chanyi sat on a flatbed horse cart, his face as white as a sheet. Two days ago, he had battled once again with Bai Mengyang. Already heavily injured, he was naturally no match for the Wuan Marquis in their hand-to-hand combat. He lasted but a moment before he coughed up blood and escaped. This round of injury made his body¡¯s wounds increasingly severe. At present, several meridians in his body have broken, and his right arm has been shattered, rendering it unusable. His true pneuma is blocked due to the obstructed meridians, with only about one or two-tenths of it accessible. Under these all these injuries, the former Pillar State Grand General, Inborn Grandmaster, it can be said that he has not even a tenth of his original strength left, making him weak to the extreme and in unimaginable misery. But even in such a weakened state, Zhang Chanyi had no choice but to rally his remaining energy and, after fleeing Changlin County, managed to pull together some local garrison troops in a few counties in the southern part of Xiangyang Prefecture. In the end, along with the remnants of the troops that had managed to escape with him, he was able to organize nearly ten thousand soldiers. Now, Zhang Chanyi is leading these hard-fought retainers intending to retreat back to Xiangyang City, to help hold this major southern city. ¡°Ah, after this battle, our army has lost over a hundred thousand soldiers, including a Pillar State Grand General. The nation¡¯s setback is so severe that it will take at least a decade to recover its vitality.¡± Sitting in the cart, Zhang Chanyi coughs while using his remaining left hand to cover his mouth, hiding the traces of blood, while worrying about national affairs. However, just at that moment, a loud explosion rang out all around him. Between the mountains on both sides came the simultaneous sounds of golden drums, with wood and stones tumbling around, and arrows flying. Cries of attack echoed from the mountain. The Zhou soldiers passing through the valley below the mountain found themselves suddenly beset by the attack. They were already demoralized and frightened, and the sudden ambush caused them to flee in every direction. ¡°Stand your ground, no one is to flee, everyone must stay and fight against the enemy!¡± Upon seeing this, Zhang Chanyi¡¯s eyes nearly burst, he leaped into the air, suspended himself there surrounded by a brilliant white light, and roared in fury towards the heavens. Then, before he could even gather his soldiers to fend off the sudden attack. A red glow came flying from the distance, flames burning brightly, simultaneously a thunderous noise filled the Grand General¡¯s senses. Where the red and white glows collided, the sky was filled with a mesh of flames and white light, accompanied by the sounds of thunder, even yellow dust could be seen looming, all these spectacles disappeared after a few breaths. Then there was Lu Yuan, hovering in mid-air, holding in his hands a somewhat broken corpse, looking at the Zhou soldiers below, he loudly proclaimed: ¡°Your commander is dead, put down your weapons, those who surrender will not be killed!¡± ¡°Put down your weapons, those who surrender will not be killed!¡± Upon witnessing this, the morale of all the soldiers under his command increased tremendously, and they joined in the declaration loudly. The Zhou soldiers, seeing even Zhang Chanyi was dead, no longer had the slightest will to resist, they all dropped their weapons and kneeled, begging for mercy. On the twenty-second day of the twelfth month of the seventh year of Hongdao, King of Changsha Lu Yuan set up an ambush at Shiliang Mountain, cutting down Zhang Chanyi, the former Pillar State Grand General of Zhou. He proceeded to surrender over seven thousand Zhou soldiers, achieving yet another major victory. As of now, following Gui Lianyun¡¯s example, another Inborn Grandmaster of Zhou had met his end at his hands. Twenty-fifth of the same month. After Zhang Chanyi broke through Dangyang, Li Yanjing, who was ordered to proceed to Jingling Prefecture in the southwestern part of Xiangyang Prefecture to gather local soldiers, managed to lead more than twenty thousand soldiers he had gathered along the way, to retreat back to Xiangyang City. On the twenty-seventh day, Bai Mengyang led a massive army of seventy thousand men, meeting with Lu Yuan beneath the walls of Xiangyang City. Chapter 445 - Chapter 445: Chapter 228: Heroes Bow Down Chapter 445: Chapter 228: Heroes Bow Down Translator: 549690339 Outside Xiangyang City, within the main camp. After their victorious reunion, Lu Yuan and Bai Mengyang quickly hosted a celebratory feast. ¡°In this fierce battle, the King of Changsha fought bravely, first breaking through Guining and eliminating Gui Lianyun. Then he moved thousands of miles to conquer Fangling and Xicheng, besieging Xiangyang and shaking the northern border. In this battle, he ambushed the enemy at Shiliang Mountain, killing Zhang Chanyi and eliminating one of Zhou¡¯s top generals. Within a short time, he crushed tens of thousands of enemies, killed two Pillar States, stabilized three territories, and made great accomplishments in the Northern Expedition. His fame will be known throughout the world.¡± At the feast, Bai Mengyang, as the Commander of the United Army, raised his wine cup and praised Lu Yuan in his opening speech. ¡°Indeed! King of Changsha first killed Gui Lianyun and then Zhang Chanyi. After this battle, he has wiped out one-fourth of Zhou¡¯s Eight Pillar States, and his martial prowess will be praised throughout the world.¡± ¡°Killing two Inborn Grandmasters is a feat that only a few heroes in the world can ever achieve. Now, King of Changsha is still in his thirties yet has accomplished so much, making him the first among the young generation in the world.¡± ¡°With King of Changsha on our side, there is nothing to fear against the Zhou People.¡± ¡°Ha ha, I knew it! In this battle, King of Changsha would exceed our expectations and surprise us. Now it is evident.¡± At the banquet, many guests on both sides of the high platform offered their wine and congratulations to Lu Yuan for his achievements in the battle. The flattering words poured out from their mouths as if they were free. It is no wonder that these people flattered him so; Lu Yuan¡¯s achievements in this battle were indeed too dazzling. Other accomplishments, like crushing tens of thousands of enemies and conquering territories, they could dismiss. Many people in the room believed that if they had the same strength, they could accomplish similarly. However, killing two Inborn Grandmasters and besieging Xiangyang City proved that not everyone had the strength to achieve such feats. Take Bai Mengyang, for example. The Wuan Marquis had already achieved the Inborn state for a hundred years and had been fighting in the army for 130 years. In his 130 years of military career, Bai Mengyang had participated in more than a thousand battles and destroyed millions of enemies. The number of captured cities reached hundreds. He even destroyed an entire nation. However, despite such accomplishments, Bai Mengyang had only killed three Inborn Grandmasters. But now, look how young Lu Yuan is? Just over thirty years old, he was already the king of a nation and the founding monarch. Since his debut, he had fought in the Southern Expedition, quelled the rebellions of the Seven Star Sect and the Miao People. Now, he personally led the elite army of 100,000, fought thousands of miles, and conquered the three territories of Xiangyang, killing two Pillar States and besieging Zhou¡¯s southern stronghold, Xiangyang City. Such feats, totaling over a hundred battles, had defeated the 500,000 to 600,000 enemies under Lu Yuan. Moreover, he had killed a full two Inborn Grandmasters. Although the gap between Lu Yuan and Bai Mengyang might seem apparent, the actual difference had significantly narrowed. It had changed from one to ten to one to two. At this point, Lu Yuan just needed to kill another Inborn Grandmaster, destroy a nation, and break through a one-million-strong army. Accomplishing these would not only make him the second Wuan Marquis but even surpass him altogether. After all, it had taken Bai Mengyang 130 years to accomplish his feat. But it took Lu Yuan a mere ten years to achieve his success. Comparing the two, it was clear who was better and who was worse. It was precisely because of this; when the news came that Lu Yuan had ambushed and killed Zhang Chanyi on Shiliang Mountain, even those who did not respect or despise him could not help but feel admiration and fear from the depths of their hearts. This submission was the instinct of the weak before the strong, the instinctive fear of all creatures in the face of terror, which could not be influenced by personal will. When one faced it, it naturally arose. For the most direct evidence. Before the ambush, there had been many people in the camp who were not afraid to look Lu Yuan in the eye. But at this moment, let alone those who were not Inborn. Even the Inborn Grandmasters, except for Bai Mengyang, others like Yang Jing, Yan Wangqiu, and Su Xuange could maintain their composure when facing Lu Yuan. However, during their exchanges, they could not help but feel a little uneasy. Such a posture was precisely as they had faced the Wuan Marquis. That was right. In their hearts, they had already regarded Lu Yuan as someone on par with the Wuan Marquis. From the depths of their hearts, they felt fear and dread, subconsciously placing themselves in a lower position. In their hearts, the Lu Yuan who had killed two Inborn Grandmasters had become a nemesis. The Grandmaster Nemesis. If he could kill the two Pillar States of Zhou, then he could kill them too. It should be noted that both Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange had fought Zhang Chanyi a few days ago. Yet, both of them had been defeated by this former Grand General of the Zhou Pillar State. And now, this same person who had defeated their peers had died at the hands of Lu Yuan. Although everyone knew that Lu Yuan¡¯s luck had played a significant role in killing Zhang Chanyi and Gui Lianyun, Before fighting Lu Yuan, both Grand Generals of Zhou had fought their peers and suffered severe injuries, which significantly depleted their pneuma, energy, and peak strength. As a result, Lu Yuan had taken advantage of their weakened state to kill the two Inborn Grandmasters. Chapter 446 - Chapter 446: Chapter 228: Heroes Bow Down_2 Chapter 446: Chapter 228: Heroes Bow Down_2 Translator: 549690339 But even if the opponent is a weak Grandmaster, whether you can seize the opportunity to kill him requires skill. Otherwise, Gui Lianyun and Zhang Chanyi would not have been injured before their fight with Lu Yuan, which weakened their strength. Why didn¡¯t those people kill the two of them previously? Especially Zhang Chanyi, who was fighting Bai Mengyang before facing Lu Yuan. The Wuan Marquis couldn¡¯t kill him, but he ended up dead by Lu Yuan¡¯s hands. Doesn¡¯t this show skill? Therefore, taking into account the above considerations. Everyone knew that Lu Yuan¡¯s actual strength wasn¡¯t as strong as his combat achievements appeared. But having the power equivalent to seven or eight times his combat accomplishments, and extremely good luck to find loopholes twice consecutively, helps to build his powerful reputation. Having these advantages is enough to instill fear in others. Thus, the flattery at the banquet seemed sincere from everyone present. Lu Yuan, with a hint of a smile on his face, listened to the numerous words of congratulations around him. He was in high spirits. A true man should stand in the clouds, admired by everyone, and be respected by all. Only then would his life not be wasted. Since he crossed over, he trained martial arts and studied every day for several years with an almost insane level of discipline, sometimes even adventuring outside. He endured so much hardship for what? Apart from wanting to protect himself, wasn¡¯t he seeking the glory and splendor in front of him? Now, after struggling for several years, he has become strong, has a kingdom, an army, a populace, a beloved wife, glory, and reputation. It can be said that all of these were earned through his hard work and sweat. Although his golden finger did play a role, his own efforts were equally important. Otherwise, you try letting someone else maintain high-intensity martial arts training, study, and work for over a decade, every day? Anyone who can do this can speak about Lu Yuan¡¯s other achievements. However, Lu Yuan, despite being extremely pleased, remained humble in the face of the praises. He toasted everyone at the banquet with modesty. He poured another cup of wine and gratefully said to Bai Mengyang: ¡°I was able to kill Zhang Chanyi because the Wuan Marquis severely wounded him before I could even fight him. This gave me an advantage. This is only due to the virtue of the Wuan Marquis. The credit for Zhang Chanyi¡¯s death is half due to the Wuan Marquis. I toast to the Wuan Marquis in respect.¡± One shouldn¡¯t be the target of public criticism, nor monopolize all the glory. Because that often means, you¡¯re putting yourself in the spotlight, under everyone¡¯s gaze. Although Lu Yuan is well aware that, given his current status, it¡¯s impossible to avoid attracting attention. But reducing the number of gazes on himself and having people think less of him is always better. Showing modesty and weakness at this time, regardless of whether anyone believes it or not. There are so many people in the world, maybe a few fools could be deceived? As long as he can deceive some, it would be a sure win for Lu Yuan. So, the key to moving forward is steady progress, careful consideration, and caution. The reason Lu Yuan has made it this far without any problems is his steadiness. This is his greatest wealth. The Wuan Marquis gave him a meaningful look after hearing his toast, smiled, raised his cup to drink a mouthful, and then said, ¡°King of Changsha is indeed a dragon among men, who is indifferent to honor or disgrace, modest and polite, advance and retreat with propriety. Since Your Highness said so, this Marquis won¡¯t be polite and will take this credit shamelessly.¡± With a mighty enemy at the gates, although the Zhou People have been majorly defeated, and nearly two hundred thousand of their soldiers have been lost on the front and back. But considering the foundation of Zhou Country, out of six or seven hundred thousand robust soldiers, just losing two hundred thousand soldiers is only one-third of their total strength. Although it¡¯s a major blow to their vitality, it doesn¡¯t mean they have lost the power to fight again. Just like Yue Country, having undergone three rebellions, three national wars, and nearly a decade of upheaval. But even today, aren¡¯t they still able to muster more than a hundred thousand elite soldiers for a Northern Expedition against Zhou Country? Therefore, if Zhou decides to dispatch two hundred thousand soldiers to the south, they can completely achieve this. Regarding the loss of two Inborns. The Zhou people have eight Pillar States in front, back, left, right, east, west, south, and north. The eight Grand Generals of these Pillar States are all Inborn Grandmasters. Even if they lost Zhang Chanyi and Gui Lianyun, they still have six Inborn Grandmasters left. If Li Xiong is included, they still have seven. Therefore, if necessary, Zhou could dispatch two or three Inborn Grandmasters to support the front line of the battlefield. With Zhou Country¡¯s foundation, they can completely summon a massive army and wage another war with the United Army. Having such a formidable enemy in front, the alliance, no matter how many contradictions they have, cannot erupt. They must temporarily stabilize and continue to keep a united front. Thus, even though Bai Mengyang noticed Lu Yuan¡¯s intention of downplaying his achievements, he didn¡¯t say much. Instead, he cooperated and played along. The others present immediately understood the stance of the two leaders in the alliance, regardless of what they were thinking, they all played along with the act. What followed was a scene where Lu Yuan praised Bai Mengyang, Bai Mengyang praised Yan Wangqiu, Yan Wangqiu praised Su Xuange, Su Xuange praised Yang Jing, and Yang Jing praised Lu Yuan in return. Chapter 447 - Chapter 447: Chapter 228: Heroes Bow Down_3 Chapter 447: Chapter 228: Heroes Bow Down_3 Translator: 549690339 With such flattery going back and forth, the atmosphere instantly became more harmonious and intense. Even the awe of the people towards Lu Yuan gradually diminished in this round of compliments and toasts. At least, the attitude of Yan Wangqiu and others slowly returned to their usual rapport with Lu Yuan. There was no longer the previous estrangement. Well, at least on the surface. As the internal unity gradually stabilized, Lu Yuan took the opportunity to toast and began to inquire about Bai Mengyang¡¯s future strategy: ¡°Wuan Marquis, now that the enemy in Dangyang has been broken, the Zhou People in Xiangyang have lost more than 100,000 soldiers and two Pillar States. Now we have gathered hundreds of thousands of troops under Xiangyang City. What should be the next step? I wonder if the Marquis of Wu¡¯an has any plans?¡± Upon hearing this, everyone put down their wine glasses and curiously looked over. Nowadays, Xiangyang City is not easy to fight. First of all, Xiangyang City is located on the Han River, and both the east and north of the city are close to the big river, with piers and water gates connecting the river. So even if they were at the foot of the city, they could only blockade the south and west at most, without completely cutting off Xiangyang¡¯s contact with the outside world. The defenders in the city, after gathering for these days, according to reliable information, there are 50,000 civilian workers, 30,000 Zhou soldiers who fled from the front line, and 20,000 county soldiers gathered from Xiangyang and Nanyang prefectures. A total of 100,000 soldiers. In addition, Li Yanjing, and Qi Yuanyi, the Grand General of the Eastern Pillar State of Zhou People who rushed from Nanyang Prefecture, are also guarded by two Inborn Grandmasters. Moreover, more reinforcements have begun to respond after Zhou received the news of the big defeat on the Danyang front line and is urgently withdrawing a large number of troops to reinforce the front line. Facing this defensive force and the endless support, although their allied forces from the four countries also have 130,000 troops outside Xiangyang City. When the subsequent troops from Ninghai Country arrive, they may be able to increase to 170,000 to 180,000. And five Inborn Grandmasters are with them. Overall, it is indeed much stronger than Xiangyang City. However, even so, if they want to break Xiangyang City in a short time, with the defensive power of this city, even if they were personally led by these Inborn Grandmasters, it wouldn¡¯t be easy. After all, even if the Inborn Grandmasters have the martial arts external body, they can slaughter low-level soldiers like cutting grass. But the use of martial arts external body is also very consuming, and one time can¡¯t last long, at most killing 4,000 to 5,000 people is the limit. Once the true pneuma is exhausted, it takes a day to recover, It would take them at least five or six days to kill the 100,000 Zhou defenders, even if the five Inborn Grandmasters went all out. Not to mention, in reality, things will not go so smoothly. Those Zhou People will not stand idly by and let them kill at will. They will fight back and resist. Top experts cooperating with the army can also hurt the Inborn Grandmasters if they find opportunities. Not to mention, with Li Yanjing and Qi Yuanyi in the city, it is not very realistic for Lu Yuan and his companions to slaughter Zhou soldiers on a large scale. Moreover, with the constant support from outside the city, the strength of the Zhou people inside the city can be replenished at any time. In other words, it is not impossible for their united army to break Xiangyang City, but the success rate is low, as pitiful as two or three percent, or even one or two percent. If they cannot break Xiangyang City, when the Zhou people react, they will be able to deploy one or two more Inborn Grandmasters in a mere ten days. And after a month, they may be able to deploy another 100,000 troops to help. By that time, it would no longer be about breaking Xiangyang City, but how to resist these Zhou people¡¯s troops. So despite the current great victory, if they cannot further expand their current advantage, the fruits of victory they have eaten now will still have to be slowly vomited out later. In that case, things would return to their original starting point. Both sides continued to confront each other along the line from Xiangyang to Tianmen Prefecture, constantly consuming each other¡¯s resources and comparing their respective depths. This led to a sustained loss of blood for both. This situation was undesirable for not only the court, but also Changsha, Ninghai and Southsea- the three nations. Therefore, how to break this deadlock had become a matter of urgency. And to do this, the Marquis of Wu¡¯an in front of him would be required to come up with a strategic layout. All eyes turned towards Bai Mengyang, looking to the commander of the united army, hoping that he could once again devise a plan, as he did previously with the surprise attack on Guining Prefecture, that could lead everyone to victory. Facing everyone¡¯s expectant and worried gazes, Bai Mengyang put down his wine cup and looked around, smiling, ¡°I know what you are all thinking. Indeed, Xiangyang City has high walls and deep moats, a large garrison of soldiers, and can continuously receive external assistance through river connections. Breaking the city would be extremely difficult. So initially, I didn¡¯t plan on launching a strong attack on the city or even attacking the city at all. In the art of war, attacking the heart is of the highest priority, while attacking cities is a secondary priority. Previously, I had Changsha Wang launch a surprise attack on Xiangyang City to shake the morale of Zhou¡¯s army in Dangyang, making them fearful and unwilling to fight. As a result, we achieved a great victory in Dangyang. Now, in using my troops, I naturally can¡¯t just focus on attacking the city; I must focus on attacking their hearts.¡± With that said, Bai Mengyang asked someone to bring a map of Yue and Zhou countries. He pointed to the mountains and rivers marked on the map, and his finger eventually landed on the location of Hanzhong Prefecture in Zhou Country, saying, ¡°Please look here, everyone. This is Hanzhong Prefecture, which, like Xiangyang Prefecture, is also a major southwestern stronghold for Zhou Country. Initially, Zhou Country stationed 50,000 soldiers in this prefecture, but after the rebellion of the Qiang bandits, they increased this number to 100,000 troops. Now, these 100,000 troops have arrived in Wushan Prefecture in my Xichuan Prefecture, confronting and engaging Wucheng Marquis. Therefore, there are no Zhou soldiers left to guard Hanzhong Prefecture, and only about 10,000 local county soldiers remain. So, I plan to dispatch an army to directly strike Hanzhong Prefecture, occupy several of its southern prefectures, and then proceed south through the mountainous roads to infiltrate the Xichuan Prefecture¡¯s hinterland. Currently, both Zhou people and Xi Shu bandits have secretly gathered in Wushan Prefecture of Xichuan Prefecture, and there is no one guarding their rear. Zhou people and Xi Shu bandits have been tyrannical, and they have been persecuting the people of Xichuan for years. However, Xichuan has enjoyed imperial favor for a long time and always had a natural inclination towards the court. So, as long as there is a single imperial army marching under the court¡¯s banner into Xichuan Prefecture, it will surely trigger a massive response from the long-oppressed local people who have been loyal to the court. This imperial army doesn¡¯t need many troops, just 20,000 or 30,000 soldiers would suffice. The key is to serve as a banner in rallying support. In a matter of ten days, the territory of Xichuan would be completely under our control. Afterward, the court¡¯s army will gather with the local righteous forces, and we can assemble 100,000 soldiers who will march towards Wushan Prefecture. In this way, both the Zhou and Shu forces in Wushan Prefecture will be attacked from front and rear, and they will be unable to hold on for long. Once these bandits are defeated, the court can reclaim Xichuan Prefecture, and then either gather a large army to fight Zhou forces in Xiangyang Prefecture or start a new campaign to attack Hanzhong Prefecture from Xichuan territory, making Zhou people feel fearful and exhausted. The strategic initiative would be in our hands. Whether to fight or to negotiate peace will no longer be up to the Zhou people, but will be determined by us.¡± Bai Mengyang looked at everyone and elaborated on his next strategic move. Just like last time, his gaze fell upon Lu Yuan. The others also looked at him the same way. Clearly, In the face of such a task that required crossing mountains and ridges, and even traversing thousands of miles, ordinary people would be unable to handle it. Only Changsha Wang, who had already successfully completed a similar mission and achieved great victory, would be able to carry it out. Everyone¡¯s eyes turned to Lu Yuan, expressing their expectations. Chapter 448 - Chapter 448: Chapter 229: Sowing Discord and Plotting Chapter 448: Chapter 229: Sowing Discord and Plotting Translator: 549690339 Regarding the second Wuan Marquis, everyone trusted Lu Yuan¡¯s strength in view of his continuous series of achievements. In particular, Lu Yuan had previously rushed hundreds of miles in Dongting Prefecture and managed to defeat 100,000 Miao People in the Southern three states. Now with this brilliant victory of rushing hundreds of miles and besieging Xiangyang City, he killed two Inborn Grandmasters. With these precedents, everyone was positively optimistic about whether Lu Yuan could accomplish this strategy and successfully capture Xichuan Prefecture. However, despite this, it involved a rush of thousands of miles, passing through Xiangyang, Hanzhong, and Xichuan. Moreover, the month-long journey had too many dangers and uncertainties that could not be ignored. Therefore, although everyone unanimously believed that King of Changsha should be the one to take the task, they were unsure whether he would be willing to do it. Meeting the gaze of the crowd, Lu Yuan contemplated for a moment and then said, ¡°This plan is indeed brilliant. However, going from Xiang to Hanzhong, and then from Hanzhong to Wushan, traversing mountains and ridges and crossing rivers and bridges, the journey is probably close to two thousand miles. Such a lengthy raid is risky; If I am not careful, it could lead to the destruction of the mighty army and even death on the battlefield. The risk and cost are too great.¡± Lu Yuan looked at the crowd with a calm expression, telling them the real difficulties of this plan. Understanding his meaning, Bai Mengyang, who had experienced it last time, immediately spoke up and said, ¡°The journey ahead of King Changsha is indeed dangerous and strenuous. The Northern Expedition is an affair of our Four Nations, and it is somewhat unreasonable to let King Changsha take the risk alone. However, considering the united army, the only suitable candidate for this mission is none other than King Changsha. This journey is crucial for the success or failure of the Northern Expedition and cannot be skipped. In that case, King Changsha can put forward some demands. As long as they are not too difficult, our United Army and Four Nations will do our best to meet them. Would these conditions be enough for King Changsha to send troops?¡± Upon hearing this, Yan Wangqiu quickly agreed and said, ¡°Indeed, King Changsha can put forward any requirements, and as long as we can accomplish them, we will not shirk.¡± Su Xuange also said, ¡°I, too, agree.¡± With the three of them speaking, it basically represented the attitudes of Yue, Ninghai, and Southsea Nations. If they made a request at this time, as long as the three of them discussed it, the matter would be resolved. Seeing this, Lu Yuan was finally satisfied and said, ¡°I am not opposed to leading the troops to attack, but there is one condition: after this raid, if we can reclaim Xichuan Prefecture, then I want Yuzhong, Linjiang, and Wushan Prefectures. If you grant me these three prefectures, I will carry out this raid.¡± He looked at Bai Mengyang and stated his conditions. His desire for Yuzhong, Linjiang, and Wushan Prefectures was mainly due to their strategic locations. Xichuan Prefecture was located to the west of Dongting Prefecture. If the court or Ji Hui and Qiao Kangquan, who were loyal to the court, controlled it, there would be a threat from two Inborn Grandmasters on the west side of the Changsha state. If these two raised troops to attack from the west, and the court attacked from the east and north (with control over Xiangyang Prefecture and Yuzhang Prefecture), then Lu Yuan would quickly find himself in a besieged situation. Therefore, if he could capture the eastern three prefectures of Xichuan Prefecture, he could build a defensive line there and establish a western barrier to cut off the threat from Xichuan Prefecture. Especially since Xichuan Prefecture was a basin with many mountains and rugged roads, there were numerous dangerous passes where one man could hold off ten thousand enemies. Among these, the most difficult were Yuzhong, Linjiang, and Wushan Prefectures. In Linjiang and Wushan Prefectures, there were two strong passways of Yufu and Wushan. Yuzhong Prefecture was a mountain city with a river around it, and the mountains and rivers served as natural defenses. If he could occupy these three prefectures, then he would only need to station 30,000 troops and one Inborn Grandmaster in Yuzhong Prefecture to withstand any attacks from the two nations of Xichuan. In this way, the threat to the west of Changsha State would naturally be eliminated. Lu Yuan could then concentrate his efforts on dealing with the threat from Yue Country. While the plan was good for Changsha State, it was not that great for Yue State court, which aimed to pacify the Three Nations and restore the prosperity of the past. Therefore, Lu Yuan was unsure whether Bai Mengyang would agree to these conditions. He only mentioned it to test the waters. If Bai Mengyang agreed, they would be overjoyed, and Lu Yuan would get a great benefit. If Bai Mengyang disagreed, it wouldn¡¯t matter. Lu Yuan was determined not to go on a thousand-mile raid anyway. Overall, there was no loss. However, after hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s conditions, Bai Mengyang¡¯s expression darkened, and his voice grew a little colder, ¡°Is King Changsha joking? Xichuan Prefecture has already been promised to Ji Hui and Qiao Family Head by the court. How will they be pacified if these three prefectures are taken away? They have also contributed greatly to the court this time, so surely one cannot simply take away the territories promised to them by King Changsha¡¯s request alone?¡± Not to mention Xichuan Prefecture, this matter concerns the court¡¯s future strategy to pacify Changsha State. Taking away the three prefectures today would leave the court unable to explain itself to White Phoenix Temple and Guanhai Villa. Although the power of these two sects was relatively weaker compared to other sects in Jianghu, they had always been on good terms with the court. Chapter 449 - Chapter 449: Chapter 229: Sowing Discord and Plotting_2 Chapter 449: Chapter 229: Sowing Discord and Plotting_2 Translator: 549690339 But once truly driven to desperation, if both sides backstab, it would be an unimaginable catastrophe for the court. They don¡¯t even have to backstab; if Jihui the Holy Monk and Qiao Kangquan withdraw, the front line battlefield would not have the support of these two Inborn Grandmasters, and this Northern Expedition would not be possible. At that time, even if Lu Yuan¡¯s surprise attack succeeds and he retakes Xichuan County, what would be the significance for the court? Therefore, the Eastern Three Prefectures of Xichuan County is a bottom line for the court and cannot be ceded. However, in response to Bai Mengyang¡¯s words, Lu Yuan said, ¡°I am well aware of the contributions of Holy Monk Jihui and Qiao Family Head, so this demand for the Eastern Three Prefectures is not entirely for making exorbitant demands, but also for compensation.¡± At this point, Lu Yuan walked up to the map of the two countries and pointed at the southern region of Hanzhong County, saying: ¡°Please look, Wuan Marquis, this is the West Xixiang, Nanjiang, and Baishi Prefectures of Hanzhong County. This time I will be rushing thousands of miles, passing through these three prefectures. This time, we can seize them. Moreover, as previously mentioned, the territories conquered during this onslaught belong to me. This time should be no exception, right? If so, I will take the southern three prefectures of Hanzhong County in exchange for the eastern three prefectures of Xichuan County. The southern three prefectures of Hanzhong County had never been ravaged by war and had extremely populous households, almost a million. On the contrary, the eastern three prefectures of Xichuan County were devastated by war, and it is feared that there are not even two hundred thousand households left now. By trading one of my prosperous lands for one that lies in ruins, this deal cannot be said to have caused Holy Monk Jihui and Qiao Family Head any loss, right?¡± Originally, Xichuan County was naturally prosperous, even richer than Dongting County before the war. At its peak, it had 800,000 households and more than 4 million people, known as the Land of Heavenly Wealth. However, since the 28th year of Longqing, Li Xiong led the Qiang people to rise in Xichuan County, and shortly after, Xichuan County fell into chaos. During this time, the court and Li Xiong were in a stalemate, both sides constantly levying taxes and enlisting civilian workers, making the area a place of constant unrest and hardship for the local people. Finally, Li Xiong took control of most of Xichuan County and established the Xi Shu State. In order to break through the Innate, he began to suppress the local Jianghu sects, causing another wave of turmoil. Then, Wuan Marquis led the army to advance westward and enter Xichuan, engaging in a fierce battle with Li Xiong. The various heroes and factions in Xichuan County¡¯s rear, who had gathered more than one hundred thousand soldiers in response. Both sides fought fiercely, and the people of Xichuan County, who had known peace for less than a year, faced another catastrophe. Then the Zhou people came, the two countries went to war, and it was another catastrophe. By the previous year, there was an earthquake in Xichuan County, and the local people suffered heavy casualties. At this time, they had to pay taxes and submit to Corvee Labor, deliver military food to the front-line Zhou Shu United Army, and even go to the battlefield. This oppression drove the local people to rebel and stirred up another uprising. This also forced the Zhou-Shu coalition forces to abandon the siege of Yuzhong Prefecture and return to the rear to suppress the rebellion, leading to another massacre. Later on, after a series of battles, Bai Mengyang withdrew from Xichuan, and Xichuan County finally had a year of peace. However, even so, the 300,000 Zhou-Shu coalition forces stationed in Tianmen Prefecture required a large amount of money and food to be provided by Xichuan County, which was another great pressure. So, one can calculate how many calamities Xichuan County has gone through, including the Qiang people and the Jianghu people ¨C there have been four major uprisings and rebellions. Among them, the battles between Zhou and Shu and Zhou-Yue were thrice. The various massacres and burdensome military duties and taxes during this time had long since turned this once prosperous Xichuan Heavenly Wealth into a devastated wasteland, desolate everywhere. At this moment, I¡¯m afraid that only about one million people remain in all ten prefectures of Xichuan. And this one million people, divided between the two forces, would each have only 560,000, or 670,000 citizens left. With less than one million subjects under their control, what¡¯s the point for Jihui the Holy Monk and Qiao Kangquan to be a king? Therefore, if Lu Yuan proposes to exchange the southern three prefectures of Hanzhong County for the eastern three prefectures of Xichuan County, the likelihood of the two forces agreeing is really high. After all, the court wants Xichuan County to threaten Lu Yuan¡¯s east side. If they can do so without harming their own interests, Jihui the Holy Monk and Qiao Kangquan may be willing to help. But when it comes to one¡¯s own interests¡­ What? In order to advance the great cause of the court, I would give up one million people in order to have this devastated and desolate place, and then risk sending soldiers and funds to fight Changsha State on behalf of the court. Sorry, I also have difficulties; I can¡¯t help. As for how to deal with the hatred and hostility aroused by Zhou Country when taking the southern three prefectures of Hanzhong County? Are you kidding? Would Zhou Country not hate and be hostile to me if I don¡¯t take the southern three prefectures of Hanzhong County? When the court stationed these two forces in Xichuan County, the purpose was to let them bear the brunt of Zhou Country¡¯s firepower and share some pressure for the court in the west. If they can seize the southern three prefectures of Hanzhong County and weaken the enemy now, it would not only strengthen the power of Jihui the Holy Monk and Qiao Kangquan but also be a good thing for them. Therefore, Lu Yuan¡¯s proposal is not meant to take advantage of these two men. Because the entire deal is favorable to him, it can stabilize the western border. For Jihui the Holy Monk and Qiao Kangquan, they can only gain a large population, and their territories remain undiminished. The only one who suffers in this arrangement is the court. As for the court? As mentioned earlier, as long as their core interests are not touched, they would naturally be willing to cooperate. But when it comes to their own interests, whether this card is effective or not depends on the individual¡¯s perspective. Chapter 450 - Chapter 450: Chapter 229: Sowing Discord and Plotting_3 Chapter 450: Chapter 229: Sowing Discord and Plotting_3 Translator: 549690339 Even to the point of sounding harsh. For Grandmaster Jihui and Qiao Kangquan, was their assistance to the court in destroying the Southsea really a good thing for them? With Lu Yuan no longer in the way, the Court had regained the Dongting Prefecture. So, was the next step to prepare to invade Xichuan, eliminate their two families and restore the original territory? It was a very likely scenario. Therefore, for them, the existence of Lu Yuan was actually a good thing. Therefore, it was beneficial to do him a favor and let him stand in front, help them withstand the threat of the court. The logic was the same as with the affairs of Ninghai Country and Southsea. At this moment, Lu Yuan seemed to be consolidating his western defense line, but in fact, he was making preparations ahead of time, trying to split the relationship between the court, Grandmaster Jihui, and Qiao Kangquan. He was very clear about this, and Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange, after being stunned, quickly reacted and understood the purpose. They were naturally pleased to see an expansion of the alliance against the court and an increase in the strength of their camp. Thus, at this time, they cast a meaningful look at Bai Mengyang, wanting to see how the Wuan Marquis would respond. In essence, Bai Mengyang was also a little unprepared at this time. He hadn¡¯t expected that Lu Yuan would come up with such a plan. Using the rich southern prefectures of Hanzhong, to exchange for the already devastated eastern prefectures of Xichuan, it was indeed a clever move, a brilliant scheme. If Grandmaster Jihui and Qiao Kangquan agreed, then the court¡¯s original expectation of having them attack Southsea from the west. With the eastern prefectures as a barrier, it would naturally amount to nothing. These two nations could also use this as an excuse to refuse the Court¡¯s request for them to attack Southsea. Would Grandmaster Jihui and Qiao Kangquan reject this proposal? Bai Mengyang, putting himself in their shoes, thought for a moment and finally sighed. Because he really couldn¡¯t think of any reason for these two parties to refuse? On the contrary, if the court forces the two parties to disagree. Then, these two people who currently need the court might not say anything. But privately, in their hearts, they might begrudge it and nurse a grievance. Thus, under such a grudge, if the court still expects them to attack Southsea after establishing their countries, wouldn¡¯t that be absurd? They would probably not only ignore the court, but might also throw their weight behind Lu Yuan to resist the court¡¯s army, in revenge for their past grievances! So, Lu Yuan¡¯s proposal was blatantly a masterstroke. No matter what choice the court makes, he could always achieve his goal. Therefore, Bai Mengyang, after thinking for a long time, still couldn¡¯t think of a solution. In the end, he could only say, ¡°This proposal doesn¡¯t seem to disadvantage Grandmaster Jihui and the Qiao Family Head, but whether they agree or not still has to be asked. I need to send a letter first to ask for their opinion. I will respond to the King of Changsha based on their wishes.¡± At this moment, Bai Mengyang didn¡¯t have any other way but to procrastinate. However, this method could only delay things for a few days. From the main camp to Wushan Prefecture, if one rides fast, it would take five or six days for a round trip. Asking someone¡¯s opinion is very quick. Therefore, after hearing these words, Lu Yuan laughed and said, ¡°If that¡¯s the case, the Wuan Marquis can send someone to ask. When there is an answer and a result, the king will then decide whether to rush a thousand miles.¡± The matter of a thousand-mile journey, although it was related to the victory or defeat of this Northern Expedition. But this matter was not exactly urgent. Xiangyang City couldn¡¯t be taken down in a short time, and when the reinforcements arrived, given their strength, they could at most confront their side. It wouldn¡¯t be easy to defeat the United Army. So, even if it took some time, it wouldn¡¯t matter much to the United Army. On the contrary, being able to sow discord between the court, Grandmaster Jihui and Qiao Kangquan, made Lu Yuan happier, and he was willing to wait a bit longer. Bai Mengyang laughed begrudgingly and said: ¡°That¡¯s how it should be.¡± After he finished speaking, the Wuan Marquis, with no mood to continue the banquet, made some perfunctory remarks and left in a hurry. Lu Yuan¡¯s sudden open move disrupted the original deployment of the court. At this moment, Bai Mengyang had to pass the news back to the rear, and discuss with others about how to deal with Lu Yuan¡¯s move. Otherwise, if his side loses two allies and Lu Yuan¡¯s camp gains two grandmasters. Considering the strength of the opponent¡¯s six grandmasters. Even if the court wins this Northern Expedition and even takes over most of Xiangyang Prefecture, it would still be a failure, not a victory. ¡®Even if we can¡¯t retain Jihui and Qiao Kangquan and have them continue to be used by the court, we cannot let them help Lu Yuan and become his wings.¡¯ On the way back, Bai Mengyang was heavy with worry and sighed endlessly. Just because of one proposal from the other side, the situation had been turned upside down like this, and his side couldn¡¯t even stop it. For the court, this was really the worst news. After the banquet, Lu Yuan, Yan Wangqiu, and Su Xuange continued to talk and consolidate their alliances. Having confirmed their unified stand in facing the court, they returned to their respective camps. Then, in his own tent, he pondered for a long time before finally picking up the pen and writing three letters. Of those, two were naturally to Grandmaster Jihui and Qiao Kangquan. Although Bai Mengyang said he would write to them to ask for their opinions, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t believe that Bai Mengyang¡¯s letter would clearly express his intentions. So, it was necessary for him to personally write a letter to them, formally expressing his idea of the exchange. After spending a moment writing the letters, he summoned his personal guard and had them delivered to Wushan Prefecture as quickly as possible. He then wrote another letter, this one was for his disciple Zhou Qing. The content of the letter was also simple, asking Zhou Qing to temporarily put aside the military affairs of Fangling and Xicheng prefectures, turn those matters over to his deputy Chu Wei, and quickly come to Xiangyang City. Now, with the proposal to exchange territory being brought up, Lu Yuan could foresee that his territory was about to expand again. At this time, facing the six prefectures that had expanded, and two defensive directions, he also needed to consider the personnel for commanding the troops. Among them, there was Lan Cai¡¯er overseeing the western three prefectures of Xiangyang Prefecture, which didn¡¯t require concern for the time being. But there was no one to oversee the eastern three prefectures of Xichuan. For this place, the person Lu Yuan preferred was naturally his disciple Zhou Qing. However, the strength of this senior disciple was still too weak, and he had only reached the first-level realm, having opened only two bizarre meridians. This level of strength was not enough to guard Xichuan. Therefore, Lu Yuan planned to cultivate this disciple well, to rush him to break through as soon as possible, and advance to the level of an Inborn Grandmaster. Chapter 451 - Chapter 451: Chapter 230: Disciple’s Plan Chapter 451: Chapter 230: Disciple¡¯s Plan Translator: 549690339 Five days later, Zhou Qing received a letter and hurried to Xiangyang Prefecture. ¡°Greetings, Master.¡± Upon meeting, Zhou Qing quickly bowed to Lu Yuan. ¡°Stand up.¡± Lu Yuan helped his disciple up and then looked him up and down. Seeing Zhou Qing¡¯s weather-beaten face, he couldn¡¯t help but feel pleased, ¡°You must be tired from the journey, huh?¡± Zhou Qing shook his head, ¡°It wasn¡¯t too exhausting. I traveled downstream, not really in a hurry. I just took a boat.¡± There was a Han River connecting Hanzhong Prefecture and Xiangyang Prefecture. The two prefectures had convenient transportation and business routes, with frequent merchants and travelers, even large armies, mostly traveling by boat. If Lu Yuan was really going to attack Xichuan, he would most likely take this waterway. ¡°Even if you were traveling by boat, the weather is very cold right now, and the humidity from the water is quite hard on you,¡± Lu Yuan shook his head and laughed, ¡°Let¡¯s not talk about that; let¡¯s talk about serious matters. You did a great job in Xixiang Prefecture. Your master is very pleased.¡± When he sent the letter last time, Zhou Qing was leading ten thousand soldiers in Xixiang Prefecture, conquering cities and territories. Not only had they conquered the eastern five counties of the prefecture, they had also encircled the prefectural city, and could have captured it within half a month. Leading a separate army to achieve such results was already impressive. To be honest, without the innate experts¡¯ leadership, Zhou Qing was already doing quite well. However, Zhou Qing felt ashamed, ¡°Master, you were able to conquer two prefectures within six days with two innate masters leading the charge and breaking the enemy¡¯s defenses in one attack. After half a month, I still haven¡¯t captured a single city. I can¡¯t really say that I¡¯ve done well.¡± Lu Yuan smiled, ¡°In those six days, I had two innate masters taking the lead, delivering crushing blows. You, on the other hand, didn¡¯t have the same conditions. You had to be cautious and steady, relying solely on your martial arts abilities. This alone put you at a disadvantage from the beginning. But I called you here precisely for this matter.¡± Having said this, Lu Yuan looked carefully at his disciple again and said, ¡°It seems you have managed to settle and restrain your Inner Strength that surged after breaking through the second bizarre meridian. Have you fully mastered it now?¡± ¡°Aside from leading soldiers, I have been studying Taoist Classics every day during the past year,¡± Zhou Qing nodded, ¡°After studying and experiencing the battlefield, I have begun to understand the mysteries of life and death. I think my state of mind has grown further, and I should be able to improve one or even two of my bizarre meridians.¡± Experiencing life and death situations can prove effective in honing one¡¯s state of mind. As long as you experience life and death more frequently, you may not be able to improve your state of mind right away. But if you give it time and reflection, combined with the study of Taoist Classics, your wisdom will naturally grow from the experiences. And in cultivating the state of mind, there¡¯s the concept of training amidst the mortal dust. Walking through the mortal world, grasping power, and seeing various human hearts, you can naturally improve your state of mind, as long as you¡¯re able to experience them without becoming obsessed. Now Zhou Qing, as the Grand General of Changsha, leads tens of thousands of troops in battle daily. Although he rarely personally takes part in dangerous situations, Watching the slaughter in the battlefield, watching people fighting for their lives, and witnessing countless lives fading away, he can¡¯t help but feel a lot of emotions. Moreover, as the top martial artist, he frequently encountered people trying to curry favor, and witness various human hearts in his daily life. Neither experience was in short supply. The combination of the two factors, along with Zhou Qing¡¯s diligence in studying Taoist Classics, had his state of mind growing rapidly. Just like Lu Yuan in the past. He experienced human hearts by working as an official while also experiencing life and death on the battlefield. Combined, he broke through the innate realm in just sixteen years. Now, Zhou Qing had been cultivating for thirteen years. In that time, he had progressed to where he could control four bizarre meridians. Compared to Lu Yuan, his progress was not slow. The only difference was that his Inner Strength might not be as refined, and even if he reached the peak of a first-class martial artist, it might still not be enough to meet the requirements for breaking through to the Innate Realm. At the same time, his soul might also be lacking. His spirit might not be able to support the Five External Bodies when communicating with the Outer World. Then there¡¯s the matter of state of mind. This part was relatively simple. With Zhou Qing¡¯s current level of advancement, he could reach the requirements for breaking through to the Innate Realm within five or six years. The main obstacles preventing him from breaking through the Innate Realm were the first two aspects: Inner Strength and soul. For an ordinary martial artist, it¡¯s basically impossible to cultivate their Inner Strength and soul to the level required to break through the Innate Realm purely on their own, given the current conditions of Heaven and Earth. Because breaking through to the Innate Realm requires extremely pure Inner Strength. How precise does it have to be? For example, if the purity of a typical first-class peak martial artist¡¯s Inner Strength is one, then to meet the requirements for breaking through the Innate Realm, this purity must reach three, or even four or five. To achieve Internal Strength with at least three times the purity, Lu Yuan relied on the immortal spirit qi within the jade tablet. Lan Cai¡¯er relied on the accumulation of the Poison Sect for hundreds of years. Li Xiong relied on massacring the entire Xichuan martial arts world and plundering the millennia of accumulation from the Jianghu sects and aristocratic families. The methods of these three were laid out clearly. So, think about it. Can an ordinary martial artist refine their Inner Strength to such a degree by themselves before they die? Also, constructing a martial arts external body requires converting the soul into Martial Dao True Intent to control an external qi field and transform it into a martial arts external body. As a result, this process also has extremely high requirements for the soul. Chapter 452 - Chapter 452: Chapter 230 Disciple Planning_2 Chapter 452: Chapter 230 Disciple Planning_2 Translator: 549690339 However, for a normal person, generally speaking, after the age of fifty, or at most sixty, their vitality, and spirit will begin to decline. In other words, by the age of sixty, an ordinary person¡¯s soul will gradually weaken and begin to fade away. So how can a soul that is already declining and fading away support a martial arts external body? Therefore, to break through the Innate, one¡¯s age must not exceed sixty. Otherwise, once over sixty, although theoretically speaking, there is still a probability of breaking through the Innate. But practically thinking about it, it¡¯s obvious. For those who are not even sixty years old, breaking through the Innate is exceedingly difficult. You, someone who is over sixty, still want to break through the Innate? The probability is no different from winning the lottery. If you are confident that you are the chosen one, then you can have a try. Just don¡¯t cry over the result in the end. Furthermore, a regular person¡¯s soul strength is difficult to support a martial arts external body. Normally speaking, to break through the Innate, you need to cultivate secret techniques that can enhance your soul, use Divine Blood Variants, and rely on the power of elixirs to strengthen your soul. These Divine Blood Variants absorb the Spiritual Energy of Heaven and Earth and have their unique bloodline abilities. They can more or less nourish the soul to some extent. Therefore, consuming the Divine Blood Elixir also has the effect of enhancing one¡¯s soul. Or, like Lu Yuan, directly travel through dimensions, devouring another soul in his body, the soul strength instantly surged to almost twice that of others. As long as you meet any of the two conditions mentioned above, you can achieve the soul requirements for breaking through the Innate. Thus, taking into account the above conditions, one cannot exceed sixty years of age, have a sufficiently strong soul, and have Inner Strength purified to the extreme to break through the Innate. How can a normal martial artist meet these conditions by relying solely on their own cultivation? In any case, under Zhou Qing¡¯s current conditions, even if he breaks through to be a top-notch expert in five to six years, that would be the limit in his lifetime. Wanting to progress further, either follow Lu Yuan¡¯s example and use Immortal Spirit Qi to purify Inner Strength or follow the conventional method and consume a large amount of Divine Blood Elixir. At present, the latter path seems easier. After all, Lu Yuan now controls one province and ten prefectures, and with this Northern Expedition, he is expected to expand six more prefectures. With the territory of sixteen prefectures, if he forcefully collects, it would just barely enough to gather one martial artist¡¯s required Divine Blood Elixir for breaking through Innate. However, in doing so, the territories under Lu Yuan¡¯s control would inevitably face another turmoil. If he doesn¡¯t follow Li Xiong¡¯s example and murder every martial artist in Jianghu, risking spending one to one and a half years in killing one or two hundred thousand, or even two or three hundred thousand people, he can¡¯t expect peace. Even after all the killing, he might have to endure two or three years, or even five or ten years of unrest. Although the cost, relative to cultivating an Innate martial artist, might still be worth it, or even a big bargain, Lu Yuan finds it somewhat unacceptable. To him, the population and territories represent Qi Luck and the people¡¯s hearts. As for local peace, it is an accelerator for gathering Qi Luck and the hearts of the people. These two aspects are related to the progress of his Taiping Dao Book cultivation. After experiencing the power of the Taiping Dao Book in this Northern Expedition battle, having defeated two Innates in consecutive battles, Lu Yuan has had a deep understanding. For ordinary Innate Grandmasters, Immortal Law Dao Technique is equivalent to attacking from a higher dimension. If used properly, a single spell could annihilate an Innate Grandmaster without any issues. How could Lu Yuan give up such a powerful means? For him, even enduring a slowdown in the cultivation progress of the Immortal Technique is a sin. Therefore, relying on the massacre of the Jianghu martial artists to plunder resources to break through Innate within Changsha is practically not feasible. And speaking frankly, because of his origins, Lu Yuan is also considered part of the imperial system. In Changsha, both the army and the local prefectures have many connections with the Jianghu sects and aristocratic families. Lu Yuan¡¯s actions against these Jianghu martial artists would essentially shake the foundation of his rule and indirectly weaken his own strength. As a result, even if Zhou Qing eventually breaks through to Innate, the morale of his own subordinates would be shattered, the army would be fearful, and there would be no other reliable people. Is that really a good thing? Therefore, from the beginning, Lu Yuan did not intend to help Zhou Qing break through Innate through the killings of the Jianghu martial artists. What he truly wanted was for Zhou Qing to follow his own path. Using the Immortal Spirit Qi to purify the Inner Strength, and then using the purified Inner Strength and Immortal Spirit Qi contained within it to strengthen the soul. This is also the reason why Lu Yuan called Zhou Qing here. He wants to help his disciple, using the Spirit Qi of Immortals, purify and refine their Inner Strength. To achieve this, naturally, he needs his disciple to come. With this in mind, Lu Yuan looked at Zhou Qing, and laughed, ¡°Being able to enhance your state of mind so much within a year, your innate talent is no less than your master¡¯s. However, to break through Innate, just unblocking the bizarre meridians is not enough. Even if you unblock the Ren and Du Channels, it¡¯s not enough. The secret of Innate lies in the purity of Inner Qi and the strength of the soul, and these two points are not enough with just hard cultivation. Other Innate Grandmasters break this shackles by consuming large amounts of Divine Blood Elixirs. But this path is doomed to be full of bloodshed and countless beheadings, and your master cannot help you with this. Chapter 453 - Chapter 453: Chapter 230 Disciple’s Plan_3 Chapter 453: Chapter 230 Disciple¡¯s Plan_3 Translator: 549690339 Fortunately, there is another way for me as your Master, which can also help you break through the Innate realm¡­¡± Thereupon, Lu Yuan told his disciple about his Immortal Fate jade piece, as well as the fact that he had cultivated the Five Thunder Sutra. He naturally had great trust in Zhou Qing and Sun Siwen, and was willing to share some secrets with them. Moreover, these matters did not involve core secrets. After some time, when the relationship with the Dan Ding Path will be severed, these matters will be made public anyway. At this point, he was just telling his disciple in advance. However, upon hearing this, Zhou Qing was both shocked and deeply touched. He didn¡¯t expect that his Master would have such Immortal Fate, and had actually become a legendary cultivator. What touched him even more was that his Master was willing to share this matter, which should have been kept secret and enjoyed privately, with him. Not only did he share it, but now for the sake of his breakthrough to the Innate realm, his Master was even willing to share the Immortal Spirit Qi, which was now extremely precious and scarce, with him. The love and care his Master had for him was simply¡­ simply¡­ Zhou Qing didn¡¯t even know how to describe it. So after recovering from the shock, he knelt down and said, ¡°Disciple is already greatly indebted to Master for teaching me martial arts and nurturing me. Now that Master has Immortal Fate and can aspire for longevity, how can disciple dare to hinder Master¡¯s Immortal Path because of my personal matters? I beseech Master to take back this offer, disciple dares not to hope for it.¡± This eldest disciple was still as filial as ever. At this moment, even with the prospect of breaking through Innate realm before him, he was not tempted and instead considered Lu Yuan¡¯s welfare. Lu Yuan was both gratified and distressed to see this, and ultimately could only force himself to say, ¡°Since I have decided to pass on the Immortal Spirit Qi to you, it is naturally after careful consideration. And my Immortal Path has my own considerations as well. The newly established Changsha Country is surrounded by enemies, and all the neighboring countries regard us as a thorn in their side. During our Northern Expedition, we have continuously expanded our territory. With our vast territories, relying on the combined strength of just your Master Mother and me, is difficult to manage. You and Brother Sun are the people I trust most in this world, even more than my own wife and children. Today, in helping you break through the Innate realm, we must also rely on you, Little Qing, to guard and support our country in the future. So this is not just for your sake, but also for me, and for Changsha Country. There is no need to discuss this matter further, just follow your Master¡¯s plan.¡± With the conversation reaching this point, Zhou Qing could no longer refuse further, and could only say, ¡°The disciple will definitely practice diligently and break through the Innate realm as soon as possible, in order to help Master with the affairs of the country.¡± Lu Yuan smiled indifferently, ¡°That¡¯s more like it. Come, let me first take a look at your cultivation, and then devise a plan to purify your Inner Strength.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Zhou Qing nodded, followed by the initiation. Lu Yuan reached out and began checking his disciple¡¯s Inner Strength cultivation and frowned in deep thought. After a while. Zhou Qing left the tent, having finished the inspection. ¡®Little Qing¡¯s Inner Strength is still a bit mixed, not as pure as mine since I¡¯ve been constantly refining it with the Immortal Fate jade piece since I started cultivating. So initially when we start purifying Inner Strength, we can¡¯t make any drastic changes, as that could lead to loss of control and damage to the foundation. Therefore, we have to progress gradually, spending a month or two to complete this process. What I need to do is to complete the guidance in the first few days and then hand the jade piece over to him, allowing Xiaoqing to purify his Inner Strength by himself, just like in the past. It is not difficult to do so, and it will not take up too much time. Furthermore, I¡¯ve just assessed Xiaoqing¡¯s state of mind, and the progress is even more pleasing than what he said earlier. Now, it seems that he can completely break through to the fourth meridian, and more solidly control his Inner Strength.¡¯ With Xiaoqing¡¯s innate talent and my help as a cultivator, perhaps he can break through Innate in six or seven years.¡± Lu Yuan thought to himself, very satisfied with his plan. After six or seven years, Zhou Qing would have practiced martial arts for almost 20 years. Breaking through Innate at this speed would be considered an above-average performance among Inborn Grandmasters. After this Northern Expedition, it can be foreseen that there will be a long period of peace between Zhou and Yue. Yue Country has suffered from chaos for nearly eight years, losing four Prefectures, five to six hundred thousand soldiers, and one Inborn. With such great losses, it would be impossible to catch their breath without a recovery period of at least a decade or two. Zhou Country is also in the same situation. If the Wuan Marquis¡¯s surprise attack plan goes well, the best outcome for Zhou Country is to lose more than half of Xiangyang Prefecture and a portion of Hanzhong Prefecture after this Northern Expedition. All of these added together are roughly the size of one prefecture. Moreover, considering the previous loss of more than 200,000 soldiers and the potential loss of another 100,000 soldiers, the total loss of soldiers is nearly 400,000, which is not a small number. Not to mention that they have already lost two Inborns, and it¡¯s unknown whether more will die in battle later. With such losses, they might not be any better off than Yue Country, except that they didn¡¯t lose much territory. So after this battle, both countries would need at least ten years of recuperation before they could mobilize troops again. As for the five newly-enshrined countries under Yue Country, Southsea and Ninghai, although they have recovered a lot of vitality since the previous invasion by Jinghai Country, These two newly-established countries don¡¯t even have a strong army. Even if they wanted to take action, they have the will but no power. Moreover, training strong soldiers without participating in a war or seeing blood takes at least four or five years. So, these two countries won¡¯t be causing any trouble in the short term. Not to mention that with Yan Wangqiu¡¯s age, this country is unlikely to make any trouble either. The only exception is Su Xuange, who reportedly captured 20,000 Zhou captives by besieging Dangyang City. These were all elite soldiers. Apparently, Ninghai Country has some ambitions and needs to pay attention to them since they have managed to build such a strong army. However, with Ninghai Country¡¯s national power, they can¡¯t afford many soldiers. Raising 30,000 to 50,000 men is already their limit, and there¡¯s no need to worry too much. Lastly, there were the Jihui Monk and Qiao Kangquan, who are planning to establish a country in Xichuan Prefecture. In fact, these two don¡¯t have to be overly worried about either. After all, it was made very clear what the situation in Xichuan Prefecture is like beforehand. With a population of less than a million, even if you include the southern three prefectures of Hanzhong that Lu Yuan is preparing to exchange with them, there will be only around two million people in total. Moreover, these people are extremely poor due to wars. Considering this situation, it would be impossible for these two countries to restore local production in less than a decade. Moreover, after ten years, with a population of two million, they could only raise 50,000 soldiers at most. These soldiers would need to be divided between two countries, and they would also have to guard against Zhou Country. With these restrictions, even if these two countries join forces, they can only muster 10,000 to 20,000 soldiers at most for external conquests. What can they do with this small number of troops? To be honest. If it weren¡¯t for the fact that there are two Inborn Grandmasters in Xichuan Prefecture, Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t take them seriously at all. Those who aren¡¯t even as good as Ninghai Country don¡¯t deserve any attention. Therefore, to sum up, after this Northern Expedition, the Seven Countries ¨C Zhou, Yue, Changsha, Ninghai, Southsea, and the two in Xichuan ¨C will not see any wars for at least ten years. Lu Yuan will have plenty of time to wait for Zhou Qing to become an Inborn after fighting the Northern Expedition. By then, with Zhou Qing, there will be three Inborn Grandmasters in his country. With such strength, it would not be a problem to defend the current 16 Prefectures, let alone doubling the territory of Changsha Country. Chapter 454 - Chapter 454: Chapter 231: Hongdao’s Eighth Year Chapter 454: Chapter 231: Hongdao¡¯s Eighth Year Translator: 549690339 After completing the plan for Zhou Qing¡¯s promotion to the rank of Grandmaster, Lu Yuan personally wrote a letter of apology to his fiancee. There was no choice. After this Northern Expedition, although the United Army had achieved successive victories. However, the resistance in Zhou People¡¯s territory was also extremely tenacious. Although they had lost Tianmen Prefecture and several prefectures in the south and west of Xiangyang. But even at this moment, within Wushan Prefecture and Xiangyang City, there were still four Inborn Grandmasters and 200,000 troops of the Zhou People. Without sweeping away and repelling these enemy forces, neither Lu Yuan nor the people in the United Army can be spared the time. So naturally, the originally planned wedding day for the two could not proceed, and the ceremony could only be postponed. Yes, it is now the third day of the first month of the 8th year of Hongdao. A new year has arrived. And at this time last year, it was the day when Lu Yuan and Lan Cai¡¯er got engaged. The wedding was originally agreed to be held today. However, due to the changing situation and the continuous battles, the wedding had to be postponed, even though it had been arranged in advance. Fortunately, although Lan Cai¡¯er has a strong and proud personality, she is also a reasonable and sensible person. Moreover, she participated in the Northern Expedition and was aware of the situation at the front, so she could understand the need to postpone the wedding. Although she was a little sad and unhappy, she could still understand the situation. In fact, when they were ambushing Guining Prefecture together some time ago, Lu Yuan had already discussed this matter with Lan Cai¡¯er, and she expressed her understanding. At this point, writing another letter was just to show his sincerity and apology and to appease her. ¡°It¡¯s easy to deal with the Queen, but it¡¯s a bit difficult to deal with the messengers from various countries who have come to observe the ceremony.¡± After writing the apology letter to Lan Cai¡¯er, Lu Yuan began to think about the messengers from various countries who had already arrived in Changsha City, causing him a headache. He had invited messengers from more than 20 countries such as Liang, Yue, Zhou, Southsea, Linhai, Southwest Yi country, East Sea Yi country, etc. for his wedding. Now the day of the wedding has arrived, and the messengers from various countries have come as invited, but he and Lan Cai¡¯er, the two main parties, are fighting in other places. This is an extremely impolite matter. Improper handling could easily result in a worsening of his reputation among the various countries and affect his credibility. This can already be considered a diplomatic incident. ¡°Fortunately, my absence from the wedding can be somewhat excused. After all, matters of state and military come first. Now I am fighting for my country, leading the army. This concerns the survival of the nation¡¯s fortune, and the various messengers should be able to understand. Especially since my Northern Expedition, I have had consecutive victories, defeated a hundred thousand enemies, and exterminated two Pillar States of Zhou People. With such prestige and achievements, even though I may have been somewhat impolite this time, the various messengers should be able to understand and accept it based on this reputation. Therefore, asking them to wait for a while longer should not be too difficult. However, how to operate these matters depends on my two Prime Ministers.¡± Lu Yuan thought to himself, then quickly raised his pen and began to write letters to Cui Changqing and Sun Siwen. As he went out to fight, the affairs of the entire country, and even some military power, were handed over to the pair of left and right prime ministers. Naturally, the task of receiving the messengers from various countries was also their responsibility. Now that his own wedding has been delayed, the task of appeasing the messengers from various countries naturally falls to the two of them. However, since he himself is at fault, it is necessary to write an apology letter to the two to ask for their help. In the letter, in addition to mentioning the wedding matter. He also issued another order, asking the two prime ministers to start preparing for the new round of Enke. Yes, after the imperial examination in November last year, just two months later, Lu Yuan needed to hold another examination. There was no other way. Who would have thought that after the Northern Expedition, the achievements were remarkable, and not only had they taken over the three prefectures of Xiangyang Prefecture, but also the three prefectures of Xichuan Prefecture? A total of six prefectures, which is already more than half a prefecture¡¯s territory. With such a vast territory, if he were to follow the regulations and appoint officials in the local prefectures and counties, there would be nearly 700 vacancies. Even if he were to establish a prefecture government in these six prefectures, the vacancies might amount to a thousand. With so many vacancies for officials, Lu Yuan wants to fill them, of course, only by holding another examination. However, the examination has not started yet and is still being prepared. For the newly recovered territories in the north of the river, he plans to conduct military administration for half a year first, and then arrange for officials. This half-year period will only be used to prepare for the new examination. Last time, thanks to the absorption of scholars from Ninghai and Southsea, Lu Yuan gained a lot of Qi Luck from the examination. Therefore, in this examination, he plans to send some more spies to Southsea and Ninghai to continue their activities and promotion. Last time, although 8,000 scholars from Southsea and Ninghai came for the examination, this is not the limit of the two countries. There are still 4,000-5,000 qualified scholars in the two countries who have not participated in the examination. Moreover, after the previous examination, many Southsea and Ninghai scholars who participated in the examination have returned to their respective countries. This time, with the new Enke and the selection of thousands more officials, it is naturally necessary to bring these people back again. Just watch. Within less than a year, my Changsha country has held three consecutive examinations and recruited more than 2,000 officials. This national fortune, this rising momentum, this expectation for scholars, and this opportunity for promotion¡­ Chapter 455 - Chapter 455: Chapter 231: The Eighth Year of Promoting Taoism_2 Chapter 455: Chapter 231: The Eighth Year of Promoting Taoism_2 Translator: 549690339 For every literate person who knows, they must go to Changsha Nation at all costs, sharpening their minds and risking their lives. And the scholars from other countries who come to Changsha and work for Changsha Nation will, in essence, weaken the talent reserves of other nations. In this way, abundant talents can contribute to the building and development of their own country. Meanwhile, other countries are in a talent shortage, lacking excellent talents to govern, which leads to a decline in national strength. Under such circumstances of mutual depletion without waging war, other nations are gradually weakening themselves. Regarding such tactics of subduing people without fighting, Lu Yuan is naturally happy to employ them. Moreover, the scope of this imperial examination is not limited to the three countries of Southsea, Ninghai, and Changsha. The newly developed six prefectures in the north of the river, and even the two countries of Xichuan that are about to be founded, can be included in the selection of officials. As long as the elites from these regions are incorporated into the ruling system, people¡¯s hearts in these newly developed territories can be naturally won over. Even the hearts of the scholars within the two countries of Xichuan can be won over in this way. ¡°I just don¡¯t know whether Jihui and Qiao Kangquan will, like Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange, repel the scholars in their countries and let me take advantage.¡± Lu Yuan thought to himself, but he had already decided that in due course, he would look for opportunities to test the waters. However, in his estimation, Qiao Kangquan¡¯s side may be unpredictable. After all, they were born to aristocratic families and had close ties with the government, so they naturally knew the role of the literati. Thus, trying to gain talent from them may be somewhat difficult. But on Jihui¡¯s side, it should be much simpler. After all, their identity is special, as they are a monk of a Buddhist sect¡¯s holy place and wants to establish a Buddhist country. For such a Buddhist country, literate people would naturally be indifferent, even hostile and disgusted. Similarly, the rule of such a Buddhist country would rely on faith and precepts, not laws and ethics. The role of literati in a Buddhist country is actually not significant. Thinking from this angle, more could be done on Jihui¡¯s side. Lu Yuan took note of this, and the last line in his hand was also finished. He called his personal guard and sent several letters to various places. His hands were finally free. Now that the army was resting and there were not many military affairs for the time being, Lu Yuan continued to cultivate the Taiping Dao Book in his leisure time. In recent days, as local officials at all levels in Changsha in the rear took office, local production gradually resumed, and the people lived peacefully and happily, the qi luck gathered around him became more abundant. During the Northern Expedition, Lu Yuan achieved continuous victories and not only defeated enemy troops but also killed strong enemies. In addition, he expanded three prefectures and won over hundreds of thousands of people. This harvest further increased his Qi luck. It has been only a month since the Northern Expedition, but his qi luck has increased by as much as 30% compared to before the expedition. This additional 30% qi luck is reflected in his rapid progress in cultivation. At present, the power he accumulates in his body, including the two previous encounters with the Inborn Grandmasters and the energy consumed during those, is enough for Lu Yuan to use eleven Dao techniques. This growth is extremely gratifying. Lu Yuan has profound experience in the power of Dao techniques. Even the weakest Dao technique is as powerful as a full-strength attack from a first-stage Inborn Grandmaster. Since it is a full-strength attack, even an Inborn Grandmaster cannot perform it many times as it consumes a lot of True pneuma. At any rate, with Lu Yuan¡¯s current True pneuma, he can only use his martial arts external body six or seven times with full strength. Afterwards, his True pneuma would be exhausted, and he would fall into a weakened state. So from this perspective, Lu Yuan¡¯s current accumulation of Dao techniques is equivalent to two Inborn Grandmasters. Of course, one cannot only look at one aspect. First of all, such a full-strength attack, even among Inborn Grandmasters, is used to decide victory or defeat only after a protracted battle and when the enemy¡¯s weakness is exposed. It is impossible to use it in normal combat. Because when the enemy is prepared, even if you attack with full strength, they can avoid and defend, blocking most of the damage, and it is impossible to kill them in one blow. So relying on a dozen Dao techniques to forcibly kill an Inborn Grandmaster is extremely difficult, if not impossible. But even so, with these Dao techniques, even without using martial arts strength and relying only on Immortal Method power, Lu Yuan can face Inborn Grandmasters without losing. At this moment, his strength has finally balanced in both immortal and martial arts cultivation. ¡°Even though I¡¯ve cultivated the Taiping Dao Book for just over two months, I¡¯ve been practicing martial arts for eighteen years. The difference between two months and eighteen years, between Immortal Method and Martial Arts, or, rather, the terrifying nature of the Taiping Dao Book and the abnormality of the Qi Luck Dao, is truly astonishing.¡± Lu Yuan could not help but exclaim. The progress of ordinary Immortal Method cultivation is not as rapid as this. Just like his cultivation of the Wu Lei Dao Book, he had been cultivating for two years. However, in the two years since, the power Lu Yuan has accumulated has been extremely thin. Even including the two Dao techniques that were consumed when he killed the Inborn Grandmasters previously, the remaining power at present is only enough for him to use five Dao techniques. Now, there is only enough power left to perform three Dao techniques. At this rate, it would take him at least four years to accumulate enough power to be comparable to an Inborn Grandmaster with ten Dao techniques. Four years of cultivation to grow to be comparable to an Inborn Grandmaster is actually quite fast compared to martial arts. However, this rapid Immortal Method, when compared to the Qi Luck Dao within the Immortal Methods, still seems too ordinary and mediocre. Chapter 456 - Chapter 456: Chapter 231: The Eighth Year of Promoting Taoism_3 Chapter 456: Chapter 231: The Eighth Year of Promoting Taoism_3 Translator: 549690339 ¡°No wonder the path of Qi Luck has such a large trade off, losing so much lifespan, yet so many people still engage in its cultivation. Aside from anything else, the speed of cultivation progress alone is worth the life lost.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s understanding of the Qi Luck is similar to a time accelerator. Your life is accelerated compared to others at the same moment. So during this acceleration, your cultivation progress is stronger than others, but equally, your lifespan is used up faster. Therefore, for a cultivator, cultivation of Qi Luck is tantamount to shortening a task that would normally take hundreds of years to just a few years. As for the pros and cons, it depends on individual needs. As far as Lu Yuan is concerned, he quite likes this type of acceleration method. After practicing for a day and a night, and accumulating enough mana to perform one-sixth of a spell, he ended the cultivation as the new day came. Then he practiced his sword technique, ate breakfast, and read for a while before Zhou Qing arrived. As planned yesterday, for the next three days, Lu Yuan needs to purify Zhou Qing¡¯s Inner Strength with the Immortal Spirit Energy. Today is the first day. Purifying the Inner Strength is not difficult; for Lu Yuan, it simply involves using his Divine Sense to manage the Immortal Spirit Energy from the jade piece and then directly introducing it into Zhou Qing¡¯s body. The Immortal Spirit Energy will naturally enhance and slowly improve the constitution of Zhou Qing¡¯s body and enhance his spiritual consciousness and Inner Strength. The only thing to be careful of is that sudden influx of too much Immortal Spirit Energy might cause Zhou Qing to experience a physical disruption. Therefore, someone needs to watch over him and adjust the process in time. And this is what Lu Yuan is here to do. An hour passes quickly. Inside the tent, Lu Yuan put away his jade pendant, then turned to his disciple, asking: ¡°Xiaoqing, how do you feel?¡± Zhou Qing opened his eyes with a comfortable expression on his face: ¡°Very comfortable. It feels like I am floating, as if I¡¯ve lost several pounds.¡± Lu Yuan smiled and said: ¡°This is a normal reaction. There are too many impurities in the human body. Therefore, when the Immortal Spirit Energy enters the body, it neutralizes and expels these impurities, cleansing the body. Once you have digested this Immortal Spirit Energy and expelled the impurities in your body, this feeling will recede. By that time, your Inner Strength and spiritual consciousness will also have increased.¡± Zhou Qing nodded, then rose to his feet and bowed to Lu Yuan: ¡°Master, on behalf of your disciple, I am eternally indebted to you for passing on this method to me. I will never forget what you have done in this lifetime.¡± Lu Yuan helped him up: ¡°Alright, I¡¯ve already told you, don¡¯t mention these things. Right now, the Immortal Spirit Energy is still digesting, you should go back and practice restraint, and refine it.¡± Zhou Qing answered: ¡°Yes, Master.¡± Then, this eldest disciple got up and left the tent. After Zhou Qing left, Lu Yuan continued to practice the Taiping Dao Book, accumulating his own mana. Apart from eating lunch, the rest of the time was spent on cultivation. Despite being an immortal, Lu Yuan was still strict and frugal with his time management, wasting no time. Especially now that the Heavenly and Earthly Aura was thinning, and its stock was depleting day by day. Every time a cultivator absorbed a portion of Immortal Spirit Energy, he was sucking the aura from the world. Therefore, for Lu Yuan, the more Immortal Spirit Energy he occupied and the more mana he refined, the more he felt like he was gaining for himself. After all, the more Immortal Spirit Energy he absorbs and refines into mana, the less there is for others. This urgency of time, every minute and second frantic, day and night catching up. It has to be said, it¡¯s very exhilarating. He indulged in this feeling that cultivation makes me happy, becoming somewhat addicted. However, by the afternoon, this joy of cultivation, Lu Yuan had to put a pause. Not because he was tired, but mainly because Bai Mengyang sent someone, inviting him to participate in a military conference. With official business at hand, Lu Yuan had to set aside his cultivation, tidy up his clothing, and then rush to attend the meeting. Arriving at the Central Army¡¯s big tent, upon entering, he found that almost all the people were already assembled. Seeing him arrive, the first thing Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang said was: ¡°King of Changsha, we have received responses from Saint Monk Jihui and Qiao Family Head. After consulting with each other, they agreed to accept your proposed exchange, to trade away the seats of three regional governments: Yuzhong, Linjiang, and Wushan. However, there¡¯s a precondition ¨C you need to first conquer the three prefectures of Hanzhong County and defend them. Only then can the exchange take place when they form their own countries. If by the time they form their countries and you have not held on to Hanzhong¡¯s three prefectures, the agreement will be null and void. King of Changsha, what do you think?¡± Inside the tent, Bai Mengyang took out two reply letters, gave them a shake, and then asked Lu Yuan in a deep voice. Chapter 457 - Chapter 457: Chapter 232: The Final Conquest of Hanzhong Chapter 457: Chapter 232: The Final Conquest of Hanzhong Translator: 549690339 This matter was settled. Upon hearing Bai Mengyang¡¯s words, Lu Yuan¡¯s mind was instantly filled with this thought, and he was immediately filled with joy. But he didn¡¯t let it show on his face; he simply looked at the other person, his expression serious, ¡°This is what should be expected. If I¡¯m unable to take over and retain the various prefectures of Hanzhong, it would be pointless to seek Jihui and Qiao Family Head to demand the three eastern prefectures of Xichuan.¡± The prerequisite for negotiation is that I have three prefectures to exchange for another three prefectures. If I don¡¯t even have such a territory, how am I going to negotiate for a territory swap? Therefore, bringing up this condition by Jihui and Qiao Kangquan basically meant they acknowledged the deal. Hearing this, Bai Mengyang¡¯s heart twitched, deeply sighed. In the past few days, he had sent a messenger to Wushan Prefecture in hopes of making one last effort to win over Jihui and Qiao Kangquan. However, the outcome was not satisfactory. Although Jihui and Qiao Kangquan promised in words that even after the fiefdom, they would respect the court and follow its orders, they subtly indicated that the devastated and impoverished Xichuan was not a good place to establish a country. They then sent back a letter saying the Hanzhong Prefecture was prosperous with a large population. If they could take over the place, not only would their strength increase, they could also gather more taxes, recruit more troops, and then serve the court. Therefore, they essentially agreed to the proposal of the King of Changsha and asked the Wuan Marquis to convey this. Yes, faced with the tempting proposal from Lu Yuan, Jihui and Qiao Kangquan unhesitatingly chose the most practical benefit between the court and Lu Yuan. People always choose to side with their own interest rather than friendship. Emotions always seem vulnerable in the face of interest. The Wuan Marquis and the court deeply experienced this point at this moment. Suppressing the helplessness in his heart, Wuan Marquis looked at the high-spirited Lu Yuan in front of him, focusing on the matter at hand, and then said, ¡°Since Monk Jihui and Qiao Family Head agree to exchange the territories, is your expedition also decided?¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan happily replied, ¡°As my terms have been met, there is naturally no problem with the expedition.¡± ¡°Good, then this matter is settled as such.¡± Bai Mengyang nodded, then said seriously, ¡°This expedition is a surprise attack. Especially with a change of battlefield thousands of miles away, it requires day and night rushing, light travel, without rest en route.¡± Therefore, the military forces for the expedition should be small in number, not large. As I mentioned earlier, it¡¯s appropriate to bring thirty to fifty thousand soldiers on this trip. Moreover, in the past few days, the Zhou People have been increasing their troops. In just five to six days, there are over ten thousand more troops in Xiangyang City. Even according to the scouts¡¯ reports, there are already a hundred thousand Forbidden Army in the capital of the Zhou Country heading towards Xiangyang. Furthermore, the garrison soldiers of Henan, Nanyang, and Guannei Prefectures in Zhou Country have also started to gather in preparation for moving south. As for the three regions of Hexi, Longxi, and Shuofang in Zhou Country, due to the great distance, there is uncertainty about their movements. But even if they do not make a move, just based on the three garrisons that have already started to rally, another hundred thousand troops can be easily formed. With the arrival of these two hundred thousand troops, not to mention, the hundred thousand troops in Xiangyang prefecture, the Zhou People would have an army of three hundred thousand. Furthermore, the Zhou Country has three more Grand Generals, and it is unknown whether there will be additional reinforcements this time. Considering all these factors, within a month or so, they will all arrive beneath Xiangyang City. On our side, excluding the Changsha King¡¯s main force, the whole army has only fifty thousand troops left, Southsea has forty thousand, and Ninghai has less than fifty thousand, totaling only one hundred and forty thousand. Fighting three hundred thousand with one hundred and forty thousand, especially as our army is not entirely elite with a considerable number of civilian workers present.¡± At this point, Bai Mengyang turned to look at Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange, both of whom wore awkward expressions. Helpless. For this expedition, Lu Yuan and the court brought seasoned elites. Unlike the two of them, who brought a mix of everything that can¡¯t really battle. Feelings of shame in his heart, Yan Wangqiu just wanted to end this big battle quickly and then return to his own country so he wouldn¡¯t have to deal with such a mess. However, Su Xuange secretly made up his mind that the twenty thousand elite Zhou troops he had won over in Dangyang City earlier had to be properly managed and trained. In this chaotic world, even if one is a king with a noble status, without a capable and brave army, it¡¯s hard to speak authoritatively. Just look at Lu Yuan, the Wuan Marquis speaks to him nicely, even negotiates terms, and is able to make various requests. But with the two of them, he would mock them from time to time, and when they needed to exert themselves, they were simply ordered without any discussion. The difference in treatment is uncomfortable once experienced. Not to mention, they are both kings, commanding a nation. Giving Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange a light tap, Bai Mengyang didn¡¯t spend too much effort on them, but continued, ¡°Facing the three hundred thousand strong of the Zhou People with our disparate fourteen thousand-strong army is still challenging.¡± ¡°Although this battle is not impossible to fight, if it truly happens, it would undoubtedly be a strenuous defense, with no strength left for an assault.¡± ¡°Therefore, for this expedition, I am unable to spare additional troops and generals for the King of Changsha.¡± ¡°King of Changsha, you will have to bring your own troops, execute this plan, and rush towards Xichuan.¡± Chapter 458 - Chapter 458: Chapter 232: Stabilizing Hanzhong_2 Chapter 458: Chapter 232: Stabilizing Hanzhong_2 Translator: 549690339 This time, in response to the additional forces sent by the Zhou People, Bai Mengyang¡¯s core plan did not rely on the uneven troops under his command. His true reliance was still himself, along with Inborn Grandmasters Yang Jing, Yan Wangqiu, and Su Xuange. With the power of four Inborn Grandmasters, they could deal with the invading Zhou People¡¯s army, and that was the real key to this battle. As for the 140,000 strong army, as long as they were not foolish enough to confront the Zhou People head-on in battle, seeking death. If only to hold their ground and defend the camp, the gap between the ordinary civilian workers under the command of Nanhai and Ninghai, and the elite soldiers of Zhou could be greatly reduced, as long as they had the support of fortifications. After all, in a siege, whether it¡¯s an arrow shooting down or a stone thrown down, or a hot gold juice poured down, regardless of one¡¯s martial arts prowess, as long as one is hit, the end result is often death. Those civilian workers only need to know how to shoot arrows, throw stones and pour gold juice. There were not many places where they really needed to confront the Zhou People directly. As for dealing with the martial arts experts of the Zhou People? That was even simpler. Don¡¯t forget the origins of the two countries, Nanhai and Ninghai. Both countries have their roots in the Innate Great Sects of the Jianghu martial arts world. You may not be able to ask them to bring out an elite army capable of fighting well, but martial arts experts accustomed to individual private fights? That¡¯s their forte. This time, with each of the two countries bringing 100,000 soldiers, the various officers in the army, large or small, were all filled with disciples and elders from the original two Innate sects, as well as experts from their affiliated sects. In terms of martial arts experts, the two countries¡¯ army was not lacking, even abundant. As for the imperial court¡¯s side, although they don¡¯t have as many experts as the two countries, they still met the standard requirements. Therefore, if the siege were to happen, the Zhou People would not be prepared for the attack. If they did send martial arts experts, the United Army could definitely surprise them. Of course, everything Bai Mengyang said ultimately had only one meaning. The situation at the main camp of the United Army had become very difficult, even critical. Under these circumstances, I truly could not provide any assistance. You have to rely on yourself for this thousands of miles-long expedition. Well¡­ Alright, it¡¯s indeed quite speechless. It¡¯s a matter for everyone, but Lu Yuan has to shoulder the burden alone. However, considering that he will be rewarded with three territories at the end of his efforts, while Nanhai Ninghai and even the imperial court don¡¯t get a single part, it seems reasonable again. So when Lu Yuan heard these words, he thought about it and nodded, ¡°All right, I¡¯ll rely on my own troops for the surprise attack. I will lead 50,000 soldiers to march on Xichuan and besiege Wushan Prefecture.¡± Considering that if the United Army were to suffer a devastating defeat here, not only would they be unable to hold on to the three western prefectures of Xiangyang, but they might also lose Tianmen Prefecture in Jiangbei once again. And the Zhou People might once again drink from the Yangtze River and threaten Lu Yuan¡¯s territory in Jiangnan, Changsha. Faced with the foreseeable terrifying consequences, he finally decided to take this small loss. After all, some time ago, he had already killed two of Zhou¡¯s Pillar States and eliminated two Inborns, and had already formed a deeply rooted blood feud. At this point, even if the Zhou People agree to let him defect, Lu Yuan would not dare to do so. Settling accounts after the autumn is nothing new or unusual, and he would not dare to gamble on it. Therefore, compared to before the Northern Expedition, the options available to Lu Yuan had been greatly reduced. The only remaining option is to fight the Zhou People to the end and force them to surrender or retreat. Now it¡¯s time to make a move. ¡°Good, this time we will rely on the strength of the King of Changsha for the surprise attack.¡± When Bai Mengyang heard Lu Yuan agree to the arrangement without mentioning any other conditions, he breathed a sigh of relief. He then stood up and bowed to him, ¡°Sir, the survival of our united army lies with the King of Changsha. I hope you will achieve continuous victories in your expedition and bring us a great victory by conquering Xichuan.¡± Yan Wangqiu and Su Xuange also stood up and bowed, ¡°We hope Your Highness will achieve continuous victories in your expedition, conquer Xichuan and bring us a great victory.¡± When facing the Zhou People, whether it was out of a national enmity and hatred due to historical factors, or personal factors of actual interest, the representatives of the four countries present had no good feelings towards them. The people of the South in Jiangnan and the people of the North in Jiangbei could never be consolidated. Now is the time for brave men to risk their lives and fight to the death. Everyone present had this realization. On the seventh day of the first month of Hongdao Year Eight, Lu Yuan led his army of 50,000 out to the west, after handing over the camp outside Xiangyang City. Following the Han River all the way upstream, they spent three days to reach Fangling Prefecture. Then, after joining forces with Lan Cai¡¯er who had rushed over, they continued to advance westward. The reason for calling Lan Cai¡¯er to join them was mainly due to the previous agreement. To defend the southern part of Hanzhong Prefecture, they could trade territories with Jihui and Qiao Kangquan. Therefore, in order to be safe, it was necessary to arrange for an Inborn Grandmaster to hold the territory in the southern part of Hanzhong Prefecture. As for what to do with Gui Ning, Fang Ling, and Xi Cheng prefectures? With Xiangyang under siege and Zhou forces withdrawing in Wushan Prefecture, as long as they were not foolish, who would dare to cause trouble at this time? Chapter 459 - Chapter 459: Chapter 232: Consolidating Hanzhong_3 Chapter 459: Chapter 232: Consolidating Hanzhong_3 Translator: 549690339 Accordingly, Lu Yuan only left five thousand men in each of the three prefectures. These men were responsible for maintaining everyday law and order and quelling minor disturbances. No additional guard was appointed. On the tenth day of the first month, the army arrived at Xicheng Prefecture. On the thirteenth day of the first month, the army arrived at Xixiang Prefecture in Hanzhong County. At this point, his personal disciple Chu Wei was replacing the previous Zhou Qing¡¯s duties and leading ten thousand soldiers to attack this prefecture. After Lu Yuan teamed up with him, he, along with Lan Cai¡¯er, led the attack on Xixiang Prefecture, which had stoutly defended itself for half a month. Underneath the thunderous blows from two Inborn Grandmasters, the city of Xixiang Prefecture naturally couldn¡¯t hold up, and it was broken within just half a day. More than half of the four thousand-some defenders in the city died in the battle, and the rest surrendered. It took Lu Yuan another day to split up his troops and capture all the counties of Xixiang Prefecture. Then, leaving behind five thousand men to defend, he led fifty-five thousand soldiers and arrived at Nanzheng Prefecture in Hanzhong County after three days. Nanzheng Prefecture is the location of Hanzhong County, and the Nanzheng city in this prefecture is the county city. Therefore, when Lu Yuan led his troops to arrive, the whole of Nanzheng Prefecture was in turmoil. At this point, the city of Nanzheng already received the news about a massive Yue invasion and the defeat of Xixiang Prefecture. However, the entire Hanzhong County, whether it was the county and prefecture soldiers or the town soldiers, had already been relocated south to Wushan Prefecture for battle. Within the entire county, the only troops that could be mobilized were the officials who only knew how to arrest thieves and oppress the good people, and the private guards of the various families and merchants in the city. The county leader mobilized these forces and gathered over ten thousand civilian workers, making up a force of 13,000 to defend the city. However, were these forces any match for Lu Yuan? Under his and Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s fierce attack, the Hanzhong County fell after only one day. By this point, on the seventeenth day of the first month of the eighth year of Hongdao, the United Army had finally captured the first county city since the Northern Expedition, and the Zhou People suffered their greatest loss. After capturing the city, Lu Yuan left Lan Cai¡¯er behind and assigned her fifteen thousand men. He then ordered her to continue to collect wealth and food from the city and capture the remaining territories of Hanzhong County in the following days. In addition to that, he also began to relocate the population of Hanzhong County to various parts of Changsha. The Dongting Prefecture in Changsha and the forthcoming three prefectures in Xichuan are all places with depleted populations. These thirteen prefectures have almost lost two million people compared to their prime times. To make up for such a massive population loss, relying solely on natural growth might take forty to fifty years. Therefore, to quickly recover the potential of his territory, the best method is to plunder from outside. Whether it be plundering wealth or population. Although Hanzhong Prefecture has now been defeated and the Zhou People have no significant defense in the region, Lu Yuan knows that it would be impossible to hold onto this territory even if he takes it over. This is because the Zhou People aren¡¯t likely to stand by and watch their southwestern strategic stronghold fall into his hands. This was an entire county! The Zhou People only had eight counties. Over half of Xiangyang County had been lost. If Hanzhong County was also lost, they would have lost nearly a quarter of their territory. How could the Zhou People possibly accept such a tremendous loss? Thus, even if they have to throw in everything they¡¯ve got, they have to dispatch troops southward to take the county back. It¡¯s likely that as soon as the news here gets back to them, the troops that the Wuan Marquis said he didn¡¯t know whether Zhou Country¡¯s Hexi, Longxi, and Shuofang counties would send are more likely to move. And their target was nowhere else but Hanzhong County. Lu Yuan did not have the energy to engage Zhou People¡¯s tens of thousands of troops in a decisive battle regarding the ownership of Hanzhong County at this point. Moreover, frankly speaking, even if he could win the battle, he didn¡¯t want to fight it. The reason is very simple. Even if he took over Hanzhong County, with his current strength, he would be unable to hold onto it. Firstly, to maintain the Jiangnan areas of Dongting Prefecture within Changsha, an Inborn Grandmaster was needed to defend this territory. As for the areas north of the River, including the already obtained three western prefectures of Xiangyang County, the soon-to-be-obtained three eastern prefectures of Xichuan County, and Tianmen Prefecture, these seven prefectures. In order to keep these territories, another Inborn Grandmaster was necessary. In this way, the destinations of Lu Yuan and Lan Cai¡¯er were pretty much decided. The couple, divided between the territories south and north of the River, had no spare capacity to manage anything else. Thus, even if he took over Hanzhong County, for Lu Yuan, it was essentially a chicken rib, exceeding his capabilities, and besides attracting burdens and catastrophes, there would be no advantage. Therefore, no matter how good or rich Hanzhong County was, he didn¡¯t have the slightest interest in owning this kind of territory. At this time, beyond taking a brief advantage, he had no other thoughts. Of course. If he could hold more territory in Hanzhong County after Zhou¡¯s arrival, perhaps he could exchange that for more territory in Xichuan County from Jihui and Qiao Kangquan. That would be an excellent thing for Lu Yuan. Therefore, after capturing the Nan Zheng prefecture, he quickly sent an order to the country. He asked Jiangnan to send over 20,000 troops to Hanzhong County to be at his beck and call. In Jiangnan, including the 5,000 people who had initially escorted the Zhou captives, Lu Yuan still had 65,000 troops. So at this point, deploying 20,000 troops northward might weaken the homeland defense a lot, but it could still be maintained. It wasn¡¯t a big deal. With these 20,000 soldiers, including the 5,000 left in Xixiang Prefecture and the 10,000 to be left in Nanjiang and Baishi prefectures, Lan Cai¡¯er would have 50,000 troops to command. With such number of troops and the leadership of an Inborn Grandmaster, even if the Zhou People brought 100,000 troops, they wouldn¡¯t be able to easily take Hanzhong County back if they are just defending the city. After making these arrangements, Lu Yuan continued to lead his troops southward. Then on the twentieth day of the first month, he captured Nanjiang Prefecture. After leaving 5,000 soldiers to defend, he arrived at Baishi Prefecture on the twenty-third day and captured it as well, also leaving behind 5,000 soldiers. On the twenty-fifth day of the eighth year of Hongdao, Lu Yuan led 30,000 troops to arrive at Jiange Prefecture in Xichuan County, officially arriving at Xichuan. Chapter 460 - Chapter 460: Chapter 233: Let’s Run Away Chapter 460: Chapter 233: Let¡¯s Run Away Translator: 549690339 Xichuan County, Jiange Prefecture, Jianmenguan Pass. Lu Yuan led his troops into the northern gate of Xichuan County and entered the city. He ordered some men to clear out the remaining enemies in the city while he himself went to the south-facing watchtower. Standing at the lofty pass, he gazed southwards, taking in the sight of towering mountains and ridges, with only a few winding paths carved out by ancestors for people to traverse the mountainous terrain. Xichuan County was indeed a blessed land. Not only was the land fertile, with good irrigation systems supporting millions of lives, it was surrounded by mountains and ridges, providing protection from external intrusions. If Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t taken advantage of the weak defenses of Xichuan County this time, Jianmenguan Pass would have only had slightly over a thousand defenders, making it impossible for the city to be conquered with one drumbeat. Had it been another time, the city would have been garrisoned with ten thousand troops and been aided by an Inborn Grandmaster, or even another top-tier expert, to help. Even if he were the attacker, as long as the defenders¡¯ will was strong, capturing the city would not be easy. ¡°Even the most dangerous pass depends on people to defend it. If there¡¯s no one to guard it, it¡¯s just an empty structure that can be easily pierced through like paper,¡± Lu Yuan sighed, then turned back to look at his disciple Zhou Qing, asking: ¡°Are there any righteous heroes in Xichuan County that we can contact?¡± This time, although Lu Yuan had mobilized 60,000 troops, he had left 30,000 in Hanzhong County for defense. Now, only 30,000 soldiers remained with him in Xichuan County. With 30,000 troops, capturing the entire Xichuan County seemed unrealistic, especially because occupying some of the important cities in the region would cost the majority of their forces. When Lu Yuan¡¯s army reached Wushan Prefecture, they would be fortunate to have 10,000 soldiers left. With merely 10,000 troops, fulfilling the task of coordinating with Shangguan Ming and launching a pincer attack on Wushan Prefecture was obviously insufficient. Therefore, if Lu Yuan wanted to complete his surprise attack, he had to follow Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang¡¯s plan, which was to incite the local gentry and commoners to rise in rebellion against the Zhou-Shu Alliance after entering Xichuan County. Only by mobilizing the people of Xichuan County would he have enough strength to carry out the surprise attack and defeat the 100,000-strong Zhou-Shu United Army stationed in Wushan Prefecture. However, Lu Yuan was unfamiliar with Xichuan¡¯s situation and did not know how to mobilize the locals. Fortunately, his own disciple had traveled in the area for a while and was quite familiar with the internal affairs, so they would not be entirely in the dark. Zhou Qing shook his head upon being asked, recalling what he had seen during his travels in Xichuan County: ¡°The martial artists from the Jianghu of Xichuan have been reduced by about ninety percent after two rounds of suppression and cleansing. And even those who survived are likely to have joined the Zhou and Shu factions, making them untrustworthy.¡± ¡°As for the local gentry and aristocratic families, they have withered away after years of war, leaving few remaining. It would be difficult to rely on them to accomplish anything.¡± Lu Yuan furrowed his brow: ¡°So relying on the local Jianghu martial artists and gentry to instigate rebellion would not work.¡± Zhou Qing nodded: ¡°We can¡¯t count on those people.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel disappointed because losing the support of the local gentry and martial artists would make their surprise attack more challenging. Fortunately, even without inside help, taking down Xichuan County wouldn¡¯t be difficult considering the current situation. After all, the Zhou-Shu United Army stationed in Wushan Prefecture was still thousands of miles away and was being restrained by Shangguan Ming¡¯s army, making it difficult for them to move so easily. By the time news from this side reached them, Lu Yuan¡¯s forces would have occupied more than half of Xichuan County, already a force to be reckoned with. Then, even if the Zhou-Shu United Army in Wushan Prefecture wanted to return to face the enemy, how many troops could they mobilize in haste? If only 30,000 to 50,000 soldiers arrived, Lu Yuan could swallow them up in one bite. And if the entire army retreated, they might even collapse before traveling far due to losing their rear support. Thus, no matter the outcome, the demise of the Zhou-Shu United Army in Wushan Prefecture was already determined from the moment Lu Yuan entered Xichuan County. Although disappointed at the moment, Lu Yuan was still full of confidence, saying: ¡°Since we cannot rely on the locals to launch the rebellion, we will not bother with them anymore. Instead, we will recruit people ourselves.¡± ¡°You immediately send someone to post recruitment notices near Jianmenguan Pass.¡± ¡°State that the imperial army has returned to Xichuan County and calls all loyal and righteous people to join the army to drive out the tyrannical Zhou and Qiang bandits, and restore peace in Xichuan County.¡± Taking into account his own reputation, Lu Yuan thought that he might not have much appeal in Xichuan County, so the banner he hoisted upon entering Xichuan County was still that of Da Yue. Da Yue had been ruling Xichuan County for 200 years. The name of Yue¡¯s Orthodox lineage had long been ingrained in people¡¯s hearts. If not for that, when Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang returned to Xichuan County, he wouldn¡¯t have garnered such a response from the local martial arts world and gentry, raising 100,000 troops in a short span of time. Now, although the orthodoxy of the Yue State court had declined and lost some of its luster, it couldn¡¯t overshadow the crimes committed by the Zhou and Qiang people, which were simply too terrible and unbearable for the local population. These enemies and traitors had reduced the Xichuan County¡¯s population from over 4 million to just over a million people today through a series of brutal acts. It could be said that everyone who survived in Xichuan County harbored deep resentment and hatred t owards the Zhou and Qiang people. Chapter 461 - Chapter 461: Chapter 233: Let’s Run Away (Part 2) Chapter 461: Chapter 233: Let¡¯s Run Away (Part 2) Translator: 549690339 Under such circumstances, as long as Lu Yuan raises his flag and can win consecutive battles in Xichuan Prefecture, creating a favorable situation. Local powerful and righteous heroes, as long as they still have some courage and spirit, would join him. Lu Yuan has confidence in this. Zhou Qing, who had deeply experienced the enmity between the Qiang people and the locals, held the same view as his master. Upon hearing the response, Zhou Qing immediately said, ¡°I will send someone to take care of it.¡± ¡°Well, let it be.¡± Lu Yuan nodded, didn¡¯t say anything more, but continued to look at the distant mountains and ridges, admiring the beautiful landscape. If this land of plenty could be properly developed, it would definitely become the foundation for an empire. It was a pity that such a beautiful place was ruined by the Qiang and Zhou people, and later handed over to incompetents like Jihui and Qiao Kangquan, a waste of Heaven¡¯s gift. ¡®If I have the chance one day, I must seize this land and make it the foundation of my empire.¡¯ As Lu Yuan thought, his eyes grew deeper. Time passed slowly. By noon, the remaining Zhou fugitive soldiers in the city were finally cleaned up. Camps all around the city began to cook and rest. Zhou Qing took advantage of this time to send people to the nearby villages outside Jianmenguan, spreading the news of the return of the Royal Teacher¡¯s army and recruiting more soldiers. However, it was still too early to tell if there would be any results, and it would take some time before they could know. In the afternoon, Lu Yuan left a hundred people to guard Jianmenguan, or rather, make a symbolic gesture. After all, a mere hundred people couldn¡¯t even fully man the two city walls, let alone maintain such a stronghold. They were just there to declare to the nearby people that the Royal Teacher had returned. And to handle the recruitment of more soldiers thereafter. The symbolic gesture was more important than the actual one. However, the remaining Zhou fugitives had been cleared out, and the areas north of Jianmenguan had been occupied by Lu Yuan, so there was no harm in leaving a smaller number of people to guard the area. So, Lu Yuan confidently led the large group of soldiers southward. On the twenty-sixth day of the first month of Hongdao¡¯s eighth year. After capturing Jianmenguan, Lu Yuan conquered the city of Jiange Prefecture the following day, then took two more days to successfully occupy the entire prefecture¡¯s ten counties by dividing his forces. After leaving a thousand soldiers to garrison in Jiange Prefecture, he continued to lead his army southward. On the third day of the second month, he captured Xuanwu Prefecture. On the eighth day, he captured Chengdu Prefecture and reclaimed the prefectural city of Jinguan. On the tenth day, Liu Ming, a local magnate of Tongchuan Prefecture, heard of the triumphant return of the Royal Teacher¡¯s army, and decided to rebel and join the cause. In just a few days, he gathered several thousand people, attacked and occupied several county towns, took the local population hostage, and raised a force of tens of thousands of soldiers, besieging the enemy. On the twelfth day of the second month, Lu Yuan¡¯s army captured Anyue Prefecture, and soon heard the news. With the fierce battle in Anyue city just over, Lu Yuan sat in the bloodstained hall of the prefectural office and said to Zhou Qing, ¡°What¡¯s the story of Tongchuan¡¯s Liu Ming? And how many people have risen up in the prefectures and counties of Xichuan Prefecture?¡± During these days, although Lu Yuan had been leading his army to capture cities and territories, he had not neglected forming alliances with local powerful figures and recruiting soldiers, which Zhou Qing was responsible for. ¡°I have never heard of this Tongchuan Liu family before, so they must not be part of the Jianghu community. Perhaps they are an ordinary, unknown local aristocratic family,¡± Zhou Qing replied. ¡°As for the number of people who have responded, there are some, but not many, only about ten groups. Together, they couldn¡¯t even make up a force of ten thousand men, so they wouldn¡¯t pose a threat.¡± However, the news from Jiange, Xuanwu, and Chengdu prefectures about the recruitment in recent days had been quite encouraging. In just over half a month, more than twenty thousand people had joined the ranks of the army. If given a longer time, another ten thousand could be expected.¡± As Lu Yuan continued to conquer Xichuan, he remained undefeated in battle. Especially after recovering Jinguan, the heart of Xichuan Prefecture, it further boosted the morale of people all over Xichuan, causing many to eagerly join the ranks. At this moment, the large number of reinforcements and attracted forces was a result of the influence of the victories. Hearing this good news, Lu Yuan nodded slightly, ¡°In that case, including the recruited righteous heroes in our hands, we already have fifty thousand troops. Adding those who have responded to our call, we have a force of seventy thousand, right?¡± Zhou Qing replied, ¡°That¡¯s about right. However, we have been in Xichuan for more than half a month, and the news should have reached Wushan Prefecture by now. They will surely take action.¡± Lu Yuan laughed, ¡°There¡¯s no need to worry too much about that. The Zhou-Shu United Army in Wushan Prefecture is already on its last legs, just waiting for death. Besides, we already got news from the interrogation of captives.¡± The food and fodder for Wushan Prefecture¡¯s hundred-thousand-strong enemy army were stored in Yuzhong Prefecture, the supplies being sent to the front line from there. As long as we could capture this prefecture, cutting off their food supply, even if they had a hundred thousand troops, they would still starve to death.¡± Continuing, he added, ¡°Instead, select some people to act as messengers and send them to Tongchuan Liu Ming and the other local armies.¡± They should immediately lead their forces to Yuzhong Prefecture and rendezvous with me, jointly attacking the Zhou-Shu United Army in Wushan Prefecture.¡± Chapter 462 - Chapter 462: Chapter 233: Let’s Run Away_3 Chapter 462: Chapter 233: Let¡¯s Run Away_3 Translator: 549690339 Bring all the troops we recruited from the rear to Yuzhong Prefecture.¡± Lu Yuan had recruited righteous armies from the rear and contacted people in various places to incite uprisings, all in order to obtain cannon fodder for himself. Now, with the prospect of a great victory, these arrangements had finally paid off, and he naturally wanted to make use of them. However, Zhou Qing was somewhat worried about this: ¡°These local uprisers are largely from unsophisticated backgrounds, so they may not obey orders obediently and follow military orders.¡± Lu Yuan said coldly, ¡°If they don¡¯t obey orders, then they are colluding with the enemy and rebelling. They are enemies who are causing chaos in the local areas. Of course, we must suppress them.¡± Having said that, he looked at his disciple and said, ¡°Xiaoqing, I¡¯ll leave 10,000 troops to you. Stay here in Anyue Prefecture. Whoever doesn¡¯t obey orders, lead your troops to suppress them. The favorable situation I, Lu Yuan, have fought for is not for these people to take advantage of me and refuse to work. There is no such good thing in the world.¡± For Lu Yuan, if a force cannot be used for his benefit, it¡¯s better to destroy it. In order to prevent others from following suit, one by one disobeying military orders and not following his command, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t mind making an example by killing to deter those local righteous armies who had taken advantage of his tailwind and emerged. Let them understand who the real shot-caller is. As Zhou Qing was already in charge of this matter, he naturally had no objections to this order and accepted the task directly: ¡°Yes, disciple obeys the order. I will make sure to supervise the righteous armies in various places and have them head to Yuzhong Prefecture.¡± Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°Master is reassured with you handling the matter.¡± Thus, the matter of gathering cannon fodder was settled. Afterwards, Lu Yuan left troops for Zhou Qing to station in Anyue Prefecture as deterrence to various places in Xichuan before continuing to lead the troops eastward. On the 17th day of the second month in the eighth year of Hongdao, Lu Yuan¡¯s army captured Panshi Prefecture. On the 19th day, several local uprisers in Nanchong Prefecture jointly captured the counties within the prefecture, liberating Nanchong. On the 21st day, Lu Yuan reached Yuzhong Prefecture City and then captured it after a battle. More than 1,000 of the 5,000 defenders in the city were killed in the battle, and the remaining troops surrendered. On the 23rd day, the Zhou Shu United Army from Wushan Prefecture finally reacted and sent a fire-fighting army of 50,000 people to Yuzhong Prefecture in a hurry. By this time, Lu Yuan was already garrisoning the city with more than 20,000 troops, and behind him, a steady stream of large armies were rushing over. Outside Yuzhong Prefecture City, at the foot of the mountain, rows upon rows of tents were being newly built, and banners fluttering, and cooking smoke filled the entire mountain ridge. Li Xiong came to a hillside and looked up at the majestic mountain city in the distance. He couldn¡¯t help but sigh, ¡°In the end, I came one step too late and let someone take control of Yuzhong Prefecture City.¡± Yuzhong Prefecture is a mountain city. Although the road into the city has been leveled and is relatively wide, it¡¯s still a mountain road and difficult to traverse. Attacking from the foot of the mountain to the top, not only consumes a great deal of physical strength but also exposes oneself completely to the range of attacks from the defenders, making the siege much more difficult. Moreover, Yuzhong Prefecture City is near the water, with the Yangtze River to the south. It¡¯s easy to get water, so the city¡¯s water supply cannot be cut off. Especially at this time, the city is stocked with military food originally supplied for their 100,000-strong army, and food is not lacking. Under these adverse conditions and with tens of thousands of defenders in the city, especially with an Innate among them, it is almost impossible to break through the city¡¯s defenses. After observing the city¡¯s defenses for a while, Li Xiong couldn¡¯t think of a strategy for attacking the city. Frustrated, he turned his head and asked his subordinates, ¡°Who is the Yue commander who suddenly rose up and attacked our rear? Did you find out?¡± Someone answered, ¡°According to the scouts¡¯ information, the Yue army that came from the rear claims to be from Changsha Kingdom. They are Changsha people. Based on this, the one leading the troops should be King of Changsha, Lu Yuan.¡± ¡°Lu Yuan¡ª¡ª¡± Upon hearing the name, Li Xiong involuntarily lengthened his tone, and his expression suddenly darkened. His voice trembled involuntarily, ¡°How could it be him?¡± By this time, Lu Yuan¡¯s reputation had become well-known throughout the Northern Expedition front line. Among both camps, whether it was leading generals or rank-and-file soldiers, almost everyone had heard of the King of Changsha who had defeated a hundred thousand troops with his surprise attack and killed two Pillar State Grand Generals on the way. To the Zhou army soldiers, Lu Yuan was an invincible military god and an extremely powerful commander. But for Innate Grandmasters like Li Xiong, Lu Yuan was an undoubted harbinger of death. How formidable must a killing god be to kill two Innates in just a month¡¯s time? Does such a person even exist? Even if they do, how did they grow so powerful? He heard that it had only been a little over a year since Lu Yuan broke through to Innate. This was a doubt that many Innate Grandmasters couldn¡¯t help but think of, and then they were unable to figure it out. But no matter how they couldn¡¯t comprehend it, when Li Xiong heard that Lu Yuan was on the other side, his heart immediately began to feel uneasy. ¡°Facing this killing god, it¡¯s hard this time.¡± Li Xiong felt bitter in his heart. If he had been holding out some hope of capturing the city and retaking the rear earlier, it disappeared the moment he learned that Lu Yuan was the one defending the city. Not only did the thought vanish, but Li Xiong even felt some fear. Gui Lianyun and Zhang Chanyi were both people he had seen, and either of them was much stronger than him. Yet such formidable people had died at Lu Yuan¡¯s hands. As a newly promoted Innate who was much weaker than the previous two, he was naturally afraid when facing such a killing god. Now, Li Xiong was somewhat apprehensive. Even because of this fear, he wavered a bit. ¡®Maybe I should just abandon the army and run away.¡¯ He looked at the surrounding mountains and suddenly felt that the once beautiful mountains and rivers he was proud of were no longer as pleasing as before. At this moment, the layers of mountains seemed like a cage, tightly binding him within. Outside the cage, danger was closing in step by step. This place had become a dead end. Chapter 463 - Chapter 463: Chapter 234: Fleeing Upon Hearing the Wind Chapter 463: Chapter 234: Fleeing Upon Hearing the Wind Translator: 549690339 ¡°As for escapism, Li Xiong was seriously considering it. Firstly, given the current situation, the prefecture city in Xiangyang was under siege, and the massive Yue army was pressing on the border. It was uncertain whether it could be held or not. On this side of the Xichuan Prefecture, Lu Yuan also led a sneak attack from the rear. Now, more than half of the Xichuan Prefecture had been captured, and the entire rear route of their hundred thousand troops was cut off. Now the other side was guarding the fortified city, and reinforcements were constantly pouring in from the rear. In contrast, with a hundred thousand men on his side, the rear route was cut off, and even the food and fodder were running scarce due to the loss of the Fu City in Yuzhong. What were the consequences of lacking food and fodder? One only needed to look at the example of the Wuan Marquis before to know. Even Bai Mengyang, who had defended Yuzhong Prefecture before, had been driven to retreat in embarrassment and run back to Tianmen Prefecture alone due to the Miao people¡¯s capture of Baling Prefecture and the severance of the grain road at the rear. Li Xiong didn¡¯t think that he and Yuwen Chong, the Grand General and pillar state of the Zhou people in Wushan Prefecture, could surpass Bai Mengyang. Since even the Wuan Marquis, the Military God, couldn¡¯t accomplish this, they were even less likely to succeed. Therefore, this side of Xichuan Prefecture had already become a dead end. To stay here and wait for the Yue people to gather their strength, and for their own food supplies to run out completely, the army would disintegrate. When the enemy attacks then, it would indeed be a matter of life and death. Although it was hard for Li Xiong to give up the foundation he established on this side of Xichuan Prefecture, it had to be done. The Emperor of Xi Shu, or rather the Shu King now. Ever since he had sided with the Zhou People, Li Xiong had already abandoned his emperor¡¯s title and been demoted to king in order not to clash with the emperor of Zhou Country. Moreover, not only that, but the affairs of Xichuan Prefecture had gradually been taken out of Li Xiong¡¯s control after the Zhou people¡¯s arrival. As for the Shu King, apart from the tens of thousands of Qiang soldiers under his command, he could no longer control anyone else. The other prefectures and counties, as well as the palace officials, were all controlled and infiltrated by the Zhou people. Although Li Xiong was a Shu King in name, in reality, he had long been a puppet, merely a general commanding tens of thousands of troops. It was precisely because of this that it was especially easy for him to give up what he had already mostly lost. Compared to dying here and losing everything, At this moment, leaving behind these tens of thousands of troops, Li Xiong was still an Inborn Grandmaster. With this level of strength, he could dominate in any region he went to. ¡®I could even go to the southwest and find a small barbarian state, dominate them by force, and become a king.¡¯ With this thought, Li Xiong¡¯s heart was suddenly moved. Instead of being a puppet in this place and taking the risk of dying in battle, it would be better to go far away and live in leisure. As an Inborn Grandmaster, why should I be trapped in this kind of dead end? The more he thought about it, the more tempted he became. However, although this was the case, hesitating to abandon his tens of thousands of Qiang soldiers and hundreds of thousands of Qiang tribespeople still made Li Xiong somewhat reluctant. After all, they were his family and his most trusted followers. It wasn¡¯t so easy to make this decision to abandon them at this moment. ¡®Forget it, let¡¯s try to fight first and see the outcome later.¡¯ Li Xiong suppressed the urge to leave immediately and sighed, ¡°In any case, if I really want to escape, it won¡¯t be difficult for me to save my life from the chaos. As long as I don¡¯t go looking for the likes of Lu Yuan. I was born in the Qiang tribe, and my achievements today are all thanks to the support of these people. I can¡¯t bear to abandon them now.¡± With the last bit of conscience in his heart, Li Xiong took a deep sigh and then turned and went down the hill. After a day of busyness, the fifty thousand Zhou-Shu United Army finally set up camp outside Yuzhong Prefecture City. Once they had settled in, Li Xiong dispatched ten thousand troops to attack Yuzhong Prefecture City vigorously. However, after a few charges and thousands of casualties, they couldn¡¯t even get close to the city gate and were beaten back halfway up the mountain. Seeing that the assault was not successful was disheartening, and with the loss of the rear retreat, it suddenly dampened the United Army¡¯s morale. Luckily, Li Xiong¡¯s prestige was still okay, barely maintaining the army¡¯s morale. On the second day, he continued to deploy twenty thousand troops, offering gold and silver rewards on the spot, allowing the soldiers to take turns to attack Yuzhong Prefecture City. This time, the soldiers of the Zhou-Shu United Army also knew the situation was critical. If they didn¡¯t capture Yuzhong Prefecture City and seize the grain in the city, they would all die without a proper burial. With Li Xiong¡¯s heavy rewards, they took the offensive eagerly in the city attack. Several times, they even managed to launch an attack outside the city and even made it onto the city walls. In the end, Lu Yuan had no choice but to take action personally, using the power of the Innate to kill thousands in formation and repel the offensive. During this time, however, Li Xiong hid behind his troops, watching his soldiers be wantonly massacred by Lu Yuan without daring to interfere. This kind of behavior immediately led to the plunge of the hard-won morale of the Zhou-Shu United Army. With a commander who was cowardly and afraid to fight, What was the point for the soldiers? Not to mention the divine might of Lu Yuan, who dealt with ordinary soldiers with ease, as if slaughtering them. With their leader scared and hesitant, the soldiers naturally followed suit and began to fear and fight timidly. Thus, on the third day, when Li Xiong gathered another twenty thousand troops and sent them to attack the city, These soldiers of the Zhou-Shu United Army fought with minimal effort. They only made a few random charges. Then, when the defenders resisted fiercely and made it difficult to attack, they threw down more than two thousand corpses and fled down the mountain.¡± Chapter 464 - Chapter 464: Chapter 234: Fleeing Upon Hearing the News_2 Chapter 464: Chapter 234: Fleeing Upon Hearing the News_2 Translator: 549690339 The morale of these enemies cannot be used anymore. On the fourth day, more than 20,000 newly recruited militiamen of Lu Yuan¡¯s rear bolstered his forces. At this point, the first group of more than 10,000 people finally arrived in Fu City¡¯s Yuzhong Prefecture around the clock. The number of defenders in the city subsequently increased to 30,000. Upon observing the arrival of reinforcements while also realizing that the morale of the army was low and they were already unfit for combat. Li Xiong did not continue the siege, but instead entrenched himself in the camp erected at the foot of the mountain and adopted a defensive strategy. On the sixth day, several nearby factions of the righteous army, leading more than 7,000 men, arrived in Yuzhong Prefecture of Fu City. On the seventh day, the remaining tens of thousands of militiamen arrived in Yuzhong. On the eighth and the ninth day, the armies of the Righteous Army like Tongchuan Liu Ming and others from various places, arrived successively. By the fifteenth day, after eliminating two disobedient factions of the righteous army in the rear, Zhou Qing led another 10,000 freshly recruited brave men, along with the 10,000 soldiers he already commanded, and hastily arrived at Fu City in Yuzhong Prefecture. By this point, the total number of soldiers under Lu Yuan¡¯s command, both inside and outside Yuzhong Prefecture in Fu City, had increased to nearly one hundred thousand. Their morale was in a high state. The army was strong and morale was high. So, on the sixteenth day, Lu Yuan changed his tactics, opened the gates and formed a battle formation, assembled the righteous army that had gathered, and asked them to start intensively attacking the camp at the foot of the mountain. The righteous army had about thirty thousand people, Lu Yuan ordered them to take turns on the battlefield, ceaselessly attacking the enemy camp. Several rebellions occurred due to severe casualties. In the end, it was only after killing more than a thousand people that they finally suppressed the rebellions. After three days of heavy onslaught and breaking the outer perimeter of the enemy camp, Lu Yuan started to withdraw the righteous army which now consisted of less than ten thousand people, who had been fighting for several days. Then he assembled his newly recruited militiaman, a total of more than forty thousand people, leading them in person to continue the offensive against the enemy camp. After two days, more than half of the Zhou Shu Coalition¡¯s camp had been captured. Even counting the losses from a few days prior, the enemy forces had lost more than twenty thousand troops. But during this time, Li Xiong still hadn¡¯t shown his face. The Zhou Shu United Army¡¯s resistance was also gradually weakening. Time passed and it was the twenty-first day. That early morning. Cornet sounded continuously in Yuzhong City, a large number of elites assembled and began to head out of the city. Lu Yuan stood on the city tower, looking down at the foot of the mountain from a height, overlooking the enemy camp that had already shrunk, he turned his head and addressed his disciple Zhou Qing, ¡°The war has been dragging on for almost a month. The enemy and I have been fighting continually, but their commander has not made a move yet. According to the captured soldiers, the commander of the enemy forces outside the city is reportedly Li Xiong, the Pseudo-Shu King. Even though he has an Inborn body, he just sits idly by while I slaughter his subordinates mercilessly. Although I don¡¯t know why he is acting like this, after fighting for so many days, the enemy¡¯s troops have been halved, leaving less than 30,000 soldiers, and morale is at an extreme low. Under these circumstances, it¡¯s the perfect opportunity to defeat the enemy. I will brave the arrows and personally lead the elite soldiers to break their formation. You should command the army from the rear and follow up quickly. Today, I will break through the enemy¡¯s lines in one fell swoop.¡± Zhou Qing looked at his spirited Master, seemed inspired, and said loudly, ¡°Master, just stride forward as you please and kill. I will lead the troops closely behind you, we will never fall behind.¡± Lu Yuan laughed, ¡°Good, today let¡¯s father and disciple break this bandit together.¡± Having said that, with one leap, he jumped off the city tower and landed on a prepared horse at the gate. ¡°Off we go!¡± He whipped his horse, it began to gallop, and he went forward. A few dozen knights followed closely behind him. Seeing this, Zhou Qing also descended from the city tower and started to take action. Lu Yuan had already begun the assault on the camp, so he needed to arrange his troops as soon as possible to follow the suit, and not let his Master get caught in the enemy encampments. The drumbeat roared, the flags fluttered. In front of the enemy camp, more than ten thousand soldiers had already assembled, while more were rushing down from the mountain. Lu Yuan, riding a fine horse, raced to within a hundred steps of the enemy camp. Then, using his True pneuma, he shouted loudly, ¡°Lu Yuan is here, Li Xiong, you rat! Dare you come out and fight me one on one?¡± His voice was thunderous and instantly reverberated across the vast open field. Not only could the soldiers lined up on the outside hear him, but even those inside the enemy encampments could also hear. Yet, in response to this challenge, the guards on the walls of the enemy camp looked out for a while, glancing backwards every now and then, waiting for something or someone. But no matter how long they waited, the person they were expecting to see never showed up. At this point, it became clear that their commander was showing cowardice in the face of battle. Although many understood that it was normal for their commander to fear engaging with the King of Changsha, this kind of display by the commander in the midst of war, in everyone¡¯s eyes, was incompetence. Thus, some of the Zhou soldiers started to curse aloud. ¡°What kind of Shu King is this, he fears the enemy so much that he doesn¡¯t dare show his face. This kind of courage makes him a Rat King, not the Shu King.¡± ¡°We brothers have been bitterly fighting for several days, facing the bandit¡¯s Inborn master, we are determined to fight fiercely. Li Xiong, the bandit, also an Inborn, doesn¡¯t dare show his face, he just watches us ordinary people go to our deaths. To die for him is truly a cruel fate for all of us.¡± ¡°The bandits outside the city are assembling the elite soldiers, and Lu Yuan has appeared again, it seems that he is prepared to take a personal action again, this time another thousand will die, alas, truly miserable. Who knows, who will die this time?¡± ¡°Damn it, I don¡¯t want to fight anymore. Seeing Li Xiong in this state, it¡¯s no wonder he lost the land of Xi Shu.¡± The above were the comments of the more rational Zhou soldiers. The rest, who were crude and uneducated, began to curse all the kin and descendants of Li Xiong, including his ancestors. Chapter 465 - Chapter 465: Chapter 234: Fleeing Upon Hearing the News_3 Chapter 465: Chapter 234: Fleeing Upon Hearing the News_3 Translator: 549690339 Hearing these harsh words, not a few of the Qiang soldiers nearby had their faces turn sour. It was difficult for many of them to accept that their Qiang king was being insulted this way. But the things the Zhou People were saying were all true. Given Li Xiong¡¯s behavior over the past few days, not only the Zhou people, but even the low-ranking Qiang soldiers wanted to swear at him. The only reasons they didn¡¯t were they had to save face and their inherent fear of the naturally privileged prevented them from voicing it out. They weren¡¯t brave enough to speak up, but actually enjoyed hearing the Zhou People scolding their king now. However, after all the cursing, the morale of the entire United Army visibly dipped. The bandits were about to launch a fierce attack, and by the looks of their armed and armored troops, it was clear they were elite soldiers and strong generals, led by Lu Yuan, the god of war. On their side, the only one who could resist the enemy was their commander Li Xiong, who was too cowardly to fight. Under such circumstances, they didn¡¯t know what they could use to fight back. Was it even meaningful to keep resisting like this? These were the doubts many had in their hearts. As the Zhou and Qiang soldiers were lost in confusion, Lu Yuan outside the city shouted his challenge twice again. Upon seeing that there was still no response, he stopped challenging and gave the order for the army to attack the camp. He himself immediately spurred his horse forward, leading the charge into the camp. Seeing the enemy¡¯s war drums and horns sounding and thousands of enemies rushing in, the soldiers guarding the camp instinctively drew their bows and started to fight back, no longer lost in thoughts about life. But how could mere arrows harm Lu Yuan? He charged forward, fiery flames appearing around him, incinerating anything nearing him, and nothing could get close. The distance of a hundred steps was covered in the blink of an eye. A few breaths later, the strong fortifications in front of him were burnt open by the fiery flames, and Lu Yuan jumped forward with his horse, plunging directly into the heart of the enemy¡¯s camp. Dozens of enemy soldiers turned into ashes within a radius of tens of yards. After that, Lu Yuan moved to the left and to the right, killing quickly, and in a short time, more than two hundred enemy soldiers fell. Seeing this, the remaining enemy around, whose morale was already extremely low, lost all courage to resist and began to flee. Then, this atmosphere of retreat spread rapidly. The United Army soldiers, who had been dissatisfied with Li Xiong for a long time, didn¡¯t want to risk their lives for him anymore. Seeing that the fight had become hopeless, they all chose to run for their lives. Some even directly dropped their weapons and surrendered to the Southsea Army. Except for a few loyal tribal warriors of Qiang origin, no one else was willing to continue fighting. As for these stubborn elements, they naturally became the target of Lu Yuan. After several encounters on the battlefield, the remaining thousand Qiang soldiers were quickly eliminated by him. Then, without stopping, Lu Yuan sprinted straight for the enemy¡¯s central tent, to search for Li Xiong, the enemy commander who had remained out of sight since the start of the battle. However, when he arrived at the central tent, Lu Yuan found that the place was deserted and there was no sign of Li Xiong. He caught a few fleeing soldiers nearby and questioned them, only to find out that when Lu Yuan had challenged him, Li Xiong had already used the pretext of a camp patrol to leave with some of his confidants without anyone knowing where they went. ¡°Did he run away?¡± Lu Yuan was somewhat incredulous at this result. He never expected that Li Xiong, who was once a mighty ruler and even dominated Xichuan, had now fallen to such a state. Not only was he avoiding battle, but he also ran away at the sight of danger. The mere sound of his challenge had scared Li Xiong enough to make him run away with his men. This made him feel both amused and angry, but also surprised, stirring up some unusual emotions in his heart. ¡°Could it be that my prestige has reached such a level that it can scare off an Inborn Grandmaster without a fight?¡± At this moment, Lu Yuan could almost confirm that for more than half of this month, Li Xiong has been out of sight out of fear of him. This discovery naturally made him feel proud and slightly puzzled. Could I, Lu, really be that awesome? That¡¯s an Inborn Grandmaster we¡¯re talking about. To be able to scare off an Inborn Grandmaster just by his reputation, Lu Yuan could only think of one example in his memory. That was when Yin Huixuan of the Liuyang Sect went south to Lingnan, Yan Wangqiu, out of fear for his reputation, preemptively left the Nanhai Sect before Yin Huixuan¡¯s arrival, dare not to face him. But under those circumstances, Yin Huixuan was a top-ranked Inborn Second-level master, essentially the number one in Yue Country¡¯s martial arts world. Secondly, Yan Wangqiu was old and weak, already in his twilight years, simply not capable of fighting anymore. In such a situation, it was understandable why he fled in fear. Those who knew the inside story would not have much to say. But now, Lu Yuan was just at the initial Inborn Level, and even his time breaking through Innate was shorter than Li Xiong¡¯s, making him his junior. However, Li Xiong, this senior, when facing Lu Yuan the junior, didn¡¯t even dare to fight, he just fled. Even with Lu Yuan¡¯s fine record of many previous victories, once this matter spreads, Li Xiong will undoubtedly be laughed at and despised by many Inborn Grandmasters, disgraced and unwilling to be on par with him. Upon thinking deeply about this puzzle in his heart, Lu Yuan took a deep breath, suppressing his surprise and excitement, finally confirming one thing. That is, after his own successful streak of defeating two Inborn Grandmasters, the reputation he has amassed now far exceeds his previous expectations. This intimidation is big enough to influence the course of a battle. Li Xiong¡¯s fleeing at the wind was a clear indication of this. Even considering this man¡¯s contributions, the mere fact of frightening off an Inborn Grandmaster by his reputation alone speaks volumes. It can be imagined that once this gets out, Lu Yuan¡¯s reputation will only further increase. ¡°Overall, this is quite a good development for me.¡± Having figured this out, Lu Yuan glanced at the kneeling prisoners around him, his heart filled with delight. He was not only happy because of his victory but also because of his increasing combat achievements and growing reputation. In the eighth year of Hongdao era, on the sixteenth of March, King Changsha, Lu Yuan, with an army of a hundred thousand, fought against the Zhou-Shu United Army in the city of Yuzhong Prefecture, achieving a significant victory. During the battle, thirty thousand were beheaded, and twenty thousand were captured. Enemy General, Shu King Li Xiong, abandoned his troops and fled, his whereabouts unknown. Following the great victory, King Changsha took the opportunity to advance his troops eastward and successfully recaptured Linjiang Mansion. On the twentieth of March, the army arrived at Wushan Prefecture, took over the prefecture city, stood at the gate of Wushan Pass, surrounding the remaining thirty thousand Zhou soldiers inside the pass. Commander of the Zhou army inside the pass, Yuwen Chong, upon receiving the news, feared being besieged and killed by Lu Yuan, Shangguan Ming and the other three Inborn Grandmasters, chose to tread on the path of Gui Lianyun and Zhang Chanyi. Just like Li Xiong, he abandoned his troops and fled that very night. Therefore, on the second day, when the Zhou army within the pass found out that their commander had run away, the army¡¯s spirit was greatly shaken. After a period of chaos, a few temporarily selected decision-makers consulted and unanimously concluded that there was no need to continue fighting. Therefore, they unanimously decided to surrender by opening the city gate. On the twenty-third day of the third month of the eighth year of Hongdao, thirty thousand Zhou soldiers at Wushan Pass surrendered, Lu Yuan and Shangguan Ming led the troops into the city, and Wushan Pass was taken. With this, since Lu Yuan led the surprise attack, it took two months to finally achieve the target. Not only were all the lost territories of Xichuan restored, but also the one hundred thousand Zhou-Shu United Army entrenched within Wushan Pass has been completely wiped out. The United Army achieved the second great victory since the Northern Expedition. Chapter 466 - Chapter 466: Chapter 235: Starting Well but Ending Poorly Chapter 466: Chapter 235: Starting Well but Ending Poorly Translator: 549690339 Inside Wushan Pass. After Lu Yuan led the troops into the city, he immediately ordered people to receive the captives in the city. It is unknown whether the defenders of the pass intentionally surrendered or truly feared his reputation. This time, when they surrendered, they chose Lu Yuan among the more than 30,000 defenders of the Pass. As a result, he was able to lead his troops into the city without Shangguan Ming¡¯s knowledge on the other side of the Pass. Of course, Lu Yuan would not be polite about such a great opportunity. There were more than 30,000 elite Zhou soldiers in the city, a powerful force. If you add in the 20,000 captives he had previously recruited outside Fu City in Yuzhong Prefecture. Since the surprise attack, he had recruited a total of 50,000 elite soldiers, greatly enriching his own strength. Of course, one should not forget the nearly 10,000-strong righteous army and the remaining more than 30,000-strong militia after the successive battles. These two forces combined are a formidable force. In a trip to Xichuan, Lu Yuan not only did not lose any of his 30,000 troops despite dozens of battles, but in fact gained nearly 100,000 more men. This brilliant achievement is enough to be considered a great victory. After sending people to integrate the defenders in the city and take control of the various vaults, Lu Yuan ordered the east city gate to be opened, sent people out to spread the news, and informed Shangguan Ming and others that Wushan Pass had been recovered. So after waiting for more than an hour, Shangguan Ming, accompanied by Jihui and Qiao Kangquan, led the vanguard of the united army and hurriedly entered the official city. After meeting, Shangguan Ming looked at Lu Yuan with an unpleasant expression: ¡°During this surprise attack on Xichuan, the King of Changsha has made great achievements.¡± In leading the troops to attack Wushan Pass this time, he ended up garrisoned outside the Pass, wasting time without any merit. By now, the enemy he had been entangled with for several months suddenly surrendered to Lu Yuan. The tens of thousands of Zhou soldiers in the city merely fell into the hands of the opposing side for nothing, Which made Shangguan Ming unwilling to accept it. As for those Zhou captives, not only was Lu Yuan eager for them, but the court was also greedy for them. After all, the court has been fighting wars every year and has lost hundreds of thousands of elite soldiers. By now, only over 200,000 elite soldiers are left in the court. Frankly speaking, this number is far from enough to meet the court¡¯s normal needs. If they rely solely on their own training, it will take at least five to six years for the young generation to grow up, given the large consumption of high-quality soldiers in the four Jiangdong districts currently controlled by the court, before they can fill the gap. So at this time, it would be very good for the court to recruit a batch of elites from the Zhou people and directly add them to their own army. ¡®It¡¯s a pity that Lu Yuan has once again taken a step ahead and snatched the captives away.¡¯ Shangguan Ming glanced at Lu Yuan worriedly. As he already has a heavy military force with more than 100,000 strong soldiers, adding more elites from the Zhou people now will make him even more difficult to control in the future. Alas, why is the court¡¯s heart so hard to achieve its great cause? The Wucheng Marquis could not help but sigh in his heart. However, compared to Shangguan Ming¡¯s worries, Jihui and Qiao Kangquan were simply delighted. With the recovery of Wushan Pass, Xichuan Prefecture is now fully in their hands, and the court¡¯s promised fief is finally in their possession. By this time, all they had to do was wait for the court¡¯s decree to arrive, and after officially handing over their territories with Lu Yuan., they would be able to formally establish their country in Xichuan. How could they not be happy about such a great thing? Therefore, in admiring Lu Yuan for his great contribution in recovering Xichuan, the two Grandmasters genuinely congratulated him unlike Shangguan Ming¡¯s sarcastic praise. ¡°The King of Changsha has traveled thousands of miles in a surprise attack, defeating both the Zhou and Shu thieves. His great military prowess is truly admirable. I believe that when the news spreads, everyone in the world will respect and fear him.¡± ¡°Indeed, a lone army infiltrating deep behind enemy lines and a single man overcoming an entire Prefecture. Such courage is truly worthy of being called a Military God.¡± Both of them did not hesitate to praise Lu Yuan. Hearing these compliments, Lu Yuan naturally smiled and humbly accepted their praise, eager to establish a good relationship with Jihui and Qiao Kangquan. In the future, the two would be his neighbors, and with a good relationship, it would ensure his rear would be peaceful. As for Shangguan Ming, seeing this scene only made his worried heart heavier. He had to change the subject so as not to choke himself with blood: ¡°This time the King of Changsha has recovered Xichuan, and it is indeed a great achievement for the United Army. But I wonder where Li Xiong and Yuwen Chong, the thieves, have gone now?¡± Hearing the question, Lu Yuan had to put aside the conversation with his two neighbors and shook his head: ¡°I don¡¯t know that. Previously, Li Xiong led the army to fight against me, but he never showed up during the entire process. Later, after I defeated the troops he led, his subordinates said that he had already abandoned the army and fled before meeting with me. When we arrived at the foot of Wushan Pass, Yuwen Chong was also like that. I guess the two thieves might have escaped back to Zhou Country and ran to Xiangyang.¡± Lu Yuan said somewhat uncertainly. Hearing his words, Shangguan Ming, Jihui, and Qiao Kangquan looked at each other, their expressions varied. As Lu Yuan had thought before, after he achieved the feat of making Inborn Grandmasters flee without a fight, the weight of his position had increased compared to before. At this time, the three of them were like that. While astonished in their hearts, they couldn¡¯t help but pay more attention and be wary of the King of Changsha before them. Shangguan Ming laughed sardonically, forcibly suppressing his astonishment and lamenting, ¡°It¡¯s a pity that the two thieves have escaped. If they return to Zhou Country, we will have to face two Inborn Grandmasters again in the future, and Xiangyang will be even harder to capture.¡± Chapter 467 - Chapter 467: Chapter 235: Starting Well but Ending Poorly_2 Chapter 467: Chapter 235: Starting Well but Ending Poorly_2 Translator: 549690339 Next to him, the Venerable Jihui said: ¡°This is also inevitable; no one could have predicted that these two would flee without a fight due to their extreme cowardice.¡± Qiao Kangquan agreed: ¡°It is indeed extremely difficult, even impossible, to stop an Inborn Grandmaster once they decide to flee.¡± Lu Yuan smiled, ignoring the implicit blame in Shangguan Ming¡¯s words, and asked: ¡°I have spent two months on the surprise attack on Xichuan and have been out of touch with the outside world for a long time. What is the situation in Xiangyang now? I remember when I left, Zhou People¡¯s reinforcements were constantly coming, can the Wuan Marquis still hold on?¡± For the United Army, the real main battlefield was in Xiangyang. If they were defeated there, no matter how great Lu Yuan¡¯s victory in Hanzhong Prefecture and Xichuan, it would all be for nothing. Once the Zhou army arrived, these two prefectures would be lost in an instant. Therefore, he was particularly concerned about the situation in Xiangyang. Upon hearing his question, the expressions of Shangguan Ming and the others became a little strange, as if they were both happy and worried, making their expressions very complicated. Finally, Shangguan Ming said: ¡°In fact, the situation in Xiangyang is, well, the reinforcements from Zhou have arrived, with a hundred thousand soldiers and an Inborn Grandmaster joining their forces. However, no battle has broken out there.¡± ¡°No battle?¡± Lu Yuan was surprised to hear this, asking, ¡°How did that happen?¡± With a complex tone, Shangguan Ming said: ¡°Does King Changsha still remember that the court ceded three prefectures of Guangling to negotiate peace with Liang and asked them to send troops to threaten Zhou?¡± Upon hearing the mention of Liang, Lu Yuan had some guesses and replied: ¡°I remember. At the end of the sixth year of Hongdao, the court reached a settlement with Liang, ceding the three prefectures of Guangling in exchange for Liang sending 200,000 troops to attack Nanyang Prefecture of Zhou.¡± Shangguan Ming nodded and said: ¡°It¡¯s been a year since then, and Liang has finally sent troops. At this moment, they have 200,000 troops stationed in Jiangxia, threatening the flanks of Xiangyang and Nanyang. Due to this threat, although Zhou has increased its forces in Xiangyang to 200,000, they still dare not take action in the face of attacks from both front and rear.¡± Similarly, with Liang troops stationed on the flank, Wuan Marquis is also reluctant to take action easily. Thus, both sides are at a stalemate near Xiangyang, and there hasn¡¯t been much fighting. Initially, the arrival of Liang¡¯s forces was meant to aid Yue Country¡¯s Northern Expedition. But now, as Yue is seemingly winning the Northern Expedition, not only has it defeated 200,000 soldiers of Zhou but also killed two Inborn Pillar State. At this moment, they have seized half of Xiangyang Prefecture, and the situation is highly favorable. Under such circumstances, it is worth pondering whether these 200,000 Liang forces stationed nearby are here to help Yue or Zhou. After all, the reason why Liang initially reached an agreement with Yue was that they saw Zhou¡¯s extensive influence and the potential to engulf Jiangnan entirely, so they chose to join Yue to counter Zhou together. However, now they see that Zhou has been defeated and is even on the verge of losing Xiangyang Prefecture. It seems that Yue may rise again. Therefore, according to the principle of attacking the strong, it is not impossible for Liang to attack Yue now, as Zhou is weak and Yue is strong. So, the sudden arrival of Liang¡¯s forces has become a power lurking outside the battlefield, making the Northern Expedition unpredictable once again. At this point, both Zhou and Yue are exhausted. Both sides have given their all, with no more reserves of power. On the contrary, Liang is biding its time, ready to mobilize hundreds of thousands of troops at any moment. Faced with such a force, who in Zhou or Yue could not have reservations? Both countries fear that their struggle would only benefit Liang in the end, like the proverbial clam and crane fighting, leaving them free to pick up the spoils. Therefore, both sides are trying to avoid this situation, knowing that continuing the stalemate is not the best solution; they can only hold their positions. Lu Yuan also clearly understood this reasoning; so after listening to Shangguan Ming¡¯s explanation of the current situation, he asked: ¡°So, does this mean that the Northern Expedition will stagnate ultimately?¡± Shangguan Ming nodded: ¡°Indeed. At this moment, the court is already discussing whether to negotiate peace with Zhou. According to the information we have, it seems that Zhou also has thoughts of making peace. We can fight each other on the battlefield and accept defeat gracefully, but if Liang were to reap the benefits, no one would accept that.¡± So, it is estimated that the Northern Expedition will not be able to proceed, and the final outcome can only be determined at the negotiating table.¡± Hearing this, Lu Yuan was at a loss for words. He never expected that such a grand Northern Expedition, involving four prefectures, would end in such an anticlimactic manner. After thinking for a moment, Lu Yuan could only ask, ¡°In that case, do our forces still need to rush to Xiangyang? Also, I have taken Hanzhong Prefecture, and Zhou forces may march south at any time; we need someone to guard it.¡± Lu Yuan had not forgotten that he had to exchange the territory of Hanzhong Prefecture with Jihui and Qiao Kangquan to obtain the land of Xichuan Prefecture. Therefore, whether or not the Northern Expedition ends in peace between Zhou and Yue, he has to defend Hanzhong Prefecture¡¯s territory. Hearing this, Jihui and Qiao Kangquan also looked concerned. Whether the territory of Hanzhong Prefecture could be held was of vital interest to them, so they could not help but be concerned. Facing the gazes of the three, Shangguan Ming knew that there was no getting around this issue, but he could not make a decision on this matter; all he could say was: ¡°I do not know how to decide on this matter. I need to consult with the Wuan Marquis before making any further plans.¡± Seeing that the other party had brought up the Wuan Marquis, Lu Yuan could not continue to press and could only nod in agreement: ¡°In that case, let¡¯s quickly dispatch an envoy to Xiangyang Camp to ask for the Wuan Marquis¡¯s decision.¡± Chapter 468 - Chapter 468: Chapter 235: Starting Well but Ending Poorly_3 Chapter 468: Chapter 235: Starting Well but Ending Poorly_3 Translator: 549690339 ¡°Indeed, it¡¯s time to consult Wuan Marquis.¡± ¡°And we should also send someone to inquire on the court¡¯s side. Now that Xichuan has been recovered, our fiefdom edict and the land of the fiefdom should be confirmed soon.¡± Jihui and Qiao Kangquan urged at this moment. Seeing Lu Yuan, Yan Wangqiu, and Su Xuange as pioneers, dominating one side and imposing, the two latecomers were already extremely envious. Previously, Xichuan hadn¡¯t been taken back, so the court couldn¡¯t settle them. But now that the territory has been recaptured by Lu Yuan, shouldn¡¯t the court¡¯s promised fiefdom be settled? Facing these urgings, Shangguan Ming had to say, ¡°I will send a messenger to Xiangyang and the court soon, so you don¡¯t have to worry.¡± Seeing him say so, the three of them let him off. Afterward, they chatted for a while, and Shangguan Ming and the other two left the city. Now that Wushan Pass has been captured by Lu Yuan, there can¡¯t be too many large armies stationed in the city, so Shangguan Ming had no choice but to continue squatting in the main camp outside the city. However, not long after several people left, when night fell, Jihui and Qiao Kangquan quietly returned to the city and went to see Lu Yuan. As for this, Lu Yuan seemed to have expected it, and directly invited people to a prepared secret room. After sitting down and having premium tea, Jihui said: ¡°King of Changsha, the two of us came here to discuss the matter of exchanging territories with you.¡± Qiao Kangquan on the side also said: ¡°Indeed, the matter mentioned by King Changsha before has always been in our minds. But there was no opportunity to have a face-to-face discussion. Now that we finally meet, we can have a good talk with King Changsha.¡± Lu Yuan, who was sitting in front of them, showed a smile on his face and then said, ¡°You two¡­¡± It was quiet at midnight, and the candlelight was dim. In the secret room, the future big events of Xichuan and Hanzhong prefectures were quickly confirmed by the three people. After midnight, Lu Yuan personally sent the two away, his face full of smiles. They had reached an agreement just now. In addition to the original agreement, Lu Yuan can use the three prefectures of Xixiang, Baishi, and Nanjiang in Hanzhong to exchange for the three prefectures of Wushan, Linjiang, and Yuzhong in Xichuan, without changing the conditions. On this basis, if there is still surplus land in Hanzhong under his control, he can continue to exchange territories with the two of them until the territory of Hanzhong is exhausted. The reason why Jihui and Qiao Kangquan could propose such conditions was mainly due to their continuous exploration during these months since the Northern Expedition. After sending scouts uninterruptedly into Xichuan, the two finally figured out what was going on there. Population decline, poverty, and bandits were rampant, resulting in extreme destitution¡­ In short, any words describing a terrible and bad situation could be applied to Xichuan. If the two of them were to like such a place, that would be surprising. Previously, because there was no other choice, even knowing that Xichuan was a pit, both families were willing to spend decades of effort to restore the place. But now that someone is willing to exchange territories with them, and there are better options, they naturally won¡¯t be the scapegoat anymore. Therefore, Lu Yuan and the two of them hit it off immediately and reached a consensus. ¡°I just hope that after accepting Hanzhong, these two won¡¯t regret it and secretly curse me.¡± Looking in the direction of the two departing people, Lu Yuan thought so. The main reason for this was his previous arrangements in Hanzhong. Two months ago, he left Lan Cai¡¯er in Hanzhong to supervise defense while collecting the local money and grain and relocating the people. And this policy of collecting money and grain and relocating people targeted the entire Hanzhong territory, naturally including the three prefectures of Xixiang, Baishi, and Nanjiang. Although the implementation of this strategy has not been long, just two months, the latest news he received a few days ago was that a month ago, nearly 30,000 households had been moved from Hanzhong and had begun to be sent to the area of Dongting and Jiangnan. According to the speed of these immigrants, these people should have arrived in Guining Prefecture by now and would soon reach the boundary of Dongting Prefecture. And this was the news from a month ago, and another month has passed since then. The immigrant work over there should be going even more smoothly. It is conservatively estimated that by now, the number of evacuated households in Hanzhong should be around 60,000 to 70,000 households. And this is not the end. After Lu Yuan captured Hanzhong City, he checked the household register of the prefecture and knew that there were 582,103 households in Hanzhong, with a total population of about 3 million. His goal is to relocate at least 200,000 households, or 1 million people. Even if there is enough time, more people will be moved, as many as possible, and they will never be left to the Zhou people. Of course, although the relocation targets all households, for the three prefectures of Xixiang, Baishi, and Nanjiang, Lu Yuan pays special attention not to overdo it, and only relocates up to one-third of the population. After all, it has to be exchanged with people. In case the transaction can¡¯t be completed and the territory cannot be changed, he still has to be careful about his appearance. However, no matter how you say it, the three prefectures of Xixiang, Baishi, and Nanjiang, compared to before, must have suffered losses in both population and wealth. Therefore, it is certain that Jihui and Qiao Kangquan will have opinions in their hearts. However, no matter how much loss there is, these three prefectures are still better than the prefectures and counties of Xichuan. So, there is no need to worry that they will not agree to the exchange in the end. After all, in theory, in this transaction, even after Lu Yuan¡¯s manipulation, the two of them are still at an advantage. Of course, Lu Yuan will not suffer either. Essentially, this is a transaction where one is willing to fight and the other is willing to suffer. Chapter 469 - Chapter 469: Chapter 236: Wealth Soars Chapter 469: Chapter 236: Wealth Soars Translator: 549690339 After waiting at Wushan Pass for five days, the news from Xiangyang Camp finally arrived. Bai Mengyang ordered Shangguan Ming, Jihui, and Qiao Kangquan, along with the remaining 60,000-strong army, to rush to Xiangyang Camp to join him. After this group arrived in Xiangyang, the size of Bai Mengyang¡¯s army would then be increased to around 200,000. Among them, there would be no less than 100,000 elite soldiers and six Inborn Grandmasters, enough to compete with Zhou and Liang countries. The management of Xichuan Prefecture would be temporarily handed over to Lu Yuan to maintain local security and stability, with the land to be handed back after the war is over. As for the Hanzhong Prefecture issue that Lu Yuan cared about, Wuan Marquis had made the decision to let Lu Yuan lead his troops northward to defend against Zhou people in Hanzhong Prefecture. In the letter Bai Mengyang sent, he earnestly wrote: ¡°Now that Liang people are coming from the east, the battle in Xiangyang is inevitable. Zhou and Yue will clash, and it must eventually end with peace talks. But the negotiations have only just begun. That¡¯s why I am sure Zhou people will mobilize a large number of troops to retake Hanzhong Prefecture and even try to recapture Xichuan Prefecture to threaten our flank. Therefore, Hanzhong must be guarded by heavy troops.¡± With the threat of Liang people to Xiangyang, Zhou and Yue countries dare not fight a big battle. But Hanzhong Prefecture is thousands of miles away, separated by mountains and rivers. Liang people cannot intervene in this matter. Therefore, they can¡¯t fight in Xiangyang Prefecture, but they can in Hanzhong Prefecture. So, the focus of the upcoming contest between the two countries would now lie in the gains and losses of Hanzhong Prefecture and Xichuan Prefecture. If Yue Country can hold Hanzhong Prefecture, they will naturally have the upper hand in the negotiations. On the other hand, if Zhou people recapture Hanzhong Prefecture, Yue Country, under such threat, will naturally be restrained in negotiations and will have to let go of a lot of interests they have already swallowed up. Perhaps after this Northern Expedition, everything that has been conquered will have to be spit back out, and the territories of the two countries will return to their original boundaries. Bai Mengyang didn¡¯t clearly say this, but from his letter, Lu Yuan already saw the meaning behind it. For this reason, Although Lu Yuan was somewhat dissatisfied with having to confront Zhou¡¯s main force on his own, he didn¡¯t say much. Because the facts were evident. Now, the one controlling the territory of Hanzhong Prefecture and the western part of Xiangyang Prefecture is Lu Yuan. As for the court, they only control the three southern prefectures of Xiangyang Prefecture as of now. As to who gained more, it¡¯s crystal clear. As a result, the court could give up the three southern prefectures of Xiangyang Prefecture, which would not be a significant loss to them. But could Lu Yuan accept giving up the three western prefectures of Xiangyang Prefecture and Hanzhong Prefecture? For him, this would be tantamount to losing half of the territories he now controls and all the achievements of the Northern Expedition, which is absolutely unacceptable. Therefore, in this battle for Hanzhong Prefecture, he had no choice but to resist. If he couldn¡¯t block Zhou people, he should be prepared to lose everything and give up all his war achievements. ¡°These vampires are really cunning!¡± Lu Yuan threw the letter away, cursed, and then sighed. He ordered his troops to get ready to depart for Hanzhong Prefecture. Afterward, he commanded to look after the captives and escort 50,000 captive Zhou soldiers, as well as thousands of Qiang captives captured from Yuzhong Prefecture and Wushan Pass, all the way back to Jiangnan for reorganization. As for the captives, it¡¯s worth mentioning that during this Northern Expedition, Lu Yuan made a huge harvest of captives. In the Battle of Guining Prefecture, after beheading Gui Lianyun, Lu Yuan captured 40,000 Zhou soldiers when he stormed the Fu City. Then he laid an ambush for the Zhou soldiers who fled Dangyang and captured over 10,000 of them. At Hanzhong Prefecture, he also captured several thousand county soldiers. Adding the more than 50,000 captives in Xichuan Prefecture, In total, Lu Yuan has captured over 110,000 elite soldiers throughout the Northern Expedition. This is an extremely terrifying number. Before the Northern Expedition, Lu Yuan had around 170,000 troops under his command, including Miao soldiers and local county soldiers. Now, after the Northern Expedition and the battles, he only has more than 80,000 soldiers left, 30,000 Miao soldiers, and 10,000 county soldiers, totaling around 130,000. Currently, there are as many as 110,000 captives, all of them elite soldiers. If not controlled and assimilated properly, they will become a hidden danger and time bomb under Lu Yuan¡¯s rule, ready to explode at any time. Therefore, to press down on these captives, he had to allocate 10,000 of his remaining soldiers to the task of escorting captives back to Jiangnan. After these people escorted the captives back, they would both recuperate and supervise the captives along with the 40,000 soldiers and 10,000 county soldiers stationed in Jiangnan. With these 60,000 men in Jiangnan, they could reluctantly maintain local stability and keep an eye on the 110,000 captives. After sending out these 10,000 soldiers, Lu Yuan¡¯s original troops from Changsha, were now less than 20,000 strong. The rest were nearly 10,000 righteous soldiers and over 30,000 militiamen, totaling about 70,000. After making these adjustments, Before setting off, he ordered Zhou Qing to be the acting magistrate of Xichuan Prefecture, temporarily responsible for the security and stability of the region, as well as gathering food and fodder to support the front line at Hanzhong Prefecture. Additionally, he instructed Zhou Qing to sell government-controlled land and properties in Xichuan Prefecture, as well as those seized from Zhou and Qiang people, and transport all the assets and property accumulated by Li Xiong and Zhou people over the years to Changsha. Chapter 470 - Chapter 470: Chapter 236: Wealth Soars 2 Chapter 470: Chapter 236: Wealth Soars 2 Translator: 549690339 At the same time, they started to relocate the households of those who had joined the civilian militia and settled them back in Dongting Prefecture. After so many years, the people and local gentry of Xi Shu State have become extremely tired and impoverished due to the prolonged war and chaos. However, as rulers, the Qiang and Zhou people, and even the local governments, have become extremely wealthy as a result of the series of looting and pillaging. Previously, when capturing Jinguan City, the capital of Xichuan, Lu Yuan had directly confiscated more than 20 million silver taels worth of gold, silver, jewelry, and other valuables from the city¡¯s government treasury and the inner treasury of the royal palace. According to the officials in charge of the treasuries, the original amount of wealth stored in these two treasuries was even more, about three to four times what it is now. However, due to Shu State¡¯s continuous warfare and the impoverished state of the local area, they had to spend a large amount of money buying arms and grain from Zhou Country and other southwestern Yi countries to sustain the army. When the Zhou army arrived, they had to give them rewards and supplies, which was another huge expense. After several rounds of this, the city¡¯s treasury only had this much left. Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but be amazed and was almost tempted to follow Li Xiong¡¯s example. However, he considered that Li Xiong had completely emptied the resources of the entire Xichuan region, trading its current dilapidated state for such wealth. In comparison, his Changsha State¡¯s Dongting Prefecture, although also recently affected by the war, has gradually begun to provide him with sufficient taxes as local production resumes and officials are replenished. Not counting Tianmen Prefecture, his territories in the southern region could provide him with an annual tax revenue of over 5 million taels of silver, and this amount would increase year by year as local production recovers. According to Sun Siwen and Cui Changqing¡¯s estimates, when Dongting Prefecture returned to its pre-war peak, the yearly tax revenue could reach over 8 million taels. With such wealth, a decade of recuperation would be equivalent to Li Xiong¡¯s spoils from looting the entire Xichuan. However, after his plunder, Xichuan became devastated, and it would take decades, if not centuries, to recover its vitality, rendering it useless in one fell swoop. In contrast, Dongting Prefecture could produce more income and resources over time through sustainable development. Between these two options, the better course of action was obvious. Therefore, Lu Yuan only entertained this thought for a moment before discarding it and happily began to take over Li Xiong¡¯s legacy. Apart from the current silver, Li Xiong also had a large amount of other properties, worth more than ten times the current silver. After all, this Emperor of Shu had wiped out the entire martial arts world of Xichuan, along with many local gentry and landowners. It could be said that he had almost completely eradicated the ruling class of Xichuan, accumulating an astonishing amount of wealth in the process. Even if only considering the current silver, it was as high as 60 to 70 million taels. If other assets such as antiques, calligraphy, shops, and lands were added, the total wealth could reach hundreds of millions of taels. Such an incredible fortune was naturally very tempting. Lu Yuan was currently relocating a large number of immigrants from Hanzhong, estimating that more than one million people would be moved, which was more than half, or even a large majority, of the current population under his actual rule in Changsha State. Such a large-scale migration would require considerable expenses in terms of food and transportation, as well as the resettlement of the immigrants, including the allocation of land, provision of seeds and farming tools, housing, and assistance in resuming production ¨C a process that would take at least one to two years. The silver spent on these various tasks would flow like a flood, unstoppable. Based on his previous expenses in dealing with the refugees, Lu Yuan estimated that the reception of one million refugees would cost no less than ten million taels of silver. And now he was responsible for the expenses of the migrating people all the way from Hanzhong to Dongting. It was over a thousand miles from Hanzhong to Dongting, and even further to the southern part of Dongting, with a total distance of up to two thousand miles. The mere expenses for food and drink during such a long journey would be staggering. Conservatively, Lu Yuan estimated that the total cost of the migration would reach as high as 20 million taels of silver. That large sum of money was not unaffordable for Lu Yuan with his current finances. After all, he had nearly 20 million taels of silver savings, and his annual tax income was more than 5 million taels. All those funds could barely fill the hole created by the migration expenses. The problem was that once the hole was filled, there would be no money left for Lu Yuan to maintain his army. His army of 100,000 soldiers required an annual salary of six million taels of silver. With additional expenses, the total cost could reach between seven and eight million taels. If they were engaged in a battle, like they were now, the cost could reach as high as ten million taels. How could such a huge expenditure be sustained without the small treasury of 20 million taels supporting it? In fact, Lu Yuan currently had less than 20 million taels of silver on hand. Since the Northern Expedition started in December last year and lasted until the end of March, he had already spent about three million taels of silver during these four months. This was only possible because his army included 60,000 Miao soldiers, who had relatively low expenses. If they were regular soldiers, it would have cost him four million taels of silver. At present, it seemed that the war was far from over and might continue for several more months or even longer. By the time the war was over, Lu Yuan conservatively estimated that it would have cost him around eight million taels of silver. In this case, during the war and including the cost of maintaining the 40,000 soldiers he had stationed in Jiangnan, his annual expenditure would be as high as 10 million taels. As such, once the war ended, Lu Yuan¡¯s small treasury would only have around 10 million taels of silver left, which would not be enough to cover the cost of the migration. Chapter 471 - Chapter 471: Chapter 236: Wealth Soars _3 Chapter 471: Chapter 236: Wealth Soars _3 Translator: 549690339 Therefore, his original plan was actually to make a profit in Hanzhong Prefecture and Xichuan Prefecture, and use the spoils from these two places to cover the expenses of his immigration. Now it seems that with Li Xiong squeezing the harvest of the entire Xichuan, not to mention filling the gap of immigration expenses, there are still plenty of silver left even after filling the gap. Even considering the harvest in Hanzhong Prefecture, this sum of money could be even more. ¡°I just don¡¯t know how much money will be left from these spoils in the end?¡± As Lu Yuan thought about this, his army had already been surrounded, and people were already on their way to Hanzhong Prefecture. This time, on his way to Hanzhong Prefecture, Lu Yuan chose not to follow the route back to Xichuan but instead chose the route from Guining Prefecture, Fangling Prefecture, and Xicheng Prefecture in Xiangyang Prefecture to enter Hanzhong Prefecture. The main reason for choosing this route was to see along the way how the immigrants who had migrated from Hanzhong Prefecture were doing? At the same time, he led his army through the three prefectures, demonstrating his military prowess and using the momentum of his great victory to deter the ambitious local warlords in order to ensure the stability of the three prefectures. A single great victory was enough to temporarily quell all instability in the region. On the first day of April in the eighth year of Hongdao, Lu Yuan led sixty thousand troops northward and passed through Guining, Fangling, and Xicheng Prefectures. The local Zhou people were shocked by the victorious army. Everywhere they went, they were submissive. On the 20th of April, the army reached Hanzhong Prefecture. On the 25th, they reached Nan Zheng of Hanzhong Prefecture City. Inside Nanzheng Prefecture. After three months apart, Lu Yuan finally saw his queen again. After a close moment and sharing intimate words, their feelings were renewed, and they finally started to talk about the important matters. ¡°Your Majesty, in the past three months, we have divided the troops to attack various prefectures and counties in Hanzhong, and all of them have been taken by us. Then, according to Your Majesty¡¯s strategy, we have checked the household registration, moved the people, searched the prefecture treasury, and collected wealth from the local wealthy families. After three months of hard work, we have successfully relocated 150,000 households and 800,000 people to Dongting Prefecture. In addition, we have found 5 million taels of silver in the Hanzhong government treasury, along with 3 million stones of food, which were stored here to supply Xiangyang and Wushan. Moreover, we found over 10,000 types of arms and equipment. We also levied an army tax from local wealthy families, obtaining another 5 million silver taels and 1 million stones of food. At the same time, we sold some of the land and businesses controlled by the government, yielding over 1 million taels of silver. From these calculations, our total proceeds from the Hanzhong campaign are 12 million silver taels, 4 million stones of food, and many pieces of equipment.¡± Lan Cai¡¯er reported her achievements from the past few months to Lu Yuan with a hint of pride and self-confidence. Hearing her words, Lu Yuan was overjoyed and immediately praised her, ¡°Excellent! You are indeed my queen. This accomplishment can be considered the top merit of the Hanzhong battle.¡± Although the gains in Hanzhong Prefecture were far less than those in Xichuan Prefecture, Lu Yuan had originally considered not being too greedy in Hanzhong, fearing that his reputation would be tarnished like Li Xiong¡¯s. Otherwise, if they rampaged through this area, getting 50 or 60 million silver taels would be easy. However, doing so would ruin Lu Yuan¡¯s reputation here and even tarnish it worldwide. Compared to these silver taels, his reputation was more important. Moreover, as Lan Cai¡¯er said, Even with just the current gains, it would be enough for Lu Yuan to maintain an army of 100,000 soldiers in Hanzhong Prefecture for two years of fighting. Not to mention, among the 110,000 troops he had in Hanzhong, over 50,000 of them were righteous army militia ¨C essentially cheap cannon fodder that cost little money. Taking this into account, the spoils they had collected would be enough to sustain his army for four or five years without any issues. How could Lu Yuan not be delighted by this situation? Thus, he lavishly praised his queen, making Lan Cai¡¯er squint her eyes in delight and beam from ear to ear. In the following days, while continuing to deepen his bond with Lan Cai¡¯er, Lu Yuan also urged local officials to continue relocating people. In addition, he began to set up defenses at Xiegu Pass and Yangping Pass, respectively stationing 30,000 troops at each location and then heading there with Lan Cai¡¯er to defend the area. In the rear of Hanzhong Prefecture, 50,000 troops were left to maintain stability and relocate the population. After another half a month, 30,000 more households were relocated from Hanzhong Prefecture. By the end of May, after more than three months, the Northern Zhou finally reacted, completed internal mobilization, and sent an army of 150,000 led by two Pillar State Grand Generals to Xiegu Pass. Yes, just like the Yue Country. After the Zhou people had lost two Pillar State Grand Generals, they began to urgently supplement their forces. First, they internally promoted and trained an Inborn Grandmaster, then they absorbed another one from the martial arts world of the Zhou Country, eventually replenishing the eight Pillar State Grand Generals. By that time, Yuwen Chong, who had originally fled from Wushan Pass, had received some news. He fled to Xiangyang City and joined the local Zhou defenders stationed there. As a result, The Zhou people had four Pillar State Grand Generals and 200,000 troops in Xiangyang City, as well as two Pillar State Grand Generals and 150,000 troops at the Xiegu Pass. At this point, only two out of the eight Pillar State Grand Generals remained in the country. And just like the Yue Country, these two were the last pillars of stability within the country and could not be easily moved. Therefore, the forces sent this time were the upper limit for the Zhou people. This time, in order to cope with the Yue Country¡¯s Northern Expedition, the Zhou Country had exhausted all its resources and put the fate of the country on the line. Chapter 472 - Chapter 472: Chapter 237: Dangerous Situations Arise Chapter 472: Chapter 237: Dangerous Situations Arise Translator: 549690339 Outside Xiegu Pass. The camps stretched out, and the Zhou People¡¯s camp spanned several tens of miles on the Xiegu Pass road. When the fifteen hundred thousand soldiers of the Zhou People came from the north, even if they were accompanied by civilian workers, they could reach an astonishing three hundred thousand. Such a majestic force could overshadow the sun and the moon, and make heaven and earth look pale. Lu Yuan stood on the tower, watching the Zhou People¡¯s main camp in the distance. After a long watch, he finally asked, ¡°The one leading the Zhou People¡¯s troops is the Grand General He Basheng of the Northern Pillar State, right?¡± Chu Wei, the disciple who was also watching from the side, quickly replied, ¡°According to the interrogation of the captured spies, it is indeed him.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan¡¯s expression became somewhat solemn: ¡°Things are a bit tricky now.¡± He Basheng, the grand general of Zhou People¡¯s Northern Pillar State, was a famous general of Zhou country. Ever since he made his debut, he led troops in warfare, defeated numerous enemies, and was considered a military god of figure like Bai Mengyang in Yue Country. Not only was he formidable in leading troops, but He Basheng¡¯s cultivation was also strong. It was said that he was close to breaking through the second realm of the Inborn stage. This kind of cultivation was by no means comparable to Gui Lianyun and Zhang Chanyi, whom Lu Yuan killed previously. If he were to face this person in a direct battlefield, even he was not sure if he could defeat his opponent. ¡®He Liansheng, as the grand general of Zhou People¡¯s North Pillar State, was often dealing with the northern Wei Country in the Shuofang Prefecture of the North. He was considered the Northern Border mythical pillar of China. This time, Zhou People sent him, as the chief commander of the southern expedition to Hanzhong Prefecture, to win at all costs.¡¯ Lu Yuan thought secretly. Zhou Country was located in Yong State and occupied most of it. To the north of Yong State was Yan State. The land of Yan State was like Yong, Qing, and Yang states, with three great nations like Zhou, Liang, and Yue. This country was Wei Country. Because of the close border and both being two major states, Zhou and Wei often had friction and conflicts. A great war would break out every ten years or so, and there would be no end to it. Therefore, in the Shuofang Prefecture of Zhou Country¡¯s northern border, over two hundred thousand soldiers had to be stationed year after year to guard against Wei Country. Under such circumstances, Zhou Country still transferred He Basheng and the elite one hundred thousand northern border soldiers to come. From this, it could be seen that Zhou People was really desperate this time. To achieve a big victory, they would risk the northern border and send troops to the southern expedition. ¡°Boom, boom, boom.¡± As Lu Yuan pondered the situation, the dull sound of drums echoed in the mountains. Groups of Zhou People¡¯s soldiers came out of the camp, carrying various engineering equipment, and made difficult progress on the small mountain road. After setting up the camp, the Zhou troops coming from the north finally started to test their attack on the city. Watching the slow-advancing Zhou People¡¯s army, Lu Yuan focused and turned to Chu Wei: ¡°Prepare to defend the city.¡± ¡°Yes!¡± Chu Wei took the order and began directing the soldiers for defense. In no time, the city was filled with flying arrows and boulders, powerful crossbows, and various long-range weapons raining down on the approaching Zhou People. The fierce siege battle had officially begun. However, as the battle raged on, Lu Yuan turned and descended from the city wall. The Zhou People had traveled a long way and were exhausted. This time they were just testing their attack on the city. With Chu Wei handling the defense, there was no need to worry too much. Xiegu Pass was a magnificent stronghold and was as solid as the Wushan Pass. It was a dangerous place where one man could hold the pass and ten thousand could not break through. Now there were thirty thousand defenders in the city. Even though there were three hundred thousand Zhou People outside the city, as long as no Inborn masters took action, the enemy would not be able to break through even after fighting for months. Therefore, Lu Yuan did not need to worry too much about the city¡¯s defense. All he had to do was stand up and block He Basheng when the latter took action, and defend against the threat from the Inborn level. As for the rest, the people below could handle it. After descending from the city wall and returning to the official residence of Guan City, Lu Yuan immediately issued two commands. The first was to send orders to the rear, directing twenty thousand of the fifty thousand troops responsible for immigration work in Hanzhong Prefecture to go north and reinforce Xiegu Pass. The second was to send a message to Zhou Qing, who was guarding Xichuan, to recruit more soldiers from Xichuan Prefecture and send them to the front line to replenish the wartime losses. By this time, the number of Zhou People soldiers present had greatly exceeded Lu Yuan¡¯s original estimate. Previously, he thought that at most, Zhou People would bring no more than one hundred thousand soldiers and one Inborn Grandmaster as the limit. In that case, with him and Lan Cai¡¯er working together, even though they were somewhat weaker in terms of troops, they would still be able to hold their own against Zhou People. But when Zhou People came this time, they brought one hundred and fifty thousand soldiers, which amounted to three hundred thousand if civilian workers were included. Two Inborn Grandmasters accompanied them, with the leader being a military god like He Basheng. It could be said that such a formation was luxurious. The strength of Zhou People was now more than twice what Lu Yuan had originally estimated. As such, the thirty thousand defenders currently in the city were insufficient, let alone the originally prepared one hundred and ten thousand soldiers in Hanzhong Prefecture. So it was imperative to increase the number of troops. By pulling people from the rear of Hanzhong and having Xichuan Prefecture continue to send militia, it would be efficient to replenish the front line losses. However, doing so would bring great calamity to the suffered Xichuan Prefecture, which had just been retaken not long ago. After all, Lu Yuan had previously levied one hundred thousand righteous army and militia from the western Sichuan prefecture. If he levied more troops from there again, it was feared that by the end of this battle in Hanzhong, the population of Xichuan prefecture would drop below one million. Yes, that¡¯s right, it would drop below one million. Chapter 473 - Chapter 473: Chapter 237: Dangerous Situations Looming_2 Chapter 473: Chapter 237: Dangerous Situations Looming_2 Translator: 549690339 Previously, when Lu Yuan captured Jinguan City, he not only obtained Li Xiong¡¯s treasury, but also the city¡¯s census records. According to the latest official statistics of Pseudo-Shu, as of last year, the population of Xichuan was approximately 1.3 million. Now that it has gone through another war, and was once again plagued by Lu Yuan and Zhou People, tens or even hundreds of thousands must have died. Afterward, he conscripted 100,000 soldiers, which was another significant loss. Now, recruiting people from there, isn¡¯t that pushing the Xichuan province to a dead end? After this battle, when Jihui and Qiao Kangquan take over Xichuan Province, they would probably have no choice but to trade territories, seeing the current situation there. They might even beg Lu Yuan to make the exchange. Otherwise, with this barren land and the responsibility of ruling over four to five hundred thousand people, even acquiring the title of king wouldn¡¯t be worth it, would it? Well, from a conspiratorial point of view, there¡¯s no doubt Lu Yuan¡¯s actions at the moment promote this outcome. However, upon closer examination, he has no other choice. After all, if he doesn¡¯t exploit Xichuan Province and use these Xichuan people who harbor deep hatred towards Zhou People, does he expect to use people from Hanzhong and Xiangyang, both of which are part of Zhou Territory? If he lets these people help him defend the city, the Zhou soldiers would surrender the city within two days, happily welcoming the Royal Teacher¡¯s entry to the city. And what about sending troops from Dongting Army? Let alone the thousands of miles away and whether they could make it in time, Even if they could, abandoning the readily available labor force and harming their own foundation instead would be a stupid move for Lu Yuan to make. Therefore, in conclusion, Indeed, all he could do was make the people of Xichuan suffer once more. Well, they¡¯ll have better days once the battle is over. Lu Yuan comforted himself, then finished writing the letter and sent it off as a top-priority message. While Lu Yuan was writing the letter and summoning reinforcements, the siege at Xiegu Pass never ceased before their arrival. On the twenty-third of the fifth month of Hongdao¡¯s eighth year, He Basheng led an army of three hundred thousand to Xiegu Pass. On the same day, ten thousand soldiers were dispatched to attack Xiegu Pass fiercely. The next day, another thirty thousand soldiers were sent to continue the attack. By midnight, torches were lit to illuminate the battlefield, and the battle went on without rest. On the third day, another thirty thousand soldiers replaced the previous army that had been fighting for an entire day and night, and the relentless attack on Guan City continued. It was the same for the following two days. By the sixth day, more than ten thousand defenders in Xiegu Pass had been killed, and the remaining soldiers were exhausted and wounded. Military morale started to decline. At the end of the month, on the thirtieth day, It rained continuously, and fog filled the mountains, giving the Xiegu Pass, located between the north and south, a sense of the misty atmosphere of Jiangnan. However, facing such a poetic and picturesque scenery, no one inside or outside the city walls had the mood to appreciate it. Defenders on the city walls shouted to repel another wave of Zhou attack, and without even catching their breath, they heard the rumbling drums outside the city, the distant Zhou banners fluttering, and a new siege army emerged slowly from the main camp. ¡°Zhou People are coming again.¡± ¡°Where¡¯s the support team? Hurry up and get over here!¡± ¡°Take some rest quickly, eat and drink something, and replenish your energy.¡± ¡°Those who have endured two rounds can retreat and recuperate.¡± Shouts rose and fell from the tower, creating a noisy atmosphere. Hearing these orders, soldiers numbedly sat down and began to open their water bags and eat their rough biscuits. Some, feeling a great reprieve, hurriedly lined up in their remaining formations and quickly descended from the city walls. Below the city wall, a group of about a thousand soldiers quickly moved into Guan City to reinforce the defense gap. Soon, the once empty city walls were filled with people again. Despite the many people and the substantial defense, soldiers standing on the city walls didn¡¯t feel much safer. That¡¯s because in the previous six days, the defense had been equally robust and well-manned. However, every time the Zhou soldiers retreated after an attack, the city wall would be left with more than half the people gone. Just now, there was an attack that lasted for two hours, and over a thousand people had already perished. Upon calculation, for every team that climbed the city wall and fought for two rounds or four hours, only half of them could return when they descended. Such a bloody casualty rate would wear down even veteran soldiers. Not to mention, many of the defenders in the city were conscripted militia. Zhou soldiers were growing more and more fierce, so were their battles. Under such brutal sieges, the defenders in the city had begun to lose heart and waver. If it wasn¡¯t for the glimmer of hope in their hearts that one man could lead them to victory, they would have broken down and fled by now. The brief respite during the shift change quickly passed. Zhou soldiers were once again at the city wall, carrying their weapons, stepping on mountains of corpses at the foot of the wall, and charged up without hesitation. Seeing this, the defenders on the tower also swung down falling rocks, poured boiling water, shot arrows, and launched their counterattack. Both armies began another ferocious engagement. ¡°Morale is just insufficient.¡± Inside the watchtower, Lu Yuan sighed as he stood on top and looked at the nearby battlefield: ¡°The Bandits have an overwhelming number of people. Even if they don¡¯t rest day and night, thirty thousand people rotating in shifts can still ensure enough rest and energy. Chapter 474 - Chapter 474: Chapter 237: Dangerous Situations Arise_3 Chapter 474: Chapter 237: Dangerous Situations Arise_3 Translator: 549690339 Our army has fewer people, even with the support of the city, but under the continuous consumption, the soldiers are becoming increasingly scarce. Originally, soldiers were rotated every three days, later it changed to every two days, and then to the current rotation of once a day. The soldiers are weary from the long battle, casualties are heavy daily, and morale is gradually decreasing. Now we have only defended for such a short time, and the enemy has already managed to attack the city walls, it seems we have reached our limit.¡± Chu Wei, who had been living on the city tower and commanding the defense since the beginning of the war, immediately said, ¡°Your Majesty, don¡¯t worry. Even though the enemy has a large number of people, there are still twenty thousand people in the city. It won¡¯t be easy for them to break in. Isn¡¯t it just a group of Zhou people attacking us? I¡¯ll lead people there to drive them back.¡± Lu Yuan shook his head: ¡°Today might be fine, but what about tomorrow and the day after? The large army in the rear of Hanzhong is now scattered in various prefectures and counties, urging the people to evacuate. It¡¯s not easy to get them gathered quickly now. It will take at least five more days before the earliest reinforcements can arrive. It¡¯s hard to get through this period. However, you are right. Allowing Zhou people to stay in the city is certainly a problem. It¡¯s a great danger. Take your men and get them out of there.¡± Chu Wei obeyed: ¡°Yes!¡± After the disciple left with his men, Lu Yuan fell into deep thought. Hanzhong Prefecture is thousands of miles wide with hundreds of counties. Lu Yuan¡¯s troops were scattered over such a large area, divided into dozens or even hundreds of small squads, spread across rural areas, urging local people to move. Under such circumstances, it¡¯s not easy to regroup at Xiegu Pass. Even if gathered, the close prefectures and counties would be fine to reach. The further ones would take ten days to half a month just to travel, not arriving quickly either. Although Lu Yuan had sent orders for reinforcements six days ago, there was not a single trace of the first reinforcement group to arrive so far. According to the news from the rear, the Feng City and Taibai two governments near the Xiegu Pass had already assembled most of their troops and were just waiting for the remaining people to gather and then they would be able to arrive in five days. But looking at the situation in the city, it¡¯s a problem whether we can hold on for five days. ¡®It¡¯s a mistake!¡¯ Lu Yuan felt some regret in his heart. He shouldn¡¯t have left only thirty thousand people guarding the city. If he left fifty thousand people, the situation wouldn¡¯t be so dire now. But regret is useless now, he could only do his best to maintain the situation and hold on for five days. After a day of fierce fighting, without distinguishing between day and night, the defenders in the city finally held on until the seventh day, at the cost of more than three thousand casualties. However, the soldiers who had fought for the whole night didn¡¯t even have time to rest before the Zhou people rushed up again. Having no choice, they had to muster their spirits, pick up their chipped swords, and continue to fight against the Zhou people. After two more days of fierce fighting, the number of defenders in the city had dropped to ten thousand. The surviving soldiers were all wounded and had very low morale due to the significant casualties. Although the Zhou people had lost more than seventy thousand soldiers in the eight-day fierce attack, they still had more than two hundred thousand soldiers left, which was a strong force. Even seeing the hope of breaking through the city, their morale soared and their momentum was like a rainbow. Under such circumstances, on the ninth day, the Zhou people only attacked for a short while, and more than a thousand of them climbed onto the city wall. The defenders on the city wall were already struggling to withstand the ferocious offensive of the Zhou people and began to retreat in defeat. It seemed as if they were about to lose the city wall, and this pass would be lost. Lu Yuan knew it was time for him to take action. ¡°I will go and stop the Zhou people first. You go and pull out a team of fresh troops to fill the gaps.¡± He turned to his disciple Chu Wei and said, then leaped into the air. A few clusters of Red Sun fierce flames burned around him, and his whole body, like a meteor fire, plunged violently into the crowd of Zhou people attacking the city. With a few bangs, The flames exploded, and the hundreds of closely packed Zhou people nearby were instantly burned to ashes before they could even scream. Then Lu Yuan continued to kill the other Zhou people nearby. Within only a few moments, hundreds of Zhou people had died under his True Fire. The nearby Changsha soldiers, who had been retreating, saw their king finally take action, turning the situation around with just one move, and couldn¡¯t help but have a huge boost in morale. They turned around, not afraid anymore, and fought back against the Zhou people. On the other hand, the Zhou people, facing Lu Yuan¡¯s attack, morale was greatly frustrated, and even fear began to take hold of their hearts, starting to retreat in defeat. It seemed that they were about to be driven off the city walls. At that moment, a red sharp arrow flew from afar, instantly sliding across the sky, and with a bang, exploded Lu Yuan¡¯s True Fire. After the arrow and fire collided, the true fire was extinguished, and the arrow still had remaining power, continuing to rush towards Lu Yuan. Seeing this scene, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but be shocked, quickly gathered his true fire to burn the arrow. When he looked back, he saw a red-armored general, who had now descended onto a corner of the city wall¡¯s upper floor, looking down at this side. ¡°He Basheng?¡± ¡°Lu Yuan?¡± Two questioning voices sounded simultaneously, then fell at the same time, both guessing the other¡¯s identity. ¡°So, it¡¯s you.¡± He Basheng looked at the extremely young man in front of him with a cold smile on his face: ¡°Earlier you took advantage of Gui Lianyun and Zhang Chanyi¡¯s carelessness, killing my two Pillar State generals, causing my Zhou country to fall into this situation.¡¯ ¡°Now you even dare to show your face in front of me, well, since you¡¯re here, leave your life behind, and don¡¯t leave today.¡± After saying that, He Basheng drew his bow and arrow, and another red stream of light flew out, instantly killing Lu Yuan. Lu Yuan had learned from the previous sneak attack and was prepared this time. Seeing the arrow coming, he greeted it with a cluster of True Fire. With a loud explosion, the broken arrow was blown away. Then several clusters of True Fire roared and burned towards He Basheng. However, the opponent shot a few arrows in return, exploding the True Fire one by one. Even while blocking the attack, he didn¡¯t forget to aim at Lu Yuan, continuously firing a few arrows, forcing him to dodge frantically, looking extremely embarrassed. Upon the first exchange with this Zhou country¡¯s North Pillar State Great General, Lu Yuan faced imminent danger. Chapter 475 - Chapter 475: Chapter 238: Conclusion of Negotiations Chapter 475: Chapter 238: Conclusion of Negotiations Translator: 549690339 With a ¡°whoosh¡± sound, Lu Yuan narrowly dodged the incoming arrow. Then his body flipped, several True Fires exploded, knocking away two more arrows coming diagonally from the side. Finally, at this moment, he caught a breather, rolled several times, and stood near the city wall, gasping for air. Lifting his eyes, he saw He Basheng raising another arrow in the distance, ready to shoot; as soon as he saw Lu Yuan settle down, he released the arrow without hesitation. ¡°Damn it!¡± Seeing this, Lu Yuan cursed under his breath and beckoned with his hand, sending a ball of True Fire flying up. In the midst of a booming sound, the incoming arrow was knocked away once again. But in no time, more arrows arrived. The archer on the other side was indeed an experienced one; once he seized an opportunity, his attacks were relentless and didn¡¯t give his enemy any chance to breathe. Even though Lu Yuan had only been fighting with He Basheng for a short time, he could already feel the immense pressure. He knew that if he continued to drag it out, he would eventually be drained of True Pneuma by his opponent and ultimately lose in exhaustion. ¡®I must find a way to break his arrow technique.¡¯ As Lu Yuan dodged, he glanced up and saw the scarlet Divine Bow in his opponent¡¯s hand, feeling a deep sense of apprehension. In the past, when he had just started his career, he relied on his hunting bow and his superb archery skills to accumulate his initial wealth. At that time, with a divine bow in hand, the world belonged to him. It never occurred to Lu Yuan that now, after achieving Great Achievement in martial arts and entering the Inborn realm, he would be pushed to such a desperate situation by the same weapon he used to make a living in the beginning. He Basheng¡¯s archery skills were clearly not ordinary. Most likely, the Inborn cultivation technique He Basheng practiced was related to archery; otherwise, it wouldn¡¯t be so powerful. Without breaking his arrow technique, it would be impossible to defeat him. With this thought in mind, Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes were deep, his figure constantly shifting, dodging two more arrows; then, he suddenly moved forward, traversing several dozens of feet, and approached He Basheng. The latter¡¯s reaction was equally swift. The moment Lu Yuan came closer, He Basheng raised his hand and aimed an arrow at him. Although the enemy approached quickly, He Basheng¡¯s arrow was even faster. He had confidence that his arrow would pierce the enemy¡¯s body before he could get within 10 feet of him, killing him on the spot. Although He Basheng didn¡¯t know why Lu Yuan chose to do this, he knew that this was an excellent opportunity to win. Seeing a glimpse of victory, a slight smile crept upon He Basheng¡¯s lips. However, just as he was about to release the bowstring and shoot through his opponent, a thundering sound suddenly rang in his ears; his head ached, and his vision was filled with stars as he was momentarily stunned. Then, a swift golden light came from afar, like a bolt of lightning, traveling towards him at an unbelievable speed. A sense of alarm sounded in He Basheng¡¯s heart. He instantly snapped out of his daze. Without having time to think, he instinctively swayed his body to the side. Immediately after, he felt a sharp pain in his right hand as the Divine Bow he was holding tightly broke into two pieces, and the golden light brushed past it, slashing into the blue stone city wall behind him. With a loud bang, the sturdy city wall cracked open, creating a large fissure that extended several dozens of feet before finally ceasing. He Basheng landed and watched this scene, unable to help but inhale a cold breath. If he had dodged a moment later, the golden light would¡¯ve shattered him into dust. Suppressing his astonishment, He Basheng quickly came to his senses, looked at his bleeding right arm, the broken Divine Bow on the ground, and set his gaze on Lu Yuan. At this point, he could no longer grieve for the Divine Bow, which had accompanied him for decades. The Grand General of Zhou Country¡¯s North Pillar State, stared at Lu Yuan somberly and said, ¡°Cultivator!¡± That¡¯s right. He Basheng had recognized both the thunderous sound just now and the golden light ¨C both confirmed Lu Yuan¡¯s identity as a cultivator, one who could wield magic, had been completely exposed. Upon discovering this, He Basheng¡¯s fighting spirit rapidly diminished, and all thoughts of battling it out with the enemy vanished. Never would he have expected the enemy to be a cultivator! Moreover, he was an Inborn Grandmaster with innate accomplishments in martial arts. No wonder Gui Lianyun and Zhang Chanyi had fallen into his hands. Initially, He Basheng was puzzled, felt it was unfair, and even angered by the fact that these two had caused Zhou Country to lose face. But after discovering Lu Yuan¡¯s identity as a cultivator, his previous doubts, sense of injustice, and anger disappeared in an instant. It wasn¡¯t surprising for Gui Lianyun and Zhang Chanyi ¨C both injured and caught off guard ¨C to have died at Lu Yuan¡¯s hands after encountering a cultivator disguised as a martial artist. However, such a death was somewhat unjust. He Basheng sighed inwardly, and his wariness of Lu Yuan had reached an unprecedented height. An Inborn Grandmaster alone was not frightening. Even an ordinary cultivator, as long as they weren¡¯t at the level of a Dao Master of the Six Great Dao Veins, wouldn¡¯t be too terrifying either. But if you combined both, then the threat posed by such a person would be unprecedentedly frightening. At this point, Lu Yuan¡¯s threat in He Basheng¡¯s heart was on par with a martial artist in the Second Realm of Inborn. ¡°You actually managed to dodge that.¡± Lu Yuan faced He Basheng¡¯s gaze with a cold expression, a hint of astonishment flashing in his eyes. He had tried the same combination of ambushes on Gui Lianyun and Zhang Chanyi before and succeeded in killing them both without fail. Chapter 476 - Chapter 476: Chapter 238: End of Negotiations_2 Chapter 476: Chapter 238: End of Negotiations_2 Translator: 549690339 However, he did not expect that when he tried again, it was snatched away by He Basheng. Previously, the Soul Seizing Technique couldn¡¯t hold the opponent for long, and he broke free in an instant. ¡®No wonder he is a Grandmaster close to the second realm of Inborn, his spirit and willpower are much stronger than those at the first realm.¡¯ Lu Yuan secretly sighed, and then the True Fire around him reignited, his hands forming a Dao Law seal. He was preparing to strike again when He Basheng¡¯s divine bow broke and his arm was injured, taking advantage of the perfect opportunity to kill him. However, seeing his posture, He Basheng cast a deep glance at Lu Yuan, and then silently soared up, his entire body quickly flying down from the city wall, heading towards the distant Zhou army main camp. He really escaped. This sudden reaction left Lu Yuan slightly bewildered. By the time he wanted to chase, the opponent had already left the city wall. Underneath, a large number of Zhuo People soldiers climbed the city wall like ants, one after another. Seeing this situation, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t dare to chase the opponent into the main army. In the end, he reluctantly threw out a dozen True Flames, killing hundreds of Zhou People soldiers who were enthusiastically climbing the wall and forcing them all back before leaving with regret. He Basheng¡¯s defeat and escape were a tremendous blow to the morale of the Zhou army. He is none other than the Military God of Zhou Country. His defeat at this time is like Bai Mengyang¡¯s defeat in Yue Country. What happened the last time Bai Mengyang was defeated? The more than 100,000-strong army entering Xichuan to quell the rebellion ended up being wiped out. Only Bai Mengyang managed to escape alone. Although He Basheng¡¯s defeat and escape this time did not lead to such consequences, the situation was not much better. As a result, the ensuing assault on the city by the Zhou army lasted only a short while before they retreated at the sound of the horn in the rear. Perhaps it was because Lu Yuan had revealed his true identity as a Cultivator today, which dealt a tremendous shock and deterrence on He Basheng. In the next half day, even the entire night, the Zhou People didn¡¯t continue attacking the city. The soldiers in the city, who had been under constant attack and tense for several days, finally got a moment to catch their breath. But on the eighth day, the Zhou People regrouped and sent even more troops, a total of 50,000, to converge on Guann City. He Basheng also changed his bow and arrow and reappeared in the attacking army. Not only him, but there was also a white-armored general beside He Basheng, standing with his sword, his eyes gazing at the city wall. Lu Yuan stood on the city¡¯s head, watching the two men. As their gazes met, they instantly understood each other¡¯s intentions. If Lu Yuan didn¡¯t attack, neither would the other party. If he really wanted to bully the ordinary Zhou People soldiers, using the Inborn Grandmaster status, Then the two Inborn Grandmasters, He Basheng, would not hesitate any longer and would directly attack Lu Yuan together. Two against one. Considering the difficulty of dealing with He Basheng alone yesterday, and adding another Inborn Grandmaster on top of that, Even Lu Yuan felt a terrible headache against such a lineup. Under the mutual deterrence of the two sides, both were afraid of the fight between them, and everyone had their reservations and concerns. In the end, neither He Basheng nor Lu Yuan took any action. As a result, the battle between offense and defense went from a decisive win by the Inborn Grandmasters to a brutal attrition among ordinary soldiers. Fortunately, the morale of the city soldiers was boosted by yesterday¡¯s victory, and they had time to recuperate for a day and night, allowing both their spirit and physical strength to recover substantially. In contrast, the Zhou People soldiers outside the city, though still outnumbering the defenders, were not able to recover in time. After one-day fighting, the Zhou People lost thousands of corpses and retreated in a hurry. When night came, perhaps to avoid putting too much pressure on Lu Yuan, He Basheng didn¡¯t continue attacking the city as he did in the previous days. Instead, he unexpectedly stopped the drums and rested. On the ninth day, the Zhou People attacked the city again, fighting again for a day and resting at night. The same happened on the tenth and eleventh days. During these continuous battles, the losses of the Zhou People outside the city were heavy, with an estimated more than 100,000 dead bodies lying under the city. However, most of them were civilian workers, and the actual loss of elite soldiers was not significant, only about one or two million. The situation was similar for Lu Yuan inside the city. Out of the 30,000 defenders, more than 20,000 were civilian workers, and only 5,000 were Miao Soldiers. However, after the battle, less than 5,000 out of the 30,000 defenders remained. Fortunately, at this time, reinforcements from the rear had finally arrived. The troops from Feng City and Taibai¡¯s two governments, totaling 12,000, arrived in Guan City. These were mostly soldiers or experienced Miao soldiers with strong combat power, all of them being elites. When compared to the exhausted civilian workers, they were much stronger. Their arrival instantly stabilized the crumbling Guan City. The remaining 5,000 soldiers in the city were also inspired due to the arrival of the reinforcements. However, the Zhou army outside the city was unable to recover. Chapter 477 - Chapter 477: Chapter 238: Conclusion of Negotiations – Part 3 Chapter 477: Chapter 238: Conclusion of Negotiations ¨C Part 3 Translator: 549690339 After battling for eleven days straight, the number of Zhou soldiers who had come for the Southern Expedition had drastically reduced from their original three hundred thousand to less than two hundred thousand. Not only were the casualties heavy, but the failure to capture Guan City severely affected the morale of the soldiers and the army. Therefore, when He Basheng learned that reinforcements had arrived in the city, he did not continue to besiege the city. Instead, he stationed his soldiers outside the city to regroup and confront the enemy. Another ten days passed like this. Inside Guan City, more reinforcements arrived one after another. Apart from Feng City and the two prefectures of Taibai, all other major prefectures in the south of Hanzhong sent two thousand soldiers each to support them. With the arrival of these soldiers, the defenders in the city once again increased to thirty-three thousand, more than before the start of the war. Even more, these new soldiers were elite fighters, and their actual combat power was several times greater than before. In light of this situation, Lu Yuan even allocated thousands of soldiers to return to Feng City and Taibai¡¯s two prefectures to resume the task of relocating the civilian population. While he was reorganizing his troops inside the city, the Zhou army camp outside the city didn¡¯t sit idle either. Over there, they were training soldiers, restoring morale, and requesting food and fodder, weapons, and more civilian workers from the rear to replenish their main camp. After another ten days or so, the time had come to the middle of Hongdao¡¯s eighth year¡¯s seventh month. After waiting for more than a month, the Zhou army camp outside the city had amassed enough food and resources, and additional civilian workers gradually arrived. The number of soldiers finally returned to three hundred thousand. Moreover, after a month of rest, the originally low morale of the soldiers had slowly recovered. Seeing this situation, He Basheng finally gave the order again for the army to attack the city. Facing his renewed offensive, Lu Yuan only led the city defenders to resist for a few days, giving the rear a little time, before abandoning Xiegu Pass and leading his troops away. Yes, he abandoned the pass and left. As for the specific reason, it wasn¡¯t that the city couldn¡¯t be defended but rather that the brutal siege warfare was too costly for the soldiers. In just four days, Lu Yuan¡¯s troops suffered a loss of five thousand, a massive consumption of resources. How many elite soldiers did he have left? Especially the trusted elite combatants. After the continuous attrition since the Northern Expedition, including the Jiangnan area, he now had only about seventy thousand left. How could such a small number of soldiers be enough? If these soldiers were lost, how would Lu Yuan be able to stabilize the country and subdue the assimilated Zhou combatants without his core troops? Therefore, the direct-line fighting force in his hands could not be consumed any further. Fortunately, at this time, after nearly half a year of hard work, the relocation of Hanzhong¡¯s population had almost come to an end. In just half a year, Lu Yuan managed to relocate two hundred thousand households and over a million people from six prefectures to the west and north of Hanzhong. Additionally, a hundred thousand households and more than five hundred thousand people were also relocated from the forty prefectures in the south. Adding these together, a total of three hundred thousand households and 1.6 million people were relocated from Hanzhong. In other words, with this relocation, Hanzhong lost more than half of its population, a staggering blow to the strength of the area. Even though continued relocation was possible, thirty thousand households and 1.6 million people were enough to fill up Dongting Prefecture and the three eastern prefectures of Xichuan. After all, Dongting Prefecture had lost more than a hundred thousand people due to the war for several years, and it was estimated that there were only a few hundred thousand people left in the three eastern prefectures of Xichuan. The people looted and relocated from Hanzhong were just enough to fill these areas. If there were more people, there would be no place to settle them. Therefore, seeing that his strategic goal has been achieved, Lu Yuan no longer needed to stubbornly defend Xiegu Pass and could instead lead his troops to retreat. On the twenty-fifth day of the seventh month of Hongdao¡¯s eighth year, Lu Yuan led his troops away from Xiegu Pass. On the way, they combined troops from each prefecture, totaling fifty thousand soldiers, and continued to head south. On the first day of the eighth month, Lu Yuan¡¯s army arrived at Nanzheng city. The next day, Lan Cai¡¯er led thirty thousand defenders of Yangping Pass to return to Nanzheng. Three days later, Zhou Qing¡¯s thirty thousand militia, newly recruited from Xichuan, arrived at Nanzheng city. With this, twelve thousand troops gathered inside and outside Nanzheng city under Lu Yuan¡¯s command, including fifty thousand elite and Miao soldiers, and seventy thousand militia. On the eighth day of the eighth month, after splitting his troops to take over the six northern prefectures abandoned by Lu Yuan, He Basheng led his troops southward and arrived at Hanzhong¡¯s city. However, by this time, He Basheng¡¯s advantage over Lu Yuan¡¯s forces had dropped from originally tenfold to merely twofold. Moreover, Nanzheng city was also a provincial city with high walls and deep moats, and there were plenty of food, weapons, and equipment in the city. With over a hundred thousand soldiers defending the city, it was extremely difficult for He Basheng¡¯s three hundred thousand-strong army to take it down. As a result, after trying to attack a few times, He Basheng gave up on the plan. In the days that followed, Lan Cai¡¯er showed her face a few times alongside Lu Yuan, and after learning that there was another Inborn Grandmaster here, He Basheng completely gave up the idea of attacking the city. Originally, he and another Pillar State Grand General had been able to barely restrain Lu Yuan together. However, with the addition of another Inborn Grandmaster on the opposing side, the delicate balance in their top-tier combat power was instantly broken. If they were to attack the city again, it would be difficult to guarantee that the Inborn Grandmaster on the other side would not take action if pushed too hard. Even if Lu Yuan could be restrained and unable to take action, just having Inborn Grandmaster Lan Cai¡¯er appearing on the battlefield would still have a horrifying effect on the morale and consumption of their troops. Therefore, upon confirming that the strengths of both sides were balanced, He Basheng dared not attack the city recklessly anymore. Afterward, other than sending some soldiers every day for symbolic small-scale skirmishes with the enemy, there were no more major battles. Time dragged on like this until the ninth month of Hongdao¡¯s eighth year. During the transition from the Mid-Autumn Festival and the refreshing autumn days, news finally came from both the northern Zhou court and the southern Yue court. After months of negotiations and compromises following the ongoing battle in Hanzhong, the peace talks between the two countries finally reached a conclusion. The negotiations had ended. Chapter 478 - Chapter 478: Chapter 239: Post-War Transactions Chapter 478: Chapter 239: Post-War Transactions Translator: 549690339 ¡°In the peace negotiations with Zhou Country, both our families have jointly agreed that the territories of the two countries will be decided based on the areas currently controlled. Specifically, in Hanzhong Prefecture, the four prefectures of Nanzheng, Xixiang, Nanjiang, and Baishi that are occupied by you, the three prefectures of Xicheng, Fangling, and Guining in Xiangyang Prefecture, as well as the three prefectures of Jingmen, Jingling, and Jingshan currently occupied by the court, will all be ceded to me.¡± From now on, the two countries will use the current prefectures and counties as their borders, and each party will cease hostilities, call an end to the war, and shake hands in peace.¡± On the tenth day of the ninth month, Yang Jing personally came from Xiangyang to deliver this news. After hearing it, Lu Yuan also felt relieved. Since the Northern Expedition, it has been a long time since they had started fighting from the beginning of the twelfth month in the seventh year of Hongdao, until now in the ninth a month of the eighth year of Hongdao, about nine months altogether. It¡¯s finally time to take a break. Thus, after hearing the news, he asked anxiously, ¡°When will the Zhou People withdraw their troops?¡± Outside Nanzheng City, He Basheng still leads a 300,000-strong army, keeping an eye on this county town! If they don¡¯t retreat, even if a peace agreement has already been reached, Lu Yuan cannot feel at ease. Yang Jing said, ¡°By now, the order from the Zhou Country court should have reached He Basheng¡¯s side. As long as he receives the edict, it shouldn¡¯t take long for him to withdraw. After all, the Zhou People have more than just us to guard against.¡± Saying this, he hinted, ¡°The Wei Country to the north is also not at rest.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan had a thought and wondered if the court had any other arrangements or actions in the Wei Country to the north of Zhou Country. This was not an impossible thing. After all, Yue Country has already been established for 200 years, and if you count the aristocratic families in Linhai, their heritage is even longer, up to a thousand years. In a thousand years, these aristocratic families have established deep-rooted networks of relationships throughout the Nine Provinces or even in the neighboring states, which is not a surprising thing. At this moment, perhaps the Yue Country court has mobilized some relationships in Wei Country to provoke the Zhou People from the north, forcing them to compromise and retreat. Thinking this, Lu Yuan no longer felt anxious, nodding his head, ¡°Then let¡¯s wait a little longer.¡± The Zhou People did not make him wait long. On the third day of Yang Jing¡¯s arrival, the Zhou People, who had originally been besieging Nanzheng City, began to withdraw and dismantle their camps, lifting the siege. At the same time, the Zhou People also sent a messenger to inform them of the withdrawal of troops and the peace negotiations between the two countries. Naturally, there was nothing to say about the matter. Lu Yuan had no intention of getting entangled with the Zhou People any further. After all, the Northern Expedition was over, and fighting them would mean that Changsha was fighting against the entire Zhou Country alone. He, of course, would not do such a foolish thing. Therefore, when the messenger proposed not to pursue the withdrawal of the troops, Lu Yuan gladly agreed. However, it was a different matter when the messenger mentioned another matter after that, which made Lu Yuan slightly puzzled, ¡°He Basheng wants to meet me?¡± The Zhou Country messenger in front of him nodded, ¡°Yes, Your Majesty, Grand General He Basheng wants to meet with you to discuss some matters.¡± Lu Yuan pondered for a moment, then asked, ¡°When, where, and how do we meet?¡± The messenger said, ¡°There is a Huangshi Pavilion outside the city, built near the river with green mountains on one side and beautiful scenery. We will meet there. The meeting time is tomorrow, with only Grand General He Basheng and Your Majesty.¡± Hearing the details of the meeting, Lu Yuan¡¯s expression changed slightly, and he thought for a long time before finally nodding, ¡°All right, I will come to the meeting tomorrow.¡± He was not afraid of meeting He Basheng alone. Before leaving, He Basheng specifically invited him to meet, and Lu Yuan did not believe that it was because the former admired him after the battle and wanted to make friends with him. It was more likely that the other party had some ulterior motive, or that the other party, on behalf of Zhou Country, had some kind of intention and wanted to have a talk with him. Now that the Northern Expedition has come to an end, the fundamental conflict between Lu Yuan and Zhou Country has been resolved. As for the territory of Hanzhong Prefecture, it will soon be exchanged, and by then, those in conflict with Zhou Country at the front line will be changed. Lu Yuan¡¯s only remaining conflict with Zhou Country is probably the three western prefectures of Xiangyang County that are still occupied. However, this minor conflict is trivial compared to Yue Country, Jihui, and Qiao Kangquan, and is not a major issue. Thus, at this point, there is a basis for renewed cooperation between him and Zhou Country. So there is no harm in meeting with He Basheng. ¡°Then I¡¯ll go and inform Grand General He Basheng that I¡¯ll be waiting for Your Majesty at Huangshi Pavilion tomorrow.¡± Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s agreement, a hint of joy appeared on the face of the messenger below, who hurriedly replied, ¡°Now that everything is settled, I won¡¯t stay any longer.¡± He then bowed and left. After the Zhou People¡¯s messenger left, Yang Jing hurried over, ¡°Have the Zhou People withdrawn?¡± Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°Yes, He Basheng sent someone to inform me, asking me to abide by the peace covenant and not to pursue their returning army.¡± Well, he didn¡¯t mention the part about He Basheng requesting a meeting to Yang Jing. After all, the two of them would be discussing things that might be directed against Yue Country when they meet. Could he really tell Yang Jing, Yue Country¡¯s Martial Proclamation Marquis, about this? So, not knowing about the matter, Yang Jing, after hearing the request of the Zhou People, said, ¡°It¡¯s common knowledge that an army should not be pursued when returning. And with the peace treaty, we really shouldn¡¯t provoke the other side or attack them.¡± Lu Yuan said, ¡°I, of course, understand this principle. That¡¯s why I have already agreed to their request.¡± ¡°It¡¯s clear that Your Majesty is far-sighted, and I, as a diplomat, naturally know.¡± Yang Jing laughed, then changed the subject and brought up another matter, ¡°Now that the Zhou People have agreed to peace and the Western Plains Prefecture has been taken back, the Northern Expedition has come to an end. As for the rewards for Jihui and Qiao Family Head, the court should have news soon. Chapter 479 - Chapter 479: Chapter 239: Post-War Transactions_ Chapter 479: Chapter 239: Post-War Transactions_ Translator: 549690339 By then, in less than two months, these two will establish their countries in Xichuan and officially ascend the throne as kings.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan¡¯s heart stirred, and he asked, ¡°Where will their fiefdoms be located, and has the court made any plans?¡± Yang Jing stroked his beard and said, ¡°In detail, it is roughly planned that the Qiao Family Head will establish Hanzhong with Wushan Prefecture, Linjiang Mansion, Yuzhong Prefecture, Jiange Prefecture, and Nanchong Prefecture. Venerable Jihui will establish Xichuan with Anyue Prefecture, Tongchuan Prefecture, Chengdu Prefecture, Panshi Prefecture, and Xuanwu Prefecture.¡± Hearing the names Hanzhong and Xichuan, Lu Yuan instantly understood that this was the result of negotiations between Jihui and Qiao Kangquan on how to divide Xichuan. With Qiao Kangquan establishing a nation and ruling over Wushan Prefecture, Linjiang Mansion, and Yuzhong Prefecture, the implication was already very clear. The person intended by the court to exchange territories with Lu Yuan was the Qiao family, who had even closer ties with the court and had many marital alliances with the coastal aristocratic families. Letting Qiao Kangquan occupy the more populous southern three prefectures of Hanzhong would not only strengthen the faction close to the court but also make use of the fact that the Qiao family already had many military connections, making them capable and battle-hardened. Especially by occupying Hanzhong, they could be considered as the court¡¯s trusted guard on the northern border, defending against the Zhou people. On the other hand, if the other party occupied Hanzhong, they could also follow the Han River downstream and directly attack the western city, Fangling, and Guining three prefectures belonging to Lu Yuan. In short, the court¡¯s arrangement could be considered a very well-thought-out one. The majority of the benefits had been given to Qiao Kangquan as compensation, so the original capital, Chengdu Prefecture, and the more prosperous surrounding four prefectures were given to Venerable Jihui as his fiefdom. Having a capital in hand was enough to appease the other side. The court¡¯s skill in maneuvering in these political matters was truly impressive. However, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t have much to say about it. Currently, in the southern three prefectures of Hanzhong, a third of the people had been moved by him, leaving at most a hundred thousand households with over five hundred thousand people. With this population, the newly established Hanzhong country, even including the two Xichuan prefectures, would have about 800,000 people. With 800,000 people, the limit for their military recruitment would be 20,000 to 30,000 people. Even considering the need for corvee labor and recuperation, a population of this size could reasonably support a force of 10,000 people. So, no matter how they recuperate or exhaust their soldiers, besides the threat of Qiao Kangquan, who is an Inborn Grandmaster, the newborn Hanzhong country will pose virtually no threat to Lu Yuan. No matter how the court concocts or plans, it would still be of little use in the face of a vast chasm of power. Therefore, upon hearing the news from Yang Jing, Lu Yuan just laughed and offered his congratulations: ¡°It is a joyous occasion that Venerable Jihui and Qiao Family Head can successfully establish their countries. My Changsha country will have two more friends as neighbors. I will send a messenger to attend their coronation ceremonies.¡± Seeing that Lu Yuan didn¡¯t oppose the arrangement, Yang Jing breathed a sigh of relief and smiled, ¡°That will be just fine. I will be the envoy from the court side when the two countries are established, and I will accompany the envoy from Changsha.¡± Lu Yuan smiled warmly, ¡°I will have to trouble Martial Proclamation Marquis Yang Jing to take care of the envoys from those countries.¡± Yang Jing said, ¡°No problem.¡± Afterward, they chatted a bit more, and Yang Jing, having achieved his goal, tactfully took his leave. On the second day, after yesterday¡¯s troop withdrawal, the Zhou soldiers outside the city had been reduced by a third. The remaining few were expected to retreat in just three to five days. As such, besides arranging for people to monitor the withdrawal of Zhou soldiers, Lu Yuan secretly left the city without alerting anyone. Huangshi Pavilion. When Lu Yuan arrived and made sure that no one was hiding nearby, He Basheng, clad in red, was already waiting for him in the pavilion. At this time, a fire stove was burning in the courtyard, and a pot of Qingyuan tea was placed atop it, its faint fragrance wafting through the air. ¡°King of Changsha, the tea is ready. Please take a seat.¡± He Basheng smiled warmly at Lu Yuan and pointed to the seat opposite himself, then began to pour tea for them both. After pouring tea for both of them, He Basheng set down the hot teapot and introduced the tea with a smile, ¡°This is the specialty Qingyuan tea from Shuofang Prefecture of our Zhou country, known for its strong flavor and a touch of the desert¡¯s roughness, just like us martial artists. Drinking it is like experiencing life, and I love it the most.¡± With that, He Basheng picked up his cup of tea and took a sip, his expression one of deep enjoyment. Lu Yuan glanced at the tea cup before him, but being cautious by nature, he showed no signs of drinking it. In today¡¯s world, there were countless strange poisons. His own queen, in particular, came from the Poison Sect, experts in dealing with poison. After establishing a good relationship with Lan Cai¡¯er, Lu Yuan had once asked her if there was any poison that could specifically target Inborn Grandmasters. The answer, of course, was affirmative. Although Inborn Grandmasters were like a single, unified entity, with their True pneuma flowing to repel all toxins, there were still some bizarre poisons that could temporarily weaken the Inborn Grandmaster¡¯s state and even render them incapable of using their True pneuma. At least, the Poison Sect possessed such poisons. As for the effectiveness of this poison, Wuyang Marquis Li Gui, who had grown out of a tomb and become a tree, was the most qualified to speak about it. So, after learning of the existence of such poisons, Lu Yuan became wary of various exotic poisons. Although He Basheng¡¯s face was full of smiles and seemed friendly, Lu Yuan was not to be deceived by these surface appearances. Chapter 480 - Chapter 480: Chapter 239: Post-War Transactions_3 Chapter 480: Chapter 239: Post-War Transactions_3 Translator: 549690339 He was the one who killed two Pillar States of the enemy and occupied seven prefectures of Zhou Country. Having caused such a huge loss to the Zhou People, it would be ridiculous if they didn¡¯t hate him. There may be a foundation for cooperation, but beyond that, deep-rooted hatred does not affect it. Anyway, Lu Yuan was certain that if there was a chance, Zhou Country would not mind eliminating him and settling all previous hatreds. So while others may not care about their own lives, Lu Yuan, who carries many enemies, can¡¯t afford to be reckless. Therefore, he didn¡¯t bother with the Qingyuan tea, and when he saw He Basheng finished drinking the tea, he directly asked, ¡°If General He has something to ask this king to come, please speak directly. My relationship with you is mediocre, and I don¡¯t have much energy to chat with you here.¡± ¡°Why is the king in such a hurry?¡± He Basheng shook his head at Lu Yuan¡¯s not-so-polite words, but since the other party had said so, he had no choice but to say, ¡°This time our two countries are fighting, and the king has launched two surprise attacks, defeating our country successively. Now we even occupy seven prefectures including Xiangyang and Hanzhong, especially Nanzheng, which is quite a harvest. However, although the harvest is great, as far as I know, in Changsha, there are only the King and the Queen who have not yet married that are Inborn Grandmasters.¡± Hearing this, Lu Yuan frowned, ¡°So what? Even with only two Inborn Grandmasters, with the power of my Changsha State, we can still hold these seven prefectures.¡± He Basheng smiled, ¡°The king must not deceive me. I know that the king has an agreement with Qiao Kangquan¡¯s Han State to exchange Hanzhong for the land of Xichuan. So when the king says that Changsha will defend these seven prefectures, it¡¯s actually just defending three prefectures of Xiangyang.¡± Seeing that He Basheng has pierced the secret agreement between himself and Qiao Kangquan and others with just one sentence, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but be shocked. About the territorial exchange, although it is common knowledge among the high-ranking members of the United Army, it is not known to those below. Now that He Basheng was able to hear about this, and even knew the newly decided title for Qiao Kangquan by the Yue State court, the penetration of the other party into the high ranks of Yue State was truly shocking. However, although he was somewhat surprised, Lu Yuan had already severed ties with the court of Yue State, and it didn¡¯t concern him even if the other party was infiltrated like a sieve. So at this moment, he calmly said, ¡°So what? If General He already knows about the territory exchange between me and the Han State, then he should be clear that with my power, defending three prefectures of Xiangyang Prefecture is much easier than before.¡± He Basheng laughed, ¡°I know this is the reason. The reason why I mentioned it at this time is that I actually have a deal I want to make with the king.¡± Saying this, General He paused for a moment, then stared at Lu Yuan with scorching eyes, passionately saying, ¡°Since the king can exchange territory with Qiao Kangquan, now that our two countries have ceased fighting and are no longer enemies, Why can¡¯t we exchange territory with my country? My country is willing to exchange Xiangyang Prefecture for the king¡¯s Nanzheng Prefecture. We will use Xiangyang City to exchange for Nanzheng city, exchanging county cities, what does the king think?¡± ¡°Exchange Xiangyang City for Nanzheng City?¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s expression couldn¡¯t help but change when he heard this condition. ¡°Yes, exchange Xiangyang City for Nanzheng City.¡± He Basheng nodded, ¡°Since the king has decided to give up the territory of Hanzhong, then exchanging Nanzheng City with Qiao Kangquan will only bring a broken, poor prefecture in Xichuan in return for the rich land of Nanzheng.¡± But Nanzheng is the capital of Hanzhong, with a population of 100,000, and a famous city in the world. Changing places like this for a small and remote prefecture would be a loss no matter how you look at it. However, if you exchange Nanzheng City for Xiangyang City, Xiangyang is also a well-known city in the world, and it is even richer than Nanzheng. In this exchange, the king will definitely not lose. What¡¯s rare is that with Xiangyang City as a support, the three prefectures of Fangling, Guining, and Xicheng in Xiangyang that the king occupies would have a shield to rely on. By then, with Xiangyang City as the core, you can firmly occupy the land of Xiangyang Prefecture¡¯s four prefectures. Having such benefits, isn¡¯t it better than using Nanzheng Prefecture to exchange for a poor and broken prefecture in Xichuan? This time we came with sincerity, so we offered such conditions. Is the king willing to exchange?¡± Having finished presenting these benefits and conditions, He Basheng did not continue, but stared at Lu Yuan with shining eyes, waiting for his response. Being stared at by his eyes, Lu Yuan¡¯s thoughts couldn¡¯t help but fly chaotically for a while. Zhou Country wanted to use Xiangyang Prefecture to exchange for his Nanzheng Prefecture. Such a thing, to be honest, he hadn¡¯t thought about it before and wasn¡¯t prepared for it. So at this moment, hearing it, he was really a bit flustered. But after thinking about it carefully, the more he thought about it, the more benefits he saw in it. He Basheng was right, if he exchanged Nanzheng Prefecture with Qiao Kangquan for the territory of Xichuan, he would only get a poor border prefecture at most, which would be a huge loss. But if he exchanged it with Zhou Country for Xiangyang Prefecture, not only would he still have a county city in his hands, but also his territory in Xiangyang Prefecture would no longer be like a duckweed without support as before. With Xiangyang City in place, just station 100,000 troops there and let an Inborn Grandmaster lead them, then even if Yue Country sends out two Inborn Grandmasters and 200,000 troops to attack, they won¡¯t be able to take the city. And the same thing couldn¡¯t be done if there were only three prefectures in the west of Xiangyang. Only relying on a world-famous city like Xiangyang can this be achieved. With Xiangyang City, he can instantly stabilize the land of the four prefectures in Xiangyang. Even with the rich population of Xiangyang Prefecture, the population would not decrease but might even increase. No matter how you look at it, there are many benefits. The only problem is that Qiao Kangquan might miss out on a county city as a result. His title of King of Han might lose its luster and become unworthy of the name because of the lack of Nanzheng City. But¡­ What does that have to do with me? He¡¯s just someone the court uses to restrain and even backstab me. I¡¯m giving him face by calling him a king. Without giving him face, what is he? Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t possibly give up the benefits he already had for such a person. So after careful consideration, he confirmed that there was no loss in this transaction, and that there would be a big gain. He showed a brilliant smile on his face and gladly said in response to He Basheng¡¯s proposal, ¡°Since your country has such sincerity, I have no reason to refuse. I agree to the exchange of the two cities.¡± Hearing this, He Basheng¡¯s smile became even brighter. With this, the matter of exchanging territory between Zhou and Changsha countries was settled. Chapter 481 - Chapter 481: Chapter 240: Triumphal Return Chapter 481: Chapter 240: Triumphal Return Translator: 549690339 After finalizing the matter of exchanging cities, Lu Yuan and He Basheng began to discuss the details: how exactly should the territories be exchanged? After all, the two countries were originally enemies, and Lu Yuan had deep hatred for the other side. There was simply no trust between them. Now they had agreed to exchange Nanzheng City for Xiangyang City. But the method of exchange was definitely worth considering. Otherwise, if he handed over Nanzheng City while Zhou Country refused to hand over Xiangyang City, wouldn¡¯t he be a fool, giving away a prefectural city for free? Lu Yuan would never make such a losing trade. Fortunately, He Basheng had anticipated Lu Yuan¡¯s concerns, so when he raised these points, He Basheng promptly replied, ¡°If Your Majesty is worried, my country can hand over Xiangyang City first. Your Majesty can send people to take over the city and its defenses. After that, Nanzheng City can be handed over to my country.¡± Compared to Lu Yuan¡¯s concerns, Zhou Country¡¯s worries about the territorial trade were much smaller. After all, if Zhou Country obtained Nanzheng City and later refused to hand over Xiangyang City, Lu Yuan would naturally be unable to do anything about it. But if Lu Yuan obtained Xiangyang City and refused to hand over Nanzheng City in the end¡­ That would be the case under the backdrop of the ceasefire negotiations between the Zhou and Yue camps following the end of the Northern Expedition. Lu Yuan¡¯s Changsha State alone had no power to confront the whole Zhou Country. So, if he were truly audacious and greedy, taking Xiangyang City and still refusing to hand over Nanzheng City¡­ Zhou Country had the strength to retaliate. By then, the two countries would be at war, and Lu Yuan would not only fail to secure the cities, but also lose all the gains made during the Northern Expedition. Therefore, Zhou Country was not afraid of Lu Yuan breaking his promise and not handing over Nanzheng City after taking Xiangyang City. Faced with such sincere conditions, what more could Lu Yuan say? He gladly accepted: ¡°In that case, I have no issues.¡± Seeing this, He Basheng drank the last sip of tea, got up, straightened his clothes, and said, ¡°In that case, let¡¯s settle the matter of exchanging cities. After I return to camp, I will send a message back. Your Majesty can now send someone to Xiangyang to take over the city. Since the army¡¯s withdrawal is imminent and I have many official duties, I will not stay any longer. I will take my leave first.¡± He Basheng slightly bowed and then turned to leave. Lu Yuan hurriedly escorted him out of the small gazebo. When the other man¡¯s figure disappeared into the field outside, he stood still for a moment, lost in thought. It took him a while to snap out of it, his face breaking into a smile as he muttered, ¡°This is really good news.¡± Just by coming out, he had gained a prefectural city for free. How could such great news not make him happy? Feeling joyful, he glanced at the now empty gazebo and hurried back to Nanzheng City with a light step. Back in the city, he immediately summoned Lan Cai¡¯er and informed her about the matter. Upon hearing that her husband had reached such an agreement with Zhou Country, Lan Cai¡¯er could not help but be surprised. She quickly realized the benefits and advantages that this could bring. So, when Lu Yuan asked her to lead thirty thousand soldiers to Xiangyang and take over the city, she immediately agreed, ¡°Your Majesty, rest assured. With me, I will definitely defend Xiangyang City well.¡± Lu Yuan hugged Lan Cai¡¯er, feeling very satisfied with his queen, and assured her, ¡°My queen, you go ahead to Xiangyang first. Once I finish dealing with matters here, I will lead the army to join you. Then we will return to Changsha together to hold our unfinished wedding ceremony and officially get married.¡± Since their engagement, Lan Cai¡¯er had been a great help to Lu Yuan¡¯s career. With her assistance, he had been able to force the court to compromise and establish Changsha State. During the Northern Expedition, he could focus on defeating the enemy without worrying about the safety of the rear. Therefore, Lu Yuan remembered and appreciated her help and friendship. Moreover, their marriage had been delayed for more than half a year, and although foreign envoys had stayed in Changsha City out of respect for his successive victories, they might not stay indefinitely. Thus, he wanted to get the wedding ceremony done as soon as possible and not delay any further. Upon hearing this, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s face turned red with embarrassment. She just nodded slightly and replied, ¡°This consort will listen to Your Majesty.¡± Seeing this, Lu Yuan could not help but laugh out loud. Following the agreement with He Basheng, the speed of the Zhou People¡¯s military withdrawal had accelerated considerably in the following days. Clearly, with such a favorable alliance in place, Zhou Country was not worried that Lu Yuan would turn on them at this time. With both parties assured, by the 20th day of the ninth month of Hongdao¡¯s eighth year, Zhou Country¡¯s 300,000-strong army had completely withdrawn from Nanzheng Prefecture. Even 200,000 of these troops had begun to return to Zhou Country along the same route they had come from. In Hanzhong Prefecture, Zhou People left behind only 100,000 soldiers for local defense. It was at this juncture that Lu Yuan instructed Lan Cai¡¯er to lead 30,000 troops eastward to Xiangyang Prefecture to prepare to take over the city. At the same time, he ordered Zhou Qing in the rear to gradually relocate the conscripted militia¡¯s family members and move them to Wushan, Linjiang, and Yuzhong Prefectures. Now that there was a ceasefire and peace talks with the Zhou People, six thousand of the militia still remained in Lu Yuan¡¯s army. Chapter 482 - Chapter 482: Chapter 240: Triumphal Return_2 Chapter 482: Chapter 240: Triumphal Return_2 Translator: 549690339 These people were all strong men who, even if they couldn¡¯t become soldiers, would still be competent farmers and laborers if brought back. Although Xichuan and Hanzhong countries had already been established, and there was a previous agreement that they could form alliances with each other and Changsha to jointly resist Zhou Country and even guard against the court. However, after the incident with Qiao Kangquan in Hanzhong, Lu Yuan was still on guard. No matter whether it was him or Jihui, they were both originally in control of the Guangling and Linhai prefectures, which were at the core of the court. It would be impossible for Lu Yuan to believe that their relationship with the court was shallow. Therefore, to take their words seriously would be foolish. So after much thought, Lu Yuan felt that it was necessary to weaken them further. The best way to do so was, of course, by relocating their people. There are still 60,000 militia, and when counting their families, that amounts to 60,000 households, or 300,000 people. Relocating these 300,000 people would cause a cliff-like decline in population in Xichuan, which had already been severely affected by war. By then, apart from the Wushan, Linjiang, and Yuzhong prefectures that were under Lu Yuan¡¯s control, the remaining seven prefectures in Xichuan would probably have only 600,000 to 700,000 people left. Averaging less than 100,000 people per prefecture, it was truly a miserable situation. As for whether Jihui and Qiao Kangquan would be dissatisfied with Lu Yuan¡¯s actions? Having realized that he couldn¡¯t fully trust them or form a reliable alliance with them, Lu Yuan no longer cared about their feelings. Even if he went through with his plan and Qiao Kangquan refused to exchange territories, what would happen? The agreement had already been made earlier, and Lu Yuan still occupied Wushan, Linjiang, and Yuzhong prefectures. Under these circumstances, what choice did Qiao Kangquan have but to complete the transaction with Lu Yuan? The only thing the other party could do was to honor their promise and then establish their own country in Hanzhong Prefecture. Otherwise, they could simply fight it out on the battlefield. Although the Zhou army had withdrawn, 200,000 troops from Liang still lingered in Jiangxia Prefecture. With this external force present, Lu Yuan was not afraid of the court¡¯s forces at this moment. Worst case scenario, a battle would be fought to determine the victor. However, it was most likely that Jihui and Qiao Kangquan would swallow their anger and accept the reality. While Zhou Qing relocated the families of the militia in the rear, Lu Yuan, at Nan-zheng city, began relocating the people of Nanzheng Prefecture several days after Lan Cai¡¯er led her forces to take over Xiangyang City. His agreement with Zhou Country was to exchange cities. However, the agreement did not include exchanging people. It was up to the Zhou people in Xiangyang Prefecture to decide whether they wanted to hand over their population. As for Nanzheng Prefecture, Lu Yuan had never said that he would hand over the people here. He Ba-sheng was right. There were 100,000 households and 500,000 to 600,000 people in Nanzheng Prefecture. Although more than half had already been relocated, the remaining 200,000 to 300,000 people were still a huge number. Leaving these people behind would only strengthen the Zhou forces, enabling them to support more troops and logistics, and pose a threat to Hanzhong Country. The newly established Hanzhong Country did not have much strength to withstand such pressure. Once Hanzhong Country couldn¡¯t hold on, Changsha, which bordered Hanzhong Country, would have to face the pressure of the Zhou forces directly, wouldn¡¯t it? Therefore, whether to weaken Zhou Country¡¯s strength in Hanzhong Prefecture or to help Hanzhong Country defend this side, relocating the people of Nanzheng Prefecture was always the right choice for Lu Yuan. Time passed slowly, and by mid-October, in the midst of busyness, everything was in place. On October 12, Lu Yuan finally received news from Xiangyang Prefecture. Lan Cai¡¯er had successfully taken Xiangyang City from the Zhou people¡¯s hands. Upon receiving the news, he wasted no time and sent someone to notify the Zhou army left behind in Hanzhong Prefecture. Several days later, a 50,000-strong Zhou army arrived at Nanzheng City. Lu Yuan gladly handed over the city defense and, leaving behind an empty city, led his troops out of Nanzheng City. After nearly a month of relocation, nearly 200,000 people were moved out of the nearly 300,000 remaining in Nanzheng Prefecture. As for the people left behind, not a single one remained in Nanzheng City, which had now become a ghost town. Needless to say, the cursing of the Zhou people and their criticisms of Lu Yuan¡¯s decision were to be expected. All these, as long as they weren¡¯t said in his face, were as good as non-existent. Out of sight, out of mind. Having already gained sufficient benefits, Lu Yuan led the last 50,000 elite troops to garrison at the three prefectures in the south of Hanzhong Prefecture. The reason he still stayed in Hanzhong Prefecture was that Qiao Kangquan hadn¡¯t established his kingdom yet, and the imperial edict from the Yue State court had not arrived, so neither of them had the authority to do so. Fortunately, he didn¡¯t have to wait long. By the end of October, Qiao Kangquan and the court messenger arrived together at the Nanjiang Prefecture in Hanzhong. When they met again, Qiao Kangquan looked at Lu Yuan with a forced smile on his face. Not only him, but the court messenger who came with him also shared the same expression. It¡¯s easy to understand why. After the exchange between Lu Yuan and Zhou Country, Nanzheng City and Xiangyang City had successfully traded hands. With such a prefecture-level city, Lu Yuan¡¯s foundation in Xiangyang Prefecture was now completely secure. On the contrary, it was the court that was now caught between Lu Yuan¡¯s forces in Xiangyang and Baling cities, putting pressure on Jingmen, Jingshan, and Jingling prefectures under its control. Chapter 483 - Chapter 483: Chapter 240: Triumphal Return_3 Chapter 483: Chapter 240: Triumphal Return_3 Translator: 549690339 The court had just regained control of the three prefectures, yet they seemed to be at risk, almost unworthy of celebration. How could they be happy? Qiao Kangquan was even more troubled. His title was the King of Hanzhong, and his kingdom was called Han State. How could it be called Han State without Nanzheng City? Jihui, that bald monk, even had Jinguan City, which solidified his status as the King of Xichuan, didn¡¯t he? Yet they had lost Nanzheng City. Every time Qiao Kangquan thought about it, he felt like vomiting blood from frustration. Apart from this, not long ago, Lu Yuan had ordered Zhou Qing to relocate the families of the Civilian Braves, which was also a headache. Xichuan Prefecture had experienced war and their population was already sparse. Now, with so many people being relocated, wasn¡¯t Lu Yuan taking flesh from Jihui and Qiao Kangquan? Having such a large chunk cut from them, who wouldn¡¯t feel pain and hatred? Despite the pain and hatred, they had no choice but to yield to the circumstances. Though they were soon to establish a kingdom and declare themselves as king, what was the state of their Han state and Changsha state across the river? Frankly, the two countries were not on the same level. After the Northern Expedition, Lu Yuan could easily gather more than 200,000 elite troops and had 17 prefectures with millions of people. Han State, on the other hand, could barely muster 20,000 or 30,000 troops and had only five prefectures and 600,000 to 700,000 people. With nearly a ten-fold difference, even if Qiao Kangquan had declared himself king, he would have no confidence to argue with Lu Yuan about right and wrong. Thus, they had to accept the losses they suffered this time. Not only did they have to accept it, but when facing Lu Yuan, Qiao Kangquan even had to smile and express his gratitude: ¡°Thank you, King of Changsha, for guarding the prefectures of Xixiang, Nanjiang, and Baishi for me. I will never forget this kindness and will repay it in the future.¡± Lu Yuan watched Qiao Kangquan¡¯s miserable expression, waved his hand with a smile, and said, ¡°No need for formalities. Since we are allies, we are family. There¡¯s no need to thank me for helping my own family.¡± ¡°You¡¯re right, King of Changsha.¡± Qiao Kangquan suppressed the nausea in his heart, nodded, and then smiled and invited, ¡°I will ascend to the throne on the tenth day outside Nanjiang Prefecture. I hope you will grace us with your presence at the ceremony.¡± Normally, the process of founding a kingdom should be like Lu Yuan¡¯s: building the Heavenly Altar, ascending to the throne with a sacrifice to heaven, and inviting envoys from other countries and domestic dignitaries to attend the ceremony. But now, Hanzhong Prefecture was in a difficult situation, and Zhou people had recaptured Nanzheng City and stationed 100,000 troops there with considerable strength. Can you guess what attitude these Zhou people have towards Qiao Kangquan¡¯s Han state? So, for Qiao Kangquan, it was necessary to establish his kingdom quickly while Lu Yuan¡¯s army was still around to give him some confidence. Otherwise, if he delayed, once Lu Yuan left, the Zhou people might come with a large army of 100,000 to spectate his coronation. Would Qiao Kangquan still want to found a kingdom then? Therefore, although they knew it was hasty, under the circumstances, Qiao Kangquan had no choice but to proceed quickly. He wanted to take advantage of this time to found a kingdom, establish a name, and then work to raise an army to defend against the Zhou people. ¡®Fortunately, Jihui has agreed to my request. After the founding of Xichuan, he will send 10,000 troops to help defend Hanzhong. At that time, I will recruit another 20,000 or 30,000 troops, and with a total of 30,000 or 40,000 people, we can barely defend against the Zhou people.¡¯ However, as a result, the impoverished soldiers and fierce warriors made it more difficult for Han State to revive its vitality. It was all because of Lu Yuan. If Nanzheng City were in my hands, with the power of this mighty city, I would need only 20,000 troops, plus myself to guard it, and there would be no fear of Zhou people¡¯s 100,000-strong army attacking. Yet today, they found themselves in such a predicament. What a pity! What a pity! Qiao Kangquan said ¡°What a pity!¡± twice in his heart, but his face still showed a sincere invitation. Such self-cultivation and grace, truly befitting of a noble family¡¯s master. As for this request, Lu Yuan had no objection and quickly nodded, ¡°In that case, I will stay a little longer. After attending King of Hanzhong¡¯s coronation, I will leave.¡± Qiao Kangquan hurriedly replied, ¡°I look forward to your presence.¡± On the second day of the eleventh month of the eighth year of Hongdao, Qiao Kangquan offered a sacrifice to heaven outside Nanjiang City, formally ascended to the throne, and established the Kingdom of Hanzhong, which included Xichuan and Hanzhong provinces and their five prefectures. Afterward, he used his 5,000 Qiao family troops as the backbone, recruited 25,000 new soldiers in Han State, and formed the military power of Han State. On the fifth day of the eleventh month, Saint Jihui held a grand ceremony in Jinguan City, gathered thousands of core Buddhist disciples, and attracted tens of thousands of believers in Xichuan. He then officially announced the establishment of Earthly Buddha Nation. Xichuan Buddha Nation was established. Afterward, Jihui straightened out the country¡¯s affairs, using monks to govern the country and Buddhist teachings to enlighten the people, and initially stabilized Xichuan. Then, Xichuan sent 10,000 monastic soldiers to Hanzhong, to help defend against the Zhou people. On the eighth day of the eleventh month, Lu Yuan led the army back to Xicheng Prefecture in Xiangyang and left 20,000 troops there under his disciple Chu Wei to guard against Hanzhong. On the fifteenth day of the eleventh month, the army arrived in Xiangyang, and Lu Yuan left 50,000 troops under his disciple Zhou Qing as the governor of Xiangyang, guarding the Northern Border. The next day, he took Lan Cai¡¯er and led the remaining troops back to Changsha City. On the second day of the twelfth month, the Northern Expedition army, which had been away for a year, finally returned to Changsha City. Cui Changqing and Sun Siwen, the two ministers who stayed behind to manage the country, led the city officials and residents to welcome the army 10 miles outside the city. On the day of the triumphant return, there were laughter and congratulations everywhere. After that. On the second day after returning to the city, Lu Yuan, after discussing with Cui Changqing and others, set a date and decided to hold a wedding ceremony with Lan Cai¡¯er on the 23rd day of this month, welcoming the official mistress of Changsha State. So, just after the grand return of the army and only two days of celebrations, Changsha City was bustling again. All the streets and alleys in the city began to hang lanterns and banners. Inside and outside the royal palace, preparations for the ritual began. The envoys from various countries who were staying in Changsha were sent invitations to attend the ceremony. Everything related to the wedding was being prepared in an orderly manner. Chapter 484 - Chapter 484: Chapter 241: Setting up Counties and Recruiting Talents Chapter 484: Chapter 241: Setting up Counties and Recruiting Talents Translator: 549690339 Just as the whole city of Changsha was bustling, preparing for the wedding of the King and the Queen. Lu Yuan and Lan Cai¡¯er had no choice but to temporarily part ways. The reason was simple. According to etiquette, the bride and groom should not see each other before the wedding. Previously, Lu Yuan led the army on the Northern Expedition, which was a special situation, so no one cared for him wandering around with Lan Cai¡¯er. But now that the wedding was approaching, they should at least follow the rules for a few days, right? So Lu Yuan could only reluctantly give up the idea of taking advantage of this opportunity to tease his queen. Instead, he started to concentrate on handling the affairs of the state after his return. As for the wedding, there were professionals in charge of preparations, and it was not his turn to manage it, nor did he know how to. ¡°Your Majesty, since the beginning of the Hongdao seventh year, the twelfth lunar month, Your Majesty has continuously won battles, expanding the territory, gaining great achievements, and your reputation has spread throughout the world. Up to now, our Changsha kingdom has recovered Tianmen Prefecture in the north of the river. Furthermore, four prefectures in Xiangyang, Xicheng, Fangling, and Guining of Xiangyang Prefecture, and three prefectures of Wushan, Linjiang, and Yuzhong in Xichuan Prefecture have been opened up. The territory has been expanded by thousands of miles, and the martial arts are extremely successful. All these are Your Majesty¡¯s achievements.¡± Upon saying this, Cui Changqing bowed to Lu Yuan, looking at him admiringly. For a monarch, the greatest achievement is victory in external affairs and the expansion of territory. And Lu Yuan had achieved this perfectly. For his subordinates, seeing their own country¡¯s power growing stronger and the territory expanding was undoubtedly an inspiring matter. This was because it meant that the country was in an upward phase, with unlimited possibilities in the future, and there were great hopes for being an official here. Take the most basic example. The opening up of the seven prefectures meant that there were more than a thousand new official positions, which meant that many officials in the country had the opportunity to be promoted, right? Did the many scholars at the bottom also have the opportunity to become officials? When all these factors come together, they are not just empty fame but real benefits. So, for this compliment, Lu Yuan accepted it with an open heart, a smile appearing on his face, and feeling quite proud in his heart. But before he had time to feel proud, after saying these good things and praising him, Cui Changqing changed the tone and said, ¡°However, the opening up of these seven prefectures is indeed a good thing. However, how to govern these prefectures needs urgent attention and cannot be delayed.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan asked, ¡°What does the prime minister mean?¡± Cui Changqing said, ¡°The newly opened seven prefectures across the river in the north are divided into Xiangyang and Xichuan Prefectures, with mountains and rivers in between, making transportation inconvenient or even non-existent. As a result, these seven prefectures cannot be incorporated into a single administrative unit and governed as a single prefecture. But if they are not incorporated into a single administrative unit, the seven prefectures can be divided into Xiangyang and Xichuan Prefectures, each with its own governing Prefecture and Counties. Or, they can be directly managed by the imperial court, which would directly manage the local Prefectures and Counties. Also, if a new prefecture is to be set up, should Dongting Prefecture also have its own prefecture, or should it continue to be directly managed? All of these need your Majesty¡¯s decision.¡± The division of Prefectures and Counties, the determination of jurisdiction, and the clear division of power between the imperial court and the local government ¡ª all these were the urgent matters that Cui Changqing pointed out needed to be dealt with after Lu Yuan had opened up the seven prefectures. These matters were indeed important. So after listening to them, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but fall into deep thought. Seeing this, Cui Changqing didn¡¯t press him, but stood below and waited. After a while, Lu Yuan came back to his senses, looked up and said, ¡°My decree states that this time, the two newly acquired prefectures in Xiangyang and Xichuan are to be set up. Xiangyang Prefecture includes the four original prefectures and Xichuan Prefecture includes the three original prefectures. The imperial court will select Prefecture Governors, Commandants, and local officials for these two prefectures, and each prefecture will establish its own local county soldiers to be stationed there. As for Dongting Prefecture, it will not be set up for the time being and will continue to be directly managed by the imperial court.¡± In fact, setting up prefectures in Xiangyang and Xichuan was inevitable. Without setting up a new administrative and military center in the area to govern all the resources there, how could they resist enemies from both sides? Therefore, it was a must to set up prefectures in these two places. Setting up prefectures in Xiangyang and Xichuan not only made administrative sense but also implied some of Lu Yuan¡¯s ambitions. Is it possible that one day, they could completely occupy Xiangyang and Xichuan Prefectures and restore their original territories? Lu Yuan kept this hidden intention in his heart and never told anyone. However, the condition to occupy Xichuan and Xiangyang Prefectures now or even in decades was not ripe. It would take many years to accomplish this goal. At this time, in public, he set up these two prefectures with no other intentions, just following the old ways. As for Dongting not being set up as a prefecture, the answer was even simpler. This place was where the country¡¯s capital was located, the heartland of the kingdom. Setting up a prefecture here, when there was already a political center, would only have meant dividing one¡¯s own power. That was not a wise move, and only someone with a brain glitch would do that, right? So Lu Yuan¡¯s arrangement now was the most appropriate one under these circumstances. At least Cui Changqing could not find any flaws in it. After hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s decision, he immediately replied, ¡°Your Majesty¡¯s arrangement is indeed wise, and I have no objections. However, when setting up these two new prefectures, the choice of governors and commandants should be made carefully by Your Majesty, selecting capable and virtuous ministers. Moreover, if we count the newly recovered Tianmen Prefecture, we now have a total of eight prefectures and two counties.¡± Chapter 485 - Chapter 485: Chapter 241: Establishing Counties and Selecting Talents_2 Chapter 485: Chapter 241: Establishing Counties and Selecting Talents_2 Translator: 549690339 In this land of a thousand miles, there were eighty prefectures and counties, with a total of over 1,300 government vacancies. These vacancies needed to be filled quickly. Previously, the king had ordered Lu Yuan to prepare for the imperial examination, but it had been delayed several times. Over ten thousand scholars in and outside of Changsha City were eager for the imperial examination to begin. Now, the king had returned triumphantly from battle and was getting married, a time of double happiness. Perhaps adding a third celebration by opening the imperial examination would not only help recruit talented officials but also celebrate the king¡¯s wedding ¨C it would truly be a win-win situation. Earlier in the year, Lu Yuan had written a letter asking Cui Changqing and Sun Siwen to prepare for this year¡¯s imperial examination. However, the Northern Expedition had many uncertainties. First, Xichuan was attacked, and then a major battle was fought in Hanzhong Prefecture against Zhou Country. As a result, Lu Yuan¡¯s original plan to return to the country early was interrupted. But without the king¡¯s presence, was the imperial examination even valid? Therefore, without Lu Yuan returning, the preparations for the examination had been made, but the Hongdao 8th-year imperial examination had been delayed. As a result, scholars from the Three Nations of Southsea, Ninghai, and Changsha were trapped in Changsha City, uncertain whether to stay or leave. Over time, some impoverished scholars could no longer support themselves. Some scholars who had traveled from afar, lacking enough silver taels for accommodation, had to borrow money, or even give up the examination and return to their hometowns. Although this phenomenon was still a minority, it could not be ignored. Considering Lu Yuan¡¯s reputation among scholars, Cui Changqing couldn¡¯t help but remind him that the imperial examination had become imperative. After hearing these issues, Lu Yuan realized the seriousness of the situation. But holding the imperial examination now was indeed something he was reluctant to do. The reason was simple. From Xichuan Prefecture and Hanzhong Prefecture, he had brought a large number of immigrants, totaling more than a million people. Among these migrants, scholars were naturally included. These scholars, who had been uprooted from their homes, were resentful of Lu Yuan and even harbored hatred. Some were anxious and uneasy. If they were not appeased in time, they might become the catalyst for local unrest and hidden dangers. Moreover, the newly arrived population and talents could soon find a way to escape back to Zhou Country, rendering his efforts futile. In addition, the local people in Xiangyang Prefecture had just changed their identity from Zhou People to Changsha People. This major shift in identity was not easy to accept. To make them truly change their concept of being Zhou People and accept the fact that they were now Changsha People required considerable effort. Therefore, appeasing these Zhou People and Xichuan People was an urgent matter. A large-scale imperial examination and massive recruitment of scholars would undoubtedly help win the hearts of local scholars. After all, everyone studied hard for the sole purpose of becoming an official, right? As long as they could become officials, many scholars might not care whether they were officials of Zhou Country or Changsha Country. Furthermore, the identities of these scholars had already changed from Zhou People to Changsha People. No matter if the change was forced or voluntary, it had become an unchangeable fact. Therefore, becoming officials of Changsha Country would be an easier burden for them to bear. If they could be won over, their prestige in the local areas and among immigrants would help pacify and comfort the people¡¯s hearts. This would undoubtedly make it easier for Lu Yuan to absorb and assimilate the forcibly relocated immigrants. With so many benefits, he was naturally unwilling to hold the imperial examination so soon. ¡®At the very least, I should wait until the scholars in the newly acquired territories and among the immigrants receive the news and come to Changsha to participate in the examination.¡¯ Lu Yuan thought so in his heart. However, despite his good intentions, the issue raised by Cui Changqing was still a fact. The scholars from the Three Nations who had been waiting for half a year in Changsha could wait no longer. Without quickly addressing their expectations, Lu Yuan¡¯s prestige among the scholars established by the previous two imperial examinations would likely plummet. ¡°Prime Minister Cui is indeed right.¡± Lu Yuan sighed, then said, ¡°Let¡¯s do it this way. We will hold the examination in the city on the 15th day. But for now, let¡¯s set the recruitment number at 500. First, we¡¯ll select a batch of officials to fill the vacancies in the two prefectures, establishing the local government framework. Then, next March, we¡¯ll hold another imperial examination and recruit 800 more officials to fully cover the local vacancies.¡± After much consideration, Lu Yuan could only choose such a compromise. Give some quotas first, so that some people could pass the examination. That way, everyone would compete for their success in the examination based on their abilities, and those who failed would have nothing to complain about. With this outlet, the grievances of the scholars who had been stranded in Changsha City for a long time could be alleviated. Moreover, knowing that there would be another examination next year might even make those who failed in this round grateful and excited. After all, an examination held three times in four years and the imperial examination held three times in a row demonstrated how much the government valued scholars. Who wouldn¡¯t support and like such a diligent and upward government? Chapter 486 - Chapter 486: Chapter 241: Establishing Counties and Recruitment_3 Chapter 486: Chapter 241: Establishing Counties and Recruitment_3 Regardless, Cui Changqing really liked it and felt genuinely relieved. So at this moment, after listening to Lu Yuan¡¯s words, he immediately bowed and said, ¡°With the king¡¯s decree, the world¡¯s scholars will be won over from now on.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but laugh out loud. The next day, the news that the imperial examination would be held and five hundred juren would be selected quickly spread throughout Changsha City. Although it was only half of the originally anticipated number of one thousand, many people were quite disappointed. Nevertheless, even with this reduction, selecting five hundred juren in an imperial examination was still a pretty high number, much higher than the mere hundred or so recruited in previous years for each prefecture. Well, yes, this was a regular imperial examination, not an Enke. After all, Lu Yuan¡¯s Changsha State had its roots in the original Yue Country court, with the majority of its system being carried over except for some fundamentals. Under the system of the Yue State court, every year, each prefecture held an imperial examination to recruit juren in order to supplement the shortage of officials. However, the number of people being recruited each year was allocated to each prefecture according to the number of officials lacking in the central government and the local prefectures and counties calculated by the Ministry of Personnel. After each prefecture received their quotas, they held the imperial examination to determine the number of successful candidates accordingly. Under these circumstances, quota distribution to local areas was always scarce. For example, a place like Dongting and Southsea would only recruit twenty or thirty people in a year when the quotas were low, and barely more than a hundred people when they were high. There were limited vacancies for official positions, so it was natural to fill one gap after another rather than recruit an unlimited number. Lu Yuan¡¯s behavior of opening Enke exams and recruiting more than two thousand people in two years, a number that would have taken decades to recruit in the past, was indeed an anomaly. This time, recruiting five hundred people was less than the previous one thousand or even the last imperial examination. However, compared to previous years, it was still a tenfold difference. With such treatment, what more could the scholars complain about? So after the news of the imperial examination spread, many scholars in the city began to prepare happily and enthusiastically. At the same time, various real and fake exam papers and vague tips from examiners emerged in the city like bamboo shoots after the rain. Despite many people knowing that these things were mostly fake, a large number of scholars still flocked to them. Of course, there were also those who were pragmatic and less well-off, who started cramming by reviewing various classics and past examination papers, trying to make an extra effort before the exam. Under this atmosphere, merchants selling stationery, writing materials, and books in Changsha City suddenly made a fortune again. Meanwhile, restaurants and local people also made a lot of money from food and accommodation. The reason was simple. With the exam approaching, many people wanted to eat and live better before the exam to maintain their best condition in order to face the upcoming imperial examination. In this way, the scholars had hope, and the businessmen and citizens had profits. Just before the upcoming imperial examination and the king¡¯s wedding afterward, the whole of Changsha City was full of joy, and everyone felt happy. Under this happy atmosphere, Lu Yuan also felt extremely happy. Because with this wave of enthusiasm, he had harvested a great deal of Qi Luck. Accompanied by the continuous victories in the Northern Expedition, the momentum of the national fortune of the Changsha State began to rise day by day. In this ascending trend, the people, officials, military officers, scholars, and martial artists of the country gradually became loyal. The sense of identity with their status as Changsha people also gradually strengthened. And this was just the first wave. ¡°When the immigrants I moved from Hanzhong and Xichuan prefectures gradually settle down and start normal production in their new homes, and when the newly-opened seven prefectures truly stabilize, Only then will the Qi Luck I have gathered truly soar. By that time, doubling the amount may not be out of the question.¡± Thinking of this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but look forward to it. This time, the scale of the population he had relocated from Hanzhong and Xichuan prefectures was not small by any means. A rough estimate would be around two million people in fifty thousand households. If the population from the four prefectures of Xiangyang, the three prefectures of Xichuan, and Tianmen Prefecture in Dongting were also included, the population increase of Changsha State after this Northern Expedition would have exceeded the original two million people. As for the exact increase, Lu Yuan was not yet clear. The immigrants were still being resettled. To know exactly how many people there were, they had to wait for them to settle in the local prefectures and counties, then have the local officials count the numbers and report them to the higher-ups before an accurate number could be determined. As for the eight prefectures north of the river, they were all still under military control. The officials for these prefectures and counties were still being selected in the court at this time. They wouldn¡¯t be able to take up their posts until after the imperial examination and the new year, at the earliest. Before these officials took office, getting a clear count of the population in these territories was practically a fantasy. Thus, at this time, Lu Yuan could only know that after the Northern Expedition, he not only expanded his territory by eight prefectures, nearly doubling it, but also probably increased his population by around three million people. More specific details and numbers would have to be sorted out in the future. Time passed slowly as they waited. On the fifteenth day of the twelfth month of the eighth year of Hongdao, the imperial examination was held in Changsha City, with over eleven thousand scholars participating, and finally, five hundred people were selected. The selection ratio was about one in twenty. Then, just when a large number of scholars had failed the exam and were ready to pack up and return home, the news that the Changsha State would hold another Enke in the third month of the following year and recruit eight hundred people came. As a result, many scholars who had lost their ambitions in this exam were overjoyed and shouted in praise when they heard the news. Some, who were too desperate and suddenly saw hope again, even sang praises of King Changsha¡¯s wisdom in the streets, restaurants, and rooms of study, with no end to their compliments. Through this wave of boosting morale after initial suppression, Lu Yuan once again harvested and increased his Qi Luck to a great extent. Chapter 487 - Chapter 487: Chapter 242: The Great Wedding and Army Reform Chapter 487: Chapter 242: The Great Wedding and Army Reform Hongdao Eighth Year, twelfth month, twenty-third day. On this day, the entire Changsha City was dyed red. Bright red ribbons fluttered at the ends of the streets, and a gorgeous red carpet was laid out for ten miles. Lan Cai¡¯er, riding in a prestigious carriage, was escorted out from the specially awarded Feng Residence, which was the queen mother¡¯s home, at the outskirts of the city, accompanied by over a thousand strong and imposing palace guards. Near the red carpet, the people of the city poured out of their houses with ribbons in their hands, cheering and congratulating from the bottom of their hearts. Since taking over Changsha, Lu Yuan has subdued the Poison Sect, and pacified various local revolts. For several years, the people of Dongting, who had suffered from the turmoil and war, were finally able to regain a rare peace and stability in this chaotic world. In external affairs, he had successively defeated the Zhou People, beheaded two Pillar States, and annihilated a hundred thousand troops in the Northern Expedition. He then went on to conquer three counties and expand his territory by eight. With his reputation spreading to various nations, his power became unmatched. Being capable of bringing peace to his people internally while displaying his country¡¯s might externally, what subjects could not adore such a king? The stronger Lu Yuan grew, and the greater his victories outside, the more benefits these people of Changsha could enjoy. Take a simple example. These scholars who had recently finished their imperial examinations had gathered here for over a year. Their daily expenditures, even just the rent, had brought great profits to the city¡¯s merchants and commoners. Just this had already brought great benefits to the people of Changsha. Not to mention, for today¡¯s grand wedding, Lu Yuan had ordered that the whole nation rejoice together. Not only were some prisoners with lighter sentences pardoned, but all registered families in the country also received some wine, meat, and food, so that they would join the king in celebration. This task, which had been prepared for over a year, had been perfected to the extreme. Lu Yuan was not sure about other places, But indeed, the commoners of Changsha City had each received, one household at a time, one catty of meat, ten catties of rice, and a pot of wine as rewards yesterday. After the bride was welcomed today, there would be even more grand feasts in Changsha City, lasting for three days, and any city dweller, regardless of their status, could enjoy them. There¡¯s a saying, ¡°Taking someone¡¯s money makes it hard to stand up straight, eating their food makes it difficult to speak.¡± With all these benefits, is it possible that the commoners of Changsha City would not be deeply grateful to Lu Yuan, who brought them all this? And now, this great Saint King in their eyes is getting married. Although the bride¡¯s identity is somewhat unpopular, being born from the Poison Sect, But everyone can understand. Just like the storyteller said, the king marrying a monster from the Poison Sect was to appease the Miao People so that they would not cause more trouble. As long as they can appease these fierce Miao people and prevent them from revolting out of boredom, the people won¡¯t be so resistant to the Queen anymore. Even with some support. After all, the common people¡¯s wishes are simple: have no chaos, no wars, less tax from the country, less corruption from officials, and stop those who force women into misery. For the common people, these are rare good days. When written in historical records, it would become an era of great prosperity worth boasting about. So it¡¯s not just Changsha. On the day of the wedding, under Lu Yuan¡¯s rule, 170 counties of the 17 fu-cities and even some important towns held banquets and celebrations, cheering for the king¡¯s marriage, under the supervision of local officials. Just kidding. The king is getting married and has even ordered a celebration to be held across the country. Would you, as a local official, dare not be diligent in making the commoners feel joy along with the festivities? However, to be honest, Although the commoners were mobilized, the costs of the entire celebration didn¡¯t require a cent from the local government. For this wedding, Lu Yuan had spent over four million silver tales, which was almost equivalent to the military expenses of a hundred thousand troops for one year. With such huge expenses, he aimed to create a magnificent scene where the whole world and its people would celebrate together. Now that the money has been distributed, the local officials only needed to follow the rules and regulations and use the allocated funds to prepare. It wouldn¡¯t require any local treasury expenditure or cause hardship to the people. Of course, there are rules and regulations, and there are systems. It is hard to guarantee that there would not be some unscrupulous audacious people, who even dare to stretch their hands to the king¡¯s wedding expenses, or use the national celebration to bully and exploit the commoners. Lu Yuan could only send more people to supervise and inspect after the event, and clear away more pests. But that¡¯s a story for another day and for the future. At least at this moment, the people in Changsha City are truly happily celebrating and enjoying the festivities together. The wedding procession, along the ten-mile-long red road, entered the city from the outskirts, receiving blessings and cheers from the people along the way, and then passed through the city to the temporary Changsha Royal Palace outside. Inside the Royal Palace, a red carpet was also laid out, and the various decorations along the way became even more luxurious and magnificent. Even the onlookers on both sides had changed from ordinary commoners to city officials and ambassadors from various nations. The wedding carriage soon arrived at its destination, and the entourage on both sides of the vehicle was reduced to only a few maids and palace ladies. Lu Yuan stood on the high platform, watching the arrival of the large red vehicle in the distance, his eyes deep and his thoughts drifting away. Unconsciously, he had been in this world for seventeen years, and this body was already thirty-three, almost thirty-four years old. After such a long time and constant struggles, he finally achieved a king¡¯s domineering career and realized his initial dream of claiming kingship and empery. Now he was about to marry the Holy Maiden of the Five Poisons, achieving his goal of finding a demoness as his wife. Chapter 488 - Chapter 488: Chapter 242: The Great Wedding and Army Reform_2 Chapter 488: Chapter 242: The Great Wedding and Army Reform_2 Time flies, it¡¯s like a dream, isn¡¯t it? In Lu Yuan¡¯s mind, recounting the feats he has accomplished over the years, it feels like a lifetime ago. In a mere seventeen years, he has managed to create such great accomplishments, is that really possible? He asked himself, but in the end, there is no definitive answer. Ultimately, he takes a deep breath, exposes a smile on his face and takes a stride forward, leisurely descending to greet his queen. Regardless of whether this is real or fake, a dream or reality. At least in this moment, let¡¯s assume it is all real. Seize the day, live in the present. In front of the wedding carriage, Lu Yuan grips the hand of his queen, feeling her slight tremble, he holds her firmly, step by step they ascend the stairs, heading towards the ceremony. ¡°South has Jiu Mu. Joy only to the gentleman, the footstep suits it.¡± ¡°South has Jiu Mu. The joy to the gentleman, the footstep will remove it. ¡­¡± Officer of rituals is reciting the wedding vows, but Lu Yuan¡¯s mind has already drifted elsewhere. Following the proceedings of the wedding, completing each ritual step by step, while praying to Heaven, hoping for blessings for the newlyweds, the wedding ceremony finally comes to an end. After toasting his ministers and foreign messengers at the banquet, Lu Yuan does not remain at the feast to avoid hindering the others from enjoying themselves. Instead, he walks alone, through the deep palace, to his wedding chamber. The red candlelight flickers, thin curtains sway, Lu Yuan enters the room, looking at his queen sitting quietly on the bed, her voice slightly frail, he smiles and walks over to her. He softly says, ¡°Cai¡¯er, today we are officially husband and wife.¡± With those words, he draws closer to her. This is bound to be an unforgettable night. The intimacy between husband and wife, truly unforgettable. Ever since his grand wedding with Lan Cai¡¯er, the couple has thoroughly tasted marital bliss. For the following ten days, they are entirely immersed in it. Luckily, they are both Inborn Grandmasters, with boundless energy, fierce and dynamic. If they do not wish to, even one or two hours are nothing trivial. Thus, they have completely abandoned themselves without restraint. Dipped during the day, they rest not in the night, utterly outrageous, very fitting of the pair. Still, it is good that Lu Yuan is the king of a nation, and has installed great achievements. Regardless of whether it¡¯s internal affairs or martial arts, he has made spectacular accomplishments. Only one point is lacking; having no descendants. For a dynasty, this is practically fatal weakness and a threat. Without descendants, how can the dynasty continue for long? Without enough sons to safeguard the four corners, how can the foundation of the dynasty be consolidated? Were it not for the many ministers knowing that their king is the Inborn Grandmaster, capable of living for a hundred and fifty years, and is just over thirty now, able to live for almost a hundred and twenty more years. With such long life, it is sufficient to maintain the dynasty. They would have been persuaded to have him sire descendants early on, long before establishing the nation. Still, although Lu Yuan has no one beneath his knees, in this age of ¡± Many sons, many blessings¡±, it still leaves one feeling uneasy. Hence, for his ministers, it¡¯s all well if the king indulges in revelling, revelling is good! If he doesn¡¯t revel, how will he get heirs? If he doesn¡¯t revel, how can the nation¡¯s roots be stable? Without revelling, the Altars of Soil and Grain will lose their successors. They are not afraid of Lu Yuan¡¯s revelry; because in a world where personal martial arts are in the center, as long as the monarch has a strong martial force, a bit of self-indulgence is no matter. This is the privilege of the strong. What they fear is a monarch like Lu Yuan, who is aloof and possesses self-control, shuns female company, and is only concerned with military and national matters. That is dangerous. Therefore, as for Lu Yuan¡¯s licentious actions, Grand General Cui Changqing, Minister Sun Siwen and other ministers just turn a blind eye, saying nothing. Anyway, presently, national affairs have always been handled by their chief ministers, the Councillor of the Left, and the Councillor of the Right. As for the other military affairs, the major battles have now subsided and only recovery remains. The militaries of each place have each of their own tasks to perform; it can operate independently. Moreover, although Zhou Qing is stationed at the Northern Border in Xiangyang, he is still one of the Grand Generals of the nation. He also has to help in dealing with some military secret affairs. All these collaborations mean that as long as matters affecting the nation¡¯s luck do not transpire, Lu Yuan¡¯s presence or absence is not significant. Or in reality, the moment an effective and feasible system, capable of normal functioning is established, the role of the king is actually reduced to a symbol only. However, for many kings, being reduced to a symbol means losing power, their power is being seized. Almost no one could accept that then. So, in the end, a struggle over power between the king and ministers often leads to an inevitable fight, ultimately leading to national decline. Fortunately, all these are matters to consider for the successor monarchs. As the founding monarch, Lu Yuan¡¯s words carry profound significance, his prestige at its height. Doubtless about being emptied of power. Instead, it should be Chief Ministers such as Cui Changqing, Sun Siwen who have to consider how their power as ministers can prevent being overly eroded. Of course. The relationship between the two and Lu Yuan, the trust and importance, naturally cannot be compared with the relationship between average kings and ministers. A power struggle would basically not happen between them. Even if there is no one to control Lu Yuan¡¯s hedonism, or even they support him, Lu Yuan¡¯s state of mind is not that of a constantly indulging pleasure-seeker. After revelling with Lan Cai¡¯er in happiness for a month, he finally managed to free himself from the swing of love and began to deal with political affairs. And the first matter is to manage military affairs of his responsibility. ¡°Your Majesty, since your continuous victories in the North and sending captives to Jiangnan, I¡¯ve been entrusted to re-organize all Miao soldiers, surrendered soldiers, and militia. We have worked day and night, not daring to rest.¡± Chapter 489 - Chapter 489: Chapter 242: Great Wedding and Reorganization of the Army_3 Chapter 489: Chapter 242: Great Wedding and Reorganization of the Army_3 And a year has passed, and now all departments have been rectified. Among them, after the Northern Expedition, there were more than 78,000 captured soldiers. 60,000 Miao soldiers, and finally more than 23,000 people left. According to the decree of the king, these remaining and Miao soldiers, after weeding out the old and weak, the strong ones were retrained and formed into the kingdom¡¯s forbidden army, ultimately resulting in an army of 90,000 men. The remaining 10,000 old and weak people were made into soldiers of the prefectures and counties, and distributed to each prefecture and county. Of the 110,000 captured soldiers, the old and weak were also eliminated, leaving 90,000 who were retained as the forbidden army. In this way, the forbidden army had a total of 180,000 men, divided into nine armies of 20,000 men each, known as the king¡¯s nine armies. The remaining 20,000 captured soldiers were then made into soldiers of Xiangyang and Xichuan counties, each with 10,000 men. The 60,000 civil soldiers the king brought back from Xichuan County also kept the best of them, leaving 5,000 soldiers to be used as local prefecture and county soldiers. After such a count, our Changsha nation has 180,000 forbidden soldiers, 20,000 county soldiers, and 34,000 prefecture and county soldiers, totaling 234,000 soldiers. If the palace guards and city-wide soldiers in Changsha City are included, there are even 240,000 men in total. The might of the army is so great that none of the surrounding dozens of countries can compare, except for the three countries of Zhou, Liang, and Yue!¡± Inside the Council Hall, Lu Yuan sat at the top, listening to the report from his disciple Li Liang below, nodding slightly, and feeling somewhat invigorated in his heart. Actually, Lu Yuan already had a rough idea of the size of his own army, but he didn¡¯t have a specific number yet. Now, after continuous reorganization, elimination of the old and weak, and retention of the strong, he has finally figured out the situation. A total of 240,000 soldiers in the country, of which 180,000 are elite soldiers. If the whole nation mobilizes, it is no longer a big matter to bring out a large army of 500,000 civil soldiers and local soldiers. With such strength to be honest, it would be enough to dominate the world. What? Zhou, Liang, and Yue¡¯s three countries? Didn¡¯t Li Liang say that, with the exception of these three countries, no one else in the world can compare? These three nations of Zhou, Liang, and Yue have always been the overlords of the state. Their strength and status are not comparable to that of other small countries. Simply put. For example, the countries of Zhou and Liang both occupy the land of seven counties and ten towns, with a territory of tens of thousands of miles and tens of millions of households. When they put in their full strength, they can send out a million troops, throwing their whips into the river, feared by the whole world. Even after continuous weakening and leaving only the four counties of territory, Yue country still has a population of millions in Linhai and Yuzhang counties, which together account for ten million people. If the three counties of Guangling, Jianan, and Jiuzhen are added, as well as the three southern prefectures controlled by the court, there will be a total population of sixteen or seventeen million. Not to mention that these territories are all fertile lands, not only grain-producing areas, but also flourishing merchants and travelers who can provide a large amount of money and grain. With this population and territory, it is no big deal for the Yue State court to support an army of 350,000 warriors. This level of strength is still two or three times that of Lu Yuan¡¯s Changsha State, and the two are in completely different tiers. ¡®Even though my Changsha State has doubled its national strength, it still falls short of the Yue State court.¡¯ Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help sighing as he calculated and compared the numbers. No wonder the Yue State court was threatened by him, Yan Wangqiu, and Su Xuange, so they finally agreed to cede their three counties. It is because the court held too much rich land. Before the Northern Expedition, the populations of the three countries of Changsha, Ninghai, and Southsea added up to only half of the four counties in the court. The same goes for their territory. When it comes to affluence, they are even less so. Even in the first-class domain, there are six directly affiliated to the Yue court. If Jihui and Qiao Kangquan are added, there are as many as eight. On Lu Yuan¡¯s side, there are only four when the three countries are combined. The difference is also doubled. And even these gaps are temporary. Once the court¡¯s policies are in place, Once the localities recover their breath, and after another twenty years, these gaps will be even wider, becoming three to four times what they are now. With such advantages, it¡¯s only natural that the court will not act hastily. Not to mention the court, even Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t be in a hurry. Because time is on their side. ¡°I understand. You¡¯ve worked hard these days. Go down first. In a while, the court will have rewards.¡± Lu Yuan returned to his senses and waved his hand at Li Liang. ¡°Yes.¡± Li Liang heard the command, saluted, and slowly retreated. With a gradual lightening of footsteps, the hall was once again left with only Lu Yuan. The hall was vast and silent, the sound of breathing clearly audible. Apart from the two inner attendants on either side, there was no one else in the hall. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t care about these attendants, but let his hands hang down on the table, propping up his chin, and pondering alone. ¡°The Yue State court wants to rely on time to wear me down, hoping that in twenty years, they can recuperate and then restore the land and rivers. But on my side, I also need time. The hundreds of thousands of resettled immigrants need to be resettled and recuperated. The newly formed army of over 20,000 men needs to be trained and reorganized. The newly developed land of Jiangbei¡¯s eight prefectures also needs to be stabilized. Even in the realm of the Inborn Grandmasters, it will take Xiaoqing a few more years to make a breakthrough.¡± Lu Yuan murmured to himself as he sorted through his thoughts, slowly lifting the corners of his mouth into a smile: ¡°Of course, most importantly, with this ten or twenty years¡¯ buffer, my Taiping Dao Book¡¯s cultivation progress should not be difficult to break through to the cultivation of one Qi. Even a breakthrough to two Qi is not impossible. As long as I can refine one Qi, my cultivation will be equivalent to the Dao master of the six Dao veins. By then. Not to mention the current three counties, even if the territory doubles, with my strength, I can also protect it. Moreover, over such a long period of ten or twenty years, if possible, I might as well try to train one or two more Inborn Grandmasters with the Immortal Spirit Qi, in addition to Xiaoqing. If it can be done, with four or five Inborn Grandmasters in the country and my own Dao master cultivation, who in the world would dare to underestimate us?¡± Yue State court thought that time was on their side. However, in reality, it¡¯s hard to say which side time really stands with¡­ Lu Yuan was looking forward to the scene in ten or twenty years when the court would turn against them and then be shocked by their strength. At that time, the faces of people like Shangguan Ming would be very interesting to watch. Chapter 490 - Chapter 490: Chapter 243: Wuan Marquis Dies Chapter 490: Chapter 243: Wuan Marquis Dies After that, Lu Yuan¡¯s daily life became regular again. He spent evenings frolicking and being tender with Lan Cai¡¯er, striving to have children. In the mornings, he would find some time to cultivate Dao Law alone. In the afternoon, he would handle state affairs and sort out domestic politics. Life was like this, with a regular and busy routine. Time flew by quickly, and in the blink of an eye several months passed, reaching the ninth year of Hongdao in March. According to the plan, on the third day of this month, the imperial court would hold another Enke and recruit eight hundred scholars to fill the vacancies of officials in various places. After nearly three months of preparation and publicity, the news of the imperial examination had reached every corner of every country and prefecture. Scholars from Ninghai, Southsea, Dongting, Xiangyang, and Xichuan who wished to participate in the imperial examination and had their hearts set on Changsha were all flocking to Changsha City to prepare for this last Enke. Yes, the last Enke. Or more accurately, it might be the last Enke in nearly a decade. Now that the Northern Expedition war has ended and the countries of Zhou, Yue, and Changsha have ceased their military operations, anyone with discernment can tell that for a long time to come, there is unlikely to be any outbreak of war on the borders of Yong, Qing, and Yang provinces. Zhou and Yue countries have suffered losses in the successive wars and need to recover and regain their vitality. Although the Liang country remains strong, it had early on anticipated this outcome after the peace negotiations between Zhou and Yue countries. So after the end of the Northern Expedition, the two countries continuously exchanged messengers, and the emperors sent each other gifts from time to time to enhance their friendship. The relationship between the two countries, which had originally cooled down due to the wars, began to rapidly warm up again. In addition, both countries, without prior agreement, began to station their troops heavily along their borders with Liang. On the side of Yue Country, Wucheng Marquis Shangguan Ming led 100,000 troops back to the northern border of Guangling County, restoring the normal scale of border troops there. In response, the Liang people had to withdraw 100,000 troops from their 200,000-strong army in Jiangxia County and return them to the border of Pengcheng County, which was adjacent to Guangling County, to confront the Yue troops. Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang led 30,000 troops and continued to be stationed in the three prefectures south of Xiangyang. On one hand, he was organizing the local Zhou people and building up defenses for the imperial court in the three prefectures, fully integrating the land. On the other hand, he was confronting the Liang people across the river in Jiangxia County. Although 30,000 soldiers were a bit few, with the presence of Marquis Wuan, the Liang people on the other side still dared not be careless in the face of Bai Mengyang¡¯s threat, despite having 100,000 troops. The 100,000 Liang troops remained firmly stationed in Jiangxia County and did not dare to go elsewhere. Using one person to constrain 100,000 soldiers, it shows the weight of Marquis Wuan¡¯s reputation in the hearts of the people in various countries. While Yue Country was taking action, Zhou Country in the north was not idle either. The original 200,000 Zhou troops in Xiangyang, after handing over Xiangyang City to Lu Yuan, began to return north. Along the way, they released tens of thousands of civilian workers, allowing them to return to their hometowns and resume production. Subsequently, the Zhou people stationed 50,000 troops in the three prefectures north of the Han River in Xiangyang County under their control, to guard against threats from Lu Yuan in the south or Liang in the east. Afterwards, the remaining 100,000-strong army was led by Li Yanjing and stationed in Nanyang County, confronting the Liang troops in Huaiyang County. In Henan County to the north, there was also a force of 100,000 Zhou soldiers assembled, threatening the two counties of He Nei and Yingchuan under Zhou rule. Zhou and Yue countries cooperated tacitly, each stationing troops along their borders, and together they had nearly 400,000 elite soldiers. Under such tremendous pressure, Liang Country couldn¡¯t bear it any longer and ultimately abandoned their last thoughts of taking advantage during the chaos. They began withdrawing troops from Jiangxia, Pengcheng, Yingchuan, and Henan counties, leaving only the original scale of border guards in place. Then they sent emissaries to Zhou and Yue countries, forming alliances with them and agreed to cease hostilities, restoring peace to the three provinces. Thus, the war that began with Jinghai Country¡¯s invasion and eventually turned into a chaotic battle involving three countries across twenty provinces spanning hundreds of thousands of miles, finally came to a close. With the alliance between the three countries, if the three largest states in Yong, Qing, and Yang provinces stopped moving, the other smaller countries would not have the strength to act even if they wanted to. That¡¯s why it¡¯s easy to see that a trend of long-lasting peace is upon us. What about the previous Enke and imperial examinations in Changsha Country, which selected hundreds to thousands of people each time? What were they relying on? They relied on the continuous chaos and the benefits of constantly annexing land. Now that the chaos has subsided, the situation in various countries and regions has stabilized and is becoming more peaceful. Under such a grand peace, it is no longer possible for Changsha Country to expand its territory further through war, as it did before. Therefore, Changsha Country¡¯s current territory of three prefectures and seventeen counties will likely remain for a long time, possibly for several decades. In this case, there is naturally no need for a large-scale selection of officials. From now on, an imperial examination will be held at the end of each year, selecting just a dozen or several dozen people to fill vacancies, and that will become the norm. As such, those who miss this Enke and the last opportunity to quickly become an official will have to compete with tens of thousands of others for just a few dozen positions in the future. The intensity of this kind of competition is incomparable to the current competition of tens of thousands of people for 800 positions. Therefore, after understanding this, all those far-sighted scholars began to swarm toward Changsha City. Chapter 491 - Chapter 491: Chapter 243: The Death of Marquis Wu’an _2 Chapter 491: Chapter 243: The Death of Marquis Wu¡¯an _2 The last wave of benefits after establishing Changsha nation, no one wanted to miss. Because after this missed opportunity, it might really be difficult to possess and never become an official again. Under this huge trend, after the king¡¯s wedding in Changsha city, the celebration, and the influx of a large number of scholars, the city became bustling again. Under this atmosphere, the momentum of Changsha nation was pushed to its peak again. The Chamber of Political Governance. At this moment, Lu Yuan was meeting with his Left Prime Minister, Cui Changqing. ¡°Your Majesty, a total of 21,000 people have enrolled in this imperial examination. According to statistics, there are 4,000 scholars from Ninghai Country, 6,000 from Nanhai Country. In our own nation, there are 3,000 scholars from the former Dongting Prefecture, 2,300 from the former Xiangyang prefecture in the north of the river, 4,400 from Hanzhong Prefecture, and 500 from Xichuan Prefecture. Adding up the scholars from the three nations, there are more than 20,000 people. This grand occasion is unparalleled in the Zhou, Liang, and Yue countries. It is truly a magnificent event in the world.¡± As Cui Changqing reports on the preparations for the imperial examination, his excitement is evident, his face flushed with emotion. An imperial examination with 20,000 people, a spectacle seldom seen in the Zhou, Liang, and Yue countries. Because imperial examinations in the three countries were held in each prefecture, it was basically impossible to gather all the scholars of the country in one city for the examination. However, Changsha Nation achieved this, reaching a leading achievement. One can imagine. Once the news of this grand examination spreads, the impression of the world towards Changsha nation and the importance attributed to its strength would surely rise substantially. This would greatly benefit the elevation of Changsha¡¯s national status and international position. Even apart from these benefits related to fame and international status, the fact that there are tens of thousands of scholars in Changsha nation alone is still quite exciting. This reveals that the current talent pool in Changsha nation is enough to sustain this newborn kingdom without having to worry about a talent shortage. Seeing the younger generations emerge in an endless stream, with no crisis of discontinuity caused by the older generations leaving. For Cui Changqing, who is now an old man and has devoted his whole life to Changsha nation, this is undoubtedly great news. As a result of these various factors, this Left Prime Minister, who was exceptionally joyous and spirited, has become the number one person in the world of civil officials in Changsha nation and even faintly the number one person in the literary world. Not only did he have more energy for work, but even his appearance seemed to have become a few years younger, full of endless vitality. ¡°Since there are so many scholars gathered, we should put more effort into organizing this imperial examination.¡± After hearing Cui Changqing¡¯s report, Lu Yuan was also quite excited, and said: ¡°This time, the imperial examination has attracted the attention of all countries and prefectures in the world, and they all have in their hearts a determination to take our Changsha nation seriously. That is why they have come so eagerly. These people are all outstanding figures of their time, with considerable academic reputation in their local areas, and they are the foundation of local stability. Well then. Last time, during my Northern Expedition, many scholars were delayed in Changsha city and were unable to take the examination in time. This was my fault, and I need to compensate these scholars. After this Enke, whether they succeed or not, every registered scholar shall receive ten silver taels as their travel expenses under my name, so that their journey home will be smoother. Although the money is not much, it is a token of my goodwill from Changsha nation and myself.¡± For Lu Yuan, ten silver taels were indeed not much. The number of people participating in the examination this time was just over 20,000. Even if he gave a hundred thousand silver taels to each of these 20,000 people, it would only be a small sum of 20 million silver taels, merely a trifle. Keep in mind that during the wedding earlier this year, Lu Yuan spent over four million taels of silver with a stroke of his pen. Twenty million silver taels were really just a drop in the bucket. For Lu Yuan now, it was like looking for a needle in a haystack. Now that the Northern Expedition has returned, Lu Yuan¡¯s various gains from the Changsha nation¡¯s army in Xichuan and Hanzhong prefectures have gradually been counted. Through various seizures in these two prefectures, as well as the sale of local government assets and prisoners, Lu Yuan has obtained a total of 43 million taels of current silver. In addition, a large number of extremely valuable jewelry, calligraphy and paintings, antiques, and other treasures in the process of being sold. Once they are all sold, it is expected that another 30 million taels can be collected. Adding all these gains together, there are 77 million taels of silver. With so much money, Lu Yuan allocated 20 million taels of silver to the national treasury as a special fund for immigration, allowing the court to settle millions of immigrants. He then left another 50 million taels of silver for military expenses. Currently, in Lu Yuan¡¯s Changsha Nation, there are as many as 240,000 various civil positions in local prefectures and counties, regional soldiers, central imperial soldiers, palace guards, and city garrison cavalry combined. Sustaining such a large army would require 14.4 million taels of silver a year, purely for the salaries. If the daily maintenance expenses were included, the total spending might reach around 16 million taels of silver. With 50 million taels of silver, it would only last for about three years. Well, although having an army of 240,000 sounds very inspiring and thrilling, it is indeed quite exhausting to maintain it. Even though Lu Yuan now has three prefectures and seventeen counties, he still feels the burden. Fortunately, according to the estimates of Sun Siwen and Cui Changqing, the two left and right prime ministers, after three years, with the settlement of immigrants in Xichuan and Hanzhong prefectures and the recovery of the eight northern prefectures, the national taxes collected will double. Chapter 492 - Chapter 492: Chapter 243: The Death of Marquis Wu’an _3 Chapter 492: Chapter 243: The Death of Marquis Wu¡¯an _3 By then, the annual income of more than five million silver taels will directly change to an annual income of ten million taels, and even twelve or thirteen million silver taels. And on the side of Ninghai and Southsea, each year they will also assist with five million silver taels and four million stones of grain. With these two combined, the military expenses can barely be covered. Even if there is still some shortfall at that time, Lu Yuan can always look for other ways to make ends meet. In this case, the military expenditure problem is supported by the current seizures for the first three years. After three years, there will be domestic taxes and aid from Ninghai and Southsea countries, which can be considered resolved. With the remaining seven million silver taels after the two expenses of immigration and military spending, Lu Yuan took it as the royal family¡¯s funds, put it into his private treasury, and used it as daily expenses. However, in fact, there are more than five million silver taels stored in Lu Yuan¡¯s private treasury. Previously, the 20 million silver taels acquired from Dan Ding Path and Iron Sword Sect, after the Northern Expedition and various expenses, there were still five million silver taels left. Therefore, Lu Yuan¡¯s current private treasury deposit is more than 13 million silver taels, which can be called a huge sum. Although the money is plenty, Lu Yuan did not misuse it casually. Just like what was said earlier. Three years later, no one knows whether the military expenditure will be enough. If it is not enough, at this point, it will be supported by his private treasury. It was precisely because Lu Yuan had a private treasury with 13 million silver taels that he was not worried at all about supporting his 240,000 soldiers. Of course, the money is prepared to be used on the edge of the blade. However, taking out 200,000 silver taels at this time to win the hearts of scholars in the world can still be done. Moreover, to be honest, winning the hearts of people in the world is fundamentally using money on the edge of the blade. That¡¯s not it. After hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s thoughts, Cui Changqing immediately praised: ¡°The scholars in the city will be grateful to Da Wang for his benevolent governance, and they will return to their hearts from now on.¡± Although ten silver taels are not much for those wealthy scholars, it may just be a meal for them. But for the truly poor, it may be the cost of coming to take the imperial examination. With Lu Yuan¡¯s gifts, many scholars don¡¯t have to waste time in the city after the exam, struggle in the market for travel expenses, and worry about making enough money for the trip back home. Even for some extremely poor people, this sum of money may be tomorrow¡¯s next lunch, the money that saves their lives. How can such acts not be called benevolent governance? And how can the king who cares so much about scholars not win their allegiance and gratitude? Lu Yuan smiled: ¡°Since this is the case, let¡¯s go ahead and do it. I will have someone send the money later.¡± Cui Changqing saluted: ¡°I will take my leave.¡± In the following few days, the imperial examination in Changsha City proceeded as scheduled. After several rounds of examinations, 800 of the 20,000 scholars who participated in the examinations were eventually awarded the juren status, and from then on they were qualified to become officials. After the examination, Lu Yuan¡¯s kind act of giving ten silver taels to all those who participated in the examination did indeed receive a chorus of praises among the scholars. Many who were actually saved by this sum of money were even more grateful to Lu Yuan, cheering for his long life and reign. With this unexpected windfall, many people who had failed the exam had their spirits lifted and a better mood due to this sum of money. Lu Yuan took the opportunity to harvest a wave of people¡¯s hearts and Qi Luck. After the provincial examination, the General Examination is held to test juren for the title of jinshi. Considering that the two newly-established prefectures lack senior officials, there will be a shortage of department chiefs in the prefectures and counties. Therefore, after careful consideration, Lu Yuan decided this time to recruit one hundred jinshi for the General Examination. The time was set for five days later. However, before the General Examination began, an urgent news from Jinling City took Lu Yuan¡¯s attention away. ¡°Marquis of Wu¡¯an has passed away?¡± In the Grand Hall of the morning meeting, Lu Yuan was receiving a messenger from the Yue State court who had brought the news, and his entire face was full of shock. ¡°Yes, Your Majesty.¡± The court messenger nodded and said, ¡°In recent years, the court has been unfortunate, and there have been repeated disasters and rebellions in various places. Neighboring countries have also often been restless and wage wars with us. Marquis of Wu¡¯an, since leading the troops in the 28th year of Longqing, has been fighting for eight years until this January. Since leading the troops, Marquis of Wu¡¯an has been fighting battles every day, with numerous military affairs. Traveling long distances, he was extremely exhausted. Engaging with the enemy, he was worrisome and consumed. Moreover, Marquis of Wu¡¯an was already in his advanced age, and after all these accumulated fatigue, he ultimately could not hold on, and suddenly passed away in his residence in the capital on the 20th of February in the ninth year of Hongdao, aged 146 years old. Now that the court has received the report from the family of Marquis Wu¡¯an, it has started preparations for the funeral, and the date is set for the 20th of May in the ninth year of Hongdao. As a diplomat, I was entrusted by the emperor to report this matter to your country and invite you to witness and participate in the ceremony.¡± Being buried three months after death in today¡¯s world is the treatment of a king of a country. The court¡¯s specification for Marquis of Wu¡¯an shows the recognition and importance of this military god. However, Marquis of Wu¡¯an had been establishing various merits for the court by fighting countless battles for more than a hundred years. Finally, before his death, he personally helped the court to quell the rebellion since Longqing, restoring peace to the present Yue Country. Such a state funeral is well deserved. And when Lu Yuan finished listening to the messenger, only one thought remained in his mind. The Heavenly Pillar of Da Yue has broken. Yes, the Heavenly Pillar of Da Yue has broken. Without the Military God, Marquis Wu¡¯an, the court¡¯s deterrence against foreign countries can be said to have suddenly diminished by a third. This is undoubtedly a huge disaster for the court, which is currently in a difficult situation, and the external crisis is heavy. If this is not the breaking of the Heavenly Pillar, then what is? Lu Yuan did not know whether the situation in various countries, which had finally calmed down, would be affected by Bai Mengyang¡¯s death, causing some waves? If so, it would truly be a catastrophe for the people. Before the people of various countries have enjoyed a few months of peaceful days, they will have to face war again. Chapter 493 - Chapter 493: Chapter 244: Plotting to Seize the Throne Chapter 493: Chapter 244: Plotting to Seize the Throne Lu Yuan felt a little worried in his heart. At this moment, it was hard to settle down, and he didn¡¯t want to start another war. Now, there are millions of people in the country who have not been resettled, and just taking care of these immigrants requires a lot of money and grain. The newly reorganized army of 240,000 also needs time to train and form combat effectiveness. Moreover, Zhou Qing has just been affected by the Immortal Spirit and needs a long time to adapt and transform. It will take at least five or six years for him to break through the Innate Realm. Which of these issues does not require a stable environment to complete? If the world becomes chaotic at this time, Lu Yuan¡¯s original plan to recuperate for five or ten years will be in vain. Without digesting the above achievements, both the immigrants and the reorganized army will become burdens. Changsha country needs to face the dangers coming from all around with these burdens. Zhou Qing will also not have time to grow and will have to face countless Inborn Grandmasters. ¡®The world is full of hardships.¡¯ Thinking of these concerns, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but sigh in his heart. The Wuan Marquis is dead. The lack of this mainstay in Yue Country weakens its strength, which should have been a good thing for Changsha Country. But under the current situation, it has become a risky and unknown matter. The changes in the world are truly unpredictable. ¡®No matter what, it¡¯s all in the future.¡¯ Lu Yuan reluctantly sighed, put away his shock, and nodded solemnly to the messenger: ¡°I never thought that the Wuan Marquis would pass away at this time. Last year, during the Northern Expedition, I met him, and he was full of spirits. In just two or three months, the world has changed so much. Messenger, don¡¯t worry. Please go back and tell the Heavenly Son and the Wuan Marquis¡¯ family that Changsha Country will send a Messenger to mourn him.¡± Despite the fact that both sides belong to different factions, even adversaries. But for the Wuan Marquis himself, for this contemporary Military God, Lu Yuan admires him. Since the Northern Expedition, although the United Army seemed to have been defeated by Lu Yuan¡¯s two surprise attacks, that situation was completely reversed. But substantially. The strategies for these two surprise attacks were both from the Wuan Marquis. It was the opponent¡¯s plan that allowed Lu Yuan to execute it. And even if Lu Yuan made many achievements during the execution, it is ultimately only part of the side army. If the Wuan Marquis hadn¡¯t single-handedly confronted the main force of the Zhou people on the battlefield, even if Lu Yuan wanted to launch a surprise attack and succeeded, the subsequent miraculous effects wouldn¡¯t have been achieved. Therefore, no matter how you look at it, the battle of the Northern Expedition, Lu Yuan¡¯s achievements and performances were the most eye-catching. But the contributions made by the Wuan Marquis as the supreme commander of the great army cannot be denied. After all, based on Lu Yuan¡¯s actual experience, he admired and recognized the abilities and achievements of the Wuan Marquis and admitted that there was still some gap between them. As a junior who had once shared the same status with such a senior, it was only right and proper for Lu Yuan to send someone to mourn him. Upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s response, the messenger below bowed: ¡°Your Majesty is magnanimous and generous. Since this is the case, I will take my leave and return to the court. Jinling City and Bai Residence will clean up their guest rooms to welcome Your Majesty¡¯s messenger.¡± Lu Yuan nodded: ¡°Safe travels, messenger.¡± After the messenger left, Lu Yuan thought alone in the hall for a moment and then summoned Honglu Temple¡¯s Yang Mansion official, Chang Huai Ren. Honglu Temple was mainly responsible for managing the affairs of various ethnic groups within Changsha Country, overseeing diplomacy, and funeral rites. In general, you can consider it the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Changsha Country. ¡°Paying respects to Your Majesty.¡± Chang Huai Ren arrived at the hall hurriedly after receiving the order, and bowed as he entered. ¡°Rise.¡± Lu Yuan nodded and said: ¡°You are the head of the Honglu Temple, responsible for its affairs. With the arrival of the Yue Country envoy, you must already know the purpose of their visit. The reason for summoning you here is to arrange a suitable envoy to go to Jinling City to mourn Wuan Marquis.¡± As the foreign ministry of Changsha Country, when envoys from other countries arrive, the Honglu Temple is responsible for reception. The intentions and etiquette of envoys from various countries will be coordinated and inquired by the Honglu Temple first. Therefore, Chang Huai Ren knew about the envoy from Yue Country reporting the funeral earlier than Lu Yuan. Already prepared for this matter, he immediately responded after hearing the inquiry: ¡°Your Majesty, Li Tingjing, who works in the Bureau of Guests, is quick-witted, eloquent, and knowledgeable in etiquette. He is fully capable of undertaking this important task.¡± ¡°Li Tingjing?¡± Hearing this name, Lu Yuan thought for a moment and vaguely remembered him. It seemed that when he was in Shaoyang Prefecture, Li Tingjing was an upright Scholar working under Cui Changqing in the ceremony department. He had a pretty good relationship with Sun Siwen and had been to Sun Residence to drink. He had met Lu Yuan once. At that time, he was just a ninth-grade official. Unexpectedly, in the few years since the establishment of Changsha Country, he has also become a sixth-grade official in his own administration. With Cui Changqing¡¯s and Sun Siwen¡¯s recommendation, Lu Yuan naturally trusts Li Tingjing¡¯s abilities and conduct. So after hearing the recommendation, he nodded and said: ¡°Then choose him.¡± Having arranged the mourning envoy, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t let Chang Huai Ren leave immediately. Instead, he continued: ¡°Besides selecting an envoy to mourn the Wuan Marquis, there is another matter I need to discuss with you.¡± Chapter 494 - Chapter 494: Chapter 244: Plotting to Seize the Throne_2 Chapter 494: Chapter 244: Plotting to Seize the Throne_2 Chang Huai Ren¡¯s expression turned solemn: ¡°Please give your command, Your Majesty.¡± Lu Yuan contemplated: ¡°Wuan Marquis is like the pillar holding up the sky for Yue Country. His sudden death is like the collapse of the heavenly pillars. I fear that the hard-won peace in the world will be disturbed once again. You, Honglu Temple, are responsible for the diplomacy with other countries. You should be the most well-informed about the situations and trends of various countries. So, I want to send more messengers from the Honglu Temple to visit other countries and gather information during this time. See whether any countries make any unusual moves after receiving this news? If there are, and it¡¯s confirmed that the country intends to send troops, let people gather as much information as possible to send back to our country so that we can prepare in advance. If possible, prevent the war from happening by all means.¡± My Changsha Kingdom has just been established and cannot afford to wage a war at this time.¡± Ah, these are the main reasons why Lu Yuan asked Chang Huai Ren to come this time. After listening to the instructions, Chang Huai Ren knew the importance of the matter and promised solemnly: ¡°Please rest assured, Your Majesty. I will surely send more messengers to investigate all the countries. Any news will be reported back to you.¡± Lu Yuan nodded: ¡°I will leave this matter to you.¡± Thus, a decision was finally made regarding Wuan Marquis¡¯ death. For a while, the Honglu Temple became very busy. The death of Wuan Marquis was far too significant and had the potential to reignite wars in the provinces of Yong, Qing, and Yang. The scope of influence was vast. Honglu Temple had to send messengers or spies to all surrounding countries that could be affected by this incident, which was a massive amount of work. After intense research discussions, they finally decided to send messengers to seven countries, and even more spies to thirteen other countries. A total of twenty countries were involved, with more than a hundred people to be arranged. It was almost like emptying out the entire Honglu Temple. So, it was destined to be a heavy task. During this busy time at the Honglu Temple, the imperial examination in Changsha City on the 13th of March also came to an end. A few days later, over a hundred new jinshi candidates held their final exam, the palace examination, in the Chaoyuan Hall of the Royal Palace, determining the top three leaders. Lu Yuan personally granted official positions to the top three leaders of this year¡¯s examination, officially concluding the Enke of Hongdao¡¯s Ninth year. At this time, Li Tingjing, the messenger who had been selected to go to Jinling City to mourn, also headed for Jinling City. He would be observing the movements of various parties at the center of this storm and verifying how this turbulence would ultimately evolve while sending messages back to his country. Meanwhile, Lu Yuan took this waiting time to focus on the cultivation of the Way of Taiping. By now, he had been cultivating this Dao book for over a year. With the passage of time, his cultivation had made great progress compared to the past. The Way of Taiping, a Qi Luck technique, was much more potent than ordinary Immortal Techniques if one ignored its side effects on one¡¯s lifespan. Since Lu Yuan had successfully expanded his territory and gained the loyalty of millions of people through the imperial examinations, his Qi Luck had grown exponentially, more than doubling from what it had been during the Northern Expedition. With his vastly improved Qi Luck, he could draw in much more Immortal Spirit Qi from the Heavenly Pillars than before, increasing his cultivation speed significantly. Thanks to various benefits, Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation had advanced rapidly. After only one year of cultivation, not only had his internal energy become abundant and solidified, but his soul had also become more robust. With sufficient Qi and a strong spirit, he felt that he wasn¡¯t far from the strength of Anqiu True Person. If he could wait another three or four months for the immigrants to settle down and harvest another wave of Qi Luck, perhaps he would be able to catch up to the other party. Anqiu True Person, who was an Immortal Dao cultivator, could match the strength of a second-ranked innate expert. If Lu Yuan¡¯s Immortal Dao cultivation reached such a level within three or four months, Then, with the strength at the second innate realm, even if the world were to plunge into chaos again due to Wuan Marquis¡¯ death, He would be able to protect Changsha and remain unflinchingly stable during these troubled times. After all, Wuan Marquis¡¯ strength was only at the second innate realm. Lu Yuan could match his strength, have no less capable troops, and have a brilliant military record. Comparatively, he would be like a replica of Wuan Marquis. If one Wuan Marquis could protect Yue Country for a hundred years, Then, a Changsha King would not necessarily be unable to protect Changsha Country for a hundred or even a thousand years! Lu Yuan was extremely confident in this. Time flies quickly. In the blink of an eye, the excitement of the imperial examination in March faded away from the streets and alleys. The newly-promoted juren and jinshi candidates started to assume their positions under the arrangement of the Ministry of Personnel. As they arrived and settled in, the three provinces and seventeen prefectures of Changsha Country finally had a complete system of officials in place, and the local operations resumed normality. As a newly born kingdom, Changsha Country was now full of vitality and a thriving atmosphere. Moreover, the influx of young officials diluted many of the ugly phenomena of the bureaucracy, such as ranking by seniority and corruption. Young people are always full of energy. Chapter 495 - Chapter 495: Chapter 244: Plotting to Seize the Throne_3 Chapter 495: Chapter 244: Plotting to Seize the Throne_3 At this time, the Changsha Kingdom was also filled with opportunities. As a result, under the combination of these factors, the handling of domestic governmental affairs accelerated. All kinds of policy decisions were implemented to a great extent. The newly recovered eight prefectures in Jiangbei quickly recovered their local stability under this trend of diligent and clean governance. The military administration that lasted for as long as a year came to an end, and the normalization began. With the efforts of these new officials, the immigrant resettlement and population census policies, which had been in place for a long time at the local level, were quickly implemented. Therefore, by the time of the sixth month in the ninth year of the Hongdao Era, Lu Yuan finally received a complete household report from his country. ¡°Your Majesty, in my Changsha Kingdom, there are three provinces and seventeen prefectures. After half a year¡¯s sorting and counting, the number of households in each region has been clarified.¡± Sun Siwen, holding a household register, handed it over to Lu Yuan inside the Hongwen Hall. Lu Yuan took it and began to flip through it. Next to him, Sun Siwen continued, ¡°Among them, there are ten prefectures in Dongting Province. In the original Jiangnan area, there are 420,000 households and 21.3 million people. After the Northern Expedition, we recovered the Tianmen Prefecture and later accepted 300,000 immigrant households from Hanzhong Prefecture. As a result, the entire province has ten prefectures, with a total of 740,000 households and 38.1 million people. Then there is Xichuan Province, which has three prefectures. These three prefectures were originally poor due to their mountainous terrain and were even more impoverished after the war. However, later on, you relocated 50,000 Hanzhong residents and 60,000 Xichuan residents there, replenishing the local population. Now, after counting the original population and newcomers from both provinces, Xichuan Province has three prefectures with a total of 160,000 households and 830,000 people. Lastly, there is Xiangyang Province, which has four prefectures. Xiangyang Province has always been a prosperous land, with convenient water transport along the Han River and the Yangtze River, and it serves as a border between the three nations, with merchants and travelers from the north and south passing through this area. The provinces are irrigated by two rivers, with abundant farmland supporting countless people. After the statistics, although Xiangyang Province has not received immigrants, the original four prefectures, even after experiencing a round of war, still retain 200,000 households and 1.07 million people. In summary, our Changsha Kingdom has a total of 1.1 million households and 5.71 million people across the three provinces. With a population of millions and a territory stretching thousands of miles, Changsha can now be called a great power in the world.¡± Sun Siwen concluded with a tone of pride and satisfaction. Indeed. With 1.1 million households, nearly 6 million people, occupying three provinces and seventeen prefectures, a territory spanning thousands of miles, and a standing army of 240,000 men. This strength is already doubled or even several times that of Ninghai and Southsea countries. When compared to smaller states like Xichuan and Hanzhong, the difference in national power is more than tenfold. If we consider the southwestern Yi nations of Dongting Province, the difference is like the bright moon and stars in the sky, incomparable in their brilliance. Even when facing powerhouses like Zhou, Liang, and Yue, Lu Yuan has one-tenth or one-fifth of their national strength when compared to a powerful and well-maintained Liang. For Yue, it¡¯s one-third. With such strength, how can they not be considered a great power? Upon hearing this statistic, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel a sense of accomplishment in his heart. After all these years of hard work, he finally created a great country. The sense of achievement was self-evident. However, amidst his happiness and pride, he didn¡¯t forget the current situation, so he just indulged in it for a while before regaining control of his emotions and said, ¡°The prosperity of our country can only be attributed to the assistance of wise ministers such as Brother Sun. My Changsha can have this scenery. However, the current situation is difficult, with many changes and uncertainties. Since the death of Wuan Marquis, the situation in Yue House has become turbulent again, seemingly facing the danger of extinction. Under these many disputes, the world¡¯s armed conflict may erupt at any time. As a vassal of the Yue State, my Changsha Kingdom cannot stay out of it. If a war breaks out, it will inevitably be involved. At this moment of stability, we don¡¯t know how long it will last. Therefore, while we still have this time of peace, I hope that Brother Sun and other wise ministers will devote your hearts and minds to our country and help me overcome this difficulty.¡± Over the past few months, As Lu Yuan ordered Honglu Temple to dispatch envoys and spies to various countries to investigate and collect information, News from all over the world continuously flowed back to Changsha City. Among them, the news brought back by Li Tingjing from Jinling City was the most worrying. Since the death of Wuan Marquis, without Bai Mengyang as the Pillar Holding up the Sky, the situation in the Yue State court has not only failed to lower their tails and pass through this crisis well, On the contrary, during this critical moment, rumors of the Xiao Family¡¯s failed virtue leading to chaos in the world and the decline of the Yue State spread in Jinling City, suggesting that it was time for the country to change its ruling family. Along with this rumor, another one spread as well; It was said that on the same night, dozens of people in Changzhou County dreamed of the sun rising in the sky. Sure enough, the next day, thousands of people saw the golden crow crossing the sky, and auspicious beasts and signs appearing. At the same time, in Jinling City, divine birds flew in, perched on a mound, spit out a jade, engraved with the character Shen on it. The current ruling family of the Yue State has the surname Xiao. And Changzhou County is the base of the Shen Clan, where the Grand General Shen Qiu lives. The golden crow represents the sun, and two suns in the sky mean that a day must pass, right? In Jinling City, a divine bird perches on a mound and spits out jade bearing the character Shen. With a mound and a Shen, isn¡¯t this talking about Grand General Shen Qiu? These two rumors spread and verified each other, directly conveying to people that the Xiao Family will withdraw, and the Shen Family will rise. The Yue State is about to change its dynasties. For some reason, after the death of Wuan Marquis, Grand General Shen Qiu seems to have become impatient, wanting to replace the Xiao Family and become the ruler of the four prefectures in Jiangdong. As the chief of Honglu Temple and a knowledgeable person who has read historical records, how could Sun Siwen not understand what these rumors were hinting at? First rumors, then auspicious signs, followed by remonstrations by officials, Shen Qiu¡¯s occupation of the throne, the emperor¡¯s decree of abdication, and the Yue State¡¯s change of power. The process of usurping the throne has begun. No, for the Linjiang aristocratic families, this should not be called usurpation, but rather a selective vote to remove the incompetent Xiao Family and replace them with the more preferable and powerful Shen Family. It represents the will of the people and should not be considered usurpation. However, even so, as a person who was part of the Yue State for the first half of his life, Sun Siwen still felt complex and indescribable emotions upon hearing the news of the coming downfall of the Yue State. However, as the right prime minister, his personal emotions did not sway him, and he replied solemnly after hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s words, ¡°Your Majesty entrusts us with the affairs of the state, placing great trust in us. We are honored to bear this responsibility. We will exert every effort and exhaust every consideration to serve the country. We are not afraid to die for Your Majesty.¡± His words were decisive, full of emotion, and showed no hesitation. Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan could not help but feel moved and reassured. Indeed, at critical moments, his close friends remained the most reliable. Chapter 496 - Chapter 496: Chapter 245: The Fall of Yue Country Chapter 496: Chapter 245: The Fall of Yue Country After concluding his conversation with Sun Siwen, Lu Yuan began to make preparations in the following time to cope with the upcoming changes in Yue Country. Although the news of the Xiao Family¡¯s abdication had been known to him five years ago when he participated in the Inescapable Meeting, he originally thought that the abdication, though inevitable, would have to wait until the local situation in Yue Country had stabilized and regained some vitality. Wait a few years, let the hundreds of thousands of formidable soldiers in Yue Country be recruited back. The newly-trained Inborn Grandmasters such as Shangguan Ming would also have time to grow. At that time, with enough preparation, even if there was a huge upheaval from the change of the dynasty in Yue Country, they would be able to cope with any external threats. Moreover, by then, the new territories developed by Lu Yuan would have stabilized, and Zhou Qing should be able to break through to the Inborn Grandmaster realm. At that time, even if Yue Country changed its dynasty, he would have sufficient strength to deal with it. Who could have thought? Shen Qiu just couldn¡¯t wait any longer. Just after the end of the Northern Expedition, when the people from various countries were still unsettled and vigilantly observing the situation, Shen Qiu resolutely started the process of changing the dynasty. This not only brought turbulence to the hard-won stability in Yue Country once again but also added many dangers and challenges. It also caught Lu Yuan off guard, messing up many of his plans. Therefore, in order to stabilize the people¡¯s hearts and cope with the foreign enemies, after receiving news from Jinling City in June of Hongdao¡¯s ninth year, Lu Yuan began to issue a series of decrees. First, he ordered three of the nine forbidden armies, led by Queen Lan Cai¡¯er, totaling sixty thousand troops, to march northward into Xiangyang Prefecture to ensure the safety of the northern border. Then, Lu Yuan also took the three armies northward, stationed in Baling City to guard this strategic town in the Yangtze River shipping route while observing the situation in Yue Country. This finally separated the couple who had been inseparable since their wedding due to the changing situation in Yue Country. This made both of them somewhat unhappy. But there was no way around it. In order to stabilize the domestic situation, even if they were unwilling in their hearts, they had to do so. Fortunately, after the reorganization of the forbidden army, although the various divisions were still assimilating and their fighting strength had not yet recovered to its peak state, there were at least enough soldiers in terms of numbers. With three forbidden armies stationed in Xiangyang City, Baling City, and Changsha City respectively, along the Han River and Yangtze River lines, they were strong enough to defend the country and deal with foreign enemies. Even if there were any accidents outside, they would have sufficient strength to handle them. They would not be at a loss as to what to do. As Changsha started to respond to the changes in Yue Country, other countries, upon learning of the coup in Yue Country¡¯s court, also saw upheavals. Firstly, the most responsive and powerful country in the surrounding area was naturally Liang Country. Upon receiving news of the death of Wuan Marquis and the intention of Yue Country¡¯s Grand General Shen Qiu to usurp the throne, Liang Country directly stationed three hundred thousand troops in Pengcheng Prefecture, which was adjacent to Guangling Prefecture, thus restraining Yue Country¡¯s northern border army. Then they stationed another two hundred thousand troops in Jiangxia Prefecture, menacingly across the Yangtze River from Jinling City. At the same time, Liang Country sent messengers to Jinling City to actively engage in activities. They would constantly meet with the puppet Heavenly Son, making all kinds of promises and encouragement while privately meeting with Shen Qiu, also giving various promises. However, whether it was the puppet Heavenly Son or the ambitious Grand General, Liang Country¡¯s goal for contacting them was still to seek benefits. Now there was a rumor circulating in Jinling City, which was said to have been spread from a close attendant of Zhou People¡¯s Messenger. It was said that the Liang envoy met with the Emperor of Hongdao and offered him a condition: as long as the Emperor of Hongdao could cede Guangling Prefecture, then five hundred thousand Liang troops would cross the river southward and help the Xiao Family maintain their dynastic power. With the support of Liang Country, even if Grand General Shen Qiu really had the intention to rebel, he would not dare to act recklessly in the face of Liang Country¡¯s threat. Under such operations, the Xiao Family might indeed be able to preserve their reign. However, according to the news leaked from the palace, it was said that Emperor Hongdao was quite tempted by this proposal. This Witchcraft Emperor, who had killed his father and ascended the throne, was still unwilling to give up his fantasy at this point and hand over the country that had been enjoyed by the Xiao Family for more than two hundred years. Although more than two hundred years ago, the Xiao Family had also been pushed to the position they were in today by the aristocratic families of Linhai County, just like the Shen Family is today. This foundation was not his but rather something that belonged to everyone, not just him. But after having been a ruler for more than two hundred years, the Xiao Family or rather the Hongdao Emperor, who had inherited the Xiao family¡¯s foundation, obviously regarded Yue Country as his own and was no longer willing to give it away. It¡¯s just that with the current situation, Though the Xiao Family is still an imperial family, there are no Inborn Grandmasters in their clan and they are no longer able to protect their foundation. Even if the Emperor Hongdao wanted to struggle further, he no longer had any power or bargaining chips at his disposal. Even if you really think about it, Besides Emperor Hongdao, are the rest of the Xiao imperial family members really willing to resist with him? The throne belongs to Emperor Hongdao, and at most it can be considered for his descendants. If their own throne is in danger, it is reasonable for them to resist and struggle. But for other members of the Xiao Family, whether the throne is in the hands of the Xiao Family or not, they have no chance with it. When the Xiao Family becomes the emperor, they will get at most a royal title and appear more prestigious. But if the Xiao Family were to step down from the throne, then according to the customary practice of Linhai County¡¯s aristocratic families for over two thousand years, the Xiao Family, although they would no longer be the imperial family, could still retain the status of the six families and seven tribes. Chapter 497 - Chapter 497: Chapter 245: The Fall of Yue Country_2 Chapter 497: Chapter 245: The Fall of Yue Country_2 Even without being an emperor, they would still be noble aristocrats capable of holding powerful positions in the court, enjoying wealth and influence without reduction. Given that. Then for ordinary members of the Xiao clan, or for those of Emperor Hongdao¡¯s lineage, why should they follow a puppet emperor who is about to abdicate for the sake of a false name and put their lives at risk? Isn¡¯t it better to maintain the current convention? Even if they abdicate today, they will still have opportunities in the future to regain the throne. As long as the younger generation of the Xiao family can produce a transcendent figure who can command the world, like their founding ancestors or Shen Qiu today. Then, it would be easy to repeat today¡¯s story, ask the six surnames and seven families to elect a new leader, and re-ascend the throne. Isn¡¯t it better for everyone to play the game of election system among aristocratic families in a harmonious way, rather than stubbornly holding the position and making everyone uncomfortable? Moreover, if the Xiao family really clings to the position, it would break the rules and tacit understanding among the coastal aristocratic families, touching the interests and bottom lines of everyone. Throughout history, those who go against the interests of most people rarely have good outcomes. If the Xiao family really does this, do they truly believe that other desperate aristocratic families won¡¯t resort to violence and directly annihilate the Xiao clan? In the more than two thousand years of history of the Coastal Noble Family, there have been such cases. There are naturally those within the Xiao family who read historical records diligently and take them as warnings. So when Emperor Hongdao¡¯s desire to sell out Yue Country in exchange for the continuity of his throne was revealed, actions were taken inside the Xiao clan before the other coastal aristocratic families could react. Xiao Wen, the head of managing the imperial family, led several princes of the Xiao clan to meet with Emperor Hongdao face to face. It was rumored that during the meeting, Xiao Wen and the princes directly accused Emperor Hongdao of sacrificing their family¡¯s survival for his own self-interest. Emperor Hongdao, in turn, blamed them for only considering themselves, disregarding the two-hundred-year foundation of the Xiao family, and violating the principles of loyalty. Xiao Wen then mocked him directly, asking, was the two-hundred-year foundation more important, or the two-thousand-year foundation? Leaving Emperor Hongdao speechless. After a heated debate and a big fight, both sides parted ways in anger. Xiao Wen and other relatives of the Xiao clan, seeing they couldn¡¯t persuade Emperor Hongdao, went straight to General Shen Qiu¡¯s mansion after leaving the palace and met him in person. Several representatives of the Xiao clan and Shen Qiu, who was about to usurp the Xiao clan¡¯s foundation, had a secret discussion overnight, and no one knows what agreement was reached. Until the second day. The news came from the palace that Emperor Hongdao had suddenly fallen ill during the night and was bedridden, unable to attend to affairs. Xiao Yuanyi, the king of Hailing, was put in charge of the affairs of the entire country. Xiao Yuanyi was the late emperor¡¯s fifth legitimate son and was appointed as the king of Hailing during his father¡¯s reign. Theoretically, Xiao Yuanyi¡¯s legitimacy for inheritance was not much weaker than Emperor Hongdao¡¯s. The clear message from the Xiao clan and Shen Qiu was that if he wouldn¡¯t drink the toast, they wouldn¡¯t hesitate to offer a penalty. Everyone had already lost patience with this person who wouldn¡¯t abide by the rules. They prepared to give Emperor Hongdao a dignified end and let him exit gracefully. As expected. Less than half a month after Xiao Yuanyi started to govern the country, bad news came from the palace: a plague had broken out in the palace, and several of Emperor Hongdao¡¯s direct descendants had been infected and died in the chaos. After this plague, Emperor Hongdao¡¯s throne lacked a successor. Two days later, word came from the palace again that due to the death of his sons, Emperor Hongdao had fallen into severe depression and had been infected with the plague. The ministers were all shocked when they heard this. Regent Xiao Yuanyi, ignoring the danger of the plague, personally entered the palace to meet the emperor. When he came out, he confirmed that the emperor had indeed been infected with the plague. Xiao Wen, the chief of the imperial clan, ordered the imperial physicians to save the emperor at all costs upon hearing the terrible news. However, the epidemic was truly dangerous. Among the doctors who risked their lives to treat the emperor, two died from contracting the plague. In the end, they could not save Emperor Hongdao. On the 5th day of the eighth month in the ninth year of Hongdao¡¯s reign, Emperor Hongdao, who had been bedridden for half a month, passed away in the Hall of Cultural Virtue before the new Mid-Autumn Festival. This Witchcraft Emperor, who came to power by killing his father through witchcraft, ultimately died of the plague, and his bloodline was cut off without leaving any descendants. It can¡¯t be denied that this is the retribution of heaven¡¯s cycle; retribution is inevitable. No one knows how future historians will evaluate this Witchcraft Emperor, who lost four counties of the country and nearly half of the territory during his reign and saw five foreign-ruled feudal states emerge under his rule? No matter how he is evaluated, one fact is certain. Emperor Hongdao will bear the blame for the decline and fall of Yue Country. The Heavenly Son has died, and the people mourn the loss of the nation. However, there can be no day without the sun, nor a nation without a ruler. After Emperor Hongdao¡¯s passing, officials grieved incomprehensibly, but Yue Country cannot be without an emperor. However, due to the recent plague in the palace, all of Emperor Hongdao¡¯s sons had died. After his demise, no one could be found to inherit the throne. With no other choice, the city officials had to consult with the Xiao clan¡¯s relatives and eventually nominated King Hailing, who was known to be prudent, studious, benevolent, and well-mannered, to be the new emperor. So on the 6th day of the eighth month in the ninth year of Hongdao¡¯s reign, Xiao Yuanyi, the king of Hailing, officially ascended to the throne in the Jianji Hall and changed the era name to Chengyou, becoming the eighth emperor of Yue Country, Emperor Chengyou. Chapter 498 - Chapter 498: Chapter 245: The Fall of Yue Country_3 Chapter 498: Chapter 245: The Fall of Yue Country_3 Just as the clan officials had recommended, Emperor Chengyou was indeed intelligent, studious, merciful, and well-mannered. On his first day on the throne, the first decree he issued was not to hold a state funeral for Emperor Hongdao. Instead, it was sent directly to Grand General Shen Qiu. In the decree, Emperor Chengyou praised Shen Qiu for his contributions to defending the country, commanding the armies of the world, and successively quelling the rebellions of Jianan, Dongting, and Xichuan counties, thus restoring peace to the local areas. Furthermore, Shen Qiu defeated Jinghai Country and Zhou Country, expanding Da Yue by establishing three new counties: Jiuzhen, Hanzhong, and Xiangyang. In theory, Grand General Shen Qiu, who served under the Emperor of Yue, held the highest military command. The achievements of Bai Mengyang, Lu Yuan, and others in the country should also be partly attributed to him. Shen Qiu, as the leader, should take greater credit. Although people like Lu Yuan, Yan Wangqiu, and Qiao Kangquan each built their own countries, they were all nobles of Da Yue in name and jointly honored the Emperor of Yue as the Heavenly Son. Therefore, from the surface, counting the five countries such as Changsha, Hanzhong, and Southsea as part of Yue Country did not pose any problem. The territories reclaimed and expanded by these five countries could naturally be regarded as part of Yue Country¡¯s territory. So, in this respect, there was nothing wrong with the decree. Of course, all these reasons and formalities were just pretext. The real focus of the decree lay in what followed. In order to reward him for his great achievements in maintaining domestic harmony and exerting influence abroad, Emperor Chengyou upgraded Shen Qiu from the Duke of Shen to the King of Ning, granting him Guangling and Yuzhang as his territories. At the same time, Shen Qiu continued to hold the position of Grand General while a noble king, commanding all military affairs at home and abroad, serving as the Grand Marshal, and Secretary of State, in charge of all government affairs. With this, a sixth king of a different surname emerged in Da Yue, occupying the rich and core regions of Guangling and Yuzhang. By separating these two counties and only considering their strength, the newly-established Ning Country had already surpassed the Yue State court and become the strongest noble king under the Yue Country system. After Shen Qiu was conferred the title of king, the Liang Country turned its sights to Shen Qiu¡¯s imminent usurpation and realized that its schemes from the emperor¡¯s side could no longer hold. When they approached Shen Qiu, the newly-enthroned King Ning refused even to meet them, leaving them frustrated and embarrassed. In their anger, the 300,000 Liang troops stationed in Pengcheng County began to make tentative attempts to cross the river and attack Guangling County. They hoped that the military pressure would force the King Ning, who was about to usurp power, to compromise. But could Shen Qiu, an Inborn Realm Second Realm Grandmaster and the commander of the world¡¯s armies, be so easily defeated and compromised? Upon receiving news of the attack on Guangling County by Liang troops, Shen Qiu immediately summoned the officials to meet with Emperor Chengyou and requested permission for a northern expedition to resist the Liang army. During the court meeting, Emperor Chengyou happily granted Shen Qiu¡¯s request to wage war. Not only did he entrust all domestic military power to Shen Qiu, but also, in order to add prestige to the Grand General, he bestowed upon him nine precious gifts and great honor to support and strengthen his mission. After accepting these honors, Shen Qiu held a grand review of the troops in the capital and boosted morale. On the same day, he set up the Northern Expedition Camp. Shen Qiu personally took command of the camp, appointed Wucheng Marquis Shangguan Ming as the deputy camp commander, and led 100,000 Imperial Guards from the capital to reinforce Guangling County against the Liang forces. In addition to leading the army on the Northern Expedition himself, Shen Qiu also ordered Martial Proclamation Marquis Yang Jing to supervise the naval forces, commanding 100,000 court naval forces to blockade the river, and guard Yuzhang and Linhai Counties, keeping the 200,000 Liang forces in Jiangxia County at bay. Two months later, Shen Qiu gathered 150,000 local border troops from Guangling County and faced off against Liang forces on the other side of the river with a total force of 250,000 troops. During this time, the two armies fought several hundred battles, with tens of thousands of casualties on both sides. Eventually, the Liang forces on the opposite side saw no opportunity to seize and gained no advantage, and suffered a loss of 40,000 to 50,000 troops. They reluctantly agreed to a temporary ceasefire. In Jiangxia County, their waterways were completely blocked. Unable to cross the river, they posed no threat to Jiangnan. Meanwhile, Zhou Country, after observing the situation for nearly half a year, finally responded. In the tenth month of Emperor Chengyou¡¯s reign, they sent an envoy to Guangling to congratulate Shen Qiu on establishing Ning Country. Obviously, unlike Liang Country¡¯s unsuccessful attempt to take advantage of the situation, Zhou Country opted for stability, not wishing to engage in military action hastily. Zhou Country chose to support and acknowledge Shen Qiu¡¯s takeover of the Xiao Family and the establishment of Ning Country. As soon as Zhou Country took a stand, the alliance between Zhou and Yue was immediately reestablished. Facing a coordinated defense of both countries against their own, Liang Country¡¯s southward campaign, which had cost a fortune in both money and provisions, gained nothing. Realizing that further hostilities would be futile and costly, Liang Country begrudgingly withdrew its troops and recalled the 300,000 soldiers who had headed south. So it was. This war between Liang and Yue, triggered by Shen Qiu¡¯s appointment as king, ended with the withdrawal of Liang¡¯s forces and a great victory for Yue Country. Emboldened by this victory, Shen Qiu returned to court with his army. Emperor Chengyou personally led the officials on a 10-mile journey out of the city to welcome them. At the same time, he issued a decree granting special honor and privilege to the Grand General, allowing him to ascend the palace hall with his sword and walk freely within the court, yet his name would not be called out during rituals. With the completion of the ¡°Three-Piece Set¡± and the prestige of the Northern Expedition, the timing for Shen Qiu to usurp power was perfect. Three days later, following the advice of his ministers, the Heavenly Son issued a decree in favor of abdication to King Ning. Shen Qiu refused, expressing fear and unease. Another three days passed, and the ministers advised again, with the Heavenly Son issuing a second decree of abdication. Shen Qiu still declined, citing his own shallow virtue as the reason. Three days later, on the fourth day of the eleventh month in the first year of Emperor Chengyou¡¯s reign, the ministers offered their advice for the third time, and the Heavenly Son issued the third decree of abdication. Shen Qiu finally lamented his inability to preserve his reputation and reluctantly accepted the decree of abdication. On the same day, he led the officials into the palace and officially took over the throne of Yue Country from Emperor Chengyou in the presence of everyone. On the fourth day of the eleventh month in the first year of Emperor Chengyou¡¯s reign, Emperor Xiao Yuanyi, who had just ascended the throne for a hundred days, abdicated in favor of King Ning Shen Qiu at the Jianji Hall. With this, the end of Yue Country was officially announced, having enjoyed 213 years of existence. On the same day, King Ning Shen Qiu ascended the throne, changed the era to the Jianwu era, and established Ning Country. The Grand General, now Emperor, inherited Yue Country and became the ruler of the five counties and five countries in Jiangnan. As for Yue Country, the retired Emperor Xiao Yuanyi continued to serve as the Duke of Yue, honoring the ancestral temple and offering sacrifices to previous generations of monarchs. With this, the power transfer within the aristocratic families of Linhai County was finally completed, after weathering countless storms and tribulations. As the news of the fall of Yue Country and the establishment of Ning Country spread at an incredibly fast speed, it reached the surrounding countries. Chapter 499 - : Chapter 246: Severing Karma : Chapter 246: Severing Karma Yue Country perished. When Lu Yuan received the news, even though he had anticipated it in his heart, he still couldn¡¯t help being shocked for a long time. How could a dynasty that had dominated Jiangnan for more than two hundred years just be gone like that? The rise and fall in the world is truly lamentable. However, after sighing with emotion for a while, he began to take action. Since Yue Country had already perished, and it seemed that the newly established Ning Country, which had replaced it, had also survived its founding crisis. Through a Northern Expedition, they repelled the Zhou people, completely drove away external threats, and stood firm in the troubled times. In that case, the relationship between his Changsha State and the new Ning Country should be carefully considered. ¡°I am now cultivating the Way of Taiping, which is the Fortune Dao. According to this Dao, if Yue Country is regarded as a big tree, and my Changsha Country originated from Yue Country¡¯s enfeoffment, then it is the branches and leaves of the big tree. Changsha Country gathers Qi Luck, just like the photosynthesis of leaves, absorbing nutrients from the outside world. This absorbed Qi Luck can retain a part of the difference, but eventually, it still has to separate some, to maintain the survival of the main trunk. Therefore, the Qi Luck gathered by Changsha Country is innately required to divide two or three parts, or even more than half, for the Yue State court. This is the meaning of branch origin.¡± Now, as the cultivation of the Taiping Dao becomes more and more profound, some things that Lu Yuan didn¡¯t notice when he was cultivating have gradually been discovered. For example, with every cycle of Qi Luck, he could always feel that the Qi Luck he absorbed was not the entirety of the gathered Qi Luck. The Qi Luck provided by millions of people in Changsha¡¯s territory seems to be intercepted partly and led in an unknown direction. This intercepted Qi Luck probably accounts for about 30% of his total Qi Luck. At the beginning, when Lu Yuan first learned this way with no guidance, he had no idea why his Qi Luck would be intercepted by others. Even though he was angry and unwilling in his heart, there was nothing he could do about it. But a few days ago, most of the Qi Luck that was intercepted suddenly returned, and the final loss reduced to about 10%. This, of course, made Lu Yuan curious. Nevertheless, after careful consideration, it was still due to his limited horizons and experience that he could not figure out much. In the end, he could only accept the fact with confusion and joy, and then work even harder to cultivate the Taiping Dao Book. It wasn¡¯t until today when the news from Jinling City in the east informed him of Yue Country¡¯s demise and the establishment of Ning Country that Lu Yuan suddenly realized that it was the Yue State court that had been intercepting his Qi Luck all along. Thinking about it makes sense. Changsha country is derived from Yue country, and was originally a fiefdom established by Yue Country¡¯s granting the Dongting Prefecture. There has been a distinction between master and subject in terms of their relationship. In fact, all along, the banner Lu Yuan had been carrying bore the name of Changsha in the Yue dynasty. In the eyes of people from other countries, Changsha was a vassal state of Da Yue and not an independent state. Not just him, but also the four countries of Southsea, Ninghai, Xichuan, and Hanzhong are, in the eyes of outsiders, lords under the banner of Da Yue. The Five Nations in One Morning were actually one entity. Otherwise, during the previous Northern Expedition, why did Changsha, Southsea, and Ninghai have to accept the deployment of Yue State court and send 100,000 troops each to participate in the Northern Expedition? After participating in the Northern Expedition, the three kings remained, so why did they have to follow the command of Wuan Marquis Bai Mengyang, willingly allowing their kingdoms to receive orders from a minister from another country? Aren¡¯t all these facts testimony to the master-servant relationship between Changsha and the other regional states, and the Yue State court? No need to discuss the actual internal situation. Regardless, to outsiders, the situation was just like that. That¡¯s why, even though Yue Country¡¯s strength had declined significantly, with only five prefectures remaining under direct jurisdiction, they could still hold the status of the Master of Yangzhou while on par with Liang Country, which occupied ten prefectures, and Zhou Country, which lost half of Hanzhong and more than half of Xiangyang, leaving only seven prefectures. What is the reason? Aren¡¯t the five vassal kingdoms under Yue State court¡¯s jurisdiction still nominally ruling over ten prefectures? It is this seemingly vast territory that has maintained the status of Yue as the hegemon. It is also precisely because of this fiefdom tribute system that, regardless of source or status, Changsha Country is subjected to Yue Country. Under such circumstances, the Qi Luck that he gathered had to be divided by 30%, which was intercepted and given to the Yue State court. ¡°Now that Yue Country is gone, the original master-servant relationship and tribute system naturally no longer exist. So the intercepted 30% Qi Luck came back by 20%. Then why didn¡¯t the remaining 10% return?¡± Lu Yuan pondered and frowned: ¡°Could it be that the newly established Ning Country, which inherited the legitimate lineage of Yue Country, also inherited part of the big cause of my name, and that¡¯s why it was able to intercept the remaining 10% of Qi Luck? If I continue to acknowledge Ning Country¡¯s leading position and become a vassal state under its tribute system, wouldn¡¯t the now returned 20% be intercepted again? If it¡¯s really like this, then the relationship between me and Ning country needs to be thoroughly discussed.¡± For him, there is nothing more important than Qi Luck in the current situation. The more Qi Luck, the faster the practice of the Taiping Dao Book and the progress of the realm. Under the tribute system, it seems that only 30% of the Qi Luck was intercepted, leaving 70% behind. However, it was not just 30% of the Qi Luck that was snatched away from Lu Yuan, but also his cultivation speed was brutally cut by 30%. Chapter 500 - Chapter 500: Chapter 246: Cutting off Karma_2 Chapter 500: Chapter 246: Cutting off Karma_2 This is a 30% increase in cultivation speed! It might not seem like much in the short term, but in the long run, having one¡¯s cultivation speed slowed down by 30% is a huge loss. Even 30% is an understatement. Even if his Qi Luck is cut by 10%, slowing down his cultivation speed by 10%, it¡¯s still an unbearable situation for Lu Yuan. He governs his country, stabilizes his people, leads his troops into battle, expands his territory, and painstakingly earns his Qi Luck, sacrificing his lifespan to cultivate the Taiping Dao Book. After paying such a high price, is he just going to let others benefit from it? Just thinking about it is extremely frustrating, isn¡¯t it? It¡¯s upsetting like raising a child for 20 years only to find out it¡¯s not yours; the feeling of disgust is indescribable. Now, the stolen Qi Luck is equivalent to the child Lu Yuan has brought up for someone else. How much injustice does one have to endure to accept such a humiliating situation? At least he can¡¯t accept it. ¡°So, not only the master-servant relationship needs to be severed, but also the tribute system. Just as Yue Country has been destroyed, might as well take this opportunity to sever everything completely.¡± When Lu Yuan realized this, his determination had already set in. He cannot let others take away the Qi Luck he has painstakingly earned. He has nothing to do with this newly established Ning Country, and as for Shen Qiu, a person he doesn¡¯t even know wants to share his Qi Luck? Is he dreaming? Now let¡¯s take the chance to completely cut ties with those Coastal Aristocratic families. Although Lu Yuan has decided to completely sever ties with Ning Country, the relationship between Changsha and Ning Country is not something that can be severed easily. Moreover, even if it can be severed, doing it in a proper and well-thought-out manner is crucial. The simplest and most direct method, of course, is to send a messenger to Jinling and personally confront Shen Qiu, condemning his despicable act of usurpation, denouncing Ning Country, and declaring war directly with them. The above method is undoubtedly the fastest way to sever ties. Not only will it completely sever their relationship, but it will also rally those loyal to the Yue Country, winning over the hearts of the people, and harvesting a wave of Qi Luck in return. But can it be done like this? Obviously not. First of all, let alone the newly established Ning Country ¨C after taking over the foundation of Yue Country, its strength is far greater than that of Changsha. If they were to declare war, chances of winning are slim. Changsha is currently not in a position to risk a war that could potentially cause the collapse of the nation. Therefore, the above method is not feasible. Since direct confrontation won¡¯t work, the only way to cleanly cut ties is to take a roundabout approach. So when Lu Yuan received the news of the destruction of Yue Country and decided to cut ties with Ning Country, he immediately sent messengers to Southsea, Ninghai, Xichuan, and Hanzhong that very day. The purpose of sending the messengers was simple, to unite these four countries in renouncing their master-servant relationship, and the tribute system with Ning Country. Severing ties with Ning Country alone as Changsha Country, after all, might seem less convincing in terms of support. But if he could pull in a few other countries, then their combined strength and support would be significantly increased. The difference between dealing with a single Changsha Country and dealing with all the feudatory countries is significant for the Ningguo Dynasty. One is a problem that can be easily resolved on its own; the other is an opponent that cannot be dealt with even if they give their all. Which is easier and which is harder, that goes without saying. The only headache here is whether the other countries will willingly follow Lu Yuan¡¯s plan to break away from the Ningguo Dynasty¡¯s tribute system. Among the four countries outside Changsha, the probability of the newly established Xichuan and Hanzhong countries agreeing is not high. These two countries have very limited strength, with just seven or eight hundred thousand people each, and their combined armed forces do not exceed 50,000. Calling them small countries would not be an exaggeration. Yet, these two small countries have to uphold against 150,000 troops deployed by Zhou Country in Hanzhong County. With such a strong enemy looming over them, it would be insane for Hanzhong and Xichuan to leave the protection of Ning Country¡¯s ¡°big tree¡± and give up their reliable alliance, choosing to stand alone against the surrounding powerful enemies. Thus, it¡¯s not very likely that they¡¯d be successfully persuaded to join forces. Fortunately, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t have much expectation for them and didn¡¯t rely on them for help. His real expectation was with Southsea and Ninghai Countries. These two countries have been old allies. They previously formed an alliance and stood up together against Yue Country, setting off the prologue of fiefdoms. Lately, the three countries have been in a small coalition, advancing and retreating together, dealing with pressure from Yue Country and other nations. Now Yue Country has ceased to exist. Lu Yuan believes that he¡¯s not the only one who¡¯s shaken and has other thoughts in his mind in the face of this heavy news. He wants to take this opportunity to sever ties with Ning Country and make Changsha Country independent. And what about Southsea and Ninghai Countries? Don¡¯t they also want to? Err¡­ It might be possible that old Yan Wangqiu actually doesn¡¯t want that. The old man has aged, and now he seems to be 145 or 146 years old, just like the Wuan Marquis who died earlier this year, and probably won¡¯t live much longer. Under these circumstances, what he¡¯s thinking about is stability ¨C being able to pass on Southsea Country to the next generation. Therefore, Yan Wangqiu might not support Lu Yuan¡¯s intentions to cause trouble. However, if old Yan doesn¡¯t support it, Su Xuange might not necessarily share the same sentiment. Unlike the old and dying Yan Wangqiu, Su Xuange is only 83 years old and still has over 60 years of life left. He¡¯s in his prime. Chapter 501 - Chapter 501: Chapter 246: Severing Karma_3 Chapter 501: Chapter 246: Severing Karma_3 And this person¡¯s temperament was not one to be content with the status quo. Based on Lu Yuan¡¯s contact with him, he was a heroic figure with great ambition and ambitious aspirations. The small Yulin county could not possibly bind him. Only a broader heaven and earth would be the direction of his heart. ¡°According to the report from the spies I planted in Ninghai Country, Su Xuange began imposing a massive levy on the country¡¯s populace after returning from the Northern Expedition. Within just over half a year, the tax in Ninghai Country has doubled compared to before. It has put a heavy burden on the people, making their lives unbearable. In some places, massive civilian escapes occurred. All of the extra tax money he collected was used for army expansion and improvement. With the 20,000 captured soldiers from the Northern Expedition and the original 10,000 county soldiers, Su Xuange used them as a foundation, and then recruited another 20,000 people from the tens of thousands of militia brought back from the Northern Expedition, forming a force of 50,000 soldiers. Then, he expanded the prefectural and county soldiers on a large scale, recruiting 50,000 people on the scale of 3,000 per prefecture and 200 per county. He even imitated me, establishing militias on the local level. With theseoperations, he almost established a standing army of 100,000 and tens of thousands of militias. Although the fighting strength of these newly trained soldiers, county soldiers, and militias was doubtful. But the number of more than 200,000 troops has been raised, and the reputation of 50,000 battle soldiers and 50,000 county soldiers was quite intimidating. Today¡¯s Ninghai Country is already considered a small military powerhouse on paper.¡± Lu Yuan recalled the intelligence received from Ninghai Country over the past few months. He had a clear understanding of Su Xuange¡¯s intentions. If the small Ninghai Country simply wanted to defend itself, would there be a need for so many troops? Just 50,000 battle soldiers and county soldiers, along with Su Xuange, an Inborn Grandmaster, would be enough to fend off attacks from the outside, ensuring Ninghai Country¡¯s survival even against an enemy of 200,000. So for self-defense, Ninghai Country only needed 50,000 troops. However, now, Su Xuange disregarded the fact that his country was newly established with the people¡¯s support, forcibly imposed harsh taxes, forced people to flee to the point of death, and expanded the military by any means necessary. With this method of exhausting resources and wanting to expand the army, it¡¯s hard to believe that he¡¯s doing it for self-defense even for a three-year-old, right? Since it¡¯s not for self-defense, Su Xuange¡¯s domestic tyranny, raising a large number of troops, is naturally not for show but for expansion. Where was he planning to expand? Geographically, there are four directions: east, south, west, and north. To the north of Ninghai Country was Changsha Country. Lu Yuan had a territory of thousands of miles, with more than 200,000 elite soldiers and two Inborn Grandmasters in the country. This strength was double that of Ninghai Country, making it unlikely for Su Xuange to provoke them as long as he retained his sanity. And to the west were the southwestern Barbarian Countries. In the southwestern Barbarian Countries, although most of them were weak, many were only a prefecture or county with tens of thousands to a hundred thousand people, truly small countries. It would only require a few thousand to ten thousand soldiers to destroy countless countries there. In the southwestern region, apart from these small Barbarian Countries, there were also several rulers: Da Changhe Country, Dali Country, and Nanzhao Country. These three Barbarian Countries essentially dominated the small Barbarian Countries in the southwest. If Ninghai Country wanted to attack those small Barbarian Countries, it would inevitably confront the three Barbarian Countries. But these three Barbarian countries all have territories of thousands of miles, millions of people under their rule, capable of fielding tens of thousands of soldiers, and having Inborn Grandmasters to guard them. In terms of strength, they were not weaker than Ninghai Country, even being somewhat stronger. As long as Su Xuange is not a fool, he wouldn¡¯t poke this hornet¡¯s nest. So his only remaining expansion targets are to the south and east. And to the south of Ninghai Country was Jiuzhen County, which was originally part of Da Yue and now belongs to Da Ning. Nowadays, Jiuzhen County has recovered in the past few years, with roughly 200,000 households and a population of just over one million. Within this county, there are 50,000 battle soldiers led by Marquis Wuping, Xie Ning, from the Ningguo Dynasty, as well as 20,000 local county soldiers. In case of need, the county can also conscript over a hundred thousand civilian workers. With this strength, Su Xuange¡¯s dream of conquering Jiuzhen County was basically impossible. ¡°So his final goal is just Nanhai Country.¡± Lu Yuan pondered in his heart. He knew that the alliance between Changsha, Southsea, and Ninghai would eventually break when it was first established. He had been on guard against this and had been preparing for the future break-up. But Su Xuange¡¯s change of heart happened much faster than expected, already setting his sights on Southsea Country. However, it was not surprising. Since Yan Wangqiu would soon die of old age, there would be no Inborn Grandmaster to protect Southsea Country. Moreover, after returning from the Northern Expedition, Yan Wangqiu did not immediately establish his own battle soldier system like Su Xuange did. Now in the entire Southsea Country, just as before, there are only over ten thousand county soldiers. Once Yan Wangqiu dies, this strength will be virtually non-existent to any outsider. Yet Southsea is so rich and prosperous in this chaotic world that everyone wants to take a bite of this fat lamb while surrounded by a pack of wolves. It¡¯s quite normal for Su Xuange to be tempted. Not to mention him, even I would not be able to resist it. The only difference between him and Su Xuange was probably that he wouldn¡¯t actively betray the alliance and wouldn¡¯t attack this ally during the alliance¡¯s term, right? In the chaotic world, it¡¯s a battle of survival of the fittest. You either strive to eat others or get eaten by others. Why else would they call it the age of struggle? With such awareness, just like Lu Yuan, Su Xuange will naturally not be content with his current position amidst the imminent destruction of Yue Country. Standing up together with Lu Yuan and declaring their independence was not a problem at all. Once Changsha and Ninghai Countries took action, Southsea Country, as a member of the tripartite alliance, would inevitably join them in breaking away from Ningguo, even if they were reluctant to do so. Therefore, for this separation, the alliance between the three countries should still advance and retreat as one without a doubt. Four Inborn Grandmasters and nearly 400,000 soldiers would be sufficient to deter the Ningguo Dynasty, making them compromise. Therefore, Lu Yuan waited patiently for each country¡¯s response after sending the envoys. At the same time, he was also waiting for the first wave of emissaries from Ning Country to arrive in Changsha after the founding of the country. The reform of the regional hegemony in Yangzhou would soon begin. The old system was eventually going to break, and the millennium dynasty of the coastal aristocratic families had come to sound the death knell. Chapter 502 - Chapter 502: Chapter 247: Confrontation and Breakup Chapter 502: Chapter 247: Confrontation and Breakup Inside Changsha city, Lu Yuan met with the Ning Country Emissary who had come from afar at the Royal Palace. ¡°The diplomat offers greetings to the King.¡± This Ning Country Emissary was a man in his thirties or forties, handsome and graceful. From his temperament, it was not hard to tell that he must be from one of the aristocratic families in Linhai. ¡°You need not be too formal.¡± Lu Yuan took a look at the messenger and then asked, ¡°The Messenger came a long way from Jinling, may I know the purpose?¡± This Ning Country Emissary solemnly stated, ¡°Since the reign of Longqing, the Yue House has lost its virtue, with two generations of rulers being foolish and muddled. As a result, the world is in chaos and people are displaced. Thus, the altars of soil and grain are disturbed, and the people of the world have long suffered from the troubles in Yue. At that time, my king suppressed internal rebellion, exterminated Jinghai to the south, slaughtered Qiang bandits to the west, attacked Zhou Country to the north, and drove back Liang people. This could be regarded as saving the collapsing building and rescuing the people from misery, contributing to the reconstruction of the altars of soil and grain. In view of the admiration of the people, their gratitude and tears, the subjects and people all submitted letters of advice urging enthronement, and the Heavenly Son of the Yue House also issued a decree of abdication. Therefore, my king carried the heavy expectations of the world and could not bear to disappoint the people¡¯s hopes. He finally received the abdication of the Heavenly Son in the first year of Chengyou, on the fourth day of the eleventh lunar month, and took over the orthodox rule of the Yue House, establishing the Ning dynasty. Now my king has established a great kingdom, changing the era to Jianwu, and has taken the place of the Yue House as the ruler of the five cities and five countries of Yangzhou. When the Heavenly Son ascends the throne, he must announce it to the feudal lords of the four corners. Therefore, as a diplomat under orders, I am here to inform the King of this matter. And request that the King send someone to Jinling to meet the Heavenly Son and make clear the distinction between monarch and ministers to ensure the stability of the altars of soil and grain and the order of the world.¡± After making a long speech, the Ning Country Emissary finally revealed his purpose at the end ¨C He asked Lu Yuan to send an envoy to Jinling to pay homage to Shen Qiu and pledge allegiance to the Ning Country. Just as initially speculated. The Ning Country, which inherited the orthodox rule of the Yue Country, not only inherited the territory of the five cities but also wanted to take over the tribute system of the Yue Country at this time. At this time wanting to establish the distinction between monarch and ministers with the Changsha Country and the Ning Country was just like that. But how could Lu Yuan possibly comply with the other party¡¯s wishes? So after waiting for the envoy to finish speaking, he angrily said with a hint of coldness in his voice, ¡°Go to Jinling to pay homage to the Heavenly Son? May I ask the Messenger, which Heavenly Son?¡± I, Changsha Country, am a kingdom granted by the Yue House and have always revered the Yue¡¯s Orthodox. As the Lonely King, I am aware that there are Hongdao Heavenly Sons and Chengyou Heavenly Sons in the world, but I have never heard of any Jianwu Heavenly Son. Your master Shen Qiu, who has received great favor from the Yue House, was able to take charge of the state affairs, become the Grand General, and reach the highest position among the subjects. Furthermore, he was granted two cities and established a great kingdom. Which subject in the world could obtain such honor and benefits? But your master was not content with this grace. Instead of wanting to serve the Heavenly Son, he openly plotted a rebellion and usurped the throne, which is disloyal. Such a violent and rebellious act has angered the people of the world and provoked the Liang Country to attack. It has caused the once peaceful world to be plunged again into war. This is an act of harming the world for one¡¯s own selfish interests, which is unkind. Moreover, although Hongdao Heavenly Son had some shortcomings and neglected his duties during his reign, leading to the decline of the world ¨C No matter what, he is still a Heavenly Son and a monarch¡¯s father. When facing a Heavenly Son and a father, even if he is wrong, you cannot kill the king. Hmph! There was a terrible plague in the palace, and the Hongdao Heavenly Son and his offspring all died from this plague. It¡¯s amusing that you could come up with such a ridiculous excuse. If there were a plague in the palace, why did it not happen in Jinling City? Do you really think that these clumsy tactics can cover the eyes of the world and block the mouths of all? By doing this, is Shen Qiu not afraid of others following his example and treating his descendants the same way in the future? Assassinating the Heavenly Son, having no monarch or father, can such a person be qualified to govern the world with such behavior? Moreover, as far as I, the Lonely King, can remember, the one who pacified internal rebellion, exterminated Jinghai to the south, slaughtered Qiang bandits to the west, and attacked Zhou Country to the north was Wuan Marquis. If Wuan Marquis is dead, the one who should inherit his merits should be me, the Lonely King. Your master sits in Jinling, high in the temple, only speaking eloquently, plotting and scheming ¨C how dare he arrogantly claim these merits? Is it just because your master relied on the advantages of the Yangtze River to barely drive away the Liang people he himself had attracted to Guangling City? How can such a person who has no loyalty, no kindness, no faith, and no righteousness be qualified for the throne of Heavenly Son? Moreover, I, the Changsha Country, was granted by the Yue House, and received the grace of the Yue House. What does that have to do with your rebellious country? At this time, you even have the audacity to come and ask me to go to Jinling to pay homage? It¡¯s a shame that you are willing to acknowledge a person who is disloyal, unkind, unfilial, and unrighteous as your master, but I, the Lonely King, am a hero of the world and have my own sense of ethics. How could I be on the same side as your treacherous people?¡± Go back and tell Shen Qiu that there is no possibility for me, the Lonely King, to recognize him as the Heavenly Son in this lifetime. What virtues or abilities does a rebellious and treacherous person like him have to be my master? If he is dissatisfied, he can raise an army and attack. I, the Lonely King, will be waiting for him in Baling City. At that time, the two armies will line up to decide life and death. If he can defeat and destroy my kingdom, then he has a bit of skill. If he can¡¯t, he should wash up and go to bed early. There¡¯s everything in dreams.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s words came out like machine gun-fire, one after the other. This lengthy and sarcastic speech, which thoroughly rebutted the Emissary¡¯s words, tore away the last veil of decency from the Kingdom of Ning, established by Shen Qiu. Hearing these words and being so insulted, the emissary was naturally furious, his entire face sinking. The original composure was gone, vanished like smoke. He wanted to argue back. But firstly, everything that Lu Yuan said was the truth. From the surface, it was true that Yue House did not wrong Shen Qiu; they gave everything to him, even what they could not give. They treated him wholeheartedly ¨C Chapter 503 - Chapter 503: Chapter 247: Confrontation and Breakup _2 Chapter 503: Chapter 247: Confrontation and Breakup _2 But what about Shen Qiu? After receiving these numerous honors and rewards, he turned against his ruler and began to usurp the throne. And the merits that Shen Qiu promoted externally were basically achieved by Wuan Marquis, Lu Yuan and others, and had little to do with him. Only the Battle of Guangling, which is worth boasting about, was where both sides confronted each other across the river, wearing each other down by dragging out time. Such actions, such merits¡­ Well. Thinking about it carefully, this messenger realized that if he only looked at the surface, Shen Qiu was not worthy of the position of Heavenly Son. And if they followed him, would they not be regarded as treacherous villains? But if they put aside these surface phenomena and only look at the core essence, understanding that the aristocratic families of Linhai County use a nomination system and jointly elect an emperor, then the change of dynasty this time is actually not as serious as it is on the surface. At its core, it was just these families that held significant stakes in Yue Country replacing the previous unwanted manager and electing a new one. It¡¯s none of the outsider¡¯s business if a family replaces their manager, right? The only rough part was the assassination of Hongdao Emperor. But it was also because he conspired with outsiders, trying to sell out everyone¡¯s interests in exchange for his current position. It was Hongdao Emperor who first betrayed the rules, and they only made a counterattack. The other party was unkind first, then the aristocratic families of Linhai County were unjust later. But these rules, which challenge conventional ethics, can never be brought to the surface. Hidden rules must always remain hidden. If exposed, they¡¯ll inevitably be destroyed. Therefore, facing Lu Yuan¡¯s accusation, although the messenger was resentful, he could not find a way to refute it. ¡®It¡¯s all because of that useless Xiao Ji. It would have been better if he had just accepted the arrangement and abdicated earlier. Things have escalated to this point, not only has the new emperor been stained with the crime of patricide, but it has also caused so many troubles. This Witchcraft Emperor, who killed his father, is more harmful than helpful. I wish I could bring him back to life and kill him again.¡¯ In his heart, the messenger killed the dead Hongdao Emperor once more, then collected himself, looked up at Lu Yuan, and angrily asked, ¡°Is what you said earlier serious, Your Majesty? Does Changsha Country really intend to rebel and go to war with the court?¡± ¡°What does Ning House have to do with me?¡± Lu Yuan immediately countered: ¡°Since there is not even a drop of grace between us, how dare I call him my lord? If he is not my lord, how can it be called treason?¡± After three consecutive counter questions, he sneered, ¡°As for whether to go to war or not, I am afraid it is not up to you, messenger. You should go back and ask your ruler if he dares to fight me.¡± ¡°You¡­¡± The messenger below could not hold back his anger any longer, his face red with rage. Just as he was about to explode, he found himself looking into Lu Yuan¡¯s calm eyes and suddenly felt a chill in his heart. This man was the New Generation Military God, known as the second Wuan Marquis. He was not only extremely skilled at leading troops in battle, but had also personally killed two Inborn experts on the battlefield. He had no confidence in the face of such a distinguished individual, and did not dare to say anything provocative. So in the end, he could only say, ¡°Since King Changsha thinks this way, I, as a diplomat, have no choice but to return to Jinling and report your words to my lord. If you and my lord wish to engage in war, I hope you won¡¯t regret your words.¡± Lu Yuan remained indifferent: ¡°Messenger, please do as you wish.¡± ¡°Hmph.¡± Seeing his attitude, the messenger could not help but dismissively wave his sleeve and leave. As for Lu Yuan, he just watched the messenger leave without any movement. His words and attitude today were part of a strategy he had planned long ago, and now he was just executing it. Ning Country was powerful, with five counties and five Inborn experts. Changsha Country¡¯s strength was no match for them, so it was not advisable to take the initiative to start a war. But without going to war, they had to break the master-subject relationship with them and get out of the tribute system under the Jinling court. So they had to find another way. One way was to contact other vassal states and join them in resisting the Ning Country. Another was to take advantage of the opportunity when the Ning Country sent a messenger, sever diplomatic relations with them, and break off ties in name. The former could strengthen themselves, while the latter could clarify their position. Now, the messengers from Changsha Country have gone to Southsea and Ninghai countries, and good news should be coming back within a month. On the other hand, in Jinling City, Lu Yuan has shown the Ning Country Emissary that he would not follow the Jinling court and wanted to be independent. The preparations on both sides have been completed. Next, how things develop will depend on the attitude of Ning Country¡¯s New Emperor. After the break with Ning Country in front of their emissary, Lu Yuan had already stood on the opposite side of the Jinling court. Therefore, no matter what the reaction of the Jinling court was, they had to prepare for it here. So after sending away the Ning Country Emissary, Lu Yuan issued two urgent edicts. One was to withdraw two more forbidden armies from Changsha and have them join his main force in Baling City. This would bring the total number of troops to five forbidden armies and one hundred thousand soldiers. Then, he drafted ten thousand county soldiers from various parts of Dongting territory and sent them to Changsha City. With this arrangement, the temporary capital of Changsha Country had one forbidden army and ten thousand county soldiers, totaling thirty thousand troops. Chapter 504 - Chapter 504: Chapter 247 Confrontation and Breakup_3 Chapter 504: Chapter 247 Confrontation and Breakup_3 Baling and Changsha, with a total of 130,000 soldiers, were lined up along the Yangtze River and Xiang River, facing the soldiers of Ning Country across the border from Yuzhang Prefecture. On Changsha¡¯s side, troops were mobilized frequently, clearly targeting Ning Country. This naturally alerted Ning Country as well. Shangguan Ming, who was in charge of 100,000 naval forces in Yuzhang Prefecture, immediately issued an order upon hearing about Lu Yuan¡¯s movements. This old acquaintance, who once wanted to become his father-in-law, ordered: Withdraw 50,000 naval forces to the west, directly blocking the Yangtze River¡¯s waterway and dividing Changsha into two parts, completely isolating the south and the north. Then, he led the remaining 50,000 naval forces from Xunyang Camp to Chaisang Prefecture, confronting Lu Yuan¡¯s 100,000 soldiers in Baling City. After that, he ordered the county soldiers of Yuzhang Prefecture to gather 30,000 troops and rush to Yichun Mansion, confronting the soldiers in Changsha City. In this way, both sides deployed 130,000 troops on water and land, beginning a standoff. At this moment, a large number of soldiers were gathered along the river, and the clouds of war loomed. Within the two prefectures of Dongting and Yuzhang, there was a suffocating atmosphere as if a storm was brewing. Neighboring countries also acted upon hearing the news, sending a large number of spies and messengers to Baling and Chaisang, trying to probe for information. ¡°We rely on the power of boats for transportation, trade, and military expeditions among our countries along the Yangtze River. But now, Ning Country¡¯s naval forces are unobstructed, obstructing the river surface inside our country, causing the waterway to be blocked and our territory to be severed into the north and south. This is truly a great humiliation.¡± In Baling City, on a tower in the north of the city, Lu Yuan sighed as he watched Ning Country¡¯s naval forces flaunt their power on the river to the north, surrounded by a group of ministers and generals: ¡°After this turmoil, we must establish a new naval force and build a powerful fleet to guard the river. Even our waterways shouldn¡¯t be freely accessible to outsiders. We must never face such a situation again in the future.¡± In this standoff, although both sides had similar strength ¨C 130,000 troops and one Inborn expert each, neither side was significantly weaker than the other. On the surface, neither side appeared to be at a disadvantage. But in terms of details, Ning Country¡¯s naval forces had already completely overwhelmed Changsha with their absolute advantage in water warfare. Yue Country, as a major power in Jiangnan, naturally developed their naval forces due to its extensive waterway network and the natural barrier formed by the Yangtze River. These powerful naval forces, with 100,000 vessels blocking the river surface, had saved Yue Country from crises countless times. For example, during the Dongting Rebellion, 300,000 Zhou soldiers gathered at Tianmen Prefecture, threatening the southern parts of Dongting Prefecture. But no matter how many elite soldiers and horses the Zhou people had, facing the surging Yangtze River, they were still blocked by the naval forces and unable to move forward beyond the northern bank of the river. In the end, they could only look at the river and sigh, unable to cross it. More recently, there was the conquest of Shen Qiu in the north just two months ago. With 500,000 Liang soldiers lined up along the Yangtze River, Yue Country only needed to place 100,000 naval forces on the river surface, leaving the enemy helpless. Eventually, hundreds of thousands of troops were stuck on the north bank and had to withdraw in frustration after expending a lot of resources. These examples all illustrate the importance of a powerful naval force to a Jiangnan regime. Now that the Yue House had fallen, Ning Country inherited its mantle, along with control of the original 100,000 naval forces of Yue Country. Therefore, relying on this naval force, they could continue to act unscrupulously, dominating the Yangtze River Basin as Yue Country had done before, and pressuring Jiangnan. But Changsha didn¡¯t have such good fortune. Lu Yuan was not a native of Jinling¡¯s aristocracy but came from humble beginnings, and he had struggled to his current position through his own efforts. At the time of Changsha¡¯s establishment, everything was in need of development, and everything had to be gradually accumulated from scratch. Several years have passed since then, and the country has stabilized, and in his hands, Lu Yuan amassed an Elite Army of over 200,000 soldiers, slowly getting back on track. But when it comes to the naval forces, Lu Yuan, who has never accumulated any naval forces, nor had any demand for them, is at a loss. Previously, when he relied on the Yue State court, he didn¡¯t feel too many challenges when borrowing their naval forces. But now that they have turned against Ning Country, the naval forces that once supported him have become his enemies. Suddenly, Lu Yuan could relate to the feelings of the Zhou People and Liang People, knowing how disgusting it was to face a powerful naval force. Thus, being constrained by this, he naturally wanted a change. Establishing a strong naval force after the war was a strategy proposed by Lu Yuan to address his own weaknesses. He had already decided. In the next five years, ten years, or even longer, he would invest a lot of energy into achieving this goal. ¡®However, doing so would mean astronomical spending in terms of money and provisions.¡¯ Lu Yuan thought of this and his heart twitched involuntarily. Naval forces are not cheap troops. The cost of maintaining a naval force of the same size could be twice as high as that of the same-size army. If he wants to raise a naval force of 100,000, it is equivalent to raising an army of 200,000, almost doubling the current military spending of Changsha. Even if he only raises enough naval forces to protect the Yangtze River, it would still require at least a thousand ships and 40,000 to 50,000 men. This is equivalent to raising another 100,000-strong army. At present, Changsha already struggles to maintain its 240,000-strong army, having to rob Peter to pay Paul. If he raised another 50,000 naval forces, there¡¯s no doubt that it would bankrupt Changsha¡¯s finances instantly. ¡®Fortunately, a naval force can¡¯t be built overnight, so I can invest slowly over five or ten years and accumulate gradually. This way, the expenses won¡¯t be too significant, and the finances can still be sustained.¡¯ As Lu Yuan thought this, he looked once more at the Ning Country beyond the city wall, confirming that they dare not land. He lost interest then, so he ordered his troops to descend from the city wall and return to the city. In the following days. The army of Changsha guarded the riverbank, while the naval forces of Ning Country flaunted their prowess on the river. Neither side dared to land or go ashore, so they cursed each other across the river. In the midst of the noise and commotion, half a month passed. Thus, on the seventh day of the twelfth month of the first year of Jianji, the messenger Lu Yuan had sent to Ninghai Country finally received a reply. Su Xuange agreed to his request, officially raising troops in Ninghai Country in response. Following Lu Yuan¡¯s announcement, Ninghai Country refused to follow the usurper Ning Country and withdrew from the Jinling court tribute system. Then, Ninghai Country deployed 100,000 troops along the border with their ally Jiuzhen, and confronted Marquis Wuping, Xie Ning, from the other side. With both Changsha and Ninghai nations taking action, the closely following Nanhai Country naturally could not detach itself. Finally, on the thirteenth day of the twelfth month, after learning of Su Xuange¡¯s decision to support Lu Yuan and break with Ning Country, Yan Wangqiu, left with no choice, announced that Nanhai Country would also withdraw from the Jinling court and move towards independence. Whether it was because he didn¡¯t want to completely offend Ning Country, or whether Yan Wangqiu was too old and frail to take any action, is unknown. After declaring independence, Nanhai Country only sent a messenger to notify Jinling City, but unlike the other two countries, they did not station troops at the border with Ning Country to confront them. Nonetheless, with the successive declarations from Nanhai and Ninghai countries, Up until this point. In terms of independence, the small circle of the Three Nation Alliance with Lu Yuan would once again advance or retreat together. After the Three Nations¡¯ consecutive declarations, the pressure was then on Jinling City and Ning Country¡¯s side. Chapter 505 - Chapter 505: Chapter 248: Long-term Endeavors Chapter 505: Chapter 248: Long-term Endeavors ¡°How dare that scoundrel offend me!¡± In the city of Jinling, the newly enthroned Emperor Jianwu was filled with anger after receiving news of Southsea, Ninghai, and Changsha countries announcing their independence from the Ningguo Dynasty. ¡°Your Majesty, please calm down.¡± Li Xian, the Minister of the Ministry of War who was attending to him, hurriedly advised. ¡°Calm down? How do you expect me to calm down?¡± Shen Qiu picked up the letter from the table and waved it angrily at Li Xian, ¡°From the time of the previous Yue Dynasty, Lu Yuan, Yan Wangqiu, and Su Xuange have been plotting together, colluding with each other and forming a clique against the court. Yet now, even when the previous Yue Dynasty has perished and a new dynasty has been established, these rebels are unwilling to submit and instead want to go further by breaking away from the court and declaring independence.¡± What do they think they are? What do they think the court is? If this matter really allows these Three Nations to break away, the court will truly lose its prestige, and even our Ning Country will be a laughingstock among the nations.¡± At this point, Shen Qiu¡¯s hand trembled with anger. It¡¯s no wonder that the new Heavenly Son of the dynasty was so angry. The actions of Lu Yuan and the others have indeed shaken the hearts of the people in the new dynasty. Just think about it. You say the old Yue House was tyrannical and oppressive to the world, and that the collapse of the Altars of Soil and Grain was due to them. The Ning House replacing the Yue House was what people wanted and the desire of the masses. Then why, during the time of the former Yue House, even when the Heavenly Son was cruel and tyrannical, did the local lords still respect the Heavenly Son and regard the Yue Court as the legitimate ruler? Not only did they willingly follow the orders of the Yue State court, sending troops to the Northern Expedition and paying tributes year after year, but they also said the Yue House was the rightful ruler. Can it be said that the Yue House did not win the hearts of the people? Now that you, as the Heavenly Son of the Ning Dynasty, have taken the stage, the previously deferential lords have jumped out to rebel. Not only do they not recognize the identity of the Heavenly Son of the Ning Dynasty, but they also refuse to pay tribute altogether, each of them claiming they want to break away and become independent. Oh, there was no problem when the former Yue House was so oppressive, but as soon as you, the seemingly popular Heavenly Son of the Ning Dynasty, stepped up, everything ceased to work. Tell me, tell me, when this matter is revealed and the world knows about it, how will they view Ning Country and how will they view Shen Qiu, the new Heavenly Son? Originally, due to Emperor Hongdao¡¯s lack of cooperation, Shen Qiu had no choice but to commit regicide and usurp, which was already quite disgraceful. In the end, it even led to the invasion of Liang Country, causing the already struggling Yue Country to be overwhelmed by disasters of war once more, making people suffer and stirring up the resentment of the masses. Only after much difficulty did Shen Qiu lead his army to repel the people of Liang and clean up the mess. With the momentum of the victory, he successfully ascended the throne, founding the new dynasty. Now it is the time for the new era of the new dynasty to implement reforms and eliminate the accumulated abuses of the old Yue House in order to create a stable and prosperous world. And yet, at this juncture, those local lords have decided to break away from Ning Country.¡± Isn¡¯t this equivalent to saying that the newborn Ning Country and the new Jinling court have really usurped the right to rule and not won the hearts of the people at all? If not, why would the local lords not recognize you as the Heavenly Son? All these points I have raised are only about the internal affairs of Ning Country itself. It will not be able to provide a reasonable explanation to its subjects in terms of legal principles. Regarding external affairs, if Changsha, Southsea, and Ninghai countries break away, The situation would change drastically with the loss of these three countries, and the former status of the Yue State court as the ruler of the Five Counties and Five Countries would collapse immediately. Not only would the formerly united territories be torn apart due to the three separate countries, but the enclaves of Xichuan, Hanzhong and Jiuzhen would separate Ning Country into two parts. There¡¯s no need to elaborate on the potential dangers of a broken country with severed connections in the middle. With the communication between Xichuan and Hanzhong countries and the Jinling court cut off by the Changsha Country, who knows whether they will change their hearts in the long run and ultimately follow the trend and declare independence? Even forget about these two countries, what about Jiuzhen County? This newly established annexed territory was only obtained after a hard struggle in overthrowing Jinghai Country. If it remains as an enclave for a long time, isolated and separated, who knows if it would seek independence once more, transforming the region into its own country? Yes, the court has Marquis Wuping, Xie Ning, and fifty thousand Forbidden Army troops stationed in Jiuzhen to guard the territory. But wouldn¡¯t there still be domestic enemies even if there were no external ones? Marquis of Wuping, Xie Ning, being separated for such a long time, would he really not develop any intention to rule the region independently and establish his own kingship? After all, there are plenty of examples set by Lu Yuan and others right before him that he could just follow closely. There would be no difficulty or burden at all. As for the matter of his family in Linhai County, Aristocratic families were never short of cases of division for the sake of expanding their clan or avoiding risks. As long as Xie Ning and Linhai County¡¯s Xie family separate, turning into two families, it would work. At that time, since they would no longer be members of the same family and only related to each other, you can¡¯t really blame the Xie family members who remain in Linhai County, right? If you really want to involve all the relatives, since all our six or seven families are intermarried, who isn¡¯t related to whom? You might as well blame yourself, too? As for the Xie family there, If they have the opportunity, I believe they would be more than willing to have a separate branch that would be stationed in Jiuzhen County, to create a new and distinctive royal descent. After all, being an aristocratic family in Linhai County is indeed satisfying, with generations holding high-ranking positions, but ultimately it¡¯s unlikely for them to become emperors. However, if they become the great kings of Jiuzhen County, it would be a different story. With the power in their hands, this kingship could be passed down through generations, remaining under the Xie surname forever. If these three nations and territories also secede from the Ningguo Dynasty, the newborn Ning Dynasty would be left with only the four counties of Jiangdong to govern. Chapter 506 - Chapter 506: Chapter 248: Long-term Endeavors_2 Chapter 506: Chapter 248: Long-term Endeavors_2 From being the ruler of five prefectures and five countries to the ruler of the four prefectures of Jiangdong, this change in status is not just a simple difference in title. It¡¯s a direct drop from being the Master of Yangzhou who originally controlled ten prefectures, and even the Supreme Dominator of the world, to becoming a regional power within Yangzhou. Ning Country, which originally held an equal status with Zhou and Liang, suddenly falls into a similar position as a vassal state of the two countries. You tell me. Can there be no difference in this disparity? This is not only a drop in national prestige, but also in the soft power and the intangible aspect. Let¡¯s talk about actual strength. Without the title of the ruler of the five countries and five prefectures, the royal court of Jinling will no longer be able to mobilize the armies of the five countries under the name of the Heavenly Son and command them to cooperate in their military campaigns. Just like the previous situation where the Pre-Yue Heavenly Son called upon the three subjugated countries of Changsha for a joint Northern Expedition against Zhou Country; such a scenario will never happen again. And by losing Jiuzhen Prefecture, the Jinling royal court also loses an Inborn Grandmaster and seventy thousand soldiers. All these losses are tangible. So, it goes without saying. The rebellion led by Lu Yuan and others now causes a huge internal problem for Ning Country in terms of legal validity, making it hard to gain the world¡¯s acknowledgement- the legitimacy of the court has greatly declined. Externally, Ning Country¡¯s national prestige and authority have directly plummeted, falling from the position of Supreme Dominator to a normal regional power. Combining these internal and external losses together, you tell me, could any emperor accept this? Not to mention that at this time, the one facing all these issues is the founding Heavenly Son of the New Dynasty, Shen Qiu. ¡°Your Majesty, although Changsha, Nanhai, and Ninghai are conspiring against us, the territories of these three countries have merged into one, encompassing a vast area of over four thousand miles from north to south, and over three thousand miles from east to west, spanning across five prefectures, with a huge momentum. The population is up to tens of millions. The combined forces of the three countries amount to a million soldiers. If we want to eliminate them now, I¡¯m afraid it would be another Hongdao Rebellion, which cannot be quelled for at least ten years.¡± Seeing the anger in Shen Qiu and his intentions to send troops in anger, Li Xian knew this was bad, and couldn¡¯t help but quickly advise, ¡°Now that our Great Da Ning is newly established after the chaos of the former Yue, taxes on the local people are getting heavier by the day, and the hardship of war has lasted too long. If we start another war, I¡¯m afraid the foundation of the court will be completely destroyed. Even if we put down the rebellion of the Three Nations, there is still Liang and Zhou surrounding us, as if surrounded by wolves. It would be easy to annihilate the Three Nations, but difficult to defend against these two countries. Therefore, the best current strategy is to recuperate and gather arms and men. With the wealth of Linhai and Yuzhang, if we rest and accumulate for ten years, the court will be able to train an additional two hundred thousand soldiers. If we recuperate for twenty years, the court will be able to train an additional four hundred thousand soldiers. At that point, the court will have a total of seven hundred thousand armored soldiers, accumulated money and food, making it incredibly easy to pacify the Three Nations.¡± Although the Military Department does not directly command the army, it is responsible for the logistics of the army. So others may not be aware of it, but Li Xian knows very well that Ning Country is really incapable of fighting a full-scale war at this time. Now, when he persuades, he offers reasonable arguments that directly address the core issues. After hearing his words, Shen Qiu¡¯s anger could not help but subside a bit, regaining some of his rationality, and then he asked, ¡°How many soldiers do I, Da Ning, have right now from top to bottom?¡± This being within his scope of responsibility, Li Xian knew about it very well and immediately replied, ¡°Your Majesty, if we remove the several thousand miles away Jiuzhen Prefecture, now the court has a total of 320,000 soldiers in Jiangdong¡¯s four prefectures, as well as Xiangyang Prefecture¡¯s three counties. Among them, there are 10,000 forbidden army and 10,000 county soldiers stationed in Xiangyang Prefecture. Guangling Prefecture has 30,000 forbidden army and 15,000 prefecture and county soldiers. Yuzhang Prefecture has 100,000 naval forces and 20,000 prefecture and county soldiers. Jian¡¯an Prefecture has 15,000 prefecture and county soldiers. Linhai Prefecture is the key location in the capital, with 10,000 local county soldiers and 5,000 palace guards, 5,000 capital garrison, and 100,000 forbidden army stationed in Jinling City. In total, the court can now mobilize 140,000 forbidden army, 100,000 naval forces, 70,000 prefecture and county soldiers, 5,000 palace guards, and 5,000 capital garrison, totaling 320,000 soldiers. However, among these 320,000 soldiers, those prefecture and county soldiers, palace guards, and capital garrison cannot be mobilized. They must defend the realm and protect the capital. Among the 140,000 forbidden army, if there is no support from the capital, at least 50,000 soldiers and one Inborn Grandmaster are needed to protect Guangling Prefecture from the threat of the northern Liang people. The same is true for Xiangyang Prefecture, which also needs at least 30,000 forbidden army, cooperating with local prefecture and county soldiers, and one Inborn Grandmaster for its preservation. Jian¡¯an Prefecture, adjacent to Nanhai Country, can maintain its stability with local prefecture and county soldiers if there is no war, as Nanhai Country has weak military power. But if a war starts, at least 10,000 forbidden army and one Inborn Grandmaster are needed to be stationed in the prefecture to deal with the threat from Nanhai Country. In this case, if we truly go to war with the Three Nations of Changsha, the court would be able to deploy, at most, 50,000 forbidden army. As for the naval forces, even though the Yangtze River waterway must be defended, not all of them can be deployed; according to the basic defensive requirements, at least 50,000 naval forces and one Inborn Grandmaster are needed. Thus, the maximum naval forces that can be deployed are also 50,000. As for the Inborn Grandmaster, including Your Majesty, there are only four of them in Jiangdong, who can barely fill the requirements of Guangling, Xiangyang, Jian¡¯an prefectures, and the naval forces. With 50,000 forbidden army and 50,000 naval forces, without the command of an Inborn Grandmaster, it is impossible to annihilate the Three Nations. Chapter 507 - Chapter 507: Chapter 248: Long-term Endeavors_3 Chapter 507: Chapter 248: Long-term Endeavors_3 Your Majesty, please forgive my presumption, but this is merely wishful thinking.¡± With this pretext, Li Xian made a calculation. As the numbers added up, he couldn¡¯t help but become more and more desperate. To be honest, The Jinling court has 320,000 troops, which already sounds like a lot. However, nearby Ning Country, there are only enemy nations. In the four prefectures, there is not a single rear area. There are simply too many places to defend. When the nearly 10,000-mile border is spread out, the 320,000 troops are filled in, and they can¡¯t even make a wave of sound. They disappear completely. This is why Li Xian previously stated that the court cannot start a war now, nor do they have the soldiers to fight it. Are they really going to rely on the 50,000 forbidden troops and 50,000 naval forces, without an Inborn Grandmaster commanding them, to suppress Lu Yuan who is now a new generation of war god? It seems impossible, right? But if they follow his suggestion, and delay for ten years, the court can then deploy 250,000 forbidden troops and 50,000 navy. Moreover, within ten years, with the foundation of Coastal Aristocratic Family, perhaps they could train another Inborn Grandmaster to fill the vacancy left by the death of Wuan Marquis. In that case, ten years later, Shen Qiu personally takes command and leads the 300,000 land and sea forces in a massive eastward campaign. Wouldn¡¯t this situation be better than the present? Wait another ten years, until 20 years later, the number of troops that the court can deploy would be a staggering 500,000. They could even dispatch two or three Inborn Grandmasters. At that point, their strength would be even greater. If by that time, Marquis of Wuping, Xie Ning, from Jiuzhen prefecture had not rebelled, and Jiuzhen prefecture was still in the court¡¯s hands, then towards the south, the court could also deploy 100,000 troops and one Inborn Grandmaster. Xichuan and Hanzhong, the Two Countries, if they remain obedient, could also gather 50,000 to 60,000 troops and two Inborn Grandmasters. By these calculations, twenty years later, when the court¡¯s strength has recovered, Under ideal circumstances, for the war of subduing and exterminating Changsha and the Three Nations, the available forces would amount to 700,000, and the number of Inborn Grandmasters that could be mobilized would be five or six. By then, Nanhai Country¡¯s Yan Wangqiu would have long passed away, the rebel Three Nations will have one less Grandmaster, and the Nanhai Country will be even weaker. In such a situation, wouldn¡¯t it be easy for the court to invade and annihilate the Three Nations and recover the Five Prefectures? Time is on the side of the court. With the foundation of Yuzhang and Linhai, they only need to give these two prefectures some time to catch their breath, and they would truly not be inferior to the rebel Three Nations. ¡°50,000 forbidden troops, 50,000 naval forces¡­¡± After Shen Qiu heard Li Xian¡¯s count, and the chilling numbers, he couldn¡¯t help but fall silent. The anger that had risen earlier was extinguished by the cold reality, like a bucket of water being poured over it. Indeed, Even if he was furious and resentful, the cold reality was right before him, so what could he do? Should he really rely on these 100,000 troops, without an Inborn Grandmaster, to fight a war of extermination? It was as if they weren¡¯t fighting a war, but instead sending the court¡¯s already scant resources to their deaths. So after weighing the situation in his heart, Shen Qiu couldn¡¯t help but sigh and asked, ¡°As for Changsha Country, is it true that they have more than 200,000 troops?¡± As he spoke, this Jianwu Heavenly Son¡¯s tone had already softened. Seeing that his persuasion was taking effect, Li Xian was overjoyed and hurriedly continued, ¡°Your Majesty, to be precise, including the county soldiers, they have 240,000 soldiers. Moreover, within Changsha Country, they have implemented the Militia Corps system; during the slack farming season, they also gather village volunteers for training. Given the current population and territory of Changsha Country, the scale of these militia volunteers should be between 500,000 and 600,000. So, in the event of a war for the annihilation of a nation, Changsha Country could field up to 800,000 soldiers. Furthermore, they have both the Changsha King and Queen, two Inborn Grandmasters within the nation. With such strength, there is no way the court could destroy them without having at least more than 500,000 elite soldiers and three or four Inborn Grandmasters.¡± Although the specific size of a country¡¯s army is a closely guarded state secret, Changsha Country was too recent a nation for this to be the case. From the establishment of the country on the Front Yue Hongdao¡¯s 7th year, 6th month, 20th day, to the present day of Jianwu¡¯s 1st year, 12th month, 27th day, it has not even been two and a half years. Within such a short period, although Lu Yuan has continuously opened Enke, constantly winning over local scholars, and has also constantly expanded his military and recruited martial artists to serve him, No matter how well he does this, he cannot gather all hearts and minds or make everyone truly loyal. The name of the legitimate Yue regime still exists, and Ning Country, which succeeded Yue, also possesses legitimacy. This legitimacy is still very attractive to those scholars and martial artists. Moreover, although the rise of Changsha Country is impressive currently, it is not as powerful as Ning Country. There is no problem at present, but once the court recuperates and sends troops, who knows whether they will be able to withstand it? Therefore, driven by this mentality, many people stepped onto two boats, making preparations on both sides. While holding official positions in Changsha Country, they also left a way out for themselves in the Jinling court, occasionally reporting information and preparing for the future. That¡¯s why the details of Lu Yuan¡¯s Changsha Country¡¯s troops were leaked to the Ning court as expected. Yes, it¡¯s very in line with the nature of these officials. ¡°800,000 troops¡­¡± After hearing that number, Shen Qiu hesitated again, and the anger in him subsided halfway. At the same time, he realized a terrifying reality. The army of Changsha Country had unknowingly grown to such a scale? What¡¯s even more horrifying is that even without counting the militia, there are still 240,000 regular troops, and Changsha Country can support such a large army. Bear in mind that the Jinling court, which currently controls the four prefectures of Jiangdong, only has 320,000 soldiers. Compared to Changsha Country, it is only 80,000 more. Although this is only a weak state of Jiangdong, the fact that Changsha Country can expand their military strength to three-quarters of that of the court is already quite terrifying. It was at this point that Shen Qiu truly realized that suppressing the rebellion might not be as simple as he had imagined. The rebel Three Nations, especially Changsha, are not something that can be eradicated in a short period. This will be a long-term undertaking. Chapter 508 - Chapter 508: Chapter 249: The End of an Era Chapter 508: Chapter 249: The End of an Era ¡°Not just that.¡± At this time, Li Xian added another point: ¡°Apart from Yue Country, after the Northern Expedition, Ninghai Country added 50,000 soldiers to its ranks, along with 50,000 county soldiers from local areas. Moreover, this country has also established a militia system, having more than 100,000 militia members nationwide. Adding these together, there are more than 200,000 troops in total. In Southsea Country, though not following the examples of the Yue and Ninghai Countries, there are still nearly 20,000 palace guards and local county soldiers within the country. Furthermore, the officials in this country are mostly former disciples of the Nanhai Sect, who came from powerful local martial artist families in South Sea Prefecture. These groups have always wielded considerable power and resources locally, with the younger generations often practicing martial arts. Thus, letting them lead an army into battle might be difficult. However, if foreign enemies invaded Southsea Country, these martial aristocrats would be willing to fight to the death to defend their homeland and their interests. At that time, mobilizing a local force of tens or even hundreds of thousands would not be a problem at all. Moreover, these troops would come from their own fellow clansmen and relatives, and although they may not be well-versed in battlefield tactics, their cohesion and unity would not be lacking. As descendants of martial artist families, their bravery and strength would not be underestimated. Southsea Country may seem weak in military power, with only tens of thousands of soldiers. But in fact, they have concealed troops among the civilian population, making them difficult to conquer. If the imperial court tried to eliminate these two countries without at least 200,000 soldiers and one or two Inborn Grandmasters as commanders, it would be impossible.¡± Hmm. Taking all of this into account, how many soldiers are involved in the rebellion of the three countries combined? 80,000 in Yue Country, more than 200,000 in Ninghai Country, and more than 200,000 in Southsea Country, totaling over 1.3 million troops. Regardless of the quality of these troops¡ªeven if all of them were just village volunteers who could not fight in open battle¡ªthey could still be useful in defending a city, right? Not to mention the fact that among these 1.3 million troops, there are over 300,000 elite soldiers. Shen Qiu merely calculated the numbers in his heart, completely losing interest in whether to send troops to quell the rebellion or not. ¡°Alright, enough.¡± This Jianwu Heavenly Son waved his hand, stopping the Minister of the Ministry of War, Li Xian, who tried to continue listing data to persuade him not to send troops: ¡°I know that these three countries are hard to defeat, and I will not send any troops, so you don¡¯t have to say anything more.¡± Upon hearing this, Li Xian quickly bowed down and said, ¡°Your Majesty, these three countries are not unbeatable, we just need time to wait. After ten or twenty years, when the four prefectures of Jiangdong have recuperated, the imperial court will definitely be able to eliminate them.¡± After hearing this, Shen Qiu only nodded his head without enthusiasm, ¡°I understand.¡± Faced with rebellion but unable to raise a large army to suppress it, the cruel reality deeply hurt the newly enthroned Jianwu Heavenly Son. At this time, he no longer wanted to manage such matters. Seeing this, Li Xian did not know what else to say. Fortunately, he had convinced the king for now, achieving his goal, and so he bowed once more, then retreated in silence. Just like that. In the face of the open upsurgence and independent rebellion of the Yue, South Sea, and Ninghai countries, the integrity of the new Ning Country was threatened and its national prestige was undermined. The Jinling imperial court, which represented the Ning Country, did not respond at all. This newly established Ning Country, which had only been founded for two months, assumed the ostrich¡¯s pose, burying its head in the sand and pretending not to see anything. When this attitude was reportedly communicated, countless people who were observing the Jinling imperial court¡¯s stance were suddenly in an uproar. Because everyone realized that the retreat of the Jinling imperial court and the retreat of the Ning Country meant one thing: In the midst of such clamor, by the second year, the news from Yue Country pushed the waves even higher. Dongting Prefecture¡¯s Baling City¡ªYue King Lu Yuan, who had led his troops to garrison here for months, finally confirmed that the Jianwu Heavenly Son had indeed become an ostrich and would not send any troops after waiting for months without seeing any movement from the Jinling imperial court. After announcing its independence from the Jinling imperial court¡¯s tribute system, on the eighth day of the first month of the second year of Jianwu, Lu Yuan offered a sacrifice to the heavens outside Baling City. Then, he announced the change of his country¡¯s name to Chu, and his title remained King ¡ª the King of Chu. After that, in the name of the King of Chu, Lu Yuan proclaimed the new era¡¯s name as Shenwu, officially severing all ties with the Jinling imperial court. Following close behind Yue Country, on the tenth day of the first month, Ninghai Country also changed its country¡¯s name to the surname of the ruler Su Xuange, becoming Su Country. Its new era¡¯s name was also changed¡ª to Guangwu. Yue and Ninghai countries had become part of history. The new chapters of Chu and Su countries had begun. With the renaming and establishment of these two countries, the Jinling imperial court, represented by Ning Country, experienced their hegemony over the entire Yangzhou region collapsing. The position of the Supreme Dominator of The World, inherited from the legitimate Yue dynasty, was lost by the newborn Ning Country, both in name and reality. As for hegemony within the Yangzhou region, although it could barely be maintained, If, as previously mentioned, the Hanzhong and Xichuan countries eventually separated and became independent from the Jinling imperial court, And Jiuzhen Prefecture also declared its independence, Once these peripheral vassal states became independent, Ning Country, left with only the four prefectures of Jiangdong, would transform from a once-dominant nation in the vast region of Yangzhou to a regional powerhouse in the eastern part of Yangzhou. No one was sure when these two countries and one prefecture would become independent. However, everyone knew that when these two countries and one prefecture declared their independence, it would mark the day that the Ning Country¡¯s hegemony over Yangzhou would come to an end. Chapter 509 - Chapter 509: Chapter 249: The End of an Era_2 Chapter 509: Chapter 249: The End of an Era_2 By then, Ning Country, which has fallen from the Supreme Dominator of the world to the Master of Yangzhou, will completely fall from the throne of domination. It also marks the end of the 2000-year history in which the aristocratic families of Linhai County controlled Yangzhou in Jiangnan, consigning it to the past. The era of the six surnames and seven tribes, the era of the Jinling aristocratic families, the era of Ning Country, under the instigation of traverser Lu Yuan, is gradually drawing to a close. As for these remnants of the old era, he is working even harder to sweep them completely into the dustbin of history. Then, the newly born Chu State will take over the dominance of Yangzhou and join the struggle for hegemony in the world. This day will inevitably come. As an immortal, Lu Yuan firmly believes this. Because others can¡¯t stand it, but he can definitely outlive all his contemporaries. By then, when everyone else is dead, wouldn¡¯t the remaining heroes be just himself? This is the Endurance Battle Technique. Changsha and Ninghai, the two countries, have begun to vigorously rename and establish their era. However, it is here in Nanhai Country, this time, which has not kept pace with its two allies, still maintaining its name as Nanhai Country. Even though it is now independent, it still adheres to the era named after the Heavenly Son of Jianwu. With the ambitions of Chu Country and Su Country revealed, it is apparent that Yan Wangqiu has started to be wary of these two allies. Keeping the era named after Jianwu at this time is an attempt to keep his options open. After all, he is about to die of old age soon. After his death, Nanhai Country will no longer have the protection of an Inborn Grandmaster. By then, the two powerful allies will both have huge armies. These many armies, who knows if they are set against Ning Country or set against himself. It is said that people get wiser as they age. Yan Wangqiu has just aged, many things are too much for him, he does not want to move anymore. But this doesn¡¯t mean he¡¯s grown senile. After all, he has lived for over a hundred years, and some of the twists and turns, conspiracies and intrigues, can¡¯t escape his notice. The departure of Nanhai Country at this point is naturally not well received by Chu Country and Su Country. Among them, Su Xuange has sent a messenger to Nanhai Country to express his displeasure. Lu Yuan also sent a messenger. However, it was not to express disapproval, but to extend a hand of friendship, send Yan Wangqiu some gifts, and appease this ally¡¯s heart. At the same time, he asks whether the various aids that Nanhai Country originally promised Chu Country still count. After receiving a reply that the aid still counts, Lu Yuan doesn¡¯t delve into the matter. After all, whether it¡¯s Su Country or Nanhai Country, he doesn¡¯t expect the two countries to genuinely align with him. As long as the benefits they promised him still stand, as long as they can continue to provide money and food, and help him support his ever-expanding army, it is enough. Even so, a crack has appeared in the alliance of the three nations. Although it hasn¡¯t completely broken down for now, the day is not far off. Perhaps once Yan Wangqiu dies and the Inborn Grandmaster is gone, there will be war among the Three Nations. After all, Lu Yuan¡¯s Chu Country, with the aid of Nanhai and Su Countries, currently holds two counties and can therefore support an army of 240,000. However, Su Xuange¡¯s Su Country, which only holds one county and has lost a third of its domestic tax revenue to Lu Yuan, manages to support an army of 100,000. Although they can currently maintain it by imposing heavy taxes and levies internally, this can¡¯t last long. If they don¡¯t find a new source of wealth soon, the 100,000 strong army they¡¯ve raised will become a source of chaos instead of a pillar of the country. The military lords who do not receive their payment do not care whether the country is in a difficult situation or the people are suffering. They only know that you don¡¯t pay me, you withhold my salary. If you don¡¯t give it, don¡¯t blame me for getting it myself. Even an Inborn Grandmaster can do nothing when facing the issue of unpaid military wages. Even the formidable Wuan Marquis faced a mutiny when he entered Xichuan and the logistics supply was cut off. An upstart king like Su Xuange, who started halfway through, is even less likely to handle it. So under immense financial pressure, an expansionist war by Su Country became an inevitability. The only difference is how many years Su Country can last now. The question is, who will be the target of this expansionist war? Looking at the current regional situation, the Nanhai Country, which will soon lose the protection of an Inborn Grandmaster as its monarch is about to die, is undoubtedly the best target. Presumably, Yan Wangqiu saw this point. From the military expansion of Su Country, he sensed a crisis, prompting him to slowly disengage from the alliance of the three countries and lean towards Ning Country. Isn¡¯t his thinking about relying on the power of the Jinling Court to protect his country when he can¡¯t rely on his allies? Whether doing so is drinking poison to quench thirst or not, as a person who is about to die, he can¡¯t bother about so many. If it can quench his thirst for a moment, then it counts for a moment. The fifteenth of the first month of the first year of the Shenwu era. Inside the newly built Chu Palace, the entire court was replete with decorations and draped in vibrant red. Even the most low-rank servants in the palace showed smiles on their faces under the festive atmosphere. Inside the Hall of Virtuous Merits. Lu Yuan and the Queen were entertaining civil and military officials on this festive Yuanxiao day. The establishment of Chu Country and the change of era to Shenwu were both extremely inspiring events. Because this represents that the Chu group led by Lu Yuan has once again achieved victory in the struggle with the Ning group represented by the Jinling Court. From now on, not only has Chu Country escaped the control of Ning Country, but Ning Country has also completely fallen from the status of the Supreme Dominator, and even the status of the Master of Yangzhou is now in jeopardy and may fall at any time. Chapter 510 - Chapter 510: Chapter 249: The End of an Era_3 Chapter 510: Chapter 249: The End of an Era_3 In times when such paramount authority fell and power lay vacant, it was the perfect era for heroes to stir the winds of change and reestablish supremacy. Across the whole of Yangzhou, aside from the declining hegemonic Ning Country, the emerging nations like Lingnan¡¯s Su Country, Nanhai Country, or the western countries of Hanzhong and Xichuan were far weaker than the newborn Chu State. None of these four nations had the potential to vie for hegemony. Apart from these countries under the former Yue system, the only remaining ones in the territories of Yangzhou were numerous large and small Yi countries in the southwest. Although those Yi countries were not weak, and their might even surpassed the Chu State, they were ultimately considered separate entities, culturally separated from the Yangzhou norm represented by the Jinling court. Moreover, although the southwestern Yi countries had vast territories, even after the elimination of Jinghai Country, they still held an equivalent of six or seven Jiangnan counties. However, these six or seven counties were divided among three great Barbarian States. These Barbarian States were fraught with internal conflict, with many tribes fighting each other for generations and harboring deep-rooted blood feuds. Therefore, they remained entangled in internal strife and could not extricate themselves from it to participate in the power struggles of Yangzhou. Hence, only the Chu State with its territory spanning three counties, thousands of miles in size, millions of households, and an elite army of more than two hundred thousand men was capable of challenging the hegemony of Ning Country in Jinling. To be in such a vibrant and thriving country, and to become an official within it, participating in the struggle for power¡­ How could any ambitious civil or military official not be thrilled and inspired by this? Bang, bang, bang! At that very moment, splendid fireworks that had been prepared within the palace, roared and bloomed across the night sky. The dazzling array of colors embellished the elegance and vigor of the present Great Chu. ¡°Gentlemen, although my Great Chu has broken free from Ning Country and stands on its own, establishing our own regime, the new dynasty is still fresh and everything remains to be done. We need to reorganize national affairs, govern the people, defend against external enemies, and conquer the world. In the future, may the wise ministers assist us in achieving many great deeds. May the monarchs and ministers unite in heart and purpose, and bring about the divine martial prosperity that belongs to us.¡± After several rounds of resplendent fireworks, Lu Yuan stood up, holding a wine cup, and bellowed loudly to the ministers below. ¡°With the king¡¯s wisdom, we will surely use our hearts and minds to assist the king and create a divine martial era!¡± ¡°Born in the age of the holy king, in this life, I dare not fail in my duties!¡± ¡°Long live our king!¡± At this time, many ministers below also raised their wine cups, offering heartfelt congratulations. Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan smiled, and then said, ¡°You may take your time. The queen and I will not disturb your enjoyment.¡± After saying this, he carefully helped Lan Cai¡¯er beside him and left with her in his arms. The ministers behind him performed a ceremonial bow, sending off the king and queen. Then, with the sovereign no longer present, the ministers swiftly raised their glasses and mingled with their acquaintances. Having left the Hall of Virtuous Merits far behind, Lu Yuan could still hear the lively sounds and turned to Lan Cai¡¯er at his side, saying, ¡°My queen, this flourishing world belongs to our children in the future.¡± He pointed to the palace behind him and to the city of Baling, illuminated by twinkling lanterns, expressing his grand ambition and aspirations. Hearing this, Lan Cai¡¯er tenderly stroked her swelling belly, looked at Lu Yuan¡¯s face, leaned in close, and whispered, ¡°I entrust my child and myself to the king in this life.¡± Lu Yuan held Lan Cai¡¯er and gently smiled, ¡°My queen, rest assured. Even for the sake of our children, I will conquer vast territories and allow you to enjoy all the riches and splendors of this world.¡± As they spoke, he felt the warmth of the person in his arms, listened to the rhythm in her belly, and experienced the sound of life, lapsing into a trance. From the beginning of the 18th year of the Longqing period when he had crossed over to this day, the first year of the Shenwu era, 20 years had already passed. After 20 years of traveling back and forth, was he finally going to have a child of his own in this world? He was going to be a father. This miraculous experience caused Lu Yuan, a Grandmaster and Cultivator, to waver in his thoughts. On one hand, he wished to be close to his child, to leave his mark on this world. On the other hand, he feared that investing too much in these emotions would lead to overwhelming grief and sorrow if he had to bid them farewell, damaging his spirit and heart. Feeling torn, he struggled to make a decision. ¡®Forget it, just let everything take its natural course.¡¯ After the inner turmoil, Lu Yuan sighed deeply. ¡°What¡¯s the matter, your Majesty?¡± His sigh caught Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s attention, and her heightened sensitivity due to her pregnancy prompted her to look up. ¡°It¡¯s nothing, it¡¯s just getting cold. Let¡¯s go back,¡± said Lu Yuan, looking down and smiling softly before helping his wife walk towards their sleeping quarters. Behind them, the lanterns blazed with splendor, and the inner attendants and palace maids accompanying them on both sides moved lightly and breathed gently, careful not to disturb the royal couple¡¯s ambiance. During the walk, Lu Yuan gained new insight. Regardless of whether or not he would feel heartache for his children in the future, having a child at this time was undoubtedly of the utmost importance in stabilizing the country and consolidating its foundation. In fact, having one child would not suffice. He needed to have several more, perhaps even dozens. ¡®Perhaps if I have many children, I¡¯ll endure less heartache if I lose a few.¡¯ Thoughts swirled in Lu Yuan¡¯s mind. Neither in his past life nor in this one has he ever been a father. Therefore, he was utterly unfamiliar and bewildered by the bond between father and child and did not know how to respond. At this moment, he could only make such speculations based on his own thoughts. As for whether they were correct, only time would tell. However, at this moment, it was necessary to strengthen Chu State for the sake of himself and his soon-to-be-born child. He could not neglect the cultivation practice concerning the Taiping Dao book. For this protective method on his path to immortality, he absolutely couldn¡¯t abandon it. Chapter 511 - Chapter 511: Chapter 250: Balanced Revenue and Expenditure Chapter 511: Chapter 250: Balanced Revenue and Expenditure Lu Yuan had been living quite contentedly these days. He didn¡¯t know if it was really fate at work, but everything seemed to be influenced by the luck of the world. Ever since he had broken away from the Jinling court and established the independent state of Chu. The one-tenth of the luck that had been diverted due to the constraints of righteousness was now fully recovered. With his luck complete, Lu Yuan¡¯s fortunes exploded like a geyser, and good things came one after another. First of all, domestically, the military was full of good news. The nine Forbidden Army divisions, totaling 180,000 soldiers, had mostly taken shape after over a year of restructuring and integration. Especially after the recent tense standoff with the Ning Kingdom, which provided nearly-real combat training, this mixed army of Yue people, Miao people, Zhou people, and Qiang people had finally grown familiar with one another and could cooperate seamlessly. As for the local county soldiers, there was even less to say. They had fewer numbers and were easier to integrate. Moreover, they didn¡¯t bear the heavy responsibilities like the Forbidden Army did. They had already taken shape before the year began. With this, both the central and local armies had formed in succession. The military reforms, which had begun in Hongdao Year Nine, had finally come to an end. The strength of Chu State had reached its peak. Not only in the military but also in domestic affairs, good news kept coming. First of all, the most significant project in Chu Country at present was the immigration project. This project, which had been ongoing since Hongdao Year Nine, had lasted for a year and a half from the beginning in the first month to the present sixth month of Shenwu Year One, and it had finally come to an end. Not only that, but many of the early immigrants, apart from the ones who¡¯d been moved after Lu Yuan recaptured Xichuan, had already settled down in their new locations, built houses, farmed fields, planted mulberry trees, and engaged in businesses. Finally, they could call this place their home. Even the later groups of immigrants had mostly finished building their houses by this time, managing to catch up with the fall harvest, even though they had missed the spring planting and summer harvest. In Dongting County, crops could grow twice a year, so they didn¡¯t miss out on the autumn harvest. Once this year¡¯s autumn harvest was complete, all of these approximately 2.3 million immigrants would have properly settled down in Chu Country. The people captured during the Northern Expedition were now mostly integrated. This year¡¯s first batch of summer taxes had also been collected from every location in July. According to the reports from various prefectures and counties, Minister Cui Changqing, Sun Siwen, and others had collated the figures, and the total revenue for the first half of the year had been tallied. ¡°Your Majesty, this year¡¯s summer tax total is 22,110,000 silver tales from the field tax, 11,700,000 silver tales from the head tax, and 560,000 silver tales from the additional head tax. The sum of these three items comes to 39,400,000 silver tales. In addition to these, ever since the establishment of our great Chu, as the situation in various prefectures and counties has stabilized, businesses have resumed, and shops have been established gradually. With the stability of local people¡¯s livelihoods, the traffic of merchants and travelers between the various prefectures and counties has increased, and the customs and port tax revenues have risen significantly. During the first half of this year, the domestic customs revenue reached 8,200,000 silver tales. As the local situation continues to improve, this tax revenue should continue to increase, and it is estimated that it could reach as high as 15,000,000 silver tales. But this is only domestic. Now, as the reputation of our Great Chu grows, and our national power increases, merchants and travelers from all over the world are coming to us in greater numbers. Southsea, Su Country, Jiangdong, Liang Country, Zhou Country, and Southwest Yi ¨C the merchants of these countries can be seen in Baling market, gathered in groups. Goods from all over the world are being transported here by them. For just collecting taxes on imported goods during the first half of this year, we received 9,200,000 silver tales. Moreover, as our Great Chu is still new, and the news has not spread, as more countries learn of our strength and prosperity, even more merchants and travelers will flock to us. By then, the tax revenue from international transactions could rise to as much as 20,000,000 silver tales, far greater than the potential of domestic customs tax. However, even so, the total value of domestic and foreign customs tax in the first half of this year was 20,400,000 silver tales. Apart from customs taxes, our Great Chu also levies business taxes on shops and sales in markets. Although these business taxes are not as much as customs taxes, the total for the first half of this year was still 830,000 silver tales. In addition, there are some miscellaneous taxes; though the amounts are smaller, together they still totaled 480,000 silver tales. Thus, field taxes, head taxes, additional head taxes, customs taxes, and business taxes, the five main types of taxes in our Great Chu in the first half of the year, plus miscellaneous taxes, totaled 70,000,000 silver tales.¡± In Qianyuan Palace, Lu Yuan listened to his friend Sun Siwen reporting on the income of the first half of the year, and couldn¡¯t help but be taken aback. Seventy million silver tales in just half a year ¨C was his Great Chu really that rich? He couldn¡¯t quite believe it, and couldn¡¯t help but ask again: ¡°Sun Qing, was there really 70 million silver tales in tax revenue in the first half of this year?¡± Sun Siwen knew that Lu Yuan was astonished, and to be honest, he was also surprised when he obtained the final figures. It was because this year¡¯s first-half tax revenue was unexpectedly high. However, several recountings and on-site inspections on local conditions had led to this accurate figure, and it was absolutely certain. Chapter 512 - Chapter 512: Chapter 250: Balanced Revenue and Expenditure_2 Chapter 512: Chapter 250: Balanced Revenue and Expenditure_2 Upon hearing this question, Sun Siwen smiled and said, ¡°To answer Your Majesty, these taxes have all been deposited in the treasuries of various prefectures. In the next two months, the tax money will be sent back to the capital and can be checked then.¡± Seeing his friend¡¯s confident response, Lu Yuan¡¯s heart finally believed this fact. And after believing, he felt a burst of joy. ¡°If there are seven million silver taels for the summer tax in the first half of the year, by the time winter comes, the winter tax should have eight million silver taels. The combined amount would mean that Great Chu would collect fifteen million silver taels in taxes this year.¡± Lu Yuan calculated these figures. Great Chu inherited the Pre-Yue tax system, which collected taxes twice a year ¨C the Summer Tax in July and the Winter Tax in November. In the meantime, due to various types of additional taxes and the increasing number of merchants and travelers toward the end of the year, the customs and commercial taxes collected in the second half of the year also increased as compared to the first half. Consequently, by the end of the year, the Winter Tax usually collects more than the Summer Tax by about ten to twenty percent. Therefore, with seven million silver taels in this year¡¯s Summer Tax, and taking into account the increase of one and a half times that amount, at least eight million silver taels for the Winter Tax could be collected in the second half of the year. Together, they amount to fifteen million silver taels, which is no small sum. At the very least, with the Great Chu¡¯s current army of 240,000 soldiers, the total military expenditure of sixteen million silver taels can almost be covered by this year¡¯s tax revenue, only falling short by one million silver taels. However, Nanhai Country and Su Country still provide five million silver taels of assistance every year. This difference of one million silver taels can also be covered. Even more than just covered. Considering this, Lu Yuan asked, ¡°Sun Qing, I recall that our country¡¯s various expenses should be around three million taels, right?¡± ¡°Yes, Your Majesty.¡± Sun Siwen nodded, then said, ¡°Now in our country, the court, prefectures, and counties employ 3,071 officials in total. The annual expenditure for these officials¡¯ salaries requires more than 578,000 silver taels, and 136,000 stones of rice. In addition, the daily administrative costs, official residence maintenance, and other expenditures of various prefectures amount to 630,000 silver taels. Furthermore, the costs of road repairs, city wall maintenance, water conservancy construction, and city cleaning projects amount to over 1,250,000 silver taels every year. Besides, over the years, the accumulated casualties from wars have left more than 50,000 disabled and deceased soldiers. Although compensation fees were provided at the time, due to Your Majesty¡¯s kindness, a monthly pension is still given to them. This amounts to 120,000 silver taels per year. Moreover, the court allocates funds every year for the support of students and provides for the widows, orphans, and other needy people in the provinces. These two expenditures combined amount to over 80,000 silver taels. Additionally, daily administrative costs, various field works, patrolling the regions, and sending envoys to other countries amount to more than 230,000 silver taels each year. Moreover, the court needs to provide the royal family with 300,000 silver taels annually to cover their daily expenses. All these expenses combined amount to about 3,200,000 silver taels.¡± At this point, Sun Siwen paused, then added, ¡°However, this is only the expenditure under normal circumstances. In case of unforeseen events, such as floods or droughts, and insufficient crops, the court needs to provide relief assistance. An additional 500,000 silver taels must also be set aside every year for emergencies.¡± The maintenance of a dynasty is not cheap. With only three provinces and seventeen prefectures, Great Chu has an annual normal expenditure of 3,700,000 silver taels, excluding military expenses. And this is based on the premise of a relatively honest and frugal administration and a thrifty king. If it were to revert to the Pre-Yue system, where local officials were exceedingly greedy, and the extravagance and waste of court officials and the imperial family were prevalent, this expenditure would need to be at least doubled. It wouldn¡¯t be surprising for an egg to cost ten silver taels in that case. Perhaps in the Pre-Yue era or even in today¡¯s Ning Country court, such a phenomenon already existed. After all, that was an aristocratic conglomerate that had been established for thousands of years. It would only be normal for such a deeply rooted and rigid class system to produce such peculiarities. However, this would only occur in a long-standing dynasty. For now, at least, Great Chu doesn¡¯t need to worry about such a situation. Or rather, before Lu Yuan dies, he doesn¡¯t need to worry that anyone would dare to deceive him with an egg costing ten silver taels. And as for outliving him? Looking around, Lu Yuan felt that it was unlikely that anyone in the Nine Provinces or the entire world could live longer than him. So, there¡¯s a high probability that this kind of corruption, or rather, the corruption within the royal family, will not occur. If someone is foolish enough to dare to steal his money, Then the God Martial Emperor wouldn¡¯t mind showing them the true might of his imperial authority, and how untouchable it is. An immortal emperor, as long as he doesn¡¯t become degenerate, can be a good thing for his subjects in this regard. As for self-discipline, Lu Yuan felt that as long as he had goals to strive for and as long as there were external threats remaining, there was no need to worry about his fall from grace. Yes. The logic is complete and perfect. With this moderately smug thought in mind, Lu Yuan continued to calculate the costs: ¡°In this case, the court¡¯s annual military expenditure would be around16,000,000 silver taels, while the daily expenses of the court officials would amount to 3,700,000 silver taels.¡± Chapter 513 - Chapter 513: Chapter 250: Balanced Revenue and Expenditure_3 Chapter 513: Chapter 250: Balanced Revenue and Expenditure_3 That totals up to nineteen million seven hundred thousand silver tales. As for revenue, it¡¯s fifteen million silver tales a year. In addition, from the Su Country and Southsea Country, there are also annual aids of five million silver tales and four million stone grains, totaling up to twenty million silver tales. With an annual balance of around three hundred thousand silver tales, am I right?¡± Lu Yuan looked at Sun Siwen. ¡°For this year, that¡¯s indeed the case.¡± Sun Siwen nodded, then continued: ¡°However, the king has decreed that the people who have migrated from Hanzhong and Xichuan to our country will not be taxed for the first three years. So this year¡¯s 15 million silver tales of tax revenue does not include the field tax, head tax, and property tax of those two million three hundred thousand immigrants. Right now, one year has passed, and half a year of this year as well. After waiting another year and a half, which is during Shenwu¡¯s third year, taxes can be collected from these immigrants. By then, with an additional two million three hundred thousand taxpayers, the country¡¯s field tax, head tax, and property tax can roughly increase by two million seven hundred thousand silver tales of tax revenue. As these immigrants settle down in the region, they will also purchase goods and attract merchants and travelers. By that time, the country¡¯s customs and commercial taxes will be higher than this year, probably increasing by another one million eight hundred thousand silver tales or so. Various miscellaneous tax revenues can also increase by five hundred thousand silver tales. That adds up to about five million silver tales of additional tax revenue. Therefore, two years later, by Shenwu¡¯s third year, the annual tax silver of the Great Chu Country should be able to reach a substantial twenty million silver tales, enough to support our nation¡¯s military forces and the expenses of the imperial court. By then, the five million silver tales of aid from Su Country and Southsea Country can be saved and used for other purposes.¡± Sun Siwen had obviously considered this aspect of the problem, and his answer was well-organized at this time. Fortunately, after Lu Yuan¡¯s previous buffering, hearing the number of twenty million silver tales at this time did not surprise him as much as before. It makes sense. Now, among the Chu State¡¯s registered households, there are 5.7 million people. Excluding the elderly, women, and children, there should be about two million adult men. As far as Lu Yuan can remember, when he was in Luling Mansion, the lowest-ranking laborer in the county town could earn one silver tale a month. Even this is the income of the lowest stratum of society with a registered household. Other normal farmers and city dwellers with other skills have even higher incomes, reaching two or even three silver tales per month. Thus, considering only adult men, the total income of the people of the Great Chu Kingdom, taking a median value of 1.5 silver tales, totals 30 million a year. However, in reality, the total income of a typical family can¡¯t solely rely on one man. Even women can help with farm work in rural areas, plant mulberry trees, weave cloth, and have additional income. If in the city, it¡¯s even easier to find ways to earn money. Helping with laundry, cleaning, working as servants in rich households, or doing small businesses for their own families, there are simply many ways. All these tasks can be done by women, as well as the elderly and children, who can also generate income. So, when the total income is calculated, the 5.7 million people of the Great Chu can, at the lower-class level, have an annual income of around fifty million silver tales. However, this is still just the lower-class people. Taxes can only be collected from them in the form of field tax, head tax, and property tax, and at most a bit of commercial tax. There are also aristocratic families, local tyrants, wealthy businessmen and landlords, and official dignitaries who possess wealth that may not be less than these lower-class people. Moreover, in these troubled times of war and chaos, various countries have been using their troops yearly, and their demands for money and grain are no small matter. Even if you are a dignitary or a gentleman, you would be treated equally when it comes to taxation. No one will collect less money from you just because you are a scholar, an official, or a noble. Of course, tax evasion, mutual concealment of property, and the like are unavoidable. However, even considering these factors, the current annual income reported in the Great Chu Country for these aristocratic families, local tyrants, wealthy businessmen and landlords, and official dignitaries should also be between 50 million and 70 million silver tales. The specific size fluctuations depend on whether the local government has enforced tax laws in place. But even so, considering all the people and dignitaries in the Great Chu, their lowest annual income would still be around 100 million silver tales. From an income of 100 million silver tales, only 20 million silver tales in taxes are collected, which is only one-fifth of the total. Relative to other countries, the tax burden in Great Chu is already quite light. Among the neighboring countries, the only one that can be compared to Chu is the less troublesome Southsea Country. To the east, Ning Country is said to have raised its tax burden to a quarter of the total in order to cope with the continuous battles. In the western countries of Hanzhong and Xichuan, the tax burden has been raised to a quarter as well, in order to maintain their troops and resist the threat from Zhou Country. And in the south, Su Country is under Su Xuange¡¯s impoverished soldiers and fierce warriors policy, with a tax rate even more insane at one-third. People can hardly survive, and a large number of people have fled the area. Compared to the group of neighbors around them, Lu Yuan¡¯s one-fifth tax rate betrays his kind and benevolent policies. The local people, who were so easily won over, also had a lot to do with his leniency. However, one thing to note is that these tax rates are only for taxes on the surface. Just as when Lu Yuan was a hunter and wanted to enter the city, he would be charged many extra fees for entering the city. At the local level, although the fees set by the imperial court are the same, how local corrupt officials and scribes enforce them is a different matter. Chu Country is a bit better in that regard since it¡¯s a new dynasty that has been established, and everything is starting anew, with no entanglement of interests and comparatively clear politics. Even if the people below want to make money under the guise of various names, they dare not go too far. But Southsea and Ninghai, Xichuan, and Hanzhong, as well as Ning Country, which has inherited all the disadvantages of Pre-Yue, are different from Lu Yuan because they have a large network of interests in their countries. Let these people collect taxes. Do you believe that a tax rate of a quarter can be directly increased to one-third? One-third directly increased to one-half? Don¡¯t be surprised; this is very normal. You should know that in Chu Country, over the course of just one year, according to the reports Lu Yuan has received, more than 5,000 Su Country refugees have been accommodated at the border. According to these people, the exorbitant taxes, miscellaneous taxes, and levies imposed by local officials added up to a tax rate of a half in their area. If they hadn¡¯t been driven to despair, who would be willing to abandon their homes and property and flee to another country? ¡®It¡¯s true that prosperity brings suffering to the people. So does decline.¡¯ Thinking of all this, Lu Yuan sighed with emotion and then rejoiced. That¡¯s because if, as Sun Siwen said, in two years the Chu Country¡¯s income can reach twenty million silver tales, then the country can truly be self-sufficient and not rely on outside help. By then. Even if Southsea and Ninghai Countries fall out with us, there will be no need to worry about military expenses. Even now, the five million silver tales of aid from these two countries each year can be used for other purposes. For example, Lu Yuan has recently been worried about where to find the money to build a navy. At this moment, a solution had emerged. Chapter 514 - Chapter 514: Chapter 251: The Birth of the Eldest Son Chapter 514: Chapter 251: The Birth of the Eldest Son Regarding the issue of the navy, back in the years when it was still the Changsha Kingdom, Lu Yuan deeply realized this deficiency when he led the Three-Nation Alliance against Ning Country. With just 50,000 troops, Ning Country¡¯s navy directly split Dongting County in half, isolating the Changsha Kingdom from north to south. At that time, the transportation between the north and south of Changsha was cut off. Merchants and travelers were blocked at various ports. Domestic government orders were delayed and stagnated. Communication between the north and south even required sending martial arts experts on small boats to sneak through Ning Country¡¯s naval blockade. One could almost say that as soon as their blockade of the Yangtze River was in place, the Changsha Kingdom was almost paralyzed. Such a lesson was fresh in his memory, and after just over half a year, Lu Yuan had not forgotten it. Although he knew the importance of the navy and considered it a matter of shame, setting up a navy required a large amount of money. And now, what the Chu State was lacking was money. ¡°However, in two years, the taxes of Changsha Kingdom will balance its revenues and expenditures. At that time, the 5 million silver tales aid from Su Country and Nanhai Country can be used to support the navy. Five million silver tales, even if it costs twice as much as the army to support a navy of equal size, can still raise a navy of 50,000. With these 50,000 naval troops, it may be difficult to compete with the Ning Country navy on the Yangtze River. But relying on the heavy cities of Baling, Tianmen, Xiangyang and other cities along the Yangtze River and the Han River, it is still possible to stop the enemy outside the country¡¯s gates, ensuring the smooth flow of communication between the north and south of the country. Being able to achieve this is enough.¡± As Lu Yuan calculated in his heart, his plan gradually took shape. Regarding the navy¡¯s requirements, he never expected to defeat Ning Country with the navy alone and take over the Jiangdong region. Ning Country inherited Yue Country, and Yue Country inherited the previous dynasty. In the hands of these coastal families, the Jinling court accumulated a large number of talents in the naval field, so there were more than enough personnel. Could you really defeat such a time-honored accumulation with a simple command? If the navy can defend the country, it would have fulfilled its purpose for him. As for other matters of contention with Ning Country, he could personally command the elite land army, attacking Yuzhang and Linhai ashore, and advancing all the way to Jinling City. Compared to the navy, which is still only an idea, the land army that he has been commanding for more than a decade is obviously more reliable. Although the main focus is still on the land army, it is indeed time to start preparing for the navy. As of now, Ning and Chu are temporarily at peace because both need time to recuperate and digest their gains. But in this era of great contention, no one knows when war will break out between the Two Countries. If at that time warfare between the Two Countries resumes and Ning Country¡¯s navy invades without obstruction, cutting Chu State in half, it would be too humiliating. Therefore, it is essential to establish a prototype for the navy now, set up the framework, and then slowly fill in the gaps and complete the structure. As for where the money will come from? To build a prototype for the navy, it only needs to serve as experience accumulation. There¡¯s no need to recruit too many people; only five or six thousand are needed. Even considering the cost of building warships, it will only be around four or five hundred thousand silver tales annually. With Lu Yuan¡¯s private treasury still containing a considerable amount of silver, he can naturally advance the funds. By next year, though the immigrants will still be in the tax-exempt period, according to Sun Siwen, the business tax and customs duties will increase further, yielding an extra million silver tales. With this money in hand, ten thousand naval troops can be recruited in the next two years. With these ten thousand troops as a foundation, they can gradually expand their scale step by step, and within at most ten years, they can raise an elite navy of fifty thousand. There is ample time to plan slowly. Having settled on a plan and strategy, on the second day, Lu Yuan sent for Chu Wei. ¡°Greetings, Your Majesty.¡± When Chu Wei arrived, he immediately bowed in salute. ¡°So little Wei has arrived.¡± At this time, Lu Yuan was writing a plan for the navy on the shore, raising his head at the sound of the voice, he smiled and said, ¡°Didn¡¯t I say before? You are my disciple, and between our master and disciple, there is no need for so much formality.¡± Although in his heart, the only truly intimate and trustworthy people in the world were Sun Siwen and Zhou Qing. But for others, such as Lan Cai¡¯er, Cui Changqing, and his own few true disciples, to say there was no sentiment at all would be utterly false. People are not emotionless like plants. After spending a long time with people, they will inevitably develop some feelings for them. Not to mention Chu Wei and the other disciples, who were very respectful towards Lu Yuan, observing the etiquette of the disciple and the minister without any transgression. Any master or monarch would cherish such loyal disciples and ministers, wouldn¡¯t they? So, beyond the closest circle of Sun Siwen and Zhou Qing, Lan Cai¡¯er and Chu Wei were second-tier confidants. And Lu Yuan naturally cherished these confidants. ¡°In front of my master and father, I dare not transgress.¡± But faced with his affection, Chu Wei did not become complacent or forget himself and remained cautious. ¡°You.¡± Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but smile at this, but he didn¡¯t make it difficult for Chu Wei and handed him the recently written strategy for naval development, saying, ¡°Here is a strategy for naval development that I just wrote. Take a look at it.¡± Chu Wei took the strategy and carefully read it. After a while, he had read everything on it word by word and then looked up at his master and said, ¡°Your Majesty wants to establish a navy?¡± Chapter 515 - Chapter 515: Chapter 251: The Birth of the Eldest Son_2 Chapter 515: Chapter 251: The Birth of the Eldest Son_2 According to the strategies, the Chu State naval force will initially be established with 5,000 personnel, expanding to 10,000 the following year, and then increasing by 5,000 per year. After ten years, a naval force of 50,000 personnel will be established. This naval force of 50,000 will be split into five armies, each commanded by a general. Above these five navies, will be a naval commander to oversee them all. From this design, the naval force¡¯s standing will be equivalent to the Forbidden Army, both ranking in the military hierarchy directly controlled by the royal court of Chu State. In a sense, the position of the naval commander is even higher than that of the leaders of the Forbidden Army. The reason is simple; the navy is divided into five corps, each led by a general. The Chu State¡¯s Forbidden Army also divided into nine armies, each led by a general. But above the nine armies of the Great Chu¡¯s Forbidden Army, there is no overall commander, and each army directly obeys King Lu Yuan. There, however, is an overall commander for the navy. Accordingly, wouldn¡¯t this commander be a person with real power, higher than the leaders of both naval and land armies? Of course. Above the Forbidden Army, there is indeed a higher rank of officers, such as Zhou Qing, the Grand General, isn¡¯t there? But the position of the Grand General is in charge of the military affairs of the whole country, which also includes both the naval and land armies. In this respect, the position of the naval commander has become the second highest, right after the Great General, in the military sequence of the Great Chu. ¡®At this time, my master called me over and discussed this matter, could it be¡­¡¯ Upon thinking this, Chu Wei¡¯s heart began to pound uncontrollably. This is the power of the military¡¯s second most important position, the naval commander! If one were to claim to remain unmoved by this, it would certainly be a lie. If I were to become the naval commander, wouldn¡¯t I be the second most important figure in master¡¯s door, only second to my senior brother Zhou Qing in terms of status? The leap in this status is not to be ignored. At that moment, Lu Yuan also spoke: ¡°As you can see, I want to establish the Great Chu navy. During the standoff with Ning Country last time, our Great Chu suffered due to lack of a navy, which nearly resulted in the country being split in two. We can afford to take such a big loss only once, and we cannot let it happen again. You are my disciple, and also a great general of our Great Chu. Your status is naturally different from others, and you should bear more responsibilities. Therefore, I am planning to assign you the heavy responsibility of building up the navy. Are you willing?¡± With such a great opportunity in front of him, how could Chu Wei refuse? So after listening to the speech, he immediately knelt and said, ¡°Your Majesty commands, how can I not obey? Master, rest assured, with me here, I will devote myself to building the navy, and won¡¯t let the people of Ning show off their strength in our great river.¡± Upon hearing these words, Lu Yuan nodded in satisfaction: ¡°Good, in this case, you will first hold the title of former general and take on the duty of naval commander. Once the navy is formed, and the five armies are well-prepared, I will promote you to the rank of General Wei, in charge of the navy.¡± After the establishment of the new dynasty, from the former Changsha country to the present Chu country, the ranking system for both civil and military officials has basically been similar to that of the Pre-Yue. Leaving aside the civil officials, let¡¯s discuss the military officers. The first rank is the Grand General, which is a first-grade rank. This is not just a military rank, it¡¯s also a military position, capable of controlling the whole country¡¯s military affairs. The second rank is the General of Cavalry and Chariots, both of these generals are of the second-grade rank. However, these two generals are just military ranks without specific duties. But according to precedent, if a ¡°grand¡± is added in front of the two generals, such as Grand General of the Cavalry, they become almost on par with the Grand General, with equally valid qualifications to manage the country¡¯s military affairs. Therefore, the second rank of cavalry and chariot generals have always been viewed by the martial artist as highly prestigious positions, second only to the Grand General. However, these two generals are rarely ever established, even kept vacant, without any appointments. During the Pre-Yue, only Marquis of Wuan, Bai Mengyang, for his meritorious service, was specially appointed as the Grand General of Cavalry, ranking above General Shen Qiu. This was the reason why he was able to negotiate various agreements with Lu Yuan on behalf of the royal court when he was in charge of the Xiangyang Military Camp. Because the position of the Grand General of Cavalry can indeed represent Yue Country. Below this, is the third rank, divided into five generals: former, latter, left, right, and Wei. The former four generals are all second-grade rank. These four generals are usually capable and experienced officers at the court who don¡¯t have specific duties in peacetime. They only lead the army to battle on behalf of the country when called upon. General Wei, on the other hand, has a first-grade rank. This military rank is even more revered than the four generals and is often referred to as the Deputy Grand General. Like the second rank of cavalry and chariot generals, it is usually vacant. Among Lu Yuan¡¯s true disciples, aside from Zhou Qing, there are five people, namely Chu Wei, Li Liang, Han Sun, Zhang You, and Zhuang Hua. Among these five, Chu Wei, Li Liang, Han Shun, and Zhang You, with their merits accumulated over the years, have respectively been appointed as the four generals of former, latter, left, and right. Among them, Han Shun, with the rank of Left General, serves as the Governor of Xichuan Prefecture, responsible for the military affairs of Xichuan Prefecture. Zhang You serves as the Governor of Xiangyang Prefecture with the rank of Right General, responsible for the military affairs of Xiangyang Prefecture. Chu Wei and Li Liang do not hold any specific duties, being only stationed in the capital, waiting for expedition orders. The last person, Zhuang Hua, due to his late breakthrough to the first rank and a lack of meritorious service, currently only holds the additional title of General Jianwu, serving as Zhijinwu, leading the four thousand Capital Jinwu soldiers, and responsible for security defense in Baling City. Therefore, if Chu Wei were to be promoted to General Wei, then in terms of rank, he would be a grade higher than the other fellow disciples, other than Zhou Qing. Chapter 516 - Chapter 516: Chapter 251: The Birth of the Eldest Son_3 Chapter 516: Chapter 251: The Birth of the Eldest Son_3 From the perspective of power and duties, one is General Wei, who is in charge of the entire nation¡¯s water force, while the other is a general responsible for the military affairs of a single region, only having a role during wartime. Tell me, isn¡¯t there a huge difference between the two? So, when Chu Wei heard of this arrangement, he was extremely excited, immediately saying, ¡°I will obey, Your Majesty.¡± Although his title of General Wei would only be given after the fifty thousand water soldiers were fully established, this might take another ten years. But compared to taking on the responsibility of managing the entire nation¡¯s water force, is ten years a long time? Chu Wei is only thirty-two now. Well, at this age, he is just four years younger than Lu Yuan. So, even if he has to wait for another ten years, he would only be forty-two years old when he becomes General Wei. Compared to the position of managing the entire nation¡¯s water force, this age is rather vigorous and even quite young. With such a bright prospect ahead, what is there to complain about? Compared to having a clear goal, Chu Wei is way better off than others like Han Shun and Zhang You who are still spinning their wheels in local affairs and Li Liang, who is still stuck at home waiting for a campaign. At this moment, he is full of energy. Before him, it¡¯s all bright. After assigning Chu Wei to manage the water force, Lu Yuan only occasionally took time to look at the reports on the progress of the water force prepared by his disciple, not investing much effort. Not only that, but he also didn¡¯t have much time to deal with all sorts of domestic affairs. Because at this moment, his entire focus was on his queen. Since Queen Lan Cai¡¯er became pregnant in October last year, by now, in August of the first year of Shenwu, almost ten months later, the queen has finally reached the end of her term. Especially in the past few days, according to experienced midwives, the baby could be born anytime. Preparations need to be made now. As it concerns his child and the crown prince of the nation, all other matters naturally have to be put on hold. Even ministers like Sun Siwen, knowing the Queen is about to give birth, couldn¡¯t help but feel nervous and excited, constantly reporting to Lu Yuan to pay more attention. Under this tense and expectant atmosphere, on the 25th of August in the first year of Shenwu, ten days after the Mid-Autumn Festival, Queen Lan Cai¡¯er of the Great Chu Country gave birth successfully to a son in Linhua Palace. With the birth of the firstborn son, the whole nation celebrated. Overjoyed, Lu Yuan not only granted generous rewards in the palace but also gave rewards to officials, ministers, and the common people outside the palace. For this, he spent another million silver tales. But of course, it was all worth it. Under such generous rewards, the entire nation offered heartfelt blessings to the newly born firstborn son of the king. With these congratulations, three days later, Lu Yuan named the firstborn son Lu He, with He meaning the entire nation congratulating the birth of the king¡¯s firstborn son. It encompasses his hope that this firstborn son, who was born with the good wishes of the entire nation, can grow up smoothly and successfully. And this firstborn son of the King did not disappoint his father, minister, and people¡¯s expectations; since birth, he has been healthy, and within just a month, he already weighed ten catties, with incredibly vibrant energy. ¡°Ah ah ah¡­¡± In Changle Palace, where the firstborn son was granted a residence, Lu Yuan and Lan Cai¡¯er, who had just finished her confinement period, played together with their one-month-old baby. Watching the little baby frantically moving in the queen¡¯s arms, Lu Yuan touched his little nose and laughed heartily when he saw the discomfort of the baby. As he laughed, he also felt a different kind of emotion in his heart. ¡®Is this my son, the bloodline I left in this world, and the continuation of my life?¡¯ Lu Yuan looked at the little guy in front of him, his heart filled with a complex mix of emotions. There was joy, anticipation, confusion, and even some fear¡­ All these emotions combined made him feel somewhat at a loss. The little guy in front of him was a first-timer in life, but so was Lu Yuan as someone¡¯s father; both of them were experiencing it for the first time, putting himself in a truly precarious situation! ¡°Alright, if you keep teasing him, He¡¯er will cry,¡± said Lan Cai¡¯er, who was next to him, seeing her little son about to cry and hurriedly swatted away Lu Yuan¡¯s hand that was still teasing the baby. ¡°Alright, alright. I won¡¯t tease him anymore.¡± Lu Yuan laughed twice and withdrew his hand, looking at his son again but not doing anything to upset the little one. Once the baby starts crying, soothing him will be really headache-inducing. Although having just become a father for only a month, he had already learned how terrifying it could be during this short period. It was even more exhausting than practicing martial arts and going to battle. Both physically and mentally draining. With everything prepared for the little one, Lu Yuan checked the time and then turned to the queen, ¡°Cai¡¯er, it¡¯s almost time. The month-end banquet for He¡¯er is nearly ready at Qinghua Hall. Let¡¯s go there first so as not to keep the ministers waiting.¡± As the birth of his eldest son guaranteed a succession for the country, it was naturally a joyous event. Therefore, Lu Yuan invited all the important civil and military ministers and influential figures in the capital to the month-end banquet to celebrate the birth of the baby. Not just that, he even sent out messengers to invite dignitaries of various countries to participate in the baby¡¯s birthday party eleven months later. For the sake of his just-born son, going to such lengths showed how much joy and confusion Lu Yuan held in his heart. But it¡¯s delightful, right? The Chu nation has a successor, not only the king is happy, but the ministers are also happy. With a lineage assured for the Great Chu, their wealth and honor will continue, and they no longer feel insecure. As a result, the ministers all deeply appreciated and felt grateful for Lu He, who brought this about, and Lu Yuan¡¯s slightly unconventional methods were either ignored or supported. Let the king be joyous over his new son! In any case, it only happened once. ¡°Yes, yes. I almost forgot about it. Let¡¯s hurry up and go so as not to miss the timing.¡± Lan Cai¡¯er was naturally very concerned about her son¡¯s month-end banquet. Hearing the reminder, she started to feel anxious as well. With Lu Yuan accompanying her, the couple hurriedly went to Qinghua Hall with their son, Little Lu He, in their arms. Chapter 517 - Chapter 517: Chapter 252: Submission of the Barbarian Nation Chapter 517: Chapter 252: Submission of the Barbarian Nation The entire Shenwu first year was filled with a joyous atmosphere. The renaming and independence at the beginning of the year, and the later birth of the king¡¯s eldest legitimate son. Either of these two events alone would warrant a celebration from all citizens. The nation was indeed in high spirits. The king was wise and enlightened, the ministers were incorrupt and capable, and the government ran smoothly which significantly improved the lives of the populace. Even the poorest beggars benefited from the prosperity of a rising nation. After all, if people lived better lives, wouldn¡¯t they be more willing to give an extra bun to a beggar? The joyous atmosphere persisted from the beginning to the end of the year. After the happiness brought by the birth of his eldest son in August, Lu Yuan, in early December of the same year, received a report from Chu Wei. After several months of effort, this future commander of the navy had finally set up a basic naval infrastructure. Five thousand fishermen were recruited from the Dongting Lake area, supplemented by a number of various merchant and fishing vessels, finally established a place for the navy of Great Chu. However, given these circumstances, the naval power was inevitably limited. But that was not an issue. According to Chu Wei¡¯s plan, he was sending people to Ning Country to lure away naval commanders with high-ranking and generous rewards. Also, in Dongting Prefecture, he was looking for talents amongst those who had already retired or came from aristocratic seafaring families. In addition, he had begun to order battleships from some shipyards in Dongting Prefecture. During the Pre-Yue era, the main bases for naval construction throughout the country were mainly around Xunyang of Yuzhang Prefecture and Wujiang of Linhai. However, that only meant these two locations had more shipyards and were capable of building larger and better battleships of various types. Da Yue, as a coastal area, relied heavily on naval power for transportation. Other states also had their own needs for ships. Even though shipyards in Xunyang and Wujiang could meet most of these demands. But what if your ship broke down while you were doing business in another state and needed repairs? If Xunyang and Wujiang were too far away, and local businessmen did not trade with those places and did not wish to travel to other prefectures, wouldn¡¯t there be a need for local ships ¨C and, as a result, a need for local shipbuilding? Even when the navy of the court was patrolling and garrisoning an area, if a ship broke down, it couldn¡¯t possibly be dragged thousands of miles back for repairs, wasting several months to fix one ship, could it? Even if several small boats were lost when on water, wouldn¡¯t it be more convenient to replace them directly with local supplies rather than waiting for replenishments from the rear? In this regard, the navy of the court also had a demand. Therefore, for a variety of reasons, there existed several shipyards, large and small, not only within Dongting Prefecture, but also within the three prefectures of Xichuan and four prefectures of Xiangyang that Lu Yuan controlled. All these shipyards combined, there were as many as thirteen in total. Although these thirteen shipyards could only build small combat ships that could carry a few dozen people. These small warships, however, could initially meet the needs of the Navy of Great Chu for the first few years. Chu Wei had already made arrangements with these shipyards, even selected the three largest and most promising ones. He urged them to recruit more shipbuilders from Ning Country in order to make efforts to build large warships that could carry hundreds, or even thousands, of people. In terms of funding, the Great Chu Navy, with the support of the entire Chu State, had nothing to worry about. If they could build ships, the Navy would buy them. Encouraged by this, these three shipyards already started sending people to steal talents from Ning Country. Even other ambitious small shipyards, although they weren¡¯t requested by Chu Wei, started making plans to get involved in this business. As a result, without being asked, they also started sending people to steal talents from Ning Country, and even Zhou Country and Liang Country. Zhou Country and Liang Country? Indeed, it¡¯s no mistake ¡ª these two countries also had navies and shipyards. After all, these two countries were also faced along the Yangtze River, with numerous waterways and lakes within the country. Liang Country even had coastlines, so naturally, they had the need for ships. However, the navies of these two countries, similar to the Great Chu Navy that Lu Yuan commanded, were only for defense purpose. The strength of their entire country was just enough for defense, not aggressive invasion. In comparison to Yue Country, which was a water country in Jiangnan, Zhou Country and Liang Country, being mainly plain lands facing inland regions, had to face more pressure from other land countries. Hence, they had to focus more on land. Instead of spending a large amount of money to build a navy, which they did not really need, wouldn¡¯t it be better to save that money to raise tens or even hundreds of thousands of troops to compete with other countries? A navy with tens of thousands of men was enough for defense. After all, not everyone was Yue Country, which needed to rely on a navy for survival of the country. It¡¯s precisely because of this mindset that although the navies of Zhou Country and Liang Country actually had quite a large scale, with tens of thousands of men, they were not well-known compared with the Yue Country Navy, which had a troop strength of one hundred thousand or even several hundred thousand at times. But less prestige doesn¡¯t necessarily mean their shipyard workers and techniques were inferior. These two countries, capable of resisting Yue Country for so many years with their navy, must themselves have had some skills up their sleeves, right? Their battleships were actually not bad, and neither were their naval talents. Once these people were brought back and the shipbuilding level of each shipyard in Great Chu vastly improved, it could even be said that it would leap forward. By that time, with Chu Wei bringing in enough talents skilled in naval warfare, along with a few years of training a group of elite soldiers accustomed to naval warfare. The Great Chu Navy would finally be established. Frequent victories from the navy added a touch of joy to the end of the first year of Shenwu. Chapter 518 - Chapter 518: Chapter 252: Submission of the Barbarian Nation_2 Chapter 518: Chapter 252: Submission of the Barbarian Nation_2 But this was not the end. In the final days of the year, a few guests from the southwest brought another New Year¡¯s gift. Inside the South Pole Hall. Lu Yuan, seated on the throne, looked at two men in foreign official attire who were bowing respectfully before him. After a long contemplation, he asked, ¡°As far as I know, your Shizong and Milu kingdoms have long been subject states to Da Changhe Country, serving it for over a hundred years. Your Yi countries, being generally lax, do not respect the rites and transformation of the monarchy. Although we are all from Yangzhou, you have always had disputes with us, the people of East Yang. Now, why have you decided to break away from Da Changhe Country and come seeking Great Chu, wanting to pledge allegiance? Don¡¯t give me hollow phrases like longing to join a grand country, admiring the transformation by monarchy. Tell me the real reason. Otherwise, without a clear understanding of the details, I will absolutely not accept your two countries. Da Changhe Country is not weak. It¡¯s not worth it for your two small countries to offend such a powerful country.¡± Yes, the two men before his eyes were from the southwest, serving as messengers of the Shizong and Milu Yi countries, which were under the rule of Da Changhe Country. Now, these two messengers sought Great Chu, intending to break away from Da Changhe Country and pledge their allegiance to Chu State. This was of such great importance that, at this crucial time at the end of the year, Lu Yuan had to make time to meet with them. Listening to the serious words of the King of Chu, the two messengers looked at each other. Finally, the messenger of Shizong Kingdom had no choice but to speak the truth: ¡°Your Majesty, as you said, our small countries have always depended on Da Changhe Country. And we, the Yi people of the southwest, do not get along with the people of East Yang, and therefore, we do not really want to pledge our allegiance. Our request for your majesty¡¯s protection this time is due to other reasons.¡± Yangzhou is a vast territory, encompassing roughly sixteen or seventeen provinces. Long ago, many tribes lived within Yangzhou: Yi tribes in the southwest, Qiang tribes in the west, Barbarian tribes in the south, and Yue tribes, as well as Miao tribes. In the east, there were also Barbarian and Yue tribes. Within the boundaries of the entire Yangzhou region, there were several major tribal lineages, and a countless number of small tribes under them. Among those different tribes of varying sizes, their customs and cultures were distinct, and their ways of life varied so much that they might as well belong to two different worlds. Under such circumstances, the various tribes could hardly get along. The current state of Yangzhou was achieved through the ongoing expansions led by the Coastal Aristocratic Family, the ancestors who were among the first to come into contact with the mainstream culture of the Three Emperors. After thousands of years of conquest, the original Yue people, also known as East Yang people, successively eliminated and defeated the Barbarian, Miao, Qiang, and Yue tribes, establishing prefectures and counties on their ancestral land, one after another. By the Pre-Yue period, they even adopted the name ¡°Yue¡± as their state title, indicating how deeply these places had been transformed, eradicating all other barbarian influences. However, these areas did not include the Yi of the southwest. Because until the Pre-Yue period. The expansion of Da Yue into Yangzhou had just reached the three counties of Xichuan, Dongting, and Yulin. Within these three counties, the Barbarian, Miao, Qiang, Yue, and other tribes were still deeply rooted. Although prefectures and counties had also been established in these areas, assimilating the millions of foreign people within the three counties would still require a long period of time. According to the usual practice, this period would normally take several hundred, or even thousands of years. Therefore, before these three counties were fully assimilated, Da Yue naturally did not have the resources to start developing the southwest Yi. After all, the combined strength of these Yi countries in the southwest was not insignificant. Together, they covered an area the size of six or seven counties, and had several Inborn Grandmasters. It would not be easy for Da Yue to conquer them. For this reason. These Yi countries in the southwest basically formed their own small circle, playing their own games in the southwest of Yangzhou. If the outside world did not disturb them, they would not actively cause trouble for the outside world, keeping peace with Yue Country. So it was unexpected and unusual for the Shizong and Milu countries to suddenly send envoys to request to pledge allegiance to Chu State. Without understanding the details, Lu Yuan did not dare to hastily agree. Now, it was time for them to explain. After stating their heartfelt words, the messenger of Shizong Kingdom continued, ¡°Our two countries have come to request to pledge allegiance because we have no other choice, as great internal strife has erupted in Da Changhe Country.¡± ¡°Internal strife?¡± Lu Yuan was taken aback upon hearing this news. ¡°Yes, internal strife.¡± The Shizong Kingdom messenger nodded, then elaborated, ¡°Last year¡­¡± In the hall, as the Shizong Kingdom messenger told their story, with occasional supplements from the Milu Kingdom messenger, Lu Yuan finally understood the reason why they were seeking to pledge allegiance. It turns out that, last year, in the ninth year of Hongdao, turmoil broke out within Da Changhe Country. A large fiefdom under the rule of Da Changhe Country, the Wuman Savage Country, had rebelled. This is where we need to discuss the political system of Da Changhe Country, or the entire southwestern region. Because of their backwardness and lack of desire to transform under the monarchy, the Yi states of the entire southwestern region, though they have their own countries, those countries are more like a number of tribes, only with the titles of countries. For example, the Shizong and Milu countries that are now seeking to pledge allegiance, actually, their citizens all originate from two tribes, that is, the Shizong tribe and the Milu tribe. They have now simply transformed from a tribe into a state, establishing a monarchy and officials. But essentially, they are still tribal states, sticking to the ways of tribal governance. Within their countries, there are various tribal chiefs, these chiefs have official titles, managing their own tribal affairs, and collectively worship the chief of the largest tribe as their king. Chapter 519 - Chapter 519: Chapter 252: Submission of the Yi Country_3 Chapter 519: Chapter 252: Submission of the Yi Country_3 This kind of crude and backward system naturally cannot talk about centralization or any sense of identity. And in the entire southwest region, this tribal nation¡¯s way of playing, tribal and ethnic recognition, is in full swing. Therefore, although there are three major barbarian countries in the southwest, Nanzhao, Dali, and Da Changhe, the core tribes of these three countries each hold only half of a county¡¯s territory. With this half-county territory, they radiate outwards, treating those large and small tribes as vassal states or dependent regions, forming their own governance system. So the position of these three countries is probably similar to that of Lu Yuan¡¯s former Heavenly Son of the Zhou Dynasty. In name, it is the common master of the world, with various princes underneath, and these princes are the bosses of their own areas. When the Heavenly Son is strong, the vassal states will respect the Heavenly Son. But if the Heavenly Son is weak, they will disobey the king¡¯s orders and even rebel. Da Changhe Country is like this, within their own country, under this Heavenly Son, there are 27 small countries. Among these small countries, there are three big vassal states, similar to the position of local lords. They are the Wu Savage Country appointed to manage the affairs of the seven eastern countries, the Hui Chuan Country in charge of the affairs of the five northern countries, and the Nongdong Country in charge of the affairs of the four southern countries. From the regional division above, one can see that among these three local lord vassal states, the Wu Savage Country is the strongest, controlling the affairs of seven countries. And that¡¯s the fact. The control area of Da Changhe Country is about two counties. Half of the county is controlled by them, with as many as a million directly governed people and 50,000 elite soldiers. The royal family even has an Inborn Grandmaster, and their strength is extremely strong. Of the remaining county and a half, half of the county¡¯s eleven countries are directly controlled by Da Changhe Country, which together have nearly a million people and can provide about 100,000 barbarian soldiers to Da Changhe Country. The remaining county is divided between Wuman, Hui Chuan, and Nong Dong countries. Among them, the Wuman country has the largest share, with nearly half a county. About half of this territory belongs to Wuman country¡¯s direct jurisdiction. If it was on the side of the Great Chu, it would probably be about the size of two prefectures. Although it¡¯s not large, relying on these two prefectures¡¯ territories, the directly governed population of the Wu Savage Country is as many as 500,000, and they have raised 20,000 elite soldiers. In the southwestern land, they count as having an extremely strong force under the three major barbarian countries. The remaining Hui Chuan and Nong Dong countries are much weaker in strength, with only one prefecture¡¯s territories directly governed, 200,000 people, and only 10,000 elite soldiers. That is considered the general level. As for the thirteen small barbarian states under these three major nations, their strength is even weaker. They basically have only three to five counties, or even only one county, with no more than a hundred thousand people, and as few as only ten or twenty thousand. For example, the Shizong and Milu countries of the two messengers in front of them, Shizong has four counties and 80,000 people, while Milu is slightly smaller, with three counties and 70,000 people. At their peak, the two countries could only muster ten or twenty thousand soldiers and were genuine small nations. However, these two countries are located in the eastern part of the Great Changhe Country, under the control of the Wu Savage country. After such calculations, the situation in the southwestern Yi region becomes much clearer. The entire Great Changhe Country, or even including Dali and Nanzhao countries, is essentially a large tribal management system, where large tribes manage medium-sized tribes, and then medium-sized tribes manage small tribes layer by layer. Normally, such a hierarchical enfeoffment system is quite stable as long as there are no problems at the top. But this is only under normal circumstances. Nothing in the world is constant, the winds and clouds change, and there is no such thing that never changes. Just in the year before last, the situation changed. First of all, the Lord of the Wu Savage country did not go to the capital Yangcheng of Da Changhe Country for the routine annual meeting, and then did not send a messenger to explain why. When Da Changhe Country sent a messenger to inquire, it was even more humiliated by the Lord of the Wu Savage Country, who declared that the Wu Savage country would break away from Da Changhe Country from now on. From then on, the seven countries of Lingdong would be independent. Faced with such a blatant act of rebellion, as the hegemon of the Kunhai region, could Da Changhe Country bear it? This is naturally unbearable. So Da Changhe Country decisively sent troops, dispatched 20,000 elite soldiers, and simultaneously summoned various affiliated countries, gathering a total of 100,000 soldiers and horses to attack the Wu Savage Country. With these mighty soldiers, Da Changhe Country was confident that the small Wu Savage country couldn¡¯t resist. And then¡­ Then shocking news came back to Xiang City. The 100,000-strong army sent to crusade against the Wu Savage country was defeated at Qu Ecanyon, with the entire army almost wiped out, and only a few thousand remnants escaped. The news brought back by these remnants was that there was a surprising Inborn Grandmaster on the side of the Wu Savage country, and the Nong Dong country in the south had already colluded with the Wu Savage country, stabbing them in the back on the battlefield. It was precisely because of the appearance of the Inborn Grandmaster and the betrayal of Nong Dong country that the punitive expedition suffered such a terrible defeat. What made Da Changhe country even more uncomfortable was that after the Wuman and Nong Dong countries joined forces, they had already gathered 100,000 troops, and now they were led by an Inborn Grandmaster. In contrast, on their side, the 100,000-strong army was wiped out, Xiang City still had 10,000 elite soldiers, and the directly affiliated 11 small countries were still obedient, and Hui Chuan¡¯s attitude was respectful. But even with all these included, after the previous disastrous defeat, the Great Changhe Country could only gather a maximum of 100,000 troops. Even with the Inborn Grandmaster of the Royal Family, they had at most equal strength as the rebel army. Neither side can do anything to the other when entangled. So, the war dragged on for a long time. It has been going on from the end of last year to now, a whole year has passed, and there is no end in sight. In this situation, countries like Da Changhe, Wuman, and Nong Dong are fine, as they have a strong foundation and can hold on. However, small countries like Shizong and Milu can no longer hold on. Originally, during the peaceful times, they had to pay tribute to the two ruling countries of Wuman and Da Changhe, and under the double layer of exploitation, the pressure was already great. At the end of a year¡¯s work, there was not much money and food left. At this time, after fighting for a year, the country has sent troops, soldiers, money, and food, without seeing any harvest, which has also hindered farming, gathering, hunting, and herding. Under such a large expenditure, they naturally complain incessantly and give birth to the idea of seeking new ways. Just in time. Da Changhe Country¡¯s rule area is located between Dongting and Xichuan¡¯s two prefectures, and a part of it is also connected with Yulin County, which is a barbarian country directly facing the Eastern Yang people. And Shizong and Milu countries are located on the eastern border of this eastern region, adjacent to Shaoyang Prefecture of Dongting County, and have no few dealings with the Eastern Yang people of Shaoyang Prefecture during normal times. So after hearing about the establishment of the Great Chu Country and even forcing the Heavenly Son of the Eastern Yang people to retreat, and the great reputation and strength of it, These two countries began to have the idea of submitting internally. And so there came the present arrival of the messengers. Chapter 520 - Chapter 520: Chapter 253: Difficult to Decide on Deploying Troops Chapter 520: Chapter 253: Difficult to Decide on Deploying Troops The hall was still empty, with a few cold winds blowing outside. The people inside were talking, but their hearts were filled with a touch of desolation. ¡°Since last June when Wu Savage Country rebelled, my Shizong Kingdom was forced to send five thousand troops and one hundred thousand stones of food and fodder to them. However, the war has become increasingly fierce, with hundreds of thousands of people fighting on both sides of the front line, and every day hundreds to thousands of people are dying.¡± In addition to intentionally consuming our resources, my Shizong Kingdom¡¯s five thousand troops had suffered more than half of the casualties within half a year since they arrived at the front line, causing a huge loss. Yet, even with such painstaking effort, Wu Savage Country is still not satisfied. At the beginning of this year, they sent a messenger to ask my country for another ten thousand soldiers and two hundred thousand stones of grain. My soldiers at the front line have yet to return, and Wu Savage Country has sent another messenger asking for twice the amount as before. How could a small country like ours bear such a demand? In the end, our country¡¯s ruler was forced to spend a huge amount of money bribing the important officials of Wu Savage Country, to persuade their ruler to reduce the tributary load to last year¡¯s level, only five thousand soldiers and one hundred thousand stones of food and fodder are needed.¡± But even so, through these two contributions, my Shizong Kingdom has already dispatched ten thousand soldiers and two hundred thousand stones of food and fodder, and the cost has been too high.¡± Up to now, the war at the front line is still ongoing, and many of the five thousand soldiers sent by my country this time have died. There are only four thousand soldiers left in the two batches of service.¡± As a small kingdom, my Shizong Kingdom only has eighty thousand citizens. With six thousand dead, almost every family in the country has lost someone. Furthermore, the absence of ten thousand young men has significantly impacted our agriculture over the past two years. Our harvest has been reduced by half, if not more.¡± And from our country¡¯s storage, we have sent away two hundred thousand stones of grain, which has completely depleted the reserves of our citizens.¡± Now, as a year has passed and it¡¯s the beginning of this year, the messenger of Wu Savage Country will inevitably come to collect more services soon. But can my country still bear the pressure of further levies? If we were to pay this tribute again, I¡¯m afraid that the Shizong Kingdom would be destroyed.¡± At this point in his speech, the Shizong Kingdom¡¯s messenger was already in tears, his expression filled with grief and anger. With red eyes, he continued, ¡°In desperation, my country had no choice but to seek other solutions. At that time, we happened to hear of Your Majesty¡¯s great reputation. Furthermore, my Shizong Kingdom has always been adjacent to the Chu State, and we have long had exchanges, not like those tribes that have no aspirations for civilization. So we sent a humble servant to request to be accepted into the Great Chu Kingdom. If Your Majesty is willing to accept us, My Shizong Kingdom will forever be loyal to the Great Chu, offering tributes year after year and never dare to rebel.¡± With that, the man bowed down. The messenger from the Milu Kingdom beside him also bowed and said, ¡°The Milu Kingdom is in a similar situation. We only ask Your Majesty to save us from this misery. We shall never forget this great kindness.¡± Looking at the two messengers prostrating themselves before him, Lu Yuan fell silent. Although the stories told by the two messengers were pitiful and touching, whether to save them or not was no small matter. First of all, the messenger from the Shizong Kingdom has already made it clear. Even though the Great Changhe Country is in turmoil, both the ruling Great Changhe Country that controls the Kunhai region and the Wuman Country that has coerced Lingdong¡¯s seven countries and Nongdong Kingdom into rebellion have considerable strength. Both sides have more than a hundred thousand troops, and tens of thousands of elite soldiers. More importantly, both countries have Inborn Grandmasters, so their top-level combat power is not lacking. As a result, it will not be easy to defeat them since there are no apparent weaknesses in their top-level or bottom-level forces. The Great Chu Country is adjacent to the Great Changhe Country, so it would be easy to intervene in their civil strife. However, once involved, it will not be easy for the Great Chu Country to retract its forces or stop the war as they wish. Given the strength of both sides, the Chu Country has the ability to defeat either. However, it is difficult to say what the cost of defeating the enemy would be. To fight a war of this scale, at least a hundred thousand troops would have to be mobilized, right? Moreover, since the enemy has Inborn Grandmasters, the Chu Country¡¯s army must also be well-equipped with them. If the troops were sent unprepared in this way, it would be like repeating the mistakes of the Great Changhe Country. Due to negligence, the Great Changhe Country¡¯s army was completely defeated without an Inborn Grandmaster guarding them, and they lost everything. That was a loss of one hundred thousand soldiers, a loss the Great Chu Country could not afford.¡± If they really want to intervene, an Inborn Grandmaster is essential. But if they do so, there would only be one Inborn Grandmaster left in the Great Chu Country. With only one Inborn Grandmaster to watch over the nearly ten thousand miles of the Jiangnan and Jiangbei regions, it is somewhat of a stretch.¡± Moreover, at this time, if another one hundred thousand soldiers were to be transferred from the country, there would only be one hundred and forty thousand left. This expedition would deplete nearly half of the Chu Country¡¯s strength. Situated dangerously within the Great Chu Country, which has just changed its name and established its era and has a tense relationship with the Ning Country while being watched closely by the surrounding countries, is simply too risky.¡± This is only the risk in terms of domestic defense. As for the expedition, even if the Great Chu could mobilize one hundred thousand troops, it would not necessarily mean the defeat of the Great Changhe Country.¡± Considering the strength of the Great Changhe Country and the Wu Savage Country, they might not be a match for the Lu Yuan¡¯s army on the battlefield. However, if they decided to focus on defense or take advantage of the vast mountains in the southwest and play a guerrilla game with him, things might not go so smoothly. Chapter 521 - Chapter 521: Chapter 253: Difficult to Decide on Deploying Troops_2 Chapter 521: Chapter 253: Difficult to Decide on Deploying Troops_2 For Lu Yuan to eliminate these enemies, it would not be so simple. This war of extermination could last two or three years, even four or five years, or even over a decade. There have been precedents for this. In the past, when the Jinling court, led by the coastal aristocratic family, expanded westward and southward, the local tribes of Barbarians, Miao, Qiang, and Yue had used such tactics. At that time, the Jinling court had no better way to deal with it but to send generals to suppress it while stationed with heavy troops, and desperately wear down the enemy. Previously, when they were eliminating Jinghai Country, the Wuan Marquis led the troops, with two grandmasters and a hundred thousand soldiers, and it took three to four years to break through the enemy¡¯s capital and destroy the country, right? Moreover, even after the destruction of the country, it was not the end. Afterward, they still had to leave Marquis Wuping, Xie Ning, leading fifty thousand elite soldiers to suppress the local area and clear out the remnants of Jinghai Country, calming the local unrest. However, even so, it has been five to six years since the Jinghai Country was destroyed. According to the news Lu Yuan heard from over there, there are still occasional uprisings in Jiuzhen County, and there is often activity of Jinghai Country¡¯s remnants in the mountain forests, with local resistance still existing. Looking at it this way, it is easier to destroy Da Changhe Country and Jinghai Country, these Yi and Barbarian countries, but of course, it is not so simple to really occupy their territory and rule them. The simplest example is the Miao people¡¯s respect has been naturalized as kings for thousands of years. However, on the side of Dongting, hasn¡¯t there been a Five Poisons Sect rebellion that almost delivered a fatal blow to the Da Yue Dynasty? With the lesson of the previous car in front of them and the example of Jinghai Country still being staged, it naturally made Lu Yuan more cautious. Of course. The premise of all the above is that he is preparing to destroy the Da Changhe Country, so this is the situation he needs to face. If he only followed what the envoys of Shizong and Milu said, accepting the two countries as vassals, protecting them, then the above situations would naturally not need to be faced. What about the reactions of the Da Changhe Country and Wu Savage Country? Considering the situation of these two countries, let alone being in civil strife and unable to handle their own affairs. Even if there was no rebellion in the Da Changhe Country, with the Great Chu Country¡¯s stature and Lu Yuan¡¯s reputation, even if they accepted you both as vassal countries, what could you do? Would the Da Changhe Country really be willing to risk losing its army and territory, go to war with the Great Chu for the sake of these two small countries? Most likely, it will end in nothing, with a few condemnations and then acquiescence to the facts. But as mentioned above. The combined territories of Shizong and Milu are only seven counties, and the population is now reduced to only 140,000, which can be said to be extremely poor. Moreover, even this small amount of wealth still belongs to them. These two countries only promise to be vassals of the Great Chu and give tribute every year. But how much silver can these two Barbarian countries contribute together in a year? Five thousand taels, eight thousand taels, or ten thousand taels? With such little benefits, it barely nourishes a hundred soldiers; is it worth risking war with Da Changhe Country and Wu Savage Country to accept these two countries as vassals for Lu Yuan? So for Lu Yuan. Accepting their surrender is indeed possible. But there is not much benefit in doing so, and instead, it attracts two powerful enemies, which is a completely disproportionate undertaking. If he really decides to take action, it would not be for these two small countries, but for the entire Da Changhe Country. If he could really destroy this country, annex its two prefectures, three to four million people, and thousands of miles of territory, that would be the real big benefit, and it could make the strength of Chu rise to another level. Eradicate their country, truncate their sacrifices, punish their king, acquire their people, eliminate their land, and establish their borders¡­ All these are what a true man should do. How can sneaking in and accepting two vassals while taking advantage of their chaos, gaining such petty benefits, be considered a hero? Nevertheless, Lu Yuan considers himself a hero in this world. He is not sure how others think and what they do. But when he does it, he wants to do it big. Either he doesn¡¯t want it, or he wants all; such trivial Shizong and Milu countries, when he¡¯s about to take it, he wants the entire Da Changhe Country and all 27 Yi countries under his rule. So that it can be written in historical records, breaking the Da Changhe country and destroying 27 countries. Wouldn¡¯t it look, sound much better than taking advantage of their chaos, and accepting the inner attachment of two Yi countries? However, doing what was said above, heroism is heroic, domineering is domineering, and it sounds good. But to get the actual benefits, it may not be as simple as it seems. His previous concerns still exist. Da Changhe and Wu Savage Countries are not easy to destroy. Just one is hard enough to defeat. At that time, when faced with the heavy pressure of the Great Chu¡¯s troops, if the two countries join hands and face two Inborn experts, even Lu Yuan would not dare say he could defeat the enemy. This is not impossible. So after comprehensively considering and carefully deliberating, Lu Yuan still could not make up his mind whether or not to jump into this muddy water. In the end, he could only look at the two countries¡¯ messengers and say: ¡°You are both fiefdoms of the Da Changhe Country, and everything about this great country must be cautious. Whether to accept Shizong and Milu¡¯s attachment, I still have to consult with the group of ministers before making a decision. It is not too late today, and the rooms in the Honglu Temple post house have been prepared. The two envoys should go down and rest first.¡± After saying this, Lu Yuan waved his hand and let the others leave. Meanwhile, the two countries¡¯ envoys, seeing the King of Chu not agreeing to their request immediately, were also somewhat anxious. Their country was in deep turmoil, and any delay would mean an increased risk of destruction at home. Chapter 522 - Chapter 522: Chapter 253: Difficulty in Deploying Troops_3 Chapter 522: Chapter 253: Difficulty in Deploying Troops_3 Where could this wait come from? ¡°Your Majesty!¡± The envoy from the Shizong Kingdom was anxious, and wanted to come forward to persuade him a few more words. However, before he could run two steps, Lu Yuan¡¯s cold gaze looked over. Facing the majesty of an Inborn Grandmaster, a cultivator, a fierce general on the battlefield, and the monarch of a country, the envoy could not bear it in an instant. He felt like he was falling into an icy cave, and a trembling of his soul rose inside his body. In great fear, he instantly realized the reality and knelt down. ¡°The envoy should be mindful of his identity.¡± At this time, Lu Yuan¡¯s voice also timely sounded: ¡°What decision the Lonely King makes, that is all the Lonely King¡¯s business. Even though it involves your two countries, it has nothing to do with you speaking more words. I ask you to wait, just wait. Don¡¯t have any extra thoughts, extra actions, otherwise, you won¡¯t be able to bear the consequences.¡± As the words fell, the footsteps sounded. While the envoy of Shizong Kingdom felt trembling in his heart, he also felt that the terrible cold had disappeared. After waiting for a while, he looked up and found that the terrible King of Chu had disappeared. It¡¯s just two envoys from small countries. Giving them face, calling them envoys from a noble country. But if they don¡¯t get face, they¡¯re just tribal leaders under the tribal chiefs. Converted, this envoy¡¯s identity would be a county-level official in the territory of Great Chu, not even the top leader, but a small official under the county magistrate. With this level of identity, he wanted to hold the King of Chu and let Lu Yuan stop, and listen to him say a few more words. This can only say that barbarians¡¯ people, without any sense of hierarchy and etiquette, are used to wild habits, and need to be treated accordingly. After sending away the envoys of Shizong and Milu Kingdoms, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t bother with them anymore. The next day, he discussed this matter with Sun Siwen and Cui Changqing, asking about the current financial situation and whether it could support a 100,000-man war. As a result, he learned that the court could not afford to wage the war. Even maintaining the 240,000-strong army was a struggle in itself. Not to mention the addition of a naval force, which was another money-eating monster. As for the grain situation, with the gradual recovery of agricultural production in Dongting prefecture in recent years, the grain yield in various places has been increasing year by year. The court can harvest a lot of grain every year, enough for self-sufficiency. Moreover, Su Country and Nanhai Country send four million stones of grain each year. This amount is calculated based on the annual food and fodder consumption of a 200,000-strong army. Of course, armies marching need civilian workers to transport food and fodder. The civilian workers who transport the food along the way also need to consume a lot. But, in total, the four million stones of grain provided by the two countries were enough for a 100,000-strong army to fight for a year. In terms of food, there was no need for extra expenditure from the court. The only difficulty for the Chu State now was the lack of money. Because the army was waging war, wartime wages were different from peacetime wages, increasing by a small margin. Moreover, the wear and tear of various arms also increased, requiring timely replenishment, which was a substantial expenditure. For a 100,000-strong army to fight for a year, removing the original fixed expenses, the extra wartime expenses would add up to three to five million silver tales. The court could not afford this expenditure. That is to say, if Lu Yuan were to wage war, he could do so, but the extra military expenses would have to come from his private treasury. He could afford this money. After several previous expenditures, Lu Yuan¡¯s private treasury still had about 1.2 million silver tales left, enough to support the army¡¯s extra expenses for three to four years. After three or four years, Great Chu¡¯s finances would be balanced. The extra expenses would be covered by the assistance of Nanhai and Ninghai. So it could fill this gap. But this money is for Lu Yuan to prepare for unexpected needs. If used now to attack Da Changhe Country, should another war break out in Great Chu, or if there were any other urgent needs, there would be no money left. Therefore, it was difficult to make a decision. Later, as Lu Yuan found it difficult to decide, Sun Siwen made another suggestion. That was to cut the wages of the local prefecture and county soldiers. The entire territory of Great Chu, regardless of local prefecture and county soldiers or the central forbidden army, the capital¡¯s Jinwu Guards, and the palace guards, basically all had a monthly wage of five silver tales. This salary was reasonable, and there was nothing to say about the basic wages of soldiers in various countries. But the problem was that after the reorganization, the fighting soldiers of Great Chu already had the central forbidden army to bear them, so theoretically, those local prefecture and county soldiers had been removed from the list of fighting soldiers. If you say that the soldiers of Xichuan and Xiangyang prefectures, under pressure from the northwest, have a constant need to fight against other countries and face greater risks, it is acceptable for them to have a salary of five silver tales. But for the soldiers of the prefectures and counties below the prefectures, they are purely security forces, at most guarding the city, and basically have little chance to go to the front-line battlefield. With their responsibilities and pressure, it is already unreasonable for them to enjoy the same salary treatment as fighting soldiers. Sun Siwen had wanted to say this earlier, but there was never an opportunity. Now seizing the opportunity, he finally spoke out his thoughts. ¡°The prefecture and county soldiers in the local areas, according to the customs of various countries, are all paid three silver tales a month. A monthly wage of three silver tales is already comparable to that of skilled master craftsmen in the local areas, not a low salary. If the wages of the prefecture and county soldiers are cut by two silver tales per month, then the 34,000 prefecture and county soldiers of Great Chu can save 68,000 silver tales a month, and 816,000 silver tales a year. This is just their monthly wage. According to custom, during the New Year and other festivals, there will also be some festival expenses, as well as some grain, oil, and cloth subsidies. These are not small expenses for a year. If the subsidies for these prefecture and county soldiers are reduced from the standard of fighting soldiers, 80,000 to 90,000 silver tales can be saved a year. Thus, by cutting the wages of these prefecture and county soldiers, at least 900,000 silver tales can be saved in a year. This money, whether used by His Majesty to support more soldiers and horses, or to build more roads and canals in the local areas, can make a great impact. There is no need to waste it here.¡± When talking about this equal treatment policy, Sun Siwen¡¯s face was a little red, obviously deeply resentful of it. This wastage is all money! Chapter 523 - Chapter 523: Chapter 254 Internal Reform Chapter 523: Chapter 254 Internal Reform One million and ninety thousand silver taels a year, to be honest, was already equivalent to the sum of the annual taxes of two or three poor prefectures under the Chu State, such as Wuling. This expenditure was indeed considerable. If it could be saved, it would indeed make the finances more substantial. Moreover, the point raised by Sun Siwen was indeed a problem. The local county soldiers responsible for maintaining security and the battlefield soldiers receiving the same treatment and pay was indeed unjust. Because the responsibilities and risks faced by both sides were different. The former only needed to suppress bandits in the local area and fight for local security, while the latter had to confront the front lines and compete with other nations on the battlefield. Could the responsibilities and risks be the same? Even the strengths of the county soldiers and the battlefield soldiers were different. The former were selected and eliminated from the battlefield soldiers, with inherently weaker strength and less training. The latter, however, were chosen from the best, with daily small exercises and large exercises every three days, making them inherently different in quality. So, in summary, the problem Sun Siwen pointed out was indeed significant and needed to be addressed. Actually, the pay for county soldiers and battlefield soldiers being the same was a historical problem. The story began when Lu Yuan, with his weak strength, took up his post in Wugang County. In order to help his friend take up his post successfully and eliminate rebellions in the area, he had to recruit a group of new soldiers at the same pay level as the battlefield soldiers to go to their posts together. Later, when he had a firm foothold in Wugang County and even Shaoyang Prefecture, the situation improved a lot. However, it was at this time that the Poison Sect rebelled. A rebellion affecting the entire Dongting region suddenly plunged Shaoyang Prefecture into crisis. At that time, the county soldiers established by Lu Yuan in Shaoyang Prefecture had to confront the Miao people and even the local fleeing bandits. The responsibilities and pressures they bore were almost indistinguishable from those of the battlefield soldiers. Later, until the establishment of the Changsha State and even before the end of the Northern Expedition, the local county soldiers had to bear responsibilities that were almost the same as those of the battlefield soldiers. At that time, it was reasonable and even justifiable for the county soldiers to receive the same salary as the battlefield soldiers. However, now that the system had changed, the responsibilities of the local and battlefield soldiers were separated and the obligations borne by both were different. Moreover, in all probability, Chu State would no longer use county soldiers as battlefield soldiers in the future. In this case, it would be unreasonable to continue paying them high salaries. That represented the taxes of two or three poor prefectures. So much money used to support a group of weak soldiers ¨C it was heartbreaking even to think about it. So after some consideration, Lu Yuan finally nodded and said, ¡°Alright, you guys can come up with a plan, and I¡¯ll have the Military Department implement gradual reforms.¡± Hearing this, Sun Siwen immediately said, ¡°Your Majesty, rest assured, within half a month at most, I will present a proposal.¡± Lu Yuan waved his hand, ¡°So be it.¡± Distinguishing the salaries of local and battlefield soldiers was a major innovation, no less significant than military reform. It could be foreseen that the county soldiers who had their salaries and benefits reduced would inevitably cause a lot of disturbance, and even perhaps rebellion. But no matter how difficult, no matter how significant the impact, he still had to carry it out. Otherwise, a local security force would receive the same treatment as the battlefield soldiers. The nine Forbidden Army units and 180,000 soldiers under his command, who saw you guys hiding in the rear receiving the same treatment as them, would they not harbor thoughts? Oh, so hiding in the rear and enjoying peace can still get such a high salary. Then why should I risk my life fighting on the front line? This kind of mentality was bound to arise. At this time, with the separation of county and battlefield soldiers happening just over a year ago, both sides that had been carrying the same responsibilities might not yet have any differences. However, as time went on, once the distinctions between the two had emerged, this idea would definitely arise in the minds of the battlefield soldiers. Over time, this would inevitably lead to unrest in the military and unwillingness to fight. Faced with this issue of undermining the foundations of the country, he now had to firmly suppress it at the root since someone had already raised it, and Lu Yuan had also discovered it. After the discussion with the two Prime Ministers, the problem of war-time military expenditure was not solved. Instead, a major problem in the military system of the Chu State was discovered, necessitating another military reform. Under these circumstances, Chu¡¯s troops could not move lightly before the reform was completed and internal stability was achieved. Moreover, with military funding becoming a problem, Lu Yuan completely gave up the idea of sending troops to Da Changhe Country. As for whether to take advantage of the situation to get some benefits, take some advantage, and accept a few vassal states? After some consideration, he eventually decided against it. Well then. In his heart, Lu Yuan still had some thoughts towards Da Changhe Country. At this time, in their country, the court and the rebel army confronted each other, with both sides¡¯ strength and soldiers being almost equal. The situation was even more severe than during the Da Yue rebellion. At least at that time, the Da Yue court had five Grandmasters and six to seven hundred thousand soldiers. Meanwhile, the rebel forces in the local area only had two Grandmasters, four to five hundred thousand soldiers, and at most, one Jinghai Country. The gap in strength between the two sides was quite significant, with Da Yue having an absolute advantage. However, this advantage was not evident in the court of Da Changhe Country today. So the question arises. At the time, the Da Yue court, with its absolute advantage, spent nine years and sacrificed nearly half of its territory to suppress the domestic rebellion and repel the covetous intentions of foreign countries Chapter 524 - Chapter 524: Chapter 254 Internal Reform_2 Chapter 524: Chapter 254 Internal Reform_2 So what price is your Great Changhe willing to pay to resolve a rebellion more powerful than Da Yue, and how long will it take? Even though, I mean, even though. Even if there is no external force involved in this civil strife in Da Changhe, it will take at least four or five years or even more than a decade to put down the rebellion. Moreover, if the stalemate lasts for a long time, it is not impossible for the country to split into two. And if there is external interference, such as Lu Yuan who is now plotting against this country, it will be even more difficult to quell the civil strife in Da Changhe. Therefore, from the various signs at this time, this rebellion doesn¡¯t seem to be able to be resolved quickly no matter how you look at it. Since that¡¯s the case, although Chu State can¡¯t interfere in the internal affairs of the Great Changhe at the moment. But wouldn¡¯t there be a chance after two or three years? Two or three years later, the current military spending reform, which has just begun, will also be completed. The new immigrants of Chu will have settled down and can levy taxes, balancing the fiscal revenue and expenditure. And the five million silver tales provided by Su Country and Southsea can be used as military expenses. At that time, the morale of the army will be stable, expenses will be sufficient, even the controversy over Chu¡¯s renaming and founding a new era would have almost subsided. Under such a large environment, it will naturally be possible to send troops to other countries and start another war. So when the New Year passed, Yuanxiao and even Qingming all passed. Although the envoys of Shizong and Milu countries stayed in Baling City, they were well-fed and well-cared-for in the post house, and Chu would not skimp on their expenses. But amidst the torment of waiting, they were still unable to get a second audience with the King of Chu, nor could they detect any signs of Chu mobilizing their troops. Instead, the situation in various places was becoming more and more stable. Merchants and travelers were coming and going, the people were living in peace and happiness, giving the appearance of enjoying a time of peace and prosperity. Seeing this situation, the envoys of the two countries realized that the King of Chu had no intention of sending troops to Great Changhe. He didn¡¯t even want to accept the two countries as vassals. He simply did not want to invite any trouble. Thus, as the days went by, the envoys of the two countries became increasingly disheartened. By the time May came, news from their homeland arrived, stating that the pressure from Wu Savage Country was too great, and with no news from this side, they could no longer withstand the pressure, and had to give in to the military demands of Wu Savage Country once again. However, after this round of coercion, the people of their country could no longer endure the harsh levies and extortion, leading to a massive exodus. There were even some tribes in the country that had taken up arms and rebelled after seizing control of cities and towns. Now that rebellion had broken out within the country, the government could no longer spare any attention for this mission, and therefore, the two envoys were asked to return home as soon as possible to help. Receiving this bad news, the envoys of the two countries were naturally shocked and subsequently filled with sorrow. However, before leaving, they once again requested an audience with the King of Chu, but as expected, they were asked to wait for news. Facing this unsurprising result, in their sorrow, the two Messengers could only pack their bags and return to their homeland in despair. When Lu Yuan received this news, he simply said ¡°Oh,¡± and did not say much else. In the face of his grand plan, Shizong and Milu, these two small countries, were just insignificant specks of dust, not worth mentioning at all. Their only value was to report the news of Da Changhe¡¯s civil strife to him. However, having said that. Da Changhe is right next to Chu State, and the fact that Chu did not receive any news of its civil strife for so long indicates a negligence in foreign intelligence gathering. This can also be attributed to the isolation of the Yi People and their lack of communication with the outside world, and that they did not pay much attention to these Yi countries. But this still has to be regarded as a dereliction of duty in foreign intelligence gathering. In this regard, Lu Yuan has asked the relevant person in charge of the Honglu Temple to conduct a review and strengthen the intelligence gathering of the southwestern Yi tribes in the future. This matter concerns his future strategy towards the entire southwestern Yi region, so it must be treated with caution. However, this experience made Lu Yuan realize that it was still a bit forced to rely solely on the Honglu Temple, the foreign affairs department, and its diplomats for intelligence work. To gain enough intelligence channels and not be blinded by his subordinates, he needed his own intelligence department. Therefore, in February of Shenwu¡¯s first year, Lu Yuan issued a decree to establish the Imperial City Office in the court, with two departments, North and South. Among them, the South Department of the Imperial City is responsible for domestic intelligence affairs. It has a Commanding Officer of Fourth Rank and two Deputy Commanding Officers of the Seventh Rank. Under the Commanding Officer, there is a military officer in each county, with a Fifth Rank title. There are two Deputy military officers, with a title of From Five Rank. In each prefecture, there is a Commanding Officer with a Seventh Rank title and two Deputy Commanding Officers with a From Seventh Rank title. There is one Major in each county, with a Ninth Rank title. There are two Deputy Majors, with a From Ninth Rank title. Within the South Department, there are also other officers with various titles. All of these are officials. Under the South Department of the Imperial City, there are about 10 to 30 small envoys and deputy envoys with no rank, responsible for intelligence gathering in each county, depending on the size of the county. Similarly, there are 50 to 100 small envoys and deputy envoys in each prefecture, depending on the situation. Each province has between 300 and 1,000 people. The entire South Department of the Imperial City has 500 people in its Capital headquarters, which will be adjusted according to future needs. With such calculations, the newly-established Imperial City South Department, responsible for domestic intelligence affairs, currently has a staff of about 3,000, making it one of the largest agencies in the court overnight. Lastly, there is the Imperial City North Department, responsible for foreign intelligence affairs. Similar to the South Department, the North Department has a Commanding Officer and two Deputy Commanding Officers. Under them, there are also military officers, deputy officers, commanding officers, deputy commanding officers, majors, and deputy majors, all with the same rank as the South Department. Chapter 525 - Chapter 525: Chapter 254: Internal Reform_3 Chapter 525: Chapter 254: Internal Reform_3 However, in terms of responsibilities, command generals and deputy generals manage all external intelligence affairs. Military officers and deputy officers are specifically responsible for large countries like Zhou, Liang, and Ning, or specific regions like Lingnan, Xinan Yi, overseas, etc. Commanders and deputy commanders are in charge of major states within large countries or specific states within regions. As for ambassadors and deputy ambassadors, like lower-ranking officials and assistants, they don¡¯t have specific duties and mainly depend on the arrangements of their superiors. As for the number of personnel and horses under the North Department officials at all levels, they are determined according to the South Department¡¯s needs. However, the North Department of the Imperial City mainly covers the neighboring countries of Chu, like Zhou, Liang, Ning, Lingnan¡¯s two countries and one prefecture, Xichuan, Hanzhong, and various Xinan Yi countries. In total, there are six military officers responsible for six jurisdictions. As a result, the total number of personnel is less than a thousand. In addition, there are 300 people at the headquarters of the North Department. In terms of scale, it is temporarily lower than the South Department. However, as Great Chu becomes more active internationally and communicates more with other countries, the military officers in various jurisdictions will be established, potentially surpassing the South Department in numbers. Of course, all of these figures are still only on paper. The entire Imperial City Department, whether north or south, is a newly established office that only exists on paper and needs to be built from scratch. It would be unthinkable to achieve the aforementioned scale without three to five years, or even ten years. Just like the navy, it is a long-term project. For such an important department, which holds the power to control a country¡¯s ears and eyes, Lu Yuan naturally couldn¡¯t trust outsiders to take charge. Therefore, to appoint the heads of these two departments, he selected two of his named disciples, Qu Su and Yue Quan. These two had decent abilities and were quickly approaching top-level strength, so Lu Yuan granted them the Divine Blood Elixir to help them break through to first-class realm and then promoted them to true disciple status. He then appointed Yue Quan to be in charge of the North Department and Qu Su to be in charge of the South Department, dividing responsibility for domestic and foreign affairs. As for the specific personnel of the Imperial City¡¯s two departments, a portion was filled by Lu Yuan¡¯s named disciples as eyes and ears to monitor the two leaders. Another portion was recruited from experienced officials in local government offices or transferred from scouts and spies in the military. The remaining vacancies were filled with martial artists with the necessary skills from Jianghu, developed into personnel for the Imperial City Department. With this three-pronged approach, the basic framework could be put in place. After making these arrangements, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t pay much attention to this aspect anymore. The seed of the Imperial City Department had been planted, and all it needed now was to take root, germinate, and grow. He didn¡¯t need to interfere too much. However, it must be mentioned that from the command generals down to the lowest-ranking assistants, the salaries of all officials in the Imperial City Department were paid by Lu Yuan¡¯s own funds and did not go through the court¡¯s accounts. In essence, it was severed from the court. In order not to let them be influenced by external factors from court officials, Lu Yuan used his own money to support such an intelligence system, which belonged exclusively to the royal family¡¯s private soldiers. While this approach increased the burden of royal expenses, he who was used to making extra preparations still chose to make this additional expenditure. After all, maintaining both the North and South Imperial City Departments, a total of about five thousand people, and considering various expenses, would only cost about 500,000 silver taels per year. This amount of money was affordable for Lu Yuan. ¡­ After completing these two major tasks of military expenditure reform and setting up the Imperial City Department, Lu Yuan did not do much during the second year of Shenwu. On the contrary, the aftermath of these two major events caused quite a stir at home. Firstly, in the Xichuan Prefecture, local Linjiang Mansion soldiers, composed of the original Xichuan Prefecture militia and the reorganized surrendered soldiers from the Zhou people, were in an uproar upon receiving news that their wages and benefits would be greatly reduced. Some of the rebellious elements even started to lead riots, killing officials and rebelling. However, as soon as these signs of rebellion appeared, they were immediately quelled by the left general and Xichuan Prefecture governor Han Shun, who personally led troops to suppress them, beheading hundreds of rebel soldiers and severely deterring the local area. From now on, the prefectural and county soldiers in various parts of Xichuan Prefecture no longer dared to cause trouble and obediently accepted reality. Similar disturbances occurred in other places such as Xiangyang Prefecture and Dongting Prefecture, but they were all quickly quelled as well. By the end of the year, as the troublemakers in various regions were cleared away, prefectural and county soldiers finally accepted reality, and local areas were completely restored to peace. Then, there was the matter of the imperial court. Regarding Lu Yuan¡¯s establishment of the Imperial City¡¯s North and South Departments, many court officials felt uneasy and vigilant. These self-proclaimed scholars who had read books of sages have always had a deep-seated aversion to the Imperial City Department, which was seen as a watchdog of the court. Thus, feeling a sense of crisis, they continuously submitted appeals to the court to abolish the Imperial City Department, arguing that the Honglu Temple, which specializes in diplomacy, would be sufficient for intelligence gathering. In response to these memorials, Lu Yuan, upon seeing them, naturally ignored them and reprimanded those who spoke too much. For those who remained stubbornly ignorant, he directly dismissed or impeached them. Did they think he would not know what these civil officials had in mind? Isn¡¯t their objective to blind and deafen the king so that they can deceive and reap benefits at will? He had no patience for those who viewed him as a fool. As for the nonsense they said about what a sagely monarch or wise monarch should be like, he sneered at it. He became the king of a country by relying on absolute martial power, being an Inborn Grandmaster, and commanding hundreds of thousands of soldiers. These civil officials were merely servants he had hired to help manage his household. Now, these servants want to rebel, turn over their masters, and bully him, their former master. This could only mean¡­ They really underestimated him as the founding monarch and as an Inborn Grandmaster, thinking he wouldn¡¯t dare to kill people anymore. After dismissing dozens of officials and even punishing more than ten, the establishment of the Imperial City Department finally proceeded. The court, which was initially in an uproar, eventually became silent as all opposition disappeared. However, one thing must be mentioned. Throughout this entire debate on whether to establish the Imperial City Department, the highest representatives of the court¡¯s civil officials, the two chief ministers divided between the left and the right, Cui Changqing and Sun Siwen, never expressed any opinions. They neither supported nor opposed it. Instead, they chose to remain silent. However, this inaction was the greatest support they could give to Lu Yuan. Otherwise, if they both came out in opposition, he wouldn¡¯t know what to do. After all, he couldn¡¯t dismiss or demote his good friend and his close associate Cui Changqing, could he? If they were both gone, where would he find people to replace them? It¡¯s not that easy to find a prime minister who can be trusted and believed in absolutely. However, this stance of the two has also led to much controversy among the literati. They say that the two chief ministers of the country are bowing down to the king, which is truly a disgrace to scholars. The reputations of both Cui and Sun suffered a significant blow after this incident. Chapter 526 - Chapter 526: Chapter 255: The Third Year of Shenwu Chapter 526: Chapter 255: The Third Year of Shenwu The entire second year of Shenwu passed quickly amidst the chaos of local and court affairs. At the end of the year, Lu Yuan received good news. His queen was pregnant again. Yes, after giving birth to the first child and a year of recovery, Lan Cai¡¯er was pregnant again under Lu Yuan¡¯s relentless efforts. He was going to be a father again. Although this news was not as joyful as Lu He¡¯s birth, it was still a happy news worth celebrating. As his queen was pregnant, Lu Yuan, as the king, naturally had to devote some of his energy to her care, and his desire for external expansion diminished even more. So, at the end of the year and the beginning of the next, he spent his time dealing with the aftermath of the two reforms and accompanying Lan Cai¡¯er in her pregnancy. This busy and leisurely life continued until the beginning of the third month of the third year of Shenwu. Shenwu¡¯s third year was destined to be a year of great harvest for Chu State. By this year, the immigration project that started in the ninth year of Hongdao had been completed for three years. More than 2.1 million immigrants from 410,000 households settled in various parts of Great Chu and began paying taxes. After more than three years of recuperation, the three provinces and seventeen prefectures of Great Chu were thriving and prospering under the governance of local officials and ministers. As Sun Siwen previously said, From this year onwards, Great Chu¡¯s revenue and expenditure would be balanced. Even though there was now an additional navy, and an annual expenditure of several hundred thousand or even millions of silver tales, With the military reform of soldiers and local soldiers carried out before, an annual surplus of 1.2 million silver tales could be achieved, which could be used as naval military expenses and barely covered. Not to mention, there was still the five-million-silver-tale aid from Su Country and Nanhai Country. However, Lu Yuan planned to use the five million silver tales for military spending. To invade Da Changhe Country, at least 100,000 troops would be needed, and the annual military expenditure would increase by at least three million silver tales. Without this aid, Chu State definitely could not bear the terrifying cost. For this reason, he had already discussed this matter with the Two Chancellors, and it was decided that the money would be used solely for the military and not diverted to other purposes. Sun Siwen and Cui Changqing both agreed. Both even expressed that they would try their best to save as much money as possible for the military use. What could Lu Yuan say about that? On one side, he was moved by the supports of the Two Chancellors, and on the other side, he became increasingly eager to plan for the invasion of Da Changhe Country. However, this matter could not be rushed for the time being. Firstly, Lu Yuan was not confident that he could lead 100,000 troops to subdue the Great Changhe Country by himself. The opponent was still two Inborn Grandmasters and more than 200,000 troops. It wouldn¡¯t be easy to defeat them. Secondly, Lu Yuan still did not feel at ease with the internal affairs of his country. With him leading 100,000 troops away, the country¡¯s defensive forces would suddenly be emptied by half. Under such circumstances, not only would it be easy for internal turmoil to occur, but it would also invite foreign enemies¡¯ coveting. What if someone took advantage of this vulnerability and invaded Da Changhe Country just as suddenly? That would be disastrous. Don¡¯t doubt it. If Lu Yuan really got stuck in Da Changhe Country and couldn¡¯t disengage, Would you believe it if Ning Country and Zhou Country, who had long hated Lu Yuan to the bone, would immediately send hundreds of thousands of troops for a full-scale invasion? This was absolutely possible. After all, if the positions were reversed, Lu Yuan would definitely be unable to resist the temptation to see a target who had robbed his own territory suddenly expose such a huge weakness. Human hearts, after all, cannot withstand trials. It was for this reason that even though the military budget was now sufficient, Lu Yuan was still hesitant to send troops. The timing was still not ripe. He had to wait. First, he would wait for Da Changhe Country to continue its stalemate and erode its own strength. Second, he would wait for their side to further strengthen its power and for the external environment to improve. And this opportunity came soon enough. In August of that year, during the celebrations of Lan Cai¡¯er giving birth to their second son, Lu Yuan received a letter from the north of the river. Changle Palace. As Lu Yuan read through the letter, his heart was filled with joy and excitement. ¡°Xiaoqing is about to break through Innate.¡± He held the letter, reading Zhou Qing¡¯s greetings and congratulations on having another son. Then he described his recent cultivation insights. According to Zhou Qing, over the years, he had followed his teacher¡¯s instructions and cleansed his Inner Strength daily with the Immortal Spirit energy within the jade pieces. Over time, his spirit had become full and strong, and he felt he was ready to transform it into Martial Dao True Intent. As for his Inner Strength, it had gradually shown signs of transforming from emptiness to solidity, and his Inner Strength field began to take on some external appearance. The changes in his overall condition were now consistent with the various requirements his teacher had described when he was about to break through Innate. Thus, he wrote to his teacher asking whether he should attempt to break through Innate. As a disciple with no experience, he hoped for his teacher¡¯s guidance. All the content in the letter made Lu Yuan extremely surprised and overwhelmed with various emotions. He was happy that his country was going to have another Innate, one of the kind that he could absolutely trust, further strengthening its foundation and power. He was also gratified and melancholic to see the child he had raised for more than a decade finally growing up, and unknowingly on the verge of breaking through Innate, catching up with his own steps. Chapter 527 - Chapter 527: Chapter 255: The Third Year of Shenwu_2 Chapter 527: Chapter 255: The Third Year of Shenwu_2 Yes. Examining closely, from the twenty-fourth year of Longqing¡¯s reign, when the master and the apprentice escaped Dayu County together, it had been exactly seventeen years until the present third year of Shenwu. During these seventeen years, Zhou Qing and he have been master and student in name, but they are like father and son in essence. The most critical period of Zhou Qing¡¯s youth was largely shaped under the tutelage of Lu Yuan. It can be said that he truly watched his apprentice grow up, like a caring father. The deep bond between the two is incomparable to anyone else¡¯s, except for Sun Siwen¡¯s. Even Lan Caier, who has borne him two children, or the eldest son Lu He, or even the newly named second son Lu Hao, they can¡¯t compare to him. The nature of human emotions is indeed unreasonable. Even if you are my flesh and blood, my wife, if you can¡¯t measure up, you simply can¡¯t. Sun Siwen and Zhou Qing were with Lu Yuan from obscurity to prominence, from the valley to the summit. They met in poverty and strived till they gained wealth. Without the assistance of these two, Lu Yuan, let alone dominating three counties and being the king of a region, might still be hiding in some small city or mountainous area, worrying about breaking through the first-class. The things of the world have interwoven with the bond between the three of them. It was for this reason that, after receiving Zhou Qing¡¯s letter, Lu Yuan immediately put aside national affairs and left Lan Caier, who had just given birth. The very next day, he packed his bags and set out on the journey, hurrying to Xiangyang Prefecture alone under the cover of night. The matter of breaking through Innate, as long as all the requirements are met, everything will be a natural course, without too much risk. But even without much risk, there¡¯s still a chance of risk. Moreover, the chances of failure in breaking through Innate are high, and without an experienced person watching closely, Lu Yuan really wouldn¡¯t rest easy. It concerns his disciple¡¯s journey on the Dao and the future of the Chu State. It would be best if he personally oversaw it. ¡­ After a hurried journey of nearly ten days on the road, he finally arrived in Xiangyang City in the middle of August. Once he arrived in the city, Lu Yuan did not rush to see Zhou Qing, but instead observed the city in depth and finally nodded in satisfaction. Xiangyang is indeed a famous city in the world, the capital of a prefecture. As a major city neighboring the Han River, and nourished by the alluvial plain between the Yangtze River and the Han River, the entire Xiangyang Prefecture can be said to be extremely rich. Even though Xiangyang Prefecture is now divided into three, with the most valuable part- the majority of the Jianghan Plain controlled by the Ningguo Dynasty. But relying on the remaining western three prefectures and the provision of Xiangyang Prefceture, coupled with Xiangyang Prefecture¡¯s convenient location on the north-south waterway, this place still maintains tremendous wealth. Just at this moment. The city was crowded with people, shoulder to shoulder, people from all over the world gathered among the city shops, creating an atmosphere of vibrant prosperity. ¡°According to the latest statistics from the court, the capital of Xiangyang Prefecture, which is Xiangyang City, has eight ten thousand households and four hundred thousand people. But looking at the flow of people in the city, this number seems to be underestimated.¡± Lu Yuan was seated in the tavern, looking out at the endless stream of people in the street, feeling very astonished. He wasn¡¯t sure whether these additional people were merchants and travelers from all over the world, or the local officials had hidden the actual count. Considering that both his disciples, Zhou Qing and Zhang You, were in Xiangyang and watching over this, local officials shouldn¡¯t dare to deceive him. It was most likely the former then. There were too many merchants from all over the world doing business in Xiangyang, leading to seemingly larger than normal population counts. And this indicated a positive thing. ¡°It seems that this year¡¯s tariffs and commercial taxes are going to bring in a lot more revenue.¡± With more income for the court, there will be more armies to maintain, and more things to accomplish. Most importantly, with the prosperity of the Chu State, his gathering of Qi Luck will increase even more. The benefits are enormous. Here it is worth mentioning. Starting from the seventh year of Hongdao, when he began cultivating the Taiping Dao Book, over roughly a span of five years, with the Chu State¡¯s continuous expansion and various military and political reforms implemented, the Qi Luck he gathered increased explosively each year. This explosive growth consequently deepened his cultivation. As of now, he had already surpassed the former True Person of Anqiu, progressing rapidly towards the realm of Coalescing Qi into One. Acoording to Lu Yuan¡¯s estimation. His cultivation was still halfway from Coalescing Qi into one, and it would probably take another two or three years. After two or three years, he could reach the realm of the Dao masters of the six major Dao veins, becoming one of the strongest beings in this world. Of course, although he had broken through to the Coalescing Qi into One realm, Lu Yuan was a newcomer, and he probably would not be able to match the Dao masters of the Dao veins for the first couple of years. But that¡¯s fine, with the rapid progress of cultivation using the Taiping Dao Book, pushing himself hard. This gap could be caught up in two or three years, it¡¯s not a big issue. But let¡¯s not talk about these future matters, let¡¯s talk about Lu Yuan¡¯s current cultivation. He estimated that he was comparable to the second level of Innate breakthrough, even among the grandmasters of the second realm of Innate, he could be regarded as a formidable one. At least, if he were to confront the the former Wuan Marquis now, Lu Yuan had no fear, and felt confident that he had a good chance of eliminating his opponent with his own Taoist Techniques. The transformation was stark, compared to the initial trepidation when he first confronted the Wuan Marquis during the Northern Expedition. All these changes were brought about after cultivating the Taiping Dao Book. It is precisely because of this power that Lu Yuan, upon seeing the internal strife in the Great Changhe Country, harbored the ambition of annexing them. Chapter 528 - Chapter 528: Chapter 255 Shenwu Third Year_3 Chapter 528: Chapter 255 Shenwu Third Year_3 Otherwise, in other countries, seeing a country that sits on two provinces, with the same size as oneself, in chaos, they might only think about taking advantage of the situation, trying to seize a few prefectures¡¯ territory. Who would ever come up with such an absurd idea to swallow the other party in one bite? Are they not afraid of overeating? However, as of now. HIs own strength has reached the Second Realm of the Innate, and his apprentice Zhou Qing is also about to break through the Innate level. The high-level combat power of the Chu State has multiplied in an instant. With this level of strength, naturally they can make more plans and get more benefits. Not to mention anything else, Lu Yuan is confident that he can take at least one province from the Da Changhe Country. ¡°At this moment, it depends on when Xiaoqing can break through.¡± Lu Yuan muttered to himself, then raised his wine glass and drank down, leaving a few coins of silver behind, before turning and leaving the restaurant. ¡­ ¡°Disciple pays his respects to Master.¡± In the Governor¡¯s Mansion, Zhou Qing was evidently taken aback when he saw his master suddenly appear before him. But he quickly reacted and hurriedly paid his respects. ¡°Get up.¡± Lu Yuan looked up and down at his disciple, only to see that he indeed possessed a clear aura and an Immortal Spirit permeating his body, just like the impression he himself had given to outsiders in the past ¡ª a true Immortal seed. With just this sign, he was sure that his disciple¡¯s letter was correct, and Xiaoqing was indeed on the verge of breaking through the Innate stage. Upon confirming this, he couldn¡¯t help but feel even more delighted. Moreover, considering the time ¡ª from the end of Hongdao¡¯s seventh year when Lu Yuan bestowed the jade token, until the present day in the third year of Shenwu ¡ª it¡¯s been almost five years. After five years of accumulation, with the help of the Immortal Spirit Qi, reaching the threshold of breaking through the Innate barrier made sense. Not too fast, not too slow. It was in line with his own understanding of Zhou Qing¡¯s innate talent. However, just as he was feeling proud, Zhou Qing was rather puzzled by his sudden visit: ¡°Master, have you urgently come here? Is there something urgent?¡± ¡°Of course there is.¡± Lu Yuan laughed out loud then looked at his disciple with a smiling face: ¡°My own disciple is about to break through the Innate level. How could I, as a Teacher, not come to see it? If my precious apprentice encounters some problems, I will be heartbroken with regret.¡± Upon hearing these words, Zhou Qing finally understood that his master had rushed over for him. Considering the time between sending the letter and his teacher¡¯s arrival ¡ª merely ten days ¡ª he couldn¡¯t help but be even more moved. ¡°Master¡­¡± At this moment, Zhou Qing¡¯s heart was filled with warmth and guilt. ¡°Alright, you are a thirty-year-old man, don¡¯t behave like a young girl.¡± Seeing that his disciple seemed to be moved to tears, Lu Yuan hurriedly waved his hand and changed the subject: ¡°Looking at you, it is indeed time for you to break through the Innate stage. If you have any questions, come and discuss them with your Master. Also, to break through the Innate level, you need to build your own martial dao external form. Have you decided on what kind of extraordinary signs to choose for your external form?¡± Seeing that they were talking business, Zhou Qing had to suppress his emotions, bury them in his heart, and then solemnly answer, ¡°In response to Master, these past few days, your disciple has been¡­ ¡± After that, the room was filled with the master and disciple discussing questions and solving puzzles. Sometimes when they went deep into the subject matter, Zhou Qing and Lu Yuan would even demonstrate on the spot, giving a vivid lesson. This continued until midnight before they reluctantly stopped. ¡°Let¡¯s stop here for today.¡± Lu Yuan halted his speech and then said to his disciple, ¡°Your Master will stay in this city for ten days. During these ten days, I will answer your questions every day. That should be enough for you to find your direction.¡± Zhou Qing bowed down and said, ¡°Disciple thanks Master for his guidance. I am grateful for the effort Master has put in for my sake. I will never forget Master¡¯s kindness in this lifetime.¡± Lu Yuan stepped forward to help him up and said comfortingly, ¡°Alright. You are not only my disciple but also my son. A father¡¯s kindness to his son doesn¡¯t need to be repaid with gratitude. You just focus on your cultivation and break through the Innate level as soon as possible. That would be the best reward for your Master.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Zhou Qing replied, ¡°Disciple will definitely not disappoint Master¡¯s expectations and will break through the Innate level this time.¡± Lu Yuan nodded and then left without saying anything more. In the days that followed, he would visit his disciple every day at noon, and then continue to teach and answer questions until midnight before leaving. He gave the rest of the time for his disciple to digest and ponder. After ten days like this, everything that could be explained had been explained. Zhou Qing gained a lot and already understood what kind of martial dao external form to condense after. Only then did Lu Yuan leave gracefully. Before leaving, he took back the jade token of immortal fate that he had given to Zhou Qing. Now that his disciple¡¯s Inner Strength had been tempered to the extreme under the jade token, it was not of much use to him anymore. The growth of his divine soul had also reached the jade token¡¯s limit of nourishment. As he didn¡¯t focus on cultivation and only focused on martial arts, the jade token wasn¡¯t very useful to him now. Therefore, a few days ago, Zhou Qing took the initiative to return the jade token. Lu Yuan also came up with a new idea after checking the remaining immortal spirit qi in the jade token. ¡°The immortal spirit qi in the jade token had already been consumed in large amounts by Brother Sun¡¯s great-grandfather. After that, both Xiaoqing and I used up a small portion of it. By now, the original immortal spirit qi, which could be enough for one person to cultivate into condensing a strand of qi, is only enough for one and a half people to break through the Innate level.¡± That¡¯s right, the Immortal Spirit Qi in the jade token was now down to the last bit. It was enough for one and a half people to temper their inner strength, to nourish their divine souls, and to break through to the Innate stage. That is to say, Lu Yuan could still cultivate another Innate with the help of this jade token. And the person he had chosen was none other than his eldest son, Lu He. Otherwise, he wouldn¡¯t trust, nor believe in anyone else. Zhou Qing was his prot¨¦g¨¦, and in terms of trust, he even prioritized him over his wife. It made sense for him to help Zhou Qing break through to the Innate level. But when it came to other genuine disciples or even those who were not genuine disciples, Lu Yuan was not as trusting. In these chaotic times, trust was extremely important. Without trust, how could one cultivate and rely on someone? Not to mention the opportunity to break through to the Innate level. As for a two-year-old child breaking through the Innate stage? Of course, it wouldn¡¯t be an immediate breakthrough. With Lan Cai¡¯er as an example, Lu Yuan had complete confidence in cultivating an Innate in their twenties. He just needed to cultivate Lu He carefully for twenty years. Once Lu He grew up, breaking through the Innate level should be no problem. After all, twenty years wasn¡¯t a long time, and it would pass in the blink of an eye. Lu Yuan was willing to wait and had the patience to do so. After all, it¡¯s his own son, and he should be given some preferential treatment. Chapter 529 - Chapter 529: Chapter 256: Inborn Candidates Chapter 529: Chapter 256: Inborn Candidates An entire Inborn quota, Lu Yuan reserved it for his eldest son, Lu He. As for the remaining half, he was somewhat hesitant. Actually, it can be considered a complete quota, though the term half quota is used. Nowadays, the Great Chu dominates three prefectures, spanning thousands of miles. With such expansive territory, collecting Divine Blood Spirit Medicine to help someone break through Innate within it was naturally achievable. However, gathering enough spiritual medicine to cultivate an Inborn Grandmaster was a bit difficult. It would be impossible without exterminating some Jianghu factions and martial arts families. At this time, Lu Yuan¡¯s priorities were to stabilize the country, develop national strength, and gather Qi Luck, so he naturally didn¡¯t want to engage in activities that would disturb local stability and greatly reduce national power. So, even though he knew that by being ruthless, he could bear the cost of a few million deaths and the risk of domestic turmoil for several years, he could cultivate an Inborn expert, he never did it. However, without exterminating the Jianghu factions and martial arts families, and taking all their centuries of accumulated resources together, isn¡¯t possible. But with the prestige of King Chu and the threat of the army¡¯s might, these Jianghu factions and martial arts families would hand over a portion of the Divine Blood Spirit Medicine. He believed that in the face of the survival of their sects and families, many people would make the wise choice. If they still turned a blind eye in the end, then for these insubordinate people, there would be no difference from rebellion. Direct extermination would be absolutely right. Thus by following this strategy, gathering some Divine Blood Spirit Medicine within the country, supplementing the insufficient amount with Immortal Spirit Qi, and then considering the remaining half quota as a full one, it was still possible to cultivate an Inborn Grandmaster. Thus, the future of Great Chu could see the emergence of two more Inborn Grandmasters, which is certain. It¡¯s just that the candidates for these two Inborn Grandmasters made Lu Yuan somewhat troubled. The former had already chosen Lu He, his eldest son, who was of his own flesh and blood and a direct relative; naturally, he would have no problems believing in him. However, the remaining one would be somewhat difficult. For this last quota, Lu Yuan had two people in mind. One was his good friend Sun Siwen, with a simple reason ¨C he could trust this person absolutely. Letting this good friend breakthrough Innate meant that there would be no need to worry about the possibility of betrayal. But choosing Sun Siwen had some drawbacks. This person was older, already over forty years old, and had never practiced martial arts before. Now, allowing him to switch to martial arts, with Lu Yuan¡¯s wholehearted cultivation and huge investment of resources, was not impossible to make up for it and break through Innate. However, whether this friend was willing to switch to martial arts was still a problem. Naturally, Lu Yuan¡¯s intention was for his friend to practice martial arts. In this way, after breaking through Innate, the other party could live up to 150 years old, and they could spend more time together. Otherwise, with his current physical condition as an ordinary person, he might live up to seventy or eighty years at most, and then die of old age on his deathbed. Every time he thought of Sun Siwen¡¯s departure in twenty or thirty years, or thirty or forty years later, Lu Yuan felt a surge of unwillingness and sadness in his heart. So if he could keep his friend by his side for a few more decades, even if it meant using an Innate quota, he was willing to do it. However, this still required the other party¡¯s consent. Apart from Sun Siwen, Lu Yuan¡¯s second preferred candidate was his second son, Lu Hao. The reason was the same as for his eldest son Lu He ¨C as his own legitimate second son, flesh and blood, if you can¡¯t trust your own family, who can you trust? As parents, who wouldn¡¯t want their children to be like dragons, each becoming successful? If both sons could become Inborn experts, not only would it greatly enrich the Chu State¡¯s foundation, but it could also become a beautiful tale in the world. As for this idea, Lu Yuan was naturally moved. ¡°Let¡¯s wait and see. If Brother Sun doesn¡¯t want to practice martial arts, and I can¡¯t persuade him, then this quota will go to Hao¡¯er,¡± Lu Yuan made a decision after deliberating in his heart. ¡­ It was September when he returned to Baling from Xiangyang. Although he had been away for a month, King Chu¡¯s departure from the capital did not attract any attention, and no one even knew about it. When the king had not shown up for a month, everyone assumed he was staying in the royal palace, accompanying his newborn child, and therefore not engaging in state affairs. For this, the ministers had no major objections. After all, there were left and right Prime Ministers in charge of domestic affairs, everything was running smoothly, the local government was well-functioning, and the people were happy. Whether the king was involved or not made no difference. Even if the layman didn¡¯t meddle, the ministers would be happier! Having virtuous ministers in the court is the ideal for these scholars. Interestingly, today¡¯s Chu State had a taste of this idea. The king didn¡¯t handle affairs of state, only focusing on military affairs, and all domestic matters were handled by the civil officials. Isn¡¯t this a virtuous court? However, on the other hand, the king spent time in the harem, giving birth to more heirs, which would provide more successors for the increasingly expanding Chu State, thus stabilizing the foundation of the country. The ministers had no reason to admonish, and on the contrary, should give more support. As a result, no one knew about Lu Yuan¡¯s departure, and even the news of Zhou Qing breaking through Inborn was tightly sealed. Except for him and Zhou Qing, no one else knew about it. The reason was simple. He was afraid that others would know and target Zhou Qing. With two Inborn experts in the Chu State, the neighboring countries were already quite wary and apprehensive. If one more Inborn expert emerged, could the Chu State still be governed? If not, how would the Zhou Country regain its Xiangyang Prefecture, and how would the Ning Country regain its Dongting and Xichuan Prefectures? Chapter 530 - Chapter 530: Chapter 256: Inborn Candidates_2 Chapter 530: Chapter 256: Inborn Candidates_2 Even Liang Country might be coveting the northern territory of Chu State at this moment, and after hearing the news that Zhou Qing is about to break through Innate, can they guarantee that they won¡¯t take any little action? It is for these various concerns that, before Zhou Qing breaks through Innate and consolidates his realm, this news must not be leaked out. Fortunately, Zhou Qing has now met all the conditions and, with the guidance of his teacher, Lu Yuan, has found the direction to build his martial arts external body. So, in the time to come, he will create his martial arts external body and then use his own divine soul to become the true meaning, completely evolving the Outer World. And this process took Lu Yuan almost more than a year. Zhou Qing¡¯s talent is not inferior to him, even stronger in some aspects; perhaps one year is enough. That is to say, At most by this time next year, which is the end of the fourth year of Shenwu, Zhou Qing should be able to break through Innate. ¡°By that time, there will be one more Innate in the country. Xiaoqing will sit in the north of the river, enough to resist foreign enemies. The Queen will sit in Baling in the south of the river, enough to stabilize the local area. At that time, I can free up my hands, lead a hundred thousand troops eastward, and don¡¯t have to worry about the rear anymore.¡± It has to be said that Zhou Qing¡¯s breakthrough Innate is the best news Lu Yuan has received in recent years. His breakthrough has completely solved the dilemma of the lack of top-level combat power in the Chu State, allowing for one more Innate Grandmaster who can expand outward. Moreover, with one more Innate Grandmaster in Chu State, it is not only the enhancement of the top-level combat power but also the improvement of national strength. In the eyes of other countries, even the status of Chu State will be raised along with it. After all, one or two Innates can still be considered as a fluke. But the emergence of the third Innate means that Chu State has a complete system, capable of steadily cultivating new Innates. A nation that can continuously cultivate Innates means that its inheritance is orderly, and today¡¯s glory of Chu State is not a fleeting moment that will completely dissipate with the death of Lu Yuan and Lan Cai¡¯er. The implications here are completely different. Not only will it make Zhou Country pay more attention to Chu State, but it will also make the ministers and people in Chu State more united. ¡°In short, without accident, when Xiaoqing breaks through Innate and the news is spread, I should be able to harvest another wave of Qi Luck.¡± As Lu Yuan thought of this, he couldn¡¯t help but reveal a smile on his face. This third year of Shenwu is indeed a bumper harvest year. After several years of cultivation, the various seeds he had sown in the past have successively borne fruit. Immigrant relocation, balanced revenue and expenditure, military reform, Zhou Qing Innate, one after another good news, continuously passed over. Even the Royal City Division there, after a year of establishment and supplementation, has almost enough recruits and started work at home and abroad. Once their recruited spies at all levels are placed in local and foreign countries, Lu Yuan will change his previous information bottleneck and can easily know the world¡¯s affairs. The benefits and help that this can bring are not small. It is quite significant. ¡­ After briefly inquiring about what had happened since he had left and spending some time with his wife and children, On the last day of September, taking advantage of the gap when Sun Siwen came to report to him, Lu Yuan finally spoke the words he had been wanting to say to his good friend. ¡°The king wants me to practice martial arts?¡± To be honest, when Sun Siwen heard this suggestion, he was a bit baffled. ¡°Yes, Brother Sun, I want you to start practicing martial arts from now on.¡± At this point, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t call the other party Sun Qing anymore, but completely abandoned the identity of monarch and ministers, and only tried to persuade him as a good friend. Seeing this kind of address and sincere tone, Sun Siwen also felt the sincerity and weight of it, so he changed his tone and asked in the attitude of a friend: ¡°Why does Brother Lu have such an idea?¡± Lu Yuan directly said, ¡°Brother Sun should also know that if a martial artist can break through Innate, he can live to be one hundred and fifty years old. Now I am already an Inborn, and even last month Xiaoqing has sent news that he is about to break through Innate. You and Xiaoqing are both the most trustworthy people in my life, even far beyond my wife and children. But while Xiaoqing can accompany me for another hundred years, you, Brother Sun, are just a mere mortal, and even if you are in good health, you can live for only forty or fifty years at most. To see a good friend leave the world before me, while I can only live alone in the world. The pain of this time, although Sun never experienced it, but your friendship and sympathy should be able to experience it, right?¡± As Lu Yuan said this, he couldn¡¯t help but look at Sun Siwen. He believed that he could not bear to see his good friend leave the world before him, and this good friend must not be able to see himself leave the world before him. This kind of emotion is mutual. When Sun Siwen heard these words, he thought carefully, and finally couldn¡¯t help but slowly nod his head, showing a hint of desolation on his face. Obviously, he could feel the sadness of this situation. And he also thought about the regret and unwillingness of leaving the world so much earlier than his good friend. Nevertheless, in the face of Lu Yuan¡¯s earnest gaze, Sun Siwen still shook his head and said, ¡°Now I am already forty-two years old, approaching half a hundred, and I am already halfway into the soil. Although I have never practiced martial arts, I also know that the best age to practice martial arts is the same as for studying, starting after six years old. Now I am old enough to be a grandfather, and at this point, I am practicing martial arts like my grandchildren. How can I succeed?¡± Chapter 531 - Chapter 531: Chapter 256: Inborn Candidates_3 Chapter 531: Chapter 256: Inborn Candidates_3 Moreover, my arms and legs are old now, let alone practicing martial arts, I¡¯m afraid even lifting a sword might break my bones. Under such circumstances, how can I practice martial arts?¡± Although Sun Siwen was deeply moved by Lu Yuan¡¯s words, he still had many concerns in his heart. Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan hurriedly said, ¡°Age is not a problem. Our Chu State is vast, and we have everything. Brother Sun, if you are willing to practice martial arts, I can collect divine medicines from all over the world and personally cleanse your marrow and rebuild your foundation. It¡¯s okay if it takes a bit longer. Brother Sun has been studying the classics for many years, and his mindset is well-cultivated. All you need to do is to put some effort into studying the Buddhist and Taoist classics, and understand the principles of martial arts, and your mindset would not be much different from those top martial artists in the Jianghu. With all sorts of divine medicines at hand, after taking them for at most three to five years, Brother Sun will become a top martial artist in Jianghu. By then, I will continue to nourish you with divine medicines, and if Brother Sun studies the Taoist classics more, you can further elevate your mindset. Breaking through the Innate realm within ten years and living for a hundred and fifty years is not an empty promise.¡± Since Lu Yuan was prepared to have Sun Siwen switch to practicing martial arts and break through the Innate realm, he naturally had his considerations and planning. First of all, although Sun Siwen was a disciple of Confucianism and read the classics with little regard for Buddhism and Taoism, he, like Buddhists and Daoists, also followed the idea of self-cultivation and nurturing his nature. If we were to discuss the mental cultivation, Sun Siwen¡¯s experience of more than thirty years of reading and twenty years in office, his realm might not be inferior to that of high monks and immortals. Therefore, as long as Sun Siwen switches to practicing martial arts, with his mental state, all he needs is some time to adapt, and he would be able to handle the surge of Inner Strength within him. What he lacks is a deep understanding of the Taoist classics. He may encounter some difficulties while practicing martial arts and needs to learn more knowledge in this aspect. But this is not a problem either. With Lu Yuan, the Inborn Grandmaster, as long as he teaches earnestly, and Sun Siwen learns diligently, his progress in martial arts under the guidance of a Grandmaster would be swift, wouldn¡¯t it? There have always been only two factors limiting martial artists from breaking through: Inner Strength and their realm. Now that there are divine medicines to fill the gap of Inner Strength, and Sun Siwen already possesses the realm, all he needs is a slight shift in mentality, merging the original Confucian thoughts with Taoist ones. Adapting for a couple of years should be enough. From this perspective, if everything goes smoothly, breaking through Innate within ten years is indeed not an empty promise. In this way, not only will Great Chu gain another Innate expert in ten years, but Sun Siwen can also live for several more decades, accompanying Lu Yuan for another hundred years. It¡¯s a perfect combination of both gifts, how wonderful! However, despite having various arrangements prepared, including detailed plans for Sun Siwen¡¯s transition from practising martial arts to breaking through Innate, he still hesitates about Lu Yuan¡¯s considerate care: ¡°The divine medicine for breaking through Innate is so precious. Brother Lu, wouldn¡¯t it be a waste to give it to me? With these divine medicines at hand, they can be used for other people. For example, Brother Lu¡¯s disciples, Chu Wei and Li Liang, they are already top-tier experts. If they use these divine medicines, wouldn¡¯t it help them break through to the Innate? By then, Great Chu will have two more skilled and combative Innate experts. Wouldn¡¯t this be better than having me, a scholar, as an Innate?¡± At this point, although his heart was somewhat tempted by the idea of breaking through the Innate realm and living for a few more decades, Sun Siwen¡¯s character still made him prioritize the overall situation and think about the state affairs. Seeing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel both annoyed and amused, so he said: ¡°How can the resources consumed by breaking through the realm of top-tier martial artists and breaking through the Innate realm be compared? To cultivate an Inborn Grandmaster, the resources consumed would be enough to train a dozen, or even dozens, of top-tier experts. My resources are indeed only enough to cultivate one Innate realm expert. Even if they were used on Li Liang and Chu Wei, they could only help one of them break through. Moreover, although these two are my disciples and obedient in the daily life, human hearts are unpredictable, and I cannot fully trust them. On the other hand, Brother Sun, you and Xiaoqing are the most trustworthy people to me. If you break through the Innate realm, I have no worry about you betraying me. Would Brother Sun betray me?¡± Lu Yuan looked at Sun Siwen, who immediately shook his head: ¡°Absolutely not possible. Even if someone threatened the life of my whole family, I would never betray Brother Lu.¡± ¡°Isn¡¯t that so?¡± Lu Yuan smiled upon hearing this: ¡°You and I have been supporting and understanding each other all the way to this day. I am responsible for fighting foreign enemies, and you assist me in stabilizing the rear. It is precisely because of your support that Great Chu has come to this point today. Don¡¯t you, Brother Sun, want to see what Great Chu will be like a hundred years from now? With you and Xiaoqing being Innate experts, the foundation and strength of our Great Chu would certainly not be limited to today¡¯s territory. After decades or even a hundred years, we may unify Jiangnan, dominate Yangzhou, and restore the former glory of Da Yue. That is not impossible, is it? But all of this requires time to wait. Doesn¡¯t Brother Sun want to live until that day, witness the scene with his own eyes, or even personally accomplish it? As long as Brother Sun is willing to practice martial arts, you can witness and accomplish it.¡± Living until a hundred years later, seeing Great Chu unify Jiangnan and recreate the glory of the past Da Yue within the Great Chu Country with his own eyes, Lu Yuan¡¯s grand aspiration undoubtedly struck a chord in Sun Siwen¡¯s heart. As a scholar, cultivating oneself, managing one¡¯s household, governing the state, and bringing peace to the world are undoubtedly the highest ideals in life. And now, Sun Siwen has long achieved self-cultivation and managing his household. In terms of governing the state, Chu Country is thriving under his and Cui Changqing¡¯s administration. Yet, in terms of bringing peace to the world, it still seems to be a far-off dream. Of course, this peaceful world does not refer to unifying the entire Nine Provinces. That is the achievement of the ancient Three Emperors, which only exists in myths, never seen anyone accomplished it in later generations. However, if we talk about bringing peace to Yangzhou, there is much that can be done. All that is needed is to restore Da Yue¡¯s prosperity. Therefore, this last life ideal, with great hope, is right in front of Sun Siwen¡¯s eyes. Before this grand ideal, Sun Siwen no longer was insistent. Instead, he slowly nodded his head and said, ¡°If Brother Lu truly wishes and doesn¡¯t mind me trying, I am willing to give it a shot. I¡¯ll do my best for the future of Great Chu.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan immediately smiled and said, ¡°Then it is settled.¡± Then, extending his hand, Sun Siwen did the same. They clapped each other¡¯s hands and laughed heartily. Time seemed to go back to more than ten years ago. At that time in Yangmei Town, the two of them hit it off, shared the same interests, talked about everything, and expressed their heartfelt thoughts. There was no monarch and minister, no hierarchy, no ranks, only pure friendship. How worry-free it was! For a moment, as they looked at each other, both felt somewhat bewildered. Chapter 532 - Chapter 532: Chapter 257: The Perplexity of the Dan Ding Chapter 532: Chapter 257: The Perplexity of the Dan Ding Sun Siwen agreed to practice martial arts, so the next steps became much simpler. Lu Yuan began to tailor a Cleansing Marrow plan according to his body, and then started to implement it. Because his best friend had never practiced martial arts and was indeed old in age, it wasn¡¯t realistic to forcefully infuse him with Inner Strength like in the novels, directly expelling all impurities from his body. It could be done, but it¡¯s highly likely that the impurities within his friend¡¯s body wouldn¡¯t be expelled yet, and he would start to transform, being unable to endure the infusion and dying from his body exploding. Therefore, after understanding these situations, Lu Yuan had no choice but to take it one step at a time. First, remove some of the impurities and toxins from the body, improve part of the physical condition, and remove some more after the body adapts to it. After repeating this cycle five or six times and spending about a month, the Cleansing Marrow would be almost successful. As for practicing martial arts, he could first start with some basic techniques and practice feeling them. There was no need to rush to take Divine Medicine and hastily increase Inner Strength. Before increasing Cultivation, it¡¯s more important to let this friend read some Daoist classics first and understand the truths and falsehoods in practicing martial arts, and the various uses of meditation. Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t rest assured letting Sun Siwen hastily advance in his realm without fully understanding these things. Even if he was mentally strong enough, not comprehending this path still carried the risk of failing to control his Inner Strength, causing his body to explode and die. So for the first two years of martial arts training, Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t let Sun Siwen take Divine Medicine ¡ª this was his foundation-building period. Without a solid foundation, forget about building a tower ten thousand feet tall and leaping to the realm of Inborn. However, even so, while busy with Cleansing Marrow and adapting to martial arts practice, Sun Siwen also had to find time to study Daoist classics. With all these schedules arranged, Sun Siwen, who was originally burdened with a large number of affairs in the country, had even less time. After only two or three days, his friend came to Lu Yuan with dark circles under his eyes and a tired face to complain of his hardships. Having no choice, Lu Yuan had Sun Siwen transfer a large number of affairs to Cui Changqing, letting the Left Prime Minister handle them. However, as a result, Cui Changqing became the de facto Prime Minister, solely controlling the national affairs and ranking just below one person and above ten thousand others. Fortunately, Cui Changqing had no sons of his own and only had Sun Siwen as a son-in-law. At the same time, he was an upright man with a close friendship and trust with Lu Yuan. Entrusting him with such extensive power, there was no need to worry about him harboring any other thoughts. Moreover, after hearing that his son-in-law was practicing martial arts and being cultivated as a future Inborn Grandmaster, Cui Changqing, who understood the importance of this, couldn¡¯t help but raise both his hands and feet in agreement. That¡¯s an Inborn Grandmaster! Looking at the revered status of the Inborn Grandmasters in Yue Country and their final outcomes, five of them became monarchs of a country, one usurped the throne and became the Heavenly Son, and the others were all awarded the title of Martial Marquis, commanding great power in their territories. Frankly, regarding power and glory, Inborn Grandmasters really have the upper hand over pure literati Prime Ministers. If his son-in-law could become an Inborn Grandmaster while remaining a learned scholar, perhaps a golden age for the literati in Great Chu may truly arrive, given Cui Changqing¡¯s understanding of his son-in-law. Besides, having one more Inborn Grandmaster in Chu State would be a great thing for solidifying the foundation and enhancing the strength of the country. With so many benefits, what did it matter if he himself had to suffer and endure some hardships? It was all worth it as long as his son-in-law could become even better and Great Chu could become even stronger. Cui Changqing, who was nearly sixty years old, had a very clear understanding of this matter. He was fully prepared to burn his last bit of old bones. However, although Cui Changqing was prepared, the court was still caught off guard by the sudden withdrawal of the original Right Prime Minister. If it wasn¡¯t for the fact that Sun Siwen still held the Right Prime Minister¡¯s position, frequently entered the Royal Palace, and met with the Heavenly Son, and that his father-in-law still held the position of Left Prime Minister with power still in their family¡¯s hands, everyone in the court would have thought that Sun Siwen had offended the Heavenly Son and was thus neglected, right? Yet even so, although the officials knew that Sun Siwen still enjoyed the Heavenly Son¡¯s favor and remained in his heart, it was inevitable that all sorts of rumors and controversies stirred up a great deal of unrest both inside and outside the court. Fortunately, Sun Siwen had a methodical approach to handing over his various duties, and Cui Changqing, a veteran who had weathered many changes in the court, took over quite skillfully; hence, no chaos arose in the administration. Combined with Lu Yuan¡¯s continued favor, the storm finally subsided gradually. On the other hand, Lan Cai¡¯er was somewhat discontented with her husband¡¯s daily togetherness with another man, neglecting her. However, this displeasure vanished instantly after Lu Yuan disclosed his plans for their eldest son, Lu He. This was the guaranteed Shortcut to Heaven for becoming an Inborn Grandmaster! Being an Inborn Grandmaster herself, Lan Cai¡¯er naturally knew how precious this opportunity was. Back then, she had exhausted the accumulation of the Five Poisons Sect for a thousand years and carried the aspirations of a million Miao People to finally breakthrough to the Inborn realm. Even Li Xiong had consumed the entire Qiang Tribe and slaughtered his way through Xichuan, sacrificing a whole tribe and a whole county, with millions of people dying before he broke through the Inborn realm. Chapter 533 - Chapter 533: Chapter 257: The Perplexity of the Dan Ding_2 Chapter 533: Chapter 257: The Perplexity of the Dan Ding_2 Two examples lay before their eyes, nobody understood the difficulties better than Lan Cai¡¯er, the one who had personally experienced them. Thus, even though the state of Chu was prospering now, its power growing stronger by the day, her heart had always harbored a latent concern. That was, a hundred years later, when she and Lu Yuan passed away, if there were no succeeding Innates in Chu, what would they do? Wouldn¡¯t their children fall into the same awkward situation as the current Nanhai Country, facing the risk of annihilation at any time? Thinking of such terrifying possibilities, Lan Cai¡¯er would always lose sleep. Now everything was fine. It turned out that her husband already had arrangements, a legendary Immortal Fate chance, capable of helping someone break through to Innate. No wonder! No wonder! ¡®I had always wondered how my husband had broken through to Innate. Turns out the roots lay here, with an Immortal Fate, breaking through Innate naturally became an effortless task.¡¯ With these thoughts in mind, Lan Cai¡¯er looked at her husband and showed a sweet smile: ¡°Since the king has already made arrangements, then, your concubine will obey. However, He¡¯er is our eldest son, so king, please take more care of him as well.¡± The reason she said this was mainly that Lan Cai¡¯er noticed her husband seemed to value Sun Siwen far more than necessary. It even felt as if he valued Sun Siwen more than her and their child. Although she could understand their relationship, Sun Siwen and her husband had met in their humble beginnings, emerging from a small town together early on, their friendship was extraordinary. Later, after raising an army, they supported each other and jointly created their enormous Chu Country. However, even so, one should not ignore their own wife and child in favor of an outsider. After all, who were supposed to be his true family? Thinking of this, Lan Cai¡¯er felt aggrieved and somewhat jealous. ¡°Your Majesty can rest assured, He¡¯er is my eldest son and the successor of Great Chu. I will certainly carefully nurture him,¡± Lu Yuan noticed the grievances of his queen and couldn¡¯t help but hold her, comforting her gently. In reality, he had long since planned for his eldest son¡¯s nurturing, as previously mentioned. Even if he intended to nurture Sun Siwen, he would only consume half of the Immortal Spirit Qi, and the remaining needed would be slowly supplemented by the Divine Blood Spirit Medicine collected from within the country. About this point, over the past two months, Lu Yuan had already issued orders to various regions, asking local officials to find the martial arts families and sects of martial artists and demand that they hand over part of the stored Divine Blood Spirit Medicine from their families. However, it was still too early, and at the same time, those sects and aristocratic families were finding excuses to delay matters, so there had been no progress for the time being. In response, Lu Yuan had already decided to kill a group of people in order to intimidate the local martial artists of Jianghu. Let them understand who was the real sky of Great Chu. Once a group of chickens had been killed as a warning, the remaining monkeys should be well-behaved. Therefore, the hope that Sun Siwen would break through Innate still depended on the local Jianghu sects and aristocratic families. Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s share of Immortal Spirit Qi had not been touched by Lu Yuan at all. Although the feelings of trust in his wife and son were not yet as deep as those for Sun Siwen and Zhou Qing, he had not neglected any treatment he should have given them. This principle was quite strong. Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s worries were merely being overly concerned. However, alas, although he had not neglected his duties, his heart still favored Sun Siwen and Zhou Qing more than his wife and child. So, when he saw Lan Cai¡¯er dissatisfied, Lu Yuan had nothing to say but to comfort her all the more, and make up for it later that night. ¡­ Just as Chu was secretly preparing to cultivate two Innates, far away in Liang Country, on Mount Dan Ding, they were also especially concerned about the situation in Chu. Let¡¯s go back to the end of the seventh year of Hongdao. At that time, True Person Anqiu took the assistance of Dan Ding Path, painstakingly traveled thousands of miles, and finally delivered it to Dongting County. Then under his constant urging, he finally had Lu Yuan go and worship the Heavenly Pillar and begin to cultivate the Taiping Dao Book. Seeing everything settled, the Innate experiment that their sect had been searching for hundreds of years was finally found. True Person Anqiu was satisfied and, after being driven away by Lu Yuan¡¯s impatience, ran back to Liang Country happily. Then he waited and waited. From the seventh year of Hongdao, he waited until the eighth year, and then from the eighth year to the ninth year. Even as Great Yue perished and Ning Country was established, the original Changsha Country had also become the current Chu Country, which had reached the third year of Shenwu. These five years had passed, and they still hadn¡¯t received any news about Lu Yuan¡¯s reactions after cultivating the Taiping Dao Book, as everyone from Dan Ding Path had been expecting. According to the experiment data of the past hundreds of years, the Dan Ding Path¡¯s people had originally estimated that an Inborn Grandmaster who had cultivated the Taiping Dao Book would suffer backlash and die from Life Exhaustion and Death, within two to three years at most, if they could not break through. Now that five years had passed, it had long exceeded the timeline by two times the estimated duration. But Lu Yuan was still alive and well. In the first year of Shenwu, at the time when they had estimated the limit of his lifespan, he was still leading his army, confronting Ning Country. Facing an army of thousands, he didn¡¯t give way. Their demeanor didn¡¯t look like they were tormented by their cultivation method, or that their lifespan was nearing its end. From this perspective, could it be concluded that the King of Chu had already broken through his realm, achieving the cultivation of condensing Qi? Only then could he have a higher resistance to the cultivation method, have more lifespan to resist the side effects of the cultivation method, and still be alive and well until now. Chapter 534 - Chapter 534: Chapter 257: The Perplexity of the Dan Ding_3 Chapter 534: Chapter 257: The Perplexity of the Dan Ding_3 What? Could it be possible that Lu Yuan didn¡¯t cultivate the Taiping Dao Book? Are you kidding me? After True Person Anqiu returned to the mountain gate, he swore on his life in front of the Dao master and sect members, assuring them that he had personally witnessed Lu Yuan worship the Heavenly Pillars. Furthermore, Lu Yuan participated in the Northern Expedition afterwards, and within a matter of one or two months, he defeated two innate cultivators of Zhou Country, dominating the field with unparalleled might. This achievement and this strength, do you think they could be accomplished by a newly promoted Grandmaster who just broke through the Innate realm a year ago? What, do you really think that the King of Chu, like in the folk tales, is a heavenly star incarnate, born divine, and blessed by thousands of Immortals? That killing one or two grand generals of Zhou Country is a breeze, an effortless task? This kind of reasoning might fool those lowly ignorant people; some naive children might even believe it. But if you expect to fool us genuine cultivators with this, you¡¯d be treating us like fools. So, Lu Yuan¡¯s killing of Gui Lianyun and Zhang Chanyi probably wasn¡¯t due to his martial strength but likely due to his application of Dao Law. He probably surprised them with Immortal Techniques and killed the two innates off guard. This theory is the inference made by all cultivators on the Dan Ding Path after a comprehensive analysis of various information. Some information subsequently received from Zhou Country also undeniably confirmed this. Although Zhou Country kept a tight lid on it and hardly leaked any information. But with the network of contacts that the Dan Ding Path had cultivated over thousands of years, they managed to transport vast amounts of supplies across countries to Dongting County for Lu Yuan. Therefore, under deliberate efforts, it wouldn¡¯t be difficult to extract some news from the courts of Zhou Country. Thus, the news that Lu Yuan caught He Basheng off guard with Immortal Techniques and forced him to retreat, quickly reached the cultivators of the Dan Ding Path. Only upon receiving this news did the cultivators of the Dan Ding Path relax, not having to worry about Lu Yuan deceiving them in the end. However, even if they could relax, a new question came up. If their conjectures were correct, then Lu Yuan, after the Northern Expedition, must have advanced to the cultivational level of the Air Condensation Stage to be alive till now. But how long can he last on the Air Condensation Stage while cultivating the Taiping Dao Book, that became a problem. Since there had never been a precedent before, even though they had data from past generations, and resorting to some of the best experimental subjects, they could only calculate the lifespan of a typical innate grandmaster. However, they didn¡¯t have any specific data for a condition comparable to the third level realm of Innate Grandmaster in Immortal Method, the Air Condensation Stage. Eventually, they could only estimate, affirming that reaching the level of the Immortal Method Air Condensation Stage would increase resistance to the method of the Taiping Dao Book, and significantly reduce lifespan consumption. But due to the excessive consumption of lifespan before, even if he were to reach the Air Condensation Stage, extending his lifespan by another fifty years would not last him long. Two to three years would be the limit. Therefore, after reaching this conclusion, the people of the Dan Ding Path continued to send out a large number of spies to the Chu kingdom to probe all kinds of information about Lu Yuan. To collect enough information as data samples for storage. On the other hand, they just waited patiently in Liang Country. But this wait lasted for three more years. It lasted until Lu Yuan had two sons, and all signs indicated that this King of Chu seemed interested in the now chaotic neighboring Great Changhe kingdom, considering a military expedition. Upon hearing this news, the people of the Dan Ding Path couldn¡¯t help but be astounded. Because everyone knew that a person on his deathbed, not likely to live more than two years, wouldn¡¯t have the energy to fuss over such things. You can see what Yan Wangqiu and Nanhai Country are going through and have an idea. In recent years, as his body continued to age and death neared, Yan Wangqiu grew weaker by the day. It was heard that over the last half year, he rarely even attended the morning meetings. Even the new wives he married in recent years, unsatisfied and also planning for their own future, ended up colluding with Yan Wangqiu¡¯s two sons, causing a huge scandal and becoming a laughingstock. Upon hearing the news, Yan Wangqiu, in a fit of rage, ordered the execution of that wife, confined his two sons to the house, and killed a bunch of people in the country who had been gossiping, finally silencing the rumors. But despite this, the old ruler was so infuriated, he spat blood, lay in bed for a month, unable to recover his breath. With his absence, the country¡¯s affairs started to fall into chaos. It¡¯s foreseeable that once Yan Wangqiu dies, a great turmoil in Nanhai Country will be inevitable. But the disgrace of Nanhai Country doesn¡¯t concern the Dan Ding Path, they simply don¡¯t have the time to worry about it. The only reason to bring up Nanhai Country now is because it serves as a living example, clearly showing them what a dying ruler¡¯s kingdom should look like. A kingdom clouded by a gloomy atmosphere, chaotic and disorderly. This is what a country looks like when the ruler is on his deathbed. But the current state of the Chu kingdom clearly doesn¡¯t fit this description. Not only has Lu Yuan not fallen ill and confined to his bed, but he¡¯s also entertaining the thought of conquering a great kingdom. What does this mean? It means that he has full confidence in his lifespan. He believes that he has several years, even a decade, to conquer the Great Changhe kingdom. At the same time, he¡¯s confident that after his death, the vast territories he acquired could be maintained. These two points combined, sent the people of Dan Ding Path into a state of apprehension. They began to question whether Lu Yuan really cultivated the Taiping Dao Book? If he did cultivate it, how could he live for so long? Could it be that there¡¯s another way to resist the side effects, something undiscovered by the Dan Ding Path? If such a method exists, could the Dan Ding Path apply it, thus completely eliminating the concern for their sect¡¯s continuity? There are too many doubts lingering in their hearts. It¡¯s like having an itch that they just can¡¯t scratch. Chapter 535 - Chapter 535: Chapter 258: Rebellion in the Su Kingdom (Please subscribe!) Chapter 535: Chapter 258: Rebellion in the Su Kingdom (Please subscribe!) They had always wanted an answer in their hearts, but they were somewhat afraid to directly ask the Dan Ding Dao. Because according to the original inference, at this point, Lu Yuan should have already achieved the cultivation of condensing Qi, and in terms of strength, he was already no weaker than their own Dao master, and might even be stronger. Moreover, he was a monarch of a country, holding hundreds of thousands of heroic soldiers, and also having an Inborn wife. With all these factors combined, even the Dan Ding Dao could not ignore them. They even had to treat him as an equal existence to themselves. So, frankly, the Dan Ding Dao was somewhat afraid to directly inquire about Lu Yuan¡¯s situation. Otherwise, if the other party really had only a few good years left and then became desperate, thinking that all the current situation was caused by the Dan Ding Dao. Then, they would come and kill them, wanting to drag those who caused them to die so early to their deaths as well. In that case, there would be nowhere to cry to. This was entirely possible. Don¡¯t underestimate what crazy things a dying person might do. When people are really desperate, with not many good days left, what else do they have to care about? Especially heroic figures. Their own lives are more important than anything else. In their eyes, apart from themselves, everything else such as foundation, family, reputation, etc. can be sacrificed. Because if the foundation is lost, it can be rebuilt. If their family is lost, they can find another. If their reputation is lost, someone will vindicate them after they have achieved greatness in the future. So, in the end, the most important thing is still one¡¯s own life. Though the Dan Ding Dao was nearing ten thousand years of legacy, the records passed down within the sect contained many accounts of such events, so naturally, they had their guard up. However, the Taiping Dao Book was really too important, relating to the future inheritance of the Dan Ding Dao, hence, even with many concerns and fears, they still had to make a trip to Lu Yuan¡¯s side. But going directly there would be too abrupt, and their intentions too obvious. Both sides have had transactions before, and both understand the situation involving the Taiping Dao Book. At this moment, if the Dan Ding Dao were to send someone, wouldn¡¯t it be just to see when Lu Yuan would die? Thus, it can be foreseen that Lu Yuan would definitely be unwelcoming to the Dan Ding Dao¡¯s visit. Moreover, the transactions between both parties had already ended, and at this point, neither owed the other anything, so there was actually no reason for them to visit Lu Yuan. Especially after Lu Yuan had previously made it clear that he was unwelcoming. As a result, after much deliberation, Lin Qingxuan, the Dao master of the Dan Ding Dao, made the final decision to send Anqiu True Person, a visit on the pretext of visiting an old friend. Of course, he knew very well that there was no bond between Anqiu and Lu Yuan, and this was just an excuse. The key lay in the gifts that Anqiu True Person brought when visiting. Tens of millions of silver tales. Weren¡¯t you, the Chu State, planning on attacking Da Changhe Country? The Dan Ding Dao, which had always been watching Lu Yuan¡¯s actions with spies, were naturally very clear about Chu State¡¯s intentions. Thus, they knew that although the Chu State was recovering well now, its treasury was empty after years of war. In recent years, they also undertook a large-scale immigration project, supporting over two hundred thousand soldiers in the country and now even training a navy. Which of these things didn¡¯t cost a lot of silver tales? And with the territory of Chu State, just three counties and seventeen prefectures, could they really cope with these huge expenses? Thus, the Dan Ding Dao determined that Chu State must be short of money now. Otherwise, Da Changhe Country had been in chaos for two years, and it was so close to Chu State that it would be very convenient to attack. But why hadn¡¯t Lu Yuan taken any action so far? Based on the information obtained from various details, Lin Qingxuan inferred that they must be lacking money. Warfare is very costly. Didn¡¯t the Art of War mention it? Ten thousand war chariots, a thousand chariots of hay and cloth, a hundred thousand armored soldiers, a thousand miles of supply lines: then, at a daily cost of a thousand taels of gold, the internal and external expenses, the cost of hosting guests, glue and lacquer materials, and the rewards for chariots and armor, can a hundred thousand army be assembled. Just from the above examples, it can be seen how expensive it is for a large army to go to war. Da Changhe is a large country, possessing two counties, thousands of miles of land, a population of millions, and hundreds of thousands of soldiers. Moreover, there are two Inborn Grandmasters in the country. With such strength, for Chu State to attempt to conquer them, they would need at least a hundred thousand soldiers, and Lu Yuan himself would have to lead the team. The expenses involved would not be small. Since the Chu State couldn¡¯t afford it, they could only watch the time pass and lose the opportunity. Then, why not let the Dan Ding Dao send charcoal in the snow and give them another ten million silver tales to cover two years of military expenses? Having given such a large amount of aid, Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t be able to shut the Dan Ding Dao¡¯s people outside the door, right? As long as they could see Lu Yuan and stay by his side for a few days. Lin Qingxuan was confident that his disciple Anqiu¡¯s cultivation and insight would have no problem in seeing through the true situation of the King of Chu. At that time, it would be clear whether he had cultivated the Taiping Dao Book, how many years he had left if he had, and what his current realm was. Considering they would obtain all that information, even if it cost tens of millions of silver tales, it would be worth it. After all, the Dan Ding Dao had a great legacy of ten thousand years, and with the countless gold, silver, and jewels stored in the sect, this would only be a small portion of it. We don¡¯t lack money. Thus, after discussing with the Dan Ding Dao practitioners, they soon approved the decision of the Dao master. Subsequently, the Dan Ding Dao¡¯s network of relationships was activated and began to prepare for the transfer of the ten million silver tales to Chu State as a gift, just like last time. On the other hand, Anqiu True Person left the Mountain Gate early after the decision was passed and headed towards Chu State. Chapter 536 - Chapter 536: Chapter 258: Rebellion in the Su Kingdom (Please subscribe!)_2 Chapter 536: Chapter 258: Rebellion in the Su Kingdom (Please subscribe!)_2 Before the aid arrived, he would not go to see Lu Yuan first. Not to mention whether he could meet him, firstly, there was no benefit. Anqiu could be certain that the King of Chu would definitely not treat him kindly. After all, when someone who hopes for your death appears in front of you, who wouldn¡¯t dislike it? So after arriving in Chu State, he planned to take a tour there first, gather some intelligence, and observe the condition of the people. Although there were spies reporting back from various places, reading reports could never compare to seeing and experiencing everything with his own eyes. If he could gain a deep understanding of Chu State, it might be of great use when meeting Lu Yuan later. It was not at all easy to transport ten million silver tales across borders to Chu State. Although this time only silver was being transported, without various armors, weapons, grain and supplies, it would be much easier. However, when the silver finally arrived, it would be at least three months later. In three months, he would have enough time to get a deeper understanding of this newly rising power, Chu State. Anqiu had already planned everything carefully in his heart. ¡­ Dan Ding Path was preparing to probe Anqiu¡¯s bottom line, but Lu Yuan did not know about it, and had no means to inquire about Liang Country¡¯s news. However, he had already anticipated that there would be a day when his relationship with Dan Ding Path would fall apart. The secret of longevity could not be exposed. Since this was the case, the Taiping Dao Book could not be used as his public cultivation method. Even though he was indeed focusing on cultivating this method. But when safety was concerned, necessary disguises needed to be in place. Presenting himself as mainly practicing the Five Thunder Book in front of the world and the Immortal Cultivation World of Nine Provinces was a long-established strategy. So, eventually, it was inevitable that he would fall out with Dan Ding Path. Therefore, Lu Yuan started to actively prepare for possible retaliation from Dan Ding Path. The most crucial preparation was to speed up the cultivation of the Taiping Dao Book. As long as he could raise his Immortal Realm to a certain level, cultivating to the point of condensing vital energy, even if Dan Ding Path started a war against him, with such strength, he could face them without fear. To speed up the cultivation of the Taiping Dao Book, the best method was to expand his territory, enhance his country¡¯s strength, gather more Qi Luck, and use it to accelerate his cultivation. Previously during the Northern Expedition against Zhou Country, he had followed Wuan Marquis¡¯s arrangement twice, taking risks to launch surprise attacks. This time, he disregarded the unstable internal and external situation in his newly-established country and still aimed to attack Da Changhe Country and annex it. It was hard to say Dan Ding Path did not play a part in these decisions. If it were not for the pressure from Dan Ding Path, with Lu Yuan¡¯s lifespan and the potential of Chu State, there would have been no need to be so eager, and they could choose to develop at a steady pace. Fortunately, Lu Yuan had nothing to say about it. It was his own decision back then, and the aid from Dan Ding Path had indeed helped him a lot. Their financial support and the weapons and supplies during the Northern Expedition were indispensable for his success. Since he had enjoyed such benefits, he had to face the risks that came with them. He had been prepared for this since he stepped onto this path. No regrets. However, at this time, Anqiu had not arrived yet, and Lu Yuan did not know everything that was happening. It was only natural that he did not realize the threat from Dan Ding Path was about to fall upon him. At this moment, his attention was attracted by a rebellion happening in Su Country. ¡­ ¡°Su Xuange¡¯s oppressive and brutal rule over the past few years has driven their people to death, and now it has finally shown its terrible consequences,¡± Lu Yuan sighed, holding the intelligence report from the Imperial City Department urgently sent from Su Country in the Chamber of Political Governance. Upon hearing his words, Cui Changqing and Li Wei looked at him with curiosity. Lu Yuan noticed it and smiled, then handed them the report, ¡°You two Loyal Subjects may take a look as well.¡± Both of them took it and read it together, their faces showing shock. Cui Changqing more so, exclaiming: ¡°Su Country¡¯s people are so resentful that rebellions have broken out everywhere!¡± Yes, this report was about the rebellions in Su Country. The story began with Su Country¡¯s Winter Tax last November. As mentioned before, Su Xuange, driven by his own ambition and also for self-protection, had insanely raised a professional army of 100,000 soldiers and even implemented a militia system in his country. Su Country was just a small country, and Yulin County, where it was established, was not prosperous. There were many mountain ridges and few plains, making it unsuitable for large-scale grain production. It was only because of its proximity to the sea and trade opportunities that the country had some income and was not completely impoverished. But even so, after being ravaged by Jinghai Country earlier, the situation in Yulin County had become increasingly dire. At the time when Su Xuange went to establish Su Country, there were only a little over two million people left in the region. Such a poor and mountainous county with a small population ¨C how much could it be squeezed? According to Lu Yuan¡¯s estimate, with a normal rate of taxation, the most they could get in a year would be about five million silver tales. But five million silver tales, where could that raise an army of a hundred thousand? That¡¯s why, not long after Ninghai Country was founded, Su Xuange had increased the tax rate in his country. It changed from the original one in five ratio during the imperial court period to a one in four ratio. In addition, he also added various types of miscellaneous taxes with different names to collect money. Through all these unscrupulous means, Su Country¡¯s annual tax revenue rose sharply from the original four million silver tales to eight million silver tales, doubling in the process.

. So this is the time to send troops, and as Chu moves, so too must Kunhai and Chilih countries. Lu Yuan had already decided to lead 40,000 Forbidden Army troops to rush to Xichuan, join forces with the local Chu army, and strike hard at the main force of the Nanzhao army. On the southwestern side, Huang Xuan would lead the remaining 20,000 Forbidden Army troops and 40,000 Yi people who had been captured in previous battles after crossing the Yangtze River. This army would follow along the south bank of the Yangtze River, directly attack Jianchuan from Hui Chuan, cutting off the retreat and grain road of the Nanzhao army in Xichuan, and completely trapping them here. If these guys dared to be so arrogant, slaughtering the future people of Chu in front of the Chu army, then they should bear the consequences of doing so, and not go back to their homes later. Lu Yuan had decided. In this battle, even if the Nanzhao prisoners were captured, even if they were not killed, But the fate of these prisoners in the future would be as coolies, participating in various engineering constructions for Chu until their last drop of blood and sweat. Only in this way can they atone for their sin of destroying Chu¡¯s Qi Luck. At the same time, in addition to Huang Xuan, both Kunhai and Chilih countries will each send 50,000 troops, totaling 100,000. Then, the two countries¡¯ Inborn Grandmasters, which are Li Xiong and Li River will personally lead the attack on the native land of Nanzhao country. With these two newly acquired vassal states restraining the power of Nanzhao country, Thus, this war against Nanzhao country will be carried out by the North, Central, and South Route armies on three battlefields. Lu Yuan personally commanded the North Route army, totaling about 180,000 people, including five Forbidden Army forces, 10,000 county soldiers, 20,000 prefecture and county soldiers, 50,000 militias, several thousand remaining soldiers from Xichuan, and Jihui, a semi-crippled Inborn. The Central Route army was led by Huang Xuan and consisted of 60,000 soldiers, including one Forbidden Army and 40,000 Yi man-servant troops. The South Route army, commanded by Li Xiong and Li River, consisted of 100,000 troops, with each country contributing 50,000. The total of the three armies added up to 340,000 soldiers and horses, as well as five Inborns, attacking the Nanzhao country from the north to the south. With such a strong and powerful force, it was not just about repelling the Nanzhao army in Xichuan. Even if it meant directly eliminating Nanzhao country, if Lu Yuan was willing to pay a huge price, it could be done. Therefore, when the whole plan was laid out before them, even Li Xiong and Li River, who had just ended the war recently and were exhausted, were involuntarily attracted. Both of them could see that, faced with the three-route pincer attack strategy of Chu, the Nanzhao country, with just its one country, would be absolutely unable to withstand it. After all, although Nanzhao country was vast, it only covered two regions. Lihai was wealthy but could only support one million people. The total population of Nanzhao country is only about 2.5 million. When mobilized, it can muster at most 300,000 soldiers. And now, Nanzhao Country¡¯s most elite 100,000-strong army has gone north to Xichuan, trying to seize this fertile land and is on an expedition far away. This army is being targeted by Lu Yuan, the King of Chu, himself. The other major lackey of Nanzhao, Jianchuan country, which can also field 100,000 soldiers, is being attacked by Huang Xuan, further diminishing the strength of Southern Zhao State. So at the end of the calculations, Kunhai and Chilih countries only need to respond to the 100,000 civilian militias in Nanzhao country. Although they have been engaged in wars for many years, Kunhai and Chilih countries have been unable to raise constant war soldiers due to their poverty. What they have in hand are also militia troops. Chapter 651 - Chapter 651: Chapter 296 - Three Paths Together_3 Chapter 651: Chapter 296 ¨C Three Paths Together_3 However, even among the militia, there were differences. The militias of Kunhai and Chilih countries had become familiar with war through years of warfare, and many had seen bloodshed, possessing some battlefield fierceness. On the other hand, Nanzhao Country had enjoyed peace for a long time, so there was little talk of warfare. Grown in such an environment, it was doubtful how much fighting power could be mustered by the militia. Therefore, commanding ¡°arrogant and fierce soldiers¡± that they had trained themselves from the dead, Li Xiong and Li River felt that there was no problem in beating the ¡°delicate and weak¡± Nanzhao army. Yes, within Nanzhao, there were indeed two Inborn Grandmasters. So, they have no advantage in terms of top-level combat power. But they didn¡¯t intend to destroy Nanzhao Country! What Li Xiong and Li River really wanted was to take advantage of this opportunity and plunder from Nanzhao Country, grabbing some money, food, and population. In this way, they could restore the annual weakening vitality of the two countries caused by war. After Lu Yuan established the borders between the two countries and ended the Kunhai hegemonic war, the strength of Kunhai and Chilih countries in the Kunhai area had become almost finalized. Kunhai had four prefectures with fertile soil, but due to the continuous turbulence of war, the total population of the country was only about 300,000. Chilih had six prefectures, occupying a corner of Kunhai and also having good land. Although the rear areas had not been affected by war, the population had been greatly reduced due to years of military drafts, leaving only about 400,000 people. The total population of the two countries in one county was less than 800,000, which was even more miserable than the previous Xichuan and Hanzhong. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï This devastating impact of war on the two countries was clear to see. It was for this reason. Kunhai and Chilih countries were in urgent need of a large number of people to replenish and restore domestic production and a large amount of money and food to maintain the operation of the government. Neither of these could be provided by the two countries themselves. Therefore, in order to achieve their goals, they were left with only one option: external expansion. However, with both countries also submitting to the Chu state, it was no longer possible for them to fight each other in the Kunhai region, which would have been the most suitable target. So, if they wanted to expand externally, they would have to look for targets in countries outside the Chu system. Originally, Dali in the south was a suitable target. In the First Month of this year, after a year of reorganization, they successfully suppressed the rebellion in Tong Hai Country and initially stabilized the area¡¯s rule. Su Country officially announced the establishment of Tonghai County, with four prefectures and forty counties, which was the establishment of administrative jurisdiction. Following Su Country, at the end of the First Month, Song Country also formally established Yinsheng County, with five prefectures and fifty counties, in the territories they controlled in the Heichi Country, as well as some parts of the southern YingSheng area, and began their rule over the southwest barbarian region. The establishment of Tonghai and Yinsheng Counties by Su and Song countries immediately cut off one-third of Dali¡¯s territory, causing heavy losses to the country. At the same time, in order to cope with the joint attack of Su and Song countries, Dali had no choice but to station a large number of troops in YingSheng area to deal with the aggressive offensive of the two countries, being extremely busy. At this time, if Kunhai and Chilih countries were to sneak-attack the now-empty Yangzu countries in the north of Dali, they would definitely reap great benefits. Even seizing some territory would be very likely. However, after losing the southern part of Kunhai, Chilih Country no longer bordered Dali. If they were to launch an invasion of Dali, only their rival, Kunhai, would ultimately benefit from it. Thinking of this enemy, Chilih Country couldn¡¯t help but feel uneasy. Moreover, if Kunhai were to grow stronger, the threat to Chilih would also increase. Of course, they would not let this situation happen. Similarly, With Chilih Country, the enemy, watching from behind, even though Chu was pressing down on both countries, Li Xiong would not dare to expose his back and confidently attack Dali. Secondly, with Chilih¡¯s submission, Dali also noticed the threat from the north and began to gradually dispatch troops to the Yangzu area in April to guard against the invasion of Kunhai. There was internal restrain between the two countries, external caution from Dali, so it would not be easy for them to take advantage of the Yangzu area. Thus, while the plan had always been in place, an opportunity to execute had never been found. Just at that time, the suzerain state gave an order for the two younger brothers to join forces and attack Nanzhao. Li Xiong and Li River calculated that given the pressure from Chu and their own greed for Nanzhao, they reluctantly put aside their previous grievances and jointly launched an attack. Under the coordination of Chu, the war against Nanzhao, with three countries attacking from the north, center, and south respectively, officially began. On the 20th day of the fifth month of Shenwu Year 6, King of Chu, Lu Yuan, led an army of 40,000 northward. On the same day, the armies of Kunhai and Chilih Countries, which had been reorganized for more than a month, were outside Yangcheng City swearing allegiance, declaring their response to Chu and sending troops to attack Nanzhao Country. On the 25th day of the fifth month, Lu Yuan arrived at Hui Chuan Country. After meeting with Huang Xuan again, he encouraged the 20,000 Forbidden Army soldiers under his command. The True Person in charge of this country¡¯s defense also formally swore allegiance to his troops in Hui Chuan Country, coordinating with the southern troops from Kunhai and Chilih countries, launching an attack on the Sword River Country, which was under Nanzhao¡¯s rule. Lu Yuan temporarily stopped here for two days, and with the assistance of his subordinate officials, established prefectures and counties in Hui Chuan Country. Using the old land divisions, Jianchang and Huichuan Prefectures were set up, and at the same time, officials were to be dispatched from the rear to the various prefectures and counties to take up positions. The original 4,000 county soldiers who had crossed the river with him were also distributed to various places in the two prefectures, to work alongside the newly arrived officials in enforcing governing and control. After looking after the matter for three days and seeing no problems, Lu Yuan continued to move northward. On the third day of the sixth month, Lu Yuan led his 40,000-strong army to officially arrive at Yuzhong Prefecture, in Xichuan County, where the Chu army was stationed. The battle between the main forces of the northern route and the Nanzhao army officially began. Chapter 652 - Chapter 652: Chapter 297 The Troops Set Out for Xichuan Chapter 652: Chapter 297 The Troops Set Out for Xichuan On the third day of the sixth month in the sixth year of Shenwu, Lu Yuan led his army to Yuzhong Prefecture, Xichuan County. Upon his arrival, he did not immediately wage war but first examined the internal affairs of Xichuan County. After several years of development, especially after the rare post-war peace, a new wave of newborns emerged in all parts of the Chu State, including Xichuan County. In the ninth year of Front Yue Hongdao, when it was still Changsha State, Lu Yuan conducted a national census. At that time, Xichuan County had a population of 160,000 households, amounting to 830,000 citizens. In the years since, the number of households has not grown significantly and remains at 160,000. However, the population has increased to 880,000, most of whom are newborns. This rapid population growth is still ongoing and if it continues, the present population of the three counties in Xichuan County will exceed a million in a maximum of just fifteen years. Lu Yuan was quite pleased about this. For the Chu State, expanding new territories was significant, but increasing the population was even more crucial. Because when a new territory is developed, the amount of Qi Luck it can gain is finite and is given once, then it will not increase any further. However, the population of the territory can also generate Qi Luck. And the more the population, the more Qi Luck is generated. In Xichuan County today, newborns keep being born, and the population is growing rapidly. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï In the future, as these newborns grow up or even from the moment they are born, they have provided Qi Luck to the Chu State. Once they grew up, they would provide even more Qi Luck. Moreover, these newborns, when they grow up, could also continue to reproduce. As such, the Qi Luck will continue to grow incessantly. In the foreseeable future, Lu Yuan will gain more Qi Luck, and the spiritual energy that he can manipulate with this Qi Luck will also increase. In this Age of Dharma Decline, in the competition for spiritual energy, he has already secured a firm share for himself and is rapidly expanding it. After examining the natural population growth in Xichuan County, Lu Yuan turned his attention to another population report. Since last June, when the Nanzhao Army launched surprise attacks on the Xichuan State, the locals had been continuously escaping to surrounding areas. They had few choices for the direction of their escape, only Zhou Country to the north or Chu State to the east were viable choices. Among these two options, the Chu State was the most attractive one. Because Hanzhong Country was weak, and compared to their Xichuan Country, it did not have any advantage. The Xichuan Country was already broken through by the enemy. Hanzhong country also had to deal with Zhou Country to its north, so it could be imagined how intense the pressure would be. Many of the refugees who had substantial resources, like the gentry, landlords, or people from the Jianghu, knew that fleeing to Hanzhong Country would only result in a grim future. Fleeing to Hanzhong Country might bring temporary peace, but it would be just as dangerous when Zhou Country would invade the south or when the Nanzhao Army pursued. But it was different for the Chu State. The Chu State was a powerful nation that owned four counties and hundreds of thousands of soldiers, specifically a large army of over a hundred thousand stationed in Xichuan County. Escaping to such a place would provide far better safety and future prospects than Hanzhong Country. Being a citizen of a powerful nation was always better than being a citizen of a small nation. So how to choose, many people already knew in their hearts. During the time when the Nanzhao Army was running rampant, any refugee who had the means chose to flee to the Chu Country. In the latter half of the fifth year of Shenwu alone, the Chu State received nearly 100,000 citizens from Xichuan State. When it came to this year, as the atrocities of the Nanzhao Army escalated, the number of refugees increased even more. Just in the first two months of this year, Xichuan County received over 70,000 refugees. However, starting from the third month, the Nanzhao Army noticed the mass exodus from Xichuan County. Therefore, they began to set up checkpoints on the routes leading to Xichuan County, trying to intercept and block the escaping citizens. After a few months of blockade, a large number of citizens were intercepted, with a considerable portion being cruelly killed. But the number of the Nanzhao Army was limited after all, and they could not possibly block all the three counties adjacent to Xichuan State. So, over the past few months, more than 50,000 citizens of Xichuan managed to escape to Xichuan County. Since the beginning of this year, when the strategy of Western Expedition to repel the Nanzhao Army was established, Lu Yuan had already planned to reclaim Xichuan. Xichuan held a territory of half a county and five prefectures, covering an area of 2,400 li, not a small piece of land. Now such a large piece of territory had suffered heavy population loss due to the disaster brought by the Nanzh Chapter 653 - Chapter 653: Chapter 297: Troops Head to Xichuan_2 Chapter 653: Chapter 297: Troops Head to Xichuan_2 However, the difficulties and obstacles faced in migrating to Xichuan Prefecture were much less compared to Qianzhong County. After all, as the fertile soil that had been cultivated by previous Jinling dynasties, the prosperity of Xichuan Prefecture was world-renowned. Jinguan City in Xichuan Prefecture, like Baling City in Dongting County and Xiangyang City in Xiangyang Prefecture, ranked among the world¡¯s famous cities. Such a rich and fertile place was extremely tempting for those in Chu State who lacked land and wanted to seize an opportunity. Few people would go to Qianzhong County, a place with poor mountains and bad waters, unless they were forced to. But when it came to Xichuan Prefecture, there were a lot of people signing up. Take the current situation in the eastern three prefectures of Xichuan, for example. As the population has gradually increased to 880,000, it has become quite crowded for the local area. After all, this is a mountainous area, with not much arable land available, and the yield of the fields is far inferior to those in richer areas. There is a limit to the number of people that can be supported by this land of the three prefectures. Just relying on the local grain production, supporting a million people would be the limit, and this limit is established under the condition of the local people living very frugally. Although there is still some distance from this limit now, the pressure of life has already started to show in some places. Many low-income people with little land have had to give up farming and choose to work in the city to supplement their families¡¯ livelihoods. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã0 But in such a mountainous area, without a mature handicraft industry, how many people can the city support? As the number of people working in the city increases, so does the competition for jobs, indirectly lowering wages and making it difficult to earn much money. At best, it could only provide enough for a family to get by. Moreover, this subsistence line is slowly decreasing with the growth of the population. It can be foreseen that if industrial reform isn¡¯t carried out, more handicraft industries with economic value aren¡¯t introduced, then the people of the eastern three prefectures will surely become poorer. However, how to reform, whether to reform or not, these are all matters for local officials and court ministers. Lu Yuan doesn¡¯t have time to care about these things, nor is he good at it. He only knows one thing. The people in the east of Xichuan Prefecture have already felt the pressure of life and have a strong willingness to migrate. ¡°No need for too many, just moving 200,000 or so out of the 880,000 people in the three prefectures would be enough. In this way, the remaining population would average about 200,000 per prefecture, with each household having enough farmland. The production of local grain and living conditions would greatly improve. Finally, in Xiangyang Prefecture and Dongting Prefecture, respectively, relocate another 100,000 to 200,000 people, bringing the total to 600,000 people. Together with the displaced people from Yuzhong Prefecture and the remaining population within the Xichuan border, there would be about a million people. With this many people, there would be enough support for the development of the west five prefectures in Xichuan.¡± Lu Yuan made a plan in his heart. ¡­ Once the decision was made, Lu Yuan did not delay and immediately wrote a decree to be sent back to the country. He asked ministers like Cui Changqing to prepare and carry out preliminary immigration work. With 200,000 troops under his command, including more than 100,000 elite soldiers, it was not difficult for him to drive out the mere 100,000 Nanzhao Army. It was not even difficult to capture all of these people.¡± As for the Big Emperor¡¯s Son of Nanzhao Army, an Inborn Grandmaster, Lu Yuan could easily defeat him with one hand. He just didn¡¯t give him a chance this time. If he had the opportunity, Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t mind killing another Inborn Grandmaster, achieving his fourth kill as an Inborn Grandmaster. It just so happened that Nanzhao Country¡¯s power had gone beyond the scope of a small country, with two and a half prefectures and an air of pre-Chu country¡¯s conquest of the southwest barbarians at that time. Facing such a southwestern hegemon, without weakening them, Lu Yuan felt uneasy even with the recovery of Xichuan. A country that can send out an army of 100,000 and has three Inborn Grandmasters at their disposal, is a force to be reckoned with. Just ask, who could be at ease? At this moment, Lu Yuan could somewhat understand the feelings of the previous Emperor Yue Hongdao and the current Ning Country Jianwu Heavenly Son when they faced the forerunner of Changsha country and the current Chu State. They must also have dreaded Chu State as Lu Yuan dreaded Nanzhao Country now. They would have loved to eliminate this great threat once and for all, to solve their worries and then concentrate on dealing with other big countries. ¡°But nothing in the world can go smoothly. Just as Ning Country cannot conquer Chu State now, Chu State, with its current strength, cannot conquer Nanzhao Country. This time, we can only kill and capture more Nanzhao soldiers, weakening the enemy¡¯s strength. At the same time, see if there is an opportunity to kill the Big Emperor¡¯s Son, Zhao Changqing, and break the enemy¡¯s arm.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes were aflame, his fighting spirit soaring. Accomplishing either of these two goals would deal a significant blow to Nanzhao Country. If both were accomplished, it would amount to reducing Nanzhao¡¯s national strength by 20%. With the spoils won by Huang Xuan¡¯s southern central army, Li Xiong and Li River¡¯s southern army, it would not be a problem to deal a severe blow to Nanzhao and prevent them from recovering for thirty years after the end of this war. At that time, Nanzhao, with its severely wounded vitality, would no longer pose a threat to Chu State until its strength was restored. Chapter 654 - Chapter 654: Chapter 297: Troops Head to Xichuan_3 Chapter 654: Chapter 297: Troops Head to Xichuan_3 Meanwhile, the other side¡¯s attempt to recover their vitality would also face harassment from Chilih Country and Kunhai Country. Lu Yuan¡¯s acceptance of the two dogs was not merely for show. At critical moments, they could also serve as ferocious dogs released from their cage to attack the enemy. The current blow to Nanzhao Country did not mean that the war between Chu State and them would be over. After recapturing Xichuan, the Chu army, which would enter a recuperation period, might not take the initiative to attack Nanzhao Country again. However, the starving Kunhai and Chilih countries, both exhausted within, desperately needed a large amount of money, food, and people. They required massive food to fill their stomachs. So where would this food come from? Chu State could not provide it, and even had to collect tribute from the hands of these two dogs. Finally, only the neighboring states of Dali and Nanzhao could provide it. With just a little guidance from Lu Yuan, he could make these two vassal states target Nanzhao and hinder their recovery. As for Dali Country, Su Country and Song Country would be responsible for dealing with them, so there was no need for Lu Yuan to worry. After conquering Da Changhe Country, Lu Yuan had already arranged everything properly for the remaining two Great Barbarian States. ¡­ Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï Shenwu¡¯s 6th year, June 8th. After resting for five days in Yuzhong Prefecture and inspecting Xichuan¡¯s internal affairs, Lu Yuan finally began to mobilize troops and dispatch generals to strategize against the Nanzhao Army. Outside Yuzhong Prefecture City, the Central Army camped. ¡°Chu Wei, in this battle, you will lead the navy to transport the army to the rear of Xichuan¡¯s army. After they land, you will take your 20,000 navy soldiers and block the Yangtze River for me. You must not let any barbarian soldiers cross the river.¡± Lu Yuan looked at the many generals gathered in two rows below and spoke to his disciple Chu Wei, the naval commander in the front left. ¡°I obey my orders.¡± Chu Wei heard the command, immediately stepped forward, and took the command arrow. In the battle of Xichuan against the barbarians, the two previously deployed naval forces would also participate. Combined with these 20,000 naval soldiers and the 180,000 land soldiers gathered in Yuzhong Prefecture City, a total of 200,000 soldiers would participate in this battle. With this naval force intercepting the Yangtze River, a strong defensive line could be formed. Just like how the Zhou people¡¯s 300,000 strong army had been blocked by the Yue Country¡¯s navy at Dongting River, today the Nanzhao army without a navy would be blocked in the north of Xichuan. All they could do was look across the Yangtze River and sigh. Even if a small portion of the Nanzhao army had good luck and managed to cross the Yangtze River and escape back to Jiangnan, there would still be 60,000 soldiers led by Huang Xuan in Jianchuan, forming a second defensive line to further block the Nanzhao deserters in the north of the river. With such multiple layers of defense, it would be nearly impossible for the Nanzhao forces in Xichuan to escape back unless they risked severe shortages of supplies and heavy casualties by traversing thousands of miles of unpopulated mountains again as before. Two defensive lines, the Yangtze River, and Jianchuan will cause any Nanzhao army attempting to flee south to fall along the way. ¡°Han Shun.¡± After arranging the naval mission, Lu Yuan looked at another of his disciples, West Chuan Duwei, and Left General Han Shun, and ordered, ¡°You will lead 10,000 county soldiers from your original division, 10,000 prefecture and county soldiers, and I will give you an additional 20,000 forbidden troops. You will lead these 40,000 soldiers to board the ship with Chu Wei. After arriving at the rear of Anyue and Panshi Prefectures in Xichuan via the water route, you will immediately lead the troops to attack and occupy the local area. At this time, the main Nanzhao army is in the front line of Nanchong and Panshi Prefectures, with no major army in the rear. After occupying these two places, you will immediately build an interception defense line to block the way for the Nanzhao army to escape to the west.¡± When the Nanzhao army first emerged from the mountains, the initial location they appeared was in Anyue Prefecture. Lu Yuan assigned Han Shun to block this area and further cut off the enemy¡¯s escape route to the south. ¡°I obey my orders.¡± Han Shun stepped forward in response, taking the arrow and accepting the command. ¡°Li Liang.¡± Lu Yuan looked at another disciple, Rear General Li Liang, and continued to give orders, ¡°I will give you a forbidden army, the remaining 10,000 prefecture soldiers from the Xichuan army, and another 50,000 militiamen, totaling 80,000 soldiers. I want you to lead this army to defeat the enemy in front of Yuzhong Prefecture, eliminate all 30,000 Nanzhao soldiers stationed in front of Panshi Prefecture, and leave no one behind. Is it possible for you?¡± In the junction of Yuzhong and Panshi Prefectures, there were 30,000 Nanzhao soldiers stationed, responsible for monitoring the Chu army in Yuzhong Prefecture. It was precisely this group of soldiers who had been intercepting the refugees escaping into the territory of Xichuan State earlier. They had also killed refugees in the past as a provocation against the Chu army in the Yuzhong Prefecture. Lu Yuan was extremely resentful toward these soldiers. Now he issued an order to have them exterminated without leaving a single one alive. Facing these murderous words, Li Liang solemnly said, ¡°I obey my orders.¡± ¡°Hmm.¡± Looking at this disciple, Lu Yuan nodded slightly, not doubting his ability to complete the mission. Among many disciples, except for Zhou Qing, Li Liang¡¯s ability was second only to Chu Wei, and he had always been entrusted with important duties. Previously, when attacking Da Changhe Country, he had led one wing of the army, successfully completed the task of capturing Nongdong Kingdom. Later, he also cooperated with Li Xiong to capture the southern part of Kunhai Country. His military merits were ranked first among all generals. In this battle, Li Liang was given 80,000 troops to deal with only 30,000 Nanzhao soldiers; it would be an easy and straightforward task without any surprises. ¡°Lan Zhaoyun.¡± Lu Yuan looked at his father-in-law and gave the same command, ¡°I will also give you a forbidden army; you will lead them to attack Chengdu Prefecture and capture the capital of Xichuan State, Jinguan City. This place is where the Nanzhao army¡¯s supplies are stored. Capture this city, and you will starve the Nanzhao army of 100,000 soldiers. There are only 3,000 guards in Jinguan City at the moment. Can you capture it?¡± As a master of an ancient teaching, Lan Zhaoyun was no stranger to various means and capabilities. He had previously launched a rebellion and become a general in Chu Country in the course of capturing Huichuan Country. Upon hearing the order, Lan Zhaoyun stepped forward and said, ¡°I will definitely take the city.¡± After making arrangements for these four routes, Lu Yuan stood up and looked at the remaining generals around him, saying sternly, ¡°The remaining soldiers will be personally commanded by me, leading two forbidden armies, totaling 40,000 soldiers, to attack Nanchong Prefecture from the south. Over there, the lord of Xichuan State and a forbidden army are defending Nanchong Prefecture City, attracting 70,000 of the Nanzhao army and the Nanzhao Big Emperor Son themselves. All generals shall follow me directly to Nanchong and cut off the rear of the Nanzhao army¡¯s main force. In this battle, I want to meet the Nanzhao Big Emperor Son and see if he is more powerful than the great witch ceremony of the Chilih tribe!¡± Influenced by the bloodthirsty and confident words, the many generals present could not help but shout together, ¡°Yes, we are willing to follow the king to kill the enemy!¡± On the 8th of June in the 6th year of Shenwu, 180,000 Chu soldiers from Yuzhong Prefecture split into five routes, advancing by land and water, launching a full-scale attack against the Nanzhao Army. Chapter 655 - Chapter 655: Chapter 298: King Chus Death Chapter 655: Chapter 298: King Chu¡¯s Death Nanchong Prefecture City, outskirts. ¡°Is this the Nanzhao Army?¡± On a small hillside, surrounded by dozens of personal guards, Lu Yuan stood on the hilltop, looking into the distance at the vast barracks on the plain ahead, and couldn¡¯t help but smile: ¡°There doesn¡¯t seem to be as many people as I thought.¡± Everyone¡¯s eyes also followed, and they saw that in front of them, outside Nanchong Prefecture City to the north, west, and south, a series of camps had been set up in each direction. In the southern city, the camps covered an area of about three square kilometers, divided into thirteen large and small fortresses, four major and nine minor ones. According to everyone¡¯s experience in organizing troops, small camps could accommodate up to 500 people, and large camps up to 2,000 people. In the entire southern city area, the number of Nanzhao troops was at most around 12,000. As for the western city, the scale of camps was almost twice as large as that of the southern city, and there should be more people, probably around 25,000. It was somewhat difficult to see the full picture of the two northern camps because they were blocked by the city walls. However, the areas they covered were not very wide, roughly the same size as the camps in the southern city, with about 12,000 troops stationed in each. Thus, the Nanzhao Army in the three directions totaled nearly 50,000 people. Compared to the troops Lu Yuan brought this time, there wasn¡¯t much difference in the number of people, and the degree of elite was even far inferior, which naturally made him look down upon them. ¡°Since April of early summer, the Crown Prince of Nanzhao, Zhao Changqing, has been leading 60,000 troops constantly attacking Nanchong Prefecture City. According to the report received from Brother Ning, who was leading a forbidden army to assist in the defense of Nanchong Prefecture City, the Nanzhao Army had attacked the city more than twenty times in two months, and Zhao Changqing had climbed the city walls several times. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï The battles here were extremely intense, and the forbidden army under Brother Ning¡¯s command had already suffered more than 10,000 casualties. Our army¡¯s defense suffered such heavy casualties. Even if it was due to Zhao Changqing¡¯s Inborn strength causing a large number of casualties, the Nanzhao Army¡¯s efforts to attack the city would have also resulted in a large number of deaths and injuries. It is heard that when they are coming, they have a large army of nearly 70,000. Now that they have been fiercely attacking for two months, there are still over 40,000 people left, which is already considered a small casualty rate for a siege battle.¡± Next to him, Lu Yuan¡¯s personal disciple and General Mo Nianfeng, upon hearing his Master¡¯s words, explained, and then joined in the laughter: ¡°But now that the Lonely King has come, with the prowess of our Chu Army and the prowess of the Lonely King, Zhao Changqing and the Nanzhao Army are naturally not worth mentioning; they can be crushed with just a wave of the hand.¡± As for the Brother Ning in his words, he was referring to General Ning Jizhong, who had previously been appointed by Lu Yuan to lead a forbidden army to assist in the defense of Nanchong Prefecture City. These two men had grown up in recent years ¨C after Changsha changed its state title to Chu ¨C among the many disciples and had accompanied Lu Yuan in his battles across the world for more than ten years, with each of their strengths reaching the peak level; they could be called the courageous generals of the Chu State. Moreover, Mo Nianfeng, who had become accustomed to the elite style of the great countries of Zhou and Pre-Yue, honestly didn¡¯t take the Nanzhao Army, a southwestern barbarian force, seriously. These Yi people, who had always been in a small place and hadn¡¯t seen battles for many years, were truly far inferior to the elite forces of the Nine Provinces¡¯ great countries in terms of combat power. The best evidence was the Da Changhe Army they first encountered in the beginning of the conquest of the Barbarians. At that time, the Da Changhe Army had experienced years of war and been honed by the likes of Li Xiong, barely qualifying as a strong army that had gone through blood and fire. However, even such a strong army in southwestern China, faced with the elites of Great Chu, was defeated and routed, even though they had nearly twice as many troops, and eventually fled to the west of the Lu River. If the Da Changhe Army, already tempered by war, was like this, those Nanzhao troops, whose willpower and strength were even weaker due to the lack of war experience, would undoubtedly be even more inferior. With the Da Changhe Army¡¯s defeat as a precedent, it was challenging for these proud warriors of the Chu army to take the so-called three great barbarian kingdoms of the southwest seriously. The only thing that made them cautious was the Inborn Grandmasters who seemed like gods and demons. No one below Inborn level would not be in awe of and feel apprehensive about such terrifying martial prowess that transcended the mortal realm. However, comparing an obscure Nanzhao Crown Prince to their very own king, who had already killed three Inborn enemies, Mo Nianfeng felt much more confident. He believed that with their king¡¯s intervention, even if the Crown Prince of Nanzhao were to escape by a fluke, it would be impossible for him to avoid a heavy injury and flee. This supreme prestige belonged solely to the Invincible Military God and was accumulated by Lu Yuan from his undefeated battles over the past ten plus years. Such prestige made people¡¯s hearts unconsciously believe that as long as they followed this man, if he would be willing, there would be nothing impossible in the world. If there were powerful enemies ahead, they would simply draw their swords and slay them, achieving victory. It was just so natural, without reason or basis. And coincidentally, the entire Chu Army, from top to bottom, thought the same way. ¡°Hahaha, you¡¯re right, Nianfeng, a mere Nanzhao Army, is nothing but chickens and dogs in front of me.¡± Hearing his disciple¡¯s flattering words and seeing the admiring eyes from the personal guards around him, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but laugh out loud, then got on his horse, and said boldly, ¡°All soldiers, follow this Lonely King, defeat the Nanzhao Army, and seize this victory.¡± As the words fell, he waved his horsewhip, and the remaining steed leaped forward, heading toward the Nanzhao Army camp at the foot of the mountain in the distance. At this time, at the foot of the mountain, the Chu Army vanguards, who had travelled a long way, were also arriving one after another in the wilderness south of Nanchong City, stopping at a position about three miles away from the Nanzhao Army. Chapter 656 - Chapter 656: Chapter 298: The King of Chu Faces Death_2 Chapter 656: Chapter 298: The King of Chu Faces Death_2 Following the military order, they began setting up formations and lining up troops here. Opposite to the Chu army, the already prepared Nanzhao Army also had pairs of soldiers marching out of the camp, lining up the troops, and confronting the arriving Chu army. Lu Yuan led forty thousand troops in this march northwards, with the procession stretching nearly ten miles. The sheer magnitude of it was causing dust to obscure the sky, and it was impossible to conceal these marching troops. But Lu Yuan did not intend to hide them either. He wanted to lead this formidable army openly against the Nanzhao troops and defeat them with absolute strength. As Mo Nianfeng had thought, the highly-skilled Chu army could easily defeat the small Nanzhao army. Lu Yuan had absolute faith in this statement. He believed that the mighty army he had built while farming and warring over the past 20 years should be able to defeat even a small Southwestern Yi army. If they cannot, it would be better to return home, stop playing the game of world dominance, and retire to the mountain forests. The only concern for him was that Lan Zhaojun, the opposing commander, might see his strength and choose not to fight, departing with her army instead. If this happened, it would take more effort to pursue and annihilate the enemy, and it might not be possible to achieve total success. However, Lu Yuan had already prepared for this possibility. Back in early April, when he first launched the river crossing battle and defeated the Great Changhe and Huichuan Nations¡¯ defenders in a single move, there was already no need for Lu Yuan to continue crossing the river. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã? Even then, he directly ordered Chu Wei to lead the navy on a westward advance along the Yangtze River, which blockaded Xichuan and Nanzhao¡¯s waterways and severed their connection with the mainland of Nanzhao Country. For the Nanzhao Army, which had no navy to speak of, they had no way to deal with the strong ships of the Chu State. Under the navy¡¯s blockade, not only was aid from Jiangnan severed, but even the news from the southwestern Yi regions was also slowed or entirely cut off. Thus, at this moment, the Nanzhao Army in Xichuan territory had no idea that Great Changhe Country had been destroyed and Chilih Country had submitted. They were also entirely unaware that Jianchuan Country had been attacked by the Chu State, and that Nanzhao¡¯s homeland was simultaneously facing invasions from Chilih and Kunhai countries. They also did not know that Han Shun was leading a sneak attack on their rear, working together with the navy to completely cut off their escape route. The only thing the Crown Prince of Nanzhao might know was that Li Liang¡¯s army of Xichuan was currently engaged with the Nanzhao Army assigned to monitor the Chu forces, and the situation was not in his favor. But even if he knew this, he was powerless to do anything about it. Because two days after news arrived from the south, Lu Yuan¡¯s army was already coming. At this moment, they had pressed so close to his doorstep, sending out a provocative challenge to battle. Without dealing with the enemies in front of him, he would be hampered and restricted in everything he tried, unable to execute his plans. ¡­ In the southern part of the city, the Nanzhao Army formation was set up. With flags and banners fluttering and long spears standing like a forest. The Nanzhao people believed in the God of Black Feathers. According to their Yi people¡¯s heritage records, this was a winged god with a human body and bird¡¯s head who possessed a powerful divine bow and arrows. As a result, many of the Black Feather Yi people from the southern mountains were skilled in archery, like the hunters Lu Yuan liked to recruit in the early days of his uprising- all of them possessed remarkable archery skills. Moreover, due to their mountain origins and impoverished background, the Nanzhao army had a stubborn, barbaric energy. Thanks to this energy, even though many of the soldiers were conscripted militias, they still possessed considerable fighting strength and even managed to defeat Xichuan. This accomplishment gave them a misconception. Throughout the generations of their tribe¡¯s history, the terrifying and countless massacres committed by the Eastern Yi seemed to be no more than this. They believed that they were now on their way to nearly exterminating an entire nation of Eastern Yi people. At this moment, the king of the Eastern Yi was surrounded in this small city, and as long as the city was captured, Xichuan would cease to exist entirely. Since their miraculous victory in June last year, they had continuously won against their enemies for nearly a year, building up an arrogant notion of being unrivaled in the world among many Nanzhao soldiers. Under the influence of this arrogance, the young and energetic commander, Zhao Changqing, was equally high-spirited. So when Lu Yuan, clad in dark armor and red cloak, rode his fine warhorse back and forth in front of the armies, inviting Zhao Changqing to battle, this young prodigy had his competitive spirit ignited. ¡°The Chu thief is truly arrogant, daring to challenge us in front of our armies. Does he think Nanzhao has no warriors left?¡± Atop the command post, Zhao Changqing looked at Lu Yuan, who was showing off his martial prowess in front of the two armies¡¯ formations, and his eyes were filled with flames. The young people couldn¡¯t stand provocations, and they couldn¡¯t bear others outshining them. Hitherto, Zhao Changqing had been used to being the center of attention among his peers, always standing out in a crowd. Now that he had achieved this glorious feat of conquering a country, he felt even prouder, believing it confirmed his status as the chosen one. Under the weight of all these accomplishments, he did not fear facing the renowned King of Chu, Lu Yuan; he only thought that the time had lacked heroes, so upstarts had become famous. Earlier, he had merely remained in the southwest and had not gained his own fame. But now, as soon as he emerges, he had conquered a nation. This was something that even Lu Yuan had not successfully accomplished. Compared to the rumors about Lu Yuan defeating two inborn experts, it seemed all the more insignificant. Chapter 657 - Chapter 657: Chapter 298: The Death of King Chu_3 Chapter 657: Chapter 298: The Death of King Chu_3 Under the fearless spirit, he gripped the precious sword in his hand and wanted to charge forward, killing his opponent directly and adding another achievement to his record. ¡°Your Highness, don¡¯t!¡± But while young people are impulsive, the elders are much more stable. Seeing that Zhao Changqing wanted to join the battle, the old general Hua Kaiyun who accompanied him hurriedly stepped forward, holding him back, ¡°King of Chu, Lu Yuan, is famous throughout the world, recognized as a strong warrior among all countries. Although Your Highness has broken through Innate, it has only been over two or three years. Suddenly facing such a veteran powerhouse in the Innate realm, it would be too much of a disadvantage. At present, our army far outnumbers the opponents, so there is no need to compete for bravery with them. Your Highness, with your precious body, just sit in the army and drive the soldiers to kill the enemy. Entering the battlefield personally would only cause you to lose your position.¡± Athough Zhao Changqing has personally entered the battlefield several times before, causing heavy damage to the enemy and has a great reputation. But when he went into the battlefield previously, he relied on the power of the Innate, simply bullying ordinary soldiers below the Innate realm. Now, the opponent is a well-known powerhouse, the King of Chu, Lu Yuan. Even if Hua Kaiyun is extremely confident in his own prince, he doesn¡¯t have the arrogance to think that His Highness can defeat the opponent. ¡°Let go!¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.?¦Ï But in the face of his advice, the passionate Zhao Changqing simply ignored it. He mobilized his True pneuma, pushed the other aside, and said, ¡°The enemy is at our doorstep. If I avoid the battle, how would the generals and soldiers see me? They would certainly think that I¡¯m a coward, fearing the King of Chu. The general is the backbone of the army. If I retreat, the soldiers and generals behind me will also retreat. As we lose and they gain, the Chu people would be invigorated. How could we continue to fight such a battle? General Hua, don¡¯t try to persuade me anymore. I¡¯ve made up my mind to fight the King of Chu. Don¡¯t worry, we are all in the Innate realm. It¡¯s only been more than ten years since King Chu achieved this realm. At most, he is in the same First Realm as me. With my ability, even if I can¡¯t defeat the opponent, I can retreat safely. In this battle, the worst outcome would be my defeat. Compared to the defeat, not daring to fight is even worse. I, Zhao Changqing, have never been afraid or retreated in this world between Heaven and Earth. I have already seen the King of Xichuan before, but I¡¯ve found him lacking, just a defeated general. Now, isn¡¯t that King of Chu, Lu Yuan? Let me meet him and see who is better between this heroic figure praised by the world and the hero of my Nanzhao.¡± As he spoke, his youthful spirit shone forth, impossible to conceal. Seeing this scene, Hua Kaiyun opened his mouth, feeling that his own prince was indeed speaking reasonably. With the ability of an Inborn Grandmaster, even if they can¡¯t win when fighting with their peers, they can escape with their lives, which is not a problem. A Grandmaster is not easy to kill. Compared to that, not daring to fight at all would undoubtedly hurt the morale of the army even more. Therefore, after thinking it through, he finally sighed, ¡°Since Your Highness is determined, I won¡¯t stop you. But I hope that Your Highness will remember the overall situation and keep your precious body safe, not taking risks.¡± Zhao Changqing laughed, ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Old General, I am confident.¡± After saying that, he floated down and rode a war horse, charging directly out of the battlefield. Along the way, soldiers made way one after another, letting their own prince out of the battle array. Soon, he came to the front line of both armies. Meanwhile, the King of Chu in front, seeing him coming, also stopped his galloping war horse and looked over. Looking at the upright figure opposite, Zhao Changqing¡¯s heart was filled with a spirit that seemed to look down on the world. He pulled on the reins, taking advantage of the horse¡¯s front hoof stepping in midair, and shouted sternly, ¡°I, Zhao Changqing of Nanzhao, am here. King of Chu, Lu Yuan, come and meet your doom!¡± As his words fell, he spurred his horse to fly up. A round of green light burst from behind him, and dozens of vines danced and flew out, whipping towards Lu Yuan. Although confident in his heart, Zhao Changqing knew that he was probably somewhat inferior to the King of Chu opposite him. So in this battle, he didn¡¯t seek victory, but just to press the opponent¡¯s momentum and at least fight to a ¡°draw¡± in front of the crowd, stabilizing the morale of the army. In this way, fighting to a ¡°draw¡± with the King of Chu not only would make him famous but also severely dampen the Chu people¡¯s spirits. After all, the person they are up against is a veteran grandmaster, while he himself is a newcomer and younger. If he can fight to a ¡°draw¡± with the opponent, it is undoubtedly considered a victory. So, at this moment, he starts with a surprise attack, seizing the initiative in the fight and catching the opponent off guard. However, as his calculations rang out, Zhao Changqing unleashed his martial arts external body, but the King of Chu opposite didn¡¯t panic as he had imagined. Instead, he showed a trace of disdainful smile. His heart suddenly throbbed, and a sense of unease arose. And this unease soon became reality. The King of Chu, facing the rushing green vines, appeared unhurried. With a wave of his hand, a red flame ignited in front of him. True Fire covered a terrible range of several dozen feet, instantly distorting the air by burning it. Since breaking through and condensing energy, Lu Yuan¡¯s soul and body both underwent a transformation. The breakthrough in his Immortal Dao Cultivation also led to the improvement of his Martial Arts. By this point, his Martial Arts have successfully broken into the Innate Second Realm. The strength of his true pneuma has made his martial arts external body several times more powerful than before. At this moment, dealing with Zhao Changqing, who has just broken through the Innate realm and has a martial arts external body, is like a highschool student bullying an elementary school student, able to suppress him with a wave of a hand. The dozens of green vines had just touched the Red Sun True Fire, and they were ignited with a bang. The vine tips closest to the center of the flame were instantly burned to smoke. ¡°How is this possible?¡± Zhao Changqing looked at the scene, his eyes widened, and his face full of disbelief. At the same time, a sense of crisis filled his heart. He realized that he had done something extremely foolish. Not caring about his anger, he subconsciously wanted to turn around and flee. The strength of the King of Chu far exceeded his imagination. The terror of that martial arts external body was definitely not in the Innate First Realm. He¡¯d not be a match for him. If he continued to fight, he might indeed be in danger. However, this idea of escaping had just emerged when a thunderous sound appeared in his mind. His eyes became dizzy, and at the corner of his vision, he seemed to see a yellow light quickly flying towards him, a huge pillar rising from the ground, closely followed by a pain in his body, and his consciousness sank¡­ Chapter 658 - Chapter 658: Chapter 299: The End of the Western Expedition Chapter 658: Chapter 299: The End of the Western Expedition On the vast battlefield, the huge red scorching sun shone down, and the north wind ushered in the early summer, blowing up gusts of heat waves, making people sweat profusely. However, in such scorching weather, the Nanzhao Army in the south of the city did not feel any heat at all. Instead, an enormous chill enveloped them in an instant. A towering stone pillar broke through the ground for about three meters, and on it hung a headless corpse, pierced by time in the abdomen. Bright red blood flowed down the stone pillar, quickly forming a pool of blood on the ground. A disbelieving face rolled, ultimately stopping about thirty yards southwest of the stone pillar, looking up obliquely at the pillar, its vacant eyes staring at the familiar body above, gradually losing their light. Countless people in front of the two armies watched this scene, falling into a deathly silence for a moment. But soon, the silence was broken. Turmoil arose among the Nanzhao Army. ¡°The Big Emperor Son, Big Emperor Son is dead?¡± ¡°Impossible, the Big Emperor Son was so strong, protected by the Great God Wu Yu, how could he die?¡± ¡°How could that man have killed the Big Emperor Son?¡± ¡°He¡¯s not human!¡± Gasps and panic spread rapidly among the Nanzhao Army soldiers, and as the news reached the rear, the chaos grew. As the commander of the army, especially an Inborn Grandmaster, after a series of victories since the Northern Expedition to Xichuan, Zhao Changqing¡¯s position in the Nanzhao Army was unparalleled. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï To put it bluntly, this Big Emperor Son was probably similar to Lu Yuan in the hearts of the Chu Army. Although there is a wide gap of strength and ability between the two, it is far from comparable. But the impact of Zhao Changqing on the Nanzhao Army can be seen from this. Yet such a figure was killed by Lu Yuan in front of everyone, just like that. With absolute strength, without any cheating or chicanery, he was killed outright. The blow brought by this fact and outcome almost instantly shattered the psychological defenses of many Nanzhao Army soldiers. For a time, they thought Lu Yuan was like a god and demon, absolutely unmatched. Their original courage and fighting spirit were shattered in an instant. At this moment, scattered soldiers in the Nanzhao Army began to flee, and as those people took the lead, this trend of fleeing continued to expand. In particular, in the Chu Army formation, successive cheers of ¡°Majestic King!¡± and ¡°Long live Chu!¡± made even more people flee. Their own king, in front of the whole army, personally killed the opposing commander. This not only struck a blow to the enemy¡¯s morale but also brought unimaginable joy and encouragement to their own side. At this moment, in the Chu Army formation, many soldiers were surging with blood, unable to restrain themselves from wanting to rush forward, to slaughter the Nanzhao Army, and share this honor and victory with the king. Meanwhile, amidst the cheers and noise, Lu Yuan, who watched Zhao Changqing die easily, was also somewhat surprised. Although he knew that with his strength, defeating such a newly promoted Inborn Grandmaster from a remote place would be no difficulty. But the fact that the opponent was killed so easily did indeed go beyond his expectations. After all, no matter how one looks at it, this was an Inborn Grandmaster. This was not the same as the previous Gui Lianyun, Zhang Chanyi, and Shi Li Clan Grand Shaman. All three of them had been worn down by others, their states damaged, and were sneakily attacked and assassinated by Lu Yuan. Under those circumstances, it was only natural for the three of them to be disposed of without any resistance. But Zhao Changqing was killed openly and uprightly, even though he was already on guard. Albeit that he didn¡¯t know Lu Yuan¡¯s true strength and was careless, this already revealed many problems. ¡®Is it because I¡¯m too strong?¡¯ Lu Yuan thought to himself. Although it may sound vain, to be honest, he did not have much concept of being too strong. After all, to outsiders, King Lu Yuan of Chu had a formidable record. Before the conquest, the record that was visible was the slaying of two Inborn talents. With the spread of the deeds of slaying the Great Witch Sacrifice and Zhao Changqing over the past two months, the terrifying record of four Inborn kills will be widely spread and admired by the world. However, the actual battles between Lu Yuan and the four lost souls were not many. Often, life and death were decided within one or two moves. Therefore, in terms of battlefield combat, Lu Yuan¡¯s experience in fighting enemies was not much. At least not as much as that of the veteran Grandmasters in the powerful nations of the world. The other Grandmasters did not have his unconventional strength, and without the combination of immortal and martial arts, they often had to fight their opponents for dozens or hundreds of moves, risking mutual annihilation, to decide the outcome. Even if they won, it would be difficult to capture the enemy in that state, which is why there was a consensus that Inborn talents were hard to kill. And it was thanks to this extremely strong ability to survive that Inborn Grandmasters became the strategic deterrent of the various nations. Without absolute certainty of killing an Inborn Grandmaster, it acted like a nuclear weapon, making other countries wary and hesitant to launch wars of annihilation lightly. From this perspective, Lu Yuan has, in fact, become a deterrent force beyond conventional Grandmasters. Chapter 659 - Chapter 659: Chapter 299: The End of the Western Expedition_2 Chapter 659: Chapter 299: The End of the Western Expedition_2 Because no ordinary Inborn Grandmaster could, like him, achieve the remarkable feat of killing four Innate powerhouses in just over a decade since his debut. However, thinking about it, this also makes sense. After all, what kind of existence is Lu Yuan now? An Immortal Method cultivator who has condensed one qi, a Martial Arts Xiantian Second Realm Grandmaster. Either of these achievements, regardless of whoever possesses them, is enough to make them unattainable by their peers in the world. After all, in a certain sense, these two realms have already reached the limits of the Immortal Martial Paths in the present world. In terms of Immortal method cultivation, as far as Lu Yuan knows, no one has been able to condense the second Five Elements qi, and they are all at the same level of cultivation as him who has condensed one qi. And according to his current cultivation perception, with today¡¯s Heaven and Earth Immortal Spirit lacking qi, unless someone cultivates and exchanges for cultivation like him through the Fortune Dao. Otherwise, cultivating according to the orthodox Immortal Method like the Five Thunder Book means that even after three to five hundred years, you shouldn¡¯t expect to condense the second qi. The problem is that a cultivator who only condenses one qi has a lifespan limitation of no more than two hundred years, so even with longevity techniques, you may only add one or two more decades at the most. In this short period, where is the time to break through and condense the second qi¡¯s cultivation realm? So, condensing one qi is basically the current limit of the Immortal Cultivation World of the Nine Provinces and Ten Domains. And this limit is falling at an extremely fast rate. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Perhaps in another century or two, it will be impossible for the world¡¯s cultivators to condense one qi. The immortal path is so desolate. As for the Martial Path, there¡¯s no need to say. The rumored Innate Third Realm, also known as the great master of the Earthly God and Immortal, hasn¡¯t been heard of since seven hundred years ago when the Zhao Kingdom issued the Kun Wu True Monarch in the north. Over the seven hundred years since then, no one has achieved such a realm. Judging from the current situation of martial artists who need a large amount of the Divine Blood Variant to aid in their breakthrough, Lu Yuan speculates that to reach the great master of the Innate Third Realm, a higher level of the Divine Blood Variant or similar spiritual objects are needed to assist. However, the Divine Blood Variants nurtured by the various sects are already experiencing large-scale degeneration of their bloodlines. Several Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens are even unable to meet the nurturing conditions of the Divine Blood Variant, resulting in the death of the different species. Under such circumstances, the hope of developing higher-level Divine Blood Variants or obtaining corresponding spiritual objects is completely cut off. Without the above conditions, Innate Fighters trying to reach the Third Realm and break through the Grandmaster level is simply dreaming. Thus, the Innate Second Realm is already the current limit for Martial Artists. And Lu Yuan has achieved both of these limits. Having reached the peak of both Immortal and Martial Arts, his terrifying strength is beyond the imagination of most people in the world. Because nowadays, there are no situations similar to him found neither in the Immortal Cultivation World nor in the Jianghu. In the earlier years, there may have been others who simultaneously cultivated both Immortal and Martial Arts, but it¡¯s been too long since they¡¯ve been around, and apart from some records in the classics, no clear impression remains. There are no objects of comparison. So, at this moment, Lu Yuan also doesn¡¯t know how strong he is. It¡¯s just a faint feeling that with the addition of Martial Arts, his own strength should be about two or three percent stronger than that of cultivators at the same realm, without any magical power. This amplification is neither too much nor too little. If other cultivators have the help of magical artifacts, this gap can be easily bridged. Lu Yuan simply wouldn¡¯t believe that all the major sects and Buddhist forces in the Nine Provinces that have been passed down to the present day do not have one or two sect-defining magical artifacts. It is precisely because of his fear of this that although his cultivation has reached levels comparable to those of the major Immortal Dao Sect Lords, he has never thought of fighting against them. To Lu Yuan, even if he conquered an Immortal Sect, the gains would be just that. He doesn¡¯t need an Immortal Sect spiritual land to cultivate, and he can rely on the Luck Heavenly Pillar to cultivate, and even achieve better results. Considering the current situation of the Immortal Cultivation World, every cultivator who accumulates a little magical power uses it to improve their cultivation, so who would have the leisure to run off and fight to the death with others? With the help of The Age of Dharma Decline, today¡¯s Immortal Cultivation World cultivators have an unexpectedly ¡°peaceful¡± character. Doesn¡¯t it show that even Dan Ding Path, which has been severely offended and trapped by Lu Yuan, has not retaliated at all until now? On the contrary, it is Lu Yuan, who suffers from delusions of persecution, who has repeatedly used spells to strengthen himself before and after, and the Divine Blood in his body he has cultivated for a long time has been consumed a lot, which is quite wasteful. Thus, under the ¡°peaceful¡± environment, as long as Lu Yuan doesn¡¯t go to the mountain gates of the various Immortal Sects to cause trouble and confirm his strength, the major Immortal Sects basically won¡¯t come to bother him after weighing the pros and cons. The threat at the level of immortal cultivation has been reduced to the greatest extent. Although it cannot be said that he can be completely free from this threat, at least it can be said that he is peaceful and worry-free. Under such circumstances, Lu Yuan naturally has no urgent need to look for magical artifacts or refine them. For him, the current grasp of spells and martial arts external body is enough for self-preservation and unparalleled in the world. In the future, he would wait until he becomes the Supreme Dominator of a state or the world to think about refining or finding magical artifacts. At present, he has no such need and no such interest. In summary, Lu Yuan, who has already mastered the limits of both Immortal and Martial Arts, is basically at the pinnacle of martial power in the world without resorting to super-conventional weapons such as magical artifacts. Chapter 660 - Chapter 660: Chapter 299: The End of the Western Expedition _3 Chapter 660: Chapter 299: The End of the Western Expedition _3 Compared to him, the other Immortal Dao Sect Lords probably wouldn¡¯t have any advantage. And Immortal Dao Sect Lords are characters who could deter the world¡¯s hegemonic powers. They are the ones who can oppose an entire country by themselves. Lu Yuan possessing this level of martial power and killing Zhao Changqing instantly isn¡¯t really that shocking. The reason why both armies are so shocked right now is mainly that they don¡¯t know what kind of person Lu Yuan is and what kind of terrifying martial power he possesses. That¡¯s why they are so surprised. If it were the Immortal Dao Sect Lords of other major sects who took action, people wouldn¡¯t be this surprised. On the contrary, they would think it¡¯s natural. After all, to ordinary people, talking about the strength of Inborn Grandmasters sounds like gods and demons. However, that so-called godlike and demonic description is just an adjective. Tens of thousands of elite armies could still resist Inborn Grandmasters head-on. But with a cultivator who has condensed Qi, even if they muster tens of thousands of troops, it is still hard to resist. For example, after Lu Yuan condensed his Qi, he mastered the Marsh technique. Using this technique could transform a hundred feet radius into a swamp. Basically, this could cover almost half of the tens of thousands of Nanzhao Army in the front. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï That is to say, with this technique, Lu Yuan can instantly annihilate two or three thousand ordinary soldiers. And with this kind of magic, if he has enough stored energy, he can use it three times. However, in reality, this technique doesn¡¯t need to be used three times. Just once is enough to instantly break the psychological defenses of any strong army. Even the Chu Army is no exception. Because in some sense, this is equivalent to a natural disaster. How can human power resist natural disasters? And for a cultivator who can control such a natural disaster-like power, it is like a god to ordinary people. Isn¡¯t it only natural and unquestionable for a god-like cultivator to kill one or two Inborn Grandmasters? Not being able to kill them would be strange. So it is precisely the wrong impressions and misconceptions that caused Lu Yuan¡¯s instantly annihilating Zhao Changqing to be such a huge shock. As his deeds become gradually known and the world¡¯s understanding of him deepens, the same situation won¡¯t happen again. ¡®Of course, besides my great strength, the fact that this Zhao Changqing is particularly weak is also a reason.¡¯ Lu Yuan glanced at Zhao Changqing¡¯s corpse not far away, an inexperienced fellow who had just broken through the Innate realm two years ago. He didn¡¯t even understand his martial arts external body well, so his control was extremely low. Moreover, he didn¡¯t know if it was because of the isolation of the southwestern tribes, but the Inborn Grandmasters from this region were slightly weaker than those from the mainstream Nine Provinces. The most obvious sign was their coarse martial arts external body. Whether it was the Great Witch Sacrifice from before or Zhao Changqing, their condensed martial arts external bodies were slightly inferior compared to other Grandmasters that Lu Yuan had seen. ¡®Maybe it¡¯s because of this that he died so easily. Otherwise, as an Inborn Grandmaster, he would have been able to struggle a little and go through one or two moves against me.¡¯ Lu Yuan shook his head, retracted his gaze, and turned his attention back to the Nanzhao Army ahead. At this point, after simmering for a while, the number of Nanzhao soldiers breaking ranks and fleeing had greatly increased. There were even parts of the army where the entire unit had fled. And in the face of this trend, even some Nanzhao officers who tried to stop it couldn¡¯t reverse the decline. Taking advantage of this excellent opportunity, it was time to break the enemy in one fell swoop. ¡°All troops, follow the Lonely King and kill!¡± Lu Yuan drew his sword from his waist, slowly lifted it above his head, then snapped his horse¡¯s reins and went ahead to kill. Behind him, tens of thousands of Chu Army vanguard soldiers who had been waiting for the order, let themselves go without the restraint of military discipline. Under the command of various officers, they formed into battle formations, roaring as they followed their king, with high morale pressing forward. Moreover, the personal guard cavalry followed Lu Yuan, who had become the tip of the arrow, and urged their warhorses into the Nanzhao Army. And this charge completely broke the Nanzhao Army¡¯s last bit of resistance. Especially when faced with Lu Yuan, the god-like figure in their eyes, seeing the terrifying flames surrounding the demon, and seeing their comrades turn into ashes with just a touch of the flame. They didn¡¯t even have to come into contact; just being near them, they were burned and ignited by the terrifying temperature emanating from the flames. The Nanzhao soldiers couldn¡¯t hold on any longer. Without an Inborn Grandmaster, they simply couldn¡¯t resist an ultra-high-level fighter like Lu Yuan. In this situation where morale was lost, the charge was like a stack of blocks, collapsing and disintegrating in an instant. Of course, In an army of tens of thousands, there are always brave individuals. There are also those who can¡¯t accept the reality or are too loyal to Zhao Changqing, such as the Nanzhao veteran officer Hua Kaiyun. Having already learned of the Crown Prince¡¯s death, he knew that there was no way to retreat, and there was no way for the Nanzhao Army or his subordinates to survive. He led his soldiers furiously towards Lu Yuan, trying to avenge their commander. These people came like a swarm, totaling over a hundred. For Lu Yuan, these numbers were naturally nothing. The Nanzhao soldiers who charged at Lu Yuan were instantly turned into flying ash by a wave of Red Sun True Fire. Apart from slightly slowing him down for a moment, it had no impact whatsoever. After waving away these small troubles, there were no more enemies in front of him who had the courage to block his way. Lu Yuan flicked the horsewhip, and the steed leaped forward, landing and kicking up a cloud of dust. He looked ahead, and there was no enemy left in sight. Looking behind him, he had carved a hole right through the huge Nanzhao Army formation. Countless Chu Army soldiers swarmed in, wielding weapons and chasing after the Nanzhao soldiers who had lost their courage and were crying as they fled in all directions. Seeing this, he wiped the dust from his face due to the impact earlier, revealing a faint smile. In Shenwu¡¯s sixth year, on the eleventh day of the sixth month, King of Chu, Lu Yuan, led the army to arrive at Nanchong Prefecture City, battled the Nanzhao Army on the southern outskirts outside the city. In front of the battle, he challenged the enemy general Crown Prince of Nanzhao Zhao Changqing. Zhao Changqing accepted and was beheaded by the King of Chu in front of ten thousand soldiers. Subsequently, the King of Chu led his army to charge the enemy formation, defeated the Nanzhao Army in one fell swoop, and then swept through the enemy camp. In one day, the enemy was broken. In this battle, more than ten thousand enemies were killed, over thirty thousand were captured, tens of thousands of Nanzhao enemy troops in Nanchong Prefecture were wiped out, and the siege of Nanchong was lifted. After that, for several days, the other armies reported successively, defeating all the Nanzhao enemy troops in Xichuan, and over a hundred thousand Nanzhao troops were annihilated. From then on, Xichuan was settled. Chapter 661 - Chapter 661: Chapter 300: Jinguang Palace City Chapter 661: Chapter 300: Jinguang Palace City Chengdu Prefecture, Jinguan City. A spirited army came from the east, bringing an unparalleled momentum, and poured into the city. Lu Yuan rode his horse, surveying the world-renowned fortress from left to right. The mottled city wall was heavily damaged, and some faint dark red stains remained, vaguely telling of the terrifying wars this city had once experienced. The original bluestone streets were now pitted and uneven, and most of the houses on both sides were damaged. Some had even collapsed directly, and no one cared to fix them. From time to time, glances came from the houses, but after just two looks at the fierce soldiers on the street, they withdrew like frightened rabbits, not daring to look again. Lu Yuan noticed all of this and shook his head disappointedly. The once world-renowned capital, on par with Baling, had declined to such a state in just over a decade, making people sigh. Today, Baling city has become the capital of Great Chu, with a population of 1.5 million and nearly 700,000 permanent residents. As for Jinguan City, the prosperous days when it had 100,000 families were long gone. It was questionable whether the city could even gather 5,000 households now. War was indeed the most devastating thing to a place, and in some ways even more terrible than natural disasters. They quickly arrived at the royal palace in the heart of the city. The royal palace of Jinguan City had a long history, said to be thousands of years old. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? In the beginning, the palace had been built by the barbarians who lived in the Xichuan region and used as the capital of the local barbarian kingdom for a thousand years. Later, the barbarians were defeated by the Qiang people, who ruled the Xichuan region and made Jinguan City their capital. The palace was naturally inherited and preserved, and with the growth of the population, it was also expanded and renovated. Seven hundred years later, the ruler of Golden City was the Great Wu, a dynasty before the Pre-Yue. At that time, the Great Wu Emperor launched an army of 500,000 infantry, 200,000 navy, who sailed up the Shuo River to conquer the Xichuan Qiang Kingdom. After three years of fierce battle, they annihilated it and established Xichuan County. As the newly expanded county needed stability, and as a way to win over the hearts of the local people, the Great Wu Heavenly Son often traveled west to stay in the city for nearly a decade. The palace in Jinguan City became the imperial palace of Great Wu Heavenly Son and was kept preserved. In later dynasties, emperors would occasionally travel west to stay in the palace, whether it was for war or leisure. When Li Xiong revolted and Lu Yuan led the Changsha army to recapture it, and the Nanzhao army attacked, the palace buildings were not heavily damaged, they only looted some of the treasures. As a result, compared to most of the damaged buildings in the city, the palace, which had been occasionally maintained, became the most complete structure in the city. Now that Lu Yuan had recaptured the Xichuan Prefecture and entered Jinguan City, he naturally took over the palace as a Great Chu mansion and moved in. There were not many people left in the palace. The beautiful palace ladies that Li Xiong had plundered from all over Xichuan had been taken away by Lu Yuan during his Northern Expedition to Xichuan ten years ago. Over a thousand beautiful women of Xichuan, almost half of the best ones, were taken into the Chu Palace and became his concubines. The majority of the others had been given as rewards to the court officials and generals. Later, the Western Chu State was established by the monks of White Phoenix Temple. Even those monks who had established the Buddhist state had their own rules and disciplines, and they could not be close to women, at least not openly. So, even though Jihui lived in the palace, it was only occupied by monks and the eunuchs left by the previous masters. There were about a hundred eunuchs who were pitied by Jihui and not driven away. Instead, they were left in the palace to clean and maintain it. All these were the information collected by the Imperial Palace¡¯s foreign affairs office over the years about the situation in the western region¡¯s palace. After Lu Yuan entered the palace, In the square in front of the main hall, a group of slender and graceful nuns, dressed in gray, were escorted by the personal guard into Lu Yuan¡¯s presence. Seeing their king, the leading personal guard quickly stepped forward and saluted, before reporting, ¡°Your Majesty, I have been ordered to clear the palace. There are more than 500 palace ladies captured inside, who were taken from various places by the Nanzhao Army after they invaded Xichuan last year.¡± ¡°There are also more than 300 monks. These were captured by the Nanzhao Army and originally lived in the palace. However, after being captured, they were all castrated by the order of the South Called Crown Prince, and made eunuchs, responsible for cleaning.¡± ¡°In addition, there are more than 100 nuns, some of whom lived in the palace originally, while others were seized from various temples by the Nanzhao Army after they conquered Xichuan.¡± ¡°Finally, there are more than 100 eunuchs left, all old men of the palace.¡± ¡°In total, there are 1,093 people. Please instruct us on how to deal with them.¡± After listening to the report, Lu Yuan looked at the crowd of people herded from various parts of the palace who were now in the square. They included palace girls, monks, nuns, and eunuchs, all of whom were surrounded by the army and looked afraid and anxious as they faced him. He glanced at the group, his gaze lingering a moment on the palace girls and nuns. Chapter 662 - Chapter 662: Chapter 300: Jin Guan Palace City_2 Chapter 662: Chapter 300: Jin Guan Palace City_2 Especially the latter, despite wearing monk¡¯s clothes, their exquisite and graceful figures could not be concealed at all. Moreover, being housed in the royal palace, it was obvious that they were treated as forbidden delicacies by the monks of Xichuan and the Big Emperor Son of Nanzhao Army, and their appearance and temperament were of the highest quality. Some of them were so perfect that even Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but be tempted when he saw them. In particular, some of the female nuns had inner strength and martial arts skills, and were from the Jianghu. It was just not known if they were from White Phoenix Temple. ¡®When I first crossed over, I vowed to be an emperor, a supreme leader of the martial arts world, have a harem of three palaces and six courtyards, and marry aristocratic ladies, witches, monsters, and saintesses as wives. Nowadays, aristocratic ladies have contributed a lot from various places in Chu State in recent years, and I am tired of playing with them in the palace. There is not much novelty. As for monster women, my queen definitely qualifies. I haven¡¯t found a witch yet, but I might focus on finding one in the future. As for saintesses, those female nuns who were born in the White Phoenix Temple can barely be considered half-saintesses, at least fulfilling some of my wishes.¡¯ Lu Yuan¡¯s gaze wandered over the female nuns, thinking happily in his heart. Since giving birth to his second son, Lu Hao, four years ago¨Cduring the third year of Shenwu, he spent a lot of time taking care of his two children, leaving him little time for himself. Moreover, due to his different status, a king couldn¡¯t possibly have only one woman. Therefore, under persuasion and consolation, Lu Yuan finally settled things with Lan Cai¡¯er and made the queen understand that he could have a harem with her consent. After that, he let his desires run wild and did whatever pleased him. The palace ladies, the ladies of the aristocratic families presented to him, the female heroes provided by the local Jianghu sects, and the young women collected by the local officials were all played by Lu Yuan. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï What had he been working hard for all this time? Immortality? Lu Yuan had this when he crossed over. Power? Driven by his desire for self-preservation, he had struggled for nearly twenty years and barely reached the top of this world, on par with those Immortal Dao Sect Lords. Influence? He was already the King of Chu, holding the territories of four provinces and two countries, and there were few who had more power than him under the sky, except for those Supreme Dominators. Lu Yuan already had all of these: longevity, strength, and power. For him, what others pursued was no longer a problem. Thus, with the confidence, what Lu Yuan sought naturally was enjoyment. After striving tirelessly for so many years, building up this foundation with effort and determination, it would be a waste not to enjoy it. What was the point of all his hard work? Just to pass it on to future generations? It was an open question whether his descendants could outlast him! Therefore, the mundane concerns held no meaning to Lu Yuan. He didn¡¯t have to worry about so much, just follow his own heart. That was true freedom and ease. Shaking his head, he put aside these distractions, and his gaze moved from the nuns to the palace ladies nearby. Those palace ladies were not bad either, although their appearances were mostly just excellent, there were also some outstanding beauties, not inferior to the women in his palace. He couldn¡¯t help but secretly nod his head in approval. ¡°Those castrated monks should all be sent back to the White Phoenix Temple and let them deal with them. As for the eunuchs, since they are old, let them stay and manage the royal palace. As for those female nuns and palace ladies¡­¡± Lu Yuan looked at those pity-evoking beauties, thought for a moment, and ordered, ¡°Select those with ¡®qualifications¡¯ and bring them back to Baling to join the royal palace. Leave some of the ordinary-qualified ones behind to be stationed here and take care of the palace. Also, pick out some more to reward the soldiers who have made great contributions in this battle.¡± When saying the word ¡®qualifications¡¯, Lu Yuan deliberately emphasized the sound. His personal guard understood immediately what the so-called ¡®qualifications¡¯ meant and took the order: ¡°I understand, I will arrange it right away.¡± Seeing this, Lu Yuan nodded with satisfaction and waved his hand, ¡°Go ahead.¡± He had been campaigning outside for two years. Previously, when he was in Qianzhong County, he had enjoyed many unique beauties of the Yi people, and their charm was intoxicating. Now that he was in Xichuan, although the beauties here were not new to him since he had enjoyed the ones from Xi Shu that were captured earlier, he had never experienced female nuns like these before. Looking at the nuns with a mix of divine and enchanting temperament, Lu Yuan¡¯s heart melted, and he almost couldn¡¯t help but want to take them to the bedroom immediately, to love and comfort these scared creatures. Fortunately, with his many years of training and practice, his self-cultivation was sufficient, and he didn¡¯t actually do that. At the moment, he had just recovered Xichuan County, and there were mountains of military and political affairs to address. It was not the time for pleasure. Moreover, after his previous instructions, his subordinates would surely make proper arrangements once he finished his official duties and retired for the night. They would make sure the beauties he had chosen were cleaned and fragrant before sending them to his bed. During the quiet and deep night, at those intimate moments, that was when the true flavor would be revealed. There was no need to rush now. Lu Yuan looked forward to it with great interest. ¡­ After arranging the people in the palace, Lu Yuan went to the West Pole Hall in the palace and summoned the city officials, mainly those from Xichuan County. Since breaking Jinguan City, the Xichuan County government that had previously been established in the eastern three prefectures of Xichuan was naturally to be relocated to Jinguan City, which had been the central city of Xichuan for thousands of years and was the legitimate county seat. Chapter 663 - Chapter 663: Chapter 300: Jin Guan Palace City_3 Chapter 663: Chapter 300: Jin Guan Palace City_3 Since there was already a well-established system of prefectures and counties, after the swift recovery of the five prefectures of Xichuan, the Chu State could quickly establish effective rule in the current Xichuan County, which had expanded to eight prefectures. As for the lack of officials in the five western prefectures, Lu Yuan had already instructed people to commence another Enke, to recruit a thousand juren and jinshi in order to supplement the vacancies for officials in the five western prefectures of Xichuan County, as well as the newly established Jianchang and Jianchuan prefectures in Qianzhong County. Now, the Enke had ended early in the fourth month, and over a thousand newly graduated juren and jinshi in Baling City were eagerly waiting for their appointments and assignments. Now that the two battles in the beginning of the year had been won, and the territories of two counties and seven prefectures had been successfully expanded, it was time to let these newcomers take office and help restore stability in the Chu State. Therefore, after annihilating the main force of Nanzhao in Nanchong Prefecture, Lu Yuan had already issued an edict to recruit officials from the country and head to the various places in Xichuan and Qianzhong to take up their posts. By now, most of the officials had already arrived and begun to set up the government structure in the various prefectures and counties of Xichuan, reorganizing the localities. So, Lu Yuan did not need to worry about these miscellaneous things; he called upon the Governor of Xichuan County for different instructions. ¡°Now that Xichuan County has been recovered, the five newly captured prefectures are all in ruins, with dilapidated households and no people in sight for thousands of miles. This is not acceptable; we must restore the vitality of this county.¡± Lu Yuan looked at the hastily arriving Governor of Xichuan County, his face solemn and stern: ¡°Previously, the more than 100,000 refugees stationed in Yuzhong Prefecture can now be sent back to their original places by the county government here and be resettled. Moreover, in the eastern three prefectures of Xichuan, there are too many people and countless poor households due to a lack of land. The local government here must also find a way to recruit those without land and relocate them back to the five western prefectures of Xichuan County, for proper resettlement. I will also have the court order the governments of the two prefectures of Xiangyang and Dongting to recruit people and relocate them to Xichuan. Additionally, I will relocate some of the Yi people from Qianzhong County and the southwestern Yi area; there may be as many as 200,000, so you must be prepared to receive them as well.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï To relocate people from the eastern three prefectures of Xichuan and from the prefectures of Dongting and Xiangyang was a plan long established by Lu Yuan. Preparations by the imperial court had been made even before the start of the war this year. Now, it was just to communicate the plan with the local authorities in Xichuan County. As for relocating the Yi people from Qianzhong County and the southwestern Yi region, Lu Yuan considered that the newly established Jianchang and Hui Chuan prefectures in Qianzhong County had too many Yi people, close to 200,000. Given the current situation where large-scale immigration is necessary in both Xichuan and Qianzhong, there simply aren¡¯t enough native people to assimilate the Yi people in these areas. In addition, Huang Xuan had already defeated the Jianchuan nation on the central front, occupied their capital city, and was now looting the local wealth and population, capturing more than 100,000 Yi people from Jianchuan nation. With the combined population of more than 300,000 Yi people, Qianzhong County simply could not bear the burden. Therefore, Lu Yuan decided to relocate 200,000 people to Xichuan. After all, there was a lack of a large population here, and they were also in the process of migrating from the native land; eventually, there were expected to be about a million Chu people in these five prefectures. With a huge base, it wouldn¡¯t take much effort to assimilate 200,000 Yi people. Also, separated from the southwestern region and dispersed among the various prefectures and counties, these Yi people would be like rootless duckweed, unable to make any waves. As long as there were local county soldiers and militia, they wouldn¡¯t have to worry about these people causing trouble. However, after Huang Xuan defeated the main force of Jianchuan nation, there was not much resistance left among the Yi people there. Jianchuan nation was a big country, with an area the size of five prefectures, including its vassal states, and a population close to one million. Furthermore, as the native land of Nanzhao country was being attacked by Chilih and Kunhai, and many territories had already fallen to them, in the face of the invasion of 100,000 troops and two Inborn Grandmasters from these two countries, Nanzhao country dared not be careless. At this point, more than 100,000 troops were being gathered to wage a war against the United Army of the two countries, and there was no spare force to manage Jianchuan country. So theoretically, Jianchuan country was now effectively occupied by the Chu State. If Lu Yuan was willing, he could establish prefectures and counties here at any time, and further expand the territory of the Chu State by 3,000 miles. However, Lu Yuan had lost interest in those mountains and hills in Jianchuan. To capture that land would bring few benefits, and precious resources would have to be spent on administration. Moreover, there were not enough Inborn Grandmasters in the Chu State to go and sit in that area. So, Lu Yuan¡¯s approach to that area was to scavenge for money and food, loot the Yi people, and plan to relocate them back to the Chu State, to supplement the local population that had been reduced due to large-scale migration. Based on this concept, he had already used soul communication to order Huang Xuan to loot more women and children in Jianchuan, and then relocate them back to the Chu State, to be distributed among the meritorious soldiers and landless men. As for the male Yi people, they could be left in Jianchuan. Let them be. They were not Chu people, so Lu Yuan did not care about them. ¡°Yes, your servant obeys.¡± The current Governor of Xichuan County, Shen Xin, also belonged to Lu Yuan¡¯s old people, who had risen from the ranks since Lu Yuan¡¯s time in Shaoyang Prefecture. As Lu Yuan¡¯s power expanded, Shen Xin was successively promoted to important positions in local government, and ultimately, he became a capable official. Having been tested for his abilities, Lu Yuan now trusted Shen Xin, and seeing that he understood the focus of his work, he waved his hand to let him leave. After the man left, he called for the next person. This person was not like Shen Xin, not a Chu State confidant, but his position was far more important. For no other reason than the fact that his name was Jihui, he was an Inborn Grandmaster and the former ruler of Xichuan country, now the leader of White Phoenix Temple. Now that the entire territory of Xichuan had been recovered, Lu Yuan finally found time to settle the surrendered national master Grandmaster properly. Chapter 664 - Chapter 664: Chapter 301: Reward and Trade Chapter 664: Chapter 301: Reward and Trade The spacious hall seemed rather silent. Lu Yuan sat on the throne for a while, lost in thought, until a faint sound of footsteps approached gradually from afar, snapping him back to reality. ¡°Old Monk Jihui pays his respects to Your Majesty.¡± An elderly monk dressed in a yellow monk robe, draped in a red kasaya, entered the hall and immediately bowed respectfully to Lu Yuan. Lu Yuan looked over. He saw that Saint Jihui, compared to their meeting nine years ago, had aged significantly. His eyebrows and beard were streaked with white, his face covered in wrinkles, and his figure hunched over. He looked like an old man who was on the verge of death, as if he would gasp for breath after taking just a few steps. Admittedly, the monk before him was indeed an old man ¨C he was 101 years old. However, for an Inborn Grandmaster with a lifespan of 150 years, being 101 years old was far from the twilight of one¡¯s life; it was still considered the prime of life. Theoretically, Jihui still had 49 years to live. Yet, in such a person who had plenty of time to squander, Lu Yuan sensed an aura of death surrounding him. ¡®Is it because he depleted a significant portion of his lifespan while previously engaging with Inborn Grandmasters in battle, despite his heavily injured body?¡¯ Lu Yuan thought to himself. Last year, when Jihui was besieged in Jianchuan, he suffered a severe injury during a surprise attack by King Yongchang of Nanzhao Kingdom while leading his troops to break through the encirclement. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 Afterward, it took great effort for him to escape back to Xichuan, only to face the crisis of Nanzhao Army¡¯s advance. With no choice, he had to drag his injured body to fight against Zhao Changqing. First, he persevered for several months in Panshi Prefecture City against Zhao Changqing. When the city eventually fell, he escaped to Nanchong Prefecture City, where he could finally catch his breath after a few months of rest. However, in April this year, before Jihui could fully recover, Zhao Changqing led his troops to attack again, forcing him to enter the battlefield with his injuries. Although relying on some secret techniques, Inborn Grandmasters could still display tremendous strength and fight against enemies even when severely injured. However, these secret techniques inevitably came at a high cost, often involving the depletion of an Inborn Grandmaster¡¯s life origin, or vitality. The importance of these aspects could be inferred just by hearing their names. And indeed, it was true. Upon consuming a significant amount of life origin and vitality, an Inborn Grandmaster¡¯s body would be severely depleted, causing rapid aging and a substantial reduction in lifespan. Such was Jihui¡¯s current situation. In fact, his condition was even more severe than Lu Yuan had imagined. ¡®Initially, I thought that even if this old monk had consumed a lot of his lifespan, he would lose at most twenty years and still have twenty to thirty years left to live. However, looking at him now, it¡¯s questionable whether he can even survive another two or three years.¡¯ Lu Yuan silently observed Jihui for a moment, his heart filled with disappointment. An Inborn Grandmaster with only two or three years left to live was of significantly less value to the Chu State. Such a person¡¯s role had changed from long-term nuclear deterrence to short-term intimidation. Nevertheless, even an Inborn Grandmaster with only two or three years left to live still held considerable value and could play numerous roles. Consequently, Lu Yuan quickly adjusted his mindset, hid his disappointment, and smiled as he raised his hand. ¡°Saint, there is no need for formality.¡± ¡°Thank you, Your Majesty.¡± Upon receiving permission, Jihui straightened his waist. Seizing the opportunity as he stood up, Jihui also observed his old acquaintance before him, especially his youthful face. His heart couldn¡¯t help but feel a sense of nostalgia. He remembered when he first met the King of Chu, the latter¡¯s face looked just as it does now ¨C no, perhaps even younger. And the vibrant vitality emanating from him spoke of his youth, with plenty of time to squander. In comparison, Jihui, now shrouded in senescence and filled with sorrow, felt like a rotten log in the morning sun ¨C utterly wretched and ugly. Furthermore, when he thought about the Great Chu, which was now rising like the sun, and the White Phoenix Temple, which had lost more than half of its disciples and had become a homeless sorry lot, the stark contrast between the two filled Jihui with a profound sense of loss and pain. ¡°This time, the venerable monk has offered to surrender and incorporate Xichuan into the Great Chu. Your act of benevolence and righteousness has earned my utmost admiration.¡± Although the Xichuan offered by Jihui had been reduced to half a prefecture, and even that piece of land could only be defended with Chu¡¯s assistance, Jihui still nominally held the title of ¡°King of Xichuan,¡± granted by Pre-Yue, on par with the Chu State. Theoretically, their status should be equal. The fact that such a figure chose to surrender to the Chu and offer his land carried immeasurable political and symbolic significance. If properly publicized and utilized, this would undoubtedly elevate Chu¡¯s standing and prestige internationally. Moreover, if the Chu handled Xichuan¡¯s surrender well, it would set an example for other smaller countries, making them more likely to give up resistance. Just considering these two aspects alone, the Chu State could not afford to mistreat Jihui and the White Phoenix Temple and had to make proper arrangements for them. Lu Yuan looked at Jihui¡¯s aged face and pondered for a moment before saying, ¡°For such a great contribution, you must be rewarded. I have previously mentioned to Hui An that the White Phoenix Temple can be relocated to Longyu Mountain in Qianzhong County. Qianzhong is a newly opened territory with a population consisting largely of barbarian tribes who defy the king¡¯s rule and follow foreign deities. The White Phoenix Temple, as a sacred Buddhist sect, has always guided people toward goodness. If they could settle in this county, they would surely spread the tenets of Buddhism and bring peace to the region.¡± Chapter 665 - Chapter 665: Chapter 301: Reward and Trade_2 Chapter 665: Chapter 301: Reward and Trade_2 He laid out his own conditions. The entire Qianzhong County, in terms of faith, could be handed over to the White Phoenix Temple, that is, to Buddhism. This benefit could not be said to be small. After all, what the White Phoenix Temple originally sought was just like other innate sects, to expand their own power into a county, so that it would fit their status in Jianghu. However, due to the exceptional situation of Linhai County, those coastal aristocratic families were individually powerful, not inferior to White Phoenix Temple, and they had already become a family through constant marriages of successive generations. Wedged among them, the White Phoenix Temple, no matter how skilled, could not expand their power at all. They could only be squeezed into a small corner, struggling to survive under various oppressions. It was precisely because of this difficult living environment that they were forced to find ways to break through and find a glimmer of hope from other places. This was also why the White Phoenix Temple agreed to Yue Country¡¯s request, following them on the Northern Expedition to Zhou Country. The goal was to get half a county¡¯s land as promised by Yue Country, to build their own Buddhist kingdom, so that the power of the White Phoenix Temple could grow and develop. However, the result was¡­ After a fierce defeat and a heavy loss in the confrontation with the Nanzhao Army, the Buddhist holy land was thoroughly awakened, realizing. Not everyone can play the game of world domination. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? It was for this reason that, after their sudden awakening, the White Phoenix Temple chose to find Chu State, intending to return to their original path, find a powerful country to rely on, and transform itself from a country back into a Jianghu sect. For this purpose, Jihui paid a huge price, consuming a large portion of her lifespan, resolutely executing Lu Yuan¡¯s orders, and holding back the Nanzhao Army in Nanchong Prefecture, throwing in her own bargaining chip. Now, it was time for Lu Yuan to fulfill his promises and repay them. The faith of the entire Qianzhong County, a desire that the White Phoenix Temple had longed for in the past, was Lu Yuan¡¯s return. However, even though he gave the faith of the entire Qianzhong County, he didn¡¯t feel like he was at a loss. First of all, as Lu Yuan said before, even after the immigration, the vast majority of the population in the county were still Yi people and not the civilized people under the king¡¯s rule. Facing these fierce and quarrelsome barbarians, relying on force alone would be somewhat inadequate. If there were Buddhist disciples coming to spread their faith, dissolve their resentment, and make these barbarians submissive, it would be a great thing for the local stability of Qianzhong County and the rule of Great Chu in this area. Moreover, using the widespread faith of Buddhism to replace the distinct local faith of the Chilih tribe and using the Buddha to replace their Chilih Great God would undoubtedly further undermine the culture of these Chilih Yi people, making them assimilate under Chu State even more quickly. All these were the advantages of religious culture. In terms of local security, the relocation of the White Phoenix Temple also brought great benefits. Even with the heavy losses inflicted by the Nanzhao Army, over half of White Phoenix Temple¡¯s disciples had died or been injured. However, the previous White Phoenix Temple was, after all, an Innate Great Sect. Moreover, by controlling half a county and a whole state, it wielded a vast amount of resources, further strengthening its power. Such a huge force, even after suffering losses and damages, still had considerable residual strength. As it stands, there are only over two hundred remaining disciples of the White Phoenix Temple, but those who have survived the many calamities and wars are undoubtedly the elite. Indeed, that was the case. Among the survivors, a majority were third-rate martial artists, with over thirty second-rate masters, and as many as seven first-rate masters. In addition, there was Jihui, the Inborn Grandmaster. Having such power was still far more superior than ordinary first-rate Jianghu sects. Even without Jihui, the White Phoenix Temple would still be a top-tier sect in Jianghu, comparable to the Five Poisons Sect before the rebellion against Yue. Such a powerful force, when stationed in Qianzhong County, would undoubtedly strike a heavy blow to the local Yi masters, aiding Chu State in its governance of the region. After all, the White Phoenix Temple, aspiring to promote Buddhism, was inherently at odds with the Yi people who believed in the Chilih God. In order to spread its faith, the White Phoenix Temple would have to face those Yi rebels who harbored resentment against Chu State and wanted to covertly disrupt the peace. In this respect, the interests of Chu State and the White Phoenix Temple coincided and overlapped, allowing for cooperation and joint efforts to maintain local security and crack down on the Yi rebel masters. Therefore, considering the benefits Chu State gained compared to granting the illusory faith to White Phoenix Temple, it wasn¡¯t really a big deal. In the Pre-Yue years, there were five Innate Great Sects on the local level. Yet the whole empire of Da Yue remained unshakable, without any Innate Great Sect stirring up trouble. Now, the power of Chu State might still be inferior to that of Pre-Yue. However, correspondingly, Chu State had far fewer innate sects within it, with only White Phoenix Temple remaining. The difference in power between the two was even more pronounced than that between Pre-Yue and Jianghu, with no fear of the White Phoenix Temple stirring up trouble. Moreover, speaking bluntly. Given Chu State¡¯s current upward development trend, as long as the common people can survive, who, after being well-fed and idle, would follow a group of monks in rebellion? If there were indeed large-scale rebellions led by monks, it would undoubtedly indicate a problem with Chu State¡¯s rule, and it would be time for Chu State to meet the same fate as Pre-Yue. As for this, Lu Yuan was quite indifferent. Because he didn¡¯t worry about this problem at all. As an immortal with unlimited lifespan, Lu Yuan has the confidence that as long as he is alive, Chu State would not face the problems of incompetent rulers, corrupt officials, or end-of-dynasty scenarios. Chapter 666 - Chapter 666: Chapter 301: Reward and Trade_3 Chapter 666: Chapter 301: Reward and Trade_3 Even if it does happen, and he becomes a tyrant in the future, that time would probably be hundreds of years later. What would the Nine Provinces be like hundreds of years from now? He estimated that there might not even be a single cultivator left, and even an Inborn Grandmaster in Jianghu might become a legend. And at that time, as the only cultivator and Inborn Grandmaster, even if the whole world revolted, Lu Yuan had the confidence to suppress it by his own strength. This was the self-confidence of a person with longevity, the self-confidence of a strong man. As Lu Yuan was pondering on this, Jihui, who had been promised his favor, bowed again to thank him, ¡°The old monk thanks the King. Rest assured, when the White Phoenix Temple arrives in Qianzhong County, we will devote ourselves to spreading Buddhism, educating the people, and stabilizing the area for Great Chu.¡± Jihui also made his own response, which was only to preach and not to cause trouble. ¡°Hmm, with the saintly monk¡¯s words, I feel at ease.¡± Lu Yuan heard the meaning in the other¡¯s words, nodded with satisfaction, and then looked at Jihui, falling into contemplation. The placement of White Phoenix Temple was settled. However, the placement of Jihui was still undecided. After all, the other party was an Inborn Grandmaster and a country¡¯s lord; it was impossible not to give him a suitable position. After some thought, Lu Yuan came up with a position and said, ¡°I wonder if the saintly monk knows that I previously established a position in the court called Guard of the Nation True Person. This position is ranked below the Grand General and the left and right ministers. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? The Guard of the Nation, known as Huang Xuan, is a real immortal with profound skills, not inferior to the True Persons of the Immortal Sects like Ziyun Dao. The saintly monk is an esteemed figure in Buddhism, with the strength of an Inborn Grandmaster, equally unparalleled in the world. I want to appoint the saintly monk as the Guard of the Nation Dharma Master, on par with the Guard of the Nation True Person and stationed in Qianzhong County, overseeing military affairs, and defending the southwest for my Great Chu. What does the saintly monk think?¡± The Guard of the Nation Dharma Master was Lu Yuan¡¯s arrangement for Jihui. Not only was it a high position, ranked below the Grand General, but it also had control over the military affairs of Qianzhong County and great power. It can be said that he was given both name and power, with great honor and benefits. Of course. In Qianzhong County, where all the civil and military officials were from the true core of Chu, this so-called supervision of military affairs was just a formality. The civil and military officials in Qianzhong County would not listen to Jihui, and their loyalty was to the Great Chu. Jihui¡¯s real purpose was to make use of his identity as an Inborn Grandmaster to help deter the local powers and repel foreign experts. He probably knew this well. As expected, upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s arrangement, Jihui immediately understood and tactfully replied, ¡°Thank you for your majesty¡¯s grace. However, this old monk has always been proficient in Buddhism but has never learned the art of military affairs nor governance. I am afraid it will be difficult to handle the affairs of Qianzhong County. I only have my martial arts that can be used to help the King deal with some enemies in Jianghu. Assigning this position to me might cause trouble for Qianzhong¡¯s local administration.¡± Lu Yuan laughed and waved his hand, ¡°No problem, the Dharma Master can just cultivate in the temple. When a strong enemy appears, just lend a hand. As for those mundane matters, the local civil and military officials will handle them by themselves and will not bother the Dharma Master.¡± ¡°If that¡¯s the case, then the old monk has no objection.¡± Jihui nodded, cooperating with Lu Yuan to finish this performance. However, afterward, a hint of difficulty appeared on his face. Seeing this, Lu Yuan naturally realized that the other party¡¯s pretentiousness was still in need of something else and felt a little confused. Yet, considering how well Jihui had collaborated with him just now, he was willing to cooperate with Jihui once more and asked, ¡°Is there anything else the Dharma Master needs?¡± Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s words, Jihui sighed and said with a wry smile, ¡°There is one more thing. As the King may have noticed, this old monk has been fighting against strong opponents several times while carrying serious injuries. I have used too many secret techniques and have consumed too much of my essence. My lifespan is short now. Although I¡¯m still alive now, I can¡¯t survive for more than two years. Even as the Guard of the Nation Dharma Master at this point, I cannot serve the King for long. Therefore, before my death, I would like to make a deal with the King.¡± When Jihui greeted Lu Yuan earlier, he had noticed that Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes had been scrutinizing him. He was aware that he could not hide his condition from Lu Yuan. Actually, he didn¡¯t intend to conceal it. As Lu Yuan had guessed, due to his continuous battles with strong enemies while carrying grave injuries and using too many secret techniques, Jihui¡¯s remaining lifespan had been greatly reduced, with only two years left to live. However, unlike Lu Yuan¡¯s calculation, the lifespan he had left was not only two or three years, but five or six years. The reason was simple. The White Phoenix Temple, after all, was a sacred Buddhist site with a history of thousands of years, and countless secret methods and treasures had been accumulated in the temple over that time. Among them was a Nirvana Turtle Breathing Method that could transform one¡¯s life into Nirvana¡¯s intent, entering a turtle¡¯s breath state. In this state, the practitioner would fall into a deep sleep without consciousness or sensation, not requiring food or drink, and all signs of life would decline to an extreme point, reducing the erosion of life-force to a minimum. In this way, by using the Nirvana Turtle Breathing state, Jihui¡¯s lifespan could be extended to five or six years. Although such an extension required one to fall into a deep sleep, forsake the outside world, and virtually isolate oneself, it was akin to being imprisoned. The price was not too high. Being able to guarantee the presence of an Inborn Grandmaster for a few more years was a small price to pay for the White Phoenix Temple. Jihui had already dragged the White Phoenix Temple from Linhai County to Xichuan due to his own selfish desires, ultimately bringing it to the brink of destruction. Now, in order to atone for his sins, he would use what remained of his life to protect the White Phoenix Temple for a little longer, barely making up for his mistakes. However, that was not enough. Merely living for two or three more years was far from enough time for the White Phoenix Temple. Chapter 667 - Chapter 667: Chapter 302: Spiritual Object Reserve Chapter 667: Chapter 302: Spiritual Object Reserve Nowadays, the Celestial spirit qi of Heaven and Earth is facing depletion year after year, and various Divine Blood Variants are also constantly degenerating and dying. Not only are the cultivators becoming rarer, but even the Innate Fighters are decreasing year by year. Therefore, in the face of the Divine Blood Spirit Medicine that is diminishing with every bit used, the various major sects and even the great countries in the Jianghu are all adopting extreme inheritance cultivation methods. For example, when an Inborn Grandmaster is nearing the end of their life, they would select a suitable young successor within the sect and train them to be a new Inborn Grandmaster. In this way, they could make the most of the lifespan of each Inborn Grandmaster, allowing them to exert even greater value. According to the normal process, an Inborn Grandmaster would usually select a suitable successor and train them in the last 20 years of their life. Lu Yuan could train Sun Siwen to become an Innate Fighter in just ten years. In 20 years¡¯ time, those Inborn Grandmasters would have enough time to select a satisfactory successor, preserving their legacy. But the problem is, Jihui, who is currently 101 years old, is still 30 years away from the age required to train a successor. This means that there isn¡¯t actually a suitable successor in White Phoenix Temple at present. Moreover, finding a new suitable successor hurriedly isn¡¯t easy either. Especially when they have just suffered such a disaster and lost so many of their young disciples, it¡¯s even more difficult to select a qualified successor. And indeed, that¡¯s the case. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï After knowing that he doesn¡¯t have much life left, Jihui had already asked the monks in the temple to select a successor. However, unprepared and in a rush, there was no suitable candidate to be found in White Phoenix Temple. This Innate Great Sect now faces the same risk of legacy interruption as the Nanhai Country during this critical moment. After Jihui¡¯s demise, it¡¯s possible that White Phoenix Temple may not be able to cultivate a new Inborn Grandmaster for a long duration, or maybe not ever again. Facing such a dilemma and this existential crisis concerning the sect¡¯s legacy, Jihui would simply not be able to stand idly by. So, while he¡¯s still alive and while there¡¯s still an Inborn Grandmaster left in the temple, he must find a way to ensure the future of the White Phoenix Temple. He wants to guarantee that after his passing, White Phoenix Temple¡¯s legacy can be preserved and not be easily eliminated by those coveting their treasures. After all, as an Innate Great Sect, there are numerous precious items within White Phoenix Temple. Especially those Divine Blood Variants that can help people break through Innate, they are enough to attract countless greedy eyes. With an Inborn Grandmaster in White Phoenix Temple, they have the strength to defend themselves even with a large number of Divine Blood Variants. But, if they lose their Inborn Grandmaster, White Phoenix Temple would become like the current Nanhai Country¡ªpossessing great treasures but powerless to protect them. They would become the target of every major power in their vicinity, all wanting a piece of the pie. Jihui certainly didn¡¯t want to see White Phoenix Temple end up being devoured by a pack of wolves. Therefore, before that happens, he has to send away their treasures that he no longer has enough strength to defend, and exchange them for favors, giving White Phoenix Temple better benefits in the process. So, when faced with Lu Yuan¡¯s probing gaze, Jihui said solemnly, ¡°Your Majesty, although our temple has suffered a great disaster with many treasures and spirit seeds gone, I had anticipated the crisis and had them moved beforehand. As a result, there is still some foundation left in the temple.¡± At present, inside the White Phoenix Temple resides 31 Divine Blood Variants, 871 elixirs stored from previous generations, and 109 Different Species Sheds. These accumulations are the result of a thousand years of our White Phoenix Temple¡¯s efforts. I am willing to dedicate 80% of these spiritual objects to your majesty in hopes that you will protect our temple, so that the legacy of White Phoenix Temple can be passed on without worries and free from external tribulations.¡± Yes, the path and method chosen by Jihui was to offer all excess treasures to the King of Chu that White Phoenix Temple couldn¡¯t digest. Afterward, by using the favors obtained from these treasures, he asked Chu State to protect White Phoenix Temple. Not only would this resolve the source of chaos brought by the disaster, but it would also secure a long-lasting support for White Phoenix Temple. However, by doing so, White Phoenix Temple, which had lost more than 80% of its foundation, might face great difficulty in cultivating another Inborn Grandmaster in the future. According to the experience accumulated by White Phoenix Temple over a thousand years, training a top-notch expert to become an Inborn Grandmaster requires about 500 Divine Blood Elixirs. Only then can their Inner Strength, body, and soul undergo metamorphosis. After giving away 80% of their foundation, White Phoenix Temple would have only about 180 elixirs and 6 or 7 Divine Blood Variants left. With these assets, accumulating the 500 Divine Blood Elixirs needed is next to impossible. On the other hand, ensuring that the temple has several top-notch masters throughout the generations to maintain the status of a top-ranked sect is not a problem. Nevertheless, the loss of benefit and the psychological gap that comes with falling from an Inborn Grandmaster to a top-ranked sect are enough to make people uncomfortable. But what is there that Jihui can do? No other choice remains. White Phoenix Temple now simply doesn¡¯t have the 20 years required for him to slowly select a qualified successor and then train them to be an Inborn Grandmaster gradually. Moreover, without an Inborn Grandmaster, even if they have some connections with Chu State, they might not be able to deter other ambitious individuals from trying to snatch their treasures single-handedly. In the face of wealth that could potentially cultivate one, even two, Inborn Grandmasters, even great countries like Zhou, Liang, and Ning might find it difficult to resist. Moreover, when facing a weakened White Phoenix Temple, they would hardly need to invest much effort, as just one or two Inborn Grandmasters would be enough to eliminate the sect. Chapter 668 - Chapter 668: Chapter 302: Storage of Spiritual Items _2 Chapter 668: Chapter 302: Storage of Spiritual Items _2 With the strength and agility of an Inborn Grandmaster, they can easily launch a surprise attack, steal the items, and run without fearing Chu State¡¯s retaliation. Not only these foreign countries. Seeing that White Phoenix Temple is so weak and has such great wealth, does the King of Chu standing in front of them not have his own desires? Jihui is not naive enough to believe that after the White Phoenix Temple submits to Chu State, the other party will genuinely not harm them. Kings are known for their ruthlessness. Classical examples of using people and then abandoning them in history have proven to be a warning. Therefore, instead of waiting for others to come and steal, it is better to take the initiative to offer it. Not only can they avoid disaster, but they can also gain the favor of the King of Chu, and it can be said to be the best of both worlds. As for the remaining 20% of the treasury, it is far from enough to cultivate an Inborn Grandmaster. Although this number of treasures is large, it is not worth the risk for an Inborn Grandmaster from other nations to intervene. If no Inborn is involved, the remaining top-level experts of White Phoenix Temple are enough to deter other top-rated powers. This is the best solution under Jihui¡¯s calculations. So after stating his terms, he eagerly looked towards Lu Yuan. He had already paid such a high price and offered the Divine Blood Elixir and the Divine Blood Variant, enough to cultivate another Inborn Grandmaster for Chu State. The White Phoenix Temple had cut off such a large portion of their assets, shouldn¡¯t the other party give enough rewards and benefits in return? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Otherwise, how can they reassure the world? At this time, Lu Yuan was also shocked by the sudden deal proposed by Jihui. He had thought that the other party would propose other conditions, but he never expected that White Phoenix Temple would actually offer 80% of the interests it protected. That was a full 80%! Although Lu Yuan didn¡¯t know if the data Jihui revealed was the total value of the White Phoenix Temple¡¯s treasury. But just the 80% that the other party mentioned, that was nearly 700 Divine Blood Elixirs, 24 Divine Blood Variants, and dozens of Different Species Sheds. If all the benefits above were utilized, it would be enough for Lu Yuan to cultivate two Inborn Grandmasters and refine another Yellow Turban Warrior Avatar in between. That is to say, the items given by the White Phoenix Temple can provide Chu State with the power of three Inborn-level fighters. ¡®No wonder they are the Inborn Great Sect with a heritage of thousands of years. They have so many good things. Their foundations are deeper than what I have searched for in more than ten years.¡¯ Lu Yuan¡¯s heart was both shocked and awed. And this was just the White Phoenix Temple. Other forces transformed from sects of Jianghu, such as Hanzhong, Su Country, and Nanhai Country, should have similar treasure storage as the White Phoenix Temple. Especially Nanhai Country. This clueless guy, who has lost the protection of an Inborn Grandmaster, is in a worse situation than the White Phoenix Temple. Thinking of such a weak and helpless character possessing such a vast amount of treasures, Lu Yuan¡¯s heart began to pound. He made up his mind that after dealing with the matters in Xichuan and when he had the time, he would definitely visit Southsea. This trip would not be to destroy the country, but to take away the treasures that do not belong to the weak, so that they can no longer be covered in dust and can demonstrate their true value in the hands of the strong. But that¡¯s another story. Right now, it¡¯s more important to first complete the deal with the White Phoenix Temple and eat the meat that¡¯s been brought to their mouths. Converging his thoughts, Lu Yuan looked at Jihui, who was full of anticipation, hesitated for a moment, and replied, ¡°The White Phoenix Temple has offered treasures, which is a great achievement. Your loyalty to the country is well noted. I have always rewarded those who have merit and will never let down the loyal and brave. Jihui, hear my decree.¡± Jihui immediately bowed down below, no longer calling himself a monk but responding with the etiquette of an official: ¡°This servant is here.¡± Lu Yuan solemnly said, ¡°The White Phoenix Temple has a history of contributing to the country. This great merit deserves a great reward and is essential for the people¡¯s hearts. From today onwards, I specially grant the White Phoenix Temple the title of National Guardian Temple. From now on, successive abbots of the temple can inherit the title of National Guardian Master. This title is a third-grade rank and also grants the National Guardian Master the right to assist the government in handling various affairs related to Jianghu and to ban illegal activities. Monks from the temple can also join relevant government offices and enjoy the same treatment.¡± Lu Yuan proposed his conditions. The hereditary third-grade title of National Guardian Master, a certain degree of authority in managing affairs related to Jianghu, and the channel for promotion in relevant government departments. These three points are enough to push the National Guardian White Phoenix Temple to the top of Chu¡¯s Jianghu hierarchy and enjoy countless honors. With these guarantees and treatments in place, the White Phoenix Temple will merge completely with Chu State, inseparable. As long as Chu State doesn¡¯t perish, the White Phoenix Temple will no longer have to worry about destruction. These benefits are enough to balance the treasures offered by the other party. As expected, when Jihui heard Lu Yuan¡¯s promise, his eyes lit up, and he immediately bowed down and said, ¡°This servant thanks the great king for his kindness. From now on, the White Phoenix Temple will do its utmost for the Great Chu, handling Jianghu affairs well, and not causing worry for the king.¡± It seemed that Jihui was also aware of the other purpose behind Lu Yuan¡¯s promise. That was to use the White Phoenix Temple as Chu¡¯s spokesperson in Jianghu, to help unite and stabilize various Jianghu forces in Chu, and to act as a white glove assisting Chu in handling some matters that could not be handled openly by the government. Although this had the intention of pushing the White Phoenix Temple to the forefront to attract the hatred and malice of Chu¡¯s Jianghu. But that¡¯s the point. With an official spokesperson and the top status in Jianghu¡­ Chapter 669 - Chapter 669: Chapter 302: Spiritual Object Reserve_3 Chapter 669: Chapter 302: Spiritual Object Reserve_3 So, the status of White Phoenix Temple in the Jianghu was similar to Shaolin Temple in Jin Yong¡¯s martial arts novels. And what about Shaolin Temple? It was a prestigious sect that has been at the top of the martial world for thousands of years. It had both fame and power. Isn¡¯t it more than enough for the White Phoenix Temple to achieve a similar status? As for the troubles that come with it. To wear the crown, one must bear its weight. If the White Phoenix Temple wanted these benefits, how could it be possible without paying the price? There is no such thing as a free lunch in this world. Moreover, Jihui was confident that the strength of White Phoenix Temple was enough to deal with these dangers and troubles. As for the benefits of being the leader of the Jianghu in the Chu State, he and White Phoenix Temple were determined to enjoy them. Thinking of this, he looked up at Lu Yuan, and both of their fox-like eyes showed a satisfied smile. ¡­ Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï After concluding the deal with Jihui, the decree of appointing White Phoenix Temple was quickly passed down. Upon receiving the decree, Jihui, who had gained from it, tactfully sent the promised spiritual objects and Divine Blood Species to Xichuan Royal Palace immediately. After Lu Yuan checked the number and confirmed that nothing was wrong, he immediately had the items sealed and sent back to Baling. Although he had obtained a lot of elixirs in this transaction, enough to immediately cultivate an Inborn Grandmaster. But even so, Lu Yuan had no intention of using them right away. Nowadays, Celestial spirit qi is becoming increasingly scarce, and it will be harder for him to obtain these spiritual objects in the future. Thus, in a way, it was quite reasonable for those Inborn powerhouses to lengthen the cultivation of their heirs and cultivate the next generation of Inborn Grandmasters in the last twenty or thirty years of their lifespan. Lu Yuan intended to follow this path. However, instead of copying it completely, he made some modifications. He decided to focus on cultivating his own descendants instead of pushing them to the limit. In fact, there are already significant reserves of Divine Blood Elixir and Divine Blood Species in the Chu State. In various blessed lands and cave worlds within the country, thirteen Divine Blood Species have been scattered and raised while there are about five hundred Divine Blood Elixirs in reserve. These were all obtained from the extermination of enemies and requisitioned from Jianghu sects. Among them, the resources obtained from the conquest of the Southwest barbarians this time were the largest, accounting for about forty percent of these reserves. Now, with the contribution from the White Phoenix Temple, the number of Divine Blood Species in Chu State will reach thirty-seven, and the Divine Blood Elixirs will be close to one thousand two hundred. Frankly speaking, relying on these thirty-seven Divine Blood Species, even considering the decline of Heavenly and Earthly Aura and the death of the Divine Blood Species and other losses, they could provide Chu State with around two thousand Divine Blood Elixirs within the next hundred years. If the time is prolonged, say, two hundred years, the harvest might be an additional one thousand. This means that within the next hundred years, even if Chu State has no other means of acquiring resources, they will have about three thousand Divine Blood Elixirs, enough to cultivate six Inborn Grandmasters. Extended to two hundred years, four thousand Divine Blood Elixirs would be enough for eight Inborn Grandmasters. Although these numbers may seem large, they average out to one Inborn Grandmaster every sixteen or seventeen years within a hundred years, and one every twenty-plus years within two hundred years. This level of cultivation efficiency barely meets the passing line of major countries like Zhou, Ning, and Liang. It¡¯s not much to boast about. Besides, considering that in the future, channels for obtaining these Divine Blood Species will become increasingly narrow, Lu Yuan could not help but be cautious about the use of these spiritual objects. After all, he now has two children. His eldest son, Lu He, has already paved his way to Innate, and the remaining Celestial Spirit qi in the Storage Spirit Jade is enough for him to smoothly break through Innate. As for his second son, Lu Hao, previously there was no solution and Lu Yuan had to help him slowly accumulate the necessary resources over time to break through Innate. Now, with the contribution from White Phoenix Temple, his younger son¡¯s path to Innate can be planned. Considering the ever-growing number of concubines in Lu Yuan¡¯s harem, even if he tried to control his time with them in order to reduce the chances of pregnancies as much as possible, accidents are bound to happen eventually. For these accidents, he can¡¯t favor one over the other since they are all his own flesh and blood. Therefore, Lu Yuan must also reserve Divine Blood Elixirs for his future descendants. His own family is always more reliable than outsiders. There is a saying, ¡°Don¡¯t let the water in your own field flow to others.¡± He looked forward to the day when Inborn Grandmasters in Chu State exceed ten, and most of them have the surname Lu. At that time, the scene would be very interesting. To achieve this goal, storing more Divine Blood Elixirs now is necessary. ¡°Hmm¡­ Brother Sun, He¡¯er, Hao¡¯er, in at most twenty years, when they grow up, there will be three more Inborn Grandmasters in Great Chu. By then, including me, Cai¡¯er, Xiaoqing, and Huang Xuan, Chu State will have seven Inborn-level fighters. Breaking ten is just three people short, and the goal is near. It seems that I have to work harder in the next two years and have a few more children. However, during these twenty years, my Cultivation will definitely continue to break through, and reaching the condensation of the second qi shouldn¡¯t be a problem. At that time, perhaps I could also train one or two Yellow Turban Strongmen, which is another option. Well, let¡¯s follow both paths and see how many Inborn fighters can be cultivated in the end, depending on what Heaven has in store.¡± At the wharf outside Jin Officer City, Lu Yuan watched the naval fleet escorting the numerous spiritual objects away, and finally murmured to himself, his distant gaze revealing a hint of nostalgia. He had been away from home for two years, and his two children at home must have grown taller and stronger. And the queen, with whom he has formed deep feelings after all these years of being together. Although in Jin Officer City Palace, there were many beauties from Xichuan and contributions from Buddhist nuns, all of them were the extremes of the world. But playing with wildflowers too much will eventually become boring. He missed the white moonlight at home. Chapter 670 - Chapter 670: Chapter 303: The Battle Ceases and Resumes Chapter 670: Chapter 303: The Battle Ceases and Resumes After sending off the returning navy, Lu Yuan began to get busier in the following days. As for the reconstruction of Xichuan County, he didn¡¯t need to think too much about it. Now, with the newly appointed juren and jinshi officials from the imperial examination arriving at their posts one after another, the local government of Xichuan County, led by Prefect Shen Xin, rapidly resumed the local people¡¯s livelihood development. However, by the time Lu Yuan had recovered the entire Xichuan County, it was already the end of June, and they had missed the spring plowing and summer planting season. This meant that in the second half of this year, the entire Xichuan County would not be able to be self-sufficient and meet its own grain consumption needs. The millions of remaining people in the entire territory would need the assistance of the court to survive this difficult second half of the year. Fortunately, for Chu State, which now controls half of the Jianghan Plain and the entire Dongting Plain, the annual production of grain is innumerable, not only enough to meet the consumption of the people of Xiangyang and Dongting, but also enough to set aside a lot of the surplus to support other places. Not only that. After Lu Yuan¡¯s warning to the Southern Sea Country Envoy at the beginning of the year, the tribute owed by the Southern Sea Country for this year was quickly sent over. Three million silver taels and two million dan of grain, this huge amount of money and grain input, especially the latter, greatly relieved the grain pressure in Chu State. With the massive immigration project of millions of people started one after another in Xichuan and Qianzhong Counties, the amount of grain consumed during this period is astronomical. It is worth noting that all immigrants who have moved to the immigration area have basically no output in the first year, and need the court and local government to support them during this period. Money is not much of a problem. After looting the entire Yi People of Qianzhong County and plundering Nanzhao Country, Chu State was not short of silver taels. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Instead, it was grain, which was needed to maintain the hundreds of thousands of troops on the front line and the consumption of even more immigrants. The consumption of grain in the front-line counties of Chu State was calculated in millions of dan every month. This huge number, even with the wealth of the Dongting Plain and the Jianghan Plain, is somewhat unbearable. In response, in order to alleviate the grain pressure, the Baling court, with Cui Changqing and others, had someone take the three million silver taels of tribute given by the South Sea Country, and went back to the South Sea Country to buy grain. Three million silver taels could buy roughly the same amount of grain at the current grain prices in the South Sea Country, which was about three million dan of rice. In the past couple of years, grain prices in the South Sea Country have been on the rise. The reason, of course, is that the Chu, Su, and Song countries have been continuously going to the South Sea Country to buy grain. Due to the ongoing war in Xichuan, the three countries of the Coalition have consumed a lot of troops and manpower on the front lines, especially with the establishment of new prefectures and counties in the newly opened southwestern territories, all three countries have more or less moved to new prefectures and counties. All of these factors have greatly affected the agricultural production of the Chu, Su, and Song countries. Among them, Chu State is still okay, backed by two major grain-producing areas, and with the savings from previous years, can barely maintain its supply. Domestic grain prices hover around five cents per jin, which is not too high, but not too cheap either, within the range that the lower-class people can tolerate. The situation in Song Country is also similar. Located in Jiuzhen County where it has a fertile Red River Plain land, not inferior to the Jianghan Plain. Relying on this grain-producing area, although Song Country is also short of grain due to the war, with the money plundered from the southwest Yi, they can still support themselves by buying some grain from the South Sea Country. But Su Country is not doing well. Yulin County, where it is located, is mostly mountainous and not much better than the southwestern Yi. In addition to Su Xuange¡¯s series of tyrannical policies, coupled with the effects of war and heavy taxation, the people¡¯s livelihood productions of Su Country in Yulin County have completely collapsed. According to the reconnaissance feedback from the imperial city¡¯s outer office, now in the entire Yulin County, more than one hundred thousand people have been forced to move by Su Xuange and have been relocated to the new Tonghai County established by the country. At the same time, Su Xuange has relocated more than two hundred thousand Yi people from Tonghai County and resettled them in Yulin County. Such mutual immigration has stabilized Su Country¡¯s rule over both counties. However, with all this back and forth, Su Country has about four hundred thousand more people who are unable to produce anything and need to be supported by the court and local government. In addition to Su Country¡¯s hundred thousand troops on the front line, tens of thousands of troops in the country, and more than 100,000 civilian workers transporting grain to the front line¡­ With all these factors added up, there are about 700,000 to 800,000 people in Su Country who do not produce anything and need the support and blood-sucking of the court and local government to survive. In contrast to this huge population of blood-suckers, Su Country¡¯s real base in its homeland, Yulin County, only has about 500,000 people still engaged in continuous production after a series of wars and migrations. Among these 500,000 people, there are a large number of elderly, women, and children, because the real adult men are either drafted to be soldiers or pulled to transport grain as civilian workers. Just relying on these 500,000 elderly, women, and children, how much grain can be produced? How many people can be supported? I¡¯m afraid even 50,000 troops can¡¯t be supported. So ever since Su Country started the war, the country¡¯s grain consumption has always been supported by external purchases. Looking around at Su Country¡¯s neighbors, Chu and Song countries are lacking grain themselves, and they certainly cannot sell grain to Su Country. The only thing Su Country could rely on was the peaceful, non-warrior producing South Sea Country. So at the beginning of the war, Su Country sent people immediately to the South Sea Country to buy grain after they plundered the first wealth from the southwestern Yi. Chapter 671 - Chapter 671: Chapter 303: The Battle Ceases and Resumes_2 Chapter 671: Chapter 303: The Battle Ceases and Resumes_2 Launching wars, plundering wealth, buying food with money, then launching wars again¡­ The entire Su Country was caught in such an endless vicious cycle. It was precisely because of Su Country¡¯s constant purchase of grain that the grain prices in Nanhai Country had soared year by year. It went straight from the initial price of three cents per catty of rice to the current nine to ten cents per catty, more than triple the original price. Under such circumstances, not only did the common people of Nanhai Country suffer, but so did those of Su Country. On the contrary, the grain merchants of Nanhai Country made a fortune. In just two years, thanks to the constant grain purchasing from Chu, Su and Song countries, there were more than a dozen billionaires in Nanhai Country, highlighting the enormous profits involved. When Lu Yuan saw this intelligence, he was somewhat envious. Relying on the wealth gained from waging wars, the wealthy businessmen in Nanhai Country had enjoyed an unprecedented comfortable and joyful life in these two years. For this reason, Chu, Su and Song countries actually harbored much resentment towards Nanhai Country, which constantly sucked their blood, especially towards those grain merchants. However, due to the ongoing wars and the unique geographic location of Nanhai Country, it was not a good time to take action against them, so they just endured it for the time being. But Lu Yuan believed that once the Three Countries could spare their hands, or when Ning Country was ready, it would be time for the predators to encircle and devour Nanhai Country, ultimately leading to its demise. However, such a day might not come for a few more years, and the drama wouldn¡¯t unfold so soon. At present. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Chu, Su, and Song countries still needed Nanhai Country to provide them with grain, so even if they knew the merchants were gouging prices, they had no choice but to turn up their noses and buy high-priced grain. In fact, if possible, it would undoubtedly be better to purchase grain from neighboring Ning, Zhou, and Liang countries, which were adjacent to Dongting Prefecture and had convenient access to the Yangtze River. But these three countries, without exception, were either enemies of Chu Country or considered it a competitor. It was impossible to purchase grain from them. Even Ning Country, the only one of the three without conflict, would rather let its stored grain rot in warehouses than transport it to Chu Country to support their enemy. This lack of channels was what made the grain from Nanhai Country so precious. Because this was the only country willing and capable of supplying grain to Chu, Su, and Song countries. In the absence of choice, even if it was expensive, they had no choice but to buy. The only consolation was that the grain shortage in Chu Country was not that large, and the grain supplied by Nanhai Country, and the money spent on purchasing grain, could just about cover the gap. It wasn¡¯t too big or too small a comfort. ¡­ Apart from the grain shortage, another major concern of Lu Yuan was the recruitment and construction of the army. Although the overall defeat of the Nanzhao Army was smooth, the enemy still had more than 100,000 troops, including many brave warriors. To eliminate them, the Chu Army had to suffer some casualties. In addition, half of the Forbidden Army sent to Nanchong Prefecture to assist Jihui in guarding the city at the beginning of the year was directly crippled due to the constant wear and tear of the Nanzhao Army, with a vacancy of 10,000 soldiers. In total, there were about 17,000 casualties. These vacancies needed to be filled by new recruits, matched with veteran soldiers, and trained as quickly as possible to form combat power. To this end, Lu Yuan had decided to draw 3,000 veteran soldiers from all units, plus 17,000 new soldiers, to form a separate Forbidden Army. As for the other understaffed Forbidden armies, they would simply disband the half-crippled army in Nanchong Prefecture and incorporate them into the other units. With this arrangement, apart from the new majority Forbidden Army, the remaining four Forbidden armies, after a period of integration, could quickly regain their full strength. What Lu Yuan had been doing these days was just that. Aside from handling daily government affairs and cultivation, he would occasionally make time to patrol the Forbidden Army¡¯s main camp outside Jinguan City to ensure the progress of troop training. Under his supervision, the results were quite encouraging. After replenishing the vacancies, the Forbidden Army units quickly integrated and formed combat power with the addition of veterans and a little training. Even the newly formed Forbidden Army, under the guidance of veterans, quickly learned some simple formations and flag signals, mastering a certain level of weapon usage skills. Although they still appeared inexperienced overall, at this pace, with another one or two years of training and one or two low-intensity wars to expose the new soldiers to bloodshed, an elite force would take shape. Seeing this, Lu Yuan had already sent a message back to Baling, asking the Forbidden Army stationed there to expand the remaining two Forbidden Armies using the same method of veteran soldiers leading new recruits. The letter should have reached Baling by now, and the framework of the two new armies might have been set up already. At this stage, Chu Country was expanding rapidly, and a large number of troops were needed to garrison Xichuan and Qianzhong. Lu Yuan urgently needed more troops to fill the defense gaps. He had no choice but to slightly speed up the expansion strategy that had been originally planned for two years, and strive to complete it by the end of this year. Luckily, Huang Xuan had plundered Jianchuan Country and obtained a large amount of money and grain. This income barely filled the gap created by the expansion of the army, so it didn¡¯t bring too much pressure. Chapter 672 - Chapter 672: Chapter 303: The Battle Ceases and Resumes_3 Chapter 672: Chapter 303: The Battle Ceases and Resumes_3 Everything was still under Lu Yuan¡¯s control. However, as a result, he couldn¡¯t help but order Huang Xuan to further oppress the Yi common people in Jianchuan Country, to squeeze out more money and grain to fill the void in the domestic treasury. After all, they were just Yi people, so it didn¡¯t matter if they suffered a little. Compared to death, the local Yi people should be understanding and sympathetic to the difficulties of Chu State. ¡­ While Chu State was busy with organizing the local provinces, purchasing grain, and preparing for war, nearby nations were also making various moves. Firstly, in the beginning of the eighth month, when Jihui brought the monks of White Phoenix Temple to Qianzhong County to take up positions at the National Guardian Temple. Two major pieces of news came from the southwest. First was about Song Country. After the beginning of the year, King Xie Ning of Song led several battles against the Dali Army, but they were unable to make progress. Not only did they fail to seize more land, they also lost tens of thousands of soldiers and some of their current territories. Since then, Xie Ning finally realized that it was impossible to take advantage of Dali Country as he had initially planned. Moreover, after two years of war, Song Country suffered from the increased taxation, exhaustion, skyrocketing grain prices, and unrest among the people due to survival problems. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Some of the remaining inhabitants from Jinghai Country began to cause trouble in local areas, even inciting small-scale rebellions. Although these rebellions were quickly suppressed, their impact was undoubtedly huge. This reflected the Song people¡¯s disgust for the war. If it continued, it would be hard to say whether it would eventually lead to a large-scale rebellion that involved the whole nation, like what had happened in Su Country. As a member of an aristocratic family, Xie Ning was not like the Jianghu martial artist Su Xuange, who relied solely on force to solve problems and only considered his own preferences without considering the consequences. His political wisdom was quite adequate. Therefore, realizing the internal hidden danger and the continuous warfare at the front line, Xie Ning decisively chose to cease fighting. He sent a messenger to Dali Country to negotiate a truce between the two nations. On the other hand, Dali Country was also exhausted from the war. Moreover, the collapse of the Great Changhe in the north and the sudden adjacency with the Chu State had a considerable deterrent effect on Dali Country. Dali Country urgently needed to reinforce its northern border to deal with the immense pressure from Chu State. Therefore, when the Song Country sent an olive branch, both sides eventually signed a ceasefire agreement in the beginning of the eighth month after some negotiations. They agreed to recognize each other¡¯s sovereignty over their respective territories and live in peace as neighbors without raising troops again. After signing the peace agreement, Song Country only informed Su Country before immediately withdrawing its troops. A hundred thousand Song soldiers retreated from the front line. In the newly established Yinsheng County, Xie Ning left only 25,000 troops under the command of a trusted general. He then returned to Song Country with the remaining troops. At this point, the participation of Song Country in this joint war ended with the expansion of one county and five prefectures. With Song Country out of the picture, Su Country was no match for Dali Country on its own. Therefore, when Su Xuange learned about the situation, he had no choice but to reluctantly negotiate a peace with Dali Country after cursing Song Country for its betrayal. Compared to Song Country, the situation in Su Country was even worse. Because of Su Xuange¡¯s tyranny, there were refugees fleeing from Su Country every day. The fleeing crowds included Su people, the remaining Yi people, soldiers from Shu State, conscripted civilian workers, and the local Su and Yi people from Tonghai and Yulin Counties. It could be said that Su Xuange had become a tyrant in the eyes of the Su and Yi people, far surpassing the cruelty of previous rulers. Under such a ruler, few people were willing to accept his rule. Taking advantage of the situation, on the border between Yulin County and Dongting County, Chu Country had already received over 50,000 Su people. At the border of Qianzhong County and Tonghai County of Su Country, there were more than 30,000 refugees, including Yi people. As for the areas bordering Nanhai Country and Song Country, according to the intelligence from the imperial city¡¯s Intelligence Bureau, there were also many refugees, no fewer than ten thousand. In the lower strata of Su Country, the numerous escape incidents were countless. The foundation of Su Country¡¯s rule had completely collapsed. The only reason it could still hold on and not be destroyed was due to Su Xuange¡¯s Inborn martial power and the tens of thousands of elite soldiers under his command who belonged to the vested interests. However, with the loss of access to resources from Dali Country, a lack of sufficient financial and material support, and the total collapse of internal production, the eventual demise of Su Country could not be avoided without reforms. It was unclear whether Su Xuange saw this and had the courage to carry out reforms. But in any case, in the middle of the eighth month, after Song Country, Su Country also officially ended the war with Dali Country through peaceful negotiations. It lasted two years, and Su Country withdrew from the alliance with the result of one county and four prefectures. During the two years of war, Dali, Song, and Su Countries all suffered heavy losses, with varying casualties, ranging from tens to hundreds of thousands. Although Su and Song countries made some gains, it required a considerable amount of time to assimilate the spoils of war. After losing almost one county¡¯s territory and suffering nearly 200,000 casualties, Dali Country also needed a long period of recovery to restore its vitality. Although the truce among the three kingdoms was not really what they wanted, it was the best outcome under the current situation. With the end of the war among them, the remaining conflicts in the southwestern region were between Chu, Chilih, Kunhai, and the three nations in Nanzhao Country. However, before the outcome of this war surfaced, another major turning point occurred in the battle north of Xichuan County. ¡­ On the second day of the ninth month in the sixth year of Shenwu. Zhou Country¡¯s 150,000-strong army led by Eastern Pillar State General Dongfang Wuyun besieged the Hanzhong Country¡¯s capital, Baishi City, for three months and finally captured it on that day. King Qiao Kangquan of Hanzhong was forced to flee to the south with thousands of remnants, together with his relatives and officials, in a pitiful state, retreating to Jianmenguan in the south. The remnant soldiers were gathered in the remaining two prefectures, continuing to hold out. Zhou soldiers took this opportunity to sweep through the three prefectures in the north of Hanzhong Country, regaining control of Hanzhong¡¯s ten prefectures that had been lost for nearly a decade. At the same time, having lost the protective barrier of Hanzhong Country, Zhou Country now bordered Chu State¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture to the west. The Zhou army¡¯s front had reached Xiangyang¡¯s western border. Chapter 673 - Chapter 673: Chapter 304: Negotiating Peace and Relocating Seals Chapter 673: Chapter 304: Negotiating Peace and Relocating Seals Jinguan City, Royal Palace. ¡°King of Chu, the Zhou people are coming aggressively, with no less than three hundred thousand soldiers and horses ahead and behind. The commander leading them is Dongfang Wuyun, whose divine power is difficult to resist. My king has been fighting against them for half a year, and our hundred thousand soldiers and horses have been almost depleted. Our Baishi Royal Capital has fallen into enemy hands. Now, our country has only thirty thousand remnants left, who have retreated to Jianmen Pass to guard it and barely resist the invasion of the Zhou people. However, the Zhou people¡¯s strength is immense, and as a great country, they are overwhelming our small country. It is really difficult for Hanzhong to resist. Previously, my king and his allies launched the Northern Expedition together and fought against the Zhou people when we were in Pre-Yue. Now our country is in trouble, and we hope that the great king can extend his help and send troops to rescue us. My king is willing to submit to Great Chu and become a vassal state. From now on, we will serve as subjects for generations and act as a shield for the northern border of the Great Chu.¡± Inside the West Pole Hall, a messenger from Hanzhong was kneeling on the ground, tearfully begging and pleading with Lu Yuan. The Zhou people were coming aggressively, and within half a year, they had broken through the capital of Hanzhong. At this time, the three prefectures north of Hanzhong had already fallen. Only the two prefectures of Xichuan and Jianmen Pass in the south were able to resist the invasion from Zhou country. But given the strength of Zhou and its formidable army, even with Jianmen Pass as a barrier, it would still be difficult for Hanzhong to resist. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? If there were no external assistance, Jianmen Pass would not be able to hold against the Zhou army¡¯s overwhelming invasion for even two months. Without this crucial pass, the Zhou people would be able to march right in, and it was likely that Hanzhong would be destroyed before the end of the year, following the collapse of the Xichuan Kingdom. Confronted with the possibility of a disastrous defeat, Qiao Kangquan naturally did not want to accept it. He had left his family behind and traveled thousands of miles to Xichuan, exhausting countless resources and efforts to build up the foundation of Hanzhong. How could he be willing to give up everything so easily? However, to keep Hanzhong going, there was no way to rely solely on his own strength. The only choice was to seek external help and ask for a powerful enemy capable of confronting Zhou directly, to intervene in this war and contain the aggressive invasion of Zhou. Looking around the surrounding area, the only force that met this requirement was Lu Yuan¡¯s Chu State. Therefore, after escaping back to Jianmen Pass, Qiao Kangquan gathered the remnants of his forces while recruiting soldiers and horses from the remaining two prefectures in the rear. He also sent messengers to Jinguan City to seek help from King Lu Yuan of Chu, who was staying there. Thus, the scene unfolded before him. ¡°Messenger, please get up first.¡± Lu Yuan glanced at the kneeling Hanzhong messenger, who was begging with a stern and solemn tone, ¡°The Zhou people are like wolves on the northern border, always greedy and ambitious. During the Pre-Yue period, they colluded with Li Xiong of Shu territory to invade Xichuan aggressively, causing Wuan Marquis to lose the battle of Ping Shu where he had no choice but to retreat to Tianmen Prefecture. If it weren¡¯t for our joint efforts with the King of Hanzhong to fight off the Zhou people, the land of Xichuan would already be in the hands of the northern people at this time.¡± But it has been less than ten years since the truce, and the Zhou people have breached the agreement and attacked Hanzhong again. Such actions are truly brutal and rude. Messenger, rest assured, as long as I am here, I will not allow the Zhou people to succeed. You can go back and tell the King of Hanzhong to hold on for a few more days, and then I will arrange for the Xichuan soldiers and horses to go north to Jianmen Pass to help repel the Zhou people.¡± As for whether to help Hanzhong, Lu Yuan had no hesitation whatsoever. The Zhou people had already reached Jianmen Pass. What kind of place is Jianmen Pass? It is the first barrier in the northern territory of Xichuan and the gateway to Xichuan Prefecture, as well as the border between Xichuan Prefecture and Hanzhong Prefecture. If the Zhou people were to seize this pass, Xichuan¡¯s north would be left with no other barriers. With the Zhou people in control of the pass, they could send troops southward at any time and march straight into Xichuan Prefecture. At that time, the Zhou people could either attack or defend, solidly seizing the strategic initiative. To resist the Zhou people, Chu would have to station a large number of troops in Xichuan Prefecture, which would tie down a significant number of soldiers and horses, leaving them immobilized. With such an important place, Lu Yuan naturally could not bear to see it fall into the hands of the Zhou people. Moreover, the two remaining prefectures of Hanzhong, Jiange and Tongchuan, were the only ones out of the ten in Xichuan that were not under Chu¡¯s control. Lu Yuan had long considered them his territory and planned to take them back. Even for the sake of a complete Xichuan, Lu Yuan could not allow the Zhou people to wipe out Hanzhong. So sending troops to help was already a settled matter. In fact, even before the arrival of the Hanzhong messenger, Lu Yuan had already ordered the four veterans of the Forbidden Army stationed outside Jinguan City to mobilize and asked the prefectures to prepare food and fodder, ready to head north at any time. With eighty thousand troops on hand, even if the Zhou people had three hundred thousand, Lu Yuan had no fear and was confident that he could fight them with the elite under his command. Moreover, it was still a question whether the Zhou people in the north actually had three hundred thousand troops. Yes, the Hanzhong messenger did say that the Zhou people had three hundred thousand soldiers and horses coming south this time. However, it was obvious that this was nothing more than an attempt by the other side to inflate their power, intimidate, and scare Chu into sending troops. As for the number of soldiers and horses coming from Zhou this time, through the investigations of the Imperial City¡¯s External Affairs office and Lu Yuan¡¯s years of leading troops¡¯ experience, a rough estimate was made. Previously, Zhou had maintained a scale of one hundred thousand soldiers and horses in Hanzhong Prefecture. This time, taking advantage of the great defeat of the Xichuan Kingdom and the loss of a powerful ally in Hanzhong, the Zhou people had drawn another fifty thousand elite troops from the north. There were also around twenty-four thousand prefecture and county soldiers in Hanzhong under Zhou¡¯s control, which was also a considerable force. A total of one hundred and seventy-four thousand soldiers, led by the Southern Pillar State Grand General Dongfang Wuyun of Zhou, made up the main force of the Zhou people¡¯s invasion this time. Chapter 674 - Chapter 674: Chapter 304: Negotiating Peace and Relocating Seals_2 Chapter 674: Chapter 304: Negotiating Peace and Relocating Seals_2 Furthermore, for the transport of food and fodder, as well as for siege consumption, the Zhou People had also mobilized more than 100,000 civilian workers in Hanzhong Prefecture. With these people, the number of Zhou forces indeed amounted to 300,000. But that was before. As the Hanzhong messenger said. To resist the Zhou invasion and protect his territory, Qiao Kangquan, the King of Hanzhong, was unyieldingly firm in his resolve to stand against the Zhou forces. Previously, he had assembled 100,000 troops around Baishi City, the capital of Hanzhong, not to face the Zhou forces in a decisive battle, but to wholeheartedly defend the fortress. Against a formidable fortress commanded by an Inborn Grandmaster with 100,000 troops, even if the Zhou forces were three times that number, it would not be easy to take it. The war started in March and continued until September, with both sides fighting fiercely in and around Baishi City. The 100,000-strong Hanzhong army was almost entirely wiped out on the city walls. The Zhou army did not fare much better, suffering heavy casualties with over 100,000 soldiers killed or injured, including many elites. Under such heavy losses, the original 300,000-strong army of Zhou Country might not even amount to 200,000 now, with at most only 100,000 being the elite troops left. Lu Yuan¡¯s 80,000 well-trained and reserved troops marched northward, and after rendezvous with Hanzhong¡¯s remnants, they could face the Zhou forces, which were of similar strength but battle-weary, giving them potentially higher chances of victory. With this strength, he was naturally not afraid of Zhou Country. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï However, if possible, Lu Yuan actually did not want to confront Zhou Country right now. After regaining the lost territory of Hanzhong Prefecture, Zhou Country¡¯s borders had almost returned to their original eight prefectures after years of expansion and conquest. With such vast territory, even though the land they occupied in Yong State was not as fertile as other states, they still controlled a population of no less than 30 million. With this enormous population base, although Zhou Country¡¯s current army was only 800,000 strong, if they wanted, they could easily raise another 20 or 30 million troops with sufficient battle strength at any time. This is only in terms of the ordinary soldiers. After the Northern Expedition, nearly ten years of recuperation saw the eight Grand General positions in Zhou Country fully filled again. Moreover, by recruiting Jianghu Grandmasters and cultivating their own, they added another three reserve Grand Generals, all of whom were Inborn Grandmasters. In other words, Zhou Country now had a total of eleven Inborn Grandmasters. In terms of quantity, this was already twice as many as Chu Country. If Zhou Country was willing, they could deploy four or five Inborn Grandmasters to the Hanzhong battlefield at any time. With so many Inborn Grandmasters gathered, even Lu Yuan would face considerable pressure. It was not that he was worried about not being able to defeat the enemy. With his current strength, which had reached the extreme in both Immortal Method and Martial Arts, he would not have much difficulty in dealing with five or six Inborn Grandmasters of the First Stage, and could even defeat them. However, the Zhou side knew Lu Yuan¡¯s details. His identity as a cultivator was not a secret in Zhou Country. It was impossible for him to rely on surprise attacks to win as he had done in the past. As such, it would not be as easy for him to eliminate Zhou Country¡¯s Inborn Grandmasters as before. Without eliminating Zhou¡¯s Inborn Grandmasters, their quantity and mobility meant that they did not have to directly confront Lu Yuan. Each Inborn Grandmaster could lead tens of thousands of troops, one group marching along the Han River to Xiangyang, and another crossing mountains and ridges to launch surprise attacks on Xichuan. Just these two moves alone would be enough to put Chu Country in a tight spot. Even if Lu Yuan had overwhelming strength, if both sides attacked each other¡¯s rear and wreaked havoc, he would still be the one to lose in the end. Of course, all of these were the most extreme choices. As long as both Zhou and Chu countries did not completely tear each other¡¯s faces apart and prepared to start all over again, these situations would not occur, and all wars would continue to be within a controllable range. Even so, Lu Yuan did not want to be entangled with Zhou Country in a war within this controllable range. While Zhou Country had a population of 30 million, Chu Country, even after annexing Xichuan and plundering some of the Yi People from Jianchuan, had a population of no more than 8 million. Zhou Country could mobilize a million troops, but even with all its might, Chu Country could only muster up to 300,000. Given the disparity between the two countries in terms of power and resources, even if the two sides were to consume each other at a one-to-one ratio, it would still be a significant loss for Chu Country. This gap in national strength could not be filled by Lu Yuan¡¯s own exceptional martial prowess alone. Therefore, at a time when he had just expanded his territory and urgently needed to consolidate his gains, Lu Yuan did not want to engage in a major conflict with other countries now. Especially not against Zhou Country, a world-class power. And this idea seemed not only to be shared by Chu Country, but also by Zhou Country in the north, which had just achieved a great victory. This could be seen from the fact that after they had captured Baishi City, they only tried to attack outside Jianmenguan Pass, and did not make any further aggressive moves. It seemed that they too were not ready for a full-scale war with Chu Country. Thus, the outcome of this war ended with the recovery of Hanzhong Prefecture, with no further advances. This was also in line with common sense. After all, Chu Country was surrounded not only by numerous enemies, but also powerful opponents at its borders. To the north was Wei Country, to the east was Liang Country, both of which were powerful rivals not inferior to Zhou Country. And to the west of Yong State, where Zhou Country was located, there was also a Western Liang Country that occupied three prefectures. Moreover, in the Snow Mountain Plateau, which belonged to the outer territories southwest of Yong State, there lived millions of Snowy Wilderness People as well. Chapter 675 - Chapter 675: Chapter 304: Negotiating Peace and Relocating Seals_3 Chapter 675: Chapter 304: Negotiating Peace and Relocating Seals_3 These two enemies in different directions could each deploy hundreds of thousands of troops, both of which were formidable opponents for Zhou Country. With so many enemies entangled, it was not easy for Zhou Country to fight Chu State with full force. Of course, all of this was just speculation made by Lu Yuan based on the intelligence gathered from various parties. Whether it was correct or not, he would have to lead the troops north and meet the Zhou People to find out. ¡­ When the messenger from Hanzhong had arrived crying and left excitedly, he quickly returned to Jianmenguan with the good news that Chu State was willing to send troops. Shortly after his departure, on the tenth day of the ninth month, Lu Yuan officially inspected the troops outside Jinguan City, reviewing the various armies. After leaving a newly-built forbidden army and county soldiers from Xichuan, a total of more than 40,000 people remained behind. He personally led the remaining 80,000 forbidden troops and 70,000 civilian workers and marched north toward Jianmenguan. On the 20th of the ninth month, Lu Yuan arrived at Jianmenguan with his troops. King Qiao Kangquan of Hanzhong personally went 10 miles out of the city to welcome him, treating him like a minister. The next day, after receiving news that Chu army had arrived in large numbers, Zhou army made a slight probe, confirmed the enemy was tough, and immediately sent messengers to Chu camp. ¡°I, the foreign minister, meet the King of Chu.¡± In Chu camp, after being led into the big tent, Zhou People¡¯s messenger paid respects to Lu Yuan. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ¡°Now that our two armies are fighting each other, what¡¯s the matter with the messenger coming to the camp at this time?¡± Lu Yuan looked up and down the Zhou army messenger named Xia Qingxuan. He appeared to be a gentle scholar in his early thirties, but there seemed to be some sharpness hidden under his gentle exterior, and his temperament was quite extraordinary. After bowing his hands, Xia Qingxuan solemnly replied, ¡°Reporting to King Chu, I am here to negotiate peace and call for a ceasefire with your army.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s expression moved: ¡°Negotiate peace?¡± Although he had already guessed Zhou Country¡¯s choice, he was still somewhat surprised by their decisiveness. ¡°Yes, to negotiate peace.¡± Xia Qingxuan nodded and then calmly said, ¡°This time our army went south for the sole purpose of reclaiming the lost territory of Hanzhong and had no intention of fighting with Chu State. Now that the three prefectures of Hanzhong have been reclaimed, our goal has been achieved, and we can say that it is perfect. Actually, there is no major conflict between Chu State and Zhou Country. We, Zhou Country, are content and don¡¯t want to continue the war. Having newly consumed two prefectures, King Chu must also need time to recover. Since this is the case, why should both sides continue the fight? Isn¡¯t it better to call for a ceasefire and negotiate peace?¡± When these words fell, the face of King Qiao Kangquan of Hanzhong, who was sitting on the side in the tent, immediately became gloomy. Zhou Country was happy to have reclaimed their lost territory, of course. But their happiness came at the expense of Hanzhong losing nearly half of their land. With only two prefectures now, Hanzhong¡¯s strength is now similar to that of the small countries like Hui Chuan and Nong Dong in the southwestern Yi region, with less than 300,000 people and no more than 30,000 soldiers. With such a weak foundation, they no longer had any bargaining chips. That¡¯s why even when Zhou People came to negotiate peace, intending to turn their occupation of Hanzhong into a fait accompli, Qiao Kangquan could only watch helplessly without saying anything. And in fact, Zhou People didn¡¯t even care about him at all. Previously, the half-prefecture-backed Hanzhong was worth wooing. But now that they had shrunk back to Xichuan, left with only the two prefectures ¡®s lands, it was completely dispensable. Even in Zhou Country¡¯s eyes, Hanzhong, which now seemed like a floating duckweed in the wind, might be directly annexed by Chu State within a month or two, completely perishing. In this case, what is the value of such a power that is on the brink of collapse? Not only Zhou Country but even Lu Yuan didn¡¯t think much of Hanzhong anymore. He was determined to reclaim the two prefectures that Hanzhong currently occupied. Having weakened to this point, Hanzhong no longer had any value as a buffer between Zhou and Chu States, and Chu State no longer needed them. On the contrary, controlling Jianmenguan, the gateway to Xichuan, was more valuable and meaningful to Lu Yuan. Otherwise, he would worry that Zhou Country might enter Xichuan again at the drop of a hat if he left the gateway to such a weak Hanzhong. If that were to happen, it would hit Chu State¡¯s Achilles heel. In order to prevent this from happening, he naturally wanted to nip the potential trouble in the bud as soon as possible. But all that lay ahead. For now, it was more important to reach an agreement with Zhou Country as soon as possible and end this war that both sides didn¡¯t want to fight. Therefore, as soon as Lu Yuan heard Xia Qingxuan¡¯s words, a smile appeared on his face, ¡°The messenger¡¯s words are indeed in line with my intentions. Chu and Zhou families¡­¡± Following that, the conversation of harmony, hidden danger, and compromise carried back and forth in the tent with strength and resilience. It wasn¡¯t until nearly dusk that Xia Qingxuan and Lu Yuan reached a relatively consistent understanding of various principles and details on peace talks after several hours of negotiations. Seeing that his goal had been achieved, Xia Qingxuan promptly took his leave. After sending him off, the atmosphere in the tent immediately eased, no longer as tense as before. The Chu State generals present were mostly pleased. After more than two years of fighting, even the war-loving warriors like them were somewhat weary, just like Lu Yuan. At this time, not having to go to war with a big enemy like Zhou Country and not having to bear the enormous pressure of death naturally cheered them up. The only one who was out of tune with the atmosphere around him was Qiao Kangquan, who was thoroughly sold out and had become the ultimate loser. But even with so much resentment and anger in his heart, facing the colossal Zhou Chu States, which he couldn¡¯t resist, he dared not express any dissatisfaction. He even had to put on a stiff smile on his face, trying to blend in with the crowd as much as possible so as not to appear conspicuous. Despite this, Lu Yuan looked at him after Xia Qingxuan left, and then smiled, ¡°King of Hanzhong, now that Chu and Zhou have ceased fire and negotiated peace, the war in the north has subsided, and Hanzhong is safe. At this opportune moment, I also have a matter to discuss with you. For example, relocation¡­¡± At the last two words, Lu Yuan¡¯s tone suddenly became heavier, and his expression solemn. Chapter 676 - Chapter 676: Chapter 305: Adding Another Vassal State Chapter 676: Chapter 305: Adding Another Vassal State Relocated? Upon hearing these two words, Qiao Kangquan¡¯s expression slightly changed, revealing a trace of confusion in his eyes. He had been a ruler of a country for several years, and previously the head of an aristocratic family, so his political accomplishments and vision were not lacking. Thus, it meant that the King of Chu wanted to reclaim the two prefectures of Xichuan that were in his hands, but doing so would be too embarrassing. So, he wanted to give himself another territory, exchanging other places for Jiange and Tongchuan prefectures. After he realized this, Qiao Kangquan quickly understood what Lu Yuan meant. As for this arrangement, after understanding the reasons behind it, Qiao Kangquan didn¡¯t have much resistance in his heart. No one knew better than him what the situation was like in Hanzhong Country now. Being the ruler of Hanzhong Country, he deeply understood that Hanzhong Country had now completely lost all hope. After losing three-fifths of his territory, he was still nominally the King of Hanzhong. But Chu and Ning countries had two or three hundred thousand people in one prefecture, and even up to seven or eight hundred thousand. Hanzhong Country¡¯s two prefectures together had a population of less than three hundred thousand. Calling himself a king was equivalent to no difference from a Prefect. It just sounded better on the surface. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Therefore, after understanding the reality and strength gap, he didn¡¯t have much objection, and asked with slight apprehension, ¡°What does Your Majesty mean?¡± ¡°Zhou Country is a tiger and a wolf.¡± Looking at Qiao Kangquan, who had already guessed some of his intentions, Lu Yuan said frankly, ¡°Now that they have retaken the entire Hanzhong territory, even though they have negotiated a truce with my Chu Country, it is just a temporary ceasefire.¡± ¡°In the future, if there is a chance, they will definitely send their troops southward or eastward, attacking Xichuan and Xiangyang prefectures.¡± ¡°In order to curb this tiger and wolf, I need to station heavy troops at the border where Xichuan and Hanzhong meet, to hold them in check.¡± ¡°Now that Hanzhong Country is broken and unable to resist Zhou Country, I will exchange Jiange and Tongchuan prefectures with Hanzhong King for another land and move Hanzhong Country elsewhere.¡± ¡°What does Hanzhong King think?¡± Now that Chu Country had control over eight prefectures in Xichuan, it was only a short distance away from unifying the entire Xichuan. As for Hanzhong Country, which controlled the remaining two prefectures in Xichuan, it was absolutely impossible for them to stand by and let their two territories remain outside the system. It was inevitable to have all ten prefectures of Xichuan and take back the northern entrance of Xichuan Province. However, how to take it back, the methods and strategies involved are varied. There are strong and hard methods, such as direct annexation. There are soft and slow ones, such as exchanging territories. The effects and functions of each are different. Comparatively speaking, Lu Yuan preferred the latter. After all, Hanzhong Country had already submitted to Chu Country, becoming a vassal state of Chu in name. If they silently annexed Hanzhong Country, it would inevitably cause fear and hesitation among other vassal states. It should be noted that both Chilih and Kunhai countries were still fighting hard against Nanzhao Country in the south at the command of Chu Country. The successful pacification of Xichuan and the defeat of Nanzhao Army could not be achieved without the contribution of the Southern Route Army composed of these two countries. Chu Country wanted to stabilize the southwest, but couldn¡¯t do without the cooperation of these two countries. In this situation, in order to avoid making Kunhai and Chilih countries feel sad and hurt, the means of taking back the two prefectures of Hanzhong Country had to be more amicable and flexible. Moving the country to another territory was his way of appeasing Qiao Kangquan. The only question was whether the other party would accept this condition. However, he believed that if the other party were wise, they should not refuse the olive branch that he extended. Thinking this, Lu Yuan looked calmly at Qiao Kangquan. After hearing Lu Yuan confirm his guess, Qiao Kangquan¡¯s expression changed slightly, and his eyes flickered. Qiao Kangquan was clear about his situation. Hanzhong Country was sandwiched between Zhou and Chu countries, and no matter who won or lost in the future, it would eventually face an inescapable fate of destruction. To be honest, Qiao Kangquan had already regretted accepting the proposal of the Yue State court to give up his great foundation in Guangling and travel thousands of miles to Xichuan to become a broken ruler. After nearly a decade of struggle in Xichuan, the Qiao family of Guangling had spent more than half of their thousand years of accumulation, and the final result was the loss of state territory, with Hanzhong Country on the verge of collapse. This result was hard to accept. But time had passed, and Yue Country was no more. They were separated from Guangling by Chu, Zhou, and Liang countries. Wanting to return to Guangling from thousands of miles away was not easy at all. Even if they were to return, it would be difficult, if not impossible, to regain their previous position at Guanhai Villa. There was no medicine for regret. In the past, Qiao Kangquan had completely given up and stopped thinking about it. However, if there was an opportunity to escape now, it naturally stirred his heart. At the same time, he needed to confirm one thing: where exactly was the territory that the King of Chu planned to exchange with him? First of all, Xichuan, Xiangyang, and Dongting prefectures were out of the question. These three places were the core territories of Chu Country, which had been developed to the utmost and were extremely prosperous. Chu Country wanted to take back even the ruined two prefectures of Xichuan that were in his hands. As for these foundation territories, Chu Country would never exchange them with anyone under any circumstances. If these three prefectures were not feasible, then the only remaining territories were in the southwest. Chapter 677 - Chapter 677: Chapter 305: Adding Another Vassal State_2 Chapter 677: Chapter 305: Adding Another Vassal State_2 ¡®I heard that in the southwestern Yi lands, the Chu State directly invaded and annihilated the local sovereign Da Changhe Country, capturing a huge amount of territory and even setting up Qianzhong County. If they want to exchange territory with me, this must be the place in question without a doubt.¡¯ Qiao Kangquan mused in his heart, with little disappointment. After all, although the southwest was said to be extremely barren with mountains everywhere and few plains, it was considered a poor and tough land. But the Jiange and Tongchuan counties in his hands were also mostly mountainous, with few fertile lands, poor output, and not much population either. Compared with the southwest, it¡¯s hard to say which place was better or worse. Moreover, the southwest had one advantage compared with his current territory. That is, after moving over there, he would no longer have to face the despairing strong enemy, Zhou Country. Qiao Kangquan, who had just suffered a bitter defeat at the hands of Zhou Country, couldn¡¯t help but gasp when he thought about the seemingly inexhaustible army of two to three hundred thousand that Zhou Country could casually dispatch, with its overwhelming momentum. Compared with Zhou Country, the southwestern Yi tribes, who had been retreating step by step under the control of the Chu State, seemed so amiable and harmless. After pondering all these thoughts, Qiao Kangquan had no more objections. He composed himself, then respectfully replied: ¡°The Great King is concerned about Zhou¡¯s complete rule, and has saved my Hanzhong, there¡¯s a nation-saving grace. I¡¯m willing to follow the Great King¡¯s arrangement.¡± Lu Yuan, who had been waiting for his reply, couldn¡¯t help but laugh heartily, saying merrily: ¡°If the King of Hanzhong can think this way, I am greatly relieved. Don¡¯t worry, since you trust me so much, I won¡¯t let you suffer. This time, the place I intend for you to relocate to is the Jianchuan Kingdom under the control of the Nanzhao Country in the southwest. This kingdom has five counties with a million households. It¡¯s a genuinely rich and fertile place. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? This kingdom has now been conquered by the True Person Huang Xuan, who leads the army of my Great Chu. The Southern Border is remote, and I am worried about how to deal with it. Now that the King of Hanzhong has pledged allegiance, it would be perfect to move your fiefdom to this place, you can help me stabilize the Southern Border and contain the Nanzhao Country. How about that? Exchanging two counties for five, are you willing, Lord Qiao?¡± Toward the end, Lu Yuan said with a hint of smile. Since Huang Xuan conquered Jianchuan Country, how to manage this territory has always been a dilemma in his heart. If he directly incorporated it, the Chu State didn¡¯t have enough population to fill it, nor did it have enough Inborn Grandmasters to secure it. If the army retreated, it would be a real pity to give up the hard-won territory so casually. Moreover, letting Nanzhao Country reclaim this land would once again pose a threat to the Xichuan County that Lu Yuan had recaptured. Therefore, after considering various factors, he had not found a good solution for a long time. Just at this moment. Hanzhong Country was broken by the Zhou people, most of the country was lost, and it was almost on the brink of destruction. And the Chu State just happens to need to reclaim the entire Xichuan County, therefore in the past few days, Lu Yuan thought of the relocation method. To relocate the Hanzhong Country who had just pledged allegiance to him to Jianchuan Country. This arrangement can smoothly reclaim Jiange and Tongchuan counties and set an additional barrier in the south of Xichuan County against Nanzhao Country. By that time, with Jianchuan, Chilih, and Kunhai three countries watching, no matter how capable the Nanzhao army was, they won¡¯t be able to create any major waves. With one more affiliated country in the southwestern region, the power of Chu Country will become even stronger, and its influence in that area can also be enhanced. At the same time, several affiliated countries can create more checks and balances, making them think twice when they have treacherous thoughts of rebellion, fostering more caution and fear, stabilizing the local situation. Although he gave up such a big territory as Jianchuan Country, nearly one third of the population inside Jianchuan Country has been relocated by Lu Yuan, and many of them are females and children of suitable age, who are the cream of the crop. The million households he had promised in Jianchuan Country had now been reduced to six to seven hundred thousand, and there were hundreds of thousands of single men among them, which were unstable factors that Lu Yuan did not want to handle. He considered it an expendable resource. Getting rid of Jianchuan Country, this burden, was not a losing deal for him. Of course, it was not a losing deal for Qiao Kangquan either. Even if all the people under his rule were single men, this relocation was a great bargain for him. Not only could his territory expand by more than double, but his population would also double. One can say that as long as the other party agreed, his strength would instantly surge, doubling or even more without any restrictions. With such generous terms, there would be no worry that the other party would not agree. And indeed that was the case. Upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s conditions, Qiao Kangquan¡¯s face immediately beamed with joy. He disregarded any dignity of being a sovereign or the inherent majesty of the Inborn, he immediately knelt and said: ¡°I am deeply grateful for the Great King¡¯s great kindness. I am willing to guard the Southern Border for Great Chu for generations, block the Yi people, preventing them from becoming a threat to Xichuan.¡± At this moment, he was truly grateful to Lu Yuan. Qiao Kangquan initially thought that being relocated to the southwest, at most, would mean changing to a territory of similar size, or even a potentially smaller one, which would mean a loss. But if he could escape the present perilous situation, he was already prepared to bear this loss. Who would have thought? With this relocation, he not only didn¡¯t suffer a loss, but he also gained a lot. Facing such great fortune and Lu Yuan¡¯s magnanimity, how could he not be grateful? At this moment, when he knelt down and bowed, it was completely sincere. ¡°As long as you are pleased, Lord Qiao.¡± Lu Yuan glanced at the excited Qiao Kangquan, then his expression became solemn: ¡°Listen to my command, Qiao Kangquan.¡± Qiao Kangquan, who was kneeling below and realized that something was about to happen, immediately composed himself and respectfully said: ¡°Your servant is here.¡± With great dignity, Lu Yuan said: ¡°I formally confer you as the Duke of Jianchuan and your fiefdom as the western south five counties of Jianchuan. You are an associated country of my Great Chu, safeguarding the Yunnan tribes. I hope you will do your best, serve the court faithfully, and not let me down.¡± Chapter 678 - Chapter 678: Chapter 305: Adding Another Vassal State_3 Chapter 678: Chapter 305: Adding Another Vassal State_3 This was a formal canonization, which set the master-subordinate relationship. Previously, the Chinese Han submission was only in words and notional. This can be seen from Qiao Kangquan still claiming himself as the king of Hanzhong. It was absurd for vassals and sovereigns both to be kings, with no distinction of superiority and inferiority. Now, taking advantage of the opportunity of relocation, the master-subordinate relationship is formally established, and the leading position of Chu State in Jianchuan State has been established, making it the third vassal state under the Chu State tribute system, which is quite necessary. Qiao Kangquan also understood this point, so he had no dissatisfaction or regrets about his rank being reduced by one level, changing from a king to a duke. It¡¯s just a matter of title. If lowering his title by one level could exchange for the territories of three prefectures, then he would rather have his title reduced even more. Becoming a duke, marquis, count, or viscount is acceptable, as long as there are benefits. Compared to illusory titles, he values practical gains more. What can be controlled is real. Otherwise, if you only occupy a county, even if you claim to be an emperor, what can you do? You¡¯d simply be laughed at. Without sufficient strength, even being a king would make you a Grass Head King, and no one would take you seriously. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 But if you have strength, even as a local lord, no one would dare to look down upon you. Moreover, Lu Yuan is also a king, so as someone who has already submitted to Chu State, it is indeed inappropriate for him to share the same title as his master. Otherwise, which of the two of you is the master and who is the servant? After experiencing a series of vicious beatings, Qiao Kangquan had become extremely pragmatic. So he had no objections to this canonization, only respectfully saying, ¡°Your servant obeys the decree and will not fail the great king¡¯s grace.¡± Seeing his compliance, Lu Yuan nodded with satisfaction and continued, ¡°Since the Duke of Jianchuan has accepted the canonization, you should prepare the household registration atlas when you return, and wait for the officials sent by the Lonely King to receive the handover of the two prefectures, Jiange and Tongchuan. Also, the soldiers in your hands. There are many Yi people in Jianchuan, and it is impossible to suppress them without military force. This time, when you go to the fief, I allow you to choose 10,000 people from your current soldiers and horses as your escort to the kingdom. Leave the rest behind.¡± Lu Yuan always valued population. Because it represents national strength and luck. The more people, the more tribute tax can be contributed, the more soldiers can be recruited, and the more luck can be provided. For example, the Yi people in Jianchuan, Lu Yuan could not bear to give up, so he asked Huang Xuan to capture as many people as possible to return to the country and fill the domestic population. The people in the two prefectures of Jiange and Tongchuan have long been accustomed to King¡¯s culture and can be seamlessly transformed into Chu people. Of course, he would not let go of such high-quality people for Qiao Kangquan to take away. Giving the other party 10,000 people was already the limit. Fortunately, Qiao Kangquan did not expect to take away many people in the first place. After all, if he emptied the two prefectures of Jiange and Tongchuan, wouldn¡¯t Lu Yuan only get an empty shell of territory? Although only allowing 10,000 people to be taken was somehow less than Qiao Kangquan¡¯s psychological expectations, he still had 30,000 soldiers left, and it was a great pity not to take them all. But now that he has taken advantage of a big bargain, he cannot expect too much. Therefore, he could only nod and say, ¡°Your servant obeys.¡± ¡°Well, that¡¯s it.¡± Seeing that the other party did not have any objections, Lu Yuan nodded slightly and settled the matter. ¡­ After the relocation of the fiefs had been settled, Chu State and Han China were soon busy. After Lu Yuan¡¯s order, the Xichuan prefecture quickly gathered a large number of officials to come to the two prefectures of Jiange and Tongchuan for household registration handover and established the framework of local government. The remaining official vacancies would also be filled quickly by further selection from Baling. In addition, local county soldiers were also quickly formed under the mobilization order. At the same time, Han Shun was recruiting new soldiers to fill the vacancies. Of the four forbidden armies that accompanied them, Lu Yuan left two behind to garrison Jianmenguan. Together>Action(text=''¡±¡®]¡±,¡¯) with the newly-built Forbidden Army stationed in Jinguan City, a total of three Forbidden Armies and 60,000 soldiers will serve as the main force to guard Xichuan. Qiao Kangquan also acted quickly. After completing the handover with the prefecture and county officials sent by Lu Yuan, he immediately led 10,000 soldiers he had selected, along with the money, food, and weapons supplied by Lu Yuan, and marched south to Jianchuan in a grand manner. It¡¯s not far from here to Jianchuan, only about 1,300 miles. If they move quickly, they¡¯ll arrive in a month. Once Qiao Kangquan arrives in Jianchuan, Huang Xuan¡¯s Central Army will also withdraw to Qianzhong County in due course. Then the two Forbidden Armies under his command will serve as the garrison soldiers of Qianzhong County, suppressing this newly expanded territory. Huang Xuan himself will go to Xichuan and become the chief general in charge of defending the northern border of Zhou Country. Qianzhong County was handed over to Jihui. With this old monk and Chu State¡¯s three vassal states in the southwest, the situation in the southwest can be stabilized. By that time, Lu Yuan will be completely at ease and return to the capital with his troops. During this period, Lu Yuan also received a message from the Zhou Country in the north. It turned out that in early August, the Snow Plains nomads experienced a major flood, with dozens of tribes suffering severe losses, and cattle and sheep¡¯s harvests were all destroyed. In order to make a living and get enough supplies to get through this year¡¯s difficulties, these tribes, affected by floods, joined forces with hundreds of thousands of Snow Plains nomads pouring down from the plateau to loot the Longxi and Hexi prefectures of Zhou Country. Dongfang Wuyun, the Pillar State Grand General of Zhou Country, urgently called back 50,000 soldiers from his side to Helong and Hexi prefectures after just ending the war with Chu State. This made Lu Yuan suddenly realize why Zhou Country was so eager for peace talks when he just arrived. It turned out that their backyard was on fire. However, even though he knew about this, he had no intention of taking advantage of the situation. Chu State had been fighting for more than two years, and the country was exhausted. Moreover, with Zhou Country¡¯s strength, resolving the looting barbarians wouldn¡¯t be difficult. It wouldn¡¯t be easy for Chu State to take advantage of Zhou Country. That southern Pillar State Grand General of Zhou Country still stayed in Hanzhong County! Moreover, although he sent away 50,000 soldiers, he still had 50,000 to 60,000 elite troops. If he conscripts civilians, he could easily mobilize an army of 100,000 to 200,000. Chu State shouldn¡¯t think of taking advantage of Zhou Country without preparing the same number of soldiers. So Lu Yuan just lamented and then ignored it. On the 13th of October in the sixth year of Shenwu, Huang Chuan, who had completed the handover with Qiao Kangquan in the south, arrived in Xichuan. Lu Yuan called civil and military officials in the army and announced his appointment, delegating Huang Chuan, the Protector of the State and the True Person, to supervise the military and political affairs of Xichuan and to take full charge of all affairs of the prefecture. After that, he led an army of 40,000 forbidden soldiers, brought the beauties he had obtained from the Jinguan City Royal Palace and returned to Baling. Chapter 679 - Chapter 679: Chapter 306: Returning Home as a Monarch and Minister Chapter 679: Chapter 306: Returning Home as a Monarch and Minister In the deep autumn of Baling City, the vegetation is still lush. Located in Jiangnan, it lacks much of the chilly desolation of the north and is instead full of countless tender and soft feelings. However, at this moment, this tender and soft land of Jiangnan is experiencing an unusual sense of solemnity and killing intent. High banners, fluttering orderly columns advancing forward, the forbidden soldiers of Great Chu all hold their heads high, heading towards the city wall. At this point, at the city gate, outside the wilderness, and on the streets of the city, a large number of scholars and commoners have come out, excitedly and curiously watching the oncoming army. Looking at the burly and imposing soldiers, all people felt awe and boundless excitement at the same time. Because this is the army of Great Chu, their army. With this iron army, Great Chu¡¯s rivers will be solid as golden soup, and the stable life and interests they have now as Great Chu¡¯s people will be guaranteed. In the turmoil, nothing could be more important than this. The crowd gathered more and more, and people who came to watch the ceremony began to discuss. Both sides gradually became somewhat noisy. And this noise, with the arrival of a magnificent carriage in the distance, reached its peak. Seeing the scepter symbolizing the king and the fluttering banners in the wind, everyone knew that the owner of this city, the supreme ruler of this country, the King of Chu, had arrived. Instantly, the crowd burst into cheers. Since Lu Yuan emerged from Shaoyang Prefecture, he has been protecting the people, guarding the borders, and sheltering the local people. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Later on, he even annihilated the Seven Star Rebellion, put down the Five Poisons Miao Disorder, restored the peace of Dongting, and established the Kingdom of Changsha, bringing peace and stability to a region. Afterward, he expelled the Zhou people in the north, settled Qiang Shu in the west, expanded into three regions and eight prefectures, and made Great Chu assume control of 17 prefectures, ranking it among the major powers. When the previous Yue perished, he even changed the country¡¯s name and disputed with Jinling and Ning for hegemony in the world. During this period, Chu State launched several imperial examinations to select talents, improve its culture and administration, train the army, accumulate arms and troops, and develop a navy. Under such measures, the strength of Great Chu grew day by day, becoming one of the most powerful states in the world, with an implicit prospect of becoming an overlord. These numerous military achievements have long attracted the hearts of countless Chu people for Lu Yuan, who has firmly established himself in the foundation of three regions. Every inhabitant of the three regions would consider King Chu as one of the best wise monarchs in the world, and an invincible military god who can bring prosperity and glory to Great Chu. Now, King Chu is leading an army of 100,000 men, defeating the southwest minority barbarians, and annihilating dozens of countries, expanding over thousands of miles of territory. In the southwestern region, he has established the ten prefectures of Qianzhong and gained three vassal states, making his influence even more widespread in the southwest. Then the Xichuan ruler submitted, letting King Chu lead the army to attack Xichuan once again, crushing Nanzhao, and gaining five more prefectures. Afterward, Hanzhong ruler succumbed, and the army went north to force the Zhou soldiers to retreat, allowing the Hanzhong ruler to relocate to Jianchuan, gaining two more prefectures. Thus, Great Chu gained control of all ten prefectures of Xichuan. Since the initial mobilization of King Chu¡¯s army in the sixth year of Shenwu to the return of the army at the beginning of the sixth month, the battle had lasted for more than two years and three months, finally bringing victory. Underneath this great victory, the gains for the Chu State were also astonishing. Qianzhong gained a region and ten prefectures, and Xichuan gained seven prefectures, adding up to a total of 17 prefectures. In the southwest, they gained three vassal states, which also amounted to about one region and five prefectures. All added up, this time the deployment of troops allowed Great Chu to expand its territory into three more regions, and also obtained five Inborn Grandmasters. How could such a huge harvest not be exhilarating? Above all these, it¡¯s just the harvest on the national level of Great Chu. As for Lu Yuan personally, his gains were not insignificant either. During the Western Expedition, he fought more than a dozen battles in succession, defeating nearly 400,000 soldiers from Da Changhe and Nanzhao. Furthermore, he killed two Inborn experts, the Great Witch Sacrifice of the Chilih tribe and the Crown Prince of Nanzhao, making his military achievements outstanding. Carefully calculated, since Lu Yuan took up arms, millions of soldiers have been defeated by him, and he has also killed as many as four Inborn experts. Such achievements have gone far beyond that of the Wuan Marquis of the previous Yue, even far surpassing it. Even when looking at the achievements of the Nine Provinces, Lu Yuan¡¯s military exploits could rank in the top ten, even the top five, making him an absolute military god. Being able to manage domestic affairs internally and expand territories externally, while also being known as a renowned military god, these achievements have pushed Lu Yuan¡¯s prestige to its peak. In the eyes of all the people of Great Chu, he is the pillar of the state, the spiritual belief, and the guarantee of strength. Therefore, every Chu person, even if they haven¡¯t seen him, as long as they know he is there, they will have a hundred times more confidence. Now that the banner symbolizing King Chu has appeared, it makes everyone who sees it rejoice and take pride in the sight. As the center of all this, Lu Yuan slightly lifts the curtain of the royal carriage he is sitting in, looking at the people outside whose faces are flushed with excitement from his arrival. With a smile on his face, he then lowers the curtain, continuing to sit in the carriage, and closing his eyes to breathe. Outsiders only see the direction of public sentiment and the celebration throughout the city. But in Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes, he sees countless people from all over Great Chu and even the world converging from all directions toward Baling, belonging to him as the King of Chu, in the form of immense Qi Luck. This time, though Chu¡¯s population only increased by more than 2 million, less than half of the original population, the area of its territory expanded by 17 prefectures, doubling in size. If we include vassals, it doubled even more. Chapter 680 - Chapter 680: Chapter 306: Returning Home as a Monarch and Minister_2 Chapter 680: Chapter 306: Returning Home as a Monarch and Minister_2 Nowadays, the Chu State has become a large country with four prefectures and thirty-four administrations, three vassal states, and over thirty thousand miles of territory. Just in terms of the area, it has already surpassed Ning Country in Jiangdong. In terms of military power, the eleven Forbidden armies and fifty thousand naval forces of Chu State have been gradually trained and completed. The construction of the county soldiers in various prefectures and counties has also been completed. Adding in the Jinwu Guard responsible for defending the capital, Chu State now has a total of 382,000 soldiers and horses. The three major vassal countries can each provide an additional fifty thousand soldiers and horses. In total, the number is over five hundred thousand. On Ning Country¡¯s side, even with continuous expansion, it also has only over five hundred thousand soldiers and horses. The two sides are evenly matched. In terms of Inborn Grandmasters, Chu State itself has five, and the three vassal states have three, making a total of eight. On Ning Country¡¯s side, in the past two years stimulated by Chu State, it seems to have accelerated the cultivation of Inborn Grandmasters. They have cultivated Bai Yian and Li Dao as Inborns in the past two years. Both men have inherited the titles of Wuan Marquis and Wuyang Marquis respectively from Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang and Wuyang Marquis Li Gui and have become the new generation of grandmasters in Ning Country. With the addition of Wucheng Marquis Shangguan Ming, Martial Proclamation Marquis Yang Jing, Marquis Wuming Muchangqing, and Shen Qiu, the Heavenly Son, Ning Country has a total of six Inborns. In terms of the innate quantity of Inborns, Chu State has also surpassed Ning Country. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The only thing that Chu State is currently lagging behind compared to Ning Country is the population. Even though Lu Yuan has been constantly digging at Su Country¡¯s corner in the South, receiving nearly four hundred thousand Su and Yi refugees from Ning State, gaining one million Yi People in Qianzhong County, and abducting nearly three hundred thousand Yi women from Jianchuan State. Latterly, he gained five hundred thousand people from Xichuan State and three hundred thousand people from Hanzhong State. However, once you add all of these up, it only amounts to a mere two million five hundred thousand people. Adding in the original population of six million in Chu State, it is only a total population of eight million five hundred thousand. It is only equivalent to Ning State¡¯s Yuzhang Prefecture, plus Jianan Prefecture. It¡¯s only half of the other side. All in all, Chu State has surpassed Ning State in terms of territory and Inborn Grandmasters, is on par in military power, and has lost in terms of population. Chu State has already gained an advantage over Ning State with two victories, one draw, and one loss. In the eyes of other countries in the world, the Chu State may still be slightly inferior compared to Ning Country at present. That is, Chu State does not occupy the core of Yangzhou, Jinling, and is slightly inferior in terms of legitimacy, thus appearing somewhat precarious. However, in terms of actual strength, there is no longer a significant gap between the two sides, and both have reached a level of national power. This is a point that everyone has already acknowledged. In the competition for the title of Master of Yangzhou, Chu and Ning States have equal qualifications and strength. Others like Southsea, Su, Song, Nanzhao, and Dali are just remote and small countries, side characters and pawns, not worth mentioning at all. Even the great states like Zhou and Liang, after hearing about Lu Yuan¡¯s gains from the Western Expedition, have already dispatched messengers to Baling to establish diplomatic contacts and set up stable post houses, permanently stationed here. It should be noted that this was originally a treatment exclusively enjoyed by Ning State, but now Chu State has enjoyed it as well. There is no doubt that in the hearts of these two great countries, Chu and Ning are in an equal position, with the qualifications and rights to deal with them on an equal footing. This recognition from the international community and the people of the world has made Chu State even more prestigious, gradually revealing the qualifications of a hegemon. The prestige and recognition also transformed into a share of Qi Luck, which gathered from all over the world and blended into the Luck Heavenly Pillar of Chu State. Thanks to all these gains, Lu Yuan¡¯s own Qi Luck has doubled compared to before the Western Expedition. With the help of this boundless Qi Luck, the heavenly Qi he could manipulate has also increased. Now, each moment, Lu Yuan is operating his Mental Technique, leveraging the hidden Immortal Spirit Qi in the depths of the Heavenly Vault with his Qi Luck, borrowing the support of the Heavenly Pillar to bring it down for his own breathing and cultivation of magical power. With the tenfold increase in spiritual energy, his cultivation speed has sharply accelerated. In just a short period of two months, he has successively broken through several small barriers, taking a big step forward on the path of condensing secondary Qi, accumulating profound magical power. At this rate, in five or six years, Lu Yuan will almost be able to condense a second Five Elements Qi, taking his cultivation to another level. Not only has the growth of his magical power increased, but even his soul has also grown stronger as it is nourished by spiritual energy and nurtured by Inner Qi. Thanks to this accumulation, Lu Yuan has a faint feeling that in another two or three years, his soul will be strong enough to split another trace of divine intent, condensing a second Yellow Turban Warrior Avatar. By then, Chu State¡¯s Inborn-level combat power will increase by one more person. Needless to say, anyone would be overjoyed with these various accumulations and gains. Therefore, listening to the cheers outside, Lu Yuan was in a good mood and felt very pleased. After walking through several miles of the jubilant crowds on the outskirts of Baling, the procession soon reached the city gate. Cui Changqing, along with the officials, was already here, waiting to welcome the king¡¯s return. The expressions on the faces of these officials at this time were not much different from those of the people around them. As the Chu State¡¯s power grows and its rule expands, they, as central officials, naturally gain more and more benefits as well. For one thing, With Chu State growing strong and its ruled territories expanding, they, as officials in the central government, naturally have their authority and position grow along with it. With the expansion of the territories, there are more local officials, providing more opportunities for their disciples and clan members to enter the government. Chapter 681 - Chapter 681: Chapter 306: Returning to the Country as Monarch and Minister_3 Chapter 681: Chapter 306: Returning to the Country as Monarch and Minister_3 As for the other benefits gained after the development in the southwest, such as the acquisition of various resources, the opening of trade routes, and so on, it is countless. In short, as Chu State grows stronger, all the people in the country can benefit from it, except for those defeated losers. Don¡¯t you see those criminals who were exiled to Qianzhong County? Although they were exiled, once they arrived there, they were given wives and children, fertile land, and houses. In a moment, they had everything they lacked. Life became perfect in an instant. Aren¡¯t all these benefits? ¡°Greetings, Your Majesty.¡± Upon seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s carriage arrive, Cui Changqing and the others immediately bowed down to pay their respects. ¡°Hmm, my loyal subjects, please rise.¡± Lu Yuan got out of the carriage and personally helped Cui Changqing up. Once the latter stood up, he carefully looked at this important minister who had helped him handle various internal affairs during his absence, while also coordinating the supply of food and fodder to the front lines, and couldn¡¯t help but feel moved. After just a short two years, Cui Changqing, who could be regarded as his own Xiao He, had aged as if he were five or six years older, with white hair all over his head and wrinkles and spots all over his face. If it weren¡¯t for the other party¡¯s eyes radiating with brightness and vigor, Lu Yuan would have thought of him as an old man like a candle flickering in the wind. However, even so, he knew clearly that this minister was barely surviving by relying on this vigor alone. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Once this energy was gone, or completely drained, his life would come to an end as well. When would this time come? Lu Yuan¡¯s divine sense trembled slightly. At this rate of consumption now, Cui Changqing might not endure another two years. ¡°Prime Minister, I¡¯ve been away from the kingdom for two years, and you¡¯ve been through a lot.¡± Finally, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t say anything about letting the other party rest, so as to take advantage of the remaining energy and live another two or three years. It was because, from the other party¡¯s eyes, he saw the determination and expectation. ¡°Your Majesty led the army on the Western Expedition, conquering many states and expanding the land by thousands of miles. This extraordinary feat commanded the world. As a minister, I only held my duty at home, supported the people¡¯s hearts, and provided food and supplies. I dare not claim the credit.¡± Facing Lu Yuan¡¯s words, Cui Changqing remained humble and respectful, and his words were full of joy. As Lu Yuan achieved victory after victory, this old minister¡¯s identification with and expectation for Chu State grew deeper and stronger. Especially now that Chu State had expanded its territory to seventeen prefectures and annexed three vassal states, the land area had doubled. Including vassals, Chu State¡¯s land reached around five counties. With such a huge territory, it was not far behind the eight counties of Da Yue before the annexation of Jinghai Country. In the meantime, Chu State had also become the hegemonic power in Yangzhou, standing side by side with Ning Country. All these achievements made Lu Yuan¡¯s initial aspiration and goal to unify Yangzhou and build a prosperous and peaceful era increasingly realistic and achievable. Now, with Lu Yuan¡¯s efforts, more than half of this grand goal had been accomplished. The other half of the goal was also in the process of being achieved rapidly. As a participant, especially one in such an important position, Cui Changqing felt that his life goals and values had been greatly realized.¡¯ Cultivating Oneself, Managing a Household, Governing a State, and Bringing Peace to the World. In terms of Cultivating Oneself, he was a respected scholar with profound knowledge, famous throughout the world of Pre-Yue. In terms of managing a household, his son-in-law was the Right Prime Minister and soon to become an Innate, with his family being prestigious and adhering to strict family discipline, never having a bad reputation spread. In terms of Governing a State, since he took office as the Left Prime Minister, Chu State had become increasingly prosperous, healing the wounds of war and developing a peaceful and prosperous landscape. In terms of Bringing Peace to the World, Chu State continued to expand its territory, now holding five counties, and the unification of Yangzhou was just around the corner. Cui Changqing had reached the pinnacle in achieving the four life goals of a scholar, his accomplishments drawing the attention of the world. If there was any regret, it would probably be that, due to his old age and limited time, he wouldn¡¯t be able to witness the day when Chu State unified the entire Yangzhou and started a new era of peace and prosperity. But this slight regret didn¡¯t matter much. Cui Changqing believed that even after his death, his disciple and son-in-law Sun Siwen would inherit his will and continue to assist King Chu in the unification of Yangzhou, carrying on his unfinished business and making it even more glorious. With Sun Siwen in the picture, there would be no more regrets. And what he needed to do was to continue to dedicate his abilities to make Chu State stronger while he was still capable of serving King Chu. At the very least, he needed to help the king make the seventeen prefectures developed during the Western Expedition prosperous and stable, and establish them as the foundation of Great Chu. In this way, with these contributions, along with his previous achievements, Cui Changqing would undoubtedly become the top-ranked Prime Minister of Great Chu after his death.¡¯ Cui Changqing thought to himself. Everyone in life always has their own pursuits. He was not greedy for wealth or lustful, only wishing to leave behind a good reputation. Assisting King Chu to dominate the world and becoming the top-ranked Prime Minister of Great Chu was Cui Changqing¡¯s life pursuit. It was only by making such achievements, to be remembered in history and admired by countless scholars in the future, that his life in this world would be worthwhile. It was because Lu Yuan knew this that he didn¡¯t say anything about letting the Left Prime Minister rest.¡¯ Besides, in the current situation when Sun Siwen was busy cultivating in seclusion and trying to break through Innate, Lu Yuan could not find a second person with enough prestige, and whom he could trust, to take over the heavy responsibility of managing the country from Cui Changqing. Chu State couldn¡¯t do without this old minister at present. Sighing silently in his heart, Lu Yuan patted Cui Changqing¡¯s shoulder, encouraging with a smile, ¡°Prime Minister, you are too modest. Without you managing the country and coordinating all parties, I would not have been able to focus on confronting the enemy on the front lines and achieve such success.¡± ¡°In terms of martial arts, I am the best in Great Chu. In terms of civil administration, Prime Minister, you are the head of Chu State. The everlasting feats of our Great Chu cannot be separated from the Prime Minister¡¯s efforts.¡± At the city gate, in front of a crowd of officials and people, a harmonious scene between the monarch and his ministers ocurred on stage. Chapter 682 - Chapter 682: Chapter 307: Wifes Studies Chapter 682: Chapter 307: Wife¡¯s Studies At the city gate, Lu Yuan comforted the crowd and discussed some government affairs with them before heading towards the Royal Palace. Upon arriving at the palace entrance, Lan Cai¡¯er led the palace attendants to welcome him. ¡°Greetings to His Majesty, welcome back to the palace.¡± After two years, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s figure had become more plump and mature, like a ripe peach, which stirred people¡¯s desire just by glancing at her. Now it was the end of the sixth year of the Shenwu era, and since Lu Yuan had traveled to this world, a total of twenty-five years had passed. By the time he arrived, his body¡¯s age was fifteen. With fifteen plus twenty-five, it meant that he was now forty years old. Lan Cai¡¯er, being the same age as Lu Yuan, was now also in her forties. Although Inborn Grandmasters had a longer lifespan and their appearances aged more slowly than ordinary people, the process was still inevitable. Her forty years old was equivalent to an ordinary woman in her twenties. She had a perfect combination of maturity and youth, and her every movement and expression were full of infinite charm. This was a feeling she had never given Lu Yuan before, with her previous innocence. He couldn¡¯t help but be moved by her one glance, and took two steps forward, grabbing her hand and helping her up, looking her up and down with a hearty laugh, saying, ¡°My Queen, I have missed you dearly.¡± He then reached out with both hands and embraced his wife. His sudden gesture left Lan Cai¡¯er momentarily stunned, and by the time she regained her composure, her initially cold face was flushed red, her heart both angered and amused. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã0 She was angry at him for such a disregard of etiquette in public, and amused at how much he missed her, her heart filled with sweet emotions. Her dissatisfaction and complaints about Lu Yuan¡¯s two-year absence also dissipated in that embrace. After holding her for a moment, she struggled and pushed him away, saying, ¡°Your Majesty, there are so many people watching. Moreover, He¡¯er and Hao¡¯er are here, they have been waiting for you to return and wanting to see their father.¡± Lu Yuan, pushed away and somewhat reluctant, sniffed his now fragrant hand that had just held her and caused Lan Cai¡¯er to blush once more. He laughed and then turned his head to look at the two curious youngsters behind her ¨C one tall, one short. When Lu Yuan left, his eldest son Lu He had just turned four and had just begun to remember things. His second son, Lu Hao, was not yet two and still a babbling infant. Now, two years had passed. Lu He was six years old, much taller and almost as high as Lu Yuan¡¯s waist. Lu Hao was now four years old, reaching barely to Lu Yuan¡¯s waist. However, both were looking at Lu Yuan with a mixture of curiosity and fear. Lu He was better off, as he had some impression of his father during his time away, and he didn¡¯t feel too alienated. But it was different for Lu Hao. When his father left, he was still being nursed, so he had no impression of what his father looked like. He now regarded Lu Yuan as a stranger, and since that stranger was embracing his mother, Hao¡¯er felt somewhat disgruntled, as if someone was trying to take his place. Ever since he could remember, his mother had only ever held him, occasionally holding his older brother too. His mother¡¯s arms belonged to him, and no one else. He wanted to go and separate the two of them, but was somewhat afraid and hid behind Lu Hao, his little face puffing up in anger, making Lu Yuan want to laugh at the scene. ¡°He¡¯er, Hao¡¯er, come and pay your respects to your father. Your father is back.¡± At this moment, Lan Cai¡¯er had also steadied her emotions and, somewhat annoyed, glared at Lu Yuan. She walked over to her two sons and spoke with a mother¡¯s authority. On hearing their mother¡¯s words, the two youngsters finally returned to their senses, remembering they were there to welcome their father home. As they looked at Lu Yuan more closely, they finally recalled that the man before them was their father, whom their mother had told them countless times about, always away fighting battles for their family and the Chu State. In an instant. The natural dependency of children on their parents emerged from the bottom of their hearts. Especially for Hao¡¯er, who finally remembered his father¡¯s image from his scarce memories, which quickly overlapped with the man in front of his eyes. As the images coincided, Hao¡¯er called out with a soft voice, ¡°Father.¡± After exclaiming, he ran up and hugged Lu Yuan¡¯s leg, rubbing his little face against it. Seeing this, Lu He also had an epiphany. Following their mother¡¯s embrace, there was another thing that could be vied for, their father¡¯s legs. Did my older brother want to compete for our father¡¯s legs with me? Still young and not understanding much, Lu He instinctively wanted to take anything that might have a benefit for himself. He immediately became discontented. ¡°I want a hug, too!¡± Saying that, he took small steps and ran up to hug Lu Yuan¡¯s right leg. He stared at his brother with a challenging expression, rubbing his face against Lu Yuan¡¯s pants as well. The world of children is simple. They only know that what others have, they want to have as well ¨C and even more of it. Chapter 683 - Chapter 683: Chapter 307: Wifes Studies_2 Chapter 683: Chapter 307: Wife¡¯s Studies_2 The two children did just that, refusing to admit defeat and hugging their father¡¯s thighs, rubbing against him one after the other. This sudden scene left Lu Yuan a bit stunned. With his state of mind, he was somewhat bewildered by this father-son reunion. After he snapped out of it, he looked at the two children with a somewhat amused expression, but didn¡¯t stop them, after all, it was quite entertaining. Hugging the thighs, it was an amusing thought. Both kids were as adorable as jade carvings, and having such cute kids snuggle up to him, even if it was for some inexplicable competitive impulse, was still heartwarming. While amused, he cast a playful glance at Lan Cai¡¯er and said teasingly, ¡°It seems that in my absence, you¡¯ve taught He¡¯er and Hao¡¯er well in respecting and loving their father. As soon as we met, they became so close to me.¡± When saying the word ¡°close,¡± Lu Yuan emphasized his tone. Upon hearing this, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s face turned red. The actions of her two sons were somewhat unexpected to her. After all, upon receiving the news of Lu Yuan¡¯s return, Lan Cai¡¯er had thoroughly taught the two children how to respect, be courteous, and grow close to their father once they met him. She had arranged everything in an orderly and appropriate manner. Who would have known that when they actually met, the two little ones would act like this. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï Indeed, it was hard to predict what children would do. At that moment, Lan Cai¡¯er resolved to properly discipline these two disobedient ¡°rebels¡± once they returned and never let them go unchecked like this again. Fortunately, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t continue to tease his queen. After mocking her once, he laughed and reached out to pat the two kids¡¯ heads before separating them from his thighs. Then he squatted down, took their hands and lifted them up. ¡°Alright, this isn¡¯t the place for talking. Let¡¯s head back to the palace first. In the evening, there are many things I want to talk to the queen about.¡± Lu Yuan held his children, walked up to Lan Cai¡¯er, and showed her a meaningful smile. All of a sudden, the queen¡¯s face grew even redder. ¡­ In the following days, Lu Yuan stayed in the palace, nourishing the long-neglected field of his queen. For several days, he didn¡¯t know the meaning of fatigue. Although there were plenty of beauties around him during those two years away, wildflowers, no matter how fragrant, couldn¡¯t compare to the warmth of flowers at home. Especially now that the home flowers had become so mature and gorgeous, making it hard for him to resist picking them to his heart¡¯s content. Lan Cai¡¯er felt the same way. Guarding the deep palace alone for two years, although she had her children¡¯s company, she had already tasted the pleasures of life. How could she not have desires? Usually, she had no choice but to suppress them with her children¡¯s company and practicing her skills. But now that the master had returned, she naturally had to ask for compensation. And Lu Yuan, who hadn¡¯t been with his wife and children for two years, felt guilty. He could only satisfy her as much as possible. In addition to catering to Lan Cai¡¯er, sometimes Lu Yuan would also take some time to get to know his two young sons, their personalities and studies. They had reached the age to begin their enlightenment education. In fact, for the eldest son, Lu He, his enlightenment education had begun two years prior, shortly after Lu Yuan went to war. When Lu He was of a similar age, Lan Cai¡¯er began to consider his enlightenment education and even wrote to Lu Yuan about it. However, at that time, Lu Yuan was busy with military affairs and could not spare much energy to handle it. He could only reply and ask Lan Cai¡¯er to consult with the Left Prime Minister, Cui Changqing. As for his queen and Cui Changqing, he trusted them both. He believed that with these two in charge, Lu He¡¯s studies would not be neglected. And indeed, that¡¯s what happened. To Lan Cai¡¯er, the mother of Lu He, no one mattered more. The Left Prime Minister, Cui Changqing, also couldn¡¯t be underestimated. Ever since Lu He was born, as the legitimate eldest son, he was considered by the civil and military officials of Chu to be the Crown Prince and the first in line for succession. Therefore, as for his education, Cui Changqing, who had taken Chu as his lifelong goal, regarded Lu He as the inheritor of his own and Lu Yuan¡¯s achievements. To prevent him from growing askew, Cui Changqing recognized the importance of his education. As a result, he didn¡¯t trust anyone else to teach Lu He and decided to personally undertake the role of enlightenment teacher for the crown prince of Chu. As a famous scholar in Yangzhou and the Left Prime Minister of Chu, Cui Changqing was certainly qualified to educate Lu He. Having him teach her son, Lan Cai¡¯er had no complaints, and was even quite happy. After all, by becoming Cui Changqing¡¯s disciple, it meant that the civil official group represented by the Left Prime Minister would naturally stand by her son¡¯s side. This would be of great benefit to Lu He¡¯s future ascension to the throne. Moreover, Cui Changqing¡¯s knowledge was top-notch in the entire Yangzhou. With such a person teaching her child, what could she be unhappy about? However, this made things difficult for Cui Changqing. This weary old chancellor had to squeeze time out of his busy public duties to teach the crown prince of Chu.` Chapter 684 - Chapter 684: Chapter 307: Wifes Studies_3 Chapter 684: Chapter 307: Wife¡¯s Studies_3 Cui Changqing¡¯s swift aging was definitely due, in part, to this little fellow. Although Lu Yuan also believed that the other party was immensely pleased with this. But while they could disregard their own fatigue, burning their life to teach his child, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t accept this without a pang of guilt. Lu Yuan hoped that a national pillar like Cui Changqing could live a little longer, providing more strength for the Chu State. The Chu State could not be without him now. Although Cui Changqing¡¯s knowledge was excellent, it was impossible for him to teach Lu He Confucian studies strictly. As Lu Yuan¡¯s eldest son, his expectations of Lu He were extremely high. A mastery of both culture and martial arts was a must. Being widely knowledgeable was also simply a matter of course. Therefore, not only does Lu He need to learn Confucian studies, but also Daoist and Buddhist teachings, various other classic and unconventional literature, as well as some of Lu Yuan¡¯s former concepts and knowledge. The useful ones must be selected and taught to him. What Cui Changqing could teach was just a part of what Lu Yuan planned to teach Lu He. Therefore, upon his return and after understanding the state of Lu He¡¯s education, Lu Yuan decided to personally teach his son. With his ability, honed by continuous learning since his transmigration, to be proficient in the teachings of Confucianism, law, military strategy, Daoism and Buddhism, and the education he received in his previous life, his erudition is unparalleled throughout the Nine Provinces. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Not to mention the understanding of military strategy, who in the world dared to say they surpassed the King of Chu? Despite Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation in immortal Dao reaching to the degree of manifesting essence, who dared to say they had a deeper understanding of Daoism than him? Even the Buddhist scriptures, which Lu Yuan had studied as he attained his immortal Dao, have given him valuable insights from associated knowledge. As the ruler of Chu State and the commander of its armies, strict legalism is also indispensable. On this, Lu Yuan has his own thoughts and ideas. Lastly, Confucian teachings. Being able to associate with Sun Siwen and Cui Changqing, even if he had no interest in their teachings initially, his knowledge now vastly exceeds that of general juren and jinshi. Plus, he attained major success in his cultivation, and his spirit has reached its peak, making his thoughts far more acute than the average person¡¯s. With all these conditions, he naturally has more than enough to teach one or two children. Therefore, when Lu Yuan took over his children¡¯s education, although Cui Changqing was slightly regretful, he also breathed a sigh of relief. This wise king¡¯s vast knowledge was something he, as the old prime minister, was very clear about. Apart from falling a little short in the field of Confucianism compared to himself, his knowledge of many other schools of thought was indeed exhaustive, and even considered the pinnacle in this era. With such an amazing king as the tutor, there was naturally no need to worry about a failure turning out. Since the succession of the Chu State was assured, Cui Changqing naturally rejoiced in focusing more on state affairs, contributing more to the State of Chu with increased efficiency. However, even though Lu Yuan took over the education of his two children, he didn¡¯t plan to teach them forever. This was neither possible nor realistic. As the King of Chu, he had a lot of matters to handle. And although the war has ended, in the current turbulent world, who knows when Chu State will again go into battle with another nation. When that happens, Lu Yuan will still have to head out to battle, and he simply won¡¯t have enough spare time to teach his children. Luckily, the peripheral situation could maintain stability for the near two years. On the southwest side, Dali lost a province, and now barely survived, quietly licking its wounds. For Nanzhao, they were constantly attacked by the three vassal states newly acquired by Lu Yuan, embroiled in a haze of war with no time to spare. Chu, Su, and Song, three nations, just opened up huge new territories, and were busy digesting their gains, not having any extra strength to expand outward. Zhou Country was busy dealing with the Barbarians and had no time for foreign wars. Liang was engaged in a seesaw battle with Lai and Xu in the north, thus they couldn¡¯t spare any effort to regard their southern border. Nanhai Country, after Yan Wangqiu¡¯s death, became the weakest nation in Yangzhou. Even its military strength was inferior to Chilih, Kunhai, Jianchuan and other small countries with only half a province of territory, hence they lacked the ability and courage to cause trouble. As for Ning Country. In view of Chu Country¡¯s continuous victories and dramatic increase in national power, equalling Ning Country, they were also greatly frightened. However, until they had accrued enough strength to deal with Chu Country and found a suitable opportunity, they dare not act recklessly. Therefore, even though Chu Country¡¯s periphery was still filled with enemy countries as far as the eye could see. Strangely enough, it was extremely peaceful. For the next two to three years, before those countries could spare a hand, there no worries about any wars on the borders. Taking this opportunity, Lu Yuan planned to sort out the country¡¯s political affairs, allowing Chu State to properly digest its newly opened territory, thereby preparing for the sure-to-be more intense wars in the future. During this period, he also planned to provide proper enlightenment to his two sons, helping them establish a right value system, to prevent them from being led astray by others. After that, he would let go, and let others teach his sons. Of course, although he said he¡¯d let go, the teachers he found for his sons were not chosen randomly. For the education of Lu He and Lu Hao, Lu Yuan planned to hand them over to Sun Siwen. With this friend as their instructor, he didn¡¯t have to worry about his children being misled. Moreover, since he was back. Sun Siwen didn¡¯t need to continue to stay in Xiangyang, studying martial arts with Zhou Qing. With him as the master, no one was more qualified than Lu Yuan to teach Sun Siwen. As someone who relied on the Red Sun Divine Skill to break through the Innate realm, and who perfected this technique¡¯s transition to the Innate realm, Lu Yuan naturally had the confidence. Just right. He would teach Sun Siwen, who in turn would teach his own sons, which was essentially like him teaching his own sons. ¡°Logical closed-loop, perfect.¡± After writing the letter summoning Sun Siwen and Zhou Qing back, he blew on the ink on it that hadn¡¯t dried yet, revealing a smile on his face. Having not seen his disciples and friends for over two years, he missed them dearly. Moreover, with little Qing breaking into the Innate realm, it was improper of him as a master not to provide guidance. This would be a good opportunity to check their cultivation progress, and simultaneously guide Zhou Qing on how to break through to the second realm of Innate. This could be considered as making up for his previous absence. Chapter 685 - Chapter 685: Chapter 308: Reunion of Deep Affection Chapter 685: Chapter 308: Reunion of Deep Affection Shenwu, the 6th year, 11th month, 13th day. Upon Lu Yuan¡¯s summons, Zhou Qing and Sun Siwen hurried from Xiangyang for days and finally arrived at Baling City. Without taking time to rest, the two arrived in the city and immediately went to meet Lu Yuan. ¡°Master!¡± ¡°Brother Lu!¡± As soon as they met, Zhou Qing and Sun Siwen couldn¡¯t help but take a couple of steps forward, excitedly surrounding Lu Yuan. Their relationship was as close as can be, all of them having come from their hometown of Dayu County. Afterwards, they remained inseparable during their time in Changning County, Wugang County, and Shaoyang Prefecture. Lu Yuan had always regarded Zhou Qing as a son, and Sun Siwen as a brother. The two of them also regarded him as a father and brother, their bond as close as family. Although there was now a monarch-minister relationship between the three of them, it didn¡¯t affect their friendship. Furthermore, Lu Yuan had specifically emphasized that they should not use the royal title in private. Instead, they should continue to address each other as before, using ¡°Master¡± and ¡°Brother.¡± ¡°Hahaha, Brother Sun, Xiaoqing!¡± It had been two years since they last saw each other, and Lu Yuan laughed heartily upon seeing them, extremely delighted. He hurried forward to shake their hands and inspect them closely. Two years had passed, and both of their appearances had changed considerably. Their auras and demeanors had undergone an earth-shattering transformation. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï When Lu Yuan went to Xiangyang to guide Zhou Qing in the past, his eldest disciple¡¯s Cultivation was still at the peak of the first-tier and had not yet broken through into the Innate realm. Now, he had reached the Innate stage, having undergone Washing Marrow, and appeared five or six years younger. He had transformed from his original mid-thirties to around thirty, becoming much more handsome and full of vigor. Moreover, his demeanor was reserved, and upon closer inspection, he seemed to harbor a blazing sun beneath his refined appearance, as if shrouded in darkness and all the more unfathomable and terrifying. Lu Yuan knew that when the darkness was torn apart by the blazing sun, the radiance of the rising sun would attract the attention of the entire world. ¡®The Sun Rising from the Abyss, is this Xiaoqing¡¯s martial arts external body?¡¯ Withdrawing his gaze, Lu Yuan silently pondered, but a smile of happiness still lingered on his face. Patting Zhou Qing¡¯s shoulder, he said, ¡°Good, good, good! You have not disappointed me in the two years we have not seen each other. You have successfully broken through into the Innate realm and have built a solid foundation. As long as you continue to accumulate True Pneuma, comprehend Heaven and Earth, and nourish your soul, the day you reach the Second Tier of Innate is just around the corner.¡± Zhou Qing, worthy of being a person without external help and who could compete with Lu Yuan in terms of progress, had managed to stand firm in the Innate realm solely relying on himself. He even took another step forward in his cultivation. Lu Yuan¡¯s previous worries now seemed completely unnecessary. Even without his help, considering Zhou Qing¡¯s capabilities, as long as there was a sufficient supply of elixirs and spiritual medicines, it would take at most twenty years for him to break through into the Second Tier of Innate. Even without that much supply, by persisting for fifty or sixty years, he would still have the opportunity to reach that realm. Compared to Lu Yuan, Zhou Qing was the true genius. ¡°Disciple owes his achievements today to Master¡¯s teachings and guidance. If it were not for Master¡¯s personal guidance in Xiangyang, teaching me how to break through the Innate realm, as well as the key points of cultivation, disciple would not have been able to solidify his realm so quickly.¡± Zhou Qing, as always, showed the utmost respect and humility towards his Master. Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan simply smiled and nodded, inwardly sighing with emotion. ¡®In the future, our Chu State will have another Pillar Holding up the Sky.¡¯ Delighted by his disciple¡¯s innate talent, Lu Yuan turned to Sun Siwen and expressed his further happiness. ¡°Brother Sun, you too have made progress in martial arts over the past two years, achieving minor success and breaking through to the Tier Two realm. It¡¯s truly a cause for celebration. At this rate, it won¡¯t be long before you reach the Innate realm.¡± Perhaps it was because of practicing martial arts, but Sun Siwen¡¯s physique had also become much stronger and more robust. His facial features had become more rugged, and his blood and energy surged like a cloud, with radiant eyes. A fierce aura was hidden underneath his scholarly demeanor, cultivated from years of studying. Although it didn¡¯t make him appear weak, it only made him more unfathomable. With just one glance, Lu Yuan knew that Sun Siwen had already reached the Tier Two realm of martial arts. However, as he had just broken through this realm, he had not yet fully converged the blood and energy within his body. This had caused a slight conflict in his aura, creating a strange phenomenon. But given Sun Siwen¡¯s temperament and with Lu Yuan¡¯s guidance, it would likely take no more than half a month to completely consolidate this realm. ¡°Brother Lu spent precious elixirs to help me in my cultivation. In three years, I have only reached the Tier Two realm, which makes me feel deeply ashamed. I don¡¯t dare to accept such praise.¡± Faced with Lu Yuan¡¯s compliments, Sun Siwen appeared somewhat embarrassed and hesitant to accept it. Throughout these years of cultivation, Sun Siwen spent the first year studying the essentials of the Chi Yang Divine Skill, learning about the meridians in the human body and the Daoist school¡¯s principles to build his foundation. In the following two years, under Zhou Qing¡¯s supervision, he officially began his martial arts cultivation. After initially cultivating Inner Strength and consolidating it for a month, Sun Siwen began taking the Divine Blood Elixir with Zhou Qing¡¯s help, breaking through meridians and realms. One elixir could help break through one meridian. Over two years, Sun Siwen took a total of six elixirs, an average of one every four months, barely managing to break through to the Tier Two realm. His aptitude for martial arts was indeed inferior to that of Lu Yuan and Zhou Qing, even somewhat below average. If not for the help of the elixirs, it wouldn¡¯t have been so easy for him to reach his current realm. Fortunately, what he lacked in aptitude was made up for in realm. Sun Siwen had studied Confucian classics for forty years. Influenced by Lu Yuan, he also studied the Daoist and Buddhist schools, and his state of mind was quite extraordinary. Having served as a local official and as Prime Minister at the center of power, he had a resolute will tempered by worldly experiences. Chapter 686 - Chapter 686: Chapter 308: Reunion of Deep Feelings_2 Chapter 686: Chapter 308: Reunion of Deep Feelings_2 Under this powerful state of mind, each time he took the elixir, he could easily control the surging Inner Strength. It only took three or four months to assimilate all their inner strength, consolidate their rapidly increased Cultivation, and solidify their foundation. In this step-by-step approach, Sun Siwen¡¯s apparent breakthrough in Cultivation was slow, but in reality, it was extremely fast. Because all he needed was to improve his Inner Strength. As long as he took the elixir, he could quickly accumulate Inner Strength, improve his Cultivation, and not worry about his realm. On the other hand, other people. If their realm was not enough, even if they had the elixir to take, they could not control the power beyond their abilities. Forcing it would not only bring no benefits but might also cause a loss of control of power, leading to their body exploding and dying. As for increasing their realm, what they relied on was comprehension, accumulation, and not something that the power of medicine could make up for. Especially when breaking through Innate, besides needing a large number of spiritual objects as supplement, one¡¯s own understanding of Heaven and Earth, and their control of their state of mind, was even more important. Because these insights and states of mind were related to the soul metamorphosis of a martial artist. Only when the soul metamorphoses into Innate can one establish a connection with Heaven and Earth and cultivate martial arts external body and transform it into Martial Arts Will. All of these relied on one¡¯s state of mind. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã0 With Lu Yuan¡¯s innate talent and the help of various spiritual objects and golden fingers, it took him fifteen years to complete this state of mind Cultivation practice. Zhou Qing¡¯s innate talent was even better than his, but he lacked resources, so it took him more time, a full eighteen years. As for Sun Siwen, he had been diligently studying sacred and wise books since childhood and continued to do so, later even becoming a local official and eventually the prime minister, which was far beyond ordinary people in various opportunities. Now that he was forty-five years old, his heart cultivation practice had been progressing steadily since his early years in Enlightenment, totaling forty years, and it had finally achieved major success. With such a profound accumulation, coupled with the guidance and experience imparted by Lu Yuan and Zhou Qing in recent years, he was able to meet the requirements for breaking through Innate. All he needed was enough accumulation of Inner Strength and supply of spiritual objects to help him naturally complete the soul metamorphosis and break through Innate. This way, he could bypass the process of accumulating mental states. If calculated by the current progress of breaking through one meridian every four years, Sun Siwen would be able to reach the threshold of breaking through Innate in at most another five years. Even if the total time it took to break through Innate landmark and the one-year accumulation of constructing the Martial Arts external body during the process is considered, it was only six years in total. With nine years of practicing martial arts, he would be able to break through Innate, which is one year earlier than Lu Yuan¡¯s original estimate of ten years. If this Cultivation breakthrough was revealed, it would surely make many people envious. So Sun Siwen¡¯s statement of shame can genuinely be regarded as a form of irony. Of course, Lu Yuan knew that Sun Siwen¡¯s character didn¡¯t have the idea of showing off, and the other party genuinely felt somewhat ashamed. Thus, he didn¡¯t pay attention to it, but simply smiled and said, ¡°During this Western Expedition, I have defeated many strong enemies and gained a lot of insights, and my Immortal Dao Cultivation has progressed. Now I have condensed one energy and can be on par with all major Immortal Dao Sect Lords in the world. After breaking through my Cultivation, my mastery over the Immortal Spirit has deepened even further. I have gained much understanding and comprehension in many aspects. Since Brother Sun feels that his breakthrough is slow, now that I have returned to the country in style, I have plenty of free time. In a while, let¡¯s pick a good day for me to personally guide the spiritual energy for you, refine your body and soul, and help your Cultivation advance even further. How about that?¡± Lu Yuan said with a smile. Although Sun Siwen would be able to break through Innate in six years. However, as he said, this speed is somewhat slow. The so-called slow is not referring to the speed of his breakthrough, but rather that it¡¯s too slow for Chu State to cultivate an Innate in six years. As for Qianzhong County, although there is now Jihui in charge. But the old monk had already laid his cards on the table with Lu Yuan, and judging by his current physical condition, he could only live for another two years without any intervention. Even if he uses the nirvana of turtle breath to prolong his life, it would only last about five years at most. And if there were any changes in the meantime, it would only take three or four years. That said, three or four years from now, Qianzhong County would be without an Innate powerhouse. For the problem on that side, Lu Yuan¡¯s solution was to train another Yellow Turban Warrior Avatar two or three years later to take the place of Jihui and sit in Qianzhong County. The problem of Qianzhong County can be resolved. However, there are similar problems in the imperial court as well. Cui Changqing was tired of managing the country¡¯s politics day by day, and his health was deteriorating. According to Lu Yuan¡¯s observations over these days, the other party had only two or three years left to live. That is to say, in two or three years, Chu State will lose its prime minister in charge of political affairs. When that time comes, he will have no choice but to find someone to stand up and take Cui Changqing¡¯s place, to help him manage domestic political affairs. Looking at Chu State, the only person who could take this position was the absolutely trusted Sun Siwen, who also had enough prestige in the court. Sun Siwen was originally the Right Prime Minister of the court, and although he had retired in the past two years for martial arts practice, his position still remained. Moreover, during his early years, he had participated in the establishment of the Changsha Kingdom and Chu State. Coupled with the fact that he was Cui Changqing¡¯s son-in-law, he could fully take over the latter¡¯s political resources. After Cui Changqing leaves, it could be said that he would naturally and rightfully take the position of Right Prime Minister, and no one would be dissatisfied. Given his relationship with Lu Yuan, he didn¡¯t need to worry about him playing any power games. Therefore, it had become an urgent matter for Sun Siwen to break through Innate early. Chapter 687 - Chapter 687: Chapter 308: Reunion of Deep Affection_3 Chapter 687: Chapter 308: Reunion of Deep Affection_3 Exactly. For example, Lu Yuan¡¯s current Immortal Realm could already use the Earth Element Energy he cultivated within his body to perfectly guide and stimulate the Immortal Spirit energy within the jade pieces, helping Sun Siwen to quickly absorb this spiritual energy. If Sun Siwen could refine all the spiritual energy Lu Yuan had allocated for him, his cultivation would undoubtedly skyrocket to the top level. Moreover, he could unblock two or three bizarre meridians at this level. If such an effect could be achieved, it would be like saving two or three years of hard work. Even with Lu Yuan¡¯s help this time, it might allow Sun Siwen¡¯s soul to undergo some early transformations, allowing him to break through Innate more easily. After all, the so-called Innate is just the initial cultivation of magical power in the Immortal Method, not even considered a beginner. As in the case of Anqiu, who had not yet condensed the Five Elements Energy, he was already comparable to the second stage of Martial Arts. Today, Lu Yuan has condensed a Five Elements Energy, officially entered the Immortal Method, and his Divine Powers have become extraordinary. The Yellow Turban Strongman he casually trained has the strength of the second stage of Martial Arts. With his Divine Powers being so capable, it is more than enough to shorten the time it takes for Sun Siwen, who has already accumulated enough time, to break through Innate by a few years. ¡®Moreover, it is beneficial to let Brother Sun break through Innate earlier.¡¯ Lu Yuan looked at the surprised and overjoyed Sun Siwen in front of him and thought. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Breaking through Innate requires not only spiritual objects, Inner Strength, and state of mind, but also strict age requirements. For any martial artist, if they cannot break through Innate before the age of sixty, they will never have such hope for the rest of their lives due to the exhaustion and dispersion of the three treasures of essence, qi, and spirit. It is for this reason. Many talents with enough aptitude can quickly accumulate a state of mind, but they lack resources, cannot complete the accumulation and transformation, and have to endure time and eventually miss the sixty-year deadline. There are also many people from aristocratic families and great martial sects who have no shortage of resources, but lack talent and thus accumulate slowly in their state of mind. Even by the age of sixty, they cannot achieve enough state of mind to break through Innate. Not everyone is like Sun Siwen, who has a friend like Lu Yuan, who can learn from the Buddhist and Taoist classics while studying the sages¡¯ books and unknowingly accumulate their state of mind. Not everyone is like him, who has a supportive friend and can follow the experience of local officials, honing their skills in the mortal world. Eventually, they even serve as the prime minister in charge of a country¡¯s politics, using millions of people in a country to polish their state of mind. It is because of these countless difficult-to-replicate strict conditions that Sun Shiwen was able to achieve such a state of mind at the age of forty-five. For the vast majority of ordinary people, breaking through Innate is more about relying on talent to complete the accumulation of state of mind. And all of these ordinary people are one in a million, rare and brilliant examples. It took a thousand years for the Five Poisons Sect to produce a Lan Cai¡¯er. Zhou Qing, with a blood feud and Lu Yuan¡¯s help, was able to achieve Innate over 18 years. Most of Lu Yuan¡¯s progress relied on various adventures and his background advantage. All three of them were able to break through Innate in their thirties, which was extremely difficult to replicate, if not impossible. And the other powerful Innate inheritors trained by various great forces mostly break through Innate at the age of forty or fifty, even as many as fifty years old. It is also for this reason. At the White Phoenix Temple, when Jihui was about to die of old age, they found themselves in such an embarrassing situation, unable to find a suitable successor. Because in his temple, those with enough state of mind were all over sixty years old. These old monks, with their declining energy and spirit, even with enough state of mind, could not meet the Innate conditions and had no hope of achieving this level. And the other young people with enough talent did not have the ten to twenty years for them to gradually cultivate their state of mind. If the state of mind is not enough, even if it is filled with resources, it is just a castle in the sand or a rootless tree without the ability to consolidate and unify, collapsing completely as soon as it is touched, and ending with a powerful outburst and death. Without Lu Yuan¡¯s help, breaking through Innate is not that easy for ordinary people or even the descendants of great families. From this point of view, Zhou Qing and Sun Siwen were indeed much luckier than most other beings and even Innate Grandmasters. Zhou Qing realized this, so every time he faced Lu Yuan¡¯s praise, he would modestly say that it was all his master¡¯s credit. This was not modesty, but what he truly believed. If not for Lu Yuan¡¯s generous teaching, from an early age instructing him in Buddhist and Taoist classics, explaining the essentials of the Chi Yang Divine Skill, pinpointing the risks and breakthroughs when breaking through Innate, providing a large amount of elixirs and spiritual energy, helping him complete the transformation of his body and soul¡­ Zhou Qing would not have been able to complete his state of mind and cultivation accumulation at such a young age, and break through Innate so smoothly. All these factors cannot be erased by mere talent alone. If it weren¡¯t for Lu Yuan, even if Zhou Qing was exceptionally talented, it would have been difficult for him to achieve Innate on his own, merely breaking through to the top level would have been a stretch. Similarly, the same applies to Sun Siwen. However, for Lu Yuan, helping them both was also helping himself. Putting friendship aside. Zhou Qing presented Lu Yuan with the Chi Yang Divine Skill and the treasure trove of the Yuzhong Guo Family, which was a great contribution. Later on, he even helped Lu Yuan in his Southern Expeditions and Northern Border wars, achieving numerous merits. Sun Siwen also helped Lu Yuan with his internal affairs, keeping watch at the rear, allowing him to fight in campaigns without worrying about internal matters. The contributions of both were sufficient for Lu Yuan. The three of them were in a relationship of mutual achievement and growth. Furthermore, on top of this relationship, the friendship behind them formed the stability of Chu¡¯s core group. It is precisely for this reason that Lu Yuan is so candid and generous with the two of them. Because the three of them are a single unit. There is no question of who gives more and who is at a loss. Monarchs and ministers getting along, master and disciple with deep affection, close friends discussing matters of friendship, the ultimate in worldly affairs is no more than this. Lu Yuan thought about all this and then laughed heartily with Zhou Qing and Sun Siwen, saying, ¡°Now that Xiaoqing is back, let¡¯s not hurry to leave. The situation is stable now, and there¡¯s no worry about wars. You don¡¯t need to hurry back to the Northern Border, so stay here for the New Year. And the same goes for Brother Sun. Now that you¡¯re back, stay in Baling, and I¡¯ll personally guide your martial arts practice. As for He¡¯er and Hao¡¯er, although I started their Enlightenment, I don¡¯t have much time to look after them. I would also like to ask you to serve as their teacher, responsible for He¡¯er and Hao¡¯er¡¯s Enlightenment. With Brother Sun¡¯s talent, I am sure you can teach them well and bring two more outstanding princes to Chu.¡± The rare reunion of the three filled Lu Yuan¡¯s heart with joy. Similarly, Sun Siwen and Zhou Qing also felt the same. Therefore, when faced with Lu Yuan¡¯s request, Sun Siwen happily agreed, ¡°I will not disappoint Brother Lu¡¯s trust.¡± Chapter 688 - Chapter 688: Chapter 309: Increasing Income and Reducing Expenditure Chapter 688: Chapter 309: Increasing Income and Reducing Expenditure Winter is gradually approaching, and the year-end festival is soon to come. With the weather getting colder and colder, the land of Jiangnan gradually became covered in a layer of ice and snow. The thick snow froze everything, freeing the busy people of Chu State from their work for a year and enjoying a moment of peace. However, while the people below have become idle, the officials in the court have become busier. At the end of the year, according to customary practices, the court will have to summarize this year¡¯s affairs, count the annual incomes and outcomes, assess the gains and losses of various projects, and then evaluate the officials¡¯ performance and reward or punish them based on their achievements¡­ There are countless things to do. Above is only the central court affairs. At the same time, in the local counties and prefecture-level governments, officials have to send project officials to the capital to pay tribute to the Dynasty and report on the local work achievements. As a result, there is an influx of project officials from the local governments into Baling city at the end of the year. It not only makes the court busier but also adds to the prosperity of Baling. Under this background, even if Lu Yuan had already left the affairs of the state, he could not help but get involved. Fortunately, his main job is not to do the statistical evaluation but to review the reports and listen to Minister Cui Changqing¡¯s reports while giving guidance on major national affairs. After a large number of trivial matters had been dealt with by Cui Changqing and others, his workload was not too heavy. Just by sparing a couple of hours every day, he could manage it all. However, as the end-of-year evaluations are gradually being completed, Lu Yuan has to personally take charge of the strategic planning for the coming year and beyond. He can no longer fully delegate these important matters. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï So after the winter solstice ceremony and receiving local officials and the court¡¯s officials, Lu Yuan summoned Cui Changqing and other ministers to discuss the strategic planning for the next year and beyond. In the side hall of Taiji Palace, Cui Changqing and several heads of the six ministries gathered together, with Lu Yuan sitting beside them, and gave orders to the ministers. Since the fourth year of Shenwu, I have led the campaign against the southwestern Yi people and established Qianzhong County. It has been two years now. When Qianzhong County was established, I decided on the strategy of immigrant settlement and Southwest development. However, in the past two years, despite the continuous relocation of refugees, recruitment of landless and small land farmers, the exile of criminals, the establishment of military barracks, and various other policies, only over 400,000 people have been moving into Qianzhong. In Qianzhong, the Yi people still account for the majority. This is not acceptable. Lu Yuan looked at the ministers and said seriously: ¡°In the southwest, Great Chu has three vassal states, Kunhai, Chilih, and Jianchuan. They serve as barriers for our Chu State and are also instruments to control the southwest. And Qianzhong County is the tool for controlling these states.¡± In order to deter these vassal states and continue to operate in the southwest, Qianzhong County needs to be further developed. We need more people here to cultivate more fertile fields and produce more grains to serve as a logistics base, providing constant support for our efforts in the southwest. For the next few years, Great Chu will not wage any war, which is a rare opportunity to recuperate. Therefore, I want you to relocate at least 150,000 people to Qianzhong County within the next three years. With over 600,000 Chu people in Qianzhong County, we can barely assimilate the local Yi people and initially develop this county to become an important place in the southwest. There is also the matter of Xichuan. Xichuan County, which originally included Xichuan and Hanzhong, has vast land with few people. Some prefectures and counties have only tens of thousands of people, and some have only thousands, even less than a county and a village in Dongting. With such a scarcity of households, how can we properly govern and develop Xichuan? The Xichuan plain is fertile and no less abundant than Dongting and Jianghan plains, hence deserving the title of ¡°Land of Abundance.¡± Originally, Xichuan County depended on this plain to support a population of three to four million people. However, now in the newly expanded seven prefectures of Xichuan County, there are only 600,000 people. Even if we include the original three prefectures of Chu State, there are only about 1.5 million people, only one-third of the population at the peak of Xichuan County. So, to develop the Xichuan Plain and make it another major money and grain producing area for Great Chu after Jianghan and Dongting Plains, it is necessary to relocate people to it, especially to the prefectures and counties located on the Xichuan Plain. Xichuan County¡¯s Yuzhong, Linjiang, and Wushan prefectures are densely populated, and in recent years, there has been a large number of landless and small land farmers facing difficulties. There are also such people in Xiangyang and Dongting prefectures. Cooperate with the local governments and do a good job of statistics. From these three prefectures and two counties, at least 500,000 people should be recruited and resettled to the newly expanded seven prefectures of Xichuan County to develop Xichuan. This migration must also be completed within three years¡¯ deadline. With the relocation of people to Xichuan and Qianzhong counties, this will be the top priority for our Great Chu in the next three years. Do you all understand?¡± Lu Yuan asked, as his gaze swept over Cui Changqing and the others. Everyone nodded their heads and echoed together, ¡°We understand.¡± The matter of migration has always been carried out by the court, and it has long been a national policy. Now that Lu Yuan has put it forward, it is only a reiteration and official establishment as a national policy. Cui Changqing and the others are well aware of its importance and will not have any objections to it. Chapter 689 - Chapter 689: Chapter 309: Increasing Revenue and Reducing Expenditure_2 Chapter 689: Chapter 309: Increasing Revenue and Reducing Expenditure_2 ¡°Hmm.¡± Seeing that all the ministers nodded in agreement, Lu Yuan nodded and did not say much about it. Instead, he continued: ¡°At present, Chu State¡¯s local prefectures and counties, the central forbidden army, and the navy are all expanding their forces. As of now, the total number of troops in the entire country has reached 382,000.¡± For these many soldiers, their annual military expenses alone require more than 27 million silver tales. If there are wars, it can even reach 30 million silver tales. At the same time, the basic expenses of the local government offices and the central court also require about five million silver tales a year. And there¡¯s the ongoing immigration project, which requires one to two million silver tales a year. However, with the current fiscal revenue of the court, including the annual tribute of three million silver tales from Nanhai Country, it is only 23 million silver tales a year. By this calculation, there is a deficit of about ten million silver tales each year. Although I¡¯ve campaigned in the southwest, I¡¯ve collected more than 50 million silver tales from many Yi people. Previously, Huang Xuan took over Jianchuan and got more than 20 million silver tales. With that 70 million silver tales, it will last at most seven years. After seven years, when the accumulated wealth is used up, the court will face the dilemma of having no money to use. So how to increase resources and reduce expenditure as much as possible within these seven years and achieve a financial balance is the top priority now. If you have any solutions, please share them now.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï By this point, Lu Yuan was also somewhat headache-ridden. Since he started his rebellion, the issue of money and food has always been the biggest problem. Even in the early days, in order to obtain military expenses, he even deceived Dan Ding Path, making an enemy of himself. Later, as Changsha transitioned to Chu State, the balance of income and expenditure was barely reached in recent years, and the financial situation was finally no longer stretched so thin. But as Xichuan and Qianzhong counties were developed, along with the massive expansion of Chu State¡¯s army, the financial balance was instantly broken, continuing to develop with an annual deficit. Moreover, the scale of the deficit seems to be getting bigger and bigger. Naturally, Lu Yuan was worried about this situation. Therefore, at today¡¯s strategic planning meeting for the next three years, he put this matter on the table as a key issue. The aim was to pool wisdom, draw on the intelligence of everyone, and find a solution together. ¡°Your Majesty, regarding this matter, the chiefs of our three provinces and six departments have already discussed it and developed several solutions,¡± said Cui Changqing, facing Lu Yuan¡¯s concern. ¡°To solve the financial deficit, there are only two ways ¨C increasing income and reducing expenditure.¡± As far as reducing expenditure is concerned, the military is constantly expanding with increased troops, the production of arms, and the building of warships. This is fundamental to national defense and cannot be reduced. The court offices are also selecting new officials for the administration of newly conquered territories, which is also indispensable. On the other hand, the immigration projects are now spending nearly two million silver tales each year on moving people to Qianzhong and Xichuan counties, which is quite costly. But at the same time, as you mentioned before, 650,000 people will be relocated to Xichuan and Qianzhong counties within the next three years. Once these migrations are completed, the annual budget of two million silver tales will be naturally saved. This is the part about reducing expenditure. What¡¯s left is increasing revenue. According to Your Majesty¡¯s first national policy, after relocating hundreds of thousands of people to Xichuan and Qianzhong counties, these two counties will naturally be developed. By that time, these two counties, with their three million people, will be managed for a few years, and they will be able to provide ten million silver tales of annual taxation. Just this item alone is enough to balance the deficit.¡± Cui Changqing said this with evident confidence. When Chu State had only three prefectures and 17 counties, with 5.7 million people, its annual tax revenue could reach 20 million silver tales. Now Chu State has become four prefectures and 34 counties, with more than 8 million people, doubling its territory and increasing its population by nearly half. With such a large scale, as long as it is fully developed, it will simply be more than enough to increase annual tax revenue by 10 million silver tales. Even if Xichuan and Qianzhong counties are developed well enough, the annual increase in tax revenue will not be limited to 10 million silver tales, and it will not be a problem to increase it by another two or three million silver tales. With the well-trained bureaucracy that Chu State has developed since its founding, the competence of the court ministers, and the wisdom of the monarch, Cui Changqing has the confidence to develop the two counties to the level he mentioned within five or six years. Lu Yuan was moved by his words and said: ¡°If it can really be so, then when my Great Chu goes to war, there will be no shortage of money and grain.¡± Cui Changqing smiled and continued: ¡°It¡¯s not just that. In addition to developing and managing Qianzhong and Xichuan counties, there are several other ways to increase revenue. Qianzhong County has many mountains, and there are many minerals in the mountains. I have looked through the books and found records in the histories of Yangzhou of the southwest Yi people being rich in gold, silver, and copper mines. After Your Majesty established Qianzhong County, I also sent officials and craftsmen to search for mines there. After some investigation, we indeed found a lot. In Qianzhong County alone, the mines previously opened by the Yi people include one gold mine, three silver mines, and seven copper mines. The value of the gold, silver, and copper produced each year is not less than two million silver tales.¡± Chapter 690 - Chapter 690: Chapter 309: Increasing Revenue and Reducing Expenditure_3 Chapter 690: Chapter 309: Increasing Revenue and Reducing Expenditure_3 Moreover, the barbarians¡¯ mining technology is backward. If we use the more advanced mining technology of our Great Chu, the production of these eleven gold, silver, and copper mines can at least double and reach an annual output of 4 million silver taels. Aside from this, there should be other undiscovered mineral resources in Qianzhong County. If we carefully search for them, there should be many gains. As long as we discover one, it would be enough to annually increase the income of our Great Chu by hundreds of thousands of silver taels. In my estimation, if we could reform the existing mining technology and simultaneously develop new veins, then before these mines are depleted, Great Chu can have an annual increase of 5 million silver taels. If more mines are discovered later, this annual income would be even higher, reaching 10 million silver taels is not impossible. The only concern is that mining requires a large amount of manpower, and many deaths and injuries. It is no less than a thousand people dying every year due to the barbarians¡¯ mining. Even if our Great Chu undergoes a technical innovation, the casualties will not be small; an unavoidable annual loss of hundreds, or even thousands of lives. In this case, it is a dilemma for Qianzhong County, which already has a scarce population,¡± At this point, Cui Changqing also frowned. Qianzhong County has always had a small population, and even now, despite continuous immigration and including the recently developed barbarian population in Huichuan and Jianchang, it barely exceeds one million. This small number of people is not enough for Chu State to develop Qianzhong County. Having to mine again would not only require at least tens of thousands of miners but also reduce manpower for other projects. Additionally, the annual loss of a thousand lives is far from negligible. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Even with the strength of Great Chu, we can¡¯t help but feel the pain of these losses. However, after hearing Cui Changqing¡¯s concern, Lu Yuan laughed and waved his hand: ¡°Don¡¯t worry about the miners, I have my own solution. At the beginning of this year, I fought across the Lu River and captured Huichuan¡¯s Yi country. In this single battle, I defeated 50,000 barbarian troops and captured more than 30,000 prisoners. Subsequently, we pacified Hui Chuan, subjugated the Da Changhe country, and captured over 10,000 people. In total, there are 50,000 prisoners of war. Additionally, the True Person Huang Xuan led the army to attack Jianchuan, captured nearly 70,000 barbarian prisoners, besides plundering 30 barbarian women and children back to the country. Combining these numbers, there are no less than 120,000 barbarian prisoners in Qianzhong. These are all able-bodied men, excellent labor forces. Having no use for them previously, I had them building roads in various places in Qianzhong. In a few months, they have achieved significant progress, connecting the main roads between districts. Now that there is a need for mining in Qianzhong County, I can allocate 50,000 of them to be sent directly into the mine. The remainder will continue to build roads. Although the main roads connecting the counties in Qianzhong County are now complete, local roads between counties and towns still need to be restored and are in desperate need of repair. Once they have finished building the roads, they can be sent to the mines at any time. There are also over 60,000 prisoners in the Xichuan County who are also building roads and cities. These are also available manpower. With these people, let alone a thousand people dying in the mines every year, even if 10,000 people died, it would be a trivial matter.¡± In the previous battles in southwestern and Xichuan regions, Lu Yuan had achieved great victories, capturing more than 180,000 barbarian soldiers in total. According to his policy implemented in the Qianzhong area, he had planned to reduce the number of barbarians. Naturally, he could not release these prisoners of war. However, it would be too wasteful to kill them all outright. After all, these were adult or nearly adult men, who in this era are all valuable labor forces. So after much consideration, he decided to use them as free labor to build various projects. Among which, building roads was just one part. Late on, he planned to use these prisoners to build water conservancy projects, city walls, and to cultivate farmland, etc¡­ Now, in the two counties of Qianzhong and Xichuan, there is still much work to be done. Qianzhong County, especially, is still a wasteland. If we want to develop these two counties, the required manpower is incalculable. In some difficult situations, lives will have to be sacrificed. Since people are going to die anyway, instead of killing the Chu people who can serve as the foundation, it¡¯s better to simply utilize these prisoner-of-war wastes. Use their hard work and blood to build the prosperity of Qianzhong and Xichuan. Since Cui Changqing wants to open mines, it¡¯s a good opportunity to allocate some of the surplus prisoners to increase Chu State¡¯s revenue. This would give them some value and not waste grain. ¡°If it can be done this way, then the mining issue in Qianzhong will be worry-free.¡± Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s words, Cui Changqing couldn¡¯t help but be overjoyed, feeling as if a weight had been lifted from his heart. Having resolved this issue, he moved on to the next strategy for revenue generation. ¡°In addition to regular taxes and mining, Great Chu can also gain a lot of profit from vassal state¡¯s tributes. Chilih, Kunhai, and Jianchuan are vassal states of our Great Chu and are our subjects. Within the Chu State, local prefectures and counties must pay taxes to the central government. Southsea, which hasn¡¯t yet submitted to Chu State, still has to pay an annual tribute of three million silver taels and two million shi of grain. As for the three southwestern states, which have already submitted, it is natural to follow the example of tributes. In my opinion, Your Majesty can set a custom, with the three southwestern states providing 100,000 to 300,000 silver taels per prefecture according to their current population, for them to present annually for national use. In this way, the fifteen prefectures of the three southwestern states can collect 2 to 3 million silver taels in tribute alone each year. As they develop further, even reaching 4 to 5 million silver taels would not be out of the question. Now, this would be a significant source of income. The strategies for increasing revenue and reducing expenditure mentioned above were the result of brainstorming among us. According to the national policy execution, in three years, it would be possible to reduce expenditure by 2 million silver taels and increase revenue by more than 10 million taels, balancing the books by 12 million taels. In other words, by the ninth year of Shenwu, Chu State¡¯s annual revenue would reach a surplus of 4 million silver taels. And by six years later, which means the twelfth year of Shenwu, Chu State¡¯s revenue is expected to reach 20 million silver, with an annual surplus of 12 million taels. With such financial support, don¡¯t even mention today¡¯s 380,000-strong army. Even if we recruit another 200,000 soldiers, Great Chu¡¯s finances can still support it. And if we can really have an army of 600,000 strong, then our Great Chu¡¯s military power can truly rival that of Zhou, Liang, Ning, and other great nations, becoming a real hegemonic power. By then, it would be imminent to march to the east, follow the river down, attack and annihilate Ning Country, and unify Yangzhou.¡± Cui Changqing¡¯s face was flushed with excitement as he spoke. Even though six years later, he would no longer be alive in this world. But just thinking about accomplishing such a great cause in his own hands, his heart¡¯s ambition gradually comes to fruition. It was an excitement that could not be contained. Even Lu Yuan, after hearing that six years later, Chu State could achieve an annual surplus of 12 million silver taels, was also deeply moved. Because this meant that once Chu State¡¯s potential was fully developed, it could receive an annual income of up to 42 million silver taels. Such income would be on par with Ning Country, which possesses five prefectures and thirty-eight counties in Jiangdong. According to the investigation from the foreign office of the imperial city, based on the information leaked by Jinling officials, Ning Country¡¯s current annual income is around 52 million silver taels. Compared to the 42 million taels per year Cui Changqing had predicted for Chu State six years later, the difference is only 10 million taels. The gap is not significant. How can he not be excited? ¡®Moreover, after six years, Brother Sun will achieve Inborn, and my second Yellow Turban Strongman Avatar will also be refined. By then, Chu State will have two more Innate Combat Powers and 600,000 troops. Perhaps, as Cui Changqing has said, we could really launch an eastward expedition, conquer Ning Country, and unify Yangzhou.¡¯ Lu Yuan was thinking this way, and then seeing Cui Changqing and other important ministers looking forward to the future and feeling proud, he couldn¡¯t help but laugh out loud. ¡°Cui Qing is right. With such national power, we can surely destroy Ning Country and unify Yangzhou!¡± His bold words immediately echoed through the chamber. The ministers who were nearby were all infected by this enthusiasm, and one after another said, ¡°With Your Majesty¡¯s wisdom, we can surely annihilate Ning Country and unify the world. We congratulate Your Majesty and Great Chu!¡± Chapter 691 - Chapter 691: Chapter 310: Snow Disaster and Barbarians Chapter 691: Chapter 310: Snow Disaster and Barbarians After formulating several major national policies on immigration and resource utilization, the strategy for Chu State¡¯s future for the next three to six years basically takes shape. From now on, unless there are significant external factors, Lu Yuan will not change the national policy. However, it is already the end of the year, and the sixth year of Shenwu is about to pass. Even if the policy is in place, it can only be implemented gradually after the beginning of next spring. Therefore, Lu Yuan only communicated with the heads of Cui Changqing and other three provinces and six departments, clarified the specific policies, and then let those ministers go back and start the preparations beforehand. As for the rest, they can only be taken care of later on. After the winter solstice, it is the twelfth lunar month, and the weather in Chu State becomes increasingly cold. Since entering the twelfth lunar month, the weather has become more abnormal and horrifying. First, there is cold wind, then heavy snowfall, followed by cold rain, and ultimately all at once, as if determined to crush everything in-between heaven and earth. Across the wilderness on both sides of the Yangtze River, everything is covered with a thick layer of snow, and in some places, it reaches knee-deep. From the north, the cold wind howls and snowflakes flurry, and the whole world seems to be silent under this freezing cold. There are few people on the streets, even in the prosperous city of Baling, with very few people seen on the streets at this time. The terrifying cold wave forces countless people to huddle in their homes, gather by the fire, and use this to resist the boundless coldness. Seeing this situation, Lu Yuan orders the officials to patrol all parts of the city to check each neighborhood. If any citizens¡¯ houses are found collapsed due to the blizzard with nowhere to live, the government will provide relief immediately. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï Unbelievable as it may seem, after patrolling the city, officials and soldiers found dozens of civilian houses crushed by snow, with hundreds of people freezing to death as a result, and the remaining hundreds scattering to nearby homes, struggling to survive together. Lu Yuan receives the report and pays great attention to the situation. He then orders his disciple Zhuang Hua to lead his troops to assist the government officials in clearing the snow for the city residents and rescuing the affected people. The other party is now the Zhijinwu, among the nine ministers, in charge of the 4,000 Zhijin guards in the city, responsible for public security. With these 4,000 people and the city officials, it is enough to deal with this snow disaster. However, it is easy to solve the disaster in Baling City as the emperor¡¯s location. But in other regions of Chu State, like the prefectures and counties and beneath them, the rural villages, it¡¯s much harder for citizens to get through the snowstorm. ¡°After this disaster, I¡¯m afraid tens of thousands, or even more than a hundred thousand citizens will die in the country. Everything withers under the joint attack of wind and snow. This natural disaster truly cannot be fended off by strength alone.¡± Lu Yuan climbs to the palace¡¯s high towers, looking over the entire Baling City, and gazes at the vast whiteness, sighing helplessly. The temperature now goes down to minus ten degrees Celsius during the coldest time. With his current Inborn Grandmaster cultivation and Immortal Method energy, he cannot endure long in the wild. For ordinary people without any support, depending solely on their thatched houses to resist the cold, it is even harder. If their houses are sturdy, not susceptible to wind or snow, and with ample firewood reserves, they can barely withstand this cold wave. However, if they are poorly prepared, their houses are not strong enough, and they don¡¯t have enough firewood, the wind and snow could kill them. ¡°I wonder if this world has what is called an ice age climate. In recent years, the weather has become colder by the day, and the snowstorms in winter are more severe each year. I remember when I first came to Jiangnan, the weather was cold in winter, but the snow was not heavy, and the heaviest snow only just covered the ground. Even in the Lingnan region, it doesn¡¯t snow in winter. But in recent years, I heard that it even snowed in Nanhai City as well. I find it hard to believe that this is not an ice age.¡± Gazing up towards the falling snow, Lu Yuan catches a snowflake and feels the chill on his fingertips, a trace of worry in his heart. If an ice age were truly to come, it would be a disastrous omen for the millions of people in the Nine Provinces and ten domains. The regions of Jiangnan and Yangzhou are good, being situated in the south, but they are also affected by the cold wave to some extent. However, in the northern states, close to Beiming, it is already cold. Now, with the impact of this cold climate, most of the people and livestock might freeze to death. Particularly in the northern grasslands, the Western Gobi, the Snowy Plateau, the Mysterious Snow Forest, and other regions that experience continuous freezing temperatures all year round, they will suffer a significant loss of strength under this cold wave. Eventually, the affected forces will be driven by the cold wave to move towards warmer regions like the Nine Provinces in desperation, and a massive migration will occur. ¡°Especially the Highland Barbarians on the Snow Plateau. They have already suffered a flood earlier this year, with countless people, cattle, and sheep dying. Now, they are affected by the snowstorm and their already-difficult days are getting even worse, with one problem after another. The Highland Barbarians tribes may lose even one-fifth, or even one-third, of their population due to freezes and the majority of their livestock as well. When the time comes that they have no livestock, the Barbarians who can no longer survive will have no choice but to move out of the highlands and try to supplement their losses by moving to the nearby wealthy regions of Zhou and Longxi in Yong State and the West Liang State.¡± ¡°In the Yongzhou area, in the coming years or even decades, there will likely be endless troubles.¡± Chapter 692 - Chapter 692: Chapter 310: Snow Disaster and Barbarians_2 Chapter 692: Chapter 310: Snow Disaster and Barbarians_2 At this time, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but think of the Snowy Plateau, which was close to Chu State and could even be said to border it. The Snowy Plateau had a vast area, which was no less than the entire Yangzhou and might even be several times larger. Anyway, since ancient times, there have been only a few people who could clearly define the boundaries of the Snowy Plateau. However, although this snowy area is vast, there are not many areas suitable for human habitation in it. Most of the livable areas are concentrated on the Qinghai Plateau, which is close to Yong State. Qinghai is the largest lake on the Snowy Plateau, with an area large enough to compete with several Dongting Lakes, making it a first-class land of lush water and grass. Not only can cattle and sheep be grazed there, but grain can also be cultivated. Relying on this fertile land, millions of highland barbarians are able to survive. Except for Lake Qinghai, there are also dozens of other large and small lakes on the plateau, as well as several large rivers, which also support many barbarians. However, most of these rivers and lakes are distributed in the northern and western parts of the plateau, while the eastern and southern areas adjacent to Chu State have no large lakes or rivers. Although there are some barbarian tribes in the highland areas adjacent to Xichuan County and the southwestern Yi People, they are small tribes with populations of only thousands or tens of thousands and do not pose a significant threat. On ordinary days, these barbarian tribes stay on the plateau and only occasionally go down the mountain with their horses to trade with Xichuan County and the Yi People, usually not causing trouble. As a result, Lu Yuan, who had already occupied Xichuan County, did not have to worry about being invaded by barbarians like Zhou Country. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï This was indeed a great blessing. Otherwise, facing the barbarians would give him headaches and even heart palpitations. Although no one has ever counted the number of barbarians on the plateau, the Snowy Plateau¡¯s area is several times larger than Yangzhou, and it has countless lakes and rivers. Even if most of the plateau is uninhabitable, Lu Yuan¡¯s collected information and historical records suggest that there are at least 10 million barbarians on the plateau. Ten million barbarians, plus the area of several large states, provide a foundation strong enough to form an empire. It is because the plateau is so large, and at the same time, the lakes and rivers suitable for settlement are too scattered, that the unification of the barbarians on the plateau is extremely difficult, almost impossible. Otherwise, if this force is gathered together, it would have a strength that would shake the world. But even if it is impossible to unify and consolidate, with the existing strength of the barbarians on the plateau, even if they just instinctively rise against Zhou Country, and Western Liang Country through plundering invasions, it would be enough to give these two great states of Yong State a hard time. Especially Western Liang Country, although taking up three counties, the land in Zhou Country¡¯s far west is just like what Lu Yuan is now conquering in the southwestern Yi People¡¯s area, being adjacent to many outer territories and always barren. According to rumors and historical records, the three counties of Western Liang Country are less viable than those in the Southwest Yi People¡¯s area, as there is very little land suitable for farming and too little land to support a large population. Moreover, the surrounding areas are populated by many different ethnic groups such as Qiang, Di, Hu, and Barbarians, and the pressure of survival from Zhou Country to the east is immense. Therefore, although the special environment has made Western Liang Country a powerful military force, its national strength is not strong. With the whole country¡¯s population of only about three or four million people and the half-agricultural, half-soldier policy, it is sustainable to support an army of 400 or 500 thousand, but it cannot last long. ¡°If this war triggered by the cold wave could end within two or three years, that would be good. But if it gets dragged out for five or six years, or even longer, the national strength of Western Liang Country would absolutely be unable to support it. Although the power of the millions of barbarians from the Snowy Plateau is dispersed, when they are gathered together, they can easily mobilize an army of several million. Moreover, there are quite a few strong people among the barbarians. Certainly, there are more than ten Inborn Grandmasters. With this strength, even Zhou Country would have to fight with all its might and be full of fear. Not to mention the annihilation of Western Liang Country.¡± Lu Yuan recalled the news from the Imperial City¡¯s Foreign Office in Yong State over the past few days. Since a major flood occurred on the Snowy Plateau a few months ago, Twenty-seven large and small tribes from the plateau joined forces, gathering an army of 500,000 soldiers, including three Inborn Grandmasters. This force was simply unstoppable by the local Zhou Country border army when it descended and looted two prefectures and counties. After the large-scale descent of the barbarians, many prefectures and counties of the two counties of Hexi and Longxi in Zhou Country were quickly captured. In particular, half of Hexi County was directly lost, and the county city was besieged by barbarians. In just a few days, the western border of Zhou Country was engulfed in the flames of war, with Hexi and Longxi counties facing the danger of collapse. Once these two counties were lost, the national gateway of Zhou Country would be thrown wide open. Those descending barbarians could directly attack Guannei County. Guannei County is where Zhou Country¡¯s Jingji is located, which is equivalent to Chu State¡¯s Dongting County, Ning Country¡¯s Linhai County, and is the true foundation and core. How could they let the enemy in? Therefore, Hexi and Longxi counties must not be lost. After learning that the barbarians had descended from the mountains, Emperor Zhou immediately ordered the formation of the Western Pacification Army. With Zhou Country¡¯s Western Grand General Sima Zhengde as the commander and the left and right Grand Generals as his deputies, they led 200,000 soldiers to quell the rebellious barbarians in the Longxi and Hexi counties. In addition, Zhou Country continued to allocate garrison troops from various counties to join the Western Pacification Army in order to fight the barbarians. Chapter 693 - Chapter 693: Chapter 310: Snow Disaster and Barbarians_3 Chapter 693: Chapter 310: Snow Disaster and Barbarians_3 Clearly, even Lu Yuan, who is thousands of miles away, can recognize the horror of those barbarian tribes. Zhou Country, which borders the Barbarians and is harassed by them year after year, naturally understands their strength even more. The barbarians currently rampaging through Hexi and Longxi prefectures seem to have a huge momentum. But in fact, compared to the entire barbarian tribes on the plateau, they only account for a small part of their forces. They are far from being the main force. If they do not exhaust all their efforts and launch a heavy blow to drive back the barbarian tribes descending from the mountains. Then, once they gain advantages and victories, the news spreading back to the plateau might cause more tribes to think that Zhou Country is an easy target and come to take advantage of them. If that happens, countless barbarian tribes would swarm in, with millions of barbarians covering the sky and earth, and facing this terrifying power, even if Zhou country can withstand it, its vitality will be severely damaged after the war. At that time, when the losses are so heavy, who can resist not taking a bite when they see it? Zhou Country might collapse directly then. In order not to let this happen, Zhou Country must use a heavy hand now to deter those barbarians in one breath. They must use their overwhelming military force to behead them all, strike fear into their hearts, and make them never dare to provoke Zhou Country again. Only then can Zhou Country¡¯s western territory maintain long-term stability. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã? ¡°A report has arrived, at the beginning of September, the Zhou Country¡¯s western army had reached Longxi Prefecture. In the same month, Sima Zhengde, the Grand General of Zhou¡¯s western Pillar State, led his army to defeat the Barbarian Army in Longxi, killing a hundred thousand enemies and capturing more than a hundred thousand people. Then the Western Army continued to advance westward, successively defeating two more barbarian armies, annihilating another two hundred thousand enemies and relieving the siege of Hexi Prefecture. However, despite the three victories, which eliminated a large number of barbarians, none of the Inborn Grandmasters among the barbarians had been killed. This is quite normal, after all, not everyone has my strength and can easily kill Inborn Grandmasters. But such a victory that only eliminates their wings but not their heads can never completely eradicate the enemy. After the Grand Army was defeated, those Inborn barbarians who fled back to their plateau tribes gathered another more than 200,000 troops. At the same time, they used the money and food they had plundered from Longxi and Hexi Prefectures to bribe many barbarian tribes and invited them to attack Zhou Country¡¯s western territories again. After the floods and snow disasters, there were countless struggling barbarian tribes on the plateau needing survival. Many people accepted the invitation directly just to stay alive. Now the barbarians have gathered an army of more than 600,000, and the number of Inborn Grandmasters has increased to six. Although the snow is now preventing these barbarians from launching their offensive, once the snow melts in spring, it can be foreseen that a big battle in Zhou Country¡¯s western territory is inevitable.¡± A smile appeared on Lu Yuan¡¯s face when he thought of this. Those Barbarians came down from the mountain just to survive. Under the floods and snow disasters, without cattle and sheep, their only hope is to plunder Zhou People in a battle of survival in order to live. This wasn¡¯t a situation that could be solved by Zhou Country killing many barbarians or winning many battles. As long as the snow disaster persists, these barbarians will have to raid south for food every year after winter. Such large-scale battles for food, one or two years, one or two times, is not a big deal. But if this happens year after year, with millions of barbarians invading each year, even the strong Zhou Country couldn¡¯t withstand it. ¡°It doesn¡¯t need to last long, as long as these snow disaster wars continue for three or five years, Zhou Country will have been continuously drained of its strength and will suffer great damage. By then, the resources and power of Zhou Country will be concentrated everywhere to support the western war, and the defense strength locally will naturally become weaker. By that time, Great Chu will have completed its recuperation, with its three armies equipped, and the army and provisions ample. At that point, all Great Chu needs to do is send one great general with a hundred thousand elite soldiers to easily seize Hanzhong and completely fill in the gap in Great Chu¡¯s northwest defense.¡± Lu Yuan calculated in his heart. He has long coveted Hanzhong Prefecture and was determined to win it. This prefecture borders Chu State¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture to the west and Xichuan Prefecture to the south. With this prefecture, Zhou Country can threaten Xiangyang to the west and Xichuan to the south. In order to guard against the Zhou army in Hanzhong Prefecture, Lu Yuan had to station 40,000 Forbidden Army in Jianmenguan at the north of Xichuan, and another 20,000 Forbidden Army in Xicheng Prefecture to the west of Xiangyang. In addition, 20,000 Forbidden Army and 10,000 Prefecture soldiers were stationed in each of Xiangyang and Xichuan of Chu State, ready to support the front line of Hanzhong and resist the invasion of Zhou Country. All together, more than 100,000 soldiers were restrained by Zhou Country¡¯s Hanzhong Prefecture, unable to move. For such a thorn in his side, Lu Yuan naturally hated it and could not wait to seize it back to solve the security concern in Chu State¡¯s northwest border. Once Hanzhong Prefecture is taken, Chu State can build a northern defense line there. Relying on the poor mountains and steep ridges of Hanzhong Prefecture, they can defend the passages with a small number of soldiers, blocking the threats from the north. The troops from Xichuan and Xiangyang Prefectures can be freed up, and will focus on dealing with the pressure from surrounding countries. At the same time, with Hanzhong Prefecture, Xichuan and Xiangyang Prefectures can be connected, relying on the Han River, enabling the circulation of goods, promoting people¡¯s livelihood, and enhancing tax revenue in the three prefectures. Not to mention that seizing Hanzhong will yield 5,000 miles of rivers and mountains and millions of people, resulting in further strengthening of Chu State¡¯s power. With so many benefits, it¡¯s natural for Lu Yuan to keep an eye on it. As a result, after learning the details of the war between the barbarians in the Snowy Plateau and Zhou Country, he immediately ordered the spies from the External Affairs Office to send additional manpower to Longxi and Hexi Prefectures in Zhou Country for in-depth layout, so that he can be informed of the situation in time. In this way, Chu State will be able to make preparations early when Zhou Country¡¯s strength declines significantly and becomes somewhat untenable in the future, laying the foundation for the Northern Expedition to Hanzhong. However, considering Zhou Country¡¯s strength, even if they face a large-scale invasion of barbarians, they will not have problems in the short term and will definitely be able to hold on. So for now, this matter could only be watched closely, and there is nothing Chu State can do for the time being. But that¡¯s just as well. Now that Lu Yuan has established the direction of recuperation, he can use this time to prepare for the future Northern Expedition. Let Hanzhong Prefecture stay in Zhou Country for now. When the opportunity is right, Chu State will take it back. Chapter 694 - Chapter 694: Chapter 311: Refining the Foundation Chapter 694: Chapter 311: Refining the Foundation In the biting cold wind, the sixth year of Shenwu passed quietly, and time unknowingly came to the seventh year of Shenwu. At the beginning of the new year, right after the Yuanxiao, the wind and snow that was blowing incessantly between Heaven and Earth finally stopped. Although the ground was still covered in white, the snow on the surface gradually thinned and began to melt. Winter, was quietly receding unnoticed. In Baling City, the once sparse and empty streets gradually became lively. Merchants and travelers began to pour into the city, and shops on the streets opened for business. Local residents came out in search of livelihood, and groups of children played with the snow, chasing and frolicking. Countless bustling sounds converged, revitalizing the city¡¯s atmosphere. Seizing this opportunity, Lu Yuan dispatched a messenger to various prefectures and counties to have them assess the damage caused by the snowstorm. The destruction caused by the sudden blizzard in Baling City had already been accounted for. A total of 1,302 families were affected by the disaster, with varying degrees of damage to their houses. Among them, 107 families were directly frozen to death after their houses collapsed, resulting in a death toll of 473 people. For these disaster-stricken people, Lu Yuan had already instructed the city¡¯s officials to provide relief on a discretionary basis. Of course, this so-called relief is not directly giving them money, distributing food or rebuilding their houses, the Chu State is not that wealthy, and it goes against fairness. According to Lu Yuan¡¯s discussions with the group of ministers on disaster relief policies, jobs were arranged for the disaster victims in the government, allowing them to earn enough money through their work and use that money to overcome their difficulties. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? This is what they call work-for-relief. Never underestimate its importance. Jobs offered by the government usually pay above the average market wage, making them good work opportunities. In the period just after the New Year when the snow and ice are still present, finding a good job is not that simple. With these jobs offered by the government, the disaster victims who have suffered severe losses can overcome this difficult time. Having a livelihood for the disaster-stricken people means they don¡¯t need to worry about survival, taking risks, and becoming an unstable factor in the local area. As long as this is ensured, the impact of the snowstorm will quickly subside. It is precisely for this reason that Lu Yuan has ordered the disaster assessment and relief work as soon as the blizzard stopped. Baling, as the capital, suffered such heavy losses in the face of the snow disaster. The other prefectures and counties, in conditions far worse than Baling, can only imagine the damage they suffered. But it will take at least a month for other places to confirm the situation, then compile and report the statistics. So after issuing the orders, Lu Yuan did not pay much attention to it. All the necessary arrangements had been made, and the ministers at the court, as well as the local officials, were the best and the brightest talents of the Chu State. In the current atmosphere of Chu State¡¯s upward trajectory, the work efficiency of these officials can be expected in order to secure promotion and wealth. With their assistance, King of Chu does not need to worry too much. Therefore, taking the opportunity during the lull at the beginning of the year, Lu Yuan called Sun Siwen, who had just spent the New Year with his family, intending to help him with channeling spiritual energy and cleansing his body and soul. ¡­ Inside Bifang Garden in the Royal Palace. As the garden within the Royal Palace, most of the delicate flowers had withered, leaving only some specially cultivated cold-resistant flowers still blooming. In the garden, there was a small pavilion, and at this time, the bamboo curtains on the pavilion were lowered to block the cold wind. Only one side facing the road was open, but this was just right to avoid the wind direction, so there was no need to worry about the cold wind blowing in. Inside the pavilion, a fire in the stove burned, and the red flame flickered, bringing warmth to the small space. On a soft mat nearby, Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen sat facing each other, both with calm expressions. ¡°Brother Sun, in a moment, I will channel spiritual energy to cleanse your body. Then you can take this opportunity to meditate on the Red Sun state of mind, using the spiritual energy to strengthen the state of mind and refine your soul,¡± said Lu Yuan, after looking at the delicate flowers outside for a moment and feeling the steady breathing of his good friend. ¡°Brother Lu, don¡¯t worry, I¡¯m well prepared,¡± said Sun Siwen, looking serious and knowing the importance of the matter without any negligence. ¡°Alright, let¡¯s get started.¡± Lu Yuan nodded and with a flick of his hand, a green jade piece floated between the two. Sun Siwen looked at the familiar jade piece, his expression somewhat absent-minded. He was not a stranger to this jade piece that he had given away, as it was the Sun Family¡¯s ancestral object. When Lu Yuan first proposed that Sun Siwen practice martial arts and then handed him the jade piece, the scholar, who had only ever read holy books, finally realized that it turns out his ancestor, who had left in search of immortals, had indeed found an Immortal. The green jade piece in front of him was the Immortal fate left by his ancestors for the descendants. However, he wasn¡¯t able to utilize this Immortal fate, and instead mistakenly gave it to an outsider, thus failing his ancestor¡¯s arrangement. Although this was the case, Sun Siwen had no regrets. At the time when the jade piece was in his possession, he was not able to discover any of its secrets, and the jade piece didn¡¯t show any exceptional abilities, allowing him to become an Immortal or something. This was enough to prove that he had no fate with this jade piece. In this case, no matter how big an opportunity this jade piece may contain, for him, it was just an ordinary jade piece, with a value equivalent to the thirty silver taels when he sold it to Lu Yuan. < Chapter 695 - Chapter 695: Chapter 311: Refining the Foundation_2 Chapter 695: Chapter 311: Refining the Foundation_2 As for Brother Lu obtaining the jade piece, being able to smoothly unlock the Immortal Fate within it actually further proves that he is fated with this object. It¡¯s better for the treasure to end up in the hands of one¡¯s own good friend rather than in the hands of unrelated people. It can also be considered that the treasure has not been lost to the outsiders. Moreover, Brother Lu told me about the karmic cause and effect of Immortal Fate within it. The jade piece merely contains some records of our ancestor¡¯s life, a Five Thunder Immortal Technique, and the Immortal Spirit energy required to cultivate the Immortal Technique. The remaining Immortal Spirit energy can only condense a Five Elements energy for those on the cultivation path. Cultivating to this point would only give one a lifespan increase of two hundred years. Though I may have lost this Immortal Fate now, Brother Lu has helped me breakthrough to the Inborn stage. Becoming an Inborn Grandmaster allows me to gain a lifespan of one hundred and fifty years, which, although not as good as the Immortal Method, is also not much different. Being able to exchange an Immortal Fate I could not obtain for my current luck is already a great stroke of fortune. Sun Siwen looked at the Immortal Fate Jade Piece for a moment and these thoughts flashed through his mind. He had no resentment or dissatisfaction about his family heirloom falling into Lu Yuan¡¯s hands, but instead, felt quite fortunate. By using a treasure he couldn¡¯t utilize and could even lose, he got in exchange for helping his friend rise to power, establish a kingdom, and become a National Chancellor ¨C soon to breakthrough Innate. It seems that no matter who made this choice, they wouldn¡¯t feel regretful about it. ¡°Brother Sun, let¡¯s begin!¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï Just as Sun Siwen¡¯s thoughts were running, Lu Yuan on the side shouted and suddenly the jade piece emitted a bright green light. A five-colored spiritual energy turned into a stream and was drawn out from the jade piece, rushing towards him. A cool sensation immediately spread through Sun Siwen¡¯s body along with the influx of spiritual energy. This startled him, causing him to quickly gather his scattered thoughts and then, as Lu Yuan had instructed countless times before, he began to meditate on the Red Sun. As he immersed himself in the meditation, the cool sensation flowing inside him began to slowly transform. A trace of heat started to surge through his meridians and blood. The cool spiritual energy flowing through him was as if guided by a directive, quickly transforming into boiling energy, resonating with the Red Sun meditation. A high-hanging sun now shined brightly within Sun Siwen¡¯s meditative space. At the same time, in the endless void, the Milky Way fell, countless spiritual energies surged crazily, turning into stars, rushing towards the sun. However, facing this impact, the sun not only wasn¡¯t obscured but instead shone even brighter, as if it was being fueled by a massive supply, burning even more intensely. Meanwhile, In the outside world, the temperature inside the small pavilion rapidly increased and gradually turned into heatwaves, making the air somewhat distorted. The bamboo curtain and pavilion pillars shielding the sides couldn¡¯t withstand the enormous temperature and black scorch marks appeared. It seemed that if the temperature rose any further, the entire pavilion would be ignited. As Lu Yuan formed hand signs and assisted Sun Siwen in drawing spiritual energy, some of his thoughts were drawn to the surroundings, making his eyebrows furrowed. He then released a thread of his Red Sun¡¯s true purpose, instantly suppressing the surrounding heat, limiting it to within three feet of Sun Siwen¡¯s body. After finishing these tasks, he looked at Sun Siwen. At this point, their friend¡¯s appearance looked somewhat strange. Red light turned into countless threads, constantly flowing and burning within his meridian and blood, causing Sun Siwen¡¯s body to release an immense amount of heat, making him extremely red. His clothes covering him had already turned to ashes, leaving him naked. ¡°His body is undergoing refinement, with me in control, there shouldn¡¯t be any issues.¡± The red light transforming into threads was controlled by Lu Yuan using the Chi Yang Divine Skill, turning into spiritual energy. With his understanding of the Chi Yang Divine Skill and two major metamorphoses, guiding Sun Siwen¡¯s body through a minor transformation was not a big deal. However, the physical transformation was within his control, posing no problem. But the soul transformation could only be done by Sun Siwen himself, and outsiders could not intervene. The soul is the most fundamental part of a person, even more important than the body. It requires absolute privacy and purity, not allowing external contamination. Therefore, even for Lu Yuan, if he didn¡¯t want to destroy Sun Siwen¡¯s foundation and make his soul crippled, he couldn¡¯t intervene in Sun Siwen¡¯s soul. At the very least, with his current ability, he couldn¡¯t intervene without harming Sun Siwen¡¯s soul. Therefore, at this time, refining the soul using spiritual energy could only be done by Sun Siwen himself. ¡°However, considering Brother Sun¡¯s state of mind and tenacious will, completing the soul metamorphosis shouldn¡¯t be difficult. So, all I need to do is help him complete the body transformation while drawing some more spiritual energy and waiting patiently.¡± Concluding so, Lu Yuan continued to draw out more spiritual energy and infused it into Sun Siwen¡¯s body. A significant amount of spiritual energy is needed to complete the transformation of both body and soul. According to Lu Yuan¡¯s estimation and plan, one-third of the remaining spiritual energy from the jade piece would be used for this transformation. This much energy is almost equivalent to three hundred elixirs. Such a tremendous amount of energy is the foundation for him to allow Sun Siwen to undergo the metamorphosis. However, absorbing this spiritual energy isn¡¯t an overnight process, and the transformation of the body and soul can¡¯t be accomplished in one fell swoop. During this period, there is still a process to be followed. Time slowly passed. The sky gradually darkened, and with the current cessation of snow, the long-lost bright moon appeared in the night sky. Chapter 696 - Chapter 696: Chapter 311: Refining the Foundation_3 Chapter 696: Chapter 311: Refining the Foundation_3 At this moment, Lu Yuan who was sitting in the courtyard did not have the leisure to admire the moon and take pleasure in doing so ¡ª instead, he was still assisting Sun Siwen with his transformation. The people in the palace had already been informed by him. At this time, the whole Bifang Garden nearby had been sealed off, and without orders, no one was allowed to enter or exit. With the palace¡¯s defense, plus Lan Cai¡¯er standing guard, even if an innate expert came in, they would not be able to invade this place. Thus, Lu Yuan did not have to worry about outsiders disturbing them. The moon rose and set, the sun emerged and sank¡­ In a blink of an eye, three days had passed. In the small pavilion, the initially scorching temperature had gradually decreased, and Sun Siwen¡¯s body was covered with a layer of foul and dirty substances. Underneath these impurities, the occasional glimpses of his skin that were as white and smooth as a baby, gave off a faint, delicate fragrance. Sun Siwen¡¯s countenance also gradually eased, an intense meaning of grandeur was brewing in his body. Finally. As if it had reached its limit, a cluster of red flames instantly appeared around Sun Siwen. The nearby void was being scorched by these flames, showing signs of distortion. The blockage that Lu Yuan originally suppressed with the Red Sun Martial Dao True Intent was burned by these flames, creating some small gaps, allowing the terrifying temperature to leak out and ignite several bamboo curtains nearby. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã? However, the two people in the courtyard paid no attention to this. Lu Yuan just waved his hand and a massive stream of True Pneuma circulated, extinguishing the ignited flame. At the same time, he strengthened the blockade, confining the leaked red flames around Sun Siwen¡¯s body, preventing it from further spread. Sun Siwen, who seemed to have sensed the changes in the outside world, slowly started to retract the uncontrolled red flames and gradually pulled it back into his body. After all the red flames were withdrawn, he finally opened his eyes, a flash of red light danced in his pupils. After looking at his surroundings and then at his friend in front of him, a smile appeared on Sun Siwen¡¯s face, and he declared loudly, ¡°Brother Lu, my body and soul have undergone metamorphosis and I¡¯ve successfully embodied the Red Sun. I have indeed fulfilled your expectation.¡± ¡°Ha ha ha!¡± Lu Yuan scanned Sun Siwen up and down, bursting into laughter and rejoiced inwardly, ¡°I knew it, Brother Sun wouldn¡¯t disappoint me. In a mere three days, you have refined your body and soul, and even initially congealed the Red Sun Martial Dao True Intent. With these Intent, Brother Sun breaking through Innate is beyond doubt. Afterwards, you just need to take the elixir, increase your inner strength to the limit of martial arts, and at the same time cultivate this Intent to grow stronger, and becoming an Innate expert will be a certainty.¡± Yes, with the help of Lu Yuan, after three days of transformation, Sun Siwen¡¯s body and soul have finally been refined into the Innate Body and Innate Soul, thus satisfying the requirements for breaking through the Innate level. Even the Martial Dao True Intent, which was used to drive the Martial Arts external body, was congealed by him in advance. He was unsure whether it was because of Lu Yuan¡¯s influence, but Sun Siwen¡¯s Martial Dao True Intent had manifested as Red Sun True Fire, which was identical to Lu Yuan¡¯s. However, this was unimportant. Whether or not it was the Red Sun True Fire, it was already a silhouette of the Martial Arts external body, a genuine power of the Innate Level. At this point, with just this Martial Dao True Intent, Sun Siwen could display some of the might of an Innate Grandmaster. Even when facing other Innate Grandmasters, he would have some means of self-defense and could exchange a few moves with them. Of course, without breaking through to the Innate level, he wouldn¡¯t be a match for an Innate Grandmaster. Compared to other top martial artists, Sun Siwen merely had a few more techniques when facing Innate experts. When it came to actual combat, if he didn¡¯t take advantage of the situation to escape in advance, it wouldn¡¯t take much effort for an Innate Grandmaster to kill him. Even so, having this foundation, Sun Siwen simply needed to take the elixir next, digest the spiritual energy within it, further strengthen his newly transformed body and soul, and during this time perfect his Martial Dao True Intent that he had just congealed. Following that, breaking through the Innate level would be as simple as water flowing into a channel, and there wouldn¡¯t be any difficulties. Originally, after accumulating enough resources, top-tier martial artists still need to think about congealing the Martial Dao True Intent and constructing the Martial Arts external body and such. Sun Siwen, by taking Lu Yuan as a reference, had already completed these steps. ¡®Moreover, through this transformation, Brother Sun¡¯s cultivation level has stepped into the realm of top-tier martial artists, even opening up three meridians all at once. With this progress, amidst the top-tier martial artists, he could be ranked in the middle tier. With this breakthrough, I need only to supply him with about a hundred elixirs next, and spend a couple of years to increase his foundation. Then, Great Chu will have one more Innate Grandmaster.¡¯ Thinking of this, Lu Yuan looked at Sun Siwen, his expression filled with delight. The gains from his breakthrough and transformation were even greater than he had anticipated, truly a pleasant surprise. However, right now, Sun Siwen had just broken through, and it was time to consolidate his foundation. Therefore, Lu Yuan further inquired about Sun Siwen¡¯s condition, checked his body for him, ensured there were no problems, and then gave him some pointers for his future cultivation. Then, he allowed his friend to go back first and started to cultivate in solitude. This time, helping Sun Siwen to undergo transformation and successfully laying the foundation for him to reach Innate experience, as well as securing a formidable power for Chu State in the future, all of these pleasant happenings left Lu Yuan in high spirits. He was busy for three days straight, and he was a bit tired now. Hence, he plunged into the palace and started to relax his fatigue amidst the laughter of his consorts. During this time, besides his daily cultivation and occasional supervision of his two sons¡¯ studies, he did not care about anything else. Not until the arrival of the second month, after a month had passed. A message from the north shook Lu Yuan out of his fascination with the charming and attractive beauties. The content of the message was simple. In the first month of Shenwu Year Seven, Liang assembled thirty thousand elite troops and launched a surprise attack on Lai State¡¯s capital in a snowy night, breaking the city in one battle. The King of Lai, unable to escape, was sieged in the Royal Palace and chose to burn himself to death. Afterwards, the officials of Lai in the city were either killed, surrendered, or escaped. The remaining armies mostly surrendered. Subsequently, Liang¡¯s army endured the snow and launched a strike, swiftly sweeping across Lai State. In just over ten days, they crushed this major power in Qingzhou. The war between Liang and Lai, which had lasted for five years, at last concluded with Liang¡¯s triumphant victory. Chapter 697 - Chapter 697: Chapter 312: Unification of Qingzhou Chapter 697: Chapter 312: Unification of Qingzhou The war between Liang and Lai States began five years ago, in the second year of Shenwu. At the beginning of this war, only Liang and Lai States were involved. However, as the war intensified, especially after Liang State deployed 500,000 troops and increased the number of Inborn Grandmasters to five. With Lai State¡¯s strength, they were unable to resist Liang State any longer. Lai State was merely a small country of two prefectures. After Liang State¡¯s invasion, it lost half of its territory, leaving only one prefecture. Even if they used all their strength, together with civilian workers, they could only muster an army of more than a hundred thousand, far inferior to Liang State. Lai State did have more Inborn Grandmasters, two of them, to be exact. Their foundation was not bad, but still far worse than Liang State. Therefore, to protect themselves, Lai State sought assistance from Xu State, bringing this overlord of Xuzhou into the war. With Xu State¡¯s involvement, Lai State indeed managed to resist Liang State¡¯s invasion. Xu State sent 300,000 troops and two Inborn Grandmasters to aid Lai State. With this support combined with Lai State¡¯s own strength, their power was not much weaker than Liang State¡¯s. And that was indeed the case. After Xu and Lai States joined forces, not only did they stop the previous trend of continuous retreat on the battlefield, they even seized the opportunity to defeat the Liang army and achieve several small victories, recapturing some lost cities. Although Liang State launched a counterattack, they were powerless against the defensive alliance of Lai and Xu States, unable to break through the frontlines. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï Eventually, the war between Liang State and the Lai and Xu States reached a stalemate. No one could defeat the other; no one was willing to give in, and everyone believed that they could win if they persevered¡­ As a result, the war became a pure contest of national strength, with both sides waiting for the other to give in first. In fact, the neighboring countries were all happy to see this situation, except for the three warring states themselves. After all, Liang State was a dominant power with eleven prefectures, and even twelve prefectures after occupying a prefecture from Lai State. Moreover, they had more than ten Inborn Grandmasters, over a million standing army, a population of over forty to fifty million, and strong expansionist ambitions¡­ Having such a threatening giant just next door not causing trouble would make anyone feel uneasy. And now things were much better. This fearsome wild beast had set its sights on its prey. Fittingly, this prey was not without the power to fight back, and it even had a strong ally that could stand together to resist the terrifying predator. The two sides clashed, neither able to overcome the other, and the war dragged on indefinitely. Until victory was determined, none of the neighboring countries had to worry about the predatory Liang State turning its sights on them to cause trouble. Because of this, Ning State could focus on developing its domestic affairs and gradually restoring its strength, accumulating power for its ambition to reunite Yangzhou once again. On Chu State¡¯s side, they could focus on their Western Expedition without worrying about pressure from the northern borders. Even Zhou State could take advantage of the stability on the eastern borders to send troops for the Southern Expedition and break through the Hanzhong barrier in one fell swoop, recovering their lost territory in Hanzhong¡¯s three prefectures. Even Zhao State, the overlord of Jizhou to the north of Liang State, took advantage of the situation to launch a war against the small countries within their borders, eventually reaping substantial rewards. In short, with Liang State¡¯s hands and feet bound, the surrounding countries all breathed a sigh of relief and took advantage of the rare opportunity to develop themselves. But now, the Lai State that had tied up Liang State¡¯s hands and feet had been destroyed. The enemy annexed another country, expanding their territory shockingly to thirteen prefectures. After Lai State was destroyed, within Qingzhou, only a few small countries in the northeastern region remained outside of Liang State¡¯s control. These small countries had a territory of only a few prefectures or even just a few counties, just like the small southwestern states that had been swept away by Lu Yuan¡¯s western expedition. Their military strength was weak, and they were no match for Liang State. Without expending much effort, Liang State could conquer them and expand their territory by another two prefectures, consolidating the entire Qingzhou. If this were to happen, Liang State would become the first country in all of Nine Provinces to unify a major state. Unifying a major state is something that every monarch in the world dreams of and wants to achieve since the time of the Ancient Three Emperors. Just like himself. He had driven out Zhou State to the north, launched the Southern Expedition to conquer the barbarians, and annexed Hanzhong and Xichuan in the west. After nearly a decade of warfare, he had only conquered three prefectures in Yangzhou. Including the Xiangyang Prefecture in Yong State to the north, they only possessed three and a half prefectures. In all of Yangzhou, there were about seventeen prefectures, including the unconquered Yi countries. Chu State only occupied three of them, which was less than one-fifth of the total. The prospect of unifying Yangzhou was still far off. Not only Chu State. In the rest of the Nine Provinces, other countries, apart from Liang State, occupied eight or nine prefectures at most, like Zhou State, or only three or four prefectures, like Ning State and Chu State. Chapter 698 - Chapter 698: Chapter 312: Qingzhou United_2 Chapter 698: Chapter 312: Qingzhou United_2 Nowadays, the territory under Liang¡¯s actual control spans thirteen prefectures. Besides, two more prefectures would soon be added, effectively taking over Qingzhou. Having surpassed all the major powers in the world, its strength is unparalleled, and it is already showing signs of sweeping the world and unifying the Nine Provinces. The appearance of such a terrifying enemy would make anyone feel uneasy. Lu Yuan was no exception. Fortunately, although he felt somewhat uneasy, he was not overly fearful. He remained relatively relaxed, even somewhat looking forward to it. ¡°Liang¡¯s dominance over Qingzhou is undoubtedly a concern. But the one who should be most worried about this is not my Chu State. After all, Chu State and Liang State do not share a direct border; Ning¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture lies in between them. With Ning as a barrier, even if Liang wants to launch a Southern Expedition, it would first target Ning rather than my Chu State. Moreover, there is the Yangtze River Natural Barrier between Liang and Ning. Liang is from the north, skilled in horseback archery and infantry, but unskilled in boats and lacking a naval fleet. Even with a million strong soldiers, Liang can only sigh and turn back when facing the vast river. Until Liang forms a large-scale navy, there is no need to worry about its threat.¡± The last time was during the 28th year of the Pre-Yue Longqing era when Liang launched its Southern Expedition. At that time, Liang mobilized 500,000 troops, which lasted as long as the current war to annihilate Lai, in terms of scale and duration of military deployment. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï But what was the final outcome? Apart from seizing three prefectures north of the Yangtze River in Guangling Prefecture with their strong military force from Yue Country, they gained nothing else. Facing the Yangtze River Natural Barrier, 500,000 Liang troops were stationed in the north of the river, blocked by Yue¡¯s 100,000-strong navy, and failed to break through the defense and cross the river. In the end, it was merely because of the invasion of Zhou that forced Yue to accept the status quo and cede the three prefectures of Guangling, which had already been occupied by Liang, to Liang. It was not a small feat to mobilize 500,000 troops for three to four years, consuming an unknown amount of money and food, and accomplishing only so much. Similar events also occurred in Zhou Country. 300,000 Zhou soldiers, stationed in the north of the river, could not cross southward. They finally ran out of strength, and Yue led a group of vassals, taking the opportunity to launch a vigorous Northern Expedition. Eventually, they were defeated and lost more than half of Xiangyang Prefecture and a small portion of Hanzhong Prefecture. It was truly a tragedy. From the above two examples, it can be seen how strong the protection of the Yangtze River Natural Barrier is for Yangzhou. Before the enemy has a navy, the Yangtze River is a natural wall that no one can cross. With this reliance and the fact that Chu State¡¯s 50,000-strong navy has already taken shape, Lu Yuan naturally was not too fearful of the threat from north of the river. Similarly, Ning Country, which possesses an even greater advantage with 100,000-strong navy on the Yangtze River, would not be too afraid of the rising Liang Country. Chu and Ning might have some concerns, but to say that they are extremely worried would be an overstatement. Compared to them, it is the three nations of Zhou, Zhao, and Xu, which are located in the plains of the north without the protection of many natural barriers and bordering Liang State, that should worry more. Zhao and Xu are fine as they also border Liang, but they are separated by a large river. Although this river is not as perilous as the Yangtze and even freezes on the surface during the cold winter months, it can still serve as a natural barrier as long as proper precautions are taken. In addition, Zhao and Xu border each other, so if Liang truly invades from the north, they can combine their forces, which are not inferior to Liang¡¯s. It wouldn¡¯t be easy for Liang to swallow them up. Zhou, on the other hand, is different. The regions where Zhou and Liang border each other are Henan Prefecture and Nanyang Prefecture, both of which are fertile lands as rich as Ning¡¯s Yuzhang and Linhai. Together, the two prefectures account for ten million households and have always been important sources of military and tax resources for Zhou State. At the same time, there are not many natural barriers between these two regions and Liang, making it easy for Liang¡¯s army to advance westward without any obstacles, attack the capitals of the two prefectures, and take over these territories. ¡°Furthermore, Zhou is currently facing a snow disaster led by the Barbarians, and half of its troops have to be deployed to the western border, leaving other areas vulnerable. As such, it becomes even easier for Liang to attack Henan and Nanyang Prefectures. With such a huge temptation, Liang cannot help but be moved if it has the ambition to unify the world. At that time, Zhou will face powerful enemies from both the west and the east, struggling to cope and hardly able to support itself.¡± As Lu Yuan thought of this, his heart was moved. Originally, he was prepared to rest and recuperate for two years, train and consolidate the country¡¯s finances and troops, and take advantage of Zhou¡¯s military constraints in the west to launch a Northern Expedition to seize Hanzhong Prefecture. Although this plan had a high probability of success, considering Zhou¡¯s formidable foundation, it could not guarantee a foolproof strategy and still had a considerable chance of failure. But now, with a Liang State in the east restraining Zhou and further distracting its attention, weakening its deployable troops and leaving its southern territory exposed, the probability of success for this surprise attack increases significantly. It¡¯s not a hundred percent sure, but Lu Yuan has a high level of confidence that he could take control of Hanzhong Prefecture with a probability of more than ninety percent and prevent Zhou from sending troops to take it back. And as long as Hanzhong Prefecture is captured, Chu State can shield the west and north, without worrying about external threats, and focus on the south to conquer the various prefectures in Yangzhou. Chapter 699 - Chapter 699: Chapter 312: Qingzhou United_3 Chapter 699: Chapter 312: Qingzhou United_3 There is no need to worry about Liang Country becoming too powerful and difficult to control if they really capture Henan and Nanyang prefectures. If that day truly comes, then facing such a threat, Zhao and Xu countries to the north, Zhou Country to the west, Ning Country to the south, and Lu Yuan¡¯s Chu Country will naturally not allow such a formidable enemy to grow in peace. When that time comes, the Five Countries attacking Liang, or even the Nine Provinces attacking Liang, will take turns playing out. Competing for supremacy is not a game; none will sit idly by and watch Liang Country slowly rise and strengthen. Before it can grow, the countries will unite to weaken and destroy it, as is the norm. Confronting the Five Countries, or even alliances among the Nine Provinces, even if Liang Country unifies Qingzhou and takes Henan and Nanyang prefectures from Zhou Country, it cannot be the match of the world¡¯s various nations. The geographical location of Liang Country and the surrounding situation it faces are just too poor. When people pursue the world, they often speak of the gold edge, silver horn, and the belly of grass; Liang Country occupies precisely that position of the belly. It is close to all countries on all sides, and can attack and conquer the world in all directions. Similarly, the various countries of the world can also strike from all sides, leaving Liang Country exhausted and running. In comparison, Chu Country, located in Yangzhou, is situated in the south of the Nine Provinces, and relies on the Yangtze River natural barrier; its geographical position and national defense pressure are far better than those of Liang Country. It definitely ranks among the golden-edge elite. With the Yangtze River, Lu Yuan can calmly defeat the various countries, slowly unify Yangzhou, and then accumulate enough strength to go north and compete for the world. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Of course, even if that day comes, it will not be until several decades later at the earliest. Now, it is time to solve the financial problems of Chu Country first. ¡­ Just when Lu Yuan received the report from the Royal City Division, the news of Liang Country¡¯s annihilation of Lai Country was also spreading among other countries. The situation is exactly as he guessed. After the other countries learned about it, they immediately realized that the time for Liang Country to unify Qingzhou was not far off. A true hegemon of one province is about to take the stage in the world. As for the countries surrounding Liang Country, they couldn¡¯t help but be greatly alarmed. In the north, Ji State Zhao Country, upon receiving the news, immediately stopped its conquest in Ji Province. They then withdrew all 200,000 troops that had been conquering various small countries in the north and stationed them on the southern border between Zhao and Liang. Xu Country, which had been supporting Lai Country in resisting Liang Country¡¯s invasion, was even more terrified, not only deploying the 300,000 troops that were originally aiding Lai Country to defend the border. They then launched a recruitment drive in the country, creating another 300,000-strong army in one breath, ready to counter Liang Country¡¯s invasion at any time. As for Zhou Country to the west, it was even more fearful. They also realized that among the countries surrounding Liang Country, they were the easiest target for Liang Country¡¯s attacks. Therefore, even though it had already employed nearly 400,000 troops in Longxi and Hexi prefectures to resist the barbarians, Zhou Country still gritted its teeth and conscripted another 100,000 troops from within the country and deployed them to defend Henan and Nanyang prefectures. But even so, both Henan and Nanyang each only had 100,000 troops. These troops are no threat to Liang Country, which is on the verge of unifying Qingzhou and has rapidly expanded its forces to more than a million. Without the natural barrier of the Yangtze River and relying only on these troops for defense, Liang Country could easily shred this fragile line if it wanted to. But this is already the limit of the troops Zhou Country can mobilize. Zhou Country has a total of only 800,000 troops. Of these, 400,000 are fighting the barbarians in the west. In the north, to defend against their sworn enemy Wei Country, they have to keep 100,000 troops stationed on the northern border. In addition, the 50,000 troops stationed in Guannei County, where the capital is located, and the newly reclaimed Hanzhong County, amount to a total of 600,000 troops. The remaining 200,000 troops Zhou Country can use have all gone east; there is no more room. However, in the face of such a powerful enemy, Zhou Country also realizes its lack of troops and has ordered Henan and Nanyang prefectures to locally recruit soldiers, preparing to build a 200,000-strong New Army in these two places. Counting the original 200,000, a total of 400,000 troops should be barely enough to defend against Liang Country. As long as they can survive this period, there will be no need to fear Liang Country once the troops in the west are sent back after dealing with the barbarians. The above describes the actions of the northern countries. On the side of Yangzhou, Chu Country, under Lu Yuan¡¯s guidance, still has not made any moves, and continues to accumulate money and grain and train troops as usual. After all, Chu and Liang countries do not border each other, and while they can feel the threat from the north, the pressure is actually not great. As for Ning Country, which borders Liang Country in many places and has had many disputes with Liang Country throughout the dynasties in Jinling, it is considered a historical enemy. So upon learning the news, Ning Country strengthened its defenses in the north. According to rumors, they plan to train an additional 50,000 naval forces on top of the original 100,000, and also add 50,000 defenders to Guangling County, bringing the total number of stationed troops there to 200,000. With a total of 150,000 naval forces and 350,000 land and naval troops, Ning Country will be well protected. The surrounding countries all have their own actions. On the side of Liang Country, things are as steady as Chu Country. Aside from sending troops to station in the former territory of Lai Country, the remaining Northern Expeditionary Army did not disband but continued to move northeast. It seems that they are ready to annihilate the remaining small countries within Qingzhou¡¯s territory and unify the whole of Qingzhou. Before this, Liang Country should not have any other moves. During this period, the messengers sent by Lu Yuan to various prefectures and counties to investigate the disaster situation finally returned with detailed information. In this snow disaster, 113,000 households in Chu Country¡¯s four prefectures and 34 counties were affected, with more than 11,000 households suffering casualties and 47,000 deaths. A single natural disaster cost Chu Country the lives of one or two entire counties¡¯ populations. Upon receiving this news, Lu Yuan was deeply grieved; these losses were the very foundation of Chu Country and his own Qi Luck. So many people, if relocated to Qianzhong County, could easily stabilize a prefecture, but now they have been sacrificed in vain. Such a painful lesson is enough to be remembered and engraved in one¡¯s heart forever. Therefore, he immediately ordered the prefectures and counties to do a better job of snow disaster prevention and linked this matter with the assessment of officials¡¯ performances to prevent them from neglecting it. Lu Yuan did his best to prevent the lessons of today from being repeated in the future. As for how effective the results will be, it all depends on fate. Chapter 700 - Chapter 700: Chapter 313 Grain Price Famine Chapter 700: Chapter 313 Grain Price Famine Surrounded by turmoil brewing among its neighbouring nations, the Chu State focused solely on its internal affairs, paying no mind to the storms brewing in the outside world. Following the arrival of spring, the winter snows quickly retreated. The terrifying white disaster became merely a memory, rapidly forgotten by people welcoming the New Year. A new year had arrived, and those who had hibernated at home throughout the winter were preparing to begin their busyness in this New Year. The farmers started sowing and nurturing seedlings, while the city dwellers began seeking work in various workshops or shops. Merchants and travelers, carrying their goods, started wandering among different cities. From top to bottom, the Chu State¡¯s court also began working on strategies developed in the previous year. The first to start were the numerous mines in Qianzhong County. All trades need money as the premise; regardless of what one does, having money is of the utmost importance. Therefore, following the New Year holidays, when all departments of the court resumed their duties, Lu Yuan convened numerous ministers. After consultation, he sent a specially-appointed imperial commissioner leading people to Qianzhong County, to take charge of the mining operations. As for the manpower and supplies required for mining, local officials in Qianzhong County and the Yi People¡¯s war prisoners temporarily under the control of the forbidden army were specially ordered to provide them. With such support and arrangements, plus the diligent imperial commissioner sent to handle this matter, it is expected that before long, good news could arrive from Qianzhong County. With that, the matter of money was almost sorted out. However, money and grain have always been addressed together. Therefore, once the issue of money was resolved, the court quickly dealt with the other issue ¨C grain. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Today¡¯s Chu State has two major grain-producing areas: the Jianghan Plain where Xiangyang Prefecture is located, and the Dongting Plain where Dongting County is located. Both these plains are irrigated by rivers and lakes, boast fertile soil, and are top-notch grain-producing lands. Parts of these regions have already been developed. Those yet to be developed are quite labor-intensive lands. Not only is their development challenging, the grain yield afterward also falls significantly short of the previous top-quality lands. Therefore, for these difficult-to-develop areas, Chu State, presently facing a labor shortage, naturally does not have much interest. When the population increases and land becomes scarce in the future, perhaps those lower-grade lands can be developed. But now, Chu State is largely unpopulated, and excellent farmlands await development everywhere, making it unnecessary to waste precious manpower on these difficult lands. Thus, for Chu State, current development in Dongting and Xiangyang has reached its limit. There isn¡¯t the capacity, nor the necessity, for further, deeper development. Therefore, to increase grain production and enlarge the store of grain, making use of these two areas is not much of a solution; one needs to explore other areas. That area, naturally, is Xichuan Prefecture. The potential of the Xichuan Plain in Xichuan Prefecture rivals the Jianghan Plain and the Dongting Plain. If this could be developed, no, it has been developed long ago, and there is no need to spend much effort on reclamation. The point is to utilize it. As long as the existing Xichuan Plain can be utilized, within two years, this could be another area producing tens of millions stone of grains and becoming a tax-revenue focus. The Xichuan Prefecture, at its peak, possessed a population of over five million people. This population was sustained by the supplies from the Xichuan Plain. Today¡¯s Chu State, certainly, does not have as many people to develop the whole Xichuan Prefecture. But with initial development and some farming of the many fertile lands on the Xichuan Plain, the generated grain would be sufficient to feed two or three million people. It¡¯s not only enough to feed the current population of Xichuan Prefecture, but every year, a significant excess of grain could also be kept to supply the Chu State¡¯s army, or for foreign trade. In recent years, all states of Nine Provinces have been entangled in continuous warfare. Incessant wars not only bring death but also famine. As numerous able-bodied men have been conscripted onto the battlefield, quite naturally, local food production in these countries has sharply decreased. It¡¯s the case of Su Country adjacent to the Chu State. This country, which had been part of the former coalition, launched a war against the Southwestern Yi tribes. Although the fiscal deficit was initially resolved, a severe food shortage had emerged within the country due to the war. Even now, despite the war having ended at the end of last year. Several months have passed, but the food shortage in Su Country has still not been resolved. In Su Country, the price of grain has skyrocketed to forty wen for a catty of rice. A significant number of people could not afford grains, had to sell their homes, farms, and even pawned their sons and daughters just for a bite to eat. Many, unable to survive, fled into the deep mountains or even ran to nearby countries. During the harsh winter, Su Country has received tens of thousands of refugees from Su Country. These people from Su Country, risking last year¡¯s terrible winter, traveled long distances, to flee to Chu State, escaping the hell in their homeland. According to the report received by Lu Yuan, During last winter, a massive wave of migration erupted in Su Country. The fleeing Su Country residents numbered over a hundred thousand. The directions of escape included Chu State, Nanhai Country, Song Country, and even countries like Dali and Kunhai. Chu State was just one of many choices. And of these fleeing hundreds of thousands, at least forty or fifty thousand people died on the way. Last winter¡¯s snowstorm was not easy to endure, especially when traveling in it. That was a deadly ordeal. Chapter 701 - Chapter 701: Chapter 313 Grain Price Famine_2 Chapter 701: Chapter 313 Grain Price Famine_2 It was said that when King Su Xuan Ge heard about the news of the locals fleeing, he was furious in the palace, and several officials were punished in a year. Subsequently, he dispatched a large army to various prefectures and counties to capture the fleeing people. Once they were found, they would be punished on the spot, even executed directly, and the corpses were hung in public places to intimidate the people. However, such actions not only failed to curb the tide of fleeing but also caused more people to flee in fear and panic. Some of the soldiers sent to hunt for the fleeing people even joined in the flight themselves. Among those who fled were many family members of the Su Country¡¯s army. Now that their own families want to escape, can the Su Country¡¯s army be ruthless enough to destroy their own families for loyalty? Not to mention whether Su Xuange has such great charisma, but the treatment Su Country gave to those soldiers was not worth it. Forty wen for one catty of rice was unbearable even for the soldiers of Su Country. Many Su Country soldiers¡¯ families were on the verge of poverty due to skyrocketing grain prices. Under such circumstances, one could not expect their loyalty to Su Country to be high. Under wave after wave of flight, the foundation of Su Country seemed increasingly shaky, and the signs of collapse became even stronger. However, whether Su Country would fall was something for Su Xuange to worry about. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï For Chu State and Lu Yuan, it was a great opportunity to make a profit from their current predicament. In previous years, Su Country¡¯s attack on the southwest was not fruitful in terms of territory, only gaining one county and four prefectures, which was less than half a county in size. But in terms of wealth, Su Country gained a lot. This was because of Su Xuange¡¯s strategic approach to the newly acquired Tonghai County and the Dali Yingsheng area that the Su army had attacked before. Su Xuange¡¯s strategy was similar to that of Li Xiong in Xichuan County before, completely ignoring the future and purely plundering resources. Specifically, regardless of status, territory, or life, all the property and grain of the local people in the area where Su Country¡¯s army passed were plundered. Such harsh measures not only provoked a lot of resistance from the Yi People but also contributed to the significant wealth acquisition of Su Country. With Su Country¡¯s poor national strength, they could maintain a large army of over 100,000 troops in the southwest for several years, thanks to such predatory tactics. Although they had been fighting for several years and a lot of the plundered money had been consumed, there should still be a lot of silver left in Su Country¡¯s hands. Initially, Li Xiong could plunder billions of silver taels worth of property in Xichuan County. Although many parts of the southwest are poor and Su Country had only plundered half a county, it is estimated that Su Xuange¡¯s war had brought at least a hundred million silver taels worth of property. Although many of these riches were spent on the war effort, Su Country still had tens of millions of silver taels left, which was already a huge sum of money. Nowadays, Chu State needs money everywhere. According to the Ministry of Household¡¯s statistics, after six years, Chu State can achieve a fiscal surplus, accumulating 12 million silver taels a year. But that¡¯s only six years later. At present, Chu State is still in a financial deficit, and every year, it has to subsidize expenditures of 10 million silver taels from the national treasury. The gap is huge. Although the current national treasury can support Chu State until the fiscal surplus situation six years later, any changes in Chu State¡¯s financial situation during this period could pose a risk of insufficiency. Therefore, taking advantage of this opportunity to make more money is a good thing for Chu State. And the target for making money is Su Country, which is short of grain. Su Country is short of grain but has money; Chu State has grain but lacks money. The two sides complement each other perfectly. At present, the main supplier of grain to Su Country is Nanhai Country¡¯s grain merchants. Those greedy fellows, in order to make money, have raised the price of grain in Su Country to an unbearable level, thirty wen per catty of rice. This can be described as bloodsucking and ruthless. Su Country, Chu Country, and even Song Country, which had been exploited before, were all gnashing their teeth with hatred. It¡¯s just that now, Nanhai Country¡¯s situation is special. It is related to the game between Chu, Su, and Ning Countries. Lu Yuan and Su Xuange are not good at teaching Nanhai Country a lesson, so they can enjoy for the time being. But now, Chu and Song countries have ended their war against the southwest and do not have large armies consuming food and fodder. Thus, the pressure on Chu State¡¯s grain supply is greatly relieved. With the large amount of grain in the country, it can be saved and stored or sold abroad. For Chu State, which can harvest surplus grain every year and will soon exploit the Xichuan Plain, as long as there is no large-scale crop failure, the grain produced each year is sufficient for its consumption. Storing grain is not a necessary task given the current lack of money. Therefore, it is more cost-effective for Chu State to sell the surplus grain for money. After consulting with his ministers, Lu Yuan dispatched messengers to Su Country to communicate the preconditions. Chu country is willing to sell the surplus grain to Su Country at a price lower than the current ¡°market price¡±. Chapter 702 - Chapter 702: Chapter 313 Grain Prices and Famine_3 Chapter 702: Chapter 313 Grain Prices and Famine_3 Well, after the price reduction, it¡¯s about ten wen per catty of rice, which is a third of the price of the grain in Southsea Country. Although this price is lower than the international market price, it is still a huge profit for Chu State. Now that the war has stopped, the previously skyrocketing rice price in Chu State has quickly dropped back to normal, from the original five wen per catty of rice to the current three wen per catty of rice. Therefore, even if Chu State sells grain to Su State for only ten wen per catty of rice, it is still a pure profit of more than 200%, which can be described as a huge profit. What Chu State had to do for this was to simply collect and allocate a batch of rice from within the country and then deliver it to the border of Su State. It didn¡¯t take much effort. On the contrary, the sale of Chu State¡¯s low-priced grain could severely strike the arrogant grain merchants of Southsea Country, suppress their unrestrained arrogance, and directly cut off their way of making money. Presumably, on Su State¡¯s side, they would be happy to see this after receiving Chu State¡¯s goodwill. After all, compared to spending thirty wen per catty of rice to buy grain from the blood-sucking Southsea merchants who treated them like fat sheep. It¡¯s better to buy grain from Chu State, with whom they have always had a covenant, at only a third of the price. This transaction, whether on an economic level or an emotional level, left Su Xuange with no reason to refuse. ¡°There should be more than 1.5 million people in Su State now, and according to the calculation of one stone of grain per person per month and twelve stones of grain per year for these people. The annual grain consumption for one person is about thirteen silver tales. For 1.5 million people, that¡¯s a market of over 20 million silver tales. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? Even though Chu State cannot take all of this market, and Su State will gradually achieve self-sufficiency in grain as local stability and production recover. But in the years before stability, it should be no problem for Chu State to earn ten million silver tales a year from Su State.¡± Lu Yuan calculated in his heart and couldn¡¯t help but be delighted. An additional ten million silver tales in revenue each year, and this income can last for several years, is a very happy thing no matter how you look at it. ¡°And not only Su State, but even Zhou Country can try to do grain business.¡± Zhou Country now has barbarians in the west, Wei people in the north, Liang people in the east, and Chu people in the south. Of these four directions, apart from Chu State, which has negotiated peace with Zhou Country and maintained a state of peace. The remaining three directions are all enemy states of Zhou Country. Zhou Country is now fighting on three fronts, and besides the 100,000 troops stationed in Guannei and Hanzhong, there are as many as 900,000 soldiers on the battlefields in three other directions. If civilian workers supplying food and fodder, and the recruited Civil Group Volunteers are also counted, Zhou Country¡¯s total number of troops reaches more than two million. Such a large-scale army is almost equivalent to one-tenth of the total population of Zhou Country. That is to say, one in ten people in Zhou Country is enlisted on the front line battlefield, and most are strong laborers. With so many strong laborers missing, there will inevitably be problems in Zhou Country¡¯s domestic production. According to the intelligence reported by the Royal Capital Spy Agency, the price of grain in Zhou Country has generally risen to five wen per catty today, and in some areas, it even reached ten wen per catty. The grain shortage caused by the lack of grain has begun to appear inside Zhou Country. And this famine and soaring grain prices will continue to grow year by year with the continuous war in Zhou Country. If it is not controlled in time, the current Su State will become the next example for Zhou Country. Lu Yuan was naturally very interested in such a newly-emerging huge market. However, although interested, he did not take action immediately. First, Chu and Zhou had just ended the war, and there was not enough trust between the two sides, so even if they wanted to do business, they temporarily lacked the foundation. Secondly, although Zhou Country is now facing a grain shortage, this famine is not severe, and with Zhou Country¡¯s reserves, it can fully withstand it. At this time, looking for the other party to sell grain would not earn much, at most just a small profit. The third reason is that Chu State does not have many grains on hand, and it has reached its limit to satisfy a Su State. It is temporarily unable to produce more grains to sell to Zhou Country. Considering these factors, Lu Yuan chose to wait and see, waiting for famines to become more serious on both sides and for this side¡¯s grain harvest after several rounds. Then they would consider doing business with Zhou Country. As for Su State and Zhou Country, these two international markets, and even more potential markets in the future, it is imminent for Chu State to increase its grain output. Among them, the development of Xichuan Plain is a top priority. However, in order to develop Xichuan, manpower is indispensable, and the existing population in Xichuan is far from enough to develop the entire Xichuan Plain. Fortunately, last winter¡¯s heavy snow disaster, although it caused serious losses to the people in Chu State and even a large number of deaths and injuries. But at the same time, those severely affected people are mostly poor and have no assets. And these people are precisely the best immigrant population selected by the government. So after a snow disaster, the poor people who lost a lot of property, after accepting the government¡¯s relief invitation, simply gritted their teeth and stomped their feet, and chose to participate in the recruitment and emigrate to Xichuan. According to data reported by the Ministry of Households, there are now about 50,000 households and more than 200,000 affected people in Chu State who have accepted immigration, and they are being sent to Xichuan County one after another under the coordination of local governments. And this number is just the beginning. Subsequently, as the work progresses, more people will choose to emigrate. This year, the government is expected to relocate at least 100,000 households or more than 500,000 people to Xichuan County. The goal of emigrating to Xichuan County within six years, as decided at the strategic meeting on future years before the year, is highly likely to be achieved in the next two years. It seems that a snow disaster is not entirely a bad thing, and it still has some positive effects. Anyway, when the 500,000 people arrive at Xichuan, the whole Xichuan Plain can be initially developed. By next year at the latest, Xichuan County will become another major grain-producing area for Chu State. Chapter 703 - Chapter 703: Chapter 314: Resources of the Overlord Chapter 703: Chapter 314: Resources of the Overlord The drums thundered, their call shaking the heavens. Outside the city of Baling, in the military encampment, horses whinnied and banners billowed like clouds. Squad after squad of soldiers obeyed the commands, constantly shifting into different formations under the direction of their commanding officers. ¡°Not bad, these soldiers have only been in the camp for just over a month, and they¡¯re already showing such spirit. Li Liang, your ability to train troops truly makes you the best in our Chu State.¡± From the command platform, Lu Yuan looked down at the army below, then turned and spoke to his disciple beside him, his tone filled with satisfaction. Of all his true disciples, Li Liang¡¯s martial talent was not particularly outstanding, and even ranked in the lower middle. Yet he was able to distinguish himself, becoming a disciple who ranked alongside Chu Wei, and only second to Zhou Qing. Naturally, he had something to rely on. Although Li Liang was not proficient in martial arts, when it came to training forces, all the disciples regarded him as the foremost. This was exactly why Lu Yuan had promoted him in the first place. Indeed, over the past few years, the reason why the Chu army could conquer the South and fight in the North without defeat had much to do with Li Liang¡¯s continuous training of troops at the rear, building competent armies for Chu State. In this regard, his contributions were no less than those of Chu Wei, who had managed to form a navy for Chu State single-handedly. ¡°My martial skills are mediocre, as is my ability to lead troops. But when it comes to training an army, it¡¯s the only thing I can be proud of.¡± Hearing the praise from his master and king, Li Liang modestly smiled, then gazed at the army below, saying¡±> ¡°Now the army has been trained for a month. They have built up some stamina and learned some formations. But this is just the beginning.¡±; We still need to provide more meat, along with the martial arts of the army, and enable these new recruits to practice martial arts and familiarize themselves with the commonly used sword and spear techniques in the army.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? During the training, they would also be taught the drum signals and flag orders, taught the military laws and regulations, so that they know to revere and understand the hierarchy.¡± After three years of such drilling and teaching, they would become a formidable army once they have experienced life and death on the battlefield.¡± After over a decade of military training experience and learning from the military training methods of various countries, Chu State had developed a comprehensive training method and had turned it into a system, fully regulating it. The training method mentioned by Li Liang is the overall summary of this method. These years, all the new recruits recruited by Chu State have been trained according to this method and the final results have been quite satisfying. In the war against the southwestern tribes a few years ago, the Chu army led by Lu Yuan achieved a resounding victory, proving the effectiveness of this training method. Li Liang was confident that the elite soldiers he trained would not be inferior to the strong armies of other countries, and they would be capable of contending with the world¡¯s strong nations. ¡°As you¡¯re in charge of training these new recruits, I feel relieved.¡± After hearing Li Liang¡¯s words, Lu Yuan nodded in agreement: ¡°This is our Chu State¡¯s recuperation for several years, providing us with enough time to train new soldiers. But in addition to this newly trained army of eighty thousand, you have to pay more attention to those who were recruited last year.¡± ¡°Now, amidst the chaos of various countries, our Chu State has a rare respite. We must grasp this opportunity to strengthen our ability as much as possible.¡± I¡¯m not worried about the veterans in the army. However, the more than a hundred thousand soldiers who were recruited last year and this year are indeed too naive, and they simply cannot serve any significant purpose.¡± In a few years¡¯ time, I will fight for the world, and I will need a strong army to support me, and that¡¯s where you come in.¡± Lu Yuan looked at Li Liang, his gaze intense. Li Liang, accepting his duty with solemnity, replied: ¡°Your Majesty can rest assured; several years from now, I will present you with a powerful army without any failure.¡± ¡°Hmm.¡± Lu Yuan nodded in satisfaction and then comforted: ¡°As long as you accomplish this, I will not hold back on rewards and titles.¡± At present, all the countries in the world are facing changes and challenges. Especially with the rise of the northern Liang State, it only intensifies the conflicts between countries, making them more fierce and brutal. The scale of troops used in a major battle between countries has generally increased to hundreds of thousands, and even over a million, far more than before. Lu Yuan still remembered that when Liang State went south, and Yue State mobilized only three hundred thousand soldiers to attack from the north across the river. In the later Northern Expedition against Zhou Country, Yue State directly controlled no more than a hundred thousand soldiers, taking into account tributaries like Changsha State, South Sea State, and others, it still did not exceed five hundred thousand. Still, there were also a lot of civilian nature of the troops.¡± For proper combat troops, the four nations combined didn¡¯t exceed two hundred thousand.¡± In just over a decade, in the world¡¯s nations, the scale of one or two hundred or two or three hundred thousand troops, cannot be called an all-out war anymore, it can only be considered a local conflict.¡± In the western battlefield of Zhou Country, there were four hundred thousand soldiers and six hundred thousand village braves and civilian workers, with a total of over a million troops.¡± In the eastern front, there were also four hundred thousand soldiers and about two hundred thousand village braves and civilian workers, amounting to six hundred thousand troops.¡± In the northern front, to deter Wei Country, there were one hundred thousand stationed soldiers and about three hundred thousand village braves and civilian workers, adding up to four hundred thousand.¡± Even in Hanzhong County in the southern front, there were fifty thousand soldiers and one hundred thousand village braves, for a total of one hundred and fifty thousand troops.¡± Additionally, in the capital district of Zhou Country, there were fifty thousand soldiers, and the internal security forces in various prefectures and counties would also have around two hundred thousand soldiers.¡± Now, Zhou Country alone has over two million three hundred and fifty thousand troops that could be mobilized.¡± Chapter 704 - Chapter 704: Chapter 314: The Qualities of a Hegemon_2 Chapter 704: Chapter 314: The Qualities of a Hegemon_2 I don¡¯t know if it¡¯s him. In Yangzhou, Ning Country had already trained an army of 600,000. After hearing about the matter of Liang Country, the Heavenly Son of Jinling in Ning Country felt challenged and further expanded their army by 200,000, bringing the total military strength to 800,000. In Xu Country, located in Xuzhou, 600,000 soldiers are stationed in the southern border to guard against the potential northward advance of Liang Country. In Ji Province, the Zhao Country, which has always built its foundation on military strength, was rumored to have an army of one million before Liang Country unified Qingzhou. Now that Liang Country has merged a province, it already poses a threat to the safety of Zhao Country. Stimulated by this, one can hardly imagine how much Zhao Country¡¯s military has expanded. Thinking about it, 1.2 million should be possible. As for Liang Country, after unifying Qingzhou, it has fifteen Prefectures and a population of more than 70 million. With such a vast territory and abundant population, the size of the army that can be supported is naturally hard to gauge. According to reports from scouts in the outer office of the Imperial City of Qingzhou, Liang Country began to expand its army after unifying Qingzhou. The scale of the expansion was a staggering recruitment of one million new soldiers. That¡¯s one million new soldiers! The mere thought of that number is enough to make people feel desperate. Among all the countries in the world, only a single force would be capable of recruiting one million soldiers in a single breath. Considering that Liang Country originally had an Army of a million, and adding in the new recruits, this overlords of Qingzhou now possesses a total military strength of over two million soldiers. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï If some civilian workers and Village Braves are conscripted, the scale of the military personnel becomes unimaginable. A conservative estimate is that raising an army of 5 million soldiers across the country should be effortless. The army sizes of all these countries range from 800,000 to a million, not including auxiliary forces like civilian workers and Village Braves. Seeing his opponents in the Nine Provinces expand their military strength, Lu Yuan naturally feels pressure. In addition, the ever-changing situation and the constant expansion of the scale of the war force Chu State to follow the trend and expand its own military force. As a result, after last year¡¯s military expansion, Lu Yuan changed his conservative defensive strategy and chose to add 80,000 soldiers to the 11 Forbidden Armies to enhance Chu State¡¯s military strength. With a total of 15 Forbidden Armies, Chu State now has an army of 300,000 soldiers that can be mobilized at any time. In addition, there are 30,000 county soldiers from the provinces, 68,000 soldiers from the prefectures and counties, 5,000 Jinwu Guards in the capital responsible for the defense of the city, and 5,000 newly established palace guards for the protection of the inner palace. Finally, add in the 50,000 naval forces. After a series of expansions, Chu State¡¯s total military strength, incorporating both land and naval forces, amounts to 458,000 soldiers. All these are standing armies. In addition, there are over 100,000 Yi prisoners in Qianzhong County who can be counted as the serving army. Combining all these soldiers, Lu Yuan can claim to have a total force of 600,000 in Chu State. And this is the limit for Chu State. The expansion of 86,000 soldiers will cost Chu State an additional 6,000,000 silver tales annually. If it were not for the newly discovered gold, silver, and copper mines in Qianzhong County, the three Southwest Kunhai tributary countries would not have increased their tribute. At the same time, Su Country began to trade grain, providing additional income to Chu State. Otherwise, Chu State would not have been able to bear such an expenditure. But, although there are many soldiers, Lu Yuan¡¯s available forces are still limited. Even though the security situation has improved greatly around Qianzhong and Xichuan Districts due to the annexation of three tributary countries in the southwest, the number of stationed soldiers can still be reduced substantially. However, even then, one Forbidden Army is needed to guard Qianzhong County, and two are needed to guard Xichuan County to ensure security. Xiangyang Prefecture is surrounded by Hanzhong Prefecture in the west, Xiangyang, and Nanyang Prefectures of Zhou Country in the north, and Xiangyang Prefecture of Ning Country in the south. It is an area surrounded by enemies on three fronts. Each of these areas needs soldiers to guard them, and three Forbidden Armies are used accordingly. In Dongting Prefecture, the capital city itself requires a substantial number of troops for protection. Moreover, to the south of Dongting Prefecture lies Su Country and Nanhai Country. These two countries maintain a tense relationship with Chu State and could potentially launch a surprise attack at any moment. On the eastern side of Dongting Prefecture is Ning Country. There is no need to mention the relationship between Chu State and Ning Country, as they have always been enemies, fighting for the title of Master of Yangzhou. Ning Country would undoubtedly choose to attack Chu State given the opportunity. Now that Ning Country has trained an 800,000-strong army, besides the 300,000 soldiers who were sent to Guangling Prefecture to guard against potential invaders from the north, The remaining 500,000 soldiers, stationed in Jinling, are ready to march upstream on the Shuo River and keep Chu State constantly on guard. Given this powerful enemy, Lu Yuan must be more vigilant. So, facing threats from both the south and east in Dongting Prefecture, Lu Yuan must leave at least five Forbidden Armies, or 100,000 soldiers. With the addition of the local prefectural and county soldiers, the Jinwu Guards in Baling City, the palace guards, the 50,000 navy in Dongting Lake, and the called-up militia of the Civil Group Volunteers, they can barely hope to withstand attacks from all sides. After deducting the forces defending various areas, Lu Yuan can only mobilize four Forbidden Armies, or 80,000 soldiers. Chapter 705 - Chapter 705: Chapter 314: The Qualities of a Hegemon_3 Chapter 705: Chapter 314: The Qualities of a Hegemon_3 Of course. When Lu Yuan is ready to send troops in a certain direction, in addition to the mobile troops that can be mobilized, the local troops and forbidden army in that direction will naturally be within the forces that can be mobilized. For example, if Lu Yuan is in Xichuan County, preparing to gather troops to attack Hanzhong County, then the forty thousand forbidden army in Xichuan County and thirty thousand county soldiers can naturally be mobilized by him to attack Hanzhong County together. Even in Xiangyang Prefecture, one or two defending forbidden armies can be dispatched to help from the flanks. By this calculation, the troops he can mobilize can reach as many as two hundred thousand. If it is from Dongting County, preparing to attack Ning Country, or Nanhai Country and Su Country, then the forces stationed in Dongting County, and even those from Xiangyang Prefecture, can be mobilized accordingly. When using troops here, the number of regular soldiers Lu Yuan can mobilize would reach three hundred thousand and above. In addition, there are still eleven or twelve thousand Yi people captives left in Qianzhong County, who, aside from those arranged for mining, can also be called upon at any time to serve as cannon fodder for the army. This method has been in use since Lu Yuan began his military campaign and can be said to be an old trick. So, if you calculate carefully, in the future, if Lu Yuan really wants to use troops, no matter which direction among the four counties of Great Chu, he can guarantee that he can mobilize more than one hundred and fifty thousand soldiers and more than one hundred thousand auxiliary forces. In this way, some more Civil Group Volunteers are conscripted, and the total number of troops and horsemen along the way is at least three hundred thousand. If it is in areas such as Dongting County, the scale of troops is even closer to five hundred thousand and above. With such strength, it can barely compete with those hegemonic countries that have millions of troops at their disposal. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï ¡®However, even so, based on Chu State¡¯s reality, it can maintain such a scale of troops in only one direction. If, like Zhou Country, warfare is conducted on two or even three fronts at the same time, I cannot guarantee that there will be more than five hundred thousand troops in two or three directions at the same time.¡¯ Compared to those hegemons of one state, Chu State has barely reached the threshold of a hegemon, but it is still far from enough.¡¯ Lu Yuan calculated the foundation of his own family and couldn¡¯t help but sigh secretly. Although the forces he had established since his uprising developed rapidly, in just six years and ten, it had developed from the original county with hundreds of troops to the current four counties with more than forty thousand troops. But such strength is still far from enough when compared to the great nations that have accumulated for hundreds or even thousands of years. Setting the population aside, Chu State, which had a population of only eight million, could barely maintain its current standing army of four hundred and fifty-six million, which was already at the limit. The nearly twenty-to-one population-to-military ratio had already exhausted Chu State¡¯s foundation limit. Even if Lu Yuan wanted to conscript more troops, it would be difficult to pick more qualified soldiers from the common people under his administration. And even if he could pick them, Chu State¡¯s national strength would hardly be able to support more. After all, if there is not enough young labor force in the local areas and no one is engaged in production and cultivation, who will pay taxes and provide food and fodder for Chu State? Without these, what could Chu State use to support the army? ¡°So, in the final analysis, it¡¯s because of the lack of strength and insufficient foundation. If the territory is large enough and the population is large enough, I wouldn¡¯t have to be like now, carefully calculating the expansion of troops and worrying about not being able to support them.¡± Lu Yuan thought of those old hegemonic countries, who often boasted about expanding their forces by three to five hundred thousand, while looking at his own actions, which had only increased by eighty-six thousand men, and couldn¡¯t help but be resentful. It¡¯s not enough, far from enough. The current Chu State is still too weak. To grow to the level of Zhou, Liang, and Zhao, or even to the point of rivaling Ning, there is still a considerable distance to go. Nowadays, all countries strive to be the first, time waits for no one. All people and countries are working hard to enhance themselves. If Chu State does not catch up now, the gap will become bigger and bigger as those who lag behind one step will advance one step. Now Liang Country has emerged as a behemoth with millions of troops. As other countries are stimulated and hasten to annex the small countries within their respective states, the second and third hegemonic countries that unify one state are expected to emerge soon. At that time, facing powerful forces that can easily deploy millions of troops, if Chu State still only had its current strength, even if Lu Yuan is now a Grandmaster of both the Immortal Method and Martial Arts, he would not be able to protect Chu State¡¯s territory. Today is, after all, The Age of Dharma Decline. The Immortal Method is not thriving, and while individual transcendental power is important, it has some limit to turn the tide in the world¡¯s trend. With the further exhaustion of spiritual energy, the further intensification of the Age of Dharma Decline, and the further decline of individual strength, this phenomenon will become even more apparent. When the day comes when spiritual energy is completely exhausted and transcendence have completely perished, the power of the group will completely dominate the individual. At that time, gathering people will be the right way, and going alone will be the small way. Although Lu Yuan had anticipated this day in the future, he still had some feelings about it now. As in the myth, or in the historical records, going back a thousand years, the Immortal Method masters and even Martial Arts Grandmasters of that time, were said to be able to stand against a million armies and were unmatched in power. But a thousand years later, which is now. Lu Yuan has almost reached the peak of the world¡¯s top level, but he also knows that, despite his strength, he cannot break through a million armies alone. In the face of a hundred thousand troops, he can still manage it by using his full strength. However, when it comes to the level of one million, even if Lu Yuan exhausts his True pneuma and fights attritively, that would still not be an enemy¡¯s match. If he stubbornly attacked a million-strong army, the final outcome would be exhaustion and death. In the End of Dharma era, it is ultimately not a world where individual greatness can suppress everything. ¡°Therefore, for the sake of future considerations, now let¡¯s start with a small goal, increasing the population of Chu State to the level of ten million, so as to truly enter the threshold of hegemony and stabilize its current position.¡± Ten million people is the threshold of hegemony recognized in the present world. Because only such a population can maintain more than five hundred thousand fighting soldiers and deploy an army of millions. In this world of great contention, how can one dominate without commanding millions of troops? Now Lu Yuan¡¯s Chu State has only eight million people, and there is still some distance from this level. Previously, it was recognized as a hegemonic state only because of the strong military power that barely touched this level. As for the actual foundation and national power, it is still somewhat inadequate. Sitting in this position now is somewhat illusory and unstable. So Lu Yuan¡¯s goal now is to cultivate his Inner Strength and continue to open up to the outside world so that Chu State can sit firmly in this position.¡± Hanzhong County¡­ Su Country¡­ Lu Yuan muttered these two names, and a spark of warmth flashed through his heart. The most suitable directions for expansion around Chu State are these two places. And in either of these territories, as long as one can swallow them, Chu State¡¯s population can be boosted to ten million in one fell swoop. The next expansion target will be one of these two places. Chapter 706 - Chapter 706: Chapter 315: Migration for Survival Chapter 706: Chapter 315: Migration for Survival ¡°Attack!¡± The cold sound of a horn rang out over the field, accompanied by an angry roar, casting a heavy shadow over the ground below. Countless knights on the grasslands swung their curved blades and charged forward. On the other side, soldiers donned in red armored robes, carrying swords and spears, were calmly watching the oncoming riders, awaiting their approach in organized rows. ¡°Shoot!¡± Commands from behind resounded and within moments the trembling of bowstrings echoed, and arrows, like a downpour, descended upon the knights. Thud, thud, thud! In just an instant, hundreds, perhaps thousands of knights fell. However, the charging knight brigade seemed impervious to the fallen, displaying manic expressions as they continued their frenzied assault. The short distance between the two sides was quickly covered. Thousands of knights in the front line charged into the ranks of the soldiers with tremendous force, tearing through them and creating countless gaps. Knight and horse alike collided with the solid defenses, bodies and horses flipped over, blood spattered. The knights behind followed swiftly through the gap into devastating combat with the red-armored soldiers behind the front line. During this melee, droves of barbaric infantry wielding short spears and curved knives, dressed in furs and coats, quickly pursued from behind. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï They crossed over the front line of both forces and followed the knights, charging into the opposing ranks and quickly expanding their influence. However, just as they planned to slaughter the opposing forces, a slight vibration could be felt from the earth in the distance before advancing like thunder; a red armored cavalry wielding long spears emerged from behind the red-armored soldiers and charged into the barbarian infantry clashing against the red ranks. Boom, boom, boom! A series of collisions echoed and numerous barbaric soldiers were sent flying by the terrifying force. Before they could fall to the ground, the iron hooves of the heavily armoured warhorses stamped down on the next barbarian, instantly turning him into mush. The charging barbarian infantry was ripped apart by the flood of the red tide in just a moment. One charge was all it took to rout these ferocious barbarians. ¡°Damn it, those red armored cavalrymen again.¡± At the back of the barbarian formation, a middle-aged barbarian with a more refined attire than the common barbarian and a considerably fairer complexion watched, raging, as a formation of five thousand infantry soldiers were ripped to shreds by the red armored cavalry. In the last few days of battling against the Zhou people, his troops had made some small gains, only to be crushed by the red armored cavalry every time. After several failures, his heart was filled with hatred and a certain level of fear towards these relentless red streams of iron horses. ¡°Wuqi, don¡¯t lose your temper,¡± At that moment, a well-dressed barbarian walked over, patting the shoulder of the man called Wuqi, and spoke solemnly: ¡°The arrogance of the Zhou people¡¯s red armored cavalry won¡¯t last long. I have already sent folks to negotiate with the Hulan tribe. Their king has agreed to send the Black Armored Wolfriders to our aid. With the Black Armored Wolfriders on our side, we will have enough strength to resist these red armored cavalrymen. Without these red armored cavalrymen to hinder us, the remaining Zhou soldiers are not our match. As long as we break through this Zhou main force, no matter how strong the remaining red armored cavalry are, they can¡¯t restore the overall situation. Hexi state will surely be ours.¡± Qingyan said confidently. This time, the barbarian tribes from the cold steppes launched a large-scale invasion on Zhou Country¡¯s Hexi and Longxi states. The instigator and mastermind behind this invasion was the Hulan tribe, known as the Hulan king by Qingyan. The Hulan tribe is one of the largest tribes in the steppes, with a population of over a million, an unimaginable population size for an area that relies on nomadic herding and fishing. Because of this, the leader of the Hulan tribe, along with those of the other three tribes that have over a million population, are commonly known as the four kings of the Snowfield Valley. The four kings rule over the entire frozen wilderness, each controlling tens of thousands of miles of highland snow regions, owning countless cattle, horses, and a number of vassal tribes. Because of this, when there was a great flood during the previous summer which damaged a large proportion of the crops grown by the steppes people in the Snowfield Valley, and drowned many of their cattle and sheep, the four kings, who were bearing heavy responsibilities, faced a major livelihood problem on behalf of all the tribes and their own. The heavy flood destroyed both the food that they rely on for survival and their wealth, making survival the difficult problem facing all tribes after the disaster. They reached a consensus after a discussion, or rather, there wasn¡¯t much to discuss: they couldn¡¯t survive the next half of the year just by relying on their food and wealth reserves. If they wanted to survive and continue their tribal lineage, they had to rob others. And the wealthiest area with the most grain production around the snowy wilderness, the only area capable enough to help the numerous tribes to get through this difficulty, was Zhou Country. Chapter 707 - Chapter 707: Chapter 315 Migration for Survival_2 Chapter 707: Chapter 315 Migration for Survival_2 Therefore, after reaching a consensus, last year, Tie Li King, one of the four closest kings to Zhou Country, led the Tie Li Tribe and its vassals to launch a sweeping invasion and attack on Zhou Country. The Tie Li Tribe¡¯s 100,000 elite forces joined with the 300,000 barbarian soldiers of its vassals, forming the first wave of invasion into Zhou Country. It was a pity, though. The Tie Li Tribe¡¯s invasion was only smooth at the beginning, successfully breaking through more than 30 Zhou People¡¯s cities and plundering large amounts of grain and slaves. However, after the arrival of the Zhou People¡¯s main army, the cities taken by the Tie Li Tribe were soon taken back, and the led army was defeated and suffered heavy damage. In the end, of the 400,000 troops that went out together, only 40,000 to 50,000 escaped after three consecutive defeats. It would not be an exaggeration to say that they were almost annihilated. As a result, the Tie Li Tribe was directly severely injured in its vitality. With the loss of so many soldiers and horses at once, and the absence of so many young and strong men, the power of the Tie Li Tribe shrank by a third in an instant. If not for the safe return of those few mighty warriors, it would be difficult to even maintain the original position as one of the four kings. The Tie Li Tribe would also be completely devoured and divided by the other three kings pushing together. However, even though the Tie Li Tribe was not wiped out, such a defeat still deterred countless barbarian tribes that were secretly plotting, chilling their hearts of going north together to rob the Zhou People in the Snowy Wilderness. Though the Zhou People were wealthy, their strength was also terrifying and not something they could easily scheme against. A great flood, although causing heavy losses to many barbarian tribes, was far less painful than losing a third of their strength. Many barbarians felt that their current hardships could still be endured. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï After all, not all of their cattle, sheep, and grain were gone. This year, if they save a little and find more food in the Snowy Wilderness, they can barely maintain their tribes by annexing other tribes and plundering their grain, and driving away their old and weak. In terms of losses, it is far less than the loss of the Tie Li Tribe attacking the Zhou People. For this reason, Although after the Tie Li Tribe¡¯s defeat, the other three kings also sent some troops to assist, preventing the Zhou People from attacking the Snowy Wilderness and invading the land of the barbarians. But beyond that, there were no extra moves. A war that could have involved the entire Snowy Wilderness was thus eliminated invisibly. However, fate plays tricks on people. Many barbarian tribes had originally planned to grit their teeth and endure for two years, overcoming the losses and impacts brought by the flood. But last winter, a cold wave far more ferocious than before quietly fell on this world. The terrifying snowstorm froze the cattle and sheep of each tribe, as well as a large number of barbarians who lacked sufficient cold protection methods. After the cold wave, most of the remaining cattle and sheep on the grasslands in each tribe died. Their last bit of food supply was also exhausted. At this point, all the barbarian tribes realized that it was no longer a question of whether they could retreat or if they were afraid. It was a matter of dying if they did not plunder. Under this natural disaster, the four kings of the Snowy Wilderness quickly reached a consensus. The various tribes put aside their past hatred and conflicts, and cooperate with each other to jointly break through the Hexi and Longxi counties of Zhou Country, seize the grain and supplies of Zhou People, and use the reserves of those Mountain foot people to help their own tribes through the difficulties. Therefore, based on this consensus, after the snow melted and spring arrived this year, the Hulan Tribe followed the Tie Li Tribe, taking the lead in initiating an attack on Zhou Country. Hulan King led his tribe¡¯s 200,000 warriors, as well as the accompanying 500,000 warriors of other tribes, totaling 700,000 troops, to march north and attack the Zhou People. Of these 700,000 troops, the Hulan Tribe led its own direct forces and some vassals, with 500,000 people as the main force to attack Longxi County, the gateway to Guannei County, the capital of Zhou Country. Aside from this, the Tie Li Tribe also assembled 300,000 people who went along to fight in Longxi County. The remaining 200,000 people from the Hulan Tribe were deployed as a side force to attack the neighboring Hexi County. The leaders of this side force were none other than Wuzi and Qingyan of the present. Their two tribes, on the grasslands, also both had large tribal populations of more than 300,000. With all their might, they were able to deploy more than 50,000 warriors. The side force attacking Hexi County was composed of their two tribal warriors as the core, along with warriors from some small tribes. Although Wuzi and Qingyan¡¯s tribes had many warriors, they were not as powerful as those tribes with populations exceeding one million, so their strength was still somewhat lacking. Just as Wuzi said, the Zhou People¡¯s Red Armored Iron Cavalry, such an elite cavalry unit, left them helpless with their 200,000-strong army. That¡¯s because the Zhou People¡¯s Red Armored Iron Cavalry was selected from the nation¡¯s elite and spent countless resources and efforts to forge such a powerful elite force. Every knight within the Red Armored Iron Cavalry had reached the level of Martial Arts third-rate masters, meaning that they had developed two full-fledged Cultivation. With this level of strength, even in the Jianghu, one could serve as an elder and protector of a local gang in a small county town. In the Jianghu, they could also be called masters. One can imagine the strength of an elite force composed of such skilled soldiers. It is also true. With the national power of Zhou, they spent countless efforts to build the Red Armored Iron Cavalry, which numbered only 500. However, these 500 iron cavalries had brought countless nightmares to the barbarians on the battlefield in the past month. Chapter 708 - Chapter 708: Chapter 315: Migration for Survival_3 Chapter 708: Chapter 315: Migration for Survival_3 Just now, there were as many as five thousand barbarian infantrymen, but in the face of the charge of the five hundred Red Armored Cavalry, they were defeated in one blow. Five thousand warriors died instantly, with more than two thousand killed. Under that terrifying flood, any resistance seemed so weak. Similar scenes had been played out countless times on the battlefields of these days. The number of warriors who died under the Red Armored Cavalry alone was no less than twenty or thirty thousand. The so-called one-man army was just like that. It was also because of this elite force of soldiers that, on this side of Hexi, although those Zhou people only had fifty thousand elite soldiers and about a hundred thousand civilian workers, their military strength was much weaker, but they did not fear in battle. Not only did they not go to guard the city, but they also led their troops out proactively to fight against the enemy formation. But strangely enough, those Zhou people, who were at a disadvantage in terms of military strength, were the ones who suffered when they really fought. Two hundred thousand warriors could not defeat the opponent¡¯s one hundred and fifty thousand men. The huge gap between reality and expectation was hard for Wuzi and Qingyan to accept. They subconsciously overlooked the fact that the so-called ¡°warriors¡± in their tribes were actually just herders who tilled fields and raised horses, and there was not much difference essentially between them and the farmers who were temporarily conscripted by the Zhou people. At most, the barbarian herders were just a bit braver, but the Zhou village braves had better weapons, armor, and discipline, making it hard to say which side was stronger. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? With such troop quality, the Zhou people had fifty thousand elite troops and were supported by a hundred thousand village braves, and their strength was not inferior to the barbarians. Qingyan stubbornly believed that the reason why the other side was so strong and why they hadn¡¯t been able to gain victory was because of the Zhou¡¯s Red Armored Cavalry. It was with this powerful cavalry that the Zhou people could resist their assault. As long as they could defeat or hold back this cavalry, relying on the warriors they had at their disposal, they would definitely be able to break through the Zhou people¡¯s defenses, conquer their cities, loot their grain, wealth, and women, and achieve victory in this war. Qingyan firmly believed this. So, facing Wuzi¡¯s anger, having received the reply from the Hulan Tribe and learning that the Black Armored Wolfriders were on their way, his heart was filled with confidence. The Hulan Tribe¡¯s Black Armored Wolfriders were also composed of powerful warriors, and the strength of the soldiers within was not inferior to the Red Armored Cavalry. Although their numbers were smaller, with only three hundred riders in total, it was enough to hold back the Red Armored Cavalry. As long as they could hold back the enemy, Qingyan would be able to lead the warriors and defeat the Zhou army that dared to block their way, and then turn around to eliminate the hateful Red Armored Cavalry. ¡°I hope so.¡± Just as Qingyan was imagining victory in his heart, Wuzi heard his consolation, calmed some of his anger, turned his head back, and sighed slightly, ¡°The remaining food in our tribe can only last us for another month at most. But now our pace of plundering Hexi is being blocked here. If we can¡¯t quickly break through the Zhou army we¡¯re facing, our tribes will face the crisis of starvation in just one more month. By that time, both our tribes are destined to fall.¡± The expression on Qingyan¡¯s face turned ugly when he heard this. The reason they had been so eager to come down the mountain, mobilizing every adult male in their tribe, was that there was no more food in their tribe, and they had reached the point where they had to fight to get it. But now they were being held up here for nearly two months. For two months, they hadn¡¯t made any progress. And the food in their tribes was almost running out. If they couldn¡¯t achieve a breakthrough and steal enough grain from the Zhou people, the fate of Wuzi and Qingyan¡¯s tribes would definitely be grim. It would be normal for them to be wiped out directly. ¡°We must win, we have to win.¡± Qingyan turned to look at Wuzi, with flames seemingly burning in his eyes, gritted his teeth, and said every word with determination. At the same time that their war was underway and the two were talking, high on the snowy plains, one tribe¡¯s tent after another moved slowly to the north and south. These migrating tribes formed a stream of people, gradually approaching the direction of the Zhou Country. Just like the Wuzi and Qingyan tribes. All the barbarian tribes in the great snowy plains, in order to survive, had begun migrating at this time. The Hulan Tribe and the TielÁ¦ Tribe were only the vanguards, followed by the Zhenyan Clan and the Duosi Clan, both part of the Four Kings. In addition to the Four Kings and their vassals, there were also a large number of tribes that had heard the news and swarmed to join them from various places. Above the vast snowy plains. Tens of millions of barbarians had gathered to form a torrent, now as unstoppable as the great flood of the previous year, pouring towards the Zhou Country. For the Zhou Country, this was also a disaster in which they would survive if they could resist, but die if they could not. The war fought for the right to survive was only just beginning. ¡­ Thunder rumbled, and the summer rain began to fall. It was already April, and while the Zhou Country was fighting fiercely in the north, Lu Yuan, thousands of miles away, received news from Xichuan through the divine thoughts of his avatar, Huang Xuan. ¡°Snow Plains Nomads descending the mountain to attack and plunder the villages and towns at the mountain foot?¡± After receiving Huang Xuan¡¯s report, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but be stunned. Those who lived on the high plateau, who virtually had no interaction with Xichuan County, suddenly came down the mountain, even appearing as though they were preparing to invade and plunder. This sudden incident was somewhat unexpected for him. At the same time, it made him think of the terrible war going on in the Zhou Country to the north. Could it be that Chu State was now about to experience this disaster as well? With this thought, Lu Yuan was startled. ¡°Investigate, have someone investigate immediately.¡± He connected with Huang Xuan¡¯s divine thoughts from thousands of miles away and gave him orders. ¡°Also, immediately call up the troops to eliminate the barbarians who have come down the mountain. At the same time, set up strict defenses at important passes, and do not let them come down the mountain.¡± Lu Yuan made arrangements. Chapter 709 - Chapter 709: Chapter 316: Swords Pointing to Hegu Chapter 709: Chapter 316: Swords Pointing to Hegu After instructing Huang Xuan on handling the matter of the Snow Plains Nomads coming down the mountain, Lu Yuan put the matter aside. With his own Avatar present, he believed that the other party could handle this matter well. And indeed, it was so. Several days later, in the quiet cultivation chamber, Lu Yuan was cultivating when Huang Xuan contacted him through mental communication, bringing the specific intelligence. ¡°During the great winter disaster, a large number of cattle and sheep froze to death on the Snowy Wilderness, leaving the Barbarians unable to survive without enough food. So, they took the risk of going down the mountain and plundering. Apparently, the Barbarians who came down the mountain are just some minor tribes near Xichuan County, and there¡¯s no greater power involved¡­¡± After receiving the information, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but ponder. The news Huang Xuan had collected in recent days had both good and bad aspects. The good part was that those who came down were only small Barbarian tribes, and there was no interference from powerful forces in the Snowy Wilderness. This was definitely good news for Chu State. After all, the tragic situation of Zhou Country, which was now facing continuous attacks from the four Kings of the Snow Plains, was still fresh in their minds. Lu Yuan did not want his Chu State to suffer the same treatment as their neighboring country. But there were reasons for this situation to be so. Near Xichuan County, there were only a few small rivers and lakes in the Snowy Wilderness, providing extremely limited water and supplies, and could hardly support many people. Moreover, in the snowy plains, except for a small area near Xichuan County with many river valleys and grasslands, the other areas were just vast snowfields and steep mountain ridges, which could be regarded as a natural barrier, the Male Pass. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï The Snow Plains Nomads, the main area of activity, would have to step over those snowfields and steep ridges, taking the risk of nine deaths and one life to traverse through the perilous paths plowed by those natural barriers, in order to move to the snowy area near Xichuan County. But just the sight of those natural barriers was enough to make any army reluctant to cross over. And if the big army doesn¡¯t come, the small groups of hundreds or thousands of people, even if sent to Xichuan County, would not be able to make much of a difference. Those Nomads in migration did not choose Xichuan and Hanzhong Counties as their targets for good reasons. ¡°However, although those tribes deep in the Snowy Wilderness cannot come, the valley grasslands near Xichuan County, covering a total area of over 2,000 li, are home to more than 200,000 nomads. If these Barbarians are not handled properly and are pushed to their limits, they could swarm down the mountain and gather an army of fifty to sixty thousand strong, which would be a problem.¡± Since there was no external involvement, Lu Yuan naturally was not very afraid of the Snow Plains Barbarians near Xichuan County. If it were just those Barbarians living in the valley grasslands, even the county soldiers of Xichuan County could chase them away without sending the Forbidden army. While they didn¡¯t fear them, the trouble those Barbarians brought was far more headache-inducing than their actual strength. Tens of thousands of Barbarians coming down from the Snowy Wilderness and pouring into various parts of Xichuan in a swarm would cause massive destruction even if they could only plunder some villages and small towns. If they were not resolved, it would be impossible for Xichuan County to resume production fully. Now that Chu State had a rare opportunity to recuperate, Lu Yuan did not want his grand strategy to be destroyed by a group of Barbarians. ¡°I have to figure out a way to deal with these guys properly.¡± Lu Yuan furrowed his brow in thought for a moment, then took out the Nine Provinces Kunyu Map. On the map, the prefectures and counties around Yangzhou as well as the general terrain were very detailed. Outside of Yangzhou, there was only a rough outline, depicting the positions and areas of various countries. His eyes briefly lingered on other areas, finally settling on the section belonging to Chu State within Yangzhou. His gaze wandered around, then shifted to the snowy area near Xichuan County. Looking at the 2,000-li river valley adjacent to Xichuan County and the smaller valleys extending northward, bordered by the mountainous terrain, he saw only a few rivers passing through the area and washing out some smaller valleys. The narrow terrain was like a long snake extending from the south to the north, passing through Xichuan and Hanzhong, and then winding further northward, directly into the heartland of Zhou Country, with a snakehead guarding Longxi County. Just looking at the map, Lu Yuan felt a sense of grandeur, and his eyes couldn¡¯t help but sparkle with excitement. ¡°Although the river valleys near Xichuan County are relatively wide, the area near Hanzhong is just a few small river valleys spanning two to three hundred li. And, between these valleys and Hanzhong County, there are mountain barriers which are nearly impassable for ordinary people, except for martial arts experts. But when these small river valleys continue to the north, the area near Longxi County only has dozens of li of mountain ridges. Although these mountain ridges are steep, if we search carefully, we might be able to find one or two small paths. Using these small paths, we might not be able to transport a large army, but sending out a side army of ten to twenty thousand men should be no problem. If we occupy this area, it might serve as a surprise force to be of great use when we plan to attack Zhou Country in the future after taking Hanzhong.¡± Lu Yuan looked at the map of the valley while recalling the intelligence he had received in the past from the Royal Spy Agency about the area, feeling a sense of grandeur when both corresponded. He remembered a piece of intelligence that he hadn¡¯t paid much attention to before. That is, at the geographical level, the mountain valleys that should have been completely cut off from Zhou Country were found to have special products from Zhou Country among some of the tribes when the Royal Spy agency dispatched spies to investigate the area. Chapter 710 - Chapter 710: Chapter 316: Swords Pointing to Hegu_2 Chapter 710: Chapter 316: Swords Pointing to Hegu_2 This piece of intelligence originally caught the attention of the Imperial City Bureau, who thought that the influence of Zhou Country had reached the Snowfield Valley and planned to use this place as a springboard for managing Xichuan. But upon close inspection, no traces of Zhou People were found in the valley. The land of this valley was still teeming with Barbarians, with no signs of Zhou People. At that time, the lands of Xichuan were jointly controlled by Chu State, Xichuan, and Hanzhong. The primary focus of the Imperial City Bureau was on the other two countries, and only a few spies were sent to the valley, with not many people available. So after conducting a brief search and confirming that the Zhou People were not involved here, they simply treated the Zhou People¡¯s items appearing in the valley as things that had been transferred from Xichuan County, without looking into it further. In the end, they just compiled the intelligence and sent it, as usual, to Lu Yuan. At the time the intelligence arrived, he was busy managing the southwest and simply didn¡¯t have time to deal with these minor matters. Therefore, he only glanced over it once at that time, didn¡¯t think much of it, and there was no follow-up. But now, as Lu Yuan reviewed the map and looked at the overall situation of the world, the information that was initially ignored was suddenly linked together. Perhaps the items from Zhou Country in the valley were not transmitted from Xichuan County. Those tribes of Barbarians in the valley could also have obtained these things from another channel, another route. The Barbarians hiding in the mountains and snowy ridges might have a very secret and little-known trail connecting them with Zhou Country. ¡°Investigate, send someone to investigate immediately. Dispatch your Imperial City Bureau¡¯s little messengers and little spies to infiltrate these Barbarian tribes; you must find that secluded trail for me.¡± Lu Yuan called for the commander of the External Bureau of the Imperial City and personally issued a death order. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Concerning the future deployment of troops to Zhou Country, if such a trail could be found, even if it could only transport ten to twenty thousand people, it would be a great thing for Chu State. Ten to twenty thousand elite soldiers, at critical moments, might just be the force that could turn the tide of battle. ¡°Yes, I will dispatch the deputy commander to personally lead a team to find it.¡± The commanding officer of the External Bureau of the Imperial City saw that the king attached great importance to this matter, immediately accepted the order solemnly and considered it the most important task of the year, planning to get it started immediately after returning. After instructing the Imperial City Bureau to dispatch people to Snowfield Valley to find the potentially existing trail, Lu Yuan thought for a while, then had someone bring Cui Changqing to ask about Chu State¡¯s current reserves of food and fodder. ¡°Your Majesty, now that the wars in Chu State have ceased, there¡¯s still quite a bit left from the twenty million stones of grain prepared last year without major army consumption. All over the place, there¡¯s about seven million stones.¡± Cui Changqing understood these administrative affairs well and answered truthfully now. However, after finish speaking, as if guessing why Lu Yuan was asking this, he added, ¡°But now, everyone is migrating, with a large number of garrisons in Xichuan and Qianzhong Counties, all of whom need the court to supply food. To maintain the livelihood of these large armies and the populace, the court has to disburse at least two million stones of grain each month. It¡¯s April now, and all places in Great Chu have started sowing. By June, the summer grain can be harvested. Therefore, within these three months, at least six million stones of grain have to be ensured to barely maintain the current situation. If Your Majesty wants to use these reserves, the court can at most squeeze out one million stones of grain.¡± Ten million stones of grain, if saved a bit, is roughly equivalent to the needs of one million people for a year. In the past few years when Lu Yuan was campaigning against the southwestern Yi, although the Forbidden Army employed was always about one hundred thousand men. But the actual number of soldiers used by Chu State on the southwestern battlefield far exceeds that. In addition to the one hundred thousand Forbidden Army, there were thirty thousand county soldiers in Qianzhong County, hundreds of thousands of Yi captives, and hundreds of thousands of Chu immigrants who migrated there. Together, these people amount to more than five hundred thousand. Just to feed these many people, even with those immigrants offsetting with labor and captives helping transport food and fodder, Chu State still needed to allocate an additional two hundred thousand civilian workers for grain transportation. The consumption of seven hundred thousand people plus the loss of grain on the way, not counting money, just in terms of food, a war of conquest would consume more than ten million stones a year. If you consider that Lu Yuan once aided Kunhai Nation for some time and the hundreds of thousands of troops used in Xichuan County, at its peak, Chu Army¡¯s consumption of food and fodder directly reached twenty million stones a year, which is the food needed by two million people for a year. Feeding two million people for a year, for Chu State which had a population of only about six million at that time, is an almost suffocating figure. One war emptied Chu State¡¯s accumulation for the six years from Front Yue Hongdao¡¯s eighth year to Shenwu¡¯s fourth year. In six years, the tens of millions of stones of grain that Chu State accumulated during its period of recuperation and the tens of millions of silver tales in the national treasury were almost all consumed. If it weren¡¯t for the fact that they made a comeback by robbing the southwestern Yi tribes afterwards, Chu State would probably have gone bankrupt long ago. Even so, By last year, which was the end of the war, Chu State still suffered severe effects from the war. Domestic grain prices rose by two thirds, causing serious damage to the people¡¯s livelihood. It was precisely seeing this that Lu Yuan later gave up Jianchuan Country and ceded such a large territory to Qiao Kangquan. Chapter 711 - Chapter 711: Chapter 316: Swords Pointing to Hegu_3 Chapter 711: Chapter 316: Swords Pointing to Hegu_3 This is because Chu State¡¯s remaining strength is genuinely incapable of continuing the fight. The price of grain within the country has soared, and Chu State even had to buy grain from those vampire grain merchants in Nanhai Country. If we continue to fight, Chu State will become the next Su Country. Naturally, Lu Yuan did not wish to see this situation. So in the end, he chose to stop and withdrew from the fight, choosing Qiao Kangquan as a sacrificial pawn. He used the three vassal states to block the remaining two major barbarian nations in the Southwest ¨C Nanzhao and Dali. This allowed Chu State to withdraw and begin its recovery. Only then were they able to retain a portion of the originally hoarded grain, after deducting the consumption of the stationed armies and the new immigrants. Otherwise, they would have definitely run out of food. ¡°One million stone?¡± Upon hearing Cui Changqing¡¯s tally, Lu Yuan had a clearer understanding of his current resources. In Xichuan, the hundreds of thousands of civilians originally from the Xichuan country, coupled with the five hundred thousand people relocated from all over Chu State, added up to nearly a million people. Now, they are all waiting anxiously for food provisions from Chu State. In Qianzhong County, there are also hundreds of thousands of new immigrants and war prisoners who also require aid from the court. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Add to that the tens of thousands of soldiers from the two armies¡­ Even though the war has ceased for now, the grain and fodder consumed by Chu State has increased due to the implementation of various policies. However, the time has come. Just as Cui Changqing said, they have planted the grain now, and they only need to wait two or three more months before they can harvest the summer crop. At that time, with the richness of the Jianghan Plain and Dongting Plain, the two counties of Xiangyang and Dongting combined will be able to harvest seventy million stone of grain. With so much grain, even after leaving some for the local people, there should still be ten to twenty million stone of grain left to support subsequent consumption. Moreover, in the latter half of the year in golden autumn, they will be able to harvest another batch of grain. By then, the immigrants who have relocated to Xichuan and Qianzhong will be able to obtain their own food without extra subsidies from the court. When everything is back on track, Chu State should slowly recover, no longer needing to scrape and scrounge as they do now, struggling to get through each day. They can also extract grain to make a profit in Su Country. Shaking his head, Lu Yuan brushed off these thoughts and turned to Cui Changqing, saying, ¡°Of these remaining one million stone of grain, you will divert five hundred thousand stone, all to be transported to Xichuan for the use of the army. The court here is also preparing to assign a group of officials, ready to move to Xichuan at any time.¡± Hearing his king say this, Cui Changqing¡¯s mouth twitched, and he instantly understood what the king planned to do, asking, ¡°Is the king preparing to mobilize troops in Xichuan?¡± As the prime minister, he hesitated to speak up. Chu State¡¯s resources are almost depleted, and it urgently needs to recuperate. The national policy set previously was also for this purspose. Why has the king changed his mind after only a few months? As Prime Minister, Cui Changqing felt he had the responsibility to dissuade the king. Lu Yuan glanced at him, immediately understanding his thoughts, and laughed, ¡°Prime Minister, rest assured, I do indeed plan to mobilize troops, but I have no intention of raising a large army.¡± After explaining, he continued, ¡°In Xichuan, the Barbarians on the snowfields are suffering from a lack of grain due to the mass death of their cattle and sheep from snowstorms and subsequently chose to descend from the mountains to loot Xichuan. If this troublesome issue is not resolved, Xichuan will never be stable, and the development policy we previously set will be difficult to implement. Therefore I thought, since we have to fight anyway, it is better to strike first than to be struck. The Barbarians in the valley near Xichuan are weak and add up to only over two hundred thousand people, distributed into dozens of large and small tribes. This amount of strength is not a match for our Chu Elite Army. Therefore, I plan to let Huang Xuan, the ¡®True Person¡¯ who is stationed in Xichuan, lead the troops. He doesn¡¯t need many, just one reserve army and some local county soldiers, around thirty to forty thousand people, should be enough to wipe out the valley Barbarians.¡± The Snowfield Valley there, when added up, also stretches for over two thousand miles. Towards the north, it stretches towards the areas near Hanzhong County, with three small valleys that stretch nearly a thousand miles. These three thousand miles of valley can be divided, allowing the establishment of five or six Prefectures. I plan to clean up the valley Barbarians and then migrate people over there to set up Prefectures, establishing another Valley County for Chu, as a buffer for Xichuan.¡± Lu Yuan said with a light smile. The strength of the valley Barbarians is weak. All the tribes add up to only two hundred thousand. Even if they include the small valleys near Hanzhong, the population would only be about three hundred thousand at most. And among these many Barbarians, the strongest is just first-rate; there isn¡¯t even a single ¡®Inborn¡¯. This insignificant strength is something Chu State could easily assimilate. Moreover, the place they inhabit, although also a snowy region, is a comparatively survivable valley area within the snowfields. It possesses rivers and lakes, allowing for the cultivation of agricultural crops on both banks. Such territories are not purely nomadic and have agricultural potential. Chu State can perfectly control and establish cities and counties in these territories. As for the Valley County to be established, the total population of five or six Prefectures is only around three hundred thousand, too sparse for efficient development and governance ¡ª this is nothing to worry about. In the newly established Jianchuan and Jianchang Prefectures in Qianzhong County, due to the premature end of the war resulting from Da Changhe¡¯s quick surrender, there were not enough time for cleaning up. In these two Prefectures, over two hundred thousand Yi People are still scattered around, posing a major hidden danger. Lu Yuan was originally wondering how to deal with them, but he doesn¡¯t need to worry anymore. More than twenty thousand Yi People can be taken out, along with their families released from the captured Yi People, and relocated to Valley County. In this way, they would be in a strange place surrounded by Barbarians, becoming the weak side. If they wanted to establish a foothold here and resist the threat of the local Barbarians to survive in the valley, they would have to rely on Chu State. Then, a group of Chu people will be relocated there as the core backbone, supplemented by a large number of Yi People, and deterred by a large army. Without ten to twenty years, Valley County will be able to stabilize, becoming Chu¡¯s important western frontier city between the snowfields and Zhou Country. Chapter 712 - Chapter 712: Chapter 317: The Beauty Fades Away Chapter 712: Chapter 317: The Beauty Fades Away Under Lu Yuan¡¯s strong impetus, the war against the Snow Plains Nomads began rapidly. However, just as he had previously mentioned to Cui Changqing. This war was only a small-scale conflict, involving only the local stationed forces in Xichuan, numbering no more than 30,000 to 50,000. Including civilian workers, the number would not exceed 100,000. For the current Chu State, such a war was nothing at all, and could only be considered as a local, minor conflict. Therefore, after letting people deliver the necessary food and fodder for the campaign to Xichuan, Lu Yuan did not get involved in the matter anymore. With Huang Xuan in Xichuan, a cultivator equivalent to the Second Realm of Innate, there was no need to worry about the fuss those non-Innate barbarians could cause. Lu Yuan simply received some information from Huang Xuan from time to time, while monitoring the war reports sent by Xichuan, and managing the overall situation. He left the specific matters and details to his subordinates. His main focus was still on his own cultivation and the education of his two sons. As for cultivation, Lu Yuan did not have much to do but follow a daily routine of connecting with the Heavenly Pillars and using Qi Luck to attract spiritual energy from the depths of the Heavenly Vault, then absorb and cultivate it slowly. In today¡¯s cultivation world, with scarce spiritual energy, it is extremely difficult for both cultivators and martial artists to advance even one step further. Especially for cultivators. Although there is a method of cultivation, the scarcity of spiritual energy makes it impossible to freely absorb spiritual energy every day, and it must be treasured and calculated carefully. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? Take Lu Yuan, for example. He practiced the Taiping Dao Book, which allowed him to attract and communicate with the spiritual energy in the depths of the Heavenly Vault by invoking the Heavenly Pillars. Through this side method, the spiritual energy he drew and absorbed each time was actually much more than that of normal cultivators practicing in Cave World. However, even with this, as the spiritual energy gradually diminished and became more desolate in the depths of the Heavenly Vault, even with the help of Qi Luck, the spiritual energy Lu Yuan could draw each time was still limited. In his more than ten years of cultivation, except for the time he broke through to condensing one Qi, when he offered up more than a decade¡¯s worth of accumulated Qi Luck in one go, bringing a large amount of spiritual energy, he never had a time when he could freely absorb spiritual energy during normal cultivation. Every time his technique refined spiritual energy, it was difficult to operate at its limit, and the spiritual energy he introduced into his body was only about one-fifth of the efficiency of his technique¡¯s operation. Such a prestigious Five Qi Towards Primordial technique had never been able to exert its full power. Under such a lack of spiritual energy, even though Lu Yuan had lofty ambitions, he was still limited by his environment and found it hard to make much progress. The only consolation for him was that he was not the only one suffering; others were even worse off. As a cultivator who burned his life to cultivate, he found it so difficult to cultivate by relying on the divine powers of the Three Emperors. As for the other cultivators who did not have the golden finger and could only guard their Cave Worlds painstakingly waiting for the daily limited and dwindling spiritual energy, their cultivation was undoubtedly even more difficult. It was not just him that was miserable; others were even more so. As long as he thought about this, Lu Yuan felt much better. Moreover, with the rising national power of the Chu State, the spiritual energy he could draw was also increasing day by day. From now on, he didn¡¯t even have to do much. As long as he could develop the four provinces of the Chu State, his Qi Luck would increase, and the efficiency of his spiritual energy conduction could increase by 20% to 30% based on his current foundation. Just for this alone, the life-consuming method did not disappoint. Lu Yuan believed that he would definitely be the winner in the end in this battle for spiritual energy. Therefore, when it came to cultivation, he simply had to persevere and muddle through. Lu Yuan only set aside one Timing a day to refine the spiritual energy drawn by his Qi Luck quota each day, and did not invest much effort. On the other hand, he cared even more about the education of his two sons. His eldest son, Lu He, was already seven years old, had grown a bit, and had learned some principles after his Enlightenment. Other children of this age who wanted to practice martial arts had already started their training. As the eldest son of Lu Yuan and Lan Cai¡¯er, both Inborn Grandmasters, and the crown prince of the Chu State, it was only natural for Lu He to practice martial arts. Therefore, after a certain time of intimate exchange, faced with the inadvertent hint from his queen, Lu Yuan instantly understood and began to focus on Lu He¡¯s cultivation the next day. Lu Yuan had long planned his oldest son¡¯s cultivation. Cultivation was out of the question. In today¡¯s world, with depleted spiritual energy, he, as a father, already found the spiritual energy insufficient, and he was desperately expanding his territory to compete with other cultivators for the increasingly scarce spiritual energy. To let Lu He cultivate would not only mean there would be no Cave World for him to absorb spiritual energy from. Even if there were one, given the current spiritual energy environment, he seriously doubted whether his son could condense even one Qi. If he couldn¡¯t, even if he had some magical powers, his lifespan would be limited to around one hundred years at most, which was worse than an Inborn Grandmaster¡¯s. Under such circumstances, practicing martial arts was way better than cultivation, and thus, it was not what Lu Yuan wanted for his son. So Lu He¡¯s path, as promised by Lu Yuan to Lan Cai¡¯er before, was to not cultivate and only practice martial arts. He would use a portion of spiritual energy saved by himself from the Immortal Method Jade Slips to wash Lu He¡¯s marrow and cleanse his essence, allowing his soul and flesh to transform and lay a solid foundation in the Immortal Method. With this foundation, Lu He could easily break through to Innate in the future without any obstacles or constraints. That was the original plan. However, earlier this year, Lu Yuan used spiritual energy to refine Sun Siwen¡¯s body and soul, helping his good friend break through the Innate barrier. Chapter 713 - Chapter 713: Chapter 317: The Beauty Fades Away_2 Chapter 713: Chapter 317: The Beauty Fades Away_2 In the process, observing the changes in Sun Siwen under the influence of spiritual energy, Lu Yuan also gained some insights, which gave him more ideas for the application of spiritual energy refinements. If half the spiritual energy can make one¡¯s body and soul undergo metamorphosis. Then with a complete portion of spiritual energy still in his hands, why couldn¡¯t he make the bodies and souls of two people undergo metamorphosis? It should be known that Lu Yuan has two sons. Although the training plan for his younger son, Lu Hao, has already been arranged, the accumulated foundation of the Chu State is enough for his younger son to break through the Innate Realm smoothly. But if he can make it easier for the other party to break through the Innate Realm, why let them choose the difficult path? Due to the guilt of being an old father and to compensate for the regret of his two sons not being able to cultivate immortality, Lu Yuan wanted to give them as many benefits as possible. So, inspired by Sun Siwen, he started researching based on this inspiration. After several months of thinking, going through numerous Taoist Classics, and carefully studying the Taiping Book and the Five Thunder Book, Lu Yuan finally came up with a more complete method of spiritual energy refinement. Now, he is confident that he can use the one portion of spiritual energy in his hands to help both his sons break through the Innate Realm and let their spirits and bodies reach the Innate Realm. Or, it can¡¯t be said to be the Innate Realm, but to let the body become the Innate Body and the soul become the Innate Soul, which is the Innate Dao Body. Although it sounds grand and magnificent, in fact, it¡¯s not a big deal. Martial Arts Xiantian sounds powerful, but in reality, this realm initially is only equivalent to a cultivator who has just developed their powers. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.?¦Ï Even if practiced to the strongest third realm of Grandmaster, it is only the condensation of one pneuma in the Immortal Method. And condensing one pneuma is just the beginning of cultivating immortality, the most basic realm. From here, it can be seen that the Xiantian mentioned in martial arts and the Xiantian mentioned in cultivating immortality are actually two different things. Based on Lu Yuan¡¯s personal experience, observing many Inborn Grandmasters, and the insights gained from helping Sun Siwen undergo metamorphosis, the Xiantian in martial arts mostly refers to a realm reached after communicating with Heaven and Earth through one¡¯s own will. That is, the Martial Dao True Intent. And the martial arts external body is nothing more than a means of applying this True Intent. Compared to cultivation, Martial Dao True Intent is like the Earth Element Energy condensed by Lu Yuan, and the martial arts external body is just a spell used based on this Earth Element Energy, through pneuma (in martial arts, it is referred to as true pneuma). It¡¯s just that martial artists have limitations and cannot use more spells, so they can only fix their spells into one, which is the martial arts external body. According to this theory, what Lu Yuan did for Sun Siwen¡¯s metamorphosis was merely assisting the transformation and strengthening of the latter¡¯s body and soul, or opening a key that allowed Sun Siwen to open the door to the Innate Realm and obtain the qualification to condense Martial Dao True Intent and build a martial arts external body. Yes, just like the concept of Spiritual Roots in cultivation. Practicing martial arts also has similar requirements. If you don¡¯t have the talent, even if you are given innate martial arts techniques, you won¡¯t be able to achieve Xiantian. The only difference is that talent or Spiritual Roots can be obtained through changes in one¡¯s acquired nature. What Lu Yuan wants to do is to use the spiritual energy in his hands to help his two sons open the door of the Innate Realm and condense their innate talent. With this talent, both of them, like Sun Siwen, would naturally be able to break through the Innate Realm as long as they improved their inner strength and cultivation levels in the future. Moreover, because of this innate talent, both of his sons would be able to enjoy the benefits of the supreme talent called ¡°Innate Dao Body¡±, and their cultivation speed would be countless times faster than ordinary people or even geniuses. It took Sun Siwen ten years to break through the Innate Realm according to Lu Yuan¡¯s initial plan. Later, with his help in acceleration, it was shortened to six years. Lu Hao and Lu He fall a little short in terms of accumulated resources, especially in terms of mental realm, so breaking through the Innate Realm in six years is a bit of a stretch. However, Lu Yuan believed that with the teachings of himself, Lan Cai¡¯er, and Teacher Sun Siwen, there shouldn¡¯t be any problem for his two sons to break through the Innate Realm in ten years. After all, it¡¯s just the Innate Realm. Equivalent only to the level where the Immortal Method develops its powers. With so many resources stacked up for the two children, it would be strange if they couldn¡¯t break through the Innate Realm in ten years. During the prosperous period of the ancient Immortal Cultivation World, let alone breaking through the Innate Realm in ten years, doing it in just one day was an easy task. It¡¯s not worth making a fuss about. So when Lu Yuan told Lan Cai¡¯er about his plans, she was overjoyed. Originally, she had given all the spiritual energy to Lu He, and as a mother, she had felt guilty and believed that she had failed her younger son. Now that there is a perfect solution for both, her happiness is boundless. After the Queen agreed, resolving the mother¡¯s opinions, Lu Yuan naturally began designing specific refining methods tailored to his two sons. This work is not difficult. It only involves collecting their sons¡¯ physical data and then researching the delivery of spiritual energy during refinement, as well as specific refinement plans based on their data. He just needs to set aside a few hours each day and devote a few days to it. Perhaps it was because she was too overjoyed, but to Lu Yuan, a father who was doing his best for his sons¡¯ future, Lan Cai¡¯er was very satisfied. In those days, Lu Yuan truly enjoyed being treated with total obedience and sentimental gentleness. Even the few positions that he had never been able to achieve before were realized, leaving him extremely delighted. Chapter 714 - Chapter 714: Chapter 317: The Beauty Fades Away_3 Chapter 714: Chapter 317: The Beauty Fades Away_3 Inspired by this. He quickly formed a plan for washing and refining the spiritual energy of his two sons. In just ten days, he had a complete plan. By this point, the ¡°Innate Dao Body¡± creation plan was more than half complete. So on a lucky day, taking advantage of the good weather, Lu Yuan brought his eldest son, Lu He, to the same Bifang Garden where he had helped Sun Siwen refine his body and soul last time, and began to help him with spiritual energy refinement. With the experience from last time and months of research, the ¡°Innate Dao Body¡± was completed in just five days, without much effort. It even took two more days than last time, mainly because Lu He was only a child, with far less powerful mental and spiritual strength than Sun Siwen. As a result, Lu Yuan had to put in more energy and control everything 100%. Nevertheless, Lu He¡¯s success demonstrated the feasibility of the ¡°Innate Dao Body¡± plan. So, taking advantage of the momentum, he rested for two days to recover his physical and mental strength before helping his second son, Lu Hao, complete the Dao Body refinement as well. Thus, both of his sons had innate talent and obtained the key to the Innate Realm. With the beginnings of their Dao Bodies and the gate to the Innate Realm opened, Lu Yuan began to teach his two sons to cultivate. The cultivation technique he taught his two sons was still the Chi Yang Divine Skill. However, the name of the divine skill remained unchanged, but its content, after years of breakthroughs into the Innate Realm by Lu Yuan, supplemented and revised by integrating some of the essence of the Taiping Dao Book and the Five Thunder Book, had turned into a powerful Innate Cultivation Method. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Not only did it begin with the basics but also lead directly to the Innate Realm. He even deduced the cultivation methods for the first and second realms of the Innate Realm. Such mysterious power was considered top-notch in the world. Practicing this divine skill was incomparable to ordinary cultivation techniques. Lu He and Lu Hao just began practicing, and in just three months, they had opened up one of their meridians. Compared to ordinary people who only open a meridian in three to four years, their speed was more than ten times faster. Even Lu Yuan could not help but be amazed when he saw it. Upon examining their progress, he confirmed that there were no problems with how quickly his two sons were cultivating. He eventually guessed that their rapid cultivation speed was mostly due to their ¡°Innate Dao Body,¡± the improved Chi Yang Divine Skill, and the guidance from both Lu Yuan and Lan Cai¡¯er, who were both at the Innate Grandmaster level. After all, the ¡°Innate Dao Body¡± he gave his two sons is the special talent of the protagonist in those novels, coupled with the divine skill and two Innate Grandmaster parents¡­ Hiss¡ª It seemed that Lu He and Lu Hao were indeed treated like true protagonists. Even if they weren¡¯t the main characters, they¡¯d still be the genius antagonists against the protagonist. Either way, it¡¯s quite terrifying. Therefore, after realizing this, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t feel much of a ripple in his heart regarding his two sons¡¯ rapid progress. Instead, he cared even more about the mental cultivation of the two little ones. Even in martial arts, the requirements for one¡¯s state of mind are very strict. If they fail to control their growing Inner Strength due to their mental cultivation, they may eventually lose balance, suffer from qi deviation, and face life-threatening consequences. Fortunately, it is only when martial arts reach the second-rate level that there are requirements for one¡¯s state of mind. There is still some time before his two sons reach this realm, so there¡¯s no need to worry too much for now. Nevertheless, Lu Yuan had decided to have Lu He and Lu Hao slow down their cultivation progress. Before ensuring that their mental state was sufficient, he would personally monitor them without letting their cultivation grow too fast. Lan Cai¡¯er also agreed with this point and was determined to pay more attention to the children¡¯s progress herself. After all, as the master of a country, Lu Yuan was busy with tasks and frequently went out on expeditions, so he couldn¡¯t spare too much time to be with his two sons. In such cases, it was up to her as the mother to shoulder the responsibility of taking care of the children. Fortunately, she had grown accustomed to doing so over the past several years and didn¡¯t find it troublesome or tiring. On the contrary, seeing her two sons successfully transform filled her with joy and happiness. Lu Yuan could see the ¡°protagonist¡± treatment his two sons received and knew how terrifying it was. As the former actual female protagonist in Jianghu, Lan Cai¡¯er had an even better understanding. In her two sons, she saw a reflection of her past self; no, she should say that her two sons were even more outstanding than she had been. With such talent and the identity of the princes of Chu State, their future breakthrough to the Innate Realm was as good as certain. With their son having a bright future, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s hope and expectations were finally fulfilled. And after putting her mind at ease, naturally, she had more energy to focus on herself. Then, during an intimate moment with Lu Yuan, when they were painting their eyebrows together in front of a mirror, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s mood suddenly collapsed when she saw their reflection. Although both of them were handsome and beautiful, there was a noticeable difference in their appearances. He still looked youthful and vigorous, like a young dragon. She, on the other hand, had matured and showed signs of aging. In simple terms, one looked sixteen while the other looked twenty-six. Despite both being young, the difference in their ages was quite obvious. But there was no helping it. Although the Taiping Dao Book was a cultivation method that consumed one¡¯s lifespan, Lu Yuan had practiced for many years, and he should have burned at least two or three hundred years of his lifespan ¨C which would be an entire life for an Inborn Grandmaster. Nevertheless, even so, with his nearly infinite lifespan, it was like a drop in the ocean, or rather, he couldn¡¯t even feel the loss of his lifespan. His sixteen-year-old body stayed the same. Eternal Youth and Immortal Blessings ¨C this described Lu Yuan. However, while he remained young and vibrant, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s body inevitably began to age. Or perhaps it couldn¡¯t be called aging but rather maturing. After all, at the age of forty, she hadn¡¯t even reached one-third of her 150-year lifespan as an Inborn Grandmaster. But even so, seeing her husband still young, without any traces of time¡¯s passage on his body, and knowing that her own body would gradually mature and eventually face aging ¨Cn This cruel reality was a significant blow to any woman. ¡°Women want to please the ones they love. Your Majesty¡¯s cultivation of Immortal Techniques keeps you forever young. But although I have achieved minor success in martial arts and can enjoy a lifespan of 150 years, I cannot escape the suffering of aging. Now, I am still young and can maintain some of my beauty. But in twenty or thirty years, I won¡¯t be able to preserve my youth. When I face Your Majesty with my aged appearance and your youthful face at that time, I¡¯ll only feel ashamed.¡± Since that day when they were painting eyebrows in front of the mirror, every time Lan Cai¡¯er made love with Lu Yuan and thought about this, her heart would be suffocated. Lu Yuan was also helpless about it. His longevity was limited to himself and couldn¡¯t be shared with others. But now, with the decline of spiritual energy and the Age of Dharma Decline, attaining eternal youth by cultivating immortality was also impossible. However, seeing Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s melancholy mood, Lu Yuan felt somewhat uncomfortable as well. At the beginning, they didn¡¯t have much affection for each other, but after more than ten years of marriage and living together day and night, their love and friendship had deepened. Although he knew that their difference in lifespan would inevitably make them part ways eventually, he wanted to fulfill her wish before she departs, allowing her to leave with her best appearance as a form of compensation. He had compensated their two sons, and his wife¡¯s compensation, Lu Yuan believed, shouldn¡¯t be overlooked. However, he wasn¡¯t sure how to preserve her appearance. In the end, he could only ask people to look for age-defying techniques in Jianghu, and browse through Dao Books to find out what the ancient immortals used to keep their youthful appearance, and try to see if he could make any breakthroughs. Apart from that, the Immortal Sect Ziyun Dao was also an option. But seeking age-defying techniques from those Immortal Sects wasn¡¯t the right time yet, and for his own safety, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t want to wander around other Immortal Sects without enough strength. Fortunately, Lan Cai¡¯er was only starting to mature now, and there was no need to worry about aging for the next thirty or forty years. There was still plenty of time, enough to wait slowly. So Lu Yuan was not in a hurry. He just started his own research to see if he could find any solutions. While he was tinkering and busying himself, the world outside continued to change, and time passed by. Before they knew it, two years had gone by in the blink of an eye. And the time came to Shenwu Year Nine. Chapter 715 - Chapter 715: Chapter 318: Accumulating in Changchun Chapter 715: Chapter 318: Accumulating in Changchun Royal Palace, inside Kunhe Hall. Lu Yuan sat cross-legged on the couch, his eyes fixed on Lan Cai¡¯er in front of him. The Queen sat cross-legged as well, her eyes slightly closed and her breath even. A faint aura circulated within her, appearing and disappearing intermittently. Wrapped in this aura, a powerful life will grew increasingly condensed. After a while, the lingering aura suddenly withdrew, the life will condensed into a point, revolving within Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s body, then directly rushed towards the space between her eyebrows, turning into a deep crimson dot, adhering to the surface of her skin. At this moment, Lan Cai¡¯er exhaled deeply and slowly opened her eyes. ¡°Your Majesty, how is it?¡± Hearing Lu Yuan, he looked up and down at Lan Cai¡¯er twice, seeing that there was nothing unusual, and quickly asked, ¡°Is this cultivation method effective?¡± Looking at her husband¡¯s concerned expression, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s heart was filled with warmth. She then showed a gentle smile and nodded slightly, ¡°After practicing this Changchun Art that Your Majesty created, I deeply feel its profound mystery. Now my whole body¡¯s essence, qi, and spirit have merged into one point, and I have successfully condensed the seed of life and nourished it in the Heavenly Palace. As long as I possess this seed of life, from now on, the dispersion of my essence, qi, and spirit will be slowed down, and my appearance will remain unchanged for a long time. Although it can¡¯t be called eternal youth, it can be considered as a way to maintain my appearance and remain youthful.¡± When she finished speaking, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s face was also full of joy. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï No woman is not afraid of her appearance aging. Previously, she was always worried about this and had been melancholic all the time. Now that this biggest problem is finally solved, how could she not be overjoyed? After listening, Lu Yuan also had a hint of joy in his heart. His heart finally relaxed and followed with a laugh, ¡°The Changchun Art that I created after spending several years integrating the rejuvenation techniques I collected from the Jianghu, as well as the longevity techniques of Daoist school, is not only effective for rejuvenating one¡¯s appearance. Now, all of your essence, qi and spirit have been integrated into the seed of life. At this time, what sustains your future vitality is this seed of life. From now on, as long as you are not fatally injured, you can stimulate from the seed of life the essence, qi, and spirit to rapidly heal the injury. However, this method of healing consumes the essence, qi, and spirit. Although it can heal injuries, it will shorten the lifespan. If it is not necessary, it should not be used at all.¡± For the same reason, with this seed of life, you will be able to adjust your physical state in the future and achieve an even younger or older effect. Your Majesty, have you noticed that you are indeed younger than before?¡± After finishing speaking, Lu Yuan scrutinized Lan Cai¡¯er closely, and now the appearance of his Queen was indeed much younger than before. If previously Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s appearance seemed 27-28 years old, by this time, she looked around 24-25 years old. It seemed that she had only become younger by three or four years, but this was just the subconscious effect brought about when Lan Cai¡¯er practiced the method. If she were intentional, she would only need to adjust the seed of life and stimulate the essence, qi, and spirit within it to naturally achieve the effect of becoming younger or older. This change in appearance does not mean that her lifespan has increased, but just a way to utilize life force. In simpler terms, it is like a cell phone screen wallpaper. It can be either original or selected according to personal preference. No matter if it is original or self-selected, the nature of the cell phone remains unchanged, consuming the same amount of energy. Now, if Lan Cai¡¯er were the cellphone and the wallpaper her appearance, then her normal appearance would be the original wallpaper, while her adjusted appearance would be the self-selected wallpaper, and the energy consumed would be her life force transformed into the seed of life. Lan Cai¡¯er is still Lan Cai¡¯er, and the only difference is that now she can use the seed of life to adjust her appearance. And this adjustment process will not cost her anything. At most, adjusting her appearance might consume more of her essence, qi, and spirit, but compared to normal consumption, it is only increased by about 1% or even 0.1%. Converted to lifespan, it means that Lan Cai¡¯er will live a few months less. This small loss of lifespan is not worth mentioning compared to maintaining a youthful appearance all the time. Not to mention that she is an Inborn Grandmaster who is expected to live for 150 years, even an ordinary woman or man who lives only 60 or 70 years would do their best to cultivate if they possessed this divine skill, and would not care about the consumption of their few months of life. This is the ¡°Changchun Art¡± that Lu Yuan created after spending more than two years incorporating dozens of techniques for rejuvenation and longevity and reading thousands of Taoist Classics in order to extract the art of longevity. As the name suggests, besides the basic refining of Inner Strength, this Changchun Art does not have any other effects. The only purpose is to nourish and rejuvenate, enabling a person to remain youthful. It is like a divine skill for those who need it, but a useless thing for those who don¡¯t. And Lan Cai¡¯er is, of course, the former. ¡°Have I really become younger?¡± Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s words, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s eyes suddenly lit up. She hurriedly got up and went to a dressing table nearby, examining herself in the mirror above it. Chapter 716 - Chapter 716: Chapter 318: Accumulating in Changchun_2 Chapter 716: Chapter 318: Accumulating in Changchun_2 In the clear, smooth mirror, a stunningly beautiful face appeared before her eyes. Seeing the familiar face with an even younger appearance, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s expression showed even greater delight. As Lu Yuan said indeed, she had become younger in appearance. ¡°The Queen can try to communicate with the Seed of Life by her thoughts, and adjust her appearance to be even younger,¡± said Lu Yuan, standing up and walking to Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s side to embrace her. With brightened eyes, Lan Cai¡¯er followed Lu Yuan¡¯s words. She circulated her energy and connected her thoughts with the Seed of Life on her forehead, adjusting her spirit within. The power of life surged through her body, changing her muscles and skin instantly as it passed. Her originally fair and tender skin became even more youthful. In just a few moments, when the power of life returned to the Seed of Life, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s appearance in the mirror looked even younger than before. From the outside, she now looked like an eighteen-year-old girl, full of youthful energy. The couple standing together in front of the mirror looked like a perfect match, a pair of heroes and beauties. Seeing this, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s eyes were full of joy and happiness. At this moment, she and her husband no longer had any glaring difference in their appearances. Both of them looked like they were in their prime, he looking sixteen and she eighteen, making them an incredibly fitting and beautiful couple. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï They no longer appeared as they had before, with a discernible age gap of more than ten years to the discerning eye. The last knot in her heart dissolved. ¡°My King, I want it,¡± Lan Cai¡¯er said brightly, leaning towards the man she loved. She took his hand, placed it on her heart, leaned closer, and spoke with endless love. As a beautiful woman threw herself into his arms and whispered her love, what could Lu Yuan say to that? He leaned in, filled with excitement and a hint of anticipation. Before long, the great hall was filled with the sounds of their lovemaking, like an endless symphony of sweet murmurs and tender caresses¡­ ¡­ After verifying the effectiveness of Changchun Art, in the following days, Lu Yuan and Lan Cai¡¯er immersed themselves in the practice of this cultivation technique together. Changchun Art could adjust a person¡¯s appearance, making them look younger, more mature, or much older. For the couple, it allowed them to experience the pleasures of various age stages. The young Lan Cai¡¯er, the mature Lan Cai¡¯er, the elegant Lan Cai¡¯er, the charming Lan Cai¡¯er, the half-aged Lan Cai¡¯er¡­ Each age, each appearance was a novel experience for Lu Yuan like never before. It was endless fun to change appearances at will when they were in the mood. Not only Lan Cai¡¯er, but also Lu Yuan, who had practiced Changchun Art, was finally able to change his appearance and no longer needed to keep his sixteen-year-old face. If he wished, he could age himself instantly to look more mature and dignified, no longer as childlike as he once appeared. As the king of a country and ruler of his people, in truth, Lu Yuan¡¯s previous sixteen-year-old appearance had not been without its drawbacks regarding his royal authority. Although many people knew that the King of Chu, Lu Yuan, was actually over forty years old and possessed great martial arts skills, having achieved military greatness and earning the title of Military God, his young face still inspired doubts about his reliability. As the saying goes, ¡®a smooth chin is an unreliable foundation.¡¯ Regardless of the veracity of this old adage, popular sayings like this must carry some truth to them. In the past, Lu Yuan had encountered a lot of minor troubles due to his childlike appearance. Although these troubles were not overly troublesome, avoiding them was still a good thing. Thus, after practicing Changchun Art, he voluntarily fixed his appearance at thirty years old., This age was neither too young nor too old, representing the peak of a man¡¯s life and the point when others would find him mature enough. The saying ¡®a man should be independent at thirty¡¯ was a fitting description for this age. Of course, while Lu Yuan chose to appear thirty for the sake of his kingdom¡¯s affairs, Lan Cai¡¯er, naturally, would always look eighteen. Women, of course, prefer looking younger. Not just her. After creating Changchun Art, Lu Yuan also bestowed it upon the favored concubines in his harem, allowing them to practice it themselves. This cultivation art was perfect for them, as it not only promoted their health but also preserved their youthful appearance. After all, even as an emperor, one would not want to see his concubines age and turn into old hags. Such appearances would be not only unsightly, but also a cause for discomfort, reminding the emperor of the days when he used to favor those now-aged women. Now things were different. Each woman was given the Changchun Art technique to practice. As long as they could condense the Seed of Life and maintain a youthful appearance, Lu Yuan¡¯s expectations for them would be met. Although it would take at least twenty years of hard practice for those harem concubines, especially those without a martial arts background or foundation, to achieve this step, it was still worth it in the long run. Chapter 717 - Chapter 717: Chapter 318: Accumulating in Changchun_3 Chapter 717: Chapter 318: Accumulating in Changchun_3 However, thinking about the long-lasting youth, no one would find this time too long. Even if it¡¯s decades later, who would refuse the temptation of eternal youth until the end of their life? As for Lu Yuan, As soon as he had spread this technique within the palace, he didn¡¯t pay much attention to it. He broke free from the happy entanglements of the concubines and returned to the right track, focusing on important matters. ¡­ Shenwu¡¯s ninth year, July 20th. On this day, the nation¡¯s annual summer tax was reported and summarized. At the same time, the household registration conducted by Lu Yuan at the beginning of the year was finally completed. So, Lu Yuan convened the ministers for a discussion in the Palace of Positive Yang. Palace of Positive Yang. The officialdom of Chu gathered together, led by Sun Siwen below the monarch, Lu Yuan. About three months ago, after completing the accumulation of his physical and spiritual foundation, this friend of Lu Yuan¡¯s smoothly broke through the Innate Realm and officially became the sixth Innate in Chu State. At the same time, Left Prime Minister Cui Changqing, who had been working hard for the country, suddenly fainted on his desk one day. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã0 When Lu Yuan heard the news, he was greatly shocked and sent an imperial physician to look into the matter. Finally, they got the answer: Left Prime Minister Cui had worked too hard, and his energy was exhausted; he wouldn¡¯t live much longer. If he went home to rest now, he might live for a few more months. Lu Yuan had great respect for the Left Prime Minister, who had worked hard for him for more than ten years. Therefore, when he learned of the situation, he ordered Cui Changqing to go home and rest, disregarding Cui¡¯s pleas, so that he could prolong his life, even if only for a while. With the position of Left Prime Minister vacant, the court could not do without a leader. Right at the time when Sun Siwen broke through the Innate Realm, Lu Yuan let him return to the court to take charge of government affairs. After familiarizing himself with the responsibilities during this past few months, this friend of Lu Yuan¡¯s had become highly efficient in handling various domestic affairs, greatly easing Lu Yuan¡¯s burden. ¡°Your Majesty,¡± As Lu Yuan sat on the throne lost in thought, Sun Siwen stepped forward and, after paying his respects, reported, ¡°This summer¡¯s tax revenue reached a total of thirty-seven million silver tales from the land tax, nineteen million silver tales from the property tax, and ten million silver tales from the head tax. The sum of these three items is sixty-six million silver tales. In addition, the total income from domestic customs duties reached twenty-four million silver tales, and foreign customs duties generated thirty-one million silver tales. These two customs duties totaled fifty-five million silver tales. Moreover, business tax collected from markets and city shops amounted to twelve million silver tales. The remaining miscellaneous taxes added up to nine million silver tales. So, including the land tax, head tax, property tax, customs duties, and business tax, Great Chu collected a total of one hundred forty-two million silver tales in taxes during the first half of the year. This is the income from taxation. Besides that, the imperial court also operates thirteen mines for gold, silver, and copper in Qianzhong County. The income from these mines in the first half of the year amounted to thirty million silver tales. Moreover, the three Southwestern tributary nations of Kunhai, Chilih, and Jianchuan contributed a total of twenty-seven million silver tales in tribute this year. Nanhai Country also contributed thirty million silver tales in tribute. These four countries combined provided fifty-seven million silver tales in tribute. With tax revenue, mining income, and tribute combined, Great Chu¡¯s total income for the first half of the year was two hundred and twenty-nine million silver tales. Furthermore, by the second half of the year, winter tax revenue will increase, possibly reaching a total of one hundred eighty million silver tales. However, during the cold winter months of November and December, the mines in Qianzhong will be unable to operate, and the expected mining income for the latter half of the year will only be twenty-five million silver tales. There will be no income from tribute during that period. Therefore, Great Chu¡¯s total income for the second half of the year should be around two hundred and five million silver tales. The total annual income will be around four hundred and thirty-four million silver tales. Now, for the expenditures: At present, Great Chu has three hundred thousand forbidden army soldiers, fifty thousand naval forces, fifty thousand county soldiers, eighty thousand prefectural soldiers, five thousand palace guards, and five thousand Jinwu Guards, totaling four hundred and ninety thousand troops. The military spending for these various troops requires about thirty million silver tales per year. In addition, the annual salaries for more than 5,500 high and low-ranking officials in the imperial court¡¯s various departments and local prefectures and counties amount to ten million silver tales. Maintenance and operation costs for the various departments of the imperial court and local institutions amount to fifteen million silver tales per year. Various expenses such as local livelihood water conservancy projects, maintenance of post stations, and road construction cost about twenty-three million silver tales. Furthermore, the annual cost of the royal palace is about six million silver tales. Other miscellaneous expenses, including allowances for disabled soldiers from previous years, local welfare relief, and academy funding, amount to about four million silver tales per year. Finally, a reserve of ten million silver tales must be retained to cope with possible disaster relief or for urgent needs in various situations. All in all, Great Chu¡¯s total annual expenditure is about three hundred and sixty-eight million silver tales. Taking the difference between income and expenditure into account, the annual surplus for Great Chu is around sixty-six million silver tales. In addition, the trade of grain between Great Chu and Su Country in the past three years has also yielded a profit of twenty million silver tales. However, since the beginning of this year, grain production in Shu State has gradually recovered, and grain trade with Great Chu has been decreasing. By the end of the year, trade is expected to cease completely. With these additional funds in the treasury, the balance in the national treasury has reached eight hundred and sixty-three million silver tales, which is enough to cover Great Chu¡¯s expenses for two full years. Furthermore, in the past several years, there accumulated, forty million stones of grain in storage at various locations, which can be used to supply a million-strong army for three years of campaign. Since the ceasefire from the southwestern war in the sixth year of Shenwu, after three years of recuperation, Great Chu¡¯s military is already well-trained and abundantly supplied. Though not yet at its peak, the current strength is enough to face any challenge from any country in the world.¡± Sun Siwen finished summarizing the tax revenue with a strong sense of pride and confidence. Upon hearing his words, the other ministers in the hall nodded their heads in agreement. Even Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but reveal a faint smile on his face. Indeed, as Sun Siwen had said, Today, after three years of recuperation, Chu State¡¯s military is well-trained, and its national strength is growing increasingly strong. During these three years of recuperation, Great Chu even found the time to easily destroy the barbarians in the Snowfield Valley with the help of True Person Huang Xuan, leading thirty thousand soldiers to expand Great Chu¡¯s territory by another three thousand miles and establishing six new prefectures in Hegu County. Now, Chu State consists of Dongting, Xiangyang, Qianzhong, Xichuan, and Hegu: Five counties and forty prefectures, with a territory spanning over twenty thousand miles. In addition, there are three tributary states in the southwest: Kunhai, Chilih, and Jianchuan. These three nations are part of the Chu State tribute system and can also be considered part of Chu State. Considering all this, Great Chu consists of five counties and three nations, with a territory nearly reaching thirty thousand miles and truly attaining the status of a dominant empire. In the world, it has already entered the ranks of first-rate countries, surpassing even the quasi-first-rate Ning Country by a considerable margin. With a total of 490,000 standing troops and six Innate realm cultivators, Great Chu possesses the strength to face any powerful enemy without fear. Chapter 718 - Chapter 718: Chapter 319: Chu State Dominates Chapter 718: Chapter 319: Chu State Dominates ¡°With elite soldiers, abundant supplies, this level of reserves within Great Chu, I owe it all to you gentlemen.¡± After accounting for the resources at their disposal, Lu Yuan, filled with delight, scanned the ministers present at the gathering and gave credit where credit was due. ¡°We dare not take the credit.¡± ¡°This is all due to Your Majesty¡¯s effort.¡± The attendants, one by one, paid their respects, not daring to accept the praise. ¡°Ha ha!¡± At that sight, Lu Yuan laughed loudly and waved to the gathered officials. ¡°Gentlemen, there¡¯s no need for this. I could conquer the world, but I couldn¡¯t govern it. The only contribution I could make to governance is to appoint the wise and capable, and let everyone do their part. The present prosperity of Chu State has been possible only due to the contributions of the many talented scholars gathered here. I would not dare to compete with my ministers for accolades.¡± Upon hearing this, the ministers hurriedly expressed, ¡°We are ashamed.¡± In the hall, harmony between monarch and ministers was immediately evident. After the mutual praises subsided, the atmosphere gradually calmed down. Then, Sun Siwen cleared his throat and began to give a rough report. ¡°As I have already reported to Your Majesty regarding the treasury and the taxation, this summer, the results of the population census conducted in the ninth year of Shenwu reign are also available.¡± Having bowed in tribute, Sun Siwen fetched a book and handed it to Lu Yuan through the eunuch. He then announced, ¡°Great Chu has five prefectures. Dongting and Xiangyang have been under our rule for over ten years. They could be called the foundation of our nation. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Qianzhong and Xichuan, under our governance for over five years now, have seen a continuous influx of people, enhancing their local development, and have subsequently become significant sources of finance and food. Though Hegu is a newly opened prefecture, with established local administrations and ongoing agricultural development efforts during the past couple of years, it¡¯s really started taking shape.¡± ¡°Earlier this year, Your Majesty ordered a census across all prefectures and counties, which included compilation of household records, accompanied by the dispatching of imperial historians to supervise the process in each prefecture.¡± ¡°Half a year has passed since then, and the population census of Great Chu has been compiled. After verification by the Ministry of Revenue, we have come up with a figure, which I now present for Your Majesty¡¯s consideration.¡± ¡°There are ten counties in Dongting, currently comprising seven hundred thousand households, or three and a half million people.¡± ¡°Xiangyang, with its four counties, has two hundred thousand households, or one and a half million people.¡± ¡°In Qianzhong, one county has ten households, amounting to two hundred and eighty thousand households, or one million four hundred thousand people.¡± ¡°Xichuan, one county with ten households, has four hundred thousand households, or two million people.¡± ¡°There are six counties in Hegu, with one hundred and fifty thousand households, making up eight hundred thousand people.¡± ¡°So, in total, across the five prefectures and forty counties of Great Chu, there are one million seven hundred and thirty thousand households, and eight million and eight hundred thousand people.¡± Being deeply familiar with governmental affairs, with an improved memory following the Breaking through Innate, Sun Siwen confidently, fluently delivered all the statistical numbers. Each individual present intently listened to his report, quietly contemplating the significance of the provided data. After he had finished presenting the population census of the five prefectures, followed by a summary, several people were visible shaken, displaying looks of stupefaction. The shocking figure of eight million eight hundred thousand people had an undeniable impact. Some facts, unless pointed out explicitly, are underestimated in their dreadfulness. The power of Chu State was one such fact. Many were aware of the might of Chu State, which was, after all, in possession of five prefectures, covering tens of thousands of miles. Looking solely at territorial expansion, one could conclude that Chu was a great country. While the label of a great country was well recognized, the real scale of its greatness was often difficult to articulate. And yet, with the most straightforward data, Sun Siwen informed the entire gathering that Chu was a major power with a population of eight million eight hundred thousand people. In this world, a country commanding military forces exceeding a million, and a population of over ten million, would meet the standards of a hegemonic power. At the moment, Great Chu maintains a standing army of four hundred ninety thousand soldiers. A little mobilization would effortlessly push that force beyond a million. With a population of eight million eight hundred thousand, Chu is only short of one million two hundred thousand from reaching the figure of ten million. Even considering the provinces of Jianchuan, Chilih, and Kunhai, Chu¡¯s population has actually already exceeded ten million. The three provinces of the southwest, obeying Chu State¡¯s commands, paying tribute and acknowledging the King of Chu as their ruler, are naturally Chu¡¯s subjects. When the countries of the world perceive Chu, they instinctively include Jianchuan, Chilih, and Kunhai as parts of Chu, adding them to Chu¡¯s strength. This is reminiscent of the time when Changsha, Southsea, and Ninghai, were considered part of Yue Country. Indeed, even without considering these three provinces, the remaining gap to attain hegemony is merely a matter of time for Chu State. This is mostly owing to the fact that unlike the deeply developed prefectures of Xiangyang and Dongting, the prefectures of Xichuan, Qianzhong, and Hegu in Chu State have recently been opened up. With vast lands and few people, there are large tracts of wasteland that have yet to be developed. The lands of these three prefectures could easily sustain an additional five million people. Furthermore, even in Dongting and Xiangyang, there were many outlying areas that were left uncultivated. If all this land was to be developed, it could easily support an additional two million people. All of this is merely considering the agricultural population. If one considers the urban areas, as the population multiplies and more laborers are absorbed into the industries, just the urban population within these five prefectures could increase by another two million people. Considering all this, the present land holdings of Chu State, given the existing agricultural and industrial technology at its disposal, can support a population that is double its current size. Given the current population growth rate, If Chu State maintains the status quo and simply continues to recuperate, at the most, in ten years, the population can naturally multiply to a count of ten million. In three to four decades, the population can double. And if the population doubles, so does the military might. If at present Chu State maintains a standing army of four hundred and ninety thousand, thirty years hence, it will, logically have a standing army of over one million. With such strength, it will undoubtedly deserve the title of Supreme Dominator. It¡¯s now clear why the attendees at the gathering were so shocked, isn¡¯t it? Bearing in mind the current resources of Chu State, a simple consolidation over thirty years will see its population rival Ning Country. Moreover, in terms of national power, it would significantly surpass it. Chapter 719 - Chapter 719: Chapter 319: Chu State Dominates_2 Chapter 719: Chapter 319: Chu State Dominates_2 To compete for the title of Master of Yangzhou, the Chu State wouldn¡¯t even need to fight a war against Ning Country. Just by enduring for thirty years, they could become the true masters of Yangzhou. Because now, Ning Country¡¯s potential has essentially reached its peak. No matter how hard the Heavenly Son of Jianwu tries to revitalize everything, he cannot dig out any more strength. But with Chu State¡¯s current national power, they can compete with Ning Country without losing an inch. After thirty years, with Chu State¡¯s power doubled, they can directly crush Ning Country just by scale alone. The struggle between the two has reached a climax, and the winner has already been determined. However, Chu State and Ning Country have not yet directly engaged in battle and defeated each other, and the time has not yet reached thirty years later, so people still do not understand the situation very clearly. But the many ministers present, who isn¡¯t a contemporary genius? Each of those who won a place in the court is an outstanding individual, with a long-term vision and exceptional insight. After listening to Sun Siwen¡¯s summary, who couldn¡¯t understand the meaning behind it? As ministers of Chu State, the fact that their country can be so powerful naturally raises their own status as well. Under the principle of shared glory and mutual suffering, who would not feel exhilarated and happy about this? Even Lu Yuan felt quite joyful. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?0 He flipped through the household register presented by Sun Siwen and, looking at the rows of specific numbers, could not help but be emotional. Chu State¡¯s vast population was naturally the result of Lu Yuan¡¯s tireless efforts. In these three years of recuperation, he was not solely focused on staying in the palace, practicing martial arts with his concubines and neglecting everything else. In the past three years, under Lu Yuan¡¯s guidance, Chu State has eliminated the Hegu Barbarians, and not only opened up a county but also gained three hundred thousand Barbarian people. In addition, on Su Country¡¯s side, about a hundred thousand refugees were received in the past three years, resulting in significant gains. Then there¡¯s Jianchuan, Chilih, and Kunhai of the Three Nations which have been attacking Nanzhao Country, capturing many Nanzhao Barbarians in the process. About a hundred and fifty thousand Barbarians among these captives were exchanged for grain by Lu Yuan and settled in Xichuan and Dongting. Moreover, about fifty thousand originally captured Barbarian soldiers of Chu State were released, and they led their families to settle in Hegu County to increase the local population. In all aspects, Chu State has gained nearly six hundred thousand people through various internal and external channels. The remaining areas have also developed and multiplied; the original population of just eight million people has surged by eight hundred thousand. However, Jianchuan, Chilih, and Kunhai of the Southwest Three Nations ceased their war with the Nanzhao Country at the end of last year and have reached a peace agreement. Warfare has ended. After several years of recovery in Su Country, the local order and production have been restored to a considerable extent, and the people have gradually become stable, with the number of refugees decreasing day by day. Chu State¡¯s channels for obtaining large external populations have almost been cut off. At home, the number of Barbarian prisoners of war has been reduced to about eighty thousand after years of consumption and release. All of these people are filling up the more than ten mines in Qianzhong County, a vital labor force for mining, and it is almost impossible for them to be released and become registered residents. Three out of the five large sources of population have suddenly disappeared. Next, if Chu State wants to continue increasing its population, it will either have to rely on natural reproduction and accumulate gradually. Or else, find an enemy like the Hegu Barbarians, destroy them and obtain a large population in the process, while also expanding their territory. Both of these methods are gradual and fast-acting; Lu Yuan was determined to carry out both at the same time. Domestically, they will continue to recuperate and grow their population. Externally, they will look for opportunities to expand. The former does not require much of his effort as there are countless ministers in the court who will strive to help Chu State recuperate. However, to be honest, Lu Yuan has not yet found a suitable expansion opportunity. For now, he can only bide his time and look for opportunities. However, all these considerations are merely long-term strategies and are not necessary to mention at the moment. Upon learning of Chu State¡¯s strength, it is only appropriate to celebrate and lift everyone¡¯s spirits. So, after Sun Siwen finished speaking and numerous ministers absorbed the information, Lu Yuan laughed loudly and said, ¡°Today, after investigating the world¡¯s household register, we know that our Great Chu is so powerful. This is something to celebrate the strengthening of our nation¡¯s prestige. Today, I will host a banquet in Qionghua Garden to thank the ministers for their hard work over the years. I sincerely hope you will all join me.¡± The ministers all thanked him, saying, ¡°We are grateful for Your Majesty¡¯s grace.¡± ¡­ On that day, after the grand court meeting, the officials of the Chu State dined with the King of Chu in Qionghua Garden. There were constant singing and dancing, non-stop music, and a few ministers even wrote poems on the spot to celebrate the prosperous age of Shenwu. The content of that day¡¯s grand court session, under the deliberate promotion of the court, quickly spread to the four corners of the world. Fifty million taels in annual revenue, forty million Shi of grain reserve, half a million soldiers, five prefectures and thirty thousand Li of land, eighty-eight million households, and three major vassal states¡­ Every aspect of this information sends shivers down the spine of anyone who hears it. People¡¯s perception of Chu State has changed once again. The foundation of a hegemon and a powerful nation, a new player has joined the world¡¯s competition for supremacy. Chu State¡¯s strength has been officially recognized by the people, and Lu Yuan is considered a master who can compete with the likes of the Zhou, Liang, and other countries and is on par with the rulers of those great powers. After learning that Chu State possesses such strength, no country can ignore Chu State¡¯s existence. Chapter 720 - Chapter 720: Chapter 319: Chu State Dominates_3 Chapter 720: Chapter 319: Chu State Dominates_3 After harvesting a wave of Qi Luck, Lu Yuan finally achieved his goal. Fame. Yes, it¡¯s fame. In this era of great competition, hiding and disguising oneself will lead to nowhere. The mainstream of this world is striving for hegemony, defeating opponents, and annexing them. Under this tide, you need to proclaim your strength, let everyone know how powerful and scary you are, and make everyone respect and fear you. Only then will others hesitate to attack you and dare not act recklessly. When you send troops to conquer other countries, they will fear you and not dare to confront you head-on, and you can win the war without a fight. So after unifying Qingzhou, Liang country declared to the world that they had a million-strong army, showing their unparalleled power and ability to gain the benefits they currently hold. Neighboring Xu country also directly expanded its army by 300,000, proclaiming to the world that they are a tough bone to chew on, and they are powerful. You dare to cause trouble for me, be prepared to break all your teeth and go back empty-handed. Zhao country also expanded its army by 200,000 and moved their troops directly to the border between Zhao and Liang, challenging the world with a posture that says, ¡°come and fight.¡± Zhou country increased its army by 200,000, bringing their total number of standing troops to one million, intimidating the world with their ¡°million strong soldiers.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À0.§ã¦Ï Ning country also expanded its navy to control the river, telling the people of Jiangbei that with this navy, they cannot advance southward. These actions of the dominating countries all display their military power, bullying the weak with naked barbaric actions. Under this atmosphere, the strategy of building high walls, storing large supplies of food, and slowly claiming the throne is not popular. If you don¡¯t show your reputation and demonstrate your strength, people will only think you are weak and vulnerable, and then they will send troops to conquer, plunder your people, occupy your land, and expand their power. Only by showing your sharp teeth can you deter others, making them hesitant and unwilling to act rashly. The most prominent example of this is from when Lu Yuan conquered the southwestern barbarians. The neighboring countries were eager to take advantage of the chaos and sent troops to attack and directly divide Chu State. However, once the news of Zhou Qing becoming an Inborn Grandmaster and Huang Xuan joining the Chu State spread, everyone realized that the Chu country had gained the help of two Inborn Grandmasters. And then, Lu Yuan urgently expanded the army within the country, recruiting more than 100,000 standing soldiers in one breath. These two incidents shook outsiders and stopped them from marching south. This example, which happened only two years ago, left a profound impression on Lu Yuan. So this time after the court meeting, he specifically held a grand banquet to celebrate and announce to the world the official rise of Chu State. He also used these achievements to show the world that Chu State is not something to be trampled upon. If you want to mess with Chu State, be prepared to break all your teeth. Of course. The plan is also to promote the reputation, attract a wave of popular Qi Luck. As well as using this reputation to win people¡¯s hearts and recruit talented people. A good reputation can have a significant impact. For example, if there were any Innate Sects in the Chu State, Lu Yuan would invite their Inborn Grandmasters to join Chu State. But without a doubt, he would be rejected 100%. Inborn Grandmasters are extremely arrogant. Even if they want to join a worldly dynasty, they would choose the dominating countries to seek wealth and glory and achieve their ambitions. Chu State was once powerful and considered a great country, but it was still a step behind those dominating countries. It was still not considered one of the heroes¡¯ resting places. But now, the position and reputation of Chu State is completely different as it has joined the ranks of the dominating countries. Yue Country, as a dominating country in the world, had attracted many Innate Sects or Inborn Grandmasters like Guanhai Villa, Nine River Sword Sect, Nanhai Sect, White Phoenix Temple, Lu Yuan, and others to join the Yue Country¡¯s court after proclaiming their invitation to the world. Never mind the intentions Lu Yuan and others had in joining Yue Country. The fact that Yue Country could make Innate Sects or Inborn Grandmasters join was enough to make people look up to them. Zhou Country in the north was no different. After Lu Yuan successively killed two Pillar State Grand Generals, they only needed to make a slight invitation within the country, and the vacancies were immediately filled. Moreover, they even attracted three additional Inborn Grandmasters to serve under them. Zhou and Yue countries being able to easily recruit Inborn Grandmasters relied on their Supreme Dominator strength and the reputation they had in the world. This power, reputation, and status were something the original Chu State lacked, so they were not qualified to recruit Inborn Grandmasters. At most, they were able to gain control over White Phoenix Temple and obtain Jihui, who was worried about the inheritance of the sect and could only live for another three to five years. But this was just an exception and hardly counts. If Jihui hadn¡¯t suffered numerous injuries and had exhausted a lot of his lifespan, it is uncertain whether he would have chosen to join Chu State back then. More likely, he would have chosen to lead the White Phoenix Temple north, directly surrendering to Zhou Country, and selling himself for a good price. He would not have chosen Chu State, a remote country. With a choice between dominating countries, why would you pick a small state? The logic is straightforward, and there¡¯s nothing complicated about it. On the contrary, when the news that Huang Xuan joined Lu Yuan and Chu State spread, people were shocked and couldn¡¯t understand why such an Immortal Method expert would join a small Chu State. After thinking about it left and right, they could only attribute it to the charm of Chu King and the Battle God¡¯s handsome demeanor, which attracted talented scholars and amazed people. But after the astonishment, that was it. Huang Xuan had a mental problem and impulsively joined Chu State. Other Inborn Grandmasters didn¡¯t have problems, and with so many other choices, they would not choose Chu State. With one dominating title, Chu State was far behind those dominating countries in recruiting talents and couldn¡¯t catch up. But now, with Lu Yuan¡¯s plan and the widespread fame of Chu State, this dominating title has finally been made up for. ¡°From now on, my Chu Country also has the qualification to recruit Inborn Grandmasters. When the heroes of the world choose their residence, Great Chu will also be one of the choices.¡± In the royal palace, Lu Yuan read the information sent back from various countries after the court meeting, looking at the astonishing news on the papers. He couldn¡¯t help but feel excited. Chapter 721 - Chapter 721: Chapter 320: Envoy from Zhou Country Chapter 721: Chapter 320: Envoy from Zhou Country Under the influence of the Imperial City Authority, the news of Chu State¡¯s dominance quickly spread throughout the Nine Provinces. However, even though this move made everyone in the world aware of Chu State¡¯s strength, the talented and fierce generals that Lu Yuan was hoping for did not appear. Upon reflection, it made sense. Although Chu State had initially established its hegemony, it had only just stepped over the threshold. In the world of the Nine Provinces, there are still many forces stronger than Chu State. Even Ning Country, without considering Inborn Grandmasters, is still stronger than Chu State in terms of surface strength. Chu State might have just barely entered the top ten in the world¡¯s choice, or ranked outside the top ten. Unless they were desperate or forced to do so, it¡¯s highly unlikely that any Inborn Grandmasters would join Chu State. Fortunately, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t hold out too much hope for this. His real goal was not to have those Inborn Grandmasters come to join him voluntarily. What he wanted by confirming his hegemoic status was to have the strength to recruit Inborn Grandmasters from the territories of other countries he would conquer in the future. Similar to how Pre-Yue and Zhou Country had actively invited Jianghu Grandmasters from within their own countries to join, Chu State would do the same when it came across suitable candidates in the future. For example, the Liuyang Sect in Lu Yuan¡¯s hometown of Yuzhang Prefecture when he first traveled through time. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã? Up till now, the Liuyang Sect in Ning Country Territory has remained independent, even after Jianghu Sects like White Phoenix Temple and Nine River Sword Sect had fully integrated with their respective countries. Liuyang Sect remains the only Innate Great Sect in Yangzhou, dominating the martial arts world. Yin Huixuan, the leader of Liuyang Sect, ranks third among Inborn Second-level Grandmasters in Yangzhou, following only Lu Yuan and Ning Country¡¯s Emperor Shen Qiu. Without either Lu Yuan or his avatar Huang Xuan taking action, Yin Huixuan is undoubtedly the number one person in Yangzhou. For such a strong expert, Lu Yuan naturally coveted and wished to recruit. He believed that Shen Qiu of Ning Country also had the same idea. However, although Ning Country had cultivated six Inborn experts in recent years, Shen Qiu still had no confidence in defeating Yin Huixuan and keeping him around, even with six Inborn experts on his side. As a result, despite extreme dissatisfaction, Ning Country could only accept Liuyang Sect¡¯s independent status, remaining detached from the Jianghu world. But what Ning Country couldn¡¯t do, Chu State could. Both Lu Yuan himself and his Avatar Huang Xuan had the confidence to defeat Yin Huixuan. If Lu Yuan were to personally take action, he even had a great chance of killing Yin Huixuan on the spot. With both the Avatar and Lu Yuan himself taking action, Yin Huixuan¡¯s death would be certain. With this power, as long as they could conquer Yuzhang Prefecture, Lu Yuan had absolute confidence in making Liuyang Sect submit and having Yin Huixuan serve him. In fact, with Lu Yuan¡¯s current strength, he could eliminate anyone in the Nine Provinces, except for those in the Immortal Sects. Even Ning Country was not out of reach. As long as Lu Yuan wanted, he could now sneak into Jinling City, assassinate Shen Qiu and directly slay this Heavenly Son of Ning Country. However, killing him didn¡¯t mean that Lu Yuan could smoothly swallow the entire Ning Country. Ruling the world can¡¯t be achieved by just one person. Lu Yuan needed experts to help him suppress the territories, officials to help him govern the territories, and armies to help him maintain order. Among these, the officials and troops may be easier to solve, but cultivating top-level experts like Inborn Grandmasters isn¡¯t that easy. Chu State now has six Inborn Grandmasters, but Jihui, one of them, is already on his last breath and may die tomorrow. So, in reality, Chu State only has five Inborn Grandmasters at its disposal. But Chu State has to defend five provinces¡¯ worth of territory. Averaging it out, that¡¯s just one Inborn expert per province, barely meeting their needs. Powers such as Zhou Country and Liang Country, each has more than ten Inborn Grandmasters, have an abundance of top-level experts, which is why they can easily suppress numerous provinces and even more than a dozen territories. Chu State does not have this foundation, and trying to swallow more than it can chew might lead to a territory like Ning Country that, despite being conquered, wouldn¡¯t have enough people to safeguard it. If it cannot stabilize its territory, the rebellious coastal aristocratic families will cause chaos everywhere. Four or five Inborn Grandmaster assassins would be enough to turn the entire Chu State upside down, making it completely unrestful. When the territory expands but the number of defenders remains insufficient, Chu State¡¯s entire defensive line will be full of leaks, allowing outsiders to easily find a weak spot and swarm in, tearing Chu State to shreds. This is precisely why Lu Yuan has resisted the temptation to strike, even though there are many forces surrounding Chu State that he could potentially consume, before gaining his own strength and foundation. In the southwest region, he had enfeoffed three vassal states to act as barriers, monitoring and dealing with the Yi countries, as well as Su and Song countries. Su Country was previously in political turmoil, with its Altars of Soil and Grain in chaos and showing signs of a collapsing nation. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t take any action, but simply took the opportunity to gather some refugees from Su Country and make a fortune by trading grain, reaping some benefits. Nanhai Country, which had no Inborn Grandmasters, was still jumping between Chu State and Ning Country, challenging Lu Yuan¡¯s bottom line. But Lu Yuan did not take any action. Because after conquering Nanhai Country, he wouldn¡¯t have sufficient strength to defend it. It was better to use it as a buffer, making the Three Nations wary of one another and hesitant to make the first move. Chapter 722 - Chapter 722: Chapter 320: Envoy from Zhou Country_2 Chapter 722: Chapter 320: Envoy from Zhou Country_2 In the past two years, the only conquest Lu Yuan had accomplished was the recent capture of Hegu County. This was because Hegu County was far away on the plateau, surrounded by mountains and forests, forming a natural barrier. The only passage for communication with the outside world was through Xichuan County. With Huang Xuan guarding Xichuan County and as long as his Avatar was there, as long as Xichuan County didn¡¯t fall, the outside world would never be able to reach Hegu County, making this place absolutely safe. By doing the math, among the five counties of the Chu State, each county was guarded by at least one Inborn Grandmaster, and they could mobilize an army of more than 100,000 at any time, making their safety absolutely guaranteed. Lu Yuan¡¯s expansion was cautious, never surpassing his capabilities. Of course. Being cautious did not mean that he truly gave up on Ning Country and other countries like Su and Song. He was still intent on conquering Ning Country. And he hadn¡¯t planned to abandon Su, Song, and other countries either. However, the time for the complete unification of Yangzhou, through the annexation of these countries, needed to be delayed a little bit more. Lu Yuan planned to wait a few more years until his two sons reached adulthood and broke through the Inborn Realm. In eight or nine years, his cultivation would take another step forward, condensing two energies and possessing an overwhelmingly powerful force to dominate the world. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï In eight or nine years, he would refine a few more Avatars, allowing Chu State¡¯s Inborn Combat Power to break through the big barrier of ten people. Once he had accumulated enough power, Lu Yuan would have absolute certainty to sweep over the whole of Yangzhou in one fell swoop. By then, those who submit will prosper, and those who resist will perish. Whether it was the Coastal Aristocratic Family or Su Xuange, Xie Ning, or even the small countries in the southwest, all those who did not submit would face destruction. That time is not far away. Lu Yuan had been fighting in this world for more than twenty years, and with less than a decade left to wait, he could be patient. Even the unification of the entire Nine Provinces would only be a matter of time for him. As the only being with longevity in The Age of Dharma Decline, Lu Yuan had too many advantages, so much so that he didn¡¯t need to do much; as long as he persevered, outliving the cultivators and Inborn Grandmasters, he could dominate the world. The reason he was so painstakingly involved in the struggle for supremacy was merely to take advantage of the Heavenly and Earthly Aura that had not yet been completely depleted, thus increasing his share of Qi Luck by a bit more. What he had always been competing for was Spiritual Energy, and the world was just an addition. ¡­ ¡°However, it¡¯s time to start refining the second Yellow Turban Strongman.¡± In the silent and empty palace, Lu Yuan looked at the neatly arranged pile of spiritual materials in front of him, all collected by Chu State over the years ¨C Different Species Sheds. He took a deep breath, and a hint of a smile appeared in his eyes. More than four years after the last time he extracted his divine thoughts to create an Avatar and diligently cultivating the Taiping Dao Book every day, Lu Yuan had finally accumulated enough strength to refine the second Avatar. Chu State would soon welcome another Inborn Combat Power. Over there in Qianzhong County, after Jihui¡¯s passing, someone was finally able to fill the void. ¡°With an Avatar equivalent to the Inborn Second Realm, it¡¯s enough to deter those countries and others with ulterior motives. With that, Huang Xuan should be able to leave his post and no longer have to suppress the southwestern states; he can be assigned elsewhere.¡± Lu Yuan picked up a piece of the Different Species Shed, urged his magical power to refine the spiritual materials skillfully, and thought in his heart. In recent years, Jihui of Qianzhong County had always been dormant in a healing coma and had never shown his face in public. While many people knew that an Inborn Grandmaster from the White Phoenix Temple was guarding Qianzhong County, providing a strong top-level combat force, However, many also knew that Jihui was seriously injured and usually couldn¡¯t make a move, only able to give his all when desperately fighting. Thus, his deterrence as an Inborn Grandmaster wasn¡¯t as strong as that of a normal Grandmaster. If it weren¡¯t for the three allied countries in the southwest that supported Qianzhong County, and Dongting County bordering Qianzhong to provide reinforcements at any time, Qianzhong County would not be as peaceful as it is now. But even so, to maintain the balance in the southwest region, Lu Yuan had to let Huang Xuan occasionally patrol the south of Xichuan County, using this Inborn Second Realm expert to deter the many forces in the southwestern region and prevent their ambitious schemes. It was precisely because Huang Xuan was there that the balance in the southwest region could be maintained. Those three allied countries remained obedient and didn¡¯t dare to make any small moves. However, as a result, Huang Xuan was dragged into the southwest, unable to leave Xichuan County, effectively restricting his hands and feet. Huang Xuan¡¯s involvement in the southwest even meant that he sometimes couldn¡¯t attend to the affairs of both Xichuan and Hegu counties due to distraction. This undoubtedly contradicted Lu Yuan¡¯s original arrangement. In his original concept, Huang Xuan, the Inborn Second Realm expert, was responsible for the defensive line and area of Xichuan, Hegu, and the future conquest of Hanzhong counties. Huang Xuan would consolidate Chu State¡¯s three northwestern counties, becoming a great general who commanded a region in preparation for the future attack on Zhou Country. Huang Xuan¡¯s current involvement in the southwest affairs had severely disrupted Lu Yuan¡¯s plans. Therefore, to free him from that responsibility, a second person with enough power to deter various forces in the southwest region and maintain Chu State¡¯s interests there had to be found. Looking over Chu State, the only ones who had that ability were Lu Yuan and Huang Xuan. But as the ruler of Chu State, in charge of the overall situation and guarding the capital, Lu Yuan could not possibly be stationed in the southwest. Chapter 723 - Chapter 723: Chapter 320: Envoy from Zhou Country_3 Chapter 723: Chapter 320: Envoy from Zhou Country_3 Therefore, the best solution was to cultivate another avatar and send him to Qianzhong County. This avatar would be responsible for governing a county and three nations in the southwest that belonged to Chu State, assisting Lu Yuan in managing the entire region. ¡°It should take about half a month to refine this avatar, right?¡± After putting down the spiritual material that had been thoroughly refined in his hand, Lu Yuan glanced at the half-finished materials and estimated the specific timeframe. Taking half a month could barely be considered a major project. Picking up a new piece of spiritual material, he sighed, lamenting his laborious fate, and then continued to refine the material. ¡­ Time passed slowly. As Lu Yuan busied himself in seclusion, refining the Yellow Turban Warrior avatar, the world outside also underwent changes. Xiangyang Prefecture, Xicheng Mansion. At the border between Chu State and Zhou Country, the Han River flowed through Hanzhong Prefecture and headed eastward, entering the land of Xiangyang Prefecture. At this time, the Han River was surging. A fleet of ships came from the upstream and quickly left the territory of Hanzhong Prefecture, heading into Xicheng Mansion. ¡°Who are you?¡± At the border between Xicheng Mansion and Hanzhong Prefecture, there was a checkpoint guarding this crucial waterway, vigilantly watching out for people coming from Hanzhong Prefecture. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Simultaneously, this checkpoint was also responsible for collecting entry taxes where people came from Zhou Country to Chu State. This checkpoint alone contributed over a hundred thousand silver tales to Chu State in taxes annually, making it a crucial source of revenue. As a result, there were not only a thousand defenders deployed by the prefecture here, but a separate naval detachment was also stationed to ensure the safety of the waterways. At this moment, this patrolling naval fleet quickly discovered the incoming fleet from Hanzhong and immediately blocked them. Confronted with the naval blockade, the Hanzhong fleet didn¡¯t try to force their way through but cooperatively stopped. When the naval soldiers approached and boarded the leading flagship of the fleet, a group of people was already waiting for them. The leader was an official dressed in red robes who quickly greeted them with a smile, ¡°I am Messenger from Zhou Country, on a special trip to Chu State. Here is my official document¡­¡± As negotiations took place, news of Zhou Country¡¯s arrival was quickly reported back to Baling with a swift boat. Half a month later¡­ Lu Yuan, filled with fatigue, walked out of the main hall where he had been secluded. Behind him was a man in a green robe, exuding an otherworldly aura that instantly revealed his extraordinary nature. This was the second Yellow Turban Warrior avatar that Lu Yuan had spent half a month refining and had used a significant amount of his divine sense to create. He named this avatar Qingyunzi. Yes, this name was more in line with the identity of a Daoist and had a greater sense of the Dao. It was also more in line with the abilities Lu Yuan had given this avatar. Like Huang Xuan, Qingyunzi¡¯s strength was still equivalent to an Inborn Second Realm martial artist. However, unlike Huang Xuan, Qingyunzi¡¯s unique Steel Bone Iron Flesh Body, and his ability to gather qi into blades were accompanied by a third ability ¨C the Talisman Sword Technique. If Huang Xuan¡¯s Steel Bone Iron Flesh, gathering of qi into blades, and immense strength were combined, he would ultimately form an unstoppable close-combat mage. On the other hand, with his Steel Bone Iron Flesh, ability to gather qi into blades, and Talisman Sword Technique, Qingyunzi¡¯s assigned role was that of a highly defensive long-range mage. The Steel Bone Iron Flesh granted Qingyunzi immense vitality and protection, the ability to gather qi into blades allowed him to have some close-combat capabilities, and the Talisman Sword Technique enabled him to control talisman swords and use them to kill enemies from a hundred feet away. Huang Xuan¡¯s abilities leaned towards martial artists who had achieved an earthly realm, while Qingyunzi was more akin to a pure Jianxiu (Sword Cultivator). Their respective roles were vastly different. Although Huang Xuan had superior survivability, Qingyunzi¡¯s offensive power was much greater. This was a specific choice Lu Yuan had made based on the situation in the southwest. If the previous Huang Xuan, despite his great strength, had to kill a First Realm Grandmaster, there might still have been the possibility of a slip-up. In contrast, with the proficient and deadly Qingyunzi, who could engage in both close combat and long-range attacks, and possessed the Talisman Sword Technique, dealing with ordinary First Realm martial artists would make him an absolute terrifying killing machine. In any one-on-one scenario, as long as one faced Qingyunzi, Lu Yuan believed that there wouldn¡¯t be a single Inborn Grandmaster in the southwest capable of escaping alive. A Sword Cultivator with an absolute advantage, especially skilled in slaughter, was the guardian Lu Yuan had prepared for the southwest. ¡°With Qingyunzi around, the southwest will be completely worry-free.¡± Fighting back exhaustion, Lu Yuan thought joyfully. With the addition of a new top-tier battle power, Chu State¡¯s defenses were further strengthened, bringing him immense delight. Feeling as if a huge weight had been lifted from his chest, his fatigue transformed into sheer tiredness, making Lu Yuan want to sleep soundly and recuperate. However, just as he was about to arrange for someone to take Qingyunzi to the palace and then get some rest himself, a eunuch outside the palace saw Lu Yuan and hurriedly rushed over. ¡°Your Majesty, a messenger from Zhou Country has arrived and wishes to see you.¡± The personal eunuch bowed respectfully and said, ¡°The Right Prime Minister is now hosting them and has sent a message back to the palace, stating that Zhou Country has a grave matter to discuss and that he cannot make the decision. Your Majesty, please come and discuss the matter.¡± Upon hearing the eunuch¡¯s words, Lu Yuan¡¯s brows furrowed. ¡°Zhou Country?¡± He was somewhat puzzled, ignorant of the reason for Zhou Country suddenly sending an envoy. However, considering that even Sun Siwen, the Right Prime Minister, said he was unable to make a decision and that the matter was of great importance, Lu Yuan knew he had to see for himself. After giving it some thought and looking at the eunuch, Lu Yuan said, ¡°Send a message to the Right Prime Minister and tell him to bring the envoy from Zhou Country to the Hall of Qianming to wait.¡± Having said that, he glanced at his slightly dirty clothes. After several days of refining spiritual materials without rest, he had hardly had time to clean himself and was now rather smelly. Being in the early Qi Realm, Lu Yuan was still far from having a perfect Jade Bone and was susceptible to dirt and grime. At this moment, however, he still had to eat, bathe, and change. Furthermore, the exhaustion he had been experiencing for days also needed to be alleviated. And so, he said, ¡°Additionally, prepare some hot water and clothes for me. I need to bathe and change.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± The personal eunuch agreed and then hurriedly retreated to make the necessary arrangements. Chapter 724 - Chapter 724: Chapter 321 Deceive the Heaven and Cross the Sea Chapter 724: Chapter 321 Deceive the Heaven and Cross the Sea Half an hour later, after Lu Yuan had bathed, changed clothes, and rested briefly, he set out for Qianyang Hall. By the time he arrived, Sun Siwen and the envoy from Chu State had been waiting for quite a while. ¡°Greetings to the king.¡± ¡°Diplomat Su Xun pays his respects to the King of Chu.¡± When the two men saw Lu Yuan¡¯s arrival, they hurriedly paid their respects. Lu Yuan walked to the throne and sat down. Then he looked down and swept his gaze over the two people, particularly examining the Chu State envoy for a moment before asking, ¡°What brings the Zhou envoy to Chu State?¡± Su Xun appeared like a delicate scholar, with a handsome and graceful presence that gave people a refreshing feeling. After hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s question, Su Xun said frankly, ¡°In recent years, my country has been plagued by wars, causing many of our able-bodied young men to serve as soldiers rather than contribute to production. Time has passed, and we are now facing a shortage of food.¡± ¡°We have heard that the Chu State is known for its abundance of food, and in recent years, has continually sold grain to neighboring countries, providing relief to many. Thus, our monarch has sent me to Baling to request purchasing food and fodder to alleviate the difficulties in our nation.¡± ¡°Buying grain?¡± After hearing Su Xun¡¯s purpose, Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes flickered, and he glanced at Sun Siwen. He then looked back at Su Xun and immediately understood in his heart. No wonder his good friend had said that he himself could not decide on this matter and would let Lu Yuan take control of it. Indeed, buying grain from Chu State was an important matter of state. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï However, in recent years, Chu State had been selling grain to other countries, and Lu Yuan had delegated the matter to his cabinet ministers like Sun Siwen. He only paid attention to the results without interfering personally. While Chu State could sell grain to Su State, Song State, three southwestern vassal states, and even Yi states like Dali and Nanzhao, it could not, under any circumstances, sell to Zhou Country. The reason was simple. It was because Lu Yuan had already told his close ministers like Sun Siwen that the next strategic target for Chu State would be focused on the Hanzhong region of Zhou Country. It was just that there hadn¡¯t been an opportunity yet, and Chu State needed time to recuperate. So they had not yet taken action against Hanzhong. How could Sun Siwen, knowing Chu State¡¯s next strategic target, possibly sell Chu State¡¯s grain to the future enemy and help them grow stronger? Therefore, when the Zhou Country sought to buy grain, Sun Siwen and other cabinet ministers did not dare to decide on their own, so they had to consult Lu Yuan, the King of Chu, for his decision. After understanding all this, Lu Yuan¡¯s thoughts raced through his mind, considering various factors. Ultimately, his gaze flashed as he looked at Su Xun and said with a smile, ¡°Since several years ago, my Great Chu has been selling grain to countries around the world, doing business with everyone. If Zhou Country is willing to do business with Chu State, I am more than happy to oblige.¡± ¡°However, I would like to know how much grain the envoy wishes to purchase, so that I can prepare accordingly and avoid disappointing Zhou Country.¡± Upon hearing this, Su Xun was overjoyed and quickly bowed, saying, ¡°Thank you for your generosity, King of Chu. I report to the king that my Zhou Country only wishes to buy 10 million units of grain. It is said that the Great Chu has stockpiled 40 million units of grain, so this amount should not cause any difficulties.¡± After Chu State became top-ranked, people marveled at various aspects: Chu State¡¯s population size, military strength, and vast territory. Naturally, some were amazed at the wealth and abundance of grain in Chu State. Among them, Zhou Country was most concerned about the latter. Due to the wars, they were gradually running out of grain and desperately needed to buy food and fodder from other countries to make up for the shortage in their own country. However, to the north of Zhou Country was their mortal enemy, Wei Country. To the east, the Liang Country was eyeing them, ready to advance westward at any time and annex the Henan and Nanyang regions of Zhou Country. To the west, there was the small and barren Western Liang Country, which also lacked grain. None of these three could sell grain to Zhou Country. So, looking around, the only country with enough grain and willing to sell it was Chu State. Therefore, when the news of Chu State¡¯s 40 million units of stored grain spread, the monarch and ministers of Zhou Country immediately decided, after deliberation, to send an envoy to Chu State to buy grain. Moreover, seizing the opportunity of buying grain, they tactfully tested Chu State¡¯s intentions to see if this newly rising southern power had any ill intentions towards Zhou Country. At this point, Zhou Country had enemies on three sides. If Chu State joined in and acted against Zhou Country, it would be disastrous news. In particular, the garrison in Hanzhong County, the southern territory of Zhou Country, had been reduced by more than half, leaving only 50,000 soldiers to guard the area, making the defense vulnerable. If Chu State sent troops northward at this time, Zhou Country¡¯s strength would be insufficient to resist, and Hanzhong County would be lost as a result. So, in order to prevent such an occurrence, it was necessary to test Chu State¡¯s intentions while buying grain. If Chu State indeed harbored malicious intent towards Zhou Country, they would never sell grain to Zhou Country to aid their enemy at this critical juncture. If that were the case, Su Xun would have to report to the Heavenly Son upon his return, urging him to strengthen the defense of Hanzhong in preparation for Chu State¡¯s attack. If, however, Chu State did not harbor any ill intentions toward Zhou Country, things would be even better. With the 10 million units of grain, if used sparingly, it could sustain a million-strong frontline army and greatly alleviate the pressure on the country¡¯s food supplies. By now, the Snow Plains Nomads on their southwestern border, who have been continuously invading for several years, had become exhausted, suffered heavy casualties, and were significantly weakened. According to the calculations by the many wise ministers in Zhou Country¡¯s court, the nomads could only hold out for two more years at most before they would collapse completely. Chapter 725 - Chapter 725: Chapter 321: Hiding the Sky and Crossing the Sea_2 Chapter 725: Chapter 321: Hiding the Sky and Crossing the Sea_2 When that time came, Zhou Country could decisively defeat those barbarians and then sweep southward, attacking the snowy wilderness. Although Zhou Country had little interest in the barren lands of the snowy plains. But just like Chu State in recent years, they also sent troops to attack the snowy plains, establishing a Hegu County in the process. In some areas of the snowy plains with dense rivers and lakes, it is quite suitable for reclamation and agriculture. If they can be occupied, it would not be a problem to establish three to five counties. Moreover, there are many fertile pastures in the snowy plains. Once occupied, Zhou Country could have countless excellent horse farms, which is another great advantage. These two benefits are enough to entice Zhou Country. Therefore, even though the war with the Snow Plains Nomads has been extremely difficult, Zhou Country has persisted without any concessions or intentions for peace in these years. Even not long ago, when the Snow Plains Nomads sent envoys to seek peace, Zhou Country directly refused, not even agreeing to the opposing party¡¯s conditions. They had endured so much difficulty previously. At this point, when victory is within reach, how could Zhou Country give up without a fight? As long as they can obtain the two benefits mentioned above, all the losses suffered by Zhou Country due to the war in recent years can be instantly compensated. Not only compensation, but if they can expand their territory by three to five counties, obtain countless excellent horse farms, and make millions of barbarians serve them, Zhou Country¡¯s national power could increase by half, instantly approaching the Liang Country that has already unified Qingzhou. With such great benefits at hand, and victory about to arrive, Zhou Country must continue fighting even if it means selling their possessions. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? However, the reality is that Zhou Country is short of grain. In order to wage this war and cope with the pressure from three sides, Zhou Country mobilized over two million troops, including civilian workers, and is already exhausted. Reliance on domestic savings and production can no longer sustain such a huge army. Therefore, to keep the war going, they had to seek help from abroad. That is the task of Su Xun¡¯s visit to Chu State this time. It concerns the rise and fall of the country; no matter how much it costs, he must do everything he can to facilitate it. ¡®Fortunately, it seems that King of Chu has no hostility towards Zhou Country, which is a great blessing. This mission may be a complete success.¡¯ Su Xun thought about many things in his heart, and couldn¡¯t help but feel slightly invigorated. However, when it comes to the affairs of state, one cannot be too careful. Therefore, even though the King of Chu¡¯s attitude seemed very friendly, he did not let his guard down. Instead, he continued to observe and test cautiously, not taking the situation lightly. After this series of tests, the two parties finally reached a consensus. Lu Yuan looked down at Su Xun, who had agreed on terms with him, and laughed, ¡°Great Chu will sell 10,000 stones of grain to Zhou Country at the price of six coins per catty. The delivery date will be set three months later, at the border between the two countries. After both parties exchange the grain and cash, the transaction will be completed. What does the Messenger think?¡± Su Xun respectfully saluted, ¡°As a Diplomat, I have no objection and will act as the King of Chu directs.¡± Lu Yuan laughed, ¡°Then let¡¯s settle on this in the end.¡± With that, the preliminary consensus on the multi-million stone grain trade was finalized. The remaining specific details were to be further negotiated between the ministers of the court and the Zhou Country¡¯s diplomatic delegation. There was no need for Lu Yuan, the King of Chu, to be concerned with such matters. Having achieved his goal, Su Xun took the opportunity to leave. Sun Siwen, however, stayed behind. After everyone had left, this friend looked at Lu Yuan, slightly worried, ¡°Your Majesty, when we previously made plans, we resolved to take our next steps and plot to take Hanzhong. Now that Your Majesty is selling ten million stones of grain to Zhou Country, once they receive this batch of grain, they will immediately resolve their food shortage and no longer be troubled by the need for military supplies. At that time, Zhou Country will have a well-trained and well-fed army, and it will not be easy for us to attack them.¡± Lu Yuan glanced at Sun Siwen and sighed, ¡°I know all too well that this move is to aid the enemy. However, the Zhou Country has come to buy grain, but they are also testing us.¡± Ever since Great Chu declared hegemony over other countries, the surrounding countries have been wary of us, haven¡¯t they? Now, Zhou Country faces enemies on three fronts, with war raging everywhere. Only their southern border with our Chu State remains relatively peaceful and secure. Under such circumstances, how could Zhou Country not be wary of us? They may be worried that we will maintain peace with them on the surface, but secretly amass arms and prepare to ambush them. So if we don¡¯t sell grain today, I¡¯m afraid the news from Zhou Country¡¯s diplomatic delegation would immediately be sent back to Zhou Country, prompting them to be on guard. At that time, Zhou Country will be vigilant and reinforce their troops in Hanzhong. It will be ten or a hundred times more difficult for Chu State to attack them than it is now.¡± With the situation as it is, what can be done! What can be done!¡± Lu Yuan had been through countless battles and calculations over the years since he entered the world. Both his martial arts and Immortal Method have reached major success. His mind and perception have sharpened considerably compared to ordinary people after several transformations. Previously, Su Xun thought he was hiding his intentions well, but as they conversed and observed each other¡¯s expressions, Lu Yuan had already seen through him. It was precisely because of this that Lu Yuan agreed to sell grain with the intention of fighting fire with fire. After hearing his analysis, Sun Siwen couldn¡¯t help but sigh with a hint of unwillingness. ¡°Is there no other way to deal with Hanzhong?¡± Capturing Hanzhong, expanding territory, and improving Chu State¡¯s northwest defense are all matters of vital importance to the state. If Hanzhong is not captured, the Xichuan and Xiangyang regions of Chu will always be under threat from Hanzhong, keeping a large number of troops and horses bogged down in these two regions, making it difficult for Chu State to muster more strength to expand in other directions. This matter concerns the destiny of Chu State, and Sun Siwen naturally does not want to give up on the verge of success. Chapter 726 - Chapter 726: Chapter 321: Deceive the Heaven and Cross the Sea_3 Chapter 726: Chapter 321: Deceive the Heaven and Cross the Sea_3 However, Lu Yuan was not so pessimistic about this. Looking at the expression of his good friend, he couldn¡¯t help but smile, ¡°The matter of Hanzhong isn¡¯t urgent at the moment. Even if we sell grain to Zhou Country right now, there are still a lot of possibilities. Perhaps, through this opportunity of selling grain, we may come up with better strategies to conquer Hanzhong¡­¡± Attacking Hanzhong had always been Lu Yuan¡¯s planned strategy, so he naturally couldn¡¯t give it up easily. Especially now, since he had refined Qingyunzi as a replacement for Huang Xuan to invade the Southwest, he was even more determined. Indeed, selling grain to Zhou Country at this moment is helping the enemy. However, Chu State can take advantage of this opportunity to transfer troops from various places and mix the soldiers for the conquest of China in the grain transportation team, thus deceiving the Zhou People and transporting the troops to the border of Zhou Chu. When the time comes, they can take advantage of the grain transaction to launch a direct attack on Hanzhong, which is not impossible. If this battle succeeds, not only will the grain sold to Zhou People be returned to Chu State, but the silver used by Zhou People to buy grain will also become Chu State¡¯s spoils of war, further enriching Chu State¡¯s treasury. This is called achieving both goals, killing two birds with one stone, and having a great opportunity. Of course, to accomplish this, it is necessary to consider how to mix troops with the civilian workers transporting grain, how to deceive Zhou People, and how to make Zhou People relax their vigilance and not station a large number of soldiers in Hanzhong during the grain transaction¡­ All these issues need to be considered and resolved. Lu Yuan had only thought of this deceptive scheme temporarily, and he had no idea whether it could be implemented or how effective it would be after use. Any plan needs the right timing, suitable location, and support from the people. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? He hasn¡¯t seen this opportunity yet. ¡°But even if we launch the final attack and Zhou People are prepared in Hanzhong, the grain and silver used by Zhou People to buy grain will eventually fall into the hands of my Chu State. That¡¯s for sure,¡± Lu Yuan said. Lu Yuan told Sun Siwen of his plan and then continued with a laugh, ¡°As for whether we can take Hanzhong in the end, it¡¯s just a matter of competing for strength, deploying our forces, and deciding the winner.¡± In his words, there was a sense of confidence and heroism. Chu State is now a hegemonic power, capable of mobilizing a million troops, enough to contend with any country in the world. This time, to conquer Hanzhong of Zhou Country, using strategy is just to minimize the losses in the battle. It does not mean that Chu State can¡¯t win against Zhou Country without clever strategy. Even if their scheme is exposed by Zhou Country, Lu Yuan can lead three hundred thousand soldiers to the north and fight them in Hanzhong. Since his debut, he has fought more than a hundred battles, killing four innate experts, destroying one nation, subduing three nations, and defeating millions of enemies, expanding Chu territory by tens of thousands of miles. His military achievements are indeed outstanding. Even the Zhou Country he is planning now was once a defeated opponent. Facing such an enemy, even if they are powerful, it is an exaggeration to say that Lu Yuan fears them. As expected. Hearing Lu Yuan say this and being infected by his heroic spirit, Sun Siwen¡¯s original worries also dissipated a lot. In the end, he laughed and said, ¡°What the king said is true. While using clever strategies to fight for the country is important, the right path should not be neglected. If the strategy does not work in the end, it¡¯s simply a matter of facing the Battlefield and fighting for victory. For Chu State¡¯s new hegemony, there were many doubts from various countries, and it really needs a head-on battle to demonstrate their military power to the world and establish their hegemony.¡± The rise of a new hegemon always comes with the decline or failure of the old one. Chu State is now the newly rising hegemon, but it is just a hegemonic title, and whether it really has the strength of a hegemon is still a matter of doubt among people. After all, although Chu State has outstanding achievements, it has only dealt with small nations like Hanzhong and Xichuan in the past. Even when dealing with the Southwest Yi country, it was just fighting Barbarians. Defeating these countries can only prove that Chu State has some strength, but it cannot prove that Chu State can truly compete with other hegemons. So, to prove this point, it is necessary to find a hegemonic country, fight them head-on, and then defeat them. And looking around, the only ones that meet this requirement are Zhou, Liang, and Ning ¨C the Three Nations. But among the Three Nations, Liang and Ning do not have any major war at the moment and can mobilize hundreds of thousands of troops for battle at any time. Chu State has little chance of victory against them. But Zhou Country is different. Zhou Country is currently fighting on three fronts, and most of its troops are tied up internally. If Chu State were to engage them now, Zhou Country would not be able to deploy more than 300,000 troops, with no more than 100,000 professional soldiers. On the other hand, Lu Yuan can mobilize 300,000 soldiers, with the support of civilian workers, a force of 500,000 to 600,000 is nothing to sneeze at. In terms of military strength, Lu Yuan has an absolute advantage. As for the innate experts, with him and Huang Xuan, even all the first-rate experts of Zhou Country combined would not be a match for the two of them. Other concerns, like money and supplies, are even less of a worry. Chu State¡¯s coffers are full, while Zhou Country is already facing a grain shortage. If a real war breaks out, Zhou Country will be unable to sustain it. Military strength, top experts, and funds ¨C with these three advantages in hand for the battle, if Lu Yuan can¡¯t win against Zhou Country, his decades of fighting experience would be in vain, and he¡¯d be better off just killing himself on a piece of tofu. The only concern for this battle is the final gains and losses. However, regardless of the gains and losses, stepping on Zhou Country¡¯s face and securing Chu State¡¯s position as a hegemonic power has become an unquestionable national policy. This was clear to both Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen. When they had initially set Hanzhong as their target, they had already thought through this point and had no doubts. At this moment, a conversation between the monarch and his ministers only reconfirmed this point. After resolving their doubts, Sun Siwen had no more concerns and, upon receiving Lu Yuan¡¯s approval, led the ministers to further discuss the trade with Zhou Country¡¯s messenger. At the same time, The movement and transportation of food and fodder from various places, and the mingling of troops, soldiers, and civilian workers proceeded smoothly. A war aimed at conquering Zhou Country was quietly unfolding under the cover of a seemingly normal grain trade¡­ Chapter 727 - Chapter 727: Chapter 322: Eliminate the Die Together Chapter 727: Chapter 322: Eliminate the Die Together A war cannot be easily instigated with a snap of the fingers or a wag of the tongue. It requires the preparation of various aspects, such as the mobilization of troops and horses, accumulation of food and fodder, and the strategy of dispatching soldiers, before choosing the right timing and opportunity to launch the war according to the predetermined strategy. For the upcoming Battle of Hanzhong, Lu Yuan was responsible for the mobilization of troops, deployment strategies, and other aspects. As Chu State¡¯s highest military commander, he had to be involved in the approval and consent of the movement of troops within the country, both large and small. Therefore, the decision on which army to dispatch for the conquest of Hanzhong could only be made by Lu Yuan. First of all, the garrison troops originally stationed in Qianzhong County and Dongting County could not be mobilized. That is to say, the fourteen thousand soldiers and ten Forbidden Army units in Qianzhong County, as well as the local prefecture and county soldiers of both counties, were all reserved for defensive purposes. They were needed to deter the southwest and guard against Ning Country, so their important duties could not be easily disrupted. Besides the garrison forces in these two counties, Lu Yuan could only mobilize two units of the Forbidden Army and forty thousand soldiers from within Dongting County. As for Xiangyang and Xichuan Counties- There were a total of three Forbidden Armies stationed in Xichuan territory. Of these, two were stationed at Jianmenguan in the north of Xichuan County to defend against Zhou soldiers in Hanzhong County, and the remaining one was stationed in Jinguan City to serve as a mobile force, ready to assist Xichuan and Hegu Counties in quelling local rebellions. The Forbidden Army in Jinguan City must not be moved under any circumstances. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 They were the last insurance for the stability of the western borders of Chu State and could not be taken lightly. However, the two Forbidden Armies at Jianmenguan, originally stationed to guard against the north side of Zhou Country, could be utilized in the upcoming expedition, providing an additional forty thousand soldiers. In Xiangyang County, one Forbidden Army was stationed in Xiangyang City to guard against the threat from Zhou¡¯s north side, and another one was stationed on the east side of Xiangyang County to defend against the threat from Ning Country. The duties of these two Forbidden Armies were equally important, and they could not be mobilized. Fortunately, in the western part of Xiangyang County where it bordered Hanzhong County, there was also a Forbidden Army stationed in Xicheng to guard against Zhou¡¯s soldiers in Hanzhong County. This Forbidden Army could indeed be deployed. After such calculations, the forces that would participate in the conquest of Hanzhong included two Forbidden Armies each from Dongting and Xichuan Counties, and one from Xiangyang County. In total, five Forbidden Armies and a hundred thousand soldiers were available. Apart from Hegu County that had been recently pacified and needed a significant military presence, Xichuan and Xiangyang Counties could also each provide ten thousand county soldiers who were as strong as the Forbidden Army, obtaining support from an additional twenty thousand people. Furthermore, there was the naval force in Dongting Lake; since the Han River flowed through Hanzhong, ships could directly sail upstream and penetrate deep into Hanzhong territory. Excluding naval defenses on the rivers of Dongting and Xiangyang Counties, the navy could send another twenty thousand men to participate in the Hanzhong Expedition. After a thorough inventory check, without affecting various defensive lines and local stability, Chu State could deploy one hundred and twenty thousand land troops and twenty thousand naval forces, totaling one hundred and forty thousand troops for this war. Regarding innate experts, Huang Xuan from Xichuan County and Lu Yuan could also participate in the fighting. In comparison, the enemies to deal with included the fifty thousand Zhou soldiers stationed in Hanzhong County, as well as a Zhou Pillar State Grand General from the south. The gap in strength between the two sides was more than three to five times. Furthermore, the forces mentioned above were not Chu State¡¯s full strength. Lu Yuan had made up his mind that if the invasion failed and the Zhou discovered their weak spot, preventing a quick resolution of the conflict, the southwestern tributary states could also be enlisted to participate in the war. After several years of recovery, the allied nations of Kunhai, Chilih, and Jianchuan had restored some of their vitality. Under an extreme order of conscription, each nation could mobilize a hundred thousand civilian soldiers. Lu Yuan did not need them to exhaust their efforts; each nation could contribute fifty thousand soldiers and conscript one or two kings, providing Chu State with an additional one hundred and fifty thousand available soldiers and one or two Inborn Grandmasters. Once these tributary nations were weakened, the soliders stationed in Qianzhong County could be relaxed accordingly, and another unit of the Forbidden Army could be deployed, adding another twenty thousand soldiers. Through this small-scale mobilization, Chu State could now deploy more than three hundred thousand soldiers and three or more Inborn Grandmasters. Such strength, even for those world-dominant countries, was equivalent to a national war. If they lost, the consequences would be severely damaging, causing a decline in national fortune. During the previous Northern Expedition of Yue Country, Zhou had lost more than two hundred thousand soldiers and two Inborn experts. After that, they had spent six to seven years recuperating before they could barely recover. If Chu State were to lose the Hanzhong conquest and all their soldiers were left in Hanzhong- Their hegemonic ambitions would be heavily affected, and the national power would decline significantly. Without more than a decade of recuperation, Chu State could not expect a resurgence. Thus, for Chu State, this war could only result in victory and not defeat. Both Lu Yuan and Chu State could not afford the consequences of losing this battle. Fortunately, from the current situation, Zhou Country was simultaneously facing three major enemies and was already exhausted. Even if they exerted all their strength at this time, it would be difficult to mobilize forces comparable to those of Chu State to face this challenge from the new hegemonic power. In this war, Chu State held an absolute advantage and the chances of winning were very high. Especially now that Zhou Country had not yet realized that the war had quietly begun, Chu State¡¯s advantage was even greater. Chapter 728 - Chapter 728: Chapter 322 Eliminate or Die Together_2 Chapter 728: Chapter 322 Eliminate or Die Together_2 ¡­ While Sun Siwen and his companions were locked in a verbal battle with Zhou Country, Lu Yuan was also mobilizing troops with great urgency. The entire Chu State had silently stirred up the machinery of war before anyone else had even realized it. In the middle of this bustle, a piece of devastating news arrived. On the 20th day of the seventh month of the ninth year of Shenwu, a message came from Qianzhong County. Jihui, the protector of the nation who had been stationed in Qianzhong County for nearly four years, was not able to withstand his injuries and passed away three days prior in the White Phoenix Temple. The news reached Baling, shocking both the court and the public. The entire Chu State felt great sorrow. The departure of an Inborn Grandmaster represented a loss to the Chu State¡¯s highest level of military capability. This was none less than a corner of the Pillar Holding Up the Sky collapsing, causing an equivalent decline in Chu State¡¯s national strength. During the current stage of war preparations, in order to avoid startling the enemy, and also to conceal our strength, Lu Yuan temporarily hid Qingyunzi¡¯s existence. To outsiders, the number of Inborn Grandmasters in Chu State decreased from six to five. Although the number was still large, under the situation where Chu State has a vast territory that needed to be guarded by Inborn Grandmasters, it implied that the number of Inborn Grandmasters Chu State could use for external expansion has proportionally reduced. Chu State has five counties, and there are only five Inborn Grandmasters. According to the distribution of one Inborn Grandmaster per county, it¡¯s already a struggle to fill the gap. From this inference, after the loss of Jihui, there would not be any power for external expansion for a long time in Chu State before a new Inborn Grandmaster joins. Because without an Inborn Grandmaster to guard it, Chu State would not be able to defend any newly conquered territories. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? With that said, forcefully pursuing external expansion would only result in the wasteful depletion of national power, a completely thankless task. For other countries, this was undoubtedly good news. Therefore, when Lu Yuan sorrowfully declared a one-day mourning for JiHui¡¯s death. The news of Chu State losing an Inborn Grandmaster and the death of JiHui spread quickly to neighboring countries. The Southern countries of Southsea, Su Country, and Song Country, and even several Yi countries in the southwest, breathed a sigh of relief upon hearing the news. The loss of an Inborn Grandmaster meant Chu State lacked the power for external expansion in the short term. In the foreseeable future, they did not have to worry about being targeted by Chu State. Taking advantage of this rare peaceful time, they could quickly accumulate national power to prepare for Chu State¡¯s threat in the future. The Ning Country to the east did not need any further explanation. News from Jinling suggested that upon hearing of JiHui¡¯s death, the Jianwu Heavenly Son laughed out loud three times, dropping all state affairs and calling for a feast to celebrate with all his ministers. With Chu State becoming increasingly powerful and Inborn Grandmasters emerging one after another, especially proclaiming dominance recently, they were catching up with Ning Country. These events exerted an enormous pressure on Ning Country. The Jianwu Heavenly Son at one point even gave up his ambitions due to Chu State¡¯s rapid rise, no longer contemplating how to unify Yangzhou, instead setting up defenses in Ning Country¡¯s existing territories, anticipating the inevitable war of eastward conquest initiated by Chu State in the future. Even the Coastal Aristocratic Families were considering whether they could add the Lu Surname among the six families and seven clans, to become seven families and seven clans, sharing the rule of Yangzhou with Lu Yuan. Over the years, Lu Yuan has received lots of letters and invitations from coastal aristocratic families, and even many women from these families have been accepted into his palace, indicating the immense pressure he has put on these families. However, the message of JiHui¡¯s death is like a signal. Telling Shen Qiu, the coastal aristocratic families, and Ning Country that Chu State is not as they thought, constantly rising like the sun, climbing to glory, and irresistible. Chu State will also encounter setbacks, face troubles, and endure failures. Just like now. An Inborn Grandmaster has passed away due to illness. One of Chu State¡¯s top forces, out of only six, is gone. But Ning Country still has six Inborn Grandmasters. They managed to maintain the advantage over Chu State at the level of Inborn Grandmasters. This is undoubtedly something worth celebrating. Not just celebrating. After a grand feast, Shen Qiu even rebooted the Inborn Grandmaster cultivation plan. He pulled out the national treasury reserves, even the family reserves, then rallied the six families and seven clans, letting all the coastal aristocratic families gather elixirs, ready to exhaust all efforts to cultivate a few more Inborn Grandmasters. The pressure Chu State is putting on Ning Country nowadays is too great. Now that they finally see a chance to secure absolute superiority over Chu State, Shen Qiu naturally will not let it slip away easily. He not only prepared to cultivate more Inborn Grandmasters but also ordered a new round of military expansion in the country. The existing five hundred thousand land troops and hundred and fifty thousand navy troops no longer give Ning Country a sense of security. Shen Qiu prepared to recruit another hundred and fifty thousand land troops, rounding up to eight hundred thousand soldiers and navy, to serve as the national barrier. Now, the increasingly fierce war in the world, the increasingly massive troops that each country is deploying into battle, is causing significant pressure not only to Chu State but also to Ning Country. Looking at the lords of the states around, anyone of them has a million troops at ready. The Ning Country, which has always been proud of being the Lord of Yangzhou, only has a modest six hundred thousand forces, how could they be content or at ease with this? So military expansion has become an inevitable choice. Chapter 729 - Chapter 729: Chapter 322 Eliminate or Die Together_3 Chapter 729: Chapter 322 Eliminate or Die Together_3 This time, the news of the loss of Chu State¡¯s Inborn Grandmaster was just a fuse to trigger this event. Even without Jihui¡¯s departure, there would have been various other reasons to promote this matter in Ning Country in the future. However, while Ning Country was expanding its military, Lu Yuan had no time to focus on that. Now Chu State is busy preparing for the Hanzhong War, so even if they are aware of the movements in Ning Country, they have no extra energy to interfere. On the contrary. Although Ning Country¡¯s current military expansion is certainly not good news for Chu State, it may not be a bad thing for them at the moment. Expansion of the army is not something that can be done with a snap of the fingers. It requires enough weapons and armor, recruiting enough qualified soldiers, training these new recruits, and coordinating the work among various units that have added new soldiers. Back then, Chu State expanded its army by more than 100,000 and it took five years to train and integrate them. Today, Ning Country has expanded its army by 150,000. Even if they have a larger base and smaller influence, even so, it would take at least two or three years to restore the strength of the Ning Army after expansion. Before that, as long as Ning Country is not driven mad, Chu State does not need to worry about the threat from the west. For Lu Yuan, this is also important news. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Without interference from Ning Country and with the southern countries not strong enough, he can fully concentrate on dealing with the Hanzhong War. As another protagonist in the upcoming war, Zhou Country is also excited about the news of Jihui¡¯s death. Even many Zhou people believe that Heaven is helping them. Originally, Zhou Country had doubts and was cautious about the grain trade with Chu State, worrying about any hidden plots against Zhou Country. But now with Jihui¡¯s death, most of the worries and doubts in Zhou Country¡¯s heart have disappeared. With Jihui gone, Chu State has one less person to maintain peace in Qianzhong County. Beyond that county, there are three tributary states of Chu State, each with different desires, and even further, there are the two Yi countries Dali and Nanzhao, eyeing like tigers, and the aggressively expanding Su Country at the south. The surrounding situation is extremely complicated. In such a complicated situation, where conflict could break out at any moment, Chu State would not be able to stabilize the southwest situation without a strong person stationed there. Therefore, it has become imperative to send a new Inborn Grandmaster to take over the position left by Jihui after his death. But if you look at the whole of Chu State, Grand General Zhou Qing is stationed in Xiangyang Prefecture, where the complexity of the situation is not inferior to that of Qianzhong County. He can¡¯t move lightly. Huang Xuan, the True Person who protects Chu, has to guard against Hanzhong County at the north, take care of the southwestern countries at the south, and at the same time be responsible for the security of Xichuan and Hegu counties. The burden on him is even greater than that of Zhou Qing, and he cannot be moved either. Excluding these two, Chu State can only use the three Inborn Grandmasters in Baling City. That is, Lu Yuan, Lan Cai¡¯er, and Sun Siwen. Of these three, no matter who goes to Qianzhong County, there will be only two Inborn Grandmasters left in Baling City. Thanks to Lu Yuan¡¯s low profile all along, many people now know that he is adept at both immortal and martial arts and has strong strength. But those people only consider him an expert at the second realm of the Inborn, and they do not know his true capabilities. So under these circumstances, even if there are only two Inborn Grandmasters left in Baling City, including Lu Yuan, outsiders do not think that they can spare another Inborn Grandmaster to participate in foreign wars under the intense pressure from Ning Country. After all, Marquis of Wuan Bai Mengyang was under siege by four Inborn Grandmasters from the Zhou and Shu alliance back in Xichuan, and he did not dare to go out of Yuzhong City. Nowadays, after the promotion of two new Inborn Grandmasters, Ning Country can deploy four Inborn Grandmasters that do not have to guard northern Yangtze River and Guangling lines. Among these, there is also Shen Qiu, a veteran expert at the second realm of Inborn. With such a threat, outsiders do not think Chu State would dare to attack other countries without considering Baling¡¯s safety. If Chu State really dares to do so, Ning Country will be overjoyed. That Heavenly Son of Jianwu would definitely order 500,000 soldiers and horses immediately and head west with the four Inborn Grandmasters along the Yangtze River, straight to the empty Baling City, to completely annihilate Chu State. So due to this consideration, if Chu State¡¯s real strength and the existence of Qingyunzi are not known, Zhou Country¡¯s concerns and threats about Chu State will naturally be significantly reduced. Originally, Zhou Country planned to temporarily withdraw 50,000 soldiers from Guannei Prefecture to Hanzhong during the grain trade between the two countries, but the plan was completely abandoned after receiving the news of Jihui¡¯s death. However, in Hanzhong County, Zhou Country still plans to mobilize 200,000 civilian workers during the trading period to make full preparations to guard against Chu State¡¯s betrayal. But this second round of lowered security was quickly readjusted after another news from Chu State came in. In the eighth month of the ninth year of Shenwu, there was news from Baling in Chu State. Chu State¡¯s Prime Minister, Cui Changqing, who had supported and assisted Lu Yuan from the time he was a Chu lord in Yue State, had served in the Shaoyang Prefecture period, Changsha State period, and Shenwu period of Chu State, died of exhaustion in his mansion after half a year of rest. This person, who had single-handedly established the civil official system of Chu State, was now gone. If it was previously said that the collapse of Chu State was somewhat exaggerated, the death of Cui Changqing was not the least bit exaggerated. The importance of Cui Changqing in the hearts of Chu State¡¯s king and the officials was far greater than that of Jihui. From the king¡¯s public display of sorrow, and his declaration of a three-day mourning period, it is clear. Even in Chu¡¯s political circles, where Cui Changqing¡¯s disciples are everywhere, the importance of the prime minister is far greater than that of chance opportunity. The death of such a figure is enough to shake the entire Chu State and its bureaucratic circles. To say that the sky has collapsed might be a bit exaggerated, but the appearance of a hole is about right. Before this hole is filled, the chaos in Chu State¡¯s officialdom and the chaos in the court¡¯s political situation are inevitable. Before stabilizing these chaotic situations, it would be difficult for Chu State to integrate all its forces and mobilize the efforts of the whole country to do one thing. And war is precisely something that requires gathering the strength of the entire nation. Chapter 730 - Chapter 730: Chapter 323: The Barbarian Envoy Chapter 730: Chapter 323: The Barbarian Envoy However, even in just one month, Chu State lost two pillars, and it was still far from the end. It seemed that during the 9th year of Shenwu, Heaven was particularly targeting Chu State. Not long after, on the tenth day of the eighth month in the 9th year of Shenwu, news came from the southwest. After Jihui¡¯s death, the three feudatory states of the southwest and the two barbarian states of Nanzhao and Dali were mobilizing troops frequently, suggesting unusual movements. War might break out again in the southwest region at any time. At such a critical time, Qianzhong County must have a sufficient amount of forces to maintain Chu¡¯s interests there. So, in grief, Lu Yuan could only send Lan Cai¡¯er as the appeasement envoy for the three countries in the western and southern regions, using the dignity of the queen and the innate position to replace the kings of those countries to stabilize the southwest for Chu State and appease the local people. Then, on the 19th day of the same month, news of Ning Country¡¯s massive military expansion reached Chu State. Faced with this enemy within Yangzhou¡¯s jurisdiction, Chu naturally became more vigilant. Thus, shortly after making some arrangements for the country, Lu Yuan ordered Sun Siwen, Cui Changqing¡¯s son-in-law and the current co-prime minister, to take over administration. He let the current leader of the civil officials in Chu State integrate the domestic officialdom and calm down the turmoil caused by Cui Changqing¡¯s death. Considering the status and qualifications of these people, it would likely not take long for them to receive good news. The friendship between the monarch and ministers of Chu State, especially between Lu Yuan, Sun Siwen, Zhou Qing, Cui Changqing, and others, was far beyond the imagination of outsiders. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï They thought that Chu State, after experiencing continuous shocks, might need several months or half a year of stabilization. But in reality, that time could be reduced to just one or two months to thoroughly stabilize Chu State. As for Chu¡¯s northern expedition. Under the pre-established plan, the death of a left prime minister who had little to do with the national politics would only have minimal impact. Even on the day Cui Changqing died, the mobilization of troops and supplies inside Chu State was carried out methodically. Through more than 20 years of hard work by Lu Yuan, Sun Siwen, Cui Changqing, and others, the bureaucratic system created was incomparable to the countries that had already decayed after several hundred or even a thousand years of history. This new-born polity was brilliant enough to catch the attention of the world. After making these arrangements, Lu Yuan mobilized troops and led the army to the Baqiu Military Camp on the border of Chu Ning, where he patrolled the defense, trained the soldiers, and guarded Chu State. However, when they led the army to Baqiu, Chu State secretly sent a forbidden army to Xiangyang by boat using the opportunity of an openly mobilized army. This secret operation was hidden within the large-scale troop movements of Chu, going unnoticed by anyone, including Zhou Country. On the contrary. Seeing Chu State¡¯s recent chaos and threats in the southwest and eastern borders, Zhou Country¡¯s court completely dissipated their last bit of vigilance when they learned that the right prime minister and the king of Chu were both tied up in different locations. As Chu suffered from a series of setbacks and faced such big problems at the moment, they would not have any surplus force left to launch an external campaign; meanwhile, Zhou Country could completely relieve its defenses. The civilian workers who were originally prepared for mobilization in Hanzhong County were all canceled at this time. Zhou Country was now short of grain, and it would be a huge consumption to mobilize two hundred thousand civilian workers at once, even temporarily. Being able to save some for Zhou Country at this time was a good thing. So, during the grain trade, the heavily vigilant Zhou Country gradually dropped its guard after hearing continuous news about Chu State. Even in Zhou¡¯s court, suggestions arose to take advantage of the stable situation in the south to move the Pillar State General of Hanzhong County to Longxi County to deal with increasingly fierce battles there. However, while battles in Longxi County were important, the situation in Hanzhong County, as Zhou¡¯s southern border, was also extremely important. Therefore, although someone proposed such suggestions, more people quickly vetoed them, and they didn¡¯t actually materialize. Just as an isolated glance. The fact that such a proposal could be made showed that Zhou Country was completely deceived by Chu¡¯s elaborate ruse. Under the sudden convergence of heavenly and human factors, Lu Yuan¡¯s deception played a big part in their success. ¡­ Time passed slowly. While the outside world was in chaos and the surrounding countries were watching Chu State with schadenfreude, Chu¡¯s various armies to be employed for the expedition arrived in Xichuan and Xiangyang Counties as they gathered to sell grain to Zhou Country. At this point, there was only one month left before the trade agreed between Zhou and Chu. However, Chu State¡¯s grain and supplies had not yet been fully gathered, and the supplies needed for the military campaign were not yet fully prepared. At the same time, Zhou Country had not yet raised all the silver needed for the purchase of grain. Although Zhou Country boasted vast lands, a population of twenty million, and an annual revenue said to be hundreds of millions of silver tales, they had to spend a lot as well. Even during peacetime, the annual military expenditure for its million regular troops exceeded sixty million silver tales. Chapter 731 - Chapter 731: Chapter 323: Barbarian Emissary_2 Chapter 731: Chapter 323: Barbarian Emissary_2 Now in this chaotic war, increasing military pay by 50% or even 100% is a normal thing. So, merely considering the standing army, the military expenditure of Zhou Country is already around 90 million silver tales. However, besides the standing army, Zhou Country has also conscripted around a million civilian workers. Even if these civilian workers don¡¯t receive any wages, you still have to provide them with weapons and daily food, right? To support this million people for a year, it will cost at least 10 million silver tales. Furthermore, there are the expenses of the Zhou Country court, the expenses of the local government offices, the expenses of the Zhou royal family, and various other extra expenses¡­ Frankly speaking, the annual fiscal expenditure of Zhou Country is definitely more than 120 million silver tales. Compared to the annual income of 100 million silver tales for Zhou Country, there is a direct annual deficit of 20 million silver tales. Of course. The specific deficit scale cannot be so rigid, and it definitely fluctuates up and down. Some years the deficit may be more, and some years less. However, regardless, Zhou Country is now spending more than 10 million silver tales each year to subsidize its annual fiscal losses, which is certain. So, the problem arises. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï How many years has this war between Zhou Country and the Snow Plains Nomads been going on? If Lu Yuan remembers correctly, the invasion of the Snow Plains Nomads began in the sixth year of Shenwu, during the summer floods. And now, it is already late autumn of the ninth year of Shenwu, and the war has been going on for more than three years. For over three years, subsidizing 20 million silver tales each year, Zhou Country¡¯s treasury has, to put it mildly, paid out 60 million silver tales. With such a huge expenditure, even if Zhou Country had a solid foundation, it couldn¡¯t withstand so much bleeding. There are so many places to spend money, three battlefields, various local counties, court departments, which one isn¡¯t clamoring for money, all crying out in poverty. Now, Zhou Country is buying 10 million stones of grain, even if it¡¯s purchased at the price of 6 cents per pound of rice, it needs to be converted according to the current price of silver, amounting to 6.6 million silver tales. This payment is almost equivalent to one-third of the annual fiscal supplement provided by Zhou Country¡¯s treasury. After bleeding heavily for more than three years, even with Zhou Country¡¯s foundation, it would be somewhat difficult to come up with such a large sum of money at this time. At this point, they have no choice but to mobilize funds from various sources within the country, save some from various expenditures, make a donation, and raise funds from the gentry and nobles, all of which involves various intrigues, conspiracies¡­ Under the entanglement from all sides, Zhou Country is temporarily unable to come up with so much money. So, just like Chu State, they are squeezing the three-month window to slowly raise the silver tales needed. As for this matter, Lu Yuan is actually happy about it. Because according to the original agreement, the date for the grain trade between the two countries should be the third day of October this year. As mentioned earlier. Now with climate and weather, each year is colder than the last. According to the trend of the past two years, by late October, the first snow will fall in Jiangnan. Hanzhong County is located in the Han River Basin and is the junction of the north and Jiangnan. Due to the separation from the mountains in the north, its climate is actually close to Jiangnan. So, if the trade is delayed to October, then by the time Lu Yuan launches a surprise attack and the Zhou People react, the north would have already snowed for half a month. As for Hanzhong County, which has a Jiangnan climate, the first snow would have also arrived. By that time, with the heavy snow and cold wind, the entire world would be covered in a blanket of white. In such cold weather, with heavy snow sealing the mountains, even if the Zhou Country wants to dispatch troops to the south to aid Hanzhong County, they won¡¯t be able to do so. Facing layers of snowstorms, the Zhou People, even with hundreds of thousands of soldiers, could only stand on the north side of the mountain ridge, watch the already-blocked ice and snow, and sigh in vain. In the end, they¡¯d watch helplessly as Chu State calmly captures Hanzhong County, completely losing this southern territory. By then, with a whole winter to buffer, Chu State can calmly arrange defenses, station people in various checkpoints, and rely on natural barriers to stop the enemy from invading after conquering Hanzhong County. Such a stalemate could last for two or three years, or even just half a year or so, and Zhou People would have to submit and acknowledge Chu State¡¯s occupation of Hanzhong County. Chu State could then achieve a major gain by defeating the hegemon and expanding its territory by one county with minimal cost. Simply perfect. So, having such a grand vision, Lu Yuan naturally welcomes the delay in time. Moreover, delaying the start of the war is actually beneficial for Chu State. In the domestic court, after consolidating for nearly a month, Sun Siwen did not disappoint Lu Yuan¡¯s expectations. During his time leading the army to patrol the border, good news came from Baling. After a series of rewards and punishments, dancing with long sleeves, and with Lu Yuan¡¯s support, Sun Siwen had completely stabilized the court and eliminated the influence of Cui Changqing¡¯s death. Once the court was stable, the remaining local government offices would naturally follow suit, and it was only a matter of time before they were stabilized. The Chu State officialdom had now regained its footing. Sun Siwen, who had now completely taken over all power, began to follow the original plan, mobilizing various resources from the court and local governments to cooperate with Lu Yuan in this Hanzhong campaign. Among these resources, the most important are grain, arms, and medicine. Without these, a war would be inherently handicapped by 40%. As for money, it is not that important for Chu State. This time, Zhou Country raised 6.6 million silver tales to buy grain, such a huge sum of money is enough to support the costs of a war for Chu State. Chapter 732 - Chapter 732: Chapter 323: Barbarian Messenger_3 Chapter 732: Chapter 323: Barbarian Messenger_3 After all, they would have to turn against each other eventually. When that time comes, an unexpected attack would be ideal. They could use all the grain Chu State had gathered and the silver Zhou Country had collected, without any need for the trouble of transportation. A perfect solution indeed. Sometimes, when Lu Yuan thought about his plan, he couldn¡¯t help feeling pleased with himself. ¡­ Chu State¡¯s preparations were becoming increasingly complete, while the start date of the Battle of Hanzhong approached relentlessly. As Lu Yuan deliberately kept everything hidden, nobody noticed that a war was about to break out, despite the widespread pessimism. Even many people inside Chu State, including the heads of various departments in the imperial court, were kept in the dark, with only a few individuals who were directly involved in specific matters aware of the situation. As the Book of Changes says, ¡°A ruler who is not discreet loses his subjects; a subject who is not discreet loses his life; a secretive matter not kept confidential will bring disaster.¡± Though Lu Yuan strategized military matters, the same principles applied ¨C military secrets must never be leaked. Everyone knew the importance of intelligence. Having fought wars for more than twenty years, he placed great importance on confidentiality, with no oversights. However, just when everything was almost ready, at the end of the ninth month, a group of unexpected visitors from the snowy plateau arrived in Hegu County. They quickly descended the mountains, passed through Xichuan, and came to Baling City by boat. Inside the royal palace. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï After being informed that the visitors from the snowy plains had arrived in Baling, Lu Yuan, who had just returned from leading troops at the border, immediately approached them. ¡°You have all traveled far and wide, crossing the snowy plains to come to Baling seeking me. What is the purpose of your visit?¡± Lu Yuan asked calmly after they had exchanged introductions and courtesies. As he spoke, he sized up the five people below. There were four men and one woman, all dressed in braided hair and fur clothing, clearly resembling the attire of the prairie nomads. About half a month ago, these five people led a hundred-strong team through the rugged paths between Hegu County and the snowy plains and entered Hegu County. Upon arrival, they promptly announced their identities as messengers from the four kings of the snowy plains ¨C the Hulan Tribe, TielÁ¦ Tribe, Zhenyan Clan, and Duosi Clan ¨C as well as the Great Mohism. This time, they had come as envoys to Chu State, acting on the orders of the four kings and the spiritual woman. Each of the four kings of the snowy plains ruled over large tribes with over a million followers. Including their vassals, each king could influence millions of snowy plain barbarians. Together, the four kings could directly rule over and influence more than ten million barbarians. As for the Great Mohism, it was the most widely spread and longest-standing sect on the snowy plateau. Ninety-nine percent of the barbarians on the snowy plains believed in the Great Dharma God, worshiping him as the creator of the snowy plains, the source of all barbarian bloodlines, and the ancestor of all spirits. The Great Mohism practiced a dual-spirit system ¨C the Spirit Master and the spiritual woman. The Spirit Master was the head of the sect, responsible for various matters within the sect and dealing with worldly affairs. The spiritual woman was the soul of the sect, dedicated to worshiping the Great Dharma God, single-mindedly devoted to the path, and her position was greatly revered. Now that the four kings of the snowy plains and the Great Mohism had come together, they could virtually represent the entire population of the snowy plain barbarians. Naturally, their envoys attracted the attention of the authorities in Hegu County. As soon as the local governor received the news, he immediately dispatched a thousand county soldiers to escort the delegation to Xichuan. Later, when Huang Xuan, the local commander in Xichuan, learned of this, he summoned the envoys for an audience to confirm and probe their intentions. However, these envoys were very tight-lipped. No matter how Huang Xuan tried to probe them, they refused to reveal their intentions in coming to Chu State. Eventually, Huang Xuan had no choice but to confirm their identities were genuine and inform Lu Yuan of the matter through divine thoughts. He then continued to provide troops to escort them to Baling. That was why Lu Yuan had hurriedly returned to Baling from his border patrol and training at the Chu Ning border. The identities represented by this delegation were simply too important, symbolizing the entire power of the snowy plain barbarians, and Lu Yuan had no choice but to take them seriously. In the grand hall. When the five envoys heard Lu Yuan¡¯s inquiry, they exchanged glances, and finally, the woman representing the Great Mohism stepped forward. She bowed slightly to Lu Yuan and said, ¡°Your Majesty, the reason for our visit is to propose a joint operation against the detestable Zhou people.¡± ¡°Fight the Zhou people?¡± Hearing this, Lu Yuan was not surprised; he had been speculating as to the purpose of the barbarian envoys ever since he heard the news. This revelation merely confirmed his suspicions. However, although their intentions were confirmed, when Lu Yuan heard their request, he merely smiled and asked with interest, ¡°Honorable envoys, are you aware that Great Chu has just entered into a trade deal with Zhou Country, preparing to sell them ten million stones of grain? At present, although the relationship between Zhou and Chu is not that of allies, it is still amicable. Under such circumstances, why should I betray Zhou Country, forsake great business opportunities, and instead help you fight against the powerful Zhou Country?¡± People come and go in the world in pursuit of profit. Although Chu State had long planned to wage war against Zhou Country and had already completed its preparations for an imminent battle¡­ Even if these barbarians didn¡¯t come, Lu Yuan was already preparing to strike against Zhou Country on his own. However, before launching the attack, if he could take advantage of the situation and extort something from these barbarians, that would also be an additional gain for Lu Yuan. These barbarians had come from far and wide, and surely they couldn¡¯t be so na?ve as to think they could convince Chu State to take up arms just by empty words alone. They must have a lot of benefits in their hands and confidence in persuading him. Lu Yuan looked forward to this. He was curious about what these barbarians would offer to persuade him. A windfall right before the start of the war was a pleasant surprise indeed. The envoy of the Great Mohism solemnly responded to Lu Yuan¡¯s question, ¡°Gold, silver, spiritual medicine, and women. As long as Your Majesty agrees to work with us, we snowy plain barbarians are willing to offer these treasures.¡± Chapter 733 - Chapter 733: Chapter 324: Alliance and Marriage Chapter 733: Chapter 324: Alliance and Marriage Gold, spiritual medicine, and women. These were what the Snow Plains Nomads were offering, hoping to persuade Lu Yuan to send troops to assist them. However, just hearing this couldn¡¯t help but sound somewhat laughable. ¡°Messenger, do you know that I am the ruler of the Chu State?¡± Lu Yuan looked at the confident Great Mohism Messenger below and said with deep meaning, ¡°Chu State spans thirty thousand miles, with five provinces and three nations, and has a population of tens of millions. In this vast land, just the annual tax collection allows me to obtain forty million silver taels each year. Similarly, in these thirty thousand miles of land, with deep mountains and great marshlands, who knows how many Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens there are? If I want spiritual medicine, all I have to do is give an order, and what medicine is unattainable? As for women. In my harem, there are already three thousand beauties, all with innate talent and unsurpassed beauty. If that is not enough, I only need to spread the word and within the Nine Provinces, the women who are willing to share my bed can form a line from the source of the Yangtze River to the sea. To move me with just these three things is rather an underestimation of me and makes others look down on the Snow Plains, isn¡¯t it?¡± After finishing his speech, Lu Yuan looked at the messenger with interest, waiting for his response and explanation. As he said above. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï As the ruler of Chu State now, gold, spiritual medicine, and women, which of them are unattainable? Although the Snow Plains Nomads are outsiders and not part of the legitimate Nine Provinces, they are all quite formidable, not inferior to any small country, and not short of vision. Lu Yuan could see the problem clearly, and so could those who proposed these offers. To use these readily available things in exchange for an alliance between Chu and them to jointly target Zhou Country is definitely asking for too much. But strangely, these simple problems that they are clearly aware of, these five representatives of the Snow Plains Nomads, they still seriously proposed it, and they were so confident. Lu Yuan believed that these messengers were definitely not stupid. The Snow Plains¡¯ rulers behind the messengers, who could control their territory, naturally would not be stupid either. So, if they are not stupid yet proposed these stupid methods, the only explanation is that their proposals were not as foolish as they seemed. In other words. Gold, spiritual medicine, and women, the bargaining chips proposed by the Great Mohism Messenger in front of him, were not ordinary bargaining chips, but special ones, those that could move Lu Yuan. This made Lu Yuan feel intrigued and curious. To move him was not that easy. He was looking forward to what surprises these barbarian messengers would bring to him. ¡°Your Majesty.¡± Upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s questioning, the Great Mohism Messenger still maintained a respectful expression without any panic. He bent over slightly and said sincerely, ¡°As you said, Your Majesty, you have vast territory and millions of subjects as a ruler of a land. As a king, the wealth you possess could fill a lake, making it difficult to count. The treasures you own are as numerous as the stars of the night sky. As for the unparalleled beauty of the world, you could change them daily without repeating a single one. However, we, the people of the Snow Plains, can also offer all these and even better ones.¡± At this point, the Great Mohism Messenger paused briefly and then spoke with a little more passion, ¡°As long as you are willing to send troops to help us fight against the Zhou People, we, the people of the Snow Plains, are willing to offer one hundred million silver taels as the cost for inviting the Great Chu warriors to fight. At the same time, to maintain the relationship between our Snow Plains and the Great Chu, the spiritual woman from our Great Mohism is willing to marry into the Chu State and become your concubine. In addition, we will also offer 500 Divine Pills refined from spiritual medicine as dowry for our spiritual woman. This is the gold, spiritual medicine, and women that we, the people of the Snow Plains, offer as our sincerity. Your Majesty of Chu, we, the people of the Snow Plains, are willing to offer these treasures in exchange for your help. Are you willing to lend us a helping hand?¡± As the Great Mohism Messenger finished speaking, his eyes were full of confidence yet with a touch of anxiety as he looked at Lu Yuan, clearly still somewhat uneasy. Behind her, the other four barbarian messengers also looked at Lu Yuan with trepidation and anticipation, hoping for a response that would make them happy. After hearing the conditions of the barbarians, Lu Yuan could not help but fall silent. A hundred million silver taels, a spiritual woman, and five hundred Divine Pills. My goodness, this is quite something! After hearing the generous offers of the barbarians, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but gasp, feeling shocked by their extravagance. First of all, a hundred million silver taels. Such a large sum is not something that anyone can just take out. It is important to know that the Zhou Country¡¯s external claim is only an annual income of a hundred million silver taels. In Ning Country, after ten years of recuperation, it has almost fully recovered its vitality, but its annual income is still no more than seventy million silver taels. Chu State, with a worse foundation, has an annual income of only forty-three million and four hundred thousand silver taels today. If it were the Snow Plains Barbarians, with their poverty, even if the total population exceeded ten million, their annual income would be considered good if it reached ten million silver taels. Of course, the barbarians on the Snow Plains still practice tribal slavery, and apart from the tribal chiefs and nobility, the others there barely need gold or silver. Even the chieftains and nobility of the tribes barely use these gold and silver assets in transactions with outsiders, such as the Western Liang and Zhou Countries. So, in terms of spending on gold and silver, those Snow Plains Nomads didn¡¯t actually have as much as they thought, and much of the acquired wealth was mostly stored away. Over time, it did not seem strange that they could come up with a hundred million silver taels. Chapter 734 - Chapter 734: Chapter 324: Alliance and Marriage_2 Chapter 734: Chapter 324: Alliance and Marriage_2 Even if they could come up with another two or three hundred million silver taels, it wouldn¡¯t surprise Ruyuan. After all, it¡¯s normal for tens of millions of people to accumulate such wealth over hundreds of years. However, this doesn¡¯t mean that one hundred million silver taels is a small amount. With this money, Lu Yuan could now expand his army by 500,000 soldiers, and cover their military expenses for three and a half years. If you also consider the silver reserves and accumulated surpluses from Chu State¡¯s treasury, it would be enough to support the additional 500,000 soldiers for seven years. In other words. With this silver, Lu Yuan could expand Chu State¡¯s standing army to one million strong, and maintain them for seven years without disrupting the country¡¯s financial balance or hindering domestic development. If Chu State could maintain an army of a million soldiers for seven years, the benefits it would bring would be immeasurable. Most simply. If Chu State had an army of a million, sending out hints about their strength would be enough to solidify their control over the currently disputed Hanzhong region, with no further resistance. As long as the Zhou People knew that Chu State had an army of a million strong, their hearts would be filled with anger and unwillingness, but in the face of being surrounded by such a powerful enemy, they wouldn¡¯t dare stir the pot and bring disaster upon themselves. Meanwhile, over at Ning Country and Nanhai Country. Originally, with Chu State¡¯s strength, it would have been difficult to annex these two small Lingnan countries. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï But if Chu State had an army of a million, they could casually command 500,000 soldiers to traverse mountains and ridges to march south in force, swallowing these two territories as easily as flipping their hand. As for Su Country¡¯s reliance on Su Xuange, a mere Inborn Grandmaster of the First Realm, both Huang Xuan and Qingyunzi could easily cut him down without Lu Yuan even needing to lift a finger. Once they lost this Inborn Grandmaster, Su Country¡¯s national power would be even weaker than that of Nanhai Country, and they would pose no obstacle to Chu State. As for the issue of there being no one to control the newly conquered Lingnan region, someone has already conveniently solved it for you. The Barbarians from the Snowy Plains are eagerly offering a spiritual woman. Ever since the Snow Plains Barbarians and Zhou Country began warring in the harsh winter, Lu Yuan has been continuously sending out spies to gather information about the Barbarians and conduct in-depth research. So he has a lot of understanding about the spiritual women of the Great Mohism. As one of the dual spirits of the Great Mohism, the spiritual woman is regarded as a devout attendant of the Great Dharma God and his envoys in the mortal world. Simply put, you could treat her as the personal maid of the Great Dharma God and his personal attendant. Of course. As a divine servant, the spiritual woman¡¯s status cannot be compared to that of ordinary mortal maids, even in name. In ancient times, during the period when immortals and mortals appeared together in sanctity, the Great Dharma God who created the Snow Plains Barbarians was said to have been on par with the Three Emperors of the Nine Provinces and had contended with Emperor Hua Guang in battle. Although he was ultimately defeated, he managed to preserve the foundations of one of the ten realms ¨C the Snowy Plateau ¨C and transformed into the creation god of the Barbarians, with his divine name still being passed down to this day. Emperor Hua Guang was the first emperor of the human race in the Nine Provinces, and he established the foundation and rightful rule of the human race in the Nine Provinces. Although the Great Emperor¡¯s own cultivation was not as advanced as the later Emperor Xia Xi and Emperor Hao Tian due to not standing on the shoulders of his predecessors, he still touched upon the Earth Flower, being placed in the first class of Earth Immortals. The Great Dharma God, who rivaled the Earth Immortal Emperor Hua Guang, would naturally also be a figure at the same level ¨C an Earth Immortal. Being a maid to an Earth Immortal naturally entails extraordinary strength and status, something that only a Human Immortal can achieve. Of course, this was during ancient times when spiritual energy was abundant and all things were flourishing. Back then, opportunities were endless, and various divine beings roamed the land. By the peak of the ancient era, during the reign of Emperor Hao Tian, the Heavenly Flower Immortal was considered unrivaled. Not to mention Human Immortals, even Earth Immortals were a dime a dozen. Now, as time has passed and divine beings have disappeared, spiritual energy has been exhausted, and the once world-creating Great Dharma God has vanished without a trace. The spiritual woman who once needed to be at the Human Immortal realm to serve at their side has now fallen to the rank of Martial Arts Xiantian. The experiences during this period are truly lamentable. However, even though the spiritual woman now only possesses the strength of the Innate Realm when compared to her peak, she is still quite remarkable. As for Lu Yuan, if he could marry an Innate spiritual woman, it would undoubtedly be a great deal. First of all, marrying a spiritual woman would undoubtedly improve the relationship between Chu State and the Snow Plains Barbarians, not to mention future benefits as well as mutual interests. Over millions of years, the Great Dharma God has long become a legend, and no one can say for sure whether there actually was such a deity. However, as a divine servant, the role of the spiritual woman has been passed down through countless generations. With each generation of inheritance and the cultivation efforts of countless spiritual women, the spiritual woman has gradually gained a degree of divine status in the snowy plains, similar to a living Buddha in the highlands in Lu Yuan¡¯s previous life. At most, as a leader of the faith, the spiritual woman has another figure alongside her called the spiritual son, who shares her power as a religious leader and doesn¡¯t give her absolute authority over the highlands. Nevertheless, the significance of the spiritual woman to the Barbarians is beyond doubt. Marrying her would mean that in the future, Lu Yuan could directly appeal to the Barbarians in the name of the spiritual woman, rallying a large number of believers and fighters to serve Chu State. These are just the long-term benefits. In the short term. News of the spiritual woman marrying the King of Chu would quickly spread to the recently annexed Hegu region, quelling the discontent of the Barbarians who originally wanted to restore their tribal rule and retake the Snow Plains from Chu State. Chapter 735 - Chapter 735: Chapter 324: Alliance and Marriage_3 Chapter 735: Chapter 324: Alliance and Marriage_3 Under the influence of the spiritual woman, the original rebellious hearts would instantly be reduced by more than half. Those gathered rebels would also give up fighting against Chu State because of their faith. The Hegu county, which might have needed another five to six years of turmoil, would instantly stabilize and become a solid foundation for Chu State. All these are the influence of a spiritual woman. Besides the influence, the spiritual woman, who is the faith leader of millions of Snow Plains Nomads and a practitioner of Great Mohism, has top-notch Cultivation in this world. How strong her specific strength is, is not very clear from the information Lu Yuan has at hand. But Great Mohism has been passed down for ten thousand years, and its origin comes from myths. Even if it has declined in recent years, its foundation is definitely stronger than ordinary Inborn Cultivation. As the core of this faith, the spiritual woman¡¯s Cultivation is definitely at the Inborn level and may even be among the stronger ones. With such a person joining Chu State, it would be like adding wings to a tiger, directly increasing its Qi Fate by three points. ¡°By the time I marry the spiritual woman, Chu State¡¯s Innate Combat Power will directly increase to as many as seven people. By then, even if we conquer Su Country and Nanhai Country, and annex Lingnan, Chu State will only have eight counties. No, Xiangyang, Hegu, and Tonghai County in Su Country are only half a county each in size. So, in reality, Chu State only has six and a half counties in its territory.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Lu Yuan calculates the benefits of having the spiritual woman and cannot help but feel exhilarated. Originally, with Chu State¡¯s strength, swallowing just Hanzhong County was almost the limit. But if they ally with the Snow Plains Nomads and marry the spiritual woman, it would increase Chu State¡¯s strength by thirty percent, allowing them to quickly expand their territory. If they can really swallow Su Country and Nanhai Country, coupled with Hanzhong County which they are about to seize now, and digest these three and a half counties¡¯ land, Great Chu will become a solid hegemony, with its strength and resources directly crushing Ning Country. By that time, after recuperating for ten years, they would be able to launch an eastern expedition, wipe out Ning Country, and unify Yangzhou. In the face of this vast prospect, the final bargaining chip of the barbarians, the five hundred Divine Pills, seems insignificant. Divine Pills are actually elixirs, made from the Spiritual Blood of the Divine Blood Variant species, just with different names in the Snowy Wilderness and the Nine Provinces. Since the White Phoenix Temple offered tribute, Chu State¡¯s elixir reserves amounted to 1,200 pills. In the past few years, Jianchuan, Chilih, and Kunhai countries have also consecutively offered dozens of elixirs, plus the elixirs produced by Chu State itself, amounting to about one hundred more. Therefore, Chu State¡¯s total number of elixirs stands at 1,300, and it continues to increase steadily, no longer considered scarce. Even if they added another 500 pills at this point, it wouldn¡¯t make much difference. However, with five hundred elixirs, an Inborn Grandmaster could be trained. By giving these many elixirs to Chu State, the Snow Plains Nomads were practically giving Chu State a future Inborn Grandmaster. This was not a small gift after all. One hundred million silver tales could equal an army of 500,000. A spiritual woman would equal the spiritual belief of the barbarians and an Inborn Combat Power. Five hundred divine pills would equal a future Inborn. ¡®These three treasures are indeed precious. The Snow Plain Barbarians must have bled heavily to offer these.¡¯ Lu Yuan was pondering, and couldn¡¯t help but have a deeper understanding of the difficult situation the barbarians were in now. Silver and divine pills may be considered external possessions. But the spiritual woman, who could be seen as the core of the barbarians¡¯ spiritual beliefs, was also offered as a gift. The situation of the barbarians at this time could be imagined. Over the years, Lu Yuan has been paying close attention to the war between the barbarians and Zhou People, and often hears news from that side being passed back. Almost every autumn, just before winter, the barbarians from the snowy plains all gather together and form a huge army to invade the Zhou Country, in order to plunder enough supplies for winter. Similarly, every spring, after winter, they also gather together to invade the Zhou Country and wage war to replenish the tribe¡¯s meager supplies after a winter¡¯s consumption. In these wars, there are often news of Zhou Country¡¯s county cities and Fu cities being captured by the barbarians. Even the Hexi county city was captured the year before last. In just over four years of war, over a hundred cities in the Hexi and Longxi counties of Zhou Country have been raided and plundered by the barbarians. The number of civilians who were robbed, slaughtered, and killed during this period has also exceeded one million, and the death toll of soldiers is in the hundreds of thousands. There is a deep-seated hatred between the people of Zhou and the barbarians. However, while the people of Zhou suffered heavy losses, the barbarians as the aggressors suffered even greater losses. In the reports sent back from the Imperial Court and the news released by the people of Zhou, there were often words of annihilating the barbarians in battle, tens of thousands of them being defeated and slaughtered. Even Zhou people occasionally sent people into the snowy plains to find the barbarian tribes and counterattack. In these proactive attacks, they achieved quite a few victories, often reporting back the annihilation of various tribes and the pillaging of tens of thousands of people, cattle, and sheep. If we summarize these great victories, it is shocking to discover that in just over four years, the number of barbarian soldiers annihilated by Zhou has exceeded 1.5 million. Like the proactive attacks of Zhou people, the plunder of their barbarian tribes has led to a population of about one million. In this war alone, the barbarians have lost more than 2.5 million people, with the majority being men of fighting age. These figures only account for the population losses resulting from war. And what about the casualties suffered outside of war? It is important to remember that the barbarians have taken such a desperate and even life-threatening approach to invading Zhou Country just to obtain enough supplies to ensure their own survival. During the floods in the sixth year of Shenwu, and the several years of cold winters that followed, how much of their population was lost? One could argue that the non-war casualties may be of the same order of magnitude. After pondering a while, I realized that the barbarians living on the snowy plains have lost nearly 5 million people in just four or five years. Such a large population loss must be taking a heavy toll on them, even if they have a deep heritage. Does the remaining barbarians still number in the tens of millions? Even if they do, after losing so much vitality, they must face the continuing disasters and the increasingly oppressive Zhou people as well as a worsening food and supplies crisis within their tribes. If they do not make a change under such internal and external pressure and seek a way to break the deadlock, Then I¡¯m afraid that these barbarians, who have a history of millions of years, would not be far from the day of their demise. It¡¯s no wonder that under such a threat, they are willing to go all out and send out a spiritual woman, just to seek help from the Chu State.¡¯ After weighing the situation, Lu Yuan completely understood the barbarians¡¯ thoughts and had no doubts left in his heart. As for the proposal put forward by the barbarians, He looked down at the five messengers looking up at him expectantly, a slight smile appeared on his face, and he immediately spoke with moral righteousness: ¡°The people of Zhou are tyrannical. They have previously sent troops to ravage the people of Jiangnan. Now they have engaged in border conflicts and slaughtered the people of the snowy plains. Such despicable acts and oppressors are hated by the heroes of the world. Thus, Wei Country in the north border attacked Zhou¡¯s Shuofang County. Qingzhou Liang Country attacked Zhou¡¯s Henan County. And now your esteemed envoy has come, and the Great Chu State is a benevolent and righteous nation, we will naturally do our part for the people of the world. We agree to form marital alliances with the people of the snowy plains and establish an alliance. From this day on, we will dispatch troops to march northward to attack Zhou Country, to uphold the Heavenly Path and fulfill the alliance promise.¡± Chapter 736 - Chapter 736: Chapter 325: The Unsolvable Situation Chapter 736: Chapter 325: The Unsolvable Situation ¡°Your Majesty is benevolent.¡± ¡°With your help, our tens of millions of people in the Snowy Wilderness will finally be saved.¡± Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s personal pledge, the five messengers below couldn¡¯t help but rejoice. Some were so excited that they shed tears and prostrated themselves on the ground. No wonder they were so emotional, as the help of Chu State was truly significant for these Snow Plains Nomads. Lu Yuan¡¯s previous estimate was not wrong. In these more than four years of war, the Snow Plains Nomads suffered tremendously. However, the actual loss of soldiers and population was not as high as the outside world had presumed. For example, Lu Yuan calculated the number of Snow Plains people who had been killed by the Zhou People and concluded that the Snow Plains people had lost more than 1.5 million soldiers, but in reality, it was not that much. You have to know that in total, there are only about a million people in the four tribes of the Snow Plains. If the Snow Plains had directly lost 1.5 million soldiers, their tribes would have cracked long ago, and they wouldn¡¯t have managed to hold on until now. In fact, during the numerous fierce battles over these four years, the Snowy Plain Barbarians suffered heavy losses, but the majority of the soldiers killed were from servant tribes or slave tribes, and even simply from Zhou people¡¯s young and strong slaves captured during the invasion of their villages and cities. All of these accounted for most of the total war casualties, which added up to more than 800,000. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Of course, although most of the casualties belonged to those cannon fodder, the core forces of the four kings¡¯ tribes and their subordinate tribes also didn¡¯t suffer little. Looking at the tribes of the four kings who sent messengers now, each tribe had lost 50,000 to 60,000, or even 70,000 to 80,000 warriors. These were the strongest men in a tribe, representing the essence of a tribe. They lost so many valiant warriors at once, nearly a third to forty percent of their strength. As for the secondary tribes other than the four kings¡¯ tribes, the most miserable ones have lost seventy to eighty percent of their strength, and they are not far from extinction. All these Snow Plains core tribes have altogether lost about half a million soldiers. Well, during these four years of war, the number of soldiers the Barbarians lost, apart from those captured Zhou people who were conscripted temporarily, was only around one million. This is far from what was said in the Zhou People¡¯s war report, even counting those powerful Zhou servant soldiers. Of course. In this chaotic world, every nation now worships belligerence, and there are many cases of exaggeration in war achievements and the murder of innocents for promotion everywhere. Even in the newly-founded Chu State, there have been many cases of exaggerating war achievements in the army during these years, although it is not as serious as framing innocent people to death. Everyone has their selfish desires, and everyone wants to climb up, so this kind of thing can¡¯t be resolved. At most, we can use a more standardized system and stronger willpower to maintain this system to hold the issue back to some extent. Compared to that, the Zhou People only exaggerated their 200,000 kill count in these four years, which is already quite honest and could be considered loyal to the Emperor of the Zhou dynasty. But that¡¯s getting off topic. Regardless of how corrupt the Zhou army may be, the fact is that the Barbarians have lost one million fighters in these four years of war, which is almost considered a devastating blow to the Snow Plains people who have a total population of around just ten million. After this war, there won¡¯t be a family in the Snow Plains where a male relative hasn¡¯t been killed in action. As a result, the strongest generation of men in their twenties to thirties are all wiped out. All that is left are the elderly, weak, and disabled above thirty years old and under twenty years old. At best, the tribes of the four kings sustained lesser losses, and they might still have some robust men in their twenties to thirties, but compared to the overall situation, this was of little help. These figures only represent those who have died directly in the war. In recent years, the weather has become colder and colder. The period during which pasture on the Snow Plains has grown has shortened from February to October of the previous years to March to October currently, reducing by a whole month. In practical terms, it means that the cattle, sheep, and horses could not eat enough grass during this period, leading to weight loss and even starvation in some cases. Due to this, cattle and sheep can reproduce less as well. Each tribe in the Snow Plains has to store more hay by the end of the year to feed cattle and sheep during the winter. However, the stored hay often isn¡¯t enough for all cattle and sheep to eat. As a result, by winter, herders are forced to painfully slaughter a batch of thinner cattle and sheep in order to save hay and to stock up more food for themselves. However, this leads to further depletion of cattle and sheep in grassland tribes each year. With fewer cattle and sheep, each tribe can provide less milk, beef, and mutton. Moreover, because of the cold weather, highland barley can only be planted for one season, which further contributes to the shortage of grain. As of now, the food produced in the Snow Plains each year is only enough to sustain sixty percent of the Snow Plains people¡¯s population, with more than forty percent of their people not having enough food to eat and could starve to death at any moment. Furthermore, this hungry population is growing year by year with the arrival of the cold waves. Almost every year, more than 500,000 to 600,000 of the elderly and weak from the Snow Plains tribes are selectively abandoned and expelled by their tribes, only to die from freezing and starvation on the Snow Plains grasslands. Chapter 737 - Chapter 737: Chapter 325: The Unsolvable Situation_2 Chapter 737: Chapter 325: The Unsolvable Situation_2 Over the past four years, more than two million of the old and weak barbarians have died due to this reason. In addition, from time to time, Zhou People would also send out some light cavalry to infiltrate deep into the Snowy Wilderness and launch surprise attacks and massacres on the barbarian tribes, causing heavy losses to the Snow Plains Nomads and a reduction of around three to four hundred thousand population. Adding up all of these factors¡ªwar, famine, and slaughter¡ªdue to natural and man-made disasters, the Snow Plains Nomads have lost about 3.5 million people in these four years. This is already equivalent to 20% of the original total population of the Snowy Wilderness. Although there are still about twelve million Snow Plains Nomads left, their strength has been reduced to less than 60% of its peak after losing a large number of adult men and the old and weak. Furthermore, this remaining 60% is weakening rapidly. Looking at this situation, it is as Zhou People predicted that if the war lasts for another two or three years, the Snow Plains Nomads will not be able to support themselves and will be completely wiped out. With the danger of extinction staring them in the face, how could the barbarians not be anxious, desperate, and afraid? For this reason. When the barbarians found out that Chu State was trading grain with Zhou Country and seemed to be preparing to support Zhou People in their war against the barbarians. At the same time, a small number of Snow Plains Nomads who had fled to the core of the Snow Plains through the treacherous trails during Chu State¡¯s attack on the Hegu Snowy Wilderness had also brought news that the Chu State army was already bordering the barbarians. Under the pressure of Zhou People, the collapsing barbarians could not sit still any longer. Dealing with Zhou Country alone had already pushed them to the brink of extinction. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À0.§ã¦Ï At this point, if another Chu State, which was rumored to be no less powerful than Zhou People, were to join the fight, the barbarians would have no hope left, and extinction would be a foregone conclusion. Fortunately, the intelligence sent back by their spies in Zhou Country indicated that the relationship between Zhou Country and Chu State was not very good. Ten years ago, the two countries had even fought a war. Four years ago, the two countries almost broke out into a fight in Hanzhong County of Zhou Country. At that time, the barbarians had just started to wage war with Zhou People, and upon learning this information, the Snow Plains Nomads couldn¡¯t help but regret it. If Chu State had joined them in fighting against Zhou Country back then, they wouldn¡¯t have suffered such a miserable defeat today, and they wouldn¡¯t be on the brink of extinction. However, the good news was that they learned of Chu State¡¯s existence at this moment and also knew that Chu State¡¯s relationship with Zhou Country was not as good as it seemed on the surface. It was not too late to win over Chu State and fight against Zhou Country together. They, the Snow Plains Nomads, still had the hope of capturing Longxi and Hegu counties and overcoming this disaster. An alliance was a must. This consensus was reached by the senior leaders of the Snow Plains Nomads after comprehensively evaluating the strengths of themselves and Zhou People. To promote the alliance. Various tribes joined forces to contribute one hundred million silver tales and five hundred Divine Pills. Even to secure the alliance and strengthen their relationship with the King of Chu, they persuaded the spiritual woman of the Great Mohism to become the Divine Lady and agreed to marry the King of Chu and become his concubine. In order to win over Chu State, these barbarians had almost emptied their coffers. Of course, some might be wondering why the barbarians, with so much money, would not buy grain from others to survive this snow disaster. Instead, they risked huge losses for four consecutive years, stubbornly fighting for the two counties of Hegu and Longxi in Zhou Country, as if they wouldn¡¯t give up until they captured those territories. This had to be considered from a practical perspective. Question: How many people lived in the barbarian population before the war? Answer: The entire Snowy Wilderness had about fifteen million barbarians in total. Question: Due to the snow disaster, about 40% of the barbarians lack grain. How many people are affected in the fifteen million barbarian population? Answer: Approximately six million people. Question: How much grain is needed to support six million people for one year? Answer: At the very least, 50 to 60 million stones of grain are needed for a year to barely survive. Now, the problem arises. Evaluating the prices during the famine, even considering Chu State buying and selling grain with Zhou Country at six cents per catty, we have a relatively medium price range. Ten million stones of grain would cost about 6.6 million silver tales. To buy 50 million stones of grain, it would cost 33.3 million silver tales. In other words, to maintain basic survival needs, the Zhou People tribes living in the Snowy Wilderness would need to spend 33.3 million silver tales each year to buy grain from the outside world. Moreover, considering the growing trend of starving people in the Snow Plains Nomads, the money spent on buying grain each year will only continue to increase. One hundred million silver tales would last at most three years. How much money would the Snow Plains Nomads have? To buy grain for six or seven years given their impoverished state, they would have to spend all their savings and then completely run out of money. Having no money would mean they¡¯d starve to death in the end, right? Besides. Where can they find someone to provide food for six million people, with the number increasing rapidly? Lu Yuan¡¯s Chu State had only eight million people, and apart from providing for its population, it could only produce surplus food for about one million people. Some of this surplus grain was sold to Su Country, and the rest had been stored in warehouses, totaling only 40 million stones of stored grain. This amount of grain was not enough to meet the needs of the barbarians in the Snowy Wilderness for even a single year. Moreover, although Chu State bordered the Snowy Wilderness, there were no major roads connecting the two, leaving only small, winding, and rugged paths that were difficult for ordinary people to traverse. Chapter 738 - Chapter 738: Chapter 325: The Unsolvable Situation_3 Chapter 738: Chapter 325: The Unsolvable Situation_3 Even if Chu State has grain, they cannot transport it to the Snowy Wilderness. Therefore, the path of Chu State is cut off. If Chu State is not an option, the only remaining choices for them to obtain food outside the Snowy Wilderness would be Western Liang and Zhou Country. Western Liang is located in the western part of Yong State, with mostly grassland and sand. It is barely richer than the Snowy Wilderness, as its entire population amounts to only three million, making it a truly barren land. Furthermore, like the Snow Plains Nomads, Western Liang has also fallen into food shortage due to a snow disaster. Although their situation is slightly better, to the point that they are not on the verge of starvation, they are not far from it either. At the same time, the people of Western Liang are fierce and courageous, even more so than the Zhou People or the Nomads. It is already a blessing that they didn¡¯t come to rob Zhou Country or the Snow Plains. Only a foolish tribe would try to steal from these impoverished and strong-willed people. So, the path of Western Liang is also cut off. If Chu State and Western Liang are not viable, the only option left for the Nomads is Zhou Country. However, like Chu State, Zhou Country has a population of about twenty million. Each year, they can only produce enough surplus grain to feed three million people. Of these three million people¡¯s food, one million mouths still need to be fed by Zhou Country¡¯s own army, leaving only enough for about two million mouths in the end. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Not considering whether Zhou Country is willing to give food to the Barbarians, two million mouths¡¯ worth of food definitely wouldn¡¯t be enough for the Barbarians who face a six-million-mouth shortfall. In the end, there would still be four million people ¨C nearly a third of the Snowy Wilds¡¯ Tribes¡¯ population ¨C who cannot escape death by starvation. So now, the problem is that the money of the Barbarians is insufficient for them to purchase food in the long run. Zhou Country¡¯s surplus food is also far from meeting the needs of the Barbarians. This is essentially a dead-end situation. If both sides want to survive, then the only ultimate outcome is war. Taking advantage of their current wealth, the Barbarians could wage a war to seize the food that originally belonged to the Zhou People. At the same time, wars consume the surplus population, saving food for the remaining ones. Over four years, the Barbarians¡¯ six-million-strong needy population has already been reduced by 3.5 million. However, due to the ongoing cold and the impact of the war, the remaining 2.5 million starving population has not decreased, but has instead grown. Currently, there are still around three million starving people in the Snow Plains tribes, and the prospect of resolving this problem remains distant. And on Zhou Country¡¯s side¡­ Countless deaths have resulted from the years of war, with every household in the Hexi and Longxi counties draped in white mourning clothes. Those who survived, every single one of them, bear a deep grudge against the Barbarians. Many of the soldiers gathered from all over the country in the army have fallen in the battles against the Barbarians. It can be said that the entire Zhou Country has formed an intractable blood feud with the Snow Plains Nomads. Driven by the hatred, even if the Barbarians seek to end the war and negotiate peace, it¡¯s impossible for Zhou Country to agree. There have been too many deaths, too many sacrifices. If the Barbarians cannot be destroyed, with their blood redeeming the losses, and war medal reaping the benefits, it wouldn¡¯t pacify the hearts of the Zhou People. One side between the Barbarians and Zhou Country must fall, their corpses becoming nourishment for the victor to heal their wounds and grow stronger. No one wants to be the one to fall. At this point, Chu State becomes an outsider that can influence the outcome of this battle. If Chu State helps Zhou Country, assisted by Chu State¡¯s food aid, the Barbarians without reinforcements will undoubtedly perish. If Chu State helps the Barbarians, Zhou Country, having exhausted all its strength, would be unable to prevent the southern blade from piercing its chest ¨C it cannot escape the fate of defeat in the war. Being fully aware of this, understanding the importance of Chu State, is the reason why these foreign messengers are so overjoyed and emotional upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s personal promise. Because it represents the continuity of their race, the survival of their tribe, the life and death of themselves and their people¡­ How could they not be grateful? As for Lu Yuan, he is naturally pleased with this situation. The more grateful the Barbarians are to him, the more dependent they are on him, the easier it will be for him to manipulate them in the future. He has only promised to join forces with the Barbarians to launch a northern expedition against Zhou Country. However, he has not promised whether the target of the attack would be a single Hanzhong county or the whole of Zhou Country. Chu State only intends to take down Hanzhong county, intending to strengthen the defenses in the northwest direction. Before unifying Yangzhou, Lu Yuan has no intention of expanding into other territories and does not plan to go head-to-head against Zhou Country. Therefore, after occupying Hanzhong county, his most probable choice would be to continue supporting the Barbarians, letting these people driven by hunger constantly harass the Zhou People, causing them to bleed indefinitely. Let them consume each other for eight, nine, or ten years, until both sides have bled dry and exhausted their strength. By that time, Chu State would have already conquered Ning Country and unified Yangzhou. Then they can divide their army into two routes. One route going north from Hanzhong, connecting with the Snow Plains Barbarians, coming out of Longxi, pacifying Hexi, and occupying two provinces in the western part of Zhou Country. The other route could follow the Han River, emerging from Xiangyang, conquering Xiangyang and Nanyang counties in Zhou Country. In this way, with both armies marching simultaneously, how could the already weakened Zhou Country, due to years of warfare, withstand the northern expedition of a million Elite Army? If Chu State can take over Zhou Country¡¯s Longxi and Hanyang provinces, relying on these strategically advantageous locations, they can continue moving north, wiping out Zhou Country, and dominating Yong State. If they command an army to move east, they can combine forces with the Water Army on the Jiangnan, attacking Liang Country in the southwest and launching an expedition into Qingzhou. Regardless of their objective, Chu State will have an absolute advantage in the future power struggle for Nine Provinces. Zhuge Liang¡¯s Longzhong Plan from the past life is not more than that. Moreover, unlike Liu Bei who had only a single city of Xinye, Lu Yuan now has a lot more capital. Five provinces, three nations, a million elite soldiers, six Inborn individuals, the foundation of a hegemon. With such strength, what the Shu Han failed to achieve in the Longzhong Plan can be easily realized by Chu State. ¡°What I need to do now is to seize Hanzhong county first, then conquer Ning Country thoroughly and unify Yangzhou along the river, resolving this concern behind me. Only then can I move northward with peace of mind and compete with the powerhouses of Nine Provinces.¡± Lu Yuan thought to himself as he continued discussing further cooperation details with the messenger. For instance, when would the Barbarians send the benefits and conditions they had promised? Chu State is about to dispatch its troops. Would the Barbarians be willing to send some troops to help distract Zhou Country¡¯s attention? All of these issues are related to core interests and are worth debating. Even as allies, neither side is willing to concede. For a moment, the ministers, who had been called into the main hall after forming an alliance, began to argue with the Barbarian messengers. Meanwhile, Lu Yuan quietly slipped away, leaving the spittle-spraying scene. Chapter 739 - Chapter 739: Chapter 326: Wind Eagle Battle Begins Chapter 739: Chapter 326: Wind Eagle Battle Begins One day later, the negotiation results between the courtiers and the Snow Plains Nomads came out quickly. In the northern Yong State and the snowy wilderness, winter has already arrived, and snow is beginning to fall. Meanwhile, the war between the nomads and the Zhou People had reached its most intense stage. If these nomads want to have fewer people die during this winter, they must seize every opportunity before the onset of winter to snatch more supplies and grain from the Zhou People. Consequently, spring and autumn are often the seasons when the war between the nomads and the Zhou People is at its fiercest. At present, in Hegu and Longxi counties, hundreds of thousands of nomadic troops are fighting against the Zhou People and are at a disadvantage, which is precisely the time when they need external assistance. If Lu Yuan sends troops now, when the Chu soldiers arrive in Hanzhong County, even if they do nothing else, it would be enough to cause alarm among the Zhou People. With such a formidable enemy lurking nearby, the Zhou People, whether they like it or not, would have to deploy heavy forces to defend the outskirts of Hanzhong County in anticipation of the Chu State¡¯s northern expedition. In this case. The pressure on the nomads¡¯ autumn raiding army in Hegu and Longxi counties would naturally ease considerably. Perhaps this fall, they could get more supplies and grain. Even tens of thousands fewer people may die in their tribes. With such a major premise, the negotiations on both sides naturally progressed rapidly. Some of the terms fiercely demanded by Lu Yuan, such as the nomads paying one hundred million silver tales for Chu State to send troops, were agreed upon by several nomadic messengers after negotiation, and they agreed to send the silver tales back to the snowy plains, so they could be sent over immediately. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï These nomadic messengers brought along wind hawks that were bred in the snowy plains. These exotic beasts were bred using the secret techniques of the Great Mohism religion, said to be a degenerated Divine Blood Variant with a trace of Different Species bloodline in it. This hawk can fly 3,000 miles in a single day, faster than the best horses of the present world. With such an exotic beast on hand, even if the snowy plains are tens of thousands of miles away, news can be sent back within three days. Once the other side receives the message and ships the silver tales, it could be as soon as October 3rd when Zhou and Chu states conduct their trade, just before the time when Lu Yuan is set to dispatch his troops. Maybe the first batch of silver tales could be delivered to Hegu County. After all, to win over Chu State, the Snow Plains Nomads have already prepared the silver tales. These funds are readily available. They also want Chu State to send troops as soon as possible, shipping the silver tales early and hiding them in an area close to Hegu County in advance. Now that they¡¯re given the order, they can start shipping immediately. Regarding this assurance from the messenger, Lu Yuan was naturally quite satisfied. However, compared to the silver tales that were almost in the bag, Lu Yuan was more interested in the wind hawks tamed by the nomads. Now that the territory of Chu State is getting larger and larger, the distances from north to south and east to west are all 3,000 to 4,000 miles apart. From the capital of Baling to Hegu County, it¡¯s a distance of 3,700 miles. Even if riding a fast boat and an excellent horse, it would take at least five days to arrive. If Chu State unifies Yangzhou in the future, the distance between the easternmost Linhai County and the westernmost Hegu County will be 7,000 to 8,000 miles. Such a long distance would require the messenger to travel more than ten days at a pace of 800 miles per day and night. Moreover, if Chu State continues to expand northward after unifying Yangzhou, the size of the territory will become even larger, and the distances between the borders will be even greater. By then, it might take a month or even two or three months to send a message from the northernmost to the southernmost and from the easternmost to the westernmost. It is well known. Communication, roads, timely communication between the upper and lower levels of government are the key factors in testing an empire¡¯s control over its territories. Although Lu Yuan¡¯s Chu State does not have such needs at the moment. However, once he unifies Yangzhou, the vast area of nearly 10,000 miles from east to west will inevitably affect Chu State¡¯s control over its territories to some extent. Although he and each of his avatars have a spiritual connection with each other and can sense each other even over thousands of miles, they can bypass the communication between the central and local authorities to a certain extent. But even so, he only has two avatars at the moment, barely enough to cover two counties at most. Only two counties are of no avail. Keep in mind that Chu State has five counties, and it will soon become six. Even if the cooperation with the nomads goes smoothly in the future, the territory of Chu State could quickly expand to seven, eight, or even nine counties. By then, with the expanded territory, Lu Yuan will naturally need more efficient means to achieve rapid communication between the central and local governments. The current post station system, although not bad, can only deliver messages at a rate of 800 miles per day and night. However, in this contentious world, where Inborn Grandmasters and Immortal Method experts are present, there are too many dangers and unexpected situations at hand. Chu State needs better communication methods and better communication technology to maintain its local rule. So when he learned of the existence of this exotic beast, the wind hawk, Lu Yuan took the initiative to summon the messenger of Great Mohism to inquire whether they could sell some wind hawks to Chu State. The messenger, who was soon to marry the spiritual woman and become the son-in-law of the divine religion, of course, would not be stingy in his response to the King of Chu. However, since wind hawks have Different Species bloodlines and are difficult to breed, they even need to be fed Divine Blood Elixirs to deepen their bloodlines and grow. To raise a mature wind hawk from birth, it takes at least ten Divine Blood Elixirs. Given the current trend of declining spiritual energy in the world and the gradual death and degeneration of Divine Blood Variants, Great Mohism does not have many Divine Blood Elixirs left to feed these wind hawks. Chapter 740 - Chapter 740: Chapter 326: The Wind Eagle Battle Begins_2 Chapter 740: Chapter 326: The Wind Eagle Battle Begins_2 Now, there are only 33 Wind Eagles left in the entire sect, ten of which have been distributed to tribes on the Snowy Plains. Excluding some juvenile eagles and the ones he uses himself, the Great Mohism can only give ten Wind Eagles to Lu Yuan at most. Moreover, after sending the Wind Eagles, the Great Mohism will deduct 100 Divine Pills from the 500 originally promised to Lu Yuan. Because they need to train ten more Wind Eagles, these 100 Divine Pills will be used as nourishment for the growth of the birds. Naturally, Lu Yuan agreed without hesitation. It¡¯s just 100 Divine Blood Elixirs. With this amount of elixirs, even if he got his hands on them, he could only cultivate a few top-class experts at most. For the current Chu State, this wouldn¡¯t make much of a difference. What Chu State lacks now are Inborn Grandmasters, not top-class experts. One hundred elixirs are far from enough to cultivate Inborn Grandmasters. However, with the proper use of ten Wind Eagles, the communication problem between Chu State and the local regions could be solved. The value that can be demonstrated in this will be much greater than that of a top-class expert. After all, Wind Eagles can travel 3,000 miles per day, while even a top-class expert can barely travel 1,000 miles daily. A threefold speed difference is sufficient to offset the value of a top-class expert. At least Lu Yuan felt that the value of ten Wind Eagles far exceeded that of ten top-class experts. After all, the former comes from a special channel and their bloodlines are rare, making their numbers limited by nature. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 But even without the Divine Blood Elixir, a martial artist with good talent, coupled with proper martial arts techniques, can still become a top-class expert after decades of training. Can the value of something rare and non-replicable be the same as something that can be mass-produced? After the 100 million taels of silver, the matter of the Exotic Beast Wind Eagles was settled. As for the Spiritual woman of the Great Mohism and the 400 dowry Divine Pills, the Snow Plains Nomads would only send them after Lu Yuan had launched his troops. In short. Nomads are waiting for Lu Yuan to make a statement, attack Zhou Country, and submit his credentials first. Only then will the Barbarians marry the Spiritual woman and present the dowry. It seemed reasonable, and Lu Yuan had no objections. After all, they had agreed to give 100 million taels of silver in advance. What more could they ask for in terms of sincerity? On the contrary, it was time for him to show his sincerity. Lu Yuan did so quickly. After reaching an initial agreement on cooperation, on the 30th of September, Lu Yuan assembled the Group of Ministers and conferred the title of True Person to Qingyunzi in an open ceremony, ranking him among the First Rank. That same day, he ordered this Avatar True Person to head north overnight to the West City Prefecture of Xiangyang County and take command of the Forbidden army and navy that had already arrived there. At West City Prefecture, Chu State had secretly assembled 60,000 Forbidden troops, 10,000 County soldiers, and 20,000 sailors, a total of 90,000 soldiers and horses. On the 3rd of October, with the transaction completed, Qingyunzi will lead these 90,000 troops to launch a surprise attack on Zhou Country and invade Hanzhong County. At the same time, 40,000 Forbidden troops and 10,000 County soldiers, totaling 50,000, await orders at Jianmenguan in Xichuan County. Before that, Hegu and Xichuanqing had been quietly sent to Jianmenguan by Lu Yuan, who had appointed them as the General Managers of the two counties and True Person of the nation. All they have to do is wait for the right time to attack Hanzhong County, serving as an auxiliary force, assisted by Qingyunzi. Yes. For this attack on Hanzhong County, Lu Yuan did not plan to lead the troops himself but wanted to hand the battle over to his two avatars. Originally, he planned to send the newly-developed avatar Qingyunzi to Qianzhong County. At the same time, there were no immediate plans to attack Hanzhong County. However, Zhou Country sent envoys to buy food, Jihui and Cui Changqing, two Great Chu ministers, passed away, and Snow Plains Nomads sent people to seek an alliance¡­ A series of significant changes brought many opportunities but also undoubtedly disrupted Lu Yuan¡¯s arrangements. In order to carry out a deceptive strategy, confuse the Zhou People, and display weakness to the outside world, Qingyunzi, who was originally planned to be exposed, had to be hidden. With Jihui¡¯s passing and Sun Siwen busy consolidating the political situation, Lu Yuan had no choice but to send Queen Lan Cai¡¯er to patrol and appease the southwest in response to the unrest in Qianzhong County, thus stabilizing the local population. Without the Queen in the court, no amount of reliance on Sun Siwen alone could maintain stability in the court or deter other forces. One king and one queen of Chu must still remain in the capital to reassure the people. In the absence of the Queen, Lu Yuan, as the king, naturally had to stay behind. And to be honest. Without his deterrence as the founding monarch and the current God of War, it would be difficult to keep the Ning Country, whose strength had soared after recuperation, in check as they began to show signs of restlessness. A single Lu Yuan, owing simply to his own deterrence, was no less than four or five Inborn Grandmasters in the eyes of the world. After all, the feat of defeating four Inborn Grandmasters was achieved at the cost of the lives of several Inborn Grandmasters, a lesson learned in blood and tears. In addition to Lu Yuan¡¯s unbroken record of victories spanning decades, having him lead troops would make Chu no less powerful than an additional 200,000 Elite Army. Just one King of Chu, as long as he sits in Baling, would be tantamount to having conjured up two or three more Inborn Grandmasters and hundreds of thousands of troops out of thin air for Chu Country. With him around, the Ning People, however restless, will not dare to launch an attack on Chu State. Of course. Although he has great confidence in his reputation, Lu Yuan does not truly believe that he alone can deter Jiangdong and be completely worry-free. After making the decision to stay in Baling and oversee the rear, and after confirming the alliance with the Snowy Plain Barbarians, he issued an edict for a new round of military expansion in the country. Chapter 741 - Chapter 741: Chapter 326: The Wind Eagle Battle Begins_3 Chapter 741: Chapter 326: The Wind Eagle Battle Begins_3 Lu Yuan prepared to recruit another 100,000 people in the country and train five new Forbidden Armies. Now, Chu State¡¯s various standing armies only amount to 490,000, just barely meeting the basic defensive needs in this age of great contention. It¡¯s a situation of having enough for defense but not enough for offense. Like this expedition to Hanzhong, besides the local garrison troops in Xichuan and Xiangyang counties, the Chu Central Government could only deploy 60,000 troops for the war, including 20,000 naval forces. This strength naturally left Lu Yuan feeling unsatisfied. However, due to financial constraints, Chu State could not afford to maintain a large army before. Even if the army was insufficient, there was no way around it. But now, with the 100 million taels of silver backed by the Snow Plains Nomads, military expenses are no longer a problem. Recruiting 100,000 new soldiers is nothing, even recruiting 500,000 would be affordable for Chu State. But although Chu State could afford to maintain 500,000 new soldiers, Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t crazy enough to recruit that many directly. The current soldier-civilian ratio in Chu State is already 16:1. That is, out of every 16 people in Chu, including men, women, the elderly, and children, one is a soldier. If Lu Yuan really recruited another 500,000, then the army¡¯s scale would go up to one million, meaning one in every eight people in Chu State¡¯s population of eight million would be a soldier, with every household having someone in the army. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï How crazy would that be? If he did that, not only would the quality of the recruits vary widely, but there would also be a large number of old and weak soldiers. Moreover, it would severely impact Chu State¡¯s local production, leading to a lack of people working the fields, a massive reduction in grain output, a decline in urban labor and business, and a significant drop in tax revenue. Lu Yuan certainly wouldn¡¯t engage in such a shortsighted and reckless behavior. So for this recruitment, he only planned to enlist 100,000 people, maintaining the soldier-civilian ratio at around 13:1, or one standing soldier for every two or three households. This way, it would ensure the quality of the source of soldiers and keep the local impact within a controllable range, without affecting production and tax revenue, and there won¡¯t be any significant loss to the power of Chu State. Meanwhile, 100,000 soldiers should almost meet Chu State¡¯s needs. At least with these 100,000 people, plus the existing 100,000 Forbidden Army in Dongting County, 30,000 county soldiers, 5,000 Jinwu Guards, and 5,000 palace guards, Dongting County will have 240,000 standing troops. With so many troops, plus two Inborn Grandmasters, Lu Yuan and Sun Shiwen, they won¡¯t have to worry about advantage even if Ning Country launched an all-out attack, as long as they don¡¯t take the initiative to attack. Just right. Over in Jiangdong¡¯s Ning Country, they are recruiting 150,000 new soldiers, planning to expand their internal army size to 800,000. Lu Yuan is also recruiting 100,000 soldiers now, expanding the army to 600,000. If there¡¯s still a need to expand the army later, after conquering Hanzhong County and gaining over one million people, new sources of soldiers can be recruited from there, a few tens of thousands more. After marrying the spiritual woman from Great Mohism, Chu State will further expand its number of Inborn Grandmasters and conquer Nanhai Country and Su Country. After conquering Lingnan, even more troops can be recruited. After a few rounds of such a snowball effect, Chu State could also increase its army to 800,000 strong, like Ning Country, without affecting domestic production. For every step of future development, Lu Yuan has a clear plan, and now he is just following the proper procedures. However, bearing the heavy responsibilities of guarding the rear and expanding the army, Lu Yuan naturally has no more energy left to deal with other things. Therefore, whether he likes it or not, he cannot intervene in the battle of Hanzhong this time and can only entrust Huang Xuan and Qingyunzi to do it. Luckily, these two are his avatars, so letting them lead the army wouldn¡¯t worry Lu Yuan. Even if he wanted to, he could contact them through divine thoughts and directly manipulate the battle from a thousand miles away for an indirect command. However, there isn¡¯t much need to do so. Both Huang Xuan and Qingyunzi have inherited part of Lu Yuan¡¯s memory and abilities, so they both have extraordinary military strength and command capabilities, not requiring his main body¡¯s intervention to complete the task well. This has already been proven during the previous Jianchuan campaign in the southwest. With an army of tens of thousands, Huang Xuan didn¡¯t exert much effort yet managed to defeat Jianchuan and plunder some of Nanzhao¡¯s territories, which was quite impressive. With this example, in the current war in Hanzhong, and Chu State¡¯s many preparations amid Zhou people¡¯s lack of vigilance, Lu Yuan naturally had nothing to worry about. ¡°Also, letting Qingyunzi take action this time has a benefit. Since this avatar will be intimidating the southwest in the future, it won¡¯t have any military achievements, and people won¡¯t be convinced.¡± Inside Baling City, it is now the third day of October, and after dealing with some trivial matters about recruiting, Lu Yuan¡¯s gaze unconsciously looked towards the far north, as if he could see the battlefield of Hanzhong thousands of miles away. The previous reason for Huang Xuan¡¯s ability to intimidate the southwest relied on his achievements in defeating Jianchuan and his several displays of personal strength. As Huang Xuan¡¯s successor, Qingyunzi also needs merits and achievements to intimidate the people of the southwest. By leading the troops to capture Hanzhong County and, if successful, killing the Southern Pillar State Grand General Dongfang Wuyun of Zhou people, the Qingyunzi¡¯s charisma could be attested by the achievement of capturing a county and killing an Inborn Grandmaster. Having both of these would surely suffice to intimidate the unruly Yi people and rebellious vassal states when this True Person avatar arrives in the southwest. Meanwhile, Two thousand miles away from Baling, at the border between Xiangyang and Hanzhong counties, over 10,000 Zhou soldiers, with more than 100,000 conscripted Hanzhong civilian workers, are pushing carts and looking towards the direction of Han River downstream. And in their sight, A fleet of ships bearing the ¡°Chu¡± and ¡°Grain¡± banners is breaking through the fog on the river surface under the early morning sun, quickly heading towards the pier. However, on these ships, there is no grain that the Zhou people are hoping for, but elite Chu soldiers who are ready to pounce as soon as the ship docks. At the forefront of the fleet, a figure dressed in a green robe stands with his hands behind his back, facing the wind, and commanding an imposing presence. It is Qingyunzi. By now, he has taken control of this fleet, as well as the tens of thousands of Forbidden Army troops on board. With such a powerful army behind him and facing the unprepared Zhou soldiers, as well as the Zhou officer bearing the banner, who wants to come forward to negotiate, Qingyunzi¡¯s face shows a cold smile: ¡°Pass the order, prepare the bows and arrows, fire!¡± As they get within a hundred feet, with the order, clusters of black clouds fly up, and the terrifying man-eating beast tears off its disguise. Chapter 742 - Chapter 742: Chapter 327: First Victory Reception Chapter 742: Chapter 327: First Victory Reception Time had reached noon, and the golden sunlight was sprinkled from the sky, completely dissipating the dense fog that had enveloped the river surface earlier. Busy soldiers walked back and forth on the riverbank, as auxiliary troops dragged corpses and placed them to the side for classification and stacking. The corpses of the Zhou People would be collected and burned, their remains eventually buried in pits. As for the corpses belonging to the Chu people, they would be incinerated separately according to their identity tags and their ashes and belongings sent back to their hometowns. Barrels of water were scooped up from the river by soldiers and then poured onto the pier planks for a simple wash and rinse. More soldiers began to line up in an orderly manner, then broke into separate camp units, following their respective officers along the official road behind the pier, quickly heading towards various towns and cities. Some people stayed behind and began gathering Zhao People soldiers and civilian workers as captives, ordering them under strict surveillance and management. Of course. More people still remained on the ships, following the flagship, continuing upstream on the Han River, swiftly pushing deeper into Hanzhong Prefecture. ¡°Chief Steward, the results of the battle¡¯s gains and losses have been accounted for,¡± On the cold river surface, a man wearing a green robe and dressed as a high-ranking civil official hastily came aboard the flagship, greeted Qingyunzi with a salute, and reported: ¡°After checking, we have broken through the enemy ranks of about 120,000, among which there are 12,000 armored Zhou soldiers, and about 110,000 civilian workers. In this battle, our army killed about 2,000 Zhou soldiers, captured 8,000, and 2,000 more Zhou soldiers escaped. About 5,000 Zhou civilian workers were killed, over 70,000 captured, and about 30,000 escaped. The captives have been placed under custody, and soldiers have been sent to pursue the fleeing enemy. After capturing nearby towns and cities, these fugitives can be easily eliminated. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? In addition, our army¡¯s casualties in this battle were about 700 people, among which more than 300 were killed, about 200 were seriously injured, and more than 200 were slightly injured. The dead have been taken care of, and army doctors have been treating the wounded in accordance with regulations. Moreover, the one million silver taels brought by the Zhou People for the first trade have been confiscated from the pier and put into sealed storage.¡± Through more than twenty years of continuous growth, the Chu Army had already established many standardized regulations. Only a day after the battle, basic statistics on gains and losses had been quickly compiled by military officials, a process that showed great efficiency. ¡°Hmm.¡± After listening to the report from the official, Qingyunzi responded with a nod and waved his hand: ¡°Since there are no issues, proceed according to the usual practices.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± The green-robed official behind him nodded, then saluted and withdrew. Qingyunzi still stood at the bow of the ship, looking at the landscape in front of him with his hands behind his back. This morning¡¯s surprise attack had gone smoothly without any accidents. The Zhou People were completely unprepared, and Chu State¡¯s long-held plan combined with their absolute advantage in military forces ensured that the dock¡¯s defenses were immediately broken in a single wave of attack. Those Zhou People were completely unable to organize any defense or even react before they were confusedly defeated and captured. If it were not for the sheer number of Zhou People, including soldiers and civilians, totaling over 100,000, it would not have been possible for even fleeing soldiers to appear in such a hasty situation. Of course. Even the escape of tens of thousands of people did not matter much in the grand scheme of things. In this campaign against Hanzhong Prefecture, Qingyunzi brought a large number of troops, totaling 90,000 for both land and water forces. He waved his hand, and 20,000 troops were dispersed to chase and attack the enemy and occupy towns and cities along their path. Now that the main forces of the Zhou People in the west of Hanzhong Region have been defeated, and there is no defensive power in the interior of Nanjiang Prefecture adjacent to Xicheng Prefecture, apart from those fleeing soldiers. With these 20,000 troops alone, it will not be long before this region can be captured, and even further north and south, capturing the other two prefectures of Baishi and Xixiang in the western Hanzhong. ¡°No, Baishi Prefecture is close to Jianmenguan. Now that I¡¯ve launched a surprise attack on my side, Huang Xuan should also be launching an attack on that side.¡± With 50,000 soldiers and another avatar equivalent to the second realm of the Inborn Stage, it might not take long before the side troops I dispatched act and Baishi Prefecture is taken by another troops from Xichuan.¡± As Qingyunzi thought about this, he couldn¡¯t help but feel a sense of regret. It wasn¡¯t because he hadn¡¯t earned more credit or felt any dissatisfaction or regret. As an avatar, Qingyunzi was essentially one with Lu Yuan, both of them the Pillar State Grand General of Chu Country. As the master, there was naturally no such thing as merit. What he regretted was that during this trade, Dongfang Wuyun, the Nan Pillar State Grand General of Zhou Country, had not shown up in person. According to the original plan. If Dongfang Wuyun had personally appeared for the first trade between the two countries, Qingyunzi would have had to launch a sneak attack during the trade, directly taking out the Zhou Country General who was guarding Hanzhong. But things didn¡¯t go as expected. During the first trade between the two countries, which involved millions of silver taels and held great importance, Dongfang Wuyun surprisingly did not show up? Was it foresight? Or disinterest? Qingyunzi pondered for a moment, then quickly shook his head. Although he had inherited some of his original memories and wisdom, his limited divine knowledge could not support him to think about many things more deeply. Such in-depth considerations were not suitable for an avatar like him. Chapter 743 - Chapter 743: Chapter 327: First Victory Reception_2 Chapter 743: Chapter 327: First Victory Reception_2 Fortunately, no matter whether this matter can be clarified or not, it actually has no bearing on the overall situation. Regardless of what Dongfang Wuyun was thinking, he had already led his troops to Hanzhong Prefecture by this time. When the time came and the army was under Nanzheng city, they would surround him in the city, making it impossible for him to escape, and then kill him. Killing a mere Inborn First Realm Grandmaster was not a difficult task for Qingyunzi. He was confident that he would handle this matter well and fulfill the instructions of his original body. ¡°However, before that, I should hurry up and reach Nanzheng before the news spreads and they react, so as to cut off their retreat.¡± With this thought, Qingyunzi sighed lightly. The key to this surprise attack was speed. So fast that the enemy would have no preparation, so fast that they wouldn¡¯t have time to react. The first step had already been successfully completed. But the second step¡­ Looking down at the fleet below him, which was already moving forward desperately, but due to going against the current, its speed was still not very fast, he couldn¡¯t help but shake his head. With their current speed, even if they traveled day and night without stopping, the fastest they could reach Nanzheng city would be in two days. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï And two days¡¯ time. If the Zhou People were smart, they would have enough time to send news of what happened on the pier back to Nanzheng city. Although the enemy might know about it, it would be difficult for them to organize effective defenses within a day or two. But this was still a hidden danger. ¡°I need to consider a few things in advance¡­¡± Qingyunzi frowned and thought for a while, before turning and beckoning a personal guard, ordering him after he arrived: ¡°Pass the order to General Luo Cheng, after arriving at Taibai Prefecture, disembark at Yunpu Pier.¡¯ Then ask him to lead his 20,000 troops to attack and capture Baishi Prefecture City.¡¯ After capturing the city, he will lead another group of troops northward, seize Xiegu Pass, and completely cut off the connection between Hanzhong Prefecture and the Zhou People in the north.¡¯ Hanzhong Prefecture, surrounded by mountains on all sides, can be described as a small basin wrapped by mountain ridges. To the east of Hanzhong Prefecture, there is the Han River connecting Xiangyang Prefecture. To the south, where it borders Xichuan Prefecture, there is a Jianmenguan Pass separating the north and south.¡¯ To the west, where it borders Longxi Prefecture, there is a Yangping Pass blocking the main road. To the north and Guannei Prefecture, there is Xiegu Pass.¡¯ These three passes and one river are all dangerous. If they can be fully occupied, they will be enough to block all directions and keep the enemy out. Since it was impossible to completely block the news from reaching Nanzheng city, Qingyunzi simply didn¡¯t bother stopping it. His goal was just to wipe out the Zhou army in Hanzhong Prefecture and capture and kill Dongfang Wuyun, the Grand General of the Pillar State in the South.¡¯ At this point, Qingyunzi couldn¡¯t predict what the enemy would think, what they would do.¡¯ But he could guarantee what the enemy could not do.¡¯ For example, sending troops to seize Xiegu Pass first, blocking the Zhou People¡¯s escape route to the north.¡¯ Then let Huang Xuan, the Incumbent Southern Army¡¯s light troops, attack Yangping Pass from the south.¡¯ In this way, the three passes and one river in Hanzhong Prefecture would all be in Chu State¡¯s hands, and the Zhou People in the prefecture would become like fish in the barrel, unable to escape even if they had wings.¡¯ ¡°This matter needs to be told to Huang Xuan. In order to ensure timely communication, I should contact my original body and let him speak to Huang Xuan.¡± Qingyunzi thought for a moment, then closed his eyes slightly, concentrated his thoughts, and began to reach out to his original body thousands of miles away. Although the connection between the original body and the avatars could span tens of millions of miles, this kind of communication was limited to the original body and the avatars. There was no such ability between the external avatars and the avatars themselves. So at this moment, even if Qingyunzi wanted to let Huang Xuan cooperate without wasting time, he could only first tell his original body his plans, then have the original body notify Huang Xuan. Although it was a bit troublesome, it was much faster than sending a messenger from his side to Huang Xuan, which would take a day or half a day. ¡­ In Huaguang Hall, Lu Yuan was receiving the barbarian emissaries and explaining to them the matter of sending troops to Hanzhong today. As he spoke, he sensed a resonance in the dark connection, so he couldn¡¯t help but pause, his eyes slightly focused.¡¯ ¡°Hmm¡­ does it need Huang Xuan¡¯s cooperation?¡± After receiving the message, he whispered inaudibly, and then closed his eyes as well, passing the received information from Qingyunzi through the connection between the original body and the avatar to Huang Xuan.¡¯ After this back and forth, it took only five or six breaths for the message to be transmitted.¡¯ The speed was so fast that the barbarian envoys below thought that the King of Chu had just hesitated for a moment and then quickly came back to his senses, without noticing anything unusual. ¡°Your Majesty, as you say, Chu has already started attacking Zhou. However, with my due diligence, I have not heard any news of Chu mobilizing troops or seen any signs of it.¡¯ ¡°I cannot determine whether this news is true or false, and I cannot pass such one-sided information back to the Snowy Wilderness. I cannot ask the spiritual woman to come to Chu now.¡± Although the five envoys instinctively believed that the King of Chu would not deceive them, this deception had no point and could be easily exposed.¡¯ But at the same time.¡¯ As the envoy said, Chu¡¯s deception and concealment this time was executed so well.¡¯ Before it was launched, it not only deceived them but also outsiders.¡¯ Until the news from Hanzhong has been specifically reported back, no one dares to believe that Chu has already begun to declare war on Zhou.¡¯ Because at this moment, in the eyes of outsiders, Chu and Zhou were still preparing to trade grain and were in the honeymoon phase of a semi-alliance.¡¯ Chapter 744 - Chapter 744: Chapter 327: First Victory Reception_3 Chapter 744: Chapter 327: First Victory Reception_3 Who would believe that the Chu State would act against Zhou Country without a word of disagreement, possibly even with premeditation, beneath such appearances? Remember that Chu State has just lost an Inborn Grandmaster and a prime minister, which has caused some instability both within and outside the court. On the border, hundreds of thousands of Ning Country¡¯s troops are still watching from Jiangdong, aren¡¯t they? How could Chu State dare, with both internal and external troubles, to have the audacity to attack Zhou Country? Even the barbarians, who have already entered into an alliance with the Chu State, do not dare to believe that the Chu State has indeed taken action, as there are no signs of it. In reality. )After the journey of the alliance, as time passed and no movement was seen from Chu State, these barbarians began to feel anxious and started to doubt whether Chu State was just trying to deceive them into giving money without intending to deal with Zhou Country. Based on this suspicion, they couldn¡¯t bear it any longer and wanted to urge Chu State to quickly fulfill their alliance. Unexpectedly, before they had a chance to act, the King of Chu summoned them and stated that he had already started. ¡°There can be no doubt about this matter.¡± Looking at the several surprised and doubtful messengers below, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t care about their doubts and simply said, ¡°I have just received news that the two armies I have dispatched to conquer Hanzhong have already begun their operations. Especially the main troop in Xiangyang, who has broken through Zhou People¡¯s guard in the western territory of Hanzhong and is heading towards Hanzhong city. If they are swift enough, it is possible that Nanzheng city could be captured in less than three to five days.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Saying this, he couldn¡¯t help but smile confidently. Lu Yuan had no doubts about whether Qingyunzi and Huang Xuan¡¯s two armies could capture Hanzhong county. The two armies combined amount to a total of 140,000 soldiers, along with two high-level practitioners who are equivalent to the second realm of Inborn. Their team can be described as luxurious. On the other hand, the Zhou People only have 50,000 soldiers, including both soldiers and county troops. At this moment, of these 50,000 soldiers and troops, Qingyunzi has already annihilated over 10,000 of them. The remaining 30,000 are dispersed among the various county posts in Hanzhong, only sufficient to maintain stability. Of the remaining Inborn Grandmasters, there is only Dongfang Wuyun, who is in the first state. How such insignificant strength could withstand the thunderous onslaught of the Chu State? The only variable in this plan is Dongfang Wuyun noticing something is amiss and deciding to abandon the bulk of the army, making a quick escape like Li Xiong did in the past. In such a scenario facing an inborn grandmaster who doesn¡¯t stand and fight but only wants to escape, even if Huang Xuan and Qingyunzi join forces, you can only watch his retreating figure with nothing to do. However, considering the extremely low combat death rate of Inborn Grandmasters in this world, before Huang Xuan and Qingyunzi have made a name for themselves as deadly inborn grandmasters like Lu Yuan, they shouldn¡¯t worry about Dongfang Wuyun running away out of fear. It¡¯s very likely that after hearing the news, he will stay in Nanzheng city, try to gather his troops, and wait for reinforcements from Zhou Country. If this can be achieved, once Qingyunzi and Huang Xuan arrive under Nanzheng city with their troops, the two of them can join hands and surely kill him. Of course. No matter whether Dongfang Wuyun decides to fight or flee, it doesn¡¯t matter to the overall situation. If he manages to kill such an inborn grandmaster and further weaken Zhou Country, Lu Yuan would certainly be pleased. If he can¡¯t be killed, that¡¯s also fine. After all, Huang Xuan is supposed to stay in Hanzhong to guard it. With this avatar present, Chu State is not afraid of Zhou Country, unless they come to attack with their full strength, sending three or four Inborn Grandmasters. With Huang Xuan¡¯s strength, he can easily handle it. And to mobilize six or seven Inborn Grandmasters, with over 500,000 troops, to come and attack at full power¡­ Lu Yuan doubts whether Zhou Country can gather so much strength now? Even if the other side really can mobilize this. To send out so many troops, the movement would definitely not be small; Chu State spies would relay the news before Zhou Country¡¯s troops have even set off. At that time, Chu State can also mobilize its own troops, marching north to contend with Zhou Country. So small scale troops and soldiers are no threat to Huang Xuan. With a large scale of soldiers and horses, the Chu State could make preparations in advance. Adding both elements together, it would be as if Hanzhong County was already completely safe and untroubled. However, while Lu Yuan was confident, others who didn¡¯t know about his underlying strength and hidden cards, were undoubtedly sceptical. Just like the five messengers below. ¡°Chu State has already won the first battle?¡± As they listened to Lu Yuan¡¯s words, they felt an absurdity rising in their hearts. This King of Chu in front of them had been with them all along, never leaving, and no outsider had ever entered. Now the King of Chu was claiming to have news from the battlefield thousands of miles away, naturally causing everyone to doubt him, thinking that this was a means for the King of Chu to deceive them. However, the messenger from the Great Mohism did not, like his other four companions, directly identify it as a lie. Instead, he remembered King Chu¡¯s slightly strange and illogical moments of distraction just now, and thought that King Chu might have a means of communicating over thousands of miles in an instant. In this world where Immortal Techniques exist, such methods are actually not rare. Back when the spiritual energy was rich, let alone communicating thousands of miles away, even tens of thousands of miles wasn¡¯t a big deal. Their Great Mohism, in essence, is a cultivation sect, only transitioning from cultivation to martial arts due to the decline in spiritual energy. However, no matter how it changes, the foundation would never change. In the Great Mohism, there is a similar secret technique for communicating thousands of miles away. It¡¯s just that now the Celestial Spirit Qi of Heaven and Earth has dried up, all kinds of Immortal Techniques are gradually hidden, and this method gradually became unknown to ordinary people. So it¡¯s normal for the other four tribal messengers, who aren¡¯t aware of this method, to be suspicious. But this messenger from the Great Mohism, who could represent a sect, naturally held a remarkable position and knew some of the Immortal Technique secrets. Upon being slightly reminded at this moment, he immediately grasped the point. ¡°If the King of Chu says so, then it doesn¡¯t seem like he¡¯s trying to deceive us.¡± After having some guesses in his heart, not waiting for the other four tribal messengers to open their mouths, the messenger from the Great Mohism took the lead and said, ¡°Since Chu State has already fulfilled the pact, then the envoy will later transmit this back to the sect to inform them about it. It¡¯s just that the Spiritual Woman is our Divine Lady of the Snowy Wilderness, with a prestigious status, receiving the faith and worship of millions in the Snowy Wilderness. For the Spiritual Woman to get married, it¡¯s an event that hasn¡¯t occurred in millions of years in the Snowy Wilderness. So, may I ask for Chu State to offer corresponding rituals in advance, sending people to welcome her, to comfort the hearts of the people.¡± Lu Yuan looked at the messenger from the Great Mohism who spoke, and couldn¡¯t help but admire him a bit in his heart. The reason he had proactively revealed his ability to communicate over thousands of miles was not only to hasten the completion of the Spiritual woman¡¯s marriage, but also to test these Snow Plains Nomads and to intimidate them in the process. Looking at it now. Putting aside the other four tribal messengers¡ª they were just ordinary mortals. But this messenger from the Great Mohism, indeed possessed some skills, saw through the hidden meaning behind his words and made a statement. Not bad at all. If a single messenger could be so capable, then the spiritual woman from the Great Mohism, one of the twin spirits, would surely bring more surprises for himself. Maybe the one he was marrying, was not a self-proclaimed divine lady, but a true divine lady. Perhaps the inheritance of the Great Dharma God has not been completely severed. With these thoughts in mind, looking at the serious messenger from the Great Mohism, Lu Yuan said amiably: ¡°Messenger, please be assured. The spiritual woman¡¯s status is prestigious, I hold utmost respect for her in my heart. For this occasion of welcoming the spiritual woman to Chu, my Chu State is willing to give her royal treatment and will definitely not make her feel wronged.¡± Yes, only the welcoming ceremony would be given royal treatment. But when the Spiritual Woman came over, her status would remain a concubine. As for Lan Cai¡¯er, his rightful wife, Lu Yuan had affection for her in his heart, and he wouldn¡¯t abandon his wife for success and become heartless. Chapter 745 - Chapter 745: Chapter 328 Besieged City Peoples Heart Chapter 745: Chapter 328 Besieged City People¡¯s Heart Flurries of snow fluttered from the sky, and a cold wind blew from the north, causing the flags around to flutter. Dongfang Wuyun stood on the city wall, his eyes looking east, watching the continuous military camps stationed along the south bank of the Han River, a trace of worry floating in his eyes. The Chu people came too fast, and it was too unexpected. No one had thought that Chu State, which had originally been having a pleasant conversation and had quickly reached a huge grain trade deal with them, would suddenly launch a sneak attack during the grain trade. Over ten thousand elite troops and hundreds of thousands of civilian workers conscripted from all over the army in Nanjiang Prefecture were nearly wiped out in one fell swoop during the Chu¡¯s sudden attack. Even Nanjiang Prefecture, in its emptiness, was easily taken by the Chu people. When the news reached Nanzheng city, Dongfang Wuyun, who was reading the accounts in the government office at the time, dropped his pen in shock. He really didn¡¯t understand how the Chu people dared and were able to send troops to Hanzhong. Given the current situation of Chu State with internal and external troubles, where did they get the confidence to attack Zhou Country? Yes, Zhou Country is currently facing enemies on three sides, and the situation is indeed very unfavorable. But of Zhou Country¡¯s three battlefields, the eastern Henan Prefecture is supported by the natural defenses of Helong, with a large river to the north and dangerous passes to the southeast. With 200,000 troops stationed there and two Pillar State Grand Generals presiding, they can protect themselves even if Liang sends 500,000 troops to attack. The northern Shuofang Prefecture, though without dangerous passes, also has a large river for support, and its vast grasslands and deserts make it difficult for people to traverse, which can also be considered a natural barrier. Zhou Country¡¯s 300,000 most elite Northern Border troops are stationed here, led by two Pillar State Grand Generals, who have kept the Wei people from crossing the river for decades. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï As for the western Helong Prefecture, there are 400,000 regular troops stationed, two Pillar State Grand Generals and two Protector-country Grand Generals, plus many more local militia, with nearly a million troops gathered here. Even the Barbarians who came down from the Snowy Wilderness have had a hard time in the Helong wars over the years and have been defeated in succession. The northern and eastern battlelines are safe, and the western battleline has the upper hand. Although Zhou country seems to be in a difficult situation, its foundation and heritage still remain. If they wanted, the court could still organize a 200,000-strong army despite the shortage of money and grain in the country at the moment, and equip it with a Protector-country Grand General to lead it on a Southern Expedition. It is precisely because of this strong strength that Dongfang Wuyun couldn¡¯t understand why Chu State, having lost its mind, would attack Zhou Country. Could it be that after defeating some southern barbarians and bullying those small countries in the past few years, they really thought they were Unrivaled in the World and dared to provoke Zhou Country like this? Yes. With its development in recent years, Chu State has gradually begun to transform from a small country into a hegemonic power. With eight million people, 500,000 troops, and five Inborn powerful individuals, it does sound intimidating. This kind of strength is enough to make people suffocate when compared to those small countries that only have a half or a single prefecture. But in the eyes of those truly powerful countries, it¡¯s just that. As just mentioned. As long as Zhou Country is willing, it can send a Protector-country Grand General and 200,000 troops south at any time. By then, the combined forces of the garrison in Hanzhong Prefecture would give them 250,000 troops and two Innate Generals stationed here. This strength is already equivalent to half of Chu State. And this is only one-fifth of Zhou Country. But to summon so many troops, Chu State would have to overturn everything. The difference between the foundations of an old and a newly-promoted hegemonic country is such that it makes people despair. Yet despite this, Chu State sent troops. And in order to plan this war, they made so many preparations. First, they used grain trade as a cover, then secretly mobilized their troops. Taking advantage of the relaxed defenses on the day of the trade, they launched a surprise attack, completely opening the western gate of Hanzhong Prefecture. Now, tens of thousands of Chu soldiers are at the foot of the city, with countless ships on the wide Han River. The Chu people have completely sealed off this great city of Hanzhong from land and water. In comparison. Although Dongfang Wuyun immediately closed the city gate and conscripted soldiers in the city after receiving the news. How much reaction could they make in such a hurried situation? Up until now, the city is still in chaos, a complete mess. ¡°Grand General.¡± As Dongfang Wuyun was pondering, a deputy general walked up behind him, saluted, and said: ¡°I have been ordered to train the troops. Now, in addition to the original ten thousand garrison troops in the city, I have also conscripted two thousand guards from wealthy households and merchants in the city, as well as twenty thousand able-bodied men.¡± In addition, various city defense weapons, armor, and supplies have also been ordered by the city government officials to be transported out and distributed.¡± With these 32,000 people here, plus the Grand General presiding, even if Chu sends 100,000 troops to attack, they won¡¯t be able to shake Nanzheng city.¡± At its peak, Nanzheng city was said to have 50,000 households, or more than 300,000 people. But that was many, many years ago. With the wars of recent years, especially after Lu Yuan, who was playing in Changsha at the time, made a trip with his troops twelve years ago, Hanzhong fell into a complete decline. At that time, after the Northern Expedition and capturing Hanzhong, Lu Yuan directly ordered 350,000 households, nearly two million people from Hanzhong to move, in order to enrich the country. After this migration, Hanzhong¡¯s population was reduced by more than half, leaving only about a third, just over a hundred thousand households, or more than a million people. In recent years, with Zhou Country¡¯s governance, Hanzhong Prefecture has gradually become revitalized. Furthermore, after the Helong wars began four years ago, many people from the two prefectures who sought to avoid the war fled to this area and settled down. Chapter 746 - Chapter 746: Chapter 328: The Siege and Peoples Hearts_2 Chapter 746: Chapter 328: The Siege and People¡¯s Hearts_2 With the influx of a large number of outsiders and the revival of local production, Hanzhong¡¯s development was greatly stimulated, and the place gradually regained some of its former prosperity. But it was just a few points. After more than ten years of development, the once-empty Nanzheng city has only recovered a population of about 100,000, far from the more than 300,000 at its peak. Due to the lack of population, even if urgent conscription were carried out today, the city households would only be able to muster 20,000 militia, not even reaching 50,000 people. Although they could not gather 50,000 soldiers, the 32,000 troops still made Dongfang Wuyun feel relieved. As the deputy general said, with these 30,000 people and himself as an Inborn Grandmaster, even if there were 100,000 Chu soldiers outside the city, Nanzheng city could still be defended for a while. Not to mention, in fact, there aren¡¯t many Chu people outside the city. On the south bank of the river, the Chu soldiers camped in the east direction. Judging from the scale of their camp and stove quantity, there are at most 30,000 to 40,000 people. The naval forces on the water seemed to cover the sky and hide the sun, stretching for more than ten miles, covering the entire river surface. But Dongfang Wuyun was not an ordinary person either. He was born into an aristocratic family in the east. He was one of the twelve upper nobility families in the Zhou Country, generations serving as grand generals, and his status was equivalent to that of the Linhai six families and seven clans in Yangzhou. Such a prominent family, the carefully cultivated contemporary leader, naturally could not be a fool. There are also rivers like the Yangtze in Zhou Country, and some naval forces were trained. Since Dongfang Wuyun took command of Hanzhong County, he went deep into understanding water warfare to guard against Chu State. So even though he hadn¡¯t really commanded a naval force, he could still tell from his past experience that the number of naval forces on the river in front of him was not large, and 20,000 to 30,000 people would be the limit. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï That is to say. Even if the land and water armies were added together, the Chu people would have no more than 50,000 to 60,000 soldiers. Of those, nearly half are not good at land warfare, and their fighting strength would be reduced by half when they land, making them unsuitable for siege. In the face of such an enemy, with a strong city to rely on, a large army to guard, and being an Inborn Grandmaster, Dongfang Wuyun naturally had the confidence to defend Nanzheng city. ¡®As long as the Chu people don¡¯t send more reinforcements.¡¯ Dongfang Wuyun silently added this prerequisite in his heart, then turned to the deputy general behind him and said, ¡°You have done a good job in this matter. The Chu people are treacherous and shameless, stealing our city-states, attacking our great army, and are utterly shameless. I have enjoyed the favor of the royal family for generations, and the emperor ordered me to guard Hanzhong County and defend the southern territory of the country. Now that the Chu people are invading, I am determined to defend this city, stop the enemy outside the city, and blunt the enemy¡¯s sharpness. Now there are 32,000 soldiers in the city, and 200,000 stones of grain are available for use. I have sent a messenger to report the matter of the enemy¡¯s invasion to the country. It will take up to three days to reach Chang¡¯an. We only need to hold on for a few months, and the emperor will be able to send hundreds of thousands of troops to the south for reinforcements. When the heavenly soldiers arrive, the Chu enemies outside the city will be wiped out in a flash. By then, with our merits in defending the territory, the emperor¡¯s grace will come down, and we will be granted promotions and titles, and secure the future of our wives and children.¡± A great battle is about to start, and as an experienced veteran, Dongfang Wuyun knows that for martial artists, offering immediate benefits is more effective than persuasion. So he began to make various promises to boost morale. As expected. Hearing about promotions and titles as well as securing the future of their families, the dozens of soldiers in the room, including the deputy general, seemed to be energized, and their breaths became heavier. In recent years, many talented individuals have emerged from the battles in the east, north, and west of Zhou Country, breaking the enemy¡¯s forces time and time again, gaining great merits, and rising up rapidly. Many people who were once just small soldiers became generals and were awarded titles in the midst of war, earning promotions through their achievements and contributions. These success stories have motivated countless people. As a soldier, apart from making a living, who doesn¡¯t want to stand out and join the ranks of generals and nobles? As for how many people become white bones along the way to achieving their goals, no one really cares. Having made the mental preparation for death, they are not afraid of dying, but of not having the chance to become rich and powerful. Regrettably. The three battlefronts in the country are all far away from Hanzhong. Even if they had heard of many ordinary soldiers¡¯ rise, they couldn¡¯t just traverse thousands of miles to battle and gain merit. In the end, they had no choice but to stay in the Hanzhong mountains, patrolling the territory every day and feeling depressed. Fortunately, at this time, everything came to a head. The Chu people went crazy and attacked Hanzhong. The local defenders finally had a chance to show their prowess, vent their aspirations, kill the enemy and contribute to the country. The grand general¡¯s words were right. As long as they can hold Nanzheng and Hanzhong, when the reinforcements from the court arrive, they will be credited with great achievements. By then, when rewards are distributed for their contributions, everyone in the room will likely receive a promotion, and they would have finally made something of themselves. As for whether they could hold the city against the Chu people¡¯s siege? Looking at the not-so-impressive Chu camp outside, everyone was full of confidence. With only 30,000 to 40,000 people, they couldn¡¯t make much difference compared to the city¡¯s forces. Hasn¡¯t military strategy stated that one should surround with ten-fold, attack with five-fold, and divide with double the forces? The Chu soldiers outside the city don¡¯t even have double the forces of those inside, let alone ten-fold. To be honest. With such a small number of troops, they don¡¯t know where the Chu people got the courage to attack Nanzheng. What about the naval forces? Chapter 747 - Chapter 747: Chapter 328: The Siege and Peoples Hearts_3 Chapter 747: Chapter 328: The Siege and People¡¯s Hearts_3 These days, we¡¯ve always heard of naval forces commanding boats, driven over rivers and lakes ¨C but never of naval forces conquering cities. It¡¯s not that they look down upon naval forces. The difference between fighting on sea or land ¨C it¡¯s like comparing chalk and cheese, they are not the same size at all. A seaman might be valiant on the river, a crack soldier. But on land, he is no better than a well-trained infantry soldier, skilled at fighting, definitely not superior to a soldier who has been trained for years. Even though both are civilian soldiers, it¡¯s more cost-effective to recruit directly from local people than to misuse hard-trained local sailors. The Chu people would have to be foolish to let their naval soldiers fight on land. If they do, the King of Chu should decapitate the commanding general of this time, and throw this prodigal son into the rubbish heap. Of course, everyone knows that, with the large campaign of the Chu State this time ¨C their troops must have come from more than just outside the city. For example, in the last few days, rescue messages from Baishi, Nanjiang, and Taibai Prefecture have been received, stating that the Chu people had invaded and were attacking cities and looting territories everywhere, and the prefectures and counties could not defend them. So, apart from Chu forces that traveled by waterway, there should also be quite a number of Chu soldiers coming by land from several other places. But judging from the messages received by the city governments over the past few days, the number of Chu soldiers from other directions is not huge, mostly just ten or so thousand per route. The various Chu forces also had to attack and conquer the prefectures and counties in Hanzhong, which would also cause some loss of troops. After taking those prefectures and counties, they would have to station troops there, reducing the number of soldiers again. Through all these consecutive expenditures, the total number of Chu soldiers gathered under the city might not even exceed a hundred thousand, which raises some questions. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï Those Chu soldiers, negligible in number, want to conquer Nanzheng city which is bestowed with thirty-thousand defenders.? It¡¯s not that they underestimate the Chu people ¨C According to the common sense of military tactics, when the defenders are sufficient, food and fodder are well supplied, and morale is high, there are few examples where the city can be breached with only three times the number of troops. Just considering the strength on paper, they should be able to defend Nanzheng city. That would be the normal outcome. If they can¡¯t hold on, that would be a surprise. Therefore, from this point of view, it is not surprising why everyone, from Dongfang Wuyun to the foot soldiers, were so confident in defending Nanzheng city. It¡¯s not that they are overly confident, rather it¡¯s how things should be. Just as Zhou officials on the city walls were encouraging morale and discussing strategy ¨C the Chu army, sounding their golden drums in the distance, stirred things up, eventually soldiers gushed out from the gates and formed rows of soldiers three miles outside the city. With this look, old soldiers on top of the city wall could of course understand that the Chu people were about to challenge them outside the city. Indeed. After they finished their formation, a Chu officer quickly rode out, came under the city, and shouted loudly. ¡°Zhou people in the city, listen! Today, our army is amassing, with fifty thousand elite soldiers, shaking the Hanzhong region and terrifying Nanzheng. However, my general has always been magnanimous, reluctant to bully the few with our many. Today, he challenges the Eastern Commander to a battle, with each side only deploying ten thousand men. Now the soldiers of Great Chu are waiting outside the city. If there¡¯s anyone of you Zhou people, who still have some spirit left, you are welcome to meet us in a battle of life and death. We have always heard that the Eastern Commander is a famous commander, my general has long admired, and will certainly not be disappointed.¡± Do you dare to fight!¡± The officer hovered around the east side of the city for a few times. His voice, resonating with his inner strength, could be heard clearly within a few miles. After understanding the contents, especially after understanding the last words ¡°Do you dare to fight¡±, all Zhou people on the city wall were stirred up. Nowadays, in the war-torn world, the common people are fierce, and the martial traditions are well rooted. Even in rural areas, many of the common men know a thing or two about warfare. Under such circumstances, there are naturally a few who are anxious to prove their mettle. At this moment, many people were red-faced and eager to go out of the city to fight the Chu people. What the Chu people outside said was right. There were only ten thousand Chu soldiers outside and the numerical advantage was not very large. In the city, if all the assembled soldiers are formed into an army of ten thousand fighters, there will be no problem in running out to kill. Without the absolute disparity in the number of soldiers, as an old powerful nation, Zhou people never acknowledge they are inferior to those nouveau riche Chu people. Watching them fight and slaughtering the southerners, that wouldn¡¯t be too difficult. In terms of psychological advantage, the Zhou people do not seem to be lacking in comparison with the Chu people, who have been victorious for many years. However, in the face of the agitation below, Dongfang Wuyun was not affected by the Chu people¡¯s provocative challenge. He waved his hand to stop the officers who wanted to fight. He looked at the mighty Chu formation outside the city, already waving their military flags, looking at the word ¡°Chu¡± and ¡°Qingyun¡± written on them. He frowned and asked, ¡°Inside Chu, have you ever heard of a general named Qingyun?¡± Several generals heard the words and noticed the military flag with ¡°Qingyun¡± written on it. After a brief moment of confusion, they all began to ponder. ¡°Is there anyone in Chu with the surname Qingyun?¡± ¡°I¡¯ve never heard of it.¡± ¡°It turns out that the surname of the main general outside Chu army is Qingyun. Judging from his demeanor, he must be an Inborn Grandmaster. But why haven¡¯t I heard of such a person before? Did he just join Chu State?¡± ¡°Most likely, yes. After the old monk Jihui died, I originally thought that Chu State had lost an Inborn Grandmaster. I never expected that another one would step up so quickly. I was wondering how Chu State dared to attack our Zhou country, despite internal and external trials and tribulations. It turns out they had a new support.¡± ¡°The Inborn Grandmasters are a continuous source of strength, and the inheritance is orderly. No wonder Chu State can dominate. They really have grown.¡± ¡°Huh, what a blessing? I¡¯ve never heard of a master with the surname Qingyun in the world before. The Chu general on the outside, named Qingyun, must be a nameless new Inborn Grandmaster. Such ability ¨C and how can he be a match for our Eastern Commander? In my opinion, the arrival of this Qingyun is indeed lucky for us. The King of Chu did not personally lead the troops into the battle, but instead used a newcomer. This is the opportunity given to us by heaven to defeat Chu State and establish a peerless accomplishment.¡± The generals discussed in a flurry, each stating their opinions. But by the time the last person had finished speaking, the discussion quickly subsided, and everyone showed approving expressions. Because the words of the last person really touched the bottom of their hearts. Chapter 748 - Chapter 748: Chapter 329: Unparalleled Famous General Chapter 748: Chapter 329: Unparalleled Famous General In fact, not only those subordinate generals, but even Dongfang Wuyun, the commander, showed a hint of approval in his eyes after listening to his subordinates¡¯ words. That was because the pressure brought by the King of Chu was truly too great for them. Why did the pressure come from? Here we must mention what kind of existence a famous general of this era is. If we talk about famous generals in this era, there are only a handful of them throughout the Nine Provinces, never exceeding the number of fingers on two hands. Outside, the people of Chu praised their General Dongfang as a famous general of the time, but in truth, they flattered him. Although Dongfang Wuyun had some fame, it was limited to Zhou Country. Looking at the world as a whole, he was just an ordinary and nameless person. In a group of Inborn talents, he had no outstanding points. The only thing that could be commended was his seniority, but even that was a stretch. But Inborn Grandmasters generally have long lives, each living to over 150 years. With Dongfang Wuyun in his seventies, he would still be considered a junior among them. So when comparing abilities, he couldn¡¯t compare. When comparing battle achievements, he couldn¡¯t compare. When comparing seniority, he still couldn¡¯t compare. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Under such circumstances, Dongfang Wuyun, if he had any shame, would never dare to claim himself as a famous general of the time. In fact, within Zhou Country, there was only one person who could be called a famous general, and that was the Grand General of the Northern Pillar State, He Basheng. Yes, the same General He Basheng who had once fought against Lu Yuan. He Basheng joined the army at the age of sixteen. In his first year, he personally led one hundred foot soldiers on the Northern Border battlefield, defeating 500 elite riders from Wei, and making his name in a single battle. From then on, his rise was unstoppable. In Shuofang, he fought on the northern border for more than forty years, participating in more than 300 battles, large and small ¨C winning 271, drawing 53, and losing only six. Afterward, he fought for more than 30 years, mostly winning his battles and rarely suffering any losses. Over a million soldiers from various nations died at his hands, including two Inborn Grandmasters who fell to He Basheng¡¯s blade. Looking back at He Basheng¡¯s life, it could certainly be described as a glorious and famous general of the time. As a side note, the current war between Zhou Country and the Snow Plains Nomads in the Helong region is being led by He Basheng. Under the leadership of this famous general, the Zhou Army has driven the barbarians to continuous retreat. In four years, they have lost more than a million soldiers, and they are now dangerously close to the brink of genocide. This forced the barbarians to sell their spiritual woman at a high cost in order to seek help from Chu State. This demonstrated the true worth of this famous general. Although Dongfang Wuyun had some confidence in himself, he would never boast about being on par with He Basheng. He knew that there was still a long way to go before he could compare to those famous generals of the era. And perhaps he would never complete that journey in his lifetime. The reason is quite simple. To be a famous general of the age, one not only has to be good at fighting, but personal strength is also an essential criterion. After all, in this world with extraordinary martial power, as a general, just killing ordinary soldiers, even if it amounted to millions, held no representative value. Given the abilities of any Inborn Grandmaster, if they were shameless enough and had no moral bottom line, almost every Grandmaster would have the ability to kill millions of people. But what was the significance of that? To a country, the most important resource, always ranked first, is the Inborn Grandmaster. Only after that would come soldiers and population. Without enough soldiers and population, a country may not necessarily perish. The most evident example is Su Country. After Su Xuange¡¯s manipulation, the population of Su Country has now fallen below one million. The number of soldiers, due to the decline in national strength, has been reduced to fifty thousand. Despite being so weak, Su Country still managed to expand its territory by conquering the Through Sea half-county in the War of Conquerors a few years ago. This turned Su Country into a two-county nation, with an army of one hundred thousand, exhibiting some of the demeanor of a powerful state. To outsiders, Su Country did indeed seem strong. Southsea Country, which neighbors Su Country, has grown prosperous over these past few years through recuperation and accepting refugees from Su Country. With a population of 80,000 households and over four million people, their treasury¡¯s copper and silver have rusted, and their granaries¡¯ rice and grain have decayed, indicating their extreme wealth and prosperity. Southsea, with just one county, was nearly as powerful as half of Chu State¡¯s territory of five counties. Bear in mind, Chu State is now the dominant power. If Southsea Country can compare to nearly half of a hegemonic state¡¯s strength, how rich it must be can be easily imagined. But despite Southsea Country being so wealthy, nobody thought it was powerful. In many people¡¯s eyes, Southsea Country is not even as strong as the barbarian mini-state in the southwest, which has half a county and is subservient to Chu Country. Both are Lingnan countries, and Southsea Country¡¯s population and wealth is four to five times that of Su Country, so why is it considered inferior to Su Country? The key lies in the Inborn Grandmaster. Su Country has an Inborn Grandmaster, while Southsea Country doesn¡¯t, so Su Country is considered stronger. Under the guidance of Su Xuange, the Inborn Grandmaster, Su Country managed to defeat Dali Country, which had two Inborn Grandmasters and nearly three times their territory, and capture nearly half a county of Dali¡¯s land. Regardless of whether Su Country allied with Song Country, the victor is still the victor, and thus, Su Country is strong. Under this victory, the Su Country, which claims to have two counties, is considered a powerful country in Lingnan by outsiders. This impression will not change because Su Country¡¯s population is less than a million or because its army is only fifty thousand strong. After all, the population can multiply several times over with several decades of nurturing and breeding, and when the population increases, naturally, so do the number of soldiers. Chapter 749 - Chapter 749: Chapter 329: Unparalleled Famous General_2 Chapter 749: Chapter 329: Unparalleled Famous General_2 With the current territory of Su Country, as long as it is developed, it can accommodate four to five million people and support an army of two to three hundred thousand. As long as Su Country can maintain its current territory and maintain stability within the country, it can accumulate the aforementioned population and army in sixty to seventy years. By then, who can say that Su Country is not a great power? As for Su Xuange¡¯s life span, living another sixty to seventy years is not an issue, and there is even a great chance of living another ten to twenty years. The potential of the two prefectures and the sufficient lifespan of the Inborn Grandmasters are the decisive factors for outsiders to judge Su Country¡¯s power. Other factors are just icing on the cake and secondary. In this immortal world, even though it has reached the End of Dharma era, the gap between ordinary people and top martial artists and cultivators is still desperate. An Inborn martial artist can determine the rise and fall of a country and the fate of millions of people. For Chu State to dominate, the five prefectures, eight million people, and five hundred thousand strong armies are important, but not that important. The six domestic Inborn Grandmasters and the three Inborn Grandmasters who can be mobilized from vassal countries form a total of nine inborn figures, which are the foundation of Chu State¡¯s hegemony. This is also the qualification for outsiders to see Chu State dominating. Without these, even if you have tens of millions of people and a million-strong army, you are just a larger version of Nanhai Country. Similarly. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã0 To destroy a country and weaken a country, simply killing the opponent¡¯s soldiers and population is just scratching the surface. In this world where Inborn Grandmasters can live up to 150 years old, which is equivalent to the long lifespan of seven or eight generations of ordinary people, the simple loss of soldiers and population is really not too significant. For a great country, what if they lose a million-strong army at once? They can simply endure it for thirty to fifty years, and then they can pull up the same scale or even more soldiers and horses. As long as the inheritance of the country¡¯s Inborn Grandmasters is ensured, and a new one is replenished as soon as one is lost, they can maintain their hegemonic status. To truly hurt a country, one must, like Lu Yuan, kill the opponent¡¯s Inborn Grandmaster directly, weaken the opponent¡¯s top combat power, and this is the real shake of the foundation. So during the War of Conquerors back then, the original Great Changhe Kingdom, despite losing four hundred thousand troops, still had the confidence to compete with Chu State. But in the end, after losing one Great Witch Sacrifice, even though they still had more than a hundred thousand troops left, they no longer dared to resist, and surrendered the moment Chu soldiers arrived. Therefore, the original Nanzhao Country, ambitious and with a hundred thousand soldiers, wanted to seize Xichuan and achieve hegemony. For this, even though Jianchuan Country was captured by Huang Xuan and their own homeland was ravaged by Kunhai and Chilixiang kingdoms in turn, they still gritted their teeth and persisted. The other side gambled on their Big Emperor Son¡¯s ability to conquer Xichuan. But in the end, the Big Emperor Son was killed by Lu Yuan, and Nanzhao Country instantly wilted, no longer daring to take the initiative to send troops. Even when facing the invasion of Kunhai and Chilixiang, two small countries, they did not dare to counterattack too much, only focusing on defense, and this was because they lost a Grandmaster, their national strength was greatly damaged, their roots were shaken, and they became afraid. So in the Northern Expedition organized by Pre-Yue back then, during the early days of the war, Zhou People lost more than a hundred thousand soldiers, but they were still confident in the Jianghan campaign and even prepared to persevere for a long time. But as Lu Yuan first killed Gui Lianyun and then Zhang Chanyi, Zhou People¡¯s original confidence was instantly broken, and Zhou Country¡¯s stalemate in Jianghan quickly collapsed, losing momentum. Afterwards, Lu Yuan launched a surprise attack on Hanzhong and moved south to Xichuan, and Zhou Country couldn¡¯t react at all, as if they were dazed. This was because Lu Yuan had killed two Innate fighters from Zhou Country and eliminated one-quarter of their top-level combat power, causing great damage to their vitality. It must be known that in the turbulent days of Pre-Yue, the world was in constant upheaval, and Zhou and Liang countries invaded one after another, causing a momentary reversal of fortune. But even in such difficult situations, throughout the entire Hongdao era, Pre-Yue had only lost one Wuyang Marquis Li Gui due to the assassination by Lan Cai¡¯er and Li Xiong in the early days of turmoil. Pre-Yue lost only one Inborn Grandmaster. After losing this Inborn Grandmaster, Pre-Yue soon added Wucheng Marquis Shangguan Ming, Martial Proclamation Marquis Yang Jing, and the number of Inborn Grandmasters increased instead of decreasing. Latter, people like Lu Yuan, Jihui, Yan Wangqiu, Su Xuange, and Qiao Kangquan were included, and the number of Inborn Grandmasters in Yue Country reached as many as eleven, which was extremely prosperous. At that time, there were eight Inborn Grandmasters used for the Northern Expedition. Zhou Country, on the other hand, only had three Inborn Grandmasters left after losing two of its innates. With three against eight, there was almost a three-fold difference, and the enemy camp also had tough men like Wuan Marquis Bai Mengyang and Lu Yuan, who had shown the appearance of a famous general by killing two Innate fighters in a row. Under that situation, even with the ten guts borrowed from Xiangyang Prefecture, Zhou Country¡¯s Inborn Grandmasters would not dare to fight hard against Pre-Yue. This is also why Lu Yuan did not encounter much interference from Zhou Country during his surprise attack on Hanzhong and recovery of Xichuan. It was not that they didn¡¯t want to, but they simply couldn¡¯t. Finally, when He Basheng¡¯s army had a hard time going south, they met Lu Yuan in Hanzhong, and this most famous general of Zhou Country was shocked and retreated by Lu Yuan¡¯s dual cultivation of immortal and martial arts. Lu Yuan realized that the ability to kill two Innates was not based on luck, as rumors said, but had truly gained exploits. Chapter 750 - Chapter 750: Chapter 329: Unparalleled Famous General_3 Chapter 750: Chapter 329: Unparalleled Famous General_3 The man truly possesses the strength equivalent to the second innate realm, capable of single-handedly slaying a grandmaster in the first innate realm. Realizing this, He Basheng, who also had the combat power of the second innate realm but was at a disadvantage in this realm, decided to decisively retreat, giving up his competition with Lu Yuan. It was from that time that the Zhou country officially recognized Lu Yuan¡¯s reputation as a renowned general. After being recognized by the Zhou country, the other countries of the world gradually accepted this fact. After all, if Lu Yuan, who forced He Basheng, a renowned general, to retreat, wasn¡¯t a renowned general, then who was? Therefore, to judge whether a person is a renowned general, there are two hard requirements. One is that you are indeed good at warfare, and in your lifetime, you have annihilated over a million soldiers. The other is that you possess the strength to slay the inborn and have already proven yourself by slaying the inborn. He Basheng of the Zhou country achieved this, and thus, his name became known around the world. Wuan Marquis Bai Mengyang of Pre-Yue also achieved this, and thus was granted the title of Military God. Lu Yuan also achieved this, and even went one step further, achieving a record of defeating one kingdom, subjugating three kingdoms, and killing four inborn. He has already become the first Military God in the eyes of the world, and one of the renowned generals in the world. Frankly speaking. With Lu Yuan¡¯s current fame, when his enemies face him, as soon as they hear that King of Chu is leading the troops, they are instantly hit with a morale -3, fear +3, will -3 Buff. This is why those officers and soldiers inside Nanzheng city, felt so relieved and relaxed after knowing that it was not Lu Yuan who was leading the troops. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï As long as it¡¯s not the Military God personally coming, they don¡¯t consider any other inborn from the Chu state as a threat. After all, it¡¯s just the Chu state. Being able to produce a King of Chu, it seems they have exhausted all their good fortune, and it could even be said that they have concentrated all the fine qualities of Yangzhou. Among the various hegemonic states, there is usually one renowned general per state. Could it be possible that a newly promoted hegemonic Chu state could produce a second renowned general? If this is the case, the heavens are too unfair, too partial to the Chu state. In any case, the Zhou people in the city, including Dongfang Wuyun, absolutely do not believe that there could be a second person with the potential to be a famous general in Chu state. However, although they do not believe it, after a long discussion, none of them could explain who the Chu general outside the city was, what his background was, which makes Dongfang Wuyun somewhat hesitant. When facing an unknown enemy, he dare not take risks before figuring out their details. So, in response to the challenge from the Chu people outside the city, Dongfang Wuyun frowned and only said, ¡°Our city does not have many troops, even if we have the assurance of victory, we cannot waste precious troops on immediate gratification. If we guard the city, even temporary civilian workers can take down three, even five Chu people each. But if we go out of the city to fight, even if we can exchange one for two, it would be a loss for us. Preserving precious soldiers for critical moments in the future is the wise choice in military strategy. We should ignore the Chu people outside the city and let them form their battle lines. In this cold and snowy weather, let them stand. After all, it¡¯s not us who will suffer.¡± After he finished speaking, as if he felt that it was too timid to be so defensive, Dongfang Wuyun snorted coldly, paying no attention to his subordinates and directly descended from the city tower. Seeing this, the generals could not help but exchange glances. In the end, except for those who were originally tasked with military affairs and needed to stay on the tower to guard against the Chu people, the rest also dispersed one after another. Meanwhile, outside the city, the Chu army officer who had shouted back and forth more than a dozen times but saw no movement from the Zhou people in the city was called back by Qingyunzi. ¡°General, those Zhou people are a bunch of cowards. They have strong soldiers, but all they know is to trap themselves in a fort. They dare not come to the post station,¡± said the shouting officer when he returned, with a hint of contempt and frustration. He was not able to call out the Zhou people and missed the opportunity to achieve meritorious service, which made him quite unwilling. The Zhou people had many generals, and one thing they were right about. Under the leadership of Lu Yuan, the Chu state has been victorious in every battle for years on end. Not only has this cultivated a strong military temperament in the Chu state, but it has also produced many brave soldiers. Many Chu army soldiers have gradually developed a sense of pride and arrogance, feeling somewhat superior to the heroes of the world, viewing them as nothing more than commoners. Like now. Even if the Chu army outside the city actually only has an equal number of soldiers compared to the Zhou defenders in the city, this junior Chu general still believes his side can win the battle and capture this strong city of Hanzhong. Victory seems to be something that should be taken for granted. ¡°Since they don¡¯t come out, let them stay in,¡± said Qingyunzi. As an avatar of Lu Yuan, Qingyunzi is naturally aware of these problems existing within the Chu army. However, the Chu state is currently in an expansion period. This kind of pride and arrogance actually helps the Chu state to compete with the world, and generally, the benefits outweigh the disadvantages. Therefore, even if Lu Yuan knew where the problem lay, he didn¡¯t plan to immediately correct it, but chose to indulge it. Anyway, if nothing unexpected happens in the future external wars, either his main body or an avatar will lead the army. Whether it¡¯s the main body or an avatar, both are him. Lu Yuan is confident to harness this wave properly, preventing issues and turning it into a driving force for the Chu state to expand. Based on this, it doesn¡¯t really matter whether the problem is corrected or not. As an avatar, Qingyunzi naturally follows the decisions of the main body, and won¡¯t make any changes that contradict them. When he saw the Zhou people didn¡¯t come out, he thought for a moment and then gave an order, ¡°Since the Zhou people won¡¯t respond to the battle, and the weather is cold, let¡¯s not keep our soldiers here. Blow the trumpet and return to camp.¡± After giving the military order, Qingyunzi looked at Nanzheng city with a faint smile on his face. These Zhou people thought they could stop him by hiding in the city and relying on the strong fortress. How wishful thinking. Well then. Let them stay in the city. First, he needs to build siege weapons outside, and wait for Huang Xuan to bring the other armies to join him. When the 100,000 strong army gathers, and when he and Huang Xuan, the two second realm avatars join forces, that will be the time to bury the Zhou people in the city. ¡°Let Dongfang Wuyun in the city be the starting point of my rise as a world-renowned general,¡± thought Qingyunzi with a calm heart. He withdrew his indifferent gaze, turned around, and left. Chapter 751 - Chapter 751: Chapter 330: Where Does the Hidden City Come From Chapter 751: Chapter 330: Where Does the Hidden City Come From Just as the battle in Hanzhong was in full swing, Lu Yuan in Baling city, also received an unexpected guest. Chenyuan Palace, Meichang Garden. It was already deep winter, and small flakes of snow drifted down from the sky, falling on the plum trees in the courtyard, forming a light layer of frost. Under the pressure of the cold, the pink plum blossoms burst into radiant bloom, emitting a faint, lingering fragrance. As the cold wind wafted through the garden, it was absolutely refreshing. In the garden, there was a small pavilion. At this time, on the third floor of the pavilion, there was only a small canopy covering the top, with doors pushed open all around. A railing circled the pavilion, and a table was placed in the center for people to rest. At this moment, inside the pavilion, Lu Yuan was leisurely brewing tea and burning incense, every movement was extremely focused, appearing to enjoy the activity. Opposite him, sat an old man in a white robe. This man had white hair and a silver beard, an air of ethereal grace about him, looking very much like an immortal. By this appearance alone, if he appeared in the mortal world, the common folk would surely exclaim in amazement at this old immortal. However, this old man, who was seen as an immortal in the eyes of mortals, was equally seated at this moment. But as he watched Lu Yuan busying himself, his expression revealed a touch of surprise, while his eyes occasionally flickered with excitement, hesitation, and other emotions. He did not have the calm and tranquil demeanor typical of an immortal, nor the peace of an uninhibited life. ¡°Phew.¡± After bustling about for a while, Lu Yuan finally prepared the first cup of fragrant tea, then picked up the teapot and poured a cup for the old man and himself. After putting it down, he laughed and said, ¡°I have kept you waiting, Fellow Daoist. In the heavy snow of winter, plum blossoms bloomed abundantly. This full garden view was the perfect moment to enjoy tea and watch the plums. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï During my early years, when I was a mountain hunter, I enjoyed brewing tea and watching the snow for leisure. After that, when I first embarked on the path of cultivation, I did not give up this pleasure. It wasn¡¯t until later when I established my foundation and became a lord that the mundane affairs of life began to take up so much of my time that I gradually had less leisure. In recent years, waging war in the north and the south, in constant motion and busyness, made Chu State thriving as ever, solidifying its foundation for hegemony. But my hobby was neglected because of this. Fortunately, over the past two years, the kingdom has been at peace and thriving, and I have been able to settle down in Baling, managing to pick up this long-lost hobby. Today, with your arrival, Fellow Daoist, the timing is perfect. Speaking of which, Lu Yuan pointed to the plum forest in full bloom in the garden, and said with a hint of joy, ¡°After last night¡¯s fresh snowfall of early winter, the plum trees throughout the garden are in full bloom. This is the first bloom of the plums in the early winter, the most tender and charming. Today, as we make tea with plum blossoms, while the white snow flutters around, we sit down together and talk, which is the most elegant activity in the world.¡± Following the gradual strengthening of his personal talents and skills, and gradually reaching the highest level of the present age, the sense of crisis in Lu Yuan¡¯s heart naturally eased a lot. In addition, the hegemony of Chu State is in its early stage, with his own Qi Luck gathering rapidly. Every moment he can manipulate an increasingly larger amount of Heavenly Qi, and the speed of his cultivation is getting faster and faster. Given these two factors, Lu Yuan¡¯s success has been fully recognized. As a result, the tension in his heart is no longer as heavy as before and he has gradually begun to relax. He has countless lifetimes and is no longer faced with external threats. His life¡¯s work has begun to take shape. Naturally, there is no need to keep pushing himself. So, in his spare time, in addition to necessary cultivation and political affairs, Lu Yuan began to pick up some small hobbies of his past. The act of brewing tea and watching the snow in front of him is one such example. Even beyond his original hobbies, he actively learned the four arts of Zither, Chess, Calligraphy, and Painting, enriching himself. Believe it or not. Perhaps due to his relaxed state of mind, he had some new insights. Under the cultivation of these hobbies, Lu Yuan¡¯s mental state had a major breakthrough, understanding the level of controlled relaxation. The proficiency of his cultivation and handling of affairs increased, and the speed of cultivation was even a bit faster than before. It was indeed a surprise gain. ¡°Your Highness is uninhibited and unbounded, returning to the simplicity and truth of nature. He sees everything as natural. Now seeing the natural beauty, of course, he is very delighted.¡± The old man in front of him listened to Lu Yuan¡¯s words and also complimented in agreement. ¡°Fellow Daoist is too kind. Regarding my cultivation, I am still far from returning to simplicity and truth, and the realm of the uninhibited.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan was quite delighted. As the King of Chu, he held the power of a nation, conducting the fate of thousands of people. Of course, he was often flattered by people. But having heard so much flattery, it gradually began to tire him. By now, normal people¡¯s flattery could hardly move his heart anymore. Only when people of stature like the man in front of him complimented him, could he derive pleasure. However, while he was pleased, he did not let it go to his head. After taking a small sip of the fragrant tea he brewed, the flavor lingered on his lips and teeth. He then spoke with a touch of solemnity, ¡°Feishuang Tao is far away in Guangling, my relationship with Fellow Daoist Jinyun from the past was only an acquaintance at the Inescapable Meeting. Now, Fellow Daoist has traveled far and wide to Baling to see me, so I have to ask, why have you come?¡± Lu Yuan looked at the old man in front of him, his expression serious. This person before him was not of ordinary status. As mentioned before, there are six great Taoist temples in the world, or to be precise, in Yong, Qing, and Yang states, and the islands of the East Sea, namely, Purple Cloud and Feishuang Tao in Yangzhou, Dan Ding Path and Cang Long Way in Qingzhou, Dan Ding Path again in Yong state, and Juling Path from the East Sea. These six big Taoist temples each have a Cave World and are the leaders of their respective Immortal Sect, being real immortal cultivators. And this Fellow Daoist Jinyun in front of him, is a true person from Feishuang Tao, equivalent to Anqiu from Dan Ding Path. When Lu Yuan attended the Inescapable Meeting before, this person and Anqiu were present at the same grand event. Chapter 752 - Chapter 752: Chapter 330 - Where Did the Mysterious City Come From?_2 Chapter 752: Chapter 330 ¨C Where Did the Mysterious City Come From?_2 However, at that time, Lu Yuan was only at the peak of the first-class, even though he had already touched some of the Innate Realm, his status and identity were far from that of a True Person like Jinyun. Therefore, apart from Anqiu who had ulterior motives and specifically visited him. The many True Persons and Ziyun Dao masters greeted Lu Yuan and spoke a few words, but didn¡¯t have much interaction. The relationship between them was naturally just superficial and not deep and profound. Because of this. For Jinyun, who suddenly visited him and had only met once, Lu Yuan was naturally cautious and confused while still attaching importance to his visit. So he invited him over, and under the pretext of appreciating the snow, he discussed the Dao to probe him. ¡°Your Majesty, don¡¯t worry, Poor Daoist comes with no ill intentions,¡± said Jinyun, whose cultivation was accomplished and thoughts were sharp. He naturally noticed Lu Yuan¡¯s caution and probing but just laughed and shook his head, then sighed softly, ¡°Although it has long been rumored that Lu Yuan, the King of Chu, excels in both Immortal and Martial Arts, achieving great Dao. Upon hearing this, I was only half-convinced. Although the Heaven and Earth today have many who do not rely on the Cave World cultivation method, those who possess this ability all come from ancient times and inherit their power to this day. Your Majesty indeed has opportunities, but reaching the Innate Realm should be your limit. How can you possibly cultivate the Five Elements¡¯ Qi, enter the Immortal Sect, and be considered a first-class Dao master of the present times? But after seeing Your Majesty today, I finally understand that in the past, I indeed underestimated the people of the world.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? By inspecting the Dao, I noticed that Your Majesty has condensed the Five Elements into one Qi, and entered the door of Immortal Method, right?¡± At this point, Jinyun looked intently at Lu Yuan, his eyes eager. As a cultivator, nobody was more aware of what condensing a Qi meant than him. That represented the entry into the Immortal Path and the beginning of the Great Dao. Moreover, it represented a lifespan of two hundred years, embarking on the road of longevity. Nowadays, such people were still respectfully called Dao masters by the major Immortal Sects, which meant they were the masters of Dao Veins in one area. They were slightly higher than the emperors of the world, showing the nobility of their status. In comparison. Although he himself was also respected as a True Person, in reality, it was just superficial respect. Without cultivating the Five Elements¡¯ Qi, Jinyun had magical powers and relied on his techniques. His strength was comparable to that of a second-stage Innate Fighter. However, deep down, he was still just an ordinary mortal. As a mortal, his lifespan was still limited to a hundred years, and the essence of his life did not change. Comparatively, he was still a level lower than the Innate Fighters. That¡¯s because Innate Fighters at least underwent a transformation of their body and soul, greatly increasing their lifespan to one hundred and fifty years. Essentially, Innate Fighters and ordinary mortals could barely be considered two different species. Jinyun and other cultivators could surpass them only because their Immortal Techniques were indeed mysterious and far stronger than Martial Arts. That¡¯s why even with initial Mana, a cultivator who hadn¡¯t yet entered the path was stronger than an ordinary Inborn Grandmaster. But this wasn¡¯t the main issue. Seeking the Dao and cultivation aimed for longevity and freedom. Without condensing the Five Elements¡¯ Qi and undergoing a life metamorphosis, even if one¡¯s fighting ability was strong, it would still be considered Lower Grade. Jinyun, being a cultivator from a prestigious background, was naturally aware of this. So, seeing that Lu Yuan, who came from scattered cultivation, had progressed faster than him and the Immortal Sect Disciples, cultivating Qi and entering the Immortal Sect, naturally felt a bit bitter. There was both envy and sourness. Seeing Jinyun¡¯s gaze, Lu Yuan¡¯s heart furrowed but he didn¡¯t hide anything, and frankly replied, ¡°That¡¯s right. Several years ago, I gained some insights in my cultivation and by chance, I condensed a Qi of the Five Elements, nourished it within my five internal organs, and entered the Immortal Door.¡± As for his own cultivation, he didn¡¯t have much intention to cover it up, and he couldn¡¯t. Back in the day, when Anqiu came for the last time and then broke off from the Dan Ding Path, Lu Yuan knew that his cultivation strength couldn¡¯t be hidden anymore. The truth was indeed so. News about Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation of Immortal Techniques first spread in Zhou Country. Since twelve years ago, when he used the Immortal Techniques to sneak attack Hanzhong and repelled He Basheng, news about Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation of Immortal Methods had spread throughout Zhou Country. Later, this news spread to the upper echelons of various countries and powers. It was then that everyone knew that King Lu Yuan of Chu was actually walking the path of dual cultivation in Immortal and Martial Arts. With the powerful Immortal Techniques, ordinary cultivators only need to master one or two spells to be on par with Innate Fighters. If they grasp more spells or have a deeper understanding, even second-stage Innate Fighters would have to retreat before their might. Therefore, upon confirming Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation, all countries and factions increased their attention on him, and he was listed as one of the most threatening figures. Back then, the term ¡°Military God¡± was widely acknowledged by others, thanks to the dual cultivation of Martial and Immortal Arts. Later on. After the breakup with the Dan Ding Dao, perhaps out of revenge or to achieve a certain purpose. When Anqiu returned, Dan Ding Dao began to spread rumors in the world, claiming that King Lu Yuan was not only a cultivator, but also a powerful one who had succeeded in cultivation, condensed a Qi, and was considered stronger than other powerful sects¡¯ Immortal Dao Sect Lords. With the promotion and recognition of a major Immortal Sect, news about Lu Yuan¡¯s strength spread throughout the Nine Provinces in an instant. Almost every power with connections had heard of it to some extent. Chapter 753 - Chapter 753: Chapter 330: Where Does Youdu Come From?_3 Chapter 753: Chapter 330: Where Does Youdu Come From?_3 This brought him immense fame. However, it naturally also gave rise to a number of negative effects. The advantage was that those who heard the news now had a better outlook on the future of Chu State after realizing the extraordinary value of a Dao master. With the hopes and aspirations of countless people, Chu State¡¯s Qi Luck naturally rose by the day. The disadvantage, on the other hand, resulted from the formidable strength of Lu Yuan, which made the nearby hostile forces and individuals increasingly numerous. Take Ning Country for instance. Shen Qiu had originally planned for ten years of recuperation and ten more years of preparation for war to restore Ning Country¡¯s strength to its peak and retrain an army of 600,000 soldiers. However, less than ten years later, Ning Country achieved what was originally a twenty-year plan, not only expanding its army to 600,000 soldiers but also cultivating two Inborn Grandmasters. As of now, they plan to expand the army by 200,000 more and cultivate a few more Inborn Grandmasters. Many changes have occurred during this period, largely due to the drastic change in The world¡¯s circumstances and the pressure brought about by Chu State¡¯s continual advancement. However, it would be hard for anyone to believe there were no factors related to fears of Lu Yuan¡¯s strength involved. Forget about Ning Country. Even Zhou Country and Liang Country, which have been making significant moves in recent years, it¡¯s hard to say whether this was not due to great pressure from the presence of a Dao master in The world¡¯s power struggle. In short, this news had both good and bad effects. However, whichever it was, Lu Yuan could not decide on his own. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï But he had prepared to deal with the results brought about by these news. After all, with his strength and setting aside Chu State, no one in The world could pose a threat to Lu Yuan. He was born to be invincible. If that¡¯s the case, what could rumours do to me? Just as Jinyun asked him right now, he directly admitted it. However, Lu Yuan¡¯s unruffled attitude took Jinyun by surprise. But considering the strength of the present King of Chu and the prosperous state of Chu in the recent years, he quickly understood. So he skipped over this part and got to the point: ¡°Now that Your Majesty has condensed the Qi and accomplished the Immortal Method, you should have also become aware of the conditions Between Heaven and Earth, where spiritual energy is nearly exhausted and hard to find.¡± ¡®Is he going to bring up the Age of Dharma Decline? Lu Yuan wondered. Although he knew quite a bit about this topic, Jinyun¡¯s serious approach gave him the impression that he had not come just to discuss some old tales, which piqued his curiosity. So he nodded and said, ¡°Indeed, these recent years of cultivation have given me a profound understanding of it. Being in such a Heaven and Earth makes one feel as if they are drowning in a lake and struggling to breathe.¡± He finished with a vivid metaphor. It indeed struck a chord with Jinyun, ¡°Your Majesty is right, we¡¯re like being in a deep lake, drowning and struggling for air. But does Your Majesty know why the spiritual energy we breathe is becoming less and less in this deep lake?¡± Lu Yuan paused for a moment before answering, ¡°I have heard a rumor that our Nine Provinces¡¯ world and the Upper Realm Immortal Realm were originally interconnected. And the spiritual energy of the Nine Provinces flowed from the Immortal Realm. This passage is known as the gateway to Beiming Youdu. But now, as Beiming Youdu has closed and the Immortal Realm is no longer transmitting spiritual energy, the spiritual energy in our world becomes more and more sparse. Little by little, it has been exhausted by practitioners, resulting in the current Age of Dharma Decline.¡± When Jinyun heard Lu Yuan¡¯s response, he looked at him in surprise, then laughed and said, ¡°It is widely rumored that Your Majesty has inherited the Dao from Sun Zhenren, Sun Qingyi, a hundred years ago. In his time, Sun Zhenren had sought out the immortal sects of the Nine Provinces to find a solution to the Age of Dharma Decline. And this includes the secrets of Beiming Youdu. He even sailed the seas in search of it toward the end. Now seeing Your Majesty¡¯s deep understanding of Beiming Youdu, it seems the rumors must be true.¡± Jinyun mentioned Sun Qingyi and took this opportunity to open the conversation, going on to say, ¡°However, Your Majesty, although you have learned some secrets about Beiming Youdu from Sun Zhenren¡¯s inheritance, there are still deeper secrets that you may not know about. For example, besides being the passage to the Immortal Realm, how did this gateway between the realms, Beiming Youdu, come about? What should one do if they want to go to the Immortal Realm through Beiming Youdu? What influence does the current Age of Dharma Decline have on Beiming Youdu? With all these secrets, surely Sun Qingyi would have left some records behind, wouldn¡¯t he?¡± Jinyun looked at Lu Yuan with profound meaning, hinting at something. Lu Yuan¡¯s expression changed slightly. He said respectfully, ¡°I indeed do not know these things, and I¡¯m hoping for Fellow Daoist to enlighten me.¡± He knew that since Jinyun had brought this up, he must have had some purpose for these secrets. As expected, as soon as he cooperated and asked, Jinyun immediately stroked his beard and said, ¡°Your Majesty can rest assured. Since I have brought this up, I have no intention of hiding anything. I was going to tell Your Majesty about it. Just hear me out. Firstly, the question of how Beiming Youdu, as the portal between the realms, came about. In fact, Beiming Youdu is essentially a large teleportation array. In ancient times, an Immortal from the Upper Realm broke through the barrier, entered our Nine Provinces, and brought the first wisp of spiritual energy with him. Then the Immortal descended to the world, taught Immortal Techniques in the Nine Provinces, and spread the Dao Inheritance. As the Dao Inheritance spread, more and more people in the Nine Provinces began to practice the Immortal Method. Over time, the bit of the spiritual energy the Immortal brought could no longer meet the increasing needs of the practitioners. To solve this problem, the Immortal who had come to the world joined hands with others and altogether constructed a large teleportation array that linked the two realms, which they named Beiming Youdu. Once Beiming Youdu was established, it directly connected to the Immortal Realm, turning the teleportation array into a continuous transmission channel, allowing a continuous stream of spiritual energy from the Immortal Realm to be transported to the Nine Provinces. This is the origin of Beiming Youdu. Thanks to the maintenance by the Immortal and the supply of spiritual energy from the Immortal realm, this teleportation array could continue to operate. This answers the first question.¡± Chapter 754 - Chapter 754: Chapter 331: The Immortal Path is About to Break Chapter 754: Chapter 331: The Immortal Path is About to Break After Jinyun finished answering the first question, he looked at Lu Yuan with a smiling face. But after hearing the origin of Beiming Youdu, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but show a trace of surprise on his face. An Immortal descended to the mortal world, imparted the Immortal Techniques, connected the Two Realms, and communicated between the immortals and mortals. He never imagined that Beiming Youdu actually had such an origin. And in ancient times, the Immortal Techniques practiced by cultivators were taught by Immortals from another world. Before this, Lu Yuan had never heard of this, and there was no circulation in the world. Upon careful calculation, it can be regarded as a secret of this world. However, having said that. Even if he knew the inheritance of the Immortal Techniques and the origin of Beiming Youdu, this was, after all, a matter of millions of years ago, too far away from this era. Even if he knew these secrets at this time, it wouldn¡¯t mean much to the later generations like him. It¡¯s just interesting to hear about it during leisure time. Jinyun, as a True Person of Feishuang Tao, must be aware of this point. Feishuang Tao sent him here, not just to discuss ancient secrets with Lu Yuan. So there must be another plan for the other party. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï And this plan should fall on the other two secrets. ¡°I never thought that there would be such an origin about the Immortal Techniques of our cultivation and Beiming Youdu. Today, I have learned a lot.¡± Lu Yuan sighed and then looked at Jinyun with a burning gaze, and continued to ask, ¡°The first question contains such a secret. I wonder what kind of secrets the other two questions hold? Fellow Daoist, please explain in detail.¡± Seeing the main subject hooked, Jinyun chuckled, and without any suspense, continued, ¡°Of course, this is natural. Poor Daoist has just talked about the origin of Beiming Youdu, and answered the first question. Now let¡¯s talk about the second question. That is, how to go to the Immortal Realm through Beiming Youdu. In ancient times, the world where those Immortals who broke the realm came from was called the Immortal Realm by ancient cultivators. And as Beiming Youdu was created by the Immortals of the Immortal Realm, it naturally contains the location of the Immortal Realm. As long as the controlling array is activated, you can follow the recorded direction of the Immortal Realm in Beiming Youdu and ascend to the Immortal Realm through the teleportation array. However, even though Beiming Youdu can ascend to the Immortal Realm, mortals and immortals are different after all, and without certain strength, one is not qualified to go to the Immortal Realm. Therefore, in ancient times, the immortals set rules after creating Beiming Youdu. Cultivators who have not achieved Five Essence Qi or condensed the flower above their head are not allowed to ascend to the Immortal Realm through Beiming Youdu. That is to say, the most basic requirement to ascend to the Immortal Realm is to condense a flower above one¡¯s head and achieve the Human Immortal Realm. At the beginning, this rule was indeed strictly followed. In ancient times, when the Immortals were in the world, the cultivators of my Nine Provinces world dared not violate the Immortals even if they wanted to ascend to the Immortal Realm. They all honestly followed the rules. Those who didn¡¯t become Human Immortals didn¡¯t dare to ascend. But later, for some unknown reason, the connection between the Immortal Realm and my Nine Provinces suddenly broke off. No more Immortals visited the Nine Provinces. It was since then that the ancient cultivators discovered a terrible fact that with the disappearance of the Immortals, the original Beiming Youdu Great Array had become uncontrolled. The channel that had been opened up between the Two Realm was directly closed. The immortal spirit qi infused from the Immortal Realm into the Nine Provinces world was completely lost. The existing spiritual qi within the Nine Provinces became the only source. The more it was used, the less became the amount, and it couldn¡¯t be increased. From then on, the Dharma Ending Tribulation began. At this point, Jinyun¡¯s tone was somewhat complicated. As a cultivator, the two words ¡°Dharma Ending¡± are undoubtedly a permanent pain in the heart. Lu Yuan, also a cultivator, could naturally understand this. Therefore, while feeling shocked in his heart and sorting out the ancient secrets he had just heard, he couldn¡¯t help feeling a bit sad. Although he had the Way of Control Pneuma and could go on a different path, obtaining the remaining spiritual energy of Heaven and Earth. But there is less and less spiritual energy left in this Heaven and Earth. No matter how much spiritual energy he could absorb, in the end, how much could he obtain? Looking at the current cultivation world, condensing a single qi can be called a Dao master, and the various sects are also in a situation of ¡°big cat and small cat.¡± Lu Yuan doubted himself for relying on the remaining spiritual energy of the Nine Provinces world to cultivate the Five Essence Qi. Most likely he couldn¡¯t, right? As a cultivator, it would be strange to feel good while looking at the visible bleak future! ¡°The Dharma Ending Tribulation began, and although the cultivators of the Nine Provinces were initially panicked, they were still able to maintain stability. Cultivators from all sides gathered together and tried their best to communicate with the Immortal Realm.¡± Jinyun collected his emotions and continued to tell: ¡°But none of the communication methods worked. The Immortal Realm didn¡¯t respond at all, and the Immortals never came back.¡± By this time, everyone realized that something might have gone wrong in the Immortal Realm, and even the Immortals might no longer exist. So a wave of panic swept across the Nine Provinces. During the time when the Immortal Realm and the Nine Provinces were connected, the abundant spiritual energy from the Immortal Realm supported the Nine Provinces¡¯ cultivation world, not only producing a large number of Five Essence Qi Cultivators but also occasional Human and Earth Immortals. But as the Immortal Realm became hidden and the Two Realms were cut off, there was no more source of immortal spiritual qi, and the spiritual energy of Heaven and Earth became less and less. At that time, there were tens of thousands of cultivators in the cultivation world of the Nine Provinces. Among them, there were no less than a dozen immortals who had condensed the flower above their head. Chapter 755 - Chapter 755: Chapter 331 Immortal Path Will Be Broken_2 Chapter 755: Chapter 331 Immortal Path Will Be Broken_2 With so many cultivators consuming spiritual energy, the spiritual energy in the Nine Provinces would be completely depleted in no more than a few thousand years. Therefore, the ancient cultivators sought different ways to find a solution. Those Immortals, confident in their own strength, tested the Beiming Youdu array which merely closed the connection with the Immortal Realm but was still practically usable. They directly transmitted themselves to the Immortal Realm. At the time of their departure, the Immortals had promised to investigate the reason for the disappearance of the Immortals and then reopen the passage between the Two Realms to save the Immortal Cultivation World in the Nine Provinces. The Nine Provinces cultivators, with hope, waited for news from those Ascended Immortals. Yet after waiting for a full thousand years, there was still no news. Those Ascended Immortals, like the Immortals cut off after the closure of the passage, never sent back any news. At this point, the remaining cultivators in the Nine Provinces began to panic completely. In the chaos that followed, some cultivators disregarded the rules left by the Immortals and, although they had not achieved Human Immortal status, chose to follow the footsteps of their Ascended seniors by directly transmitting to the Immortal Realm through Beiming Youdu. The remaining people believed that without enough strength to rashly ascend to the Immortal Realm, there would be great danger. After all, the Immortals in the Immortal Realm had disappeared, and there was no news from the many seniors who had ascended before. It has been proven that there might be a great change in the Immortal Realm, and this drastic change might also carry great danger. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? So this group of people chose to stay in the world of the Nine Provinces, intending to improve their strength as much as possible before the spiritual energy was depleted so that they would have some strength to ascend to the Immortal Realm after becoming immortal. This was the last era of the flourishing Immortal Cultivation in my Nine Provinces World.¡± Mentioning this, Jinyun paused with a hint of longing on his face: ¡°Although the connection with the Immortal Realm was severed and the source of the Immortal Spirit was lost, there was originally an abundance of Immortal Spirit in the Nine Provinces. Relying on this existing spiritual energy, the ancient era still gave birth to a dozen or so Immortals who took some disciples with them and ascended to the Immortal Realm through Beiming Youdu. But after these Immortals consumed the spiritual energy, the Immortal Spirit within the Nine Provinces became increasingly depleted, even hidden in the Heavenly Vault, tending to silence. The originally omnipresent spiritual energy was completely concealed, and ordinary people could no longer shake it. So in order to absorb this Immortal Spirit, the remaining ancient cultivators had to find Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens, using these heaven and earth spirit apertures to pry out the spiritual energy within the Heavenly Vault for cultivation. However, the number of Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens was limited, and at the end of the ancient period, even after several ascensions, there were still more than ten thousand cultivators remaining. These ten thousand cultivators could not possibly each possess Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens, and some of them would inevitably be left out, unable to continue their cultivation. Cutting off someone¡¯s path was no different from killing their parents. As a result, in order to compete for the Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens, the ancient era erupted into a great battle among the cultivators, causing the sun and moon to lose their color and the mountains and rivers to be broken. During this great battle, a cultivator studied the ancient texts, took on the Heavenly Mandate, and created the Way of Control Pneuma. By gathering the Qi Luck of the world, gaining the favor of Heaven¡¯s will, and collecting the world¡¯s treasures, the Heavenly Pillars were erected. With the direct reliance on the Heavenly Pillars, the remaining spiritual energy within the Heavenly Vault was absorbed.¡± Upon reaching this point, Jinyun looked at Lu Yuan, whose expression had changed slightly, and said meaningfully: ¡°Just as Fellow Daoist thought, the first person to create this Way of Control Pneuma was the first ancient Human Emperor, who called himself Emperor Hua Guang.¡± Over the years, the Dan Ding Path had spread rumors about Lu Yuan, claiming not only that he had condensed a Qi as powerful as Dao master¡¯s. They also claimed that he practiced the Fortune Dao, which was why he had been able to achieve the cultivation of condensing a Qi in just a decade in The Age of Dharma Decline. These rumors had spread widely, but most people who heard them remained skeptical. That was because, regarding the Way of Control Pneuma, those who had never cultivated the Immortal Dao, the mundane people, might not have a clear understanding of the details. But the major Immortal Sects had been deeply studying it. After all, in this End of Dharma era, there was less and less Spiritual Energy, and the Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens, which could lead Spiritual Energy, were also decreasing. To the point where now, all the existing major Immortal Sects faced the predicament of their Cavern Heavens drying up and no longer being able to guide the Spiritual Energy. Under such circumstances, every Immortal Sect had naturally begun to find a way out for their Dao Inheritance. Among them, the Way of Control Pneuma, which was the most famous method handed down from ancient times and represented by the Three Emperors in three separate eras, naturally caught people¡¯s attention. However, this method of Control Pneuma was essentially a life-burning technique. An ordinary person¡¯s lifespan could not withstand the consumption of Qi Luck. It was only during the ancient era, with more residual Spiritual Energy, faster cultivation progress for cultivators, and many life-extending items that they could support the practice of the Three Emperors. But it could only support the Three Emperors at most. After the Three Emperors, many cultivators practiced the Way of Control Pneuma, but no one ever heard of anyone who could become an Immortal. All of them failed to achieve immortality, and due to the exhaustion of their lifespan, they perished on this path. As a result, after collecting the Way of Control Pneuma and making some attempts, the major Immortal Sects gave up on this path entirely. It was only the Dan Ding Dao, who did not know what was wrong, that considered this method as the only way out and stubbornly pursued it, eventually targeting Lu Yuan and being slaughtered twice for no reason. That was why most of the major Immortal Sects did not believe the news from Dan Ding Dao after hearing it. At most, they embraced the idea of leaving a glimmer of hope for themselves, remaining doubtful. Jinyun was one of them. But after meeting the King of Chu and having a discourse here, his last glimmer of hope was completely extinguished. Chapter 756 - Chapter 756: Chapter 331 Immortal Path Will Be Broken_3 Chapter 756: Chapter 331 Immortal Path Will Be Broken_3 Because the King of Chu in front of him was too young. His vitality was too abundant. This youthfulness and vitality only proved that the man before him had plenty of lifespan ahead and was well-maintained, with ample life left to live. Not at all like a short-lived ghost who practices the Way of Control Pneuma. As for whether Lu Yuan had any unexpected encounters or secrets that would neutralize the backlash of the Way of Control Pneuma and be unaffected by lifespan constraints. Jinyun never thought about it. In ancient times, the Immortal Cultivation World was so prosperous that it even produced characters like the Three Emperors. But at that time, spiritual energy was still abundant, and countless geniuses and treasures were born, as well as countless spiritual objects and wonders. Under such favorable conditions, even the ancient Three Emperors could not resolve the backlash of the Way of Control Pneuma. Now, after countless years have passed, the Nine Provinces have almost depleted their spiritual energy, and many ancient Immortal Techniques have been lost through the passage of time. You said that under such circumstances, someone could defy destiny and accomplish something that the ancient Three Emperors couldn¡¯t. Is it you who is talking in your sleep, or am I daydreaming? Perhaps the group that practices the Dan Ding Path, who are obsessed and paranoid about the Way of Control Pneuma, would believe such a fantastic story. However, the extremely pragmatic Feishuang Tao, who already has other plans, would not lose their head and start daydreaming. So, after seeing Lu Yuan again and completely giving up on the last thought, Jinyun sentenced the Way of Control Pneuma to death. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The King of Chu in front of him, with his current cultivation, relied indeed on the heritage of Sun Qingyi, or the heritage of the ancient Wind and Thunder Path. Being able to obtain such an opportunity can only be attributed to his good fortune, and others cannot envy him. Unless you can find a second ancient heritage, it¡¯s better to have fewer daydreams. Compared to this, the present is more urgent. ¡°During the ancient period, besides Emperor Hua Guang who created the Way of Control Pneuma, there were also other powerful figures who created the Candles Burning Technique, Bloodline Techniques, Blood Sacrifice Techniques, Soul-transforming method, etc. Each opened their own path, extracting the Heavenly Qi.¡± Now, after millions of years of inheritance, some of these methods and Dao Inheritances still exist, while some have been severed. However, even if they are passed down, the effect of extracting spiritual energy has gradually weakened or even become completely ineffective. The only one that still has a strong effect is the Way of Control Pneuma created by the Three Emperors. It¡¯s just a pity that the Way of Control Pneuma is too defiant of nature and not tolerated by Heaven and Earth. Those who practice this method will lose their lifespans, and hardly anyone can afford the price. Aside from the Three Emperors, no one has heard of anyone who has achieved major success in this method. Now, it has become a death-dealing method, with no one daring to touch it. Only the group from the Dan Ding Path, who are still not giving up on it, want to get their hands on the Way of Control Pneuma. They don¡¯t even think about what kind of people they are and whether they qualify to learn the Dao Inheritance of the Three Emperors. It¡¯s ultimately just a pipe dream.¡± Jinyun made a casual comment, then glanced at Lu Yuan, only to see that the King of Chu remained calm without showing any unusual reactions due to the mention of the Dan Ding Path. Seeing this, he couldn¡¯t help but secretly praise him. It¡¯s no wonder that he could attain the level of a Dao master in this Age of Dharma Decline. Just this ability to control his emotions without showing them is enough to make people marvel. ¡°I already know the answer to the second question.¡± After digesting the large amount of information that Jinyun had spoken, Lu Yuan understood the drastic changes after the Age of Dharma Decline. He took a long breath and continued, ¡°Please continue with the third question, Fellow Daoist.¡± Jinyun nodded, and then said, ¡°As for the third question, what impact does the Age of Dharma Decline have on the Beiming Youdu? After listening to what the poor Daoist said previously, I think the king has some guesses.¡± As a passage between the Two Realms, it is not easy to open Beiming Youdu. In fact, every time Beiming Youdu is opened, it consumes a large amount of spiritual energy. Where does this spiritual energy come from? It naturally comes from the Nine Provinces world. As an immortal array left by immortals, Beiming Youdu has become a part of Heaven and Earth, completely integrated into Heaven and Earth, like Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens. It can touch the core of Heaven and Earth and extract spiritual energy on its own. Therefore, if we want to use Beiming Youdu, we only need to activate it, and the formation will automatically extract the remaining spiritual energy from Heaven and Earth to meet the requirements for activating the formation. However, as an Ascension Array, the amount of spiritual energy required to open Beiming Youdu every time is enormous. With the remaining spiritual energy in our Heaven and Earth, it can¡¯t support it for many times. In recent years, due to the continuous arrival of cold and snowy weather from the north, the world has become colder day by day. This abnormal weather has already attracted the attention of various Immortal Sects. Because this indicates that there is a problem with Beiming Youdu. Beiming refers to the northern sea, and Youdu refers to the mountains in the northern sea. Beiming Youdu refers to ice mountains in the Northern Sea, the extremely cold places in the world. Previously in the Nine Provinces world, Beiming Youdu gathered the cold air around the world and concentrated it in one place as the foundation of the formation. Now the cold air is coming from the north, and the cold air in the world is spreading, which means that there is a problem with the foundation of the Beiming Youdu formation. It is even possible that this formation will be destroyed as a result. The passage between our Nine Provinces world and the Immortal Realm will be completely cut off. This is undoubtedly a more terrifying disaster for our Nine Provinces Immortal Cultivation World than the Age of Dharma Decline.¡± As Jinyun spoke to this point, his face was somewhat difficult to look at. Previously, with Beiming Youdu available, Immortal Sect Cultivators in the Nine Provinces and Cultivators of other Dao Inheritances would gather together every one to two hundred years to collectively head to Beiming Youdu, activate the formation, and carry out the Ascension. The invitation from Ziyun Dao master to Sun Qingyi to go to Beiming Youdu was due to such a habit. So, for these Cultivators, even though the current Age of Dharma Decline is unbearable. But if they could ascend to the Immortal Realm and completely escape this predicament, it would still provide an alternative path. As long as they reached the Immortal Realm, even for a cultivator like Jinyun, under the abundant spiritual energy of the Immortal Realm, it was not impossible to have a chance to consolidate his cultivation, break through the realm, and prolong his lifespan. But now this path has encountered problems, and it seems that Beiming Youdu¡¯s formation is difficult to maintain and is on the verge of collapse. And these cultivators left in the Nine Provinces world will lose their path to immortality completely. How could these Immortal Sect Cultivators accept this cruel reality? Chapter 757 - Chapter 757: Chapter 332: The Extinction of the Four Poles, Nine Provinces Split Chapter 757: Chapter 332: The Extinction of the Four Poles, Nine Provinces Split ¡°Fellow Daoist, are you saying that the Great Cold of Heaven and Earth in recent years is caused by the disaster at Beiming Youdu?¡± As Jinyun¡¯s face turned grim, Lu Yuan also reacted, asking with a somewhat unpleasant expression. As the weather grew colder day by day in recent years, Chu State, being located in Jiangnan, was not greatly affected by it. But that was only temporary. If it was indeed as Jinyun said, the cold air between Heaven and Earth all gathered within Beiming Youdu, and Beiming Youdu acted like a container to hold this cold air. Now the container had a problem, and the cold air began to leak slowly. Lu Yuan could not imagine what kind of impact this cold air leakage would ultimately have. No one knew how much cold air was stored in Beiming Youdu, which had absorbed the cold air of the entire Nine Provinces world? And if all this cold air were to be released, how strong would its impact be on the climate between Heaven and Earth? Now it was only the fifth year since the anomaly began. However, in the northern regions and on the Snowy Plateau, the leaked cold air had already affected the survival of some tribes. If this situation persisted for a decade or even a century, it was unknown how many of the current Nine Provinces and Ten Territories, or the numerous countries in the North, would be completely transformed into a land of ice and frost. Lu Yuan did not know about the others. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? But as for the Snowy Plateau next to Chu State, would more than half of it become a Snow Country? As for the Barbarians on the snow plains, even if they did not all die off, at least half of them would surely perish. If the Snow Plains were not faring well, then Zhou Country and Wei, Zhao, and other countries further north wouldn¡¯t fare much better, would they? Even if these northern countries managed to withstand this cold disaster with their deep foundations, heavy casualties would still be inevitable in the end. Actually, even if that were the case, it wouldn¡¯t matter that much. But what Lu Yuan was even more concerned about was that these northern countries might, in the face of the cold disaster, ultimately be forced into a grand migration southward like the current Snow Plains Barbarians, and that could be disastrous. Just imagining the scene of countless northern people in the billions migrating southward, even as a cultivator who had condensed his Qi, he couldn¡¯t help but feel somewhat suffocated. ¡®Nevertheless, such a scenario is unlikely to occur. And even if it does happen, the first to suffer will be Wei, Zhao, and other countries. Then, when Wei, Zhao, and other countries are forced to migrate south due to the cold wave, the first to bear the brunt will be Zhou and Liang. With Yong State and Qingzhou in the north of Yangzhou, there should be no need to worry about the impact of the cold wave. At most, preparations need to be made early to avoid the desperate acts of Zhou and Liang.¡¯ As Lu Yuan thought about this, his mood improved significantly. However, Jinyun opposite him confirmed his guess, saying, ¡°Your Majesty is not mistaken. The recent cold wave is indeed due to the influence of Beiming Youdu.¡± Jinyun nodded, then looked at Lu Yuan¡¯s troubled face and said seriously, ¡°In ancient times, the current Nine Provinces and Ten Territories were not so finely divided. At that time, Heaven and Earth were still in a Wilderness state, with Yin and Yang imbalances at the four poles. Earthquakes occurred frequently in the west, storms ravaged the eastern seas, ice and snow froze everything in the north, and poisonous fire burned the earth in the south. Only the Central State region was barely stable in its earth veins and suitable for habitation. Later, ancient Immortals broke through the barriers and used their great powers to control the elements of earth, wind, water, and fire. They stabilized the earth¡¯s veins in the far west, quelling the earthquakes. In the east, they filled the sea¡¯s eyes, eliminating the storms. In the south, they sealed off the poisonous fire and nurtured the earth. In the far north, they created Beiming Youdu, gathering the cold air while using it as the foundation and a channel for the array between the Two Realms. Such great divine powers stabilized the four poles, making the Wilderness gradually suitable for the survival of the Human Race. Then, as the human population expanded and grew, the territories were slowly divided into the Nine Provinces and Ten Territories. Once the cold air stored in Beiming Youdu is fully released and scattered back into Heaven and Earth, I am not sure about the overall impact on other areas in the Nine Provinces and Ten Territories. However, the northern regions of Bei Grasslands, Western Gobi, and Mysterious Snow Forest, as well as the larger parts of Ji Province and Yan Province in the northernmost Nine Provinces, and even a small part of Xu Province, will definitely become frozen lands. At that time, the three regions and three states will be covered in ice and snow, no longer suitable for human habitation. All the creatures living there will face death and destruction. And the date of this destruction should not be far off. Perhaps, within 20 to 30 years, or at most a hundred years, all of the cold air in Beiming Youdu is estimated to be fully released. By then, billions of creatures in the aforementioned areas would either have to migrate to the south or slowly perish in the snowstorms, with no other choice for survival.¡± Jinyun recounted the cruel reality word by word. Nearly a million square miles in the three regions and three states, how many people were living in such a vast area? Even if the environment in the three northern regions was as harsh as the Snowy Plateau, the combined population of all the tribes and kingdoms there would probably amount to 40 or 50 million people. As for the remaining Yan, Ji, and Xu Provinces, the total population would certainly exceed 100 million. In the three states and three regions, Lu Yuan estimated that the total population had already approached two hundred million. This was a staggering two hundred million people. If Beiming Youdu completely lost control and the ice came, two hundred million people would be completely deprived of their homes, reduced to refugees, and forced to seek survival in the south. At that time, the influx of refugees would cause a tremendous impact on the existing social structure of the southern provinces, ¡®No, perhaps there is no need to wait for the ice to arrive.¡¯ Lu Yuan looked up at Jinyun, a hint of difference flashed in his eyes. Chapter 758 - Chapter 758: Chapter 332: The Extinction of the Four Poles, Nine Provinces Split _2 Chapter 758: Chapter 332: The Extinction of the Four Poles, Nine Provinces Split _2 Since Feishuang Tao could come to Chu State today, to inform him, the King of Chu, about the impending cold wave disaster. Then Lu Yuan did not believe that among the northern countries, particularly the most affected ones: Yan, Ji, and Xu Provinces, there would not be sects of immortality similar to Feishuang Tao, or other cultivation forces. Perhaps even now, or even as early as one or two years ago, or even earlier, there were Immortal Sects that had sought out these northern worldly dynasties, alerting them to this impending disaster. And consider the direction of the winds in the Nine Provinces in recent years. Firstly, Qingzhou¡¯s Liang State, regardless of the alarm and hostility it caused in other countries of the world, audaciously annexed Qingzhou¡¯s Lai State, thereby unifying all of Qingzhou in one fell swoop. The move was like the striking of a domino, immediately causing unrest in the surrounding nations, resulting in the northern countries each beginning to expand their military forces and prepare for battle, stirring up internal strife and accelerating their unification efforts. The entire land of the Nine Provinces, therefore, became riddled with smoke and flames of war, like a powder keg, as if ready to explode at the slightest provocation. At first, Lu Yuan thought that this was due to the power of Liang State, causing the surrounding nations to fear and become alert, leading them on the path of military expansion and preparation for their own self-protection. But upon careful contemplation now, things might not be so simple. In recent years, Lu Yuan had extensively perused and remembered classic books, so he knew a bit about the old times through some rumors and records. Therefore, he had a vague understanding of what Jinyun was referring to: the Central State region in the four extremities of the land. The place known as Central State in ancient times is, in fact, the entire Qingzhou, as well as the eastern part of Yong State: Henan and Nanyang and the southern part of Xuzhou, along with Yuzhou, which is adjacent to Xuzhou, making up an area approximately the size of two current provinces. And as Liang State occupies half of the Central State region, in the situation where the three northern provinces are suffering, Liang State naturally becomes the hardest hit area, being the only safe zone. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï Within Liang State, there are two major Daoist sects: the Dan Ding Dao and the Cang Long Way. These two sects are located in Qingzhou, with disciples coming from there, and are closely related to Liang State. If one were to say that these two sects have no connection with Liang State¡¯s court, Lu Yuan would find that hard to believe. Remember, he had personally witnessed Yang Jing, a representative of the Yue State court, attending the Inescapable Meeting as a form of congratulations. Given that the Inescapable Meeting was conducted this way, the similar ceremonies held by the Dan Ding Dao and Cang Long Way in the north must have been roughly the same. So, it would be reasonable for these two major Daoist sects to have informed Liang State in advance as soon as they noticed the abnormalities at Beiming Youdu. And it was precisely because Liang State had sensed the approaching catastrophe that it could not wait to unify Qingzhou to gather the power of an entire province to face the imminent disaster. At the same time, the many nations in Yan, Ji, and Xu Provinces had also started to expand their armies and prepare for battle, not solely for self-preservation, but also likely in preparation for migration southward once the cold wave arrived. Since their territory would no longer be suitable for living in the imminent future, The only option for survival for the countless nations and tribes in these three provinces was to migrate southward to places where living conditions would be more favorable. On this journey of migration, any person that stands in their way will be considered an enemy, a hurdle to their plundering of survival supplies. Killing, looting, conquering¡­ All these are the main themes for the northern nations under the pressure of the cold wave. And beneath this theme lays a hell filled with death and oppression. At this moment, Lu Yuan could almost see the rivers formed of corpses and blood decades from now, with countless aggrieved souls crying and howling above them. Mankind, at this moment, would be thoroughly transformed into a purgatory. ¡°The world will be thrown into chaos from now on.¡± With his eyes gently closed, Lu Yuan sighed softly. Although he had foreseen the terrible future, he could not change anything about it, and certainly had no ability to prevent it. Facing a disaster that would affect the entire world, an individual¡¯s power was so insignificant and weak. Perhaps in ancient times, countless immortals could use their divine powers to gather and seal the cold air back in Beiming Youdu. However, in this Age of Dharma Decline, where divine powers are difficult to manifest, it would be hard, to say the least, for the existent immortals to gather and seal the cold air, let alone venture into Beiming Youdu. Without the ability to change the source of the disaster, it was also impractical to seek to alleviate the catastrophes brought about by the disaster. The disaster refugees are two hundred million in number, a total far beyond the carrying capacity of any single province. Just as Zhou State, which occupies more than half of Yong State, could not provide relief for a mere six million barbarians. Liang State, which only occupies Qingzhou, could not save two hundred million overwhelming refugees either. These refugees want to survive, so they can only migrate southwards. The people from the two countries in Qingzhou also want to survive, so they can only block the passage of the refugees moving southwards. This is a dead knot, impossible to untangle. ¡°It seems the king has already understood the crux of the problem.¡± Seeing the expression and sentiments of Lu Yuan, Jinyun immediately realised that the King of Chu had understood the implication of his words. He slightly nodded and said with profound meaning: ¡°However, the king may still not have fully understood the cold disaster.¡± ¡°Not fully understood?¡± Lu Yuan blinked slightly, his heart slightly uneasy, feeling that he seemed to have overlooked something very important, otherwise, Jinyun would not have made such a remark. Chapter 759 - Chapter 759: Chapter 332: The Extinction of the Four Poles, Nine Provinces Split_3 Chapter 759: Chapter 332: The Extinction of the Four Poles, Nine Provinces Split_3 He narrowed his eyes in thought, and then his expression turned solemn as he bowed and asked for guidance, ¡°Please enlighten me, Fellow Daoist.¡± Jinyun spoke in a deep and distant tone: ¡°As Poor Daoist said earlier, in ancient times, the four extremities were imbalanced, and Heaven and Earth were in chaos. The immortals intervened and restored the balance, leading to the formation of the Nine Provinces and Ten Domains we know today. However, at present, the northern polar air that was once suppressed by the immortals has been released due to the influence of Beiming Youdu and has transformed into the cold current we now face. Does this not imply that the North Pole, as one of the four extremities, has become unstable and its balance has been lost? Since the North Pole has lost its balance, would the South Pole, which corresponds to it, also exhibit abnormal phenomena and release poisonous fire from the Earth¡¯s core? If problems arise in both the North and South Poles, then would the Western Ocean and Eastern Mountains, which also make up part of the four extremes, experience storms and earthquakes again? The entire Heaven and Earth are interconnected, and as part of Heaven and Earth, the four extremities naturally correspond and connect with each other. This so-called ¡°affecting the whole body by pulling a single hair¡±, being in this Heaven and Earth, and being among the four extremities, make it impossible to withdraw oneself from the situation. And when the four extremities do encounter problems, where will the human races of the various countries within this region go? When the skin is gone, where will the hair attach?! The three states and three domains in the north were originally polar ice fields. The Southern Domain Rainforest, Southern Sea Island Domain, and Yangzhou were originally part of the Southern Polar Poisonous Fire. If everything goes as the Poor Daoist has speculated, then after the North Pole completely loses control, the next to lose control among the world¡¯s four extremities will be the Southern Polar Poisonous Fire. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï By then, within the realm of a state and two domains, the Earth will spew forth, the ground will be covered in poisonous fire, and with a sea of fire engulfing the land, all life will be obliterated. At that time, how many regions in Yangzhou will be able to escape? And how will Chu State, which is located in Yangzhou, manage in such a situation?¡± Jinyun fixed his gaze directly on Lu Yuan and uttered these heart-piercing words. Upon hearing the other party¡¯s words, Lu Yuan¡¯s expression changed, and his face became unprecedentedly ugly. Because he knew that everything the other party had said was not an exaggeration. As a cultivator, Lu Yuan naturally had his own understanding of the great Dao of Heaven and Earth. That is why he was well aware of just how terrifying the imbalance of the four extremities and the Yin-Yang disharmony described by the other party could be. In Lu Yuan¡¯s previous life, he had come across a similar description in a piece of writing. Huainanzi once recorded: In ancient times, when the four extremities were in disarray and the Nine Provinces were split, the heavens did not cover all, the Earth did not support all, fires raged ceaselessly, and waters surged endlessly. Ferocious beasts devoured innocent people, and birds of prey snatched the old and weak. The scene of imbalance among the four extremities described by Jinyun was similar to the disarray of Huainanzi¡¯s four extremities and the ruptures in the Nine Provinces. The two depictions might differ slightly, but they were essentially alike. Both were equally terrifying, equally apocalyptic, and the people had no means of subsistence. Under the impending doomsday, perhaps the only place in the entire Nine Provinces world where people could survive would be the ancient Central State, where the Liang State was located? But how could the Central State, being the size of just two provinces, accommodate the entire human population of the Nine Provinces and Ten Domains? As a result, at that time, more than ninety percent of the population across the Nine Provinces and Ten Domains would be destined to be abandoned and swallowed up by the disasters of the four extremities. And Yangzhou, where Chu State is located, would most likely not be spared from the Southern Polar Poisonous Fire. Even if a small number of regions manage to avoid the poisonous fire, what significance would that have for Chu State, which will have already lost most of Yangzhou? Therefore, there is ultimately only one choice for Chu State. That is to expand northward. Like the other northern countries, Chu State has to fight desperately to head south for a slim chance at survival. It¡¯s just that Chu State¡¯s situation is somewhat better than that of the northern countries, as the Southern Polar Poisonous Fire may only erupt after the complete release of the Northern Polar Cold Waves. This eruption may take another hundred years and last for several decades, spreading throughout the Southern Domain Rainforest and Southern Sea Island Domain before reaching Yangzhou. Lu Yuan still has at least a hundred years of buffer time. However, no matter how long the buffer time, there will eventually come a day when it runs out. Once the poisonous fire reaches Yangzhou, Chu State¡¯s fate will be sealed. At that time, the only way to survive would be to migrate northward. ¡°Is Ning Country aware of this information?¡± Lu Yuan asked, his expression changing constantly before suddenly looking up to inquire. Jinyun¡¯s expression remained calm. He had known about the impending disaster for a long time and felt no impact in revealing it now. Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s question, Jinyun nodded and replied, ¡°Five years ago, someone went to Jinling to inform Ziyun Tao about this matter. ¡± After all, back then, the universally recognized ruler of Yangzhou was still Jinling¡¯s Ning Country. At that time, if anyone wanted to save Yangzhou¡¯s fate and lead it through the upcoming catastrophe, it would have to be Ning Country. However, the Chu State established by King Chu has rapidly expanded and risen in recent years, catching up with Ning Country and establishing a hegemony in the present day. Because of this, Poor Daoist has come to Baling to inform King Chu of this matter. In this way, both Chu and Ning countries will be prepared for the impending disaster, regardless of who ultimately controls Yangzhou.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but snort. He had known that the world¡¯s hegemonic powers would know about such a great calamity as the imbalance of the four extremities in advance. Chu State was kept out of the loop simply because it was too weak and not taken seriously by the Immortal Sects. If not for Lu Yuan¡¯s rapid expansion these last few years, and even establishing hegemony in the Nine Provinces in recent years, he would not have attracted Feishuang Tao¡¯s attention. Perhaps he would only find out the cause of the disaster at the last minute. His initial determination to dominate was indeed the right choice. It not only made Chu State¡¯s expansion smoother but also secured half a ticket to become Yangzhou¡¯s savior. ¡®However, since Ziyun Tao informed Ning Country, it seems that the relationship between the Immortal Sect of Tianluo Mountain and the Coastal Aristocratic Families is indeed extraordinary.¡¯ Lu Yuan narrowed his eyes, recalling the representatives of the Coastal Aristocratic Families who had attended the Inescapable Meeting at Tianluo Mountain that year. The Coastal Aristocratic Families, who had controlled Yangzhou for thousands of years, seemed to have a much closer relationship with Ziyun Tao than he had initially thought. And what about Feishuang Tao? He looked at Jinyun, wondering what purpose the latter had in revealing this information to him. Chapter 760 - Chapter 760: Chapter 333: Ascension of the World Chapter 760: Chapter 333: Ascension of the World After realizing that Jinyun had other intentions in his heart, Lu Yuan did not play any tricks with the opponent. Now, the great calamity of the Four Extremes is about to come, and the entire Nine Provinces and Ten Domains, with billions of living beings, are all deeply trapped in the calamity, unable to transcend it. As the lord of Chu State, ruling over half of the state and tens of millions of people, he naturally had the responsibility to lead the people of Chu State out of this disaster. However, this disaster involved the Heaven and Earth Calamity after all, even though Lu Yuan had supported the Cultivating Taiping Essentials for more than a decade, his cultivation should already be the first person in the world. But in the end, he was simply an entry-level cultivator who had condensed some qi, to have him save the Heaven and Earth was nothing more than a joke. On the other hand, people such as Jinyun who belonged to the immortal sects that had been passed down for millions of years, might have some ancient methods to deal with the Heaven and Earth Calamity by relying on their ancient heritage. Moreover, seeing the other party visiting him today, he specially clarified the matter. Lu Yuan would not be so naive as to think that the other party had genuinely come to find him because Chu State had achieved hegemony and had the qualification to dominate Yangzhou, all for the sake of the people of the world. If the other party had such a kind heart, they could have visited Chu State a few years ago, so that Lu Yuan could have made better preparations. Why wait until now? So, the other party¡¯s visit this time definitely had some purpose. Jinyun was a representative of the sect, and his purpose was the purpose of the sect. In other words, after seeing the increase in Chu State¡¯s strength, Feishuang Tao had some interest demands and wanted to achieve them through Chu State. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? This was the purpose of the other party¡¯s thousand-mile journey to announce the calamity and to befriend Chu¡¯s king. Understanding this point, there was no problem. Lu Yuan was not afraid of the other party¡¯s schemes, nor was he afraid of being used by them. In fact, the interaction between people in the world is nothing more than a process of mutual use. You should not be afraid of being used, nor should you be angry about it. Because what is truly suffocating and frightening is not having any value to be used at all, which is a complete denial for a person. In the beginning, the Dan Ding Path was able to use Lu Yuan so he could borrow their help to overcome the initial financial crises. Yue Country used Lu Yuan, and he used their banner to establish Changsha State. The Snow Plains Nomads were ready to use Lu Yuan, and he was about to receive a spiritual woman and a lot of precious silver tales. None of these uses were necessarily well-intended, but in the end, who could take advantage of them was just a matter of means. Lu Yuan was able to laugh until the end and naturally become the winner. Now Feishuang Tao also had this idea, which naturally wasn¡¯t a bad thing for him. Instead, it gave him an opportunity to find out the other party¡¯s details and get involved. So upon realizing this, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t hesitate anymore and directly stood up and bowed to Jinyun: ¡°Fellow Daoist has the world in his heart, after hearing your words today, you saved tens of millions of people in my Chu State. The people of Chu State will never forget this kindness and virtue. If Fellow Daoist has any command, please do not hesitate to ask, as long as it¡¯s within our power, we, the people of Chu State, will never shirk.¡± He made his attitude clear. He accepted the favor and was willing to cooperate with Feishuang Tao. As expected, Jinyun, hearing the meaning behind Lu Yuan¡¯s words, showed a faint smile on his face, and couldn¡¯t help but praise the Chu King¡¯s understanding in his heart. However, since the other person was the lord of a country and also a cultivator who had condensed qi, Jinyun did not dare to show off too much, so he quickly stood up to avoid Lu Yuan¡¯s salute and then returned the salute similarly. Then he said, ¡°Your Majesty need not be so courteous. Today, this poor Daoist comes for the sake of all living beings in the world, not to seek gratitude. However, regarding the imbalance of the Four Extremes and the change that has occurred in Beiming Youdu, may I ask if Your Majesty has any solutions?¡± Jinyun first spoke righteously and then immediately changed the subject, bringing the conversation back to Beiming Youdu. Lu Yuan also slightly avoided Jinyun¡¯s salute, and then listened to the other¡¯s questions, furrowing his brows and pacing in the chamber. Looking at the scene of flying snow and plum blossoms outside, his eyes were filled with confusion. Previously, when he hadn¡¯t heard about Beiming Youdu, he still loved the beauty of this Heaven and Earth, enjoying the immersion. But now that he knows about the imbalance of the Four Extremes, he already knows that the early blooming of plum blossoms is a sign of a great calamity. In this way, looking at the snow-covered plum blossoms, they become disturbing and terrifying. Because it represents the death of countless people, the devastation of the entire Heaven and Earth, and the endless calamity. Once you understand the heavy implications of this, how can you still enjoy the last bit of happiness before the end of the world without any guilt or compassion in your heart? At least as the lord of Chu State, bearing the hopes of tens of millions of people, Lu Yuan felt he could not do it. Throughout his cultivation journey, he took the path of gathering Qi Luck, and the people of Chu State played a significant role in this. Without those people, Lu Yuan would not have achieved what he has today. At this point, if he were asked to give up the foundation of Chu State and abandon the 8 million people, let alone whether he could bear to do it, he would not be able to pass this hurdle in his heart. If possible, Lu Yuan still wanted to do his best to help the people of Chu State, and even the people of Yangzhou, to survive this Heaven and Earth disaster. In doing so, he would not have been in vain with this encounter in the Jiangnan region. Of course, while he said he would try his best to save Yangzhou, Lu Yuan did not promise to stay here and die with the whole realm of Yangzhou. He wasn¡¯t that selfless, that great, or that altruistic. As an immortal with an endless lifespan, a soul from another world, Lu Yuan felt some attachment to the Nine Provinces World, having lived here for decades. Chapter 761 - Chapter 761: Chapter 333: Ascension of the World_2 Chapter 761: Chapter 333: Ascension of the World_2 Not only had he made so many friends, but he also got married, had children, and established his own foundation. These were all ties and belongings he now had. However, no matter how deep the ties and sense of belonging, he did not forget what his true essence was. Longevity. On the road to longevity, everything else is just scenery along the way, with only the self remaining as eternal and unique. The current strife in the world is but a mere part of life¡¯s scenery. Perhaps after living for an eternal number of years, the memories of today would be insignificant, simply an inconsequential part of a much larger whole. Knowing the vast future ahead, Lu Yuan would never forsake the bigger picture for a minor consideration and risk losing his entire future here. When faced with insurmountable obstacles, he would certainly be the first to bring his family and friends away from Chu State and hide in Central State, rather than staying here and fighting to the death. Of course, this is only an extreme outcome. No one knows how the future will unfold. Chu State and Lu Yuan still have more than a hundred years left. In such a long time, they might find a way to ensure their survival. However, for now, after hearing this news so suddenly, Lu Yuan could not come up with a viable solution even if he racked his brain and tried his hardest. After gazing at the colorful plum blossoms for a while, he finally withdrew his gaze and sighed softly, ¡°When Heaven and Earth are about to collapse, as a mere mortal, being like dust in this vast universe, what can I do?¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Jinyun, who was standing beside him, also felt sad upon hearing these words. As a native of the Nine Provinces and a local of Yangzhou, though he was born into an Immortal Sect and had severed ties with the secular world, he was ultimately a part of Heaven and Earth and could not transcend beyond it. Upon knowing that his world was about to fall, he could not help but feel downhearted. However, bearing the heavy responsibility of his sect, he eventually mustered his courage and said, ¡°If Your Majesty has no solution, why not listen to the humble advice of this poor Daoist?¡± ¡°Oh?¡± Lu Yuan heard him and put away his own concerns. Knowing the important part was coming, he turned his head, looked at Jinyun with a serious expression, and said, ¡°Please do share, Fellow Daoist.¡± Jinyun nodded and said solemnly, ¡°In the face of the great disaster of Heaven and Earth, all living beings in the Nine Provinces have nowhere to hide. If we want to survive this tribulation, my Feishuang Tao can offer Your Majesty two choices that may help us overcome these difficulties.¡± Two choices? A spark flickered in Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes upon hearing this. Confronting this great catastrophe, he couldn¡¯t find even one feasible method. However, Feishuang Tao casually mentioned two choices. Even if Lu Yuan did not know if these choices were feasible, it already proved that these ancient Immortal Sects indeed had some tricks up their sleeves. However, Lu Yuan only pondered this in his heart, and did not interrupt Jinyun. Instead, he continued listening quietly to what the other had to say. ¡°The first choice is to ascend to the Immortal Realm.¡± With a determined heart, Jinyun openly shared his thoughts and motives, ¡°Four Extremities Breaking, great disaster befalling the Nine Provinces, the world is now on the brink of collapse and beyond salvation. In such a world where there is no Spiritual Energy left to cultivate, and Heaven and Earth no longer suitable for living, the entire world will become a place of death.¡± ¡°Why not follow in the footsteps of the ancient Immortals, directly ascend to the Immortal Realm, and transcend this miserable world?¡± Jinyun used the Buddhist term ¡°miserable world¡± to vividly depict the situation of this realm. After listening, Lu Yuan¡¯s face slightly changed, ¡°Ascension?¡± ¡°Yes, ascend,¡± Jinyun nodded affirmatively, then continued, ¡°Ever since sensing the changes in Heaven and Earth five years ago, every Immortal Sect and Dao Inheritance of the Nine Provinces have dispatched people to investigate the situation in Beiming Youdu. Now, five years have passed, and those who went to Beiming Youdu have returned with detailed information. The great array in Beiming Youdu is indeed collapsing due to a lack of Spiritual Energy but is only currently affecting the peripheral areas.¡± ¡°The defensive arrays in the peripheral areas are gradually shutting down due to the lack of Spiritual Energy.¡± Fortunately, the core area, which affects the function of the array, still has enough Spiritual Energy to maintain its operation for the time being.¡± However, if the situation continues, within ten years, the core array will also be affected, and when there is no more Spiritual Energy to supply it, the teleportation ability of Beiming Youdu will be completely closed.¡± ¡°By then, the current state of affairs in the Age of Dharma Decline will make it impossible to reactivate the array.¡± ¡°Therefore, all the Sects, Buddhist Institutes, and other Dao Inheritances of the Nine Provinces, totaling seventeen powerful inheriting forces, have made up our minds.¡± ¡°One year from now, we will gather all the disciples from every Sect, along with those who possess mystical powers and are willing to ascend, and go together to Beiming Youdu.¡± ¡°Taking advantage of the ability of the array to still operate, when there is still Spiritual Energy in the Nine Provinces, and the array can still be activated.¡± ¡°We will directly activate the array, ascend to the Immortal Realm.¡± ¡°This will be the Ascension of the entire world!¡± As Jinyun reached this point, a sense of passion filled his voice, and he stared intently at Lu Yuan, his eyes gleaming with an unwavering conviction. However, it made sense. Ascending together with the cultivators of the entire world required tremendous courage and determination, which could easily stir people¡¯s hearts and desires. Especially the phrase ¡°Ascension of the entire world,¡± it was truly touching. Even Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but be slightly mesmerized upon hearing it. Jinyun was no exception. He spoke with eagerness, ¡°The Immortal Realm is the origin of Spiritual Energy. As long as we can ascend there, we will never again have to worry about competing for the meager Spiritual Energy in our cultivation as we do now.¡± Chapter 762 - Chapter 762: Chapter 333: Ascension of the World_3 Chapter 762: Chapter 333: Ascension of the World_3 In the end, due to the lack of resources and nearing the end of life, they missed the opportunity to glimpse the Great Dao. This is the ultimate method, the last chance for the Nine Provinces to create their fortunes. Apart from the seventeen of us, the immortal-term Daotong, as long as there are willing people in the Nine Provinces, they can follow us to Beiming Youdu and participate in this great ascension project. With the cultivation that has united a great king¡¯s spirit, it is comparable to a school master, reaching the pinnacle of this world. So if the king is willing, my Feishuang Tao is willing to recommend and take the king to ascend together, and from then on to go to the immortal realm, boundless and carefree.¡± Ascend to the Immortal Realm! Hearing Jinyun¡¯s fanatic words and invitation, Lu Yuan was momentarily tempted. But soon after, he calmed down again. Ascending to the Immortal Realm sounds wonderful. But is it really so between the two? Don¡¯t forget, not long ago, Jinyun had said that in ancient times, something happened in the Immortal Realm. Beiming Youdu formation was closed, the immortals in the Immortal Realm could no longer be contacted, and no one could be sent to the Nine Provinces. Later generations of ascendants in the Nine Provinces went to the Immortal Realm through Beiming Youdu, but in the end, no news came back. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï The Immortal Realm over there seemed to have turned into a black hole. The Beiming Youdu here in the Nine Provinces became the path to the black hole. Anything or anyone that entered the black hole was completely swallowed up by it, and no more information could be transmitted. Just thinking about it, it feels terrifying. In ancient times, so many cultivators chose to ascend during the Dharma Ending Tribulation, trying to endure the lack of spiritual energy, and only after accumulating enough strength did they choose to ascend. In this case, it is not without consideration. So before it¡¯s clear what the Immortal Realm is all about, can the Beiming Youdu formation really ascend to the Immortal Realm before? Even if Jinyun¡¯s vision is good and the Nine Provinces¡¯ major immortal sects have promised many benefits, Lu Yuan has no interest in the so-called ascension. After all, for people like Jinyun, their lives are limited, and if they can¡¯t grasp this last chance to ascend, they will eventually face the fate of their lives ending. So it is understandable that they want to take advantage of this opportunity while they still have it, to compete for that last chance before the disaster comes. It¡¯s normal. But for Lu Yuan, this so-called slim chance doesn¡¯t seem very attractive. He doesn¡¯t lack lifespan, with no external interference, and can live for billions of years with no end in sight. Although the Nine Provinces are all in ruins, and a great catastrophe is coming. But in the end, there is still a Central State for people to catch their breath, and the territory of the Two Provinces can also build a strong dynasty and bring endless glory and wealth. So if Lu Yuan wants to. He can stay in the Nine Provinces and wait until the end of this world when the spiritual energy is completely depleted, and not only are all cultivators gone, but even Martial Arts Xiantian becomes a legend. By then, with his current strength, he can suppress an era by himself, directly unify the entire Central State, and create a dynasty that lasts for ten thousand years. Just thinking about this grand prospect, it is exciting. Even the departure of all the immortal sects in the Nine Domains at this time is good news for Lu Yuan. Because the only existence that can threaten his life now is those Dao masters of the immortal sects. These people, who are at the same level as Lu Yuan, have a certain possibility of threatening his life. And now these people choose to ascend. After these people are gone, Lu Yuan will become the undisputed top expert in the entire Nine Provinces. This is true for both mortals and the Immortal Cultivation World. With fewer immortal sect influences, fewer misgivings, Lu Yuan will be more likely to take many advantages in his quest to unify the Nine Provinces and seize the initiative in the end-of-the-world catastrophe. With a bright future ahead, only a crazy person would, in the face of that unknown terror, follow this group of already insane people at the end of the world and do the so-called ¡°ascension¡± thing. So when he heard Jinyun¡¯s invitation, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t even think about it, and he flatly refused, ¡°I am the king of Chu, bearing the responsibility of thousands of people, and my friends and relatives are in the Nine Provinces, so why should I ascend?¡± Jinyun, who was listening beside Lu Yuan, had a change in his eyes but did not get angry because of the refusal. However, the original enthusiasm for ascension was somewhat diminished. So, with a calm expression, he continued, ¡°It seems that what the king has chosen is indeed as the Dao master expected. However, this is also good. Since the king is unwilling to ascend, he can now discuss further cooperation with my Feishuang Tao.¡± Lu Yuan looked surprised, ¡°Cooperation?¡± ¡°Yes, cooperation.¡± Jinyun nodded, and then asked back, ¡°Does the king know what Ziyun Tao asked for when they went to Jinling and told Ning Heavenly Son about the great catastrophe?¡± Asking the question, he didn¡¯t wait for an answer, and just continued on his own, ¡°What Ziyun Tao asked for was that after all the cultivators of their sect ascended, Ning Country would continue to support their Dao lineage and maintain Ziyun Tao¡¯s lineage in this world. In return, Ziyun Tao is willing to give up some benefits to support Ning Country and help it unify Yangzhou.¡± At this point, Jinyun looked at Lu Yuan and said in a low voice, ¡°That is to say, Ning Country now has the support of Ziyun Tao, the first immortal sect in Yangzhou. With the foundation of Ziyun Tao¡¯s ten thousand years of inheritance, Ning Country has its support, and it will not be difficult to restore the prosperity of the Jinling dynasty.¡± In a covert way, Jinyun revealed another big piece of news. The immortal doors, which have always been uninvolved in external affairs, have now taken the initiative to join the struggle for supremacy among the dynasties. Especially in Ning Country, they have gotten the help of Ziyun Tao. Lu Yuan recalled the scene of his meeting with the Ziyun Tao master, and the demeanor of the other party at that time was still vivid in his memory. Even though he has now condensed a Qi and walked deep in this Dao. But at this moment, comparing himself secretly with the other party, he had no guarantee that he could surpass him. After all, that was the leader of an immortal sect in one province, the successor of a ten-thousand-year-old sect, and a truly unparalleled figure in the Nine Provinces. Before he is fully developed, Lu Yuan is quite cautious about it. Damn it! Unexpectedly, this unification of Yangzhou has caused such a wave. Ziyun Tao, I will remember you. Chapter 763 - Chapter 763: Chapter 334: Cooperation between Dao Country Chapter 763: Chapter 334: Cooperation between Dao Country Lu Yuan silently cursed in his heart. He was very dissatisfied with Ziyun Dao¡¯s intervention in worldly power struggles, deeply feeling that they were sabotaging his plans. Without their interference, with his current accumulation, it would take at most ten years to unify the entirety of Yangzhou. But now, there was Ziyun Dao. Even if many people in Ziyun Dao were going to attain Ascension, their strength would greatly decline. However, with their remaining foundation, a Ten Thousand Year Sect, it would still be enough to double Ning Country¡¯s strength. Not to mention, they would just need to take out all the Divine Blood Elixir accumulated within Ziyun Dao, and creating three or five Inborn Grandmasters would not be difficult at all. Moreover, with their top-tier Cave World, they could still provide cultivators with Spiritual Energy for now, so they could probably raise even more Divine Blood Variants. Even if Lu Yuan said that they could train ten Inborn Grandmasters, he would not be surprised at all. If all these resources were used on Ning Country¡­ No doubt, it would cause Chu State¡¯s unification process to be hindered by countless obstacles, making it even more difficult. What was even more troubling for him was the fact that Ziyun Dao had chosen Ning Country ¨C what about the others in the Nine Provinces? More or less, there were some Immortal Sects in each province and domain. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Would those Immortal Sects that were about to attain Ascension make the same choice, attempting to support a worldly dynasty to protect their interests after Ascension? ¡°I did not expect Ziyun Dao to blatantly intervene in worldly affairs despite the distinction between mortals and immortals, without any regard for the dignity of the Ten Thousand Year Immortal Sect.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s expression changed for a moment, and he finally sighed, but his face soon turned resolute: ¡°However, even so, for the sake of the people of the world, for the common people of Yangzhou, I still have to conquer Ning Country. If Ziyun Dao insists on colluding with Ning Country, they will stand in my way. Then, I might have to raise my sword, break the mountains, and completely eradicate the Heavenly Dao Lineage.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s words were cold, and his murderous intent was obvious. Although he was wary of Ziyun Dao, he was only worried that their Ten Thousand Year Sect might have some hidden inheritance left by ancient immortals. But in the current Age of Dharma Decline, even if there were any hidden resources, they would need to have enough Spiritual Energy to use them. Now, the cultivators of Nine Provinces were preparing for their collective Ascension, and it was predicted that after the activation of Beiming Youdu, the last bit of active Spiritual Energy in the Nine Provinces would be completely drained. By that time, this world would truly become a barren, spiritless land, completely cut off from transcendence. Only someone like Lu Yuan could maintain his cultivation by utilizing the Luck Heavenly Pillar to pry out the deepest remnants of Heavenly and Earthly spiritual energy. Otherwise, any cultivator would lose their source of Spiritual Energy. Let alone cultivation, even any inherited treasures within the Sects would become unusable due to the lack of Spiritual Energy. No, that¡¯s not quite right. Celestial treasures are extraordinary. Perhaps due to their inherent toughness and sharpness, they could still be used as divine weapons, pursued by ordinary people even after the Age of Dharma Decline. However, that¡¯s all they could do, and naturally, they would not pose a threat to Lu Yuan. As for him¡­ He just needed to wait a little longer, endure for another decade or so, for his Dao Law to break through further and Chu State¡¯s foundation to become even stronger. Then, with some effort, he could still resolve the alliance between Ziyun Dao and Ning Country. However, in that case, the infighting and sacrifices within Yangzhou would be even greater than originally planned. The battles would be more intense, the chaos would last longer, and Yangzhou¡¯s foundation would be further eroded. This was undoubtedly unfavorable for Lu Yuan¡¯s already planned strategy of unifying Yangzhou, accumulating strength, and heading toward the only remaining pure land of Central State in the future. After all, the future Central State would involve the struggle for survival resources of billions of people in the entire Nine Provinces and Ten Realms. All the surviving inhabitants of the Nine Provinces would naturally migrate and converge there. This migration struggle was a matter of life and death. Whoever could secure a place to survive in Central State would be able to prolong their existence. On the other hand, they would only face annihilation as the boundless calamity descended. Under these circumstances. Even if Lu Yuan could become the number one person in the world a hundred years later, he might still be unable to stop the overwhelming desire of billions of people to survive, relying solely on his own strength. When an entire race and an entire country are faced with the situation of either advancing or dying, so-called immortals become less important. As for Lu Yuan himself, he truly did not think he could commit to slaughtering tens of millions or even hundreds of millions of people. ¡®So the only thing I can do is to unify Yangzhou as quickly as possible, and then advance towards Central State. Once I seize this land as my base, I can try to develop the remaining Two Provinces of Central State as much as possible. By that time, the disaster in the north should have reduced some of the population, combined with the losses from the wars in other provinces, Central State and Yangzhou should be able to accommodate the remaining disaster victims from the three northern provinces and realms. At that point, I will promote the Plan: Birth and Fertility, cultivate high-yielding crops, reform agricultural technology, and perhaps be able to support the entire migrating population of the Nine Provinces with the resources of those two provinces. By then, I will have done what I can for the Nine Provinces and the people of the world.¡¯ Lu Yuan sighed in his heart. The above plan was already the best solution he could think of in the face of this catastrophe. Perhaps during the implementation of the plan, there would be many difficulties, tragedies would occur, but for the sake of the entire Nine Provinces and the Human Race, it would have to be this way. The only thing he was worried about was whether or not the collapse of the Four Poles was the final step in this great heavenly and earthly catastrophe. If the disaster continued to spread after the Four Poles collapsed and reached Central State, then what should he do in the face of the world-ending catastrophe? Chapter 764 - Chapter 764: Chapter 334: Cooperation between Dao Country_2 Chapter 764: Chapter 334: Cooperation between Dao Country_2 Although this possibility may not necessarily happen, it¡¯s better to be prepared for a rainy day and take precautions as soon as possible. ¡®In order to be prepared, I must not neglect the cultivation of Immortal Techniques. After the cultivators from the Nine Provinces depart, I must hasten to absorb the remaining Spiritual Energy of Heaven and Earth in time. By then, if I can cultivate the Five Qi Towards Primordial, even if I truly face the catastrophe of the collapse of Heaven and Earth, I will still have the power to protect myself. Also, I must visit the Beiming Youdu in the future if I have the chance. If the Nine Provinces are truly beyond saving, then that place will be my only way out.¡¯ Lu Yuan thought to himself. Although he has achieved longevity, the ¡°immortality¡± he achieved only means that he can live forever without the interference of external forces. If external forces occur, such as the destruction of the world, he will still die when he should. So when the day comes when the Nine Provinces collapse, he can only choose the path that the cultivators of the Nine Provinces are choosing now ¨C ascending to the Immortal Realm through Beiming Youdu. Therefore, for this backup plan, he must maintain it in any case. Starting the array formation, as Jinyun said, it requires a massive amount of Spiritual Energy to support it. If it is to be used on the day of the collapse of the Nine Provinces, it is inevitable that the Spiritual Energy between Heaven and Earth will have already been exhausted, and there will be no excess energy left to start the array formation. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ¡®However, even without Spiritual Energy, my mana, purified and transformed from Spiritual Energy, should be enough to start the array as well.¡¯ Once I have absorbed the remaining Spiritual Energy of the Nine Provinces, the mana I cultivate in my body should be enough to support the opening of Beiming Youdu once. In this regard, there is no need for excessive worry.¡¯ Lu Yuan felt relieved as he thought about this. When he was lost in thought, Jinyun beside him did not know that the King of Chu in front of him had thought far beyond cooperating with Ziyun Dao and Ning Country to the emergency strategy for dealing with the future collapse of the Nine Provinces. Upon seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s fierce attitude and determination, this old Daoist felt joy and immediately praised him: ¡°Your Majesty is right. The Coastal Aristocratic Family is decayed and weak, and the Ning Dynasty that relies on their support is just a withered tree sprouting new shoots, unable to last long. Entrusting the fate of Yangzhou and the people of the world to the selfish Heavenly Son of Jinling is despicable. Ziyun Dao doesn¡¯t know the Heavenly Mandate, nor does it adapt to changes. Forcing themselves to be the enemy of Your Majesty is just seeking their own destruction. With Your Majesty¡¯s unparalleled heroism, you should sweep Jiangnan and unify the Nine Provinces. Assume the mandate of Heaven, withstanding the tribulations of countless generations. This great cause will benefit the people of the Nine Provinces. We, Feishuang Tao, pledge our loyalty to the true Lord, to assist Your Majesty in unifying the world and purifying the universe.¡± In the end, Jinyun stood up and bowed to Lu Yuan, completely putting aside the arrogance of the Immortal Sect, expressing his submission on behalf of Feishuang Tao. This was not because he had no dignity, but simply to leave a way out for his own Dao inheritance. After the cultivators of the Nine Provinces collectively ascend, the power that protects the remaining Dao inheritances of each sect will be lost. Without decisive powers to support them, even if the various immortal sects still have some foundation and their sects can cultivate some Inborn Grandmasters based on their past accumulations. But then again, which of the dominant countries in the world has ever lacked Inborn Grandmasters? Without the cultivators who transcend martial artists, there will be an imbalance of power between the various immortal sects and the worldly dynasties. Any dynasty that can gather the power of an entire province or country has already gained the advantage against those immortal sects. By then, any independent power outside of the national system, if it cannot be integrated into the nation as a whole, will inevitably face an uncertain future. It is precisely for this reason. So before the cultivators of the Nine Provinces ascend, they begin to find a way out for their own Dao inheritances. That is, supporting a country and integrating their sect into the country¡¯s system, becoming something like a state religion to maintain their sect¡¯s position after the ascension of the cultivators to the Immortal Realm. In Yangzhou, Ziyun Dao has always been on good terms with the Coastal Aristocratic Family, and many disciples from their sect come from the aristocratic families. So it is natural for them to choose Ning Country. Although Feishuang Tao also has some connections with the Coastal Aristocratic Family, their relationship is far from being as close as that of Ziyun Dao. Therefore, even if Feishuang Tao tries to gain the position of state religion, it¡¯ll be quite unrealistic. After all, there cannot be two tigers on the same mountain. With Ziyun Dao already in Ning Country, there would hardly be any extra benefits for the remaining Feishuang Tao. If they were to truly merge into Ning Country, the fate awaiting Feishuang Tao in the future would either be swallowed up by the alliance of Ning Country and Ziyun Dao, or be forcibly suppressed and weakened to live forever under the shadow of Ziyun Dao. Later on, they may even be pushed to compete with Ziyun Dao because Ning Country fears the power of Ziyun Dao and becomes entangled in a never-ending power struggle. None of these outcomes are what Feishuang Tao wants to see. However, the original circumstances were such that Yangzhou Ning Nation was dominant, and no matter how unwilling Feishuang Tao was, they had no choice but to accept their fate. But things are different now. Apart from Ning Country, there is also Chu State in Yangzhou now. Moreover, the strength of Chu State has also reached the level of hegemony, and its rising momentum far exceeds that of the decaying Ning Country, which is sprouting from dead wood. From the perspective of the chances of unifying Yangzhou alone, Chu State is evidently much more likely than Ning Country. Even in competing for the future Central State, it seems that Chu State has a good chance. After all, the geographical location of Yangzhou is right here. Separated from the countries in the north by numerous mountain ridges and the Yangtze River, Chu State has ample time to recuperate and accumulate strength when there is chaos in the north. Chapter 765 - Chapter 765: Chapter 334: Cooperation between Dao Country_3 Chapter 765: Chapter 334: Cooperation between Dao Country_3 When the time comes and the North is exhausted after battling relentlessly, and their strength is greatly weakened, Chu State will only need to send troops on a Northern Expedition to easily reap the fruits of victory. At worst, relying on the entire power of Yangzhou, Chu State would still be able to seize a foothold in Central State and secure a ticket to the end of the world. Thus, no matter what, Chu State will stand on invincible grounds. When it¡¯s time to support Chu State, Feishuang Tao will naturally be able to follow Chu State and avoid the calamity of the end of the world, passing down their Dao inheritance in Central State. With such a vast and bright prospect. At this point, what does it matter to submit to Lu Yuan for the sake of Dao¡¯s continuity? Jinyun came to Baling today to discuss cooperation with Chu State and help Feishuang Tao to integrate into Chu State. Previously mentioning the Great Tribulation of Ascension was just a preamble to this topic. After all, as someone who is about to ascend, what does the future of the Nine Provinces have to do with him? The great calamity and such are only matters for the remaining people of the Nine Provinces to consider. What truly deserves Jinyun¡¯s attention, and what Feishuang Tao cares about, is their own Immortal Sect¡¯s Dao inheritance. The only thing that concerns him is what price Feishuang Tao can get on Chu State¡¯s side. And this is the next round of negotiations and bargaining chips. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Right now¡­ After listening to Jinyun¡¯s words, Lu Yuan was immediately ¡°overjoyed.¡± He stepped forward, helped Jinyun up, and said with joy and gratitude, ¡°Feishuang Tao is willing to help me. Great Chu will be like a tiger with wings, sweeping Yangzhou, eliminating threats at night, and it¡¯s just a matter of days.¡± Lu Yuan showed his attitude, then reined in his elation and asked, ¡°However, Ziyun Dao and Ning Country are indeed powerful enemies. Although Chu State does not fear them, defeating them is not an easy task. Feishuang Tao has been handed down for tens of thousands of years and has been on par with Ziyun Dao. It is also located in Guangling, in the heartland of Ning Country. I wonder if Fellow Daoist Jinyun has any plan to teach me how to eliminate such powerful enemies?¡± As Lu Yuan said this, his eyes were fixed on Jinyun. If the other party wants to board Chu State¡¯s ship and use Chu State to continue their Dao inheritance, empty words alone are far from enough. You can¡¯t get a good position without giving enough benefits and demonstrating value. This is an exchange of interests. Jinyun instantly understood and happily said, ¡°Do not worry, Your Majesty. Ning Country and Ziyun Dao may be strong, but they are not unrivaled in the world. In recent years, our Feishuang Tao sect has cultivated three Guardian Divine Generals. These generals have cultivated the sect¡¯s martial arts, their strength has reached the Innate Realm, and they are among the best in the world. In addition, our sect has tamed many spiritual beasts, and some elixirs have been accumulated over the years by refining spiritual blood from spiritual beasts. I can now offer a thousand elixirs to Your Majesty to help Chu State cultivate more grandmasters. Meanwhile, in our sect, there are also five hundred Dao soldiers who can reach the realm of Martial Arts Third Rate. These Dao soldiers, along with our Feishuang Tao sect, can all move to Chu State and serve Your Majesty. Furthermore, in Guangling, our Feishuang Tao has a million followers who, through thousands of years of cultivation, believe in our Dao. In the future, if Your Majesty sends troops to Ning Country, our sect only needs to dispatch some disciples to mobilize the believers, start an uprising in Guangling Prefecture, and coordinate with Your Majesty. With all these supports and the strength of Chu State, the conquest of Ning Country will be within reach.¡± Jinyun spoke confidently. In order to make this cooperation work, Feishuang Tao could be said to have bled quite a bit. Three Guardian Divine Generals and a thousand elixirs together were equivalent to five Inborn Grandmasters. Furthermore, five hundred Dao soldiers and a million believers combined could be considered as a hundred thousand valiant soldiers. In the end, Feishuang Tao was bound to Chu State, providing continuous assistance in the future. With such a high price, they should at least be able to trade for a position as the state religion. As expected. After hearing the various terms offered by Jinyun, Lu Yuan was not only amazed at the profound heritage of the Immortal Sects but also overjoyed, his heart pounding with excitement. He couldn¡¯t help it; the other party offered too much. Let¡¯s not mention those elixirs and Dao soldiers for now, as Chu State temporarily has no shortage of elixirs and general experts. Similarly, that million believers wouldn¡¯t be of much use before Chu State decides to take action against Ning Country. However, those three Guardian Divine Generals were completely different. What is Chu State¡¯s biggest weakness right now? It¡¯s the lack of Inborn Grandmasters. Over there in the Snowy Wilderness, a spiritual woman is already on her way to marriage, and she will soon arrive in Chu State. However, one spiritual woman alone is still somewhat insufficient to handle the current situation, unavoidably struggling to cope on both sides. If Chu State can obtain the help of Feishuang Tao, gaining three Guardian Divine Generals all at once, the tense situation of Inborn Grandmasters in Chu State must be alleviated immediately. Even if we count the ongoing conquest of Hanzhong Prefecture, Chu State has only six prefectures. If we also count the spiritual woman and the three Guardian Divine Generals, plus the six original Inborn ones, Chu State¡¯s innate combat power will officially break double digits, reaching as many as ten people. With ten Inborn warriors, it¡¯s more than enough to stabilize the current territory of six prefectures. Originally, Lu Yuan planned to directly march south to conquer Nanhai Country and Su Country, and as soon as they had captured Hanzhong Prefecture, the plan could be put on the agenda immediately. Even Song Country, further south, could be conquered as well. Once these territories are conquered, Chu State¡¯s territory and population will almost double what it is now. And for Lu Yuan, doubling the territory and population also means doubling his Qi Luck. This should be enough to speed up his progress in practicing the Taiping Daoist Method considerably. At present, Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation, which has rapidly increased through the Way of Control Pneuma, has already reached the realm of gathering pneuma. He has ventured far into this phase and has already touched the late stage of this realm. Not far from condensing the second Five Elements pneuma, he should be able to achieve this in four to five years at most. However, if he can capture Hanzhong, sweep the three Southern Nations, and gain the support of Feishuang Tao, Lu Yuan is confident that he can achieve the second Five Elements pneuma in just two to three years. Even if while achieving the second Five Elements pneuma, he can also refine another Yellow Turban Warrior Avatar. At that time, relying on this unparalleled strength and the power accumulated by Chu State, it will still be possible to sweep Yangzhou and conquer Ning Country within ten years, even if Ning Country has the support of Ziyun Dao. The prerequisite is the support of Feishuang Tao. Since the other party is so important, how could Lu Yuan neglect them? So, he once again held Jinyun¡¯s hand and said eagerly, ¡°Great Chu has a vast territory and a wide variety of beliefs, including Daoism, Buddhism, barbarians, and witches. The chaos frequently arises, and it has always been difficult to control. I have been worried for a long time. Now that Feishuang Tao is willing to join, it is indeed a blessing for Great Chu. I am willing to create the position of National Teacher, ranking it alongside the Prime Minister and the Grand General, as the First Rank. The National Teacher will manage all the religious beliefs within the country, sort out the temples of the world¡¯s immortals and gods, and decide on matters of Yin and Yang. I wonder if the Dao master of your sect is willing to take up this position?¡± Lu Yuan offered his sincerity. Upon hearing the conditions offered, Jinyun was quite satisfied, so he smiled and said, ¡°Your Majesty¡¯s great grace, I dare not refuse. Feishuang Tao is willing to take up this position.¡± With that said, the two parties who had gotten what they needed looked at each other and couldn¡¯t help but laugh. Snowflakes were swirling outside the room, and the scent of plum blossoms was faint. The tea stove in the pavilion was bubbling, and the warm air was diffusing. The atmosphere of this snow appreciation had become richer. Chapter 766 - Chapter 766: Chapter 335: Cultivating the True Teaching Chapter 766: Chapter 335: Cultivating the True Teaching After reaching an agreement of intent to cooperate with Feishuang Tao, the elder Daoist monk didn¡¯t rush to leave. Several details about cooperation with Feishuang Tao had yet to be discussed in detail by both sides. For example, when could the three guardian deities of Feishuang Tao, who would help Chu State, arrive? Lu Yuan was in dire need of innate experts, so naturally, the sooner the three deities arrived, the better. In response to this, Jinyun hesitated for a moment before agreeing. He promised that within a month, he would ensure the arrival of the three guardian deities in the Chu State to serve. However, as a result¡­ The identities of these three deities should not be disclosed for the time being. After all, Feishuang Tao was still located in Miluo Mountain, within the Guangling County of Ning Country. Although this Immortal Sect claimed to be transcendent, in reality, it was still somewhat restricted by Ning Country. Now that Ning Country had established a partnership with Ziyun Tao, if they found out about Feishuang Tao¡¯s disloyalty, it was uncertain what measures they might take. Of course. Under the current global ascension backdrop, cultivators from Feishuang Tao and Ziyun Tao had reached a consensus to move forward together. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï For a common ascension goal, it was improbable for both sides to fall out. However, while there wouldn¡¯t be a fallout, secret schemes and joining forces with Ning Country to undermine Feishuang Tao were inevitable. Therefore, to avoid these troubles, Feishuang Tao did not wish to disclose its alliance with Chu State just yet, and naturally, the identities of the guardian deities had to be concealed. Lu Yuan naturally had no issues with this and agreed readily. He desperately required Inborn Grandmasters to fill the defense void in his territories. As for his avatar Huang Xuan, it was confirmed that he would station in Hanzhong, taking charge of the northwest defense of the Chu State. Once Huang Xuan left, Xichuan and Hegu counties would lack an Inborn Grandmaster to guard them. To ensure the stability of the two counties, at least one Inborn Grandmaster would need to be stationed in Xichuan. However, in the Chu State¡­ Of the existing six Inborn Grandmasters, Sun Siwen, as the prime minister, oversaw the entire political affairs and could not leave the capital. Lan Cai¡¯er, being the queen and ruler of the kingdom, could not station elsewhere for a long period. Zhou Qing was in Xiangyang County, Qingyunzi in Qianzhong County, and Huang Xuan in Hanzhong County. After learning about the alliance between Ning Country and Ziyun Tao, Lu Yuan realized that with just Sun Siwen and Lan Cai¡¯er, they could not guarantee the security of Baling. Only if he himself personally guarded it, could he feel completely secure and ensure no lapses in the rear So, it was a challenge to find the right person among the six Inborn Grandmasters of Chu State to fill in the gap in Xichuan¡¯s defenses. As for the spiritual woman of the Great Mohism, who was hurrying over for the royal marriage? By the same logic, as a wife of the King of Chu, it would be absurd for her to station elsewhere for a long period. She could solve the immediate needs, but it was impossible to use her as a stationed general for a long period. Rapidly recruiting and training new masters for Chu State had become a pressing matter. If they could get the three Inborn Grandmasters from Feishuang Tao at this time, it would not only fill the defense gap in Xichuan County but the spare two could also be allocated to the next round of expansion. For example, Lingnan. With the spare two guardian deities around, Lu Yuan could conquer Su and Southsea, swiftly filling the defense gap in the newly occupied territories and stabilizing the local situation. All the above instances showed the dire need of Chu State for Inborn Grandmasters. However, after agreeing to allow the guardian deities to arrive in Chu State as soon as possible, Jinyun made another request: to provide a new Mountain Gate home for Feishuang Tao within Chu State as soon as possible. If they planned to align with Chu State, they would thoroughly commit to the cause of Feishuang Tao. Once they decided to align, they didn¡¯t plan to remain within Ning Country¡¯s territory and were prepared to move the entire sect to Chu State. Since it was a complete sect relocation, it was bound to be a considerable event. Though Feishuang Tao had few core disciples within their Mountain Gate, there were also a hundred or so disciples. If devout core followers, peripheral elite disciples, and guardian Dao soldiers were included, the number would easily exceed three to five thousand. And, if you included their families, even a number over ten thousand was not far-fetched. Accommodating all these people when they migrated to Chu State would indeed require a good place to settle them. So, finding a new home for Feishuang Tao¡¯s Mountain Gate became a top priority. Lu Yuan naturally couldn¡¯t object to this. As soon as Jinyun proposed it, he agreed immediately. Feishuang Tao¡¯s migration to Chu State brought numerous benefits to foster the relationship between both parties. With the sect situated within Chu State, it would be easier for Chu State to influence Feishuang Tao. Their decision to do so demonstrated their sincere attitude. Regardless of the above. The migration of over ten thousand people, or more accurately, over ten thousand affluent people, to Chu State would not only help increase Chu State¡¯s population, but also significantly stimulate the local economy. The benefits were immense. Just for this reason, Lu Yuan had no reason to refuse. So he agreed to Jinyun¡¯s proposal, took a map, and started looking for suitable locations within Chu State¡¯s territory. In the end, a high mountain located between Baling City and Changsha City, southeast of Dongting Lake, was chosen. The mountain was called Mount Tianshu, in a strategically important location that controlled the waterway, making it a key military site. Similarly, Mount Tianshu was a beautiful place with green mountains and clear waters. Many Cultivators and Dao Seekers had entered the mountain for cultivation, making it one of the world¡¯s seventy-two blessed lands. Chapter 767 - Chapter 767: Chapter 335: Cultivating the True Teaching_2 Chapter 767: Chapter 335: Cultivating the True Teaching_2 However, in today¡¯s world, what is referred to as a blessed land is far from its reputation, with no production of spiritual energy at all. The same goes for Mount Tianshu. There were some old Taoist priests living in this mountain, having built over ten dilapidated Taoist temples for cultivation. Late on, as the war arose, Mount Tianshu, due to its strategic location, fell into warfare various times. The Taoist priests in the mountain were either killed or fled, and the mountain finally became a fortress, occupied by the forces that controlled the area. After Lu Yuan seized control of the area, he stationed five hundred soldiers to guard the area and control the surroundings. Now, with Chu State unified, and peace prevailing, the originally bandits and outlaws have all vanished. The significance of a military stronghold here has also gradually diminished. Now that Feishuang Tao is moving to Chu State, it would be perfect to pull out military forces there, to hand over this blessed land and let their sect settle here. Moreover, with the strength of Feishuang Tao, having such a great Immortal Sect situated in the local area would deter small forces. The influence on local order may even surpass the original five hundred soldiers. Without a single soldier or effort of his own, he could stabilize the area¡ªa perfect win-win situation. After Jinyun obtained Lu Yuan¡¯s approval for the land title of Mount Tianshu and the permission to build the sect, and patrolled around the local area, he was quite satisfied. Although the spiritual energy of this mountain had been completely exhausted. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? The scenery here is beautiful with mountains and rivers, and it is far away from populated areas. It is indeed a first-class place for cultivation. As for the issue of spiritual energy. The current Miluo Mountain, where the Feishuang Tao sect resides, indeed has some spiritual energy production. But Jinyun knew that this tiny bit of spiritual energy, once they activated the Beiming Youdu formation, would completely disappear without a trace. Then in the end, the Miluo Mountain would be no different from Mount Tianshu, completely devoid of spiritual energy, indistinguishable. With this in mind, he naturally wouldn¡¯t care about the lack of spiritual energy here. Therefore, after choosing the location for the Mountain Gate, he immediately spent silver taels, hired a large number of local people, and began to build palaces and buildings within Mount Tianshu to prepare for the arrival of the sect. The local government, on Lu Yuan¡¯s hint, tacitly cooperated. They provided labor and materials as needed, without fail. However, they didn¡¯t lose anything in this¡ªthey got money from Jinyun after all. The Feishuang Tao sect has accumulated wealth over ten thousand years, the number of silver taels kept in the sect is almost innumerable. The Dan Ding Path was effortlessly able to provide tens of millions of silver taels to support Lu Yuan¡¯s military expenses. Feishuang Tao, as another Immortal Sect, naturally wouldn¡¯t lag behind. Conservatively estimating, they have a foundation of tens of millions of silver taels. No wonder people say they are dripping with wealth! Lu Yuan¡¯s judgment was accurate. Without the arrival of Feishuang Tao, thanks to the stimulation of the construction of Feishuang Tao¡¯s Mountain Gate, the local economy of Mount Tianshu has already taken off. He could also understand Jinyun¡¯s urgency. After all, according to them, in one year, all the cultivators in the Nine Provinces will set out for Beiming Youdu, gather there, and undergo Ascension. So, the time left for the Feishuang Tao sect is really not much. If they don¡¯t manage to move their sect here and secure deep cooperation with Chu State within this year, the fate of the Feishuang Tao sect in this world¡¯s Dao Inheritance won¡¯t end up in a good position. Under this influence, their actions are understandable. Lu Yuan¡¯s stance on it is naturally to support and assist them. However, the help he can provide is limited to Chu State. As for how Feishuang Tao will relocate nearly ten thousand people here, they can only rely on themselves. With the resources of the Ten Thousand Year Sect and its deep-rooted presence in Yangzhou, they have countless channels and networks. Moving ten thousand people here shouldn¡¯t be difficult. Chu State just needs to prepare to receive them. Thus, for the following period, Jinyun shuttled between Mount Tianshu and Baling, coordinating matters in both areas. He began to accept the transfer of personnel and resources from Feishuang Tao coming from Ning Country while also managing the construction of the new sect. He was incredibly busy. Seeing this, Lu Yuan gave a few instructions for cooperation and didn¡¯t meddle much, letting Jinyun handle the matters. After learning about the calamity of the Nine Provinces from Feishuang Tao, he also had many preparations to make. According to the information provided by Feishuang Tao, about a hundred years later, when the northern icy disaster would be completely released, the earth¡¯s poisonous fire at South Pole would start spewing as well. So the time left for Chu State¡¯s preparations is only about a hundred years. If they can¡¯t push the power of Chu State to the northern side of the river, which is the original Central State, within a hundred years. Then all the prosperity of Chu today would be annihilated under the catastrophe, destroyed in an instant. Therefore, some of Lu Yuan¡¯s long-term plans, such as leaving some elixirs to train his future descendants, naturally need to be altered. Now, if they don¡¯t contend for the present, there will be no future. He intends to take out all the existing one thousand three hundred elixir reserves of Chu State, to cultivate Chu State¡¯s own Inborn Grandmasters. Feishuang Tao has indeed promised to provide Chu State with three protective deities. But what belongs to others, after all, belongs to others. Although Feishuang Tao and Chu State are in their honeymoon period with an excellent relationship. Lu Yuan, who always likes to have several backup options, certainly wouldn¡¯t place all his hopes on others. Therefore, cultivating a few trustworthy Inborn Grandmasters is, of course, necessary. Chapter 768 - Chapter 768: Chapter 335: True Inheritance Cultivation_3 Chapter 768: Chapter 335: True Inheritance Cultivation_3 According to the conclusions drawn by ancient martial arts predecessors, it is estimated that about five hundred elixirs can enable a top-notch martial artist to complete a physical and soul transformation and ascend to the Innate realm. Lu Yuan currently has thirteen hundred elixirs. If all are put to use, they can cultivate two Inborn Grandmasters. Thus, for him, it is time to select candidates for the Innate realm and begin their cultivation. As for the selection of trainees, Chu State has quite a few options. Having grown for over twenty years, Chu State now has more than thirty first-class martial artists within its ranks, most of whom belong to the military system and are true disciples under Lu Yuan. A few belong to the government office system and the Imperial City system, some having joined Chu State from the Jianghu, others being disciples of Lu Yuan, and still others having worked their way up from the grassroots level. From this, it can be seen that most of the martial arts masters in Chu State come from Lu Yuan¡¯s lineage and are his disciples and grandchildren. These disciples, who call him their Master, are distributed among Chu State¡¯s military forces and various local martial arts systems, and even spread to foreign countries through the Imperial City, forming the foundation of his rule over Chu State. Naturally, these disciples are trustworthy. Among the thirty-odd disciples whose strength has reached first-class, five are at the pinnacle of their class, represented by Chu Wei and Li Liang, followed by Han Shun, Zhang You, and Zhuang Hua. It¡¯s not hard to see that these five are the first batch of Five Great True Inheritances under Lu Yuan during the Shaoyang Prefecture period. As the initial five true inheritors under his command, apart from Zhou Qing, these five have not only risen in their positions with the development of Chu State, but also enjoyed more resources than other disciples. Over the course of more than twenty years, relying on Lu Yuan¡¯s constant rewards and their own collection, they have already broken through to the pinnacle of first-class strength by using elixirs and their own hard cultivation. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï However, at this stage, they have mostly reached their limits. To advance from first-class to Innate requires simply too many resources, which even their positions and status can hardly accumulate enough of. For this reason, after a period of delay, Chu Wei and Li Liang, the representatives of the five great true inheritances, no longer mull over further cultivation progress. Instead, they turn their attention to pursuing promotion, titles, and power. Although they have somewhat neglected their martial arts endeavors, their cultivation would still pose a formidable threat. As long as they have a glimmer of hope and guidance from Lu Yuan, they can regain their passion for martial arts and have great hope of breaking through to the Innate realm. After all, among the five true inheritors, Li Liang, the oldest, is now only forty-five years old. He still has a full fifteen years until the sixty-year limit for breaking through to the Innate realm. With fifteen years¡¯ time, one could not only enable a first-class peak martial artist to break through to the Innate realm, but even train a martial artist from scratch to achieve the feat. Giving Li Liang and the other four all they need in terms of cultivation and mindset, a short two years, if fast, or two to three years, if slow, would be enough for them to break through to the Innate realm, as long as they have Lu Yuan¡¯s assistance. By cultivating these five great true inheritances, Chu State¡¯s lack of Innate talents will naturally be alleviated. As for the first batch to be trained, it is naturally Li Liang, the second Senior Brother, and Chu Wei, the third Senior Brother. Being only next to Zhou Qing in entering the ranks of true inheritors, these two stand out among their fellow disciples, in terms of both their status and their cultivation. Their training for Innate must start with them. Of course, there is no need to overly rush the remaining three: Han Shun, Zhang You, and Zhuang Hua. The four hundred elixirs from the spiritual woman¡¯s dowry and the thousand elixirs gifted by Feishuang Tao will soon be delivered. In two or three months at most, the three of them can also begin their Innate training. As their Master, Lu Yuan is fair and just, and will not favor one over the other, as long as the relationships are close enough. Therefore, after summoning Chu Wei and Li Liang, and instructing them to hand over military affairs before entering the palace to receive dedicated training and preparation for breaking through to Innate, he also called on the remaining three to stay in the palace for training. In any case, apart from the one thousand elixirs granted to Chu Wei and Li Liang, there are still three hundred elixirs left in the national treasury, evenly divided among Han Shun, Zhang You, and Zhuang Hua. This amount is enough to sustain the needs of the physical and soul transformation training for the first two or three months. After two or three months, when the elixirs promised by the Barbarians and Feishuang Tao are delivered one after another, they can be seamlessly integrated into the training process. With this, Chu State has officially begun its Innate training plan, which Lu Yuan has named as the Innate Five True Inheritances, indicating the breakthrough of Chu Wei and the other first-generation Five Great True Inheritances to the Innate realm. As the plan begins. He will have to be busy managing the new ten thousand soldiers, handling state affairs, cultivating his own powers, and guiding the five disciples all at once, finding himself in a whirlwind of activity with little leisure time. In the midst of this hectic period, time swiftly passed, and it was soon the 20th of October. That day. The news from Hanzhong in the north finally arrived. After ten days of siege, Huang Xuan led his troops to take Hanzhong¡¯s various prefectures one after another and captured Yangping Pass and Xiegu Pass. He finally joined forces with Qingyunzi outside Nanzheng city. The two avatars then personally took to the battlefield, donning armor and braving the arrows to lead their troops into battle. After three days of fierce assault, Qingyunzi beheaded Dongfang Wuyun, the Grand General of the Pillar State of Zhou, on the battlefield, breaking his troops¡¯ morale. With their commander dead and their morale shattered, the Zhou soldiers quickly surrendered under the slaughter of the two Innates. Nanzheng City fell that day. With this victory, Chu State finally seized the entire Hanzhong Prefecture, completing its northwestern defense line. The news cheered the entire city of Baling. The few Barbarian messengers in the city learned of the news, immediately went to the palace to see Lu Yuan, and promptly stated that they had arranged for the spiritual woman¡¯s marriage in the Snowy Wilderness. Lu Yuan was very cooperative. He immediately issued an edict, instructing the Ministry of Rites to send a messenger to the Snowy Wilderness to welcome the Spiritual Woman Queen. Even Feishuang Tao, after learning of the great victory in Hanzhong Prefecture, had Jinyun make time to come and congratulate them, presenting a gift of one million silver taels. Chapter 769 - Chapter 769: Chapter 336: Guardian Deity General Chapter 769: Chapter 336: Guardian Deity General Jinyun Elder Daoist did not come alone; accompanying him were three burly men, each of different ages ¨C old, middle-aged, and young. ¡°Your Majesty, these three are our sect¡¯s guardian god generals, who have come to the court today in response to Your Majesty¡¯s call to serve.¡± In the palace, Jinyun pointed at the three people who followed him and introduced them to Lu Yuan. As his words fell, the three moved forward one step, saluting Lu Yuan. ¡°Han Liang¡­¡± ¡°Han Hu¡­¡± ¡°Han Hua¡­¡± After introducing themselves, the three bowed down in unison, ¡°Greetings, King of Chu.¡± As the three of them bowed, Lu Yuan¡¯s gaze fell on them, and he secretly examined their auras. These three shared the surname Han, but it was unclear if this was a unique naming tradition within Feishuang Tao. However, their aura indeed reached the innate level, but compared to ordinary martial arts grandmasters, their auras were somewhat ethereal, making them appear more like Daoists than martial artists. Considering their identities as Immortal Sect Guardian God Generals, this slight difference could be understood. It was probably due to the unique differences between Immortal Sect martial arts and common martial arts techniques. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Lu Yuan didn¡¯t attach much importance to these details. Regardless of what differences they had with ordinary martial arts grandmasters, as long as they had the strength, it was enough. What he needed was innate-level combat power, not caring whether they practiced martial arts, immortal techniques, or a mix of both. Thus, upon seeing the three of them salute, he couldn¡¯t help but laugh heartily and raise his hand, saying, ¡°Guardian God Generals, please rise. At present, my Great Chu is eager to establish a meritorious service and is in dire need of talents and heroes to use their martial arts. Your willingness to join my Chu State has filled me with great joy.¡± Lu Yuan expressed his delight, and then looked around, pondering, ¡°According to the convention, anyone who enters my Chu State with an innate level can be granted the position of Protectorate General. Since you three come from the Daoist Path and also practice martial arts, you shall be bestowed the titles of Protectorate Generals, with ranks equivalent to first-class officers.¡± The title of Protectorate General was specially prepared by Lu Yuan for the martial artists of Jianghu. Up until now, in Chu State, the semi-immortal avatars he had refined had all been given the title of True Person of Guardian Country. Of course, any other cultivators who came to join Chu State could also enjoy the title of True Person. However, considering the current global ascension trend, it should be safe to assume that all cultivators in the Nine Provinces who are eligible will choose to ascend. A very few remaining cultivators will be left at the end, if not none. Therefore, this title should henceforth belong exclusively to Lu Yuan¡¯s avatars. Apart from the True Person, the title of Guardian National Dharma Master was specifically for the cultivators of the Buddhist sect. At first, the title of Guardian National Dharma Master included the name of Jihui from White Phoenix Temple. However, with the death of the Holy Monk, the title was now vacant. Lu Yuan had already decided that, aside from Buddhist cultivators, no other martial artists, even those from the Buddhist sect, would be given this title again. From now on, the titles of True Person and Dharma Master would be reserved exclusively for cultivators in Chu State. Other innate-level grandmasters who practice martial arts would be granted the special title of Guardian God General for differentiation. However, these were just preliminary ideas, and whether or not to implement them, or adapt to any changes that may arise in the process, he would be flexible. Nothing is set in stone. ¡°Thank you for the reward, Your Majesty.¡± Upon receiving the bestowed title, the three Guardian God Generals, who had already communicated with their sects beforehand, thanked Lu Yuan again by bowing down. Seeing this, Jinyun on the side couldn¡¯t help but nod his head slightly. He had studied Chu State. Therefore, he knew that within Chu State, the innate realm individuals, apart from those trained by Chu State itself, generally followed the path of the Protectorate General title. For example, the two True People currently leading the army to attack Hanzhong County were said to be cultivators. In terms of strength, they were comparable to the second-level innate martial artists and not inferior to Jinyun himself. Even such figures were only granted the title of True Person of Guardian Country. In terms of rank, their status was equivalent to the three Guardian God Generals he had brought with him. From this point of view, the positions of the three Guardian God Generals from the sect who joined Chu State would not be far behind in the future. Even if they could pass the trials and gain trust, in theory, they could, just like the two True People, lead tens of thousands of troops into battle. This undoubtedly afforded them great power and influence within a country. If they could achieve this, the power and influence of the three Guardian God Generals and their sect could be more than enough for their sect to thrive in Chu State. ¡®But I¡¯ve never heard of these two Guardian True People from Chu State before. Could it be that they, like King Chu, obtained their inheritance from an unknown source and managed to cultivate their powers by chance?¡¯ ¡®If that¡¯s the case, perhaps we could try to establish connections with them.¡¯ ¡®However, after their debut, they quickly joined Chu State to pursue wealth and glory, so they most likely aren¡¯t the type to calmly cultivate in seclusion. It would be difficult for them to achieve great things in the future.¡¯ Jinyun secretly calculated in his heart. Although he had already formed an alliance with Chu State, he knew that the interests of Feishuang Tao and Chu State could not be completely aligned. Now, the old daoist had already started to consider how to take advantage of Chu State. However, it wasn¡¯t that he deliberately targeted Chu State. The main reason was that the ascension to the immortal realm this time was extremely dangerous. Although the Beiming Youdu Formation could indeed be used, the pressure experienced by subsequent generations due to the lack of news from previous ascenders was unimaginable. Who could know what unfathomable risks might be encountered after ascending to the immortal realm? Therefore, the last batch of cultivators in the Nine Provinces had undoubtedly chosen the approach of their senior immortals: amassing as much strength as possible on this side before ascending to the Immortal Realm. Chapter 770 - Chapter 770: Chapter 336: Protector of the Nation - Gods General _2 Chapter 770: Chapter 336: Protector of the Nation ¨C God¡¯s General _2 However, in this Age of Dharma Decline, with the exhaustion of spiritual energy, it is no longer possible to enhance one¡¯s strength through cultivation alone. Therefore, for the cultivators of the Nine Provinces who are preparing for ascension, the best way to enhance their strength is to bring more fellow cultivators to ascend together, in order to strengthen their own faction¡¯s power. In this way, when dangers arise in the Immortal Realm, they would have people to help share the burden and resist the threats. Even with a more sinister outlook, the more people you bring, the more people there are to draw fire when faced with irresistible forces, providing a better chance to escape. This represents the interests of all Nine Provinces cultivators. Compared to this, while the Dao inheritance left in the Nine Provinces world is important, its significance is far from one¡¯s own interests and safety. And looking at it from another angle, If they could really sway the two True Persons who protect the Chu State, then with the loss of two Innate Combat Powers, the strength of Chu State would definitely decline greatly. At that time, in order to stand firm in the world and resist Ning Country, they would have to further rely on Feishuang Tao sect. By taking advantage of this opportunity, the sect might even be able to infiltrate and control Chu State, completely turning the nation into its puppet. If this could be achieved, Feishuang Tao sect would be considered reborn through baptism by fire, and then it can educate the country. Of course, this is the ideal situation, and Jinyun is not certain whether this could be achieved or not. However, he had already made up his mind to probe the two True Persons protecting Chu State, and he was quite confident about this matter. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?0 Jinyun refused to believe that in comparison to becoming immortal and ascending to the Immortal Realm, the secular wealth and luxury could be more tempting. After all, if one could achieve immortality and longevity, all the wealth would be fleeting, and they would have plenty of time to enjoy it in the future. There is no need to be anxious for immediate gains. Thinking this in his heart, Jinyun did not reveal anything; he looked at Lu Yuan in front of him, showing no embarrassment of facing a future aggrieved party, and said with a smile, ¡°By the way, Your Majesty, our Dao master will lead the core disciples of the sect to Chu State next month. At that time, the Dao master hopes to have an audience with Your Majesty to discuss the cooperation between the two parties. Would Your Majesty be available for a meeting?¡± The Feishuang Tao Dao master is coming? Lu Yuan naturally didn¡¯t know that Jinyun, this old man, was up to mischief. Hearing the other party¡¯s words, he was slightly startled, and then smiled, ¡°Of course, there is no problem. It is exactly what I desire to have a meeting with the Feishuang Tao Dao master. When the Dao master arrives, he can come directly to the palace. I will be waiting.¡± While speaking, Lu Yuan thought that after meeting with the Feishuang Tao Dao master, perhaps he could learn more about the hidden secrets of the world through conversation. Not to mention the numerous Divine Powers and secrets these sects with millennia of inheritance possess, just the secret records of ten thousand years of history is an unimaginable wealth. If he could obtain some of it, the historical trajectory from the ancient times to the present, spanning tens of thousands of years, could be glimpsed. If he could master this knowledge, it would undoubtedly be much easier when exploring the hidden secrets of history or activating Beiming Youdu in the future. Of course, Lu Yuan is not in a hurry about these matters. These cultivators from the Nine Provinces will ascend soon, and they won¡¯t be able to stay in this world for long. Eventually, the Nine Provinces world would belong to him alone. By that time, in this desolate place devoid of spiritual energy, he would have plenty of time to slowly explore and search for the opportunities left by ancient cultivators. Those Dao inheritances left by the Immortal Sects would also not be able to escape his grasp. On this matter, Lu Yuan is quite confident, that is, because he does not believe anyone can outlast him. ¡­ After enfeoffing the Feishuang Taoist guardian general and scheduling a meeting with the Feishuang Tao Dao master next month, Jinyun, having completed his mission, left in a hurry. He still had to deal with the relocation of the sect, and there was a lot of work to be done. Moreover, after entering the palace this time, he even had the impromptu idea of poaching Chu State¡¯s corner, which he had to start working on as well. So after returning, he had to select people and send them to Hanzhong to try to contact the two True Persons who protected the country. With so many miscellaneous tasks to handle, he was incredibly busy. Lu Yuan did not know yet that someone had designs on his Avatar¡¯s corner. And he was even less aware that the one who wanted to pry the corner was his current ally, with whom he was in a honeymoon period. However, even if he knew, he would not react and ultimately conceal the matter. It¡¯s just that after the Feishuang Tao cultivators ascend and Cheng¡¯s Ning Country is annexed, a wave of reckoning would be inevitable once the Chu State secures its footing in both Yangzhou and the Nine Provinces. The happier the Feishuang Tao sect is now, the harsher the retribution they will face in the days to come. However, Jinyun, who is about to spread his wings, does not know this. And there is no way he could know what consequences his impulsive decision would bring to the sect in the future. The connection between Lu Yuan and his Avatars is extremely well-hidden. In this Age of Dharma Decline, even though many Immortal Sects know the art of refining Dao soldiers, outsiders would find it very difficult to link him and his two Avatars together. After all, spiritual energy is hard to come by. Many cultivators consider it insufficient for their own cultivation! How many would be willing to divert precious spiritual energy and resources, spending it on refining Dao soldiers, these heretical techniques? Those who do not know the specifics and still plan to approach Chu State through his Avatars are destined to stumble badly in this regard. Lu Yuan had foreseen this when he created his avatars and had been waiting for the fish to take the bait all along. The only thing he didn¡¯t know was who would be the first to fall for it. Chapter 771 - Chapter 771: Chapter 336: Protector of the Nation - Gods General _3 Chapter 771: Chapter 336: Protector of the Nation ¨C God¡¯s General _3 He had been waiting all along. ¡­ After capturing Hanzhong, Lu Yuan issued an imperial decree to reward the meritorious soldiers, and then generously promoted his two avatars by a series of nobility titles. On the surface, he played a perfect act. After all, they were his own avatars. The more he rewarded them, the more insignificant the difference was, as if it were just passing from his left hand to his right hand. However, through these generous rewards, he could boost the morale of the army and inspire the hearts of people. As for the benefits that cost nothing, Lu Yuan was naturally pleased. In addition to rewarding the army, Lu Yuan also issued a decree ordering the two forbidden armies stationed at Jianmenguan and the forbidden army of Xiangyang Prefecture in Western Jin to remain in Hanzhong District as the local garrison troops. He also appointed Huang Xuan as the chief officer of the western part of Chu State, responsible for Hanzhong, Xichuan, and Hegu, fully managing the issues related to Zhou Country and the barbarians. In the domestic front, the Ministry of Personnel has begun to pull out officials from various places, preparing to send them to Hanzhong to take over the newly occupied land. The Ministry of Rites is also preparing for the Enke examination, ready to select a batch of new officials. It is expected that by the end of the year, the gap of thousands of vacancies in Hanzhong District will be gradually filled, and the rule of Chu State will be established. In addition to selecting officials, Huang Xuan, who has already taken over Hanzhong, has also started reorganizing the captivated Zhou soldiers and expanding his own armed forces. According to the plan. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï He will select elite soldiers from the surrendered and recruit new soldiers in Hanzhong to create two new Forbidden armies. These two Forbidden armies, along with the three Forbidden armies stationed in Hanzhong District, will form the main defensive force in Chu State¡¯s northwest. When the local garrison troops in Hanzhong are established, there will be 130,000 regular troops in Hanzhong alone, which is quite a strong force. With Yangping Pass and Xiegu Pass as reliance, and Huang Xuan, the second realm of Inborn as an avatar, even if Zhou people send 500,000 troops to attack, Hanzhong can resist. Even in cases of emergency, there is still a forbidden army in Xichuan Prefecture, and the local garrison troops of Xichuan and Hegu. These people added up a total of more than 60,000 troops, belonging to Huang Xuan¡¯s jurisdiction. If they are willing, they can be transferred to Hanzhong District at any time. So instantly, Huang Xuan changed from an ordinary local chief officer to Chu state¡¯s most powerful local official. Not only is he in charge of the three prefectures, but he also controls nearly 200,000 regular troops, with almost half of Chu State¡¯s power in his hands. For a while, many people in Chu State who were unaware of the truth became deeply worried about this situation. Many people thought that handing half the territory to one person is risky, as it may lead to division if not careful. Several people appealed to Lu Yuan, asking him to withdraw his order. But in response, Lu Yuan basically ignored them. Of course, he knew very well the risks of giving one person half of the territory and a third of the national troops. However, that was only how it appeared to outsiders. As his avatar, giving the three western prefectures of Chu State to Huang Xuan was essentially just a transfer of control between Lu Yuan¡¯s left hand and right hand. Nowadays, making such a division is just for the sake of saving administrative efficiency and managing the manpower and material resources of the three western prefectures more effectively. Of course. Apart from this, Lu Yuan also had some intention of fishing for troublemakers. He wondered if waving the flag for Huang Xuan would lure out some people from within or outside the country who wanted to take advantage of the situation. If he could seize the opportunity to eliminate some hidden dangers, it would be a good thing for Chu State too. So even when faced with a surge of discontent from below, Lu Yuan remained steadfast and continued fishing for troublemakers. During the uproar, he even issued two more appointments. One was to appoint the newly surrendered Protector General Han Hua as the Western Defense Envoy, responsible for assisting Huang Xuan in the management of the defense of Xichuan and Hegu. The other was to appoint Protector General Han Liang as the Qianzhong Defense Envoy, in charge of Qianzhong District¡¯s defense. Yes, that¡¯s right. The originally planned position of Qianzhong Chief Officer for Qingyunzi had changed again. Because Ziyun Dao suddenly joined forces with Ning Country, causing the pressure on Chu State¡¯s eastern defense line to surge, the current defense plan was no longer sufficient and needed to be strengthened. So Qingyunzi¡¯s position as Qianzhong Chief Officer was changed by Lu Yuan to the future Chief Officer of Lingnan. Once Ning Country and South Sea Country were conquered, Qingyunzi would lead the Southern Expedition Army and station in Lingnan. He himself would lead heavy troops and be stationed in South Sea Prefecture, responsible for the frontier defense of the Lingnan region bordering Ning Country. Even on the northern side of Xiangyang Prefecture, considering the increasingly complicated situation, this northern gateway of Chu State also needed to be strengthened. Lu Yuan had already ordered the three Northern Expedition Forbidden armies transferred from Dongting Prefecture to be stationed there. In this way, together with the remaining two Forbidden armies in the prefecture, Xiangyang Prefecture would have five Forbidden armies with 100,000 combat-ready troops, plus local garrison troops, amounting to nearly 120,000 troops in total. By stationing such a heavy force, Lu Yuan planned to have Zhou Qing lead these troops to attack the three eastern prefectures of Xiangyang, which were under Ning Country¡¯s control, when he made a move against Ning Country. The land of the three eastern prefectures lies north of the Yangtze River and south of the Han River. It is like a sharp dagger, deeply piercing into the heartland of Chu State. Moving south from the three eastern prefectures and crossing the river will lead to Baling, the capital of Chu State, posing a severe threat to Chu State¡¯s security. Such a crucial location must naturally be taken into Lu Yuan¡¯s hands. And once the three eastern prefectures of Xiangyang are captured, Chu State¡¯s eastern defense line can be extended a hundred miles eastward and a defensive line could be laid at a strategically important location called Xia Kou at a bend in the Yangtze River, blocking Ning Country¡¯s navy from entering Dongting Prefecture. Only by capturing the three eastern prefectures of Xiangyang can Chu State have the advantage of the Han River and share the Yangtze River natural barriers equally with Ning Country. In this way, Zhou Qing would be in the north at Xiangyang Prefecture, Lu Yuan would be at Dongting Prefecture, and Qingyunzi would be in the south at South Sea Prefecture, with the three of them jointly building a nearly 3,000-mile-long defense line from north to south, firmly pinning Ning Country down. Chapter 772 - Chapter 772: Chapter 337: Strategic Adjustment Chapter 772: Chapter 337: Strategic Adjustment By the end of October, fast horse couriers delivered a message from Hegu County. The Snowy Plains Barbarians had delivered the billion silver tales they had promised; the silver was already in Hegu County. The county was currently dispatching 5,000 soldiers, personally overseen by the commander, to transport the funds overnight to Xichuan County. Once in Xichuan County, a portion of the stationed forbidden army would transport the money along the Yangtze River with the help of the navy to Baling. Upon receiving this news, Lu Yuan attached great importance to it. Over the past few months, he had recruited five forbidden army units and 100,000 soldiers, spending three to four million silver tales in the initial phase alone. Then he waged war against Hanzhong. The war was swift and didn¡¯t take much time, but it still cost an additional two million silver tales, and the rewards for victories amounted to over a million silver tales. Now, he had commanded Hanzhong to form two new forbidden army units and local county soldiers. This was a further 70,000 men and had used up another two million silver tales. Adding up these scattered costs, the court had spent nearly ten million silver tales in this month alone. Of course, such a large expenditure was primarily due to the sudden expansion of his army by 170,000 standing troops. The costs of settling these soldiers, purchasing various supplies and weapons and establishing their families made the expenses seem large. Once these military purchases were complete, the subsequent costs would only be the daily military wages, and the monthly expenditure would be much smaller. Even so, the amount of silver spent almost depleted one-ninth of the national treasury. The current savings in the national treasury of Chu State had shrunk from 86 million silver tales to just over 77 million silver tales, a visible reduction. This decline would continue to increase with the continuous expansion of the army and the further enlargement of the war. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï The remaining amount of over 77 million silver tales might seem plentiful, but it could barely support a few years of such expenditure. To maintain the current expansion, it was necessary to find new sources of income. The billion silver tales sent by the barbarians were critical to the military budget of Chu State for the next few years. Whether Lu Yuan could continue to expand the army and then launch the Southern Expedition to conquer Lingnan depended on this sum of money. Therefore, upon receiving the news, he immediately ordered Han Hu, who had just been crowned the Protector of the Nation, to personally lead 3,000 forbidden soldiers on a navy ship to escort the money. After giving this order, Lu Yuan felt relieved. With an Inborn Grandmaster personally guarding the funds, it would be almost impossible for anyone to steal the billion silver tales. Now he just needed to wait a fortnight for the silver to reach Baling and be safely deposited into the national treasury. He needn¡¯t worry too much about it. Speaking of the barbarians, there was news from Zhou Country to the north. This autumn, the barbarians had again invaded, with all factions mobilizing half a million troops, comprehensively looting the Henan and Liang provinces. However, the outcome was the same as previous years. The Grand General and northern pillar of Zhou Country, He Basheng, commanded effectively. The cities were heavily guarded, and the barbarians could not take any advantage. More than a hundred thousand barbarians were beheaded, tens of thousands were captured, and the invading barbarians once again lost more than half of their troops and fled in disgrace. Because of the heavy snow in the north and the blocked roads, Zhou People did not pursue them further after their victory. Having plundered few supplies and suffered such significant losses, the barbarians were set to face another harsh winter. It was estimated that several hundred thousand people would freeze or starve to death, weakening the barbarian tribes again. At this rate, the barbarian tribes on the Snow Plains were bound to decline and eventually perish. However, Lu Yuan did not pay much attention to this matter. Perhaps in the past, he would have been interested in allying with the barbarians to attack Zhou Country. After all, if he could take over the Henan and Liang provinces, he would hold a strategic advantage, threatening the heartland of Zhou Country, Guannei County, from a superior position. But now, with the great catastrophe of Heaven and Earth approaching, all four poles of the Earth will be engulfed by natural disasters. The land of Yong State, occupied by Zhou Country, will also be no exception. Even if he captured Henan and Liang provinces, Chu State would only be able to hold on to them for about a hundred years. When the catastrophe arrives, they may have to abandon most of Yong State. With this in mind, rather than spending the energy and a dozen or two decades in a gritty battle with Zhou Country for a territory that cannot be secured in the long run, it would be better to concentrate fully on taking Yangzhou with all their might. After uniting Yangzhou, Chu will launch a campaign to the north, striving to seize the core Central State, the destined land of the future. The land of Liang Country was what Lu Yuan had his eyes on. As for the rest, they were all inconsequential. ¡°However, Henan and Nanyang provinces of Zhou Country, which also belonged to Central State in ancient times, might be worth taking if the opportunity arises,¡± Lu thought, but did not dwell on it. As a dominant state, Zhou Country naturally knew about the upcoming great catastrophe of Heaven and Earth early on. Therefore, they undoubtedly placed great importance on the only two areas of Central State within their territory. Despite their current difficulties, they still stationed 400,000 troops in Henan and Nanyang, demonstrating their attention to these areas. For Chu State to seize these two territories would be far more difficult than taking Hanzhong, a county isolated by mountain forests, inconveniently located in the southern mountains. If Zhou Country lost Hanzhong, they would lose a financially valuable territory in the south, akin to losing a foot. While painful, this loss would still be tolerable. However, if they lost Henan and Nanyang, it would be equivalent to losing their head; it would be a fundamental threat to their very existence. Chapter 773 - Chapter 773: Chapter 337: Strategic Adjustment_2 Chapter 773: Chapter 337: Strategic Adjustment_2 If Chu State really dares to have such an idea, would Zhou Country directly abandon He and Long counties, or even Shuofang County in the North, and then concentrate all their strength back to Guannei County, and compete with Chu State to their last breath? Zhou Country¡¯s two counties in Guandong have become forbidden territories, and whoever moves around them will trigger this hornet¡¯s nest. It can be seen from Liang State, which is stationed nearby with a heavy army, that they only take advantage of the situation a little bit and do not go deeper into it. Lu Yuan would not go away at this critical moment, occupying this small advantage that nobody else has. Therefore, he only thought about this matter and did not take it too seriously. However, even though Lu Yuan has given up his plan to attack the four counties of Hexi, Longxi, Henan, and Nanyang in Zhou Country, there are still places for them to gain benefits in these four counties. For example, in He and Long counties, next year after Huang Xuan consolidates the military and political affairs of Hanzhong and stabilizes the region initially, perhaps he can dispatch a troop to attack He and Long, cooperate with the barbarians, and jointly attack Zhou Country. In doing so, Lu Yuan is not interested in taking territory and continuing to expand to the Northwest. What he covets is the population of He and Long counties in Zhou Country. Although the population of He and Long counties in Zhou Country has suffered heavy losses due to years of war and snow disasters, and a large number of refugees flee every year, it can be imagined how serious the loss is given that Hanzhong County has received 300,000-400,000 refugees from He and Long counties. However, even so, there are still more than 2 million people remaining in He and Long counties. With so many people, if they can be captured in timely manner and brought back to Chu State, it would undoubtedly greatly enrich the local population of Chu State. These people are all descendants of the Three Emperors, and their culture, beliefs, and customs are similar to those of the people of Chu State, so there is no obstacle to integration. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? At the beginning, when people from Zhou Country were captured and resettled in Dongting and Xichuan counties, it only took three to five years for them to be completely assimilated by Chu State and become Chu people. At this moment, it would not take much effort for Chu State to fully accept and utilize the population brought from He and Long counties. Lu Yuan does not need much, just capturing and returning 500,000 people can further develop Xichuan County and turn it into a western granary. Even regarding abducting people, he doesn¡¯t actually have to do it himself. He can directly reach a trade consensus with the barbarians, let them abduct the people, and Chu State can directly trade food with them. In this way, without spending any troops or costs but merely using the surplus grain in Chu State, a large number of people can be obtained for nothing. When the trade becomes stable and deepened, perhaps by then grains can be directly exchanged for the population of the barbarians with no problems. After all, in the clans of the barbarians, hundreds of thousands of people starve and freeze to death every year, and they cannot be supported by staying in the clan. Rather than letting them starve and freeze to death for nothing, it is better to send them to Chu State, where they can exchange precious grain for the tribe and allow them to survive. In such a win-win situation, Lu Yuan believes that the barbarians should be very willing to do so. Moreover, this trade in population and food has another benefit. Through food, Chu State can indirectly influence and control the Snowy Plain Barbarians, and through this trade, they can continuously weaken the barbarians. The cold disaster is getting worse day by day, and each year¡¯s snowstorm will be greater than the previous year. No matter how many people the barbarians send out and how much grain they exchange, the population of the tribe will inevitably decrease. When they become weak to a certain extent, Lu Yuan can call for the recruitment of a large number of barbarian tribes under the name of a spiritual woman, and perhaps directly assimilate them to become Chu people and use them for himself. ¡°This matter has great potential and can be regarded as a long-term national policy for dealing with Zhou Country and the barbarians. It is worth paying continuous attention to.¡± After thinking about all these things in his heart, Lu Yuan immediately communicated with Huang Xuan through his divine thoughts, and then instructed this avatar to handle the matter. As the chief administrator of the three western counties, Huang Xuan is responsible for managing affairs pertaining to Zhou Country and the barbarians, so this matter is just right for him. Since Huang Xuan is his own avatar, they can communicate at any time and there will be no delay or misunderstanding. If it were entrusted to others, people¡¯s hearts are unpredictable, and Lu Yuan would not feel at ease! It has to be said that besides the rapid cultivation, the divine powers of the Yellow Turban Strongman of the Taiping Dao Book are the most satisfactory to him. Not only has it solved his lack of manpower, but it can also communicate thousands of miles away, with mutual understanding, loyalty and reliability. There won¡¯t be anyone better than this. ¡­ Just after explaining the matter of dispatching troops in He and Long, taking the opportunity to abduct people, and opening a trade with the barbarians, in just a few days, as the civil officials who hurried to Hanzhong County to prepare for the various levels of government came to their position. After the various levels of government slightly sorted out the political affairs, the household registration atlas, wealth income and expenditure of Hanzhong County were also quickly sent back to Baling via the Han River courier. ¡°So, Hanzhong County now has 326,000 households and more than 1,615,000 people.¡± ¡°According to the current taxation of Great Chu, it can provide a yearly tax of 6,110,000 silver tales, and the various expenses in the county need about 1,100,000 silver tales.¡± ¡°The remaining 5 million silver tales can all be sent to the court?¡± Lu Yuan flips through the household registration account book, then looks up at the Han Zhongjun official sent by the Hanzhong Government, and asks aloud. ¡°Your Majesty, that¡¯s true.¡± The attending official below is a young man who, facing the King of Chu alone, is unavoidably nervous but still steadied himself and said, ¡°However, Hanzhong County has just suffered violence and various prefectures and counties have suffered losses. There are some casualties and fugitives among the common people, so the actual number of registered households should be less than the entry.¡± Chapter 774 - Chapter 774: Chapter 337: Strategic Adjustment_3 Chapter 774: Chapter 337: Strategic Adjustment_3 Fortunately, many Aristocratic Families in Hanzhong County had more or less concealed their population. Therefore, after the start of spring next year, the prefect would begin the population census. By then, the displaced people who fled due to the war would also have returned. By finding out the concealed population, the headcount of Hanzhong County might increase by tens of thousands, and the tax revenue would also increase.¡± Compared to the newly established Chu State, countries like Zhou, Ning, and Liang have powerful Aristocratic Families everywhere. These high-ranking families intermarry and entangle with each other, weaving a web of mutual interests. In this network, although the imperial power is strong, it cannot determine everything. Even the imperial power itself is part of this network of rights and relationships. Therefore, under such constraints, it is natural to see the emergence of many vested interest groups in various countries, namely the Aristocratic Families and powerful elites. These top figures hide their population and do not pay taxes, like parasites living off the Dynasty, only knowing how to feed but not to contribute. Thus, although countries like Zhou and Ning have a profound foundation and great potential, the strength they can ultimately exert is far less than what they are capable of. The Chu State has only eight million people, but its military strength is on par with Ning Country, which has double its population. Is it because Chu people are inherently stronger than Ning people, or Chu¡¯s territory is more abundant than Ning¡¯s? Of course not. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï About ten years ago, many Chu and Ning people shared the same identity as the people of Yue! However, born from the same origin, with half the population, the Chu State managed to raise an army comparable to that of Ning and develop twice the potential. From where does this additional potential come from? Or where has the other half of Ning¡¯s potential gone? Naturally, it has been eaten up by Aristocratic families, local officials, and powerful local elites. Layer upon layer of this consumption, half of Ning Country is gone. Zhou Country hasn¡¯t experienced the revitalization seen in Ning Country yet! Having been established for hundreds of years, Zhou has not experienced the pain of national extinction. The corruption within and the trouble from powerful family clans are even more severe than in Ning. Chu State has just been established, and Lu Yuan and his disciples are of humble origin, with not much connection to those Aristocratic families. So, they can proceed without hesitation to conduct census checks and crack down on bureaucracy, thus maintaining Chu State¡¯s tax revenue and integrity, without being occupied by bloodsucking parasites. Therefore, within Zhou Country, although it has a population of 20 million on the surface, Lu Yuan estimates that there might be millions more hidden by the Aristocratic families, who do not appear on government household records. However, in Hanzhong County, the phenomenon of hidden households should not be so serious. After all, more than ten years ago, Lu Yuan led his troops through Hanzhong County. After such a disaster, the original tangled roots in Hanzhong County had been cleaned up. Even if it has recovered a bit in recent years, it is not significant. Once the officials are in place and Huang Xuan¡¯s heavy forces pressure the area, once the investigation is carried out, everything will be clean and clear. Having come from the local level step by step, Lu Yuan is very clear about this, so after praising a few court officials and the Hanzhong prefect, he let the others leave. However, after they left, he continued to look through the population of each prefecture and county in Hanzhong, deep in thought. After reviewing all the data and carefully verifying Hanzhong County¡¯s tax revenue again, Lu Yuan issued another edict. He ordered the bureaus to draft an edict, urging Huang Xuan, the general of the West Three Prefectures, to recruit three more Forbidden armies in Hanzhong County and train them locally. Upon completion of the training, the original three old Forbidden armies stationed in Hanzhong could return to Baling for rest and recuperation. As for Hanzhong, it would be guarded by the five newly recruited and trained Forbidden armies. Knowing of the Heaven and Earth catastrophe, Lu Yuan has planned to unify Yangzhou as soon as possible. And the best time for unification is within ten years. With the current scale of Ning¡¯s 800,000-strong army, Chu will have to deploy at least 500,000 troops to attack Ning, which is the minimum requirement. Therefore, while the deadline for the eastern expedition is not yet approaching, it has become inevitable to expand the army as much as possible now. However, in each county of the Chu State, after years of conscription, the qualified soldiers have mostly been used. The remaining few are generally misfits and not suitable for significant use. Now that Hanzhong has just been conquered, its population is quite rich, with more than 1.6 million people. Given the ratio of one soldier for every three households, it would be enough to recruit 100,000 qualified troops. With the recruitment of three more Forbidden armies, the Chu State¡¯s main force would expand, possessing a total of 25 Forbidden armies, totaling 500,000 troops. In addition, there are 160,000 county soldiers in the six counties, 50,000 naval soldiers, and 10,000 Jinwu Guards and palace guards. Upon completion of the expansion, Chu would have a total of 720,000 troops, not much different from Ning¡¯s 800,000-strong army. ¡°Next year, I will dispatch troops again to sweep and conquer Lingnan. With the 5 million population from the three provinces of the Lingnan two countries, I can easily recruit another 200,000 to 300,000 troops. By then, with a national army of one million, it will be easy to gather 500,000 troops for the Eastern Expedition. Within three to five years, I can proceed with the eastern expedition against Ning Country.¡± Lu Yuan calculated secretly in his heart, and for his future strategic plans, he had a rough prototype. Subsequently, he gathered the officials for planning and adjustments. As the edicts were issued one after another, Chu was already secretly preparing a massive Southern Expedition shortly after the Hanzhong battle had ended. However, this time there was no such cover as the huge grain trade with Zhou Country. So, even if they tried to conceal the news as much as possible, some relevant loopholes were inevitably noticed by outsiders. The surrounding forces could not help but feel uneasy. Amidst the turmoil, on the eighth day of the eleventh month in the ninth year of Shenwu, Han Hu escorted the 100 million silver tales of the Barbarians back to Baling. After Lu Yuan checked the amount and confirmed its accuracy, he rewarded Han Hu with some treasures and money after depositing the silver into the national treasury. On the sixteenth day of the eleventh month, more than ten large ships came from Jiangdong, entered Chu¡¯s territory, and arrived in Baling. The Dao master of Feishuang Tao brought thousands of followers and finally arrived in Chu State. Chapter 775 - Chapter 775: Chapter 338: Transcending the Original Intention Chapter 775: Chapter 338: Transcending the Original Intention After arriving at Baling City, the master of Feishuang Tao led a few trusted followers into the city, while the rest of the sect members continued to travel south by boat, heading towards the Tianshu Mountain Region. There, they would be registered as citizens through the cooperation of the local authorities and officially become Chu State¡¯s people. Under the strong influence of Chu State and Lu Yuan, even those who pursued ascetic practices could not escape taxes and labor services. At most, they would receive some preferential treatment due to their special status. However, it was absolutely impossible to establish an independent kingdom within Chu State. This matter had already been clarified when the Feishuang Tao sect and Lu Yuan talked about partnership, and it was the premise of all cooperation. Fortunately, Feishuang Tao showed a sincerity in cooperation and did not think about going against Chu State¡¯s rules, which had been in place for more than 20 years. Therefore, both parties compromised and accepted this. After entering the city, the master of Feishuang Tao contacted disciples from other sects in the city and dispatched someone to pass the message to the King of Chu, arranging a meeting. The news quickly reached the palace. Upon learning of the master¡¯s arrival, Lu Yuan did not delay and summoned him for an audience immediately. It was still in the Meichang Garden where they had met previously. Today, there was no heavy snow, and the sky was clear, with the golden sun hanging high in the Heavenly Vault, shining brightly. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Although the sun was bright, the sunlight did not give people any sense of warmth, still feeling bone-chillingly cold. In the garden, many plum blossoms had accumulated thick layers of ice and snow under the recent heavy snowfall, causing the branches to bend slightly. Fortunately, the paths within the garden were cleared, and a small winding path paved with blue stone extended from the entrance into the Plum Forest, allowing people to walk deep into the forest and appreciate the beautiful scenery. Lu Yuan was dressed in a pure white robe, hands clasped behind his back, leisurely walking on the path, admiring the plum blossoms around him with satisfaction, smelling the faint fragrance as if his mind had merged with Heaven and Earth. Following behind him was an old man in a white robe, who showed the same indifferent expression, but also mixed with a chilling coldness, as if he was more in harmony with the natural world than Lu Yuan. Lu Yuan noticed this while he walked and couldn¡¯t help but feel a little wary in his eyes. On the surface, he smiled and said: ¡°The cold snow and beautiful scenery are lovely, but many ordinary people shy away from the cold and dare not come out to appreciate the magnificent world.¡± In my early years, I loved plums and admired their tenacity to bloom even in harsh winter. Unfortunately, even though the past winters were cold, wearing a few more layers of cotton-padded clothes was enough for ordinary people to withstand the cold and move freely in the open. I could also take advantage of this time, inviting one or two friends, going to the Plum Forest with green plums and boiled wine, and discussing our hobbies and aspirations. Nowadays, it is bitterly cold, and even wearing three or four layers of cotton-padded clothes cannot withstand the bone-piercing chill. Times change, and people change as well. Now it is difficult to find one or two close friends, steal some leisure from our busy lives, and have fun and laughter.¡± As he spoke, Lu Yuan gazed at the plum blossoms in front of him, as if lost in thought, with a hint of melancholy in his expression. Upon careful reflection. Although his growth over the years had been rapid, since he decided to enter the mortal struggle, he had built up such a vast foundation in just over twenty years. Even his cultivation had reached the pinnacle of this world and was still growing rapidly. However, despite gaining so much, the happiness he felt was far less profound than the pure joy he experienced in those days at Plum Flower Town. In those days, he simply needed to devote himself to practicing martial arts and appreciate the hardships of it, and be delighted with every bit of progress made in his Inner Strength. When he was tired of martial arts, he would study Buddhism and Taoism classics, anecdotes, and gain various knowledge and nutrients to hone his state of mind. When he grew bored at home, he could go hunting in the mountains to experience the wild nature of the deep woods. Or visit the tavern in town, listening to the bustling gossip of merchants and travelers, and learn about interesting events from all around. When Sun Siwen had time, he could also go with his good friend to travel and admire nature, drinking wine and discussing the Dao in the Plum Forest just outside the town. When supplies of herbs and medicine ran out at home, he could travel a dozen miles to the city, find Doctor Zhou, chat about medical scriptures and pharmacy, the chaos of Jianghu, and sigh about the hardships of life and its difficulties. At the end, he could still tease young Zhou Qing, watch her embarrassed and troubled, and then leave with a hearty laugh. Those days were so carefree, unburdened, and free-spirited. In comparison. Now, although Lu Yuan had become the ruler of a kingdom, a grandmaster of the world, and possessed power and wealth beyond common people¡¯s imagination, his life was full of heavy responsibilities and endless calculations, schemes, and struggles. From the moment he decided to enter this turbulent world, these burdens seemed to have never left him. Instead, they accompanied his growth, entangled with his present self, and became inseparable from him. Under the pressure of external concerns, although Lu Yuan had achieved much and fulfilled many of his wishes, At the same time, he sometimes felt that what he had once longed for was not as beautiful as he had imagined, and the joy he derived from his achievements was not as pure as he had hoped. In recent days, after learning about the impending calamity and realizing the gap between himself and Heaven and Earth, Lu Yuan gradually awakened from his grandiose ambitions. Chapter 776 - Chapter 776: Chapter 338: Transcending the Original Intention_2 Chapter 776: Chapter 338: Transcending the Original Intention_2 What is the world domination, what is royal power and wealth? In the face of Heaven and Earth, and this disaster that sweeps everything, all seem so humble and insignificant. When the tide of the times rolls in, just a single wave can destroy them all. After realizing this, Lu Yuan¡¯s original obsession with the Chu State gradually faded. He began to regroup and return to his original true desires and ideas, to master power and then live a Unrestrained Realm life spanning the universe. Apart from this, Chu State and world domination are simply some means and ways taken on the journey to better longevity and Unrestrained Realm life. This is just a process, not the outcome. Although Lu Yuan could recognize this point, he slowly lost his way due to putting too much effort into building the Chu State. He gradually combined his Chu world domination with longevity, and made an artificial restriction on his own future and path, deviating from the main track. Fortunately, a wave of cosmic catastrophe came pouring down like cold water, With its unstoppable force, the great cause of Chu State fell into the crisis of collapse. It woke Lu Yuan from his obsession, so he regained his true intentions. As he slowly recovered over those days, he gradually began to change, not giving up the Chu State cause as a tool to quickly master power, but also not putting all his effort into Chu State. Instead, he apportioned some focus to himself, making a slight distinction. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 As of now, Chu State and him, near or far, with or without, have been seeing each other more distantly. And after letting go, the Unrestrained Realm atmosphere, transcending the mortal realm, becomes more evident in Lu Yuan¡¯s presence. As a result, When Mo Li, the Dao master of the Feishuang Tao behind him, saw Lu Yuan for the first time, her first impression was not that of a world-dominating ruler. Instead, she saw him as a banished Immortal in the mortal world. The serene, Unrestrained Realm temperament could only be possessed by those highly cultivated in the Daoist school. ¡®King Chu before me has such a state of mind, which is no less than mine!¡¯ Mo Li sighed in her heart, raising her appreciation for the King of Chu even higher, and then responded with a smile, ¡°Fellow Daoist, the reason for having such thoughts is that the Mortal Dust has blinded your eyes, dragged down your body and mind, sinking into it, unable to break free. As long as my fellow Daoist is willing to sever the Mortal Dust with determination, switch from being worldly to transcending the world, no longer tangled in the Mortal Dust, you can live an Unrestrained Realm life, travelling freely between Heaven and Earth. At that time, Heaven and Earth are vast; where else in the world can¡¯t we find magnificent scenery? Free from the Mortal Dust¡¯s blinding, where in the world can¡¯t we find Unrestrained Realm¡¯s people? Finding a fellow Daoist to travel freely between Heaven and Earth is so easy. If my fellow Daoist finds it hard to make up his mind, this time you can join me and the others in ascending together to the Immortal Realm, where we can directly cut off our connection with the Nine Provinces, entering a new world and achieving Unrestrained Realm liberation.¡± To the end, Mo Li slightly changed her original idea and invited Lu Yuan to ascend with her instead. The King of Chu before her was quite powerful, and even she had a faint sense of great danger in her heart when facing him. This made Mo Li realize that this man was indeed extraordinary, as the rumors said. He was a person with qualifications that spanned both the ancient and modern eras. In this Age of Dharma Decline, he surprisingly could, as a mere individual cultivator, become a figure on par with these Immortal Dao Sect Lords. Such an achievement was truly unimaginable. She even suspected that if it weren¡¯t for the restrictions of Heaven and Earth and the lack of Spiritual Energy, the King of Chu before her might have become a figure on the level of the legendary Three Emperors, suppressing an entire era. At the same time, she was relieved, Relieved that the King of Chu¡¯s fate came from Sun Qingyi a hundred years ago, in that most of the benefits had already been used up. The remaining small part of the destiny could at most only allow him to reach his current accomplishments. And that would already be his limit. Otherwise, with the talents of the King of Chu, there would be no room for them to breathe in this world once he truly grew up, right? Wouldn¡¯t the entire Nine Provinces and ten territories¡¯ Immortal Sects have to submit completely at his feet, losing all autonomy completely? However, it¡¯s precisely because of this, This King of Chu demonstrated extraordinary talent and was of extraordinary qualifications. If they couldn¡¯t win him over to the Ascension team, having such a strong person by their side after ascending to the Immortal Realm would undoubtedly be an excellent hidden card and guarantee for their group. If there were any dangers in the Immortal Realm, or if they encountered any difficulties, With the King of Chu there, they¡¯d have a greater chance of getting through and escaping. This would undoubtedly significantly increase their chances of survival. So even though she knew that the King of Chu was the core figure, the soul of the Chu State, For her own safety and for the consideration of the Ascension plan, Mo Li couldn¡¯t help but try to win over Lu Yuan and take him along the Ascension. As for what will happen to the sect left behind in Chu State without the strong man of Lu Yuan? That can only be said, the later generations will have their own luck. Today¡¯s Chu State is already powerful enough that even without the King of Chu, it remains a superpower of this world. I, the old ancestor, have made proper arrangements, and the younger generations are not without opportunities. If they cannot seize them, who can they blame? They cannot always rely on the old ancestor to help, feeding them every meal, right? If so, then who would be the real ancestor? So, in Mo Li¡¯s heart, she felt just a little guilty, but she quickly stopped caring. But when faced with her invitation, Lu Yuan gently shook his head. His expression did not show any waves. ¡°At this moment, the Nine Provinces will be destroyed, countless people will suffer, and Heaven and Earth will almost be destroyed in an instant. Chapter 777 - Chapter 777: Chapter 338: Transcending the Original Intention_3 Chapter 777: Chapter 338: Transcending the Original Intention_3 I am a man of Nine Provinces, half a ruler of a province, facing the crisis of Heaven and Earth, how can I abandon the people and only save myself? Ascending to the Immortal Realm may be the path to transcending and living freely. However, for me, this path may be possible, but definitely not now.¡± As expected, Lu Yuan rejected Mo Li¡¯s invitation. Although he has now regained his original aspiration, taking much of his attention away from the hegemony of Chu State, he has not completely relinquished his pursuit of longevity and freedom. But this does not mean he really intends to completely abandon Chu State. After all, this is a cause he has worked hard for more than twenty years, not something he can just give up easily. Lu Yuan might let go of Chu State in the future, but not now. At least not before using Chu State to absorb the last bit of Spiritual Energy between Heaven and Earth. Similarly, Lu Yuan may follow this path to the Immortal Realm in the future, but definitely not now. Just as in ancient times, those Immortals chose to stay in the mortal world, raising their own strength to the limit before ascending. Lu Yuan also plans to enhance his own strength to the limit, and then consider the matter of ascension. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? Otherwise, with his current Cultivation level barely able to gather one Spiritual Energy, along with a group of cultivators who have been driven to a dead end, attempting to Ascend together would be too dangerous and not worth the risk. Lu Yuan even made a secret decision in his heart. Unless the Nine Provinces come to an end, and there is a crisis of the world collapsing, there is actually no need for him to Ascend. After all, soon I will become the number one master in the Nine Provinces. Once Mo Li and the other cultivators Ascend, no one in this world will be able to threaten me. At that time, with my infinite lifespan, I can live freely in this world. Without the threat from the outside and worries about lifespan depletion, and with my strength surpassing other mortal beings by a wide margin, I can enjoy boundless freedom in Nine Provinces, just like a dead Immortal. If so, why take the risk and go to the unpredictable Beiming Youdu, gambling on an unfathomable Immortal Realm future? Lu Yuan is not like Mo Li and the other cultivators; he has enough options and no need to take risks. ¡°Fellow Daoist has a heart for the world, and Poor Daoist admires.¡± Seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s resolute attitude, Mo Li couldn¡¯t help but feel regretful. However, he did not continue to persuade him. Though they may miss the help of such a strong partner in Ascending, having such a king staying behind, deeply connected to Feishuang Tao, is actually a boon as well. Therefore, whether Lu Yuan Ascends or stays, it is all a win-win situation for Feishuang Tao. If that¡¯s the case, there¡¯s no need to dwell on it. Regretfully, he said: ¡°It¡¯s just that this poor Daoist is greedy to live and afraid to die. I indeed cannot give up my life for the people and stay in the Nine Provinces¡¯ Mortal Dust to help the myriad living beings through calamities. I cannot miss this Ascension.¡± Mo Li did not hide his inner ugliness and flaws and spoke openly. ¡°To fear death and covet life is the nature of all living beings. There is no shame in that.¡± Lu Yuan just smiled at Mo Li¡¯s words and asked without any pretense, ¡°There¡¯s one more thing I¡¯d like to ask my fellow Daoist for guidance. I hope you can help me solve my doubts.¡± Mo Li nodded slightly without refusing, ¡°Fellow Daoist, please speak. If I can help, I won¡¯t hide anything.¡± Lu Yuan said, ¡°This matter involves Beiming Youdu. I want to know if there will be any problems with Beiming Youdu, such as damage and difficulty to use, after you and others use the Ascension Array to go to the Immortal Realm.¡± Although he doesn¡¯t have a strong desire to Ascend, Beiming Youdu is also a path of retreat for Lu Yuan. If in the future there is a doomsday of Heaven and Earth collapsing and the entire Nine Provinces cannot survive, then such an array that can Ascend to the Immortal Realm will become his only chance for survival. Therefore, Lu Yuan still takes Beiming Youdu seriously, keeping an eye on the status of the Array at all times. ¡°Fellow Daoist plans to Ascend later?¡± Upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s inquiry, Mo Li instantly guessed his intentions and gave the King of Chu a glance. He could not help but shake his head and say, ¡°The materials used for Beiming Youdu were brought from the Immortal Realm by the Boundary-breaking Immortal after his descent. It is a true Immortal treasure that can last for thousands of generations. Such an array refined with Immortal treasures will not be easily damaged. The current problem with Beiming Youdu is only a lack of Spiritual Energy, making it difficult to maintain the array, so it has to be gradually closed down. According to our estimates, even if we use the Array later, the Beiming Youdu Array will not have any problems for thousands of years afterwards. After thousands of years, when the Immortal treasures used to refine Beiming Youdu gradually degrade and decay due to the depletion of Spiritual Energy, will the Array finally collapse. However, that is bound to be a long time later. If you want to Ascend a hundred years later and lead the people of the Nine Provinces through the great catastrophe, there will be no problems with the Array.¡± Mo Li answered Lu Yuan¡¯s concerns and hesitated for a moment before saying, ¡°However, the Array may be usable, but based on our estimates, the active Spiritual Energy still remaining in the Nine Provinces today can only start Beiming Youdu once.¡± After the Array has drained the remaining active Spiritual Energy in Heaven and Earth, there may still be Spiritual Energy left in the depths of the world, but it is beyond the reach of the outside world. Even with Beiming Youdu, those dead metaphysical Spiritual Energies in the depths of the world cannot be utilized. So if Fellow Daoist wants to Ascend, the Array is not the key. The biggest issue is the lack of sufficient Spiritual Energy to support it. If Fellow Daoist really wants to Ascend, this time, joining us is the last chance. If you miss this time, it will be difficult to transcend.¡± Mo Li shook his head, apparently not optimistic about Lu Yuan¡¯s ideas. If there were enough Spiritual Energies, and a second activation of Beiming Youdu, why would they, the remaining cultivators, be so eager and hurried to Ascend? Even setting the time to a year later is extremely hasty. Isn¡¯t it because the Spiritual Energy between Heaven and Earth is growing thinner, and every day that passes, the active Spiritual Energy they can use decreases even more? If they continue to delay, they won¡¯t have enough active Spiritual Energy to open Beiming Youdu, even if they want to Ascend. The current Nine Provinces is a desperate end for these cultivators. Everyone wants to transcend. Lu Yuan¡¯s idea is not impossible, but it is just a delusion. With such a mindset, they will only sink deeper into the Nine Provinces and find it increasingly difficult to break free. Chapter 778 - Chapter 778: Chapter 339: Consolidate the Foundation Chapter 778: Chapter 339: Consolidate the Foundation After conversing with Mo Li and confirming that there would be no issues with the retreat of the Beiming Youdu, the last heavy stone in Lu Yuan¡¯s heart was finally put down. Afterwards, he had several discussions on the Dao with Feishuang Dao Master, and they both benefited greatly from each other¡¯s insights on Dao Law. Normally, in traditional cultivation or fantasy novels, the two should have each had a sudden enlightenment and then experienced a breakthrough with a significant increase in their cultivation level. Unfortunately. In the Age of Dharma Decline, there is no spiritual energy from the Immortal Method. Even with many insights and high realm, they could not progress past their current cultivation and stagnate. This further cemented Mo Li¡¯s determination to ascend to the Immortal Realm. After several meetings with Lu Yuan and once again confirming the cooperation between Feishuang Tao and Chu State, the Feishuang Dao Master took his leave, left Baling, and headed to Mount Tianshu, the new base of his sect. After seeing Mo Li off, Lu Yuan did not idle and began instructing his five true disciples. Upon learning that their Master and King planned to cultivate them, Chu Wei, Li Liang, and the others were elated. As a martial artist, who wouldn¡¯t want to peer into the supreme Innate Realm? Becoming an Inborn Grandmaster not only meant having immense power but also exercising the influence that comes with it and an additional fifty years of lifespan compared to ordinary people. All these advantages make Inborn Grandmasters synonymous with Earthly Gods and Immortals. Compared to ordinary people, Inborn Grandmasters are indeed a different species, gradually taking on the characteristics of immortals. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? It is true. Inborn Grandmasters have completed a transformation of their body and soul compared to ordinary people; they have transcended the concept of mortals and stand between humanity and deities. Such beings should not be called ordinary people. In this Age of Dharma Decline, without the manifestation of immortals, it isn¡¯t inappropriate to call them Earthly Gods and Immortals out of ignorance and fearlessness. It was due to their deep understanding of the significance of Inborn Grandmasters that Chu Wei and the others cherished this once-in-a-millennium opportunity. In the past, they did not dare to hope to become Inborn Grandmasters because they knew the vast resources needed to cultivate one and the high price to pay. These resource costs, sometimes, could empty the foundation of an Innate Great Sect or drain the treasury of a small country. Although they were among the best disciples of Lu Yuan and had made significant contributions to their country in the past, it seemed a bit too hopeful for their Master to pay such a high price for them. So although they regretted in their hearts, they did not dwell on it too much. But now that an opportunity like this has fallen on their heads, and they would not grasp it with both hands, they would undoubtedly regret it for the rest of their lives and die without peace. After receiving Lu Yuan¡¯s support, they immediately started adjusting their mentality, honing their martial arts, and began to gradually recover their past peaks step by step. The process was smooth. The five had already reached a certain realm, but they had neglected their martial arts due to being busy with politics and military affairs. Now that they had a goal and knew how to work hard, it was actually quite simple to recover their peak state. Even Chu Wei, who had the highest martial arts talent among the five, recovered his peak level in just half a month. After that, under Lu Yuan¡¯s guidance, he began to delve into the Innate transformation and aimed to refine his body and soul. After contemplation for more than ten days, Chu Wei had already gained some preliminary insights and was ready to begin the transformation of his body and officially step onto the road of Innate. This step was quite important, and even to some extent, it could be said to be the beginning of the Innate and the foundation of the Dao, which must be cautious. Therefore, upon receiving the news, Lu Yuan had no choice but to spare some time to specifically protect his disciple during the process. Chu Wei¡¯s body and soul transformation was different from Zhou Qing, Sun Siwen, and the others. It was directly refined using immortal techniques to mobilize spiritual energy. With spiritual energy and immortal technique protection, helping a few mortals go through the transformation was actually simple and not too risky. That¡¯s why Lu Yuan had great confidence in those occasions and had no worries. However, the path that these disciples were taking to breaking through Innate was the mainstream orthodox way of today ¨C by consuming Divine Blood Elixir and relying on the different species¡¯ bloodline¡¯s spiritual power in the elixir to complete the transformation of their body and soul. For a mortal body, it isn¡¯t easy to accommodate a different species¡¯ bloodline, let alone draw spiritual power from it. The entire process was extremely difficult and complicated. First, the martial artist needed to suppress the different species¡¯ bloodline, preventing them from wreaking havoc within themselves. Then, using the powerful vitality of the different species¡¯ bloodlines, they would stimulate and forge their bloodlines, forcing them to transform through immense external pressure. Once the transformation began, they would draw spiritual energy from the different species¡¯ bloodlines, nourishing and strengthening their transformed bloodline, which would then serve as the foundation for their Innate realm. Afterward, they would repeat this process of consuming elixirs, mobilizing different species¡¯ bloodlines to refine their own, and absorb the nutrients from the different species¡¯ bloodlines to enable their bloodline to grow and transform. When their own bloodline had grown and transformed to its limit and was supported by their physical blood and energy, the martial artist¡¯s divine soul would naturally ferment and grow stronger during the process. Once it grew strong enough and they had comprehended their own Martial Dao True Intent, they would use their True Intent as the primer to drive the whole divine soul to undergo transformation. With both body and divine soul completed in their transformation, the Innate Realm of Martial Arts would naturally be achieved. That was the path of Innate that traditional martial artists in this world took. And it is the path that Chu Wei and the others must follow. Chapter 779 - Chapter 779: Chapter 339: Consolidate the Foundation_2 Chapter 779: Chapter 339: Consolidate the Foundation_2 This path was, of course, not easy to walk. Not only was the risk extremely high when refining the physical body with the blood of Different Species, but the time and energy consumed was also more than that of Zhou Qing and the others directly refining their bodies and souls with spiritual energy. The most simple example. Take the risk of refining the bloodline with the elixir of the Different Species for example; it is inherently dangerous, so it would be impossible to take too many elixirs at once. For safety reasons, martial artists would take one elixir a day, so that the power of the Different Species¡¯ bloodline is neither too strong nor too weak, just enough to refine the bloodline without exceeding the martial artist¡¯s control. To calculate, completing one body and soul metamorphosis would require the support of 500 elixirs. It means, if a martial artist wants to break through Innate, it will take at least 500 days at the fastest. In other words. By the time Chu Wei and the others break through Innate, it would be at the earliest a year and a half later in the eleventh year of Shenwu. However, now they have Han Hua, Han Hu, and Han Liang, three Feishuang Tao protectors, plus the Great Mohism spiritual woman who is already on her way to get married and can return to the country in less than two months. Chu State has four more Inborn Grandmasters in a short period of time. The overall number of Innate is even more than ten. With such strength, they don¡¯t need to worry about not having Innate available for now. Even if it comes to extremes, Lu Yuan can issue an order in the name of the King of Chu to mobilize the three grand masters from the three affiliated nations in the southwest. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? However, these three Grandmasters are related to the situation in the southwest and are the important force that the Chu country uses as a deterrent against the Dali, Nanzhao, and Su and Song countries. There is also a mutually restraining and counterbalancing situation among the three countries. It is not impossible to use the Inborn of the three vassal countries. But if they are moved, it is easy to break the situation in the southwest, and even cause disputes among the three vassal countries, completely destabilizing the southwest. Therefore, Lu Yuan did not really want to use the power of these vassal countries unless absolutely necessary. With these three small vassal countries, the Chu country only needs to maintain two armies in Qianzhong and one Innate, including prefectures and counties, county soldiers, for a total of 70,000 troops, and can maintain the situation in the southwest. But without them. To ensure the stability of the southwest as it is now, the Chu country would have to station an Avatar in Hanzhong as well, stationing more than 100,000 heavy troops to have sufficient deterrence. The input and output of the two are clearly not proportional. So considering this, Lu Yuan did not have the idea of conscripting the vassals of the southwest in the Southern Expedition next year. However, this does not mean that the power of these southwestern vassal countries cannot be used in the future. Once the Southern Expedition is launched next year and the Lingnan nations are destroyed. The spears and borders of Chu country can go from south to north, surrounding the entire southwestern region from the land of Su and Song countries. At that time, when the north, east, and south are all under Chu¡¯s control. For the remaining Nanzhao and Dali nations in the southwest, surrendering to the Chu country and submitting their allegiance will be the only way for them if they don¡¯t want to bring destruction upon themselves. At that time, Lu Yuan may just send a Messenger to subdue the two countries, making them new vassals of Chu State. Yes, Lu Yuan had no intentions of attacking Nanzhao and Dali. Ever since learning that Yangzhou was doomed to be destroyed in the future, Lu Yuan completely dispelled the idea of attacking the southwest. Instead of spending time and effort to attack the southwest, losing soldiers, it is better to leave these small nations, making them submit and using their resources as the suzerain of the nations. After all, the southwestern region has been destined for destruction in just over a hundred years. By that time, these small nations would have to either surrender completely to Chu State and be annexed or have no other way to survive. And one hundred and several years is enough for Chu State to continue infiltrating, slowly controlling the vassal countries as puppets. So why bother? There is no need for war now, just wait for a hundred years, and these small countries will obediently fall into Chu State¡¯s arms without sending a single soldier. After realizing this, Lu Yuan was no longer obsessed with the southwest. As long as the other party submits to the Chu country, joins the Chu State tribute system, and allows Chu State to gain the Qi Luck of the southwestern countries, that¡¯s enough. Whether or not they really rule doesn¡¯t matter. Right now, the focus is on destroying Lingnan first, and then using the momentum of a great victory to put pressure on the southwest, unifying the western part of Yangzhou in name only. At that time, the remaining five countries in the southwest will all become Chu State¡¯s servants, and there will be no more enemies around, and no more security threats, so Lu Yuan can rest assured and boldly transfer the military forces of the southwestern countries, making use of them as he wishes. He is not sure about other things. But after the destruction of Lingnan, several years later, when launching the Eastern Expedition against Ning Country, the military forces and Innate of these southwestern barbarians and small countries will definitely come in handy. All is planned inside Lu Yuan¡¯s heart. ¡­ After personally protecting Chu Wei¡¯s body change and confirming that he had initially mastered control of his own bloodline, Lu Yuan let go after more than a dozen days. He is the ruler of Chu State. Even if he has now regained his original heart, he has started to let go of the military affairs of the country, focusing on his own freedom and transcendence, and having much more free time than in the past. But even if he is free, there will still be many things that cannot be avoided, requiring him as the King of Chu to deal with personally. Moreover, what he seeks is leisure, freedom and spontaneity. Being obsessed with the affairs of Chu State cannot tie down Lu Yuan, and even less so can his disciples. So naturally, he cannot spend too much time on watching over a few disciples breaking through Innate. Chapter 780 - Chapter 780: Chapter 339: Consolidate the Foundation_3 Chapter 780: Chapter 339: Consolidate the Foundation_3 Therefore, apart from Chu Wei, Lu Yuan only kept an eye on Li Liang, Han Shun and the others for about ten days or half a month. After seeing that the disciples¡¯ inborn transformation was on track, he didn¡¯t spend much energy on them. Of course. As a Teacher, he didn¡¯t completely let go of his responsibilities. After letting go, Lu Yuan instructed Sun Siwen to check on his nieces and nephews if he had time, keeping an eye on them to prevent any accidents. Yes, they are considered as nieces and nephews. Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen treat each other as brothers, and their friendship is far better than ordinary siblings. At the same time, Sun Siwen practiced the Chi Yang Divine Skill inherited from Lu Yuan and broke through the predestined realm with this skill. There would be no problem in teaching Chu Wei and the others who practiced the same lineage. So whether it¡¯s in terms of identity or martial arts, Sun Siwen is perfectly qualified to be called a Martial Uncle by Chu Wei and others. Even in terms of official title, Sun Siwen is the Prime Minister of the kingdom, and his rank is higher than Chu Wei and the others. He is definitely qualified to instruct Chu Wei and the others. However, this inevitably made the already busy Sun Siwen even busier. Fortunately, being a selfless friend for the country and the public, Sun Siwen did not refuse to help train the five inborn talents, which is a great contribution to the national foundation. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï With such a responsible friend, Lu Yuan could also let go of his worries and live a carefree life. So after having some free time, Lu Yuan finished the state affairs, took Lan Cai¡¯er and other concubines, as well as his brothers Lu He and Lu Hao, on a leisurely trip around Baling. Yes, Lan Cai¡¯er had returned from her tour of the southwest. After Han Liang took up his post as the Guardian General of Qianzhong County, Lan Cai¡¯er naturally no longer had to stay in the remote mountains and was able to return to Baling. And to be honest. Lu Yuan was going to marry a barbarian Spiritual woman with the ceremony of a Queen. In reason and emotion, Lan Cai¡¯er should be informed of this and asked to return to the capital to participate in person. So after Han Liang went to Qianzhong, Lu Yuan sent a message to have the Queen return. Moreover, after Lan Cai¡¯er returned to Baling a few days ago, he told her all the details and prepared for her anger. After all, what he did was indeed a bit underhanded. There can¡¯t be two suns in the sky and there can¡¯t be two rulers in the country. Naturally, there couldn¡¯t be two queens in the harem. Lu Yuan wanted to win over the spiritual woman by marrying her using the ceremony of a queen, although he didn¡¯t grant her the title of queen. But theoretically speaking. Based on this event, the spiritual woman in the harem could actually be on an equal footing with Lan Cai¡¯er and not fear her as much. This would undermine Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s authority in the harem, which is a serious matter for her position. Of course. Although this matter may disturb the peace of the harem and even undermine the foundation of the country. However, Lu Yuan was confident that as long as he was alive, there would be no turmoil in the harem or the country. And both Lan Cai¡¯er and the Spirit woman will not be able to outlive him. So neither Lan Cai¡¯er nor the spiritual woman would be able to cause trouble in Chu State. Hence, Lan Cai¡¯er was angry and dissatisfied when she learned of this, but knowing that she could not outlive her husband, she didn¡¯t make a fuss. After all, she knew that she could not outlive her husband, and neither could the spiritual woman. Even whether her own sons could outlive him was a question. Her original plan to control Chu State and revive the Miao People¡¯s Five Poisons Sect through her children to outlast her husband had long been abandoned. With Chu growing stronger and gradually becoming a force to unite Yangzhou, Lan Cai¡¯er now thinks more about integrating the Miao and the Five Poisons Sect into Chu as a part of the nation rather than a separate ethnicity. Besides, what difference could it make if the spiritual woman entered the palace as a wife? The greatest advantage in Lu Yuan¡¯s hands, the spiritual energy from the jade pendant, had already been obtained by his two sons, Lu He and Lu Hao. Lu He and Lu Hao have laid the foundation of Inborn and will even become Inborn Grandmasters when they grow up in seven or eight years. By then, with Lan Cai¡¯er as their mother and both sons as Inborn Grandmasters, this power would be sufficient to secure the position of Queen. No one in the harem could break this combination bound by blood ties. Not to mention the affection Lu Yuan and Lan Cai¡¯er had for each other, having supported each other through all the years they had been together. This emotional bond of struggling together and creating a formidable empire cannot be compared to a mere spiritual woman. Under such circumstances, knowing that her status was secured and recognizing the value of the spirit woman to win over the barbarians, Lan Cai¡¯er eventually let go of her anger. However, even though she let go, she still had some discomfort in her heart. What could Lu Yuan say about this? He could only take his queen, along with their two children, on a trip outside the palace to relax and enjoy themselves. And sure enough, this proved to be very effective. Baling is surrounded by the Yangtze River to the north, Dongting Lake to the west, Yunluo Mountain to the east, and a rich lake land to the south. With the stunning mountains and rivers and the endless scenery in all directions, Lu Yuan and his family spent a long time enjoying themselves, which helped alleviate much of Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s sadness and gloom. When she usually played with her children, she showed many smiles. Seeing this, Lu Yuan finally felt relieved. He knew in his heart that this crisis was finally over. They enjoyed themselves for more than a month and returned to Baling near the end of the year. By this time, the envoys who were originally sent to the Snowy Wilderness to greet the spiritual woman had finally escorted the Spirit Consort back to Baling after several months of traveling. They brought a predestined Grandmaster, 400 elixirs, and ten divine flying eagles for Chu State. Chu State¡¯s foundation was further solidified. Chapter 781 - Chapter 781: Chapter 340: The Great Maha Divine Power Chapter 781: Chapter 340: The Great Maha Divine Power The marriage envoy returned to Baling, and Lu Yuan first issued an edict to reward all the members of the envoy, with promotions, titles, and various rewards. Following that, he personally summoned the leader of the envoy, Assistant Minister of Rites Wen Yuan, who went to marry the spiritual woman. ¡°For this trip to the snowy wilderness, you¡¯ve endured hardships along the way and seem to have lost a lot of weight.¡± In a study room within the palace, Lu Yuan smiled as he looked at the minister sitting upright before him. ¡°Serving the king¡¯s command, I dare not speak of the hardships,¡± Wen Yuan said solemnly. Lu Yuan nodded and didn¡¯t dwell on it, instead asking, ¡°So, on this trip to the snowy wilderness, how do you feel about the many tribes there?¡± This time, the mission to the snowy wilderness was to welcome the spiritual woman back to the country, which was of the utmost importance and the top priority. Besides this, the envoy had also taken the opportunity to probe the details of the Snow Plains Nomads, and to check out their strengths and weaknesses, which was also essential to the mission. Most of the spies sent by the palace in the past could not infiltrate the snowy wilderness tribes due to difficulties in communication and the vast distances between tribes. It was nearly impossible for an outsider to infiltrate the Snowy Wilds¡¯ tribes because of the long, arduous journey and the fact that most everyone there knew each other. Moreover, the snow wilderness was so vast that it was common for tribes to be several thousand miles apart. As a result, a spy wanting to enter a tribe would spend a year or more in transit, making the journey highly inefficient. For all these reasons, previous attempts to infiltrate the Snowy Wilds had been unsuccessful, and the cost and risks were simply too great. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã? The information gathered through these efforts usually arrived months later, making it worthless. So, instead of focusing all their efforts on the snow area, the spies eventually began focusing on the storm center of the barbarians and the Zhou Country in the Helong region. By doing so, they could gain more useful information with less cost, time, and energy than if they tried to infiltrate the snowy wilderness directly. However, this approach made the information they gathered incomplete, making it difficult to gain a deeper understanding of the Snowy Plain Barbarians tribes. Thus, Wen Yuan, as the main envoy, was not only responsible for welcoming the spiritual woman back to Chu but also to observe the situation of the Snowy Plains during the trip, filling in the last piece of the puzzle for Chu. The Snow Plains were vital for Chu¡¯s future strategy and an essential asset to counterbalance the Zhou Country, leaving no room for negligence. So after welcoming back the spiritual woman, Lu Yuan summoned Wen Yuan to inquire about the details of the trip. ¡°Your Majesty.¡± Wen Yuan paid his respects before recounting the twenty thousand-mile journey to the Snowy Wilds, where he finally reached the remote border tribe of Qingmu and welcomed back the spiritual woman. He was struck by the boundless vastness of the snowy wilderness and its extreme desolation. The Qingmu Tribe, where the marriage took place, was a small tribe with only ten thousand inhabitants. However, despite being such a small tribe, they possessed a territory of three thousand miles, which was roughly equivalent to one of Great Chu¡¯s regional territories. Even with such a vast territory, the people of Qingmu still lived in poverty. Food was scarce, and many died from starvation and freezing each year. The reason behind their plight lies in the fact that more than ninety percent of this three-thousand-mile snow-covered tundra is barren and uninhabitable. The few remaining grasslands and valleys in the region were too poor in quality to support agriculture or livestock. Moreover, these grasslands supported only a few thousand people and were hundreds or even thousands of miles apart. The ten-thousand-strong tribe was divided into more than ten separate groups, spread out over three-thousand miles of wilderness. Gathering them together would take months. Whenever they needed to take action outside the tribe, they had to travel for months at a time. This scattered arrangement made it difficult for them to accomplish anything. Therefore, despite its vast territory, the Snowy Wilds were an inhospitable land for living beings. Numerous tribes spread throughout the area, like scattered stars, making it difficult to gather support. In Wen Yuan¡¯s view, although the Snowy Wilds encompassed millions of miles, only a small portion of that territory could be effectively utilized. Furthermore, most of this usable territory was grasslands rather than fertile valleys, making it even more challenging to sustain human life. Millions of people constituted the limit of what the territory of the Snow Wilds could support, if not less. In recent years, the Great Cold of Heaven and Earth has made the living environment of the Snowy Wilds increasingly unbearable. Wen Yuan spoke to many Snow Plains tribespeople. They all mentioned how in the past, numerous snowfield valleys once suitable for grazing had become barren, frozen tundra, with rivers freezing over, making them unusable. Now, the snow-capped valleys and grasslands were shrinking, while the snow-covered land was expanding, putting even more pressure on the existence of these tribes. Although the Qingmu Tribe claimed to have a population of ten thousand at their peak, a detailed inspection during the marriage visit revealed a current population of only seven thousand. The three thousand missing individuals had either died in the conflict with Zhou Country, starved or frozen to death due to the worsening weather conditions. Nowadays, the strong cold wind and snow have caused the Qingmu Tribe to lose three thousand people in just a few years. If this trend continues for another decade or even several decades, with grasslands and valleys gradually withering, this tribe will likely plummet from a large tribe of ten thousand people to a small tribe of only a few thousand or even face extinction, which would be considered normal. Chapter 782 - Chapter 782: Chapter 340: The Great Maha Divine Power_2 Chapter 782: Chapter 340: The Great Maha Divine Power_2 From this perspective, as long as the world remains cold, and the Snowy Wilderness tribes lose their grasslands and river valleys, they will eventually face the calamity of extinction.¡± Wen Yuan finished his lengthy discussion, and then gave a judgment of the future for the Snowy Plain Barbarians. However, after concluding his judgment, a smile appeared on his face: ¡°Although the Snow Plains Nomads may face extinction, this is actually a good thing for our Great Chu. As the cold disaster gradually worsens, the river valley pastures of the Snowy Plains Nomads are shrinking day by day. In order to survive and support their tribes, they can only migrate outwards. Under the force of this cold weather, even if they are unwilling and fearful, they have no choice but to wage wars year after year. As long as the cold disaster continues and the lives of the millions of Barbarians remain unresolved, the Helong tribal conflict in Zhou Country will not cease. This is not something that can be resolved by killing hundreds of thousands or millions of Barbarians. Unless Zhou Country can kill tens of millions of Barbarians all at once, or kill most of them, leaving only the population that the Snowy Wilderness can support. Otherwise, as long as there are still Barbarians left, and their tribes still have extra, difficult-to-support populations, they will continue to attack Helong of Zhou Country. So this war is not a battle of victory or defeat in several or ten years, but a battle of ethnic survival that will take decades or even centuries. It will be either the extinction of the Barbarians or the downfall of Zhou Country. Otherwise, this battle will never end. And with the Barbarians dragging down Zhou Country, our Great Chu¡¯s northwestern border will be worry-free.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? At this point, Wen Yuan stood up and congratulated Lu Yuan with a respectful bow. There is a saying: the enemy of my enemy is my hero. If this is changed, the misfortune of others is my good fortune, and the reasoning is still connected. With Chu State¡¯s capture of Hanzhong, Zhou and Chu have become enemies. When Zhou Country is struggling, Chu State naturally benefits. If Zhou Country is constantly held back by the Barbarians, Chu State¡¯s Hanzhong will be safe. It¡¯s a very simple and straightforward principle. So even if such thinking is somewhat immoral and cruel to the millions of people in Zhou Country, For Chu State, for people like Lu Yuan, it must be said that this is actually a great thing. Therefore, after hearing Wen Yuan¡¯s congratulations, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but reveal a smile and waved his hand, saying, ¡°Zhou is a hegemonic country with a vast territory and millions of soldiers. With its foundation and strength, it is still debatable whether the numerous Snow Plains Nomads can hold back Zhou Country. We can use those Barbarians, but we cannot rely on them. To forge iron, one must have a hard foundation. As long as Chu State is strong, even if Zhou People put all their efforts into attacking, what is there to fear?¡± Wen Yuan, who understood human nature very well, heard this and said in admiration: ¡°Your Majesty is wise. I have learned a lesson.¡± Seeing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but laugh happily, feeling relieved. ¡­ After learning the true situation of the Barbarians from Wen Yuan, Lu Yuan no longer had any doubts about the Snowy Wilderness and felt at ease. Years of cold disasters have posed an even more severe threat to the Snowy Wilderness than he had initially thought. Originally, Lu Yuan thought that the cold disaster would merely make the winters in the Snowy Wilderness longer. But it seems now. Not only has winter become longer, but the pasture and river valleys have also shrunken and the living environment has been destroyed. Under the erosion of the cold disaster, the Snow Plains Nomads are now left with no way out. Their only way of life is to defeat Zhou Country and capture Helong, a piece of land suitable for survival, before the Snowy Wilderness completely turns into frozen soil. However, even the land of Helong is not entirely safe. As the three states and three regions in the north turn into a frozen wasteland, the imbalance of the Four Poles of Heaven and Earth will cause the land of Yong State, which is located at the West Pole, to suffer constant earthquakes, mountain and river fractures, and countless ravines, making it no longer suitable for living. So even if they take Helong, when the earthquakes come, these Barbarians will still have to continue migrating eastward, all the way to Henan and Nanyang of Zhou Country, to the original Central State land, to be completely secure. However, this migration process may take a long time. It will take the arrival of the North Pole frozen soil and the explosion of the Southern Polar Poisonous Fire, the imbalance between the north and south, to affect the east and west poles. When the earthquakes come, it is estimated to be a hundred years later, or even two hundred years later. Therefore, for the Barbarians, if they take over Helong, they can still live more than a hundred years of stable life. It¡¯s just that during this hundred years of stable life, there might be many natural disasters, and Helong will gradually become barren, with less and less output, making it difficult to survive. ¡°I just don¡¯t know if the Barbarians know about this matter?¡± Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but ask the Spiritual woman with this idea in mind. He originally had many questions in his heart, especially about the ancient secrets, and wanted to get answers. However, due to some scruples, and the fact that every Immortal Sect guards its own treasures, many key pieces of information were impossible to share with Lu Yuan. Therefore, no matter how many questions he had, it was still difficult to find answers. The Snow Plains Nomad¡¯s Great Mohism has ancient origins and is even said to have competed with Emperor Hua Guang for the throne of Human Emperor. It has an extraordinary background. Perhaps through them, some ancient secrets can be learned. However, after asking the Spiritual woman, the result was quite disappointing. ¡°A thousand years ago, there was a rebellion within Great Mohism. At that time, there were rebels fighting for the position of Spirit Master, leading to two factions within the sect, each supporting a different Spiritual woman and claiming to be the orthodox lineage, with many of the Snow Plains tribes supporting each side. At that time, the Snow Plains was divided, and the river valleys were not unified. The factions attacked and killed each other, and hatreds were difficult to resolve. Finally, after hundreds of years of fighting, the previous Holy Spirit Master and Spiritual woman put down the rebellion and pacified the chaos within the sect. However, the hundreds of years of war had left the Snowy Wilderness in ruins, the tribes were broken, and many scriptures and secret techniques within the sect were lost.¡± Chapter 783 - Chapter 783: Chapter 340: The Great Maha Divine Power_3 Chapter 783: Chapter 340: The Great Maha Divine Power_3 Regarding the ancient matters, only some poems and murals remain, passed down as ballads. ¡°My Lord, I have not heard of Beiming Youdu, so I don¡¯t know what it is.¡± the Spiritual Woman replied with curiosity as she faced Lu Yuan¡¯s inquiry on the couch. ¡°It turns out, much of Great Mohism¡¯s heritage has been lost.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but shake his head and sigh. Then he leaned down, looked at the scenery, and felt the warmth of her body. His heart ablaze, he said with a smile, ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter. It was just a casual question. If my beloved consort doesn¡¯t know, let it be. Instead, let¡¯s discuss the Dual Cultivation of Spirituality. I want to have a Spirit Child with my consort soon!¡± After saying this, Lu Yuan leaned down, and the room was filled with her moans of pleasure. It must be said. The Spiritual Woman of Great Mohism brought many surprises to Lu Yuan. As a symbol of faith for the Barbarians, the cultivation techniques practiced by the Spiritual Women of Great Mohism were somewhat peculiar and were called the ¡°Mo Ling Borrowing Life and Cultivating Character Secret Method¡±. Simply put, inside the Snowy Wilderness of Great Mohism was a statue of the Great Dharma God. Over millions of years, this Great Dharma God statue gradually gained a trace of spirituality, which could also be called divinity, roughly equivalent to a god formed through faith. However, this god had no consciousness and was just an irregular concept. Of course, the so-called irregular concept god also had significant drawbacks. Its essence was nothing more than a mass of energy trapped within the god statue. As long as one didn¡¯t approach it, it posed no threat. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?0 Great Mohism exploited this fact. Through the ages, they selected qualified Spirit Masters and Spirit Women to obtain the Great Dharma God¡¯s recognition and to conform to the statue¡¯s rules. Then, the recognized Spirit Masters and Spirit Women could receive a touch of the god statue¡¯s spirituality, integrating it with their life essence. After merging with the life essence, they could borrow the stored divine power from the Great Dharma God statue for countless years, to refine themselves and become stronger as they cultivated. Since the divine power of the Great Dharma God statue was almost equal to the life of a god. This step was also called Borrowing Life. After borrowing divine power, Spirit Masters and Spirit Women could use it to strengthen their life essence, break through innate shackles, and enter the Heavenly Human Grandmaster Realm. Once this realm was achieved, they could harness the power of Heaven and Earth to nourish their essence, strengthen their internal divine power, and promote the spirituality within. This was called Cultivating Character. Upon reaching this step, the ¡°Mo Ling Borrowing Life and Cultivating Character Secret Method¡± would be considered complete. Later, when they reached their Heavenly Human lifespan limit, Spirit Masters and Spirit Women would return to the Great Dharma God statue and return their lifelong cultivated spirituality and divine power to the god statue. This achieved a cycle. The god statue invested a bit of its divine spirit and power to help the Spirit Masters and Spirit Women break through and transcend. In return, when they passed away, they returned their strengthened divine power to the god statue. This cycle ensured an orderly succession of Great Mohism, with two Inborns in each generation. It also ensured the preservation and growth of the god statue¡¯s power, preventing its eventual depletion and demise. A mutually beneficial symbiotic relationship formed between the god statue and Great Mohism. It was unclear who relied on whom. Perhaps saying they relied on each other would also suffice. However, it was indeed true that the Spiritual Women, who, through their spirituality, had obtained the divine power of the Great Dharma God, were real Divine Ladies, as Lu Yuan had previously thought. This could be seen from the power that emanated from their bodies, a pure and holy power different from Martial Arts and Immortal Methods. This was a power from a different system than both the immortal and martial paths. It was the Divine Method. The so-called Spiritual Women and Spirit Masters were more like containers for harnessing divine power through cultivation. So the Great Dharma God statue was without consciousness. Otherwise, relying on the borrowed spiritual power, the god could have manifested and taken possession of the Spirit Masters and Women¡¯s bodies and fully controlled them. Thus, it was not unreasonable to regard them as Avatars of divine spirits. A Spiritual Woman, a Divine Lady, with a divine body. How could Lu Yuan not be excited by this thought? So he indulged himself with the Spiritual Woman after bringing her back and conferring her the title of Spirit Consort. Every day he would shower her with love and affection. This behavior greatly irritated Lan Cai¡¯er, who had finally been feeling better after going on a trip. Even during the New Year¡¯s family gathering in the palace, she didn¡¯t give Lu Yuan a good look. However, aside from saying some nice things to his Queen, Lu Yuan remained unyielding and continued to cling to his Spirit Consort. Alright. In some ways, disregarding his imperial identity, he was indeed somewhat unfaithful. But Lu Yuan had his own ideas. His infatuation with the Spiritual Woman, apart from genuinely becoming immersed in her aloof divinity, was mainly for the path of Immortality. Yes, it was for the path of Immortality. Although it sounded far-fetched, after learning the essence of the Great Dharma God, Lu Yuan discovered an immense, unexplored treasure from it. That was the divine power accumulated for thousands of years from countless generations of Spirit Masters and Women who poured their divine power back into the god statue. When did the legend of the Great Dharma God begin? During the era of Emperor Hua Guang in ancient times. How many years ago was that? The exact timeline had become difficult to trace as time went by. However, an approximate estimate could still be made. About 100,000 years have passed since the beginning of the ancient era. Now, the life expectancy of Great Mohism¡¯s Spirit Masters and Women is longer than that of ordinary Martial Arts Grandmasters due to their divine power, much like Immortals, and can live for two hundred years. This is still the result of the world¡¯s Spiritual Energy being dormant. The Great Dharma God statue was also affected. To conserve its divine power, most of the statue¡¯s power had gone dormant, and little was being borrowed. If this were the ancient era, the life span of the Spirit Masters and Women would have been even longer. It wouldn¡¯t be surprising for them to directly cultivate into divine spirits comparable to Human Immortals and Earth Immortals of the Immortal Method. Over 100,000 years of accumulation, the god statue had stored an immense amount of divine power, simply incalculable! Even if we disregard the Spirit Masters and Women who borrowed divine power in ancient times and directly ascended, just consider the past thousand years since the Great Mohism¡¯s internal strife, the loss of the Beiming Youdu heritage, and Forgetting the means to ascend. In a thousand years, there would have been five generations of Spirit Masters and Women returning their accumulated divine power to the god statue. Even this alone would have been a significant amount of divine power. If Lu Yuan could extract this divine power from the god statue and utilize it, He would have another energy source and an alternative route in addition to the Heavenly and Earthly Aura. Thus, to open up this treasure mine, even if it was not yet within his grasp, he naturally wanted to learn more about the so-called divine power to prepare for plotting against the god statue in the future. And the channel to understand this was, of course, through the Spiritual Woman. Chapter 784 - Chapter 784: Chapter 341 Chain Reaction Chapter 784: Chapter 341 Chain Reaction After a deep interaction with the spiritual woman, Lu Yuan developed a strong interest in the god statue of Great Mohism. However, this was not the right moment to pursue it. Chu State was currently in deep cooperation with the Snowy Wilderness, enjoying a honeymoon period. Recklessly making a move on the Great Dharma God statue would undoubtedly affect the cooperation between the two countries, ruin Lu Yuan¡¯s future strategy against Zhou Country, and disrupt his plans for overcoming the Heaven and Earth catastrophe. This was undoubtedly unacceptable. So even if he coveted the Great Dharma God statue at this time, he could only restrain himself temporarily and wait for a later opportunity. Fortunately, the statue was not a cultivator but an inanimate object, with a vast amount of divine power stored within it, transforming it into a kind of unconscious divine spirit. In this way, he didn¡¯t have to worry about the Great Dharma God statue ascending to the Immortal Realm along with the Nine Provinces cultivators. As long as the statue remained in the Nine Provinces, there was no chance of it running away, and Lu Yuan could obtain it gradually in the future. Even as time passed and the environment deteriorated, and the barbarians continued to migrate, he might not even have to actively claim it, as the barbarians might offer the Great Dharma God statue to him in exchange for Chu State¡¯s protection without any effort on his part. In summary. Lu Yuan was not really in a hurry about the Great Dharma God statue. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Time was on his side. It couldn¡¯t be seen at the moment, but when the Heavenly and Earthly Aura was depleted, and the myriad of laws were hidden, in a sense, that would be the true golden age for him. For now, the golden age had not yet arrived, and he had to wait patiently. The Great Dharma God statue could be left alone for now, as divine spirits, no matter how unconscious, were too daunting for people. Lu Yuan thought it would be better to first understand the nature of the divine power and have enough confidence before approaching the statue. For now¡­ He would first delve into the analysis of the divine power through the Spirit Consort and gradually conduct research. ¡­ Lu Yuan¡¯s research didn¡¯t last long, as just a month later, he had to stop. It wasn¡¯t that he gave up halfway or lacked willpower. The main reason was the sudden deterioration of the international environment Chu State faced due to changes in the surrounding situation, which forced Lu Yuan to devote more energy to dealing with the pressures around him. First, there was Ning Country in Jiangdong. When news of Chu State¡¯s military operations in Hanzhong came in October last year, there had been some unrest in Ning Country. Two hundred thousand Ning troops gathered in Yuzhang Prefecture, carrying out large-scale maneuvers, seemingly showing signs of marching westward. At that time, Lu Yuan had stationed his troops in the capital, and he immediately mobilized a hundred thousand soldiers to stand firm on the border, confronting Ning Country without yielding. After receiving the silver from the barbarians, Lu Yuan also raised a hundred thousand more soldiers in Chu State territory, and ostentatiously trained them in Dongting, making a great show of strength. Seeing this scene, Ning Country might have been concerned about the more than 200,000 Chu troops stationed in Dongting, or perhaps they were worried about the military prowess of Lu Yuan, the reputed Martial Marquis, or maybe they were considering that they had also recently recruited a large number of new soldiers who hadn¡¯t completed their training and were not fully prepared for war. In short, whatever the reason, or a combination of them all, with heavy concerns, Ning Country ultimately abandoned its plan to dispatch troops. However, even so, the 200,000 Ning troops in Yuzhang Prefecture did not withdraw, instead stationing themselves in Pengli Lake, conducting drills with the newly recruited 150,000 new soldiers. As if wanting to compete with Chu State, they made their presence as grand as possible. For a time, although Chu State and Ning Country did not actually go to war, and there wasn¡¯t even any friction on the border, the brewing atmosphere of an upcoming storm, and the oppressive clouds of war, still drew the attention of people all around the world. Everyone knew. At this rate, it wouldn¡¯t be long before a war would break out between Chu State and Ning Country. It would be as short as one or two years, or as long as three to five years, depending on when both countries were ready to build up their strength and when the war would erupt. At present, the confrontation was merely a rehearsal for the war. However, this was just the outsider¡¯s view. Lu Yuan was not too optimistic about Ning Country¡¯s plans for Jiangdong. He was well aware. With Ziyun Tao¡¯s support, Ning Country¡¯s strength would definitely see a significant increase. It might be exaggerated to say that their power doubled instantly, but an enhancement of four or five, or even six or seven times, was definitely possible. Sure enough. His prediction soon came true. At the end of October, when the news of Chu State capturing Hanzhong reached Baling and then from Baling to Ning Country, it didn¡¯t take long for the news of Ning ruler Shen Qiu¡¯s massive enfeoffment of four Martial Marquises to spread throughout the world within a matter of days. Each of these Martial Marquises in Ning Country was equivalent to a Pillar State Grand General in Inborn Grandmaster status of Chu State and China. Ning Country suddenly enfeoffed four Martial Marquises, almost declaring to the world that there were four Inborn Grandmasters belonging to the court in their country. Even Lu Yuan was astonished by this. What surprised him wasn¡¯t that Ning Country suddenly had four additional Grandmasters. After all, with Ziyun Tao¡¯s aid, it wouldn¡¯t be surprising for Ning Country to have four more Inborn Grandmasters, considering Feishuang Tao had also sent three guardian generals to Chu State all at once! What baffled Lu Yuan was that the four more Grandmasters in Ning Country were all cultivated by Ning Country itself. Yes, the four Inborn Grandmasters enfeoffed by Ning Country were all of noble lineage from the six surnames and seven clans of the aristocratic families in Linhai County, and they were true Ning Country descendants. Chapter 785 - Chapter 785: Chapter 341 Chain Reaction_2 Chapter 785: Chapter 341 Chain Reaction_2 This truly bewildered people. While the background of the Linhai County families was indeed profound, it still did not imply that they could endlessly churn out abundant rare resources. Take the Divine Blood Elixir, for instance. Even with thousands of years of accumulation, the six-named seven clans certainly had more than the typical Innate Sects. But more than a decade ago, the Ning Country had already cultivated two Innates ¡ª Yang Jing and Shangguan Ming. A few years ago, two more Innates were cultivated. In just over a decade, Ning Country had cultivated four Innates. Based on the calculation of 500 elixirs per Innate, Ning Country had already consumed at least two thousand elixirs. One should know that a typical Innate Sect¡¯s supply of elixirs would only be a few hundred, or at most around a thousand, barely enough to maintain their legacy. Ning Country has consumed two thousand elixirs, this amount almost depletes the reserves of two or three Innate Sects. The cost is not small. Even with the background of the Linhai families, bringing out so many elixirs at once, even if gathered by the six-named seven clans, would nearly deplete their wealth. Yet, under these circumstances. After just a mere four to five years, Ning Country surprisingly brought out four Innate Grandmasters ¡ª another two thousand elixirs. Such grandeur had Lu Yuan involuntarily marveled. Although he was being just as generous at the moment, launching the real five Innate plan in a single breath. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? But the premise of this plan was the accumulation of the Chu state over twenty years. He exterminated many rebellious sects within the country, imposed pill taxes on many of those who complied, in addition to what was produced by his own cultivation of Spiritual Beasts. Externally, he conquered countless southwestern small states, plundering their national treasuries, accepting offerings from the White Phoenix Temple, and receiving aid from the Barbarians as well as Feishuang Tao. By following these two paths, and spending more than twenty years, he managed to scrape together enough elixirs to transform five Innate Grandmasters. Lu Yuan mainly relied on plundering the wealth of others to accomplish this grand gesture. However, there has been peace in the Ning Country for many years, with no wars heard of. They have no channel for plundering. Gathering the expenses for four Innate Grandmasters in such a short time, how could it not cause amazement? After all, based on outsiders¡¯ estimation, given the depth of the Linhai families, their remaining elixir reserves could at most only cultivate one Innate Grandmaster. This was already the limit. But now three more people have been added. Where did these Immortals get their transformation elixirs from, then it goes without saying. ¡°The Ziyun is indeed the top Immortal Sect in Yangzhou, the depth is really profound!¡± When Lu Yuan heard the news, he couldn¡¯t help but exclaim. He had once marveled at the magnificence of the one thousand elixirs that Feishuang Tao gave to the Chu state. But now seeing Ziyun providing Ning Country with fifteen hundred elixirs, Lu Yuan felt a touch of sourness in his heart, he couldn¡¯t help but give a shout to the big hand. No wonder Ning Country looked down on Feishuang Tao. Think about it. Just by this wealth, Ziyun surpasses many others. With such a thick leg to hold on to, why bother clutching another smaller one? However, though he was somewhat envious of Ning Country¡¯s luck, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t have too much complaint about it. While his Feishuang Tao doesn¡¯t have the resources compared to Ziyun, no matter what, they are also an Immortal Sect. Compared to those unwanted small countries, Chu had the luck of having an Immortal Sect¡¯s support, just like other tyrannical countries. It was indeed a blessing from the heavens. Thanks to the assistance of Feishuang Tao, Chu Country could cultivate two more Innates and get three Law-Enforcing Gods. In this way, it is equivalent to having five more Innate Combat Powers. You must know that originally, the Chu state had only six people at the Innate level, including Lu Yuan¡¯s two Avatars. Now there are five more, which can be described as doubling. With such benefits, what else could one complain about? Mind you, although Ning Country has four more Innates, counting these four, the number of Grandmasters has barely broken ten. After Chu Country gained the Spiritual woman and the three national protecting divine generals, it also had ten Innate Grandmasters. This was no less than Ning Country. What is worrying is that the Innate Grandmasters that Ning Country has exposed now, are all from the direct lineage of the Ninghai Family. The aid from Ziyun has not been revealed yet. With Ziyun¡¯s depth, if they too, like Feishuang Tao, directly send out the sect¡¯s Law-Enforcing God Generals to join the Ning Country camp. That will undoubtedly greatly enhance Ning Country¡¯s Innate reserves, creating a huge advantage in the number of Grandmasters over Chu Country. This will undoubtedly affect the balance. Indeed. Luyuan¡¯s worry quickly turned into reality. ¡­ On the tenth day of the second month of Shenwu Year ten. The atmosphere of New Year had just faded away, and as the ice and snow melted away, people freed themselves from the cold winter and began a new year of production and management. Just at this time. With the migration of a large number of people from Feishuang, the power used to cover it was gradually withdrawn. Ning Country finally realized that they were unaware that the second largest Immortal Sect in their country had¡­ Betrayed! And the object of the betrayal turns out to be their enemy ¡ª Chu Country. Now, almost all of Feishuang¡¯s people have withdrawn to Chu Country¡¯s territory, they have even joined Chu Country¡¯s court. This news was like a thunderbolt, which immediately shocked the entire Ning Country. Then when they came to their senses, the furious Shen Qiu ordered to intercept and arrest the people of Feishuang. But everything was already too late. Feishuang resides in Miluo Mountain which is now deserted, there is not a soul on the mountain. The officials sent for investigation found nothing after a search. Apart from catching some believers who were relatively close to Feishuang at the foot of the mountain and severely punishing them to vent their anger, and directly smashing many Taoist temples of Feishuang, not a single hair was found. Chapter 786 - Chapter 786: Chapter 341 Chain Reaction_3 Chapter 786: Chapter 341 Chain Reaction_3 Even the brutal acts of these officials and soldiers had enraged many people from Guangling Prefecture who believe in Feishuang Tao, leading to many tragedies. For a time, the entire Guangling Prefecture was in turmoil, and the situation was unstable. In response, Shen Qiu had no choice but to deploy troops in different places to suppress the civilian uprisings and maintain the situation in Guangling. However, compared to the entire rebellion of Feishuang Tao, some civilian uprisings were actually insignificant. No matter how many ordinary people gathered, they couldn¡¯t resist the sharp weapons of Ning Country¡¯s elite army nor stir any waves. But if the cultivators of Feishuang Tao and the foundations it has accumulated over thousands of years were fully utilized, the resulting storm could destroy a powerful country. And now, this power was in the hands of Chu State. Upon understanding this, Shen Qiu and the Coastal Aristocratic Family couldn¡¯t help but panic. Then, like in the story of the Journey to the West, Shen Qiu immediately dispatched a messenger, rushing to Tianluo Mountain to seek help from Ziyun Tao. Only an Immortal Sect could deal with another Immortal Sect. Since Feishuang Tao, the second Immortal Sect of Yangzhou, had defected, they naturally had to ask the original first Immortal Sect to deal with them. After receiving the news from Ning Country, Ziyun Tao finally realized that Feishuang Tao had secretly done such a major move behind their backs. The hegemony of Yangzhou was related to the continuation and prosperity of Ziyun Tao¡¯s Dao Inheritance in the future, which was absolutely not to be lost. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? Therefore, after receiving the help request from Jinling, the Dao master of Ziyun Tao made a decisive decision, directly dispatching four Guardian Deities from the sect to go downhill and serve in Jinling. They also sent people to Baling to investigate the truth of Feishuang Tao, and their sect began to make corresponding preparations. Feishuang and Ziyun, the two old acquaintances, finally went to opposite sides in the struggle for the Dao Inheritance in the future. So. After receiving help from Ziyun Tao, Shen Qiu, who was relieved and overjoyed, immediately realized that this was an opportunity to greatly boost the prestige of Ning Country. He immediately ordered a grand ceremony to confer Martial Marquis titles on the four Guardian Deities of Ziyun Tao. The time was set for the tenth day of the second month of this year. Perhaps it was because of the defection of Feishuang Tao that Shen Qiu and the Coastal Aristocratic Families were stimulated. Or perhaps it was because Chu State had taken Hanzhong and continued to expand its army, putting great pressure on them. Out of self-preservation, Ning Country, which had just expanded its army by 150,000 soldiers last year, issued another order to expand its troops. Shen Qiu ordered Shangguan Ming to recruit 100,000 soldiers in Yuzhang Prefecture, and then train them at the Pengli Marsh big camp. By now, including these 100,000 New Army, as well as the 150,000 New Army recruited last year, and the 50,000 naval forces stationed in Pengli Marsh, a total of 300,000 Ning Army had been stationed in Pengli Big Camp. In addition, 100,000 Ning soldiers were stationed on the border between Yuzhang Prefecture and Chu State. In the entire Yuzhang Prefecture, including the local prefecture and county soldiers, the size of the Ning Army had reached more than 400,000, accounting for half of the national forces. It can be said. With so many troops stationed here, as long as Shen Qiu gave the order, a war between nations could be triggered instantly. Moreover, after receiving help from Ziyun Tao, the number of Inborn Grandmasters in Ning Country had reached an astonishing 14 people. Excluding the border defense needs of various places, Ning Country could always deploy ten Inborn Grandmasters for battle at any time. The threat of more than 400,000 enemy soldiers on the border, coupled with over ten Inborn Grandmasters, was such a huge force that even Lu Yuan felt enormous pressure. Although he was already one of the top figures in the world today, he would still get a headache when facing ten Inborn Grandmasters all at once. It¡¯s not that he couldn¡¯t win. In fact, facing ten opponents alone, Lu Yuan had pressure in his heart, but nothing he couldn¡¯t overcome. No matter if it was a war of attrition or a joint attack, he was confident that even if he couldn¡¯t win, he could still retreat safely. Furthermore, he had a considerable chance of defeating and annihilating his opponents. However, just because he could handle it doesn¡¯t mean his teammates could. Ning Country could send several people to hold back Lu Yuan, and then use their numerical advantage to break through Chu State from several fronts. Although in Chu State, besides Lu Yuan, Inborn Grandmasters such as Lan Cai¡¯er, Lingnu, Sun Siwen, and Han Hu could share some pressure, it wasn¡¯t impossible to deal with this threat from Ning Country. But this would undoubtedly lead to complications and add countless risks to the situation. If any mishap happened to Lan Cai¡¯er and the others in the battle, it would be a thunderbolt from the blue and a severe blow to both Lu Yuan and Chu State. So, with these concerns in mind, Lu Yuan had to be cautious in dealing with the threat of Ning Country. As a result, besides ordering Lan Cai¡¯er and the others to be on their guard against assassins and strengthening the military defenses in Dongting Prefecture¡­ Lu Yuan had to temporarily bear some risks, letting the three affiliated countries in the southwest withdraw 100,000 troops, and led by Li Xiong, the Duke of Kunhai, bringing the troops to the front line of Dongting Prefecture. With this force joining, Chu State¡¯s troops in the Dongting area would reach over 300,000. The number of Inborn Grandmasters would also increase to six, including Lu Yuan, who was an exceptionally powerful fighter. Such being the case, it would be enough to handle the immense pressure put on them by Ning Country¡¯s defense. After making these arrangements, Lu Yuan finally breathed a sigh of relief. However, he hadn¡¯t completely relaxed yet. Ning Country¡¯s actions served as a warning to him. If Ning Country had received the funding from Ziyun Tao and could achieve such a surge in power¡­ It would be hard to say that Zhou Country in the north wouldn¡¯t also have the same experience. Now that Chu State had offended them and seized Hanzhong Prefecture from Zhou Country, the latter must be immensely resentful and might even seek revenge. Although considering the complex situation facing Zhou Country, with three battlefields opening nearby, it required heavy troops and experts stationed in each to maintain the situation. In this case, of course, they wouldn¡¯t be able to follow Ning Country¡¯s example and gather the full strength of the nation to target Chu State. However, if Zhou Country couldn¡¯t swallow their pride and gritted their teeth to join forces, with the help of the Zhou Country¡¯s Immortal Sect, Yuchan Tao, they might be able to pull out five or six Inborn Grandmasters. With such a force, combined with an army of 100,000 to 200,000 soldiers, depending on Huang Xuan¡¯s formidable power alone might not be enough to cope. Fortunately, Qingyunzi was still stationed there, and there were still 60,000 Chu State troops stationed in the area, along with 100,000 new troops and 30,000 county soldiers being trained in Hanzhong. All of this should be enough to cope with their enemies. However, in this case, the 60,000 troops and Qingyunzi would be temporarily stuck in Hanzhong Prefecture and unable to return to Dongting. Lu Yuan felt helpless about this. Plans could never catch up with changes. The world wouldn¡¯t revolve around him; countless unforeseen situations would always arise. Ning Country and Zhou Country wouldn¡¯t just sit and watch Chu State expand, foolishly waiting for their enemy to grow before causing trouble for themselves. It was only natural to take action beforehand and strangle their enemies before they could grow stronger. Such was the case now. Therefore, all he could do was send thought messages to Huang Xuan and Qingyunzi, warning them to be on their guard against the counterattacks that Zhou Country might launch after the beginning of spring. Only after resolving Zhou Country¡¯s troubles could Chu State bring Qingyunzi and the 60,000 troops back to the south. As for the Southern Expedition to Lingnan, it would have to wait until the threats from Zhou and Ning Countries were eliminated. The plans were suddenly disrupted, illustrating the uncertainty of the world indeed. Chapter 787 - Chapter 787: Chapter 342: The Jade Toads Predicament Chapter 787: Chapter 342: The Jade Toad¡¯s Predicament The northern lands, as they entered into March, had seen the complete thawing of ice and snow, and everything had entered the rejuvenating season. At this time from Zhou Country, disturbances finally began to arise. In the tenth year of Chu Shenwu, in the early days of March, in the seventh year of Zhou Xianqing, Emperor Zhou reviewed the various armies outside the city. Fifty thousand forbidden troops of the capital performed war maneuvers, the sounds of battle incessantly roared outside of the Chang¡¯an City for several days. Five days later, Emperor Zhou greatly awarded the brave warriors of the military exercises and then returned to the palace, issuing an order to recruit a hundred and fifty thousand additional troops from all over Guannei, intended to bolster the defense of the capital. Because in recent years, wars had frequently occurred within Zhou Country. To supply the wars, it was necessary to increase taxes within the country, resulting in the collection of increased funds and grain. Simultaneously, the country was affected by a cold disaster, causing a considerable reduction in grain yield. Under the dual pressures of heavy taxation and natural disasters, the people of Zhou Country grew poorer by the day. Cases of individuals unable to eat enough were visible everywhere. Instances of parents selling their children grew increasingly common. For the lower-class common folk, maintaining even two meals in a day was a serious challenge, let alone three. Many hadn¡¯t tasted meat in years, a full stomach was a rarity throughout the year, and they lived a life filled with hardship. Thus, when the news of recruitment spread, countless robust men from Guannei enrolled, with soldiers continually joining from every corner. This was not because they held any particular loyalty towards the court. The reason for the large number of enlistees was simple: enrolling in the army assured them full meals and a decent military salary, which would somewhat improve the life of their family. This was enough to make the currently famine-stricken and impoverished population of Zhou people risk their lives. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Thus, within half a month of the recruitment announcement, the require number of one hundred and fifty thousand was instantly filled. Countless individuals, who had been too late, wailed in despair, beating their chests and stamping their feet. Some, who couldn¡¯t take it, even chose to end their lives, simply because they didn¡¯t want to continue living in this bleak world. The extent of the exploitation of the people by Zhou Country was thereby obvious. To sustain an army of over two million with a populace of twenty million was no easy task. However, only after about six or seven years, Zhou Country¡¯s national strength and population had been exploited to their limits, hidden signs of an impending downfall of the dynasty were evident. If this indiscriminate exploitation of population continues, within a few years, it might implode, leading to its downfall. However, even if it were to collapse, at the earliest, it would take several years. Up until this point, under the ultimate exploitation of the population, the current Zhou Country still seemed prosperous with an awe-inspiring military prowess. Four hundred thousand troops were stationed in the eastern provinces of Heyang, three hundred thousand in the northern Shuofang, four hundred thousand in the western Helong of the Western Jin, and today, two hundred thousand troops have been recruited within the region of Jingji. All over the country, with the ready reserve of thirteen hundred thousand troops, it was second only to the neighbouring Liang Country among the Nine Provinces. In addition, there were up to ten million civilian workers stationed in various provinces along the border. One could say that now, every household in Zhou Country has contributed to the army, and every family has joined the military. With the current foundation of Zhou Country¡¯s seven provinces and sixty-three prefectures, a registered population of seventeen million, supporting an army of this size has almost reached its limit. For this reason, Zhou Country holds the second-most army prestige among the countries, recognized by the people of the Nine Provinces as one of the top three major countries in the world. At this time, this domineering country was shamelessly betrayed by the Chu State, seizing the Hanzhong jurisdiction during the gap in the grain trade. Such a disgrace could not be swallowed. Thus, once the recruitment of the internal troops had begun, all the surrounding countries upon receiving the news believed that it was preparing to dispatch troops to Hanzhong, seeking to recover its honor from the Chu State. Similarly, when the news reached Baling, after verifying the confirmed intelligence, Lu Yuan believed the same. Instantly, he became vigilant. Although the twenty-thousand strong Zhou army wasn¡¯t large, there wasn¡¯t much difference between these recruits and the soldiers at Hanzhong, and most of them were new soldiers, so there was no need to worry too much. But it¡¯s hard to guess how many Inborn experts Zhou Country would dispatch. Originally, nurtured by their world court themselves and recruiting masters from the Jianghu, Zhou Country had all eight of the Pillar States in the eight directions including east, west, south, and north. In addition to this, two new upper and lower Pillar Country Grand Generals have been added, directly creating a total of ten Pillar States. However, in this Northern Expedition, Chu had successfully captured Hanzhong, and Qingyunzi had directly felled Eastfang Wuyun, the Southern Pillar State Grand General, on the battlefield, reducing one Inborn expert. Therefore, currently the number of Inborn Pillar States of Zhou Country has fallen from ten to nine, reducing to a single digit. In the two provinces of Heyang in the eastern border of Zhou Country, two Pillar States were stationed to guard against Liang Country. There were also two Pillar States in the northern Shuofang provinces guarding against Wei Country. On the western front of the Helong battle line, even more, was gathered a team led by He Basheng with four Inborns, to deal with the annual invasions of the Barbarians. The remaining two Inborn statues were each stationed in the national capital Chang¡¯an and Hanzhong jurisdiction. Now that Dongfang Wuyun at Hanzhong jurisdiction had died, the northern, eastern, and western war fronts of Zhou Country all had strong enemies, so the Inborn Grandmasters there could not be mobilized. The same goes for the Inborn stationed at the national capital, Chang¡¯an. How could there be no strong individual guarding the imperial city, the important region of Jingji? The Inborn stationed here also could not be moved. So theoretically speaking, Zhou Country, from the surface at least, actually couldn¡¯t spare an Inborn Grandmaster to lead the army. As known to all. Even for those small countries with half a jurisdiction, it was understood that no army should march without an Inborn. Without an Inborn Grandmaster commanding it, it was impossible to intimidate a strong enemy or protect the Entire Army. So, lacking an Inborn Grandmaster to lead the soldiers, Zhou Country naturally couldn¡¯t march southward and Hanzhong would naturally remain worry-free. Chapter 788 - Chapter 788: Chapter 342: The Jade Toads Predicament_2 Chapter 788: Chapter 342: The Jade Toad¡¯s Predicament_2 However, things were not so simple. The nine Inborn experts of Zhou Country only represented the strength of Zhou Country itself. The power of the Jade Toad Tao, an Immortal Sect outside Zhou Country, was not included. Jade Toad Tao could support Zhou Country with several Inborn experts at any time, helping them sustain the Southern Expedition Army. In this case, even if Zhou Country could not summon Inborn Grandmasters to lead the army, with Jade Toad Tao¡¯s help, they could still launch the Southern Expedition. The threat posed by an Immortal Sect could be seen from Ziyun Tao¡¯s case. A single sect had easily dispatched four Inborn experts, a truly domineering display of power. Ziyun Tao, however, had to share Yangzhou with Feishuang Tao, not completely controlling the resources of the State. On the other hand, Jade Toad Tao was the only Immortal Sect in Yong State, directly unifying the entirety of the Immortal Cultivation World in Yong State. From this perspective, both in terms of reason and sentiment, Jade Toad Tao¡¯s strength and foundation should be stronger than Ziyun Tao¡¯s. Based on this deduction, if they support Zhou Country, the benefits and Inborn Grandmasters they send should naturally be more. Thinking about Jade Toad Tao possibly sending four or even more Inborn experts to join Zhou Country, and then also attacking Chu State, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t sleep at night. It is too unsettling to be targeted by an Immortal Sect. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? So, in order to settle his doubts and also for peace of mind, Lu Yuan went to Mount Tianshu to meet Dao master Mo Li of Feishuang Tao personally. ¡­ After a winter of emergency construction and a large expenditure of silver tales, the development of Tianshu Mountain¡¯s sect was progressing rapidly. In just four months, three palaces, twelve towers, and more than a hundred other buildings had been established, presenting the embryonic form of an Immortal Sect¡¯s base. And it didn¡¯t stop there. All over Tianshu Mountain, civilian workers and craftsmen could be seen busily coming and going, building more palaces, towers, and pavilions under the direction of the sect¡¯s daoists. Additionally, beautiful gardens, stone paths, and jade steps were quickly extending throughout the mountain. Seeing such a prosperous scene, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel slightly moved. Although he had learned about the situation on Tianshu Mountain from the Imperial City Division¡¯s reports, he was not completely unfamiliar with the place. However, descriptions on paper were ultimately shallow and could not compare to what one saw with their own eyes. Now, seeing it for himself, he realized how deep the foundation of Feishuang Tao was. In just four months, they had built up a sect¡¯s image, showcasing a prosperous atmosphere. It was hard to imagine what the scene would be like once they were fully settled here. ¡®Perhaps in the future, the area around Dongting Lake near Tianshu Mountain will be just like Guangling¡¯s Miluo Mountain, turning half of the prefecture into their dojo and attracting millions of devotees,¡¯ Lu Yuan thought. He had been to the vicinity of Tianluo Mountain and knew very well the kind of status Ziyun Tao had to the north of Yuzhang Prefecture. Now, within Chu State, Feishuang Tao had not only established an Immortal Sect but also been granted the status of the state religion. If they were allowed to develop for decades or even centuries, Feishuang Tao in Dongting Prefecture would inevitably rise up and become uncontrollable. At that time, it would be difficult to determine which authority, imperial or religious, the people of Dongting would follow. On thinking of this possibility, as a king, Lu Yuan instinctively felt a sense of wariness and hostility. However, Feishuang Tao now had a good relationship with Chu State, and there was no need to worry about them threatening the royal power at this time. They still had a long way to go before they could fully develop their power. So, for now, this concern could be put aside and not dealt with urgently. With this in mind, Lu Yuan composed himself, waiting for Feishuang Tao¡¯s welcoming party at the doorway to Tianshu Mountain. When the Feishuang Taoists learned of King Chu¡¯s arrival, they were shocked, and Mo Li quickly came down the mountain to greet Lu Yuan at the Mountain Gate himself. Along the way, Mo Li introduced the beautiful scenery and fascinating details of the mountain as if he were a local, not at all hesitant or unfamiliar. It showed that in just a few months, Feishuang Tao had thoroughly researched Tianshu Mountain. Lu Yuan occasionally nodded and chimed in with a few words, his precaution towards Feishuang Tao growing further in his heart. Upon reaching the summit and taking their seats in the palace, Lu Yuan finally asked about the purpose of this visit. ¡°May I ask Fellow Daoist, how is the strength of Jade Toad Tao in Yong State, and how many Dharmapala deities can they dispatch if they support Zhou Country?¡± Upon hearing these words, Mo Li was slightly startled but then understood the reason for Lu Yuan¡¯s visit after recalling the recent news from the north. He laughed, ¡°It seems that Fellow Daoist is worried about the situation in Hanzhong, fearing that Jade Toad Tao will ruin his plans for the newly captured territory.¡± Lu Yuan nodded and did not deny it: ¡°Hanzhong is crucial to the stability of our Great Chu¡¯s northern border. The success or failure of this land will greatly affect the fate of our nation. Although we have stationed heavy troops in Hanzhong, Jade Toad Tao, with the backing of an entire state¡¯s Immortal Sect, is a formidable force that should not be underestimated. If we do not thoroughly investigate them and be aware of their possible moves, there will be no peace of mind while waiting for them to attack without any preparation,¡± Lu Yuan said. Mo Li laughed after hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s concerns, ¡°It seems that Fellow Daoist has no idea about the strength division of our Immortal Sects.¡± After laughing, noticing Lu Yuan¡¯s confusion, he explained: ¡°Fellow Daoist may not know that the strength of our Immortal Sects has never been determined by the size of their territories since ancient times. Chapter 789 - Chapter 789: Chapter 342: The Jade Toads Predicament_3 Chapter 789: Chapter 342: The Jade Toad¡¯s Predicament_3 The size of the area a sect occupies indeed does affect the strength of a sect to some extent, but the increase is minuscule. Perhaps occupying a whole state would only slightly increase a sect¡¯s strength, not affecting the overall situation. The main reason is the spiritual energy that is fundamental for cultivators like us. Fellow Daoist should know that for our generation of cultivators, in order to make progress in cultivation and break through realms, besides relying on our own comprehension and cultivation of Dao, the absorption of spiritual energy and transforming it into mana is of utmost importance, even the very foundation of the Immortal Method. Without spiritual energy, there can be no cultivation of techniques. Without cultivation of techniques, one cannot become immortal. Therefore, the amount, purity, and quality of spiritual energy are what truly determine the foundation of a cultivator and even a sect¡¯s prosperity. If there isn¡¯t enough spiritual energy, even if a sect occupies the entire Nine Provinces, it wouldn¡¯t be able to nurture a single cultivator. In that case, what¡¯s the use of having vast territories? The same logic applies. In this Age of Dharma Decline, if we cultivators want to cultivate, besides relying on encounters like Fellow Daoist relying on inheritances left by elders and absorbing the spiritual energy stored within the Storage Spirit Jade, the most orthodox mainstream approach is to cultivate within Cave World by channeling spiritual energy into our bodies. Therefore, although Yuchan Tao occupies the entire Yong State, leading the immortal cultivation world of Yong State, this is merely a prestigious title. Within the entire Yong State, apart from the Yuchan Tao sect, are there any other cultivators? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Although they are known as the leaders of the Yong State cultivation world, there are only cultivators from the Yuchan Tao sect in the Yong State cultivation world. It¡¯s merely self-entertainment. As for our Yangzhou region, we have Feishuang Tao and Ziyun Tao, which seems like the two of us share Yangzhou, not as impressive as Yuchan Tao unifying Yong State. However, both our families have their own Cave World to cultivate in, and relying on ourselves, we can continue our inheritance without any deficiencies compared to Yuchan Tao, can¡¯t we? In the conferences of the various sects in the Nine Provinces, isn¡¯t our Feishuang Tao sect on par with Yuchan Tao, both seated at the same level? How much stronger could they be than us? When Mo Li finished speaking, he smirked confidently, and there was not even a hint of modesty in his tone. Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan realized that he had been caught up in his own experience. After struggling for power in the secular world for too long, he had mistakenly applied the same criteria as those in the secular world who depended on the extent of territorial boundaries to judge a sect¡¯s strength, which led to a cognitive difference. At this moment, Mo Li¡¯s reminder helped him understand the difference between the two. Indeed. In the Immortal Cultivation World, it¡¯s not about having vast territory, but whether the spiritual energy one¡¯s sect occupies is abundant. In those fantasy novels he read in his previous life, those prominent sects had built their mountain gates on top of abundant spiritual veins, hadn¡¯t they? Although the Nine Provinces¡¯ Immortal Cultivation World where Lu Yuan resides doesn¡¯t have the concept of spiritual veins, it is vastly different from the cultivation system mentioned in the original novels. Regardless of the differences, some fundamental aspects of the Great Dao are interconnected. Aren¡¯t those spiritual veins in the novels analogous to the Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens in the Nine Provinces? It¡¯s just that those Cavern Heavens and Blessed Lands have been exhausted and are no longer able to produce spiritual energy, rendering them as ordinary realms that cannot support an immortal¡¯s dwelling. Following this logic, It¡¯s only because there¡¯s just one Yuchan Tao sect in Yong State that they can only support one sect, indicating that Yong State is impoverished, having only one remaining spiritual vein and the rest unsuitable for use. On the contrary, Yangzhou has two Cave Worlds at Tianluo Mountain and Miluo Mountain, both possessing spiritual veins and supporting two sects. Just looking at this aspect, Yangzhou¡¯s foundation is much stronger than that of Yong State. Yuchan Tao¡¯s dominance in Yong State does not prove anything. The Snow Plains Nomads occupy the entire Snowy Wilderness, don¡¯t they? However, even though they possess tens of thousands of miles of land, is their national strength still not comparable to the Zhou Country with only about thirty to forty thousand miles? What¡¯s the difference between them? Isn¡¯t it the usability of the land? Yuchan Tao is just looking intimidating, but it might not actually be that strong. After Lu Yuan figured this out, he felt much more relaxed. However, he didn¡¯t completely let go of his concerns and continued with his original question: ¡°Thanks to Fellow Daoist for enlightening me. I understand now. However, is there any way to clarify the true strength of Yuchan Tao?¡± Seeing that Lu Yuan had awakened to the reality, Mo Li smiled satisfactorily. After hearing his continued inquiry, he pondered for a moment and answered: ¡°As for the strength of Yuchan Tao¡­ It¡¯s roughly on par with our Feishuang Tao sect, making it difficult to determine who is superior. Moreover, the situation that Yuchan Tao faces is actually much more complicated than that of our Feishuang Tao. That¡¯s because the location of Yuchan Tao¡¯s mountain gate ¨C Jade Hua Mountain ¨C is within Henan County of Zhou Country. That¡¯s right, Jade Hua Mountain is in the Central State, and no matter which corner of the world is affected by a heavenly catastrophe in the future, it won¡¯t affect them. They don¡¯t have to force their way into the Central State like our Feishuang Tao and Ziyun Tao sects, in order to preserve their sect and secure territory for their Dao inheritance. They already have a foundation in Central State. Moreover, Henan County borders the country of Liang, and Jade Hua Mountain is located between the two countries of Zhou and Liang, having connections to both and having escape routes to both the east and the west. Compared to the Zhou Country, which has Central State foundations in only two counties and is surrounded by enemies on all sides, Yuchan Tao occupying the entire Qing State, already dominating the world now, and having an indisputable foundation for the future, is undoubtedly a better choice than the turbulent Zhou Country. So, even if they have to support Zhou Country due to the location of their mountain gate, Yuchan Tao won¡¯t give their all to help them, making some compromises at best. But to think that they would go all out and fully support one side is asking too much. Remember, to the east of Henan County is Liang Country¡¯s Xingyang County, and to the north is Zhao Country¡¯s He Nei County, situated at the intersection of the three nations, and anyone could attack them in the future. They are right at the center of the whirlpool. The location of Jade Hua Mountain is both a blessing and a curse for Yuchan Tao. Before the surrounding three countries have determined a winner, they will never devote themselves to only one country. Having connections on both sides, splitting their allegiance, and only then can they find their way out. Zhou Country¡¯s current show of force with its two hundred thousand strong army might sound intimidating, but it¡¯s merely a bluff. Fellow Daoist, you have your heavy forces stationed in Hanzhong and have the protection of two True Persons of the State. With such strength, Zhou people will dare not attack. There¡¯s no need for concern.¡± Mo Li thoroughly analyzed the situation and finally drew a conclusion. Upon hearing his perspective, Lu Yuan also went over the current situation in his mind and couldn¡¯t help but nod in agreement. At first glance, the situation of Yuchan Tao appears favorable. However, like Zhou Country, they have a powerful military presence, but they are surrounded by enemies on all sides. Their ability to maintain the current state of affairs is nothing more than the result of keeping an impoverished and war-torn appearance. They only look intimidating on the surface, but they are actually very vulnerable. The threat of this sect can indeed be ignored. So, he couldn¡¯t help but offer a bow to Mo Li: ¡°Thank you, Fellow Daoist, for your clarification. Having heard Fellow Daoist¡¯s words, there¡¯s no need to worry about the northern part of Zhou Country anymore.¡± Afterward, the two did not continue discussing matters of the country. With his mind at ease, Lu Yuan took the opportunity to discuss Dao Law with Mo Li. The last batch of cultivators from the Nine Provinces¡¯ immortal sects would soon head to Beiming Youdu for the worldwide Ascension. For Lu Yuan, this is almost the last opportunity to mingle with fellow Daoists; naturally, he would cherish it. If he misses this chance, he will never be able to find someone to discuss the Dao with in the future. Later, the King of Chu stayed in Mount Tianshu and discussed Dao with the dao master of Feishuang Tao for ten days before returning to the capital. Chapter 790 - Chapter 790: Chapter 343: Tearing Off the Disguise Chapter 790: Chapter 343: Tearing Off the Disguise After understanding the truth about Yuchan Tao and having a discussion with Mo Li, Lu Yuan reluctantly returned to Baling City. As a Dao master, Mo Li¡¯s cultivation level was only at the stage of condensing one Qi, which was even somewhat inferior to Lu Yuan¡¯s. After all, Lu Yuan cultivated the Taiping Dao Book, which allowed him to absorb Heavenly Qi. Moreover, with the rapid progress of Qi Luck, in fact, Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation level had already far surpassed Mo Li¡¯s, and it was not far from condensing two Qi. However, cultivation is cultivation, realm is realm, magical power is magical power, and spells are spells. Although Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation was high, in terms of realm, he was clearly inferior to Mo Li, who had been cultivating for over a hundred years. The other party¡¯s cultivation level was low, but after studying Dao Law and reflecting on various Daoist books and scriptures for over a hundred years, the state of mind he cultivated was much stronger than that of Lu Yuan. Furthermore, Feishuang Tao was a major sect, with numerous magical powers and divine powers stored in its vast collection, like stars in the sky, too numerous to count. In Lu Yuan¡¯s possession, there were only the Taiping Dao Book and a few dozen spells recorded in the Five Thunder Books. Although many of them were powerful, from a certain perspective, they were still somewhat skewed and incomplete. Take celestial spells, for example. In the Taiping Dao Book, at the Three Qi Realm, there is a Wind Calling Technique that can summon strong winds. At the Four Qi Realm, there is a Rain Calling Technique that can make rain fall from the sky. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? At the Five Qi Towards Primordial Realm, the combination of wind and rain can form divine powers, which can change the color of heaven and earth, causing storms with just a thought. In the Five Thunder Books, there is also the Heavenly Thunder Technique, which can summon heavenly thunder to help the caster fight against enemies. However, all these spells and divine powers only encompass three celestial phenomena: wind, rain, and thunder. Although they are powerful, they are not comprehensive. In contrast, Feishuang Tao has similar celestial spells that not only include wind, rain, and thunder, but also snow, ice, light, fog¡­ and other celestial phenomena. Almost every celestial phenomenon found in nature has a corresponding spell in Feishuang Tao, differing only in the power they possess. Through tens of thousands of years of inheritance and the efforts of more than a hundred generations of disciples, Feishuang Tao¡¯s inheritance has been refined to perfection, without any obvious shortcomings. In the face of certain dangerous situations, Lu Yuan might be limited by his own Dao Law and have difficulty breaking through and escaping danger. But if it were someone like Mo Li from a larger sect, their ancestors would have left behind various methods to deal with any dangerous situations and problems they may face. They could simply follow these methods and deploy the corresponding spells and divine powers, solving each problem one by one and thus escaping danger. This was the foundation of a large sect, and something Lu Yuan lacked as an independent cultivator from a small background. His discussion with Mo Li revolved around these topics. Through ten days of discussion, the Feishuang Tao master shared many insights and experiences from his own cultivation, greatly benefiting Lu Yuan, and allowed him to gain new perspectives on some Dao Laws in the Taiping Dao Book, making significant progress. In the future, when he cultivated again, he had confidence that it would be much easier and simpler. For this reason, Lu Yuan was quite addicted to this debate and could not bear to think of its end. However, due to worldly constraints and numerous mundane matters entwining him, he did not have much free time to indulge his hobbies and had to leave with a heavy heart. Nevertheless, through this debate on Mount Tianshu and the previous one in Baling, Lu Yuan recognized the gap between himself and those disciples from larger sects. This kind of profound foundation could not be bridged by merely enhancing his own cultivation through cheating with the Taiping Dao Book. This made him resolute in his decision that, after the major Immortal Sects ascended, he would unify the Nine Provinces and then order the collection of all books and scriptures, divine powers, and techniques for his own perusal. By then, having learned and mastered all the books and scriptures from the ancient times, Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation realm would be refined to an unimaginable degree. He would certainly reach a state that had never been achieved before and would likely be unparalleled for a long time to come. In the future, if he were to ascend to the Immortal Realm, relying on this profound foundation, he would be able to rapidly elevate his own realm to an incomprehensible level. Of course, All these were just ideas, and it was not yet the time for action. If he were to attempt to collect the Dao Law scriptures of various Immortal Sects at this time, it would be tantamount to seeking their Dao Inheritance, forcing the cultivators of the Nine Provinces to fight him. Moreover, even after those Nine Provinces cultivators ascended, it would not be the right time to collect these divine powers and techniques for quite some time. That¡¯s because, although there would be no more cultivators in those sects at that time, there would still be Inborn Grandmasters relying on their past foundation. As long as these Inborn Grandmasters still existed, Lu Yuan could not forcefully take their foundation. The real opportunity to collect these Dao techniques and divine powers would come when the Age of Dharma Decline arrived, the exotic beasts of the Divine Continent died out, and it became impossible to produce Divine Blood Elixirs and Inborn Grandmasters. This day was not far off. Soon, the cultivators of the Nine Provinces would activate the Beiming Youdu array, drawing the last remaining active spiritual energy from between Heaven and Earth to sustain it. By then, the active spiritual energy that could be used by cultivators would be completely depleted, and the last remaining Divine Blood Variants would lose the spiritual energy they needed to survive. Without spiritual energy to absorb, they would lose their living environment, and the remaining Divine Blood Variants would die of starvation and lack of spiritual energy. That is to say, The Divine Blood Variants that are still alive today may not survive for more than a few decades before they slowly age and die. At that time, all people in the world will lose access to the Divine Blood Elixir that martial artists rely on for their cultivation and be cut off from attaining Inborn powers. Chapter 791 - Chapter 791: Chapter 343: Tearing Off the Disguise_2 Chapter 791: Chapter 343: Tearing Off the Disguise_2 By then, the Inborn would disappear, turning into legends. In the world, divine powers would be concealed, and common people could at most reach the Acquired First-Class realm. While this realm is powerful, it could only withstand a thousand-strong army at most, and be deeply in sorrow under a besieging army and powerful bows and crossbows. Even because of the decline in later times, it might be challenging to achieve the First-Class realm. Without elixirs¡¯ help, even a genius with excellent innate talent would take at least two years to open a single meridian. To break through the First-Class realm, one must open twelve main meridians, which adds up to twenty-four years. And that¡¯s under the condition that martial artists practice day and night, never slacking off. However, if they hustle around, neglect their martial arts skills, and be distracted by external affairs, This minimum period of twenty-four years would be infinitely magnified, and it might take thirty or forty years to break through the First-Class realm. By then, First-Class masters might be like current Inborn Grandmasters, standing at the pinnacle of Jianghu, with few able to reach them. In such a situation, the so-called cultivation of immortality and Qi would naturally be considered false by the world. Immortals recorded in various classics would also be considered as fabricated myths, spread by hearsay and not worth believing. Descendants of the Immortal Sects might secretly wonder if their ancestors truly possessed immortal abilities or if later generations exaggerated and praised a so-called ¡®immortal.¡¯ Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? At that time, it will be Lu Yuan¡¯s chance to collect these Dao Laws. Then, with his strength, he would have enough power to attack the highest First-Class martial artists in Jianghu from a lower dimension. Unrivalled in the world, it would be difficult for him to find an opponent. At that time, whether it¡¯s in the name of the imperial dynasty asking all the Daoist schools to pay homage to Daoist laws and divine powers, or directly robbing them, it¡¯d be a walk in the park. There¡¯s no doubt that this is an easy shortcut. The only drawback is that the arrival of the end times might take hundreds of years, requiring a long wait. But of all things, it¡¯s Lu Yuan who has the required longevity and time. He has enough patience to wait. After collecting the Dao books, he also has enough time to study, read and slowly master them. Time is on his side. ¡­ Returning to Baling, Lu Yuan continues to closely monitor the movements in Zhou Country. In Zhou Country, the newly recruited soldiers in the Guannei County were still training vigorously. Not far from Chang¡¯an, in the Lantian Camp, the sound of the golden drums echoed every day, and the shouts of the strong men shook the surrounding valleys. The reputedly warlike Great Zhou indeed lived up to its reputation. The nation was full of fierce and battle-eager people, unrivaled in bravery. Aside from endless drills for the soldiers, however, there seemed to be no unusual movements in Zhou Country¡¯s court. There were no signs of sending out troops, nor plans for ceasing hostilities. Spies from both the Honglu Temple and Imperial Security Agency couldn¡¯t find any clues. The Zhou people seemed to have forgotten the Chu State, not revealing any attitude towards them, making everything seem shrouded in mystery. Lu Yuan and his officials discussed this for a long time but couldn¡¯t guess the Zhou people¡¯s intentions. The more he guessed, the more irritated he got. Finally, he stopped guessing and waiting for the Zhou people¡¯s actions. Constant passive waiting always seemed reactive. Qingyunzi and the tens of thousands of Forbidden Army in the Northern Expedition couldn¡¯t be held in Hanzhong indefinitely. The upcoming Southern Expedition required the participation of this Avatar and these elite troops; Chu couldn¡¯t afford to spend time playing guessing games with Zhou. So, Lu Yuan directly ordered Huang Xuan to execute the Helong strategy established last year according to plan. He sent troops to contact the Snow Plains Nomads, asking them to send troops in coordination. Then, Hanzhong dispatched tens of thousands of soldiers to attack Longxi County in Zhou Country, assisting the Barbarians and taking the opportunity to capture local people to strengthen their country. Isn¡¯t Zhou Country not taking any action? Isn¡¯t it deliberately creating confusion? If you won¡¯t move, I will. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t believe that with his great army advancing towards Helong and facing the threatening heavy troops, the Zhou people could still calmly train their soldiers and act as if nothing happened. As for the defense of Hanzhong after Huang Xuan¡¯s departure, it could only be temporarily entrusted to Qingyunzi. With a dangerous pass standing in the Xiegu Gorge on the border between Hanzhong County and Guan Nei County of Zhou Country, as long as there were tens of thousands of elite troops stationed there under Qingyunzi¡¯s command, Even if the newly trained 200,000-strong army of Zhou sent troops southward, they could only sigh and feel helpless outside the Pass. At that time, whether Zhou people would send troops to help Helong or come south to take back Hanzhong, Lu Yuan could test the other party¡¯s bottom line and plot their moves, forcing them to expose their weaknesses. Once the other party exposed their flaws, Chu could naturally counter each move, dissolving each threat. He also wanted to see, Whether the subtle relationship between Yuchan Tao and Zhou Country, as mentioned before by Mo Li, was true or not. Everything will depend on this time. So on the third day of the fourth month in the tenth year of Shenwu, the Governor of Chu¡¯s western three provinces and Protector of the Nation ¨C True Person Huang Xuan, officially swore in Nanzheng, Hanzhong County, and then deployed 60,000 troops headed towards Longxi through Yangping Pass, crossing the Longshan trails and attacking Longxi. Chu¡¯s move once again caught Zhou off guard. No one expected that while the 200,000 Zhou army was stationed in Guannei County, training day and night, preparing to attack Hanzhong at any time, Chu¡¯s army in Hanzhong would dare to ignore the risks and still send troops to Longxi. What¡¯s more fatal is, In late March, Snow Plain Barbarians gathered another 400,000 troops, launching another Spring Raid this year. At this time, the 400,000 Zhou troops in the two counties of Helong had most of their energy focused on these invading Barbarians. Chapter 792 - Chapter 792: Chapter 343: Tearing Off the Disguise_3 Chapter 792: Chapter 343: Tearing Off the Disguise_3 As for the hinterland at the rear, connected only to Hanzhong County by a small path, there were not many defenses. Only at the other end of Yangguan Mountain Road, in a place called Linguan Pass, ten thousand elite soldiers were stationed to guard against the threat from Hanzhong. But how could these mere ten thousand soldiers and horses possibly be opponents for the sixty thousand elite troops led by Huang Xuan himself? Within just one day, under Huang Xuan¡¯s personal charge, this military fortress was breached, and thousands of Zhou people were killed in the city, while the rest were captured. Then, the Chu army used Linguan Pass as a base, leaving ten thousand soldiers to guard it, and the remaining fifty thousand soldiers and horses were divided into five routes, roughly seizing territory in the surrounding prefectures and counties. Within just a few days, the five routes of soldiers and horses had attacked and captured thirteen county towns and two prefecture cities, occupying the vacuous hinterland of Longxi Prefecture. With the news spreading, there was an instant shock in the Helong region. He Basheng, who was commanding the troops at the time to resist the encirclement and annihilation of the invading barbarians, was so shocked that he almost fell from his horse. At this moment, his hundreds of thousands of troops were pressed at the front line, fighting wits and courage with the barbarians. Countless soldiers and horses were dragged down to the front line hundreds of miles away from the rear. In the urgent situation, he was unable to pull out many soldiers and horses to stabilize the rear. The key issue was. If the news of Chu people¡¯s deployment in his rear came to the barbarians. Those Snow Plains Nomads would definitely be greatly inspired. It wouldn¡¯t be as easy as it was in the past to give an overwhelming counter-attack to the opponents and let the barbarians retreat obediently. Perhaps the Snow Plains Nomads would continue to increase their troops, hold up their own front-line troops, and cooperate with Chu State¡¯s actions. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï After all, the current Chu State has married the spiritual woman of the barbarians, and both parties are allies, so it is only natural for them to cooperate with each other. Therefore, it was a foregone conclusion that the Chu army would contact the barbarians and coordinate their actions front and back. As a veteran of the battlefields, He Basheng had no luck in his heart. So he urgently withdrew fifty thousand troops and ordered his deputy, Grand General Sima Zhengde of the Western Pillar State, to lead the troops to the rear to contain Chu Army¡¯s actions and prevent them from expanding further into Longxi Prefecture. In addition, he urgently sent more messengers to report the news of Chu people¡¯s invasion to Chang¡¯an by horse, so that the court officials of Monarch and Ministers could make preparations and devise countermeasures as soon as possible. As for He Basheng himself, he seized the opportunity to lead his troops in quick and fierce attacks, hoping to defeat the barbarians as soon as possible so that they could retreat and repel the Chu State. However, his intentions were good, but how could everything go as he wished? Just as He Basheng had guessed, the Snow Plains Nomads, after receiving the Chu people¡¯s messenger and learning that the Chu State had already dispatched troops to Longxi Prefecture, the rear of Zhou State, and invaded Zhou people¡¯s vacant land. The various tribes of the Snow Plains cheered in unison. At the same time, they felt a great sense of worth and relief for the decision to marry their spiritual woman. You see. The spiritual woman had just married, and the Chu State had immediately responded by sending out a ¡°hundred thousand-strong army¡± to help them attack Zhou County¡¯s rear land, cutting off their adversary¡¯s retreat route. How sincere and friendly this was? There¡¯s no doubt that, faced with the alliance¡¯s proposal to cooperate, the barbarians had no hesitation and agreed in an instant. In order to respond to their allies and seize this once-in-a-lifetime opportunity. On the basis of the original four hundred thousand troops, the various tribes of the Snow Plains united again, gathering another three hundred thousand troops and three Inborn warriors, forming the second wave of invasion troops that surged towards the Helong region. In this way, including the original troops, the number of invading barbarians in the Helong battlefront had reached a total of seven hundred thousand, with as many as seven Inborn warriors among them. With such a powerful force, even He Basheng would be unable to claim victory, no matter how much he wished. Even worse, if he were careless, the entire Helong battle situation could collapse, and the Helong Prefecture, which had been maintained for several years, would be completely lost to the barbarians and the Chu State. For a time. Following Huang Xuan¡¯s sudden intervention, Zhou State¡¯s Helong battlefield situation was facing the risk of collapse, and the situation had become extremely critical. Seeing this situation. After the news was passed back to Zhou State, the always mysterious Monarch and Ministers could no longer sit still. On the thirteenth day of the fourth month, Emperor Zhou personally sealed a Daoist Leader who had descended from Jade Hua Mountain as the Grand General of the Southern Pillar State, who would take over the position formerly held by Dongfang Wuyun, who had passed away. Then, he urgently ordered the former Pillar State Grand General, stationed in Shuofang Prefecture, to lead the fifteen thousand Northern Border elites stationed there to move south to Longxi and repel the Chu invasion. As for the vacancies left by the withdrawal of these northern elites, the newly-appointed Grand General of the Southern Pillar State would have to lead the newly recruited but barely trained fifteen thousand new soldiers to the north of Shuofang to defend the country and guard the border. After this series of actions, Zhou State¡¯s bottom line had been thoroughly exposed to everyone. Everything was just as Mo Li had said: the complex situation in the location of Jade Hua Mountain made Yuchan Tao unable to place their entire bet on Zhou State. They only provided assistance to Zhou State in the form of a mere Guardian. A single Inborn could naturally not defeat the combination of Huang Xuan and Qingyunzi and retake Hanzhong with their troops. They were well aware of this. So, apart from recruiting a large army and training them in Lantian Camp, they made no more moves. On the contrary, to conceal their own weakness, they had been resorting to deception and feigning mystery to deceive the eyes of the world, trying to maintain the strong appearance of Zhou State. Now, Chu State¡¯s sudden attack broke the situation in Helong area at once, tearing apart this veil and revealing Zhou State¡¯s weakness in the eyes of the world. In terms of the so-called top three dominating countries, it had declined to a point where it could only maintain support for ten Inborns, and its troops under its command were abundant but increasingly fewer due to the constraints of various battlefields. Zhou State was so distressed that it was not even as good as Ning Country. After all, under Ziyun Tao¡¯s support, Ning Country had as many as fourteen Inborns and over six hundred thousand troops that could be mobilized at any time. Looking at just this point, Ning Country was already stronger than Zhou State. Chapter 793 - Chapter 793: Chapter 344: The Fall and the Endgame Chapter 793: Chapter 344: The Fall and the Endgame After seeing through the facade of Zhou Country, Lu Yuan¡¯s apprehension towards this northern country was significantly reduced. After all, the situation was already quite clear. Zhou Country, which had not received full support from Yuchan Tao, had already reached its potential limit. Inborn ten people, a standing army of 1.3 million soldiers; all of these constituted Zhou Country¡¯s total strength. Even if they tried to dig further, they wouldn¡¯t be able to bring out much more power. What¡¯s worse is that the current foundations of Zhou Country is rapidly being depleted. In the western front of Zhou Country, on the Helong region, large-scale battles involving hundreds of thousands of barbarians break out twice a year during spring and autumn. Though Zhou people were able to repel the barbarians by relying on their own strength, achieving victory. Even if they win every battle, who could guarantee there would be no casualties in the war? After each battle, Zhou Country would lose tens of thousands, or even up to a hundred thousand soldiers. If you add these up, over the nearly six years of fighting barbarians in the Helong region, Zhou Country has already lost as many as 300,000 soldiers. This number only accounts for the death toll. Worse than the death toll is the 500,000 disabled soldiers. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Even though the majority of those killed or injured were temporary Village Braves, two to three hundred thousand elite soldiers were also part of this number. Losing 200-300,000 elite soldiers and 500,000 young and vigorous village braves, with a total casualty count of over 800,000, was unbearable even for Zhou Country. Keep in mind that ever since Zhou Country lost Hanzhong territory, their current total population is only around 17 million. 800,000 people already correspond to one twentieth of their population, and these were the most essential young and strong individuals among the populace. Such a massive loss of human resources is on a par with what happened to both Qinguo and Zhao Country after the Battle of Changping. Back during the Northern Expedition of Yue Country, when the united army of Lu Yuan and others annihilated over 200,000 soldiers of Zhou Country, their morale was decimated, and they no longer dared to look south. In the end, it took more than a decade for them to recover. Today, Zhou Country has lost over 300,000 elite soldiers and more than 500,000 young and strong village braves due to the battles, with casualties far exceeding those of the Northern Expedition. Such massive losses, although not enough to end Zhou Country¡¯s national destiny in a single battle, still heavily damage their vitality, requiring at least a decade or two of recovery before they can breathe easy again. But is there time for Zhou Country to recover now? At this moment, the barbarians, with Chu State¡¯s assistance, have launched a large scale invasion of the Helong region during this spring, far beyond the scale of previous years, mobilizing over 700,000 soldiers. In Zhou Country¡¯s back, the Chu army is also causing destruction, driving a dagger into their heart. By conservative estimates. Even if Zhou Country can win this battle and repel the barbarians and Chu State, their final casualties are estimated to exceed 100,000, another massive bloodletting. Each attack on the Helong region weakens the vitality of Zhou Country and reveals their internal weakness. Ironically, faced with such a difficult situation, Zhou Country cannot afford to abandon the Helong region. Because if they lose these two territories, Guannei territory, where the capital is located, will be left completely unprotected, and The most core and crucial territories of the entire nation would face a direct threat from the barbarians. By that time, the barbarians would have gained control of the Helong region, further strengthening their power, making it increasingly difficult for Zhou people to counteract. This is a dead-end situation where they retreat step by step until there is nowhere left to retreat. Thus, no matter how difficult the Helong battle front becomes, Zhou Country cannot back away, because once they do, they¡¯ll be one step closer to their demise. But as they continue to hold their ground, Zhou Country maintains the status quo at great cost, continuously bleeding and losing their vitality. Originally, with Zhou Country¡¯s expansive territory and wealth, they were confident that they could wear out the barbarians through attrition, even while constantly bleeding. But now Chu State has intervened, stirring up chaos in this already complex situation, making the obvious outcome uncertain and unpredictable. Zhou Country¡¯s sure-win situation has become uncertain, filled with countless variables. What¡¯s even more unfavorable is. In addition to the Helong battle front, in the past two years, Wei Country in the north has suddenly been exacerbating border conflicts with Zhou Country in the Shuofang region, seemingly because of the cold wave. Originally, both countries had occasional friction in the Shuofang region, but conflicts involving only thousands or tens of thousands of people barely escalated. However, starting the year before, the number of Wei Country troops invading the Shuofang region suddenly increased substantially. There were often wars involving tens of thousands of people, and even last autumn, a large-scale conflict of 100,000 people broke out. 100,000 soldiers, even for a dominant country, amounted to a national war. In other words. Wei Country has formally engaged in a national war with Zhou Country within the Shuofang region. Although this national war did not last long, ending after only one or two months, and did not erupt again afterward. However, the impact of this war is far-reaching. It represents that after several years of adjustment, Wei Country has officially prepared to gather the strength of the whole country and launch a southward expedition. Last year¡¯s national war was just a small appetizer, making some preliminary probing. Once they discern Zhou Country¡¯s true strength, they will brazenly march southward, setting off a grand Southern Expedition journey. This is not a false alarm. Wei Country¡¯s geographic location has determined that they will inevitably make this choice. Chapter 794 - Chapter 794: Chapter 344: The Inevitable Defeat_2 Chapter 794: Chapter 344: The Inevitable Defeat_2 Wei Country, which occupies one of the Nine Provinces, Yan State, is one of the three states and three territories that is destined to be covered by the Northern Ice Wave. Lu Yuan¡¯s Yangzhou is facing the Southern Polar Poisonous Fire, which may only erupt after the Northern Cold Wave completely arrives and the North and South loses balance, giving a buffer of hundreds of years. However, the Northern Ice Wave Yan State faces is currently in full swing. It is estimated that some parts of the three outer territories in the far north have already been transformed into the Eternal Ice Region, becoming a Forbidden Zone for Living Beings. For Lu Yuan, the disaster is in the future. But for the living beings in the three northern states and territories, the disaster is now, and it is happening. Especially for the people of those three outer territories, the cold wave has already descended on their land, and they must either die in the snow and ice or begin their difficult migration to the south. Although Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t reach Wei Country for now, and didn¡¯t know much about the situation there, he could still estimate that they should have begun welcoming the first wave of refugees like Zhou Country. It is estimated that the border counties of Wei Country in the north have already started facing one wave after another of Cold Wave battles, just like Helong County in Zhou Country. The Outer Territory bordering Wei Country is the North Grassland. Most of the people living in this Outer Territory are nomadic tribes. Although the population of these nomadic tribes is not large, when tens of thousands of miles of grasslands are combined, there may still be tens of millions of people. Tens of millions of herdsmen moving south would form hundreds of thousands of cavalry. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï The magnificent iron cavalry heading south, although mostly made up of ordinary herdsmen, its combined strength could give Wei Country a hard time. Even though the power of Wei Country could eventually stop this migration wave and either eliminate or absorb all the southern herdsmen, Yan State, where Wei Country is located, is also within the extreme area of the cold wave release. Now, it is the grassland herdsmen who suffer, as they are driven by the cold wave and forced to move south. After the entire grassland turns into a snowy land, the next to suffer will be Wei Country. Fast or slow, within 20 to 60 years, the cold wave will approach Yan State¡¯s region. Once the cold wave arrives in Yan State, within 20 to 30 years, the whole Yan State will follow the footsteps of the grasslands, gradually becoming an ice-enchanted land. In other words, there is not much time left for Wei Country now. It may be 20 or 60 years before the cold wave comes. During this time, Wei Country must change and lead its entire nation southward, seizing a survival territory. This time is tight. Wei Country has no time to hesitate and must make a decision immediately. From the current situation, their choice is already quite clear; it is to continue southward, defeat their old rival Zhou Country, and seize their territory as a shelter for Wei Country to avoid the cold wave. The war that broke out last year is a harbinger of Wei Country¡¯s southern migration. For a country with a dominance in one state like Wei Country, the scale of 100,000 people in the war is just an appetizer. Once the appetizer is finished, the main course will be served soon. By then, millions of Wei Soldiers and even the grassland tribes will transform into the northern torrents, wave after wave hitting Zhou Country, until they are completely defeated and their land is occupied, only then will they stop. By that time, however, Zhou Country will be destroyed. The next target for these refugees from the northern cold wave may then become Chu State. If it comes to that day, Chu State may have to go through a few wars with them to protect its own territory. Therefore, Lu Yuan¡¯s attitude towards Zhou Country is not entirely hostile. In the future, if needed, they could also support Zhou Country, using it as a Northern Defense for Chu State to resist the threat of cold wave immigrants. The relationship between countries has never been fixed, only good or evil. Only interests and the situation can serve as a guide to making choices. Lu Yuan, as the great king for years, has deeply understood this and is proficient at heart. Of course, all of this is still speculation. There hasn¡¯t been a large-scale war between Zhou and Wei countries yet, only small national-scale battles at most. Whether things will ultimately turn out as expected remains to be seen. But even so, with the ongoing small-scale wars in the Shuofang battles, Zhou People suffer casualties of tens of thousands of soldiers every year. The east side, Heyang County, has less conflict between Zhou and Liang countries, and even small frictions are extremely rare. Although the two countries are heavily garrisoned at the border, they both restrain themselves, neither intending to escalate the war, and maintain a certain level of rationality. Even so, with the Western and Northern battlefields alone, the number of casualties and disabilities of Zhou soldiers every year exceeds 200,000, and the scale is still gradually expanding. At this rate, if the two battlefields continue for a decade, the casualties of Zhou Country in the battlefield alone will exceed two to three million. This figure is roughly equivalent to one death for every man in Zhou Country on the battlefield. It can be seen how difficult Zhou Country¡¯s situation is when facing migration waves from the North and West. No wonder Jade Toad Tao, who lived in Zhou Country, had no confidence in them and refused to invest heavily. Chapter 795 - Chapter 795: Chapter 344: Conclusive Defeat and Death _3 Chapter 795: Chapter 344: Conclusive Defeat and Death _3 Only because the international situation facing the Zhou Country was indeed the worst in the world. To the north were the Wei Country and the grassland herdsmen, the Western Liang and Snowy Plain Barbarians to the west, the Qingzhou Hegemon Liang Country to the east, and the newly rising Chu State to the south. All these four enemies had the ability to mobilize millions of troops, and any one of them was no less inferior to the Zhou Country. At this time, Zhou Country was faced with one versus four, confronting four competitors of the same level with the power of one country. No matter how you looked at it, it was a bleak future and a cause for concern. Yuchan Tao with even half a bit of sanity, and even half a bit of hope for the future, could not possibly entrust the success or failure of his own Dao inheritance to the fate of the Zhou Country. Being able to support a Guardian General of the Zhou Country was already an act of benevolence and righteousness based on the bonds of fellow countrymen. In the eyes of the discerning people of the world, Zhou Country had already been out of the game in the battle for supremacy in Central State in the future. It was even possible that the time for the downfall of this hegemonic power might be within the next decade or two. At this time, it seemed that martial arts were flourishing, but everything was just a final burst of energy before the last bit of vitality was exhausted, and it would be the time for the fall of the Yongzhou Hegemon. Such was the heavenly mandate, which could not be reversed by human effort. Lu Yuan had seen through this strand of heavenly mandate, so after puncturing the illusion of the Zhou Country¡¯s strength, he sent a message to Huang Xuan, telling him not to venture too far into Longxi, and to withdraw to Hanzhong after looting and plundering some population. The Zhou Country was destined to be defeated. Faced with attacks from all sides, the enemy, even if unwilling, would find it difficult to turn the tide. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï However, for Chu State, Zhou Country¡¯s premature demise would not be a very good situation. If Zhou Country were to perish, the most probable outcome would be that one country would be divided into six. Namely, the Barbarians and the Western Liang seizing the two provinces of Helong, Wei Country seizing the two provinces of Shuofang and Guannei belonging to Zhou Country, Zhao Country seizing a part of Henan Province, Liang Country seizing another part of Henan Province and Nanyang Province, and Chu Country seizing the three prefectures control by Zhou Country in Xiangyang Province. Based on the division of these territories, Chu State would benefit the least, according to the geographical connections between Zhou Country and the surrounding countries and the distance from each other. From this estimation, it could be seen that once Zhou Country was destroyed, among the six forces, Chu State would benefit the least. Just three prefectures, for the present Chu State, was barely better than nothing and held little significance. On the contrary, the other clans, after seizing the territory of Zhou Country, would expand their strength, posing a much bigger threat to Chu State than Zhou Country itself. With Liang Country seizing the two provinces of Central State occupied by Zhou Country, their strength would grow and it would be more difficult for Chu State to fight for Central State in future northern expeditions. With Wei Country securing the core territory of Zhou Country, Chu State¡¯s two provinces of Hanzhong and Xiangyang would be directly threatened, posing a huge challenge for Chu State¡¯s defense in the northern border. Perhaps the entire northern border will be bereft of peace in the future. With Barbarians taking over the two provinces of Helong, they would temporarily have a suitable habitat and their dependence on Chu State¡¯s needs would be greatly mitigated. From now on, it would not be as easy for Chu State to manipulate them as it is now. Moreover, after the Barbarians settled in Helong, they might seek further expansion into Hanzhong Province and Xichuan Province, seizing these territories to expand their own living space. The only one that posed no threat to Chu State was the remote Zhao Country. But with Zhao Country separated from Chu State by a great distance, taking several months or even a year for each contact and European countries blocking each other along the way, even if Chu State wanted to ally and cooperate with Zhao Country, the efficiency would be too low. Therefore, upon closer examination, it is more advantageous for Chu State to maintain the existence of this Yongzhou Hegemon than to have it destroyed. At the very least. Before Lu Yuan unified Yangzhou and integrated Jiangnan, Zhou Country could not perish. So now, to bleed Zhou Country was permissible, letting the Yongzhou Hegemon weaken slowly, while Chu State clung to its wounds to absorb nutrients and strengthen itself step by step. Once it had finally grown strong enough and gained enough strength, it would join the surrounding beasts in devouring and dividing this weak giant, capturing the juiciest parts of its body. Before achieving this goal, Zhou Country could not perish, and if necessary, Chu State could even lend it a hand to support it for a longer period of time. Adhering to this line of thought, Lu Yuan had slightly adjusted his strategy towards Zhou Country. To shield it from danger and weaken it as the main focus, but also to lend support if necessary. This will be the strategy against Zhou Country in the future. ¡­ The ninth month of the fifth day of the tenth year of Shenwu. The elite of Zhou Country¡¯s northern border arrived in Longxi Province, and the vanguard fought with the invading Chu army. The two armies fought fiercely, with the Zhou being more numerous, the Chu being unsuccessful, unable to resist the many, and were thus forced to retreat. Then, in accordance with Lu Yuan¡¯s strategy, Huang Xuan took advantage of this defeat to withdraw his troops several hundred miles, losing a large number of Longxi prefectures and counties that had previously been occupied. Subsequently, he sent a messenger to the Barbarians to inform them of the arrival of Zhou reinforcements and Chu army¡¯s preparations for retreat. Without waiting for the Barbarians¡¯ reply, Huang Xuan led his troops in battle against Zhou¡¯s reinforcements after giving up many occupied territories, stopping Zhou¡¯s momentum. Eventually, after getting some respite, the king of Chu led the last batch of captive Zhou people along Yang Pass, retreating to Hanzhong Province. By then, the Chu army¡¯s Longxi campaign came to an end, with thirty thousand people from Longxi being taken back to Hanzhong, effectively ending the campaign. Not long after the Chu forces withdrew, the Barbarians were still reluctant to give up their hard-won gains. In the end, after He Basheng joined forces with the reinforcements, he seized the opportunity to exact revenge on the Barbarians. After several major battles, more than 200,000 Barbarian troops were annihilated, dealing a heavy blow to the invading forces. Although the losses were heavy, during this spring looting, the Barbarians seized more than a million stones of grain from Zhou Country. After these supplies were transported back to the tribes and the dead were accounted for, there would be enough food for the Snow Plains tribes to recuperate, and the famine would be greatly alleviated. This summer, fewer people would die. At this time. With the complete end of the war in Helong and the return of Zhou people to Hanzhong with Chu army, Lu Yuan also took the opportunity to issue a decree, relocating these captive Zhou people to Xichuan to enrich the local population there. At the same time, the three Northern Expeditionary Forbidden Armies that had been stationed in Hanzhong for half a year were officially led by Qingyunzi to return to the capital. Now that the war in the north is over and Hanzhong is secure, the threat from Zhou Country has been eliminated. As for Ning Country to the east, Lu Yuan personally guarded it with troops, having ten Forbidden Armies from Dongting Prefecture, fifty thousand naval forces, and nearly three hundred thousand standing soldiers from various prefectures and counties, which was enough to ensure its protection. Now, all that¡¯s left is for Qingyunzi to lead the sixty thousand Northern Expeditionary forces back and for Li Xiong to lead his one hundred thousand vassal troops to Dongting, so that with these one hundred sixty thousand troops as the foundation, the Southern Expeditionary Army can be formed. By autumn at the latest, Chu State would be able to launch the Southern Expedition and unify Lingnan. Chapter 796 - Chapter 796: Chapter 345: The Three Kingdoms of Lingnan Chapter 796: Chapter 345: The Three Kingdoms of Lingnan By mid-May, Qingyunzi finally led sixty thousand elite soldiers back to Baling. Lu Yuan immediately ordered these sixty thousand men who had been on campaign for half a year to take a leave of absence. They were each given a month off to go home and reunite with their families. Upon their return from leave, they were to rotate through various placements in Baling and join the local defense forces within the jurisdiction. This force had been on campaign for a long time, falling under the category of tired veteran soldiers. For this southern expedition, Lu Yuan did not plan to use them. After all, there were still ten legions remaining in Dongting jurisdiction. If he wanted to select three from among them, it would be extremely simple. He certainly wouldn¡¯t need to use a single force to the point of exhaustion. Moreover, among the ten legions originally stationed in Dongting, most were new recruits. The longest serving among them had only just completed a year of training. In one year¡¯s time, they had become proficient in the use of signal flags and battle formations, and understood military law and order, barely meeting the standard of qualification. Being merely qualified, however, was nothing more than the standard for county soldiers. To become elite soldiers, to become brave members of the imperial guard, they would have to go through the refiner¡¯s fire of warfare, roll through life and death, and pass this endurance test. Only then, after seeing blood, could a qualitative transformation occur. Once their will had been strengthened, they would spend another two to three years honing their skills and martial abilities to become elite soldiers. These recruits had just taken the first step, transitioning from greenhand soldiers to qualified soldiers. Now was the perfect time to send them to the battlefield, to undergo the baptism of blood and fire, and complete the second step. Perfect. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Compared to the powerful elite forces of Zhou Country in the north, the standards of the various countries of Lingnan were really quite ordinary. Even among the small southern countries, Su Country, known for its strength and belligerence, actually had a rather mediocre military level. Su Country was just a small country after all. With only a million citizens and less than ten thousand miles of territory, even if the people were unusually belligerent, they were limited by their resource pool. How many elite soldiers could they possibly produce? Among the fifty thousand soldiers in the country, it was estimated that only ten to twenty thousand veterans, meeting the standard of Chu State¡¯s imperial guard, were available. Most of the soldiers, similar to those of provincial county troops, were just qualified soldiers and could not be heavily relied upon. To conquer them, deploying two or three legions, along with an Inborn Grandmaster, would practically be enough to obliterate Su Country. As for Nanhai Country, even less needed to be said. It had been five or six years since the deaths of Wen Tian and Wu Xi, and Yan Wangqiu. In such a long time, Nanhai Country had not cultivated a single Inborn Grandmaster? Even if we take into account the period when Yue Country was invading the north, at that time Nanhai Country was still the Nanhai Sect. The sect was facing a lack of successors. If they had selected a successor from that time and began the cultivation process, one would think that in over a decade¡¯s time, they should have found a suitable successor, right? But the fact is that from the time of the Front Yue Hongdao, through to the tenth year of Chu Kingdom¡¯s Shenwu, a full fourteen years, Nanhai Country still hadn¡¯t trained an Inborn Grandmaster. It should be known that it took only five or six years for Lu Yuan to train Sun Siwen. This showed that, as long as there was a solid foundation, coupled with a tilt in resources, cultivating an Inborn Grandmaster was not that difficult. However, Nanhai Country simply couldn¡¯t accomplish this seemingly uncomplicated task. The reasons for this failure, Lu Yuan had come to understand through the extensive investigations conducted by the Imperial City Bureau over the years. The truth was that Nanhai Country couldn¡¯t cultivate an Inborn. The reason boiled down to a single issue ¨C the system. Back when it was still the Nanhai Sect, the sect was owned by every disciple. Even when Yan Wangqiu became the Sect Leader, essentially, he was still a disciple of the sect, subordinate to the sect. Under these circumstances, the Nanhai Sect belonged to everyone in the Nanhai Sect, and the Sect Leader was just the manager elected from the people. This public election system allowed the Nanhai Sect to select qualified disciples without bias and foster Inborn successors. This ensured the sect¡¯s continuity. However, this public election system faced problems in the later years of Yan Wangqiu¡¯s reign as Sect Leader. Because at that time, when Yan Wangqiu, as the Sect Leader, wanted to cultivate a successor, he looked around and found that among his disciples and followers, no one was suitable. Despite all the picking and choosing, they could not find a single suitable Inborn candidate. Of course, this selection was limited to the disciples and followers within Yan Wangqiu¡¯s lineage, along with his kin. As for the whole sect, among the hundreds of thousands of Nanhai Sect members, of course, a suitable Inborn candidate could be found. But Yan Wangqiu, compared to previous Sect Leaders, was undoubtedly very partial. Compared to selecting a successor from another lineage within the sect, which would then strip his own lineage of its power, Or even due to his favoritism, his disciples and kin already parasitized the Nanhai Sect, consuming too much of the interests and power that originally belonged to everyone, creating a situation that was too big to fail. When a new Sect Leader assumed office, facing the complicated interest situations of the former Sect Leader¡¯s lineage, they would have limited options. If he were to think further, the next Sect Leader might initiate a purge against his disciples and descendants, destroying his lineage and family. Yan Wangqiu would rather have no Inborn successors in the sect, than pick out an executioner who would turn against his descendants in the future. This was the reason why the original Nanhai Sect, despite holding sway over Lingnan, having hundreds of thousands of disciples, and a sect strength several times that of the Nine River Sword Sect, still couldn¡¯t find a successor. Chapter 797 - Chapter 797: Chapter 345: Three Countries in Lingnan_2 Chapter 797: Chapter 345: Three Countries in Lingnan_2 It was all just selfishness. Even during the Nanhai Sect era, let alone the Nanhai Country era, it was so. Back when it was the sect, it belonged to the public. Although this so-called public ownership, in Yan Wangqiu¡¯s understanding, only belonged to his disciples and his clansmen, rather than the public ownership of the entire sect and its branches. However, even this kind of parochial public ownership was considered advanced and selfless compared to what came later. Because when the Nanhai Country era came, and Yan Wangqiu became its ruler, looking at the thousands of miles of land in the country, millions of common people, listening to them bow and call him their sovereign, and being hailed by the people as the eternal emperor, the once slightly-public spirited Yan Wangqiu had a complete shift in his mindset. Just like the ancient Zen teachings transforming into a family dynasty. Yan Wangqiu, like Yu the Great, wanted to pass on the world to his son and let his bloodline rule the Southsea for ten thousand years, forever as the monarch of Nanhai Country. In a sense, this idea was indeed good and advanced. After all, countries and sects are different, sects can operate through recommendations without hesitation, and whoever is strong can take the lead. However, countries need not only strength but also stability. Therefore, having the strongest power in the hands of the royal family could naturally be used as deterrence, coupled with a sense of moral justice, to stabilize the country. Otherwise, the ruler would belong to the Yan family, while the Inborn Grandmaster would be someone else. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Having one person in control of the highest authority and another in control of the strongest power, the two most important elements ¨C name and instrument ¨C would ultimately lead to the emergence of a divided and competing situation. At that time, awaiting Nanhai Country would be only war and destruction. Either the name and instrument would unite, and the Yan family would be destroyed, with the strongest power of the Inborn Grandmaster reestablishing his political rule. Or foreign forces would invade, taking advantage of the internal strife in the Nanhai Country, and the fate of the Yan family would be equally grim. No matter which of the above occurs, neither Nanhai Country nor the Yan family would have a good outcome. Don¡¯t think this is an exaggeration. At the beginning, when Yu the Great passed on the throne to Xia Qi, once Xia Qi was enthroned, the Youhu Clan opposed him and rebelled. In the end, Qi led his army to quell the uprising. Later, when Qi¡¯s son Taikang ascended the throne, he was even taken advantage of by the Eastern Yi Houyi, who captured the kingship and destroyed the Xia Dynasty¡¯s reign. Even Yu the Great, a man of virtue who tamed the floods, had someone stand up against him when his son tried to transform from a public to a family dynasty, and they even lost their country for a time. What merits does Yan Wangqiu have? Has he revitalized the Sect and made it flourish? Or has he saved the Sect from danger and contributed to its survival and reconstruction? Neither of the above applies. On the contrary, he has been selfish and self-serving. He failed to cultivate a qualified successor to maintain the status of the Nanhai Sect as an Innate Great Sect. Secondly, he did not save the Sect from danger, but instead allowed his disciples and clansmen to bleed the Sect dry. In the end, in order to escape responsibility, he personally destroyed the Sect. He used the bones of the Nanhai Sect to create his own Nanhai Country. With so many bad deeds attributed to Yan Wangqiu, and with his example of usurping power, it is impossible for him to trust that the Inborn Grandmaster he cultivates will not seize the family¡¯s legacy after his death. Of course, he cannot be at ease. Not only Yan Wangqiu, but also the Yan family cannot be at ease. So during the time of the Nanhai Sect, Yan Wangqiu still had his disciples and followers as potential candidates for Inborn status. However, when it came to the Nanhai Country era, he was left only with his clansmen, or even his direct descendants, as the backup candidates. This was because the transformation of the Nanhai Sect into a country had also encroached on the interests of Yan Wangqiu¡¯s disciples. Originally, his disciples had the chance to inherit the position of Sect Leader and become Inborn Grandmasters. However, once Nanhai Country emerged, it became a natural law that fathers died and sons succeeded, and apart from Yan Wangqiu¡¯s descendants, no one else had the qualifications to inherit the kingship. Can those disciples who have been deprived of their opportunities be content? As a result, another group of potential Inborn candidates had been eliminated. After reducing it down to just a few dozen of Yan Wangqiu¡¯s direct bloodline, how difficult it was to select a suitable Inborn candidate amongst them? Not to mention that during the Nanhai Sect era, Yan Wangqiu¡¯s descendants had already been screened once in this regard. Those who failed to be selected were simply not qualified. When the old man became the monarch, he spent night after night in feasting and debauchery, and in the year before his death, he had more than a dozen children. It was not necessarily all due to his lust for beauty. More children meant more choice for a successor to pick an Inborn candidate from, which probably was Yan Wangqiu¡¯s inner thoughts. However, after all, he was not Lu Yuan. He couldn¡¯t use Immortal Technique and Spiritual Energy to directly cleanse his children¡¯s souls, so relying on this widespread method of selecting a successor was ultimately too inefficient. Moreover, the time was too short. So within the past decade or so since the old man established the country, Nanhai Country has not been able to select a suitable Inborn successor from the Yan family¡¯s bloodline. Perhaps there was a suitable candidate within the Yan family, but they did not meet the interests of the Yan family elite. So even knowing that they were suitable, they chose not to cultivate them. Once the seeds of infighting and suspicion are sown, it becomes like the whispers of the devil, difficult to cut off. The Nanhai Country and the Yan family, established on an illegitimate foundation and with a rise accompanied by conspiracy and shamelessness, foreshadowed their destiny of destruction from the day they were founded. Chapter 798 - Chapter 798: Chapter 345: Three Countries in Lingnan_3 Chapter 798: Chapter 345: Three Countries in Lingnan_3 Just like after Sima usurped Wei, with a sentence of ¡°Fuxi Holy Dynasty ruling the world with filial piety,¡± it led to the embarrassment and disgrace of Western Jin. It is important to know that before Jin, all dynasties ruled the country with loyalty and filial piety, even Cao Wei was no exception. Yan Wangqiu, who stole the throne of the country, established the Nanhai Country just like the Western Jin, it naturally lacked a layer of moral justice, had no righteousness, and was ridiculed by the people of the world, unable to really win people¡¯s hearts and recognition. The political situation in the Nanhai Country was also the same. The officials were corrupt, the governance was rotten, and the common people were not even as good as pigs and dogs. Lacking the justice and reason of the Yan lineage, in order to maintain their rule, they had to give up a lot of interests, to win over the powerful nobles within the country who held real power, in exchange for their support. Nowadays, the Yan family in the Nanhai Country is more like a puppet promoted by the aristocratic families, a representative in name. On the surface, they call him the Lord of the Country, but who knows how they mock him in private! Even the lord of the country has no proper name, and the words are not smooth. As for those officials, nobles, and aristocratic families underneath, it¡¯s even more out of the question. In the entire Nanhai Country, from the monarch to the lowest-ranking officials, there is not a single one who truly regards the Nanhai Country as their own. They all treat the entire country as a vessel for blood-sucking, desperately clinging to this vessel, sucking the blood and nutrients to strengthen themselves. This scene is strikingly similar to when Yan Wangqiu and his men clung to the Nanhai Sect and desperately sucked blood back then. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Now the old scene is reshown, the only difference is that the Nanhai Sect has been replaced by the Nanhai Country. The blood-sucking people have changed from the public world back then to the family world today. I can¡¯t help but think that when Yan Wangqiu facilitated this scene, he must have felt helpless in his heart. With such a country and such a world where everyone is selfish, the foundation at the grassroots level has already rotted to the limit. To destroy the Nanhai Country, Lu Yuan doesn¡¯t even need an Inborn Grandmaster, and might only need a Forbidden Army, a mere 20,000 people, along with enticements and suppression, to directly confront a country that has problems at its root. This country is the easiest to destroy among the three nations of Lingnan. The reason it has survived until now is simply because Chu and Ning have been keeping each other in check, and maintaining the buffer zone between them. At this time, Lu Yuan was ready to break the balance and begin the Eastern Expedition, intending to unify Yangzhou. Therefore, there is no need for such a buffer zone to continue to exist. Let this corrupt country be completely destroyed. It is not difficult to conquer the countries of Su and Nanhai. One is weak, and the other naturally lacks legitimacy, so their destruction is simple. However, it is a bit difficult to defeat the last remaining Song Country in Lingnan. Song Country was founded by Xie Ning, who came from the Coastal Aristocratic Family. In accordance with the tradition of the Coastal Aristocratic Families, where they take turns to be the emperor, theoretically, Xie Ning was born with the legitimacy to claim the title of a king or emperor. And indeed, it is true. Faced with Xie Ning¡¯s independence, the Heavenly Emperor of Jinling, considering Song Country¡¯s remoteness and geographical barriers from Ning Country, finally sent a messenger to recognize the independence of Song Country and grant them an imperial title. Therefore, in terms of legitimacy, there is no lack in Song Country¡¯s title. In terms of national heritage, After a series of campaigns, and more than 20 years of recuperation, the once-broken Jiuzhen County has long since regained its vitality and begun to flourish again. Together with the newly opened Yinsheng County, the population of the entire Song Country has reached two million, and the military has also expanded to 100,000. These 100,000 troops are all elite soldiers of the highest national standard, fully comparable to Lu Yuan¡¯s Chu Forbidden Army ¨C they are truly powerful forces in the world. In addition to these 100,000 warriors, the two counties of Yinsheng and Jiuzhen in Song Country have about 50,000 county soldiers locally, and their combat strength is not weak either, being able to fight as well. A total of 150,000 troops, coupled with Xie Ning, the Inborn Grandmaster, Song Country has become like the former Changsha Country ¨C a tough, thorn-covered bone, with its martial prowess at its peak. Establishing such a small, remote Southern Barbarian country into a powerful, prosperous, and distinguished military nation, Xie Ning has fully demonstrated to the world what it means to have an aristocratic heritage and what it means to be both a scholar and a warrior. In comparison, Su Xuange, who also focused on expanding the army but made the entire Su Country miserable with frequent rebellions and ultimately reduced to its current broken state, can simply die of shame and apologize in shame. Frankly speaking, even when Lu Yuan first received the comprehensive information from the Capital City¡¯s Department on the Song Country¡¯s foundation after considering all aspects, he couldn¡¯t help but be startled. Perhaps it is because Song Country has always been low-key, or perhaps it is because the location of Song Country is really too far south, at the southernmost end of the Nine Provinces, even more remote than the few Yi countries in the southwest. As a result, news about Song Country has seldom reached the Central Plains of the Nine Provinces. Even the neighboring countries rarely look southward with their eyes fixed on Chu Country. Under many factors, it has led to the isolation of information in Song Country, miraculously ¡°disappearing¡± in the eyes of other countries, without anyone paying attention to the special situation. If it weren¡¯t for Lu Yuan¡¯s preparations for the Southern Expedition in the past two years, aiming to unify the three Lingnan countries, and making a special effort to strengthen the intelligence gathering on Su, Song, and Nanhai countries, assigning more people to spy, Otherwise, he would have really been deceived by the quiet Song Country. And given that Song Country has been silently accumulating such a strong army underground, being so low-key, it seems that they also have great ambitions. A total of 150,000 troops, a fifth of the size of Chu¡¯s army. With such strength, it would be enough to sweep through the small countries in the south. At this time, the reason why Song Country has not made any moves, is most likely because they are wary of Chu Country, and have been waiting silently for the right opportunity. When faced with such a strong, patient, and scheming enemy, anyone would feel a headache. Lu Yuan is no exception. In this Southern Expedition, Su and Nanhai countries are both negligible. The only one who can be considered a worthy opponent is the Song Country. To deal with Song Country, he plans to use all his energy and all the forces he can mobilize to attack and destroy this country. This is Lu Yuan¡¯s greatest respect for Song Country. You are strong, so I will double my efforts to deal with you, sparing no expense. Chapter 799 - Chapter 799: Chapter 346: Changes in Various Countries Chapter 799: Chapter 346: Changes in Various Countries The preparations for Chu State¡¯s Southern Expedition were in full swing. This expedition was expected to mobilize sixty thousand forbidden troops and one hundred thousand vassal state troops. Such a large number of troops would consume over one hundred thousand stones of grain per month. Including civilian workers for grain transportation, the total would be several hundred thousand stones. It was impossible to conceal such a large-scale transport of supplies and personnel. Therefore, when these clues were exposed and collected by those who were interested, the surrounding forces immediately drew a conclusion. The conclusion was that after the battle of Hanzhong, Chu State did not intend to stop, but planned to start a new war. Moreover, this war was not small in scale, involving the mobilization of hundreds of thousands of people, almost equivalent to a national war. After the news spread, it immediately aroused the attention and tension of many people, especially those small countries in Lingnan. Based on the existing evidence, the troops mobilized by Chu State were probably between one hundred and two hundred thousand. With such an army, they couldn¡¯t attack Zhou Country¡¯s Xiangyang and Nanyang in the north, as the stationed troops there numbered over two hundred thousand. Together with civilian workers, they could easily have four to five hundred thousand people. With such a formidable strength, unless Chu State devoted its entire force to the north, it would not be able to take this region. Therefore, Zhou Country was naturally excluded from the target list. The same logic applied to Ning Country in the east. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Ning Country bordered Chu State¡¯s Xiangyang and Yuzhang prefectures. Xiangyang Prefecture in the north consisted of three municipalities. After years of continuous reinforcements, Ning Country had stationed about one hundred thousand troops and fifty thousand naval forces in Xia Kou. As for Yuzhang Prefecture, there was no need to say anything more. Inside the Pengli Camp of Yuzhang, there were two hundred and fifty thousand soldiers, as well as fifty thousand naval forces. On the border with Chu State, there were also about one hundred thousand stationed soldiers. With a combined force of five hundred and fifty thousand troops covering both water and land, even if all of Chu State was sacrificed, it might not be able to break this hard bone. Therefore, Ning Country could not be Chu State¡¯s target either. With this in mind, the problem arose. Since Zhou Country wasn¡¯t the target in the north, and Ning Country wasn¡¯t the target in the east, and their vassal state was in the west, Chu State¡¯s remaining target could only be the Lingnan region in the south. After all, compared to the surrounding major forces, the small countries in Lingnan were indeed the best targets. Nanhai Country was plagued by internal corruption, full of senseless soldiers, with an army that had long fallen into disrepair. There were not many competent troops within the entire country, and they lacked an Inborn Grandmaster. Su Country was weak, although it had an Inborn Grandmaster and a strong army, it simply couldn¡¯t last long, and it couldn¡¯t possibly pose a challenge to Chu State. As for Song Country? It was a remote and barren country that couldn¡¯t amount to much either. After synthesizing all the intelligence, the outsiders had to admit that if Chu State wanted to expand, the three countries of Lingnan were indeed the best targets. And if they could take these three countries, Chu State could immediately expand its territory by tens of thousands of miles, ruling over several million more people, and possess strength comparable to Ning Country. With such a great temptation in front of them, anyone would be tempted, and Chu State¡¯s desire to attack Lingnan became a matter of course. But Chu might have calculated things right for themselves, but the other Lingnan countries that were targeted as prey were not so comfortable. ¡­ Yulin City. As the capital of Yulin County and the current capital of Su Country, this city should have been magnificent, wealthy, and prosperous. As a matter of fact, ten years ago, it was indeed prosperous. At that time, Yulin County had a population of over forty million households and more than two million people, making it a relatively densely-populated region. As the capital city of the county, Yulin City was known as second only to Nanhai City in Lingnan with a population of fifty thousand households and three hundred thousand people. But time had passed. In just ten years, Yulin County had experienced numerous coercive conscriptions, rebellions, War of Conquerors, and Tonghai Barbarian uprisings, leading to calamities on the people. After several rounds of turmoil, the once densely-populated Yulin County had become destitute, devastated, and the people remained in distress. Under such influence, Yulin City, as the capital city and the national capital, gradually declined as well. The population dropped from fifty thousand households to less than one hundred thousand, and the remaining people looked pale and numb, lacking any vitality. At this time, in the desolate Yulin City, there weren¡¯t many pedestrians on the street. Occasionally, one or two scrawny figures passed by, seemingly lacking strength. On the other hand, there were quite a few vigorous men, with red faces and loud laughter, gathered in the tea shops and taverns on both sides of the street. Passersby at the doorway smelled the aroma and heard the noisy sounds inside, and couldn¡¯t help but stop and take a sniff of the wine scent. They looked enviously inside before reluctantly leaving. In the impoverished Su Country, only the high officials and the soldiers of Divine Sword Army could enjoy a hearty meal in the taverns. Su Country was poor, with a population of only about one million. Even with two prefectures, it could not support too many troops. After a previous local rebellion, Su Xuange learned a lesson, ceased excessive conscription and reduced some taxes. In the end, although the tax burden was still heavy, the people could at least survive. However, as a result, the national revenue was greatly reduced, making it difficult to maintain the previous force of one hundred and fifty thousand troops. Chapter 800 - Chapter 800: Chapter 346 International Turmoil_2 Chapter 800: Chapter 346 International Turmoil_2 Therefore, in order to maintain military strength, Su Xuange scaled down the originally superfluous forces to a total of fifty thousand, and abolished the organization of county soldiers. Among these fifty thousand, except for the twenty-eight thousand who served as Prefectures and Counties¡¯ soldiers, the remaining twenty-two thousand were reorganized into the Forbidden Army, bestowed the title Divine Sword, and acted as troops directly under central command. The Divine Sword Army comprised elite soldiers selected by Su Xuange following successive campaigns, who were taught some basic sword techniques from the Nine River Sword Sect, and restructured into elite forces. Having learned sword techniques from the Nine River Sword Sect, all officers and soldiers of the Divine Sword Army possessed at least one or two decent sword techniques. Although over ninety-nine percent of them were not considered top-notch, even in Jianghu they could be regarded as skilled, thus qualifying as elites. This group of Divine Sword Army soldiers, trained in the sword arts of Jianghu, now served as Nanhai Country¡¯s means to impress the entire nation and compete with foreign adversaries. With the support of the entire nation for these twenty thousand men, the many officers and soldiers of the Divine Sword Army naturally led a good life. Their generous monthly allowances and year-end bonuses not only allowed them to easily support their families but also enabled them to occasionally indulge in restaurants and teahouses, where they could feast joyously and make merry. Therefore, every day on this food and drink street in the city, one could see many robust men dressed as Martial Artists coming and going, constituting the main spending force here. Today, at noon, the shops on both sides quickly filled up with a bustling crowd. Innumerable Divine Sword Army soldiers crowded inside the restaurants, laughing heartily and bragging to one another. The busboys, drenched in sweat from hurrying back and forth, served these masters in the establishment, occasionally scolded by the Martial Artists, then fearfully offering apologetic smiles. In the present world, martial prowess was revered. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Commoners dared not offend these weapon-wielding Martial Artists, fearing that the slightest displeasure could lead to an abrupt and violent response. Those who used to doubt this truth now lie in graves overgrown with three-foot-tall weeds. Past events were a clear lesson, compelling the people of today to be cautious. While the atmosphere was rich with activity, a surge of hoofbeats suddenly sounded from the street outside; a Knight clad in black armor with Qing Yu feathers on his head and a red banner on his back was seen driving pedestrians aside while galloping toward the depths of the city. This sudden scene in the bustling street caused a commotion and a chorus of gasps arose. This commotion immediately drew the attention of people inside the nearby teahouses and taverns, prompting many to look toward the source of the disturbance. After the mounted messenger had passed, someone inside the Inn retracted their gaze and clicked their tongue, saying, ¡°With Qing Yu delivering a message and the blood-flag leading the way, could it be that some major incident has occurred?¡± Someone beside replied, ¡°The last few times we¡¯ve seen such a spectacle, it was either a local rebellion, an army mustering for an expedition, or an enemy on the offensive. These days, with King Song lightening Corvee Labor and reducing tribute, the domestic situation is stable, no one thinks of rebelling. And with us soldiers rotating leave every month as usual, having heard no rumors nor calls to assemble, it¡¯s likely not a call to arms. So, it¡¯s probably an enemy attack.¡± Someone exclaimed in surprise, ¡°An enemy attack? Who has the gall to attack our Su Country?¡± ¡°Exactly, among all the states in Lingnan, our Su Country¡¯s martial arts prowess is the greatest. Who would be tired of living and dare to trouble me?¡± ¡°It could be Dali Country. Ever since we took over their Tonghai County, those Yi People from Dali have been constantly plotting to take it back. I¡¯ve heard that they¡¯ve been gathering arms and men, training soldiers all these years. If anyone were to attack, they¡¯re the most likely candidates.¡± ¡°It might also be Song Country. King Song has always supported the Heavenly Son from Jinling, uses Jianwu as their reign title to this day, and is not of one heart with our King who declared our own era. For such a scoundrel to attack wouldn¡¯t be surprising.¡± ¡°I¡¯d rather it be Nanhai Country. Nanhai is wealthy, and those cunning merchants over there have bilked us of so much silver in the past two years. We struggled so fiercely in Dali Country only to see all the silver we managed to seize go into their pockets. I¡¯ve found them repulsive for some time now and have always wanted to raid them.¡± The people inside the shop engaged in various discussions until one person mentioned Nanhai Country, immediately prompting a chorus of loud laughter. Every nation around Nanhai Country knew that it was a weak link, neither impressive nor useful, a true pushover. Moreover, with their vast wealth, Nanhai had long been an object of envy. Now that someone had brought it up, the others cared less about guessing the actual big event and instead joined freely in belittling Nanhai Country. Many even fantasized about the prospect of looting vast wealth when they engaged Nanhai and agreed that, when the time came, they would pillage some money and snatch a few women to take home to make the trip worthwhile. However, among the many voices mocking Nanhai Country, a discordant note was soon introduced. ¡°Could it be Chu State?¡± As soon as this was said, the surrounding laughter abruptly paused. Many voices hushed, and expressions soured as people turned to look at the speaker, with the air seemingly growing tense. The topic that had been deliberately avoided by everyone was now exposed, shattering the illusion and no longer sustainable. The aspiration of Chu State to move southward had been no secret over the years. Even under Su Xuange¡¯s deliberate guidance, the notion that Su and Chu would one day inevitably clash had become a common understanding among all citizens of Su Country. But as Chu grew stronger each year, many people began to consciously avoid this fact, unwilling to contemplate this source of despair and reluctant to face this suffocating enemy. Chapter 801 - Chapter 801: Chapter 346 Changes in Various Countries_3 Chapter 801: Chapter 346 Changes in Various Countries_3 Merely evading reality is ultimately just an illusion. In recent days, Chu State had been continually mobilizing troops and supplies, and it seemed there were reports of a possible southward deployment spreading throughout the Lingnan Region. However, there weren¡¯t many who were willing to believe it. At this moment, as the matter grew urgent, an illusion was finally shattered. Still, the common soldiers and people below wanted to escape, unwilling to face reality. But for those in the upper echelons, the vested interests facing an impending war that would sweep across the entire Lingnan, they weren¡¯t ready to give up their gains so easily. Inside the city¡¯s royal palace, compared to the surrounding poverty-stricken area, the palace seemed especially luxurious. Su Xuange¡¯s face twisted into an ugly expression as he read the message just delivered by a flying-feather messenger from the North. The content of the message was simple, consisting of only one sentence. ¡°Chu people have assembled a formidable force of fifty thousand in Lingling, seemingly with intentions to move southward.¡± Apart from Qianzhong County, Dongting County was the only other area that bordered Su Country. And within Dongting County, the only place that bordered Su Country was Lingling Prefecture, located on the southwest border. This prefecture, previously, always had only local prefectures and county soldiers stationed there, and the Forbidden Army had never been deployed. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 But now, with Chu State stationing fifty thousand troops there, their intentions were all too clear. Chu State had started preparing for a Southern Expedition. Su Xuange quickly grasped this point, feeling a surge of anger. Ever since the establishment of Ninghai Country, he had anticipated the threat from Chu State. He had even thought about changing this predicament, about striving for supremacy and joining the battle for The World. But ultimately, with a rebellion within his own country, all his efforts went up in smoke. Now Su Xuange had come to terms with reality, knowing he wasn¡¯t cut out for a struggle for supremacy, and neither was Su Country. His only thought now was to preserve this foundation and pass it on to his descendants. ¡°But why, why even this wish of mine, you must snatch away!¡± Su Xuange clutched the letter, grinding his teeth in rage, feeling the anger peak within him. The thought of over a decade of toil resulting in Su Country being worse off than when it was first founded, while Lu Yuan, who also started with a single state, had now become a dominator of six counties, made jealousy and hatred boil in his heart. ¡®Fine, if you leave me no way of life, I will show you that this land of Lingnan is not a place where those southwestern barbarians can simply roll over and manipulate at their whim.¡¯ Biting his teeth in secret rage, Su Xuange then immediately shouted to an attendant by his side, ¡°Someone, go quickly and summon the messenger from Song State.¡± The threat from Chu State and the movements of these past days had not only been noticed by Su Country. Even Song State, located in the most challenging part of Yangzhou, had keenly sensed the threat and had sent a messenger a few days ago intending to strike a partnership with Su Country. Previously, Su Xuange had his reservations about cooperating with Song State. After all, other states might not understand the strength and situation of Song State due to the distance. But Su Country, which was Song State¡¯s immediate neighbor, couldn¡¯t possibly be unaware of the threat from Song State. This was a powerful country that, regardless of area, population, or military strength, was far stronger than Su Country. On Song State, Su Xuange could even see the shadow of the former Changsha Country. The same country sustained an army of one hundred thousand with just one county, expanded half a county of territory through an alliance with other states. The same clarity in domestic politics, with people living in peace and happiness. The same formidable strength and wisdom in the monarch, revered as Martial Marquis. No matter how one looked at it, Song State resembled a smaller version of Chu State, or rather, a Chu State of old. If Song State were given time, perhaps after another decade, it could reach the current stature of Chu State. As someone who had personally witnessed the rise of Chu State, watching another Chu State emerging behind him, how could Su Xuange not feel threatened and dread? This dread even surpassed the threat from Chu State. Although Chu State was next to Su Country, it was located to the north, separated by mountains, appearing as if in a distant, separate world. Thus, the threat posed by Chu State wasn¡¯t felt as intensely by Su Country. However, between Su Country and Song State, there were clear waterways, no mountains separating them, both lands flat as plains, where a fast horse could travel from Yulin City to Songping City in just five days. With both capitals so close to each other, it was evident how simple and easy it would be for Song State to launch an attack on Su Country. And indeed, that was the case. After sensing the threat from Song State, Su Xuange regularly deployed half of the Divine Sword Army to the southern border of Su Country to ward off an advance from the north. With such a relationship in place, it¡¯s no wonder that he would be apprehensive about Song State¡¯s offer of cooperation. While Chu State¡¯s threat was great, Su Xuange also feared that inviting Song State would be easy, but sending them back would be difficult. Should Song State¡¯s troops enter Su Country and turn on it after repelling Chu State, there would be little chance to fight back then. It was this concern that made him hesitant to agree to the cooperation between the two countries. But now¡­ The thought of Chu State¡¯s army gathering, and their spearhead already pointing toward Su Country, meant it was no longer about worrying about being annexed by Song State in the future. But rather, without seeking help from Song State, Su Country could very well be eradicated by Chu State immediately. With this in mind, Su Xuange cast aside his concerns and turned towards the olive branch extended by Song State. It wasn¡¯t just Su Country and Song State. As Chu State¡¯s troops and movements became increasingly evident, Nanhai Country had already dispatched messengers to Jinling, begging for help from their nominal suzerain. Jinling too was showing frequent activity, sending messengers to Nanhai Country in several waves. Even within Ning Country, a large number of troops and horses were assembling in Yuzhang, many martial marquises were transferred to the main camp at Pengli to inspect the troops and familiarize themselves with the military. Even the southwestern countries of Dali and Nanzhao sensed the brewing storm and began to covertly amass their forces. Liang State to the north had also noticed the shifting winds, beginning to assemble troops and horses in Jiangxia, though their target was unknown. Only Zhou Country, having just concluded a major spring looting war against the barbarians, was licking its wounds in the dark and was too weakened to do anything significant. The rest, due to the movements from Chu State, were all following suit and gearing up. In no time, the entire region south of the Yangtze River and the lands of Yangzhou were filled with an atmosphere of brewing storms and a sense of oppressive foreboding. A cloud of war loomed over everyone¡¯s head, like a powder keg waiting for a spark to ignite it, and then explode violently, impacting all nations. Chapter 802 - Chapter 802: Chapter 347 Confrontation Timing Chapter 802: Chapter 347 Confrontation Timing June 10th. As envoys continued to travel back and forth, after extensive communication, the rulers of Su and Song, each leading their chariots, arrived at the border between the two countries. Outside a small city named Hongbi, they constructed an altar to offer sacrifices to the heavens and announced their oath, formalizing their alliance. Subsequently, both countries withdrew the heavy troops stationed at the border, leaving only the county soldiers to maintain order, no longer viewing each other with hostility. Su Country also dispatched fifty thousand elite troops to officially enter the territory of Song Country. After joining forces with the Divine Sword Army of Song, a combined force of seventy thousand elite soldiers marched northward and stationed themselves in Cangwu Prefecture, the northern gateway of Yulin County. The intentions of the two countries were clear¡ªto unite in order to withstand the heavy pressure of Chu State. This was like a signal. Fueled by the actions of the united army of Su and Song, Southern Sea Country finally spirited up, calling for draftees everywhere within the nation. They mustered fifty thousand robust men, along with the original fifty thousand standing troops, creating an army a hundred thousand strong. However, this hundred-thousand-strong army did not march northward like Su and Song, intent on meeting the enemy beyond their own borders. They were directly stationed within the capital, Nanhai City, resolute in their determination to hold fast, showing no inclination to venture out. Then there was Ning Country. After meeting with several envoys from Southern Sea Country one after the other, Shen Qiu, the Heavenly Son of Ning, used the unrest in the Southern Border and the frequent disturbances by petty villains as an excuse for the need to suppress them with force. Therefore, Jianwu, the Heavenly Son, announced he would officially embark on a western tour. Accompanied by fifty thousand of the forbidden army, they grandiosely set out for Yuzhang to inspect the various battalions and horses there. With the might of his formidable army, he aimed to deter the disloyal hearts across the world. Indeed. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï The ¡°petty villains¡± referred to by Ning are, without much thought, none other than Chu State. And the western tour of Shen Qiu is also clearly aimed at Chu State. Although the pretext was to inspect the troops. But as everyone knows, whenever a large army is dispatched, the generals must count the soldiers, inspect the troops, sacrifice to Heaven, and bolster morale. With the Heavenly Son of Ning arriving in Yuzhang Prefecture, it could very well be that in the midst of inspection, he might suddenly announce his personal command, leading hundreds of thousands of troops on a Western Expedition. This was highly possible. After all, with the arrival of Shen Qiu, sixty thousand troops of Ning had already gathered at the border between Ning and Chu. In addition, including the Heavenly Son himself, there were ten Inborn Grandmasters. One could say that aside from the troops stationed in the local prefectures and those defending against Liang at the Northern Border, all the mobile military forces of Ning that could be mobilized were concentrated above the border of Chu Ning. If the battle began, it would be a nation-engulfing war against Chu without any reserves. Such an attitude demonstrated that Ning was prepared to go to war and to fight a war that could engulf the entire nation. And with subsequent troop movements by Su, Song, Southern Sea, and Ning, by this time, a combined force of seven hundred seventy thousand troops from various countries had amassed on Chu¡¯s eastern and southern frontiers at the border. These forces, without exception, harbored hostility towards Chu and were subtly united against it. If Chu dared to attack any one of them, the remaining three would undoubtedly pounce from all sides, biting into Chu. This was akin to pulling one hair and moving the whole body; there was no avoiding it. From this, one could see just how much pressure Chu¡¯s continuous expansion in recent years had brought upon the surrounding countries. It could compel sworn enemies like Su and Song, eternal foes like Su and Ning, to set aside past grievances and unite against a common adversary. If spoken of, Lu Yuan would be remembered throughout history. ¡­ With the countries united, they tacitly formed a coalition against Chu State. Yet, the clouds of war did not ignite immediately. The oppressive atmosphere, apart from continuing to envelop the entirety of Yangzhou, was still brewing. Although the outside world speculated and even concluded that Chu was going to launch a Southern Expedition, in fact, Lu Yuan was not in much of a hurry for this great war. The reason was simple. The time was not yet ripe, or to put it another way, he was not entirely confident. Not being confident did not mean that he lacked faith in his ability to cope with the pressure from Ning while sending out troops for a Southern Expedition. Although Ning was formidable now, with fourteen Inborns and an expanded army of eight hundred thousand, these were not enough to dismay Lu Yuan. Chu State also had ten Inborns by now, and the standing army had already expanded to six hundred seventy thousand, in addition to Li Xiong and the hundred thousand troops from vassal states under his command. With such strength, it was not much different from that of Ning. If they truly went to battle, relying on the strength of Lu Yuan and his two avatars, Chu would have an edge over Ning in terms of powerful forces. Supported by an equally sized standing army, Lu Yuan was entirely confident that he could repel any potential attacks from Ning while also pursuing the Southern Expedition. Therefore, Ning was not a concern. What truly caused him dread was the Nine States Immortal Gate led by the Purple Cloud Taoist Master. In today¡¯s world, Lu Yuan stood among that small echelon at the very top. To outsiders, that meant he was at the level of a Dao master. But being at the Dao master level didn¡¯t mean he could rest easy without concern. In Ning, on the same level, there was the Purple Cloud Taoist Master. Moreover, within the Purple Cloud Dao, there were also numerous cultivators with magic power. All these individuals had sufficient strength to pose a threat to Lu Yuan¡¯s safety. Now with Purple Cloud Dao clearly standing with Ning, if Lu Yuan were to act against Ning or engage in battle with them, it was uncertain whether these cultivators would intervene directly to aid in fighting against him. This scenario was quite likely to happen. Thinking of possibly facing all the cultivators of an Immortal Sect, even with all his confidence, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel the situation was thorny and dreadworthy. Chapter 803 - Chapter 803: Chapter 347 Confrontation Timing_2 Chapter 803: Chapter 347 Confrontation Timing_2 It was precisely because of this point that even though the Chu State¡¯s forces were ready and the food and fodder had been allocated, they could launch a Southern Expedition at any time. Yet, with everything ready to go, he still did not order the attack. He simply let the outside world churn with rumors, as various messages spread far and wide. Chu State remained as immovable as a mountain, merely continuing to amass troops and supplies, readying itself to strike at any moment. It must be said, this posture only made outsiders even more puzzled. This hesitant yet poised stance bred endless speculation, leaving many bewildered as to what exactly Chu State intended to do. The tens of thousands of Chu troops, poised but not deployed, also filled the neighboring countries with dread, fearing Chu was concocting some scheme, and thus, out of self-preservation, they were forced to gather their armies as well. Song, Su, Southsea, Ning, Liang, Zhou, Dali, Nanzhao¡­ These countries, which bordered Chu State and also had conflicts or grudges with it, found themselves inevitably swept up in the massing of troops, gathering their military forces to varying degrees as well. The regions both north and south of the Yangtze River had, in effect, fallen into a strange arms race. And as soon as this competition began, many started to complain bitterly. Assembling a large army and maintaining it without marching was not a simple matter. To do this, a large number of readily deployable elite soldiers were needed, as well as even more civilian workers to support these troops with various services. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Just this point alone meant countless people were mobilized. And during this mobilization, those conscripted were entirely removed from production, solely consuming supplies. This meant that a vast amount of supplies was being consumed meaninglessly. Take Chu State, for example. According to what Lu Yuan knew, for the Southern Expedition, he had assembled one hundred thousand vassal troops and sixty thousand members of the Forbidden Army. In addition, there were two hundred fifty thousand civilian workers mobilized to transport grain and to serve these troops. In total, four hundred ten thousand people, all of whom were robust adults with sizable appetites, and considering the consumption of some livestock as well, Chu State was spending a total of ten thousand shi of grain every day. Ten thousand shi of grain a day, that¡¯s three hundred thousand shi a month and three million six hundred thousand shi a year. And that was only because the army was encamped and not on the march, not requiring long-distance transportation of grain. Had it been necessary to transport grain over hundreds or thousands of li, the consumption of grain would have doubled or even tripled, reaching an unimaginably astronomical figure. And that was purely the consumption of grain alone. This battle saw Lu Yuan conscript two hundred fifty thousand civilian workers, which also meant that two hundred fifty thousand young and strong men were gone from local production. To gather these people, Lu Yuan had almost completely conscripted the young and strong men from the six prefectures in the southern part of Dongting. The absence of these people from local economic activities almost guaranteed that the grain output and commercial activities of the southern Dongting prefectures would suffer a crippling blow. For these six prefectures, a drastic reduction in this year¡¯s taxes, even to the point of deficits requiring central government subsidies, was a foregone conclusion. A peaceful standoff that had yet to erupt into war, and already Chu State¡¯s consumption was so great. As for the other countries that were similarly affected and threatened by Chu State and had no choice but to follow suit in mobilizing large armies for a standoff, they must be experiencing the same challenges. Chu State, with its rich grain-producing areas in Jianghan and Dongting as well as the Xichuan Plain, which had been redeveloped into another grain-producing area through the years of immigration and military settlement, was not lacking in resources. With three major grain-producing areas at its disposal, as well as forty million shi of grain accumulated over the years, Lu Yuan was confident he could handle an annual consumption of merely several million shi of grain. Moreover, with the conquest of Hanzhong, acquiring 1.6 million households, and the recent capture of 300,000 people from Longxi at the start of the year, Chu State¡¯s total population had officially exceeded the ten million mark, reaching a total of 10.7 million. In terms of population, Chu State had officially reached the standard of a hegemonic nation. With so many people, the lack of production from two hundred fifty thousand civilian workers locally would not be too impactful. Therefore, continuing to maintain this consumptive strategy was not an issue for Chu State at all, let alone for a year or two ¨C even ten years would pose no problem. However, what Chu State could accomplish, other nations might not be able to. Ning Country to the east had been at peace for many years, accumulating a fair amount of wealth, also a master in its own right, and was likely able to cope with a consumption war with Chu State. But for Su and Song countries to the south, it was not so certain. Su and Song, situated in the impoverished southern wildlands, with a terrain that is mountainous and bereft of plains, have been notorious for their poverty. Song Country fared a little better. Its capital, Songping, was located in a region that had the Red River Plain, which was barely considered half a grain-producing area, but still not affluent. And in the previous years, both countries had followed Chu State in their campaigns against the Southwest Barbarians, each expanding a significant amount of territory and establishing counties and prefectures. Expanding territory is generally a positive development for a country. It signifies strong martial prowess and also increases strategic depth. However, everything has two sides. As these two countries expanded into new territories, they naturally took on the burden of developing these lands. Like earlier Lu Yuan, who had executed several large-scale immigration projects to develop Dongting, Qianzhong, and Xichuan, at the peak of the effort, Chu State had to support the livelihoods of more than two million immigrants, cover their long journeys, build housing in their new homelands, invest in some farming tools and seeds for their initial production, provide six months to a year of free grain supply, and grant a three-year tax exemption. Chapter 804 - Chapter 804: Chapter 347 Confrontation Timing_3 Chapter 804: Chapter 347 Confrontation Timing_3 ¡°` In addition, a heavy military presence must be stationed in the immigrant areas, responsible for clearing out wild beasts, bandits, resistant locals, as well as suppressing any unrest among the immigrants. Which of the above is not an extreme drain on resources? During the hardest times, to support these immigrants, develop new territories, and maintain local garrisons, Chu State had to expend tens of millions of stones of grain each year, and an equal amount of silver. Originally, to sustain this consumption, Lu Yuan had invested the entire production of three counties and seventeen prefectures, over six million subjects, into this immigration project, and even then, had barely managed to get by through external plundering. Thus, what we see today is the flourishing outcome after all the hardship, the achievement of a great empire. But while Chu State had the underlying strength to support immigration, where could such capacity come from for the two smaller countries of Su and Song? Always known for its poverty due to constant unrest and wars, Su Country¡¯s people had long been trapped in hardship. Now burdened with the immigration of half a province and four prefectures, and having to support fifty thousand soldiers and a large number of nobles, the country was already at its limit. Song Country was somewhat better off, barely maintaining the immigration expenses thanks to the Red River Plain. Yet, aside from immigration, Song had also adopted a strong military policy. For a small nation of two million people, supporting a standing army of one hundred and fifty thousand was akin to impoverishing soldiers and waging incessant war. All these policies were practically a repeat of the erstwhile Changsha Country. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Lu Yuan was well aware of how destitute his nation¡¯s treasury had been during the time in Changsha¡ªso poor that it could starve a rat. By adopting the same policies for its expansion, Song Country rapidly grew stronger; however, it also impoverished itself in the process. Thus, after joining Lu Yuan in the static confrontation, the two countries soon found their treasuries exhausted, lacking money and grain, struggling to continue. In just two months¡¯ time, by early August, the hastily assembled seventy thousand United Army of Su and Song collapsed due to the lack of funds, showing signs of disintegration. If it were not for the emergency allocation of funds and grain from Nanhai Country, which gave both countries a lifeline, the alliance between the two countries would have officially collapsed and become but a name alone, effectively nonexistent. Even so, Nanhai Country had limited power and couldn¡¯t support the two indefinitely. Dragging on, there would inevitably come a day when the three countries would have to withdraw their armies and give up the confrontation with Chu State due to insufficient funds and grain. Although Ning Country received news of this situation and realized the United Army was in a dire state, it was separated from Su and Song by a thousand miles and numerous mountain ridges. Under such circumstances, even if Ning had ample grain, the cost of transporting it to the territories of Su and Song was stifling. Transporting supplies over such long distances for the Seven Nations Army was almost as demanding as supporting an army of seven hundred thousand. Such excessive expenditure was unbearable for Ning Country. Moreover, it was simply too wasteful to spend so much for mere tens of thousands of soldiers. With the vast amount of money and grain that would be wasted, it would be better to recruit an additional two or three hundred thousand soldiers domestically. This would not only strengthen one¡¯s own forces but also ensure that the resources were spent on one¡¯s own country. Therefore, for Su and Song, far a thousand miles away, Ning Country felt powerless and unable to help. Still, the Lingnan Region¡¯s strategic location is crucial. It not only can tie up a large number of Chu¡¯s forces from another front but also sustain the existence of Su, Song, and Nanhai countries, thereby thwarting Chu State¡¯s ambitions to conquer Lingnan and exploit its manpower and resources. ¡°` Therefore, failure here was not an option. Amid internal and external troubles, the Four Kingdoms¡¯ United Army had grown restless, considering whether to take the initiative and start the battle themselves. If the Chu State wouldn¡¯t come, then they would take the fight to them. Could it really be that the combined forces of four countries, with an army of a million strong, could not defeat the Chu State? However, although this suggestion was repeatedly proposed, in recent years the military might of Chu had been too formidable, and Lu Yuan¡¯s victories too dazzling. Each country dreaded him and the strength of Chu, hesitating to be the first to launch an attack. Each of the Four Kingdoms wanted another member to act first to test the strength of Chu. But with everyone playing the same game and unwilling to suffer any loss, this plan could only remain on paper. Despite this, both the United Army and Lu Yuan were well aware that the current standoff could not last indefinitely. Before the United Army, or rather the Lingnan Region¡¯s Three Nations, could no longer endure, they would definitely make a move and attack Chu. It was wishful thinking for the Chu State to hope to exhaust the enemy through attrition and win this war. The enemies were not fools; they wouldn¡¯t simply sit by and await their doom, watching as Chu defeated their allies one by one, growing stronger, and then devouring everything. The only uncertain factor now was how long the Lingnan Three Nations could hold out, or rather, how much patience they had left? Regarding this, Lu Yuan estimated that with the current resources of the Three Nations, they could last at most another two or three months, or even less. Within one or two months, they would become impatient and launch an early attack. On his side, in fact, he was also eager to commence the Southern Expedition. As time passed, the ties between the Four Kingdoms¡¯ Alliance grew tighter, subtly forming a trend of an alliance led by Ning Country against Chu. At the same time, the military strength within the Four Kingdoms expanded rapidly. The longer they waited, the stronger the enemies became. It was crucial to break their alliance before they fully united and developed their military strength to the limit, taking advantage of their moment of weakness to strike down a few smaller forces first. Otherwise, if the Alliance grew stronger, the price Chu would have to pay to defeat them would be much greater than now. So Lu Yuan too was finding it difficult to wait any longer, wanting to initiate the war himself. But as stated previously, the greatest uncertainty within the Nine Provinces was the presence of the Great Immortal Sects and Zi Yang, so, dreading this, he forced himself to suppress the urge to move his troops and continued to wait for the opportunity. Fortunately, after waiting for two months, that opportunity finally arrived. In the eighth month of the tenth year of Shenwu, two pieces of news arrived in succession at Baling. The first was from the Snow Plains. Following the success of the spring joint attack, the Snow Plains Nomads sent Messengers, seeking to invite Chu State to join them in this autumn¡¯s raid for grain against Zhou Country. Then there was Feishuang Tao. The Dao master Mo Li, leading his disciples, came personally to Baling to bid farewell to Lu Yuan. As time passed, the one-year period had finally arrived. These Grand Immortal Sects of the Nine Provinces were actually ready to honor their promise and head north to the Northern Dark City, to hold the grand event of Ascension for all. Chapter 805 - Chapter 805: Chapter 348: The North Is Without Worry Chapter 805: Chapter 348: The North Is Without Worry By the end of May this year, with the early summer upon us, the Barbarians¡¯ grain looting war this spring, following a major defeat and a loss of over two hundred thousand men, barely came to an end. Now, it¡¯s only been August, the start of autumn, and not even three months have passed, yet the Barbarians have once again sought cooperation with the Chu State. ¡°Do you plan to attack Helong again this autumn?¡± In Baling, within the palace, Lu Yuan looked at the Barbarian Messenger below and, after hearing the intention, couldn¡¯t help asking. ¡°Yes.¡± The Barbarian Messenger nodded, then earnestly said, ¡°This spring, thanks to Chu State¡¯s assistance, we were able to loot a large amount of grain. This summer, no one in the various tribes starved to death. But now, more than two months have passed since the grain brought from Helong has been consumed. This autumn, there will be a shortage of grain among the tribes. If we can¡¯t store enough food, during the cold winter and early spring¡ªover the long four to five months¡ªour people will freeze and starve to death. Therefore, while it is still autumn and before the snow falls, we want to raid Helong one last time for grain, as it¡¯s our last opportunity. However, Zhou People are strong, and relying solely on our Snowy Wilderness family, it¡¯s very hard to win against the Zhou People. The Great King and us are bound by marriage, and Chu State has always harbored hatred towards Zhou Country, our common enemy. Three months ago, Chu State and we cooperated, and we were both very satisfied with the coordination. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? Therefore, for this autumn¡¯s grain looting, the tribes have discussed and hope to invite Chu State to join forces with us, to plunder Zhou Country.¡± This Messenger explained the reason. Lu Yuan listened, fell silent for a moment, and then asked, ¡°How many troops and horses do you plan to mobilize this time?¡± The Messenger immediately answered, ¡°Since the fodder was abundant for the tribes during the summer, and the warriors and horses were well-fed and strong, we can mobilize more troops and horses than before. We, the Snowy Wilderness¡¯ one hundred and twenty-seven tribes united under the leadership of four kings, can bring forth eight hundred thousand Cavalry. All are warriors of the Snowy Wilderness, unrivaled in riding and archery. This grand deployment will surely strike terror into the hearts of the Zhou People.¡± The Messenger finally added a sentence, somewhat lacking in confidence. The so-called eight hundred thousand Cavalry sounds formidable and is certainly intimidating when spread, but in reality, they are only eight hundred thousand temporarily gathered nomadic herdsmen, akin to Village Braves and civilian workers. Those nomadic herdsmen, if faced with untrained civilian workers, might indeed overwhelm them with the grand momentum of a Cavalry charge, easily crushing and chasing them down. But if they encounter well-trained, armored, and sharp-lancing troops, then even a slight advantage in horse riding becomes utterly useless. Well-trained elite soldiers are courageous and fundamentally do not fear the so-called Cavalry charge. Moreover, warhorses also know fear, encountering formations of infantry and seeing the pikes and long spears in front of them, they too would know to be scared and to avoid. So long as the infantry is brave enough, not intimidated by the momentum of a Cavalry charge, does not collapse but maintains a tight formation, Then such Cavalry is virtually a joke. In front of infantry in solid formations, Cavalry that dares to charge forward is merely courting death. Often, a few thousand infantry in formation can withstand the charge of tens of thousands, or even a hundred thousand Cavalry, unmoved. Any attempt to forcefully break through would only result in bloody losses. Here¡¯s a classic example: In Lu Yuan¡¯s past life during the Three Nations era, Gongsun Zan, Governor of Youzhou, selected three thousand riders good at horseback from the Northern Border, had them all mount white horses, calling them the White Horse Righteous Followers. Leading them across the steppe, they were invincible; all nomads heard of them and changed color ¨C they were renowned Cavalry of The world. Then, during the Battle of Jieqiao, Gongsun Zan personally led the three thousand White Horse Righteous Followers in a frontal charge, Only to be greatly defeated by Yuan Shao¡¯s vanguard general, Qu Yi, who led eight hundred elite front-runners with shields and armor, releasing a torrent of Strong Crossbow bolts, decimating this elite Cavalry and beheading over a thousand. After this battle, Gongsun Zan¡¯s elite force was entirely obliterated, with his power never recovering, ultimately being vanquished by Yuan Shao. This is one of the most famous examples of using infantry to defeat Cavalry during the Three Nations period. Going back further, there was the case of Western Han¡¯s Li Guangling who led five thousand elite Danyang soldiers, battling against more than eighty thousand Xiongnu Cavalry. Although ultimately suffering a crushing defeat and being captured, he still managed to achieve a death toll of tens of thousands of the enemy. As for later generations, there were even more examples of infantry defeating Cavalry. Even during Emperor Taizong of Tang¡¯s time, there was a Nomad tribe of the Tie Le who utilized mounted infantry tactics; they relied on horseback mobility, dismounted for combat when battle approached, and then as infantry, they defeated Nomad Cavalry. In the end, leveraging this strategy, the Tie Le chieftain, Xue Yantuo, united the north of the steppe, becoming the Great Khan commanding hundreds of thousands of troops. During the Five Dynasties and Ten Kingdoms period, heroes emerged in abundance; multiple records show infantry defeating Cavalry, even charging against them, breaking tens of thousands, a hundred thousand, or even hundreds of thousands of Cavalry. From this, it is evident: How much of a threat a well-trained force of elite soldiers poses to Cavalry¡ªit¡¯s simply a crushing dominance. In front of such troops, the only advantage of Cavalry is their mobility. And if a force with elite infantry also possesses elite Cavalry, then those Nomad tribes will utterly lose their sole advantage of mobility. Facing infantry, defeated, and even if they want to flee, they won¡¯t be able to outrun well-trained Cavalry. The many theories of invincible Cavalry in later ages all stem from the propagation after the Later Jin invaded. Here¡¯s a digression: In fact, when the Later Jin subdued the steppe and united the Nine Provinces, their so-called elite of the Eight Banners were mostly mounted infantry, achieving victory through infantry and were especially adept at firearms. Chapter 806 - Chapter 806: Chapter 348: The North Is Without Worry Part 2 Chapter 806: Chapter 348: The North Is Without Worry Part 2 ¡°` Cough cough¡­ Back to the main topic. A complete force typically has organized infantry and cavalry; combined, these elements leave no weaknesses. As it happens. The Zhou Country to the north fits these criteria perfectly. Zhou Country¡¯s close proximity to the grasslands not only provides numerous ranches within the nation but also allows access to a vast number of horses from the plains, ensuring no shortage of warhorses. In fact, Zhou Country maintains a standing cavalry force of over one hundred thousand, all well-trained elite riders. When it comes to horseback archery, they are not inferior to the nomadic herders of the plains. Moreover, besides archery, these cavalrymen are even better at close combat charges, possessing frontal combat strength far superior to that of ordinary herders. With such elite cavalry and a vast number of elite soldiers, how could the occasionally starving nomadic riders of the Snowy Wilderness possibly be a match? This is also why the Snow Plains Nomads, despite fighting Zhou Country for many years, have repeatedly suffered defeats on the battlefield and never gained an upper hand. Because in frontal infantry battles, you can¡¯t beat the Zhou People. Charging with cavalry won¡¯t break the opponent¡¯s military formation either. Even in the skills of horseback archery, direct cavalry charges, you can¡¯t outmatch the elite riders of Zhou Country. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Even their steeds are no match for Zhou Country¡¯s meticulously bred fine horses, which move faster than any others. If you lose on the battlefield, you can¡¯t even escape as fast as they can. All these disadvantages combined, the barbarians are fighting a losing battle. The only advantage the nomads have gained in recent years was a few months ago when Chu State stabbed Zhou Country in the back, causing them to face enemies on both fronts and devastating their formations. Ultimately, the nomads found an opportunity and took several cities, seizing a substantial amount of grain. And due to this, Having tasted victory, the Snow Plains Nomads now seek to cooperate with Chu State again, aiming to gain more benefits. Regarding this request, Lu Yuan thought for a moment and did not refuse, saying, ¡°The Snowy Plains and my Great Chu are bound by the ties of kinship. Now that you have made a request, I naturally will not refuse it. ¡°The messenger can return and inform the chiefs of the four tribes that this autumn, once your side initiates military action, Great Chu will also move accordingly, supporting you from behind Zhou Country.¡± To weaken Zhou Country while extracting sustenance from them, and at the same time to weaken the barbarians¡ªthat was Lu Yuan¡¯s original state policy. And to achieve this state policy, the best tactic would be through the Helong region. The nomads and Zhou Country engage in two major battles there each year. If one wants to fish in troubled waters, to incite conflicts, there¡¯s no better opportunity than these two battles. ¡°Thank you, King Xie. We of the Snow Plains will never forget this kindness from the king and will be forever allied with Chu State, never to betray.¡± Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s promise, the nomad messenger¡¯s face lit up with joy, and he quickly made many promises and assurances. However, to these, Lu Yuan merely smiled. If this were the time when Dao Law was thriving, with divine beings high above and a so-called Heavenly Path destiny permeating everything, then such promises could be fairly trustworthy. But in this era of sacred absence, The Age of Dharma Decline, such oaths naturally hold little credibility or binding power. Others may or may not believe it, but Lu Yuan certainly doesn¡¯t, as he has seen no indication of any deities or Heavenly Path enforcing the execution of vows. Yet seeing the messenger¡¯s excited expression, he thought for a moment and proposed another deal: ¡°The messenger said, ¡®The Snow Plains tribes lack grain, and every year many people freeze or starve to death¡ªa tragic fate for humanity.¡¯ ¡°Fortunately, my Great Chu has had bountiful harvests in recent years and has accumulated a surplus of grain. If that¡¯s the case, where your side has people without enough to eat, and my Great Chu has abundant land but not enough people to cultivate it, why don¡¯t we trade, I offer grain and you offer people, to exchange population for grain, how about that?¡± Lu Yuan recalled a plan he had previously considered, to exchange grain with the barbarians for people. Rather than letting a large population die in vain from freezing or starvation, it would be better to use these surplus people, who could no longer be supported, to trade for grain with Chu. In doing so, people who would otherwise die might find a way of life. And Great Chu could obtain the labor needed to develop the territory. It would be a solution beneficial for both sides. Hearing this proposal, the envoy¡¯s eyes lit up, ¡°How exactly do you propose we exchange people for grain?¡± Seeing the envoy¡¯s interest, Lu Yuan smiled and said, ¡°Let¡¯s consider¡­¡± He then outlined his general ideas to the envoy, and after reaching a preliminary consensus, he summoned a minister to discuss the specific details of the trade with the envoy. As for Lu Yuan, after the envoy departed, he began to contact Huang Xuan to prepare the troops, getting ready to support the nomad¡¯s action come autumn. However, after the last surprise attack on Helong, the Zhou People suffered a significant setback and have since taken measures to strictly blockade the small path from Hanzhong to Longxi at Yang Pass. The Linguan Pass, which was initially used, has not only been expanded and reinforced, but its defense has also been increased to fifty thousand troops, accompanied by an Inborn Grandmaster. Such stringent defenses would be hard to breach, even for Huang Xuan leading Hanzhong¡¯s one hundred thousand soldiers. Therefore, the prospect of breaking through this route to enter Longxi again seemed impossible. Even if it were possible, Chu State would have to pay a tremendous cost. Although Lu Yuan didn¡¯t mind helping the barbarians and maintaining this so-called kinship, if such assistance came at a significant loss for himself, then the price would need careful consideration. Therefore, the plan to launch an assault from Hanzhong into Longxi had been vetoed by Lu Yuan after the last campaign. ¡°` Chapter 807 - Chapter 807: Chapter 348: The North Is Without Worry_3 Chapter 807: Chapter 348: The North Is Without Worry_3 ¡°` However, although Yangguan Road was no longer an option, there were other routes out of Longxi available to Chu State. Years ago when Lu Yuan began developing Hegu Prefecture, in addition to resolving the problem of the barbarians on the border of Xichuan Prefecture, he had another important objective, which was the little-known trail connecting Hegu and Longxi. This trail, referred to by Lu Yuan as the Forest Path, had been expanded and solidified over the years after extensive surveying and development. Compared to the past, when it could only accommodate a few or a dozen people, and where often the way forward was cut off, requiring detours over mountains and ridges, through treacherous cliff paths, the situation had improved significantly. Now, after construction, there was a path that allowed an army of tens of thousands to march through the forest and arrive in Longxi. Although a force of merely a few thousand or ten thousand was negligible compared to the grand battles involving hundreds of thousands between Zhou Country and the barbarians, it didn¡¯t amount to much and could hardly stir up any significant trouble. But for Chu State, the deployment of several thousand or over ten thousand soldiers was enough to benefit from the chaos and snag some advantages. At the very least, dispatching over ten thousand soldiers under the command of a competent general would suffice to breach some of the weaker county towns in Longxi and plunder their resources and population. What Lu Yuan wanted wasn¡¯t the annihilation of Zhou Country, nor the conquest of Longxi, and even less to genuinely assist the barbarians. What he sought had always been simply the resources and population of Zhou Country. To achieve that goal was enough. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Sending out a small detached army to penetrate Longxi and capture a few thousand people meant that Chu could establish a new small town. If they captured tens of thousands, they could build a new county town. With a hundred thousand people, they could even establish a new prefecture. In this way, little by little, with several ventures and over several years, perhaps a new prefecture could emerge. Moreover, this Forest Path led to a part of Longxi that was closer to the front line and an area where the powers of the barbarians and Zhou People overlapped. Chu State had just reached an agreement with the barbarians to trade population for grain, and at this moment, this path could serve as the trade route to transport people and resources. Thus, this matter was urgent, and Lu Yuan had to get in touch with Huang Xuan, having his own avatar personally supervise the matter to ensure peace of mind. ¡­ The connections between the barbarians and Chu State were being carefully and closely prepared. Meanwhile, in the North, as autumn arrived, Zhou Country, as in previous years, began to mobilize and brace themselves for the barbarians¡¯ annual raids for grain. Both sides were preparing for war. However, unexpectedly, the first great battle of the year for Zhou Country was not against the barbarians. On the 29th day of the eighth month in the tenth year of Shenwu, the Southern Territory of Wei Country launched an unannounced attack with an army of four hundred thousand, brutally invading Shuofang Prefecture of Zhou Country. Because a large proportion of the veteran elite troops had been transferred elsewhere, more than half of the soldiers in Shuofang were inexperienced recruits. Added to the sudden attack by Wei Country, Zhou Country wasn¡¯t well-prepared. Within just a short span of a few days, Shuofang Prefecture had lost more than half of its prefectures and counties, leading to a swift and disastrous collapse of the front. Only then did the surrounding nations realize that Wei Country had long been preparing for this war. Not only had they secretly amassed their most elite forces, but they had also gathered eight Inborn Grandmasters, including a World-renowned general who was a Second Inborn, to catch Zhou Country completely unawares. They had been holding back until this year when they saw that the veteran troops from Zhou¡¯s Northern Border were replaced with a large number of new soldiers, creating an opportunity for attack. Years of planning culminated in this sudden launch, yielding gratifying results. With half of Shuofang Prefecture fallen, Zhou People¡¯s defensive system in the North was torn asunder. The original three hundred thousand-strong garrison of the Northern Border suffered losses exceeding two hundred thousand, and among the new recruits recruited this year, a great number were lost. Even with several Inborn Grandmasters from Wei Country besieging them, one of Zhou Country¡¯s Inborn Pillar Generals died on the battlefield, life extinguished in Shuofang. Faced with this formidable unexpected foe, along with the prospect of the Wei people breaking through the Northern Border and reaching Guannei, the monarchs and ministers in Chang¡¯an City were thrown into a frenzy. The Heavenly Son of Zhou Country hastily decreed the immediate withdrawal of the one hundred and fifty thousand elite Northern Border troops that had been deployed to Longxi, ordering them to Shuofang to resist the Wei forces. He also commanded the prefectures of Henan and Nanyang to each send fifty thousand troops back to Guannei to urgently reinforce the Capital. In addition, two Pillar Generals were summoned from the Helong Prefectures to serve as commanders of the army. Through these hasty reassignments, a force of two hundred and fifty thousand, along with two Inborn Pillar Generals, was eventually scraped together to march north to Shuofang and confront Wei Country. However, as a result, with the departure of the one hundred and fifty thousand elite troops and two Pillar Generals from the Helong Prefectures, Zhou Country¡¯s military presence there suddenly became greatly depleted. Only a little over three hundred thousand troops and three Pillar State Generals were left. This was the weakest period after years of conflict with the barbarians. Seeing such an opportunity, the barbarians would naturally not let it slip. Almost the instant that the Northern Border elite had left, eighty thousand barbarian cavalry charged down from the Snowy Wilderness and stormed into the Helong Prefectures. Now, with a significant loss of troops, Zhou Country, albeit still capable of resisting and even defeating the barbarians, struggled to dispatch sufficient forces to encircle and pursue the wide-spread invasion of the Snow Plains Nomads. In an instant, countless barbarians poured into the Helong Prefectures. Every prefecture, county, town, village, and hamlet they passed through became a site of battle and carnage¡ªthe Northwest was ablaze with war. In the turmoil, Huang Xuan too chose his troops, and still personally led them through the Forest Path out from Hegu, plunging once again into Longxi. Zhou Country, with uprisings in both Shuofang and Helong, a million mighty enemies invading, and hundreds of thousands of troops worn out from relentless pursuits, no longer had any capacity to attend to other matters. Even the defense along the Han River to the South weakened, as Nanyang Prefecture¡¯s substantial number of troops had been withdrawn to Guannei, resulting in the complete loss of deterrence against Chu State. At this point, Chu State¡¯s Northern Border was free from any threats. By this time, Lu Yuan could finally rest easy, turn his full attention to the Southern Expedition, and deal with the Four Kingdoms Alliance spearheaded by Ning Country. But before that, he still wanted to see Mo Li. To find out what this Master of Feishuang Tao had to say to him before departing. ¡°` Chapter 808 - Chapter 808: Chapter 349 Decisive Battle Begins Chapter 808: Chapter 349 Decisive Battle Begins It was still Meichang Garden. At this time, the plum blossoms had not bloomed, but the fruits were already ripe. Lu Yuan picked a plate of bright red plums and was tasting wine and chatting with Mo Li. A short while later, after exchanging conversations, the two began to discuss the main topic. ¡°This departure, all seven cultivators from my Feishuang Tao, will set off together to Northern Dark City. Afterwards, only the lineage dedicated to the protection of the sect through the practice of martial arts will remain.¡± Mo Li first spoke of his own sect, and then, glancing at Lu Yuan, he continued, ¡°Over at Purple Cloud Dao, the arrangement is similar. All eleven cultivators in their sect will likewise depart, leaving behind only the guardian deities. There will be no one else left who is on the path of cultivation. After this, Your Majesty can be at ease and need not worry about cultivators interfering in the struggle for dominance in the world and meddling in the mortal affairs.¡± Inside Yangzhou, the atmosphere was becoming increasingly oppressive each day, and even the farmers in the fields could sense the looming clouds of war. However, this atmosphere continued to build without relief, incessantly adding sparks to the powder keg, ensuring that when the explosion eventually happened, it would be all the more violent. Many outsiders speculated, wondering if King of Chu¡¯s persistent patience implied some ulterior motive? But cultivators like Mo Li, or rather, people in the fairy gate, had a faint guess about Lu Yuan¡¯s waiting. In the secular world, everything was ready. Whether it was Chu State or Ning Country and the other Four Kingdoms, all were prepared; they were only waiting for war to break out. Yet, it had not. Because on top of the secular, there were transcendent forces like the Immortal Sects, influencing the situation in the world. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï And as a part of the Immortal Sects, and indeed a dominant part, Mo Li, of course, knew very well what the Worldly Dynasties thought of these transcendent Immortal Sects? That¡¯s why, with just a bit of contemplation, he understood Lu Yuan¡¯s thoughts. Even though he understood, he had no intention of changing anything. As everyone dreaded, the Immortal Sects were high above and did not interfere with the mundane on the surface. But in reality, every little aspect of the mundane had the shadow of the Immortal Sects¡¯ control behind it. This was an interest that belonged solely to the Immortal Sects. As a beneficiary, Mo Li naturally wouldn¡¯t trouble himself with thankless efforts to make changes. And moreover. Their last remaining group from the Immortal Sects would soon ascend and depart. At that time, all the shadows that hovered over the mundane would be completely withdrawn. The Purple Cloud Dao, which Chu Country now dreaded, would soon lose that fearsome power. Everything would happen naturally, without anyone having to put in much effort to achieve all that was needed. The only cost was time. And now, the time had arrived. However, after hearing Mo Li¡¯s words, Lu Yuan felt quite surprised in his heart. This was not astonishment at the other party¡¯s departure, but rather, amazement that in The Age of Dharma Decline, so many cultivators still remained in these sects. Just Feishuang Tao had seven cultivators. Purple Cloud Dao even had twelve. The bottom of the barrel of these Immortal Sects was indeed profound. Initially, not engaging with these Immortal Sects was indeed a wise decision of his own. Otherwise, even with his current strength, if he had to face a dozen or so cultivators attacking him all at once, even though most of them did not enter the Immortal Sect and had cultivation not reaching the First Qi. But with dozens or even tens of spells bombarding him, coupled with a few possible Magical Artifacts, it would have been fatal. ¡®Fortunately, the remnants of the old era are finally going to leave completely.¡¯ After listening to Mo Li, Lu Yuan¡¯s expression subtly shifted, and he thought to himself, but quickly regained his composure and said with a light smile, ¡°It¡¯s a good thing for Fellow Daoists to leave this cage. In today¡¯s world, where spiritual beings have vanished and disasters are frequent, it¡¯s akin to the end times. Living in it, one may have transient enjoyment of mortal pleasures, but it¡¯s ultimately difficult to transcend. Now abandoning this small cage and going to the wider heaven and earth, from then on to live untroubled, the Immortal Method is in sight. As for me, at this moment, tied by the mortal dust, I find it hard to extricate myself. Once Fellow Daoists leave, it¡¯s uncertain whether there will still be a day of transcendence for me in the future.¡± Having heard this, Mo Li could not help but smile. But then, thinking of something, he sighed and said, ¡°If one could ascend as desired, it would indeed be a good thing. But the affairs of the Northern Dark City have always been shrouded in mystery and fraught with danger. No one knows whether it will be fortune or doom after Ascension, nor whether the legends of the Immortal Realm are true or false. Tens of thousands of years have passed since ancient times. We, the later generations, rely on the scant scriptures to glimpse the secrets of the ancients, believing we have mastered the Great Dao, but how is that different from sitting at the bottom of a well and looking at the sky? Bliss or bane. Perhaps after transcendence, it is but a larger cage or a land of death. Meanwhile, you, remaining in the Nine Provinces, may be in a smaller cage, but perhaps you can spend a safe life and ensure lasting blessings for your descendants, can¡¯t you? This, too, may not be a stroke of luck.¡± This Dao master of Feishuang Tao suddenly became filled with melancholy and lament. The matter of Ascension was of great importance, concerning the lives of all. No matter how impassioned and resolute the original planning was, without leaving any room for retreat. Yet when the time drew near, it was inevitable to feel some trepidation and shrink back. As well as feeling bewildered about the uncertain future. At this moment, this was Mo Li¡¯s state of mind. Lu Yuan looked at him and comforted him, ¡°The tales of the Immortal Realm have existed since ancient times. Over tens of thousands of years, countless individuals have ascended. Since the sages of ancient times have chosen this path one after another, among them many who became immortal or divine. These seniors had Dao Law and cultivation far superior to ours; their choices suggest, does it not, that the path of Ascension is viable?¡± Chapter 809 - Chapter 809: Chapter 349 Decisive Battle Begins_2 Chapter 809: Chapter 349 Decisive Battle Begins_2 ¡°Fellow Daoist, don¡¯t think too much, just ascend with peace of mind.¡± ¡°Perhaps,¡± Mo Li chuckled, then reined in his emotions and said earnestly, ¡°Tomorrow I shall lead my disciples to set out, and Purple Cloud Dao should also be leaving at this time. If you don¡¯t want any variables to occur, you can wait another half a month. By then, we cultivators from the Nine Provinces should have all embarked on ships to sail out to sea, far from the mainland. At that time, no matter what great events happen in the Nine Provinces, we who drift upon the sea will be unaware and even less able to intervene. From then on, everything in the Nine Provinces will also have nothing to do with us.¡± Considering that the Dao Inheritance of Feishuang Tao and Chu State were already bound, Mo Li was giving this final hint and admonishment. After listening, Lu Yuan responded in all seriousness, ¡°I am aware, thank you for your good advice, Fellow Daoist.¡± ¡°Mm.¡± Mo Li nodded, and then didn¡¯t say much else about it, simply continuing to enjoy wine and discuss the Dao with Lu Yuan, quite at ease. And Lu Yuan treasured this last exchange with a cultivator from the Nine Provinces, earnestly asking for guidance. For a time, the conversation between the two was quite merry. It wasn¡¯t until the sky began to darken that he reluctantly bid farewell to Mo Li. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Atop the palace walls. Watching Mo Li¡¯s figure fading into the twilight, Lu Yuan, who had gathered his thoughts from the discourse, couldn¡¯t help but whisper a sigh, ¡°The Age of Dharma Decline begins from today.¡± He knew that with the departure of Mo Li and the last group of cultivators, and with Northern Dark City draining all the active spiritual energy between Heaven and Earth, the true Age of Dharma Decline for the Nine Provinces was about to officially arrive. After which, Immortals will become extinct, and myriad spirits will vanish; this is known as the Dharma Decline. This is the sorrow of all those who aspire to transcendence, yet it is also the zenith for all mortals. Without the intervention of innate fighters, Immortal Sect cultivators, or any other extraordinary forces, the world will completely belong to ordinary people. Following thereafter, strength will no longer decide everything; instead, cunning and status will become the main theme of the world. This is the era of mortals, and it is also his era, the one transcendent being. The golden age for the long-lived is about to unfold. The myriad lights of the city showcase Baling¡¯s prosperity, and the worldly aura of bustle is rich. Gazing at the vast starry sky and the boundless Milky Way, Lu Yuan¡¯s thoughts drifted far away. ¡­ The next day, there were no farewells, nor did anyone get alarmed. At the pier outside Baling City, aboard a boat flying the flag of Feishuang Tao, Mo Li and his seven companions quietly departed. They would follow the rivers eastward, hurtling towards the vast sea. Lu Yuan received the news as he was just waking up from his sleeping quarters, only to be momentarily stunned before he ignored it and began his morning routine of cultivation. Though when Mo Li and the last cultivators from the Nine Provinces left, he was truly the number one expert in all the Nine Provinces. Within the whole Nine Provinces, there was no one else who could match him. But even so, Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t completely carefree. Merely relying on cultivating one level of energy might make one the first person in the world. But being the first person in the world doesn¡¯t mean one is Unrivaled in the World. Otherwise, in the previous era of Immortal Sects, Mo Li and the others wouldn¡¯t have retired to the mountains. At that time, they still had to offer benefits to support a Worldly Dynasty for cooperation. Although cultivators talk about purifying their hearts and desires, avoiding being entangled by the Mortal Dust and disturbing their Dao heart and cultivation. All of that is nonsense. As long as one has a steadfast heart of the Great Dao, one can still enter the Immortal Method¡¯s gate, just like Lu Yuan did. Moreover, while the Immortal Sects claim not to interfere in the Mortal Dust on the surface, In reality, they still accept disciples as their wings, and secretly court the powerful to manipulate politics. These various actions prove that Immortal Sects are not as clean on the surface as they seem, not so transcendent and detached. Immortal Sect cultivators, too, have their own selfish desires. Yet these cultivators with selfish desires dare not stand upright and directly establish a Dao Country on earth. This only shows that within the secular world, there is also power that they dread. And this power, naturally, belongs to those Inborn Grandmasters in the secular world. Once one reaches the Inborn realm, a Grandmaster can rival a cultivator with magic power. In the current age, although there are no Grandmasters, If about a dozen Inborn Grandmasters banded together, even a Dao master who has cultivated one level of energy would have to momentarily avoid the edge. A dominating country in the world, all of their resources put forth, can basically muster more than ten Inborn. It is precisely these Inborn Fighters who create a balance with the Immortal Sect Cultivators, allowing Worldly Dynasties to have the confidence to negotiate with Immortal Sect Cultivators. Therefore, even if Lu Yuan will soon become the top expert in the world, To truly use his own power to sweep across the Nine Provinces is actually rather forced. With individual martial strength, to flex in Yangzhou might not be too challenging. But if Lu Yuan truly wanted to rely on Dao Law to unify the world, Then it¡¯s likely that all the Inborn Grandmasters in the Nine Provinces would first unite to eliminate this anomaly that exceeds the norm. And the Inborn Grandmasters of the Nine Provinces, even if calculated as about a dozen per province, have already exceeded a hundred. If you add up the Grandmasters of the ten regions, the innate quantity is even more than two hundred and might even reach three hundred. With such a large innate combat power, they don¡¯t even need to unite completely; just two or three provinces working together would be difficult for Lu Yuan to handle. So being the first person in the world sounds good, but it¡¯s not really that significant. To truly be Unrivaled in the World, one must continue to improve their strength, at the very least, reaching the state of Gathering Two Qi, and perhaps then one can barely claim to suppress the Nine Provinces single-handedly. However, given Lu Yuan¡¯s cautious nature, even if his cultivation reaches the stage of Gathering Two Qi, he would still feel it¡¯s not secure enough. Only by reaching the state of Gathering Three Qi, forming a minor success in Magic Power within oneself, and achieving a minor success on the Immortal Method, can one truly claim a stable and worry-free existence. Chapter 810 - Chapter 810: Chapter 349 Decisive Battle Begins_3 Chapter 810: Chapter 349 Decisive Battle Begins_3 ¡°` And with his current cultivation progressing, gathering two levels of Qi, it will be a matter of just a year or two. Gathering three Qi, at most, won¡¯t exceed thirty years. This is still because the Heavenly and Earthly Aura is thin. Otherwise, with the characteristics of the Way of Control Pneuma, if it were the ancient times, reaching the level of gathering three Qi would take only a few years. In this Age of Dharma Decline, for cultivators, it¡¯s truly a cage, driving one to despair. No wonder Mo Li and the others, knowing well the uncertain path to Ascension, still embarked on this unknown journey without any hesitation. ¡­ On the ninth day of the ninth month in the tenth year of Shenwu, Feishuang Tao left Dongting and set out toward the Northern Dark City. On the thirteenth of September, a spy in Yuzhang Prefecture reported that a large ship had left Tianluo Mountain, sailed out of Pengli Lake, and headed down the river. A few days later, messages arrived from Yuhua Mountain of Yong State, Tian¡¯an Mountain of Qing State, and Panlong Mountain that small squads had left the three passes and sailed away in ships. At the same time. The countries of the Nine Provinces, during this period, all hastened their various activities, making many preparations and precautions. Within Yang State, Ning, Su, Song, and the states of Nanhai were especially active, with troops and horses being mobilized in quick succession, all indications of an impending great war. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï And in Chu State. On the twenty-fifth of September, the sky was clear, and the weather was warm and sunny. Outside the walls of Baling, Lu Yuan officially ascended the platform to appoint generals, in front of all the army commanders, he granted the title of General of Cavalry to his avatar, Qingyunzi, and ordered the formation of the Southern Expedition Military Expedition. He appointed Qingyunzi as the Commander, with the Lord of Kunhai, Li Xiong, serving as the deputy. He then declared that the Southern Sea Country had betrayed the alliance covenant, colluded with Ning Country, and plotted against Great Chu, acts unforgivable. He commanded the two to lead the army southwards, to subdue the alliance-breaking Southern Sea Country. After this edict was read aloud before the army, it was immediately dispatched across the world, proclaiming the matter to all. Instantly, the whole of Baling was abuzz. The spies from various countries remaining in Baling soon learned of this event, and then used all kinds of methods at an extremely fast speed to convey the news back to their countries. In the midst of this turmoil, Qingyunzi and Li Xiong, leading their personal guard and light cavalry, set out at night toward the main camp at the front line. This time, the army of the Southern Expedition Military Expedition had been raised months in advance. Comprising a hundred thousand vassal troops along with sixty thousand of the Forbidden Army as the main force, the total strength of the army was one hundred and sixty thousand. They had already been positioned at the front lines in Lingnan. The expenses for the front-line troops, as well as civilian workers and Village Braves, were also fully prepared. At this moment, all that was left was for the Commanders, both principal and deputy, to arrive, which would allow them to swiftly mobilize the Military Expedition and lead the army southwards. Thus, after barely a day, once Qingyunzi and Li Xiong reached the Military Expedition at the front line, by the second day, a vanguard force of fifty thousand troops, under the leadership of Li Xiong, mightily marched south. Formally crossing the borders between Chu and Southern Sea and pressing into Lingnan. The Southern Sea Country was momentarily shaken, and wherever the Chu soldiers passed, the locals surrendered without resistance. The Lord of Southern Sea, struck with terror, could only gather his troops. In addition to an army of a hundred thousand already assembled in his capital, he hastily conscripted another fifty thousand people, holding steadfast within the capital city and refusing to venture out. He also sent out Messengers one after another, rushing to Song, Su, and Ning Countries, requesting reinforcements. The smoke of war instantaneously ignited across Lingnan¡¯s land and quickly spread in all directions. ¡­ Pengli main camp. A swift boat cut through the river waters, speeding downstream, and quickly conveyed the developments from Baling back. Once the news reached the camp, Shen Qiu, who was reviewing documents, instantly dropped the brush in his hand and stood up straight. ¡°Pass the order for the generals to come to the tent for discussion immediately,¡± he said. Shen Qiu¡¯s face showed a hint of excitement as he quickly gave orders to his guards on either side. After ascending the throne and ruling for ten years, journeying with the imperial convoy to the west, and waiting for several months, the moment for a decisive battle with Chu State had finally arrived. So, upon hearing that Chu State had already mobilized troops against Southern Sea Country, Shen Qiu immediately summoned his generals, intending to declare war on Chu State. Yang State could not accommodate two overlords, and there had to be a battle between Chu and Ning. After this battle, the victor will sweep through Yang State, unifying Jiangnan. The loser, however, will be utterly defeated and lose everything. Shen Qiu had staked everything he had, and now was the moment when the battlefield would decide life and death. Jianwu, the eleventh year, the first day of October. Upon receiving news of Chu State¡¯s military action and confirming that a great war had already broken out in Lingnan, that Chu and South Sea had engaged in battle, and that the Southern Sea Country had sent Messengers asking for assistance, On this day, Shen Qiu, the Heavenly Son of Ning Country, likewise built an altar outside the Pengli camp, prayed to Heaven, and declared that Chu State¡¯s tyranny was unforgivable for unprovoked attacks on the vassal state of the Celestial Empire and that military intervention was necessary. Subsequently, he appointed Shangguan Ming, the Marquis of Wucheng, as the Southern Expedition Grand General and Marquis of Wuyang, Yuan Yi, as the deputy, ordering them to form the Southern Expedition Military Expedition, leading a hundred thousand troops to march south and rescue the Southern Sea Country. Furthermore, he gave orders to Martial Proclamation Marquis Yang Jing, far away in Xiangyang, to serve as the Northern Expedition Grand General, with Marquis of Wuyi, Li Tai, as his deputy. Together, they were to form the Northern Expedition Military Expedition, commanding fifty thousand naval forces and fifty thousand infantry and cavalry from the Ning Country¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture, to assault Chu Country¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture. At the same time, Shen Qiu, assuming the role of Commander himself, formed the Western Expedition Military Expedition, leading the remaining five Martial Marquises and fifty thousand naval forces and three hundred and fifty thousand infantry and cavalry as the main force, assaulting Chu Country¡¯s Dongting Prefecture with the aim of capturing the Chu Capital, Baling. Soon, Ning Country¡¯s three-front army totaling six hundred thousand land and sea troops marched mightily to subdue Chu Country. As the news spread, Yang State was shaken, and the neighboring countries were shaken. By the time this ripple reached Lingnan, Song Country¡¯s ruler Xie Ning proceeded northward, meeting once again with King Su Xuan Ge, and the two nations pledged together once more. After the pledge, on the spot, the two monarchs read out Chu Country¡¯s list of crimes, enumerating various acts of tyranny, and after a blood oath with wine, they collectively informed the world, announcing a campaign against the tyrannical Chu. Immediately thereafter, Song Country dispatched seventy thousand troops, Su Country dispatched thirty thousand, and the two nations combined forces of one hundred thousand, with Xie Ning as the main commander of the army and Su Xuan Ge as his deputy, announcing their Northern Expedition to subdue Chu Country. The armies of the two countries crossed the Five Ridges and headed straight for Chu Country¡¯s Lingling Prefecture in Dongting, initiating the conflict. In just half a month, warfare engulfed Song, Su, Ning, and Southern Sea ¨C four states surrounding Chu Country were caught up in war. A million-strong army from the five nations swiftly mobilized, encircling Chu Country¡¯s Southern Expedition and triggering a decisive battle. From then on, the great war that enveloped Yang State officially began. ¡°` Chapter 811 - Chapter 811: Chapter 350 Dividing Forces to Respond Chapter 811: Chapter 350 Dividing Forces to Respond Baling, Royal Palace. Upon receiving the first message that Ning, Su, Song, and other countries were sending troops, Lu Yuan immediately convened Sun Siwen, Lan Cai¡¯er, and other Inborn Grandmasters to discuss major military and political affairs. Summoned by the order, these individuals quickly arrived in the palace hall. Sun Siwen, Lan Cai¡¯er, the Spiritual Woman, and Han Hu¡ªthe four remaining Inborn Grandmasters in Baling City¡ªwere now all gathered together. ¡°Today, I send out troops to subjugate Southsea. Ning, Su, Song, and other countries have all risen up to provide support, leading their armies to join me in attack. The four kingdoms of Jiangdong and Lingnan have now combined forces, nearly a million strong, with countless good advisors and generals; this is indeed a moment of crisis for Great Chu.¡± Lu Yuan glanced at the four people in the hall and first outlined the current situation, then changed his tone and passionately said, ¡°Though the enemy has a million soldiers, Great Chu also has tens of thousands in its Elite Army, with an unending stream of fine soldiers and good generals, no weaker than the enemy. This battle against Jiangdong and Lingnan¡¯s four kingdoms, where they come out with all their might, is both a danger and an opportunity. According to my original plan, to unify Yangzhou and progressively pacify Lingnan, amassing strength, and then taking Jiangdong downstream along the river¡­ All these steps, if to be fully completed, would take at least ten years at the very least. If there are any discordances along the way, it might take even longer. If we forcefully attack Lingnan and Jiangdong, although the enemy is weaker than us, they will hold their cities in defense and avoid battle. To take over each city, even if successful, we don¡¯t know how many soldiers we will lose or how much time it will waste. But now these enemies have come out on their own and even taken the initiative to attack Great Chu, thus forfeiting their greatest advantage. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã? As long as we defeat their main force on the battlefield and see their elite troops wiped out in an instant, the million-strong army will vanish in smoke and dust. Then, even if the enemy¡¯s territories are vast and their cities fortified, without anyone to defend them, they will be nothing but fruit waiting to be collected. Wherever the Great Chu banner arrives, each place will undoubtedly submit to the sight of it.¡± At this point, Lu Yuan paused for a moment, then continued with an air of confidence that brooked no doubt, ¡°Therefore, in this battle, Great Chu can only win, not lose. If we win, the vermin of Jiangdong and Lingnan will all be reduced to ashes. If we lose, even if the Altars of Soil and Grain of Great Chu may survive, we will be utterly debilitated. We not only would lose soldiers and generals but also forfeit vast amounts of territory, eventually retreating to a corner, becoming a wretched small country. Even the direct extinction of our dynasty is not impossible. All of you are either my closest kin or friends, or loyal subjects, and you share a common interest with Great Chu; our fate is interwoven. This is not just my battle alone, but also yours, and more so, Great Chu¡¯s battle. I hope you all can assist your king, yourselves, and Great Chu, in defeating the formidable enemy and securing the final victory and its glory. I implore you!¡± Having finished speaking, Lu Yuan bowed to the few people in front of him who were either the dearest to him or amongst his most trusted. Whether they were his wife, his friends, or his ministers. As their husband, friend, or king, had he had any demand, he could have given a direct order, and they would not have refused. But he felt that if you employ people, you should do so with sincerity, If he planned to have these people risk their lives for him, even if these friends and family were willing, the respect and comfort they deserved, as well as the pre-war motivation and consensus, were still necessary. Although it is everyone¡¯s duty, the difference between doing it and not doing it is substantial. Just as it was at that moment. Lan Cai¡¯er and the others were moved by Lu Yuan¡¯s words and quickly moved aside to bow in response when they saw him bow. ¡°Husband, you and I share honor and disgrace as husband and wife; this battle touches on the very foundations of our Chu State. As your wife, even if I have to give my all, I shall protect Great Chu through and through.¡± ¡°Indeed, even though I have not been in Great Chu for long, the King has shown me extreme favor, shown abundant goodwill to the Snowy Wilderness I hail from, and has repeatedly offered help. Now that Great Chu faces difficulty, as a citizen of Great Chu, I will not shirk my responsibility and vow to share its trials and tribulations.¡± ¡°I have known Brother Lu since our humble beginnings. We have supported each other for over twenty years and created the foundation of what Great Chu is today. Now, seeing our original aspirations about to be fulfilled, with Yangzhou on the cusp of unification and a golden age approaching, At such a critical moment, this final battle, how could I possibly shrink back? Brother Lu, today let us together overcome this difficulty, undergo a complete rebirth from the flames, and bring true glory to Great Chu.¡± Lan Cai¡¯er, the Spiritual Woman, and Sun Siwen, whether they knew Lu Yuan for a long time and shared deep feelings, or had common aspirations and the same grand vision, or had been graced by Chu and received his kindness, were all inseparable from Great Chu. Thus, upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s heartfelt words, they too were moved to manifest their true feelings. Even Han Hu, who otherwise had a mere superficial relationship of Monarch and Ministers with Lu Yuan, mostly a partnership, under the current atmosphere, was moved to say, ¡°Though the tiger comes from an external domain, it too has been instructed from youth and has been well-versed in the classics, understanding righteousness. Today, the King harbors ambitions of sweeping the world, and has declared Feishuang Tao the state religion; I have long been one with Great Chu. Should the King command me, the tiger dares not disobey. The likes of Jiangdong and Lingnan are trivial; I am willing to clear them away for the King.¡± After each of them spoke their piece, their attitudes were unmistakably evident. Seeing this, Lu Yuan could not help but be overjoyed, and his heart was filled with satisfaction. Although the words they had shared seemed somewhat sentimental and contrived, he was certain that after speaking them, their resolve and attention to the upcoming battle had been heightened. If their fighting spirit was originally at a hundred, it had now broken past limits, reaching beyond a hundred and ten. Exactly how much depended on how much they cared for Chu. But regardless of how much fighting spirit and resolve they gained, it was undoubtedly a good thing. Chapter 812 - Chapter 812: Chapter 350 Dividing Forces to Respond_2 Chapter 812: Chapter 350 Dividing Forces to Respond_2 Therefore, after confirming this point, Lu Yuan burst into laughter and said with ease, ¡°Good, with the support of you all, I have no worries, and neither does Chu State.¡± After a few laughs, Lu Yuan¡¯s expression turned solemn, and he didn¡¯t continue to act affectionate but instead said in a serious tone, ¡°Since all of you have made up your minds, I will issue orders directly concerning this battle. Queen, Han Hu.¡± Hearing their names called, Lan Cai¡¯er and Han Hu stepped forward and answered, ¡°Your servant (subject) is here.¡± Lu Yuan said, ¡°The thieves from Su and Song Countries have invaded our Southern Border, attacking Lingling. These two foes have an army of a hundred thousand, with a vast momentum. Figures like Xie Ning and Su Xuange are not easy to deal with. If they are not stopped, Lingling will not hold, and the Southern Border will not be at peace. Thus, I appoint the Queen as the Defense Commander of Lingnan, and Han Hu as the Deputy Defense Commander, allocating sixty thousand of the Forbidden Army to you, as well as ten thousand county soldiers from the five prefectures near Lingling to be at your disposal. You must stop the enemy outside the national gate, block the army of the Two Countries at Lingnan, and not let them take a single step into Dongting.¡± The United Army currently combined by Su and Song Countries is roughly a hundred thousand strong, with Inborn Grandmasters including the monarchs of the Two Countries, amounting to two individuals. Now, by arranging for Lan Cai¡¯er and Han Hu to lead the troops, with the mobilization of seventy thousand soldiers and relying on the strength of defense, they are fully capable of resisting the United Army of the two countries. With them there, Su and Song Countries dreaming of breaking into Dongting is nothing but wishful thinking. Lan Cai¡¯er was also a revolutionary who rose up to command a large army. How high her level is cannot be said, but she does have the basic knowledge. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Therefore, upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s arrangement, she immediately understood the advantage and confidently said, ¡°With the assistance of General Han Hu and seventy thousand troops, we can surely block the thieves of Lingnan and protect the Southern Border of Chu State.¡± Han Hu also said, ¡°This subject will surely assist the Queen and guard the Southern Border for the king.¡± Seeing the good morale of both, Lu Yuan smiled and nodded, then continued, ¡°Besides your forces, I have also sent a message to Shi Hanliang, the Defense Commander of Qianzhong, instructing him to lead forty thousand soldiers from Qianzhong out through Qing Shi Path, attacking Yulin County from behind, and directly penetrating into the heart of Su Country. Additionally, the Three Nations of Jianchuan, Chilih, and Kunhai have also been ordered by me to assemble troops in the southwest, with Kunhai marching southward to attack Su Country¡¯s Tonghai County. Although the troop counts for these two routes are not large, the back of Su Country is equally vulnerable. Tens of thousands of soldiers on each route are enough to cause extreme chaos, and even penetrate the core, capturing Yulin City. The Queen, engaged in battle with Su and Song Countries in the Southern Border, may contact Shi Hanliang and the allied forces of the Three Nations at will, as I will instruct them to heed the Queen¡¯s orders and coordinate accordingly. Should an opportunity for battle arise, the Queen may make decisions independently, without the need to consult me specifically. All Southern Border matters, I entrust to the Queen.¡± Lu Yuan looked at Lan Cai¡¯er, imparting his instructions earnestly. In this Great War, Chu State must face four adversaries, while also remaining vigilant of Zhou Country and the various tribes of the southwest, and even paying attention to the actions of Liang, which does not border us. Lu Yuan was also unable to address all these various aspects and objects himself. Therefore, it was inevitable to delegate the necessary power. The campaign against Nanhai Country itself has a force of one hundred and sixty thousand soldiers, with his Avatar Qingyunzi, as well as the heroic figure Li Xiong to assist. With these two, they are more than capable of dealing with Nanhai Country and Ning Country¡¯s reinforcements, so there¡¯s no need for extra concern. As for the United Army of Su and Song, after careful contemplation, Lu Yuan decided to entrust it to his Queen, Lan Cai¡¯er. From experience, Lan Cai¡¯er is, after all, someone who has commanded a large army of over a hundred thousand Miao People. Regardless of the outcome, this experience puts her ahead of many others. In terms of strength, Lan Cai¡¯er is an Inborn Grandmaster, and over the past decade, she has moved beyond the rank of a newcomer, becoming a senior Grandmaster. In the realm of Inborn, her strength is quite commendable. In terms of identity, as the mother of the nation and Lu Yuan¡¯s legitimate wife, she possesses the authority to command all under Lu Yuan, ensuring they obey orders earnestly. With these three points considered, among those currently available to be mobilized within the country, no one is more suitable than she is. Beyond the troops directly under Lan Cai¡¯er, Lu Yuan also allocated the forces of Qianzhong County and the soldiers from the Three Subordinate Countries of the southwest. In addition to the forty thousand of the Forbidden Army that Lu Yuan just mentioned, Qianzhong County also has thirty thousand local prefectural and county soldiers. Jianchuan, Kunhai, and Chilih, even after the troops dispatched by Lu Yuan, still have over a hundred thousand soldiers left. With the support of these two routes of troops, the army led by Lan Cai¡¯er in the Southern Border could reach nearly three hundred thousand in number, with as many as five Inborn Grandmasters. With such strength, it¡¯s not just a matter of stopping Su and Song Countries from breaking into Dongting. It¡¯s very possible even directly eliminating these two countries. In fact, that was Lu Yuan¡¯s arrangement. That¡¯s why he let Lan Cai¡¯er seize the moment, and if the opportunity arises, directly eradicate these two countries, eliminating one threat at a time. Of course, if Su and Song Countries strongly resist and they can¡¯t be quickly overcome, it¡¯s not a concern. After all, combining the regular forces of these two countries amounts to two hundred thousand soldiers, and with additional civilian workers, it can easily reach four to five hundred thousand. There are also veteran Grandmasters like Su Xuange and Xie Ning. If they are determined to defend to the death, they won¡¯t be easily defeated. Lu Yuan has anticipated this as well. So if Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s forces find it hard to achieve their goal, there¡¯s still the backup route led by Qingyunzi. Qingyunzi is Lu Yuan¡¯s Avatar, with strength equivalent to an Inborn Grandmaster of the Second Realm, and is among those who excel in slaughter within that realm. With this Avatar and the assistance of Li Xiong, Lu Yuan does not believe Shangguan Ming, sent by Ning Country to Lingnan, could be their opponent. Chapter 813 - Chapter 813: Chapter 350 Dividing Forces to Respond_3 Chapter 813: Chapter 350 Dividing Forces to Respond_3 Therefore, it was only a matter of time before Qingyunzi defeated the united army of Ning Country and Southsea. Once he had dealt with Southsea, he could lead his troops westward to aid Lan Cai¡¯er. By then, with attacks from both sides, Su Xuange and his like would certainly be doomed to defeat. The same principle applied. If Lan Cai¡¯er could successfully resolve the conflict with Su-Song, she too could lead her troops eastward to assist Qingyunzi. In any case, whichever side won on the battlefield first would cement Chu State¡¯s advantage in the Lingnan Battlefield, and thus secure an overall advantage in the war against the Four Kingdoms. The battle for Lingnan, after Chu State committed seven Inborn Grandmasters and nearly five hundred thousand troops, was already on invincible land. However, Lan Cai¡¯er hadn¡¯t thought so much about these deep strategic layers. She simply felt a profound sense of responsibility, seeing that Lu Yuan had entrusted her with the entire military affair targeting the three countries in the southwest and the war against Su-Song. Therefore, meeting Lu Yuan¡¯s encouraging gaze, Lan Cai¡¯er stated firmly, ¡°Your consort will surely sweep away Su-Song and will not let Your Majesty down.¡± She did not speak many empty words, but that simple statement already showed her determination. Lu Yuan nodded slightly. As his queen for many years, he naturally understood what was in her heart at the moment. After arranging for the affairs in Lingnan, he continued, ¡°Apart from the three Lingnan countries, Ning People north of the river at Xiangyang have also amassed a hundred thousand troops, intending to invade our Great Chu at Xiangyang. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? In Xiangyang, though Great Chu has one hundred and ten thousand troops, the enemy has dispatched not only a large army but also two Martial Marquises, led by none other than Yang Jing. With only the Grand General facing these two, he would be undeniably alone and outnumbered. Hence, I have urgently ordered the Defender of Xichuan, Han Hua, to rush to Xiangyang to assist the Grand General against Yang Jing¡¯s forces. With the Grand General and Han Hua there, Xiangyang will surely be safe and sound.¡± Yes, Xiangyang will be safe and sound. In Xiangyang to the north of the river, Lu Yuan deployed eighty thousand Forbidden Army troops, thirty thousand county soldiers, and stationed his disciple Zhou Qing to defend the city. At first glance, these forces appear strong and not inferior to the invading Ning People. In reality, out of these one hundred and ten thousand troops, a large portion must also remain to guard against Zhou Country to the north of the river. Although currently Zhou Country appears harried by invasions from barbarians and Wei people, and is overwhelmed, one fact cannot be concealed. That is, in the region of Zhou Country¡¯s Nanyang Prefecture and Xiangyang Prefecture, Zhou People still maintain one hundred and fifty thousand troops and a Pillar State Grand General. This force is already immensely formidable. If mobilized in full, they could fight a war on the scale of a small local country. Therefore, even if it seems unlikely on the surface that Zhou Country¡¯s Nanyang Prefecture and Xiangyang Prefecture would send troops against Chu State due to the threat from Liang to the east, Just like Chu State, currently under attack by the army of the Four Kingdoms, still gritting its teeth to detach a force to join barbarians in attacking Helong and seizing the opportunity for gain. Who knows if Zhou Country might do likewise, send a small detached army of thirty to fifty thousand people, and while Chu State is dealing with Ning Country, suddenly cross the river to the south and attack Xiangyang Prefecture? All these were plausible scenarios. For Lu Yuan, equally schooled in cunning, it was impossible not to guard against this move. So, of the one hundred and ten thousand troops in Xiangyang, at least thirty to fifty thousand would have to remain to guard against Zhou Country. With these troops diverted, those left to face Ning Country amounted to only about sixty to seventy thousand. Sixty to seventy thousand troops, along with Zhou Qing and Han Hua, could naturally only just hold their ground against Ning Country¡¯s hundred thousand. To expect them to crush Ning Country was not impossible, but rather unlikely. Considering this, Lu Yuan did not have high hopes for Zhou Qing and the others. He only needed them to secure Xiangyang and prevent Zhou Country from seizing lands to the north of the river, and that would suffice. Of course. Always prudent, Lu Yuan liked to prepare multiple backup plans in his affairs. Like the situation with Lan Cai¡¯er, where on the surface there appeared to be seventy thousand troops, but in reality secretly included Qianzhong and the vassal armies of three countries. In Xiangyang, to prevent any mishap, in addition to the troops under Zhou Qing, Huang Xuan¡¯s main force stationed in Hanzhong Prefecture would serve as a safety net. If Zhou Qing could not hold back Ning Country, the one hundred thousand Forbidden Army troops from Hanzhong could proceed down the Han River at any time, rushing to support Xiangyang. With this avatar in place, even if they could not secure victory on the battlefield of Xiangyang, they could ensure the safety of Xiangyang City and protect Chu State¡¯s territory to the north of the river. Lu Yuan had arranged contingencies for both the north of the river and Lingnan, truly an exhaustive effort. However, these arrangements were just briefly listened to by those in the hall; they did not comment. The military affairs in Xiangyang had already been decided to be Zhou Qing¡¯s responsibility. This Grand General of Chu State had been stationed in the north, inside Xiangyang City, since the time of Changsha and had rarely returned to Baling. In the current gathering, except for Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen, even Lan Cai¡¯er was not very familiar with Zhou Qing. Therefore, no one could offer any suggestions regarding Lu Yuan¡¯s arrangement, apart from understanding the layout. Nor had Lu Yuan expected them to offer any suggestions. So after simply discussing the configurations of the battlefield of Xiangyang, he briefly moved on, finally saying, ¡°The battles in the north of the river and in Lingnan have been assigned. What remains is the main force led by Shen Qiu of Ning Country.¡± This army of Ning Country, the strongest among the four nations¡¯ forces, was nearly half of the entire united army, with a formidable force of four hundred thousand, and as many as six Inborn Grandmasters. Such military might is almost unrivaled in Jiangnan. Therefore, I will lead the army myself to head off this force. Let me, let Great Chu, have a showdown with Shen Qiu, with Ning Country, across the vast river to the south, and decide the victor, the master of Yangzhou. In this battle, the remaining one hundred and forty thousand Forbidden Army troops in Dongting Prefecture, twenty thousand county soldiers, and fifty thousand naval forces, totaling two hundred and ten thousand troops, will all engage. In addition, two hundred thousand civilian workers will be conscripted within the prefecture to defend towns and fortresses along the border, in order to guard against Ning People. I will serve as the Commander, supported by the Prime Minister and the Spirit Consort. The three of us will be responsible for facing Ning Country¡¯s Inborn Grandmasters.¡± Lu Yuan looked at Sun Siwen and the Spiritual woman, making the final arrangement. Chapter 814 - Chapter 814: Chapter 351: The High-Stakes Gamble Chapter 814: Chapter 351: The High-Stakes Gamble After the assignments were distributed, everyone quickly sprang into action. The Four Kingdoms were pressing in aggressively, and even the frontier of Chu State might have already clashed with the enemy forces. The situation was extremely dire. In such times, there was no room for delay. Therefore, after receiving their orders and the Tiger Tally, Lan Cai¡¯er, along with Han Hu, hurried towards the front line of Lingling Prefecture that very day. At the same time, directives from Baling dispatched various messengers and spirit eagles brought from the Snowy Wilderness, sending them through different channels to Qianzhong County and the three vassal states of the southwest. Sun Siwen also took his position in Baling, beginning to coordinate the overall situation according to Lu Yuan¡¯s command, allocating supplies and troops for all sides, playing a central role. As for Lu Yuan, leading the Spirit Consort, he took charge of Dongting Lake¡¯s fifty thousand naval forces, journeying by boat downstream toward Jiangxia City at the border of Chu Ning. Jiangxia City was a frontline battlefield; Chu State had always stationed tens of thousands of forbidden troops there, but now the number had risen to a hundred thousand soldiers and horses, forming the first line of defense against Ning Country. According to the messages from the front, the main vanguard army of Ning Country led by Shen Qiu had already arrived outside of Jiangxia City. Now the Ning Army was building camps and forging weapons outside the city, preparing for a siege. The cavalry outside the two armies had started to engage in small-scale confrontations, with several battles involving more than a hundred men each, and the intensity was quickly escalating. At the front line now, only a few of Lu Yuan¡¯s disciples tasked with commanding the various forbidden troops were holding the line. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï Although these disciples were also direct disciples, whether in terms of strength, ability, or experience, they were far inferior to Chu Wei, Li Liang, and others. Not to mention when compared with those Innate Generals. Entrusting them with watching over the front line, Lu Yuan naturally felt uneasy. Therefore, once the meeting concluded, and the mobilization and task distribution were completed, he set out at the earliest time, leading the assembled naval forces to the front line. Jiangxia City is by the water and can even be described as a riverside city. Outside the city, there are piers and water fortresses, which are connected with the city and can be regarded as part of it. To defend the city, it¡¯s not enough to rely solely on forbidden troops comprised of infantry and cavalry. There also needs to be a navy stationed in the water fortresses to help seal off the river surface and intercept Ning Country¡¯s naval forces in order to secure the city. Therefore, to confront Ning Country¡¯s naval forces, Lu Yuan this time gathered all domestic naval power, assembling all fifty thousand members of the navy, in hopes of protecting the waterway. Even to prepare for any eventuality, he had also called out Chu Wei, who was in closed-door cultivation striving for the Inborn realm, planning to have this disciple, who created Chu State¡¯s navy, direct and command this great battle. As for whether this would slow down Chu Wei¡¯s progress in breaking through to the Innate realm, Lu Yuan could no longer afford to worry about that. Without the navy to guard the river passages, the Ning People¡¯s navy could ascend the river, block the Yangtze¡¯s surface, and cut off Chu State¡¯s north and south along the river. They could even deploy Ning Country¡¯s infantry and cavalry through their navy to infiltrate various places along the coast of Chu State, advancing deep into the prefectures of Xichuan and Qianzhong, and assaulting the heartland of Chu State. Having one more or one less Innate combatant, for the camps that had both invested more than ten Innates, was important but couldn¡¯t fundamentally affect the overall situation. However, if the naval forces were wiped out or severely damaged, this could indeed affect the overall situation. The relative importance of the two was self-evident. At most, while Lu Yuan was with Chu Wei, he would have to fulfill his responsibility as a teacher more, teaching him Innate techniques, which should also compensate for his distraction from the navy. ¡­ On the broad expanse of the river, thousands of warships of various sizes formed a staggered formation, cutting through the waves as they made their way downstream. Lu Yuan stood at the bow, looking at the dense morning fog, his mood somewhat somber. Jiangxia City was about two hundred li by water from Baling; with favorable winds like now, it would actually only take half a day to arrive. If all went well. By about one or two o¡¯clock in the afternoon, the naval forces should be able to reach Jiangxia City. By then, with these fifty thousand naval forces joining, the combined land and water forces of Jiangxia City would reach a total of one hundred and fifty thousand, and with his and the Spirit Consort¡¯s two Innate battle strengths, it should be enough to make the city as impregnable as a fortress, unbreachable by the Ning people. However, the stability of Jiangxia City did not necessarily mean the stability of Dongting Prefecture. Just like the capital, Baling City, Jiangxia City belonged to Yueyang Prefecture and was the furthest north-eastern fortress city by the water in northern Dongting. However far its influence radiated, at most it could only secure an area near Yueyang Prefecture, unable to exert much more expansive control. Yet the areas of Dongting Prefecture bordering Ning Country are not limited to Yueyang Prefecture alone. South of Yueyang Prefecture is Changsha Prefecture, also a fortified city, as well as the most important grain-producing area on the Dongting Plain, contributing over three-tenths of the grain produced in the prefecture. The significance of Changsha Prefecture goes without saying. Further south of Changsha is Hengyang Prefecture. This prefecture is also an important grain-producing area, though not as significant as Changsha, producing about fifteen percent of the prefecture¡¯s grain, and is equally important. Even further south of Hengyang is Luyang Prefecture, the site of the Seven Star Sect¡¯s rebellion ¨C half of Lu Yuan¡¯s starting base. While Luyang Prefecture is not a major grain-producing area, it is akin to Changsha and Hengyang Prefectures, bordering Yun County of Ning Country. Through these bordering regions, Ning Army from Yuzhang Prefecture could at any time send large forces to attack these three prefectures. Accordingly, to guard against this in the three prefectures bordering on Yuzhang Prefecture, Lu Yuan stationed a forbidden army in each of Changsha and Hengyang, arranging his last mobile forbidden troops in these two locations. Finally, in the remaining Luyang Prefecture, one thousand county soldiers from Dongting, along with six thousand prefectural and county soldiers from other regions, were stationed to take charge of defense. Chapter 815 - Chapter 815: Chapter 351: The High-Stakes Gamble_2 Chapter 815: Chapter 351: The High-Stakes Gamble_2 ¡°` But even so, with about twenty thousand soldiers in each prefecture, some without an Inborn Grandmaster to command them, the defense is still too hollow. So hollow that Ning Country would only need to dispatch one Inborn Grandmaster with fifty to sixty thousand soldiers to possibly break through the defense line of a prefecture and kill their way into the interior of Dongting Prefecture. And with the strength of Ning Country, drawing out such a detached army is undoubtedly extremely simple and easy. Meaning, Dongting Prefecture is actually in a state of extreme hollowness and deep danger. Lu Yuan had distributed forces across four battlefields, among which Xiangyang Prefecture, Nanhai Country, and the two countries of Su-Song, were equipped with full and even luxurious staffing of personnel and soldiers. In these three battlefields, Chu State had nearly reached an invincible position. But this invincible land was achieved on the premise of sacrificing the defense of Dongting Prefecture, allowing the main battlefield where Lu Yuan was located to be at a disadvantage in strength. Therefore, looking at the overall situation, Chu State could be said to be in a great advantage, even holding the winning ticket, everywhere else. Only in Dongting Prefecture, Chu State was at a disadvantage, even possibly on the verge of a great defeat at any time. Lu Yuan was deeply aware of this, and it was for the elimination of these risks that he felt a profound anxiety. He was now walking a tightrope, where a single misstep could send him plummeting into the abyss, shattering into a broken mess and losing everything. This was very dangerous. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã0 But if he did not do so, Dongting Prefecture might be stable, but the situations in the other three battlefields would become unfavorable or reach a stalemate. Once in a stalemate, Chu, Ning, and the other Five Kingdoms would enter a mere contest of underlying strength and resource consumption. This Great War would turn out like the war in the Snowy Wilderness and with Zhou Country, purely a contest of whose population is larger, who has more money, who has more grain, who can endure more death. Although he believed that he would definitely win this contest, relying on his own strength and underlying strength, Lu Yuan believed¡­ the victory might come five or six years later, or perhaps after a decade. And by then, the lands of Yangzhou would have been scarred by war, a complete mess, with its previous prosperity gone. In such a case, even if he won, as the victor, he would not gain much, it would only be a situation of mutual destruction. Therefore, to obtain sufficient victory and benefits, the war should not last too long, nor should its scale become too large. The best outcome would be to decide the victory in a few decisive battles, defeating the enemy in a short time, and then seizing all the spoils of war while the conflict had not yet spread. To achieve this goal, conventional methods obviously wouldn¡¯t work, and some unconventional means must be used. Such as¡­ Abandoning and weakening the strength of the main battlefield in Dongting Prefecture, and in turn strengthening the forces of the other three detached battlefields. Allowing the other three battlefields to quickly settle the victory for our side. After defeating the local enemies and consolidating the local resources, turn back to support the main battlefield. Eventually, all forces will be gathered to strike a final blow to the enemy, who has already weakened after three defeats, and win this Great War. All of these are Lu Yuan¡¯s true goals. And in order to achieve this goal, he must hold the weakened Dongting Prefecture, enduring until reinforcements from the other three battlefields arrive, ensuring Dongting Prefecture does not fall. What this contest boils down to is whether his own detached army defeats the enemy¡¯s detached army first, or whether the enemy¡¯s main force defeats his main force first; it¡¯s all about speed. In essence, Lu Yuan was engaging in a massive gamble. But he was willing to take the bet wholeheartedly. Because this gamble was not just about the ownership of Yangzhou; it was about the right to survive in this apocalyptic world, and about the hope that he could lead the Nine Provinces through this catastrophe in the future. For this greater goal, taking some risks at this moment and wagering on such a battle is nothing in comparison. If he wins, it will prove that the Heavenly Mandate favors him, and he is destined to be the master of the post-apocalyptic world. If he loses, it would be well to give up the ambition of contending for supremacy promptly, peacefully leading his family to find a place to hide for a few hundred years. When the transcendents of the world have vanished, he could then emerge in the post-apocalyptic world to build a nation and wrestle for power again. Actually, when carefully considered, that latter path is undoubtedly more comfortable, more relaxed. But Lu Yuan dares not bet on it. He dares not bet that after the destruction of the Four Extremes of the Nine Provinces, the remaining Central State would still exist as in ancient times, sustaining the people of this realm. If it could not, then this world would undoubtedly be on its last legs, entering a state of collapse. Staying in this world, Lu Yuan would be like waiting for a slow death; his ultimate fate would be to perish along with this world. This was not an impossibility. So, despite not knowing whether this conjecture would come true, as long as there was a sliver of possibility, he dared not gamble on it. Therefore, for the future, it is imperative to unify Yangzhou as soon as possible, to unify the Nine Provinces quickly, and then, by leveraging the Qi Luck of the entire Nine Provinces, extract the last remaining Spiritual Energy from the depths of the Heavenly Vault for his cultivation. Gathering the resources of an entire world to bolster one¡¯s own cultivation, to push one¡¯s strength to the limit, to be prepared for any dangers that might arise in the future. This is the driving force that motivates Lu Yuan to continue the struggle for power and to quicken the pace of unification. ¡°To Changsha, Hengyang, and Luyang, I have already asked Brother Sun to summon two hundred thousand civilian workers from within the country, to be dispatched to these three places for defense. With this, including the original soldiers, each prefecture should have about eighty or ninety thousand people stationed.¡± ¡°` Chapter 816 - Chapter 816: Chapter 351 A High-Stakes Gamble_3 Chapter 816: Chapter 351 A High-Stakes Gamble_3 ¡°` Although the number of people was still somewhat low, and their quality somewhat lacking, the sheer numbers meant that they could hold out for a month or two even against an Inborn Grandmaster or a great army of a hundred thousand. With this time to buffer, they could also calmly dispatch troops within the country, ready to rush to aid at any moment,¡± Lu Yuan gazed at the undulating waves, pondering silently in his heart and couldn¡¯t help but sigh. The forces at his disposal were still too few. The current Chu State, when all divisions of the standing troops were combined, amounted to approximately seven hundred and twenty thousand. The composition of these troops could roughly be divided into six parts. The first part was, naturally, the most numerous and the most elite, the Forbidden Army. Chu State now had twenty-five divisions of the Forbidden Army, totaling five hundred thousand soldiers. Among them, ten divisions of two hundred thousand were stationed in Dongting Prefecture, five divisions of one hundred thousand in Hanzhong County, four divisions of eighty thousand in Xiangyang Prefecture, two divisions of forty thousand in Qianzhong County, and one division of twenty thousand in Xichuan Prefecture. Additionally, three divisions of the Forbidden Army, sixty thousand strong, accompanied Qingyunzi on the Southern Expedition to Nanhai Country. The above were Chu State¡¯s main mobile forces and its main army, classified as Soldier. Besides, each of the six prefectures of Chu State also had ten thousand county soldiers as permanent garrison forces responsible for suppressing internal rebellions and defending against external enemies. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 Even when the troops of a prefecture were lacking, they could temporarily draw on county soldiers from elsewhere to come and support. Overall, there wasn¡¯t much difference between the county soldiers and the Forbidden Army, the only distinction being that county soldiers were mainly responsible for military affairs within a prefecture and had a fixed defensive region, equivalent to a local military district. Whereas the Forbidden Army was a mobile force, often running around the country. They went wherever they were needed, and thus were considered the central military. But whether it was county soldiers or the Forbidden Army, both were part of the Soldier sequence, and the disparity in their combat strength was not too great, being on the same level. With six prefectures, Chu State had a total of sixty thousand county soldiers, constituting the second strongest military force within the country. Apart from the county soldiers, there were also the Prefectures and Counties¡¯ troops. According to the prevailing regulations in the Nine Provinces, beneath the imperial central court there were prefectures; beneath the prefectures were counties; and beneath the counties were towns. Depending on their size, prefectures varied in number, more or less. Some had as many as ten, like the complete large prefectures of Dongting and Xichuan, which were divided this way. Others, like Xiangyang Prefecture, which was occupied by Chu, Zhou, and Ning Countries and divided into three parts, Chu Country possessed four prefectures while the other two countries each possessed three. This was the division at the prefecture level. Below the prefecture level, the division into Prefectures and Counties was more uniform. Basically, each prefecture controlled ten counties, and the number of counties didn¡¯t vary much, all following this figure. Therefore, according to this planning of Prefectures and Counties, the size of Prefectures and Counties¡¯ troops was also basically fixed. Each prefecture could raise one thousand Prefecture soldiers, and each county could raise a hundred County soldiers. In this way, a prefectural unit, with all its troops combined, would have one thousand Prefecture soldiers and one thousand County soldiers, totaling two thousand. These two thousand Prefecture and County soldiers belonged to the true local forces and were basically not transferred outside. They only handled local security and suppressed bandits and other small-scale, low-intensity conflicts. For national wars or foreign conquests and the like, Prefecture and County soldiers were rarely enlisted. The specific reason was not that they didn¡¯t want to use these troops, but rather that the combat strength of Prefecture and County soldiers, compared to real Soldiers, was indeed quite lacking. ¡°` Both considered regular troops, the prefecture and county soldiers received a monthly salary of three silver taels, while the combat soldiers received five silver taels. On occasions like New Year¡¯s and Dragon Boat Festival, prefecture and county soldiers could receive two instances of holiday bonus. However, combat soldiers received additional bonuses for Mid-Autumn Festival and Cold Food Festival on top of those two. Moreover, the bonuses and the silver taels given to the prefecture and county soldiers and the combat soldiers greatly differed. In extreme cases, the difference could be more than double. Therefore, when compared, the annual income of an ordinary combat soldier could be more than double that of the prefecture and county soldiers. If they took part in battles, there was a wartime allowance; those hiding as troops could even receive double or one-and-a-half salary, which made the income gap with the prefecture and county soldiers even larger. Let¡¯s take another example. Prefecture and county soldiers with a monthly salary of three silver taels compared to ordinary city laborers who could earn two silver taels a month if they worked hard enough. Those with some skills, such as chefs, blacksmiths, and carpenters, earning three to four silver taels was not out of the question. Even counting holiday bonuses, the annual income of a prefecture and county soldier was just about on par with an ordinary chef, blacksmith, or carpenter, only slightly better than the lowest-level laborers. Therefore, even if the salary of the prefecture and county soldiers was enough to support the family, life was still scrappy, far from affluent. Alternatively, combat soldiers could maintain their entire family¡¯s wellbeing and still have resources to spare for their own upkeeping. With enough money, naturally, they could indulge in food and drink freely, train their martial skills freely, and even afford some herbs for nourishment, leading a life of sheer bliss. Such a significant income disparity inevitably created a gap in the fighting ability of the prefecture and county soldiers and the combat soldiers, forming two distinct levels of combat effectiveness. One could only suppress bandits and civil unrest internally and maintain a semblance of public safety. The other could compete against other nations externally and quell large-scale rebellions internally without fear. It was these differences that made countries reluctant to deploy prefecture and county soldiers to the front lines for offensive operations, if not necessary. If cannon fodder was needed, it was cheaper to conscript more civilian workers. If they needed to crack tough nuts, prefecture and county soldiers lacked the capability. This neither-here-nor-there status led to a consensus among various nations. Prefecture and county soldiers were just for maintaining local law and order; they were not needed for other tasks. And with their combat ability being only slightly better than the militia, they found it difficult to take on significant responsibilities and were fundamentally ineffective. Chu State currently had fifty prefectures, amounting to about one hundred thousand prefecture and county soldiers, which constituted the third part of the combat power. Within Baling, there were about five thousand Jinwu Guards, specifically responsible for the city¡¯s internal security. Additionally, there were about five thousand palace guards responsible for the safety of the royal palace. These two groups of troops, totaling ten thousand men, represented the weakest part of the army sequence. Apart from the five sequences of the land army mentioned above, there remained fifty thousand naval troops. The Forbidden Army, regional soldiers, prefecture and county soldiers, Jinwu Guard, palace guards, and the navy¡ªall six sequences together formed Chu State¡¯s military might, a grand total of seven hundred and twenty thousand troops. Although this seems like a large number, the framework Chu State had set up was expansive, and once spread thin for various uses, dividing a bit here and a bit there, there wasn¡¯t much left over. Just like now. Once split among three peripheral battlefields, divided for local law enforcement, and part set aside for border defense, what eventually fell into Lu Yuan¡¯s hands was just two hundred and ten thousand troops. Facing Ning Country¡¯s army, which outnumbered his by more than twofold, the situation was extremely tight, riddled with loopholes. ¡°For now, let¡¯s hold our ground. If it really comes to it, we¡¯ll just have to pay a higher price,¡± Lu Yuan muttered to himself, his eyes revealing a twinge of agony at the last word ¡°price,¡± obviously reluctant to bear such a cost. Chapter 817 - Chapter 817: Chapter 352 Hidden Cards Jiang Cheng Chapter 817: Chapter 352 Hidden Cards Jiang Cheng Despite the peril at hand, Lu Yuan was worried, yet he dared to take such a risk because he had a certain level of confidence. This confidence didn¡¯t come from elsewhere but from his own strength. When Lu Yuan broke through and gathered one qi, he naturally mastered one divine power and three magic techniques recorded in the Taiping Dao Book. Among them, the Huang Jin Power Warrior Divine Power had already differentiated into two avatars, Huang Xuan and Qingyunzi. With the help of these two avatars, he had received a lot of assistance over the years, greatly relieving the plight of a shortage of top masters in Chu State, and their importance and assistance were almost irreplaceable. Apart from this divine power, at the realm of gathering one qi, he could also master three magic techniques. They were the Marsh Technique, Earth Spike Technique, and Earth Wall Technique. Among these three techniques, the Earth Spike Technique specialized in offense, suitable for both groups and individuals, and was extremely powerful, making it the most potent offensive technique Lu Yuan currently wielded. However, even though this technique could also serve in group attacks, summoning multiple earth spikes to strike at enemies. With Lu Yuan¡¯s current magic power, even with all his might, he could only summon about thirty to forty earth spikes, covering a rather small area, making it somewhat difficult to achieve wide-ranging attacks. As for the Earth Wall Technique, it served as a defensive magic, no need to say more. This battle truly counted on the Marsh Technique as Lu Yuan¡¯s hidden card. The Marsh Technique was a magic that transformed a region into a muddy marsh for a period of time, used to change the terrain. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Earlier, when Lu Yuan had just made a breakthrough in gathering one qi, by using this technique at full power, he could transform the terrain within a hundred zhang radius into a marsh. To provide an example from the mainstream formations of the day, during large troop engagements, the base level formation was usually comprised of five hundred soldiers, forming a battalion. A battallion-sized square formation would occupy an area with a radius of twenty to thirty zhang. Going up from the battalion level, this is a military officer responsible for several battalions, and the deployment of several formations could approximately reach a hundred zhang radius. That is to say, When he first gathered one qi, with one use of the Marsh Technique by Lu Yuan, a hundred zhang radius would become a swamp, instantly encompassing a combat cluster commanded by a military officer, allowing the marsh to swallow one to two thousand people. By now, it had already been five years since Lu Yuan broke through and gathered one qi. In those five years, although he was limited by the scarcity of heavenly and earthly aura and had not managed to breakthrough gathering two qi, he had made significant progress within the realm of gathering one qi. The most obvious improvement was the accumulation of more magic power. Compared to when he first broke through, the magic power accumulated within Lu Yuan¡¯s body was about thrice what it was when he first entered this realm. This means, whenever he wanted, he could turn a three hundred zhang radius area into a marsh. A three hundred zhang radius area could almost cover more than half of a ten thousand man army. Some small towns were also only about this size. Such a vast area, to some extent, could already be considered a transformation of heaven and earth. And Lu Yuan, who possessed this power, undoubtedly also had the power to transform heaven and earth. Whenever he wished, he could cast the Marsh Technique in an instant. He could kill six to seven thousand people or destroy a small town. Such tremendous power, if unleashed on the battlefield, could instantly rout an entire army. And this is merely the most direct effect, not even considering the consequent impact. Just imagine. Two large armies are arrayed at the front, each employing their strategies as arrows fly chaotically and blades and spears move in unison. Even if some powerful martial artists could take on dozens or hundreds, they would still be terrifying, but within the realm of understanding for ordinary people. Even if an Inborn Grandmaster took action, deploying a martial arts external body, changing the environment within ten or so zhang, he would be nearly akin to gods and demons. But even such a fearsome Inborn Grandmaster, to kill a thousand people, would need more than a dozen breaths, and it would consume a lot of energy and couldn¡¯t last long. If, en route, a top-notch expert leads a blockade and is assisted by many battlefield weapons, even an Inborn Grandmaster may find it difficult to kill a thousand on the battlefield. With these constraints, Inborn Grandmasters, while extremely terrifying, are not completely without resistance from mortal armies. If they¡¯re willing to pay the price, the death of tens of thousands could still drive back an Inborn Grandmaster. Even if that Inborn Grandmaster was relentless, they could be worn down to death, which is not impossible. But with Lu Yuan¡¯s magic technique, there¡¯s no need for a strenuous fight or to expend time and energy. By reciting incantations and casting the magic, thousands could be killed in an instant. And in that instant, the sight of thousands dying before your eyes, a scene akin to divine punishment, would deliver an unimaginable blow to the will and spirit of the people. Lu Yuan could be certain. As soon as he cast the Marsh Technique, not only could he cripple an army in an instant, but he could also directly collapse the morale of several army units nearby. A sudden collapse of tens of thousands, such a massive breakdown in a major battle, would almost guarantee a crushing defeat, irreversible in nature. Therefore, with this magic technique, as long as Lu Yuan leads his troops and engages the Ning Army in a major battle. The moment the Marsh Technique is cast, the Ning Army¡¯s collapse becomes inevitable. The Chu State army could then take advantage and rout the Ning Army in one fell swoop, which is not too unlikely. After all, the Ning people¡¯s army is a well-trained standing force, and the Ning Army also has subdivided Inborn Grandmasters. Whether at the low-level or the top-level, their strength and quality are not inferior. Chapter 818 - Chapter 818: Chapter 352 Hidden Cards Jiang Cheng_2 Chapter 818: Chapter 352 Hidden Cards Jiang Cheng_2 ¡°` To want to crush them in one fell swoop and eradicate them¡ªsuch an approach seems to greatly underestimate the opponent. Yet taking advantage of this great war to successively eliminate tens of thousands, or even a hundred thousand soldiers from Ning Country, and cause their morale to plummet for a period of time, in the short term causing fear at the mention of Chu¡ªthis was still achievable. And as long as that was achieved, then on the main battlefield, the gap in strength between Chu and Ning would gradually close from its original disparity, trending toward balance. Balance meant equality; equality meant stalemate. At that time, on the main battlefield, Chu State and Ning Country would be in a situation where neither could overcome the other, ultimately leading to a boring game of attrition and a contest of underlying strength. However, achieving balance on the main battlefield would seem like neither side had suffered any losses. But do not forget. On the other three secondary battlefields, Chu State holds the advantage. A stalemate on the main battlefield, advantage on the other three. Then, once those advantageous battlefields are concluded and Chu State secures victory, the excess forces can be redirected to the main battlefield. The situation of balanced stalemate would naturally incline towards Chu State. Ultimately, the victory in this war would also belong to Chu State. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Therefore, on the main battlefield, as long as Lu Yuan managed to hold a stalemate, that would equate to victory. Thus, his mastery of the Marsh Technique meant he effectively held the key to victory in this war, maintaining a crucial weight on the balance scale. On the other three battlefields, Chu State was inherently positioned on invincible ground. This main battlefield, Chu State similarly stood on the Invincible Land of Innate. ¡°However¡­¡± When Lu Yuan thought about the Marsh Technique, he meticulously reviewed the essence of this spell in his mind and sighed softly, ¡°To achieve the above effects, I will inevitably have to exhaust all my magic power. With the thin and harsh Heavenly and Earthly Aura of today, once my magic power is completely used up, recovering and accumulating it would take at least half a year¡¯s time. In other words. For half a year, I wouldn¡¯t be able to continue advancing my cultivation, only purely replenishing my magic power.¡± In The Age of Dharma Decline, replenishing expended magic power is difficult. Back when Lu Yuan participated in the Inescapable Meeting, those Dao masters, True Persons, one after another, were miserly in their casting of spells, reluctant to use any powerful magic and instead resorted to nearly illusion-like spells to fool people. Was it because the magic of Purple Cloud Taoist Master and others wasn¡¯t refined enough, their cultivation not deep enough? Of course not. This was because magic power needs to be transformed from Spiritual Energy, and Spiritual Energy is fixed in amount; to use even a bit is to have that much less. After being used, replenishing it also relies on time to accumulate. This significant flaw rendered cultivators into a peculiar state of high burst damage, low sustainability, and long regeneration. Everyone knew they were powerful, but also knew that they wouldn¡¯t easily take action. The strange balance that could be achieved between Immortal Sects and the secular world, despite asymmetric combat capabilities, is hard to attribute to anything other than the cherishment of magic power. On a daily basis, cultivators meticulously calculate the use of the magic power they save for advancing their cultivation; how could they be willing to squander it on meaningless confrontations through spells? With that energy and magic power, wouldn¡¯t it be better to focus on advancing cultivation and achieving a Breakthrough Realm? With deeper cultivation and breakthroughs reached, couldn¡¯t one live for dozens or even a hundred more years? But what does one gain from defeating others in a spell confrontation, other than some pride? Being shrewd, of course, cultivators would not do something that was arduous and thankless. Similarly. Lu Yuan was just as shrewd, sparingly using spells only when he could not avoid it. Even the two Avatars he possessed only consumed the minimum magic power necessary to sustain activity on a daily basis. Normally, unless necessary, they would not engage in combat. And should they truly need to fight, they would rely on the robustness of their physical bodies and engage solely with physical strength. In doing so, it was the Avatar¡¯s own capabilities that were expended, not an excessive amount of magic power, thus saving a substantial reserve of magic power and reducing the Avatars¡¯ need to absorb Heavenly and Earthly Aura. Yes, it¡¯s about the Avatars absorbing less Spiritual Energy. The creation of the Yellow Turban Warrior Avatars by Lu Yuan, aside from providing relief to the shortage of high-end combat strength in Chu, had an even greater purpose, which was aiding in his own cultivation. Leveraging the Qi Luck brought to Chu by the appearance of the Avatars allowed him to cultivate faster. Based on this goal. In a time where every bit of Heavenly and Earthly Aura used is less for later, if the Avatars use more now, doesn¡¯t that mean less for Lu Yuan in the future? Thus, saving on the Avatars¡¯ use of magic power meant that, later on, there would be more Spiritual Energy for Lu Yuan to use, enabling him to progress further on the Immortal Method pathway. The same logic holds true. Now, spending all his magic power, which is close to achieving the perfect state of Gathering Two Qi, is tantamount to having that much less Heavenly and Earthly Aura to use later on. Nobody knows how much Spiritual Energy remains in the world today. Perhaps, being short just that bit of Spiritual Energy that Lu Yuan used for recovery could mean that when he wishes to Breakthrough a certain realm in the future, he would find just not enough Spiritual Energy available, leaving him frustratingly stuck at that critical juncture. Possible it is. Therefore, this behavior equates to trading the future for the present. Of course, that is something for the long term. Even with the current scarcity of Heavenly and Earthly Aura, it would still take decades for Lu Yuan alone to completely deplete it. That day is still a long way off. To speak of nearer concerns. Lu Yuan has now reached or can be said to be close to the perfect state of Gathering One Qi. This stage is only about a year away from a Breakthrough to Gathering Two Qi. ¡°` Chapter 819 - Chapter 819: Chapter 352 Hidden Cards Jiang Cheng_3 Chapter 819: Chapter 352 Hidden Cards Jiang Cheng_3 ¡°` If he were to exhaust his magic power now, then the timeframe for this breakthrough would have to be postponed, following the time needed for the recovery of his magic power. This is giving up the future for the present, and it¡¯s a foreseeable future at that. In summary, Although Lu Yuan could use the Marsh Technique, the cost of using this spell is quite significant in a sense. Or to put it more harshly, Given the choice, he would probably prefer sacrificing tens of thousands of people instead of using this spell, saving that magic power for later. After all, the deaths of tens of thousands can be made up for by Chu State after a year or two. But without so much spiritual energy, Lu Yuan has no way to restore it. Compared to renewable manpower, the presently nonrenewable spiritual energy is somehow more precious. Reality is cruel but very much real. ¡°Therefore, the use of spells can only be listed as the last backup option, unless it really comes to a critical moment; otherwise, if things can be solved by ordinary people, let ordinary people handle them. After all, this is just a war between worldly dynasties. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 Mundane matters to the mundane, Immortal Techniques to the Immortals. In The Age of Dharma Decline where Immortals are not revealed and all spirits have vanished, those who are transcendent should not interfere too much with the ordinary folk.¡± Lu Yuan pondered and then buried this last option deep in his heart, hiding it away. ¡­ Sailing swiftly along the way, by noon, the navy finally arrived at the river bay outside Jiangxia City. Standing at the bow looking into the distance, Jiangxia City stood on the bank of the Yangtze River, steering into the crescent-shaped bay and extending into a sprawling pier deep into the heart of the river, connecting with countless ships coming and going, facilitating the exchange of various goods. As the third largest port in Dongting district, Jiangxia port¡¯s pier is massive, capable of accommodating hundreds of ships at once, covering an area of over three miles. Inns and towers are numerous, and shops for receiving bulk goods are also established here, making the pier region bustling beyond compare. Adjacent to the pier, stretching two miles northwest following the river bay, is also a deepwater port area. This pier, however, is not open to the public but only contains naval vessels, exclusively for military use. At this military pier, a fortress camp was also constructed, with various bunkers and watchtowers standing tall. Walls were built right from the bay, spreading inward and connecting to the walls of Jiangxia City, forming a barrier over seven miles long that blocked off the entire southern side of the city. Therefore, once Lu Yuan led the navy into the military harbor, the sailors began steering the ships, docking one by one according to instructions, and stationed themselves within the waterside fortress. He then led his generals and confidants directly up the city tower, heading from the water port towards Jiangxia City. Jiangxia City is a mountain city. At the very bottom, the mountain foot plain, is the outermost part of the city; apart from the mountain-nested north and west sides, the remaining east and south sides, like any normal city, are enclosed by a circle of city walls over ten miles long. Inside the city are neatly planned streets, with commercial and residential areas both located here. And moving inward from the outer city area towards the mid-mountain, some more particular and important buildings such as temples, Taoist temples, academies, and large estates are constructed. At the mid-mountain area, there are various government institutions, offices, storerooms, barracks, and other core constructions. In addition, numerous watchtowers were built in the mid-mountain area, especially near the river, where many platforms were laid out with a large number of catapults, ballistae, and other ranged weapons, amounting to hundreds. With these long-range weapons, Jiangxia City, situated high in the mountains, could nearly blockade the hundred-meters-wide river outside, firmly guarding this region¡¯s water surface. Previously, Chu State¡¯s navy was weak, but they could contain Ning People¡¯s ships entering and exiting the borders precisely because of this critical riverside fortress. Any Ning Country navy daring to enter this area had to face the attack of hundreds of catapults and ballistae, and under the downpour of stone and arrow rains, even if the Ning vessels managed to pass through these waters, they would have sunk dozens or hundreds of ships. If a large number of archers are positioned in the mountain fortress, along with a fleet of ships and fleets upstream, the tripartite cooperation can hold off the Ning navy even if they outnumber the local forces by several times, and Chu could even defeat and repel them. This is the reason Lu Yuan, despite knowing that Ning Country had amassed 150,000 naval forces and he only had 50,000, was still unafraid and led the navy here with confidence. The mountain where Jiangxia City is located serves as an ever-unfailing fortress for Chu State on the southern bank of the river. As long as this fortress is in hand, there¡¯s no way for the Ning navy to cross a single step over the river. Furthermore, on the land to the south of the riverbank, as long as Jiangxia City stands, Ning cannot hope to pass through this area. Changsha, Hengyang, and other southern prefectures, Lu Yuan was not sure if Ning Country would attack. But in the region of Yueyang, near the vicinity of Jiangxia City, within a radius of two or three hundred miles, this city is the most conspicuous core, an insurmountable natural barrier for anyone to bypass. If Ning Country wishes to attack Chu from this route, they must take down Jiangxia City. If the city does not fall, not only is the waterway impassable, but the land route is also hard to advance even half a step. With this strong fortress, and the fifteen thousand soldiers within it for city defense, Lu Yuan had the confidence that even if Ning¡¯s main force of 400,000 was entirely wiped out, they would still be unable to capture this city. However, the difficulty of a siege is high, and it¡¯s unlikely the Ning people would be so unwise as to launch a direct assault. Ultimately, how this battle unfolds will depend on the opponent¡¯s decision. But Lu Yuan was prepared, confident he could face all moves, now just waiting for the opponent to make their arrival. On the twelfth day of the tenth month of the tenth year of Shenwu, At this cusp of late autumn and early winter, racing against the first snowfall, Emperor Shenqiu of Ning hurriedly arrived below the city with the main force of 150,000 sailors and soldiers, joining the 50,000 vanguards that had arrived earlier. By then, Ning Country had amassed a combined force of 200,000 troops by land and water near Jiangxia City. Opposing them was Chu State¡¯s great army of 150,000 by land and water. Both sides¡¯ leaders were present. It was a classic confrontation: army against army, king against king, determining who would rise and who would fall. ¡°` Chapter 820 - Chapter 820: Chapter 353: Ambitious Purgatory Chapter 820: Chapter 353: Ambitious Purgatory After the onset of the cold wave, the world always found winter arriving earlier than expected. On the second day after the Ning Country¡¯s army arrived outside the city of Jiangxia, an unexpected blizzard began to drift toward the Earth. In just one night, the originally verdant land was shrouded in a blanket of snow. However, this first heavy snowfall of winter did not stop people¡¯s activities. Driven by a strong will, soldiers both inside and outside the city started to move. Under the drive of their officers, braving the bitter cold of winter, they shakily made their way out of the camp gate. The sound of the golden drum rose, accompanied by rebukes and the guidance of flags, and the bustling Ning People¡¯s main camp, already densely packed, instantly came alive. Soldiers crawled out from their tents and, led by their corporals and sergeant leaders, formed up into ranks. Soon, several ranks of soldiers gathered into a squad under the leadership of the platoon leader, and then combined with each other to reorganize into units. Eventually, five units came together to form the most basic battle array, arrayed on the battlefield. Shen Qiu, accompanied by a group of officials, stood atop the lofty watch car, beneath which countless war horses struggled to pull. The watch car slowly left the camp and approached the central battlefield. The watch car towered ten zhang high, crafted from numerous large, sturdy trees and finely wrought metal parts, both solid and majestic. Standing on the terrace atop the watch car, one could almost look levelly at the mid-mountain behind the city of Jiangxia. From this vantage point, the entire city lay bare. Shen Qiu sucked in a breath of cold air as he looked at the various watchtowers and arrow towers on the hillside, densely arranged with catapults and crossbows, the twisting roads up the mountain, the perilous terrain, and at the foot of the mountain, the city walls built against the hill, rising three zhang high. Although he rarely led troops into battle and his experience was limited, he had been the Grand General of Pre-Yue. He still had a fair understanding of military affairs and battle formations. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 Now, just by looking at the city of Jiangxia ahead and observing the various defensive installations within, he could tell without even attacking that this was undoubtedly one of the most impregnable cities in the world. To break through such a city by ordinary means would be as difficult as reaching heaven. Even if they managed to take it, the final casualties would be unimaginable. After estimating the potential losses from attacking the city, Shen Qiu couldn¡¯t help but slap the railing beside him and cursed inwardly, ¡°Such an impregnable city in a land of strategic importance, yet it falls into the hands of Chu thieves and not under the control of the Royal Teacher. The Xiao Yue¡¯s clan indeed deserve to be condemned as the sinners of Jinling.¡± No wonder Shen Qiu felt such resentment, even blaming the royal family of the former dynasty that had abdicated. The messy situation they left Pre-Yue was just too huge and ineffectual. Since their Coastal Aristocratic Family migrated south, for thousands of years, they had made their way through thorns and thistles, carrying the legacy of the Three Emperors, and continuously conquered various Barbarian tribes. In this process of conquest, they faced countless hardships and suffered many calamities, even facing annihilation more than once. But no matter how great the difficulties or dangers, the Coastal Aristocratic Family, with united efforts, always managed to survive and soon welcomed new developments. Even with dynastic changes, despite frequent setbacks, the power still alternated within the six families and seven clans. The territories initially conquered were also mostly intact, without significant loss of soldiers or land. However, in the final years of Pre-Yue, all previous conventions were broken. First came the establishment of three nations: Changsha, Southsea, Ninghai; then Xichuan and Hanzhong emerged, and finally, these vassal states gradually broke away from the tribute system of the Jinling dynasty. Ning Country completely lost the lands west of the great river and south of the Wuling mountains. The loss of these lands almost signified the collapse of a thousand years of developments through four generations of dynasties. The Coastal Aristocratic Families, including the Jinling dynasty, lost half of their interests at once. Such a significant loss and setback naturally left Shen Qiu and the other nobles and officials of the aristocratic families feeling bitter resentment. It was this resentment that caused the Xiao Family, who had abdicated and become one of the seven clans in recent years, to be quite unpopular and ostracized by the other families. If it were not for the fact that each family had marital ties with the Xiao Family, with numerous daughters both wedded into and brought from the Xiao Family, making their relationships inseparably close, they would have long banded together to eliminate the Xiao Family and vent their hatred. Fortunately, the Xiao Family also realized this point and knew they were disliked. In recent years, they kept a very low profile, with their family members choosing to stay indoors, becoming virtually invisible. Out of sight, out of mind; few people bothered to trouble them. But now, looking at Jiangxia city, gazing at that incredibly strong, nearly invincible fortress, Shen Qiu couldn¡¯t help but curse upon recalling who was to blame for the loss of the city. It was clear how much it still irritated him. Next to Shen Qiu stood a Brave General who followed by his side, who twitched his brows upon hearing Shen Qiu¡¯s muffled curse. This Brave General was none other than the newly appointed Marquis Wuan Bai Yian, who, four years ago, received Shen Qiu¡¯s support, succeeded in Breaking through Innate, and inherited his grandfather¡¯s title. Since breaking through to Innate and inheriting his ancestor¡¯s martial legacy, Bai Yian, with his innate martial arts capable of merging with military spirit, rapidly stood out among his peers and became one of the top three masters in Ning Country, second only to Shen Qiu. Because his Innate martial arts were particularly well-suited to leading troops, for this expedition, Shen Qiu brought Bai Yian along as the deputy commander of the main forces, assisting him in commanding the 400,000 soldiers under his command. Chapter 821 - Chapter 821: Chapter 353: Ambitious Purgatory_2 Chapter 821: Chapter 353: Ambitious Purgatory_2 At this moment, after the arrival of the grand army, Shen Qiu was preparing to lead his troops out of the camp to attack Jiangxia City, to test the depth of the Chu army. Bai Yian, as the de facto commander of the grand army, naturally came along to observe. However, now that the grand army hadn¡¯t launched its attack yet, Shen Qiu seemed to have been stirred up emotionally, which greatly alarmed Bai Yian. He knew that His Majesty harbored dread in his heart towards Jiangxia City and thus directed his anger towards the Xiao Family. But now was not the time for internal strife and purges, nor for such actions. The dissatisfaction with the Xiao Family was almost universal among the six surnames and seven aristocratic families of Linhai. Even within the Xiao Family itself, there were many grievances against Emperor Hongdao and Emperor Longqing, blaming the father and son for the decline and fall of the Xiao Shi Dynasty and for bringing the family to its current dire state. However numerous these resentments might be, all the sins and responsibilities of the Xiao Family had dissipated along with their abdication and relinquishment of power, ceasing to exist. The rules of the game for the coastal aristocratic families were that the royal family of the former dynasty would abdicate and then be succeeded by a new representative of the aristocratic families, who would then reform the government, restore the land, and inaugurate a new Glorious Dynasty. The abdicated royal family of the former dynasty would then become a new aristocratic family, and all past grievances were not to be settled by the succeeding royal family. Otherwise, if you settle scores with me and I with you, and the six surnames and seven families fight each other, they would have been exterminated long ago under such bloody games. How could they possibly enjoy the thousands of years of wealth and prosperity as they do now, intermarrying with each other, advancing and retreating together? Therefore, no matter the dissatisfaction with the Xiao Family, the opponent had abided by the rules of the game and chosen to abdicate. As successors to the throne, they should not, under any circumstances, settle scores with the opponent. Because that would break the balance and destroy the rules. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï And once balance and rules are broken, even if it starts small, it will eventually lead to destruction as the cracks widen. Therefore, seeing that the Emperor seemed to have the thought of settling scores with the Xiao Family, the Brave General hurriedly said, ¡°Your Majesty, the grand army has already completed its formation, and the weapons and crossbows are ready. We can launch a probing attack now.¡± These words indeed shifted Shen Qiu¡¯s attention away from the Xiao Family¡¯s wrongdoing and back to the present. He looked downward. From the watch car, to its left and right, front and back, he saw rows of soldiers neatly arrayed on the white wasteland, distributed orderly in the nearby areas according to their positions, types of troops, and banner flags several miles around. The fifty thousand troops gathered to launch a probing attack on Jiangxia City were all assembled. Tens of thousands of troops stood on the plains, shining in their armor, flags fluttering, swords and spears gleaming, emitting a chilling sharpness. The crowded gathering turned the originally white earth into a sea of yellow. Yes, just like Chu State, Ning Country¡¯s military uniforms were also yellow. When Lu Yuan established the kingdom in Changsha, he used the Taiping Dao Book related to his cultivation and his personal birthdate to assume the name of the Yellow Sky Daoist and established the system of the Earth Virtue for the Dynasty. Once the system was set up, the various robes, rituals, and military uniforms of Chu henceforth would mostly favor yellow. Therefore, the military robes of the Chu army were naturally yellow. The Ningguo Dynasty, located in Jiangdong and having accepted the peaceful succession from Yue Country, also followed the established order of the former dynasty and naturally inherited the former precedent, not like the dynasties that came to power through violent revolutions which would adopt the theory of mutual conquest of the Five Elements. Therefore, the normal Wood conquers Earth would not appear in Ning Country, as the new Dynasty took Water as its Virtue. Ning Country adhered to the rotational tradition of the coastal aristocratic family dynasties and the theory of mutual generation of the Five Elements, adopting the principle of fire generating earth to establish the Dynasty system and create the new dynasty. For this reason, Ning Country and Chu State were actually the same in adopting Earth Virtue and using yellow garments. In this respect, Ning and Chu, the two hegemonies of Jiangnan at this time, were fighting each other fiercely, each wanting to defeat the other and unify Yangzhou. In a certain sense, while the surface battle between the two was for control of Yangzhou, it was also essentially a struggle over the legitimacy of Earth Virtue. In this fight, the one who emerged victorious would naturally unify Yangzhou and affirm Earth Virtue, proving their own legitimacy. The world experienced a strange convergence at this moment. But all of these thoughts were far from Shen Qiu¡¯s mind at this time. He looked at the powerful and majestic army he¡¯d trained and, his previous dread towards Jiangxia diminishing, was filled with a surge of pride and ambition. Pre-Yue was incompetent, losing half of the ancestral territories and thus was culpable. Now, leading his troops east, he was about to defeat the great enemy, the Chu State, re-establish the old borders, and regain the ancestral properties. Even after the destruction of Chu State, he could take advantage of the situation to incorporate Xiangyang, Hanzhong, Qianzhong, and other territories never developed by his forebears, pushing Ning¡¯s hegemonic achievements to a new peak. Perhaps in the end, the great accomplishment of conquering Lingnan, the Southwest, and unifying Yangzhou would also be completed by his own hands. With these accomplishments, he would become the most distinguished among all the emperors of the ten and more dynasties of Jinling since crossing the river. Even if he might not have enough time to continue leading Ning Country because of his lifespan and survival in the upcoming Nine Provinces calamity, he would still have enough to face the late emperors under the Nine Springs. ¡®To achieve all this, I must first defeat the great enemy, Chu State, and completely unify the fragmented power in Yangzhou under one banner,¡¯ Shen Qiu thought to himself, igniting intense fighting spirit. Then he looked towards the distant Jiangxia City, which now seemingly was not as impregnable as he had previously thought. Chapter 822 - Chapter 822: Chapter 353: Ambitious Purgatory_3 Chapter 822: Chapter 353: Ambitious Purgatory_3 In front of myself, who had inherited the will of the late emperor through numerous dynasties, a mere Chu State, a mere Lu Yuan, how could they compare to the accumulation and profound foundation of thousands of years? He was nothing but a fellow who rose by seizing the tide of fortune. This jumping jack, today he will be beaten back to his original shape, falling into the dust. In front of my hundreds of thousands of troops, even the so-called emerging hegemon, even the so-called famous generals of the age, are like mustard, easily crushed. Now, let¡¯s take down this city of Jiangxia first and give the King of Chu a surprise. As this thought flashed through his mind, Shen Qiu immediately ordered, ¡°Pass the command to the Front Army, attack the city!¡± Upon the holy command, the vast army waiting under the watch car sprang into action like a tide. First, catapults, Jinglan, and ballistae were pushed from behind the army to the front lines. After the soldiers adjusted them, these engineering Weapons were soon ready, and with an order, countless fiery rocks and oil jars, long-haired crossbow bolts screaming through the air, shrouded a section of the city wall in an instant like dark clouds raining down. Boulders smashed upon the city ramparts, instantly crushing the soldiers standing above into a mash of flesh, and the splintering rocks collided with the blue stone city wall, continuing to explode the surrounding area into shreds of meat with their tremendous force. The flaming oil jars exploded mid-air due to the high temperature, turning broken shards into blades that riddled the soldiers below like honeycombs. The burning flames didn¡¯t stop there, spreading over the city walls, turning the screaming soldiers into human torches. The howling long-haired crossbow bolts cut soldiers in half at the waist, ultimately, with residual force, skewered them like calabashes and nailed them firmly onto the wall. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï It was only an instant, but with the first volley of projectiles, the top of Jiangxia¡¯s wall had become a frightful hell. And while this covering attack disrupted the city¡¯s defenses, Jinglan and Cloud ladders were slowly advanced towards the city walls by the Ning People¡¯s Soldiers. Archers on the Jinglan, positioned level with or even higher than the city walls, unleashed a downpour of arrows upon the city. The Cloud ladders reached the walls, with countless soldiers climbing towards the chaotic ramparts, protected by wooden planks on the outside. With just an initial assault, the Ning People had demonstrated their fearsome firepower and skill. Seeing this from the observation platform halfway up the mountain, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help frowning, ¡°There are still too many new soldiers, many of whom lack training; even though they¡¯re called Soldiers, they¡¯re actually no better than county soldiers and are only slightly better than civilian workers.¡± He watched the performance of the Chu Army¡¯s soldiers atop the city and shook his head, dissatisfied. In recent years, the Chu Army had expanded rapidly, doubling the size of its military force within a year and recruiting two hundred and fifty thousand people. With so many new soldiers, even though they were trained to the standards of Soldiers in the army, how could they possibly transform a new recruit with no foundation into a true Soldier in such a short time? Just like the fear and confusion displayed by Chu soldiers now defending the city walls. These Chu soldiers were all new recruits from last November and December, barely trained for a year, not to mention lacking battlefield experience. Those local county soldiers, who had fought on battlefields or suppressed bandits internally, who had killed and seen blood, were stronger than these new recruits. At the very least, those county soldiers, if placed on these city walls, would not have been thrown into such a panic and nearly collapse from this round of Ning Country¡¯s onslaught. And the Soldiers who were still new soldiers clearly couldn¡¯t achieve that. ¡°The foundation of the soldiers is still good; it¡¯s just the lack of experience. They¡¯ve been training for almost a year; they¡¯re proficient in various battle formations, commands, and killing techniques. The only thing they lack is the actual combat on the battlefield.¡± Next to Lu Yuan, Chu Wei, who was also called to join the battle, observed the soldiers¡¯ performance below. However, he wasn¡¯t too dissatisfied; on the contrary, he was quite optimistic, ¡°Now, by Guarding the city, let the soldiers fight a battle with the Ning People. Just a few experiences with bloodshed and getting used to life and death will soon transform them from the flames of war into qualified elite troops.¡± After over twenty years in the Army, Chu Wei was an Old General himself. In the eyes of such an Old General, the casualties of soldiers are always just a number, as long as the purpose is achieved and the war is won, no matter how many die, it is worth it. And looking at the current situation, With the strong city of Jiangxia, even if the soldiers inside lack experience, relying on the city, it is extremely easy to hold this city. Even by using this opportunity to Guard the city, with a war intense enough yet with controlled casualties, to temper the Soldiers from what were originally new recruits, it turns out to be a very worthwhile endeavor. If they could use this opportunity to train a troop of elite soldiers, even if tens of thousands die, even if half of the city¡¯s soldiers perish, it would actually be worthwhile. A troop of Veteran soldiers who have emerged from the flames of war, even though their numbers may be halved, their value and effectiveness far exceed that of the original hundred thousand new soldiers. But this cost, for Lu Yuan, who needed people and soldiers to provide Qi Luck, was somewhat dissatisfying. Lu Yuan, of course, knew that war inevitably led to death. But if fewer could die, it would always be better than having more deaths. So after watching for a while, seeing those new soldiers allowing the Ning People to climb onto the city walls under their fierce assault, he could no longer tolerate it and similarly ordered, ¡°All Jing and Che units, target the main forces of the Ning Army approaching the city walls, smash them hard, shoot them hard!¡± As the words fell, The countless soldiers operating the crossbow machines and catapults behind him finally unleashed a torrent of stone cannon bolts onto the Ning soldiers who had neared the city wall and the various siege Weapons of Ning within range. The Crowded and terrible attack, after being endured by the Chu people, soon became Ning People¡¯s turn to savor. Between their exchanges, blood and fire, wails and pain, death and madness turned this land separated by a wall into a terrifying purgatory. Chapter 823 - Chapter 823: Chapter 354 Refining to Repel the Enemy Chapter 823: Chapter 354 Refining to Repel the Enemy ¡°` ¡°Kill!¡± Wang Hu shouted at the top of his lungs and swung his heavy saber with all his might, causing the enemy in front to stagger. Seizing the opportunity, he thrust the long saber forward, burying it into the enemy¡¯s chest. With a whoosh, he withdrew the saber. The enemy, whose chest had been pierced, fell to the ground, body twitching slightly, eyes filled with disbelief as they locked onto Wang Hu. The mouth opened, blood pouring out, before he collapsed powerless onto the ground. However, Wang Hu scarcely gave a glance at the scene. After killing the enemy, he turned around and saw that his comrades were all engaged in battle with their own adversaries. On top of the city wall battlements, two more Ning bandits had climbed up. They looked around and, noticing Wang Hu standing alone, their eyes lit up. Then, with fierce expressions, they coordinated their attack and charged at him. Seeing this, Wang Hu took a deep breath, clenched his teeth, and, instead of retreating, simply picked up a metal shield from the ground and roared as he charged forward. Steel clashed against steel, the sounds of battle as fiery as a pyre. Amidst the roars and howls, accompanied by clear gong sounds from outside the city, the Ning bandits on the city walls received the signal and retreated like the tide. Wang Hu forced the Ning bandit back with a single blow and watched as his opponent¡¯s silhouette quickly disappeared. He stood motionless, just like his nearby comrades, without any intent to pursue. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Only after all the Ning bandits had retreated from the city walls and moved far away did everyone seem to release a breath of relief, collapsing to sit directly on the ground. Wang Hu found a spot by the battlements, leaned his back against the wall, his chest rising and falling as he sat there exhausted. ¡°You alright?¡± At that moment, Sergeant Ge Liang came by and upon seeing Wang Hu¡¯s weary state, looked him up and down. After noticing no obvious wounds, he smiled and then sat beside him. ¡°I¡¯m fine.¡± Wang Hu nodded, too tired to even engage in much conversation. The recent skirmish lasted for a moment. Though this sounded brief, on the battlefield, isn¡¯t every strike made with full force? Even a momentary battle equates to an individual mustering all their Essence, Qi, and Spirit, exhausting everything in a life-and-death struggle. The toll on one¡¯s energy and mind is immense. Just a brief moment left Wang Hu aching all over. ¡°That¡¯s how it is on the battlefield,¡± Sergeant Ge Liang said as he patted Wang Hu¡¯s shoulder. He then removed a water flask from his waist, unscrewed the cap, and the fragrant smell of wine wafted out. He took a big gulp before offering it to Wang Hu, ¡°This is Green Bee Brew from Zui Xiang Ju in the city, it costs two silver taels for just half a kilogram. Want to try some?¡± Without any pretense, Wang Hu took the flask and guzzled it down greedily. After exerting so much effort, his whole body was drenched in sweat, his throat and chest felt as if they were on fire, parched with thirst. However, seeing Wang Hu¡¯s ravenous drinking, Ge Liang¡¯s eyes expressed a hint of distress. He quickly snatched back the flask and, noting the dwindling contents, carefully poured out a small amount before sipping it and contentedly said, ¡°This Green Bee Brew has a lingering taste, drinking it in gulps like water won¡¯t let you appreciate its flavor. You should drink it slowly like I do to truly savor the taste and relish the enduring spirit of the wine.¡± Ge Liang shared his drinking philosophy and then sighed lightly upon seeing Wang Hu¡¯s indifferent expression. Knowing the lad wasn¡¯t one for the pleasures of alcohol, he stopped pressing the issue and changed the subject, ¡°I see your Vitality is robust, and an intimidating aura surrounds you, seems like your Black Tiger Power is close to achieving major success, right?¡± Black Tiger Power was a popular low-tier Cultivation Technique within the Chu State army, rated merely third-rate. Though simple to begin with and with a rapid cultivation pace, the technique¡¯s main requirement was constant advancement in one¡¯s Cultivation through life-and-death combat, including methods that tapped into one¡¯s essence blood, potential, and even Lifespan to rapidly enhance Inner Strength. For soldiers in the army, constantly walking the line between life and death, dying in battle at any moment, it was rare to survive to a natural death¡ªone among a hundred could be considered lucky. Therefore, for soldiers, the drawbacks of such a technique couldn¡¯t really be considered drawbacks at all. After all, without strength, one battle could mean death in their teens or twenties. Yet, with sufficient strength, one could slay enemies and protect oneself on the battlefield. Even if it cost them their potential and left them wracked with ailments in old age, they could still live to see their forties, effectively doubling their lifespan. ¡°It¡¯s true, fighting continuously with the Ning bandits these past days and taking down ten of them, drawing on the Blood Killing Qi, I should be about to unlock the second of my meridians. Once the Black Tiger Power achieves major success, I¡¯ll step into the rank of third-tier Martial Artists.¡± As he spoke of his Cultivation, Wang Hu¡¯s normally stoic face couldn¡¯t help but exhibit a smile. For some, engaging formidable foes, honing their martial skills, and continually making breakthroughs is the greatest joy in life. Wang Hu was just such a person. ¡°You¡¯ve slain many enemies these days, accumulating enough merit. Once your Black Tiger Power reaches major success, you can exchange it for the Tiger Slaughter Technique from the Sergeant. The Tiger Slaughter Technique is an advanced version of the Black Tiger Power, ranked second-tier. Many Sergeants and Camp Leaders in the army practice it. With your Innate Talent, you might truly comprehend its essence in the future and advance to the realm of second-tier experts.¡± ¡°` Chapter 824 - Chapter 824: Chapter 354 Refining and Repelling the Enemy_2 Chapter 824: Chapter 354 Refining and Repelling the Enemy_2 Ge Liang spoke with enthusiasm, but suddenly, something crossed his mind as he looked at Wang Hu, unable to help but sigh, ¡°What a pity, what a pity you were born too late.¡± ¡°Had you been born twenty years earlier and joined the army when the great king was just starting out, you might have had the chance to become a disciple of the great king and a pupil of the Heavenly Son.¡± ¡°Now in the great army, which military officer or general isn¡¯t a disciple of the great king?¡± ¡°Such a pity, such a pity.¡± As he spoke, Ge Liang¡¯s face showed a touch of desolation, and it was unclear whether he felt pity for Wang Hu or for himself. Back when Lu Yuan started his career, due to his grassroots background, there were too few capable and trustworthy confidants under his command. To resolve this dilemma, they had no choice but to select soldiers with potential from the army and take them as sect disciples, teaching them martial arts and nurturing them as confidants. At that time, when the power was just being established, Lu Yuan¡¯s influence also expanded rapidly. It truly was a time of vigorous vitality, with all things flourishing, where everyone could find endless opportunities. Ge Liang had joined the army at that time and had received Cultivation Techniques, which allowed him to practice martial arts. However, his aptitude was somewhat lacking, and he did not become a disciple of Lu Yuan, not even in name. In the end, he wasted twenty years; his body was already riddled with wounds, and his realm was stuck at a third-rate level, unable to advance any further. Wang Hu did have sufficient aptitude, but now twenty years had passed. The Chu State had already been established, and the court had a system. There were certainly many opportunities in the army now, but the chance to directly take the great king as a master was no longer possible. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï It had even been ten years since anyone had heard of the great king taking a disciple. The Chu State was no longer lacking capable people. The best era had passed, and Wang Hu, whose aptitude could have qualified him as a disciple of the great king back then, could now only practice the Black Tiger Power, a Cultivation Technique that urged the flesh, squeezing out his great potential ahead of time and squandering his future. What could have been a candidate who had the potential to reach the pinnacle now, at most, could only hope to become a second-rate expert. But even becoming a second-rate expert, for many low-level people, is still an unimaginable path to the heavens. Just like in this army. The minimum requirement for those military officers in the camp is the second-rate realm. Without this Strength, no matter how much one has achieved, they cannot ascend a step higher. And the status of a military officer, depending on their rank, could be at least equivalent to a County Captain or even as high as a provincial military commander¡ªa position of great Importance, bringing honor to one¡¯s ancestors. At least when Wang Hu heard Ge Liang¡¯s words, a hint of longing appeared in his eyes. He himself did not aspire too high. If he could indeed rise to the position of a military officer in the future, he would be satisfied. ¡°Second-rate, huh?¡± Wang Hu muttered under his breath, his eyes filled with intense fighting spirit, ¡°I will reach that realm.¡± Ge Liang looked at the confident and spirited junior before him, his face also revealing a smile. The reason he paid attention to Wang Hu was precisely because of the latter¡¯s aptitude and character. With these two traits, this young man was bound to achieve something in the future, making him worth some early investment to establish a good relationship. ¡°No rush for the second-rate for now,¡± Ge Liang patted Wang Hu on the shoulder and then said with a smile, ¡°These past few days of continuous Great Wars have left our Jia 5 Camp with many fallen and injured soldiers, and every platoon has lost quite a few men, even losing a platoon leader and three team leaders. I lead the Third Platoon, and that guy Huang Qing died the day before yesterday; his position as platoon leader has been filled, but the Team Deputy spot has opened up. Team Deputy is a position of the ninth lower rank. Although it¡¯s the lowest rank, at least it¡¯s an Official Identity, barely considered an official post. The most important aspect is that, unlike a team leader, there are no strict requirements of a third-rate realm to be a Team Deputy. As long as a soldier has developed Inner Strength and opened up a single meridian, they are eligible. Your achievements are sufficient, and I plan to recommend you to the Camp Leader to fill the empty Team Deputy position for the First Team and thus obtain an Official Identity. Then, after some time when your Black Tiger Power is a major success and you break through to the third-rate realm with sufficient Strength, I will help you look to see if there are positions for team leaders either within our camp or elsewhere. Only by becoming a team leader, commanding fifty men, and being able to select a group of soldiers as your Personal Guard, will you have better odds of survival on the Battlefield. At the very least, when danger arises, you¡¯ll have more options. You won¡¯t have to fight forward like a small bird, without any other choice.¡± Speaking of casualties, Ge Liang couldn¡¯t help but sigh. The batch of New soldiers he led, or rather the city Defenders, were too green. They were all novices who had never experienced bloodshed, and they had no idea how to cope with the cruel Battlefield. Lacking experience and confronted with Veteran soldiers of the opponent, they naturally suffered heavy casualties. In the city, a hundred thousand Defenders would be divided into twenty thousand, forming five batches, each taking turns to defend the city walls for a day. Ge Liang had already led his soldiers to man the walls six times. And in just these mere six times, out of a hundred soldiers in his platoon, eight had died, a casualty rate close to ten percent. By comparison, the other platoons were likely not faring any better. The fully manned hundred thousand people in the city were now probably less than ninety thousand. Although these losses might not seem significant in the grand scheme, it had only been a month. Ten thousand people dead in one month. If they were to hold out for a year, wouldn¡¯t the hundred thousand men in the city be nearly annihilated? Of course, as an old soldier, Ge Liang was well aware that such a situation was unlikely to occur. Because as the Defenders, with such heavy casualties, the situation for those Ning bandits outside the city, who were attackers, must be even more dire. Although he didn¡¯t know the exact numbers, based on the clashes he saw these past days, Ge Liang could tell. Chapter 825 - Chapter 825: Chapter 354 Refining and Repelling the Enemy_3 Chapter 825: Chapter 354 Refining and Repelling the Enemy_3 For every one of my men who died, two or three bandits would fall beneath the city walls. Moreover, this casualty ratio, as those new soldiers under my command were tempered and grew through the flames of war, was rapidly widening. The best proof of this was Wang Hu. The slightly youthful and inexperienced Wang Hu, after killing for a month, not only had become more murderous, but his strength had also rapidly surged, nearing a breakthrough to the third rate. Although the innate talents of the other soldiers weren¡¯t on par with Wang Hu, they had all made considerable progress, and their skill at killing had become more adept. By today¡¯s battle, for every one of my men who died, the bandits would lose three or four. Once all my men transformed into veteran soldiers with ample experience, I feared the exchange ratio could even reach one to five, one to six. The advantage and disadvantage between guarding and attacking a city are just that vast. As a new soldier, Wang Hu didn¡¯t understand these things and simply showed joy on his face upon hearing that his superior was willing to recommend him for an officer¡¯s position, ¡°Thank you, squad leader.¡± ¡°Hmm, seize this opportunity.¡± Ge Liang nodded, speaking with deep meaning, ¡°These days, more and more Ning bandits are dying. No matter how numerous they are, if they keep dying like this, they won¡¯t be able to hold out.¡± ¡°Once you become a platoon leader, you might be able to have some peaceful days.¡± ¡°Take advantage of this time to diligently temper yourself, break through to the third rate, and don¡¯t let me down.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï With his experience on the battlefield, Ge Liang made this judgment, then without waiting for Wang Hu to reply, stood up, patted his lamellar armor, and headed towards a watchtower not far away. The Great War had ended, and the casualties among his men had been lightly tabulated. It was time to return, report to the camp leader, and incidentally fulfill his promise to give young Wang Hu a future. Although a squad leader only managed a hundred men, in the army, he was still considered a mid to low-level military officer, with quite a few duties. The casual talk with Wang Hu was just for relaxation. Now, it was time to get busy with serious matters. Ah, warfare is blind, and I don¡¯t know if this young man will survive this battle. Shaking his head, Ge Liang no longer dwelled on these thoughts. Accustomed to life and death, he had long learned to steal moments of leisure amidst fleeting life, becoming indifferent to everything. ¡­ As the veteran soldiers in the army like Ge Liang sensed the Ning People¡¯s fatigue through their experienced instincts¡­ As part of the high-level army command and veterans of the battlefields, Lu Yuan and others also acutely noticed the abnormality of the Ning People. As Ge Liang guessed, the Ning People truly couldn¡¯t hold out much longer. After attacking fiercely for a month, the people of Chu inside the city had indeed suffered tremendous casualties, losing more than eight thousand soldiers. But as the attacking side, the Ning People had suffered even greater losses. Even though initially, due to the large number of new soldiers among the Chu, they were able to take advantage of the opponent¡¯s lack of experience and gained quite a few benefits. However, as these new soldiers became seasoned, the casualties for the Ning People also increased accordingly. Now, a month later, after repeated sieges, the Ning force had nearly forty thousand killed or injured, which was close to one-tenth of the main force led by Shen Qiu. If only the Ning Army outside of Jiangxia City were considered, it was equivalent to one-fifth of their forces. A major army losing nearly twenty percent of its power, even if it consisted of elite soldiers, would somewhat struggle to bear the losses. Although it was possible to continue the fierce attacks, after a month of efforts, they still hadn¡¯t been able to break through the defenses of Jiangxia City. By now, the soldiers of Chu in the city gradually sharpened, and as the siege wore on, the disparity between the forces of the two sides would further diminish. No matter how reluctant Shen Qiu was, he couldn¡¯t possibly continue sending troops for a fierce assault. ¡°At most one or two days, if another three to five thousand Ning soldiers die, they could only sound the retreat, haul down their banners, hunker down in the main camp outside the city to lick their wounds quietly, and recover their vitality,¡± said Chu Wei, his face filled with confidence, at that night¡¯s high-level military meeting. These recent days, as the chief commander of the navy, Lu Yuan¡¯s disciple had been quite the sensation. While the Ning People were struggling with the siege on land, their fleet hadn¡¯t fared much better in naval battles on the river. Ning Country had a total of one hundred fifty thousand naval forces, of which fifty thousand had to remain in the country to block the river against Liang State to the north, and were hard to redeploy. The remaining one hundred thousand were divided, with fifty thousand allocated to the Xiangyang Prefecture battleground, and the rest were brought over to Jiangxia City. Even though with Shen Qiu¡¯s arrival, the original fifty thousand Ning naval forces in Xiangyang Prefecture had been reinforced by another thirty thousand, summing up to eighty thousand. This force surpassing Chu State¡¯s fifty thousand naval forces by some margin gave them quite an advantage. However, Chu State also had the strategic location of Jiangxia City, a water fortress, on their side. Just with Jiangxia City, using the devices placed halfway up the hillside that sealed the entire river, densely packed hundreds of catapults and ballistae, they could easily offset the numerical difference of thirty thousand naval soldiers. Add to that the fact that Ning¡¯s navy had expanded its ranks with many new soldiers over the past two years, and thus lacked some experience in comparison. On the other hand, Chu State¡¯s navy had long been established, and the sailors on their ships were all seasoned veterans, far stronger in both experience and power than those new soldiers. Relying on their superior soldiers, geographical advantages, and Chu Wei, the exceptionally talented old general¡­ Just over ten days before, in a decisive naval battle outside Jiangxia City. Chu State¡¯s navy had triumphed over Ning¡¯s forces, destroying over three hundred of Ning¡¯s ships on the spot, capturing more than a hundred, slaughtering over twenty thousand of the enemy sailors and taking eight thousand as prisoners. After this battle, Ning¡¯s navy was severely damaged. Even though they managed to regroup somewhat, maintaining fifty thousand naval forces, their morale was so low that they were no longer a match for Chu State¡¯s navy. And such a decisive victory had firmly established Chu State¡¯s dominance over its own waterways, ensuring henceforth that Ning¡¯s navy could not step even half a foot into Chu waters. Lu Yuan could finally stop worrying that Chu waterways would be occupied by Ning, leading to the river¡¯s blockade, the country being split in two, and continuous back attacks, with fires of war everywhere. But here at Jiangxia, the situation was much more favorable. Although this was a reason to be happy, Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t as joyful as Chu Wei but rather had a hint of worry in his eyes as he picked up a letter from the desk, frowning deeply. On the thin sheet of paper, only one thing was recorded: Five days prior, Marquis Wuxin Xiang Duan of Ning Country, with an army of one hundred thousand, had launched a surprise attack on Changsha Prefecture. Chapter 826 - Chapter 826: Chapter 355: The Changing Nature of Offense and Defense Chapter 826: Chapter 355: The Changing Nature of Offense and Defense In Changsha Prefecture over there, Chu State had stationed twenty thousand Forbidden Army soldiers and seventy thousand Militia, totaling ninety thousand troops. Out of these ninety thousand, a thousand Forbidden Army soldiers and nine thousand Militia were drawn out to form a ten thousand-strong legion, stationed at the border of Changsha Prefecture and Chu Ning, serving as the outer perimeter guard. Such a Ragtag Army-like guard legion couldn¡¯t possibly withstand the assault of an Inborn Grandmaster leading a hundred thousand elite troops. The ten thousand soldiers on the border of Changsha faced the sudden attack of the Ning Army and were crushed in less than half a day. Then, within two days, the Ning Army had reached the foot of Changsha City. Fortunately, within Changsha City, including civilian workers, there were eighty thousand defenders. By urgently conscripting some able-bodied men from the city, they barely managed to assemble a hundred thousand troops. Such a robust force of soldiers ultimately withstood Xiang Duan¡¯s fierce onslaught and prevented the city from falling. Now, sitting in Baling, Sun Siwen upon hearing the news, had already rushed to Changsha City overnight to confront Xiang Duan, an Inborn Grandmaster, as a top-tier expert. However, even though Changsha City was safe with Sun Siwen blocking it. But the two prefectures of Hengyang and Luyang to the south didn¡¯t have a second Inborn Grandmaster to send for support. Therefore, Sun Siwen sent the news urgently to Lu Yuan for the King of Chu to decide. ¡®Ning Country really did as previously guessed, when they couldn¡¯t make progress on the main battlefield, they started thinking about breaking through from the flanks.¡¯ Lu Yuan thought to himself after reading the letter. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï This past month, as the Ning Army hit wall after wall on the main battlefield around Jiangxia City, they faced setback after setback both on water and land. When counted up, the naval forces lost more than thirty thousand, and there were also forty thousand casualties among the soldiers, the losses that Ning Country suffered around Jiangxia City had already surpassed seventy thousand. This was not a small number. It must be understood that the total number of Ning Country¡¯s troops around Jiangxia City, combining both naval and land forces, was only two hundred and thirty thousand. Now that seventy thousand were lost, they had suffered a loss of one-third. With such heavy casualties, Ning Country¡¯s forces around Jiangxia City had only a little over one hundred and sixty thousand remaining. Although these forces were still considerable, compared to Chu State, they no longer had an absolute numerical advantage. While the Chu Army¡¯s losses in these battles were significant, they only suffered minor flesh wounds, and their main force remained untouched. As things stood, Chu State¡¯s main Forbidden Army within the city still numbered ninety thousand, and there were also over forty thousand in the naval forces outside the city. Adding up both contingents, they also totaled around one hundred and thirty thousand. Facing one hundred and sixty thousand with one hundred and thirty thousand, one side with high morale and the other in consecutive retreats, suffering losses and loss of generals, if both sides really clashed, even if Ning Country had an additional thirty thousand troops, they would essentially not be able to get much advantage. ¡®After a month of standoff and attrition, Ning Country¡¯s numerical advantage has become negligible. Coming up, just as Chu Wei said, after fighting another day or two, Ning Country will likely withdraw their forces to lick their wounds. And those new soldiers within the city, having been tempered by the flames of war, have gradually grown and begun to transform into veterans. Taking advantage of this, perhaps it¡¯s time to take the initiative to leave the city and seek battle with Ning Country. If we can defeat the main forces of Ning Country in the main battlefield in one fell swoop. Maybe we don¡¯t need to wait for victories on the other three flank battlefields, we could take advantage of the victory, push into Ning Country territory, and march straight to Jinling, destroying this country first.¡¯ Lu Yuan thought thus and his eyes couldn¡¯t help but flicker. After such extended grappling and attrition, on the level of low-ranking soldiers, leveraging high spirits and gradually honed experience. The Chu Army, facing the slightly more numerous but low-spirited Ning Army could very well have good chances of victory, at the very least an even fifty-fifty. As for the top-tier Innate Combat Power, in Jiangxia Chu State had Lu Yuan and the Spiritual woman. Lu Yuan needs no further mention, with those cultivators from the Nine Provinces gone, he was unequivocally the number one expert in the world. As for the Spiritual woman cultivating the Mo Ling Borrowing Life and Cultivating Character Secret Method, her power wasn¡¯t the true essence possessed by Martial Arts Grandmasters but was like Magic Power, a higher power, divine power. With this divine power, the Spiritual woman could live for two hundred years, and her strength was stronger than that of a regular Martial Arts Grandmaster, reaching the combat power of the second realm of Inborn. With the two of them together, even if ten Inborns came, they would face nothing but defeat. As for how many Inborn Grandmasters were in Ning Army Camp, Lu Yuan had yet to determine. However, through investigations over the past days, it was more or less confirmed that Emperor Shenqiu of Ning, Marquis Wuan Bai Yian, and Marquis Wuyang Li Dao, these three were definitely around Jiangxia. Additionally, at Changsha City, there was one more, Marquis Wuxin Xiang Duan. As of now, four out of the six Inborn Grandmasters of Ning Country¡¯s main forces had revealed their whereabouts. The remaining two Inborn Grandmasters hadn¡¯t shown themselves, and it was unknown where they were hiding. But even if these two were also in the Ning Army Camp outside the city, facing a mere five Inborn Grandmasters, even with Shen Qiu amongst them in the second realm of Inborn, Lu Yuan had no fear at all. ¡®So, after careful consideration, in terms of the likelihood of winning amongst the low-level soldiers, between Great Chu and Ning Country, it¡¯s a fifty-fifty chance. Yet, at the top-tier level of Innate strength, we are in an absolute advantageous position. This battle, if fought, victory is certain for our side. However, having suffered losses these few days, Ning Army also knows my side isn¡¯t so easy to attack, and they¡¯ve run aground upon a hard nut. If I now unexpectedly take the initiative to invite battle, I wonder if Shen Qiu will dare to respond. If he also learns from my past few days, hunkering down in the camp, defending the main camp without leaving, then it will be my turn to crack the turtle shell.¡¯ Lu Yuan thought of the Ning Army Camp sprawling twenty li outside the city and his head began to ache. Chapter 827 - Chapter 827: Chapter 355: The Changing Nature of Offense and Defense_2 Chapter 827: Chapter 355: The Changing Nature of Offense and Defense_2 The Ning Army¡¯s camp, although not as fortified as Jiangxia City, was still constructed according to formal military manuals. It featured all types of defensive installations such as traps, barricades, deer antlers, arrow towers, and strong perimeters, none of which were in short supply. Moreover, the camp was equipped with a large number of formidable war machines including catapults, ballistas, and well fences. Given these defenses, if the Chu Army wanted to break through the twenty-plus miles of connected camps, it would definitely be a massive project and undoubtedly a blood-soaked meat grinder that would strike fear in anyone¡¯s heart. If they truly had to fight their way through each camp, even with Lu Yuan and the Spiritual Woman joining the fray, without several months of effort and the deaths of hundreds of thousands, they would definitely not be able to take down the Ning Army Camp. And what¡¯s more despairing is, that the Ning Army outside the city is only a part of their forces. Apart from the troops in Jiangxia City and those in Changsha City, Ning Country had about another hundred thousand troops in Yuzhang Prefecture alone that had yet to mobilize. These hundred thousand troops were stationed in the Pengli main camp and could be called upon at any moment to support any front as needed. If these hundred thousand troops were to be deployed to the Jiangxia battlefield and decided to stubbornly defend the main camp, I fear that no matter how many troops Lu Yuan had in Jiangxia, they would all perish without ever breaking through the Ning Army¡¯s camp. ¡®In a couple of days, once the Ning Army withdraws and stops their assault on the city, I could perhaps send someone to provoke a battle. Regardless of the outcome, there¡¯s no harm in trying; maybe Shen Qiu will really be foolish enough to desire a decisive battle with me?¡¯ Lu Yuan made up his mind. First, he¡¯d try to deal with the main force of the Ning Army currently before him, to see if he could resolve the matter once and for all. If Shen Qiu didn¡¯t take the bait, he could deal with the other battlefields later. In Changsha City there¡¯s Sun Siwen. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Although Brother Sun, being of scholarly background, was not particularly adept at combat, he was still an Inborn, and with the city¡¯s defenses, he should have no problems holding off Xiang Duan. As for the other two prefectures, Luyang and Hengyang, there¡¯s no need to worry too much about the remaining hundred thousand troops of Ning Country in Yuzhang Prefecture and the two concealed Inborn attacking them. In these two prefectures, after all, there are nearly a hundred thousand troops stationed. If they opt not to launch any reckless offensives and simply focus on guarding the city, Then even if an Inborn Grandmaster leads the attack, they cannot expect to breach the city in such a hurry. The fact that Changsha City survived under Xiang Duan¡¯s hands before is the best proof of this. When these two prefectures are under attack by Ning Country, Lu Yuan can dispatch an Inborn Grandmaster for support, and it won¡¯t result in any problems. Moreover, it is now the eleventh month, and under the influence of the cold wave from the north, the snowfall has become much heavier. Even here in Jiangxia City, the snow on the ground has already piled above the ankles and is quickly thickening. In the south, while Luyang and Hengyang are slightly better off, it¡¯s probably also covered in deep snow. After some time, it will practically be impassable with snow, and everything will be blanketed in white. Faced with such natural phenomena, man¡¯s strength is simply unable to defy it. If you wish to send troops in this snow, the Ning Army better be prepared to lose more than half of their numbers along the way. And even if they do lose more than half, by the time they arrive at the city, what they will face is an army that has benefited from city defenses, ample supplies to keep out the cold, and soldiers who have been conserving their strength and vigour. With all these advantages on my side, I can¡¯t see how the Ning Army could possibly break through the city. Therefore, apart from the ongoing battle in Changsha Prefecture, it¡¯s unlikely that Ning Army will invade the other two prefectures, Luyang and Hengyang, this winter. The remaining hundred thousand Ning Army troops will probably spend this winter hunkered down in the Pengli main camp, unlikely to brave the snow to reinforce other battlefields. The current situation on the Dongting battlefield is likely to continue in its stalemate and then it becomes a matter of who loses patience first and commits an error. Having analyzed the situation so far, Lu Yuan felt some assurance and was no longer overly worried. Then, he looked at the various generals in the camp and after giving them a few orders, he sent them off to attend to their duties. Even though there are only a few days left, the Ning People¡¯s final frenzy could not be taken lightly. If we¡¯re not careful, we might find a hole in our defenses, allowing the Ning People a chance to break through, which would be ludicrous. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t want to turn what was almost a sure thing into a farce due to carelessness. The necessary caution is still needed. ¡­ After making his decision, Lu Yuan began to arrange his plans accordingly. And just as predicted, the Ning Army outside the city launched fierce attacks for another three days before leaving behind more than seven thousand corpses and sheepishly choosing to retreat and cease hostilities. For the following two days, the Ning Army stayed huddled in their camp, shutting their doors and venturing out no longer. Even the routine skirmishes between the two armies¡¯ cavalry had decreased in frequency and scale with the Ning Army¡¯s retreat. Seeing this situation, everyone knew that the Ning People simply couldn¡¯t sustain the losses and had become intimidated. The soldiers in the city were immediately elated, congratulating themselves on having survived a disaster and finally being able to catch their breath. But in contrast to the joyful soldiers below, Lu Yuan chose this happy moment to issue an order to go into battle. First, he sent out a large number of cavalry units, dividing them into dozens of teams to boldly venture near and even behind the Ning camps to scout for information and actively hunt and kill Ning soldiers venturing out, attempting to lure the Ning troops from their camp. However, in the face of Chu State¡¯s provocations, the Ning Army only sent out cavalry to chase them away in the beginning. But after being outmatched and outnumbered by Chu¡¯s better-skilled cavalry tribesmen, they miserably left behind a thousand corpses and again retreated back into their camp, no longer venturing out. Seeing this, Lu Yuan dispatched ten thousand infantry to leave the city, actively challenging Ning Country to field battle. Chapter 828 - Chapter 828: Chapter 355: The Changing Nature of Offense and Defense_3 Chapter 828: Chapter 355: The Changing Nature of Offense and Defense_3 The Ning army on the other side, seeing the Chu army displaying its might outside the Camp, had nonetheless made up its mind. Despite the provocations, they were unwilling to come out no matter what. Later, Lu Yuan even dispatched Chu Wei, leading the naval forces on the Yangtze River to seek a decisive battle with the Ning navy, but aside from the beginning, when part of the Ning naval forces was caught off guard and dozens of ships were destroyed, The rest of the Ning naval forces that got the news returned to the nearby Xia Kou naval Camp, huddling within and unwilling to venture out again. Faced with the Chu army¡¯s challenge to battle from the Jiangxia direction, the Ning army adopted an extremely cautious strategy. They did not rashly strike but chose to hold their ground steadfastly. It seemed that the Ning side was also aware that in the Jiangxia region, their own strength was now at a disadvantage, and when compared to Chu State, there was already a gap. If they acted rashly now, the result was very likely to be a crushing defeat. And Ning now still had quite a few Hidden Cards unplayed; back in the homeland, there were still a large number of troops and manpower that could be mobilized. There was fundamentally no need to launch a hasty expedition against Chu when their forces were not completely assembled. On the contrary. In Shen Qiu¡¯s view, the Chu army¡¯s slight advantage led them to hastily send out troops, which in turn indirectly proved Chu¡¯s weakness. Understanding this, he was even more averse to deploying troops hastily, thereby fulfilling Chu¡¯s wishes. The Ning army thus stayed within their Barracks and did not come out, and on the Chu side, Lu Yuan, seeing the Ning People turn into turtles in retreat, didn¡¯t have any good solutions. To conquer each Camp one by one would not only take a long time but the losses would also be too great. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Even with the wealth of Chu State, they couldn¡¯t sustain such a drain. So after testing attacks on one or two Chu army Camps and confirming that the opponent¡¯s defenses were tight and not something that could be easily breached, Lu Yuan left behind over a thousand corpses and also chose to withdraw his troops and not continue the struggle. And after this disturbance of several days, the turn of the month had arrived and it was now the beginning of December, with the snow between Heaven and Earth falling even heavier. The snow didn¡¯t just cover the top of the foot but had reached midway up the calves, and it felt like it wouldn¡¯t be long before it reached the knees of an adult. In such heavy snow, forget about going out to fight; even moving about in the city was risky, facing the danger of freezing to death Outside the house. Faced with this terrifying Natural Disaster, both the Chu and Ning armies dared not and could not continue their endeavors. With the main forces of the two armies in Jiangxia lying dormant, this initial clash between Chu State and the four kingdoms to the east and south of Lingnan gradually drew to a close. Taking advantage of this time when the winds and snow froze the Earth, news from various battlefields in the North and south of Lingnan gradually reached Jiangxia. The first to arrive, naturally, was from Xiangyang Prefecture, just across the river. This was well before Lu Yuan sent out troops from the city to invite the Ning army to battle. In Xiangyang Prefecture, located even further North where the cold wave and snow came faster, the First clash between Chu and Ning was already decided. As the thirty thousand navy men originally stationed in Ning¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture had been called to Jiangxia to join the main battle, reducing their own naval force considerably and no longer posing a Threat to Chu¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture waterways, Zhou Qing took the opportunity, leaving behind thirty thousand local troops from the Prefectures and Counties in Xiangyang Prefecture stationed in various cities and major water channels. After securing against potential moves from the twenty thousand Ning navy and any possible action from Zhou Country in the North, He led the four detachments of the provincial army, totaling eighty thousand troops, on the offensive, preempting Ning from attacking by stepping up to Ning¡¯s door first, leading the charge into Ning¡¯s Jingmen Prefecture in Xiangyang. Aside from the twenty thousand navy of Ning¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture incapable of landing, there were only fifty thousand troops on land. Formerly relying on their fifty thousand navy, the Ning army, thanks to their ability to strike along the Han River at any moment, greatly constrained the Chu army in Xiangyang Prefecture, containing a large number of Chu troops. Even though the Chu army in Xiangyang Prefecture clearly outnumbered the Ning forces, they were spread thin guarding various locations, and the forces they could muster ended up being fewer than Ning¡¯s. However, with the recent defeat of the Ning navy in the main battlefield in Jiangxia, control of the Yangtze and Han rivers¡¯ waterways also fell into the hands of the Chu navy. And the Ning navy had also withdrawn to their naval Camp in Xia Kou of Ning¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture, blocked by the Chu navy, unable to leave the harbor. With this, the Threat of the Ning navy effectively vanished, no longer posing a danger to Chu¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture. Under these circumstances, Zhou Qing only needed to leave behind some local forces to assist the Chu navy in blockading the river, effectively isolating the threat from the North posed by Zhou Country. With their rear secured, the Chu army in Xiangyang Prefecture naturally could mobilize their forces to join the main battle. So after the mobilization, Zhou Qing ultimately gathered eighty thousand elite troops and boldly marched into Ning¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture. And his opponent was none other than Ning State¡¯s Martial Proclamation Marquis Yang Jing, commanding fifty thousand Ning defenders, with the dynamics of offense and defense thoroughly reversed. At the same time, on the Inborn level, with Han Hua¡¯s support, Zhou Qing was also undaunted by Yang Jing¡¯s potential union with another Martial Marquis, with no disadvantage in the top-tier power dynamics. And so, as soon as Chu¡¯s Xiangyang army embarked on their expedition, they achieved victory after victory, not only defeating a main Ning force of ten thousand in the initial clashes, But also, as Ning began to hold their cities, with the aid of Chu¡¯s navy now in control of the waterways, allowed Han Hua to lead a Detached Army by boat, launching a surprise attack on an exposed Anlu Prefecture in Ning¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture, capturing the city in one stroke. Thus, of the three prefectures in Ning¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture, one under guard by two Inborn, Jingmen and Jingling Prefectures, one had already been seized by Chu. And the remaining forces in Ning¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture were down to just over thirty thousand, and even with the abrupt conscription of civilian workers, the army numbers did not exceed one hundred thousand. Meanwhile Zhou Qing, with eighty thousand main force troops unimpaired and any casualties quickly refilled from reserve county soldiers, And Chu¡¯s remaining forty thousand navy, while closely monitoring the Ning navy in Jingling Prefecture¡¯s Xia Kou naval Camp, could still occasionally detach a force to join the combined battles. In the North, due to Lu Yuan gaining the advantage on the battlefield in Jiangxia, Xiangyang¡¯s own battlefield was influenced, with the situation for the Chu army looking remarkably promising. Chapter 829 - Chapter 829: Chapter 356 The Overall Situation is Set Chapter 829: Chapter 356 The Overall Situation is Set ¡°Indeed, Xiaoqing has truly met my expectations, grasping the crux of the battle with extreme precision. Utilizing the advantage I¡¯ve gained on the side of Jiangxia, we¡¯ve smoothly taken down one prefecture of Xiangyang in Ning Country.¡± After Lu Yuan finished reading the battle report from the north of the Yangtze River, he couldn¡¯t help but nod in satisfaction and smile, ¡°With this, the situation in the north of the Yangtze River is largely settled.¡± Now, if we don¡¯t count those hastily conscripted civilian workers with little combat power, The military strength of Chu State in Xiangyang Prefecture, north of the Yangtze, is already double that of Ning Country. At this moment, the only reason Ning Country can still barely hold on in the two prefectures north of the Yangtze is thanks to Yang Jing and another Inborn Grandmaster. By relying on the Inborn Grandmaster to hold the cities, making no move to leave, and supporting with elite troops and a large number of civilian workers, Ning Country has managed to keep hold of the two prefectures of Xiangyang County. But such a situation cannot possibly maintain indefinitely. As time goes by, when Chu State slowly accumulates strength, and as breakthroughs are made on various battlefields, it will simply be a matter of time before the troops can be spared to sweep through the two prefectures north of the Yangtze River. ¡°In these recent days, under my guidance, Chu Wei has made significant progress in the cultivation of his martial arts external body. Even after these few battles, benefiting from the momentum of great victories, his spirit has been refined and the speed of his soul metamorphosis has considerably accelerated. According to this trend, not only has his participation in the war not slowed his breakthrough, it has actually sped it up significantly. It seems that in another month or two, by next January or February, when winter fades away, he will successfully break through to Inborn.¡± Lu Yuan recalled the rapid progress of this disciple Chu Wei, whom he had been mentoring over time, and couldn¡¯t help but stroke his chin, falling into deep thought. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï It won¡¯t be long before he has yet another Inborn Grandmaster among his disciples. With Chu Wei¡¯s new Innate Combat Power, whether he is stationed in Hengyang or Luyang in the two prefectures to guard against a possible surprise attack by the main force of Ning Country at the start of spring, Or whether he is sent to the land north of the Yangtze to help Zhou Qing quickly eliminate the remaining strongholds of Ning People in Xiangyang Prefecture, he will be extremely useful. Just as originally anticipated, as the war commenced and time passed, the scales of victory would continuously tip towards Chu State¡¯s side. At this point, Ning Country has gone from an overwhelming momentum to a state of frustration and difficulty, merely holding a standoff against Chu State, which serves as solid proof. You must realize, since the war began in October and has now entered December, this great war that has swept across the Five Kingdoms south of the Yangtze has lasted not even two months. In just two months¡¯ time, Chu State has reversed the adverse situation and brought the battle to a turning point. If we allow more time to pass, that advantage will only continue to grow, ultimately converging into an unstoppable current and crushing the lesser entities of Ning Country in one fell swoop. ¡°Shen Qiu¡¯s biggest mistake in this war was not committing all his strength in a gamble for a decisive battle with me. Now, I have survived the initial hardship and held off Ning Country¡¯s fiercest onslaught. Furthermore, with the onset of the cold wave, and as the entire winter will not freeze over, with this half a year buffer, Chu State has already secured an invincible land.¡± Lu Yuan thought about the events of the past month and couldn¡¯t help smiling. Actually, Chu State also faced quite a few risks in the war against Ning Country. For example, aside from the main battlefield in Jiangxia, the three prefectures of Changsha, Hengyang, and Luyang to the south are Chu State¡¯s greatest vulnerabilities. If Ning Country could seize the opportunity, split their forces three ways, each led by an Inborn Grandmaster, and launch fierce attacks on these three prefectures, With Chu State¡¯s strength stretched thin due to a lack of Inborn Grandmasters, it would be hard-pressed and riddled with weaknesses. In the end, Ning Country could break through and lead their troops into Chu State¡¯s Dongting hinterland. If a Ning force were to rampage within Dongting, not only would the capital Baling be threatened, but Lu Yuan¡¯s main force at the front line in Jiangxia would also face the danger of being attacked from both sides. Even the other armies in Lingnan and Zhou Qing¡¯s forces in the north of the Yangtze would be threatened with their supply lines cut off. If such a situation truly arose, then this great war would turn disastrous for Chu State, with the risk of a crushing defeat. Fortunately, Emperor Shenqiu of Ning comes from aristocratic families; he has had an easy life, effortlessly taking control of a dynasty¡¯s politics, and even readily received an abdication to found his own dynasty. Although his background as a son of aristocratic families and his experiences over the years have indeed honed his abilities to be considered top-notch, All these aspects cannot hide his greatest flaw. That is, as someone whose position was inherited, Shen Qiu, despite his capabilities, lacks a certain tenacity compared to individuals like Lu Yuan who emerged from humble beginnings. Lu Yuan gambled with the risk of Chu State¡¯s annihilation against Ning Country. But everything Shen Qiu possesses is founded upon Ning Country, rooted in his identity as a member of the six aristocratic families and seven clans. It is these elements that have provided him with his current achievements. So if he should stake the legacy of thousands of years of the six families and seven clans of Ning Country in a gamble against Lu Yuan, who he views as a lowly commoner, he simply lacks the courage. Therefore, even though the main force led by Shen Qiu comprises of four hundred thousand soldiers and six Inborn masters, practically half of Ning Country¡¯s strength, It is precisely because it is half of Ning Country¡¯s strength that Shen Qiu is timid and shrinking, hardly daring to assemble all his forces to have a life-and-death fight with Lu Yuan. Not only that, but even when distributing forces to conduct separate raids on Chu State¡¯s Dongting Prefecture, it¡¯s all done with a petty air. He only deployed one force to covertly attack Changsha, not daring to send out all his forces.¡± Chapter 830 - Chapter 830: Chapter 356 The Overall Situation is Set_2 Chapter 830: Chapter 356 The Overall Situation is Set_2 Ultimately, leaving a reserve force of a hundred thousand men and possibly one or two Inborn Grandmasters was like holding a plan for contingencies, ensuring that there would still be these hundred thousand men as a fallback if something unexpected happened. Or if the front-line battle was going poorly, they could be urgently called upon to provide support. One cannot say that this strategy is entirely wrong. If one¡¯s own side could maintain the advantage, then taking action according to this strategy would indeed be the most prudent, ensuring that one¡¯s side remained invincible. But the question is, does Ning Country really have an absolute advantage over Chu State? Just looking at the main battlefield of Dongting in Yuzhang Prefecture, the Chu army has 210,000 troops, while Ning Country has 400,000. However, since the Chu army belonged to the defensive side, they could also levy civilian workers and, relying on the city¡¯s advantageous location, the actual gap with the Ning army wasn¡¯t that significant. If we look further and consider the power balance between Chu State and the Four Kingdoms, In this battle, Chu State mobilized ten Inborn grandmasters and the seventy thousand main forces in the front-line battlefields. With the vassal states in the southwest and Hanzhong Prefecture in the northwest combined, there are also two Inborn grandmasters, approximately a hundred thousand vassal troops and a hundred thousand forbidden army, making up another two hundred thousand troops ready for deployment. Thus, totaling twelve Inborn grandmasters and nine hundred thousand troops, Chu State could be said to have given their all in this Great War. What about the United Army of the Four Kingdoms? Ning, Su, Song, and Southsea combined have only twelve Inborn Grandmasters, and the United Army assembles only about eight hundred and fifty thousand troops, even less than Chu State. Looking solely at the numbers, Chu State actually seems to have an advantage over the United Army. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï The reason Chu State appears to be at a disadvantage is that Lu Yuan allocated too much force to the other three battlefields, leaving the main battlefield slightly empty, creating such an illusion to the outside world. But now, As Lu Yuan takes a huge gamble and Shen Qiu, due to excessive concerns, dares not commit all his strength, the deadlocked situation on the main battlefield between the two countries has emerged. Ning Country has also missed its only chance to defeat Chu State. Thereafter, as time progresses, once Chu State¡¯s bottom-of-the-barrel accumulation slowly erupts, the defeat of the United Army is a foregone conclusion. The disposition of Shen Qiu, who comes from an aristocratic family, and his wrong decisions, have already led him down the path of defeat. ¡°However, although the scales of victory are now tipping in favor of Chu State, if Shen Qiu were to suddenly come to his senses, crack the code, and desperately mobilize troops from within the country, executing a renewed plan to attack Dongting, he could still turn the tables. This point must be considered.¡± Lu Yuan stroked his chin, still considering Shen Qiu, and the hundred thousand troops remaining in Dongting Prefecture, along with one or two Inborn. There was also the Ning Country army of two hundred thousand within the country, meant for defense against Liang to the north of the Yangtze River and for suppressing domestic issues, along with four Inborn Grandmasters. Combined, these forces were not to be underestimated. If Shen Qiu truly threw caution to the wind, or took some risks, Ning Country could still summon another two hundred thousand troops and three to four Inborn Grandmasters to target Chu State. If such mighty power were to be divided for simultaneous assaults on Luyang, Hengyang, and, perhaps, a portion attacking Changsha, Then, under the pressure of three-sided attacks, Lu Yuan would indeed find it difficult to cope and struggle to keep up. ¡°Although, given Shen Qiu¡¯s character, he is unlikely to execute this even more insanely risky plan, but there is always a chance, what if he does?¡± Lu Yuan speculated about Shen Qiu¡¯s character and shook his head with a trace of disdain. But to be cautious, he made up his mind, ¡°Once Chu Wei breaks through, it¡¯s better to station him in Luyang Prefecture. With an Inborn like him in place, even if Ning Country launched a surprise attack, he could ensure the safety of Fu City, blocking them at the border, preventing the army from penetrating into the hinterland. The same goes for the Spiritual Woman; she could also be sent to Hengyang Prefecture to take over local defenses. With one Inborn Grandmaster settled in each of the border prefectures of Changsha, Hengyang, and Luyang, and by conscripting civilian workers, nearly a hundred thousand troops could be amassed. With such strength, if not seeking to attack, defensively speaking, it is more than enough already.¡± Lu Yuan still decided to play it safe. After all, time was on his side; there was no need to continue taking risks as he had previously done. As for the potential problems in the main battlefield after relocating the Spiritual Woman and Chu Wei? Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t bragging, but relying on the stronghold of Jiangxia, and the more than hundred thousand land and sea troops here, coupled with his title as the first grandmaster in the world, forget about those mere hundred thousand Ning troops outside the city, even if Shen Qiu amassed the hundred thousand troops from Yuzhang Prefecture and the remaining five Inborn, dreaming of seizing Jiangxia City under his defense would be pure fantasy. In the end, they might just shatter their very own teeth, counting themselves lucky if that¡¯s all the opponent managed to achieve. ¡°So it¡¯s decided. In the Dongting Prefecture¡¯s main battlefield and the four border prefectures, we¡¯ll take a defensive stance, assigning one Inborn Grandmaster and over a hundred thousand troops to each to fend off Ning¡¯s army. The other three off-center battlefields will take an offensive approach to achieve breakthroughs as quickly as possible. Besides Chu Wei, the remaining Li Liang and his fellow disciples¡ªthese four disciples¡ªshould consecutively break through Innate by next spring before summer comes. At that time, these newly advanced four Inborn can be dispatched to the three battlefields, having a decisive impact. With this strategy, if all goes well, by this time next year, we might be able to claim victory in this decisive battle. Then spend another year or two, gradually conquering each country until Yangzhou is unified.¡± After analyzing the current situation of all the battlefields, Lu Yuan slightly adjusted his strategy and made a new decision. Having reviewed the overall situation and confirming there were no omissions, he nodded in satisfaction, a smile on his face. Chapter 831 - Chapter 831: Chapter 356 The Overall Situation is Set_3 Chapter 831: Chapter 356 The Overall Situation is Set_3 ¡­ The fact proved that Lu Yuan¡¯s strategy of holding firm on the main battlefield was extremely correct. In the secondary battlefield of Jiangbei Xiangyang Prefecture, Zhou Qing seized the opportunity for a breakthrough due to the influence of the main battlefield. The other two fronts, already significantly advantageous in the Lingnan Battlefield, didn¡¯t require support from Lu Yuan¡¯s main forces to gain an enormous advantage right from the start. On the 27th day of the ninth month in the tenth year of Shenwu, Qingyunzi led 160,000 Chu troops southward, attacking Southsea Country in Lingnan. Since Southsea Country had decided to defend the capital, the other prefectures, having deployed a large number of their elite troops, became extremely vulnerable and were quickly conquered by the Chu army without much effort. In just half a month, the Chu army spent their time marching and taking over the cities they encountered along the way. By the time Qingyunzi led the large army to the vicinity of Nanhai City, six prefectures to the north and west had already changed banners, submitting to Chu State. However, by this time, the reinforcements from Ning Country had also marched south from Yuzhang, arriving from the east almost at the same time as the Chu army at Nanhai City. Subsequently, Qingyunzi took the initiative to engage the reinforcing Ning army in battle outside Nanhai City, resulting in several large clashes. The Southsea Army, accustomed to a tortoise retreat, displayed their longstanding tradition by simply hiding within the city walls, watching the Chu army battle it out with the Ning army. Only after being unable to withstand the requests and threats of the Ning army did they reluctantly deploy an army of 50,000 civilian workers to assist the Ning army against the Chu forces. But the Southsea reinforcements might as well have not come at all; once they arrived, the Ning army, which had been holding its own against the Chu forces, suddenly experienced a turn for the worse. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? The hastily summoned civilian workers were not only potentially unfamiliar with swords and spears, but also completely clueless about military formations, recognizing banners, and other martial knowledge. Such a ragtag army might just barely be useful for throwing stones or pouring sewage from atop of the city walls, but sending them out to face the Chu army, which had seldom lost a battle across the world, was tantamount to handing over military achievements to the enemy. As a result, after the Southsea Army joined the battlefield, the Ning forces, which had been evenly matched with the Chu Army, suddenly revealed a huge vulnerability, which was swiftly detected by Qingyunzi. He immediately ordered Li Xiong to lead a chosen group of elite troops in a fierce attack on the Southsea Army¡¯s formation, routing the ragtag army in moments, sending them fleeing in a disastrous defeat across the battlefield. After that, things became simple¡ªchasing down the fugitive soldiers, striking the Ning army¡¯s camp. Seizing the opportunity of the enemy¡¯s defeat and low morale, Li Xiong led his troops to repeatedly break through Ning People¡¯s formations and even reached the opponent¡¯s encampment in one go, capturing several Ning camps and taking over ten thousand Ning fighters prisoners. Qingyunzi too, on the main battlefield, took advantage of the flanking collapse and rising panic within the Ning army, launching a fierce assault. Eventually, the Ning forces could not hold on and retreated in a great rout while the Chu forces pressed on with the pursuit, gaining numerous captures and surrenders. Even an Inborn Grandmaster from Ning was seriously injured by Qingyunzi when he saw the opportunity, nearly dying on the battlefield. Even though he narrowly escaped with his life, he lost a great deal of his fighting ability and would not be of much use until his injuries healed. This major victory not only led to the Chu army¡¯s decimation of Southsea Country¡¯s 50,000 makeshift soldiers but also resulted in over ten thousand Ning casualties, the capture of over twenty thousand and the destruction of more than thirty thousand of Ning¡¯s main force, including severe injury to one of their Inborn Grandmasters. Taking into account the previous battles¡¯ gains, the one hundred thousand troops sent by Ning to Southsea Country had suffered losses exceeding fifty thousand, essentially losing their main force. The remaining forty thousand surviving soldiers could no longer match the Chu forces and had retreated to below Nanhai City to re-establish their camp, depending on the city¡¯s Southsea Army, hunkering down and steadfastly refusing to come out. Qingyunzi took advantage of the situation to attack the city walls and camps, and after realizing that little advantage could be gained, he led the main force to encamp outside the city, surrounding and constraining the united army of Two Countries besieging Southsea City. Then, he ordered Li Xiong to lead a detached army eastward to attack three other prefectures on the eastern side of Ning Country. By the time he returned with his army, of the one county and ten prefectures of Nanhai Country, only the last stronghold of Southsea City remained, stubbornly resisting the great army of Chu State. To resist The World with a single corner was naturally unsustainable in the long run. Within Southsea City were more than a hundred thousand soldiers and horses, and several hundred thousand civilians. The astronomical amount of grain consumed every day by men and horses was immense. The opponent, even if they intended to defend the city to the death, would not be able to hold out for long. The fall of Southsea City and the downfall of Nanhai Country were as certain as a nail hammered into a board, just a matter of time. The Chu army on the eastern route of Lingnan had already gained absolute advantage on the battlefield. Not only was Qingyunzi¡¯s side progressing smoothly, but Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s side was also making equally pleasing progress. After receiving the tasks assigned by Lu Yuan, the Queen, accompanied by Han Hu, immediately headed south, rushing to Lingling Prefecture. There, she took command of the seventy thousand troops already assembled locally, and blocked the United Army at Yue City Pass. After several great wars, relying on the strength of the Male Pass and the fortress, like Lu Yuan in Jiangxia, they fiercely dashed the spirits of Su Xuange and others, holding the United Army below Guan City. Besides guarding the pass, Lan Cai¡¯er also ordered Shi Hanliang, the Qianzhong Defense, and Li River, the Grand General of Chilih Country, to jointly dispatch 140,000 troops to attack Tonghai County of Su Country from behind. Su Country was already short on soldiers, and had only left 10,000 prefectural and county soldiers in Tonghai County to suppress the region; even if they mobilized civilian workers, the sparse local population of just one or two hundred thousand couldn¡¯t muster up twenty or thirty thousand people. Ultimately, in less than half a month, the entire Tonghai County fell directly into Chu hands as the army passed through. Then, the two Inborn Grandmasters, along with the 140,000-strong army, entered Yulin County, and Su Country, vulnerable in the rear, could not resist. In a short time, most of the prefectures and counties had already fallen. Su Xuange at the front line received the news and was so frightened that he led his troops to retreat overnight, fleeing all the way back to Yulin City. As for Xie Ning¡¯s seventy thousand Song Army, they were sold out completely. Eventually, under a pincer attack from Chu forces, they were utterly defeated. Even Xie Ning himself, under the joint assault of several Inborn Grandmasters, fled severely wounded. Thus, the entire seventy thousand Song Army was annihilated, with only their sovereign escaping on horseback, his life spared. The Su-Song United Army had become a complete joke. Even to the extent that Xie Ning, who narrowly escaped death, upon returning to his country, immediately executed the son whom Su Xuange had sent to Song Country as a hostage, in order to vent his fury. The Two Countries became sworn enemies, never again able to ally. Meanwhile, Lan Cai¡¯er, having achieved a great victory and gathered up the prisoners, led the more than two hundred thousand-strong army magnificently into Yulin County, besieging Su Country¡¯s capital, Yulin City. Inside the city were only Su Xuange himself and the ragtag array of forty thousand demoralized soldiers he had managed to scrape together. Under the siege of four Inborn Grandmasters and the more than two hundred thousand-strong Chu army, the fall of Yulin City, like the extinction of Nanhai Country, was also just a matter of time. The Two Routes of Lingnan, with Lu Yuan¡¯s deliberate diversion of resources, had finally borne fruit, yielding sweet rewards. In this decisive battle over Jiangnan, the overall situation of Chu State had been set. Chapter 832 - Chapter 832: Chapter 357: The Second Strategy Against Chu Chapter 832: Chapter 357: The Second Strategy Against Chu Xiangyang, Ning Army Camp. ¡°Look at this, what kind of battle have Yang Jing and Shangguan Ming fought!¡± In the conference hall, Shen Qiu slammed the war report from the northern and southern front lines onto the ground, his face seething with anger: ¡°I entrusted the army and state affairs to those two, gave them full authority, which was the greatest of favors. Is this how they repay me? Yang Jing has lost cities and territory, Shangguan Ming has lost soldiers and officers, my two hundred thousand troops have been humiliated by the Chu bandits, leaving the battlefields in the north and Lingnan in shambles. Have they lived up to my trust?¡± In the hall below, the civil and military officers of Ning Country stood on both sides, trembling as they watched their sovereign¡¯s furious face and the war report on the ground, all bowing their heads in silence, not daring to speak. Only Bai Yian couldn¡¯t help but sigh internally upon seeing this. He did not cower like the others, but instead stepped forward, picking up the war report from the ground. Glancing briefly over it, the information within was indeed the same as the news he had received, which only added to his bitterness. However, now was not the time to assign blame to the front-line generals. With the collapse of battles in both the north and the south, Ning Country was already at a strategic disadvantage in this struggle for Yangzhou supremacy against Chu State and could fall at any moment. The most urgent matter was to consider how to reverse the decline. At the very least, they must ensure their own side would not suffer a crushing defeat. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 Compared to these issues, the losses suffered by Yang Jing and Shangguan Ming were insignificant. Therefore, Bai Yian took two steps forward, bowing as he said, ¡°Your Majesty, in the battle to the north, although the Martial Proclamation Marquis commands one hundred thousand troops, constrained by the Chu navy, he can only remain defensive in his water forts, unable to move freely. The actual forces the Martial Proclamation Marquis can command only amount to the fifty thousand infantry and cavalry of Xiangyang Prefecture. On the other hand, the Chu forces not only employed eighty thousand of their forbidden army but also had tens of thousands in their naval force, more than double the number of the Martial Proclamation Marquis¡¯s forces. They also have open water and land routes, allowing them to easily land troops and attack our northern rear. The reason for the battle was a sneak attack by the Chu navy on our rear, which led to the loss of Anlu Prefecture. This is not a fault in combat, but a disadvantage in our naval forces. And apart from that prefecture, Jingmen and Jingling, the two prefectures, are still under the control of our forces, with Ning bandits unable to advance further. The Martial Proclamation Marquis has done all that he could. As for the battle in Lingnan, the Wucheng Marquis¡¯s command had no errors. In the early stages of the great battle with the Chu forces, there were wins and losses, and we were not at a disadvantage. The reason behind the major defeat in Lingnan lies with the Nanhai Army¡¯s incompetence; they were not only unhelpful, but they also sabotaged the Wucheng Marquis. Furthermore, the Chu forces of Nanhai Country fielded a force of one hundred and sixty thousand, which also greatly outnumbered the ten thousand troops under the Wucheng Marquis. This led to the Wucheng Marquis being outnumbered and inevitably seeking assistance from Nanhai Country, ultimately culminating in this defeat. In both battles, north and Lingnan, it was not a fault of combat but indeed, both the Martial Proclamation Marquis and the Wucheng Marquis were simply outmatched. In both battlefields, the Chu forces were stronger, and our forces were weaker. Being weaker and attacking strong foes, the eventual defeat is normal and cannot be faulted.¡± Bai Yian provided some defense for Yang Jing and Shangguan Ming and subtly hinted that the main reason for Yang Jing¡¯s defeat was the sovereign¡¯s major defeat in naval command, leading to the loss of control over the waterways in the northern battlefield and giving the Chu forces an opportunity to seize Anlu Prefecture. If one were to discuss fault, with the loss of over seventy thousand soldiers in both land and naval battles, Shen Qiu¡¯s mistakes were even greater. But alas, Shen Qiu was the sovereign, and they were his subjects. Subjects cannot speak of their sovereign¡¯s faults, so at this moment, Bai Yian could only subtly hint, reminding his own sovereign not to forget his mistakes, the primary reason for the rapid deterioration of the battlefield. After all, the strategy of Chu State was now quite clear. That was to focus on the north and Lingnan while neglecting the central heartland of Dongting. Most of Chu State¡¯s forces were deployed in those three secondary battlefields, which is why they were able to achieve advantages so quickly, causing the United Army to suffer defeat after defeat. In contrast, the United Army, which concentrated nearly half of its forces on the main battlefield, despite possessing a two-to-one advantage over the Chu forces, not only failed to secure a victory but also suffered consecutive setbacks. In terms of embarrassment, nobody could compare to Shen Qiu, it was just that no one dared to mention it. Indeed. At that moment, hearing Bai Yian¡¯s words with an implied criticism of himself, Shen Qiu¡¯s expression instantly darkened. But even as his anger grew, he stopped blaming Yang Jing and Shangguan Ming. Shen Qiu himself knew that the biggest mistake in this battle was indeed his own. The officers below were also clear about this fact. Yet no one dared to say it out loud, except for the Bai Yian standing before him. And Bai Yian dared to raise this issue because he is an Inborn Grandmaster, and he also comes from one of the six aristocratic families. In terms of status and position, he was not much inferior to the emperor himself. Under the elective abdication system that provided stability and harmony within the high-level, it also meant that the highest authority was not as absolute as that of a singularly despotic dynasty¡¯s emperor. Just like now. When Shen Qiu¡¯s decisions went wrong, leading to damage to the collective interests of the empire, Bai Yian, whose own interests were affected, started questioning Shen Qiu¡¯s capabilities without the customary respect. The slight sarcasm at the moment was just the beginning of the probe. If Shen Qiu continues to make more errant decisions, leading to continuous decline of Ning Country, Then those aristocratic families of the six names and seven clans might just join forces and replay the incident of Emperor Hongdao from before. Chapter 833 - Chapter 833: Chapter 357: The Second Strategy of Controlling Chu_2 Chapter 833: Chapter 357: The Second Strategy of Controlling Chu_2 The very thought that the dynasty he had founded might come to an end by his own hand sent a chill through Shen Qiu¡¯s heart, and he immediately calmed down. Then, he forced a thin smile onto his face, nodded, and said, ¡°The Wuan Marquis speaks truly, it is I who have been somewhat out of sorts due to the unfavorable military situation.¡± Shen Qiu knew he couldn¡¯t stubbornly hold his ground, as that would surely offend Bai Yian, as well as people like Yang Jing and Shangguan Ming, and their respective alliances behind them. So he yielded a little, then lightly moved on from the subject, turning to ask, ¡°However, now that we have suffered defeats in both the north and Lingnan, Xiangyang and Southsea are in critical danger, and even Su Country¡¯s capital is besieged. The Chu villains advance unrestrained, with none in the north or south to stop them.¡± ¡°If their momentum isn¡¯t curbed, I fear all of the northern and Lingnan regions will fall to the Chu villains.¡± ¡°Once they seize these two territories, the Chu¡¯s might will greatly increase, and they will become even more difficult to manage.¡± ¡°And our land in Jiangdong may well follow in the footsteps of the north and Lingnan, ultimately being annihilated by the Chu villains.¡± ¡°The situation has become so dire that I am at my wit¡¯s end. Does the Wuan Marquis have any good strategy that can rescue the nation from peril, stem the tide of the Chu invaders, and salvage this battle from the brink of disaster?¡± Shen Qiu¡¯s inquiry was partly passing the buck and partly in earnest. The disadvantage he had created himself was now beyond his own ability to resolve. But Ning Country wasn¡¯t just Shen Qiu¡¯s Ning Country; it belonged to all the aristocratic families of the six surnames and seven clans. As Ning Country faced imminent disaster and seemed poised to fall, you, Bai Yian, cannot expect to remain uninvolved. It¡¯s time to contribute your efforts. If you have any good solutions, speak up quickly. Don¡¯t hold back anymore. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 Otherwise, as the delays continue, not only will I, the Emperor, suffer, but you aristocrats will suffer as well. In Shen Qiu¡¯s heart, there was both spite and bitterness. Facing his inquiry, after some contemplation, Bai Yian said, ¡°Your Majesty, the current situation has reached a life-or-death crossroads; we must fight with all we have. I have two strategies to offer against Chu.¡± ¡°The first strategy is to mobilize everything, spare no effort, and gather all the two hundred thousand soldiers stationed across the country, leaving only the navy and the necessary troops for defense. With this, we can muster another one hundred thousand troops.¡± ¡°With these one hundred thousand men, combined with the forces stationed in Yuzhang Prefecture, we can have a total force of two hundred thousand.¡± ¡°Moreover, if we draw two Martial Marquises from those serving as reserves in the country to join the two positioned in Yuzhang Prefecture, we would have four Martial Marquises, ready to take orders at any moment.¡± ¡°With two hundred thousand troops and four Martial Marquises, whether we redirect them to the Jiangxia front line or command them to lead their troops to attack the various prefectures along Dongting¡¯s border, we can regain the advantage on our main battlefield and for our homeland.¡± ¡°With full commitment and the nation¡¯s entire military force, we could march west in indignation and fight Chu to the death.¡± ¡°If we win, the land will be united, and Yangzhou will return to peace.¡± ¡°If we lose, we will merely lay down our weapons, face west, and submit.¡± ¡°This is indeed putting our whole effort into a single battle, deciding life or death in one fight. The Altars of Soil and Grain and the Ancestral Temple Inheritance will all be determined by this battle.¡± Bai Yian¡¯s gaze burned intently as he looked at Shen Qiu, voicing the strategy he was most inclined toward and believed in most. However, upon hearing this strategy, Shen Qiu¡¯s face changed color immediately, and the other ministers in the hall also erupted in uproar. ¡°The Chu invaders are barbaric, mere hunters from the hills, who delight in war and violence and are no more than reckless ruffians. We are nobles of the imperial family, holders of the poetic tradition, stewards of an enterprise lasting a thousand years. How can we gamble our lives against the invaders, pinning our hopes on the outcome of a single battle¡¯s win or lose?¡± ¡°Your Majesty, while we still have prospects of victory and the current situation is stable, we only need to sit poised on high, awaiting the right opportunity. What the Wuan Marquis proposes is to gamble recklessly, disregarding the well-being of our kingdom and dynasty. Your Majesty must not heed his words!¡± ¡°How dare the Wuan Marquis voice such nation-ruining suggestions?¡± The ministers in the hall opposed and criticized Bai Yian¡¯s strategy of deciding the war with a single decisive battle, almost unanimously. Another Martial Marquis from the main camp, a fellow member of the aristocratic families and the vanguard in this battle, Marquis of Wuxi Li Minghao, was particularly explicit in his rebuttal, ¡°The Wuan Marquis¡¯s words are misguided! The Chu villains are merely currently superior in battle, but they have waged war for consecutive years, first subduing the southwestern tribes, then conquering the two states of Xichuan, next campaigning in the Hegu territories, and afterwards seizing Hanzhong from Zhou.¡± ¡°These four campaigns have stretched over six years, with military movements every year, and no rest in sight.¡± ¡°Now, Chu faces an exhausted people and a weary population, having been engaged in bitter war for a long time.¡± ¡°Yet instead of recuperating and aiming for peaceful times, they act greedily and insatiably, breaking alliances and making oaths, arbitrarily attacking Southsea and ultimately provoking a joint attack by our Four Kingdoms, leading to today¡¯s catastrophe.¡± ¡°At this moment, it is just a temporary setback.¡± ¡°Even though our Royal Teacher has suffered a temporary defeat on the battlefields of the north and Lingnan, the total loss of soldiers is but a mere seventy thousand.¡± ¡°Even including the losses on the Jiangxia side, the troops lost number only about one hundred and fifty thousand.¡± ¡°While such losses are substantial, our Da Ning Elite Army of eight hundred thousand, even after the loss of one hundred and fifty thousand men, still has six hundred and fifty thousand remaining, and our forces hardly seem inferior to that of Chu.¡± ¡°Moreover, our densely populated Ning Country has millions of citizens, like a vast sea of people.¡± ¡°After more than ten years of resting and accumulating strength, our royal treasury of gold and silver is immeasurable, and our granaries of grain are beyond calculation.¡± ¡°With just a command from the king, the five prefecture¡¯s citizens, the six treasuries¡¯ silver, and the hundred granaries¡¯ grain can all be deployed, and an army of a million can be formed in a moment.¡± ¡°Such depth of foundation and richness of resources are the result of more than ten years of kind governance and hard toil.¡± ¡°Now, with the foundation still intact and the resources yet untapped, and the Elite Army still within our lands.¡± ¡°There is no need to abandon gold and jade for sticks and stones, to forsake the fundamental for the trivial. Why would we demean ourselves to fight against barbaric groups and engage in reckless actions?¡± Not everyone has Bai Yian¡¯s determination to risk everything for the future. The many officials in the hall, most of them born into aristocratic families, whether they came from influential families of the prefectures or were descendants of sects, All had their own homes and businesses, wives and daughters, relatives and clans, and boundless wealth too. Chapter 834 - Chapter 834: Chapter 357: The Second Strategy of Controlling Chu_3 Chapter 834: Chapter 357: The Second Strategy of Controlling Chu_3 ¡°` At this moment, Bai Yian was asking them to give their all in a life-and-death struggle against the Chu army, which at the time was notoriously ferocious, invincible, and unstoppable. Was this a joke? How much money has the court actually given me? They expect me to abandon my home and business, to disregard my life, and to wager the foundation laid by my ancestors. Are you dreaming, or am I the fool? The high-ranking aristocratic families, accustomed to commanding others to fight and die for their slightest rewards, had lost the brave and bloodthirsty spirit of their forefathers that had fought for everything. Faced with Bai Yian, who wanted to change all this and had encroached upon their interests, their instinct was to refute and resist. And their reasons for rebuttal were quite justified. Unlike the unruly Chu State, they were all Millennial Aristocratic Families, Noble of the imperial family, of dignified status and profound heritage. How could they be as rash as commoners, wishing to fight to the death at the slightest provocation? The lowly commoners of Ning Country have not all died out yet! The coffers, filled with gold, silver, and grain, have not yet been exhausted! With such a substantial family fortune, was there any need for them to take risks, to fight to the death with the desperate Chu thieves? Just as Li Minghao said, Ning Country still had tens of millions of people and a decade¡¯s worth of reserves. At a moment¡¯s notice, they could raise an army of a million more soldiers. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã? Don¡¯t worry about the quality of these soldiers for now, the quantity alone is overwhelming. Once the men are recruited, even if they can¡¯t be expected to fight as valiantly as the current elite troops in head-on battlefield confrontations with the Chu people, they could at least defend the city and protect the land like the county soldiers, an achievable task. At present, as the one launching the offensive, while the Chu are bent on defense, repeated failures and grievous losses from unsuccessful assaults are not really a cause for concern. After all, the defenders always have the advantage over the attackers. A momentary setback does not mean they have utterly failed. This only proves that Chu State is indeed powerful, and even with Ning Country allied with the Three Nations of Lingnan, it could not be eliminated. This does not signify that Ning Country is weak. Although Bai Yian¡¯s proposal had some merit, it could not conceal the alarmist undertones within. Of course, upon hearing this proposal, Shen Qiu felt it was preposterous and absurd, just like many other ministers present, instinctively opposing and resisting it. However, considering the veiled criticism from Bai Yian and the fact that his own position was somewhat unstable, he did not want to offend the representative of the pro-war aristocratic faction too much. Thus Shen Qiu tactfully said, ¡°Wuan Marquis¡¯s words are reasonable; indeed, now is a time for struggle. However, while our great Da Ning still has the strength, there is no need to gamble everything in a death match with the Chu thieves. ¡°Our ancestors passed the Altars of Soil and Grain on to us so that we could continue for ten thousand years with an unextinguished legacy, not to act recklessly or to quarrel over a fleeting moment of pride at the expense of the world¡¯s treasures. At this point, I find this proposal somewhat inappropriate; Wuan Marquis, what is your second strategy?¡± Without any surprise, Shen Qiu conformed to public opinion and rejected Bai Yian¡¯s proposal. Bai Yian, however, had anticipated this response. Yet, seeing the pervasive fear of battle throughout the hall, he could not help but sigh in disappointment. He had completely given up hope for the Coastal Aristocratic Family, corroded by a thousand years of opulence. So when Shen Qiu asked for his second strategy, he did not hide his thoughts and said bluntly, ¡°Since the king and all ministers believe a decisive battle is inappropriate, let it be so. However, unwilling to engage in a decisive battle, and given our current strength, defeating Chu State on the battlefield is highly improbable, nearly impossible. Therefore, in my opinion, since victory on the battlefield is out of reach, we might as well abandon the thought of conquering Chu State altogether and focus on preserving the Altars of Soil and Grain. I request that the king withdraw the Western Expedition forces and lead the troops back to the nation. Then, with our navy, several times larger than that of Chu State, we¡¯ll blockade the river, prevent the enemy from advancing eastward, and protect the Yangtze River Natural Barrier. At the same time, in Yuzhang Prefecture to the west and south, and Jian¡¯an County to the south, where we border the Chu thieves, we¡¯ll build forts and establish cities and passageways, relying on the natural defenses of the mountains and rivers to bar the enemy at the gate. But to achieve this, ensuring the eternal security of our land and rivers, Da Ning¡¯s current army of six hundred thousand is insufficient. I have heard that to bolster their military strength, the rogue state of Chu is implementing a policy that conscripts one adult male out of every two households, thus sustaining an army of seven hundred thousand with their meager national power. This strategy will strengthen the country and the military. I implore the king to put aside the kindness for the people and, following Chu¡¯s policy, to widely conscript soldiers throughout the nation to enhance our military might. With this, out of Da Ning¡¯s three million four hundred thousand households, we can gather another million soldiers. In addition, the king may dispatch naval forces to sail to the Sea and reach out to Southsea, Su, and Song, to summon the allied forces from these three countries back to our homeland. ¡°Although these three nations have been defeated by Chu, their elite forces still remain, which together amount to two to three hundred thousand soldiers, and they have two Inborn Grandmasters. If we can bring them all back to our country, Da Ning¡¯s combined forces will reach over two million, with more than sixteen Inborn Grandmasters. Furthermore, inside the Immortal Martial Sects such as Purple Cloud Dao and Liuyang Sect, there are many Inborn Grandmasters remaining. These sects are within the territory of Ning Country; they are citizens of Ning and should obey the Heavenly Son¡¯s command. The king could dispatch a Messenger to summon the Grandmasters from these two sects¡ªthis might garner another three or four Inborns. With all the country¡¯s might, constructing extensive fortifications, even if Chu State captures lands to the north of the Yangtze or Lingnan, facing our forces of two million and twenty Inborns, as long as we are determined to defend, what could they possibly do?¡± It is unclear whether Bai Yian was being deliberate or it was just his character to do so. In the hall, after the denial of his first proposal that had shocked everyone, his second proposal followed with yet another extremist approach, again causing a stir. It completely switched from the prior extreme advocacy for battle to vehement avoidance of conflict, shocking the assembly once again. However, compared to the previous gamble, Bai Yian¡¯s passive-aggressive stance was more acceptable to the crowd and even resonated deeply with some. After all, regardless of how Da Ning would look or be perceived, and putting aside any shame, there was an undeniable sense of security. With a force of two million and twenty Inborns defending, Chu Country could not breach this impenetrable defense even in a hundred years. This was indeed the counsel of a seasoned statesman! Many faces showed signs of agreement. Thus, once Bai Yian finished speaking, no one immediately jumped out to voice opposition. ¡°` Chapter 835 - Chapter 835: Chapter 358 The Middle Way Chapter 835: Chapter 358 The Middle Way Watching as the last of Bai Yian¡¯s strategies for defending against Chu was voiced, a subtle tide of agreement began to swell among the ministers within the hall. Shen Qiu could no longer sit still and stood up to speak. ¡°The strategy proposed by Wuan Marquis is indeed mature and well-considered for the state, a safe plan,¡± he began. Shen Qiu first affirmed the practicality and correctness of Bai Yian¡¯s last strategy, then shifted his tone and said, ¡°However, consistently retreating and passively defending without counteraction can truly dampen our own morale while bolstering that of the Chu people. If this were to spread, wouldn¡¯t all under heaven think that Ning Country fears the Chu bandits? Therefore, retreating heedlessly is untenable. Although we must withdraw, we cannot do so without strategy¡ªwe must be tactical.¡± Pausing there, Shen Qiu looked down at the ministers watching him, resting his gaze significantly on Bai Yian before continuing, ¡°Wuan Marquis earlier proposed two strategies for dealing with Chu, which, in my view, both have their merits. However, they are a bit too one-sided and extreme. It¡¯s either a bet-all decisive battle or an all-out conservative retreat. Both approaches lack the doctrine of the mean. But if we integrate the two strategies, taking the best of both and discarding the drawbacks, that would form a viable and excellent plan. I believe that the first strategy of Wuan Marquis is actually quite good. Our great Da Ning has profound strength. The forces we have mobilized on the battlefield have not yet been fully exerted, hence allowing the Chu bandits to rampage unchallenged. If we can summon the troops from the rear, we might yet be able to contend with the Chu bandits. In the main camp at Pengli, Yuzhang, our army still has a hundred thousand soldiers and two Martial Marquises. With such strength, we could well open up one or two new battle fronts.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï ¡°I wish to split the troops in the camp into two forces, each led by another Martial Marquis, to separately attack Chu State¡¯s two prefectures of Hengyang and Luyang. These two prefectures, much like Changsha, claim to have a hundred thousand each, but most are civilian workers conscripted for the war effort. The main Chu forces left behind are in fact not that many; merely twenty thousand Forbidden Army or county soldiers. Currently inside Chu State, the only Inborn Grandmasters they can mobilize are those accompanying the country¡¯s Grand Chancellor Sun Siwen, who have all rushed to support Changsha, leaving no reserves.¡± ¡°At most, it has been heard that the Lu Bandits have recently taken a barbarian consort into the palace, who appears to be a spiritual woman from the Snow Plains Nomads and seems to be an Inborn Grandmaster. But that is just one person. Even if they deploy her, they can at most protect one prefecture. Among Hengyang and Luyang, there is still one that will lack an Inborn Grandmaster to secure it. Therefore, if two Martial Marquises lead the troops to attack these two prefectures, with the might of the Marquises and the strength of Da Ning¡¯s elite forces, storming the prefectures without a Grandmaster¡¯s presence is a real possibility. If one of the two routes succeeds, we could penetrate the heartland of Chu Country. Thus, if one force breaks into Dongting, though the central and southern areas may not, it will force the Chu bandits to redistribute troops from the front line for relief at home.¡± ¡°At that time, with me personally leading the main forces at the Jiangxia front, the Lu Bandits must not dare to lead his troops in retreat. Otherwise, if I seize the opportunity for a surprise attack, once Jiangxia City is lost, I could rally the troops and directly besiege their capital, Baling. Hence, the army at Jiangxia, the Chu bandits dare not move. If they wish to save the interior, they can only pull troops from either The North or Lingnan.¡± ¡°In that case, whether it¡¯s troops from The North or Lingnan that return, it can alleviate the pressure on the battlefield for our United Army. If The North¡¯s troops come to the rescue, Martial Proclamation Marquis could take advantage of the situation to reclaim Anlu Prefecture, and I could dispatch some forces to secure the stability of Xiangyang Prefecture. If Lingnan¡¯s troops come to the aid, Southsea or Su Country might just be able to take the opportunity to recover lost territory.¡± ¡°At that time, rallying our forces, the Lingnan Region could again be set up as a stumbling block, tying down the energy of the Chu bandits and preventing them from fully focusing eastward to attack Ning Country. Hence, if this strategy succeeds, we can¡¯t do as Wuan Marquis initially suggested, a thunderous cleansing sweep annihilating the Chu bandits and recovering the land of Jiangnan in one stroke. But it could turn the tide of our current dispiriting situation, stabilizing the war and continuing the attrition with Chu. As long as we can hold on, dragging it out for a few years, until Zhou Country to the north has dealt with the invasions of Snow Plains Nomads and Wei people and can spare efforts to interfere with Southern Border affairs.¡± ¡°Alternatively, send envoys to the southwest to align with Dali and Nanzhao, the two Yi countries, inciting them to create disorder in the Chu bandits¡¯ rear. Whichever place experiences upheaval, it¡¯s bound to cause a conflagration in Chu¡¯s rear, straining them to cover both fronts, forcing them to divert a significant number of troops to cope. As a result, Chu¡¯s ability to maintain troops at the front line would be greatly reduced, and they could no longer sustain their current overwhelming offensive momentum, forced into a defensive posture.¡± ¡°Then, leveraging Da Ning¡¯s formidable national strength, we might take the opportunity during the war, while Chu is occupied with the rear and cannot focus on the front line. Through military aid, we could annex Southsea, Su, and Song one by one. If we could take these three nations of Lingnan, Da Ning would gain four more prefectures, accounting for six to seven million additional people. Adding up to the original territories of Da Ning, the expanse of our borders would reach nine prefectures, governing over 23 million common people, more than doubling that of Chu.¡± ¡°With such a foundation, even if we solely rely on attrition, we could wear down Chu over time.¡± Shen Qiu spoke with full confidence, sharing his revised first strategy for challenging Chu with the ministers. There¡¯s no denying that according to his plan, along with the envisioned future if successful, it was exceedingly tempting. At the very least, on the surface, the likelihood of this strategy succeeding appeared to be quite high. Moreover, compared to Bai Yian¡¯s original high-risk strategy, Shen Qiu¡¯s refined plan, which only mobilized the hundred thousand soldiers from Pengli originally intended for the battle, was far more reliable. Chapter 836 - Chapter 836: Chapter 358 The Way of Moderation_2 Chapter 836: Chapter 358 The Way of Moderation_2 ¡°` Yet as Shen Qiu said, it was a more moderate and prudent approach. ¡°Your Majesty is wise and insightful, to conceive such an extraordinary strategy.¡± ¡°If this plan succeeds, the downfall of Chu thieves will be at hand.¡± ¡°in the days to come, when Chu State is destroyed, it will all be due to Your Majesty¡¯s strategy today.¡± Inside the great hall, some ministers inclined toward prudence, or already confidants of Shen Qiu, began praising and exaggerating the merits of this plan once again. Bai Yian, who was among the ministers not offering flattery, watched the scene unfold with growing disappointment in his heart. As an old general who had followed his grandfather for over a decade in military campaigns, deeply influenced by his teachings, how could he not see that the so-called moderate strategy proposed by His Majesty was too presumptuous? It was as if discussing military tactics on paper. All sorts of plans seem feasible, and surely, if everything went as His Majesty said, without a hitch, the Chu thieves would indeed be doomed. But the question is, can things really go as smoothly as that? Or rather, would the Chu thieves really be so foolish as to act exactly as Shen Qiu had envisioned? The first step of Shen Qiu¡¯s proposed strategy involves dispatching two Martial Marquises to lead large armies to attack the prefectures of Luyang and Hengyang in Chu State. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï There¡¯s no saying whether a Martial Marquis with an army of fifty thousand can take a city defended by a hundred thousand men. Even if they could, wouldn¡¯t the Chu thieves dispatch reinforcements when in dire straits? At Dongting, the Chu thieves indeed only have a barbarian princess to command. But in the Lingnan Region, especially in Su Country, the Chu thieves have assembled more than two hundred thousand troops, commanded by no less than four Inborn Grandmasters. In contrast, it¡¯s mainly Su Xuange leading several thousand demoralized troops within the city, and barely a hundred thousand soldiers led by Xie Ning from Su Country who managed to flee back to their homeland. Combining forces from both States, their strength is already inferior to the local Chu army. Thus, the Chu thieves have the capacity to withdraw a portion of their forces from this battlefield, along with one or two Inborn Grandmasters, to reinforce the conflict at Dongting. If those reinforcements are brought back, all of Shen Qiu¡¯s claims would become a joke. The two Marquises sent to capture Luyang and Hengyang wouldn¡¯t stand a chance of breaching the cities. Instead of being annihilated by the Chu thieves who might seize the opportunity to encircle them, they would have to be grateful to escape with their lives. As for the plan to hold out for a few years, waiting for the Zhou People and the Southwest Barbarians to make a move, it¡¯s utterly ludicrous to pin victory on such fleeting hopes placed in others. The Zhou People, attacked yearly by the Wei people and Barbarians, behave even worse than Ning Country. Bai Yian wouldn¡¯t be the least bit surprised to hear of Zhou Country¡¯s demise within a couple of years. How can one in such dire straits themselves expect rescue from the Zhou People? And the Southwest Barbarians? They are but stray dogs with broken spines, felled by the Chu thieves. Every one of them is paralyzed by the mere mention of Chu. If they take action, Bai Yian doubts they could stir up much trouble. So, if you can¡¯t even save yourself, how can you expect others to save you? Do you really think everyone is a good Samaritan? Or to put it another way, are the rescuers really that reliable? The so-called moderate strategy is just a joke. That¡¯s why Bai Yian, from the very beginning, never considered relying on others to win against Chu State. Even if he truly needed to use the help of others, it would only be to leverage them minimally, without ever having placed real hope in them. For Shen Qiu to pin all hopes on the ethereal assistance of others, it was somewhat incomprehensible to Bai Yian. ¡®Alas, when our ancestors crossed the river and headed south, establishing the capital in Jinling and clearing obstacles along the way, it took thousands of years to carve out the prosperity of present-day Yangzhou. Yet in our generation, faced with formidable enemies, today¡¯s ruler in Jinling does not consider how to fight with vigor and vanquish the foe. Instead, he indulges in these crooked schemes, and the court ministers also agree, taking them as sound strategies. The descendants of my Coastal Aristocratic Family have fallen so low? Is the legacy of our ancestors going to be destroyed in my generation?¡¯ Filled with these thoughts, Bai Yian¡¯s heart was filled with great sorrow, and now, hearing this hall filled with sycophantic and complacent talk, it seemed even more unbearable to him. Although he was filled with discontent and sorrow, he didn¡¯t voice his concerns or try to refute Shen Qiu¡¯s so-called ¡°moderate strategy.¡± Because he knew that when the entire Aristocratic family community has chosen to degenerate and evade reality, Standing up against them in opposition, exposing the irony of their perceived strength and peace, would not only draw their hostility and irritation, but be completely futile as well. Rather than weaken ourselves in an internal conflict between the advocates of war and the decayed peace party, It might be better to let them do as they please for now. When they finally crash and burn, shattering all their illusions, Perhaps then the corrupted and conservative factions will recognize reality, understanding that one cannot harbor the slightest hope of fortune in the struggle against Chu thieves. At that time, if Bai Yian takes command in a crisis, he might be able to unite the nation¡¯s strength, converge all forces, and fight Chu State with all their might. Then, facing a Chu State that will certainly have become stronger, maybe his Coastal Aristocratic Family, along with the six and seven clans, can still preserve the foundation in Jiangdong, without letting the Ancestral Temple and Altars of Soil and Grain perish. As long as Jiangdong¡¯s foundation is preserved, maybe, just as His Majesty said, if they can hold out for a while, a turning point will come. Of course, that time is not a year or two from now, with a revolt from the Zhou People or Barbarians. It¡¯s after a hundred years, when a calamity that sweeps through the Nine Provinces and affects all beings descends from Heaven and Earth. Then, facing this disaster that affects every living soul, Chu State naturally won¡¯t be able to contend with Ning Country over a piece of land doomed to destruction. ¡°` Chapter 837 - Chapter 837: Chapter 358 The Way of Moderation_3 Chapter 837: Chapter 358 The Way of Moderation_3 The only way of life left for Chu and Ning Countries was to make a northern breakthrough, to take over the land of Central State where Liang resided, seeking survival in this move. By then, perhaps Chu and Ning could turn their weapons into gifts of silk, joining hands to embark on a Northern Expedition together. In doing so, they would truly have overcome this great calamity between Heaven and Earth, preserving the ancestral temples of the six clans and seven families. All of these strategies were based on Bai Yian¡¯s true method to break the current stalemate, the only way out for the six clans and seven families, considering various actions up to now. That¡¯s why after his earlier strategy for a decisive battle was rejected, he proposed an equally extreme conservative strategy. The goal was to preserve the Jiangdong foundation to endure until the great calamity a hundred years later, the last chance for survival. However, such a sober recognition, judging by the attitudes of the many court officials and the Emperor in the hall, was something these people could never accept. At least not until they had run themselves ragged and come to terms with reality, they wouldn¡¯t accept it. Therefore, Bai Yian couldn¡¯t be bothered to explain himself to these people before this and just watched each one perform their own act. And his attitude, once seen by Shen Qiu and the other ministers, actually made them even more pleased with themselves. They felt that the Wuan Marquis had recognized the value of the middle way and, even felt ashamed due to the huge gap compared to the other sides, so he wisely chose not to make a fool of himself by coming forward. Feeling triumphant, Shen Qiu waved his hand to stop the fawning flattery of the senior officials and turned his head to look at Han Quanhui, Minister of the Ministry of War accompanying him, and said, ¡°Minister Han, as the head of the Military Department, the responsibility for recruiting soldiers, allocating supplies, and training personnel rests on the Military Department. Previously, Wuan Marquis¡¯ first strategy has been moderated by me. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï The second strategy of broadly recruiting soldiers throughout the country can also be executed in moderation. With over ten years of national power accumulated by our great Da Ning, we can truly manage to recruit an army of one million. But after assembling an army of one million, based on the current treasury reserves, we could at most maintain it for a few years, ten at best, not for the long term. Therefore, the assembly of one million is too many, I believe it can be reduced, taking a middle approach, by cutting from one million to five hundred thousand. With these five hundred thousand new soldiers, plus the current veteran soldiers, Da Ning will have one million three hundred thousand soldiers in total. Even if my modified middle way of the first strategy fails, beaten by Chu thieves, and we again lose soldiers and generals, the remaining troops can retreat into the country and join with the strong military forces there. At any rate, we can still retain one million soldiers, which is exactly within the financial capacity Da Ning can maintain for the long term. With an army of one million defending the territory, we can ensure the Jiangdong foundation is secured without worry.¡± Shen Qiu then modified Bai Yian¡¯s second strategy with a middle way approach, directly halving the original scale of expanding the army by one million to only five hundred thousand. As he had said, this served as a supplement to the middle way of the first strategy. If the first strategy were to fail, then after losing generals and soldiers, leading the remaining wounded troops back into the country, Ning Country could still maintain a million strong soldiers. With such an overwhelming military force, focused entirely on defense, it would indeed seem that Jiangdong could be preserved. Wasn¡¯t Zhou Country to the north, despite being besieged by barbarians, Wei, and Liang from all sides, able to withstand and endure until now with an army of approximately one million two hundred thousand? And their conditions in Ning Country were far better than those in Zhou Country. Now, as the great calamity is approaching, Jiangnan and Yangzhou, not part of Central State¡¯s territory, hold no attraction to the northern Liang Country, They wouldn¡¯t continually send troops to harass and attempt conquests like they do, craving for Zhou Country¡¯s Henan and Nanyang, which are part of Middle Earth. So with the Yangtze River Natural Barrier, Ning Country only needs to dispatch tens of thousands of naval forces to fend off the threat from north of the river in Liang Country. The rest of the army could obviously be spared to fully confront an attack from Chu State. With an army of one million defending a country, no matter how one looks at it, there¡¯s no risk of Jiangdong being lost. However, in Bai Yian¡¯s view, this strategy may appear sound, but it also harbors hidden dangers. The newly recruited army of five hundred thousand troops were hastily assembled, and since they were inadequately trained, they could only be used as civilian workers. Without a year or two¡¯s time and several bloody battles to harden them, they would fundamentally be unfit for major use. So when Shen Qiu spoke of an army of a million, in reality it was merely an army of five hundred thousand, with an additional five hundred thousand men who were nominally soldiers but actually nothing more than civilian workers. This combination, in terms of true combat effectiveness, was naturally worrisome. And if the Chu thieves truly unified the north of the Lingnan River, after a slight reorganization of a year or two, they could pull together a million troops to launch an invasion to the east. By then, facing the Chu troops¡¯ army basking in the glory of their recent victories over formidable foes, could these forces truly hold back the opponent? Certainly, Bai Yian was not optimistic. This is why he proposed the seemingly ultra-conservative strategy of expanding the army by a million. This was not because Bai Yian was scared senseless but rather because it was the optimal strategy calculated from the actual situation. Just as with the Chu people defending Jiangxia, a batch of new recruits barely lasted a month before nearly ten percent were lost. The new recruits enlisted by Ning Country, even if they relied on guarding the city, would still suffer significant casualties during training. And considering Ning Country¡¯s lengthy border with Chu State, with its many forts and strongholds, it was impossible for all to be as formidable as Jiangxia; their defensive capabilities were definitely greatly reduced. Furthermore, given the long-standing peace in Jiangdong, the quality of Ning Army¡¯s new recruits was certainly not as good as those from Chu State, which was engaged in warfare year after year, and their training time was likely not as abundant as that of the Chu State¡¯s new troops. All these factors combined signified that the hastily recruited new soldiers would definitely be inferior to the Chu troops within Jiangxia. With the cities they were defending being neither as strong nor as strategically positioned as Jiangxia, and their defenders being weaker than the Chu troops in Jiangxia, these troops responsible for guarding the innumerable cities and fortresses along the border would certainly suffer greater casualties. In the event of the Chu troops laying siege, if the Ning forces ended up trading at a ratio of three, two, or even one to one, Bai Yian would not find it strange at all. And if one considers the inevitable formation battles during the Chu-Ning conflict, then the losses would be even greater. Recruiting a million soldiers only to have five hundred thousand die, leaving behind five hundred thousand elite troops, was all too plausible. Adding on the casualties among the veteran soldiers during the battle, the remaining elite troops combined with the original veteran soldiers would in fact still be an army of a million, just within the financial support range that Ning Country could sustain. It seemed as if Bai Yian suggested Ning Country should train a two-million-strong army. But in fact, half of that two million were prepared to be used as cannon fodder, to consume Chu Country¡¯s forces and buy time for training his own elite troops. But now, according to Shen Qiu¡¯s middling approach, it left the Ning-Chu border defense potentially riddled with gaps. The elite troops that could finally be trained would definitely fall short of a million, and this could not fully guarantee Ning Country¡¯s security. It can be said, Shen Qiu¡¯s self-perceived balanced approach had once again foiled Bai Yian¡¯s future plans. Yet the people in the hall were completely oblivious, showering their Emperor¡¯s middle-of-the-road method with praise and once again a chorus of sycophantic adulation arose. Witnessing this scene, Bai Yian nearly ground his molars to dust. ¡®This damned moderation, these damn sycophants.¡¯ After cursing inwardly twice, Bai Yian also knew that the situation was still irreversible, and he could only bemoan, ¡®So be it. If worst comes to worst during battle, I will petition His Majesty to expand the army again, to carry on fighting while training. It is still not too late. As long as I am here, the Chu thieves will never take Jiangdong.¡¯ The Wuan Marquis secretly vowed, his heart filled with determination. Chapter 838 - Chapter 838: Chapter 359: Chu Weis Inborn Abilities Chapter 838: Chapter 359: Chu Wei¡¯s Inborn Abilities ¡°` In a world of ice and snow, accompanied by howling blizzards, the tenth year of Shenwu silently passed by, and time had already advanced to the eleventh year of Shenwu. This New Year¡¯s Spring Festival was spent by Lu Yuan in Jiangxia City. As with many previous expeditions, he had no way of returning to Baling or spending time with his wife and children at home, and he did not even have a single friend here. Living in this chaotic era, in a world where calamity had come, everyone involved was unable to act on their own volition. They could only passively follow the tide of the times, pushing forward wave after wave, striving for that slim chance of surviving ashore. This was true even for Lu Yuan, the King of Chu, the ruler of thousands of miles of territory¡ªhe was no exception. Fortunately, ever since he had studied the Taiping Dao Book and resolved to take the path of competing for supremacy in the world, he had been prepared and anticipated all of the above. Now, after fifteen or sixteen years, having spent most of those years on campaign, Lu Yuan had grown accustomed to that kind of life and felt nothing amiss. Moreover, he now resided in Jiangxia City. The city, nestled against mountains and rivers, offered a view of the Yangtze River¡¯s snowy landscape and the vast expanse of mountains and rivers from the highest lookout. Having such a scenic and stable residence was far superior to his past experiences of enduring the elements in desolate and dangerous terrains. Therefore, out of delight and also in consideration of the hard work of his soldiers, Lu Yuan directly ordered that during the New Year, the army¡¯s rations increase by fifty percent over the standard holiday provision, and rewards were to be distributed again, allowing the soldiers to have a joyous celebration. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? By this time, the treasury of Chu State, having received a tribute of a hundred million silver taels from the barbarians, could be said to be exceedingly abundant. Although these past two years had seen considerable expenditures on the Hanzhong campaign and the ongoing conflict in Jiangnan, draining a significant portion of money and grain, Chu State, being fundamentally strong with eighty million silver taels stored initially and an additional one hundred million silver taels obtained later, had reserves amounting to one hundred and eighty million silver taels. The two military campaigns had merely nicked the tip of the latter eighty million silver taels, leaving one hundred million silver taels in the national treasury up to now. Two years¡¯ consumption of eighty million silver taels may seem like a large amount, but compared to the significant expansion of Lu Yuan¡¯s forces by 230,000 soldiers and the nearly eight hundred thousand troops mobilized, plus an additional one million civilian workers, it wasn¡¯t really that much. Moreover, in the past two years, with the steady capture of population from Zhou Country and two counties in Long, and the subsequent settlement of four to five hundred thousand people in Xichuan, there were significant expenditures included in that eighty million silver taels. Spending this money to accomplish these many tasks was, in Lu Yuan¡¯s opinion, well worth it. However, the expenditure was so great that, given Chu State¡¯s current reserves, it could only maintain such spending for a maximum of three years. After three years, the hundred million silver taels in the treasury would be completely exhausted, and Chu State would face financial bankruptcy. This financial issue was one of the reasons why, at the beginning of the war, Lu Yuan chose to focus his main forces in three off-center battlefields, taking on a risky strategy. With the resources of Chu State being unable to sustain a military of one million for long, this was the motivation behind his decision. With campaigns of the current scale, Chu State could only last for a maximum of five years through patching things up. If it exceeded five years, the Chu military, even if it had not been defeated in direct combat, would have to retract due to a shortage of funds and supplies, abandoning many strategic locations and retreating to defend its own territory. This is almost the same as being defeated without actually losing. One must acknowledge a point. Although Chu State has risen to become a dominant power with a territory of 30,000 square miles and a population of tens of millions, in the Nine Provinces, its influence has outstripped Ning Country by a margin, and it even bears the grace of being the foremost nation in Jiangnan. But when it comes to foundational strength and accumulated wealth, Chu State truly does not compare with Ning Country, which has enjoyed over a decade of peace, has a substantial population, is wealthy in money and grain, and governs almost entirely over fertile lands. For instance, Ning Country dares to propose expanding its army by two million, but today, even as Lu Yuan has expanded his forces to one million, he still hesitates and scrimps, not daring to entertain such a thought. The discrepancy between the two countries¡¯ reserves is precisely that despairing. It is this despairing gap that has driven him not to even consider a war of attrition with Ning Country, nor to entertain any notions of a balanced struggle. Because in terms of foundational strength and endurance, Chu State is simply no match for Ning Country. Swift resolution, relying on the fervent and forceful tactics of the Chu army to rapidly defeat the opposition, ensuring the enemy is eliminated by Chu State before they can mobilize everything¡ªthey cannot wait. This is the style of the Chu army, and this is the opportunity for Chu State to triumph. Fortunately, all of this has now been realized. The possibility of a stalemate situation, with the successive victories on the battlefields in the north of the River and in Lingnan, has been completely shattered and will no longer occur. With the victorious Lingnan armies surrounding the capitals of Su Country and Southsea Country, their downfall is merely moments away. The Lingnan Battlefield may well be concluded by the eleventh year of Shenwu. This gives Lu Yuan hope for eradicating Jiangdong within the next three years and unifying Yangzhou. If Jiangnan can be unified within three years, then the so-called financial crisis will naturally cease to exist. A Chu State that possesses the entire region of Jiangnan and Yangzhou can surely support an army of one million, and even sustain the two million proposed by Ning Country today. And it¡¯s not even necessary to wait for the unification of Jiangnan. As of now, with the sweeping victories of the Lingnan armies, especially after the toppling of Southsea Country, the continual conquest of cities and plundering of the estates of powerful clans, Chu State has already reaped substantial rewards. When Lu Yuan led the alliance to attack the Southwest Barbarians, Southsea Country engaged in grain trade and severely exploited Chu, Su, and Song countries. ¡°` Chapter 839 - Chapter 839: Chapter 359: Chu Weis Inborn Abilities_2 Chapter 839: Chapter 359: Chu Wei¡¯s Inborn Abilities_2 Especially for Su Country, almost all the gold and silver obtained from attacking the Southwest Barbarians were given to Nanhai Country. These vampires who speculate on grain prices, one by one, made a fortune, not knowing how fat they had become. Furthermore, after a long period of recuperation, it has been nearly twenty years since Nanhai Country heard of any warfare within its borders. Twenty years of peace created an unparalleled prosperity in Nanhai Country, which could almost rival that of Ning Country¡¯s Jiangdong. On such a fertile piece of land, who knows how many wealthy landlords and gentry were supported. These people occupied over eighty percent of Nanhai Country¡¯s wealth, and with another ten percent held by the Yan Family Royal Family, looting them would allow Chu State to gorge itself in one fell swoop. Therefore, since the grand army entered the territory of Nanhai, the imperial outer agents previously planted there began to emerge one by one, as per Lu Yuan¡¯s orders. They took the lead, guiding the grand army according to a list already prepared, to attack and loot various manors and estates, exterminating families and harvesting money and grain. Consequently, as the cold winter descended and snow covered the land, making it unsuitable for sieging, Qingyunzi, upon surrounding Nanhai City with the main forces, allowed the troops originally sent to attack the eastern part of Nanhai Country and the borderlands of Ning Country not to hurry back. Instead, they coordinated with the imperial agents to scavenge money and grain locally, amassing military funds for the Chu army. The commander of this detached army was Li Xiong; this man was originally a rebel and had, in order to raise military funds and aid his own Breakthrough of Innate, turned one of the richest prefectures in Xichuan, which could rank among the top three wealthiest, into the poorest one. Clearly, his ability to extort money reached the pinnacle. Although now with the constraints of Chu State, it was impossible to allow Li Xiong to kill the goose that laid the golden eggs and ruin South Sea Prefecture. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï But even so, with him there, the increasingly unruly wealthy gentry and merchants of Nanhai over the years could experience for themselves what it meant for Heavenly Path to cycle and whom Providence had spared. What they had consumed over the years, they would have to regurgitate, and along with their own share, thereby making a profit including principal and interest. This task had been entrusted to Qingyunzi by Lu Yuan, who believed this Avatar, capable of understanding his intentions, would not disappoint. And indeed, this was more or less the case. So far, it¡¯s only the initial plundering of various prefectures and counties in Nanhai, but the troops led by Li Xiong have already scraped together more than thirty million silver taels. As the investigation deepens, the amount of silver is expected to rise to sixty or seventy million. And this is not the limit. Because a large amount of Nanhai Country¡¯s wealth, along with its top nobility, had fled to the safest Nanhai City before the Great War erupted with their family¡¯s savings. If Nanhai City could be breached and the wealth of these nobles, the national treasury, and the royal family savings could be seized, the gains should be no less than those of the various prefectures and counties. That is to say, as long as Nanhai Country could be successfully looted, Chu State could at least earn a hundred million silver taels, gaining a massive amount of manpower, resources, and a grain-producing region. With this conquest, even if the current scale of the war continued, Chu State could sustain for another three years. The wealth of Nanhai is thus evident. However, compared to the prosperous Nanhai Country, Su Country, which had always been mired in wars and turmoils over the years, was destitute. The populace of this country was originally only a million, with scarce people and poor land. Now, after the war, the population suffered hugely, dropping below the million mark. Furthermore, with its approach of Impoverished Soldiers and Fierce Warriors, even the powerful clans and commoners were destitute, barely able to squeeze out any resources. Therefore, the gains from conquering this place, except for the territory and population, were not much for the army led by Lan Cai¡¯er. Essentially, this battle was at a loss. Fortunately, apart from Su Country, Song Country has been managed quite well by Xie Ning over the years, not only with a thriving population but also with sufficient reserves of money and grain. If two prefectures of Song Country could be conquered, it should be enough to compensate for the military consumption of Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s forces. However, to attack Song Country, Yulin City must first be captured and Su Country eliminated. But now, with the Great Cold of Heaven and Earth, large snowfalls even in Lingnan make it inconvenient for the army to move, no matter how urgent, they can only huddle in the camps built outside the city, shivering with the cold as they lay siege. Only those selected for their superior martial arts, specifically to attack estates and loot money and grain, could ignore the snow and move about in this winter chill. As the Northern Land fell into silence, the Lingnan Region at the south of The world grew more raucous and bloodier because of it. And in this tranquility, with an undercurrent of undulations, the time quickly advanced to the early days of the second month of the eleventh year of Shenwu. ¡­ ¡°Ha ha ha¡­¡± On this day, deep within the estate district on the mid-mountain of Jiangxia City, a hearty and unrestrained laugh suddenly wafted and spread. Such a commotion naturally attracted people¡¯s attention swiftly. Particularly because this estate district was specifically provided for the high officials and generals of Chu who came with the army, there were Soldiers patrolling and guarding the area. Upon hearing the noise, the Soldiers quickly approached the source under the leadership of the Patrol Team Leader. ¡°This is¡­ General Wei¡¯s residence.¡± ¡°Is it General Wei laughing?¡± ¡°What has happened here? Is General Wei safe?¡± The patrolling Soldiers arrived at the front gate and asked the personal guards stationed at the estate, resulting in confusion on both sides, as clearly neither was aware of the cause. Chapter 840 - Chapter 840: Chapter 359: Chu Weis Inborn Abilities_3 Chapter 840: Chapter 359: Chu Wei¡¯s Inborn Abilities_3 However, seeing how heartily General Wei was laughing, everyone could be certain that he must have encountered something wonderful rather than troublesome. Given that, faced with the renowned general who ranked among the top ten of Chu State, the soldiers didn¡¯t dare to disturb him¡ªthey exchanged a few words and prepared to leave. Fortunately, as they started to disperse, the laughter from the residence had already ceased, sparing the populace any further annoyance. This was a relief to the patrolling soldiers. After all, as long as their duties weren¡¯t affected, it was all good news. Yet, while relaxing, many couldn¡¯t help but feel curious about what had made General Wei laugh so. What could there be in the world that might cause such an important and powerful person to lose his composure? Various thoughts popped up in people¡¯s minds, but everyone wisely kept them to themselves, refraining from openly discussing the general¡¯s privacy. Instead, they chose to guess in their hearts, which became a sort of small entertainment. What the people didn¡¯t know was that General Wei, the center of their speculations, had already left his mansion by the time the laughter stopped; he wasn¡¯t inside anymore. ¡°General Wei, Chu Wei, requests an audience with Your Majesty.¡± After leaving his estate, Chu Wei had made his way to the mountain¡¯s summit, then to a requisitioned Taoist temple¡¯s doorway, where he made his intention known to an eunuch standing guard outside. Soon, he was led inside, arriving at a serene courtyard house. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? ¡°Disciple pays respect to Master.¡± Upon entering the room, the inner attendant left, leaving only Chu Wei and Lu Yuan, whom he wished to see. Seeing this, Chu Wei immediately knelt, bowing and said, ¡°Disciple has not failed Master¡¯s earnest teachings. After one year of cultivation, today I finally broke through to the Innate Realm. For Master¡¯s grace and kindness, disciple dares not forget.¡± At that moment, Lu Yuan was practicing calligraphy. This had become a small hobby he awakened to during the past year amidst the warring turmoil ¡ª one that could refine his sentiments and help focus his mind, aiding in better contemplation ¡ª indeed, a small pleasure. Slowly finishing the character for ¡°Tao,¡± he put down his brush and looked at the kneeling Chu Wei with a trace of a smile on his face: ¡°No need for such formalities. Rise, so that your teacher may have a good look at you.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Following a polite response, Chu Wei then stood up. Lu Yuan surveyed his disciple up and down, noting the still somewhat uncontrolled aura of truth due to the recent breakthrough and the occasional signs of extraordinary phenomena leaking out, and he nodded in satisfaction repeatedly. ¡°Not bad, not bad at all.¡± Lu Yuan praised consecutively, saying, ¡°Your teacher indeed wasn¡¯t wrong about you. Among many disciples under my tutelage, you are second only to Zhou Qing. Having taken the spiritual medicine not long ago, you¡¯ve already made a breakthrough to the Innate. Let me think, it¡¯s only been a year since I gathered you five fellow disciples, right? To break through to the Innate in one year, that¡¯s even faster than Zhou Qing.¡± Back when Zhou Qing broke through the Innate, it took almost a year and a half to reach the Innate Realm, which was quite time-consuming. However, when Lu Yuan was cultivating Zhou Qing at that time, Zhou Qing was still young, only in his early thirties, and whether in terms of temperament or accumulation of cultivation, he was nowhere near the likes of Chu Wei and the others. Moreover, at that time, Lu Yuan was busy subduing the Southwest Barbarians and didn¡¯t have the time to guide and instruct daily like he did with Chu Wei. So it¡¯s understandable that Zhou Qing¡¯s breakthrough took a little longer. ¡°Disciple dares not compare with Senior Brother.¡± Chu Wei also knew the position Zhou Qing held in Lu Yuan¡¯s heart and never harbored thoughts of replacing his esteemed Senior Brother. Thus, at this moment, he humbly said, ¡°Senior Brother has exceptional innate talent and was able to break through to the Innate Realm on his own. ¡°I, as a disciple, have only made some progress thanks to Master¡¯s daily guidance and instruction. I dare not claim any credit for myself.¡± Hearing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but smile, ¡°Enough, enough. Now that you have broken through to the Innate Realm, from now on, you are among the elite Martial Arts Grandmasters. You are not only capable of understanding the Martial Gods, but also of contending with tens of thousands of armies. Even your lifespan can now be twice that of ordinary people, extending up to a hundred and fifty years. Such miraculous feats are indeed worthy of the title, Earthly Gods and Immortals. You are my disciple and a pillar of Great Chu. In the future, our Great Chu will rely on you to contend with the world.¡± Lu Yuan spoke with profound meaning, filled with anticipation. Compared to outsiders like the three cold generals of Feishuang Tao, disciples like Chu Wei, whom he had trained personally and shared a master-disciple relationship with, were naturally more valued by him. Among them, he considered his own people even more so. Now, with Chu Wei having completed his breakthrough to the Innate Realm, Lu Yuan had another Sect Disciple among his trusted forces to rely on in the future, in addition to his avatars and the group in the harem. His strength was indeed growing stronger day by day, making this naturally a cause for joy and expectation. Chu Wei was also very tactful, or perhaps owing to the gratitude he felt towards his Master who had personally helped him to the Innate Realm, he immediately stated, ¡°Disciple will not fail Master¡¯s expectations and will, in the future, campaign north and south for Great Chu, traverse rivers and seas, in thanks for Master¡¯s kindness.¡± Lu Yuan nodded and then took out an appointment decree from the side of his desk, waving it down, ¡°Recently, there have been frequent and suspicious movements among the Ning People, seemingly planning to replicate their earlier sneak attack on Changsha. There are signs they intend to divide their forces to attack Dongting. ¡°Luyang has been without an Innate-level defender to this day, and can be said to be the most vulnerable location in all the cities to the east of Dongting. ¡°Now that you have reached the Innate Realm, you are indeed ready for a great responsibility. ¡°This is your military appointment. From now on, you will be the defender of Luyang, commanding its hundred thousand soldiers. ¡°I hope you will not fail the trust I have placed in you and guard this crucial territory of the Southern Border for our Great Chu.¡± In recent days, with the advent of spring, the snow and wind between heaven and earth have gradually thinned out. The Ning Army, which had been dormant all winter, had also become increasingly active. The scouts of Chu State¡¯s imperial city even discovered movements within the Ning Army¡¯s main camp at Pengli, noting the hundred thousand garrison troops there. And based on the movement of supplies throughout Yuzhang, they deduced that the Ning Army intended to divide their forces and plan sneak attacks on Luyang and Hengyang. So after receiving the news, Lu Yuan had the Spiritual woman set out ahead of time to defend Hengyang, as early as ten days ago. Now, with the arrival of Chu Wei, the last defensive line in Luyang was finally complete. ¡°Yes, your subject obeys.¡± When it came to matters of national importance, Chu Wei also changed his form of address, accepting the command with respect. ¡°Go. You¡¯ve just had your breakthrough, and your Cultivation is not yet stable. You can rest in the city for a couple of days to solidify your Cultivation before hurrying off; there¡¯s no rush.¡± Lu Yuan waved his hand for the attendant to leave and continued practicing his calligraphy. Chu Wei bowed once more, then quietly left the room and departed from the Taoist temple where his Master resided. Once outside, gazing at the vast expanse of heaven and earth, the majestic mountains and rivers, his heart couldn¡¯t help but swell with pride. ¡°From today onwards, I too am considered a Grandmaster.¡± He murmured to himself with a chuckle, and with a light leap, he headed toward his residence at the bottom of the mountain. Chapter 841 - Chapter 841: Chapter 360 The Fall of Su Country Chapter 841: Chapter 360 The Fall of Su Country ¡°Kill!¡± Accompanied by the thunderous sound of golden drums, countless soldiers clad in earthy yellow armor surged forward like a tide towards the city ahead, supported by the whooshing boulders and flying crossbow bolts from behind. High atop the command platform, Lan Cai¡¯er, in her resplendent female battle armor and accompanied by Inborn Grandmasters like Han Hu, Han Liang, and Li River, now looked down from on high at the distant battlefield. ¡°When I was still in Jianghu, I had heard that the former Yue¡¯s Marquis of Wu¡¯an, Bai Mengyang, with merely fifty thousand soldiers held the solitary city in Xichuan and, with his body crippled, faced three Inborns and over a hundred thousand united Zhou-Shu forces. Even after my surprise attack on Baling cut off the major army¡¯s supply lines from Xichuan and forced Marquis of Wu¡¯an to fall back to Tianmen Prefecture City, he received food and money support in Tianmen Prefecture, and after his injuries healed, he still relied on the remaining tens of thousands of soldiers to hold his own against five Inborns of Zhou-Shu and over three hundred thousand troops without falling behind. At that time, in the north of Jiang, only Tianmen Prefecture remained, but because of the presence of Marquis of Wu¡¯an, this ancient northern city remained as stable as Mount Tai. It wasn¡¯t until the king and former Yue joined forces in the Northern Expedition that they finally broke the Zhou People and restored thousands of miles of rivers and mountains. Therefore, the king often told me there were not many people he admired in his life, and Marquis of Wu¡¯an was definitely one of them.¡± As Lan Cai¡¯er glanced over the tense battlefield in front of her, she suddenly turned around and brought up the past to those present. The three people by her side exchanged glances, wondering what intention the Queen had in suddenly bringing up a dead man from former Yue. But since the lord had said so, they too echoed a few words in agreement. ¡°The Marquis of Wu¡¯an was the number one general in the last years of former Yue. He almost single-handedly quelled the disturbances during the Longqing and Hongdao eras, restoring peace to Jiangnan. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Unfortunately, he died too soon, leading to the usurpation of former Yue¡¯s legacy by the thief Shen Qiu. Otherwise, with Marquis of Wu¡¯an still alive, Jiangnan might still belong to Da Yue¡¯s expanses today.¡± ¡°The Marquis of Wu¡¯an fought hundreds of battles in his life, with few defeats, his name synonymous with bravery and skill in battle known throughout the world. With him present, the northerners would have found it hard to look southward.¡± ¡°Although I am from the remote lands of the southwest, the name of Marquis of Wu¡¯an still resonates like thunder in my ears. Knowing he was such a great hero and a man of valor, my admiration for him is profound.¡± Hearing the echoing words of several Inborn Grandmasters, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s face revealed a trace of a smile, and she felt satisfied in her heart, knowing these men, under Great Chu¡¯s successive victories, were now submissive and reassured. So she waved her hand, stopping the three people from speaking further, her smile fading as a trace of sternness appeared on her face, ¡°What you said is true. How valiant and heroic Marquis of Wu¡¯an was, capable of resisting a country with one city, making the North Zhou tremble at the mere mention of his name. But even someone like Marquis of Wu¡¯an, to resist a country with one city, could not avoid relying on the Yangtze River navy¡¯s backing, which sustained Tianmen Prefecture from falling. But now, within the city of Yulin, there are less than forty thousand soldiers, far fewer than what Marquis of Wu¡¯an had when he was besieged in Anyue Prefecture. Yulin lacks money and food, cut off inside and out; it¡¯s a deathtrap. Compared to Tianmen Prefecture City, which once had abundant food and money and waterways for immediate military support, it is far inferior. As for Su Xuange, he is arrogant, narrow-minded, and overestimates his abilities¡ªhe has grand visions but lacks the capacity. In both talent and strength, he is far inferior to Marquis of Wu¡¯an. Now with us four Inborns gathered here, and holding three hundred thousand mighty soldiers outside the city, with the entire Su Country under our control, and further bolstered by Great Chu supplying money and food, we are well-equipped with elite troops and high morale. The city has only one Inborn, Su Xuange, with no more than forty thousand soldiers. Defending the isolated city, the people are exhausted, and soldiers are starved. There are no supplies within and no reinforcements from outside; waiting in the lonely city means waiting for death. Now with such an advantage on our side, should we remain here hesitating to break through the city? Should we be stuck here while they are already trapped? Gentlemen, now His Majesty in Jiangxia faces numerous foes with fewer men and can repeatedly crush the Ning bandits. Yet with all my advantages, I still can¡¯t deal with these meager Su thieves. This is a disgrace indeed!¡± Lan Cai¡¯er spoke with a cold tone, a murderous aura chilling her words, ¡°Previously, the cold weather and snowstorms provided the Ning bandits with an excuse to cling to life through the winter. But now, it is warm spring. The ice and snow have melted, and we can no longer afford any laxity. Transmit my order, starting today, the troops outside the city, totaling more than two hundred and eighty thousand, will be divided into three groups. One will attack by day, the other will attack by night, and the third will rest, rotating continuously without pause. We four Inborns will also divide ourselves on four sides, each attacking one side of the walls. You must engage in battle every day, and those wounded cannot withdraw. We will revoke this order only when we have breached the city of Yulin.¡± Without any sign, the seemingly ruthless Military Order was issued by Lan Cai¡¯er. Han Hu and the others felt the undeniable will behind it, and involuntarily shivered. These protectors from the Immortal Sects, now felt the severity of military commands for the first time. It was a call to die upon command, no matter if they faced a mountain of swords or a sea of fire. This was nothing like the carefree atmosphere of the Immortal Method; it made them slightly uncomfortable. Yet, Li River, seeing this cold side of Lan Cai¡¯er, was unexpectedly inspired, and laughed out loud, ¡°The Queen is right, Su Xuange is a petty miscreant, obstinately foolish. Even now, he doesn¡¯t know to come out and surrender. Does he truly think of himself as Marquis of Wu¡¯an? Today, we four will come forth, with more than two hundred thousand soldiers aiding us. We will break this city and capture these people. Then we will execute their kin, annihilate their country, kill their wives and children, and claim their legacy, serving as a warning to the whole world!¡± Chapter 842 - Chapter 842: Chapter 360 The Fall of Su Country_2 Chapter 842: Chapter 360 The Fall of Su Country_2 Li River truly lived up to his reputation as a veteran of the army. Far from resenting Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s military orders, he casually added a few more points to it. As for his ruthless methods against the enemy, like the annihilation of states and clans, it was all discussed with a smile. This caused Han Hu and Han Liang, who considered themselves cultivators, to feel a great aversion upon seeing this, and also deepened their understanding of the difference between these worldly soldiers and themselves. Not to mention anything else. The sheer indifference to the lives of tens of thousands of people was something the two of them couldn¡¯t bring themselves to do. A dispute among cultivators at most would lead to the elimination of one or two strong foes to seize their opportunities. That would be the end of it. But the conflicts for supremacy in the world involved the killing of millions, the conquest of extensive mountains and rivers. As long as the Nine Provinces are in turmoil, there will never be an end to it. ¡®We have so much to learn, to endure, to change!¡¯ they thought. ¡®If we want to protect our sect for generations to come, our mentality must undergo many changes.¡¯ With such thoughts in their hearts, Han Liang and Han Hu voiced, ¡°I will carefully follow the Queen¡¯s command.¡± ¡°Good.¡± Upon seeing everyone¡¯s submissive demeanor, a smile reappeared on Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s face. Then she waved her hand and said, ¡°This battle will be personally led by this palace. I will attack North City; Han Liang will lead the right flank to attack West City, Han Hu will lead the left flank to attack East City, and Li River will lead the rear to attack South City. Since none of you object, then carry out this order.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.?¦Ï ¡°Yes.¡± Li River and the others saluted, took their tiger tally tokens, and went down to mobilize their troops. ¡­ A moment later. Above the South City battlefield, Li River stood astride his horse with his sword, charging directly to within a hundred steps from the city gate. In front of him, tens of thousands of brave men from Chilih charged towards the top and gates of the city walls, pushing various siege weapons like ants. Above the city wall, Su People Soldiers picked up boulders and slopped filth, pouring it down over the edges. Arrows rained down in chaos, felling brave men in their charge and turning them into lifeless porcupines. Witnessing this scene, a fierce light flashed in Li River¡¯s eyes. He slapped his horse¡¯s back, leapt towards the city wall, and a six-legged flying insect external body over thirty feet long materialized. He shouted, ¡°Chilih Grand General Li River is here, Su thieves meet your death.¡± As the words fell, Li River landed atop the city rampart. The ferocious insect swung about, and in an instant, more than a dozen Su People Soldiers were reduced to severed limbs and flesh as a rain of blood exploded in the air. Reveling in the pleasure of tearing flesh, Li River let out a big laugh and then, controlling the insect¡¯s external body, he leapt into a nearby group of Su Army soldiers. Instantly, he caused a bloody storm, snatching countless lives. ¡°Ah¡ª¡± ¡°It¡¯s an Inborn Grandmaster!¡± ¡°The enemy¡¯s Inborn is here, retreat quickly!¡± The nearby Su Army, witnessing Li River¡¯s astounding might and his taking of over a hundred lives in an instant, were utterly terrified, screaming and fleeing to the side. Some valiant Su soldiers refused to retreat. Clutching their weapons, they gritted their teeth and charged towards the ferocious insect. But the mundane iron they wielded couldn¡¯t even scratch the insect¡¯s exoskeleton. Arrows shot from the side dinged harmlessly off its shell and fell to the ground. In contrast, a slight flutter of the insect¡¯s wings sent gusts of wind that severed the approaching soldiers into pieces. With a slight tear of its claws, several soldiers were sprayed with blood on the spot. Facing the full force of an Inborn Grandmaster, these soldiers couldn¡¯t even breach the insect¡¯s martial arts external body. Their only struggle resulted in merciless carnage that excited the enemy even more. This terrifying and powerless sight further shattered the will of nearby Su soldiers wanting to resist, demoralizing them completely, erasing any thought of counterattacking. In just an instant, a hundred-meter stretch of the city rampart was swept clean by Li River by himself, leaving more than a hundred Su soldiers in his wake. Seeing this, the troops of Chilih below were immensely encouraged. Many quickly climbed up the cloud ladders and surged over the top, occupying the region secured by their Grand General. Li River pressed further forward without pausing to wait. He continued toward the scattering Su soldiers, hell-bent on not stopping until none were left alive. With the strength of an Inborn Grandmaster, his efficiency in killing was unimaginably high. In just this brief time, two to three hundred Su people had died by his hand. ¡°Chu invaders, cease your arrogance! Killing ordinary soldiers is no skill at all. I will meet you in combat!¡± Just as Li River was slaughtering in high spirits, a roar came from the South City tower. Su Xuange, clad in white, holding his sword, floated onto the city rampart, his eyes bloodshot at the sight of Li River wantonly killing his soldiers. With an angry shout, the white sword in his hand turned into a winding Milky Way, sweeping over towards the insect. ¡°Haha, perfect timing, take my claw!¡± Li River, not the least bit afraid of the sword energy turning into the Milky Way, laughed aloud. The insect¡¯s external body took flight, biting down in direct confrontation. A loud boom resounded, stars scattered, the vicious insect howled, and stones flew. Under the force of the Inborn, even the city walls trembled. This stretch of rampart had become a no-man¡¯s land, with not a single soul daring to approach. But a little further away, the bitter struggle between the soldiers of Su and Chilih continued unabated. After their ruler blocked Li River, an Inborn, the Chilih troops that had scaled the walls lost their advantage. They were soon contained by the relentless reinforcements of Su soldiers coming from within the city. Chapter 843 - Chapter 843: Chapter 360 The Fall of Su Country_3 Chapter 843: Chapter 360 The Fall of Su Country_3 And one step at a time, they pushed back, gradually gaining the momentum to drive the defenders off the city wall. In this manner, with the sacrifice of a thousand more lives, the entire part of the South City wall could be retaken. The situation appeared to be very favorable for the Su Army. But that was only the case for the South City. ¡­ In the West City, Han Liang, clad in white armor, had a yard-long Jade Symbol floating behind him, casting beams of white light, ceaselessly striking the surroundings. Wherever the white light touched, every Su People Soldier that it grazed trembled and then their bodies grew cold, quickly losing their vitality. As he strolled along, the Jade Symbol¡¯s white light spread wherever he passed, and soon, hundreds of corpses of Su people lay atop the city walls. Countless Chu State Forbidden Army soldiers followed him from more than ten steps behind, rapidly occupying the entire West City. The Su People Soldiers in front were crying out in terror, fleeing in panic. ¡­ East City. A massive blue tiger leaped and dashed across the city walls, leaving a trail of blood and gore in its wake, line after line of Su People Soldiers fell on the wall, turning it into a sea of blood. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã0 The tiger, transformed by Han Hu, roared, terrifying countless Su people to cry for their fathers and mothers, throw down their armor, and flee down the city. ¡­ North City. A cloud of five-colored mist spread over the city walls, and wherever it went, Su People Soldiers fell, their faces turning blue-black as they were already devoid of breath. The Ten Thousand Poison True Qi, which had vanished from Jianghu for more than a decade, reappeared in an instant to become the most terrifying thing in the world, reviving the infamous reputation of the Five Poisons Holy Maiden. Even the following Chu Army soldiers, tasked with taking over the city, felt a chill in their hearts as they saw the horrifyingly dead enemies on the ground. Gazing ahead at the drifting and intangible five-colored mist, their steps involuntarily slowed, increasing their distance. Such scenes, akin to a slaughter, were being enacted on all four sides of Yulin City¡¯s walls at this moment. Just as Queen Lan Cai¡¯er had said. With Su Xuange alone and tens of thousands of his broken troops daring to hold out in this isolated city, this was fundamentally a path to certain death. Now that her four Inborn Grandmasters were launching a fierce assault, Su Xuange, who lacked Wu Anhou¡¯s Inborn Second Realm Strength, was unable to defeat the enemies on one side of the city walls in a short time and then swiftly assist another front. The Su Xuange who was firmly tied down to the South City by Li River could not only not defeat the enemies in front of him, but also was completely incapable of hindering the Inborn Grandmasters on the other three city walls. Now that Lan Cai¡¯er and others had slain their way atop the city walls, hundreds upon thousands of Su Army Soldiers were easily slaughtered, not having a single enemy that could match them in a fight. In this situation, within two or three days, Once all the brave Su Army soldiers had perished and the remaining were killed until their bravery was shattered, Yulin City would be breached. ¡­ On the twenty-seventh day of the second month in the eleventh year of the Shenwu era, The Commander of the Chu State¡¯s Southern Expedition Western Route Army, Queen Lan Cai¡¯er ordered the army to divide into four and simultaneously attack the Su Country¡¯s Yulin City, while she supervised the battle. That day, the sounds of killing filled Yulin City as Inborn Grandmasters slaughtered tens of thousands of troops. In the end, the Ning Army fought valiantly, paying the price of over ten thousand casualties, barely repulsing four Inborn Grandmasters and holding onto the city. But by midnight, the Chu Army was still lighting fires and beating drums, ferociously attacking the city, refusing to retreat even in the face of death. After a night of fierce fighting, another four thousand-plus Ning soldiers perished. By the second day, the Chu Army, having rested for a night, led by the four Inborn, once again personally commanded the siege. The Su Army, having fought through the night, was utterly exhausted and was quickly routed. Left with no choice, Su leader Su Xuange again went into battle, fought the Queen of Chu, and blocked the Chu Army at North City. However, before even a moment had passed, in the east, west, and south of the city, the other three Inborn Grandmasters of the Chu king had already crushed the few remaining Su soldiers atop the city walls, easily seizing control of the city and opening the gates. Yulin City, after holding out for just over a day, fell thunderously under the siege of the four Inborn and an army of more than two hundred thousand. Afterwards, Han Liang, Han Hu, and Li River rushed to North City quickly to support the Queen. In the end, the four combined forces, after half an hour of intense fighting and at the cost of minor injuries to the two Han generals, beheaded Su leader Su Xuange at the top of the city. A heroic figure ultimately fell to his fate. With the death of Su Xuange, Su Country no longer had a pillar of support, and in light of their stubborn resistance and refusal to surrender, their crimes were considered. Following the breach, the Commander of the army, the Queen of Chu, ordered the extermination of the Su Family to the ninth degree of kinship and the cleansing of those of Nine River Sword Sect descent who were direct descendants of Su Country, as a warning to others. From that day, Yulin City ran with blood for three days as countless members of the Su Family and remnants of the Nine River Sword Sect were captured and beheaded beside the sullen waters outside the city. Thousands died, their heads and corpses fell into He Nei, clogging the Li River. And through this purge, the remnants of Su Country were almost completely eradicated. From the time of Pre-Yue Hongdao¡¯s establishment of the country in the seventh year, sixth month, and second day, to the fall of the country on the eleventh year of Shenwu, the second month, and twenty-eighth day, Su Country¡¯s reign ended completely, having enjoyed fourteen years of rule. The alliance of three families that established the country together saw Su Country, with its Inborn Grandmaster, fall first¡ªbefore Southsea Country¡ªbrought to an end ahead of time. Since the military campaign began last year, after half a year of battle, the Chu Army officially annihilated a nation, achieving their greatest victory and securing a foothold in Lingnan. When this news spread, Song Country, which was right next to Su Country, instantly panicked, shaking the entire nation with fear. Song leader Xie Ning hastily conscripted a hundred thousand civilian workers and gathered the remaining eighty thousand soldiers in the country to move north and station at Zhennan Pass, the gateway of Song Country, planning to hold the strategic pass and block the great enemy. But his panicky comportment was destined to be just self-deception, unnoticed by others. For, just as Song Country was dreading the oncoming Chu forces, the very Chu Army they feared had already turned their guns and marched east to Southsea. In the third month of the eleventh year of Shenwu, at the beginning of the month, after conquering Yulin and extinguishing Su Country, the Queen of Chu cleaned up inside Su Country and arranged for defense, then followed the orders given by the King of Chu beforehand, leaving ten thousand soldiers and Han Hu to guard the two commanderies of Su Country, warding off Ning Country. The remaining army, led by Lan Cai¡¯er, proceeded with an army of a hundred and fifty thousand, advancing eastward to Southsea to meet up with Qingyunzi¡¯s forces. Now, inside and outside of Southsea City, the combined forces of Southsea and Ning Country, with fifteen thousand soldiers and two Inborn Grandmasters, Qingyunzi¡¯s contingent, after suffering casualties in successive battles and dispatching troops to various locations, had fewer than a hundred and twenty thousand soldiers available for siege and attack on the city. And likewise, they had only two Inborn Grandmasters. With such strength, conquering Southsea City would indeed be a difficult task. Therefore, they summoned Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s western army to join forces in the east, to attack Southsea City together. Chapter 844 - Chapter 844: Chapter 361 Under Nanhai City Chapter 844: Chapter 361 Under Nanhai City Outside Nanhai City, at the main camp gate of the Chu Army. Lan Cai¡¯er, leading a group of high-level generals, arrived, and as the local host, Qingyunzi personally opened the camp gate wide to lead Li Xiong and other generals of the eastern army to welcome them. ¡°Ha ha, the poor Daoist has wasted time under the walls of Nanhai City for a long while and has been unable to deal with this turtle shell. Today, with the Queen leading the army for support, having this assistance, I finally feel reassured.¡± While waiting at the doorway, a Luan Drive slowly approached from afar. Seeing this, Qingyunzi hurriedly stepped forward two paces, taking the initiative to offer his respects. Although he was an avatar of Lu Yuan and essentially considered to be one entity with two bodies, in the eyes of outsiders, Qingyunzi was an independent cultivator and had no deep connection with Lu Yuan other than a master-servant relationship. The propaganda released by Lu Yuan also stated just that, mentioning only that Qingyunzi and Huang Xuan were lucky enough to have come upon the legacy of a predecessor, cultivating arduously in the mountains for decades to achieve their success. Then they became trapped by the insufficiency of Heavenly and Earthly Aura, unable to advance an inch further in this lifetime, with the Great Dao already severed. Hence, the notion of descending to the mortal world in search of wealth and comfort to live out their days was born. As for why they would choose Chu State out of all the large countries in the world? It was naturally because the King of Chu, Lu Yuan, was also a cultivator, sharing the same identity as them, creating more common ground for conversation. This explanation, whether others believed it or not, was certainly believed by Lu Yuan and his two avatars. Even with many doubts from others, facing three cultivators, they could only grumble in their hearts and would never dare to speak out publicly. Moreover, as time passed, Qingyunzi and Huang Xuan became essentially another aspect of Lu Yuan¡¯s divine consciousness, something akin to another splintered soul. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï Aside from some deficiencies in temperament, their outward behavior was simply indifferent and their personalities somewhat aloof. This also aligned more fittingly with their identities as ascetic cultivators. Thus, the true identity of them being Lu Yuan¡¯s avatars remained undetected by anyone for decades. This detail, even for Lan Cai¡¯er, who was Lu Yuan¡¯s close attendant, was shrouded in secrecy, the truth unknown to her. ¡°Far from it, True Person Qingyunzi is a revered master of the Immortal Method with a profound understanding of Dao Law. The Ning People and Nanhai Country are merely relying on a momentary abundance of soldiers to defend this city stubbornly. With True Person¡¯s capabilities, given enough time, you will surely find a way to defeat the enemy. Now I, leading forces here, seem to be inadvertently stealing True Person¡¯s limelight. I hope the True Person will forgive me.¡± Towards Qingyunzi, the nation-protecting True Person, Lan Cai¡¯er displayed great importance and respect. With the arrival of the great calamity and the plan for the Nine States Immortal Gate to collectively ascend, all the dominant nations in touch with the Immortal Gate have been made aware of this news by now. After receiving support from Feishuang Tao, Lu Yuan also did not keep the news secret but informed the numerous Inborn Grandmasters within the state. Being the Queen, Lan Cai¡¯er was naturally privy to the inside story. Therefore, she held immense respect for True Persons like Qingyunzi who chose to forsake the opportunity for Ascension to remain in Chu State and support her husband. After all, aside from her own husband, such cultivators were among the very few within the entire Nine Provinces. Counting throughout the world, they might not even exceed the number of fingers on both hands. For such rare talents, the level of treatment naturally differed significantly from that of ordinary Inborn Grandmasters. Not to mention, with Qingyunzi¡¯s strength comparable to that of Second Innate realm, his status and position were naturally much higher than that of ordinary First realm Grandmasters. Lan Cai¡¯er understood this point well, as did the Inborn Grandmasters behind her. Especially Han Liang, who originated from an Immortal Sect, felt a natural reverence and respect for a true cultivator like Qingyunzi. Only those from an Immortal Sect could truly comprehend the weight of a cultivator. This signified someone who, with a single spell, could potentially strike down an Inborn Grandmaster directly¡ªan actual high-level combatant. Of course, given the current depletion of Heavenly and Earthly Aura, wild cultivators like Qingyunzi, who lacked support, would see their Magic Power diminish with every usage, with no possibility of replenishment once depleted. Therefore, for loose cultivators, their limited Magic Power and spells would not be used unless absolutely necessary, serving as a hidden ultimate deterrent rather than a standard combat force. Thus, Qingyunzi, despite possessing the power of the Second Innate realm, was unable to use it often, and even avoided using it. His regular combat power was the same as the other nation-protecting True Person, Huang Xuan¡ªforcefully incredible and enough to contend with an Inborn Grandmaster¡¯s cultivated body technique. The common tactic of the two nation-protecting True Persons in external affairs was the indestructible technique of body cultivation. With this, they were capable of competing with ordinary Inborn Grandmasters. Factor in the spells they could wield at any time, and even Second realm opponents would be filled with dread and cautiousness, not daring to provoke them recklessly. As for First realm Grandmasters, when facing an enemy capable of casting a spell that could instantly kill them, they would naturally feel a disadvantage in their spirit. In combat, they couldn¡¯t help but hold back, always ready to save themselves or flee. With such self-imposed restrictions, they were naturally unable to overcome the two avatars. Therefore, to outsiders, the two nation-protecting True Persons of Chu seemed to possess the regular combat power of Innate fighters but also wielded the Second realm¡¯s capability for brief, high-lethality engagements. They were respected to be cautious of, but not overly feared. This was precisely why. Throughout the duration of the siege, Qingyunzi, leading Li Xiong, had in fact made several direct attempts to overtake the city, aiming for a forceful breakthrough. However, each critical time, the Ning Army Commander Shangguan Ming from within the city would emerge to intercept. Chapter 845 - Chapter 845: Chapter 361 Under Nanhai City_2 Chapter 845: Chapter 361 Under Nanhai City_2 He didn¡¯t force a desperate fight with Qingyunzi, instead practicing restraint and delay, always ensuring there was leeway to flee for his life if necessary, clearly guarding against Qingyunzi¡¯s magic. Under such circumstances, where the enemy was fully on guard, even though Qingyunzi¡¯s avatar was a Jianxiu adept in combat, with Talisman Sword Technique solidified within. But the Talisman Sword Technique, an entry-level spell, though powerful, couldn¡¯t instantly slay an Inborn Grandmaster if it failed to hit a vital point on the first strike. With Shangguan Ming well-prepared, it was quite difficult for Qingyunzi to conjure a spell to cleanly kill the man. If the enemy dodged a sneak attack, it was not that he couldn¡¯t be forcefully killed, but it would require more than a mere spell¡ªpossibly two or three, or even four or five. Nowadays, with spiritual energy scarce, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t have much magic power to supply his avatar, so naturally, saving a bit where he could was the strategy. For the sake of an Inborn master at the first realm, wasting too much magic power clearly would be a loss not worth the expense. After all, there were far too many methods to kill an Inborn Grandmaster. There was no need to use valuable spells. Just like now. After this avatar of Qingyunzi contacted Lu Yuan, the true self, conveying the difficulties he faced, Lu Yuan sent a message to Lan Cai¡¯er, instructing her more formidable Western Army, which also held more advantage over the enemy, to quickly resolve the situation with Su Xuange in Yulin City and then lead her troops to Nanhai City for reinforcement. That¡¯s why, in the previous days, Lan Cai¡¯er suddenly assembled her generals and troops, issuing the command to fiercely attack Yulin City¡ªthe involvement of Lu Yuan was the reason behind it. Though remotely controlling the battlefield from thousands of miles away inevitably had the suspicion of being a micromanaging mastermind, Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï fortunately, Lu Yuan¡¯s judgments weren¡¯t wrong. With the Western Army having four times the Inborn strength and seven times the troops of the enemy, even if Su Xuange were to hold out in the fortress, he would definitely not match Lan Cai¡¯er and her forces. Eliminating the weakest of the enemies first and then reallocating the advantage in troops to resolve Nanhai City was evidently the best choice at the moment. Now that the Su Country had fallen, as long as the Nanhai Country was also conquered, Chu State¡¯s Southern Expedition could be considered to have initially achieved its objective, capturing the original Lingnan territories. Indeed, the term Lingnan, during the times before Yue, originally referred to the two prefectures of Southsea and Yulin. As for the current Nine Provinces of Song Country¡¯s Jiuzhen, from a geographical division standpoint, it doesn¡¯t actually belong to Lingnan Region, instead being closer to the Southsea islands and the Southern Domain Rainforest, while it also intersects with the mountainous areas inhabited by the southwestern barbarians. In general, it¡¯s located at the intersection of Lingnan, the southwest, Southsea, and the rainforest¡ªany of these regions could claim it. The reason it is now categorized as part of the Lingnan Region was simply for convenience and legitimacy when Yue Country conquered Jinghai Country and incorporated it as a part of Lingnan. If Lu Yuan chose contentment over perfection, after conquering Nanhai Country, he could simply choose to withdraw his troops and publicly declare the incorporation of Lingnan as a grand victory of the Southern Expedition. Of course. With the current situation looking so favorable and possessing so many advantages, he certainly wouldn¡¯t make the foolish choice to let go of Song Country, such a tempting morsel. A territory of one and a half prefectures, a population of two million¡ªthe foundation of Song Country was actually quite rich. If he could swallow it up, not only would Lu Yuan see a significant increase in Qi Luck and expedite his cultivation rate, but Chu State would also gain considerable tribute, enough to support an additional hundred thousand soldiers. With so many benefits, he had no reason to let go of Song Country. This was something Song Country understood very well, which is why, upon receiving the news of Su Country¡¯s demise, Xie Ning was massively conscripting within the country. He had abandoned the policy of balancing civil and military affairs, which aimed for long-term sustainable development, practiced in recent years. Emulating Su Xuange¡¯s previous strategy of Impoverished Soldiers and Fierce Warriors, he implemented a tyrannical levy¡ªa stance that reeked of killing the goose that laid the golden eggs, prepared to risk everything in a desperate gamble. If they couldn¡¯t win this battle, Song Country would be finished anyway. Preserving well now would only benefit the enemy in the end. Better to fight to the death and perhaps still have a chance to scare off the enemy and keep hold of the current foundations. None of these dominants in the midst of chaos were easy opponents; each one had a ruthless heart and resolute will. Lu Yuan had not allowed Lan Cai¡¯er to continue south after demolishing Su Country without also dreading that the Great War might turn Song Country into ruins. After all, he coveted Song Country for its ample population and the wealth accumulated over years of stability. If the land were to be ravaged, then even if it were annexed, all he would gain would be ruins. Chu State would not only gain little benefit but would also lose soldiers and have to expend significant effort in repairs, squandering money and provisions unnecessarily. Even more importantly, given the arrival of the great calamity affecting Heaven and Earth, Chu State could not afford to invest too much effort into developing Song Country¡ªa place at the extreme south of the Nine Provinces destined to be the first to suffer when the calamity erupts. Lu Yuan could possibly devote efforts to develop places like Xichuan, Xiangyang, and Dongting¡ªregions with food-producing plains connected by waterways and bustling trade¡ªbut not the rest of Lingnan¡¯s various prefectures or the lands of the southwest, and not even strategic locations like Hanzhong. He wouldn¡¯t invest many resources in those areas but would let them develop on their own instead. After unifying Lingnan, defeating Ning Country, and seizing Yangzhou, Chu State¡¯s primary focus would shift to advancing northward toward Central State, with all resources dedicated to this strategic effort. Future development and resource investment would occur in the lands of Central State, not the soils of Yangzhou. Chapter 846 - Chapter 846: Chapter 361 Under Nanhai City_3 Chapter 846: Chapter 361 Under Nanhai City_3 Central State is where the future lies. ¡­ After exchanging greetings and pleasantries, Qingyunzi welcomed Lan Cai¡¯er and the others into the camp. Once everyone was seated in the conference hall, they naturally started discussing the current situation in Nanhai City. ¡°In recent days, I have sent troops to challenge them several times, but the Ning Army has shrunk back within their camp, and the Nanhai Army is even less courageous, not daring to come out of the city to fight. So, luring them into battle is mostly impossible,¡± Qingyunzi introduced the intelligence he had gathered to everyone, ¡°However, in the past few days, a Ning naval force arrived at the water fort pier outside Nanhai City from the north, with a fleet of more than a hundred ships and nearly ten thousand men. This Ning naval force joined the Nanhai Country¡¯s navy and their momentum inevitably soared, directly shielding the entire coastal area and controlling the sea routes outside the city. Aside from blocking the sea surface, the navies of both countries had no unusual activities, except for occasional patrols. Most of the time, they hid at the pier and the water fortress.¡± Nanhai Country had a navy too, or rather, a sea force. As a nation bordered by the sea, the Nanhai Sect¡¯s initial rise was through maritime trade. Rumor has it that from Liang State to the north, to the numerous island nations of Southsea and the barbarian tribes in the rainforest, the Nanhai Sect had business dealings. Being able to conduct such large transactions meant that the Nanhai Sect controlled a substantial fleet of warships. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Even when they were just a Jianghu sect, with a claimed strength of a hundred thousand disciples, most of them supported themselves with this bowl of maritime rice. In the domain of Southsea, basically everyone at sea, once aboard a ship, would fly the Nanhai Sect¡¯s banner and claim an identity of a Nanhai disciple. This accounted for the number of a hundred thousand disciples. It included the lowest-ranked sailors on the ship; anyone conducting business on the sea, as long as they recognized the Nanhai Sect, could call themselves a Nanhai disciple. Otherwise, how could a mere regional sect like the Nanhai Sect support a hundred thousand disciples? Filling the numbers with inadequacies was inevitable. Later, when the Nanhai Sect transformed into a nation, the fleets that belonged to the sect simply changed their banners, transformed their identities, and directly became the naval forces of Nanhai Country. This navy was not small in scale, continuing the heritage of the original Nanhai Sect. They started with a force of twenty thousand and, after the expansion efforts of the Nanhai Sect, now have a navy of forty thousand. However, most of this forty thousand-strong navy doubled as a merchant fleet, plying the seas all year round, trading in all corners of the earth, and they didn¡¯t often stay in Nanhai Country. The ones who did stay in Nanhai Country long-term were about ten thousand or so. Now, these ten thousand and another ten thousand sent by Ning have merged, forming a force of twenty thousand and over two hundred ships. In the absence of the Chu State navy, they were enough to dominate at sea. At the very least, the Chu army currently outside the city could do nothing against the naval forces of the two countries strutting their stuff at sea, only watching as they blocked the maritime routes. ¡°Ning has suddenly deployed a navy?¡± After listening to Qingyunzi¡¯s introduction, Lan Cai¡¯er frowned, ¡°Right now, the battle for the Yangtze River is at its height, and the Ning navy has been defeated repeatedly, already losing their control over the waterways in the Jiangxia battlefield. Ning has spare naval forces, yet they are not sent to support the front line in Jiangxia. Instead, they¡¯ve come all the way to this remote corner of Lingnan to support Nanhai Country, which faces no naval threat. It¡¯s rather suspicious. Could it be that they intend to use this place as a way for Ning Army and the people of Nanhai Country to escape?¡± Lan Cai¡¯er made this realistic conjecture. Qingyunzi nodded, affirming the speculation, ¡°According to the situation in the city and the information I¡¯ve collected from various sources, the navy deployed by Ning does indeed intend to be ready to evacuate the Ning Army inside the city at any time. But they¡¯re still holding onto the desire to struggle, wanting to defend Nanhai City, so they¡¯ve only sealed off the sea to maintain an open water route and haven¡¯t directly evacuated the people.¡± ¡°The Nanhai Army and Ning Army inside the city have this route of retreat, which is why, even as the situation becomes increasingly unfavorable, they have no thoughts of surrender. Because they can leave at any moment, that¡¯s why they are so stubbornly defending the city,¡± Qingyunzi said through gritted teeth. In fact, Ning¡¯s intentions are not hard to guess. The purpose of those cultivators staying at the water fortress pier outside Nanhai City is clear to any observer. Isn¡¯t it obvious they¡¯re planning to escape at any moment? That is indeed the case. Previously, Bai Yian had suggested sending a naval force to Lingnan to evacuate the forces of Nanhai Country, Su Country, and Song Country, among others. This strategy, of course, could not escape revision by Shen Qiu¡¯s moderate principles, ultimately transforming in its presentation. For example, Shen Qiu¡¯s original suggestion was to dispatch at least thirty thousand naval forces southward and to conscript a large number of civilian ships from within the country, so they could move the numerous armies and supplies of the three nations in Lingnan. By the time it got to Shen Qiu, it changed to dispatching ten thousand naval forces southward without conscripting civilian ships, and even after arriving in Nanhai Country, they didn¡¯t directly evacuate the armies of the two countries from Nanhai City. Instead, they joined forces with the Nanhai navy and began watching from the sea. The underlying motives here clearly remained Shen Qiu¡¯s obsession with his own strategy of balancing power in Southsea, believing that his surprise attack on Chu State had a great chance of success and that he might be able to keep the three allies in Lingnan to contain Chu State. With this mindset, it was naturally impossible to withdraw the army of allies like Nanhai Country at such a critical juncture. The ten thousand naval forces that were now sent only intended to evacuate the remnants of Shangguan Ming¡¯s Ning Army should the plan truly go awry. With cooperation from the Nanhai navy and over two hundred warships, plus the conscription of some Nanhai Country civilian ships, it would be enough to evacuate the remaining forty thousand plus Ning Army along with some of the Nanhai navy and take away the local elite of Nanhai Country. That way, Ning could profit from over ten thousand navy forces and two to three thousand of Ning¡¯s elite forces, while also taking away a significant amount of wealth accumulated by Ning. Even if Nanhai Country was lost, they wouldn¡¯t consider it a loss. Moreover, with the Nanhai Royal Family in hand, perhaps they could even attract a portion of the dispersed Nanhai Country navy doing business in various countries to come and join them, which would make it an even greater gain. Thus, victory would mean keeping Lingnan safe, and defeat would still guarantee some return on their investment. Shen Qiu¡¯s path of moderation was indeed refined to perfection. Chapter 847 - Chapter 847: Chapter 362: The Yong State Battle Situation Chapter 847: Chapter 362: The Yong State Battle Situation One month later, in the city of Jiangxia. That day, Lu Yuan climbed the mountain cliff, facing the morning glow of the rising sun, admiring the beautiful sunrise. The river breeze was cool and crisp. Despite having been in spring for quite some time, the chill lingering between heaven and earth still remained in abundance, making it somewhat unbearably penetrating. Fortunately, as a Martial Arts Xiantian with Inner Strength like a blazing furnace, Lu Yuan had long been immune to the extremes of heat and cold. His own cultivated magic power was also profoundly deep, so such minor suffering naturally was not taken to heart. By comparison, the beauty of this early morning, which refined one¡¯s sentiment, delighted the heart and pleased the eye, made him yearn even more. Gazing at the newly risen sun, Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes narrowed slightly, the golden sunlight spilled over heaven and earth, bringing a breath of life to the awakening of all things. It was truly hard to believe that a world graced by such a radiant sun was about to face a great calamity in the near future. The fate of the entire world would also become uncertain in this catastrophe, its future unpredictable. ¡®I wonder if Mo Li Daoist friend and the others have arrived at the Northern Dark City by now? How is the progression of the Ascension going, is it still proceeding smoothly?¡¯ Suddenly, Lu Yuan thought of that Daoist friend he had debated with several times last winter, his thoughts drifting far away. Since last September when Feishuang Tao and the rest of the Nine States Immortal Gate set sail to cross the sea, up to early April now, more than half a year has passed. With an unpredictable journey on the sea and the far distance to the Northern Dark City, it¡¯s unlikely the cultivators of the Nine States Immortal Gate have arrived smoothly. Apparently not. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï After all, when the cold tide struck and the Nine States Immortal Gate speculated there were issues with the Northern Dark City, they sent people to investigate. That time, a round trip took up a whole three years. Which is to say, a successful visit to the Northern Dark City, under the best circumstances, would still need a year and a half. It¡¯s only been half a year so far; perhaps those people haven¡¯t even made it to the North Sea yet, currently drifting in the East Sea region, struggling forward and keeping company with the tempestuous sea and waves. ¡°The cold tide¡¯s arrival is something that affects the entire northern region of the Nine Provinces. Even if Mo Li Daoist friend and the others are in the East Sea, they would likely not avoid the impact of the cold tide. Moreover, the further north you go, the heavier the cold tide becomes, and the colder heaven and earth get. Nearing the area of the Northern Dark City, I¡¯m afraid the entire North Sea is now turned into glaciers. Although Mo Li Daoist friend and the others are cultivators, even someone who cultivates both immortal and martial arts like me cannot be completely immune to the extreme cold. Constant circulation of Inner Strength is needed to warm the body, or use magic power to resolve the chill. They¡¯ve been combating the cold tide for a long time; I fear it may not be as simple and easy as it sounds. Perhaps, on the way to the Northern Dark City, some who lack sufficient magic power or strength will be the first to be eliminated.¡± Lu Yuan thought of the chill from last winter, and his gaze deepened. The winter that had just passed was even colder than previous years, already posing an initial threat to ordinary martial artists with Inner Strength. Under this cold encroachment, unless one possessed Inner Strength, ordinary people simply could not venture outside in the snow. To forcibly resist would likely result in being frozen into an ice sculpture within moments. And this was only the winter in the Jiangnan region. If it were in the northern lands or in places like the Snowy Wilderness, the cold tide would probably be much more severe. ¡°Not long ago, the Snow Plains Nomads sent a messenger, inviting Great Chu once more to ally and send troops against Zhou Country. However, this time they promised to deploy only three hundred thousand men, merely sixty to seventy percent of the scale of their past spring raids. Moreover, those who have been negotiating with these barbarians all this time, exchanging grain and supplies for the female population from the Snowy Wilderness, who had consistently refused, finally relented. They agreed to provide one hundred thousand Snowy Plain women of suitable age this year, and to sell the Zhou People captives they had taken to Great Chu. With a reduced scale of deployment and agreeing to such conditions, it seems the losses suffered by the Snow Plains Nomads this winter may have been greater than we imagined.¡± Lu Yuan recalled the intelligence Huang Xuan personally conveyed via divine consciousness from Hanzhong in the northwest just two days ago, his expression contemplative. Ever since the Snow Plains Nomads decided to move into the two Helong regions of Zhou Country to seek survival due to the impact of the cold tide, the two countries have erupted into massive wars each spring and autumn. The barbarians, to plunder enough grain and supplies, mobilize up to four to five hundred thousand nomadic cavalry in nearly every spring from various tribes, raiding into the Helong regions. At their height, the number of nomadic barbarian cavalry mobilized in spring could even exceed seven hundred thousand, almost comparable to the total population of some small countries. Yet, come this spring, in a change from their grand gestures of past years, the nomads deployed a mere three hundred thousand riders, truly uncharacteristic of their style. A diminutive force of three hundred thousand, essentially composed of militia-type nomadic cavalry, with such a small number of people, they don¡¯t even outnumber the regular army of the Helong regions of Zhou Country. Sending them for the spring raid, what effect could they hope to have? It¡¯s more likely they are not going to raid but to deliver themselves as easy pickings instead. But knowing this, the nomads still went ahead with the plan, a point that inevitably invokes deep reflection.¡± ¡°It seems like after years of warfare, the barbarians simply cannot hold on any longer!¡± Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel some emotion. Calculating carefully, from the summer of the sixth year of Shenwu Era when the Snow Plains Nomads, affected by a major flood, initiated conflict with the Zhou People, to the spring of the eleventh year of Shenwu, six years have now passed. After fighting for a full six years, no matter how numerous the nomadic population or how cheap the cannon fodder cavalry of the plains, the accumulated losses over time have been truly terrifying. Chapter 848 - Chapter 848: Chapter 362: The Yong State Battle Situation_2 Chapter 848: Chapter 362: The Yong State Battle Situation_2 By conservative estimates, over the past six years, the number of pastoralists among the Snow Plains Nomads who have died in battle already exceeds 1.5 million. And due to reasons such as cold disasters, starvation, and war, the estimated population reduction has also surpassed 5 million. Adding these together, the total population loss has exceeded 6.5 million, which, compared to the Nomads¡¯ peak of 16 million, accounts for more than a third of their population. With such severe losses, especially amongst the capable young men, the Snow Plains Nomads could be said to be teetering on the brink of extinction. Given such reasoning, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t be optimistic about the future of the Nomads. In reality, the actual situation of the Snow Plains Nomads was even worse than his estimation. Lu Yuan¡¯s information on the Snow Plains Nomads was ultimately gathered only through the Helong Battlefield channels and from the details related to some bloodlines mentioned by his Spirit Consort. Though both sources were fairly reliable, they were not as immediate or detailed as the information collected directly on the Snowy Wilderness, and they involved quite a bit of delay. In fact, the situation faced by the Snow Plains Nomads was much more severe than what Lu Yuan had speculated. The losses suffered by the tribes of the Snowy Wilds over the years were not far off from the wealth of intelligence previously gathered by Chu State. However, last winter, due to a sudden worsening of the cold snap, many tribes who were ill-prepared suffered heavy losses. Just one winter passed, and more than a million people died of freezing on the Snowy Wilderness, including some who had even received a disproportionate share of supplies. This one wave of severe cold took away a tenth of the total population of the Snow Plains Nomads. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Now, after the reduction caused by the cold, the total population of the Snow Plains Nomads has dropped to less than 9 million. Among the remaining 9 million people, many suffered from severe frostbite and frost injuries during the last winter, even losing toes and fingers, leaving them incapable of becoming competent laborers or combat units. It is precisely because of this large-scale reduction in population, as well as the appearance of many injured, that the Snow Plains Nomads now find it very difficult to organize large-scale forces. To be able to muster an army of 300,000 riders from the remaining 9 million is already considered a rarity and a miracle. If not for the life-and-death urgency pressing upon the entire tribe and race, their organizational capability and productivity, having suffered such devastation, would have seen their societal order collapse long ago. How would they still have the capacity to launch a spring raid against the Zhou People, extracting 300,000 riders as they are doing now? Yet the mere 300,000 riders, as Lu Yuan thought, really posed little threat. They could hardly trouble the 300,000 soldiers stationed by the Zhou People in the two provinces of Helong, along with an approximately equal number of militiamen. On the battlefield, the Zhou People¡¯s military force and strength had officially surpassed that of the Snow Plains Nomads, even gaining a crushing advantage. In the future, unless external forces intervene, even if all the Nomads on the Snowy Wilderness were wiped out, the two provinces of Helong could not be taken. Recognizing their decline in strength and the difficulty of their predicament, in order to ease the population pressure causing food shortages, as well as to obtain more supplies, the Snow Plains Nomads had agreed to trade the young women from their tribes with Chu State in exchange for precious grain and various supplies. This wasn¡¯t because they didn¡¯t realize that losing those valuable, childbearing-aged women would inevitably affect the long-term development of the tribe, even leading them step by step toward extinction. But they clearly understood that if they did not do this, not only those women would not be spared from starvation or freezing to death, but their tribes would also suffer even more losses, even facing direct extinction. Between two detriments, they chose the lesser: trading a long-term future for a short-term one was akin to quenching thirst with poison, yet it was a necessary act. Perhaps with sufficient support, they could rebuild their strength and fight a decisive battle with the Zhou People, desperately trying to seize land to consolidate. This hope may be slim, but there¡¯s still that slight chance. Compared to other futures already doomed to darkness, with no possibility left, this was enough to make it an acceptable option. Of course, Lu Yuan was not aware of all this, limited by the scarcity of information. Otherwise, given the current predicament of the Nomads, Chu State could have proposed even more terms to extract greater benefits. The Nomads, having been driven to desperation, had lost all leverage, and faced with any excessive demands, they had no choice but to accept, provided they didn¡¯t wish for extinction. Of course, these interests, to the Chu State which was about to unify Jiangnan, really were not much to speak of. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t place much emphasis on them. Compared to this, he valued friendship with the Nomads more. After all, besides those ordinary herders, there were still more than a dozen Inborn Grandmasters among the Nomads. If in the future the Snow Plains Nomads were obliterated, Chu State might be able to win over some people from among those Inborn Nomads, leveraging past relations with the Snowy Wilderness and the status of the Spiritual woman, to gain their most profound strengths. In the times to come, with Spiritual Energy growing ever scarcer, once those Cultivators from the Nine Provinces reached Northern Dark City and extracted the last active Spiritual Energy Between Heaven and Earth, those Different Species that could still survive in the Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens would begin to wither away and die due to the lack of Spiritual Energy. By then, without the assistance of Divine Blood Elixirs, it will be incredibly hard for the Nine Provinces to produce any more Inborn talents. The current times are essentially the last chance for all martial artists to strive for the Inborn Realm. Chapter 849 - Chapter 849: Chapter 362: The Yong State Battle Situation_3 Chapter 849: Chapter 362: The Yong State Battle Situation_3 ¡°` From now on, within at most a hundred years, it will become increasingly difficult for new Inborns to arise in the world. At most two hundred years, all Inborn Grandmasters may have disappeared, just like the current Grandmasters, completely becoming a legend. Therefore, being able to ally with some of the last remnants of the Inborn Grandmasters at this time, will naturally provide Chu State with a greater advantage in the struggle for high-end combat power against other countries in the future. Thus. Compared to ordinary people who could recover in just a few decades, Inborn Grandmasters who cannot be replaced once gone, will undoubtedly become even more important over the next two hundred years. If Chu State can secure the allegiance of all the barbarian Inborns on the Snowy Wilderness, along with their own Inborns and those they might persuade to join them after conquering Ning State Lingnan, they could potentially amass over thirty Inborn Grandmasters. Thirty Inborn Grandmasters. If they really could muster such strength, let alone advancing into North of the River, securing a foothold in Central State in the future would be viable as well. Even obliterating Liang and Lu Yuan also had some confidence in this. Therefore, compared to such trivial benefits at the moment, the long-term future naturally didn¡¯t concern him. If possible, Lu Yuan preferred to offer more help to the Barbarians in their time of need. After all, it was highly likely that these Barbarians wouldn¡¯t be able to turn the tables. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï In that case, it was better to invest more in the future, exchanging today¡¯s goodwill for tomorrow¡¯s gain. Of course, this was a long-term effort, and there was no need to rush for immediate results. For now, all that was required was to gently nourish and silently influence, waiting for the fruits to ripen over the next few years, or even over a decade, before harvesting them. Lu Yuan had the patience for this. ¡°But the Barbarians have it tough, and the situation for the Zhou People isn¡¯t much better.¡± He mulled over the intelligence from Zhou Country. Last winter, the Barbarians struggled to survive, and the losses for Zhou Country were substantial as well. Under the combined pressure of the Barbarians, Chu, and Wei People, Zhou Country, led by the famous world general He Basheng, managed to fiercely repel Chu and the Barbarians with their formidable strength. They kept the Helong stronghold as tight as a drum without revealing a single weakness. However, on the northern battlefield of Zhou Country, the hastily escaping army of three hundred thousand suffered another crushing defeat under the attacks of Wei¡¯s famous general, Xiao Wudi. The Wei army of four hundred thousand clashed with the thirty thousand soldiers from Zhou Country, resulting in a disastrous defeat for Zhou and the loss of over a hundred thousand soldiers. Even with the protection of strongholds and strategic passes, Zhou¡¯s forces could hardly withstand the military might of the Wei. The remaining half of Shuofang under the control of Zhou Country was lost within a mere three months. Ultimately, early last October, after more than ten days of initial snowfall in the northern territories, the entire Shuofang region fell under Wei control, and Zhou Country completely lost the gateway to the Northern Border. If it weren¡¯t already deep winter by then, with continuous heavy snowfall making military operations extremely difficult, it¡¯s likely that the Wei would have seized this opportunity to continue their advance southward, breaking into Guannei and threatening Zhou Country¡¯s capital, Chang¡¯an. Despite this, the loss of Shuofang and the threat to Jingji left Zhou Country and its people in a state of panic. To resist Wei Country, even Emperor Zhou who summoned back He Basheng, the only famous general in the nation from Helong, and ordered him to return to the Northern Border. There, in the northern part of Guannei, he set up defenses to counter the advances of his old adversary, Xiao Wudi. However, Guannei currently, even if Zhou Country consolidated its remnants and added the fifty thousand soldiers guarding the capital, the total military force barely amounted to around two hundred thousand. And the Wei, although they had sustained heavy losses by forcefully attacking Zhou¡¯s city defenses and passes, with casualties rumored to exceed two hundred thousand, inside Wei Country, aside from guarding against the nomads to the north, there weren¡¯t any other enemies to defend against, and so they didn¡¯t need to station many forces elsewhere. ¡°` Therefore, although losing over two hundred thousand soldiers and suffering great damage was a huge loss for Wei Country, it wasn¡¯t something it couldn¡¯t bear. With a stature comparable to that of Zhou Country and maintaining sufficient defenses in the north, Wei could still easily conscript and draw troops within the country to replenish the losses on the southern front line. By this time, the Wei Army in Shuofang had regained its strength after a winter and half a spring¡¯s replenishment, with troop numbers recovering to a formidable force of four hundred thousand. Moreover, within this army of four hundred thousand, the number of Inborn Grandmasters from Wei was even larger. It was said to be almost twice the size of the northern border army of Zhou. Such strength, although not enough to say it could directly crush Zhou Country, was indeed a gap that was enough to make people despair. With He Basheng¡¯s capabilities, it would probably be challenging to stop the Wei Army. ¡°So in the end, Zhou Country can either trust in He Basheng¡¯s capabilities, risking the two-fold disparity in troop numbers to fight to the death against Wei at the Northern Border, gambling on a slim chance of victory, or they could give up Helong¡¯s two counties, relocating the remaining forces and population to the counties within Guannei, thereby concentrating troops and resources. Without a doubt, this would significantly enhance the strength of the counties within Guannei and naturally could resist Wei. It¡¯s a risk of losing all three counties, betting on a chance of victory. Or surrender the already devastated two counties of Helong, preserving the heartland counties of Guannei where the capital resides. What should Zhou Country choose? This must also be the barbarians¡¯ final cautious glimmer of hope, right? As long as Zhou Country abandons the two counties of Helong, the barbarians on the brink of collapse could gain Helong¡¯s two counties, thus managing to cling to survival for a while longer. This might have a significant impact on my plan to annex the barbarians, likely a variable¡­ Lu Yuan thought about his future strategies and couldn¡¯t help pondering, but in the end, he shook his head: ¡°It probably won¡¯t come to that. I¡¯ve heard that Western Liang up northwest of Yong State has also shown signs of grain shortage in recent years due to the chill. The Western Liang army has already started probing, attempting to infiltrate the two counties of Helong, seeking new grain-producing lands to survive the calamities. And then there¡¯s Wei in the north. Now having occupied Shuofang, they share borders with the two counties of Helong. Wei is affected even more by the chill and faces an even greater grain crisis, therefore their need for grain-producing lands is more urgent. In such a situation, if Guanzhong turns into an impenetrable stronghold, who knows what Wei might plan for the neighboring two counties of Helong. And Zhou, having lost its western defense, probably won¡¯t give in either. Once they muster their strength, they may also attempt to return and reclaim the two counties of Helong. With so many wolves circling, the barbarians are better off not taking Helong¡¯s two counties. If they do take over, they would replace Zhou¡¯s current position and be besieged from three sides, left floundering and overextended. Perhaps by then, the barbarians¡¯ downfall might even arrive faster than if they were simply declining naturally, and I could more quickly inherit their legacy.¡± Lu Yuan speculated calmly and was reassured in his heart. Then, looking at the fully risen morning sun over the river, a sense of urgency also arose within him. With the situation in the north changing so rapidly and Zhou Country already facing the peril of extinction, Yong State might change hands soon. As the chill slowly intensified, the unrest in the world became ever more apparent. Chu State, where he resided, also needed to hasten its steps, striving for more advantages in this global struggle for supremacy. Otherwise, if the north gradually unifies, integrating the resources of various states, supreme empires spanning across states and counties, far surpassing any single-state overlord, would emerge. Then, even as Lu Yuan, before outlasting those Inborn Grandmasters, he might be willing yet powerless, unable to contend with them. ¡°So, if I don¡¯t want to be left behind, I need to quicken my pace.¡± Looking into the distance towards the east, gazing in the direction of Ning State, Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes deepened, and his decision was already made. Chapter 850 - Chapter 850: Chapter 363 The Key to Breaking the Situation Chapter 850: Chapter 363 The Key to Breaking the Situation This battle with Ning Country for the title of Master of Yangzhou had been brewing for several years, yet once it began, the progression of the war was quite swift. The originally mighty and strong United Army of the four kingdoms¡ªNing, Su, Song, and Nanhai¡ªwas highly regarded by all countries for its power. However, after the war broke out, their true weakness was quickly exposed. Though both their territory and population were stronger than that of Chu State, and even in military strength, they seemed more robust in the eyes of outsiders. Yet in the battle in September of the previous year, the main force led by Emperor Ning was first thwarted at Jiangxia City, with defeats in both their naval and land armies following in succession. Afterward, Ning Country lost an entire prefecture in Xiangyang, leading to a rapid deterioration on the northern battlefield. The three-route United Army from Lingnan, with Nanhai Country as frightened as a tiger, dared not engage in battle with the Chu Army, only blindly holding fast and watching as their own territory was taken by Chu forces. Later, when the Ning Army finally rushed to provide reinforcements, the Nanhai Army still just sat in the city, lacking even the courage to venture out and assist the reinforcements. Eventually, a few troops did emerge, but they were no match and were defeated on the battlefield, leading to a significant defeat for the Ning Army. After this battle, the people of Nanhai were deemed cowardly, useless, and incompetent, becoming the laughingstock of the world. Of course, Nanhai Country wasn¡¯t the only one to lose face. Su Country, originally seen as the dominant power of Lingnan and lauded as a strong nation, and Song Country, with its flourishing national strength and formidable army, both turned out to be all show and no substance. The confident united army of two hundred thousand from both countries launched a massive Northern Expedition. Yet within just over a month of marching north, they hadn¡¯t even managed to penetrate Chu territory when they were swiftly defeated by the Chu Army. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The united Su-Song army of two hundred thousand returned in disastrous defeat, with King Song escaping alone on horseback and the Su Army relying on betraying their allies to barely escape back to their capital. Then the Chu Army swept through, effortlessly capturing the entire territory of Su Country apart from the capital, Yulin. Su Country was left barely surviving in the cold tide and snow. By the spring of this year, with the snow and ice melting and the protection of natural disasters gone, Su Country was rapidly broken by the Chu Army and became the first force of the United Army to be annihilated. From north of Jiangxia to Lingnan, the Chu State had clearly gained an advantage or victory on every battlefield, reversing their initially unfavorable situation in one fell swoop. Now, taking an overall look at the battlefield, Chu State has already achieved a significant advantage and is gradually overpowering Ning Country. Furthermore, with more minor victories accumulating, this advantage will grow even greater. Now is the time for earnest and vigorous effort. For Chu State, to decide the victory or defeat this year and completely defeat the United Army, claiming victory in this battle for supremacy, is far from an illusion. And now is the time to strive toward that goal. ¡­ After a winter¡¯s rest and preparation, the wounds inflicted on both Chu and Ning countries by last autumn and winter¡¯s battles had gradually healed, and each had gathered the strength for another round of warfare. Here in Jiangxia. Benefiting from the brutal siege warfare before, the originally immature hundred thousand new soldiers, having seen blood and after a winter¡¯s settling, had now transformed, acquiring the beginnings of a battle-hardened elite¡¯s demeanor. Therefore, although the total military force had decreased by ten thousand, the remaining ninety thousand were thirty percent stronger than the previous hundred thousand, which was quite remarkable. After a few more major battles and a couple of years of settling, they would undoubtedly become truly battle-hardened elites. Given the intensity of the current Chu-Ning war, it seemed that completing this transformation would not be difficult. However, even though this transformation was not yet complete, having these ninety thousand soldiers, who could be considered half veterans, along with Lu Yuan, the Inborn Grandmaster of the world, made the city secure. The Ning Army was still the same. After the navy retreated to Xia Kou Water Fort in Xiangyang, only about a hundred and ten thousand soldiers remained outside Jiangxia City. This strength naturally could not threaten Jiangxia, and even in a direct confrontation, they would likely be defeated by the Chu Army. Therefore, knowing their own weakening position, the Ning Army had been holed up in the camp, shutting themselves in and completely ignoring the provocations of the Chu Army. This posture seemed as if one didn¡¯t know better, they might think it was the Chu Army who was actively attacking and the Ning Army who was actively defending! Yet it must be said, the turtle-like posture of the Ning Army did indeed have an exceptional effect. Lu Yuan, limited by the Chu Army¡¯s numerical inferiority and not wanting to suffer heavy losses in storming the city, had no good solution for now against the Ning Army¡¯s encampment outside the city, which had gradually turned into a small fortress with three Inborn masters and a hundred thousand soldiers entrenched like a turtle shell. Hence, after the spring began, while other battlefields were blazing with action, Jiangxia remained eerily calm, maintaining a peculiar peace. The Chu Army could not do anything to the Ning Army, and the Ning Army could not do anything to the Chu Army, so the two sides continued the standoff. However, both Chu and Ning were well aware that this situation could not be the norm. Once the other battlefields determined their victors, with various minor victories accumulating and slowly evolving into a big advantage, sweeping through, the time would come for victory or defeat here. And if nothing unexpected happened, this victory or defeat should arrive this year. ¡°On the Nanhai Country front, I have three hundred thousand troops, among them five Inborn Grandmasters. On the enemy side, the united forces of Ning and Nanhai count only a hundred and fifty thousand soldiers, along with two Inborns. In terms of both military strength and masters, Chu State clearly has the advantage, so taking this city will not be difficult. Therefore, this battlefield should turn out in favor of Great Chu. As for the northern Xiangyang, after Xiaoqing took Anlu Prefecture, she continued to station eighty thousand troops, plotting to conquer Xiangyang Prefecture of Ning Country. Yang Jing, relying on naval support, barely led Ning¡¯s three thousand leftover soldiers against Xiaoqing¡¯s. Chapter 851 - Chapter 851: Chapter 363 The Key to Breaking the Situation_2 Chapter 851: Chapter 363 The Key to Breaking the Situation_2 ¡°Both sides have similar strength, and neither can do much to the other; this should be considered a draw.¡± Lu Yuan analyzed the two sides¡¯ positions on the peripheral battlefields, feeling gradually more confident. Originally in Xiangyang Prefecture, the Chu army had the advantage in terms of troop strength. However, during this winter, the Ning army, in control of Jingmen and Jingling Prefectures of Xiangyang, urgently conscripted fifty thousand strong men and gathered them at Fu City to defend it. With these hastily conscripted fodder, the Ning army barely bolstered its forces, enough to contend with the Chu army. At the same time, after a winter¡¯s respite, the Ning naval forces, which had suffered a crushing defeat on the Jiangxia waterways, had managed to recuperate. Their morale gradually improved; lost warships were replenished, and they essentially regained their combat strength. Now, integrated with the Xia Kou naval forces, the Ning navy had grown to over seventy thousand men, close to twice the size of the remaining forty thousand of the Chu navy. Plus, with Chu Wei having been reassigned by Lu Yuan, the Chu naval forces lost their soul, and even with high morale, they failed to gain any advantage after several clashes with the Ning navy. After a few minor naval engagements revealed that neither side could easily gain the upper hand, or rather, that eliminating the opponent might come with a heavy price, they also ceased their entanglements. Without a definite advantage, the Chu navy naturally couldn¡¯t completely block the entire Yangtze River waterway. At this time, both sides, with Jiangxia City as the dividing line, began to equally share the river waterway, each with its own advantages. Fortunately, dreading the strength of the Chu navy, the Jingling naval forces of Ning had to station most of their strength near Jiangxia to contain the Chu navy. As a result, the Ning naval forces couldn¡¯t divert too many ships for a flanking maneuver behind Chu, to attack Chu cities along the Han River. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã? Moreover, Zhou Qing left thirty thousand county soldiers behind in Chu State¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture. Relying on city defenses, he could barely guarantee that the rear was without worries. But in this situation of mutual restraint, with the Ning having defensive advantages and the assistance of the Ning naval forces outside, with Zhou Qing¡¯s current strength, it was essentially impossible to clear out the remnants of Ning in Xiangyang Prefecture. This place, like with Jiangxia, would be too costly for the Chu army to attack, and they likely couldn¡¯t take it. The Ning, lacking in strength, could only defend. A stalemate was the only option here. To break the deadlock on the Xiangyang battlefield, they could only wait for other minor victories to accumulate, and then sweep through to establish the situation. ¡°So, the key to breaking the deadlock now lies only with the Dongting main battlefield, where I am.¡± Muttering to himself, Lu Yuan looked toward the south. At a disadvantage in both Lingshan and Lingnan, the only chance for Ning to break the deadlock was to make an effort on the main battlefield. And in the main battlefield, with Lu Yuan in command at Jiangxia and with strong soldiers stationed, the Ning army had no hope of victory. With a breakthrough at Jiangxia out of the question, their only chance for victory would be to the south of Jiangxia, tackling a few prefectures and counties bordering Chu¡¯s Dongting. Deploy troops to conquer Changsha, Hengyang, and Luyang Prefectures and then invade deep into Chu territory, cutting off the rear supply lines of several Chu armies in Lingnan or Dongting, or even directly threaten the Chu capital. Any one of these three outcomes, if achieved, could deal a heavy blow to the currently balanced Chu army, reversing Ning¡¯s decline. At that point, the advantage Chu State had only just managed to secure would be lost due to this defeat, and the struggle for supremacy with Ning would have to be prolonged. The quick victory Lu Yuan had originally planned within a year or two would then succeed. ¡°However, my plan to train five disciples has been kept very secret for the past two years; it has always been under wraps. Even in my own Chu State, not many are aware of Chu Wei¡¯s breakthrough to Innate, so the people of Ning definitely can¡¯t find out. If they think they can deceive me and take advantage of Dongting Prefecture¡¯s lack of Innate experts, and come over to reap benefits, Chu Wei and the Spirit Consort will certainly give the Ning bandits a surprise.¡± Lu Yuan thought of the news from Fu City in Yuzhang that had reached the royal intelligence agency. In the lands of Lingshan and Jiangnan, the snow retreats slower than in Lingnan, so while a great war was unfolding in Lingnan, Yuzhang and Dongting were just emerging from snow and ice, at a time when people were just beginning to be active again. Hence, the Chu and Ning armies could only deploy troops and send generals a bit later than in Lingnan. Therefore, by mid-March, when Lan Cai¡¯er had just led her troops to arrive outside Nanhai City, Ning forces in Yuzhang were just beginning to stir, moving out from the Pengli main camp. And perhaps knowing that the movement of large armies cannot be easily concealed, The hundred thousand Ning troops from the Pengli main camp made no attempt to hide their tracks, openly displaying their intentions and clearly indicating their target: the Chu Prefectures of Luyang and Hengyang. Their aim, of course, was to use this action to mobilize the Chu forces and thereby alleviate the disadvantage on the Lingnan battlefield. Yes, after half a month¡¯s gestation, even from thousands of miles away, news of the annihilation of Su Country in Lingnan, through various twists and turns, had also reached Ning. Upon hearing it, Shen Qiu cursed Su Xuange as useless, and also keenly realized the dire situation of the rapidly collapsing Lingnan Battlefield. With Su Country gone, the two Chu armies in Lingnan could join forces unopposed, converging to attack the remaining Song and Nanhai Countries. With the remaining strength of Song and Nanhai Countries, they would naturally stand no chance against the merged and strengthened Chu forces. Therefore, if Ning didn¡¯t want to see Chu slowly taking down each opponent and gradually taking over the entirety of Lingnan, It had become the only choice to restrain and weaken Chu¡¯s strength in Lingnan before they could sweep across the region. Chapter 852 - Chapter 852: Chapter 363 The Key to Breaking the Situation_3 Chapter 852: Chapter 363 The Key to Breaking the Situation_3 Ning Country certainly did not want to see Chu State occupy the entire Lingnan region. Lingnan, with its three nations and five counties, spanned a vast twenty thousand li and housed a population of six to seven million. If Chu State were to acquire such a fertile territory, not only would its borders swell to twice the size of Ning¡¯s in an instant, but its population would also rapidly catch up, becoming comparable to that of Ning. Then, just with its national power alone, Chu State would far surpass Ning Country. Given two to three decades to develop and fully unleash the potential of its new territory, Chu would eventually crush Ning with its superior strength, leading to Ning¡¯s downfall. Confronted with matters that endangered the very existence of his nation, Shen Qiu naturally could not sit idly by. Therefore, he had no choice but to reluctantly abandon his own plans to launch a sneak attack on Dongting, defeat Chu State, and turn defeat into victory. By making a showy declaration to Chu State that he intended to attack Dongting covertly, he forced Chu to redeploy troops from Lingnan to assist in defending the exposed Dongting County, alleviating the pressure on the Lingnan Battlefield faced by both Song Country and Nanhai Country. As long as one or two Inborns and tens, even hundreds of thousands of soldiers could be redeployed from Lingnan, the pressure on the United Army in Lingnan would significantly decrease, allowing them to maintain the current standoff against Chu¡¯s forces. In this way, with a significant portion of its strength tied up in Lingnan, Chu would be unable to spare more forces to support the battlefield in northern Dongting. Ning Country could then continue its opposition against Chu State. This was precisely why the two allies in Lingnan were so vital, integral chess pieces in Ning¡¯s ambitions. Having already lost Su Country, it was even more imperative not to give up on them lightly. Because to do so would mean abandoning Su Country¡¯s ambitions¡ªsomething they could not afford to lose. Of course, this move also stemmed from Shen Qiu¡¯s realization that Chu¡¯s forces were advancing unstoppably in the Southsea and that his own plans to attack Dongting County were likely to fail. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Chu¡¯s army had probably already withdrawn its soldiers and Inborns to defend Dongting. The possibility of launching a successful sneak attack against Chu was now practically nonexistent. Even if the original plan were to proceed, advancing deep into enemy territory alone could result in falling into Chu¡¯s ambush, leading to heavy losses and further worsening the already disadvantageous situation for Ning¡¯s forces. By openly laying out his intentions, he might lose the opportunity for a surprise attack, but it would also spare him the danger of taking risky moves and falling prey to Chu¡¯s potential ambush. To prevent this possibility, Ning Country had already dispatched countless scouts to lurk along the various main roads from Lingnan to Dongting County, specifically monitoring every move of Chu¡¯s army, fearing Chu was devising an ambush against them. ¡°Heh, perhaps those Ning People still believe that I would withdraw reinforcements from Lingnan to the north because of the crisis in Dongting, thereby giving up the advantageous situation we have in Lingnan.¡± ¡°However, I have already secretly nurtured Chu Wei and sent him to Luyang, making Dongting as impregnable as a fortified stronghold.¡± ¡°If Ning wishes to attack, they will be faced with fortified walls and strong generals, and apart from bashing their heads and bleeding, they won¡¯t be able to proceed even an inch.¡± ¡°This battle has already made Chu State an invincible land.¡± ¡°Nevertheless, they are right about one thing.¡± ¡°On this battlefront in Dongting, I indeed have sent reinforcements and withdrawn strong generals. It¡¯s just that these reinforcements and strong generals did not come from Lingnan, but from Hanzhong instead.¡± Lu Yuan thought of Shen Qiu¡¯s clumsy scheming and couldn¡¯t help but sneer twice, his gaze shifting toward the west. At this very moment, the reinforcements from Hanzhong should have already entered the Yangtze River waterway of Dongting County, heading towards Dongting Lake, no? They intended to use the safety of Dongting as a bait to force Chu State to give up the favorable situation in Lingnan. And he himself also planned to use this as bait to seize the opportunity to consume Ning¡¯s forces that invaded Dongting, swiftly breaking the stalemate between the two nations at Dongting, and completely defeating those Ning People. According to information from the Imperial City Division, not only have the forces of Ning¡¯s Pengli main camp split into two divisions planning to attack Luyang and Hengyang separately, but Ning has also started a new round of mobilization and expansion within their country, planning to recruit an additional five hundred thousand soldiers to cope with the current insufficiency of troops. Moreover, some friends from Linhai County have also surreptitiously passed on even more detailed information about the high-level discussions within Ning Country. That is Bai Yian¡¯s plan for staunch defense and Shen Qiu¡¯s modified backup fortress strategy, which is currently being initiated. Ning Country was already planning its retreat without having been defeated yet, preparing seven hundred thousand troops within the country and building fortresses along the border with Chu, reinforcing town defenses and checkpoints, getting ready for a prolonged war in the future. When Lu Yuan received this piece of intelligence, he too was startled. Because if Ning managed to achieve this, facing the million-strong army of Jiangdong and a dozen or so Inborn Grandmasters in mere defense, Even if Chu State doubled its current troops and added another ten Inborn Grandmasters, facing this turtle shell, Chu would have nowhere to bite and would be at a loss. By then, it might indeed turn out as Bai Yian said, with the two nations engaged in a long-term attrition war here, waiting to join forces to head north when the great calamity arrives. As soon as he thought of this terrifying future, Lu Yuan was determined not to let Ning Country succeed in its endeavors. Hence, to thwart this plan and to defeat the opponent before Ning was fully prepared, And then to invade Ning Country and suffocate this preparation. Last winter, he had already secretly ordered Huang Xuan to withdraw a portion of the soldiers from Hanzhong, gather them in Yuzhong Prefecture of Xichuan, and stand by for orders at any moment. Then, when he learned about the dire straits of the Snow Plains Nomads and knew their spring raid this year would yield little to no gains and could even result in a significant defeat, Lu Yuan flatly rejected their request to invite Chu State to dispatch troops. This spring and summer, Chu would not send Hanzhong troops to the Helong Battlefield to meddle in this mess. Meanwhile, with Wei people having reached the Capital and the Barbarians tied up, Zhou Country would no longer pose a threat to Chu¡¯s Hanzhong region. With all these conditions in place, Lu Yuan then sent a message to Huang Xuan, instructing him to rush to Yuzhong Prefecture and quietly lead the fifty thousand soldiers of the Forbidden army stationed there. They boarded the naval warships that Lu Yuan had secretly ordered to be ready in the region and sailed down the river, heading toward the Changsha Battlefield. Chapter 853 - Chapter 853: Chapter 364 The Fall of Nanhai Country Chapter 853: Chapter 364 The Fall of Nanhai Country On the river surface of Jiangxia, Chu State¡¯s naval forces could not overpower Ning Country¡¯s navy, but it wasn¡¯t just due to their weaker military strength. Last year during the naval battle, Chu State had captured over a hundred of Ning Country¡¯s warships, as well as more than eight thousand naval prisoners. With the help of these captured warships and prisoners, after a winter of assimilation, Chu State¡¯s naval forces had already recovered to a scale of fifty thousand. With this strength, coupled with the sharp morale from last year¡¯s great victory, and battling Ning¡¯s army, even without Chu Wei¡¯s command, Chu State¡¯s chances of victory were not small. Nevertheless, on the front line, Chu State still only retained forty thousand naval forces, allowing Ning Country¡¯s navy to swagger around; within this, there certainly was reason. The reason was that Lu Yuan had already secretly withdrawn over ten thousand naval soldiers and a large number of ships, transferring them ahead of time to Xichuan for this troop movement. Because the operation was done so covertly, and also because Hanzhong Xichuan was thousands of miles away with numerous mountain ridges blocking the way and a great distance from the front line battlefield. This resulted in no one from Ning Country being aware of Chu Army¡¯s covert actions. As for the fifty thousand Forbidden Army troops that Lu Yuan had called upon, and Huang Xuan¡¯s Second Innate Realm avatar, there were no precautions whatsoever, making them truly a surprise force. Now, this surprise force was being transported by the navy. As long as they arrived at Changsha Prefecture through Dongting Lake, they could directly strike towards the front line and, in coordination with Sun Siwen within Changsha city, catch Xiang Duan¡¯s hundred thousand troops utterly off guard. As long as they could break this enemy force, Ning¡¯s army would lose a hundred thousand soldiers, and might even lose an Inborn Grandmaster in battle. Afterwards, whether Huang Xuan continued to lead troops south to attack Ning¡¯s armies in Luyang and Hengyang prefectures, or turned eastward to directly invade Yuzhang Prefecture and cut off the retreat of Shen Qiu¡¯s large army at the front line in Jiangxia, Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 he would be able to break the stalemate at Dongting battlefield. Shen Qiu wanted to attack Dongting¡¯s hinterland to reverse the disadvantage. Lu Yuan, likewise, aimed to invade Yuzhang Prefecture by attacking its rear to cut off Ning¡¯s army retreat path, while simultaneously threatening the enemy capital. Therefore, after being reminded by those aristocratic high-level officials who wanted to secure a retreat for themselves and learning of Shen Qiu¡¯s strategic plans, he followed suit, formulating a similar but opposing plan. Looking at it now, with the changes in the overall situation, Ning Country¡¯s plan had fallen apart, transforming from a stealth attack into an overt strategy. On Chu State¡¯s side, with no one being the wiser, a sneak attack had already been prepared and was in motion. The outcome at this moment depended on whether Shen Qiu could achieve his objective and swiftly defeat the hundred thousand Ning troops in Changsha to claim victory. However, given Huang Xuan¡¯s strength and the abruptness of the attack, coupled with insider support within the city, it would be nearly impossible for Ning¡¯s unprepared army to block them. The demise of Xiang Duan¡¯s army was almost certain. Of course, the risk for Lu Yuan in deploying a large army from thousands of miles away for this surprise attack was not small. The greatest risk being that, once Huang Xuan left, Chu Country¡¯s western prefectures like Hanzhong, Xichuan, and Hegu would no longer have an Inborn presence. At the top-tier power level, they would essentially become voids, extremely vulnerable. Furthermore, after the withdrawal of fifty thousand Forbidden troops, Chu State¡¯s military forces in these three western prefectures would be left with only seventy thousand Forbidden army troops and local prefectures and counties soldiers. All these troops put together amounted to about one hundred and fifty thousand or so, quite sparse given the complex situation of the west. If at this point an enemy dispatched a large army and suddenly invaded the three western prefectures, then Chu Country¡¯s situation in the west could completely collapse. Luckily, Zhou Country to the north was preoccupied with its own troubles and lacked the strength to move south. To the west, the Snowy Wilderness only had dangerous mountain paths leading to Hegu Prefecture and being allies with Chu, they would unlikely dispatch a large army to attack. The only threat left was Nanzhao Country to the south. Yet at this moment, given Chu State¡¯s imposing reputation, along with the restraint of vassal states like Jianchuan and Chilih, and the recent deterrence from the conquest of Su Country, it was unlikely that Nanzhao and Dali of the southwest would dare make a move. Also, Huang Xuan leading the large army¡¯s departure was done in secrecy without causing a stir. Outsiders were unaware that Chu State¡¯s west was now vulnerable; this was yet another layer of concealment. With these many factors in place, there was no immediate concern for Chu State¡¯s security in the west. Nevertheless, being cautious as he was, Lu Yuan did not place all his trust in the enemy not invading. When he reassigned Huang Xuan¡¯s armed forces to support Dongting, he also arranged for his two disciples, Han Shun and Zhang You, to rush urgently to Xichuan and Hanzhong prefectures to defend those locales. Both disciples, like Chu Wei, had been nurtured by Lu Yuan and were attempting to break through to Innate. However, without the Teacher¡¯s daily teaching and slightly less accumulation of foundational strength, their progress towards breaking through Innate lagged behind Chu Wei¡¯s. But they weren¡¯t behind by much. According to estimates, by early summer, in about one or two months, both would likely breakthrough to Innate. Therefore, they just needed to endure through this one or two months of peak vulnerability in the west, and once Han Shun and Zhang You completed their breakthrough, their presence alone would be enough to stabilize the overall situation in the west. Even if Nanzhao Country attacks at that time, they would be capable of repelling it. Lu Yuan believed that with the layers of smoke screens he had set up and Chu Country¡¯s current reputation, he could secure that small window of one or two months. All they had to do was endure through this most challenging time. In the end, even if the world saw through his plans, everything would be settled, and it would be too late to turn the tide. Taking a relatively small risk could exchange for a swift victory over Ning Country. This move was yet another certain gain for Chu State. ¡­ Mists wafted, the sky vast and waters broad. Chapter 854 - Chapter 854: Chapter 364 The Fall of Nanhai Country_2 Chapter 854: Chapter 364 The Fall of Nanhai Country_2 The morning light sprinkled down, casting the entire lake in a golden hue, and amidst that sea of gold, dots began to appear from afar, slowly emerging on the vast expanse of the lake. In Changsha territory, at Floating Cloud Crossing. Huang Xuan stood at the bow, gazing toward the distant ferry. By now, the ferry had already received orders; over a thousand gathered county soldiers had cleared the surrounding area, controlling the entire ferry point to ensure no messages could leak from this place. ¡°Changsha, we¡¯ve finally arrived.¡± The fleet entered the ferry point, and soon countless small boats approached, with Laborers and civilian workers transferring supplies, sending them toward the ships that had come from afar. The daily consumption of supplies by the fifty thousand Forbidden Army and the ten thousand marines was astronomical. To maintain secrecy, Lu Yuan had dispatched the marines to transport Huang Xuan¡¯s surprise force, which meant they could not mobilize too many boats to avoid discovery by Ning spies. Thus, the ships sent to Xichuan were actually limited, just enough to accommodate fifty thousand soldiers of the Forbidden Army. The remaining space on some ships was limited, and so was the storage capacity for supplies. Therefore, as the ships traveled each day, they had to seek a ferry point along the way for re-supply to replenish what the troops ashore had consumed. Fortunately, Lu Yuan had anticipated this and had already arranged for people to choose appropriate places along the way, and gathered suitable troops and horses to prepare for this. Whenever Huang Xuan¡¯s surprise force reached a place, there would be a supply point, with the gathered prefectural and county soldiers controlling the ferry and sealing off the area tightly. After the fleet was resupplied and left, they would not lift the blockade, but instead, continue to maintain it for ten days to cut off any possibility of message leakage. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Any boats encountered along the way were also detained by the fleet. Each time they reached a re-supply point, the detained boats were kept at the supply passage, guarded by soldiers from the prefectures and counties, preventing their escape. In this manner, the fleet from Yuzhong Prefecture in Xichuan had been traveling for seven days, and the initial supply points were still under blockade. Even if someone released a message now, by the time it reached Ning Country, Huang Xuan, who was already in Changsha Prefecture by then, would probably have already begun the surprise attack on Xiang Duan¡¯s troops, with the battle likely being over already. Thanks to these meticulous plans, Huang Xuan¡¯s fleet had come all the way without any leaks. Not to mention the people of Ning, even within the territory of Chu State, no one except the participants knew of this. There were officials in the army responsible for receiving the supplies, so Huang Xuan needn¡¯t pay much attention to that. And at the ferry, a military officer from the Imperial City Division took a small boat to the ship where he was. ¡°I¡¯ve seen the True Person.¡± After boarding the ship, the officer hurriedly saluted. ¡°Mm,¡± Huang Xuan merely nodded, then asked, ¡°What¡¯s the situation in Changsha Prefecture now? I see that Floating Cloud Crossing here is peaceful and shows no trace of Ning bandits. Are they still held back by Changsha city?¡± Changsha city, the capital of Changsha Prefecture, was situated in the middle of the prefecture, backed by Luoshan, and surrounded by Luoshui river, which could be considered a strategic location with mountain and water defenses. The city walls of Changsha were also extremely solid; it was once the capital of Chu State, which speaks volumes about its majesty. With such geographical advantages and a strong fortress to rely on, Changsha was as impregnable as Jiangxia city. With such a strong city, Sun Siwen had an extremely easy job defending it. Even though he was a bureaucrat and not skilled in battle, and the city¡¯s elite troops were only twenty thousand, far less than the Hundred thousand Ning People led by Xiang Duan outside the city, half a year had passed, and Changsha city remained unyielding. Even the loss of troops inside the city was not significant, barely exceeding ten thousand, most of whom were ordinary civilian workers conscripted. With fifty thousand civilian households within Changsha city, Sun Siwen only needed to make a call, and those lost civilian workers were already being replenished, keeping the city¡¯s troop strength at about a hundred thousand. Such losses were negligible. In contrast, the Ning Army outside the city, after besieging it for half a year, couldn¡¯t even manage a complete encirclement of Changsha city. Thanks to the Luoshui waterway, all kinds of supplies from outside continuously entered the city, ensuring a constant supply of food and fodder and well-stocked arms, keeping the battle strength at its peak state. The Ning Army, however, suffered heavy losses in their numerous attempts to storm the city, reducing their numbers from an initial hundred thousand to only eighty thousand, with over twenty percent of their combat power crippled. To this day, facing Changsha city in front, Xiang Duan had almost run out of strategies, and the idea of breaching it had long been abandoned. Without an order from Shen Qiu, he also dared not lead his troops to retreat and ended up in a stalemate under the city, stuck there, constraining each other with Chu Army inside Changsha city. Also, because there were a hundred thousand troops inside Changsha city, along with an Inborn, and the Ning Army no longer had an absolute advantage, while also being in the heartland of Chu State, Xiang Duan didn¡¯t even dare to dispatch a Detached Army to attack the hinterlands of Changsha and Dongting. He was afraid that delving too deep would lead to being targeted and encircled by the Chu forces, which would see his troops sandwiched between attacks and destroyed without a place for burial. What started as a triumphantly anticipated battle had dragged into this embarrassing stalemate, leaving Xiang Duan exposed. Thankfully, he wasn¡¯t the only one disgraced. The likes of Yang Jing in the north of the river, Shangguan Ming and Su Xuange in Lingnan, and even the Heavenly Son in Jiangxia, all had their embarrassing moments in this Chu-Ning decisive battle, outshining his infamy. So in contrast, he seemed to be just mediocre. Within Ning Country, he was somewhat respected as a steady, reputed Old General and a famous general; it was indeed an odd piece of news. The military officer from the Imperial City Division relayed all the information about the Changsha battlefield to Huang Xuan. ¡°I see. So, Xiang Duan, being repelled at Changsha city and wary of being attacked from behind, is stuck in indecision and can only hold a few small cities in the rear as his retreat route. That is why there is such tranquility behind Changsha city.¡± Chapter 855 - Chapter 855: Chapter 364 The Fall of Nanhai Country_3 Chapter 855: Chapter 364 The Fall of Nanhai Country_3 Huang Xuan listened to the report and already had a general impression in his heart. He couldn¡¯t help but smile and turned his head to say, ¡°Now that I am aware, the rest of you continue to monitor information outside the walls of Changsha, at the same time, block off any news of the army¡¯s arrival at Fuyun Du. It must not be leaked.¡± ¡°Also, if there is any unusual movement from the Ning Army, report it to me immediately. Do not delay.¡± The military officer hurriedly replied, ¡°Understood.¡± Afterward, the man hurried off, gathered a few colleagues upon reaching the shore, gave some instructions, and then the hundred or so agents and messengers from the Imperial City scattered in all directions, beginning their tasks. Meanwhile, Huang Xuan, on the boat, waited outside the ferry dock for a while. Seeing that all supplies had been replenished and were in order, he did not continue to stay and directly ordered the fleet to leave the dock and move forward. Fuyun Du was merely one of the ferry crossings within Changsha territory, part of the Dongting Lake region. Although it was within Changsha¡¯s boundaries, it was in the western part of Changsha and still more than two hundred li from Changsha City. If he were to land from here, then Huang Xuan, leading fifty thousand troops, would have to rush to the destination, and even if they maintained their combat strength, it would take at least two to three days. The march of tens of thousands of troops on land would be grand and imposing, dust covering the sky, making it impossible to conceal their tracks and surely alerting the people of Ning. Xiang Duan did not dare to deploy a detached army to enter Dongting prefectural residence, but he had the audacity to dispatch hundreds or even thousands of scouts to investigate areas around Changsha City, spanning from a hundred to several hundred li. Even the Chu Army inside Changsha City would send out scouts to intercept and block the way; however, they couldn¡¯t possibly head south in full force, and there would always be some information that slipped through. Huang Xuan had come with the intent of catching his enemies off guard, launching a surprise attack on the Ning Army. It wasn¡¯t to lead troops as reinforcements, to fight a head-on battle with the Ning Army openly and honorably. If Xiang Duan were to become aware that Chu had received reinforcements, caution would be heightened, and who knows, he might lead his troops to retreat straight away, pulling back to Yuzhang Prefecture. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Even if they did not retreat, they would likely hold the fort strong, splitting their forces to retreat to several county towns under their control in Changsha Prefecture, barricading themselves within. For Huang Xuan to then proceed to capture each one would be extremely difficult. In the end, the situation would become just like that of the Jiangxia battlefield, both sides locked in a stalemate, wearing each other down. In such a case, the significance of Huang Xuan leading a surprise force would be completely lost. He could only act as reinforcements, to strengthen the defenses within Dongting territory, with greatly diminished effectiveness. Therefore, to avoid such a scenario, Huang Xuan¡¯s troops could not travel by land but had to take the water route to remain concealed. Luckily, within Changsha territory, there was Luoshui which flows into Dongting Lake and heads east, passing by Changsha City, and flowing into Yuzhang Prefecture. There was also another river, Min Water, which likewise originated from Dongting Lake. However, this river first went north, into the Yueyang Prefecture where Baling was located. After passing through several counties in the southern part of Yueyang Prefecture, Min Water made a turn and headed south again, eventually reaching Fengling County, the easternmost point of Changsha, where it met with Luoshui, the two merging into one river. Fuyun Du was situated at the upper reaches of Min Water. From here, traveling a few more li northwards would allow one to navigate downstream from the upper reaches of Min Water, covering five hundred li by water to reach Fengling County and enter Luoshui. According to the plan devised by Lu Yuan. Upon reaching Fengling County, Huang Xuan would lead his troops to seize control of the county, then leave a contingent behind to block the water and land routes between Dongting and Yuzhang, thus cutting off Xiang Duan¡¯s retreat and also preventing reinforcements from being sent from Yuzhang Prefecture by the Ning Army. Huang Xuan would then continue to move upstream, bypassing through counties such as Anjiang, using the speed advantage of traveling by water to directly insert himself behind Changsha within half a day, attacking the Ning Army¡¯s rear. If swift enough, they could reach Fengling County within a day. With Huang Xuan present, it wouldn¡¯t take half an hour to break through the county. Following the flow of Luoshui upstream from there to the outskirts of Changsha City, where the Ning Army was stationed, the waterway distance was only a bit over a hundred and forty li, which could be traversed by boat in less than half a day. By noon the day after next, they would be able to launch their attack on the rear of the Ning Army. With the convenience provided by the waterway and the swift transfer of the large force, it¡¯s possible that by the time the army arrived behind the Ning forces, the opponent may not have even noticed. Then, launching a surprise attack on their encampment would naturally be readily achieved with ease. As long as things went smoothly for Huang Xuan, Sun Siwen inside the city of Changsha, upon seeing the chaos in the Ning Army¡¯s rear, would also command his well-prepared troops to strike out. In such a pincer movement from both front and back, it could be possible to defeat the remaining eighty thousand troops of Xiang Duan in a single battle. ¡°` Even if they couldn¡¯t annihilate the opponent in one fell swoop, killing thirty to fifty thousand Ning soldiers would not pose any difficulty whatsoever. And with the Ning Army suffering losses and Huang Xuan cutting off their retreat, once their food and fodder run short, even if some remaining troops staunchly defend the camp, they would not hold out for ten days or half a month. Being utterly vanquished would just be a matter of time. The early morning sun rose, casting a golden glow everywhere. Bathed in the vibrant sunlight, Huang Xuan, who shared some of Lu Yuan¡¯s thoughts, revealed a hint of a smile on his face, ¡°The destruction of the Ning Army will take place within these two days.¡± After the fleet entered the Min Waters, the flying boats dashed forward, covering a thousand miles in a day. The moment to break the situation was fast approaching. ¡­ While Huang Xuan led the fleet rushing through the Min Waters toward Fengling county, just a few hundred miles away in Jiangxia City, Lu Yuan was also standing atop a mountain, gazing at the Yangtze River and looking southward, with a smile also spreading across his face. ¡°After besieging the city with fierce attacks for ten days, the Ning and Southern Sea armies suffered too many casualties to sustain themselves and abandoned the city to flee. The remnants of the Ning Army and the survivors from Nanhai Country tried to escape by boat in the night but were discovered by Qingyunzi, who took the opportunity to lead his elite troops and the Inborn from within the army to raid and slaughter them. In the end, you halted a small portion, and the rest all scattered in flight?¡± Lu Yuan, recalling the news just received from the Avatar Qingyunzi, thousands of miles away in the Lingnan Region conveyed through divine thoughts, couldn¡¯t help but feel immensely pleased. When he had first deployed Huang Xuan as a surprise force, he had not fulfilled the Ning people¡¯s wishes by dispatching reinforcements from Lingnan to aid the Chu forces at Dongting, leaving their strength fully intact, nor did they simply sit idle under the walls of Nanhai City. Following Lu Yuan¡¯s order not to divide the forces and for the main army to remain at Southern Sea and continue the siege, Lan Cai¡¯er, after consulting with Qingyunzi, decided to adopt the strategy previously used in the attack on Yulin. With their side having three more Inborn than the Ning Army, including one whose strength was comparable to a second-stage Inborn Grandmaster, and with their overwhelming military strength, they launched another ferocious attack on Nanhai City. Under the onslaught of the five Inborn and nearly three hundred thousand soldiers attacking day and night, the allied forces of Ning and Nanhai Country could only last ten days before succumbing to their grievous losses. Especially on the side of Nanhai Country. With the military strength severely diminished and the army ranks filled with inexperienced civilian workers, their combat capability was terribly weak. Under the fierce attacks of the Inborn Grandmasters and the Chu elite, within a mere ten days, Chu forces stormed the city walls seven times, and three times nearly lost a section of the wall. Although, with the help of the Ning Army, they barely managed to retake it, the ten days of intense fighting and the slaughtering by the Inborn Grandmasters resulted in over thirty thousand casualties out of the hundred thousand Southern Sea forces within the city. The remaining troops, due to these heavy losses, were low in morale and there were even multiple mutinies, with attempts to open the city gates and surrender to end the battle. Although these attempts were subsequently suppressed, the Ning Army also lost over ten thousand men in this war, leaving only a little over twenty thousand soldiers, whose morale was equally low. Given such circumstances, even the dimmest leaders from Nanhai Country and Ning could see that Nanhai City was indefensible. In the end, to conserve their strength and minimize losses, the two countries finally chose to escape under the cover of night, leaving the area by boat. However, while some wanted to flee, there were those who were unwilling to go. A portion of the high-ranking officials from Nanhai Country, who hailed from local influential families, secretly relayed this information to the Chu forces outside the city, resulting in a massive collaboration and a night of slaughter. Qingyunzi personally selected thirty thousand elite troops, who, alongside over ten thousand defected troops from within the Southern Sea Army and a section of the Southern Sea Navy unwilling to abandon their homeland, pursued the fleeing soldiers from both countries. After a chase and slaughter, some of the battered forces from the two countries got away, while others were intercepted. And later, as Qingyunzi led his troops back that very night, the unguarded Nanhai City finally fell, and the Chu Army smoothly entered and took over the defense. With that, both Su Country and Nanhai Country were vanquished, and Chu now controlled all of this land, claiming unification over Lingnan. The Southern Expedition had been a complete victory, and it could be described as perfect. ¡°` Chapter 856 - Chapter 856: Chapter 365: Triple Attack on Ning Chapter 856: Chapter 365: Triple Attack on Ning Looking solely at the underlying strength, Nanhai Country actually ranks as the foremost among the three nations of Lingnan. Its territory spans only one prefecture, a mere five thousand miles. Its army numbers no more than one hundred thousand, including sixty thousand infantry and forty thousand naval forces, and not a single Inborn Grandmaster among them. From a military standpoint alone, this is indeed a small nation, and on the weaker side among small nations at that. However, if one disregards military strength and considers other aspects such as agriculture, commerce, and economy, one will find that with a population registry of eight hundred thousand and a population exceeding four million, Nanhai Country actually qualifies for the status of a great nation. After all, one of the foundational conditions for a dominant nation is merely a population of ten million. With over four million people, almost half that of a dominant nation, such an underlying strength naturally qualifies for the title of a great nation. The reason Nanhai Country is currently labeled a small nation, even considered at the bottom of small nations, is simply due to the absence of an Inborn Grandmaster¡¯s protection, which leads others to undervalue it. But if the country possessed a Grandmaster, then leveraging the small grain-producing delta plains near Nanhai City, as well as the maritime trade benefits of the two provinces and two regions near its ports, the country¡¯s finances and population could, in times of dire need, sustain an army of four hundred thousand permanent soldiers. With this four-hundred-thousand-strong army, coupled with two or three Inborn Grandmasters, even if placed among the nations of the world, it would rank as a first-tier great nation just below the dominant nations. Even when facing a grand dominant nation, with such strength, it might well be capable of battle. When Chu State was newly founded, Lu Yuan had only just over two hundred thousand soldiers, and the population within the country was about six million. Yet, with his and Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s combined two parts Inborn status, did they not compel the then weakened ruler of Ning Country to concede and recognize the independence of Chu State? Now, as times change, just a decade has passed, and Chu State has become a dominant nation, even pressuring the established dominant Ning Country into successive retreats, faintly suggestive of an imminent unification of Yangzhou. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 Nanhai Country¡¯s underlying strength far exceeds that of Changsha State when Lu Yuan started his rise. Should it remedy the Inborn shortfall and develop for a few years, it would become the most likely among the three nations of the Southsea to replicate the rise of Changsha State against the odds and unify Lingnan. If Nanhai Country truly succeeds in unifying the three nations of Lingnan, acquiring the land of five prefectures and forty departments, along with a population of over six million, a new ¡°Chu State¡± will emerge to the south of Chu¡ªLingnan Great State. This Lingnan Great State would vie with Lu Yuan¡¯s Chu State for dominion over Jiangnan and even meddle in affairs to the southwest, attempting to annex the remaining countries of Dali and Nanzhao to complete the conquest puzzle. With the remaining four to five million people from Dali and Nanzhao, as long as the Lingnan Great State assimilates them, it could immediately achieve a population of ten million, govern eight prefectures, raise a million soldiers, and claim supremacy in the world. Indeed, with the territory of Yangzhou having expanded through several rounds, it now covers about eighteen prefectures, enough to sustain three small dominant nations already. The depth of its foundational strength ranks among the leading in the Nine Provinces. This also signifies that if Chu State succeeds in unifying Yangzhou, its national power will soar to rank among the top three in the world, with a population close to forty million, sustaining an army of two to three million soldiers and over twenty Inborn Grandmasters, while its lands would span one hundred thousand miles. Among the various nations, only Liang Country, which has unified sixteen prefectures of Qingzhou, could compare to it. When the time comes to raise an army and head north, competing for the Central State, the chances of victory would greatly increase. This is precisely why, in order not to allow a third Lingnan dominant nation to rise, Lu Yuan, after conquering Su Country, immediately forwent the stronger but more remotely situated Song Country. He instead directed Lan Cai¡¯er to head east, instructing her to work with Qingyunzi to eliminate Nanhai Country. The reason, of course, is that Nanhai Country, already having two Inborn Grandmasters domestically with Ning Country¡¯s help, had become a massive threat to Chu State. If Nanhai Country were allowed to secure its footing and then Ning Country, drawing upon its power, set up a competitive arena in Lingnan against Chu State, it¡¯s possible, with perseverance, that this ¡°Lingnan Dominant Nation¡± could emerge. However, this dominant nation might not be known as Nanhai Country but as Ning Country. Lingnan would be annexed by Ning Country. After all, Nanhai Country has long been a vassal to Ning Country, effectively a puppet. And as for Song Country, it was originally a part of Ning Country that had broken away. The ruler of Song, Xie Ning, from the Coastal Aristocratic Family, in a situation with bleak prospects, is highly likely to opt for reintegration into Ning Country. Only Su Country remains, weak, with a mere million people; should Ning Country wish it, like Chu State easily vanquished Su Country, it could be effortlessly destroyed. Thus, the unification of Lingnan could occur almost overnight. Precisely owing to these numerous advantages, when Bai Yian earlier proposed abandoning Lingnan and fully retreating to Jiangdong, the plan met with rejection from Shen Qiu and others. Because if Ning Country plans properly, it indeed has a high probability of annexing Lingnan. And once Lingnan is in hand, with the financial and population resources of the area, Ning Country could feasibly raise an army of four to five hundred thousand soldiers, battling Chu State in an arena and restraining nearly half of Chu State¡¯s military force in Lingnan. Even with well-made plans, it could incite the nations of Nanzhao and Dali to join forces with Ning Country, attacking Chu State¡¯s southwestern lands and creating chaos in Chu¡¯s heartland, opening another battlefield. With such a three-front war, enemies at both front and rear, Chu State, stretched thin on all sides, would naturally struggle to maintain itself; defeat would be inevitable. With such grand visions at stake, Shen Qiu naturally did not wish to give up on Lingnan, unwilling to forsake ten thousand miles of territory, over six million people, and the hope for supremacy. But now, these prospects have all turned into illusions. Lu Yuan, having already seen through Ning Country¡¯s schemes, had long mobilized the two armies of Lingnan, striking like thunder, successively conquering Su and Nanhai Countries. At this point, the land spanning ten thousand miles from these two countries has been integrated into Great Chu, and nearly five million of its residents enlisted for Chu State. Just give it two or three years to consolidate, and Chu State can add another three hundred thousand soldiers; the standing military force officially entering the million-strong elite, ranking amongst the first-tier dominant nations. Chapter 857 - Chapter 857: Chapter 365: Triple Attack on Ning_2 Chapter 857: Chapter 365: Triple Attack on Ning_2 ¡°However, this is still not enough.¡± After organizing his thoughts about Nanhai Country, Lu Yuan then unfolded a map, which displayed the entire landscape of Yangzhou with its mountains and rivers, cities, and settlements, all spread out before him. In some respects, Nanhai Country could actually be considered a hub. Located in South Sea Prefecture, it borders Dongting to the north, Yulin to the west, Jianan to the east, Yuzhang to the northeast, and the boundless Southsea to the south. This location can truly be described as a crossroads connecting five regions. If one holds this prefecture, whether marching north, east, west, or south, one can strike out in all directions. There are convenient sea routes to the east, west, and south, allowing for easy transportation of troops and supplies by ship. Historically, any Jiangnan army aiming to strategize over Lingnan would always first target Southsea. Likewise, any Lingnan country looking to expand northward must first seize Southsea. In previous years, when Jinghai Country plotted rebellion, their forces marched north and then east, reaching the gates of Nanhai City, which illustrates this point. Now as Lu Yuan wages war on Lingnan, his initial attack on Southsea and the fact that Ning Country sent a large army to its aid, follow the same logic. The importance of Southsea is self-evident. By now, Lu Yuan had conquered Nanhai Country and claimed the territory of South Sea Prefecture, naturally including the expansions to the north and east. ¡°To the northeast of Nanhai Country is the Meiling Road. Back when I was still a hunter in the mountains, selling furs in Southsea, I traveled this road. It leads directly to Fu City in Luling, being the first major route from Lingnan into Yuzhang, through which a large army can pass. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï To the east of Nanhai Country is Yanshi Road, which leads into Jian¡¯an County. Alternatively, by taking the sea route, one can reach the coastal areas of Jian¡¯an. Advancing through these three points, Lingnan troops can enter Yuzhang and Jian¡¯an, disrupting the very heart of Ning Country, undermining its foundations, and countering its fortress retreat strategy.¡± Lu Yuan stared at the map, his mind constantly pondering. With the onset of spring, the plan to recruit fifty thousand troops, initiated by Shen Qiu, was fervently underway in the core regions of Ning Country. However, being short on time and even though recruitment had started everywhere, only around ten thousand recruits had been enlisted within a month. But, if delayed for another two or three months, with the resources of Ning Country, it wouldn¡¯t take long to muster all fifty thousand. By then, once the recruitment was complete, and a few more months spent on training, with the civilian workers having finished building fortresses along the borders, Chu State¡¯s ambitions to invade the heartland of Ning would be as difficult as ascending to heaven. Even if they managed to break through, countless bloody battles later, the lands of Ning would be devastated and soaked in blood. Such scenes are not what Lu Yuan wished to see. Hence, his command to Qingyunzi and others to swiftly eliminate Southsea was based on the intent to strike at Ning¡¯s territory and disrupt its formation before their preparations were complete. Now that Nanhai Country had fallen, and the last Lingnan country, Song Country, also stood watched over by Han Hu in Yulin County with a hundred thousand troops, unable to cause any significant trouble. And in the region of Dongting, Huang Xuan had led troops to Changsha and would soon achieve results, not requiring Lingnan¡¯s forces. Thus, these idle troops could naturally be allocated to another use. ¡°Earlier, I forced the army to take cities, causing heavy losses to the various military divisions of Lingnan. According to Qingyunzi¡¯s reports, out of the two hundred and seventy thousand soldiers that participated in the siege, over forty thousand died in ten days of fierce fighting, with another thirty thousand seriously wounded, resulting in the direct loss of seventy thousand troops. The remaining two hundred thousand also had many light injuries, and their morale was somewhat affected, necessitating time for rest and readjustment. In this condition, it is impossible to fully mobilize this body of troops. However, there are still twenty thousand troops left in the various locations of Southsea to suppress local unrest. Their condition and morale are still quite good and they can be used¡­¡± Lu Yuan tapped on his resources and gradually made his decision. ¡°Appoint Queen Lan Cai¡¯er as the Military Governor of Southsea and the Civil Governor of Lingnan, commanding eighty thousand troops to garrison Lingnan, pacify the three counties of Lingnan, and monitor Song Country. Appoint the Protector true person Qingyunzi as the Crusader of Jianan, with Li River as the deputy, commanding one hundred thousand troops, and call for troops from the land and sea towards the territories of Ning¡¯s Jianan. Appoint Li Xiong, the Duke of Kunhai, as the Southern Yuzhang Crusader, with Protector General Han Liang as the deputy, leading forty thousand troops through Meiling Road to subjugate the areas around Luling Prefecture. Coordinate with the forces of Chu Wei in the two prefectures of Dongting, Luyang, and Hengyang, and the Lingnu Division to annihilate the invading Ning armies in Dongting. The moment the order is given, set out immediately.¡± Musing over the arrangements, Lu Yuan immediately used his mental connection to communicate with Qingyunzi, directing him to deploy the armies. When he had originally ordered the armies to move south, Lu Yuan had decreed Qingyunzi to be the commander-in-chief of all Lingnan forces, even placing him above Queen Lan Cai¡¯er in the army hierarchy. Later, when dispatching Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s division to reinforce Southsea, and through the sending of messengers to convey the imperial decree, this arrangement was reaffirmed, and Qingyunzi was given discretionary powers almost equal to that of the monarch himself. By doing this, the intent was to control the armies from a remote location conveniently via this avatar, so that they would act according to his wishes. Therefore, with Lu Yuan overseeing the entire situation, he alone could observe the military engagements in Jiangxia, Changsha, and Lingnan, effortlessly command millions of soldiers without any delay or oversight, as if moving pieces on a game board before his eyes. At this moment, with just one command, and through Qingyunzi¡¯s authority, he could mobilize the Lingnan armies at the fastest speed and at the best timing. Just like now. Nanhai City had just fallen; even Shangguan Ming¡¯s remnants and the remnants of Nanhai Country had likely just escaped the city and hadn¡¯t left the nearby sea areas. But in Jiangxia City, thousands of miles away, Lu Yuan was already informed of all the details. And the Ning Army, there, might still be kept in the dark. The detached armies of Ning Country, sent to attack Chu¡¯s two prefectures of Luyang and Hengyang, would have likely just arrived under the prefecture cities, still constructing their camps, with no preparations for siege in order. Chapter 858 - Chapter 858: Chapter 365: Triple Attack on Ning_3 Chapter 858: Chapter 365: Triple Attack on Ning_3 If a detached army were sent northward at this time, directly entering into the Prefecture of Yu Zhang Lu Ling, it could sever the retreat routes of these two detached forces. Afterwards, whether it was to defend the southern counties of Yuzhang, blocking the retreat paths of Ning¡¯s two detached armies, Or after capturing Luling County, dispatch troops westward to launch a surprise attack on the rear of the two Ning detached armies, as Huang Xuan had done, coordinating with the defenders of Hengyang and Luyang counties for a pincer attack, aiming to completely annihilate the Ning forces on both routes¡ªeither would be excellent. Over there, Qingyunzi could also advance by both land and water, leading a main force of a hundred thousand troops, striking directly towards the more vulnerable Jian¡¯an County of Ning Country. Previously, Ning had left a force of two hundred thousand soldiers within the country, with four Inborns dividing their forces to defend various locations. However, out of these two hundred thousand troops, there were fifty thousand naval forces and fifty thousand standing soldiers stationed in Guangling County to guard against the threat from Liang State. No, out of that fifty thousand naval forces, ten thousand had been dispatched to the Southsea and were now adrift at sea. The remaining fifty thousand standing soldiers were garrisoned in Linhai County, where the capital was located, guarding this core area. The remaining fifty thousand were divided with twenty-four thousand in Yuzhang Prefecture and twenty-six thousand in Jian¡¯an County, all county soldiers from various local prefectures and counties. As for the four Inborn Grandmasters, one was with the naval forces, stationed along the Yangtze River to guard against Liang State. The remaining three were located in Guangling, Linhai, and Jian¡¯an counties, respectively. The last Yuzhang Prefecture, being close to the front line of the battlefield and with ten Inborns from Ning nearby, already had sufficient high-end combat power, so there was no need to allocate an additional Inborn for defense. Originally, Shen Qiu stayed in the main camp at Pengli of Yuzhang as a reserve with a hundred thousand troops and two Inborns, essentially akin to the defending forces of Yuzhang Prefecture, ready to support on all fronts at any moment. However, these defending forces had been dispatched elsewhere due to the demands of the situation, resulting in an all-out effort at this point. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.?¦Ï Consequently, the hundred and fifty thousand new soldiers freshly recruited by the Ning Army were just entering camp, their combat strength not yet established, essentially akin to civilian workers. They were not only of little use, but once on the battlefield, they might even become a liability, as the Southsea Army clearly demonstrated. The Yuzhang and Jian¡¯an counties of Ning Country had in fact become the most vulnerable. Jian¡¯an only had twenty-six thousand soldiers, all local prefectural and county troops, with only a single ordinary Inborn defending it. Qingyunzi, leading his forces from the Li River, commanded a hundred thousand troops and was accompanied by several thousand naval forces from the recently surrendered Southsea Country. Gathering some civilian ships, it was possible to dispatch a detached army to bypass the mountain ridges and passes on the way and directly attack Jian¡¯an from both land and sea. With such an advantage, before Ning Country could react, perhaps a swift victory could be achieved with the speed of thunder. As for Yuzhang Prefecture. To the south, Li Xiong, Chu Wei, and the Spiritual woman coordinated with each other; in the middle, Huang Xuan and Sun Siwen launched a pincer attack; to the north, Lu Yuan personally kept an eye on Shen Qiu. Provided that all three fronts were activated, then if all went well, the three hundred thousand troops at the front line of Ning Army might dissipate overnight, turning to ashes. At most, Shen Qiu would be able to escape back to Ning via the naval forces¡¯ protection and save a hundred thousand troops. But even so, the collapse of the two hundred thousand troops in the south and center, along with the fall of three Inborns, would be a huge blow to Ning Country¡ªone that cuts deep. And with so many troops lost in one fell swoop, the hundred thousand remnants led by Shen Qiu alone would not be enough to defend Yuzhang Prefecture. Lu Yuan would only need to march east, and Yuzhang could be easily taken. Once Yuzhang is lost, Ning Country and the northern Xiangyang Prefecture would become an enclave, hard to connect. Therefore, if Yang Jing, leading the troops of Xiangyang, did not wish to be surrounded and annihilated, retreating along with the naval forces would be the only option. Thus, Xiangyang Prefecture could also be easily captured. With the loss of Jian¡¯an, Yuzhang, and Xiangyang prefectures, Ning Country would lose half its territory, leaving only Guangling and Linhai counties, a mere ten thousand li of land. According to the figures published by Ning Country, Guangling County had a population of three million and Linhai County five million; the combined population of these two counties was just eight million, already half that of the former Ning. And following successive defeats, the soldiers who could flee back to the country were estimated to be just over two hundred thousand. Merging these survivors with the domestic forces would amount to a maximum of around four hundred thousand. With the land of two counties, a population of eight million, and roughly four hundred thousand remnants, as well as possibly around ten remaining Inborns, the strength would still be considerable, but it would have completely fallen from the status of a hegemon, no longer able to contend with Chu State. In the future, after Chu State had digested Xiangyang, Yuzhang, Jian¡¯an, and the various counties of Lingnan, in two or three years they could accumulate enough strength to completely annihilate Ning Country. With the remnants of Ning¡¯s strength, under the significant rise of Chu¡¯s national power, even if they defended with all might, they could at most hold out for another three to five years, but their demise would be inevitable. ¡°The struggle for supremacy in Yangzhou ends with me having the upper hand. The ten-year strategy to unify Jiangnan has now established its foundation, completion imminent.¡± Lu Yuan reviewed the battlefield situations across Jiangnan and the changes between Chu and Ning, and after comparison, his mood greatly improved. His confidence in the future was bursting. After several consecutive risks and victories, Chu State finally accomplished the feat of a newly promoted hegemon defeating an old hegemon, taking a key step in establishing dominion over Yangzhou. In the future¡¯s struggle for supremacy with the lords of the world, he would be one step ahead of the rest, following Liang State. In the aftermath of this battle, figures like Zhou Ning would no longer be able to speak of themselves in the same breath as Chu State. When discussing Chu State in the world, it would only be compared with Qing Liang. ¡°And as for my cultivation, just wait until I defeat Ning Country and seize half its territory, combined with the accumulation of Lingnan, my Qi Luck would have doubled. Perhaps by the time summer turns to autumn, I may step into the realm of Gathering Two Qi.¡± Thinking of this, Lu Yuan felt his heart surge with excitement. With his current cultivation, he was already considered the first among the cultivators of the Nine Provinces after those had left. But if he made a breakthrough to Gathering Two Qi, then even including those cultivators heading towards Northern Dark City who had not yet begun their Ascension, he could be regarded as the first in the world. From the six years of Front Yue Hongdao, when I began my cultivation of Dao Law, to now, the eleventh year of Shenwu, after a total of fifteen years, my journey through Immortal Method was about to ascend to the pinnacle of this world. Chapter 859 - Chapter 859: Chapter 366: Entering the Bifurcation Again Chapter 859: Chapter 366: Entering the Bifurcation Again ¡°` Having settled the plan for the three-pronged supply routes, Lu Yuan wasted no time in implementing it. Qingyunzi, Huang Xuan, Li Xiong and the forces of the three administrative regions of Changsha, Hengyang, and Luyang didn¡¯t need his attention; the six divisions¡¯ Commanders would act accordingly to the plan. But for Jiangxia, Lu Yuan needed to provide personal assistance. Shen Qiu¡¯s main force still had a substantial number of troops left, with as many as one hundred and ten thousand just in the barracks outside the city. Given the ongoing collapse of the Ning Army on various fronts, these one hundred and ten thousand soldiers had become the strongest force of Ning Country, and even the only main force left. If possible, Lu Yuan naturally did not want this army to return to Ning Country. Otherwise, when the time came for him to launch the war of annihilation, these one hundred and ten thousand men might become Chu State¡¯s biggest hindrance. Thus, even though he clearly knew that there were seventy thousand naval troops in Jiangxia and that another forty thousand could be urgently called from within the country to assist, not to mention evacuating these one hundred and ten thousand men, even if all the Ning forces north of Xiangyang were to retreat, the shipping capacity would be more than enough. But knowing that was one thing, and whether it was feasible to act on it was another. Regardless of the probability of success, trying to constrain, delay, or even eliminate this Ning force was never a wrong move. Even if Lu Yuan only managed to hold up the Ning troops in Jiangxia for a while longer, to buy time for Huang Xuan to defeat Xiang Duan¡¯s forces near Changsha and then regroup and launch an assault into the heart of Yuzhang, cutting off the Ning force¡¯s retreat route on land, that would be excellent. Cutting off Shen Qiu¡¯s Ning Army¡¯s land retreat route wouldn¡¯t necessarily trap them completely, as they¡¯d still have water routes. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À¦Ï.§ã¦Ï But once the land route was gone, their morale would surely falter. At that point, Lu Yuan could order the Chu naval forces to launch a fierce attack on the Ning naval forces, and under the disruption of their morale, the Ning¡¯s defeat was bound to worsen significantly. With one retreat route cut off and another under threat, how could the Ning troops hold out for long? Once Lu Yuan reorganized the troops in the city, and attacked the Ning people outside with full force, with no way to retreat, shaken morale, and even the scarcity of food and fodder, there was a good chance of breaking through the Ning¡¯s last main force. Even Lu Yuan didn¡¯t need to annihilate this force completely; as long as he wiped out forty or fifty thousand men, it would be a profit. With various Ning forces suffering heavy losses, and the imminent loss of three regions in the country reducing the population under their control significantly, eliminating more of their elite forces now would mean that Ning would have to pay a much heavier price to replenish its forces in the future. Moreover, the replenished forces would just be new soldiers, lacking much combat strength compared to the current experienced troops, making a wide difference in overall combat capability. Killing more of the Ning forces now would mean less resistance when attacking Ning Country in the future, resulting in less damage to the Jiangdong region, and allowing Great Chu to accumulate more resources for the Northern Expedition. Therefore, embracing this idea, after commanding various divisions, on the second day, Lu Yuan led his troops out of the city. ¡­ Three miles away from the Ning Army Camp. Tens of thousands of Chu troops had arrayed themselves, with banners fluttering in the wind, the earth a vast expanse of bleak yellow. Lu Yuan, mounted on a white horse, led a group of officers at the front of the formation, his gaze fixed on the distant Ning encampment. However, facing the Ning camp about a hundred steps away, more than ten Chu soldiers who had gone to challenge them were calling out back and forth. But within the Ning camp, there was no response at all. Even after they yelled for a while, a dozen arrows flew towards them, startling the provoking Chu soldiers and causing them to quickly flee back on their horses. ¡°Your Majesty, the enemy is still hunkered down and not coming out; it¡¯s difficult to draw them out,¡± said one Chu general next to Lu Yuan, turning his head towards him, helplessly. ¡°No matter, let them huddle if that¡¯s what they want; their days are numbered anyway. When it comes time, these turtles will have no say in whether they can leave,¡± Lu Yuan replied unconcernedly as he glanced at the troops being driven back. Then, turning away from them, he asked, ¡°How¡¯s the situation at Luo Kou Du?¡± An officer responsible for coordinating that effort responded, ¡°Last night, twenty thousand naval forces already left the camp. Taking advantage of the darkness, they hurriedly descended with forty thousand soldiers from the city to launch a surprise attack on Luo Kou Du. Counting the time, Luo Kou Du should already be taken by now, and we should have received word from the naval forces.¡± As they were talking, suddenly a clear eagle cry pierced the sky, and a large eagle over a yard long shot through the heavens and sped towards them, swooping in with a gust of wind and landing in front of Lu Yuan¡¯s white horse. The sudden arrival of this fierce bird startled everyone¡¯s white horses into trembling, almost ready to flee. Fortunately, Lu Yuan¡¯s thoughts moved, encompassing the many fine horses, and he instantly soothed them. Afterward, he turned toward the eagle in front of him. This imposing bird, looking every bit as fierce as a predator, was the spirit eagle Lu Yuan had obtained from the Snowy Wilderness in exchange for a hundred elixirs. This eagle could fly five thousand miles a day; even when communicating between Chu and the snow plains, it would only take three to five days, becoming Chu¡¯s most relied upon means of communication. Passing messages to and fro was extremely convenient. Lu Yuan reached out to take a small bronze cylinder, attached to a string around the willingly presented neck of the eagle. Opened it, and pulled out a small sheet of paper, then glanced over its contents. After reading the message, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but smile, approvingly saying, ¡°Good, the naval forces are progressing smoothly. Just moments ago, they took Luo Kou Du, cutting off the Ning¡¯s water retreat. ¡± ¡°Congratulations, Your Majesty; the downfall of Ning is imminent.¡± ¡°Heaven favors Great Chu as well.¡± Hearing this, the surrounding generals couldn¡¯t help but offer their congratulations. No wonder they were so delighted, the position of Luo Kou Du was extremely critical. Within a hundred miles of Jiangxia, besides the ferry point below Jiangxia City, the only other ferry capable of handling large ships was Luo Kou Du, a hundred miles to the east. ¡°` Chapter 860 - Chapter 860: Chapter 366: Entering the Bifurcation Again_2 Chapter 860: Chapter 366: Entering the Bifurcation Again_2 This ferry crossing was located on the border of Chu Ning and had previously belonged to Chu State. Inside the ferry, in addition to over a dozen naval patrol ships, there were also constantly a thousand soldiers and horses on guard. Later, when the war between the two countries broke out, the Ning army came pressing over, and naturally, the ferry crossing couldn¡¯t hold up. The stationed troops in the harbor had already retreated early, in accordance with military orders. And after the Ning people took over, they did not neglect this ferry either. As everyone knows, transporting grain by waterway, whether it¡¯s carrying capacity, speed, or cost, is far superior to transporting grain by land. If supplies were to be sent from Yuzhang to the Jiangxia front line, considering the supply distribution center to be the capital of the county, Nanchang, then starting from this city, to reach the main camp on the front line, the journey would be about six hundred li. To transport grain for six hundred li to supply an army of over a hundred thousand on the front line, at least two to three hundred thousand civilian workers would have to be mobilized and tens of thousands of oxen, donkeys, mules, and horses would need to be conscripted to barely meet the demand. Moreover, it could take a month to deliver grain from the city to the front line, or at least half a month if it¡¯s fast. If grain were transported by water, then only a few hundred ships would be needed, along with occasionally conscripting over ten thousand civilian workers to help with moving supplies when the boat fleet arrived at the ferry. Moreover, with a direct journey by boat and a favorable wind, it might be possible to arrive in just one day. Between these two ways of transporting grain, it is clear which one incurs greater loss, is safer, and is more efficient. Therefore, since the war began, the grain and supplies of Ning Country have been mainly transported by water. And naturally, transporting grain by ships can¡¯t avoid the need for a port. The ferry that is the closest to the Jiangxia front line and also controlled by the Ning Army is none other than the previously abandoned Luo Kou Du by the Chu army. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Since being occupied by the Ning Army, this ferry has been established as a logistical base, with dozens of ships arriving from the hinterlands of Ning Country every day to unload their cargo here. Then, arranged from this ferry, vehicles, horses, and manpower deliver the goods the remaining hundred li to the front line camp. Because this location is critical for the provision of money and grain, even when the Ning Army was short on soldiers, it still specially arranged for over ten thousand defenders and five thousand naval troops to defend this harbor, which shows the importance of this place. In the past, Lu Yuan was also aware that this area was crucial, a vulnerable spot for the Ning people. But at that time, even if he sent troops to launch a surprise attack here and captured it, he wouldn¡¯t have been able to hold it for long. This is because nearby the port, there was a large number of Ning troops, who, upon learning that their supply line was stolen, could at any time divert tens of thousands of soldiers and horses to come and take it back. And the Chu troops in the city of Jiangxia, blocked by countless Ning camps, also couldn¡¯t afford to cross a hundred li to come to support. On the Yangtze River above, the Ning naval forces also blockaded the river surface, so rashly attempting to launch a surprise attack on the harbor would not only fail to cut off the Ning army¡¯s money and grain supply and obstruct their retreat route. Instead, it would trap their own military strength in the port for nothing, allowing the Ning people to devour them. In addition to the waterways, the Ning people could also transport grain by land. Although the cost might be a bit higher, being on home ground, safety was assured. Even if Chu State blocked the waterway, the Ning people wouldn¡¯t fall into a grain shortage. Therefore, attacking Luo Kou Du at that time was not only unfruitful but also extremely risky, so naturally, Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t waste effort on it. But now was different. Shen Qiu was about to break through the Ning Army in Changsha, and then he could continue with a light force and fast march, directly inserting into the rear of Ning Country and seize the empty capital of Yuzhang, Nanchang. If this feat was accomplished, the Ning Army¡¯s land retreat route would be lost, cutting off one avenue of escape. Then Lu Yuan could attack Luo Kou Du, station a large army there to defend, and further cut off the Ning Army¡¯s water retreat route. He wouldn¡¯t need the tens of thousands of detached soldiers to hold out for long or do it very well. As long as the twenty thousand naval troops and forty thousand Forbidden Army could hold out for a month, it would be enough to trap the Ning Army to death. Because according to the spies¡¯ reports, the grain stores in the Ning Army Camp could basically maintain a half-month¡¯s worth of supplies, while Luo Kou Du sent a batch of replenishments every ten days to ensure that the army did not lack anything. So, if the Chu Army blocked Luo Kou Du for a month, the Ning Army with only enough grain storage for half a month, no matter how they conserved food and fodder, could at most last about twenty days. Exceeding twenty days, they would fall into a dire shortage of grain. And if it exceeded one month, then the Ning Army there would be like the Zhao Army in the Battle of Changping, starving to the point of delirium, turning on each other to survive. In such a situation, it would not be difficult for the Chu Army to consume the Ning Army. Even better, it might be possible to directly absorb the opposing hundred thousand Ning troops. Given that the Chu Army wasn¡¯t short of grain, and also being from the same region of Jiangnan and Yangzhou, as long as these Ning troops surrendered, within two months¡¯ time they could be successfully received, reorganized into the Chu Army, and brought onto the battlefield for use. This was undoubtedly a huge benefit. With this foreseeable future in sight, Lu Yuan and the other generals were naturally overjoyed. In their minds, the Ning Army before them had already become a turtle in a jar, skeletal remains in a tomb, doomed to escape. ¡°Although Luo Kou Du has been taken, we are not yet at the point where we can rest easy. In the camp of the Ning Army, there are still one hundred and ten thousand soldiers and horses. If they pour out and violently attack Luo Kou Du, it¡¯s not impossible they could take it back. Therefore, to completely sever the Ning Army¡¯s route of retreat, we in Jiangxia must not slacken our efforts either. Spread my command, starting from today, all ten thousand cavalry troops in the city must scatter and disperse around the Ning camps, keeping a close watch on the Ning people. If they make any moves to leave the camp, immediately launch an attack to hinder their progress. At the same time, other infantry forces in the city must come out to fight every day to tie up the Ning Army¡¯s attention, coordinating with the cavalry¡¯s actions. I want to turn these hundred thousand Ning troops into a complete turtle, shrinking inside their shell and not thinking of leaving this place.¡± Lu Yuan looked around at his generals and gave his orders sharply. Chapter 861 - Chapter 861: Chapter 366: Entering the Bifurcation Again_3 Chapter 861: Chapter 366: Entering the Bifurcation Again_3 ¡°Yes!¡± All the generals responded in unison, obeying the command. Thus, without having engaged in battle, Lu Yuan led his troops back to the city, after which more than ten thousand cavalry were released. In groups of a thousand per team and a hundred per unit, they dispersed within dozens of miles around the Ning Army camp, tightly monitoring and blocking all possible retreat paths of their opponent. Naturally, this move by the Chu army also caught the attention of the Ning Army. ¡­ In the Ning Army Camp. Shen Qiu felt somewhat annoyed upon receiving news of the Chu army¡¯s invitation to battle and subsequent withdrawal to the city. Before his mood could settle, a rush of horse hooves outside the camp stirred up countless disturbances. When he sent someone to investigate the matter, soldiers rushed in to report before he could even get clear information. They simply stated that the Chu army had widely scattered their cavalry and were now blocking all major routes outside the camp, seemingly intent on trapping them completely inside. Upon hearing this, Shen Qiu¡¯s eyebrows twitched slightly, sensing a conspiracy on the part of the Chu people, which caused some unease in his heart. He quickly summoned all the generals in the camp to inquire among them, seeking to discern the Chu army¡¯s purpose. However, after discussing, the generals found themselves without sufficient clues and unclear on the Chu people¡¯s intentions, leaving them all puzzled. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Thus, after consideration, they could only suggest reinforcing the camp¡¯s defenses to prevent any surprise attacks from the Chu and dispatching scouts to the surrounding areas in an attempt to capture some Chu cavalry and thereby uncover their plans. This was merely the most basic response, entirely a passive strategy, naturally dissatisfying to Shen Qiu. But other than this prudent suggestion, he had no better method. In the army, there were different opinions. For instance, Marquis Wuan Bai Yian had not yet abandoned his extremely conservative strategy. After hearing of the Chu army¡¯s strange movements, he quickly lost his composure and requested an audience with Shen Qiu, expressing that the Chu people had been calm for months, but now this sudden change must signify a major conspiracy. Now that they were blockading the area, it was surely to conceal some information. If they continued to stay in this location, once the Chu army¡¯s preparations were complete, the entire army could be trapped in a deathly situation. Therefore, for the safety of the army, they should take advantage of the moment before the Chu army¡¯s arrangements were set and their plans just initiated and immediately lead the army to retreat back to Yuzhang. After all, Ning had already failed to capture Jiangxia, and the plan for Shen Qiu¡¯s forces to launch a surprise attack on the Chu army¡¯s hinterland had also become an illusion due to the defeat on the Lingnan battlefield. Ning Country could gain no further advantage over Chu State. Given this, it made no sense to keep forces on the front lines, depleting money and provisions, merely wasting national strength. This not only undermined the country¡¯s foundation but also brought the risk of collapse to the army; such risks could no longer be taken. Retreating the army back to Jiangdong as soon as possible to preserve the current strength, then integrating all resources to prepare for a long war with the Chu people was the most cautious and sensible strategy at present. However, Bai Yian¡¯s words did not persuade Shen Qiu; instead, they drew dissatisfaction from him and the other ministers. What conspiracy by the Chu army, what withdrawal to the homeland? Warfare has always been about employing every possible stratagem, sparing no approach, with the primary goal of eliminating the opponent. Moreover, as the saying from ancient times goes, in military strife and dangerous battles, where is there no peril on the battlefield? And at this very moment, the situation with Chu was at a standoff, whether Lingnan can be held, whether the northern banks of the river can be held, whether Ning can repel the enemy from its borders, whether Yangzhou¡¯s hegemony can be maintained, all hinged on the current situation. Bai Yian spoke lightly. The army would give up everything and retreat to fortify Jiangdong. But could the northern bank, Lingnan, the tranquility of Jiangdong, and the hegemony of Yangzhou, all these factors, truly be so easily forsaken? If everything was abandoned, would Ning still be Ning? Could Jinling still regard itself as the seat of the Heavenly Son? The matter was far too important; Bai Yian approached the issue from a purely war perspective, which might seem very wise, appearing as if he were the only sober person in a crowd of drunkards. But war has never been just about war. Behind war, there are factors such as economics, politics, and public sentiment influencing it¡­ Sometimes, in the face of a great war, you can¡¯t just consider the war itself, it won¡¯t do. You have to look at the whole picture, from the whole country, from the perspective of the whole world. From such a grand perspective, many choices and decisions that seem foolish to everyone may actually be influenced by many other factors. At this point, Shen Qiu and his peers were influenced by the many factors behind the war, and they could not possibly speak of retreating as easily as Bai Yian, who only considered the pros and cons of war. Thus, in the eyes of Bai Yian, at the time of a country¡¯s crisis, the court was full of incompetent emperors and officials. Did these inept rulers and ministers not realize that their actions could weaken national power and even lead to the destruction of Ning Country? Not at all. They also knew that their choices were foolish and passive. But if they did not choose this way, Ning might not perish, but they themselves would certainly perish first. The simplest one: This time, Ning Country deployed 600,000 troops, mobilized two vassal states and one ally state, with united forces nearing one million ¨C a momentum in Jiangnan that is said to be unparalleled in 300 years, and the entire Nine Provinces watched with great interest. After such a battle, if Ning Country suddenly retreated and admitted defeat, abandoning three allied countries, relinquishing one commandery north of the river, and with tens of thousands of soldiers dead or injured, having spent innumerable money and grain¡­ Who would bear the responsibility for this defeat? The commander of the united army for this war, Heavenly Son of Ning Country, Shen Qiu? Or the many generals and officers in the camp, and the high ministers and officials? Or you, Marquis Wuan, Bai Yian? The responsibility for this defeat is so great that even Shen Qiu, as the emperor, dared not take it squarely on his shoulders. Because he couldn¡¯t bear it. If he admitted it, then facing the crime of defeat, facing the fault of tens of thousands of dead and wounded soldiers, facing the anger and resistance of the army, facing the roaring public sentiment of those who went bankrupt or even lost their families due to the war, and facing the loss of considerable interests of the local gentry and aristocratic families due to the defeat¡­ The fury of these countless groups would be so overwhelming that even as the Heavenly Son, he wouldn¡¯t be able to withstand it, as it would burn him to ashes. One must realize. The Jinling regime has never been the domain of a single family, but is instead elected by the aristocratic families and rotated among various clans. Initially, when the Xiao Family was in power, they lost half of the territory and hundreds of thousands of soldiers, compromising the interests of too many power classes, which led to universal anger and their dismissal. Now, Shen Qiu¡¯s family is in power, and if, as Bai Yian said, they similarly lose the northern commandery and the vassal states in Lingnan, it¡¯s almost like losing half a country. The loss of soldiers would also number in the tens of thousands, similarly harming many people¡¯s interests. The lesson from the past is just over a decade ago. The Xiao Family is now on the fringes of the six clans and subjected to hostility and scorn by all. The outcome of the predecessor is well remembered; even Shen Qiu, bold as he may be, wouldn¡¯t dare to risk repeating their fate. Similarly, with the consequences of a failed war being so serious, none of the generals, ministers, and officials wanted to bear the incalculable loss of benefits after the defeat or the heavy burdens that would inevitably arise when the Chu State came to attack. With the lessons of Yue Country¡¯s failure still in sight, they naturally did not support retreating. Therefore, under the resistance of the monarch and his ministers, Shen Qiu¡¯s proposal was, not unexpectedly, rejected. Faced with Lu Yuan¡¯s blockade, the Ning Army only conservatively sent out reconnaissance, responding passively. Completely losing the only chance to take back Luo Kou Du when Chu¡¯s army had just captured it and was not yet firmly established. In a critical moment of decision, Ning Country took another wrong path. Chapter 862 - Chapter 862: Chapter 367 Relief of Changsha Chapter 862: Chapter 367 Relief of Changsha Changsha. The war drums thundered, and a contingent of the Ning Army marched out of the main camp, carrying weapons and slowly advancing toward the city of Changsha. Xiang Duan sat in the command carriage, watching the already raging combat at the city walls, his thoughts drifting away. Actually, he was reluctant to siege the city. Inside the city, the elite Chu soldiers numbered twenty thousand, and with widespread conscription of able-bodied men, they had gathered eighty thousand militia, bringing the total military force to a hundred thousand, more than those besieging the city. Though militia generally had poor combat abilities and were unable to fight tough battles, like the civilian workers conscripted by Nanhai Country, who were hardly capable of guarding the city. But the civilian workers of Chu State were different. Ever since Lu Yuan established the Militia Corps system in Shaoyang Prefecture, all the civilians under his jurisdiction over the age of fifteen had to participate in autumn military training organized by the counties, townships, and villages after the busy farming season each year. Although autumn training only involved one to two months of military skills training, as long as one participated for three to five years and coupled with Chu¡¯s martial tradition, and with Lu Yuan often conscripting militia to go to war, Even just for the sake of having more self-preservation on the battlefield in the future, those rural civilians would learn martial arts in their free time and acquire some military skills from others. All these factors combined could make an untrained Village Brave learn the basic use of a weapon, understand Military Orders and signals, and familiarize themselves with military laws and regulations. Once they mastered these, they could basically be considered qualified cannon fodder. Furthermore, ever since Chu State established itself, there had hardly been a year without war, and large-scale battles involving more than a hundred thousand were common, requiring the conscription of a large number of militia to accompany the army. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? Like when they waged war against the Southwest Barbarians. Lu Yuan deployed a hundred thousand in the Forbidden army, but behind them came more than three hundred thousand militia tasked with transporting food and fodder and garrisoning the towns and cities secured by the army. Transporting supplies and garrisoning in the rear was not just about toiling labor. Although the Chu army had defeated the main forces of the Yi People, after their dispersal, a large number of remnants were still scattered throughout Qianzhong County, some fled into the mountain ridges while others joined local Yi tribes. These remnants, supported by the local Yi People, would often choose to raid Chu¡¯s grain roads and attack the Chu garrisons. At such times, when the enemy came attacking, the accompanying militia could not stay uninvolved and had to fight alongside the leading Forbidden army. Fighting for their lives and having seen blood, the militia with some basic military skills naturally improved quickly. After going through battle after battle, some frequently conscripted militia had overall qualities and strength that were no less than the soldiers of long-established countries like Nanhai and Ning, which had their own Prefectures and County soldiers. These seasoned militia could even be sent to the frontlines and fight positional warfare against the enemy. If assigned to guarding the city, relying on the terrain advantage, they could be used as half a soldier. Even the lesser militia, if just for guarding the city, would not necessarily be worse than the ordinary Prefecture and County soldiers. Therefore, just looking at the numbers, the hundred thousand Chu army inside the city, mostly composed of militia, seemed to have no great strength. But when it comes to defending the city, the Ning Army outside might not necessarily be stronger than the Chu militia. This had been verified by Ningjing¡¯s own blood and life through countless battles previously. It was precisely because he knew that the Chu army inside the city was tough to deal with, even the militia, whose strength was no less than the Prefectures and County soldiers, and their numbers more than his own, that Xiang Duan felt extremely resistant and opposed to the outnumbered and most brutal form of warfare, the siege. But he was helpless. His superior, Emperor Shenqiu of Ning, in order to apply more pressure on the Chu army on the Dongting battlefield, forcing Chu State to divert more troops from Lingnan to relieve the pressure on Nanhai Country, had already issued a death order ten days ago, demanding him to initiate the siege on Changsha, and moreover, it had to be an intense and vigorous one. To supervise him, a supervisor was even dispatched to ensure Xiang Duan¡¯s unit carried out the order. Limited by the pressure from the supervisor and the fact that the situation in Ning Country was indeed unfavorable, with Lingnan¡¯s dire situation indeed needing support from Dongting, he executed Emperor Shenqiu¡¯s orders faithfully, despite his reluctance. Starting ten days ago, besides the more than ten thousand troops stationed in the rear to defend Anjiang and Fengling counties, Xiang Duan¡¯s division of seventy thousand people dispatched ten thousand every day to attack the city of Changsha. After such a rotation, the seventy thousand-strong army had already fought one round, and even the second round had begun, and they were now in their third engagement. But after seven days of fierce attacks, Xiang Duan¡¯s forces had suffered terribly heavy losses. As of now, even though he had emphasized before the war that sieging the city didn¡¯t require them to exert their full strength, just to launch a couple of assaults to apply some pressure to the Chu forces would suffice, it was, after all, a siege that they could not take, there¡¯s no need to really stubbornly grind it out to the death. Yet even so, exerting pressure on the Chu forces in the city was not a simple matter. If the Ning Army didn¡¯t pay a price, the so-called siege was nothing more than a farce. Xiang Duan¡¯s so-called ¡°not trying too hard¡± was only relative, as after ten days of fighting, his seventy thousand-strong army had already lost over ten thousand men, with only fifty-six or fifty-seven thousand remaining, the casualties exceeding twenty percent. The remaining army, too, was demoralized, and their combat power had diminished by nearly half compared to before the siege. And the city of Changsha ahead had remained, for all these days, as solid as a fortress. The morale of the city¡¯s defenders was still exceedingly high, with no sign seen of any chance of taking the city. Chapter 863 - Chapter 863: Chapter 367 Changsha Relief_2 Chapter 863: Chapter 367 Changsha Relief_2 Continuing the fight, Xiang Duan had no idea whether Changsha could be taken or not. But he could be certain that his soldiers would either be completely wiped out or revolt midway through the battle. Such was the brutal nature of siege warfare. Therefore, Shen Qiu could only look upon Jiangxia with a sigh. Lu Yuan, observing the tens of miles of connected Ning Army camps outside Jiangxia, also felt fear arise from the sight. The great terror within was unparalleled. ¡°General, the front line has collapsed, still unable to take the city head. After a headcount, we have lost over five hundred soldiers,¡± Just as Xiang Duan was full of worries about the future, the first siege battle had ended, and the losses were reported back. Coming out of his reverie and hearing the losses, Xiang Duan¡¯s face twitched, and then he turned his head to look at Yao Qing, the supervising officer in a red official robe, tentatively asking, ¡°Yao Brother, today¡¯s battle was unfavorable, our losses are too great. How about we temporarily withdraw the troops?¡± This supervising officer, Yao Qing, was also from the Coastal Aristocratic Family, and had known Xiang Duan for years; they were even relatives and shared a deep relationship. Logically speaking, with such relations, sending Yao Qing to supervise was not appropriate. But the high-levels of Ning Country were almost entirely from the Coastal Aristocratic Family, hence it was natural for close ties and associations to exist. Even Emperor Shenqiu of Ning, known as the Heavenly Son, was called uncle or some familial term by nearly half of the group of ministers below the court. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?0 Xiang Duan was also considered a cousin to him. Under such circumstances, how could Shen Qiu appoint a supervising officer? Therefore, the current situation was inevitable. ¡°The soldiers have indeed not had it easy. Let¡¯s call it a day,¡± Yao Qing had been paying close attention to the entire siege battle and witnessed firsthand how the brave soldiers of Da Ning courageously faced arrows, falling rocks, boiling oil, and excrement as they charged the city walls with their lives on the line. Then they engaged in battle with the Chu army, got surrounded, and eventually, drained of their strength, they fell, struck by swords and spears, from the city walls. The soldiers had already shown remarkable bravery. Now, failing to take the head of Changsha was simply because the Chu army was too numerous and strong. Both sides had advantages and strengths that were not on the same level; the Ning army was actually at a disadvantage. To fight from a disadvantage against an advantage, and from an unfavorable position against a favorable one, to achieve what they had was already quite difficult. In Jiangxia¡¯s main camp, after witnessing the cruelty of the siege up close and then seeing it again in Changsha, Yao Qing had abandoned any hope for conquering through siege. He also began to understand more why Changsha had not been breached for such a long time. It was not that Xiang Duan was incompetent, but that the Chu army was truly strong, not as weak as they had imagined, rightfully deserving their reputation as a powerful nation over the years. Even due to the strong strength of the Chu army, Yao Qing gradually gave up on defeating Chu State and started to recognize the stance of Marquis Wuan Bai Yian. Chu army could not be completely destroyed, and Chu State could not be quickly vanquished. Facing such a formidable enemy, the only hope for Ning Country was to retreat back to Jiangdong, rely on their profound resources, and hold out until the right opportunity arose, perhaps a hundred years later. Having this thought in mind, Yao Qing naturally did not wish to see the elite forces of the Ning Army squandered in meaningless sieges. So, seeing the siege come to a halt, he felt that today¡¯s task was barely accomplished, and it was enough to give an account to Jiangxia; thus, he did not insist on continuing the attack. ¡°Yao Brother¡¯s benevolence is admirable; all the soldiers and officers will undoubtedly feel grateful for your kindness,¡± Seeing that Yao Qing agreed to the proposal to withdraw, Xiang Duan was overjoyed, praised him, and immediately called for his deputy to arrange the retreat. Soon, the sounds of gongs echoing orders reverberated from the rear, and the Ning Army at the front who were lining up for the second wave of the siege felt a great relief in their hearts. No one wished to siege, nor did anyone want to risk their life for a goal doomed to fail. For the generals at the front, the fact that they weren¡¯t forced to partake in a futile assault was undoubtedly good news. But just as the Ning Army was relaxing and rejoicing, suddenly, from within the barracks behind them, a commotion arose. Then, shouts that pierced the heavens and the thunderous sounds of drums and gongs followed. Behind them, flames shot up, and dense smoke engulfed the mountain forest and fields. This sudden change instantly sparked great alarm within the Ning Army, sowing chaos throughout its ranks. ¡°What¡¯s happening? Why is there disturbance in the rear camp?¡± Compared to the confused and chaotic front army, which was unaware of what had occurred, Xiang Duan and Yao Qing, situated atop a ten-zhang high command chariot, could see clearly that the source of the disturbance originated from the rear camp and the chaos and fire were spreading from there. ¡°Could it be that those injured soldiers have revolted and are causing chaos?¡± Yao Qing asked, uncertain. The Ning Army had suffered great losses in recent days, with fourteen to fifteen thousand casualties. These casualties were not all deaths, but also included lightly and severely wounded soldiers; specifically, those who had lost their combat effectiveness, roughly around six or seven thousand in number. With limited medical conditions and capabilities, there wasn¡¯t much by the way of treatment for these soldiers. The only method was to carry them to a separate camp for the injured, provide them with enough food to survive, and then leave them to fend for themselves. Those who could endure would live. Those who couldn¡¯t would be wrapped in a shroud, taken to Mass Burial Mound, which was their only fate. This was the harsh reality of war. And for this reason, these semi-abandoned injured soldiers, harboring feelings of despair, panic, anger, and resentment, were the ones who felt them most strongly. Many in their desperation cultivated hatred towards Ning Country, the Ning Army, their officers, and even their former comrades-in-arms. Chapter 864 - Chapter 864: Chapter 367 Changsha Relief_3 Chapter 864: Chapter 367 Changsha Relief_3 The soldiers guarding them, who were closer to the wounded soldiers¡¯ barracks, couldn¡¯t help but feel a sense of sorrow for their fallen comrades when they witnessed their fate. In addition, with the daily brutal siege warfare, the number of deaths was rising, and no one knew who would be next. Under extreme pressure, some soldiers who couldn¡¯t handle the stress suffered mental breakdowns and caused trouble along with the wounded, which was a common occurrence. This was what was known as mutiny in the barracks. Therefore, seeing the disturbance in the rear, Yao Qing¡¯s first thought was that the soldiers were causing trouble. ¡°Perhaps it¡¯s¡­¡± Xiang Duan also had such a speculation, so he said gravely, ¡°This disturbance must not spread, it should be suppressed immediately with heavy troops.¡± Although a mutiny in the barracks was greatly damaging, if it was suppressed harshly the moment it started to emerge, its harm could also be limited. Looking in the direction of the rear camp, the mutiny¡¯s range had affected only five or six camps, impacting at most three or four thousand men, which wasn¡¯t considered very large. If troops were dispatched to suppress it now, perhaps with one or two thousand dead, the unrest could be quelled. Yao Qing also agreed with this suggestion, ¡°The situation is urgent. The rear army is as far as ten miles away. We must not delay. We should dispatch troops to quell the disturbance immediately.¡± Xiang Duan¡¯s main camp was constructed to accommodate the scale of a hundred thousand men from the beginning. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? A hundred thousand troops, built according to a standard of five hundred people per campsite, would require around two hundred campsites. And one standard campsite, measuring about a hundred paces in both length and width, along with the gaps between two or three campsites, would take up about one square mile. Two hundred campsites spread out would cover an area of ten to twenty square miles, with camp connections stretching over ten miles. It was because of such a distance that Xiang Duan and Yao Qing couldn¡¯t know what exactly had happened in the rear camp; they could only speculate based on experience. Regardless of the reason, sending heavy troops to intervene and suppress was always the right move. As the military order was issued, the soldiers originally prepared for the siege, nearly ten thousand strong, were quickly mobilized and assembled. Xiang Duan directly ordered the rearguard to become the vanguard, dismounted from the command chariot, mounted a warhorse, and personally led them in a mighty procession towards the rear camp. To suppress a mutiny, one must act with the speed and decisiveness of thunder, cutting the tangled hemp swiftly to deter others. Only with him, the Inborn Grandmaster, taking action personally could the unrest be quelled fastest. Yao Qing stayed behind to oversee the coordination of the troops at the front of the main camp, on alert against the Chu army taking advantage of the disturbance to launch a surprise attack on the main camp. Xiang Duan led his troops towards the rear camp. Along the way, whenever he encountered units from various camps, he immediately ordered their commanders to assemble their men, stabilize morale, and closely guard their campsites, ensuring the disturbance didn¡¯t spread. Meanwhile, he continued to lead his ten thousand troops forward while also dispatching scouts and vanguards to hurry to the rear camp to investigate the situation. Upon reaching the middle section of the campsites, news finally arrived. The disturbance in the rear camp was not a mutiny, but the Chu army suddenly attacking from behind, having taken several campsites already, and now they were heading straight for the Central Army. Hearing this shocking news, Xiang Duan¡¯s face was filled with disbelief, ¡°With Anjiang and Fengling counties serving as barriers behind our great army, and over ten thousand soldiers stationed there, how could the Chu army have approached? Moreover, around Dongting, the Chu army¡¯s forces have already been fully deployed, and each area is monitored by soldiers from Da Ning. Where did they find additional troops for this sneak attack? Could it be the troops from Lingnan?¡± In Jiangxia, Changsha, Luyang, and Hengyang, there are Ning soldiers monitoring every move of the Chu army¡¯s forces. If there had been any unusual movements, surely the news would have come through. Therefore, the troops that carried out this sneak attack could not possibly be from these areas; they must have been transferred from elsewhere. And in Xiang Duan¡¯s view, the only forces that the Chu army could mobilize were from Lingnan. This must be said to be both good news and bad news. The good news is that my goal has been achieved; I have successfully lured the Lingnan troops northward. The bad news is that the Chu Army from Lingnan didn¡¯t attack the Ning Army in Luyang and Hengyang; instead, they traversed a thousand miles to strike the utterly unprepared army in Changsha. Now the Chu Army has come to attack, and I am completely unprepared; even the rear camp has been breached, leaving us in a situation that¡¯s worryingly dire. ¡°Immediately send orders to the units of the Central Army to gather their forces and join me in striking the Chu Army together,¡± Xiang Duan immediately changed his command. The number of approaching Chu forces is unknown. At this moment, the ten thousand troops under my command to quell camp unrest are undoubtedly insufficient to confront the threat of the Chu Army. Now, the urgent task is to gather more troops and amass greater strength to halt the Chu offensive. After issuing the commands, Xiang Duan could not afford to wait for more troops to join him, and he continued to lead his forces forward, planning to make first contact with the Chu Army and stem their advance. However, he had barely taken two steps when an urgent message suddenly arrived from Yao Qing at the position of the Front Camp. ¡°Report to the general, a large Chu force, numbering forty to fifty thousand, has emerged within the city of Changsha, personally led by Chu State¡¯s Left Chancellor Sun Siwen; their vanguard has already breached several of our camps. The Inborn Grandmasters are hard-pressed to resist; Military Superintendent Yao has sent someone requesting the general to hurry back with reinforcement.¡± The messenger arrived looking battered, his report tinged with panic. ¡°Sun Siwen¡­ the Chu Army¡­¡± Having heard the message, Xiang Duan felt like shattering his teeth from clenching them too hard. At this very moment, how could he not understand that the Chu Army was specifically targeting him? This battle had been premeditated from the start. Now, caught off guard and without any defense against a simultaneous front and rear attack by the Chu people, he had been completely taken by surprise. Stuck in a dilemma, with neither advance nor retreat presenting a viable option. Fortunately, before Xiang Duan had to make a difficult decision, a Chu Army force appeared before him and made the choice for him. Ahead, a figure like a ferocious beast charged wildly, shattering everything in its path, whether Ning camp or Ning soldiers, none could withstand it. Without a doubt, such a formidable force could only belong to an Inborn Grandmaster. In this battle, the Chu Army had mobilized two Inborn Grandmasters; I had truly fallen into an inescapable predicament. ¡°Chu scoundrels, meet your death!¡± Realizing his plight, desperation and then a resolute determination shone in Xiang Duan¡¯s eyes. With a roar, he spurred his horse forward, charging towards the beast-like figure. Behind him, tens of thousands of soldiers shouted in unison, courageously following their general into the fray. Amidst the dense smoke and flames engulfing the Ning camp, a brutal battle unfolded between the two armies. ¡­ In the eleventh year of Shenwu, on the second day of the fourth month. The Chu Army attacked the city of Changsha. During the assault, Huang Xuan led his troops in a surprise attack on Xiang Duan¡¯s Ning rear camp, successively breaching over ten encampments, and Xiang Duan¡¯s army urgently moved to reinforce. Afterward, upon hearing of Huang Xuan¡¯s movements, Left Chancellor Sun Siwen of Chu led fifty thousand troops in a fierce assault on the Ning Front Camp. The Ning Front Camp, with only ten thousand men and without an Inborn Grandmaster, was quickly overwhelmed. Sun Siwen then joined forces with Huang Xuan, surrounding Xiang Duan with a pincer attack. After half a day of bitter fighting, the Ning Army finally broke and scattered, with their general Xiang Duan falling in battle amid the onslaught of two great Inborn Grandmasters of the Chu Army. Since the outset of hostilities between Chu and Ning, this marked the first casualty among the Inborn Grandmasters from both nations. On this day, the Chu Army slew twenty thousand of the enemy, captured thirty thousand, and thus the siege of Changsha was lifted. Chapter 865 - Chapter 865: Chapter 368: Besieged on All Sides by the Songs of Chu Chapter 865: Chapter 368: Besieged on All Sides by the Songs of Chu Outside the city of Changsha, the Ning Army Camp. Dense smoke billowed as broken swords and spilt blood created a scene of desolation. Lu Yuan stood astride his horse, gazing at the now-broken Ning camp with an unfathomable look in his eyes. At his side, Sun Siwen rode alongside, equally observing the scene and spoke leisurely, ¡°The Ning bandits are defeated, and the battle is a complete victory. Is True Person planning to go to Yuzhang next?¡± Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°That¡¯s right, following the king¡¯s decree, after reorganizing the troops and horses, I shall continue boarding the naval vessels and then head directly east to Fengling. After landing there, I will lead the army into Yuzhang.¡± Sun Siwen said, ¡°If so, then I offer my early congratulations on True Person¡¯s forthcoming victory.¡± Lu Yuan smiled, ¡°The same to the Prime Minister, who will lead troops north tomorrow, joining the king¡¯s plan to corner Emperor Shenqiu of Ning. By that time, with our four fronts surrounding them, Prime Minister, since your route is nearer, you might even outdo me in rendering service and capture a few Ning Martial Marquises.¡± According to Lu Yuan¡¯s plan, after defeating the Ning Army in Changsha, Lu Yuan would continue leading his army of fifty thousand to move east into Yuzhang Prefecture, capturing its capital, Nanchang, to cut off Emperor Shenqiu¡¯s eastern land retreat. After Sun Siwen had cleared out the remnants of the Ning Army in Changsha and arranged the city¡¯s defenses, he would lead twenty thousand Forbidden Army troops and thirty thousand select and brave militia from the south to the north, from Changsha, encircling the south of Shen Qiu and blocking his escape route to the south. Thus, with fifty thousand Forbidden Army troops and twenty thousand naval forces from Lu Yuan himself to the west; forty thousand Forbidden Army troops and twenty thousand naval forces at Luo Kou Du waterway to the north. With Chu forces encircling from all four sides, Emperor Shenqiu¡¯s escape routes were completely cut off. ¡°As the Prime Minister, I am not skilled in war and do not expect to render any great service on this expedition; I only hope not to overlook anything that might allow Ning forces to escape, thereby jeopardizing the king¡¯s plans,¡± Sun Siwen shook his head, not setting his heart on earning military achievements. Seeing this, Lu Yuan merely smiled. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?0 Yet, he knew well that his true self¡¯s good friend still had the heart of a public servant, caring only about the state of Chu and all living beings, truly devoid of much selfishness. ¡°General, Xiang Duan¡¯s head has been processed and prepared.¡± It was at this moment a minor officer approached, holding a box in his hand. He approached the two commanders in the army and presented it with both hands. On hearing this, Lu Yuan glanced into the box and saw that Xiang Duan¡¯s head, which he had personally slain, was now cleaned of blood and specially treated with saltpetre to prevent decay for several months. He wasn¡¯t interested in the corpse, so after one glance, he looked away and casually said, ¡°Send the head back to Jiangxia to report our victory to the king.¡± Indeed, while he himself had no use for Xiang Duan¡¯s head, over there, it was likely necessary. For instance, effects such as boosting one¡¯s own morale, attacking the Ning Army, and shaking the opponent¡¯s military heart. Having casually dealt with Xiang Duan¡¯s head, Lu Yuan looked over at the Ning Army¡¯s camp, which was nearly cleaned up by now; the captured Ning soldiers were being taken away, and the militia was gathering and burning the corpses. There wasn¡¯t much left to do here. His forces had already assembled and were waiting to board ships at a small ferry not far from the camp, where the naval forces were stationed. Therefore, he said, ¡°Now that affairs here are concluded and my troops are ready to depart, I¡¯ll be leaving first. Prime Minister, let¡¯s meet again in Yuzhang Prefecture.¡± Sun Siwen said, ¡°Have a safe journey, General. May we meet again after another great victory.¡± ¡°Hahaha!¡± Lu Yuan laughed heartily, saluted Sun Siwen, then raised his whip, and with a neigh, his steed charged away like a dust cloud, quickly shrinking to a mere speck in the distance. ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C In the city of Jiangxia. With Lu Yuan¡¯s avatar stationed there, he became aware of the detailed situation of the Changsha battle as soon as it occurred. ¡°Haha, Lu Yuan indeed did not disappoint me. He transferred troops for thousands of miles from Hanzhong, took a surprise water route to attack Changsha, and in one fell swoop defeated seventy thousand Ning soldiers, beheaded an Inborn Martial Marquis, truly gratifying, truly gratifying!¡± Receiving the news, Lu Yuan laughed heartily, then summoned his generals and informed them of the situation, which immediately soared their morale and confidence. The defeat of the Ning Army in Changsha not only greatly diminished Ning¡¯s strength, losing seventy thousand troops and an Inborn. On Chu¡¯s side, the southern threat was eliminated, liberating the one hundred thousand Defenders of Changsha city and Sun Siwen, an Inborn. Moreover, aside from Changsha¡¯s Defenders, Chu now had one extra True Person Protector of the State, Lu Yuan, and fifty thousand of his Forbidden Army troops. In this gain and loss, the difference was three Inborns and two hundred and twenty thousand troops. With such a shift in forces, Chu¡¯s advantage over Ning had suddenly leaped forward. ¡°Alright, everyone, with the Prime Minister and the Protector of the State obtaining a great victory in Changsha and Ning¡¯s defeat imminent, we must not fall behind during such an auspicious time. We have the responsibility to keep Emperor Ning Shen Qiu and his one hundred thousand troops here in Jiangxia,¡± Lu Yuan addressed his people, emphasizing the importance of their duties, then continued, ¡°To better encircle Ning¡¯s forces, I have already summoned the Protector Custodian of the State, Han Hua, from the north of the river to rush to Luo Kou Du and take command of this port. In this way, to the east, south, west, and north, Great Chu will have Inborn Grandmasters stationed, ensuring that even with wings, Ning¡¯s people will find escape impossible.¡± Han Hua was originally in the north of Jiangxia assisting Zhou Qing, tasked with a significant responsibility of containing Yang Jing¡¯s Ning forces and could not be spared. However, as Chu¡¯s victories continued on the Lingnan and Dongting battlegrounds, the situation slowly shifted from mere defense to a major counter-attack. As it stands now, Qingyunzi is attacking Jianan, Li Xiong is attacking Luyang in Yuzhang, and they are assisting the Chu forces of Hengyang and Luyang from behind, collectively striking at Ning¡¯s armies in the two prefectures. Chapter 866 - Chapter 866: Chapter 368: Besieged on All Sides by the Song of Chu_2 Chapter 866: Chapter 368: Besieged on All Sides by the Song of Chu_2 The Siege of Changsha has been lifted, and Huang Xuan has gone on to attack the capital of Yuzhang, Nanchang, to cut off Shen Qiu¡¯s land-based retreat. In two days, Sun Siwen will also lead his troops northward, completing the encirclement from the south. In the city of Jiangxia to the west, only Lu Yuan himself is in charge. Only the northern water escape route through Luo Kou Du is heavily garrisoned without an Inborn Grandmaster in command. Therefore, at this time, it¡¯s essential to fill this gap and transfer an Inborn Grandmaster from elsewhere to seal off the north. Looking around, the closest Inborn Grandmaster who could be mobilized just so happens to be Han Hua from the battlefields north of the River. After all, on the battlefields north of the River, the main strength of the Ning Army is down to about thirty thousand, with the addition of seventy thousand naval forces. With these one hundred thousand men, the Ning naval forces dominate the Yangtze River, moving at will, and it¡¯s difficult for the Chu naval forces to do anything about them until they can outnumber the Ning forces. And those thirty thousand regular troops, with the Ning naval forces present, can retreat quite easily and cannot be intercepted either. Similarly, it would be hard for Yang Jing, with his thirty thousand regular troops, to defeat Zhou Qing¡¯s eighty thousand Forbidden Army, so other than holding out in the solitary northern cities, there¡¯s little they can do. Given this situation, it is better to simply give up the battlefields north of the River and gather more resources and manpower here in Jiangxia, making every effort to defeat Shen Qiu¡¯s main Ning Army forces. Once the Ning Army¡¯s main forces here are destroyed, with the loss of external support and cut off from internal contact, leaving only the remote Yang Jing¡¯s forces at Xiangyang, it will effectively become an enclave. As everyone knows, a solitary city cannot hold out for long, and one corner cannot stand against the world. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 Once Lu Yuan has defeated Shen Qiu¡¯s main forces and captured Yuzhang, Jianan, the remnants of Yang Jing¡¯s Ning Army far in the north of the River won¡¯t even require him to use his troops to attack¡ªthey will abandon Xiangyang and retreat to Jinling, Jiangdong, under the cover of the naval forces. For this reason, once Lu Yuan confirmed that the situation north of the River wouldn¡¯t change significantly, he completely abandoned the progress over there and decided to transfer Han Hua to the main battlefield in Jiangxia to make better use of his talents. The imperial edict was issued two days ago. With the speed of the spirit hawk messenger and the convenience of Yangtze River transportation, Han Hua should have already received the order and is probably nearly at Luo Kou Du by now. Once he arrives, the encirclement of Jiangxia, an iron net planned by Lu Yuan targeting the annihilation of the one hundred thousand Ning Army, will be completely formed. The biggest fruit of the war since the Ning Army engaged in battle, is just waiting for him to pluck. ¡®Now, it¡¯s just a matter of seeing how the Ning Army will struggle, and I¡¯m looking forward to it.¡¯ A trace of a cruel smile appeared on Lu Yuan¡¯s face. At this very moment, the situation of the Ning Army trapped in a heavy net reminds him of his days as a Hunter in the mountains, setting up traps and hunting fierce beasts. Tension, excitement, killing, bloodshed, thrill, joy¡­ How he longed for the final hunt to come soon. ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C Outside the city, Ning Army Camp. Within the council hall, Shen Qiu once again convened his ministers to discuss the Chu Army¡¯s blockade outside the city. ¡°Your Majesty, we¡¯ve now ascertained clearly that Luo Kou Du has fallen. The Chu Army has blockaded our camp in order to cut off our waterway retreat.¡± One of the ministers responsible for espionage stepped forward, bowed to Shen Qiu, and reported his findings. Three days have passed since the Chu Army began the encampment, after dispatching numerous experts from the Ning Army to break through the light cavalry blockade and some Ning Army troops scattered from Luo Kou Du fled to this area. Without much effort, the Ning people here have figured out exactly what happened. ¡°Hmph, how audacious of these Chu thieves. While being attacked in Dongting from all sides, they think not of defense but have the capacity to divide their forces and strike at my rear. Do they really believe their Dongting is impregnable, that I cannot take it down?¡± Shen Qiu picked up a document from the desk, looked over the detailed report, furrowing his brow tighter and tighter until, when he reached the final details about the loss of Luo Kou Du, he couldn¡¯t help but slam the paper down with a ¡°bang,¡± rising and tossing the papers to the ground. ¡°Your Majesty, please calm your anger.¡± Seeing this, the ministers in the hall quickly spoke out to mollify him. ¡°Calm my anger? How can you expect me to calm my anger?¡± Shen Qiu huffed and paced near his seat, growing angrier as he spoke: ¡°This is a provocation from Chu thieves; Lu Yuan is provoking me. He sees my conquests of the prefectures of Luyang, Hengyang, and so he returns the favor at Luo Kou Du, telling me that if I can attack his rear, he can also attack mine. Damn it, truly hateful! A mere mountain thief dares to treat me like this?¡± Mountain thief¡ªthis is a reference to Lu Yuan¡¯s early years as a Hunter in the mountains; hunters were considered illegal residents and were equated with mountain bandits by the government, seen as the lowest class of people. Shen Qiu calling Lu Yuan a mountain thief reflects just how much resentment he holds inside. But this was not without reason. Because Lu Yuan¡¯s attack on Luo Kou Du indeed struck right at Shen Qiu¡¯s soft spot. After dispatching the last one hundred thousand troops from the main camp at Pengli to attack the prefectures of Luyang and Hengyang, the last of Shen Qiu¡¯s mobile reserve forces had been deployed. Meanwhile, in the Jiangxia camp, with thousands of Chu cavalry harassing and blockading nearby, and the large Chu forces led by Lu Yuan keeping a watchful eye from the city, his troops were staunchly tied down here. Under such circumstances, faced with a surprise attack by the Chu Army at Luo Kou Du, Shen Qiu found himself without any means to respond in the moment. Because he no longer had excess troops that could be used to attack Luo Kou Du and recapture this vital logistics base. And without Luo Kou Du, Shen Qiu¡¯s only way to supply food and fodder was through the difficult and dangerous land routes, calling upon a vast number of laborers and pack animals from behind the lines in Yuzhang, and carrying out highly costly land transport to supply the front line with military food. Chapter 867 - Chapter 867: Chapter 368: Besieged on All Sides by the Song of Chu_3 Chapter 867: Chapter 368: Besieged on All Sides by the Song of Chu_3 ¡°` This method not only consumes an enormous amount of resources but also, the supply of military food to the front line might be disrupted by various factors, preventing full delivery and leading to shortages that affect the morale of the soldiers. How could Shen Qiu not be angry in the face of such an unfavorable situation? ¡°Your Majesty, please calm your anger for a moment.¡± At this time, Bai Yian stepped forward, picked up the documents that Shen Qiu had thrown to the ground, took a look, and after understanding the contents, frowned and said, ¡°Now that the Chu thieves have cut off our waterway, all the food and fodder we had stockpiled at Luo Kou Du has fallen into enemy hands. And in the camp now, our army has only enough provisions for ten days. The urgent task at hand is to quickly open up the grain road so that new supplies can be transported from the rear as soon as possible. Otherwise, with the shortage of food and fodder, the army will become unsettled¡ªyes, we might collapse without fighting.¡± Hearing this, Shen Qiu huffed again, but he managed not to lose his temper at Bai Yian and took the advice on board. ¡°We are aware of this matter.¡± He nodded and then turned his head to a general in the hall and instructed, ¡°Chen Qing, this matter is entrusted to you. Select some top-notch experts from the army in person, rush back to Yuzhang overnight, and have Wu Che immediately collect a month¡¯s worth of military food for a large army, and then personally escort it back.¡± Chen Qing, hailing from one of the six foremost families, was a top-notch expert in the army, just a step away from Inborn status. However, limited by the lack of resources and without the elixir to refine his body and soul, he had yet to break through to Innate. Even so, not being Innate, Chen Qing¡¯s strength was among the very best of those below the Inborn level. In a situation where the Inborn could not easily take action, he was more than capable of handling a critical mission. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï The Chu army had long planned for this, and after cutting off our waterway and grain road, they would surely guard against land transportation of supplies. Thus, transporting grain from the rear this time might not be straightforward, and there could be mishaps, such as Chu soldiers lying in ambush on critical paths, specifically targeting those carrying messages to the rear. That¡¯s why this time, Shen Qiu appointed Chen Qing. As for Yuzhang Prefecture, in preparation for the campaign against Chu State, a large amount of food and fodder had already been amassed. Once Chen Qing reaches the Nanchang Prefectural City of Yuzhang, the prefect Wu Che can immediately distribute a month¡¯s worth of military food for a hundred thousand troops. The only problem is that it might not be easy to find enough civilian workers to transport such a quantity of food and fodder at short notice. But this was not a concern. Yuzhang Prefecture, being the premier prefecture of Ning Country with over six million registered households, could easily draft enough civilian workers from its population without much trouble. This was also why, after learning that Luo Kou Du had been taken by Chu forces and the waterway grain road lost, Shen Qiu was angry but not panicked. Because he knew. Though the waterway for grain was lost, they could still transport supplies by land. It would cost more, but it wouldn¡¯t leave his large army starving. The situation had not yet reached a point of no return. ¡°Yes, I accept the order.¡± Chen Qing stood up to receive the command, instantly ready to leave. After saluting, he departed swiftly. The military food for a hundred thousand troops was of great importance, and with no time to delay, he dared not dally. Shen Qiu discussed with his ministers for a while in the hall, proposing some methods to deal with the Chu army and concluded that they could only adopt a passive stance, waiting for the situation at Hengyang and Luyang to unfold, ending the discussion there. In the following days, Chen Qing left with a group of carefully selected capable men, and there was still no news from the rear grain road. The Chu forces that had taken Luo Kou Du continued to hunker down in the port, merely strengthening the city¡¯s fortifications without showing any intention to move out. Seeing this, the people of Ning Army inside the main camp couldn¡¯t help but heave a sigh of relief. In their minds, they surmised that the Chu forces were likely running out of steam and had only seized Luo Kou Du in response to the new conflicts Ning had initiated in Hengyang and Luyang. ¡°` Other aspects also seemed to have little reserves left. However, this sense of stability did not last for two days. On the third day after Chen Qing¡¯s departure, after much effort, the message from Changsha finally broke through the Chu State¡¯s blockade and reached the main camp. ¡°Chu bandit Huang Xuan led his army to attack Changsha from behind. Marquis Wuxin was unprepared, and the seventy-thousand-strong army perished overnight. In the midst of the rout, Huang Xuan cut him down, and he perished in battle?¡± Shen Qiu, upon receiving this terrible news, was completely dumbstruck on the spot. The other officials who heard the news were also panic-stricken, with faces full of shock. It was Bai Yian who reacted quickly. After coming back to his senses from the painful realization, he immediately said, ¡°Your Majesty, the Chu bandits have been plotting this for a long time. They first seized Luo Kou Du to cut off our retreat. Then they defeated our army in Changsha, cutting off our external aid. Now our great army is encircled on three sides¡ªnorth, west, and south¡ªby Chu forces. If they converge from all three sides and send raiders to harass our land-based grain road, all one hundred thousand of us will have nowhere to be buried. This is indeed a critical moment of survival. Your subject pleads with Your Majesty to immediately break camp and withdraw the troops, leading them back to Yuzhang to secure our rear. Once we retreat, the area north of the river will also be indefensible. Please send instructions to Martial Proclamation Marquis Yang Jing to withdraw back to Yuzhang with his naval forces and regroup with us. The armies from Hengyang and Luyang should do the same. Now that Changsha has fallen, the Chu bandits¡¯ momentum has surged, enabling them to divert even more troops. These two detachments deep in enemy territory are isolated and weak¡ªlikely to be exploited by the Chu bandits. We should withdraw to our own country and strictly defend our cities against the Chu people.¡± As soon as Bai Yian spoke, his words steadied Shen Qiu and the others as if they were the mighty Heavenly Pillars, stabilizing their minds in an instant. In the midst of the chaos, Shen Qiu could not afford to think too much. Seeing that Bai Yian¡¯s proposed countermeasure was well-considered, he immediately agreed. ¡°What Wuan Marquis said is true, We will now order¡­¡± ¡°Report¡ª¡± Before Shen Qiu could finish speaking, suddenly a cry for attention came from outside the hall. A junior officer burst in, knelt down immediately after entering, and said, ¡°Your Majesty, urgent news from Yuzhang: seven days ago, a hundred thousand Chu bandits from Southsea invaded Yuzhang and attacked Luyang. Luyang was defenseless and fell to the Chu bandits¡ªit has now been completely lost. At the same time, three days ago, tens of thousands of Chu bandits from Changsha entered Yuzhang and are now heading straight for the prefectural capital of Nanchang. Yichun has already fallen to the bandits, and the Chu people have reached Yuzhang, only a few cities away from the prefectural city. The Prefect begs to inform Your Majesty that he will defend Nanchang City to the death, swearing to share the fate of Yuzhang. However, Yuzhang is defenseless, and Nanchang has no more than ten thousand soldiers; I fear they cannot hold for long. Your Majesty is urgently requested to lead the army back and provide relief to Yuzhang.¡± This junior officer did not see the expressions of the people in the hall and, in his urgency to summon reinforcements, brought another ¡°surprise¡± to the monarch and his ministers present. ¡°Puh¡ª¡± Upon hearing yet another piece of terrible news, Shen Qiu could no longer contain the resentment in his heart, and a mouthful of fresh blood sprayed out, with his vision going dark and seeing stars. His body swayed unsteadily a few times before collapsing on the desk. He only muttered to himself, ¡°This is impossible, this is impossible¡­ How could the Chu people reach our rear, how could there be trouble at our rear¡­¡± Luo Kou Du, Jiangxia, Changsha, Yuzhang¡ªnow the Chu army was striking from all four sides, enclosing Shen Qiu and his hundred thousand troops completely at Jiangxia. With all possible retreats cut off and Chu forces advancing from every direction, it was truly a case of being surrounded by Chu¡¯s songs. Chapter 868 - Chapter 868: Chapter 369: The Fall of Ning Camp Chapter 868: Chapter 369: The Fall of Ning Camp ¡°Your Majesty!¡± ¡°Quick, someone fetch the imperial physician!¡± The officials of Ning Army saw Shen Qiu faint, already panicked by the news that the enemy had stolen behind them, and immediately became even more flustered. For a moment, some went to check on him, others called for help, and still others gathered together, full of anxiety. Seeing this scene, Bai Yian could no longer hold back, and with a shout, ¡°Enough, all of you shut up!¡± One shout, like a thunderclap on a clear day, snapped everyone to attention. All eyes turned to Bai Yian, uncertain of what the Wuan Marquis was planning. ¡°Yuzhang is now defenseless, and the Chu bandits have crossed the borders; it is surely difficult to defend. We, situated in Jiangxia, are a lone army deep within the heart of Chu State, with both our land and water grain roads severed by the enemy. The main army will run out of food and fodder within days.¡± Bai Yian saw everyone had been silenced and, knowing there was no time to lose, spoke directly, ¡°To remain in Jiangxia, waiting for the Chu bandits to capture Yuzhang and surround us from behind, without food and fodder, would mean a death without a place to be buried for all of us. Before His Majesty lost consciousness, he had agreed to my request to retreat. A royal command has been issued, and we should follow orders. I now, as the deputy commander of the main army, take over military affairs in the camp while His Majesty is unconscious. Are you all willing to follow my commands?¡± By the end of his speech, Bai Yian looked around with piercing eyes and an imposing aura. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.?¦Ï The officials in the hall looked at one another, remembering indeed that just before passing out, His Majesty had agreed to the Wuan Marquis¡¯s request. And considering the current situation, having someone step forward to take charge of the overall situation was certainly not a bad thing. Though the Wuan Marquis had an extreme disposition, he was indeed one of the few among them capable of handling major matters. At this moment, there was no alternative but him, So after a moment of hesitation, they all nodded and bowed, saying, ¡°We are willing to follow your command, Marquis.¡± ¡°Good. Since there are no objections, let me be blunt. While I am in charge of the main army, once a military order is issued, there will be no alterations. Anyone who disobeys will be executed!¡± Bai Yian spoke with chilling resolve, then asked, ¡°Where is Li Dao?¡± ¡°I am here.¡± Amid the officials, Marquis Wuyang Li Dao stepped forward and saluted Bai Yian, indicating his willingness to comply. Bai Yian nodded at him and then issued his command, ¡°I now issue my first military order. The Front Camp of the main army is to strengthen its vigilance, strictly defend the camp, and be wary of Chu bandits attacking.¡± Li Dao was the only other Inborn, besides Shen Qiu and Bai Yian, remaining in Jiangxia¡¯s main camp. In terms of rank, he was not inferior to Bai Yian¡ªthey held equal status and were both Inborn, with no significant disparity in strength. Therefore, Bai Yian needed Li Dao¡¯s support to take control of the main camp. Otherwise, his so-called ¡°those who disobey the orders, be executed¡± would be nothing but a joke. Because if Li Dao were to disobey, Bai Yian would not be able to execute him, nor did he have the authority and strength to do so. Even Shen Qiu, the Heavenly Son, in actuality, would find it quite difficult to kill an Inborn Grandmaster, unless they offered no resistance. Luckily, Li Dao showed no intention of contending for power with Bai Yian, but rather appeared supportive, which made Bai Yian very grateful and satisfied. Dangerous times for the country did not mean everyone was incompetent and treacherous¡ªthere were still capable and loyal officials. ¡°I will comply with the orders.¡± Hearing the command, Li Dao solemnly responded, ¡°I will ensure the defense of the Front Camp. While the camp stands, I stand; should the camp fall, I fall. I shall never let you down, General.¡± Ever since the establishment of Ning Army¡¯s Jiangxia main camp, this line of camps had been divided into three areas. The most perilous, directly facing Jiangxia city, was the Front Camp; situated in the middle was the Central Army¡¯s main camp that Shen Qiu mentioned; and in the rear was the Rear Camp where supplies were stored, the wounded were cared for, and logistics from further back were managed, covering the rear flank. Among the three camps, Li Dao had been in charge of the Front Camp since the start, responsible for all its affairs. Now, after several Great Wars, there were still about thirty thousand soldiers left in the Front Camp¡ªold veterans, the most elite forces of the main camp. Meanwhile, in Jiangxia city, the Chu Army had only about fifty thousand men. With thirty thousand elite troops, along with strict defense of the camp and defensive fortifications for support, even accounting for the widely proclaimed strength of Lu Yuan, the ¡°First of Jiangnan,¡± as long as they were careful, even if he personally led the attack, Li Dao should have no problem holding out for a period of time. With Li Dao securing the rear, Bai Yian could be free of worry. ¡°The Central Army generals, heed my command!¡± After arranging the Front Camp, Bai Yian continued. ¡°I am present.¡± In the hall, more than a dozen Central Army commanders stepped forward, saluting Bai Yian. As the position Bai Yian held was that of the deputy commander, his main responsibility on normal days was to assist Shen Qiu, managing the Ning Army of the Jiangxia region. And since Shen Qiu was in charge of the overall situation and did not have the energy to deal with the myriad trivial matters in the army, he had delegated many powers and responsibilities to his subordinates to handle military affairs on his behalf. Bai Yian was one of these subordinates. As the deputy commander, he led the various camps of the Central Army. Thus, the Central Army commanders present were actually his direct subordinates. It was much easier for Bai Yian to give orders to his own subordinates. Seeing the Central Army personnel lined up, he instructed, ¡°You must immediately return to your camps, swiftly organize your troops and horses, and then in the order of your respective camps, begin moving towards Yuzhang in the rear.¡± Deploy the camps, with the first five serving as the vanguard. The remaining fifteen camps will be led personally by me. Once the vanguard has departed, we shall follow the confirmed routes, slowly catching up. Cui Hao, you will serve as the vanguard for these five camps, leading the way to Yuzhang, scouting the path for our main army.¡± Bai Yian looked towards an older, seemingly stalwart Central Army general among them, and issued the order. Chapter 869 - Chapter 869: Chapter 369: The Fall of Ning Camp_2 Chapter 869: Chapter 369: The Fall of Ning Camp_2 ¡°I obey the command.¡± Cui Hao stepped out, received the order token, and immediately called the leading generals of the first five camps to go out and prepare. The other Central Army generals, seeing this, also excused themselves one after another and went back to their own camps to gather their soldiers. Bai Yian looked at the retreating figures of his many subordinates quietly nodding to himself. The Central Army of the Ning had fifty thousand men, divided into twenty camps, each with two thousand five hundred soldiers. These troops were all personally trained by Bai Yian, and their officers at all levels had been handpicked by him. He was confident in his subordinates whom he had personally trained and believed that these reliable men would not let him down. ¡°All units of the rear camp, heed my command!¡± Having arranged the Central Army, Bai Yian issued orders to the last group. ¡°We await your command.¡± In the hall, only a few of the rear camp¡¯s leading officers remained standing. ¡°You are to return to your camps immediately, organize all supplies, prepare food and fodder, and make arrangements for the transport of the wounded. Once I lead the Central Army out, your rear camp will follow behind to ensure the secure supply for our main force,¡± instructed Bai Yian. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? ¡°Yes!¡± The rear camp officers replied respectfully as they accepted the command. The rear camp of the Ning Army had twenty thousand men, divided into four camps. The first was the Wounded Soldiers Camp with over three thousand men, all of whom were convalescing and had no combat capability, being merely a burden. The second was the Train Guard Camp with eight thousand men, responsible for the safeguarding of the army¡¯s food and fodder, weapons, medicines, and various other supplies. The third was the Cooks Camp with over a thousand men, dedicated to preparing meals for the hundred thousand strong army. The fourth was the Auxiliary Soldiers Camp with over seven thousand men, in charge of handling miscellaneous duties, logistics, and running errands for the main force. While numerous, these four camps¡¯ combat strength was low. They were called soldiers but in quality only matched that of prefectures and counties soldiers, not fit for significant use. Thus, Bai Yian had no intention of using them in tough battles; all that was required was to ensure the logistics for the main army. The rear camp¡¯s officers also left swiftly. ¡°I hope I can successfully break through this time and retreat safely to Yuzhang with the army.¡± Standing alone in the vast council hall with all the ministers dispersed and Shen Qiu already taken away to see the royal physician, Bai Yian stood still, reviewing all the orders he had just given, eventually letting out a breath and sighing quietly. Facing the crisis of being surrounded by the Chu army with cut off retreat paths at Yuzhang, the pressure in Bai Yian¡¯s heart was far from light, as it seemed on the surface. With tens of thousands of enemies about to strike, and himself trapped in a tight siege with shortages of food and fodder and supplies, the situation had escalated to extremely dangerous levels. A little mistake could lead to the collapse of the great army and the ruin of the country and family. Carrying heavy responsibilities, Bai Yian naturally trembled with caution, not daring to slack off at all. ¡°The Chu army is rampant and difficult to control; they¡¯ve already swept through Jiangnan. But I swear by the name of my ancestor, the Wuan Marquis, as long as I¡¯m here, the Chu bandits will never dream of destroying our country or extinguishing Jiangdong.¡± After meditating briefly and calming his mind, Bai Yian opened his eyes, muttered to himself, and firmed his resolve. He then stepped out of the hall and rushed toward the drill ground. The military order had been given, and the Central Army vanguard led by Cui Hao had already departed from the camp for a while. The rest of the Central Army units had also consumed the meals prepared by the rear camp and were now assembled and ready. It was time for him to depart. The journey ahead was fraught with danger, but he was determined to smooth over the fierce enemies and succeed upon arrival. Bai Yian was on his way. At the same time, the entire Ning Army Jiangxia main camp of one hundred thousand men in the front, middle, and rear camps was moving quickly at his command. ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C The movements of the Ning Army were soon noticed by Lu Yuan, who had been keeping watch from outside. After all, the deployment of one hundred thousand men was a significant operation, making an enormous amount of noise that was impossible to conceal. Moreover, Lu Yuan had previously spread tens of thousands of cavalry soldiers as spies around the Ning Army camp. Any slight abnormality from the Ning Army could not escape the scrutiny of these tens of thousands of eyes. ¡°The Ning people have received news, realizing something is amiss behind them, recognizing their precarious situation, and wanting to escape,¡± deduced Lu Yuan. With reports from various scouting cavalry units not requiring much intelligence, Lu Yuan understood the Ning Army¡¯s intentions. Given the current situation of the Ning Army, if Shen Qiu¡¯s brain was not impaired, he would realize that breaking out with his army and fleeing were his only ways of life. Although aware of the Ning Army¡¯s desire to escape, Lu Yuan was not overly worried. By now, he had deployed his forces. The Ning Army led by Shen Qiu was surrounded on all four sides: front, back, south, and north, by strong forces, effectively sealing off the Ning people¡¯s escape routes completely. Now that Shen Qiu realized something was wrong and wanted to escape for his life, But Lu Yuan¡¯s ¡®slay the dragon¡¯ strategy was already in place; could this trapped dragon simply walk away? While there were examples from past to present of dragons rising to the heavens from desperate straits and seeking survival, Shen Qiu was certainly not the protagonist of those stories. The hundred thousand strong Ning Army, this large dragon, was firmly in Lu Yuan¡¯s grasp. ¡°Order all units to march out of the city immediately. I will personally take to the field and fiercely attack the Ning Army Camp. I want to break the camp today,¡± Lu Yuan immediately summoned the generals within the city and issued the order to go into battle. After the generals left to prepare, he issued several more military orders in succession. Order the cavalry units near the Ning Army to immediately abandon the Ning Army camp, assemble into teams, and turn to harass the Ning forces escaping eastward; to slow their pace and buy time for the approaching armies from all around. Order the troops under Han Hua at Luo Kou Du to head south from the ferry crossing and intercept the Ning Army on their retreat at the main routes, and try to block the enemy. If it¡¯s difficult to stop them, follow them along the way, harassing them and waiting for reinforcements to arrive. Order the troops under Sun Siwen on the southern front to abandon their approach to Jiangxia and reverse direction, heading straight for the border of Yuzhang Prefecture in Ning Country at Yongxing and Ruichang, to establish a defensive line there and block the Ning Army from returning to their homeland. Regarding Huang Xuan¡¯s route, Lu Yuan communicated with his avatars to understand that these troops had just arrived at the south of Nanchang City in Yuzhang Prefecture. Chapter 870 - Chapter 870: Chapter 369: The Fall of Ning Camp_3 Chapter 870: Chapter 369: The Fall of Ning Camp_3 The Prefect of Yuzhang, Wu Che, hastily gathered his troops and conscripted able-bodied men from the city. At that time, there were more than ten thousand Ning soldiers defending the city, but the defense was merely average and even quite vulnerable. Huang Xuan was leading the siege, at the forefront of his soldiers. After days of relentless assault, it would take another day or two to breach the city. Seeing this, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t assign any tasks to this particular avatar. Intercepting Shen Qiu¡¯s main force was important, but taking Yuzhang was equally if not more critical. After all, allowing Shen Qiu and his troops to return would mean Ning would only have a few tens of thousands of battered soldiers. But taking Yuzhang would mean that Ning would lose control of a prefecture, a population of six million, and a crucial source of money and provisions. All of these were far more significant than mere tens of thousands of soldiers. Moreover, once Huang Xuan captured Yuzhang, he would have effectively blocked Shen Qiu¡¯s retreat. If Shen Qiu could break through Lu Yuan¡¯s successive blockades and give chase all the way, when the Ning army reached Yuzhang, Nanchang City would be the next point of resistance, and it was the most fortified stronghold. At that time, Huang Xuan would personally take action to stop Shen Qiu. If the Ning army could not break through, it wouldn¡¯t matter. After taking Nanchang, Shen Qiu would also lead his troops to join in the final encirclement and suppression of the Ning army. This time the goal was to encircle and annihilate a hundred thousand men, including three Inborn masters. To wipe them all out in one fell swoop wouldn¡¯t be easy. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï But there would always be time to catch up; Lu Yuan was not in a hurry. And as the military orders to gather the troops and march out of the city were given, and orders were issued to the other three routes of soldiers, suddenly the entire Chu army, following the Ning troops, began to mobilize rapidly. ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C Upon receiving the news of the Ning army¡¯s escape route, in addition to dispatching ten thousand cavalry to harass and obstruct the Ning bandits, Lu Yuan immediately gathered forty thousand infantry from Jiangxia City, preparing to attack the Ning army¡¯s front camp. So by the time Bai Yian led his troops away, within just six hours, the Chu army had completed mobilization, not only leaving the city but also making preparations for an assault on the camp. And Lu Yuan himself led the charge, employing the power of the Innate to bravely scale the walls first, smashing the front lines and seizing fortifications. The Ning army¡¯s front camp. Blood pervaded the air, and the sound of killing shook the heavens. At the front line of the entire camp, tens of thousands of soldiers battled fiercely, and countless lives swiftly perished, turning into a hellish slaughterhouse. ¡°Haha, Ning bandits, meet your death!¡± Lu Yuan was surrounded by a ring of red divine fire, and within thirty feet around him had turned into a molten hell, igniting and consuming all that came close. Wherever he went, Ning soldiers turned to ash or fled in terror, with none able to stand against him. Under his leadership, the Chu army quickly broke through several of Ning army¡¯s front camps, making rapid progress, like a hot knife through butter. Seeing that at this rate the entire main camp would be breached, Lidao, who had been hiding in the back lines, finally could not sit still and leaped out to intervene. ¡°Damn it, Chu scum, don¡¯t be arrogant! Bullying ordinary soldiers is no skill, show some courage and battle me!¡± With a roar, Lidao transformed into a Fierce Sun and descended toward Lu Yuan. This man also possessed a solar-heat type external body, a Fierce Sun, which bore quite some resemblance to Lu Yuan¡¯s Red Sun Divine Fire external body. Perhaps it was precisely because of this. So after seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s external body, Lidao felt that with his own Fierce Sun external body, his resistance to and defense against Red Sun Divine Fire should be enough to be immune to much of it. Therefore, he dared stand out to duel with the renowned Inborn assassin, the King of Chu. ¡°Haha, good timing, the rat finally dares to show its head. I was starting to think you would just keep turtling up until the camp was breached and you fled far away!¡± Lu Yuan saw Lidao emerging, but he was not the least bit flustered; instead, he let out a hearty laugh, turned around to face forward, and charged to meet him with a fierce shout, ¡°Watch me slay you!¡± Lidao, a mere Inborn who had broken through five to six years ago, could only be considered to have just solidified this realm, getting used to the methods of Inborn Grandmasters. Essentially, he was a newcomer in the Inborn realm, whose strength Lu Yuan didn¡¯t take seriously at all. Previously, the opponent had been hiding in the dark, unwilling to come forward, so Lu Yuan did not dare to force him out, fearing that he would scare him away. Even for this reason, he had deliberately restrained some of his strength, making the power of his Red Sun Divine Fire seem less terrifying. An Inborn Grandmaster who avoids contact with others and is focused on escaping is very difficult to capture. But now that the opponent had delivered himself to his doorstep and actively engaged with him, that really was courting death. And that was indeed the case. As Lidao leaped forward, transforming into a Raging Sun, he felt an unbearable scorching heat hit his face the moment it made slight contact with the Divine Fire around Lu Yuan. Under this intense heat, his own Raging Sun External Body seemed more like a cool moon, while the opponent¡¯s Divine Fire was more akin to the fierce sun. With Lu Yuan¡¯s current strength in Martial Arts, coupled with the aid of the Immortal Method, he had almost reached the limit of the second realm of the Inborn in over a decade. He even had a premonition that if he could condense the second of the Five Elements within his body and advance further in his Immortal Dao Cultivation, then, with the growth of his magical power, he might even be able to elevate his Martial Arts and achieve a breakthrough to the third realm of the Inborn that had been unreachable by martial artists for hundreds of years, which is the realm of Grandmasters. By then, even without using magic power, relying solely on his Martial Arts, he would be as omnipotent as a god or a devil, known as an Earthly Immortal. But even now, not having reached this point, with his Raging Sun External Body of the second Inborn realm, he already had an overwhelming advantage over Lidao¡¯s inferior version. ¡°You¡¯ve been hiding your strength all along¡ª¡± After exchanging more than a dozen moves with Lu Yuan, Lidao had already accumulated over a dozen burns and scalds on his body, and his manifested Raging Sun External Body had dimmed a lot, with a look of panic in his eyes. ¡°Now that you realize it, it¡¯s too late!¡± Lu Yuan scoffed coldly, his True Pneuma surged within him, and the Divine Fire he released suddenly blazed even more fiercely, instantly engulfing the entire Raging Sun, completely obscuring its light. In order to block the Divine Fire, Lidao had to gather all his True Pneuma, resisting with all his might, inevitably leading to some small neglect due to his distraction. Therefore, when a chill passed over his skin and he subconsciously wanted to dodge, his body was half a beat too slow. Then a sharp sword energy slashed through his waist and abdomen, piercing through his body, almost cutting him in half. The previously impregnable Raging Sun External Body around him suddenly had gaping holes due to the severe damage. Seizing the opportunity, the Divine Fire surged into the gaps, and in an instant, overwhelmed Lidao, whose True Pneuma was disrupted from the heavy blow and could no longer mount an effective defense, turning him into a torch. In just a few breaths, all that remained in sight was a pile of ashes and a withered, dehydrated head that was deliberately left intact. ¡°Lidao is dead, why have you not yet surrendered!¡± Lu Yuan extended his hand and beckoned, the head encased in True Pneuma landed in the palm of his hand; then with a leap, he flew into the midst of the Ning Army up in the air, forcibly hovering with True Pneuma, letting out an enraged roar. Many of the Ning soldiers had witnessed the death of their Commander and, seeing this, looked at the head with eyes that could not close in death, causing any remaining will to resist to utterly dissipate. One after another, the sounds of weapons hitting the ground, and the sight of prostrate figures bowing in submission, spread like a contagious plague throughout the Front Camp following the news of Lidao¡¯s death. That day, the Ning Army¡¯s camp was breached and taken by the Chu forces, all within six hours. The Ning Army¡¯s Jiangxia main camp was thoroughly eradicated. Chapter 871 - Chapter 871: Chapter 370: Inborn Extreme Boundary Chapter 871: Chapter 370: Inborn Extreme Boundary At midnight, Lu Yuan finished meditating and recovered the True Pneuma he had spent in today¡¯s battle before stepping out of the room. During the daytime battle, he had not exerted much effort before he successfully killed Marquis Wuyang Li Dao of Ningguo and shattered the will of the Ning Army to resist, swiftly concluding the fight in an extremely satisfying manner. However, behind this immense satisfaction lay the vast expenditure of Lu Yuan¡¯s True Pneuma. In order to gain suppression over Li Dao¡¯s external body and create an opportunity to cast his spells, Lu Yuan had nearly expended all his True Pneuma in just a few breaths. Enveloped by the Divine Fire of the Red Sun, transformed from his immense True Pneuma, it was only then that he achieved absolute suppression over the Raging Sun External Body. He obscured Li Dao¡¯s external senses with endless scorching flames, gaining the opportunity for a fatal blow with his Talisman Sword Technique. In reality, such a method would normally never be used by an Inborn Grandmaster. Although Lu Yuan had suppressed Li Dao, the Fierce Sun that resonated so closely with his Divine Fire was indeed, as Li Dao had originally thought. It could only suppress but was incapable of breaking through directly. He had spent vast amounts of True Pneuma and seemed to have gained the advantage, yet this advantage could not last. If, within the short moments while the advantage persisted, he couldn¡¯t find an opening and quickly breach Li Dao¡¯s defenses, then once his True Pneuma was exhausted, he would completely lose the ability to continue fighting. If he did not wish to die at that point, he could only flee in a dishevelled panic. Therefore, for a normal Inborn Grandmaster, even if they had the advantage of being in a higher realm, like the second realm against the first, achieving victory would require cautious exchanges¡ªutilizing their robust True Pneuma and experience to gradually build up small advantages into an overwhelming victory, finally striking down the opponent in one fell swoop. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?0 Even then, for an Inborn Grandmaster of the second realm to leave behind a first realm Grandmaster, it would be very difficult. Unless one had support or the first realm Grandmaster was in terrible condition, the thought of killing the opponent was no more than a dream. Given the Inborn Grandmasters¡¯ abilities to preserve their lives, within the same realm, unless they reached the third realm as a great Grandmaster, experiencing a fundamental change, the gap between them was not so significant. The abilities of a second realm Grandmaster compared to a first realm Grandmaster essentially boiled down to having a more bountiful True Pneuma and a more perfected external body; there was no fundamental difference, just a matter of experience. The notion of, like Lu Yuan, determining life and death with another Inborn Grandmaster within a few breaths, was utterly impossible. What allowed him to do so was his unmatched, fierce, and decisive Talisman Sword Technique, in addition to his True Pneuma external body. Immortal Techniques were the means that could deliver fatal blows and have a decisive impact. The martial arts external body was merely a tool for concealing methods and creating the conditions for their application. In the end, Li Dao was still too young. Though he came from one of the Aristocratic families and was also Inborn, and had even gained some understanding of Immortal Cultivation Techniques through the cooperation between Ning Country and Ziyun Dao, his understanding was rather superficial and fanciful. As for the true power of Immortal Techniques and how to guard against them, due to environmental reasons, the Cultivators of the Purple Cloud Dao could not possibly waste their precious Magic Power displaying these techniques just for his practice. So his understanding was limited, his knowledge too scant, lacking any experience at all. Ultimately, without being prepared, he fell straight into Lu Yuan¡¯s trap and had his life taken easily. Nevertheless, despite the ease of his victory, Lu Yuan had completely expended all his True Pneuma in today¡¯s battle. Additionally, he had paid some of his Magic Power, so the cost was not insignificant. The depletion of Magic Power, which decreases with each use, needs no further mention. With Lu Yuan¡¯s current foundation in Martial Arts, recovering the robust True Pneuma within his body would take a considerable amount of Time. After a thoroughly gratifying Great War, it took him over two hours to finally recover all his True Pneuma, which was exceedingly slow. This was because he had a foundation in the Immortal Method and the earth-form pneuma residing within him, which allowed him to recover quicker than most people. If it were any other ordinary Inborn Grandmaster, thinking of restoring completely drained True Pneuma in less than three to four hours would be pure fantasy. A few minutes of duel and half a day of recovery¡ªsuch is the extreme consumption in the pinnacle of Inborn Grandmasters¡¯ Confrontation Through Spells. It is precisely because of this reason, that unless absolutely necessary, or safety is assured, very few Inborn Grandmasters engage in full-strength combat with others. Even when forced, they always reserve a portion of True Pneuma within, prepared to withdraw and flee at any moment. Just like Li Dao, when he engaged with Lu Yuan today, he always retained three to four layers of True Pneuma within his body, ready to flee. He just didn¡¯t anticipate that Lu Yuan¡¯s lethal move would come so swiftly and forcefully; he was unable to act and was promptly killed. He became another restless soul under Lu Yuan¡¯s hands. ¡°However, today¡¯s method can indeed be developed and utilized frequently,¡± Lu Yuan thought as he reviewed today¡¯s combat experience, quite satisfied with the battle strategy he created, which relied on consuming True Pneuma and surprise attacks with spells. Currently, Magic Power is precious; the more it¡¯s used, the less remains, and it cannot be expended recklessly. But True Pneuma, as long as one¡¯s vitality can keep up, can be replenished at any moment. The only drawback is the need for a considerable amount of Ingredients to replenish vitality after its consumption, potentially costing a great deal of silver tales. Yet for Lu Yuan, who is wealthy as the sea, this is truly no concern at all. If he wishes, within the Nine Provinces, countless delicacies and heavenly treasures are at his disposal. Restoring a bit of vitality is nothing but an effortless matter. Trading True Pneuma for Magic Power is, for Lu Yuan, indeed the most cost-effective deal. Chapter 872 - Chapter 872: Chapter 370: Inborn Extreme Realm_2 Chapter 872: Chapter 370: Inborn Extreme Realm_2 Moreover, this is only temporary for now. ¡°Once my Immortal Dao Cultivation breaks through to the Gathering Two Qi, there is a high probability that it will propel my Martial Arts Cultivation, elevating both simultaneously to the realm of an Innate Great Grandmaster at the third Inborn tier. Once I become a Great Grandmaster, then my Martial Arts strength will be comparable to the realm of an Immortal at the Condensation of One Qi Realm. In this way, my standard martial forces become akin to the realm of an Immortal at the Condensation of One Qi. The realm of Condensation of Two Qi, then, becomes an unconventional power that I can reserve.¡± Upon considering this, Lu Yuan could not help but feel excited. An Inborn Great Grandmaster, equivalent to the realm of an Immortal at the Condensation of One Qi, would already form an overwhelming advantage over Masters at the first and second Inborn tiers in terms of power hierarchy. Take today¡¯s battle. If he had had the strength of a Great Grandmaster, he wouldn¡¯t even need to use spells at the end. He could merely rely on the Great Grandmaster¡¯s Martial Aura and the advantage gained from borrowing the power of Heaven and Earth to utterly crush Lidao. Yes, after reaching the third tier, a Great Grandmaster¡¯s martial arts external body transforms into a Martial Aura. According to the texts Lu Yuan had gathered, the description of a Great Grandmaster¡¯s Martial Aura went as follows: ¡°Bestowed by the heavens, transformed by the essence of the Dao, the natural order, the Inborn weather.¡± Indeed, although this description is somewhat abstract, it has already clearly articulated the essence of an Innate Great Grandmaster. That is, the natural Heavenly Path, the Inborn weather. To put it simply, the martial arts external body of an Inborn Master, which initially imitates Heaven and Earth, transforms at the Great Grandmaster¡¯s third tier into Heaven and Earth itself. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï From the initial resemblance in form, it evolves into an embodiment of spirit, becoming completely the weather of Heaven and Earth. From Acquired returning to Inborn, becoming the very nature of Heaven and Earth. Since the external body has become the Inborn weather, any moves executed naturally possess the power of Heaven and Earth, instead of the poor imitation of the external body by an Inborn Master. One is the weather itself; the other, an inferior imitation. The difference in strength between the two is now quite obvious. Even because it has become Inborn weather, when a Great Grandmaster invokes it, the True Pneuma consumed is actually less than what was previously expended when displaying the martial arts external body. Because when a Great Grandmaster displays the Inborn weather, it essentially means invoking this weather¡¯s appearance, utilizing the strength of Heaven and Earth. His True Pneuma is merely the catalyst that actively initiates and maintains this weather, nothing more. This process does not actually drain much True Pneuma. After all, how much energy can it take to insert a key, turn it on, and keep it in the on position? By contrast, an ordinary Master, in order to mimic the effect of Heaven and Earth, must consume a vast amount of True Pneuma to maintain it, ultimately producing only an inferior imitation. Turning oneself into an output source, the energy lost in the process is expectedly significant. Therefore, it¡¯s logical for ordinary Inborn Masters to have difficulty sustaining long battles. And it is this gap that, when an Innate Great Grandmaster faces an ordinary Master, the difference isn¡¯t merely in Inborn weather and martial arts external bodies, but also in how much less their True Pneuma is depleted. A Great Grandmaster can exhibit the Inborn weather and maintain it for six hours, even Two or Three Hours. Whereas an ordinary Master sustaining the martial arts external body can maintain it for merely fifteen minutes at the first tier, and thirty minutes at the second tier ¨C a difference of several times over. This disparity is so vast that it barely seems like a gap within the same realm, thus Innate Great Grandmasters are revered as Earthly Gods and Immortals. Those who can mobilize the power of Heaven and Earth are seen by mortals as akin to Immortals and divine beings, aren¡¯t they? Of course. An Innate Great Grandmaster, already comparable to the realm of an Immortal at the Condensation of One Qi, displays Inborn weather that differs little from spells. Such strength, compared to a Cultivator¡¯s, is almost indistinguishable. Being addressed as an Immortal is only fitting. It¡¯s just that this ¡°Immortal¡± refers to the Immortal of Cultivators, not that of the true Immortals. The conventional meaning of a true Immortal involves advancing to Five Qi Towards Primordial, condensing the flower at the crown and bearing the Dao Fruit of Truth. Even the lowest-grade Human Flower True Person, commonly known as a Human Dao Fruit, can easily live for a Passage of a Thousand Years. If one practices life-extending Cultivation Techniques and finds some worldly exotics that prolong life, living two or three thousand years is also not out of the question. As for the higher-ranked Earth Flower True Man, they can live for over Ten Thousand Years. This is true longevity, existing in the world as an Earth Immortal, enduring through the changes of seas into mulberry fields, preserving one¡¯s eternal existence. Regarding the highest level, the Sky Flower True Man, ancient texts have scant descriptions. For in the entire Nine Provinces world, the most powerful beings of ancient times were but Earth Immortals; a Heavenly Flower Immortal has never appeared. Whether this state of being exists, or what wondrous realm it might be, even the ancient Immortals were not clear. Only some vague records have been passed down. ¡°Immune to myriad tribulations, sharing longevity with heaven, moving stars and changing constellations, the pinnacle of Heaven and Humans.¡± Descriptions are scarce, but they still provide some insights into the capabilities of a Sky Flower True Man. Firstly, their strength is great, hence they can withstand myriad tribulations without being destroyed. Secondly, at this stage, there is no limit to their life span, allowing them to share longevity with heaven. As for the latter two phrases, they merely describe that the Sky Flower True Man¡¯s methods are exquisite, reaching the ultimate pinnacle just beneath the Heavenly Path. Lu Yuan is currently in the realm of Condensation of One Qi, just shy of two Qi, and the gap from that exalted state of a Heavenly Immortal is unimaginably vast. Reading these descriptions, it is naturally difficult to truly grasp their profound mysteries. That¡¯s why, when I first saw the descriptions of the three types of Immortals of Heaven and Earth and Mankind, I merely regarded them as extraordinary tales, purely to broaden my knowledge and did not delve too deeply.¡± Chapter 873 - Chapter 873: Chapter 370 Inborn Extreme Realm_3 Chapter 873: Chapter 370 Inborn Extreme Realm_3 ¡°` However, with his own Changsheng Dao Guo, possessing an endless lifespan, he believed that one day, he would eventually reach such a profound realm. All it took was the quiet passage of time, and everything would be naturally achieved. Therefore, Lu Yuan was not in a hurry. A Human Immortal could live for a thousand years, at most two or three thousand years. Looking at his own situation, not to mention two or three thousand years, even compared to the Heavenly Immortals without lifespan limitations, it was still uncertain which one would find it more difficult to endure! Lu Yuan had this confidence; as long as he remained careful and dealt with things steadily, he absolutely could survive to the end and become the strongest in the world. The Heavenly Immortal might not be the limit, but just an important milestone, a turning point in one¡¯s life journey. ¡­ After restoring his True pneuma, Lu Yuan did not end his cultivation; instead, he continued to communicate with the Heavenly Pillars, drawing the Heavenly Qi into his body and refining his magic power. Now, as Chu State achieved consecutive victories on various battlefields and secured the three prefectures of Lingnan, along with many prefectures and counties in Yuzhang and Jianan, Lu Yuan¡¯s territory had suddenly expanded by nearly half, and the population had also increased accordingly. Moreover, after emerging victorious in the wrestling for power and defeating Ning Country in the decisive battle, the Qi Luck of the entire Yangzhou began to shift and turn towards Chu State. The hearts of the people of the Nine Provinces were also gradually converging upon him. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 With all these enhancements, the Qi Luck accumulated around him was almost twice what it had been before the war began. Under such flourishing Qi Luck, drawing the Heavenly and Earthly Aura now was incredibly convenient. With just a thought, vast amounts of aura would be drawn from the depths of the heavenly vault, descending from the Heavenly Pillars and pouring into Lu Yuan¡¯s body to be absorbed and circulated within. If previously, he was constantly in a state of poor spiritual energy, managing only to use three or four tenths of the efficiency of his state of drawing Qi, even with the aid of the Heavenly Pillars. Now, when he absorbed spiritual energy, he reached an efficiency of six or seven tenths. From barely surviving to just getting by, he was no longer malnourished. Even for a moment, the significant increase in the amount of spiritual energy absorbed was so overwhelming that he felt somewhat at a loss. Never having enjoyed such abundant spiritual energy before, he felt like a beggar who had suddenly become rich, his mind bewildered and at a loss. Fortunately, Lu Yuan¡¯s state of mind had become exceptionally firm over these years of cultivation, and he quickly cut through these miscellaneous thoughts and began to focus on his cultivation. After a long while, he concluded his cultivation for the day. ¡°Based on the amount of spiritual energy I am now drawing in, it is about seventy percent of my total refining capacity. Although it is not yet perfect, it is already much better than before. And this is only temporary. Right now, I have only taken a large part of Lingnan and a small part of Jiangdong; the occupied territory and population have not yet reached their limit. If later I can annihilate Song Country, subdue the southwestern Dali and Nanzhao, and then capture the two prefectures of Yuzhang and Jianan, then with such Qi Luck, the amount of spiritual energy I can draw will further increase by several tenths. At that time, when I absorb spiritual energy, it will be possible to reach the current limit of perfection.¡± Lu Yuan pondered in his heart. The Heavenly Qi drawn in by such territorial Qi Luck would satisfy his limit of absorbing spiritual energy when he was concentrating on one level of Qi. Later, when he began concentrating on two levels of energy (Qi) and after the breakthrough in his cultivation techniques, his capacity to absorb and efficiency of processing spiritual energy would further increase. But that was not a significant problem. Through his quiet observation based on his own cultivation level, as well as his comprehension and research into cultivation techniques, he roughly knew the limit of his capacity for absorbing spiritual energy when he began concentrating on two Qi levels. ¡°` As long as he could unify the entire Yangzhou and annex one hundred thousand li of mountains and rivers, by that time, with tens of millions of common people under his rule, using this Qi Luck to attract Spiritual Energy, he would surely meet the cultivation needs of Gathering Two Qi. Therefore, before the breakthrough in Gathering Two Qi, Lu Yuan only needed to properly manage Yangzhou and cultivate his own foundation, without the need for passive expansion to gain Qi Luck. This was his next strategic goal. Calculating carefully, from the twenty-eighth year of Longqing of Pre-Yue, to the current eleventh year of Shenwu, the land of Jiangnan and Yangzhou had been in chaos for a full twenty years. In these twenty years, from Taiping Dao, Jinghai Country, Five Poisons Sect, Seven Star Sect, Xi Shu, Zhou people moving southward, pacifying the Southwest, civil unrest in Ning Country, developing the valley, the Northern Expedition against Hanzhong, to the current two major camps, the war of Five Kingdoms¡­ One by one, just the wars that Lu Yuan had experienced, witnessed, participated in, and intervened in, were countless. The number of powers that had been exterminated during that phase was also beyond count. Even the number of countries that had perished, who knew how many there were? And among these wars, the soldiers and civilians who died, along with the natural disasters and calamities that came with war, were even more innumerable. Twenty years of shattered landscapes, wars, and calamities had already left the land of Jiangnan in ruins, a pitiable sight of desolation. Even the later period of stability, marked by the standoff between several states, the opposition of Chu Ning, and the coexistence of minor states for ten years, did not allow Yangzhou to fully recover its former glory. Lu Yuan had experienced the end of Pre-Yue, its last flourishing era. Although the grassroots level was chaotic, with corrupt officials, gangs rampant, and the hills infested with bandits and rebels. However, the harm brought by these minor sores and toxins paled in comparison to the bloodshed of the current times of strife. In the times of Pre-Yue, there were only eight prefectures, but the population exceeded thirty million. Now, the territory Lu Yuan ruled over differed little from Pre-Yue, with nearly eight complete prefectures in terms of land, but the population was barely fifteen million, only half of Pre-Yue¡¯s peak. Perhaps only after conquering Ning Country and fully taking over Jiangdong would the population be comparable to that of Pre-Yue. But, that would only be in terms of total population. After unifying Yangzhou, the directly ruled territory of Chu State would be more than half again as large as Pre-Yue, and even if the population was similar, the local prosperity still fell far short. To remedy this would naturally require a long period of rest and recovery, accumulating national strength, patiently waiting for the local population to multiply, and to mend the wounds of war. The grand undertaking of seizing Yangzhou was progressing smoothly. Unless something unexpected happened, by the end of this year, he could possibly take over the prefectures of Yuzhang and Jianan, occupying half of Jiangdong. In three to five years, it would be possible to destroy Ning Country and unify Yangzhou. This was much quicker and smoother than Lu Yuan¡¯s original strategy of owning Jiangnan within ten years and looking north towards Central State. And now, with more than a hundred years left until the eruption of the Southern Polar Poisonous Fire, there was ample preparation time. Such an extended period was enough to allow Lu Yuan to unify Yangzhou, then quietly recuperate, gradually accumulate strength, and gaze northward. By that time, having recuperated for a while, completely restored the prosperity of Jiangnan, or even further, accumulated the myriad financial and grain foundations of Chu State. One command would suffice, and millions of soldiers could gather in a moment. Leading the troops northward, at that time, the countries exhausted from resisting the cold waves and fighting over Central State, how could they resist such a lion? They would be utterly defeated. Chapter 874 - Chapter 874: Chapter 371 Difficult Escape Chapter 874: Chapter 371 Difficult Escape The carriages and horses shimmered in the light, winding forward like a dragon. The tens of thousands of Ning Army soldiers formed a long dragon, advancing rapidly eastwards along the imperial road. They had been traveling for two days and one night straight. The arduous journey had exhausted everyone, but not a single person complained, because they all knew that this journey was not merely a travel, but a flight for their lives. Their side had lost the great war. As a price for their defeat, hundreds of thousands of Chu soldiers were rapidly closing in from all directions, ready to encircle them at any moment. If they were to be trapped, not only would their lives be at risk, but they would also never be able to return home again. Facing such a terrifying outcome, everyone suppressed their fatigue, summoning fresh strength within them to keep moving forward. To survive! To return home! At this very moment, the two beliefs that Marquis Wuan had put forward before their departure had become the hope in the hearts of all the Ning Army soldiers, the source of their strength. In the middle of the long line of the Ning Army, a luxurious and huge carriage was guarded by nearly a hundred golden-armored knights. Beside the carriage, apart from the knights, there stood tall and burly eunuchs, with delicate and attractive palace maids seated in carriages following behind. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 Without a doubt, in an army rushing along the road, the only one who could still afford such a spectacle was the Heavenly Son of Ning Country, also the commander of the army, Shen Qiu. ¡°Where have we reached now?¡± Inside the carriage, spacious like a small cabin, Shen Qiu lay on a dragon couch, flipping through a Taoist Classic with an unreadable expression on his face. Next to him were two white-faced, beardless eunuchs attending to him. Hearing the Heavenly Son¡¯s question, they hurriedly replied, ¡°Your Majesty, the vanguard has already arrived in Yongxing territory.¡± ¡°Yongxing¡­¡± Shen Qiu pondered over the name and then let out a wistful sigh, ¡°We¡¯re almost at Yuzhang, nearly back to the homeland.¡± The young eunuch agreed, ¡°Yes, Your Majesty. Once we cross Yongxin and reach Ruichang, we¡¯ll be within Yuzhang territory. By then, we can return to our country, and the Chu army will not dare to pursue any further.¡± ¡°Not dare to pursue?¡± Shen Qiu gave a bitter laugh, his mood drooping, ¡°The Chu rogues have already surrounded Nanchang City, and their hundreds of thousands of soldiers are swarming in from all corners of the earth, all to capture me. How could they possibly not dare pursue?¡± ¡°Your Majesty, please take heart. Marquis Wuan is adept in war and comes from a family of renowned generals, a man of great talent. In the past few days, the Chu people have attacked several times, but each time they were easily repelled by Marquis Wuan,¡± the young eunuch comforted the Emperor, seeing his distressed mood, ¡°With him present, he will surely keep Your Majesty safe and ensure our peaceful return to the country.¡± ¡°Marquis Wuan, huh¡­¡± Upon hearing this name, Shen Qiu¡¯s feelings grew even more complicated. In fact, when he first heard that Yuzhang had been sneak-attacked by the Chu army, and even Nanchang was surrounded, with their army¡¯s retreat cut off, At that moment, Shen Qiu had indeed been furious to the point of fainting. But after all, he was a Grandmaster of the Inborn Second Realm. In the current world, with the cultivators of the Nine Provinces having mostly crossed the sea, apart from Lu Yuan, an aberration in combat, Shen Qiu was one of the very few at the pinnacle. Among the hundreds of Inborn Grandmasters in the Kyushu Ten Domain, there were only twenty or thirty who could reach the Second Realm of Inborn Masters. Out of every ten Inborn Grandmasters, there might not even be one at the Second Realm. This showed just how strong Shen Qiu¡¯s power truly was. In fact, it was because of this power that when the Xiao Family lost the people¡¯s trust and the Coastal Aristocratic Families were looking to elect a new leader, Shen Qiu, with his Second Realm Inborn Strength, emerged victoriously, replacing the Xiao Family to inaugurate a New Dynasty. Such was the weight of a Second Realm Grandmaster. However, it now seemed that being skilled in martial arts did not necessarily make one a good emperor. And those who lacked martial ability did not necessarily lack in other capacities. At least in terms of warfare, Shen Qiu¡¯s abilities were far inferior to his governance abilities. A war with Chu State not only cost him the dominance over Yangzhou but was now leading to the loss of half the lands he originally held. Having suffered such a devastating defeat, how could it not damage his spirit? How could it not cause disillusionment? Thus, when he awoke from his faint, Shen Qiu¡ªin his own tent, even before the imperial physician arrived¡ªcame to on his own accord. But after waking and hearing the people around him mention that during his fainting spell, the vice commander of the army, Marquis Wuan Bai Yian, had already taken over the entire army¡¯s command and begun arranging for the various units to break out and retreat, Shen Qiu, who had been longing to salvage the situation, suddenly fell silent. In that moment, he recalled Shen Qiu¡¯s many suggestions made to him previously. Like mustering all the troops in the country for a decisive battle with Chu, Or ceasing warfare, pulling all troops back to defend the country, extensively fortifying defenses, and enduring a war of attrition with Chu. Either strategy, had he chosen one at the time, might have changed the current situation drastically. But in the end, in order to balance the various interests within the country, he stubbornly and arrogantly took a moderate approach, completely ignoring Marquis Wuan¡¯s advice. Now, having reached this juncture, he was reaping what he had sown. It was because of this, that Shen Qiu, who had wanted to stand up and correct his mistakes, suddenly felt a fear rising within his heart. He feared that another one of his decisions would result in the burial of a hundred thousand soldiers. He feared that another one of his decisions would lead to the downfall of Ning Country. He feared that another one of his decisions would destroy the foundation built by generations of six clans and seven families over thousands of years. Continuous defeats, continuous mistakes in decision-making, had stripped away the former confidence and spirit of this once full-of-vim-and-vigor Emperor of Ning. Chapter 875 - Chapter 875: Chapter 371 Difficult Escape_2 Chapter 875: Chapter 371 Difficult Escape_2 At that moment, self-doubt and fear deeply filled his heart. Therefore, when he saw Shen Qiu standing out in the face of danger, taking over his own responsibilities, and beginning to lead the army to escape the crisis, he chose to retreat. It seemed in doing so, he would no longer have to bear guilt, bear infamy, bear the responsibility that had been pressing on him, making him nearly unable to breathe. Everything in the world seemed far away. All he needed to do was to shrink within the small space of his carriage, and he wouldn¡¯t need to worry or feel anxious anymore; someone would handle everything for him. Shen Qiu was like an ostrich burying its head, blinding himself from everything and no longer thinking. However, such escapism was ultimately an illusion. He knew that. As the Chu forces kept pressing and the situation in Ning Country continued to deteriorate, he couldn¡¯t possibly keep running away forever. One day, he would have to stand up. Either to perish along with Ning Country or to see it through the crisis together. That day wouldn¡¯t be far off. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? ¡°With the Wuan Marquis here, I can indeed rest easy,¡± Snapping out of his lengthy inner thoughts, Shen Qiu let out a long sigh, feeling lost and empty. Compared to the other escapers, the Wuan Marquis, who stood out during the crisis, indeed had the capability and responsibility, living up to the title of the Wuan Marquis. In the past few days, since leaving the main camp in Jiangxia, the Ning Army¡¯s return journey had been filled with hardship and turmoil. First, there were the vultures-like Chu cavalry, sniffing around and chasing after them like carrion-eaters. These elite cavalry, selected from the captives of Zhou People and Snow Plains Nomads, were far superior in equestrian skills compared to the people of Yangzhou who dwelled in the water towns of Jiangnan and used boats for travel. The Ning Army from the main camp in Jiangxia, too, had a sizable number of cavalry at its disposal, also numbering in the thousands. But when Ning cavalry clashed with Chu cavalry, even with the same numbers, our side often found itself at a disadvantage. Even when the number of combatants increased, due to their more skilled horsemanship and their ability to use a wider range of tactics, the disadvantage of the Ning Army was even greater. To protect the safety of the main army¡¯s retreat, the Ning cavalry sent to rout the Chu Army¡¯s mounted harassers paid a heavy price, and the effect they achieved was dismal. Under the harassment of the Chu Army¡¯s light cavalry, the Ning Army, after a day¡¯s march, had only managed to cover a mere twenty miles. In such circumstances, not to mention safely returning to their own territory, it was questionable whether they could even leave the Jiangxia area before being surrounded by Chu forces from all sides. At the critical moment, it was the Wuan Marquis who made the decisive call, pulling elites from various units within the army to form a squad composed entirely of Martial artists with Inner Strength. By rallying over a thousand elites and leading them personally, through several ambushes, they fiercely cleared a path through the Chu cavalry, decapitating thousands, which caused the enemy¡¯s light cavalry to flee in fright and no longer dare to approach. Without the harassment of the Chu Army¡¯s light cavalry, the pace of the Ning Army¡¯s escape undeniably quickened. In one day, they covered over eighty miles, effectively leaving the battlefield of Jiangxia. However, not long after leaving Jiangxia, the fleeing Ning Army encountered Chu forces from the direction of Luo Kou Du, rushing to intercept them. At Luo Kou Du, Chu State had forty thousand of the Forbidden army and twenty thousand navy troops, a force that could be described as formidable. Upon receiving Lu Yuan¡¯s orders, after a short period of time, Han Hua made a decisive decision, leaving twenty thousand navy troops to defend the ferry and personally leading forty thousand of the Forbidden army to a crossroads on the government road southeast of Luo Kou Du to set up the interception. By that time, the Ning Army had been marching day and night, emotionally and physically exhausted to the extreme, their combat power nowhere near its peak state, maintaining a mere thirty to fifty percent would be considered good. No matter how you looked at it, facing the Chu forces who were rested and waiting, the ultimate outcome for this group of Ning troops could only be one: to be intercepted and ultimately be besieged to death. But in times of dire crisis, miracles always seem to emerge. At the last moment, it was the Wuan Marquis who stood out again. Because he knew that the main army was weary and their combat ability weak, not fit for heavy use. To break through the Chu forces¡¯ blockade ahead, it was necessary to strike like thunder, concentrating force at one point, to be effective in defeating the enemy. So Bai Yian, when facing the blockade, did not use the larger main force to attack forcefully, relying on numerical superiority to wear down and breakthrough. Instead, he recruited daredevil elites from each unit within the army, selecting those still with reserves of strength and more powerful in martial prowess, to form an elite vanguard of about five thousand soldiers. In the end, he donned his armor, led these five thousand chosen vanguards to break the enemy lines first, and fought bravely. After fighting fiercely for several hours, with this reckless fighting style and sustaining serious injuries in the process, they managed to injure the Chu army¡¯s general Han Hua severely, forcing him to flee with heavy injuries. After sustaining casualties of over three thousand of the elite vanguard and leaving nearly ten thousand corpses of the Ning Army, the remaining main force finally broke through the Chu forces¡¯ blockade. Then, the equally devastated Chu forces and the nearly slain Han Hua ultimately did not dare to continue the chase or interception. They merely gathered with the Chu cavalry, who were also frightened by the fight, trailing ten miles behind, following and watching from a distance. The Ning Army, after these successive bloody battles and continuous breakthroughs and marches, led the remaining fifty thousand or so surviving soldiers through extreme hardship to arrive at the territory of Yongxing County as seen now. This area was the border of Dongting in Chu State, directly opposite Ning Country Yuzhang Ruichang County, just needing to cross this place to enter Yuzhang Xunyang Prefecture. In Xunyang Prefecture, there was the largest lake of Yuzhang, Pengli Lake, whose waters connected to the Yangtze River, spreading through several prefectures in northern Yuzhang and irrigating countless fertile fields. Therefore, with the convenience of water transport, this place was wealthy and plentiful in money and grain. As long as the Ning Army managed to flee back to Xunyang Prefecture, relying on the reserved supplies of the prefecture, their current lack of food could immediately be relieved. Chapter 876 - Chapter 876: Chapter 371 Difficult Escape_3 Chapter 876: Chapter 371 Difficult Escape_3 At the same time, because it is located at the intersection of Pengli Lake and the Yangtze River, and due to its strategic importance, outside the fortress of Xunyang Prefecture, Ning Country had specially established a water fortress, garrisoning over ten thousand naval forces with hundreds of warships. As long as they could escape back there, reach Xunyang Prefecture, then relying on this navy for support, whether journeying along the Yangtze River back to the capital, Jinling, or heading south via Pengli Lake toward the county town Nanchang to carry out a rescue, both would be extremely convenient. The way of life was right before their eyes; all soldiers of the Ning Army saw hope and naturally could not give up. After successively repelling the Chu forces and securing several victories, everyone believed that as long as Marquis Wuan was there, as long as General Bai was there, they could certainly return to their hometown, back to Ning Country. With his courage and military achievements, Bai Yian¡¯s prestige in the hearts of these remnants of the Ning Army had reached its peak, and he had seemingly surpassed Shen Qiu. If this were normal times, it would definitely arouse the king¡¯s great suspicion, and even lead to a terrible incident, which wouldn¡¯t be surprising. But at this time, when the country was ruined and no one knew what the next day would bring, everyone only wanted to survive, and even the monarch didn¡¯t care about these matters anymore. To live! To return home! All soldiers of the Ning Army, with this belief, dragging their exhausted bodies, under the sunset¡¯s glow cast long shadows as they moved towards Ruichang. ¡­ ¡°The Ning Army must have reached Yongxing by now.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã? Lu Yuan rode on a white horse, looking at the darkening twilight in the sky, and halted. Under the afterglow of the sunset, tens of thousands of Chu soldiers marched, struggling on the road just like the Ning Army. The Ning Army had been fleeing for several days, and naturally, the Chu Army had been in pursuit for the same amount of time. After a pursuit over two hundred li, the Chu Army was also exhausted. However, they were in a slightly better condition than the Ning Army because there were friendly forces constantly obstructing and harassing the front, forcing the Ning Army to fight and break through from time to time. So even as they rushed desperately, their speed was actually not quick. In the span of three days and two nights, from leaving the main camp in Jiangxia, they had only covered just over two hundred li, averaging less than seventy li each day and night. Moreover, due to fleeing, the Ning Army basically got no good rest and hoping to sleep for extended periods was even more of a luxury. The Chu Army led by Lu Yuan, on the other hand, faced no such entanglements and could thus travel at full speed. After a long chase during the day, they could comfortably get a good night¡¯s sleep, restoring their physical strength and spirit. After covering the same two hundred li, the Ning Army was weary both physically and mentally, while the Chu Army could remain energetic, maintaining their combat strength at a higher level. As a result of this back and forth, the gap between the strengths of both sides naturally became even more pronounced. ¡°According to our calculations of time, the vanguard of the Ning Army should have already reached the border of Ruichang.¡± Next to Lu Yuan, with a pale face and flickering breath, Han Hua answered with a weak voice, ¡°At this time, the Prime Minister has already led fifty thousand soldiers and horses to seize Ruichang City. This city is a border fortress situated at the heart of the official road, where traffic is most convenient. If they choose not to pass through this city and opt for the smaller paths, they would need at least two more days¡¯ journey. Being pursued by our forces, the Ning Army cannot afford to delay even a moment and would definitely not dare to take detours. Passing through Ruichang City on the official road is inevitable. With a fortified city to rely on, the Prime Minister can come and go as he pleases. The Ning Army taking this route, whether they forcefully attack the city to retake Ruichang or bypass it under the city walls, will face dangers tenfold greater than previously experienced breaking through my blockades.¡± ¡°By then, as long as the Left Prime Minister can somewhat delay the Ning Army and bring the King and his troops here in time, the Ning Army will surely perish beneath this city,¡± Han Hua¡¯s tone was icy, laced with a tinge of murderous intent. He had previously led his troops to intercept the Ning Army, only to have his forty-thousand men, ready and waiting, broken through by five thousand led by Bai Yian. He himself had been severely injured and had fled in disgrace, losing all face. Since the start of the war with Chu Ning, this was nearly the most disastrous defeat for the Chu state. And as the commander responsible for this defeat, Han Hua inevitably faced criticism and mounting doubts about his capabilities. As an Inborn Grandmaster, Han Hua had his pride. Such a great humiliation naturally had to be washed away with blood. So even though he was still nursing serious injuries, he still forced himself onto the battlefield, intent on personally confronting Bai Yian and slaying him to avenge his disgrace when it came time to annihilate the Ning Army at last. ¡°Yes, after such prolonged delays, this war should indeed be coming to a decisive end,¡± Lu Yuan said nothing as he glanced at the injured Han Hua, his gaze deep and inscrutable. In fact, since the day the Ning Army fled, he had led his forces to overrun the Front Camp of the Ning Army and had executed Marquis Wuyang Li Dao on the spot. The next day, he had already led his troops on a forced march, catching up to the tail of the Ning Army just twenty li behind. But at that time, Lu Yuan, considering that the main force of the Ning Army was still intact and that they had just fled not long ago with morale and condition still relatively high, knew they were not going to be easy to deal with. Furthermore, military strategy advises against attacking a retreating army seeking to return home. Confronting an army fighting for their lives to get back home would, even if successful, inevitably lead to heavy casualties on one¡¯s own side. Additionally, Lu Yuan wanted to see if, after executing Li Dao, he could cut down another one of Ning Country¡¯s Inborn-level fighters to reduce their top combat strength. So, based on the considerations above, when Han Hua was engaged in holding back the Ning Army, Lu Yuan actually could have hastened to join the battle. But in the end, to achieve a complete victory and secure greater gains, he held back his urge, choosing to watch from behind, allowing the Ning Army to break through. After all, even if the Ning Army broke through Han Hua¡¯s blockade, they would still have Sun Siwen and Huang Xuan¡¯s two lines of defense to contend with. The road ahead was still long, and Shen Qiu and his forces wouldn¡¯t escape so easily. However, after dragging it out all this way, as the Ning Army neared their return to their own country, the time for a decisive battle had finally come. Lu Yuan had received the news that yesterday, after a forced march, Sun Siwen had finally led his troops to arrive at Ruichang, beating Ning Country to it, and seized the county town to set up a blockade. Also, on that very day, Huang Xuan contacted his main body, sending back news. After surrounding Nanchang City, this Avatar personally led troops, charging at the forefront to be the first to assault the city. Eventually, after a fierce assault lasting two days and nights, they finally broke through Nanchang City early yesterday morning, capturing the capital of Yuzhang Prefecture. Now, Huang Xuan has left a garrison to clean up the aftermath in Nanchang City, maintain order, and pursue any remaining forces. He himself, leading thirty thousand troops and using the boats collected from Nanchang City, is rushing toward the Ruichang front. With the speed of the boats, they should arrive below Ruichang City by tomorrow morning. Together with Lu Yuan¡¯s forces on this route and the converging Han Hua, the initial plan of surrounding from four sides with four armies is about to be realized below Ruichang City. The Ning Army, fleeing for their lives, eventually couldn¡¯t escape the encirclement and is about to face their final doom. Chapter 877 - Chapter 877: Chapter 372: Uncle-Nephew Night Talk Chapter 877: Chapter 372: Uncle-Nephew Night Talk ¡°` The cold moon hung like a curved hook, ghostly pale as snow. After three days of relentless marching, the Ning Army finally came to a halt just as they were about to reach the border, just as they were about to return home. Running for three consecutive days, engaging in several life-and-death decisive battles, the soldiers¡¯ spirits were stretched taut without a single moment of rest in between. Under such intense strains, even a man of iron would not be able to withstand it. Everyone had reached the limit of physical and mental endurance and could not be pushed any further. After realizing this, Bai Yian did not force them to continue; once the main army entered the territory of Yongxing County, he issued the order: The army was to rest for the night. All food was to be brought out so that the soldiers could have a full meal and a good night¡¯s sleep, restoring their energy and spirit in preparation for the final battle for homecoming the following day. Thus, tonight, after setting up the camp and having a satisfying dinner, the soldiers of the Ning Army quickly fell into slumber, enjoying a rare moment of peace. Only those assigned to the night watch had no choice but to fight off sleepiness and fatigue as they kept guard on the perimeter of the camp against a possible sneak attack from the Chu Army. The Chu Army had been relentlessly pursuing and attacking in the vicinity, launching small-scale assaults from time to time, which was really annoying, so extra precautions were necessary. Even though the soldiers on rotation were exhausted, they understood the urgency of the situation and, coupled with promises of compensation from the higher-ups, they mustered their energy without complaints. However, it wasn¡¯t just the soldiers on rotation who were awake this night. At the heart of the main camp, the acting Commander of the Ning Army, Marquis Wuan Bai Yian, was still up, a light burning, deep into the night. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ¡°Cough, cough¡­¡± Bai Yian coughed lightly, the fiery pain in his lungs subsiding slightly. He covered his mouth with his hand and then turned his dim gaze to the person in front of him, saying, ¡°Has it been confirmed that Ruichang City has been taken by the Chu people?¡± Across from him was a young general who bore some resemblance to Bai Yian; this man was Bai Yian¡¯s elder brother¡¯s son, Bai Jingluo. Upon hearing the inquiry, Bai Jingluo nodded and said, ¡°Uncle, I personally scouted the area and witnessed with my own eyes the banners of the Chu Army raised on Ruichang City, with Chu soldiers crowding the city walls. Afterwards, I led people to find some of the county soldiers who had escaped from the city and questioned them in detail. Only then did we learn that the Chu Army had suddenly attacked near dusk yesterday, seizing the city just a day ahead of us.¡± ¡°A day¡­¡± Bai Yian, upon hearing this timeframe, gave a wry smile and said, ¡°The Chu people are indeed pressing us at every step, having planned everything meticulously, not giving us the slightest chance to survive.¡± In the past few days, fleeing for their lives, Bai Yian had been recalling and reviewing past events in his mind, pondering why Ning Country came to this and why the Ning Army fell into their current dire situation. After revisiting these events, he realized that all the signs were already there quite some time ago. Back when the Chu Army chose a strategy completely different from the Ning Army, deeming Jiangxia as less important and focusing on battles to the south and the north, dispersing their main forces. The Ning Army failed to seize this critical opportunity to gather strength and decisively crush the main force of the Chu Army at Jiangxia. The outcome of the battlefield had already been foreshadowed. The subsequent series of erroneous decisions by the Ning Army were merely steps that accelerated toward this bleak future, bringing them to their current plight. It was precisely because he understood all this that Bai Yian was more aware than anyone of just how perilous the situation of the Ning Army under his command really was. To even consider it a situation of nine deaths and one chance of survival would be optimistic. Ten deaths without life, that would be more accurate. The Chu Army¡¯s occupation of Ruichang City, cutting off the army¡¯s route home once again, underscored this point. The promises he made in front of the soldiers, the hopes of ¡°surviving¡± and ¡°returning home,¡± were just that¡ªpromises. ¡°Uncle, now that the Chu Army has taken Ruichang City, according to the intelligence I¡¯ve gathered, there are no fewer than fifty thousand Chu soldiers in the city, roughly equal to the strength of our forces. Now that our route home has been cut off, what should we do?¡± Bai Jingluo, anxious and distressed, couldn¡¯t help but probe, ¡°Should we take a detour? The path through Ruichang to the north is blocked, but there are still many routes to the south. Surely the Chu people can¡¯t have taken all of them. If we take a few detours, we¡¯ll surely find a way out.¡± In recent days, Bai Jingluo had been following his uncle¡¯s orders, leading the army¡¯s elite scouts around the vicinity to collect information for the army. Therefore, besides Bai Yian, he was the most informed about the surrounding situation. He knew that if the army continued to head toward Ruichang City, it would be a dead end with no chance of survival. Only by fleeing in other directions might there be a glimmer of hope. ¡°There¡¯s no way out,¡± Bai Yian said, shaking his head upon hearing his nephew¡¯s suggestion. ¡°The Chu Army spared no effort to corner us to this point, and now they are about to close the net. How could they possibly watch us escape the trap? In the vicinity, it¡¯s not just the Chu Army in Ruichang. These past few days, the Chu Army that has been chasing us, though they have only been keeping a ten-mile distance without much aggression. That Chu force is a convergence of soldiers from Jiangxia City and Luo Kou Du; King of Chu Lu Yuan has already caught up, with the rear pursuers two Inborns, and a force of eighty to ninety thousand men. With that force present, we can¡¯t simply change direction and flee south at will. The Chu people are determined not to let us go. If we continue in the direction of Ruichang City, as they expect, we may gain a little breathing time. If we switch our path and flee south, Lu Yuan might lead his troops to attack us as soon as he discerns our intentions.¡± Bai Yian spoke with a bitter tone, harboring no hope for escape. ¡°` Chapter 878 - Chapter 878: Chapter 372: Uncle-Nephew Night Talk_2 Chapter 878: Chapter 372: Uncle-Nephew Night Talk_2 ¡°So what should we do? Are we just going to wait for death like lambs to the slaughter?¡± bemoaned Bai Jingluo, his heart brimming with despair. ¡°Of course not.¡± Bai Yian put away his sorrow, his expression becoming resolute and determined, as he looked at Bai Jingluo with a piercing gaze, ¡°The Chu people want to treat me like a wild beast, lured into the trap they have set, to be hunted at their leisure. Yet, though a wild beast may be dim-witted, it still possesses the courage to fight to the death. The desperate struggle before death can also exact a heavy toll on the hunter. I have decided that tomorrow, I shall continue to lead the army to Ruichang, where we will have our final battle with the Chu army. They, the Chu people, seek to cut off my path home, do they not? Then I shall let them know just how great the anger that flares when one¡¯s hope of returning home, one¡¯s route back to one¡¯s troops, is blocked. Here lie my entire army¡¯s fifty thousand soldiers; I am curious to see just how heavy a price the Chu people are prepared to pay to consume us.¡± By the end, Bai Yian¡¯s tone was flat, devoid of emotion. Warfare is ruthless. Death in war is inevitable; it is simply a matter of whether you die or I die. Now that Ning Country has been defeated, as the price, we, the Ning Army, must go to our deaths. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã? But how we die, whether it¡¯s with worth, that¡¯s the art of war. Since it is destined that we cannot bring this remnant of the Ning Country¡¯s Eastern Expedition back home, the remaining consideration is how to make these fifty thousand soldiers trapped in dire straits reach their highest value. Bai Yian had come to a decision on this matter. ¡°Uncle!¡± Bai Jingluo, upon perceiving the suicidal intent in Bai Yian¡¯s words, immediately exclaimed urgently, ¡°Fifty thousand troops are too many to withdraw, but we are skilled in martial arts. With the sky so vast above and the earth so broad below, if merely dozens or hundreds wish to escape, what difficulty lies therein? Now our army has been greatly defeated, the peril of our nation is imminent. At such a critical juncture, we must reserve our capable selves for the future, to protect and defend our homes and country, to resist the Chu, to safeguard our rivers and mountains!¡± Bai Jingluo pleaded earnestly. Having lost his father at a young age, he was personally raised by Bai Yian as if he were his own child. Because of this, Bai Jingluo also regarded his uncle as if he were his own father, respectful and filial. Seeing the father figure in his uncle desiring death, he naturally felt heart-wrenching and unbearable sorrow. ¡°Jingluo¡­¡± Hearing his nephew¡¯s words, Bai Yian¡¯s tone grew heavier, and he solemnly said, ¡°Listen to me. Our Bai family has inherited the position of the Wuan Marquis for generations, with countless famed generals amongst our ancestors, long acclaimed as Jiangdong¡¯s shield, the protectors of the state. Now that I have led my troops against the Chu bandits and been defeated without even being able to withdraw safely to our own borders, The promises I once made to my soldiers have turned to empty words. The defeat of our troops and the death of our commanders are simply the way of Heaven and Earth. I have already failed my country and my soldiers; how could I also fail my family, my own honor? As a general, I can no longer face living in this world. Let me, as the Bai family¡¯s Wuan Marquis, offer the final tribute to this national catastrophe. Let those Chu people witness that we Jiangdong men also have the valor and spirit to fight, and are not to be trifariously bullied.¡± Bai Yian was not afraid to die. Death comes to all, and no one can escape it. Some deaths are as light as a feather, while others are as heavy as Mount Tai. Dying for one¡¯s country, for the soldiers, for the family, for oneself, is to die a death of worth. Such a death, heavy as Mount Tai, fierce and passionate¡ªeven if life ends on the battlefield, it is without regret. This legacy will also inspire respect in others. However, if as the Commander, he were to show fear before the enemy, abandon his troops in the face of battle, and flee for his own survival, Such a life, Bai Yian felt, was no better than death, perhaps even worse. Because by doing so, what is abandoned is not just one¡¯s own reputation, but the legendary name of the Wuan Marquis passed down through the family, and the last vestiges of Ning Country¡¯s dignity. He was unwilling to do this. He would rather use his death to preserve these things. Moreover, the current situation for Ning Country was too dire. The Chu Army had entered Yuzhang, and there was no definite news from Lingnan, but it was presumed to have been defeated as well. With Yuzhang lost, the two forces in Hengyang and Luyang, totaling two hundred thousand troops from Ning Country, probably weren¡¯t faring much better than his own force. As for the one hundred thousand troops in Changsha, they had been defeated utterly. In almost an instant, all five routes of Ning Country¡¯s Eastern and Southern Expeditions had been annihilated, routed in disastrous defeats. Only in the north, where Yang Jing was supported by a large naval force, would it be possible to withdraw successfully and flee back to the country. Yet, with this Eastern Expedition, Ning Country had nearly exhausted its strength, and all six routes of its army had been defeated, with many obliterated entirely. The loss of troops probably numbered five hundred thousand. With so many elite forces lost, relying solely on the mere two hundred thousand left inside the country¡ªwho would likely bring back only around one hundred thousand battered survivors¡ªhow could they defend Ning Country? Yes, new soldiers had indeed been recruited within Ning Country, lately. But these new soldiers had only been in camp for less than a month and were no different from civilian workers. Without one or two years of training, how could they be expected to serve any significant purpose? Under such circumstances, Bai Yian had to consider the future path for Ning Country, the future path for their Coastal Aristocratic Family. After much contemplation, the only strategy he could think of was to launch a desperate counterattack in the face of defeat, to inflict as much damage as possible on the Chu troops, weakening their strength. After suffering heavy casualties, the Chu army, having gone through continuous battles and exhausted their soldiers, would find it not so easy to invade Ning Country. In the end, perhaps fatigued from prolonged warfare, they might temporarily halt their assault on Ning Country. That way, some breathing space of a year or a half could possibly be earned. Chapter 879 - Chapter 879: Chapter 372: Uncle-Nephew Night Talk_3 Chapter 879: Chapter 372: Uncle-Nephew Night Talk_3 ¡°` Having a year and a half for the recruitment of new soldiers within the country, we should be able to recover a good deal of strength. By then, when facing Chu State, we won¡¯t be completely powerless to fight back. As for whether this recovered strength can withstand the Chu army, and whether Ning Country can maintain its dynasty under the onslaught of Chu, without being annihilated, these are not things that Bai Yian should worry about. By that time, he would have long been dead, his bones perhaps decayed and reduced to mere skeletons. He had done everything that he could do; the future of Ning Country, the future of the Coastal Aristocratic Family, would have to rely on the efforts of those who came after him. Bai Yian was not a god; he could not foresee everything, nor could he do everything. Having done so much was already his limit. He could not ask for more. ¡°But¡­ but¡­¡± After listening to Bai Yian¡¯s thoughts, Bai Jingluo opened his mouth, but in the end, he closed his eyes in pain. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? He knew that his second uncle had made up his mind to die for his country, and that no matter what, he couldn¡¯t persuade him otherwise. And as a descendant of the Bai Family, Bai Jingluo had always taken pride in the title of Wuan Marquis from a young age. Therefore, he could especially understand Bai Yian¡¯s desire to maintain the honor of the Wuan Marquis and uphold his own dignity. It was because their thoughts and principles aligned that he found himself unable to utter words of dissuasion. Because asking a person of belief and honor to give up their lifelong convictions is harder than killing them. However, Bai Yian, seeing his nephew whom he treated like his own child in such a state, stepped forward, a smile appearing on his face. He patted Bai Jingluo¡¯s shoulder and comforted him, ¡°This war requires someone to take responsibility. Ning Country is in peril; someone needs to come forward and willingly face death. Your second uncle has no way back now. Ning Country has been gracious to me; I, Bai Yian, could become Inborn only with His Majesty¡¯s nurturing, which allowed me to get to where I am today. The grace of knowing and meeting him cannot go unrequited. My grandfather, your great-grandfather, the previous Wuan Marquis Bai Mengyang, benefited from the Yue¡¯s rewards and deeply owed a debt of gratitude to the Xiao Family. Therefore, my grandfather devoted his life to Da Yue, fighting in the south and north, quelling domestic troubles, and repelling foreign enemies. Until his death, he remained a faithful servant of Yue, never betraying his rulers. Today, I sacrifice myself for righteousness and loyalty to the country, to repay the Dragon¡¯s Grace bestowed by His Majesty. In doing so, I am emulating my ancestor, with a clear conscience.¡± Having said that, Bai Yian paused, then looked at Bai Jingluo with a softer tone, but a weightier message, ¡°I received grace from the Shen Clan, which allowed me to become Inborn; hence, I have no choice but to repay it with my life. But you, Jingluo, are different. Your current status is entirely due to the efforts of our Bai Family; it is the family who has promoted you to this position, it has nothing to do with Ning Country. You don¡¯t have to follow my example and die for the Shen Clan, who have not really shown you any favor. After my death, the obligations between the Bai Family and the Shen Clan will end. Although both are part of the six noble families and seven aristocratic families, with deep connections, there will no longer be any debt owed. From now on, you and our Bai Family need not cling to Ning Country, nor to the Shen Clan. You may instead start from your own interests, from the interests of the Bai Family, from the interests of the six families and seven clans, to choose your future path, to choose whom you wish to serve loyally. Though I wish to stop this disaster, the situation in Ning Country has already come to this point. Whether it can safely get through this, whether it can preserve the Altars of Soil and Grain, no one can say. If the day comes when things go awry, when the land is shattered and the nation is in peril, you will have to take responsibility. You must lead the Bai Family and the six families and seven clans, through the crisis together to preserve the Ancestral Temple incense. At that time, free from past obligations, you will have to stand up for these responsibilities and take control of the overall situation. Remember, staying alive is the most important. As long as you can preserve the family, even bearing humiliation and burdens is an option. Our enmity with Chu is a national affair, not a personal one. To die on the battlefield, for a struggle for supremacy, one can only blame one¡¯s shortcomings and cannot resent anyone else. If that day comes when you must face west and serve them, you must not harbor resentment. You must not forget the greater good for minor personal feelings, ruining the future of the entire clan for selfish reasons. You will need to be like me, like our ancestor, faithful to the end, acknowledging the great loyalty to our sovereign, repaying the nation¡¯s grace.¡± ¡°` ¡°Do you understand?¡± Each word from Bai Yian was like a knife, piercing harshly into Bai Jingluo¡¯s heart. In the end, it was like a thunderclap, shaking him to the point of near delirium. Hearing his uncle¡¯s words and feeling the other¡¯s fervent hope, along with the great responsibility entrusted to the Bai Family, Bai Jingluo was unable to say a word of refusal; he simply responded in a daze, ¡°I¡­ I understand.¡± Bai Yian, upon hearing this, showed a trace of relief, but quickly restrained his smile, his expression becoming serious again, ¡°Since you¡¯re clear, then you may leave. Remember, later go and assemble your subordinates, to scout in the direction of Wuning, to spy on the enemy for the army. This is a military order.¡± Bai Yian emphasized once more at the end. Wuning is located just south of Yongxing, also at Ning Country¡¯s border, one of the few potential escape routes mentioned by Bai Jingluo earlier. Now that Bai Yian had decided to keep the army¡¯s route unchanged, continuing towards Ruichang, yet still instructing Bai Jingluo to scout in that direction, the intent was self-evident. Bai Jingluo understood this well, but after the heartfelt conversation with his uncle, he was clear about his great duty. Therefore, he did not indulge in any childish tantrums, saying he ¡°wouldn¡¯t go¡± or the like. Instead, he nodded heavily, then knelt down, kowtowed three times to Bai Yian, before standing up to receive the command token, and responded, ¡°I obey the order.¡± Having said this, he turned and left. And scenes similar to this were currently unfolding inside the Ning Army Camp, in various core areas¡¯ tents. At the same time Bai Yian summoned Bai Jingluo, many high-level officials in Ning Country, deeply indebted to the Shen Clan, were also calling on their own kin, giving them advice. The Ning scouts led by Bai Jingluo were all elites, highly skilled in the martial arts. And how could those skilled in the martial arts, not come from noble origins? When his scouting team was initially formed, it was done so after careful thought, handpicking the best. The purpose was exactly for a time like this when driven to desperation, they could have an additional route to ensure some of their lineage could be preserved. This was but an execution of their planned strategy. After sending off Bai Jingluo, Bai Yian was silent in the tent for a long time, then he didn¡¯t stay any longer but went out and walked directly towards the most central and magnificent tent. ¡°Your Majesty.¡± After being announced, Bai Yian saw Shen Qiu. ¡°Have you arranged the escape route?¡± Shen Qiu seemed to have known already that Bai Yian would come, as he asked lightly as the man entered. ¡°It has been arranged. Jingluo and some other young men from the Coastal Aristocratic Families will withdraw in the direction of Wuning to the south.¡± Bai Yian calmly answered, then saluted Shen Qiu, saying, ¡°Tomorrow I shall lead the army towards Ruichang, to fight to the death against the Chu forces. Your Majesty, bearing the heavy responsibility of Ning Country, must not stay here and face danger. I have already arranged for skilled warriors from the army, please, Your Majesty, take advantage of the fact that Chu¡¯s encirclement is not yet complete tonight, and travel through the Fushui river route towards the Yangtze River estuary. At the confluence of the two rivers, the naval forces have already prepared ships for a rendezvous, sufficient to carry several hundred people away, to ensure Your Majesty¡¯s safe withdrawal.¡± A river named Fushui runs within Yongxing territory, which, heading north, leads directly into the Yangtze River. At the confluence of the two rivers, there is a small ferry where people can board a boat and leave. However, this ferry is much too small, capable of transporting at most about a hundred people at a time. For safety reasons, Shen Qiu could only take two to three hundred people with him; it was impossible to take the entire army. Otherwise, it would have been an excellent escape route. ¡°I understand. I shall depart immediately.¡± Shen Qiu nodded, not displaying a child¡¯s disposition, and was ready to rise immediately, accompanied by the guards already assembled outside his tent, preparing to leave. But upon reaching the tent¡¯s entrance, he hesitated, turning his head back to look at his loyal subject, sighed and said, ¡°Wuan Marquis, take care!¡± After saying this, as if feeling the words were meaningless, he shook his head with a bitter smile and departed. In the pitch-black midnight, the moonlight shimmered like water. In the Ning Army Camp, while all soldiers lay in deep slumber, two teams, one south and one north, each of roughly a hundred men, silently passed through the already-opened camp gate without alerting anyone and quietly left the camp. Bai Yian stood on the watchtower, with his trusted officers assigned to the night watch, silently observing this scene, his gaze unfazed. Chapter 880 - Chapter 880: Chapter 373: Besieging the City Chapter 880: Chapter 373: Besieging the City The next day, as the morning light began to brighten, the Ning Army awoke from their slumber. Worn out and exhausted, despite having slept through the night, many still felt fatigued, even sore, and didn¡¯t want to get up. But everyone knew that now was not the time to sleep, for the Chu Army was still nearby, and the situation remained dangerous; thus, they forced themselves up, crawling out of their tents. The Fire Head Camp had already prepared breakfast, distributing it to each unit in advance so that the soldiers could get up and queue for their food in an orderly fashion by platoon. In the early morning, tinged with the chill of night, to have a hot meal, feeling the warmth fill one¡¯s stomach, was a very happy thing. Especially on this brutal battlefield, it was the only thing left for everyone to look forward to with satisfaction. Marquis Wuan Bai Yian also mingled among the soldiers, eating the standard military rations with them without putting on any airs of his rank as a marquis or commander. He instead heartily consumed the food, which was meant to fill rather than to be flavorful, blending in with the soldiers. Such an approachable attitude naturally moved the soldiers; their affection for their commander grew, and they increasingly ceased to see him as an aloof member of the aristocratic families, beginning to think of him as one of their own. After letting go of their reverence, finally, after taking a sip of the wild vegetable rice soup, someone couldn¡¯t help but ask, ¡°General, Ruichang City lies ahead, which is part of Ning Country¡¯s territory. Once we get there, does that mean we are safe and can successfully return home?¡± The questioner was a young man who appeared to be sixteen or seventeen years old. However, based on the conversation they had just shared, he had already been in the army for three years, participated in four battles, large and small, and had taken two heads personally¡ªhe was a true veteran. In such a chaotic world, even in Ning Country, which had been relatively stable for over a decade, there were still many people who couldn¡¯t survive and had to either starve or flee. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Compared to this, the young man, who had joined the army to earn his food, was considered very lucky according to his own words. Some people wished for the opportunity to risk their lives in battle but couldn¡¯t get it and ended up being the ones others leeched off, which was even more tragic. Thus, the young man who had emerged from hardship had simple thoughts: to survive. He wanted to live to be forty; doing so would mean surpassing the oldest villager, the head of his village, and becoming the oldest person there. If possible, he wished to use the rewards from his military achievements to buy some land in his hometown, build a mansion, marry a wife, and have a couple of chubby children. Then, he would have no regrets in life. The young man had already calculated it. To accomplish these things, he needed to kill at least ten people. Only then would he have enough military merit to be promoted to company commander or even deputy platoon leader, earning more money. Now he had already killed two people; all he needed was to kill eight more to achieve his goal. However, with Ning Country¡¯s defeat, the young man also knew that if the fight continued, it would be more likely for him to die on the battlefield before achieving his dream. Therefore, he no longer hoped to kill the remaining eight people; he just wished to survive and return home alive, even if it meant being poorer. Upon hearing the young man¡¯s words, the other soldiers also couldn¡¯t help but look expectantly at Bai Yian. Survival, the simple desire to live, is the purest wish of all beings, and the most primal need, genuine and straightforward. However, facing the many sincere gazes, Bai Yian found himself temporarily at a loss for words. What could he say? Say that they could no longer return? Not only that, but he also planned to lead them to their deaths, wanting to use their lives to buy time for Ning Country. This reality was too cruel; no one would accept it. In the end, Bai Yian could only smile with feigned confidence, assuring them, ¡°Of course, we can definitely get back. Once we pass Ruichang, we will be back inside our country. There we¡¯ll have sturdy walls, abundant grain, and countless comrades. The Chu people wouldn¡¯t dare to attack. Naturally, we will be safe.¡± ¡°Really?¡± ¡°That¡¯s great; I knew the general would be able to take us home, he said so himself.¡± ¡°I trust the general.¡± Hearing Bai Yian¡¯s words, the soldiers around him couldn¡¯t help but feel overjoyed and excited. In their eyes gazing at Bai Yian, it was as if they saw their faith and light, equally pure. Faced with these pure spirits, Bai Yian felt almost overwhelmed, so he stood up, dusted himself off, and said with a laugh, ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I won¡¯t deceive you. Am I not here with you as well?¡± Upon hearing this, the soldiers believed. The general was here, the emperor was here, so many ministers and high-ranking officials were here, so how could they possibly move forward if they couldn¡¯t go home? Their lives were so precious! Because last night¡¯s deed was done covertly, and there was always class segregation in ordinary times, the soldiers had not noticed that the emperor and many ministers had already left the army camp. The one who truly remained was only the Marquis Wuan Bai Yian in front of them, who talked and laughed closely with them, asserting that he was also here. Unaware that they had been betrayed, when the soldiers thought of this and looked at their commanding officer¡¯s smile, they were immediately filled with confidence. Bai Yian knew he was being hypocritical, disgusting, and shameless at this moment, yet he still did so. He allowed himself to be hypocritical, disgusting, and shameless, becoming the person he once hated the most. Because this was the only way to deceive these soldiers who trusted him into going to Ruichang, into dying for Ning Country in battle, to die for their ideals and beliefs. Chapter 881 - Chapter 881: Chapter 373: Besieging the City_2 Chapter 881: Chapter 373: Besieging the City_2 To achieve all of this, he spared no effort to change. Consider it his final indulgence before death. Moreover, Bai Yian had no intention of surviving at all costs and was ready to die with these soldiers, repaying them with his life. Although he made this exchange without ever asking the soldiers¡¯ desires. In this world, there was never any talk of fairness or justice. Ultimately, word of the Martial Marquis sharing meals with soldiers and promising that they would be home once they passed Ruichang City¡ªand my presence there¡ªspread through the entire barracks in no more than the time it takes for a morning meal, thanks to those who deliberately disseminated it. With this influence, by the time the grand army set off and the officers and men arranged themselves in formation to leave the camp, morale was extraordinarily high. Every member of the Ning Army firmly believed that under the general¡¯s leadership, they would overcome the final obstacle and make it home safely. Bai Yian, mounted on a red steed and leading a host of personal guards, rode back and forth around the moving military column, by showing his own presence, confirming his words from the morning and boosting the soldiers¡¯ spirits. Ultimately, amid cheers and acclamation, Bai Yian led his troops and arrived at the foot of Ruichang City by noon. ¡­ Atop Ruichang City. Huang Xuan and Sun Siwen stood shoulder to shoulder, watching the approaching Ning Army from the city walls. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? It was just this morning¡ªwhile Bai Yian shared the sufferings with his soldiers and made inspiring statements about ¡°going home¡± and ¡°I will be there.¡± After a day and night of urgent march, Huang Xuan finally led thirty thousand soldiers to Ruichang City this morning, joining forces with Sun Siwen, who was stationed here. As promised before they parted outside Changsha City last time, Huang Xuan led his troops to meet Sun Siwen right in Yuzhang Prefecture. But the two who were briefly separated had no time to talk about parting before their attention was seized by the arrival of the Ning Army. ¡°The Ning Army has been defeated repeatedly and has been on the run for days, yet they can still have such high morale?¡± After observing the Ning Army¡¯s spirited ranks and well-organized formations, showing no signs of a defeated force, Huang Xuan was surprised and asked, ¡°Who is the Ning Army commander leading the troops? Someone who can revitalize a vanquished army and possesses such capability?¡± Since the beginning of the war with Chu Ning, through multiple major battles and more profound understanding as they unfolded, the people of Chu gradually learned that Emperor Shenqiu of Ning, a grand general by birth, was not as brave and skilled in warfare as rumors suggested, nor a famous general of the age. The opponent had his position as the grand general of Pre-Yue mostly because of his family background and second-level Inborn strength. Beyond those two aspects, his ability to lead troops in combat could only be described as average ¨C a competent commander. Well, don¡¯t be deceived by the label ¡°competent commander.¡± You should know that in today¡¯s military system in the Jiangnan states, with a basic unit structure of five men making a squad, two squads a section, five sections a team, two teams a platoon, and five platoons a company, normally two to five companies would have a military officer, and two to five of those officers would be under a Miscellaneous General. By this convention, calculating by the most minimal standards, with two companies to one officer and two officers to one general, the least combination would be four companies¡ªtwo thousand men¡ªeligible for a general¡¯s rank. Of course, under normal circumstances, such minor generalship would not occur. Because it would waste the honorific title. It would be regarded as squandering the nobility of ranks and offices and devaluing their significance. It might also lead to excessive officials, increasing financial expenses. In reality, it is more common to have generals leading around five to ten thousand people. The so-called ¡°Ten Thousand Men General¡± in the folk talk of Yangzhou comes from this tradition. A general who leads only two thousand men could only be considered a Commander of a Thousand, in essence, merely an officer with a grand title. With this explanation, you should all be clear about what Emperor Shenqiu¡¯s ¡°competent commander¡± evaluation actually means. It¡¯s just a ten thousand man general. Such a level of capability, when applied to a run-of-the-mill general, naturally poses no issue. But who is Shen Qiu? The Heavenly Son of Ning Country, the leader of the Four Kingdoms Alliance of Jiangdong and Lingnan, the Commander in the eastern campaign, the one in charge of Ning¡¯s six-hundred-thousand-strong eastern expeditionary army. Such status, matched with such military ability, is naturally quite disastrous. Therefore, from the moment Shen Qiu resolved to personally lead the eastern campaign, Ning¡¯s eventual defeat was, in a sense, somewhat preordained. Thus, seeing the spirited state of the Ning Army outside the city, Huang Xuan didn¡¯t even consider attributing this accomplishment to Shen Qiu, pondering instead which among the Martial Marquises of Ning had such ability. ¡°In the Ning Army¡¯s main camp in Jiangxia, there were three Inborn individuals. Among them, the Ning leader need not be mentioned, and another, Marquis Wuyang Li Dao, fell to our king a few days ago. If there is anyone now who can take charge of the overall situation, it must be the remaining deputy commander of the Ning Army, Marquis Wuan Bai Yian,¡± thought Sun Siwen aloud. ¡°Marquis Wuan¡­¡± Hearing this name, Huang Xuan¡¯s expression shifted slightly, sighing, ¡°Twelve years ago, the former Marquis Wuan led the armies of the four nations and triumphed over Zhou Shu¡¯s three hundred thousand strong in the north of the river. I thought that would be the final magnum opus of Marquis Wuan, but I didn¡¯t expect, twelve years later, to witness again the splendor of a new Marquis Wuan. Ha-ha, this battle is worth it, truly worth it.¡± As Huang Xuan reached the end of his thoughts, he laughed heartily, his avatar imbued with Lu Yuan¡¯s mindset, feeling extremely elated. Seeing this, Sun Siwen¡¯s face showed a hint of agreement. As a genuine Yangzhou local, he had grown up with stories of Marquis Wuan¡¯s fame, naturally holding a high degree of recognition and reverence. Now that he had the opportunity to cross swords with the new Marquis Wuan, it was of course a matter of excitement and honor for him. Chapter 882 - Chapter 882: Chapter 373: Besieging the City_3 Chapter 882: Chapter 373: Besieging the City_3 While concurring with the sentiment, Sun Siwen couldn¡¯t help but worry, ¡°With such capability possessed by the incumbent Wuan Marquis, I¡¯m afraid that this battle won¡¯t be as easy as anticipated to eliminate the Ning Army outside the city.¡± Upon hearing this, Huang Xuan dismissed it nonchalantly, saying, ¡°No matter how capable the current Wuan Marquis is, he is now trapped and surrounded, with a shortage of soldiers and lack of supplies. And here I am, behind the strong walls of the city, what is there to fear?¡± With that said, he laughed again and added, ¡°Moreover, it¡¯s not just my two armies here; King Xie has also led his troops and is on his way. Our armies, attacking from front and behind, outnumber the enemy by many times. With such an overwhelming advantage, defeating them will be easy.¡± No sooner had he spoken than they saw a massive cloud of dust in the distance, as a light cavalry unit came from the west. Upon arriving outside the city, they roamed and surveyed near the Ning Army¡¯s camp formations, their banners flying high, emblazoned with a large ¡°Chu¡± character. Following closely behind the Ning Army, the main force of the Chu army led by Lu Yuan also arrived. ¡­ ¡°Is that the Ning Army ahead?¡± As Lu Yuan¡¯s Ning Army reached the outskirts of Ruichang City and began to set up camp, he climbed atop the command chariot with a crowd of his officers, gazing at the distant Ning formations and couldn¡¯t help but comment, ¡°Indeed, they appear quite formidable.¡± After three days of escape, maintaining such a presence was indeed commendable. ¡°No matter how formidable, they are not a match for the martial might of Great Chu. With King Xie leading the troops here today, the Ning Army will undoubtedly be annihilated.¡± Someone by his side offered flattery. ¡°Haha, well said.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?0 Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan let out a big laugh and then inquired, ¡°I heard that yesterday, two groups of soldiers escaped from within the Ning camp, and even those stationed outside to monitor and ambush were broken through three lines of defense. Did none of them stay behind?¡± The military officer responsible for this matter stepped forward with an apology: ¡°Your Majesty, last night, over a hundred men each escaped from the south and north camp gates of the Ning Army. The soldiers I placed discovered it and immediately attempted to intercept them. However, these fleeing Ning People were all martial artists who had cultivated Inner Strength, with the weakest being of third-rate prowess, including not a few first and second-rate experts. Each rode fast horses, and upon leaving the camp, they sprinted away without engaging in battle. Although we fought desperately to stop them, we couldn¡¯t prevent them from escaping. I failed in my duty, and let the Ning People escape. Please, Your Majesty, punish me for my negligence.¡± Having said this, the officer knelt on the ground, his head striking the earth heavily. After hearing his report, Lu Yuan merely glanced at the officer and said indifferently, ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter. Did you not say, the Ning People who escaped were all martial arts experts? Such individuals, with exceptional martial arts and skilled in lightness techniques, come and go with ease. If they are determined to flee, even if I personally intervened, I might not be able to keep them all.¡± This was not a fault of war; I do not blame you. Stand up.¡± The officer on the ground, upon hearing this, stood up, his face showing gratitude, and said, ¡°Thank you, King Xie, for your benevolence.¡± Lu Yuan nodded slightly and then continued, ¡°However, with so many experts fleeing the Ning Army at once, it seems that Shen Qiu and those ministers and nobles within the army have almost certainly escaped. What remains in the Ning Army now are probably just the discarded, those who were left behind.¡± The two groups of fleeing Ning troops added up to nearly three hundred people. Three hundred martial artists with third-rate skills or higher, is not an incidental number to assemble. Even with the eighty thousand troops that Lu Yuan brought, the entire army¡¯s martial artists of third-rate or higher barely exceed a thousand, and they mostly serve as low-level military officers like squad leaders and platoon leaders. The remaining Ning Army, now fewer than fifty thousand, suddenly lost so many experts. It¡¯s as if their mid-to-high level combat strength has been halved. Of course, the ones who could be taken away at a time like this are mostly those with background and status. Whether these highborn individuals would fight and lay down their lives on the front lines is another issue. In this respect, whether the Ning Army has suffered severe losses to their combat strength is still hard to say. But regardless, the strength of the remaining Ning forces before us has certainly diminished. Just then, in the forefront of Lu Yuan¡¯s army, a Ning Knight rode forth on horseback, approaching the camp that was under construction. ¡°Listen, Chu soldiers inside, my general has always heard of the valor of the Chu army and has longed to battle them, wishing for nothing more than a confrontation.¡± Today you lead your troops here, seeking to cut off the return path of our Great Chu¡¯s Entire Army. Since that is the case, why not array your chariots and horses, stand your formations, and fight a decisive battle. The victor shall achieve their desire, the defeated shall face annihilation. This battle is about life and death, let each rely on their own ability, what say you?¡± That Ning Army Knight, was actually here to issue a challenge. He rode back and forth in front of the Chu Army camp several times, conveying his intentions, before finally returning. ¡°Your Majesty, the Ning Army is challenging us, should we accept the battle?¡± From the command carriage, all military officers, after hearing the words of the Ning Army Knight, couldn¡¯t help but turn their gaze towards Lu Yuan, seeking a signal. ¡°We won¡¯t go, we won¡¯t,¡± Seeing all eyes upon him, Lu Yuan let out a cold laugh: ¡°Previously when I challenged the Ning Army, they coiled up within the camp, avoiding battle. Now that they are surrounded by us, with soldiers weary and provisions depleted, their disadvantage clear, they wish to have a proper battle with me. Such a beautiful situation, how could I possibly grant them their wish? Pass the order, the Entire Army is to fortify the encampment, stay on guard against the Ning Army. The Chu forces within Ruichang City are also forbidden to engage in battle. I want to starve these fifty thousand Ning soldiers to death, surround them until their provisions are exhausted, starve them alive. I¡¯m curious to see, when they are dizzy with hunger, whether they¡¯ll still have the strength to battle with me. If they still have the strength by then, haha, I would not mind granting them a fair fight.¡± Lu Yuan has made various arrangements on his journey here, all for the sake of consuming as many Ning troops as possible with minimal cost. Now it seems success is within grasp, so how could he possibly give up the advantage and engage in a desperate struggle with a Ning Army filled with the desire to return home and possessing high morale? That would be too wasteful! Even if one were to win, but with heavy casualties, it wouldn¡¯t really be a victory. Things are just fine as they are now. The Ning Army is already trapped under the walls of Ruichang City with no way out, facing the predicament of a food shortage; they are indeed caught in an absolute deathtrap. At this moment, Lu Yuan need not do much, just block their escape routes, and he can starve the people under the city walls to death without expending any effort. How utterly splendid! Thinking this, Lu Yuan remembered the matter he had just mentioned, and thus spoke again: ¡°By the way, haven¡¯t many high-level Ning officers run away? I have seen Ning¡¯s Shen Qiu among those escaping. These Ning Army soldiers, currently facing a desperate situation, can still maintain such high morale, it must be because they have been deceived by the high-level generals, unaware of the truth. They believe that their emperor and generals are with them in life and death, unafraid of perilous circumstances. Send someone to inform the low-level Ning Army soldiers that their emperor, ministers, and generals have all fled. I want to see if, after learning the truth, these Ning Army soldiers can maintain their current morale and be willing to die for a bunch of royal relatives and nobles who are afraid of death and have betrayed them.¡± A series of heart-piercing words were uttered by Lu Yuan, immediately causing all military officers to break out in laughter. Indeed. The high morale of the Ning Army before them was clearly illogical, very abnormal. Now that the Chu side is about to burst this bubble of lies, it will certainly cause a significant drop in Ning Army¡¯s morale, breeding suspicion among its ranks, leading to distrust between officers and soldiers. In such a case, an easy victory is assured. Chapter 883 - Chapter 883: Chapter 374 Half of Jiangdong Chapter 883: Chapter 374 Half of Jiangdong In the Ning Army¡¯s camp, Bai Yian was observing the movements of the Chu Army with his subordinates. By now, the knight who had gone to issue a challenge had been back for quite some time, yet there was still no reaction from the Chus¡¯ camp after most of an hour had passed. Seeing this, one of the Ning Army¡¯s generals could not help but speak out, ¡°Commander, it seems the Chu people are unwilling to fight.¡± ¡°Yes, Commander, the Chu thieves seem to want to avoid battle.¡± ¡°If the Chu thieves won¡¯t fight, what shall we do, launch a hard attack?¡± Listening to the clamor around him, Bai Yian also felt some irritation and snorted coldly. ¡°Enough!¡± The sudden outburst silenced everyone, and they turned to look at their commander, none daring to make another sound. As the Commander, and having approached a series of victories in recent days, Bai Yian¡¯s authority had already reached a peak within the army. No one dared to touch a hair on the head of such a figure when he was angry. ¡°It seems the Chu army won¡¯t fight,¡± he observed, seeing that he had intimidated the others. Having quelled his own anger, Bai Yian calmed down and then said somewhat helplessly, ¡°It must be that they see our soldiers are sharp and high in morale, so they do not wish to confront us head-on. Also, knowing that we are short on grain, they hope to trap us with this and wait until we run out, then easily defeat us.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Bai Yian, as the appointed Wuan Marquis and personally trained by Bai Mengyang, had many years of experience leading troops and could easily discern the Chu people¡¯s intentions. Having realized this, he couldn¡¯t help but smile bitterly to himself. A couple of days ago, Bai Yian led the Ning Army to break out in order to return to their country safely, and it was a time of employing every effort and using every tactic at their disposal. The end result was quite remarkable. Not only did they continuously defeat and break through the Chu Army¡¯s interception lines, but the Ning Army, under his command, had also successfully escaped the encirclement near Jiangxia and returned to Ning Country Territory. Under such military successes, anyone with clear eyes could see that although this Ning Army had suffered a dire defeat, their morale remained extremely high and their combat strength was well-preserved, worthy of being called an elite force. Facing such a powerful army in battle, especially one enhanced by the ¡®home ground advantage¡¯ buff, any commander leading their troops would dread them by three parts. The Chu Army was no exception. So now, even if the Chu people¡¯s forces were three to four times greater than the Ning Army¡¯s, they still refused to engage the Ning directly in order to minimize losses. Instead, they chose siege¡ªa tactic that requires less expenditure and is not overly time-consuming. It must be said that this move hit the Ning Army¡¯s weak point precisely. Since Luo Kou Du had been lost, the Ning Army Camp, which was now devoid of logistical support, only had enough food to last for ten days. Moreover, over the past few days in the main camp, the one hundred thousand Ning soldiers had delayed for several days, consuming a lot of grain. In the following days, to save their lives, they had no choice but to abandon some of their supplies. Plus the consumption during travel, as of now, the grain remaining in the Ning Army¡¯s camp was only enough for one day¡¯s use. After today, the Ning Army would be out of grain. Of course, Bai Yian could choose to reduce the food distribution, which would naturally sustain them for another two or three days. But doing so would mean that the Ning soldiers, not fully sated, would lack the strength to exert their full combat capabilities. The morale they had so hard earned could also significantly drop due to hunger. At that time, if the Ning Army could retain two or three parts of their combat capability, it would be considered fortunate indeed. But with just that fraction of their strength, what could they achieve with the fifty thousand troops they currently had? Not to mention, this meager fraction of their combat power could not be maintained for more than a few days. Therefore, Bai Yian would absolutely refuse to implement such a strategy akin to waiting for death. He had chosen to fight the Chu people to the death here, even at the risk of sacrificing fifty thousand soldiers, all to inflict the greatest possible losses on the Chu Army, to diminish Chu State¡¯s fighting strength, and to gain time for Ning Country. If he couldn¡¯t achieve this, then his death and the death of his fifty thousand troops would be utterly meaningless. ¡®I must not let the Chu people succeed,¡¯ Bai Yian thought, and this turned into determination. He surveyed the room with his gaze, looking at the many generals watching him, and spoke out, ¡°The Chu Army is cowardly, surrounding us with several times their number, yet they are too frightened to fight. It seems that our repeated victories over the Chu Army when we broke through before have utterly crushed their courage. They now fear us like a tiger, and dare not confront us.¡± Bai Yian, in an effort to boost morale and stabilize hearts, deliberately mentioned their previous victories at this time. Everyone also remembered the glorious feat of repeatedly defeating the Chu people over the past couple of days, and their originally somewhat panic-stricken hearts immediately started to stabilize significantly. Seeing the Wuan Marquis speak humorously, many couldn¡¯t help but join in, laughing a few times. ¡°The general is right; the Chu people are nothing to fear.¡± ¡°In my view, the Chu people only know how to use schemes and plots. When it comes to head-to-head combat on the battlefield, they are nothing special.¡± ¡°Correct, our retreat to this point today is not due to defeat in combat but rather the excessive cunning of the Chu people.¡± Some, remembering the wretched past few days, whether out of indignant anger or trying to mask their inner turmoil with words, started to belittle the Chu people. And, it worked. Regardless of how this behavior was viewed, the openly displayed morale of the Ning¡¯s many generals indeed increased significantly. At least it seemed no one feared the Chu Army any longer. Bai Yian didn¡¯t care if these people truly despised the enemy or just pretended not to be afraid; seeing that morale was usable, he seized the moment and ordered, ¡°You are right, gentlemen, the Chu thieves are not terrible. As long as we are fearless and the three armies are dedicated, we will break through them. Chapter 884 - Chapter 884: Chapter 374 Half of Jiangdong_2 Chapter 884: Chapter 374 Half of Jiangdong_2 ¡°Now that we have returned to Ning Country, only the last city of Ruichang, occupied by the Chu people, blocks our way.¡± ¡°Once we break through this defensive line, we can all return to our homeland.¡± ¡°Since we have courteously invited them to battle and the Chu people shrink back, fearing to fight, then we will force them to battle.¡± ¡°Transmit my command, the army will leave the camp and attack the Chu army¡¯s camp directly.¡± ¡°Defeat this army, and we return home!¡± Bai Yian¡¯s sound was like thunder, True pneuma wrapped his speech, instantly spreading for several miles around. For a moment, all the Ning soldiers within the camp could not help but hear the words of the Wuan Marquis. Their emotions were instantly incited. ¡°Defeat the Chu army, return home!¡± ¡°Kill the Chu thieves!¡± Inside the Ning camp, as some people took the lead, many soldiers began to shout in unison, pushing the atmosphere to its peak. It was then, outside the Ning camp, that a burst of hoofbeats was heard, and then over ten Chu cavalrymen began to approach the Ning camp, ultimately stopping at a distance of a hundred paces from it. Afterward, they started to run around within that perimeter, yelling loudly. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï ¡°Listen up, Ning army, you have been abandoned.¡± ¡°Do you think those ministers, generals, and the emperor in your camp are sharing life and death with you?¡± ¡°I¡¯ll tell you, your emperor and those ministers fled last night. Without alarming any of you, they all slipped away.¡± ¡°Look around your camp, how many high-ranking officials can you still find? Can you still find your generals?¡± ¡°Even the emperor has fled the army, what are you low-level soldiers fighting for? Even if your own lives aren¡¯t valuable, you shouldn¡¯t degrade yourselves like this, should you?¡± ¡°The King of Chu has ordered that any Ning soldiers who surrender will not be harmed, and will be directly recruited into the Forbidden Army, thereafter directly consuming Great Chu¡¯s rations.¡± ¡°We are all people of Jiangnan, why must we fight to the death?¡± ¡°Ning Country is unrighteous. This unprovoked attack on Chu State will ultimately lead to defeat. But this is the mistake of the Heavenly Son of Jinling, who for his own selfish desires, has recklessly taken up arms. We need not remain deluded.¡± ¡°Nanchang City has fallen, and Yuzhang is lost. Here is the head of the Prefect of Yuzhang, with the banners and great banners of the Nanchang defenders as proof.¡± ¡°Behind Ruichang City, there are only Chu State soldiers, even if you escape from here, you can¡¯t return to Ning Country, why not surrender early?¡± The Chu knights sent out to shout were all martial arts masters with profound Inner Strength, and with increased pneuma, their voices also carried very far. Even because many spoke at once, compared to Bai Yian¡¯s voice alone previously, they seemed much more resounding and brainwashing. All sorts of truths, along with proof and corpses, were being thrown towards the Ning camp by the shouting Chu knights, aiming to shake the resolve of the soldiers. Eastern Camp, Armor Second Camp Area. After the Chu knights finished shouting, they then took a corpse of a Ning person they were holding in hand and used their Inner Strength to toss it toward the Ning camp. Inside the camp, the Ning soldiers first saw a black speck flying towards them, thinking it was some kind of weapon, and hurriedly dodged to the side in fright. When they heard a muffled ¡°thump¡± as the black speck fell to the ground and saw clearly what it was, they realized it was a corpse. When someone went over to check, they discovered that the corpse was wearing the attire of the Ning army and couldn¡¯t help but retrieve it to take care of the remains of their comrade. A nearby platoon leader also came over with others, and upon seeing the corpse they were clearing, recognized its face and suddenly gasped, ¡°Captain Bai!¡± ¡°Platoon leader, do you know this comrade?¡± someone beside asked. The platoon leader nodded, his face darkening as he said, ¡°That¡¯s Bai Jingyang, the Zhao Yi School Captain under General Hengye, a clan nephew of the Wuan Marquis.¡± ¡°Zhao Yi School Captain!¡± ¡°The clan nephew of the Wuan Marquis!¡± Hearing these two identities, the soldiers nearby also cried out in shock. And after the shock passed, everyone also came to a realization, angrily saying, ¡°As a Zhao Yi School Captain, how did he fall into Chu people¡¯s hands and become a corpse?¡± ¡°How could the clan nephew of the Wuan Marquis end up outside the camp?¡± ¡°Could it be that what those Chu people said was true, that the emperor fled and those ministers and nobles also fled? They left us low-level soldiers here as bait, distracting the enemy to secure their own escape.¡± ¡°The Wuan Marquis is deceiving us! All those emperors and ministers have fled, and behind Ruichang it¡¯s not safe at all; we can¡¯t go home.¡± ¡°The Chu people have taken Nanchang, the whole of Yuzhang has become Chu territory, and even if we flee, where can we go?¡± ¡°Right, our superior, the Xin Wu School Captain Yang Ming from the Yang Family of Linhai. This morning, we haven¡¯t seen him at all; Captain Liu, who came from the common folk, has been the one to show up. Could it be that Yang Ming has also fled?¡± In an instant, the many words spoken by the Chu people earlier started to flash through the soldiers¡¯ minds. Things that had been ignored because of the Wuan Marquis¡¯s stirring rhetoric and the heat of the moment were slowly being noticed. The more they thought about it, the more things seemed unreasonable. ¡°Liars, they are all liars.¡± ¡°What Wuan Marquis, he¡¯s just trying to deceive us into sacrificing our lives for those emperors and ministers!¡± ¡°We need an explanation, we must have an explanation.¡± ¡°Right, we should confront the Wuan Marquis!¡± When emotions swing extremely from one end to another, some extreme phenomena and behaviors can occur. At this moment, some, realizing the truth and feeling deceived and played with, could no longer contain the fiery anger in their hearts. They began to openly violate military laws and regulations and started to agitate among the troops, heading towards where the Wuan Marquis was. In every army, there are always those who are brave. Chapter 885 - Chapter 885: Chapter 374 Half of Jiangdong_3 Chapter 885: Chapter 374 Half of Jiangdong_3 Previously, Marquis Wuan Bai Yian presented himself as someone who would live and die with his soldiers, motivating their spirits with slogans like ¡°stay alive¡± and ¡°return home,¡± which successfully gathered a large number of loyal followers willing to serve him to the death. But now, as all these lies were punctured, the many warriors who had their blood stirred and developed a readiness to die for the cause suddenly realized how ridiculous their so-called self-sacrifice had been. What they believed about the Marquis Wuan stooping down from a high position to interact with them as equals, even to live and die together, was all a deception. Those emperors, high officials, and nobles had abandoned them early on, fleeing the camp and leaving this deadly place behind. It was only they, the low-level fools, who thought that the aristocratic families and nobles of the imperial family would live and die with them, fighting for a way to return home. Upon discovering all this, anyone with a shred of dignity or bloodlust would not be able to tolerate it. The unrest grew increasingly intense, and in a moment, it suddenly gathered hundreds of people. They carried the corpses of the high-ranking officers and evidence tossed into the camp by the Chu people, surging towards the direction where Bai Yian was located. Atop the high platform. When the people from Chu came to shout, Bai Yian sensed something was wrong from the very beginning, feeling vaguely uneasy. And when the soldiers in the camp began to stir under the Chu¡¯s instigation, that feeling turned into reality. Looking at the soldiers coming forth in an emotional surge with overwhelming momentum, everyone¡¯s face turned pale. ¡°General, what should we do?¡± The generals, no longer as spirited as before, asked with a hint of panic in their voices as they watched the soldiers approach. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï ¡°Military law states that those who cause an uproar in the army shall be beheaded.¡± By then, Bai Yian looked at the mutinous soldiers, his eyes no longer showing the warmth and kindness of before, but filled with cold murderous intent. He knew. After the Chu people¡¯s scheming, particularly revealing a large amount of evidence, the trust he had built with the soldiers by stirring them up was completely gone. Those soldiers who realized they had been deceived would no longer believe in him as Marquis Wuan, nor would they respect and adore him as their Commander. So, since there was no chance of redemption, he wanted to minimize the losses as much as possible. ¡°You go immediately to your respective camps, gather the soldiers, stabilize the morale, and quell the disturbances. Then await my command. After the drum beats thrice, each of you shall lead your troops out of the camp in order and fight a decisive battle with the Chu.¡± Bai Yian looked at the generals and immediately made arrangements. The most urgent task was to control the soldiers and prevent the turmoil from escalating further. Then, while the mood was still not completely fermented, relying on the inertia brought by his former authority, he would quickly drive the still obedient soldiers to attack the Chu camp. Otherwise, once all the soldiers came to their senses, he would no longer have the obedience he had today when commanding a large army. ¡°Yes!¡± The generals who remained here were all prepared to stay behind and have a final battle to the death with the Chu army. They were already aware of the details, so naturally, they would not be swayed by the words of the Chu army. Thus, upon hearing the order, they acted without delay and carried out their duties immediately. After these people left, Bai Yian also immediately called his personal guards, leading several hundred die-hard loyalists directly towards the noise-making soldiers. ¡°General, is what the Chu said true?¡± ¡°Did the Emperor really run away?¡± ¡°Marquis Wuan, you deceitful pretender!¡± As the two groups drew closer, the soldiers¡¯ emotions skyrocketed upon seeing Bai Yian. ¡°You gather here for mutiny, do you wish to defy military law? Retreat at once, return to your camps, and I can act as if nothing has happened, not holding you accountable.¡± Bai Yian looked at the many soldiers questioning him, his expression indifferent, showing no intention of answering, and coldly stated, ¡°Otherwise, military law will take its course.¡± ¡°You are indeed deceiving us!¡± ¡°General, why?¡± ¡°Ha! Apply military law then, I¡¯m right here; come and kill if you dare!¡± Seeing Bai Yian tacitly acknowledge the truth, the last glimmer of hope in the soldiers¡¯ hearts shattered, and their emotions plunged into madness. Seeing this, Bai Yian knew these men could not be redeemed, and without hesitation, he gave the order, ¡°Obstinate fools, kill!¡± Having said that, he even took action himself, transforming into a dark wind, plunging directly into the midst of the mutinous soldiers. The dark wind swept through, instantly claiming the lives of dozens of individuals. The other arriving personal guards didn¡¯t hesitate either, raising their swords to strike down these former comrades. In an instant, before the Ning and Chu armies engaged in battle, the Ning army fell into a slaughterous internal strife. A few hundred men¡¯s rebellion was, of course, nothing to Bai Yian. With him, an Inborn Grandmaster, taking action, and leading a few hundred elite soldiers, he had easily suppressed the unrest. After quelling the mutiny, Bai Yian didn¡¯t delay. Seizing the moment when a recent slaughter had just intimidated everyone and when many soldiers were still obeying commands, he immediately gathered the central army, struck the heavy drums, led his troops out of the camp, and marched towards the Chu camp. However, during the internal strife of the Ning Army, the Chu forces had already made preparations and gathered troops early on. And after several hours of preparation, even the Chu forces led by Lu Yuan, who arrived last, had almost completed the construction of their camp fortifications. So when the Ning Army attacked, tens of thousands of Chu soldiers, relying on their camp defenses, unleashed a barrage of arrows and a hail of rocks, instantly dealing a heavy blow to the charging Ning forces. Before the several tens of thousands of Ning soldiers could get close to the Chu camp, over a thousand had already fallen midway. By the time they reached the vicinity of the camp, the well-rested Chu forces, who had been at the ready since dawn, easily slaughtered those survivors who had luckily broken through to their front. The Ning Army had only fifty thousand men, while the defending Chu forces in the camp amounted to a full eighty thousand. Morale, physical strength, condition, armor, and weapons, among other aspects, all heavily favored the fresh Chu Army over the weary Ning forces who had been in prolonged combat. Not to mention that, before the battle started, the Ning Army had suffered a disturbance, causing widespread unrest among the troops, alienation between officers and soldiers, and low morale throughout the army. In such a situation, Bai Yian¡¯s hope for a last stand and to break through the Chu camp was merely a joke, an impossibility. After less than half an hour of battle, the Ning Army, having lost over five thousand men, could no longer hold on. After the deaths of the most capable and willing die-hard Ning soldiers. The remaining troops, whose loyalties were wavering, naturally did not want to continue sacrificing their lives for high-ranking officials like Bai Yian who had deceived them. Moreover, after charging for a while and losing over five thousand men, they hadn¡¯t even breached half of a Chu camp. With the fortifications to rely on, the Chu losses were minimal, while their own were devastating. It was clear to anyone that even if they were wiped out to the last man, the Ning forces could not break through the Chu defenses. Just at that moment. From within Ruichang City behind them, Huang Xuan seized the opportunity when the majority of the Ning forces were out attacking, and the main camp was vulnerable, leading tens of thousands of soldiers to take the Ning Army Camp, completely severing the opponent¡¯s retreat. When the main camp behind the lines erupted in massive flames and the fleeing defenders made it to the front lines, the last bit of the Ning Army¡¯s determination to fight to the death completely dissipated. A massive rout ensued with the appearance of the first deserter, quickly spreading through the entire army. The remaining thirty thousand plus Ning soldiers either surrendered on the spot or threw down their weapons and armor and fled for their lives. This trend could not be stopped by Bai Yian even as he led his personal guard to once again kill hundreds. And by the time he had finished, all the remaining Ning soldiers were avoiding him, leaving him completely isolated. Lu Yuan, Han Hua, Huang Xuan, and Sun Siwen had already led their forces to surround him from all sides, trapping him in the center. ¡­ On the second day of the fourth month of the eleventh year of Shenwu. The Chu forces surrounded Marquis Wuan Bai Yian and his fifty thousand troops beneath Ruichang City. That day, when the two armies clashed, Bai Yian led his troops to assault the Chu main camp, losing thousands without success, leading to the dissolution of the Ning forces. Amid the turmoil, Marquis Wuan Bai Yian was captured by the King of Chu. The King of Chu, admiring his talents, wished to enlist him. Bai Yian refused to surrender, asked to face death, and the King of Chu granted his request. He was allowed to cut his own heart vein and died with an intact corpse. With that, the last remnant of the Jiangxia main camp of Ning Country¡¯s eastern campaign was annihilated. Earlier that month, news from the two prefectures of Luyang and Hengyang indicated that the defenders, with the assistance of Public Kunhai, Li Xiong, had successively defeated the invading Ning forces. Ten thousand soldiers from the two routes of the Ning Army were wiped out, with only the leading Innate Martial Marquis managing to narrowly escape and hasten back to Ning Country due to his formidable strength. Mid-month, the commander of the Chu State¡¯s southern forces, Qingyunzi, led the army to break through Jian¡¯an County City and captured Jian¡¯an County, once again sending back victorious news. Following this battle, half of the lands east of the Yangtze River had fallen into the hands of Chu State. Ning Country was left with only Linhai and Guangling prefectures and a last breath in the corner of Yangzhou, no longer able to sustain its dominant position. This war, which began in September last year and ended in April this year, lasting for over half a year, concluded with a victory for Chu State, temporarily coming to a pause. Ning Country turned out to be the utter loser. As the news spread, the Nine Provinces trembled. Chapter 886 - Chapter 886: Chapter 375 Post-War Combing Chapter 886: Chapter 375 Post-War Combing Over two thousand years ago, after the Coastal Aristocratic Family migrated southwards, established their capital in Jinling, conquered Jiangdong, and managed this area. Since the establishment of Yuzhang Prefecture, Yuzhang has historically been known as the Land of Fish and Rice. Yuzhang has many mountains, but only the northern parts¡ªYuzhang, Pengli, Xunyang, and Linchuan Prefectures, have large plains and basins. This also means that the five major water systems of Yuzhang¡ªthe Gan River, Fu River, Xin River, Rao River, and Xiu River¡ªoriginating from their sources, all converge within these four prefectures. In the end, these water flows come together to form the magnificent expanse of the thousand-mile great Pengli marshland. Benefiting from this vast marshland, the land around Pengli Lake is fertile, with a hundred thousand qing of good farmland cultivated to feed the surrounding six hundred thousand households. In the rest of the prefectures within Yuzhang, good farmland has also been developed along the riversides and in the valleys between mountains. Furthermore, on the mountain ridges, water is diverted for irrigation to develop terraced fields. The regions along these five rivers, supporting the people there, also account for no fewer than five hundred thousand households. Therefore, within Yuzhang Prefecture as a whole, there are over a million households and more than six million people. With such a dense population, abundant production of fish and rice, and thriving boat transportation, it can be called the crown jewel of Jiangdong, the foremost among the prefectures. So, after Lu Yuan led his troops to defeat Bai Yian and killed this Wuan Marquis, He did not rush to continue commanding the army eastwards to conquer the remaining counties of Ning Country¡¯s Linhai and Guangling. Instead, after moving his troops into the Yuzhang county town of Nanchang, he personally took command of fifty thousand soldiers to hold this strategic location. After that, he dispatched troops in all directions, sending generals to conquer the remaining prefectures and counties of Yuzhang. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 Now, among the ten prefectures within Yuzhang Prefecture, most of Yuzhang Prefecture has been captured, with only some remote county towns still holding out and resisting. However, once the news of Ning Army¡¯s major defeat spreads, it¡¯s believed that these small counties will surrender at the sight of the Great Chu¡¯s divine troops and will no longer dare to resist. Though these remote small counties are easy to conquer, all other prefectures have fully organized local prefecture and county soldiers, each with a standing army of two thousand soldiers. Given Yuzhang¡¯s dense population, temporarily conscripting civilian workers to guard the city is not difficult. Additionally, local powerful clans and Aristocratic families are assisting by sending their own household troops to defend. All other prefectures can quickly muster tens of thousands of troops to resist the Chu soldiers. By then, defending strongholds with tens of thousands of troops, even if the Chu army is capable of overtaking them, will result in heavy casualties and the days spent on sieges are incalculable. Spending too much time on receiving conquered areas, especially if Ning Country recuperates and sends reinforcements to the prefectures and counties that are still resisting, will inevitably lead to an extremely fierce and protracted struggle. Once the battle commences and the region falls into ruin, Yuzhang Prefecture, originally prosperous and wealthy, might well become a wasteland. This situation, for Lu Yuan, who has already taken control of the Yuzhang Prefecture and considers it his own, is naturally unacceptable. Therefore, taking advantage of the recent defeat of the Ning Army, the fear among the people of Yuzhang in various prefectures and their lack of preparations, it is necessary to select capable generals and dispatch troops quickly for an offensive. Aside from Yuzhang Prefecture, the southernmost Luling Prefecture of Yuzhang has also been seized by Chu State. Thus, there are eight remaining prefectures in Yuzhang that still need to have troops dispatched to conquer them. Fortunately, after Lu Yuan led his troops to eliminate Bai Yian, news came from Baling that after Li Liang and Zhuang Hua, who had stayed behind, engaged in closed-door cultivation for over a year, they finally broke through Innate limitations and became another two Grandmasters for Chu State. Within a period of ten days, Chu State gained two more Inborn Grandmasters, significantly bolstering its high-end combat strength. And with Li Liang and Zhuang Hua breaking through Innate, if Han Shun and Zhang You, who were at the same level as them, are any indication, their breakthroughs shouldn¡¯t be far behind. Perhaps in a few more days, good news from Xichuan and Hanzhong will arrive. As these disciples achieve their breakthroughs, the previously exposed homeland of the nation can now be considered secure, and there¡¯s no longer a need to worry about local unrest. So, in a joyous mood, Lu Yuan immediately ordered Sun Siwen to return to the country and sit tight in Baling to stabilize internal and external affairs in the court. Then he summoned Li Liang and Zhuang Hua to the front line, to join Huang Xuan and Han Hua, who were already in Nanchang City, and each take command of an army to attack the prefectures of Pengli, Xunyang, Linchuan, and Raoyang in the central and northern parts of Yuzhang Prefecture. He also ordered the spiritual woman along with the Chu Wei¡¯s soldiers in Hengyang and Luyang Prefectures, and Li Xiong and Han Liang, who had captured Luling Prefecture, to lead their troops against the four prefectures of Yichun, Nankang, Ji¡¯an, and Fuchuan in the southern part of Yuzhang Prefecture. In this way, each of the remaining eight prefectures in Yuzhang would have one Inborn Grandmaster and tens of thousands of soldiers to assail them. With such formidable strength, even if the eight prefectures controlled by the Yuzhang Ning Army each had ten thousand soldiers to defend, they would have difficulty resisting the assault of the Chu forces. Chu State would then be able to quickly pacify the eight prefectures and completely take control of the entire Yuzhang, fully governing its population of six million and turning this Land of Fish and Rice to its advantage. As troops were dispatched along eight routes, Chu Army banners could be seen throughout the prefectures and counties of Yuzhang in no time. With eight Inborn Grandmasters leading the forces, wherever the Chu Army went, it was certain to prevail. After Li Dao and Bai Yian died in battle, and Shen Qiu fled back to Jinling along the Yangtze River, The entire Yuzhang region, left with Ning Country¡¯s remaining Inborn Grandmasters, only had two who had fled back to the country in disgrace after a major defeat from Luyang and Hengyang. But these two Inborn Grandmasters, freshly defeated and chased ragged by the Chu forces, who had lost their armies and barely escaped with their lives, were no better than homeless dogs. In their current state, facing the immense coordinated assault of the Chu Army advancing on eight fronts, how could they dare remain in Yuzhang to confront them? So upon hearing the news that the Chu Army had mobilized, the two were instantly terrified and dared not stay even for half a day under the thunderous onslaught of the eight Inborn Grandmasters and hundreds of thousands of Chu soldiers. Chapter 887 - Chapter 887: Chapter 375 Post-War Combing_2 Chapter 887: Chapter 375 Post-War Combing_2 Yuzhang had become a perilous place, and staying there meant nothing but death. Therefore, upon hearing the news, the two of them abandoned the city and fled before the Chu soldiers arrived, vanishing without a trace. Without the inherent barriers to stop them, the remaining Ning Army in Yuzhang, leaderless and without resolve, naturally fell into disarray. Under the assault of the eight Chu armies, it only took about ten days. By the end of April, the region was completely pacified. And with the Chu army¡¯s strikes throughout the month, as well as their unstoppable and fearsome military might, Yuzhang Prefecture had been utterly terrified. In that period, at the signal from Lu Yuan, numerous local prominent families, who had assisted the Ning Army in resisting the Chu soldiers, were exterminated, along with countless clan members. In doing so, Chu State not only identified a vast number of hidden households, enriching the local population records, but also amassed a large amount of land, money, and grain through the extermination of families, rapidly replenishing the state treasury that had been depleted by the war. In the wake of this calamity, the remaining fortunate survivors among the Aristocratic Families were so terrified of Chu that they dared not harbor the slightest disloyal thought, submitting completely. After a thunderous campaign of cleansing, backed by their mighty troops, Chu State had managed to gain a preliminary foothold in Yuzhang Prefecture. Meanwhile, Sun Siwen, who had already returned to the capital, began coordinating within the country to draw capable officials from the Chu court and localities, dispatching them in groups to Yuzhang to take over the newly conquered Prefectures and Counties. However, despite Sun Siwen¡¯s efforts to requisition officials, the staffing gap in Yuzhang remained substantial. Since the campaign began last September, Chu had successively conquered Su Country and Nanhai Country, securing three Prefectures and twenty-four Counties in Lingnan ¡ª all places in need of new officials. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Now, with the annexation of Jianan and Yuzhang in Jiangdong, these two additional Prefectures with eighteen Counties also created a vast number of vacancies. In less than a year, Chu expanded its dominion to five Prefectures and forty-two Counties, nearly doubling its territory. To staff these five Prefectures and forty-two Counties alone, Chu needed no less than six thousand officials of various ranks, nearly doubling the number of existing officials in Chu. This huge shortage of officials was not something that could be easily remedied by hastily conducting several rounds of Enke examinations. To ensure stable grassroots operations, Lu Yuan even had to retain nearly half of the officials from the Three Nations, after assessing them, to fill the vacancies, supplemented by domestic emergency deployments to just about fill these positions. However, such measures brought significant potential problems. The original officials of the various countries, deeply indebted to their former nations, may harbor resentment toward Chu, which conquered their homelands. This was particularly true for the officials in Jianan and Yuzhang Prefectures, who mostly came from Aristocratic families and held no fondness for Chu, which had just purged their clans. Ning Country was not yet extinguished but still gasping for breath in half of Jiangdong, retaining its strength. For officials in these two Prefectures, resentment toward Chu for family destruction was paired with a lingering loyalty to their former ruler, making their allegiance questionable. Lu Yuan, lacking better options, could only try his best to transfer the original Ning officials away from Jianan and Yuzhang, dispatching them to remote areas far from Ning, such as Lingnan, the Southwest, and Xichuan. He then drew officials from these areas to fill the vacancies in the two Prefectures, aiming to eliminate potential risks as much as possible. After such maneuvering, the newly acquired five Prefectures were relatively stable, and Chu established a foundational presence in the region, no longer a rootless entity. With a few years of maintenance and the people¡¯s allegiance secured, Jiangdong and Lingnan would be thoroughly Chu¡¯s territory. With large armies stationed in all directions to quell internal turmoil and repel foreign enemies, the country also selected strong and capable officials to swiftly stabilize local order. With the efforts of these able ministers and generals, Yuzhang quickly settled down, sparing Lu Yuan the need for further concern. Thus, seeing the situation stabilize, he turned his attention elsewhere. ¡­ Inside the temporary residence of the King of Chu in Nanchang City, since entering the city, to soothe the public¡¯s heart, Lu Yuan had continuously summoned local scholars and individuals of influence from Yuzhang Prefecture, aiming to control the Yuzhang area by winning over these locals. At this time, as the Chu army quelled unrest throughout Yuzhang, anywhere there was rebellion, it was promptly subdued. While this led to significant slaughter, resulting in the extinction of many prominent families, it also served to intimidate and instill fear into the people of Yuzhang Prefecture through these executions. In Nanchang City, Lu Yuan proactively recruited talented scholars and used benevolence to pacify the people, achieving immediate remarkable results. Suddenly, throughout Yuzhang Prefecture, everyone who wished to survive, who aspired to advance their careers, or who abandoned darkness for light, all flocked to Nanchang. Even from Linhai and Guangling Prefectures, many realized that Ning Country¡¯s fate was sealed and Chu¡¯s unification of Jiangnan was inevitable. Consequently, quite a few scholars from these two Prefectures traveled long distances to join. Among these people, naturally, were also many members of the Coastal Aristocratic Families, all of whom Lu Yuan warmly received. Once examined, they were directly appointed to official positions and assigned to remote areas such as Lingnan, the Southwest, and Xichuan to fill the gaps among officials. However, most of these new adherents were mediocre. Even if some possessed talent, it was only in ordinary statecraft, which was fundamentally insignificant in the present era. Therefore, besides initially receiving several batches of important individuals personally to show his regard, as the numbers increased and became bothersome, Lu Yuan delegated the task. He instructed the Ministry of Personnel and the Honglu Temple to send relevant officials to handle the reception and assessment. He then focused on military affairs, organizing and consolidating the defense of Jiangdong and Lingnan. Now, with Chu¡¯s territory and population having expanded more than twofold, it was like swallowing a large fattening meal in one gulp¡ªthe kind that leaves you uncomfortably full. Chapter 888 - Chapter 888: Chapter 375 Post-War Combing_3 Chapter 888: Chapter 375 Post-War Combing_3 Today, there is a lack of officials everywhere, and Chu State even has to reluctantly employ a large number of former officials from other countries with potential risks, which is a manifestation of indigestion. Therefore, let¡¯s not talk about other issues for now, it is not suitable to proceed with the next expansion until there are sufficient qualified officials trained to assimilate the current achievements and fill the roles needed for the territories to be conquered in the future. After capturing Yuzhang and Jianan Prefectures, Lu Yuan ceased his military campaigns and temporarily halted warfare, shifting from offense to defense, focusing on assimilating the fruits of victory and accumulating strength. Since the shift from offense to defense began and the time for recuperation has arrived, it is natural to take this opportunity to improve the military defenses in Jiangdong and Lingnan, as well as the expansion and adjustment of the various military troops within the country. Since the war began, Chu State has successively annihilated Su Country and South Sea Prefecture, and has also defeated Jiangdong, the defeated armies totaling nearly a million men. Naturally, the Chu army did not, and could not, wipe out all these nearly one million troops. That would be unrealistic, as well as cruel and wasteful. In fact, a large portion of these defeated enemy forces were captured. In the battle against Su Country, Chu¡¯s forces first broke through Tonghai County, capturing over ten thousand defenders. Late they defeated the allied troops of Su and Song, capturing over fifty thousand men. During the attack on Yulin County, they captured ten thousand local troops. And when they finally captured the national capital of Yulin, they took over twenty thousand more prisoners. Simply by vanquishing Su Country, Chu captured almost one hundred thousand Su and Song soldiers and horses. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï In the battle against Nanhai Country, they captured the prefectures and counties of South Sea Prefecture, taking over ten thousand prisoners. Later, in the great battle in Nanhai City against the combined forces of twenty-five thousand troops from Ning and Southern Sea, continuous attacks led to the capture of one hundred sixty thousand soldiers when Nanhai City fell. Even in these last two months, the naval forces of Nanhai Country, who had originally traveled far and wide for trade, came to surrender upon hearing that their homeland had been occupied by Chu State. In South Sea Prefecture, Chu State recruited an additional twenty thousand naval forces. Thus, in the battle against Nanhai Country, Chu State subdued a total of two hundred thousand troops, both naval and land forces. In the following massive battle at Dongting, the Chu army successively defeated four hundred thousand land and naval forces from Ning, beheading over one hundred thousand and capturing two hundred thirty thousand. Only the remaining thirty thousand or so naval forces of Ning Army, stationed near Xiangyang and Xiakou in the north of the river, escaped the encirclement and thus were spared from doom. Later, Lu Yuan conquered Yuzhang, capturing over twenty thousand local soldiers from prefectures, counties, and county soldiers. Qingyunzi attacked Jianan, capturing over ten thousand local military forces. In over a dozen battles, big and small, Chu State captured troops from four different countries on five battlefields, a total of five hundred sixty thousand men. Even if the civilian workers forcibly conscripted by Nanhai Country were to be discounted, the remaining regular military forces numbered five hundred thousand. And before the war began, the entire nation of Chu had only a total military force of seven hundred thousand. After the continuous battles, Chu¡¯s military suffered losses exceeding one hundred thousand; only around five hundred thousand soldiers remained, which is a figure comparable to that of these captives. That¡¯s exactly why assimilating these captives became an urgent affair that Chu¡¯s military had to deal with quickly. Otherwise, with hundreds of thousands of captives skilled in killing gathered together, even with a large army to watch over them, there could be no guarantee against all mishaps. With time, rebellion and disturbances could easily arise. So, after consulting his confidant ministers, Lu Yuan issued an edict to select from the five hundred thousand captives, dismissing one hundred thousand infirm and elderly for replenishment of the damaged troop numbers in various prefectures of Dongting, and to establish county soldiers in the newly captured prefectures, improving local security. Next, he selected fifty thousand soldiers to establish county soldiers for five prefectures. Another eighty thousand were chosen to replenish the depleted ranks of the Forbidden Army. An additional forty thousand navy prisoners were absorbed into the Chu naval forces, expanding the navy to eighty thousand men. The remaining two hundred thirty thousand captives were mixed with the existing Forbidden Army and organized into ten new units, expanding the Forbidden Army¡¯s strength. At the same time, from within the Forbidden Army, thirty thousand elite troops were selected to replenish the Jinwu Guard, tasked with defending the imperial city of the capital, reaching a total troop size of twenty thousand for both the palace guards and the Jinwu Guard. With such absorption and assimilation, the regular military forces of Chu would officially surpass one million. Among them, there are one hundred ninety-six thousand prefectures and county soldiers, one hundred ten thousand county soldiers, eighty thousand naval forces, twenty thousand each for the Jinwu Guard and palace guards, and thirty-five divisions of the Forbidden Army, totaling seven hundred thousand men. All five divisions combined, amounting to a total of one million one hundred twenty-six thousand men. All these are regular troops, not some civilian conscripts to be used as cannon fodder. With such powerful forces, Chu has the strength to rank within the top five in the world and to look down upon other heroes. If there is a need for war in the future, there won¡¯t be a need to mobilize civilian workers, as they could easily deploy an army of five to six hundred thousand men to instill fear in an entire province and exhibit boundless power. Such might befit the title of Supreme Dominator of the world indeed. With such expectations, Lu Yuan continued to sign various edicts within Nanchang City, closely engaging with military leaders, striving to push for the military restructuring and expansion of Chu¡¯s army. He was extremely busy, hardly having a moment to rest. And in the midst of all this busyness, outside Nanchang City, from the north and the south, two groups of visitors arrived in the city in succession, presenting their calling cards and requesting an audience with the King of Chu. After the lower-ranking officials reported and presented the calling cards, even amid the heavy load of tasks, Lu Yuan took a moment to look at the names and titles on the calling cards, revealing a look of surprise, followed by an unstoppable smile on his face. For on the two calling cards, the inscribed identities were none other than: Liuyang Sect Leader, Yin Huixuan. Purple Cloud Taoist Master, Xuan Chengzi. The only two Inborn powers within Yuzhang territory that remained outside Chu¡¯s control, as Chu beat Ning Country and revealed the potential to unify Jiangnan and Yangzhou, and thoroughly took control of Yuzhang Prefecture. They finally let go of their pride. Without waiting for Chu to initiate contact, they took the first step and came knocking on the door to offer their services. How could Lu Yuan not be pleased with such an alignment of the people¡¯s will and the trend of the great moment? ¡°First, let Sect Leader Yin Huixuan of Liuyang Sect be summoned for an audience,¡± Lu Yuan put down the calling card and instructed the inner attendant by his side, ¡°As for the Taoist Master of Purple Cloud, arrange for him to stay in the post house in the city for now, and have the officials of Honglu Temple attend to him properly.¡± Strictly speaking, Purple Cloud Dao and Chu are currently on opposing sides. The enforcers within their sect are even serving in Ning Country, helping oppose Chu¡¯s military force! On the other hand, Liuyang Sect has always upheld the principles of Jianghu in recent years, never interfering in the strife for supremacy in the world, honestly living as people of Jianghu. Therefore, when it came to the two who requested an audience, Lu Yuan naturally intended to meet with Yin Huixuan first. After this meeting, he would then decide on his stance toward Purple Cloud Dao. Chapter 889 - Chapter 889: Chapter 376: Subdue the Liuyang Sect Chapter 889: Chapter 376: Subdue the Liuyang Sect Nanchang City, the temporary residence of the King of Chu. In the meeting hall, after Lu Yuan sent an Inner Attendant off to summon Yin Huixuan, he stood up and came to this place to wait for his arrival. While waiting, he also contemplated the person that was Yin Huixuan. Lu Yuan had long admired Yin Huixuan. Back when he was still a hunter in Dayu County, he had already heard of the name of the Inborn Grandmaster Yin Huixuan, knowing he was the number one person in the martial arts world of Yuzhang Prefecture, with unfathomably deep martial arts. Later, when the Black Wind Gang caused chaos in Luling Prefecture, the local officials and martial artists failed to control them, allowing the bandits to run rampant for a time. Eventually, the Liuyang Sect took notice, and commanded Sect Leader Yin Huixuan to cross the river southward personally, to eradicate the turmoil caused by the Black Wind Gang and restore peace to Luling Prefecture. Subsequent investigations into the origins of the bandits revealed that it was the martial arts world of Lingnan that sought to expand its influence, which reached out its hand toward Yuzhang. Infuriated, Yin Sect Leader went down to Lingnan and, with a mere sweep of his palm, easily subdued the entire martial arts community of Lingnan. At that time, still not past his prime and just at the tail end of his peak period, the Martial Arts Leader of the Southsea, Yan Wangqiu, upon hearing the name of Yin Huixuan, was so frightened that he fled upon the wind and did not dare to stay at his sect to confront him. The name of Liuyang¡¯s Yin Huixuan thus completely resounded throughout Jiangnan. Back then, his one-man dominance over Lingnan, once it spread back to Yuzhang, truly uplifted everyone, from high to low. Whether it was individuals from Jianghu, ordinary people, or scholars, they all heard of it and aspired to it. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? Lu Yuan was no exception. Upon hearing the deeds of Yin Huixuan, he set him as his goal, determined to rise to the Inborn level, to stand at the pinnacle of Jianghu, to laugh proudly above the martial arts world and become a heroic figure of his generation. Yet, as time passed and circumstances changed, Jiangnan descended into chaos, the Yue House waned, and Yangzhou became a battleground for warring heroes. Because of his friendship with Sun Siwen, Lu Yuan moved from his original life shrouded in the marketplace, gradually starting his career in the government, and finally cut out his own domain in the troubled times, becoming the King of Great Chu as he is now. Such bygone days are sigh-worthy. As he pondered, noise came from outside the door, and the Inner Attendant who had gone to pass the decree led a person into the hall. ¡°This humble citizen, Yin Huixuan, greets the great king.¡± Although Yin Huixuan was the Sect Leader of the Liuyang Sect, he had always been involved in Jianghu and had never held any official position, nor had he any noble title granted to him. In the eyes of the court, he was no different from ordinary people. Therefore, upon entering the hall, he performed the rites of a commoner. Seizing the opportunity, Lu Yuan sized up this number one figure of the Jiangnan martial arts world. He saw that the other party¡¯s hair and beard were partially white, dressed in blue clothes, with a lean appearance, a temperament that was restrained within, revealing not the slightest bit outwardly, yet losing none of the grandeur¡ªa true Grandmaster of major accomplishments. In view of this, he knew that the Martial Arts Leader of Yangzhou was as genuine as his reputation. ¡°No need for such courtesy.¡± Thinking thus, Lu Yuan slightly raised his hand to let Yin Huixuan stand up, and while smiling faintly, he said, ¡°This king has waited for several years, Yin Sect Leader has come so late.¡± ¡°Having consecutively broken through the armies of Lingnan and Jiangdong, annihilating two countries, and repeatedly defeated Ning and Song, you now command Jiangnan, dominating a province. As a mere commoner living beside the Pengli marshlands, I too have heard of the mighty reputation of Chu¡¯s army. Previously, when your majesty extended his invitation, as a commoner, I worried about the safety of the sect and the ancestral foundation, hence I dared not travel thousands of miles to join alone. Now that your majesty has raised his army against Yuzhang, threatening Jiangdong, the people of Ning have lost their courage in an instant, and the Liuyang Sect too has become subjects of Great Chu. As a commoner, I finally dared to come, following my admiration, arriving late and showing neglect, I hope the great king will forgive my crime.¡± Seeing the smile on Lu Yuan¡¯s face, Yin Huixuan felt a chill in his heart, hurriedly lay prostrate on the ground and moved forward to apologize. Since Chu State became dominant, the prestige of Great Chu had been spread throughout the Nine Provinces and was respected by all. At that time, in the North and South of the great river, many ambitious figures from various countries who did not achieve their wishes heard of Chu¡¯s name and went to pledge their allegiance, offering their services to the ruler. So many came to join Chu that they couldn¡¯t be counted; they were as ubiquitous as the rivers and hard to see in their entirety. Chu Country also took this opportunity to select talented individuals, to diligently recruit skilled people for national use. After the Northern Expedition to Hanzhong, Chu Country consecutively expanded its army by several tens of thousands, nearly doubling its soldiers and horses, and there was no shortage of capable commanders to serve in the army, benefiting greatly from this influx of talent. Without the talented scholars from the North and South joining, among whom were several hundred gifted in both civil service and martial strength, and after assessment, filling the ranks of the army as platoon leaders or squad chiefs, it would have been difficult to have today¡¯s strong military. Therefore, Lu Yuan, benefiting greatly at that time, developed a taste for it, and began not just waiting for people to come to him. Instead, he sent out messengers and spies to invite capable people from all countries to help Chu. At that time, located in Jiangnan, and even arguably a fellow townsman, with extremely strong martial force, and influence widely spread in Yuzhang, Liuyang Sect¡¯s Yin Huixuan naturally caught Lu Yuan¡¯s attention. Thus when Chu Country became powerful enough to recruit an Inborn Grandmaster, he tentatively sent messengers to Liuyang Sect to make contact with the other party, in an attempt to recruit Yin Huixuan. However, at that time, even though Chu Country was dominant in Jiangnan and vaguely rivaled Ning Country, with an inclination to jointly divide Yangzhou, the newly established state of Chu was still weak in strength, with a population of no more than eight million and an army of not more than five hundred thousand, far less than Jiangdong¡¯s Ning Country. In the eyes of many, compared to the newborn state of Chu, Ning Country, with its two thousand years of rule, born of Coastal Aristocratic Families, with deep and substantial heritage, had a greater hope of unifying Yangzhou. Therefore, facing the recruitment from Chu Country, Liuyang Sect proclaimed themselves as people of Jianghu, uninvolved in matters of the court, and courteously refused, without agreeing. This was quite normal. Because when facing recruitment from Ning Country, Liuyang Sect did the same. At that time, Chu Country was even less potent than Ning Country, how could Yin Huixuan possibly defect to them. Lu Yuan was aware of this, and thus, when Liuyang Sect courteously refused, he did not insist and gave up the thought there and then. Yin Huixuan, seeing that Lu Yuan¡¯s words vaguely brought up past events, feared that the King of Chu still harbored resentment to this day, blaming Liuyang Sect, hence he took the initiative to come forward, showing a submissive attitude. Chapter 890 - Chapter 890: Chapter 376: Subdue the Liuyang Sect_2 Chapter 890: Chapter 376: Subdue the Liuyang Sect_2 ¡°Haha, what are you saying, Yin Sect Leader?¡± Seeing that Yin Huixuan expressed his intention to submit and join him, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but laugh loudly. He stepped forward, helped him up, and joyfully said, ¡°For Yin Sect Leader to bring his sect to join me is as good as gaining an army of a hundred thousand. I am too delighted to even consider blaming you.¡± This sentiment was by no means an empty platitude. The reputation of the Liuyang Sect in the martial arts world spread throughout Yangzhou and even had a significant influence in Qing and Yong, the two northern states. If he could win them over, he could capture the hearts of the heroes of both northern and southern martial arts worlds and make the solitary warriors scattered across Jianghu vie to serve Chu. In Yuzhang Prefecture, the Liuyang Sect had over ten thousand disciples, its influence spread throughout the entire region, truly deep-rooted. With their help, Great Chu¡¯s conquest of Yuzhang would be much easier. As for Yin Huixuan himself, there was even less need to say. Within Yangzhou, aside from Lu Yuan and Shen Qiu, he was the third Grandmaster to reach the Second Realm of the Inborn level ¡ª his strength was unequivocally supreme in Jiangnan. Before Lu Yuan, the Inborn assassin, rose to prominence, Yin Huixuan¡¯s personal power was even acknowledged to be greater than Shen Qiu¡¯s, making him the unofficial number one in Jiangnan. Therefore, if he could gain his assistance, the top-tier combatants of Chu would, following Lu Yuan and his two avatars, have another Grandmaster of the Second Realm. So, taking in the Liuyang Sect meant not only winning over the hearts of the martial world in both northern and southern regions, but also harnessing the power of Jianghu in Yuzhang and gaining another Second Realm Grandmaster, Yin Huixuan. The benefits were too numerous to count. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Lu Yuan, of course, was tempted ¨C otherwise, he would not have originally sent a messenger to Yuzhang to recruit them. But in the end, he was rejected. Seeing that Lu Yuan held no grudges, Yin Huixuan¡¯s heart eased and he quickly replied, ¡°Great Chu is full of talented people, with a million valiant soldiers, brilliant strategists as numerous as the clouds, and strong warriors like pouring rain. I am but a humble man with some skill in martial arts and dare not accept the praise of equating myself to an army of a hundred thousand. ¡°However, if Your Majesty does not despise my crude background, a lowly person from Jianghu, Huixuan is willing to lead his sect to serve Great Chu wholeheartedly.¡± Yin Huixuan looked at Lu Yuan earnestly, expressing his intention to join him. Several years ago, he had tactfully declined the invitation of the Chu envoys. At that time, his proud, aloof stance earned him praise from others. However, times had changed. Back then, Chu was considered weak and not favored by the world. The power struggle in Yangzhou was thought by many to be a conflict that could not be resolved for decades. But after a war involving five kingdoms, the Chu army swiftly annihilated the Su and Southsea countries and secured the Lingnan Region. Now they had defeated the Ning army and seized half of Jiangdong. Thus, Yuzhang Prefecture, where the Liuyang Sect was located, had also become Chu territory. The Liuyang Sect, too, became the subjects of Chu. The situation in Jiangnan had completely clarified after Ning¡¯s disastrous defeat. Anyone could see that the remaining two prefectures of Ning were merely struggling to survive. Once Chu had digested its conquests, obtaining the wealth, resources, and manpower of Lingnan and Jiangdong, and mustering the troops from these lands, Ning¡¯s demise was certain with Chu¡¯s advance. In the past, when Chu and Ning were at odds, Yuzhang, lying on the border of the two countries, made both sides wary of each other, and neither dared to pressure the Liuyang Sect too much for fear of driving it into the arms of the enemy. Therefore, maintaining this balance, the Liuyang Sect could thrive from both sides, assuming a neutral stance, independently reigning as the overlord of Jianghu outside these two countries. But now with Ning retreating and Chu seizing half of Jiangdong, the Liuyang Sect had also become a sect under Chu¡¯s jurisdiction with no more room to negotiate. Thus, after grasping the situation, the Liuyang Sect no longer had any independence and did not wait for Lu Yuan to extend an invitation; instead, it proactively came to surrender. ¡°Yin Sect Leader¡¯s willingness to lead the Liuyang Sect heroes to join Great Chu is surely a great matter, and I am naturally willing,¡± Lu Yuan said, nodding slightly as a response to Yin Huixuan¡¯s intention, but his tone shifted as he earnestly added, ¡°However, I must make it clear from the outset that when I govern the state and the people, I prioritize strict laws to maintain order and stability within the country. ¡°Now that Yuzhang belongs to Chu, we will implement our laws here as well. ¡°The Liuyang Sect has long been entrenched here, with disciples throughout the prefectures and counties. ¡°How you conducted yourselves under Ning¡¯s rule in Yuzhang is not my concern. ¡°But from now on, under Chu¡¯s governance in Yuzhang, you must strictly adhere to Chu¡¯s laws and not defy them.¡± ¡°` Otherwise, for all who break the law, shall be punished according to the penal code, without exception. ¡°I¡¯m telling you this first, and after you go back, you must relay it to your own sect disciples¡ªdo you think you can enforce it?¡± Lu Yuan looked at Yin Huixuan, his tone strict. In past years, while Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen were brewing wine in Plum Forest, this good friend once said his life¡¯s ambition was to eradicate corrupt officials, put an end to the swords and strife of Jianghu, establish a system that restricts martial arts, and secure peace for the people of the world. Because of his support, under Sun Siwen¡¯s years of governance within the boundaries of Chu State, these aspirations had largely come to fruition after more than a decade of effort. Officials promoted within the country were mostly honest and dedicated to public service, thus ensuring a clear and righteous political environment and great governance at the local levels. The martial arts sects of Jianghu were also under the jurisdiction of the government, strictly prohibiting private duels and revenge killings among Jianghu, with violators being severely punished without leniency. With such a dual approach, Chu State had sufficient finance to maintain a military capable of a large nation despite its smaller size and vied for supremacy in the world. Martial artists of Jianghu, fearing the strict laws, dared not vie for fame locally and chose instead to join the military ranks, seeking fortune and honor on the battlefield, which resulted in the ferocity of Chu soldiers. These two pillars of state strategy had become unshakeable national policies of Chu State, as well as the foundation for its prosperity. Thus, although Lu Yuan was glad about the Liuyang Sect¡¯s allegiance, he was well aware that these Jianghu sects, used to being lax and free, did not like to be restrained. The Liuyang Sect had always been the biggest sect in Jiangnan, with its numerous disciples taking pride in this, considering themselves a cut above the average Jianghu martial artist. For people like them, getting them to obediently comply and abide by the laws would be very difficult. Initially, dealing with the non-Innate first and second-tier sects within Chu State, to make them obey, the government did not hesitate to destroy dozens of Jianghu powers, killing thousands and involving tens of thousands in punitive actions, which then led to the great governance and peace within the country today. Therefore, managing an Innate Sect like the Liuyang Sect would be even more challenging. Sects like Liuyang, with disciples numbering over ten thousand, wielding influence over an entire prefecture and with a reputation that spread across several provinces, were akin to a small country in themselves. Should they cause unrest, they were capable of troubling an entire province. How could Chu State possibly allow such an unstable factor to remain outside of its control? Hence, if the Liuyang Sect did not take the hint, then after pacifying Jiangdong and conquering Ning Country, Chu State¡¯s immediate priority would be to suppress and eliminate martial arts sects like Liuyang. To prohibit the martial arts of Jianghu, incorporate the world¡¯s soldiers, and put an end to the chaos caused by the chivalrous and the heroic. Therefore, before accepting their allegiance, Lu Yuan had to set out clear rules with Yin Huixuan, clarifying everything to prevent any displeasure or grudge between both sides in the future should any sect disciples break the law and Chu State take action. ¡°Martial heroes break the law with their valor, whilst scholars cause chaos with their words¡ªthis is something I am well aware of too. ¡°Now, with the world in peril, thieves arise in droves, and wars never cease. Rituals and music have collapsed; benevolence and righteousness are lost. ¡°His Majesty wishes to sweep away the troubles and unify Jiangnan, returning a peaceful era to the world. People must be governed with strict laws to eliminate the scourge of individuals achieving dominance through martial force.¡± Yin Huixuan had naturally studied the laws of Chu State in advance prior to coming forward to offer his allegiance, and he was fully prepared. Thus, seeing Lu Yuan clarify matters in advance, he did not show the slightest change in color, and respectfully replied, ¡°My Liuyang Sect disciples have always prioritized chivalry and strictly forbid engaging in corruption, indiscriminate killing of the innocent, and evildoing in local areas. ¡°If, in the future, any disciple violates the laws of Chu and commits a crime, His Majesty may deal with them as he sees fit¡ªthis humble one dares not have the slightest objection.¡± ¡°Good!¡± Seeing Yin Huixuan so compliant, Lu Yuan was satisfied, his face revealing a continued smile. As long as an Innate Sect like Liuyang did not lead the charge in defying Chu¡¯s laws and cooperated in adhering to them, then for places like Yuzhang Prefecture, and even other sects in the various counties of Yangzhou, being merely first and second-tier forces, they couldn¡¯t really stir up any trouble. The Jianghu of Yangzhou would thus be secured. In delight, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but stand up and pace back and forth. Turning back to Yin Huixuan, he said, ¡°Since you understand the greater good so deeply, I cannot let your loyalty and righteousness go unrewarded. Yin Huixuan, attend to my command.¡± ¡°Your servant is present,¡± Yin Huixuan knelt down. ¡°I now appoint you as the Protector-General of Great Chu, of equivalent rank to First Grade. If there are brave and strong ones among the disciples of the Liuyang Sect, report their names for slots, and after verification by the officials, they may also serve in the various military departments of Great Chu, seeking wealth and honor. I will treat them equally.¡± Lu Yuan made arrangements for the Liuyang Sect. ¡°Your servant thanks you for your grace.¡± Yin Huixuan¡¯s voice trembled with excitement as he accepted the appointment, his last worry finally put to rest. With this promise and conferment, he and the Liuyang Sect had finally navigated through the dangers of this dynastic transition and were welcoming a new opportunity and development. He had not let down the trust of his sect and had managed to preserve the legacy of his ancestors. ¡°` Chapter 891 - Chapter 891: Chapter 377 Defense Adjustment Chapter 891: Chapter 377 Defense Adjustment ¡°Now that Yin Qing has assumed his role, there¡¯s no need to rush into action. You should return and settle your sect disciples first. Once everything is properly arranged, you may come to receive orders; there¡¯s no harm in that.¡± After the decree, Lu Yuan looked at Yin Huixuan with a meaningful expression and spoke. Yin Huixuan¡¯s entire clan pledging allegiance did not equate to unanimous approval. There would always be those who failed to see the grand trend of destiny or harbored allegiances to Ning Country, unwilling to submit to Chu State. For these obstinate individuals, Chu State would definitely employ thunderous methods to resolutely suppress and eliminate them. However, rather than Chu State taking action later, expanding the scope of the purge and affecting the innocent, it would be better to let Yin Huixuan, the sect leader, cleanse his own ranks first to prevent future trouble and keep himself from being implicated. This was essentially using sects to govern sects and Jianghu to govern Jianghu. ¡°Yes, I am thankful for King Xie¡¯s leniency,¡± Yin Huixuan understood Lu Yuan¡¯s intentions and immediately responded, ¡°Your servant will return to the sect to organize our affairs. Once stability is achieved, I will bring the sect disciples to serve under King Xie.¡± Lu Yuan nodded in satisfaction, then raised his cup to see off his guest, ¡°You are considerate.¡± Yin Huixuan took the hint and respectfully said, ¡°King Xie is busy with public affairs; I dare not be a disturbance and will take my leave now.¡± ¡°You may go,¡± said Lu Yuan indifferently. ¡­ After sending off Yin Huixuan, Lu Yuan pondered for a while to make sure he hadn¡¯t overlooked anything. Then, feeling at ease, he decided not to summon Xuan Chengzi right away and chose to let the Purple Cloud Taoist Master stew a bit longer. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Over the years, Purple Cloud Dao had caused no small amount of trouble for Lu Yuan. It could even be said that Chu State¡¯s struggle for domination was nearly ruined by their actions. The sect directly sent forth four Divine Guards, providing Ning Country with a hefty supply of Divine Blood Elixirs, which allowed them to cultivate four Innate Martial Marquises. It was as if they had single-handedly propped up half of Ning Country¡¯s top-tier fighting force. Beyond that, Purple Cloud Dao also transferred vast amounts of gold and valuables to Ning Country. According to the Imperial City Division¡¯s investigation, the cumulative sum was as high as several hundred million. They also incited their followers to join the military enthusiastically, to assist Ning Country in its campaigns against Chu State. When Lu Yuan said that gaining Yin Huixuan was like gaining a hundred thousand soldiers, it might have been somewhat exaggerated. But Ning Country¡¯s acquisition of Purple Cloud Dao was truly equivalent to gaining two hundred thousand elite troops, without any hint of exaggeration; if anything, it was an understatement! I ask you, could Lu Yuan not hate such a Purple Cloud Dao, such a Xuan Chengzi? If not for the fact that within Ning Country there were still four Martial Marquises and an unknown number of Inborn experts remaining within the sect, proving their strength to still be formidable, Lu Yuan would have already led his troops to crush this heretical sect. ¡°For now, let¡¯s hang this treacherous Daoist out to dry, grinding down his spirit. Let¡¯s see how he reacts first,¡± thought Lu Yuan. He was well aware of Xuan Chengzi¡¯s intentions for coming. Just like Yin Huixuan, he saw Ning Country¡¯s defeat and Great Chu¡¯s looming unification over Jiangnan. Thus, he hastened to pledge allegiance. No, Purple Cloud Dao¡¯s visit likely also included a hint of seeking forgiveness. After all, Liuyang Sect had always maintained neutrality and never interfered in matters between Chu and Ning. Their situation, albeit somewhat chaotic, wasn¡¯t too panicked. But for Purple Cloud Dao, they were the true traitors who sided with the enemy and needed to be utterly eradicated to ensure Chu¡¯s future safety. They aided Ning Country in resisting Great Chu, causing untold losses to Chu State, and it wasn¡¯t something that could be lightly overlooked. Without enough sincerity and a sufficient price paid, Lu Yuan would not let them off the hook. Otherwise, he¡¯d rather suffer significant casualties to completely obliterate Purple Cloud Dao¡¯s lineage in order to vent the hatred in his heart. ¡­ While leaving Purple Cloud Dao on the back burner, Lu Yuan simply had someone monitor Xuan Chengzi, paying attention to his words and behavior and reporting promptly. He didn¡¯t bother to give much attention himself. His focus returned to military affairs. In the recent period, following Lu Yuan¡¯s restructuring, the captive soldiers from various nations, numbering five hundred thousand, had been initially integrated and reorganized. With the reduction of the weak and elderly, the prefectural and county military dual-system in the newly occupied territories of Lingnan and Jiangdong was swiftly established. These newly formed prefectural and county forces, working in conjunction with urgently dispatched officials from central authorities, had begun to stabilize local order through suppressing banditry and encouraging agricultural work, allowing the regions to start resuming normal life and production. However, a minor flaw was that these new prefectural and county forces had relatively low-skilled leaders, with county captains being third-rate martial artists and commandants being second-rate. Compared to the standard configuration of second-rate county captains and first-rate commandants, it was indeed much less impressive. The root of this phenomenon was the drastic expansion of forbidden armies and county soldiers by Lu Yuan, which added over two hundred thousand troops and resulted in numerous vacancies among military officers and command staff. The governing system of Ning Country differed from Chu State. They were run by aristocratic families where official positions were determined by lineage. Even with an imperial examination system in place, those without background or connections would struggle to climb high in the ranks even if they passed. Across Ning Country, the high offices in the court and the local bureaucrats were entirely monopolized by class distinctions. In contrast, Chu State selected officials based on merit through the imperial examination. As long as one had sufficient capability and talent, becoming a prime minister or general was possible. The best examples were Sun Siwen and several of Lu Yuan¡¯s disciples. Setting aside their personal relationships with Lu Yuan, it was undeniable that these high-level officials of Chu State all hailed from humble backgrounds. They were able to ascend step by step through their own efforts and Lu Yuan¡¯s recognition to reach their current positions. Even the countries of the Southsea and Su also essentially operated on a system of nepotism. The officials and military officers within their lands all originated from the original Nanhai Sect or Nine River Sword Sect, deeply intertwined with the Su and Yan families, inseparable from each other. Chapter 892 - Chapter 892: Chapter 377 Defense Adjustment_2 Chapter 892: Chapter 377 Defense Adjustment_2 Therefore, these two completely different methods of selecting and employing people also made it difficult for Lu Yuan to accept all captives from the Three Nations. For instance, the captured military officers either came from Coastal Aristocratic Families, whose families were still resisting Chu State¡¯s invasion, or they were disciples of the Southsea Sect or Nine River Sword Sect, and held grudges against Lu Yuan for murder of their masters, murder of their disciples, murder of their sect members, or the destruction of their sect. Tell me, even if these people had talents, would Lu Yuan dare to use them? Of course, he dared not. Thus, in incorporating captives from the Three Nations, Lu Yuan could only integrate the lowest-level soldiers. As for middle and high-level officers, unless he could confirm they had little to do with the high-level powers of the Three Nations, under no circumstances would he employ them. Since these middle and high-level officers couldn¡¯t be absorbed, Lu Yuan had to find his own way to train and appoint officers for the reorganized army of five hundred thousand. But the gap in military officers for an army of five hundred thousand was not easy to fill overnight. Therefore, after weighing the pros and cons, to ensure the complete organization of the main forces such as the Forbidden army and county soldiers, Lu Yuan had to sacrifice local security forces when training various armies, prioritizing the appointment of officers for the main combat troops. This led to the current situation where the basic strength of local military commanders, such as the Commandant and County Captain, is generally low. Even with such a configuration, due to the sheer number of reorganized troops, there were still a significant number of vacancies for positions such as Commandant and County Captain in Chu State¡¯s newly acquired prefectures and counties. This resulted in a situation where there were soldiers without leaders on the local level, ultimately leading to civil officials such as county magistrates and prefects taking control of the military. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï Situations such as these, where civil officials commanded military affairs, could not be allowed to continue indefinitely. So when Yin Huixuan came to offer his services, Lu Yuan did not make it difficult for him at all, but directly accepted him and even encouraged him to recommend more disciples and sect members to serve in Chu State. His aim was to capitalize on the large reserve of masters within the Liuyang Sect. As an Innate Great Sect renowned across three provinces, the Liuyang Sect had no fewer than twenty first-rate masters; even second-rate masters were in the hundreds, and third-rate and below counted in the thousands. Such a vast reserve of masters could instantly fill Chu State¡¯s local shortage of high-level officers if harnessed. Currently, Lu Yuan had entrusted Yin Huixuan with reorganizing the Liuyang Sect, so before long, many of its masters should be arriving to serve Chu State. As for the sudden influx of many Liuyang Sect masters possibly leading to the sect¡¯s increased influence locally within Chu State, that wasn¡¯t a concern. Although the Liuyang Sect had many masters, they were still insignificant when compared to Chu State. Within Chu State, from the court to local government offices and army barracks, there are hundreds of first-rate masters, over a thousand second-rate, and tens of thousands below the third-rate. The strength of the Liuyang Sect doesn¡¯t even amount to one-tenth of Chu State¡¯s, and as such, it¡¯s fundamentally not a concern. Moreover, in today¡¯s world, the strength of a power is measured by the number of Inborn Grandmasters. Without Inborn Grandmasters, no matter how many first or second-rate masters there are, it doesn¡¯t make much difference. In the Liuyang Sect, Yin Huixuan is the solitary Inborn Grandmaster; within Chu State, there are already fifteen. Taking into account vassal states and those like Purple Cloud Dao who are about to join, the number of Inborn masters exceeds twenty. When compared with the twenty-plus Inborns, even an Inborn second realm Grandmaster like Yin Huixuan doesn¡¯t amount to much. Furthermore, this gap will only widen and deepen as Chu State¡¯s influence continues to expand. The longer the time passes, the smaller the influence powers like the Liuyang Sect will have over Chu State. When the time comes for the final demise of the spirit in this declining era and all the Inborn are gone, leaving only Lu Yuan and his Avatar, the influence that other powers without Inborn can have becomes even less significant. By then, one Inborn could secure a province, ensuring the long-term stability of a nation. Therefore, Lu Yuan has never been worried about integrating Yin Huixuan and the Liuyang Sect¡¯s forces. Instead, he confidently employs them without hesitation. Regardings the Prefectures and Counties¡¯ troops, Lu Yuan¡¯s arrangement is just as described. First, to fill the ranks, and then gradually improve the quality of base-level County Captains and Commandants over time with the addition of people from the Liuyang Sect and others. After more than a decade, the foundation will be sufficiently established. Having dealt with the local security troops, Lu Yuan also began planning for the Forbidden army and county soldiers. In this great war, Chu State gained control of Yuzhang, Jianan, Southsea, Yulin, and the half prefecture of Through Sea¡ªa total of four and a half prefectures. Each of these five prefectures has prepared ten thousand county soldiers, with Lu Yuan¡¯s confidants in charge. However, these newly pacified prefectures still contain many fugitive soldiers and bandits, and remnants of the Three Nations lurk in the shadows, constantly ready to cause trouble. At the same time, all five prefectures border enemy nations; Through Sea and Yulin lie adjacent to Dali and Song Country, both of which can field armies of one hundred thousand and possess Inborn Grandmasters. Without an Inborn to secure these regions, stability is unattainable. Yuzhang and Jianan prefectures are on the front line with Ning Country. Although Ning Country has been defeated, they are undoubtedly intent on recapturing the two prefectures. Even though the greater war has ceased, skirmishes involving hundreds or thousands still break out from time to time along the border of the two prefectures, never coming to an end. And for the past thousand years, the Coastal Aristocratic Families have deeply entrenched themselves in Yuzhang and Jianan, with countless hidden ploys scattered across the regions. Chapter 893 - Chapter 893 Chapter 377 Defense Adjustment_3 ?Chapter 893: Chapter 377 Defense Adjustment_3 Chapter 893: Chapter 377 Defense Adjustment_3 Without powerful people to oversee these two prefectures, it¡¯s impossible to stabilize the local areas. Even the relatively better South Sea Prefecture faced a great problem with a large number of former Nanhai Country naval forces scattered around, numbering up to ten thousand. All these naval forces are directly affiliated with the Nanhai Country, with officers either from the Yan Family children or hailing from the Nanhai Sect, bearing the grudge of national and sect extinction against Chu State. These people, unwilling to follow the nobles of the Nanhai to retreat to Ning Country, also refused to surrender to Chu State. In the end, they banded together and began to wreak havoc within the coastal territories of Chu State. From time to time, they would land ashore to harass, attack cities, break through towns, and plunder money, which had become a major problem in South Sea. Queen Lan Cai¡¯er, who was responsible for defending the area, was extremely troubled by this issue in the past few months. She led the surrendered naval forces of Nanhai Country several times in search of these pirates, but the results were negligible, killing only a few hundred pirates before returning in frustration. Therefore, to deal with the great pirate menace and guard against possible incursions by Ning Country¡¯s naval forces, South Sea Prefecture also needed an Inborn Grandmaster for defense. In this way, each of the five prefectures required an Inborn Grandmaster for oversight, in order to guarantee their safety. At the same time, in the west, there also had to be official arrangements for local military affairs. After consideration, Lu Yuan ordered his disciple Li Liang to take charge of the defense of Yulin County, Zhuang Hua to serve as the defender of South Sea Prefecture, Han Shun to serve as the defender of Hanzhong Prefecture, and Zhang You to serve as the defender of Xichuan Army. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï He tasked these four disciples with overseeing local governance on his behalf, each managing the military affairs of their respective prefectures and soothing internal and external tensions. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Han Hua, the former defender of Xichuan Prefecture, was transferred to serve as the defender of Hegu County. Additionally, the Protector Shenwu General Han Hu was appointed to defend Tonghai County. In Dongting Prefecture, Sun Siwen, the Left Prime Minister, stationed in Baling, would now reside permanently in the country, handling government affairs, allocating food and fodder, and would not go on expeditions except in special cases. Moreover, with the cessation of hostilities, Han Liang, the defender of Qianzhong County, Grand General Zhou Qing, the defender of Xiangyang Prefecture, Li Xiong of Kunhai, Chilih of Li River, and other external forces each led their troops back to their prefectures and countries for rest and recovery. Ah, just last month, after successive defeats on various battlefields, Yang Jing¡¯s unit of the Ning Army, which had been stubbornly entrenched in the three prefectures east of Xiangyang in the north of Yangtze River, finally gave up the battlefield there. They boarded naval warships with their remnants and fled in embarrassment, returning to Jinling. Zhou Qing then took advantage of the situation to take control of Ning Country¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture, unifying the lands north of the river. Now, except for the three prefectures of Xiangyang Prefecture of Zhou Country, located to the north of Han River in Central State, all other areas of Xiangyang below the river had fallen into the hands of Chu State. Over on Chu Wei¡¯s side, Lu Yuan also ordered him to return to the naval forces, taking charge of the water forts at Xia Kou and Pengli, occupying the middle and lower reaches of the Yangtze River, and fully enhancing Chu State¡¯s naval defense. With an Inborn assigned to each of the old territories of Chu State as well as the Lingnan prefectures, every prefecture is now guarded as impregnable as a metal cauldron. As for the two prefectures of Yuzhang and Jian¡¯an located in Jiangnan, right at the front lines next to Ning Country, Lu Yuan appointed Huang Xuan as the chief of Yuzhang Prefecture and Qingyunzi as the chief of Jian¡¯an Prefecture, with the total command over all military and political tasks of their jurisdictions. In addition, Lu Yuan, along with Queen Lan Cai¡¯er and Princess Spiritual Woman, will be regularly stationed in Yuzhang Prefecture. Chu Wei also led the naval forces stationed at Pengli naval camp. The recently joined Yin Huixuan, upon returning to assume his post, would also be assigned to Jian¡¯an Prefecture as Qingyunzi¡¯s assistant, to keep watch on Ning Country. Thus, on the front lines, Yuzhang would have five Inborns and Jian¡¯an two, with more than four being Second Realm Grandmasters or above. With this level of strength, even if the remaining eleven Inborne of Ning Country attacked together, they could be well counteracted. In the domain of Inborn Grandmasters, Chu State is now flawlessly arranged. Prefectural and county soldiers, naval forces, and Inborn Grandmasters have all been fully assigned. In terms of the Forbidden Army, Lu Yuan has also made adjustments. After reorganization, Chu State now has thirty-five Forbidden Army contingents, totaling seven hundred thousand men. Of these armies, Lu Yuan restored the structure of three Forbidden Army contingents each in Hanzhong, Xiangyang, and Dongting prefectures. The other prefectures of Xichuan, Qianzhong, and South Sea each stationed one Forbidden Army contingent. Given the proximity to Dali and Song Country, Tonghai County and Yulin County required heightened defense, so Tonghai Army hosted two Forbidden Army contingents, while Yulin County hosted three, making up five in total. Hegu County, situated on the frontier and rear, did not station any Forbidden Army, with local county soldiers taking responsibility for defense. In total, twenty-three Forbidden Army contingents were utilized across these eight prefectures. Of the remaining twelve Forbidden Army contingents, totaling two hundred forty thousand soldiers, Lu Yuan placed five in Jian¡¯an County, while the seven left remained in Yuzhang Prefecture to handle front-line defenses. Thus, the post-war series of military and defense adjustments in Chu State, after being sorted for three months, finally completed by the beginning of August in the eleventh year of Shenwu, just before the arrival of autumn. In the following years, barring major unforeseen events, there would likely be no further adjustments. Chu State would enter a longer period of consolidation. The lands of Jiangnan, right before unification, were bestowed upon a brief remnant of peaceful times. Lu Yuan, having finished all his official business and leaving Xuan Chengzi hanging for a month, finally found the time to meet with this Purple Cloud Taoist Master. In the past month, Yin Huixuan, who had returned to his sect to handle internal threats, had already cleared up other dissenting voices within his sect; subsequently, he led three thousand disciples of Liuyang Sect to pledge allegiance to Chu State. After evaluation, Lu Yuan dispersed these Liuyang Sect disciples, assigning them to local prefectural and county military positions, as well as to the Catch officer positions belonging to the Government Office. He did not keep this a secret; with the channels of the Purple Cloud Dao, it was easy to obtain such information. Also, Chu State¡¯s series of military and defense arrangements were not concealed, and any interested party could easily find out the basics through simple inquiry. However, with the spread of all these pieces of information, Xuan Chengzi, who had been left out to dry in the post house of Nanchang City, remained utterly unmoved, spending his days in the guesthouse with a calm and composed demeanor. According to reports from those Lu Yuan sent to supervise and watch over him, the man spent each day practicing meditation, reading scripture, and cultivating, seemingly content and undisturbed. This cunning Daoist appeared to have no fear of Chu State making a move against his Purple Cloud Dao. Seeing this, Lu Yuan knew that leaving him to wait would be pointless. So after completing his urgent affairs, he had someone send word to Xuan Chengzi to come and have an audience at his mansion. Chapter 894 - Chapter 894 Chapter 378 Immortal Sects Allegiance ?Chapter 894: Chapter 378 Immortal Sect¡¯s Allegiance Chapter 894: Chapter 378 Immortal Sect¡¯s Allegiance In the rear residence, within the garden. Following the attendant¡¯s lead, Xuan Chengzi arrived at this place and, upon seeing a youth in blue attending to the flowers, performed a Daoist salute, ¡°Poor Daoist Xuan Chengzi pays respects to the King of Chu.¡± Lu Yuan heard the sound behind him, took a light sniff of the plum blossom in his hand, then set it down and slowly turned around, sizing up the middle-aged Daoist before him. The man had a handsome face, was garbed in a purple robe, a smile at the corner of his mouth, and an otherworldly aura; he indeed looked like a person from the celestial realms. With Lu Yuan¡¯s discernment, he instantly saw that the man had definitely cultivated a profound Daoist cultivation technique to a very high level, already breaking through the second realm of the Inborn and ranking at the pinnacle of Martial Arts of his time. With such strength, it¡¯s no wonder this man was so composed in front of him. ¡°In this world, nothing surpasses the importance of ¡®fate¡¯.¡± Lu Yuan glanced at Xuan Chengzi and then withdrew his gaze, continuing to admire the plum blossoms in the garden, speaking indifferently, ¡°Sixteen years ago, I went to Tianluo Mountain to participate in the Inescapable Meeting. Thanks to the guidance of your sect¡¯s former Dao Master Zhen Xuan, I realized the subtlety of Inborn qualities and understood the key to Grandmasters, which I later relied on to become an Inborn Grandmaster. Because of this, I have always held a measure of respect for Purple Cloud Dao.¡± ¡°Now sixteen years have passed, and the Purple Cloud Taoist Master has crossed the sea in search of mysteries, plotting Ascension to the Immortal Realm.¡± ¡°Yet Purple Cloud Dao no longer shows me the kindness of the past. This time, by providing men and money, aiding the rebellion in Ning, and standing as my enemy, you obstructed my unification endeavor. Is this Purple Cloud Dao¡¯s response to the good karma I offered?¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 As a peak Immortal Method cultivator and a second-realm peak Martial Arts Grandmaster, even without any action, the mere presence he exuded was more than ordinary people could endure. Xuan Chengzi, despite being a second-realm Grandmaster himself, still felt a shiver in his spirit when he encountered this pressure, astonished by the King of Chu¡¯s formidable strength. Even his own former Dao Master had never made him feel this way. However, as the foremost person of the Daoist Path in Jiangnan, although Xuan Chengzi was somewhat shocked inwardly, he displayed none of it outwardly. Feeling the crushing presence of Lu Yuan, his own energy subtly stirred, revealing the aura of the second-realm Inborn, which directly cut off the encroaching presence, allowing him to instantly regain his composure. ¡°Previously, your majesty¡¯s strength was not apparent, and outsiders viewed you as weaker than Ning Country. Chu State is also situated in Western State, far from Tianluo Mountain, while Ning is our neighbor. In such circumstances, wise birds choose their trees to nest. Our Purple Cloud Dao, choosing to cooperate with the geographically closer and stronger Ning Country to help unite Yangzhou, is logical. To assist Ning and not Chu is not personal preference but a decision based on strength and circumstances.¡± Having removed Lu Yuan¡¯s influence, Xuan Chengzi still maintained a calm demeanor. ?¦Ï???.§ã? Facing the questioning, he replied unhurriedly, ¡°Just like now, Chu has prevailed over Ning and advanced to Yuzhang, placing Tianluo Mountain under Chu¡¯s jurisdiction. Hence, Poor Daoist has come specifically, seeing Chu¡¯s prosperity, and wishes to cooperate with Chu State, which is indeed going with the flow of the situation. What does your majesty think?¡± Xuan Chengzi¡¯s gaze casually met Lu Yuan¡¯s, showing not even a hint of panic or guilt. To him, supporting Ning and being an enemy to Chu truly seemed like a choice dictated by strength and situation. Now that strength and circumstances have shifted, he was ready to swiftly abandon Ning and join Chu, adapting to the momentum. This serene and natural demeanor truly exemplified the untroubled and free essence of a Daoist. ¡°Cooperation?¡± Upon hearing Xuan Chengzi¡¯s words and observing his confident manner, Lu Yuan snorted internally, though his face carried a mocking tone, ¡°Now that I have soundly defeated Ning Country, no man in Jiangdong dares hear my name without losing heart. ¡°With tens of thousands of Great Chu¡¯s troops stationed at Yuzhang, a single command is all that¡¯s needed for me to cut through rivers, crush mountains, plunder cities, and annihilate enemies, all in a matter of days. ¡°Yet you, minor Daoist, having offended me, do not seek pardon in terror, not exerting every effort for my forgiveness. ¡°Instead, you shamelessly seek cooperation with me. ¡°Do you truly consider your Purple Cloud Dao akin to last year¡¯s leader of the Immortal Sects of Yangzhou? ¡°What capability or support do you possess to speak to me this way?¡± Had it been before last September, with Purple Cloud Dao¡¯s former Dao Master Zhen Xuan and many other cultivators still present, then indeed, with such strength, it could be comparable to or even surpass a dominant country. Faced with such a force, even if Lu Yuan was offended, he would have had no choice but to accept any gesture of reconciliation. But now, Dao Master Zhen Xuan and the others have journeyed to sea with the cultivators from the Nine Provinces, and it is not known where they drift at present. According to their original plan, once they ascend to the Immortal Realm, it¡¯s almost impossible for them to return. With these strongest forces of the sect gone, now only some Innate Fighters are left in Purple Cloud Dao, naturally losing its previous ability to intimidate an entire province. By this time, Lu Yuan had already unified most of Yangzhou a€¡° it was only a matter of time before he swept away the remaining forces. Facing such a one-province ruler, Xuan Chengzi still dared to be so self-reliant; truly, it was arrogant. ¡°Currently in Ning Country, our path has four Inborn Grandmasters. And within the Mountain Gate, we also have three Inborn elders. ¡°Adding to them myself, as a second-realm Dao master, Purple Cloud Dao altogether possesses eight Inborn Grandmasters. ¡°Also, within Yuzhang territory, the northern four prefectures are filled with followers of our faith. ¡°With a single command, two million devout followers can start an uprising in an instant, swiftly gathering tens of thousands of troops. ¡°With such strength, I wonder whether I am qualified to cooperate with your majesty?¡± Chapter 895 - Chapter 895 Chapter 378 Immortal Sects Allegiance_2 ?Chapter 895: Chapter 378 Immortal Sect¡¯s Allegiance_2 Chapter 895: Chapter 378 Immortal Sect¡¯s Allegiance_2 Xuan Chengzi wore a smile filled with hidden intents, revealing the trump cards he held. Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel a shock in his heart, giving rise to feelings of dread. He had long been aware of the four Inborn martial artists from Purple Cloud Dao aiding Ning Country; he had no particular reaction to this news. But within the ranks of Purple Cloud Dao, aside from these four Inborn martial artists, there were unexpectedly four others, among whom was Xuan Chengzi, a second-level master. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï This was truly surprising. An Inborn Grandmaster is not as common as cabbage. Just like in his Chu State, setting aside a few Avatars, the genuinely homegrown Inborn Grandmasters were only Zhou Qing, Sun Siwen, and two yet-to-grow sons of his own. The other five, who had only broken through to the Inborn level this year, had consumed Divine Blood Elixirs subsidized mostly by White Phoenix Temple, the Barbarians, and Feishuang Tao. Yet even after scouring the country and gaining support from such powerful factions, setting aside the allied forces like Feishuang Tao and Liuyang Sect and disregarding the Avatars, Chu State had only ten Inborn Grandmasters in total. However, on the side of Purple Cloud Dao, without relying on plundering or others¡¯ aid, relying solely on their own foundation, they had nurtured eight Inborn Grandmasters. This didn¡¯t even take into account the elixirs they provided to Ning Country, helping them nurture four state of mind-level Inborns. If one were to count those, the actual strength of Purple Cloud Dao would become even more fearsome. A single sect with twelve Inborns. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Among the dominant powers in the Nine Provinces, there are probably few with such strength, right? No wonder. With such strength, even if the cultivators of the sect left, Xuan Chengzi still had such confidence, not the least bit worried about Lu Yuan¡¯s revenge, presenting an attitude of wanting equal relations with Chu State. Faced with this power, Lu Yuan indeed dared not act rashly. It wasn¡¯t that he couldn¡¯t defeat the eight Inborns. With Chu State¡¯s current strength, defeating eight Inborns would be a piece of cake. Even if he waited a bit longer, once he had his breakthrough in both the Immortal Method of Gathering Two Qi and the realm of a Martial Arts Grandmaster, suppressing these eight Inborns by himself would not be difficult at all. But defeating Inborns is easy; killing them is hard. With the number of eight Inborn masters, just one or two escaping would be enough for them to take revenge on Chu State fiercely, resulting in a huge disaster. If Lu Yuan truly dared to mobilize troops to encircle Tianluo Mountain, although Purple Cloud Dao would inevitably not be able to resist and their Mountain Gate may be annihilated. Xuan Chengzi and the other seven Inborn Grandmasters could also scatter and resort to guerrilla warfare throughout Chu State, slaughtering and destroying in retaliation. By the time Chu State managed to quell this chaos, it¡¯s estimated that at least a few million people would die, and the nation¡¯s vitality would be greatly damaged. By then, not only might the unification of Jiangdong face changes, but even the future ambitions of conquering Central Plains might be directly dashed. ¡®Damnable it is, now that the Heavenly and Earthly Aura is so thin, my magic power is stifled, unable to be fully utilized. Otherwise, these mere eight Inborns, even if they scatter and flee, are but a matter of a few dozen spells from me, and would stand no chance of being so presumptuous in my presence.¡¯ Lu Yuan thought bitterly to himself. With his current strength, not to mention ordinary grandmasters, even a second-level grandmaster like Xuan Chengzi in front of him would be utterly powerless against his full force. The threat of eight Inborn Grandmasters from the opponent, under normal circumstances in the Immortal Cultivation World, would be nothing but a joke. But now, with the Heavenly and Earthly Aura so scarcely available, almost to extinction, even cultivators felt distressed. With Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation, he certainly could easily slaughter these Inborn Grandmasters, but trying to wantonly kill eight dispersed fleeing Inborn Grandmasters might leave him drained of magic power before they were all dead. The lack of Spiritual Energy has become his greatest weakness. As for hunting down those normal grandmasters with the strength of a Martial Arts Grandmaster. It¡¯s not impossible, but in terms of time efficiency, it¡¯s far less than using spells. In the end, it would still be inevitable for those grandmasters to succeed in causing havoc within the borders of Chu State. At this thought, Lu Yuan suppressed the anger in his heart and looked at Xuan Chengzi, who was seemingly indifferent. A smile also appeared on his face, ¡°If your sect truly has such strength, indeed you qualify to cooperate with me.¡± Although he was somewhat annoyed, he had to admit that with his current strength, dealing with Purple Cloud Dao with minimal losses was indeed difficult. Therefore, to reduce the losses, he could only swallow his pride for the time being. Moreover, Purple Cloud Dao¡¯s intention wasn¡¯t to be enemies with Chu State; rather, they came seeking cooperation. The two sides need not become mortal enemies. In fact, looking at it from another perspective at this moment, Purple Cloud Dao having eight Inborns, if Chu State could turn this force to its advantage, or rather, have them join their camp, then his own strength would undoubtedly surge in an instant. Without mentioning anything else, the number of Inborn Grandmasters Chu State could deploy would definitely exceed twenty. Such an immediate benefit, Lu Yuan naturally saw no reason to refuse. ¡®What is it but a loss of face? Once I¡¯ve swallowed Purple Cloud Dao, leveraging their strength to accelerate the unification of Jiangnan, and increasing my strength even more swiftly, then I can embark on a Northern Expedition to unify the Nine Provinces. When the world is unified and Qi Luck soars, with my cultivation greatly advanced¡­ Hmph, eight Inborns, let¡¯s see if your Purple Cloud Dao will still have any Inborn masters in two hundred years.¡¯ As a seeker of longevity, Lu Yuan¡¯s greatest advantage is his lifespan. Now Purple Cloud Dao is troublesome, and Xuan Chengzi is arrogant. But if he can outlast two hundred years, no, even a hundred years, those eight Inborns of Purple Cloud Dao might not know how many will remain. On the contrary, by then, Chu State would have long unified Jiangnan and even Central State. Chapter 896 - Chapter 896 Chapter 378 Immortal Sects Allegiance_3 ?Chapter 896: Chapter 378 Immortal Sect¡¯s Allegiance_3 Chapter 896: Chapter 378 Immortal Sect¡¯s Allegiance_3 Lu Yuan¡¯s strength, it is estimated, has already reached the level of gathering three, perhaps even four or five Qi in Immortal Method. When that time comes, to deal with Purple Cloud Dao would be a matter of a mere thought. Just look at his arrogance today, then witness his desolation in days to come. A gentleman¡¯s revenge is not too late, even after a hundred years. This was what Lu Yuan bitterly contemplated. The Xuan Chengzi before him, upon seeing his concession, did not continue to put on a proud demeanor but instead became much more eager to soften his approach: ¡°Your Majesty¡¯s understanding of this point truly benefits both our families. Your Majesty rest assured, as long as Chu State is willing to accept Purple Cloud Dao, within Ning Country, the four Guardian Divine Generals supported by our sect can be ordered by a single Dao Law command from this Dao master to turn on their allies and surrender the city to Chu State. Beyond this, I am also willing to send an additional two Inborn elders to serve in the court of Chu State.¡± Furthermore, to apologize for the misunderstanding between our sect and Chu State, I am also willing to offer five hundred elixirs as a gesture of apology.¡± Xuan Chengzi had no intention to offend Lu Yuan, and Purple Cloud Dao did not mean to have an unyielding struggle with Chu State. The reason for adopting a tough stance previously was merely to show Lu Yuan that although they submitted, they were not sheep to be slaughtered at will. Your Chu State may be great and mighty, but do not think of easily bullying Purple Cloud Dao. Now, having seen that Lu Yuan has recognized this point and has expressed a willingness to reconcile with Purple Cloud Dao, Xuan Chengzi naturally ceased his tough stance and began to display goodwill. The many concessions and apologies offered above are the sincerity of Purple Cloud Dao. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï ¡°Oh, Fellow Daoist Xuan Chengzi is being very courteous.¡± Upon hearing the conditions laid out by Xuan Chengzi, particularly the five hundred elixirs promised at the end, Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes instantly lit up, and his tone heated up a notch: ¡°Fellow Daoist rest assured, Great Chu has always been welcoming to talents from all over the world, recruiting heroes from various lands. Previously, Purple Cloud Dao had some friction with my Chu State, but that is all in the past now. Now that Fellow Daoist is willing to lead the Mountain Gate to join us, you are most welcome. From this day forth, our two families will be unified, no more distinction between us.¡± Previously, in order to cultivate five True Successor Disciples, Lu Yuan had practically spent all the elixirs he had reserved for them. Chu State originally had two thousand and seven hundred Divine Blood Elixirs for training five disciples to the Innate level, using up two thousand and five hundred elixirs, leaving just two hundred. And these two hundred elixirs, in the past two years, as Lu Yuan¡¯s two sons, Lu He and Lu Hao, gradually grew up, began to deplete rapidly. Lu He and Lu Hao, the two brothers, both underwent Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation of Spiritual Energy, achieving Inborn Body and Innate Soul at an early age, which could be considered possessing an innate way. They had no barriers to breaking through Innate. They just needed to grow in age, slowly consume elixirs, and accumulate enough foundation. Now, the eldest son, Lu He, at eleven years old, under Lu Yuan¡¯s devoted cultivation, has reached the peak of first-class cultivation and is ready to begin preparing for breaking through Innate. Indeed, that was the case. Starting last year, when Lu He turned ten, Lu Yuan had him consume an elixir every ten days to enhance his cultivation foundation. Still, this was because Lu He¡¯s body had not fully developed, and being so young, the concern was to avoid harming his foundation, thus intentionally slowing down the pace. Nevertheless, even with thirty-six elixirs a year, it would take only five to six yearsa€¡±after consuming two hundred and fifty elixirs, Lu He would complete the accumulation and smoothly break through Innate. The same for the second son, Lu Hao. The younger child also turned ten this year, and Lu Yuan had him follow in his elder brother¡¯s footsteps, consuming elixirs at the same rate every ten days to slowly accumulate foundation. Together, the two brothers would require over seventy elixirs a year. The two hundred elixirs remaining in Lu Yuan¡¯s hands would last only three years at this rate. To ensure that both brothers could successfully break through Innate, he would need to find at least three hundred more elixirsa€¡±no small sum. So, for his sons, he had been diligently scouring for elixirs over the past two years. After destroying Su Country, he conquered Yulin City, and the Chu Army looted the Su national treasury, obtaining over twenty elixirs. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Given the foundation of Su Country¡¯s predecessor, Nine River Sword Sect, that was clearly not their true stockpile. Later interrogations of captured Su officials, from the mouths of these former Nine River Sword Sect disciples, Lu Yuan learned that before Yulin City was besieged, Su Xuange had already arranged for his younger son to flee with the nation¡¯s significant resources by ship to Southsea, his whereabouts unknown. Clearly, the Divine Blood Elixirs and substantial wealth inside Su were taken away by Su Xuange¡¯s younger son. Not willing to settle for this, Lu Yuan had people search for this younger son of Su Xuange, to retrieve these treasures. But the sea is vast, finding one person is no easy task. Lu Yuan did not harbor much hope, merely had people make their best effort. That the wealth of Su had flown away was heart-wrenching. Latterly, during the attack on Nanhai Country, upon breaking down Nanhai City, treasures like the Divine Blood Elixirs were found in minimal amounts by the Chu Army. The Divine Blood Elixirs stored within the Nanhai Sect had also been taken away by the Royal Family of Nanhai Country, along with the Ning Army¡¯s retreat. Although Qingyunzi and his army quickly pursued and regained some part of it thanks to inside intelligence. But this portion of elixirs was also small, merely over a hundred. The bulk of the foundation was still taken away by the Yan Family, back to Ning Country. Therefore, after the fall of Su and Nanhai Countries, although Lu Yuan gained a vast area and population, the actual gain in cultivation resources was very little. As for the resources needed for his sons to achieve Innate, he was still short by about a hundred elixirs. At this moment, the offering of five hundred elixirs by Purple Cloud Dao was undoubtedly a relief to Lu Yuan¡¯s worries. ¡®He¡¯er and Hao¡¯er¡¯s cultivation resources are now fully prepared. Wait another five or six years, and they can both become Innate, adding two more Grandmasters that Great Chu can rely on. Even with the leftover elixirs, and Great Chu gathers a bit more over these years, gleaning from various places, we should be able to cultivate another Inborn.¡¯ With three additional Innate, the foundation of Great Chu¡¯s dominance becomes ever more solid.¡¯ This is what Lu Yuan thought to himself, looking at Xuan Chengzi with that unsightly face, which seemed not so distasteful anymore. Chapter 897 - Chapter 897 Chapter 379 Employ Spies Against Ning Country ?Chapter 897: Chapter 379: Employ Spies Against Ning Country Chapter 897: Chapter 379: Employ Spies Against Ning Country After establishing a master-servant partnership, the relationship between Lu Yuan and Xuan Chengzi eased significantly. Therefore, discussions about further collaboration could proceed. Considering his recent defection and even previous enmity with Chu State, he had a blemished history. So, upon entering Chu State, Xuan Chengzi began proactively offering strategies to establish merit and secure his position. ¡°Your Majesty, as of now, the four Protectors of our sect are serving as generals in the Ning army, each commanding a varying number of troopsa€¡±altogether about one hundred and thirty thousand, mostly stationed to the southeast of Linhai County. If Your Majesty wishes, I can send word to these four, instructing them to turn their troops around, open the passes, and allow Chu forces to enter and seize the eastern region of Linhai County. What do you think?¡± Xuan Chengzi looked at Lu Yuan, filled with expectation. The Purple Cloud Dao had sent out four Protectors to serve within Ning Country, named Xuan Yu, Xuan Yin, Xuan Yi, and Xuan Xi. Of these four, Xuan Yu was originally on the Northern Jiang battlefield, recently fleeing back to the Capital, Jinling, with Yang Jing. He currently oversees more than ten thousand of the Ning remnants north of the river, stationed outside Jinling City. Xuan Yin and Xuan Yi were initially ordered to lead troops and attack the two prefectures of Hengyang and Luyang of Chu State. But they suffered a crushing defeat when Li Xiong attacked Yuzhang Luling, outflanking them. In the end, they fled back to Ning Country alone. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Subsequently, with figures like Xiang Duan, Lidao, and Bai Yian from the Coastal Aristocratic Family successively dying in battle, Ning Country¡¯s top combat strength was in short supply with no one available to take their place. Thus, the two were reassigned, each leading fifty thousand troops, and stationed in the prefectures of Xin¡¯an and Dongyang in the southern part of Linhai County, Ning Country, to guard against Chu forces from the south. Xuan Xi followed Shangguan Ming to assist Southsea Country in Lingnan, but ultimately, due to being overpowered by Qingyunzi, he fled with the remnants of Southsea Country by ship, retreating back to his own country. Upon returning home, Xuan Xi, along with Shangguan Ming, took command of the troops stationed around Yongjia and Linhai to the southeast of Linhai County. He was responsible for the rear, Linhai Prefecture, commanding over twenty thousand troops. Thus, these four Protectors of the Purple Cloud Dao led four divisions totaling about one hundred and thirty thousand men. Xuan Yin and Xuan Yi were also independently responsible for the defense of one direction each, wielding great power. Xuan Chengzi¡¯s bold offering of this strategy was not empty talk, but rather a proposal with considerable confidence. ¡°Not so fast.¡± Lu Yuan looked at the somewhat eager Xuan Chengzi and waved his hand, ¡°Great Chu has just gained a victory, expanded territory by nearly thirty thousand miles, and increased the population by over ten million. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? We have already expanded rather quickly. At this moment, there¡¯s a shortage of officials at all levels of government, and the country is in urgent need of deployment; the local populace is in a state of panic and needs soothing; even the army has just been reorganized and still requires training. I currently have no intention of continuing the campaign and conquering Ning Country. Let us wait another two or three years until Great Chu has assimilated the spoils of this battle, and then it won¡¯t be too late to unite Jiangdong.¡± Lu Yuan declined the immediate proposal to mobilize troops. In the newly occupied territories of Chu State, the officials have yet to be fully appointed, and the operation of government offices is problematic. Without filling these vacant positions, Chu cannot enforce its policies or maintain its rule at the grassroots level. Moreover, there are two more prefectures in Jiangdong and Song Country each; if all four prefectures are conquered, there would be a gap of six thousand officials. Chu doesn¡¯t have enough officials to fill in on its existing lands. If we conquer so much territory, unless I fully accept the existing officials of Ning and Song Countries, it will be impossible to govern the new territories. But can I dare to accept all the officials from Song and Ning Countries? If I really take them in, will the newly conquered places bear the surname Lu, or belong to the Coastal Aristocratic Family? In addition, after this battle, Lu Yuan has annexed five prefectures, and Chu¡¯s population has increased by 13 million, more than doubling. All these new people used to be citizens of enemy states, among whom are a considerable number of powerful enemy aristocratic families with deep local roots, forming vast networks of interest. If these local forces cannot be reined in and managed, Chu¡¯s local areas will never attain peace. Continuous uprisings and rebellions, or covert opposition, are almost inevitable. Apart from the need for more officials, the hearts and minds of these local people also need to be won over and stabilized. Towards the powerful local aristocratic families of the former Ning, Su, and Southsea countries, Chu needs to suppress and cleanse them to ensure control over the local areas. For the ordinary people, the state has to reduce taxes and burdens to win them over. Only then can the local people settle down and guarantee Chu¡¯s control over the grassroots. During this process, local unrest is unavoidable and must be suppressed by a strong military presence to stabilize the situation. Meanwhile, Lu Yuan¡¯s army has expanded from the original seven hundred thousand to one million one hundred and twenty thousand, an increase of sixty percent. On the surface, although the number of the army has increased and Chu¡¯s prestige grows ever more formidable. In fact, the trust and solidarity among the various units has significantly declined due to the influx of surrendered troops, morale has also decreased, and the overall fighting capacity has actually diminished. Without fostering sufficient trust and cohesion, the combat effectiveness of this million-strong army may be even less than the original seven hundred thousand. Therefore, to restore combat strength, Chu also needs two or three years for the various armies to amalgamate to regain peak performance. As Chu starts to organize its acquired territories, numerous upheavals and rebellions are bound to occur, which will provide good opportunities for these forces to fight and further cohesion. This can be seen as mutually beneficial. Therefore, for all these reasons, Chu State, which has just doubled in size, truly lacks the capacity for any new expansion. Chapter 898 - Chapter 898 Chapter 379 Using Spies Against Ning Country_2 ?Chapter 898: Chapter 379 Using Spies Against Ning Country_2 Chapter 898: Chapter 379 Using Spies Against Ning Country_2 ¡°Even if we triumphed over Ning Country on the eastern front now, we wouldn¡¯t be able to govern the newly acquired territories effectively. It would merely make our maps look bigger, an empty and useless expansion, nothing but hollow swelling.¡± ¡°Lu Yuan never eyed those empty honors; he only cared about tangible interests.¡± ¡°Moreover, with Great Chu¡¯s size now doubled, the gathered Qi Luck was sufficient for his cultivation needs, which diminished his motivation for expansion even further.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s wait for two or three years.¡± ¡°By then, my cultivation will have advanced further, in both the Immortal Method and Martial Arts, and Great Chu will also have digested its conquests and accumulated enough foundational strength.¡± ¡°That¡¯s when expansion will be most opportune and free from hidden troubles.¡± ¡°¡®Your Majesty is prudent and far-sighted, unburdened by empty fame and undistracted by interests. I am in admiration,¡¯ the Poor Daoist said.¡± Seeing that Lu Yuan didn¡¯t adopt his suggestion, Xuan Chengzi couldn¡¯t help but feel slightly disappointed, but he said, ¡°In that case, I shall heed Your Majesty¡¯s decision.¡± Lu Yuan, considering that the other party had just arrived and not wanting to diminish his confidence too much, smiled again and said, ¡°Although we are not mobilizing troops at this time, after you return, you can ask those four Protectors who have defected to Ning Country to further infiltrate the Ning Army, gaining more military authority.¡± ¡°That way, several years from now when Great Chu launches its assault, their return to our side will deal an even greater blow to the Ning People.¡± Upon saying this, Lu Yuan pondered for a moment before adding, ¡°To make the Ning People trust you more, Fellow Daoist might consider following the example of Feishuang Tao, temporarily leading your followers to defect to Ning Country.¡± ¡°The two elders from your sect who promised to serve under Great Chu can also, under the pretense of assistance, take office in Ning Country first to seize control of its power.¡± ¡°In doing so, your sect will deepen its control over Ning Country. When you eventually return to our side, it will benefit Great Chu even more.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï After several months of reorganizing and with the help of some traitors from the Imperial City and the Coastal Aristocratic Family, details regarding Ning Country¡¯s current strengths and local defenses were largely unveiled to Great Chu. The military force of Ning Country was primarily composed of four parts at the moment, First, the remnants of the troops who had fled from the Western Expedition. Among them, on the Jiangbei Battlefield, Yang Jing and Xuan Yu brought back approximately twenty thousand cavalry and soldiers, and a navy of over sixty thousand. On the Lingnan Battlefield, Shangguan Ming returned with more than twenty thousand remnants of the Ning Army, a navy of over ten thousand, and nearly ten thousand infantry and five to six thousand naval forces from Nanhai Country.¡± ¡°In total, these are about fifty thousand infantry and cavalry, and eighty thousand naval forces.¡± Second, the original garrisons of Linhai and Guangling counties. ¡°In Linhai County, there were fifty thousand infantry and cavalry, Guangling County had fifty thousand, and at Wuhu Water Fortress upstream of Jinling City, there were forty thousand naval forces stationed.¡± ¡°In total, that¡¯s one hundred thousand infantry and cavalry, and forty thousand naval forces.¡± Third, the new soldiers recently recruited by Ning Country in Linhai and Guangling counties, totalling approximately two hundred thousand.¡± Fourth, the palace guards stationed in the capital Jinling, amounting to about thirty thousand.¡± ¡°Adding all these troops, Ning Country has roughly four hundred thousand infantry and cavalry as well as a hundred and twenty thousand naval forces, totalling five hundred and twenty thousand soldiers. Their strength remains formidable.¡± Of course, these are just figures on paper.¡± In reality, if we discount the two hundred thousand new recruits who¡¯ve only been enlisted for two months and are virtually civilian workers with no fighting capabilities, ¡°The Ning Army is left with just three hundred and twenty thousand soldiers, roughly on par with the military power of Xi Liang State of Yong State, dropping to the rank of a major nation.¡± Within these three hundred and twenty thousand veteran soldiers, the four Divine Generals from Purple Cloud Dao control one hundred and thirty thousand, over forty percent of the forces.¡± ¡°Following this trend, if Purple Cloud Dao sends two more Inborn elders to take office in Ning Country, given Ning¡¯s current desperate situation, it will undoubtedly rely heavily on the help extended by Purple Cloud Dao.¡± ¡°By then, the forces controlled by Purple Cloud Dao in Ning Country will inevitably be even greater.¡± Lu Yuan didn¡¯t need Purple Cloud Dao to completely hollow out Ning Country, as long as they could control two hundred thousand soldiers, it would be an immense help.¡± ¡°Think about it; the current total strength of the Ning Army is only five hundred and twenty thousand. Yet, Purple Cloud Dao controls two hundred thousand of that. ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï That¡¯s the significance.¡± ¡°It means that as long as Great Chu embarks on an eastern expedition against Ning Country in the future, with just a single command from Purple Cloud Dao, forty percent of Ning¡¯s forces would turn their coats and surrender to Great Chu.¡± ¡°In such a scenario, what could Ning Country use to fight against Great Chu?¡± ¡°It¡¯s likely that the nation would be extinguished without even two months passing.¡± ¡°However, all these deductions are just the ideal state, the best-case scenario.¡± ¡°Whether Ning Country will actually put such trust in Purple Cloud Dao remains to be seen.¡± Nevertheless, Lu Yuan believed that with Great Chu¡¯s current overt strength, comprising sixteen Inborn belonging to the state directly and three from the affiliated countries, a total of nineteen Inborn were at their disposal.¡± ¡°Among these Inborn, four possessed a strength above the Second Realm of Inborn.¡± ¡°On the other hand, after successive defeats, Ning Country had lost three of its original fourteen Inborn, leaving only eleven.¡± ¡°And within those, only Shen Qiu belonged to the Second Realm of Inborn.¡± ¡°With such a power comparison, Great Chu¡¯s strength at the Inborn level, when accounting for the gap between Second Realm and First Realm Grandmasters, was almost a ratio of three to one.¡± ¡°With such a disparity, how could Ning not feel apprehensive?¡± ¡°If Purple Cloud Dao offers its services now, its uptake by Ning Country is almost certain.¡± ¡°Otherwise, the four Inborn Divine Generals of Purple Cloud Dao would not have been able to control one hundred and thirty thousand soldiers and been put in charge of a front.¡± ¡°This situation, however, is only temporary.¡± ¡°With Tianluo Mountain now part of Great Chu¡¯s territory, and Purple Cloud Dao under Lu Yuan¡¯s governance and their sect threatened,¡± ¡°It is difficult not to question whether Purple Cloud Dao¡¯s stance and loyalty have been shaken.¡± ¡°The example of Xuan Chengzi, who has come to pledge allegiance so eagerly, is a stark illustration of this.¡± ¡°Purple Cloud Dao has already sided with Great Chu in reality.¡± ¡°It is only that the news has been well concealed, and Ning Country has yet to realize this fact.¡± Chapter 899 - Chapter 899 Chapter 379 Using Spies Against Ning Country_3 ?Chapter 899: Chapter 379 Using Spies Against Ning Country_3 Chapter 899: Chapter 379 Using Spies Against Ning Country_3 But as time passed, observing Ziyun Dao¡¯s continued stability within Chu State¡¯s territory and the harmonious relationship between both sides, no matter how much they tried to conceal it, it couldn¡¯t be hidden for much longer. Ning Country would eventually start to doubt Ziyun Dao¡¯s stance. Therefore, it was necessary to make some arrangements to stabilize Ning Country¡¯s trust. So what kind of arrangements could win over the trust of Ning Country? In fact, the answer was already in front of them. Two years ago, Feishuang Tao decided to support Chu State. To show their determination, and also to avoid suppression by Ning Country, they directly relocated their sect, moving into Chu State territory and eventually resettling on Mount Tianshu. Now, all Ziyun Dao needed to do was to follow in Feishuang Tao¡¯s footsteps, moving the sect disciples into the territory of Ning Country, which would naturally secure Ning¡¯s peace of mind. To convince those Coastal Aristocratic Families to believe in Ziyun Dao¡¯s determination to rise and fall with them. ¡°As long as you relocate the sect, you will certainly secure the heart of Ning Country, and then take this opportunity to infiltrate Ning, taking control of its military forces. And endure for two or three years, until I stabilize the internal affairs, and then lead an army of a million eastward, while you raise two hundred thousand soldiers and submit to my command by offering your territory. With this, Ning people¡¯s defenses will be wide open, our forces will drive straight in and within a month or two, we will be able to extinguish Ning Country.¡± Lu Yuan laid out his plan to Xuan Chengzi, then stared at him with compelling eyes and said in an enticing voice, ¡°When you achieve such an unprecedented feat, no one in the Great Chu Kingdom will be able to match you. I will also bestow a hefty reward and honor Ziyun Dao with the same status as Feishuang Tao, revered as the state religion.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï As the first Immortal Sect to support Chu State, they revealed to Lu Yuan secrets such as the demise of the Four Extremes and the Ascension of the Nine Provinces, allowing Chu State to adjust its strategic layout early to face the upcoming great changes in the Nine Provinces. One could say they deserved the major credit. Then they supported Lu Yuan with a thousand elixirs and three Protector God Generals, helping Chu State win the Great War among the Five Kingdoms. The contributions of Feishuang Tao to Chu State were indeed significant. Therefore, logically speaking, now that Lu Yuan had won the victory, he should favor Feishuang Tao to repay their investment of support. But all these were merely common sense. Beyond being helpful to Chu State, Feishuang Tao itself was no good character either. Last year, when the cultivators of the Nine Provinces prepared to cross the sea, those thieves of Feishuang Tao secretly started digging Chu State¡¯s corners. Especially that old guy from Jinyun, who personally went to Hanzhong to find Huang Xuan, trying to persuade this governor of the western three prefectures of Chu to abandon his post and leave with him on Feishuang Tao¡¯s ship to ascend to the Immortal Realm. People from Feishuang Tao also came to persuade Qingyunzi. Of course, the outcome goes without saying, how could Lu Yuan¡¯s two avatars abandon their own body to go playing ascension with them? Therefore, the results of persuasion naturally led to unhappy partings. Jinyun assumed his actions were covert and since the two avatars didn¡¯t make a report to the King of Chu, he thought the matter would just pass. But Lu Yuan had always kept this incident in mind. If it weren¡¯t for the fact that Huang Xuan and Qingyunzi were his avatars and couldn¡¯t possibly betray him, it might have been as the rumors said, that these two individuals had been loose cultivators who joined Chu State simply for worldly wealth and status due to no hope in the Immortal Method. If that had been the case, Feishuang Tao¡¯s underhanded actions might have indeed worked this time. After all, the temptation of ascending to the Immortal Realm is extraordinarily great for a cultivator. Don¡¯t you see that right now all the cultivators in the Nine Provinces have gathered together, deciding to ascend en masse? And by then, if Chu Country lost two Inborn second-realm cultivators, its top tier combat strength would be reduced by nearly a third in an instant. The losses involved are not something Feishuang Tao could compensate for with just three god generals and a thousand elixirs. So Lu Yuan naturally harbored deep hatred for Feishuang Tao¡¯s impure intentions. It was only because the Great War among The Five Kingdoms was about to commence, with great foes in front of them, that Chu Country had to rely on Feishuang Tao¡¯s power and he had to suppress his anger, acting as if nothing ever happened. He even commanded both avatars to discreetly hide the incident, to confuse Feishuang Tao and set their minds at ease. But this was just a stalling tactic. In the future, Lu Yuan would naturally seek his revenge. Now that Ziyun Dao had switched sides, this Immortal Sect, just like Feishuang Tao, wasn¡¯t something good for Chu State. So Lu Yuan naturally had no more worries. In the future, he would openly elevate Ziyun Dao, granting it the same status as Feishuang Tao, letting them be jointly ennobled as state religions, and have them fight each other out like dogs. As for the initial promise of honoring Feishuang Tao as the state religion¡­ Who ever stipulated that there could be only one sect as the state religion? Besides, having Feishuang Tao dominate alone isn¡¯t good for the state either. Having Ziyun Dao to counterbalance and restrain it is also good for Chu State. At the same time, it would allow both sects to weaken themselves in the struggle, so when they are both exhausted from the fight, it would be much easier for Lu Yuan to clean up. ¡®Heh, let these two thieving sects fight each other for now. When I unify the world, then I¡¯ll deal with you.¡¯ In Lu Yuan¡¯s mind, he had already thought of seventeen or eighteen ways to slowly handle Ziyun Dao and Feishuang Tao in the future. But naturally, Xuan Chengzi had no idea about these thoughts in Lu Yuan¡¯s mind. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï However, after considering Lu Yuan¡¯s previously mentioned plan and the enticement of becoming the state religion, Xuan Chengzi¡¯s eyes brightened. This plan was indeed highly feasible. And after successful accomplishment, such a meritorious deed would surely enable Ziyun Dao to firmly establish itself within Chu State territory. When Lu Yuan keeps his promise and ennobles Ziyun Dao as the state religion, ¡®With the name of the state religion and enjoying the same noble position, what can that mere Feishuang Tao do to compete with me?¡¯ Thinking thus in his heart, Xuan Chengzi immediately said, ¡°Your Majesty¡¯s strategic brilliance is unmatched. Our Ziyun Dao is willing to follow the plan.¡± ¡­ On the tenth month of the eleventh year of Shenwu, the number one Daoist Path of Yangzhou, Ziyun Dao, fled to Ning Country under the pretext of Chu State¡¯s tyranny, swearing not to serve Chu anymore. Upon their entrance into Ning, Ziyun Dao¡¯s master Xuan Chengzi, commanded elders Xuan Yi and Xuan Yu to enter into the service of Ning Country. Emperor Shenqiu of Ning was overjoyed upon hearing this. He then bestowed the original Mountain Gate of Feishuang Tao, Miluo Mountain, upon Ziyun Dao for the Righteous Heroes to settle. As for elders Xuan Yi and Xuan Yu, both were ennobled as Martial Marquises, each tasked with governing tens of thousands of soldiers, stationed on the nation¡¯s borders to guard against Chu people. With the arrival of Ziyun Dao to Ning, the sagging spirit of the country was revived to some extent. The hearts of the Coastal Aristocratic Family were somewhat settled. Chapter 900 - Chapter 900 Chapter 380 Gathering Two Qi ?Chapter 900: Chapter 380 Gathering Two Qi Chapter 900: Chapter 380 Gathering Two Qi The drizzle was continuous, and the chill reached the bone. On the magnificent and bizarre Tianluo Mountain, fine rain fell like silk, mist seeped into the forest, blurring the world. In an elegant pavilion built amidst the mountains, Lu Yuan sat cross-legged on a mat, his eyes slightly closed, his aura fluctuating intensely. The surrounding spiritual energy spiraled towards him like a whirlpool. A massive influx of spiritual energy poured into his body, and as Lu Yuan circulated the cultivation techniques from the Taiping Dao Book and silently recited the mantra, he spared no effort to refine this spiritual energy into magic power. A large amount of magic power was born within him, and under the guidance of the mantra, a strand of golden Qi emerged from within a beam of earthy yellow Immortal Light, weaving through and bolstering itself with magic power in the sea of his magic strength. Finally, after an unknown period had passed, the golden Qi transformed from a thread into strands, the strands gathered into patches, and eventually, it metamorphosed into a radiant stream of sharp, golden Immortal Light. ¡°The Five Elements converge, Earth engenders Metal, the Golden Qi gathers!¡± Lu Yuan suddenly opened his eyes and shouted aloud. In an instant, a stream of earthy yellow Immortal Light, carrying with it a gleam of golden Immortal Light, burst forth from his body, shooting three inches above his head. The two streams of Immortal Light shone brilliantly, absorbing the nearby spiritual energy like a whale gulping water. With the help of the earthy yellow Immortal Light, the vast spiritual energy was transformed into nourishment, entering the golden Immortal Light and aiding its rapid growth. In just over ten breaths, as the spiritual energy drawn from heaven and earth was absorbed by eighty percent, the golden Immortal Light reached its limit, its brilliance rivaling that of the earthy yellow Immortal Light. The matured golden Immortal Light trembled slightly and detached from the earthy yellow light, drifting aside to become an independent Immortal Light. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? The two streams of Immortal Light danced around Lu Yuan¡¯s head, intermingling, emanating bicolored golden and yellow brilliance. ¡°Gather!¡± With a single thought from Lu Yuan, the two streams of Immortal Light flashed and flew back into his body. As the Immortal Light returned to its place, a tremendous magical pressure spread from within him, enveloping the entire pavilion and rapidly expanding outward. The fine rain and mist that drifted from the sky were scattered by this wave of magic power, transforming into ripples and flying backward, creating a magical power space. ¡°Haha, Tianluo Mountain truly deserves its ranking among the top ten Cave Worlds in the world; in just one month of cultivation here, the Golden Qi has formed!¡± Lu Yuan looked through the magical energy barrier at the mountains veiled in rain outside, his heart soaring with exhilaration. Since breaking through to gather one level of energy six years ago, in the fifth year of Shenwu, it had taken him six years to advance further on the path of the Immortal Method, gathering the second of the Five Elements Qi and greatly improving his cultivation. The joy of this moment was indescribable, expressed only through hearty laughter. ¡°Gathering one level of energy in the Immortal Realm signifies an initial transformation, offering mortals double their lifespan, two hundred years. Gathering two levels of energy further strengthens the Immortal foundation, discarding much of the mortal flesh, and adds another hundred years of life. That means, as of now, my lifespan in the Immortal Realm theoretically totals three hundred years. Well, still a short-lived ghost. Compared to my Changsheng Dao Guo, it¡¯s laughably weak.¡± Lu Yuan thought about the increase in lifespan after gathering two levels of energy and couldn¡¯t help but curl his lip, choosing not to concern himself further with it. For ordinary cultivators, advancement in the Immortal Realm brings the significant benefit of increased lifespan, but for him, it¡¯s the least useful perk. After all, practicing the Way of Control Pneuma for so many years, which greatly diminishes lifespan, should by common sense, have reduced Lu Yuan¡¯s lifespan by two or three thousand years already. Yet to this day, he still doesn¡¯t feel the slightest decline in his lifespan. His body is brimming with vitality, his Divine Soul is in perfect condition, at an excellent peak a€¡° everything is exceedingly well. The power of the Changsheng Dao Guo is fully exhibited at this moment. Therefore, since the beginning of his cultivation, Lu Yuan has never worried about lifespan issues. ¡°However, while the increase in lifespan can be set aside, the growth in strength is indeed a pleasant surprise, truly befitting the realm of gathering two levels of energy.¡± Lu Yuan felt the magic power within him, which was now more than thrice as large as before the breakthrough, and also the similarly astonishing increase in the power of his Divine Soul, his heart brimming with unstoppable joy. At this moment, he felt he could take on ten of his former selves from just a day ago. After the breakthrough to gather two levels of energy, not only did his magic power and Divine Soul grow, but his ability to wield the forces of Heaven and Earth also improved. When casting spells, he could draw on more spiritual energy to enhance them, unlocking more powerful Divine Powersa€| All of the above make a cultivator who has gathered two levels of energy absolutely overpower those who have only gathered one. Even the current gap is only temporary. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï As Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation of magic power slowly accumulates and deepens, moving further in the realm of gathering two levels of energy, the gap between him and a cultivator who has gathered one level of energy will widen even further. Eventually, reaching a gap of twenty to thirty times, or even forty to fifty times, is just a matter of time. ¡°Now, if common Inborn Grandmasters encounter me, I wouldn¡¯t even need to use magic power. Just a press of my Divine Soul is enough to crush their will, dissolving their resistance and easily slaughtering them.¡± Lu Yuan compared the gap between himself now and an Inborn Grandmaster of Martial Arts and couldn¡¯t help but smile with satisfaction. The Inborn Grandmasters of Martial Arts, although they too have undergone a transformation of body and soul, in essence, are equivalent to cultivators who have manifested magic power and learned a couple of spells, not even as good as gathering one level of energy. A cultivator who has gathered one level of energy can, under normal circumstances, take on more than a dozen Inborn Grandmasters of the First Realm without any pressure. Even against a Second Realm Grandmaster, they can handle four or five. And Lu Yuan, after another transformation in his realm, could take on twenty to thirty cultivators who have just entered the realm of gathering one level of energy. Chapter 901 - Chapter 901 Chapter 380 Gathering Two Qi_2 ?Chapter 901: Chapter 380 Gathering Two Qi_2 Chapter 901: Chapter 380 Gathering Two Qi_2 After undergoing two breakthroughs on the Path of Immortality, his strength was already two major realms above an ordinary innate, resulting in a disparity hundreds of times greater in power. If one were to make a comparison, the current Lu Yuan and an ordinary innate fighter were akin to those Foundation Building Cultivators and the rookies at the first or second level of Qi Refining that he had read about in cultivation novels in his previous life. Innate fighters, having undergone the transformation of body and soul and grasping the rudimentary use of the power of heaven and earth, can no longer be considered ordinary mortals, but rather akin to low-level cultivators. After all, some cultivators in the first three levels of Qi Refining from cultivation novels, if asked to single-handedly break through tens of thousands of troops and slaughter thousands, would probably find it a tall order, perhaps even impossible to achieve. But an Inborn Grandmaster could do so. ¡°And then there¡¯s martial arts, with this breakthrough on the Immortal Method, the transformation of the body and soul and the significant increase in qi, blood, and divine thoughts, I should now also take the opportunity to breakthrough,¡± he thought. Lu Yuan felt the qi and blood coursing through his body like dragons, the immensely strong divine thoughts stirred in his mind, giving rise to an impulsive force which then transformed into suction, once again dragging the residual Heavenly and Earthly Aura that had not been fully assimilated before, from outside his body. These auras, like rivers flowing back to the sea, swarmed into his body once again and were greedily absorbed by every cell and drop of blood, continuously strengthening his physique. Even his divine soul, amidst the strengthening of the body, became a bit more condensed and powerful. When the last trace of spiritual energy in the vicinity had been devoured, Lu Yuan¡¯s body and divine soul once again reached their limit, and a strong flame of red fire burst forth out of the void. The scorching temperature instantly ignited the small pavilion, turning it into ashes in the blink of an eye. The nearby misty rain clouds, upon being illuminated by the fire¡¯s brilliance, also dissipated into vaporous smoke in an instant. Just as a fearsome wildfire was about to erupt amidst the rain clouds, with a move of his divine thoughts, Lu Yuan retracted the terrifying red fire into his body, averting the calamity. ¡°Not bad at all,¡± he mused. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ¡°The Red Sun Divine Fire used at the Martial Dao Great Grandmaster Realm is no less powerful than the magic I practiced when I was gathering one level of energy. Now, apart from magic, I have acquired another formidable divine power.¡± Lu Yuan looked at the charred black ashes on the ground around him, the small pavilion of which there was no trace left, the clouds and rain no longer providing cover, blowing towards him. Yet, he took no heed of the cold and dampness, instead relishing the hint of coolness. This worldly cold could by no means drown out the heat in his heart. Having achieved major success in the Immortal Method, even if those cultivators from the Nine Provinces had not yet ascended, he would be considered the number one person in the world. Even in The Age of Dharma Decline, where magic power and spiritual energy were hard to come by and should not be used carelessly, with the recent breakthrough into the Martial Dao Great Grandmaster Realm, in terms of regular combat strength, he could now crush those ordinary Inborn fighters. The unification of the Nine Provinces now posed no difficulty to him at all. ¡°In fact, if I wanted to now, I could directly make a move, assassinate the emperors of various countries, slaughter their high-ranking officials in one breath, plunging the world into chaos, and clear the obstacles for unification,¡± he thought. This tempting thought flashed through Lu Yuan¡¯s mind, but he quickly dismissed it. There was no need to be so aggressive now. At this point, with the breakthroughs in the Immortal Method, gathering two levels of energy and after becoming a Martial Arts Grandmaster, the entire Nine Provinces were within his control, and their eventual annexation was merely a matter of time. To act hastily now would certainly allow for swift unification. But the chaos and disasters that would ensue were enough to set the entire Nine Provinces ablaze and plummet into an unprecedented collapse of order. At that time, it would not be possible for Chu State to settle and restore peace merely with the reputation of being the number one expert in the world. Rather than letting the whole world descend into chaos and then frantically trying to clean up the mess, exhausting both heart and effort, it would be better to follow the current plan. First, assimilate the current victories, then unify Yangzhou, next march north to annex Liang, and ultimately unify the Nine Provinces. The whole process could take a hundred years, consolidating the foundation step by step, unifying the Nine Provinces within order, a truly perfect accomplishment, and in doing so, minimize the damage brought about by unification. Lu Yuan wished to unify the Nine Provinces not just for his own cultivation, but also to secure a prosperous future for his relatives, friends, ministers, and subordinates who followed him. He had no intention of merely seeking slaughter and chaos, or of oppressing his subjects. There are things to do and things not to do. ¡°So let it happen naturally, and let things fall into place,¡± he nodded to himself. With a slight smile, Lu Yuan watched the endless mountain rain, flung his sleeves, and, with hands behind his back, headed towards a palace on the mountain that he used as a regular abode. With the significant advancement of his cultivation, the pressures that had once weighed on him had instantly dissipated. This also caused his mindset to become much more relaxed, attaining an increasingly tranquil state of contentment. Now he could stroll leisurely amidst the mountain rain clouds¡­ ¡­ Ever since the beginning of October when the Purple Cloud Dao declared their defection to Ning Country, it has stirred not a small amount of turmoil within Yuzhang. However, as King of Chu, Lu Yuan dispatched troops to garrison the prefectures and counties, the disturbances that had appeared in the local areas were soon settled. And King Lu Yuan, following the departure of Purple Cloud Dao, took his concubines and ministers and moved up to Tianluo Mountain, which the Purple Cloud Dao had abandoned, to recuperate in contentment, without a least bit of concern. This attitude of calming the situation with stillness quickly soothed the restless populace. The officials Chu sent to the localities still firmly and comfortably advanced Chu¡¯s policies, as the locals, with governance improving by the day, gradually returned to loyalty. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï The small disturbances that occurred were quickly extinguished by the decisive action of the local garrisons, and they caused no significant unrest. Amidst these minor setbacks and the busy turbulence, Chu State progressed through the eleventh year of Shenwu and came into the early months of its twelfth year. Chapter 902 - Chapter 902 Chapter 380 Gathering Two Qi_3 ?Chapter 902: Chapter 380 Gathering Two Qi_3 Chapter 902: Chapter 380 Gathering Two Qi_3 The commotion and storm outside did not disturb the tranquility of Tianluo Mountain. After Lu Yuan had made a breakthrough in cultivating both immortal and martial paths, he became considerably more laid-back. Besides absorbing the abundant spiritual energy within Tianluo Mountain that was several times richer than the outside world to aid his cultivation day by day, what remained was to take Lan Cai¡¯er and the Spiritual woman, along with two children, He¡¯er and Hao¡¯er, to roam the mountains and waters, admire the scenery and recite poetrya€¡±it was truly a time of great enjoyment. In his spare moments, he would also take the time to practice the spells and supernatural powers that gather the two levels of energy (Qi). Upon reaching the stage of Gathering Two Qi in the Taiping Dao Book, three more spells and one divine power were added. The three spells were respectively named the Golden Blade Technique, Gather Soldiers Technique, and Golden Armor Technique. The divine power was called Turn Beans into Soldiers. The Golden Blade Technique, as its name implies, allowed one to condense the Golden Qi and use magic power to unleash an incredibly sharp golden blade that could break through anything and was an excellent killing technique. The Gather Soldiers Technique was about learning the corresponding soldiers¡¯ runes and then activating them with magic power to conjure various weapons out of thin air, no less real than the original, and could be seen as an advanced version of Gather Qi into Blades. The Golden Armor Technique was a defensive spell that could form a layer of golden armor outside oneself or others to shield oneself. The divine power Turn Beans into Soldiers was related to the Yellow Turban Strongman and was an advanced version of it. Previously, to create a Yellow Turban Strongman, Lu Yuan needed to prepare materials and then inscribe runes on each piece before assembling a complete Yellow Turban Strongman. Going through each step, even if one wanted to make a single strongman, it would take at least ten days to half a month, extremely time-consuming. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã0 Whereas Turn Beans into Soldiers omitted the step of inscribing runes on the Yellow Turban Strongman. Once a cultivator mastered this divine power, they would naturally grasp the runes of the strongman. Then, they would simply need to choose the material, and with a thought, the already mastered Yellow Turban Strongman runes could instantly be inscribed on the material, transforming it into a soldier. What previously took ten days to half a month to make, with this divine power, could now be conjured in an instant, making it incredibly convenient. And it wasn¡¯t just a matter of saving time. The Dao soldiers condensed by divine power runes required even less of Lu Yuan¡¯s divine thoughts. If originally inscribing a Yellow Turban Strongman consumed three parts of his divine thoughts, now, just one part of divine thought could conjure a Dao soldier. Of course, there are corresponding trade-offs. With Turn Beans into Soldiers divine power, the amount of divine thought needed is reduced, but accordingly, the intelligence of the Dao soldiers also declines. They could only execute basic commands, possess combat instincts, and make some elementary logical judgments, incapable of complex emotions or normal communication with people. They could not function like Huang Xuan and Qingyunzi, who could carry out a variety of complex orders and even command an army, indistinguishable from an avatar. Of course, at the time of creation, Lu Yuan could also choose to infuse more divine thought to make these conjured Dao soldiers as intelligent as Huang Xuan or those on a similar level, so they could carry out more complex orders. However, this would greatly reduce the number of Dao soldiers he could create. And it would impact his fighting strength significantly. So, although the technique could mass produce high-end combat forces to enrich one¡¯s manpower and solve the dilemma of a lack of enforcers, its disadvantages were also significant. The choice of how to balance this was a matter of personal discretion. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï However, Lu Yuan¡¯s choice was to directly recall Huang Xuan and Qingyunzi and then upgrade these two avatars anew. With the Gathering Two Qi stage, the upper limit of strength of the Yellow Turban Strongman he could create was further raised. While previously he could only create Yellow Turban Strongmen at the normal Innate level, now he could elevate them to the Grandmaster realm, the realm of Gathering One Qi. This was quite normal. After all, now that he had reached the stage of Gathering Two Qi, to deal with opponents at the same level with those lower-level Innate Yellow Turban Strongmen, which would be a hundredfold less powerful, would be futile. To put it bluntly, they couldn¡¯t even break through the defenses of an opponent at the same level. To be effective at this stage, at the very least, they must have the strength of Gathering One Qi to pose a threat to opponents on the same level. Although in the current Nine Provinces world, Lu Yuan had no opponents on the same level, it did not prevent him from upgrading his avatars to enhance their strength. So, after spending a few days, he upgraded Huang Xuan and Qingyunzi. Based on the fourfold increase in his divine soul after his breakthrough in both immortal and martial paths, he also conjured up four more avatars with the same level of intelligence, named Huang Yun, Huang Lin, Qingxuanzi, and Qingsongzi. Well, from the style of the names, one can see that these are new avatars, still following the style of Huang Xuan and Qingyunzi, focusing on defense and attack respectively, differentiated by their names. But by doing this, the trick with Huang Xuan and Qingyunzi was almost impossible to hide. The names of the six individuals and their unique cultivator identity could lead many to speculate and guess some truths. But Lu Yuan no longer cared about this. With his current strength, he was untouchable by anyone else in the world, and to say he was Unrivaled in the World was no exaggeration. With such power in the Nine Provinces world, he could protect any secret. He did not need to worry about exposure anymore, attracting covetous glances from others. If others found out, so be ita€¡±what could they do to him? In fact, partially revealing this secret could still serve to intimidate and frighten others into submission, indirectly strengthening Lu Yuan¡¯s prestige. It turned out to be a good thing. After creating the new avatars, Lu Yuan let Huang Xuan lead the two Xiaoqing, and Qingyunzi lead the two Xiao Huang, back to their respective defensive regions. The major affairs of Jiangdong were then swiftly entrusted to his six avatars. The country¡¯s important matters were left to his good friend Sun Siwen. He himself, happily played the role of an inept ruler, accompanying his beautiful wife and children to roam the mountains and waters of Tianluo Mountain, carefree and at ease. He found such joy here that he had no thoughts of the matters of Chu. Chapter 903 - Chapter 903 Chapter 381 Northwestern Warfare ?Chapter 903: Chapter 381 Northwestern Warfare Chapter 903: Chapter 381 Northwestern Warfare The twelfth year of Shenwu¡¯s winter arrived later than the previous years. Since the first snowfall early in October last year, it wasn¡¯t until early February of this year that the winter snow began to melt. The harsh winter lasted for more than four months. Therefore, as the spring showers fell and all things revived with the disappearing snow, Lu Yuan, accompanied by the spiritual woman, traveled to observe the beautiful scenery of spring. ¡°Spirit Consort, there is a small pavilion ahead from which we can overlook the scenic beauty of the seven peaks of the western mountains. We could rest there for a while.¡± After spending half a day enjoying themselves on the mountain, Lu Yuan, seeing the Spirit Consort¡¯s slightly bulging belly, suggested it with concern. During this winter, Lu Yuan¡¯s family had nested in Tianluo Mountain for half a year. With daily joy and pleasure among the palace women, it was no surprise that several had become pregnant. Among the pregnant consorts, the one he valued most was still the spiritual woman. It is said that one¡¯s status rises with the birth of a child, but sometimes, the child¡¯s status is elevated by the mother¡¯s. The spiritual woman herself was of Inborn rank, and with the entire Snowy Wilderness Nomads as her backing among the palace women, she held the highest status, even slightly surpassing Queen Lan Cai¡¯er. After all, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s backing, the Five Poisons Sect, had long since become a shadow of its former self. Over twenty years of assimilation, the million Miao people had all but disappeared, becoming indistinguishable from the Chu people. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? Even the Five Poisons Sect, along with the addition of former or current Innate Sects like White Phoenix Temple and Liuyang Sect, saw its influence and role in Jianghu of Chu State quickly decrease, becoming a commonplace force in the martial world. Fortunately, Lu He and Lu Hao, the two brothers, were about to reach adulthood. When they grew up, they would both be of Inborn rank. As legitimate sons with this backing and Lu Yuan¡¯s deep affection for them, Lan Cai¡¯er¡¯s status was not a concern. ¡°I shall listen to the great king,¡± said the spiritual woman. Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s suggestion, she smiled softly and readily agreed. Then, the two of them walked towards the small pavilion not far ahead. It must be said that the Purple Cloud Dao as an Immortal Sect with ten thousand years of heritage truly possessed a profound and incomparable depth. In Tianluo Mountain alone, the twenty-eight interconnected peaks in the north, south, east, and west were all dotted with numerous pavilions and terraces. Atop this main mountain were even more grand palaces. In terms of their exquisite luxury, they surpassed the opulence of ordinary royal palaces. Even being situated within the Immortal Mountain, the carefree and otherworldly atmosphere gave one a sense of aspiring to immortality. This was also why, after Lu Yuan moved to Tianluo Mountain, he hardly wished to leave. Not only because the mountain was abundant in Spiritual Energy, aiding his cultivation, but also because the scenery was beautifully stunning, and palaces abounded, the environment and enjoyment it offered were far superior to that of his Chu Palace in Baling. With such an excellent place, how could he willingly return to his humble abode? Upon reaching the small pavilion, the palace maids stationed there to clean saw the great king arrive and hurriedly came up to serve. It didn¡¯t take long for tea and pastries to be prepared and incense lit for the couple¡¯s enjoyment. ¡°The Spirit Consort is with child and needs to eat more. Although the pastries here are somewhat inferior, they can still satisfy our hunger. Have a taste,¡± he suggested. Lu Yuan picked up a piece of pastry and personally brought it to the lips of the spiritual woman, feeding her. The spiritual woman took a small bite and swallowed it, but refused to eat any more, her face revealing a trace of sadness and her eyes filled with sorrow. Seeing this, Lu Yuan frowned and asked, ¡°My love, is your appetite gone because you are troubled by something on your mind?¡± The spiritual woman turned her head, her face showing a measure of grief as she sadly said, ¡°My king, I just thought of my clansmen in the Snowy Wilderness who are still suffering under the ice and snow. Every day, people die from hunger and cold. Yet here I am with pastries to eat, and I can¡¯t help feeling guilty, so I¡¯ve lost my appetite.¡± ¡°The Snowy Wilderness¡­¡± Hearing the spiritual woman mention her homeland, Lu Yuan fell into thought, muttering to himself contemplatively. The people from the Snow Plains had not had an easy time over the past two years. Starting from the autumn of the tenth year of Shenwu, the Snow Plains Nomads had invited Chu to join them in an attack on Zhou Country. However, at that time, Lu Yuan was preparing for the decisive battle with Ning Country, and threats loomed from Jiangnan, Lingnan, and the north. With Chu State¡¯s own forces stretched thin, there simply wasn¡¯t the capacity to be concerned with others. As a result, he turned down the proposition. Therefore, having no choice, the Snow Plains Nomads could only wage war by themselves against the Zhou People. But how could the Snow Plains Nomads alone stand a chance against Zhou People? As expected, the autumn battle of that year ended in a disastrous defeat for the Nomads. Last spring, after suffering a bitter defeat, the Nomads could muster only three hundred thousand soldiers, an unprecedented decline in their strength. This strength was not even on par with that of the Zhou forces stationed in Helong and Guannei Prefectures; and, unsurprisingly, they were soundly defeated again, with Zhou Country capturing over a hundred thousand prisoners, achieving a complete victory. By last autumn, having recovered a little vitality over the summer, the Nomads gathered all their strength and mobilized another army of five hundred thousand. It was nearly an all-out effort, aiming to take Helong and Guannei Prefectures from Zhou Country. At the same time, Wei Country from the north also mobilized five hundred thousand soldiers, moving south from their held Shuofang Prefecture to attack He Nei Prefecture of Zhou Country. With the Barbarians and Wei Country attacking from two sides, supporting each other with armies of a million strong, their momentum was immense. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 That year, it was almost considered the most eye-catching and illustrious battle within the Nine Provinces. Even the battle commanded by Lu Yuan in Jiangnan was overshadowed. Compared to the two armies, Zhou Country, after several great wars, had only about two hundred thousand soldiers left to mobilize in both Helong and Guannei. The situation was extremely dire. At this point of imminent national collapse, the Zhou People, after urgent deliberation, decided to make a painful choice, abandoning the western prefecture of He and moving its remaining million inhabitants entirely to Nanyang Prefecture in the east of Guannei. Chapter 904 - Chapter 904 Chapter 381 Northwestern Warfare_2 ?Chapter 904: Chapter 381 Northwestern Warfare_2 Chapter 904: Chapter 381 Northwestern Warfare_2 After contracting their defensive lines, without the burden of Hexi Prefecture, the one hundred thousand defenders from Hexi Prefecture were relocated by Zhou Country to the Guannei Prefectures to assist in defense, bringing the total number of troops in the Jingji area to three hundred thousand. In Longxi Prefecture, on the other hand, only one hundred thousand soldiers and horses were left behind, along with another one hundred thousand civilian workers summoned to stand guard against the Barbarians. Clearly, compared to the Barbarians who had repeatedly been defeated and had never taken any advantage from them, it was Wei Country that had been continuously victorious since they headed south, annihilating hundreds of thousands of Zhou soldiers and seizing a Shuofang Prefecture from them, which posed more of a threat in the eyes of Zhou People. Therefore, in order to resist the southern incursion of Wei Country, Zhou People had no choice but to concentrate more forces to guard against the Wei people. In fact, the threat from the Wei people was indeed significant. Without last year¡¯s autumn and winter¡¯s Great War, the offensive of Wei Country¡¯s five hundred thousand-strong army was fierce. At the start of the war, they even swiftly captured three prefectures within Zhou Country¡¯s Guannei, and their vanguard almost reached the outskirts of Zhou Country¡¯s capital, Chang¡¯an, shaking the entire country to its core. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Later, He Basheng urgently counterattacked, the Zhou internally conscripted more than two hundred thousand civilian workers in a rush to sacrificially shore up their forces, and only after a heavy cost were they finally able to push back the advance. However, even so, of the three prefectures lost in the north of Guannei Prefecture, only two territories were ultimately recaptured, and one remained firmly under the control of Wei Country. North of Guannei Prefecture, Wei Country had already secured the main route for moving southward, and Zhou¡¯s capital Chang¡¯an was constantly under the shadow of Wei¡¯s blades. The slightest signal of beacon fires in the north would shake Chang¡¯an, causing alarms thrice a day. Under such circumstances, Zhou Country was already discussing whether to relocate the capital. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï For instance, moving from the capital, Chang¡¯an, to Henan Prefecture¡¯s Heyin City in the rear, which was protected by the natural barrier of a great river to the north. However, relocating the capital was no trivial matter, with Zhou Country¡¯s royal family, nobility, and ancestral tombs all located in Guannei Prefecture, a region that has always been the most populous and affluent, forming the foundation of the country. Leaving from here would involve too many intertwined interests. Therefore, the country was divided into factions that argued on this matter every day. The matter of relocating the capital thus dragged on without a conclusion in sight. Although the issue of relocating the capital was a hot debate, there seemed to be a unanimous opinion within Zhou Country about continuing to abandon Longxi Prefecture. In last winter¡¯s Great War, after Barbarians moved their tribes to the abandoned Hexi Prefecture, they raised another five hundred thousand troops to invade Longxi Prefecture. In Longxi Prefecture, Zhou Country only had one hundred thousand soldiers and horses, and one hundred thousand civilian workersa€¡±the forces were considerably weak. Especially since the Inborn Grandmasters had committed all their reserves this time, deploying a total of eight. In Longxi Prefecture, Zhou only had a mere two. Facing up five hundred thousand against two hundred thousand, and eight against two, the overwhelming disparity in strength left Zhou at a rare disadvantage on the battlefield in Longxi, causing them to be defeated and pushed back at every turn. In just a few months, they had lost half of their territory. If it hadn¡¯t been for He Basheng beating back Wei Country and then leading fifty thousand soldiers and horses back for an urgent reinforcement, it¡¯s likely that the entire Longxi Prefecture would have been lost. However, after losing half of Longxi Prefecture, the Zhou court finally came to recognize clearly that the country¡¯s strength could no longer support fighting on two fronts. Moreover, after years of war ravaging the area, Longxi Prefecture had long since lost its original state of lush grasslands and abundant farmlands. The once flourishing Longxi Prefecture, which had a population of three million at its peak, had by now dwindled to just over a million, with over half its territory occupied by invaders. The remaining half of Longxi Prefecture under Zhou¡¯s control was left with only about eight hundred thousand people. With such a reduced population, it was not only about maintaining the ten-plus thousand Zhou soldiers stationed there; even providing for their own during the war was a struggle. Longxi Prefecture had become as useless to Zhou Country as the ribs of a fowl. Thus, after a discussion, Zhou Country decided to give up Longxi Prefecture and relocate the remaining population of over eight hundred thousand to the more secured Henan Prefecture in the rear. As for the tens of thousands of soldiers left in the prefecture, they were also pulled back to Guannei Prefecture to replenish the military forces that were lacking in Jingji after the Great War. This series of relocations resulted in Zhou Country consecutively losing Hanzhong Prefecture, Shuofang Prefecture, Hexi Prefecture, and Longxi Prefecture, with only Guannei Prefecture, Henan Prefecture, Nanyang Prefecture, and Xiangyang Prefecture remaininga€¡±a total of four prefectures and thirty-two divisions. Their territory was reduced to about forty percent of what it was at its peak. And with the significant reduction in national borders, the population of Zhou Country had naturally decreased as well. Now, Zhou¡¯s four prefectures and thirty-two divisions were estimated to have a population of only about thirteen million, seven million less than at its peak. The country¡¯s military forces were down to only one hundred and fifty thousand in Henan Prefecture, one hundred and fifty thousand in Nanyang and Xiangyang prefectures, and two hundred thousand in Guannei Prefecturea€¡±a total of five hundred thousand soldiers and horses. A drop of nearly a million from the peak of over a million. Zhou Country¡¯s national strength had substantially weakened, having fallen from one of the leading powers to barely clinging to the threshold of mighty nations, no longer reaping the glory of the past. What was more fatal was that even after giving up a vast amount of territory, the geopolitical environment surrounding Zhou Country had not improved at all. To the west, Helong¡¯s two prefectures had become pastures for the Barbarians. To the north, Wei¡¯s several hundred thousand-strong army was eyeing Shuofang Prefecture covetously, having gained the access route to Guannei Prefecture and sending troops south day and night. To the south, Chu State had also defeated its old rival Ning Country and gained the momentum to unify Jiangnan, thereby having the spare strength to send troops northward. To the east, Liang and Zhao, likewise, had long coveted Zhou¡¯s Henan and Nanyang prefectures. Although they had not yet sent troops to attack, should an opportunity arise, they would not hesitate to join in the fray. In such a situation, Zhou Country was truly surrounded by enemies on all sides, and each enemy was exceptionally strong; aside from the Barbarians, each could be considered Zhou¡¯s equal, not weaker in the slightest. Chapter 905 - Chapter 905 Chapter 381 Northwestern Warfare_3 ?Chapter 905: Chapter 381 Northwestern Warfare_3 Chapter 905: Chapter 381 Northwestern Warfare_3 Facing such severe geopolitical challenges, the sense of crisis in Zhou Country was overwhelming. So, after giving up Longxi Prefecture and evacuating the populace back to the country, faced with immense pressure from all sides and consecutive losses of troops and generals, Zhou Country had no choice but to order the recruitment of another five hundred thousand soldiers, expanding its military force back to a million to meet the increasing demands of warfare. With Zhou Country¡¯s remaining population of thirteen million, recruiting five hundred thousand troops and sustaining an army of a million was difficult, but not impossible. While troops could be recruited, finding a general was harder. Previously on the battlefield in Longxi, a Pillar State Grand General of Zhou Country was caught off guard by the Barbarians and directly surrounded by six Inborns. Without a chance to escape, he perished on the spot. And in the successive battles with Wei Country, Zhou had also lost two Inborn Pillar States. Thus, to this day, the number of Pillar State Grand Generals in Zhou Country had fallen directly from the original ten to just seven, with the strongest warriors greatly diminished, not even comparable to Ning Country which barely held on in the two prefectures of Jiangdong. Therefore, even though Zhou Country only retained two Pillar States in the regions of Henan and Nanyang to guard against Zhao, Liang, Chu, and other countries, the number of Inborn Pillar States it could gather within Guannei was only five. This figure was far less than the thirteen claimed by Wei Country and the eight claimed by the Barbarians. Zhou Country, which once dominated an era, had indeed reached the twilight of its existence, nearing national extinction. However, even though it was said to be close to extinction, with its current foundations, Zhou Country could still hold out for some time. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã0 After all, Wei Country to the north also had a large number of barbarian tribes moving south, harassing Wei¡¯s northern territory like the Barbarians and tying up much of Wei¡¯s energy. The forces Wei could spare to attack Zhou were, at most, like last winter, only four to five hundred thousand troops and three to five Inborns. The rest of their strength had to be used to deal with those barbarian tribes to ensure domestic stability. The situation for the Barbarians was not much better. The weather has grown colder in these two years, not only unbearable for the Barbarians but also for the Western Liang Country, which resides in the same region. So, last autumn, when the Barbarians launched a major attack on Zhou¡¯s Longxi Prefecture, the Western Liang Country, which had been in closed-door cultivation for years in the western part of Yong State, could no longer endure and sent out four hundred thousand troops to attack the Barbarians in Hexi Prefecture. The Barbarians were caught off guard, losing half of Hexi Prefecture in an instant, with countless tribes that had migrated there being plundered and enslaved by the Western Liang forces. It was precisely because of the threat to their rear that even though the situation was good in Longxi at that time, when He Basheng led only fifty thousand troops for reinforcement, the Barbarians still decisively abandoned further attacks. The reason behind this was the invasion by Western Liang Country. At this moment, the Barbarians were already heavily backing up their troops, engaging in continuous fierce battles with Western Liang within Hexi territory. After years of accumulation and development, Western Liang¡¯s strength had become formidable. With three prefectures, a population of over four million, and situated in a region mixed with barbarian tribes, all dwelling there had come to practice martial arts to defend themselves, with a fierce and intrepid martial spirit. According to the reports of imperial spies, every household in the country owned fine horses, men were knights, and even women could bend the bow and shoot arrows, in no way inferior to the nomadic tribes of the grasslands. Under such a martial spirit, the country maintained a standing army of three hundred thousand, with an additional ability to conscript fifty thousand mounted militiamen, making its military strength exceptionally formidable. Even in terms of Inborn Grandmasters, due to having the remnants of the Tian Shan mountains and numerous Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens within its borders, Western Liang boasted as many as five, surpassing the average major nation. Facing such an invasion from a country steeped in martial tradition, the Barbarians naturally found themselves in a painful dilemma, hardly able to cope. Moreover, exhausted from prolonged warfare, they were no match for Western Liang upon their immediate return from the front lines. After four major battles, with losses of more than two hundred thousand soldiers, they still could not drive Western Liang away. Instead, of the remaining half of Hexi Prefecture, they lost another two or three prefectures, leaving themselves with only lands of one or two prefectures. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The Barbarians had struggled against Zhou for several years, suffering millions of casualties, and the hard-earned results of those battles were now stolen by Western Liang. How could they endure this? Yet faced with Western Liang on the battlefield, the Barbarians were not their match. Driven to desperation, they naturally thought of their kin, Chu State, which had just won a great victory over Ning Country in Jiangdong and had become the sole dominant force in Yangzhou. So, this winter, the Barbarians, pushed to the brink by Western Liang, sent messengers to Chu State to discuss seeking aid. At the same time, they also came to negotiate a deal. During their recent foray into the two prefectures of Henan and Longxi, the Zhou people captured almost seven hundred thousand Zhou civilians. According to the previous treaty between Chu and the Snow Plains Barbarians, the Barbarians could exchange captives for arms, armor, grain, and supplies from Chu. Now, after continuous crushing defeats and severe damage to various arms, as well as due to the disruption of production in their tribes, the Barbarians once again faced a grain crisis. Therefore, they urgently needed to trade with Chu for enough weapons and armor to equip their warriors for the struggle against Western Liang. They also needed a vast amount of food and fodder to feed the hungry tribes. Thus, those seven hundred thousand Zhou civilians were used as bargaining chips in trade with Chu. Regarding this, Lu Yuan had already sent a message to Sun Siwen, asking him to negotiate directly with Zhou. Although Chu State had recently acquired a vast amount of territory from Jiangdong and Lingnan, increasing the population by more than ten million, even so, many prefectures within the country were still sparsely populated and in urgent need of immigrants to fill the gaps. The Barbarians¡¯ willingness to bring in these seven hundred thousand Zhou people was precisely what Lu Yuan desired. Thus, he agreed to this trade. However, as sensible as the business was to engage in, when it came to the Barbarians¡¯ request to have Chu send troops to help them defeat Western Liang, Lu Yuan hesitated. After all, Western Liang was far from Chu and had no conflicts with it. Western Liang was also poor, with nothing much to offer in terms of money and with a limited population; the benefits that could be gained from attacking it were truly meager. Instead, it was a fierce opponent with strong military and brave generals, a stout adversary not unlike Chu in the past, and not one to be provoked lightly. So, there were naturally considerable debates within Chu regarding this request for aid. The spiritual woman before him was likely here for this reason, wishing to persuade Lu Yuan to aid her maternal tribe. Chapter 906 - Chapter 906 Chapter 382 Counterbalancing Helong, Disintegrating the Southwest ?Chapter 906: Chapter 382: Counterbalancing Helong, Disintegrating the Southwest Chapter 906: Chapter 382: Counterbalancing Helong, Disintegrating the Southwest The small pavilion was somewhat silent. After the Spirit Consort expressed her concern for the wellbeing of her tribal kinsmen, Lu Yuan had sunk into deep thought. Seeing this, the Spirit Consort knew that her husband was weighing the pros and cons. As a royal consort, she had already stretched her limits by subtly expressing her opinion. To further intrude and attempt to influence might provoke dissatisfaction, backfiring completely. Thus, she remained silent, quietly waiting. After a long period of contemplation, Lu Yuan exhaled deeply, rose, and walked to the pavilion window to gaze out towards the west, taking in the view beyond. The mountain valleys were shrouded in mist at this time, rendering the mountain ridge slightly blurred. The sun was high in the sky, casting a golden light that pierced through the fog and fell in front of the small pavilion, splendid and magnificent. Gazing at that sunshine, Lu Yuan felt a stirring in his heart and made a certain decision. He turned around, ¡°Regarding the aid for the Barbarians, I can agree to it. Hanzhong has a hundred thousand soldiers. In a few days¡¯ time, I¡¯ll select a general to lead the troops to assist Helong.¡± Upon hearing this, the Spiritual woman¡¯s heart leaped with joy, a smile breaking across her face as she gratefully bowed, ¡°This humble one thanks the great king on behalf of my people of the Snowy Wilds. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? The grace of Great Chu, my Barbarians shall never dare to forget.¡± Lu Yuan took two steps forward, helped the Spiritual woman to her feet, and reassured her, ¡°There¡¯s no need for such formalities. You and I are united in marriage, and now you carry my heir. It¡¯s only right to help resolve some troubles from your mother¡¯s home. Moreover, there¡¯s a treaty between Great Chu and the Snowy Wilderness, with several past collaborations. To support the Barbarians now is merely to act according to the treaty.¡± ¡°Great king¡­¡± The Spiritual woman looked at Lu Yuan, her face filled with emotion. Lu Yuan embraced her, saying nothing. Of course, his decision to help the Snow Plains Nomads was not solely motivated by personal affection, nor was it strictly due to the constraints of the treaty. What truly induced Lu Yuan to make this decision was the influence of the current situation. After some deliberation, he suddenly realized that if the barrier of the Barbarians in the northwest were removed, allowing Western Liang to seize Helong, it would undoubtedly become a massive hidden threat to Chu State. Western Liang was not like the Barbarians. Although the Snow Plains Nomads had a unified name and frequently launched joint military actions in recent years, appearing as a single entity, At their peak, they could even contend with empires like Zhou Country on the battlefield. Even now, despite their decline, to outsiders, the Snow Plains Nomads still appeared to be a formidable force capable of fielding tens of thousands of soldiers and possessing eight Inborn Grandmasters. But having grown close with the Snowy Wilds in recent years, and with a Spiritual woman in his harem, Lu Yuan knew the intricacies of the Snow Plains Nomads quite well. On the surface, the formidable Snow Plains Nomads were essentially made up of a military alliance of four major tribes and more than a dozen medium-sized tribes. Even the formation of this military alliance was the result of recent years¡¯ cold disasters, which forced them to unite for survival. Had there been no cold wave, the four great tribes and dozens of medium tribes would be embroiled in conflict with each other. In the tens of thousands of years of history of the Snowy Wilderness, the rise and fall of countless tribes have been marked by deaths and hatred. Just like the present four king tribes, before the coldwave, they did not refrained from skirmishing over grasslands and valleys. So, under the pressure of survival, the Snowy Wilds¡¯ Tribes could barely come together, aiming for outward expansion in the interest of survival. But should these tribes temporarily overcome their difficulties, the Snow Plains Nomads, unified as a whole, would naturally splinter due to past enmities into over two dozen smaller factions, becoming insignificant once again. If such a neighbor existed in the northwest, the frontier of Hanzhong in Chu State could indeed remain untroubled. They could even exploit the hatred between the various tribes of Snow Plains Nomads, playing one against the other, establishing Chu State¡¯s interests among the Barbarians, and reaping substantial benefits. However, if it was Western Liang that unified Helong, replacing the Snow Plains Nomads, the situation would be entirely different. Western Liang was a thoroughly established state, with complete systems of officials, laws, institutions, military, monarchy, culture, and all other aspects related to a nation. If they were to defeat the Barbarians and unify Helong, capturing the resources of these vast mountain regions, then a new hegemon would rise in the northwest of Chu. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Western Liang itself already had three commanderies, a population of over four million, and by subjugating the Barbarians, it could gain two more commanderies of Helong, as well as the remaining population of seven to eight million Barbarians. Even the snowy wilderness now controlled by the Barbarians could potentially fall under the control of Western Liang. Combining these two forces, a colossal entity boasting five to six commanderies, a population exceeding ten million, countless fine horses, a million soldiers, and over ten Inborn individuals, would rise in Yong West. This scenario, while not highly probable, had a fair chance of occurring. Before Western Liang, there lay a fine example to learn from. Indeed, this example was none other than Chu State. Before embarking on the campaign against the Southwest Barbarians, Chu State also had just an incomplete domain of three commanderies, a population of six million, with merely two Inborn Grandmasters. But after subjugating the Southwest Barbarians, Chu State suddenly expanded its territory to five commanderies and three vassal states, with eight Inborn Grandmasters and a population of ten million, securing the power of an empire. The current Western Liang, with conditions similar to those of Chu State back then, and even a stronger military and more Inborn Grandmasters, was also launching a campaign against the Barbarians of Helong. Chapter 907 - Chapter 907 Chapter 382 Counterbalancing Helong, Disintegrating the Southwest_2 ?Chapter 907: Chapter 382: Counterbalancing Helong, Disintegrating the Southwest_2 Chapter 907: Chapter 382: Counterbalancing Helong, Disintegrating the Southwest_2 If they managed to do that, wouldn¡¯t they just be creating another version of Chu State? How terrifying would another version of Chu State be? Just look at Ning Country, which is currently being beaten down, to understand the dangers involved. If Xichuan were to unify the Barbarians, then, driven by the cold waves and also in pursuit of more interests, their next step would inevitably be outward expansion. And in which directions might Xichuan expand? To the north, they¡¯ve amassed an army of over 400,000 at Shuofang County, occupied by Wei Country. To the east, they¡¯ve similarly gathered an army of 500,000 to 600,000, still in the county of Guannei, the capital of Zhou Country. To the southeast, they have only about 100,000 troops, and Chu State¡¯s Hanzhong County, where there is just one Inborn Grandmaster. Moreover, Shuofang and Guannei counties are precisely the battlefields of the two hegemonic states, with a million troops sawing back and forth in combat, increasingly devastating the land. Conversely. Hanzhong County has long been a place of peace, with a wealthy population and abundant money and grain. After capturing this place, they would open up a route to Xiangyang and Xichuan, two crucial sources of money and grain, seizing one could dominate the world. Furthermore, given Xichuan¡¯s origins as a small and remote country, like Chu State before it, they lack a profound foundation and have not caught the eye of any Immortal Sects. Therefore, it¡¯s highly likely they¡¯re also unaware of the truth behind the fall of the ¡°Four Extremities.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?0 At that time, Lu Yuan had grand ambitions and was sharpening his sword, eagerly eyeing the Southwest Barbarians, wanting to expand his territory there to flex his strength and enrich Chu¡¯s foundation, preparing for future clashes with Ning Country. It¡¯s natural, then, that Xichuan might harbor similar thoughts. First, they¡¯d avoid the two hegemonic states clashing in the counties of Guannei and Shuofang, so as not to get caught and attacked from both sides. Then, they would gather all the troops of the nation, integrate all resources, and compete with Chu Statea€¡±which also emerged recently and has insufficient foundationa€¡±for Hanzhong County, thus opening another route eastward. This is undoubtedly more feasible than directly fighting against both Zhou and Wei Countries. Fighting against one hegemon is always easier than battling two, with the added burden of another hegemon threatening your flank. Moreover, if Xichuan were to rise and truly contest with Chu State, Zhou and Wei Countries would probably be pleased to see the two powers behind them engaged in conflict, keeping them from interfering with their own war. All these speculations are highly likely to occur. Therefore, after Lu Yuan had just reviewed the situation in the northwest and reexamined the relationship between Xichuan and the Barbarians, he immediately became aware of the potential threat. Although he knew that the relationship between Xichuan and the Barbarians couldn¡¯t be compared with the past relations between Chu State and the Southwest Barbariansa€¡±and that it wouldn¡¯t be easy to replicate his own path to successa€¡± Regardless of the likelihood of their success, as long as there is a possibility, he must make every effort to contain it. Otherwise, the rise of a new hegemonic power in the northwest would undoubtedly affect the geopolitical situation in Yong State, impact Chu¡¯s interests in the northwest, and threaten the security of Hanzhong. Chu¡¯s future efforts would need to be focused on unifying Central State, and being dragged down by Xichuan would doubtlessly disrupt their plans. ¡°Xichuan must not be allowed to rise,¡± resolved Lu Yuan in his heart. a€| Having decided to prevent the rise of Xichuan, Lu Yuan¡¯s efficiency in handling matters was swift. Having agreed with the Spiritual woman, the next day he took out some more spiritual materials from storage, and after a bit of processing, he transformed two more Avatars. After his Cultivation breakthrough to Gathering Two Qi and becoming a Martial Arts Grandmaster, his Divine Soul¡¯s strength had increased by more than fourfold. That is to say, with the strength of his Divine Soul now, he could support the creation of eight Avatars, like Huang Xuan and Qingyunzi. And at present, aside from the four new Avatars brought by the two older Avatars, Lu Yuan had two more Avatar slots in hand. At a time when he was preparing to deploy military force in the northwest, there was naturally a need for a trustworthy individual with sufficient strength to lead the charge. Throughout the nation, the only ones capable of such a significant task were Lu Yuan himself and those Avatars. Therefore, to face the situation, he created two more Avatars, and named them Huang Xin and Qing Hezi. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? After creating the two Avatars, Lu Yuan appointed them as national advisors, then designated Huang Xin as the supervisor for the western three provinces, taking over Huang Xuan¡¯s previous position, managing all important state affairs in Great Chu¡¯s western borders. Great Chu¡¯s 200,000-strong army in the west, as well as the three Inborn Grandmasters, would all come under Huang Xin¡¯s jurisdiction. With these troops in the west, Huang Xin was more than capable of helping the Barbarians to contain Xichuan and ensure the motherland¡¯s interests in the northwest. As for whether an unknown individual like him could win people¡¯s conviction¡­ Lu Yuan had consecutively appointed four new Avatars as national advisors, and their names, similar to Huang Xuan and Qingyunzi, indicated such trust from Lu Yuan, the great king. So, with a few months of speculation, the people within Great Chu had long been discussing, and there were numerous speculations about their deep connection with Lu Yuan. Linking it to Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation of Immortal Technique, many clever individuals speculated that these might be wondrous methods of the Immortal Sect, that the king had used some unfathomable means to create a few individuals with an unbreakable master-servant bond. Whether Qingyunzi and others were the king¡¯s Avatars or some individuals controlled by the king was unknown to others. But regardless of which theory was true, everyone knew that these True Persons, whose names started with Huang and Qing, were certainly the king¡¯s confidants, and could even be considered as extensions of the king himself. Therefore, the people held these special True Persons in great reverence and respect and dared not underestimate them in the slightest. Chapter 908 - Chapter 908 Chapter 382 Counterbalancing Helong, Disintegrating the Southwest_3 ?Chapter 908: Chapter 382: Counterbalancing Helong, Disintegrating the Southwest_3 Chapter 908: Chapter 382: Counterbalancing Helong, Disintegrating the Southwest_3 Even though Huang Xin and Qing Hezi had just emerged and were previously unknown, their relationship with Lu Yuan meant that Huang Xin would have no trouble taking control of the three western prefectures. After the enfeoffment of Huang Xin was completed and the Letter of Tiger Symbol was transferred, along with the bestowal of the baton, Lu Yuan sent this Avatar off to take up his post in Hanzhong Prefecture. Upon appointing Huang Xin, Lu Yuan did not continue to indulge in the landscape¡¯s harem and lead a dissolute life again. Instead, he took advantage of the time dedicated to reorganizing government affairs to make some more arrangements. Now that he had created two Avatars, with Huang Xin appointed, naturally he could not let Qing Hezi remain idle. So, looking at the Mountain and River Map of Great Chu and focusing particularly on the missing corner of Yangzhou in the southwest, he made his decision. He appointed Qing Hezi as the Governor-General of the Southwest, with full authority over the military and government affairs of one prefecture and three nations, including oversight of the military in the Tonghai and Yulin prefectures, responsible for the subjugation of the remaining defiant nations in the southwest and for expanding the territory of Great Chu. Hmm, the target for this Avatar was the Southwest, Lingnan, and the three nations of Nanzhao, Dali, and Song, which were still outside the Chu State system. Now within Yangzhou, besides the two prefectures of Jiangdong occupied by Ning Country, it was only these three areas of the Southwest and Lingnan that were not under Chu State¡¯s jurisdiction. Although Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t very interested in the remote lands of these three nations, the future of the Nine Provinces lies in Central State after all. But that did not prevent him from smoothly subjugating these three nations and incorporating them into the Chu State system. ¡°The three nations of the Southwest, when combined, are strong and robust. But the military forces of the three prefectures and three nations of the Southwest and Lingnan might be insufficient. I¡¯ll allocate two more Forbidden armies from the Pengli main camp to serve as your personal troops to bolster your might,¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Nanzhao, Dali, and Song Country each have over two million people and can field one hundred thousand elite troops. By drafting civilian workers, they could cobble together an army of six to seven hundred thousand. It¡¯s not impossible. As for Inborn Grandmasters, in recent years, owing to the pressure from Chu State, both Nanzhao and Dali have accelerated their cultivation of talent, tapping into their ressources. Consequently, both nations have added an Inborn in recent years. Therefore, within Nanzhao Country, the secular have two Inborns and one High Priest. Inside Dali Country there are three secular Inborns and one High Priest. Song Country also has one Inborn. These three nations combined have about the land of six prefectures, seven million people, can field three hundred thousand elite troops and civilian workers totaling five to six hundred thousand, and they have eight Inborns. It can be said that, were it not for the fact that they are divided into different factions and split into three, if combined together, they could be regarded as a small hegemonic state. However, now that Chu State is preparing to take action against these three nations, with the external pressure forcing them, it¡¯s uncertain whether they will unite like the Snow Plains Nomads did, driven by the pressure for survival. If that happens, the forces from the three prefectures and three nations adjacent to the Southwest and Lingnan might indeed be insufficient. After all, the combined forces of Chu State in the three prefectures of Qianzhong, Tonghai, and Yulina€¡±being the Forbidden army, the county soldiers, and the prefectures and counties soldiersa€¡±are only about two hundred thousand in total. Including Qing Hezi, they have only four Inborn Grandmasters. As for the three vassal countries of Jianchuan, Chilih, and Kunhai, with their narrow lands and few people, they can muster a maximum of one hundred thousand elite troops combined. Yet they can provide three Inborn Grandmasters. Therefore, the total military forces Chu State can mobilize in the Southwest and Lingnan include about three hundred thousand regular elite troops and around seven Inborn Grandmasters. Such strength is not significantly superior to the three countries of Nanzhao, Dali, and Song. In light of this, it was very necessary to strengthen the local forces from the central side. However, Lu Yuan¡¯s own military resources were also limited; he could only support Qing Hezi with two Forbidden armies, totalling forty thousand men. But with the elite nature of Chu¡¯s army, these forty thousand troops would be a substantial aid. ¡°Whether they submit and pay tribute, becoming vassal states like Kunhai and Chilih, or we directly annihilate them and establish prefectures and counties, both are acceptable.¡± Lu Yuan added a few more words to his own Avatar, Qing Hezi. He had no strong attachment to the southwestern region. As long as they formally respected Great Chu, were obedient to Great Chu¡¯s military dispatches, and integrated their Qi Luck with that of Great Chu, serving him, that was sufficient. Lu Yuan only wanted the nominal recognition and Qi Luck, along with the tribute of money and grain from those vassal states. He was not insistent on the destruction of these nations. Therefore, if these three nations could readily submit, then keeping three dogs was not an issue. Moreover, by doing so, if the national fortunes of these three countries could be guaranteed, Chu State might not necessarily have to resort to military action. They could directly leverage the rising national power of Great Chu and the military threat to make the three nations submit and dissolve their unity. If it¡¯s possible to avoid war, it¡¯s better not to fight. The three nations of the Southwest were not soft persimmons that one could mold at will. Chu State had just decided to recover and recuperate; if possible, Lu Yuan did not want to spend money and grain to start a war of annihilation involving hundreds of thousands of people. Of course, if the three nations of the Southwest were really determined to resist stubbornly, Lu Yuan would not retreat. The troops of the three prefectures and three nations under Qing Hezi¡¯s jurisdiction were prepared for those rebels. In the future, Chu State was set to deploy troops northward to compete for Central State. This grand plan was bound to gather all the manpower and resources of Jiangnan to support the Northern Expedition. At that time, Lu Yuan would not tolerate having several large forces to his rear that were outside his control and independent of Great Chu. The three nations of the Southwest must either submit or be destroyed; there was no third option. ¡°I understand,¡± responded Qing Hezi, nodding his head. As an Avatar, his consciousness originated from Lu Yuan; their minds were one and the same, so he could naturally comprehend the intentions of his original self. And precisely because he was an Avatar, he was the best assistant to implement the policies of the original, ensuring that Lu Yuan¡¯s ideas, once put into effect at lower levels, would not deviate or go awry. ¡°Go ahead,¡± Lu Yuan said, waving his hand. Between the original body and the Avatar, there was unity, so there was no need for such cumbersome formalities. Seeing that his original had nothing else to say, Qing Hezi didn¡¯t linger and left straight away. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Watching his departing figure, Lu Yuan fell into deep thought for a moment. If nothing unexpected happened, this year, that is, the whole twelfth year of Shenwu Era, the focus of Great Chu, in addition to the planned assimilation project, would revolve around the War of Helong and the Second War of Conquerors. ¡°Let¡¯s hope everything goes smoothly,¡± Lu Yuan mused to himself. Chapter 909 - Chapter 909 Chapter 383 Liang Country Monarch and Ministers ?Chapter 909: Chapter 383 Liang Country Monarch and Ministers Chapter 909: Chapter 383 Liang Country Monarch and Ministers Yue Country, the grand city of Liang. Since Emperor Hua Guang became the first Human Emperor, he chose to establish the capital in the grand city of Liang, governing Central State and uniting the barbarians of all around, initiating an era of prosperity. However, during the ancient times, Immortals and gods coexisted with mortals. The dominant force in the world of the Nine Provinces was not those tiny mortals, but rather those Immortals who possessed extraordinary power and could move mountains and drain seas. Therefore, the so-called Human Emperor of that time was nothing more than the common ruler who had subjugated all the Immortals and received recognition from all Cultivators. The Three Emperors of ancient times ruled only over Immortals and didn¡¯t directly govern mortals. They were emperors of the Immortals, not of the mortals. And Immortals and Cultivators, for the sake of cultivation, often resided in Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens, where Spiritual Energy was abundant. Such places were often found in deep mountains and vast marshes, far from the plains. Thus, during the ancient times, the Three Emperors and Cultivators cared little for the governance of mundane mortals, allowing things to take their own course, unfazed. It was for this reason that, other than Central State, the development of the territories of the other Nine Provinces only began nearly two or three thousand years ago, when Spiritual Energy started to deplete rapidly and the Immortals went into hiding. Just as more than two thousand years ago, the Coastal Aristocratic Family in the southern Yangzhou, set their capital in Jinling, and from this stronghold, they slowly developed the southern lands. Similarly, Yong State, Ji Province, Xuzhou, and other regions followed suit. From this, one can see how prosperous Central State, which had been developed for tens of thousands of years, must be. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï And how mighty the ancient Imperial Capital of Liang, at the core of Central State, must be. Indeed, this was the case. The grand city of Liang, located to the south of the great river, surrounded by water on three sides, irrigated over a million acres of fertile fields, sustaining tens of millions of citizens. Among all the provinces in the Nine Provinces, Qingzhou has always been at the forefront, and Liang, having occupied the entirety of Qingzhou, naturally became the most formidable state among the Nine Provinces. Since the seventh year of the Shenwu era, when Lai State was conquered and Qingzhou unified, the country of Liang has focused not on warfare but on consolidating internal governance, recuperating and increasing Inner Strength. Now, six years later, with Liang¡¯s thorough governance, the newly acquired territories of the five prefectures in eastern Qingzhou have already aligned their loyalties and have begun to produce large amounts of money and Tribute, flowing westward into the grand city of Liang. And from all corners of the earth, Merchants and Travelers from every region of the Nine Provinces have been transporting goods towards this central city of the world. The grand city of Liang, which amassed the wealth of the world, and Liang which possessed this city, thereby radiated its influence throughout the world. Just like at this moment, the Monarch and Ministers inside the grand city of Liang held a meeting regarding the changes to Liang¡¯s west and south. The Liang Imperial Palace. Inside the Chamber of Political Governance, the Liang Emperor sat at the head, while the Group of Ministers were seated in two rows below him, each with documents and memorials before them, their expressions solemn. ¡°Noble ministers, Wei is currently pressed by Zhou, and the city of Chang¡¯an hears alarms daily, the sound of warfare ceaseless. Similarly, the Zhao people have mustered their troops in Henan, a three hundred thousand strong army drilling day and night, massively building warships, training the navy. Upon the great river, it¡¯s all Zhao boat shadows. Their coveting of Henan is widely known to all. Facing such circumstances, Zhou is surrounded by enemies on all sides, and internally, after seven years of military conscription, with soldiers and casualties in the millions, the people are burdened by Tribute and worn out from travel, displaced and homeless. Scenes like this hint at the inevitable decline of the nation. In my view, it seems Zhou might not be able to hold onto Henan and Nanyang much longer. My ministers, what are your thoughts? Should our great Liang make a move, muster troops westward, and seize these two prefectures, lest they fall into the hands of Wei, Zhao, and Chu? It would also serve to shield our western borders of Liang and secure our frontiers.¡± The voice of the Liang Emperor resonated with authority and solemnity, carrying an immense self-confidence and assurance, as if even against the three great powers of Wei, Zhao, and Chu, there was no trace of fear. Outsiders might view this as somewhat presumptuous. But those who understood the current Liang Emperor knew that this was far from arrogance, in fact, it was rather humble. The Liang Emperor, now forty-two, had ascended the throne twenty-two years before; from the beginning of his reign, he led military expeditions year after year, conquering the reaches of the North and South. At the start of his reign, he embarked on the Southern Expedition against Yue Country in Yangzhou, engaged in years of warfare, and ultimately compelled Yue Country to cede the three prefectures north of the Yangtze and submit to Liang, bringing the great power of Jiangnan to its knees. After subduing Yue Country, the Liang Emperor spent less than a year in respite before leading an army eastward to conquer the states of the East Sea in Qingzhou, wiping out several small nations and establishing the East Sea Prefecture. Immediately afterward, he marched north to campaign against Lai State, and after several years, even under the intervention of Xu State, the northern powerhouse, he eliminated this two-prefecture giant in northeast Qingzhou, completely removing the stumbling block to his unification of Qingzhou. Subsequently, this fact was proven. With Lai State out of the way, the various smaller states in eastern Qingzhou did not last two years before they were one by one eradicated and converted into prefectures by Liang. Up to the present, the entirety of Liang encompasses fifteen prefectures, becoming the solitary nation in Qingzhou, truly the paramount power in Central State. Out of these fifteen prefectures of Liang, a full five were conquered by the current Liang Emperor himself. With such prestige, such accomplishments, in addition to consecutive victories against several overlords and Liang¡¯s current strong national power, naturally, he had the authority to speak such words. Because he was, in truth, a great Martial Emperor. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï To expand the empire is to be martial. ¡°Your Majesty, the unification of Qingzhou has already made the other nations of the world wary, viewing us with guarded hostility. Moreover, we already occupy half of Central State¡¯s territory, which, to the rest of the world, is significantly substantial. We already hold in our hands half of the future gains of the world. Excess leads to spillover, and too much is as bad as not enough. Merely unifying Qingzhou has led the two nations to the North, Zhao and Xu, and the two nations to the south, Chu and Ning, to all watch us like tigers eyeing their prey, coveting the land of Qingzhou.¡± Chapter 910 - Chapter 910 Chapter 383 Liang Country Monarch and Ministers_2 ?Chapter 910: Chapter 383 Liang Country Monarch and Ministers_2 Chapter 910: Chapter 383 Liang Country Monarch and Ministers_2 ¡°If we seize Henan and Nanyang at this time, the Zhou and Wei in the west would probably cease fighting immediately and turn their troops eastward,¡± he mused. Among the group of ministers below, the famed general of Liang, Lord Changyi Yang Chen, noticed his emperor¡¯s covetous thoughts towards the two provinces of Henan and Nanyang and wished to dispatch troops to attack. He immediately stood up to advise, ¡°Our great Liang alone occupies one province, and that is the strongest in the world. However, even the strongest country cannot withstand the entirety of the Nine Provinces with only one province¡¯s lands. In the lands surrounding our great Liang: to the north, Zhao occupies Ji Province, Xu State holds Xuzhou; to the west, Zhou Country controls Yongzhou; to the south, Chu State has Yangzhou; and to the east, Zheng Kingdom commands Yuzhou. At the same time, the Wei Country in the northern Yan State has also started to push south in great force, seeking to advance into the heartland of Central State. All six of these countries are the rulers of one province each and can mobilize a million strong troops within their borders. If these four kingdoms were to unite, they could, with just a slight mobilization, produce an army between three to five million to attack our Liang. Although our great Liang is strong, after years of recovery and growth, our population has only increased to just over sixty million, and our military strength is a mere three million. Such strength, though formidable, is far from enough to allow a single country to oppose the world. The reason the other countries have not united against Liang to date is simply because Zhou is exhausted by the barbarians and the Wei people, Chu Ning is vying for dominance in Jiangnan, and Zhao and Xu to the north have troubles with the Hu. Zheng Kingdom, located in Central State and bordered by various coveting states, is too preoccupied to spare any attention. All these countries have their troubles and cannot afford to be concerned with our country. Now, however, Zhou is on the brink of destruction by Wei, the Chu people have almost united Jiangnan, and Zhao and Xu have stabilized their northern borders. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.?¦Ï Around our country of Liang, there are already four countries that can spare the effort to involve themselves in the affairs of Qingzhou. The reason they have not acted immediately is nothing more than the fear in their hearts of our country¡¯s might, as they cannot contend against our great Liang with the strength of one country alone. However, as they develop closer ties and coordinate more closely, sooner or later they will be able to form alliances and organize a united army to attack our country. Therefore, at this time, the primary concern for our country should not be to seize the last piece of Central State territory in Henan and Nanyang provinces. Doing so would provoke the nearby countries and expedite their unification to attack our country. What our great Liang needs to do is to strongly support Zhou Country so that they can hold back the Wei Country from the north, which is advancing south with great momentum. Wei Country occupies ten provinces, with a population of over thirty million. The country can bring to bear two million troops. In addition, they have the full support of the Divine Sword Sect, with more than twenty Inborn Grandmasters in the country. Looking at all the countries in the world, Wei is second only to our country of Liang. If they were to swallow Zhou, the power of Wei would grow even further, and they would span two provinces with more influence than our great Liang. By then, if the Wei people march westward, they might be able to contend with our great Liang on their own. This indeed poses the most terrifying threat our great Liang has ever faced in its history. Therefore, to prevent such a situation from arising, we must stop Wei¡¯s southward movement and block it in the northwest, preventing it from bordering our land. Fortunately, the Zhou people have grown weary and their national power weakened. They¡¯re on the verge of losing their status as overlords, their strength is not what it once was, and they no longer pose a threat to our western borders. Despite Zhou¡¯s weakness, they still have a population of ten million, an army of one million, and seven Inborn Grandmasters. Such strength is insufficient for conquest, but more than enough for defense. Should they focus solely on defense, they would still be able to hold off Wei. Even the northern country of Zhao could be restrained by Zhou to a degree, preventing them from dedicating full strength towards the south and becoming an enemy of our Liang. With the assistance of our country, Zhou could secure its grip on Nanyang and Henan provinces, ensuring a path of retreat for the future and the safekeeping of their dynasty. Such grace would undoubtedly make them feel grateful and henceforth depend closely on our Liang, serving as our shield. Thus, I believe it is better to support a weakened Zhou Country, allowing it to become a vassal to our great Liang, guarding our western territory and blocking the threat from Wei,¡± surmised Yang Chen, offering his detailed analysis to the Emperor of Liang. After listening to Yang Chen¡¯s lengthy discourse, the Emperor of Liang pondered for a moment before finally nodding slowly, ¡°Lord Changyi speaks wisely. Our great Liang currently occupies half of Central State, already at an advantage over other countries. To covet Henan and Nanyang further, even if we succeed, would not significantly benefit us, but rather incite the ire of the other states. On the contrary, aiding Zhou would provide us with a barrier in the west to thwart Wei¡¯s threat and restrain the power of Zhao, which could be even more beneficial to our great Liang.¡± Speaking thus, the Emperor looked toward a man below and commanded, ¡°Minister Zhang, after this, you, along with Lord Changyi and officials from the Household and Military Departments, should discuss how to aid Zhou. Once you have formulated a plan, select a suitable messenger and report to me. Dispatch this envoy to Zhou to negotiate an alliance between our two countries.¡± ¡°Yes,¡± responded Zhang Kai, the minister of the Honglu Temple, as he immediately rose to comply. Having settled the matter of Zhou, the Emperor surveyed the assembly and continued, ¡°That settles Zhou¡¯s affairs; our great Liang shall ally with Zhou to serve as a barrier to the frontier. With Zhou in place, we can ensure the security of our western borders. However, the northern countries of Zhao and Xu, as well as Chu to the south, have also been expanding in recent years. Zhao has conquered the three Hu tribes in the north, acquired a cavalry force of a million, and expanded by two provinces. Zhao now controls nine provinces, with a population exceeding twenty million, sixteen Inborn Grandmasters, and an armed force of one million and five hundred thousand, becoming a powerful state in Hebei. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Although Xu State has not expanded its territory, in recent years it has been trading overseas and supplementing state funds through commerce. Through these means, not only has the state treasury greatly increased, but Xu State has also enticed a large number of tribes from Xuzhou to become its people, swiftly bolstering its population. Consequently, despite being only six provinces in size, Xu¡¯s population has reached twenty million. Its lands boast vast fertile fields, prosperous trades and commerce, and it stands as one of the wealthiest among all nations. With these accumulated wealth and resources, Xu State has raised an army of a million and has twelve Inborn Grandmasters. It is not to be underestimated.¡± Chapter 911 - Chapter 911 Chapter 383 Liang Country Monarch and Ministers_3 ?Chapter 911: Chapter 383 Liang Country Monarch and Ministers_3 Chapter 911: Chapter 383 Liang Country Monarch and Ministers_3 The state of Chu in the south defeated Ning Country last year, and it is only a matter of a few years before they could unify Yangzhou. At that time, it will be, after my Liang State, the second one to fully control an entire province. Considering the wealth of Yangzhou, even though it has been ravaged by wars in recent years and the local areas have become impoverished, there should still be a population of thirty to forty million people left. After several years of recovery, they could potentially raise an army of two to three million. And their Inborn Generals, more than twenty-five in number, far surpass those of other countries. King of Chu, Lu Yuan, a famous world general, single-handedly built this vast foundation, and he himself is rumored to practice both immortal and martial arts, with strength comparable to Immortal Dao Sect Lords. With such national strength and such a wise monarch, if we do not control them early, I fear our southern border in Great Liang will be plagued with unending flames of war.¡± When Emperor of Liang mentioned Chu State and Lu Yuan, his face showed an unmistakable dread. In the midst of the Nine Provinces, Chu State has always been a very special existence. This specialty does not lie in its system, culture, or customs. It is because Chu State is the only one among the great powers of the Nine Provinces that¡¯s recently established by commoners and has rapidly grown to its current status. The other great powers of the Nine Provinces all have profound and noble origins, like Ning Country, governed by aristocratic families with deep roots. Therefore, aristocratically governed states like Liang, Zhou, and others naturally feel dread and hostility towards a nation like Chu State, which emerged from humble origins and places significant trust in people of lower social strata, resembling nouveau riche states. Of course. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã0 No matter how declined Nine Provinces may be, it is still barely considered part of the Immortal Cultivation World, where strength is respected above all. Thus, facing the powerful strength of Chu State, regardless of what they think inside, other countries still maintained respect and amity on the surface, not foolish enough to provoke without reason. Even Ning Country, which was severely defeated by Chu State, sees its coastal aristocratic families still acting subserviently when it is called for, and betraying without any hesitation when necessary. But it¡¯s precisely because of this. Facing a commoner-risen Chu State and a vast foundation established through military strength, the alertness of the people is unprecedentedly strong. Especially in recent years, with the numerous rumors about King of Chu, Lu Yuan, spreading far and wide. Saying he has been undefeated in battle since he emerged, earning him the reputation of a famous world general. That his personal divine powers are incredible, practicing both immortal and martial arts, with five Inborns falling at his hands, claiming the most Inborn lives in the world. That the Princesses from Chu State¡¯s Qing and Huang sects, these cultivators who suddenly appeared, are rumored to be closely related to Lu Yuan, perhaps even his avatars. Such rumors have indeed attracted countless people¡¯s attention and fear. Furthermore, with the consecutive victories Chu State has achieved in recent years, and its current national strength, Emperor of Liang long ago regarded Chu as his greatest enemy. Now that he has formally brought it up, the goal is to gather wisdom and find a way for the group of ministers to counterbalance this threat. And upon hearing what the Emperor of Liang said, the ministers couldn¡¯t help but frown in thought, whispering to one another, and a lively discussion ensued. Indeed, the problems of the northern and southern borders urgently need to be addressed by Liang State, and action must be taken without delay. After much discussion, it was Lord Changyi, Yang Chen, who stood up to express everyone¡¯s thoughts: ¡°Your Majesty, Zhao and Xu States of the Northern Border have gradually stabilized their northern territories over the years, yet the threat of the northern Hu Lu has not been eliminated. Driven by cold currents, the Hu Lu Yi Di from the three provinces and three regions of the Northern Land are all migrating south in droves. That¡¯s why in recent years, Zhao and Xu have had no choice but to engage in great wars against the numerous Hu Lu Yi Di at their borders. However, Zhao State has taken to expanding its territory and moving its borders north for sufficient strategic depth to ensure the peace of the northern frontier. Whereas Xu State has lured the Hu Lu Yi Di with money and grain, integrating them as citizens to strengthen its national power. But with the population of the Hu Lu Yi Di in the northern three provinces and three regions numbering in the hundreds of millions, how could these two countries eliminate or recruit them all? Now, each spring and autumn, millions of Hu Lu Yi Di move southward, harassing the border of the two countries. To defend against the Hu Lu Yi Di, both countries station hundreds of thousands of troops at their northern borders and dispatch renowned generals to ensure internal security. In such a situation, even if these two countries wished to advance southward and attack our Liang State. ?¦Ï??0.?¦Ï they would be unable to exert their full strength. Do you not see that even the powerful Wei State, in its several southern expeditions against Zhou Country, only ever managed to mobilize four to five hundred thousand troops and five to six Inborns at a time? And Zhao Xu is far inferior to Wei Country. In my view, based on the current situation of the two countries, Zhao¡¯s southern advance could at most involve an army of five or six hundred thousand, with five or six Inborns. Xu¡¯s southern advance could at most involve three to four hundred thousand troops, with three to four Inborns. Together, the two countries would have less than a million soldiers, and fewer than ten Inborns. With such strength, our Liang State need only deploy a million soldiers in the Northern Border and station ten Inborns to be worry-free. As for Chu State¡­¡± Yang Chen paused, his eyebrows slightly furrowed, and with a more serious tone he said, ¡°Chu is a formidable enemy, and King Lu Yuan is unfathomable. Against such an enemy, I believe we should not take the initiative to attack, but rather prioritize defense. However, while we should not send out troops, we need to put our all into halting Chu State¡¯s current expansion. I propose that we follow the example of Zhou Country and support Jiangnan¡¯s Ning Country to restrain Chu State. To my knowledge, Jiangnan¡¯s Ning Country, with full support from Purple Cloud Dao, still has as many as thirteen Inborn Grandmasters, and five to six hundred thousand troops. This strength is even stronger than Zhou Country, only slightly weaker in terms of military force. If Great Liang can provide financial aid to Ning Country, helping them recruit sufficient troops and providing support from the north, stationing formidable forces to intimidate Chu State. Then the Ning people will surely be inspired, and Chu people will be alarmed, forced to confront us with a significant army. In this way, the forces they can use to unify Jiangdong will be greatly reduced. With Ning Country¡¯s power and momentum significantly bolstered by our support, they will desperately resist the Chu. By adopting this two-pronged strategy, Chu¡¯s unification of Jiangdong will be indefinitely postponed. And without Jiangdong unified and Yangzhou not consolidated into one, with Ning Country as a significant threat right beside them, how can Chu dare to embark on a northern expedition? With our Liang State¡¯s heavy forces stationed in the north and a tightly defended border, Chu will have no opportunity and can thus be effectively contained to the south of the Great River. In this manner, by holding out for a hundred years or so, until the four poles are ruined and Chu State¡¯s foundations are destroyed, they will no longer pose a threat.¡± This Lord Changyi, Yang Chen, seemed to have learned from the lessons of Ning Country. His strategy against Chu State was extremely cautious and measured. Chapter 912 - Chapter 912 Chapter 384 Nine Provinces Ascension ?Chapter 912: Chapter 384 Nine Provinces Ascension Chapter 912: Chapter 384 Nine Provinces Ascension The waves surged, extending into a deep blue expanse. The fishy smell of the sea breeze blew over, and Mo Li stood at the bow, his face etched with the traces of wind and frost. He gazed at the unchanging waters in the distance, and at the several dozen ships floating upon the sea, his eyes filled with deep concern. It had already been a year and a half since they had set out to sea, sailing against the waves. Along the way, they didn¡¯t know how many storms, thunderstorms, and whirlpools they had encountered. At one point, they even experienced a great cold wave where a thousand miles of sea surface in one region froze into an ice field, trapping their fleet in a world of ice and snow for half a year, unable to move. Under extreme cold, even though they were cultivators with magic power at their disposal, the closer they approached the North Pole, the colder Heaven and Earth became. In the face of the chill exhaling from the entirety of the world, even cultivators found it difficult to resist. The horror of the cold wave was even more perilous than initially estimated, their supplies were consumed faster than expected, and their effect was much more limited. Having set out to sea for no more than half a year and then being blocked on a frozen sea for another half, the cold-resistant supplies that the fleet brought were consumed by over eighty percent, despite being only halfway through their journey. Yet even so, the items they had prepared to ward off the cold were insufficient to completely resist the chill. Under the bone-chilling cold, capable of extinguishing life, many cultivators had no choice but to mobilize the magic power within their bodies to keep warm, and in times of even harsher conditions, they had to utilize their magic power to dispel the cold. However, by doing so, while the cold was temporarily dispelled, the magic power within the cultivators depleted rapidly. And there they were at sea, adrift without anchor, where no Cave World existed for the cultivators to absorb Spiritual Energy and recover their magic power. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Therefore, for them, every bit of magic power used was a bit less they had. To contend with the cold wave, many cultivators with lower Cultivation had completely expended their magic power. But even so, under the prolonged half-year chill of the Northern Sea, a large number of cultivators still failed to last until the sea thawed. They silently perished amidst the cold. Fortunately, now that winter had passed, they had finally survived until the late spring when the sea thawed and the sea routes were once again navigable, allowing the fleet to continue towards the Northern Dark City. ¡°The path to immortality is indeed fraught with difficulties¡­¡± Mo Li sighed, feeling lost and aimless in his heart. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? Initially, fellow Daoists from the Nine Provinces had set out to sea together, with dozens of ships and over two hundred cultivators accompanying the journey. Yet now, before the fleet even reached the Northern Dark City, more than half had already been lost, and over twenty cultivators perished. Their Feishuang Tao had also left a disciple forever in the midst of the sea. Whenever Mo Li thought of the deceased disciple, his heart ached with unbearable sorrow. It is known that amongst the seventeen Immortal Sects within the Nine Provinces, their Feishuang Tao is of the lowest rank. In their sect, from top to bottom, there were no more than seven cultivators; now, with one dead, it was as if they had lost one-seventh of their foundation, regardless of the Cultivation level. Such a loss, how could it not bring pain to his heart. ¡°Mo Li Daoist friend, are you surveying our course?¡± At that moment, a gentle voice came from behind, and a figure arrived beside Mo Li. Without turning around, Mo Li already knew who it was and replied with a bitter tone, ¡°The Northern Sea is treacherous, Youdu hard to reach. True Xuan Daoist friend, the sea is boundless, and though we can roughly estimate our position using the stars, it¡¯s hard to pinpoint our exact location. Since the sea routes have thawed, we¡¯ve been sailing for several more months. Now, we only know that we are getting closer and closer to the Northern Dark City, but exactly how close we are, nobody can say for certain. If we continue to drift for another two or three months, and the next round of cold waves arrives, I fear we may lose several hundred fellow Daoists again.¡± Mo Li appeared very pessimistic. The further north we go, the more extreme the weather becomes. When we first set out to sea, the cold winter only reached us in October; even when we were drifting in the East Sea, the sea surface didn¡¯t freeze, and it was still possible to sail. Although winter was somewhat cold, we easily got through it thanks to the supplies we prepared. But as soon as we left the region of the East Sea and entered the Northern Sea, everything changed. Last winter, it came upon the Northern Sea in the middle of September, only retreating at the end of March. It lasted for more than half a year. And the severity of the cold in the Northern Sea far exceeds that of the East Sea. Just one winter, and over twenty cultivators froze to death at sea. Now they are continuing northward. The closer to the North Pole they get, the more fearsome the approaching cold waves naturally are. It is now May, and according to this trend, perhaps the winter at the North Pole will arrive in July or August. And this winter is sure to be even colder and more unbearable than when we first entered the Northern Sea, lasting even longer. By then, out of the hundred or so cultivators remaining in the fleet, who knows how many will survive. ¡®If half could be fortunate enough to survive, that would be good.¡¯ Mo Li thought bitterly. It must be said that when the cultivators from the Nine Provinces gathered together, vowing to undertake Ascension together, they were as spirited as they are now despondent and hopeless. After enduring the baptism of a cold wave, many cultivators have woken from the beautiful dream of Ascension, confronting the harsh reality. Ascension is not something easily sought after. Youdu is not a place easily reached. Whether this group of people can safely arrive at Youdu, how many can make it to Youdu, and whether Youdu can be activated normally upon arrival as it was explored several years ago, all these are uncertain. ¡°Mo Li Daoist friend, according to the records and the confirmation from the Dao friends who last went to explore Youdu, we have indeed reached the vicinity of the Northern Dark City. Chapter 913 - Chapter 913 Chapter 384 Nine Provinces Ascension_2 ?Chapter 913: Chapter 384 Nine Provinces Ascension_2 Chapter 913: Chapter 384 Nine Provinces Ascension_2 ¡°As long as we delve deeper into this sea area, we are bound to find the land of Youdu.¡± ¡°Once we reactivate the Formation Method, we can ascend to the Immortal Realm along the ancient path of the celestial sages.¡± Zhen Xuan looked at Mo Li¡¯s disheartened demeanor and couldn¡¯t help but knit his eyebrows in concern. Previously, when in Yangzhou, Purple Cloud Dao and Feishuang Tao were rivals, often engaged in overt contention and covert plotting. Even when it came to supporting the Worldly Dynasties, one chose Ning while the other chose Chu, clashing fiercely on the battlefield, utterly incompatible like fire and water. But all of these were merely choices made for the sake of preserving and passing down the Sect¡¯s Inheritance. Aside from that, between the two sects, the disciples didn¡¯t really harbor much enmity toward each other. So once the inheritance arrangements from their sects were settled, they put everything aside and, for the sake of their own Dao pursuits, they joined in setting out to the sea together, heading to Northern Dark City to seek Ascension to the Immortal Realm. The relationship between the disciples of Feishuang Tao and Purple Cloud Dao warmed up rapidly from there. Not only did they Call as Brothers and Fellow Daoists, but they also supported each other in times of difficultya€¡±indeed, they were as close as family, no different from having come from the same sect. The reason behind such a scene was simple: they all hailed from Yangzhou and shared the camaraderie of being fellow townsmen. And though there had been previous conflicts, it was precisely because of them that the two sects had grown familiar over ten thousand years, knowing each other inside out. With these factors in play, and without having established deadly feuds, they became the best of natural allies. By contrast, those cultivators from other provinces, who had little past interaction with one¡¯s own, naturally had a much lower degree of trust. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã0 Between Immortal Sects, there are contradictions and entanglements, too. When contending for certain interests, affiliations inevitably form to secure more advantages. Take the simplest example. If now we fail to reach Northern Dark City smoothly and the fleet faces another winter, with eighty percent of the cold-resistant supplies used up, leaving not enough for everyone, one must decide who to abandon. Who to give up, which side to sacrifice more, who gets more supplies and such questions will then depend on the strength of the parties and their connections behind the scenes. Therefore, even if just for survival, the Feishuang Tao and Purple Cloud Dao, both from Yangzhou, have no choice but to join forces, uniting more strength to secure more benefits for themselves. Thus, seeing Mo Li so dejected, Zhen Xuan naturally felt discontent and had to speak up reassuringly, to prevent the entirety of Feishuang Tao from being demoralized. If that happened, their Yangzhou Camp would be left with only Purple Cloud Dao, which would then be at a significant disadvantage in the struggle against other powers. This was something Zhen Xuan could not tolerate. ¡°True Xuan Dao friends, do not worry. Since we have already decided to ascend to the north, I will not shy away from the journey after we set sail. This expedition will either lead us to Youdu where we all can Ascend together, or we will all be buried in the vast sea. There is no second outcome.¡± Mo Li knew what Zhen Xuan was worried about, but now that they had reached this point, even if he wanted to turn back to the Nine Provinces, he didn¡¯t have enough supplies. So the only choice left for these cultivators from the Nine Provinces was to find Northern Dark City and then ascend. Otherwise, they would wait for the cold tides to erode them, exhausting their magic powers, and freeze to death. ¡°If Fellow Daoist can think like this, I¡­¡± Zhen Xuan saw that Mo Li understood the stakes and hadn¡¯t lost his senses, feeling relieved. He was about to say a few more words when suddenly, a burst of cheering came from the vanguard ship, interrupting him. ¡°What¡¯s happening up ahead?¡± Mo Li also heard the commotion and paused, immediately turning with Zhen Xuan to listen intently. ¡°We are here, we have arrived.¡± ¡°Up ahead is the Sea of Beiming. Can you see it!¡± ¡°That massive glacier is where Youdu is located. The Formation Method is right above it.¡± ¡°We¡¯ve finally arrived, sob¡­ Ascension¡­¡± ¡°I might survive this.¡± These excited voices traveled from the front. Upon hearing these words, both Mo Li and Zhen Xuan turned to each other, their faces reflecting shared ecstasy and excitement. Just then, the ship they were on caught up to the position of the vanguard ship, opening up their line of sight and giving them a clear view of a massive glacier island in the distance, covered in snow and with hints of an eerie blue amidst the white, standing before the ships. ¡°Youdu, we are finally here¡­¡± Mo Li murmured as he gazed upon the magnificent and awe-inspiring glacier, a marvel of nature. Zhen Xuan, meanwhile, was already calling to his fellow disciples, urging them to hasten the ship in order to catch up with the rest of the elated fleet heading for their longed-for destination: Youdu. The way of life was right before them, Ascension was right before them, the Great Dao was right before them. Under the immense allure, not a single Cultivator wanted to remain in this damned sea any longer; they all just wanted to quickly get ashore and embrace a bright future. With more than a hundred Cultivators working together, the speed of the twenty-odd ships increased significantly. ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï After more than an hour, the fleet finally reached the northern part of Youdu. ¡°This is the place of Youdu?¡± As Mo Li disembarked from the ship and set foot on the glacier, even with thick boots separating him, he could still feel a piercing coldness seeping up from the ground. Furthermore, the dense cold air formed a relentless wind on the glacier, brushing past people and penetrating their clothing without a place to hide, boring into their bodies. Chapter 914 - Chapter 914 Chapter 384 Nine Provinces Ascension_3 ?Chapter 914: Chapter 384 Nine Provinces Ascension_3 Chapter 914: Chapter 384 Nine Provinces Ascension_3 Only a few breaths had passed, and Mo Li felt as though his body was stiffening, his blood about to freeze. The terrifying cold wind scared Mo Li so much that he hurriedly summoned his magic power, circulating it through his body to protect himself with magic power and drive away the chill. The other cultivators who had come onto the island also noticed this and quickly used their magic power to resist the cold. ¡°This cold from Youdu is too severe, even colder than any winter we have experienced before,¡± someone said. At that moment, from within the crowd, the Jade Butterfly Dao Master and Mu Yun True Person from Ji Province of the northern territory spoke loudly, ¡°Fellow Daoists, in this cold wind, we must constantly use magic power to maintain warmth in our bodies, and those with lower cultivation will not be able to endure for long. We are already at the Northern Dark City, how can we allow them to perish right before the gates of ascension without entering? In Poor Daoist¡¯s opinion, we should quickly enter the heart of Youdu, immediately start the array, and proceed with the ascension of the whole world. We cannot delay any further.¡± Mu Yun True Person was among the cultivators with the highest cultivation level and was nearing the threshold of Gathering Two Qi. And the sect he belonged to, Jade Butterfly Dao, was the largest Immortal Sect in Ji Province, with twenty-three cultivators who had set out to sea. Although they had also lost two during the last freeze, they still had the most cultivators among the sects and were considered the First Immortal Sect of the Nine Provinces. When such a figure spoke, especially considering the lives of many low-level cultivators, naturally, he won a round of applause, and no one opposed it. Thus, the Immortal Sect Cultivators of the Nine Provinces, led by those who had been to Youdu before, flew swiftly towards the heart of Youdu, where the core array was located. Youdu¡¯s ice glacier was vast, endlessly white and indistinct. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï According to the records, this glacier spanned three thousand miles in ancient times, comparable to half the territory of the Nine Provinces. But now, with the leakage of the array¡¯s restrictions in Youdu and the massive outpouring of cold air, the nearby sea areas were turning into ice plains, and the expansion continued unabated. At this moment, no one could say for certain how vast the glacier of Youdu was. However, once the cultivators of the Nine Provinces had quickly traveled two thousand miles, they arrived near the heart of Youdu and had a rough estimate that the current glacier must be at least ten thousand miles wide. Fortunately for the cultivators, even those who had yet to Gather One Qi, had physical abilities far beyond those of ordinary people, thanks to the support of their magic power. Even the top experts in Jianghu would be inferior in comparison. So, a mere two thousand miles, which took just three days, was traversed by the cultivators. And among the group, even the cultivators with the lowest magic power still had some strength to spare and had not used up too much magic power. Although they arrived at the heart of Youdu without trouble, some of the more compassionate cultivators couldn¡¯t help but worry about the beings of the Nine Provinces as they passed through the ice plains on their way. The cold air had only been leaked for ten years so far, and while the array¡¯s restrictions in Youdu were still in effect, the glacier had already expanded nearly ten thousand miles. It was hard to imagine what the expansion of the glacier would look like if they activated the array, depleting the last bit of active spiritual energy between Heaven and Earth and causing Youdu¡¯s array to lose its function completely, leaving all the cold air to pour out unhindered. I fear that in ten to twenty years, the Sea of Northern Dark will turn into a glacier, Youdu will expand southward, connecting with the plains of the North Territory, the Mysterious Snow Forest, and the Western Gobi, And Yan, Ji, and Xu, the three provinces adjacent to these regions, perhaps won¡¯t need ten to twenty years after the ice overcomes the northern territories to succumb themselves. The estimations that the cultivators of the Nine Provinces and Lu Yuan had made about Youdu¡¯s array and this cold wave had ultimately fallen short. The time left for the nations of the Nine Provinces, especially those in the northern lands, was not the hundred years they had imagined, but merely sixty or seventy years. And now, because the cultivators of the Nine Provinces were activating the array, depleting Youdu¡¯s last bit of energy, this timeframe would be even shorter. In the end, there might only be forty to fifty years before the entire northern lands were engulfed by the cold tide. However, these hardships facing the nations and beings of the Nine Provinces were naturally not a consideration for the cultivators on Youdu¡¯s ice glacier who were about to ascend to the Immortal Realm and become ¡°Immortals.¡± Perhaps some thought of these consequences, but faced with ascending to longevity, no one would trade their path to the Great Dao and life for a mere ten to twenty years of preparation for those mortals. People are all selfish, and cultivators even more so. Therefore, upon reaching the core of Youdu and seeing the gigantic formation that flashed with a ghostly blue spiritual light and emitted a vast aura, covering more than a hundred miles of the valley, All the cultivators from the Nine Provinces had their gaze fixed on it, unable to move away for a long time. ¡°The Array of Ascension is upon us, Fellow Daoists. Time is of the essence, and we cannot delay. Let us start the array immediately,¡± one of them said. ¡°` A moment later, it was Mu Yun True Person who first came back to his senses and made a suggestion. ¡°Good!¡± ¡°What Mu Yun Fellow Daoist said makes perfect sense.¡± ¡°Let us immediately start the formation method.¡± After Mu Yun¡¯s proposal was spoken, other Immortal Sect Lords, including Mo Li and Zhen Xuan, also spoke out in agreement. Now that they had reached this point, ascension was imminent, and no one would choose to back down. Either ascend or die. Therefore, even though there were still doubts and concerns about ascension in everyone¡¯s hearts, they would not give up on this path. Those who were truly afraid, like Lu Yuan at this time, were all shrinking within the Nine Provinces, enjoying their wealth and honor. Those who were present here were all cultivators with firm Dao hearts. ¡°Then, let¡¯s begin according to the original plan!¡± Seeing no objections from the crowd, Mu Yun True Person, along with the other Dao masters, took their positions at several key points of the Array¡¯s core, while the other cultivators entered the center of the formation. Following Mu Yun True Person¡¯s command ¡°Activate!¡±, they all pinched their magic seals and poured all their magic power into the Array. ¡°Hum!¡± Within the valley, it seemed as if the Earth itself emitted a hum before starting to tremble violently. The magic power of the cultivators from the Nine Provinces was like a key, reawakening the Array that had been silent for over a hundred years and revealing its might once again. As the Array began to operate, an immense amount of Spiritual Energy from between Heaven and Earth, following the predetermined course, was drawn from all sides and various locations within the Nine Provinces. Countless streams of Spiritual Energy converged, swarming into the Array. Lying in this ocean of Spiritual Energy, the cultivators were like fish that had been thirsting on land and were now returning to the sea, with every cell in their bodies cheering in celebration. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 Excitement flushed everyone¡¯s face. In this unprecedented abundance of Spiritual Energy, their doubts about whether they could ascend to the Immortal Realm disappeared, replaced by longing. Only in the Immortal Realm could there be such a vast amount of Spiritual Energy. Spiritual Energy that one could freely and wilfully absorb. Jianghu cultivators who had been enduring bitter days, facing this infinite Spiritual Energy, many couldn¡¯t help but shed tears. Luckily, the duration of the Array¡¯s drawing of Spiritual Energy did not last too long. After a short while, after nearly ninety-nine percent of the external Spiritual Energy was drawn, the Northern Dark City Array finally accumulated enough Spiritual Energy. Boom! A pillar of light shot up from the Array, instantly piercing the sky, and an immense spiritual pressure emerged. The cultivators from the Nine Provinces hadn¡¯t even had time to react when their figures disappeared between Heaven and Earth amidst the sky-illuminating spiritual light. After more than ten breaths time, as the last bit of Spiritual Power was exhausted, the sky-reaching pillar of light slowly crumbled and dissipated, eventually becoming nothingness. The Array in the valley, due to the depletion of Spiritual Energy, completely lost its energy. The flickering spiritual light on the Instrument Tracks faded one by one, and the spiritual pressure enveloping the Valley disintegrated as well. And after the spiritual pressure disappeared, with nothing left to suppress them, countless frigid airs transformed into howling gales and blew out of the Array toward the outside of the Valley. Wherever they passed, they were met with ice and snow. A cold tide had truly descended upon the Nine Provinces. This time, it was endless. ¡°` Chapter 915 - Chapter 915 Chapter 385 The Southwest Subdued ?Chapter 915: Chapter 385: The Southwest Subdued Chapter 915: Chapter 385: The Southwest Subdued Yuzhang, Tianluo Mountain. At the moment when cultivators of the Nine Provinces activated the Northern Dark City and drained all the active Spiritual Energy between Heaven and Earth, tens of thousands of miles away, Lu Yuan was the first to sense the change in the world. ¡°What¡¯s going on? Why has the Spiritual Energy between Heaven and Earth suddenly dried up?¡± Inside the Hou Shan Liu Yue Pavilion, Lu Yuan, who was meditating and cultivating, suddenly opened his eyes and peered through the window curtains towards the mountain ridge outside. His Divine Sense enveloped the area, sensing a desert where Spiritual Energy had once flourisheda€¡±there was not the slightest glimmer of energy left. This was undoubtedly extremely abnormal. One must know that although it is The Age of Dharma Decline, and the Spiritual Energy of Heaven and Earth is no longer present, making it impossible for ordinary people to cultivate. However, in a few Cave Worlds like Tianluo Mountain and Miluo Mountain, there¡¯s still a small amount of Spiritual Energy remaining, enough for people to cultivate. But at this time, within Tianluo Mountain, the previously abundant Spiritual Energy was suddenly attracted by some force, completely extracted, leaving not the slightest residue in the mountain. ¡°The sudden dissipation of Spiritual Energy must have a causea€|¡± Lu Yuan frowned, pondered for a moment, and thought, ¡°Now is the twelfth year, fifth month of Shenwu, and it¡¯s been almost two years since those cultivators from the Nine Provinces set off to the north over the sea. Based on the time, those two years should have been enough for them to arrive at the Northern Dark City. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï So now, the dissipation of Heavenly and Earthly Aura, is it because the cultivators of the Nine Provinces have activated the Array, extracting all the active Spiritual Energy between Heaven and Earth?¡± Before Dao master Feishuang, Mo Li, departed, he had told Lu Yuan that to activate the Array of the Northern Dark City, a massive amount of Spiritual Energy was needed as operational energy. Therefore, once the Array started, the remaining Spiritual Energy of the Nine Provinces would be exhausted, leaving nothing behind. At that time, even in a superior Cave World like Tianluo Mountain, cultivators would not be able to breathe in Spiritual Energy to accumulate magic power. Because of this, Mo Li eagerly invited Lu Yuan to ascend with them across the sea. Otherwise, as a cultivator living in the Age of Extinct Spirit, Lu Yuan¡¯s greatest abilities would be limited due to the lack of Spiritual Energy, and the path to longevity and becoming immortal would be completely cut off. Rather than living in such frustration, it would be better to ascend together and pursue the path of immortality. However, this invitation was unequivocally refused by Lu Yuan, who still had many alternatives. Although he refused the joint ascension, Mo Li still shared many details of the ascension plan with Lu Yuan, out of the reason of being allies. So now, upon discovering the changes in Heaven and Earth, his first thought was of the Northern Dark City. ¡°That must be the reason. The cultivators of the Nine Provinces have ascended, eliminating the last of my worries in this world.¡± Upon this realization, Lu Yuan felt a surge of excitement. That group of Nine Provinces cultivators numbered around one or two hundred; amongst them, more than ten were at the level of gathering one Qi, and it was unknown whether any had reached the level of gathering two Qi. Such a formidable force, even though Lu Yuan had reached the second level of Immortal Method and was a Martial Arts Grandmaster, he could not confidently say he could overcome them. If it came to a fight, he would likely lose. So as long as the cultivators of the Nine Provinces had not ascended, the shackles on Lu Yuan would persist. Now, those people had left. Whether they had ascended to the Immortal Realm or not, according to past precedents, these people could never return. And without these people, Lu Yuan at this moment could truly dominate an era on his own. In the world of the Nine Provinces, no one else could be his match. However, amidst his excitement, he suddenly thought of something, his expression changing as he quickly projected thoughts towards the Heavenly Pillars, with countless Qi Luck enveloping him, flowing into the pillars. In an instant, vast amounts of Spiritual Energy, just like before, were drawn from the Heavenly Vault, following the Heavenly Pillars towards Lu Yuan¡¯s region. ¡°That¡¯s right, the Spirtual Energy extracted by the Northern Dark City were only the active energies scattered between Heaven and Earth. The silent, hidden Spiritual Energy in the Heavenly Vault has not been taken. In this case, the impact on me is not too significant, at most it¡¯s regrettable for the Cave World of Tianluo Mountain.¡± Lu Yuan absorbed the incoming Spiritual Energy until it was exhausted, feeling a few more layers of magic power in his body, and he nodded with satisfaction. Although the last of the active Spiritual Energy between Heaven and Earth was drained, and the Cave World of Tianluo Mountain was abandoned, making one feel a deep regret, For Lu Yuan, as long as the Heavenly Pillars are still useful and the Heavenly Vault can still attract Spiritual Energy, the situation isn¡¯t too bad. After all, when sensing the Heavenly Pillars, he could roughly know the abundance of Spiritual Energy inside, so he also knew that the Spiritual Energy remaining in the Heavenly Vault vastly surpassed that of the Cave Worlds¡¯ Spiritual Energy between Heaven and Earth. By relying on the residual Spiritual Energy in the Cave Worlds, perhaps one could nurture a cultivator who has gathered three or four Qi, but nurturing an ultimate mortal reaching the Five Qi Towards Primordial was absolutely impossible. Yet, the residual Spiritual Energy in the Heavenly Vault was sufficient for Lu Yuan to cultivate all the way to Five Qi Towards Primordial, and with some luck, even becoming a Human Flower True Person was possible. Person Flower, that is the Dao Fruit of the way of Immortals: Human Flower True Person, also known as Human Immortal. That is to say, remaining in the Nine Provinces, Lu Yuan still had a slim chance of becoming immortal. It was this hope that enabled him to so decisively refuse the temptation to ascend to the Immortal Realm with Mo Li and others. After all, even if the cultivators of the Nine Provinces ascended to the Immortal Realm, it only meant that they had moved to a place with more abundant Spiritual Energy and smoother cultivation, nothing more. It¡¯s not as though by ascending to the Immortal Realm, one would become an Immortal. If ascension meant certain immortality, then that would have been a temptation for Lu Yuan. But since that was not the case, and it was merely an abundance of Spiritual Energya€¡±given that he already had the alternative of the Heavenly Qia€¡±the offer held limited appeal. Chapter 916 - Chapter 916 Chapter 385 Subjugation of the Southwest_2 ?Chapter 916: Chapter 385 Subjugation of the Southwest_2 Chapter 916: Chapter 385 Subjugation of the Southwest_2 ¡°` Moreover, once someone enters the Immortal Realm, just by the name, one can tell that this superior realm must be teeming with countless Immortals and Cultivators everywhere. In such a place, Lu Yuan¡¯s mere cultivation of Gathering Two Qi would likely place him at the very bottom, cannon fodder. If the Immortal Realm were even more perilous, resembling a mafia-run Immortal Cultivation World that emphasizes the merciless principles of killing for loot and the survival of the fittest, it would be even more terrifying. Wherever Lu Yuan went, his life would be at risk. In the world of the Nine Provinces, he was the high and mighty King of Chu, the unrivaled number one martial artist, with glory, wealth, and an unlimited lifespan in his grasp, and no one could threaten his life. Essentially, as long as Lu Yuan did not seek death himself, no one could kill him. With such a divine existence at hand, only a fool would go to the Immortal Realm in search of the eternal Immortal Method. Not to mention, whether the so-called Northern Dark City could still connect to the Immortal Realm ¨C that was something no one could ascertain. It was also highly possible that the other end of this Ascension Array could lead directly into the chaotic Void where one might get lost and meet their death. ¡°However, although my cultivation is unimpeded, the loss of the Spiritual Energy from Tianluo Mountain means that the Heavenly Qi I can draw upon with my current Qi Luck is insufficient to meet my cultivation needs.¡± Lu Yuan sighed with a mix of relief and frustration. Previously, with the blessing of the Cave World of Tianluo Mountain, he could cultivate with a full load of Spiritual Energy consumption. But now, without the Cave World¡¯s Spiritual Energy and with his current state of Gathering Two Qi, the Heavenly Qi he could draw upon with his present Qi Luck could only supply about eighty percent of his full capacity for the consumption of Spiritual Energy. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï Although this amount was still significant, for Lu Yuan, who had gotten used to the abundance of the past, it always felt like he hadn¡¯t eaten his fill, a hunger that was very uncomfortable. ¡°It seems I need to speed up the expansion and gather enough Qi Luck by strengthening the Chu State to fill these vacancies.¡± Lu Yuan mused privately, then looked to the west, thinking, ¡°It¡¯s time for Huang Xin and Qing Hezi over there to pick up the pace, too.¡± ¡­ As Lu Yuan was troubled by the dissipation of the Cave World¡¯s Spiritual Energy, far away in the Lingnan Region, others were also in the midst of their own troubles. In Song Country, the capital city of Songping. Today, the Grand Ministers of Song, along with King Xie Ning of Song, were all gathered together, each with a grave and worried expression. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ¡°Your Majesty, the Chu envoy has urged us again. We must respond soon.¡± In the heavy atmosphere, the Minister of Clan Affairs, Xie Yong, broke the silence. With this statement, it was as if the floodgates had opened, and the Group of Ministers below began to speak out. ¡°Indeed, Your Majesty, the Chu have already gathered a hundred thousand troops, all elite from the Forbidden Army, in the Through Sea and Yulin counties. The Chu¡¯s southwestern general, Qing Hezi, has personally arrived at the Front line to supervise the military. With him there, the Chu have amassed three Inborn masters at the border. Besides, large numbers of troops are gathering in the military states such as Qianzhong, Kunhai, Chilih, and Jianchuan. If we don¡¯t make plans soon, the Chu forces will invade.¡± ¡°Now, the Chu have swept through Jiangdong and Lingnan. Su Country and Southsea Country have already been destroyed, the Ning Dynasty has been defeated and is in Tortoise Retreat in half of Jiangdong, having lost the momentum. Yangzhou now has only this southwestern corner left unsettled. With Chu possessing the territory of eleven counties and three Nations flanking to the southwest, it is difficult to resist with just this corner of the southwest. Your Majesty really needs to make plans early.¡± ¡°Whether to fight or to make peace, Your Majesty, please make a decision early.¡± The Group of Ministers each expressed their opinions. Xie Ning looked at the people below, listening to the cacophony, a hint of bitterness rising in his heart. Although all the ministers were telling him to make a decision, and none said outright to surrender, wasn¡¯t the underlying message that the Chu were unstoppable and that it was time to capitulate? But contemplating the current state of Chu, Xie Ning couldn¡¯t help but feel despair. The gap between Chu and Song was simply too vast. An eight or nine-fold gap in territory, over ten-fold gaps in population and military force, and more than twenty-fold disparity in the number of Inborn Grandmasters¡­ Between Chu and Song, it was comparable to a baby and a giant, not at all on the same scale. For the current Chu, destroying Song wouldn¡¯t even require a special military deployment; just the border troops adjacent to Song would suffice. Like now, where Chu had only amassed the garrisoned Forbidden army from the Through Sea and Yulin counties and sent one overlord, it posed an existential threat to Song. The entire nation was terrified, shaken to its core. But the terms of surrender offered by Chu were indeed challenging for Xie Ning to decide on, which is why he had been hesitant to commit. ¡°How are things in the Nations of Nanzhao and Dali? How have they responded to Chu¡¯s terms?¡± After a long hesitation, Xie Ning looked toward the Group of Ministers below and suddenly asked. This time Chu¡¯s military campaign was not only directed at Song but also at the entire regions of Lingnan and the southwest, the remaining three countries outside the Chu system. Among the three nations, Song was undoubtedly the weakest. Whether in terms of territory, population, or the number of Grandmasters, it was the least powerful. Thus, Song¡¯s decision could not influence the entire situation among the Three Nations. Nanzhao and Dali, the two Yi countries, were the true key players in deciding whether this southwestern region could peacefully change flags. ¡°Your Majesty, like our own country, Dali has yet to respond to Chu. But in Nanzhao, recent messages indicate that their entire nation seems to have agreed to Chu¡¯s terms. They are currently negotiating with Chu¡¯s Envoy, discussing tribute and the establishment of a fiefdom.¡± ¡°` Chapter 917 - Chapter 917 Chapter 385 The Southwest Subdued_3 ?Chapter 917: Chapter 385: The Southwest Subdued_3 Chapter 917: Chapter 385: The Southwest Subdued_3 Below, a minister responsible for these matters, swift with news, reported back. ¡°Nanzhao Country has already agreed. Can they accept the division of their entire nation into three parts, with a section handed over to direct governance by Chu State?¡± Xie Ning was astonished upon hearing this. This time, Chu State¡¯s restructuring of the three southwestern countries offered terms to Dali, Nanzhao, and Song Country that were neither overly harsh nor particularly lenient. The demand from Chu State was for the three southwestern countries to be split up, based on the innate quantity of Inborn Grandmasters, with one Inborn being able to confer half a county as a country, into several smaller nations led by an Inborn Grandmaster each. If this demand were met, then Nanzhao Country, which originally spanned two counties, would be split into three small countries of only half a county each. Another half county would be reclaimed by Chu State to become directly governed territory. Dali Country, on the other hand, would not need any land reclaimed, as it had four Inborn Grandmasters within its borders. With half a county per person, they would be able to neatly divide the land of the two counties within the country. The real loser was Song Country. Because there was only one Inborn, Xie Ning, according to this policy, he would directly lose a county¡¯s worth of land and could only retain half a county of soil. Even worse was whether Chu State knew Song Country was easy to bully, so the half county it left them was not the cultivated and matured land of Jiuzhen County. Instead, it was Yinsheng County, a place only recently developed by Song Country, rampant with barbarian natives. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï How could Xie Ning accept this? You should know that Yinsheng County, when it was previously under Dali Country, was considered barren land. Afterward, as Xie Ning conquered the region, many of the barbarian natives were killed off or scattered, resulting in a significant loss of population. Therefore, now in the entire Yinsheng County, the registered households numbered barely more than eighty thousand, with a population of just over three hundred thousand. What enjoyment would there be in being king of such an impoverished land? Tax revenues would be minimal, and the army sustainment negligible. To say a king but in reality, not as influential as an internal land¡¯s Prefect, was simply about having a more prestigious title. Yet, the part to be ceded, Jiuzhen County, was indeed a land of wealth, with three hundred sixty thousand households and over one million seven hundred thousand people, equating to five or six Yinsheng Counties. Of course, given Chu¡¯s absolute advantage, that Song Country could preserve its dynasty and Xie Ning retain his kingship, with the many ministers maintaining their positions, was already an uncommonly good fortune by historical standards. After all, when enemy dynasties fell in the past, it meant storming the enemy¡¯s royal family and ensuring all the ministers would fall to the status of a conquered nation¡¯s slaves. That Chu State was this generous with Song Country was indeed rare. But everything suffers in comparison. Seeing Nanzhao and Dali benefit more than oneself, even knowing one¡¯s treatment was relatively good, Xie Ning would still feel shortchanged. In his heart, naturally hesitant and reluctant, he couldn¡¯t make the decision to surrender. ¡°Your Majesty, Nanzhao Country previously suffered heavy losses from Chu State and was subsequently harassed for several years by Chilih, Kunhai, Jianchuan, and other countries, enduring constant warfare and national fatigue,¡± one minister began explaining the situation to Xie Ning. ¡°Although they possess lands across two counties, the people there have been plundered by nearly half, so to have any remaining population of one million five or six hundred thousand would be fortunate. Therefore, while they have three Inborn Grandmasters, the total military force they can muster barely reaches a hundred thousand. But the Chu people, with two Inborn Grandmasters leading a force of a hundred thousand soldiers each, are stationed in both Hegu and Xichuan counties, pressing against the northern borders of Nanzhao. Chilih, Kunhai, and Jianchuan countries are also assembling troops within their borders, responding to Chu State¡¯s call in Qianzhong. This convergence of forces from various routes could amount to no less than three hundred thousand troops, with six Inborn Grandmasters among them. With Nanzhao Country¡¯s strength, how could it possibly resist? If they stubbornly try to endure, they might truly face the peril of national extinction. Rather than that, it is better to surrender outright. Given that the Nanzhao Royal Family has two Inborns, even if the country is divided into quarters, they could still retain half of it for themselves. And the Great Witch Sacrifice of the nation could also receive a country¡¯s worth of land to govern, which can be considered a benefit for everyone. Moreover, after submitting to Chu State, under the same dynasty, Chilih, Kunhai, and Jianchuan could no longer attack the Nanzhao trio due to Chu¡¯s constraints. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï They too could escape the long-term war and enjoy a peaceful existence. With these benefits in mind, even if they have to give up half a county of land, it¡¯s actually acceptable for Nanzhao Country.¡± A minister well-acquainted with Nanzhao Country¡¯s situation analyzed it for Xie Ning. However, his words clearly also aimed to persuade his own king to submit, using Nanzhao as an example. ¡°Your Majesty, Nanzhao has now submitted, and with their assistance, in the lands of the southwest, Chu State will have an additional three Inborns and a hundred thousand soldiers at their disposal,¡± Royal Minister Xie Yong solemnly advised. ¡°Their influence is undoubtedly increased by a notch. Even if our country unites with Dali, we can muster at most three to four hundred thousand troops, with five Inborns. Yet the Chu people can gather an army of five hundred thousand elite soldiers, with twelve Inborns. Such strength is beyond what our two countries can withstand. Now, if Dali gets wind of Nanzhao¡¯s submission, they might already be wavering, not knowing when they will surrender to Chu State. If our country stubbornly resists to the end, whether Chu people would still wish to accept us will become an issue.¡± ¡°Remember, ¡®Kill the chicken to warn the monkey.''¡± Xie Ning shuddered inwardly upon hearing this. Without deploying a single soldier, without a single casualty, Chu people would subdue three countries. Indeed, this avoidance of broad and costly casualties was a benefit, but it inevitably left behind a restlessness and lack of submission in many hearts. Therefore, for Chu State, finding a suitable target to punish harshly to serve as a deterrent to other southwestern nations would undoubtedly be an excellent strategy. And looking across the three southwestern nations, only Song Country best fit these criteria. The reason was plain. Song Country had the weakest military, the smallest territory, and the fewest Grandmasters, undoubtedly seen by all as a soft persimmon. Would they not take this opportunity to exert authority over such an easy target rather than targeting Dali Country, which boasts four Inborns and a military force of three hundred thousand? ¡°Royal Minister Xie Yong is right. We in Song Country cannot delay any further,¡± Xie Ning suddenly realized, no longer daring to hesitate or cling to his losses. He hurriedly addressed the assembly of ministers below, ¡°Send someone quickly to invite the Chu State messenger. Tell them that I am willing to submit and pay tribute to Chu State, and request the messenger to discuss the details.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± A minister responsible for foreign affairs, upon hearing this, immediately left in a hurry. Chapter 918 - Chapter 918 Chapter 386 Western Liangs Tiger and Wolf ?Chapter 918: Chapter 386 Western Liang¡¯s Tiger and Wolf Chapter 918: Chapter 386 Western Liang¡¯s Tiger and Wolf At the border between Tonghai County and Song Country, the horses stood by the pass. ¡°Ha, these Song people have finally sent envoys to surrender. I thought they were going to be stubborn to the end.¡± In the conference hall, the Chu army¡¯s generals gathered, and at the highest seat, Qing Hezi, holding the state document submitted by Song Country, couldn¡¯t help but let out a light chuckle. ¡°Song Country is inherently weak, the least among the southwest three nations. Their previous resistance was merely because they saw Nanzhao Country and Dali still holding out, harboring a stroke of luck. Now that Nanzhao Country has surrendered, one of the Three Nations has fallen to us, Great Chu. With only two remaining, naturally, they are no match for us. That Song Junlin Hai, from the Coastal Aristocratic Family, is best at monopoly. Seeing the trend has turned, of course, he wouldn¡¯t stubbornly resist and lose his life here.¡± On the left side below, Yulin County¡¯s defense commander Li Liang now sneered, ¡°Great Chu has been quite generous to him. As a king of a fallen nation, he still got half a county for a fiefdom. In the past, where could one find such good fortune? It¡¯s only because Heaven and Earth have changed that the lands to the south have become worthless, and our king has allowed these small nations to have them. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 If they are not grateful, then they truly deserve to die by the sword.¡± Regarding the Great Change of Heaven and Earth, after starting the war with Ning Country, over this past year, Lu Yuan had also informed all Inborn Grandmasters within the nation. The purpose of this was to unify the people¡¯s hearts, to make everyone realize the severity of the issue, and to gather all forces to focus their efforts northwards, competing for the land of Central State in the future. Clearly, after more than a year of effort, the results thus far were not bad. Just like at this moment. For Lu Yuan¡¯s favorable treatment of the southwestern nations, those in Chu State¡¯s high-level who knew the truth had no objections whatsoever. It¡¯s but a useless piece of land that could only be developed for a hundred years, perhaps even less. Even if Chu State took it over, to govern and develop it would take several decades, which would fundamentally be impossible without that much time. And just when it might be difficultly developed, the Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe would come. The lands of Jiangnan may become a seething land of poison and fire in the future. After decades of hard work, everything turns to ash; only a fool would engage in such a losing trade. Rather than that, it¡¯s better to let go of these worthless lands, allowing the rulers of these minor nations to manage the barbarians on their own territory. Meanwhile, Great Chu would stand atop their heads to collect grain and taxes, simultaneously drawing away their troops and Inborn Grandmasters to bleed and toil for Chu State¡¯s future campaigns in Central State. Such vassal tribute strategies were the most time-saving and cost-effective. ¡°Now that Nanzhao and Song Country have both submitted, in this region of the southwest, only Dali Country remains. Though powerful, with four Inborn and over two million barbarian citizens, with the land of one country and two counties, to contend against the combined forces of Great Chu¡¯s southwest, Lingnan, along with several western counties and fiefdoms, is akin to a mantis blocking a chariot. If the king of Dali is wise, upon hearing the news of Song Country¡¯s submission, he will send envoys to surrender.¡± Next to him, the defense commander of Tonghai County, Han Hu, also spoke with a smile. ¡°True, but nobody can guarantee that the people of Dali Country will be stubborn and refuse to surrender. To be on the safe side, we still need to press them.¡± Listening to his subordinate¡¯s words, Qing Hezi nodded slightly, but acting cautiously, after a moment of contemplation, turned his head towards Li Liang at his side and ordered, ¡°General Li, I hereby appoint you as the defense commander of Jiuzhen County. Effective immediately, lead our troops to Jiuzhen County for your new assignment. Upon arrival, take over the military forces registered in Song Country¡¯s Jiuzhen County and stabilize the local area. At the same time, oversee the remnants of Song Country, ordering them to raise troops in the fiefdom of Yingsheng County, threatening Dali Country¡¯s territory from the back, and forcing their submission.¡± Upon Dali Country¡¯s surrender, apart from giving up Jiuzhen County, they naturally had to hand over their military forces as well. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï After more than a year of recovery, since the Defeat of Yulin, the internal forces of Song Country had been reorganized back to a hundred thousand strong. And within these hundred thousand, eighty thousand were registered in Jiuzhen County. For these troops, Chu State obviously would not allow Song Country to take them away. Thus, it was time to dispatch a high-ranking general to Jiuzhen County. To accept the troops on one hand, and to handle the transfer of local governance on the other. To supervise Song Country and prepare for any unforeseen events. And considering his command, the most suitable for the task at this time was none other than Li Liang. With the taking over of Jiuzhen County, Yulin County was now situated in the hinterland of Chu State, no longer adjoining enemy land, and it was essentially settled down. Given that, the three regiments of the Forbidden Army, sixty thousand soldiers, formerly commanded and stationed there by Li Liang, obviously should not go to waste. Therefore, Qing Hezi directly ordered him to head to Jiuzhen County, both to accept the surrender of Song Country and to handle the handover of land, registrars, military, and treasury affairs. And to act as a supervisor, urging Song Country to deploy troops and assist in besieging Dali Country. ¡°I follow the command,¡± replied Li Liang upon hearing his appointment, his expression showing no signs of surprise. Now, as Lu Yuan was no longer concealing his identity, many among Chu State¡¯s high-level slowly began to sense the close relationship between the True Persons of the Qing and Huang factions and their own great king. So, facing Qing Hezi, who was likely an avatar of his Master or some other identity, Li Liang dared not show any disrespect. At this time, facing the other¡¯s direct appointment and dismissal of a county¡¯s defense commander, he found nothing amiss. It was as if the great king himself had come, right? If the great king wished to appoint or transfer a county¡¯s defense commander, wouldn¡¯t it be a matter of just a word, and who would dare, who could oppose it? ¡°Good, the matter of Song Country is thus settled. For Nanzhao Country, send someone to urge them as well, to have their three vassal kings quickly raise troops and head to Dali Country¡¯s border, responding to our forces from the west side,¡± Qing Hezi made the arrangements and felt considerably more relaxed in his heart, showing a trace of disdain on his face, ¡°I would like to see, surrounded by enemies on three sides, under the pressure of my five hundred thousand strong army, whether Dali Country dares to hold out.¡± Chapter 919 - Chapter 919 Chapter 386 Western Liang Tiger and Wolf_2 ?Chapter 919: Chapter 386 Western Liang Tiger and Wolf_2 Chapter 919: Chapter 386 Western Liang Tiger and Wolf_2 Although the troops from Xichuan Prefecture in the North had come to help subdue Nanzhao Country, they withdrew quickly because Huang Xin needed to deal with Western Liang. But now, with the newly divided Nanzhao Country, as well as the ongoing division of Song Country for assistance, in the southwestern region of Lingnan, the number of troops Qing Hezi could gather had reached an exaggerated total of 500,000. As for Inborn Grandmasters, there were as many as eight. Both in terms of the number of troops and high-level experts, they were already twice that of Dali Country. To put it bluntly, even if Dali Country refused to surrender and wanted to resist stubbornly, it wouldn¡¯t be too difficult for Qing Hezi to conquer them. The overall situation in the southwest had already been decided at this time. ¡­ Of course, Dali Country did not dare to resist obstinately. They were tough but not foolish. Under the circumstance of being heavily surrounded and pressed by numerous troops, they would naturally not be so headstrong and would know when to bend and submit. In fact, after hearing that Song Country had surrendered, messengers from Dali Country to discuss surrender were already on their way. They had just set off not long before and hadn¡¯t yet reached the location of Qing Hezi at Machuzi. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï It must be said, after Chu State defeated the four kingdoms of Lingnan and Jiangdong and seized the hegemony of the entire Yangzhou, in the face of this unifying momentum and the country¡¯s eminent prestige, the number left who dared to resist was truly small. Now, in the campaign to conquer the southwest, even though Nanzhao and Dali were strong, they still feared and submitted to the military might of Chu State, not daring to resist. Keep in mind, it had only been six or seven years since Chu State last returned from the War of Conquerors. Such a short amount of time was not enough to make people forget everything. Many people from various tribes in the southwest still vividly remembered the ferocity and terror of Chu soldiers. Originally, even with only three counties, Chu State could not be resisted by the countries in the southwest. Now, given that Chu State is many times stronger than before, how could Nanzhao and Dali dare to resist? The reason for their quick surrender now, lies partly in the great surge in Chu State¡¯s prestige and partly in the remaining military intimidation from when Western Liang was conscripted, which should not be overlooked. Regardless of the reason, with the three nations submitting and the large countries being broken down, the remaining small countries left with only half a county¡¯s worth of land in the southwest, are no longer able to pose a significant threat. The control of Chu State in this region was more or less stable. So when Qing Hezi finished sorting out affairs of the southwest and submitted his memorial in August, Lu Yuan merely ordered the northern half of the four Prefectures offered by Nanzhao Country to be merged with Hegu County, forming a complete jurisdiction of ten Prefectures. Hegu County, being on the western border of Chu State, not only bordered Xichuan and had a passageway but also had a connection to the south with Nanzhao Country. Previously during the surprise attack on Xichuan Country, they had taken advantage of the barbarians of Hegu County, catching Jihui unprepared and leading to the extinction of their Buddhist country. Now that Nanzhao Country had surrendered and offered up the northern territory, Lu Yuan naturally focused on this passage leading to Xichuan, deciding to merge this area with Hegu County. Beyond combining Prefectures and Counties and resolving the affairs of the southwest, Lu Yuan continued to appoint Qing Hezi as the Grand Governor of the southwest, managing Qianzhong, Through Sea, and the eleven small vassal countries. As for the three counties of Southsea, Yulin, and Jiuzhen in Lingnan, Qingxuanzi was called back from Jian¡¯an County to take on the position of Grand Governor of Lingnan and Defensive Envoy of Yulin County, taking charge of defense affairs for Chu at the Southern Border. Additionally, considering the increasingly severe situation in the North, Lu Yuan sent an avatar, Huang Yun, from Yuzhang Prefecture to Xiangyang Prefecture to take up the post of Grand Governor of the North of the Yangtze, overseeing Xiangyang Prefecture with Zhou Qing and 130,000 troops under his command. With Huang Xin in the West, Qing Hezi in the Southwest, Qingxuanzi in Lingnan, and Huang Yun in the North of the Yangtze, Chu State¡¯s four major defensive areas covering nine Prefectures and eleven countries were basically under stable control. With these four avatars in charge, Lu Yuan could rest easy. Thus, after dealing with internal issues, he turned his attention to the seething Northwest conflict at this time. ¡­ The withered yellow grass was frosted, presenting a desolate scene as far as the eye could see. On the vast open wilderness of the grasslands, to the east and west, two major armies clashed fiercely. The barbarian cavalry, dressed in animal skins, with braided hair, wielding short bows, and brandishing curved knives, charged back and forth against a bunch of Western Liang knights on the other side. These knights were dressed in an assortment of clothing, few wore armor, and held cavalry lances or sabers, looking like ordinary civilians. From their attire alone, it was clear that the barbarians were herders and the Western Liang forces were militia; neither was the elite troop from either army. Even on the battlefield, the barbarian herders outnumbered the others, with over 5,000 riders, while the Western Liang militia had only around 3,000, a notable difference in military strength. Yet at this moment, as the two forces engaged, the barbarian herders were clearly inferior in both mounted archery and martial skills compared to the Western Liang militia. Even in terms of endurance and resilience, there was a clear gap. The battle had only been waged for a short while, but the barbarians had already lost nearly a thousand men, while the Western Liang militia had suffered only five hundred casualties. Gradually, the barbarians could not hold on and began to disperse. In this probing confrontation, the Western Liang army gained the upper hand. ?0¦Í?0.?¦Ï ¡°Western Liang truly deserves its reputation as a powerful country in the Northwest. Such robust warriors are indeed elites, comparable to county soldiers from the inland of my Chu State. No wonder the barbarians are retreating step by step and even seeking assistance from Chu State; it is indeed no injustice.¡± In the Eastern camp, the banners of Chu State and others with different insignias were fluttering. Surrounded by Chu soldiers, Huang Xing and a group of Chu generals watched the distant skirmish between the barbarian herders and Western Liang knights, unable to help but express their admiration. Chapter 920 - Chapter 920 Chapter 386 Western Liang Tiger and Wolf_3 ?Chapter 920: Chapter 386 Western Liang Tiger and Wolf_3 Chapter 920: Chapter 386 Western Liang Tiger and Wolf_3 Unlike ordinary people who are partly nomadic and partly agrarian, with a complete state system, Western Liang, which is both nomadic and agrarian, can sustain more standing troops than the barbarians who outnumber them. In the Helong battles over the past several years, with each spring and autumn, although the barbarians could muster four to five hundred thousand, or even six to seven hundred thousand cavalry, their momentum was indeed vast and boundless. However, among these several hundred thousand troops, over eighty percent were temporarily conscripted barbarian herdsmen. The actual number of full-time barbarian knights from all tribes only amounted to just over a hundred thousand. You must know, these are the elite troops that tens of millions of barbarians could barely assemble. Looking at this ratio, it¡¯s almost as if one hundred barbarians could only support one full-time soldier. This level of production efficiency, compared to the countries in the Nine Provinces who are currently wrestling for dominance, is still far behind. In nations like Chu, Wei, and Liang, it¡¯s basically three households supporting one soldier, which means about fourteen to fifteen people support one full-time soldier. The conversion rate of population to troops is six to seven times that of the barbarians. With such a vast production gap, it is no wonder that the barbarians who have been stubbornly persisting in fighting at Helong have seen two to three million soldiers die in battle without making any progress. Instead, they were repeatedly defeated by the Zhou People, suffering heavy losses. Had the Wei Country from the North not suddenly intervened and attacked the Jingji region of Zhou Country, forcing the Zhou People to redeploy troops for reinforcements and give up the northwest territory, the barbarian tribes might still be miserably shrinking in the Snowy Wilderness, descending the mountains day after day to meet their deaths, bleeding out on Helong. However, even after the Zhou People left, the Snow Plains Nomads who occupied the two counties of Helong didn¡¯t remain triumphal for long. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? For the people of Western Liang, who were just as fierce as Zhou and even more impoverished, had arrived. As a nation that emerged from the borders of the snowy wilderness, the grasslands, and Yong State, situated at the border between civilization and barbarism, Western Liang¡¯s geographical location dictated that the country must establish itself through military might. Otherwise, under the surveillance of a multitude of barbarians and great nations, Western Liang would not have been able to survive. And indeed, this was the case. The harsh living conditions hardened the people of Western Liang to withstand toil and hardship, and the threat from the barbarians fostered their fierce and violent nature. This was a country like the Great Qin from Lu Yuan¡¯s past life, a true land of tiger and wolf. With a population of four million, Western Liang managed to maintain three hundred thousand standing troops and about five hundred thousand part-time militia who combined farming with military training. It was almost as if every household were soldiers. This kind of martial spirit was unparalleled, even among the fiercely battling countries of the Nine Provinces. Just like Zhou, which was nearly brought to the brink of destruction by Wei and forced into desperate mobilization, could only maintain one million troops. According to the population, that¡¯s merely twelve people supporting one soldier. Western Liang, however, has one soldier for every five people. Even though a large number of these were soldiers stationed on farms, it was still a remarkable achievement. What¡¯s most impressive is that with this method of impoverished soldiers and fierce warriors, the troops raised by Western Liang were surprisingly strong. At this moment, with Huang Xin leading the Chu army to Helong, reinforcing the barbarians, the tribes with newly gained support quickly gathered four hundred thousand troops and, together with the arriving one hundred thousand Chu soldiers, proceeded to reconquer Hexi County, which had been taken by Western Liang. Both armies set up their camps and faced each other across the plains. Now, at Huang Xin¡¯s request, the barbarians sent cavalry to test the mettle of Western Liang. Yet, after both sides clashed, the five thousand barbarian cavalry dispatched were disastrously routed by a mere three thousand Western Liang knights, a truly surprising turn of events. Even more shocking was that the Western Liang cavalry, who performed well earlier and could defeat the greater number of barbarian herdsmen with fewer troops, turned out to be only their militia. The quality displayed by these Western Liang militiamen, although still some way off from soldiers, was on par with the regular standing prefectures and counties troops in Chu. ¡°I have always heard of the bravery and tough fighting of the people of Western Liang and thought it was just exaggeration. Seeing it today, it truly is astonishing.¡± ¡°No wonder our King sent us here as reinforcements. Just based on the strength exhibited by Western Liang¡¯s army, those barbarians really aren¡¯t their match.¡± ¡°It looks like we¡¯re in for a tough fight against Western Liang¡¯s army.¡± By observing just a fraction, one can perceive the whole picture. The Chu generals, veterans of over two decades of battle, were exceedingly proficient in military tactics and strategy, with a keen sense of perception. Although they had only witnessed the might of Western Liang¡¯s militia, these experienced generals recognized that Western Liang¡¯s army was a formidable enemy based on their performance alone. Despite resorting to impoverished soldiers and fierce warriors, the troops they raised were not weak. Under the unique environmental influence of the northwest territory, their three hundred thousand standing troops¡¯ combat capability would in no way be inferior to those of the main forces of the world¡¯s dominant powers. Given the current condition of the Chu army, which had decreased in strength due to numerous expansions and incorporation of surrendered and new soldiers, the outcome of a direct encounter with them was truly unpredictable. ¡°Western Liang, a nation of tiger and wolves with all its citizens ready to fight, only lacks in population and wealth. If they now seize Helong and subjugate these millions of barbarians, gaining access to this rich and fertile land and a vast population, the foundation for their dominance can be established in an instant. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? At that time, with a new power emerging in the northwest of Great Chu, our borders will never see peace.¡± Listening to the generals¡¯ discussion, Huang Xin¡¯s expression was stern, ¡°That¡¯s why we must seize the moment before their rise to power, before the barbarians pledge allegiance, and before they claim Helong, to eradicate this menace and eliminate the future threat to Great Chu.¡± As an avatar of Lu Yuan, he knew his original body¡¯s thoughts profoundly. If it¡¯s said that previously, Lu Yuan only had a rough idea of the threat posed by Western Liang, based on the barbarians¡¯ descriptions and imperial reports, which didn¡¯t resonate deeply, now that his avatar had personally led the troops to the Helong battlefield and observed the strength of Western Liang¡¯s soldiers, he had come to view Western Liang¡¯s army as an unprecedented formidable enemy. Towards Western Liang, he had included it as a must-destroy target, or, in other words, a target that must be attacked and weakened without question. The barbarians, having been stabilized with the support of Chu, could not be allowed to perish in this land of Helong. Chapter 924 - Chapter 924 Chapter 388 Jiangdong Issue ?Chapter 924: Chapter 388 Jiangdong Issue Chapter 924: Chapter 388 Jiangdong Issue Ever since the defeat in the Western Expedition, Shen Qiu had led his remnants of defeated soldiers back to the homeland, he had not lived a single day of peace. Over this past year. He desperately expanded the recruitment of soldiers, drafting men from all across the country. The aristocratic families of Linhai County also contributed funds and grain, sparing no effort. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Finally, with great difficulty, he managed to restore the national forces to a pre-war strength of eight hundred thousand. But although the number of troops had been restored, they were only numbers after all. The reconstituted Ning Army, whether in terms of the quality of soldiers or training time, fell far short of those elite troops that Ning Country had spent ten years raising and training before the war. The only thing that allowed Ning Country some peace of mind was that even though the standing forces had sharply declined in strength, the country¡¯s top-tier combat strength, the number of Inborn Grandmasters, had been maintained at thirteen, thanks to the full support of Purple Cloud Dao. Such a number of innate masters, when considered, was already unbeatable in the world. Keep in mind, in Xuzhou to the North, Xu State, which controls six counties, had only twelve Inborn Grandmasters. In Ji Province, Zhao State had only sixteen Inborns. Yet Ning Country had thirteen Inborns, coupled with eight hundred thousand soldiers. From the perspective of mere military force, they were no different from the hegemony of the contemporary world. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? The only slightly weaker aspect was that the territory was a bit small, and the population a bit fewer. Ning Country now controlled only two prefectures and seventeen counties. Among these, Guangling County had a population of three million, while Linhai County had five million. Together, the population barely reached eight million, and the size of their territory was just barely ten thousand miles. From the perspective of fundamental resources, Ning Country had undoubtedly fallen from the position of a hegemon. But in terms of military force, it could still be called a hegemon. Relying on thirteen Inborns and an army of eight hundred thousand, Ning Country, now secluded in a corner of Jiangdong, tucked away in Jinling City, was indeed able to maintain the dignity of a hegemon. And countries around the world, due to the military strength of Ning Country, hadn¡¯t taken them too lightly. They still regarded them as a hegemon, granting corresponding recognition and status. After all, from the current situation, although the unification of Jiangdong by Chu State seemed inevitable. However, the forces and Inborn Grandmasters controlled by Ning Country were still quite considerable. With an army of eight hundred thousand and thirteen Inborns holding down Ning Country, if they were solely focused on defense, even if Chu State exerted their entire country¡¯s effort to attack, it wouldn¡¯t be easy to conquer them. As long as Ning Country did not make mistakes or exhibit any major flaws, then the war between Chu and Ning was destined to be a brutal and bloody grinder. Fighting for ten or twenty years, or perhaps even thirty to fifty years, were all very likely scenarios. If outside forces were to interfere, it was even possible that Chu State might not unify Jiangdong. Of course, all these were only under ideal circumstances. In reality, for Ning Country to support its army of eight hundred thousand with a population of eight million, it was bound to be an extremely difficult, even unsustainable burden. Which was indeed the case. Out of the eight hundred thousand troops within Ning Country, only three hundred thousand veteran soldiers formed the elite, receiving treatment as regular combat soldiers. The other five hundred thousand newly recruited soldiers were treated as county soldiers, or even Tuntian Soldiers. These five hundred thousand new soldiers engaged in production and cultivation during peacetime, and were conscripted as soldiers in times of war, with their combat power being self-evident. This type of Tuntian Soldier was fundamentally incapable of fighting tough battles, they could only defend the city and maintain a bit of public order. However, given the dire situation Ning Country now faced, expansion was basically impossible, and all they had to do was defend. So, with the backbone of three hundred thousand elite soldiers, supplemented by five hundred thousand Tuntian soldiers as auxiliary, it was indeed enough to uphold Ning Country¡¯s defensive system. This could also be considered making the best use of resources. But even though they adopted the Tuntian Soldier system, supporting an army of eight hundred thousand with the country¡¯s full strength was still suffocating Ning Country¡¯s finance. And it wasn¡¯t just the finances. Because a large number of able-bodied men had been conscripted into the army, one-third of the adult population was taken out of production. Local industries, commerce, and agriculture were all severely affected. Local farmlands more or less exhibited signs of abandonment, and even in the farmlands that were cultivated, the lack of sufficient labor prevented meticulous care, leading to reduced grain production. Although the current territory of Ning Country benefited from rich lands and could barely be self-sufficient in grain production without facing famine, once the war with Chu State began and more civilians were conscripted for labor, further reducing the production population at the rear, a famine in Ning Country was inevitable. The war might last half a year, a year, at most two or three years before Ning Country would collapse without a fight due to famine caused by a lack of grain. So Ning Country currently found itself in a very awkward position. Sufficient soldiers and powerful military force allowed Ning Country to protect itself in the war against Chu State, but its shallow resources could not support this military force, making it difficult to sustain a long-term war. The crisis of national destruction loomed over its head at all times. And it was precisely at this time that friends from the North, the country that had unified Qingzhou and become the strongest country of the age, Liang State, sent an envoy to Jinling. ¡°According to the message from Xuan Chengzi, Liang Country sent an envoy to Ning Country not only signing an alliance and mutual aid agreement but also providing substantial aid to Ning Country. They are willing to provide twenty million silver tales and ten million stones of grain in aid each year. This money and grain are enough for Ning Country to arm another three hundred thousand regular combat soldiers. If exchanged for county soldiers, even the five hundred thousand Tuntian soldiers in Ning Country could be supported.¡± Chapter 925 - Chapter 925 Chapter 388 Jiangdong Issue_2 ?Chapter 925: Chapter 388 Jiangdong Issue_2 Chapter 925: Chapter 388 Jiangdong Issue_2 With three hundred thousand soldiers and five hundred thousand county soldiers at hand, under normal circumstances, unless I personally take action, it would be extremely difficult for Chu State to swallow Ning Country. Without a bloody and bruising fight, spending a dozen or more years, and the death of a million people, they probably really can¡¯t take it down.¡± Lu Yuan recalled the recent activities of Liang Country in Ning Country and couldn¡¯t help but snort coldly, his heart filled with anger. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Clearly, as Chu State gradually began to unify Yangzhou and defeated Ning Country, the Liang Country, which dominated half of Central State to the north, had already started to dread the rising power of Chu State in the south. This assistance to Ning Country is exactly for this reason. With the aid of Liang Country, Ning Country could not only maintain its current strength of eight hundred thousand soldiers, but it might be possible to train them to a more elite level. Once the two countries go to war, Liang Country will also provide substantial funds and provisions to help Ning Country sustain its army and keep the war dragging on. Liang Country might even send troops directly to aid Ning Country in defending against Chu State, or attack Chu State¡¯s homeland, drawing Chu State¡¯s strength away from other battle fronts. With the strength of Liang Country, this is entirely feasible. According to what Lu Yuan knows, or rather the military strength that Liang Country has openly displayed, they have three million regular soldiers, most of whom are elite combat troops. Moreover, Liang Country has also gained full support from the two major Daoist sects within their country, Dan Ding Path and Cang Long Way, which have cultivated an extraordinary number of Inborn Grandmasters in recent years. Considering their accumulated prowess over the years, the current number of Inborn individuals in Liang Country has reached as many as forty-three. And who knows if there are more hidden in the shadows? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Additionally, there should be about ten or so Inborns remaining within the Dan Ding Path and Cang Long Way, who haven¡¯t taken service with Liang Country. These can all be considered the core strengths of Liang Country. Therefore, the number of Inborn individuals within Liang Country may well be over sixty, or even possibly as high as seventy. With this power, even after accounting for the soldiers needed to stay behind to manage the local areas and the necessary defense of their borders against other countries, Liang Country can easily deploy twenty or so Inborn individuals and millions of soldiers to initiate a war against Chu State. Chu State hasn¡¯t engaged in a war with Liang Country because first, they dread the great strength of Chu State, which openly shows a standing force of over a million regular soldiers, with twenty-two direct Inborn subordinates. In addition, Chu State has eleven vassal states, which can mobilize another five or six hundred thousand troops and eleven Inborns. With such strength, even if Liang Country sends troops to attack, they¡¯re not guaranteed victory and heavy losses are a certainty. Second, because now attacking territories outside Central State is a losing proposition, where even if they are conquered, they cannot be defended for more than a few years. Therefore, while risking the expenditure of money and provisions by the billions, accepting military losses in the millions, and potentially sacrificing several or even more than ten Inborn individuals, embarking on a war against Chu Statea€¡± The ultimate gain would just be a piece of land usable for only a few decades, one that¡¯s been so ravaged by war it is practically desolate. Faced with such an outcome, the monarch and ministers of Liang Country, even if their minds were caught in a wild frenzy, would not engage in such a losing trade. And that¡¯s if they even win. If the war were lost, and Liang Country suffers the loss of a million troops on the Southern Line and the deaths of more than ten Inborns, losing one-third of their military power, it could almost be said their national foundation would be shaken. Without these military forces, not only would their domestic rule become problematic, but neighboring countries, too, would likely act like sharks sensing blood, following in Chu State¡¯s wake to pounce and feast on the succulent meal that is Liang Country. Chu State, which has nearly unified Yangzhou, stands almost equal to Liang Country in both strength and potential. Facing such a formidable enemy, Liang Country, no matter how much they dread it, would not rashly provoke border conflicts and start a national war. Even Lu Yuan understands the terror of Liang Country, yet he also doesn¡¯t launch a Northern Expedition against it immediately. Both countries know that a battle between them is inevitable, yet both are avoiding the onset of war. Lest they both end up worse for wear, dressing others in their bridal robes. So Lu Yuan is waiting, wishing to unify Yangzhou first, and then wait for the countries such as Wei, Zhou, Zhao, Xu, and others, forced southward by the cold tide, to initiate warfare against Liang Country first. By the time these Liang foes have drawn Liang Country¡¯s fire and drained its military, that will be Chu State¡¯s moment for the Northern Expedition. After all, the calamity of the Four Extremities also follows a sequence. First comes the cold tide of Northern Dark City, followed by the earthquakes in the west, the poisonous fires in the south, and the storms in the east. This great calamity of Heaven and Earth must be transcended by the northern people first, before it¡¯s the turn of Chu people in southern Yangzhou. Time is on Lu Yuan¡¯s side; he needn¡¯t be in a hurry to be the first bird to take flight. And the same goes for Liang Country. They know that there is no immediate life-or-death conflict with Chu State, and even if Chu State did want to fight, it would be decades or even a hundred years from now. Waiting for Liang Country to be drained by battles with its powerful northern adversaries is the opportune time for Chu State to reap the benefits. Right now there is no need for the two to engage in a life-or-death struggle. Because even if Chu State fought to the death and took Qingzhou from Liang Country, it would then have to face the continuous southern advance of various countries and tribes. The resulting endless wars, lasting hundreds of years of life-and-death struggle, would be daunting for any empire to contemplate. For Chu State to now eliminate Liang Country would mean taking over Liang Country¡¯s troubles. Instead of doing this, it would be better to let Liang Country bear the brunt, waiting until they have fought each other to a standstill before Chu State steps in. Chapter 926 - Chapter 926 Chapter 388 Jiangdong Issue_3 ?Chapter 926: Chapter 388 Jiangdong Issue_3 Chapter 926: Chapter 388 Jiangdong Issue_3 Therefore, there really weren¡¯t any major conflicts between Chu State and Liang within the short term, within the recent decades, before the cold wave fully descended. Previously, Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t considered launching a Northern Expedition immediately after unifying Yangzhou. His original plan was also to recuperate and observe the situation in the North slowly over several decades. However, even though Liang knew that Chu would not immediately engage in conflict, it planned to pull Ning Country into an alliance with Jiangnan as a precaution, to establish a foothold in Yangzhou. In the future, even if Chu wanted to take advantage of the situation when Liang was exhausted from battling other countries and launch a Northern Expedition against Liang, Having Ning Country there could at least buy Liang some buffer time. Not much was needed, just a delay of one or two years would suffice. With one or two years¡¯ time, Liang could slowly adjust its strategy and divert enough troops to the Southern Line for the defense against Chu. This was Ning Country¡¯s value and Liang¡¯s strategy against Chu. It was very conservative and also very compromising. But this was the helplessness of a central empire. Located in the heart of the world, surrounded by enemies on all sides, and each one so strong, what else could Liang do? It was like Lu Yuan¡¯s previous life¡¯s Song Dynasty, occupying the richest lands in the world, but surrounded by powerful nations, none of which were easy to deal with. Even worse was Liang¡¯s situation. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï Because the neighboring states of Chu, Zhou, Wei, Zhao, Xu, and others, each one was very powerful, almost equal in strength to the Jin and Liao that the Song Dynasty faced, rather than the weaker and smaller states like the Western Xia, Dali, and Tibetan Empire. Think about it. Imagine the Song Dynasty facing five Liao or five Jin Kingdoms simultaneously, with these realms surrounding Song from all directions, each eyeing it with predatory intent, wishing nothing more than to breach its borders, break through its capital, and then divide and consume it. Facing such a perilous environment, Liang could be said to be in constant crisis, always on the verge of collapse and extinction. A single misstep could spell the danger of national demise. In such a situation, choosing a cautious and conservative strategy was only logical and reasonable. Nevertheless, even Liang¡¯s conservative strategy was something Lu Yuan found difficult to accept. ¡°The matter of Ning Country must be resolved quickly, otherwise, if we really wait for them to grow strong with Liang¡¯s support, the situation in Jiangdong might truly slip beyond my control,¡± he thought. Lu Yuan took a deep breath, his concerns for the future situation in Jiangdong growing more intense. Ziyun Dao¡¯s allegiance was based on the premise that Chu held an absolute advantage and that Ning Country was doomed to perish in the future. Therefore, in order to break away from Ning, which was a sinking ship, and to board the hopeful vessel of Chu for the future, they chose to defect to Chu and became a spy in Ning. However, such an allegiance was merely a choice made out of desperation. Even if Ziyun Dao joined Chu, it could only be one of the state religions and would never monopolize Chu¡¯s faith. But in Ning, with their dependence on Ziyun Dao and Ziyun Dao¡¯s penetration, it was quite possible that they could eventually take full control of the country. Perhaps one day, a real Dao Country could emerge in this world. And Ziyun Dao had invested too much into Ning, the sunk cost was too great, would they really be willing to abandon everything and turn to Chu? Now, with Liang¡¯s help, Ning had hope for prolonged resistance against Chu, and its dynasty might continue. As long as it could last for decades or a hundred years and wait until the poisonous fires from the South Pole spread to Yangzhou, even reluctant Chu would have no choice but to join hands with Ning to go north to Central State in search of a way to live. Suddenly, Ning¡¯s desperate situation would be revitalized. With a revitalized Ning, naturally, Ziyun Dao would have no need to appease Chu humbly, to trade for that mere state religion status. It was precisely because of this foreseeable interest in the future that Ziyun Dao, despite having allied with Chu and currently playing the role of a traitor, showed an unreliable hint of change. Playing the role of a loyal vassal in Ning, assuming a stance of irreconcilable enmity with Chua€¡±such acting might very well become reality. By then, faced with a Ning propped up by Liang, eager to fight to the death against Chu, what would Lu Yuan do? ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? Directly take action himself and use Decapitation Tactics to eliminate them all? After such a slaughter, how much magic power would he have to exhaust? Similarly, how would the other Nine Provinces perceive Chu and Lu Yuan after seeing Ning¡¯s fate? Would they form an Alliance and launch a collective assault? Or would they stubbornly resist, fragment, and engage with Lu Yuan in an unrelenting guerrilla warfare? Either option was not what he wished to see. Both would cause Lu Yuan to continuously exhaust his magic power, waste the precious Spiritual Energy he had left, and shorten his potential path to becoming an Immortal. Moreover, they would turn the Nine Provinces into ruins, and even Chu might become a land of broken walls and rubble. A desolate Nine Provinces was not what Lu Yuan wanted, nor could it provide him with enough Qi Luck. ¡°Therefore, the matter of Jiangdong cannot be delayed; it must be resolved as soon as possible,¡± Lu Yuan thought and immediately made up his mind, ¡°Time to send a message to Xuan Chengzi, telling him to have Ziyun Dao¡¯s Inborn, with their soldiers, defect back. While Ning and Liang¡¯s cooperation has not yet officially started, and before Ning gets fattened up, let¡¯s dismantle Ning first. Although it¡¯s a bit hasty, and Chu hasn¡¯t fully digested its gains, there¡¯s no turning back from the bow string now. I am curious to see, with half of the Coastal Aristocratic Family¡¯s Inborn and half of their soldiers defecting to the enemy, what choice will they make in the end?¡± Li Yuan pondered. Since the rise of Chu, especially after defeating Ning, Lu Yuan remembered the continuous correspondence from the Coastal Aristocratic Families. Glancing at the defense map of Jiangdong secretly conveyed by Ziyun Dao and considering the few counties in Lingnan he had already decided to abandon, a smile appeared on his face. If each family could obtain the fiefdom of half a county, ensuring their wealth and titles, it stands to reason that those Coastal Aristocratic Families accustomed to luxury, facing the inevitable, would not be willing to fight to the death, would they? In this way, Chu might be able to incorporate the strength of the Coastal Aristocratic Families while relying on them to maintain rule in Lingnan. Like with the Three Nations of the southwest, achieving submission without battle and perfectly resolving the Jiangdong issue. ¡°Let¡¯s reply to a few letters first and proceed with probing,¡± Lu Yuan muttered to himself. Chapter 927 - Chapter 927 Chapter 389 Ziyuns Internal Troubles ?Chapter 927: Chapter 389 Ziyun¡¯s Internal Troubles Chapter 927: Chapter 389 Ziyun¡¯s Internal Troubles Jinling. Carriages flowed like water, pedestrians weaved like thread. Although it had already ceded half its territory to Jiangdong, as a millennia-old imperial capital, Jinling City remained as bustling as ever. The streets were filled with an unceasing stream of merchants and travelers, the cries of hawkers of all sizes rang in the air, and throngs of people bustled about, while scions of aristocratic families galloped past in their splendid attire amidst the chaos, carefree as they went. ¡°In a country on the brink of collapse, Jinling remains prosperous as ever, even surpassing its former glory,¡± a voice lamented. ¡°The people are lost in this fleeting peace, forgetting the looming hardships. It seems that Ning Country is truly beyond salvation.¡± Inside the Jufu Building, in a luxurious private room on the third floor, the Marquis of Da Ning, the Grand General of the Western Defense, the National Teacher of Ning, True Person Xuan Yu, watched the carefree departure of the scions of the aristocratic families and couldn¡¯t help shaking his head. ¡°Ning people may not have forgotten the hardships, but with Ning Country in decline, what can they do even if they realize their nation¡¯s doom is at this very moment?¡± he mused. ¡°The gap between the two countries is clear for all to see. Even if Ning Country were to give it their all, reality cannot be changed.¡± ¡°In the end, extinction is unavoidable. Rather than facing an ignoble fate later, why not enjoy the remaining luxuries and indulge in the present? For once they become slaves of a conquered land, prisoners beneath the steps, such carefree days will be impossible,¡± said the Purple Cloud Daoist Leader, the Grand National Teacher of Ning, Xuan Chengzi, indifferently. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï ¡°Indeed, it¡¯s better to live happily now rather than die miserably later without having enjoyed anything,¡± he added. Xuan Yu sighed, then looked at his Dao master and asked, ¡°School Leader, does the King of Chu want us to rise up immediately?¡± Xuan Chengzi nodded. ¡°The activities of Liang¡¯s messengers in Jinling have alarmed the King of Chu. To prevent any complications, he has instructed us to act ahead of schedule and cripple Ning Country first.¡± Xuan Yu frowned slightly. ¡°There¡¯s no problem with making a move now. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï My fellow disciples and I have gradually taken control of four hundred thousand soldiers of Ning Country over the past year,¡± he explained. ¡°We¡¯ve even seized control over half of the region to the east of Linhai, and there are not a few soldiers in our grasp in both Guangling Prefecture and the Capital.¡± ¡°With just one action, we could take down half of Ning Country in an instant. Ever since Ning Country retracted back to Jiangdong, the power of the Coastal Aristocratic Family has greatly waned, nearly unable to hold onto even the two remaining prefectures against the heavy forces of Chu.¡± ¡°Fortunately, Purple Cloud Dao pledged to follow to the death. Led by Dao master Xuan Chengzi, the entire sect relocated together with Ning Country to the two prefectures in Jiangdong.¡± ¡°With the assistance of six Inborns from Purple Cloud Dao and the substantial funds they contributed, Ning Country finally managed to stabilize the situation. However, it¡¯s precisely because of this, a large number of soldiers raised with Purple Cloud Dao¡¯s money ultimately turned into their private soldiers, tightly controlled by their hands.¡± ¡°Nowadays, Purple Cloud Dao¡¯s control over four hundred thousand Ning soldiers isn¡¯t just because there are no suitable people in Ning Country; the substantial funds they provided to recruit these soldiers should not be overlooked.¡± ¡°Such a situation naturally led to a division of power within Ning Country, sowing the seeds for future division and infighting.¡± ¡°But for Ning Country at present, future hidden dangers aren¡¯t worth mentioning. Surrendering power to Purple Cloud Dao is nothing, if it means preserving their own land and the Altars of Soil and Grain.¡± ¡°Using a share of power to bind Purple Cloud Dao and ensure they firmly join their own war chariot can only be seen as a welcome development.¡± ¡°So what if it¡¯s power?¡± ¡°As long as the wealth of the Coastal Aristocratic Family is preserved, even if the military position has to be yielded to Purple Cloud Dao and Xuan Chengzi is to be made the Daoist Lord Emperor, that would not be an issue.¡± ¡°After all, their Coastal Aristocratic Family had been taking turns as emperor for two thousand years; no one has ever expected a singular family to rule for a thousand years.¡± ¡°Within the Coastal Aristocratic Family, some had already tentatively inquired with Xuan Chengzi, subtly expressing such intentions.¡± ¡°And such an attitude and sincerity naturally touched Purple Cloud Dao.¡± ¡°Therefore, in the past year, Purple Cloud Dao has been conscientious and has done everything in their power to help Ning Country maintain its rule.¡± ¡°While they never forgot their mission from Chu, dutifully transmitting intelligence about Jiangdong Ning Country to Lu Yuan, they were also fully prepared to turn at any moment.¡± ¡°But they served Ning sincerely at the same time.¡± ¡°This evident fence-sitting stance clearly conveyed the attitude of Purple Cloud Dao.¡± ¡°Swaying from side to side, taking advantage of both.¡± ¡°They feared Chu, yet they were somewhat reluctant to give up the benefits they had gained in Ning.¡± ¡°School Leader, should we really rise up?¡± After hesitating, Xuan Yu couldn¡¯t help but ask, ¡°Ning Country now has the help of Liang, plenty of funds and food, and reinforcements outside. Within the country, there are eight hundred thousand soldiers assisting us. It¡¯s possible we could hold Jiangdong. Just enduring for a few decades might lead to an opportunity.¡± This strategy of dogged defense was a widely circulated argument since Ning Country¡¯s retreat to Jiangdong. And with the recent arrival of Liang¡¯s messengers, offering alliance and assistance, this argument had injected even more spirit into the people of Ning Country. Now, more and more people, including members of Purple Cloud Dao like Xuan Yu, were increasingly inclined to this national policy. A teaching for the entire nation, perhaps establishing a terrestrial Dao Country. Who could resist such a temptation? ¡°Xuan Yu, you¡¯ve been too entangled with the mortal world¡¯s prosperity, and it¡¯s clouded your mind,¡± Xuan Chengzi responded, a chill in his voice as he rebuked, ¡°Chu Country has now consolidated the southwest, and within its borders, it can mobilize thirty-three Inborn Grandmasters and command an army of over two million.¡± ¡°And as time goes by, Chu¡¯s strength will only continue to grow. To reach forty or fifty Inborn Grandmasters and three to five million soldiers in the end is not impossible.¡± Chapter 928 - Chapter 928 Chapter 389 Ziyuns Internal Troubles_2 ?Chapter 928: Chapter 389 Ziyun¡¯s Internal Troubles_2 Chapter 928: Chapter 389 Ziyun¡¯s Internal Troubles_2 ¡°` This power, even compared to Liang State which occupies Qingzhou in The North, isn¡¯t necessarily inferior. However, Liang State also has to deal with formidable enemies in Hebei and the northwest; most of their strength has to be concentrated in The North and the West Side. The troops they can spare for Jiangnan amount to at most thirty percent. With just thirty percent of their strength, coupled with a beleaguered Ning Country, how could it possibly withstand the army of Chu State? Now, Liang State¡¯s support for Ning Country is nothing more than a move to use these Coastal Aristocratic Families and our Purple Cloud Dao to deplete the strength of Chu State and buy them time. Such schemes and tricks, how could we possibly comply with their wishes, sacrificing the lives of my Purple Cloud Dao disciples to lay the foundation for Liang State¡¯s ambition?¡± Unlike those in Inside the Sect, enchanted and misled by the gimmick of becoming a Dao Country on the surface. Xuan Chengzi regards the situation in Jiangnan and the current situation in the Nine Provinces very lightly. He knows that even with Liang State¡¯s help, Ning Country is by no means a match for Chu State, which has unified most of Yangzhou. After all, Liang State is in the north, in Qingzhou. Not in Jiangnan, not in Yangzhou. This very fact alone has determined that Liang State cannot possibly dedicate all its power to the Yangzhou Battlefield. And Ning Country, unable to receive the full support of Liang State, naturally can¡¯t be a match for Chu State, which has integrated more than ninety percent of Yangzhou. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï A coalition that at most controls thirty percent of Qingzhou and ten percent of Yangzhou, against over ninety percent of Yangzhou, does not seem like a winning proposition. ¡°Liang combined with Ning cannot possibly defeat Chu State. But we don¡¯t need to win, we just need to hold out for a few decades until the Four Extremes Change. That¡¯s when our opportunity will arise,¡± Xuan Yu still felt somewhat unwilling to concede. ¡°Opportunity?¡± Xuan Chengzi snorted coldly upon hearing this, ¡°What opportunity? Are you referring to the Ning Country that, decades later, might be beaten down to a state of disrepair by Chu State, possibly having only two to three million population, ten thousand soldiers, and it¡¯s uncertain whether there will even be ten Inborn masters? Deluded into thinking that after fighting for decades, harboring deep-seated hatred, and being overwhelmingly powerful, Chu State would then form an alliance with it to march north into Central State? Don¡¯t be foolish. Chu State would never ally with an enemy that has blocked its way for decades. And Ning Country, besieged by Chu State for so many years, if it could still survive, would lack the strength to move north into Central State to wrestle for territory with the rest of the world. Based on Ning¡¯s scant resources, how much territory could they capture if they really fought in Central State? One county? One prefecture? Surely not an entire province, right? Without a province¡¯s worth of territory, how can Ning hope to establish itself amidst the wolves of Central State? It is likely that before long, they would be annexed by the other powers, leading to the downfall of the nation and the destruction of the home. If so, what would be the point of our sect shedding its blood cleanly for decades? Helping Chu State, on the other hand, is a different matter. If Chu State can integrate Yangzhou, it can watch the power struggle in the northern lands at leisure, observing states like Liang, Zhao Xu, Wei, and others, fight each other to the death. When these countries have fought to exhaustion, then advancing north for a Northern Expedition, even if it cannot capture the entirety of Qingzhou, it could still take five or six prefectures worth of territory. That would be a foundational enterprise for half a province. So no matter how you look at it, Chu State is a guaranteed Central State hegemon. ¡°Would you rather be a country with the power of one prefecture, or a hegemonic state religion?¡± Xuan Chengzi posed a probing question that cut right to the heart. A country with the power of one prefecture, a hegemonic state religion. These two paths were clearly and unmistakably laid out before Xuan Yu. Faced with this question, there¡¯s really no need for further consideration; the answer was already clear. ¡°Naturally, it¡¯s the hegemonic state religion.¡± Facing the bloody reality and the penetrating gaze of the School Leader Ling Li, Xuan Yu, no matter how unwilling, could only suppress his ambition and reply with bitterness. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? A territory of one prefecture, no matter how prosperous, could at most sustain a million people. But as a hegemon of half a province, even at a glance, it must encompass at least twenty to thirty million people. Considering In the future, with the significant concentration of the Nine Provinces¡¯ population in Central State, the richer and more powerful the country, the greater the population it will eventually control. Thus, Chu State, if it moved to Central State, could control a population that would not be less than forty to fifty million people, even if it ended up seizing only five or six prefectures¡¯ worth of land, as Xuan Chengzi predicted. Facing such a vast base of supporters, even if they had to share with Feishuang Tao, Purple Cloud Dao would still get its share of twenty to thirty million believers. But facing a small, weak country on the brink of extinction, what significance does it have to be a recognized Dao Country, even if it became one? The choice for Purple Cloud Dao seems quite clear. Xuan Chengzi saw this clearly, which is why he chose to stand firmly by Chu State¡¯s side even during times of unrest within the sect, with many being enticed by the notion of becoming a Dao Country on earth. Because that represents the future. ¡°Now that you see this clearly, I can rest assured.¡± Xuan Chengzi looked at Xuan Yu, who seemed deflated, his expression finally softened a great deal, and then he continued to offer reassurance: ¡°Indeed, following Chu State is a good thing for our sect. If it were as all of you say, to firmly ally with Ning Country, or even make Ning Country the state religion of our Purple Cloud Dao, and then lead this state religion north into Central State¡­ In the end, Purple Cloud Dao would step beyond its status as an outsider and become an insider. You should also consider this. Given the ruthlessness of worldly power struggles, can any of the royal relatives and nobles from a defeated nation survive? They are all thoroughly executed by the victor, leaving no chance for future troubles. If our Purple Cloud Dao¡¯s state religion were to be defeated in the power struggle of Central State¡­ ¡°` Chapter 929 - Chapter 929 Chapter 389 Ziyuns Internal Troubles_3 ?Chapter 929: Chapter 389 Ziyun¡¯s Internal Troubles_3 Chapter 929: Chapter 389 Ziyun¡¯s Internal Troubles_3 ¡°Not only is our kingdom destined for ruin, but all of us, disciples of Purple Cloud Dao who wield the great power of a nation, will also not survive.¡± ¡°Should we perish, can Purple Cloud Dao, as the remnant, still be preserved?¡± ¡°I fear that by then, the enemies we once offended, such as Chu State, will follow suit, beating the dog in the water to avenge their grudge against us for obstructing their unification in Jiangnan.¡± ¡°At that time, the Dao inheritance of Purple Cloud Dao will truly be severed, and you and I will both be sinners of our sect.¡± ¡°On the contrary.¡± ¡°If Purple Cloud Dao were to take refuge under Chu State, sheltering under the banner of Chu State, then even if Chu State were to be defeated in the struggle for Central State and fall to conquest in the future,¡± ¡°I mean, Purple Cloud Dao and Feishuang Tao could distance ourselves from the affairs, removing ourselves from them in the name of Daoist Path.¡± ¡°At most, we would simply have to sever ties with those disciples in our sect who served Chu State and expel them.¡± ¡°Then Purple Cloud Dao could still be cleansed and preserved.¡± ¡°After all, though Chu State may fall, our Daoist Path still has Inborn Grandmasters, and on this point, the interests of the world¡¯s Daoist Paths also align.¡± ¡°Those mortal dynasties would never dare to push things to extremities if they do not wish to incur the wrath of an Inborn from the Daoist Path, as well as the animosity of Daoist Paths across the world.¡± ¡°Xuan Chengzi seemed to remember something here, so he looked at Xuan Yu with a meaningful expression and said, ¡°Moreover, you want to lead Ning Country to hold out to the bitter end.¡± ¡°But have you considered that even if we ally with Liang Country and have the support of Purple Cloud Dao, it¡¯s still impossible to be a match for Chu State?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t forget.¡± ¡°The six Qinghuang True Persons that Chu State has successively brought forth in recent times.¡± ¡°With all of the Nine Provinces¡¯ cultivators having ascended, the emergence of six True Persons, who bear the same Dao names as the previously known Qingyunzi and Huang Xuan of Chu State.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Having accepted it after a hard swallow, Xuan Yu was forced to acknowledge this fact which he was most reluctant to believe.¡± ¡°Yes, the Gathering of Two Qi.¡± Xuan Chengzi¡¯s expression was also complex. The future interests of the Great Sect laid before him, forcing him to seriously consider, ¡°The might and terror of a cultivator who has gathered the Two Qi, you and I should both be clear, right? If everything is like what¡¯s recorded in the ancient texts, then cultivators like you and I, before the King of Chu, are like martial artists below the Innate level before us, utterly incapable of withstanding a single blow. Even if we could gather thirteen, or even more Innates, as long as the King of Chu personally makes a move, it would merely be sending ourselves to our deaths. Even without the King of Chu lifting a finger, just relying on his avatars who possess cultivation comparable to the second realm of Innate, eight avatars acting together, eight second-realm Innates, would be enough to sweep across Jiangdong. The gap above Innate is just too vast. Resisting stubbornly will only result in a needless sacrifice, dragging our sect and those coastal aristocratic families to their collective demise. You and I carry heavy responsibilities, bearing the expectations of the previous Dao masters, and must not commit such folly.¡± Upon the mention of the previous Dao master, Xuan Yu¡¯s face twitched, as he recalled that towering and elegant figure, and with the last trace of resistance dissolving in his heart, he sighed helplessly, ¡°I understand. I will personally persuade the others in our sect, and will not delay in taking action or fail to keep our promise to Chu State.¡± ¡°If my disciple thinks this way, then I am relieved,¡± Xuan Chengzi nodded in satisfaction. ?¦Ï??0.§ã0 Nowadays, the main proponents within Purple Cloud Dao for controlling Ning Country and establishing a Dao Country on earth were basically led by Xuan Yu. If Xuan Yu changed his mind, under his leadership, it would undoubtedly influence a large portion, if not all, of the Dao Country faction¡¯s disciples. This was the reason Xuan Chengzi wished to speak with Xuan Yu. By persuading him, he would have persuaded the entire Dao Country faction, and could bring Purple Cloud Dao back from the wrong path. ¡°Everything is for the sake of the sect,¡± Xuan Yu stood up, gestured with his hand, and spoke despondently, ¡°The King of Chu can still cultivate in this Age of Extinct Spirit, I really don¡¯t know what method he is using. If the previous Dao masters were still here, and knew this method, they might not have been forced to leave. Now ascending to the Immortal Realm, the path ahead is uncertain, and it¡¯s hard to tell if the Great Dao can truly be found.¡± Xuan Chengzi stood up as well and responded indifferently to the words, ¡°Who knows? However, even if the King of Chu can cultivate, presumably the method is extremely harsh and perhaps entirely unusable by others. Otherwise, why is it that within Chu State, aside from him, no one else has been heard of cultivating Immortal Techniques? Moreover, in this Age of Extinct Spirit, even if one can cultivate, the journey is undoubtedly full of hardships, and the path to immortality is hard to find. At best, one can only prolong their suffering for a while longer. The previous Dao masters had a chance for Ascension, at least there was a slim possibility of becoming immortal, and it might not necessarily be worse than the King of Chu hiding here in the mortal realm of Nine Provinces. But with the King of Chu¡¯s cultivation of Gathering Two Qi, his lifespan is a full three hundred years, twice that of us Innates, and with a kingship to hold, he can indeed be called carefree. With such a mighty ruler in Chu State, not to mention anything else, at least a foundation for three hundred years is guaranteed. Compared to the other Immortal Sects in Nine Provinces and the common dynasties they serve, it is already much stronger.¡± ¡°Yes, by allying with him, we at least have one cultivator who has gathered the Two Qi on our side, which is already stronger than many,¡± Xuan Yu sighed. ¡°Enough, let¡¯s not talk about this.¡± Xuan Chengzi shook his head and looked at his fellow disciple, ¡°This time, the King of Chu wants us to cause an uprising, and he¡¯s also offered the coastal aristocratic families the reward of their own fiefdoms to win them over. I¡¯ve already arranged to meet with Marquis Wuming to gauge his intentions. You should hurry and persuade our fellow sect members as well, time is of the essence, we cannot afford to delay.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Xuan Yu bowed to take his leave. Chapter 930 - Chapter 930 Chapter 390 Migrant Alliances with Wei ?Chapter 930: Chapter 390 Migrant Alliances with Wei Chapter 930: Chapter 390 Migrant Alliances with Wei In the twelfth year of Shenwu, in September, the Ziyun Dao of Ning Country rebelled. They openly raised flags and changed their allegiances, announcing their submission to Great Chu. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï In an instant, of the two prefectures and seventeen counties in Ning Country, eight switched their allegiances, instantly becoming territories of Chu. An army of eight hundred thousand, with four hundred thousand changing their colors, pledged loyalty to the King of Chu. And Great Chu reacted swiftly as well. At the moment Ziyun Dao surrendered, Huang Xuan of Yuzhang Prefecture led an army of one hundred thousand to press towards the counties of Xin¡¯an and Dongyang in Linhai, joining forces with the two hundred thousand rebel troops of Ziyun Dao¡¯s Xuan Yin and Xuan Yi, gaining control over various counties south of Jinling. Qingyunzi from Jian¡¯an County led an army of one hundred thousand, pressing towards the regions of Yongjia and Linhai in Linhai County, meeting with the one hundred fifty thousand troops of Ziyun Dao¡¯s Xuan Xi, Xuan Yu, and Xuan Lu, taking control over various counties in the eastern part of Linhai. Xuan Yu of Ziyun Dao raised an army of fifty thousand at the border of Linhai and Guangling, capturing prefectures and counties, cutting off the land communication between Jinling and Guangling. For a time, the Imperial Capital of Ning Country, Jinling, was surrounded on three sides, with four hundred thousand traitors joining with the two hundred thousand Chu troops. As they advanced, the local Ning Army was either surrendered or crushed. The news returned, shaking Jinling, shaking the court, shaking the Coastal Aristocratic Family. The survival of Ning Country was in peril, hanging by a thread. ¡­ Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Tianluo Mountain. ¡°So, out of the seven Inborns from the Coastal Aristocratic Family, already three have shown a tendency to surrender to Great Chu?¡±, Lu Yuan asked Du Xin, the Commander of the Royal City¡¯s External Affairs, with a smile on his face. ¡°Your Majesty, indeed it is so,¡± Du Xin replied respectfully. ¡°Marquis of Wujiang, Chu Ming; Marquis of Wuming, Wang Xiu; and Marquis of Wuyi, Yu Ying¨Crepresentatives of the six surnames and seven clans have all expressed their willingness to switch allegiance to Great Chu when our troops march westward.¡± Besides, Marquis Wuming Muchangqing and Martial Proclamation Marquis Yang Jing are somewhat wavering. Perhaps when Ning Country is completely in dire straits, and troops are at the gates, these two will also surrender. The only ones who remain resolute are Emperor Shenqiu of Ning and Wucheng Marquis Shangguan Ming, who staunchly refuse to surrender. However, the majority of their clan members are in awe and admiration of Great Chu and are constantly urging them. For the sake of their clan, these two may also surrender in the end.¡± After turning Ziyun Dao, Great Chu¡¯s series of actions to woo and divide Jiangdong have been like adding wings to a tiger¨Cincredibly successful. The aristocratic families of Jiangdong are smart people who know how to turn with the wind. They all understand that with Ziyun Dao surrendered and the nation in such a state, their own meager strength is fundamentally insufficient to hold Ning Country. After all, nearly half of the Inborn Grandmasters and half of the military forces have been controlled by the traitorous Ziyun Dao insiders. The once-solid line of defense was instantly breached; the Chu army could easily drive in deep and meet with those traitors within the nation. Under such circumstances, what could the remaining seven Inborns and four hundred thousand troops do? Even some ancestral lands of the six surnames and seven clans had already been controlled by Ziyun Dao, their clan members at the mercy of Ziyun Dao. If these clans dared to resist, instant clan extermination would be their fate. With their lives and wealth at stake, who would dare to resist? The three Innate Martial Marquises expressed their intentions to ally, as Du Xin said, precisely because Ziyun Dao controlled their families. The lives of thousands within their family, young and old, hung on the whims of Ziyun Dao; the Marquises had no choice but to submit for the sake of their entire clan¡¯s lives. As for Muchangqing and Yang Jing, these two men¡¯s families, though not controlled by Ziyun Dao, Were located right next to Ziyun Dao¡¯s territory. Currently, they were being closely watched or surrounded by Ziyun Dao forces, also under constant threat. Moreover, in the wake of Ziyun Dao¡¯s rebellion, they also understood that Ning Country was truly doomed. To continue resistance meant only more pointless casualties. So, caught between two choices, they wavered between surrendering and defending to the death. As for Shenqiu and Shangguan Ming, these two truly wished to die serving their country. The two-thousand-year foundation of the Coastal Aristocratic Family, if ruined in their hands, would leave all of them, Shenqiu included, no choice but to die of shame. In such a situation, they could not face living in disgrace. Moreover, bowing to Lu Yuan, men of aristocratic birth like them would not allow themselves; they could not put aside their pride. Rather than abandoning their dignity, they¡¯d prefer to die gloriously, preserving their honor. Death seemed their best option. But though these two might wish for death, the clansmen of the Shen and Shangguan families certainly did not wish to accompany them to ruin. The Shen and Shangguan families were prominent among the six surnames and seven clans, having thrived for several hundred years, with tens of thousands of members. It was easy for them to seek death, but to take along fifty or sixty thousand clan members was excessive. No one wants to die when there¡¯s an option, especially when that option seems promising, leaving even fewer people willing to die. Great Chu had already made an offer. As long as the six surnames and seven clans were willing to surrender, anyone among them with an Inborn member could be granted half a county and become a duke, establishing their own nation in Lingnan. Though Lingnan was poor and could not compare to the wealth of Jiangdong, they could at least be sovereign rulers there. Moving there, these royal families could still dominate locally and remain important figures. Wealth and power were always available. Furthermore, Duke Song, Xie Ning, also came from the six surnames and seven clans; considering the relationships, he was related to these aristocratic families of Jiangdong. With him looking after them in Lingnan, settling down could be much easier. With such a bright future ahead, who would choose to forego the prospect of becoming a new nation¡¯s nobility and instead die gloriously alongside their clan leader? Chapter 931 - Chapter 931 Chapter 390 Migrant Alliances with Wei_2 ?Chapter 931: Chapter 390 Migrant Alliances with Wei_2 Chapter 931: Chapter 390 Migrant Alliances with Wei_2 Therefore, when the Coastal Aristocratic Families of Jiangdong were submitting, the families of the Shen and Shangguan were in a state of desperation. Elder after elder took turns to persuade, and groups of women and children came with their toddlers to weep, all to urge Shen Qiu and Shangguan Ming to change their minds and not stubbornly resist to the end, thinking of their vulnerable families. This extensive effort to encourage surrender caused a great commotion, and it was said that the whole of Jinling city was shaken, while Shen Qiu and Shangguan Ming were also driven to a frazzle, deeply shaken in spirit. In recent days, they had not mentioned any talk of preferring death to surrender. Looking at this trend, it was estimated that these two were also about to surrender. ¡°Hahaha.¡± Upon hearing the news, Lu Yuan laughed heartily, expressing the joy in his heart before he restrained the laughter, and happily said, ¡°Very good, Purple Cloud Dao has done well. In this campaign to annihilate Ning Country, they should be credited with the chief merit. However, Ning Country has not yet fully surrendered, and there are still several hundred thousand troops in the country, with several members of Inborn, not to be underestimated. While these people have not surrendered, there are still variables in Jiangdong.¡± After his joyful moment, Lu Yuan thought of those who were still observing and resisting on the ground in Jiangdong, pondered for a short while, and then said, ¡°Immediately contact Purple Cloud Dao and ask them to bring Marquis of Wujiang, Chu Ming, Marquis of Wuming, Wang Xiu, and Marquis of Wuyi, Yu Ying to Tianluo Mountain. Previously I had promised them that as long as they surrendered, the reward of a fiefdom would be granted. Now that these three families have already turned to me, it is fitting to fulfill my promise. Tell them that I plan to use Yulin County and Tonghai County to establish Ninghai Country, Nanning Country, and Tong Hai Country, to reward the contributions of these three families. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Now let these three come to Tianluo Mountain to receive their fiefs, and then arrange for their clans to migrate to Lingnan as soon as possible to establish their countries. Besides, those Coastal Aristocratic Families without members of Inborn are also permitted to migrate with the ennobled families, with each country allowed to select one family to follow and join them in their move. Great Chu will not hinder them.¡± Since two months ago, Lu Yuan decided to mobilize Purple Cloud Dao ahead of time to press for Ning Country¡¯s surrender and to distribute those Coastal Aristocratic Families to various counties in Lingnan and the southwest. For the local populace of Tonghai and Yulin counties, Lu Yuan has started the migration. In Tonghai County over there, the main people being moved were the local Chu people. Some of the conquered Yi People, due to laziness in management and assimilation, were left there, planning to hand them over to those Coastal Aristocratic Families to deal with. In Yulin County, the main group moved were the commoners and some local gentry and influential families inclined towards Chu State. However, some remnants of Su Country, mainly descendants of the Nine River Sword Sect and local influential families hostile towards Chu, these unstable elements, were left behind. Now, several months have passed, and the approximately six hundred thousand controllable citizens were gradually moved by Lu Yuan to Xiangyang Prefecture in the north, to bolster the local population. As for Tonghai and Yulin counties, about a hundred thousand people were left in each, significantly thinning the population. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï However, those Coastal Aristocratic Families, each one was considerable in size and had thrived for more than two thousand years, practically every family had a large population. Any one of these six surnames and seven clans, just by its own members, would number tens of thousands, and if counting those connected to them, a hundred thousand was nothing unusual. For those offspring of deeply rooted local families, Lu Yuan certainly would not allow them to stay in Linhai County, continuing their local connections, and hindering the rule of Chu. So, for these remnants of the previous dynasty, his method was to relocate them all. I do not wish to be thoroughly ruthless; that would be too cruel. But neither should you cause trouble locally for me; all of you go to Lingnan, and there you can do as you please. We will not bother each other. So, for each of these six surnames and seven clans, each family can bring about a hundred thousand people when they migrate, with some perhaps even more. Now among the Jiangdong families with Inborn individuals, even counting Shen Qiu, the Heavenly Son of Ning Country, there are no more than seven families in all. Therefore, the small kingdoms granted in Lingnan this time are likely to be limited to seven in number. And the counties in Lingnan which Lu Yuan is ready to give up are precisely Jiuzhen, Tonghai, Yulin, and half of Southsea, just enough for these seven to divide among themselves. However, among these six surnames and seven clans, aside from the seven families with Inborn individuals, there are six more families without Inborn. These six families without Inborn can only choose one country for themselves and migrate to the selected nation according to the allocation of one country per family. With this distribution method of one country per family, plus the population provided with their fiefdom by Lu Yuan, each small country with half a county can manage to have a population of about two or three hundred thousand. In this way, it might be barely possible to support the scale of a small country. ¡°Yes, Your Majesty, I shall carry out your orders,¡± Du Xin replied upon receiving the instructions and immediately left to execute them. Lu Yuan then continued to ponder on the spot. Though the population in each of the three small countries parceled out this time was somewhat scant, the promise had been kept to the minimum. With these three examples before them, the Coastal Aristocratic Families still in observation should also be able to settle down and pledge their loyalty peacefully. And with the dissolution of the largest resistance in Jiangdong, those with ambitions would no longer be able to stir up trouble. The situation in the two counties of Linhai and Guangling was thereby nearly stabilized. ¡°However, Tonghai and Yulin counties, being places of vast lands and sparse people, moving hundreds of thousands of householders and commoners there doesn¡¯t pose much of a problem. But the remaining Jiuzhen and Southsea counties together have only six million households; to move them all would indeed be a massive undertaking.¡± Moving populations, for Chu State, had already become commonplace. Back when it was still the State of Changsha, after the victory of the Northern Expedition against Zhou Country, Lu Yuan moved two million people back from the prefectures of Xichuan and Hanzhong, a migration project that lasted more than a year, with settling the immigrants taking several more years. Chapter 932 - Chapter 932 Chapter 390 Migrant Alliances with Wei_3 ?Chapter 932: Chapter 390 Migrant Alliances with Wei_3 Chapter 932: Chapter 390 Migrant Alliances with Wei_3 After subjugating the southwest and seizing Qianzhong and Xichuan Prefectures, the country undertook another few years of relocating households from various regions. After several instances of large-scale migration involving millions of people, Chu State became extremely proficient in managing all matters related to immigration. Now, relocating six million people at once, although a massive undertaking, was not impossible given the foundations of Chu State as it currently stood. After all, with several grain-producing regions in hand and the soon-to-be-acquired wealthy territories of Linhai and Guangling, the country had an incalculable surplus of grain each year that could fully support such expenditures. However, even though it was manageable, resettling six million people was an enormous task. Undertaking it would mean that Chu State¡¯s finances would be primarily focused on this project for nearly two years, leaving little room for other significant undertakings. ¡°Furthermore, in the west, in order to support Huang Xin¡¯s defensive warfare strategy these past few months, the country has spent millions of silver taels and five million stones of grain, with ongoing expenses still expanding. Add in immigration, and the financial situation is starting to become unsustainable,¡± Lu Yuan said with a bit of a headache. In the northwest, there were four to five million barbarians waiting for aid from Chu State. In Lingnan as well, there were six million people waiting to be relocated. Add them up, and you¡¯re looking at providing for over ten million people. The total population of Chu State was only twenty-eight million seventy thousand. Even when counting the soon-to-be-acquired Jiangdong, the population would only reach thirty-six million. This number still needed to be reduced by the six million people migrating from Lingnan, who wouldn¡¯t be able to settle down and resume production in less than two to three years. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï In other words, For the next two to three years, Chu State would have to use thirty million people to support ten million, the pressure of which could only be imagined. If it weren¡¯t for Lu Yuan having Xichuan, Jianghan, Dongting, and Pengli as four major grain-producing regions, as well as the imminent acquisition of the rich and productive Linhai County, With these five granaries in hand, he wouldn¡¯t dare to embark on this plan. ¡°Supporting the warfare in the northwest and the migration in Lingnan are essentially the primary national strategies of Chu State for the next two to three years. During this period, Chu State will barely have the spare capacity to deal with anything else. Now that Ning Country has been dissolved by my use of Purple Cloud Dao and the fiefdom strategy, Liang Country¡¯s plan to maintain a ¡®nail¡¯ in Jiangnan to contain Chu State has failed. They surely won¡¯t be content with this. They might become furious out of embarrassment and decide to confront us in battle personally. At such a critical moment, we absolutely cannot allow them to ruin the grand strategy for the next hundred years.¡± Lu Yuan frowned, his expression unsettled. Migrating six million people from Lingnan to Han, Xiangyang, Dongting, Yuzhang, Linhai, and Guangling Prefectures bordering Central State was intended to facilitate the more effective mobilization of money, grain, and manpower for future campaigns against Central State. It was also preparation for a more effortless relocation of households to the north of the river in the future. This was a strategy that benefited both the country and its people, and it could not be abandoned. Containing the Western Liang in the northwest was to eliminate a formidable enemy for Chu State and solve a persistent border threat, allowing for the full mobilization of national resources towards the ambition of Central State. This too was of great importance and could not be neglected. But how could Liang Country, who had been keenly watching Chu State, not realize that allowing Chu State to succeed in these two endeavors and resolve all hidden dangers would pose a massive threat to themselves? Therefore, it was a certainty that Liang Country would come to hinder these plans in the end. ¡°No, these two national strategies cannot be destroyed by Liang Country.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s expression turned slightly cold as his gaze moved to the map of the Nine Provinces behind him, slowly shifting around the borders of Liang until finally settling on the west, where Zhou and Wei lay. A cold smile appeared on his lips, ¡°The people of Liang want to hammer two nails in the northwest and Jiangnan to shield the threats from the southwest. Now the situation in Jiangnan has been thwarted by me, causing them to lose an arm. At present, they shouldn¡¯t even think about leaving the nail in the west behind. If Zhou Country could be taken down and the wolf-like Wei people allowed into Guannei, I¡¯m afraid the western border of Liang would be beset by constant beacon fires, making peaceful sleep difficult, wouldn¡¯t it?¡± Wei Country is indeed a major power. Although its territory has not entirely unified the region of Yan State and spans only ten prefectures, it boasts a population of over thirty million and an army of two million. If we don¡¯t consider the territory, in terms of sheer strength, it is by no means inferior to the Chu State under Lu Yuan at present. Moreover, in recent years, the Wei people have been continuously moving southward, first snatching the Shuofang Prefecture from Zhou Country, and now they are invading the central state of Guannei Prefecture, with a momentum that is ferocious. Under their assault, Zhou Country is nearly at the brink of collapse. Though in the past six months, with the shift in Liang¡¯s state policy to support powers in Jiangnan and Guanxi as a way to shield its western and southern flanks, Zhou Country, which received support, gradually regained some vitality and saw better days. But, no matter how good the days, the scale of Zhou Country remains unchanged. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Only four prefectures are left, two of which are in ruins. The population has dwindled to merely thirteen million, with all able-bodied men being conscripted into the military. With only seven Inborn Grandmasters left, facing over twenty Inborns from Wei Country, it clearly shows weakness at every turn. With such strength, even with Liang¡¯s support, how much vitality can be restored in a short time? And to stand against Wei Country becomes even more difficult. Now, they are merely relying on strong city defenses, constantly sacrificing lives and cities, to wear down Wei Country and drag out time. But even so. Under the powerful offensive of Wei Country, the Zhou people have already lost half of Guannei Prefecture to this day. The vanguard troops of Wei Country have already arrived at the gates of Zhou Country¡¯s capital, Chang¡¯an City. The proposal from the Zhou Country¡¯s court to move the capital, which once sparked debate, now has no opposition. The entire court and country agree with the emperor¡¯s plan to hunt to the east. However, moving the capital is a significant matter. It¡¯s not so easy to move the several million people surrounding Chang¡¯an in such a short time. Not to mention the Wei troops nearby, eagerly watching, ready to attack at any moment. Thus, even if the Zhou people want to relocate their capital, they cannot do so right away. Once Zhou Country moves its capital and gives up Guannei Prefecture, all that will be left are the two complete prefectures of Nanyang and Henan, and a small part of Xiangyang Prefecture. Once Wei Country takes over Guannei Prefecture, it will border Chu State and become a neighbor to Great Chu. Similarly. Wei Country just needs to continue eastward, to take over either Henan or Nanyang Prefecture, to border Liang. And Henan and Nanyang Prefectures are the fertile lands of Central State, the tickets to the long-lasting rule of the country in the future. Isn¡¯t what Wei Country seeks by risking so many soldiers moving southward precisely these two tickets held in Zhou Country¡¯s hands? Now that the ultimate goal is within reach, can Wei Country really restrain itself from acting? ¡°Just by sending a messenger to contact Wei Country and jointly move against Zhou Country¡¯s Henan and Nanyang Prefectures, I¡¯m afraid the opponent would immediately agree,¡± thought Lu Yuan. Chapter 933 - Chapter 933 Chapter 391 Southward! ?Chapter 933: Chapter 391: Southward! Southward! Chapter 933: Chapter 391: Southward! Southward! On the vast plains, a world blanketed in white. While Jiangnan was still in late autumn and the north of the river had just begun to enter winter, here on the northern steppes, Heaven and Earth were already covered in heavy snow. But what was more heartbreaking was that even in such snowy weather, the nomads of the grassland could not rest. They had to endure the bitter cold and hunger, struggling to migrate through the endless snow. ¡°Hurry, it has only been snowing for half a month, and the weather isn¡¯t at its coldest yet.¡± A middle-aged man dressed as a tribal leader rode back and forth on a fine horse, encouraging his people in the migrating tribe: ¡°If we keep moving for two more pastures, we¡¯ll find the camp left by the Anyan tribe, where we can spend the winter.¡± The herdsmen trudged through snow that reached their calves, each step an utmost struggle, but hearing the words of their leader Anshan, they felt rejuvenated, summoning a burst of energy, and quickened their pace. Watching his people press on valiantly, Anshan sighed with relief. With their current pace, they should arrive at the Anyan tribe¡¯s pastures before sunset. There, with the camp left by the Anyan tribe, they could rest temporarily and make it through the winter. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï The children of the grassland, accustomed to the bitter cold all year round, could thus travel in snowy weather. But now the snow was getting heavier, so much so that even these children of the grassland were starting to find it unbearable. Continuing on through the falling snow was possible. But more people would quickly begin to freeze or starve to death along the way. And as deep winter slowly came upon them, there would come a day when even they couldn¡¯t endure the cold. By then, even the children of the grassland would be unable to move about outside. If they didn¡¯t have a place to rest by then, the entire tribe might be buried in the wind and snow. Finding a place to shelter from the wind and snow and rest temporarily became urgent. Fortunately, ahead on their southward migration route lay an abandoned settlement from the Anyan tribe, with wooden huts and earth pits to shield them from the snow. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ¡°The tribe has enough grain and firewood for now, we should be able to get through the winter,¡± whispered Anshan, his gaze turning northward, filled with worry. The days on the grassland were getting tougher. Every year brought storms and snow, the kind of severe weather that used to occur once in over a decade, now arrived annually. And with each passing year, the scale grew larger, the duration longer, and the frequency higher. Under the impact of the harsh weather, the herdsmen of the northern grassland were struggling to survive, forced to migrate southward. They sought a warm and moist place untouched by the severe weather, where the tribe could graze and settle anew. However, the journey south was far from smooth sailing. In fact, the migration activity of these northern grassland herdsmen began five to six years ago. Over the years, more than half of the tribes on the northern grasslands had migrated away. But the news brought back by those who had moved south was far from uplifting. In this world, every piece of land capable of sustaining life has been claimed over ten thousand years of development. In the past, the various tribes of the northern grasslands often fought over the pastures, countless battles erupted for this reason. The grasslands of the south, with a better climate and richer water and grass, naturally supported more tribes, thus intensifying the people-land conflict. How could the southern tribes welcome these northern herdsmen coming to seize the pastures essential for their survival? As expected, a great war broke out between two vast nomadic groups, one from the south and one from the north. Countless tribes, in the struggle for survival, began a desperate battle on the grassland. Now, once winter on the grassland passes, the first thing each tribe does is not to graze cattle and sheep but to summon the warriors within their tribe and join forces with their allies in search of enemy tribes to fight. After such battles, hundreds, even thousands, of tribes on the north and south grasslands were eliminated. As for the number of herdsmen who died, it was already unknown whether it was in the millions or tens of millions. Anyway, according to what Anshan knew, of the several tribes that used to be friendly with him, only one survived after moving south. Even the surviving tribe was living in dire straits. Each year, during the warm season, they had to summon the men of the tribe to fight, entrusting the task of grazing cattle and sheep to the women and children, who had no rest throughout the year. Considering these circumstances, in one or two years, that tribe might also come to an end. ¡°But now, has the time come for my tribe to face the same fate?¡± Anshan shifted his gaze from the north back toward the south. The landscape was a blinding expanse of white, seemingly the purest substance in the world. Yet within this purity, he saw a splash of red, the color of blood. And he was leading his tribe on a blood-soaked path, a path whose end was uncertain. But even with that knowledge, Anshan had no room for retreat. Because the winds and snow of the north, more terrifying than blood, were pushing him step by step to migrate southward, to find a way of life amidst blood and fire. ¡°The great snowstorm! The great snowstorm is coming!¡± Just as Anshan¡¯s thoughts drifted into melancholy, suddenly a cry of panic pierced his ears. Chapter 934 - Chapter 934 Chapter 391 Heading South! ?Chapter 934: Chapter 391 Heading South! Heading South! _2 Chapter 934: Chapter 391 Heading South! Heading South! _2 Hearing the three words ¡°Great Snowy Wind,¡± he shuddered all over, suddenly turned his head, and looked in the direction of the sound. But he saw in the distance that amidst the vast expanse, a sound akin to wailing ghosts and howling wolves suddenly arose, closely followed by a grey shadow enveloping everything, rolling toward the direction in which his tribe was moving. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ¡°Quick! Run for your lives!¡± Witnessing this scene, Anshan cried out sharply, his eyes filled with immense fear, ¡°The Great Snowy Wind is here, everyone drop your belongings and run!¡± As he spoke, he no longer cared for anything else, his whip flailing as he rode his steed to a part of the tribal procession, then he snatched a child from the arms of a panicked woman, held his own son, and escaped in the opposite direction. As for his wife and the fellow tribespeople behind him, he could no longer afford to care for them and left them behind. Some of the other warriors on patrol, following his example, took their children or simply abandoned everything, incessantly striking their horses with their whips, driving the steeds to flee into the distance. However, they hadn¡¯t gotten far when the Great Snowy Wind from afar quickly swept over. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Countless large snowflakes, driven by the bitter wind, obscured heaven and earth. The entire world was shrouded in wind and snow, turning into a grey expanse where the panicked nomads were instantly submerged, their piercing screams and the sounds of their desperate escape consumed by the endless storm in the blink of an eye. Even Anshan, galloping ahead on his horse, which he had personally captured and tamed from amongst a group of over a thousand on the grassland, couldn¡¯t escape this most terrifying natural disaster of the plains. He had only run south for a dozen or so miles before the Great Snowy Wind caught up and he disappeared into the storm. And all this, for the dark shadow, was merely a movement to the south. The piercing cries of the wind and snow, carrying the terrifying Great Snowy Wind of the grasslands, descended upon this northern world in early winter. ¡­ Rumbling sounds echoed, the earth trembling. In the midst of shouts and mournful wails, the beacon fires turned to embers, the ground watered by blood and iron, and as warhorses charged, a war drew to its close. Mou Yan swung his saber, a fierce cold light flourishing, instantly cutting more than ten men before him in two. The space before him suddenly cleared, and looking back, he saw no enemies nearby. Countless warriors gathered around him, the Great Khan, holding their weapons aloft and cheerfully shouting. ¡°Gray Wolf!¡± ¡°Long live the Great Khan!¡± ¡°Blessed by the Sky God!¡± Everyone was celebrating this exhilarating victory. For having defeated the enemies here, their Gray Wolf tribe had now secured this lush pasture, finally securing a foothold for the tribe on the southern grasslands. A smile appeared on Mou Yan¡¯s face as well. Since migrating southward, despite facing many hardships, under his leadership, the tribe had finally overcome one enemy after another, securing this ultimate victory. The shouts of countless warriors now only served to confirm his supreme prestige in the hearts of his tribespeople. But amidst the celebration, the tribe¡¯s Great Shaman hastened over, with many warriors respectfully stepping aside to clear a path as he passed. In the tribal society of the grasslands, the secular belonged to the Great Khan, while the divine belonged to the shaman. And the Great Shaman, the leader among countless shamans, was the spokesperson of the divine in the mortal realm, with a status even slightly more exalted than that of the Great Khan. Of course, this was only concerning status. In terms of power, naturally, the Great Khan who held worldly authority had greater influence. Therefore, Mou Yan held great respect for the Great Shaman of the tribe. ¡°Great Khan, another great snowy wind has appeared on the Uke Grassland,¡± the Great Shaman said in a low voice, approaching Mou Yan. ¡°Uke Grassland¡­¡± Hearing this news, Mou Yan¡¯s brow furrowed deeply, his mood of recent victory instantly dissipated, and he couldn¡¯t help asking, ¡°Which tribes are migrating there?¡± ¡°It¡¯s the Anke Tribe, the Mysterious Water Tribe, the Three Grasses Tribe, and others,¡± replied the Great Shaman. ¡°Did any of those people escape?¡± asked Mou Yan. ¡°No.¡± The Great Shaman shook his head, ¡°These dozen or so tribes, not one survived, all were devoured by the Great Snowy Wind.¡± Mou Yan¡¯s frown grew even tighter. The Uke Grassland was a part of his Gray Wolf tribe¡¯s domain, while the Anke, the Mysterious Water, and other tribes lived on that grassland as vassal tribes under the Gray Wolf tribe¡¯s rule. Although they had experienced a migration in the previous years, the majority of the tribes under the rule of the Gray Wolf tribe in the northern grasslands had already gradually migrated southward. The tribes that remained in the northern grasslands now amounted to less than a third of their original number. But over these years of migrating southward, the Gray Wolf tribe had been contending with numerous other tribes for pastures. After several years of bloody battle, they had finally defeated the dominant power of the Tie Li tribe on these grasslands, which had moved south, taking over the remnants left behind and claiming dominion over this region. However, after such great wars, the casualties among the tribespeople of the Gray Wolf tribe who had migrated south were extremely severe. From the originally two to three million tribespeople, only just over a million remained. It could be said that two-thirds of those who had moved south were buried atop these grasslands, becoming the fertilizer that watered the grass. In these circumstances, Mou Yan naturally needed new lifeblood to replenish his losses. Therefore, considering the increasingly frequent natural disasters and ever harsher weather in their original domains, which were now severely unsuitable for living, Mou Yan simply ordered all tribespeople still remaining in the northern grasslands to migrate south en masse, to settle on the pastures he had conquered. Chapter 935 - Chapter 935 Chapter 391 Head South! ?Chapter 935: Chapter 391 Head South! Head South!_3 Chapter 935: Chapter 391 Head South! Head South!_3 But now, this migration had just barely begun when it was hit by consecutive severe blows. The winter this year, for some reason, not only arrived half a month earlier than usual, but the weather also turned colder. It was only early winter, yet it felt as bitterly cold as deep winter. Even the fearsome heavy snowstorms began to appear as frequently as normal snowfall on the grasslands. The tribes migrating south under Mou Yan¡¯s command had already lost dozens during their journey, swallowed by the heavy snowstorms. The dead numbered three to five hundred thousand already. At this rate, by the time all the remaining tribesmen migrate here, it¡¯s hard to say whether there will even be a million people left. The thought that his once nearly five-million-strong great tribe had dwindled to a mere two million in scale due to war and blizzards caused Mou Yan a pang of pain. This was all his wealth, the source of his power. And now it was being cut down on the grasslands like grass, cheap as dirt. What chilled Mou Yan¡¯s heart even further was that the Uke Grassland, where the heavy snowstorms had appeared, was only four to five thousand miles from the grassland where he was now. Heavy snowstorms had already emerged over there. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï What this meant, no one understood more clearly than he did. Because several years ago, before the climate began to change, even on the grasslands of the north, heavy snowstorms would only occasionally appear in the farthest north. It was a full hundred thousand miles from here. But now, with the changes in the climate of Heaven and Earth, the heavy snowstorms that would appear a hundred thousand miles to the north had come to within just four to five thousand miles. If things continued to develop this way, it may not be a year or two before the grasslands here would also be engulfed by the heavy snowstorms. And the habitat that his Gray Wolf tribe had fought so hard for and finally seized would turn to ice and snow again. ¡°No wonder the Tie Li Tribe gave up the Wulan Prairie so readily after losing a million people; they must have known that this place couldn¡¯t be held for long.¡± Mou Yan thought of the terrifying scene of his own tribe being devoured by the heavy snowstorms and clenched his teeth, ¡°Great Shaman, we cannot linger here either, the heavy snowstorms are pressing closer. Our Gray Wolf tribe will rest here for one winter, waiting for the rest of the tribes to arrive. Then by early summer next year, when the grass is lush, and the horses are fattened, I will lead half a million cavalry to follow the Tie Li Tribe southward. Didn¡¯t they retreat to the south? South of the prairie, lies the Nine Provinces, the Land of Yan State. I¡¯ve heard that the people who specialize in cultivation in those lands live in immense wealth, producing more grain than they can eat, and amassing gold and treasures that can pile into mountains. The Tie Li Tribe has already occupied a large expanse of that land, enslaving over a million people. All this wealth, I, the Gray Wolf tribe, must also seize, and that warm land must have a part for me, Mou Yan.¡± Talking about the south, a hint of ardor appeared in Mou Yan¡¯s eyes. Although he grew up on the grasslands, he had often heard the visiting tribes¡¯ businessmen talk of that distant southern land called the Nine Provinces. In the descriptions of those businessmen, the Nine Provinces were a paradise of endless food and inexhaustible gold and silver, the most prosperous place in the world. Every time he heard these legends, his heart burned fiercely. It was just unfortunate that at that time, his tribe was tens of thousands of miles from the south, separated by one great prairie tribe after another. He wanted to lead his tribe south to plunder and conquer, but that meant defeating these great prairie tribes first. That was far too difficult, simply impossible. So eventually, he could only dream about it. But now was different. After the deaths and injuries of millions, he led countless warriors to the edge of the southern prairies, just a few thousand miles away from the even further south Yan State. Next spring, at the start of summer, he needed only to ride strong horses south for a month, and he would enter that legendary land of prosperity. Then, with the swords and knives in hand, he would be able to plunder the inexhaustible grain and unlimited gold and silver. ¡°Great Khan, rest assured, I will lead a host of shamans to pray before the Gray Wolf on behalf of the tribe,¡± replied the Great Shaman solemnly when he heard Mou Yan¡¯s words. ¡­ Wei Country, Yecheng. Compared to the grasslands in the north ravaged by the heavy snowstorms, Yecheng, which lay to the north of the Nine Provinces, in the land of Yan State, was equally cold and covered with ice and snow, yet the climate was indeed milder by more than one level. At least, no heavy snowstorms had ever been heard of here; at most, there were reports of houses collapsing and killing dozens to a hundred people. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã0 For the Wei Country, rich with eleven prefectures and a population of thirty million, that was hardly worth mentioning. Compared to the snow disaster, it was the barbarian disaster formed by the migrating tribes from the northern prairies that gave the people of Wei more of a headache. Fortunately, as the current hegemon, Wei Country¡¯s martial arts were strong, with two million armored soldiers; even though those barbarians from the grasslands were extremely fierce, they could not stir up any trouble under the blades of Great Wei. Over several years, wave after wave of herders moved south, only to die by the millions at the border cities of Great Wei, never crossing the border by a single step. Within Great Wei, all was as stable as Mount Tai. ¡°Your Majesty, news from Jiu Yuan City in the northern border reports that the Tie Li, Gao Xiang, Murong, and other tribes have suffered a setback in their southward movement once again. The Grand General of the North has killed seven hundred thousand enemies and lost one hundred fifty thousand of his own; it¡¯s a great victory in the north!¡± Inside the palace, a subject came striding with a victorious report. ¡°Good, Feng Chang is truly a pillar of our great Wei of the north; under his command, tens of millions of barbarians have not taken a step across the border, and I have been at ease,¡± exclaimed the Heavenly Son of Great Wei, Yue Yukong, with a big laugh, his mood uplifted. After relishing the good news, he turned his head, looked down at the seated officials, and spoke, ¡°Gentlemen, now that the northern threats have been resolved and the prairie barbarians have been so severely hit, they temporarily lack the strength to move south. Regarding the proposal brought by the envoy from Chu to strike Zhou Country together from the north and south, what are your thoughts?¡± Yue Yukong gazed at his officials below, his eyes sparkling with excitement. Chapter 936 - Chapter 936 Chapter 392 Barbarians Requesting Allegiance ?Chapter 936: Chapter 392: Barbarians Requesting Allegiance Chapter 936: Chapter 392: Barbarians Requesting Allegiance ¡°` Time flies, in the blink of an eye, thirteen years have passed. Chu Capital, Baling. On the spacious imperial road outside the city, a procession slowly made its way towards Baling. Passersby on both sides of the road, seeing this, promptly made way and paused to watch. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï As inhabitants living beneath the imperial city, these passersby were naturally not without discernment, ordinary processions would not easily catch their attention, but this one was indeed different. Based merely on appearance, the members of this procession, each with hair hanging loose or braided, donned in exquisite furs, resembled nomadic barbariansa€¡±or perhaps those of noble statusa€¡±though it was unclear whether they were from the Snowy Wilderness or the northern steppes. In the midst of the procession, there were also dozens of Chu soldiers clad in fine armor, escorting on both sides, led by an official in a red robe at the forefront, marching the barbarians towards Baling. This evidently illustrious barbarian procession naturally drew the attention of nearby passersby, all speculating with curiosity. However, to the roadside discussions, neither the barbarians nor the soldiers of Chu within the procession paid any mind, focused solely on heading towards the city entrance. ¡°Crown Prince, Baling City is just ahead,¡± As they were nearing the city gates, in the center of the procession, a middle-aged barbarian approached the exterior of a large carriage drawn by four horses and spoke to a young man inside, who wore a white Wolf Skin robe with a slightly youthful visage and an air of nobility. Hu Yan Bi looked at the middle-aged barbarian and smiled with a nod, ¡°Uncle Hai, I know.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 As for Hu Yan Bi himself, he was the crown prince of the Hu Yan tribe, the future heir of the clan. For two such distinguished individuals to come together to the Chu Capital, they were certainly not there for leisure but bore a great responsibility. After Hu Yan Bi exchanged greetings with his uncle, he walked to the carriage door, opened the little window, and peered ahead. Before his eyes stood a towering and magnificent city, rising from the plains. Beneath the grand city gates, people and merchants from all corners of the earth merged into a dense stream, lining up, inspected by soldiers and clerks, moving in and out of the city. Just looking at this one city gate, the crowd waiting to enter and exit numbered in the thousands. And the Chu Capital Baling, having expanded over the years, now had twenty-four gates; it was hard to imagine how many people could come and go from this mighty city in a single day. Perhaps no less than tens of thousands, or even a hundred thousand? With such thoughts, Hu Yan Bi couldn¡¯t help but exclaim, ¡°Truly a prosperous and formidable city. No wonder Chu State could establish itself over a province and become the Supreme Dominator of the world. As he said this, a hint of sorrow tinged Hu Yan Bi¡¯s heart. If their tribes of the Snowy Wilderness still possessed the two Helong counties at this time and settled down there properly, perhaps they too could have erected a mighty city in that northwestern land, right? Regrettably, although they had driven away the people of Western Liang with the aid of the Chu people eight years ago, even occupying three counties of Western Liang that were abandoned after their relocation, they didn¡¯t enjoy many days of peace before the various northern steppe barbarians descended upon them. Just as the barbarians had invaded Zhou Country¡¯s Helong in bygone years, these steppe herders too formed vast, unending hordes of cavalry that repeatedly invaded the five counties occupied by the barbarians of the Snowy Wilderness. After continuous warfare, how could the Snow Plains Nomads with a mere population of just over three million withstand these steppe barbarians, driven south by the cold snap and red-eyed from the struggle for survival? In under three years, the three counties of the former Western Liang they¡¯d occupied were lost. And after two more years of fierce fighting and the loss of over two hundred thousand lives, they were also forced to relinquish Hexi county. Now, they couldn¡¯t even hold on to the last county of Longxi. The various tribes of the Snowy Wilderness were utterly exhausted by incessant warfare, their last of vigor drained away. For survival, they even had to send messengers to Baling, to submit to the King of Chu, who ruled over the entire land of Jiangnan, seeking his shelter for their tribe and welcoming the allegiance of all tribes of the snowy wilderness. The descendants of the ancient and august Great Dharma God, with roots stretching tens of thousands of years into the past, have also reached their end under the twilight of the Nine Provinces. ¡°Ever since King Chu Lu Yuan swept across Jiangdong, unified the warlords, and proclaimed himself Emperor in Yangzhou, gathering the essence of a whole province, the Imperial Capital of Baling has grown increasingly prosperous,¡± Hearing his nephew¡¯s reflections, Hu Yan Hai, too, forgot about the world outside the window. At this moment, their caravan had reached the city gates, where the Chu official accompanying them went forward to communicate with the gatekeeper military officer, arranging for their envoy procession to be given immediate passage. A side gate of the great entrance was now opening upa€¡±it seemed that was their special passage. ¡°Eight years ago, when Chu State defeated Western Liang and accepted the surrender of its people, I accompanied True Person Huang Xin as we led troops back to Chu, escorting the Western Liang captives to Baling. At that time, Baling was indeed a formidable city among the greatest in the world, with a permanent population of over five hundred thousand, but it was not as bustling as it is now. I have heard that over these years, Emperor Chu has relocated the wealthy elites of Jiangdong, settling them in Baling¡¯s Yueyang Prefecture, bringing in over a million people in one go. Moreover, the six million people relocated from Lingnan were settled in Dongting County, where Baling is located, as well as nearby counties such as Xiangyang, Yuzhang, and Hanzhong. These people have also settled down in recent years, with many starting to converge in Baling, coming to the Imperial Capital to engage in commerce or to earn a living. Not to mention scholars from all over the country coming here for education and exams.¡± ¡°` Chapter 937 - Chapter 937 Chapter 392 Barbarians Requesting Allegiance_2 ?Chapter 937: Chapter 392: Barbarians Requesting Allegiance_2 Chapter 937: Chapter 392: Barbarians Requesting Allegiance_2 After Zhou Country was unified, there were many messengers, businessmen, and those seeking a future who came to Baling from all corners of the earth. It was the convergence of these countless people that brought about the prosperity of Baling today.¡± At this point, Hu Yan Hai thought of something and couldn¡¯t help clicking his tongue, ¡°I heard that last year, Yue Yang prefecture counted the population, and the entire Yueyang Prefecture had three million people, with Baling accounting for two million, making up the majority.¡± Since Lu Yuan unified Yangzhou and proclaimed himself Emperor, the original capital located in Yueyang Prefecture was renamed Yue Yang prefecture, changing the title of the administrative chief from Prefect to Prefect, generally two grades higher than an ordinary Prefect. Although Hu Yan Hai was from the Snow Plains Nomads, over the past twenty years, the increasing ties between the various Snow Plains tribes and Chu State, with growing trade and personal exchanges, had become increasingly close. Especially during the later stages of establishing relations with Chu State, the survival of their tribes depended on the help of Chu State; otherwise, they could not maintain their existence in the northwest. Under these circumstances, the leaders of the Snow Plains Nomads had no choice but to pay more attention to Chu State, to study the systems of Chu State earnestly, understand the politics of Chu¡¯s court, and care about Chu¡¯s affairs, both large and small. Even to stabilize exchanges, the Snow Plains Nomads had set up an embassy in the Imperial Capital of Baling, sending a permanent envoy to facilitate communication between both sides. Therefore, among the Snow Plains tribes, news about Chu State was actually not cut off. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï For tribal nobility such as Hu Yan Hai, he could indeed be called knowledgeable about Chu State, perhaps even more so than average Chu people. ¡°Two million people¡­¡± Upon hearing this number, Hu Yan Bi¡¯s expression grew even darker. Now, after they lost the three counties of Western Liang and Hexi and most of Longxi, the remaining tribal population all together, it was uncertain whether they had two million people. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã? Perhaps it was only just over a million. Sighing, Hu Yan Bi tried not to think about this saddening matter and looked at his uncle, asking, ¡°Uncle Hai, do you think the Chu Emperor will accept our allegiance?¡± Hu Yan Hai nodded straightforwardly, ¡°Of course he will.¡± Hu Yan Bi puzzled, ¡°Why?¡± Hu Yan Hai stroked his beard and smiled, ¡°Now our Snow Plains tribes still have two hundred thousand brave warriors and five Inborns. With such a powerful force, as long as the King of Chu still has plans to use troops in Central State, he will not refuse us outright.¡± Having said that, he thought of something and added, ¡°Moreover, as Snow Plains Nomads, we are not without a foundation. Lady Ling is still in the harem of the Chu Emperor, and in the past two years, she has given birth to two sons for the Emperor, promoted to Noble Consort, her status second only to the Empress. With Lady Ling there, Chu State is our support, and the Chu Emperor will not reject us.¡± Hu Yan Bi contemplated and said, ¡°Uncle Hai is right, having Lady Ling on our side, we truly do not need to worry.¡± In fact, he did not know or had never seen the legendary Spiritual woman. Because she was married off to Chu when he wasn¡¯t even born. But the great deeds of the Spiritual woman who, for the sake of the Snow Plains tribes, married a mortal with the dignity of a Divine Lady and brought Chu State as a powerful ally to the Barbarians, are eternally appreciated and widely praised by the Snowfield citizens. Over the years, the concerted help provided by Chu State to the Snow Plains Nomads, it¡¯s hard to say that the Spiritual woman did not play a part. So they did have a backer. Even though these years in the northwest, the Snow Plains had been continuously defeated in battle, losing territory county after county, and now even the last stronghold of Longxi County was barely holding, It doesn¡¯t mean the Barbarians are weak. The main reason the Snow Plains had been consecutively defeated in recent times was due to the overwhelming impact of the barbarian tribes from the northern plainsa€¡±it was too great. Over the past years, there have been tens of millions of barbarians from the northern plains hitting the five counties of Yong West. In contrast, the barbarians, after previous battles with Zhou People and the state of Western Liang, had already been bled dry, with only a population of three to four million remaining. Against a barbarian tribe from the plains whose strength was several times their own, it was quite normal that they couldn¡¯t hold out. In actuality, the Snow Plains Nomads fought with exceptional bravery in recent battles against the barbarians from the plains. To defend their New Home, the Snow Plains tribes had lost over seven hundred thousand warriors, almost dying to the last man. Five Inborn Grandmasters had fallen, including three kings from the four royal tribes. The Spirit Master of Great Mohism also died. The ferocity of the battles was truly shocking. And their achievements were very glorious. The Snow Plains had nearly two million barbarians fall to their hands, and six Inborn Grandmasters had Fallen, almost breaking the backbone of the barbarian tribes from the plains. Even though the Snow Plains Nomads are now on the verge of swearing allegiance to Chu State in defeat, how much better off are those barbarians from the plains? Before coming to Chu State, Hu Yan Bi had vaguely heard that some tribes in the Western Gobi were being affected by the cold waves and were considering migrating eastward. Fifteen years ago, the Snow Plains Nomads drove away the Zhou People and settled in Yongzhou River Long. Eight years ago, they outlasted the Western Liang People and took over five counties in the west of Yong State. Now, the Snow Plains Nomads, chased out by the barbarians from the plains, have ended up fleeing in desperation to seek refuge with Chu State. Heh! Let¡¯s see what becomes of those barbarians who drove them out and settled in the five counties of Yong West ten years from now? Thinking this way, Hu Yan Bi no longer had any reservations about seeking refuge with Chu State. Chapter 938 - Chapter 938 Chapter 392 Barbarians Requesting Allegiance_3 ?Chapter 938: Chapter 392: Barbarians Requesting Allegiance_3 Chapter 938: Chapter 392: Barbarians Requesting Allegiance_3 Over there in the northwest, it¡¯s a dead end, just like Liang State in the Central State, becoming the center of a vortex. All sorts of powers took their turns on the stage in Helong¡¯s two prefectures, with one performing after another¡¯s rest. Countless people are buried here, their blood watering the soil. For the Snow Plains Nomads to have been able to remove themselves from this place, enter Chu State, and preserve their lives and legacy, might actually be considered fortunate. Otherwise, do they really have to end up as the very last of the nomads for that so-called homeland? At this moment, the procession ahead began to move again. One could see the Chuguo officials leading the team had already coordinated with the military officers at the city gate, and had opened a side gate. Now, leading the team, he entered the city through the newly opened side gate. The pedestrians and Merchants and Travelers in line next to them couldn¡¯t help but look on with curiosity and envy. Hu Yan Bi, looking at this scene, suddenly felt a surge of hope. ¡­ In the Chu Imperial Palace, Diligent Governance Hall. ¡°Your Majesty, the barbarian Messengers have been settled in the city¡¯s embassy,¡± Sun Siwen reported, bringing news of the barbarian Messengers who had arrived. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï ¡°Oh, after enduring these years, those Snowy Wilds¡¯ Tribes finally came to their senses, realizing the benefits of staying under a large tree, huh?¡± Lu Yuan put down the memorial he was reviewing and looked up with a smile, ¡°Still, when you think about it, it¡¯s quite good. These years, it was the Barbarians who stood fast in Helong, helping us block the northern Barbarians from harming our northwest border. Now that the Barbarians can¡¯t hold on any longer and want to give up the northwest, With the Barbarians taking over Helong¡¯s two prefectures, their influence will surely increase. Great Chu has been supporting the Barbarians, and those northern brutes must be itching for revenge. Now that they share a border with Great Chu, they might send troops to raid Hanzhong County as retribution,¡± he said. This had become one of Great Chu¡¯s core strategies ever since it had responded to the Barbarians¡¯ request to send troops to Helong to help them resist Western Liang. Using the Barbarians as a northwest barrier to protect Hanzhong County was one of them. And ever since Huang Xin finally wore down Western Liang eight years before, bringing down this potential rising power in the northwest, During five years of fierce fighting, Western Liang made several strong attempts to breach the TaoShui defenses but was repelled beneath the fortified cities, unable to break through Chu¡¯s defenses. Meanwhile, Chu forces, allied with the Barbarians, sent out two to three hundred thousand Cavalry during each planting and harvesting season, scattering them into dozens or hundreds of raiding parties to wreak havoc within Western Liang, preventing their agricultural activities. After five years, Western Liang was exhausted and weakened, with its resources drained. Two famines broke out, claiming the lives of hundreds of thousands. Plus, with the cold waves and military disasters, the limited national strength of this small northwest power quickly declined and weakened. They held on for only five years before they couldn¡¯t anymore. When they surrendered, the nation had lost a million lives, leaving only about three million people, of whom fewer than five hundred thousand were soldiers. With no other choice, for the sake of survival, Western Liang had to surrender to Chu State. Lu Yuan then decreed the resettlement of the entire population of Western Liang to places like Xichuan, Hanzhong, and Xiangyang in Yangzhou. Their soldiers were selected to form an elite force of one hundred thousand, and together with the remaining four Inborn Grandmasters, they were incorporated into the Chu military ranks. In this way, the small northwest power, Western Liang, was annexed by Chu State. Having annexed Western Liang, Lu Yuan then divided the three prefectures of the former Western Liang to reward the Barbarians for their meritorious service. It was also intended to have the Barbarians control the northwest and guard Chu¡¯s borders. After all, at that time, the Barbarian population, having gone through successive bloody conflicts, had decreased to only a little over three million, and even if they were to mobilize all their people, they could at most raise seven or eight hundred thousand soldiers, which was not enough to change anything significant. Using such a weak tribe to defend the borders could both shield the northwest and deter other Barbarians from migrating to Yong West. Chu State would not have to worry about the Barbarians growing too powerful. It was a perfect solution. However, after utilizing the Barbarians for eight years, it now seems that under the repeated invasions of the northern Barbarians, the opponent can¡¯t hold on any longer and is now contemplating coming under our dominion and migrating inward. ¡°Hanzhong is impregnable with Longshan¡¯s treacherous terrain to the west and Xiong Ridge forming a barrier to the north. The roads in between are difficult to traverse, and no large army can pass through. Those northern Barbarians, relying on the advantage of their Cavalry, were able to dominate Helong. But within Longshan, it¡¯s difficult for people to walk, let alone gallop horses?¡± Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s lighthearted comment, Sun Siwen stroked his beard with a smile, ¡°It¡¯s all well if those Barbarians don¡¯t come, but if they dare to, with True Person Huang Xin leading two hundred thousand formidable soldiers to defend Hanzhong, they will certainly be made to come without return, all buried within Longshan.¡± Lu Yuan laughed heartily, ¡°Brother Sun is right. After these years of rest and recuperation, Great Chu¡¯s formidable soldiers number two million, with forty-two Inborn Grandmasters. We own ten prefectures and eighteen nations, with a population of over forty million. With such considerable strength, a few million northern Barbarians are hardly worth mentioning,¡± he said confidently and proudly. Since he integrated the two Jiangdong prefectures and accepted the surrender of the ruler and ministers of Ning Country, the part of Yangzhou governed by Chu State had entered a pathway of rapid development. Especially after the six million people from the four prefectures of Lingnan, as well as the three million from the three prefectures of Western Liang, were relocated to various places north and south of the Yangtze, the population of the ten prefectures under Chu control increased rapidly, and the local prefectures and counties were substantially developed. In just over a decade, aside from the vassal nations ceded, the prefectures within Chu territory of Yangzhou and Yong State have quickly regained their past prosperity. It was even better than the glorious days of Former Zhou and Pre-Yue. The current Chu State boasts crisscrossed roads and villages everywhere, the sounds of chickens and dogs heard from road to road in the countryside, plentiful shops throughout the city centers, peaceful citizens, and thriving civil and military affairs. Such a peaceful era is more than enough. And as the one who created this era of Shenwu prosperity, how could he not feel gratified and proud? ¡®This magnificent era has been forged by me. These tens of millions of common people are protected by me. The chaos in Jiangnan was ended by me.¡¯ Thinking this, the smile on Lu Yuan¡¯s face grew even wider. ¡°Your Majesty¡¯s achievements are such that the people of Chu dearly appreciate and respect you. It¡¯s said that some are now calling Your Majesty the unmatched emperor of all ages.¡± Seeing his close friend quite pleased with himself, Sun Siwen offered the compliment before bowing and asking, ¡°Your Majesty, the Barbarians request to come under our dominion. Shall Great Chu accept them?¡± Lu Yuan said as a matter of course, ¡°Accept them, of course we shall accept. How can we turn away the population and soldiers willingly offered to us?¡± He paused in thought, then said, ¡°Tomorrow morning, you¡¯ll bring those barbarian Messengers here. I will receive them.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Sun Siwen nodded, promptly agreeing. Chapter 939 - Chapter 939 Chapter 393 Great Dharma God Statue ?Chapter 939: Chapter 393 Great Dharma God Statue Chapter 939: Chapter 393 Great Dharma God Statue Hall of Supreme Harmony. ¡°Is this the god statue of the Great Dharma God that has been passed down through generations in the Great Mohism?¡± Lu Yuan looked at the three-zhang-tall pure bronze statue placed in the center of the grand hall, with a few traces of curiosity and interest flashing in his eyes. By now, three months had passed. Three months ago, he had received the Snowy Wilds¡¯ Tribes¡¯ Messenger, Hu Yan Bi, and after in-depth conversations with him, he finally decided to accept the remaining tribes of the Snowy Plains Nomads into Chu State. He also dispatched Huang Xin to lead troops to the Longxi Commandery to aid those Barbarians in their migration. In the end, with the combined efforts of the Chu army and the Barbarians, they repelled several harassments and blockades by the grassland Barbarians, successfully relocating the remaining 1.3 million-plus Barbarians back to Chu State. Lu Yuan then settled these Barbarians in Hanzhong and Xichuan, registering them as Registered Citizens, thereby completely assimilating them under the rule of Chu State. From then on, the ethnic group of the Barbarians was effectively eradicated. There were no longer tribes of the Snowy Wilds; there were only citizens of Chu State. The tribal leaders of those Barbarians were conferred noble titles by Lu Yuan if they were to be titles, granted official positions if they were to receive positions, and along with the remaining forces of the Barbarians¡¯ tribes, they were integrated into the system of Chu State. However, with the factual disappearance of the Barbarian ethnic group, and the tribal leaders becoming Chu Officials and Generals, the entity of the Snowy Plains Nomads no longer existed in the secular world. With the hide no longer existing, how will the hair attach itself? ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Without the Snowy Plains Nomads, the Great Mohism which had been the spiritual faith ruling over the entire group of Barbarians, naturally also suffered a heavy blow. In Chu State, imperial power is above all else. Lu Yuan had no need for a spiritual leader to guide his people and compete with him for the right to interpret the will of the gods. Therefore, the religion of Great Mohism was naturally suppressed by Chu State. Moreover, in the wars of the past two years, the then Spirit Master of Great Mohism was ambushed and killed by grassland Barbarians in a battle. Just like that, following the marriage of the Spiritual Woman, the only remaining leader, the Spirit Master, also met his demise on the battlefield. And the new Spirit Master of Great Mohism, who had yet to be fully trained, was faced with the Snowy Wilds¡¯ Tribes seeking to annex to Chu State, an event that meant the extinction of the entire Barbarian race. Under internal chaos and external changes, this once-glorious religion directly perished. The remaining followers of Great Mohism, under the arrangements of the Spiritual Woman, were smoothly incorporated by Chu State, without causing any significant disturbance. Since Great Mohism had disappeared, its holy objects and the Barbarians¡¯ deity, the god statue of the Great Dharma God that had been inherited for tens of thousands of years, naturally fell into the hands of Lu Yuan. It was delivered by the last remaining followers of Great Mohism to Baling, given to the Spiritual Woman, who then handed it over to Lu Yuan for disposition. Thus this scene unfolded before him. ¡°Indeed, it is exceptionally extraordinary,¡± Lu Yuan exclaimed in amazement. He saw before him the god statue made of pure bronze. Even though it was in the dimness of the palace, it emitted a faint golden light by itself, imparting a sense of sanctity. Just from its appearance, one could tell the statue was remarkable. As a practitioner of the Taiping Dao Book, Lu Yuan could perceive even more than an ordinary person. Through the divine light of the statue, he sensed an extremely immense power of Qi Luck within the body of the pure bronze statue. This force of Qi Luck was extraordinarily dense, much denser than what Lu Yuan had gathered at that moment, having unified the whole of Yangzhou and incidentally occupied the Hanzhong and Xiangyang regions of Yong State, by a hundredfold or even more. ¡°Such immense Qi Luck, I¡¯m afraid even if I unified all Nine Provinces, I may not be able to gather as much, right?¡± Lu Yuan slightly released his Divine Sense, attempting to penetrate into the statue, but just as he made slight contact, he immediately felt a vast consciousness within the god statue expelling him out. And the statue in front of him suddenly radiated brilliant light and started to tremble with a buzzing sound. The expression on the face of the god statue shifted from its original majesty to something more ferocious, as if it were coming to life. The air inside the palace was filled with a holy aura, with a powerful oppression sweeping toward Lu Yuan. Like a terrifying tidal wave, it seemed it could engulf Lu Yuan in an instant. ¡°Your Majesty, be careful, the consciousness of the Great Dharma God is awakening. Don¡¯t resist, my concubine can soothe it,¡± said the Spiritual Woman who followed by his side and saw the sudden rampage of the Great Dharma God statue, her expression changing slightly as she quickly spoke to Lu Yuan. And then, her body immediately emitted a ray of light, very similar to the divine radiance emitted by the god statue. Afterward, she approached the statue, and the holy aura diffusing in the air did not stop the Spiritual Woman, allowing her to arrive near the statue without hindrance. The two rays of light merged and touched each other, the Spiritual Woman knelt down, her thoughts and consciousness transmitted into the statue, and the two began to communicate. Gradually, with the soothing by the Spiritual Woman, the rampaging statue slowly calmed down, returning to its original peaceful state, with a faint halo falling, serene and sacred. ¡°Has this statue always been so terrifying?¡± Lu Yuan, seeing the calm restored nearby, swallowed with difficulty, his complexion somewhat pale as he looked at the Spiritual Woman and asked. At that moment when he was targeted by the statue, he felt like a small boat facing the sea, at the mercy of those suddenly violent waves, at any time in danger of being shattered and submerged. The consciousness owned by that statue, along with the Qi Luck dominated by that consciousness, and mixed in the Qi Luck were elements of divine power that seemed to have been transformed from belief, were too terrifying, too immense. It was a force that utterly overturned what Lu Yuan had previously imagined, strong and dangerous. ¡®This is definitely not a force that one can possess by Gathering Three Qi or Four Qi Condensation. That vast consciousness, like the sea, at the very least is of Five Qi Towards Primordial, or even belongs to the power of Immortals at Three Flowers Gathering.¡¯ Chapter 940 - Chapter 940 Chapter 393 Great Dharma God Statue_2 ?Chapter 940: Chapter 393 Great Dharma God Statue_2 Chapter 940: Chapter 393 Great Dharma God Statue_2 Lu Yuan thought this way, and his heart grew even more fervent. He himself was already a cultivator who had gathered two levels of energy (Qi), and having read the Taiping Dao Book and the Five Thunder Book, both Five Qi Towards Origin level Dao books, he had a general understanding of the power of Gathering Three Qi and Four Qi Condensation. The burst of power from the god statue a moment ago had far surpassed these two levels. Perhaps only the legendary Five Qi major success, where the Five Elements magic power forms a great cycle within the body, beginning to transition from the Inner World to the Outer World, could possess such vast and Heavenly Earth-like power? And such a creation, a god statue containing who knows how much Qi Luck and divine power, was now laying before his very eyes. How could such a precious treasure not tempt the heart? ¡°Legend has it that thousands of years ago, when Immortals still remained Between Heaven and Earth, the Spirit Masters and Spirit Women of the church could directly communicate with the god statue during their clashes with the Immortals of the Nine Provinces, causing the deities within the statue to project themselves in Heaven and Earth, directly wielding the mighty power of the Immortals to combat their foes. But later on, the church faced a catastrophe, and this method of contacting and summoning deities gradually became lost. And as Heaven and Earth began to decline, they could no longer accommodate the power of the Immortals, and the divine power within the god statues could no longer be used.¡± Upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s words, the Spiritual woman first recounted a legend, then continued to explain, ¡°In our generation, although I have received divine power from the deities within the god statue, the divine power bestowed upon me is but a trifling fraction of their power, not even worth mentioning. So my Emperor, I know you take great interest in the Great Dharma God, but that is the power of the deities. We mortals don¡¯t have the capacity to meddle with it. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? As I am still a Spiritual woman, should you anger the Great Dharma God, I can still soothe it somewhat. But how long this soothing can last, and how effective it can be, no one knows. And one day I too, will die. By then, if Great Mohism is gone and the lineage of Spirit Masters and Spirit Women has been severed, there will be no one left to appease the deities.¡± The statue of the Great Dharma God before him, with such terrifying power, of course didn¡¯t come out of nowhere. The source of the statue¡¯s power comes from the faith and offerings of the entire Snow Plains Nomads over tens of thousands of years, which grew stronger step by step, eventually giving birth to a vague consciousness and becoming this fearsome Great Dharma God. That¡¯s why Lu Yuan was able to sense, within the Great Dharma God statue, a Qi Luck force a hundred times greater than his own, perhaps even more. Because this represents the entire Barbarian tribe¡¯s faith in the Great Dharma God statue over tens of thousands of years, and the tribe¡¯s Qi Luck slowly converging into the statue, accumulating gradually bit by bit. Taking into account the Barbarians¡¯ peak population, which stood around fifteen to sixteen million, the immense convergence of Qi Luck from such a sizable tribe over tens of thousands of years can be imagined. Even if over these tens of thousands of years, the Qi Luck of the statue has dissipated somewhat, possibly by a great deal, it still couldn¡¯t compare to the Qi Luck that Lu Yuan has accumulated over just a few decades since uniting one state. And that¡¯s merely concerning Qi Luck. Under the faith of the Snowy Plain Barbarians over tens of thousands of years, the religious power that followed, accumulating alongside Qi Luck, also amounts to a terrifying figure. Although, during most of the past years, this religious power transformed into divine power was mostly ascended to the Immortal Realm by the successive generations of Spirit Masters and Spirit Women of Great Mohism, and was never returned to the Great Dharma god. But even starting from a thousand years ago, after the catastrophe occurred and the lineage was severed, the accumulated faith of millions over a thousand years is still a fearsome number. Since that catastrophe, the renewed Great Mohism, having lost the news and channel to ascend to the Immortal Realm, the divine power bestowed upon the successive generations of Spirit Masters and Spirit Women has been returned to the Great Dharma god statue. When the Spiritual woman spoke of the Great Dharma power within her being nothing but a drop in the ocean of the deities¡¯ power, it was not an exaggeration. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Indeed, the divine power she received was likely not even one in ten thousandth of what the Great Dharma god statue possessed. Because after the discontinuation of Great Mohism¡¯s lineage, a secret technique previously held by successive generations of Spirit Masters and Spirit Women, which was the active extraction of divine power from the god statue, was lost within the church. The Spirit Masters and Spirit Women of the reestablished Great Mohism, although they could communicate with the Great Dharma god within the statue, could only obtain the Great Dharma power by pleasing the Divine Spirits, allowing them to bestow it voluntarily. One was active extraction, the other passive reception; the difference and efficiency gap between the two naturally speaks for itself. Former Spirit Masters and Spirit Women, as long as there was divine power in the Great Dharma god statue, would draw it all out without leaving anything behind, using it entirely for themselves without considering the statue¡¯s wishes. After all, when the lineage had not been severed, the successive generations of Spirit Masters and Spirit Women from the ancient lineage naturally understood the true nature of that so-called Great Dharma god. That was nothing more than a legacy left by the real Great Dharma god for the Snowy Plain Barbarians who worshipped him, a means for self-preservation. The Great Dharma god statue was merely a tool, a medium for obtaining divine power, and not a true deity. It was only after the lineage was severed and the method of extracting divine power disappeared that the concept of a tool became blurred amongst the believers who had rebuilt Great Mohism from the ruins, and they began to worship the statue as a true deity. Eventually, the ¡°Mo Ling Borrowing Life and Cultivating Character Secret Method¡± was even created, a special cultivation technique where the divine power obtained from the Great Dharma god statue was nurtured and grown by the Spirit Masters and Spirit Women, before ultimately being returned to the statue. Chapter 941 - Chapter 941 Chapter 393 Great Dharma God Statue_3 ?Chapter 941: Chapter 393 Great Dharma God Statue_3 Chapter 941: Chapter 393 Great Dharma God Statue_3 The essence had completely inverted. Of course, all the above was just secret lore, unknown to the followers of the Great Dharma God and the Snow Plains Nomads. The spiritual woman did not know that the Great Dharma God she worshiped was actually a counterfeit, originally a slaved tool that had risen to become a master. Therefore, her faith in the god statue of the Great Dharma God remained devout. As for Lu Yuan, who had learned about the inheritance changes of the Great Mohism and the rise of the Great Dharma god statue through the contributions of the Feishuang Tao and Purple Cloud Dao, He certainly would not hold the same reverence for a god statue as his beloved consort did. However, Lu Yuan still felt a sense of dread toward the Great Dharma god statue that had developed a vague consciousness and, in a strict sense, could also be considered a divine being. Just as the spiritual woman had said, at that moment, he indeed had no good solution to deal with the god statue. The power it possessed was too terrifying. Even though this power could not be well utilized due to the shallow consciousness of the Great Dharma god statue itself, being only able to release it instinctively and brutally, It was akin to the ocean¡¯s mighty waves; even just instinctive ripples could not be resisted by an ordinary sailboat. At that time, the Great Dharma god statue was the ocean, and Lu Yuan, the sailboat. He wished to conquer the ocean but was barely able to withstand the dangerous and mighty power of the sea. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Therefore, after listening to the spiritual woman¡¯s advice, Lu Yuan graciously smiled and nodded, ¡°My consort speaks wisely. This divine being is indeed not something that a mere mortal like me can touch. From now on, let¡¯s place the god statue here and seal it away. I shall no longer offend the god statue lightly.¡± Indeed, he would not offend it lightly. In his heart, Lu Yuan had decided that he would not act rashly against the god statue until he possessed enough strength to suppress it. As for the god statue, let¡¯s wait until I¡¯ve reached the Five Qi Chaoyuan Realm or after becoming immortal to deal with it. Upon hearing this, the spiritual woman joyfully said, ¡°Your concubine thanks the Emperor.¡± Caught between the divine being of her faith and her man, she had been in a very difficult and distressing position. Naturally, she was overjoyed at the prospect of a satisfactory solution. Looking at the delighted spiritual woman, Lu Yuan stepped forward, embraced her, and said with a smile, ¡°My consort is my beloved; how could I not listen to what you say?¡± With that, he walked out of the Hall of Supreme Harmony with the spiritual woman by his side. Afterward, on the way out, he ordered the entire palace to be sealed. He sent troops to guard the place strictly, forbidding anyone to enter without his command. The god statue was too dangerous; if it were to act up, no one in the entire imperial palace could stop it. Lu Yuan did not want his home to be destroyed by this Great Dharma God. Thus, to avoid others offending the Great Dharma God as he had done and provoking this being of chaotic consciousness, it was better to seal up the Hall of Supreme Harmony. As for the purpose of the Great Dharma god statue, he had already considered it. Although there was a vast amount of Qi Luck within the Great Dharma god statue, it belonged to the Snow Plains Nomads as a group, and it was now dominated by the shallow consciousness of the Great Dharma God. With the Great Dharma God present, outsiders simply could not utilize it. So, even though he coveted this Qi Luck, Lu Yuan was still clear that it did not belong to him. Besides, as an ancient divine being that contended with the ancient Emperor Hua Guang for the orthodoxy of the Nine Provinces, using the Qi Luck obtained from worshiping him to activate the Heavenly Pillars founded by the ancient Three Emperors, Isn¡¯t that like bringing in a mortal enemy to steal one¡¯s treasures? ¡°` If he really did that, Lu Yuan could not guarantee that the heavenly pillars in the halls of the ancient Three Emperors would not undergo some kind of disaster. Therefore, to be on the safe side, even if he could really harness the fortune of the Great Dharma god statue, he dared not come into contact with the heavenly pillars. Thus, after losing this particular aspect of use, the best use for the Great Dharma god statue was to craft artifacts with it. In the Taiping Dao Book, three methods to refine magical artifacts were recorded. They were the Taiping Sword, the Heavenly Mandate Staff, and the Myriad Peoples Seal, together known as the Three Artifacts of Taiping. Each of these three magical artifacts was of superior quality and possessed limitless power. Even the materials used for crafting the artifacts, if they had a rich enough foundation, held the potential for becoming immortal artifacts. Artifacts used by cultivators are divided into three categories: magical artifacts, immortal artifacts, and dao artifacts, and each category is further divided into superior, middle, and lower grades. Among them, magical artifacts are mostly used by cultivators within the Five Qi Chao Yuan Realm. Immortal artifacts, on the other hand, are used by immortals who have condensed the Dao Fruit and reached the Three Flowers Gathering atop Realm. As for Dao Artifacts, only a Great True Person who has reached the Three Flowers Gathering and condensed the Heavenly Flower Dao Fruit can forge one by integrating their own Heavenly Flower Dao Fruit with the charm of heaven and earth. However, Lu Yuan had only seen brief descriptions of such Dao Artifacts in the books of the Feishuang Tao and Purple Cloud Dao. As for the specifics, he was not quite clear. Because throughout the ancient era, the highest level of cultivation within the Immortal Cultivation World of the Nine Provinces was achieved by Earth Flower Immortals, and Heavenly Flower Immortals had never been born. As a result, no one knew the true power of the so-called Dao Artifacts, and the legacy left behind consisted only of speculative descriptions. Therefore, the magical treasures used by cultivators of the Nine Provinces were only magical and immortal artifacts. As immortal-exclusive artifacts, the immortal artifacts naturally stood out as extraordinary. The three superior magical artifacts recorded in the Taiping Dao Book had the potential to become immortal artifacts, making them the cream of the crop among magical artifacts, at the very top of their class. To refine such artifacts, exceedingly demanding materials were required. Being a book of fortune Dao Law, the Taiping Dao Book naturally requires unusual artifacts. According to the book, only treasures infused with fortune can be used to refine the Three Artifacts of Taiping. The thickness of the fortune accumulated within these treasures affects the final quality of the Three Artifacts of Taiping. If the fortune is insufficient, even though the Three of Taiping are superior artifacts, the final product could end up as lower grade. This illustrates the influence of fortune on the power of the Three Artifacts of Taiping. It was also for this reason that Lu Yuan had never thought of refining the Three Artifacts of Taiping before. Apart from the reason that artifacts were unnecessary in this Age of Dharma Decline, not finding Treasure Fortunes was also a major factor. But upon encountering the Great Dharma god statue and discerning the tremendous fortune it contained within, Lu Yuan naturally had some ideas. With the fortune accumulated by the Great Dharma god statue over tens of thousands of years, it seemed more than enough to refine not just superior magical artifacts but even immortal artifacts. Moreover, the materials used to cast the god statue left as inheritance by the ancient Great Dharma God were exceptionally special; to this day, they were still brimming with spiritual energy, and it was unknown what kind of immortal materials were used. With that vast divine force as the source of strength¡­ All these conditions combined seemed like a prime candidate for an immortal artifact seed. Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t even need to exert much efforta€¡±just a bit of additional refinement, and a fresh immortal artifact might emerge from the forge. ¡°When that time comes, I will also be someone who possesses an immortal artifact,¡± he thought. With this thought, Lu Yuan¡¯s mood became increasingly joyful, and he started frolicking and playing in the palace with the Spiritual woman. ¡°` Chapter 942 - Chapter 942 Chapter 394 War and Grain Trade ?Chapter 942: Chapter 394 War and Grain Trade Chapter 942: Chapter 394 War and Grain Trade ¡°` Gathering the barbarian tribes was a mere trifle for Great Chu. A mere 1.3 million barbarians, with a population even smaller than that of any random prefecture in Great Chu, made their settlement an incredibly simple matter. It was now the twenty-fifth year of the Shenwu era, and it had been a full thirteen years since Lu Yuan unified Yangzhou and declared himself emperor. The thirteen years of peace had allowed Great Chu to completely shake off the chaos of the past, not only increasing the population tremendously, but also enriching the treasury and grain reserves. With deeper development of the local areas, countless specialties and goods emerged one after another. According to the latest statistics from the Ministry of Household, by this autumn, the registered population of the ten prefectures directly governed by Chu had exceeded 45 million people. Among them, Xichuan Prefecture had 4 million people, Hanzhong Prefecture had 4 million people, Hegu Prefecture had 1.1 million people, Qianzhong Prefecture had 1.6 million people, Xiangyang Prefecture had 6 million people, Dongting Prefecture had 7 million people, Yuzhang Prefecture had 8 million people, Linhai Prefecture had 6 million people, Guangling Prefecture had 4 million people, and Jian¡¯an Prefecture had 2.6 million people. From these numbers, it is evident that, over the past decade or so, the population of the prefectures and counties near Chu¡¯s northern border close to Central State has seen a significant leap. The populations of Dongting and Hanzhong doubled, Xiangyang Prefecture¡¯s population increased twofold, while other prefectures such as Xichuan, Yuzhang, Linhai, and Guangling all gained more than a million people each. The reason for such a large increase in population is, of course, due to Great Chu¡¯s unwavering dedication to its immigration project over these years. After abolishing the four prefectures of Jiuzhen, Through Sea, Yulin, and Southsea in Lingnan, Great Chu relocated 6 million people to various prefectures along the Yangtze River in the north. After subjugating Western Liang, they moved another 3 million people to the prefectures along the river. During this period, as the barbarians submitted, an additional 1.3 million people were relocated. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 Just these relocated populations alone accounted for more than 10 million people. Add to this the population boom experienced by various prefectures and counties during the decade or so of recuperation and growth, and you have the situation where, in the thirteen years following the unification of Yangzhou, Great Chu¡¯s population increased nearly by 10 million people. Therefore, in comparison to Great Chu¡¯s population of over 45 million, a mere million or so barbarians really wasn¡¯t much. Disperse this number among the various prefectures and counties, and they wouldn¡¯t even make a splash; they would be completely absorbed in less than a decade. As for the funds and grain needed to support these immigrants, the grain-producing areas such as Xichuan, Jianghan, Dongting, and Pengli saw their potential fully unleashed after the extensive development along the Yangtze River. Chu now has over 500 million mu of cultivated land, with an annual grain yield of 400 million shi; at the current average of five shi per person per year, Chu produces enough grain to sustain 80 million people annually. Even after accounting for the military¡¯s higher consumption of rations and the feed for various livestock and warhorses, Great Chu still has a surplus that can sustain 70 million people. Currently, Chu only has a population of 45 million people, so there is an excess grain share for another 25 million people. It¡¯s not just about supporting a million immigrants; even if another 10 million were to come, Great Chu could easily provide for them. In fact, as the major grain-producing plains are further developed, Chu¡¯s grain production has been increasing year by year, and the granaries built across the land have been filling up to the brim. To manage this surplus, Lu Yuan initially ordered the construction of granaries in each prefecture, each with a capacity of 5 million shi, but they were full within two years. He then ordered the construction of prefectural-level granaries, each with a capacity of one million shi, and these too filled up within a few years. Later, county-level granaries were built, each with a capacity of 200,000 shi, and just a few years ago, these county-level granaries also reached capacity. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? The granaries at the prefectural, county, and county levels in Chu, to date, have a total storage of 350 million shi of grain, enough to supply a 10-million-strong army for three years. Yet even so, each year¡¯s new harvest yields a large amount that cannot be consumed. Often, the old grain in the granaries hasn¡¯t been used up when the new grain starts to rot outside the warehouses. In the last two years, to address the problem of excessive grain production, Lu Yuan even had to take the initiative to send messengers to the Wei and Liang states to discuss initiating grain trade. Yes, to Wei and Liang states, as Zhou Country no longer exists. Following constant invasions by Wei and perpetual harassment in the southern territories by Chu, Zhou was finally worn down by nearly two decades of war. After losing the regions of Guannei, Nanyang, and Xiangyang Prefecture, Zhou, supported by Liang but exhausted by war, could no longer maintain the conflict and collapsed five years ago when Wei troops entered Heyin and overran their relocated capital, bringing an end to their dynasty. At the time of their downfall, Zhou had just over a million people left, fewer than 50,000 soldiers, and only three Inborn Grandmasters a€¡° their lifeblood had truly run dry. In the war to extinguish Zhou, Wei gained considerable territory. Not only did they capture Zhou¡¯s former capital in Guannei Prefecture, but they also seized Henan and Nanyang, two prefectures belonging to Central State. One could say that they had secured a ticket aboard the ship of the great crisis afflicting the Nine Provinces. No matter what, as long as they can hold on to these two prefectures, Wei State can ensure the survival of their dynasty. As for Chu, it only captured three provinces in the northern part of the Han River belonging to Zhou¡¯s Xiangyang Prefecture, thereby completely securing the territory of the Xiangyang region with its ten provinces. The reason for such modest gains is mainly due to Lu Yuan considering the inevitable, increasingly fierce and brutal conflicts that will arise in the future upheavals within Central State. ¡°` Chapter 943 - Chapter 943 Chapter 394 War and Grain Trade_2 ?Chapter 943: Chapter 394 War and Grain Trade_2 Chapter 943: Chapter 394 War and Grain Trade_2 ¡°` Entering the fray rashly at this time would only raise the alertness of both Wei and Liang countries, drawing their attention and dragging Chu State into the vortex of war. If that happened, it would be a disaster. Hasn¡¯t a hegemon like Zhou Country that dominated Yong State also perished within a mere twenty years due to continuous warfare? This was the second hegemon in the Nine Provinces to fall after Ning Country. The brutality and heavy casualties of warfare in the north naturally made Lu Yuan dread an early engagement, unwilling to throw his precious forces into a meaningless early stage conflict. The newly unified Yangzhou needed rest and recuperation, a recovery of its civilian strength. Not to send troops to the battlefield, not to send grain to the front line, and not to exhaust the last bit of resources Yangzhou had left after surviving the chaos by having its people scurry back and forth in hunger and fatigue. All these scenarios, just thinking about them, chills the heart. Therefore, with the long-term in mind, after Lu Yuan coordinated with Wei Country to send out troops, he only captured three prefectures of Xiangyang Prefecture in Central State, securing a foothold, and then ceased to advance. As for the real prize, the Henan and Nanyang prefectures, he ceded them to Wei Country. Planning to let this northern hegemon act as a magnet to draw in Liang Country, as well as other northern nations, to attract fire for Chu. By doing so, the effect was indeed remarkable. After the annihilation of Zhou Country and the capture of Henan and Nanyang prefectures. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Almost in the same year, Wei began to clash with Liang. Both sides stationed a million troops on the Henan and Nanyang front, unleashing fierce battles. In the end, both parties suffered hundreds of thousands of casualties, with several Inborns lost on each side, and neither gained any advantage, forcing them to cease fighting and rest. But this ceasefire was only temporary. The following year, the two countries commenced even larger-scale battles, mobilizing nearly three million soldiers in total, the crowded forces nearly filling the two-thousand-mile border between the two countries. Wei and Liang spared no effort to sustain this war. Yet both countries were sovereigns of a single state. Liang occupied the whole Qingzhou, with sixteen prefectures, and after years of growth, the population had reached eighty million. Their troops still maintained around three million. Wei originally had only ten prefectures, but after successive southern expeditions and the destruction of Zhou, it seized four more prefectures, now holding territories spanning fourteen prefectures in Yan and Yong states. The population was somewhat less, but after merging Zhou, it had also reached fifty million. Their troops, due to frequent military campaigns in recent years, had expanded to a force of two million four hundred thousand. If we look merely at the national strength, Wei may have a less substantial foundation than Liang, but the gap is not too significant; the two are still on the same scale. Regarding the external environment, Wei has to contend with the threat of barbarian tribes from the grasslands to the north and must keep six hundred thousand soldiers stationed at the Northern Border for protection. Liang needs to station troops along the Yangtze River and the great river to guard against Chu, Zhao, and Xu, both defence lines taking up about one million two hundred thousand troops. Apart from the border defense and the garrisoning of troops in various domestic regions, both countries can maintain an army of about one million two hundred thousand to one million five hundred thousand on the front line battlefield and are capable of sustaining this for an extended period. As for Inborn Grandmasters, Liang has seen a fair increase over the years. Firstly, during the fall of Zhou Country, they received the allegiance of three Inborn Grandmasters from Zhou, gaining a windfall. In recent years, they developed and attracted a few more, making the number of Inborn individuals in Liang reach fifty-one, breaking past the half-century mark. Whereas Wei, even though it missed out on Zhou¡¯s Inborn boon, after its conquest and dominant position in east Yong, The reluctantly non-committal Yuchan Tao of Jade Hua Mountain finally resolved to side with Wei. With this Immortal Sect of Yong State¡¯s help, Wei¡¯s foundational strength in Inborns soared instantaneously. Not only did Yuchan Tao send five Inborns to serve Wei directly, but they also contributed over a thousand elixirs, fostering two new Inborn Grandmasters for Wei. Just Yuchan Tao alone brought seven Inborns to Wei. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Over the years in the north, Wei also consistently defeated numerous migrating barbarian tribes, and many chose to join Wei after defeat. From among the barbarians, Wei recruited a substantial population and military force, including several Inborn Grandmasters, significantly bolstering their war potential. Adding to that were individuals cultivated and recruited domestically within the country. Today, the number of Wei¡¯s Inborn Grandmasters has reached as many as thirty-seven. They still cannot compare to Liang, but Wei has fewer places to defend. Aside from those tasked with guarding the northern borders and essential national defence, Wei can still mobilize around twenty Inborns to confront Liang at the front line. Liang, apart from the necessary defence of its three borders and nationally, could actually only deploy around the same number of Inborn Grandmasters for the war. Therefore, such a massive boundary conflict was doomed to be a protracted slog. After years of fighting, both sides incurred over a million casualties without being able to determine a victor. The front line between Henan and Nanyang had become a meat grinder into which Wei and Liang continuously poured troops and resources, gradually sapping their own foundational and potential strength, caught in the state of ceaseless hemorrhaging. All these described were still just the forces deployed by the two nations for the war. ¡°` Chapter 944 - Chapter 944 Chapter 394 War and Grain Trade_3 ?Chapter 944: Chapter 394 War and Grain Trade_3 Chapter 944: Chapter 394 War and Grain Trade_3 In fact, to maintain that army of over a million, both countries had also mobilized quantities of civilian workers, about two to three times that amount, for the transport of military food and supplies to sustain the main camp at the front. Each of the two countries had five million adult men engaged in the wars on the front lines of Henan and Nanyang, becoming pure consumption units, unable to engage in production. With such a large-scale war and so many people not engaged in production, one can imagine the pressure on the local production units from the absence of so many in both countries. Among them, Liang fared a bit better. The battlefield was in Central State, close to Liang, making it convenient to transport grain and making the supply chain pressure relatively small. Moreover, a population of eighty million was enough for them to sustain five million non-productive military units. But it was difficult for Wei Country on the other hand. Wei Country came from the north of Yan State, with the core of the country situated in Yan State, thousands of miles away from the front line. You can imagine the difficulty and loss involved in transporting food, fodder, and military supplies from such a distant rear base to the front line. And without transportation from the rear, the recently occupied land of Zhou Country couldn¡¯t sustain the consumption of the main army at the front either. Because ten years of prolonged warfare had already ravaged the heartlands of Zhou Country. The prefectures of Shuofang, Guannei, Henan, and Nanyang, instead of providing food and fodder for the Wei army at the front, find themselves with millions of starving disaster victims awaitsing relief from Wei Country. In the old territories of Zhou Country, including the front-line troops, there are a total of seven to eight million people relying on Wei Country for sustenance. And that¡¯s not all. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï In recent years, the impact of the cold wave from the north has been growing ever stronger. The great cold that had always been circulating on the steppes has, in the past two years, closely approached the border between the northern territories of Yan State and the steppes. Looking at this trend, perhaps in another three to five years, the legendary great cold that devours all life might descend upon the lands of Yan State. Although the territory of Wei Country didn¡¯t extend to the northern part of Yan State, those northern prefectures had already been taken over by the barbarians from the steppes. Yet the advance of the great cold toward Yan State was still an extremely terrifying signal. Because it meant that there might not be much time left before the cold wave completely inundates Yan State. Perhaps in another twenty to thirty years, Yan State would follow in the steppes¡¯ footsteps and be completely transformed into an icy Snow Country. With such a terrifying disaster looming, how could Wei Country be at ease? Even the barbarians who had migrated south were under the threat of the great cold and began to furiously assault the northern borders of Wei Country. They were nearly sacrificing lives to break the blockade in the north and migrate southward with resolute determination. Wei Country might have to wait twenty to thirty years before being devoured by the great cold. But for those barbarians at the southern border of the steppes and the northern part of Yan State, they were already being consumed by the great cold! To stay in the north meant death; breaking through to the south offered a glimmer of hope for survival. The choice was no longer a matter of consideration. Therefore, shrouded in grave crisis, even though Wei Country was well aware that it was not the right time, and its national strength could hardly support it, the country still had to press on with the project of migrating southward. Now, every year, millions of people from the northern territories of Wei Country migrate southward from Yan State, settling in the two prefectures of Henan and Nanyang occupied by Wei Country to take root and sprout anew, to build and to produce. And this was a huge expenditure of money and grain. Moreover, this expense was quickly expanding each month as time passed. Because the number of people migrating southward from Wei Country was also rapidly increasing every year. The native population of Wei¡¯s Yan State was over thirty million. To migrate all these people to the territories of Yong State and Central State within twenty to thirty years was an immense project with an extremely tight schedule. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï To complete it within the specified time frame and evacuate before the onslaught of the cold wave was not going to be easy. What made it more difficult was that Wei Country, with a population of fifty million, simply could not support the consumption level of ten million people. It meant that Wei Country had to sustain ten million non-productive people with a population of forty million, which was an utterly desperate figure. Wei alone could not sustain such tremendous consumption from both the war and migration. If the opponent didn¡¯t wish to starve their own army and people, they had no choice but to seek help from outside. So, based on this need, that surplus of grain from Chu State, which they couldn¡¯t consume every year, found an excellent outlet. Even Liang had begun importing grain from Chu State in the past two years, and the scale of imports was rapidly increasing year by year. The reason was simple. Wei Country felt the threat of the great cold, and under the compulsion of this natural disaster, was desperate to migrate southward. And Ji State, where Zhao Xu was located, and Xuzhou, where Xu State was situated, were at the same latitude as Wei Country, and to their north were also the familiar steppes and the barbarians of the Mysterious Snow Forest. Affected by the cold disaster, the barbarians from these two territories also began to migrate on a large scale, with tens of millions moving southward. This tremendous pressure naturally also forced Zhao Xu and Xu State to consider a southern breakthrough to seize Central State for settlement. Therefore, in the past two years, the borders between Zhao Xu and Liang have started to experience small to medium-scale conflicts. The Three Nations on the river border have been amassing more and more troops, with the potential for an accidental spark to ignite a conflict on the scale of the Wei-Liang wars in Henan and Nanyang at any moment. Under such circumstances, Liang naturally faced enormous pressure. For the security of the country, it had to strengthen its northern defenses and transport food, fodder, and supplies to the front lines by the big river. At the same time, it ordered the recruitment of a million New Army troops within the country, who were being drilled and trained in the main camp in the rear as a reserve force for the three front lines. To fight on three fronts at the same time, and with battles on each front involving a million troops, the rear had to mobilize millions of civilian workers for labor conscription. Such great consumption naturally affected the production in the rear of Liang Country. So to alleviate its own pressure on food and fodder, and also to accumulate more supplies, Liang, like Wei, chose to buy grain and various supplies from Chu, an outsider, to support its own war consumption. Thus, the annual surplus of food for over twenty million people in Chu State instantly found a destination. The crisis of overproduction within Chu was quickly resolved with the strong demand from Liang and Wei. Chapter 945 - Chapter 945 Chapter 395 Shenwu Prosperous Era ?Chapter 945: Chapter 395 Shenwu Prosperous Era Chapter 945: Chapter 395 Shenwu Prosperous Era In fact, thanks to grain trade with Wei and Liang, Chu State made a fortune from the war. Not only did this stabilize domestic agricultural production, but it also brought in over a hundred million silver taels of foreign trade income through grain trade every year, significantly enriching the treasury. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï As of now, the annual revenue of Chu State has reached a staggering three hundred million silver taels. Of this, the agricultural poll tax accounts for about eighty million silver taels. Domestic and international customs duties account for about ninety million silver taels. The commercial tax accounts for about fifteen million silver taels. Various miscellaneous taxes account for about five million silver taels. In addition, eighteen vassal states of Lingnan and the Southwest annually contribute ten million silver taels. Plus the annual one hundred million silver taels from grain trade, the yearly income of Chu can reach three hundred million silver taels. Such a vast income also made Chu¡¯s finances unfathomably prosperous. After all, Chu currently only had two million soldiers, even if their military spending was calculated at the full rate for active soldiers, it would only be a hundred and twenty million silver taels a year, which is less than half of the yearly income. And the remaining expenditure, including salaries for officials at all levels, investments in local development, maintaining local stability, and the running of local governments, could not possibly use up the left-over one hundred and eighty million silver taels. In truth, let alone one hundred and eighty million, even eighty million silver taels would be more than enough for the Chu court to spend lavishly with open hands. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï Therefore, essentially, Chu ensured a fiscal surplus of one hundred million silver tailes every year. As of now, the national treasury of Chu has amassed almost six hundred million silver taels, enough to cover the expenses of the present two million army for five years. With the population flourishing, grain harvests succeeding year after year, and the treasury full and affluent, all these aspects of growth have made Chu¡¯s national power climb steadily over the years. Now, both within the court and among the populace, it is said that under the reign of the Holy Emperor, the people live in peace and the country is prosperous, heralding an unprecedented golden age. Since Lu Yuan¡¯s reign is named Shenwu, among the commoners, this era is also called the Shenwu Golden Age. Especially in the north where wars rage, and it seems like the whole of the Nine Provinces is embroiled in conflict, maintaining such a tranquil and affluent life in Chu located in the south is like a paradise on earth. This makes it even more precious. However, amidst the praise and adulation from all corners of the court and country, Lu Yuan, the creator of this golden age, is not that jubilant. Instead, he remains worried. a€| Midnight in Baling City still blazes with lights. As a city with a population of two million, Baling might well claim to be the largest city of the age in the current Nine Provinces. The king, being magnanimous, alleviated the people¡¯s suffering after ascending the throne by specifically lifting the nighttime curfew, allowing the citizens to conduct business in the streets at night and providing them another way to make money. And with over a decade of development, as various groups converged on the Imperial Capital, Baling has grown increasingly prosperous and now boasts the ninety-nine districts, acclaimed as the ¡®Heavenly City on Earth¡¯. If someone asked where the most entertaining place in Baling City was, everybody would definitely mention the three thousand boats on Dongting Lake outside the city. The serene lake, twinkling with red lights, reflects the noisy splendor of ornate boats that traverse it beneath the moonlight. This is where Jianghu meets, at the border of Dongting Lake and the Yangtze River, the most joyful place in Baling, and the setting of countless people¡¯s indulgence in luxury and pleasure. ¡°It truly is prosperous,¡± Lu Yuan said, standing on the second floor of a pleasure boat, gazing at the distant, star-like boats on the lake and listening to the ever-present, soothing songs that drift across the water, he couldn¡¯t help but remark. Behind him, in the hazy red light, several gracefully shaped women danced while skilled musicians in the pavilion sang and played their instruments, with a faint aroma of wine permeating the air, filling the boat with a sense of decadence. ¡°Indulging in merriment and neglecting one¡¯s duties, lingering here could only lead to waste and complete degeneration,¡± said Sun Siwen, who walked up behind him. He frowned disapprovingly at the absurd scene on the boat and throughout Jianghu, always a stickler for propriety. ¡°Don¡¯t be so harsh,¡± Lu Yuan responded, turning around and smiling at his old friend. ¡°The joys of the flesh are human nature. Everyone yearns for beautiful and relaxing things, and among those, carnal desires are the most symbolic. Otherwise, the three thousand boats of Jianghu wouldn¡¯t be famous far and wide, and people from all over the Nine Provinces would not continuously come here, making it almost a trademark of Great Chu. If we want to experience the wealth of Baling, how could we not stop by here?¡± With that, Lu Yuan took a cup of wine from a favored attendant on the pleasure boat, downed it at a gulp, tossed away the cup, and casually pulled over the leading courtesan who was leaning on the railing and laughing. He lifted her chin with a grin as she gasped and said, ¡°Lady Qingyu, your name is renowned across Jianghu, isn¡¯t it so?¡± Qingyu, gazing at the handsome young master before her, felt his robust physique and the light fragrance wafting from him, blushed at the manly aura he exuded, and stammered, ¡°Young Master Lu speaks truly. Outsiders who come to Baling, if they haven¡¯t visited Jianghu, can¡¯t claim to have seen the Imperial Capital.¡± After saying this, Qingyu realized she might have spoken out of turn and quickly added, ¡°That¡¯s what they all say around here.¡± Watching his friend¡¯s frivolous demeanor, Sun Siwen instinctively wanted to lecture him. As a king, one must not indulge in lust but govern diligently and love the people¡­ a whole list of reasons that he had always disapproved of. But suddenly remembering their location and their identities at that moment, he forced himself to quell the impulse. Eventually, he said gruffly, ¡°Male and female natures, though natural, must still be practiced with propriety. Such excessive indulgence could only lead to the decay of public morals.¡± Chapter 946 - Chapter 946 Chapter 395 Shenwu Prosperous Era_2 ?Chapter 946: Chapter 395 Shenwu Prosperous Era_2 Chapter 946: Chapter 395 Shenwu Prosperous Era_2 ¡°Over time, the people of our country will know only pleasure and forget practicality, endangering the nation.¡± ¡°We should have the Prefect of Yueyang prohibit the flower boats that sail the rivers and lakes to correct the public¡¯s morals.¡± Upon hearing this, Qingyu, who was playing with Lu Yuan, her expression changed, and she glanced at Sun Siwen, her heart thumping rapidly. As a top courtesan who grew up in the pleasure quarters under strict training, Qingyu was of course extremely adept at reading people and discerning their status. Thus, when she saw Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen, she sensed the noble air that only those accustomed to high positions possess, knowing these two guests were no ordinary men. This was confirmed by the extravagant way they spent tonight, booking the entire flower boat, along with mother¡¯s special instruction not to offend the noble guests of the evening. Now hearing their conversation, she could not entirely discern the young master¡¯s identity. But the middle-aged man who appeared to be in his forties and had a rather old-fashioned air, he must be a high-ranking official at court, at the very least of a higher rank than the fourth-ranked Prefect of Yueyang. Otherwise, he would not speak so bluntly, demanding the ban of the flower boats on the rivers and lakes. It was precisely because of this that Miss Qingyu was nervous. Because in Jianghu, she was the top courtesan, with her fame she could continue to live in splendor. In the future, having saved enough money, she could also buy her freedom, marry some official or wealthy merchant as a concubine, and thus have a chance for a better life. But without Jianghu, the future days of Qingyu could be unpredictable. Most likely, they would be even more miserable than the future of being a concubine. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï How could she not be nervous? ¡°Haha, Brother Sun, look, your words have frightened Miss Qingyu,¡± Lu Yuan laughed, immediately noticing the rigidity of the person in his arms at that moment, and with a moment¡¯s thought, understanding what she was thinking. He glanced at Sun Siwen, who was keeping a straight face, and said, ¡°The things of this world, it¡¯s better to dredge than to block. If you ban these rivers and lakes, it won¡¯t be long before there¡¯s a second Jianghu, though it might be renamed Wanhua Street, Qunyanfang, and so on. As long as the natural inclinations between men and women can¡¯t change, such matters can¡¯t be completely stopped. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Merely suppressing it will only cause it to become distorted and move in an even more uncontrollable direction. Nowadays, we have a flourishing and peaceful age, and Jiangnan is moving from chaos towards peace, so it is right for people, whose lives have changed from hardship to prosperity, to start enjoying pleasure.¡± Shouldn¡¯t people be happy and joyful now that they have money after enduring harsh days for so long? Lu Yuan understood this mentality, as he himself felt and acted this way. When it comes to indulgences, who under the sky could outdo him, the emperor of Great Chu? After giving it some thought, Sun Siwen eventually nodded and said, ¡°Indeed, dredging is better than blocking; these matters can¡¯t be stopped. However, the current state of Jianghu is still too decadent. If it continues, how will the world view our Imperial Capital, how will they view Great Chu? The court still needs to guide it to curb the current trend of indulgence.¡± In fact, Sun Siwen was not against brothels and flower boats; after all, he frequented such places when he was younger. So, he knew well enough that it was impossible to stop such things. What Sun Siwen opposed was the current decadent trend, fearing that Chu State might indulge in pleasure and become corrupted, ultimately leading to its decline. That would be a disaster. ¡°That¡¯s right. The court should only guide on the issue of morals, and it is best not to directly interfere, to avoid overcorrection,¡± Lu Yuan agreed and then added, ¡°But these issues of public morals are really minor things. The reason for the extravagant and frivolous atmosphere in the country now is simply because the times are peaceful, and people have let down their guard, so they indulge in pleasure. But, as you know, Brother Sun, all of this is just superficial. Our peaceful days in Yangzhou will eventually become unsustainable as time passes. When the day comes, Heaven and Earth themselves will force us to engage in the conflicts within the Central State of the north. Once the Great War starts and the drums of war sound, even the most decadent of luxuries will be tempered by blood and fire into resilience and frugality. The prosperous scenes we see today are nothing more than the last illusion before the chaos begins. Wei, Liang, Zhao, Xu, and other states are the future of our Great Chu.¡± Comfort breeds complacency, while crisis induces introspection. Lu Yuan was well aware of this truth, so he never let minor issues like social trends trouble him. On hearing this, Sun Siwen¡¯s expression turned serious: ¡°Is our country gearing up for war?¡± The body of Qingyu in Lu Yuan¡¯s arms grew rigid as well. War, this matter sounded terrifying just hearing about it. She was merely a top courtesan, skilled at entertaining others with her charm, and had no other abilities. If a war were to start, regardless of whether it would spread to the territory of Chu State, it would definitely affect her livelihood. And what exactly were the statuses of these two guests! Discussing such state affairs openly here, was that really alright? Having overheard such military and national matters, she wouldn¡¯t end up silenced, would she? Qingyu felt a shiver of fear. ¡°Not yet,¡± Lu Yuan shook his head and with a hint of worry added, ¡°But that day is not far off. Brother Sun, do you still remember the population and household registration after Great Chu unified Yangzhou in the thirteenth year of Shenwu?¡± Sun Siwen recalled and said, ¡°I remember it was seventy-one million three hundred thousand households, and thirty-six million five hundred and twenty thousand individuals.¡± Lu Yuan nodded and said, ¡°Right, that¡¯s the figure. Now it¡¯s the twenty-fifth year of Shenwu, twelve years have passed, and the latest census of our country has reached eighty-seven million households, and forty-five million three hundred thousand individuals. Chapter 947 - Chapter 947 Chapter 395 Shenwu Prosperous Era_3 ?Chapter 947: Chapter 395 Shenwu Prosperous Era_3 Chapter 947: Chapter 395 Shenwu Prosperous Era_3 The domestic population has increased by nearly nine million compared to twelve years ago. Of this number, subtracting the three million people from the annexed Western Liang, and the one million three hundred thousand Snow Plains Nomads, the naturally grown population in the country is about four and a half million. In other words, in these twelve years, the people of Great Chu have reproduced an additional four and a half million people. This is still the case despite several large-scale migrations within the country during this period, which seriously affected the lives of the populace, leading to this increase in population. Given that life is stable and living standards have become prosperous, the desire for childbearing among the citizens of the country will further increase. Based on historical trends, perhaps in another ten years, the population of Great Chu will naturally increase to fifty-two million; in twenty years, it will be seventy million; and in thirty years, it might exceed one hundred million. Even if it doesn¡¯t reach that by then, in forty years, there will definitely be one hundred million people. A population of one hundred million, Brother Sun, do you know what that means?¡± Lu Yuan stared intently at Sun Siwen, posing a soul-searching question. Gulp! Sun Siwen swallowed, his throat dry from Lu Yuan¡¯s topic of discussion. Although he hadn¡¯t studied statistics, nor the concept of population control, being Prime Minister for so many years did not mean he was unaware of the consequences of an excessive population. The simplest one, too many people and not enough land, leading to insufficient food, is a readily understandable principle. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ¡°In that case, each prefecture in Great Chu would have a population of ten million,¡± Sun Siwen said in a low voice. Lu Yuan lamented, ¡°Yes, Great Chu has only ten prefectures, but if it really had a population of one hundred million, then the population of each prefecture would reach a tremendous ten million, with some prefectures possibly even reaching twenty to thirty million. Although the prosperity of Xichuan, Jianghan, Dongting, and Pengli means they could support this many people, by that time, it will no longer be so easy for every citizen to eat their fill as they do today. Living in hunger will become the norm. Even if the population increases further and food can no longer meet the basic survival needs of the entire nation, widespread famine and cannibalism, and uprisings that spring up everywhere, will follow in succession. By then, this prosperous era will be destroyed in an instant.¡± Speaking of this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but shake his head. Actually, for him, a larger population is certainly preferable. Just like in the past twelve years, although Chu State did not expand its territory, maintaining the size of ten prefectures and eighteen nations, with the development of the local prefectures and the continuous growth of the population, Chu State¡¯s national strength improved, and the Qi Luck that Lu Yuan gathered has improved by several degrees compared to twelve years ago. This is the benefit of a growing population. But the territory has not changed, and the explosive increase in population brings with it realistic issues that cannot be ignored. After all, Chu only has ten prefectures, and this territory will slowly collapse and shrink due to changes in the South Pole in the future. By then, how can the increasingly dwindling territory sustain the ever-growing population? This is an issue that cannot be bypassed no matter what. If it were an ordinary sovereign who could only live for a few decades, one could simply say that the future generations will have their own blessings and leave these difficult problems for the successors to handle. But Lu Yuan is immortal! These problems, which will explode in just thirty or forty years, are just a blink of an eye away for him. He simply cannot avoid them. Therefore, this population issue has become an urgent matter for him to resolve. But how to solve it? The natural tendencies of men and women, the instinct to reproduce, are rooted in their genes; can you forcefully stop people from having children? There are no condoms now, nor do people undergo surgery; even if you wanted to enforce it, you couldn¡¯t. Sun Siwen also thought of these issues. After frowning and pondering for a while, he tentatively said, ¡°Perhaps we could increase Tribute, carry out frequent labor call-ups, making the people exhausted and miserable, which could naturally suppress population growth.¡± Lu Yuan glanced at him, surprised that his friend, always known for his love for the people, would suggest such a harsh theory. But he nodded anyway, ¡°This strategy is indeed feasible.¡± What drives the common people of Great Chu to be so eager to have children? Is it not because the times are good, they have money, and therefore they wish to have more children? But if we impose heavy taxation and strip the people of their wealth, then they are only left with just enough resources to scrape by. Further, by subjecting them to frequent labor conscription that separates husbands and wives, preventing them from reuniting often. When they return, they are too weary and exhausted, their desires naturally diminish. Under both these pressures, it indeed could lessen population growth. To speak cruelly, under such policies, even if the low-level people were to have children, they simply could not afford to raise them. The excess children would inevitably meet a fate of drowning. However, such a policy is too ruthless, too harsh a repression on the low-level classes. Over the years since his transmigration, Lu Yuan had honed his heart to be as hard as iron and did not lack the resolve to enforce such policies. But unless it was necessary, he still did not wish to push the people too hard, his conscience still retained a shred of mercy. Moreover, there are indeed other methods to address this issue. Therefore, after affirming Sun Siwen¡¯s approach, Lu Yuan continued, ¡°Brother Sun¡¯s method is suited for peacetime, when the country¡¯s borders cannot be expanded and resources are in dire straits, a compromise when we have no choice but to consume ourselves. But for now, there is no need to be so extreme. Thirty years later, the population issue of Great Chu will be pressing. By then, the northern states would likely be worn out from warfare. At that time, the power of Great Chu will have reached its pinnacle. After decades of recuperation, we can amass millions of soldiers, dispatch dozens of generals, mobilize thirty million citizens, and launch a Northern Expedition. After several years of fierce fighting, we could eliminate the contending forces and unify Central State. In this way, not only can we expand our territory, but the surplus population in the country can also be consumed by warfare. And with Central State depopulated from the successive Great Wars, there will be ample space to sustain the people of Great Chu. At the same time, after the ravages of war, the people of the world will inevitably be more resilient. By then, applying Brother Sun¡¯s policy of exhausting the people in a slightly milder form should suffice in controlling the population.¡± Indeed, Lu Yuan¡¯s idea was to allow the population to grow to its limits, reaping the demographic dividend first. When it became uncontrollable, then through a war, we could reduce the excess population. After all, news of the increasingly severe northern cold wave had already reached Jiangnan. It is well-known that, with the changes happening in Heaven and Earth, many places apparently are no longer suitable for human habitation anymore. Lu Yuan had originally estimated that the South Pole would undergo changes in a hundred years, which clearly was too optimistic. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 Possibly within thirty to forty years, when the population of Chu State grows to its limits, the toxic fires of the South Pole might start erupting. By then, with the example of the northern cold wave before our eyes, Great Chu can easily justify launching a Northern Expedition by the looming threat of the toxic fires. With the natural righteousness of survival at stake, we can unite all the hearts within the country, concentrate all forces in one place, and fully support the Northern Expedition. Who would dare oppose it would be going against all the people of Yangzhou. Compared to warfare, Sun Siwen¡¯s method of exhausting the people is simply weak. If enacted, it would not only stir up public resentment, unnecessarily offending the entire populace and potentially inciting rebellion. It could also weaken the state, consuming its own strength. What Lu Yuan proposes is much better. Under the pretense of seizing a way of life for the people of Yangzhou, we can mobilize the entire nation to join the Northern Expedition and let the citizens participate in the war themselves. Apart from natural disasters, there is no better way to reduce population than through the catastrophe of war. This way, we need not worry about reputational damage and can effortlessly gain immense prestige. Lu Yuan, with his arms around the trembling Qingyu, soothed the poor girl who had been terrified by their cruel discussion, smilingly said, ¡°Therefore, before this war arrives, let the people of Great Chu enjoy the little time left of this prosperous era. In thirty years, it will be chaos.¡± Sun Siwen looked deeply at Lu Yuan and eventually nodded, ¡°Alright.¡± Chapter 948 - Chapter 948 Chapter 396 Three Challenges of the Immortal Path ?Chapter 948: Chapter 396: Three Challenges of the Immortal Path Chapter 948: Chapter 396: Three Challenges of the Immortal Path Mount Jinfeng. Amidst the hazy mountain ridges, surrounded by a faint mist, lush and vibrant, stood an elegant and majestic palace complex. In a grand hall at the summit, a golden radiance flickered slowly, like breathing, emitting a shimmering glow. The nearby Heavenly and Earthly Aura poured in directly from the sky above, infusing into the golden radiance. Like a whale absorbing water, it was inhaled and absorbed, digested into nourishment, strengthening its own light, making the golden brilliance ever more piercing and dazzling. After a long while, the Spiritual Energy falling from between Heaven and Earth gradually receded. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 The golden radiance swallowed the last strand of Spiritual Energy and then, with a slight flicker, it entered the body of a young man in white robes within the hall and disappeared from sight. ¡°Not bad, the Golden Qi has grown stronger again. According to the current pace, in another three to five years, I¡¯ll be able to nurture this energy to perfection and attempt to separate the third stream of Water Qi from it.¡± Lu Yuan calmed the increased Magic Power and opened his eyes, feeling the Golden Qi within his body becoming ever more perfect, and could not help but feel joy in his heart. He was currently at a Great Boundary known as ¡®Five Qi Towards Primordial¡¯. Within this Great Boundary, a cultivator needs to nurture Gold, Wood, Water, Fire, and Eartha€¡±the Five Qi within the five viscera of their body, and from these Five Qi, successively generate a total of five streams of Immortal Light. This process of condensing the Five Qi into Immortal Light, where each successive Immortal Light represents a minor boundary, leads to an explosion in Magic Power and Divine Soul after a breakthrough, making one¡¯s cultivation profounder. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Among the five minor boundaries, condensing one Qi, three Qi, and five Qia€¡±these three stagesa€¡±also refine the cultivator¡¯s Divine Soul and body once again, a process known by cultivators as ¡®Shedding Mortal Body¡¯. When gathering one Qi, cultivators¡¯ mortal bodies are refined by Spiritual Energy and Magic Power, and the murky qi within their flesh and blood is cleansed, transforming their bodies into an Immortal Fetus and officially stepping into the Immortal Sect. The stage of gathering two levels of energy further deepens this process, completely cleansing the murky qi from the flesh and blood that was not entirely cleansed during the stage of gathering one Qi, resulting in the body reaching a state of clear skin and flesh, known as the Frost Skin Body. Once the Frost Skin Body is achieved, and the cultivator has accumulated enough, they can then refine their bones, eliminating the deep-seated murky mortal qi and replacing the marrow¡¯s mortal qi with the pure qi of the Immortal Spirit. By accomplishing this step, the cultivator reaches the stage of Gathering Three Qi. Gathering Four Qi, like Gathering Two Qi, further refines the bones and marrow, to completely replace the murky mortal qi with the qi of the Immortal Spirit, allowing the body to reach the state of clear bones, known as the Jade Bone Body. Once the Frost Skin Body and Jade Bone Body are complete, the cultivator can be considered to have cultivated an Immortal¡¯s body and can be called by the Immortal¡¯s Appearance. On the path to becoming immortal, this is akin to having secured a ticket to enter the arena. At this point, the cultivator can attempt to continue condensing the fifth Qi, starting the refinement of their ultimate weaknessa€¡±their Divine Soul. This step is the most perilous. After all, how fragile and precious is the human soul? Any damage can result in a severe loss of vitality, either becoming a fool or a lunatic, or leading directly to death and the end of one¡¯s cultivation path. Thus, every cultivator at this stage is extremely cautious, daring not to hurry recklessly. They can only spend vast amounts of time nurturing the Divine Soul, slowly tempering and refining it bit by bit. Using time to slowly refine the soul, shedding the mortal qi, transforming it into an Immortal Soul. During the process of soul refinement, some cultivators, depending on their individual qualifications, have slightly different soul structures compared to ordinary people and can more easily accept the refinement of the Immortal Spirit¡¯s qi, completing this transformation process more quickly. That¡¯s why many ancient Immortal Sects were willing to choose disciples with good qualifications, because they could complete the transformation of the Immortal Soul more easily compared to those with inferior qualifications during the soul refinement process. However, even so, the role of a cultivator¡¯s qualifications only goes so far. Because this process takes an extremely long time and there are no shortcuts, even the cultivators with the best qualifications, those of the Immortal Species, need to spend at least a hundred years or more refining when breaking through from Gathering Four Qi to Gathering Five Qi. For those with just superior or medium aptitude, the time consumed in this process is even longer, counting in two hundred or three hundred years. Although theoretically, there is no bottleneck in the process from condensing Four Qi to Five Qi; it only requires a laborious effort over a long period. But often, what is most freely available is actually the most expensive, and the cost paid is even greater. To achieve a breakthrough in Five Qi Towards Primordial, the best qualified Immortal Species need to spend more than a hundred years, while those with slightly lesser qualifications need two to three hundred years. These years spent are not simply covered by the passing of time. Keep in mind that a cultivator can live for two hundred years when condensing one Qi, three hundred years for two Qi, and five hundred years for three Qi. By the time they condense four Qi, they have only six hundred years at most. In this mere span of six hundred years, setting aside those Immortal Species that are hard to come by, with one appearing only among hundreds of millions, the more common superior and medium aptitude cultivators need to dedicate two hundred or three hundred years from their limited lifespan to break through to Gathering Five Qi after condensing four Qi. It also means that cultivators with superior qualifications must break through condensing four Qi before their lifespan reaches four hundred years. For those with medium aptitude, they must break through condensing four Qi before reaching three hundred years of age. It may not seem difficult for a cultivator to traverse from condensing one Qi to four Qi within three to four hundred years. For those with superior qualifications, having four hundred years and averaging one hundred years per realm provides them with ample time for each breakthrough, which is exceedingly generous. Chapter 949 - Chapter 949 Chapter 396 Three Challenges of the Immortal Path_2 ?Chapter 949: Chapter 396 Three Challenges of the Immortal Path_2 Chapter 949: Chapter 396 Three Challenges of the Immortal Path_2 But is this really the case? Just look at Lu Yuan to know the answer. He cultivated the Fortune Dao, a Burning Life Method that, although it consumes the cultivator¡¯s lifespan extremely quickly, with life passing more than ten times faster than a normal cultivator. However, as a return for the price paid in lifespan, Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation speed was also seven to eight times, or even eight to nine times faster than that of a normal cultivator. Even though the return he gained still wasn¡¯t as much as the life he spent. Yet, looking purely at the rate of his rapid progress, his cultivation speed was indeed considerable. Even so, with such a swift speed, it took Lu Yuan from his seventh year in the Hongdao to the fifth year in Shenwu before he succeeded in Gathering One Qi. In between, he spent eight years, officially entering the Immortal Sect. If calculated according to an eightfold increase in cultivation speed, it equates to sixty-four years for an ordinary person. The reason it took so long was mainly because Gathering One Qi is a checkpoint between mortals and immortals, the first gate for a mortal on the path to the Immortal Realm. Hence, the amount of time and effort a cultivator needs to spend to break through this state is unimaginably vast. Take Martial Arts as an example. A martial artist begins to touch upon the profound spiritual concepts as they start from the secondary realm, attempting to refine their spirit. This is the first challenge of Martial Arts. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Once they cross this hurdle, they advance from third-rate fighters to notable experts of the secondary level in Jianghu, making a name for themselves. Latterly, upon reaching the pinnacle of first-rate martial arts, they must undertake a second breakthrough, refining the body and Divine Soul to reach the Innate Realm. This is the second challenge of Martial Arts. Crossing this hurdle, martial artists have started to break through the limits of mortals, and can now live up to one hundred and fifty years. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? However, limited by various deficiencies and insufficiencies of Martial Arts, the refinement of the body and soul during the breakthrough of an Inborn Grandmaster is actually quite limited. If it¡¯s said that an Immortal Dao cultivator¡¯s breakthrough in Gathering One Qi is incomplete, requiring a state of Gathering Two Qi to supplement and perfect it. Then, the Martial Arts Xiantian is the incomplete of the incomplete, with a gap far wider than the Immortal Dao cultivator¡¯s refinement at the One Qi Boundary. This can be seen from examples where one can live for two hundred years while the other only one hundred fifty, or newly magical-power-wielding Immortal Dao cultivators who can rival Martial Arts Xiantians, among others. Therefore, beyond the Martial Arts Xiantian realm, there¡¯s the accumulation from the second state to the first, and then upon reaching the third state, another refinement of body and Divine Soul is performed. This is the third challenge of Martial Arts. In this way, Martial Arts Grandmasters in the refinement of the body and soul, can barely compare to Immortal Dao cultivators at the One Qi Boundary. Therefore, when reaching the boundary of a Martial Arts Grandmaster, the lifespan increases correspondingly to two hundred years. Looking at the three challenges of Martial Arts, the energy and effort a martial artist needs to invest to climb from the lowest to the highest Grandmaster level is unimaginably immense. On the Immortal Dao cultivators¡¯ side, though it¡¯s somewhat better compared to martial artists, it¡¯s still no easy feat. For an Immortal Dao cultivator to accomplish accumulation from nothing, and to endure the hardship over time, ultimately achieving the transformation of body and soul to Gather One Qi, also requires a significant investment. In the ancient Immortal Cultivation World, there were countless examples of ascetics who labored their entire lives, succeeding in Immortal Dao only at the age of fifty-sixty or seventy-eighty and finally transforming from mortal to immortal. Lu Yuan took sixty-four years to complete this accumulation process, which is rather ordinary. After all, he had measured his innate talent, and it was only medium; he couldn¡¯t compare to those with higher aptitude or the exceptionally talented of the Immortal Species. But it was significantly better than the lower aptitude with no hope in the Immortal Dao. At the very least, in the history of the Nine Provinces¡¯ Immortal Cultivation World, there have been examples of individuals of medium aptitude reaching immortality, though not many, they still exist. In ancient times, it was not rare to see one or two such instances per thousand years. Not to mention, with Lu Yuan¡¯s unlimited lifespan, the impact of innate talent on cultivation speed was almost nil for him, so he cared even less about it. As long as he had the qualification to practice cultivation, he could persist with time and eventually achieve immortality. Therefore, he was not in a hurry. Thus, after breaking through Gathering One Qi in the fifth year of Shenwu, Lu Yuan spent another six years, all the way until the eleventh year of Shenwu, to complete the breakthrough of Gathering Two Qi. When converted to the timeline of an ordinary person, it was nearly forty-eight years or fifty years, to be more exact. The time was less than for breaking through Gathering One Qi, for a simple reason. Because Gathering Two Qi is merely a supplement to Gathering One Qi, not a major boundary, it naturally took less time. Therefore, from the time Lu Yuan began cultivating the Taiping Dao Book, all the way through breaking through Gathering One Qi and Two Qi, it totaled fourteen years, which equates to one hundred twelve years for a common person with medium aptitude. However, Lu Yuan¡¯s calculations were based on his eightfold cultivation speed, and under normal circumstances, it might even be higher, sometimes requiring a ninefold speed. Thus, considering these fluctuations and taking into account the age at which ordinary people come into contact with Immortal Dao, an average cultivator would be around one hundred twenty to one hundred forty years old. Yep, it would be around the time when a medium-aptitude cultivator in Gathering One Qi has just passed two-thirds of their lifespan when they could break through to Gathering Two Qi. The subsequent breakthrough from Gathering Two Qi to Gathering Three Qi, however, belongs to an important transition within the Five Qi Towards Origin Great Boundary. The accumulation of time required to break through this challenge could rival that of breaking through Gathering One Qi, and may even be more difficult. Chapter 950 - Chapter 950 Chapter 396 Three Challenges of the Immortal Path_3 ?Chapter 950: Chapter 396: Three Challenges of the Immortal Path_3 Chapter 950: Chapter 396: Three Challenges of the Immortal Path_3 Lu Yuan is now in the Gather Two Qi phase, which he has been in for fourteen years; this is equivalent to 120 years for an ordinary person with the same qualifications, yet he still cannot break through. He estimates that it will take about three to five more years, or roughly twenty to forty years for an ordinary person, to complete this accumulation. Thus, for an ordinary person with the same qualifications, it would take approximately 150 years to progress from Gathering Two Qi to Gathering Three Qi. Adding on the time it took to break through the previous two realms, an ordinary person of medium aptitude, who has a lifespan of 300 years during the Gathering Two Qi, would likely only break through to Gathering Three Qi between the ages of 270 and 290. It¡¯s akin to barely making the breakthrough, lucky to hit the limit of one¡¯s lifespan. As for progressing from Gathering Three Qi to Four Qi Condensation, Lu Yuan had not yet entered this stage and was thus unclear about how much time it specifically required. But based on his experience and what is recorded in the texts, this breakthrough for a Cultivator with medium aptitude should take about another 110 or so years. Calculating this way, by the time a Cultivator of medium aptitude breaks through to Four Qi Condensation, they would ideally be 380 years old, though it could be closer to 400 years for some. Considering the lifespan limit of 600 years for Four Qi Condensation, a Cultivator of medium aptitude who breaks through to this stage would have just 200 to 220 years of lifespan left. Hmm, given that it takes 300 years for a Cultivator of medium aptitude to complete the refinement of the Immortal Soul, any such Cultivator advancing at a normal rate can basically be considered to have no hope of pursuing the path of Immortality. However, during ancient times when Heavenly and Earthly Aura was abundant and the world of the Nine Provinces had many heavenly treasures. Some of these spiritual objects could help Cultivators swiftly complete the process of breaking through the Gather One Qi phase. As the Divine Blood Elixir aids Martial artists in pursuing the Martial Path, there were Immortal treasures in ancient times that had similar effects on Cultivators just stepping onto the Immortal Path. Therefore, the process that might typically take a Cultivator sixty to seventy years to accumulate enough to break through Gather One Qi could be reduced to less than ten years with the aid of such spiritual objects. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï The time saved could be fifty to sixty years. Beyond various spiritual objects, some deeply-rooted Immortal Sects also have Cultivation Techniques that enhance a Cultivator¡¯s advancement, and some possess Secret Techniques for breaking through boundaries, which can help a Cultivator advance more quickly. These could also save about twenty to thirty years. If you combine both benefits, given sufficient resources, this could help a Cultivator of medium aptitude save another eighty to ninety years. Adding this to the remaining 220 years, one reaches almost the 300-year limit required. As long as a Cultivator manages to complete the refinement of the Immortal Soul within this strict time frame, prior to the end of their lifespan, they naturally could break through to the realm of Gathering Five Qi, extending their life by an additional 300 years. Nevertheless, all of this is purely theoretical. For a Cultivator, avoiding accidents throughout life, disregarding worldly affairs, focusing solely on hidden cultivation, and at the same time having ample resources is extremely difficult! Aside from privileged second or third-generation Immortals, or those with exceptional fates, the others can hardly expect such treatment. Even those favored prodigies, despite having such conditions, could have their journey to Immortality severed by a battle wound or some unforeseen event, delaying them by a few or even a dozen years. This shows just how difficult it is for a Cultivator of medium aptitude to progressa€¡±reflected exactly in the nature of this realm. Conversely, it is much easier for Cultivators with superior qualifications to achieve the Five Qi Chaoyuan Realm. Even if they progress at the pace of a Cultivator of medium aptitude, crawling all the way to Four Qi Condensation, the two hundred years remaining will suffice to transform their Immortal Soul. Moreover, Cultivators with superior qualifications certainly advance faster through the first four Qi realms, typically breaking through Four Qi Condensation around the age of 300. Therefore, after they refine their Immortal Soul and break through Gathering Five Qi, they will have roughly four hundred years left to condense the Dao Fruit and strive for the Immortal Realm. Once a Cultivator begins the Five Qi Towards Primordial, they can start with the culmination of the Five Elements. The Five Qi is the culmination of a Cultivator¡¯s lifelong learning. Moving towards the origin is the integration of a lifetime of learning. Five Qi Towards Primordial is the process where a Cultivator turns their lifelong knowledge into the Five Elements and then integrates these elements to finally condense a Dao Fruit, achieving Immortal status. At this stage, a Cultivator truly transcends the mortal and becomes a true Immortal, or what is also called a True Person. Upon reaching this stage, they officially enter an even higher Great Boundarya€¡±the state of Three Flowers Converging on the Top. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Therefore, with every step a Cultivator takes within the Five Qi Towards Primordial, they lay the foundation for their future state of Three Flowers Converging on the Top. What Lu Yuan is doing now, is perfecting his first level of transformation in the Five Qi Chaoyuan Realm, washing away the impurities from his skin and muscles to cultivate the Frost Skin Body, taking the initial step to form the Immortal Body. At this stage, he is almost finished. ¡°After the Frost Skin Body comes the Jade Bone; and following the Jade Bone is the Immortal Soul. Once all three are in place, a Cultivator grounds their spells and Divine Powers, readying their form to become Immortal. They can then congeal the Dao Fruit and make their attempt at the Immortal Path.¡± Lu Yuan, recalling the summaries of the Five Qi Chaoyuan Realm in the ancient texts, couldn¡¯t help but feel immense pride stirring within him. Now, with the Frost Skin Body, Jade Bone, and Immortal Soula€¡±the three challenges of the Immortal Patha€¡±he was about to break through the first one, and the remaining two were just a matter of time, soon to be achieved. The only issue was the scarcity of Spiritual Energy. But, according to his years of probing and investigating the Heavenly Qi, he was increasingly certain that the energy remaining in the Heavenly Vault was definitely enough for him to complete the three Immortal Path transformations. As for the remaining Five Qi Chaoyuan and gelling the Dao Fruit, he was currently unable to affirm if his resources were adequate for completing this next step. Even if not, having cultivated both the Immortal Body and Soul is indeed no small feat. An Immortal¡¯s Appearance is, no doubt, stronger than a mortal flesh, right? Moreover, with these accumulations, Lu Yuan simply needs to find a place with rich Spiritual Energy to continuea€¡±like Ascending to the Immortal Realma€¡±and becoming Immortal would be a matter of minutes. Such a broad prospect lying ahead naturally fills him with joy. Chapter 951 - Chapter 951 Chapter 397 The Grown-Up Children ?Chapter 951: Chapter 397 The Grown-Up Children Chapter 951: Chapter 397 The Grown-Up Children Having finished his cultivation, Lu Yuan rose and left the palace, strolling around Mount Jinfeng leisurely. Mount Jinfeng was one of the Royal Gardens he had been constructing in these recent years. Throughout these years, as Yangzhou unified, life became peaceful, and Chu State rapidly became prosperous and wealthy. Not only did a large population begin to converge toward the Imperial Capital Baling, causing the city to expand drasticallya€¡±more than tenfold in just over a decadea€¡±but it also became a huge city spanning hundreds of miles around. Even Lu Yuan¡¯s imperial city expanded outside Baling, enclosing many scenic spots as Royal Gardens for his own enjoyment. Mount Jinfeng was one such place. As a Royal Garden, the scenery of Mount Jinfeng was naturally extremely beautiful. After wandering for a while and gazing at the lush greenery, Lu Yuan¡¯s mood instantly brightened considerably. As he walked around, he unconsciously arrived near a waterfall at the mid-mountain, and before he could get close to it, he saw two young figures approaching through the rising mist ahead. ¡°Greetings to Father Emperor.¡± The two approached and saluted Lu Yuan. ¡°Ah, it¡¯s He¡¯er, Hao¡¯er.¡± Seeing the two young men in front of him, a smile spontaneously appeared on Lu Yuan¡¯s facea€¡±they were indeed his eldest son, Lu He, and his second son, Lu Haoa€¡±so he asked, ¡°Are you two brothers practicing martial arts here?¡± Both brothers, Lu He and Lu Hao, inherited excellent genes from Lu Yuan and their mother. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï As they grew up over the years, they had become handsome young noblemen who charmed many a maid in the capital, becoming the object of their affections. Hearing his father¡¯s question, Lu He, the elder brother, nodded and said, ¡°Father Emperor, my brother and I were indeed practicing martial arts. We just broke through Innate a few years ago and thought to train our martial arts more. Therefore, we came to the Purple Smoke Falls to make use of the mutual destruction of water and fire to temper our Red Sun external bodies.¡± Five to six years ago, after more than a decade of accumulation, both brothers, Lu He and Lu Hao, had successively made their breakthrough into the Innate Realm, becoming Martial Arts Grandmasters. Like Zhou Qing and Sun Siwen, they too practiced the ¡°Chiyang Divine Skill¡± that Lu Yuan had learned and created along the way. The martial arts external body they ultimately condensed was naturally also refined by Lu Yuan, perfected to the utmost as the Divine Fire of the Red Sun. The key to cultivating the Chiyang Divine Fire lay in the principle of water and fire opposing each other. It required martial artists to place themselves in completely opposite water environments to force the Chiyang Divine Fire to grow in order to survive. This difficult setting slowly strengthened it, achieving the effect of rapidly solidifying the martial arts external body. This was a small technique that Lu Yuan had figured out in the past years after breaking through Grandmaster, in order to refine his realm. Later, he recorded the detailed methods into the ¡°Chiyang Divine Skill¡±. Lu He and his brother probably read the latest edition of the Divine Skill and came here to try it. ¡°Good, the path of martial arts requires diligent study and constant practice every day. With this diligent heart, you will surely be able to accomplish great things in the future.¡± Lu Yuan patted his sons on the shoulders, encouraging them full of anticipation: ¡°Father Emperor had a lonely and difficult start in life, without relatives from a young age. Our Lu family¡¯s foundation can only be supported by Father Emperor alone. Now that you have grown up, you must not waste your abilities but strive harder. Father Emperor is waiting for you to grow up and support a piece of the sky for Great Chu.¡± Compared to his steady big brother, the younger Lu Hao was full of youthful vigor. Hearing his father¡¯s encouragement, he confidently said, ¡°Father Emperor, rest assured, with me here, I will certainly defend the lands of the Lu family and prevent the untoward from succeeding.¡± Completing his words, Lu Hao then looked at Lu Yuan expectantly, nervously saying, ¡°Father Emperor, I have heard that there are barbarians causing trouble in Hanzhong, encroaching on our borders, utterly abhorrent. In these years, I have been diligently practicing martial arts, and have also been studying military tactics with Senior Brother Zhou for quite some time, achieving modest success. But continuously contemplating behind closed doors ultimately remains a paper discussion; it does not grasp the essence. I wish to ask Father Emperor for a mission, to lead troops to suppress the barbarians in Hanzhong and secure the borders of Great Chu.¡± In the past few months, as the Snow Plains Nomads gradually moved into Chu, the Longxi county they had occupied was abandoned little by little. And the territories left behind were not vacant for long, soon after, some nomadic barbarians from the south followed and occupied them. In this manner, as we retreated, they advanced. In a couple of months, once all the nomads had retreated into Chu, the barbarians occupied the entire Longxi county, bordering Chu State. To have such a people who lived by nomadism, revered the survival of the fittest, and were accustomed to plundering, as neighbors, It didn¡¯t take much thought to realize that the borders of Chu State could hardly be peaceful. Indeed, that was the case. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï In recent months, barbarians kept crossing the Longshan, infiltrating the borders of Hanzhong county, starting invasions like those they had previously done to the nomads. Although these invasions were mostly disorganized, usually involving only dozens or hundreds of men, small bands that couldn¡¯t be called armies, only bandits on horseback. But as the invasions grew deeper, the barbarians sent more and more men, and with increasing frequency. According to Huang Xin¡¯s report to Lu Yuan a few days ago, the barbarians had recently sent out forces of a thousand or more. This was no longer horse banditry, but a real army. Based on this turn of events, Huang Xin speculated that the barbarians might launch a large-scale invasion soon, attempting to cross the Longshan and enter the warmer Hanzhong county. Therefore, Huang Xin felt that merely defending was too passive. Furthermore, setting the battlefield within Hanzhong county meant letting the enemy into their home. Regardless of victory or defeat, the damage to their foundation was inevitable. Chapter 952 - Chapter 952 Chapter 397 Grown-up Children_2 ?Chapter 952: Chapter 397 Grown-up Children_2 Chapter 952: Chapter 397 Grown-up Children_2 Rather than that, it¡¯s better to strike first and gain the upper hand. Deploy troops to take the initiative and strike, crossing Longshan to retaliate in Longxi County and catch those Barbarians off guard. First, wreak havoc on them, strike fear into the Barbarians at the mention of Chu State¡¯s name, and Hanzhong County will naturally become secure. As for this proposal, Lu Yuan naturally wouldn¡¯t refuse. He had already entrusted the court to make preparations, arranging for various divisions to get ready for a series of personnel transfers and supplies assembly, to coordinate with the Hanzhong army¡¯s maneuvers. This matter was quite a buzz among the high-level officials in Baling court; perhaps Lu Hao had caught wind of it, which roused his interest. ¡°You want to go to the battlefield?¡± Surprised by his son¡¯s request, Lu Yuan glanced at Lu He beside Lu Hao who, after hearing the proposal, also looked over expectantly, prompting Lu Yuan to ponder: ¡°It¡¯s not impossible for you to go to the battlefield, but you two brothers must promise me, once on the front line, you can¡¯t act like spoiled princes, you must obey the military orders. On the battlefield, there are no princes, only soldiers, and everything must prioritize military orders. The orders of Yellow True Person are my orders, you must not defy them. Can you do it?¡± Lu Yuan examined his two sons with a discerning and sharp gaze. ¡°No problem!¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï ¡®Who doesn¡¯t know by now that the eight True Persons of the Qing and Yellow in the country are Father Emperor¡¯s Avatars? Even on the front line, in front of Yellow True Person, it¡¯s no different from being in front of Father Emperor. How could we dare to disobey the orders?¡¯ Lu Yuan, unaware of his sons¡¯ inner thoughts, saw them agree to the conditions and nodded in satisfaction, then waved his hand and said, ¡°Since that¡¯s the case, I shall grant you your request. The Hanzhong army has already begun to assemble. In half a month, they will set out on the expedition. With time being of the essence, you should go to the Military Department to receive your appointments, and then as assistant generals, go take your posts at the Hanzhong main camp.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Hao and Lu He promptly bowed and said, ¡°Thank you, Father Emperor.¡± After speaking, the two of them excitedly took their leave, rushing out of the imperial city. ¡°Truly spirited youths.¡± Watching the two sons leave, Lu Yuan¡¯s face showed a tender and gratified expression as he mused, ¡°In the blink of an eye, the little ones who used to follow behind me are now old enough to take to the battlefield.¡± He had no intention of coddling his sons at home, protected like canaries, incapable of enduring the slightest harm. Such an approach is not only not love, but it would turn his sons into incompetent men. Lu Yuan always believed that without experiencing trials and tribulations, one could not mature. So letting these two youngsters see the battlefield, witnessing the harshness of war and understanding the terrifying nature of life and death, was actually not a bad idea. As for the safety of his two sons, what need for concern when Yellow True Person is in Hanzhong? This Avatar is himself, so keeping an eye on Lu He and Lu Hao wouldn¡¯t be any different from them being under his own watch. ¡®Besides, in Hanzhong County, apart from Yellow True Person, there are also Han Hu and Han Liang. Those Inborn Grandmasters from the Barbarians who defected are also serving in the army in the south. Together, that makes eight Inborn Grandmasters. Send Hao¡¯er and He¡¯er there too, and that brings the total to ten. Additionally, with the inclusion of recruited elite Barbarians, the military strength in Hanzhong County has expanded to 280,000 men, of which, aside from twenty thousand county soldiers, the rest are Elite Soldiers. With such strength, it¡¯s not just about sweeping the Barbarians from Longxi County; it¡¯s nearly enough to annihilate the Barbarians entrenched in the five counties of Yong State in the northwest.¡¯ Lu Yuan thought. With all these preparations, the expedition to Longxi was almost a certainty with little to no risk involved. Allowing his sons to experience and learn there was a good idea. ¡°After all, the royal offspring of Great Chu are not useless individuals who only know how to eat and wait for death. Such people cannot be the kind begotten by Lu Yuan,¡± Lu Yuan thought indifferently. ¡­ After seeing Lu Hao and Lu He, Lu Yuan¡¯s interest was piqued, and over the next few days, he began to pay closer attention to the educational progress of his other children. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï With time bringing stability, he didn¡¯t need to lead his troops on expeditions as often, and so he began to spend more time in the inner palace. With some effort, he had seven more sons and five daughters, in addition to Lu He and Lu Hao, totaling fourteen children. Of these, no fewer than eight were over ten years old, all of whom were studying Martial Arts, preparing to hit the Innate Realm. Even the younger ones had started laying the foundations without neglecting their studies. Lu Yuan took great care in the cultivation of all his children, both male and female, providing them with the best resources and education, striving to mold them into talented individuals rather than useless ones. Lu He and Lu Hao were merely the eldest of the lot. Below them, twelve more brothers and sisters were still growing up. The educational resources they were receiving were no less favorable than those provided to the two older brothers. Particularly noteworthy were Lu Xin and Lu Ji, the siblings born to Lu Yuan by the Spiritual woman, who had reached the ages of fifteen and sixteen, respectively. Under Lu Yuan¡¯s careful tutelage, they were already beginning to tackle the Innate Realm. In another two or three years, the royal Lu clan of Chu State would have two more members reaching the Innate Realm. However, such concerted efforts to develop princes and princesses, aiming for them to reach the Innate Realm, came at a great cost. If it were not for the fortune that Lu Yuan had come into previously, he would not have been able to sustain such expenditure. Over the years, as the active Spiritual Energy between Heaven and Earth depleted, the previously abundant Divine Blood Variants that could survive in Blessed Lands and Caves world began to die off in significant numbers due to the lack of Spiritual Energy. Chapter 953 - Chapter 953 Chapter 397 The Grown-Up Children_3 ?Chapter 953: Chapter 397 The Grown-Up Children_3 Chapter 953: Chapter 397 The Grown-Up Children_3 Therefore, to avoid wasting resources, as early as the year the cultivators of the Nine Provinces ascended, once he noticed the fluctuations in Spiritual Energy, Lu Yuan issued orders within the country to execute the more than a hundred Divine Blood Variants bred by the court and collect their Spiritual Blood and spiritual materials. Just that wave alone allowed the depleted elixir storehouses of Chu State to become instantly wealthy. After that within the territory of Chu State, Lu Yuan had local officials purchase the Divine Blood Variants from the Jianghu sects. He also sent Messengers to vassal states, demanding that those vassals contribute their own Divine Blood Variants. Through a combination of threats and inducements, he secured nearly another hundred Divine Blood Variants both domestically and internationally. Once he had brought Ning Country to heel, the two-thousand-year foundations of the Coastal Aristocratic Family were looted by Lu Yuan in one fell swoop, obtaining over two hundred Divine Blood Variants. The total of more than four hundred Divine Blood Variants were all killed for their blood and materials, producing over eleven thousand three hundred elixirs for Chu State. These elixirs, in addition to the little existing stockpile of Chu State, were sufficient to cultivate twenty-three Inborn individuals for Great Chu. Such a vast treasure, Lu Yuan naturally wouldn¡¯t give to outsiders; it was taken for granted that it all went to cultivating his own children. After all, in these tumultuous times, it goes without saying that one¡¯s own family is the most reliable and trustworthy. So among the remaining twelve children, each one without exception was set on the path of the Inborn, prepared to be trained into Martial Arts Grandmasters. Moreover, with Chu State needing to recuperate for another thirty or forty years, there was ample time to wait for these children to grow up. It was not a matter of reluctantly holding onto the elixirs without use, leading to the waste of Chu State¡¯s potential top-tier combat power. However, even so, there were still eleven unused slots from the accumulated elixirs, left over. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Fortunately, Lu Yuan¡¯s harem had plenty of concubines, with no shortage of women willing to bear him children, so there was no concern over the elixirs going unused. The only somewhat problematic issue was that in recent years, as his own cultivation rose and his body gradually transformed towards that of an Immortal¡¯s, the women of his harem remained mortal. Due to the inherent difference between immortals and mortals, creating a difficulty for immortals and mortals to come together, it has become a bit more challenging for him to have offspring than before. Moreover, this difficulty continued to climb as time passed. He estimated that perhaps once he achieved the Four Qi Condensation, with both Ice Flesh and Jade Bone, and his Immortal Body fully developed, he would then be unable to procreate with mortals. In such a situation, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t know whether he would be able to fill the remaining slots with offspring before he completely lost the capability to have children with mortal women. But even if he couldn¡¯t fill them all, it wouldn¡¯t matter, at worst, he could designate the remaining elixirs as part of the family legacy, ensuring that in the coming hundreds of years, aside from himself, the Lu family would have generation after generation of Inborn. Alternatively, using the excess elixirs as rewards to honor his loyal subjects wouldn¡¯t be a bad idea either. This precious treasure was, after all, not likely to be squandered on his own watch. After spending a few days with his children, Lu Yuan withdrew from the concerns of supervising his children¡¯s education, which was the role of a worried parent. It wasn¡¯t that he was tired of being tormented and wanted to slack off. Frankly speaking, his children were all very diligent and studious, and took their martial arts training seriously. Their regular studies were overseen by their mothers and the literary and martial tutors of the royal palace, sparing Lu Yuan the need for excessive concern. His time ostensibly spent teaching his children was actually mostly playing with them, to allow these poor souls, oppressed by their studies, to relax a little. This was also a way of compensating them, as their father. Thus, Lu Yuan actually didn¡¯t mind spending more time with his children. However, he was indeed the emperor, and there were major matters of state that required his attention. Therefore, when the news came from the North that Zhao Country had launched the Southern Expedition and commenced hostilities with Liang Country, and after messengers Lu Yuan had sent to Yu State Zheng Country returned half a year later, faced with these two major issues, he had no choice but to step away from familial joys to deal with the events that would surely affect the power dynamics of the entire Nine Provinces. ¡­ Zhao Country¡¯s desire to invade Liang Country was not a secret and was, in fact, an open piece of news throughout the Nine Provinces. Starting several years ago, Zhao Country began stationing troops on the border with Liang Country and would constantly send out small-scale forces to harass and penetrate Liang Country. Liang Country countered strongly. They also stationed a large number of troops at the border and took a policy of no quarter against any Zhao soldiers bold enough to cross the territory. Over the years, the two countries have had countless small-scale clashes along the border, and tensions have been at a boiling point. This immense pressure even prompted Liang Country to temporarily set aside the threat of Chu Country, instead turning to purchase grains from Chu to prepare for the looming war. Now, after several years of probing, Zhao Country could no longer hold back. In the middle of last month, which was the thirteenth day of the eighth month of the twenty-fifth year of Shenwu, one hundred twenty thousand troops were mobilized, including twenty Inborn, boldly invading the eastern region of Liang Country. On the side of Liang Country, the eastern region had originally been stocked with three hundred thousand soldiers and ten Inborn as commanders, who now held strong in their city fortifications, managing to hold the line temporarily. Moreover, upon receiving the news, Liang Country had already begun to dispatch a steady stream of reinforcements to the eastern region to support it. Based on the estimates made by the Imperial City¡¯s spies in Liang Country, within a month, Liang Country would be able to muster five hundred thousand soldiers and twenty Inborn in the eastern region. In three months¡¯ time, it could amass an army of one million, with no fewer than thirty Inborn. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï If Zhao Country couldn¡¯t make a breakthrough before this time frame, once Liang Country fully gathered its forces and responded, it is likely that they would be driven back across the river. However, even if they managed to secure a foothold in the eastern region, considering Liang Country¡¯s strength, Zhao Country alone would likely struggle to hold its ground. Therefore, regardless of whether a breakthrough occurs or not, the key to victory in this newly erupted northern conflict does not lie with Zhao Country, but with its neighbor Xu State. Zhao Xu, the two countries, have, in recent years, already entered into an alliance. At this point, with Zhao Country making a move, Xu State will surely follow soon. Only with Zhao Xu This precious treasure was, after all, not likely to be squandered on his own watch. joining forces, combining the might of two dominions, could they hope to contend with Liang Country. Chapter 954 - Chapter 954 Chapter 398 Northern Territory Deliberations ?Chapter 954: Chapter 398 Northern Territory Deliberations Chapter 954: Chapter 398 Northern Territory Deliberations Diligent Governance Hall. After learning that the battle of the eastern province had erupted, Lu Yuan immediately convened his assembly of ministers to discuss the situation. ¡°Everyone, please speak your thoughts, Zhao and Liang are at wara€¡±how should Great Chu respond?¡± Lu Yuan summarized the news from the northern Qingzhou and then looked towards the people, raising the question aloud. Below him, the leading military officer Zhou Qing and the leading civil official Sun Siwen, each heading the significant military and civil officials of Chu State, listened somberly. Upon hearing the inquiry, everyone exchanged glances before Zhou Qing stood up and said, ¡°Your Majesty, in your servant¡¯s opinion, with Zhao and Liang at war, Great Chu need not intervene excessively; we should simply watch and see how the situation unfolds. Your servant was stationed in the Northern Border for many years, neighboring Former Zhou¡¯s Xiangyang and Liang¡¯s Jiangxia. Over the span of several years, though no great war erupted with these two states, occasional minor conflicts did occur. In the early stages of our skirmishes with these two nations, Zhou¡¯s soldiers were robust, often overpowering Great Chu¡¯s soldiers in direct confrontations. However, in the later stages, Zhou¡¯s finest soldiers were mostly drawn away by their many military engagements, and many infirm and elderly were forcibly conscripted, leading to a deterioration in the quality of their troops. At the same time, due to the enlistment of men into the army, there was a labor shortage in the Zhou countryside, resulting in insufficient production and a scarcity of military suppliesa€¡±consequentially, the soldiers could not undergo adequate training, naturally lacking in skill. In the end, once renowned as one of the top three hegemons and immensely powerful, Zhou Country¡¯s military strength rapidly declined, leading to its downfall amidst continuous war at the hands of Wei Country.¡± Zhou Qing began by citing the example of the now-extinct Zhou Country, then smoothly changed the subject, saying, ¡°Zhou became weak because of war and was ultimately destroyed due to its weaknessa€¡±this was the cause of its downfall. However, Liang has remained comparatively stable over the years. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï Although there have been some conflicts with Wei Country in recent years, even the deployment of a million soldiers would barely scratch Liang. Thus, for decades, our Chu State has been unable to gain any advantage over Liang on the border. Liang¡¯s soldiers have always been among the fiercest in the world, the paragon of elite troops. With their forces unscathed and soldiers unweakened, even if Wei, Zhao, and Xua€¡±the Three Nationsa€¡±attack, Liang might find it difficult to achieve a great victory, but there should be no problem defending the country and protecting its borders. In your servant¡¯s view, within fifteen years, it will be impossible for these Four Kingdoms to determine a victor in the ongoing war.¡± Zhou Qing spoke freely, offering his own analysis. He knew what his Master meant by inquiring about the war between Zhao and Lianga€¡±it wasn¡¯t about whether Chu should kick them while they are down, joining Wei, Zhao, and Xu in ganging up on Liang. Instead, it was asking whether Liang could hold on, and whether Chu should offer assistance. Yes, preserving Liang is currently the top strategic priority of Chu. The reason, of course, is that Qingzhou to the north cannot be divided; it must be unified under one power. Only then can a situation arise where the victor takes all, and the loser is left with nothing. Only then can the contradictions and disputes among the four nations reach the highest degree of intensity, completely incapable of being resolved. The situation in the Nine Provinces is actually quite clear now. As the four poles of Heaven and Earth undergo change, in order to survive, the occupants of the ten realms outside Central State will instinctively move closer to Central State. In the end, all the forces from the Nine Provinces will converge in Central State, engaging in a ferocious struggle for the last remaining rights to existence. And to capture a glimmer of hope in the upcoming grand struggle, to eventually seize dominance of Central State in the futurea€¡± a€¡±the existing factions must occupy enough territory in Central State beforehand, and amass the most formidable strength before catastrophe fully ensues, to achieve an absolute advantage over the other forces. Without doubt, Liang currently occupies such an advantageous position. So, to ensure that this advantage can be maintained until disaster fully erupts, this power, which has unified Qingzhou and claimed half of Central State, will naturally do everything possible to protect its interests by preventing others from entering the fray to carve up its share. This is precisely what Liang is doing. On the west side, it suppresses Wei Country, seeking to expel them from Central State; in the north, it deploys heavy forces along the river to block Zhao and Xu¡¯s advance southwards. On the south side, Liang maintains a delicate balance with Chu, feigning cooperation along the Yangtze Rivera€¡±alternating between cautious and cooperative, walking on a tightrope. On the east, Liang has a somewhat better relationship with Zheng of Yuzhou, sharing a similar plight, and so, they are not overly wary of each other, sparing their energy. Therefore, from the aforementioned arrangements, it is evident that Liang is fully committed and intricately planning to preserve its interests. Similarly, Zhao, Xu, and Weia€¡±who either have not yet tasted the cake or feel they¡¯ve gotten too small a piecea€¡±are unwilling to be prematurely ruled out of the competition for Central State. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã? For survival, these three countries will struggle to advance into Central State, instinctively attacking those two that block their path deeper into the region. One seeks to maintain its interests, to keep the cake; the other seeks to compete for interests, to claim a share of the cake. As long as the balance of power among Zhao, Xu, Wei, and Liang is not broken, they are naturally in an adversarial position, bound by conflicting interests that are impossible to reconcile. That¡¯s why there is the ongoing massive war between Wei and Liang along the lines of Henan and Nanyang, with both sides rallying millions of soldiers and warring for several years. Zhao¡¯s million-strong army has invaded Liang¡¯s eastern province, and the flames of war have risen on both sides. Xu State, to the north of the great river, is eager to join the fray at any moment. It¡¯s all about interests at play here. It¡¯s also because of such interests that the four nations consume each other, just like the now-extinct China, slowly bleeding themselves dry bit by bit. Chapter 955 - Chapter 955 Chapter 398 Northern Territory Deliberations_2 ?Chapter 955: Chapter 398 Northern Territory Deliberations_2 Chapter 955: Chapter 398 Northern Territory Deliberations_2 But this situation can also be changed. Between the four kingdoms, reconciliation is not impossible. The prerequisite for change is for Liang to lose its current absolute advantage, to lose its position of dominance over Qingzhou. If Wei, Zhao, and Xu successfully enter Central State and are willing to share the future ¡°cake¡± equally with another country, all sides would be on the same footing. Qingzhou has sixteen prefectures; add to that the two prefectures of Henan and Nanyang in Yong State, and just looking at the nearby region, the chessboard already has half of Central State, with a total of eighteen prefectures¡¯ worth of ¡°cake.¡± Out of these eighteen prefectures, Wei Country managed to eat two, barely acquiring a ticket to the game. Liang ate sixteen, almost monopolizing all the benefits. Zhao and Xu, on the other hand, are kept on the outside, typical of those who wish to join the feast but are blocked at the door by Liang, the holder of vested interests. At first glance, the shares of the eighteen prefectures are being contested by four players, or even five if you include Chu State, making the quotas seem scarce and insufficient. But is this really the case? Based on the topic that Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen discussed recently, Chu State¡¯s population is expected to quickly rise above one hundred million, and, at that time, an average prefecture in Chu would have a population of over ten million. Even the richer and well-developed major prefectures that produce more grain can support twenty to thirty million people without difficulty. Central State, as the longest-developed region of the human race in the Nine Provinces, not only has the best local infrastructure, but the land is mostly plains crisscrossed by a network of waterways, making it an absolute grain-producing area. With such terrain, it¡¯s no trouble supporting twenty or thirty million people in a prefecture, let alone ten million. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? Theoretically, considering the limit of development, the eighteen prefectures in western Central State currently contested by the five kingdoms could be evenly divided, with each country getting three to four prefectures on average. Taking the median estimate of supporting twenty million people per prefecture, even with only three prefectures, a nation could sustain a population of over sixty million, or possibly even seventy or eighty million with a bit more. And if allocated four prefectures, it might be possible to sustain a population of over one hundred million. The carrying capacity of the lands of the Nine Provinces is actually very strong today. The main reason for the sparse population of the countries is still due to the continuous wars, various natural disasters and epidemics, and the undeveloped production techniques of the past. Today, after thousands of years of war in the Nine Provinces, numerous small countries have been annexed by each other, gradually giving rise to the current situation with major powers side by side. Within each state, partial unification has been achieved, and a large number of technologies have been invented and adopted because of the wars, allowing the common people a stable living environment, thus population growth has slowly started to explode. ?¦Ï???.§ã0 However, this explosion is just the beginning; it has not yet exceeded the carrying capacity of Central State. So, there¡¯s still plenty of ¡°cake¡± to go around. So what are the current population figures of each country? The latest population of Chu State is forty-five million. And Liang, with its population data from more than a decade ago, was sixty million. After more than a decade of development, its population has reached eighty million. The population of Wei was over thirty million more than a decade ago. After annexing Zhou Country, it gained ten million more people. Subsequently, by absorbing some Barbarian people migrating south from the north, its population gradually reached around fifty million. Zhao originally had only over twenty million people. In the last decade or so, with recuperation and by accepting some southward-migrating Barbarians, its population has now reached thirty million. Xu, the weakest in strength, had a baseline population of twenty million previously. Through its own reproduction and the incorporation of Barbarians, its population also reached around twenty-five million. Hmm, according to the above population data, three prefectures in Central State would suffice to accommodate Chu State. Liang would only need four prefectures. Wei would also need just three prefectures. Zhao and Xu would be content with two prefectures each. Together, all five kingdoms would only take fourteen prefectures, leaving four more available for those with the strength to take an extra share of the ¡°cake.¡± Thus, even with just eighteen prefectures, as long as the five kingdoms can reach a consensus, it¡¯s enough for them to share. So in the end, if the plan does go through and each kingdom manages to occupy three to four prefectures each, the sharp conflicts between the countries could be instantly relieved. At that time, everyone would stay within their own territory, guarding the land of three to four prefectures, living their peaceful lives. The strengths of all would be quite similar, and any country wishing to annihilate another wouldn¡¯t be able to do so easily. Even if they could, the other neighboring countries would not stand by and watch. It creates a situation where if you dare to annihilate a country, I dare to join forces to beat you up. Just like the Warring States era in Lu Yuan¡¯s previous life. With the strengths and foundations of the nations, and by forming alliances and counter-alliances, they would be able to check and balance each other, maintaining a new equilibrium. Eventually, when the strength of one side accumulates to a level capable of breaking the balance, they can sweep through the six states and unify Central State. This kind of situation seems quite good at a glance, taking into consideration the interests of all parties. But does this really serve the interests of Chu State? Does it truly conform to Lu Yuan¡¯s wishes? To confine oneself to the small territory of three to four prefectures, and with the other countries, enduring the long wait for the situation¡¯s balance to be broken. Although this endurance is definitely in his favor. After all, when it comes to longevity, no one can surpass himself. When the time comes, wait a hundred years or at most, a few hundred years. Chapter 956 - Chapter 956 Chapter 398 Northern Territory Deliberations_3 ?Chapter 956: Chapter 398 Northern Territory Deliberations_3 Chapter 956: Chapter 398 Northern Territory Deliberations_3 ¡°As long as the Inborns of other nations are worn down to death, then Great Chu, as the only country remaining with Innate Combat Power, could naturally sweep across these nations, and easily secure the ultimate victory.¡± ¡°But there¡¯s no need, really no need.¡± ¡°If something can be done early on, why make an unnecessary move and leave it for several hundred years later?¡± ¡°Being a shrinking turtle is not a commendable act.¡± ¡°First, support Liang, let this Central State overlord struggle to the death with others who want a share of the pie, and have them fight until they are battered and utterly exhausted.¡± ¡°Finally, can¡¯t Great Chu enter with overwhelming strength and carry out a clean sweep directly?¡± ¡°Therefore, based on this starting point, several years ago, when Zhou Country exited the stage, Lu Yuan discussed with the key ministers of Chu State and decided to support Liang to drain the resources of Wei, Zhao, Xu, and other countries.¡± ¡°This is also why, when Lu Yuan heard about the outbreak of war between Zhao and Liang, realizing that the Three Nations and Liang had officially clashed, he immediately summoned his ministers to discuss.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not that Chu State wants to kick someone when they¡¯re down, but rather out of concern that Liang might not withstand the joint assault of the Three Nations and prematurely exit the stage, being compelled to share Central State with the other three countries, which would go against the interests of Great Chu.¡± ¡°Your Majesty, I¡¯ve heard that Liang has a population of eighty million, with cultivated farmland amounting to 1.2 billion acres, while the army they maintain so far only amounts to four million.¡± said The Prime Minister Sun Siwen, also reminding him. Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan suddenly realized. ¡°Indeed, with Liang¡¯s population of eighty million, currently sustaining an army of four million, it¡¯s merely twenty people supporting one soldier, far from reaching its limit.¡± ¡°If we follow the more mainstream ratio of modern times, that is, one that both ensures qualified soldiers and sustains production at home, which is three households providing one soldier¡­¡± ¡°The actual limit of Liang¡¯s military strength is an army of around 5.2 million.¡± ¡°Now there are only four million soldiers; the opponent still has a reserve force of 1.2 million at any time, ready to be recruited without compromising the quality and combat strength of these soldiers.¡± ¡°And on the Southern Line, along their border with Chu State, Liang has only stationed eight hundred thousand soldiers. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã0 On the eastern side, along their border with the Yuzhou Overlord, Zheng Kingdom, they have merely stationed four hundred thousand.¡± ¡°Apart from these southern and eastern lines, Liang can mobilize an army of four million to engage in combat with the Three Nations of Wei, Zhao, and Xu.¡± ¡°On the other hand, the Three Nations combined have a total population of a hundred million.¡± ¡°In theory, they could draft about seven million qualified soldiers, an excess of two million over Liang.¡± ¡°But these three countries in the North Territory face tens of millions of Barbarians who have migrated south from the North Territory, or the enemy¡¯s population on the northern side of their own states.¡± ¡°To defend against these enemies, doesn¡¯t each of the three nations need to place a million soldiers on their northern border while also maintaining sufficient reserve forces within their countries to respond to any sudden upheavals or turmoil?¡± ¡°So, it might appear that the combined strength of the three-nation alliance far surpasses Liang.¡± ¡°But, after deducting the troops they need to defend their own countries¡­ ¡°The actual force they can divert for the font line is about the same as Liang¡¯s, with both sides having around four million people.¡± ¡°But Liang is a single entity, while Wei, Zhao, Xu are three, just in terms of solidarity alone, which is a fatal weakness for the alliance.¡± ¡°Looking at it this way, Liang does have a certain advantage.¡± ¡°So, at the start of the war, both camps are essentially in a deadlock, hoping to determine a win or lose seems bleak.¡± ¡°Even if Liang begins to falter in the later stages of the clash and gradually becomes outmatched, it¡¯s not possible for them to quickly succumb.¡± ¡°Back in the day, Zhou Country endured so direly, being attacked from all sides, with its elite soldiers almost completely lost in the protracted warfare.¡± ¡°In the end, didn¡¯t they still hold on for another ten years with a few old and weak soldiers and horses?¡± ¡°Liang has an even stronger foundation than Zhou, so even if five million elite troops are lost, they can still call up five million people with maximized mobilization from the remaining eighty million population.¡± ¡°Moreover, Liang has many plains and water networks within its territory, plenty of fertile land, and abundant grain production. The 1.2 billion acres of fertile land can sustain such a large army.¡± ¡°It won¡¯t end up in a state of famine like Zhou in its late stage.¡± ¡°Even if that still isn¡¯t enough, given the current relationship between Liang and Chu, the latter can also voluntarily withdraw troops from the border, alleviating Liang¡¯s pressure in the Southern Territory.¡± ¡°Let the eight hundred thousand troops stationed along the Yangtze River in Liang be withdrawn and dispatched northward for combat.¡± ¡°Taking it to the extreme, just like the former Liang supported Zhou as a barrier in the north, Chu can support Liang in the same way; that¡¯s not out of the question.¡± ¡°Of course, all of these methods are still theoretical.¡± ¡°Under actual circumstances, things may not reach that point.¡± ¡°After all, for the Three Nations of Wei, Zhao, and Xu, to completely exhaust Liang¡¯s five million elite troops, another five million weaker ones, and to extinguish this Qingzhou hegemon, it¡¯s not that easy.¡± ¡°Perhaps before they can defeat Liang, they themselves due to the invasion of Barbarians from the north and the endless wars in the south, will be drained of their strength.¡± ¡°They might just collapse ahead of time, bringing their own downfall.¡± ¡°Or maybe, after losing five million elites, Liang will choose to compromise, willing to cede territory, and share Central State with the three nations.¡± ¡°Then, united, they could turn to confront Chu instead.¡± ¡°The world changes, and outcomes are uncertain.¡± ¡°Anything is possible, and Lu Yuan is not a god who can have everything develop according to his will.¡± ¡°But now, after the explanations from Zhou Qing and Sun Siwen, one thing can be confirmed.¡± ¡°That is, even facing the encirclement of the Three Nations, Liang¡¯s strength can withstand a standoff for more than a decade without defeat, and that is not a problem at all.¡± ¡°As long as we can confirm this, it is enough.¡± ¡°As for things ten years in the future, times will change, and the situation will be unrecognizable.¡± ¡°No matter how capable the Monarch and Ministers of Chu are, they can¡¯t predict that far.¡± ¡°We can only respond to things as they arise.¡± ¡°In that case, for the war between the Three Nations of Wei, Zhao, Xu, and Liang, Great Chu will continue to watch from the sidelines and abstain from intervening,¡± Lu Yuan concluded, having made up his mind as he looked at his ministers. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Then he thought for a moment and added, ¡°However, regarding the grain trade with Liang, we can step up a bit and provide more grain to the opponent, and the price can be a bit cheaper.¡± ¡°While saying not to directly intervene, to act according to one¡¯s subjective intent in giving a bit of biased help, that is unavoidable.¡± ¡°At this moment, providing some assistance to Liang with food, to reduce their military food pressure, would be just that.¡± Chapter 957 - Chapter 957 Chapter 399 Yuzhou Zheng Kingdom ?Chapter 957: Chapter 399 Yuzhou Zheng Kingdom Chapter 957: Chapter 399 Yuzhou Zheng Kingdom After discussing the warfare of the Liang Kingdom, the morning court session did not end, and Lu Yuan brought up another matter. ¡°At the beginning of the year, in preparation for the future integration with Central State, I sent a messenger to the Zheng Kingdom, another major country located in the same Central State as Liang, to probe its weaknesses.¡± Just yesterday, the messenger I sent to Yu State Zheng Country returned, bringing the latest news of internal strife within Zheng Kingdom.¡± Lu Yuan looked at his officials and finally turned to a man below, saying, ¡°Wen Qing, you were the main envoy for this mission and also serve as the vice minister of the Honglu Temple; it¡¯s up to you to inform the other officials about the latest situation in Zheng Kingdom.¡± From among the crowd, Wen Shu, upon hearing the emperor call his name, stepped out of line, and after performing a ritual bow, said, ¡°Your Majesty, gentlemen, this year in February, following Your Majesty¡¯s orders, I set forth as an envoy to Yu State, the principal territory of Zheng Kingdom. I traveled down the river by boat and finally took to the sea at the end of the month, arriving at Zheng Kingdom and subsequently proceeded to its capital, Xinzheng.¡± The Emperor of Zheng, hearing of the arrival of an envoy from Great Chu, was quite pleased and accorded me with a grand reception. During our meeting, after conveying Your Majesty¡¯s greetings to Zheng Kingdom, the Emperor of Zheng also expressed his goodwill towards Chu State. He even inquired several times about the details of Great Chu and Your Majesty¡¯s tactics and strategies. Following Your Majesty¡¯s instructions before departure, I thoroughly explained these matters to the Emperor of Zheng. After hearing this, the Emperor of Zheng greatly admired Your Majesty¡¯s heroic strategies and significant achievements, expressing profound admiration. As for the matters of trade between Chu and Zheng, the Emperor of Zheng readily agreed without any hesitation. I also visited a group of ministers and officials in Xinzheng City, including the Zheng royal family led by the ruler Zheng Chan, who were quite friendly during my visit and expressed goodwill towards Great Chu, much like the Emperor of Zheng. However, when I met with Zheng Kingdom¡¯s Grand General, Zhang Shou, his attitude towards Great Chu was rather cold, and he expressed hostility towards me several times. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Later, after making some inquiries, I learned that twenty years ago, the current Emperor Zheng Lian was not yet enthroned; he was merely a prince of Zheng, contending for the throne with his brother Zheng Ze. At that time, the Zheng court was divided by this struggle for the throne into two factions. One supported Big Emperor Son Zheng Lian, led by the ruler Zheng Chan of the royal kin, while the other supported Third Emperor Son Zheng Ze, led by the Grand General Zhang Shou, a faction of noble in-laws. These two factions¡­¡± As Wen Shu slowly narrated, everyone in the hall gradually learned the details of Zheng Kingdom¡¯s domestic affairs. It turned out that Zheng Kingdom began as a small state in Yuzhou, ruling over a mere two prefectures. At that time, among the neighboring states of Zheng, there was a larger country that had already unified one entire commanderya€¡±Cao State. And Cao State, with great ambition, was keen on expanding its territories, directly aiming to conquer the region where Zheng Kingdom was situated. In the area where Zheng Kingdom was located, besides itself, there were seventeen small state powers at the time. These small states, just like Zheng, were weak, with the larger states ruling over no more than one prefecture, and the smaller ones a mere three to five counties. Each state was frail and easily defeated. Normally, faced with a unified Cao State ruling over one entire commandery, these small states led by Zheng would have no way to withstand the military might of Cao and would inevitably succumb to being annexed one by one. But somehow, whether out of desperation or collective wisdom, the small states neighboring Zheng astonishingly formed a union in the face of Cao State¡¯s overwhelming pressure. It was a true union. After retaining their autonomy over their territories, these small states relinquished their Altars of Soil and Grain, choosing to submit to Zheng and offered their lands for merger. Zheng then recognized the rulers of these submitting states¡¯ rights to autonomous rule over their former lands and granted them corresponding titles. Further conditions stated that these self-governing regions must pay a certain amount of tribute to the court and provide private soldiers from their domain for battle when national war arises. So, the seventeen nobles in the vicinity of Zheng completed their transition from being sovereign rulers to being vassals within Zheng¡¯s domain. These states were incorporated into Zheng, becoming territories within the nation. Through mutual compromise among these small states, they merged into a large country that satisfied the interests of most people. Thus, in an instant, Zheng transformed from an insignificant small state with just two prefectures into a large country possessing territories of two entire commanderies. Although this nation was loosely structured with numerous feudal territories within, and the land under the direct rule of the king remained only the original two prefectures of Zheng, the rest belonging to the vassals, internally, the details aside, after the consolidation of nearby small states, Zheng had effectively become a unified entity. With the nominal authority of the king, Zheng could integrate resources by collecting taxes. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï It could also assemble the military forces within the country through the obligations of the vassals to defend against external enemies or to engage in territorial expansion through national war. Armed with this function, the newly formed Zheng, with almost twice its previous size, after fighting several years of war with Wei State, finally stopped the invasion of Cao State. Using this war as a catalyst, the originally forced, loosely united Zheng with scattered public loyalties, gradually organized its people¡¯s hearts, gradually forging the concept of ¡°people of Zheng.¡± The rulers of Zheng, in an effort to strengthen this concept, even launched an offensive attack against Cao State in the name of vengeance after repelling its invasion. Finally, after a prolonged war of ten years, they managed to lead the entire nation¡¯s subjects to annihilate this once formidable enemy. Chapter 958 - Chapter 958 Chapter 399 Yuzhou Zheng Kingdom_2 ?Chapter 958: Chapter 399 Yuzhou Zheng Kingdom_2 Chapter 958: Chapter 399 Yuzhou Zheng Kingdom_2 And the ruler of Zheng Kingdom, who led that victory, also took advantage of the prestige gained from the grand victory to move the capital to the former capital of Cao State and renamed it Xinzheng, which is now the capital of Zheng Kingdom. Leveraged by the influence of Xinzheng City, the capital, the royal family of Zheng Kingdom, led by the King, quickly spread their influence over the majority of the territory that was once Cao State¡¯s, extending the royal reach into every aspect of the new Territory. The fruits of the victory over Cao State were largely seized by the royal family. And the Zheng Royal Family, by relying on Xinzheng City and the original territory, consolidated nearly a whole province of direct rule lands, massively increasing their Strength overnight. The seigniors and nobles within Zheng Kingdom who were almost on par with the royal family in terms of size were suddenly distanced, no longer able to pose a Threat to the royal family¡¯s status. In this situation, some seigniors and nobles felt that the royal family was too greedy, arguing that Cao State was eliminated by everyone together, yet the royal family nearly swallowed all the benefits, leaving them with little to no shares. Therefore, under the unequal distribution of interests, they generated great discontent towards the royal family. However, the King believed that Zheng Kingdom now owned Three Provinces and was gradually establishing the foundation of a hegemonic state. But within the country, seigniors were numerous, and more than two-thirds of the Territory was controlled by seignors big and small, preventing the majority of the country¡¯s Strength from being centralized, which significantly affected Zheng Kingdom¡¯s external expansion. It also posed a significant Threat to the dignity and safety of the Zheng royal family. Consequently, the Zheng royal family, led by the King, naturally considered reducing the powers of these seigniors and pursuing centralization. The irreconcilable differences between the King and the seigniors, through continuous probing and struggle from Both Sides, almost turned Zheng Kingdom into a powder keg. Eventually, following the King¡¯s harsh execution of the head of an Upper Nobility Family who represented many seigniors in Zheng Kingdom, the situation was completely ignited. The Zheng royal family and the local nobles were split into two large camps, engaging in fierce civil war. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï This battle lasted Several years, during which countless lives were lost, and Zheng Kingdom was nearly shattered. But just when Zheng Kingdom seemed on the verge of splitting, a large country to the south, Xun State, saw an opportunity and sent troops to invade Zheng Kingdom. It¡¯s unclear whether they were simply exhausted from fighting or if the people of Zheng truly identified with the concept of ¡°Zheng Kingdom,¡± or perhaps it was a bit of both. In any case, faced with the invasion of Xun State, the previously warring camps within Zheng Kingdom now united to resist Xun State. A crisis that might have led to division and even the downfall of Zheng Kingdom was thus averted with Xun State¡¯s ¡°assistance.¡± And precisely because of that brutal civil war and the crisis that almost destroyed the nation, the Zheng royal family and local nobles, after reconciling, dared not act rashly again, fearing it might spark a Second civil war. Therefore, in their subsequent interactions, both parties maintained considerable restraint, with the Zheng royal family continuing to acknowledge the local nobles¡¯ claims to their respective territories, and the nobles supported the royal family as usual. Both Sides cooperated with utmost sincerity, working together to safeguard the interests of Zheng Kingdom and Promote the expansion of this interest group. After more than a thousand years, through several crises and setbacks, Zheng Kingdom had a hard-fought unification of most of the Yuzhou Region, becoming one of the hegemonies of the Nine Provinces. And both the Zheng royal family and local nobles had seen their Strength expand rapidly during a series of expansions. Still, the royal family always had the moral high ground, and during each expansion, they tended to receive more benefits. So, as of now, Zheng Kingdom has a total of ten provinces, with the royal family and nobles each holding half, and their Strength has gone from an original ratio of two to one to the current one-to-one, achieving a balance. It is precisely because of this balance that Zheng Kingdom has sown the seeds of new problems. Over a thousand years have passed, and that internal strife, which exists only within the Historical Records, has long vanished into the river of Time. The people of Zheng Kingdom today may know about the horrors of civil war, but after all, that is just a fragment within the Historical Records, without a real experience, who could understand its brutality? ¡°Thus, over the past Hundred Years or so, with the steadily growing Strength of the Zheng Royal Family, they started to pressurize the local nobles, attempting to reduce their powers and centralize once more. For self-preservation, the local nobles also had to stick together, forming unions to counter the Royal Threat. Decades have passed, and now within Zheng Kingdom, two major factions have formed, once again engaging in political conflicts and launching several political purges on the court floor. In these cruel political struggles, the two factions have become increasingly hostile, hardly able to coexist. Even so, the overall Situation remained controllable, the struggle between the two forces was confined to the court, and they only used political means without crossing the red line.¡± Wen Shu paused here, then, as if recalling some distressing memories, spoke with a grim expression, ¡°But in May of this year, Zheng¡¯s ruler, Zheng Chan, advised the King of Zheng. He suggested collecting various exotic treasures from around the country as state gifts to Chu State, to thank Chu for their gifts during this diplomatic mission and to show the goodwill between the Two Countries. Upon hearing this, the King of Zheng agreed happily and decreed that all provinces and seigniors within the country select rare and exotic Objects from their territories and present them to the crown. After a month, a variety of rare and exotic items from throughout Zheng Kingdom had been chosen and brought into the state treasury. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? However, during this process, it was discovered that many treasures presented by Taiqiu County¡¯s Lord, Yang Shouguo, were substandard, mixed with inferior items, or even fake. Chapter 959 - Chapter 959 Chapter 399 Yuzhou Zheng Kingdom_3 ?Chapter 959: Chapter 399 Yuzhou Zheng Kingdom_3 Chapter 959: Chapter 399 Yuzhou Zheng Kingdom_3 The governor Zheng Chan reported to the Emperor of Zheng, accusing Yang Shouguo of neglecting his royal duties by presenting inferior and fake goods as state gifts, which was a crime that insulted the national prestige. He also requested the removal of Yang Shouguo¡¯s title as the Lord of Taiqiu County, stripping him of his fief, to uphold national law and clarify reward and punishment. The Emperor of Zheng agreed to this requesta€|¡± Wen Shu continued to narrate the political upheaval in the Zheng Kingdom, sparked by the gifting of presents to Chu State. As Zheng Chan¡¯s proposal was permitted by the Emperor Zheng Lian, the news spread quickly, causing a huge uproar. The local lords in Xinzheng City jointly petitioned the Emperor to revoke this punishment. They believed that Yang Shouguo was guilty of insulting the national prestige by using subpar goods as state gifts, and executing him would suffice. But the fief of the Lord of Taiqiu County was the Yang Family¡¯s own enterprise, won by their own efforts, not a grant from the state. Therefore, the Emperor had no right to take it away. If the Emperor could take away the Yang family¡¯s ancestral lands today, wouldn¡¯t he be able to take ours tomorrow? The fiefdoms of these lords were not granted by the Emperor but were originally brought by their ancestors with their territories, owned by their families from the start. These lords and the royal family were not in an absolute monarch-subject relationship, but more of a partnership. Now that a partner wanted to take away their shares, how could this be accepted by the many lords? So many lords jointly petitioned the Emperor to withdraw this decision. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï As one might imagine, how could the Emperor possibly accept this proposal? Therefore, the decree to confiscate the fief was forcefully implemented. However, when the messenger who was sent to proclaim the decree was en route to Taiqiu County, halfway there, he heard that the Lord of Taiqiu County, Yang Shouguo, had led his three counties in rebellion with an army of thirty thousand. In this situation, peacefully confiscating the Yang family¡¯s fief was obviously impossible. So the messenger returned to the court and reported the matter to the Emperor. Emperor Zheng became furious, and the governor Zheng Chan pressed even more strongly for a severe suppression to quell this rebellion. Many members of the royal family also agreed. On the other hand, the lords in the court continued to persuade, suggesting that if the Emperor could retract the decree to confiscate the fief of the Lord of Taiqiu County, they could make Yang Shouguo commit suicide to apologize to the state, hoping to prevent further conflict. But the Emperor still refused. The army of fifty thousand sent out by the court to suppress the rebellion was quickly assembled and dispatched to Taiqiu County. This immediately became the catalyst for further unrest. Seeing that the Emperor and the royal family were relentless and determined to severely punish the Taiqiu Yang family, other lords in Zheng Kingdom who were friendly with the Yang family of Taiqiu also began to rebel. Within a short span of half a month, two county men, one county lord, and one marquis in the Zheng Kingdom raised the banner of revolt. It seemed that the royal family had anticipated this, and when the various families rebelled, the local armies that had already been prepared were quickly dispatched. It wasn¡¯t long before the hastily mobilized lords were eliminated, with three families extinguished. The eradicated families were uprooted, with thousands executed in collective punishment. This act of brutality, together with the royal family¡¯s hostility towards the local lords, caused great fear and indignation among other lords who were still watching from the sidelines. Therefore, after their request to the Emperor to withdraw the military order was rejected again, the representatives of the lords in Xinzheng City finally recognized the bleak reality. Headed by the Grand General Zhang Shou, the lords, realizing there was no turning back, directly abducted the third prince Zheng Ze, who had failed an attempt to seize the throne and was under house arrest, and took the opponent back to their fief, Yongqiu. ¡°After taking Zheng Ze away, Zhang Shou gathered the many nobles within the Zheng Kingdom and held an alliance meeting where he listed the crimes of the current ruler, Emperor Zheng Lian of Zheng. Then, he offered sacrifices to Heaven and declared he no longer recognized him as his lord but instead supported Zheng Ze as emperor, establishing a separate court in Yongqiu. Thus, on the fourteenth day of the seventh month in the twenty-fifth year of Shenwu, within the land of Yuzhou, there were two Zheng Kingdoms. One was located in the north, supported mainly by numerous local nobles, who crowned Zheng Ze as their lord and set their capital at Yongqiu, known as Northern Zheng. The other was in the south, mainly backed by the imperial family¡¯s power, holding on to the original Emperor Zheng Lian as their lord and establishing their capital at Xinzheng, known as Southern Zheng.¡± Wen Shu said this with a somewhat dry throat, but he continued, ¡°Now, Northern Zheng holds five provinces in the northern part of Zheng, and Southern Zheng holds five provinces in the southern part, each side possessing armies of a million men and no less than ten people with inborn strength. Both sides were shrouded in the clouds of war and had already come to blows. In a short time, no outcome showing victory or defeat seemed likely. The entire land of Yuzhou also split into three after the division of Zheng. Southern Zheng, Northern Zheng, and Jin Country each seized five provinces, dividing the entire Yuzhou evenly. Although these Three Nations are all not weak and can be called powerful countries in their own right, they are but minor tyrants within the state, unable to compare to the Supreme Dominators dominating a single state.¡± At this point, Wen Shu paused and showed a trace of pity on his face, ¡°Originally when Zheng was united, it dominated Yuzhou, and thanks to its bulk as the Supreme Dominator, it naturally could fend off the coveting other great nations of the world. Therefore, Tang Kingdom in Jingzhou in the north of Yuzhou and Xu State in Liangzhou, even though coveting it vehemently, dreaded Zheng¡¯s strength and did not dare to invade rashly. But now that Zheng has split in half and Yuzhou is divided into three, they are no longer a unified entity and thus can no longer stop the ambitions of the two countries. Before I left, I heard that Northern Zheng had already colluded with Tang Kingdom of Jingzhou, and Jin Country had colluded with Xu State of Liangzhou, both having made concessions of their northern territories to draw the armies of the two countries southward, ready to join forces to annihilate Southern Zheng. Thus, compensating the north with gains in the south, Northern Zheng and Jin Country, through such means, temporarily avoid the strike from Tang Xu and with the help of the two countries, seek benefits for themselves in the south. Alas! If this comes to pass, the once overlord of Yuzhou may well vanish. And once it is gone, how could Northern Zheng and Jin Country, who dealt with the tiger for its skin, survive alone? The land of Yuzhou will inevitably fall into the hands of Tang Xu.¡± With a sigh, Wen Shu seemed to be mourning for the dominator that was about to vanish. Having served as an envoy to the Zheng Kingdom and receiving extreme courtesy from Emperor Zheng Lian, one couldn¡¯t have anticipated such an outcome; it was indeed lamentable. The other people in the hall who listened to Wen Shu¡¯s narration were also looking at each other, finding the internal chaos of Zheng Kingdom, triggered by the envoy mission from Chu State, utterly preposterous. Lu Yuan was also somewhat distressed. He had sent messengers to the Zheng Kingdom with the sincere intention of fostering trade and good relations, never aiming to cause trouble. Who would have thought that Emperor Zheng Lian of Zheng would use the pretext of repaying Chu State¡¯s gift to weaken the feudal lords, and yet his methods were so crude that not only did he fail to handle matters properly, he ended up scattering his vast empire. Now, it was done. The feudal reduction was not achieved, but the Zheng Kingdom was on the brink of extinction. If word of this got out, those uninformed would assume Chu State had done something to split a great empire. Lu Yuan could already imagine how the monarchs and citizens of the Nine Provinces would secretly denigrate him. ?¦Ï???.§ã? From now on, envoys dispatched by Chu State to other countries would likely suffer disdain for a long period.¡± Chapter 960 - Chapter 960 Chapter 400 Earthquake and Sea of Fire ?Chapter 960: Chapter 400 Earthquake and Sea of Fire Chapter 960: Chapter 400 Earthquake and Sea of Fire After learning about the catastrophe in Yu State Zheng Country, the great hall fell silent for a moment; everyone remained mute. It was just too fantastical. A vast empire had collapsed in an instant, and it was due to Chu State¡¯s actionsa€|well, it was one of the reasons. But no matter how you looked at it, it was still shocking. ¡°Now that everyone is clear about the course of events, let¡¯s discuss our response to Zheng Country, how should Great Chu deal with this situation?¡± Seeing that no one spoke, Lu Yuan took the initiative to break the silence. The ministers glanced at each other before Sun Siwen stepped out and bowed, saying, ¡°Your Majesty, the turmoil in Zheng Country stems from the millennium-old conflict between the royal family and the nobles over the issue of reducing the power of the fiefs. It¡¯s an old ailment that has simply erupted now. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Our Great Chu¡¯s messenger just had the bad luck to arrive at the time. Then he was used by the Emperor of Zheng as a pretext for reducing the power of the fiefs, thereby leading to this civil strife within Zheng Country.¡± Sun Siwen first defined the nature of the internal conflict in Zheng Country, confirming Great Chu¡¯s position of righteousness and innocence in this matter, and then said, ¡°Currently, Zheng Country is divided into two, with the presence of this dominant power removed from Yu State; peace will undoubtedly be hard to maintain. In my view, for the next few decades, Yu State will likely witness a battle for dominance among Tang, Xu, Jin, and the two Zhengs. The five factions will battle each other, with none able to suppress the others, leading to an endless conflict.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Although at present, Zheng Country in Yu State was divided into two, including Jin Country located in the northeast of Yu State, the three powers each held the territory of five counties, with their strengths difficult to distinguish. To the west of Yu State, Liang State was also overwhelmed by the combined pressures of Wei, Zhao, and Xu; they simply had no spare energy to concern themselves with the affairs of Yu State to the east. At present, the only ones capable of intervening in the affairs of Yu State were Tang Kingdom in Jing State to the north and Xu State in Liang State. Of course, Chu State, located far away in Jiangnan with the capability for maritime engagement with Yu State, also had the capacity to get involved in the affairs of Yu State. However, given Lu Yuan¡¯s current policy, he would not do so. Thus, the ones who could influence the battlefield of Yu State were Tang and Xu States. Tang and Xu States, each dominating a province, may not be as large as Chu, Liang, Wei and other countries that were unified in one province or crossed two provinces. But they were on par with the likes of Zhao and Xu, holding the foundation of a regional hegemon. Both countries had populations of twenty to thirty million and could muster an army of one to two million a€¡° they were dominant forces. Given the current situation where the Heavenly and Earthly Aura had vanished and the Divine Blood Variants originally stored by all countries were being slaughtered for resources in large quantities, thus increasing the stockpile of elixirs significantly. A conservative estimate would suggest that after this surge, the number of Inborn Grandmasters in Tang and Xu might well exceed thirty. After all, Lu Yuan had previously collected all the Divine Blood Variants in the country, and the elixirs he refined were enough to cultivate twenty-three Inborns. The other countries, being of noble origin, should naturally have a deeper foundation than that of his own lowly commoner background; they should have even more elixirs. Hence, even if the original number of Inborns in each of these dominant countries was only in the teens, after this wave of resource harvesting, the number of Inborns would at the very least surge to over thirty. Therefore, even by the most conservative estimate, hegemonic countries like Tang and Xu could mobilize over a million troops and more than twenty Inborns to intervene in the Zheng conflict. This force was already quite formidable. To the north, Zhao and Xu States had deployed a similar strength, forcing Liang State, the hegemon of Central State, to allocate more than half of its forces to face them. In Yu State, however, there was no second Liang State; there were only three smaller countries that were fragmented and hostile toward each other. With such forces, yet fighting their own battles, how could they possibly stand against Tang and Xu States? Of course, although it was certain that the three countries of Yu State could not defeat Tang and Xu, it did not mean that they had no power to fight back against these two countries. The two Zhengs, north and south, as well as Jin Country, were, after all, big countries occupying the land of five counties, their foundational strength not inferior to that of Chu State or Ning Country before the decisive battle in Jiangnan several years ago. At that time, Chu and Ning Countries, in terms of military strength alone, were not lacking; they properly possessed regional hegemon-level forces. When fully committed, both could mobilize an army of a million, along with more than ten Inborns, for combat. And that was just the conventional battlefield. In the case of Ning Country, even after suffering a defeat at the front lines and losing hundreds of thousands of soldiers, which was said to have drained its vitality, it was able to pull together eight hundred thousand troops within two years of retreating to its own territory, its military strength not significantly diminished, retaining its status as a regional hegemon. Previously, Zhou Country, despite being attacked on all sides and losing three to four million soldiers, almost exhausting all able-bodied men in the country, persisted for twenty years before being conquered. Its resilience was astonishing. From this, one can see how difficult it is to annihilate a regional hegemon. Lu Yuan was able to eliminate Ning Country so easily because he relied on the Purple Cloud Dao dissolving the internal resistance, the unrest among the people of Jiangdong, and eventually deployed the trump card of offering the status of a fiefdom to bring them to surrender without battle. Without any of these conditions, conquering Jiangdong would not have been so effortless. But at this moment, Tang and Xu States did not have the same favorable conditions as Chu Country, with a Purple Cloud Dao as an ally within. The two Zhengs and Jin Country had not undergone a devastating defeat like Ning Country, which led to domestic unrest. Moreover, they were not from Yu State but were countries from other provinces; to the people of Yu State, they were undoubtedly foreign invaders. Chapter 961 - Chapter 961 Chapter 400 Earthquake and Sea of Fire_2 ?Chapter 961: Chapter 400 Earthquake and Sea of Fire_2 Chapter 961: Chapter 400 Earthquake and Sea of Fire_2 In such a situation, even though Northern Zheng and Jin Country had temporarily submitted to Tang Xu, playing the role of puppet emperors, it was impossible for the Two Countries to easily devour Yuzhang. The only way for them to consume Yuzhang was to imitate Wei Country. With overwhelming strength, they would gradually nibble away until all forces within Yuzhang were eliminated, achieving the goal of taking control of Central State. Currently, Northern Zheng and Jin Country¡¯s submission was merely to stabilize the two strong adversaries in The North temporarily, removing the threat to their own northern borders. At the same time, they sought to use the opponent¡¯s power to actively attack Nanzheng in the south, to gain more living space and strength. Then they would turn around to face the two strong adversaries in the North in a decisive battle to the death. The contradictions between Both Sides were irreconcilable. Tang Xu wished to conquer the whole of Yuzhang as a foundation for their future survival. The Three Nations of Yuzhang, on the other hand, wanted to defend their bases, to prevent being swallowed by outsiders. The contradictions and positions of Both Sides in this aspect made it certain that coexistence was not possible. They were each very clear about this, and the so-called puppet emperors and cooperation at this moment were nothing more than mutual use, to see who had the more clever means. This entanglement originating from Yuzhang, involving the alliance and confrontation of the Five Kingdoms, was destined to be the main theme of the future. Perhaps, after all these conspiracies and machinations, Northern and Southern Zheng might reconcile and reunify as they did a Thousand Years ago? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Or maybe the Two Zhengs and Jin Country would form an alliance, choosing to jointly resist the great enemy in The North? The world is unpredictable, everything is possible. In this chaos, with the Five Kingdoms restraining each other, it was very difficult for any of them to Completely eliminate another. What Lu Yuan did not want to see happening in Qingzhou was now being played out within the territory of Yuzhang. Having reached such a balance, it was almost impossible for Yuzhang to achieve unification. It was precisely this point that Sun Siwen saw, which led him to say that from This Battle forth, conflicts in Yuzhang could drag on indefinitely. Without external forces intervening, just relying on the current factions within Yuzhang, indeed, it seemed like the war would never end. Zhou Qing, who was beside him, agreed with this view, only to hear him say, ¡°The Prime Minister is correct. Given the situation in Yuzhang, it is beyond their ability to resolve. A Hundred Years¡¯ War might not break this deadlock.¡± Having spoken, he gave Lu Yuan a bow: ¡°Your Majesty, since Great Chu has no intention of directly intervening in the affairs of Yuzhang, then why not place our pieces amongst these Five Kingdoms, stoking their conflicts and letting them fight to the death. In this way, after they have fought for decades and Yuzhang becomes a mountain of corpses and a sea of blood, they will weaken themselves. Once their enmities become too deep to unravel and mutual suspicions too high to reconcile, when Great Chu marches eastward, which nation in Yuzhang could stand against us? It would be no more than a breeze sweeping away fallen leaves, annihilating them in one fell swoop.¡± As a military officer, Zhou Qing¡¯s strategy was undoubtedly much more ruthless. He advocated provoking chaos among the Five Kingdoms of Yuzhang, leading them to a bloodbath of vengeance with no room for reconciliation. But it must be admitted, if this could indeed be achieved, then even if the predicament of the Five Kingdoms of Yuzhang was set, they would no longer pose a barrier to Chu State¡¯s unification of Central State in the future. For by then, they would have exhausted themselves with incessant warfare. Even when Chu State finally came for them, the wise men of each country in Yuzhang would see the crisis. Limited by past grievances and the contradictions in their own interests, they would be unable to unite against the threat. And as long as the opponent was not united as a whole, a single country or two, for Chu State that had accumulated strength and was prepared to unify Central State, would be trivial. Wouldn¡¯t this be like a breeze sweeping away fallen leaves? ¡°The Grand General speaks sense,¡± Hearing Zhou Qing¡¯s words, Lu Yuan nodded, waving his hand and said, ¡°In that case, let Great Chu proceed with this strategy toward Yuzhang. We will stimulate conflicts among the Five Kingdoms as much as possible, so as to prevent unity and wait for the day Great Chu sweeps through Yuzhang.¡± Having said this, Lu Yuan looked towards Sun Siwen and Zhou Qing, adding, ¡°Prime Minister, Grand General, this matter will be left to you. Discuss with the Cabinet and Privy Council on how to execute this strategy.¡± In recent years, with the stability and development of Chu State, various systems within the kingdom have also been slowly established and improved. Now, it had been officially confirmed that government affairs would be handled by the Cabinet, while military matters by the Privy Council. The court, through these two major institutions, managed the running of the vast mechanism that was Chu State. To provoke the Five Kingdoms of Yuzhang into chaos, it was inevitable to use a mix of economic, military, diplomatic, and other means. The departments and supplies to be mobilized would surely be extremely enormous. Thus, the collaboration of both the military and political departments was unavoidable. ¡°Your servant obeys the decree!¡± Upon hearing the command, Sun Siwen and Zhou Qing exchanged glances, each seeing the bitter smile in the other¡¯s eyes. They were well aware that their friend (Master) was once again shirking his duties, playing the laid-back shopkeeper. But as friends (apprentices) and with the responsibilities they bore, as well as their devotion to the shared cause of Chu State, they could not shirk these obligations. Fortunately, Sun Siwen and Zhou Qing were old friends, with decades of friendship and perfectly in tune with one another. There were no instances of civil and military discord or mutual undermining that might occur in other empires. Working together, then, was not difficult. ?¦Ï???.§ã? ¡°Let¡¯s settle the matter this way then.¡± Seeing that his friends and apprentices had no objections, Lu Yuan nodded in satisfaction, content to play the laid-back shopkeeper, and stood up saying, ¡°That will be all for today¡¯s session. If there¡¯s nothing else, the court is dismissed.¡± ¡­ As Chu State continued to pursue a policy of fortified peace, the turmoil triggered by the changes in Qingzhou and Yuzhang did not cause much of a stir in Jiangnan and quickly subsided. Chapter 962 - Chapter 962 Chapter 400 Earthquake and Sea of Fire_3 ?Chapter 962: Chapter 400 Earthquake and Sea of Fire_3 Chapter 962: Chapter 400 Earthquake and Sea of Fire_3 Aside from a few scholars who either truly had exceptional insights or were trying to make a name for themselves by deliberately being different and making alarming statements, most other scholars in Chu State quickly shifted their attention back to the thirty-mile long river that connected to Jiang, to the recently famous courtesans, and to the scholars who had gained prominence at the literary gatherings. It was the age of prosperitya€¡±who cared about those senseless killings? Constantly thinking about death was a sign of a sick mind. Why bother when you could enjoy life at leisure and gain fame through the imperial examinations? After all, being successful in the imperial examinations and obtaining wealth and beautiful women was the proper way of the world! Of course, not all wars were ostracized amidst the enticement of Mortal Dust. For instance, in October, when the True Person who protected the nation, the Governor of Hanzhong, and True Person Huang Xin led an army of two hundred thousand out of Longshan and greatly defeated five hundred thousand barbarians raiding the border in Longxi, taking over two hundred thousand prisoners. The nomadic barbarians who had migrated south were so frightened by this battle that they trembled at the mere sound of Chu¡¯s music or the sight of Chu¡¯s banner. Following this, Huang Xin pursued the victory, and within two months, he had swept through the five prefectures of Yong West, capturing a million barbarians and ten million cattle and sheep. The entire Baling was cheering for this news. Lu Yuan was also very pleased. Not only was he pleased about defeating the barbarians, but he was also happy for the performance of his two sons in this war. In this battle, Lu Hao and Lu He, the two brothers, had set out with the army and were each assigned ten thousand soldiers, taking on significant responsibilities. And they had indeed lived up to the years of cultivation that Lu Yuan had invested in them. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï In this war, although the two did not display particularly dazzling performances, everything they did was according to the rules, without any mistakes, fulfilling their duties well. The above might sound mediocrity and perhaps not quite as impressive as one might expect from their princely status. But Lu Yuan did not need Lu Hao and the others to be impressive. Given the depth and size of Chu¡¯s foundation, unless something unexpected happened, even if they had to push through with brute force, they could pacify the Central State and unify the world. Under these circumstances, the best strategy was simply to follow the righteous path and push forward openly. In the face of overwhelming strength, as long as one does not make mistakes, the enemies would not stand a chance and would ultimately be unable to escape their doomed fate. Engaging in fancy schemes and tactics would mean giving up one¡¯s greatest advantage to compete with the enemy in the one area where they may have the advantage. Isn¡¯t that simply asking for trouble? Therefore, for Lu Yuan, the most important thing was to be steady and secure. As long as his subordinates, including his sons, were competent and able to carry out the right orders, that was all that was needed. Other so-called geniuses and talentsa€¡±even if extremely outstanding, if they did not follow commands and affected the overall situation, they were inferior talents that had to be discarded. Lu He and Lu Hao passed this trial, naturally bringing joy to him. Therefore, to continue training his two sons, Lu Yuan directly ordered them to stay with the army in Hanzhong and to keep up with the campaign against the barbarians in Longxi, honing their abilities on the frontier. Indeed, the war against the nomadic barbarians was not over. This time, though Chu State had crushed the barbarians, almost completely clearing the barbarians from Longxi and Hexi and achieving an unprecedented victory, it was only a victory over the barbarians from those two prefectures. As time passed, as long as the cold weather in the North did not end, a continuous stream of nomadic barbarians would migrate from the grasslands into Helong, and continue to harass Chu State¡¯s border. Even after the cold wave in the West, it seemed that changes had occurred as well. Some tribes from the Western Gobi began migrating towards Yong State. This time Huang Xin swept through the five prefectures of Yong West and found many people who had migrated from the Western Gobi within the territory that used to be part of Western Liang. These people talked about terrifying earthquakes in the West, where vast tracts of mountains and rivers were torn apart, and the ground was webbed with cracks. Furthermore, this fracturing was not a one-time event, but a continuing, relentless fragmentation and upheaval in some regions. Many tribes living in the West were greatly affected by this disaster and began migrating eastward for survival. They were among the first wave of migrants to reach Yong State, affected by this migration. Following the cold wave from the North Pole, earthquakes from the West Pole finally became imminent. The situation did not unfold as Lu Yuan and the cultivators of the Nine Provinces had speculated, with the natural disasters occurring sequentially from the North Pole to the South Pole, followed by the East and West Poles. It seemed that the four poles of Heaven and Earth were interconnected, and with problems arising at the North Pole, the other three also began to collapse. Chu State¡¯s victory in clearing Longxi of the barbarians was only a temporary reprieve. More barbarians would keep coming from the North. Even now, from the West, a continuous stream of people seeking survival began to arrive. It was foreseeable that for a long time to come, until the disaster spreading from the four poles reached the edges of Central State, the border warfare in Hanzhong and Longxi would not cease. Chu, like Wei, Zhao, Xu, and other states, would face a long, protracted, and unending war. This was the forecast that Lu Yuan made after receiving news of the changes in the West, and he was also prepared for a prolonged war. But before he could take a breath after the Northwestern border conflict ended, in late December, near the New Year, news came from Jinghai Country, which Lu Yuan had ennobled from the original Coastal Family Mu to its current title. They reported that a vast fleet of enemy ships had appeared off the coast of Southsea and invaded Jinghai Country. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Not long after, Lu Yuan received reports from the small coastal states in Lingnan that he had ennobled, all claiming invasions by sea raiders. Some time passed, and the states in Lingnan managed to fend off the sea raiders¡¯ invasions with the help of Chu State, capturing numerous prisoners and ships. Lingnan sent another report. The captured sea raiders revealed that they were the navy of a small country in Southsea, forced to flee by boat because large areas of their country were ravaged by wildfires and even the seabed was spewing fire, turning most of the country into a sea of flames. With no other choice, these people took to the seas to escape their homeland in search of a new place to settle. Eventually, they followed the Commercial Route and arrived at Yangzhou in Chu State. Not just the earthquakes in the West Pole but also the sea of fire at the South Pole began revealing their signs twenty years after the cold wave first appeared. Chapter 963 - Chapter 963 Chapter 401 The Arrow is on the String ?Chapter 963: Chapter 401: The Arrow is on the String Chapter 963: Chapter 401: The Arrow is on the String From the twenty-fifth year of Shenwu, the golden age that had lasted for more than a decade seemed to be showing signs of trouble. Firstly, there were incessant incursions from Barbarian tribes from the north and west into Hanzhong Prefecture. To ensure the security of the borders, the court had no choice but to dispatch an army of two to three hundred thousand annually, to regularly sweep through the regions of Longxi and Helong, which bordered Hanzhong. Hundreds of thousands of troops and even greater numbers of migrating Barbarians nearly turned the entire Yong West into a mountain of corpses and a sea of blood. Each year, millions of Barbarians were killed, but the court fared no better. Tens of thousands of soldiers died in the northwestern frontier over the years, with the injured surpassing one hundred thousand. The losses could only be described as devastating. Yet, these steppe Barbarians and foreign tribes from the Western Regions seemed unending, as if they could never be completely eliminated. With each year, a new wave would arrive on the lands of Yong West, and then repeat what the previous group had done, engaging in a fight to the death with Chu State. That unwavering will to survive, to find a way of life, was fundamentally indestructible. For it was an instinct embedded in the marrow of their bones, carved into the culture of a people. To survive, even knowing that today¡¯s Yong West was a deadly meat grinder for all who entered, vast numbers still rushed in to fight for the existence of their tribes, seeking a chance in this hunting ground of life. Chu State could only passively join this war, battling for survival alongside those Barbarian tribes. It was much like Zhou Country in the past, bogged down by the affairs in Helong, hamstrung by the countless tribes fighting for life, consistently weakened in this alien land stained with blood. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? However, Chu State was at a slight advantage over Zhou Countrya€¡±Chu was larger in size, and faced fewer and weaker enemies. So, even as it bled continuously, its capacity to regenerate was stronger. The loss of blood was quickly replenished by fresh blood, leaving the body even stronger than before, without allowing any significant damage to occur. Perhaps that¡¯s why Chu State managed to persevere through the cruel northwestern conflicts, despite such heavy casualties, instead of opting for a defensive contraction. If the death toll in the northwestern Helong could be considered a painful but bearable injury for Chu State, then the pirate chaos that began in the twenty-fifth year of Shenwu, originating from the South Sea, was a chronic itch that seemed impossible to cure. As the subterranean fires in the South Pole began erupting, many island nations in the Southern Sea Island Domain had no choice but to take to the seas, searching for land in the North, undisturbed by volcanic activity, to find a place to settle. Thus, although constrained by a lack of ships, these southern island nations, unlike the steppe Barbarians and the Western region foreign tribes, couldn¡¯t migrate en masse. But given the environment of the South Sea, with countless islands, these island nations were accustomed to traveling by boat and favored building large ships, with navigation mainly reliant on vessels. If the foundation of the nations in the Nine Provinces were primarily their armies, then for the nations of the South Sea, naval forces took precedence. Consequently, even a small country in the South Sea could dispatch thousands of ships, with dozens capable of navigating open seas. Some of the larger South Sea nations had fleets of tens of thousands of boats, thousands of sea-worthy ships that covered the sky and the sea like locusts. With these island nations swarming toward the North like this, it almost guaranteed the deterioration of the sea borders. In comparison to the other states of the Nine Provinces, Chu State was considered a major maritime power. Yet, even Chu State¡¯s naval fleet did not exceed one hundred thousand ships, and among them, those that could be considered large, seaworthy vessels would not surpass three thousand. With this strength, facing the overwhelming number of South Sea naval forces, which amounted to tens to hundreds of thousands, was akin to a pebble in the raging wavesa€¡±sure to be engulfed upon impact. Hence, aside from initially insisting on patrolling the sea areas to suppress the pirates, Chu State eventually retreated to its ports after sustaining losses of more than half its fleet and chose to conserve its strength. Apart from guarding certain key regions, they no longer ventured out. As a result, Chu State¡¯s vast maritime borders became a paradise for the South Sea piratesa€¡±flares of conflict erupted everywhere. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Tens of thousands of ships and hundreds of thousands of pirates roamed the coastal areas, occasionally raiding inland, so severe that some even attacked towns and openly established their own enclaves. After all, these sea pirates who came across the seas essentially sought a land for their nations and tribesa€¡±a marked distinction from ordinary pirates driven solely by the desire to plunder. Naturally, such attempts at claiming territory were met with severe retribution from Chu State. At sea, limited by a weaker naval presence, Chu State was forced to concede. But once those South Sea pirates landed, without their ships to rely on, Chu¡¯s military felt no fear. It didn¡¯t even require Chu¡¯s forces to act; the coastal vassal states in Lingnan themselves mobilized and chased off any pirates attempting to encroach on their land straight back into the sea. One side desperately trying to land, the other suffering from coastal pirate plagues, the struggle continued. Even Chu State¡¯s coastal prefectures of Linhai, Guangling, and Jianan were forced, due to the pirate troubles, to abandon many small towns along the coast. Except for a few heavily guarded large towns, many people were relocated to the safer inland. Chapter 964 - Chapter 964 Chapter 401 The Arrow is on the String_2 ?Chapter 964: Chapter 401: The Arrow is on the String_2 Chapter 964: Chapter 401: The Arrow is on the String_2 Within a hundred miles of the coast, it was simply abandoned. Not only Chu State, but also neighboring states such as Liang, Nanzheng, and Jin Country to the north, which also bordered the sea, suffered from the ravages of sea pirates like Chu State. However, because they were situated in the north, far from the Southsea, the pirates from the Southsea could not reach that far, and hence there were fewer coastal raiding troubles. Jin Country and Xu State, though, faced more severe bandit problems from the pirates. It was because not only did they have pirates coming from the Southsea, but also raiders driven by the storms of the East Sea began to migrate toward the Nine Provinces. At present, these people had landed in areas like Yuzhou and Liangzhou, frequently harassing the coastal frontiers of Jin and Xu, causing them great trouble. Even the warfare in Yuzhou was thus greatly affected. Overall, in the entire Nine Provinces, every coastal state was suffering endlessly under the harassments of the incessant sea raiders. It was just that Chu State was a bit less fortunate, having plains barbarians and foreign tribes from the Western Regions invading the Northern Border, and South Sea pirates causing chaos and harassing the coastal areas. Oh, that¡¯s not quite right, there¡¯s one more thing to add. To the southwest, bordering on the Southern Domain Rainforest, there had recently been some small nations and tribes migrating north. It seemed that even in the southernmost part of the rainforest, volcanic activity had become rampant. Some small nations and tribes in the southern part of the rainforest had lost their homes and were forced to move north in search of new lands to settle. Driven by their migration, some of the nations and tribes from the southern and central parts of the rainforest were also swept up in this move northward. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï However, because the area affected by volcanic activity in the rainforest was still too small and its coverage not very extensive, the number of affected tribal nations was limited. The resulting wave of migration, while having some impact, was temporarily held back by the central and northern rainforest nations and tribes, with only a small portion spilling over into the southwest of Chu. This minor impact was swiftly resolved by the large fan states like Dali and Nanzhao in the southwest without causing too much turmoil. Nevertheless, this news was sent back to Baling so that the court could be prepared. After all, everyone understood that the current unrest in the rainforest was only a harbinger. As the volcanic fires spread north, soon the entire rainforest would be affected, and ultimately every forest sea would turn into a sea of flames. Under this impact, all tribal nations living in the rainforest would migrate north for survival. When that time came, Chu State would have to face the onslaught of an entire territory¡¯s population migration. Even though the Southern Domain Rainforest had a smaller population due to environmental reasons, possibly even less than that of the Northern Territory plains, But still, that would be the population of an entire territory, also amounting to tens of millions. Such a migration wave would not be like the plains barbarians and foreign tribes of the Western Regions in The North, where Wei Country was there to help share the pressure. The forest dwellers of the Southern Domain Rainforest could only be resisted by Chu State alone. Now in the southwest, the more than a dozen small countries, including the vassal states of Lingnan, upon learning of the changes in the rainforest, had already begun to make preparations in full swing. Building passes, repairing city walls, recruiting troops and horses, stockpiling food and fodder¡­ Anything related to war, the fan states of the southwest and Lingnan began to prepare. Because if the migration tide from the Southern Domain Rainforest truly arrived, the first to be hit would be the southwest and Lingnan Region. These fan states, being in front line, had no chance to flee and could only fight to the death with the people from the rainforest. Under these circumstances, of course they dared not be negligent. In short, while the Northern Border was engaged in intense warfare, coastal piracy was unending, and the southwest was overshadowed by the clouds of war, these were the tribulations Chu State had suffered in the past ten-plus years. Despite these three major battlefields exerting their toll, the heartland of Chu remained peaceful and prosperous, a golden age. But this golden age carried a hint of darkness, indeed dimming its brilliance somewhat. a€| Baling City. With over thirty years of prosperity, the Imperial Capital had gradually gained a deeper historical sediment and revealed the cultural richness and wealth unique to the center of a nation. ¡°What a dream of prosperity and splendor!¡± At the royal observatory, Lu Yuan stood on the platform and looked far out at the seemingly boundless Baling City, letting out a long, thoughtful sigh. Then he turned to say, ¡°Brother Sun, do you agree?¡± Beside him, Sun Siwen nodded, ¡°Indeed, it is a dream of flourishing glory.¡± It was now the fortieth year of Shenwu, another fifteen years of peaceful times. With the proliferation of people, the convergence of individuals from all directions, Baling City had expanded once more, its population climbing once again to the frightening figure of three million. In a society that was still predominantly agricultural, a megacity like Baling was almost unimaginable. Let alone in Chu State, even within the entire Nine Provinces, it was definitely the first city under the heaven. Because today¡¯s Central State hegemon, the former leading power of the Nine Provinces, now has its national capital, Great Liang, with a population that has only just reached the scale of one million. After more than two decades of war, Liang had been drained, and the population of its capital, Great Liang, had not only dropped from the peak of one and a half million down to one million. Even the throne of the number one powerful nation in the world had been pulled down from Liang, shifting the landscape of power. The prosperity of Great Liang, like its rulers, was a testament to the rise and fall of an empire. Of course, that was the actual Great Liang. In reality, in the eyes of outsiders, today¡¯s Great Liang was still the premier city under the heaven. Chapter 965 - Chapter 965 Chapter 401 The Arrow is on the String_3 ?Chapter 965: Chapter 401: The Arrow is on the String_3 Chapter 965: Chapter 401: The Arrow is on the String_3 ¡°` Liang State, still considered the foremost kingdom in the world. Because the true number one, Chu State, had not disclosed any key data regarding its population, military strength, or grain production to outsiders for ten years. ¡°With fifteen years of accumulation, Great Chu has always been concealing its strength, using incessant warfare and this prosperous grand illusion to bewilder the world.¡± Lu Yuan gazed upon Baling City, his thoughts drifting far as he recited aloud, ¡°A population of seventy million, troop strength of three million, annual revenue of four hundred million silver tales, six hundred million mu of cultivated land, a grain production of five hundred million stones, and seventy-two individuals of Inborn status. ¡°In fifteen years, Great Chu has amassed these underlying assets. But all along, we have been hiding them, just waiting for an opportunity.¡± ¡°In order to gain the trust of the Northern Land, I have raised armies year after year, gathering hundreds of thousands at Longxi.¡± ¡°Abandoning villages and towns, neglecting tens of thousands of miles of coastal defenses. ¡°Indulgence towards the southwest, allowing the tribes to grow powerful.¡± ¡°By employing these almost self-harming tactics, we finally managed to put those people at ease.¡± In recent years, what Chu State had presented to the external world was merely the warfare in the Northern Border, the bandit troubles along the coastal areas, the beacon fires in the southwest, and domestic peace and prosperity within the nation. And, the behavior of Chu State in not disclosing its data further resembled a nation overwhelmed by incessant wars, burdened with problems both internally and externally. Everything presently was nothing but a fa?¡ìade of peace. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Indeed, this was precisely the impression that Chu State wanted to convey to outsiders. Otherwise, do you really want to inform everyone in the world about Chu State¡¯s true information? That would indeed be a grand display of national might, intimidating the world. But after the intimidation, chaos would be inevitable. The reason being¡­ If Chu State to the south appears to be a nation fraught with internal strife and external troubles, then the Northern Liang State, along with Wei, Zhao, Xu, and other countries, can comfortably engage in full-scale warfare. But if Chu State is a nation with ample funds and grain, sharp and ready troops, and no concerns inside or out, with a foundation unmatched across the world, who wouldn¡¯t be uneasy with such a powerful nation lurking behind them, eyeing them ravenously, who wouldn¡¯t take precautions? How could Liang State and Wei, Zhao, Xu, and others possibly commit fully to warfare without holding anything back? And would Wei, Zhao, Xu, all be worried about ending up both injured after clashing with Liang State, only for Chu State to come in and pick off the spoils? Thus, without addressing these suspicions of other nations, they wouldn¡¯t fulfill Chu State¡¯s wishes by engaging in a major battle in Qingzhou. No one wants to make a wedding dress for someone else. This is also why Chu State, knowing that merely defending the Long Mountains would allow them to seal off the northwest at minimal cost and protect Hanzhong, still insisted on sending troops to Helong to fight desperately against the Barbarians of the Snow Plains and foreign tribes of the Western Regions. How can you win someone¡¯s trust without paying a certain price? Wei Country, like Chu State, also faces invasions and threats from the Barbarians of the Snow Plains and foreign tribes of the Western Regions on its northern and western frontiers and suffers greatly from this affliction. To repel those foreign tribes, Wei Country¡¯s casualties can only be greater than those of Chu State. Only through experiencing it can one understand the hardship. Similarly, Liang State, also suffering from the coastal bandit problem, can empathize with Chu State¡¯s plight. Therefore, regarding the speech of Chu State¡¯s continuous weakening amidst endless border troubles, the four northern countries believe it deeply. Because facing just one border trouble makes them feel exhausted and overwhelmed. If Chu State is simultaneously facing three, it¡¯s almost akin to being besieged by three great powersa€¡±how could they be faring any better? ¡°` Liang had been battered by the coalition of Wei, Zhao, and Xu for over a decade, eventually becoming impoverished and depleted; its population sharply declined, and its soldiers were blunted, their armor shattered. Even if Chu State was doing slightly better, how much better could it be? It is precisely because Chu State held the same view as themselves that the current state of exhaustion has come to encompass the Nine Provinces. ¡°And now, I have made it clear, I have heard that Wei Country has completely abandoned its territory in Yan Province, relocating its entire population to the districts of Henan and Nanyang, and focusing on the defense of Shuofang and Guannei, developing the former lands of Zhou Country.¡± Lu Yuan continued to relay the latest news. As time passed, the cold wave disaster that originated in The North more than thirty years ago had now reached the region of Yan Province. At this point, the entire northern part of Yan Province had become a land of icy wilderness. The central part of Yan Province, meanwhile, was entirely occupied by the Barbarians who had moved south from the steppes and the citizens of the smaller states within Yan Province; tens of millions crammed there, every day desperately migrating southward. The cold wave continued to shrink their living space; if they didn¡¯t move south one day, they would be engulfed by snowstorms the next. This was no longer a matter of being driven by snow and ice, but an emergency as urgent as fire at one¡¯s eyebrows. Therefore, in such a situation, after moving away all the citizens of Yan Province, Wei Country did not continue to stubbornly refuse to retreat but decisively gave up all its land in Yan Province. They conceded the southern land of Yan Province to those who were frantically seeking refuge to the south. It was only the land in the north of Yan, which was soon to be swallowed by the cold wave and had few people left, that could be easily abandoned. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï But could they give up the still-important grain-producing territory to the east of Yong State, which was likely to remain stable for the next twenty or thirty years, or in other words, the districts of Shuofang and Guannei? Originally, the districts of Henan and Nanyang in the rear of Zhou Country were safe hinterlands, capable of continuously producing money, grain, and armor to support the front-line warfare. With this foundation, Zhou Country remained a hegemon of the world, capable of dominating all under heaven. However, once Zhou Country gave up the districts of Shuofang and Guannei, Henan and Nanyang became the front line, and their citizens were directly exposed to war, no longer able to comfortably produce. Zhou Country thus fell into a financial and grain crisis, experiencing widespread famine. Unable to support a large-scale military in the country and feed more troops, it was swiftly eliminated by Wei Country, despite assistance from Liang. The lesson from the past is right before our eyes. ¡°With the example of Zhou Country at hand, Wei Country should be clear that they have no room to retreat,¡± Lu Yuan said, his voice filled with emotion, ¡°But the barbarians from the steppes to the north are manageable. After decades of attrition, the once tens of millions of steppe barbarians now number less than ten million. Just like the Snow Plains Nomads before them, too many have died or been injured to pose a serious threat. In the end, they will either be assimilated by others or disappear on the journey southward. However, the foreign tribes from the Western Regions to the west have only just begun their migration. Given the vastness of the Western Regions, these tribes number at least thirty to forty million. Combined with the barbarians from the steppes and the remnants of Yan Province, the number of refugees from the west may even reach fifty million. And does Wei Country still have forty million people now? To the east, it faces Liang; from the west, it is threatened by foreign tribes; even its northern ally, Zhao Country, seems to covet the land of Henan Province in Wei Country. How similar is the situation of Wei Country now to that of Zhou Country then? If Wei Country does not wish to follow in the footsteps of Zhou Country, it must inevitably make a choice: to give up the battlefield against Liang and focus wholly on protecting its own territory. If they withdraw, Zhao and Xu would find it difficult to contend against Liang. The strategy of Great Chu to exhaust the four nations would also become ineffective.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s tone was somber, his voice resolute, ¡°So, we have waited for decades, and although the time is not yet fully ripe, the arrow is on the string and must be shot. The Northern Expedition is imperative.¡± Chapter 966 - Chapter 966 Chapter 402 Preparation for the Northern Expedition ?Chapter 966: Chapter 402 Preparation for the Northern Expedition Chapter 966: Chapter 402 Preparation for the Northern Expedition The Northern Expedition, this was a decision Lu Yuan made after deep contemplation. ¡°Northern Expedition?¡± Upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s words, Sun Siwen fell into deep thought. The Northern Expedition, well, it¡¯s not out of the question. Now, after more than a decade of war, the four states in the North have greatly declined in strength. Wei Country has lost the entire territory of Yan State, holding only four counties in the eastern part of Yong State. Zhao State and Xu State are much the same, impacted by the Barbarian invasions from the grasslands and the southern migration from the Mysterious Snow Forest, each losing a large portion of their territories in Ji Province and Xuzhou, their home grounds. They¡¯re only a few years away from being driven out of these two provinces. However, after more than a decade of fierce fighting, unlike Wei Country which gained nothing, Zhao and Xu states are slightly better off, having acquired territories in Qingzhou and respectively seized the eastern county of Liang Country and Qingping County, barely securing themselves a ticket to enter Central State. But of course, the land of just one county is naturally insufficient to satisfy Zhao and Xu states. Like Wei Country, with the increasingly frenzied southern invasion of the Barbarians on their northern borders, most of their strength is tied down, leaving no extra force to commit to the battlefield of Qingzhou. To be able to hold the hard-won eastern county and Qingping County with the forces they have on the Southern Line is already quite an achievement. They might as well reallocate a million soldiers and muster them to move south if they wish to continue expanding into Qingzhou. Under such circumstances, Zhao and Xu states were also incapable of expanding southward, and the war with Liang Country had gradually subsided. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï To put it simply, they were unable to fight on. It could be said that it was precisely the accelerated southward movement of the Barbarians from the North that provided the greatest help to Liang Country, suddenly tying up a significant portion of the three enemy states¡¯ energies and giving Liang a breather. However, after fighting for more than a decade, Liang Country¡¯s losses were also substantial. Not to mention the two lost counties in Qingzhou, in recent years, the soldiers who died in domestic battles alone have already surpassed five million. They had also lost more than twenty Inborn Grandmasters. These two items alone had reduced the military strength of Liang Country by at least one-third. Moreover, in the previous years, due to the tactical errors made by Wei, Zhao, and Xu states in their battles, Liang Country seized the opportunity for a counterattack, causing the three states to lose a million soldiers all at once. Liang Country¡¯s momentum surged, and there was a major success as they looked like they could counterattack and take back their lost land, pushing Zhao and Xu states back to Hebei. At that time, Chu State noticed that the situation might be taking a turn for the worse, with the possibility of a single dominant power emerging north of the river. They were compelled to intervene and lend assistance to the Three Nations. Of course, the intervention wasn¡¯t a direct deployment of troops, but under the indication of Lu Yuan, Chu State cut off the grain trade with Liang Country that had been in place for years. In the past ten-plus years of war, as the scale of troops used increased, the number of able-bodied men dying on the battlefields also grew. As a result, Liang Country domestically fell into a situation of labor shortages. In such a state, relying on the production of the old, weak, women, and children in the rear was certainly unable to support the grain needs of Liang Country¡¯s front lines, which consumed food for five to six million soldiers. To maintain the war effort and ensure supplies, it had become imperative for Liang Country to increase grain purchases from Chu State. In fact, not just Liang Country. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Wei Country, which had fallen into warfare on two fronts early on, had, since the beginning of the war, depended on Chu State for nearly half of its domestic grain consumption. The lifeline of grain for both Liang and Wei countries was now in the hands of Chu State. With their very survival at the mercy of others, Wei and Liang countries were well aware that such dependence was dangerous and improper. Yet, if they chose not to seek help from Chu State, they wouldn¡¯t have enough troops to deploy to the front lines for the defense of their homeland. Whether they would die from having their lifeline strangled was uncertain. But one thing was sure, they would first perish from a lack of sufficient military force, leading to the destruction of their country and homes. Between two detriments, they chose the lesser. One was a potential death in the future; the other was an imminent death now. The outcome was naturally clear. And so, Liang Country, after making that critical decision over ten years ago, was now facing the delayed onset of the poison they had chosen. So, when Chu State decided to cut off grain to Liang Country at that time, the latter¡¯s domestic grain supply immediately encountered problems. Local grain prices skyrocketed, and the populace struggled to obtain even a single grain of rice. By the time this reached the front lines, the armies lacking resupplies, despite achieving major victories, couldn¡¯t push forward due to the absence of sufficient grain. In the end, they could only watch as opportunities slipped away and were forced to retreat in dejection. But the unrest hadn¡¯t ceased. Having sensed Liang Country¡¯s strength, even though Liang had already withdrawn its troops, Chu State continued to withhold grain supplies. Consequently, the Liang country, long dependent on Chu for grain, suddenly plunged into a nationwide famine. Within two years, nearly ten million people in Liang Country starved to death because of the famine. In an effort to resolve the famine, Liang Country had no choice but to disband a large portion of its army, allowing those adult men to return to the rear to engage in farming and reduce the scale of the war in order to survive the grain shortage. They also sent Messengers to Chu State to negotiate and seek to reopen the grain trade. Further, they sent representatives to Yuzhou to inquire about purchasing the grain produced there. Through a series of measures and three to five years of struggle, Liang Country finally managed to catch a breath. Meanwhile, during this time, the Wei, Zhao, and Xu states were recuperating and aggressively attacking Liang Country. But they too were exhausted, and despite their efforts, they achieved no significant results. Now, with Liang Country having recovered, they were even less capable of moving south and could only adopt defensive positions. Sun Siwen reviewed the current state of the four Northern countries and finally nodded, saying, ¡°Indeed, it¡¯s time for a Northern Expedition. Now, Wei, Zhao, and Xu states are all worn out, troubled by Barbarians in the North, while on the south, Liang Country has regained its vitality and is sharpening its blades. Chapter 967 - Chapter 967 Chapter 402 Preparation for the Northern Expedition_2 ?Chapter 967: Chapter 402 Preparation for the Northern Expedition_2 Chapter 967: Chapter 402 Preparation for the Northern Expedition_2 All around, great enemies loomed to the north and south, their own strength thoroughly exhausted; they could only rush about, seeking self-preservation, no longer capable of playing any significant role. Chu State could no longer place hopes on these three nations. As for Liang, Despite the heavy loss of its manly men due to the wars over these years, and a significant reduction in its population because of famine five years ago, it was, after all, once the foremost power in the world, now in possession of more than half of Qingzhou, with such a foundation, it could not decline much further. It is heard that its domestic population still nears seventy million, with three million armored soldiers. Furthermore, due to the slowing of conflicts in these years, local production has recovered, and they no longer rely on purchasing grain from foreign lands, resting in domestic tranquility and without worry. With such a foundation, if left to recuperate for five or ten more years, I fear a return to a force of five million mighty soldiers, reclaiming its status as the mightiest nation in the world. Such a formidable enemy must not be allowed to recover at leisure. We must seize the current moment when they are at their weakest, with our greatest strength, to launch a full-on assault. To initiate a northern expedition, muster the troops of the entire nation, cross the river and annihilate Liang.¡± Clearly, having comprehended the pros and cons of the situation, the Grand Chancellor of Chu also supported the Northern Expedition. Lu Yuan was not surprised at this. His good friend had never let him down in such an overarching perspective. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Discussing these matters with him and Sun Siwen was not just about consensus, there were other reasons as well. Therefore, upon hearing Sun Siwen¡¯s agreement with the Northern Expedition, Lu Yuan asked, ¡°For this military campaign, I intend to mobilize the full force of the nation, with men in battle and women in transport, making the utmost effort to obliterate Liang. By my calculation, Great Chu should dispatch five million elite troops to the battlefield. And then, levy ten million civilian workers to transport military food supplies. Beyond that, from among the vassal states, excepting the coastal nations, I also plan to levy one million soldiers and two million civilian workers, ordering them to emerge from within the nation¡¯s Inborn and assist in the Northern Expedition. Combined, these two forces total eighteen million people. Are the nation¡¯s accumulations capable of supporting the consumption of so many people?¡± Waging war is about logistics. At this point, since Lu Yuan had decided on the Northern Expedition, what he sought was to give it everything he had, with no reservations. Not only the directly subordinate troops within his nation but even those vassal states wouldn¡¯t be left out. After more than thirty years of recuperation, those vassal states to the south were now exceedingly prosperous. The eighteen vassal states in the southwest and Lingnan now have, according to statistics, a total population exceeding twenty-four million, more than a third of the population of Chu. Such strength, Lu Yuan naturally couldn¡¯t let idle behind the lines, stirring up trouble for himself. But to mobilize eighteen million people at once, and with the war lasting at least a year or more, potentially even two or three, or longer, he felt somewhat uncertain about such immense consumption. The tragic situation of Liang running out of grain previously remained vivid in his memory. Now with Chu about to deploy troops, Lu Yuan naturally attached great importance to logistics and supplies, and this required the assurance of his domestic Grand Chancellor, Sun Siwen. ¡°Eighteen million people¡­¡± Upon hearing this number, Sun Siwen also felt a headache coming on; then he began calculating Chu¡¯s national reserves: ¡°In recent years, some new Granaries have been built in the nation, albeit selling a portion of our grain produce to Wei and Liang after deducting for domestic use, the remainder has all been stored away. Currently, the nation has a reserve of five hundred million shi of grain. With the army on campaign and supplies being shipped from the rear, even with the help of boats, there is still considerable loss. Eighteen million people might consume roughly two hundred million shi of grain per year. If all these grains were mobilized, they would suffice for the consumption of eighteen million people for two and a half years. After withdrawing these men¡¯s labor from the nation, fifty-five million elderly and weak would remain, capable of tilling about two-thirds of the nation¡¯s fields, or four hundred million mu, producing three hundred million shi of grain a year. Out of these three hundred million shi, subtracting domestic needs, around fifty million shi could annually be allocated for the front line. If we press harder, only leaving the people with just enough food for survival and levy more, it might be possible to draw upon a hundred million shi. Thus relying on continuous production and transportation from the rear, once the reserve in the Granary runs out, it should still sustain another year and a half. Afterward, the nation could no longer maintain this. To support the Northern Expedition of eighteen million people, given Great Chu¡¯s current reserves, we could fight for up to four years at most. After four years, regardless of victory or defeat, the war must end.¡± Sun Siwen delivered his final answer. To support the Northern Expedition of eighteen million for four years was the accumulation of three decades of recuperation for Chu. It was also the conclusion provided by the entire era of Shenwu prosperity. ¡°Four years¡­¡± Lu Yuan, upon hearing this figure, pondered in his heart and finally nodded slowly: ¡°That will be enough. To pacify the north of the river, to destroy Liang, four years is indeed sufficient.¡± Given Liang¡¯s current strength, with barely seventy million in population and merely three million soldiersa€¡± even Inborn Grandmasters totaling no more than fortya€¡±it was strong but unworthy of consideration compared to Chu. ¡°Then Your Majesty, when do you plan to initiate the Northern Expedition?¡± Sun Siwen, full of confidence in the success of Chu¡¯s Northern Expedition, went straight to the point: ¡°So that your servant can timely allocate supplies and mobilize civilian workers.¡± ¡°It¡¯s already June, and soon we will enter late autumn, leaving at most three to four months for the army to campaign. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï That span of time would be barely enough to cross the river. Moreover, in such haste, to mobilize an eighteen million strong army and also equip them with supplies will be challenging.¡± Lu Yuan pondered for a moment and said, ¡°Let¡¯s set the date for the Northern Expedition to February of next year. This gives us more than half a year to prepare; should that be sufficient for the Cabinet to coordinate supplies and mobilize manpower locally?¡± Chapter 968 - Chapter 968 Chapter 402 Preparation for the Northern Expedition_3 ?Chapter 968: Chapter 402 Preparation for the Northern Expedition_3 Chapter 968: Chapter 402 Preparation for the Northern Expedition_3 He looked at Sun Siwen. Then he nodded slightly, confidently saying, ¡°Eight months is enough.¡± Lu Yuan clapped his hands, ¡°Good, then it¡¯s settled. The eighth month is good, in the second month of the forty-first year of Shenwu, Great Chu will officially mobilize troops for the Northern Expedition.¡± Sun Siwen saluted, ¡°Your servant obeys the order.¡± ¡­ After communicating with the Cabinet, Lu Yuan then found Zhou Qing and discussed military matters with him. Zhou Qing was the foremost military officer in the country, holding the rank of the first Grand General and also serving as the Privy Council¡¯s military affairs commissioner. For Chu State¡¯s military expedition to the North, there was no way to avoid involving him. Therefore, when Lu Yuan brought his chief disciple and presented the full plan he had discussed with Sun Siwen, Zhou Qing fell into deep thought. ¡°Eighteen million troops¡­¡± Just hearing the number made Zhou Qing¡¯s head ache. Waging war wasn¡¯t like clicking a keyboard where video game troops move without regard for problems. Real wars require consideration of many issues, such as food and fodder logistics, marching routes, weather conditions, acclimatization, soldiers¡¯ morale, clear rewards and punishments, and a series of other issues. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï If even one aspect is off, the army could collapse without fighting or even descend into mutiny. Even if all issues are addressed, that only means you have managed these troops. Going out to war with these troops is still a long shot away. Leading an expedition and managing troops are indeed two different levels of difficulty. In the past, the greatest war Chu had experienced a€¡± the decisive battle with Ning Country a€¡± mobilized a force of merely seven or eight hundred thousand. Even counting the civilian workers transporting food who took part in the war, the number barely reached one and a half million. This was the peak of Chu¡¯s troop mobilization. But even this peak was just a tenth of the forces Lu Yuan planned to mobilize now. Increasing the number of soldiers tenfold all at once, to mobilize and make them effective a€¡± it was not just ten times more difficult. The difficulty of moving troops increases exponentially with the number of soldiers. Now with ten times more troops, Chu¡¯s mobilization challenges would be at least twenty or thirty times greater, and that¡¯s a conservative estimate. ¡®Master speaks so lightly, with just a thought he¡¯s ready to deploy eighteen million. The scale is grand, but mobilizing such forces is far from a simple stroke of the pen.¡¯ Zhou Qing couldn¡¯t help but grumble inwardly; however, he still endeavored to find and fix any oversights in his master¡¯s plan. There was no choice; when the master has tasks, the disciple must endure toil. As a filial disciple, even if he thought his master¡¯s plan was unreliable, he could only try his best to make it work. ¡°Your Majesty, eighteen million troops is an enormous number. Just for marching, they could stretch from Lingnan to Hebei, spanning thousands of miles end to end,¡± Zhou Qing said, carefully phrasing his point as he explained the fact to his master, ¡°With so many people and such a wide range of troop mobilization, it¡¯s impossible to gather eighteen million people in one place to act in unison. Therefore, to manage these forces effectively, it¡¯s inevitable to split the troops and appoint commanders for different regions to lead their forces. Thus, separation of forces is absolutely essential.¡± Lu Yuan nodded at these words, ¡°That¡¯s the reasoning.¡± As a renowned general of his time, he obviously understood, mobilizing eighteen million in one breath was an unimaginable concept. To say it bluntly, In the current world, there is no one who could mobilize so many troops; no one has the capacity to command such a large army. The nations of the North such as Liang, Wei, Zhao, and Xu, which frequently utilize armies of a million, don¡¯t have it that a single person commands everything. Instead, they divide a million troops into several routes. Just as when Lu Yuan faced Ning Country, Lingnan divided into two routes, Jiangnan into four routes, and Jiangbei into one route; different commanders led the forces, and he did not directly command them. Thus, an army of over eight hundred thousand was divided across seven routes, averaging about a hundred thousand per route. It was with this method that Chu managed to command an army of over eight hundred thousand. The countries of the North usually employ the same strategy. Therefore, dividing eighteen million into several, no, actually dozens of forces is essential. Otherwise, you simply cannot command so many troops. The issue now is the division into dozens offorces; who will lead them, how they will coordinate and support one another, and how the routes and plans for deploying each force will be arranged. What Zhou Qing must do is to draft a plan to mobilize these dozens of forces. ¡°In my opinion, among the eighteen million troops, only about six million are the elite standing forces, the rest being civilian workers transporting supplies. Beyond transport, they can at best hold recently taken enemy towns in the rear. So when distributing the forces, the primary focus should be on leveraging these six million regular troops.¡± Zhou Qing set the tone and then shared his plan, ¡°Nowadays, the Northern Lands utilize troops ever more frequently, and their scale is increasing dramatically, often mobilizing by the millions. In the face of such gigantic army groups, each force that Great Chu splits off cannot be small, as they won¡¯t be able to handle the various fronts otherwise. Therefore, each troop division should be no less than a hundred thousand, preferably two hundred thousand. Also, a chief military expedition commander should be appointed for each group, to establish a camp and manage the overall situation.¡± At this point, Zhou Qing glanced discreetly at his own master and suggested, ¡°For the chief commanders of the camps, it would be best to appoint national True Persons.¡± Yes, although Lu Yuan never made a declaration, the fact that the blue and yellow faction True Persons serve as avatars of the Chu Emperor is commonly acknowledged by the world. The forces Zhou Qing was proposing could range from fifty to sixty thousand and even exceed a million for each campaign. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï With so many troops, besides Lu Yuan himself, who else could take charge directly? Aside from him, who beneath him would be satisfied? Even Zhou Qing, as the Grand General, would find this position hard to fill. It wasn¡¯t that Lu Yuan didn¡¯t trust him, but that he didn¡¯t have sufficient prestige; After all, in others¡¯ eyes, Zhou Qing¡¯s rise to the position of Grand General was due to his status as Lu Yuan¡¯s chief disciple, rather than his personal ability. The fact of the matter was indeed that way. His rise to this position was truly founded on Lu Yuan¡¯s support. After all, if it wasn¡¯t for favoring his own chief disciple, would he support a person with no close ties to him? Therefore, many officers held grievances against Zhou Qing in private. So for the role of chief troop manager, aside from Lu Yuan himself and his avatars, there was truly no one else who could sit in that seat securely. Chapter 969 - Chapter 969 Chapter 403 The Strategy to Destroy Wei ?Chapter 969: Chapter 403 The Strategy to Destroy Wei Chapter 969: Chapter 403 The Strategy to Destroy Wei ¡°This matter can be arranged, and I will take care of it.¡± In response to Zhou Qing¡¯s suggestion, Lu Yuan pondered briefly before nodding in agreement. Then, he thought for a moment and said, ¡°In some time, I will also seek out more True People to leave their seclusion, and by then, the number of True People protecting our nation should increase to sixty-four.¡± Twelve years ago, after accumulating strength over time, Lu Yuan smoothly made a breakthrough to the realm of Gathering Three Qi. This was a major checkpoint, and the benefits that came with breaking through were extraordinarily significant. After reaching the stage of Gathering Three Qi, the strength of Lu Yuan¡¯s Divine Soul and his Magic Power had increased more than fivefold compared to when he was at the stage of Gathering Two Qi. Note that this fivefold increase is based on Lu Yuan¡¯s state when he had reached perfect Gathering Two Qi. Once he had perfected his cultivation at the stage of Gathering Two Qi, Lu Yuan¡¯s Divine Soul was capable of sustaining the consumption of divine thoughts by twelve Avatars. This represented an increase of nearly two-thirds from when he first made the breakthrough. Now, with a fivefold increase in divine thoughts and Magic Power, he could easily support the consumption of sixty-four Avatars. However, previously, Chu State had been following a policy of peace and recuperation, and to avoid alarming neighboring countries, even though he had enhanced his Divine Soul, he did not immediately create new Avatars. Now that there is a need, and with the Northern Expedition imminent, there is no longer any need for concealment. ¡°That¡¯s wonderful, if we really could have the assistance of sixty-four True People, then there will be no issues at all with this Northern Expedition.¡± Upon hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s words, Zhou Qing couldn¡¯t help but mutter to himself, thinking that his Master was completely dropping the pretense. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã0 Fifty-six True People, all readily available whenever needed. Wasn¡¯t this blatantly telling others that these True People were all created by me? Despite the many points of complaint in his mind, the prospect of having so many more fresh forces nonetheless made him excitedly clap his hands, ¡°This time Great Chu is dispatching six million troops. If we organize the main army into units of one hundred thousand, we can form up to sixty divisions. If one True Person is responsible for one division, sixty-four True People would leave four in reserve. These four remaining True People, together with Your Majesty, would just suffice to oversee five Military Expeditions, each commanding one and two tenths of a million troops across twelve divisions. The remaining Inborn Grandmasters in the country can then be assigned to support the various Military Expeditions¡¯ troops. This ensures that each troop division has one True Person as Commander; each Military Expedition has ten Inborns at their disposal. With the five military fronts advancing shoulder to shoulder, six million troops crossing the river to the North, and over a hundred Inborns leading the charge, Liang will be doomed.¡± Over the past thirty years, the number of Inborn Grandmasters in Chu State has reached seventy-two. These seventy-two individuals come from complex origins. There are Lu Yuan¡¯s eight Avatars, his five great disciples whom he has raiseda€¡±Sun Siwen, Zhou Qing, the Queen, the Spiritual Woman, and Yin Huixuana€¡±as well as himself, forming the core foundation of Chu from the beginning. There are also the Inborn Grandmasters from the surrendered Western Liang and Barbarian tribes, as well as those from the eighteen feudal states of Lingnan and the Southwest, and over the years, other Barbarian Inborns from places such as Southsea, the Northwest, and the Southwest, who have come to pledge allegiance. Finally, there are the offspring whom Lu Yuan has raised. These three sources have come together to form the present seventy-two Inborn Grandmasters of Chu. Among these seventy-two people, discounting Lu Yuan¡¯s eight Avatars, and subtracting ten left behind on the battlefields in Lingnan and the Southwest to defend against sea pirates and Rainforest Barbarians, and another four who must remain in the country, Ultimately, fifty Inborn Grandmasters can be dispatched to participate in the Northern Expedition. If five major Military Expeditions are formed, each one would have ten Inborn Grandmasters at its disposal, besides the basic troop commanders, assuring an abundant supply of top-tier Grandmaster-level combat power. Fifty Inborn Grandmasters and sixty-four Avatars, along with Lu Yuan himself, the Northern Expedition will see Chu deploying a total of one hundred and fifteen Inborn-level combatants. The number of Inborns is twice that of Liang, and the total military strength is also double that of Liang. All the above only reflects the overall strength disparity. Presently, Liang has Wei to the West, Zhao Xu to the North, and sea pirates to the Southa€¡±enemies on three fronts. The forces stationed along Liang¡¯s three border fronts have tied up more than eighty percent of its capacity, leaving very little energy for the Southwest border areas adjacent to Chu. Anyway, as far as Chu knows, The Liang forces arranged on the Northern border number merely five hundred thousand, and there are no more than seven Inborn Grandmasters. If this is taken into account, then on the local battlefields in the North, the power disparity between Chu and Liang is not merely double, but more than tenfold. With a tenfold gap assaulting the Northern borders, Zhou Qing can¡¯t imagine what Liang could use to hold back the attack. And once the Northern defense line is breached, if Chu forces split into five routes and swiftly invade the heartland of Liang, their troops stationed at the three border fronts simply won¡¯t have time to reinforce, and the heartland of Liang will be completely conquered by Chu. If the home front is lost, and perhaps even the capital has fallen, the remaining forces of Liang will have no choice but to surrender to Chu. This is the excellent situation that Chu has spent thirty years creating. ¡°Dividing into five Military Expeditions is possible; however, there¡¯s no need to station all of them in Liang,¡± Lu Yuan generally agrees with Zhou Qing¡¯s plan but has his own ideas regarding some of the goals of the plan. He points to the location of Wei Country on the map before him and says, ¡°Since we¡¯re already embarking on the Northern Expedition, once the hostilities commence, Chu¡¯s various concealed strengths will inevitably become known to the world. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? By then, countries like Wei Zhao Xu, upon hearing of Chu¡¯s strength, will surely be shocked and wary, striving with all their might to defend against Chu¡¯s advancement.¡± Chapter 970 - Chapter 970 Chapter 403 The Strategy to Destroy Wei_2 ?Chapter 970: Chapter 403 The Strategy to Destroy Wei_2 Chapter 970: Chapter 403 The Strategy to Destroy Wei_2 ¡°` ¡°Even the three nations uniting, converging the remnants of Liang¡¯s troops, and opposing Great Chu is not impossible.¡± Although Great Chu already occupies an absolute advantage, Lu Yuan by no means underestimated his enemies. At this moment, he suggested another highly likely scenario, ¡°Therefore, to prevent this from happening, or rather, to weaken the impact it would have if it did occur. I find it quite necessary to use the Northern Expedition against Liang, incidentally wiping out Wei Country at the same time,¡± Lu Yuan said, concluding his speech. As he finished speaking, Lu Yuan¡¯s fingertip traced a circle on the map over the area of Wei, outlining the regions of Henan and Nanyang. Clearly, when he talked about the annihilation of Wei, he meant taking over these two provinces. ¡°Incidentally wiping out Wei Country?¡± Zhou Qing frowned upon hearing this and stared thoughtfully at the location of Wei that Lu Yuan had outlined on the map. Although Wei Country¡¯s strength had significantly declined over the recent years, it was still a large nation with a population of forty million, with two million soldiers ready for battle and more than twenty Inborn Grandmasters remaining. Destroying such a large country would require a considerable amount of strength. At the very least, it couldn¡¯t be solved with just the military expedition that Zhou Qing had planned. It would take at least two military expeditions, meaning forty-six Inborns and two million four hundred thousand soldiers, to have the strength to conquer Wei Country. But if two military expeditions of troops were diverted to Wei Country, Chu State would only have three left to use against Liang. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï This remaining power, although still considerable, would potentially add many twists and turns to the goal of swiftly conquering Liang, making it not so easily accomplished. So after consideration, Zhou Qing still shook his head, ¡°Your Majesty, I also believe that the sooner we conquer Wei, the better. However, Wei is a great nation, not much inferior to Liang. To conquer it hastily is no easy matter. Now, Great Chu must focus its main efforts on Liang. The strength that can be spared to deal with Wei is probably not much. Therefore, the current priority is to first conquer Liang. Once Qingzhou is taken and Liang¡¯s former territory is integrated, Great Chu will be able to span two provinces with an army of ten million and over a hundred Inborns. With such strength, even if Wei, Zhao, and Xu were to unite, they would still fall far short. And with Great Chu taking Qingzhou and having half the territory of Central State, we can comfortably accumulate strength and gradually plot to eliminate them one by one. There¡¯s no need to rush this matter.¡± Zhou Qing earnestly advised. However, upon hearing his concerns, Lu Yuan smiled, ¡°Actually, to attack and destroy Wei, we do not need that many troops. A single military expedition will suffice.¡± Zhou Qing was taken aback at these words, somewhat incredulous, ¡°A single military expedition?¡± Lu Yuan nodded, and then moved his fingertip away from Wei towards the west, to the land of Helong and the bordering grasslands. ¡°Xiaoqing, take a look here. Currently, the five prefectures of Yong West and the southern grasslands have been occupied by the migrating Barbarians and the tribes coming from the West. According to reports from the Governor of Hanzhong, Huang Xin, the combined population of these Barbarians and tribes in these two areas is no less than thirty million. Given the martial traditions of these migrating tribes, where the entire population is geared for war, Thirty million people could field an army of at least eight million, with no fewer than a dozen Inborns among them,¡± Lu Yuan reported a set of information, then looked at his disciple with a beaming smile, ¡°Eight million troops, this number is already nearly half of what Great Chu is preparing to use for the Northern Expedition. Even I, when I hear about this force entrenched in the northwest of Great Chu, feel a shiver in my heart, worried every day. Great Chu, at least, has a natural barrier of Longshan to separate us, making it relatively simple to defend against the migrating Barbarians who find it difficult to cross. But over there in Wei, there is a clear path between Yong West and the southern grasslands without any obstructions in the middle. Those migrating Barbarians could easily reach Wei¡¯s regions of Shuofang and Guannei if they wished. If they are not intercepted in time, these Barbarians could even make it to the heart of Wei a€¡° to the provinces of Henan and Nanyang. Therefore, in order to strengthen its western defenses, Wei has been forced to deploy one and a half million of its two million soldiers permanently in Shuofang and Guannei. Leaving only five hundred thousand troops on the eastern front. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Even so, the defense of Wei¡¯s western parts remains less than perfect, and Barbarians occasionally break through into Henan province. Consequently, Wei Country is deeply troubled and worried about this. Now tell me, if at this juncture, Great Chu actively proposes to each mobilize a million troops in a joint operation to sweep away the Barbarians along Yong West and the grasslands to pacify the western territories of both nations, how would Wei choose in the face of this proposal?¡± After listening, Zhou Qing blurted out, ¡°Of course, they would agree joyfully.¡± Regarding the matter of joining forces with Chu State to clear out the migrating Barbarians of the northwest, in fact, as early as ten years ago, when tribes from the Western Gobi joined the migration and the western border troubles worsened, Wei, which suffered the most harm, shared the longest border, and whose resources were most strained, was the first to propose it. At that time, Lu Yuan was only concerned with recuperating, accumulating strength, and had no intention of launching any major military campaigns. Moreover, for Chu, protected by the natural defenses of Longshan, the disturbances in the northwest were not too impactful. Therefore, they consistently refused the proposal, declining Wei¡¯s request. So even though Wei sent messengers year after year, Chu never gave in, dragging the issue on. ¡°Yes, Wei would definitely agree joyfully,¡± Lu Yuan nodded with a smile, ¡°They have been pleading with Great Chu for so long; if now I agree to their request in the name of not being able to endure the continuous harassment by the border Barbarians, wouldn¡¯t the Wei people be overjoyed?¡± ¡°` Chapter 971 - Chapter 971 Chapter 403 The Strategy to Destroy Wei_3 ?Chapter 971: Chapter 403 The Strategy to Destroy Wei_3 Chapter 971: Chapter 403 The Strategy to Destroy Wei_3 If the opponent agrees, then they must follow the demands and each dispatch one million troops together with Great Chu, actively pushing into Yong West and the grasslands to sweep those migrating Barbarians. Thus, their nation¡¯s one million elite soldiers would be transferred away. And for Great Chu, we could feign a grand display of strength in the northwest, with merely two hundred thousand troops from Hanzhong Prefecture, supported by eight hundred thousand civilian workers enlisted as a Detached Army, bluffing as we go. Within Xiangyang Prefecture, secretly assemble one million elite troops, and once Wei Country¡¯s main force crosses the border, cross the river and head north immediately to swiftly capture their Nanyang and Henan prefectures. At the same time, the Detached Army from Hanzhong could turn back and directly attack the Wei territories within Guannei and Shuofang prefectures, to contain the half a million troops the Wei have there for defense. With this Detached Army there, we could at least hold the Wei soldiers for more than half a year. By then, with an Eastern front of one million troops and more than twenty Inborn Grandmasters, attacking Wei¡¯s Eastern line of defense with fifty thousand soldiers and seven or eight Inborns, wouldn¡¯t it be as easy as reaching out to grab something? As long as we can take down the two prefectures of Nanyang and Henan, even if Wei has a million soldiers left in Guannei and Shuofang, they would be but dry bones in a grave, nothing to fear anymore.¡± After years of migration, Wei¡¯s population of forty million, over thirty million are concentrated in the Henan and Nanyang prefectures. The remaining in the western regions of Guannei and Shuofang only amount to a meager four or five million. Therefore, as long as Chu State can take down the Henan and Nanyang prefectures, they would have control over Wei¡¯s most strategic and core territories. Their million-strong army in the Western front would also face the dilemma of supply lines being cut and their families being controlled. At that time, if the Wei soldiers do not wish to starve to death or involve their families, surrender would be their only option besides having no other way out. Losing these troops and their core territory, even if Wei could still endure within the prefectures of Shuofang and Guannei, they would be nothing more than a minor court. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? With those remaining four or five million people, what storm could they possibly stir up? In the end, they would either be destroyed by the ceaseless eastward migration of the Barbarians, or surrender to Chu State, with no other path available. Zhou Qing, as the Grand General, was of course well aware of Wei¡¯s current situation. After hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s plan, he joyfully said, ¡°If we proceed with this strategy, the Military Expedition can indeed bring down Wei.¡± Chu State¡¯s Military Expedition is not just comprised of twenty-three Inborns and one million two hundred thousand troops. Following each Military Expedition, there are more than two million armed civilian workers assisting with transporting grain. When necessary, these armed civilian workers can also join the battle. So a single Military Expedition could mobilize more than three million troops and workers. Carefully organize and rigorously train them, and they¡¯re already equivalent to the entire military force of a dominant nation. Now, combined with Lu Yuan¡¯s tactic of luring the tiger away from the mountain and attacking the east while making noise in the west, the probability of annihilating Wei has risen to over seventy percent. With such odds, it¡¯s worth taking a shot. However, although the plan seems feasible, there remains one issue that needs to be urgently addresseda€¡±whether it¡¯s eradicating Liang or Wei. ¡°Your Majesty, annihilating Wei or Liang would not be difficult for Great Chu if planned well. But this operation involves up to eighteen million people, and the entire nation is being mobilized; it¡¯s unlikely that such a move could be concealed.¡± Zhou Qing voiced his concern: ¡°Both Wei and Liang border Great Chu and have always been on guard against us. They have placed who knows how many spies and informants across Jiangnan. If Great Chu mobilizes troops, I¡¯m afraid we cannot keep it hidden from them. If they are prepared, it would not be so easy to deceive Wei and Liang into falling for our trap.¡± Chu State¡¯s standing army is currently only three million strong. To expand to the planned five million for the Northern Expedition, another two million people must be recruited into the army over this next half a year. ¡°Just this one measure alone will inevitably cause a stir.¡± ¡°Following that, conscripting tens of millions of civilian workers will create an even greater commotion that could reach the heavens.¡± ¡°The two countries to the north, Wei and Liang, would have to be blind not to notice the unusual activities in Chu State.¡± ¡°Thus, Lu Yuan¡¯s strategy of luring the tiger out of the mountains and feinting to the east but striking to the west is sound, but it is all for naught if Wei Country is not deceived.¡± Lu Yuan smiled upon hearing this, ¡°That is easily managed. Presently, Southsea is repeatedly in turmoil, and with natural disasters like volcanoes constantly pressing in, they already pose a threat to the southern border of Great Chu. I can have the Cabinet issue an imperial decree to announce the relocation of citizens from the southern territory of Great Chu, as well as from those vassal states, to move north and settle anew in the northern lands of Great Chu. With so many millions of people migrating, such a massive project will make the conscription of some soldiers and the movement of various supplies within Great Chu seem inconspicuous.¡± Zhou Qing expressed his concerns, ¡°Although directly relocating the citizens of the southern territory can conceal the movements of our great army, it will undoubtedly affect the local production of Great Chu. Immigration requires the expenditure of grain, and so does mounting an expedition, and even though the granaries in various places are full, they cannot withstand such a drain. If we really proceed with this, the grain reserves of Chu State, tasked with supporting both immigration and warfare, I fear it won¡¯t last two years. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Moreover, as for those vassal states in Lingnan and the Southwest, I suspect their lords will hardly be willing to relocate their citizens.¡± ¡°We won¡¯t need two years.¡± Lu Yuan said lightly, ¡°To annihilate Liang and Wei, we won¡¯t need two years. This time I¡¯m mobilizing eighteen million people, along with one hundred and fifteen Inborn Grandmasters, to sweep through the lands north of the river. It will be like the autumn wind sweeping away the fallen leaves, and to destroy these two countries, a year¡¯s time is sufficient. And relocating the citizens now is not a useless effort either. They won¡¯t be relocated to places like Xiangyang, Dongting, or Yuzhang, but to the land north of the river. The south is already unstable, not only are sea raiders arriving, but within twenty or thirty years, volcanic disasters may follow suit. Taking this opportunity when the land has few people, to move the citizens ahead of time to the territories we will conquer in Central State, is also a beneficial act. As for those vassal states, if they do not wish to be annexed, they can stay put and join the migrating sea raiders and Yi People. However, if they think of moving to Central State when the volcanic disasters come one day, I may not agree then. You may convey my intentions to those feudal lords. How they choose, I believe they will make the correct decision.¡± When Lu Yuan first decided to create fiefdoms, it was simply because he did not want to expend too many of Great Chu¡¯s resources on the Southwest and Lingnan so that we could fully commit to moving northward. This was merely a temporary compromise. Those feudal lords should be well aware of this, and should have long predicted the possibility of Chu downsizing their fiefdoms one day. After all, once the volcanic disasters strike, they too cannot protect their own lands. Whether they surrender their lands then or not makes little difference. Now, under the Emperor¡¯s demand, choosing to offer up their citizens to align internally could provide them with a dignified option. Otherwise, even if Lu Yuan does not punish them, they would still be unable to protect their fiefs from the incessant waves of migrating Barbarians without the backing of Chu State. Moreover, they would have cut off their own retreat, ending up with nothing. Having this leverage is precisely why Lu Yuan is not worried that these feudal lords will not fall in line.¡± Chapter 972 - Chapter 972 Chapter 404 The Villagers of Changan ?Chapter 972: Chapter 404: The Villagers of Chang¡¯an Chapter 972: Chapter 404: The Villagers of Chang¡¯an Baling, the Imperial Palace. After discussing the details of the Northern Expedition with Sun Siwen and Zhou Qing and coming to an agreement, Lu Yuan entrusted them with the task, while he himself began to work overtime to hurriedly create Yellow Turban Warrior Avatars. For Lu Yuan, this task was not particularly difficult. Now that he had achieved the cultivation of Gathering Three Qi, after thirty years of hidden cultivation, he had long since mastered the Divine Power ¡®Turn Beans into Soldiers¡¯ he had during the time he was at the level of Gathering Two Qi. Now, with just a thought, Lu Yuan could wave his hand and transform dozens of Yellow Turban Strongmen. The materials needed were also readily available. In his early years, when slaughtering Divine Blood Variants, Chu State had obtained countless materials from the bodies of hundreds of them, enough to refine hundreds of avatars. The only minor problem was that creating fifty-six avatars at once would consume a considerable amount of Lu Yuan¡¯s magic power, nearly depleting half of it. This was half of the magic power of a cultivator at the level of Gathering Three Qi. It was uncertain how much spiritual energy he would need to inhale and exhale to replenish it! But on second thought, If using half of his magic power could trade for fifty-six reliable avatars, equivalent to the Second Realm of Inborn level, that could be used for a long time for Chu State and in doing so could take down half of Central State, then this trade was not too bad after all. Especially for the current Lu Yuan, after breaking through to Gathering Three Qi, the Qi Luck provided by just occupying the territory of Yangzhou was gradually becoming insufficient to meet his cultivation needs. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï A cultivator at the level of Gathering Three Qi requires almost ten times more spiritual energy for cultivation than a cultivator at the level of Gathering Two Qi, and this need would continue to climb as his cultivation level advanced. Moreover, the Qi Luck provided by the unification of Yangzhou could only move enough Heavenly Qi to satisfy the cultivation needs of a cultivator at the level of Gathering Two Qi. Upon reaching the level of Gathering Three Qi, this amount of Qi Luck and spiritual energy was far from sufficient. Although as Yangzhou¡¯s development deepened and its population continued to grow, the Qi Luck being provided was also increasing. However, this increment was far from keeping up with the progress of Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation power. Now, the spiritual energy he absorbed every day was only about ten percent of his own cultivation limit. Meditating for a day, the cultivation power he enhanced was even less than that of an ordinary cultivator of the same realm who did not practice the Way of Control Pneuma. Depending on his Taiping Dao Book cultivation, which should have brought him eight or nine times the speed of an ordinary person, the lack of spiritual energy prevented him from achieving the results he should have. Based on his current cultivation speed while severely starved of spiritual energy, Lu Yuan did some calculations and concluded that to break through to the Four Qi Condensation realm relying solely on the territory of Yangzhou would take at least a hundred and twenty or thirty years. At that snail¡¯s pace, he would have to wait until the cows come home. ?¦Ï¦Í¨À0.§ã¦Ï And considering the current state of the Nine Provinces, this fragile Yangzhou might not even last thirty years, let alone more than a hundred years later. Therefore, Lu Yuan¡¯s active push for the Northern Expedition was also driven by having enough of these difficult days with little spiritual energy, and out of a need to improve his cultivation environment, he had to initiate an external expansion. ¡°Once we seize the lands of Liang and Wei Countries, Chu State¡¯s territory and population will double. With these increases, my cultivation speed should be able to reach about thirty percent of my own maximum spiritual energy absorption speed. Although still in a state of spiritual energy hunger, it is at least about thrice that of an ordinary cultivator in the same realm. With this progress, I should be able to complete the accumulation and break through to the realm of Four Qi Condensation within thirty years, before Yangzhou falls.¡± Inside the palace, Lu Yuan thought about this to himself while waving his hand to sprinkle a shower of golden light. The golden sparks fell upon the neatly arranged materials in front of him, and instantly the golden light turned into runes, transforming the materials into robust Yellow Turban Strongmen who then stood up. They formed a line and headed to a corner of the great hall, where even more Yellow Turban Strongmen stood in respectful silence. Counting carefully, there were exactly fifty-six. ¡°Report to the Privy Council immediately, and after receiving your official ranks, join the army early to become familiar with the troops under your command,¡± Lu Yuan ordered his newly created Yellow Turban Warrior Avatars. Creating these avatars was not about giving them a mandate and letting them take full control of the army. Leading an army and commanding troops is not something one person alone can accomplish. To command a unit smoothly, besides a wise commander, one needs a large number of qualified officers at low, middle, and high levels to cooperate, so these people can obey your orders and manage their direct subordinates well. Only then can the commander maneuver the army as freely as his own limbs. So after creating the avatars, Lu Yuan still needed to send them to the grassroots to familiarize themselves with the troops and officers assigned to them, to understand their capabilities, to coordinate with each other, and to thus drill the troops properly. As for Lu Yuan himself, he didn¡¯t need to go through such trouble. As previously discussed with Zhou Qing, the Northern Expedition would be divided into five major military expeditions, involving sixty troops. And the commanders of these expeditions and troops would be avatars of Lu Yuan himself. Controlling his own avatars, what need was there for understanding and familiarity? Their capacity was well-known to him, the creator of alla€¡±he couldn¡¯t be clearer, could he? Moreover, given Lu Yuan¡¯s current cultivation level, even if his avatars were separated by tens of thousands of miles, he could still communicate instantaneously through spiritual thoughts and even transmit the visual images they saw as if he were there in person. Under these circumstances, commanding the five major military expeditions and sixty troops was going to be quite easy for Lu Yuan. Chapter 973 - Chapter 973 Chapter 404 Anxiang Residents_2 ?Chapter 973: Chapter 404 Anxiang Residents_2 Chapter 973: Chapter 404 Anxiang Residents_2 ¡°` It was just like playing a computer game, with the fog of war lifted, but still an all-seeing God¡¯s perspective. As long as he, the original body, willed it, the troops could be mobilized instantly like game characters, adjusted in real time according to the situation. It was precisely because of the many benefits between the original and the avatars that Lu Yuan insisted on creating so many avatars before the battle, even if it meant using a great deal of magic power. It wasn¡¯t just coveting the combat strength of the avatars but also valuing this feature of instant communication. ¡°Yes!¡± Upon receiving the orders, the numerous avatars nodded and then turned to leave the great hall, rushing out together. Watching their retreating figures, Lu Yuan nodded in satisfaction. With such a great advantage and the strength to crush the opponent, there was no reason for him not to win this war. At this moment, the overall situation of the Northern Expedition was already determined. ¡­ In Yong State, within the Guannei Prefecture, Chang¡¯an. Twenty-five years ago, after the Royal Teacher expelled the Former Zhou and took control of Guannei, this former imperial capital of Yong State naturally became the capital of Wei Country. Because the city was complete with palaces and imperial halls and because the Guannei Prefecture where the capital was located was a wealthy and large grain-producing region, it could afford the needs of the officials and the numerous forbidden army. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Hence, even after the Royal Teacher seized the Henan and Nanyang Prefectures in the Central State, the court did not relocate the capital there but left that area for the immigrants from Yan State who were continuously moving in. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï The court itself stayed with a large contingent of troops in Shuofang and Guannei Prefectures to defend against the constantly migrating Barbarians and Western Barbarians from the steppe and Western Regions. This is what it means for the Heavenly Son to guard the nation¡¯s gates. As everyone knows, frontier garrisons are places for deploying troops, and naturally, it is hard for the economy and people¡¯s livelihoods to flourish. Chang¡¯an was no exception. Since losing Shuofang, Helong and other regions during the Former Zhou era, Guannei Prefecture, where Chang¡¯an is located, no longer had any barriers, and Chang¡¯an City became the front line. From that time on, every month near Chang¡¯an, the beacon fires could be seen. As of today, although Shuofang to the north still exists, shielding the north of the Imperial Capital, The west, Helong Prefecture, has not been recaptured, leaving the west of the Imperial Capital completely open and unprotected. Therefore, Barbarians coming from the west, rather than struggling over the perilous and arduous Longshan to attack the formidable fortifications, Prefer to flow directly along the plains and rivers towards the unguarded and exceptionally rich Guannei Prefecture. As a result, even though Wei Country had a million troops stationed on the western borders of the Guannei Prefecture year-round, small groups of Western Barbarians would still occasionally rush to the walls of Chang¡¯an City, causing significant disturbances. Because their place of living was constantly threatened, And because most of the people living in Shuofang and Guannei were related to the forbidden army and inherently valorous, It culminated in the making of a populace which, regardless of gender, could wield weapons and had archery skills, leading to the saying that everyone was a soldier. Their martial spirit was even more fierce than that of the migrating Barbarians. Indeed, those Barbarians that broke through the western defense line and approached the hinterland, often didn¡¯t manage to penetrate further. They were usually dealt with directly by the spontaneously organized Village Braves from the neighborhoods along the way, causing no significant chaos. Today, as autumn begins and the foliage turns yellow, a group of Wei Country villagers formed a cavalry team, skillfully arranged in formation, pursuing and slaughtering a group of over ten Barbarians who had arrived from the west, like Fierce Tigers driving off wolves. The fight lasted only a short while before ending with the Barbarians suffering heavy casualties and the survivors escaping in disarray. But the victorious Village Braves didn¡¯t let up, persistently chasing after them, seemingly determined not to rest until they had killed every last one of these Barbarian horsemen. However, they didn¡¯t chase for long, for from the south a troop of several hundred people appeared. Some of the Wei Country cavalry who were on guard duty raced over upon seeing this, aiding the villagers by effortlessly wiping out the remaining horsemen. Arriving from the south and escorted by Wei Country horsemen, Han Shun and Huang Yun witnessed the scene, feeling somewhat shocked by it. ¡°True Person, this is already the outskirts of Chang¡¯an; isn¡¯t the Imperial Capital of Wei Country just three hundred miles from here?¡± Han Shun couldn¡¯t help but turn his head and ask Huang Yun. As one of Lu Yuan¡¯s five closest disciples, Han Shun was undoubtedly a trusted insider, and so after his breakthrough to Innate, he was put to use. In recent years, he had held various defense and supervisory positions across different counties; at the central level, he had even served as a Grand General in the forbidden army and Deputy Secretary. His military rank had risen to Left Grand General, classed as a First Rank and was ennobled as a Marquis. It could be said that Han Shun was a real military authority figure in Chu State, second only to Zhou Qing, the Grand General. But despite his high position and importance, Han Shun still dared not neglect Huang Yun beside him, and instead showed extreme humility and respect. Not only because Huang Yun was a True Person and, like himself, held the rank of First Rank, But also because the other was an avatar of his Master, the equivalent of the Chu Emperor¡¯s presence. Even if Han Shun were the most arrogant and proud, he wouldn¡¯t dare show insolence before his own teacher and sovereign! That wouldn¡¯t be arrogance, but stupidity. Thus, within Chu State, the fact that the avatars of Qing and Huang were ruling was an open secret among the upper echelons. Basically, all high-level officials from both military and political spheres knew these avatars belonged to the Emperor, and no one dared to be disrespectful. ¡°` Chapter 974 - Chapter 974 Chapter 404 Changan Residents_3 ?Chapter 974: Chapter 404 Chang¡¯an Residents_3 Chapter 974: Chapter 404 Chang¡¯an Residents_3 In front of them, they were all very respectful and humble. ¡°Indeed, we have already arrived at Blue Jade County, which now falls under the jurisdiction of Jingzhao Yin of Wei Country, precisely within Jingji.¡± Upon hearing the question, Huang Yun nodded slightly and then lamented, ¡°I hadn¡¯t expected such a critical core region to still be approached by Barbarian cavalry. It seems the troubles along the western border of Wei are far more serious than imagined.¡± Han Shun agreed, ¡°The border troubles of Wei are so severe they now jeopardize Jingji. It seems that our diplomatic mission might easily accomplish its goals.¡± Initially, Lu Yuan had settled on a plan to ally with Wei Country, jointly dispatching troops to sweep through the plains Barbarians and the Western region foreign tribes, aiming to draw Wei¡¯s forces towards Great Chu. Afterward, naturally, someone needed to be sent to Wei to achieve this. Huang Yun and Han Shun were the chief and deputy envoys of this diplomatic mission from Chu. At the same time, they were also major generals of the Hanzhong army corps responsible for coordinating with Wei and jointly sallying forth to cleanse the Barbarians, each commanding a contingent of troops or awaiting orders at the main camp. Well, given their responsibilities, it isn¡¯t difficult to guess that their current mission to Wei carried certain special tasks. For instance, gathering intelligence on Wei, observing the opponent¡¯s strengths and weaknesses, and preparing for the next year¡¯s military offense into Guanzhong. After all, aside from drawing out the main Wei forces, the Hanzhong army corps also had the critical task of attacking Guanzhong, blocking Wei¡¯s troops from reinforcing Henan and Nanyang. Completing this mission wouldn¡¯t be so simple. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï ¡°It¡¯s easy to lure the Wei people out, but to block them will be not so simple.¡± Huang Yun looked towards the Wei Villagers eagerly disposing of the corpses and plundering war spoils from the defeated Barbarians, his gaze filled with worry, ¡°The Wei have one million five hundred thousand Soldiers within Guannei and Shuofang alone, including more than ten Inborn martial artists. They are already extremely strong. But now I see that the common folk of Wei are also fierce and valiant in battle, far surpassing those of Great Chu. If in the event of war, all five million Wei people of Guanzhong and Shuofang are as brave as this, it would be easy to gather an army of a million, each with significant combat strength. That would be two million five hundred thousand troops then.¡± By the end of his words, Huang Yun¡¯s tone inevitably lowered a bit. Han Shun was also silent. The Hanzhong army corps they belonged to had a formation of two hundred thousand Soldiers and eight hundred thousand Militia; altogether, barely a million people. This Strength looked strong, but compared to Wei¡¯s forces in Guannei and Shuofang, it was vastly inferior. The gap between Both Sides was close to four or five times. ¡°Not all Wei people may be so valiant. Perhaps we could call these Village Braves over and inquire further,¡± Han Shun proposed, breaking the silence. Huang Yun replied, ¡°That¡¯s possible, you go and bring someone.¡± Han Shun nodded, then turned to find the Wei officials escorting them to negotiate the matter. After speaking a few words with the Wei official, who did not oppose, perhaps because he also wanted to showcase their military strength, he called for the villagers to be brought over. A short while later, the villagers who were clearing the battlefield of their spoils were led over. ¡°Lowly Zhu Xiang, at your service,¡± the man said. Maybe because it was his First time seeing high-ranking officials, the villager brought over was somewhat reserved and cautiously saluted Huang Yun and his companions. Huang Yun sized up the man in front of him named Zhu Xiang, a tall and stout figure with vigorous vitality and some grasp of Inner Strengtha€¡±an indication that he had practiced martial arts. He was only a bit old, with white at his temples, looking to be in his fifties or sixties, already advanced in years. Perhaps for this reason, he had managed to escape being conscripted into the army. ¡°Rise, Old man, there¡¯s no need for such formalities.¡± Huang Yun raised his hand slightly, signaling Zhu Xiang to stand, and said, ¡°Seeing the Old man lead people in driving off the Barbarian cavalry earlier was truly astounding, which is why I had someone bring you here for questioning.¡± After explaining briefly, he continued, ¡°May I ask the Old man, are there many warriors like you in the villages?¡± Zhu Xiang looked up cautiously and replied, ¡°Honored sir, our humble martial skills are not worth boasting about in the presence of such esteemed individuals. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï However, there are indeed many villagers like us who have practiced a thing or two. Basically, boys around the ages of eleven or twelve will start learning some self-defense skills under the guidance of the elders in the village. Therefore, in our area, all village men know how to handle swords, spears, and archery. Even the women can handle a bow and manage to hit one or two arrows out of ten.¡± In the world of the Nine Provinces, those of the high-level Aristocratic families meant more than just a good birth. In this world where the extraordinary and holy appear, birth also signifies formidable martial Strength, like those Coastal Aristocratic Family members from Yangzhou, who are both scholarly and martially skilled, with profound Cultivation. In such a situation, for the ordinary people at the Low-level to confront the high-level aristocracy, even hoping for a simple man¡¯s last stand could only be a vain wish. Therefore, someone like Zhu Xiang, a Low-level martial artist, facing Huang Yun, who was clearly an important person of high status, truly did not dare to boast of courage. ¡°Is that so¡­¡± Huang Yun paused for a moment, then turned his gaze to some villagers who were waiting anxiously and looking curiously towards them: mostly youngsters and Old men. Those were the people who routed a group of Barbarian cavalry earlier. He took a second look and asked, ¡°I see your fellow villagers are carrying the heads of the slain Barbarians. Is there a particular reason for severing and taking the heads?¡± Zhu Xiang answered honestly, ¡°The county had issued a notice earlier that villagers who bring in the heads of invading Barbarians to the county office will be granted fifty catties of rice per head. This time we¡¯ve taken the heads of thirteen Barbarians, which can be exchanged for six and a half stones of rice.¡± ¡°I see,¡± said Huang Yun, nodding his head, then spoke, ¡°Thank you, Old man, for clearing up the matter. Take some reward and then you may leave.¡± ¡°Thank you, your Excellency!¡± Upon hearing of a reward, Zhu Xiang¡¯s face lit up with joy. After expressing his gratitude, he hurried off. After he left, Huang Yun looked at Han Shun beside him and asked, ¡°General Han, what do you think?¡± The latter¡¯s expression was solemn, ¡°Wei is indeed a tough opponent. If their commoners are all like Zhu Xiang, This Battle will be difficult.¡± Huang Yun sighed softly, ¡°Regardless, let¡¯s first meet the Wei Emperor then decide. Whether it¡¯s sending more troops or any other strategies, ultimately we need to draw Wei Soldiers out of the country first.¡± Their conversation thus ended. Amidst the sound of carriage and horses, the diplomatic party continued towards Chang¡¯an. Chapter 975 - Chapter 975 Chapter 405 Wei Palace Debate ?Chapter 975: Chapter 405 Wei Palace Debate Chapter 975: Chapter 405 Wei Palace Debate Chang¡¯an, Wei Palace. Following the news that the messenger from Chu State had entered the city, the current Emperor Wei Yong of Wei immediately summoned the group of ministers to discuss the matter. ¡°Gentlemen, the state of Chu has sent a messenger wishing to invite our Great Wei to join them beyond the border. Both countries would meet at Helong and together sweep through the Barbarian tribes.¡± Wei Yong stated the purpose of the Chu State¡¯s messenger and then said, ¡°Let¡¯s discuss this, how should our Great Wei respond?¡± This Emperor of Wei was thirty-three years old this year and had ascended the throne five years ago. From his age, it can be seen that Wei Yong was born exactly when the frigid northern tide began, experiencing such a terrible era. Therefore, in order to preserve the dynasty, the previous Wei Emperor started mobilizing the entire nation from Wei Yong¡¯s birth, firmly intent on moving southward. To demonstrate his resolve, he even named his newborn son Yong, signifying his vow to conquer Yong State a€¡± an indication of his determination. Ultimately, after twenty years of fierce fighting and with the aid of the Snow Plains Nomads, Wei Country annihilated Zhou Country, settled its capital at Chang¡¯an, and incorporated the base of the four counties east of Yong. And so Wei Yong benefited, having been made Crown Prince and ascending to the throne five years ago. However, his reign post-ascension was anything but smooth sailing. First, during the year Wei Yong just ascended the throne, due to his youthful vigor, he wanted to quickly establish prestige to secure his position on the court firmly. Ignoring the group of ministers¡¯ advice, he insisted on joining forces with Zhao Xu, launching a large-scale offensive against the state of Liang. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Conveniently, Zhao Xu¡¯s two countries were also suffering from the constant wars, gradually becoming unable to sustain themselves, desperately wanting to change the current situation. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Thus, once Wei Yong proposed his idea, the three immediately hit it off, deciding to set a time for a joint attack on Liang. And the result¡­ As mentioned earlier, due to disunity, selfish calculations, disordered cooperation, underestimating the enemy, rash advancements, and other issues, the three nations failed to defeat Liang. In fact, because they initiated the attack, they exposed their weaknesses to Liang, which took advantage and inflicted heavy losses on them, dealing a significant blow to their vitality. After that battle, the three nations lost a million soldiers and seven Inborns were killed or injured. Wei, which had exerted the greatest effort, suffered the most severe losses, with half a million soldiers killed and three Inborns fallen, greatly wounding its vital energy. After the defeat, as the emperor who heavily promoted this battle, Wei Yong naturally bore the main responsibility. His prestige plummeted instantly, and he nearly had to abdicate the throne. Later, relying on the connections he had cultivated as a Crown Prince, and the staunch support of maternal and marital clans in the background, he barely managed to avoid dethronement by the united ministers, clinging to his imperial seat. But even with his throne secured, Wei Yong¡¯s position was precarious, at any moment at risk of being ousted. Therefore, in order to regain his status, Wei Yong had been in continuous contact with Chu State over the years, wanting to collaborate with this powerful neighbor to the south, to fight the Barbarians in the southern steppes and resolve Wei¡¯s western border troubles. The origin of this idea is quite straightforward. For one, in recent years, the nomadic Barbarians who migrated southward and the foreign tribes from the Western Regions who moved eastward and merged in Yong West have reached a population of thirty to forty million, indeed forming a significant force. These Barbarians have launched attacks of over a million people every year, continuously harassing the western borders of Wei, even threatening the peace of Chang¡¯an, seriously jeopardizing national security. The Barbarians in Yong West have reached a point where they must be dealt with. Secondly, if I can¡¯t beat the people from Liang, can¡¯t I at least beat these lesser Barbarians? Alright, the recently defeated Wei Yong still had some trepidation, so wasn¡¯t he continuously sending envoys to Chu to pull the neighbor together for a safer venture? Only, Chu was too aloof, disregarding Wei¡¯s proposals and steadfastly refusing them. But now, things were different. The cool goddess whom had remained aloof for so long finally gave a response, proactively coming to visit me. Really, I could cry¡­ Ahem, that description might be a bit strange, but this indeed reflects Wei Yong¡¯s state of mind. ¡°Your Majesty, for several years now, our Great Wei has been extending offers of alliance to Chu State, but we have been consistently rejected. Now that Chu has taken the initiative to seek an engagement, this aligns with our intentions. It is a fortuitous matter. This minister believes we should agree to it,¡± said Meng Chenglin, a renowned general of Wei and the Great General Lan Xin Marquis, stepping forward to speak from below. Hmm, his sister is the current Queen Mother of Wei, that is, Wei Yong¡¯s mother. As the uncle, Meng Chenglin certainly understood his nephew¡¯s awkward position. Hence, regarding this matter of joining forces with Chu, which could elevate the emperor¡¯s prestige, he naturally supported it wholeheartedly. ¡°Your Majesty, in this minister¡¯s opinion, the Great General¡¯s words are unsound,¡± retorted Wei Yang, who was often at odds with Meng Chenglin and was of royal lineage, representing the conservative nobility and a faction of the clan. As a royal uncle and the Left Prime Minister, Wei Yang stood out to object: ¡°The Chu people have always resisted aligning with us, and now their sudden initiative to approach us is a complete reversal in attitude, which suggests possible deceit.¡± Headed by Wei Yang, the conservative forces of Wei have always promoted a proactive and stable approach, favoring a ceasefire to preserve national strength. Their core principle was to maintain control of the Henan and Nanyang counties currently held by Wei and to live well, allowing the country to rest and gain strength, recover its power, and avoid launching any more wars or senselessly depleting national strength. After all, Wei had already gained two counties in the Central State. With this base, it could comfortably live and thrive in the future a€¡° there was no need for reckless confrontation. And if a battle truly was necessary, it should not be in the present. Wei had already been at war for thirty years, during which five to six million soldiers were killed or wounded, and the civilian casualties were counted in tens of millions. Too much blood had already been shed. Chapter 976 - Chapter 976 Chapter 405 Debate at the Wei Palace_2 ?Chapter 976: Chapter 405: Debate at the Wei Palace_2 Chapter 976: Chapter 405: Debate at the Wei Palace_2 Yet now, having finally gained a land to call home, the Emperor does not think about recuperating and multiplying, disbanding the troops and ceasing warfare to restore the severely depleted national strength. Instead, he¡¯s still considering raising a great army. Does he want Wei Country to follow in the footsteps of Zhou Country and be eradicated? Can the Emperor not see that half of Wei Country¡¯s grain consumption is imported from Chu State, and that its lifeline is already grasped in the hands of others? Can he not see that, five years ago, our United Army of three nations suffered a crushing defeat at the hands of the Liang army, and the nation¡¯s peril was imminent? As a result, Liang, with its own lifeline of grain controlled by others, went through the misery of a food shortage after Chu State¡¯s betrayal cut off Jiangnan¡¯s grain supply. Wasn¡¯t it truly tragic? With this lesson from the past and the nation in danger, what the Emperor should do is to disband the troops, allow the able-bodied men in the Army to return home to farm, and resume normal local production to address the current situation where grain is controlled by others. This is the right path for a King. Any talk of conquering the Barbarians of Yong West is simply nonsensical. No matter how ferocious those Barbarians are, could they really seize Guanzhong from our hands? The Snow Plains Nomads fought so desperately back then, but were they able to snatch Helong from the hands of Zhou People? Now that Great Wei¡¯s power is at its peak, are we worse off than a vanquished Zhou Country that we can¡¯t even defend our own capital? These so-called threats from our western borders are but minor afflictions, nothing more than groundless worries. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï The Emperor uses this as an excuse, merely trying to regain his precarious prestige through victory in war, just to secure his throne. Wei Yang could see through his own nephew¡¯s thoughts very clearly. He loathed and despised the act of starting wars for one¡¯s own selfish interests. ¡°The Chancellor is mistaken in what he says!¡± As Wei Yang spoke out against sending out troops, someone immediately stood up to oppose him. The Right Chancellor, Xuan Xiahou Qiu Shiyi, immediately retorted, ¡°In recent years, not only has Great Wei suffered from the incursions of the Yong West Barbarians, but the Chu people have suffered greatly as well. I have heard that ten years ago, there were only several tens of thousands of Barbarians living and grazing in Longxi, but now their numbers have exceeded three million. At the same time, Chu State¡¯s garrisons in Longxi, which numbered seventeen a decade ago, now only total nine. Moreover, a decade ago, Hanzhong was free of disturbances from Barbarians, but nowadays, merchants say small bands of Barbarian cavalry have appeared on the mountain paths in counties close to Longxi. All of these signs indicate that Chu State¡¯s control over Longxi is being continuously weakened and squeezed by the mass invasions of the Barbarians, gradually becoming unsustainable and beginning to affect the security of their native Hanzhong. Under these circumstances, it is unsurprising that Chu has become restless and sought Great Wei¡¯s cooperation to launch a campaign against the Yong West Barbarians in order to address the threats at the western frontiers. As for deceit, is the Chancellor concerned that Chu State, instead of valuing its friendly relations with Great Wei, will take the risk of breaking faith and resort to conspiring with those Barbarians against the descendants of the Three Emperors? Besides, even if there is deceit, with Great Wei¡¯s millions-strong Elite Army in the western frontier, and generals of repute like the Great General, even if Chu were to ally with the Barbarians, have we anything to fear? Or does the Chancellor not trust the strength of Great Wei¡¯s powerful troops and is unwilling to see Great Wei forces vanquishing the Barbarians and resolving our border threats?¡± At the end, Qiu Shiyi¡¯s rhetorical question carried an unmistakable sharpness and lacked any courtesy. Ah, all this talk, yet it really comes down to the fact that his sister is the current Empress, and he and the Heavenly Son are family. Naturally, he supports Wei Yang. ¡°You¡­ are arguing absurdities!¡± Wei Yang, seeing Qiu Shiyi daring to openly slander him, trembled with anger and then turned to the Emperor and said, ¡°Your Majesty, I am entirely motivated by public interest and utterly devoid of self-interest. It is not that I am unwilling to fight, but Great Wei has waged war year after year and is now exhausted with an empty treasury. We truly cannot afford another war. Our Great Wei, with four provinces and thirty-eight million citizens, dominates Yong State and claims the title of overlord. Yet even so, this overlord works only one hundred and twenty million mu of farmland each year, barely producing one hundred million shi of grain, just enough for twenty million peoplea€¡±that¡¯s only half of the entire population. The remaining eighteen million citizens, if they want to eat and avoid starving, must rely on importing grain from Chu State every year to meet domestic demands. Over the years, in order to support the expenses of war and immigration, we have been continuously imposing heavy taxes on the people. The local civilians produce for a year, and the court takes two-thirds, leaving only one-third to prevent them from starving. Yet even with such heavy taxation, Great Wei¡¯s annual revenue is only one hundred and fifty million silver taels. Out of these silver taels, every year, we have to spend fifty million silver taels to purchase grain for eighteen million people from Chu State, as well as for the military food required for warfare. Great Wei maintains an army of two million. With such a vast force, even without waging war, military expenses amount to one hundred and twenty million silver taels a year. If warfare is involved, an extra twenty to thirty million silver taels must be expended. And the annual salaries of government officials, expenses of the imperial court and local government offices, maintenance of roads and waterways, and compensation for soldiers killed in previous wars and other necessities, cost at least thirty million silver taels a year. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? All these expenses combined, just to maintain the status quo and without waging war, require Great Wei to spend two hundred million silver taels a year. Yet the actual annual revenue of the court is only one hundred and fifty million silver taels, resulting in an annual deficit of fifty million silver taels. Reaching this point, Wei Yang lamented deeply, ¡°As the Left Chancellor in charge of government affairs, I am fully aware of the nation¡¯s circumstances. In order to maintain the livelihoods of the court, the locales, the military, and the people, we have been desperately robbing Peter to pay Paul. Chapter 977 - Chapter 977 Chapter 405 Debate at the Wei Palace_3 ?Chapter 977: Chapter 405: Debate at the Wei Palace_3 Chapter 977: Chapter 405: Debate at the Wei Palace_3 But even so, it was merely papering over the cracks. In order to save silver taels, ¡°I¡± first cut the consolation money given to the families of soldiers who had died in battle over the years, leaving those who had sacrificed their lives for the country with insufficient clothing and food, their homes broken, and people dying, starving on the streets. Later, the military pay at the front line was further reduced, with only 70% of the assigned pay doled out each month, leaving those soldiers unable to support their families, their wives and children forced to forage for wild vegetables to fill their stomachs. Great General, you are a famous general of our nation. Tell me, is this not the situation in the army right now? What is the morale of the soldiers now that they know they risk their lives for the country, only to end up like this? Do we still have people willing to fight on the front lines?¡± Wei Yang looked at Meng Chenglin and interrogated him. The latter, facing the former¡¯s gaze, involuntarily dodged aside, not daring to confront him directly. As a great general, how could Meng Chenglin not know what kind of life the common soldiers were enduring? He had once felt angry about this, believing that the national court treated soldiers harshly, and that those corrupt officials at the rear were too much to bear; he had confronted Wei Yang about this. But it was only when the opponent showed him the account books and itemized them that Meng Chenglin realized that the court truly had no money left. So, ultimately faced with this reality, faced with the suffering of the soldiers, he could only remain silent and turn a blind eye. Seeing Meng Chenglin remain silent, Wei Yang looked towards Qiu Shiyi and asked, ¡°Xuan Xiahou, as the Right Chancellor in charge of the finances, you must also be aware that to save money, starting from five years ago, the salaries of officials at all levels in the country have been cut to just half, and last year it was even reduced to only a third. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Without their salaries, how can they support their families? In the end, isn¡¯t it the common people who suffer? Moreover, the local infrastructure such as water conservancy and roads has not been maintained for ten years. At the same time, the daily expenses of local governments and the court have been reduced wherever possible or outright denied. As a result, officials, in order to get things done, have to default on money owed to the local populace and merchants, leaving them in bitter distress. Are you unaware that officials, commoners, and merchants are already in uproar, people unable to survive turning to banditry, and local regions now rampant with thieves?¡± Wei Yang questioned again. However, unlike Meng Chenglin, Qiu Shiyi did not avoid the interrogation; instead, with a cold laugh he said, ¡°Of course, I know.¡± After speaking, he saluted the Emperor: ¡°Your Majesty, as the Left Chancellor has said, our Great Wei has run a deficit for consecutive years, and the imperial court owes untold sums to soldiers, officials, merchants, and civilians. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï The military morale is thus unsettled, local grievances are boiling, and officials are full of complaints. But it is precisely because of this that the court must agree to join Chu State and wage this Great War.¡± Qiu Shiyi¡¯s voice grew louder still: ¡°If we don¡¯t go to war, how can Great Wei resolve the threat on our western borders? If we don¡¯t address this threat from the west, how can Great Wei¡¯s Guannei and Shuofang prefectures remain peaceful? If those two prefectures are not at peace, how can we afford to maintain an army of one and a half million soldiers on our western borders year-round, let alone contemplate reducing the size of the army and cutting military spending? Without reducing the military budget, which is the most significant annual expense, how can we reverse the deficit? If we cannot reduce the number of soldiers, where will Great Wei find the robust labor force needed for production and cultivation, and how will we grow enough grain? And besides, those migrating Barbarians are not without possessions; they all come with their families and all their worldly goods. By waging war on the Barbarians in the west and winning, we can plunder their wealth for the use of the nation. Is this not money?¡± Qiu Shiyi kept firing questions, then stared at Wei Yang, asking, ¡°Have you, Left Chancellor, ever considered these things? Or do you only know how to lament that the state has no money, that the imperial court has no money, knowing only to call for the cessation of battle without considering whether it is practical for Great Wei to stop the fighting? How do you think I fare in saying this?¡± Qiu Shiyi spoke righteously and fervently, leaving Wei Yang, who was usually so articulate, at a loss for words and unable to respond. Because the opponent was indeed speaking the truth. It was not as simple as saying that Wei Country wanted a cease-fire; it was not something that could be easily achieved with just words. To accomplish this goal, it seemed necessary, just as Qiu Shiyi had said, to fight this battle in Wei Yong. At the very least, after this battle, if it were possible to inflict serious pain on and win against those Barbarians of Yong West, then without the threat of border skirmishes, Wei Country could, at a minimum, reduce the size of the army by six or seven hundred thousand, cutting down the military budget by forty to fifty million silver taels each year. This one measure alone could put an end to Wei Country¡¯s financial deficits. Moreover, the six or seven hundred thousand soldiers who would be cut, along with several hundred thousand civilian workers conscripted to serve them, could go back to their hometowns, providing an additional labor force of over a million strong to engage in production and cultivation, further alleviating Wei Country¡¯s grain pressure. Once grain production increased and was sufficient to meet domestic needs, Wei Country naturally wouldn¡¯t need to continue buying grain from Chu State. The money saved from not purchasing grain could then be put aside. With a surplus in finances, it would be possible, over time, to give full military pay, official salaries, and death compensations, to settle debts with local merchants and civilians, to re-initiate the construction and repair of roads and water conservancies, and gradually everything would get back on track. All these matters are interdependent; missing even one piece would not work. Initiating the campaign in Yong West and resolving the border threat are the start of this series of actions, and they cannot be bypassed. Faced with this reality, despite his reluctance, Wei Yang had no choice but to admit it. As Wei Yang, the Left Chancellor, was rendered speechless by the Right Chancellor Qiu Shiyi, the atmosphere became somewhat awkward. The Emperor Wei Yong, who had been watching the debate for a while, finally spoke: ¡°Alright, Uncle Wang and Right Chancellor, you are both loyal ministers of our country. Everything you do and say is for the good of Great Wei, so why must you undermine each other and get angry? I am here to be the judge; this matter is settled now.¡± Wei Yong smoothed things over and then looked at the three men: ¡°Since the three of you have come to a decision, the matter of agreeing to Chu State¡¯s request and sending troops to Wei Yong is thus decided. Great General, you are the pillar of our nation. As for which troops to dispatch for this battle, I entrust that to you. Uncle Wang, Right Chancellor, I will summon Chu¡¯s envoy tomorrow to explain this matter. The subsequent engagement and details of the alliance with Chu State and so forth will need your diligent efforts.¡± Seeing the Emperor speak this way, Wei Yang, Qiu Shiyi, and Meng Chenglin bowed together, saying, ¡°Yes, your subjects respectfully comply with the royal decree.¡± Wei Yong nodded in satisfaction, then announced the meeting adjourned and left the hall. Chapter 978 - Chapter 978 Chapter 406 Zheng Presents Soil ?Chapter 978: Chapter 406 Zheng Presents Soil Chapter 978: Chapter 406 Zheng Presents Soil The next day, inside the Wei Palace, Qinyang Hall. ¡°Diplomat Huang Yun pays his respects to the Wei Emperor.¡± In the main hall, Huang Yun was ushered in and, after introductions, he paid respects to the Wei Emperor Wei Yong seated at the head of the hall. ¡°The envoy may dispense with formalities.¡± Wei Yong examined the formidable-looking Huang Yun below him, unable to resist giving him a few extra curious looks. The reputation of the True People of the Qing and Huang factions in the higher levels of the Chu State had been well-established, and everyone knew that they had a profound connection with Emperor Chu Luyuan, and it was highly likely they were his avatars. This not-so-secret secret naturally caught a little wind and reached other states in the Nine Provinces. However, compared to those high-level individuals in the Chu State who had deep interactions with these two factions and could deeply appreciate their relationship with the Chu Emperor, other countries in the Nine Provinces were skeptical upon hearing the news, and some even scoffed at it. Avatars? Sophisticated Dao Law? Do they not see the world we live in? All those Immortal Sects of the Nine Provinces were forced by this spiritless environment to band together and ascend in retreat. Those thick-skinned, high-blooded Divine Blood Variants with millennias¡¯ worth of inheritance have been starved to death in this spiritual energy desert. Under these circumstances, you say Emperor Chu Luyuan is a powerful Cultivator, and the people of the Nine Provinces believe it. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï Because this has been personally verified by Cultivators and True People from the Dan Ding Path and Feishuang Tao. They all say Emperor Chu Luyuan is a Cultivation prodigy, profound in Cultivation, second to none compared to the Dao master of an Immortal Sect. But if you say that Emperor Chu Luyuan continued to cultivate in this spiritual energy wasteland and even made breakthroughs in Cultivation, creating eight powerful avatars, that¡¯s pushing it too far. You think I¡¯m some bumpkin from Yangzhou? Indeed, in the eyes of the old imperial aristocratic families of the Nine Provinces, no matter how powerful the Chu State currently is, it¡¯s considered countrified. No need to look further than the origins of the Emperor and his ministers to understand why. Mountain hunters, poor scholars, medicine vendors, rural landlords, rough characters from Jianghu, lowly peddlers, village farmersa€| A careful count reveals hardly any of noble birth or even rich families with a hundred years of history. To those from other empires in the Nine Provinces, a dynasty founded by people of such origins is seen as the very definition of Different Species. Which among them is not a country with a passage of a thousand years, the sovereigns not from generations of high ministers and nobles stretching back tens of thousands of years? Perhaps among their ancestors, there were even Immortals! How could these nobles, facing the rise of upstarts from the mud, possibly regard the Chu State as one of their own? ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Thus, when rumors about the True People from the Qing and Huang factions emerged from the Chu State, they were almost treated as a joke by the higher-ups of other countries. With their own lineage and fundamental strength, they simply did not believe the idea of Cultivation in the Age of Dharma Decline, considering it a lie concocted by Emperor Chu Luyuan to enhance his prestige and to fabricate legitimacy for his claim to the throne. After all, to become Emperor, if you don¡¯t bestow a few halos of the Heavenly Mandate and divine right upon yourself, why would people revere and follow you? And claiming to practice Cultivation when others cannot is a good way to highlight the unique and destined nature of Emperor Chu Luyuan, is it not? Moreover, such propaganda could also imply that Emperor Chu Luyuan¡¯s strength is formidable. Just think, the last Cultivator of the Age of Dharma Decline; simply hearing this would command immediate respect and seem quite impressive. Who would dare to disrespect the Chu Emperor, the living Cultivator in this world? Musing over these things, Wei Yong felt a twinge of envy in his heart. The last Cultivator of the Dharma Decline, eight great avatars, numerous halos to enhance one¡¯s prestigea€¡±what a formidable propaganda tool! If he possessed these, he wouldn¡¯t have to worry about his insufficient imperial authority or the precarious state of his throne. How envious! With these thoughts, as Wei Yong looked at the rough and burly figure and features of Huang Yun, he became all the more convinced that the other was not an avatar of the Chu Emperor. Over the years, relations between Chu and Wei had been excellent, with envoys sent each year to exchange courtesies and maintain contact. Those Wei Envoys who had visited Baling reported back to Wei Yong, describing the appearance of Emperor Chu Luyuan. All envoys claimed that the Chu Emperor had a majestic countenance, brimming with vigor, his visage youthful, an extraordinary man unmatched across the world. Based on the envoys¡¯ descriptions, Wei Yong even had a portrait of Emperor Chu Luyuan painted and hung in the palace, which he had often observed. And Huang Yun before him bore no resemblance to the Chu Emperor in looks or demeanor. How could someone so unrelated possibly be an avatar of the Chu Emperor? ¡®Indeed, this supposed protector True Person Huang Yun is but an Inborn Grandmaster covertly nurtured by the Chu State, kept hidden until needed, at which point one could claim him to be an avatar of the Chu Emperor, deceiving the people of the world,¡¯ Wei Yong thought, setting aside such distractions. Looking at the rudely featured face of Huang Yun, Wei Yong laughed and said, ¡°The envoy¡¯s purpose here is known to Us. Just yesterday, We discussed it with the court ministers, and We¡¯ve unanimously decided to accede to the Chu State¡¯s request. Next spring, Great Wei shall deploy a million troops, launching from the southern steppes to sweep across the barbarian lands, and meet up with the Chu forces in Yong West.¡± Upon hearing this, Huang Yun¡¯s face burst into joy, ¡°Your Majesty is righteous and keeps his word. As an envoy, I shall convey my emperor¡¯s gratitude for Your Majesty¡¯s kindness, with the wish that Great Chu and Great Wei remain friendly for generations, endless for ten thousand years.¡± Wei Yong gave a hearty laugh, ¡°The envoy speaks well. May Great Wei and Great Chu enjoy eternal friendship, with dynasties everlasting. Today, We shall host a banquet in the palace to honor the envoy from Great Chu; We hope the envoy will grace it with his presence.¡± Chapter 979 - Chapter 979 Chapter 406 Zheng Presents Soil 2 ?Chapter 979: Chapter 406 Zheng Presents Soil 2 Chapter 979: Chapter 406 Zheng Presents Soil 2 Huang Yun bowed in response, ¡°Only at your Majesty¡¯s request, dare I not obey.¡± ¡­ Baling, Chu Palace. While Huang Yun was on a mission in the Wei Palace, meeting with the Heavenly Son and Group of Ministers of Wei Country, inside the Chu Palace, Lu Yuan was also receiving a messenger from Zheng Kingdom. ¡°The messenger says that as long as Great Chu is willing to send troops to rescue, then Zheng Kingdom is willing to cede Yangxia County to us. Are these words true?¡± Lu Yuan looked at Zheng Kingdom¡¯s messenger Li Hu below him and confirmed again. ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Indeed, it was Zheng Kingdom. Just as everyone in Chu had predicted a few years earlier, during the civil unrest in Zheng Kingdom, which split into Northern and Southern Zheng, this Yuzhou Overlord, after falling into internal chaos and waging war for a period, would very likely reunite and consolidate once again, given powerful external pressures and the necessities of survival. Therefore, seven years ago, under the unceasing invasions from the Northern Tang Xu duo, pressured by the threat to its very existence, Northern Zheng actively sought out Southern Zheng with the desire to reunite with the motherland. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï And Southern Zheng, over these years, having become greatly weakened after the schism with Northern Zheng and suffering a series of defeats in the wars against Northern Zheng, Jin, Tang, and Xu States, was also struggling to get by. Thus, when Northern Zheng leaned in, the two siblings from the same root quickly came to an agreement and immediately reached a consensus on merging and returning to the fold. Zheng Empreror Zheng Lian announced that he would no longer hold Northern Zheng¡¯s Monarch and Ministers accountable for their treachery, and the monarch and ministers of Northern Zheng, in turn, relinquished their country¡¯s name and system; retaining their original rights, they returned to Zheng Kingdom. However, even though Northern and Southern Zheng had reunited, during the eight years of civil war, Northern Zheng first lost its northern two counties to Jingzhou¡¯s Tang Kingdom, and Southern Zheng lost its northeast county to Jin Country. After losing these territories, even though the Two Zhengs unified again, they were only left with the land of seven counties and a population of about twenty million, with just one million three hundred thousand soldiers, twenty-three Inborn, their strength had greatly declined. It was precisely because of this that, when faced with external threats, Zheng Kingdom had no choice but to seek help from Chu State, its ally. Li Hu nodded earnestly and replied, ¡°Reporting to Your Majesty, this matter is absolutely true. As long as Great Chu is willing to send troops to help our Zheng Kingdom repel the soldiers of Northern Tang, then our country is willing to cede the five thousand square miles of river and mountains in Yangxia County to Great Chu to express our gratitude.¡± In answering, Li Hu¡¯s heart also bled with bitterness. Truthfully, who would be willing to cede their own territory and hand it over to another country, if it were possible? But the current situation of Zheng Kingdom was so dire and perilous that not seeking outside assistance would truly risk the downfall of the nation. Since the reunification of the Two Zhengs, the pressure of the northern border, once solely borne by Northern Zheng, naturally became the responsibility of the unified new Zheng Kingdom. Then, this new Zheng Kingdom faced a vast empire that had migrated down from the north of Jingzhou, possessing three counties in southern Jing, two counties in northern Yu, a population of thirty million, two million soldiers, and thirty-two Inborn. On the eastern side of Zheng Kingdom, there was also Jin Country, retreating step by step under the pressure of a formidable enemy in the north and continuously migrating south. Jin Country¡¯s days these years have been even harder than those of Zheng Kingdom. Originally just a nation of five counties, despite having the volume of a hegemon, there are differences between a greater hegemon and a lesser one. Without a doubt, Jin Country was a lesser hegemon, and its adversary was Xu State, which occupied more than half of Liang and over ten counties. Facing such an adversary, it was natural for Jin Country to struggle. After fifteen years of conflict, Jin Country lost three counties in the north, losing sixty percent of its original territory. It was only a few years ago that, in alliance with Northern Zheng and the Northern Tang Xu duo, Jin Country had its way with Southern Zheng and, after a Great War, seized the northeastern county of Gaoyang from Southern Zheng. Thus, Jin Country now had only three counties left, barely ten million people, around seven hundred thousand soldiers, and thirteen Inborn remaining a€¡° barely maintaining the stature of a hegemon. So, in the vicinity of Zheng Kingdom today, there was Tang Country to the north, Jin Country to the northeast, both with extreme enmity towards Zheng and fiercely eager to tear flesh from Zheng Kingdom at any moment. These issues would not have been too much of a concern under normal circumstances. After all, Tang Country had Barbarians migrating south to deal with in the north, and Jin Country had Xu State in the north; both nations couldn¡¯t focus all their might against Zheng as their borders were not entirely peaceful and substantial forces had to remain to defend against enemies to the north. And the forces they could spare, the unified Zheng Kingdom could naturally handle. As such, with only the enemies from within Yuzhou to consider, Zheng Kingdom was not fearful. But the problem was precisely here. As mentioned before, five years ago, Wei Emperor Wei Yong allied with Zhao and Xu to attack Liang, but was severely defeated by Liang, with the Three Nations losing a million soldiers and their vitality severely damaged, rendering them no longer able to move south or look eastward. Liang, too, at the moment of its victorious counterattack plans, was backstabbed by Chu, cut off from supplies, and plunged into a severe famine within the country. Due to domestic unrest and lack of food, Liang Country was forced to abandon its plans to counterattack the Three Nations and reclaim its lost territories. Over the following five years, Liang Country called a halt to the war and dedicated themselves to domestic affairs, recovering production, and accumulating national Strength. Now, five years later, Liang had recovered. Not only had the issue of lack of food been resolved internally, but they also used this rare peaceful time to accumulate a reserve of money and grain, gaining a foundation that could support an army for yet another war. So, Liang Country reassembled the disbanded army and restored its military force inside the country to a scale of three million. Chapter 980 - Chapter 980 Chapter 406 Zheng Presents Soil_3 ?Chapter 980: Chapter 406 Zheng Presents Soil_3 Chapter 980: Chapter 406 Zheng Presents Soil_3 And then, he surveyed the surroundings, searching for a suitable direction for expansion. After looking around, Wei Country remained a tiger with undiminished might, second only to Liang as the second largest in the north of Jiangnan. Zhao and Xu, two countries in Central State, only held one prefecture each, and regarded their territories as their lifeblood, not only relocating the majority of their populations there. To hold onto this land, the two countries spared no effort to amass over a million soldiers and extensively fortified their defenses, creating ramparts as impregnable as a turtle shell, extremely difficult to overcome. As for Chu State to the south, it controlled the vast majority of Central State, with only a small portion of Xiangyang Prefecture. This remote corner had little significance to attack; even if Liang wished to strike, it was not certain they could overcome Chu. Thus, west, north, and southa€¡±all three directionsa€¡±were not good avenues for expansion. In contrast, the east presented a fat sheep. Firstly, with the threats of Tang and Jin to its north, Zheng Kingdom had no choice but to deploy the majority of its soldiers there, leaving the country internally hollow. Secondly, in recent years, due to external threats, both Zheng and Liang faced similar dilemmas and had an unspoken agreement not to station troops or build fortresses along their mutual border. Therefore, on the border facing Liang, apart from some old fortifications, there were hardly any new defensive structures built that year. In such circumstances, there were bound to be significant gaps in defense. Lastly, the territory Zheng Kingdom occupied was also in Central State. Unlike the lands of Chu in Yangzhou, Zheng in Ji Province, and Xu in Xuzhou, which were eventually doomed to be swallowed by natural disasters, theirs had value. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Securing territory in Yuzhou would always be profitable, regardless of the amounta€¡±it wouldn¡¯t be a loss. With all these reasons in mind, it was not surprising that, when Liang had the capability, they chose to focus their expansionist efforts towards Zheng Country in the east. And so the question arose. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Resisting both Tang and Jin, Zheng was already exhausted. Now facing Liang, a country even stronger than both Tang and Jin combined, what could Zheng use to resist? Alone, that was definitely not feasible. Therefore, if they wished to avoid annihilation, they had no choice but to seek assistance from outsiders. And looking across the Nine Provinces, in the world today, the only country both capable of contending with Liang and having the spare strength to lend a hand was Chu State in Yangzhou to the south. So how would they persuade Chu to agree to confront the powerful Liang for the sake of Zheng? The monarch and ministers of Zheng pondered hard and unanimously agreed that they could only be enticed by substantial profits, opting for the strategy of leading the disaster eastward. Since their western territories were bound to be unsafe and could hardly be defended, it was better to proactively offer this land to a strong country with which they had a good relationship, one that also did not share a border with them and therefore posed no significant threat, yet possessed enough strength to stop Liang. With this logic in mind, there was the scene of Zheng envoys coming to discuss the cession of territory with Lu Yuan. Indeed, Zheng¡¯s objective was not really to ask Chu to help them fend off Tang¡¯s invasion. Despite Tang¡¯s strength, Zheng could handle them alone without needing to cede territory and ask for aid. So, what Zheng said about ceding Yangxia County once Tang was repelled was a foregone conclusion from the start. This county was basically a gift to Chu, and the request for aid was merely a cover. Zheng¡¯s real purpose was to invite Chu to block Liang, and they did not hesitate to offer up Yangxia County, which bordered Liang to their west, all to create a buffer to their west and place Chu between Zheng and Liang. If Chu agreed, they would certainly gain a county for nothing. But once they enjoyed the benefits, they would have to bear the resentment of being snatched from the tiger¡¯s mouth and the pressure from Liang in the future on their own. Zheng, meanwhile, could be freed from the immense defensive pressure from the west and focus on threats from the north, significantly reducing the pressure they faced. From this perspective, it wasn¡¯t a bad deal. Well, provided they were unaware that Chu had already commenced plans to eliminate Liang and Wei, there indeed wouldn¡¯t be an issue. But given Chu indeed had such plans¡­ ¡®Is this like someone bringing me a pillow as I¡¯m about to doze off?¡¯ Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but think this after hearing Li Hu¡¯s words. He was preparing to attack Liang, and Zheng just offered Chu an excellent opportunity to march. A territory not bordering Chua€¡±an enclave, from which Chu would normally have no reason to act against Liang¡¯s eastern frontiera€¡±could indeed catch Liang off guard. Furthermore, through military actions in Zheng¡¯s Yangxia County, Chu could further conceal its internal troop movements to confuse Liang. After all, should Chu accept Zheng¡¯s invitation and take Yangxia County, a confrontation with Liang would be inevitable. And to secure this newly acquired territory, Chu would naturally need to station a considerable force there, far from its homeland. For this reason, Chu¡¯s domestic recruitment of soldiers and transport of supplies would seem justifiable. Even Chu¡¯s army could outright use the slogan of fighting against Lianga€¡±after all, if they were heading to Yangxia, who else but Liang would be the enemy! Chu¡¯s true intentions could be hidden behind two major moves: responding to the Wei army in Yong West and occupying Yangxia County at Zheng¡¯s request. Without knowledge of Chu¡¯s real plans, both Wei and Liang would only react based on these overt actions. Because who would suspect that Chu, a country seen by others as having only the second greatest strength, would dare to strike at the two strongest nations, ranked first and third in the current era? That would be crazy. Unless one is mad, why would anyone do that? Were Chu¡¯s monarch and ministers mad? To outsiders, they certainly weren¡¯t; on the contrary, they were seen as extremely wise and Shenwu, having built this grand empire. Well, at this point, the logic has become a closed loop. Chapter 981 - Chapter 981 Chapter 407 The Six Major Military Expeditions ?Chapter 981: Chapter 407: The Six Major Military Expeditions Chapter 981: Chapter 407: The Six Major Military Expeditions ¡®I suppose when the real purpose of Great Chu is revealed, the world will surely be shocked.¡¯ As Lu Yuan thought this, he looked down at Zheng¡¯s diplomat Li Hu, who had just finished stating his purpose and was nervously looking at him, and said with a smile, ¡°Since Zheng Kingdom is so warm-hearted, and our two countries have always been on good terms, now that your country is in difficulty, Great Chu naturally cannot sit idly by. I agree to dispatch troops.¡± Upon hearing this, Li Hu was overjoyed and hurriedly said his thanks, ¡°Thank you, Your Majesty. The grace of Great Chu¡­¡± ¡°Eh, I haven¡¯t finished speaking yet.¡± Lu Yuan interrupted Li Hu and then said solemnly, ¡°Yangxia County is, after all, far from the heartland of Great Chu. It is inconvenient for me to transport food and supplies there. Therefore, if Zheng Kingdom desires the aid of Great Chu¡¯s troops, you must first stockpile enough supplies in Yangxia County for one million soldiers to use for half a year. That way, my army won¡¯t risk running short of supplies. Messenger, what do you think? Can Zheng Kingdom agree to my demand?¡± Facing the stern gaze of the Chu Emperor, Li Hu felt pressured, but considering that he had already offered up an entire county, the sacrifice was already substantial. The supplies for a million men for half a year were indeed vast, but they were essential for confronting the people of Liang. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã? After all, one can¡¯t invite people to put on a show and then expect them to bring their own provisions, right? Chu State isn¡¯t that kind of a sap! With this thought, Li Hu finally made up his mind and looked up, ¡°Your Majesty, I agree to this demand on behalf of my country.¡± Lu Yuan revealed a smile upon hearing this, ¡°The envoy is magnanimous. Tonight, I will hold a feast in the palace, and Li Qing, you must enjoy yourself to the fullest.¡± Having completed his mission, Li Hu also relaxed quite a bit, and faced with the Chu Emperor¡¯s invitation, he showed a smile, ¡°As an outside official, I gratefully accept. Thank you, Your Majesty.¡± That night, both in the north in Chang¡¯an Wei Palace and in the south in Baling Chu Palace, there was ceaseless singing and dancing, with all guests and hosts thoroughly enjoying themselves. ¡­ Lu Yuan¡¯s actions were swift. After hosting a banquet for the Zheng envoy Li Hu, the next day, he had Sun Siwen, who served as the Prime Minister, continue discussing more details of the cooperation with the other side. As for himself, he sought out Zhou Qing to discuss the matter with the Grand General. Deep within the forest path, sunlight filtered through the gaps of leaves and branches, casting a golden radiance in the woods. Lu Yuan walked on the cobblestone path in the hills with Zhou Qing following behind. He said, ¡°I have decided to dispatch a detached army to Zheng¡¯s Yangxia County to draw the attention of Liang and support our forces on the Yangtze Battlefield to the south.¡± ¡°Your Majesty¡­¡± Just as Zhou Qing began to speak, Lu Yuan interrupted, ¡°Today, we¡¯re only mentor and apprentice discussing matters. I won¡¯t refer to myself as ¡®We¡¯, and you don¡¯t need to call me Emperor. This is why I chose to talk here. Xiaoqing, I still prefer when you call me Master.¡± Looking at the respected elder in front of him, Zhou Qing felt as if he had returned to fifty years before, when he and his Master were still in Changning. His heart warmed, and he nodded, ¡°Yes, Master.¡± Lu Yuan nodded with satisfaction, ¡°That¡¯s more like it.¡± Since becoming emperor, he had come to increasingly understand the meaning of solitude. The courtiers, palace maids, eunuchs, concubines, and even the Empress and his own children all revered Lu Yuan more than they expressed affection. Everything seemed to revolve around power and interests, with endless scheming. In the entire Chu State, or rather, in the whole world, the only ones who still treated him with their original hearts were Zhou Qing and Sun Siwen, who had risen from obscurity with him and had helped him reach this day. Therefore, Lu Yuan always cherished these two friends and apprentices. Except for maintaining the dignity of the emperor in public, he always tried to allow them to call him by his name or Master in private, without distinguishing between master and servant. His aim was to preserve this true affection without letting it become tainted with anything else. Though he felt a bit melancholic, Lu Yuan¡¯s Dao heart was firm. For the sake of the great cause and the Immortal Method, he quickly refocused, then asked, ¡°Now, tell me what you think.¡± ¡°Yes, Master.¡± Zhou Qing nodded and then said, ¡°Apprentice thinks that since we will be sending troops to Yangxia County, we must prioritize elite and strong generals. Yangxia County, located in Yuzhou, is an exclave of Great Chu, hanging isolated across the sea. If anything happens there, we fundamentally cannot respond in time to provide support from our homeland. Although we have the support of Zheng for the time being, temporarily solving the supply consumption for the expeditionary army, they have only guaranteed supplies for a million people for half a year; with Zheng¡¯s national strength, they can provide no more. And while Great Chu¡¯s real purpose in deploying troops is to draw the attention of Liang, causing their focus and forces to be diverted to the east and neglect the Southern Territory border, this creates an opportunity for our army to cross the Yangtze for the Northern Expedition. Once this purpose is revealed, and Wei and Liang are being defeated by us, won¡¯t the rest of the Nine Provinces feel fear and panic? Under the principle of ¡®When the lips are gone, the teeth will be cold,¡¯ Zheng, even if not turning from friend to enemy, won¡¯t provide any more help should they choose to attack our forces in Yangxia County. At that point, the million-strong army far in Yuzhou will be surrounded by enemies, with everything depending on themselves. By then, relying on just the land of Yangxia County, it will be impossible to supply too many armies, even if the forces here manage to gain some victories, just maintaining their own consumption would be the limit. Therefore, to ensure the safety of the forces on this path, the expeditionary soldiers must be the elite, those who can endure hardship and sustain long battles. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï The generals must be brave, competent, and good at fighting tough battles. Otherwise, it will not be sufficient to support the situation in Yangxia County.¡± Zhou Qing presented his opinion: elite troops and strong generals, capable of withstanding the rigors of war. After listening, Lu Yuan fell into thought and after a while said, ¡°What you¡¯ve said makes sense. The situation in Yangxia County is indeed unsuitable for too many people. And to maintain sufficient combat strength there, we will need to select the elite as well.¡± Chapter 982 - Chapter 982 Chapter 407 The Six Major Military Expeditions_2 ?Chapter 982: Chapter 407: The Six Major Military Expeditions_2 Chapter 982: Chapter 407: The Six Major Military Expeditions_2 ¡°Let¡¯s do this,¡± ¡°Among the three million veteran soldiers we have in the nation, I will allocate one million to establish a separate Yangxia Expeditionary Army, with Huang Xuan as the Camp Commander.¡± ¡°At the same time, in addition to the ¡®True Persons¡¯ commanding various military forces, five of your disciples, along with Shen Qiu, Yin Huixuan, Shangguan Ming, and other generals from the Jiangdong faction, will be placed under Huang Xuan¡¯s direct command.¡± ¡°With this arrangement, the camp will have nineteen Inborn Grandmasters and above.¡± The newly established Yangxia Expeditionary Army, with Huang Xuan as the Camp Commander, needs no further mention. As Lu Yuan¡¯s first avatar, although he views it no differently than his other avatarsa€¡±all extensions of his own willa€¡± in the eyes of the world, this old general who contributed to the Southwestern Barbarian campaigns, expanded Hegu County, shone brilliantly at the Battle of Chu and Ning with successive defeats of Ning Army, captured Yuzhang Prefecture, and played a crucial role in laying the foundation for Chu State¡¯s subsequent victory, also stationed in Jiangdong for decades, is indeed one of Chu¡¯s most famous generals. Comparable to Qingyunzi, who launched a surprise attack to take Hanzhong, led the army to annihilate Nanhai Country, seized Jian¡¯an County; Huang Xin, who pacified Yong West, commanded the Snow Plains Tribes, subdued Western Liang, and defended Hanzhong for decades, repeatedly defeating the northwestern Barbariansa€¡± These three are universally recognized as Chu¡¯s greatest generals after Emperor Chu Luyuan himself, each with the accomplishments of having destroyed nations. Lu Yuan¡¯s reason for dispatching Huang Xuan was not because of his abilities; in fact, except for their combat strength, all of his avatars had similar wisdom. It was the reputation of Huang Xuan in the hearts of outsiders that he was using. Just imagine, if Chu State were to deploy a legendary general of the age, would Liang Country dare not take it seriously? Beyond Huang Xuan, the subordinates arranged for him by Lu Yuan were also not to be underestimated. His five top disciples need no introduction; these old generals had been personally trained by him and fought alongside him for fifty years. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Setting aside their personal combat strength, leading troops into battle would certainly pose no issue. As for Shen Qiu and Yin Huixuan, one was the former lord of Ning Country, the other the former number one figure in the Jiangnan martial arts world; their status was definitely first-class. Their strength was already at the Second Realm of Inborn, placing them among the top-tier of the current era. Even Shangguan Ming, a fifty-year veteran Inborn, would not be lacking in strength. As an old general seasoned in warfare, his leadership was not to be underestimated. Lu Yuan, by allocating these individuals to the Yangxia main camp and adding one million veterans, was making an extremely strong arrangement. Zhou Qing, also aware of the formidable setup, nodded upon hearing the plan, ¡°With these veteran strong generals, the Yangxia Expeditionary Army should have no problems.¡± Lu Yuan smiled, ¡°Not only that, if the monarch and ministers of Liang Country in the north hear the details of our Yangxia main camp, they will probably have difficulty sleeping at night, keeping close vigil over the eastern front.¡± Zhou Qing hesitated, ¡°What does Master mean?¡± Lu Yuan said indifferently, ¡°Since the initial intention of establishing the Yangxia main camp is to draw the attention of Liang¡¯s forces, it must play its expected role. In a few days, once the camp¡¯s personnel has been fully deployed, and troops have arrived and settled in Yangxia County,¡± we can release the news of the camp at the right time, to inform those from Liang.¡± Zhou Qing nodded, ¡°Yes, disciple will arrange for someone to handle it when the time comes.¡± ¡°I¡¯ll leave it to you,¡± Lu Yuan said casually, then continued, ¡°The matter of the Yangxia main camp is settled. With one of the original five major camps established, there are four more to arrange. However, recent messages from Huang Yun and Li Liang, who I sent on a diplomatic mission to Wei Country, indicate that Wei¡¯s strength in the west is significantly more formidable than we had initially predicted¡­¡± He shared what Huang Yun observed, the fierce local citizens of Wei Country, with Zhou Qing briefly, then said, ¡°To sum it up, the troops Wei can mobilize in the west are not just the 150,000 or even 225,000 soldiers we originally thought, but could reach three million. Given this, the troops we had originally planned for Hanzhong are now somewhat inadequate to respond to the situation in Guannei and Shuofang.¡± The originally planned Hanzhong Detached Army was just a part of Wei Country¡¯s military operations, with its forces comprising only 200,000 soldiers and 800,000 civilian workers, along with five Inborn individualsa€¡±its strength was not particularly strong. It was merely a supplementary element of the Wei-annihilation plan, not the main force. But now, as more intelligence on Wei Country has come in, the original plan has become disconnected from practical needs, and must be revised and supplemented. Moreover, the disciple Han Shun originally destined for Hanzhong is now decided to be redeployed to Yangxia County, which also requires timely arrangements. Lu Yuan expressed his intentions and then continued, ¡°Now, when the Yangxia main camp only needs elite troops and strong generals, the two million civilian workers that were to be assigned to them are now available. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? There are also the 200,000 soldiers that have become spare.¡± ¡°I plan to assign these 200,000 soldiers, along with 1.2 million civilian workers, to Huang Xin, to set up another Expeditionary Army, with him as the Camp Commander, responsible for establishing the Hanzhong Expeditionary Army. Send five more Inborn Grandmasters there.¡± With this, the Hanzhong Expeditionary Army will have 400,000 soldiers, two million civilian workers, and ten Inborns, enough to take on the responsibility of a military front.¡± For Wei¡¯s eastern frontier in Henan and Nanyang Counties, the Heyang Expeditionary Army will be established, with Qingyunzi as the Camp Commander. The army will be assigned one million soldiers, two million civilian workers, and nineteen Inborn Grandmasters, complementing the Hanzhong Expeditionary Army from east and west, cooperating specifically to eliminate Wei.¡± With the Yangxia Expeditionary Army drawing Liang¡¯s firepower, and the Hanzhong and Heyang Expeditionary Armies focused on defeating Wei, three of the six major military Expeditions for Chu¡¯s Northern Expedition have been established.¡± Chapter 983 - Chapter 983 Chapter 407 The Six Major Military Expeditions_3 ?Chapter 983: Chapter 407: The Six Major Military Expeditions_3 Chapter 983: Chapter 407: The Six Major Military Expeditions_3 ¡®The Yangxia Expeditionary Army has one million soldiers, with nineteen Inborns. The Hanzhong Expeditionary Army has four hundred thousand soldiers and two million civilian workers, with ten Inborns. The Heyang Expeditionary Army has one million soldiers and two million civilian workers, with nineteen Inborns. Like this, that makes two million four hundred thousand soldiers, four million civilian workers, and forty-eight Inborns.¡¯ After listening to his master¡¯s arrangements, Zhou Qing slowly calculated the numbers of troops to be mobilized in his mind, then said, ¡°Master, if so, after arranging these three camps, Great Chu would still have three million six hundred thousand soldiers, eight million civilian workers, and sixty-seven Inborn Grandmasters unassigned.¡± ¡°Yes, those people are still available.¡± Lu Yuan nodded: ¡°These people, I plan to divide into three route expeditionary armies: west, central, and east. The western expeditionary army, led by Huang Lin as the Camp Commander, will have one million two hundred thousand soldiers, two million civilian workers, and twenty Inborns. Their responsibility will be to cross the river from Jiangxia Prefecture of Liang State, move northward, take on the task of capturing Liang¡¯s Jiangxia, Xingyang, and Jiying counties, and seize its eastern borders. Once they have captured the whole of Liang¡¯s east, the army will station there to defend against troops from Wei and Zhao in the west and north directions. The central expeditionary army will be led by me personally as the Commander, with one million six hundred thousand soldiers, two million five hundred thousand civilian workers, and twenty-five Inborns. The eastern expeditionary army will be led by Qingxuanzi as the Camp Commander, with eight hundred thousand soldiers, one million five hundred thousand civilian workers, and fifteen Inborns. Initially, the central and eastern expeditionary armies will cross the river together from Guangling Prefecture, taking advantage of the opportunity when Liang¡¯s main force is drawn to the Yangxia Expeditionary Army and its southern territory and interior are left empty, to quickly capture Liang¡¯s three prefectures north of the river and the East Sea County. After this, the two expeditionary armies will split up. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 The eastern expeditionary army will continue eastward, along the way capturing Liang¡¯s southern and southeastern counties such as Chengyang, Rencheng, Yingling, and Jiaodong, striving to clear the way to Yuzhou¡¯s Yangxia County and meet up with the main camp led by Huang Xuan. As for me, I will continue to lead the main force of the central route north to attack Liang County, strike at the great city of Liang in Jingji, draw their main force back to defend it, and threaten their central and northern counties. At the same time, I will hold there, waiting for the eastern route and Yangxia forces to join up before leading the troops to encircle from behind and eradicate Liang¡¯s last remaining forces near the great city, thus extinguishing their Altars of Soil and Grain and dynasty.¡± Lu Yuan expounded his plan for the annihilation of Liang, which he had been contemplating these days. The strategy encompassed four directional campaigns, including luring the tiger away from the mountain, avoiding the strong and striking the weak, coordination from all sides, penetrating directly into the heart, targeting critical points, and extended detours. It could be said that he had pushed his military style, the advantage of his avatars, and the Chu army¡¯s strengths in maneuvers to the utmost. Otherwise, such a complex plan and massive troop deployment couldn¡¯t be handled by just anyone. Lu Yuan was able to manage it because of Great Chu¡¯s fifty years of military development achievements, his rich experience in commanding troops, and the most important factor, his Immortal cultivation technique that allowed the creation of avatars. It was Immortal cultivation combined with military strategy that formed the core of this huge troop deployment. This Immortal technique, can ordinary people manage it? Zhou Qing, having listened to his master¡¯s plan, could not help but admire and said, ¡°If we act according to this plan, Liang State is doomed.¡± Faced with Lu Yuan¡¯s series of combination blows and millions of troops exerting their strength together, if they indeed could achieve coordination and combine forces, then truly no one in the world could withstand it. Liang State would not be able to cope. Even Great Chu, which initiated this plan without preparing defenses, if someone were to use the same tactics on them, would also struggle. However, after Zhou Qing¡¯s admiration, he still felt somewhat unconvinced and asked, ¡°Master, aside from the arrangements made above, there are still two million civilian workers and seven Inborns left. Are we not going to use these people?¡± Lu Yuan smiled upon hearing this and said, ¡°I temporarily do not wish to use these people. Instead, I plan to leave them within the country. During these days, I thought some more; extracting millions of soldiers and over a hundred Inborns from the country almost empties it. Initially, only fourteen Inborns remained for domestic defense, along with some local prefecture and county soldiers and militia, which is far too weak for defense. It¡¯s really difficult to thoroughly defend all critical areas in the southwest, Lingnan, Hanzhong, the coastal regions of the east, and the central heartland of the country. Therefore, I plan to leave a general in charge, leading the remaining six Inborns, plus the original fourteen Inborns, for a total of twenty-one people, to stay within the country and defend our old home. At the same time, I will train the remaining two million civilian workers, organizing them according to the requirements of local prefecture and county soldiers, to strengthen the country¡¯s defense. Thus, although this will further increase the logistical burden, it can secure our rear, and such a cost is bearable.¡± As he said this, Lu Yuan looked at Zhou Qing and said, ¡°This position of the general staying behind to defend the country is crucial and must be entrusted to a trusted confidant. I want you to take over this duty, Xiaoqing, would you be willing?¡± Zhou Qing was silent for a moment, then nodded: ¡°Your disciple is willing and swears to guard Great Chu for the master.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan showed a smile, patted the shoulder of his eldest disciple, and said, ¡°I know letting you opt out of the Northern Expedition, without the chance to earn military merits, is somewhat unfair to you. Rest assured, after we have annihilated Liang and Wei, I will let you lead an army to personally extinguish a state and make your mark.¡± Zhou Qing shook his head: ¡°Master, you know your disciple. I do not care about such empty honors. In this life, my only wish is for Great Chu to flourish and for the world to find peace.¡± Lu Yuan laughed heartily: ¡°Well said, truly worthy of being my proudest eldest disciple. Such breadth of spirit and magnanimity befit the heroes of the world.¡± ¡­ Months later. In the fortieth year of Shenwu, autumn, the ninth month. After months of preparation and posturing, the controversy over the Zheng Kingdom ceding land to Chu State finally reached a conclusion. Facing protests from Liang State, Chu State still dispatched troops to Yangxia. furthermore, they appointed the renowned general Huang Xuan to organize the Yangxia Expeditionary Army right within the ceded territory of Yangxia County, leading a force of a million to threaten the eastern border of Liang. The court of Liang State felt deeply uneasy about this. Therefore, the Emperor of Liang ordered the formation of a Jiaodong Expeditionary Army, also amassing a force of a million soldiers, to stand off against Chu¡¯s Yangxia Expeditionary Army. For a time, both Chu and Liang were enveloped in the scent of rising war, with a major conflict seemingly on the verge of breaking out. The Nine Provinces of the world were also stirred by the standoff between the first and second greatest powers of the era, with the clouds of war looming ominously. Chu State¡¯s Northern Expedition had officially begun. Chapter 984 - Chapter 984 Chapter 408 Chu Emperor, a Military Immortal too ?Chapter 984: Chapter 408: Chu Emperor, a Military Immortal too Chapter 984: Chapter 408: Chu Emperor, a Military Immortal too Yuzhou, Xinzheng City. Within the Zheng Kingdom¡¯s imperial palace, Emperor Zheng Lian received news that Chu and Liang were confronting each other in Yangxia County and Jiaodong County and could engage in battle at any moment. He immediately summoned a group of ministers. ¡°Good, very good!¡± In the study, Zheng Lian¡¯s face showed excitement as he paced back and forth. ¡°Chu State and Liang going to war, the borders of Yuqing engulfed in flames. As long as Chu¡¯s million-strong army is not wiped out, Liang shall never dream of invading our Zheng Kingdom again.¡± ¡°Your servant congratulates Your Majesty! With Chu State as our shield, our great Zheng¡¯s western borders will henceforth be without worry.¡± ¡°Chu State entering the trap is all thanks to His Majesty¡¯s schemes. We had our doubts before, but now we truly feel ashamed.¡± ¡°Of course, His Majesty is the Heavenly Son, with extraordinary intellecta€¡±how could we mere mortals compare?¡± In the room, a group of Zheng Lian¡¯s close ministers began to sing his praises astutely. Upon hearing this, Zheng Lian couldn¡¯t help but feel somewhat elated. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï However, at this moment, Zheng Chan, the royal uncle and holder of power, frowned and said, ¡°Your Majesty, with Chu and Liang at war, leading disaster eastward, it is indeed a joy for our great Zheng. But Chu¡¯s camp commander in Yangxia, Huang Xuan, has sent people to Xinzheng in the past few days, pressuring us to deliver ten million bushels of grain and fodder. Chu¡¯s army is insatiable and truly difficult to deal with.¡± Someone beside him asked, ¡°Didn¡¯t we already provide them with half a year¡¯s supplies and provisions for their million-strong army? Why is Chu¡¯s army still asking for grain?¡± Previously, Zheng envoy Li Hu, to persuade Chu State to accept Zheng Kingdom¡¯s terms, agreed to Lu Yuan¡¯s request for Zheng Kingdom to provide initial supplies and provisions for the Chu army stationed in Yangxia County. That is the consumption for half a year of a million-strong army. This batch of supplies roughly included five million bushels of grain and fodder, ten million arrows, one hundred thousand bowstrings, ten thousand sets of armor, two hundred thousand each of swords, spears, sabers, and halberds, as well as ten million silver tales as reward money. Honestly, this expenditure was already quite large, almost one-third of Zheng Kingdom¡¯s treasury at that time. Not everyone is Chu, resting and rekindling for thirty years, with overflowing treasuries, and so much money and grain they can¡¯t spend it all. Like other states in the Nine Provinces, Zheng had been waging wars for over a decade, or even decades, and its remaining wealth was meager, not affluent. Allocating these supplies was already like cutting flesh from their bones. However, faced with the formidable pressure from Liang, the monarch and ministers of Zheng Kingdom, for the safety of the western borders, still gritted their teeth and bore this expenditure. But now it seems, less than a month has passed, with Chu and Liang still in a standoff, the war not yet begun, and Chu¡¯s army is already crying poverty and turning to us for a shakedown? Zheng Chan said, ¡°Your Majesty, Chu¡¯s army excuses that they have conscripted fifty thousand civilian workers in Yangxia County. To ensure these workers and their families have enough to eat, they need our country to provide another ten million bushels of grain. That Huang Xuan also said those workers and citizens of Yangxia County are also our Zheng people. As the lord of the Zheng people, Your Majesty surely wouldn¡¯t ignore the livelihood of your own subjects, right?¡± Zheng Lian¡¯s expression soured slightly, ¡°Initially, when Zheng wanted to relocate these citizens, Chu State was unwilling. Now, they are using these excuses and citizens to coerce usa€¡±it¡¯s infuriating!¡± In the beginning, when Zheng Kingdom spoke of ceding Yangxia County, they meant only the land, not including the citizens atop it. After all, the current situation of Zheng Kingdom is quite precarious, with only seven counties left and a population of about twenty million. Now about to lose one more county, the territory will shrink even further. Despite being a border region, Yangxia County has a population of two to two million three hundred thousand, which already accounts for one-ninth of the total population. To send so many people to Chu State at once, Zheng Kingdom was naturally reluctant. But Chu¡¯s demands were clear-cut: they wanted not only the land but also the people. ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Otherwise, with a million Chu soldiers arriving in Yangxia County, they would be greeted by desolation, with not a soul to be seen for thousands of miles. In such a place, what would they eat or drink, or use? So, the people of this county simply couldn¡¯t be relocated; they had to stay to serve the million-strong Chu army. Honestly, this was quite reasonable and necessary to supply the consumption of the million Chu soldiers. Therefore, after deliberation, the monarch and ministers of Zheng, grinding their teeth, eventually agreed to this decision. But who could have imagined that their concession at the time would become an excuse for Chu¡¯s army to come demanding more? ¡°The Chu people are truly the epitome of shamelessness. This autumn, Yangxia County had a bountiful harvest, they could collect up to four million bushels of grain by taxing the county alone. Including what we gave them, even with the additional consumption of fifty thousand conscripted civilian workers, it would be enough for a year¡¯s sustenance.¡± Zheng Kingdom¡¯s Grand Minister of Agriculture, in charge of finances, indignantly said, ¡°Now they¡¯re asking for more grain, when we ourselves don¡¯t have enough; how could there be surplus to give them?¡± Zheng Chan sighed, ¡°But those Chu people threaten that if they don¡¯t receive the grain and fodder, they will withdraw their troops and let the Liang forces come through. Our bringing in Chu State has seriously offended Liang. If Liang truly comes, then our great Zheng may face the peril of destruction.¡± The Grand Minister of Agriculture snorted coldly, ¡°Yangxia County is such prime territory; if the Chu were really willing to give it up, they wouldn¡¯t have come in the first place.¡± Zheng Chan shook his head, ¡°Although that¡¯s true, we still rely on Chu State and should not offend them too greatly for now.¡± ¡°Enough.¡± Zheng Lian interrupted the quarrel and then asked, ¡°Holder of power, I remember Chu State being wealthy, always first in the world. They¡¯ve been at peace for thirty years, with overflowing treasuries; they should not be in need of money and grain, so why would they resort to such tactics to demand grain from our Zheng Kingdom?¡± Zheng Chan gave a bitter smile, ¡°Your Majesty, although Chu State is affluent, there are reports that south of Yangzhou, subterranean fires have erupted. Many of the Barbarians, forced by these fires, have begun to migrate north in frenzy. Chapter 985 - Chapter 985 Chapter 408 Chu Emperor, a Military Immortal too_2 ?Chapter 985: Chapter 408: Chu Emperor, a Military Immortal too_2 Chapter 985: Chapter 408: Chu Emperor, a Military Immortal too_2 Therefore, since the beginning of this year, there has been a large-scale migration of civilians from the southwest and Lingnan, moving them northward. This migration is expected to involve no less than ten million people. Meanwhile, in Hanzhong to the northwest, Chu State is said to be preparing to deploy over a million troops to join forces with Wei Country and sweep through the Barbarian tribes of Yong West. To ensure the supply of this million-strong army, at least another million civilian workers will be needed. This will result in the consumption of several more millions of people. Just these two measures will require Chu State to provide for the food and money consumption of over ten million, or even twenty million people. Now they must also ensure the supply of the Yangxia County army. One would suppose that even the wealth of Chu State might be nearing its limits. Perhaps it is for this reason that the Chu army has been trying to get grain supplies from our country.¡± Zheng Chan shared his speculation. ¡°The consumption of twenty million people?¡± Zheng Lian murmured this number, which was greater than the entire population of his own country, feeling a mix of admiration for Chu State¡¯s strength and understanding of its difficulties. Dealing with the consumption of so many people at once would be too much for even Chu State, he feared. Thinking this way, he then said to Zheng Chan, ¡°Governor, we, Zheng Kingdom, can agree to Chu Army¡¯s request. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?0 ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï However, ten million bushels of grain is too mucha€¡±I also need to provide for my own army and people and cannot give them that much. I can give no more than three million bushels to Chu State, and this will be the last time. You may convey my decision to Huang Xuan. If he is still not satisfied, let them withdraw their troops. The people of Liang may be fearsome, but not as much as a gluttonous and insatiable monster. Zheng Kingdom would rather face the people of Liang than the latter.¡± Zheng Lian spoke with firmness, obviously not willing to be taken advantage of forever. The amount he was preparing to give was already his limit. People do have their own tempers, after all. ¡°Yes.¡± Hearing the emperor¡¯s orders, Zheng Chan saluted and responded, ¡°Your servant will certainly convey your message to the Chu army and try my best to persuade them.¡± Zheng Lian nodded, ¡°Then I¡¯ll leave it in the governor¡¯s hands.¡± ¡­ At the junction of Yu and Qing, the front line of Yangxia and Jiaodong. The early morning fog was thick as more than ten Liang soldiers clad in green armor rode their steeds up a hilltop. ¡°Is that the camp of the Chu army?¡± Yan Yunqing reined in his horse and gazed into the distance. Several miles away, on the vast plains, a seemingly endless camp spread out. From afar, it resembled a gigantic beast, inspiring fear in those who looked upon it. He couldn¡¯t help but express his admiration, ¡°Their organization is strict, patrols are methodical, providing no obvious weaknesses. Huang Xuan indeed deserves his reputation as a famous world general. With such military discipline, defeating them will be difficult. The Chu army is truly a formidable opponent for our great Liang!¡± Someone nearby heard this and retorted with dissatisfaction, ¡°Why should the Grand General hold the Chu people in such high regard? Five years ago, you led an army of a million to crush the allied forces of Wei, Zhao, and Xu, numbering several millions. In the battle at Longyuan, you frightened the Three Nations. If it were not for Chu¡¯s treacherous betrayal, cutting off our supply lines, you would have already led our forces to conquer the Three Nations. Huang Xuan has only ever picked on the insignificant figures of Jiangnana€¡±his military achievements are merely mediocre. How could he compare to the Grand General who has defeated the heroes of the Nine Provinces? Yet even such a man is hailed as a famous general. The socalled famous generals of Jiangnan are only so much.¡± Five years ago, when the combined forces of over two million from Wei, Zhao, and Xu invaded, Liang was already exhausted from prolonged warfare. On top of that, having too many places to defend had greatly diluted their military strength. In the end, they were only able to gather an army of a million to face off against them. The situation was extremely dire; the nation¡¯s survival hung by a thread. It was then that Yan Yunqing rose to the challenge, accepting the heavy responsibility of leading the troops against the enemy. He took command of a million-strong army to resist the more than two million soldiers from Wei, Zhao, and Xu. After careful study, Yan Yunqing surmised that the Three Nations had differing interests and harbored their own scheming, which would inevitably lead to flaws in their cooperation. Thus, he boldly adopted the strategy of luring the enemy deep into his territory and defeating them in detail. Taking advantage of the Wei Emperor¡¯s eagerness to quickly gain military fame, Yan Yunqing enticed the Wei Army to separate from the main allied forces, leading to them advancing deep into the territory of Liang, specifically Xingyang County¡¯s Longyuan. There, he chose to face the Wei Army in a decisive battle. The Wei troops advanced quickly but were weary. Facing the well-rested Liang forces, they stood no chance. Eventually, they were decimated in battle, with tens of thousands of Wei soldiers perishing in Longyuan, and Liang emerged victoriously. Subsequently, the triumphant Liang army pursued the retreating Wei forces, advancing towards the camp areas of the Zhao and Xu armies. These two nations¡¯ armies were first shocked by the news of the great defeat of the Wei forces, and then swept away by the routed soldiers from Wei, leading to a complete collapse in morale and a loss of will to fight to the death. Under the fierce onslaught of the Liang army, they too abandoned their camps and fled with the Wei soldiers. In this manner, the formidable force of over two million from Wei, Zhao, and Xu was crushed by the million-strong army led by Yan Yunqing, with over a million perishing. The Three Nations were thus greatly weakened and could no longer challenge Liang. Based on this battle, Yan Yunqing cemented his reputation as a famous world general and became a sought-after figure both in Liang and across the entire Nine Provinces. To be honest, compared to this rising star, Huang Xuan¡¯s military achievements and fame indeed fall short by more than a notch. No wonder there were those among Yan Yunqing¡¯s subordinates who felt indignant upon hearing his praise for Huang Xuan. ¡°Alright, although I have the trust of His Majesty and the assistance of my comrades, resulting in some fame and being called a famous general, I am well aware of my limitations and dare not become complacent and start looking down on the rest of the world.¡± On hearing his subordinate¡¯s words, Yan Yunqing shook his head: ¡°Chu State rose from obscurity, and during that time, they subdued and defeated the various forces of Jiangnan and Yangzhou, successively annihilated over ten large and small nations, overcame the hegemon Zhou Ning, and subdued millions of soldiers to build their present foundation. Chapter 986 - Chapter 986 Chapter 408 Chu Emperor, a Military Immortal too_3 ?Chapter 986: Chapter 408: Chu Emperor, a Military Immortal too_3 Chapter 986: Chapter 408: Chu Emperor, a Military Immortal too_3 ¡°` A war state established amidst such carnage, how could its founding general be anything but remarkable? You must know, the Chu Emperor from Jiangnan was also a famous general. He became renowned earlier than I, revered by the world forty years ago. In terms of military knowledge, there¡¯s no one in the world that surpasses him. To be a great general under such a person, one must truly possess genuine skill. Isn¡¯t it telling enough that Chu Emperor sent Huang Xuan to Yangxia, showing the might of the opposing Chu generals?¡± Yan Yunqing looked at his subordinates with a meaningful expression and said. Upon hearing his words, everyone¡¯s expression turned solemn, their demeanor becoming more respectful. Even the person who had spoken earlier fell silent. It wasn¡¯t because Yan Yunqing¡¯s eloquence was so outstanding that he could unify the thoughts of many in an instant. Rather, the person he referred to carried far too much weight. If someone were to question the titles of famous general like Huang Xuan or many other great Chu generals based on their military achievements, plenty of people would come out to challenge those claims. But within Chu State, there was one person whose title of famous general was absolutely undisputeda€¡±that was Emperor Chu Luyuan. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? As Yan Yunqing mentioned, Lu Yuan had become famous more than forty years ago when he began his career with his participation in the immense and significant war of Yue Country¡¯s Northern Expedition. In this battle, he shone brilliantly, slaying two Inborn Pillar Generals from Zhou Country within the battlefield, and securing the leading merit of the Northern Expedition. He later conducted a thousand-mile long raid within enemy territory, maneuvering back and forth until he fought his way out, single-handedly reversing the decline of Yue Country in the battlefields north of the river. It could be said that most of Yue Country¡¯s victories in the war against Zhou Country were earned by Lu Yuan. The significance of this battle for Yue Country was no less than the Battle of Changyuan commanded by Yan Yunqing five years before, not only did he massively defeat the Zhou People, causing loss of soldiers and generals and severely damaging their vitality but also changed the strategic offense and defense between Yue and Zhou, ensuring Zhou could no longer invade to the south. Furthermore, he reclaimed lost grounds in Xichuan and took over two regions of Zhou Country. Are these achievements not substantial enough? And regarding Emperor Chu Luyuan¡¯s War of Conquerors that followed, it consisted of annihilating a large nation in the southwest, defeating another large nation, expanding the territory by a region, and making tributaries out of three other states. Later, he subjugated two nations in Xichuan and acquired another region. After one war, he had defeated over a million enemies, slain two Inborn individuals, and gained two regions and three nationsa€¡±the value of his achievements was equally remarkable. The final battle to subdue Ning was likewise about defeating an overlord as well as three strong nations and two smaller ones, overcoming millions of enemies, executing three Inborn individuals, and completely securing the land of Jiangnan, unifying Yangzhou. The value of these accomplishments was astronomically high. What¡¯s more crucial is that these were wars from thirty to forty years ago. Back then, the intensity and scale of war were far from what they are now. At that time, the hearts of the people and the military leaders had not adapted to warfare of such scale and intensity, nor did they have the experience to command such great wars. Yet, Chu Emperor not only commanded but won these battles, truly pioneering an era and setting the direction for future generations. He showed them, how war is to be waged. Yan Yunqing, as well as the generals present, which one among them hasn¡¯t studied the analyses of every battle that Chu Emperor has commanded since he began his career, examining the ingenious aspects within? After such analysis and study, everyone would come to the same conclusion. Chu Emperor, truly a Military Immortal. Indeed, Lu Yuan¡¯s way of waging war always relied partly on himself, mostly on Dao Law; from this aspect, he indeed deserved the title of Military Immortal. His methods of fighting were unique, unlearnable by others. Such a textbook figure, when assigning a general, would naturally not be anything less. No one dared to doubt it. Otherwise, as now Yan Yunqing asked, do you understand military and generalship better than Chu Emperor? The topic would be dead in an instant. Unless you believed yourself to be more formidable than the game-changing Chu Emperor, nobody would dare to underestimate Huang Xuan who was dispatched by him. This was also why, upon hearing the name Huang Xuan, Liang Country promptly dispatched Yan Yunqing, a great general, to respond. Because thinking of it from another angle, isn¡¯t it clear how formidable Huang Xuan must be to emerge with the title of famous general from under the halo of Chu Emperor¡¯s Military Immortal? ¡°Anyway, from what I see in the camp right now, I can¡¯t find any flaws. Even if I were in Huang Xuan¡¯s position and in charge of the military, I couldn¡¯t do any better,¡± Yan Yunqing concluded. After pondering, he added, ¡°Maybe even not as well.¡± After all, commanding a million-strong army without a single flaw in its defense, such capability in deployment and command is terrifying just to think about. At least, Yan Yunqing couldn¡¯t guarantee this. It wasn¡¯t that his abilities were lacking. But as a commander, no matter how formidable Yan Yunqing was, he could at most ensure that he could manage one hundred thousand men thoroughly without leaving any loopholes. Any more, and he would be beyond his capacity and would have to delegate to others. But then it was hard to guarantee that others possessed the same ability to command impeccably, leaving no oversights. Indeed, thinking about it this way, not just the terror of Huang Xuan, but the terror of the entire Chu army was downright frightening. Yan Yunqing, adept at observing issues from the details, discerned through the arrangement of a Chu military camp just how formidable the opponent was. It wasn¡¯t just the fear of Huang Xuan. For no matter how formidable he was, he was still just one person; in contrast to a million-strong army, he was negligible. What was terrifying about the Chu army was that they could manage a million-strong army just as if Huang Xuan himself was personally in charge. This meant that the quality of the middle and high-level leadership within the Chu army was not much different from Huang Xuan, even if not quite at his level. That wasn¡¯t just a question of a single famous general, but a host of them. The thought of facing such an opponent added immense pressure to Yan Yunqing, banishing any semblance of complacency from his heart. ¡°Let¡¯s go, we¡¯ll take a look at some of the other Chu army camps to see if they are the same.¡± With great shock, Yan Yunqing and his generals hurried to verify the situation at other Chu military camps. If all of the Chu army was just like this place, then as he said, this battle would indeed be difficult to lose. No, I shouldn¡¯t think about winning because such a Chu army is essentially invincible. What I should consider is how to ensure that I don¡¯t lose, or at least not so disgracefully. Riding swiftly, Yan Yunqing traveled, his mind burdened with heavy thoughts. Hmm, Lu Yuan¡¯s immortal military tactics, once again deployed, had frightened another person, a famous world general no less. Even before the great war between Chu and Liang had officially begun, the enemy¡¯s morale had already taken a hit. ¡°` Chapter 987 - Chapter 987 Chapter 409 Thirty Years of Cultivation ?Chapter 987: Chapter 409: Thirty Years of Cultivation Chapter 987: Chapter 409: Thirty Years of Cultivation Several days later. After spending five days racing back and forth over hundreds of miles, surveying the border between Jiaodong and Yangxia counties, Yan Yunqing, carrying a heavy heart filled with worry and disappointment, returned to the main camp. The thing he feared most had happened. Just as he had suspected previously, all the Chu camps stretching over three hundred miles were well fortified and on high alert, not revealing a single flaw in their military governance. A million Chu soldiers were indeed so well managed that they seemed to move as one, forming a formidable front. Faced with such an enemy, Yan Yunqing was at a loss and could not think of a way to respond. And when he returned to the main camp, there were even more distressing matters. Compared to the Chu army¡¯s disciplined and unified forces, the Liang army was simply riddled with errors and unbearable to witness. It must be admitted. As the hegemon of the Central State, Liang occupied a central position in the Nine Provinces, surrounded by formidable opponents, having fought countless tough battles over decades. The Army sprouted a countless number of talented generals, making it shine like stars in the sky. In this regard, Liang was not lacking in generals capable of leading troops into battle. But the problem also lay here. Because the intensity of the wars was so great, after each major battle, Liang would lose a large number of soldiers and generals. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï When these losses occurred, initially, relying on the deep resources within the Liang territory, the aristocratic families could quickly send their own descendants into the army to serve as mid and high-level officers, while veteran soldiers were promoted to lower-level officer positions. With this method, despite suffering great losses in manpower after each battle, Liang could quickly recover strength within half a year to a year, as new soldiers were trained and the various level officers became well-coordinated again. Therefore, in the early stages, Liang was able to maintain an advantage while facing attacks from the Three Nations of Wei, Zhao, and Xu, and at times could even launch counterattacks. But no amount of talent reserve can endure constant losses month after month, year after year, especially when each time the losses numbered in the hundreds or thousands. The sons and relatives of Liang¡¯s aristocratic families, however abundant, inevitably had a limit. A family with thousands or tens of thousands of people was already reaching the sky. Excluding the old and weak, as well as those not trained in martial arts, the actual number of descendants who could join the army was only a few hundred at best. Wei, Zhao, and Xu were not weak states; they might have been at a disadvantage in national power compared to Liang, but the basic quality of their soldiers was roughly the same. In a great battle with one of them, even if Liang emerged victorious, at the least, it would suffer losses of tens or hundreds of thousands of troops, among which the fallen generals would be counted by hundreds or thousands. One great war could eradicate all the manly descendants of a clan who had joined the army. And how many aristocratic families did Liang have? Only several dozen or a hundred. After a hundred great battles, the core male members of these families would be scattered, and the families thoroughly ruined. So, after fighting wars for over a decade, and after tens of thousands of their descendants had died, Liang quickly became aware of this severe issue. Therefore, to preserve strength and to reduce losses, the aristocratic families within Liang territory consciously reduced the number of their descendants joining the army. Without these descendants, who had been meticulously trained and had a solid military upbringing, as well as being heirs to their family¡¯s military traditions, the mid and high-level officers within the Liang army began to experience a shortfall as the wars intensified. Consequently, they had no choice but to relax the previously stringent standards and promote officers from the lower classes and grassroots origins. These officers of humble background were not lacking in courage or even had enough battlefield acumen and intuitive understanding of leading troops into battle. After all, they too had emerged from the bloody battlefields, wading through seas of corpses. But however brave these men were, and however sharp their intuition, they ultimately could not change the fact that they were late starters who hadn¡¯t undergone systematic training and might even have been illiterate. An army of thousands or tens of thousands might be able to ignore the gaps in the quality of their officers, fight to a stalemate, or even win a victory based on the courage of their officers and enough luck. But in a battle involving over a million soldiers, even if you are an Inborn Grandmaster, the impact of individual valor becomes extremely limited. An Inborn Grandmaster, after a battle, at most could kill a few thousand people. And a few thousand people, for an army of a million, is but a drop in the ocean. Never mind one Inborn Grandmaster, even if there were ten Inborn Grandmasters, and you let them kill a million people, it¡¯s likely they would be exhausted to death before finishing the job. ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï If that¡¯s the case for Inborn Grandmasters, then the impact of valor from ordinary officers is even more limited. Since bravery was ineffective, then in a clash between two armies, what comes into play is the quality of each side. This quality refers to the disparity between soldiers, the gap in command by the officers, and the difference in coordination between the various military units. Despairingly, in all three comparisons, the Liang army did not hold an advantage, and was even at a disadvantage. Take the disparity among regular soldiers for example, although the Liang soldiers were battle-hardened, having emerged from one fierce battle after another. But the Chu forces were not inferior. In the past thirty years, Chu had been in a state of peace within its heartland, but its border regions could hardly be called peaceful. To the southwest, Rainforest Barbarians continued to migrate north; tens of thousands of miles of coastal waters faced continuous raids by sea pirates; and to the northwest, yearly expeditions beyond the passes involved heated battles with the Barbarians of Yong West. With three major battlefields, Chu¡¯s military deployment remained at a constant five hundred thousand. During intense warfare, it could even reach a million. And Lu Yuan, to maintain the combat effectiveness of Chu¡¯s soldiers, had adopted a rotation system, dividing the domestic soldiers into three batches to take turns on the front line for training. Chapter 988 - Chapter 988 Chapter 409 Thirty Years of Cultivation_2 ?Chapter 988: Chapter 409: Thirty Years of Cultivation_2 Chapter 988: Chapter 409: Thirty Years of Cultivation_2 Therefore, despite enjoying thirty years of peace, the Chu army had not deteriorated; on the contrary, they remained in the midst of warfare, receiving training that was no less rigorous than that of other nations. Even because the Chu army¡¯s rotation policy, unlike other nations constrained by multiple frontlines and intense border pressures, often led to a large force getting trapped and overused to the brink of death, allowing no effective rest. As a result, a large number of veteran elite soldiers were needlessly lost on the battlefield, necessitating the recruitment of numerous new soldiers to replenish the army¡¯s size. The army was mixed with veteran and new soldiers, resulting in uneven soldier quality. Benefiting from the rotational system, those veterans who had experienced battle were well preserved, with the army primarily composed of veterans. Even the two million new soldiers recently recruited by Lu Yuan from within the country were actually veterans who had been discharged and then re-conscripted. Twenty years ago, sensing the increasingly fierce warfare among the nations, to reserve more quality troops domestically, Lu Yuan forcefully implemented reforms within the army. It was mandated that a Soldier would stay in the army for a maximum of ten years after enlistment. No matter the age, after ten years, they were to be forcibly discharged and enrolled into the reserve force. Possibly a soldier would start serving at the age of fifteen or sixteen and be discharged by twenty-five or twenty-six. From this point on, the lifelong conscription practiced by other nations, where young and old mixed, where one would join the army at fifteen and return home at eighty, was completely eradicated in Chu State. Consequently, Chu State gained a substantial number of prime-aged, military-trained men in their twenties and thirties, or thirties and forties. These retired reservists, registered in the local governments, could be assembled instantly at the command of the local military officers, and then according to their previous military ranks, they formed small-scale armies. Under such a system, not to mention two million new soldiers, even three million or five million could be easily assembled by Chu State, ensuring a certain level of combat effectiveness. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 The Chu soldiers trained under this system, even if they were reservists re-enlisted, were much stronger than recruiting a new soldier from civilians, as practiced by other states. Therefore, on the level of soldiers, the Chu army was naturally far superior to the Liang army, which was a mix of young and old, veterans and recruits. As for the quality of the officers, that goes without saying. The wars fought by the Chu army over the years were consciously controlled in scale and intensity, intended only for border defense and army training. This was fundamentally different from the cutthroat power struggles between nations. In such a situation, the loss of soldiers was much lower, and as officers were protected by so many soldiers, they were even safer. Over decades, the Chu army cultivated countless excellent officers of high, medium, and low ranks. The nobility and powerful local families within Chu cultivated many exceptional descendants, numbering in the millions. Under Lu Yuan¡¯s advocacy, these individuals received good military education and were capable of serving as competent military officers at all levels. These two sources of officers not only ensured command over Chu State¡¯s existing standing forces, but even the civilian workers conscripted were managed by numerous officers at various ranks and trained and directed as if they were an army. Compared to the Liang army¡¯s shortage of officers, it was a vast improvement. When it came to the coordination of the large army, it needed no further mention. With the presence of Lu Yuan¡¯s Avatars commanding troops of a hundred thousand each, facing ¡°Immortal Technique¡± cheating by the Liang people, even if they came up with all sorts of tricks, they couldn¡¯t compare. Hence, various advantages combined to form the Chu army¡¯s overwhelming superiority over the Liang army in all aspects. So, on a day when early winter descended, before the full onset of biting cold, After hundreds of small-scale probes, the Chu and Liang finally embarked on a grand battle, deploying a hundred thousand soldiers each to confront each other on the plains between the two armies. The result was Liang¡¯s devastating defeat. Yan Yunqing immediately realized the gap between the two sides. He then commenced a defensive stance within the camp, ignoring Chu¡¯s provocations, and after enduring several days and the arrival of the Great Snow of Heaven and Earth, which sealed everything, He took this breather to summarize the many problems he had identified and dispatched a messenger back to the capital, promoting his findings and requesting the emperor to send enough qualified officers to address the deficiencies within the Liang army. Now, with winter serving as a buffer and surrounded by heavy snow, the Chu army could not initiate battles from their camp. Meanwhile, the Liang army had these three to four months of winter to reorganize their troops, replace unqualified officers, and thus reduce and recover from the disparity with the Chu army. If they waited until the winter passed and the great snows melted, allowing the Chu army free movement, And if the Liang army remained unchanged, a disastrous defeat would not be far off. Yan Yunqing shared his concerns in his letter, thus warning the Monarch and Ministers inside the great walls of Liang. After thirty years of accumulation and preparation, the Chu army was nowhere near as impetuous and weak as it appeared on the outside, and the gap with the Liang State had widened. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï This battle demonstrated Chu¡¯s thirty years of effort while Liang was exhausted after a hundred battles, indeed in grave danger. ¡­ While the armies of Huang Xuan and Yan Yunqing were engaged in heated battle on the borders of Jiaodong and Yangxia, Lu Yuan was busy at home, conducting the last round of mobilization before the Northern Expedition. After half a year of preparation, aside from the troops already dispatched to the front lines of the Yangxia Expeditionary Army, The Hanzhong and Xiangyang Military Camps within Chu, responsible for the campaign against Wei Country, were completely ready a month ago. Chapter 989 - Chapter 989 Chapter 409 Thirty Years of Cultivation_3 ?Chapter 989: Chapter 409: Thirty Years of Cultivation_3 Chapter 989: Chapter 409: Thirty Years of Cultivation_3 Lu Yuan directly led the western, central, and eastern expeditionary armies, which also, under the pretense of migrating the populace and supporting the front lines of Yong West and Yangxia, began to assemble in Yuzhang, Linhai, and Guangling, respectively, and had completed the majority of preparations. To expedite the process, Lu Yuan even temporarily visited Jinling himself, to unite the people¡¯s hearts and minds. According to the current preparations, by the end of next February, that is, after the melting of the snow in spring, the three expeditionary armies will be fully established. In addition, the populace that migrated northwards from the southwest of Lingnan, after half a year of relocation, have gradually arrived along the banks of the great river in the north of Chu State. The scale of these relocated people totaled more than eighteen million, nearly the same as the number of soldiers and horses drafted for this Northern Expedition of Chu¡¯s army, which can be described as an extremely large figure. And with so many people congregating along the great river, naturally, a myriad of complex management issues followed. Moreover, the daily consumption of food by these immigrants was akin to astronomical figures, simply incalculable. If it were not for Lu Yuan¡¯s early preparation for the Northern Expedition, where he had set up many granaries in the southern bank area of the great river for closer supply of food and fodder to the front lines, they would not have been able to sustain it. However, even then, the consumption of nearly twenty million people was far too great. Especially since Chu State also had to support an army of equal size, which was even more terrifying. Consequently, Lu Yuan had already decided. When the Northern Expedition launched next year, once the entire army crossed the great river and took control of the counties of Liang Country north of the river, they would immediately begin arranging immigration work. Sustaining nearly forty million unproductive people imposed an enormous strain on Chu State. Even if Lu Yuan exerted all his strengths, he could at most sustain the situation for a year or more. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã? To resolve the consumption of grain and ensure that the immigrants could settle down and resume production as quickly as possible, he could only take some risks and have these people join the army on its expedition. However, judging by Chu State¡¯s preparations and strength, as long as they crossed the river, it would basically be a smooth advance, with the conquered territories almost having no risk of being retaken. Therefore, even if those immigrants followed behind the military, they would at most have to face some resistance from the civilians of Liang, and it was highly unlikely for them to encounter regular Liang military forces. And with Chu¡¯s army¡¯s remaining garrisons to assist, the risk was even smaller. After making this decision, Lu Yuan once again called upon his good friend Sun Siwen, who had already lost much hair due to the strain of supplying materials for the Northern Expedition, to act. He directed him to dewploy officials specifically tasked with handling this matter. The whole three-pronged crossing of the army thus continued in an orderly preparation. Over there in Yong State of Wei Country, spurred by the urging of Chu State, the army for the Western Expedition had also been assembled within the counties of Guannei. Just waiting for the arrival of spring and the melting of the heavy snow, they would join the army of the Yangxia Expeditionary Army in Hanzhong and jointly launch a campaign against the barbarians. As for Li State. The monarch and ministers of Great Liang, after receiving the letter from Yan Yunqing, also displayed great concern. However, given the present weakness of Liang Country, with a need for people everywhere and a visible shortage of talent, they had the will but not the power to assist. Eventually, they managed to scrape together a little over a thousand proficient officials by coercing families and ministers in the country to each contribute a few of their sons and, gritting their teeth, sent them to the front lines in Jiaodong. But this force of just over a thousand could at best manage a hundred thousand soldiers; their impact on the front-line army was limited. The vision of Yan Yunqing to revolutionize the Entire Army and create a profound change ultimately came to naught. Liang State, in the end, fell short due to its lack of substance. With no other choice, this renowned Liang general had to utilize the limited resources at hand to the best of his ability to train the army. Yet how effective this training could be, he had little confidence. Aside from the elite officers, Liang country once again assembled a hundred thousand elite troops and sent them to Jiaodong, to replenish the losses from the major battles suffered by the Liang army previously. The main camp at Jiaodong saw its troop numbers restored to over a million once again. But the replenishment of soldiers did not much boost the confidence of Yan Yunqing, nor did it significantly raise the morale of the previously defeated soldiers of Liang. After their encounters with Chu¡¯s army, Both Sides recognized the gap between them. Furthermore, because of these gaps, psychological Changes began to take hold. Many soldiers in the Liang army began to show signs of battle wariness, and myths surrounding Emperor Chu Lu Yuan started to circulate in whispers In the camp, causing unrest. The future of Liang country, under this harsh cold, was shrouded in a layer of gloom. In the camp of the Yangxia Expeditionary Army, before winter set in, they received the last batch of grain and supplies aid from Zheng Kingdom and thus had ample grain reserves. Thus, Huang Xuan simply ordered to select a group of deputy officers and seasoned veterans from the Army and distribute them among the civilian workers drafted from Zheng to begin their training. He planned to use this winter to improve the combat ability of the five hundred thousand civilian workers from Zheng, to make up for the inadequacy of troops in a foreign land far from home, where supplies were difficult. Otherwise, with just these million or so men in hand, they would face the predicament of diminishing numbers, one death at a time. Just like the numerous battles that took place recently with the Liang forces, where although Liang¡¯s army suffered a loss of nearly a hundred thousand, the casualties on Chu¡¯s side were not small either, amounting to over sixty thousand. The Vacancies in the army¡¯s formations caused by these losses were ultimately filled by civilian workers from Zheng, thus maintaining the integrity of the Entire Army. Now, by giving more training to these Zheng civilian workers, he would be providing his military forces with an additional source of high-quality soldiers, a matter essential to his very foundation. While all sides were busily preparing for the impending War, time moved slowly on. The fortieth year of Shenwu passed amidst heavy snow, and the Nine Provinces welcomed the forty-first year of Shenwu, witnessing a New Year that wasn¡¯t particularly joyous. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? In late spring of February, Meng Chenglin, the Great General of Wei Country, led a million-strong army into the grasslands to sweep away the Barbarians. In the same month, upon receiving news, Huang Xin, the overall commander of Chu¡¯s military expedition in Hanzhong, abided by the agreement and led an army out of Longshan to subdue the foreign tribes of Helong. The First battle of the year in the Nine Provinces was thus initiated by ChuWei Countries. Chapter 990 - Chapter 990 Chapter 410 The Time Has Come ?Chapter 990: Chapter 410 The Time Has Come Chapter 990: Chapter 410 The Time Has Come The grasslands in March are still cold and desolate. Although the heavy snow had melted, the vitality of spring had yet to emerge, and the vast expanse of the prairie showed no hint of green. It was still a scene of withering yellow, coupled with rivulets of melted snow. Corpses lay haphazardly amidst the grass, the aftermath of the smoke of war burning down to embers, shattered weapons erected on the ground, marking the end of a recent battle. The military banners emblazoned with the character ¡°Wei¡± fluttered in the breeze. Soldiers, just disengaged from combat, still had excitement etched on their faces, and then, under the direction of a military officer, began to tidy up the battlefield. ¡°These barbarians are getting fewer and fewer,¡± said Great General Meng Chenglin, mounted on his horse. He looked down at the corpses with braided hair on the ground and then at the even greater number of corpses of the distinctly different barbarians and Wei people intermingled among them, and he couldn¡¯t help but sigh, ¡°But those from the Western region foreign tribes seem to be increasing in number.¡± The Western region foreign tribes are, just by name, not a group that belongs to the same ethnicity as the people of the Nine Provinces. Indeed, that was the case. The nomadic barbarians from the steppes, the people from the Snowy Wilderness, the Southwest Barbariansa€¡±these groups on the fringes of the Nine Provinces, although they had entirely different cultures and customs from the descendants of the Three Emperors of the Nine Provinces, still bore a resemblance that marked them as part of the same species. Thus, the people of the Nine Provinces still considered them human. However, those from the Western Regions were different: with deep-set eyes, prominent noses, varied hair colors, dense body hair, rough skin and emitting a strong exotic odor. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Those with appearances so starkly different from the people of the Nine Provinces, they were seen purely as foreigners, not even regarded as human. Upon closer examination, those of the Western Region foreign tribes did indeed possess a lineage distinct from the Human Race of the Nine Provinces. According to the records of All Immortal Sects, the bloodline of the tribes from the Western Regions was indeed impure. In ancient times, when Spiritual Energy was abundant and the world was inhabited by various Demon Types, some of these creatures were expelled by the Immortals of the Nine Provinces and relegated to the Western Regions. These Demon Types, through Cultivation, could take on human forms, and they gradually intermarried with some of the Human Race in the Western Regions, eventually resulting in a mixed lineage of human and monster. And this bloodline, after tens of thousands of years of propagation and in the context of declining Spiritual Energy, also slowly degenerated. The monster lineage receded, while the human lineage became more prevalent. Aside from retaining some monstrous features, they became not much different from human beings. From their appearance, they looked just like people. However, despite the small difference, the people from the Nine Provinces, along with the legends surrounding the Demon People of the Western Regions, were more inclined to reject these Western Region people with demon bloodlines, labelling them as a foreign race. This rejection went so far as to not even consider them human, which shows the extent of the Nine Provinces¡¯ disdain. And the foreign tribes of the Western Regions were also aware that they were unwelcome in the Nine Provinces. So for tens of thousands of years, they kept to their own territories, rarely interacting with the Human Race from the Nine Provinces. Both sides formed their own circles, big and small. Everyone went about their own business and they mostly left each other alone, with the exception of occasional trade. But this tradition, after tens of thousands of years, was ultimately shattered by the recent calamitous changes in the heavens of the Nine Provinces. The terrible earthquakes in the Western Regions, when they occurred, took the lives of countless people from the foreign tribes. ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï And now, these earthquakes have spread even further, ripping almost the entire Western Regions apart. The inhabitants of the Western Regions, in a bid for survival, had no choice but to migrate to safer locations. That would be Yong State, which is relatively stable at the moment. Unlike the nomadic barbarians to the north who live in tribal communities, the foreign tribes of the Western Regions possessed substantial farmland and had long since established their countries with their own systems. Therefore, although there were a few tribes among the migrating Western Region foreign tribes, the majority moved as entire nations. In terms of organizational structure, systems in place, or even population size, they proved to be much stronger than the nomadic tribes of the plains. Just like now. Even though there are still several million nomadic barbarians remaining, a number that is hardly insignificant, on the Nomad¡¯s customary plains, what the Wei Army saw and encountered were predominantly from the Western Region foreign tribes. These nomadic barbarians, in the face of the vast migratory wave of the Western Region foreign tribes, were hardly able to resist and were quickly absorbed. ¡°The active Western Region foreign tribes in the southern plains are said to come from Huotuluo Country, a major nation in the Western Regions, with a population of tens of millions and considerable strength. Ever since they arrived on these plains, they have constantly encroached upon and assimilated those barbarians. Now, in just over a decade, the two to three million barbarians of the southern plains have been completely absorbed by Huotuluo Country, and these barbarians have become their slaves. This Great War included many of their barbarian auxiliary armies,¡± said a Wei Guo General, accompanying Meng Chenglin, with concern. This time, when Wei Country ventured beyond its borders, invading deep into the prairie¡¯s heartland, it did achieve numerous victories. Yet beneath the triumph, the Wei Army¡¯s victories were not so effortless. As the Great General mentioned, Huotuluo Country was no small nation but one with a population in the tens of millions, comparable in stature to the hegemonies of the Nine Provinces. After entering the southern plains, it further included nearly three million barbarians, swelling its population foundations and becoming even more challenging to deal with. This time, the Wei Army mobilized a million soldiers, which appeared to be a majestic force. But Huotuluo Country was not far behind. In the face of Wei¡¯s invasion, they, too, mustered a million soldiers, fighting valiantly. Both parties had the heritage of hegemonies, and even if Wei Country was slightly more powerful and its soldiers better trained compared to Huotuluo Country, Chapter 991 - Chapter 991 Chapter 410 The Time Has Come_2 ?Chapter 991: Chapter 410 The Time Has Come_2 Chapter 991: Chapter 410 The Time Has Come_2 ¡°` But considering Wei Country¡¯s financial difficulties in recent years, the deduction of military expenses, and the problem of soldiers worn out by prolonged warfare, the actual combat power of Wei¡¯s military forces has seriously declined. When both sides are compared like this, the gap between the soldiers is actually not that great. So, after both sides clashed, they unexpectedly found it difficult to determine a winner, and they ended up in a stalemate. ¡°We¡¯ve been fighting outside the fortress for a month now, only advancing over three thousand li into the grassland, which is just circling around the periphery. We haven¡¯t even touched the core of Huotuluo Country. If we keep fighting like this, I¡¯m afraid that by the end of the year, when winter comes, we won¡¯t have conquered the opponent¡¯s capital, let alone meet up with the Chu army in Yong West.¡± After hearing the deputy general¡¯s words, Meng Chenglin sighed and then asked, ¡°How is the Chu army doing on their side? How far have they advanced now?¡± The deputy general replied, ¡°According to the message sent three days ago, the Chu army has been out of Longshan for half a month and has now captured the entire Longxi Prefecture. They are currently closing in on Hexi Prefecture. However, the Chu army had been operating in Longxi Prefecture beforehand, controlling many military forts and strongholds in that prefecture. There are also not many Barbarians in Longxi Prefecture, just two or three million. With an army of one million sweeping through them, it¡¯s understandable that the Chu army is moving quickly.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï The nation has greatly weakened, and it¡¯s not like before.¡± Yes, it¡¯s not like before. If it were replaced by Wei Country from thirty years ago, no, even just twenty years ago. At that time, Wei Country only needed to deploy a million troops, not to mention the inability to penetrate into the grassland¡¯s core. In one month¡¯s time, advancing directly to the capital of Huotuluo Country wouldn¡¯t have been impossible. Wasn¡¯t it in the Southern Expedition conducted by Great Wei that, in a short span of one or two months, the Northern defense lines of Zhou Country in Shuofang were disintegrated, and beacon fires directly approached the outskirts of Chang¡¯an City? If even Zhou Country, a dominant force in one state, was like this, let alone a minor Huotuluo Country. But alas. The Wei Country of today is no longer the Wei Country of thirty years ago. A continuous thirty to forty years of warfare, across two to three generations, has long drained Wei Country of its vitality. Facing scarcity of food, of money, and even of qualified soldiers, there¡¯s even a shortage of officers¡­ War after war has consumed Wei¡¯s resources, incessantly pulling them toward the abyss. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï ¡®So this expedition outside the fortress must end in victory. Huotuluo Country must also be destroyed,¡¯ Meng Chenglin thought, determination flashing in his eyes. To the west of Great Wei, there are mainly two threats. One is the southern grasslands located to the northwest, and the other is the Yongxi Helong region to the southwest. In the southern grasslands, the active force is Huotuluo Country, this power with a population of over ten million, initiating tens of thousands of troops each year for eastward campaigns, continuously harassing Wei Country¡¯s borders. In recent years, much of Wei¡¯s military forces and resources have been entangled with this western grassland nation, unable to extricate themselves. On the Yongxi Helong side, there are two major nations, Bahan Na Country and Mojilo Country. Likewise having populations exceeding ten million, these two nations are also from the Western Regions, having assimilated numerous small nations and tribes along their way, eventually accumulating the foundation of dominant countries. Originally, these two nations were also a significant threat to the western borders of Wei Country; considering their population and size, they were even more challenging to deal with than Huotuluo Country. But as these two nations occupied Helong, their military ambitions didn¡¯t only extend eastwards into Guannei, harassing the Jingji region of Wei Country; they also infiltrated south towards Hanzhong, with intentions of pushing further into Chu State. Everything changed then. Faced with such aggressors coveting their own territory, with Lu Yuan¡¯s temperament, naturally, he couldn¡¯t possibly tolerate it. Also considering that prolonged peace could lead to corruption within the military, which wouldn¡¯t be conducive to survival in times of chaos. Therefore, to solve the border troubles and also provide a place to train troops, upon receiving the report from Hanzhong about the harassment by the Barbarians and other ethnic groups from the northwest, Lu Yuan decisively deployed hundreds of thousands of troops, entering Longxi Prefecture and pushing the borders out by several hundred li, initiating Chu State¡¯s perennial military exercises in the northwest. Just like that. With Chu State¡¯s intervention, the pressure from the southwestern border was instantly alleviated by a large margin. The Bahan Na Country and Moro Country, coming from the Yongxi Helong area, had most of their forces tied up by Chu State, with the few that managed to infiltrate the Guannei counties unable to cause any significant turmoil and easily dealt with by Wei Country. Therefore, for Wei Country, with Chu State present, the Barbarian threats from the southwest direction could essentially be ignored to a great extent. Their real enemy is still just Huotuluo Country. Thus, in this expedition, the Wei Army did not bother with the Longxi direction but instead headed straight for the southern grasslands. ¡°The Wei Country of now can no longer afford to fight. To continue would mean the end of the nation. Great Wei has reached the time when we must recuperate and regenerate. So this battle outside the fortress is the last battle. After this battle, our Wei Country will commence disarmament, focus on recuperation, and work on restoring production, using peace to accumulate strength. But for peace, we must deliver a crushing defeat or even annihilate Huotuluo Country in this battle, to completely resolve this great northwest trouble, securing decades of peace for Great Wei.¡± Meng Chenglin looked at the generals beside him, sharing and explaining the imperial court¡¯s thoughts before giving a command, ¡°Now is the time to gamble with the nation¡¯s fate, no longer caring about losses, no longer considering the risks. Pass down the military order, all the cavalry protecting the logistics, gather them all back.¡± ¡°` Chapter 992 - Chapter 992 Chapter 410 The Time Has Come_3 ?Chapter 992: Chapter 410 The Time Has Come_3 Chapter 992: Chapter 410 The Time Has Come_3 The logistical escort of the great army was mainly composed of the soldiers and civilian workers assigned to it. The remaining cavalry and elite forces, no longer concerning themselves with the harassment from the various Barbarian and foreign tribes around them, would follow me as we make a direct charge towards Blackwater City, heading straight for the capital of Huotuluo Country. I want to see. When the national capital is under threat, can those fellows who¡¯ve been playing hide and seek all this time still remain seated?¡± After fighting this month¡¯s battles, Meng Chenglin had also figured out the tactics of those Barbarians. They wouldn¡¯t engage you directly, but instead, they would exploit their advantage in cavalry numbers to infiltrate deep into the rear areas, using this to harass the Wei Army¡¯s logistics. With logistics under attack, the Wei Army naturally couldn¡¯t advance with confidence and had no choice but to allocate a large number of cavalry and soldiers to protect the logistics transport at the rear. And with a large number of elite troops deployed for logistics protection, naturally, there were fewer forces available at the vanguard. As a result, when the vanguard clashed with the Huotuluo Army, both sides fought several fierce battles without a decisive winner, leading to a sluggish advancement of the frontline. Meng Chenglin saw this clearly. The strategy of the Huotuluo Army was to use this harassment of logistics as a way to delay time. As long as they could delay until September, until winter came and the first snow fell on the grasslands, the Wei Army who had ventured beyond the Great Wall would have no choice but to retreat. A Western Expedition that cost much and was conducted on such a grand scale would thus end inconclusively due to weather, and Huotuluo Country would have defended its territory. Only Wei Country, as a result, would be weakened at the core, lose its vigor, and gain nothing. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï How could Meng Chenglin accept such an outcome? Therefore, to resolve the situation, it was imperative to make a change. Originally, he had been somewhat hesitant about what to do next, but as soon as he heard that Chu State had already pacified Longxi and was preparing to invade Western Hexi, he hesitated no more. In this Northern Expedition by both the ChuWei armies, Chu State made swift progress, advancing rapidly and unstoppable, with hardly any Barbarians able to stand in their way. Wei Country, however, was stalled on the grasslands, their advancement difficult. Comparing both sides, wasn¡¯t this clearly broadcasting to the world that Wei Country was no longer capable? Indeed, Wei Country was now in decline, with its strength failing. However, the more this was the case, the more Wei Country couldn¡¯t show weakness. Otherwise, once its true state was seen through, the many hungry wolves lurking around Wei Country, wouldn¡¯t they just swarm together, coming to carve it up? The Zhao State in the north has only Dongjun in Central State; don¡¯t they want to take over Wei Country Henan Prefecture, which is adjacent to Dongjun? Chu State in the south has only half of Xiangyang Prefecture in Central State; are they uninterested in Wei Country Nanyang Prefecture, which is right next to Xiangyang Prefecture? Liang Country in the east, if given the chance to take over both Henan and Nanyang prefectures, would they hesitate? The Western region foreign tribes to the west invade Wei Country year after year; their covetous intentions towards Wei require no further explanation. It can be said. Everywhere around Wei Country, there are packs of wolves circling, constantly wishing to bite off a chunk, to tear away a piece of fat meat. But why haven¡¯t they done so? Isn¡¯t it because Wei Country is currently ranked as the third strongest nation in the world, with a reputation for sharp military might and martial arts? If it were to lose that reputation for martial excellence, and fail to maintain its position as the third strongest nation, Wei Country could no longer deter other nations, making its weakness evident. Then its demise wouldn¡¯t be far off. Therefore, even if Wei Country wants to recuperate and desire peace, it must first fight a great war. To exchange a powerful nation¡¯s downfall for a great reputation, to intimidate the neighboring countries, and to secure peace for a decade or more. This is the significance of this expedition into the grasslands. Hence upon realizing the intent of the Huotuluo Army, Meng Chenglin was forced to adjust his strategy, switching from the current defense of the grain road to a completely indifferent, aggressive attack strategy. It¡¯s very risky. But equally, it¡¯s very effective. As long as he could successfully penetrate Huotuluo Country and reach its capital, Blackwater City, on the grasslands, then all the current problems would be resolved swiftly. ¡°March!¡± Watching the newly assembled troops who had already cleaned the battlefield, Meng Chenglin lashed his horsewhip and galloped ahead. Behind him, banners fluttered in the wind, and ten thousand cavalry followed. ¡­ Longxi Prefecture. Stepping into Ji City, once the prefectural capital, corpses of foreign Barbarians were strewn haphazardly, visible everywhere. Civilian workers who had followed the army were cleaning up the chaos in the city, and troops marched in one by one, restoring order in the aftermath of the war. In the midst of these post-war trivialities, Huang Xin climbed to the top of the city wall and surveyed the horizon. Beyond lay a vast valley, filled with countless good fields, with gridded paths crisscrossing, once sustaining a million lives. However, with the decades of war that had passed, the residents of this valley had been replaced time and again, from the Zhou People to the Barbarians, to the Chu people, to the Barbarians again, and then to foreign tribes, and now it was back to Chu people. With the constant tumult of warfare, the prosperity of Ji City turned into smoke and vanished without a trace. Now, after another round of military destruction, the desolation and ruin were more pronounced than ever. ¡°But actually, this isn¡¯t really significant. The population is like chives, cut down for harvesting, but after recovering for several decades or a century, they thrive once again. The key issue is natural disasters. Right now, this valley still retains some shadow of prosperity, but in a few decades, when the earthquakes from the Western Regions come, it will probably become a barren wasteland, won¡¯t it?¡± Huang Xin muttered to himself. ¡°Grand Steward, news from the grasslands: the Wei Army Commander Meng Chenglin has mobilized his troops, abandoned the secure logistics lines, and chosen to lead a heavy force directly to Blackwater City. He has already led five hundred thousand of the main force deep into the grasslands, cutting off contact with the rear forces.¡± At this moment, someone hurriedly approached the city tower, bringing this news. Upon hearing this, Huang Xin turned around, took the letter, and scrutinized it carefully. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï After confirming that it indeed reported Meng Chenglin¡¯s army¡¯s entry into the grasslands and lack of contact with their rearguard for half a month, he couldn¡¯t help but laugh out loud. ¡°Truly, heaven aids us.¡± Huang Xin¡¯s face showed delight: ¡°Just two months into the campaign, I did not expect such an opportunity to come so quickly. Issue my orders for the various troops to assemble and converge here at Ji City; I will lead an expedition.¡± ¡°Yes!¡± The adjacent generals heard the command and immediately went to carry out the orders. Huang Xin continued to stand on the city wall, still overlooking the distant valley. Only in his mind, he had already begun to communicate with his true self, informing it of the preparations for the expedition into Wei Country. At the same time, it was also to notify his true self that the time had come. The destruction of Wei, starting with an invasion of Liang Country, was now underway. Chapter 993 - Chapter 993 Chapter 411 Blundering Through All the Way ?Chapter 993: Chapter 411: Blundering Through All the Way Chapter 993: Chapter 411: Blundering Through All the Way The early morning mist lingered over the river. The sunlight was obscured by the mist, creating a gloomy atmosphere; the cold river breeze blew past, skimming over the stretch of water. ¡°So cold, early in the morning, and absolutely nobody comes. I have no idea what Shangguan is up toa€¡±what¡¯s there to guard? It¡¯s more comfortable to stay in bed.¡± Wang Qing muttered to himself, drawing his thin cotton coat tighter around him. The heavy armor plates felt bone-chillingly cold under the mist, penetrating his robes and reaching his skin. Having to rise from a warm bed early in the morning to change guard was naturally disagreeable. But there was no choice, once guard duty was assigned, it became a Military Order. Military Orders were as immovable as mountains and could not be altered. ¡°Stop talking nonsense. Right now, our relations with Chu State are tense. I¡¯ve heard that over in Yangxia County, the fighting has led to mountains of corpses and seas of blood, countless dead. We¡¯re actually quite fortunate to be guarding this port in the south. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï At least we¡¯re not on the battlefield risking our lives.¡± Old Qin, the older guard beside him, couldn¡¯t help but chide upon hearing Wang Qing¡¯s complaints, ¡°And it¡¯s good to be cautious. All the countries in the north are desperately trying to penetrate our Liang territory; how could Chu in the south not feel the same? Being careful now might just save our lives.¡± Wang Qing, however, remained unconvinced, ¡°The Chu people have been living peacefully in Jiangnan for over thirty years. I¡¯ve seen their era of peace and can¡¯t help but feel envious. Why would they, in their right minds, choose to attack us? Do they really think war without casualties is possible? This time, too, if the Chu want to take Zheng¡¯s Yangxia County, just let them have ita€¡±it¡¯s not as if they¡¯re trying to seize land from our Liang State. Now, look at what¡¯s happeneda€¡±the government stubbornly refused, and the two countries have gone to war. Jiaodong has become a mess with countless deaths and expenses, and the land is likely ruined. Even this river mouth here, because of the hostilities between Liang and Chu, hasn¡¯t seen a Chu merchant ship for months.¡± Wang Qing vented his frustrations, showing extreme resentment towards the warfare between the two countries. Old Qin looked at him and sighed softly. He understood why his comrade felt this way because he himself was also dissatisfied with the two countries¡¯ conflict. As guards of the port, their role sounded like that of soldiers, official soldiers. But in reality, they were not part of Liang¡¯s formal military establishment; they were fundamentally civilian workers conscripted from local areas and forcefully assigned to guard the port. As conscripted civilian workers, their service as guards counted as Corvee Labor, a duty owed by citizens registered in Liang State. They received no wages, and had to provide their own food and provisions, bearing all costs associated with their period of service. The duration of Corvee Labor was short, perhaps a month or two, but it could last up to half a yeara€¡±everything depended on the whim of their superiors. One can only imagine how burdensome this was for an average local citizen. Fortunately, as guards stationed at this small port, Wang Qing and his colleagues could exploit the opportunity to charge a docking fee when merchant ships arrived at the port. Although the bulk of the fee had to be handed over to their superiors, what remained after thata€¡± their extra incomea€¡±belonged to them. Thus, collecting docking fees became a steady income for all port guards; their higher-ups were aware of this but turned a blind eye. Liang¡¯s own merchant ships could get away with paying less due to connections. Chu¡¯s merchant ships, with fewer connections, could be charged a higher fee. Over the years, this had been the practice for all guards. But now, due to the warfare, Chu¡¯s merchant ships stopped coming entirely. And Liang¡¯s merchant ships, with Chu closing its trade ports, couldn¡¯t head to Chu either. Consequently, this vital source of extra income for all the guards vanished. It wasn¡¯t just the loss of incomea€¡±they had to increase their vigilance for a potential Chu invasion. Assigned to take night watches and called to duty early in the morning, they faced the biting river winds and freezing cold. Finances dwindled, and life itself hung in the balance. Combine the two, and one could understand the depth of resentment harbored by low-level guards like Wang Qing. But unfortunately, Becoming enemies with Chu was a decision made by the upper echelons, a decision by Chu itself. The thoughts and opinions, the words and voices of lowly local guards like them, went unheard and uncared for by anyone. Wang Qing and his ilk were only expected to follow Shangguan¡¯s orders, obediently comply with the Military Order, and perform their minor roles. He still complained because he was young, having seen less cruelty and suffered fewer beatings. He didn¡¯t understand what life was, or that calamity comes from careless talk. But Old Qin, already in his thirties and a grandfather, although still a lowly figure, had a much broader perspective. So, after listening to Wang Qing¡¯s complaints for a while, Old Qin simply shook his head, then interjected, ¡°Enough talk. Just man your post. So much chatter is unnecessary. You know if Shangguan heard what you just said, it would be enough to get you decapitated. It¡¯s alright to talk to me about it, but with others¡­¡± Old Qin was in the midst of counseling the younger generation. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Truthfully, if Wang Qing weren¡¯t a fellow villager with parents on good terms with him, he wouldn¡¯t bother so much. But before he could finish, Old Qin¡¯s speech suddenly cut off, his eyes fixed on the distance, his whole body momentarily stunned, fear visible in his eyes. In the dense fog from afar, countless dark shadows appeared, and as they drew closer, one by one, towering and terrifying warships crossed the river, heading towards the port from the south. Chapter 994 - Chapter 994 Chapter 411 Blundering Through All the Way_2 ?Chapter 994: Chapter 411: Blundering Through All the Way_2 Chapter 994: Chapter 411: Blundering Through All the Way_2 The tower ships drew closer, and the flag atop the leading vessel fluttered in the wind. Old Qin couldn¡¯t read, but having seen Chu State ships pass by often, he had gradually come to recognize how the character ¡°Chu¡± was written. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? And now, on the banner atop the leading tower ship, that very character was inscribed. ¡°Chu¡­ Chu army, the Chu army is herea€¡±¡± A voice, filled with panic and despair, erupted instantly, as Wang Qing from behind Old Qin shouted out. However, before he could say much more, a sudden gust of wind came from afar. A powerful force shattered his front teeth and shot through him; an arrow, with Wang Qing¡¯s body impaled, pinned him straight to the ground with a roll. Wang Qing convulsed a few times; as fresh blood flowed from the arrow wound through his brain, he soon fell silent. Seeing this, Old Qin trembled in his heart. The seasoned man instantly understood just as Shangguan had said, the Chu army had indeed struck. From the river¡¯s frontline, the sight of the densely packed Chu naval vessels left no doubt that their small harbor could not possibly withstand this force. It could no longer be defended. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Upon realizing this, Old Qin immediately dropped his short knife and turned to flee towards the rear. But he hadn¡¯t escaped far when another volley of arrows from the Chu forces, like raindrops, descended once again from behind. The tiny harbor was suddenly battered by a downpour of arrows. Amid wails of agony from the harbor, Old Qin had run merely a dozen steps before a severe pain struck his back, followed by a strong force that sent him tumbling over. Lying on the cold, damp harbor, he looked up at the sky, his mouth twitching slightly as foam mixed with blood flowed out, and he gradually stopped breathing. Half a ¡°timing¡± later. As the last cry of agony subsided, this small port near Jiangnan inevitably fell into the hands of the Chu army. One by one, Chu soldiers disembarked onto the port, beginning to assemble on the land of the northern bank. The residents of the harbor were forcibly pulled out, and amid their terror, they were assigned to carry the corpses and supplies from the ships. Huang An stepped down from the ship, looked at the conquered harbor, and nodded slightly. Although it was only a small port, as the first victory of the Northern Expedition, it was still a good omen. ¡°General, two hundred defenders and three hundred civilian workers from Liang within the harbor have all been cleared,¡± reported a blood-covered junior officer, who approached inside the harbor and saluted Huang An. Huang An¡¯s face showed a smile, ¡°Well done, your unit can rest briefly, then leave a detachment to guard the port and await the following troops. The rest of you, along with me, will continue to advance north before the Liang people can react.¡± ¡°Yes!¡± The junior officer acknowledged the order and immediately turned to prepare. A short while later, from the incoming flotilla, five thousand Chu soldiers from the first group of ten leading ships had already hurriedly disembarked and assembled within the harbor. Seeing this, Huang An left a few officers in charge of arranging for the subsequent troops to disembark and follow up behind. He then personally led these five thousand vanguard troops rapidly out of the port, advancing northward. Since last year, just before winter, when the Chu and Liang armies started clashing along the border of Jiaodong and Yangxia, relations between the Two Countries had quickly deteriorated. And after these engagements, the defeats that Liang¡¯s forces suffered repeatedly, along with the memorials from Liang¡¯s famed general Yan Yunqing, had caused great unrest in the Liang court. Thus, to relieve the pressure on the eastern borders and support the war to fight Chu for Yangxia County, or rather to protect their own border, Jiaodong County, Liang began mobilizing resources from across the country to support the eastern front. However, this support was initially rather restrained and not deployed with full force. After all, Chu was known as the power only second to Liang among the Nine Provinces, with visible military forces totaling three million. Such military strength, just based on the figures, was already comparable to Liang. Chu had only deployed one million troops to Yangxia County thus far, a massive number indeed but only a third of their total military capacity. This level of pressure was far from Chu¡¯s limit. If Chu desired, they could always dispatch another million soldiers from within the country to join the war with Liang. So as long as this million-strong force remained static, naturally, Liang would not dare to fully reveal its ¡°Hidden Cards.¡± However, as the year began and news spread, confirmed by reliable sources, that Chu had joined forces with Wei to send troops to Yong West, Liang finally let go of its last scruples. The reason was simple. With a total military force of three million, Chu now had a million in Yangxia County and another million at the Helong battlefield, leaving only a million in the interior of their country. But this remaining million had to defend tens of thousands of kilometers of coastline and the southwestern border while also maintaining sufficient force to ensure internal stability. After distributing forces to these areas, the number that could be used against Liang was no longer significant. Even if Chu managed to pull additional forces together, it could at most produce another three to five hundred thousand troops to target Liang. This amount of soldiers was not insignificant, but for Liang, the most powerful state among the Nine Provinces, it posed no real fear or threat. And there was more to consider. There were over ten million immigrants within the Chu territory needing resettlement, a colossal task and expense. Without addressing this, did Chu really have the capacity to open a third Battlefield while already engaged in both Yong West and Yangxia? This was possible thanks to Chu¡¯s years of feigning weakness and releasing false information to the outside world. Chapter 995 - Chapter 995 Chapter 411 Blundering Through All the Way_3 ?Chapter 995: Chapter 411: Blundering Through All the Way_3 Chapter 995: Chapter 411: Blundering Through All the Way_3 And all these confusing distractions. After discussion, the Monarch and Ministers of Liang unanimously agreed that Chu State currently had no capacity to open a third battlefield. Therefore, based on this view, in March of this year, once they confirmed that Chu had opened another battlefield in the northwest and was engaged in fierce fighting, and Wei Country¡¯s main forces were tied up on the grasslands, making them unavailable for deployment in Henan County, feeling secure about their southern and eastern territories, Liang breathed a sigh of relief. So, they began to withdraw troops from the western front, as well as from inland localities and the central region of Jingji, amassing another army of five hundred thousand, which they sent to the eastern front, under the command of Yan Yunqing. By then, the troops in Liang¡¯s Jiaodong County on the eastern front officially reached a total of one and a half million, surpassing the half million mark, even after deducting the hundred thousand lost last year. The support for Yan Yunqing was immense. And such importance came with demands. The Monarch and Ministers of Liang had a simple request, that with this superior force, to quickly defeat Huang Xuan¡¯s forces in Yangxia County and drive them out of Yuzhou. At the very least, they needed to severely damage the Chu army and expel them from Jiaodong County, ensuring they could no longer pose a threat to the security of Liang¡¯s eastern territories. And they needed to act quickly, not dragging it out too long, with the conflict concluded by the end of this year at the latest. The reason was simple, both ChuWei Countries would withdraw their troops by the end of the year. At that time, the defensive pressure along Liang¡¯s western and southern lines would surge abruptly as two million troops from Two Countries returned. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? Then, for border security, they would have to redeploy the troops they had withdrawn, scattering them along the two defense lines to reinforce their positions. Therefore, the support of the Monarch and Ministers of Liang for Yan Yunqing could only last until the end of this year. Once this year passed, and Wei and Chu adjusted their national policies, it would be difficult to say whether the court could redirect any surplus Strength. If Yan Yunqing failed to seize this final opportunity, Jiaodong County would be destined to be a perpetual pain for Liang. Therefore, according to the above records, the current interior of Liang, both the eastern part and the inland core areas, as well as the Jingji region, were extremely vulnerable in terms of defensive troops. In some places, there were no regular forces at all, with only some Officials and militia maintaining order. On the Southern Line, north of the river, Liang still maintained a substantial force of around five hundred thousand soldiers and nine Inborns, scattered along the lines of Jiangxia and Guangling, prepared to defend against Chu. According to the conjecture of the Monarch and Ministers of Liang. With such a number of troops, even if Chu mobilized another three hundred to five hundred thousand Soldiers for a Northern Expedition, the defenses north of the river could cope on their own and fend off the enemy at the nation¡¯s gates. If Chu mobilized even more troops, say a million-strong force, then the five hundred thousand troops could hold out for a significant amount of Time, sufficient to stall until Liang could react and send Reinforcements. One could say this arrangement was already very meticulous, comprehensive, and showed great consideration towards Chu. However. When the Northern Expedition forces of Chu turned into 3.6 million soldiers, 6 million civilian workers, nearly 10 million troops in total, this mere half a million-strong Liang army suddenly seemed so fragile and laughable. A nineteen-fold disparity in troops, nearly seven times the Advantage in Inborn soldiers, was enough to breach any defense line. The Liang army standing in the way was merely like a mantis trying to stop a chariot, foolhardy. Therefore, in the strategies formulated by Lu Yuan for this Northern Expedition, he didn¡¯t take this defense line of Liang¡¯s troops north of the river seriously at all. According to his plan, for this river crossing and advance to the north, the eastern, middle, and western Military Expedition camps would each have nine detachments of troops leading the way, totaling nine hundred thousand men, along with nine Avatars. These troops were the elite, led by Avatars with only a limited supply line behind them, marching directly and rapidly northward, relentlessly pushing into the heartland of Liang. Their only goal was to penetrate as far north as possible, reaching deeply into the heart of Liang before they could even react, seizing as much land as possible to reduce the areas under Liang¡¯s control and throttle their potential to mobilize further forces. Following the nine vanguard units, the main army would catch up, taking over their routes and surrounding and dealing with the alerted Liang forces along the way. For instance, when the half a million troops of Liang¡¯s Southern Line defense area north of the river realized that Chu troops were marching north and prepared to cut off their retreat, the following Chu forces would also catch up, launching fierce attacks on these Liang troops, who had just been drawn out of their defensive positions. In this manner, the front and rear assaults would quickly dismantle Liang¡¯s defenses along the river in the north. Of course. Even if the Liang troops didn¡¯t fall for it and decided to shrink back like turtles, refusing to leave their fortresses, it wouldn¡¯t matter. For this Northern Expedition, Chu mobilized so many troops, well over ten million. With so many troops, even if they had to besiege city by city, there would still be enough to go around. Chu didn¡¯t need to forcefully attack those cities defended by Liang¡¯s troops; it would suffice to allocate Defenders two to three times the number of Defenders inside the cities outside the walls, completely encircling and starving them out. After all, with just half a million people, folding it two or three times would only make it a million or so. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? For the Northern Expeditionary Chu army, that was just a tenth or so of their number; diverting that much would scarcely be impactful. What is meant by overwhelming Strength and tremendous force? This is it. A mighty tide rolling over, no matter how sturdy your fortress or how perfect your strategy, before absolute power, it¡¯s futile. As long as Chu doesn¡¯t have internal issues, it¡¯s invincible. And for Lu Yuan, who had distributed thirty-nine Avatars among the camps and troops while personally overseeing the overall situation, with these Avatars helping him manage troops at the grassroots level, how could there be internal problems? Not possible. Liang had fallen for the diversion strategy without any defenses against it; such an enormous Gap in Strength, from every angle, spelled their impending doom. Such a straightforward situation would be unwinnable even by a fool if they weren¡¯t interfering with the command, simply following the original strategy. So for this Northern Expedition, their straightforward march forward would suffice. On April 20th, the forty-first year of Shenwu, Chu¡¯s army crossed the river. Nine vanguard forces moved simultaneously, with light cavalry dashing a thousand miles in just over ten days, reaching the territories of Xingyang and East Sea Counties. Liang¡¯s defensive line north of the river was breached, Chu soldiers rose in the heartland, shocking the nation. That same month, several millions of Chu troops crossed the river, Liang¡¯s southern advances collapsed. Chapter 996 - Chapter 996 Chapter 412 Half of the Country Falls ?Chapter 996: Chapter 412 Half of the Country Falls Chapter 996: Chapter 412 Half of the Country Falls Blotting out the sun and sky, it truly blotted out the sun and sky. Since Chu State¡¯s army had crossed the river, in just one day, it seemed as if their shadows had emerged all over Qingzhou territory. They were like air, like water, seeping in everywhere, constantly infiltrating every part of Liang. And with the infiltration of Chu¡¯s army, beacon fires sprang up throughout Liang. Da Liang. Beginning in April, the capital of the world¡¯s foremost empire started experiencing three shocks a day. First, at the beginning of April, urgent dispatches came from the south that Chu¡¯s army had crossed the Yangtze River and launched a northern expedition against Liang. When the news reached Da Liang, although the monarch and ministers were surprised and somber, they had anticipated this and were prepared, so they didn¡¯t panic. They merely ordered the Southern Line¡¯s forces to be on high alert, to guard the city walls, and to wait for reinforcements. At the same time, from among the two hundred thousand Forbidden Army troops stationed in Da Liang, another hundred thousand were drawn and led by a great general from within the country, urgently heading south to support the front line. Simultaneously, a hundred thousand troops stationed in Jiying County on the northern border, intended to defend against Zhao State, were also recalled and assigned to an Inborn Grandmaster as commander, to serve as the second wave of reinforcements rushing to the south. With these front and rear reinforcements totaling two hundred thousand, added to the seven hundred thousand strong army on the Southern Line, and a total of eleven Inborns, This strength, it was thought, could certainly hold firmly against Chu¡¯s army, even if it were a million strong. Relying on strong fortifications and geographical advantages, they would be able to block the enemy firmly in the south. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? Thus, after these arrangements were made, the court of Liang was also able to put their minds at ease. While the war in the south was occasionally mentioned, it was no longer the focus, and more attention was being devoted to discussions about the Eastern Line battlefield. If they could win on the Eastern Line, then one million five hundred thousand troops could be freed up for use elsewhere. At that time, no matter how formidable Chu¡¯s army, they would no longer pose a threat. And Da Liang, having defeated Chu State, could wield the might of a great victory to deter the various restless states in the world, and once again sit securely over the whole of Qingzhou, securing the final victory in the contest for the Nine Provinces. But this beautiful dream barely lasted a few days before things took a sharp turn for the worse. Just half a month later, by late April, the first wave of reinforcements sent out from Da Liang hadn¡¯t even left Jingji Liang County yet! Even worse news came from the south. An urgent dispatch from the East Sea County reported that a large number of Chu troops, amounting to several hundreds of thousands, had appeared within their territory. They swept through cities and lands, lighting beacon fires everywhere. In just a few days, a vast area of prefectures and counties had fallen, and even the vicinity of the county seat saw the presence of Chu¡¯s soldiers. The situation was extremely dire. The entire East Sea County was at risk of falling; relying solely on the county seat¡¯s force was no longer sufficient to resist Chu¡¯s army, and urgent support from the court was needed. When the news reached Da Liang, there was another round of tremors. East Sea County, although it was located in the heart of Liang¡¯s territory and did not border other states, was not a frontier area. But the county, with its western side facing the sea, spanned thousands of miles of coastal border. In recent years, due to the ravages of pirates in the East Sea, Liang had deployed a large number of defenders in the coastal counties and extensively built fortresses to prevent pirates from landing. To safeguard against pirate invasions, in addition to the original garrison, the two countries had repeatedly dispatched significant military forces, bringing the number of defenders up to one hundred thousand. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï However, times had changed. With last year¡¯s hostility between Chu and Liang escalating rapidly and relations worsening, especially with the opening of the battlefield in Jiaodong, Liang found itself in a predicament of scarce military resources. Therefore, after Yan Yunqing reported severe losses and requested additional troops, Liang began to draw troops from all over the territory to support the front lines. East Sea County was among those from which troops were drawn. From the one hundred thousand strong force within the county, aside from the twenty thousand county soldiers with poorer combat ability who were only responsible for local peacekeeping, The remaining eight thousand county troops and seventy thousand soldiers had long been drawn away and dispatched to the Jiaodong front line to support Yan Yunqing. So by the time Chu¡¯s army arrived, the vast territory of East Sea County was left with only about twenty thousand regular troops, which were second-line local forces of inferior strength. How could such strength possibly match the invading forces of Chu State? Lu Yuan had sent out nine vanguards, each consisting of one hundred thousand men, to swiftly advance into Liang¡¯s hinterland and quickly seize territories. As the second echelon behind the Jiangxia and Guangling frontier defense lines in the north, East Sea County was honored to receive special attention from Chu¡¯s army. A tremendous army of five routes, comprising five hundred thousand troops led by five Lu Yuan Avatars, entered this region. With the cooperation of the five Avatars, they executed feints and diversions, drawing the tiger away from the mountain and various other stratagems, which under the use of instant communication, were executed with flourish. In East Sea County, the hastily organized defense, along with various local government initiatives for interception and rescue, were instantly torn to shreds. In less than ten days, the southern cities and towns of East Sea County were all overrun. By early May, the county seat itself was breached in just one day by the combined forces of three armies and the personal intervention of three Avatars. Within the following few days, the battlements across East Sea County were already flying Chu State¡¯s banners. At this point, one of the five armies remained to oversee the region, While the remaining four split into two, heading towards Liang County. One group aimed to intercept the reinforcements dispatched from Liang, while the other harassed the opponent¡¯s capital, seeking to shake the people¡¯s hearts in Da Liang and undermine the prestige of both countries. The other two armies continued eastward, attacking Chengyang County, Planning to follow the original strategy, driving east, breaking through Chengyang, Rencheng, and Yingling counties. They then aimed to pincer Yan Yunqing¡¯s forces in Jiaodong with the Yangxia Expeditionary Army, achieving the purpose of joining forces. Chapter 997 - Chapter 997 Chapter 412 Half of the Country Falls_2 ?Chapter 997: Chapter 412 Half of the Country Falls_2 Chapter 997: Chapter 412 Half of the Country Falls_2 Not only the East Sea but also Xingyang County next to it fell to the fierce attacks from the four routes of Chu soldiers. The county city was lost, and more than half was occupied. The reason why only more than half was occupied, rather than the entire territory falling into enemy hands, was mainly because Xingyang County was on the frontier, bordered by the Wei State to the west. Apart from the latter, Liang had stationed a hundred thousand border troops here and three Inborn Grandmasters to bear witness. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Overall, the military strength of the county was quite impressive. Faced with the invasion, emergency conscription of civilian workers helped cobble together an army. Mustering two hundred thousand soldiers and horses was not impossible. Therefore, although the Chu soldiers initially made swift progress here, by the time they captured the county seat, the hundred thousand border troops stationed in the eastern part of the county had already completed mobilization and assembly. With the addition of conscripted civilian workers, a total of one hundred and fifty thousand troops were gathered, which joined forces with the Liang army from Jiangxia County in the east to resist Chu State. Confronted with this resolute resistance from the Liang troops, the Chu soldiers within Xingyang County¡¯s territory only numbered four hundred thousand from four routes. In the face of the Liang¡¯s determined defense, it was difficult to overcome the enemy hastily. After probing the defenses and realizing the opponent was tough to beat, not easy to engage, Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Instead, they left two routes behind to defend the territory they held. The remaining two routes continued north, killing their way into Jiying County. However, in Jiying at this time, the Liang army had just completed its mobilization, and the second wave of troops preparing to head south had already fully assembled. So one marched northward, and the other southward, and the two sides collided. It was no surprise. Facing the Chu soldiers, who numbered twice as many and arrived suddenly, the unprepared Liang army was caught off guard and instantly defeated. In the short span of one day from initial contact to combat, the one hundred thousand newly-formed Liang troops were utterly routed. The survivors fled back to the county, and the Chu soldiers pursued them aggressively. In just a few days, they swept through the southern prefectures of Jiying County, showing signs of replicating the events of Xingyang County. And at this time, back in the great city of Liang, they finally realized the extent of the seriousness of the situation. East Sea is in urgent need, Xingyang is in urgent need, Jiying is in urgent need, Chengyang is in urgent need¡­ Even Liang County, where the capital was located, received urgent petitions from the southern prefectures and counties. In an instant, the whole western, southern, and central parts of Liang seemed to be engulfed by the flames of war. The east was not peaceful either. The only place that seemed peacefully was, incredibly, only the northern territories. After receiving these numerous reports, the entire court was overwhelmed, feeling like the sky was falling. ¡°How can there be so many Chu soldiers, where did they get so many people from?¡± ¡°It¡¯s all fake, all of it.¡± ¡°What¡¯s the Southern Line army doing? What are they doing? How can they allow the Chu soldiers to invade unimpeded, killing their way into the country¡¯s heartland, approaching the capital Liang City?¡± This was the reaction and fear of the monarch and ministers in the court after receiving the news. If the Chu army¡¯s Northern Expedition had just crossed the river, still on the Southern Line, then the many monarchs and ministers in Liang City could still pontificate from on high. But as the Chu army approached Xingyang, East Sea, and then Jiying, Liang County, and Chengyang, bringing the battle to Liang City, the court officials started to shake and fear as if chickens being strangled by the neck. Rally to the king! Immediately, without delay, summon the leaders of the world¡¯s prefectures and counties to rally to the king! This was the unanimous reaction and decision of the entire court after the Chu cavalry¡¯s detached army first arrived at Liang City, causing panic throughout the city. In Dongping County to the north, those two hundred thousand border troops had to be called back immediately. The troops from the central counties like Shanyang, Jiaoxi, Donglai, Rencheng, and Yingling also had to assemble immediately towards Liang City. The one million-strong army in Jiaodong County could remain for the time being. After all, the one million Chu soldiers in Yangxia County were still a constant threat. If they were transferred, and the Chu soldiers advanced opportunistically, the consequences would be even more serious. Liang might truly be finished. But the five hundred thousand reinforcements that had just been sent out had to be called back immediately. And from Qingping County in the northeast, where there were one hundred thousand border troops, half had to be called back as well. The monarch and ministers inside Liang City began to search desperately for any local troops that could be mobilized from within the country. Chu State was coming ferociously. From their ability to quickly conquer the East Sea and Xingyang counties to their simultaneous offensive against Jiying, Liang, and Chengyang counties, it was evident. The opponent¡¯s Northern Expedition this time certainly didn¡¯t comprise the mere one million as initially anticipated. Two million, or even three million might be possible. Only such a significant difference in strength could quickly overwhelm the five hundred thousand defenders on the Guangling-Jiangxia line. Before they could even react, the Chu forces broke through the defenses and penetrated deep into Liang territory, while leaving behind sufficient strength to contain forces elsewhere. Indeed. After careful deliberation, although panicked, the monarch and ministers in Liang City unanimously believed that the troops on the Southern Line had not been defeated; they were merely constrained within the cities by the Chu army for the time being. The key cities on the Jiangxia and Guangling line should still be in the hands of Liang. The Chu troops suddenly entering the heartland of Liang must be just the vanguard of the detached army from the Northern Expedition, not the entire main force of the Chu army. However, even with this realization, the monarch and ministers of Liang still felt a wave of despair. From the reports coming in from the counties within the territory, it seemed that the Chu army that had penetrated the heartland numbered up to a million soldiers. If just the vanguard of the detached army amounted to a million, then what was the total military strength of the Chu army¡¯s Northern Expedition? Two million was conservative, three million was normal, and four million was not out of the question. But where did the Chu army get so many people from? Keep in mind, they had already deployed a million-strong army each in Yangxia and Helong! Chapter 998 - Chapter 998 Chapter 412 Half of the Country Falls_3 ?Chapter 998: Chapter 412 Half of the Country Falls_3 Chapter 998: Chapter 412 Half of the Country Falls_3 From the news coming from these two battlefields, both Chu armies appear strong, not mere feints designed to confuse, but their actual main forces. Considering the necessary forces that Chu State must maintain within its own territory. So now, does the entire Chu army¡¯s main force already consist of 6 million soldiers? 6 million peoplea€| Well, this number is indeed not unachievable. A decade and a half ago, at the peak of Liang, at its limit, it too had assembled an army of 6 million. Given that Chu State has taken over all of Yangzhou and parts of the Snowy Wilderness and Yong State, if taken seriously, it is indeed not impossible to muster such a large army. But hasn¡¯t Chu State already started immigration and reached a scale of tens of millions within its own borders? Under these circumstances, how did they manage to raise an army of 6 million? Even if it isn¡¯t 6 million, the mere possibility of raising at least 4 million, based on current estimates, is extremely frightening. The monarchs and ministers of Liang can¡¯t understand, truly can¡¯t fathom it. But whether they can comprehend it or not, Chu State¡¯s massive invasion is imminent, and they are looking at potentially losing half of the West Side of the country, even at risk of the Imperial Capital being taken. In these dire times, something must be done to turn the situation around. Summoning soldiers from across the country to defend the king is just the beginning. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Because even if Liang manages to call up reinforcements, they can, at most, assemble 1 million soldiers, and that¡¯s already the limit. Yet this mere million, facing this northern expedition by Chu State, could conservatively be 2 million, and potentially as much as 3 or 4 million. Even with some remnant troops from the Southern Line helping to contain, the monarchs and ministers of Liang still lack confidence. Thus, assembling a million soldiers is only to hold the city of Liang initially. As long as Liang is not lost and the Imperial Capital remains, they could, relying on the imperial legitimacy, endlessly recollect soldiers from the eight or nine secure prefectures in the rear, and dispatch them to the front lines for support. As long as these territories remain, Liang can continue to hold on. But if Liang were to fall, the Imperial Capital to be captured. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Even if the emperor could escape to the east and the framework of the court remains, would the dethroned monarch and officials be able to command the prefectural governors across the land? Moreover, without Liang as a barrier to block the Chu army, the Chu forces would be able to advance into the rear areas unimpeded, treating the entire eastern prefectures as their battlefield, rampaging at will, leaving Liang with no hinterland. Therefore, whether it¡¯s for the sake of their legitimate position or for preserving Liang¡¯s final piece of territory, Liang city must not be lost. And with a million-strong army defending it, it should be enough to firmly block the Chu forces, buying time for a response from the back. Therefore, in addition to ordering local rulers to defend the king, the monarchs and ministers of Liang also issued orders for various prefectures to immediately recruit soldiers, taking as many as they can get, all sent towards Liang. To repel this northern expedition by Chu forces, or even if unable to repel the enemy, to hold Liang, they must have around 2 million soldiers nearby at the very least. At the same time, as so many soldiers have been drawn from the hinterland and various border areas, these regions have also become extremely vulnerable. The North¡¯s Xu State, and Tang Kingdom to the Northeast, might take advantage of this opportunity to attack and kick us while we¡¯re down. Under these circumstances, after the mass withdrawal of troops, the local and border areas are in urgent need to rapidly form large numbers of new armies to fill these military vacuums. Considering all these factors, conservatively estimated, Liang will have to recruit at least another 2 million new soldiers to meet all the military demands. Therefore, right now, Liang needs to first hold Liang city, stall for time, and race for these new recruits to be trained and put in position. Once these 2 million new recruits have been trained, the number of soldiers Liang can command will reach 4 million; of these, more than 2.5 million can be deployed to fight Chu State on the Eastern Front. Then, they may attempt an eastern counter-offensive to reclaim lost territory. But, it¡¯s uncertain whether the numerous troops in the Eastern and Southern defensive regions will still be there by that time. However, the current rulers of Liang can no longer consider so much. Because by mid-May, Chu¡¯s vanguard had already broken through Liang¡¯s defensive blockade, with tens of thousands of Chu cavalry bearing down on the gates of Liang city. The beacon of war is truly igniting upon this foremost formidable city in the world. a€| Jiangxia city. While the beacon flames were rising in the North, at that same moment, this core city in the Southern defensive line of the two countries, also the capital of the Jiangxia prefecture, had finally opened its gates to the Chu army. The high-spirited soldiers entered the city through the wide-open gates with their banners fluttering in the wind. The flag of Liang, which had been flying on the city tower, was quickly taken down, replaced by the dragon banner of Chu State. Lu Yuan rode on a snow-white steed, accompanied by countless golden-armored soldiers, and entered this northern stronghold with majestic authority. On either side of the street, ranks of cheering Chu soldiers lined the way. From the houses alongside the roadway, pairs of fearful eyes peeked through the slits of doors and windows, watching this scene unfold. Feeling the heavy atmosphere, a surge of enthusiasm arose in Lu Yuan¡¯s heart, and he whispered, ¡°Liang, Central State, I have arrived.¡± To capture the Southern defensive line turned out to be easier than he had anticipated. It was mainly because Liang¡¯s Southern Line was too extensive, with 500,000 soldiers and nine Inborns required to defend numerous locations. Thus, when averaged out, the forces allocated to each key town were somewhat limited. Normally, this wouldn¡¯t matter much. If one key town were to be attacked and fall quickly, the news would still spread, and the forces from the other key towns could then be assembled to confront the invaders. With this mechanism, defending the Southern Line should not be a problem. But this time, the strength that Chu State deployed was far too great. Nearly 10 million soldiers and 60 Inborns, a disparity of over ten times, was enough to shatter any resistance. The Liang forces on the Southern Line didn¡¯t have time to react; the Chu army, several times more powerful, quickly surrounded them. Without sufficient strength to rally, they faced Chu¡¯s heavy punches as the less equipped forces. A million soldiers swarming a few tens of thousands; millions besieging over a hundred thousand; three to five Inborns attacking one; a dozen Inborns ganging up on one¡­ Examples of such occurrences were far too numerous. Under these conditions, the 500,000-strong Liang army on the Southern Line was swept away with ease by the Chu forces, more quickly than anticipated. The two northern prefectures of Jiangxia and Guangling held out for less than a month before falling completely into the hands of Chu State. Chapter 999 - Chapter 999 Chapter 413 The Azure Dragon Begs for Forgiveness ?Chapter 999: Chapter 413: The Azure Dragon Begs for Forgiveness Chapter 999: Chapter 413: The Azure Dragon Begs for Forgiveness The Chu army breached the city of Jiangxia, but Lu Yuan did not linger there for long. After a mere two days stationed within the city for some rest and reorganization, he led his troops to continue their advance northward. Indeed, the situation could be described as exceedingly favorable. All nine vanguard armies had achieved remarkable results; the East Sea Prefecture had been pacified, a large part of Xingyang County had been subdued, and the troops were in the midst of conquering the three prefectures of Jiying, Liang, and Chengyang. Even the capital city of Liang, Daliang, was now under the threat of the Chu army¡¯s sharp edge. The decision to dispatch the nine armies had already garnered a great deal of success. However, it was precisely for this reason that the reinforcements led by Lu Yuan, who were tasked with safeguarding the rear and filling in the battle lines, needed to catch up sooner. Although the nine vanguards were advancing irresistibly, they were after all, only nine hundred thousand strong. Now rampaging across five prefectures, as troops were dispatched, their forces were quickly diluted. At present, atop the front line of the three prefectures of Jiying, Liang, and Chengyang, Chu¡¯s military presence was less than two hundred thousand strong. Despite their sharpness remaining intact, with the arrival of the Liang state¡¯s loyalist armies to various locations, Liang¡¯s resistance was swiftly strengthening. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The vanguard armies were no longer able to guarantee the previously unstoppable progress. In the three front-line prefectures, both Chu and Liang had taken their positions, creating a stalemate. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? During such times, it was naturally impossible for Lu Yuan to sit idly by. Therefore, after conquering the city of Jiangxia and eradicating the last stronghold of the Liang army in the southern line, he decided to immediately lead his main forces northward to offer support. Liang country was caught off guard and in dire straits, the moment of greatest difficulty and urgency. Would it not be a waste of the thirty years of waiting and plotting if he didn¡¯t take advantage of this great opportunity to crush the opponent once and for all? Hence, after ordering Huang Lin to continue leading the western military expedition northward to attack Xingyang and Jiying, Lu Yuan led the central and eastern military expeditions towards the East Sea, advancing in the direction of Daliang and Chengyang. As for the prefectures and counties of Jiangxia and the Guangling region to the north that had already been conquered, they were handed over to the prearranged officials from the cabinet, who under the protection of the army, began to immediately establish government offices, assemble teams, and restore local production and stability. They were also to handle the immigration of new settlers rushing in from the south, aiding them in resettling within the various prefectures and counties to the north of the river. The number of civilians that Lu Yuan had relocated from the southwest and Lingnan amounted to over eighteen million, almost equal to the entire Northern Expedition force. Such a massive population, crowded along the banks of the Yangtze River in Jiangnan, consumed an untold amount daily. The security issues brought on by the large, idle crowd were also too numerous to document. Just half a year in, the local authorities along the Yangtze River in Jiangnan were already overwhelmed with complaints, continuously petitioning the government. They claimed that if the situation were not addressed, local grievances would boil over, possibly leading to an uprising. Naturally, Lu Yuan took this very seriously. With the Northern Expedition achieving some success, he immediately ordered the early resettlement of five million people in Jiangxia County and the Guangling region to the north. Though this territory covering one county and three prefectures was not vast, spanning only about seven thousand miles, The local population of both places was not large either, adding up to only about five million or so. Compared to Chu State in Jiangnan, where it was common for a single prefecture to have a population of ten million, these places had a sparse population. Therefore, relocating five million people there, despite the immense pressure, was not an impossibility. However, the recently settled Chu nationals might not be able to secure much fertile land and would need to reclaim wild land themselves, making the first few years quite arduous. But Lu Yuan had anticipated this and made preparations accordingly. To develop a new expanse of wild land into arable land would take three to five years before yielding any results. During this period, those citizens would largely depend on the support of the court. After three to five years, once the land development had made some progress, the immigrants would mainly be able to sustain themselves. However, at this time, their income would still be meager, barely enough to make ends meet, so they would need another three to five years of development before the court could levy taxes from these people. Thus, a single wave of migration, taking at least six years and at most ten, would be required before the court would see any return on its investment. With the current wealth of Chu State and the underlying strength of Liang to the north, if this Northern Expedition were to go smoothly, then after amalgamating the fourteen prefectures of Liang, the total population of Chu would reach approximately one hundred fifty million. Among them, about twenty million people would need to be resettled and supported as immigrants. This means that going forward, Chu State would need to use one hundred thirty million people to support and sustain twenty million people. The duration of this support would last from three to five years. While the pressure was considerable, it was bearable if they gritted their teeth. And if they could further absorb Wei Country and acquire its four prefectures and forty million people, then supporting these twenty million would become even easier. There would be no need to grit their teeth; they could complete this task with relative ease and prosperity. This was one of the reasons why Lu Yuan included Wei Country as one of the targets in this Northern Expedition. Because only by amalgamating Liang and Wei, then integrating them with Chu to consolidate the force of the Three Nations, could they sustain the annual immigration work of ten million people. The first batch of immigrants came from the most southern regions, the southwest, and Lingnan. Following them, Chu State also had seventy million people within its borders. If these were to continue in batches of twenty million, the process would take five years to complete. Chu State would need at least twenty years to successfully resettle all the people within its territory. Such consumption and pressure could not be borne by Chu alone; the incorporation of Liang and Wei was indispensable. Moreover, the sooner the immigration work was carried out, the better. Relocating immigrants to the north of the river this year and expecting them to cultivate was impossible. Chapter 1000 - Chapter 1000 Chapter 413 Azure Dragon Begging for Forgiveness_2 ?Chapter 1000: Chapter 413 Azure Dragon Begging for Forgiveness_2 Chapter 1000: Chapter 413 Azure Dragon Begging for Forgiveness_2 Lu Yuan thought, was to let them arrive at the immigrant location earlier, and then start cutting back the wilderness ahead of time to clear out a rough farmland, so that by the next year it could be cultivated. In this way, the grain harvested next year, even if the yield was low, would somewhat offset some expenses and reduce some of the imperial court¡¯s pressure. Similarly, the arrival of new immigrants would also change the demographic structure of Chu in Liang, diluting the number of locals. Compared to the Liang residents who were hostile toward Chu, these Chu people who migrated north sought to establish themselves in this unfamiliar place and naturally could only rely on the imperial government. From this perspective, they were naturally close to Chu. With these people around, Chu could quickly take root in Central State north of the river, establishing a foundational base in the locality so as not to become rootless driftwood. This was extremely beneficial for quickly establishing Chu¡¯s rule and stabilizing the locality. And relocating eighteen million people to the North wasn¡¯t actually that difficult. Jiangxia and Guangling had already arranged for five million people. Xingyang and East Sea, these two deeply controlled counties, could accommodate about ten million people. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?0 As long as the county governments were established and the suitable places for settling immigrants were organized, those waiting in Jiangnan could quickly catch up. Later, as the Chu army continued to conquer more counties of Liang and establish rule, the remaining immigrants could also gradually fill in. In short, settling eighteen million immigrants this year was not a big problem. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã? However, suddenly introducing so many outsiders naturally led to increased conflicts between people and land, which would definitely lead to dissatisfaction among the local Liang people. In the end, it might force many Liang people whose interests had been infringed upon to rebel and cause trouble locally. Therefore, to protect the immigrants and also to stabilize the locality, before leaving, Lu Yuan also set a plan. He prepared to leave five hundred soldiers and five hundred civilian workers in each county and five thousand soldiers and five thousand civilian workers in each prefecture in the areas of Chu occupied in the North. At the same time, the county capitals would retain separately one hundred thousand soldiers, and each would have an Inborn Grandmaster as the chief officer of the county, serving as absolute military support, ready to move at any moment. Such provision per county would ensure a force of three hundred thousand soldiers and one Inborn Grandmaster, which was absolutely sufficient for maintaining stability and suppressing the locality. With this force, they could adequately protect the immigrants and completely prevent any rebellion. After making these numerous arrangements, Lu Yuan then set off with peace of mind. On the fifteenth of May, the royal procession with the central and eastern armies arrived in Yan County, East Sea County. The army stationed there, and a royal command was issued for the accompanying officer Gao Xuanfeng to formally organize the government of East Sea County in Yan County and set up the county government team. Meanwhile, troops were dispatched to escort various prefectural and county officials to their posts in East Sea. During this time, Lu Yuan, who was resting in Yan County, also welcomed a visitor. ¡­ County town, Chu Emperor¡¯s quarters. In the study, Lu Yuan, who was engrossed in handling government affairs, finally took a break to receive the visitor. ¡°Elder Daoist Dongyun, pays respects to Your Majesty.¡± An elderly Daoist entered the room and, seeing the imposing emperor in front of him, immediately knelt down to pay his respects. ¡°Master Canglong, you are a leader of the Immortal Sect, an external scholar. You need not perform such a grand gesture.¡± Lu Yuan looked at the Elder Daoist kneeling below and spoke indifferently. ¡°Everything under the heavens belongs to the king; all within its borders are his ministers.¡± Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s words, Elder Daoist Dongyun did not rise but knelt down again and said, ¡°My Cang Long Way is in East Sea County, and now that East Sea County is under Your Majesty¡¯s control, I am indeed Your Majesty¡¯s subject. A subject seeing his lord must not overstep. Moreover, I previously assisted Liang against Great Chu, which was already an offense against Your Majesty¡¯s imperial power and is indeed deserving of death. Now that I face Your Majesty, I must ask for punishment. Previously aiding tyranny, all deeds were done by me alone and did not involve my Cang Long Way followers. If you should administer punishment, please punish me alone, I am willing to accept the punishment. The other followers of my Cang Long Way are willing to welcome the Heavenly Mandate and be loyal to Your Majesty. I beg Your Majesty, considering the ten-thousand-year heritage of my Cang Long Way, do not bring down your thunderous wrath, please spare our lineage of Dao.¡± With tears streaming, Elder Daoist Dongyun repeatedly kowtowed, pleading incessantly towards Lu Yuan. Lu Yuan watched the scene, his expression calm. He naturally knew why the Elder Daoist was behaving this way. In Qingzhou, where Liang was located, there have always been two major Daoist sects, one being the Cang Long Way of Pillar Dragon Mountain in East Sea County, and the other being the Cauldron of Immortals in Tiannan Mountain in Shanyang County. These two sects, situated in Qingzhou and closely allied with Liang, naturally supported it. Therefore, since the changing of extremes, these two sects have been supporting Liang, each cultivating eight or nine Inborns for Liang, giving their all. This time, when Lu Yuan went on the Northern Expedition, among the three Inborn stationed in Guangling County, two originated from Cang Long Way. One of these two was slain by a Lu Yuan Avatar, while the other was captured and is now under army custody, waiting to be dealt with. Such firm supporters of Liang¡¯s interests naturally became a target for Chu¡¯s crackdown. Thus, as the army went northward, once it reached East Sea County, Lu Yuan immediately mobilized one hundred thousand elite troops, along with the twenty Inborn with the army, and directly surrounded Pillar Dragon Mountain. Faced with such a formation, people within the mountains of Cang Long Way were naturally terrified. Although they too were a sect, in a time when all cultivators of the Nine Provinces had ascended, the so-called sect was merely a nominal claim. Currently, there were no cultivators within Cang Long Way, the high ranks were merely Inborn Grandmasters. Chapter 1001 - Chapter 1001 Chapter 413 The Azure Dragon Begs for Forgiveness_3 ?Chapter 1001: Chapter 413: The Azure Dragon Begs for Forgiveness_3 Chapter 1001: Chapter 413: The Azure Dragon Begs for Forgiveness_3 ¡°` Even the number of Inborn Grandmasters has dwindled significantly. As previously mentioned, over the years, Cang Long Way has continuously contributed numerous Inborn Grandmasters to Liang Kingdom, totaling eight. Of these eight, due to the wars between Liang Kingdom and its neighboring nations in recent years, three have fallen on the battlefield. The remaining five have been deployed across Liang Kingdom, serving as military generals commanding troops. The only true Inborn experts that remained within the sect¡¯s Mountain Gate were School Leader Dongyun and two other Inborn elders. In addition, there were over three hundred sect disciples, also remaining on Pillar Dragon Mountain. At this moment, these individuals found themselves encircled by Chu troops like dumplings, besieged on the mountain with no chance of escape. It was not just these Cang Long Way disciples but also some core believers in the surrounding area who were now under Chu army¡¯s control and had been captured. It could be said. Apart from those five Inborn Grandmasters serving important roles within the Liang military and a few sect disciples, the rest of Cang Long Way had fallen into Chu State¡¯s hands. Their fate and survival hung on Lu Yuan¡¯s single thought. In such a situation, let alone that Dongyun was now only a nominal Immortal Dao Sect Lord, even if he were the real deal, he wouldn¡¯t be able to display any staunchness. Seeing the sect¡¯s Dao Inheritance on the brink of extinction under his leadership, Elder Daoist Dongyun was naturally desperate and, after much pleading, finally managed to secure an audience with the Chu Emperor. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Leading to the scene at present. ¡°So, what you¡¯re saying is that Dao Lord Dongyun realizes the gravity of his sins and seeks my forgiveness?¡± Lu Yuan looked at the weeping Dongyun and calmly asked. ¡°Your Majesty, I indeed recognize my wrongdoing,¡± answered Dongyun in tears, raising his hand and swearing, ¡°As long as Your Majesty spares Cang Long Way, in the name of its leader, our sect will, generation after generation, willingly serve as vassals to Chu State. If I violate this oath, may my Daoist Path disciples perish, our Dao Inheritance cease, and Heaven and Earth alike forsake us.¡± Elder Daoist made a fierce oath. Those seeking Cultivation and Dao put great importance on oaths. The Heavenly Path may appear absent, but there is always a mystical response in the unseen. If you promise the heavens and then break your word, apart from being entangled by your inner demons, fate won¡¯t spare youa€¡±you¡¯ll face retribution. The higher one¡¯s Cultivation, the closer the resonance with Heaven and Earth, the greater the binding power of such oaths. However, in this Age of Dharma Decline, the Heavenly Path is cloaked, the Immortal Method severed. Regarding oaths, it¡¯s all in the heart whether to keep them or not; their binding force has weakened. Dongyun was well aware of this and his words now served more to express his stance. He could see clearly. The Northern Expedition mounted by Chu State was massivea€¡±a countless army was mobilized, and within just a few months, Liang had lost four counties, with the eastern part suffering the ravages of war, shaking even the Imperial Capital. Clearly, Chu State¡¯s Northern Expedition was a long-prepared affair. On the other hand, Liang country was caught completely off-guard, falling into the trap, and now teetered on the brink of extinction. Although Great Liang¡¯s capital still remained in Liang hands, temporarily stabilizing the situation, the state had not immediately collapsed. But regardless of whether Liang can resist Chu ultimately, it was clear-cut that returning the western countiesa€¡±Guangling, Jiangxia, East Sea, Xingyang, Jiying, Chengyanga€¡±was impossible; they were firmly in Chu¡¯s grasp. And for Cang Long Way, whose foundation was in the East Sea County, amidst these circumstances, unless they wished for their Mountain Gate¡¯s destruction, a broken Dao Inheritance, and dispersed disciples, surrendering to the new victor to court acceptance and forgiveness became the only option. Thus, no matter the cost, regardless of forsaking dignity, he had to seek the Chu Emperor¡¯s pardon. ¡°Now that Immortals are concealed and the talk of retribution for oaths seems ethereal and uncertain, do you think, Dao Lord, with nothing but words, you can convince me to accept Cang Long Way as perhaps a bit presumptuous?¡± said Lu Yuan indifferently. Originally, when Purple Cloud Dao allied itself, it was by selling out Ning Country completely in exchange for a chance to cleanse and emerge anew. Cang Long Way wants to be my dog without paying any price, merely with a word? Such good fortune doesn¡¯t exist. ¡°Two of our elders serve as major generals in Liang Kingdom, currently commanding a hundred thousand troops, stationed in Xingyang County. Additionally, two other elders also lead tens of thousands of soldiers each, serving as generals in Jiying County,¡± Elder Daoist Dongyun, catching the implication in Lu Yuan¡¯s words, immediately continued: ¡°If Your Majesty is willing to accept our Cang Long Way¡¯s allegiance, I am prepared to send word to these four elders, instructing them to rebel immediately and surrender to Great Chu. Furthermore, myself and the other elders and disciples are ready to leave the mountains and serve Great Chu.¡± The heart of Cang Long Way was in East Sea County. Taking the Mountain Gate as the core and radiating outward, their presence extended across the whole eastern part of Liang Kingdom. That is why many of Cang Long Way¡¯s Inborn experts who sided with Liang Kingdom also operated within this region, to ensure their sect¡¯s interests. With Lu Yuan¡¯s swift sweep through Liang¡¯s east, not only did he take down Cang Long Way¡¯s Old Nest, but he also cut off any retreat for the scattered disciples, truly netting them all in one fell swoop. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? And precisely because of this, Elder Daoist Dongyun was pressed into urgency. In switching allegiances, he directly involved the entire sect, selling them all to Chu State. Lu Yuan, listening to his terms, couldn¡¯t help but ponder. Xingyang and Jiying were under the jurisdiction of Commander Huang Lin¡¯s Western Military Expedition. Presently, these two counties harbored more than a hundred thousand remnants of Liang¡¯s army guarding the east of Xingyang and the north of Jiying. Among these remnant Liang forces, nearly half or more were under the control of Inborn experts from Cang Long Way. The Western Military Expedition, if wanting to swiftly eradicate these two forces, would need to expend two to three months and considerable effort. If they could now procure the assistance of Cang Long Way to make these remnant troops defect, not only would they gain over two hundred thousand Liang soldiers for free, but they could also save a significant amount of time and quickly stabilize the two counties. Before the north¡¯s Zhao Country reacted, they would build up a defensive line in Liang¡¯s east, blocking any attempt by the opposition to interfere in the war for Liang. ¡®This would indeed save me a lot of effort.¡¯ With this thought, Lu Yuan looked at Dongyun and said, ¡°Forget it, seeing how sincerely you have conducted yourself, I will pardon the crimes of Cang Long Way this time. Regarding your disciples leaving the mountain and the matter of having those four in the Liang army switch sides, you shall soon receive an imperial decree to proceed to the front lines of the Western Military Expedition, redeem your sins with contributions.¡± Upon hearing this, Dongyun was overjoyed and bowed in thanks, ¡°Your servant, no, your subject obeys, grateful for Your Majesty¡¯s profound grace.¡± ¡°` Chapter 1002 - Chapter 1002 Chapter 414 Iron Fist Operation ?Chapter 1002: Chapter 414 Iron Fist Operation Chapter 1002: Chapter 414 Iron Fist Operation Having accepted the allegiance of Cang Long Way, Lu Yuan waved his hand and sent Elder Daoist Dongyun on his way. A sect of Immortals had come running to offer their services, eager to be dogs, and he easily accepted seven Inborn individuals, which was indeed a delightful affair. However, he didn¡¯t pay too much attention to this. After cultivating Inner Strength for thirty years, the accumulation of Chu State had reached a terrifying level. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The advantage possessed by the First Emperor when he unified The world after striving for six generations was no more than this. Therefore, it was inevitable for Chu State to unify the Nine Provinces. This inevitability would not change due to Elder Daoist Dongyun¡¯s allegiance or resistance. In front of the more than a hundred Inborns of Chu State, the mere seven Inborns from Cang Long Way seemed insignificant. In such a situation, Lu Yuan truly didn¡¯t pay much attention to this matter, treating it as a minor affair. Moreover, the affair of Cang Long Way was just a beginning. As Chu State swiftly swept through the Nine Provinces, reaching places like Henan County and Shanyang County, sects like Jade Toad Way and Cauldron Path positioned above them would also come running to submit, just like Cang Long Way had. This was the trend of the times. With the outbreak of Chu State, as the advantages became apparent, anyone or anything that stood in its way had two choices: either conform to the trend and join Chu State, Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?0 There was no third option. As the protagonist leading this tide of the era, all Lu Yuan needed to do was to steer in the right direction, with resolute will, driving the chariot towards the destination he desired. Therefore, after Elder Daoist Dongyun left, he immediately invested his energy into this grand expedition. ¡­ Lu Yuan was very busy, indeed very busy. The command and mobilization involving tens of millions of people, a battlefield spanning tens of thousands of miles, and matters involving three provinces and four kingdoms were enough to generate a despairing number of incidents every day. Although he had sixty-four avatars assisting him with these trivial matters, these avatars would first filter out the less important issues, and then categorize and summarize the important matters before informing him through divine telepathy. But even so, the daily communication with his avatars almost left Lu Yuan with no time to sleep. On the first day of June, a civil uprising broke out in Yiyang Mansion of Jiangxia County. The local noble Lin Clan mustered a hundred thousand people to rebel, overwhelming the ten thousand soldiers and ten thousand civilian workers garrisoning the mansion. Within a mere two days, the Lin rebels had taken Fu City and raised the Liang banner. Hearing the news, Avatar Huang Yi, stationed in Jiangxia County, personally led an army of fifty thousand to suppress the rebellion, and the battle was currently in full swing. On the third day of June, in Hailing Mansion of Guangling County in the north of the Yangtze River, the local Chen Clan raised an army over dissatisfaction with Chu State immigrants encroaching on their mountain forest lands, gathering a crowd of ten thousand people. However, the garrison of the mansion reacted swiftly, striking the assembling rebels unexpectedly, crushing the enemy in one battle and capturing thousands. The entire Chen Clan, numbering over a thousand people, was executed, with their heads displayed across the three mansions of Guangling in the north of the Yangtze River, causing shock and unrest to subside instantly. On the seventh of June, at the front line in Jiying County, the vanguard forces engaged in a great war with Liang State. Outnumbered, they lost over ten thousand soldiers, forcing them to retreat three hundred miles to evade the enemy. In mid-June, upon hearing the upheaval in Liang State, Zhao State acted out of shock and immediately ordered its occupying army in the eastern region of Qingzhou to invade the northern part of Xingyang County held by Chu State. Fortunately, Chu State¡¯s reinforcement army arrived in time; three million troops of the western military expedition led by Huang Lin entered Xingyang, encountering Zhao State¡¯s invading forces of five hundred thousand. The two sides clashed at Guancheng. Facing the several-fold stronger Chu army, Zhao Army was defeated in a frontal battle, and Chu Army pursued them for hundreds of miles. Latter, Huang Lin sent out divisions, appointing another avatar Qinglingzi as deputy commander, leading three hundred thousand soldiers and seven hundred thousand civilian workers. Taking advantage of Zhao State¡¯s defeat and loss of their main force, they marched straight into the eastern region. Chu State officially engaged with Zhao State. Afterward, Elder Daoist Dongyun arrived and personally entered the main camp of Liang forces in the eastern part of Xingyang to negotiate surrender, causing two of the Inborn Grandmasters from Cang Long Way to rise in rebellion and turn against another Inborn Grandmaster of Liang State origin. With the cooperation of Chu forces, the remaining tens of thousands of Liang loyalists, along with that Inborn Grandmaster, were swiftly eliminated. Xingyang County was peacefully settled. Thus, after leaving an avatar and three hundred thousand troops to garrison the area, Huang Lin led the remaining forces north to continue the campaign against Jiying County. On the eleventh of June, Camp Commander Qingxuanzi of the eastern military expedition officially led the eastern military expedition and the central military expedition under the command of Lu Yuan to divide their forces, moving towards Chengyang County. On the twelfth, the governor of the East Sea County reported that officials en route to local posts were frequently assassinated by Liang civilians, resulting in heavy casualties among the officials, and many feared to take up their posts. On the thirteenth, the Xingyang County avatar reported that local affairs had been sorted, requesting officials to be dispatched, and immigration work could commence. On the sixteenth, local authorities in Guangling County to the north of the Yangtze River reported that immigrants in Lingting County were not acclimatized, leading to an epidemic, and thousands died. On the twenty-third, Sun Siwen from the capital Baling sent an urgent message that three granaries in the country, each holding five million bushels of grain, had caught fire. An emergency investigation was ongoing, and it was yet to be confirmed whether it was deliberate or accidental. At the beginning of July, continuous heavy rain for a month in Baling caused the Dongting Lake to overflow, leading to severe flooding in the county and hundreds of thousands becoming homeless. The immigrants settled along the Yangtze River were affected, with tens of thousands dying in the floodwaters. Mid-July, Linhai, Yuzhang, and Xiangyang counties all reported flooding simultaneously, with significant impact on the local and immigrant populations. The Cabinet sent an urgent message that due to the great floods within the country, there were issues with the transportation of grain, and logistical support might not keep up. Chapter 1003 - Chapter 1003 Chapter 414 Iron Fist Operation_2 ?Chapter 1003: Chapter 414 Iron Fist Operation_2 Chapter 1003: Chapter 414 Iron Fist Operation_2 At the end of July, due to a lack of food supplies, Lu Yuan, who had already led his troops to arrival in Liang County and was besieging the city of Daliang, had no choice but to temporarily cease military operations and withdraw his forces back to East Sea County. To shorten the supply lines and reduce logistical pressure. ¡­ Upon returning to East Sea, Lu Yuan felt somewhat depressed. This campaign against Liang County had ended abruptly. Hardly had he laid siege to Daliang when he was forced to withdraw his troops. Millions of soldiers had marched back and forth to no avail, leaving no one contented with the outcome. Yet discontent as he was, he had to accept the situation. ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï With so many issues locally and major flooding occurring behind the lines, along with a succession of natural disasters and man-made calamities, the joy over the victories of the Northern Expedition had been considerably diminished. Just then, bad news arrived from Xingyang Countya€¡±another aristocratic family had rebelled. At the same time, within the jurisdiction of that county, thirty-seven officials had been assassinated by Liang people this month alone, dying in the line of duty. Moreover, three immigrant villages of Chu people had been massacred by bandits, with over a thousand dead. Reading the news, Lu Yuan, already infuriated by the need to withdraw from the Northern Expedition, could no longer contain his anger. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? He immediately used his spiritual sense to contact the avatars stationed in the counties north of the river and issued orders. ¡°Effective immediately, if local officials are assassinated, and county-level officials die, regardless of the cause, all aristocratic families in that county will be exterminated, along with any Jianghu sects or factions. If a prefectural level official dies, regardless of the cause, all aristocratic families within that prefecture and the surrounding areas will be exterminated, including those in Fu City, factions, and sects. If any immigrant villages are attacked and massacred, then within ten miles surrounding the village, all landlords and strongmen shall be killed. If immigrants from Chu in any town are massacred, then in that town, all mercantile clans shall be eliminated.¡± Lu Yuan issued a merciless order of collective punishment. He had had enough of these incessant assassination attempts over the past few months. In just four or five months since crossing the river, over three hundred Chu officials sent to the north had been assassinated, with more than two hundred fatalities. More than a hundred immigrant villages had been attacked, with the immigrants in various towns being victims of attacks numbering in the thousands, and fatalities exceeding a hundred thousand. These assassinations and massacres had seriously impacted Chu State¡¯s rule over its occupied territories in the north. The immigrants were somewhat oblivious to all this, being out of the loop and unclear about their current situation in the north. Therefore, they were rather willing to relocate to the plains of Central State and did not resist the idea. But the officials dispatched to Central State by Chu were utterly terrified. Everyone knew that in Central State, many were out to assassinate Chu officials. And the chances and rates of assassination among officials were exceptionally high, as much as three percent, which is almost one in thirty. A death rate of one in thirty might not seem alarming since on the battlefield, death rates often exceed ten percent, even reaching as high as twenty percent, which is far higher. However, on the battlefield, those are soldiers; those in local offices are officials. One serves on the front line; the other at the rear. Can the two be equated? For officials, a death rate of three percent is quite terrifying and enough to frighten many. Assuming office in the north carries the prospect of wealth amidst danger, but it also means staking one¡¯s life. Many officials, hearing the horrors of the north and learning they were selected to serve there, would rather resign and face never being employed again than take their chances as officials in the north. Even some who had already arrived in the north abandoned their posts and fled. This shows how great the terror and impact of this assassination trend on Chu officials have been. These days, Sun Siwen has been constantly writing to Lu Yuan, lamenting that officials at home blanch at the mention of the north, making it increasingly difficult to mobilize scholars with credentials to come to the north. If this continues, it will be harder and harder to select enough officials to serve there, eventually leading to no one willing to go to the north. So the situation had become very dire. That¡¯s why, upon seeing the reports of officials assassinated and immigrants massacred yet again, Lu Yuan was so enraged. He knew that the only ones with the ability to assassinate Chu officials in the counties occupied by Chu forces in the north were the local aristocratic families and Jianghu sects. The soldiers of the Chu army were not weak. Platoon leaders who commanded fifty men were usually seasoned fighters of the third tier, or experts of the second tier. And within the platoon, the team deputies and some capable company commanders were generally skilled fighters of the third tier. The security details for officials in the occupied areas of the north were usually comprised of one or two platoons dedicated to the protection of county-level head and deputy officials, such as the county magistrate, county captain, and chief clerk. Other officials such as chief clerks, instructors, and catch officers were protected by a single company. Logically speaking, such security arrangements were already very strict. Yet even so, a large number of officials still met their deaths by assassination. To kill an official sent by Chu amidst the heavy guard of its soldiers, among tight defenses, would require an expert, and not just any, but one above the second tier. Or it would take the cooperation of several skilled fighters of the third tier to accomplish such a feat. Aside from the local aristocratic families and Jianghu sects, Lu Yuan could not think of anyone else capable of conducting such acts. And to these local powers, Chu was an outright invader, an enemy. Moreover, a large influx of immigrants from Jiangnan was continuously eroding and impacting their current interests. Chapter 1004 - Chapter 1004 Chapter 414 Iron Fist Operation_3 ?Chapter 1004: Chapter 414 Iron Fist Operation_3 Chapter 1004: Chapter 414 Iron Fist Operation_3 They were in the midst of their country being destroyed, their families perishing, and their interests harmed; it would be extraordinary if they harbored any favorable impressions of Chu State. And to openly take up arms against Chu State, every single suppressed rebellion, every family annihilated through collective punishment, served as a stark reminder, deterring them. Taking up arms was the most foolish of choices. But if taking up arms was out of the question, surely engaging in some assassinations, some surprise attacks in secret would be fine? If Chu State had no evidence, how could it possibly deal with me? As local powers, employing such tactics was all too easy for them. In fact, these people were indeed successful with their actions. In the face of those assassinations and surprise attacks, Chu State, despite being furiously enraged and desperately investigating, truly struggled to find any trace of these people and capture any evidence. Facing these troublemakers in the shadows, within the confines of the rules, the Chu army indeed had no way to deal with them. Those rats in the dark were probably gloating, mocking the stupidity of the Chu army. But now, as of this moment, I, the Chu Emperor, Lu Yuan, am not playing along anymore. I¡¯m flipping the table. You all thought I wouldn¡¯t dare to cause collateral damage, to implement guilt by association, that I could only abide by the principle that the law does not punish the masses? Now, I¡¯m done talking about evidence, done discussing the reasons. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï I¡¯ll simply assume that wherever there¡¯s trouble, the locals are at fault, and then I¡¯ll have them all killed. Lu Yuan doesn¡¯t believe it. Once those local noble families and sects are wiped out, without these leaders, will those suffering locals, who don¡¯t know what a country even is, still have the awareness to stand up and, in the name of national justice, oppose their own Chu army? ¡°It¡¯s good to exterminate those powerful families and Jianghu factions. Without them, the instability in the local area will disappear. By also cleaning them out, a huge amount of interests in the local area becomes vacant, and the court can step in to take over, acquiring a vast wealth. Perhaps the expenses of this Northern Expedition could be compensated for through this.¡± Lu Yuan whispered to himself, his murderous intent barely concealable. Perhaps having been the King of Chu, the Chu Emperor for too long, and after coming ashore, I¡¯m concerned about saving face, many think I¡¯m a gentleman, easy to fool. They¡¯ve forgotten the thunderous methods I¡¯ve employed back when I was a local warlord. Those smug people from Liang, let them get a real feel for what military governance with an iron fist is like. Lu Yuan had set his resolve: as long as there was unrest in the region, his butcher¡¯s knife would not cease. So, even if it meant carrying out a massive slaughter, even if it meant killing everyone in the entire north of the river, the Military Order had to be enforced. It¡¯s actually better if people are dead. When Chu State¡¯s immigrants come over, they can directly take over the houses and lands of the deceased, sparing us the need to clear new lands and saving the court a considerable amount of expenditure. Chu State has seventy million people, plus another twenty million from the vassal statesa€¡±ninety million in total, enough to fill half of Central State. He¡¯s not afraid of killing people; he¡¯s only afraid there won¡¯t be enough chaotic people to kill. ¡­ A crackdown to restore order with an iron fist thus rapidly commenced in the northern territories occupied by the Chu army, swiftly implemented with Lu Yuan¡¯s strong advocacy. Instantly, irrespective of good or bad, right or wrong, guilty or not, as long as Chu State officials or immigrants were killed, the powerful families of the Baidi, the Jianghu sects, were implicated in turn. The confrontation between the Chu army and the local Liang powers escalated to a peak in an instant. Countless local Liang powers rose in rebellion, and Chu State¡¯s previously stable territories were suddenly ablaze with conflict, the world descended into chaos. Numerous local nobilities rallied the chaotic people, countless Jianghu sects turned into assassins, launching attacks against Chu State. Lu Yuan retaliated with equal force. It just so happened that the millions of troops from the unsuccessful Northern Expedition against Liang had withdrawn, lacking a battlefield to fight on. Now that these rebels had collided with us, it presented a perfect opportunity to extend our military might. Lu Yuan distributed the millions of troops across the prefectures in the north of the river, and with the deployment of one or two hundred thousand men and twenty or thirty Inborn experts per prefecture, the iron fist swung down with utmost ferocity. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï The rebelling families, after being suppressed, were exterminated. The chaotic people who joined the rebellion, whether willingly or by coercion, were all branded as criminals. Their homes and lands were confiscated, and they were sent off into the wilderness to clear new lands. The confiscated houses and lands were directly allocated to the immigrating Chu State citizens, who moved in right away, instantly obtaining houses and land holdings. Between the local sentenced criminals and Chu State immigrants, their social statuses instantly reversed. As for those Jianghu figures who came to assassinate, their family members were pursued directly. Those Jianghu experts might have formidable martial arts skills that made them hard to trace, but their relatives, disciples, and followers might not possess such high-level martial arts skills. Facing the pursuit of the Chu army, these people struggled to escape. Once caught, they were immediately used to threaten the Jianghu figures, coercing them to surrender in exchange for the lives of their loved ones, and then they were executed under the law. At the same time, the Inborn Grandmasters were deployed, leading the Army¡¯s best in pursuit of the die-hard elements. This time, Lu Yuan assigned enough Inborn Grandmasters, averaging one or two per prefecture. This intense deployment was sufficient to severely control each region, allowing no criminal to evade capture. With the Inborn Grandmasters¡¯ overwhelming strength, those second-rate Jianghu experts, even if they wanted to resist to the end, simply couldn¡¯t last long. It didn¡¯t take ten days or half a month before they were captured and executed. And so, a fierce crackdown lasted two months, affecting two states and six prefectures, gradually coming to an end. Meanwhile, the Chu army, after suppressing over a thousand rebellions, annihilating hundreds of noble families, obliterating hundreds of Jianghu factions, and killing millions of people, finally secured stability over the territories in the north of the river that they controlled. In the local areas, anyone with dissenting thoughts was either killed off completely, eliminating future troubles thoroughly. Or they were so terrorized that they dared not harbor the slightest thought of rebellion. Lu Yuan¡¯s goal of quelling the region was thus perfectly achieved following the iron-fisted crackdown. At the same time. Time had also reached October. The heavy snow of the forty-first year of Shenwu first descended. And the floods in Jiangnan had gradually subsided over these few months. The first year of the Northern Expedition thus came to a temporary close. Chapter 1005 - Chapter 1005 Chapter 415 Surrounding Tigers and Wolves ?Chapter 1005: Chapter 415: Surrounding Tigers and Wolves Chapter 1005: Chapter 415: Surrounding Tigers and Wolves In the forty-first year of Shenwu, it was a year belonging to Chu State. Since the Chu army crossed the river in April, the great momentum that Chu State had amassed over time completely erupted and began to sweep across the entire world. As the foremost hegemon of the world, Liang crumbled at the first touch of Chu¡¯s assault. In just a few months¡¯ time, it lost one-third of its territory, and its capital city of Liang was once besieged by the Chu army, nearly leading to the nation¡¯s annihilation in a single battle. Back then, the hegemon of Central State who once faced down three adversaries alone, now seemed like a paper tiger before Chu, collapsing at the slightest poke. The contrast between then and now was simply jaw-dropping. Was Liang too weak? Thinking it over, it seemed that just five years ago, Liang had just thoroughly defeated Wei, Zhao, and Xu, instilling deep fear in the other states. Its fame was so illustrious that when Zheng Kingdom merely heard that Liang intended to move against thema€¡±without even confirming the newsa€¡± they hurriedly sought Chu¡¯s protection, offering money and ceding territory in hopes of diverting the disaster east and avoiding the threat of Liang. To say such a country is weak would be an immense insult to the defeated and terrified great powers. So, Liang was absolutely not weak. Even, atop the Nine Provinces, before the Northern Expedition of Chu, Liang was the number one hegemon in the world. They were the universally recognized first hegemon, achieving this status through their illustrious military achievements. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï And it was for this reason that the myth of being first, once broken by Chu, caused a shock to the hearts of the people of the world that was simply unimaginable. Chu State, as a result, attracted many troubles. ¡­ This winter, Lu Yuan spent his time in East Sea County. After half a year of campaigning, this county had become the hub for all the advance military camps¡¯ headquarters of Liang, with countless troops being stationed and dispatched here, serving as the heart. ¡°I can understand that Zhao has bolstered its defenses in its sole remaining county in Central State for its own survival, Xu has been scared into increasing troops in Le¡¯an, and Tang has taken advantage of the situation to attack Qingping Countya€¡±after all, they are trying to protect themselves and take advantage,¡± Lu Yuan, going through the most recent reports, felt a surge of anger: ¡°But what is Zheng thinking, joining in the commotion and reinforcing troops on the border of Yangxia, posing a threat to the rear of my main camp in Yangxia? What is their intention?¡± Tossing aside the report regarding Zheng, his dissatisfaction with Zheng Kingdom grew increasingly intense. The relationship between Zheng and Chu was originally very close. More than a decade ago, the two states had diplomatic relations, and after establishing good foreign relations, their communication was unending, with merchants and travelers bustling constantly, and exchanges between officials and citizens were extremely frequent. By last year, Zheng had ceded Yangxia County to secure Chu¡¯s protection, bringing relations between the two countries to a pinnacle. Perhaps it was precisely because of ceding Yangxia County that provoked the conflict between Liang and Chu, which led to the war that captivated the world this year. Then the outcome became awkward. According to Zheng¡¯s original plan, Liang was the largest state in the world, with Chu being the second largest. The power and strength of these two countries were far superior to all other nations. A conflict between these two states could not possibly produce a clear winner or loser in the short term. Although in Yangxia County, which is far from Chu¡¯s mainland, the strength and resources the Chu army could deploy were limited and could not match that of the Liang armya€¡± likewise, as the hegemon of Central State, Liang bordered six great powers and with pirate troubles in the South, too many enemies had sapped too much of its energy. Under such circumstances, the strength Liang could ultimately gather to confront Chu at Yangxia County was incredibly limited. One side unable to deploy much, and the other unable to commit fully, meant that the wars in Jiaodong and Yangxia were doomed to be a stalemate. Liang and Chu would thus keep pouring in troops and resources, falling into an endless cycle of attrition. Meanwhile, Zheng, taking advantage of the conflict between the two great powers, could focus on fending off northern enemies and developing domestic affairs, slowly building up strength to face more severe future challenges. Yes. From this plan, everything seemed perfect. The assumption was that Liang and Chu would actually proceed according to Zheng¡¯s expectations. However, the people of the world are not fools, and the Nine Provinces are filled with unpredictable and tumultuous momentum. Chu did come, and Liang followed suit; both indeed fought fiercely over Yangxia County. In the fortieth year of Shenwu, everything did go as Zheng predicted, staying within their control. But in this year, in the forty-first year of Shenwu, with Chu¡¯s sudden Northern Expedition, everything changed. Liang was swiftly defeated, its eastern third of the territory snatched by Chu. The remaining central regions, with the city of Liang at their core, also began to blaze with war. Liang and Chu engaged in fierce battle there, turning the entire central region into a land wreathed in flames of war. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï The weakness of Liang was suddenly laid bare for all to see. Everyone quickly realized that this once-great hegemon was now so frail that it seemed anyone could come and kick it while it was down. And so the wolves gathered. Zhao sent out its armies to Xingyang County, seeking to expand its territories in Central State while opportunity knocked. But they collided with Chu¡¯s main military camp and were instantly beaten to a bloody pulp. Not only did they fail to gain any benefits, but they were also pushed back to their Old Nest with half of their remaining eastern county seized. Had Zhao not seen the dire situation and immediately abandoned its Northern Border defenses to hastily draw another million-strong army from within the country to join this war, Zhao may well have been driven back to Hebei, giving up all the territories it had expanded into Central State over the past decade. Chapter 1006 - Chapter 1006 Chapter 415 Surrounding Tigers and Wolves_2 ?Chapter 1006: Chapter 415: Surrounding Tigers and Wolves_2 Chapter 1006: Chapter 415: Surrounding Tigers and Wolves_2 Even so, on the battlefield of Dongjun, Zhao only had 1.2 million soldiers and horses. Meanwhile, the Chu army¡¯s western military expedition, with the assistance of Cang Long Way, had successively pacified Xingyang and Jiying counties in the summer and autumn of this year, successfully completing the original set tasks. Therefore, the western military expedition, aside from leaving 300,000 soldiers and an Inborn to defend each of the three commanderies of Jiangxia, Xingyang, and Jiying, invested the extra two million soldiers into the warfare in Dongjun. With two million against 1.2 million, even though the Chu army included a large number of civilian workers and was thus of mixed quality, the sheer numbers had made up for it, and their actual strength was no longer inferior to that of the Zhao army. Not to mention, within the 1.2 million-strong Zhao army, there were also a large number of civilian workers and new soldiers, which was pretty much on par with the situation on the Chu side. When it came to the gap in Innate Combat Power, the difference between the two countries became even greater. After the western military expedition gained the support of seven Inborns from Cang Long Way, the number of Inborn Grandmasters directly reached twenty-seven, even after leaving three to fortify the expedition¡¯s jurisdiction. There were still twenty-four who could be deployed to the front lines of Dongjun. On the other hand, the Zhao. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 After years of war depletion, the number of Inborn Grandmasters in Zhao had dwindled to only twenty-one. Previously, during the battle with Chu¡¯s army in Xingyang County, the Zhao army suffered a crushing defeat. The leading Inborn Grandmasters were besieged by Chu¡¯s Inborn, resulting in the immediate fall of one of them. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?0 Inside Zhao, at least six Inborns were also needed to be retained in Hebei to secure the Northern Border and the hinterland. Therefore, the number of Inborn Grandmasters that could finally be deployed to the front lines of Dongjun was merely fourteen. With twenty-four against fourteen, and Chu¡¯s side having numerous Lu Yuan Avatars, equivalent to second-tier Inborn experts, the huge disparity and gap meant that the disadvantage of the Zhao army in combat was painfully obvious. After the initial skirmishes left three people seriously wounded, the Zhao no longer dared to engage in reckless warfare with the Chu army, avoiding direct confrontation. To resist Chu¡¯s aggressive invasion, Zhaojun was even forced to adopt a completely defensive stance. Centered on several key cities in Dongjun, all their troops were divided into three parts, ensuring each city could gather 300,000 to 400,000 soldiers and four or five Inborn. With large forces garrisoned in strong cities, they defended against Chu¡¯s onslaught. It must be said that facing such turtle shell tactics, the Chu army really had no good strategy. Huang Lin, leading the western military expedition, tried to attack for a while, but aside from losing over 100,000 soldiers, they didn¡¯t even manage to breach the outer defenses of Zhao¡¯s three key cities in Dongjun, which testified to their formidable defense. Seeing this, Huang Lin did not continue the assault and switched to besiegement, or building moats and strongholds, consolidating the territory already occupied in Dongjun, and began a standoff with the Zhao army. Zhao was indeed a dominant state controlling one of the Nine Provinces and one of the powerhouses amongst them. To defeat and subjugate such a formidable enemy by relying solely on the western military expedition was somewhat of a stretch. To deal with such a dominant state, the full strength of Chu was needed. Moreover, Chu hadn¡¯t initially planned to deal with Zhao, whose territory was not even part of their target. Being able to seize half of Zhao¡¯s Dongjun by opportunity was already an unexpected pleasure. Not being able to take the remaining half now was not a disappointment but rather an experience to be accumulated. Anyway, the ultimate fate of Zhao, which wished to take advantage of Liang¡¯s misfortune, was tragic. However, compared to Zhao¡¯s tragic situation, other hungry wolves that had not made direct contact with the Chu army were reaping great benefits from the downfall of Liang. Xu State, upon reinforcing Le¡¯an Prefecture and bringing its garrison to 600,000, turned to see that Dongping County next door, which should have had a border army of 300,000, had dropped to less than 50,000 after several withdrawals. Having 50,000 soldiers defending a county was sufficient for areas far from the warfront and central to the state¡¯s peace and stability. But if placed on the border with another country during this era of escalating wars and enlarging military scale, it proved extremely unreasonable, practically tantamount to being undefended. In Xu¡¯s eyes, Dongping County now seemed like a shy girl who had voluntarily undressed and opened her arms, casting flirtatious glances. Incredibly enticing, unbearably tempting. Tell me, faced with such temptation, to take action or not? Xu State took action. Without much effort, they mobilized an army of 200,000 from within the state and marched grandly towards Dongping County. They encountered little resistance along the way and took the county with ease. The Liang army in the county, as if anticipated, voluntarily withdrew upon seeing the Xu army¡¯s approach, retreating with the last 50,000 soldiers towards Dai Liang. Through such peaceful handover, Xu State easily captured its second prefecture in the Central State area, becoming the second biggest winner of the war after Chu. However, after taking Dongping County, Xu did not continue to expand southward. Even though the prefectures of Shanyang and Jiaoxi to the south of their controlled Dongping and Le¡¯an were in a similarly vulnerable state, Xu had the opportunity to take them if they wished to. Yet now, the situation in Liang¡¯s Qingzhou was truly perilous. Facing the assault from Chu, although Liang managed to fend off the first wave of Chu¡¯s attack using the strong fortifications of Dai Liang and a series of defenses centered around the city, thereby barely maintaining their regime, Chapter 1007 - Chapter 1007 Chapter 415 Surrounding Tigers and Wolves_3 ?Chapter 1007: Chapter 415: Surrounding Tigers and Wolves_3 Chapter 1007: Chapter 415: Surrounding Tigers and Wolves_3 However, Chu State¡¯s performance this year was simply too dazzling and frightening. No one knew whether after this winter had passed and spring had arrived next year, Chu State launched its second attack, Liang would still be able to hold on? If Liang couldn¡¯t hold on, then no matter how much territory Xu State managed to seize by moving south at this time, aside from further diluting its already scarce military force, giving Chu State the chance to defeat each in detail, there really seemed to be no benefit left. On the contrary, maintaining control over the recently captured Dongping and Le¡¯an counties seemed a not insignificant opportunity for Xu State to preserve. For these two counties were right next to Xu State¡¯s homeland. Should these territories come under attack, the country could quickly mobilize troops and supplies from inside to come to the rescue. Fighting a defensive battle at one¡¯s own doorstep, Xu State still had considerable confidence. Haven¡¯t you seen how badly Zhao was defeated, with its main forces nearly wiped out by Chu at Xingyang? But when Chu State¡¯s two million strong army charged into Dong County, didn¡¯t they also fail to take the territory from Zhao¡¯s hands? With this successful example, Xu State asked itself, defending Dongping and Le¡¯an counties, it still had considerable confidence. Thus, with this consideration in mind, after taking Dongping County, Xu State made no further moves. Even after seeing Liang so cooperatively hand over Dongping County, Xu State was quite satisfied and even took the initiative to contact the two countries, asking if they needed any financial or material support from Xu State to help resist the invasion of Chu State. Yes, it was assistance. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Facing the sudden rise of the huge entity that was Chu State, the countries of the Nine Provinces were not fools. They all understood that if Liang fell, then Chu State, having swallowed Liang, would truly widen the gap with other countries, and from then on, no one would be playing in the same league. With the conquest of Liang, Chu State would genuinely have the strength to challenge the world alone. Therefore, Liang absolutely must not be destroyed, and Qingzhou must not be fully surrendered to Chu State. By taking only Dongping County and then leaving the rest of Liang¡¯s territory for Liang to use as a base to contend with Chu State, Liang would become a barrier for the other countries, a shield against Chu State. In Xu State¡¯s mind, that was the thought. Support for Chu State was also done in this way. Undeniably. Despite the hatred burning in their hearts towards Xu State for taking advantage of the situation, the dire straits of the nation at that moment meant that, no matter how resentful Liang was, they couldn¡¯t bring themselves to refuse the olive branch offered by Xu State. In the end, they could only put on grateful smiles, effusively thanking Xu State for the aid. Then, taking the supplies provided by Xu State, they recruited troops and horses in the rear, continuing to face off with Chu at the front lines of Daliang. The blood of Liang¡¯s people had, at that point, become in effect a flesh and blood wall for all the countries. A wall standing against Chu State. Xu State reaped abundantly from its involvement with Liang. Tang, which bordered Liang, also didn¡¯t fare too badly this time. Upon receiving the news of Chu State¡¯s impressive prowess and Liang¡¯s crushing defeat, Tang, located in the northeast of Jingzhou, was shocked, but also quickly recognized this as an opportunity for expansion. To be honest, Tang¡¯s expansion in Central State over the years hadn¡¯t been bad at all. Starting from over a decade ago, after the splitting of Zheng Kingdom, Liang seized the opportunity and continuously infiltrated Northern Zheng. Ultimately, through a series of wars and diplomatic maneuvers, they successfully captured two counties in Yuzhou from Northern Zheng, earning their entrance ticket to Central State. If this trend continued, before Jingzhou was completely swallowed by the tide, Tang¡¯s expansion in Yuzhou could possibly advance even further, reaching the level of three or four counties. To have territory spanning three or four counties in the future Central State was an achievement that could make the likes of Wei, Zhao, and Xu envious enough to be torn apart, figuratively. But Tang was frankly not very satisfied with this result. Having a territory spanning three or four counties might enable Tang to maintain a status of a great nation in the future in Central State, but is being a great nation enough? Look at neighboring Liang, holding fourteen counties in Qingzhou, nearly monopolizing one entire province. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï That scale is what makes a hegemon. In comparison, a Tang with three or four counties was merely a second-rate small nation. What¡¯s more desperate is the fact that Tang bordered Liang. Bordering a country four or five times one¡¯s size was a hopeless thing to even think about. If Liang had any aspirations, then Tang, on its own, had no strength to resist whatsoever. And what about forming alliances with other countries to resist the invasion of Liang? Just look at the alliances and manipulations that occurred over the years in the land of the Nine Provinces, and you¡¯ll know the outcome. With disunited hearts, even a united front often stands no chance against a cohesive large nation. Previously there were Northern and Southern Zheng and Jin allying against Tang Xu¡¯s invasion, only to consecutively lose territory and erupt in internal strife. More recently, the United Army of Wei, Zhao, and Xu was decisively defeated by Liang at Changyuan, leading to the dispersion of the main forces of the three nations. Aren¡¯t these examples and the lessons they bring painful enough? So, as a participant in these events, Tang acutely knew just how unreliable it was to unite with others against a common enemy. Therefore, rather than hoping for sincere cooperation among various parties in the future, it was better to seize the moment to strengthen oneself, to become powerful enough to face any chaos in the future. Therefore, compared to Xu State, which ceased its advance and shifted to supporting Liang after taking one of its counties, Tang, upon seeing the same opportunity, not only dispatched eight hundred thousand troops but also directly took Qingping County from northeastern Liang. And they were still not satisfied. After leaving one hundred thousand troops to defend Qingping County, the remaining seven hundred thousand divided into two forces to attack the key regions of Jiaoxi and Donglai in the two countries. Aiming to maximize their territorial expansion and benefits while Liang was internally vulnerable. In this feast of gluttony, Tang opened its gaping maw, intending to binge at every meal. And then, they were taught a lesson. Chapter 1008 - Chapter 1008 Chapter 416 Tang Zheng Backstab ?Chapter 1008: Chapter 416 Tang Zheng Backstab Chapter 1008: Chapter 416 Tang Zheng Backstab Why does Lu Yuan harbor such hate for Zheng Kingdom? The reason lies right here. Initially, Tang Kingdom made exorbitant demands, aiming to swallow up three counties in the eastern part of Liang at once, almost hitting Liang¡¯s vital weakness, nearly knocking it to the ground. Why say so? First, let¡¯s see how much territory Liang actually has now. After the Northern Expedition of Chu, Liang lost half of Guangling County, one Jiangxia County, one Xingyang County, one East Sea County, and one Jiying Countya€¡±a total of four and a half counties¡¯ worth of land gone in one fell swoop. Since then, the east of Qing no longer belonged to Liang. Then, in the central part of Qingzhou, to the north, Xu State seized Dongping County, and Chu¡¯s eastern military expedition advanced into Chengyang County and Rencheng Prefecture. In these two counties, each occupied more than half of the territory, and the fighting with Liang was intense. Therefore, in the center of Qingzhou, Liang only held Liang County, Shanyang County, the northern part of Chengyang County, and the northeastern part of Rencheng Prefecturea€¡±roughly the territory of three counties. Moreover, these territories are all at the front line, where millions of Chu and Liang troops saw back-and-forth conflict, and the local population, affected by the ravages of war, fled and died in large numbers, turning the place into waste land. Such territory is fundamentally untenable for focused production, providing no revenue. Apart from using it as a defensive line, providing strategic value, it has no other benefit to Liang. Therefore, the real logistical bases for both countries are just a small slice of land in the eastern part of Qingzhou. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï That is, Qingping County, Jiaoxi County, Donglai County, Yingling County, and Jiaodong Countya€¡±the land of these five counties alone. But now what? Jiaodong County became a battlefield last year, with nearly three million troops from Chu and Liang clashing there. The impact of the war here is even more severe than in Liang¡¯s central part; naturally, it¡¯s impossible for this place to serve as a logistics base under such circumstances. Thus, in Qingzhou¡¯s east, the actual territory that can be considered as a logistical rear for Liang amounts to just four counties. Yet, even this four-county territory, Liang¡¯s last lifeline, has been utterly compromised by Tang¡¯s stab in the back. Qingping County was directly seized by Tang, and Jiaoxi County and Donglai County also faced an invasion by seven hundred thousand Tang forces. If these two counties are lost as well, then the only dependable territory left for Liang would be a mere Yingling County. With just this single county¡¯s land to rely on, supporting Liang¡¯s rapidly growing military size, which now numbers nearly four million troops and horses, is desperately impossible. No. Perhaps even this last county might not remain. Because nobody knows whether Tang, after taking Jiaoxi and Donglai, will continue moving south and snatch Liang¡¯s last peaceful Yingling County. After all, judging by Tang¡¯s current actions, the opponent simply doesn¡¯t care, showing no concern about whether they can hold off Chu¡¯s advance eastward after Liang¡¯s collapse. Although it is an age of great strife, with weak nations commonly forming alliances to oppose the strong, it has become a mundane affair. But not every country can take the long view, nor is willing to consider the future. Some are only interested in short-term gains, only caring about what can be obtained immediately, without worrying about what might be lost later on. From what we can see, Tang belongs to the latter. They don¡¯t care about Chu. They just want to take Liang¡¯s five eastern counties, to first devour this twenty thousand li of rivers and mountains, the population of several tens of millions, and reap the benefits before considering the rest. As for Chu afterward, having expanded nearly double after consuming Qingzhou¡¯s east, they deemed their strength no weaker than Liang¡¯s pre-war. With such power, they don¡¯t seek to beat Chu but, by adopting the tactics of states like Zhao and Xu, fiercely defending one territory should pose no real problem, right? Tang doesn¡¯t believe it. With millions of soldiers at the front line, could Chu really break through? Even if they did, it¡¯s no great loss. At worst, they¡¯d just give back the territory they¡¯ve taken and retreat with their troops back to Tang. After all, in front of Tang, there are Zhao, Xu, and Zheng blocking the way, and these countries are closer to Chu, sharing a larger border. The threat they pose to Chu is greater than that from Tang. If misfortune is to come, these three nations would suffer first, and Tang can lie low in the rear, continuing to benefit from playing both sides. Hmm, it must be said, this idea is indeed shortsighted. But it is also very realistic. One often does not feel the heat and pain until the fire reaches their eyebrows. Tang is such a state, and its monarch and ministers are such people. Even if other countries bristle with anger, they have no recourse against such a shameless nation. However, compared to the hatred of the other countries, Chu is naturally delighted. Tang¡¯s brilliant move, a surprise attack from the northeast, struck Liang¡¯s critical weak point in one go, a great help to Chu. In the face of such benefactors, the people of Chu are naturally immensely grateful. When Lu Yuan received the news, he immediately dispatched a messenger to Tang¡¯s main camp, hoping to discuss a joint attack on the Liang¡¯s forces. After all, regardless of whether Tang intends to take Qingzhou¡¯s east, it would be beneficial for both sides to first join forces and bring Liang to its knees. Without Tang¡¯s support, Chu would still have to grapple with Liang in Qingzhou¡¯s central Da Liang City, spending time and countless lives grinding down the central defense line, contending with Liang and the nations behind it. If Tang joins in, Chu could seize the opportunity of Liang being attacked from both front and rear, to first break its central defense line and claim the central counties. Chapter 1009 - Chapter 1009 Chapter 416 Tang Zheng Backstab_2 ?Chapter 1009: Chapter 416 Tang Zheng Backstab_2 Chapter 1009: Chapter 416 Tang Zheng Backstab_2 This is indeed a substantial benefit. As for the eastern part of Qingzhou and some territories occupied by Xu State in the north, we can wait to deal with the opponent slowly after swallowing up the central region and crushing Liang. Chu State still has many reserves of money and grain. This year, after a forceful operation cleaned up the western part of Qingzhou, many money and grains were also confiscated from the local noble families and sects. Plus, with the stable environment in western Qingzhou after the cleanup, it is expected that next year, these areas can begin production, providing money and grain tributes to Chu State, which is another source of income. Therefore, the reserves of money and grain in Chu State can be described as extremely rich. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï Thus, even if we continue to maintain the current 18 million troops and the 18 million immigration projects, we can still hold on for another two years. Having money and grain gives us confidence and morale. After Lu Yuan sorted out these family wealth gains, he made preparations for a prolonged war with Liang and other countries. This is also why he doesn¡¯t care that Tang Kingdom, after swallowing up the eastern part of Liang, might quickly swell into another Liang. A united Liang could be brought down by Chu in a year¡¯s time. Then a bloated Tang Kingdom, even though it may look huge and intimidating, could it really surpass the original Liang? It¡¯s just a remake of the Liang-Chu war, no, maybe it¡¯s an even more exhilarating and unrestrained Great War. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï So Lu Yuan is indifferent to Tang Kingdom¡¯s gains; the bigger the opponent¡¯s appetite, the better for Chu. Some things can¡¯t be immediately utilized just because they are consumed. Hasn¡¯t Chu faced numerous revolts from the local population in the eastern Qingzhou that it seized, causing much chaos? Even as Chu defeated Liang fair and square, there were so many dissidents and so much resistance. Would anyone respect a backstabber like Tang Kingdom, which is despised by all countries? Tang Kingdom may have good intentions now, but once it truly consumes the enticing poisoned apple, it will realize what kind of deadly poison lurks within the sweetness. And when the opponent is paralyzed by the poison, it will be Chu State¡¯s opportunity to step in and deliver the final blow. What a perfect plan, what perfect partners. Yet such a plan and partner were ruined by the emergence of Zheng Kingdom. Tang Kingdom¡¯s invasion of Jiaodong and Donglai counties suddenly split Liang into two. One part centered around Daliang in the central Qingzhou, the other around Jiaodong county in the eastern Qingzhou, though there are still some passages connecting the two territories. In reality, however, they have been divided in half, becoming enclaves in fact. Liang had amassed a large number of troops in both Daliang and Jiaodong. Now that these forces are divided and logistics are cut off, nearly all are in a doomed situation. Daliang is in a slightly better position, with support from Xu State and a strong country providing ample money, grain, and supplies; the logistics for millions of troops can still be maintained temporarily, and they won¡¯t collapse due to lack of food. However, on the Jiaodong side, the west and east are Chu, the north is Tang, and the south is the sea with pirates a€¡± it¡¯s practically surrounded by enemies and has become a death trap. With no logistics and not even a stable rear, more than a million troops of Liang are trapped in a hopeless situation, spelling inevitable defeat. The Chu army in Yangxia County only needs to exert a little effort to devour this force of Liang¡¯s army, achieving the greatest victory since the Northern Expedition. At this critical moment of life and death, Zheng Kingdom, which has always had good relations with Chu, acted. First, it cut off the logistics of the Chu army in Yangxia County, preventing Chu from obtaining supplies on the territory of Zheng. Then it dispatched the navy to blockade the sea routes and cut off the supply channels of the Yangxia Expeditionary Army from the mainland. Finally, it mobilized an army of 800,000 at the borders of Yangxia County within Zheng¡¯s territory, adopting a defensive stance against Chu¡¯s forces. All these actions illustrate Zheng¡¯s dread and hostility towards Chu. Obviously, after Chu demonstrated its intent to sweep through the entire Qingzhou, especially while there were still a million Chu troops in Yuzhou, Zheng Kingdom, located right next to Qingzhou, felt a profound threat and fear. Therefore, acting on survival instincts, Zheng did not hesitate to sever ties with Chu and made a show of containment and threat, signaling its support for Liang. Is it not said that this is the era of great contention? Originally enemies, suspicious of each other, Liang and Zheng immediately became allies united by the changing circumstances and mutual needs. Of course, although Zheng has started to lean towards Liang, it has past relations with Chu and has not truly burned bridges. For now, it has only made gestures of restraint and threat, not yet engaging in actual war with Chu. Indeed, Zheng¡¯s fear of Chu¡¯s fierce combat power is one reason why Zheng dares not wage war. In any case, Zheng, outwardly, does not dare to be an enemy of Chu. But do these pretenses really work? The logistics are cut off, 800,000 Zheng troops are watching closely, and even more Zheng forces are mobilized within the country, ready to march to the front line at any moment. In such circumstances, can the Chu forces stationed in Yangxia really act as if Zheng¡¯s army does not exist? Under Huang Xuan¡¯s leadership, the Yangxia Expeditionary Army suddenly found itself in the same situation as Liang¡¯s Jiaodong army immediately after Zheng¡¯s unusual activities. Chapter 1010 - Chapter 1010 Chapter 416 Tang Zheng Backstab_3 ?Chapter 1010: Chapter 416 Tang Zheng Backstab_3 Chapter 1010: Chapter 416 Tang Zheng Backstab_3 The supply lines were severed, enemies surrounded us on all sides. Without a doubt, Zheng Kingdom¡¯s backstabbing hit the Yangxia Expeditionary Army¡¯s vital point. With Zheng¡¯s containment, Chu forces had to dedicate most of their strength to deal with the threat from the direction of Zheng. The more Zheng took on over there, the less pressure Liang forces naturally had to bear. Therefore, Yan Yunqing, seeing that Chu forces truly could not spare any troops, made a decisive call, leaving only three hundred thousand troops to defend the two major cities in Jiaodong Prefecture. He then led the main force of seven hundred thousand troops back to attack Donglai and Jiaoxi Prefectures, teaching a lesson to those arrogant Tang forces. At the same time, the Liang messenger went to Xu State, requesting troop support to alleviate the pressure from Tang. After a series of persuasive arguments and thoughtful consideration, Xu Country finally decided that Liang truly could not fall at this time. They deemed Tang¡¯s opportunistic behavior excessive, posing a serious threat to the interests of all states, and that it must be contained and taught a lesson. Thus, Xu State deployed three hundred thousand troops from Le¡¯an Prefecture to march into Qingping County, controlled by Tang, cutting off the rear lines of the Tang forces advancing into Liang¡¯s hinterland. With their retreat cut off and being deep within enemy territory, the unguarded Tang forces naturally stood no chance against the joint strike of Liang and Xu. In just a month or two, under the fierce attack of the two nations¡¯ forces, they collapsed, and eight hundred thousand troops were annihilated within Liang territory. Liang forces successfully reclaimed lost territory and stabilized the rear again. Afterward, Yan Yunqing allocated two hundred thousand troops back to Jiaodong, bringing the military strength of the prefecture to five hundred thousand. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï He also dispatched two hundred thousand troops to Qingping County, joining with the three hundred thousand troops of Xu, similarly bringing the military strength there to five hundred thousand. In total, one million troops were amassed, forming Liang¡¯s defensive line in the east. As for Yan Yunqing himself, he led the remaining force of over two hundred thousand toward Rencheng Prefecture to contain the increasingly aggressive Chu forces, safeguarding the security of the hinterland. During this period, another event occurred. Tang suffered a crushing defeat and complete annihilation of eighty thousand troops, which can be described as a severe loss of vitality for the nation. This amount of damage, undoubtedly leaving the entire Tang nation outraged, was an insult they could not swallow. Therefore, upon receiving the news of the disastrous defeat, Tang immediately began recruiting and mobilizing new troops within the country, preparing to launch another expedition against Liang to regain their honor. But just as Tang was ready to send out troops, Xu demonstrated its military might at their shared border, posing a threatening and cautionary stance. However, these warnings proved to be ineffective. Because, in Tang¡¯s view, half of the reason for the previous disaster was Liang¡¯s backstabbing surprise attack. So whether it was fighting Liang or Xu, it was all about revenge, and there was no need for hesitation. But after Xu¡¯s stance was clear, Xu State astonishingly began to assemble a large force at Tang¡¯s border. Even Zheng, who they had always attacked, sent messengers to strongly advise and condemn them, urging them not to deploy troops against Liang. This left Tang feeling quite uncomfortable. On the west side of Tang was Xu, on the east was Xu State, and to the south was Zheng. These three states were undoubtedly the hegemonies of their respective provinces and powerhouses among the Nine Provinces. Yet, because of Liang, they all stood in opposition to Tang and portrayed readiness for war. This sudden deterioration of international relations forced the Tang monarch and ministers to reflect on whether their international stance might indeed have some issues. So, under the military pressure at the Xu and Xu borders, Tang, on the brink of recklessness, had to pull the reins hard, putting a stop to its plans to send troops. Although no more troops were dispatched, being threatened by the Three Nations still left Tang filled with anger. After abandoning the idea of deploying troops, they did not disband the army but continued to recruit new soldiers, expanding their military capabilities. And they increased the number of Tang troops from the initial one and a half million to two million. Clearly, having lost eighty thousand main troops, Tang was unable to withstand the pressure from neighboring states, and thus they had to choose to give in this time. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï But giving in did not mean giving up, nor did it imply submission. This time, not only did Tang not gain any advantage, but they also suffered considerable losses, undoubtedly nurturing hatred for Liang and Xu who caused their defeat. Perhaps Zheng and Xu ended up on Tang¡¯s list as well. This greedy Jingzhou Great Country was still accumulating strength, preparing for the moment to reveal its Sharp Teeth again. And in its periphery, its neighbors felt the pressure. Or rather, they foresaw the momentum of Chu¡¯s rise, that surging trend that would sweep the world, that torrent of the era. They did not want to become pebbles crushed under the wheels of the times, so they could only rise up in resistance now. Thus, following Tang, whether passively or proactively, the states began a new round of extreme military competition, initiating expansion of their forces. As for Chu, the leader of this era¡¯s momentuma€¡±having been backstabbed by Zheng, losing the chance to annihilate the eastern Liang forcesa€¡±began making their countermove. Two hundred thousand Chu navy troops took to the sea, carrying the five hundred thousand troops separated from the central expeditionary army to form a new waterborne expeditionary army; they sailed along the East Sea coastline toward Yuzhou. Under Huang Xuan¡¯s command, the Yangxia Expeditionary Army, upon confirming they could no longer threaten Liang in Qingzhou, finally followed Lu Yuan¡¯s orders. They abandoned the original plan to encircle Liang with the Western Expedition and turned to execute a new strategy. That is, the conquest of Yuzhou, or rather, of Zheng Kingdom. Yes, since they could not attack Qingzhou, then fine, they could always attack Yuzhou, right? You, Zheng Kingdom, wanted to clash with Great Chu? I will grant you this wish. The Yangxia Expeditionary Army of one million troops will no longer fight Liang; I will come for you instead. In the past, Lu Yuan¡¯s vengeance took ten years to serve. But now, he is the Chu Emperor, how could he stew over such an affront? Now he sought revenge from dawn till dusk. The traitorous Zheng Kingdom, he was determined to discipline. However, after getting angry with Zheng, a mere scoundrel, for a while and carrying out the retaliatory actions, Lu Yuan did not pay them much mind anymore. The Yuzhou campaign was important, but it was merely a skirmish in the greater Northern Expedition, unable to affect the main battle scenario. What was truly important was the main battlefield in Qingzhou. Therefore, his attention quickly shifted to another key player on the main battlefield, Wei Country. Chapter 1011 - Chapter 1011 Chapter 417 Lord Wei Hunts in the North ?Chapter 1011: Chapter 417: Lord Wei Hunts in the North Chapter 1011: Chapter 417: Lord Wei Hunts in the North This was the protagonist of Chu State¡¯s Northern Expedition, and in essence, there were three. Chu, Liang, and Wei, these three countries ranked first, second, and third in the world at that time, were the main characters of this Great War. However, in reality, after the Chu army¡¯s Northern Expedition, the attention of the world was not fairly distributed among the three protagonists, but was entirely focused on Chu and Liang. After all, this was Central State, at the heart of the world. And Chu State was originally the second largest country, whereas Liang was the largest, and the competition for the position of hegemon between the top two naturally attracted attention. As for the battle between the second and third places, by comparison, it was less surprising. Therefore, another protagonist, Wei Country, seemed like an invisible one, gloriously ignored by everyone. It was as if Wei Country was isolated from the entire world in an instant, looking somewhat desolate. Alright, it was indeed desolate. If it could be said that Liang had been instantly defeated by the Northern Expedition of Chu State and had lost half its territory, almost to the point of national extinction, Then Wei Country was already nearly extinct. Chu State¡¯s Northern Expedition was really too sudden. No one expected Chu State would suddenly make a move, and after it did, the strength it displayed was frighteningly strong. Wei Country was one of those who had not anticipated this. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï In recent years, the relationship between Chu and Wei had actually been very good, even better than with Zheng Kingdom. After all, separated by a vast sea, it was perilous and unpredictable for Chu State to communicate with the opponent, with too many variables. But Wei Country was different. Situated on the Northern Border, it shared a border with Chu State, with too many passages between Xiangyang and Nanyang, or between Hanzhong and Guannei, allowing for communication. In recent years, due to consecutive years of warfare, Wei Country¡¯s domestic grain production was affected, and it had to purchase grain in large quantities from Chu State to meet the needs of its people. Just this grain trade alone amounted to tens of millions of silver tales in transactions each year. As for other various types of goods and trade, they were even more numerous. And that¡¯s just economic exchange. Militarily, as early as twenty years ago when Wei Country annihilated Zhou, Chu already made contact with them. While Wei Country certainly made a significant effort in the destruction of Zhou Country, Chu¡¯s contribution could not be ignored either. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The first military exchange between the two countries had started a long time ago. In recent years, with the need to resist the Barbarian tribes on the West Side, Chu and Wei have never ceased small-scale military cooperation. Their forces often joined together to strike at the Barbarian tribes. And exactly because of these past successes, Wei Country had repeatedly invited Chu State to undertake a major joint military operation in recent years. To conduct a thunderous purge and completely eliminate the hidden dangers in the West. As for contacts in diplomatic channels, there were even more. Sending envoys every year, the exchange of letters between Lu Yuan and the Wei Emperor, mutually presenting gifts, and the interaction between high-level officials of both countries were too numerous to count. So no matter how you looked at it, ChuWei, with their close connections and friendly exchanges in economic, military, and political aspects, did not seem like they would come to blows. It was illogical and there were no signs at all. What good would it do Chu State to attack Wei Country? Just for Nanyang and Henan, these two areas of Central State? Yes, these two prefectures were located in Central State, with fertile land ideal as the foundation for a hegemonic state. But compared to these two small prefectures, wouldn¡¯t the dozen or so prefectures of Liang be more tempting? If you attack Wei, you will face the desperate resistance of the world¡¯s third strongest country, and whether you can take it down is also uncertain. But if you attack Liang, not only will Wei move its hand, but Zhao, Xu, Tang, and even Zheng from The North will be unable to resist joining in the battle. Don¡¯t doubt it, with Chu¡¯s call to arms, and the surrounding nations¡¯ jealousy and greed for Liang¡¯s solitary dominance over a province, this could definitely be achieved. And if achieved, it would be Chu leading an alliance against Liang, involving Wei, Zhao, Xu, Tang, Zheng, and other countriesa€¡±a six-nation coalition against Liang. Six ruling states ganging up on Liang, the mere thought of it was enough to get the blood pumping. Facing the encirclement of six hegemonic states, there was no doubt whether Liang could hold outa€¡±it was a certain defeat. When the time came for the countries to unite and divide Liang, each could take three to five prefectures. Wouldn¡¯t this be more desirable than grappling with Wei over two prefectures in Central State? In fact. There had always been such a sound on Wei¡¯s side, calling for Chu State to stand out, lead the various countries, and jointly punish Liang. This voice grew louder as the alliance led by Wei suffered defeat, a terribly crushing loss. In the past, Wei had aspired to be the Alliance Leader, to gradually gain benefits and prestige by striking at Liang, slowly suppressing Chu and becoming the second largest state in the world. So at that time, Wei was brimming with confidence, impassioned, sending envoys out to various countries year after year, inviting them to join the alliance and attack Liang. Then, Wei could be considered as having boundless glory. One after another, alliances were born under their initiative and indeed, they did achieve results in the campaigns against Liang over the years. For example, Zhao took over Dong Prefecture, Xu conquered Le¡¯an Prefecture, results achieved under Wei¡¯s alliance. But these were the allies¡¯ victories; as the Alliance Leader, Wei did not reap any benefits, but suffered only losses and ended up merely shouting loudly for nothing. Chapter 1012 - Chapter 1012 Chapter 417 Lord Wei Hunts in the North_Part 2 ?Chapter 1012: Chapter 417: Lord Wei Hunts in the North_Part 2 Chapter 1012: Chapter 417: Lord Wei Hunts in the North_Part 2 This matter, which didn¡¯t have much benefit, naturally led to considerable dissatisfaction within Wei Country. Many believed that the eastern expedition against Liang was pointless. It was purely a waste of national strength, sending one¡¯s own soldiers to their deaths. However, there were also many who thought that this was a critical moment for Wei¡¯s prosperity. After several alliances, various countries had gradually recognized Wei¡¯s dominant position in Central State. Especially Zhao and Xu, the two countries that had benefited from following Wei, were increasingly becoming Wei¡¯s little brothers, acting in international affairs with Wei at the forefront, seemingly only listening to their big brother. With these two little brothers united under Wei, the trio had formed an alliance that had leapt to become the premier force of the Nine Provinces. Even Liang, despite its strength, was at a disadvantage when facing this tripartite alliance. Under these circumstances, as long as Wei could maintain its momentum and draw more countries into the alliance, allowing its dominance to further expand, when enough countries joined the alliance and the underlying strength was sufficiently accumulated, they could certainly bring down Liang with sheer force and seize Central State. At that point, as the Alliance Leader, Wei, being the leader, would naturally claim the lion¡¯s share of the spoils of victory. Therefore, the current hardships were for greater gains in the future. This was a planning for a Hundred Years, and absolutely could not be abandoned. Thus, within the Wei court, one faction advocated withdrawal while another insisted on persistence, and they stood in opposition to each other. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The current Wei Emperor saw this, which is why, upon his ascension, he hastily triggered the Great War, a joint military attack on Liang by the three aligned countries. He aimed to defeat Liang and capture some territory. This was to soothe the gradually fracturing hearts within the country. So long as the war was a victory, it would not only sustain the conflict but also benefit Wei, taking care of the interests of both sides and enlarging the pie, sufficient to soothe the people¡¯s hearts. But a crushing defeat washed all of this away. It also made Wei recognize its own vulnerabilities and shortcomings, gradually awakening from the sweet dream of being the Supreme Dominator of the world. At the same time, Wei saw how quietly Chu, by simply cutting off supplies, had thrown the victorious after beating the three nations, now seemingly invincible Liang, into domestic chaos, almost causing it to collapse completely. This perfect maneuver instantly made Wei realize the true weight of Chu as the world¡¯s second dominator. Leaving Chu¡¯s other aspects aside for the moment, Just considering this financial power alone was enough to dominate the world. What is war about? It¡¯s about money and provisions. Chu had wealth and supplies, and internally it had been peaceful for thirty years; its population was incalculable. With money, provisions, and people, isn¡¯t that the equivalent of a limitless supply of soldiers and horses? Should Chu intervene, it¡¯s difficult to say whether it could beat Liang, but holding its own against Liang or at least achieving a stalemate in the short term should be no problem. And as long as Chu could hold off Liang¡¯s main force, how could Liang¡¯s rear guards and feeble troops possibly compete with the united forces of Wei, Zhao, and Xu attacking from behind? By then, with Liang¡¯s main force far at the Front line and Wei, Zhao, and Xu sneaking attacks from the back, it would likely be the end for small Liang! As long as Liang could be eliminated, even though Chu, as the Alliance Leader, would take the largest share, Wei, by contributing troops and effort, coupled with its own status, would surely be able to claim two or three regions from Liang, right? Although it seemed modest, it had already doubled Wei¡¯s territory in Central State. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Compared to the lack of major success from striving hard for over a decade, this was already a major success. Therefore, the proposal to bring Chu into the alliance and to nominate Chu as the Alliance Leader became the mainstream consensus in the country after Wei¡¯s devastating defeat at Changyan five years prior. This invitation to Chu for a large-scale joint military operation was seen by many people of Wei as a preview for future alliance cooperation between Chu and Wei. Thus, Wei attached great importance to this mission. After the two countries left the fortress, upon seeing Chu making a big splash in Yong West Helong and their own setbacks on the plains with slow progress, desiring to prove their worth and increase their bargaining chips in future invitations to Chu, Wei began to make vigorous efforts. First, in the third month, Great General Meng Chenglin abandoned the rear guard and led his main force deep into the plains, raiding Blackwater City in Huotuluo Country. This was undoubtedly a risky military movea€¡±just a slight mishap and hundreds of thousands of soldiers could be trapped in the plains with nowhere to bury their dead. But likewise, it was a clever move to break the stalemate. If successful, it could not only resolve the current predicament but possibly even annihilate Huotuluo Country in one battle, achieving the greatest result of the Western Expedition. Indeed, he gambled and won, or rather, won half the battle. The fifty thousand soldiers of the Wei Army, led by Meng Chenglin, indeed had successfully broken through Huotuluo Country¡¯s blockade and had made it to the capital, Blackwater City. However, the Wei Army¡¯s attack on Blackwater City was anything but smooth. The reason was simple. Near Blackwater City, Huotuluo Country had also amassed thirty thousand forces in preparation to launch another round of counterattacks and harassment against Wei. One side aimed to launch a surprise attack, and the other wanted to counter-strike, and both sides had gathered their main forces. Now, as they met below Blackwater City, a fierce battle was inevitable. Fairly speaking, as the third strongest country in the world, the quality of the army that Wei cultivated through systematic training was indeed not poor. Chapter 1013 - Chapter 1013 Chapter 417 Lord Wei Hunts in the North_3 ?Chapter 1013: Chapter 417: Lord Wei Hunts in the North_3 Chapter 1013: Chapter 417: Lord Wei Hunts in the North_3 Meng Chenglin¡¯s assembled main force of five hundred thousand was considered the cream of the Wei army. When he led this elite force to launch a surprise attack on Blackwater City, they clashed with the Heturulo army below, and instantly gained a tremendous advantage. The elite main force of the Heturulo army was simply no match for the Wei army in head-to-head combat. Not to mention that their main force was only about three hundred thousand strong. Whereas the Wei army had a full five hundred thousand men. One side was more elite and numerous, and the other had lower combat power and fewer people, leaving no suspense as to who would win or lose when the two sides clashed. Under the fierce assault of the Wei army, the Heturulo army suffered successive defeats, losing a hundred thousand soldiers and proving to be no match. What about the Wei army then? Although they won battle after battle and conquered numerous enemies, they too were having a tough time. Because once the Heturulo army realized they were no match for the Wei army in a frontal engagement, they simply stopped fighting head-on. After losing several battles, the remaining two hundred thousand Heturulo troops withdrew straight into Blackwater City. They then relied on the fortifications of this strong city to hunker down and engage in a war of attrition with the Wei army. How difficult is it to attack a well-maintained city with ample money, grain, and a strong defensive force? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Just look at the siege of Great Liang City by the Chu State. Lu Yuan, leading a massive army of three million, went to besiege Great Liang City, but facing a city with a mere six hundred thousand defenders, they couldn¡¯t breach the outer defenses after more than a month. Let alone capturing Great Liang City, they didn¡¯t even manage to break through its perimeter defenses or reach the city walls. In the end, due to various issues in the rear, they had to retreat when supplies ran out, temporarily ending the siege of Great Liang City. Although Blackwater City was just a steppe city and its scale and defense were far inferior to Great Liang¡¯s, it nevertheless possessed the necessary attributes of a dominant country¡¯s capital. With two hundred thousand Heturulo troops holding the city, Meng Chenglin¡¯s force of just over four hundred thousand had no chance of taking it by storm. Thus, after nearly a month of siege, the Wei army lost more than a hundred thousand men, soldier¡¯s morale wavered, and they failed to capture Blackwater City. On the contrary, the Heturulo army inside Blackwater City saw their numbers swell as various forces from the steppe gathered to support them. They slowly outnumbered the Wei army, reaching around four hundred thousand. Meanwhile, Meng Chenglin¡¯s forces, after consecutive losses, dwindled to just over three hundred thousand. And these three hundred thousand men, with wavering morale, exhausted officers and soldiers, sagging spirits, and cut-off logistics, faced a shortage of supplies. The downsides of employing a cunning strategy were now manifesting themselves. Meng Chenglin¡¯s decision to lead an army on a surprise attack on Blackwater City indeed had an astonishing effect, significantly intimidating and shaking the Heturulo army. However, because he failed to quickly seize the city, or ration the supplies within to his advantage, his raiding force fell into the Heturulo army¡¯s encirclement, cut off from the rear and trapped in a dire situation. By that point, even if he wanted to retreat, it was impossible under the scrutiny of hundreds of thousands of Heturulo soldiers, deep within enemy territory. The ultimate fate of his forces remained unknown, as no further news came out. Only messages from the steppe indicated, the rear guard of five hundred thousand left by Meng Chenglin, along with tens of thousands of civilian workers, came under frenzied attack from the Heturulo forces after the main army withdrew. In the end, nearly a million of these individuals were killed or injured, with more than half sustaining casualties. The remnants, upon retreating back to Wei Country, were captured by the Chu army, which had already taken over the Guannei Prefecture, and all became prisoners of war. Yes, prisoners of war of the Chu army. After Meng Chenglin ventured deep into the steppe, Huang Xin conveyed a message to Lu Yuan, prompting his true self to launch the Northern Expedition. As the first avatar to sense the opportunity arise, his reaction was swift. After realizing that Wei Country¡¯s main force could not return in a short time, Huang Xin decisively abandoned the newly conquered Helong region, led his troops back, and launched a surprise attack while Wei Country was completely unprepared. After leaving a million civilian workers as reserve forces to defend Hanzhong, the remaining 1.4 million army marched directly into Guannei Prefecture. ?¦Ï??0.§ã? Then, with a million elite main forces drawn away and forty thousand troops from the Northern Border allocated to guard against the southward-moving barbarians from Yan State, Guannei Prefecture, where the Imperial Capital was located, was left with only a hundred thousand Wei defenders, and only three Inborn Grandmasters. One hundred thousand men against 1.4 million, ten Inborn against three. Such a huge disparity in strength, and with the added disadvantage of being caught off guard, left them fundamentally unprepared. ¡°How are you supposed to fight this?¡± In fact, it was impossible to fight at all. When the monarch and ministers in Chang¡¯an City received the news that Chu Army had suddenly turned hostile and an army of over a million had struck Guannei Prefecture, everyone was stunned. After their initial bewilderment, extreme panic set in. Anger, fear, dread, chaos¡­ These emotions and scenes played out in rotation in the imperial court. Then, under the continuous threat of the advancing Chu army, even with hearts filled with reluctance and anger, the Wei state¡¯s ministers had no choice but to make a painful decision, a Northern Expedition. However, as soon as this decision was made, urgent news came from Nanyang. The Chu army had suddenly crossed the river and launched a surprise attack on Wei forces in Nanyang Prefecture. The Chu army¡¯s onslaught was fierce, and their numbers seemed beyond count. Now, just a few days into the battle, the spearhead of Chu army was already directly pointing at Nanyang Prefecture city. The Nanyang defenders numbered just over two hundred thousand, with only three Inborn, not at all a match for the Chu army, who were urgently requesting aid from the court. Hearing this news, the Chang¡¯an monarch and ministers, who had initially planned the Northern Expedition, suddenly halted their steps. Not only did Chu State dispatch troops to attack Guannei Prefecture from Hanzhong, but they had also started action against Nanyang? And judging from the report from Nanyang, the number of Chu troops there seemed even greater than in Hanzhong Prefecture. It made sense. Nanyang Prefecture, being closer to the Chu capital Baling and having the Han River and the Yangtze River as water routes for transporting supplies, naturally found it easier to mobilize a large army compared to crossing the numerous mountain ridges from Hanzhong. Thus the main force of the Chu army was in the east. Guannei here was just a diversion. Realizing this, the Wei state¡¯s ministers quickly revised their plan. The original Northern Expedition was immediately changed to a retreat. The east was already a dead end; combined, Henan and Nanyang prefectures had no more than five hundred thousand Wei soldiers. This force, facing millions of Chu armies, could hardly be of significant use, and even defense was extremely difficult. Going there would be like walking into a trap, foolishly running into the encirclement laid by Chu. On the other hand, in the northern Shuofang Prefecture, there were still four hundred thousand elite main forces from the Northern Border, and it connected directly to the steppes, where they could immediately communicate with over a million forces on the grasslands. If they could contact Great General Meng Chenglin and have him lead his troops to return swiftly, then after the two forces joined, they would have two million soldiers and more than ten Inborn. At that point, moving southward to clash with the Chu army, they would have a fighting chance. Chapter 1014 - Chapter 1014 Chapter 418 Lingering on in a Desperate Situation ?Chapter 1014: Chapter 418 Lingering on in a Desperate Situation Chapter 1014: Chapter 418 Lingering on in a Desperate Situation It can be said that the emergency changes made by Wei State¡¯s ministers indeed salvaged the nation¡¯s fate. For at the time they were preparing for the Northern Expedition, the Heyang Military Expedition of Chu State had already dispatched a vanguard of about four hundred thousand light infantrymen who swiftly advanced, bypassing the prefectures and counties along Nanyang and directly invading the territory of Henan Prefecture. Behind them followed another two hundred thousand elite Chu troops, along with over a million civilian workers making up the rear army, advancing in an imposing manner. Within the territory of Henan, the Wei Army left to defend held only about three hundred thousand men, with likewise merely three Inborn individuals present. This strength, although not weak, was absolutely incapable of suppressing the invading Chu forces. Even the mere thought of hastily conscripting some civilian workers to help defend the city was somewhat difficult. Because the Chu Army¡¯s arrival was just too fast and too urgent. So fast that they could not react in time, so urgent that they had no time to resist. It was as if overnight, the heavens had changed. The Chu Army suddenly appeared beneath their walls, suddenly breached their cities, and suddenly wreaked havoc across all of Henan. Like thunder, like a gusty downpour, leaving no time for anyone to adjust. The Northern Expedition, which Chu State had been preparing for thirty years, involved countless plans and consumed immense effort. Now, all that had turned into fuel, powering the army as it crushed the entirety of Henan. Of course. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Although the Chu Army¡¯s arrival was swift, indeed catching the Wei Army off guard, a long-distance raid of over a thousand miles would ultimately not be easy. By the time the Chu Army arrived in Henan and launched their first wave of offense, they were more or less at the end of their strength. The four hundred thousand vanguard troops only occupied some secondary lines in the southern part of Henan. After establishing their footing, they could only fortify the cities and regroup, waiting for reinforcements. Although the fighting at the front lines continued, it was but a selection of elites occasionally harassing the Wei forces in Henan. Wei Country still had three hundred thousand troops here, not a significant numerical difference from the vanguard, and with the advantage of the local terrain, they had access to immeasurable resources and manpower. With these advantages, they could easily bridge the small gap in numbers with the Chu Army. What¡¯s most important was, as the focus of Wei State¡¯s development over the past decade, Nanyang and Henan Prefectures were the core regions that absorbed the culmination of all Wei Country¡¯s efforts and energy. A large portion of Wei Country¡¯s immigrants had already relocated to these two prefectures, and together with the original Zhou Country immigrants, the total population of these two prefectures was almost thirty-four million. With such a large population, a mere push for mobilization could summon countless militia armies. Adding to the slightly fierce martial culture of Wei Country, the actual war potential of these two prefectures was not small at all. The only drawback was probably the issue of grain shortage. Almost half of Wei Country¡¯s annual grain consumption was purchased from Chu State. But now as Chu and Wei were at war, and the countries had become enemies, Chu State¡¯s grain could naturally no longer be sold to Wei Country. Therefore, although there was no lack of population on the Wei side and they could draft large numbers of troops at any time, how to feed these people became a problem. But now, in this moment of life-and-death struggle, who would care if the army could be sustained? The Chu Army came surging in, their forces numbering in the millions, seemingly covering the sky and pressing down like dark clouds on the town. In such circumstances, when the Wei forces deployed a wave of troops to the battlefield, before long, they¡¯d be completely depleted. Thus, the so-called difficulty of sustaining a large army was in fact non-existent. Therefore, in this critical moment, the governors and commanders of Henan and Nanyang in Wei Country, after brief consultations, rapidly reached a consensus. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Conscription, wide open conscription. In every prefecture, county, and village town still under Wei control, as long as they were men able to wield weapons, no matter their age, all were forcefully enlisted into the army as soldiers. In the years of great contention, competition had intensified, and the scale of military engagement had grown ever larger. Almost every country had already experienced to some extent a shortage of military forces. Therefore, to solve this problem, the system of universal military duty had become inevitable. All countries had universalized military education, namely the training of Village Braves during farming off-seasons that Lu Yuan had initiated at the beginning of his rise. So these conscripted Wei Country Village Braves actually had some military training, and with a bit of organization, they became an army that could be put to use. Although such an army might have a shortfall in strength and could not fight directly on the battlefield, they were perfectly capable of defending a city. Before the start of the Northern Expedition, Huang Yun reported to Lu Yuan that the martial spirit in Wei¡¯s Guannei Prefectures was strong, and the local Village Braves were formidable, comparable to the regular troops of any prefecture or county. When attacking this area, it was not enough to only consider Wei¡¯s regular military forces; the local men who grew up in that culture also had to be taken into account. Gathered together, these people constituted a significant military force that could not be ignored. On account of this report, Lu Yuan revised the Northern Expedition plan, adding a Hanzhong Military Expidition at the last minute. And in the Wei regions of Nanyang and Henan Prefectures, although their martial spirit was slightly inferior to that in Guannei and Shuofang Prefectures, it was still not to be underestimated. A conscription order was issued. After initial panic and confusion subsided, the Wei forces that came to their senses quickly conscripted a tremendous number of Village Braves in both prefectures. In just a short half-month period, the number of Wei troops in Nanyang Prefecture surged to a million. The Wei Army in Henan Prefecture directly broke through two million. With a population of thirty-four million, if all able-bodied men were directly drafted, the limit could even reach tens of millions of Village Braves and civilian workers. Chapter 1015 - Chapter 1015 Chapter 418 Lingering on in a Desperate Situation_2 ?Chapter 1015: Chapter 418 Lingering on in a Desperate Situation_2 Chapter 1015: Chapter 418 Lingering on in a Desperate Situation_2 At this time, only just over two million people had been mobilized, which could not be considered full mobilization, but merely an initial one. Therefore, as time passed, and as Wei Country slowly came to its senses, the numbers of the Wei Army would continue to increase, further expanding upon the existing base. After all, Wei Country was the third largest in the world, having been the Alliance Leader of Zhao Xu for over a decade; its status as the big brother was unquestionable. For Chu State to suddenly annihilate it was indeed a challenge, to say the leasta€¡±it was not something that could be easily accomplished. To eliminate Liang, Lu Yuan had used four military expeditions. To eliminate Wei, however, there were only two. To be honest, this indeed seemed to underestimate Wei Country; to be on the safe side, three military expeditions should have been used for sufficient assurance. Fortunately, before attacking Wei Country, Chu State had executed a strategy to lure the enemy away from their base, tricking half of their main force out of the country. This dealt a blow to the strength of Wei Country that could barely be considered equivalent to a military expedition. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Nevertheless, even so, the desire to quickly eradicate Wei Country was still fraught with difficulty. As it was before our eyes. In Henan and Nanyang, the sudden surge in manpower produced three million soldiers of the Wei Army; the Heyang expedition had difficulty suppressing them. And this difficulty would only deepen and intensify with time. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The only piece of relatively good news was that in Nanyang Prefecture, due to the Chu Army¡¯s sudden raid, more than two-thirds of the prefectures and counties were controlled by the Chu Army before the Wei Army could react. Although Nanyang Prefecture later came to its senses and began military mobilization in earnest, relying solely on the one-third of the prefectures and counties under its control, the total population was only about five million. From this population of five million, being able to produce a million-strong army was already the limit. After that, even if more soldiers were to be conscripted, the Wei Army in Nanyang Prefecture would not have the potential to do so. As a result, the Wei force that Chu State had to contend with here was roughly around one million men. It was different with the Henan Prefecture though. Because of Nanyang Prefecture acting as a buffer, Henan received the news in time and reacted much faster. Despite the swift advance of the Chu Army¡¯s light infantry taking them by surprise, they initially lost quite a few prefectures and counties during the combat. But once the vanguard of the Chu Army exhausted their last bit of vigor, the Wei Army that reacted quickly rearranged the defensive lines and strengthened the defense against the Chu Army. The Chu Army managed to seize only one-fifth of Henan Prefecture¡¯s prefectures and counties. And as Henan Prefecture was a region heavily cultivated by Wei Country, even setting the Eastern Capital there, its population was greater than that of Nanyang Prefecture. The total population of Henan Prefecture was about twenty million; by now, they had lost one-fifth, but there were still over fifteen million people left. With this number of people, raising an army of three to four million was not a problem. This quantity of soldiers, to tell the truth, was already comparable to the Heyang expedition. If another million from Nanyang Prefecture¡¯s Wei Army were added, just in terms of numbers, they would surpass the Chu Army. However, although the Wei Army had the numerical advantage, they were completely crushed by the Chu Army in terms of quality. The Heyang expedition led by Qingyunzi consisted of approximately one million soldiers. Meanwhile, the Wei forces of Henan and Nanyang prefectures had only five hundred thousand soldiers to begin with. Now, under the sudden attacks of the Chu Army, these Wei forces suffered heavy losses, and the remaining troops likely totaled less than three hundred thousand. With three hundred thousand soldiers against one million, the disparity in numbers was indeed vast. Therefore, although the Chu Army of the Heyang expedition numbered only three million, when faced with the Wei Army, which had inflated to nearly four million, they still held a substantial advantage. On the battlefield, it was a complete rout. However, the Wei Army was aware of its own weaknesses. Thus, after taking several losses in the initial exchanges, they abandoned the idea of direct confrontation and the intention of driving out the Chu Army. Instead, they adopted a strategy of staunchly defending the cities, focusing on defense. The civilian workers conscripted on an urgent basis were not fit for hard battles, but fighting while guarding the city presented no problems. With the support of the city walls, one civilian worker could face one Chu soldier and be used as a combatant. Leveraging this advantage, they could diminish the gap between both sides. Faced with the Wei Army¡¯s stubborn defense, Qingyunzi really didn¡¯t have many good approaches. What can you do when a person turns into a turtle, retreating into its shell? After several probing attempts, Qingyunzi could only give up on a direct assault and began a stalemate of attrition. The Wei Army had the advantage of defending their home territory, relying on the benefit of strong fortifications. On the Chu side, naturally, they also had their advantagesa€¡±plentiful money and grain. The Wei Army¡¯s decision not to engage in direct combat with the Chu Army but instead to engage in a long siege taking advantage of their own strengths also played into the hands of the Chu Army¡¯s advantages. Let¡¯s not forget, almost half of Wei Country¡¯s grain supply came from Chu State. Their domestic grain self-sufficiency rate was only fifty percent. Meaning even in times of peace within their own country, they could only satisfy half of their grain consumption. The remaining half of the population would go hungry. Now, amid the great war between the two countries, Henan and Nanyang, which were originally the heartland of Wei Country, had been invaded by the Chu Army causing complete chaos. Almost all the able-bodied men from both prefectures were conscripted into the military, leaving behind only some of the elderly, weak, women, and children. How much can these weak groups cultivate the fields, how much land can they plow? So, without a doubt, this year¡¯s grain production in the territories controlled by Wei Country in these two prefectures will see a dramatic plungea€¡±that is certain. When the grain harvest falls short, the two prefectures¡¯ grain shortage will not just be one half but possibly two-thirds, or even three-quarters. Chapter 1016 - Chapter 1016 Chapter 418 Lingering on in a Desperate Situation_3 ?Chapter 1016: Chapter 418 Lingering on in a Desperate Situation_3 Chapter 1016: Chapter 418 Lingering on in a Desperate Situation_3 Most people won¡¯t have enough rice to eat. If they don¡¯t have enough rice, they can only starve to death. Eating soil, eating grass, even resorting to cannibalism, these kind of tragic scenes will all be played out on this land. If such a scene really occurs, ask yourself, if you were a conscripted Wei soldier and you knew that your family back home was facing this tragic situation, would you still have the heart to fight to the death against Chu people? Moreover, they themselves might be starving and personally experiencing this tragic situation. If these things truly erupt, the morale of the Wei Army would inevitably plummet, and its people¡¯s hearts would scatter. Let alone fighting, if there weren¡¯t a mutiny or rebellion with everyone killing the instigators, it would be like the sun rising in the west. Just the issue of insufficient grain alone is a deadly weakness for the Wei soldiers on both sides. This is also why Lu Yuan, after assessing the potential of Wei Country, despite knowing that the opponent¡¯s strength was not weak and that merely relying on two military expeditions probably wouldn¡¯t suffice, still decided to mobilize his troops. That¡¯s because the opponent lacks grain. As long as he grabs hold of this vital point, he has in fact seized the whole of Wei Country. Therefore, at this moment, Qingyunzi is not anxious about the slow progress in these two provinces. He simply has people firmly hold the current region, while clearing out the Wei resistance within the occupied areas, coordinating with Lu Yuan¡¯s iron-fisted campaign, to purify the two provinces. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? What he did most, then, was send messages to the rear, telling them to hurry up and transport grain over. Yes, transport grain. Since they already know that within the Wei-controlled areas, a tragedy is about to unfold. How could Chu State not prepare for this? In the two provinces, there are still about twenty million people under Wei control. All these Wei people, being descendants of the Three Emperors, do not have much cultural barrier with Chu people and can be directly assimilated and absorbed. To Lu Yuan, these people are also a precious resource, providing him with Qi Luck, soldiers, and various resources. He did indeed once say that for the peace of Central State, he wouldn¡¯t hesitate to eliminate half, or even most, of the population. But that was just to show determination. If he can stabilize the region without killing, Lu Yuan naturally wouldn¡¯t want to commit such slaughter. So even if they are Wei people, if he can save one, he would still be willing to try his best to save them. The world is in chaos, why should the innocent suffer? The lords of the Nine Provinces have already caused much suffering to the people because of their struggle for imperial power. Now that Lu Yuan has the ambition to pacify the world and restore peace to the Nine Provinces, naturally he must start from this moment. He regards the people of all countries as his own, the Nine Provinces as his world, the common people as his children, so as not to fail in through them, acquiring everything. This could also barely count as a trace of his compassion. Of course, he¡¯s not purely playing the saint. Qingyunzi¡¯s gathering of a large amount of grain in Henan and Nanyang and stockpiling it there, also serves to disintegrate the resistance of the Wei Army. Just think about it. You¡¯re there, starving, practising child exchange for food, witnessing unnatural tragedies occur. Over here, we have our fill at every meal, rice wafting its fragrance, even wine and meat to enjoy, life couldn¡¯t be more carefree. Comparing both sides, if you were a Wei soldier, what would you choose? Most likely, a single bite to eat would easily tempt the Wei Army to defect. A bag of rice could persuade a city to open its gates. This is not a joke, but a bloody reality made for survival. Hoarding grain, what¡¯s being stored isn¡¯t just grain, it¡¯s the hearts of the people, the momentum, the world. In Henan and Nanyang, the Wei Army may still be stubbornly resisting and even controls most of the area. But these two provinces, in essence, have already turned into a deathtrap. The monarch and ministers of Wei Country in Chang¡¯an, if they really chose to hunt to the east, would surely enjoy temporary peace. But such tranquility wouldn¡¯t last two months before they, along with the entire nation¡¯s subjects, would starve and people would start to eat each other. Moreover, if they fled there, Chu State could block Guannei and Shuofang, trapping them like turtles in a jar, unable to escape even if they grew wings. Faced with such a future, only a fool would go there. On the other hand, hunting in the north towards Shuofang, albeit remote and impoverished, would offer the plains to their east, where their own million-strong army still remained. To the south lay Guannei and Chang¡¯an, where another hundred thousand-strong army stood watch, along with hundreds of thousands of Village Braves and civilian workers who had answered the call to gather. These people were still holding fast to the capital in Chang¡¯an, still enduring the siege in various key cities within Guannei, serving as a southern shield as well. To the east was Zhao Country, Wei¡¯s ¡°little brother.¡± Alright, now that Wei had fallen on hard times, the opponent certainly no longer wanted to be its ¡°little brother.¡± But after all, the two countries had been allies for decades. Now that Wei was in dire straits and Chu was rising, posing a threat to the security of all nations, there was still some foundation for Wei to seek aid from Zhao. Even if Zhao refused to send troops to help, if they simply provided some monetary and grain aid to Wei, just as Xu State had for Liang, there would be no problems whatsoever. As long as Zhao could provide grain, Wei¡¯s biggest issue of food shortage could find relief. You say solving the food problem of the whole nation is indeed a stretch. After all, the population currently under Wei¡¯s control also amounts to over twenty million. Reliance on Zhao alone certainly wouldn¡¯t be enough to sustain them all. But to solve the food problem for the several millions of the army temporarily conscripted by Wei, that could just about be managed for a while. As long as they could hold on, Wei could still withstand the threat, and its dynasty could continue. Even if, in the end, they really couldn¡¯t bear it any longer, there in Shuofang, Wei still had a northern escape route. If it came down to it, they could just return to their Old Home in Yan State and start fighting over territory with the southern migrating Barbarians anew. Although nowadays, only a few counties in the southern part of Yan were left habitable due to the invasion of the cold climate. And these habitable territories were shrinking more and more. Possibly within a decade or so, Yan would be finished. But within these ten or so years, can¡¯t people still live there? Moreover, the southern lands of Yan, home to nearly ten million south-migrating Barbarians, were once scoffed at by Wei, who felt they were difficult to civilize and would be a hidden danger if integrated into the nation. But now, having fallen into such a state, who were they to be choosy? A population in the millions, if united, could also form the foundation of a powerful state. If, in the end, they really couldn¡¯t stay in Yong State any longer and had to retreat to their Old Home in Yan, subdue those Barbarians, and establish another Wei, there would still be a chance to start all over again. Therefore, Henan is a deathtrap, whereas Shuofang is the chance for survival. The monarch and ministers of Chang¡¯an in Wei Country saw this very clearly. So after swiftly moving the capital and leaving behind a prominent minister to defend Chang¡¯an, Wei then announced the establishment of a new northern capital in the Shuofang town of Lingshou, where the Emperor and ministers would reside and handle domestic affairs. Meanwhile, a Messenger was sent out to Zhao Country, requesting that this former ¡°little brother,¡± now their lifeline, offer assistance. In addition, an order was issued to establish defensive zones within Guannei and Heyang, dispatching prominent ministers and princes of the Clan to both places to prepare for resisting the Army of Chu. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Well, after such turmoil, the decrepit small court of Wei, under the heavy blow from Chu, just about managed to find its footing to carry on somehow, but it was merely struggling to survive. The ultimate future prospects, truly uncertain and hard to predict. Chapter 1017 - Chapter 1017 Chapter 419 The Unbearable Winter ?Chapter 1017: Chapter 419: The Unbearable Winter Chapter 1017: Chapter 419: The Unbearable Winter ¡°` Upon giving the matter some thought, Lu Yuan understood the intentions of the Wei Country court. However, he wasn¡¯t too worried about this situation. To withstand Chu State, Liang not only had to rely on its own considerable foundation but also the support from Xu State behind the scenes. But the confidence of Xu State in supporting Liang was based on a precondition. That was because Xu State was located in the rear and did not share a direct border with Chu; thus, its homeland had not experienced any significant wars. Benefiting from the national stability, Xu State could concentrate without distractions from other affairs and give enough resources to support Liang. This was the core essence of the matter. Xu State could have this condition because Liang stood in front, ensuring its safety. But can you, Zhao Country, have such a condition? ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Don¡¯t forget, Zhao Country¡¯s Dongjun is currently facing the invasion of Chu State¡¯s western military expedition. Two million Chu troops are amassing in Dongjun, constantly threatening the security of Zhao Country. To resist Chu¡¯s forces, Zhao Country also had to station over a million troops in Dongjun, resulting in a stalemate between the two countries. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï In such a situation, Zhao Country had its hands full, so how could they have the capacity and intent to help Wei Country? And even if they wanted to help, they simply didn¡¯t have the capability to do so. The development cores of Wei, Zhao, and Xu countries in recent years were actually along the same path. That is to gradually abandon the old territories outside Central State and focus on developing the lands they had seized in Central State. Namely, Wei Country¡¯s Henan and Nanyang prefectures, Zhao Country¡¯s Dongjun and Xu Country¡¯s Le¡¯an Prefecture. To develop Henan and Nanyang prefectures, Wei Country relocated over three-quarters of its population there and established an Eastern Capital in Henan called Heyin. This treatment was essentially that of the future Imperial Capital. Zhao and Xu countries were similarly not far behind. In Dongjun, two-thirds of Zhao¡¯s population, over sixteen million people, settled there, making it the wealthiest region in the country. At the same time, they also established a South Capital in Dongjun, called Diqiu. Now, Zhao Country¡¯s main force in Dongjun was principally concentrated near Diqiu City, contending with Chu¡¯s forces. As for Xu State, because it was far from the combined forces of Zhao and Wei, making it difficult to cooperate, it was not as aggressive. It only moved half of its population, around twelve million people, to Le¡¯an Prefecture and also established a South Capital called Leling. Does this explanation make things clearer? Zhao Country moved a large number of people and focused on developing Dongjun, of which Chu State occupied half, causing Zhao to lose nearly a third of its population almost instantly. Meanwhile, another third of the population also faced a severe threat from Chu, perpetually covered by the shadow of war, with a vast number of able-bodied men being conscripted and unable to settle down for production. In this scenario, it was tough for Zhao Country to continue fighting on its own, let alone spare any effort to assist Wei. For Wei Country to get sufficient funds and grain from Zhao to support their wars in Heyang and Guannei was purely wishful thinking. Sending messengers to ask Zhao for help might end up not getting any funds or grain, and even worse, Wei might lose a significant amount of their own resources. Therefore, in the long run it is uncertain, but in the short term, Zhao cannot provide any help to Wei. But considering Wei¡¯s current situation, let alone the long term, it¡¯s doubtful they could even hold out in the short term. So, after confirming the annihilation of the opponent¡¯s army on the plains and the secured situation on the battlefields of Henan and Nanyang, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t pay much attention to the affairs of the Wei court anymore. This little court, now relocated to Shuofang in the North, might still be able to maintain its dynasty and possibly keep Shuofang within its grasp. Because Lu Yuan had very little interest in this northern border prefecture, which could only exist for twenty or thirty years at most. However, there was no issue for Chu to take over the remaining Guannei, Henan, and Nanyang prefectures. In at most a year and a half, the above-mentioned prefectures will all belong to Chu. The most splendid territories of Wei will be controlled by Chu. And what storms could Wei, having lost these territories, possibly stir up with only a population of a little more than three million in Shuofang Prefecture? This third strongest nation in the world, although appearing to be still formidable with some qualities of a hegemon at this moment, is essentially destined to weaken once one peels back the surface. A small court tucked away in safety is hardly worth much attention. Lu Yuan simply reminded Huang Xin to ensure the defense arrangements for Hanzhong and the Guannei prefectures and to be wary of invasions from the Yong West and the southern steppe Barbarians. He told Qingyunzi to quickly wrap up the Heyang battlefield and then to divide his forces to support the Guannei battlefield, but afterwards, he didn¡¯t invest much more effort. Compared to the decided state of Wei¡¯s battlefront in Yong State, the much grander and turbulent Qingzhou battlefield involving multiple countries was more worthy of his attention. ¡­ Spring snow bloomed, and the bitter winter began to recede. In the blink of an eye, a new year arrived, and time moved forward to spring in the forty-second month of Shenwu. The cold winter of the previous year, like a detailed narrative, vividly conveyed the hardships of the nations. Chu faced hardships, with eighteen million troops and eighteen million immigrants, as well as millions of domestic disaster victims, rapidly depleting thirty years of accumulation. Liang faced hardships, having lost half of its territory all at once; the Imperial Capital within range of enemy strikes, surrendered its status as the world¡¯s foremost hegemon in one battle, becoming a complete joke. ¡°` Chapter 1018 - Chapter 1018 Chapter 419 The Hard-to-Endure Cold Winter_2 ?Chapter 1018: Chapter 419 The Hard-to-Endure Cold Winter_2 Chapter 1018: Chapter 419 The Hard-to-Endure Cold Winter_2 Wei Country struggled to survive, having lost half of its territory, with the Imperial Capital hunting in the north, nearly becoming a marginalized little court. Zhao Country struggled to survive, its core-operated Dongjun was attacked by the Chu army, with alarms ringing daily in South Capital¡¯s Emperor Hill, leaving almost no peaceful days. Xu State struggled to survive, in order to curb Chu State, to protect its own barrier, the entire nation gritted its teeth and sent food and fodder to its former enemy Liang, nearly emptying itself. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Tang Kingdom struggled to survive, originally invading Liang to pick off easy benefits, but ended up being sandwiched between Liang and Xu State, losing eight hundred thousand troops in one go, nearly half of its main forces gone. Even when it wanted to retaliate, it faced threats from all surrounding powers, an extremely stifling situation. Xu State struggled to survive; as it continued to advance southward, the territory of southern neighbor Jing Kingdom kept shrinking, replaced by the growing resolve of Jin Country to resist. Especially with Zheng Kingdom regaining unity, once again becoming a power not inferior to Tang Xu, regaining the ability to interfere in other countries¡¯ affairs. Therefore, in the face of the aggressive Xu State expanding to the east, Zheng unhesitatingly chose to support Jin Country, bolstering this former enemy as its eastern barrier. Facing the alliance of Zheng and Jin, Xu State had to temporarily avoid the limelight and stop its southern expansion. Meanwhile, next to them, Tang Kingdom¡¯s power was also rapidly expanding. In recent years, spurred by unknown motivations, its desire to expand had become particularly intense. Now, regardless of the interests of other countries, it aggressively cooperated with the Chu Army in suppressing Liang, recklessly rushing forward. Facing such a neighbor with strength, capability, no bottom line, and very capable of stirring up trouble, even Xu State felt a headache and dread. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? It abandoned its southern expansion not solely due to the alliance of Zheng Jin but also out of fear that Tang might stab it in the back. Jin Country likewise struggled to survive, with Xu State to the north having seized three of its counties and still coveting to head south. To the south was Zheng, which had unified and greatly increased its power, completely cutting off Jin¡¯s hopes of compensating the loss in the north with gains in the south. Facing the squeeze from the two powers Zheng Xu, Jin Country was like a small boat in a storm, at risk of capsizing at any moment. Zheng Kingdom had it even harder, originally Chu State as a good eastern barrier, suddenly rose to power. Mighty Liang, the Supreme Dominator of the world, almost perished under Chu¡¯s strike. Chu State quickly changed from a barrier to Zheng¡¯s largest threat in the east. Therefore, in order to resist and prepare for this threat, Zheng had to deploy troops to contain the Chu army and coordinate with other countries to support Liang. The relationship between Chu and Zheng turned sour in an instant. By the end of September last year, when Chu¡¯s million-strong army in Yangxia County directly abandoned Liang and turned their heads to invade Zheng¡¯s adjacent Gao Mi County. The relationship between the two countries went from allies to irreconcilable enemies. Although Zheng had gathered eight hundred thousand troops in Gao Mi, which was not much less than the strength of the Chu army. Yet facing the elite selected by Lu Yuan from all over Chu in the Yangxia Expeditionary Army camp, they were still somewhat difficult to withstand. After just over a month of fighting, Gao Mi lost nearly half of its territory, and the battlefront showed signs of collapse. What¡¯s more distressing for Zheng was that. As the main force on the Gao Mi front line was tied up by the Chu army, Changguang County, located behind Gao Mi, suddenly also fell victim to a surprise attack by the Chu forces coming from the sea. Zheng¡¯s hundred thousand naval troops in Changguang, facing Chu known for its navy, were wiped out in one battle. Lacking the barrier on the water, Chu¡¯s fifty thousand land troops carried by the naval expedition landed in Changguang, began rampaging through Zheng¡¯s rear. The remaining two hundred thousand Chu navy troops began to blockade Zheng¡¯s sea routes, penetrating inland along the rivers, and started to seal off its waterborne trade routes. After its betrayal, the retaliation from Chu unfolded vigorously on the lands of Zheng. The luxury of two-front expansion that Wei enjoyed, this former ally of Chu, was now experiencing it too. One wonders how they felt about it. Not just the Nine Provinces, but even the countries to the west of Yong and the southern plains, like Bahan Na Country, Moro Country, and Huotuluo Country, were also not having an easy time. The former two, in their clashes with the Chu forces on the Helong Battlefield, suffered a crushing defeat. Both countries lost more than a million people each and a significant amount of territory. Although the territories lost were swiftly reclaimed following the retreat of the Chu army. However, the loss of population was not something that could be regained with the recovery of the territories. For both countries, a sudden loss of over a million people was heartbreaking, even bone-deep. As for Huotuluo Country, it goes without saying. The five hundred thousand strong Wei Army led by Meng Chenglin had gone straight to its capital. Although in the battle for the capital, the Wei Army was gradually defeated due to a cut-off supply, outnumbered by the increasingly larger Huotuluo army. But still, Meng Chenglin¡¯s elite Wei troops, even facing an impossible situation, should not be underestimated for their last stand. To eliminate this Wei force, Huotuluo Country sacrificed more than seven hundred thousand lives, even more than those Wei soldiers killed, to achieve the final victory of the war. But even so, Huotuluo Country did not manage to capture Meng Chenglin or other high-ranking Wei military officers. Except for three Inborn Wei generals who were unable to retreat in time and got dragged down by Huotuluo soldiers, ultimately dying stubbornly in the throngs of enemies. Chapter 1019 - Chapter 1019 Chapter 419 The Unbearable Winter_3 ?Chapter 1019: Chapter 419: The Unbearable Winter_3 Chapter 1019: Chapter 419: The Unbearable Winter_3 ¡°` Meng Chenglin, followed by five Wei Inborn martial artists, had fought their way out of the battlefield at Blackwater City. They had managed to contact the rear guard and continued to fight and retreat against the pursuing Huotuluo forces, inflicting heavy casualties on them and successfully retreated back to Wei Country. However, by the time he returned to Wei Country, most of the inner counties had already been controlled by the Chu Army. The retreating Wei Army had run headlong into the well-prepared Chu Army and were quickly encircled and crushed without rest. They ultimately could not escape the fate of being entirely annihilated. However, Meng Chenglin and the other Inborn Grandmasters once again demonstrated their mobility. Seeing that things were going south, they abandoned the main army and once more broke through the encirclement to flee. In the face of Inborn Grandmasters who were prepared and set on fleeing, capturing and killing them indeed was not so simple. But to this, the Chu Army was indifferent. Inborn Grandmasters may indeed be strategic nuclear weapons, the most important deterrence force of a nation. However, as effective a deterrence as they might be, that¡¯s all they can doa€¡±deter. Without the support of an ordinary army, the impact that the Inborn Grandmasters could have was ultimately somewhat limited. This battle destroyed the last of Wei¡¯s elite forces in the Western Expedition, and the tens of thousands of surviving soldiers had eradicated the last of Wei Country¡¯s main forces. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï The remaining Wei Country, even with its millions-strong army, was nothing but a Ragtag Army, capable of little besides guarding the city and hardly useful for anything significant. Without the backbone of the Western Expeditionary Wei Army, Wei Country was already done for. As for the biggest contributor to Wei Country¡¯s downfalla€¡±the Huotuluo Army, who had been diligently attempting to eradicate them on the plainsa€¡±their contributions were naturally significant. Similarly, the price they paid was not small. More than one million one hundred thousand of the Huotuluo forces were lost in this battle. Wei Country might have been left crippled, but how much better off were they? Having lost so many valiant soldiers, for Huotuluo Country with its mere tens of millions in population, the loss was almost catastrophic. While Wei¡¯s backbone was broken, theirs was drained entirely, making it near impossible for them to stand again. The Huotuluo Army initially hoped that by annihilating Wei¡¯s main forces, they could then conquer to the east and recoup their losses, but Chu State¡¯s involvement turned that hope into a pipe dream. In the hands of Chu, a Huotuluo Country that had been beaten down had no chance whatsoever to snatch any prey from the tiger¡¯s mouth. Their last hope of restoring vitality had thus dissipated. In the future, let alone continuing to invade and harass Guannei and Shuofang, even maintaining their own existence would be a challenge. On the plains, people only respect the strong. Now that Huotuluo Country¡¯s backbone was drained, they certainly could no longer be considered strong. Therefore, the plains Barbarians who had been enslaved by them, as well as the remnants of the many tribes and nations they had conquered along their migration, were unlikely to continue obediently serving as their slaves and enduring their oppression. In fact, inside the entire southern plains, the vassal tribes within the Huotuluo Country were already beginning to stir. And it was not just these vassal tribes. The neighboring Bahan Na Country and Moro Country to the southern plains, upon seeing the dire state of their neighbor, also began to grow restless, entertaining thoughts of invasion. The situation in Yongzhou has now become quite clear. The former overlord Wei Country, under the onslaught of Chu, had declined rapidly and had almost become a marginalized court, no longer posing any threat. And with Chu, a powerful nation, blocking the east, Bahan Na Country and Moro Country faced greater resistance should they wish to invade eastwards than they ever did with the old Wei Country. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 Their hope of continuing their eastward migration had nearly vanished. In such a situation, with only the strength of one nation and family, it was utterly impossible for them to contest territory vital for survival from the hands of Chu. ¡°` Even with the three families united, the chance was slim given their private interests and disunity. The only opportunity was probably to integrate the three countries of the Western Regions, to unite the three into an unprecedented major nation. The combined population of Bahan Na Country, Moro Country, and Huotuluo Country was still about 45 to 50 million, with a foundational potential that was somewhat stronger than that of Wei Country before the war. If it were truly possible to unify them, then with the might of an entire nation they could contend for Yong State with Chu State, and with the cooperation of other countries in the Nine Provinces, there might just be a glimmer of hope. No, in the eyes of these foreign Western Regions, it should be said there was much to be done. Therefore, an opportunity for integration now lay before them, and, naturally, they would not let it pass. Having lost more than half of its main forces, and occupying the entire southern grasslands, Huotuluo Country had become juicy prey in the eyes of Bahan Na Country and Moro Country. If things went as expected, for the next several years, or perhaps within a decade, the foreign tribes of Yong West and the southern grassland region would hardly have the energy to worry about the east. In summary, since last year, the countries of the Nine Provinces have been thrown into a tense and difficult atmosphere. They began struggling desperately for their survival, barely making it through. At this time, the longer they persisted, the last one standing would be the ultimate victor. If Chu State could last until the end, then of course, the Nine Provinces would be united, and the world would be as one. If the other countries could endure to the end, then with Lu Yuan, this exceptional force not personally intervening, they could maintain their current reigns and continue to wear down Chu State for hundreds of years. They would continue this attrition until their Inborn vitality withered away and they no longer posed a threat. This was a contest for survival; once begun, there was no turning back. ¡­ In the early spring of March, After recovering during the winter, while other nations were still licking their wounds in secret, with the preliminary integration of the eastern part of Qingzhou, Lu Yuan dispatched another three million troops, heading north to attack Liang prefecture. On the day of the troop dispatch, the Nine Provinces, which had just begun to find peace for three to four months, suddenly erupted again, and the calamity of war descended anew. That same month, After being busy throughout the last summer and fall, the seven-plus million immigrants who still remained in Jiangnan, having not yet been settled, were under the arrangement of Chu State officials being continuously relocated northward. According to the plan, by this year¡¯s spring and summer, the last of these first batch of immigrants would be successively filling up the territories of East Sea and Chengyang prefectures. Also in the same month, News came from Lingnan and the southwest. After last year¡¯s probing, the Yi People of the rainforest and Southsea confirmed that Chu State had indeed begun large-scale migration and was abandoning both territories. They went mad with excitement. After a winter of preparation, by this spring, as the harsh winter receded slightly, a wave of migrating settlers swarmed in from both regions. The defense forces Chu State had stationed in Lingnan and the southwest, without the support of the local populace, simply could not hold back the tide. Front-line officials and commanders began to request permission to gradually withdraw their defenses, retreating to deeper and safer territories with ample support from the local populace. They proposed treating Lingnan and the southwest as they did the frontier regions of Helong in the northwest, using them purely for military training and as buffer zones. After Lu Yuan received the request, he gave it some thought and agreed to the proposal. The calamity of the Four Extremes was escalating. Even he could not stop this tide of events. He could only struggle in these turbulent times, searching for a path of salvation for both himself and Chu State. Chapter 1020 - Chapter 1020 Chapter 420 A Hundred States of a Perished Nation ?Chapter 1020: Chapter 420: A Hundred States of a Perished Nation Chapter 1020: Chapter 420: A Hundred States of a Perished Nation The cold gradually receded, spring warmth revived. Braving the early morning chill, the great army meandered out on its journey. ¡°Time really flies.¡± Lu Yuan looked at the endless dragon-like procession and could not help but sigh, ¡°In the blink of an eye, it¡¯s already the second year of the Northern Expedition, isn¡¯t it?¡± Next to him, his second son, Lu Hao, couldn¡¯t appreciate the sorrow in his father¡¯s words and excitedly said, ¡°Yes, Father Emperor, it¡¯s already the second year. This time we¡¯re fighting Liang, I must take part in the battle, you can¡¯t stop me this time.¡± This Northern Expedition required the mobilization of too many Inborn Grandmasters, so Lu Yuan didn¡¯t give any special treatment. All his children, who were Inborns and willing to go to the battlefield, were brought along to experience the atmosphere of war firsthand. The rest, who were reluctant, continued to stay within the country, distributed to various counties to defend the local areas. However, though he wanted to train his children, they were, after all, his own, and beyond the training, Lu Yuan still placed great emphasis on their safety. Therefore, in the face of some more dangerous battles, Lu Yuan would restrain his children, keeping them close to his side, not allowing them to act recklessly. It was precisely because of this that during the grand Northern Expedition last year, led by Lu He, Lu Hao, and a group of princes and princesses, though they also went to the battlefield several times, they hadn¡¯t fought many fierce battles. They even rarely encountered Inborn Grandmasters from the enemy state, mostly just bullying those beneath the Innate World. Such a manner of fighting was thrilling, sure, but whether it was truly effective in training, that was another matter entirely. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï At any rate, for now, Lu Hao was very dissatisfied. Young people, after all, yearn for the exhilaration of charging into the fray, cutting down generals and slaying enemies. Not sheltered by their parents, merely accepting a preordained fate. Lu Yuan glanced at his son, whose eagerness was clear, and smiled helplessly, ¡°Alright, alright, this time I won¡¯t stop you. You can go to the battlefield, alright?¡± As they spoke, he couldn¡¯t help but ponder if his protection over his children had been too much. Eaglets must eventually grow up; they cannot stay forever under their parents¡¯ wings. For a moment, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel like an old father. Uh¡­ something seems a bit off. Well, considering his own lifespan, it seemed that his children would probably not outlive him even if they tried. In this regard, he truly could protect his children for a lifetime. Musing silently over his own extended lifespan, Lu Yuan looked at his son, who was ecstatic with approval, ¡°This time, the Liang people have gathered a million troops at Daliang. Along the Shanyang, Rencheng, Yingling line, they have also stationed nearly two million troops. ¡°Although I am using three million soldiers for this Northern Expedition, breaking through Daliang City¡¯s defenses will not be easy. ¡°You wish to join the battlefield, and I do not object. ¡°But you must remember, the battlefield is merciless; do not force things or take risks recklessly. ¡°In the face of the enemy¡¯s tempting moves, be extremely cautious. Do not fall into an ambush and place yourself in danger. ¡°Understand?¡± Lu Hao patted his chest, ¡°Rest assured, Father Emperor. I have been to the battlefield before and know the dangers; I will not give the enemy an opportunity.¡± Do you truly understand? Seeing his son¡¯s confident demeanor, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel somewhat uneasy. For some reason, this son of his hadn¡¯t inherited his own steadiness and caution, and his personality was nothing like his own. At nearly forty years old, he was still so rash and frivolous. If not for the blood relation that confirmed this young man was indeed his own, he would have thought whether the Empress had been unfaithful to him. Ah, let it be. His own son, was ultimately his own worry. This boy being this way, he could only pay more attention and arrange a couple of avatars to take care of him, so he wouldn¡¯t truly get into trouble. Lu Yuan shook his head, thinking this in his heart. ¡­ While Lu Yuan was concerned about his children¡¯s education on one side, Daliang City to the North fell into chaos again upon receiving the news of another Chu army Northern Expedition. In the Liang palace. ¡°Gentlemen, the Chu soldiers are waging war against us again; they¡¯ve already reached Meng Mountain. How should our great Liang respond?¡± The Emperor of Liang spoke with a weary voice, looking at the assembled ministers below and inquired. It was now the fifty-second year of his reign, and the vitality and ambition of his early days had faded with time, settling into calmness and silence. In recent years, due to the many difficulties Liang faced, constantly besieged and antagonized by other states, he had exhausted much of his vigor. Especially six years ago, after Liang¡¯s great victory, the betrayal of Chu State led to famine within the country, and last year¡¯s earth-shattering Northern Expedition had directly broken the backbone of Liang. All these setbacks had diminished the once dominant ruler, who had unified Qingzhou and sat atop the world. In his place was a weak and weary old man. Although, given the Emperor of Liang¡¯s Inborn cultivation, at the tender age of seventy-two, he was just reaching his prime, with many good years ahead to enjoy. But now, his greatest wish was no longer filled with great ambition; all he desired inside was to preserve the last vestiges of Liang¡¯s altars of soil and grain, to extend the foundation his ancestors left behind. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 This was his only wish. However, even this last wish, the people of Chu refused to satisfy. With three million Chu troops marching fiercely, seizing six of his counties, they were still not content, bent on taking the whole of Qingzhou and completely annihilating Liang. How greedy, how detestable. Chapter 1021 - Chapter 1021 Chapter 420 A Hundred States of a Perished Nation_2 ?Chapter 1021: Chapter 420: A Hundred States of a Perished Nation_2 Chapter 1021: Chapter 420: A Hundred States of a Perished Nation_2 How unbearable this is. Emperor Liang discovered that he now harbored such hatred for the Chu people and such regret that he hadn¡¯t eradicated them at all costs when Chu State was first rising. ¡°Your Majesty, the Chu army is formidable, and their sharp edge is unstoppable,¡± from among the crowd below, one of Liang¡¯s veteran generals, Lord Changyi Yang Chen, stepped forward and said, ¡°In my opinion, our army should, just like last year, hold out in the great city of Liang, and wait for the enemy to retreat on their own. The Chu people, moving from west to east, have provoked numerous enemiesa€¡±the Western region foreign tribes, Wei people, Zhao people, our Liang people, Zheng peoplea€¡±the front stretches for tens of thousands of miles, all of them adversaries of Chu. To oppose so many enemies at the same time requires millions upon millions of soldiers. Moreover, they have encountered a subterranean fire attack in the Lingnan Region and are relocating the common folk, which is yet another expense involving millions of people. With such enormous costs, even if the Chu people were to cultivate for thirty years and save up substantial national strength, they would still struggle to sustain such consumption for long. We needn¡¯t do much, just wait for them to run out of grain, and the Chu soldiers will retreat on their own.¡± Yang Chen expressed the view held by most people at the time. That is, the Chu army cannot sustain for long. After all, the consumption of a near forty million people is almost equivalent to the total population of dominant states like Zhao and Xu. No matter how powerful Chu State is, it cannot support such a non-productive population for too long. Given enough time, it will naturally withdraw its troops due to exhaustion of national strength. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? In fact, many people are already surprised and incredulous that Chu State has managed to hold out until now. Most people thought that under normal circumstances, the Chu army should have been unable to sustain as early as last autumn. Who would have expected that not only did they get through last autumn, but come this spring, without taking a breath, they charged straight in again. This is truly incomprehensible, leaving many unable to fathom the situation. ¡°Waiting for the Chu army to retreat on their own is not so easy. If the Chu army were not confident, why would they mount a Northern Expedition again? Hoping to wear them down until they run out of grain is only wishful thinking on our part,¡± After listening to Yang Chen¡¯s words, Emperor Liang shook his head, quite disappointed. Although he was unclear about how much grain Chu State still had, he was well aware that there are no minor matters in military strategy. Emperor Chu Lu Yuan, the present era¡¯s most renowned general, how could he possibly not know the perils of an army short on grain? Last year, the Chu army had to withdraw once already due to a lack of grain, having suffered that loss. Now making a comeback, how could they not take precautions and prepare sufficient grain? So if the Liang army still holds the naive notion of waiting for the enemy to run out of grain and retreat, that would be wishful thinking. Chu State will not give them that opportunity. ¡°Even if the Chu army is flush with cash and grain and has no worries about shortages, the strong defenses of great Liang are sufficient to hold off the Chu army,¡± Seeing Emperor Liang a bit pessimistic, Yang Chen hurriedly said, ¡°Inside the city of great Liang, we have three hundred thousand elite troops. Outside the city, another four hundred thousand troops safeguard the perimeter, with camp connections stretching over fifty miles. In various towns throughout Liang County as well, we have another five hundred thousand troops stationed to guard the major cities, with local militias ready to assist, enough to ward off the enemy. With one million two hundred thousand troops at our disposal, even if three million Chu soldiers come to attack, they cannot dream of breaching Liang County. It¡¯s even doubtful they can reach the borders of great Liang. Your Majesty need not worry.¡± When the Chu army attacked last year, the Liang side was indeed thrown into chaos for a while. However, after the initial panic, once the monarch and ministers of Liang reacted, the bottom of the barrel strength that befits the once world¡¯s leading dominant state immediately erupted. Even though they lost nearly half of their territory, the remaining half still had a population of nearly forty million. Facing a life-and-death crisis, they mustered their forces without any hesitation, and in a short amount of time, Liang managed to pull together a massive army of four million. This four million-strong army, excluding one million stationed along the eastern front in Qingping and Jiaodong Counties to guard against Chu and Tang forces, the remaining three million were almost entirely allocated to the western front to resist the invasion from Chu State. And in great Liang, the capital, one million two hundred thousand, many of them elite with strong capabilities, were especially assigned. Judging from the advantage of defense, although the Chu army had more troops, it was only about thrice the number of the Liang defenders. This gap was enough to be evened out with the advantage of the city walls. ¡°That¡¯s only the conventional wisdom, but since its foundation, how many times has the Chu army ever followed conventional wisdom?¡± Emperor Liang shook his head, ¡°If we went by conventional wisdom, how could Emperor Chu, once a mere Hunter, gain dominance over Jiangnan, and nearly bring great Liang to the brink of collapse? If we went by conventional wisdom, how could the Chu manage to send out an army of ten million without any logistical concerns? It may seem we have nothing to worry about now, but if the Chu army surprises us again, whether great Liang can hold is something no one can be certain about. Don¡¯t forget, that Emperor Chu Lu Yuan is now the last cultivator in the Nine Provinces. Relying on just himself, he possesses the ability to turn the tide of battle with Immortal Technique, and although he has not yet revealed his Immortal Technique, we cannot be unprepared. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Besides, as the imperial capital, having great Liang surrounded time and again is a disgrace to our nation¡¯s reputation. What would the country¡¯s people think when they see this, how restless would their hearts be? If possible, we should block the Chu army at the nation¡¯s gate and not let them invade our capital.¡± With the rise of Chu State, especially after last year¡¯s stunning performance that took down the world¡¯s first and second strongest nations and shocked the world, Research into Emperor Chu Lu Yuan, the man behind all this, suddenly became heated. And as the research went deeper, the various incredible things about Lu Yuan became known to people. Things that people previously didn¡¯t believe, such as the rumors that the True Persons of the Qing and Huang series were avatars of Emperor Chu, gradually gained credibility. Chapter 1022 - Chapter 1022 Chapter 420 A Hundred States of a Perished Nation_3 ?Chapter 1022: Chapter 420: A Hundred States of a Perished Nation_3 Chapter 1022: Chapter 420: A Hundred States of a Perished Nation_3 ¡°` Otherwise, how do you explain the sudden appearance of those forty or fifty experts in Chu State, almost equivalent to the inborn second realm? That number is equivalent to the total number of inborn experts in the entire Liang State. Yet, Chu State suddenly produced them. Apart from Immortal Technique Daoist arts, what other logical explanation could there be? And with this miraculous feat of Immortal Techniques preceding, no one dares to guarantee that Emperor Chu Luyuan won¡¯t create a second miracle. Hence, the naive idea that the domestic forces need only to hold their ground to repel the Chu army is something that Emperor Liang does not agree with. Faced with his sovereign¡¯s questioning, Yang Chen also found himself at a loss for words. Does he not know the reasons that Emperor Liang spoke of? Of course, he does. But what can knowing do? Emperor Chu is just so defying, with an ability to wield Immortal Techniques, what can you do to him? Nothing at all. Now all cultivators in Nine Provinces have fled, and some of the remaining Immortal Sects are just Immortal Sects in name, with slightly more inborn grandmasters. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã0 Essentially, they are no different from those Jianghu sects. In this situation, how do you deal with Emperor Chu, who is rumored to be on par with those Dao masters before the Ascension in Nine Provinces? They are simply no match for him, alright. Faced with such an unsolvable level of adversary, all they can do is to try their best to cover up and ignore it, comforting themselves in their hearts. With the Emperor bringing up this matter now, other than undermining their own morale, what use could it be? However, as the saying goes, ¡®When the ruler worries, the subjects suffer,¡¯ facing Emperor Liang¡¯s doubt, Yang Chen could only say, ¡°If Your Majesty is worried, your servant is willing to personally lead troops to Meng Mountain and block the enemy outside for our great Liang, to prevent the Chu thieves from invading the Imperial Capital.¡± However, just as his words fell, a voice suddenly rose in the hall. ¡°Impossible!¡± ¡°Grand General must not!¡± Several high-ranking ministers ran out from both sides, bowing to Emperor Liang and Yang Chen in unison. ¡°Your Majesty, the Grand General is an important pillar of the state and should stay in the capital. He cannot be moved lightly.¡± ¡°Indeed, with the Grand General¡¯s status, how can he risk himself? If something goes wrong, the foundation of the country will be shaken!¡± ¡°There are other famous generals within the state. General Yan Yunqing is currently in Shanyang County, and if Your Majesty is concerned about the safety of Liang, you may summon him to the capital to arrange the defense of Liang Prefecture. There is no need to deploy the Grand General.¡± Everyone was advising against it. In recent years, due to frequent wars, Liang State has seen the rise of many famous generals. There was God Arrow Bao Dajie, who repelled a million enemies with three arrows on a snowy night; Iron Wall Luo Yuanzai, who defended the fortress alone and stopped a nation¡¯s enemy for three years; and Yan Yunqing, who broke through a million-strong army at the Battle of Changyuan. All these individuals were rising stars within the Liang military. However, the rise of these stars was fast, and their fall was just as swift. Liang State was surrounded by enemy nations, almost never ceasing from war year after year. In the face of long-term, frequent, and brutal wars, even famous generals could not avoid a fate of dying on their horses. God Arrow Bao Dajie and Iron Wall Luo Yuanzai both died on the battlefield against enemy nations over the years. Now, the up-and-coming Yan Yunqing of Liang State, if nothing unexpected happens, will probably not escape this destiny either. The only well-known general who has stood the test of time and lived well in Liang State is exactly this Lord Changyi, Yang Chen. His secret to longevity had nothing special about it; he simply avoided frontline battlefields, remained behind, and let others fight to the death, thus naturally enjoying wealth and power. As someone coming from one of Liang State¡¯s top aristocratic families, Yang Chen¡¯s situation was different from grassroot-born generals like Yan Yunqing, Bao Dajie, and Luo Yuanzai. He was part of the core ruling class, an ace relied upon by the royal family and the ministers to rule the country, not to be squandered on the battlefield. With Yang Chen around, the court would have a dignified presence to counterbalance those low-level, up-and-coming generals, which was vital for consolidating power. Should anything happen to Yang Chen, the court would lose a significant deterrent. How would they control the rising low-level generals like Yan Yunqing in the future? If the Chu army were to win this time, it wouldn¡¯t matter if Liang¡¯s forces were defeated, or even if the Imperial Capital were lost. Without Liang Prefecture or the Imperial Capital, Liang State still had nine prefectures in the eastern region, three million troops, and an opportunity to make a comeback. With these, the royal family and the ministers could still dominate over the millions of commoners, continuing to enjoy wealth and privilege. But without Yang Chen, whether the full assembly of the court, including Emperor Liang himself seated above, could maintain their current power and statusa€¡±that would become uncertain. Previously, when Liang State¡¯s power was ascending and at its zenith, Emperor Liang¡¯s prestige was unrivaled, able to suppress all within court and countryside. Back then, the loss of one Yang Chen might not have affected the dynasty¡¯s fate. But now, Liang State¡¯s power was in decline, almost to the brink of the nation¡¯s collapse. Emperor Liang¡¯s prestige had been almost completely eroded by continuous defeats. At this critical time, a Grand General who could strongly uphold the interests of the royal family and ministers had become extraordinarily precious and important. Therefore, seeing Yang Chen willing to take risks, the ministers who were concerned about their interests immediately stepped forward to persuade. Watching this scene, Emperor Liang opened his mouth, but ultimately, considering his own interests, he held back his words and merely said, ¡°The ministers are right, the Grand General shoulders heavy responsibilities of the state, indeed he should not be rashly moved.¡± Yang Chen, who seemed to have anticipated this outcome, did not say much upon hearing this and merely bowed, saying, ¡°Since Your Majesty does not wish for your servant to take action, then let it be so. However, Your Majesty¡¯s concern is indeed sincere. The current state of Chu is not something that our Liang State can confront with its own strength. With our one million two hundred thousand strong army to guard against Chu¡¯s three million, it¡¯s indeed likely insufficient, not secure enough. Xu State has stationed five hundred thousand troops in the regions of Dongping and Le¡¯an prefectures, and within their own state, they also have a million-strong army. If our great Liang blocks the Chu people for them now, that would be taking disaster upon ourselves on their behalf. How can the Xu people contribute merely some money and grain? Your servant requests to dispatch messengers to Xu State, asking the Xu people to send troops to help us together in resisting the Chu people.¡± Yang Chen, failing one strategy, immediately offered another. This time, Emperor Liang did not say much, simply nodding and saying, ¡°Granted!¡± The ministers below also echoed in agreement. The Grand General is right, the Chu people are everyone¡¯s enemy, why should only our people bleed and sacrifice? ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï We must drag everyone down with us. The Xu people cannot expect to escape either. ¡°` Chapter 1023 - Chapter 1023 Chapter 421 Breaking Through Mengshan Pass ?Chapter 1023: Chapter 421 Breaking Through Mengshan Pass Chapter 1023: Chapter 421 Breaking Through Mengshan Pass ¡°Kill!¡± With a shriek, a large wave of soldiers surged forward like a tide once again. A few fiery red fireballs shot up from outside the city like falling stars, then slammed fiercely onto the city walls. Boom! Amidst the scattering flames, intense heat rose up, instantly igniting the surrounding thirty feet area. ¡°Haha, die for me!¡± Lu Hao burst into laughter, and after steadying his footing on the city wall, a sweeping strike of his glaive caused the Red Sun True Fire of his martial arts external body to sweep through the Void, igniting and burning to ashes all nearby objects that were caught in the defense. More than ten Liang soldiers, unable to dodge in time, turned into ashes amidst their screams. Seeing this scene, the Liang soldiers further away couldn¡¯t help but yelp in fright and scatter to avoid. But before they could get far, Lu Hao leapt up and gave chase. Without much effort, merely by spreading the Red Sun Divine Fire, the Liang soldiers along the way were rendered powerless to resist. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Amidst the screams and horror, they turned into kindling and ashes. For an Inborn Grandmaster, killing these ordinary soldiers was far too easy. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Unless you¡¯ve cultivated to the top realm of Martial Arts, able to use the idiosyncrasies of Martial Arts for the first time, you could have a certain resistance and immunity to the martial arts external body. Otherwise, no matter how many people there were, even if it were an army composed entirely of martial artists, they would stand no chance against a single Inborn Grandmaster, unless they waited for their opponent¡¯s True pneuma to be exhausted. One step into Inborn, half a step to transcend the mortal realma€¡±it is precisely because of such a gap that Inborn Grandmasters are known as Earthly Gods and Immortals. ¡°Chu thieves, cease your arrogance!¡± Just as Lu Hao demonstrated the formidable strength of an Inborn Grandmaster, overwhelmingly bullying the weaker Liang soldiers without any restraint, a thunderous shout came from within Guan City, and a Black Light flew out directly towards Lu Hao. ¡°Haha, well met. The turtle finally sticks its head out.¡± Lu Hao, seeing this, felt not the slightest fear. He burst into laughter and charged at the Black Light. His slaughter of the Liang¡¯s ordinary soldiers was precisely to force the Liang¡¯s innate talents within the city to come forth. Now that his main target had arrived, tormenting these common people any further was pointless. The true strong seek to kill the strong, as a proof of their own might. Lu Hao sought the blood of an Inborn to build the First Merit for this Northern Expedition, to boast of his own achievements. Boom~ The Divine Fire and Black Light collided, turning into a powerful pressure blast that shook the city wall slightly. The two lights clashed at such a fast speed that they were difficult for the naked eye to follow. Within dozens of feet nearby, both Chu and Liang soldiers turned pale with fright, tacitly giving the pair a wide berth, leaving them space to fight. ¡°Big brother, I¡¯ll help you!¡± At that moment, from amidst the Divine Fire closest to the two combatants, a young man, seeing the intense battle, shouted loudly, opened his external body, and joined the fray. Lu Hao implicitly understood and used a move to push back the Black Light, then opened up a space, giving his brother the opportunity to enter the melee. The Lu Hao brothers both practiced the Red Sun Divine Fire, the royal secret of the Great Chu, taught by the same father, with nearly indistinguishable familiarity with this technique. At this moment, their coordination was exemplarya€¡±a unity in brothers that could cut through metal. Confronted by the tacit coordination of the Lu Hao brothers, that Black Light was nearly beaten into retreat, having nearly no power to counter. Given the situation, defeat was simply a matter of time. And thus the same scene was being repeated at Mengshan Pass, with various city heads and walls continuously presenting the same tale. The Liang¡¯s Inborn Grandmasters were surrounded by Divine Fire, enduring round after bruising round, and continuously forced back in defeat. This time, Lu Yuan had kept his promise. He let his sons go into battle personally, to face the front line and to endure the trial of war. The first barrier to the north of the Liang region, Mengshan Pass. Inside were two hundred thousand Liang soldiers, and with five Inborns in defense, it stood as the first obstacle on the way north into Greater Liang. For this pass, Lu Yuan had fully entrusted the fight to his thirteen children who accompanied the army, giving them five hundred thousand troops to let these youngsters handle it on their own. ¡®Now, after ten days of fierce fighting, the Inborn Grandmasters inside the city have depleted much of their True pneuma, and several have been injured. It seems that the breakthrough will happen within these two or three days.¡¯ Lu Yuan watched the battle ahead, making his judgment. Though the Liang army held the advantage of defending the city, having the city as their terrain naturally provided them with a boost. But their numerical depth was far too inferior compared to Chu¡¯s forces. To say nothing of comparing them with Lu Yuan¡¯s main force, even compared with the troops he had given to his several children, they were still far behind. In such a situation, as long as one is willing to pay the price, even by attrition alone, it was possible to wear the Liang army down to their death. ¡°Victory!¡± At that moment, a cheer came from afar atop a city tower. Lu Yuan looked up and found the source of the sound. He saw a Divine Fire penetrate the dim Black Light, and from it emerged the upright figure of Lu Hao holding a somewhat scorched head, glaring at the nearby Liang soldiers and shouting, ¡°Your commander is dead, surrender now! Those who surrender will not be killed.¡± ¡°Those who surrender will not be killed!¡± ¡°Not killed!¡± The many soldiers shouted, their voices like thunder, shaking the nearby Liang soldiers to the core, turning their faces pale. Clang! The sound of a weapon hitting the ground rang out as a Liang soldier, panicked, dropped his battle saber. He looked towards the figure shrouded in divine fire, looking like a god or devil, and was so frightened that he knelt on the ground. Then, like a signal, the nearby Liang soldiers, one after another, under the coercion of the Chu army, knelt down. Chapter 1024 - Chapter 1024 Chapter 421 Breaching Mengshan Pass_2 ?Chapter 1024: Chapter 421: Breaching Mengshan Pass_2 Chapter 1024: Chapter 421: Breaching Mengshan Pass_2 ¡°Haha!¡± Lu Hao, watching this scene, couldn¡¯t help but let out a hearty laugh, casually tossing aside the severed head of a Liang general he held in hand, then shouted, ¡°The Liang army has surrendered, the city tower has fallen, open the city gates!¡± At the command, immediately, soldiers obeyed the order, swarming down from the city walls and heading towards the city gates. After scattering the last few Liang soldiers who were defending resolutely, the Chu army worked together, and with the sound of creaking, the tightly shut gates of Mengshan Pass were finally opened by the Chu army. ¡°The gates are open!¡± ¡°The city gates have opened, the Liang army has been defeated!¡± ¡°Mengshan Pass has fallen!¡± Seeing the city gates open, the Chu soldiers gathered outside the city erupted in joy, and then surged into the city amidst cheering. Tens of thousands of Chu soldiers entered Guan City, and from the Southern Pass City opened by Lu Hao as the epicenter, the tide of soldiers quickly spread to all corners of the city, radiating outwards. The news that the Chu army had entered the city also quickly became known to everyone. Bang! A streak of golden light wrapped in sword energy pushed back a clump of reddish Divine Fire, then dodged swiftly in the air to avoid another wave of scarlet flames rushing towards it. The golden light hastily retreated dozens of feet back, creating a safer distance, and then heard cheers coming from the distant city. In the midst of the light, a middle-aged general clad in black armor turned his head, and immediately saw the scene of countless Chu soldiers entering the city, his eyes almost splitting apart, his heart nearly leaping out in fright. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 With the situation as such, he no longer doubted that some part of Guan City¡¯s defense had been breached, allowing the Chu army to break through. With so many Chu soldiers entering the city, nearly half the city had been occupied. Under such circumstances, driving the Chu people out was no longer possible. The fall of Guan City was now a foregone conclusion. ¡°Haha, our grand army has entered the city, the people of Liang have lost.¡± ¡°I wonder which royal brother achieved this, truly a great contribution.¡± The two Chu State princes, entangled with this black-armored general, of course noticed the change in the city. Realizing they were on the winning side, they were overjoyed. After the surprise, both princes focused their attention on the black-armored Liang general. ¡°Eighth brother, the others have made great contributions, and we must not fall behind.¡± ¡°Indeed, the credit for breaching the city is no longer ours to claim. But we can¡¯t lose the credit for killing the general.¡± Conversing with each other, the two princes then simultaneously charged at the black-armored Liang general, shouting together, ¡°Liang general, prepare to die!¡± Boom! The scorching wave of heat, under the searing flames, surged forward with even greater ferocity towards the Liang general. ¡°Damn it!¡± The black-armored Liang general cursed under his breath, then, giving a glance at the approaching reddish Divine Fire, did not hesitate any longer, a flash of golden light, and turned to flee in the opposite direction. With Meng Mountain Pass breached by the Chu army, the defense was evidently failing, its fall only a matter of moments. Staying in this place, although he could continue to contend with these two Chu prince enemies for a while, It would be meaningless. The fact of the Chu army entering the city couldn¡¯t be changed, and Mengshan Pass was no longer defensible. The greatest purpose in staying here, under this reality, was completely lost. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï To keep staying meant nothing but waiting for the Chu army to take control of the city, surround him, and then letting Liang lose a precious Inborn Grandmaster. It would have no other effect. To stay was to seek death, to comply with the wishes of the Chu people. Preserving a useful life to maintain the strength for Liang, to continue the fight against Chu in the future, was the best choice. Therefore, the black-armored general did not continue to insist. When it was time to escape, he chose to flee without hesitation, not delaying for a moment. ¡°Cursed coward, don¡¯t run!¡± ¡°Villain of Liang, coward, stop!¡± Seeing their prey escape, the two Chu princes were immediately furious, cursing as they hurriedly pursued. Similar scenes were unfolding across other Inborn battlegrounds within the city; Upon realizing that the city gates had been breached and the defense of Guan City was irrevocably compromised, the other four Inborn generals of Liang¡¯s army also chose to abandon the city without hesitation. Losing the ground without keeping the people means both are lost. Keeping the people without the ground means both can be preserved. Even though this exact phrase does not exist in this world, similar military strategies are plentiful. Under the progression and evolution of numerous wars, the officers of the Liang army had clearly come to understand this principle. One hour later, amidst cheer and the occasional cries of agony, Mengshan Pass fell into the hands of the Chu army. Lu Hao and the other princes, amidst both joy and disappointment, returned to the main camp outside the city. ¡°Father, your child has not failed your command, after fighting for ten days, we have finally taken Mengshan Pass.¡± In the main camp, Lu Hao reported to Lu Yuan with a joyous expression, alongside his brothers. ¡°Father, your child official feels ashamed, at the last moment I failed to capture the Liang general, allowing him to escape.¡± While some were joyful, others were melancholic. Among the several princes, not all were fortunate or powerful enough to break down the city gates or slay the enemy generals. Of the five Liang generals inside Guan City, only three were slain in combat, while the remaining two escaped amidst the chaos, eluding the pursuit of the princes they had engaged. Indeed, here were five princes who let their enemies slip away, missing the chance to distinguish themselves in this battle. ¡°Do not worry, victory and defeat are common in the art of war, and slip-ups are normal.¡± Lu Yuan regarded the several sons who were downcast due to their mistakes with a smile, without harshness, consoling them, ¡°Moreover, I have been prepared for this. Before the siege, I had already arranged for several True Persons to guard near the city¡¯s critical paths. Those Liang generals might escape Guan City, but they won¡¯t escape this ¡®Heavenly net,¡¯ they¡¯ll be caught in our ambush.¡± Chapter 1025 - Chapter 1025 Chapter 421 Breaching Mengshan Pass_3 ?Chapter 1025: Chapter 421: Breaching Mengshan Pass_3 Chapter 1025: Chapter 421: Breaching Mengshan Pass_3 Compared to those children who are unwilling to go to the battlefield and only wish to stay safely within the country, these thirteen children who are willing to step out of their comfort zone and actively seek to toughen themselves on the battlefield are naturally stronger by an indescribable amount. Therefore, Lu Yuan was particularly lenient and fond of them, reluctant to blame them for something that barely counted as a mistake. ¡°Really?¡± ¡°That¡¯s wonderful, thank you, Father-King.¡± Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s comforting words, a few princes finally showed a hint of a smile on their faces, and at last, they seemed less distressed. Although they let the Liang general escape, their father-king had not let them get away, and Liang had still lost five Inborns, which was the best outcome. ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right, those Liang generals did not escape.¡± Lu Yuan nodded with a smile, reaffirming, and then said, ¡°You have been fighting bloody battles to take cities these days, which have tired you out, so go back and rest. Once your father-king has dealt with the aftermath of Mengshan Pass, I will host a victory feast for you all, then you can truly rejoice.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± The princes nodded. After the major battle, they indeed felt exhausted and, giving their respects, they took their leave. Watching the children leave, Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes revealed his gratification. Having raised his children for decades, he finally saw fruitful results; among his offspring, there were already those who could take on great responsibilities. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Apart from his avatar and disciples, Chu State finally had a third reliable group to depend on, making its foundation even more secure. In contemplation, Lu Yuan began dealing with the post-war affairs. In this attack on Mengshan Pass, Chu¡¯s army besieged the city for ten days, utilizing a force of five hundred thousand. By the time the city fell and Mengshan Pass was breached, Chu¡¯s army had suffered about one hundred thousand casualties, roughly ten thousand per day. This may sound like a lot, but in reality, the losses were very light. After all, this was Mengshan Pass, a Male Pass among the world¡¯s toughest, ranking easily within the top ten in terms of fortification. Within the city walls were two hundred thousand Liang soldiers and five Inborns, defending the pass as impregnably as a fortress of solid gold. Chu¡¯s ability to conquer this pass at the cost of only one hundred thousand men surpassed the imagination of many. Normally, to attack such a crucial fortification guarded by so many people, the attacking army would have to suffer six or seven hundred thousand casualties before the city gate could even be considered taken. Chu only lost one hundred thousand; how could this not be considered a bargain! If it were not for Lu Yuan sending out thirteen princes and princesses, using nearly thrice the innate quantity to directly neutralize the city wall advantage of the Liang army from the top military level, there would have been no way to easily take the city with such a ratio of casualties. A mere one hundred thousand casualties, compared to the total Chu army of three million, was truly trivial, almost without any impact. While Chu¡¯s army suffered few losses, the gains from the battle were substantial. Of the two hundred thousand Liang soldiers in the city, eighty thousand were killed, a further one hundred ten thousand were captured, a few thousand escaped, and in the end, it was presumed they could hardly escape Chu¡¯s army¡¯s pursuit. Essentially, the army was completely annihilated. Three Inborns within the city died right on the spot. After the battle, the military power of Liang at the southern gate of Liang Prefecture was wiped clean. Chu¡¯s army cleared the way to Da Liang. This second Northern Expedition was off to a flying start. After tallying the losses and casualties, Lu Yuan ordered people to take care of the wounded and corpses, and then, in the following days, the army that participated in the siege remained at Mengshan Pass. He then appointed an avatar to be the warden of the city, leading the remaining avatars and some equipped Inborn subordinates, to defend this southern gate of Liang Prefecture and secure the back for the Northern Expedition army. Furthermore, he was responsible for attacking and occupying the prefectures and counties of Liang state near Mengshan Pass, completely purging this region. With four hundred thousand troops stationed here, it was enough to ensure the Northern Expedition¡¯s rear was worry-free. Only after completing these tasks did Lu Yuan let out a sigh of relief. It was at this very moment that the avatars sent to ambush the surrounding key paths returned. Among them, two individuals each carried a head, which were in fact the heads of two Liang generals with inborn abilities who had fled from Mengshan Pass. Lu Yuan had not lied to his children. He had indeed arranged an ambush around ten days earlier to seal off the escape routes of Guan City¡¯s defenders. It wasn¡¯t just the two Liang generals; the two or three thousand Liang troops who had luckily escaped from the city were also successively hunted down by Chu army ambushes. Not one managed to slip through from any pass or trail. The battle of Mengshan thus concluded perfectly. ¡­ After capturing Guan City, Lu Yuan took a brief rest for a day to make numerous deployment arrangements. Then he held a victory celebration for his sons and daughters and, on the next day, immediately announced that the entire army would break camp and continue the Northern Expedition. In Liang province, the Liang army had a total of 1.2 million troops. Of course, it was impossible to block off all of them at the city of Daliang, as there would be nowhere to station them, and it would be an immense waste of military resources. Therefore, besides the 700 thousand troops left to guard the vicinity of the city of Daliang, another 500 thousand Liang troops were stationed at various key towns throughout Liang province. They were there both for local defense, consolidating resources, and as peripheral support for the city of Daliang, aiming to disperse and constrain the Chu¡¯s army¡¯s strength. Now among these 500 thousand Liang troops, the most important force of 200 thousand at Mengshan Pass, along with five inborn masters, had been completely eradicated. Within Liang province, aside from the city of Daliang, there were only troops stationed at key towns surrounding the city based in three core prefecture cities: Ningling Prefecture, Yucheng Prefecture, and Gushu Prefecture. According to the intelligence gathered, each of these three prefecture cities housed 100 thousand Liang troops and was under the command of two inborn masters from Liang state. This was just the basic military strength. Indeed, Liang state was prosperous, especially the Jingji region of the imperial capital in Liang province, which was the most refined. The area was teeming with people, with household registrations in the millions. If direct conscription of a large number of civilian workers from the surrounding areas of these three peripheral stronghold cities were to take place, in an instant, they could muster four or five hundred thousand irregular troops. This force, aided by 100 thousand elite troops, was now a threat to the Chu army¡¯s flank. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 Therefore, Lu Yuan did not overlook them. After continuing the Northern Expedition, he immediately began dividing his troops, allocating 500 thousand soldiers to each of the three prefecture cities to besiege them. Then, following the strategy used to attack Mengshan Pass, each army was reinforced with six inborn masters, essentially bullying Liang¡¯s army for their lack of inborn talent, intending to use top-tier combat strength to counterbalance the advantage Liang¡¯s army had with its city walls. After all, whether it was in terms of soldiers or inborn talent, the Chu army had plenty. Lu Yuan¡¯s central military expedition, after a winter of coordination, was even more powerful, boasting an army of three million along with thirty inborn masters. No matter how the troops were divided, the remaining army¡¯s strength remained stronger than that of the Liang¡¯s main force defending Daliang, creating a suppressive effect over the opponent. With such conditions, there was naturally not much to worry about. At the end of the third month in the forty-second year of Shenwu. After leaving four hundred thousand troops at Mengshan Pass and dividing the army into three detachments, Lu Yuan led the remaining one million troops straight to the city of Daliang. The imperial capital of Chu was besieged once again. Chapter 1026 - Chapter 1026 Chapter 422 Inside and Outside the City ?Chapter 1026: Chapter 422 Inside and Outside the City Chapter 1026: Chapter 422 Inside and Outside the City The north wind howled, and banners fluttered fiercely. ¡°Hoo!¡± ¡°Move!¡± The banner bearers waved their flags, commanding the cavalry to run back and forth through the ranks as loud shouts erupted under their direction. With the orders given and implemented, rows of soldiers quickly adjusted their positions. As a mighty army that had fought for decades, the Chu army had forged a resolute military spirit during its rise and had continued that tradition to the present day. ¡°The Chu army is coming again.¡± Atop the battlements of the great Liang city, a large crowd emerged, including Liang nobility and ministers dressed in luxurious green and purple, who looked out at the formidable Chu army in the distance. Some were so scared their faces turned pale. ¡°The Chu army seems even more elite and fearsome than last yeara€|¡± someone murmured, their voice quivering. Those who heard frowned and glanced reproachfully at the speaker. They wanted to object, but upon looking at the Chu army, they found it to be true. Words stuck in their throats. This year¡¯s Chu army was indeed somewhat more elite than last year. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Last year, although Lu Yuan led three million troops on a Northern Expedition against Liang, their numbers reverberated like thunder. But at that time, out of the three million Chu troops, two million were civilian workers. Only one million were professional soldiers, and most of those were new recruits. In other words, within the entire Northern Expeditionary force of Chu, aside from a large number of civilian workers, among the remaining six million professional soldiers, including those who had reenlisted after retirement, new soldiers were mainstream, making up nearly four million. So many civilian workers and new soldiers naturally resulted in uneven quality among the Chu army. Many troops were weak in combat, with the main fighting force hardly better than the local prefecture and county soldiers. The early stage of the Northern Expedition¡¯s Chu army was just like this. The spectacular victory they initially achieved owed more to the shockingly large numbers of the Chu army and the quality and quantity of the Inborn Grandmasters who overwhelmed their opponents. These two factors were the magical treasures ensuring victory for the Chu Northern Expedition. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï But that was just at the beginning. With the passing of a year and the outbreak of several major battles, the once naive Chu army was also tempered by war. Within the nearly four million new soldiers, those veteran soldiers returning to service found their old instincts in combat. Pure new recruits also honed their skills and experience in life-and-death situations. The six million soldiers grew rapidly and in the process, continuously synergized, forming a mutual understanding amongst each other. The civilian workers who had been conscripted weren¡¯t involved in any significant battles, but they sometimes maintained local security and acted as cannon fodder for sieges, which improved their strength to some extent. They might have been slightly lacking compared to soldier¡¯s requirements, but when compared with the prefectures and counties¡¯ troops, the difference was negligible. Therefore, after a year¡¯s trials and tribulations, from soldiers to civilian workers, the Chu army¡¯s combat effectiveness had been forged in the fires of deadly combat. This time, in the attack on Liang, Lu Yuan divided his forces into four. Although he had allocated the bulk to Mengshan Pass and other Liang prefecture defenses, he had mainly sent civilian workers there. Dominantly formed from civilian workers, with a small contingent of main forces, these made up the four divisions of troops. The main force from his own central military camp, which was composed of elite soldiers, was still firmly in his hand. The one million-strong force currently leading the charge to the foot of Liang¡¯s city was comprised entirely of soldiers, who, after a year of iron and fire, had changed their aura. The impression they gave was naturally distinct. That is why the nobility and ministers of Liang on the city walls had the feeling they were facing an army of tigers and wolves upon looking out. Because that was indeed the case. ¡°What does it matter if the Chu army is elite? There aren¡¯t many Chu people outside the city,¡± spoke up a minister of Chu on the city walls, unable to bear the decline in morale, ¡°According to our scouts, all told, they only amount to about one million.¡± ¡°Within the great walls of our Liang city, we have seven hundred thousand troops stationed, both inside and out, plus ten Inborn Grandmasters. We aren¡¯t much inferior to those Chu bandits. With just this number of their people, not to mention taking down Liang, even breaking through our outer defenses is a challenge.¡± As the once Supreme Dominator, Liang still had substantial strengths. After a year of rebuilding, they not only reassembled a four-million-strong army, but they also retained thirty-seven Inborn Grandmasters. Ah, this is after already deducting the five Inborn who were lost at Mengshan Pass. With the Chu army advancing to the Imperial Capital, coupled with propaganda, it was naturally known throughout Liang that Mengshan Pass¡¯s defenders had been utterly defeated and not a single one of the five Inborn at the pass had escaped. This news certainly discouraged and dismayed everyone in Chu. As the Chu army neared the Imperial Capital, a sense of panic was added to the mix. But however panicked, Liang still had some confidence. After all, they had the foundation of being the former Supreme Dominator, which was not something any other dominant country could easily infringe upon. Even if they had fallen from grace, it wasn¡¯t something that Zhao, Xu, and Zheng could match, as they couldn¡¯t produce thirty-seven Inborn Grandmasters. Tang and Xu might be able to do so, but not necessarily more than Liang. With this foundation, Liang was able to maintain its morale and not flee at the mention of Chu. The old Liang was prosperous once after all. A year before, they were the dominator of the world, boasting more than fifty Inborn and three million soldiers at their peak. Their downfall had lasted only a year. The pride of once being number one in the world endured in their hearts; even if they had been struck down, their dignity was not so easily crushed. Upon hearing this, many Liang ministers recalled last year¡¯s glory, buoying their spirits; smiles returned to their faces, and they had not completely lost heart. Chapter 1027 - Chapter 1027 Chapter 422 Inside and Outside the City_2 ?Chapter 1027: Chapter 422 Inside and Outside the City_2 Chapter 1027: Chapter 422 Inside and Outside the City_2 ¡°But¡­¡± At this moment, it was the same person who had previously been pessimistic who spoke up, his voice timid as he said, ¡°Although the number of Chu troops here in Liang is small, they have sent not a few soldiers to Ning Ling, Yu City, and Gu Shu, totaling no less than five hundred thousand men. In these three prefectures, there are only one hundred thousand defenders, and only two Inborn Grandmasters. In the past few days, some fugitive soldiers have also escaped back from Mengshan Pass. According to what they said, the Chu army, in their attack on Mengshan Pass, used only five hundred thousand men and did not deploy their entire army. Mengshan Pass occupies a strategic position, heavily fortified with veteran soldiers and filled with experts, and yet, with such strong defenses, it fell to the five hundred thousand Chu troops in a mere ten days. Even their entire army was annihilated, with not one Inborn managing to escape. The three prefectures of Ning Ling, in terms of city defenses, military strength, and Inborn Grandmasters, are far inferior to Mengshan Pass. Can these key towns of the three prefectures really hold out?¡± This disheartening speech immediately doused the enthusiasm that the ministers had just raised with a bucket of cold water. As much as they were frustrated, they couldn¡¯t help but ponder the situation. Indeed, could the three crucial towns of Ningling Prefecture, Yucheng Prefecture, and Gushu Prefecture, these key strategic points of Liang, truly hold out? The Chu army brought only a million men to Liang, with the rest of their forces dispersed in all directions, attacking the outlying towns of Liang. Their intention was very clear now. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? They intended to tie down the main Liang force with this million men, so that we here would be unable to pull away to support the surrounding prefecture cities. Meanwhile, the Chu army would focus their superior forces to first conquer the outlying three prefectures, sweep through Liang¡¯s holdings in Liang Prefecture, and ultimately isolate Fu City, cutting off all outside support to this imperial capital of Chu. Then they would concentrate their forces to capture it in one fell swoop. The plan was clear, the execution stead, Chu army clearly came with the intent of capturing Liang. If they really succeeded in this, there was indeed a very high likelihood that Liang could fall. Considering this, it was natural for everyone to be concerned. After all, they were also trapped inside Fu City. If the Chu army truly encircled them like dumplings and cleared the outlying supports, there would be nowhere to escape amidst the amassed heavy troops. ¡°Humph! Spreading rumors to create panic.¡± Just as the people were filled with worry, the Grand General Yang Chen stood up, reprimanding, ¡°The reason Mengshan Pass fell was the Chu army claimed they did not use their full strength, but this ¡®full strength¡¯ refers only to the number of troops. Those fugitive soldiers, aside from speaking of the Chu troop numbers, also mentioned something else; the Chu army used over a dozen Inborns for ten consecutive days, several times more than the number of Inborn Generals defending Mengshan Pass. It was because they had several times more Inborn Grandmasters that the Chu army was able to quickly triumph and capture Mengshan Pass. But back then, they could assemble several times more Inborn because their forces were gathered in one place. Now that the Chu army has split into five routes, even if they have many Inborn Grandmasters, how many can there be on each route after the division? Do the Chu people think it¡¯s that easy to replicate the battle of Mengshan Pass? Ning Ling, Yu City, Gu Shu, even if they are to fall, it is impossible for them to be overrun within ten days. To hold out for a month, or even two to three months, is very plausible. And as long as we can hold out for a month or two, even if these three prefectures fall, it would be worth it. Don¡¯t forget. Why did we establish the barrier of the three prefectures around Liang in the first place? It was to divide the strength of Chu¡¯s forces, preventing them from concentrating all their forces on Liang and recreating the scene of a three million strong army besieging the Imperial Capital last year. Now hasn¡¯t this goal been well achieved? Ning Ling, Yu City, Gu Shu, have drawn away half of Chu¡¯s Northern Expedition forces. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Now the Chu army under Fu City¡¯s walls is merely one million strong. It¡¯s just thirty thousand more than the Liang defenders. What significance does this small number have? Nothing at all. Before Ning Ling¡¯s three prefectures fall, before the Chu forces that have left return, our great Liang is as secure as a fortress. And after one or two months, even if the three routes of Chu troops return, their forces will be mostly depleted by the grueling sieges, with heavy casualties and low morale, their edge blunted, hardly reusable. It is already April. In one or two months, it will be June. The Chu army plans to gather all its main forces around this time. And June, only three months away from the first snowfall at the end of September. By then, with the sturdiness of Liang, seventy thousand heavy troops in garrison, and the watch of ten Inborn, are we afraid we lack assurance in dealing with the weary Chu army? Can we not hold out for three months? As long as we can hold out through these three months, with the arrival of the severe cold, the Chu army, no matter how capable, must retreat in disappointment. In this way, Chu State¡¯s second Northern Expedition, just like last year, will fail again. And after two consecutive years of grand Northern Expeditions, I believe even with the Chu army¡¯s strong reserves, they will find it hard to sustain further. I don¡¯t believe they can launch a third one next year, can they? Even if they can, at the worst, we¡¯ll just replicate this year¡¯s setup and engage in another war of attrition with the Chu army. We are merely holding firm to our territory, while the Chu army has come from a great distance, engaging in attrition, and eventually, the victory can only be ours. As long as we withstand this wave, maintain Liang, and exhaust the Chu army¡¯s endurance, the final victory will belong to us. As long as we win, even if we can¡¯t recover the lost territories, maintaining the existing seven prefectures is still achievable. With seven prefectures in hand, in the future of Central State, our great Liang will still be one of the strong nations, second only to Chu State. Yang Chen spoke with conviction, listing each point eloquentlya€¡±a speech that was more inspiring and convincing than the previous speaker¡¯s. ¡°The Grand General is right. No matter how strong the Chu army is, they¡¯ve simply fallen into our trap, playing right into our hands.¡± Chapter 1028 - Chapter 1028 Chapter 422 Inside and Outside the City_3 ?Chapter 1028: Chapter 422 Inside and Outside the City_3 Chapter 1028: Chapter 422 Inside and Outside the City_3 ¡°Indeed, let Chu take Ning Ling, Yu City, and Gu Shu. As long as we can hold onto Liang, we¡¯ll get them back sooner or later.¡± ¡°With Liang in our grasp, we command Liang Prefecture; nothing else really matters.¡± ¡°By holding onto Liang, we secure the seven prefectures, and in the future, our state of Liang will still be the top hegemon in Central State.¡± The multitude of ministers voiced their opinions one after another, their faces flushed with excitement. From their words, it seemed as though Liang was not the one being attacked, but rather on the offensive, looking down upon the world. This appeared rather comical, but also indirectly revealed a fact. That is, Liang now desperately needed a policy and hope to guide everyone to persevere. And without a doubt, the vision that Yang Chen spoke of met everyone¡¯s expectations. Therefore, as soon as it was uttered, it struck a chord with everyone, resonating deeply. ¡°But¡­¡± However, at this moment, the one who had previously cast a dampener on the mood weakly spoke up again. But as soon as he began to speak, the angry glares of the crowd were directed at him. At this joyful moment, at this time of hope, if this fellow dared to dampen spirits again, the crowd harbored the desire to kill him. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Even the Emperor of Liang, who had been at the center of attention and had yet to speak, couldn¡¯t help but frown at this person, a flash of disgust and anger in his eyes. Being stared down by the emperor and so many colleagues, the minister who opened his mouth trembled with fear, retreating back into the crowd and indeed dared not speak any further. Seeing this, the others snorted coldly, turned their heads away, and paid no further attention to this blind fellow. ¡°Cough¡­ The Grand General is correct,¡± the Emperor of Liang spoke up at this time: ¡°Although the people of Chu are fierce, the men of Liang are no less so. Last year we only suffered a disastrous defeat because they ambushed us. But even in defeat, last year was tough, yet didn¡¯t we still hold onto Liang and pull through? The dynasty of Liang continues uninterrupted. This year we have recuperated, with more and stronger soldiers than last year, and even support from the states of Xu and Zheng. How could we be any less than last year? Defending Liang is not a matter of if, but a certainty. My ministers, there is no need to boost the morale of the enemy and diminish our own prestige.¡± The Emperor of Liang set the tone for this conversation. Upon hearing this, the ministers all bowed and said, ¡°Your Majesty is wise.¡± ¡­ While far away on the ramparts of the great city of Liang, the Monarch and Ministers of Liang were each other¡¯s morale boosters, strengthening their own confidence. At a distance of tens of miles away, within the ranks of the Chu army who were arraying their forces and building their main camp, Lu Yuan was also contemplating an important matter not closely related to the attack on Liang. In the past two days, he had received dispatches from the governors and commandants of various prefectures in the rear, or rather in the prefectures of Central State in the rear. They were requesting the withdrawal of military governance and the reestablishment of local prefectures and county soldiers to restore normal order. In this regard, Lu Yuan naturally had no issue and was certainly supportive. Military governance was never meant to last; the local areas were ultimately to return to normal order. However, what made him hesitate was, where would the soldiers for the reconstructed prefecture and county forces come from? Up until now, the Northern Expedition Army of Chu had secured complete control over seven prefecturesa€¡±including Guannei, Guangling, Jiangxia, East Sea, Xingyang, Jiying, and Chengyanga€¡±as well as some territories in the prefectures of Henan, Nanyang, Liang Prefecture, East Prefecture, Shanyang, and Rencheng. All together, these equaled almost ten prefectures¡¯ worth of territory. That¡¯s nearly as large as the current direct territory of Chu. In other words, with a single Northern Expedition, Lu Yuan had conquered another Chu in just one year¡¯s time. The size of this newly-acquired territory, being a war-torn area, meant a large shortfall in the required prefectures and county soldiers. Nowadays, these occupied areas are under military administration, with the Northern Expedition Army deploying troops to guard and maintain local order. However, military administration cannot be sustained indefinitely. Especially prefectures such as Jiangxia and East Sea, which are considered to be rear areas, are transitioning to official rule as officials from Chu State arrive and begin to establish governmental frameworks. In regions like these, what is needed is stability and production. While military administration can guarantee the former, its role in the latter is minimal. After all, farmers¡¯ cultivation, the comings and goings of merchants and travelers, the operation of workshops, and the opening of shops can¡¯t simply be forced with the threat of a sword. What is needed is to motivate the initiative of the people themselves, letting them spontaneously engage in these productive activities. Therefore, for prefectures and counties that have stabilized in the rear, lifting military administration and restoring normal administration is an urgent matter. But restoring normal administration is not so simple. Of course, you can say withdrawing the deployed troops is easy, just a matter of issuing an order. But after they withdraw, the question of who will take over responsibility for local security and stability is worth discussing. Normally, local security would naturally be the responsibility of dedicated forces, namely the county soldiers and prefecture soldiers. This is the standard operation for a normal prefecture or county. But the number of prefectures and counties needing to be filled this time is too many. A rough estimate, even if we use a basic standard of a hundred for a county and a thousand for a prefecture, the thirteen prefectures combined would require about two hundred thousand county soldiers to fill the gaps. An additional one hundred and thirty thousand prefecture soldiers would also be needed. Altogether, that makes up three hundred and thirty thousand prefecture and county soldiers. Lu Yuan¡¯s Northern Expedition Army could certainly provide that many standing troops. But being able to provide them doesn¡¯t mean they could be easily spared. After all, we¡¯re talking about three hundred and thirty thousand men. For the Northern Expedition Army, which has regular soldiers numbering around six million, pulling them out of the various military expeditions would be quite painful. It could even affect the combat power of these expeditions. ?0¦Í?0.?¦Ï After all, Lu Yuan suffered a loss of only a hundred thousand men at the battle of Mengshan Pass. To withdraw three hundred and thirty thousand men is equivalent to fighting three Mengshan Pass battles. But within the state of Liang, how many Mengshan Passes are there? It¡¯s because here lies the Imperial Capital of Great Liang that there is a Mengshan Pass. In an ordinary region, a death toll of three hundred and thirty thousand could be enough for Chu forces to seize a prefecture. Just like if Lu Yuan pulled out three hundred and thirty thousand soldiers from the million blocking Great Liang, the forces would collapse instantly. Then, far from blocking Great Liang, it¡¯s feared that the Liang soldiers inside the city might see the opportunity and dare to come out for a confrontation with the Chu army. And if Lu Yuan didn¡¯t intervene, the outcome of that confrontation would be hard to predict as an absolute victory. So three hundred and thirty thousand standing troops is by no means a small number. Currently, Chu has seven major military expeditions, each contending with one of the four dominant states, facing immense pressure and a shortage of troops. In such a situation, it is truly impossible to spare too many soldiers to fill the gaps in the rear. And while main fighting soldiers can¡¯t be moved, the rear must have prefecture and county soldiers. Faced with this dilemma, Lu Yuan naturally has to consider another source of military manpower. That is, whether to select a batch of the more elite from among the up to twelve million civilian workers. To organize them into local county soldiers and form the military force that would maintain order in the new governing areas. After all, after a year of war, the civilian workers of Chu have grown rapidly. To pick out three hundred and thirty thousand prefecture and county soldiers from twelve million people is actually not that difficult. Not to mention that many of the civilian workers are veteran soldiers who already have the basic training. This makes it even easier. Chapter 1029 - Chapter 1029 Chapter 423 Disarmament, Circle ?Chapter 1029: Chapter 423 Disarmament, Circle Chapter 1029: Chapter 423 Disarmament, Circle After pondering for a while, Lu Yuan eventually decided to conduct a round of expansion recruitment from among that group of civilian workers. He would select the elite, train another contingent of soldiers, and supplement the local prefectural and county soldiers as well as various military expedition camps¡¯ troop deficiencies. Yes, the scale of this recruitment was not just limited to three hundred thirty thousand prefectural and county soldiers. He planned to further expand the recruitment, train an additional two million plus men, and after supplementing the local forces, inflate the Northern Expedition army to a strength of eight million strong. Indeed, at a time when Chu State¡¯s logistical pressures were severe and supplies were getting increasingly difficult, Lu Yuan did not consider reducing the scale of the war but planned to continue recruiting troops instead. It wasn¡¯t that he had lost his mind or become a war maniac. It was the choice he made after considering practical concerns. The current situation was not only clear to Liang, but Lu Yuan here had also more or less seen the situation clearly. What he had originally thought, which was to annihilate both Liang and Wei within a year, proved to be unrealistic after last year¡¯s practice. And this year¡¯s second Northern Expedition to capture Grand Liang in one battle was probably achievable. After all, the strength of Chu State far surpassed that of the Monarch and Ministers of Liang by more than just a margin. The three armies that had been split off not only had forces five times the size of the three prefectural cities surrounding Grand Liang but also thrice the number of Inborn Grandmasters. In terms of disparity in strength, it was even more exaggerated than the previous attack by various princes on Mengshan Pass. Therefore, taking the surrounding three prefectures was essentially not a problem. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? Liang¡¯s hope of whittling down Chu¡¯s military strength using the outer prefectural cities was nothing more than a pipe dream. And if Chu¡¯s main force was not depleted and their strength was preserved, converging to attack Great Liang would naturally be unlikely to encounter any accidents. Laying siege for about two or three months, Grand Liang should fall by no later than July of this year. But does breaking through Grand Liang signify the demise of Liang State? It¡¯s not that simple. Without Grand Liang, Liang State would merely lose Liang Prefecture. Behind Liang Prefecture, in places like Shanyang, Rencheng, Yingling and others, Liang still had nearly two million troops. In the eastern region, Liang still had a million strong army. The soldiers near Grand Liang were only part of Liang¡¯s main forces. In other areas, there were still large numbers of Liang¡¯s main forces gathered, and they controlled many affluent territories. Until these main forces of Liang were wiped out, until those territories were lost, Liang wouldn¡¯t fall so easily. After breaking Grand Liang, there would at most be three months left this year for the Chu army to carry out its conquests. It is fundamentally impossible to defeat the remnants of Liang¡¯s army mentioned above within three months. Even if the troops of Liang surrendered along the way, Chu would not be able to assume control of the remaining territories of Liang within three months, not with such a rapid pace of march. Therefore, just considering time alone, Chu State would not be in a position to annihilate Liang within this year. Moreover. Lu Yuan could be certain that if Chu truly captured Grand Liang and seized the Imperial Capital of Liang, then those countries that were originally hiding behind Liang, merely providing front-line support, would certainly not be able to restrain themselves and would step onto the forefront. Take Xu State, for example. Since last year, seeing such a terrifying progression in Chu¡¯s Northern Expedition, Xu State immediately changed its stance from originally being hostile towards Liang, swiftly switching to supporting Liang. However, at this time, Xu State¡¯s support was merely limited to providing some financial and grain aid, to assist them in maintaining their army. Xu State only regarded Liang as a barrier, a buffer zone, to block the thrust of Chu¡¯s northern movement. But if Grand Liang were to fall and Liang Prefecture occupied by Chu, then Xu would be directly facing Chu along their border. With the original buffer zone gone, the barrier would naturally no longer be tenable. At that time, Chu¡¯s threat would be directed straight at Xu¡¯s homeland. Under such circumstances, how could Xu possibly remain still? Therefore, directly sending troops to confront Chu would become inevitable. By then, following Wei, Zhao, Liang, and Zheng, Chu would be waging war with another hegemonic state, Xu. This was going to be a one-against-five scenario, even more exaggerated than Liang¡¯s previous solo fight against the world. And it might not be just Xu State. If Chu captured Grand Liang and continued eastward, it would not be long before they bordered Tang Kingdom. Once bordering Tang Kingdom, Tang¡¯s expansion in the direction of Qingzhou would naturally be blocked by Chu. Originally, Tang could cooperate with Chu for the purpose of dividing Liang together. But if that prerequisite disappeared, then Tang¡¯s attitude would naturally change as well. In a world where all nations viewed Chu with hostility, it was highly probable that Tang would also send troops to campaign against Chu. And if Tang deployed its troops, would Xu Country and Jin Country be far behind? If these countries all formed an alliance, wouldn¡¯t Chu just become the enemy of the entire world? All these scenarios were highly likely to occur. Under such circumstances, Lu Yuan¡¯s expectations for the progress of the Central State strategy were naturally lowered again and again, from the original one-year conquest of Liang and Wei to a step-by-step approach. From swiftly swallowing the world, the strategy adjusted to a gradual encroachment. The original plan for a quick victory was no longer possible. In facing the entire world as an enemy, even Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t dare to claim an easy victory. Chu State¡¯s national power also could not support this. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Therefore, changing the strategy from a short-term conflict to a long-term war was quite necessary. Originally, maintaining an eighteen million-strong army was indeed too much of a burden for Chu, so large that it was difficult to sustain over a long period. Chapter 1030 - Chapter 1030 Chapter 423 Disarmament, Circle_2 ?Chapter 1030: Chapter 423 Disarmament, Circle_2 Chapter 1030: Chapter 423 Disarmament, Circle_2 Chu State, aiming to sustain long-term confrontation with various countries in the world, must make adjustments, actively reduce its troops and horses to lessen its own burden. However, with the reduction of troops and horses, the strength of the Chu army would naturally decrease as well. Therefore, to compensate for this, refining the troops and replacing the large and disorganized civilian workers with a more regular and powerful standing army became a more economically viable method. Doing this, the expenditure in terms of silver may not decrease much. But by replacing ten million civilian workers with eight million standing troops, the consumption of grain can be nearly halved. And after cutting the grain consumption by half, Chu State could sustain this war for three to five times longer on the existing basis. Given the current consumption, after this year¡¯s war, Chu State would at best be able to support another Northern Expedition next year, after which the bottom of the barrel would be scraped clean, forcing a cessation of hostilities. However, if changes are made according to this plan, then the war could be sustained for five to ten more years. Whether Chu State could sweep through the Nine Provinces in five to ten years, Lu Yuan was not sure. But he was certain of the annihilation of Wei Country, Liang, and even Zheng Kingdom. And if all the above could be achieved, then Chu State would effectively own half of the Nine Provinces. As for the remaining states such as Zhao Xu, Tang Xu, and others, even if they were still united, they would hardly be able to stir up any trouble against the unstoppable tide of Chu State. ¡®So after capturing Liang, the reduction of civilian workers and the reorganization of the army can no longer be delayed. This matter must be implemented in the second half of this year.¡¯ Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? A personnel change involving tens of millions of people is not an easy task; it needs to be carried out step by step and a feasible plan agreed upon with many staff and ministers. ¡­ ¡°Your Majesty, the Front Army has finished the formation. Shall we invite Liang¡¯s army to battle now?¡± In the midst of his contemplation, Chu State¡¯s Innate General Shangguan Ming came over and respectfully asked for instructions. Lu Yuan awoke from his thoughts and gave a slight nod, ¡°Yes, you may proceed.¡± ¡°Understood.¡± Shangguan Ming bowed and then turned to leave. Watching his departing figure, Lu Yuan¡¯s mind sank into deep thought again. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Chu State rose too quickly, with many matters carried out in haste, leaving many hidden issues. Not only the current predicament of the Northern Expedition, but even the various surrendered factions within the country might need to be well rectified. ¡°Especially since the Northern Expedition, the hearts of those surrendered Innate from north of the river have been restless, and they have yet to be soothed¡­¡± Lu Yuan murmured to himself. In recent years, as Chu State¡¯s strategy gradually focused on the Northern Expedition, it was inevitable, or rather already happening, that a large number of Innates from the north were surrendering. Take for instance the seven Inborns of Cang Long Way who pledged allegiance en masse, and also three Innate captives from Liang who surrendered one after another. Furthermore, once the Chu army entered Henan County, Yuchan Tao, which immediately sided with them, contributed six Innate to serve Chu State. All together, in just the last year alone, there were as many as sixteen new Innate Grandmasters who pledged allegiance to Chu State. And this was just the beginning. Subsequently, as the Chu army continued to conquer Henan, Nanyang, Dong County, Liang County, and other places, and successively overthrew Wei, Liang, Zhao, Zheng, and other countries, the number of Innate Grandmasters surrendering to Chu State would be even greater, counted by the hundreds. When that time comes, hundreds of Innate from different origins, with different interests and thoughts, pouring into Chu State will inevitably impact Chu¡¯s current political structure, affecting the stability at all levels of the court. By then, whether Chu State can have a stable and powerful base will be particularly important. What does Chu State¡¯s core rely on? In the early days, it was Lu Yuan¡¯s harem, his close friend Sun Siwen, and several disciples. In the mid-term, it was Lu Yuan¡¯s Avatars. Now, his twenty-one growing children have also become a reliable central force. But all these people combined, including Lu Yuan and his Avatars, amounted to only ninety-five people, not even a hundred. By contrast, the number of Innate from other countries was destined to reach two to three hundred. One to two or three was the gap between the two sides. Although with the current core of Chu State, even with a huge disparity, they were actually enough to suppress those future surrendered ones. Even as long as Lu Yuan remained in power, he wouldn¡¯t fear any uprising. No matter how many surrenderers there were, he was not afraid. But what¡¯s the point of that? Isn¡¯t politics about making many friends and few enemies? Then using those many friends to strike down the few that cannot be converted, ultimately achieving the purpose of eliminating dissidents and gradually consolidating power? By relying on the prestige of one man, Lu Yuan, to suppress the entire world, it is indeed possible. But that¡¯s too exhausting, and the turmoil it stirs up is too much. Lu Yuan had no interest in competing with the heavens, with others, treating the entire empire as a chessboard in a power struggle against those surrendering subjects. Not only is it meaningless, but it would also harm the interests of the empire. While ensuring his supreme power, he didn¡¯t mind sharing the benefits of the entire empire with other followers. No matter how formidable he was, even if he had the ability to ¡°Turn Beans into Soldiers,¡± at best, he could only create a few hundred Avatars. Can these Avatars govern the entire empire? That is fundamentally impossible. After unifying the world, or even just the entire Central State, maintaining such a vast empire would require talent counted by the thousands. And among those tens of thousands, or even a hundred thousand officials, it¡¯s inevitable that some leaders will emerge to represent the interests of various officials. Chapter 1031 - Chapter 1031 Chapter 423 Disarmament, Circle_3 ?Chapter 1031: Chapter 423 Disarmament, Circle_3 Chapter 1031: Chapter 423 Disarmament, Circle_3 ¡°` These leading figures, in an ordinary world, would be high-ranking officials and politicians. In this world at the tail end of the cultivation of immortals, they are the Inborn Grandmasters who wield the ultimate power. Therefore, it was fundamentally impossible for Lu Yuan to simply reject the Inborn of other factions. Unless he directly slaughtered and purged the entire original class, pushing everything from the old empires to the ground to start anew and create a new society, there was no way he could do it. But the cost of such an action would be too great. The old forces that would be driven to absolute opposition, unable to survive under the pressure of Chu State, would definitely resist to the death. At that time, without overturning heaven and earth, without the resolve to shatter the whole of Central State, and without the determination to massacre hundreds of millions, along with enduring the throes of upheaval for over a hundred years, it would be impossible to complete this task. And what¡¯s the point of that? Accomplishing these things wouldn¡¯t benefit Lu Yuan much either. The old forces had already been defeated by him and were stripped of most of their interests. Leaving some scraps for others to maintain a semblance of status in this newly-founded empire and then recruiting them for his own use, wouldn¡¯t that be better? As for the concern about not completely eliminating these old forces, that they might lie in wait and seize an opportunity to strike back in the future¡­ That is even more laughable. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 With Lu Yuan, the immortal, present, he was curious to see how much more capable those descendants could be compared to their ancestors, who were, after all, losers, and what new tricks they could come up with. The thought of the contemporary Inborn of the Nine Provinces being worn down to death by him was something to look forward to. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï And then, after hundreds of years, when their descendants, who weren¡¯t even Inborn or had forgotten what being an Inborn meant, remembered the grievances they had endured and rose in anger, only to be forcefully suppressed by the might of an Inborn Lu Yuan Avatar¡­ It was an exhilarating prospect. What¡¯s the fun in fighting strong enemies or outclassing them in combat? Beating up those in a nursing home, kicking around a kindergarten, bullying the weak and olda€¡±that¡¯s the joy of life. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t have the mindset of trying to prove his strength. He enjoyed bullying those who were a whole level or even several levels below him. Seeing them exhaust all methods and still not being able to harm even a single hair on him, how satisfying that must be. This kind of malice is what¡¯s really interesting. Therefore, holding this philosophy, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t harbor strong malice or rejection towards the enemies he had once defeated, who had now joined Chu State as losers. Just like the early cases of Li Xiong, Li River, and others, who were quickly assimilated into the semi-core circle of Chu State. After thirty years of scrutiny, the former Jiangdong Aristocratic Family, essentially the group headed by Shangguan Ming, was also starting to be drawn into the core circle of Chu State by Lu Yuan. Especially Shangguan Ming, the man who once wanted to be his father-in-law, was entrusted with an important task, appointed as a Grand General in the Chu army, holding a high position within the Military Expedition, assisting him in managing major affairs and politics. In the Coastal Aristocratic Family, there were still seven Inborn Grandmasters, and counting Song State Xie Ning, there were eight, all of whom were in their prime. This force within Chu State could not be underestimated; it was an important political group in the imperial court. With such a force, once it was confirmed that the opponent posed little threat anymore, Lu Yuan would naturally seek to ally with them. Not only did he try to attract the Coastal Aristocratic Family, but he also targeted the Snow Plains Tribes submits and the Western Liang people, two major forces that each had several Inborn Grandmasters, as key objects of Chu State¡¯s alliances. ¡°` As for the Yi People to the southwest, after nearly forty years of management and with the demonstration by representatives such as Li Xiong and Li River, they were absorbed into Chu State¡¯s fold early on. With Chu State¡¯s core forces leading and semi-core forces from the periphery assisting, a Jiangnan group representing Chu State¡¯s core interests swiftly took shape. This group, which kept growing and integrating through nurturing and pacification, now occupies more than ninety percent of the country¡¯s political power. This was not the limit; according to Lu Yuan¡¯s plans, this group would subsequently expand further, gradually assimilating the forces of various countries north of Jiangnan. Ultimately, it would form the structure with five concentric circles: the Emperor at the corea€¡±Inborn Jiangnana€¡±Inborn Central Statea€¡±Inborn Northa€¡±external forces. That is, the circles of confidants, semi-core, submissive subjects, assimilable elements, and non-assimilable elements, five layers of hierarchy. In this way, layer by layer and step by step, Chu State¡¯s foundation would expand, ultimately achieving a solidified class system that would be completely unshakable. By then, as long as Lu Yuan, the Emperor, did not actively disrupt this order, the reign of Chu State would be as secure as a fortress of iron, impervious to any adversaries. ¡°Now, the various forces in Jiangnan are basically already on the edge of my core circle, which means they can be trusted and used. Following last year¡¯s Northern Expedition, the Inborn representatives from Central State¡¯s Liang and Wei who surrendered have been observed for a year, and after exchanging oaths of allegiance, have each made their positions clear. Perhaps, it is time to attempt to further utilize them, to try and form a new layer that could absorb other Inborn from Central State.¡± Lu Yuan mused. Although hierarchies, layers, and forces pose a considerable threat to national governance, if one sets aside those dangers, the importance of such classifications for the consolidation of the court cannot be ignored. Without a circle to join, how can one know if you¡¯re on their side? And if you¡¯re not one of us, how can we trust you? Classmates are always closer than schoolmates. Fellow townspeople are always dearer than people from the same province. In a village, kin are always more familiar than other villagers. Thus, sometimes, even if reluctantly, to survive in this world, one unconsciously chooses to band together, to instinctively form various circles. This is, in fact, no mistake but merely an innate instinct. What Lu Yuan was now doing was to take the initiative, to shape and standardize the range, to dictate which circles people would enter, using these circles to unite all the forces. ¡°Your Majesty, the messenger has gone to the foot of Daliang City to challenge them more than ten times, and it¡¯s already been half a ¡°timing¡± with no reaction from Liang.¡± At this moment, Shangguan Ming returned to report, ¡°It seems that Liang is too afraid to engage in battle.¡± Lu Yuan glanced at the former Ning Country general, now entirely won over by the circle strategy, and on him, one could not see a trace of the hostility he once held for Chu; there was only loyalty and identification. After more than thirty years of assimilation and profit distribution, those Coastal Aristocratic Families that once looked down on Chu had indeed obediently become Chu¡¯s watchdogs. He showed a slight smile, ¡°I have long anticipated this. Since Liang dares not fight, then so be it. Order the front-line armies to continue monitoring Liang for a while, and once the main camp at the rear is set up, withdraw back to the camp.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Shangguan Ming complied without any objection. Chapter 1032 - Chapter 1032 Chapter 424 Cannon Fodder, Pacification of Heyang ?Chapter 1032: Chapter 424: Cannon Fodder, Pacification of Heyang Chapter 1032: Chapter 424: Cannon Fodder, Pacification of Heyang Since the Liang army was reluctant to engage in battle, Lu Yuan did not press them. The main force he currently led indeed had fewer numbers, barely reaching one million. Moreover, among these one million, there were only six Inborn Grandmasters, even fewer than those in the city of Liang. Under such circumstances, to think about capturing the great city of Liang was simply wishful thinking. He could also guess what the Liang people were thinking, nothing more than intending to use the surrounding key towns to wear down the Chu army¡¯s strength and drag out the time. But to Lu Yuan, these tactics hardly posed a problem. The people of Liang had underestimated him and also underestimated the resolve of the Chu army to seize the great city of Liang. At this time, when the opponent wished to stall for time, why wouldn¡¯t he also wish to delay? ¡°Just wait,¡± Lu Yuan sneered, ¡°Once Ning Ling, Yu City, and Gu Shu are taken, Liang will have lost all its defenses, and that will be when this imperial capital of both countries falls.¡± He took a distant look at the city of Liang, withdrew his gaze, and turned back to the main camp. After the Chu army¡¯s arrival at Liang, the initial period passed in calm. The Liang army did not wish to fight, and the Chu army, with its insufficient forces, was also unwilling to fight. Besides building fortifications and deploying camps widely, both sides just faced each other, with neither taking the initiative to attack. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Both sides gazed at each other from afar, across camps and city walls. A silent war, with a strange posture, appeared on this battlefield that drew the attention of the world. ¡­ After returning to the main camp, Lu Yuan did not idle. Although the planning for expanding and downsizing the army had not yet been implemented due to the ongoing wars at various military expeditions, the time for its implementation was not far off. He planned to take advantage of this winter period, influenced by the cold snap, to quickly begin this task. The Chu¡¯s Northern Expedition had been underway for almost two years. For those in the standing army, it was slightly better; their livelihood depended on it, and being constantly engaged in warfare was routine and nothing to complain about. But for the conscripted civilian workers, it was different. They were ordinary citizens, conscripted temporarily due to the needs of war. Such conscriptions for a few months, or even a year, was somewhat acceptable. But like now, extending for two years or possibly even longer, was hard for people to accept. With civilian workers conscripted, their families lacked their pillars, affecting agriculture and other tasks greatly. What¡¯s more important, with a man absent from their homes, who knew whether their wives and children would be bullied? With the husband away for a long time, what if the wife committed adultery? All these were inevitable. Therefore, feelings of homesickness had already begun to spread widely among the civilian workers. The Chu¡¯s Northern Expedition had indeed been successful, defeating two of the world¡¯s powerful nations in battle. But however successful the war¡¯s progress, hope for a swift and decisive victory remained slender. Having fought for so long, even the least knowledgeable civilian workers, influenced by rumors and what they saw and heard, had come to realize. This war would not end in less than three to five years, or perhaps even longer. Realizing that the day of their discharge was indefinitely far away, many despaired, feeling they might die on the battlefield, never returning home. Last year, after a year of fighting, the results were certainly brilliant, but under that brilliance, out of twelve million civilian workers, nearly two million had died. Each conquered city and every piece of territory controlled was bought with the blood of those civilian workers and soldiers. In just one year, so many had died. This year¡¯s Northern Expedition, fighting at Mengshan Pass, had cost ten thousand lives. And now, facing the battles at Ning Ling, Yu City, and Gu Shu, it was estimated that another two to three hundred thousand, or even more, would die. Afterward, fighting for the great Liang, wouldn¡¯t there be over a million deaths? All these were not merely numbers but living human lives. No, it should be said that in the eyes of the generals, these were just numbers. But in the eyes of the soldiers and civilian workers, it was their own lives. Every powerful city had to be filled with their lives. At present, the Northern Expeditionary Army numbered three million, and after this great war for Liang, who knew whether even two million would remain? With last year¡¯s experience, all civilian workers had some foreboding, knowing that there was a significant chance they wouldn¡¯t return. Under these circumstances, could their emotions and morale remain unaffected? Lu Yuan had noticed this point, and that¡¯s why he had to make adjustments. Downsizing the army was not just about reducing grain consumption but also about allowing those long-term conscripted civilian workers a chance to return home and reunite with their families. If he did not let them go soon, he feared that the morale of the entire army might collapse. However, even if he wanted to release them, it was not a matter of simply letting them go. The old soldiers conscripted for last year¡¯s Northern Expedition could be sent back. At their peak, they numbered twelve million, but now, only about ten million remained. ?¦Ï??0.?¦Ï After this year¡¯s second Northern Expeditionary battle and further attrition from the seven military expeditions, it was estimated there would be only seven or eight million left. Of these seven or eight million, if another two million were enlisted, in the end, about five or six million should be able to return home. Well, twelve million went, and five or six million returned; having half survive to return home was an acceptable number of losses. After all, in a war of this magnitude, being mere cannon fodder, having only half perish instead of all, was already quite fortunate. Chapter 1033 - Chapter 1033 Chapter 424 Cannon Fodder, Pacification of Heyang_2 ?Chapter 1033: Chapter 424: Cannon Fodder, Pacification of Heyang_2 Chapter 1033: Chapter 424: Cannon Fodder, Pacification of Heyang_2 When Lu Yuan first rose to power and was fighting in Dongting County, every time he conscripted civilian workers as cannon fodder, barely any would be left by the end of the battle. At that time, the mortality rate of cannon fodder basically soared above eighty or ninety percent. Nowadays, having it at thirty or forty percent is already quite good. Other nations have been waging war in recent years, and every time they conscript civilian workers, the death rate is also very high. Otherwise, why do you think Liang, which has been stable in most of its territories for thirty years of war, has not only failed to increase its population. Instead, the total population decreased from the peak of over eighty million to less than seventy million, a reduction of over ten million people. Where did the population that should have grown naturally each year go? It was consumed as cannon fodder on the front-line battlefields, that¡¯s where. Liang is not alone; the recent population decline in the other nations of Zhao, Wei, and Xu is basically due to the same reason. The loss of five or six million people may seem large for Chu State, but when compared with other nations, it¡¯s actually not that much more. Considering he is now fighting the world alone, having directly opened seven military camps on seven battlefields, these losses are actually even less substantial. Averaged out, each military camp lost less than a million men. After Chu took control of Central State and its population swelled to 140 million, this loss, less than one twentieth of the total population, was completely acceptable. That¡¯s why, after letting go of last year¡¯s civilian workers, Lu Yuan doesn¡¯t plan to release this year¡¯s newly recruited two million civilians meant to replenish those lost last year. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï After all, the battlefields across Chu State are fiercely contested, and although preparations are being made for a standing regular army, the need for cannon fodder in warfare is unavoidable. It¡¯s heartbreaking to use the elite troops trained with such effort as cannon fodder. Sometimes, when sieging cities and filling trenches, some civilian workers are still needed as cannon fodder to reduce elite casualties. Moreover, although the Chu army has gradually gained a foothold in Central State, some counties in the rear have even begun to produce food and fodder, supporting the front-line troops. Here, the Chu army is no longer on a campaign thousands of miles from home, but has a hint of fighting on its own territory. The pressure on logistics and transportation has been greatly reduced. Gradually, there¡¯s no need for so many civilian workers to transport food from afar. But fewer doesn¡¯t mean none at all. The food and fodder for the front-line armies still need laborers to transport them, which requires civilian workers. Therefore, this year¡¯s newly conscripted two million cannot be released, but must stay to serve as new cannon fodder after the five or six million old civilian workers are let go next year. However, according to the plan, after capturing Liang this year, the war with other nations next year will not be as fierce as it is now. Of these two million civilian workers, even if they are to serve as cannon fodder, half should still be able to survive in the end. It¡¯s not entirely without a glimmer of hope. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Although Lu Yuan may be ruthless on the battlefield, he¡¯s not completely merciless, still leaving some ways out for people. Especially for his own people. Planning is one thing, but how to recruit more than two million new soldiers? How to release five or six million civilian workers? After they leave, how to adjust the strength of each military camp? After the reduction of troops in hand, should an offensive or defensive stance be adopted against other nations on various military fronts? All these issues are in urgent need of resolution. It¡¯s not something Lu Yuan can decide on a whim or settle with a single word. That¡¯s why, as he sat in a standoff with the defenders of Great Liang City, he began to convene meetings with the generals in the camp, as well as accompanying ministers and officers, to coordinate and discuss the matter. The adjustment of tens of millions of people involves too many aspects to be planned for replenishment. To come up with a plan and execute it by the end of this year is certainly not an easy task. Therefore, Lu Yuan could only work overtime with the many civil and military officials, discussing and planning every day. Time also began to fly by in such busy work. At the end of March in the forty-second year of Shenwu, the Chu army arrived at Great Liang. At the beginning of April, the Chu army repaired the camp, sealed off all four routes, and Great Liang City was besieged, completely isolated from the outside world. By mid-April, after half a month of static confrontation, news came from Ningling Prefecture in the south that after half a month of siege, the Chu army finally broke through the city and took this major stronghold of southern Liang. Of the hundred thousand Liang defenders in the city, seventy thousand died in battle and thirty thousand surrendered. Additionally, the two hundred thousand civilian workers from Chu who were forcibly conscripted during this period lost a hundred thousand and a hundred thousand surrendered. The Liang forces lost three hundred thousand men, and the two Inborn generals guarding Ning Ling also perished in battle, buried with the city. On the Chu side, although no Inborns were lost, the army still suffered casualties of one hundred and fifty thousand men, and even though most were cannon fodder civilian workers, it was still enough to cause distress. In light of this, Lu Yuan, with a touch of regret, could only order that the surrendered Liang people, along with those from Mengshan Pass, totaling two hundred and forty thousand people, all be escorted to Great Liang City. The battle of Ning Ling made him realize once again the horrors of siege warfare. The consumption of human life in such battles is like a meat grinder, never enough to fill the gaps. Even though the Chu army already held the advantage, taking down Great Liang could ultimately cost the lives of a million men. However you look at it, it was the capital of a once world-dominating power, renowned for decades as the strongest fortress in the world. For the Chu army to capture such a world-famous stronghold, the road to the city must be paved with fresh blood and flesha€¡±it would be unreasonable otherwise. Since people are bound to die, it¡¯s certainly better for them to be people of Liang than people of Chu. Chapter 1034 - Chapter 1034 Chapter 424 Cannon Fodder, Pacification of Heyang_3 ?Chapter 1034: Chapter 424: Cannon Fodder, Pacification of Heyang_3 Chapter 1034: Chapter 424: Cannon Fodder, Pacification of Heyang_3 ¡°` Earlier Lu Yuan was concerned about his reputation and didn¡¯t want to forcibly conscript local Liang citizens to be cannon fodder, driving them to swarm and attack the city. But now the Liang people had themselves gathered the individuals together, even turning the original Liang citizens into Liang soldiers, switching from a production unit to a military unit. With this change of status, everything was fine. Driving citizens to attack a city was inhumane, the act of a tyrant, and contravened his own reputation for benevolence and righteousness. But driving prisoners of war to attack a city, that was surely not a problem, right? Even if the news got out, nobody could really fault him for it. Over there, there were 240,000 Liang prisoners, and by sending them to the front line to fill the trenches, the Chu State could have 240,000 fewer casualties. If this practice continued, perhaps an additional one million of the ten million Chu civilian workers could ultimately return home. For the Chu people, this was a significant act of kindness. For the Chu State, being able to keep more of its supportive population meant that its base was stronger, which was also a very good thing. Therefore, after realizing this, Lu Yuan gave orders to the Central State counties in the rear to stop sending the large number of Liang soldiers captured last year to work on new water conservancy projects, and instead, redirect them all to prepare for filling the trenches. Last year, the Chu army achieved a series of brilliant victories during which they captured a large number of soldiers from various countries. Among them, Liang had the most with approximately 2.3 million people becoming prisoners, both soldiers and civilian workers included. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Wei Country was next, with about 1.5 million people captured. Zhao Army was after that, around 700,000 people. Zheng Kingdom had the least, roughly 200,000 people. All of these amounted to 4.7 million people in total, a vast number. Instead of releasing these prisoners, the Chu State directly used them as corvee labor, assigning them to tasks like road maintenance, grain transport, city and water conservancy construction, mining, and excavation. All of these were harsh labors, which previously required the conscription of citizens to perform corvee labor. Each time, many would die, causing considerable civilian discontent. Now that they had free labor, naturally, they did not need to trouble the citizens and add to their suffering. Chu Army was able to begin the second Northern Expedition this year without any hesitation, and indeed, they could not afford to give up the credit of this free labor. Late April. Successive victories were reported from Yu City and Gu Shu, the two prefectures were conquered. After spending a month, the barrier surrounding the main camp of Liang was finally removed by the Chu Army one by one. Two detached armies killed 300,000 Liang soldiers and captured 200,000, with their own losses at 230,000, equally not small in death and injury. As per custom, Lu Yuan likewise ordered the two detached armies to escort these prisoners, along with themselves, to the front-line main camp. In Qingzhou counties in the rear, there were also 600,000 Liang prisoners, who, during this period, were successively escorted to the front line. By early May, as various forces converged here, Lu Yuan¡¯s massive army once again broke through the two million mark. Similarly, following along, there were a million Liang prisoners. These cannon fodder would be the first to strike in the great siege of the main camp of Liang, paving a blood-and-flesh road to Liang for the Chu army behind them. However, Lu Yuan was not in a hurry to take action. It was only early May, with five months to go before winter. This lengthy period was enough for him to take the city of Liang. However, the various detached armies had previously gone through three difficult sieges, each suffering significant losses, and the morale among the soldiers was somewhat low. This was especially true for those civilian workers who had been used as cannon fodder to fill the trenches. Obviously, it was not possible, in such a state, to immediately engage in a major battle. So Lu Yuan planned to let all the forces rest well, take a ten-day to half a month break, to recover their morale. ¡°` Meanwhile, with new cannon fodder arriving here, it¡¯s very likely that civilian workers from Chu will seldom be used. This point, could also be communicated to the low-level civilian workers. Believing in this heartening news, their mood and morale would see a significant shift. This task, too, needs to be arranged as soon as possible. Therefore, after the main camp assembled, the Chu Army¡¯s camp continued to rest and wait. But inside the city of Liang. As the various Chu armies arrived, almost everyone understood that Ning Ling, Yu City, and Gu Shu, three prefectures nearby Liang, must have all been lost. This was much faster than their original estimation of the time it would take for the Chu Army to conquer the three prefectures. The fighting capability of the Chu Army was stronger than they had imagined. And the chance for Liang to survive was less than expected. Liang, which was originally expected to hold out for two to three months, now had to be defended for four to five months. The time had doubleda€¡±could Liang really hold out? This question arose in many people¡¯s minds. The panic that had been suppressed reemerged and began to spread throughout the city as Chu¡¯s forces arrived. ?¦Ï??0.§ã? Inside the city, there was widespread alarm and despondency. But at this time, within the Chu camp, there was celebration. Because from Yong State, news had arrived. The Wei Army in Nanyang, after holding out for over a year and having consumed all of their stored food, and even resorting to cannibalism, finally could no longer endure. Dizzy from hunger, after their repeated failed charges against the Chu siege, and ultimately being decisively defeated. They couldn¡¯t bear it any longer, and directly chose to surrender. The remaining 300,000 soldiers of the Wei Army surrendered their last four cities, wading through a sea of blood and rotting flesh, marching toward their doom. Thus Nanyang was pacified. When the news reached Henan, the Wei soldiers there, although with some aid from the Zhao Army of Hebei, were in a much better state than the Wei soldiers in Nanyanga€¡±they hadn¡¯t resorted to cannibalism, at least. But as Chu¡¯s assault on the Eastern Province intensified and Zhao deployed more and more troops there, their own consumption of money and supplies significantly increased. What was left for the Wei Army grew less and less. When the tragic situation of the Nanyang Wei Army was conveyed to Henan, the deeply impacted Wei soldiers there were all shaken. No one wanted to become a beast that resulted to cannibalism, nor did they wish for their families to suffer the bleak fate of those in Nanyang. So realizing that the situation was hopeless, the more than 600,000 Wei soldiers holding out there also chose to open their gates and surrender. The last piece of Wei territory in Central State thus fell. As for the 300,000 cannibalistic soldiers from Wei in Nanyang, Lu Yuan had only one order after learning of their surrender: Send them to the Eastern Province, dispatch them to the Chu-Zhao front lines. These cannibals had utterly lost their humanity, sparing not even their own families. Such people, such an army, no matter how fierce, would not be wanted by Chu. Although they were reluctantly accepting their surrender now, it didn¡¯t mean they were forgiven. It was still appropriate to send them to the cruelest front lines, to serve as cannon fodder, to use their lives to atone for their past sins. It just so happened that there were quite a few large cities in the Eastern Province, and one Imperial Capital, all in need of large amounts of cannon fodder. If these 300,000 people could survive after the Eastern Province campaign, Then, with these merits, granting them amnesty would not be unreasonable. Chapter 1035 - Chapter 1035 Chapter 425 In-fighting ?Chapter 1035: Chapter 425 In-fighting Chapter 1035: Chapter 425 In-fighting ¡°` At the end of May. The sun blazed overhead, heat steaming up, an auspicious time for skirmishing. ¡°If you break through the camp ahead, you can rest for ten days, during which the meat and wine will be plentiful. Should you charge through three camps in a row, you¡¯ll be pardoned on the spot, rewarded with gold and silver, and allowed to return home.¡± At the front of the vast army, a Chu military officer rode back and forth, addressing the multitude of Liang people in front of hima€¡±their expressions a mix of panic, fear, hostility, anger, and despaira€¡±¡±But should you dare retreat, violating the Military Order¡­¡± The officer pointed ahead to the corpses hanging from several Liang beams: ¡°Them!¡± Then he pointed to more corpses in front of them, riddled with countless arrows, turned into beehives: ¡°And them, that will be your fate. Advance and live, retreat and die. Do you understand?¡± The many Liang people, staring at those corpses, each contracted their pupils, their fear heightened, the angry grew angrier, the frightened more terrified, but one thing was the samea€¡±they all remained silent. ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Because they knew the Chu people didn¡¯t need their answers, nor did they want to hear them; the Chu only coveted their fear. Indeed, that was the case. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï After threatening and tempting them, the Chu officer waved his hand: ¡°Ahead, there are short blades and long spears distributed for you to pick up. Take your weapons, and then you¡¯re ready to assault the formation.¡± Having said that, the officer spurred his horse away from there, heading towards even more Liang people behind them, watched intently by the predatory Chu army. The many Liang people looked at each other, each frozen in place. Some of the braver individuals, seeing the Chu had left, couldn¡¯t help but curse out loud, their hatred for the Chu, who treated them as cannon fodder, apparent. Whirr! Just then, a buzzing sound came from behind, followed by a dark cloud raining down like arrows, thudding into the ground right behind the Liang people. A few unfortunate souls screamed as they were struck by the arrows, pinned to the ground, howling in agony. ¡°Charge! Charge! Charge!¡± From the Chu Barracks behind, countless Soldiers banged their spears on the ground or struck their shields with knives, screaming threateningly. Clearly, the Chu were dissatisfied with their hesitation, and the rain of arrows just unleashed served as a warning. Seeing this, the thousand or so Liang people clenched their teeth. They knew if they dragged their feet any longer, the Chu behind them would not hesitate to loose their arrows, killing them with a barrage. This had already happened two days prior. Before the eyes of tens of thousands of Liang captives, thousands of Chu archers didn¡¯t hesitate to unleash a volley, turning over a thousand dawdling Liang people in the front rows into pincushions. One by one, Liang people ran chaotically on the battlefield, falling to the ground with wails. This harrowing scene had delivered a profound shock to all the Liang captives. As a result, now receiving the warning, those who had witnessed the scene that day, no matter how fearful, dared not delay any longer. ¡°Damn it all, I¡¯m going for it!¡± ¡°Death awaits whether I face it from the left or right, better to charge. If I survive and return, even if I must live as a hermit in the mountains, I¡¯ll never be a soldier again.¡± ¡°I¡¯m charging, okay? I¡¯ll do it!¡± Among the Liang, some desperate individuals gritted their teeth and, with eyes reddened, charged forward. Ahead on the ground lay more than a thousand discarded, haphazardly piled swords and spears, unattended. These poor-quality short blades, or even mere bamboo poles and wooden sticks sharpened to a point, were the weapons provided to the Liang captives for the upcoming rush. As fodder for the front lines, their very purpose was to exhaust the supplies of the Liang armya€¡±arrows, rocks, and the durability of their own swords and spears, even their stamina. Moreover, to manage the risks, the Chu army wouldn¡¯t provide stable weapons to these captives in unpredictable mindsets. What if they turned traitor? With someone leading the charge, the rest of the Liang captives followed suit, picked up whatever blade or spear they could find, and rushed forward while screaming at the top of their lungs. There was no formation, no coordination. They all just charged, yelling, as if by doing so they could dispel the despair and terror in their hearts. Their mission was to run forward. Simply to reach the Liang army¡¯s Camp ahead, climb over the walls, and complete their task for the day. Even if they were driven off afterwards, they could rest for ten days at the back and be assured of meat and drink. However, the number of individuals who returned alive was far too few, perhaps only one or two out of a hundred. The promise of unlimited meat and wine hardly mattered, as it was meant for only a dozen or so survivors, hardly wasting much grain. Thump! Squelch! A chorus of muffled thuds, accompanied by screams and wails. The charging Liang captives were suddenly enveloped in a hail of arrows and pinned to the route they had taken. Above, on the walls of the Liang Camp, their compatriots showed no mercy as Liang archers drew their bows and unleashed arrows towards these captives. On the battlefield, there are no countrymen, no fellow townspeople, no kin, only friend and foe. If you dare attack the Camp, regardless of who you are, you become my enemy. ¡°Don¡¯t kill me, don¡¯t kill me, I am a Liang!¡± ¡°I¡¯m Xu Shi An from Dong Lin Lane, Jia Shan Street, in the west of Anyang district inside the great Liang City, I am a Liang civilian!¡± ¡°I am Qian Jia, a military officer of the Wu Yi army from Jin Luo Camp; I¡¯m also of the Liang army, one of our own, don¡¯t shoot!¡± Among the crowd of Liang charging into battle, countless yelled out, waving their hands desperately, their faces the picture of urgent panic. But what answered them was a volley of swiftly approaching arrows. ¡°` Chapter 1036 - Chapter 1036 Chapter 425 In-fighting_2 ?Chapter 1036: Chapter 425 In-fighting_2 Chapter 1036: Chapter 425 In-fighting_2 Puh-puh-puh! One after another, people were shot down to the ground, screaming as they were trampled over, falling into pools of blood, their cries gradually fading away. By the time over a thousand Liang people reached the Camp, already three to four hundred had died. The remaining five to six hundred, carrying ladders, directly leaned them against the Camp walls and climbed up in tears and shouts. ¡°Don¡¯t throw stones, don¡¯t throw stones.¡± ¡°Stop pouring feces! Stop, please, I beg you.¡± ¡°I never meant to charge the ranks, I just want to live, let me up. Once I¡¯m up, I definitely won¡¯t kill, I want to surrender, I want to go home.¡± ¡°I¡¯m from the Liang army, I want to return to my unit, I want to return to the Camp.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t kill me.¡± Hundreds of people from Liang were jammed beneath the Camp, crying and pleading to the heavens. The Liang soldiers on the wall, seeing this scene, each revealed an expression of being unable to bear it on their faces. Below them, not long before, were their own comrades. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Yet in this short Time, both sides had crossed swords on the Battlefield. No, it should be said that it was they who unilaterally faced arms against each other. ¡°Platoon leader, these are all our people from Liang, how about we let them up?¡± ¡°Yeah, didn¡¯t we say we were short of troops? There are hundreds of people there, if we let them up and reorganize them, won¡¯t we have enough soldiers?¡± ¡°My brother was also assigned to Gu Shu not long ago. I don¡¯t know if he is among these prisoners. What if I accidentally kill him while being severe?¡± ¡°My father was also assigned over to Ning Ling.¡± ¡°My uncle is in Yu City.¡± Many of the soldiers Guarding the city from Liang were similarly distressed and pleaded with their superiors. However, the pleas fell on deaf ears for the Camp Commander, who simply said coldly, ¡°Pour the feces, throw stones, push the ladders, carry out the Military Order.¡± This merciless command painfully stung many of the Liang soldiers. The fate of those former comrades below served as a constant reminder that, should they too be captured in the future, the same fate would very likely befall them. What if one day, forced to storm the Camp, they cried out just like this, and their former comrades showed no mercya€¡±what then? This thought was on many people¡¯s minds. ¡°Sir, they are all our comrades.¡± ¡°Sir, please let them in¡­ Ah!¡± Pu-chi! With a muffled sound followed by a scream, the Camp Chief General pulled out his sword, and the loudest protesting Liang soldier fell to the ground. The general looked around at the stunned people and pointed towards the distance, to the Chu army slowly approaching, coming their way, ¡°Do you see those Chu people over there? It¡¯s because you hesitate to act, allowing those people below to block the way, that they are advancing towards us. It may seem easy to accept these people, but how will you deal with the chaos after they climb up? Would you like to be flustered when you go to face the Chu people? Can the Camp be defended then? And who knows if any Chu people are among those below? If there is a Spy among them, causing turmoil when the Chu people attack, what then? If then the Camp falls and you all are captured, you will be the next one forced to charge against the enemy at swordpoint and spearpoint.¡± Many Liang soldiers looked over, and indeed, they saw that behind those Liang prisoners, ranks of Chu soldiers were pressing forward towards them. These Chu people were closing in fast, and perhaps in the time it took to drink a cup of tea, they could reach them. In this short span of time, it would definitely be impossible to settle the hundreds of Liang prisoners below in the Camp. Once everything became a chaotic mess, it was even possible that Spies would emerge, which meant the Camp indeed could not be defended. Moreover, on the wall of the fort, by now fifty or sixty Liang prisoners had climbed up, creating a disordered scene which turned the once orderly walls into a mess. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï In that Region, it was impossible for the Liang soldiers to Guard the city effectively. Several low-level Liang officers, at this time with their subordinates, sweat-drenched, were frantically arranging these comrades who had escaped up, faces tense with urgency. ¡°Order those prisoners to be immediately taken into the camp¡¯s interior, to be well guarded. Anyone who dares to cause trouble, kill without mercy.¡± The Camp Chief General saw this and immediately ordered sternly. ¡°Yes!¡± A few Personal Guards took the order and led a team to handle the situation. After issuing the order, the Camp Chief General didn¡¯t bother with it anymore and continued to issue commands, ¡°Everyone else, immediately stick to your duties. There are no Liang people below the city, nor are there comrades, only the enemy. Don¡¯t listen to what they shout; just kill them for me. If there¡¯s any hesitation or delay, military law will be enforced! Kill!¡± Under the harsh Military Order, the soldier who had been making noise on the ground was still bleeding out, but his breath had ceased. The Chu army was drawing near in the distance. Under the gory example and the Threat, the many Liang soldiers no longer dared say more. At the calls and commands of their Company Commanders and team generals, each one clenched their teeth, lifted stones and feces, and then, amidst the cries and shouts below, they closed their eyes and threw them down. In an instant, cries of agony were unceasing to the ear. ¡°Fuck! These officials don¡¯t treat us like countrymen at all.¡± ¡°A bunch of heartless bastards, even killing their own comrades.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s fight them!¡± ¡°I always knew these officials couldn¡¯t be trusted; instead of begging them, better to listen to the Chu people, storm the Camp, and vie for wealth and honor.¡± Below, having faced a barrage of attacks in an instant, the Liang prisoners, under extreme despair and a sense that they had been betrayed, finally developed a rebellious mentality. Their eyes red, they begged no more. One by one, they climbed the walls with gritted teeth, and then, taking advantage of some of their former comrades who were still hesitant, they grabbed their short swords and stabbed forward without hesitation. Chapter 1037 - Chapter 1037 Chapter 425 In-fighting_3 ?Chapter 1037: Chapter 425 In-fighting_3 Chapter 1037: Chapter 425 In-fighting_3 ¡°` Thud, thud. A white blade goes in, a red blade comes out. With a push of the hand, a figure full of disbelief fell to the ground. ¡°Why must we be forced to charge at the point of a bayonet while they can wield their swords over us?¡± A Liang captive who had just killed a former comrade stood atop the city wall, brandishing his sword and shouting, ¡°Kill them and break through their camp, let them experience being forced to charge forward like us. No, we¡¯ll be the ones drinking and feasting, watching them charge ahead.¡± ¡°Kill them, break through the camp!¡± ¡°Kill them, break through the camp!¡± These highly seductive words instantly ignited the baseness in the hearts of all the Liang captives. A sense of not wanting others to fare well if one is not. The desire to destroy what is beautiful appeared in everyone¡¯s mind. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 The wild beast within their hearts was unleashed from its cage and began to wreak havoc. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ¡°Eliminate these rebels.¡± ¡°Traitors.¡± ¡°Kill these ungrateful wretches.¡± The Liang soldiers on the city walls, upon seeing their countrymen and former comrades behave this way, were also inflamed with rage. Thinking of what their commanding officer had said previously, they could no longer hold back. And so, both sides began to clash. But how could a group of captives who lacked armor, were starving, and even carried subpar weapons possibly stand a chance against the well-equipped Liang defenders? Once the defenders got serious, it only took moments before all the Liang captives who had rushed the walls were driven back down. Even the captives under the ramparts suffered heavy casualties from the rolling logs, stones, and the onslaught of poured-down filth, crying out in agony as they died. The mere hundred or so captives who survived the gruesome scene were thoroughly terrified. Crying out, they fled backwards. The Liang soldiers on the city walls, having just been through a bloody battle, had also been aroused to kill. No longer caring about their countrymen or comrades, the archers readied their arrows and, aiming at the fleeing figures, let loose. One after another, bodies fell to the ground as arrows found their marks. By the time those Liang captives ran back, out of the original thousand or so, only about thirty remained. Just one attempt at a charge resulted in such heavy losses for the captives. The Chu army, observing from a distance, had halted their approach while the Liang soldiers were not on guard. And after the captives were defeated, they retreated to their original position, watching from afar. It was as if the matter did not concern them, as if they were outsiders. Isn¡¯t that the case indeed? A group of Liang people fighting among themselves, what do the Chu people have to mix in for? ¡°Very good, you all are warriors to have charged the camp,¡± said the same Chu officer, once again riding up to those who had managed to escape, now lying, sitting, standing, with expressions of laughter, vacantness, terror, clearly out of their minds. ¡°As promised, for the next ten days, you can indulge in eating and drinking without having to return to the battlefield. If you¡¯d already made a charge previously, then consider this another tally toward your charge count. Once you¡¯ve acumulated three charges, a reward of hundred taels of silver will be bestowed upon each of you, and you¡¯ll be sent home to your riches.¡± ¡°` This Chu general once again declared the rewards and punishments before signaling for the captives to be taken away. He was quite satisfied with the charge. Though over a thousand cannon fodder had died, their deaths were meaningful. Not only did they deplete a large amount of arrows, rocks, and filth used for defending the camp by the Liang people, but they also severely struck at the morale of those inside the camp. What was most important was the factional strife among the Liang; these captives had killed at least a hundred Liang soldiers. That was no small gain. Without losing a single soldier of his own, he had made the Liang consume themselves. How could such a matter not bring joy? As for the substantial loss of captives, what could be done? In the main camp, there were hundreds of thousands of Liang prisoners, and in the counties behind, millions more. There was such an abundance of cannon fodder that it was impossible to use it all up. After all, they were unstable elements; releasing them back into society would surely bring trouble to Chu State. It was better to take the opportunity during the siege on Liang to use them all up at once. Though it might be cruel, it was a good strategy for long-term stability. ¡°Compassion has no place in commanding an army,¡± the Chu general muttered to himself as he touched the sword at his waist, looking out over the battlefield that reeked strongly of blood. ¡­ As dusk fell, a bloody battle finally came to a halt. Inside the camp, Lu Yuan received the day¡¯s casualty statistics for the captives and the achievements of the battle. ¡°Sixty thousand captives died, two camps were breached, eight thousand Liang soldiers killed, and over three thousand captured.¡± Looking at the report handed to him by a military officer, he nodded slightly, his expression calm, ¡°Not bad. At this rate, in half a month, we should be able to clear all the camps on the periphery of the Liang capital.¡± For the past half month, after the captives were escorted to the main camp, the Chu army officially commenced their attack on Liang, or more precisely, on the satellite camps around the capital. The Liang army had established and dug over a hundred camps of varying sizes around the capital, where a total of four hundred thousand soldiers were stationed. These were the Liang¡¯s second line of defense after the three prefectures of Ning Ling, Yu City, and Gu Shu. Without removing these hundreds of ¡°nails,¡± the Chu army couldn¡¯t even touch the corners of Liang¡¯s city walls. Therefore, to attack Liang, they had to first breach the camps. This was undoubtedly a project that required sacrificing lives. Fortunately, with over a million captives gathered in the main camp, the Chu ruler had plenty of cannon fodder at his disposal. And so, after fighting continuously for half a month, more than seven hundred thousand Liang captives died, and more than half of the camps outside the capital had been uprooted. The defenders in the camps had also suffered more than one hundred thousand deaths and between fifty and sixty thousand had been captured. These captives weren¡¯t wasted, either. Those captured today were driven to the battlefield tomorrow, just like their predecessors, coerced by the Chu army with blades and spears. They were rapidly recycled for use. Thanks to this efficiency, the Chu army¡¯s breakthrough progress against the extensive outer defensive lines was extremely smooth. Based on the current pace of advancement, Lu Yuan optimistically estimated that in half a month, they would reach the outskirts of the Liang capital. ¡°However, the loss of captives is a bit heavy, only less than three hundred thousand remain in the camp,¡± he said, frowning. Then he picked up the silk fabric to write an order: ¡°Better have the rear send another five hundred thousand men over, we¡¯re running low on cannon fodder.¡± Under the cold pen and paper, a stream of numbers flashed by, representing countless lives. Chapter 1038 - Chapter 1038 Chapter 426 Severing the Eastern District ?Chapter 1038: Chapter 426: Severing the Eastern District Chapter 1038: Chapter 426: Severing the Eastern District Since May, the Chu Army had changed its strategy. After starting to pour large numbers of captured cannon fodder into the front line, the situation for the Zhao Army in Dongjun quickly took a turn for the worse. On the battlefield in Liang County, in order to attack Liang, the Chu Army had committed over a million prisoners in a relentless assault without regard for casualties. Thus, their progress was extremely smooth. Over there in Dongjun, the Western Military Expedition led by Huang Lin also advanced at an equally rapid pace. After adjustments last winter, the forces of the Western Military Expedition were reorganized, and its current composition was one million soldiers and one and a half million civilian workers. On the other hand, their enemy, centered around Dongjun¡¯s Diqiu, consisted of the Zhao Army with roughly one million soldiers and about eight hundred thousand civilian workers who had been hastily conscripted. Honestly speaking, although this force was still slightly inferior to the Chu Army¡¯s, it was more than sufficient for defense. Therefore, in the first two months of the year, as the Second Northern Expedition commenced, the Zhao and Chu forces engaged in a fierce battle in Dongjun. Both sides tested and measured each other without giving way, revealing no weaknesses. But by May, following an order from Lu Yuan, the seven hundred thousand Zhao Army prisoners captured by the Chu forces last year, along with the three hundred thousand soldiers of the Nanyang Wei Army who had surrendered in April, were all dispatched to the Dongjun battlefield. Then the Chu Army, which had previously been cautious about casualties and fought with many restrictions, suddenly became like an unbridled wild horse, embarking on their unfettered campaign. Millions of prisoners, unconcerned about their own deaths or injuries, were sent to the front line, and the Chu Army¡¯s manpower suddenly swelled. In particular, the concentrated use of prisoners allowed the Chu Army to gain an advantage of two to three times, or even four to five times the number of troops in certain parts of the battlefield. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? With this kind of advantage, Huang Lin decisively launched targeted breakthroughs. He first amassed a large force in the central part of Dongjun at Baima County, creating a smokescreen as he had done the previous year, to draw the attention of the Zhao Army. Then, leading a surprise attack with his main force, he fiercely attacked Watign County to the southeast of Dongjun, and in just three short days, used the lives of one hundred thousand prisoners to force a breach in the city. The southeastern defenses of Dongjun were immediately compromised, exposing a vulnerability to the advancing Chu Army. The rest of the plan became much simpler. With the southeastern frontline breached, Huang Lin continued leading the prisoners and the elite troops northward, penetrating from behind directly into Liang City, which was located at the back of Baima County. Liang City, situated to the south of the Yellow River, has always been an important port city bridging Henan and Hebei and the most important logistics base for the millions of Zhao troops on the Baima frontline. It was also the largest port for receiving supplies from Hebei to Dongjun. It can be said that even if the Zhao Army¡¯s main force at Baima County were to be lost, Zhao may not necessarily be defeated, and Dongjun may not necessarily fall. After all, Zhao, being an established hegemon, dominates a whole province and still has some depth to fall back on. Even if they lost a million of their main force in one fell swoop, they could still scrape together roughly another million people from within the nation. With troops and supplies, they could continue to fight against the Chu people. However, if Liang City were to fall, then Dongjun, which is situated in Henan, and Ji Province, held by Zhao in Hebei, would lose the most crucial transportation route between them. Subsequently, while the Zhao people would still maintain a few large and small ports within Dongjun to maintain communication with Hebei, the combined throughput of all these ports would not even amount to half of Liang City¡¯s capacity. With such limited transportation efficiency, it would clearly be impossible to sustain a large army in prolonged combat in Dongjun. Therefore, the loss of Liang City essentially meant the loss of Dongjun for the Zhao people. This was also why the Zhao nation had placed their main force in front of Liang City, three hundred li away in Baima County. The purpose was to shield this critical logistics base and prevent the Chu Army from threatening its security. But now, Huang Lin had taken a detour of a thousand li and was no longer attacking Liang City from the direction of Yong State. Instead, he led another group of freshly arrived prisoners and his own selected elites. From the direction of Qingzhou, they launched a surprise attack on Watign City to the southeast of Dongjun and, taking advantage of the Zhao¡¯s unpreparedness, broke through their meticulously arranged defenses. After achieving the breakthrough, they advanced rapidly with a light force, and in less than ten days, they appeared like divine troops before Liang City. This series of maneuvers was as erratic as a celestial steed flying in the heavens. And the intent was frighteningly straightforward. They were heading straight for Liang City. Huang Lin was, of course, well aware of the importance of Liang City. Last year, when he led his troops into Dongjun, they had spent almost half a year fighting numerous battles around Liang City with the Zhao forces. But the Zhao were equally aware of its importance. After their attempt to invade Xingyang County failed, they quickly amassed a large force there for stringent defense. Even though the Chu forces were aggressive, several great battles that resulted in tens of thousands of casualties failed to capture that location, and they couldn¡¯t even break through Baima County. It was last year¡¯s lessons that made Huang Lin acutely aware of the robustness of the Baima defensive line, which was nearly impossible to penetrate by human force. At the very least, without a five to tenfold advantage, it was unbreakable for the Chu Army. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? So this year, he did not insist on taking this position head-on. Aside from laying a smoke screen to attract the Zhao Army¡¯s main force, he directed the main breakthrough towards the southeast, where the Zhao forces were more thinly stretched. Even better, when he developed this plan, his headquarters had sent over a million cannon fodder. This provided a huge boost to the southeastern breakthrough strategy. Whether or not the captured million could be trusted, and despite being a significant risk that could explode at any time, Chapter 1039 - Chapter 1039 Chapter 426 Severing the Eastern District_2 ?Chapter 1039: Chapter 426: Severing the Eastern District_2 Chapter 1039: Chapter 426: Severing the Eastern District_2 But similarly, these millions of captives also represented a huge force that everyone overlooked. Previously, the Chu people had forgotten this force, and the Zhao people had likewise neglected it. Now, if this force were suddenly mobilized, it could catch everyone off guard and have an unimaginably surprising effect. The Zhao presence in Watign City was weak, with not too many troops stationed there. This was not due to any oversight on their part, but rather a calculated belief that even if the Chu army wanted to execute a surprise attack, it would be almost impossible to conquer Watign City in a short time. Even if the Chu were ruthless enough to take the city regardless of losses, the Chu army that remained, after the brutalities of a siege, would be exhausted and demoralized, utterly incapable of executing any further surprise tactics. At that point, the Zhao could then adjust their troop deployments at leisure to contend with the Chu¡¯s unexpected move. From this perspective, the arrangements of the Zhao people were sound. They had considered all aspects and maximized their limited strength. But who could have known that the Chu army would suddenly stop playing by the rules, or rather, would suddenly discard the facade they had maintained all along? They began to utilize prisoners of war on a large scale! As an important stronghold on the southeastern defensive line, Watign County indeed wasn¡¯t easy to capture. It would be impossible to break through quickly without suffering heavy losses. With the limited resources of the Chu army, they could not sustain such casualties. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï But what if it wasn¡¯t the Chu army that had to pay this price? With those captives taking the brunt, the Chu elite forces naturally didn¡¯t have to worry about a drop in morale. And with the elite troops¡¯ morale and strength ensured, they could in turn firmly suppress any captives who, because of massive casualties, started to become unsettled and thought of rebellion. The two complemented each other, combining flawlessly. A hundred thousand people forced their way into Watign City, thereafter leaving the southeastern defensive line wide open. Once it came to Liang City, Huang Lin did not hesitate. Also at the cost of huge casualties, he used over one hundred thousand lives to breach the city in just four days, before the Zhao Army could react. The fifty thousand Zhao troops stationed in the city perished alongside the captives and the city itself. Thus, Liang City, Zhao¡¯s most important north-south transport hub, fell under the control of the Chu army. It wasn¡¯t until this point that the Zhao troops in the eastern commanderies realized that a massive Chu force had encircled them, hitting their ¡®Old Nest.¡¯ Instantly, the main force of the Zhao Army in Baima County was thrown into panic. The capital at Nan Du¡¯s Emperor Hill was also deeply shaken. Between these two crucial cities of the eastern commanderies, a Chu force had now positioned itself, severing the Zhao main force from their capital, not only capturing their logistics base but also splitting the two apart. The situation in Diqiu City, to the rear, was slightly better; being close to the southern capital of Zhao, there were several ports of varying sizes available to receive supplies from the North, so logistics wasn¡¯t an immediate concern. But Baima County, having lost Liang City, was completely isolated and without help. To its east was the Chu main force, with millions watching it like tigers waiting to pounce. To its south was Watign City, which had been overrun by the Chu forces. The current situation there was unclear, but it certainly wasn¡¯t good. And to the west, mainly Liang City, now in Chu hands, was said to be guarded by hundreds of thousands of Chu troopsa€¡±their escape route was completely cut off. The only somewhat favorable direction was the North, where across the river lay Ji Province, the stronghold of Zhao. Yet, even the North did not offer much of a lifeline for the Zhao forces in Baima County. The reason was simple. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï In the Baima County region, there were no proper ferry crossings available for the Zhao troops to cross the river northward or to receive supplies from the North. In the past, Liang City, with its better conditions and safer location, had handled this critical task. Now that Liang City was lost, the Zhao forces in Baima County naturally had no access to a ferry crossing. At present, they could still communicate with the North, but only to the extent of a few dozen small boats. At that meager transport capacity, they might send a few thousand people at most in one trip, and tens of thousands in a day. However, including civilian workers, the Zhao forces in Baima County numbered up to a million. To move that many people with such limited capacity would take at least half a month, or even a montha€¡±it could not be done sooner. And that was the best-case scenario, without any interference, allowing the Zhao to board and transport freely. But now, with Chu forces keeping watch on three sides, how could they possibly allow the Zhao to escape so easily? So it was certain that any attempt by the Zhao to flee would be intercepted by the Chu army. Just how many could escape under such hindrance was hard to say. The situation became even worse. The logistics base of Liang City was compromised, and the frontline supply lines of the Zhao¡¯s main camp were also cut. In the camp, although there was some stockpile of food and fodder, it was hardly sufficient, nowhere near the endless supply from the rear. Depending on these reserve supplies, the Zhao forces at the Watign frontline could last a month at most. Beyond a month, even if the Chu didn¡¯t attack them, they would starve to death. So when the news of Liang City¡¯s fall came, the entire Zhao force at the Watign front was plunged into unprecedented panic. No one knew better than they did what the loss of Liang City meant for them. Chapter 1040 - Chapter 1040 Chapter 426 Severing the Eastern District_3 ?Chapter 1040: Chapter 426: Severing the Eastern District_3 Chapter 1040: Chapter 426: Severing the Eastern District_3 That meant death, the annihilation of the entire army, it meant defeat. Now these terrible endings were looming, they were in a situation where they were just waiting to die, how could they not panic? How could they not be anxious? Therefore, upon receiving the news that day, Zhao Cheng, the main general of Zhao State on the front line at Baima, immediately assembled two hundred thousand elite troops and quickly headed back, rushing towards Liang City. After that, he engaged in a do-or-die decisive battle with the Chu Army that had been waiting in leisure here. When Huang Lin set off from the southeast, he brought with him two hundred thousand elite Chu soldiers, along with eight hundred thousand captives. Another two hundred thousand captives went to the main battleground at the front line of Baima, to be used as cannon fodder. After taking Watign City, about one hundred thousand of the captives had died. Huang Lin left fifty thousand elite troops, along with approximately one hundred thousand captives, to guard this city. Then, with the remaining people, he rapidly advanced towards Liang City. He encountered several large cities along the way, some of them crucial to the army¡¯s supply line, so he left several batches of elite troops separately, each overseeing one hundred thousand captives, to forcefully attack these cities and secure the army¡¯s line of retreat. By the time he arrived at Liang City, all he had left were one hundred thousand elite troops and about three hundred thousand captives. After the battle for Liang City, only about one hundred and fifty thousand captives remained. The elite remained mostly intact since they had always been supervising the battles, maintaining a force of one hundred thousand. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï As a result, when Zhao Cheng led his army¡¯s arrival, what Huang Lin had in hand were one hundred thousand fierce and high-spirited Chu elite soldiers and about one hundred and fifty thousand captives with low fighting capability and nearly broken morale. Such strength, compared to the two hundred thousand death-defying and formidable Zhao troops, was naturally unbeatable. Huang Lin didn¡¯t intend to clash head-on with the opponent either. When Zhao Cheng led the breakout army¡¯s arrival, he directly led his people into Liang City and started to play a game of attack and defense against the Zhao people with the help of this logistical city¡¯s fortifications. Defending a strong city with two hundred and fifty thousand men, including one hundred thousand elites and a considerable number of Inborn Grandmasters. Without a doubt, this was another Mengshan Pass. Previously, when Lu Yuan had led the main force of the central Chu army, it took five hundred thousand soldiers, including thirteen Innate Princes, and a full ten days to break through Mengshan Pass. Now, the number of Chu troops in Liang City was no fewer than the Liang Army back then, and the count of Inborn Grandmasters was not much different either. The fortification of Liang City was comparable to Mengshan Pass, both being of the same level of strategic importance. But what about the Zhao Army outside the city? They numbered only two hundred thousand, with Inborn Grandmasters roughly the same as those inside the city, around five or six in number. With such strength, even if he bashed his brains out, Zhao Cheng couldn¡¯t breach Liang City. After ten days of fierce assault, losing more than half of his troops and horses, Liang City was still impregnable, showing no signs of falling. And after such a long time, the various detachments that Huang Lin had left behind to attack cities along the line from Watign City to Liang City had successively achieved results and captured those cities. At this point, seeing that the Commander was fiercely battling the Zhao Army at Liang City, these detached armies, after leaving some men to guard the cities, also led their troops and horses to come one after another for reinforcements. On the tenth day, the first wave of reinforcements had already arrived. Ten thousand elite Chu troops and about thirty thousand captive cannon fodder joined the main camp at Liang City. It was precisely the sight of Chu reinforcements arriving that caused Zhao Cheng to stop the crazed siege activities, no longer continuing the meaningless loss of life. The Chu military strength was far superior to that of Zhao State. They could afford to launch relentless assaults on cities regardless of losses, but Zhao¡¯s weak foundation could not sustain such wastefulness. So, after using one hundred thousand lives to probe the Chu Army¡¯s depth and vent his own panic and rage, Zhao Cheng quickly calmed down. He stopped the meaningless attack on the city. After ten days of fighting, his troops and horses had lost one hundred thousand men, but the casualties inside the Chu ranks were a mere fifty thousand. Moreover, according to the captured Chu people, out of the fifty thousand who died, the majority were originally prisoners from Zhao. After fighting for half a month, and with so many people dead, it turned out that they were all Zhao people, caught in their own infighting. The thought of this fact further fanned the flames of Zhao Cheng¡¯s anger. ¡°The Chu thieves have no martial ethics, treating prisoners so contemptuously; truly, they are not behaving as human beings.¡± In private, he couldn¡¯t help but curse furiously, his heart boiling with rage but also tinged with envy. If possible, Zhao Cheng too would like to use prisoners as cannon fodder. He had done so before. However, the problem was that ever since engaging in battle with the Chu army, Zhao had been at a disadvantage and had hardly won at all. Even if some prisoners were captured, there were only a few hundred or a few thousand of them, not enough to be used as cannon fodder. Naturally, such a scheme was no longer possible. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Now he could only stand on the moral high ground, privately denouncing Chu State; practically speaking, it wasn¡¯t very useful. But Liang City couldn¡¯t be taken, and their way of retreat was cut off; the nearly one million men under his command at the White Horse main camp couldn¡¯t just wait there for death. At this time, news came from the White Horse front line. It was reported that after sensing he was leading troops to reinforce the back lines, the Chu army launched a fierce attack the next day. The Chu army, regardless of the cost, attacked like madmen, assaulting the White Horse front line. In just a few days, the Chu army suffered losses of over a hundred thousand men. The Zhao Army defending the front line, upon interrogating the prisoners they captured, discovered that those who had been fiercely charging their front line these days were Wei people sent over from Nanyang. These former Wei soldiers, sent to the front line by the Chu people, had now become the main force attacking the Zhao people. Under the impact of the Wei people, the White Horse front line had already lost over a dozen camps, and the Zhao people suffered sixty to seventy thousand casualties and the defensive line had been somewhat destabilized. Even now, the Chu onslaught continues unabated, showing no signs of stopping. With the front line in crisis, it was time for this Commander to make a decision. ¡°Retreat!¡± Seeing the front still holding strong, and over the past two days, with several batches of Chu reinforcements arriving, the Chu troops in Liang City became even more robust, gradually even showing the posture of actively coming out to engage him in a decisive battle. Despite feeling a cold and painful sensation in his heart, Zhao Cheng ultimately couldn¡¯t help but make this decision. On their arrival, two hundred thousand strong, their spirits were high. On departure, one hundred thousand troops left, unspeakably bleak and desolate. He knew. This time, failing in the counterattack to retake Liang City, his White Horse main camp had lost its last way of life. Although they could still hold out for the moment, they were but withered bones in a tomb, powerless to turn the tide. At least, relying solely on the strength of his White Horse main camp was powerless to turn the tide. ¡°The only chance is over at Diqiu!¡± While leading the troops in retreat, Zhao Cheng looked back to the east toward Diqiu, harboring the last vestige of hope in his heart. If Diqiu could react in time, amass a strong force, and launch a fierce attack on Liang City. Then, he could dispatch a detached army from the west to encircle the enemy. Perhaps then, there might still be a chance for recovery. Chapter 1041 - Chapter 1041 Chapter 427 Old General Takes Command ?Chapter 1041: Chapter 427: Old General Takes Command Chapter 1041: Chapter 427: Old General Takes Command Diqiu. ¡°Crown Prince, this is bad, Liang City has been taken by the Chu people.¡± Zhao Xi was awoken from his bed by a series of panicked and anxious voices. After receiving the news that Liang City had fallen, the Wei Country¡¯s military officers in Diqiu were thrown into a state of panic. But after the panic subsided and they regained their composure, they immediately realized that the situation had deteriorated to its worst. And if they did not prepare early or take action to recover, everything would truly be beyond remedy. The main camp at White Horse with its million-strong army, Liang City, the most crucial transportation hub between Henan and Hebei, Great Zhao would have completely lost it all. So, the ministers of Great Zhao, not caring about the night, immediately gathered and entered the palace, arriving at Zhao Xi¡¯s sleeping quarters. ¡°So you¡¯re saying, the Chu people, unbeknownst to all of you, descended from the heavens like divine soldiers and arrived at Liang City, then within a few days, seized this important city?¡± After listening to the group of ministers briefly describe the situation and sorting out the general developments, Zhao Xi, with a grim expression, asked, ¡°Are the Chu army immortals? How could tens of thousands of them suddenly advance on Liang City? ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? Along the way, so many towns and two major cities, are the officials in them blind? So many Chu troops crossing the border, and no one reported it to Diqiu? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.?¦Ï And what about the defenders in those places, why didn¡¯t they stop them, letting the Chu army cross the border just like that! Isn¡¯t there a garrison of fifty thousand in Watign County? And An Qingyang, the Inborn General, I entrusted him with such an important place as Wat County, is this how he repays me, by letting Chu people enter our borders directly?¡± Each question exposed Zhao Xi¡¯s anger and fear, his confusion and incomprehension, fully on display. And those ministers, who had rushed over during the night, faced with these questions, hung their heads in silence. They appeared ashamed and speechless in the face of the questioning. But in fact, apart from feeling slightly ashamed, many of the ministers were just like Crown Prince Zhao Xi, puzzled and bewildered by the sudden appearance of the Chu army. The defense of Watign County was personally overseen by the Crown Prince during its construction, and when the defense line was completed, many ministers had accompanied the Crown Prince to inspect the county. At that time, they had confirmed the solidity of this city, which truly deserved the name of a stronghold, impregnable. With fifty thousand troops stationed there, along with an Inborn Grandmaster as the commander, even if the enemy attacked with ten times the strength, and even if the enemy had three or four Inborn among them, it would have been possible to withstand the siege for half a month. Just a bit of support for a while would have been enough; once the country internally reacted, they naturally could send troops to reinforce the frontline at Wat County. Even stepping back, if indeed the Chu army¡¯s numbers were too great, their strength too formidable, and Watign County truly unable to hold out and wait for reinforcements, as long as Watign County could send back word, even a small delay of ten days to half a month would be enough for the rear to assemble troops and rebuild another line of defense. A buffer, a bridgehead, this was Watign County¡¯s role. But now, this buffer bridgehead had not only failed to fulfill its proper role, but the Chu army had also almost passed through without any hindrance. Even those prefectures and counties behind Watign County failed to play their role. Forget about stopping the Chu army and slowing their advance, they could not even manage to send a message. This directly left the officials in Diqiu in the dark, clueless about the situation¡¯s progress and changes on the frontline. Ultimately, that brought about the terrible news tonight. ¡°Your Highness.¡± After a long silence, leading the group of ministers, the Nanjing Deputy Commander, Minister of the Ministry of War Chen Tai, took the initiative to speak, ¡°According to the current intelligence, the Chu people¡¯s progress was so rapid because they used a large number of prisoners without regard for losses. Last year¡¯s battle at Xingyang cost Great Zhao a million strong soldiers, with hundreds of thousands becoming prisoners of the Chu people. In the past two months, Wei Country¡¯s Nanyang and the two prefectures of Henan consecutively surrendered to Chu, with hundreds of thousands of Wei people put to use by the Chu. Altogether, the prisoners and defectors from Zhao and Wei number over a million. Before this, the Chu people did not utilize these prisoners, just using them as labor, and we also thought that fresh prisoners and defectors, still loyal to their former countries and unsettled in their hearts, were basically of little use. Thus, both Chu and our sides overlooked this force. But now, the Chu took an unexpected approach, not intending to integrate these prisoners over the long term. Instead, they chose to use them as expendable pawns in the short term, throwing them at city assaults without caring about casualties. This is how they achieved such rapid success. The fall of Watign County and Liang City¡¯s swift loss were all due to this. However, this approach is not without its backlash. The Chu people don¡¯t regard prisoners¡¯ lives, so how could the prisoners truly be willing to die for them? Therefore, to soothe them, the Chu people made many promises, like allowing the surviving prisoners to run amok in a city for days after its capture, to vent their bestial nature. Even the villages and fields along the way suffered, as the Chu¡¯s undisciplined defected soldiers slaughtered and burnt everything to the ground. As for why there was little news from the local areas, it was mainly because those who encountered the Chu army were killed off. As for the major cities, I heard that the Chu people, at each location, would leave behind a portion of soldiers to besiege the city, sealing off all routes, leaving no gaps. In such a situation, even if the local officials and defenders wanted to send word back, it would be difficult to do so under the Chu army¡¯s strict blockade. Chapter 1042 - Chapter 1042 Chapter 427 Old General Takes Command_2 ?Chapter 1042: Chapter 427 Old General Takes Command_2 Chapter 1042: Chapter 427 Old General Takes Command_2 ¡°` Even those cities might fall to the Chu people within a short time, leaving the people within them dead or nearly so, leaving no one to pass on information. In this way, by marching and killing as they went, and also because they moved swiftly without stopping, relying on such cruel methods, they naturally appeared as if divine troops blessed by heaven. They then raided Liang City unawares and took it.¡± Chen Tai¡¯s countenance turned slightly unsightly as he recounted the news; after piecing together several reports, he had finally clarified a murky truth. Upon hearing his account, the others in the main hall wore similarly hard looks on their faces. Although he had only roughly described the situation, everyone could imagine a group of Wei Army deserters who, being coerced into attacking cities, had an almost certain death rate, nearly ten dying for every one who survived. After the Great War had ended, under such an extremely oppressive and twisted mental state, one could only imagine what they might do. Not to mention, it was said that the Wei Army deserters who were used by the Chu people this time included those from Wei Country who had already adopted cannibalistic practices. With these beastly soldiers leading, the common Zhao people in the regions traversed by the Chu would be far from well-off. Some ministers whose hometowns were in that region couldn¡¯t help but cover their faces and weep bitterly after hearing what Chen Tai had said. They could already imagine the tragic fates of their families back home, now in the hands of the Chu army primarily composed of those deserters. ¡°The Chu villains are despicable, claiming to be a great nation¡¯s army but conducting such vile acts in warfare, they are even worse than the barbarians of the grasslands. With such tactics, they still aspire to unify the world, I spit on that!¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Everyone will resist them, and we will never submit!¡± ¡°Alas, my family back home has fallen into the hands of Chu, I¡­ I¡­ sob sob sob¡­¡± Inside the main hall, everyone was denouncing the Chu army, their expressions filled with anger and sorrow, and the underlying fear was so evident it practically overflowed. The aftermath of Lu Yuan¡¯s decision to use conscripted soldiers now became apparent. He was cruel to the conscripts, and in turn, the conscripts would be cruel to the ordinary people. It is often said, ¡°The strong swing their swords at the stronger.¡± But in reality, it is more often the strong who oppress the weak, and the weak who go on to oppress the weaker. Layer by layer, oppression descends until those at the very bottom, left without a way to live, die filled with resentment. This is reality. Now, the Chu army stands as the oppressor at the highest level, the conscripts find themselves in the middle layer, and the common Zhao people have fallen to the very bottom. The conscripts may indeed have suffered horrific losses due to the fierce war. But what of those ordinary people affected by the war? Could their lot be any better? ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?0 The final outcome, in fact, may be even more miserable than that of the conscripts. Such conduct, once it spreads, will naturally be scorned by the world and anger many. But after the anger, what those present felt was profound fear. The Chu people¡¯s actions know no bounds. And now, having gained such a significant advantage, it goes without saying, with more than a certain chance, the Chu will certainly make it to Diqiu City. By then, wouldn¡¯t the locations along their path face another calamity? Many people present had, following Zhao¡¯s recent strategic southern expansions over the years, settled their own families within Dongjun. Especially around Diqiu City, where they had focused their settlement efforts. And these key areas were about to face the onslaught of the Chu army. The thought of those beastly soldiers coming to their homes, and of their wives and children falling into the hands of the Chu army. The thought of Diqiu being surrounded by the Chu army. Filled everyone present with unstoppable panic and trepidation. At this moment, many could hardly restrain themselves, wishing they could return home immediately and send their trusted servants to quickly go back to their families scattered outside or near the city, urging them to quickly withdraw back to Diqiu City, if not retreating back to Ji Province in Hebei. Only in Ji Province, with a great river as a barrier, could they stop those beastly soldiers and find safety. It has to be said, sometimes when someone breaks through the bottom line, their deterrent power skyrockets instantly. And when Chu State, already the world¡¯s foremost hegemon, breaks through the bottom line. Their deterrence against all nations, against all people under the sky, is simply like that of a nuclear bomb. Anyone who hears of it cannot help but turn pale with fear. The ministers of Zhao before us are a living example of this. ¡°Enough!¡± Just as people were in a state of panic, Chen Tai, as a major minister aiding the governance of the South Capital, couldn¡¯t hold back any longer and barked out a loud order for silence. After quieting the crowd, he turned to Zhao Xi and said, ¡°Your Highness, Chu has taken Liang City. This city is the lifeline of our Dongjun, and if we lose it, the whole of Dongjun will be at risk. In such a case, the South Capital¡¯s Diqiu, which Great Zhao has worked on for more than a dozen years, as well as Dongjun, home to half of our nation¡¯s population, will all be ceded to Chu. And without these, would Zhao still be Zhao? Bordering on Ji Province of Hebei, relying on the remaining eight million people above, we won¡¯t even be able to maintain the status of a hegemony. Soon, with just a beleaguered Ji Province, Great Zhao may follow in the footsteps of Wei, becoming a minor state of safekeeping, gradually declining and perishing. How could the thousands of years of foundation of Great Zhao perish by our hands? Therefore, Liang City must be saved, it must be taken back.¡± Chen Tai spoke of the advantages and disadvantages, then knelt and petitioned, ¡°This old minister begs your permission to immediately muster all the troops at Diqiu, and also to issue a large conscription order for the civilians in the three prefectures nearby Diqiu; all men over the age of fourteen must be enlisted into the army. Chapter 1043 - Chapter 1043 Chapter 427 Old General Takes Command_3 ?Chapter 1043: Chapter 427 Old General Takes Command_3 Chapter 1043: Chapter 427 Old General Takes Command_3 Thus, we can raise an army of two million men. This old minister is willing to personally lead these forces to the front lines at Liang City, to engage in a decisive battle to the death with the Chu traitors. If we win, Liang City will be regained, and Dongjun will be preserved. If we are defeated, I, along with the army, shall all perish; I implore the Crown Prince to lead the group of ministers and all officials across the river back to Ji, to preserve their lives. The great affairs of the state, the rise or fall of Zhao Country, are all hinged on this moment. I beseech the Crown Prince to grant his approval.¡± Zhao Country does not compare to Chu State or Liang in terms of deep foundations that can continually produce famous generals of the world. Like the other ordinary dominant states of Nine Provinces, there has always been only one famous general in Zhao, and that is the Chen Tai before us. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï It¡¯s just that Chen Tai is too old; he is already one hundred thirty-five years old. At this age, even for an Inborn Grandmaster, it is already the twilight years when one could pass away at any time. What¡¯s worse is that a lifetime of warfare, especially the past forty years due to the sudden intensification of conflicts in Nine Provinces brought about by the cataclysmic changes between Heaven and Earth, has taken up too much of his energy. It can be said that almost all major battles in recent years in Zhao Country were presided over by this Old General Chen Tai. The management and mobilization of tens of millions of people over the years, pressure balancing in all aspects domestically and internationally, and the fate of tens of millions of people in the country, have all been bearing down on this Old General¡¯s shoulders. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï All of these things have exhausted his energy. Even an Inborn Grandmaster cannot transform fully into an iron man. Long-term high-intensity energy consumption has rapidly dimmed the flame of Chen Tai¡¯s life, gradually giving him a sense of not being able to hold on. Therefore, as early as seventeen years ago, after personally leading the army to seize the region of Dongjun, Chen Tai had gradually let go of military affairs and handed over the army campaigns to the younger generation. This person is Zhao Cheng, a scion of the Clan and the one now overseeing the front line at Bai Ma. He himself has retreated to a secondary position and has taken up the role of the Minister of the Ministry of War, enjoying a leisurely life at court. Zhao Cheng is a great general who has emerged in recent years in Zhao Country. Not only is he extremely talented in Martial Arts, but at just sixty years old, he has also broken through to the Second Realm of Inborn. Since joining the army, he has displayed an exceptionally brilliant performance in successive major battles. Especially in the previous war for Dongjun, while the chief credit naturally went to the commanding Chen Tai, the most dazzling achievements under the commander were those of Zhao Cheng. With his noble birth, high strength, conspicuous military exploits, and youth, it can be said that Zhao Cheng, with all these shining halos, is naturally the next-generation military leader of Zhao Country. And Zhao Country has also trained him according to this standard. However, heaven does not always follow one¡¯s wishes. The earlier years of cultivation were indeed good for Zhao Cheng, who established his merits step by step in the army, his official ranks rapidly promoted, developing towards a trend comparable to Chen Tai. In everyone¡¯s eyes, by the age of sixty, Zhao Cheng would be the new star of Zhao Country¡¯s next generation of famous generals. But at that time, seven years ago, just when he was one step away from the standard of a famous general, a crushing defeat interrupted his rise. Wei Country took the initiative to invite Zhao and Xu to jointly launch an expedition against Liang, hoping for a decisive Great War to completely resolve the long-drawn-out struggle for Central State. From the viewpoint at that time, after years of development, the combined strength of the three countries had already surpassed that of Liang, with a significant advantage. On the contrary, Liang, after consecutive years of warfare, had become increasingly exhausted, gradually showing signs that it could no longer keep up. At the time of the decisive battle with Liang, the odds of victory were quite large. Thus, Zhao and Xu, upon receiving Wei¡¯s invitation, gladly followed their big brother into battle. On Zhao¡¯s side, in order to cultivate the younger generation, they replaced the command of the troops with Zhao Cheng, who had been carefully trained, replacing the now aged and infirm Old General, Chen Tai. The aim was to use this great war to propel a new generation of famous generals from Zhao after the victory, who could uphold Zhao¡¯s military for the next hundred years. Then, the outcome became clear to everyone. Wei, as an ally, was truly despicable. A major defeat led two allies to a crushing failure. Forget about a big victory, the two countries nearly lost even their pants. If Chu hadn¡¯t intervened afterwards, Zhao and Xu would likely have coughed up the fruits of their years of development in Central State in one breath. In such a situation, Zhao Cheng¡¯s path to becoming a famous general was naturally greatly hindered and no longer possible to achieve. Especially seven years ago, after the disastrous defeat at Changyuan. In a critical situation, Zhao had to pull Chen Tai out of retirement and place him in Diqiu to serve as Minister of the Ministry of War and Vice-Locum Tenens of South Capital, to stabilize the overall situation. So even now, Zhao still only has Chen Tai, an old general who might die at any moment, as its visible pillar of support, which is extremely precarious. Under the present circumstances, the only one who could step forward to administer the overall situation and salvage the state of affairs was Chen Tai alone. ¡°Old General, can your body endure if you go on an expedition?¡± Upon hearing Chen Tai volunteer, Crown Prince Zhao Xi couldn¡¯t help but show his concern. He knew that the body of this pillar of Zhao, if he truly went on an expedition this time, would be like carrying a coffin into battle, at any moment he could exhaust his energy and die suddenly on the battlefield. To be so devoted to one¡¯s country, to bow and serve until death, is all one could ask for. ¡°The state of my body is something I understand well; to last three to five years, indeed I am not capable. But to last one or one and a half years, that¡¯s still without issue.¡± Facing the Crown Prince¡¯s concern, Chen Tai shook his head and said, ¡°Considering the situation in the Eastern Province, without Liang City to accept supplies from Hebei¡¯s Ji Province, Zhao¡¯s decisive battle against Chu¡¯s army won¡¯t last too long. In at most two or three months¡¯ time, the victory or defeat will be decided. With my condition, it is enough to last until the end of the war.¡± Zhao Xi nodded slightly upon hearing this, then finally, looking earnestly at Chen Tai, agreed, ¡°Since the Old General insists, the survival of the Eastern Province and the security of Diqiu are entrusted to you. Old General, you may command the troops to the front line immediately, and I, in Diqiu city, will surely take good care of everything behind the lines, you won¡¯t be troubled.¡± Zhao Xi took out the military tokens and personally handed them to Chen Tai, making a solemn promise. Chen Tai accepted them and replied gravely, ¡°Rest assured, Your Highness, I will fight to the end to protect our Great Zhao¡¯s last stretch.¡± Having said this, he took the token and turned to leave. He needs to muster the army for the expedition soon, and the Old General must gather his old subordinates and mobilize the troops. ¡®I wonder, after several years away from the camp, will those young lads still remember this old man.¡¯ On his way out, Chen Tai paused, gazing at the clear bright moon, feeling a mix of fervor and desolation in his heart. The state of Great Zhao, ever since the defeat at Changyuan seven years earlier, had been in continual decline. Now, they¡¯ve been reduced to sending an old man like himself into battle. Alas, it¡¯s done. This final battle of life, I will just do my best. As for the future of Great Zhao, I won¡¯t see it and can¡¯t concern myself with too much more. Chapter 1044 - Chapter 1044 Chapter 428 The Madness of Zhao??? ?Chapter 1044: Chapter 428: The Madness of Zhao??? Chapter 1044: Chapter 428: The Madness of Zhao??? July, Liang City. As the sun set in the west, dusk fell. ¡°Kill!¡± The remains of the bonfires spewed black smoke, and countless soldiers, shrieking, desperately fought beneath the afterglow. Blood splattered, metal clanged, war drums thundered, and banners were furled in defeat. The most gruesome spectacle of human beings was incessantly enacted on this battlefield. Countless lives disappeared quickly in the slaughter. Clang clang clang! A rapid gong sounded. The warriors, who were locked in combat on the battlefield, upon hearing this sound, suddenly relaxed their tense spirits. Then, they exchanged glances, and regardless of whether the person opposite had been an enemy just a moment before, they all felt as if pardoned. Cautiously, they retreated and waited. After distancing themselves, they hastily joined a few comrades and ran toward the main camp in the rear. Today, they had already fought for an entire day. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï From the first light of dawn, as the morning glow began, the Chu and Zhao armies laid out their formations and continuously brought out troops to fight on the field between their camps. This battle raged from morning to evening. Both sides were littered with corpses, blood flowed like rivers, and everyone was utterly exhausted. At this moment, whether it was the Chu people, the Zhao people, or even the Wei people, none wanted to keep killing. Had it not been for the stringent military orders, who would have willingly ventured into that battlefield? Atop the high watchtower, Huang Lin watched his soldiers retreating back. Observing the weary expressions, the thinned ranks, and the units no longer at full strength, he maintained a calm demeanor. He simply watched as the soldiers were counted and then, under the lead of their officers, they returned to the city or headed to the main camp nearby to begin their meal. The fragrant smell of food wafted both inside and outside the city at that time. The generals, having fought for a day, were severely drained physically and mentally; the best remedy was to let them have a full meal, with sufficient nutrition and fats. Being well-fed, that sense of fullness, is one of the most primal instincts of human beings. Once this desire is satisfied, it can overshadow most negative emotions and provide new energy and good morale. So even though providing a large amount of meat to the soldiers placed immense pressure on the logistics, both the Chu and Zhao sides still did so. After all, these soldiers, having been fed, would be consumed by this brutal battlefield in a few days; being able to eat well for just ten days to half a month was the limit. The men had sold their lives to you, so it was only right to let them eat well before their deaths. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï With this in mind, the pressure on logistics wasn¡¯t as great as it seemed. ¡°Report to the director, today¡¯s casualties have been calculated,¡± Lost in thought, the deputy commander came over, saluted Huang Lin, and reported, ¡°Today, a total of fifty-eight battalions engaged in combat, including defector battalions and our main units. Losses per battalion were between two hundred and three hundred soldiers, nearly half of them killed or wounded. In total, approximately eight thousand defectors and around three thousand of our Chu soldiers were lost, totaling about eleven thousand casualties. As for the Zhao army on the other side, while there¡¯s no precise number, the dead and wounded are estimated to be over eight thousand.¡± Hearing this figure, Huang Lin nodded slightly and then dismissed him with a wave, ¡°Understood, you may go.¡± ¡°Understood.¡± The deputy left. After he was gone, Huang Lin muttered to himself, ¡°Eight thousand people, we have been killing for a month now, and the Zhao army¡¯s troop deployment remains undiminished each day. It seems they really did, as they claimed, mobilize an army of two million.¡± Ever since he took Liang City and seized the Zhao people¡¯s lifeline, suddenly, the western army was like a hornet¡¯s nest that had been poked, provoking an all-out retaliation from the Zhao people. The Chu army seized Liang City at the end of May. However, by early June, just as Huang Lin had barely repelled the Zhao army from Baima County, the main force of the Zhao army from Diqiu came roaring forward a few days later. The Zhao people declared they had two million troops, the full strength of the nation, vowing to retake Liang City. Initially, Huang Lin didn¡¯t take the Zhao nation¡¯s claim to heart. After all, with the intensity of current warfare, the size of the armies each country mobilized was increasingly vast. When embarking on an expedition, they¡¯d often exaggerate the numbers to intimidate the enemy. For instance, the Chu army¡¯s first Northern Expedition flew the banner of thirty million soldiers, intended to scare the warlords north of the river. This inflated the actual number of Chu soldiers by almost sixty percent. However, whether the intimidation was successful is debatable. If you insist it was, indeed, the states of the Nine Provinces north of the river were terrified of the Chu army and were in a state of panic. But if you say it wasn¡¯t, although these states were frightened, in the end, they still mustered all their resources to oppose the Chu army. Even Xu State and Jin Country, which had little to do with Chu, joined in the fray, siding against Chu. So it¡¯s hard to assess whether this sort of propaganda was good or bad from Lu Yuan¡¯s perspective. Assuming others did as Chu had done, surely the Zhao army must have also exaggerated to some extent. Two million people? It probably capped at one million at most. After all, whether it¡¯s one million or two million, such an immense army would present a formidable sight that could stretch for hundreds of miles. With such vast numbers, even if scouts were dispatched for reconnaissance, the numbers they returned would be vague. Endless human masses, forests of banners, and so on. Ten miles of land occupied by Zhao soldiers, surrounding prefectures and counties all under Zhao encampments, etc. If you ask for a specific number? I¡¯m sorry. But with tens to hundreds of millions of people, no matter how capable the scouts are, they would be counting till they dropped dead and still not finish. Chapter 1045 - Chapter 1045 Chapter 428 The Madness of Zhao Nation_2 ?Chapter 1045: Chapter 428: The Madness of Zhao Nation_2 Chapter 1045: Chapter 428: The Madness of Zhao Nation_2 Therefore, once the forces exceeded one million, the exact number of a grand army became very difficult to estimate with precision, and at best, a rough estimate could be made. The difference between two million and one million people was indeed hard to discern. This also provided the basis for the various countries to engage in a certain degree of artistic exaggeration in their propaganda. Those with audacity dared to increase the number of their troops by several times. Those more cautious dared to double or even add half again as many. Anyway, now, as long as countries went to war against each other, their forces were no less than one million. With this foundation, they could propagate whatever they wanted without fear of being exposed. It was only after a direct confrontation and measuring each other¡¯s capabilities that one could know how much the opponent had inflated their numbers. And at this time, after fighting the Zhao people in Liang City for a month, estimating the daily losses of both sides, Huang Lin had roughly calculated the opponent¡¯s strength. The Zhao Army¡¯s two million men were likely without exaggeration. After a month of fighting, the average daily casualties of the Zhao State were around eight to nine thousand. This adds up to around two hundred and fifty-six thousand in a month. On the Chu side, due to a higher number of defected soldiers in the army, morale was low, and those defectors were not very willing to fight to the death for Chu State. So once they were on the battlefield, they either shirked their duties or looked for opportunities to flee back to Zhao, and there were even quite a few who turned against their compatriots on the spot. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.?¦Ï Under such circumstances, even though there were many civilian workers temporarily conscripted within Zhao, the daily casualties on the Chu side were still significantly higher than Zhao¡¯s. Over the course of the month, the Chu army had already lost around two hundred and fifty thousand defected soldiers and about eighty thousand troops from the main force. The total losses had exceeded three hundred thousand. It can be said that both sides suffered heavy casualties due to this war. The only difference was that the Chu army¡¯s dead were defected soldiers, who didn¡¯t incite as much sympathy. Whereas the dead from the Zhao Army were their own countrymen. Both parties losing two to three hundred thousand men, if one side only had a million-strong army, it would be nearly equivalent to a loss of more than twenty to thirty percent. For an army, such a loss was already debilitating, with forces not capable of further combat. The Chu army could persist because there were a large number of captives to fill in the ranks, and the main force did not suffer significant losses, so it wasn¡¯t affected much. But the Zhao Army did not have this advantage. Therefore, the only reasonable explanation is that the opponent indeed had two million men. In this case, the loss of two hundred fifty-six thousand would be just over ten percent of their forces. While a ten percent casualty rate is not minimal for a grand army, regular troops from various countries could often sustain losses of thirty to forty percent before they would be unable to hold on and collapse. Although the Zhao Army was mostly composed of new soldiers and civilian workers, the martial culture of the states was fierce, with common men and women often practicing boxing and ¡°Archery,¡± providing a solid base. Added to this, the dominant mentality of Zhao and the belief in protecting the Wei State, supported by a certain number of veteran soldiers, meant that it was not so easy to say their strength was inferior. Stacking up so many factors, it was not surprising for the earlier Zhao Army to withstand a death rate of two to three percent. However, this situation was rather unfavorable for Huang Lin. Although he now occupied Liang City, due to being deep in enemy territory, he had only taken this one large city. Around Liang City, a strong defense line had not been established yet when the Zhao Army attacked from both front and rear. The Zhao forces from both Bai Ma and Diqiu almost relayed their efforts, containing the Chu army. Since the arrival at Liang City, Huang Lin¡¯s forces had been in constant battle every day. The daily warfare consumed too much energy, leaving him no time to construct fortifications or dig defenses. Thus, although he had several hundred thousand troops under his command, only a portion could hide inside the city, relying on the city defenses for protection. Most of the rest of the troops could only disperse outside the city, confronting the Zhao Army behind a mere thin layer of ¡°Camp.¡± But such hastily built fortifications offered almost no effective protection. This was not like those defense lines that had been built over several months or half a year, with high ramparts or even city walls, equipped with all kinds of defense facilities, meticulously planned and constructed as impregnable as walls of brass or iron, difficult to breach. Lines like these required filling with human lives. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? The Bai Ma defense line that Chu State was assaulting, along with the grand defense line of Liang County, were of this kind. For such defense lines, even taking a small ¡°Camp¡± could cost twice to thrice, or even more lives, as a price. And at Liang City, most of the Chu army¡¯s fortifications were no more than a low fence, a few trenches dug as simple advance warnings. Such small defenses could be easily crossed by Zhao people, hardly posing any impediment whatsoever. Depending on such rudimentary fortifications to defend against the Zhao State¡¯s attacks was obviously wishful thinking. And because of this. Although he had Liang City as a stronghold, no matter how large the fortress was, it could not accommodate the tens of thousands of Chu forces. Just as in Liang only thirty thousand were stationed within the city, with another forty thousand dispersed outside at various locations. In Liang City, Huang Lin also left only fifteen thousand inside. The remaining one million six hundred thousand troops were distributed outside the city, extending from Liang City back to Watign County, positioned within every strategically important town. Chapter 1046 - Chapter 1046 Chapter 428 The Madness of Zhao Nation_3 ?Chapter 1046: Chapter 428: The Madness of Zhao Nation_3 Chapter 1046: Chapter 428: The Madness of Zhao Nation_3 Nearly two million soldiers and horses could not possibly be gathered together; they had to be dispersed. And those large forces distributed outside of the city, without protection, naturally could not rely on the city for defense when facing the oncoming Zhao Army. They could only grit their teeth, deploy their formations, and clash with them on the battlefield. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï After a month of fighting, the outcome had become quite clear. The two armies were evenly matched, or rather, the Zhao Army had a slight advantage while the Chu Army was at a slight disadvantage. However, this disadvantage wasn¡¯t significant, as the foundation of the Chu Army was also quite substantial. Even after losing 330,000 soldiers and horses, in the Liang City front line, the Chu Army still had over 1.4 million troops left, enough to continue the attrition war with Zhao. ¡°But in this way, the war has turned into a mere exchange of human lives. The victory I achieved with the surprise attack on Liang City has also become less important,¡± Huang Lin thought, as he pondered the current situation and frowned. Although he held the lifeline of Zhao, before he could choke it off, Zhao¡¯s counterattack was not so easy to withstand. Let¡¯s not even mention the two million Zhao Army that rushed over from Diqiu. Although the opponent had overwhelming numbers, after occupying Liang City, he had been continuously summoning reinforcements from the rear to come for support. On both sides here, although there was some difference in strength, overall they were still at the same level of military power, without leaving any major flaws exposed. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï At the front line of Baima. The original main force of the Chu Army had been transferred to Liang City, and the number of troops there had dropped to less than a million. It had completely become a detached army. Fortunately, the Zhao Army at Baima front line, after Zhao Cheng¡¯s previous strong attack on Liang City, also greatly reduced in numbers, with less than a million remaining. So after such wear and tear on both sides, their strengths were still roughly balanced. However, after Zhao Cheng returned, he also knew that with his situation and shortage of food, it was fundamentally impossible for him to sustain a large army for a long time. To keep the large army alive, he had to either lead the troops to break through the blockade or continuously reduce the number of soldiers in the large army to lessen the food consumption and thus sustain for a longer period. Therefore, after assessing his own situation, Zhao Cheng returned to the Baima front line and immediately mobilized the soldiers to assault the Chu Army in front of him. He didn¡¯t have thoughts of attacking Liang City again; given the city¡¯s strength and the number of Chu troops, he feared that Baima¡¯s defenders would all die without being able to take the city. On the contrary, the Chu Army¡¯s defensive line at Baima front line, due to Chu¡¯s continuous initiative to attack, the campsites were not built to fortress standards, but just had average defensive capabilities. Breaking through from this direction might be more possible. Especially after the Chu Army kept withdrawing troops from the Baima front line, the possibility had increased to the point where it had become the only hope for the Baima Zhao Army to survive. Therefore, after realizing their own situation, Zhao Cheng¡¯s led Zhao Army, in their assaults on the Chu Army¡¯s campsite, became even more frenzied. In just over a month, the Baima Zhao Army had launched hundreds of breakout attacks. As a result, over 500,000 soldiers and horses had died or been injured, suffering more than half in casualties. And the Chu forces facing them, though having the advantage of defense, still lost over 300,000 troops as the camps were ultimately not as strong as a city, thus also suffering substantial casualties. By now, at the Baima front line, the Chu Army had about 600,000 soldiers left, while the Zhao Army had only about 400,000 left, and the comparative force of both sides had already formed a certain gap. However, it was precisely because of the previous frantic attacks that the Zhao Army had used up a lot of soldiers and horses, and there were far fewer in the camps consuming food. So at this point, their main camp¡¯s stockpile of food could still last for another half month, much longer than the initially anticipated end of supplies. Moving on, because of the reduction in troops, the demand for food and logistics had also decreased significantly. Plus, the homeland of Ji Province in the north, after learning about the current situation of the Baima front line Zhao Army, also began emergency relief. They gathered many ships from the north and began to use the small ferry at Baima County to transport various materials and provisions here, while also starting small-scale evacuations of the Zhao Army from this location. Although the transported materials and provisions were very limited, even if arranged to the maximum extent every day, they could still basically maintain the needs of 50,000 to 60,000 people for a month. But even a mosquito is still flesh, let alone this could already be considered a drumstick. Moreover, the Zhao Army was also continuously withdrawing troops. Each time a food-transporting ship emptied, on its return journey, it could take away three to five thousand Zhao soldiers. In this manner, on one hand, they kept transporting supplies, and on the other, they kept withdrawing the consuming forces. Between the increases and decreases, the Baima Zhao Army just managed to maintain itself. After discovering this, Zhao Cheng confirmed that the current number of Zhao Army¡¯s soldiers had reached a state of equilibrium, and he also stopped trying to forcefully attack the Chu defensive line, effectively abandoning the idea of breaking out. Without attempting a breakout, the only retreat path left for the Zhao people was to cross the river and withdraw northward. Therefore, after halting the breakout efforts, Zhao Cheng continued to lead the remnants, holding the Baima defensive line steadfastly. This Baima defensive line was a defense area constructed by Zhao State for over a year, bristling with various solid fortifications and an abundance of city defense facilities. Defending in such a place, the defenders¡¯ advantage in the battle situation was far too significant. The opposing Chu forces, having tried to attack one or two fortifications, soon ceased that action due to massive losses. There was no helping it. The batch of Wei Army prisoners sent over previously had already been exhausted during earlier warfare. Without these expendable cannon fodder, the Chu forces were unwilling to sacrifice their precious lives filling those deep trenches and high ramparts. So the situation on this side once again fell into a deadlock. Unless a new batch of prisoners arrived, which could be used as sharp blades for sieging, introducing new momentum. Otherwise, the Chu Army could only watch the Zhao Army slowly taking boats away, escaping this deadly place. Although after the Zhao Army¡¯s departure, the Chu forces would be able to smoothly take over the Baima defensive line and then rush to aid the main force at Liang City. As of the current situation in the struggle for Dongjun, the Chu Army was still retaining the upper hand. And in the future, it was highly possible for them to capture the entire Dongjun. But not being able to claim complete victory still left a bitter taste of discontent. If the Zhao Army could escape with these four hundred thousand main forces and reassemble a powerful military force back in Ji Province using it as a core, Even if Chu State occupied Dongjun, it would likely suffer their harassment and scarcely find peace. ¡°So, if possible, we must try to leave behind the Baima Zhao Army as much as we can. Moreover, I¡¯ve heard that in Ji Province itself, the Zhao Emperor is assembling a large army, ready to personally lead a Southern Expedition to support the front line. If this new force arrives, the situation in Dongjun might start looking grim,¡± Huang Lin frowned. Dongjun was like the lifeblood of Zhao State; without it, Zhao had no future. In order to hold on to this land, Zhao was nearly exhausting all efforts, acting desperately. They were not only feverishly conscripting soldiers in Dongjun, But also in their Hebei heartland, they were fervently expanding their forces, ready for a last desperate struggle. And with the population of Zhao¡¯s Hebei almost reaching eight million, if they were desperate enough, they could somehow muster another army of over one and a half million. If this fresh force reached Dongjun and joined with the Zhao troops there, the Zhao forces would almost amount to three and a half million men. This number had already surpassed that of the Chu Army. Facing this mad nation, even with the current advantage, Huang Lin still felt trepidation and immense dread. ¡°So the current plan can only be to contact the main body and continue calling for reinforcements.¡± When in doubt, summon the avatar¡¯s main body. As an avatar, Huang Lin didn¡¯t just stubbornly resist the difficulties. Instead, he immediately contacted the main body and called for support. Chapter 1047 - Chapter 1047 Chapter 429 Military Expedition Movement ?Chapter 1047: Chapter 429 Military Expedition Movement Chapter 1047: Chapter 429 Military Expedition Movement ¡°Reinforcements needed at Dongjun?¡± When Lu Yuan received Huang Lin¡¯s request, he couldn¡¯t help but frown. He had been very supportive of the military campaign in Western Expedition¡¯s Dongjun before, and still was up to now. For this purpose, he even transferred one million cannon fodder there, hoping that they could quickly open up the situation. And the results, did not disappoint him. The previously unyielding battle situation in Dongjun indeed made rapid progress after receiving support from one million cannon fodder. Not only did they capture Liang City, but they also surrounded and eliminated over half of Zhao Army¡¯s one million force on the Baima front line, sealing their fate. After losing Liang City, the situation in Dongjun for the Zhao people entered a deadlock, teetering on the brink of slow death. Now, it was just a matter of time to see how long the opponent could hold out before completely dying? But now. In such an advantageous situation, Huang Lin not only failed to further strike the Zhao people and quickly reap the rewards. Instead, he turned to Lu Yuan for more assistance, to cope with the gradually deteriorating battle situation there. Truthfully, if he hadn¡¯t been sure that the other party was his own avatar and could not betray himself, Lu Yuan would have doubted his intentions. However, precisely because the other was his avatar, after their divine consciousness communicated, he quickly understood the Chu Army¡¯s situation in Dongjun through the connection of their divine souls and grasped the difficulties they faced. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï In Dongjun, the situation for the Chu Army indeed looked grim. The Zhao people had gathered two million troops near Diqiu, and after the war¡¯s attrition, about one million seven hundred fifty thousand remained. At the Baima front, there were also about four hundred thousand from Zhao Army. And in the north of the great river, in Zhao¡¯s heartland, Ji Province, it was expected that another one and a half to two million soldiers would be conscripted. Therefore, even by the most optimistic estimates, the Zhao forces gathering in Dongjun in the next several months will amount to at least three million six hundred thousand personnel. Yes, many of these three million six hundred thousand people are temporarily conscripted civilian workers, a ragtag army, their strength incomparable to those of well-trained soldiers. Moreover, the Zhao people having lost Liang City and holding less than half of Dongjun, would have serious supply issues in Henan, and were fundamentally incapable of sustaining the army in combat for too long. Perhaps just three to five months would be enough for these millions of troops to disintegrate due to lack of provisions. But after saying so much, we still cannot obscure one fact: we¡¯re talking about an army of over three million six hundred thousand! Even if it were three million six hundred thousand pigs standing still letting you kill them, you would be exhausted doing so, and your swords and blades would shatter. Not to mention an organized army of three million six hundred thousand, trained and commanded by military law. In contrast. The Chu forces in Dongjun are now composed of only one million four hundred thousand men on the Liang City front and six hundred thousand on the Baima front, totaling just two million soldiers. In terms of strength alone, this is only slightly more than half of Zhao Army¡¯s total strength. Hmm, compared to the start of the Northern Expedition this year, Chu¡¯s military strength has decreased by five hundred thousand. As for the one million cannon fodder previously transferred, they were long since exhausted, with only a few tens of thousands remaining in the camp. In just a short half year, the Chu Army had already suffered losses in Dongjun reaching one million five hundred thousand men. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Although two-thirds of them were cannon fodder, the number of casualties was still staggering. However, considering what the Western Expedition achieved in this half year, those losses seemed fairly reasonable. First, on the Baima front, to confuse the Zhao Army and create an opportunity for a surprise attack, the Chu Army had to endure heavy casualties, assaulting Zhao¡¯s Baima defenses. For just this deceptive maneuver, Chu¡¯s losses were no fewer than five hundred thousand men. Then, Huang Lin advanced, raiding from Watign County onwards, capturing over ten large and small cities along the waya€¡±all piled up with the lives of cannon fodder. Even if one city cost the lives of only twenty or thirty thousand, or fifty to sixty thousand, the total was still considerable. If it came to big cities like Wat County and Liang City, then the dead and wounded climbed to over one hundred thousand. Adding these up, the casualties reached another several hundred thousand. In the past month, the Zhao Army launched a counter-attack, and the Chu Army was forced to respond. Both sides erupted in countless skirmishes with losses on both sides reaching two to three hundred thousand. Adding up these losses, for Chu¡¯s one million five hundred thousand casualties, it actually seems quite normal. After all, the Chu people were the aggressors, while the Zhao people had the advantage of defense. To break through the opponent¡¯s defense and achieve significant victories, how could they not pay a certain price? Anyway, Lu Yuan approved of these losses. Otherwise, he wouldn¡¯t have sent one million cannon fodder, with the very purpose being for them to bear the cost, right? It¡¯s just that the rate at which this cost was being expended was, admittedly, a bit too fast. How many months had it been? Two months, or three? In such a short time, one million cannon fodder were gone just like that. Now Huang Lin wanted to continue asking for cannon fodder from himself, and Lu Yuan would like to give it, but he too needed to be able to provide it. For the original state of Chu, cannon fodder was not in short supply. In little over a year, Chu Army had consecutively defeated Liang, Wei, Zhao, Zheng, and other states, capturing a total of four million seven hundred thousand prisoners in a series of wars. Taking into account the attrition from labor over more than a year, there should still be about four million five hundred thousand of these prisoners left. However, for this year¡¯s Northern Expedition, to break through Liang¡¯s peripheral defenses and capture the surrounding forts of Diqiu, nearly one million seven hundred thousand cannon fodder were already gradually spent. Chapter 1048 - Chapter 1048 Chapter 429 Military Expedition Movement_2 ?Chapter 1048: Chapter 429 Military Expedition Movement_2 Chapter 1048: Chapter 429 Military Expedition Movement_2 The Liang people¡¯s resistance in the Liang army, however, was far more tenacious and fierce than that of the Zhao people. Even now in its decline, the national power of Liang was still far stronger than that of Zhao State. This tough nut to crack, Daliang, was far harder than Diqiu of the Eastern Province. Unlike Zhao State¡¯s struggle in isolation, Liang had the covert support of states like Xu State, Xu, Zheng Kingdom, and Jin Country behind it. Among them, Xu State, as Chu forces steadily advanced and showed signs of breaching Daliang, even took the initiative to come forward and express overt support for Liang. This support not only meant more financial and material aid but also included direct military assistance. Thus, the cost Lu Yuan had to pay to take down Daliang would be far greater than what Huang Lin needed to conquer Diqiu. The 1.7 million men had only managed to take the surrounding prefectures and counties, as well as the outer camps of Daliang. After clearing these strongholds, the city of Daliang itself was an even tougher bone to chew, As the former, and nominally still, prime imperial capital of the world, its city defenses were far more formidable than those of Mengshan Pass or Liang City. The price Lu Yuan had to pay to capture it was also higher. It was in early June that he finished clearing the outer camps around Daliang. After sweeping the peripheries, he immediately launched an unrelenting assault on Daliang. Then. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? After just ten short days, the Chu army suffered a staggering two hundred thousand casualties. Even though most of these casualties were captured and defected soldiers, the loss of twenty thousand lives per day was still incredibly alarming. Compared to the heavy losses of the Chu army, the defenders of the city, the Liang army, only suffered a minor fifty to sixty thousand casualties. The casualties ratio between both sides almost reached a staggering five or six to one. This was the price to be paid for a strong assault on a fortified city. But the problem was, in order to conquer this city, Lu Yuan still had to bear these costs. So, even knowing the shocking number of casualties, he had to grit his teeth and push through. Throughout June, through to the current month of July, over a month¡¯s time, the Chu army went through this intense level of siege warfare. Previously, the clearing of the strongholds around Daliang was thought to be a rare sight of a bloody slaughterhouse, but only when the attack on Daliang itself began did everyone realize that what had come before was merely an appetizer. After more than a month of fighting, the Chu army had poured in another seven hundred thousand lives. The result was the elimination of half of the city¡¯s defenders, tantamount to one hundred and fifty thousand Liang soldiers¡¯ lives. There were still one hundred and fifty thousand Liang soldiers left in Daliang, and although the city¡¯s defenses were somewhat unstable due to the shortage of manpower, Overall signs still showed that Daliang remained strong, and a breach seemed unlikely in the short term. Yet, for the Chu army, in order to capture Liang and seize Daliang, they had already lost two and a half million lives. Not one of the two million three hundred thousand Liang captives taken during the previous Northern Expedition survived; all were thrown into this brutal siege warfare. Their own side even sacrificed an additional two hundred thousand lives of the Chu army. Yet, even so, they still fell short of conquering Daliang by that final step. And just that step, by conservative estimates, would require the sacrifice of another half a million lives. Where would these half a million come from? Now, beneath the walls of Daliang, including civilian workers, the direct Chu forces approximately amounted to two million troops. In the Chu-occupied regions of Liang, about eight hundred thousand Chu soldiers also remained in garrison to maintain local stability. So, Lu Yuan could afford the loss of these fifty thousand lives. However, if one could avoid sacrificing one¡¯s own men, it was naturally better to do so. Therefore, for the upcoming siege of Daliang, he still upheld the idea of using captives as much as possible to minimize the losses of his own men. But after the attrition from the battlefields of Liang and Eastern Provinces, and the consumption by the Yangxia Expeditionary Army in Yuzhou, the captured soldiers from Liang, Zhao, and Zheng Kingdoms had almost been depleted. ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï The remaining Wei captives, though still present, were only about a million. ¡°I need at least five hundred thousand men on my side, which is the minimum requirement to ensure the conquest of Daliang,¡± After recounting the number of captives in his mind, Lu Yuan replied to his avatar, Huang Lin, ¡°So what I can give you is also only five hundred thousand men, no more.¡± The final million Wei captives thus had their fates decided. The forces in Liang and Eastern Province, the Central Expeditionary Army, and the Western Expeditionary Army, each split half a million men. However, even after dividing this batch of cannon fodder, the Western Expeditionary Army¡¯s force only increased to two and a half million men. The gap with the Zhao forces was still more than one million one hundred thousand men. Facing the Zhao people¡¯s frenzied counterattack and such a large disparity in troops, the Western Expeditionary Army was still at significant risk of capsizing. If they couldn¡¯t withstand Zhao¡¯s counteroffensive and lost Liang City, which had been hard-won, the joke would be on them. How could they easily relinquish their hard-earned victories after paying such a heavy price? Therefore, Lu Yuan thought for a moment and then contacted Qingyunzi. Qingyunzi, leading the Heyang Expeditionary Army, was responsible for the battle zones in Wei¡¯s Henan and Nanyang prefectures. After being besieged for over a year, these Wei forces finally surrendered in May this year. The Wei army captives and defectors were subsequently sent to the Eastern Province battlefield, and now this last group was quickly being deployed as cannon fodder. Meanwhile, the victorious Heyang Expeditionary Army, after seizing the two prefectures, had entered a phase of adjustment and resting. Chapter 1049 - Chapter 1049 Chapter 429 Military Expedition Movement_3 ?Chapter 1049: Chapter 429 Military Expedition Movement_3 Chapter 1049: Chapter 429 Military Expedition Movement_3 The Heyang Military Expedition, when it first set out on the Northern Expedition last year, was composed of one million soldiers and two million civilian workers, totaling three million people. After more than a year of campaigning, although the expedition¡¯s progress was smooth, the resistance of Wei people was extremely tenacious. This was especially so in the area around Nanyang Prefecture. The Wei people here would rather eat their children than give in, preferring death to surrender. Their will to resist was, simply put, indomitable. Therefore, when facing the siege by Chu forces, the Wei troops in this area launched several counterattacks. To block these counterattacks and simultaneously to besiege the opponent to death, the Chu Army also dispatched a considerable number of troops for interception. In this push and pull, casualties were naturally substantial. The Wei Army in Nanyang Prefecture suffered the deaths of seven to eight hundred thousand men. The Chu Army, too, lost five to six hundred thousand lives. Although the resistance from the Wei Army in Henan Prefecture was somewhat lighter, under the belief of protecting their homes and country, it was still considerable. Moreover, the number of Wei troops in this prefecture was larger, and they were backed by support from Zhao, their strength far surpassing that of Nanyang Prefecture¡¯s Wei forces. To take this prefecture, the Chu Army even made more sacrifices, with eight to nine hundred thousand casualties. So, although they eventually succeeded in forcing the remaining parts of the two prefecture¡¯s Wei troops to surrender and smoothly took control of both Henan jurisdictions, Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï After resting and reorganizing, the remaining troops of the expedition amounted to only one million six hundred thousand, with six hundred thousand soldiers and one million civilian workers. Lu Yuan did not let these vacant positions remain idle for long. After just one month of rest, by the early days of the sixth month, Lu Yuan transferred eight hundred thousand from the Heyang Military Expedition to the battlefield inside Guannei, integrating them under the command of the Hanzhong Military Expedition. Last year, under the direct command of Lu Yuan, the Western, Central, and Eastern Military Expeditions that were part of the campaign against Liang in Qingzhou fought fiercely. The Hanzhong Military Expedition, which fired the first shot of the Northern Expedition, engaged in a war with a significant presence against Wei in the Guannei region. Although the sudden turn of Chu forces indeed caught Wei off guard, even the Imperial Capital Chang¡¯an City was encircled by Chu troops, directly leading to a siege. But as Huang Xin initially reported, the civilian morale of Wei was martially inclined, and their potential for war was actually not weak. The Chu forces caught them by surprise, directly storming to the foot of Chang¡¯an City, indeed causing panic within Wei. But after the panic, once they had a chance to react, the resistance mounted by Wei people was also extremely resolute. Inside Chang¡¯an City, even though Wei¡¯s Monarch and Ministers chose a temporary retreat north, they still left behind ten thousand elite Defenders and six Inborn for the Crown Prince and other Ministers holding the fort in Chang¡¯an. To add to those forces, from the original inhabitants of Chang¡¯an City, another two hundred thousand civilian workers were conscripted, assembling an army of three hundred thousand strong. With the fortifications of Chang¡¯an City and these defenders, it wasn¡¯t going to be easy for the Chu Army, having traveled far, to easily take it down. After Wei¡¯s Monarch and Ministers evacuated Chang¡¯an, they quickly steadied their footing in Shuofang Prefecture and immediately started planning for resistance and counterattacks. They sent Clan Ministers to both the Western Capital Chang¡¯an and the Eastern Capital Heyin, ordering them to prepare for defense in Heyang and inside Guannei. At the same time, they carried out conscription in Shuofang Prefecture, preparing to assemble troops and be ready to support the front line at any moment. Even Wei Country had sent messengers, leveraging their remnants of influence in Yan State, to go among the Barbarian tribes that had occupied Yan State, recruiting mercenaries to enhance their own military strength. With these measures, not only did the Wei Army in Heyang grow more resistant, they fiercely clashed with the Chu Army. Even within Guannei, aside from the three hundred thousand Wei soldiers in Chang¡¯an City, in the Jingji region, the Wei people had also mustered five hundred thousand troops for various resistances. In Shuofang Prefecture, after the concerted efforts of Wei State¡¯s monarch and ministers, another six hundred thousand troops were recruited, along with three hundred thousand Barbarian troops enticed by the promises of money and provisions. With efforts from all sides, inside Guannei along the Shuofang front, the Wei people had amassed one million and seven hundred thousand troops. You shouldn¡¯t worry whether these troops could fight or not, their numbers alone were quite intimidating. Moreover, among the Chu military encampments, the one in Hanzhong was actually the weakest in terms of strength. ?¦Ï??0.?¦Ï The total military force was only two million four hundred thousand, of which two million were civilian workers, and the real soldiers were only four hundred thousand. Even with this, they had previously had to dispatch troops to Helong to confound Wei Country, clashing to the death with those Western region foreign tribes, which had already resulted in significant troop losses. By the time they fought Wei Country, the number of soldiers was even fewer. With such strength, even if at the start there was the advantage of surprise attacks, defeating the remaining forces of Wei Country in Guannei¡¯s prefectures and taking Chang¡¯an City was not going to be easy. Therefore, throughout last year, the military expedition camp in Hanzhong, led by Huang Xin, was spent sawing back and forth with the Wei Army. Both sides around the ownership of Chang¡¯an City had erupted in one great battle after another, each suffering numerous casualties. Fighting until now, neither side had been able to overcome the other, and the battlefield had fallen into a stalemate. From this situation, unless Wei Country was worn down to collapse through starvation, relying on only the Hanzhong military expedition camp would definitely not capture Chang¡¯an. Consequently, taking this into account, once the Heyang military expedition camp had achieved victory on the Heyang battlefield, Seeing this camp become idle while the Hanzhong military expedition camp, also a part of Wei Country¡¯s battlefield, had reached a deadlock, Lu Yuan naturally couldn¡¯t just watch idly. So he transferred half of the remaining troops from the Heyang military expedition camp to support the Hanzhong camp, planning to inject new vigor into this stalled war. To deliver Wei Country its final, fatal blow, completely ending the fate of this empire. ¡°However, now it seems that it¡¯s not only the Hanzhong military expedition camp that needs support, but the Western Route military expedition camp also requires it,¡± Lu Yuan rubbed his forehead and finally sent a dispatch order to Qingyunzi, ¡°Leave three hundred thousand men to garrison the two prefectures of Heyang, and then withdraw five hundred thousand men to be incorporated under the command of the Western Route military expedition camp.¡± At the insistence of his avatar Huang Lin, he provided a second wave of reinforcements. ¡°After transferring a million people, and considering the troops originally there, the Western Route military expedition camp would have three million troops, whereas Zhao Army has only three million six hundred thousand. If with this they still can¡¯t win, then that avatar is too incompetent and should just be reforged from scratch,¡± Lu Yuan whispered to himself, exhausted. Coordinating several military encampments and dealing with affairs concerning millions of people was indeed too tiring. So tiring that even he found it hard to keep up. But now, the world was not yet pacified, the great war had not ceased, and even if he desired rest, he could not afford to learn to slack off. ¡°Uniting these Nine Provinces is much harder than I originally thought. Indeed, replicating the grand feats of the Three Emperors of antiquity is not so simple¡­¡± Lu Yuan sighed, then once again bent down to his desk to continue handling official duties. Chapter 1050 - Chapter 1050 Chapter 430 Yuzhou Warfare ?Chapter 1050: Chapter 430 Yuzhou Warfare Chapter 1050: Chapter 430 Yuzhou Warfare Just as Lu Yuan was starting to worry about the insufficient troops at his disposal, the Monarch and Ministers of Zheng Kingdom, far away in Yuzhou, also began to worry endlessly about their own Altars of Soil and Grain. Compared to Zhao, Wei, and Lianga€¡±the three nations fiercely resisting Chu Statea€¡±Yuzhou, where Zheng Kingdom was placed between two of Chu State¡¯s Military Expeditions, was just as heated. However, Zheng¡¯s national strength paled in comparison to the other great powers of the Nine Provinces. The population of the other dominant states each boasted over twenty to thirty or forty million people, and also more. As for Liang, with a population of seventy million, it had long stood as the world¡¯s foremost hegemon. But when it came to Zheng, ever since the civil strife and the split, the reunified Zheng had seen a significant decline in power, no longer the once dominant force of a single Province. Back then, the national population barely totaled twenty million. After Zheng decided to divert the disaster east, ceding Yangxia County along with several million people to Chu State, the total population dropped below twenty million, relegating Zheng to the rank of weakest among the hegemonic states, on par with Jin Country. It had completely become a small country among the hegemonies. And yet it was such a declining state that, during Chu State¡¯s northern campaign, defiantly turned against Chu, withdrawing from its alliance and joining Liang¡¯s side. This undoubtedly irritated Lu Yuan, angered Chu State. So, last year, Lu Yuan directed the Yangxia Expeditionary Army, which was originally prepared to strike at Liang from the east, to change its target. It shifted from attacking Jiaodong County to assaulting Zheng¡¯s Gao Mi County. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Gao Mi County, located east of Yangxia County, continues eastward to Changguang County, where Zheng¡¯s Imperial Capital, Xinzheng City, is situated by the seaside. Thus, after the cession of Yangxia County, Gao Mi County became the most important line of defense to the west of Xinzheng. Such an important location naturally warranted strict defense from Zheng, with no room for negligence. After the falling out, Zheng gathered an army of eight hundred thousand men, with six hundred thousand stationed within Gao Mi County. The remaining two hundred thousand were placed north of Yangxia County, in Zheng¡¯s Gaoyang County. The two counties, one to the north and one to the east, formed a pincer on Chu¡¯s Yangxia County. To the people of Zheng, this appeared as a robust iron pincer. Yet, in the eyes of Chu, it was no more than two separate chopsticks, utterly fragile. After the Yangxia main camp of Chu¡¯s army withdrew, Huang Xuan made only minor repairs and left three hundred thousand men there to hold the position, guarding against the Zheng forces to the north and Liang to the west. Then he led the main force of eight hundred thousand Chu troops, along with two hundred thousand civilian workers from the defected Yangxia County, and marched magnificently into Gao Mi County. Faced with this meticulously selected pack of fierce soldiers from Chu State, Zheng¡¯s forces in Gao Mi County were no match at all, and during the initial skirmishes on the battlefield, they suffered several defeats, losing more than a hundred thousand soldiers. Afterwards, intimidated by Chu¡¯s provocations, Zheng¡¯s forces were too scared to take the battlefield, knowing only to fortify their cities for passive defense. This was also a strategy of sorts. After all, with Chu¡¯s current military momentum, not to mention Zheng, other states, even Liang, were being driven back step by step on the battlefield. The fear of facing Chu¡¯s forces head-on was not unique to Zheng; it was the same for other states. There was no shame in Zheng following suit. And indeed, this approach was effective. Once all the states adopted defensive strategies, taking advantage of their sturdy city defenses, they indeed managed to check Chu¡¯s initially unstoppable advance. Now, on all battlefields, this led to a stalemate, with forces entrenched in standoffs. In Gao Mi County, Zheng managed to hold off Chu¡¯s Yangxia Expeditionary Army, preventing it from advancing further east. But the problem was, Chu had sent more than just one Yangxia Expeditionary Army this time. Irritated by Zheng¡¯s betrayal, Lu Yuan, aside from the Yangxia Expeditionary Army, also dispatched a naval expedition which set sail directly, attacking Zheng from the sea route. From the East Sea by boat to Zheng, the journey was not long at all. In just over ten days¡¯ time, they could arrive, which was very convenient. Therefore, when all of Zheng¡¯s attention was drawn to the Yangxia Expeditionary Army in Gao Mi County, this suddenly appearing marine strike force performed what could only be described as a surprise for the people of Zheng the moment they took to the stage. Previously mentioned, although Zheng was among the hegemons, it was but a small state within them. After the cession of Yangxia County, its national population was merely around eighteen million. With such a population size, no matter their capability, they could not maintain a vast army. The reality was indeed so. Before the outbreak of war with Chu, the total military force of Zheng was only around one million three hundred thousand. Out of this, Gao Mi and Gaoyang Counties took eight hundred thousand. The northern border with Tang Kingdom and Jin Country, however minimal the reduction, still required a division of three hundred thousand. What was left for the homeland was only about one hundred thousand. This one hundred thousand were stationed in the Imperial Capital, Xinzheng, to ensure the security of Jingji. There was also a navy of one hundred thousand arranged near Xinzheng City by the sea. Upon analyzing this, one could almost clearly understand Zheng¡¯s situation. Yes. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Beyond the front-line border zones, including the Imperial Capital of Zheng itself, its heartland was utterly hollow, vast tracts of territory hardly garrisoned. So when the naval expedition¡¯s five hundred thousand army and two hundred thousand navy arrived, after defeating Zheng¡¯s sole naval defense, those one hundred thousand sailors, Chu¡¯s surprise force disembarked and surrounded Xinzheng City. With five hundred thousand Chu soldiers at the city¡¯s doorstep, Zheng was in danger of losing everything! Chapter 1051 - Chapter 1051 Chapter 430 Yuzhou Warfare_2 ?Chapter 1051: Chapter 430 Yuzhou Warfare_2 Chapter 1051: Chapter 430 Yuzhou Warfare_2 The sudden arrival of Chu State gave Xinzheng City hardly any time to prepare. Especially the naval forces of Chu, after annihilating the Zheng Kingdom¡¯s waterborne strength, sailed directly into the inland of Zheng along the nearby Wei River, sealing all of Zheng¡¯s water and land thoroughfares. In just a few short days, not only was Xinzheng City cut off from the outside world, but even Changguang County, and all the other counties within Zheng, were isolated from each other. The counties of Zheng¡¯s hinterland, though their territories were still contiguous, had in fact lost all contact with each other. As a result, Zheng Kingdom fragmented into several pieces. Under such circumstances, even if the monarch and ministers of Xinzheng wanted to dispatch high officials as messengers to convey decrees, asking local county governors to come to their aid, it became extremely difficult. In this world where innate experts exist, martial artists with great strength can run on walls and fly over rooftops; it is truly challenging, perhaps even impossible, to completely trap them with a large army. Similarly. Even if these messengers capable of delivering messages set out, given the current situation of Zheng having been split into countless fragments and Chu¡¯s naval forces raging in Zheng¡¯s major water systems, even if they could contact the local county governors and get officials to rally the Loyalist Army, that would only be a regional Loyalist Army at best. When all communications are cut off, it would be extremely difficult to merge other regions¡¯ Loyalist Armies even though they might be raised. And if they could not converge at one place to gather their forces, what would be the use of raising the Loyalist Army when facing the Chu Army, which had the advantage of water routes and could quickly assemble its troops? Of course. To completely fragment Zheng which occupied half of Yuzhou, relying solely on Chu State¡¯s two hundred thousand naval forces, is not realistic. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï There will always be places beyond the reach of the naval forces, where Zheng¡¯s army could cross rivers to gather, or some areas without any rivers, allowing unimpeded passage. But such places are generally sparse and remote. Traveling along such routes, Zheng¡¯s army would take an unknown amount of time to assemble. By the time they rushed to aid the king, the situation would have already been stale. The aim of Chu naval forces to block reinforcements had naturally been achieved. Thus, after a series of moves by the Chu naval forces, Zheng found itself in a situation where its troops were useless, or at least very difficult to utilize. But without outside aid, how could just a hundred thousand defenders within Xinzheng possibly withstand an attack from five hundred thousand Chu troops? Especially since Xinzheng is located by the sea, once Chu breached its water defenses, they could land directly under the city¡¯s walls, leaving no time for a response. Even if Xinzheng wanted to gather some civilian workers from nearby to help defend the city after being besieged by Chu, it was impossible. Furthermore, there were only a total of four hundred thousand residents within Xinzheng, and no matter how hard they tried to conscript soldiers, they could barely muster eighty or ninety thousand people. Together with the defenders, their numbers were still less than two hundred thousand, still far inferior to the Chu Army. Additionally, lacking an Inborn Grandmaster within the city, the situation in Xinzheng became even more dire. After the siege began, the Chu Army tested their attacks, and in just over a month, Xinzheng was teetering on the brink of collapse. If not for the onset of winter and heavy snowfall that made it difficult to campaign, Xinzheng would likely have fallen last year. But the harsh winter would eventually pass. Protected by a temporary heavy snowfall, Xinzheng managed to survive another year. But by the spring of this year, with nearly half a year¡¯s time, it became much harder to endure. When the early spring of March arrived, and Lu Yuan launched his second Northern Expedition, Xinzheng too began its second siege as scheduled. Moreover, this time was different, for not long after the siege commenced, following Lu Yuan¡¯s orders using captured soldiers, the two hundred thousand Zheng soldiers taken prisoner were also delivered. Then, as usual, these men were driven by the Chu Army into the brutal siege warfare. During the previous attacks on Xinzheng, the Chu forces still showed some restraint due to the compatriots involved, slightly holding back. But now, with Zheng¡¯s surrendered soldiers, there were no such concerns. They were used ruthlessly, desperately. The two hundred thousand surrendered soldiers, along with a portion of Chu¡¯s elite troops, launched relentless attacks on Xinzheng within just ten short days. The people of Zheng inside the city had never seen such a spectacle before? Moreover, after being besieged for half a year, they had also suffered significant losses in men and horses, and morale within the city was gradually declining. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 Hence, after many of these surrendered soldiers perished, the defenders of Xinzheng could no longer hold on. Many Zheng soldiers began to disperse. Without these ordinary soldiers to act as a barrier and expend the Chu forces¡¯ True pneuma and strength, the Zheng innates within the city found it increasingly difficult to contend with the Chu innates. Following Lu Yuan¡¯s two avatars taking the lead by storming the city walls, personally slaying two of Zheng¡¯s innates inside, With a gap in Zheng¡¯s top-level combat power and the lower-level soldiers beginning to flee, breaches appeared everywhere, and Xinzheng could no longer be defended. Ultimately, on the twenty-third day of the fifth month in the forty-second year of Shenwu, Xinzheng City was breached by the Chu forces. Apart from a few monarchs and ministers from Zheng Kingdom who managed to break out under the protection of an Inborn Grandmaster, other Zheng clan members, nobles, and officials, large and small, who remained in the city, became prisoners of Chu. The ruling core of Zheng Kingdom was substantially dismantled in one fell swoop. Xinzheng City thus became the first imperial capital of a hegemonic state to fall since the start of Chu¡¯s Northern Expedition. Chapter 1052 - Chapter 1052 Chapter 430 Yuzhou Warfare_3 ?Chapter 1052: Chapter 430 Yuzhou Warfare_3 Chapter 1052: Chapter 430 Yuzhou Warfare_3 ¡°` Hmm, The fall of Heyin City in Wei Country doesn¡¯t count. Although the city was nominally Wei¡¯s Eastern Capital, in reality, the Wei Monarch had never visited there; it was merely a name, managed as a capital in name only. This is very different from Xinzheng City, which has always been treated as the core of a nation and of a prefecture. The fall of Xinzheng City and the flight of the Zheng Monarch became a turning point in the Chu State¡¯s campaign in Yuzhou. As the news spread, the Zheng Prefectures and Counties around Xinzheng City that were still holding out began to waver, and the people¡¯s spirits were scattered. When our Chu army cleared up the aftermath in Xinzheng and began to send troops to nearby cities, all the towns we passed surrendered at the sight of us. Some Prefectures and Counties even sent Messengers to offer their submission before our Chu army arrived, switching to the Chu flag in advance. Without much effort, the remaining Prefectures and Counties of Changguang County fell under Chu control. Then, after leaving some soldiers to guard Changguang County, the naval Expeditionary Army continued to advance westward, coordinating a pincer attack on Gaomi County from the east, preparing to meet with the Yangxia Expeditionary Army from the other two fronts. However, the naval Expeditionary Army was a bit slow. The Zheng Soldiers in Gaomi County, upon hearing the news of Xinzheng¡¯s fall, knew they were in big trouble. Continuing to stay here, with their rear already lost, was simply an inescapable trap. If the Chu army from Xinzheng arrived, there would be no way to survive being attacked from both sides. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Therefore, without waiting for the naval Expeditionary Army to arrive, the remaining 300,000-plus Zheng Soldiers in Gaomi County began to retreat ahead of schedule, moving north to Pingchang Prefecture. Although Huang Xuan¡¯s Yangxia Expeditionary Army also engaged in some entanglement and pursuit, the Zheng Soldiers¡¯ determination, will, and mobility to retreat were indeed too strong. After a chase, although we captured about one hundred and fifty thousand of them, we still let approximately two hundred thousand Zheng Soldiers escape. This was somewhat regrettable. Fortunately, although part of the Zheng army escaped, adding the previous captures and the victory at Xinzheng, Since the expedition to Yuzhou, the Chu army has already successively killed or captured over seven hundred thousand Zheng Soldiers and seized two prefectures, as well as capturing the Imperial Capital, marking a glorious victory. However, following this disastrous defeat, Zheng Kingdom was fundamentally impaired, completely unable to recover. But this was not the end. After the two fronts merged, Lu Yuan ordered a reorganization, merging the Yangxia and the naval Expeditionary Armies into the Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp. After integration, the two camps had a total of 1.2 million Soldiers, 150,000 naval troops, 100,000 civilian workers, and an additional 300,000 surrendered Soldiers, making up a grand total of 1.75 million troops. After reorganization, the Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp had only one target, and that was to eradicate Zheng Kingdom and capture the land of Yuzhou controlled by the opponent. So after a short rest and reorganization for over a month, and after sorting out the existing controlled areas, the Yuzhou Camp continued its northward offensive. It was just at this time that Zheng had also somewhat recovered, and despite the agony of losing their capital, they completed a full mobilization. Previously, the fleeing Zheng Monarch, with the Crown Prince, the Prime Minister, and the Grand General, reappeared in Pingchang Prefecture and declared that they would establish a new capital in Zhuxu City of this prefecture. After escaping from the trap, the Zheng Monarch immediately set about reorganizing the remaining territory of the country. After losing Gaomi and Changguang Prefectures, the remaining Zheng territory consisted only of the Yidu and Gaoyang Prefectures in the northern border, Pingchang Prefecture, and Haiyang Prefecture located to the north of Changguang and on the eastern seaboard. Together, these accounted for a total of four prefectures. Combined, these four prefectures had a population of about ten million. On the brink of national extinction, there was no longer any concern for such things. At this point, after the mobilization, all able-bodied men were conscripted, and Zheng managed to muster a large army of 2.5 million. Among them, there were still about seventeen Inborn Grandmasters. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Overall, the Zheng people still had the strength to fight one more battle. Unfortunately, just at this time, when Zheng was focusing a lot of energy to prepare for a decisive battle against Chu in the south, Tang Kingdom in the north, having been targeted by surrounding countries and stewing for over half a year, could scarcely bear the resentment in its heart any longer. Seeing that a corner of the encircling blockade had been broken with their old enemy Zheng in trouble and the blockade against them lifted, their spirits instantly lifted. As mentioned before, the Tang Monarch and Ministers didn¡¯t care for the long-term or worry about mutual dependence for survival. They were only interested in the immediate gains. Thus, seeing Zheng in a downcast state, with its northern forces significantly reduced and defenses vulnerable, they could no longer contain their impatience. With no hesitation, over a million Tang troops swept southward, directly invading the undefended territory of Yidu Prefecture. How else could it be said that Tang excels at seizing opportunities! With perfect timing, Yidu Prefecture fell into Tang hands with hardly any resistance. Then, the Tang army continued to push southwards towards the new Zheng capital, Zhuxu City. Seeing this, how could the Zheng people remain seated? Thoughts of fighting Chu in the south, of reclaiming their old capital, were all thrown aside. If they didn¡¯t halt the Tang forces, Zheng¡¯s demise was but a matter of days. But at this time, the new commandant of the Yuzhou Camp in the south, Huang Xuan, also saw an opportunity. He sent troops north to entwine the main Zheng forces in the south, preventing them from going north for relief. Caught between the coordinated forces of Tang and Chu, Zheng fell into the awkward predicament of being attacked from both sides. Fortunately, at this time, Jin Country in the east finally displayed its foresight, unlike Tang¡¯s shortsightedness, and maintained an understanding of the overall situation. Seeing that Zheng was on the verge of collapse and on the brink of being annihilated by Tang and Chu, At a critical moment, Jin took action. After negotiations with Zheng, they sent an army of six hundred thousand from the east into Yidu Prefecture and once again flanked the Tang forces from behind. With their rear under threat, Tang forces could no longer continue their peaceful march south and were forced to turn back and engage with Jin¡¯s army. Thus, Zheng, on the verge of collapse, somehow managed to survive a little longer. Nevertheless, even though Zheng had temporarily saved itself, facing the dilemma of being attacked on both fronts and adversaries on every side, it was hard-pressed to hold on. Moreover, after more than a year of war and the impact of the fall of the Imperial Capital, Zheng was really unable to fight any longer. Ultimately, after some arguing and negotiation, Zheng finally bowed to reality and once again sent Messengers to Chu to discuss terms of peace. ¡°` Chapter 1053 - Chapter 1053 Chapter 431 Xu State Enters the Arena ?Chapter 1053: Chapter 431: Xu State Enters the Arena Chapter 1053: Chapter 431: Xu State Enters the Arena The siege of the great Liang city turned out to be even more difficult than anticipated. On one hand, there was the tenacious will of the Liang people to resist. On the other hand, there was the help from Xu State. In fact, by the end of June, after losing all peripheral strongholds and cutting off contact with the outside world, the completely isolated Great Liang City was battered to the point its fortifications wavered and it was on the verge of not holding out any longer. It was exactly at this time the Liang people noticed something was amiss and, taking advantage of the Chu army¡¯s lack of vigilance, immediately sent an Inborn Grandmaster to break through the encirclement. This Inborn Grandmaster, acting as a messenger, did not head for the heartland still under Liang¡¯s control but went directly north to Xu State. The situation in the heartland of Liang State was already dire. Although Liang still controlled the land of six or seven prefectures, with a population that was roughly around twenty million, these twenty million people were all but devoid of able-bodied men, leaving only the old and the young behind. In such circumstances, squeezing out another force from the remaining aged and youth might yield another army of a million or two. But this new army would consist of children under fifteen and old men over seventy. Such an army, with a composition worse off than civilian workers, would be unqualified even as cannon fodder on the battlefielda€¡±what use could they serve? Thus, drafting another large army from the rear might be feasible, but it would not break the siege of Great Liang City. While there were also two or three million troops in Liang¡¯s southern and eastern flanks, those directions were crowded with a great number of Chu troops, and even Tang Kingdom mixed in as a spanner in the works. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Though the troops on both fronts could be mobilized, if the men left, the Chu and Tang forces would move in. The six or seven prefectures¡¯ hinterland would no longer belong to Liang. Given the choice, it would be better to let Great Liang fall than that. Without Great Liang, Liang State could still survive. But without the land of those few prefectures in the rear, Liang State would instantly collapse. Between the two, which was more severe and which was lighter, was clear to the Monarch and Ministers within Great Liang City. Therefore, relying on themselves, they could not save Great Liang, nor could they let Liang State weather this disaster. To preserve Great Liang and ensure Liang State suffers the least loss after its fall, The last resort was to seek external assistance. Looking around at the neighbors, the only one capable of helping Liang State now was Xu State, which not only bordered Liang, but was also adjacent to Chu State, facing the same threat from Chu people. Therefore, the messenger sent by Great Liang city had a clear goal after breaking out: to run to Xu State for military aid. As to whether Xu State would be willing to help them, the people of Liang State were quite confident. Because by now, the situation had become quite clear. Great Liang was on the verge of falling. Once Great Liang is lost, all of Liang Prefecture would fall to the enemy. Once the Chu people captured Liang Prefecture, together with Jiying Prefecture that had already been occupied last year, they would form a pincer attack from the south and west against Dongping Prefecture in Qingzhou, which is under Xu¡¯s control. Dongping Prefecture would face the assault of Chu State from two sides, and the border situation would become extremely adverse in an instant. For Xu State to hold onto that territory, it would also become increasingly difficult, with the risk of losing it at any moment. But could Xu afford to lose Dongping Prefecture? Dongping Prefecture was one of only two Central State prefectures that Xu held in Henan. It was also the territory that Xu seized last year, taking advantage of Liang¡¯s weakened state. It was a carefully selected piece of land. Why did Xu only grab Dongping Prefecture last year when Liang State was so vulnerable and its hinterland so empty? The biggest reason was that Dongping Prefecture is situated to the south of Xu State, and also to the east of another prefecture under Xu¡¯s Qingzhou control, Le¡¯an Prefecture. Indeed, the greatest value of Dongping Prefecture was to act as the eastern barrier for Le¡¯an Prefecture, blocking the penetration of Chu State towards Le¡¯an. Le¡¯an Prefecture¡¯s status was roughly equivalent to that of Zhao¡¯s Dong Prefecture. Not only did it hold half of Xu State¡¯s population, with 12 million people in the prefecture, but it was also the current Imperial Capital, where all the nation¡¯s elite resided. Indeed, starting from last year, it seemed that Chu State¡¯s unstoppable momentum in Central State became increasingly apparent. Combined with the severe effects of the cold wave from the North, due to the influence of containing a great enemy and the pressure to survive, Xu finally decided to move its capital. In September of last year, Emperor Xu led the court officials, nobles, royal clan members, and a large army, relocating to the South Capital Le Ling. This migration brought along a multitude of elites and was accompanied by millions of citizens from the northern capital. Such a large number of people moving south naturally caused Le¡¯an Prefecture to become increasingly crowded, gradually making it difficult to accommodate everyone. In the Xuzhou region, Xu State still controlled three prefectures, with 11 to 12 million people living across them. But the cold wave in the North had already approached the Northern Border of Xu last year. It was estimated that those three prefectures wouldn¡¯t last many more years. The remaining tens of millions in Hebei Xuzhou would also need to hasten their migration south in the next few years. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï In other words, Xu State had more than ten million people who urgently needed resettlement. But the current Le¡¯an Prefecture was already overly congested, so where else could these people be accommodated? The newly acquired Dongping Prefecture in the east, though, was spacious enough, and with some development, it could house millions. But it faced Chu State directly and had already become the forefront of Zhao¡¯s defenses; no one knew when the flames of war would ignite there. Chapter 1054 - Chapter 1054 Chapter 431 Xu State Enters the Arena_2 ?Chapter 1054: Chapter 431: Xu State Enters the Arena_2 Chapter 1054: Chapter 431: Xu State Enters the Arena_2 ¡°` Migrating to such a frontier region would be madness. Therefore, Dongping Prefecture was not a good place to settle. But if Dongping Prefecture was not an option, then Xu State would have no new lands to expand into. In Qingzhou, it only occupied the territory of two prefectures, and now the planning for these two prefectures left hardly any living space to spare. If Xu State wished to settle immigrants, it had to find new territory to accommodate more people. And if Xu State wanted to continue expanding and needed new land, there was only one choice left, which was to ask for it from Liang. After all, Liang had six or seven prefectures¡¯ worth of land in Qingzhou, and its strength had declined severely; naturally, it was the prime target in the eyes of the surrounding hungry wolves. Who wouldn¡¯t want to take a bite out of it? But here came the awkward part. At the moment, Xu State and Liang had just formed an alliance. Just last year, in August, before Xu State planned to move its capital, in order to stabilize the safety of the area near the Imperial Capital and to better support Liang, Xu State had formed an alliance with Liang. Both sides were allies now, and the alliance had only just been established when Xu State turned on its ally. Tell me, if this got out, how could Xu State get along? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï This would be even worse than Chu State backstabbing Wei Country. Because although Chu State had stabbed Wei Country in the back, one undeniable fact was that there had never been any alliance between Chu and Wei. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Not on paper, nor orally; none of these existed. For years, Chu had been pursuing a policy of neutrality. Or rather, a policy of pleasing both sides. Chu State opened its doors for business, and anyone who came was a friend, as long as they paid, Chu would sell anything. Whether weapons, grain, textiles, medicinal materials, etc., they were all for sale as long as you could afford it. Moreover, with Chu located to the south of the great river, not participating in the Central State wars, along with its own formidable strength and the actual demands of countries during wars. Under such conditions, Chu, as a middleman, gained the recognition of all the dominant states of the Nine Provinces. This was also the reason why Chu previously had been able to do business with Wei, Liang, Zheng Kingdom, Jin Country, and even go the long way around to do business with Zhao Country and Xu State. Having done business with so many countries, Chu couldn¡¯t form an alliance with other countries or even show a preference, just to maintain these businesses. Under such constraints, of course, Chu could not possibly form an alliance with Wei. The so-called joint expedition previously was nothing more than setting a direction and then fighting independently. The two armies never joined forces, one fought in Helong, the other on the grasslands, facing different enemy forces. Calling it a collaboration was generous. It could only be said that there was a tacit understanding about the general direction and major objectives on both sides. Therefore, when Chu backstabbed Wei, theoretically, there was no psychological burden. This wasn¡¯t a betrayal of an alliance; there were no written agreements between Chu and Wei. At most, it was hitting a business partner who had always cooperated tacitly, heavily impacting the business and even more so the commercial reputation. From now on, Chu could forget about doing business with the other states. As for the rest, truly, there was nothing more. If Wei thought well of its relations with Chu, that was their affair, what did it have to do with Chu? In terms of moral righteousness, Chu had not acted unethically, and it maintained its last shred of integrity. But the relationship between Xu State and Liang was different. They had a clear alliance, and they had even signed a treaty. If at this time, Xu State stabbed Liang in the back, that would truly be a breach of alliance, and it would lose its credibility in the world, becoming despised by all nations. After that, if Xu State wished to cooperate with other countries or engage in various diplomatic and commercial activities, it could forget about it; there would be no chance. All the countries would also be on guard against Xu State, extremely wary of this treaty-breaker. Xu State would find itself in an even more isolated situation than Chu. Well, that was the theoretical consequence. In practice, with the rise of Chu as a variable, how the various countries would ultimately treat Xu State was somewhat uncertain. After all, in the face of the great righteousness of resisting Chu, Xu State, an important dominant nation, was still a force that could not be ignored. Without Chu, following the original international rules, everybody naturally could isolate Xu at will. But with Chu, under the pressure of life-and-death survival, everything might be up in the air. Yet it is precisely because everything might be up in the air that anything was possible. The countries might target Xu State, or they might not; this uncertainty was enough to instill dread and prevent anyone from trying recklessly. Certainly, Xu State didn¡¯t dare to. Already bordering Chu and possibly becoming the next unfortunate target after Wei, Liang, Zhao, and Zheng, Xu State needed international assistance just as much as Liang. Without the help of Liang, Wei Country, Xu State, Zheng Kingdom, Zhao Country, Jin Country, and other nations, Xu State had no confidence that it could withstand Chu and avoid being annihilated. Therefore, international reputation was still extremely important to Xu State. This also led to the situation where Xu State, despite having an urgent need to expand and excellent directions for expansion nearby, dared not make a move on Liang due to concerns over its reputation. And since a military approach was not an option, in the end, Xu State had to resort to diplomacy. Therefore, since the relocation of its capital last year, once it had established itself in Le¡¯an Prefecture, Xu State started vigorously assisting Liang while also sending messengers to communicate with Liang and work on the Monarch and Ministers of Liang. ¡°` Chapter 1055 - Chapter 1055 Chapter 431 Xu State Enters the Arena_3 ?Chapter 1055: Chapter 431: Xu State Enters the Arena_3 Chapter 1055: Chapter 431: Xu State Enters the Arena_3 ¡°` The purpose of this was to persuade the high-level officials of Liang to discuss the matter of ceding, or rather, selling their territory. As long as Liang was willing to relinquish a prefecture, Yue was ready to pay a hefty price to buy it. This activity had been going on for over half a year and had already achieved notable success. Now, seeing that the grand capital of Liang was about to fall, the envoys of Yue within the city proactively proposed. Liang would cede a prefecture in exchange for military aid from Yue. Under the crisis of national collapse and life-and-death, this proposal had already been approved by the monarch and ministers of Liang. If Yue could dispatch a million troops to rescue the grand capital, helping Liang to hold it, or in the event of its loss, assist in rebuilding a new second line of defense, the defense line of Shanyang County behind Liang, then Liang would be willing to cede Qingping County, granting this prefecture to Yue as its third county territory in Qingzhou. Well, Qingping County is located in the northeast of Qingzhou, at the border junction of Xu, Qing, Yu, and Jing states, a true frontier region. Its population is also sparse, about seventeen or eighteen million. And to the north and east of this prefecture lies the territory of Tang, which borders Liang and shares a frontier with this enemy state. For the safety of this prefecture, Liang has stationed an army of three hundred thousand here, plus an additional five hundred thousand from the Yue army, to maintain a defense. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?0 From the above complex makeup, it is not hard to see that the situation in Qingping County is very dire, not only facing the foreign enemy of Tang but also suffering from the infiltration of Yue. It can even be said that many prefectures and counties within Qingping are essentially under the control of Yue. Liang¡¯s hold on this area is not tight, and its rule is quite weak, not at all stable. Were it not for this land serving as a barrier against Liang¡¯s invasion into Qingzhou, an important stronghold shielding their own rear hinterland, Liang would have wanted to rid themselves of it long ago. They certainly wouldn¡¯t have deployed their precious forces to garrison here. Now, since Yue has the need to expand its territories, and Liang itself has the need to seek external reinforcements, a mutually beneficial agreement naturally came together on both sides. Swapping a border prefecture that has already lost half control and has been preliminarily penetrated by Yue for a million support troops from Yue seems like a very worthwhile deal. This way, the hole in the north can be filled by Yue. The current Liang, facing Chu State alone, is nearly exhausted of its life itself. It really doesn¡¯t have more energy to deal with another mad dog-like Tang. Tossing the chicken rib of Qingping County to Yue, and then let them resist Tang on Liang¡¯s behalf, to shield Liang¡¯s northeast border and fight to the death against that mad dog, Liang itself could then withdraw Qingping County¡¯s three hundred thousand border troops and deploy them to the more critical western frontline. The current Liang, after a series of losses, is in dire need of soldiers. Whether the grand capital can be held or not, it cannot change the fact that due to this war, Liang has lost millions of troops. Whether this battle is won or lost has little significance now. Win or lose, how to reconstruct the western defense line post-war is the primary task of Liang. If this can¡¯t be done, even if the grand capital is preserved, it won¡¯t serve much purpose. Because if there are no forces to defend it, even if the grand capital¡¯s walls still fly Liang¡¯s banner, can this city still be considered part of Liang? It would be nothing more than at the Chu people¡¯s mercy. Moreover, if the defense line is not promptly repaired, let alone the grand capital, whether or not the counties behind it in Liang can be preserved is also questionable. Having lost a vast expanse of land, Liang, now relegated to a common hegemon, has lost the foundational strength of being the top state in the world, and its shortcomings are revealed at this time. An average hegemon, even if it monopolizes a state, has only a population of twenty or thirty million. With such a foundation, even at the brink of extinction, they can muster up just four or five million troops. Now, Liang has dispatched a million on the eastern line, over a million on the southern line, and another million-plus on the western line, just barely managing four million soldiers. But now, in Chu¡¯s second Northern Expedition, the western front, the one hundred and twenty thousand troops in the grand capital defense area were wiped out in one fell swoop. Over one-fourth of Liang¡¯s military force just vanished like that. Given its national power and population, without these forces, they cannot recover unless a decade passes and domestic children grow up. But where can they find another ten years? Therefore, this blow is a tangible and utterly irrecoverable loss. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Liang¡¯s war potential has been directly drained by a quarter. Its defense line also has a fatal hole that urgently needs to be filled by new forces. The three hundred thousand troops of Dongping County become crucial at this time. But these three hundred thousand can only solve the immediate issue; to rely on this number of troops to build a new western defense line is entirely impossible. It would take about a million men, barely enough. However, considering Liang¡¯s current situation, where can it find another million men to spare? They couldn¡¯t possibly do what was mentioned above and conscript old people, children under fifteen, and those over seventy, could they? Given the nature of those royal nobles, they might not have much psychological burden to do such a bottom-of-the-barrel move. But being able to do so doesn¡¯t mean it would be effective. An army composed of such a ragtag army, if truly brought to the battlefield, might not only fail to stabilize the front line, but might also make the defense line even weaker and more chaotic, collapsing at the slightest hit. Therefore, unable to achieve this internally, they could only seek assistance externally. The million-strong Yue army rescuing the grand capital is just one aspect. Utilizing the opponent¡¯s troops to construct a new western defense line is the true core interest. And after these two countries reached an exchange of interest, Lu Yuan¡¯s strategy to capture the grand capital suddenly faced new complications. By mid-July, unfavorable news came from the northeast of Liang County, which had initially been occupied by Chu¡¯s forces. A large number of Xu troops entered the territory and, with the cooperation of the local Liang people, drove out the Chu army from the area, regaining control. Outside the grand capital, Yue¡¯s banners appeared. The grand capital, long besieged by Chu forces, re-established contact with the outside world. ¡°` Chapter 1056 - Chapter 1056 Chapter 432 Breaking the Trap ?Chapter 1056: Chapter 432: Breaking the Trap Chapter 1056: Chapter 432: Breaking the Trap Liang, the Imperial Palace. ¡°Your Majesty, the Xu State Reinforcements have arrived!¡± When the banner of the Xu State rose outside the city, the people in the city of Liang who witnessed this scene hurried to the Imperial Palace to deliver the message. ?¦Ï???.§ã? The Emperor of Liang and the Group of Ministers, overwhelmed with joy, hurriedly headed to the northern city gate tower in the direction from which the Xu Army was coming. ¡°They¡¯ve arrived, they¡¯ve really come.¡± As the Emperor saw the billowing dust of the Xu State¡¯s mighty army approaching, tears involuntarily fell from his eyesa€¡±a man who had aged decades in just these few days. No one knew what he had been through during these days. Terror-stricken and worried, he feared that the destiny of both Liang and the Chu State might be obliterated on his watch. And this future was rapidly drawing closer to reality as the Chu State intensified its attack on Liang. The magnitude of psychological pressure and strike this terrible truth had on the Emperor was immeasurable. Despite being an Inborn Grandmaster, he had aged twenty to thirty years within just these few months, wrinkles forming on his face and white hairs sprouting amidst his blacka€¡±such was the burden of his mental stress. Fortunately, with the arrival of the Xu State Reinforcements, all these issues could be resolved. ¡°Your Majesty, with Xu people¡¯s army of a million coming to aid, Chu¡¯s brigands will surely be hard-pressed to hold out. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Our Liang is saved.¡± ¡°Indeed, after months of besieging the city and suffering millions of casualties, the Chu enemy has lost its ferocity. The Xu Army is freshly arrived, with their edge fully revealed, Chu¡¯s forces will most certainly struggle to counter.¡± ¡°The opportunity to break the siege and emerge victorious is upon us today.¡± The many Ministers of Chu State were now discussing fervently, their faces alight with excitement. Like the Emperor, having been besieged in the city for months, living under the constant pressure of a city¡¯s fall and annihilation, they too had been deeply repressed. Now that a glimmer of hope appeared, they clung to it as if it were a lifesaver, desperate to seize it. ¡°Your Majesty, the Xu Army has just arrived and has yet to secure its footing. There¡¯s a fear they may be taken advantage of by Chu¡¯s ruffians.¡± The Grand General Yang Chen, observing the overzealousness of the crowd despite his own elation, felt compelled to stand up and say, ¡°We should send a relief force to meet the Xu Army and guide them into the city.¡± Hearing this, the Emperor agreed and nodded, asking, ¡°Indeed, we should send someone to meet them. How many soldiers are left in the city, and how many can we dispatch to aid the Xu Army?¡± Yang Chen bowed and replied, ¡°Your Majesty, there are still 130,000 soldiers in the city. Setting aside those needed for vital defense, we can spare 30,000 to assist the Xu Army.¡± The siege had lasted two months, and with the continuous assaults, even Liang¡¯s substantial military strength couldn¡¯t withstand the Chu Army¡¯s relentless siege. From an initial 300,000 defenders, only 130,000 remained. Even this number had been bolstered by conscripting the old and weak within the city, adding another hundred thousand or so, to reach this final count. From this perspective, one could see how weakened Liang had become. They truly couldn¡¯t hold out any longer. If the Xu Army hadn¡¯t come, then in three to five days at most, the city would have fallen. The Chu State would have overrun the Imperial Capital and, lacking the military forces to establish a new eastern defense line in the rear, the dynasty could have directly perished with the enemy¡¯s relentless advance. This was the true definition of desperation, the kind that heralds death. Fortunately, this hopelessness finally found a flicker of hope, a million soldiers from Xu State becoming their lifeline. ¡°Send them out, send them all out.¡± Upon hearing Yang Chen¡¯s words, the Emperor waved his hand decisively, without a moment¡¯s hesitation: ¡°Grand General, you go along too. All these soldiers are placed under your command; you must ensure the Xu Army enters the city.¡± At this juncture, whether Liang could hold out was no longer for Liang¡¯s people to decide. It was up to the rescuing Xu Army, whether they could enter the city, that would determine the outcome. If the Xu Army couldn¡¯t enter, their arrival would prove futile. Liang would still be lost. If that was the case, what use would preserving a few tens of thousands be? Better to commit them all, to stake it all on the chance that had arrived. ¡°Your servant shall obey.¡± Upon receiving the order, Yang Chen offered no objection and accepted the command directly. In the past, his role as Grand General was a guarantee of power for Chu State¡¯s high-level interests. Therefore, at that time, of course, he needed to ensure his safety to maintain the interests of his family and the entire empire¡¯s High-level echelon. But now, when the empire was on the brink of collapse, and their families¡¯ future uncertain, if not now, when else should they fight with all their might? Thus, fully aware of this, Yang Chen had no reservations about leaving the city; he was resolutely determined. Even if it meant his death, he would Breakthrough the blockade of Chu¡¯s forces and escort the Xu Army into the city. Grand General Yang Chen departed. He moved swiftly, immediately heading to the Barracks within the city, summoning the resting troops, prepared to lead them out of the city for a desperate struggle. With Yang Chen¡¯s actions, the news of the reinforcements¡¯ arrival also spread rapidly throughout the city, setting off jubilant shouting that echoed incessantly within the city of Liang. Having been surrounded for months, trapped in the city, shrouded in death and famine, the fear in the residents¡¯ hearts was every bit as strong as that of the High-level, if not stronger. And perhaps even more intense. Because, compared to the High-level who held military power and authority, these Low-level residents who were powerless to resist, left to wait helplessly and be slaughtered, their personal safety was even less secure. After the city¡¯s fall, if misfortune struck, it would strike these people first. And then it would be the turn of the Royal Nobles. The world is very realistic, and very cruel. The ancients had a saying in poetry: ¡°The rise, the common folk suffer; the fall, the common folk suffer.¡± This was not mere grumbling but stating a fact. ¡­ Because of the Xu Army¡¯s arrival, the city of Liang was thrown into a boiling frenzy. And outside the city, within the Chu Army¡¯s main camp, due to the Xu Army¡¯s arrival, they too were busy with preparing for war. Chapter 1057 - Chapter 1057 Chapter 432 Breaking the Game_2 ?Chapter 1057: Chapter 432 Breaking the Game_2 Chapter 1057: Chapter 432 Breaking the Game_2 The people of Liang had been besieged within the city, cut off from external contact. Although they had experts helping to relay messages, how could their efficiency and preparedness compare to the Chu army outside the city? In fact, the Chu army had learned of the arrival of the Xu Army as early as ten days ago, right when the Xu Army entered the territory of Liang. Since that time, the Chu army had begun to scheme and prepare specifically for this Xu force. ¡°The Xu people have reached the north of the city by now, haven¡¯t they?¡± Inside the Central Army tent, after Lu Yuan had finished reviewing a document and set down his pen, he turned to an attendant beside him and asked. ¡°Your Majesty, the Xu people arrived at the north of the city just a moment ago.¡± The attendant standing by, upon hearing the inquiry, immediately replied respectfully, ¡°Real Qingyu is currently engaging with these Xu vanguards according to plan, and the battle has already begun.¡± Lu Yuan narrowed his eyes slightly upon hearing the reply. After communicating with his avatar named Qingyu, he quickly understood the situation and nodded, ¡°Good, the progress of the battle is smooth. It seems it won¡¯t be long before we can break the spirit of the Xu people.¡± He was quite pleased with the progress of the battle. While Lu Yuan was slightly irritated by Xu State¡¯s uninvited participation, he also couldn¡¯t help but feel delighted. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Because he realized that this was actually an opportunity, an opportunity to devour the main force of a million from Xu State. Previously, Xu State had been holed up inside Dongping County, single-mindedly building a defensive system, with over a million troops standing guard without venturing out. Against such a turtle shell, Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t unable to attack, but it was destined to come at a steep price. Just look at the situation in Great Liang and other military expedition zones to understand the heavy losses that would come from capturing such a heavily guarded, well-prepared defensive line. It would be a victory bought at the cost of the loss of millions of lives. For the sake of attacking Liang and Dong Counties, enough people had already died under Lu Yuan¡¯s command. He had no desire to continue, to lose so many more in order to conquer Dongping County. He didn¡¯t have that many lives to squander on such endeavors. After all, the cannon fodder had already been exhausted, and sending more troops would mean sacrificing his own people. Hence, with those Xu people hiding in Dongping County, within the turtle shell, Lu Yuan had no intention of disturbing them for the time being. Compared to the copper-wall and iron-barrier defenses of Xu State¡¯s Qingzhou and two counties, the kingdom of Liang, which had been battered and whose defenses were leaking everywhere, was undoubtedly better prey. Moreover, this piece of meat was larger and more abundant; gobbling it up would be far more satisfying than taking Xu State. Ignoring such a delicious treat to gnaw on hard, stuffed dry rations instead would be a choice only for someone who had lost their senses. Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t lost his senses; therefore, he of course had no designs on Xu State. At least, he didn¡¯t until he had eliminated Liang. But now, Xu State had lost its mind, abandoning its stronghold, and actively joining the fray. Didn¡¯t they think about whether a conflict of this scale was something their weak forces could join? A million-strong army might sound impressive. But in the current Nine Provinces, which faction couldn¡¯t field a million soldiers? Any of Lu Yuan¡¯s expeditionary forces had more troops than this reinforcement force. The Xu people thought a million soldiers could save Great Liang; they must be naive or foolish, or perhaps they assumed the Chu army couldn¡¯t fight anymore. After half a year of fighting, the Chu army had indeed suffered serious losses, with casualties reaching two million at the Liang County battlefield alone. However, most of these casualties were defectors from Liang. The actual number of Chu soldiers who had died wasn¡¯t that high; in total, not even half a million. And among these half a million, the majority were civilian workers. The losses among the Chu army¡¯s elite forces, in fact, were not significant. So now, the Chu army outside the city still numbered two and a half million, with one and a half million of those being elite soldiers. Furthermore, there were another half million newly arrived defectors from Wei Country, excellent cannon fodder. Thus, counting soldiers, civilians, and defectors, the Chu army still commanded three million troops and remained exceptionally strong. Meanwhile, inside Great Liang, only a few hundred thousand exhausted Liang soldiers remained. In such a situation, Lu Yuan truly didn¡¯t know where the people of Xu State got the confidence to believe that sending a million reinforcements could lift the siege of Great Liang. Yes, if this million-strong Liang army managed to enter Great Liang, they could certainly stabilize the city¡¯s defenses that were on the verge of collapse. With such defensive advantages, the three million-strong Chu army might not be able to take the city. But when a million more mouths appeared, would there be enough grain inside Great Liang for all of them? According to what Lu Yuan knew, although Great Liang had not yet suffered famine, a rationing system had already been implemented, indicating that food supplies were running short. And consider that Great Liang, as the former number one imperial capital of the world, had maintained a population of a million people even in recent years despite its decline. Feeding so many mouths, in addition to the original million-strong defenders, the consumption resembled astronomical figures. Before the city was besieged, it had been possible to continuously transport grain through routes outside the city. But now, with the surrounding sieges by Chu forces, these routes had naturally been severed. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 No new supplies could come in; only the accumulated stores from previous years were left to be consumed. Although Great Liang had anticipated food consumption issues after a siege and had stockpiled a large amount of grain as military provisions in advance, no matter the preparations, this was still an issue for feeding one or two million people, and not something easily resolved. Chapter 1058 - Chapter 1058 Chapter 432 In the Jar Game Breaker_3 ?Chapter 1058: Chapter 432 In the Jar Game Breaker_3 Chapter 1058: Chapter 432 In the Jar Game Breaker_3 Scraping together resources, just enough to sustain these people for a year¡¯s supply. But now, the Chu army has already besieged the city for half a year. And it looks like the siege will continue, lasting another year is just a matter of time. Once a year passes, no matter how frugally the city conserves food, they will face a crisis of complete grain depletion. If the million-strong Xu Army outside the city joins in, that would mean a doubling of grain consumption. Let alone holding out for another half a year, whether they can last another two or three months until winter brings snow is also in question. By then, there¡¯s a fear that without the Chu Army lifting a finger, the people of Liang and Xu within the city will starve to death due to the food issue. At that point, the enemy will collapse without a fight, and the Chu Army will easily take the entire city of Da Liang. Just from this aspect, Chu State isn¡¯t the least bit worried about the arrival of the Xu people. The sky is vast, the earth is vast, but having food to eat is of utmost importance. By controlling Da Liang City¡¯s lifeline, the Chu Army might as well have taken the city. Of course, these are just passive reactions. Although they will eventually complete the mission, the time spent and the potential variables that may arise during the wait signal that this is not the most perfect solution. Rather than waiting for the enemy to starve to death, Lu Yuan prefers to take matters into his own hands, using his excellent strength to kill the enemy. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï As long as the people are gone, everything is settled, with no further problems. And coincidentally, when it comes to this uninvited Xu Army, he indeed has the strength to kill them. So what are we waiting for? It¡¯s time to roll up our sleeves and get down to business. Therefore, to lure the opponent into the trap, the Chu Army in the northeastern region of Liang, under the guidance of Lu Yuan, withdrew from the guarded cities in advance of the Xu Army¡¯s arrival. They cleared the way to Da Liang for them. The goal was to allow the Xu Army to reach Da Liang City without any worries. Of course, this giving up of the cities is only temporary. Once the main force of the Xu Army has passed through, those withdrawn Chu forces will quickly return and retake the cities they gave up. They will completely block the retreat of the Xu Army that has entered the trap. And what about the Xu Army¡¯s defenders left at those retreat points, those who took over the cities? With such a small number of forces, Lu Yuan believes that under the inexhaustible wear of his troops and the attack of his Inborn Grandmasters, they won¡¯t be able to pose any real obstacle. Taking back the abandoned cities is inevitable, not just a possibility. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã? Not only did they open the paths, but preparations also began within the Chu Army¡¯s main camp outside Da Liang City. Over a million elite soldiers, long nurtured and carefully selected, have already gathered at the northern camp. In the army, twenty Inborn Grandmasters, including Lu Yuan¡¯s avatars and prince and princesses, have also assembled at the northern camp. Half of the elite power of the Liang and Chu forces is now poised and ready, waiting for the Xu Army that has taken the bait to arrive. Now that the bait has arrived and the vanguards of both armies have even started fighting, everything is developing rapidly as Lu Yuan wished. Of course. The current progress is also what the people of Liang and Xu desire, unfolding as they expected. The so-called drawing the snake out of its hole doesn¡¯t mean that the Chu Army is brilliant or that the Xu people are foolish and cannot see through the trap¡¯s scheming. The opponent certainly knows that the Chu Army harbors ill intentions and that going to Da Liang will undoubtedly be fraught with hardship and danger. But even knowing this, the Xu Army still has to come. Because they have to save Da Liang. And they have to assist the State of Liang. Qingping County, he simply couldn¡¯t do without it. Even for the Chu Army, the Xu Army had to fight. Given all these unavoidable factors, even if they knew there was a trap ahead, the Xu Army still had to leap into it. One way or another, they had to face a battle. If they did not save Liang, once Liang fell, Xu State would not survive either. Therefore, it might as well face the challenge. Let¡¯s see if your trap is deeper or if I can jump farther. This kind of ruse, akin to the ruse of Zhou Yu against Huang Gai, thus unfolded in Liang Prefecture in such an absurd fashion. However, this act wouldn¡¯t end so swiftly; it had to last at least ten days to half a month to play out the drama involving over a million people. So Lu Yuan merely paid attention to the start of the war, confirmed that the Chu Army had not fallen into a disadvantage but instead held a significant advantage, and then he didn¡¯t focus too much on it. He redirected his energy onto other matters. For instance, he just received a piece of news. On the twentieth day of the seventh month, Qingxuanzi, the Camp Commander of the eastern military expedition, finally made a breakthrough in Rencheng Prefecture after months of fierce battle. In the Battle of Chengcheng, he crushed the Liang defenders of Rencheng, slaying two hundred and twenty-one thousand enemies and capturing one hundred and seventy thousand. Subsequently, the main force swept through Rencheng, and it was anticipated that the entire prefecture would be pacified within the next few days. With the loss of this prefecture, one of Liang¡¯s most important rear bases, Jiaoxi Prefecture, and one of the two prefectures of Donglai and Jiaoxi, would be directly exposed to the Chu Army¡¯s offensive. Another core region within Liang¡¯s territory had diminished, leaving only Donglai Prefecture, further reducing their war potential. But that¡¯s not all. With the Rencheng Prefecture in the north acting as a barrier, the areas of Greater Liang and Shanyang County on the easternmost edge of Liang had become protrusions. The current map of Liang resembled that of a tadpole, with a tail extending from the main body. These extensions were Greater Liang and Shanyang County. What¡¯s worse, the southern part of Shanyang County, that tail, had already been occupied by the Chu Army, bitten off a chunk. Therefore, this protruding part appeared even more winding and vulnerable. In such a context, with the eastern military expedition threatening Jiaoxi and Shanyang, the issue was no longer whether Greater Liang could hold out. For, as the apex of the protrusion, it had already become isolated like the tail of a gecko and was sure to fall. The real problem for Liang was whether, with their rear under threat, they could still maintain the defenses they had prepared in Shanyang, that half a tail that was extended. After all, Shanyang County faced the risk of being attacked from the east, south, and west by the Chu Army. Under such dire circumstances, establishing a new stable defensive line here was no easy task. And with Shanyang County as the precarious pivot in the rear, Greater Liang, which relied on Shanyang, naturally had even less chance of holding on. In Greater Liang, the Xu Army had just set its trap, and almost immediately, wonderful news came from the eastern military expedition. Such delightful tidings naturally uplifted spirits. Even Lu Yuan started to wonder if this was the result of his cultivation of the Way of Control Pneuma, after accumulating so much Qi Luck, beginning to gather momentum and feed back into reality. Otherwise, why would he feel as if even the heavens were aiding him? Wait a minute. Given the current dire state of the Nine Provinces, and being the last Cultivator and a practitioner of the Fortune Dao, as well as the ruler of the greatest empire, encompassing so many halos in oneself, this template seemed almost on par with that of a protagonist, right? ¡®Could it be that I¡¯ve become the favored child of heaven, and heaven intends for me to be the savior?¡¯ Lu Yuan looked up at the sky, unable to help but speculate in his heart. Chapter 1059 - Chapter 1059 Chapter 433 Zheng Kingdom Seeks Peace ?Chapter 1059: Chapter 433: Zheng Kingdom Seeks Peace Chapter 1059: Chapter 433: Zheng Kingdom Seeks Peace As for whether I am the protagonist? Or if I count as the Son of Heaven¡¯s Mandate? These two questions, Lu Yuan only pondered briefly before he cast them aside. Never mind what protagonist, or Son of Heaven¡¯s Will, these things are intangible. To him, what mattered was securing benefits firmly in hand; this was what was tangible. Just like how Lu Yuan continuously launched Northern Expeditions, not only seeking a land for survival but, more importantly, to amass Qi Luck for his own cultivation, right? The objective, now, was almost half accomplished. A good portion of Qingzhou, a small part of Yuzhou, were in hand; he had taken half of Central State. And the remaining half was being rapidly conquered at an incredibly fast pace. These, these were tangible. As for Qi Luck, this ethereal and elusive concept, nobody could clearly say how much impact it had. Indeed, even though Lu Yuan himself cultivated the Way of Control Pneuma, he still had very little understanding of the conceptual and illusory nature of Qi Luck. How many years had he practiced? All together, not even fifty years. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Fifty years, for an ordinary person, almost an entire lifetime. But for him, or for any cultivator, it was merely a somewhat lengthy period of closed-door cultivation. In the blink of an eye. To expect Lu Yuan to comprehend and research Qi Luck, this profound and lofty matter, in such a short span of time, that would be having too high expectations of him. He had practiced the Taiping Dao Book for over forty years, merely following to the letter and mechanically connecting with the Heavenly Pillars, cultivating the Dao Law according to the experiences recorded in the scriptures. Just this, and he hadn¡¯t even reached the end of this Dao Law. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? He hadn¡¯t even finished learning it. To hope to deeply research the content he was learning, understand its principles, and then innovate and produce thesis and research findings. That would be ludicrous! Lu Yuan himself was quite self-aware. He knew he wasn¡¯t a genius, neither his talent nor his comprehension was outstanding. The great achievements he had made up to now were owed not only to his immense willpower but also to the influence of the longevity talent he possessed. Without the Attribute Template that came with this talent, simplifying his cultivation and helping him withstand the backlash from the Fortune Dao, he likely would still be hiding out in the mountain in Luling as a wild man. So, admitting that one doesn¡¯t have great abilities is not shameful. As long as you can keep progressing, have the opportunity and the will to progress, you are already stronger than many others. With enough life span, attribute cultivation, and a personal drive to improve, Lu Yuan¡¯s achievements are naturally expected with such blessings. Even though he was endowed with the talent of immortality, he didn¡¯t just lie down on it, wasting away, slowly degenerating into a waste. Instead, he utilized his talent, striving to climb higher with the limited resources available. Immortality, after all, is not truly being immortal. If the world is destroyed or powerful enemies come, and you can¡¯t withstand it, no matter how long your life, you won¡¯t be blessed to enjoy it. Seeing this vulnerability, he was so diligent in learning martial arts and Dao Law to strengthen his ability to protect the Dao. Left hand wielding a spear, right hand protecting life, that is the true way of long-lasting vision. Thus, amidst his busy schedule, while handling governmental affairs, upon sensing an opportunity at hand, Lu Yuan took a moment to advance to the next realm. ¡­ ¡°I¡¯ve endured so long, finally accumulated enough, and stepped through the threshold of Four Qi Condensation,¡± In the main camp of the Chu army, the place where the Chu Emperor resided, Lu Yuan who had just passed through a barrier, was simply feeling the newly born Wood Element Immortal Qi in his body, his heart brimming with joy. Since the 28th year of Shenwu, when he broke through Gathering Three Qi, he had endured fourteen years of arduous practice, and now he had once again conquered a barrier, stepping into a new realm of Immortal Method. The domain of Five Qi towards Yuan, Ice Flesh, Jade Bone, Immortal Soul, the three challengesa€¡±now the first two, he had achieved major success. Now he only needed to completely refine the Jade Bone to perfection, forming a complete Ice Flesh Jade Bone Immortal Body, to attempt refining Divine Soul into Immortal Soul and charge towards Five Qi towards Origin. The path to becoming immortal was already half completed; how could this not bring him joy? Luckily, as a pursuer of longevity, Lu Yuan was only elated for a moment and did not become arrogant or lose his bearings. The Three Challenges of the Immortal Path were just the beginning. Even if all were passed, it merely indicated that you qualified for immortality. If in the end you cannot condense all you have learned into a Dao Fruit of ascension, you still wouldn¡¯t transcend the mundane to become an immortal, enjoying a life of ease and freedom. ¡°Given the current state of the Nine Provinces, at most, I can cultivate to the perfection of Five Qi towards Origin; to become an immortal is not impossible, I have the potential, but I lack the resources and will probably be stuck here in the end,¡± Lu Yuan thought of the future, his expression somewhat unsightly. The more profound one¡¯s cultivation is, the deeper the connection and understanding with Heaven and Earth. Now that he had broken through to Four Qi Condensation, his connection to the Way of Qi Luck grew even more intimate. With this close connection, after communicating with the Heavenly Pillars, and with the heavenly-earth passage crafted by the ancient Three Emperors, Lu Yuan could already begin to observe the scenes deep within the Heavenly Vault. Ah, don¡¯t misunderstand, this is not about directly perceiving the Heavenly Path or Ascension on the spot. It¡¯s just examining the environment deep within the Heavenly Vault. The world of the Nine Provinces had long been desolate; the Heavenly Path, Lu Yuan had never even felt it. When he cultivated and communicated with Heaven and Earth, it was merely sensing nature. As for the so-called divine will, he could only grasp some vague descriptions from tomes passed down from antitquity. Chapter 1060 - Chapter 1060 Chapter 433 Zheng Kingdom Seeks Peace_2 ?Chapter 1060: Chapter 433: Zheng Kingdom Seeks Peace_2 Chapter 1060: Chapter 433: Zheng Kingdom Seeks Peace_2 So, the idea of using the Heavenly Pillars to observe the Heavenly Path, comprehend the laws, and the like, that¡¯s nonexistent. At the very least, it is nonexistent now. Considering what a mess the Nine Provinces world is in, if you told Lu Yuan it was about to be destroyed at any moment, he would believe it. In a world on the brink of apocalypse, if the Heavenly Path still exists, it¡¯s probably hanging by a thread, gasping for its last breath. Or perhaps, it¡¯s precisely because the Heavenly Path has died, that the world has collapsed. All of such speculations, Lu Yuan had thought about them occasionally when reflecting on the calamities of Heaven and Earth and the uncertainties of life. He felt it was highly likely the current state of the world was due to these reasons. However, these were merely the superficial thoughts of a minor cultivator; the specifics and the actual truth were unknown to all. All those powerful cultivators of ancient times, the Earth Immortals, the Human Immortals, in the end, they too failed to unravel the cause of the world¡¯s decline, didn¡¯t they? In the end, isn¡¯t it just choosing the Northern Dark City as a way out, escaping this world that is already doomed? Those who stand at the pinnacle of the Immortal Cultivation World, if they couldn¡¯t figure it out, Lu Yuan certainly didn¡¯t believe he could make sense of it. After all, even if one is the protagonist, they must still adhere to certain fundamental principles. Without going through the necessary trials and step by step uncovering the details of the truth, how can you identify the cause of the Great Change of Heaven and Earth to achieve a world-saving breakthrough? Not to mention, whether he is the protagonist or not, Lu Yuan himself isn¡¯t even sure anymore. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Therefore, for these self-inflicted concerns, he didn¡¯t bother to think more about them. Where there¡¯s a will, there¡¯s a way. Looking at the current situation in the Nine Provinces, it¡¯s only the regions outside Central State that are unlucky; Central State still has a great chance of surviving. Even if Central State can¡¯t hold on. Lu Yuan still has an Ascension pathway as an alternative option. With such retreats and leeways, he obviously wasn¡¯t in a hurry anymore. Thus, with a good mood from his breakthrough in cultivation, Lu Yuan began a new task, ¡°Now that the breakthrough has been made, it¡¯s a good opportunity to take care of the affair with Zheng Kingdom.¡± ¡­ It had been about ten days since Zheng Kingdom decided to send a messenger to Chu State to sue for peace. Over these ten days, the Zheng messenger rushed day and night, and with the escort of Chu Army troops along the way, he finally arrived beneath the walls of the Great Liang. ¡°Your Majesty of Chu, previously my nation broke our pact, provoking Great Chu and thus incited your military campaign. Now the Imperial Capital of our nation has fallen, the emperor has fled, cities have been lost, and lands surrendered; we have accepted our punishment. Our emperor has realized his mistake and is suffering deep remorse, yet why shall the common people bear the sins of the Heavenly Son? Therefore, I hope Your Majesty will take pity on the millions suffering in Zheng Kingdom, who are displaced by war, and stop the military campaign and forgive our nation. To show our sincerity, my Great Zheng is willing to sever ties with Liang, re-ally with Chu State, from now on regard Great Chu as the leader, and serve as loyal kin, never daring to betray again.¡± After formal greetings, the Zheng Kingdom messenger straightforwardly expressed a submissive attitude and then begged for forgiveness. The process was unexpectedly heartfelt and sincere. ¡®It seems Zheng Kingdom really can¡¯t hold on any longer,¡¯ Lu Yuan thought, watching the Zheng messenger kneeling on the ground below, bereft of any envoys¡¯ dignity, sobbing, and pleading. This attitude of the other party, aside from showing weakness and sincerity, also highlighted the vulnerability of Zheng Kingdom. As for the current predicament of Zheng Kingdom, Lu Yuan, being partly responsible, actually knew quite a lot about it. With the assaults of Chu State¡¯s two major expeditionary forces, Zheng Kingdom had lost Gao Mi and Changguang this year, and even their Imperial Capital had fallen. These areas were all prime territories of Zheng Kingdom. Especially the Imperial Capital, the political, economic, and cultural hub of the country, and a symbol of the nation. The loss of such an important city had an unknown but assuredly massive impact on Zheng¡¯s morale, confidence, and legitimacy, completely a super negative effect. Carrying such a negative impact and the massive losses, Zheng Kingdom in the south had to face the re-strengthened and more powerful assault of the Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp. In the North, there was also the Tang Kingdom, another formidable wolf. Under the tear and shred of these two fierce beasts, Zheng Kingdom, already weakened and sickly, how could it possibly withstand? The only lifeline now was to act decisively, cutting off one of the continuously bleeding wounds, and then fully turn attention to deal with another wound. In doing so, although Zheng Kingdom would become crippled, but anyhow, that¡¯s better than collapsing completely. Perhaps it was with this thought in mind, Zheng Kingdom still sent a messenger to Chu State, knowing full well the humiliation of this journey and even having to pay a heavy price. ¡°Previously, Zheng Kingdom was threatened by Liang and faced peril on its borders, being unable to resist, thus sought my aid.¡± As Lu Yuan looked at the pleading Zheng messenger, he said indifferently, ¡°I remembered the friendship between your ruler and me and the relations between Chu and Zheng kingdoms, and without hesitation, I promptly agreed. Hence, I sent a million-strong Elite Army, sailing across seas and oceans, to a foreign land far away to guard your borders for you. But how did Zheng Kingdom repay me? When Great Chu was on the verge of a major victory against Liang, you colluded with Liang in secret, threatening our army¡¯s rearguard. ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï A golden opportunity for a great triumph was thus needlessly lost, allowing Liang¡¯s million-strong army to escape disaster, and Great Chu missed the chance to capture the eastern regions of Liang. Such a great loss, can Zheng Kingdom bear it? Or do you think you spineless, unreliable traitors who flip-flop believe that admitting fault and surrendering would lightly gloss over this matter? A bunch of betrayers who still want to ally with Great Chu, do you even have the qualifications?¡± Chapter 1061 - Chapter 1061 Chapter 433 Zheng Kingdom Seeks Peace_3 ?Chapter 1061: Chapter 433: Zheng Kingdom Seeks Peace_3 Chapter 1061: Chapter 433: Zheng Kingdom Seeks Peace_3 Lu Yuan¡¯s calm words carried a thick chill, pricking the Zheng Messenger below into a shiver, his heart cooling by half. Indeed. If it hadn¡¯t been for Zheng Kingdom¡¯s betrayal last year against the Yangxia Expeditionary Army of Chu State, which disrupted the coordination with the Eastern Land Expeditionary Army, by now the million-strong army of Liang¡¯s Yan Yunqing might very well have already been defeated. At that time, had Liang lost its million-strong main force, its entire rear would have been left exposed, devoid of any military strength. The two expeditionary armies of Chu could then have driven straight in, sweeping across the whole of Liang State effortlessly. The gains would have been substantial: seven or eight prefecturesa€¡±no, the entire Liang State, the whole of Qingzhou. But it was such a prospect, such a grand harvest, that ultimately vanished because of Zheng Kingdom¡¯s backstabbing. The strategic plan to annihilate Liang within a year of the Northern Expedition thus collapsed. What could have been a resounding victory ended up as this bitter quagmire. Chu State¡¯s surprise attack on Wei Country and Liang State turned into a one-on-one contest against the whole Nine Provinces, trapping it deep in the quagmire of war. With such deep enmity, tell me, could Lu Yuan forgive Zheng Kingdom? Who, in his place, could forgive? This Lu Yuan understood clearly, and naturally, so did Zheng Kingdom on their end. But the survival or extinction of Zheng Kingdom hinged upon a single thought from Chu Statea€¡±if the Chu Emperor¡¯s forgiveness was not secured, Zheng would be finished by this year. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï ¡°Your Majesty, our country acknowledges the enormity of its sins and understands it¡¯s difficult to earn Great Chu¡¯s forgiveness,¡± Seeing that matters were turning unfavorable, the Zheng Messenger quickly threw in his bargaining chip, ¡°But if Great Chu can forgive us, cease hostilities and make peace, then our emperor is willing to abdicate in favor of the Crown Prince, relinquishing the imperial throne. Furthermore, he will send his eldest grandson as a hostage to Chu State. And also cede Haiyang Prefecture as reparation to Chu State.¡± Indeed, the current Emperor of Zheng Kingdom, having suffered such a devastating defeat, has seen his prestige greatly diminished. It was the Zheng Emperor who had invited Chu to Yangxia. It was he who had betrayed Chu and turned to Liang. The loss of national territory and the fall of the Imperial Capital also occurred during his reign. It could be said that if not for the current Zheng Emperor, Zheng would never have fallen to its current state. Having made so many mistakes, the current Emperor Zheng Lian, of course, could no longer hold his position, lacking the authority to do so. Within Zheng, there were many dissatisfied with him. If the nation weren¡¯t in peril, facing the risk of destruction at any moment, some might have already started to make moves against him, seeking accountability. Therefore, choosing to take the blame by abdicating and then passing the throne to his son became the best option for Zheng Lian. At the very least, the throne would remain within his lineage rather than being usurped by his brother. Those who wished to support his brother against Zheng Lian were not few in number, especially after the state¡¯s disastrous defeat. As for sending his eldest grandson as a hostage, The Crown Prince had a dozen sons or more; sending one eldest son was truly not significant. Even if, in the future, the relationship between Zheng and Chu turned sour again, Resulting in the hostage being killed, the Crown Prince still had enough sons to replace him, hence it posed no real threat to Zheng. The only real pain was having to carve out one more prefecture from their already shrunken lands to hand over to Chu. However, after the fall of the capital, Haiyang Prefecture¡¯s significance to Zheng had already greatly diminished. The territory of Yu State can roughly be divided into three regions based on cultural and geographical trends: the south, northwest, and northeast. All three regions are roughly equal in area, each encompassing five prefectures. Zheng controlled the northwest and south, while Jin Country held the northeast. But these were the boundaries before the great disaster. Through the years of warfare, Zheng and Jin, under the attacks from Tang Kingdom and Xu State, have both successively lost territories in the northern parts of their countries. Now that Chu has attacked, swiftly seizing three prefectures in the southern part of Yu State, it nearly swallowed up the entire region. The Haiyang Prefecture that Zheng prepared to cede lay in this southern region. The remaining three prefectures that Zheng held were now all concentrated in the northwestern region of Yu State. Thus, Zheng¡¯s intentions became quite clear. That was to abandon Haiyang Prefecture, inconveniently separated by geography and difficult to govern, in exchange for Chu¡¯s forgiveness and withdrawal of troops. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? After all, if Chu wanted that land, it was essentially indefensible for Zheng. Rather than having it seized by another, it was more beneficial to offer it now as a favor, using it as a bargaining chip. Of course. Beyond this purpose, Zheng also harbored another covert intention. In the southern part of Yu State lie a total of five prefectures. With Chu already holding three prefectures, and Zheng planning to give one more, that would be four prefectures in total. Thus, the remaining part of this region would belong to anyone but Chu. And who would that be in possession of these lands? The answer is naturally Jin Country. After Jin had been pushed south by Xu State, they finally seized the opportunity to snatch one prefecture in the south from Zheng. To say Zheng harbored no resentment towards this is, of course, impossible. Although now Jin has come to aid Zheng against Tang, making them allies for the time being, When Chu and Zheng were allies, didn¡¯t Zheng still betray them when it was in their interest to do so? Therefore, if they could undermine Jin while redirecting the trouble eastward, thereby shifting Chu¡¯s focus away from themselves onto Jin, And forcing Jin to take the brunt of Chu¡¯s firepower, providing Zheng with an opportunity to catch its breath, For Zheng, this would be nothing short of perfect. Why should Zheng care if Jin faces misfortune? As long as Zheng survives this crisis and lives on, that matters more than heaven, earth, or anything else. As for so-called allies, aren¡¯t they there to be sold out when necessary? And as to whether Chu would be fooled? Having already taken most of the southern part of Yu State and eyeing partial unification, would Chu not attempt to consume that piece of tantalizing meat nearby? Zheng believed that Chu would not let the opportunity slip by. And once Chu moved to seize it, Jin, which had already tasted that piece of land, would, no matter how reluctant, still have to face Chu¡¯s aggression head-on and fight for survival. This way, Zheng would naturally achieve its goal of diverting the trouble eastward. Chapter 1062 - Chapter 1062 Chapter 434 Warfare and Pros and Cons ?Chapter 1062: Chapter 434 Warfare and Pros and Cons Chapter 1062: Chapter 434 Warfare and Pros and Cons ¡°Hand over Haiyang Prefecturea€|¡± Upon hearing the conditions of the Zheng Kingdom¡¯s Messenger, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but fall into deep thought. The so-called abdication and hostages mentioned earlier were essentially meaningless. Even if Zheng Kingdom followed through, it would provide Chu State with nothing more than superficial benefits. If it were a time of peace and prosperity, when appearances needed to be maintained, such superficial measures could be acceptable. But in an era of chaos and great strife, where nations either fought or perished, who wasn¡¯t reforming and striving for strength? In such times, who would have the mind for mere facades, when everyone was putting all their effort into gaining benefits and shoring up their substance? Therefore, terms like abdication and hostages were fundamentally pointless. Moreover, these two conditions, while meant as reparations to Chu State, might not be so bad for Zheng Kingdom, perhaps even beneficial. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï For instance, allowing the current Zheng Emperor, Zheng Lian, to take the blame and depart with all the responsibility, while the Crown Prince ascends the throne, taking up arms lightly to rejuvenate Zheng Kingdom. Wouldn¡¯t that be a boon for Zheng Kingdom? Thus, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t care at all about these superficial bluffs; he heard them once and promptly forgot them as if they were jokes. What did catch his attention, though, was the latter condition regarding the concession of Haiyang Prefecture. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Lu Yuan was well aware of Haiyang Prefecture¡¯s location. Even now, he had an avatar leading troops in an assault on this prefecture, already achieving minor successes and capturing lands of two prefectures within it. Looking at the current situation, perhaps he could conquer the entire prefecture before winter set in this year. After all, the prefecture lay in the southern part of Yuzhou, too far from the northwest of Yuzhou, which Zheng Kingdom was using as its new hub of rule. It was extremely difficult for Zheng¡¯s influence to extend that far. Nowadays, they didn¡¯t have the energy to manage that area. Therefore, while Zheng Kingdom had not given up on Haiyang Prefecture, the resources they invested there were also minimal. They had only appointed an Inborn as the prefecture¡¯s chief, along with two or three local Inborns, and about five hundred thousand local soldiers to maintain a desperate defense. With such strength, even though the Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp was focusing primarily on Zheng Kingdom¡¯s core, a mere detached army sent to Haiyang Prefecture was enough to sweep through. Zheng Kingdom realized this, understanding that they were likely to lose the prefecture and that it would soon fall. Hence, they briskly put it forward as a bargaining chip, hoping to acquire Chu State¡¯s understanding in exchange. In doing so, Zheng Kingdom could abandon a rather useless territory and pull back the troops stationed there to focus on warding off Tang Kingdom¡¯s invasion. The North, though assisted by Jin Country, was still not looking optimistic on the battlefield of Yidu Prefecture. Tang Kingdom had been biding its time for a year, and this year¡¯s Southern Expedition was a vengeance for last year¡¯s great defeat. The determination they had put into this was significant. This time, the troops Tang mobilized were the elite of their nation, accompanied by a considerable number of Inborn Grandmasters, intending to crush Zheng Kingdom with a powerful strike. Thus, the ferocity of Tang¡¯s troops truly deserved to be described as irresistible. Had Jin Country not interfered suddenly, Zheng might already have been eradicated. But even with Jin¡¯s aid, facing the aggressive Tang army, the United Army of the two countries was still somewhat struggling to hold the line, retreating step by step. The lands of Yidu Prefecture were being steadily conquered by the Tang army and would soon be entirely lost. In such a critical moment, how could Zheng Kingdom not be anxious? If they could exchange Haiyang Prefecture for Chu State¡¯s understanding at this time, temporarily eliminating the southern threat, and pull back the hundreds of thousands of defenders from Haiyang, then the dire military situation in Yidu could be alleviated. Eventually, they might not only drive out Tang¡¯s forces but also possibly unite with other countries to counterattack Tang Kingdoma€¡±the troublemakera€¡±and settle the score with them. One could not aim to eradicate Tang Country directly, but at the very least, force them to regurgitate the lands of Yu State they had swallowed. By then, losing the South but compensating in the North, conceding Haiyang Prefecture but recapturing another elsewhere, would be tantamount to no loss at all. However, all the above were benefits for Zheng Kingdom, with the people of Zheng reaping the rewards. But what benefits would there be for Chu State? Lu Yuan pondered within his heart. ¡®First of all, to fully claim the southern part of Yuzhou and initially complete partial integrationa€¡±that¡¯s a definite in-hand advantage.¡¯ Chu State had already gained a substantial amount in Yuzhou. Yuzhou encompasses fifteen prefectures in total, and Chu State had already secured three. If they agreed to Zheng Kingdom¡¯s peace proposal, they could effortlessly gain another. By then, nearly one-third of Yuzhou would be in Chu State¡¯s possession. This was a major gain for Chu State, which initially had no plans for a campaign in Yuzhou. After all, Chu State originally only had its sights set on Qingzhou. The goal of the Northern Expedition was limited to Wei Country and Liang alone. Zheng Kingdom, and by extension Yuzhou, appeared as sudden changes in the situation, unintended in the original plan. This indirectly proves that the world can¡¯t always revolve around one person, even if they are the protagonist. Plans can¡¯t always be carried out as intendeda€¡±there will always be unexpected situations bringing a variety of unforeseen changes. Fortunately, Chu State was well-founded, and Lu Yuan was strong enough that, even faced with the unexpected developments from Yu State Zheng Country, they ultimately persevered. Moreover, they took advantage of the situation, establishing a base in Yuzhou and securing such a vast territory. Chapter 1063 - Chapter 1063 Chapter 434 Warfare and Pros and Cons_2 ?Chapter 1063: Chapter 434 Warfare and Pros and Cons_2 Chapter 1063: Chapter 434 Warfare and Pros and Cons_2 This is all good news. ¡®Next, temporarily ending the conflict in Yuzhou can also ease the severe logistical pressure over there, allowing the expeditionary forces to rest and reorganize.¡¯ Yuzhou is, after all, still too far from the heartland of Chu State. Although there is the convenience of maritime transport, capable of carrying grain in large ships, a round trip on the vast ocean still takes time. And with the military supplies for nearly two million soldiers, Chu State does not have enough ships to transport everything. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Many supplies must be gathered on the spot by the Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp. Since it is a collection, there must be a source. Where does it come from? Naturally, it¡¯s from the local populace. For every additional portion the Chu army takes, the local populace has one less portion to eat. And with nearly two million Chu troops, even if only a part of them takes from the locals, it would still be a deadly blow to the local social ecosystem. In fact, after the heavy taxation by the former Zheng Kingdom and the subsequent requisition by Chu State, a massive famine has already erupted among the Zheng populace within the Chu-controlled regions. Now, a rough estimate is that at least over a hundred thousand people have starved to death. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? Moreover, a large number of people, due to hunger, have chosen to rebel and rise up. However, rebelling in this kind of environment essentially has no chance of success. It is no longer the time when Yue Country still existed, and Lu Yuan was just starting out. At that time, despite disputes between states, the overall intensity of war was not severe, and the scale was maintained at the level of tens of thousands, or at most a few hundred thousand people. Even in national wars, there were only several hundred thousand involved, usually not exceeding one million. But after nearly fifty years of refining, the states have perfected their military mobilization systems and established complete armies. The power of the national iron fist is overwhelmingly strong. On the local level, rebellions of a few hundred or a few thousand people are insignificant to the regular armies that number tens or hundreds of thousands. They are truly like ants in comparison. A mere motion, and they can be crushed to death. A rebellion that has just erupted and grows to a few thousand in number can quickly be extinguished by the responding regular army. They will not be given a chance to grow. Not to mention, with many able-bodied men conscripted into the military, the remaining weak and elderly, women and children in the local areas, even if they wanted to rebel, would lack the capacity and energy to do so. Unable to cause trouble or resist, for ordinary people, the eventual outcome can only be to endure and wait for death. So, though there are rebellions, they¡¯re not significant enough to change the climate. More of the populace can only watch helplessly as Zheng troops and Chu troops take away their food and seize their property, and aside from wailing, they cannot do anything else. Oh, that¡¯s not entirely true. They cannot fight against the strong, but they can bully the weaker ones. Locally, many families with fewer people, without a male presence, are bullied by neighbors in the village or the community. These widows and orphans, after facing plunder by the official army, also endure the seizing from those around them. Not just food and grain, but money, land, and so forth, even their own selves, are seen as reserves of food to others. Tragedies born of human desperation have already erupted on the land of Yuzhou. To survive, even the commonly submissive masses are compelled to do things that send shivers down the spine. Lu Yuan has already received reports from local avatars and understands the dreadful extent of the situation. But at that time, the main focus of Chu State was still on attacking Zheng Kingdom and occupying more territory in Yuzhou. Therefore, there was no effort to spare for the living conditions in the occupied areas. As long as the locale could guarantee the supply of materials for Chu State, keeping the war machine running, that was sufficient. As for how those supplies were obtained, and what kind of desperate situation the local populace would face after losing their materials, it was not considered. He is the emperor of Chu State, the emperor of the Chu army, concerned with the interests of Chu people. Although the Chu army controls the Zheng territories in Yuzhou, the Zheng people there have not yet been assimilated as Chu people. If these territories cannot be kept, Zheng people will remain Zheng people, still enemies of Chu State. For enemies, of course, there is no compassion. Thus, while Lu Yuan feels a bit of reluctance regarding the tragedies in Yuzhou, his heart, hardened through years of training, still chooses to turn a blind eye. Let people die then. If more die, more space will be emptied, useful for settling the relocated Chu people. This actually benefits the future stability of the region. However, due to this, the population of Zheng people in the three counties of Yuzhou controlled by Chu State, originally numbering six to seven million, has decreased by five to six hundred thousand after several months of famine. The remaining population continues to diminish amidst the famine. And with the exhaustive exploitation and loss of population, the materials that Chu State can requisition locally are dwindling. Although they can still maintain a large army for now, they are nearly reaching their limit. An expedition across a province is truly no easy feat. Therefore, even if Zheng messengers had not come, Lu Yuan was already considering temporarily halting the military operations in Yuzhou. This war chariot has been charging for two years, conquering nearly four counties. No matter how sturdy and powerful, it is inevitably exhausted. The Yuzhou Camp, with a total strength of one million seven hundred fifty thousand, has been reduced to below one million five hundred thousand after a series of wars. They must use these one million five hundred thousand to guard against Liang¡¯s army from Qingzhou to the west and station a large military force in the rear to suppress and control the Zheng populace within the domain. Chapter 1064 - Chapter 1064 Chapter 434 Warfare and Pros and Cons_3 ?Chapter 1064: Chapter 434 Warfare and Pros and Cons_3 Chapter 1064: Chapter 434 Warfare and Pros and Cons_3 At the same time, an offensive against Zheng Kingdom must be launched to the north and to the east. Honestly speaking, the fact that the Yuzhou Expeditionary Army has held out until now and even achieved such brilliant results, is quite a miracle. Or rather, Zheng Kingdom has indeed collapsed. No wonder it was previously defeated by Tang Kingdom, retreating step by step; this guy is truly useless. Didn¡¯t you see to what extent Chu State fought against Zhao Country over conquering just a single Dongjun? They deployed a five-million-strong army and have only managed to occupy just over half of Dongjun to this day. Even the Guannei battlefield of Wei Country, facing the pincer attack of Chu State¡¯s two expeditionary armies, fought desperately and did not retreat. As for Liang State, there¡¯s even less to say. Facing the main force personally led by Lu Yuan, they have held out until now, still gritting their teeth and enduring. Compared to these companions, Zheng Kingdom, which couldn¡¯t hold out for half a year, is undoubtedly the epitome of collapse. It totally squanders its status as a powerful country. Probably in the Nine Provinces, many people mock and ridicule Zheng Kingdom when bringing it up, treating it as a joke. However, although Zheng is collapsed, Chu¡¯s strength in Yuzhou is indeed limited. In the west, in Yangxia County, Chu stationed five hundred thousand troops to guard against the Liang army of seven hundred thousand in Jiaodong Prefecture. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï In Gao Mi and Changguang Prefectures, they also stationed two hundred thousand troops each, to maintain local order. To attack Haiyang Prefecture, another three hundred thousand troops were mobilized. The remaining three hundred thousand are advancing north to attack Zheng Kingdom¡¯s new capital territory, Jingji. The distribution of troops has already reached its limit. Similarly, it¡¯s truly difficult to achieve more with the forces on two fronts of attack. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Taking a break to rest and recover, accumulating energy, has become an urgent matter. ¡®Additionally, once Yuzhou is stabilized, troops can be pulled from here to rebuild the Yangxia Expeditionary Army and coordinate with the eastern expeditionary force, resuming the original strategy for conquering Qingzhou.¡¯ The original plan was for the northern expeditionary forces to advance eastward from the coastal regions of southern Qingzhou. The Yangxia Expeditionary Army would then attack westward from the coastal regions. The two expeditionary armies would cooperate, jointly striking Liang from both sides to seize the enemy¡¯s hinterland. This was an excellent plan. Ultimately, due to the backstabbing by Zheng Kingdom, it had to be halted. But now, the eastern expeditionary force has just gained a great victory in Rencheng Prefecture and captured the region. Zheng Kingdom has sent people seeking peace, and the conflicts there will be stopping, freeing up the Yuzhou Expeditionary Army to focus elsewhere. At this time, naturally, the original plan can be restarted. Liang¡¯s current core territory, and even its entire controlled region, are all within the original targets of the eastern and Yangxia expeditionary forces. Reinitiating the joint attack plan now may not yield the same surprising results as originally anticipated, but it¡¯s absolutely certain to bring considerable pressure to Liang. When their rear is ablaze, Liang, no matter how ambitious, won¡¯t have the resources to drag out the fight with Chu in Liang Prefecture. Otherwise, if they lose their rear, what use would retaining the city of Daliang be to Liang Kingdom? With only one isolated city left, even if it is the strongest in the world, could it really save Liang State? The counties in the rear, those are Liang¡¯s foundation. Daliang is only the foremost city when Liang is the undisputed number one in the world. Otherwise, it is just another city. Therefore, as long as Chu reveals the ability to threaten the rear of Liang, the opponent will inevitably become as agitated as if stepping on their own tail. At that time, let alone the great city of Liang, even Shanyang County is likely to be abandoned without a second thought. After all, the more Liang commits to the eastern front, the less they can allocate to the west. Without sufficient force to defend the east, Liang will naturally have to choose to give up some territory and contract their troops to strengthen their defenses. Among these, Daliang is certain to be abandoned, and so is the overly prominent Shanyang County. Ultimately, the only territories Liang can retain are Jiaoxi, Donglai, Yingling, and Jiaodong Prefectures. And this too is only because winter is approaching fast and Chu¡¯s army doesn¡¯t have much time left for operations, giving them a chance to breathe. Next year, when spring comes again and Lu Yuan launches his third Northern Expedition, that¡¯ll be the end of Liang and the complete capture of Qingzhou by Chu. In three years, seizing one Qingzhou and a small part of Yuzhou. Although progress is somewhat slower than anticipated before the Northern Expedition, the gains are still satisfying enough. Lu Yuan is quite content with the results. ¡®Finally, there¡¯s Tang Kingdom to the north.¡¯ Following Lu Yuan¡¯s second Northern Expedition and gradually achieving victories on various battlefields, he has built an overwhelming momentum. At this juncture, Tang, which originally had a tacit cooperation with Chu, has gradually shifted from a collaborative partner to a competitor, and even an adversary. Tang wants the territories of Qingzhou and Yuzhou, and so does Chu. Neither side can back down, so a conflict is inevitable. At the present time. With Xu State and Liang blockading Qingzhou, Tang¡¯s strength cannot infiltrate and pose a threat to Chu in this region. But in Yuzhou, Tang has already reached Yidu Prefecture, and just south of Yidu is Pingchang Prefecture, where Zheng¡¯s new capital, Zhuxu City, is located. South of Pingchang, are Gao Mi and Changguang Prefectures, controlled by Chu¡¯s forces. This means that between Tang and Chu, there¡¯s just a single Pingchang Prefecture separating them. If Tang conquers this prefecture, the two countries will share a border. Given Tang¡¯s character, after assimilating Zheng, they certainly won¡¯t be satisfied and will want to continue expanding. And their direction of expansion would be limited to east, south, or west. To the east is the union of Liang and Xu States, which Tang cannot overcome. To the west is Jin Country, supported by Xu State, forming another ironclad alliance that Tang also cannot defeat. It¡¯s only to the south where Chu State lies. Although powerful, Chu¡¯s strength isn¡¯t excessive due to the long-distance expedition, and it remains within the range Tang can handle. Therefore, the only target for Tang¡¯s expansion is actually the southern part of Yuzhou under Chu¡¯s control. Chapter 1065 - Chapter 1065 Chapter 435 The Fall of Liang City ?Chapter 1065: Chapter 435 The Fall of Liang City Chapter 1065: Chapter 435 The Fall of Liang City If Tang Kingdom eliminates Zheng Kingdom and Tang borders Chu, it won¡¯t take long before a great war breaks out between the two countries. Facing a Tang Kingdom that has taken control of an entire state and annexed Zheng Kingdom, the Chu soldiers in Yuzhou would be in an extremely bad situation if they had to confront them. Even the territory they currently occupy would have to be slowly given up under the pressure from Tang. That was unquestionably something Lu Yuan could not accept. Therefore, slowing down Tang¡¯s aggressive advance and using Zheng as a shield to block in front was indeed a very cost-effective deal. Given Tang¡¯s current reputation as universally despised among the neighboring nations, this state was fundamentally incapable of gaining recognition from other countries. Even if things were indeed as Zheng had thought. If Chu stopped causing trouble in Yuzhou, then the states in Yuzhou, even neighboring Qingzhou¡¯s Xu State and Liang State, would come together to eliminate Tang firsta€¡±this disgusting nuisance. Such a thoughtless entity, solely focused on expansion, posed a serious threat to the safety of all states. It had become the biggest hidden danger in the heartlands of every state. If we couldn¡¯t deal with Tang and have this threat looming, when Chu¡¯s attack comes, everyone might as well just surrender instead of trying to resist. Tang might not be sufficient for achieving anything substantial, but it was absolutely capable of being a drag on everybody else. Therefore, the destruction of Tang was imperative, and sooner rather than later. This had become a consensus among all states. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï During the time Tang was drawing fire, naturally, the other nations wouldn¡¯t have much energy to pay attention to Chu. Chu could also take this opportunity to swiftly eliminate Liang State, then seize Qingzhou and accomplish the aims of the Northern Expedition. Sacrificing Tang for the completion of the entire plan was undoubtedly a beautiful thing for Chu. As for the increased difficulty in unifying Central State without such a troublemaker around, that was a matter of perspective. Everyone was developing; it was just a race to see who could do it faster. In any case, Lu Yuan believed that as long as he could capture Qingzhou, the benefits and development he would acquire would definitely outweigh those of the states caught up in infighting. When the time came, wielding the full strength of Qingzhou, he could sweep across the others, and they would all end up like Liang and Wei, reduced to ashes. That was the confidence he had after sweeping through half of Central State. After running through all the pros and cons in his mind, Lu Yuan finally made a decision, looking down at the Zheng Kingdom¡¯s messenger, he nodded and said, ¡°Your conditions, I can agree to. However, in addition to ceding Haiyang Prefecture, those soldiers from Haiyang Prefecture who are from Zheng cannot be taken away, they must remain there. This is my bottom line condition. If you can agree to that, then we can have peace talks. If not, we can continue to fight.¡± The essence of Haiyang Prefecture¡¯s population was its soldiers from Zheng. All able-bodied men had been conscripted into the army when war descended upon them. If Zheng was allowed to take these men away, leaving behind a group of old, weak, women, and children, what good would that do for Chu? Only by keeping all able-bodied men would Haiyang Prefecture be able to continue production, providing Chu with finances and grain taxes. At the same time, Detaining hundreds of thousands of able men would also indirectly weaken Zheng¡¯s potential for war, and that was another calculation. The Zheng envoy below heard this requirement and frowned slightly, as it was outside his authorized scope. However, considering the dire situation back home, he ultimately gritted his teeth and said, ¡°It¡¯s possible, Your Majesty, I can agree to this condition on behalf of my emperor.¡± As he spoke, he couldn¡¯t help but think that, once this condition was brought back, the emperor was probably going to be even more heartbroken. However, no matter how painful it was, for the sake of peace, he would ultimately accept it. Zheng really couldn¡¯t hold on any longer. ¡°Since that¡¯s the case, then go down and sign the treaty.¡± Seeing the Zheng envoy had no objections, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t keep pushing. Having reached an agreement, they swiftly signed the treaty. Diplomacy between two countries couldn¡¯t just be settled verbally, of course. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The official diplomatic protocol required the exchange of treaties, with the contents written in a golden book and sealed with the great seal of each state. These matters no longer required Lu Yuan¡¯s involvement. He had established a general direction, and the rest would be handled by relevant officials to negotiate the details with the Zheng envoy. Once the treaties were drafted, turned into golden books, and stamped with the great seal, they would then officially come into effect. Until then, everything would proceed as usual. Thus, after receiving Lu Yuan¡¯s approval, the envoy couldn¡¯t sit still any longer. He promptly bid farewell and left the main camp to find Chu officials to discuss the details. Just as he stepped outside, a cheer erupted from the distance in the main camp. ¡°Long live the Emperor!¡± ¡°Great Chu, victorious forever!¡± The cheer spread from afar to near, quickly permeating the entire camp connection, with such overwhelming force that it made the entire heaven and earth seem to plunge into an ocean of jubilation. ¡°What¡¯s going on?¡± The Zheng envoy saw this sudden change and couldn¡¯t help but look alarmed. If it were not for the nature of these noises being celebratory, he might have mistaken the happening for a mutiny breaking out in the Chu camp. Some Chu soldiers who were patrolling nearby also appeared a bit stunned upon hearing the incessant cheers, but, caught in the excitement, they started to cheer as well. In the barracks, the spread of information from person to person was a very common and intensive phenomenon. ¡°I¡¯ll go inquire.¡± The Chu diplomat, responsible for handling affairs, was evidently confused as well. However, judging by the cheers, he knew it must be a good thing, so he wasn¡¯t worried. Seeing the Zheng envoy looking visibly disturbed, he took the initiative to offer his help. He summoned an attendant and asked him to go into the camp to find out what had happened. Chapter 1066 - Chapter 1066 Chapter 435 The Fall of Liang City_2 ?Chapter 1066: Chapter 435 The Fall of Liang City_2 Chapter 1066: Chapter 435 The Fall of Liang City_2 He continued to lead the messenger, heading towards the place where the affairs of the two countries were to be discussed. As they were almost there, that attendant from earlier hurried over. ¡°My lord, I have ascertained the detailsa€¡±it was Real Qingyu who led his troops to crush the Xu-Liang United Army.¡± After bowing to the Chu State official who was guiding them, the attendant reported the details: ¡°The Xu-Liang United Army suffered a crushing defeat. It is said that they beheaded over a hundred thousand enemies, with countless others fleeing in disarray. The enemy¡¯s million-strong army was annihilated, and Liang¡¯s external support is now thoroughly gone. Real Qingyu is currently leading his troops in pursuit of the defeated enemy, and it won¡¯t be long before we hear of even greater victories.¡± Upon hearing this, the Zheng Kingdom messenger¡¯s expression changed, flashing with panic and disbelief. He wondered if all this information was intentionally released by the Chu people to frighten him? But hearing the cheers that had not completely subsided, the idea that it was a feigned act seemed far too implausible. Just to scare him, there was no need to mobilize hundreds of thousands of troops. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï The Zheng Kingdom messenger was quite perceptive and knew he wasn¡¯t worth such a massive display of force, not even the Zheng Kingdom standing behind him. Therefore, the message was correct, everything was true. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? But precisely because it was true, he felt an even greater sense of panic. Although Liang had fallen on hard times, its strength was still there, ranking as a top-tier powerful nation in the world, still standing at the forefront of all countries. And there was no need to mention Xu State, an old powerhouse that had made a significant name for itself under Wei¡¯s influence. But now, these two dominions, seen as formidable in the eyes of Zheng, joined forces only to be defeated by Chu State. Oh, no, being defeated by Chu was not strange at all. Since last year, there had been a plethora of countries under the sky defeated by Chu. But at this moment, the defeat of Xu and Liang to Chu meant a drastic change to the global situation, it meant far too much. Firstly, the fate of Liang¡¯s great city was certainly sealed. And Xu State, with its million troops dispatched to save Liang, was a fact well known throughout the nations. Before departing, the Zheng Kingdom¡¯s messenger had heard of this and had felt quite hopeful. He thought that if Xu State could save Liang, causing Chu to stumble and the war situation to turn unfavorable, his own diplomatic mission might achieve better progress, sparing Zheng State from too much loss. But who could have imagined, just as he had arrived at the base of Liang City, the allied forces of the two nations would be defeated in such a way? ¡®These good-for-nothings, these useless trash, they were only at war for less than a month, and they¡¯ve already lost, truly like trying to prop up a lump of mud¡­¡¯ The messenger wanted to curse out loud, but then he suddenly remembered, his own side was not faring much better. Xinzheng City, likewise, had not been defended for long before it was handed over to the Chu people. By comparison, Liang, which had held out for over a year, was far stronger. With this thought, the messenger, who initially wanted to complain, suddenly felt a chilling realization, and no longer harbored any grievances. Liang and Xu had been defeated, at such a pivotal moment, no less. With Chu achieving a great victory, the circumstances naturally changed. Watching the Chu official beside him smilingly look his way, the Zheng Kingdom messenger felt a profound sadness. ¡®The Chu people have won, so will the conditions they previously promised still hold? Or will they make exorbitant demands, seeking even greater concessions¡­¡¯ The more he thought about it, the more likely it seemed. ¡°Messenger, this way please. The officials from our various departments are all waiting,¡± said the Chu State official leading the way. He clearly noticed the Zheng Kingdom messenger¡¯s thoughts, but he said nothing. As part of Chu State, the more powerful Chu became, the more benefits he stood to gain. And now he had yet another opportunity to demand greater favors. As for what Zheng thought? A mere defeated nation, a lost doga€¡± who cares! ¡°Yes, I¡¯m coming,¡± replied the Zheng Kingdom messenger, feeling the shift in atmosphere. With a forced smile, he followed with heavy steps. It was as if the fate of the entire Zheng Kingdom was weighing down on his shoulders. What was to follow was bound to be a steady retreat in a war of words, where he would have to fight for the future of all Zheng. ¡­ While the officials of Chu State¡¯s main camp were considering how to extract the most from Zheng, Lu Yuan, who had just met with the messenger, of course received the news of the army¡¯s victory. Being connected through his Avatar¡¯s divine consciousness, he knew before anyone else. Then, Realizing the timing for the final assault had come, Lu Yuan, without any hesitation, personally kindled the large army and headed straight for the great city of Liang. After the arrival of the Xu Army, several waves of reinforcements had been dispatched from the city, engaging in fierce battles for over half a month. The city of Liang had long been left vulnerably empty. In the entire city, there were scarcely over fifty thousand defenders. If Lu Yuan willed it, he could take the city at any moment. But as he had always said, it was meaningless. His Northern Expedition was meant to seize not just the great city of Liang but the whole of Central State, the entire world. The city of Liang was merely an important symbol in this process. However important, it was still just one city. At this point in time, taking the city would not provide much benefit to the Chu Army, except for nearly a million more mouths to feed among the civilians inside. These citizens of Liang, having lived under the shadow of the Heavenly Son, were deeply intertwined with Liang State, and their interests ran extremely deep. If one were to describe them, each was a patriotic commoner, loyal to their ruler. Especially after consecutive conscriptions, nearly every household in the city had sent their men to war, and after continuous fighting, every family had lost someone to the Chu Army. Chapter 1067 - Chapter 1067 Chapter 435 The Fall of Liang City_3 ?Chapter 1067: Chapter 435 The Fall of Liang City_3 Chapter 1067: Chapter 435 The Fall of Liang City_3 The Chu army and the people of Liang within the city share deep grudges of blood and hatred, resulting in the deaths of husbands, children, fathers, brothers, and siblings. Under these circumstances, one should not expect the people within the city to have any good impressions or attitudes towards Chu Statea€¡±that would definitely be wishful thinking. At this time, if the Chu army were to enter the city, they would certainly face many troubles. Such as hidden attacks, unceasing resistance, assassination attempts from the remnants of Liang, and so on, all sorts of inevitable problems. Also, the city having been besieged for so long, was already short on food, and these nearly a million hungry mouths would need to be provided for by Chu. If they were to enter the city, wouldn¡¯t that mean enduring resistance from the people of Liang while also holding their noses to feed them? Wouldn¡¯t that be playing the fool? But if not so, could they really slaughter the entirety of Liang city? ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï That would be one million people. While it¡¯s not impossible to do so, if they really did, Chu State¡¯s reputation would be completely ruined. Besides, a population of a million is an considerable asset. Whether it¡¯s for providing Qi Luck or for producing money and grain, these are substantial benefits. Previously, the indiscriminate sacrifice of cannon fodder was to reduce unstable elements and indeed, there was such a need. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï That¡¯s why Lu Yuan gave up on several million people. But now, all that¡¯s left in Liang city are some old, young, women, and children, not much of a threat, so naturally, there¡¯s no need for such ruthless measures anymore. These good people of Liang can be reformed and assimilated. Previously, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t want to enter Liang city due to various complications. But now, with the defeat of the hundred thousand-plus United Army of Liang and Xu¡­ All those problems naturally cease to matter. The decision of who Liang city belongs to was never determined by the fifty thousand defenders inside, nor by the million civilians. It was the million-strong United Army outside the city, the battlefield at Rencheng Prefecture over there, and the Yangxia Expeditionary Army that was preparing to reorganize. Chu¡¯s continuously accumulated advantages and Liang¡¯s steadily depleted strength and potential on various battlefields are the crucial factors determining the ownership of Liang city, the ownership of Liang Prefecture, and the ownership of Central State. As long as victories are secured on every battlefield, accumulating small victories to gather momentum, then even if Liang has more advantages in the city, losing the world means they can¡¯t hold onto this solitary city. Realizing this, Lu Yuan has never been in a rush to take the city since the siege began. Isn¡¯t it just so now? After Zheng Kingdom sought peace, Rencheng fell, and Xu State was massively defeated, even if Liang city remained in the hands of Liang, the opponent¡¯s overall situation was already lost. Not only could they not hold on to Liang city, but even Shanyang County behind it couldn¡¯t be defended, and even the remaining lands of Qingzhou couldn¡¯t be held onto for much longer. For Qingzhou, the overall situation was now settled. ¡­ The Chu army was always ready, prepared to march north to aid Real Qingyu or to attack Liang city at any time. So when Lu Yuan¡¯s orders were issued, an army of a hundred thousand immediately stood ready. Not just a hundred thousand troops, but out of the Inborn Grandmasters left in the barracks, eight accompanied him on this expedition. After these repeated major engagements, and the persistent offensives of the Chu army, the Inborn of Liang within the city suffered heavy casualties. Originally, there were ten Inborn in the city, then after Gu Shu¡¯s three residences fell, two more Inborn escaped back, making a total of twelve. Fighting for nearly five months, eight of these twelve Inborn were lost in successive battles. Of the remaining four, two went to meet Xu State¡¯s grand army, and their current situation is probably not too good. Thus, only two Inborn remained in the city, including the Emperor of Liang. Lu Yuan personally took action with the intention of directly capturing these two Inborn. Especially that Emperor of Liang, as the core of Liang State, if one could take this opportunity to kill the opponent, it would cause Liang to experience a temporary paralysis. Even if the internals of Liang State could elect a new emperor in the aftermath, the chaos that would ensue in the meantime was inevitable. And by taking advantage of this opportunity, Chu State would be able to further its gain significantly. It was this advantage that led him to take action personally. Otherwise, if he had let an avatar or others handle it, with the Emperor of Liang¡¯s Second Inborn realm of strength, if the opponent was intent on fleeing, it would not be certain they could keep him. Only Lu Yuan, with the strength of a regular Grandmaster, could definitely capture the opponent. And now, as the Chu Army encircled the great city of Liang, the people within the city also received news of the United Army¡¯s disastrous defeat outside the city walls. Thus, the remaining defenders immediately lost their will to fight, and many directly abandoned the city and fled. Everyone understood that with a million reinforcements defeated, the great city of Liang was undoubtedly lost. When the Chu Army arrived, some of the Liang soldiers who were still holding out on the city walls gave up their resistance completely and opened the gates to surrender. Without much effort, the Chu Army entered the city of Liang. Under such an overwhelming situation, the so-called ¡°number one city of the world¡± was just like this. Upon entering the city, the first priority was naturally to capture the high officials and nobles of Liang State. These individuals were the ruling core of Liang State, the foundation of its infrastructure. In this extraordinary end-of-era tale, whether it be martial might or talent, it all stemmed from these people. With these people, there was a Liang State. But shortly after entering the city, as the Chu Army made its way into the imperial palace, they couldn¡¯t find the Emperor of Liang. ¡°Your Majesty, your servants have searched the entire city but have not found the Emperor of Liang. Please punish us,¡± implored the Innate General responsible for the task. ¡°Not found?¡± Lu Yuan frowned upon hearing this. He was certain that the Emperor of Liang was still in the city. Upon receiving news of the frontline victory, he had immediately assigned Inborn Grandmasters to be stationed at all the gates of the great city of Liang, preemptively sealing off any escape routes. The citizens of Liang would certainly not receive news faster than himself. And with Inborn Grandmasters watching, even a master like the Emperor of Liang wouldn¡¯t be able to slip past other Inborns and leave the city quietly. So not finding the opponent now didn¡¯t mean that the opponent had disappeared. It meant that they were hiding somewhere inside the city. With that thought, Lu Yuan circulated his cultivation techniques, gathering magic power in his eyes. A glint of spiritual light flashed by, and the Qi Luck of everyone in the city suddenly became visible to him. If one couldn¡¯t find a person with their naked eye, then search for the person¡¯s Qi Luck instead. As the ruler of a nation, the Emperor of Liang¡¯s Qi Luck shone far brighter than that of ordinary people, glaring like a lamp to a firefly. Without having cultivated special techniques to conceal it, finding the opponent was a straightforward matter for Lu Yuan, who studied the Fortune Dao. ¡°Found you.¡± Standing atop the city tower, surveying the city, as his gaze swept over the southeastern corner, spotting the torch-like Qi Luck there, Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes lit up, his lips curving into a smile. The next moment, a crimson sun arose as he projected an external avatar, plunging toward the southeast where the Qi Luck was situated, unstoppable. Chapter 1068 - Chapter 1068 Chapter 436 Digestion and Combing ?Chapter 1068: Chapter 436 Digestion and Combing Chapter 1068: Chapter 436 Digestion and Combing ¡°` Thud! Throwing the corpse of the Emperor of Liang onto the ground with a casual motion, Lu Yuan took out a handkerchief to wipe his hands and instructed, ¡°Dispose of this corpse, then hang it on the walls of Greater Liang City as a warning to the world.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± The attendant behind him, upon hearing this, immediately took the command. Two men came forward, lifted the Emperor of Liang¡¯s corpse, and went to make preparations. As for Lu Yuan, he looked around, his divine consciousness faintly sensing his surroundings to confirm that there were no other enemies nearby, before he turned to leave. Although the Emperor of Liang was a Second Rank Inborn Grandmaster, to Lu Yuan, who had undergone another metamorphosis and sublimation within the Inborn realm, he was simply not a challenge. For a Third Rank Grandmaster, the gap was so vast compared to First and Second Rank Grandmasters that it was a complete qualitative change. If he were serious, even if a dozen or twenty Second Rank Inborn Grandmasters ganged up on him, they would still not be enough for one Grandmaster to kill. The only thing that made Grandmasters find these Inborn Grandmasters somewhat troublesome was that even though they couldn¡¯t defeat them, they could run away faster. One or two Inborn Grandmasters, when facing a Grandmaster, had no chance of escaping with their lives. But with a dozen people running in different directions, even a Grandmaster would find it quite difficult to capture them all. There would always be fish that slip through the net. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Therefore, although Lu Yuan could single-handedly defeat an empire¡¯s entire high-level military strength and beat their Inborn Grandmasters, killing all these Inborn Grandmasters was not something one person could do. Of course, if he brought along his Avatars, it was indeed possible, an even very likely choice, to annihilate all of an empire¡¯s Inborn. But that would be tantamount to completely tearing up the rules and opening Pandora¡¯s box. Seeing Chu State so ferocious, how could the Inborn of other nations simply accept this without any reaction? They might either gather dozens of Grandmasters in one place, huddling together for warmth, or each Grandmaster would act independently, infiltrate Chu State territory, and cause destruction everywhere. At that point, the war to unify the Nine Provinces would morph from large-scale army battles to an outright confrontation between high-level forces. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 Though with the resources of Chu State, especially with Lu Yuan in control of the ultimate combat power, such confrontations between high-level forces were bound to lead to victory. However, the destruction this would cause to Chu State, and to the Nine Provinces as a whole, was unpredictable. An Inborn Grandmaster who massacred freely could slaughter an entire city in a day¡¯s time. Across all nations in the Nine Provinces, excluding Chu State, there were nearly two hundred Inborn Grandmasters combined. If these people abandoned all restraint, Chu State alone would not be enough for their slaughter. Even if Lu Yuan could intercept them, Chu State would still suffer terrible losses. Not to mention, the death of millions of people was certain. In this transcendent apocalyptic era, Inborn Grandmasters were like nuclear weapons; nations with Inborn Grandmasters possessed nuclear deterrence. With this deterrence, the Nine Provinces maintain a certain balance. Under this balance, warring nations all follow certain rules. Inborn Grandmasters would at most target the opposing army and not civilians, and they might not even personally attack an army, mostly engaging in combat with other Inborn Grandmasters. Although this rule, with the increasingly fierce wars and more countries being destroyed, has gradually loosened and even broken. But even if loosened and broken, rules are still rules, and there are still those who abide by them today. So for the people of the Nine Provinces, there is still some protection. They won¡¯t be targeted by Inborn Grandmasters out of the blue and slaughtered without the chance to resist. Because of this. Although many countries have been destroyed in recent years, such as Zhou Country and Western Liang, these countries disappeared in the conflicts between the nations. But after these countries were destroyed, the surviving Inborn Grandmasters didn¡¯t willfully wreak havoc; instead, they pledged allegiance to a new dominant nation. That is the bottom line of Inborn Grandmasters. The war might be cruel, but with rules in place, these top forces have that bottom line, and they will not act completely unrestrained. However, compared to this, if the rules are broken, the underlying agreement of large-scale army battles transforming into confrontations between masters, with all Inborn Grandmasters acting unrestrainedly, would be an incredibly chaotic time. For the masters, it would be brutal. The understanding is gone; upon encountering Inborn Grandmasters from different factions, it¡¯s a fight to the death, significantly increasing their own mortality rate. For the lower levels, it¡¯s even more brutal. Facing slaughter by adversaries a whole level above themselves, they can¡¯t even fight back or flee, only wait in despair for their fate. The order of the entire Nine Provinces would collapse along with it. Before a clear victor emerges from this high-level confrontation, a new order simply cannot be established. Naturally. With Lu Yuan¡¯s current strength in the Immortal Method and Four Qi Condensation, if he were willing to take action, not to mention a hundred or two Inborn Grandmasters, even multiplying that by ten times or a hundred times would only be a matter of a few Daoist spells. But that would consume his precious Magic Power. Right now, he¡¯s not even willing to slightly waste Magic Power to enlighten some low-level Avatars. So how could he bear to use high-level spells that would consume ten or even more times Magic Power? This precious Magic Power is what Lu Yuan intends to use to continue his Cultivation, to make a Breakthrough towards the Five Qi Towards Primordial realm, and to ascend to the status of a True Immortal. ¡°` Chapter 1069 - Chapter 1069 Chapter 436 Digestion and Combing_2 ?Chapter 1069: Chapter 436 Digestion and Combing_2 Chapter 1069: Chapter 436 Digestion and Combing_2 ¡°` Compared to this vast prospect, a few Inborn Grandmasters, mere existences like ants, weren¡¯t worthy of expending Magic Power. Therefore, rather than opting for the more convenient solution, Lu Yuan still preferred to take a bit more time. It¡¯s just the death of ten or twenty million people, right? The Chu State has plenty of people, and even if the number doubled, he would gnash his teeth and bear it. Especially if he didn¡¯t choose to break the rules. But engaged in the game of wrestling for supremacy with the Nine Provinces within these rules, then the cost of ten or twenty million lives wouldn¡¯t need to be borne by the Chu State but could be shifted onto other countries. Just like the use of captives before. The damage that was supposed to be borne by Chu people was replaced by these captives, right? The Chu State didn¡¯t only avoid significant losses, but on the contrary, it stabilized the region and gained even more benefits due to the consumption of these captives. It was with these interests in mind that Lu Yuan was willing to play the game of supremacy with those people. As long as he didn¡¯t suffer losses and could take advantage, that was all that mattered. The only loss for him was that instead of possibly unifying the Nine Provinces in one or two years, it now might take three to four, or even five to six years to do so. A few years¡¯ time is trivial for the immortal Lu Yuan. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï He could afford to wait. ¡­ After killing Emperor Liang and eradicating another Inborn within the city, and displaying the corpses of these two core figures of both countries, hanging them on the city walls for a public show, The remaining resistance in the city from the Liang people crumbled entirely. For them, the emperor and those top-ranking ministers and nobles represented the last hope of Liang¡¯s rise. Because these people embodied the Inborn Grandmasters, the world¡¯s utmost combat strength, vast connections, resources, and fame¡­ When force, power, and knowledge and such factors combined into one, the class monopoly in this world was so tight it was outrageous, making the low-level people even more desperate. But similarly, when these symbols of power were concentrated in one class, by destroying that class, all resistance was also destroyed. What Lu Yuan was doing now was exactly this. Eliminating the imperial family of Liang, wiping out the top nobility of the country, completely severing their Inborn lineage, meant the country lost all hope. Having seen the terror of the Inborn Grandmasters, the common people still resisting below, upon learning that their own Inborn Grandmasters were eliminated, felt even more powerless and desperate. Now that there were no more Inborns in the city, continuing their resistance was futile. Even if they resisted more fiercely and attracted the Inborn Grandmasters of the Chu people, then everyone would have no chance to survive. Nobody wants to die, especially a meaningless death. Realizing this, the last bit of resistance inside the city of Daliang quickly dissipated. The fugitive soldiers either surrendered or stripped off their armor and ran back home, hiding away as good people. After all, virtually all remnants of the Liang army inside the city were forcibly conscripted from the local populace; they were locals to begin with. Now that the war was over, making their way home was indeed easy. Even for the Chu army to pursue them, it was rather easy. Simply arresting all the manly men who could wield weapons ¨C these were the remnants of the fleeing Liang army. Count one for each one caught, no mistakes would be made. The conscription laws of Liang had been made crystal clear to the Chu army through the interrogation of some captives taken from the city over the past few months of war. In the city, if one was male and could wield a weapon, there were no innocents. All had military experience, had served as soldiers, and had fought against the Chu army. Taking them away didn¡¯t wrong anyone. But regarding this, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t press hard. Those city-dwellers, who had previously resisted the Chu State, were essentially oppressed by the high-level class to begin with. If they could live peacefully, who would want to take up arms and desperately fight against the fierce Chu people on the city walls? Wasn¡¯t it the officials and nobles who forced them? Moreover, The Liang army was essentially killing their own people anyway. During the siege, Lu Yuan used mostly the Liang captive soldiers, and it was the Liang people who were dying. They were simply killing each other, pure infighting. The real Chu army, in contrast, suffered hardly any damage and retained over ninety percent of its strength. In such a situation, there could be no talk of hatred. If there were any grudges, it was the Liang people hating themselves, what did that have to do with the Chu people? And those Liang fugitive soldiers who escaped home, most of them were either old men or children; the adult males had already been cleanly wiped out in the countless major battles that happened before. What use were these old men and children? They were even considered a waste of grain as cannon fodder. Furthermore, they weren¡¯t numerous, only about twenty or thirty thousand, and with the Chu army¡¯s usage rate of cannon fodder, they¡¯d be gone in a single siege battle. The value was indeed not significant. After considering all these factors, Lu Yuan simply pardoned these fugitives, too lazy to waste time and effort catching them. It just so happened that he could use this pardon to buy some goodwill. He had spared the family members of the city-dwellers, allowing their husbands, fathers, sons, and brothers to come home. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? Wasn¡¯t that a kindness? Granted, as the escapees were few in number, not everyone could owe him this favor. But somehow, it would still win over a hundred thousand or so people. To dispel the intense hostility of a hundred thousand people towards the Chu State, the deal was still very profitable, much better than having an extra twenty or thirty thousand weak cannon fodder. ¡°` Chapter 1070 - Chapter 1070 Chapter 436 Digestion and Combing_3 ?Chapter 1070: Chapter 436 Digestion and Combing_3 Chapter 1070: Chapter 436 Digestion and Combing_3 ¡°` However, even though he had won over the hearts of some servants, the millions of Liang people in Guangling City who harbored intense hostility towards the Chu army were indeed a problem. Guangling City was located at the center of Qingzhou, and from this base, it could radiate throughout the entire Qingzhou. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Although both are in Central State, the area of Qingzhou is substantially larger than that of Yuzhou. If the total area of Qingzhou includes the adjacent Yangzhou Guangling, two jurisdictions and six prefectures of Xiangyang, parts of Henan in Yongzhou, and parts of two jurisdictions in Nanyang, then it roughly encompasses the territory of eighteen jurisdictions and six prefectures, whereas Yuzhou has only fifteen jurisdictions, lacking three jurisdictions and six prefectures. Similarly, the level of development in Qingzhou far surpasses that of Yuzhou. The most direct evidence of this is that during the peak period of the Liang state, the population exceeded eighty million. If one also counts the parts of Central State in Yangzhou and Yongzhou, the population even breaks one hundred million. Now, with countries like Wei, Zhao, and Xu relocating massive numbers of people here, Qingzhou¡¯s population has grown by another forty to fifty million on top of the already over one hundred million. This scale has become even more massive. But what about Yuzhou next door? Even at the zenith of Zheng Kingdom, before it split, plus the population of Jin Country, the fifteen jurisdictions only amounted to a little over forty million in total. That¡¯s not even half of Qingzhou¡¯s population. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï From this, one can see the disparity between the two central states. That is also why Lu Yuan believed that as long as he defeated Liang and seized Qingzhou, he would possess the strength to pacify the entire world. Because in terms of population alone, Chu State has ninety million, and with Qingzhou¡¯s one hundred fifty million, just this total population count has already surpassed the combined population of all the other states in the Nine Provinces. Moreover, Qingzhou is one entity, so if people from Chu migrate here, logistics will become even more convenient. On the other hand, the other countries are comprised of countless groups, scattered in all corners of the earth, and even if they want to cooperate, communication issues alone would bring immense difficulties. In such a situation, even if Lu Yuan himself does not take action, sheer strength would be enough to crush the opponent completely. This is the advantage of Qingzhou; this is the advantage of Central State. Located in the center of the world and being the most fertile, it can produce countless money and grain and has the largest population to cultivate innumerable armies. With such a tremendous advantage in hand, how could Chu possibly lose? This advantage is also the reason why Lu Yuan naturally places immense importance on Guangling City at the center of Qingzhou. He had already decided to make this Guangling City the capital of Chu in Central State, from which to radiate throughout the entire Qingzhou. As for whether this will change in the future, that will have to wait until Yuzhou is conquered. By then, perhaps once Yuzhou is developed, to better balance Qing and Yu states, Chu might undergo a second capital relocation. But all that is in the future, and there isn¡¯t time to consider so much for now. The most pressing matter is to take control of Guangling and then use it as a base to radiate across Qingzhou while providing strong logistical support for next year¡¯s Third Northern Expedition. Therefore, after conquering Guangling, Lu Yuan did not continue his campaign. Besides arranging for his avatar Qingyu to continue leading the troops given to him, to take advantage of the disastrous defeat of Xu State¡¯s large army and head north toward the exposed Dongping jurisdiction. He himself stayed in Guangling to preside over central affairs and handle internal governance. This first step was to clean up Guangling City. Given Guangling City¡¯s importance and its destined role as the core of Chu, it was naturally impossible to continue to allow a group of Liang survivors who were hostile towards Chu and harbored resentment to dwell there. ¡°` Therefore, not long after entering the city, Lu Yuan appointed the Grand Judge of Southsea and the Governor of Southsea and instructed them to start the relocation of some of the Southsea people from within the city of Southsea and the province. They were to be moved to rural areas for land reclamation. This was the treatment and punishment for the defeated. As for the city of Southsea and some of the already developed areas within the province, they were to be filled by Chu people who were relocated from Baling and the territory of the Chu State. Yes, the people of Baling had already begun to relocate. Or rather, the second batch of relocations had already begun within the territory of Chu. Last year¡¯s first wave of relocation, involving twenty million people from the southwest and Lingnan, had by this April been completely finished. Twenty million Chu people had been successively settled in places like Jiangxia, East Sea, Xingyang, and Nanyang. In these four provinces, due to the ravages of war, the population had greatly diminished. Therefore, when the Chu immigrants arrived, they directly impacted the local population structure, resulting in a phenomenon where Chu people outnumbered the local Wei and Southsea people. With the arrival of these core support populations, Chu¡¯s control over these four provinces was instantly as solid as rock. And some of the local inhabitants, surrounded by a large number of Chu people, did not dare to harbor any thoughts of resistance. Although there were still some conflicts due to competition over resources. But since everyone hailed from the lineage of the Three Emperors, with similar cultural origins, and even bloodlines, they were not too different from one another. Assimilation, therefore, was much more convenient than integrating some different ethnic groups. According to reports from local officials, in a few more years, maybe ten, these four provinces would be able to completely assimilate into the Chu heartland. Lu Yuan was, of course, pleased with this. So, in May of this year, just as he was laying siege to Southsea city, he seized the opportunity and ordered the start of the second wave of migration within the country. The migrants were mainly from the two southern provinces of Jianan and Qianzhong, and the national capital Baling, a large city with three million households and an already somewhat overflowing population. The total population of these two provinces and one city combined was ten million, already quite an astonishing number. However, compared to last year, when twenty million were relocated at once, relocating just ten million this year did not seem so significant. The reason for relocating fewer people was that, after two years of warfare and considerable expenditure, Lu Yuan had become somewhat overwhelmed. Therefore, this year¡¯s migration had to be scaled back, just like his plans to reduce the army. Luckily, ten million people could still adequately populate many areas. Such as the already stable provinces of Henan, Jiying, and Chengyang, as well as the newly conquered and strategically vital Southsea province. With the arrival of these immigrants, they could quickly dilute the influence of the local remnants of enemy states and rapidly establish Chu¡¯s core support base, securing domination over the local area. The immigrants have already been arriving successively in provinces such as Henan, Jiying, and Chengyang, settling down locally and beginning initial production. But about one million three hundred thousand were still on the road, yet to be settled. Originally, these people were meant to be placed in Henan province, to strengthen Chu¡¯s western border in Central State. But now, well. The province of Southsea, still at the core of the world and set to be the imperial capital, is a bit more important. Therefore, Lu Yuan issued an edict, instructing this group of migrants heading to Henan province to turn around and come to Southsea instead. Now it is only the end of July, still some time before winter sets in at the end of September. It¡¯s enough time to relocate the Southsea migrants out of Southsea city, and for those Chu migrants to arrive. Chapter 1071 - Chapter 1071 Chapter 437 Prosperity, Rendezvous ?Chapter 1071: Chapter 437: Prosperity, Rendezvous Chapter 1071: Chapter 437: Prosperity, Rendezvous ¡°This city of Great Liang has become somewhat dilapidated,¡± Newly appointed Liang Prefect Song Zan and Liang Provincial Governor Li Changyu were riding on horseback through the streets, crossing one alley after another, looking at many houses and streets that had been demolished, couldn¡¯t help shaking their heads, ¡°It¡¯s also gotten much smaller, we need to expand and build more.¡± Song Zan¡¯s previous position was Deputy Prefect of Baling, that is, the assistant to the Prefect of Baling, with an official rank of fourth grade. This time, as Great Chu prepared to relocate its capital to Great Liang and move the Capital¡¯s vicinity here, it continued to employ an official with ample experience in handling the Capital¡¯s affairs. Therefore, Song Zan, who had been Deputy Prefect of the metropolis of Baling with a population of three million, was selected, promoted urgently two levels at once to become Prefect of Great Liang with a rank of third grade. It could be said he was exceptionally promoted. As for the original Prefect of Baling, that would be the Liang Provincial Governor Li Changyu right beside him. This man also rode the wave of fortune, using the momentum of the Northern Expedition, at a time when a large number of counties in the North needed new officials to assume office, he rose directly from the rank of third grade Prefect of Baling to that of a third grade Liang Governor, thus officially stepping into the category of a senior border official. Similar stories to these two were continuously unfolding within the territory of Chu State. After all, through the two Northern Expeditions, Chu State had taken down a total of sixteen prefectures, both complete and incomplete ones. Essentially, thirty-two high-ranking civil and military official positions suddenly became vacant, and if counting the officials just below in rank, the number would be even greater, with top positions exceeding a hundred. So many positions, more than double those in Chu State before, and still increasing. Just think about it, with so many spots open, how tempting it must be for the throngs of Chu officials, who have been eagerly looking at their current positions for who knows how long, wanting to climb higher up the ladder. With this opportunity, a large number of officials completed their transformation from lower-level to mid-level officials, from mid-level to high-level, from assistant officials to primary officials, and from local to capital officials. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã? Song Zan and Li Changyu were just two lucky individuals among the Chu officials riding this wave of promotions. ¡°The expansion isn¡¯t urgent; after all, the city of Great Liang was once the largest city in the world. At its peak, it accommodated two million people within and beyond its walls; the foundation is still solid. Although the last two years of war, because of the sieges, have caused many civilian homes to be demolished, used as materials for wood and stone, the remaining houses, if tidied up, can still accommodate a million people.¡± Li Changyu, hearing his former subordinate¡¯s words, could understand his eagerness as a new official wanting to make a mark, but now wasn¡¯t really the time for grand construction projects, and he couldn¡¯t help but shake his head and say, ¡°The Court has only sent about one million two or three hundred thousand Chu immigrants to Great Liang and Liang Province this time. Of them, eight hundred thousand need to be distributed across various counties of Liang Province. Those that can be settled in Great Liang are at most four hundred thousand people. With just that number of people, they can easily be accommodated within the city with a bit of tidying up, there¡¯s no need for further expansion. Now that Liang Province is newly conquered and Chu is not yet pacified, Qingzhou is still unsettled, and His Majesty will definitely focus his energies on the Third Northern Expedition next year. At that time, it will be the mobilization of millions of troops again, no telling how much money and food it will waste, how many civilian workers it will conscript. Plus, with the immigrant issue at hand, there will be no spare capacity to supply us with the resources to refurbish Great Liang or expand the new city. Our pressing task is to stabilize Great Liang and Liang Province for His Majesty, so that the migrating Chu people can settle down here and become a stable rear for the Northern Expedition army. If we achieve just this, you and I will have made our contribution, and in the future, our prospects for joining the cabinet are promising.¡± Li Changyu looked at Song Zan meaningfully, offering guidance to his junior. As both had originated as capital officials and had successively served as the heads of Great Chu¡¯s capital, the two were naturally political allies. Especially now, after Song Zan¡¯s exceptional promotion, his rank was only one level behind his, a senior border official. Both were third-grade officials, stepping into the ranks of high officials in the court. For a high-ranking official to rise further, aside from becoming a senior border official, there¡¯s only the various ministerial positions in the Capital, and those that come from within the Prime Minister¡¯s cabinet. ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Being the leader of a city or province was certainly imposing and powerful, an envy of many. But how could that compare to being the leader of the world? Only by sitting in the positions of Minister or chief official of the various departments and bureaus, in charge of a nation¡¯s affairs, or even entering the cabinet as Prime Minister and directly managing the affairs of the whole nation, could a man feel he has not traversed the officialdom in vain. The chief officials of the bureaus are but minor second-grade; the Ministers of the departments are but second-grade; and entering the cabinet as Prime Minister is still a major first-grade rank. Li Changyu is now of a major third-grade rank, while Song Zan is of a minor third-grade rank. The two were only a small step away from the higher cabinet officials mentioned above. If they could seize the current opportunity, work hard to show themselves before the Heavenly Son, gain a good impression, then with their contributions, thinking about a direct rise to the central government, wouldn¡¯t it be a piece of cake? With a bright future before them and accolades within easy reach, how could Li Changyu not be attentive and considerate? So, seeing Song Zan wanting to take action and stir up waves, he immediately stepped forward to stop him. The two of them, one as the Prefect of Great Liang, the other as the Governor of Liang Province, managed areas both in Jingji, were closely connected, almost inseparable. Just as Song Zan had just mentioned, if they wanted to refurbish the city of Great Liang and even expand it, where would the funds and civilian workers come from? Wouldn¡¯t they have to come from Liang Province under his jurisdiction? Otherwise, expecting other provincial governors to happily contribute their people and money for you, a Great Liang Prefect, to earn achievements, do they take me for a fool? If I have those resources and labor, why wouldn¡¯t I keep them to develop my own territory, and earn my own accolades? Chapter 1072 - Chapter 1072 Chapter 437 Prosperity, Rendezvous_2 ?Chapter 1072: Chapter 437: Prosperity, Rendezvous_2 Chapter 1072: Chapter 437: Prosperity, Rendezvous_2 ¡°` Therefore, unless the emperor personally decrees the expansion of the Great Liang city. Otherwise, with Song Zan alone as the governor of Great Liang, where would he get the qualification to mobilize the world¡¯s resources and seek benefits for himself? Even so, he must not be the one to initiate the proposal, otherwise, even if the emperor adopts it, he, the initiator, would offend others. The officials from all regions who suffer from the harm to their interests would all resent Song Zan, and this would be greatly detrimental to the opponent¡¯s future development in the officialdom. Although a solitary official is often liked by the emperor and used as a tool to purify and reform the bureaucracy, if there were a choice, who would want to be a solitary official? In officialdom, it is gratifying to call upon numerous colleagues to respond and be a leader of The Upright, is it not? However, in these times, it is indeed not easy to be The Upright. The emperor¡¯s blade is much sharper than the literati¡¯s words. But even if one does not become The Upright, to be an all-rounded and indestructible official and mix as an elder statesman for several dynasties is also extremely good. ¡°Li Gong¡¯s words are very true. I have just ascended to a high position and was nearly blinded by joy, almost making a mistake,¡± Song Zan, who had reached his current position, was naturally no fool. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï With just a little hint, he immediately came to his senses and hastily thanked his former superior with a bow: ¡°Li Gong is my senior, and over the years under your leadership, Zan has benefited greatly and is extremely grateful at heart. In the future, whenever Li Gong has any commands, just send a letter, and Zan will never refuse.¡± Of course, Song Zan could see through his old superior¡¯s ideas and took the opportunity to express his closeness. In the world of bureaucracy, it is common practice to form alliances and manage factions. Li Changyu¡¯s fortune in the bureaucracy is currently flourishing; as long as he serves his term well as the county protector, an advisor position is guaranteed, and he is on the verge of rising to the ministry. Having such a senior figure, when the time comes and I, having accumulated enough experience, wish to develop my career in the court, wouldn¡¯t it be easy if the opponent pulls me up? ¡°Haha, speak cautiously,¡± Seeing his old subordinate so considerate, Li Changyu laughed and then reminded, ¡°We are all ministers of His Majesty and serve to act on behalf of the Heavenly Son. We all follow His Majesty¡¯s words, not commands from me. Remember, never say these words again in the future.¡± Song Zan repeatedly nodded: ¡°Li Gong¡¯s right, we are all serving the Heavenly Son.¡± Li Changyu smiled at the corner of his mouth and waved his hand: ¡°Alright, we have already seen enough of the Great Liang city, and we both know what¡¯s on our minds. It¡¯s time to go to the palace to meet His Majesty and report on our duties and strategies.¡± Both were transferred from the South, Baling, to Great Liang and had been in the city for less than two days. After reporting in and waiting for three days, today was the appointed time to enter the city and meet the Heavenly Son. They knew that the three-day wait was for them to observe their respective jurisdictions. In these three days, they had to come up with a set of governance policies. Leaving aside whether the policies were reliable, a feasible plan had to be presented. Otherwise, how could the Innate Talent trust you to govern Great Liang, to govern Liang County well? If there¡¯s a problem with the plan, it can be slowly revised during implementation. But if you can¡¯t present a plan, it¡¯s purely an issue of attitude and ability. If you don¡¯t give a satisfactory answer today in front of His Majesty, even the position In Hand might slip away. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?0 There are plenty of people who want to be officials. The reason it was their turn to serve as the protectors of Liang County and the governor of Great Liang was simply because they were suitable. But being suitable does not mean no one can replace them; this must be clearly understood. After nearly fifty years of accumulating Inner Strength, Great Chu has nurtured countless talents, no longer the remote small court that had just secured its territory and lacked officials. The Great Chu of today is rightfully the world¡¯s strongest country and will soon be the only great country in the Nine Provinces. This momentum, like the rising sun, has lifted everyone enveloped in its glow to the Heavenly Vault. The rolling Qi Luck gathered, like fierce fire cooking oil, flourishing and thriving along with the state power of Chu, growing stronger day by day. Just like Li Changyu and Song Zan, even if they wanted to form cliques for personal gain, they dared not neglect state affairs. Instead, they continued to work hard, adding bricks and mortar to the rise of Great Chu, continually dedicating their efforts. This is the impact of a rising great nation on the aspiration of people¡¯s hearts. Everyone is full of hope for the future. And for this hope, they are willing to work and struggle. a€| As Li Changyu and Song Zan were on their way to meet the emperor, Lu Yuan also received another piece of good news. The renowned Liang general Yan Yunqing, who was originally leading his troops in Shanyang County and clashing with Qingxuanzi, upon receiving the news that Great Liang city had fallen and the emperor of Liang perished, withdrew his troops overnight from Shanyang County, not daring to linger for a moment longer, for fear of being caught between attacks from Chu forces in Liang County. Qingxuanzi had long been aware of the situation in Great Liang and was prepared, detecting Yan Yunqing¡¯s movements in advance. So when the Liang forces were withdrawing, he led an ambush to intercept them. The five hundred thousand strong army of Shanyang County of Liang could not anticipate this and suffered a crushing defeat during the retreat, with tens of thousands killed. The remainder of the Liang forces, who had not withdrawn, were tightly entangled by the Chu army, struggling to retreat safely. Now, about four hundred thousand Liang soldiers are trapped in Shanyang County, with Yan Yunqing leading them in a desperate struggle, seeking an opportunity to withdraw. However, Shanyang County is not entirely encircled, as the main army only controls the west and south of the county, while The North and the east remain under the control of Liang and Xu State. ¡°` Chapter 1073 - Chapter 1073 Chapter 437 Prosperity, Rendezvous_3 ?Chapter 1073: Chapter 437: Prosperity, Rendezvous_3 Chapter 1073: Chapter 437: Prosperity, Rendezvous_3 So, if the four hundred thousand Liang troops really wanted to retreat, they could. However, the cost of retreating would be difficult to predict. After all, Qingxuanzi, with hundreds of thousands of Chu troops, was following behind. If you choose to defend a city or line up for battle with the Chu army, then perhaps you wouldn¡¯t be at a disadvantage. But if you forsake these advantages and opt to flee in panic, the Chu army certainly won¡¯t miss the opportunity to kick someone when they¡¯re down. Pursuing and annihilating the four hundred thousand Liang troops along the way would be nothing extraordinary. Hadn¡¯t Yan Yunqing suffered a heavy loss previously when he tried to retreat in secret? Thousands of men were lost on the retreat, offering countless merits to the Chu army for nothing. Therefore, a direct retreat is unlikely. According to Qingxuanzi¡¯s analysis, it¡¯s more likely that Yan Yunqing intended to leave some troops behind to cover the rear. They would secure the retreat path first, and after the main forces had withdrawn, the rearguard would then escape. Following this method, the Liang army could still manage to retreat with around two hundred thousand men. Although this is only half of the peak strength of five hundred thousand men, such a loss in a major defeat is already quite good. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? What more could one hope for? Lu Yuan was also quite satisfied with this outcome. Having captured half of the Liang army in Shanyang County was quite an achievement. After all, his main focus was not on Shanyang County. This protruding part of the Liang territory was bound to be abandoned, and the Chu army was simply waiting to take it over. There was no need to waste too much manpower on it. Compared to this, Lu Yuan would rather see the eastern expeditionary army focus on the eastern counties of Yingling and Jiaodong. In mid-August, the Liang messenger, who had hurried back after reaching an agreement with the Chu State, finally returned to Zhuxu City in Zheng Kingdom. Then, he submitted the results of the peace talks between the two countries to the emperor of Zheng. Despite feeling extremely aggrieved by Lu Yuan¡¯s harsh demands, given the dire situation facing Zheng, the Zheng emperor accepted the terms. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? So after fulfilling the treaty and completing the handover of Haiyang Prefecture to the Chu State, and seeing the Chu army actually withdrawing and ceasing hostilities, on the seventeenth of August in the forty-second year of the Shenwu era, Emperor Zheng Lian officially passed the throne to the Crown Prince, announcing his abdication. The new Crown Prince, upon assuming the throne, immediately dispatched a messenger to send his eldest legitimate son to the Chu State as a hostage. After Zheng complied with all the conditions set by Chu, the original Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp began restructuring. Leaving nine hundred thousand troops to garrison the four prefectures of Yuzhou, Huang Xuan reorganized the Yangxia Expeditionary Army, leading the remaining six hundred thousand troops towards Jiaodong County. Yet, there were also seven hundred thousand Liang troops stationed in Jiaodong County. Although Huang Xuan¡¯s troops were somewhat more elite, and they had more Inborn Grandmasters, the Liang forces held a defensive advantage that was sufficient to offset these differences. So, with the gap being small, the numerically superior Liang army naturally gained the advantage on the Jiaodong battlefield. Although Huang Xuan¡¯s Yangxia Camp made some headway there, it only managed to capture several prefectures and counties, far from making a true breakthrough, let alone penetrating deeper into the county. It stands to reason. Expecting to conquer an entire county with six hundred thousand men, especially when the county was backed by the continuous support of the Liang people, really was a pipe dream. So, after getting the details, Lu Yuan ordered that the captured soldiers and defectors from Zheng, totaling over seven hundred thousand, be transferred to Jiaodong County. With this cannon fodder reinforcement, they could, at least, help Huang Xuan achieve some battle results. At the very least, securing the southern coastal region of Jiaodong County and achieving a breakthrough to the east shouldn¡¯t pose much of a problem. As long as this was accomplished, the mission of the Yangxia Camp would be deemed complete. With no issues left for Huang Xuan, what remained was for the Qing Xuan-led eastern expeditionary army. During this time, the eastern expeditionary army had also achieved quite a few battle results. Last month they captured Rencheng Prefecture entirely, and now they were about to seize Shanyang Countya€¡±an enormous gain indeed. However, compared to these victories, the true goal of this route was to break through to the east, connecting Yingling and Jiaodong counties, and join forces with the eastern Yangxia Camp, ensuring that the two routes met. This was originally the objective of last year¡¯s first Northern Expedition, but for various reasons, it was not fulfilled. The second Northern Expedition this year saw tremendous progress; not only did significant victories occur in the direction of Yuzhou, but Liang was also greatly weakened in Qingzhou. Especially after the great victory in Daliang, Liang had never recovered, losing its last active force. Now was the perfect time to seize the opportunity, capture Yingling, and meet with Huang Xuan in Jiaodong County. Therefore, after the end of the battle in Daliang, besides ordering Qingyu Zi to lead troops north to Dongping County, Lu Yuan left a force to defend Liang County and then allocated five hundred thousand troops to the eastern expeditionary army to take over the security of the areas under their control. The main forces of the eastern expeditionary army were then gathered together, amounting to eight hundred thousand men, who advanced eastward from Rencheng Prefecture into Yingling County. The Liang army defending Yingling County numbered only five hundred thousand, with just three Inborn Grandmasters among them. After years of continual warfare, Liang, which once had over seventy Inborn Grandmasters, had its foundation eroded away by constant battles. By the time of this year¡¯s second Northern Expedition, only forty-some Inborn remained in Liang. These Inborn Grandmasters were then concentrated in the three battle zones of Liang County, Shanyang County, and Jiaodong County. But now, these zones were either annihilated or under attack by the Chu army, leaving them unable to fend for themselves. Under such circumstances, other areas left with a garrison of Inborn Grandmasters were naturally very few. Yingling County was one such case. Thus, facing the onslaught of the eastern expeditionary army, although the county¡¯s defending troops were ample, they found themselves in a severe disadvantage regarding high-level combat strength. After just a few battles, the Liang army was thoroughly defeated, and the defenses to the east were breached. The Chu army was able to advance rapidly, penetrating into the heartland of Yingling County. In contrast, the local Liang defenders had no choice but to retreat northwards continually after successive defeats, voluntarily vacating the southern defensive lines as well as the prefectures and counties within. In just over ten days, the eastern expeditionary army had achieved its objective, breaking through all the way east to Jiaodong County. At this time, with the cannon fodder piling up, Huang Xuan had also managed to clear a path to the west. The two expeditionary armies successfully met at the border between the two counties. Chapter 1074 - Chapter 1074 Chapter 438 Talented, End of the War ?Chapter 1074: Chapter 438: Talented, End of the War Chapter 1074: Chapter 438: Talented, End of the War ¡°Minister Li Changyu (Song Zan), I come before Your Majesty.¡± Inside the imperial palace, Lu Yuan received the two Ministers who rushed over. ¡°Arise.¡± He looked at the two ministers, who stood before him with respectful expressions, and directly asked, ¡°You must both be clear about the reason I have summoned you this time.¡± Below, Li Changyu raised his head, speaking carefully, ¡°Your Majesty, I understand. It is for us, both of your servants, to stabilize Liang County and Great Liang, laying a solid foundation for the capital¡¯s relocation.¡± Lu Yuan nodded slightly, ¡°Exactly. It is for this matter. I have already considered relocating the Imperial Capital from Baling to Great Liang within the next two or three years. However, Great Liang was originally the land of the Liang people. Great Chu conquered this place, invading their homelands, killing their fathers and brothers. Our enmity with them can be said to be deep-seated. In this land, it is as if every person is an enemy.¡± ¡°To make such a place our foundation, and even more so the Jingji and Imperial Capital, is fundamentally inadequate.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Your great task is to rid Great Chu of these enemy people, carving out a royal paradise for me.¡± Hearing this, Li Changyu understood; the matter was indeed as he had guessed. However, Song Zan, hearing this, couldn¡¯t help asking cautiously, ¡°May I ask Your Majesty how we should go about this clearance?¡± Lu Yuan said indifferently, ¡°No other way, but through immigration.¡± Song Zan felt surprised and puzzled. Wasn¡¯t immigration exactly what they were already doing? How could that be considered clearance? Yet Li Changyu seemed thoughtful, as if he had guessed something. ¡°Move the Liang people of Great Liang and Liang County away, then move in the good people of Great Chu from Yangzhou. With them gone and us here, the entire Liang County will be cleansed, naturally becoming filled with good people and every county a joyful land.¡± Seeing that the two ministers still did not comprehend his intentions, Lu Yuan simply clarified, ¡°The moving of commoners from Great Chu, you don¡¯t need to worry about. The specific relocations will be handled by the respective authorities. You only need to manage the reception. But within Great Liang and the whole Liang County, there are still more than five million Liang people, who are temporarily difficult to assimilate. It would take decades to make them loyal. But in the present times, what time do I have to wait for their loyalty, one by one? Thus, to settle this once and for all, let¡¯s simply move all these people away. Fittingly, over there in Yuzhou, Great Chu has recently gained four counties, with a total population of only ten million people, which can be described as sparsely populated. Now, by moving these more than five million Liang people over, we would perfectly fill up the area, reviving some of the local spirit. What you need to do is, within the next two years, coordinate with the Immigration Bureau of the Ministry of Population to swiftly relocate all the Liang people from Great Liang and Liang County to Yuzhou. Meanwhile, after the Liang people are moved, promptly receive the immigrant Chu people and help them settle down as soon as possible. In the next two years, I will move another ten million people to Great Liang and Liang County for resettlement. Whether these immigrants can make a home here now depends entirely on you two. What do you say, do you have the confidence to do this well?¡± Li Changyu solemnly said, ¡°Your Majesty, I will devote myself completely to get the job done and will not dare to neglect it.¡± Song Zan also hurriedly said, ¡°Your servant is the same, I will not dare to delay.¡± Lu Yuan nodded slightly, then flipped through the governance strategies presented by the two, encouraging them, ¡°Since you have confidence, I am also relieved. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 I have reviewed your governance strategies, and overall there are no problems. Some minor flaws can be slowly corrected in the process, they aren¡¯t a significant concern. Handle this matter well for me, and becoming an official in the inner court will be just a matter of course. Both of you, strive hard.¡± ¡°Yes, thank you for Your Majesty¡¯s grace!¡± Li Changyu and Song Zan hurriedly bowed down to express their gratitude. ¡°Hmm, you may leave.¡± Lu Yuan waved his hand, dismissing the two. a€| After sending off Song Zan and Li Changyu, Lu Yuan continued to pick up another memorial and began to read. This was concerning the situations of officials taking up their posts in various places, submitted by the governors after their arrival. In the north of Central State, Chu had expanded to sixteen counties in one breath. To fill the vacancies of these regional officials, a massive mobilization of twenty thousand officials of all ranks was required just to barely fill these positions. During this period, countless officials were promoted and exceptionally appointed, achieving double or even triple promotions. Many scholars who had passed the juren or achieved the Scholar¡¯s Degree also took this opportunity to find an abundance of vacant positions, officially embarking on their bureaucratic careers. It could be said that through these two Northern Expeditions, everyone in Chu had benefited greatly. Ordinary citizens gained more living space, securing a ticket aboard the end-of-the-world Ark in this crumbling world. Those scholarly officials realized their longtime wishes, gained official positions, and entered the bureaucracy. The Jianghu heroes also followed the Chu army¡¯s footsteps, forcefully entered the north, pushing back the heroes of Central State, and took over their foundations of interest. They officially established sects in the north, securing their foothold. Even the merchants and traders managed to extend their business to various places in Central State, earning a significant amount of money and interests. One could say, except for those who had been defeated, everyone from top to bottom in Chu deeply profited from the nation¡¯s expansion. And under these interconnected interests, the entire nation of Chu, regarding the Northern Expedition, was unanimously supportive, devoted heart and soul. The nation¡¯s spirit was also more united than ever before. Moreover, with the capture of those defeated, the Qi Luck gathered around Lu Yuan had doubled since before the expedition. Chapter 1075 - Chapter 1075 Chapter 438 Talented, End of the War_2 ?Chapter 1075: Chapter 438: Talented, End of the War_2 Chapter 1075: Chapter 438: Talented, End of the War_2 ¡°` This is still only over half of Qingzhou. If he were to unify the entire Central State, it is projected that the Qi Luck could double on the existing basis. Even when the world becomes unified and a golden age arrives, after a period of rest and recovery, if the population experienced a surge, increasing three to fivefold, it wouldn¡¯t be impossible. In any case, the current Lu Yuan truly has a promising future; Immortal Method is within reach. ¡°However, this time, drawing away twenty thousand officials, although there are juren and Scholars to fill the gap, suddenly using up so many officials from the reserve force, the inside of the country is somewhat overwhelmed.¡± Setting aside the situation of the officials about to take office, Lu Yuan picked up the report from Baling. This was sent by Sun Siwen, who was in charge of the rear. After years of accumulation, especially more than thirty years of prosperity, Chu State¡¯s culture had exploded. Above the localities, one could say that it was a gathering of scholars and geniuses. However, no matter how plentiful the talents, the original scale of Chu State was still apparent. The total population was merely seventy million, and on this basis, no matter how much one cultivated talents, there would always be a limit. According to statistics, before the Northern Expedition, the number of literate people in Chu State, those who had passed the child student examinations, totaled only around two hundred thousand. Among them, those with the title of Scholar or higher were only around forty to fifty thousand. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï Now, half of these forty to fifty thousand have been drawn away, many of whom are elites. Of the remaining half, the quality is mixed, and those who are truly capable might amount to less than ten thousand. A mere ten thousand people, even if fully utilized, would barely be enough to fill the vacancies in the remaining half of Qingzhou. The other areas, such as the two-thirds of Yuzhou that Chu State did not control, if conquered later, would then face a shortage of officials. This Northern Expedition, after all, is akin to a snake swallowing an elephant. Chu State was almost like taking a breath and annexing a territory three times the size of its own, and one can imagine the burden and pressure involved. The military aspect is still manageable; with the strength of the Chu army, they could just roll over the opposition. But once the territory is conquered, it also needs to be governed. In this regard, it is not something that can be handled by mere fighting and killing. Without enough talent, even if territories are taken, they would end up in chaos in the end. Not only would they fail to provide any productive interest, but they would also become a burden, and that would be undesirable. ¡°Once Central State is taken down, subsequent territories like Yangzhou will also have to be gradually abandoned; from here, over ten thousand officials could be reassigned. Moreover, after seizing Central State, it would not be possible to eliminate all the old forces; inevitably, some remnants of various countries will need to be incorporated into the Chu State system. At that time, several thousand official positions can be offered to unite people¡¯s hearts and minds. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Combining these two aspects, it should be possible to squeeze out another twenty thousand officials, and the final issue with officials should be solvable.¡± Lu Yuan calculated his family¡¯s resources carefully and finally breathed a sigh of relief. Not bad. After decades of accumulation, the family foundation was finally rich enough to withstand such expansion. ¡°If there is no shortage of talent, it seems that next year¡¯s third Northern Expedition could take bigger steps.¡± Thinking thus, he began to write a reply to Sun Siwen. To make big strides, relying on himself alone would not be sufficient; he also needed the cooperation of his friend in the rear. a€| As Lu Yuan stayed in the larger city of Liang, Chu¡¯s second Northern Expedition gradually entered its final phase. Time had already progressed into late autumn, and soon, the first heavy snowfall would come, heralding the onset of winter. Given the current weather, once winter arrived, the chill beyond one¡¯s home would be life-threatening; it would be impossible for people to remain outdoors for extended periods. Therefore, military campaigns would naturally be unable to continue. So, every winter, although many people lose their lives, it is also a rare respite during a year of chaos for everyone. At such a time, it would naturally be impossible for the Chu army to launch any large-scale operations or start new conflicts. Therefore, after autumn, the military actions of the Chu army were merely a continuation of what had been done previously. In August, the eastern expeditionary force met up with the Yangxia Expeditionary Army, and after combining forces, quickly stabilized the occupied areas of Yingling and the southern parts of Jiaodong counties. They used the coastal area of the south as a base and slowly explored northward expansion. However, after taking over this territory, the two expeditionary forces were already at their limits. The newly occupied territories required a large number of troops for surveillance, and the spread of forces throughout the prefectures and counties directly took away half the manpower of the two expeditionary armies. Despite the relatively smooth progress of the breakthroughs from both sides, there were nonetheless losses. Breaking through two counties could not avoid its toll. Over four hundred thousand lives were lost along the way to the rendezvous. The only consolation was that the majority of the dead were prisoners from Zheng Kingdom; the real casualties from Chu people were only around a hundred thousand. Thus, the main forces of both expeditionary armies remained intact. However, after fighting continuously for over half a year, even the elite Chu army was both physically and mentally exhausted, and everyone was tired of it. Therefore, after detecting changes in the regional sentiment, Qing Xuanzi and Huang Xuan, the two leaders, decisively stopped large-scale military operations. Apart from sending small groups of troops still capable of further action to continue infiltrating north, the bulk of the forces rested in the rear. They settled down to consolidate local security and rotated for rest. For this year, the eastern and Yangxia expeditionary armies would essentially remain as such. ¡°` Chapter 1076 - Chapter 1076 Chapter 438 Talented, End of the War_3 ?Chapter 1076: Chapter 438: Talented, End of the War_3 Chapter 1076: Chapter 438: Talented, End of the War_3 ¡­ The situation in the eastern part of Qingzhou was stabilizing, becoming clearer. In the western part of Qingzhou, on the Dongjun battlefield, the western military expedition had also achieved significant victories. In July, after receiving the 500,000 Wei soldiers who had surrendered and were newly allotted by Lu Yuan, and the 500,000-strong army from the Heyang military expedition, Huang Lin¡¯s western military expedition grew significantly in strength, with a force reaching three million strong. The State of Zhao also concentrated all its domestic military strength and crossed the river to go south, with an army of 3.7 million, to have a decisive battle with the State of Chu in Dongjun. Between July and August, the two armies engaged in extremely brutal back-and-forth seesaw warfare on the front lines of Liang City, Baima, Wat County, and even Diqiu. Nearly every day, on various fronts, major battles involving tens of thousands erupted. And surrounding several key cities, the two armies fought so fiercely that it was dark as night, regardless of the time of day. No one knew how many corpses had fallen on the path to siege the cities, as countless lost souls piled up, nearly filling the defensive moats. Zhao fought desperately to keep Dongjun. Similarly, Chu spared no expense to take Dongjun. The two armies, each with a strong belief, waged the most cruel war around the same target. But in the end, the Chu army was more elite, and there were more Inborn Grandmasters. Even before the battle began, they had gained a greater advantage. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï So, after fighting for more than a month, relying on a higher quality of soldiers and the emergence of masters, Chu finally gained the upper hand over the Zhao army in mid-August. By the beginning of September, after half a month of constant accumulation, the original advantage grew larger and larger. Finally, on the seventh day of September, during a decisive battle in Liang City, Huang Lin led the army to crush the old general Chen Tai of Zhao, annihilating a million of Zhao¡¯s troops in one fell swoop. After this battle around Liang City, no more Zhao banners remained. Within Dongjun, after the main force of Liang City was annihilated, the remaining Zhao troops numbered only 1.2 to 1.3 million, mostly old and weak, no longer able to contend with the Chu army. So, upon receiving the news of the disastrous defeat at Liang City, the Zhao army that was still desperately resisting in the area of Diqiu City started withdrawing that very night. Throughout Dongjun, the Zhao troops either surrendered or fled for their lives. All the local prefectures and counties also surrendered immediately, no longer daring to resist. Huang Lin was now busy receiving the cities of Dongjun and dispatching troops to pursue the Zhao army, getting wrapped up in the post-war cleanup. The land of Dongjun was thus secured. After this disastrous defeat, Zhao had lost over two million of its main force in one go. Adding the previous losses, it had lost three million soldiers in this second northern expedition by Chu in Dongjun alone. Although there were still over a million Zhao troops left, they were but old, weak, and sickly, and it was a problem how many could escape back to Hebei under the pursuit of the Chu army. Zhao was essentially beaten to a pulp. In the future, not to mention moving southwards, whether it could hold on to its own statehood in the face of invasions from the northern tribes of Hebei was already a problem. In Ji Province, there were still five to six million southern migrating tribes that had not been eradicated by Zhao. The conflicts between these two powers were numerous. Now that Zhao was in decline, how could the tribes of Ji Province miss this excellent opportunity to kick them while they¡¯re down? For the foreseeable future, Zhao would have no energy to deal with anything else. ¡­ Apart from Dongjun, Chu had another battlefield in the west. That was the military expedition in Hanzhong within Guannei Province. Compared to Henan and Nanyang, which had been dealt heavy blows by Chu and were stunned, unable to react promptly, The main force of Wei Country was concentrated in Guannei and Shuofang, which, although they were the first areas to be attacked by Chu¡¯s northern expedition, maintained a not insignificant initiative because Shuofang¡¯s main force was still present. From last year to this year, in the face of two northern expeditions, Wei¡¯s forces on the Guannei battlefield went back and forth with the Hanzhong military expedition. The troops of the Hanzhong military expedition amounted to about two million. After several reinforcements, the Wei troops in Guannei Province reached 1.5 million and also held the advantage of defense. Therefore, after several battles, Huang Xin¡¯s Hanzhong military expedition was at an impasse with the Wei forces. The two sides fought several times, and the Chu army, because of heavy losses, became incapable of launching further attacks. The stalemate continued between both sides. Fortunately, by July of this year, the situation finally took a turn for the better. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï The main force toured Central State and then looked around and at last noticed the Hanzhong military expedition, which had always been overlooked. After the Heyang military expedition entered a phase of recuperation, a wave of the hand dispatched 500,000 troops to support. After considering the reinforcements that had arrived, Huang Xin decided not to let them join the battlefield of Guannei Province directly. Instead, he made a move to directly invade Wei¡¯s only remaining rear territory, that is, Shuofang Province. Compared to Guannei Province, which had become a battlefield for two years and was almost ruined, Wei Country had made Shuofang its new capital and had begun to carefully manage it as a rear base. Over the past two years, by continuously recruiting tribes from Yan State and gathering refugees from Guannei Province, Shuofang had gradually flourished, its population growing from the original two million to over three million. It could be said that this place had become the core of Wei Country. Those 500,000 reinforcements, invading Guannei Province, was merely a fuel-to-fire tactic, something that Wei paid no mind to. But if it invaded Shuofang Province, then it was going straight for the enemy¡¯s lifeblood. Thus, upon seeing this large Chu army force enter Shuofang Province, Wei, having its vital spot squeezed, immediately lost its footing. It directly abandoned many cities and strongholds in Guannei Province, urgently diverting a contingent of troops to block the advance in Shuofang Province. Huang Xin then took this opportunity to smoothly take over those abandoned Wei cities, expanding his territory in Guannei Province. Then, concentrate the forces to launch a strong attack on the remaining Wei cities. Eventually, after more than a month of effort, by the end of September, just before the onset of winter, Chang¡¯an City was captured, and the whole of Guannei Province was taken. And the reinforcements that had invaded Shuofang Province, after wreaking havoc in the area, pillaged over 300,000 Wei citizens and returned to Guannei Province. The battle with Wei Country had temporarily reached a conclusion. And as this war ended, at the end of September, the first heavy snow of the coming winter fell, bringing a respite to the Nine Provinces, which had been mired in chaos for a year. ¡­ Chapter 1077 - Chapter 1077 Chapter 439 Defend the West, Secure the East ?Chapter 1077: Chapter 439: Defend the West, Secure the East Chapter 1077: Chapter 439: Defend the West, Secure the East The cold winter pierces to the bone as the north wind howls fiercely. With the arrival of early winter snow, a white shroud envelops heaven and earth. Under the life-threatening cold, everyone tries to minimize going out and instead huddles at home, warming up by the stove. The Liang people, originally agitated by the immigrating Chu State and seeing their own interests encroached upon, also retracted their restlessness under the freezing cold. ¡°This winter, many people in the city will freeze to death,¡± Lu Yuan said, standing with his hands behind his back at the Zhengyang Gate of the imperial palace, gazing out at the vast expanse of white that was Liang city. This year¡¯s siege had left various supplies in the city of Liang severely scarce. After the Chu army captured the city, they indeed opened the gates and sent in a considerable amount of supplies. But how much can be transported in just over a month? Moreover, with the massive influx of Chu immigrants, these fellow countrymen naturally had to be taken care of first, thus they garnered many benefits in the distribution of supplies. As a result, the Liang people, whose shares were deducted, faced shortages in lifesaving supplies such as grain, clothing, and firewood. This winter, without enough cold-resistant supplies, and without receiving aid, certainly a large number of them will freeze or starve to death. A rough estimate suggests at least thirty to fifty thousand would perish. ¡°As the harsh winter rages and snowstorms blanket the skies, all inhabitants of the Nine Provinces and Ten Domain have been engaged in a struggle for survival determined by natural selection, starting with the climatic shift forty years ago. The people of Liang have lost in this battle; merely freezing to death is, in fact, their fortune. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï If it were the far north steppes, where would a winter pass without hundreds of thousands dying? That is true cruelty,¡± the emperor reflected with a sigh. Standing beside him, a middle-aged man clad in a third-rank crimson official robe commented upon hearing the emperor¡¯s words. ¡°Indeed, survival of the fittest,¡± Lu Yuan replied with a smile, turning to the man and saying, ¡°Gao Qing, the reason I¡¯m appointing you to serve in Guannei Jun is precisely for this reason. I want you to relocate the majority of the populace there to Henan Jun within the next year, ensuring their proper settlement. As for Guannei Jun, leave behind a million civilians, each to be settled in various fortified cities. Have them cultivate the land around these cities, farming grain to fulfill the military needs of the troops in Guannei. Do this well, and upon your return, you will be the Vice Minister of Revenue.¡± The man before him was Gao Mingtao, the newly promoted governor of Guannei Jun and a high-ranking official of Chu equivalent to a third-rank grand commissioner. ¡°Your Majesty, I understand and shall not fail your expectations,¡± responded Gao Mingtao promptly after hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s instructions. Previously, he was but the director of the Immigration Bureau under the Ministry of Revenue. Although he managed the affairs of immigration, a bureau director held only an office of the third rank. And from there upward, the positions were those of the left and right Vice Ministers and then a head Minister. Gao Mingtao was selected by Lu Yuan because of his skilled management of immigration affairsa€¡±capable of handling the tasks set before him adeptly. Thus, he was promoted by one level to the governorship of a province. And this was not the limit. If he managed the affairs well after going to Guannei Jun, he could be promoted yet again, becoming one of the two deputies under a head Minister, stepping half into the empire¡¯s high echelons. Taking this step would mean a vast and promising future, with real chances of entering the cabinet and becoming a Chancellor in the future. With such a prospect before him, how could Gao Mingtao not be thrilled? ¡°It is good that you understand. I have faith in your abilities, that you can manage the affairs of Guannei well and not disappoint me,¡± Lu Yuan expressed his satisfaction with a nod. After the victory of the Northern Expedition this year and the pacification of Yong, Qing, and Yu provinces, the situation of Chu country became unprecedentedly favorable. On this foundation, Lu Yuan naturally sought to seize the opportunity to commence the long-contemplated plan of reducing the military and conserving resources. To achieve this, it was necessary to make some adjustments to the current strategies. After careful deliberation, he formulated a strategic plan: defend the west, stabilize the east, and break through the middle. That is, in the west toward Yong state, which is to say Guannei Jun, a defensive posture would be adopted. No longer pursuing offensives, but switching to defense, with a focus on guarding against remnants of Wei in the north and the Western region foreign tribes in the west. Guannei Jun would become a fortress, a colossal line of defense constructed to shield Chu¡¯s western borders and protect the prosperous counties such as He Nei and Nanyang behind it. For this, the role of Guannei Jun had to be redefined. Chu needed to relocate the citizens of Guannei Jun, turning it into an empty military stronghold similar to Helong, to isolate the Wei people to the north and the Western region foreign tribes to the west. In the future, this place would only have soldiers and farmers a€¡° the killers and the growers. Soldiers for defense, farmers for crops. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The entire defense line being self-sufficient would greatly alleviate Chu¡¯s logistical strain. Plus, with the network of key city strongholds built by Wei around Chang¡¯an at its core, already established, Chu¡¯s forces would only need minor modifications to create an effective line of fortifications, saving considerable effort and resources. Just by using the fortresses available, Lu Yuan could station about eight hundred thousand troops here and place around ten Inborn Grandmasters to turn the entire western border into an impenetrable barrier. Even if enemy forces, a million strong, were to attack, they would be thoroughly repelled, gaining no advantage. With a million civilians settled here as well, they could cultivate tens of millions of acres of fertile land. Benefiting from Guannei Jun¡¯s richness and over a thousand years of careful cultivation by Zhou and Wei, the region already boasted an excellent agricultural foundation. With these people tilling the land, the grain produced would suffice for the needs of a million-strong army. Chapter 1078 - Chapter 1078 Chapter 439 Defend the West, Secure the East_2 ?Chapter 1078: Chapter 439: Defend the West, Secure the East_2 Chapter 1078: Chapter 439: Defend the West, Secure the East_2 When the time comes, apart from needing to provide some military supplies such as arrows, bows, crossbows, swords, spears, helmets, and armor, the Chu State¡¯s heartland and rear will be able to supply the other necessary provisions locally. This significantly reduces the pressure on logistics by over ninety percent, which can be said to be extremely convenient. How could Lu Yuan not be attentive to such a beneficial matter? Gao Mingtao was meticulously selected by him to accomplish this task; upon completion, he will return for a promotion. A reward so substantial is naturally meant to ensure that this person will work with all his heart and effort, cooperating with the recently reorganized Yongzhou Camp led by Huang Xin, to get this job done well for himself. Looking at it now, the effects seem to be quite good. This capable subordinate of Lu Yuan¡¯s has been inspired with a fighting spirit and confidence; with these blessings, it seems that he will soon be able to take care of this matter. ¡®Now, we just need to wait for the next year to arrive, and the Yongzhou Defense Line can begin to be established.¡¯ After giving guidance, Lu Yuan thought to himself as he allowed Gao Mingtao to leave. However, he quickly shifted his focus away from this matter. With Huang Xin in charge of Yongzhou and a capable officer to assist him, as long as they don¡¯t make mistakes, there shouldn¡¯t be any problems. Moreover, the Chu State is now formally engaged in the struggle for supremacy in Central State, and the matters involved are not limited to Yongzhou alone. The entire Nine Provinces are the Chu State¡¯s target. The Western Defense Strategy is more or less set in stone. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 As a result, Lu Yuan turned his attention to the Eastern Stability Strategy. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? Compared to the Western front, which only requires the construction of defenses, land reclamation, and garrisoning troops for a purely defensive stance, the Eastern battlefield in Yu State for Chu is undoubtedly much more complex. ¡®Eastern Stability,¡¯ as its name suggests, indicates that stabilizing the current situation in the East is the priority. So, what is the current situation in Yu State? The Chu Army occupies the four southern counties of Yu State, the Tang Kingdom¡¯s massive army is marching southward, actively engaging in fierce battles with Zheng and Jin, and beside them Xu State is showing signs of eagerness to join the fray. Aside from the regions controlled by Chu, the entire Yu State has already become a chaotic mess. From the current situation, after a year of recuperation, Tang¡¯s strength remains very formidable. With its thirty million population and two million soldiers, it faces the now destitute Zheng Kingdom and a weakened Jin Country without any hesitation or fear, even holding the upper hand. After all, the combined population of Zheng and Jin doesn¡¯t exceed seventeen million, and although their current military force seems largea€¡±surpassing Tang by several hundred thousanda€¡±it has been hastily conscripted from Zheng¡¯s citizenry. They only have an appearance of overwhelming force. But in reality, when confronted with a truly strong army, their true foundation is exposed. Facing Tang¡¯s elite Southern Expedition Army of a million soldiers, Zheng and Jin, despite having assembled two million troops to resist, are still retreating steadily on the frontline. The gap in underlying strength between the old hegemon and the minor hegemon is fully displayed at this moment. However, behind Zheng and Jin, there is Xu State standing by. Although Xu State¡¯s power falls short compared to Tang, it is still considered a veteran major power on the same level; its strength is not to be underestimated. If Zheng and Jin truly can¡¯t hold on anymore, Xu State will certainly not stand idly by and will inevitably send troops to their aid. At that point, facing a triple threat, how Tang ends up is hard to predict. It might even suffer another disastrous defeat. If Tang were defeated, that would not be a positive development for the Chu State. Without Tang to hold them at bay, the current three states in Yua€¡±Xu, Jin, and Zhenga€¡±would be able to focus entirely on dealing with Chu, which has extended its reach into Yu and ambitiously seeks expansion at every turn. Tang might even become a vassal to Xu after its defeat, similar to Zheng and Jin, turning into a ¡®little brother¡¯ to Xu. Then, an alliance led by Xu would emerge on the lands of Yu. The situation would mirror the coalition led by Wei Country, with Zhao and Xu States banding together to fight Liang; only this time the coalition would consist of Xu, Tang, Zheng, and Jin against Chu. Facing a coalition of four major powers, even Lu Yuan would find it somewhat burdensome and would headache. Therefore, preferably, this scenario should not unfold. Tang cannot afford to lose, or at least, cannot afford to lose so badly that it becomes a vassal to Xua€¡±that is a baseline. At the same time, Tang also cannot win. Because if Tang were to win, it would sweep through Yu State. What would then emerge is not an alliance led by Xu but rather a coalition in which Tang envelops the other three states of Yu to lead an offensive against Chu. Regardless of which side triumphs, neither outcome is favorable for Chu. The best scenario would be for both sides to be locked in a stalemate, exhausting each other, leading to mutual defeat. However, achieving this balance is far from easy. It requires highly sophisticated balancing acts, diplomatic maneuvers, timely and extensive information networks, acute judgment of the situation, and a formidable military intervention capability, among other skills. Even Lu Yuan dare not claim to be capable of executing all these perfectly. Thus, for matters in Yu State, he can only do his best and leave the rest to fortune. Still, while fortune is a factor, it is essential to possess the necessary strength and equipment. Fortunately, on the Eastern frontier battlefield, Huang Lin has just achieved a great victory, annihilating more than two million Zhao troops and thoroughly crippling Zhao Country. For the next ten years, and perhaps even for a decade in Northern Hebei¡¯s Ji Province, no power will be able to pose a threat to Henan. Chapter 1079 - Chapter 1079 Chapter 439 Defend the West, Secure the East_3 ?Chapter 1079: Chapter 439: Defend the West, Secure the East_3 Chapter 1079: Chapter 439: Defend the West, Secure the East_3 The military pressure on Henan Prefecture and Dong Prefecture, which are adjacent to Ji Province, was also greatly relieved. The large number of troops previously stationed in these two prefectures had naturally become unnecessary and could be reduced to a certain extent. Taking advantage of this opportunity, Lu Yuan directly disbanded the Western Route Army and retracted the troops under Huang Lin¡¯s command, as well as the many Inborn Grandmasters including himself, back into his hands. Not only the Western Route Army, but Qingyunzi¡¯s Heyang Expeditionary Army was also conveniently disbanded. The troops from the disbanded armies, including the Inborn, were all incorporated under the Middle Route Army¡¯s command. As for the defense and public safety of Henan, Nanyang, and Dong Prefecture after the disbandment of the two armies, it was transferred to the concurrently established local Prefectures and Counties¡¯ soldiers. Moreover, since Henan Prefecture and Dong Prefecture were considered borderlands, aside from their local troops, an additional two hundred thousand troops and five Inborn Masters were dispatched to set up a Northern Route Army. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï Huang Lin was appointed as the Commander, tasked with keeping vigilance against enemies from Hebei. Although it was confirmed that Hebei posed no threat, Lu Yuan, adhering to the principle that caution never led to trouble, still strengthened the defenses of these two prefectures. After all, to him, four hundred thousand troops and ten Inborn Masters were just a small portion. Compared to the entire force of the Northern Expedition, they were not worth mentioning at all. Moreover, these two prefectures had only just been pacified, and now with large-scale immigration underway, it was a period of continual unrest locally, so a significant military presence was indeed required to forcefully suppress it. Thinking it over, it didn¡¯t seem like much. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï With the disbandment of the Heyang and Western Route armies, Lu Yuan suddenly had an additional one and a half million troops at his disposal. Adding on the reduced forces from the Yongzhou Camp, he gained around another million troops. In total, that amounted to two and a half million troops. Lu Yuan then conducted a reorganization, retaining one million regular soldiers and sending back the remaining one and a half million civilian workers. After the great victories over Zhao Country and Wei Country, in Dong Prefecture and the battlefields within Guannei, Chu State captured approximately one million seven hundred thousand surrendered soldiers and prisoners, thus suddenly enriching the numbers of disposable troops at hand. In these circumstances, there was naturally no need to retain those civilian workers who had already been conscripted for one or two years, who were now causing trouble amongst their fellow citizens. Not only the three Western armies underwent disbandment and reorganization, but Lu Yuan¡¯s directly controlled Middle Route Army also underwent reorganization. The Middle Route Army originally had three million troops, including soldiers, civilian workers, and prisoners. After the reorganization, Lu Yuan kept one million five hundred thousand soldiers and five hundred thousand prisoners. The remaining one million civilian workers were sent back to their hometowns. The Eastern Route Army and Yangxia Expeditionary Army, which had already rendezvoused in the east, were also restructured into the new Southern Route Army, commanded by Huang Xuan, consisting of one million five hundred thousand soldiers and two hundred thousand prisoners. An additional one million or so civilian workers were disbanded and sent back. The Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp also underwent reorganization, and after selecting the best to replenish its forces, hurriedly withdrew the remainder, who were mostly infirm, leaving around five hundred thousand soldiers. This level of military strength was definitely insufficient to complete the Eastern Stability strategy that Lu Yuan had planned. Therefore, after reorganizing the Yuzhou Camp, Lu Yuan appointed Qingyunzi, who had just been released from commanding the Heyang Camp, as the new Commander of the Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp. He then led the one million freshly reorganized soldiers from the disbanded Heyang and Western Route armies to Yuzhou to take up their new posts. After this reinforcement, the bolstered Yuzhou Camp now had one million five hundred thousand soldiers, a force not weaker than any long-established hegemonic country, and was fully able to intervene in the military situation of Yuzhou. The one million seven hundred thousand prisoners left from the two disbanded armies were added to the Middle Route Army. Thus, after a series of reorganizations, Chu State was left with five expeditionary armies. They were the Yongzhou Camp, commanded by Huang Xin, with eight hundred thousand soldiers and ten Inborn Masters. The Northern Route Army, commanded by Huang Lin, with four hundred thousand soldiers and ten Inborn Masters. The Southern Route Army, commanded by Huang Xuan, with one million five hundred thousand soldiers, two hundred thousand captured soldiers, and thirty Inborn Masters. The Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp, commanded by Qingyunzi, with one million five hundred thousand soldiers and twenty Inborn Masters. The Middle Route Army, led by Lu Yuan, with one million five hundred thousand soldiers, two million two hundred thousand prisoners, and thirty Inborn Masters. In addition, the various prefectures of Central State that had been acquired during Chu¡¯s Northern Expedition each had their defenses arranged with thirty thousand local Prefecture and County soldiers, as well as an Inborn Grandmaster serving as the local Commandant responsible for public safety. All these local forces summed up to four hundred eighty thousand troops and sixteen Inborn Masters. In total, including the ready-to-deploy forces, Chu Country had six hundred eighteen thousand soldiers, two million four hundred thousand prisoners, and one hundred sixteen Inborn Grandmasters spread across the entire territory of Northern Central State and Jiangbei. Meanwhile, in its old home of Yangzhou in the south of the river, Chu also had two million newly trained Prefecture and County soldiers and twenty-one Inborn Grandmasters. One could say that even after a series of cuts and reorganizations, the remaining military strength of Chu was still the envy of the world, unmatched by any other nation. Although the total number of Chu¡¯s troops had directly decreased by ten million from the original eighteen million after this downsizing and reorganization, Chu¡¯s combat power had not diminished. On the contrary, it had increased significantly. It was as if fingers spread apart were now clenched into a tight fist, not only stronger by leaps and bounds, but also more formidable and terrifying. In contrast, Chu¡¯s enemies, after suffering heavy blows from two Northern Expeditions, had greatly weakened compared to before the expeditions, each of them becoming frail and weak, with several even on the verge of collapse. In such a state, a swing of this fist meant overturning adversaries, a scene of widespread misery. At this moment, looking around, Lu Yuan somewhat felt like he was punching an elderly home and kicking a kindergarten, an unmatched sense of loneliness. Of course, this thought was fleeting. Despite having gained a huge advantage, Lu Yuan, due to his prudence, would still deal with these already declining enemies with the utmost attention, delivering the severest of cruel blows. ¡°Now that I¡¯ve secured the west and stabilized the east, my Middle Route and Southern Route armies have also been accumulating strength. Next year, they will become the main battlegrounds for a central breakthrough. Not bad, not bad at all, I must continue to make an effort,¡± Lu Yuan mused as he looked at the spread-out map of the Nine Provinces, nodding with satisfaction at the well-positioned chess pieces. Chapter 1080 - Chapter 1080 Chapter 440 Xian An Mutiny ?Chapter 1080: Chapter 440 Xian An Mutiny Chapter 1080: Chapter 440 Xian An Mutiny Donglai Prefecture, Xian¡¯an City. The bright red blood had soaked through the pristine white snow, leaving behind embers that emitted black smoke. The clash of armor and weapons echoed through the streets as a team of fierce soldiers marched by. Occasional faint screams were barely perceptible amidst the cruel winter wind, making it all the more harsh. In front of the city¡¯s most prominent mansion, warriors in Qing armor had it thoroughly besieged, with the main gate already breached. Countless warriors poured in, followed by a burst of intense screaming. There was also a multitude of thunderous blasts and various phenomena occurring. Clearly, Inborn Grandmasters were engaged in combat. However, the commotion did not last long; after a moment, silence fell inside. Clip-clop, clip-clop. Meanwhile, the sound of galloping hooves approached from down the street. A young man, clad in a Qing-colored royal robe, rode fiercely towards the gate and halted in front of it. He looked up at the plaque above the gate where the three golden characters for Xinwang Mansion were stained with blood, revealing an ominous aura. Soon, someone inside received the news, and a general in golden armor, disheveled and covered in blood, came out to greet him. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï ¡°Your Highness,¡± he said. The young man in the royal robe, upon seeing the golden-armored general emerge, also dismounted quickly and returned the salute, helping him to his feet. Taking the opportunity to size up the golden-armored general, he observed several damaged spots on his armor revealing terrible wounds from which blood oozed. From the blood that soaked half of his armor and his slightly pale complexion, it was not hard to see that the golden-armored general had sustained serious injuries in the recent battle. Seeing his condition, the young man felt a twinge of sorrow in his heart and said with concern, ¡°General He has worked hard this time. Without you, how could I have easily taken down my third brother? This is all thanks to General He¡¯s efforts.¡± The golden-armored general was named He Ba Yuan, the son of the famed former general of Zhou Country, He Basheng. As the son of a renowned general, He Ba Yuan had been the focus of attention in Zhou Country since his birth. His upbringing was marked by considerable nurturing from both the He family and the entire country. Therefore, by the age of thirty, with the aid of the Yuchan Tao, he successfully made his breakthrough to the Innate Realm. ?¦Ï¦Í¨À¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Right at that time, Wei Country invaded from the south, and Zhou Country was facing the threat of extinction. He Ba Yuan naturally followed in his father¡¯s footsteps, enlisted in the army, and began his military career on the battlefield. After a decade of warfare, He Ba Yuan evolved from an inexperienced youth to a seasoned fierce general, achieving several spectacular victories and starting to make a name for himself among the various nations. His innate talent was undoubtedly befitting of the son of a great general. Zhou Country thought so too. Thus, Zhou Country became even more devoted to nurturing He Ba Yuan. They entrusted him with great responsibilities and provided him with the scarce Divine Blood Elixirs to further his cultivation and aim for a breakthrough to the second realm of the Innate. The goal was to cultivate another great general to help reverse Zhou Country¡¯s declining fortunes. But as they say, man proposes, God disposes. Zhou Country, after all, was on its last legs, and despite channeling its limited resources into nurturing He Ba Yuan, they failed to make him break through to the second layer in the remaining time. Expecting him to turn the tide of Zhou Country¡¯s defeat thus became wishful thinking. So when the Zhou people were defeated and Wei soldiers captured Heyin City, thus completely annihilating Zhou Country, the still emerging He Ba Yuan inevitably shared the fate of his ruined country and began to wander. After several years of drifting, He Ba Yuan found his way to Liang Country, and after a few encounters, he joined the ranks of Zhou Country¡¯s sixth prince, now the enfeoffed King Rui of Liang, Mingyu, who had been courting and trying to win him over consistently, becoming one of his guest ministers. King Rui, Mingyu of Liang, greatly valued this former Zhou Country general who had sworn allegiance to him. The reason was simple: He Ba Yuan was a warrior of remarkable strength. After all, he was trained by a once dominant third-world power of Zhou Countrya€¡±even in its decline, that was the foundation it could offer. Although He Ba Yuan did not reach the Second Innate Realm before the premature end of Zhou Country, his years of training had taken him a significant step beyond the average grandmaster. He was just a thin veil away from the threshold of the second realm. He might as well have been considered a prime candidate for the Second Realm Grandmaster. Having such a strong warrior in his ranks, Mingyu, who aspired to the throne, naturally felt triumphant. Upon He Ba Yuan¡¯s arrival, Mingyu immediately showed great favor, bestowing titles and rewards liberally. After several months of interaction and confirming his loyalty, Mingyu came to regard him as a confidant and consulted with him on important matters. And He Ba Yuan reciprocated generously. Once he had gained favor in His Highness¡¯s eyes, he volunteered to help recruit other Inborn Grandmasters who had fled to Liang Country after Zhou Country¡¯s downfall. Mingyu placed great emphasis on this effort and gave his full support. Thus, within a few years, the five Inborn Grandmasters from Zhou Country who had come to Liang became the core strength of King Rui¡¯s faction, forming a small clique. Surrounded by old acquaintances from Zhou, He Ba Yuan¡¯s status under Mingyu¡¯s command grew increasingly important, and he was entrusted with greater responsibilities. To reward his merits and further nurture his own direct followers, upon attracting many compatriots from his former country, Mingyu began to emulate the old wisdom of Zhou Country by cultivating He Ba Yuan, readying him to become the sharpest weapon in his hand. Chapter 1081 - Chapter 1081 Chapter 440 Xian An Mutiny_2 ?Chapter 1081: Chapter 440 Xian An Mutiny_2 Chapter 1081: Chapter 440 Xian An Mutiny_2 With the support of King Rui, Zhou Country, which was still the dominant power in the world at the time, began to allocate many resources towards He Ba Yuan. The path to the Second Realm of the Inborn that he had previously interrupted was now unfolding once again. After ten or so years of perseverance, it was five years ago that he finally broke through the Inborn bottleneck and became a Grandmaster of the Second Realm, after taking dozens of elixirs bestowed by King Rui. However, at that time, Zhou Country was at its zenith, and the Zhou Emperor was strong and vigorous. As for abdication, it was uncertain how many years away that was. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Even though the Emperor¡¯s sons had already begun to vie for the throne, signaling the start of a struggle for succession, with the formidable Emperor still present, the dispute remained within a controlled scopea€¡±no one dared to act out of line. Under such circumstances, revealing He Ba Yuan¡¯s strength could indeed strengthen his bargaining chips, but the effect would merely be as such. On the contrary, this might provoke dread among those brothers who also harbored thoughts of succession, and it could even incur the dread of his father, the Emperor. After all, this was a Grandmaster of the Second Realm of the Inborn, equivalent to a reserve force general. To a country, the significance of one general is no less than that of a million Elite Army. If his father, in the name of the righteousness between Two Countries, directly asked Zhou Country for He Ba Yuan, would Zhou Mingyu give him up or not? Therefore, if one were to scrutinize this situation, it would provide little benefit while concealing great risks. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï In light of this, instead of immediately publicizing the news of He Ba Yuan¡¯s breakthrough, Zhou Mingyu decided to keep it as a hidden card, ready to unsheathe his sword at the critical moment and strike a fatal blow to the opponent. And that moment came swiftly. In August of this year, Great Liang fell, and his fathera€¡±the wise and mighty Emperor for the first half of his life, who had only suffered setbacks these past two yearsa€¡± was unable to escape during the siege by the Chu soldiers; he fell alongside Great Liang and was personally killed by the Chu Emperor. For Zhou Country, this was undoubtedly a thunderbolt from a clear sky, an unimaginable disaster. Zhou Country had forever lost a powerful Emperor, a Grandmaster of the Second Realm of the Inborn, and a key figure, causing the kingdom to fracture and no longer remain a unified entity. However, for King Rui like Zhou Mingyu, who aspired to inherit the throne, despite concerns about Zhou Country¡¯s waning national strength following his father¡¯s death, he could not mask his excitement and exhilaration. With the Emperor no longer above him, Zhou Country¡¯s position was left vacant. Previously, while his father, the Emperor, was young and strong, he had yet to confirm a Crown Prince; it seemed he wished to watch his sons struggle for succession and choose the most capable among them to lead Zhou Country forward in this era of great strife. This idea was certainly good. In such turmoil, an Emperor lacking ability is fundamentally unable to lead the country to survive and grow. But the fundamental prerequisite for all this was to ensure an orderly transition of the throne, to guarantee that the Emperor above would live long enough, safely enough. However, the sudden rise of Chu State broke all this. Before the Zhou Emperor could confirm his successor, he had already perished. With his death, the more than a dozen princes below all became eligible for the throne. Of course, this was only legal eligibility. In reality, over the years, the struggle for succession had already eliminated those who were ordinary, mediocre, and incapable. The ones who truly rose to prominence and were eligible for succession were just the Big Emperor Son, Tai Wang, the Third Son, Xin Wang, the Sixth Son, King Rui, and the Tenth Son, Cheng Wang. These four princes each had their own advantagesa€¡±either outstanding personal capabilities, powerful maternal families, or the favor of the Emperor. As for King Rui Zhou Mingyu amongst his brothers, he was actually the least prominent one. The Big Emperor Son being the eldest legitimate son, was legally the most suited to inherit the empire, hence some old-fashioned and conservative Ministers leaned towards supporting him for the throne. The Third Son¡¯s mother was the direct daughter of an Inborn General family within the country. Using this identity, the Third Son directly garnered the support of a bunch of Inborn Generals from Zhou¡¯s own soil. Then he married the direct daughter of a Wenwu giant within the country, thereby gaining the support of a large number of Civil official forces. With connections on both the literary and martial aspects, the faction of Xin Wang, the Third Son, became the largest factional force within Zhou Country. The Tenth Son, Cheng Wang, was favored by the Emperor simply because of his young age and his resemblance to the Zhou Emperor. In a system where imperial power is supreme, the support of the Emperor naturally gave the greatest advantage, so he, too, harbored some hope for succession. Leveraging this advantage, as well as the status of his mother coming from the Cauldron Sect, Cheng Wang also won the support of the Immortal Sect, boosting his strength instantly, and became a hot candidate for succession. It was only the Sixth Son, Zhou Mingyu, who slowly rose through his personal capabilities. Ultimately, by garnering support from He Ba Yuan and the remnants of Zhou Country behind him, he gained some presence and was seen as eligible for succession. However, his strength paled in comparison to his brothers¡¯. At its peak, Zhou Country had sixty or seventy Inborns, including several Grandmasters of the Second Realm. In contrast, Zhou Country¡¯s mere five first realm Grandmasters, albeit formidable, were insignificant compared to the entire strength of Zhou Country. The princes mentioned earlier, although they did not represent the entire Zhou Country, the part of Zhou Country¡¯s forces they representeda€¡±couldn¡¯t each bring out a dozen or so Inborns? Chapter 1082 - Chapter 1082 Chapter 440 Xian An Mutiny_3 ?Chapter 1082: Chapter 440 Xian An Mutiny_3 Chapter 1082: Chapter 440 Xian An Mutiny_3 Liang Mingyu, compared with his brothers, had no advantage at all, except that people like He Ba Yuan were willing to support him in the struggle for succession due to the circumstances of forming an external alliance. Inside Liang, no one really believed in him, let alone came to serve him. Even due to his participation in the succession contest, he had faced the hostility and suppression of several other popular princes, which had resulted in him enduring many a cold shoulder over the years. For example, the Innates of Liang, including He Ba Yuan, who certainly did not lack strength and were veterans of the battlefields, were never given key positions within Liang. Not to mention commanding the front-line armies and controlling military power. Even important official positions in the court and local government were out of their reach. It was only through Liang Mingyu¡¯s efforts that He Ba Yuan secured the position of Commandant for Donglai Prefecture, gaining control over thirty thousand county soldiers in the jurisdiction, which was some measure of military power. However, comparing this to the tens or even hundreds of thousands of soldiers under the control of other princes¡¯ supporters, these meager thirty thousand local troops seemed hardly worth mentioning. But last year, with the Northern Expedition of Chu State, Liang suffered a crushing defeat, and the six western prefectures were all lost to the Chu people in one fell swoop. The generals supporting the Third Prince, Xin Wang, were mostly from that area, so with the fall of the west, Xin Wang¡¯s influence was severely damaged, and many of the central figures of his faction, who were Innate Generals, fell during the first Northern Expedition by Chu. Hit by this blow, Xin Wang¡¯s power plummeted to the same level as Liang Mingyu¡¯s, greatly diminishing his hopes of winning the succession struggle. On the other hand, Liang Mingyu¡¯s side saw a turn in fortunes because He Ba Yuan became the Commandant for Donglai Prefecture when Tang forces invaded Qingzhou last year and launched an attack on Donglai Prefecture. As the defender in charge of Donglai Prefecture, He Ba Yuan resolutely resisted during this period, repelling Tang¡¯s assaults several times. He mobilized the local populace to form militias and arranged multiple defense lines, effectively halting the Tang army¡¯s invasion until Yan Yunqing¡¯s massive forces arrived to reinforce them. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï During this time, because of his outstanding performance, He Ba Yuan also received praise from Yan Yunqing, Liang¡¯s second most prominent general, who petitioned the Emperor on He Ba Yuan¡¯s behalf for a commendation. After the war, due to Yan Yunqing¡¯s support and because Liang indeed suffered heavy losses and urgently needed a large amount of fresh blood to bolster the army¡¯s strength, He Ba Yuan was promoted to the Chief Commissioner of Qingping, tasked with leading three hundred thousand Liang soldiers to defend against Tang State in the northeast. And other Innates from Zhou Country also took this opportunity to be promoted to positions such as Commandant of Donglai Prefecture, replacing He Ba Yuan, or they were assigned to the border areas of Qingping and Jiaodong, where they took charge of a portion of the army. The power of King Rui¡¯s party thus rose, now controlling an army of four or five hundred thousand. Of course, although Liang Mingyu¡¯s strength had increased, he still fell short when compared to the Big Emperor Son and the Tenth Emperor Son. The Big Emperor Son had deeply cultivated his power in Great Liang and could effectively command over a million soldiers from the vicinity on the grounds of righteousness. The Tenth Emperor Son, leveraging the power of his maternal family¡¯s Dan Ding Path, had a profound influence in Shanyang County, as well as the neighboring Jiaoxi, Rencheng, and Yingling prefectures. This area just happened to be under the control of Yan Yunqing, the commander of Liang¡¯s southern defense region. Therefore, nearly half of the nearly two million strong southern defense force could be considered under the Tenth Emperor Son¡¯s party. Even using their influence, those two million troops could be swayed and utilized to some extent by the opponent. Compared with these two, King Rui, the Sixth Emperor Son, still fell short by a significant margin. But isn¡¯t that unfortunate? This year, during Chu State¡¯s second Northern Expedition, Great Liang directly fell. Not only did the Emperor fail to escape, but the Big Emperor Son, Tai Wang, also perished in the city. The opponent¡¯s power that controlled a million-strong army was eradicated by the Chu army one by one. The party of Tai Wang was completely swept away by Chu State. ¡°` And the Cheng Wang, the tenth prince, found his greatest support in the Dan Ding Path located within Shanyang County. Cheng Wang¡¯s faction, which held the most influence in the southern defense zone, also suffered a major defeat in this year¡¯s campaign battle, losing over a million troops and horses to the eastern expeditionary army of Chu State. Not only did they lose Rencheng Prefecture, but they also handed over the old nest of the Dan Ding Path, Shanyang County, directly to Chu State. As for the Dan Ding Path, which harbored ill intentions and schemed against him from the beginning, Lu Yuan had little to no good impression. In the past, he even publicly tore his face with them, completely establishing enmity. After this Northern Expedition, unlike the Cang Long Way, they didn¡¯t have the sense to come and surrender eagerly. Thus, after conquering Shanyang County, Lu Yuan directly ordered his army to siege the Dan Ding Path, preparing to exterminate this Immortal Sect and awe the world. To show the remaining Immortal Sects the consequence of opposing Chu State. Faced with the iron-fisted assault of Chu State and having lost a large number of elite disciples in the two years of war, how could the Dan Ding Path possibly be an opponent? In the midst of continuous sieges, a great number of Dan Ding Path disciples were killed, with only a few elite disciples managing to escape and fully committing to the tenth prince. But without the Mountain Gate and having lost a large number of elites, even if those remaining were elite, how much strength could they possibly retain? Thus, in this Northern Expedition of Chu State, the powers of the Big Emperor Son and the tenth prince were utterly destroyed. Like the third prince, they were only left with a fraction of their strength. And the three biggest competitors were severely weakened by the greatest enemy of Liang. Looking back after, the largest remaining force, surprisingly, became that of the previously inconspicuous sixth prince, King Rui Liang Mingyu. Just at this moment, because Qingping County was handed over to Xu State, its thirty thousand defenders withdrew to the rear, preparing to move to Shanyang County. But before they could reach their new station, news came from the front that Big Liang had fallen and Rencheng Prefecture had been captured. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï So these three hundred thousand men could only temporarily stay in between Donglai and Jiaoxi Counties, therein solidifying the overall situation. After the remaining higher-ups of the two countries converged, they decided to rebuild the Imperial Capital in Xian¡¯an City, Donglai Prefecture, and re-establish the central court. The three hundred thousand soldiers under the control of He Ba Yuan suddenly became the Strongest strength in the central region. Even the county soldiers on the border of Jiaodong Prefecture behind Donglai Prefecture, where the new Emperor was located, had their military power controlled by King Rui¡¯s faction. How could Liang Mingyu, who had always struggled at the end of succession conflicts, possibly let go of this heaven-sent opportunity? To neglect the gifts of heaven is to invite disaster. It was in the tenth month, after winter had set in, just as those three princes had barely escaped to Xian¡¯an City with their foothold unsteady and their strength greatly diminished. Liang Mingyu launched a military coup, ordering He Ba Yuan to lead the three hundred thousand strong army into the city, and directly commenced the slaughter of his three brothers. After a night of bloody battle. Relying on his Second Realm Inborn strength and the formidable army, the remnants of the three princes were finally annihilated. The Big Emperor Son, the third prince, and the tenth prince were killed, and the five Inborn Grandmasters who followed them back were either slain or captured; the situation in Imperial Capital Xian An fell under King Rui¡¯s control. The sky of Liang had changed. News of the Xian¡¯an military coup swiftly spread with the northern cold winds, passed by the spies in countless cities, spreading outwards and reaching the ears of high-level figures in different countries. ¡°` Chapter 1083 - Chapter 1083 Chapter 441 Strategy of Division ?Chapter 1083: Chapter 441: Strategy of Division Chapter 1083: Chapter 441: Strategy of Division Zhou Country, Imperial Palace. ¡°So you¡¯re saying that in the new Emperor¡¯s Xian An, a coup has taken place, and the sixth prince, Liang Mingyu, who was the least regarded in the struggle for succession, has killed three of his brothers and now coerced the important ministers who fled to Xian An into preparing to ascend to the throne?¡± Lu Yuan looked down at Guo Yishou, the commander of the Imperial City¡¯s external division, who had rushed to report, and asked with a frown. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Guo Yishou was a disciple of his and had always been practicing within the system of the Imperial City division, but because his cultivation was not high, he had been mixing in the middle and high levels without reaching the top. However, after Lu Yuan successively eliminated Ning Country, Western Liang Country, and subjugated the Barbarians, the Southwest, Lingnan and other countries, he seized the opportunity to collect a large quantity of Divine Blood Elixirs. Then, seeing that the Imperial City division had always lacked high-end combat power for deterrence, he selected a group, cultivated some trusted disciples, and placed two individuals who had made a breakthrough to Inborn among the commanders of the inner and outer divisions of the Imperial City. Guo Yishou was one of those lucky few. ¡°Replying to Your Majesty, the events indeed transpired as such,¡± Guo Yishou seriously responded to his sovereign and master¡¯s question, ¡°Now, King Rui of Liang Country, Liang Mingyu, has already taken control of the entire Xian An City, and the commandant of Donglai County is controlled by remnants of Zhou Country who are supporters of King Rui. In addition, the seven hundred thousand troops of Liang in Jiaodong County are also half under King Rui¡¯s control. Plus, with the three hundred thousand soldiers led by He Ba Yuan from the coup, the forces in King Rui¡¯s hands total at least a million. In terms of strength, he is currently the strongest within the territory of Liang Country.¡± Hearing this, Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes flickered slightly before he asked, ¡°Aside from Xian An, Donglai, Jiaodong and other cities and counties, how do the other areas of Liang Country view this coup?¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? Until now, it was left with only four prefectures: Donglai, Jiaodong, Yingling, and Jiaoxi. Although King Rui controls the new Imperial Capital, his influence only extends to a maximum of those two prefectures, which is just half of the current territory of Liang Country. By taking control of Xian An, it does indicate that he has the qualifications to declare himself Emperor and he has the biggest advantage among all the princes. However, it doesn¡¯t ensure that he truly controls the overall situation. At the very least, if the other two prefectures decide not to acknowledge him as King Rui and instead wish to push forward another prince or royal uncle to succeed the throne, then Liang Mingyu would have no means at all. What he can control is just the two prefectures and the million soldiers. The remaining forces of Liang Country in the two other prefectures, in terms of strength, are not any weaker than him as King Rui. In fact, if they join forces, they might even be stronger by a margin. So if anyone does not submit, the already miserable and downtrodden Liang Country could be faced with a brutal internal war. If such a war breaks out, wouldn¡¯t it provide an opportunity for other powers to interfere? Lu Yuan was asking this with an agenda in mind. He was considering whether he could divide and win over factions within Liang Country that were outside of King Rui¡¯s camp. Whether he let them invite wolves into their house or simply took the chance to reclaim the territory, it would make the third Northern Expedition he was planning to launch next year, aimed at the destruction of Liang Country, a lot smoother. If he made such a promise, it would at least save two to three months of time and reduce the casualties by several hundred thousand. Such a beneficial and cost-free option was naturally enticing. Guo Yishou was aware of what his emperor desired but could only respond with a bitter smile and a shake of his head to the inquiry, ¡°Your Majesty, apart from King Rui¡¯s faction, there are still two major forces within Liang Country. One of them is led by the renowned general of Liang Country, Yan Yunqing, commanding the former southern border troops. These border troops were originally stationed at the Shanyang and Rencheng frontlines, with a number in the range of one million three or four hundred thousand. However, after the Liang army suffered a major defeat in Rencheng Prefecture and Shanyang County was later breached by our forces, the Liang troops suffered heavy losses and ultimately only about four hundred thousand managed to escape, essentially crippling them. But afterward, Yan Yunqing successively received some of the refugees from Liang Prefecture, Shanyang, Rencheng, and other places who fled our way, and he organized and governed them, drafting the men into the military. Later, he managed to gather another hundred thousand or so. Then, through conscription in the Jiaoxi Prefecture where they were stationed, he gained another three hundred thousand. So now, the military strength under Yan Yunqing¡¯s control in Jiaoxi Prefecture has recovered to about seven hundred thousand. However, among these seven hundred thousand, fifty thousand are the old and the weak, those below fifteen or above sixty years of age. Out of the remaining two hundred thousand, another hundred thousand are civilian workers conscripted into the military. The troops of Jiaoxi Prefecture in Liang army that are truly capable of fighting number only one hundred thousand elite soldiers. In addition to these troops, the Liang forces in Jiaoxi Prefecture include the renowned general Yan Yunqing and five Inborn Grandmasters. These mentioned are the main strength of the Liang army in that area. Although they are considered strong, their strength is still inferior to King Rui, and more importantly, their logistical support of food and fodder is firmly in the hands of Xian An City. Their chances of successfully resisting King Rui are slim. Moreover, Yan Yunqing and King Rui¡¯s general He Ba Yuan, during the war against Tang forces in Donglai County last year, had cooperated and fought side by side. It is said that during the Great War, He Ba Yuan was highly favored by Yan Yunqing for his contributions, and Yan Yunqing played a role in He Ba Yuan¡¯s rise to power. Their relationship is like that of a teacher and student, father and son. Based on this relationship of brotherhood, plus the fact that King Rui already controls the overall situation, as long as Yan Yunqing doesn¡¯t want Liang Country to fall, he certainly won¡¯t rebel. I assume he has already received the news and may have already sent a Messenger to Xian An City to express his loyalty.¡± Chapter 1084 - Chapter 1084 Chapter 441 Strategy of Division_2 ?Chapter 1084: Chapter 441: Strategy of Division_2 Chapter 1084: Chapter 441: Strategy of Division_2 ¡°` Guo Yishou sighed as he said this. In fact, as the commander overseeing foreign affairs, how could he not pay attention to Yan Yunqing, the last renowned general of Liang? Given the chance, naturally, he would want to turn the opponent. But Yan Yunqing¡¯s achievements were all thanks to Liang¡¯s nurturing, having spent countless resources and opportunities to help him climb to his current position. Under such circumstances, how could this person possibly betray Liang? So, after attempting contact and being harshly refused, even targeted for retaliation, the Imperial Secret Service gave up on the idea of recruiting him. At the same time, they confirmed his stance towards King Xian¡¯an Rui. With this person present, over eighty percent of Liang¡¯s military forces were loyal to King Rui. Among the four jurisdictions, three had turned to King Rui. With control over the majority of the country¡¯s forces, that King Rui only needed to ascend the throne to naturally take control of the entire Liang. After the Emperor of Liang passed away, the period of chaos that ensued for the opponent was also coming to an end. This naturally caused one to sigh. Lu Yuan frowned, ¡°What about Yingling County?¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Currently, there are two main forces there. One is Liang¡¯s Fourth Prince, King An, Liang Mingzhang, who had previously supported the Big Emperor Son and suppressed the Sixth Prince, Liang Mingyu, bearing some grudges. Now that Liang Mingyu has suddenly risen and killed several princes in one fell swoop, his hands are stained with the blood of his brothers. Seeing the tragic situation of his other brothers, King An has long been terrified, living in constant fear. So, these days, he has been consolidating military power, winning over generals in the army, and now leads an Inborn general with a hundred thousand troops, entrenched in the western part of Yingling. Furthermore, he has denounced Liang Mingyu¡¯s mutiny and refused to recognize the legitimacy of his ascension, openly breaking with him. The other force is a coalition of local aristocratic families led by the defender of Yingling County. These local aristocrats of Yingling County have supported the county defender and, through complex relationships, controlled the local prefecture and county soldiers as well as the Civil Group Volunteers. In total, they also have an Inborn general and a hundred thousand troops. These local aristocrats, regarding the news of Xian An¡¯s coup, have not vehemently opposed it, but have also not shown any support. What concerns them more is who can guarantee their local interests. Currently, our Great Chu¡¯s Southern Route Army is sharpening its blades in Yingling County, ready to head north and swallow the opponent at any moment. Facing life and death, these local aristocrats are already unable to guarantee their next sunrise, let alone care about who sits on the throne above their heads? So, if King Xian¡¯an of Xian An would promise to send troops south to defend Yingling after ascending the throne, then these people would likely turn to King Rui. Of course, if our Great Chu accepts them and guarantees their local interests, these people would also not hesitate to switch their allegiance to Great Chu. After all, those fence-sitters know better than we do who they should choose between Great Chu and Liang. But this means that we will inevitably leave some hidden troubles in Yingling County. Future governance may involve more obstacles and setbacks.¡± Guo Yishou analyzed the pros and cons. ¡°Minor troubles are nothing to worry about.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan waved his hand dismissively, ¡°As long as we can eliminate Liang and unify Qingzhou, then these petty local powers are trivial in comparison to the might of Great Chu. Once all the surrounding enemies are gone and the nearby land is all Chu territory, cleaning them up will be simple. You can try to make contact with them, but don¡¯t be too compromising; maintain a tough stance. We Chu hold the advantage now, seeking their allegiance is merely to save some time and losses. Tell them, as long as they surrender, I can guarantee their local properties, but they must relinquish power in Liang County and accept Great Chu¡¯s governance to become good citizens of Chu. If they wish to hold office in the future, they can compete with Great Chu¡¯s talented scholars through military service and the imperial examination. I am the sovereign of the world; all under heaven are citizens of Great Chu. I will not discriminate against them. Tell them these terms, if they can accept them, then we¡¯ll take them. If not, at most we will expend some effort to flatten them. The aristocratic families of the other countries and jurisdictions can also be approached in the same way. It is far better to subdue others without fighting than to assault fortified cities. Also, approach that King An. He has already cut himself off from Liang and is in a state of panic. Now is the time for Great Chu to extend an olive branch, his last lifesaver. If he does not wish to meet a disastrous defeat, his only option is to surrender. You tell him that I can support him as the ruler of Liang and help him march into Xian An. In this way, after King Rui is eliminated, if he hands over Liang to me, I can secure for him a dukedom, ensuring a future of wealth and peace.¡± No matter how you look at it, Yingling County has two Inborns and two hundred thousand troops. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï If we can win them all over, it can also strengthen our Chu army and reduce losses. Especially that King An, as the Fourth Prince, is exceedingly valuable in the vacuum of Liang¡¯s throne after the emperor¡¯s death. Chu can completely use the pretext of supporting him to take the throne, allowing this prince of Liang to invite the wolf into the house and follow him to march into Liang. ¡°` Chapter 1085 - Chapter 1085 Chapter 441 Strategy of Division_3 ?Chapter 1085: Chapter 441: Strategy of Division_3 Chapter 1085: Chapter 441: Strategy of Division_3 By then, it wouldn¡¯t be an invasion by foreign enemies but a civil war. Although any perspicacious observer could see that Chu State wasn¡¯t aiding King An but rather sought to annex under the guise of support. Yet, despite there being many astute individuals, compared to the vast population base of the world, they were extremely few. Having King An up front, the low-level masses, even with high-level explanations, would inevitably harbor doubts when faced with King An¡¯s army. ¡°Why should we kill and be killed over your brothers¡¯ struggle for power? It¡¯s not like the country has been ruined and families destroyed.¡± Even if the country were in ruins, as long as their own families survived, the common folk at the bottom really wouldn¡¯t care much. Hence with such a card at play, the morale of Liang¡¯s low-rank soldiers could be reduced by a good twenty or thirty percent out of thin air. And those mid-level officers and local major clans, with such a pretext to hide behind, and seeing the example of the feudal families of Yingling County, realizing there was another path to take, would naturally feel a great deal of relief towards their hostility against Chu State. The current state of Liang was like a broken vessel, with everyone aware that once Chu State launched its third Northern Expedition the next year the vessel could possibly sink. In such times, Liang Mingyu launched a mutiny and killed so many of his own brothers. This thunderous approach, while extremely effective, allowed him to control the Imperial Capital and half of Liang in one fell swoop. But for other vested interests, it was an outright snatching of benefits from their hands. Especially since those deceased princes represented a wide array of Liang¡¯s previous high-level interests. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Now, many of these high-level figures were killed by Liang Mingyu as well, and the remaining few, coerced by the threat of death, had no choice but to submit. But to say there were no resentments toward King Rui in their hearts would be false. Particularly after King Rui, Liang Mingyu, heavily utilized his ministers from Zhou Country to control many pivotal positions in the central government and local territories, directly marginalizing local Liang forces, such discontent only grew. ¡°You, a beggar from the outside, by what right do you lord over the locals?¡± Many people of Liang felt this way in their hearts. Therefore, the current high-level echelons of Liang were disunited in appearance and spirit, with the emperor seated on the Dragon Throne and the ministers below all harboring their own agendas, resulting in discord. In such a situation, simply raising the banner of King An and offering these individuals another option would cause Liang to collapse internally without Chu having to lift a finger. Once they had fought amongst themselves sufficiently, Chu could then send its vast army northward, and without exerting any effort, easily capture the weakened Liang. This was much simpler than directly clashing with the opponent¡¯s nearly two million strong army, a campaign that could last months and result in a million casualties. It was for this reason that Lu Yuan, after analyzing the situation, immediately chose to make certain compromises in exchange for greater benefits. As for the risks brought about by such compromises, as before, as long as Liang ceased to exist and Qingzhoua€¡±or even Central Statea€¡±was unified, then with the immensely expanded power of Chu by that time, dealing with these regional powers would be a trivial matter, wouldn¡¯t it? In the past, for quickly unifying Yangzhou, he even went so far as to establish vassal states. Now, merely ceding some local interests was even less of a concern. As long as he took control of the Nine Provinces, gathered Qi Luck, Lu Yuan really didn¡¯t care whether the unification was nominal or substantive, complete or incomplete. Ultimately, as long as he unified everything and could claim all the Qi Luck under the guise of righteousness without hindering his cultivation, then all potential troubles could wait a hundred years, until all other powers¡¯ Innate strength has been thoroughly exhausted, before he methodically addressed them. By that time, it would be the golden age of his sixty-four Avatars suppressing the world with the might of the Inborn, ruling Central State. With the unique strongest military force at his disposal, those regional powers, no matter how deeply entrenched, would be helpless to resist and merely subject to his manipulation and flattening, wouldn¡¯t they? As long as he lived long enough, Lu Yuan was confident in enduring it out. ¡®It¡¯s not just Liang, other states like Zheng, Xu, Jin, Zhao, Wei, and others, if the opportunity arises, could also be annexed as vassal states under the right conditions. As long as these people submit and enter under Chu¡¯s tributary system, it¡¯s no big deal to spend another hundred years to gradually reduce their autonomy. With me, the founding emperor, here to control them, manipulating these vassal states would be as easy and enjoyable as anything. Even if it leads to a Six States Insurgence, I could directly suppress it without any unsolvable issues.¡¯ With these thoughts unlocked, Lu Yuan¡¯s mind became lively and nimble. From the current situation, this method of both repression and appeasement indeed seemed to be the most beneficial strategy. As long as it was implemented, unifying the Nine Provinces in a year or two would be no issue. The subsequent estimated casualties, possibly reaching ten million, could also be reduced to between two and three million. Undoubtedly, this would save Chu State a considerable amount of losses and time, making it a worthwhile transaction. ¡°However, even though I wish to use this approach to bring other states into the fold, it¡¯s not guaranteed that they would be willing to accept it. Having enjoyed unrestrained power for so long, who would want someone else to become their ruler? ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Moreover, other states should be able to see through my soft-knife assassination plan. Unless they¡¯re truly desperate, it¡¯s unlikely many would be willing to accept it. And by the time they¡¯re willing to accept, I might not even be interested in their allegiance anymore.¡± Considering this potentially troublesome scenario, Lu Yuan sighed helplessly in the end: ¡°Well, let¡¯s just have someone try it out and see how it goes. Whether or not it can succeed will depend on specific circumstances.¡± He imparted a lot of detailed rules to Guo Yishou, emphasizing them earnestly, then waved his hand, dismissing the disciple. He had made the necessary effort and devised the strategies. The final effectiveness was now up to human endeavor and the Heavenly Mandate. He hoped that the remnants of the old world would have the sense to accommodate, otherwise he would have to wield the butcher¡¯s knife once more in the land of the Nine Provinces, creating a tide of rolling heads and seas of blood just as he did during the last two Northern Expeditions. Lu Yuan genuinely did not desire to witness such a scene. He was not naturally bloodthirsty by nature. If it could be peaceful, he would naturally prefer peace. Unfortunately, the dire state of affairs and the Great Dao ahead forced his hand to lift the sword and massacre living beings in its defense. Chapter 1086 - Chapter 1086 Chapter 442 Disaster Relief and Sympathy ?Chapter 1086: Chapter 442 Disaster Relief and Sympathy Chapter 1086: Chapter 442 Disaster Relief and Sympathy Bitter winter in the twelfth lunar month, with wind and snow enveloping the sky. Extreme cold compels the people across the Nine Provinces to stay indoors for warmth, unless absolutely necessary. The activity of all living beings on Earth also reaches its lowest at this time. And the nations of the Nine Provinces, after the mutiny at Xian An in Liang, have fallen into a deep silence, with no other significant events occurring. ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Under the protection of severe cold, everyone begins to hibernate and conserve. Chu State starts to get busy. Now, it¡¯s November, the time when the annual Winter Tax is collected. After two years of Great Wars, each involving over ten million people, the expenditure of money and grain has flowed out ceaselessly, like running water that cannot be stopped. Originally, Lu Yuan had estimated that he had enough savings to wage wars for several years, but when he truly began to spend money, he found he had been somewhat optimistic. If it were only for supplying the army and immigrants, then indeed, Chu would have enough for several years. But in reality, his expenditure wasn¡¯t limited to just these two areas. For example, if you conquered the land of Central State, weren¡¯t the tens of millions of common people living there now citizens of Chu? If so, then would you take care of them or not? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï War brings great destruction. Although Chu managed to conquer half of Central State rather smoothly and kept the duration of the war extremely short, avoiding protracted conflict¡­ Even the shortest war is still war. The devastation that two years of war involving tens of millions of people can wreak on civilian life is unimaginable. Most directly, due to this war, the population of the sixteen counties in Central State now under Chu¡¯s control has decreased by more than twenty million people. And among these lost populations, over eighty percent are the precious labor force of able-bodied men. You must understand, even when combined, these sixteen counties had a total population of barely ninety million people. Currently, with a direct loss of twenty million people, mostly men, the damage to the local population structure and ecology is almost cataclysmic. The entirety of Central State under Chu¡¯s control is now, apart from places like Qingzhou to the south, and regions like Jiangxia and East Sea, which Chu occupied rather smoothly at the beginning¡­ The rest of the areas suffer from depopulated lands, a scarcity of men, and everywhere one looks, there are only women and children. Almost every family has lost fathers, sons, brothers, and husbands. The pillar of a family, just like that, has been depleted due to the war. The remaining population of nearly seventy million elders, women, and children, without sufficient labor, even with the land provided by Heaven and Earth, finds it immensely difficult to sustain themselves and their families. Moreover, with Chu¡¯s policy of local conscription of supplies in the northern territories imposed on these already struggling northern folk, they are being exploited all over again, which is pushing them further to the brink. Especially in regions like Yuzhou, where due to its isolation by Sea, there have already been large-scale incidents of starvation and death. And in Qingzhou, Yong State, and other places, there have been isolated cases as well. Under such circumstances, once the reports from various places were compiled, they naturally attracted Lu Yuan¡¯s attention. This lack of labor, and widespread famine, could not go unaddressed; otherwise, the famine that broke out in Liang because of Chu¡¯s handling could be replayed under Chu¡¯s own rule. If it were to escalate, those sixteen counties under Chu¡¯s control might suffer several million, or even tens of millions of starvation deaths. Although Lu Yuan could steadfastly continue with the wartime death tolls without batting an eye¡­ It¡¯s because he understood the cruelty of war and recognized the necessity, which is why there was no pity. But for those defenseless common people, although he could still be firm-hearted, he ultimately had a soft spot and was unwilling to watch a large-scale starvation incident unfold. Therefore, the issue of aid and support for the people of Northern Central State, to help them overcome this difficult time, was put on the agenda. After discussions with various officials, three main directions were proposed. One was disaster relief, where the Chu government would transport grain to regions suffering from famine, ensuring at least the minimum food provision for the local people to prevent starvation. The second was tax relief for families that were truly impoverished or lacking labor, with no productive capacity, to temporarily suspend their Tribute. The specific tax relief period would be based on the time it took for the next generation of able-bodied men in these families to come of age. That is, the government would collect Tribute once your children had grown up. The third was official marriage arrangements. It¡¯s an old tactic. For those families in Central State who have lost all their men but still have eligible women, the government would take charge and recruit unmarried men from Chu¡¯s mainland and allocate them directly to these families. Thus, the vast number of unmarried young men in Chu¡¯s mainland would immediately have wives and children, land and a house, reaching the pinnacle of life in an instant. And those vulnerable women, children, and elderly people would gain the protection of a man, providing them with some assurance for the future and preventing starvation or destitution. It should be noted that in this underdeveloped society, the termination of a family line is not merely a term but a natural phenomenon. In a society where survival of the fittest is the rule, if you are poor and weak, then you deserve to perish. This almost instinctive simple notion, especially during times of war, is especially pronounced. This is why many cities and villages in Northern Central State have lost their men, where everyone is weak, and no one can bully another. Chapter 1087 - Chapter 1087 Chapter 442 Disaster Relief and Sympathy_2 ?Chapter 1087: Chapter 442 Disaster Relief and Sympathy_2 Chapter 1087: Chapter 442 Disaster Relief and Sympathy_2 Otherwise, in a place like Chu State, where the societal ecosystem is relatively intact, the people from the same village, the same town, the same city, would really give you a real-life demonstration of what it means to impoverish a family and to drink human blood. Regarding such negative social phenomena, Lu Yuan actually had some knowledge and truly abhorred it. However, in a society lagging in technology, this is just instinctual behavior for the sake of reproduction. Without a huge explosion in productive forces, even as an emperor, he was powerless to bring about change. As for inventing technology and executing social reform, I¡¯m sorry to say, he¡¯s just an ordinary person after all, who, even with a bit of knowledge from a previous life, had returned most of what he learned to his teachers after so many years in society. Now, to expect him to conjure up an industrial system out of his fragmented and incomplete knowledge is indeed overestimating Lu Yuan. Moreover, in a Cultivation Society, or rather, during the High Martial Arts Era, truth be told, unless one invents modern missiles and airplanes, ordinary firearms and gunpowder wouldn¡¯t be very effective. Let¡¯s not even discuss cultivators; for ordinary Martial Artists below Inborn Grandmasters, once they reach a secondary realm, common machine guns and artillery pose no threat. Because at the secondary realm, Martial Artists begin to cultivate their spirit and, subconsciously, their senses for danger increase greatly. If you point a gun at them, they can sense it in advance and take evasive action. Even if a bullet is fired, a secondary realm Martial Artist could catch it barehanded. The power released by a martial arts technique is actually not inferior to that of an average rifle bullet. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 In a fight between Martial Artists, they can withstand martial arts techniques with their bodies, let alone common firearms. Additionally, with spiritual intuition, ordinary Soldiers with firearms would have a hard time posing a threat to Martial Artists above the secondary realm. If facing an Inborn Grandmaster, it would be an outright massacre. Against Cultivators, with their profound Immortal Techniques, it¡¯s even more difficult to deal with them. Of course, all of the above applies only to a modern system that has completed the first or second industrial revolution. On this side, with a High Martial Arts and Cultivation Society, there is an absolute Advantage in terms of martial power. If technology advances further, with targeted developments, it could potentially suppress martial arts and cultivation. However, just recognizing this point was enough to dissuade Lu Yuan from developing technologies. Because he estimated that even if he spent a few hundred years accumulating and deducing knowledge, at most, he could only develop society to the level of a first or second revolution. Anything further was beyond his capability; future geniuses would be needed. And all this would still require a lot of Time. ?¦Ï???.§ã0 Moreover, the world is different; the rules are different. Whether the physical laws that applied in his previous life could be applied in this world was debatable. After all, in his previous life, there was no Cultivation, no Martial Arts and Internal Strength; in this world, there is no technology, no industrya€¡±that itself speaks volumes. Without the same environment, the same world, many things cannot be directly transferred. Over the years, Lu Yuan had also tried some basic technological inventions, but except for some things that compliance with local rules, using previous life¡¯s thoughts for certain modifications, he failed to replicate inventions like generators or even high-powered explosives from his previous life. After engaging over a hundred talents and thousands of experiments, he could only confirm that this was due to different world rules, a fundamental rejection. After confirming this, he gave up on the idea of technology-based nation-building. Instead, he aimed to enhance local technological rules to better develop the people¡¯s livelihood. And let it not be said, in a world with Cultivation and martial arts, there indeed were some technologies that would appear as black magic in the eyes of the previous world. Take for example, his Avatar that could communicate over nearly ten thousand miles, or the eagles gifted by the Barbarians that could travel three thousand miles in a single day. Or martial arts and Internal Strength¡¯s exploration of the human body¡¯s mysteries. Not to mention the Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens and Divine Blood Variants, the mysterious Dao Laws of the Immortal Sects, and so on. If all of these were developed, they might match or even surpass technologies. At any rate, Lu Yuan believed that they would be stronger than the technology of his previous society. After all, the Cultivators here can grasp the sun and the moon, turn rivers upside down, travel through space, and Ascend to the Immortal Realm. Whereas the technology of his previous life might achieve this in the future, at the time of his transmigration, it was unable to do so. It was a pity that this era was already The Age of Dharma Decline. This abundance of precious Cultivation knowledge and wealth could not be utilized, which truly pained him. Fortunately, for Lu Yuan, although this was somewhat regrettable, it wasn¡¯t so difficult to let go. After all, now that he himself could engage in Cultivation, he personally could enjoy and use the various Cultivation knowledge and technologies mentioned above. It was only that he couldn¡¯t promote them across the country or popularize them throughout The World. Moreover, as the monarch of a country, even without a Technology Explosion, the enjoyments he should have were still there, and not much worse off. In such circumstances, upon discovering that he couldn¡¯t use the knowledge from his previous life and after experiencing the lack of a technology boom, naturally, there was no motivation left to study the technology of this world. A monarch wasn¡¯t likely to suffer, no matter how hard the times. Embracing this simple idea, Lu Yuan gradually put these matters out of his mind. It was only now, with resources suddenly becoming extremely scarce and many people within the kingdom suffering from hunger, that he recalled this previously abandoned concept. ¡°However, I have recently conducted a military downsizing; the northern Military Expedition forces, including local troops, all added up total just over six million.¡± Chapter 1088 - Chapter 1088 Chapter 442 Disaster Relief and Sympathy_3 ?Chapter 1088: Chapter 442 Disaster Relief and Sympathy_3 Chapter 1088: Chapter 442 Disaster Relief and Sympathy_3 ¡°Supplying these armies is still manageable logistics-wise; it¡¯s not necessary to siphon off supplies from Central State any longer to meet military needs.¡± ¡°Just this alone can significantly relieve the pressure on the people of Central State.¡± Lu Yuan calculated the reduced consumption after the troop cuts and couldn¡¯t help but nod in satisfaction with the policy he had implemented. If he hadn¡¯t reduced the troop numbers, he really wouldn¡¯t have been able to keep it up. If he wanted to continue the Northern Expedition next year, he could only push the local populace harder. And that hardship could translate into tens of millions of lives. Though in the eyes of the people in this world, the sacrifice of tens of millions for the unification of Great Chu through the Northern Expedition isn¡¯t considered much. Maybe causing a little less death, a little less sin, is always better. It was probably the last bit of kindness left in Lu Yuan, the traverser, after being transformed by the dye vat of this world. ¡°However, while the military supplies for the troops are temporarily taken care of, finding men to pair up with the women and children in the north is a bit more difficult.¡± Lu Yuan considered his third relief strategy and felt a bit of a headache. Actually, even before the Northern Expedition, there was already a slight imbalance between the male and female population in Chu State. An enduring era of prosperity has led to an uneven distribution of local resources, making it difficult to comfortably support an excess population. Influenced by the concept of having sons to pass on the family incense, when locals found it hard to support more people, they often chose to raise male infants and abandoned female ones. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Over time, this naturally led to an imbalance between the sexes. After thirty years of prosperity in Chu State, although this phenomenon was not widespread, it started to become apparent, resulting in one or two million men unable to find wives. This was originally a social issue that would affect local stability. But with this Northern Expedition, Chu State mobilized a large number of men for the war, and about six or seven million men were lost in the conflict. The original problem of more men than women was instantly resolved after this war. In fact, it even reversed to become a surplus of women over men. In such circumstances, Lu Yuan found it somewhat difficult to bring enough men from within the country to distribute to the needy families in the north. ¡°In that case, recruiting single young men definitely won¡¯t work. But to ignore those nearly seventy million women, children, and elderly people would be too cruel¡­¡± Lu Yuan frown, thinking of a solution, and ended up having to find an alternative path. ¡°Since recruiting single young men isn¡¯t feasible, let¡¯s just recruit adult males. It doesn¡¯t matter whether they¡¯re married or not; if the people from the Central State move north, just allocate one man to a northern family as if he¡¯s taking a concubine. This way, the Chu State immigrants, originally without any foundation, will immediately have houses and land after arriving in the north. Although this much property was only enough to support one family, and now has to support two, it¡¯s still better than starting from scratch with nothing. Having this foundation, the local immigrants can survive the initial hardships, and if they want to live better later on, they can just clear their own fields.¡± ¡°Operate in this manner for two or three years, and Central State, originally unable to levy taxes, can start to become a foundation and produce money and grain on a large scale.¡± Lu Yuan slowly clarified his thoughts, and the more he thought about it, the brighter his eyes shone. In the end, he made a decision, calling various officials and having them follow up, complementing each other¡¯s ideas and jointly refining the plan. After discussing it for about ten days and finally coming to a conclusion, it was issued as an official decree and distributed to the various prefectures in the north and south of the river. It was prepared to be used as the basis for the performance evaluation of officials in the coming two years to encourage local officials to implement it. And Lu Yuan, having dealt with that matter, went on to attend to other official duties. Having secured half of Chu State in the north, a plethora of issues descended upon him. His good friend Sun Siwen, who originally helped him handle these affairs, had to remain in Yangzhou to oversee the rear. And as for some key matters, he didn¡¯t trust handing them over to others, ultimately leaving him no choice but to personally take the field. While others were enjoying the warmth of their wives and children by the hearth this winter, he was lost in a whirlwind of governance, reviewing hundreds of official documents every day. The pen in his hand never stopped moving all day long, truly exhausting him to the bone. But there was no alternative; before he could take over the north and complete the immigration work in Yangzhou, before Sun Siwen¡¯s arrival, Lu Yuan had no choice but to persevere for a few more years. Fortunately, he was accustomed to such hard times when he first started out, so taking up the reins again now, although somewhat uncomfortable, wasn¡¯t too difficult. In the end, there were no major problems. As various decrees were issued from the royal palace of Great Liang this winter, Great Chu busied itself, slowly welcoming the spring. ¡­ In the forty-third year of Shenwu, early spring, the second month. As the heavy snows melted away, all life was revived. While Chu State was still basking in the afterglow of a year¡¯s worth of winter diligence, an unprecedented event unfolded across the Nine Provinces: before Chu State could strike first, over in the land of Yu state, several powers preemptively broke into conflict. In Zheng Kingdom¡¯s Zhuxu City, after last year¡¯s battle for the capital, a winter of reorganization and stockpiling led to the new Zheng emperor officially performing a sacrificial rite to the heavens as spring arrived, recounting the crimes of Tang Kingdom. After that, he reviewed the troops, marshaled his generals, and announced a plan to reclaim lost territory and lead a Northern Expedition against Tang. Upon hearing the news, Jin Country, an ally of Zheng, immediately rallied to the cause. Tang Kingdom reacted swiftly as well. ?0¦Í?0.?¦Ï Following the announcement from the two countries to launch a Northern Expedition, they too mobilized their army, rested over the winter, and clashed again with Zheng and Jin in the territories of Yidu Prefecture. However, it wasn¡¯t long before Xu State stirred as well. Citing Tang Kingdom¡¯s brutal tyranny and bullying of neighboring countries as causes, Xu State heeded Tang¡¯s call and officially dispatched a million troops to invade the Tang homeland. Though Tang had anticipated this and had already stationed a million-strong army internally, they were not at a disadvantage against the surprise attack from Xu State. But with another rival of equal strength in Xu State, Tang Kingdom found itself hard-pressed to cope. A military campaign that had initially been as unstoppable as a breaking bamboo, was instantly mired in stalemate. Facing three enemies at once, Tang Kingdom got an early taste of what Liang and now Chu had experienced, a sort of prelude to the ¡®first hegemon¡¯s¡¯ treatment. As for Xu, Zheng, and Jin, their concerted targeting of Tang clearly signaled a resolve to eliminate this unstable factor before clashing with Chu. Without resolving the Tang issue, facing the rising sun that was Chu, they really lacked confidence; they did not want to risk a decisive battle with Chu when there could be fire in the rear. So, taking advantage of the fact that Chu was focused on dealing with Qingzhou and Liang, without spare capacity for its surroundings, was their only chance to resolve the Tang issue. All three nations did not want to miss this opportunity. And as war broke out among the four kingdoms, Yu, Jing, and Liang states were suddenly engulfed in the flames of war. The peace of last year¡¯s cold winter, at that moment, was nothing but an ephemeral dream. The ferocious cruelty of the Nine Provinces, after dozing off in the winter, once again bared its sharp teeth. Chapter 1089 - Chapter 1089 Chapter 443 The Third Northern Expedition ?Chapter 1089: Chapter 443 The Third Northern Expedition Chapter 1089: Chapter 443 The Third Northern Expedition Tang Kingdom and Zheng, Jin, and Xu have started fighting. This news, when it was passed back to Great Liang, surprised Lu Yuan a bit. For the past two years, he was always the one initiating the attacks, while other nations were passively on the receiving end, which created a kind of delusion and inertia in him. That was the notion that it¡¯s only I who will attack others, and others will not come to attack me, or to initiate an engagement by themselves. At this moment, a great war in Yuzhou made Lu Yuan suddenly realize that other states also actively initiate wars. Thinking about the disposition of Tang Kingdom and the pressure Great Chu had exerted on other countries over these two years made the outbreak of this great war seem reasonable. So, after his moment of realization, he understood. Immediately after, he began to contemplate whether he could reap some benefits from this situation. ¡°First of all, joining the battlefield is out of the question. Whether it is fighting for Tang Kingdom or fighting against the Three Nations, it does not serve the interests of Chu.¡± Lu Yuan confirmed this point first. ¡°Next, is how to seek benefits without directly joining the fray.¡± He pondered the changing situation in Yuzhou, dismissing ideas one by one, searching for places he could profit. After a long thought, he finally established a goal. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ¡°This battle could be left alone, but Tang Kingdom is, compared to the Three Nations, slightly weaker. And I had already set a strategy to let Tang Kingdom and the Three Nations weaken each other through mutual conflict. Qingyunzi¡¯s Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp was sent for this very purpose. Hence, without joining the battlefield, it is necessary to weaken the Three Nations a bit, to better maintain the balance.¡± Lu Yuan opened the map, his gaze scouring over it, eventually resting on Xianyun Prefecture at the easternmost end of Southern Yuzhou. After Zheng Kingdom ceded Haiyang Prefecture, Great Chu had already taken control of four prefectures within this geographical unit of Southern Yuzhou. Out of the five prefectures in Southern Yuzhou, only Xianyun Prefecture controlled by Jin Country was not under the rule of Chu. Great Chu, which was close to unifying Southern Yuzhou, naturally had ambitions and needs for this prefecture. However, by the time they took over Haiyang Prefecture from Zheng last year, it was already August, and just a month away from the snows and winter. In such a short amount of time, to fight a great war with Jin Country and then capture Xianyun Prefecture was clearly unrealistic. Therefore, after weighing his options, Lu Yuan gave up the idea of immediately annexing Xianyun Prefecture. Now, as the new year arrives and it¡¯s only February with the prospect of snow in October still eight whole months away, there is plenty of time. With so much time, as long as Great Chu is serious, capturing Xianyun Prefecture, let alone the entire Jin Country, is hardly a problem. ¡°Yet now, the main objective for Great Chu is still to eliminate Liang and drive Xu State¡¯s influence back to Hebei, then completely unify Qingzhou. Before defeating these two enemies, Yuzhou can be sidelined. Therefore, we can simply nibble away for now, no need for massive military campaigns to wage wars of annihilation in Yuzhou. The first target for this nibbling, let¡¯s choose Xianyun Prefecture.¡± Lu Yuan had no worries about taking down Xianyun Prefecture. Qingyunzi¡¯s Yuzhou Camp, with one hundred and fifty million soldiers and twenty Inborns, had formidable strength. With such powerful forces, it was enough to annihilate Jin Country, let alone just capturing one Xianyun Prefecture. Previously, he considered the alliance between Zheng and Jin, as well as Xu State supporting them from behind, which is why he did not order Qingyunzi to move against Jin immediately. But now, this alliance of three nations has actively found itself an enemy, committing their main forces on the battlefield with Tang. While this move places considerable pressure on Tang Kingdom, it also undeniably leaves the Three Nations¡¯ home front more vulnerable. Of course, given Zheng and Jin¡¯s dread of Chu, these two nations would surely have left enough military strength in their rear to guard against a surprise invasion from Chu. If Chu were to truly take advantage of this opportunity to use their forces against the two nations, Zheng and Jin would undoubtedly cease hostilities with Tang immediately, then redirect their troops to confront the Chu invasion. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? In doing so, it would be Chu who ends up taking the bullets for Tang, senselessly draining its own strength. Although Chu is not afraid of the combined forces of these two smaller nations, it is always better not to deplete one¡¯s own strength if that can be avoided. ¡°Therefore, I can use this great war as a starting point to order Qingyunzi to lead his troops and form battle lines on the border between Haiyang Prefecture and Xianyun Prefecture. This move will threaten Jin¡¯s southern territory and compel them to give up Xianyun Prefecture. In this case, Jin may either agree to our terms, willingly ceding a prefecture in exchange for temporary safety. Or they would have to redeploy troops back, fully committing to defend Xianyun Prefecture against our Yuzhou Camp¡¯s army.¡± Contemplating these two possibilities, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but smile. No matter which path Jin chooses, Chu will achieve a certain goal. If Jin decides to cede Xianyun Prefecture, Chu will expand its borders and seize a prefecture without any military expenditure, securing a huge gain. If Jin chooses to resist, this will still achieve the objective of restraining Jin¡¯s military forces, weakening the Three Nations¡¯ alliance, and reducing the pressure on Tang. At present, Tang¡¯s sole resistance against the alliance of Zheng, Jin, and Xu is indeed a bit overstretched and struggles to cope. However, if Jin withdraws its troops, facing only Zheng and Xu on its own is still a manageable pressure for Tang. Even with the strength of Tang Kingdom alone, it might even have a slight advantage. After all, among the Three Nations alliance, Zheng¡¯s strength is indeed the weakest. Having been crippled by Chu, Zheng is now the weakest link, also known colloquially as the vulnerable spot. Chapter 1090 - Chapter 1090 Chapter 443 The Third Northern Expedition_2 ?Chapter 1090: Chapter 443 The Third Northern Expedition_2 Chapter 1090: Chapter 443 The Third Northern Expedition_2 Originally, with Jin Country¡¯s support, the combined forces of the two countries didn¡¯t reveal a significant weakness. But if Jin Country were to withdraw its troops and leave only Zheng Kingdom behind, that weakness would be exposed for all to see. If Tang Kingdom could defeat Zheng Kingdom first and then turn to face Xu State in a decisive battle, with Tang Kingdom¡¯s slightly superior national strength compared to Xu State, the chances of winning were quite good. However, even if Tang Kingdom won, having consecutive victories against two formidable enemies would undoubtedly result in a significant loss of vitality. This would be a case of both sides suffering heavy damages. That was exactly the situation Chu State wanted to see. If things really turned out this way, even without obtaining Qingyun County, Chu State would still come out on top. But among the nations, there were certainly those who were clever; they would definitely see this point, and whether things would go as Chu State desired was somewhat uncertain. Even if they could see it, given the current situation, as soon as Chu State made a move, that threat would be directly and openly presented. In the end, it would develop into either an alliance of the Three Nations fighting Tang Kingdom with both sides suffering heavy damages, eventually letting Chu State step in and pick up the easy spoils. Or Jin Country would bear the short-term pain of ¡°cutting flesh¡±, paying the price of Qingyun County to obtain Chu State¡¯s condition of non-interference. The Three Nations weren¡¯t mistaken; Tang Kingdom, even if it didn¡¯t take initiative on its own, had still become Chu State¡¯s greatest bargaining chip for threatening the Three Nations. Now, Chu State was using Tang Kingdom to threaten the Three Nations, forcing them to give up Qingyun County. ¡°The strategy in detail is roughly as follows. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Now, just inform Qingyunzi and let him handle it.¡± Lu Yuan refined the plan once more, then communicated the general idea to Qingyunzi through his divine sense. The Yuzhou Camp, naturally equipped with numerous military staff officers, could, with their advice and strategy, I believe, sufficiently assist Qingyunzi in completing this plan for Chu State. Therefore, I trust the avatar and the strategists of Chu State to handle it. Over the years, this had been how Lu Yuan dealt with state affairs, rarely getting involved in the details himself. Otherwise, with so many matters in Chu State, even as a cultivator with advanced cultivation, he wouldn¡¯t be able to handle them all. Division of labor, hierarchical structure, delegating power to subordinatesa€¡±this is the true way to govern a nation. ¡­ As for the great war in Yuzhou, for the time being, that¡¯s how it would be handled. Focusing on containment and threats as the primary, supplemented by other tactics. Having confirmed this principle, Lu Yuan then didn¡¯t pay much more attention to it. However, this matter also reminded him that it was time for Chu State to make a move. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Therefore, after instructing Qingyunzi, he immediately convened his ministers and announced the launch of the third Northern Expedition. And the first battle of this Northern Expedition would be initiated by Huang Xuan of the Southern Route Army. Huang Xuan would propel the legitimate rule, returning to the roots of the origin, under the banner of the Liang Emperor, oh no, now the new Emperor Liang Mingzhang, leading this Emperor, to strike at Xian¡¯an City in Donglai County, firing the first shot of the Northern Expedition. Yes, after last year¡¯s winter¡¯s operations by the Imperial City¡¯s Outer Bureau, that fourth prince of Liang, King An Liang Mingzhang, in order to survive, had officially defected to Chu State. Then, under the support of the local influential families in Yingling County that Chu State had won over, he formally ascended the throne in Lin Qiucheng, the county seat of Yingling, becoming, following Liang Mingyu, the second Emperor of Liang. Then, the two Emperors of Liang began disputing over who was the legitimate ruler throughout the entire winter. Today you rebuke me, tomorrow I slander you; in short, nobody acknowledged the other. And because of the heavy snow, both sides could only engage in verbal battles, unable to actually take each other¡¯s life. Therefore, throughout the winter, due to this debate, a huge public opinion storm was stirred up within Liang. Originally, since there was only one competitor left for the throne, Liang Mingyu. And since the opponent controlled the Imperial Capital and a large number of troops, even Yan Yunqing had switched allegiances to the opponent, so the other forces within Liang had no choice. Even though the opponent supported those remnants from Zhou Country, encroaching on a lot of local interests of Liang, many old-party members of Liang could only pledge their allegiance to Liang Mingyu, hailing him as the Emperor, and recognizing him as the new Emperor. But now, the many old-party forces of Liang looked and saw, oh, within our borders, there¡¯s not only the Emperor of Xian An, but also the Emperor of Lin Qiu. This Heavenly Son isn¡¯t just one after all. Seeing this second option, many old-party members of Liang suddenly had their hopes raised. Yes, even though Liang Mingzhang had claimed the throne, everyone could see that this Emperor of Lin Qiu was nothing but a puppet. But this didn¡¯t hinder the many from old-party families affected by losses of interests, or even those families who had suffered extensive purge and cleansing due to Liang Mingyu¡¯s military usurpation, who bore a deep vendetta against the opponent. They chose, for the sake of revenge and preserving their own interests, to pledge loyalty to this Emperor of Lin Qiu. Even as the sinking ship of Liang was about to go under, at this moment a Chu State-supported puppet emperor somehow became an opportunity for the multitudes of Liang forces to jump ship in time and board Chu State¡¯s grand vessel braving the waves. With these two factors, many who bore a grudge against Liang Mingyu and wished to jump ship began flocking to Lin Qiucheng to pledge their loyalty to Liang Mingzhang, or rather, to Chu State behind him. As these events fermented, within a short span of two months, aside from Yingling County which had all turned to Liang Mingzhang, Under the operation of the old-party people of Liang, the control of Jiaodong County by Liang Mingyu¡¯s line, which was not exactly tight, suddenly saw a large number of prefectures and counties with officials from the old-party declaring their non-recognition of the Emperor of Xian An, instead pledging loyalty to the Emperor of Lin Qiu. Chapter 1091 - Chapter 1091 Chapter 443 The Third Northern Expedition_3 ?Chapter 1091: Chapter 443 The Third Northern Expedition_3 Chapter 1091: Chapter 443 The Third Northern Expedition_3 As for the Jiaodong army, which was largely controlled by an abundance of old-party talent, an even greater number of people announced their defection and directly incited mutinies, either killing or driving out those outsiders from Zhou Country. Although Liang Mingyu¡¯s faction had the support of five Inborn from Zhou Country, giving it a quite significant advantage in top-tier combat strength within Liang at present, on the high-level and middle-to-low-level, the opponent¡¯s foundation was simply too shallow. Due to long-term suppression earlier, Liang Mingyu had limited access to resources and had never been able to properly develop his core confidants. Although he rather inflated his ranks by taking advantage of Chu State¡¯s Northern Expedition over the past two years, the actual number of his loyal personnel was only a few hundred. With such a small number of people, attempting to control over a million soldiers, an Imperial Capital, and two prefectures and counties was indeed a bit of a stretch. Now that Liang Mingzhang had stepped forward to vie with him for the emperor¡¯s righteous mantle, he was incapable of using the Heavenly Son¡¯s advantage to attract more people to his camp. This also resulted in his gains from the military coup not only being poorly consolidated but also inviting the quashed old forces to strike back. Within Jiaodong County, Liang Mingyu¡¯s lineage only had two Inborns and a little over a hundred loyalists. These people could barely control three hundred thousand soldiers. The remaining four hundred thousand border soldiers and the other three Inborn within them were controlled by the old party of Liang Country. Once these people started causing trouble, the situation in Jiaodong County instantly spiraled out of control. An abundance of old-party soldiers from Liang, cooperating with the Chu army, directly seized half of Jiaodong County, and considering the part taken by Chu Country last year in the southern region of Jiaodong County, Liang Mingyu¡¯s controlling area in Jiaodong County was left with only a small portion in the west near Xian¡¯an City. All together, it didn¡¯t even make up a quarter of Jiaodong County. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 Even among the thirty thousand border soldiers under the opponent¡¯s control, there was considerable unrest and lack of military spirit due to an inflow of old-party military officers. It wasn¡¯t just Jiaodong County that was affected; even in Donglai County where Xian¡¯an, the Imperial Capital, was located, a large number of prefectures and counties near Yingling County started to change their banners and joined Liang Mingzhang¡¯s camp, which was also Chu State¡¯s side. It was only those cities controlled by the three hundred thousand strong army under He Ba Yuan¡¯s command that, due to the presence of heavy forces, the local officials dared not openly rebel and could only continue to profess their loyalty. However, in secret, they still sent their confidants to Lin Qiucheng to express their fealty. Even Donglai County, meticulously cultivated by Liang Mingyu, witnessed such large-scale defections and pledges of allegiance; thus, in Jiaoxi County where his base was weakest, the situation was even worse. There Yan Yunqing sat in power, Yet Yan Yunqing was born into poverty and had managed to rise through the military ranks step by step to reach his current position and become a renowned general. But even as a famous general, his foundations within Liang were still shallow. Among the noble officials and aristocratic families of Liang, he was seen as nothing more than a grassroots upstart, a mere enforcer raised by them. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Having been famous for a decade or so, he had never fit into the high-level circles. He was a famous general of Liang, serving a need of the upper class, which was the only reason he could command the armies of Liang. But if the nobles and aristocratic families of Liang didn¡¯t cooperate, then no matter how esteemed he was, Yan Yunqing would be just a second realm Inborn. It was only those noble scions of the aristocratic families who were actually in command of his seven hundred thousand soldiers, while Yan Yunqing was merely the one issuing orders. Now that these scions, motivated by their families¡¯ fundamental interests, had begun to waver, Yan Yunqing¡¯s grip on the army was slipping away step by step, becoming difficult to command as he once did. Of Jiaodong County¡¯s seven hundred thousand Liang soldiers, the officers of three hundred thousand among them, upon receiving their families¡¯ instructions, immediately proclaimed their loyalty to the emperor in Lin Qiucheng, ignoring Yan Yunqing¡¯s orders entirely. Another two hundred thousand declared neutrality, choosing not to support either side and to wait and see how the situation unfolded. Only the last group, still loyal to Liang and unwilling to watch the country collapse, could be considered die-hard supporters of the great empire. They were also impressed by Yan Yunqing and subdued by the general¡¯s charisma, unwilling to betray him. Thus, Yan Yunqing could still just barely control two hundred thousand soldiers. However, that was his limit. With regards to the uncontrollable five hundred thousand soldiers, even this renowned general of Liang could not reverse the tide of lost hearts. Earlier Lu Yuan¡¯s compromise had indeed produced impressive results. Just by propping up a puppet and manipulating the justification on the surface, he had turned the formerly unified Liang into the currently fragmented state it was in. What Chu State initially had to facea€¡±a Liang army of two million and fourteen Inbornsa€¡±was now reduced to seven hundred thousand soldiers and seven Inborns. The enemy numbers had sharply declined by more than half; furthermore, the reduced portion had switched sides. It was now time for the forces that had just switched sides to turn their guns towards the remaining few. The situation in Liang was unprecedentedly favorable. For this reason, Lu Yuan decided to delegate the war affairs of the two countries to his avatar, Huang Xuan. The Southern Route Army had one million five hundred thousand soldiers and twenty Inborn. Now, with the additional support of one million Liang soldiers and seven Inborn from Jiaoxi, Yingling, Donglai, and Jiaodong counties, dealing with the leftover seven hundred thousand Liang soldiers and seven Inborn was a crushing advantage. If Liang could not be subdued with such an advantage, then Lu Yuan would have to question whether there was a problem with this avatar of his. Therefore, facing such an overwhelming situation, he decided to let go completely and let the Southern Route Army handle it themselves. As for Lu Yuan himself, he was preparing to lead the Central Route Army to tackle another tough opponent, Xu State. Liang only controlled four prefectures in Qingzhou. But Xu State had also expanded in Qingzhou by taking advantage of the Chu Northern Expedition over the past two years, controlling Dongping, Le¡¯an, and Qingping, making its roots in Qingzhou quite deep. Backed by Xuzhou, Xu State¡¯s power had now almost matched that of Wei Country before the Northern Expedition. Such an enemy was not easy to deal with. But because it was difficult, Lu Yuan himself had to step in. Chapter 1092 - Chapter 1092 Chapter 444 Four Military Expeditions ?Chapter 1092: Chapter 444: Four Military Expeditions Chapter 1092: Chapter 444: Four Military Expeditions The conflict between Chu State and Xu State was not new. Although last year, taking advantage of the great victory in Liang Prefecture, Lu Yuan had Qingxuanzi charge into Dongping Prefecture and seize numerous prefectures and counties. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Nevertheless, Xu State, with its profound heritage, quickly responded after its devastating defeat, and in the carefully constructed fortress of Dongping Prefecture, they stubbornly resisted Qingxuanzi¡¯s vast army. Ultimately, when snow began to fall and winter set in, the Chu army had managed to capture only three prefectures within Dongping Prefecture. They had not achieved complete success. Now, after a winter¡¯s recovery, Xu State was mobilizing troops and dispatching generals within the country, and conscripting soldiers on a grand scale. The million-strong army that Xu lost in Liang Prefecture had been completely replenished. In Dongping Prefecture now, a million Xu soldiers were arrayed in waiting, ready for the arrival of the Chu army. As one of the few old dominant states in the Nine Provinces that had not been crippled by Chu State, such a powerful adversary was of course taken very seriously by Lu Yuan. Without defeating the opponent and driving Xu State out of Dongping, Le¡¯an, and Qingping Prefectures, Chu State would not be able to unify Qingzhou. Therefore, for this adversary, he was prepared to come in person. ¡°I hope Xu State can make it interesting for me and not lose so quickly,¡± he said. On the altar outside the great walls of Daliang, after proclaiming the crimes of Xu State to Heaven, Lu Yuan officially announced the start of the third Northern Expedition. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï At this moment, his gaze turned northward, his eyes alight with excitement. As a veteran of the battlefields, he naturally had great interest in the few remaining formidable enemies in his quest for unification. Because Lu Yuan knew that as he advanced step by step in his quest for unification, the number of enemies he faced would diminish. Once Chu State was unified, there would be no enemies left at all. Then would come an era of lasting peace and prosperity, and it would be difficult to encounter any adversaries again. Now with each battle fought, there was one less battle to fight. With only so few opportunities left, he naturally cherished each one immensely and held them in high regard. ¡­ In Dongping Prefecture, Xichang City. One month later, Lu Yuan led the central army and arrived below this city. ¡°Your Majesty, look. Now half of Xu Army in the entire Dongping Prefecture is stationed within Xichang City, and there are ten Inborn Grandmasters present. As our Great Chu¡¯s celestial troops move north, these Xu soldiers have dug deep trenches and erected high ramparts, stubbornly holding out without venturing forth, which makes them difficult to deal with,¡± said Lv Guoying, the vanguard of this great army. This man was originally a major general from Western Liang, brave and skilled in battle, breaking the vanguard and defeating the enemy, the finest in Yong West. When Chu State and Western Liang clashed in Helong, they frequently suffered at the hands of this Lv Guoying. After Western Liang fell and surrendered, this former adversary had opportunistically defected to Chu State, becoming a general in the ranks of Chu army. For this Northern Expedition, Lu Yuan had Lv Guoying serve as one of the vanguards, leading the way into Dongping Prefecture to pave the path for the main army in advance. ¡°Another strong city indeed!¡± Lu Yuan scrutinized Xichang City closely, observing its walls ten zhang high and encircling thirty-plus li, with its surroundings strewn with trenches and chevaux-de-frise, and the camps joined together, almost rivaling Daliang. The Xu people had managed a lot in their two years of management here. ¡°If we proceed with past tactics, capturing this city would require a million casualties before we could see any results,¡± Lu Yuan estimated, shaking his head. This central army, although boasting one and a half million soldiers and two million two hundred thousand captives, nearly four million troops in total, could be deemed exceedingly robust. But the objective of the central military expedition was substantial. Dongping, Le¡¯an, and Qingping Prefectures were all targets of conquest. If attacking Xichang City alone would cost a million lives. Then how would the other strongholds of Dongping Prefecture and the prefectures of Le¡¯an and Qingping be attacked? It was unthinkable to expend all 3.7 million men on these battles! If it were Daliang, a city of great significance, Lu Yuan would indeed be willing to incur heavy casualties to capture it. But Xichang City was merely a prefectural capital. To lose a million lives for a prefectural capital was truly unwarranted. It would be a different story if it were the southern capital of Le Ling in Xu State. ¡°Aside from Xichang City, what¡¯s the situation with the other Xu forces in Dongping Prefecture?¡± Lu Yuan turned and asked someone responsible for intelligence on the side. With a million Xu Army in the eastern prefecture, now that five hundred thousand were gathered in Xichang City, it was unclear how the rest were distributed. ¡°Back to Your Majesty,¡± The man bowed and then answered: ¡°Besides Xichang City, Xu Army has established two strongholds in Dongping Prefecture. One is Shouzhang City, which lies to the south of Dongping Prefecture, garrisoning three hundred thousand Xu soldiers and housing five Inborn Grandmasters. The other, Wuyan City, lies east of Xichang and can be considered the rear. Xu Army has stationed two hundred thousand men there, with three Inborn Grandmasters.¡± Lu Yuan unfolded the map and took a look before frowning: ¡°Xu Army has turned Wuyan City into the second line of defense, it seems.¡± The shape of Dongping Prefecture was roughly that of an irregular rectangle, or, to be exact, an inverted trapezoid. Last year, Chu Army marched north and captured the western three prefectures of Dongping. Therefore, the western part of Dongping Prefecture was already under Chu control. Xichang City was located at the center of Dongping Prefecture, from which the Xu Army could shield several prefectures in the central area. Shouzhang City lay about four hundred li to the south of Xichang City, near the border between Liang Prefecture and Dongping Prefecture, making it a stronghold in the south. With Xu Army controlling this city, they could defend the area south of Xichang while blocking the route from the southwest of Dongping to Le¡¯an Prefecture for any Chu forces. If Chu Army wished to pass this way, the three hundred thousand Xu forces in the city could emerge at any time, posing a serious threat to the Chu rear, a position of extreme strategic importance. Indeed, these two cities, supporting each other, effectively sealed off the path from Liang Prefecture to Le¡¯an Prefecture for the Chu forces. Chapter 1093 - Chapter 1093 Chapter 444 Four Military Expeditions_2 ?Chapter 1093: Chapter 444: Four Military Expeditions_2 Chapter 1093: Chapter 444: Four Military Expeditions_2 The role of Dongping County as the western barrier of Le¡¯an Prefecture had been maximized. As for the last city, Wuyan City, it is located behind Xichang and Shouzhang, on the border of Dongping and Le¡¯an Prefectures, and does not directly border the range covered by the Chu army. The Xu army has set up a major stronghold here, obviously determined to use this city as the second line of defense after Xichang and Shouzhang. No matter which frontline city falls, if the Chu army wants to push forward and penetrate into Le¡¯an, they must face Wuyan City blocking their way. With this city in place, there is an additional buffer zone. This gives Xu State in the rear more time and energy to regroup a large army and continue resisting. Creating impregnable defenses and resisting at every stepa€¡±such is the strategy Xu State has been implementing in the face of Great Chu¡¯s Northern Expedition. They know they can¡¯t win against the Chu army on the open battlefield. So they simply don¡¯t engage directly, preferring to hold out in defense, seeking to delay time and use strongholds to wear down the Chu army¡¯s manpower and resources. It¡¯s a pure contest of national strength, to see who can last the longest. ¡°Reporting to Your Majesty, this is indeed what the Xu army intends,¡± said Guo Yishou, the Commander of the Imperial City¡¯s Foreign Intelligence, supplementing at this moment: ¡°According to my investigations, besides the million-strong army in Dongping County, the Xu army has also gathered five hundred thousand troops in Le¡¯an Prefecture. Among them, three hundred thousand and six Inborn, are stationed in their South Capital Le Ling. The remaining two hundred thousand, with two Inborn, are garrisoned in the southwestern stronghold city of Sheqiu in Le¡¯an Prefecture. Sheqiu City is only three hundred li away from Wuyan City, with one to the south and one to the north, jointly controlling the region of four prefectures in the west and southwest of Le¡¯an Prefecture. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï If the front cities of Xichang and Shouzhang fall, then Sheqiu City and Wuyan City would become the second line of defense. And the three hundred thousand-strong army in Le Ling City will serve as a reserve, ready to support the two cities on the front line at any time.¡± Lu Yuan nodded slightly upon hearing this. The Xu army¡¯s arrangements were indeed as he had anticipated, turning the land of Qingzhou they controlled into an iron fortress. Especially after learning the lesson from the rapid annihilation of Liang, they refrained from dividing their forces unnecessarily, preventing their already limited troops from being spread too thin. Instead, they concentrated their limited forces on a few strongholds, ensuring that each major city had sufficient troops for defense. This made it extremely difficult for the Chu army to capture any of the four cities mentioned above. ¡®The people of Xu State have learned their lesson¡­¡¯ Lu Yuan mused to himself, but also found it challenging. War is undoubtedly the best catalyst for maturation. Over these two years, not just Great Chu, but the other nations have also quickly learned from their mistakes, becoming increasingly difficult to deal with. Presently, to confront Xu State seemed even more challenging than facing Liang. This was undoubtedly somewhat inconceivable. You should realize that Liang was the overlord of Central State, having once nearly occupied the entire region of Qingzhou. Although Xu State also claimed control over Xuzhou, under the encroachment of the cold wave, what remains is now less than the territory of four counties. Such a state, compared to the Qingzhou of Liang, is obviously not on the same level. ¡°Xu State has also grown extremely fast over these two years,¡± said Guo Yishou beside him with a sigh: ¡°Taking advantage of our Northern Expedition against Liang State, Xu State successively captured the three prefectures of Dongping, Le¡¯an, and Qingping over the past two years, acquiring tens of millions of Liang people. Then, also taking advantage of the massive tracts of land vacated by the Qingzhou immigrants moving southward, they recruited a large number of Barbarians remaining in Xuzhou, gaining millions of people and nearly ten Barbarian Inborn. Based on the reports from spies planted inside Xu State, a rough estimate shows that Xu State¡¯s population now totals about forty million people. Such national strength has surpassed the former Wei Country. In the world today, it is second only to Great Chu and can be called the second most powerful nation in the world.¡± Everyone agreed upon hearing this, and they all felt a sense of awe for the fate of Xu State. Although Great Chu benefited significantly from the two Northern Expeditions, Xu State also gained a lot from following behind without expending much effort, acquiring three prefectures and recruiting tens of millions of people from Liang and the Barbarians, nearly doubling its national strength. Now, with its forty million population, Xu State can maintain a standing army of three million in regular times. Going all out, mustering five or six million troops is well within reach. Especially since Xu State¡¯s territory is much smaller than that of Liang. With only three prefectures of Qingzhou within the Chu army¡¯s range of attack, this allows the opponent, if they wish, to even station a million troops in each region of the three prefectures. This one aspect alone makes them much stronger than the originally cumbersome and hollow Liang, by who knows how much. No wonder Lu Yuan, after understanding the details of Xu State, felt that it was a formidable enemy, important enough to personally lead the troops for its subjugation. Such an enemy truly warrants all the attention it can get. ¡°Besides Dongping and Le¡¯an prefectures, I¡¯ve heard that Xu State has also stationed eight hundred thousand troops and five Inborn in Qingping County?¡± Lu Yuan pondered for a while and then asked. Guo Yishou nodded: ¡°Indeed it is so. After taking over Qingping County from Liang State, Xu State took on the task of shielding against Tang Kingdom. Facing the mad dog of Tang Kingdom, which bites anyone it sees, Xu State can¡¯t afford to be careless, hence the need to maintain a strong presence in Qingping County as a precaution. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 However, this year Tang Kingdom has been troubled by Zheng, Jin, and Xu forming the Three Nations, and now the Four Kingdoms are fiercely engaged in Yuzhou, leaving them no energy to concern themselves with Qingzhou affairs.¡± Chapter 1094 - Chapter 1094 Chapter 444 Four Military Expeditions_3 ?Chapter 1094: Chapter 444: Four Military Expeditions_3 Chapter 1094: Chapter 444: Four Military Expeditions_3 ¡°` Therefore, if the battles in Dongping County and Le¡¯an Prefecture become critical, Xu State may transfer troops from Qingping County to support the two jurisdictions. If only the most basic defensive requirements for Qingping County are to be maintained, a garrison of four hundred thousand would suffice. Hence, within Qingping County, the Xu Army should be able to withdraw a force of four hundred thousand, along with two or three Inborn, which is a threat that cannot be ignored,¡± Lu Yuan said, furrowing his brows deeper as he continued, ¡°And what about their rear, in the Xu Province itself?¡± Guo Yishou said, ¡°In Xu Province itself, Xu State still has four prefectures under its control and a population of over ten million. Additionally, because Xu Province borders Tang Kingdom¡¯s Jingzhou and Zhao State¡¯s Ji Province, a substantial military garrison is necessary. Thus, in Xu Province proper, there remain seven hundred thousand Xu troops garrisoned with about five Inborn commanding. In terms of strength, it is quite formidable.¡± Xichang City: five hundred thousand troops, ten Inborn. Shouzhang City: three hundred thousand troops, five Inborn. Wuyan City: two hundred thousand troops, three Inborn. Sheqiu City: two hundred thousand troops, two Inborn. Le Ling City: three hundred thousand troops, six Inborn. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Qingping County: eight hundred thousand troops, five Inborn. Xu Province proper: seven hundred thousand troops, five Inborn. Lu Yuan calculated the Xu State¡¯s strength in his mind: ¡®Adding up the military forces at these places gives a total of three million troops, thirty-six Inborn Grandmasters. Indeed, the foundation of Xu State has fattened up. In this Central Route Army, except for having a slight advantage in Inborn top-tier combat strength thanks to my Avatar, in other aspects, we are no match for Xu State.¡¯ Having sorted out these calculations, Lu Yuan realized that Xu State could not be taken by force. Considering the opponent¡¯s three million standing troops, if he were to attack their cities one by one, no matter how many men he had, there would not be enough to sustain such losses. If he really were to do so, that would be playing right into Xu State¡¯s hands, falling into their trap. Xu State probably wanted just that: to wear down Chu State slowly and gradually drag it to its downfall. After all, the opponent held the defensive advantage, with strongholds to rely on, they could inflict a casualty rate of two or even three to one on the Chu army. That is, for every Xu soldier killed, two or three Chu soldiers would die. To exhaust the opponent¡¯s three million men, Chu State would first have to suffer seven or eight million casualties. Given Xu State¡¯s depth, could the opponent raise another three million soldiers after losing three million? By that time, would Chu State continue the fight, sacrificing another seven or eight million lives? To defeat Xu State, to lose fifteen or sixteen million lives would amount to the population of a dominant countrya€¡±the price was simply too great. While Lu Yuan could afford it, he did not consider it worthwhile. ¡®Therefore, a frontal assault on this battlefield is not the answer; we must consider other strategies.¡¯ He pondered the situation, then asked, ¡°How is the battle going at the Southern Route Army?¡± Guo Yishou replied, ¡°Your Majesty, led by True Person Huang Xuan, the Southern Route Army has divided its forces into two paths. Among them, True Person Huang Xuan is leading the main army, accompanied by Emperor Lin Qiu of Liang and his Liang troops, marching north towards Donglai County. They have already positioned themselves near Xian¡¯an City. Meanwhile, True Person Huang Yun is leading a detached force and has entered Jiaodong County. With the aid of three Inborn and the defection of Lin Qiu Emperor¡¯s five hundred thousand Liang troops in Jiaodong County, they have already driven out the Le¡¯an forces supporting Emperor Xian An from the county and taken control of the whole Jiaodong County. ¡°` ¡°` Now, True Person Huang Yun has already left a portion of troops stationed in Jiaodong County, while he himself, leading the main force, is preparing to hurry to Xian¡¯an City to join with True Person Huang Xuan¡¯s principal force. Over in Jiaoxi County, after Yan Yunqing lost control over the majority of his troops as spring began, he also tried to reclaim them, leading soldiers to attack those rebels. But it wasn¡¯t long before he received a plea for help from Xian¡¯an City. Now, Yan Yunqing had no choice but to leave Jiaoxi County and take his two hundred thousand men back to reinforce Xian¡¯an. So now, within Jiaoxi County, there are three hundred thousand troops loyal to Great Chu and two Innates, along with another two hundred thousand troops remaining neutral, under the control of one Innatea€¡±in essence, it¡¯s a land without a master.¡± Guo Yishou organized and reported the current situation in Liang. After listening, Lu Yuan immediately communicated with his avatars using his divine sense. After exchanging information and confirming there were no major discrepancies, he nodded slightly. Compared to the tough problem on his own side, Liang, which had already been dismantled and fragmented, was undoubtedly a soft persimmon. With just a little effort from Chu¡¯s troops, it would fall apart, unable to withstand a single blow. At this rate, it might be possible to wipe out this once world-dominating power within two to three months. ¡°Issue an order, have fifty thousand detached troops from the central route camp and seven Innate Generals, led by Master Qingyangzi, march through Shanyang County and invade Jiaoxi County. Integrate the thirty thousand Liang troops inclined towards our army and subdue the other twenty thousand neutral Liang troops. After taking over the whole of Jiaoxi County, establish Le¡¯an Camp on-site with fifty thousand Chu detached troops and fifty thousand Liang troops, with ten Chu and Liang Innate Generals as the core, and Master Qingyangzi as the Camp Commander. The only target of Le¡¯an Camp is to march north to Le¡¯an Prefecture, conquer South Capital, Le Ling of the Xu Country, and contain Xu Country¡¯s Le¡¯an Prefecture army.¡± Having understood Liang¡¯s situation, Lu Yuan immediately issued orders. An officer responsible for conveying orders, upon hearing this, quickly wrote the decree, sealed it after verification, and hastened to dispatch it upon confirming it was error-free. Having issued this decree, Lu Yuan then released a second one. ¡°Order the fifty thousand detached troops led by Huang Yun, as well as the fifty thousand Liang troops from Jiaodong County who have surrendered, to form Qingping Camp, with Huang Yun as the Camp Commander, subordinate to ten Innates. Qingping Camp is responsible for capturing Qingping County, to constrain Xu Country¡¯s large army of eighty thousand stationed in Qingping County.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± The officer who had just finished writing the decree hastily began writing again. Seeing this, Lu Yuan nodded with satisfaction. Xu Country was a tough nut to crack, and relying solely on his central route camp, it was an impossible task. But with the full support of Great Chu behind him, why rely only on one central route camp? If one camp is insufficient, then simply deploy three. Doesn¡¯t Xu Country have three counties in Qingzhou? Perfect, let each camp attack a county and see if it can withstand the onslaught of these three large forces. Let¡¯s say they can hold out. Do not forget that in Donglai County, Chu¡¯s forces also have a Southern Route Army. This camp, too, boasts eight Innate Generals from Chu, two Innate Generals from Liang, one million Chu troops, over two hundred thousand Liang troops, and two hundred thousand captured Liang soldiers. This power is equally formidable. Once the battle of Xian¡¯an is concluded, the Southern Route Army can be mobilized at any time to join the battlefield in Xu Country. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t believe that with the combined strength of four camps, he wouldn¡¯t be able to take down Xu Country within the year. ¡°` Chapter 1095 - Chapter 1095 Chapter 445 The Second Emperor of the Liang Country ?Chapter 1095: Chapter 445: The Second Emperor of the Liang Country Chapter 1095: Chapter 445: The Second Emperor of the Liang Country Just when Lu Yuan was at the foot of Xichang City, agonizing over the strong defenses of Xu State, In Donglai County, thousands of miles away, The new Emperor of Liang, Mingyu, was also filled with anxiety about the formidable Chu Army outside the city. ¡°Those rebels, seize!¡± Atop the walls of Xian¡¯an City, Mingyu, accompanied by He Ba Yuan and other generals, watched the enemy camp where Chu and Liang banners intermingled, couldn¡¯t help but slap the city wall and curse in pain and anger. No wonder he was so angry. Anyone would be enraged to see their own kin join forces with outsiders to plunder the family inheritance passed down through generations. Moreover, it¡¯s infuriating to see the household servants not only refuse to help resist but also traitorously collaborate with the foe. And that was precisely the situation Mingyu faced. The Chu Army had arrived in force, a million strong, and within their domain, tens of thousands of Liang¡¯s own forces served as vassals. In just ten days¡¯ time, they had lost Jiaodong County. The Imperial Capital, located in Donglai County, had also seen its southern and eastern parts completely fall. This perilous situation had almost instantly pushed Liang State to the brink of extinction. As a usurper who had ascended to the throne through a coup just two or three months earlier, Mingyu had not long basked in the pride of his position before suffering such a heavy blow. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï How could he not feel furious and panicked? ¡°Your Majesty, don¡¯t be angry.¡± He Ba Yuan, standing beside his Emperor, tried to reassure him as he heard him getting upset: ¡°The two hundred thousand frontier troops from Jiaodong have already withdrawn and arrived at Xian¡¯an. And within Xian¡¯an City itself, we have three hundred thousand elite soldiers. That¡¯s already five hundred thousand troops, including five Inborn experts. Furthermore, General Yan, upon receiving Your Majesty¡¯s summons, has also hurried here from Jiaoxi County with military aid. He has another two hundred thousand troops and two Inborn experts at his command, among which General Yan is renowned across the world. Once the three forces join together, our grand Liang will have seven hundred thousand troops and seven Inborns in Xian¡¯an Citya€¡±our strength can indeed be considered substantial. Although the Chu forces outside are numerous, they are at most only twice our number, and many of them are defectors and traitors, nothing more than a ragtag army. As we have a strong city to hold, ready and rested, we should be more than capable of defending against them. Once the Chu Army is left battered and weary from their assaults on the city, losing their fighting spirit, our grand army could sally forth with our finest troops and crush their exhausted forces. By then, defeating the Chu Army will allow us to easily reclaim lost territories like Jiaoxi and Jiaodong merely by dispatching one or two messengers. Even the fallen counties of Shanyang and Rencheng can be recaptured with an offensive. Should Your Majesty establish such an extraordinary record of achievements upon your ascension, revitalizing Liang and restoring our rivers and mountains, Who then, throughout our nation, would dare to question Your Majesty¡¯s legitimacy or disobey your command?¡± At this moment, the morale of the army and the spirit of the warriors are of utmost importance. He Ba Yuan deeply understands that with the nation¡¯s borders having fallen, and reports of defeat everywhere, and the Chu Army at the gates of the capital, the people within are filled with fear and anxiety. Therefore, all the more at such a time, the Emperor and Commander must not show any signs of fear. If you, the mainstay, appear so flustered, those following you will become even more frightened upon seeing this. The little fighting spirit they still hold will be completely lost, deprived of the courage to resist the Chu Army. Once that point is reached, rallying people¡¯s hearts and spirits would not be as easy as it is now. Hence, even though He Ba Yuan knew well that the grand vision he painted was hard to achieve, he still picked the brighter aspects to underscore, embellishing his descriptions as much as possible. It was all to give those within the city more hope and confidence, to compel them to keep resisting. And the effect? Seeing that everyone around him, from the Emperor down to the common soldiers, seemed much improved in spirits after listening to his words, He Ba Yuan nodded slightly to himself. However, he was also unsure how much of the confidence displayed by the people was genuine and how much was feigned? But as long as the facade was maintained that was sufficient. What the top echelons thought was irrelevant. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï The key was to deceive the ordinary soldiers and people below, ensuring they were not intimidated by the might of the Chu Army, encouraging them to keep on fighting. It¡¯s tough to deceive the wise, but the ignorant masses are easily misled. This is what it means to bolster the courage of the troops. ¡°He Ba Yuan speaks true. With our strong fortress, reinforcements on the way from two directions, and support from Xu State in our rear, what is there to fear from a mere military expedition from Chu?¡± Mingyu was well aware of the situation, so upon hearing He Ba Yuan¡¯s words, he immediately understood his general¡¯s intent and joined in the encouragement. Seeing the agreement of their leaders, the trusted ministers around them were naturally quick to catch on and joined in bolstering the sentiment. ¡°Your Majesty is right. Xu State is a regional hegemon that, in the past two years, has incorporated the Barbarians in the north, forming an army of a million strong. Now that they have shifted their nation¡¯s focus to Qingzhou and even moved their capital to Leling, it demonstrates their importance to this region. Currently, Chu State is unabashedly aggressive, daring to make moves against both our great Liang and Xu State at oncea€¡±truly underestimating us. Now that our two countries have joined forces with an army of five million, our presence is even more imposing than the Chu people¡¯s. We must crush the Chu Army this time, blunt their edge, and show those Nan people that our northern lands too harbor heroes!¡± ¡°Indeed, in the Land of Yu State, Zheng, Jin, and Xua€¡±the Three Nationsa€¡±are also uniting to purge the Tang traitors. With the combined forces of the Three Nations, the fall of Tang Kingdom is but a matter of time. Once they have exterminated Tang, Chu¡¯s ally, they can spare forces to support Liang. Then another few million troops will be joining us in aid; not just to hold Xian¡¯an City, taking back our old capital of Liang will be a breeze.¡± ¡°a€|¡± The ministers voiced their support, not caring much for the actual state of affairs, and pointing in whatever direction served their interests. After all, they were taking advantage of the lower ranks¡¯ lack of access to information and ignorance of the overall situation, saying whatever served their own advantage. Chapter 1096 - Chapter 1096 Chapter 445 The Second Emperor of the Liang Country_2 ?Chapter 1096: Chapter 445: The Second Emperor of the Liang Country_2 Chapter 1096: Chapter 445: The Second Emperor of the Liang Country_2 The crowd also saw it clearly. They themselves, these soldiers of the New Party, had already cut themselves off from the Old Party of Liang, with a deep hatred as vast as the sea between them, impossible to reconcile. Now, these remnants of the Old Party had colluded with Chu State. To march on them now meant they came to break Xian¡¯an, to eliminate them. If they could not hold Xian¡¯an City, not only would they lose the glory and riches at hand, but even their families would struggle to survive. In such a life-and-death situation, naturally, every single one of them was doing their utmost, exerting all their effort. Motivated by the various emperors and generals¡¯ rallying, the topics and news discussed today also quickly spread to the middle and lower echelons under the deliberate push of those at the top. The soldiers guarding the city, as well as the citizens inside it, felt much more settled upon hearing it, where previously their hearts were in turmoil. At the very least. From the previous despair, believing that Xian¡¯an City could definitely not be defended, that their assets and lives were in peril. It changed into perhaps being able to hold, that the Chu army might not be able to break through. While this change of heart was still not exactly great, it was already much better than before. At the very least, with this bit of morale, He Ba Yuan was confident that he could try to hold Xian¡¯an City. ¡®Chu thieves, previously allied with the Wei people and destroyed our homeland. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Now you come again to snatch away our new foundation, this hatred, this enmity, cannot coexist under the same sky.¡¯ Gazing at the Chu army banners outside the city, He Ba Yuan¡¯s eyes flashed with rage and a murderous intent. The animosity between these Zhou people and the Chu spanned over fifty years, starting from the days when Lu Yuan was still the King of Changsha, a grudge emerged that was hard to resolve. Now, he had the chance to fight on the battlefield, and all he thought about was avenging the old country. As for surrendering, such a thought never even surfaced in his mind. Either hold the city and survive, continue enjoying riches in Liang, Or die with the fall of the city, to repay the emperor¡¯s kindness, to maintain the honor of the old country. Beyond this, there was nothing else. ¡­ Outside the city, in Chu army¡¯s main camp. Huang Xuan, accompanied by a host of Chu and Liang military officers, was also watching the defenses of Xian¡¯an City. As the avatar of Lu Yuan, Huang Xuan naturally inherited the many years of experience in leading troops from the original. Observing from outside the city, the Liang army¡¯s camps and the main force¡¯s movements, he keenly sensed the demoralized state of the Liang soldiers. At this moment, he discussed with the generals and said with a smile, ¡°The pretender emperor¡¯s plight has come.¡± ¡°With Great Chu¡¯s heavenly troops here, who wouldn¡¯t be afraid?¡± By his side, a middle-aged man dressed in a Qing imperial robe, handsome in appearance, said flattering, ¡°Liang Mingyu is but a usurper and a rebel, a fratricide, who has dared to claim the imperial throne and call himself the lord of the country. But how could his cruel deeds block the mouths of the people throughout the world? Now with the righteous banners of Great Chu raised, people from all over are flocking to join us, deserting the false emperor, thus proving the will of the people. With the support of the generals, it shouldn¡¯t take more than a month or two to enter Xian¡¯an, eliminate the pretender, and reorganize the rivers and mountains of Liang.¡± This emperor in the Qing robe was none other than the puppet emperor Lin Qiu, supported by Chu State, Emperor Liang Mingzhang. As a mere figurehead, this Emperor of Liang clearly understood his existence¡¯s source. Now, towards his brother, he had not a trace of mercy, only filled with resentment and anger. As for Chu State, he was sycophantic and full of adulation, doing his utmost to flatter. And, as he spoke thus, the other Liang defectors around him also started to ingratiate themselves. ¡°His Majesty is right, with Great Chu¡¯s heavenly troops present, taking Xian¡¯an will be as easy as turning one¡¯s hand.¡± ¡°Over the years, Great Chu has campaigned east and west, invincible wherever it went. Conquering Liang, twice breaking through the capital. Leading armies westward, the Wei people fled to Shuofang. Marching north, the Xu people were shocked at Dongping. Heading east, the people of Zheng kneeled for peace. This military prowess is unprecedented. Now this insignificant pretender in Xian¡¯an, clinging to his small town, thinks to foolishly resist the heavenly troops, he¡¯s simply on the road to his death.¡± ¡°Exactly, the so-called wise recognize the times. Liang Mingyu, that brat, doesn¡¯t know to learn from us and surrender to Great Chu to preserve his life. ?¦Ï???.§ã0 Instead, he¡¯s deluded by the throne, resisting stubbornly; truly short-sighted, courting his own ruin.¡± Many Liang people started to praise Chu State vehemently. Listening to these flattering words, even Huang Xuan began to feel somewhat embarrassed. Other Chu generals, while feeling smug inside, couldn¡¯t help but look at those Liang people with a touch of disdain in their eyes. Liang Mingzhang and other Liang monarchs and ministers were of course aware of this. But despite the embarrassment, they still did not stop their flattery. There was no choice, face aside; they were still concerned about their own lives. For future wealth and status, what did it matter if they humbled themselves a bit now? ¡°Alright, gentlemen, no need for such talk,¡± Huang Xuan eventually could not tolerate it any longer, halting their words, then said earnestly and sincerely, ¡°To breach Xian¡¯an will require His Majesty¡¯s help and the aid of many valiant heroes from Liang. Xian¡¯an is strong, filled with numerous soldiers and horses. If we were to attack forcefully, the losses would be significant. As you all have said, Great Chu has raised its troops, with the Heavenly Mandate on its side, and the trend of the times too. Now that Qingzhou is almost unified, peace in the world is within sight. We, the officers and soldiers, need to preserve ourselves for the future, to mend the war-torn land, rather than waste ourselves in sieges. In this world, enough people have died. If we can lessen the death toll, then we will. Do you gentlemen still have acquaintances within the city who can be persuaded to lead their troops and defect? If anyone inside can forsake darkness for light, I shall not hold their past against them; not only will they not be punished, but they will be rewarded. From now on, we are all Chu people, why should we continue to fight and kill each other? The more who can be convinced to defect, the more lives will be saved. This too is our benevolence and righteousness.¡± Huang Xuan had no intention of forcefully attacking the Liang army hunkered down in the city. Already, Liang had lost Yingling to the south and Jiaodong to the east, its territory cut in half. Chapter 1097 - Chapter 1097 Chapter 445 The Second Emperor of the Liang Country_3 ?Chapter 1097: Chapter 445: The Second Emperor of the Liang Country_3 Chapter 1097: Chapter 445: The Second Emperor of the Liang Country_3 At this moment, on the west side, in Jiaoxi Prefecture, another avatar named Qingyangzi, sent by the original self, was leading troops in attack. Thus, the state of Liang lost yet another prefecture. Even Donglai Prefecture, where the Imperial Capital Xian¡¯an is located, has already been occupied by Chu State in both the south and the east. The area under control of Liang Mingyu¡¯s forces was now merely restricted to Xian¡¯an City and the three or four prefectures behind it. With such a small territory, it was undoubtedly wishful thinking to sustain the seven hundred thousand soldiers of Liang. The opponent couldn¡¯t endure a prolonged war, and if the conflict dragged on, Chu soldiers wouldn¡¯t even need to take action, as the Liang army would starve to death first. The dire circumstances faced by Nanyang and Henan Wei forces during the first Northern Expedition were now being played out by the Xian¡¯an Liang forces. On the other hand, looking at the Chu forces. Backed by the entire Chu State, the Southern Route Army not only had an endless stream of troops, but also a continuous supply of food and fodder, with the convenience of both land and sea transport ensuring ample supplies without fear of shortage. With such an advantage, Huang Xuan would be foolish to send forces to storm Xian¡¯an City. He didn¡¯t have any intention of attacking; in fact, he was planning to continue dividing his forces, aiming to successively capture the remaining Liang prefectures and counties outside Xian¡¯an City. Huang Xuan intended to completely encircle Xian¡¯an, turning it into an isolated city, cutting the Great Chu¡¯s Imperial Capital off from the outside world, and severing any possibility of supplies entering the city. In this way, a single city tasked with sustaining several hundred thousand inhabitants and a seven hundred thousand-strong army both inside and outside the city wallsa€¡±a total of over a million peoplea€¡±would be enough to exhaust the opponent. Given Liang¡¯s strained internal affairs over the years, there was hardly any grain stored in Xian¡¯an City. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 Just a siege of two to three months would plunge the enemy into a famine crisis. By then, Huang Xuan would only need to dig deep moats and build high ramparts outside the city, thoroughly containing it. Inside the city starved of grain, the Liang forces would have no choice but to break out to survive. By that time, the Chu army would have already constructed camps, readied defenses, and held the defensive advantage, waiting for the enemy to attack. With the roles of attacker and defender reversed, even the starving Liang forces would have to pay a price of two to three times, or even more casualties, to break through the Chu defense lines. At that point, the Chu forces would only need to push a little to rout the Liang forces and secure victory in the battle for Xian¡¯an. It was precisely because of such a clear understanding of the situation. So, when he received the news from Jiaoxi that Yan Yunqing was leading reinforcements. Huang Xuan not only didn¡¯t dispatch troops to prevent them but actually deliberately cleared the way, preparing to let this force enter Xian¡¯an City. The aim was to increase the population within Xian¡¯an City as much as possible, to hasten the depletion of the enemy¡¯s grain reserves. For the Chu forces at this time, the more enemies inside the city, the better; not a disadvantage, but an advantage. Forget seventy thousand enemies; Huang Xuan would not be afraid, even if there were a million. ¡®Now, just wait for Yan Yunqing, that renowned general of Liang, to fall entirely into the trap.¡¯ Huang Xuan went over his plans mentally, thinking to himself. He intended to finish off Liang¡¯s warfare once and for all with this campaign. Now, the forces of Liang in Donglai and Yingling either had already joined Chu or been driven toward Xian¡¯an. What remained was only Yan Yunqing¡¯s force in Jiaoxi still outside. If the opponent didn¡¯t come to Xian¡¯an, then, after taking Xian¡¯an City, more effort and resources would be wasted going to Jiaoxi Prefecture to encircle and destroy Yan Yunqing, which would require extra expenditures of money, grain, and time. Therefore, it is always better to deal with all the enemies at once, rather than several times over. At this time, the pretender Emperor Liang Mingyu¡¯s decree to recall Yan Yunqing, far from being a problem, actually facilitated Chu¡¯s efforts. This emperor, who came to power through a military coup, turned out to be quite a benevolent figure. Without him, Chu wouldn¡¯t have been able to resolve the Liang affair so easily this year. It¡¯s a pity. Because of a reached agreement with Liang¡¯s old guard on their mutual interests, the execution of Liang Mingyu was an absolute necessity. Otherwise, Huang Xuan wouldn¡¯t have minded letting such a good person live, offering him a wealthy gentleman¡¯s life to live out his days in the countryside. ¡°General, rest assured, I still have many clan members inside the city, which allows us to send messages and persuade them to surrender.¡± ¡°I also have many former subordinates and officials in the city serving as officers. A letter from me might induce them to raise the banner and switch allegiance.¡± ¡°Among the clan, there must be many who do not submit to Liang Mingyu. I can have someone make contact, which might bring others along. If a member of the Great Liang royal family were to surrender, this news would seriously undermine the morale of the military and sway the hearts of people inside.¡± While Huang Xuan was contemplating his strategy to capture Xian¡¯an, the Liang Monarch and Ministers, upon his request, were also offering advice and actively responding. ¡°Excellent, excellent, excellent!¡± Seeing this, Huang Xuan couldn¡¯t help but express his joy: ¡°With the assistance of you all, taking this city will be a breeze!¡± The matter of Liang was thus on the verge of being settled. ¡­ At the same moment. Yangzhou, Lingnan, South Sea Prefecture. On the walls of Nanhai City, banners of the Chu soldiers fluttered while the sound of the war drums resonated, echoing between Heaven and Earth. The elder Daoist Leader of Purple Cloud Dao in charge of the South Sea Prefecture was standing on the city tower with General Xuan Yu of Funa, looking at the gathering force of sea bandits outside the city with worried eyes. ¡°These pirates are growing in number; at this rate, I fear there might be over three hundred thousand of them outside the city. If this is the situation with Nanhai City, I dread to think how dire things must be in the other areas of Lingnan.¡± Looking out at the sea, where the piratical ships covered the bay like a dark cloud blocking the sun. Even someone as composed as Xuan Yu couldn¡¯t help but inhale sharply at the sight. These bandits, who emerged from the Southern Sea Island Domain and wreaked havoc on the South Sea for the past several decades, had become increasingly frenzied with the advancing Southern Polar Poisonous Fire. Especially in the past couple of years, as large numbers of troops and civilians began migrating from the south to the north with Chu¡¯s Northern Expedition. The entire region of Lingnan and the southwest had seen ninety-nine percent of their population relocate, leaving only residents near some of the fortified strongholds to produce grain and secure the food supply for the defending forces. Buoyed by windfall news, the seafaring Barbarians, like sharks that had scented blood, came swarming. ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï The sea bandits, who had previously been confined to the waters, now even dared to land and penetrate deep into the Lingnan Region, taking over abandoned towns and villages to settle in and start forming their own powers. And now, they gathered their forces and began to make moves on strategic locations like Nanhai City. The situation in Chu¡¯s south had reached an extremely precarious state. Chapter 1098 - Chapter 1098 Chapter 446 Yangzhou Raiders ?Chapter 1098: Chapter 446 Yangzhou Raiders Chapter 1098: Chapter 446 Yangzhou Raiders Dongting, Baling City. The crowd surged like a stream, carrying large and small bundles, traveling by carts and horses, or staggering along with troops, heading north. The Emperor¡¯s commands had already been relayed back, the north had triumphed, capturing the Liang¡¯s Imperial Capital, Daliang. His Majesty had already moved the capital to Daliang and had re-established it there. And although Baling City still retained the name of Imperial Capital, it had become the South Capital, and its political, economic, and cultural centers had long since begun to migrate northward. This glorious Imperial Capital of several decades had now entered decline, beyond anyone¡¯s ability to salvage. The residents of the city, too, at this time, were bound by a migration edict to abandon their properties and head north. ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï To this, naturally, there were those in the city who were reluctant and did not wish to leave their homeland. But now, the disasters of the Nine Provinces and the Four Extremes, with the passing of years, had long been known throughout the world. Everyone understood that although Yangzhou was desirable, sooner or later, it would be engulfed by that boundless poisonous fire. By then, those remaining would be burned alive by the flames and turned to ashes. With such natural disasters pressing down on them, no matter how unwilling they were in their hearts, for the sake of their own lives, the commoners had no choice but to agree to migrate. Even to the point that, in order to migrate quicker, there were squabbles. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? Just like in Jiuzhen County of Lingnan, according to the news from the defenders there, the southern part of Jiuzhen could already see traces of the Southern Polar Poisonous Fire. This indicated that the dreadful natural disaster had appeared on the lands of Chu State, just like it had in the northern countries. Under such circumstances, who would dare to continue staying in Yangzhou? As for the Northern Expedition, the people of Chu State supported it without exception, preferring to endure hardship rather than daring to give up on the campaign. Because everyone knew that His Majesty, vying for control of Central State, was doing so for the sake of securing a land for the people of the nation to survive. If the Emperor could not conquer more of Central State¡¯s territory, then when the people of Chu migrated there, there would not be sufficient land for their survival. This was in everyone¡¯s interest. From the Royal Nobles to the low-level commoners, no one was exempt. It was precisely this unanimous will that enabled Chu State to launch large-scale Northern Expeditions, mobilizing millions of people, for three consecutive years. Without uniting the interest of everyone, it would have been impossible to achieve this. ¡°How many people have left the city by now?¡± Atop the city walls of Baling, watching the long procession of migrants heading north, Sun Siwen turned his head and looked towards the official behind him. ¡°Reporting to Minister Sun, a million people have migrated. There is still another million residents being mobilized for migration,¡± the official from the Immigration Bureau, who had prepared for such questions, replied promptly. ¡°Hmm, to be able to migrate so many people in one month¡¯s time is commendable. You¡¯ve done your work well, I will report your merits to His Majesty,¡± Sun Siwen said, nodding in satisfaction when he heard the reply. This year, Lu Yuan had set a migrant quota for them at ten million people. The source of the migrant population was from South Capital Baling, as well as from Jianan and Qianzhong prefectures. Originally, Lu Yuan had planned to migrate all three million residents of Baling in one go. But upon receiving the message, Sun Siwen presented a memorial, requesting some modifications to this order. To change the migration of three million people from Baling to two million, and to keep one million people in the city. The reason was that Baling, as the South Capital, served as the real hub for the economic, political, cultural, and military affairs of the southern regions of Yangzhou. How could such a crucial place be allowed to become a ghost town? Moreover, although migration from Yangzhou had already begun gradually, the entire process was to continue for over a decade. Even after the initial phase of migration, some people on Yangzhou¡¯s main territory would still be left to continue living and working there. After all, the four major grain-producing plains of Xichuan, Jianghan, Dongting, and Pengli were crucial sources of grain for Chu State, and with the current widespread use of grain, these areas could not be easily abandoned. Therefore, unless the Southern Polar Poisonous Fire swept through, as long as these four areas remained stable for a day, Chu State would continue to farm there for a day. Using Yangzhou¡¯s funds and grain to subsidize the expenditures of Central State was a national policy already set by Lu Yuan and Sun Siwen. As long as this policy was in effect, Baling, as the center of the south, would continue to be the South Capital of Chu State, and could not be abandoned for even a day. In such a situation, it was necessary to retain a population of a million in the city to maintain the operations of the entire southern Yangzhou. Therefore, this migration directive had to be amended. Once Lu Yuan received this memorial, he also realized the key point and knew that he had been somewhat rash. He readily accepted the suggestion of his friend, agreeing to preserve a million people in Baling, while the shortfall of a million migrants would be made up by the local population of the southern mountainous areas of Dongting Prefecture. In the four prefectures south of Dongting, everywhere was mountainous, the local people barely had land to farm, and life was very hard. Especially after several decades of prosperity, with a population explosion, the resources per capita had decreased, making life even harder. Now, with pirates in the south becoming increasingly rampant and beginning to infiltrate the Lingnan Region, enemy presence was even approaching Dongting Prefecture. The southern part of Dongting Prefecture had started to become dangerous and unstable. And with the Chu army now campaigning in the north, far removed from Yangzhou by thousands of miles, they could not attend to this side at all. Within Yangzhou¡¯s own territory, only the county soldiers, newly formed over the past two years, totaling two million, were stationed for defense. There might be many, but when spread across the vast expanse of Yangzhou, it actually wasn¡¯t much. Each prefecture could only be allocated around one or two hundred thousand soldiers at most. With such a limited force, they naturally couldn¡¯t cover everything comprehensively, but could only choose key areas for defense on a limited basis. Chapter 1099 - Chapter 1099 Chapter 446 Yangzhou Raiders_2 ?Chapter 1099: Chapter 446 Yangzhou Raiders_2 Chapter 1099: Chapter 446 Yangzhou Raiders_2 However, beyond these vital regions, it is natural that some areas cannot be attended to, and oversights may occur. In such cases, for the areas of the south that are already unstable, it is naturally paramount to relocate the populace from these neglected places as much as possible. This is the case for Qianzhong County and Jian¡¯an County as well. Since we are to resettle immigrants now, it is best to start with the four prefectures south of Dongting County. ¡°Thank you, Minister Sun, this subordinate swears to devote his utmost effort to promptly handle this matter,¡± the Immigration Bureau official, upon hearing Sun Siwen¡¯s words, was overjoyed and quickly expressed his thanks and assurance. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï In the past two years, there have been two paths among Chu State officials for the quickest promotions. One is to head north to Central State and serve as an official in the occupied territories. As the occupied territories are unstable, and there are often news of officials being assassinated, every official in Chu State knows that going there is a life-threatening gamble. With even a slight bit of bad luck, one might lose their life over there. But as a return for risking one¡¯s life, the benefits of serving as an official in the north are substantial. Basically, just by going there, one can be promoted by one rank. With a bit more luck, a promotion of two ranks is not impossible. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Moreover, in such combat zones, devastation is everywhere, making it exceedingly easy to earn achievements. With such experience in serving as an official, for future promotions, it is considered to be a substantial addition to one¡¯s qualifications. It is indeed a good upward path, albeit a risky one. The other path is to join the Immigration Bureau within the Ministry of Revenue. As there has been constant immigration in recent years and the scale is vast, there is an urgent need for capable officials within the country to handle this matter. Those who are selected for the Immigration Bureau are without exception the efficient bureaucrats of the country. They are talents looked favorably upon by the higher-ups, prepared for grooming. So if you are chosen and serve in the Immigration Bureau for training, as long as you commit no errors during your term and accomplish what your superiors entrust you with, upon completing your service, you could rise up one or two ranks and be appointed elsewhere. Therefore, serving in the Immigration Bureau is also considered by the officials of Chu State as a shortcut to promotion that is on par with going north to Central State. It is even more favored by the officials of Chu State. Though working in the Immigration Bureau might be tough and exhausting, you can¡¯t beat the safety it offers. By going to Central State, you risk being assassinated, but working in the Immigration Bureau is on Chu State¡¯s main territory, amidst a flourishing and prosperous era, without any worries about troublesome rebels. Even if you accompany the immigrants to Central State, with a grand army escorting the journey, safety is guaranteed. With such a comparison, doesn¡¯t it highlight the superiority of the Immigration Bureau? Furthermore, after working in the Immigration Bureau for two or three years and getting promoted by one or two ranks, applying to go to Central State could mean another promotion of one or two ranks. For those who wish to rise through the ranks swiftly, this is indeed a shortcut within shortcuts. With such a prospect in front of them, it¡¯s no wonder many officers are desperate to squeeze into the Immigration Bureau at all costs. Now this official, upon hearing Sun Shiwen¡¯s praise and with previous achievements under his belt, was almost certain to have his promotion preordained. How could he not be grateful to his benefactor? ¡°Alright, spare me these words; I only regard tangible results. If you do well, I will promote you,¡± Nevertheless, Sun Siwen waved his hand dismissively, as it was in his nature not to favor flattery. Thus, having stopped the man¡¯s speech, he turned to say, ¡°Recently, sea bandits and barbarians have run rampant, continuously landing on the coast and penetrating deep into the heartland of Great Chu. Qianzhong County, the southern part of Dongting, Jianan County, and other places have already had constant reports from officials that bandits have appeared and the local prefectures and counties¡¯ soldiers are unable to restrain them. These regions are no longer safe, and to ensure the people of Great Chu remain unharmed, expedite the immigration matters so that the populace can move away from these dangerous areas to avoid the calamities brought by bandits.¡± ¡°Yes, this subordinate understands. I will discuss the matter with my colleagues and superiors upon my return and ensure the matter is handled swiftly,¡± the Immigration Bureau official pledged, giving a salute. ¡°Hmm, in that case, you may leave,¡± Sun Siwen nodded. ¡°This subordinate shall take his leave.¡± The official withdrew. Continuing to watch the flow of people for a while, Sun Siwen thought about the reports sent from the south, but the more he thought, the more uneasy he felt. Reflecting on it, he still felt the need to confer with someone to devise coping strategies. Thus, he too descended from the city tower and headed toward the Grand General¡¯s residence in the heart of the city. When Lu Yuan embarked on the Northern Expedition, not only did he take a large number of elite soldiers and strong generals, but he also arranged for the well-being of Yangzhou¡¯s main territory. Domestic civil affairs were to be decided by Sun Siwen, the Left Prime Minister. The military affairs within the country were to be determined by Grand General Zhou Qing. If there were any matters they could not decide on, they were to consult Her Majesty Empress Lan Cai Er, seated in the capital, for her decision. All three were confidants of Lu Yuan, capable and talented, and with them overseeing matters in the rear, he could feel at ease. By carriage, and after a short while under escort, they promptly arrived at the Grand General¡¯s residence. Having sent word ahead of time, Zhou Qing was already approaching to greet him with a beaming smile by the time Sun Siwen arrived. ¡°Minister Sun.¡± As a friend of his master, and a senior who had guided him in his youth, Zhou Qing had always treated Sun Siwen with the respect due to a mentor. During the years they resided in Changning County, they shared a deep bond of affection, and their friendship was beyond any doubt. Therefore, over the years, though they each advanced to the peak of military and civil hierarchies following Lu Yuan, their relationship remained as it was in the past, even deepening further. With the monarch and ministers in harmony, Great Chu¡¯s governance remained stable, and over the years, these tales spread far and wide, becoming the world¡¯s admired stories. Chapter 1100 - Chapter 1100 Chapter 446 Yangzhou Raiders_3 ?Chapter 1100: Chapter 446 Yangzhou Raiders_3 Chapter 1100: Chapter 446 Yangzhou Raiders_3 ¡°Grand General.¡± Sun Siwen looked at his increasingly outstanding junior, who he treated as a disciple, and couldn¡¯t help but reveal a smile. ¡°I came to see the Grand General this time to discuss the matter of the South Sea pirates landing ashore.¡± After the greeting, the two entered the Grand General¡¯s residence, and on the way, Sun Siwen explained his purpose for the visit. Zhou Qing smiled and said, ¡°Coincidentally, I was also just about to seek out Minister Sun to discuss sending troops to Lingnan to suppress the maritime pirates and barbarians.¡± Sun Siwen was slightly surprised. ¡°May I know what strategies the Grand General has in mind?¡± Zhou Qing pondered and said, ¡°The regions of Lingnan and the southwest, although a large number of civilians have been relocated to the Central State, His Majesty has not given up on these areas. In both places, the county cities of each prefecture and some important mountain passes still have troops garrisoned, and a portion of the civilians was left to produce and cultivate the land to supply military necessities. Thus, with these stronghold cities in place, the trend of the pirates deeply infiltrating the heartland of Great Chu has been curbed, forcing them to refrain from venturing too deeply inland before eliminating these city strongholds. ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï This clearly shows His Majesty¡¯s foresight in insisting on retaining these city strongholds despite, opposition at the time.¡± Zhou Qing bowed to the north with his hands clasped, his face filled with admiration. Originally, when Lu Yuan had the civilians relocated, whether to abandon the regions of the southwest and Lingnan altogether had sparked a heated debate within the country. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Many believed that since the civilians had moved away, the large barren regions had lost all their value. Garrisoning troops and maintaining a presence there not only wasted money and provisions but also left the army isolated, potentially leading to defeat amidst the barbarians. Had it not been for Lu Yuan overwhelming opposing views, asserting the emperor¡¯s authority, and forcefully implementing this policy to retain those stronghold cities in the south, the situation there today would have truly been difficult to manage. However, compared to Zhou Qing¡¯s view that Lu Yuan had foresight, the actual situation was slightly different. The reason Lu Yuan insisted on retaining these regions was mainly because he couldn¡¯t bear to part with the vast amounts of Qi Luck brought by the southwest and Lingnan. The combined southwest and Lingnan comprised more than eight prefectures of territory, and the Qi Luck provided by such a large area was substantial. If lost all at once, it would have nearly reduced Lu Yuan¡¯s existing Qi Luck by a fifth. Such a big loss was naturally unacceptable to him. Therefore, to maximize the Qi Luck these lands brought, he preferred to face a higher expenditure of money and provisions and greater risks, just to keep garrisons and civilians in the major cities and towns of Lingnan. He did it to maintain nominal rule over these regions, scraping together Qi Luck. Who would have thought that what was once a single-minded pursuit for Qi Luck would turn out to be a blessing in disguise, achieving an unexpected effect. This was an accidental gain as well. But to outsiders, this was not seen as any selfishness, but as the Emperor¡¯s great wisdom and martial prowess, further proving the depth of the Emperor¡¯s vision, inspiring even more admiration and awe. ¡°Initially, His Majesty instructed that each county city and capital in the south should retain at least fifty thousand soldiers, with two hundred thousand civilians reserved for cultivation needs. There are eighteen countries in the southwest and Lingnan combined, which makes for eighteen county cities and capitals. According to these instructions, that¡¯s a total garrison of nine hundred thousand troops and three point six million settlers. Among these eighteen strongholds, the southern frontline cities of South Sea Prefecture, Nanhai City, Yulin County, Yulin City, Jiuzhen County, Songping City, Capital of Dali, Capital of Nanzhao, Capital of Song, Capital of Fuchuan, Capital of Lanzhao, and other eight cities, each have an Inborn General stationed and generally have one hundred thousand soldiers assigned for defense. The number of settlers is accordingly increased by two hundred thousand people. And right now, it is these eight frontline cities that are being hit by the maritime pirates and barbarians. The defenders of the many strongholds in the south all come from the settlers. They defend the cities as if their own homes, thus they are determined to fight to the death, refusing to fear combat or retreat.¡± In terms of military morale and spirit, it¡¯s still assured. At the same time, among the settlers, there are quite a few idle strong men. These men have also intensified their training over the past two years, learning martial skills and military formations, and when mustered, they can also be quite useful. On the frontline, calculating based on four hundred thousand settlers per city, and subtracting one adult male per household, aside from the fifty thousand troops, each city can still muster an additional thirty thousand soldiers, bolstering their forces even more. With one Inborn General and eighty thousand soldiers, defending a major city, even if the enemy attacks with three to five hundred thousand soldiers, the city can still be held for two to three months, ensuring the city doesn¡¯t fall. Moreover, the eight cities on the frontline support each other, forming a perimeter; if one city is in trouble, the surrounding cities can come to its aid. In such a situation, conquering the cities becomes even harder. In the short term, the eight cities on the frontline are absolutely out of danger.¡± Zhou Qing first analyzed the situation. Listening to his gradual explanation, Sun Siwen, who was originally somewhat worried, also felt much relieved. Then he listened as he continued. ¡°However, as the maritime pirates and barbarians infiltrate further, their strength and numbers are increasingly great. One never knows when the circumstances could turn into what happened in Central State, with a massive army of a million attacking a single city. This arrangement is sufficient against previous conditions, but now it certainly will be found wanting.¡± Zhou Qing was not blindly optimistic but made adjustments after observing the severe changes in the southern situation. ¡°Therefore, I¡¯ve decided to pull another thirty thousand soldiers from each of the remaining ten strongholds behind those eight frontline cities to supplement the forces of the frontline eight. This will enrich the military strength of these frontline cities. As for the troops that these cities are missing, they will be replenished by local settlers. Even though these settlers are both soldiers and farmers, and their combat ability is inferior to the full-time Prefectures and Counties soldiers, it¡¯s marginally sufficient for city defense, especially with the belief in protecting their homes. And among the Inborn Grandmasters left in reserve within the country, an additional five will be selected and sent to the five most critical cities on the frontline to strengthen the top-level force. Moreover, from the two large areas of the southwest and Lingnan, another four cities will be chosen among the ten strongholds in the rear, and four Inborn Generals from the country will be assigned to station there. When enemies infiltrate the rear, these four Inborn Generals at the strongholds can lead troops to eliminate them.¡± During desperate times on the frontline, they can also lead Inborn generals to provide support, averting immediate crises. If the frontline can¡¯t be stabilized, with these buffers, it will be enough for us within the country to react in time, pulling together more reinforcements to rush to the rescue.¡± Zhou Qing slowly spoke of his strategy. Chapter 1101 - Chapter 1101 Chapter 447 Domestic Worries ?Chapter 1101: Chapter 447 Domestic Worries Chapter 1101: Chapter 447 Domestic Worries Zhou Qing could only provide assistance to Lingnan and the southwestern eighteen cities with four Inborn Grandmasters. As for other types of reinforcements, they had to be arranged by the local authorities of the two regions, which could be described as quite meager and stingy. But this was a compromise that he had to make out of necessity, having no other choice. Although Chu State had a strong military presence, with two million county soldiers organized in Yangzhou¡¯s main territory alone and another twenty-one Inborn guarding domestically, ensuring a solid foundation was left behind. However, as the only country in the world today with its own territory of one entire state still intact, Chu State, with its ten prefectures and eighteen vassal states, had too many places to defend. Countries like Zhao Xu, Tang Xu, with their homelands located in states like Ji, Xu, Jing, Liang, had as few as two or three prefectures left or as many as four or five, and the area they had to defend was less than a fifth of their original state, significantly diminished. The barbarian tribes to their north had also been substantially weakened and reduced due to decades of continuous migration southward. Take Xu State, for example, which even decided to recruit the remaining millions of barbarians within the state, greatly bolstering its domestic population and strength. Therefore, their border troubles weren¡¯t as severe as they seemed. Now they needed only to leave six or seven hundred thousand people and five or six Inborn at home to ensure safety and stability. This is also why these countries, despite their relatively meager strength compared to Chu State, were repeatedly able to mobilize large armies of two or three million. Even if these armies were annihilated, they could still quickly muster an equally large force to contend with Chu State. The relatively peaceful domestic environment was a significant factor in this. Otherwise, if Yangzhou were peaceful, Lu Yuan could have immediately called up another two million soldiers to form two military expeditions capable of waging a war of annihilation. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã? The importance of domestic stability is evident. But inevitably, the current tranquility in the North among various countries stems from the three or four decades of continuous northern warfare preceding this time, bought with innumerable lives. The peace they now enjoy is because they have already suffered and paid the price in advance, which is why they have these good days now. However, the disaster at the Southern Border of Chu State erupted later due to the late outbreak of the Southern Polar Poisonous Fire, coming thirty years later than the northern countries. As a result, Chu State is now bearing the brunt of the most devastating impact that the other states faced decades ago. Especially considering Chu State¡¯s location bordering two Great Domains directly. The Barbarians from the Southern Sea Island Domain and the Southern Territory Rainforest, two of the Nine Provinces¡¯ Ten Domains, were driven by the poison fire from the south and launched an assault on Chu State. Decades ago, the northern countries facing such an onslaught were basically one state contending with one domain, or two or three states against one domain. For example, the Snowy Plateau targeted only Yong State in Wei Country. The North Territory¡¯s grasslands, on the other hand, targeted Wei, Zhou, and Zhao countries simultaneously. In such circumstances, an invasion of ten million or tens of millions from one domain, though sufficiently troublesome, was still bearable for those dominant states. With adequate planning and a willingness to pay a price, they could manage the situation. Like Zhou Country, it nearly brought the Snow Plains Nomads to their knees despite being surrounded on all sides, and it was close to expanding its territory on the snowy wilderness and recruiting millions of Barbarians. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï If successful, not only could Zhou Country have resolved the predicament of facing enemies on all sides, but it also could have significantly expanded its power. In the end, it might not have been Wei Country that annihilated Zhou, but Zhou might have conquered Wei Country. Regrettably. Zhou Country, which was in a favorable position at the time, was struck down by Chu State. With Chu State¡¯s support, the Barbarians held on for over a decade in what was already a desperate situation, and ultimately, they exhausted Zhou Country. However, after bringing down Zhou, the Barbarians themselves also bled dry and were faced with annihilation under the pressure from Western Liang, eventually submitting to Chu State. Great Chu had its fill. Zhou Country and the Snow Plains Nomads, two factions that had been bitter enemies for over a decade, both faded into the dust of history. This demonstrates how deep the damage can be to a major force from a wound continuously bleeding over time. Two dominant powers, each of one state and one domain, were directly eradicated because of it. Fortunately, aside from Zhou Country which was specifically targeted by Chu State, the other major powers to the North didn¡¯t receive such special treatment. Sharing the common goal of migrating south to Central State to carve out their rights to existence, they not only refrained from pulling each other down during the barbarian invasion disaster but also watched and aided each other, coordinating their responses. The most typical example was the alliance of three nations led by Wei Country along with Zhao and Xu. This alliance was more than just about fighting against Liang; when facing the grassland barbarians from the North or other foreign barbarians. They were united and worked in perfect harmony. When one was in trouble, the others came to the rescue. Thanks to this kind of coordination, along with their own strengths, and the fact that the barbarians from one domain were distributed across several states and countries. The catastrophic impact from the migration of a population over one hundred million people finally settled down smoothly. This allowed the northern countries to weather the storm. But for Lu Yuan¡¯s case, the situation in the South did not provide that favorable environment. In this southern region, there was only Yangzhou, and within Yangzhou, only Chu State. Under these circumstances, it meant the intense impact brought about by the Barbarians from the two Great Domains could only be shouldered by Chu State alone. And we are talking about two Great Domains. Even if the Southern Sea Island Domain, due to geographical factors, consisted of island nations. Chapter 1102 - Chapter 1102 Chapter 447 Domestic Worries_2 ?Chapter 1102: Chapter 447 Domestic Worries_2 Chapter 1102: Chapter 447 Domestic Worries_2 These numerous island nations, scattered and sporadic, could only communicate with one another by boat. In the face of the disaster of the toxic fire eruption, it was difficult for everyone to flee together, and many people could only stay on the island, silently awaiting the disaster¡¯s arrival. The number of people that the ships could carry away was limited. ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Even with several more trips, the number they could take away was still not significant. But a great domain such as this had a population of tens of millions, even hundreds of millions. Moreover, in the Southern Sea Island Domain where traffic relied solely on boats, shipbuilding thrived and vessels were plentiful; thus, each evacuation trip could carry away hundreds of thousands. And besides, the toxic fire didn¡¯t erupt immediately. The entire process spread slowly from south to north, gradually expanding over dozens or even hundreds of years. In the intervening period, fleets transporting people could make dozens of trips, taking away hundreds of millions. If all these people were to turn into sea pirates, it would be an unimaginable disaster. In fact, in recent years, the coastal areas of Chu State and Liang have frequently been threatened by sea pirates from the Southern and East Seas. To maintain coastal security and prevent pirates from overrunning the inland, both countries had no choice but to set up checkpoints and garrisons in coastal regions, and deploy millions of coastal border troops to ensure stability. The impact of sea pirates on various countries is thus evident. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï As for the Southern Domain Rainforest, bordering Chu State, that goes without saying. Although the rainforest is filled with poisonous insects and fierce beasts, and many places are unsuitable for travel, the threat of death makes any problem surmountable. If it takes human lives to build it, tens of millions of people can construct a road to heaven. Now, after more than a decade of preparation, this road to heaven has already reached the borders of Chu State. The tens of millions of Rainforest Barbarians from the south, having lost their homeland, are now migrating northward to Yangzhou, this land of legend and riches, in search of a new place to dwell. Along the way, these people have engaged in continuous strife, merging, and assimilation with other tribes and nations also on the move. On this bloody path of migration, like the Western Barbarians, three major powers have already been formed, each able to dominate a region and command armies of a million. Under such circumstances, coupled with the rampant sea pirates from the South Sea, one could even consider them a maritime hegemon. That means, at this moment, Chu State¡¯s main territory of Yangzhou is essentially facing the invasion of four aggressive powers, in an unrelenting struggle. The last one to receive such attention was the now overgrown Zhou Country. Back then, Zhou Country, facing invasions from Chu, Liang, Wei, and Barbarians, endured great humiliation and hardship. Now, Chu State¡¯s main territory is retracing those very steps. What Chu State can utilize now are only the two million soldiers from Prefectures and Counties and twenty-one Inborn Grandmasters who are stationed in the main territory. This force is even less than what Zhou Country had at that time. The only thing better than Zhou Country is that to the north and west of Chu State¡¯s main territory are either the uninhabited Snowy Wilderness or the Chu-controlled Central State, two vast areas without enemies, thus sparing the need to allocate forces for defense. So, the main territory¡¯s limited forces only need to be used to defend the coastal areas to the east and south as well as the southwest rainforest. This allows the limited military resources of the main territory to be more sufficient, ensuring a reinforced defense on one front. At least it wouldn¡¯t be like Zhou Country in the past, tearing down one wall to patch another, eventually leaving every side defenseless. The two million troops within the state, with 1.3 million already deployed to the eight cities on the front lines in the southwest and Lingnan, and ten cities in the rear, and twenty-one Inborns, with eight already positioned on the front line. At this time, four more Inborns will be dispatched to be stationed in the central cities in the rear. Over sixty percent of the main territory¡¯s irregular military forces have been allocated to these two front lines. The remaining forces, half a million in number, have been sent to the prefectures of Jianan, Linhai, and Guangling. Over the thousands of miles of coastal lines in these three prefectures, troops have been deployed to contain the threat of the sea pirates landing ashore. Frankly speaking, such an extensive coastal defense line, manned by only six hundred thousand troops, is already very thinly spread. A coastal line of tens of thousands of miles would require millions of soldiers to be considered secure. Merely six hundred thousand troops mean that Chu State is ensuring the most basic defensea€¡±preventing pirates from landing large forces that could brazenly capture cities. As for the villages and towns in the area, they could only rely on the local militia, left to fend for themselves. With a large portion of Chu State¡¯s military engaged in the Northern Expedition, there was simply no surplus effort to spare for these minor problems caused by sea pirates in the rear. Beyond that, to prevent the situation from deteriorating rapidly, in each of the three coastal prefectures of the main territory, two Inborns were appointed as local commandants and Coastal Defense Envoys. This can be considered Chu State¡¯s second line of insurance for coastal prefectures. Behind this lies the final line of defense, which comprises the remaining forces within the state, controlled by Baling Zhou Qing, Sun Siwen, Lan Cai¡¯er, and ten thousand county soldiers stationed in Baling. However, this is the last mobile force in the heartland of the state. Unless the situations on the southwestern, Lingnan, and eastern coastal front lines become dire and unmanageable, these three individuals, along with the soldiers of Baling, would not be mobilized lightly. This is also why, despite the desperate situations in the southwestern and Lingnan regions, Zhou Qing only dispatched four Inborns for support, while the recruitment of the rescue troops was left to the local cities to manage, and any vacancies were expected to be filled by the local settlers themselves. Chapter 1103 - Chapter 1103 Chapter 447 Domestic Worries_3 ?Chapter 1103: Chapter 447 Domestic Worries_3 Chapter 1103: Chapter 447 Domestic Worries_3 The Baling Court on their side did not dispatch a single soldier or warrior. It wasn¡¯t that they didn¡¯t want to; it¡¯s just that even the most capable wife can¡¯t cook without rice, and there was simply nothing they could do. As the Prime Minister of the Cabinet, Sun Siwen was, of course, well aware of the domestic situation. So after discussing and considering it for a while, he also agreed with Zhou Qing¡¯s arrangements, confirming this rescue proposal. However, in addition to his agreement, Sun Siwen also made a promise. ¡°I will urge the Immigration Bureau over there to expedite the relocation of Jian¡¯an County residents, focusing on selecting from the coastal area. In this way, as the residents from along the coast and many other regions inland lessen, once these immigrants leave, the only places left in Jian¡¯an County will be the few cities that have entered the jurisdiction of Fu City. The two hundred thousand defenders there will then only need to be responsible for the few major cities in Jian¡¯an County, greatly relieving the pressure of defense. Perhaps by then, we might be able to allocate a hundred thousand troops and horses for supporting the battle in Lingnan.¡± Jian¡¯an County has always had a small population. When it first came into the hands of Great Chu, it had less than two million people, which truly was a case of narrow territory and sparse population. Even after years of prosperous development, the population only increased to just over three million. Now, following Lu Yuan¡¯s decisive action, about three million immigrants are to be relocated from Jian¡¯an County, leaving only four hundred thousand in the county town and two Fu Cities. These remaining residents will serve as garrison civilians, cultivating the land there to supply the needs of these three defensive strongholds. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï According to the old practice in the southwest and Lingnan, four hundred thousand garrison civilians could roughly support the needs of a hundred thousand defenders. Therefore, once the immigration work is completed, the hundred thousand extra troops can be pulled out, ready to be dispatched to other places. For the current situation where local military forces are stretched thin, this is undoubtedly a significant supplement, capable of solving many problems. Sun Siwen, within his capacities, also provided as much help as he could without dragging his feet. Zhou Qing, hearing this, was overjoyed and immediately responded with a laugh, ¡°If we could have these hundred thousand men, Lingnan should have no problems.¡± Sun Siwen also stroked his beard, ¡°Old man can only help out in these areas; as for the matters of war, we will still have to rely on the Grand General.¡± When Lu Yuan first met Sun Siwen, one was seventeen and the other twenty-four, with a difference of seven years between them. Afterward, they went through the last ten years of the Da Yue Longqing era of prosperity, followed by the nine chaotic years of Hongdao, and then to the founding of Great Chu, with Lu Yuan establishing his reign, until now, in the forty-third year of Shenwu. Unknowingly, sixty-two years had passed. In the eyes of the common folk, three to four generations would have been born and raised in this span of time. Now, Lu Yuan at seventy-nine, his Immortal Dao Cultivation had condensed the Four Qi, and his Martial Arts had reached the level of Grandmaster, with a limitless lifespan. Sun Siwen was eighty-six, his Martial Arts Cultivation at the first realm of Inborn, with a lifespan of a little over sixty years to live. Zhou Qing, six years younger than Lu Yuan, was now seventy-three, his Martial Arts cultivation also at the first realm of Inborn, and he could live for nearly eighty more years. From the perspective of ordinary people, all three of them were actually of advanced age. If it were not for Sun Siwen¡¯s martial cultivation, extending his lifespan to one hundred and fifty due to his Inborn abilities, his current condition might have seen him following his father-in-law Cui Changqing¡¯s fate and passing away from old age by now. But now, not only was he not dead from old age, he was instead still strong and healthier than most teenagers, his vitality surpassing that of those in their prime, with no sign of aging or impending death. This highlights how wise and important Lu Yuan¡¯s decision was to assist his friend in martial training, regardless of the cost. This decision wasn¡¯t solely about preserving a friendship and ensuring more memories to reflect upon in the long years ahead. Having Sun Siwen, a trustworthy friend, meant that Lu Yuan could campaign in the Northern Expedition with peace of mind, without worrying about the safety of the home front. Otherwise, if someone else were to preside over the Cabinet, Lu Yuan might not be able to trust them unreservedly. Under the suspicion between monarch and ministers, it was not so easy for Chu State to confidently expand its territory. However, even though one could live a few decades longer, there was ultimately a fixed limit to the inborn lifespan. This friend, who was close and familiar with Lu Yuan, could not accompany him on his immortal journey towards longevity for many more years. Birth, aging, sickness, deatha€¡±a long and endless road. How many people can reach their limit with a mortal body? Alone, in solitude and desolation! Alas¡­ ¡­ The internal crisis of Chu was swiftly addressed following discussions between Sun Siwen and Zhou Qing, who then sought approval from Empress Lan Cai¡¯er acting as regent, and quickly implemented their solutions. By the time the corresponding reports reached Lu Yuan¡¯s hands, half a month had already passed. ¡°Barbarian sea raiders have invaded in large numbers, and in the southwest of Lingnan, several major cities have been besieged; the situation is critical¡­¡± Lu Yuan frowned slightly as he read the letter in his hands. During the Northern Expedition, to ensure stable communication between the various armies and to muster the greatest effort to subdue the northern warlords, he had brought out all his avatars, leaving not one behind in the country. The ones sitting in important positions within the country were all ordinary inborn cultivators. The communication with Sun Siwen also depended on carrier pigeons obtained from the Barbarians. Since the submission of the Barbarians, Chu had acquired the technology for training carrier pigeons and their existing reserves, and the number of carrier pigeons they had surged to more than thirty, overnight. Unfortunately, after the ascension of Kyushu cultivators, the last traces of spiritual energy between Heaven and Earth were completely cut off. Within the Nine Provinces and the Ten Domains, a large number of Divine Blood Variants that relied on spiritual energy to survive began to suffer from hunger and disease and started dying off on a massive scale. Species like the carrier pigeons, which had Divine Bloodline in their half-breed lineage, inevitably suffered the consequences and a significant number perished. Later, through emergency rescue, selection, self-degradation, and feeding with Divine Blood Elixirs for stabilization, the remaining carrier pigeons were preserved. However, the degraded carrier pigeons could no longer travel three thousand miles a day; their limit was reduced to a thousand miles. Their speed of delivering messages was significantly weakened as a result. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 But being able to fly a thousand miles a day, in today¡¯s society, was actually still quite fast. With these carrier pigeons, in addition to land post stations and waterborne flying ships, Chu had a new method of aerial communication, filling another gap. Overall, the benefit was still significant. Thanks to this, Chu¡¯s mainland was able to maintain timely communication and connection with front-line fortresses, even when the roads were cut off by the Barbarians. Otherwise, how do you think the messages from cities like Southsea, which had been completely besieged, were getting out? It was all thanks to the carrier pigeons. At this moment, that Lu Yuan was able to receive news from the far-off south only half a month later was also due to this merit. It had made him quite satisfied with his earlier decision to preserve such a diverse bloodline at great cost. He saw it as one of his investments that had yielded quite a large return. Chapter 1104 - Chapter 1104 Chapter 448 Dual Assistance ?Chapter 1104: Chapter 448 Dual Assistance Chapter 1104: Chapter 448 Dual Assistance There¡¯s no need to elaborate on the matter of the eagle. Upon receiving the report from the south, Lu Yuan quickly realized one thing: the threat from south of Chu State had reached a degree that could no longer be ignored. The warlords to the north were indeed powerful. But the barbarian pirates to the south were not much weaker by comparison. At any rate, in Lu Yuan¡¯s view, when combining the strength and reserve of the Rainforest Barbarians to the southwest, they were already not much inferior to the Xu State, which he was currently targeting. If the sea pirates were also taken into account, the combined force would surpass that of Xu State by a margin. Together, the Rainforest Barbarians and South Sea pirates were roughly equivalent to the sum of Xu State and Liang. And that Liang was not the one infiltrated and fragmented by Chu State, with its people¡¯s hearts in disarray. Such a combined alliance simultaneously invading Lingnan and the southwest of Chu State without any hidden motives, Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t believe it even if he were beaten to death. However, it made sense upon reflection. The trouble on the southern borders had actually begun to emerge a decade or two ago. At that time, Chu State was at its zenith, with a powerful domestic military force; the Elite Army of Great Chu dominated in all directions. So even though the Yi and pirates in the south were strong, they were suppressed by the might of Chu¡¯s strong soldiers and dared not show themselves, fearing they would provoke a strike. Therefore, although Chu State was aware of the perilous threats at its borders, they were overlooked due to the obscuring prosperity of the nation and the protection of its powerful military forces. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Until now. More than eighty percent of Chu State¡¯s military force was involved in the Northern Expedition, battling the northern warlords in Central State. And the barbarian pirates to the south, after enduring a decade of poison fire threats, had begun to integrate and coalesce, forming several massive entities, with their strength having increased several times over. Faced with a once-in-a-lifetime opportunity provided by the vacuity within Chu State, these barbarian pirates, both threatened by poison fire from without and plagued by the instability caused by rapid internal expansion, were in turmoil. How could they then not choose to solve and digest their problems through external warfare? After all. Migrating northward to the safety of Yangzhou to avoid the threat of poison fire was in the common interest of everyone. The fusion and formation of these Great Barbarian States were also based on this common interest. Initiating a Northern Expedition to fight for living space was naturally a just and legitimate act for these migrating peoples. As long as you undertake this, no matter how many people are discontent with you domestically, under the mantle of great justice and righteousness, none would dare to voice the slightest opposition. Because that would go against everyone¡¯s interests and be in opposition to the entire world. Those who oppose do so for power, and that is for the sake of interest. Opposition now not only brings no interest but also puts oneself at odds with the world. Who would do such a foolish thing? And the high-level leaders of these barbarian pirates realized this and actively launched invasions via a Northern Expedition, uniting the hearts of everyone in their nations. Consequently, the southern region of Chu State is now ablaze with wars among the eighteen states in its southern territory. ¡°According to the investigations conducted by the Imperial City Division, those barbarians in the rainforest have already merged to form three Great Barbarian States, each with populations numbering in the tens of millions. And the numerous pirates of the South Sea have also formed a grand pirate alliance under the common need to land ashore, to some extent consolidating their forces. Now these four great powers acting together against Lingnan and the southwest; even if they don¡¯t deploy their full strength but only send a small expedition, we¡¯re still facing three to five million enemies. Given the military force Chu State has in the south, facing such a scale of invasion, even with fortified cities for defense, it¡¯s going to be quite difficult to hold the line¡­¡± Lu Yuan assessed the enemies¡¯ strength versus Chu State¡¯s homeland reserves and couldn¡¯t help feeling some serious concern. The current domestic situation was indeed highly unfavorable for Chu State. While the Chu¡¯s Northern Expedition forces in Central State were battling gloriously and dominating over the warlords, the enemy and friendly forces back home were in a completely reversed situation compared to here in Central State. The barbarian pirates to the south were akin to Chu¡¯s army in Central State, while Chu¡¯s homeland forces were like the warlords in Central State. On the battlefield in the south, the barbarian pirates held an overwhelming, even crushing advantage over the defending Chu forces. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? Under such circumstances, how could he not worry? It¡¯s important to remember that the homeland still contains over sixty million Chu people who have not started migrating. These people are the true foundation of Chu State and are the very morale booster underpinning the irresistibility of the Northern Expedition forces in Central State. If chaos breaks out to the south, allowing those barbarian pirates to breach the homeland and wreak havoc in its core territory, then Lu Yuan might as well halt the Northern Expedition. He would have to directly lead his troops back home to engage in a decisive battle with those barbarian pirates. The currently promising Northern Expedition would thus come to an abrupt halt. To restart it would require at least another decade to rebuild strength from the bottom of the barrel. Such a significant threat naturally warranted Lu Yuan¡¯s attention. ¡°However, all the military camps in Central State now have their arrangements and deployments, and none can afford to be withdrawn. Even if we wanted to pull some troops back to aid the homeland, there¡¯s no available force left, and it¡¯s too late now.¡± Lu Yuan pondered his military deployment in Central State, but no matter how he calculated, he couldn¡¯t find any troops that could be spared. The third Northern Expedition had already started. All the military camps had their own pressing objectives and tasks. Once a Great War has already begun, to withdraw forces from these campaigns is quite unrealistic. If he were to do so, it¡¯s feared that not only might the situation to the south not stabilize, but the battle situation here in Central State could collapse first. Chapter 1105 - Chapter 1105 Chapter 448 Dual Assistance_2 ?Chapter 1105: Chapter 448 Dual Assistance_2 Chapter 1105: Chapter 448 Dual Assistance_2 ¡°` Therefore, even if we wanted to dispatch troops to reinforce our homeland immediately, it isn¡¯t possible. But the situation back home is critical, and we must not neglect to lend assistance. ¡°Over there at the Yuzhou battlefield, over these past two months, with the intimidation and temptation employed by Qingyunzi, Jin Country¡¯s stance has gradually softened. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 The alliance of the three nations pays an unexpectedly strong amount of attention to Tang Kingdom. The temptation of more than thirty million people within the seven prefectures of Tang Kingdom is also very substantial. Therefore, after deliberation, Jin Country has already begun to subtly indicate a willingness to cede Xianyun Prefecture. However, Jin only wants to cede the land of Xianyun Prefecture, and not a single one of the three million residentsa€¡±they are insistent that we evacuate them all back to the homeland. If we do not agree to this condition, then Jin would rather withdraw its troops and engage Great Chu in a decisive battle to the death than give in¡­¡± Lu Yuan recalled the progress in negotiations with Jin relayed by Qingyunzi a few days earlier, and his thoughts gradually cleared. After a series of soft and hard tactics, as well as military threats, Jin Country has at last begun to soften its stance on the issue of Xianyun Prefecture. But softening does not mean full compromise or acceptance of all Chu State¡¯s conditions. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Backed by the alliance of three nations, Jin¡¯s position is far more confident and strong than that of the formerly isolated and unsupported Zheng Kingdom. Last year, when Zheng Kingdom ceded Haiyang Prefecture, they too wanted to take their population of more than two million people with them. But upon slight intimidation by Chu State, they immediately gave up that demand, leaving both population and land to Chu State, which was extremely compliant. However, faced with a similar demand, Jin has made concessions, but not complete ones. In matters of core wealth and territorial population, they are unwilling to budge an inch. After so many years of war, nations have slowly come to realize through incessant warfare and elimination that population is the core productive force, the most important foundation of a country. It is a wealth far more important than the land itself. Three million people can provide a nation with over five hundred thousand troops, and a large sum of money and tax revenue, essential for supporting a country¡¯s standing in the world. With these three million people, Jin will be one step above Zheng as a hegemon. Without these three million people, Jin too will fall from the hegemon¡¯s position and become a second-rate nation just like Zheng. How could Jin possibly take a step back on an issue that affects its core interests? If they really did concede, they would be on the brink of life and death. And a fight with Chu would lead to the same outcome anyway. So why retreat at all? It¡¯s precisely because they couldn¡¯t reach an agreement on this matter that, no matter how Qingyunzi used his methods, the issue of ceding Xianyun Prefecture remained unresolved. The progress was stuck there, causing anxiety. However, Qingyunzi also made a promise, saying that he could achieve their goal through a limited war. That is, to defeat Jin¡¯s defenders in Xianyun Prefecture and directly occupy the prefecture. By establishing this reality, even if Jin did not agree to the terms, they would ultimately have to accept them. To accomplish this, it would take approximately one million troops and two to three months of war time to see results. The specific planning had already begun at the Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp. War was about to erupt. Faced with Chu State¡¯s movements, Jin Country has begun to withdraw some of its forces back to Xianyun Prefecture from the front line against Tang. Both countries are preparing and assembling for the war over the jurisdiction of this prefecture. The flames of war in Yuzhou are becoming increasingly intense due to Chu State¡¯s imminent entry into the fray. Originally, Lu Yuan had no objections to launching this war. After all, doing nothing with the 1.5 million-strong army stationed in Yuzhou is a waste of money and resources. Since peaceful means can no longer achieve the original goal, then it is normal to employ some military force to complete the strategy. But now a memorial submitted from the homeland has given him new considerations. ¡°Even if we win the major battle against Jin, we would only obtain a ravaged Xianyun Prefecture and the remaining population of around two million people after the turmoil. On our side, we might lose tens to hundreds of millions of people. When comparing the two, the gain in terms of population is practically nonexistent. The real gain for the Yuzhou Camp would just be the land of Xianyun Prefecture, with no other additional benefits. The one who truly benefits is the besieged Tang Kingdom. With Jin facing Chu¡¯s entanglement and blows, the force they could dedicate to encircling Tang would naturally be greatly reduced, or even absent. Under such circumstances, Tang could inevitably catch a breath and might even make it through the year. This was originally in line with the interests of Chu State and the prerequisite for the Yuzhou Camp to be willing to engage in combat. But now back home, there are much more important interests at stake, and Yuzhou¡¯s interests must take a secondary priority.¡± Lu Yuan weighed the pros and cons and soon came to a decision. He immediately sent a message to Qingyunzi, instructing him to cease preparations for war. Then he had him send messengers to start discussions with Jin about ceding only the territory and not the population. It¡¯s just three million people, after all. Perhaps for Jin, it¡¯s a crucial part of their hegemonic standing. But for Chu State, a mere three million people are insignificant. Consider that back home, there are more than sixty million people, all of whom are Chu people. Three million Jin residents who are hostile to Chu versus sixty million Chu residents who support Chua€¡±the choice between the two is obvious to any rational person. ¡°Once the negotiation terms are reached, we can have Qingyunzi withdraw five hundred thousand troops from the Yuzhou Camp in a show of sincerity, allowing Jin to migrate their people with ease. ¡°` Chapter 1106 - Chapter 1106 Chapter 448 Dual Assistance_3 ?Chapter 1106: Chapter 448 Dual Assistance_3 Chapter 1106: Chapter 448 Dual Assistance_3 And the Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp could also draw out an army of five hundred thousand, along with five Inborns. This force could then board ships and travel across the sea back to the homeland. With the advantage of ships, at most a month would be needed to arrive at Yangzhou. And with the return of these reinforcements, the defensive power in Yangzhou would be greatly enhanced. Dealing with the defense of the southern border would no longer be as strenuous as now, scrapping and searching, calculating those one hundred thousand men of Jian¡¯an County, looking so unsightly.¡± After reaching a decision and communicating with Qingyunzi, Lu Yuan allowed himself some relaxation. But he hadn¡¯t entirely let his guard down. Upon reflection, the homeland still seemed too critical, and he felt that relying on just one set of reinforcements might still be insufficient. So, after some contemplation, he began to write another imperial edict. ¡°Order the two sects within the nation, Feishuang Tao and Ziyun Dao, to redeploy all Inborn Grandmasters from inside the country for military service and send them to the southern front line.¡± Lu Yuan issued a second set of orders. In the North, since the Northern Expedition, besides Dan Ding Path that had already been eliminated by Chu State, The remaining Cang Long Way and Yuchan Tao in Central State had already pledged allegiance to Chu State, and all members inside the sect were integrated into the Chu system. From the School Leaders down to common disciples, no one could be an exception; they all joined Chu State¡¯s system en masse. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Either joining the military or serving as local guards, they exerted themselves for the benefit of Chu State. The two major Daoist sects exhibited unflagging loyalty and untiring diligence. In comparison, the Feishuang Tao and Ziyun Dao sects in the South seemed somewhat lacking in loyalty. Apart from the few Inborns sent when they initially pledged their allegiance, Inside the two major sects of Yangzhou, there were still three to five, or even more, Inborn Grandmasters, practicing cultivation in the mountains, who hadn¡¯t come forth to shine for Chu State. Originally, Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t thought much of this. But after comparing them with the two sects of Central State in the North, the two sects in his own southern lands suddenly became extremely troublesome. Loyalty that is not absolute is absolute disloyalty. Already disapproving of the two sects, Lu Yuan now found them somewhat intolerable. Thus, with the current crisis in the South, he took this opportunity to test and discipline them. To see just how obedient the two sects were to Chu State. ¡°I hope you all will obediently follow commands. Otherwise¡­ the blades of Great Chu aren¡¯t just for cutting down outsiders; they¡¯re very efficient when it comes to beheading our own people as well.¡± Lu Yuan rubbed his temples to alleviate the fatigue weighing on his body and mind. The arrangements for the two southern sects were more or less in place now. As long as they obey and fully carry out his edicts, nearly ten more Inborn Grandmasters could be drawn from within the homeland. This would undoubtedly provide a significant relief and bolster to the high-level combat forces, which were severely lacking in the homeland during the invasion by the four great barbarian Yi countries. At the very least, with these Immortal sect Inborns, each of the eighteen cities in the Southwestern and Lingnan regions could be defended by an Inborn. Some key cities could even be guarded by two Inborns, instantly increasing defensive power. With such capabilities, facing the barbarian invasion would become effortless and composed. And with the arrival of Yu State Reinforcements, it would even be possible to launch a degree of counterattack on top of defense. It might even be feasible to fight one or two great decisive battles, to repel a wave of enemiesa€¡±we can¡¯t rule out that possibility. After all, with five Inborns and five hundred thousand soldiers, it wouldn¡¯t be difficult to gather ten Inborns and a million troops from several cities within the alliance region. And these forces nearly matched the standard configuration of an expeditionary military camp in the Central State battlefield. According to Lu Yuan¡¯s standards, a military expedition was equipped to wage wars that would annihilate nations. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? With such strength, it was enough to contend with any one of the four great sea-raiding Yi countries in the South. Therefore, after making these two arrangements, Lu Yuan¡¯s worries about the South finally eased. He had done everything he could. With these two enhancements to the homeland, stabilizing the defense line and ensuring there were no issues with the core inland territories should suffice for this year. As for the time after this year, Liang State will have perished, and Xu State will probably have been driven back to Xuzhou. At that time, the four expeditionary forces currently on the battlefield in Qingzhou, Liang, and Xu will be freed up, and Chu State will have several million more soldiers at its disposal. Afterwards, diverting just a part of them back home would be sufficient, and even if those sea-raiding barbarians came pouring in, Chu State would not have the slightest fear. ¡­ Having dealt with domestic affairs, Lu Yuan then refocused his attention on the Qingzhou battlefield. The time was now April. At the start of this month, Yan Yunqing, leading the Jiaoxi reinforcements and under the duress of Huang Xuan¡¯s flooding strategy, finally reluctantly arrived at the foot of Xian¡¯an City. A mere journey of just over a thousand miles took the opponent more than a month to traverse. Clearly, that famous Liang general had noticed something amiss with the strange actions of the Chu army. After all, Huang Xuan never hid his scheming, always openly displaying it for the world to see. The Chu army used a strategy of transparency, not fearing others seeing through it. Because even if you see through it, it¡¯s still futile. Is abandoning Xian¡¯an City an option? That would signify the fall of Liang¡¯s last legitimate emperor, losing one of the two rulers in the nation. Without an object of allegiance, where would Yan Yunqing turn? To the Emperor Lin Qiu, who had already turned to Chu State and become a complete puppet? If it had come to that, he might as well surrender directly to the Chu forces now; the outcome would be the same either way. Thus, even knowing that a trap lay ahead, Yan Yunqing still had to rush to Xian¡¯an and leap into it willingly. He had no other choice. And as for this last group of Liang troops to enter the snare and get surrounded, The siege of Xian¡¯an City, which had loosened under Huang Xuan¡¯s direction, was instantly tightened once more. The Chu army not only began a strict defensive blockade, sealing off any connection Xian¡¯an City had to the outside, But also started to construct walls and earthworks extensively around the city, digging countless trenches, and erecting numerous camps, aiming to completely seal off Xian¡¯an City. The long-prepared plan of siege, with Yan Yunqing¡¯s entry, officially began. Chapter 1107 - Chapter 1107 Chapter 449 Xu Country Battlefield ?Chapter 1107: Chapter 449: Xu Country Battlefield Chapter 1107: Chapter 449: Xu Country Battlefield As for the blatant ambitions of the Chu army, the people of Liang would naturally not stand idly by and await their doom. The Liang army inside the town had also taken the initiative to launch several counterattacks. However, facing the Chu army, whose preparations and strength both surpassed their own, these counterattacks ended in severe defeat each time. After suffering losses, the Liang army no longer dared to launch any more attacks. After their victories, the Chu army was able to build fortifications smoothly, completely besieging Xian¡¯an City. Now that the defenses were established, Huang Xuan, aside from leaving troops to maintain the siege, had already dispatched another detachment. They were sent to attack prefectures and county towns around Xian¡¯an, still under the control of Liang, preparing to complete the last link of the encirclement. The war in Liang¡¯s Qingzhou had reached its final phase, and after another two to three months of siege, it would roughly come to an end. The battlefields in Liang and Xu were drawing to a close for one country. The peace talks between Yuzhou and Jin Country had also made a breakthrough after Lu Yuan¡¯s concession. The third Northern Expedition of the Chu army had only begun for two or three months, yet the situation was already looking very favorable. ¡°Over there in Liang, now I just need Huang Xuan to continue the siege on Xian¡¯an City, that should be about it. I don¡¯t need to pay too much attention,¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Of the three Northern Expeditions so far, this campaign against Liang could be considered the easiest. Without much effort, Chu had neatly crushed Liang and was about to seize the final fruits of victory. Such pleasing and satisfying outcomes naturally made him happy. Especially considering the problems that had occurred back home, such good news was all the more precious. After passing the message to Huang Xuan through their shared understanding, telling him there was no need to rush and he could besiege the city at his leisure, Lu Yuan then put this matter aside and turned his focus to the battlefield in Xu State, which he was personally directing. ¡­ The situation at the original battlefield of Xu State, especially in the area of Dongping Prefecture, had been turned into a veritable fortress by Xu after two years of preparation, causing him great headaches. But no matter how tight the defense, with dedication, it is always possible to find a loophole. After two months of adjustments, particularly with the successive establishment of the Le¡¯an Camp and the Qingping Camp, the two major camps, under the command of their respective leaders, began the Northern Expedition. As a result, the situation in Xu State changed abruptly once again. Firstly, in Le¡¯an Prefecture, Accompanying Qingyangzi who led the Le¡¯an Camp, attacks were launched on Le¡¯an Prefecture from three directionsa€¡±southwest, southeast, and directly southa€¡±dividing the forces from Shanyang and Jiaoxi counties. The defense circle that Xu State had prepared specifically to guard against enemies from the direction of Dongping instantly had a breach torn into it. Because two years ago, even before the fall of Dai Liang last year, Shanyang and Jiaoxi were under Liang¡¯s control. These counties were the heartland of Liang, heavily guarded, territories that Liang would never abandon under any circumstances. Given the current relationship between Xu State and Liang, Xu could confidently entrust the defense of its southern border to Liang. And Liang, at the beginning of the second Northern Expedition last year, was a dominant state controlling seven prefectures, with an army of more than four million soldiersa€¡±a power ranked second or third in the world. From the perspectives of Xu and Liang, with this level of power, even if Liang lost the battle of Dai Liang, the country would not be annihilated all at once. Afterward, in counties like Shanyang and Jiaoxi, they could still withstand and draw out the fight with Chua€¡±the war was far from over. With Liang blocking the way in counties like Shanyang and Jiaoxi, situated to the south of Xu, there was no need to worry about the security of Xu¡¯s southern territories until the defeat of Liang and the breakthrough of these defense lines. Therefore, when initially constructing Xu¡¯s defense line in Qingzhou, the Xu People only considered pressure from the west, specifically the pressure from Dongping. The defenses at Xu¡¯s Xichanga€¡±Shouzhang and Wuyana€¡±Sheqiu were built based on this concept. They were targeted only against enemies from the east and southeast. Other areas were not given much attention and had remained undefended. However, reality proved that all these ideas were overly optimistic. Firstly, last year, Lu Yuan resumed the tactic of using captured conscripts as cannon fodder, driving the large numbers of prisoners taken during the Northern Expedition to assault cities and assume the casualties that the Chu army would have otherwise incurred. And on the side of Chu, because the conscripts bore the brunt of the causalities, the main force suffered minimal losses, retaining most of its fighting capability. So, by the later stages of the battle for Dai Liang, the Chu army, which still preserved its main fighting strength, was able to engage the remaining forces of Liang. Thus, the remnants inside Dai Liang and the troops from Xu that had come to set up new defenses to the east after the fall of the city, came head-to-head with the Chu army¡¯s well-rested main force. In the ensuing battle, well-prepared by the Chu, the united army from Xu and Liang, numbering over a million, stood no chancea€¡±the entire army was annihilated in an encirclement. The pre-planned defense lines from Shanyang to Jiaoxi collapsed along with those troops, turning into an utter void. At the same time, in Rencheng Prefecture, Liang suffered another devastating defeat. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Yan Yunqing, who led the southern defenses of Liang, lost over a million men once again, and the passage obstructing Chu¡¯s eastward advance into Yuzhou opened up. The eastern expeditionary force of Chu and the forces from Yangxia, after two years, finally joined forces. Thereupon, the rapid collapse of Liang this year was decisively cemented. Chapter 1108 - Chapter 1108 Chapter 449 Xu Country Battlefield_2 ?Chapter 1108: Chapter 449: Xu Country Battlefield_2 Chapter 1108: Chapter 449: Xu Country Battlefield_2 Therefore, when Xian¡¯an City was besieged, the sole army stationed in Jiaoxi County that could shield the southern part of Xu State and use to restrain Chu State¡¯s advance, led by Yan Yunqing, had to be relocated and rushed to the Capital for assistance. His departure completely sold out Xu State. The previously planned Liang army, which was supposed to shield the south of Xu State, now utterly became a plan on paper. Throughout Jiaoxi County, not a single troop that could honor the agreement could be found amid the turmoil in the Liang country. With the Liang military abandoning their responsibilities and Xu Army having no contingency plan originally, who could possibly fill in the southern defensive line in such a short notice? The southern part of Xu State was thus completely breached, leaving it wide open for Chu State to enter. To the south of Le¡¯an Prefecture, other than the southwest direction, there was still Sheqiu City capable of putting up some resistance. Other southern and southeastern directions, due to the fall of Jiaoxi County, became utterly vacant lands, completely unobstructed, with no military force left to stop Chu State any longer. It was after Lu Yuan noticed this point, that, finding Dongping County difficult to breakthrough, he made a snap decision to immediately establish a new military camp, aiming to create a new battlefield and break the current stalemate. ¡°Currently at the Le¡¯an Camp, Qingyangzi is personally leading the three hundred thousand main force of Chu Army from Shanyang County, surrounding and restraining the two hundred thousand Xu Army at Sheqiu City. The remaining seven hundred thousand troops from the camp, a mixture of Chu and Liang armies, are advancing from the due south and southeast directions, emerging from Jiaoxi County, supporting each other and marching in unison towards the South Capital Le Ling of Xu State. The people of Xu were greatly shaken and terrified by this. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Now, the three hundred thousand Xu Army defending Le Ling City has been urgently divided into two groups, each led by an Innate General, rushing to the south and southeast to construct defensive lines, joining with the local Prefectures and Counties¡¯ militia to mount resistance.¡± This reserve force within the boundaries of Qingzhou of Xu State had thus been wasted. Lu Yuan quickly contacted Qingyangzi and learned of the latest progress on the battlefield. Sheqiu City was still under siege, its defenses strong and its garrison numerous. Forcing an assault on the city would incur heavy losses, not to mention he might exhaust all his troops without success. Thus, Qingyangzi adopted a strategy of encirclement without immediate attack, planning to imitate Lu Yuan¡¯s method of dividing his forces, waiting for the detached armies from other parts of Le¡¯an Camp to make a breakthrough on other battlefields, and for the situation to change. Then, by starting with a focused point and expanding to various fronts, they would trigger a chain reaction across the battlefields and completely breach Xu State¡¯s defense in the southern territories. This was the most worry-free, effective, and least costly method. So far, the strategy seems to be working quite well. The two detachments from Le¡¯an Camp have successfully conquered several defenseless Prefectures and Counties of Xu State, seizing large swathes of that territory. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Especially the detachment moving from the due south had, after capturing the lands of the two prefectures, pointed their blades straight at the South Capital Le Ling located to the northeast. Only one Prefecture stands as a buffer between them. The Chu State¡¯s vanguard cavalry could even infiltrate to the outskirts of Le Ling City, lurking and scrutinizing the opponent¡¯s Imperial Capital. It was precisely because the surroundings had become so dire in such a short time that Xu State¡¯s monarchs, officials, and civilians within Le Ling City were also severely frightened. They even thought that Chu State¡¯s divine troops had descended from the sky and were coming to attack them. Proposals for relocating the capital back to the motherland for refuge were being loudly debated in the court and among the public, and they were incessant. If it were not for today¡¯s Emperor Xu, who was still resolute in will and authority, forcibly quelled those voices that shook the spirit of the people, Xu State might have fallen into chaos even before the Chu Army could attack. In such a situation, it was feared the circumstances would only go from bad to worse. Fortunately, Xu State¡¯s rise in national power over the past two years had given its people quite a bit of confidence, preventing them from being completely panic-stricken, and they had managed to hold on. The three hundred thousand troops in the capital had also been dispatched to the south and southeast to build defenses. With these troops in place and relying on the home field advantage and strong fortifications, it was not much of a problem to temporarily fend off the two approaching Chu forces. As for what came next¡­ Xu State had already started to mobilize within Le¡¯an Prefecture, and with the population there, even though quite a few southern Prefectures and Counties had been occupied by Chu State, the remaining five or six prefectures were expected to draft another three hundred thousand troops. Meanwhile, within Xu State¡¯s own Xuzhou, a decree had been issued for another round of troop mobilization. Just wait three or four months, and at least five hundred thousand troops from the north could be mobilized to support the south. Then, in Le¡¯an Prefecture, they could gather more than a million troops. With them, resisting Chu Country¡¯s northern advancement from Le¡¯an Camp would be more than sufficient. The above was Xu State¡¯s strategy for resistance after the initial panic. Le¡¯an Camp, on the other hand, did not have a good solution to this. After all, they only had a million troops and ten Innate Generals, half of which were made up of Liang troops with poor quality and morale. With such strength, it was unrealistic to expect Le¡¯an Camp alone to conquer Xu State¡¯s South Capital. Lu Yuan¡¯s expectations for this camp were never about that. He only needed Le¡¯an Camp to tie down the Xu forces in the direction of Leling County, in order to share the pressure Xu State was facing in the direction of Dongping County. Therefore, upon learning of Xu State¡¯s response strategy, Qingyangzi wasn¡¯t flustered at all. He remained calm, continuing the siege around Sheqiu City while directing the other two detachments to capture as much territory in Le¡¯an Prefecture as possible before Xu State could complete its mobilization and reinforcements arrived. The more Chu Army secures now, the less control Xu State will retain. Chapter 1109 - Chapter 1109 Chapter 449 Xu Country Battlefield_3 ?Chapter 1109: Chapter 449: Xu Country Battlefield_3 Chapter 1109: Chapter 449: Xu Country Battlefield_3 With the diminishing of one side and the growing of the other, hasn¡¯t the war potential of Xu State been weakened? War is all about potential. As long as Xu State¡¯s war potential can be weakened, then even if this year¡¯s Northern Expedition doesn¡¯t completely succeed in driving Xu State out of Qingzhou, after the decline of Xu State, facing the increasingly accumulated advantages of Chu State, it will also be difficult to continue resisting. Being driven out of Qingzhou is just a matter of time. Adhering to this idea, the Le¡¯an Camp is not panicking at all, very stable indeed. Lu Yuan, upon this, comforted with divine thoughts for a few sentences and communicated further with several avatars, advising them not to rush and to take their time. Only then did he feel reassured and ended his inquiry about the Le¡¯an County battlefield. The progress in Le¡¯an County is smooth, and the Qingping Camp, established in the same period and responsible for another battlefield in Xu State¡¯s Qingzhou, has also gained a lot. The Qingping Camp led by Huang Yun has the same strength as the Le¡¯an Camp, with an army of one million and ten Innates. Among them are mixed Liang and Chu people, a standard mixed army. The enemy they face, the Xu Army of Qingping County, needs to guard against Tang Kingdom, and thus the number of troops stationed there is quite a bit more than in Leling County, where the Imperial City of Xu State is located. The Xu Army in Leling County only has five hundred thousand troops, while Qingping County has reached eight hundred thousand troops, a full three hundred thousand more soldiers. The number of Innates, however, is less. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 Le¡¯an County has eight Xu Country Innates, but Qingping County only has five, three less. So overall, these two counties, which were originally considered by Xu State as the rear, have similar defense strengths. Just like Le¡¯an County, Qingping County is also responsible only for threats from the east and north from Tang State and has entrusted its southern defense to ally Liang State. It is well-known. This year Liang State faced an attack from Chu State and collapsed at the first blow, suffering a miserable defeat. Qingping County in the south borders Liang State¡¯s Jiaoxi County, Donglai County, and Jiaodong County. All three counties, under the collapse of Liang¡¯s forces, were already completely lost to Chu State. Thus, like Le¡¯an Camp, when Chu¡¯s army launched their sudden attack, Qingping Camp was directly overpowered without any resistance. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Aside from the vast number of border troops stationed in Qingping County, which needed to guard against Tang Kingdom¡¯s northern and eastern regions, the large areas of territory in the south and west were easily taken by Chu State¡¯s Qingping Camp. After these territories fell, although Liang State still controlled half of Qingping County and maintained a considerable military force there capable of competing with the invading Chu State Qingping Camp, the half they controlled was cut off from the core region of Liang State in Le¡¯an County because Chu State occupied the south and west of Qingping County, breaking their connection. Were it not for the northern region of Qingping County controlled by Xu Army still being connected to the Xu State homeland in Xuzhou, the Xu troops there would really have become an isolated army hung out to dry. But even with a connection to the homeland, after being cut off from the Imperial Capital in Leling by Chu State, the predicament of the eight hundred thousand Xu Army in Qingping County has become extremely dire. Not only cut off from outside help but also due to a lack of supplies from the core hinterland, they¡¯re facing a terrible situation with a shortage of money, grain, and arms. Relying solely on the small passage to the north and the homeland, it is impossible to support the large army in Qingping County, which originally was eight hundred thousand but has now urgently expanded to one million two hundred thousand after Chu¡¯s invasion. For now, with the original reserves, they can still manage. But if it drags on for three to five months, by the time winter arrives, without adequate preparations, this Xu Army is going to face extreme hardship from hunger and cold. By then, even if they don¡¯t perish in the treacherous cold wave of winter, after a heavy snowfall, their losses will certainly be heavy. If it really comes to that, perhaps by next spring, Chu State could replicate its victory over Liang State. Without much effort, they could easily take the remaining half of Qingping County and annihilate the remnants of this Xu Army. If they could indeed do so, it would definitely be a sensational start to the year. However, the Xu people are not fools; the Xu Army in Qingping County certainly knows their dire situation and will definitely not sit still, passively waiting for death. The reason they have not taken action is that they don¡¯t feel strong enough yet. They plan to recruit more troops within the half of the county they control and receive more supplies from the homeland. Once they feel they have accumulated enough, able to defeat the invading Chu forces and reestablish the connection with the Imperial Capital Leling, they will certainly take the initiative to attack, engaging in a Great War with the Chu Army. ¡°So now, what the Qingping Camp needs to do is, on one hand, to hold onto the currently occupied regions, setting up defenses in preparation for the Xu Army¡¯s counterattack in two to three months, or even after one month. At the same time, before the Xu Army comes to its senses, continue to expand its territory in the county. And if possible, they could even try to infiltrate and invade the eastern regions of Le¡¯an County in the west, Threatening the safety of the Xu people¡¯s Imperial City Leling from the east, to complement the actions of the Le¡¯an Camp.¡± Lu Yuan summed up the current situation of the three military camps on the Xu Country battlefield and quickly communicated with Huang Yun, who was in charge of the Qingping Camp, to make arrangements for this avatar commander. The influence of Dao Law and Immortal Techniques on the mundane world was fully demonstrated at this moment. On the Xu Country battlefield, with a distance of five to six thousand li to the east and west, through the divine thought communication between Lu Yuan and his avatars, was able to communicate instantly, And because both sides were essentially one, they could clearly understand each other¡¯s intentions, with no information distortion during the transmission. Despite Lu Yuan being able to make various judgments and instinctual adjustments based on real-time dynamics across a vast region stretching from the Southsea in the south to Yuzhou in the east, Yong State in the west, and Qing and Xu in the north, controlling the war seemed effortless at a glance. But that¡¯s because his own Cultivation is high enough, and his Immortal Techniques are profound. Other countries, even Inborn Grandmasters, do not have Lu Yuan¡¯s capabilities. After the elimination of other cultivators, as the sole Cultivator in the Nine Provinces, when facing those Martial Arts Grandmasters, even if he doesn¡¯t directly engage, but simply commands troops, he has every advantage. Chapter 1110 - Chapter 1110 Chapter 450 The Fall of Wei Country ?Chapter 1110: Chapter 450 The Fall of Wei Country Chapter 1110: Chapter 450 The Fall of Wei Country Just like Xu State. At this moment, even in the mere three prefectures of Qingzhou, those flesh-eaters of the imperial court within Chang¡¯an couldn¡¯t grasp the current situation of Dongping and Qingping counties. They were completely in the dark regarding these two battlefields. Even the situation within Le¡¯an Prefecture might lead to misjudgment. In such circumstances where information is incomplete, any decision made that contains even a trace of error, could lead to an unprecedented defeat on the battlefield of Qingzhou, completely ruining the opponent¡¯s chance to rule over Qingzhou. Weren¡¯t the previous battles in Liang precisely like this? Due to the Chu army¡¯s information blockade, both the monarch and ministers of Liang within the city of Chang¡¯an and Xu State outside of the Liang regions were unaware of the current intelligence on both the Liang and Chu armies. In the end, hastening to send troops without caution, they brewed an unprecedented defeat. The current adversity faced by Xu State was closely related to last year¡¯s devastating loss of a million troops in the Liang regions. The importance of battlefield information for a nation, and the losses suffered because of misjudgments. All these consequences were now fully reflected on Xu State. ¡°Right now, both the Northern and Southern Route Armies have nearly reached their own limits of expansion, and it is very difficult to break through the defenses organized by Xu Army.¡± After understanding the current status of both armies, Lu Yuan quickly realized this. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ¡°Therefore, if we want to turn the situation around, we must find new forces to join and gain an absolute advantage in one of the three battlefronts of Xu State, in order to make a breakthrough.¡± The new forces, needless to say, naturally referred to the Southern Route Army which was winding down its campaign on the battlefronts of Liang. ¡°However, before waiting for the arrival of the Southern Route Army, I can¡¯t just stand by and do nothing; it¡¯s time to take down Xichang City.¡± Lu Yuan stepped out of the camp and climbed up the tall watchtower, gazing at the majestic city bathed in a layer of golden light under the early morning sun, with a profound look in his eyes. Xichang City had been under siege for a full three months. Since the beginning of the Northern Expedition in spring, not only had Lu Yuan dispatched other routes for breakthroughs and distractions in the Qingzhou rear of Xu State, but he had also not been idle. Like the city of Xichang in the past three months, the Chu army had carried out numerous assaults to wear it down. The Central Route Army originally had one and a half million soldiers and two million two hundred thousand captives; later, although five hundred thousand soldiers were dispatched to form the Le¡¯an Camp, there were still one million soldiers left, along with a vast number of captives and defectors who could be used as expendable cannon fodder. The main army led by Lu Yuan remained powerful. So during these three months, he had driven the captives to start clearing the defensive lines around Xichang City, removing more than thirty camps one after another. The cost paid was just over three hundred thousand lives of captives. But the gains were tremendous. Not only were over a hundred thousand Xu soldiers eliminated, but all positions around Xichang City were cleared, leaving it completely isolated, with no external assistance. By now, Xichang City had been cut off from the outside world for over a month. The number of defenders inside the city had also dropped to just over three hundred thousand, and even the Inborn Grandmasters had taken opportunities in the past three months to clear the positions outside the citya€¡±Lu Yuan¡¯s forces had seized the chance and killed two on the spot. Currently, only eight Inborns remained in the Xu Army within the city, and the losses were not small. On the contrary, for the Chu side, although seven Innates were dispatched to form the Le¡¯an Camp, the Central Route Army still had twenty-three Inborn Grandmasters left. Against the Xu Country Innates inside the city, nearly thrice the advantage. In terms of quality, with many Lu Yuan avatars and Lu Yuan himself, the advantage was even greater. It wouldn¡¯t be an exaggeration to say the advantage was four to five times greater, even five to six times. With such an advantage, having made complete preparations, they were already capable of forcibly taking the city, conquering Xichang. ¡°Issue my order to all units, starting today, the entire army will be divided into five groups, taking turns to attack Xichang City; I myself will lead the charge.¡± As Lu Yuan looked at the assembled generals, he gave the order, ¡°Until Xichang falls, the siege shall not cease a day. Without distinction between day and night, no rest, we shall give the people of Xu no moment of peace.¡± ¡°Yes!¡± The many commanders who had long been anticipating this command responded loudly at once. A true man should strive for accomplishments on the battlefield. With the unification of the world imminent, why not take this opportunity to earn more merits? How else in the future could one aspire to high titles, hold power, enjoy all the glory, and provide for one¡¯s descendants? As for the siege, not only were they unafraid, but they were also rubbing their hands in eagerness, ready to put up a fierce fight. Amid the rolling drumbeats, teams of surrendered soldiers, under the coercion of the Chu army, left the camp. Then, under the signal of drums and bugles, they headed toward Xichang City. In the city, amidst the urgent sound of bugles, a large number of Xu soldiers also rallied, flooding towards the ramparts. A brutal slaughter was about to erupt. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï a€| Just as the bloody siege began at Xichang City in Dongping County, a great distance away, nearly ten thousand miles off in the western frontier of Chu State, inside Guannei County, another great war had just come to a halt. In April of this year, just as the Chu State launched another Northern Expedition and all their troops gathered in Xu and Liang, Wei Country, which had been licking its wounds in Shuofang County for half a year and had regained some vitality, seized the opportunity when Chu was internally depleted and powerless to aid Guannei County, once again sent a million troops to invade from the north, attempting to retake their western capital, Chang¡¯an. Chapter 1111 - Chapter 1111 Chapter 450 The Fall of Wei Country_2 ?Chapter 1111: Chapter 450 The Fall of Wei Country_2 Chapter 1111: Chapter 450 The Fall of Wei Country_2 ¡°` However, within Guannei, the Yongzhou Camp led by Huang Xin had no lack of strength either. With a great army of eight hundred thousand, and ten Inborn presiding, it far surpassed Wei Country¡¯s hastily assembled million soldiers in terms of elite quality. If the two armies were to line up for battle, without exerting much effort, they could completely defeat the opponent. Now, with the strongholds under their control and the defensive advantage, simply holding their ground would solidify Guannei like an impregnable fortress, making it impossible for the Wei Army to gain any advantage, however hard they might try to chip away at it. Beyond this. Following the arrival of the new prefect Gao Mingtao in Guannei, this man executed Lu Yuan¡¯s immigration policy to the letter. After making thorough preparations and communicating with the Department of Household Immigration Bureau, as well as the hinterlands of Henan and Nanyang, on top of last winter¡¯s inventory and reorganization, everything was in place well in advance. As soon as the snow melted with the arrival of spring this year, Gao Mingtao immediately commenced extensive immigration work. About four million people lived in Guannei, of whom he left the necessary two million near various strongholds for farming and cultivation. The remaining over two million Wei people were all forcibly relocated to the hinterlands of Heyang. This work started in February, and by April, over two million immigrants had already successively arrived at their new locations. The remaining two million Wei people in Guannei were all located near large cities heavily guarded by Chu troops, under constant surveillance, making it impossible for them to make any subtle moves. Thus, another reliance of Wei Country¡¯s southern invasion, namely the large-scale expectation of rallying their original nationals for support, was rendered null and void. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Amidst various disadvantages. When the Wei Country¡¯s returning army finally did attack, the outcome was naturally self-evident. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï First, upon reaching the front-line fortresses, they suffered a crushing defeat, assaulting a city for half a month, with over one hundred thousand dead or injured, without managing to capture a single one. Then, as the reinforcements led by Huang Xin arrived, the two armies took formation in the Wasteland, preparing for a proper battle in the open field. The Wei Country¡¯s mixed army, comprised entirely of a large number of hired soldiers from different ethnicities, local militias, various defeated troops, and northern frontier forces, Was nowhere near a match for the reorganized and reduced, all-elite Chu army. Just after one battle, the Wei Army was utterly defeated, with over half of its soldiers lost. The Wei Army¡¯s Commander, Great General Meng Chenglin, faced with the direct assault from Yongzhou Camp Commander Huang Xin, was so frightened that he fled on a solitary ride, abandoning his troops once again and desperately fleeing back to his country. Eventually, as the scattered Wei Army gradually returned to Shuofang, Wei Country counted its numbers, and of the original million-strong army, only about two hundred thousand men returned. The fate of the rest, whether they perished on the battlefield or were too frightened to return, was unknown. After this battle, Wei Country¡¯s last vestiges of reserve were exhausted; the prospect of rising again based on Shuofang¡¯s forces was completely squandered. What¡¯s worse is, Having won a great victory, Yongzhou camp general manager Huang Xin, by this time, was leading the victorious troops, marching powerfully towards Shuofang, aiming directly at Wei Country¡¯s northern capital, Ling Shou City. Clearly, Chu State too was thoroughly annoyed by Wei Country¡¯s disturbances. Now, the opponent intended to completely defeat Wei Country, giving it no chance to stir up trouble again. Having just suffered a terrible defeat and lost all its troops, what courage did Wei Country have left to resist the oncoming formidable Chu army? Or rather, even if they had the courage, they no longer had the strength to resist. Thus, barely two years after the capital was moved, Wei Country was once again faced with a crisis, as enemy troops neared their national capital. The Wei Emperor declared that he would lead his troops north to hunt, planning to return to the old Yan State homeland to pay tribute to the late emperors. This Ling Shou City, as well as Shuofang, we don¡¯t want them anymore! In the view of the Monarch and Ministers of the Wei court, abandoning the capital to go on a northern hunt, though it may sound disgraceful, was deemed the best choice under the circumstances of sheer helplessness. For the Shuofang at this moment, there was simply no condition for a steadfast defense. The original population of Shuofang was only about four million. The year before last, when Wei Country went on a northern hunt and moved the capital here, they immediately set about conscripting troops to replenish their military might. Nearly all adult men of vigor in the prefecture were forcibly enlisted. Even then, considering the troops insufficient, Wei Country recruited an additional two to three hundred thousand soldiers of various ethnicities from the old Yan State homeland in the North, finally mustering a million men. With a million soldiers, they had a semblance of security. But the daily consumption of over a million people and horses was astronomical. To sustain the army¡¯s needs, Wei Country brutally levied and plundered all sorts of money, grain, and supplies from the populace, even taking away the people¡¯s food. Yet, even with these measures, it was impossible to maintain the army¡¯s consumption. The army later had to resort to farming the fields themselves, producing and selling a portion of their needs, barely managing to meet the demand. But while the soldiers¡¯ bellies were barely filled, the low-level people suffered greatly. Without stored grain or food, even the seeds for planting the fields were taken away. What were the people of Shuofang to eat? Thus, in the past year, Shuofang experienced a famine that starved hundreds of thousands. This year, the situation became even worse. Because last year, the people of Shuofang had already eaten clean everything edible in the region. With no other options, they had to resort to cannibalism, entering the most brutal chapter. This destruction of the local population¡¯s ecosystem was another devastating blow. After rounds of destruction, whether the original four million population of Shuofang still included two million was now questionable. ¡°` Chapter 1112 - Chapter 1112 Chapter 450 The Fall of Wei Country_3 ?Chapter 1112: Chapter 450 The Fall of Wei Country_3 Chapter 1112: Chapter 450 The Fall of Wei Country_3 Moreover, among these two million people, there were also those from the Wei State Army. At this time, the Wei Army had suffered a crushing defeat and had lost hundreds of thousands of soldiers. Now, the remaining population in Shuofang County is estimated to be just over one million. This is also why, even though the Wei State knew Guannei County was tough to crack, they had to dispatch troops this year regardless. Because if they didn¡¯t send troops on the Southern Expedition, the Wei civilians in Shuofang County would have been eaten clean by them. At that point, if they still wanted to survive, could it be that the Wei Army would have to resort to cannibalism among themselves again? If it came to that, it would truly be too horrific. It¡¯s not that the Wei State¡¯s monarch and ministers cared too much about the Wei Army to do such a thing. The main reason was the fear that doing so would lead to the collapse of military morale. Without having to wait for the Chu State to attack, they would have self-destructed. So, to wait was to die, and to attack was also to die. Since death was inevitable either way, they might as well launch an attack to see if a glimmer of hope could be found. However, as it stands now, such thinking was obviously too optimistic. An army that had begun eating people out of hunger, how could they possibly be the match for the well-nourished and battle-ready troops of Chu? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? Not only did they suffer a crushing defeat in battle, now they couldn¡¯t even hold onto their hellish Old Nest. Before Huang Xin led the Chu Army into Shuofang County, the Wei State¡¯s ministers, along with the last two hundred thousand remnants of their defeated army, abandoned the city and fled, disappearing without a trace into the vast Yan State of Hebei. Huang Xin had no intention of pursuing this defeated army. Without Shuofang County, their last foundation, what turmoil could a mere twenty thousand defeated soldiers stir up even if they fled back to Yan State? It probably wouldn¡¯t be long before they vanished with no trace amidst the innumerable tribes of Hebei, Yan State, swallowed silently by the river of history. Following the Zhou Country, Wei State, one of the veteran hegemons of the Nine Provinces, lost its last piece of land in spring of this year, which is the forty-third year of the Shenwu era, the month of May. Although its monarch and ministers were still present, the land was lost, and the capital had fallen. By today¡¯s standards, it was officially considered extinct. In the contest for supremacy in the world, another contender withdrew from the stage. However, Huang Xin, on this side, had no time to feel the thrill of having achieved a significant conquest of a nation. He was currently overwhelmed with dealing with the mess left behind by the Wei Country. The situation in Shuofang County was far worse than imagined. Driven by hunger, every imaginable horror was continually taking place on this piece of land and upon its people. The survivors, no, it¡¯s uncertain if they could still be called human. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï After all, it¡¯s hard to say if someone who has fed on their own kind for several months is still one of your own, if they still consider you one of them, rather than food. That was the current state of Shuofang County. Seeing those people with green glints in their eyes, both fearful and covetous upon the Chu Army¡¯s arrival, some were outright numb and completely insane. Facing these residents of Shuofang with obviously troubled minds, even the many battle-hardened Chu soldiers felt a chill rising from the depths of their hearts. ¡°The people of this place are beastly, feeding on humans, their human dignity utterly gone!¡± The Guannei County Governor Gao Mingtao, who had hastily arrived with the troops and been appointed to oversee Shuofang County, was also horrified by what he saw. He had a deeper understanding of the Wei State¡¯s sin of exploiting its subjects. And then he made a suggestion to Huang Xin, ¡°Commander, the people here are no longer virtuous. To rashly move them into our country may incite local panic and corrupt public morals. In my view, the previously planned immigration should not be carried out. The people of Shuofang are also not easy to settle. Why not bring in some grain, leave a garrison here, and lure the Wei civilians of this county with the food to first ensure they have enough to eat and put an end to the unspeakable practices? Then let these people settle and farm on the spot, resume production, and live and work in peace. Eventually, after a decade or so, we can see what their local customs are like before discussing relocation again.¡± The current residents of Shuofang County, numbering over one million, are in no condition, mentally or physically, to be relocated. To force relocation would be a disaster for them, as well as a disaster for the already stable hinterlands. Thus, for the sake of all, it was best to let them stay where they were, to live or die on their own. The Chu State¡¯s provision of some grain relief was already the epitome of humanity and righteousness. And it was also appropriate. To extend the Chu State¡¯s western border northward into Shuofang County would significantly deepen the region¡¯s frontier defenses. This would be highly valuable militarily in shielding the region from the barbarian threat of the Yan State prairies in Hebei. Huang Xin nodded slightly at this, saying, ¡°Governor Gao is right. Let¡¯s settle them this way. Such a grand northern county has turned into a hell on earth.¡± He couldn¡¯t help but lament, ¡°The monarch and ministers of Wei have truly committed many sins.¡± Gao Mingtao, nearby, agreed wholeheartedly with a nod. Even for someone like him who had weathered many storms, this experience had opened his eyes. The rulers of Wei were truly inhumane. To be so cruel to their own people, It would go against all reason for such scoundrels to not fall. For the Great Chu to eradicate such a regime and rescue the people from desperate straits, it was undoubtedly a force of grace and righteousness. Born and educated as a traditional scholar, Gao Mingtao¡¯s conviction in the righteousness of Great Chu¡¯s Northern Expedition deepened in his heart, becoming ever more resolute. It was because the world held so many tyrannical monarchs and ministers that Chu needed to launch the Northern Expedition, to eliminate all tyrants and cruel officials, unify the realm, and rescue the people of the world from peril. Such supreme benevolence could not be compared to the lesser good of a single family or country. Only when there is but one country left in the world, with only a Wise Monarch in power, can the world welcome a long-lasting peace. Then everyone, from high-ranking officials and noble clans to the low-level populace, could enjoy the prosperity brought by a golden age. Having experienced thirty years of such a golden age in Yangzhou, and having witnessed various human tragedies amid the wars in the north, now seeing the brutality of Wei, a state of beasts, Gao Mingtao had a deeper appreciation for the peaceful era he once took for granted. His admiration for the greatness of the Shenwu Emperor above him grew clearer. Peace, this word, had never felt so precious and weighty. Chapter 1113 - Chapter 1113 Chapter 451 The Fall of Dongping ?Chapter 1113: Chapter 451: The Fall of Dongping Chapter 1113: Chapter 451: The Fall of Dongping ¡°` Huha€¡± As if a star streaked by, a brilliant silver light shot across the sky, slamming directly into the sturdy city gate. The collision emitted a thunderous boom. And then, the already battered and swaying city tower could no longer withstand the strain and finally collapsed with a roar. Amidst the rising dust and debris, cheers erupted within the city of Xichang. ¡°The city has fallen!¡± Seeing this, the numerous Chu State soldiers gathered at the city gate burst into excited shouts. As the original silver light dissipated, it revealed a Silver Armored God General. He brandished the treasured sword in his hand and, looking at the soldiers swarming behind him, he shouted loudly, ¡°Follow this general into the city, and eliminate every last Xu Rebel!¡± ¡°Eliminate every last Xu Rebel!¡± ¡°At your command!¡± ¡°Kill them!¡± The multitude of soldiers responded thunderously, surrounding the Silver Armored General as they filed into the city. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Some Xu Army soldiers, drawn by the commotion, barely had time to react before they saw the Chu Army charging towards them ominously, led by the Silver Armored God General who swung his sword. Several flashes of silver. The Xu Army soldiers blocking the way were severed into segments, their blood and flesh scattered across the ground. Seeing this, the nearby Xu Army, deterred by the falling tower and the intimidating presence of the opponent¡¯s Innate General, lost their last vestige of spirit. ¡°Run away!¡± ¡°I surrender, don¡¯t kill me!¡± The Xu Army soldiers who had no courage left to resist either raised their hands high, kneeled to surrender, or discarded their helmets and armor to flee for their lives. Some who still wished to fight on were swept away by the tide, sighing as they too ran for their lives. With no one left to obstruct them, the Chu Army soldiers faced no more barriers. Outside the city, rows upon rows of soldiers and armored men formed ranks, surging through the breach and into the city. For a moment, the Chu soldiers clad in golden armor spread from the breach like drops of ink in water, gradually dispersing. It was the time when every corner of the city was covered in golden armor, and I came after the blooming of my flowers to slay all. The moment had come. ¡°Your Majesty, Xichang has fallen!¡± On the high platform outside the city, where Chu State¡¯s high-level officials kept constant watch over the battlefield, someone immediately noticed the commotion and joyfully congratulated the news. ¡°After a month of relentless assault, this city was bound to fall.¡± Lu Yuan was also pleased in his heart but remained calm on the surface as he nodded, then said, ¡°Now that we have achieved results, let us finish thoroughly, not letting a single Xu Army soldier escape from the city. Send the order. All Innates in the camp, regardless of whether they are resting or not, must immediately lead their troops out of the camp and seal all the vital paths inside and outside of Xichang. I want none of the six remaining Inborn Grandmasters in the city to escape; they must all stay here.¡± After besieging Xichang for a month, not only was the city on the brink of collapse, but its defenders also suffered heavy casualties. Even two Inborn Grandmasters died in the fray. There are still six Inborn individuals from Xu State left in the city, who are the backbone of Xu State, each as valuable as a million-strong army. Lu Yuan had no intention of allowing them to escape back to their country to continue resisting and being enemies of Chu State. Now that the city walls had been breached and surrounded by his own forces, he would naturally strive for complete victory, obliterating all Xu People within the city. ¡°Yes, your servant will go at once to relay the command!¡± An official immediately accepted the order and left. Lu Yuan nodded and then stretched his body with a smile, saying, ¡°Since this is the final battle, I shall also flex my muscles a bit. There are still six Inborn left; let¡¯s see how many can flee from my hands.¡± With those words, an overwhelming True pneuma burst forth from his body, a searing red flame rising like the sun. Then came a series of explosive sounds as the scorching sun moved across the Void, leaping towards the city center. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï All along the way, Chu Army soldiers who noticed this scene and recognized whose phenomenon it was erupted into cheers. ¡°Long live the Emperor!¡± ¡°Victory is ours!¡± At that moment, the proud King, with his mighty army, took possession of this formidable city of Dongping. In the forty-third year of Shenwu, early June, after a month of besiegement by the Chu Army, Xichang fell. The city¡¯s half a million defenders and ten Inborns of Xu State either surrendered or were annihilated; not a single one escaped. That same month, Emperor Chu Luyuan left a part of his forces to garrison Xichang, and afterward, his main army swept past Shouzhang to the south, directly targeting Wuyan City at the border of Dongping and Le¡¯an Prefectures. With Wuyan under siege, Chu State¡¯s military forces reached the western borders of Le¡¯an Prefecture, once again posing a threat to the west of Le Ling City, the Imperial Capital of Xu State. In an instant, the news travelled back, shaking Le Ling from top to bottom. Outside the city, the newly gathered forces from within the prefecture, originally mobilized to head to the southern front line to resist the Chu State¡¯s Le¡¯an Camp, were suddenly halted and remained stationed in Le Ling for defense. But even so, with only three hundred thousand troops within the city, Xu State¡¯s monarch and officials still could not feel secure. The fall of Xichang, the siege of Wuyan, and the arrival of Chu Army deep into Le¡¯an Prefecture. Such a cascade of bad news had already made Xu State paranoid like a bird startled by the mere twang of a bow. The officials of Xu State within Le Ling City could not even be certain at this time whether Shouzhang City to the south of Dongping Prefecture had already fallen. Because for these past few months, the Chu Army did not only besiege Xichang but also, with the advantage of higher numbers and more generals, dispatched a vast number of troops. They continually swept through Dongping Prefecture, taking control of all prefectures and counties outside of Xichang, Shouzhang, and Wuyan. As these prefectures and counties fell one after another, Chu State¡¯s blockade of Dongping Prefecture became tighter and tighter. For Xu State¡¯s spies to penetrate these blockades and maintain contact with the three cities inside Dongping Prefecture became increasingly difficult. ¡°` Chapter 1114 - Chapter 1114 Chapter 451 The Fall of Dongping_2 ?Chapter 1114: Chapter 451: The Fall of Dongping_2 Chapter 1114: Chapter 451: The Fall of Dongping_2 Time has led us to the present. With the fall of Xichang, Chu¡¯s control over Dongping Prefecture has increased significantly. Le Ling City has thus completely lost communication with Dongping Prefecture. Except for confirming that Wuyan City, which is closer to Le Ling, is still holding out. The situation in Shouzhang City has become utterly unknown; nothing can be ascertained. Since nothing is known, according to the fearsome reputation that the Chu army has made for itself and considering that they are now on the brink of Le¡¯an Prefecture, Xu State¡¯s monarch and officials assumed that Shouzhang City has fallen along with Xichang City to the Chu army. And with the loss of these two cities, the only barrier left to the west of Le Ling City is Wuyan City. If any problems arise with this city, then there will be nothing left to stop an invasion from the west of Le Ling. The Chu army could then easily gallop all the way and lay siege to Le Ling City, which would face the same fate as Liang, encircled by Chu forces. Should this scenario unfold, Xu State¡¯s years of governance in Qingzhou would almost certainly end in collapse. In the end, even if the statehood could be preserved, it would become like Wei and Zhao, relegated to a corner, without any chance of regaining its former strength. Xu State naturally was unwilling to face such an outcome. Therefore, having realized the severity of the situation, Xu State¡¯s monarch and officials could not care less about other considerations. They immediately sent messengers to the Xu State mainland, urgently communicating the orders for troop mobilization to defend the king. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï On the Xu State mainland, there remained seven hundred thousand soldiers, with five Inborn overseeing them. These forces were originally intended to deal with the ethnic tribes settled in Xuzhou. But now, these tribes have collectively surrendered to Xu State, eliminating the greatest threat to the homeland. Therefore, the primary duty of these forces remaining at home was to maintain internal security to prevent any rebellion or chaos from the newly surrendered tribes. The rest concerned the other countries bordering Xu State. However, to the west of Xuzhou lies Zhao Country. Zhao has always been an ally of Xu, with mutual support and vigilance between the two countries, making it unnecessary to guard too closely against them. Therefore, the real threat to Xu State¡¯s mainland is the Tang Kingdom located to the east of Xuzhou in Jingzhou. But this year, Tang has been besieged by several powers in Yuzhou and has been too preoccupied with its own troubles to pose a threat. Especially since Chu State and Jin Country reached an agreement, peacefully exchanging the southern part of Yuzhou for Xianyun Prefecture last month, finalizing the deal. ?¦Ï???.§ã? To show sincerity, Chu forces even actively withdrew fifty thousand soldiers from the Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp, including five Inborn, demonstrating absolute good faith. With a reduced military presence, Chu¡¯s threat to Zheng Kingdom and Jin Country in Yuzhou has significantly decreased. These countries were then able to divert more forces to focus entirely on Tang Kingdom. Under the all-out attacks from these countries, even Tang, with its deep heritage, began to struggle. On the front line, Tang suffered retreat after retreat, losing soldiers and commanders, and facing desperate resistance. In such circumstances. The soldiers stationed in Tang Kingdom¡¯s mainland were continuously drafted to the front line, leaving only enough to barely defend against any attacks from Xu State and Xu Kingdom. The possibility of Tang launching an offensive against the other two countries was now out of the question. Thus, the threat from the east side of Xuzhou was also eliminated. In the short term, at least until there is a ceasefire between Tang and the other three countries, Xu State need not worry about the threat from Tang. At this moment, with the Imperial Capital Le Ling in imminent danger and no immediate threats at home, it was naturally time to redistribute the homeland¡¯s troops to reinforce the southern front. After two months of mobilization, in addition to the existing forces, Xu State had also raised an additional five hundred thousand Civil Group Volunteers in Xuzhou. Therefore, at this time Xu State possessed an army of one million two hundred thousand, with five Inborn within its territory. With a single command, one million soldiers and four Inborn were transferred en masse to Le¡¯an Prefecture from the mainland. Back home, only two hundred thousand Civil Group Volunteers and one Inborn were left to maintain the most basic public order. Beyond that. Xu State also carried out a partial mobilization at home. That is, local able-bodied men, while ensuring essential farming and cultivation work, must be prepared to enlist at a moment¡¯s notice. This ensured that, upon the government¡¯s order, an army could be raised and ready to march into battle at any time. The number of these partially mobilized local able-bodied men is also around one million, considered a second-tier reserve force. However, Xu State would not easily conscript these men unless absolutely necessary. They had not yet reached a point of desperation, nor were they as mad and heartless as Wei State¡¯s ministers, to inflict such harsh measures on their own people. Moreover, while the front lines required a large army, an ample supply of materials was even more critical. Now, with the sudden changes in the situation, Le¡¯an and Qingping, originally planned as rear areas, had become part of the front lines. Dependence on these two prefectures for logistical support to sustain the army¡¯s supply was clearly no longer possible. Thus, the only remaining rear area for Xu State was now its own mainland territory. If all the able-bodied men were conscripted from there, disrupting the production of these last resource lands, the loss would likely far exceed the benefits of the additional million soldiers. Such short-sighted measures, metaphorically killing the chicken to get the eggs, were not something Xu State¡¯s monarch and officials were foolish enough to carry out. Furthermore, even without that million men, the one million strong army already mobilized from the mainland was enough for Xu State¡¯s needs. Upon arrival in Le¡¯an Prefecture, Le Ling City¡¯s officials did not rush the reinforcements to the Imperial Capital but sent them straight to the front lines towards Wuyan City. At this juncture, the battlefields of Qingzhou in Xu State were aflame everywhere, each front teeming with peril. Chapter 1115 - Chapter 1115 Chapter 451 The Fall of Dongping_3 ?Chapter 1115: Chapter 451: The Fall of Dongping_3 Chapter 1115: Chapter 451: The Fall of Dongping_3 ¡°` But if one were to pick out the most critical situation, it would undoubtedly be Wuyan City, which directly faces the main force of Chu State. Wuyan City only has two hundred thousand soldiers and horses, with merely two Inborn Grandmasters within its wallsa€¡±this amount of strength may seem substantial. However, compared to the millions of troops of the main Chu army and their dozens of Inborn Grandmasters, it is actually as fragile as paper, with no real difference. Now is not the time to wait for Chu State to puncture this paper shield; we must quickly send reinforcements to turn this paper-thin defense into new iron walls and bronze ramparts. If we truly wait for Chu State to breach the defenses, then the next to be besieged would be Le Ling City. With Wuyan City blocking the way, Le Ling City can still be considered the rear, and there are several hundred miles of buffer space between Wuyan City and Le Ling City. Relying on these foundations, whenever there is a problem at any front line, Le Ling City can still try to make amends, to the greatest extent possible. If Le Ling City becomes the front line, then Xu State will truly have no room for maneuver. About this point, the monarch and officials of Xu State within Le Ling City still see things clearly and will not act foolishly. Once there were a million troops reinforcing Wuyan City on the western line, those in Xu State could finally feel much more at ease. Although it is rumored that Chu State has several millions of soldiers on the front line of Wuyan, commanding a thunderous presence. Their military might is formidable, difficult to contend with. But Xu State does not intend to clash head-on with Chu¡¯s army; they simply wish to stabilize the defense line and hold their ground in the city. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Even relying solely on defense, there shouldn¡¯t be a problem stopping Chu¡¯s army. Even if problems arise, they won¡¯t immediately collapse; they could still buy enough time for Le Ling City in the rear to dispatch new reinforcements for rescue. After all, Xu State¡¯s idea is to survive this year. It¡¯s already June, and there¡¯s at most four months¡¯ time until it snows in October. As long as they can hold out for these four months, Xu State will then have a whole winter to adjust their defensive line. The reason Xu State is in such a dire state this year, being thoroughly defeated by Chu State, with three prefectures in Qingzhou almost collapsing, is mainly because they were sabotaged by Liang. Otherwise, given Xu State¡¯s preparedness and national strength, they would not have been so easily punctured by a stab from Chu State. Therefore, if they really have a winter to prepare, even if they can¡¯t reverse the current downturn, they¡¯ll at least be able to fortify the current precarious defenses, allowing Xu State to last a bit longer next year. As long as they can hold on until next year, by then the countries that are currently engaged in fierce battle in Yuzhou should be able to deal with Tang Kingdom, the troublemaker. At that time, Zheng, Jin, and Xu could spare efforts to stand firm against Chu State. With the help of these allies, the awkward predicament of Xu and Liang states standing alone against Chu State this year would no longer occur. Even if Liang State cannot hold out and is annihilated by Chu State this year, the remaining four states of Xu, Zheng, Jin, and Xu, with their available strength, will far surpass that of Xu and Liang states this year. An alliance of the four kingdoms to defeat Chu State might not seem very likely, but their strength to fight a battle against Chu State is by no means inferior. So, as long as they can hold out until next year, then there is still hope, and Xu State can continue the fight for their homeland. To achieve this objective, the monarch and ministers of Xu State are willing to pay any price. Even if the price is to send the million soldiers and horses of Wuyan City into battle, it is a sacrifice they are willing to make. ¡­ Lu Yuan did indeed empathize a little with the resolve of Xu State. When he saw that his forces had barely surrounded Wuyan City and had not yet had time to remove Xu State¡¯s various camp strongholds outside the city, Xu State had already dispatched a million reinforcements. ¡°` He understood that Xu State had truly invested heavily in order to preserve this key western stronghold. Fortunately, Lu Yuan was not too fixated on Wuyan City. If the city couldn¡¯t be taken, then so be it. Chu State was currently attacking Le¡¯an Prefecture, and Wuyan City wasn¡¯t the only target; if he couldn¡¯t break through the Xu Army¡¯s defense here, he could easily make a breakthrough elsewhere. He had plenty of options. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?0 Therefore, when he saw Wuyan City¡¯s reinforcements increase by a million and its defense line instantly solidify, Lu Yuan decided to divide his forces again. Previously, to attack Xichang City, Chu Army had to dedicate about seven hundred thousand prisoners and suffered around one hundred thousand casualties. To maintain the supply lines afterward, they left behind three Inborn Grandmasters, one hundred thousand Chu Soldiers, and two hundred thousand prisoners as garrisons in Xichang City. Additionally, within Dongping Prefecture, they separated another two Inborn Grandmasters, one hundred thousand soldiers, and two hundred thousand prisoners to control and oversee the conquered prefectures and counties. So now, the Chu Army that Lu Yuan led to the Wuyan frontline consisted of only eighteen Inborn Grandmasters, eight hundred thousand soldiers, and one million one hundred thousand prisoner conscripts. There were also the newly surrendered two hundred thousand Xu Army troops at Xichang City, which were being reorganized. Once the reorganization was complete, they could be pulled to the front line to be used as cannon fodder. In terms of military strength, the central route¡¯s Chu Army was still quite sufficient. But facing them at Wuyan City, the Xu Army had an army of one million two hundred thousand and six Inborn Grandmasters. With multiple Inborn Grandmasters at his disposal, Lu Yuan directly pulled out eight Inborn Grandmasters, three hundred thousand soldiers, and five hundred thousand conscripts, ordering them to rush to Sheqiu City in the south and work with Qingyangzi there to first take down this key town to the southeast of Le¡¯an Prefecture. Do the Xu people think they can hold Lu Yuan back in the west? Very well, he would play along with the opponent¡¯s wishes. Only, while they might be able to hold back in the west and block Lu Yuan, he doubted they had another million soldiers to block the large army in the southwest. Even if they could hold back here, in Le¡¯an Prefecture, Chu State still had the southern line and the southeastern battlefield. Reinforcements for the rear were also available from the Southern Route Army as a supplement. After being besieged for several months, Xian An was also beginning to falter. The Liang Army inside the city had attempted to break out several times, but each attempt was firmly blocked by the Chu Army, sealing them inside the city with no chance to break the deadlock. As food within the city dwindled, the day of Liang Army¡¯s doom was now merely a month away. By July, the Southern Route Army would be able to conquer Liang State, and Huang Xuan could lead his forces northward to support the Xu State battlefield. All over the Xu State battlefield, Xu State was trying to plug the gaps and repair walls, borrowing from one area to shore up another. But with leaky defenses everywhere, how could they possibly keep up? Even if they could barely hold firm in Le¡¯an Prefecture, a few hundred thousand reinforcements in Qingping Prefecture to the east could deliver a fatal blow, potentially piercing directly into their Imperial Capital Le Ling or the Xu State heartland. Therefore, defending was not an option. How could there be such a thing as a burglar for a thousand days, yet no defense against a burglar for a thousand days? Unfortunately, Xu State was unable to cope with Chu State, the thief of the nation, so they could only sit and await their demise, quietly waiting for death. The affairs of the world are indeed this cruel. Struggling for supremacy in the world is a matter of life or death; there¡¯s no such thing as coexistence. Chapter 1116 - Chapter 1116 Chapter 452 The Fall of Zhao ?Chapter 1116: Chapter 452 The Fall of Zhao Chapter 1116: Chapter 452 The Fall of Zhao The blazing sun was so scorching that it made people uncomfortable. Heatwaves blew in wave after wave, mixed with an extremely strong scent of blood. Old Black Liu wiped the sweat off his forehead; his helmet had been heated to the point of burning, but he didn¡¯t have the luxury of worrying about it. Instead, he stared tensely into the distance at the billowing dust clouds rolling towards them. ¡°Is this the thirteenth Chu invader army that¡¯s come?¡± Next to him, his fellow townsman, Gao Shan Liu, nudged him in the arm with his elbow and asked aloud. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï ¡°Yeah, the thirteenth,¡± Old Black Liu replied. He swallowed hard, his throat dry and hot, but that discomfort was nothing compared to the agitation and fear in his heart. ¡°I heard that yesterday the camp stationed by the San Qing regiment outside the city was breached by the newly arrived Chu invader army. Not a single person from the entire camp made it back.¡± Gao Shan Liu¡¯s voice was tinged with restlessness, ¡°This is already the fourth camp that has been overrun. At this rate, the Chu invaders will likely uproot all of the camps outside the city within half a month. By then, Sheqiu City will have no outposts to shield it, and they¡¯ll start attacking the city directly. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï The two of us, taking turns guarding the city, will have to face the Chu invaders head-on then. Those are Chu invaders we¡¯re talking about¡­¡± In the past three years, the Chu army had launched three northern expeditions, each time seemingly invincible and undefeated. Countries throughout the world had all suffered losses at the hands of the Chu army, to varying degrees. Like their own Xu State, didn¡¯t they suffer a disastrous defeat last year in Liang region, where they lost an entire army of a million in one fell swoop? And so, under this prestigious reputation, the Chu army had built up an aura of invincibility. Under this pressure, armies from other countries naturally felt a sense of intimidation and fear when facing the Chu army, putting them at an immediate disadvantage. In the past half month, what was usually a siege by the Chu army turned into active preparations for an assault after the arrival of reinforcements. The camps outside Sheqiu City that served as strategic points had also been successively eradicated. The number of casualties among the Xu Army Soldiers during this period exceeded thirty thousand. For a battlefront that only had a two hundred thousand strong force, this was a significant loss. This, combined with the previous reputations attributed to the Chu army and the bloody realities they witnessed, resulted in Gao Shan Liu¡¯s mentality of regarding the enemy as fearsome as a tiger. ¡°What can you do even if we face them? Do you think about running away?¡± Old Black Liu¡¯s voice also shook a little, but his view of the situation was very pragmatic, ¡°The officers are right behind us, not following military ordersa€| You know the fate of those people these days. They are beheaded on the spot and then hung on the city wall for everyone to see. Even if you wanted to escape, the Chu invaders have completely surrounded Sheqiu City. No matter how much you want to save your own skin, you can¡¯t escape. You¡¯ll either be killed by the Chu army or captured as prisoners and then forced to attack the city. Either way, death is the only outcome.¡± The methods the Chu army used on prisoners and defectors were well-known thanks to the constant publicity from other countries. No one wanted to be cannon fodder. Despite many low-level soldiers knowing that their lives were seen as worthless, merely pawns in the eyes of the privileged, it didn¡¯t matter how they were viewed by those above them. They still cherished their own lives. If they fell into the hands of the Chu army, even if they surrendered, the chances of surviving were slim to none. Rather than such an end, they might as well grit their teeth and defend the city, and fight with all they had. Plus, with the demonization of the Chu army propagated by other countries, even low-rank soldiers like Old Black Liu, who had limited experience, couldn¡¯t ignore the fates of those who had surrendered that they had witnessed in the past few days. Once these two perspectives confirmed each other, the Xu Army Soldiers in the city felt an immediate boost in their resolve to resist. This could only mean that using captives was a double-edged sword. The advantage was it reduced casualties among the main forces of the Chu army, better preserving their strength. The disadvantage, however, was manifesting before their eyes, as it made the will of their enemies to resist firmer. But when choosing the lesser of two evils, reducing one¡¯s own casualties was still somewhat more beneficial than considering the enemy¡¯s will to resist. So even up to now, Chu State hadn¡¯t abandoned the use of expendable defectors. ¡°The general has arrived.¡± Just then, another fellow townsman who had been quietly listening to the two of them spoke up softly. The previously murmuring Old Black Liu and Gao Shan Liu instantly closed their mouths and looked towards the source of the sound. They saw, in the distance atop the city wall, two burly generals clad in white armor, flanked by a dozen personal guards, starting their patrol along the city walls. As for the purpose of the patrol. One was to check for any lapses in defense. The other was to catch those like Old Black Liu who spread rumors in secret and undermined the morale of the soldiers. In the past few days, quite a few such unlucky souls were caught and made into examples by being hung from the city walls. Both being low-ranking soldiers, they could grumble among themselves in private with little consequence, but they didn¡¯t dare complain in front of the generala€¡±that was a death sentence. As a result, Old Black Liu and the others quickly straightened up, their expressions solemn, their mouths tightly shut, portraying the image of silent and disciplined good soldiers. The officers fancied precisely this kind of honest and composed soldier. Having served for two years, Old Black Liu and the others had gradually come to understand what generals liked, knowing exactly how to perform. Indeed. When the two generals passed by them and saw an unmoving and composed scene, they nodded in satisfaction. They even addressed Gao Shan Liu with a few words, offering consolation in a gentle voice amid his tense expression, before they floated away. ¡°Morale seems usable!¡± Just after concluding the patrol of the city¡¯s defenses, the chief commander within the city, Zhou Bangcai, couldn¡¯t help but comment to a companion as they returned to their room in the city wall tower for a rest. Chapter 1117 - Chapter 1117 Chapter 452 The Fall of Zhao_2 ?Chapter 1117: Chapter 452 The Fall of Zhao_2 Chapter 1117: Chapter 452 The Fall of Zhao_2 At his side, Hu Guangli, one of the two Inborn Commanders in the city, spoke in an even tone, ¡°The Chu bandits are cruel and lawless, which has provoked widespread fury. The soldiers fear surrendering to the bandits and naturally vow to resist to the death.¡± Zhou Bangcai nodded in agreement, but his worries mounted, ¡°However, these past days, the Chu Army¡¯s reinforcements from the north have been on the increase, and the strength of the troops at Qingyangzi, the Le¡¯an Camp Commander outside the city, has grown ever more formidable. If things continue this way, the bandits will soon outnumber the army inside our city by several times. Based on the bandits¡¯ past actions, I¡¯m afraid they¡¯ll immediately launch an attack on the city, or rather, the fact is they have already started the attack. The four camps that were torn down outside the city are a harbinger of this. With the strength of just one city, I fear we won¡¯t hold out for long, and the road to Xichang City behind us will also be broken by the bandits.¡± Zhou Bangcai was full of worry. Not only the low-level soldiers, like Old Black Liu and others, were worried about the future. Even someone like him, the ruler of a city, commanding two hundred thousand horsemen, was concerned about the bleak future. The fate of Xichang City, as seen from their position to the rear, was crystal clear to them. Not only were all the soldiers and horses of the city given to the Chu Army, but not one of those Inborn Generals managed to escape. When recalling the previous northern expeditions by Chu State, including Wei, Zhao, Liang, Zheng, and even their Xu State, once surrounded by the Chu Army, very few were able to escape. The phenomenon of it being difficult to kill an Inborn Grandmaster, with hardly a single Innate dying even in a great war, Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï The death of Inborn Grandmasters on the battlefield slowly became the norm, a fact which people started to accept as usual. This is undoubtedly a very alarming reality. Especially for them, the Inborn Grandmasters, it meant that the normally effective get-out-of-death-free card was starting to fail. They were no longer virtually assured of survival on the battlefield, But could, just like the common soldiers, have their lives easily taken by the enemy and be returned wrapped in horsehide. The emergence of this fact was heavy on their hearts. Zhou Bangcai felt the pressure brought by the Chu Army and began to worry about his own life. ¡°Right now, the reinforcements coming from the Chu Army are few, and they have not yet fully surrounded Sheqiu City. We should take this opportunity to risk a breakout and head to Le Ling City to seek aid from His Majesty.¡± Hu Guangli suggested, ¡°As long as His Majesty also sends reinforcements, even if the Chu Army increases its soldiers, our army will also be reinforced, and Sheqiu City will naturally be as solid as a rock. Just like Wuyan City, let¡¯s make the Chu bandits suffer a heavy blow here as well.¡± As high-level officials of the army, the two of them were well aware of what was happening with the Chu Army coming from the north outside the city. It¡¯s just that Wuyan City in the north had been reinforced with too many troops from within, and the Chu bandits had hit a wall there, unable to make any progress. That¡¯s why they redeployed troops to march south, aiming to squeeze this softer target of Sheqiu City. But just as long as this place receives reinforcements like Wuyan City, then the Chu bandits will have the same old story repeated, and they¡¯ll once again suffer a crushing defeat.¡± Zhou Bangcai sighed, ¡°The country is already short of troops. Just our Le¡¯an Prefecture alone has opened three battlefronts to the south. Wuyan City in Dongping County is also in grave danger. Additionally, with Qingping County facing a large incursion of Chu bandits, All together, the places in the country that require troops add up to no less than three million soldiers. Even if Le Ling City still has some troops, how many can they dispatch to come here? And if more troops leave Le Ling City, what happens if another front becomes vulnerable? Where will we find reinforcements to dispatch?¡± After worrying about the state affairs, Zhou Bangcai changed the topic, ¡°However, you¡¯re absolutely right, if we don¡¯t call for reinforcements now, then Sheqiu City won¡¯t be able to hold. If we fall here, the front lines at Le Ling will be wide open, and the Chu bandits will be able to march straight in and head for the Imperial Capital. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï This is something we absolutely cannot allow to happen. In a moment, I will go and select some experts and volunteers to break through, bringing a few top generals with them to seek aid from Le Ling.¡± Hu Guangli said, ¡°We should have done this much earlier. If reinforcements come now, we still might save the situation. If it¡¯s delayed by another ten days to half a month, even if reinforcements arrive, Sheqiu City won¡¯t hold.¡± Zhou Bangcai acknowledged, ¡°I will act with the utmost haste.¡± That night, Aside from a few guard posts arranged by the Chu Army, they had fallen into sleep outside the city. And upon the walls of Sheqiu City, a basket was slowly lowered from above, from which several shadows leapt out and disappeared into the vast night. They split in different directions, heading north through various routes. In the middle of the night, several brief and urgent skirmishes broke out, as some were discovered. Inside the city, the Xu Army heard the commotion, each man with his heart in his throat, silently praying. Under this atmosphere within the city, the dawn broke the darkness, and a new day began. ¡­ Meanwhile, on the battlefield of Xu Country, the Chu Army and Xu Army began to match wits and forces, each comparing their military resources. In Ji Province of Northern Hebei, in Handan City, Accompanied by roars of cheer and thick smoke rising from within, the banner of Zhao was chopped to the ground. Countless barbarian soldiers with different hairstyles and dresses trampled over the blood-stained Zhao banner on the ground, swarming into the city. Following last year¡¯s defeat of the Zhao Army in the eastern province, which lost the decade-long stronghold of Nan Du¡¯s Emperor Hill and retreated in haste back to its homeland in Ji Province, Millions of barbarians entrenched in the Ji Province, like sharks that smelt blood, thronged and began to gnaw around the grievously wounded Zhao, continually tearing with their teeth. Chapter 1118 - Chapter 1118 Chapter 452 The Fall of Zhao_3 ?Chapter 1118: Chapter 452 The Fall of Zhao_3 Chapter 1118: Chapter 452 The Fall of Zhao_3 After the Zhao Country fled back to the north, only over eight hundred thousand battered troops remained, the majority of whom were the old and weak, and their morale was extremely low. In Ji Province, the barbarian troops slightly outnumbered them, just over a million, but the majority were able-bodied young adults. In theory, Zhao Country had the defensive advantage and should not have feared the invasion of the barbarians. However, during the major battle last year, Zhao Country had conscripted too many able-bodied men, and mobilized a large number of women and the weak to help transport food and fodder, resulting in the neglect of that year¡¯s farming. Thus, relying on the previous years¡¯ reserves, Zhao Country managed to endure despite the devastating defeat last year. But this year, As the granaries gradually depleted, a famine broke out across Zhao Country, affecting the entire nation. With empty stomachs, naturally, they were unable to fight. The Zhao army, which could still maintain a tit-for-tat fight against the barbarians and occasionally gain minor victories, was also severely damaged by this. Hundreds of thousands of troops on the front line, with growling stomachs, gave the barbarians the opportunity to obliterate them on the battlefield. After that, the doors of Zhao Country were wide open, allowing the barbarians to push straight through, slaughtering their way to the imperial capital Handan. In the end, after holding out for two months, Handan collapsed in starvation and was breached by the barbarians. The Emperor of Zhao self-immolated in the royal palace, and many Zhao people within the city met their fate as a nation in blood and flames. On the third day of the seventh month of the forty-third year of Shenwu, the barbarians of the North Territory conquered Handan, and Zhao Country met its demise, after existing for eight hundred and seventy-one years. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Among the heroes of the Nine Provinces, another overlord exited the stage. ¡­ Just as Lu Yuan received the news of the fall of Zhao Country, the same message was also transmitted back from the Shuofang Prefecture by his avatar¡¯s divine sense. ¡°Wei Country has completely perished, hasn¡¯t it?¡± Upon hearing the avatar¡¯s report, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but be moved. A few months earlier, the Chu army had broken through the Shuofang army and occupied the last territory of Wei Country, which meant that Wei Country had already perished in practical terms. But nominally, the Emperor of Wei was still alive, the Wei court still existed, and Wei held command over an army of one to two hundred thousand troops. With these assets, Wei Country could still be considered to be clinging to existence, harboring a sliver of hope for restoration. As long as Wei Country could really reestablish a piece of territory in its old home of Yan State, it could rebuild the nation within minutes. Therefore, in the eyes of the world, Wei Country was still seen as having some hope for resurgence. ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï But just now, the avatar stationed in Shuofang Prefecture reported back that a tribe of barbarians from Yan State had migrated south and surrendered to Chu State. In doing so, they offered the severed head of the Wei Emperor who had fled north towards Yan State, along with a slew of captured Wei ministers. According to the report from that surrendering barbarian tribe. After the Wei remnants fled to their old home in Yan State, they encountered a host of barbarian tribes that were originally at odds with Wei Country. The likelihood of Wei Country restoring itself and snatching territory from Chu State was already impractical. The only hope left was to reclaim their original homeland in Yan State, which they had abandoned. But since Wei Country had already given up their old home, when they left, naturally new masters came to fill the void. The barbarians that migrated from the north had long established all sorts of tribal alliances and states in the abandoned southern parts of Yan State. ¡°Now you say you want to come back and rebuild Wei Country, as if it is that easy?¡± ¡°Not to mention that to rebuild Wei Country, we must also defeat these barbarians and enslave them, using them as the foundation of the new nation, which will only cause more offense.¡± ¡°With the long-standing enmity that previously existed between Wei Country and these barbarians, marked by decades of conflict, their hatred for each other is deep and irreconcilable.¡± ¡°As a result, when Wei Country returned to The North, scarcely had it defeated a small barbarian tribe when it stirred up a hornet¡¯s nest.¡± ¡°All of the barbarian tribes and nations in Yanzhou flocked to join the encirclement and attack against the remnants of the Wei army.¡± ¡°After months of fierce fighting, the Wei Emperor, along with a handful of his battered troops, engaged in a prolonged struggle with the barbarians.¡± ¡°Finally, last month, they could hold out no longer and, following a great battle, they were surrounded and annihilated, dying on the battlefield.¡± ¡°The surviving Wei ministers either perished or surrendered, becoming prisoners of the barbarians.¡± ¡°With this, the last hope for Wei Country¡¯s revival also vanished.¡± ¡°The once third dominant power of The world has completely withdrawn from the stage of the Nine Provinces.¡± ¡°¡®The barbarian tribes that have migrated south can all be accepted. Tribal chiefs will be appointed to official positions. The tribal warriors, after being selected, will be incorporated into the ranks of soldiers. The tribe¡¯s commonfolk will be moved back to the hinterlands of Central State and settled. They will be registered as citizens and become subjects of Great Chu.¡¯ Lu Yuan notified Huang Xin at the Yongzhou Camp about his decision. ¡°As for how to handle the barbarians, Chu State also has plenty of experience.¡± ¡°From the time of his very beginnings, when he settled the million Miao People of Dongting, he¡¯s had a track record.¡± ¡°Later, the handling of tens of millions of people from Lingnan and the Southwest Barbarians was also satisfactory.¡± ¡°By the time it came to subjugating the Barbarians, several million more were smoothly integrated into Chu State.¡± ¡°Now, dealing with some barbarians from The North is naturally no trouble at all.¡± ¡°However, the southward migration of these barbarians has indeed served as a wake-up call to him, as it seems he has somewhat overlooked the role of these barbarians since the Northern Expedition.¡± ¡°¡®Xu State over there could reclaim Xuzhou¡¯s millions of barbarians, allowing Xu State to gain a million barbarian troops and several Inborn experts, greatly increasing its national strength. ¡®Great Chu has even more experience in this area and has more resources to draw upon, so naturally, we can replicate this approach, enticing the barbarians to serve our purposes.¡¯ ¡®If these barbarians can even side with Xu State, then it goes without saying that Great Chu, which now dominates Central State, will have an even greater pull.¡¯ As Lu Yuan thought this, he immediately sent a message to Huang Xin instructing him to dispatch a messenger to Yanzhou to surrender those Yanzhou Barbarians.¡± ¡°These barbarians keep migrating south, merely seeking a place to settle.¡± ¡°Now that Chu State occupies Central State, there is enough territory for the millions of southerly migrating people, right?¡± ¡°As long as this condition is offered, there is no worry that these barbarians won¡¯t be tempted.¡± ¡°Then there¡¯s Ji Province as well, where Zhao Country is extinguished, but there are still five to six million Zhao people there. ¡°Though they are mostly elderly, women, and children, they are still a human resource that shouldn¡¯t be carelessly discarded. Huang Lin, leading the Northern Camp, happens to be idle, so just let him take his 400,000 men north to Ji Province to receive these remnants of Zhao, and relocate them to Central State. ¡°At the same time, take this opportunity to try to win over some barbarians; no matter how many can be enticed, it is always a sure gain for Chu State.¡± As Lu Yuan thought this, he also issued an order to Huang Lin of the Northern Camp. ¡°Once these two orders are carried out, the final affairs after the destruction of Zhao Country and Wei Country will be settled.¡± ¡°Chu State begins its final harvest.¡± Chapter 1119 - Chapter 1119 Chapter 453 The Fall of the Liang State ?Chapter 1119: Chapter 453 The Fall of the Liang State Chapter 1119: Chapter 453 The Fall of the Liang State In the forty-third year of Shenwu, on the twenty-ninth day of the eighth month. Just as the Wei Country and the Zhao Country fell in succession, Lu Yuan sent people to Yan State and Ji Province to wrap things up. It was here in Qingzhou, Donglai Prefecture, Xian¡¯an City. As the banner with the character ¡°Liang¡± on the city head fell, Liang¡¯s last imperial capital, Xian¡¯an, finally opened up to Chu State with the help of insiders. After enduring a siege that lasted four to five months, and facing over a million hungry mouths, Xian¡¯an¡¯s grain supply finally broke down. After half a month of starvation, the city¡¯s defenders either came out in large numbers to surrender, or attempted to break out, only to be defeated by the Chu army amidst starvation and ultimately captured. Or starved of strength, they stayed in the city, quietly waiting for their final fate. Today. A group of starving soldiers from Liang, unable to bear it any longer, took the initiative to open the city gate and surrender to the Chu army outside. And leading them was an Innate General from Zhou Country, trusted by the Emperor of Xian¡¯an, Liang Mingyu. On the streets of Xian¡¯an City. He Ba Yuan, in armor stained red, held a red-tasseled spear in hand, glaring fiercely at the man in front of him. ¡°Liu Zineng, you shameless traitor!¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï In past days, we came from Zhou Country in desolation, like dogs that had lost their home. Thanks to His Majesty¡¯s shelter and strong support, we were granted power and status, earning us today¡¯s noble positions. But now, instead of repaying the country and His Majesty with loyalty to atone for this gracious promotion, you have instead flung open the gates wide, led bandits into the city, and driven His Majesty¡¯s country to death¡¯s door. Such acts of disloyalty and unfilial behavior, are you even human? I am ashamed to be associated with you, and I must kill you today to wash away the disgrace of us Zhou people!¡± Opposite him, a man in red armor, upon hearing He Ba Yuan¡¯s words and feeling overwhelmed by his presence, couldn¡¯t help but retreat two steps. But he quickly recovered, steadying his feet, and said indignantly, ¡°He Ba Yuan, stop putting on airs here. Liang Mingyu indeed was good to us. But we¡¯ve long since helped him seize the Dragon Throne, stabilizing his rule, thereby repaying the kindness of his shelter. Now Xian¡¯an City is besieged; the grain is nearly exhausted, and we¡¯ve already seen the tragic situation of cannibalism. If we continue the defense, what other result could there be besides turning the million people in the city into beasts devouring each other? Great Chu has already swept through Central State, and the unification of the world is an inevitable trend. With only one city left, Liang Country has no chance to turn the tables. You and Liang Mingyu, out of selfish interests, intend to drag the million souls of our people with you to death. Such selfishness, isn¡¯t it terrifying? I and the soldiers in the city just want to live. The people in the city, who defended for Liang for half a year until the food and fodder ran out before surrendering, have already done right by Liang Mingyu. If you understand the Heavenly Mandate, then join me in defecting to Chu, so you can still maintain your wealth and honor. If you continue to follow Liang Mingyu, you will immediately perish beneath the blade, there¡¯s no fortune in that!¡± Hearing Liu Zineng¡¯s shameless words, He Ba Yuan laughed out loud, a surge of blood light igniting over him, transforming him into a fiery streak as he thrust his spear toward his opponent. ¡°You shameless wretch, spare me your rhetorical defense. If you want me to be a specter beneath the blade, then let¡¯s see whose skill prevails! Rebel, meet your death!¡± He Ba Yuan was a second-stage Grandmaster of Inborn level, and being pushed into a corner, he was prepared to fight to the death, his momentum naturally immense. This section of the street, within a dozen steps, was now enveloped in a blood-red light. The true essence of his opponent¡¯s Martial Arts had sealed off the surrounding space, leaving Liu Zineng no escape. It was obvious that He Ba Yuan detested the traitor greatly, thinking of nothing else but to kill and be rid of him. Liu Zineng also knew how much his actions were hated. Seeing that he was surrounded and unable to flee from He Ba Yuan¡¯s Martial Arts essence, his only chance to survive now was to fight. ¡°He Ba Yuan, here I am. If you have the skills, come and kill me!¡± Liu Zineng, not wanting to lose momentum, roared, his body also exploding with a golden monkey beast image that enveloped him, roaring as he lunged toward the red glow. A Great War of Innate level immediately erupted on this stretch of street. The nearby Chu troops entering the city, the defectors from Liang, and the Liang soldiers ready to resist or scatter and flee, upon seeing this, fled hastily as if trying to escape a plague. And the commotion also quickly attracted the attention of the invading Chu forces. A Prince of Chu Country, who was leading troops to sweep the nearby areas, noticed the Innate level clash and immediately sensed a big catch. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Without hesitation, he headed in that direction. Upon arriving closer and spotting He Ba Yuan¡¯s distinctive blood light anomaly, he was overjoyed. Among the city¡¯s biggest catches were the last Emperor of Liang, the famous Liang general Yan Yunqing, and this Commander of the Liang forces, He Ba Yuan. ¡°Rebel, prepare to die!¡± Not wanting the credit to slip away, the Prince of Chu roared, transforming into a scorching sun, and descended onto the battlefield between the two combatants. At the same moment. Near the battlefield, several other presences were approaching rapidly. Other Chu generals, who had heard the news, were also making haste to arrive. In terms of Innate power, Chu Country far surpassed Liang, which only had the remnants of Zhou Country¡¯s support. Facing three or five against one was significantly easier, a situation they could easily orchestrate. Even having more than ten against one was not out of the question. Chapter 1120 - Chapter 1120 Chapter 453 The Fall of the Liang State_2 ?Chapter 1120: Chapter 453 The Fall of the Liang State_2 Chapter 1120: Chapter 453 The Fall of the Liang State_2 In another part of the city, the famed general of Liang, Yan Yunqing, was being beaten up by several avatars of Lu Yuan and his men. ¡°You Chu thieves, I will fight you to the end!¡± Before the main thoroughfare of the imperial palace, Yan Yunqing led the last hundred or so remaining soldiers, looking at the imposing advancing Chu army, with a hint of relief and desolation flashing in his eyes. Then, with a leap, he raised his sword and charged into battle. Inside the imperial palace. ¡°Father Emperor, no!¡± Along with the terrified scream of a five-year-old child, Liang Mingyu stumbled in his steps, looking back at the over a dozen corpses that lay behind him, his eyes filled with despair. The fall of Xian¡¯an City, in order not to let his wives, children, and family suffer the humiliation of a nation¡¯s downfall. He could only take the lead, sending his family on their way first. But accompanying them on this journey, in addition to his family, was also the dynastic reign of Liang that had lasted a thousand years. ¡°Great Liang! Great Liang!¡± Chanting these two words, Liang Mingyu then drew off the crown from his hand, disheveled his hair, and burst into a big laugh: ¡°Father Emperor, back then you had us brothers compete for that seat beneath you as if rearing venomous insects. Last year, I committed fratricide to ascend the throne in Xian¡¯an. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï I thought I could turn the tide, and even if I couldn¡¯t, I thought I could at least help Liang hold out for a few more years, to not be destroyed so quickly. But who would have thought, my ascension actually hastened the demise of Liang. It¡¯s only been nine months, and Xian¡¯an City has fallen, Great Liang has perished by my hand. Ha ha ha! Indeed, indeed, you were right not to regard me so highly back then! It¡¯s better this way, better that Liang should perish. Let the nation end in the hands of this incompetent king! ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Under the Nine Springs, let the ancestors judge me, this sinner of Liang!¡± Liang Mingyu cried out in anguish, then lifted his Long Sword and forcefully slashed at his throat. As blood sprayed out, he staggered and fell heavily to the ground. On that day. The last emperor of Liang, Liang Mingyu, amidst the fall of Xian¡¯an City, slaughtered his wife and children, and then took his own life. The reign of Liang came to an end, lasting one thousand one hundred and seven years. This hegemon of Qingzhou had finally met its end. A new chapter would be written by Chu, which rose from the old king¡¯s bones. ¡­ ¡°So Liang has perished too¡­¡± When Lu Yuan received the message from his avatar Huang Xuan through mental transmission, he was attending to his official duties. Upon hearing this piece of news, he couldn¡¯t help but pause his writing. Although he had expected the fate of Liang, to be the one to end it himself still stirred some poignant reflections. He could still remember when he started his own path; back then Liang, as a mighty nation of the North, was so prestigious and imposing. The demise of Yue Country, besides the internal rebellions that sprung up time and again, was also significantly contributed to by Liang, the foreign enemy, accounting for at least twenty percent of the credit. Had Liang not launched the Southern Expedition and seized the majority of Yue¡¯s military forces, Yue could have quickly quelled the internal rebellion and restored peace. ¡°If that had been the case, perhaps I would not have followed the path I¡¯m on now. I might have been living a carefree life in Changning county town with Brother Sun. Or perhaps, I would have engaged in hidden cultivation in the deep mountains, waiting for the day when my Great Achievement in martial arts was reached, to emerge and vie for supremacy in the martial arts world?¡± Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but think. It¡¯s ironic that today¡¯s enemy that destroyed Liang, has come this far, in part due to the help of Liang and its people. Whether it was Liang¡¯s Southern Expedition leading to the disintegration of Yue, Or the Dan Ding Path¡¯s descent to the south, which lured Lu Yuan with the Taiping Dao Book toward the path of Qi Luck Cultivation. Both these factors were catalysts in his becoming the Chu Emperor of today. ¡°Now, the Dan Ding Path was destroyed last year, and this year Liang has followed in destruction. The two forces that led me on this path have both ended by my hand in this process. Time and fate! Could it be that there truly is some sort of destiny at play in the workings of the universe?¡± As a cultivator, Lu Yuan, while not fully believing in destiny or divine will, nevertheless maintained a sense of reverence. For in this world, if you, as a cultivator, swore an oath to the heavens and dared to break it, there truly would be retribution. This fact alone demanded attention to the role of the heavens. ¡°Forget it, the will of heaven is unfathomable, and not something that I, who haven¡¯t even achieved Immortality, can deduce.¡± After a brief contemplation, Lu Yuan thought the matter too profound and decided not to dwell on it any longer. Instead, he began to address the aftermath of Liang¡¯s collapse. ¡°The Southern Route Army will leave a portion of troops to oversee Liang¡¯s territory and guard the captured Liang soldiers from this battle, reorganize them, and keep them for later use. The main forces of the Army, along with some of the reorganized Liang forces, will immediately move North to Le¡¯an Prefecture to reinforce the battlefields in the south and southeast parts of Le¡¯an. They will assist the Le¡¯an Camp in defeating the opposing Xu Army as quickly as possible and converge at the gates of Le Ling City.¡± Lu Yuan promptly made arrangements for the aftermath of the Southern Route Army. Currently, on the battlefield in Le¡¯an Prefecture, the Chu and Xu forces were engaged in a fierce struggle. At Wuyan City, the armies of Chu and Xu, each numbering one million, were locked in a standoff around this important western fortress of Le¡¯an. With Lu Yuan personally overseeing the battle, it was the most critical frontline. In the southwest, near Sheqiu City, the Chu army¡¯s reinforcements had swelled their numbers to over a million. But shortly after, as a messenger from Sheqiu City arrived at Le Ling, Xu State also immediately responded. The remaining 300,000 troops from the Imperial Capital swiftly marched toward Sheqiu City to assist this key southwestern stronghold. Yet within these 300,000 men, not a single Inborn Grandmaster was present. Moreover, even if they reached Sheqiu City, combined with the defenders there, the Xu forces would only amount to just over 400,000 troops, with only two Inborn individuals within the city. Chapter 1121 - Chapter 1121 Chapter 453 The Fall of the Liang State_3 ?Chapter 1121: Chapter 453 The Fall of the Liang State_3 Chapter 1121: Chapter 453 The Fall of the Liang State_3 The Chu army outside Ke City, even after being reinforced, had still suffered significant losses trying to uproot the camps around the city. What remained was an army of one million soldiers, including eleven Inborns. In terms of sheer strength, Chu State still held an absolute advantage. Also, after receiving news that Xu Army reinforcements had arrived at Sheqiu City, Lu Yuan issued an order to transfer the 200,000 reorganized Xu Army captives from the rear at Xichang City to Sheqiu City, to further bolster the strength of the Chu armies on various battlefields. With these reinforcements, the Chu forces at the heavily fortified Sheqiu City were still capable of combat, even after a wave of support from the Xu Army inside the city. Although the casualties might be larger than anticipated, Chu¡¯s strategy for siege warfare has always heavily utilized captives. The Chu army at Sheqiu City, apart from the 500,000 main troops, had as many as 700,000 captive soldiers, mostly consisting of Xu People. Since the dead were Xu Countrymen killing each other, the Chu side naturally didn¡¯t care. Therefore, the siege of Sheqiu City, which had just initiated, didn¡¯t abate because of reinforcements arriving for both sides, nor was there mutual deterrence out of dread. It rather escalated, with the brutality of the killing intensifying considerably. Under Chu¡¯s relentless assault, indifferent to the lives of captive soldiers, and the constant appearance of eleven Inborns on the battlefield, Sheqiu City, despite being reinforced, suddenly found itself in dire peril. Even the two Inborn Generals inside the city were repeatedly caught off-guard by the Chu army, with several Inborns coordinating their attacks on the defenders. Had it not been for the Xu Army¡¯s desperate rescues within the city, risking their lives to block the steps of Chu¡¯s Inborns, those two Generals likely would have perished on the battlefield already. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã? However, even so. Having been besieged multiple times, the two Xu Country Innates were also seriously injured and, fearing another encirclement by the Inborns of Chu, hardly ever went up on the walls anymore. Without them to help restrain the Inborns of Chu, the pressure brought by the Inborn Grandmasters fell entirely upon the low-level soldiers. An Inborn Grandmaster unrestrained, without any opponents of the same level, could kill at least a thousand people before exhausting their internal pneuma. Those with higher efficiency could even slay two to three thousand without difficulty. And after returning, they could recuperate and, once their true pneuma was restored, rejoin the battlefield. In this cycle, an Inborn Grandmaster could enter the battlefield three to four times a day, taking the lives of at least five to six thousand people. With eleven Inborns in the Chu army, including several avatars of Lu Yuan with strength comparable to the Second Realm of the Inborns, their killing efficiency was even higher. A guaranteed toll of over ten thousand a day. Thus, after several days of battle, the Xu Army inside the city, just those killed by Chu Inborn hands, had already exceeded a hundred thousand. Facing such circumstances, the two Inborn Generals of the Xu Army, no matter how reluctant, could no longer hide. Because their underlings were already frightened to death. If they continued to do nothing, they feared that before Chu Army attacked, there would already be a mutiny within the city, and their men would revolt. By then, without the support of a large army to fend off the ferocious Chu forces, they would hardly escape death. So the two came out again, bearing their unhealed wounds, and confronted the Chu Inborns with gritted teeth. But facing the frenzied Chu Inborns, what could they, already injured, possibly achieve? Although their interception reduced the number of defenders dying each day to just thirty to forty thousand, The toll was still staggering. If one were to add the casualties among Chu soldiers participating in the siege, the Xu Army was still incurring losses of over fifty thousand soldiers each day. After just half a month of fighting, half of the Xu Army in the city had already been killed or wounded. The soldiers below could no longer withstand it. Even the two Xu Country Innates above were beginning to falter. If the fighting continued, they would either die with a mutiny in the city and Chu forces entering, or They would be killed on the spot in direct combat with the Chu army. Both outcomes were death, unquestionably a harrowing prospect. They did not want to die. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Therefore, while struggling to repel the Chu offensive, the two Xu Country Innates within the city were also pondering and hesitating over whether to surrender or not? At this point, Sheqiu City was indeed untenable. Whether in terms of military strength or the number of Inborn Grandmasters, the gap between them and the Chu army was too vast. So vast that they were simply not in the same league and inherently unable to resist. However, both Inborn Generals were from the aristocratic families of Xu State, which through generations of statesmanship had shared in the nation¡¯s prosperity. Their ties with Xu State were far too deep and profound. Even if they wanted to surrender now, it was difficult to forsake Xu State and their families, so they hesitated to make a decision. But regardless of whether they decided to surrender, the trend of the battle for Sheqiu City was fairly clear. The fall of the city was just a matter of time. Perhaps in three to five days, or maybe in ten days to half a month, but at some point during August, this city was bound to fall. At that time, the southwestern battlefield here would become the first major breakthrough achieved by the Chu army in the Le¡¯an Prefecture warzone. Compared to the Sheqiu battlefield, which had received two substantial reinforcements from Lu Yuan and was burdened with high expectations, The performance of the remaining southern and southeastern battlefields of Le¡¯an Prefecture over the past few months seemed quite mundane. Both routes of the Chu army were not strong, with each having an army of three to four hundred thousand and three to four Inborns, both still mixed with Liang troops. This strength, after taking one or two prefectures¡¯ worth of territory in Le¡¯an Prefecture, reached the limit of expansion once the Xu reinforcements arrived. Now, the Chu forces on both battlefields found themselves in a stalemate with the Xu Army advancing to block them. Both sides had roughly equal troop numbers, and the Inborn Grandmasters were almost on par, resulting in a scenario where neither side could overcome the other. Without outside forces to break the deadlock, a breakthrough indeed seemed difficult to achieve. For this reason, As soon as the battle in the Liang Country ended with the annihilation of the two countries, Lu Yuan immediately ordered the Southern Route Army, which no longer had a strategic objective, to march northward, fulfilling his original strategic plan: Namely, to reinforce the Xu Country Battlefield. Huang Xuan acted quickly as well. Upon receiving the command from his original self, he did not have time for extensive rest. He left 200,000 Chu troops to garrison Donglai Prefecture, and after reorganizing the captured 700,000 from the Liang Army, He led the remaining 700,000 main Chu forces and 200,000 Liang vassal soldiers northward to Le¡¯an Prefecture, prepared to reinforce the main battlefield of Xu State. Chapter 1122 - Chapter 1122 Chapter 454 A Plan to Save Xu ?Chapter 1122: Chapter 454: A Plan to Save Xu Chapter 1122: Chapter 454: A Plan to Save Xu Le Ling City, the Imperial Palace. With a loud ¡°bang,¡± the sound of objects hitting the ground echoed throughout the grand hall. ¡°Liang has misled me, Liang has misled me!¡± Atop the high platform, Emperor Xu, shoving aside the numerous memorials on the table before him, couldn¡¯t help but bellow, ¡°A great nation, yet unable to defend itself for even a year, has lost the Imperial Capital in just the month of May. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Where is the once paramount overlord that single-handedly withstood the siege of ¡®the world¡¯? In the past, against my Xu, Wei, and Zhaoa€¡±three nationsa€¡±so awe-inspiring and invincible. Now confronted by a single Chu person, so incompetent! Waste, all of them are waste!¡± The rage of the Emperor of Xu was unstoppable at this moment, frightening the many ministers of the Xu State, seated in rows below, into lowering their heads. In fact, these individuals also felt rage. The news from the south had already arrived. In the end, Liang could not hold the Imperial Capital, Xian¡¯an City was breached by the Chu people, and the last emperor of Liang took his own life, meeting his demise. This once great nation that had dominated Central State for a thousand years ultimately met its downfall. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï To be honest, the shock of this news spreading throughout ¡®the world¡¯ was indescribable. After all, Liang had been the paramount overlord of ¡®the world¡¯ for over thirty years, and its awe and power remained palpable to this day, leaving ¡®the world¡¯ trembling in fear. So even as Liang fell into destitution, when people looked upon it, they couldn¡¯t help but regard it with heightened respect, still considering it among the top three hegemonic nations of ¡®the world¡¯. But who would have thought? This powerful nation would perish just like that. The impact on people¡¯s hearts was akin to mountains crumbling and tsunamis, utterly shattering conventional wisdom. Everyone realized that with the fall of Liang, an overlord of the old era, Chu, as its successor, was like the rising morning sun, constantly emitting blinding, awe-inspiring radiance. Under the sun of the new era, the former state hegemons of the old times seemed so glaring and jarring. Like the dark filth melting away in the sunlight, just as snow would. Especially given the onslaught of the Chu military, with nations collapsing one after another, none able to withstand, this trend seemed all the more evident. The times had changed, and a new era had arrived. Many who soberly realized this fact began to view Chu, and the future of the Nine Provinces, with a deeper understanding. Therefore, many people of the Nine Provinces, faced with the changing times, began to actively join the movement. Seeking out connections with Chu, the leader of the new era, they attempted to join the transformation, hoping to secure a place in the coming new world. In practical terms, it meant that the spies dispatched by the foreign ministry of Chu¡¯s royal city to other nations were increasingly operating with ease, many of the nobles from these nations were happy to engage with these representatives of Chu. Though they couldn¡¯t directly betray their homeland and abandon everything to defect to Great Chu, under the overwhelming trend, maintaining some level of intimacy with Chu to safeguard an exit strategy for when the overwhelming tide would arrive was a comforting option for many. Even those aiming for a gamble straightforwardly joined the game, becoming high-level spies for Chu, starting to betray the interests of their homelands for the benefit of Chu. For instance, among those hundred-odd officials currently seated in Xu¡¯s court, there might be Chu spies, starting to probe for high-level information from Xu. This point, many in the court who had had dealings with Chu knew all too well in their hearts. The Emperor Xu seated on the throne above knew even better. But even though he understood, there was nothing he could do. The trend of Chu uniting ¡®the world¡¯ had become increasingly clear and unstoppable. Although Xu was striving to resist and even prepared to rally other nations like Zheng and Jin to make a final stand, how effective such a fight could be was indeed uncertain. Anyway, Emperor Xu harbored a pessimistic attitude in his heart. All of Central State, encompassing the entire territories of Qing and Yu, along with small parts of Yong and Yang, added up to about thirty-three and a half prefectures. Now, out of these thirty-three and a half prefectures, Chu had already occupied twenty-one and a half. The remaining twelve were divided among the nations of the Nine Provinces. Out of three parts of Central State, Chu already possessed two. And this was just the disparity in territory. In terms of population, although Emperor Xu didn¡¯t know the exact number of people in Chu at present, based on the figures previously published by various nations and the territory Chu had now occupied, minus some loss due to war, an approximate number could still be determined. That was, the population across the Qing, Yang, Yong, and Yu regions occupied by Chu, conservatively estimated, also exceeded one point eight billion, and approaching two billion wasn¡¯t beyond possibility. On their side, despite appearing to span five states with Xu, Tang, Xu, Jin, Zheng, and other nations, having a multitude of forces and seemingly impressive strength, it was only a facade. Behind that veneer, the combined population of these five nations didn¡¯t even reach one hundred million, and might just be seventy or eighty million people, possibly just a third of Chu¡¯s size. And this population was continuously dwindling as Chu kept eroding their lands. In just three years of the Northern Expedition, Chu¡¯s strength had swelled from the second greatest in ¡®the world¡¯ to this extent. And as someone who understood these disparities, how could the Emperor of Xu not feel despair and fear? The more one knew, the more they realized their own insignificance. As an emperor, if he was so fearful of Chu, then the ministers below him were all the more so. Chapter 1123 - Chapter 1123 Chapter 454 A Plan to Save Xu_2 ?Chapter 1123: Chapter 454: A Plan to Save Xu_2 Chapter 1123: Chapter 454: A Plan to Save Xu_2 The supreme Heavenly Son above had little confidence in resisting Chu State. His subjects below, even less so, had this extravagant hope. And in the face of despair and pessimism, the choices made by His subjects, to better preserve their own lives and extend their family legacies, were only natural. In light of this. Emperor Xu, though angry, cursed and reproached these treacherous, faithless rebels in his heart, but outwardly, he could do nothing. For these so-called rebels beneath him precisely made up the most important foundation of Xu State. Indeed, people below were undermining the very foundations of Xu State, dealing with Chu State, the empire¡¯s arch-enemy. Such crimes were enough to warrant the extermination of nine generations of a family. But without these people, Xu State would collapse instantly. This was because, from the local officials to the court officials, from the heartland of Jingji to the various border forces, all aspects were infiltrated by the tendrils of these noble clans. It was the offspring and disciples of these noble clans who upheld the empire of Xu State. Without these people, Xu State would be like flesh without bones, bound to collapse and rot,unable to survive. Furthermore, these people, if they joined hands, could depose him, the Emperor of Xu State, and replace him with someone more to their liking. With the support of the noble ministers and clans, the Emperor of Xu State was legitimate and righteous. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Without them. The recently deceased last emperor of Liang State in Xian¡¯an City is the best example. Even though he succeeded to the throne through a military coup. But by acting contrary and losing the hearts of the people within the country, was he not abandoned by all? The once mighty Liang State, with its remaining strength capable of a final stand against Chu State, fell in less than five months due to the guidance of many internal traitors. The swift demise of the state was simply astonishing. A lesson from the past, not far behind. So even filled with hatred, Emperor Xu dared not vent it, forced to endure and deal deceitfully with those rebels below. Fortunately, though there were many who were selfish, Xu State, having persevered for a passage of a thousand years, and nourished its scholars over the years, still had many loyal to the nation, unwilling to see their motherland perish. Seeing the emperor¡¯s anger, someone stood out and offered a strategy. ¡°Your Majesty, the incompetence of the people of Liang is regrettable and lamentable as it led to their obliteration by Chu State. But now is not the time for anger.¡± Director of the Imperial Secretariat Wang Ping stood out and bowed, saying, ¡°With the fall of Liang State, the Southern Route Army of Chu State has no restraint and can spare forces to intervene in other battlefields. According to reports from the scouts of Mystery Land, the troops of Chu State¡¯s Southern Route Army have already moved from Liang State towards our Xu State, with their spears aimed directly at Le¡¯an. The Chu aims are clear; they are headed for Leling. What we need to do now is not to be angry, but to think carefully about how to block this army. Chu¡¯s Southern Route Army boasts a million soldiers, dozens of Inborn among them, and now, with the might of destroying a country, they are simply unstoppable. If we cannot stop them, I fear Leling City will follow in the footsteps of Xian¡¯an and fall into the hands of the rebels.¡± After years of the Northern Expedition, all countries have a deep understanding of Chu State¡¯s military organization. So, they naturally know that Chu¡¯s military expeditionary forces are planned according to national war standards. In other words, the strength of a single military expedition can match that of a hegemonic state. Yes, that¡¯s arrogant and infuriating. But what¡¯s even more infuriating and helpless is that each of Chu State¡¯s expeditions indeed possesses the strength they proclaim, truly that of rival states. Whether it¡¯s a million soldiers or more than ten Inborn, such strength is unique to hegemonic states, and deploying such forces means risking national collapse or mobilizing more than half the country¡¯s strength. How is such strength not considered that of a rival state? On careful consideration, Xu State, as of now, is facing three such military expeditions from Chu State. The Central Route, Le¡¯an Camp, and Qingping Camp. With the strength of one nation, contending against three major campsa€¡±Liang State was the last one to receive such attention. Evidently, even Wei State did not have such treatment; Chu State only sent two military expeditions against Wei. And Liang State, facing the onslaught of three major Chu camps, has already perished. Wei State, facing two camps, has also been annihilated. Xu State, contending against three major camps, has yet to collapse directly and has managed to hold on until now, even managing some retaliation. To be honest. Just this tenacity and perseverance alone are stronger than Liang State initially was. From this, it is evident that Xu State has indeed learned many lessons from various countries over the past two years and summarized many experiences and methods to deal with Chu State. Otherwise, they could not have held on until now. But contending with three military routes is already the limit for Xu State. Now, with an enhanced Southern Route Army bearing the momentum of a conquered nation arriving, there¡¯s genuine willingness but sheer inability to resist any longer. ¡°How could We not know, with Chu invaders approaching fiercely¡­¡± Emperor Xu, upon hearing the advice, calmed down considerably, but couldn¡¯t help but smile bitterly at Wang Ping: ¡°But now, across the country, all our troops have already been dispatched to the front lines. In Leling City, aside from the three thousand palace guards, not a single soldier remains. In the Le¡¯an region, every man of age has been conscripted, without exception. In such a situation, even if We wished to resist the Chu, We would be powerless.¡± Reaching this point, Emperor Xu could not help but feel sorrow in his heart. Last year, although Liang State suffered a major defeat and by association Xu State also lost a million troops at the Great Liang battlefield, the losses were heavy. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï But by the same measure, Xu State also gained three prefectures in Qingzhou and subjugated over four million barbarians from Xuzhou, drastically increasing its strength, reaching an unprecedented peak. Chapter 1124 - Chapter 1124 Chapter 454 A Plan to Save Xu_3 ?Chapter 1124: Chapter 454: A Plan to Save Xu_3 Chapter 1124: Chapter 454: A Plan to Save Xu_3 At that time, Emperor Xu was full of confidence. He believed that with thirty-six Inborn warriors and an army of five million, Xu State could hold its own against Chu State, if not defeat it, at least in terms of defense and self-preservation. Then, reality dealt him a harsh blow. First, the rapid collapse of Liang, followed by the critical breakdown of Qingzhou¡¯s defense line without the key support of Liang. Too many unpredictable changes forced Xu State to grit its teeth and engage in a head-on confrontation with Chu State on the battlefield. The outcome was clear to see. As it turned out, the so-called rise of Xu State was nothing more than an illusion. Up against the absolute national power of Chu State, Xu State was on the brink of collapse after just six months. By this time, even Leling was in grave danger, teetering like a stack of eggs, at any moment susceptible to being conquered by Chu people. This fall from the summit to the valley took less than a year. For Emperor Xu, who was brought back to reality from delusions of grandeur, the sense of loss was simply indescribable. ¡°Now, relying solely on my Xu State, we are certainly no match for the Chu people,¡± he said. Wang Ping was aware of Xu State¡¯s predicament. Therefore, faced with Emperor Xu¡¯s difficulties, he didn¡¯t criticize him harshly but instead offered his own solution, ¡°Your Majesty, I believe that to oppose Chu State now, we must unite the strength of all nations and recreate the alliance of the Wei Zhao Xu triumvirate against Liang State. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Only by gathering the force of the entire world can we stand against the Chu State, which possesses half of the world¡¯s power.¡± Emperor Xu shook his head, ¡°To unite against Chu, how could I not be aware of that? But Zheng, Jin, and Xu are still at war with Tang Kingdom. If Tang isn¡¯t defeated, how can they spare the strength to help us fight against the Chu people?¡± Since the start of this spring, Chu State¡¯s advances on the various battlefields in the northern part of Central State have been quite successful. Not only did they capture a prefecture of Yu State but also consecutively annihilated the Wei and Liang countries, inflicting heavy losses on Xu State with significant victories. However, Chu State¡¯s smooth progress is due to the overwhelming situation brought on by their deep-seated strength. Chu State has this capability, but that doesn¡¯t mean others do as well. Take Zheng, Jin, and Xu for example. At the beginning of the year, they intended to quickly annihilate Tang Kingdom, integrate the territories of Jing, Liang, and Yu, then unite with Xu State to oppose Chu State. Now, their plans are undoubtedly bankrupt. Tang Kingdom is no small country. This great country of Jingzhou has a population of more than 30 million and more than 20 Inborn individuals. The alliance opposing it, the Zheng, Jin, and Xu States, seems like a grand coalition of three nations. But Zheng and Jin have long been shattered and greatly weakened, falling far from their former glory. In this situation, even though the three countries combined have a population of over 40 million and around 40 Inborn individuals, They still have a significant advantage relative to Tang Kingdom. But to say they possess an overwhelming strength capable of crushing opponents as Chu State did in their campaigns against Wei, Liang, and Xu State would be an overstatement. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Just defending with their cities, it would be very difficult for Tang Kingdom to win against the Three-Nations Alliance, but to stabilize their front lines and avoid defeat is still achievable. Especially when Zheng and Jin share borders with Chu to the south, they have to ensure that sufficient forces are maintained for defense, significantly limiting their available strength. This makes it even more so. After a year of fighting, the Three-Nations Alliance only managed to push the Tang forces out of Yidu Prefecture in Zheng Kingdom, reclaiming Zheng¡¯s lost territory. To go further, enter Tang Kingdom¡¯s territory, and ultimately decimate the opponent turned out to be extremely difficult, if not impossible. After several months of fighting, they only occupied a few cities on the border of Tang Kingdom, annihilating several hundred thousand Tang troops, with no more gains. Instead, because of the relentless fierce attacks on Tang Kingdom¡¯s defenses, the armies of the Three Nations suffered devastating losses, losing nearly a million men. After several great battles, Tang Kingdom saw no signs of collapse, and they themselves were indeed struggling to hold on. Chu State, despite possessing such a big advantage, still ultimately paid a price of tens of millions in casualties to eliminate the countries of Central State. In this way, Wei Country, Liang Country, and Zhao Country were vanquished, leading to today¡¯s favorable overall situation. The national strength of Tang Kingdom, in no way inferior to that of Wei or Zhao, meant the Three Nations¡¯ alliance¡¯s desire to annihilate the opponent without losing three to four million people was simply wishful thinking. It was precisely due to those rich experiences that Lu Yuan, upon understanding the intentions of the Three Nations, so readily abandoned Tang Kingdom, a potential ally. If one could trade Tang Kingdom in exchange for a loss of several million in the armies of the Three Nations¡¯ alliance, that would indeed be a huge gain. By that time, once the Three Nations conquered Tang Kingdom, they would also be nearly exhausted. And Tang Kingdom would be in ruins, making it fanciful for the Three Nations to expect to draw any sustenance from it to make up for their losses. At such a time, were Chu State to step forward to clean up the Three Nations, it would be much easier. However, as the war between the Three Nations¡¯ alliance and Tang Kingdom dragged on, they gradually began to come to their senses. Initially, seeing how swiftly and mightily Chu State conquered other nations, they fantasized that they could do the same. After a brutal reality check, they slowly acknowledged the gap between them and no longer held onto such vain hopes. As a result, the war between the Three Nations and Tang Kingdom significantly cooled down over the past two months, with some battlefields even seeing passive face-offs, with no engagement for ten days or half a month at a time. The Tang military also didn¡¯t think about counterattacking but took the opportunity to rest and recover as much as possible. Both sides seemed somewhat unable to carry on fighting. And this provided an opportunity for Xu State, an outsider, to intervene. Following an analysis of the relationships between the Four Kingdoms, Wang Ping suggested, ¡°Now, Tang Kingdom and the Three Nations¡¯ alliance both wish to stop fighting. It¡¯s just that because of the intense fighting that took place earlier and the deep-seated grudges it caused, neither can find an excuse or save face, which is why the ceasefire has not occurred yet. This is the time when an outsider is needed to mediate. Looking around, who else but our Xu State can play this role? If His Majesty can send a messenger to mediate between the Four Kingdoms and cease the war, and then take the opportunity to explain the pros and cons, I believe that the Four Kingdoms, seeing the situation where Chu State now solely occupies Qingzhou and is poised to sweep across others, will certainly understand the principle of ¡®When the lips are gone, the teeth will be cold.¡¯ Then, not wanting to be conquered, they will have no choice but to set aside their differences and send troops to rescue our Xu State. Once the Four Kingdoms dispatch troops, the southern part of Yuzhou and the eastern part of Qingzhou, now occupied by Chu State, will be unsafe. At that time, wishing to hold onto these territories, Chu State will have to redirect its troops, and the Chu people¡¯s Southern Route Army will also have to look eastward. With that army diverted, we can send additional forces from within our homeland to deploy southward. The situation in Le¡¯an can be recovered, and it might still be possible to maintain the overall situation in Qingzhou. The destiny of Xu State can still be secured.¡± Wang Ping slowly laid out his thoughts. This was, after careful deliberation, what he considered to be the only strategy left to save the nation. Upon hearing his words, Emperor Xu¡¯s eyes lit up, and he exclaimed joyfully, ¡°Your sage advice is truly a strategy to save our nation. I wish to appoint you as a messenger to negotiate with the Four Kingdoms, mediate in Yuzhou, and seek alliance troops. What do you think, Wang?¡± Wang Ping knelt down, ¡°Your servant wishes to accept the command.¡± Chapter 1125 - Chapter 1125 Chapter 455 Change of the Tang Emperor ?Chapter 1125: Chapter 455: Change of the Tang Emperor Chapter 1125: Chapter 455: Change of the Tang Emperor Yuzhou, Yidu Prefecture, the border of Zheng and Tang. The military camps of the Three Nations, Zheng, Jin, and Xu. Inside a grand and majestic tent, which resembled a palace, the emperors of the three nations gathered to discuss the recent envoy from Xu State. ¡°The situation is as such,¡± the Emperor of Xu Country said with a sigh after rubbing his aching head, ¡°The people of Xu can¡¯t hold on any longer. If we don¡¯t support them soon, I fear Xu State will have to abandon its power in Qingzhou and flee back to its old home in Xuzhou, up North. Once they flee, they will not only have abandoned the gains from their expansion over the past decade in Central State, including the most crucial population and food reserves, but also have completely lost them. A Xu State that only retains Xuzhou won¡¯t even be able to maintain its position as the hegemon. Such a weakened Xu State will be of no help to our grand strategy against Chu in the future.¡± Over these years, with the continuous southward migration of its people, Xu State had gathered three-quarters of its population in the three prefectures of Qingzhou. Losing these lands, Xu State would struggle to even maintain a population of ten million in Xuzhou alone, and their status as the hegemon would plummet as a result. And Xu State, no longer considered a hegemon, what capacity would it have to join us three nations in combating Chu State after a crushing defeat? ¡°Xu State cannot give up; it is, after all, except for Chu State, the strongest hegemon in the world today,¡± asserted the Emperor of Jin Country at that moment decisively, ¡°Now that the nations of Wei, Zhao, and Liang have successively perished, Chu State has nearly unified more than half of Central State. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.?¦Ï In Qingzhou, Xu State is the only force still resisting Chu State. With them there, they can divert Chu State¡¯s focus and tie down a large number of Chu State¡¯s troops. If Xu State withdraws from Qingzhou, and Chu unifies the province, subsequently, all their power can be directed towards Yuzhou. Then we will have to face the entirety of Chu State.¡± As he said this, the Emperor of Jin Country looked at the two other monarchs, his tone grave, ¡°The current scale of Chu State is terrifying enough. If we allow them to consolidate the entire Qingzhou and seize the thirty million people of Xu in Qingzhou, their strength will swell even further. The gap between us and Chu State will only widen. When Chu¡¯s army of ten million arrives, pressing close to our Three Nations, and even if we add Tang Kingdom, what will we have to resist with? So, if we don¡¯t want to follow the same fate as Wei, Zhao, Liang, and the others, we must preserve Xu State, and we absolutely can¡¯t let Qingzhou easily fall into Chu¡¯s hands.¡± Hearing this, the other two nodded agreeably, finding much sense in the words. The advantages and disadvantages were clear to see. However, whether it could be done was another matter entirely. The Emperor of Zheng Kingdom, who had been quiet so far, now raised a question, ¡°It¡¯s fine to help Xu State, and I¡¯m willing to dispatch troops to aid them in their battle against Chu. But with the current situation, even if my Zheng Kingdom is willing to send troops, whether we can actually do so is a big challenge. In the Yuzhou region, there¡¯s still a Chu State campa€¡±Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp. Although this camp has dispatched a large number of troops due to the Xianyun Alliance, several million soldiers remain within Yuzhou, and there are dozens of Inborn. If we rupture our truce, the Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp will definitely not stand idly by; they will surely attack Zheng and its bordering countries. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 To counter this force, our two countries would have to deploy at least a million men to stand a chance at repelling them. And with these troops engaged, we¡¯ll have even fewer left to spare to come to Xu State¡¯s aid. It¡¯s a question whether we could muster a million troops for the rescue. This is the first steep hurdle. And let¡¯s not forget that to our North, there¡¯s Tang Kingdom. Tang has always colluded with Chu State, as exhibited in their invasion of Liang and incursions into our Xu Statea€¡±on both occasions, Tang coordinated perfectly with Chu State. It is precisely for this reason that this year our three nations united to campaign against Tang, aiming first to resolve this great peril at our backs. Now the campaign against Tang is at a standstill, and with this significant threat unresolved, how can we confidently dispatch troops to save Xu and engage in a monumental war with Chu State? The Xu people say they are willing to mediate our four nations¡¯ conflict, but everyone knows that the Emperor of Tang Kingdom has problems in his head. When his temper flares, his mind can¡¯t turn corners; he¡¯s infamously obstinate. Even now, he is dead set against us, which is the best proof. The Xu are trying to persuade such a stubborn ox to change course, but it¡¯s not as easy as they say. Anyway, I don¡¯t see much hope for it.¡± Although he had only recently ascended to the throne, this young Emperor of Zheng Kingdom keenly pointed out the key conflicts and issues at hand. Without addressing these two issues, sending troops to rescue Xu State would be mere fantasy. ¡°The problem with Chu State¡¯s Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp is not significant. Both of your countries can leave some forces in the Southern Border to defend stalwartly against Chu¡¯s army. As for the troops to help rescue Xu State, my Xu Country can contribute the bulk; you just do what you can. Regarding Tang Kingdom¡­¡± As the Emperor of Xu Country spoke of their stubborn neighbor of a thousand years, he couldn¡¯t help but feel a headache as well. After a moment of contemplation, he slowly continued, ¡°Over at Tang, the Xu people have already gone to negotiate. They¡¯re in an even more urgent life-and-death situation than we are, so we need not worry too much. Furthermore, ever since his ascension, the Emperor of Tang Kingdom has been acting recklessly, earning the dissatisfaction of many. Previously, when the situation in the Nine Provinces was stable and Tang Kingdom was still expanding and rising, the interests of the people weren¡¯t significantly harmed; in fact, many even gained benefits. Therefore, everyone could tolerate his quirks and play along with this Tang Emperor¡¯s games. But now, not only have we reached the brink of survival, but if Tang continues its folly, it too isn¡¯t far from national ruin.¡± Chapter 1126 - Chapter 1126 Chapter 455 Change of the Tang Emperor_2 ?Chapter 1126: Chapter 455: Change of the Tang Emperor_2 Chapter 1126: Chapter 455: Change of the Tang Emperor_2 The nobles and royalty within Tang Kingdom, are they truly willing to see the downfall of Tang? Which Tang emperor does not wish to cease hostilities, reconcile, and dispatch troops to assist Xu State? Yet, others on the Tang court are willing to help that Tang emperor to be willing. ¡°I have already sent messengers, following the Xu State messengers to Tang, and they will visit several princes and the Prime Minister of Tang. I believe they will provide a satisfactory response.¡± Upon hearing this, the emperors of Zheng Kingdom and Jin Country looked at each other, spotting surprise in their opponent¡¯s eyes. They hadn¡¯t expected that their Alliance Leader had already taken action and seemed to have been prepared for this situation in advance. This ability to achieve great things quietly and unnoticed made both feel a bit startled. At the same time, they felt joy. ¡°If it could really be so, and Tang could be persuaded to aid Xu, then there would be no problem with the matter of sending reinforcements.¡± ¡°Indeed, as long as Tang sends troops, when the time comes, with the combined forces of our five provinces and Five Kingdoms, even facing Chu State, we can contend. On the battlefield, victory or defeat, it is yet to be seen.¡± Both emperors spoke in an excited manner. ¡°Since that is the case, our Three Nations should now start making preparations in advance, arranging for food and fodder, the deployment of troops from all sections, and the defense lines in the south of your two countries. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï All can now begin preparations. We just wait for news from Tang Kingdom, and we¡¯ll immediately dispatch troops, rushing to the aid of Xu State.¡± Seeing that both Allies had no issues, the Emperor of Xu Country nodded in satisfaction and immediately made arrangements. ¡°No problem.¡± ¡°I¡¯ll go make the arrangements right away.¡± Hearing the orders of the Alliance Leader, both emperors responded thunderously in agreement. Thus, the United Army of the Three Nations began to busily make preparations for the cause of defending Xu and opposing Chu. ¡­ At the same time. The messenger from Xu State, accompanied by the Messenger from Xu Country, rushed to Tang¡¯s main camp a hundred miles away, then left the Messenger from Xu Country to visit other high-ranking officials of Tang within the camp. After being announced, the Xu State Messenger went to meet the Emperor of Tang Kingdom. ¡°Impossible, absolutely impossible!¡± Near the emperor¡¯s tent of the Xu State Messenger, the roar of the Tang Emperor echoed: ¡°You want me to make peace with those three vile thieves, absolutely impossible, I would rather die than cease hostilities with them. And you, Xu State, in alliance with those people from Liang last year, ambushed my Tang soldiers, resulting in the loss of hundreds of thousands of troops in the land of Qingzhou. You shameless traitors who killed my Tang soldiers, you still have the audacity to ask me for reinforcements. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Have you ever heard of the principle of helping an enemy? You¡¯ve come at just the right time. As soon as I seize the Three Nations of Yuzhou, I plan to lead an army to conquer Xu State and eliminate you traitors. But for now, Yuzhou¡¯s three thieves have not been eliminated, so for the moment I can¡¯t deal with Xu State. I¡¯ll just take your head to begin with, it can serve as a tribute to those who died in Qingzhou at the hands of Tang soldiers. Guards, seize this villain below and drag him out for execution.¡± The Tang Emperor shouted, ready to have the Xu State Messenger killed. The Xu State Messenger, though aware before he came that this Emperor of Tang was notoriously capricious and a tyrant throughout the Nine Provinces, didn¡¯t expect him to be so brutal. As a messenger of a state, he came here with a great deal of goodwill towards Tang, seeking to mediate the war. Instead, the other side was not only unappreciative but actually decided to kill him. Such brutal and lawless behavior, one would only expect to see in the deposed monarchs from the Historical Records. And now, he seemed about to become an example confirming the tyranny of the Emperor before him. ¡°Your Majesty, I am a messenger from Xu State, I come with no malice, states interact and do not kill envoys¡­¡± Seeing his life was in peril, the Xu State Messenger couldn¡¯t help but cry out in hope. At that moment, a series of footsteps were heard from outside the tent, along with the clinking metal sound of soldiers¡¯ armor colliding. It sounded like a death knell, turning the Xu State Messenger¡¯s face even paler. Swish. The curtain at the entrance to the tent was lifted and a procession of soldiers filed in behind, the Xu State Messenger staggered and nearly collapsed, fearing for his life. Against his expectations, though. The soldiers who rushed in simply ignored him and continued walking towards the inner part of the tent. Quickly, these soldiers reached the Emperor of Tang Kingdom and took control of a few palace maids and Eunuchs who were attending to him at the scene. ¡°What are you doing? Are you trying to rebel?¡± Seeing this scene, the Emperor of Tang was both shocked and furious. Watching the soldiers before him coldly, not responding to his queries, he felt uneasy, which only fueled his immense rage. The Xu State Messenger below also felt that something was amiss. Forcing down his panic, he observed the clearly wrong atmosphere in the tent and began to feel a glimmer of new hope. Just then. A group of people entered the tent, all dressed in crimson and purple, some in royal robes and others plainly in imposing armor. Without asking, just by their attire, it was clear that these people were the high-level officials of Tang Kingdom. ¡°Song Yingan, Li Qingxian, King An, King Jing, and Chen Yu, are you plotting a rebellion?¡± At this point, the Tang Emperor, seeing the surge of high officials, generals, and royal kin, understood even if he was slow to react. ¡°Your Majesty!¡± The leading Prime Minister of Tang Kingdom, Song Yingan, performed a ritual towards the emperor above: ¡°The state is declining, the world is in turmoil, dramatic changes unfold across the Nine Provinces, and Tang¡¯s Imperial fate hangs in the balance. Chapter 1127 - Chapter 1127 Chapter 455 Change of the Tang Emperor_3 ?Chapter 1127: Chapter 455: Change of the Tang Emperor_3 Chapter 1127: Chapter 455: Change of the Tang Emperor_3 At such times, the state could no longer tolerate His Majesty¡¯s reckless actions. Uniting various countries to resist Chu has become the inevitable trend. His Majesty insists on his own way, causing harm to the world for his own selfish desires, truly a crime of harming the nation and bringing disaster to the people, thus greatly losing the hearts of the people within the state. To protect Tang Kingdom and the world, I have discussed with the Grand General and the Clan, and we all agree that His Majesty¡¯s virtues are no longer sufficient to ascend the throne. We specially come today to ask His Majesty to abdicate, and to cede the throne to King An. As for His Majesty and His Majesty¡¯s sons, the Clan Residence in the Imperial City will ensure His Majesty lives out his twilight years comfortably.¡± When Emperor Tang heard this, he flew into a rage, ¡°I am the Heavenly Son, the chosen of Heavenly Mandate, how dare you rebels deceive me! ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Where are my Personal Guard, quickly dispatch these traitors before me!¡± These rebels below had gone too far. Not only did they wish to depose his imperial position, but in order to prevent future troubles, they even wanted to strip the imperial title from his lineage. What Clan Residence? Is that a good place? It was specially used to detain those clan members who had erred. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? If he and his sons moved in there, it would be equivalent to being imprisoned in the Imperial City. In the future, once that imperial uncle, King An who replaced him, ascended the throne and secured his position, wouldn¡¯t it be easy for him to order my execution? For such an outcome, Emperor Tang would rather die than accept. However, now that these high-level officials of Tang Kingdom had reached a consensus, what could he, a mere emperor, do to resist? He called out several times, but all was silent outside. Outside the tent, those Personal Guards loyal to Emperor Tang had been preemptively slaughtered and controlled by the people behind the coup. Now, nearby the great tent, it was the Prime Minister, the Grand General, and people like King An and their armored soldiers who were in control. And with Emperor Tang¡¯s tyrannical and ruthless rule, who knew how many within the Barracks bore him grudges? Even if someone knew that a military insurrection was happening here, they would probably not come to save the king, but instead cheer, thinking that the Prime Minister and the generals had finally done a good deed. Therefore, the rescuers Emperor Tang hoped for were destined not to appear. ¡°Rebels, since there¡¯s no one, then I¡¯ll personally behead you all!¡± Emperor Tang had called out for a long time without response, his heart growing more desolate and his rage intensifying. He unsheathed his sword and aimed to strike down the Prime Minister below. But at that moment, the Prime Minister¡¯s backup, the Grand General, stepped forward, with just a few quick movements, seized the Emperor¡¯s sword, lightly tapped to seal his Inner Strength, and easily subdued him. ¡°Your Majesty, stop making trouble. Just obey the order, write the abdication decree, and come with me to the Clan Residence.¡± The Grand General beside him sighed softly, carrying the Emperor whose acupoints had been sealed, and walked down. Upon reaching the Prime Minister and others, he nodded slightly, ¡°Prime Minister, I¡¯ll watch over His Majesty for now. I will also keep the commanders in the camp calm, so no chaos will arise. The issues of the abdication decree, King An¡¯s enthronement, and soothing the hearts of the people in the state will be left to you.¡± Prime Minister Song Yingan¡¯s expression was solemn, ¡°Rest assured, Grand General, this old one understands.¡± The Grand General nodded gently, then, with a group of armored soldiers, ¡°escorted¡± Emperor Tang away. The fate awaiting this emperor was long-term confinement, and the possibly of being granted the poisoned wine. But no one cared about this. Everyone had had enough of this nonsensical emperor and did not want to accompany him toward ruin. Seeing him off was also a release for many people. No one would stop it. After the Grand General left, Song Yingan turned back, helped up the Xu Country Messenger who had collapsed on the ground, patted the dust off him, and smilingly said, ¡°Honored Messenger, have peace of mind. With us here, you will not be in danger of losing your life. Now that His Majesty has left, we can talk in detail about the reconciliation between Four Kingdoms and the alliance of Five Kingdoms to resist Chu.¡± At this moment, the Xu Country Messenger finally recovered from his shock. Looking at the smiling Prime Minister of Tang Kingdom, still somewhat stupefied, he just nodded hesitantly, ¡°Okay, alright¡­ let¡¯s discuss the matter.¡± Song Yingan nodded slightly, then turned his head to look at King An who had been silent beside him, and respectfully saluted, ¡°King An, His Majesty is indisposed and cannot manage affairs. Your Highness, as a significant member of the Clan, please act as regent and take charge of state affairs.¡± King An beside him smiled, ¡°If that is the case, the state matters are pressing. I shall not decline.¡± In this exchange of words, the temporary transfer of power in Great Tang was completed. This dizzying scene left the Xu Country Messenger utterly dumbfounded. Meanwhile, King An stepped forward a few paces, sitting down where Emperor Tang had been, without any hint of concealment. Having secured his position and tasted the flavor of power for a moment, the ministers below had already saluted. ¡°Long live King An, may His Highness live a thousand years!¡± Prime Minister Song Yingan led the ministers in this ritual, tentatively establishing the new precedence. ¡°Rise, my subjects!¡± King An raised his hand slightly, then turned to the messengers of Xu and Xu countries, smiling, ¡°As regards the matter of reconciliation, I find it feasiblea€|¡± In the Tang Kingdom camp, a swift and smooth coup was underway, quietly unfolding with the secret plot of uniting the Five Kingdoms. ¡­ Time flowed, and in the blink of an eye, it was the beginning of the eighth month. On this day, Sheqiu City, which had been teetering on the brink of collapse, finally raised the white flag just before its near collapse. The last remaining Innate General of Xu Country, along with the remaining three hundred thousand soldiers in the city, flung the gates open wide, emerging to surrender to Chu. The Chu army outside, having been prepared, immediately sent personnel up to take control of the weapons and watch over the disarmed soldiers of Xu. Qingyangzi rode his tall horse leading a host of Chu generals, coming before the Innate of Xu Country. And here, the Xu Country Innate himself took the reins, leading them into the city. After several months of siege, this southeastern stronghold of Le¡¯an Prefecture had finally fallen into the hands of the Chu army. The path from the Chu Le¡¯an Camp leading to Leling, the Imperial City of Xu Country, was thus forcefully opened, with no more obstacle in the way. While the union of Xu, Tang, Xu, and other countries was still under discussion and preparation, Chu had already made the first move, achieving a breakthrough on the Le¡¯an Battlefield. The glimmer of hope that Xu Country had just welcomed had not yet had time to bear fruit before another shadow fell over their heads. The sure and steady advance of Chu toward unifying the Nine Provinces continued unabated. Chapter 1128 - Chapter 1128 Chapter 456 Abandon the City and Flee ?Chapter 1128: Chapter 456 Abandon the City and Flee Chapter 1128: Chapter 456 Abandon the City and Flee Leling, the Imperial Palace. ¡°Your Majesty, terrible news, Sheqiu City has fallen!¡± Accompanied by cries of alarm, a message from the southwest spread rapidly, plunging the entire palace into fear. Within the great hall, court officials who had rushed over upon receiving the news now stood with grave expressions, their eyes betraying irrepressible terror. Sitting at the head, Emperor Xu turned somewhat pale, ¡°My ministers, the Chu people have broken through Sheqiu City, and now an army of a million is marching towards us, heading straight for Leling City. The prefectures and counties they passed through had already had their defenders called away, leaving them utterly defenseless and unable to stop the Chu forces. With the Chu army nearly upon us, what should we do? Everyone, please propose a solution.¡± The ministers, hearing what Emperor Xu said, were also filled with panic. No one had expected that, despite having sent an additional three hundred thousand soldiers to Sheqiu City, it would fall so quickly, not even holding out for an additional month. Could the Chu army really be as unstoppable as the rumors suggested? Otherwise, how could a large city, guarded by five hundred thousand soldiers and two Inborn, fall so quickly? Was the Chu army too powerful, or were the city¡¯s defending generals so incompetent? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? But no matter what everyone thought, no matter how much they complained or cursed the two Xu Country Innates guarding the city, the fact that the city fell was already established, and the imminent arrival of the Chu army loomed like Mount Tai. Without overcoming this difficulty, no one present would have a good outcome. Perhaps by tomorrow, they would become a nation¡¯s lost souls, reduced to prisoners at the feet of the Chu people. No one wanted to accept that outcome. Yet, as they looked at each other for ways to halt the Chu army, they were at a loss for ideas. ¡°Your Majesty.¡± At this time, Military Department Assistant Zhao Guangfeng stood up, bowed, and reported, ¡°Currently, Wuyan City in Le¡¯an Prefecture has dispatched one million two hundred thousand soldiers and six Inborn, who are currently engaged with the main Chu forces in Chu territory. The battle is fierce on both sides, leaving no opportunity to spare attention elsewhere. The southern and southeastern fronts previously dispatched one hundred and fifty thousand soldiers and three Inborn each, and after months of fierce fighting with the Chu army, both have suffered significant losses and lack the strength to assist elsewhere. Therefore, within the entire Leling County, aside from the few thousand imperial guards in the city, there are no other troops available for deployment. In Xu State itself, an emergency levy has called up another five hundred thousand soldiers, but the order has just been given, and the troops are still assembling. To form up the army and mobilize it southward would take at least a month at the earliest. And for the Chu army to reach Leling City would only take a matter of ten days. To call up troops from our homeland is already too late.¡± Having stated the facts, Zhao Guangfeng paused for a moment before speaking with difficulty, ¡°Therefore, I believe, in our current situation, it is impossible to stop the Chu army. To preserve the Xu dynasty and ensure Your Majesty¡¯s safety, I ask Your Majesty to lead the court officials north on a hunting expedition, returning to our old capital, Yan City. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Xu State¡¯s homeland still has hundreds of thousands of troops, with Iron Forest Duke stationed there, and with the natural defense of the great river and the approach of winter¡¯s heavy snows, it should be enough to hold off the Chu army at Henan. Your Majesty, please preserve your valuable life so we may engage in a decisive battle with the Chu people another day.¡± With these last words, Zhao Guangfeng knelt on the ground, pleading mournfully. Seeing this, the senior officials beside him couldn¡¯t help but weep in sorrow. Of course, there were also those with staunch personalities who, faced with Zhao Guangfeng¡¯s suggestion of abandoning the capital and fleeing, glared at him angrily, considering him a traitor who would sell out his country. ¡°Moving the capital north for a hunting expedition¡­¡± Emperor Xu, looking down at his subjects¡¯ various expressions, also felt a rise of sorrow and unwillingness as he asked, ¡°Is there truly no other way? What about Yuzhou? Haven¡¯t the four states of Tang Xu, Zheng, and Jin just reached a reconciliation, and couldn¡¯t they soon form an alliance to send troops to our rescue?¡± Prime Minister Chen Xun¡¯an, who had been closely monitoring this foreign affair in the Cabinet, then stepped forward to reply, ¡°Your Majesty, although our envoys have facilitated the resolution between the four states, they have only just ceased hostilities. Their enmity from previous years runs deep, and it is not so easy for them to reconcile and join hands hastily. Moreover, the number of troops each country dispatches, the organization of food and fodder, the planning of strategies, the routes to the battlefield¡­ All these matters require careful preparation and planning, making it difficult to immediately send troops to assist our nation. Even if they do come to our aid, they are likely to send only small detachments of several tens of thousands or at most a hundred thousand soldiers, which against the Chu army¡¯s million-strong force would be of little help. Moreover, with prefectures like Qingping and Jiaodong standing between Yuzhou and Leling City, breaking through the Chu army¡¯s layered blockades to arrive here would be no easy task. If we were to wait for these allies to take effect, it would not be possible this autumn. I fear we would have to wait until next year to see any results.¡± Although when the decision was made to send envoys to the four states of Yuzhou, everyone within Xu State was filled with confidence, describing the strategy as a godly plan to save the nation, this was just to deceive those at the bottom. Those of us in high positions who wield the power of an entire nation, who doesn¡¯t understand that things are never so simple and easy? Facilitating the alliance of the four states might indeed bring a formidable opponent to Chu State, relieving us of great pressure. But to suggest it¡¯s some sort of Divine Medicine that can immediately alleviate the pressure and threats from the Chu army is wishful thinking. If the Chu forces were so easily dealt with, then the once-dominant states like Liang, Wei, and Zhao wouldn¡¯t have been successively conquered. So although we held some hope for the success of this diplomatic mission, we never truly considered it a panacea, nor did we place all our hopes upon it. Chapter 1129 - Chapter 1129 Chapter 456 Abandon the City and Flee_2 ?Chapter 1129: Chapter 456 Abandon the City and Flee_2 Chapter 1129: Chapter 456 Abandon the City and Flee_2 Iron needs to be hard on its own. In order to treat an illness, apart from good doctors and medicine, one must also strive to save oneself. Although reinforcements are good, before their arrival, Xu State must hold on by itself. Previously, the dispatch of three hundred thousand reinforcements to the teetering Sheqiu City was precisely an act of self-rescue. But now, the result is clear. This act of self-rescue, although it had some effect, was not as useful as imagined. It merely changed imminent death to a delayed one after half a montha€¡±there was an effect, but it still did not save lives. ¡°How could this be, how could this be¡­¡± Hearing Prime Minister Chen Xun¡¯an¡¯s words, Emperor Xu¡¯s last hope also shattered, and under the weight of despair, his spirit became somewhat dazed. ¡°Your Majesty, Minister Zhao is right, the situation is urgent. We indeed need to plan ahead and hunt North before the Chu Army arrives!¡± ¡°Yes, indeed. If we wait until the Chu Army arrives, we will not be able to leave.¡± ¡°Great Xu has stood for a thousand years; it cannot be destroyed in our hands. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï We must hunt North sooner rather than later.¡± At this moment, numerous ministers below, upon receiving the Prime Minister¡¯s personal confirmation and knowing there was no hope of recovery, began to speak one after another. No one wanted to give up their current achievements and flee back to their old homes in disgrace. But the situation was such that they had no choice but to flee. After being buzzed around by many ministers like flies for some time, Emperor Xu also came back from his daze and saw each minister with a look of fear, feeling extreme disgust in his heart. In the face of national disaster, these people only thought of preserving their lives; not one of them was willing to stand up and sacrifice themselves for the nation. ?0¦Í?0.?¦Ï ¡®They are all parasites of the nation, they all deserve to die.¡¯ Emperor Xu cursed inwardly, feeling powerless, he sighed and looked at Prime Minister Chen Xun¡¯an, ¡°Prime Minister Chen, the situation is beyond resistance. If so, for the sake of Xu State, let us hunt North.¡± As he spoke, his heart bled. In recent years, the citizens of Xu State had all migrated to Qingzhoua€¡±a population of more than thirty million people. Those left on the mainland, after several rounds of conscription and the mobilization of a large number of prime population to the South, probably didn¡¯t even amount to eight or nine million by now. Now abandoning the essence of the South and fleeing to the North disgracefully. Even if it meant struggling to survive for a while, relying on the old, weak, women and children left in the North, could Xu truly be revitalized? It was feared that it wouldn¡¯t take long before falling into the same fate as the already extinct State of Zhao, disappearing amidst the tide of Barbarians. Keep in mind, Xu had brought the Barbarians of Xuzhou under its control less than a year ago. Originally Xu was strong, so the Barbarians chose to rely on it for survival, contributing their population and horses for Xu¡¯s use. But now Xu was suffering from a devastating defeat, and those Barbarians who had pledged their loyalty also suffered heavy losses on the southern battlefield. After the great defeat, with interests compromised and no sufficient deterrence left, it was feared that those recently submitted Barbarians would flip instantly and rebel. The just stabilized land of Xuzhou would also be plunged into chaos immediately. Out of the eight or nine million remaining people on the mainland, half were Barbarians. If these people became chaotic, how could the mainland fare any better? Thinking this, Emperor Xu¡¯s heart tightened, and he could no longer afford to lament the loss of Qingzhou. He hastily said, ¡°Besides moving North, the forces on the southern and southeastern front lines should no longer hold their ground. Have them retreat immediately and join us in moving North. And let the civilians who are currently under control be migrated back with us. Leaving these populations behind would only benefit the Chu people. Once we return to the mainland of Xu, if we want to counterattack back here, we will surely need enough soldiers, and we cannot do without the support of the civilians. The same goes for Wuyan City. Before the Chu Army from Sheqiu City cuts off their retreat, have the great army there pull back too. Let them cross the river directly from where they are and return to Xuzhou. While there is still some time, before the Chu Army catches onto our movements, let¡¯s withdraw as many people as we can. All of these people are the capital for our future counterattack on Central State to preserve Xua€¡±try to keep as many as possible.¡± Oh, and the same goes for Qingping County. There are still a million soldiers and over a million civilians in our control in that region, and we should not leave any of them for the Chu peoplea€¡±withdraw them all. The Chu people want Qingzhou? I¡¯ll give it to them, only it will be an empty shell without people, thousands of miles of barren land. Let them slowly recover and refill it.¡± Having realized the inevitability of the situation, Emperor Xu started to take stock of his assets, looking to minimize the losses as much as possible. In Le¡¯an Prefecture at present, the Xu Army numbered around one million three hundred thousand, and there were twelve Inborn Grandmasters as well. This force was not weak. Normally speaking, to defend a prefecture with this power would actually be more than sufficient. Unfortunately, while the Xu Army was not weak, the Chu Army was stronger. Faced with two of Chu State¡¯s military expeditions, along with another that was en route, Xu State had no power to resist. To even save their own lives, they had to abandon their homes and flee. ¡°As you command, I will arrange for the withdrawal of the troops from various regions immediately,¡± Prime Minister Chen Xun¡¯an replied, then expressed his concerns, ¡°However, with the Chu forces pressing step by step, it will not be easy for the troops from various routes to retreat smoothly. Also, to move several million people back to Hebei, the number of ships needed is astronomical. With the number of ships we have in the country, to evacuate everyone, I am afraid it would be a rush until winter when the heavy snow freezes the rivers before we can barely manage it. During this period, the Chu Army will certainly not sit idly by; they will definitely attempt to obstruct and interfere.¡± Chapter 1130 - Chapter 1130 Chapter 456 Abandon the City and Flee_3 ?Chapter 1130: Chapter 456 Abandon the City and Flee_3 Chapter 1130: Chapter 456 Abandon the City and Flee_3 ¡°How many people we can evacuate now depends solely on our efforts; The rest is in the hands of Heaven.¡± Emperor Xu opened his mouth, finally sighed, and said, ¡°Do your best.¡± The officials in the presence, upon hearing this, all started to sob. A sorrow of impending national doom enveloped everyone¡¯s hearts. In many people¡¯s minds there was the thought that Great Xu might truly be doomed. Once this thought took hold, a myriad of complex feelings surged forth. As the great ship was sinking, all manner of disgraceful scenes were slowly unfolding. And Xu State was making its final efforts to save itself before going under. The various imperial decrees from Le Ling were swiftly disseminated under the advocacy of the emperor¡¯s senior officials. The frontline forces, under the crushing weight of grief and desperation, and in order to survive, immediately began to take action. Leaving a portion of the forces to cover the rear, the main force fled into the night, trying to shake off the pursuit of Chu¡¯s army. The southern and southeastern Xu armies, after leaving twenty to thirty thousand troops to create a false show of strength, saw six Inborn Generals leading two hundred thousand of the main force flee back to Le Ling overnight. These people then became the new defensive line as the defenders of Le Ling. According to the plan, Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Compared to the cautious evacuation on the Le Ling front, it was much simpler in Wuyan City. There, apart from being somewhat weaker than Chu¡¯s army in terms of Inborn Grandmasters, the Xu army¡¯s strength was stronger in other respects. With this advantage, the evacuation process was much easier for those in Wuyan City. Large numbers of troops began retreating directly, then at the ferry crossing south of the big river, they quickly boarded the hastily arrived ships and headed towards Hebei. The approaching Chu forces tried to block them but were met head-on by Xu¡¯s formal military, leading to both sides clashing in formation without either side losing. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï After several battles, Lu Yuan noticed that the morale of Xu¡¯s army had soared dramatically under the desperation to survive. Seeing that his own side had no real advantage in these skirmishes and had instead suffered substantial losses, he understood the principle of not interfering with an enemy returning home and changed his strategy. He eventually ordered his troops to cease their active obstruction, limiting themselves to peripheral harassment to slow down the enemy¡¯s retreat as much as possible, to buy time for other Chu forces to arrive. Upon learning that Xu¡¯s army was moving citizens, he sent out a large number of cavalry to deeply infiltrate the Xu hinterlands, causing disruptions to thwart the enemy¡¯s plans. With Xu¡¯s army busy evacuating, they had little energy to concern themselves with these harassments, and although the military retreat progressed smoothly, the plan to relocate the citizens was almost a complete failure. What about Qingping County? The Xu army had an even greater advantage there and not only did the Chu forces fail to stop their withdrawal, but they also made little headway in preventing the relocation of the citizens. Lucky for Chu, the populace under Xu control was only about a million strong. Even if all were relocated, the loss was minimal and within Lu Yuan¡¯s acceptable range. He turned a blind eye to it, aside from trying to intercept as much as possible, he let it be. The Xu Country Battlefield was turned on its head with the breakthrough at Sheqiu City. The Xu people had abandoned Le Ling, and Chu State¡¯s unification of Qingzhou was not far off. ¡­ Just as the people of Xu State were preparing their escape plans, Qingyangzi, who had just driven the Xu people to make such a decision, quickly began his next move. With Sheqiu City breached and the defenders surrendering, the southwestern gate leading to Le Ling was blasted open. It was already August and with less than two months before the snows of October, Qingyangzi, the Commander of the Le¡¯an Camp, wasted no time. On the same day the city was taken, he ordered the army to march north immediately, without a moment¡¯s pause, towards Le Ling City. As for Sheqiu City, aside from leaving behind two Inborns with a hundred thousand Chu troops to secure this newly captured stronghold and oversee the surrendered three hundred thousand Xu soldiers, he continued leading four hundred thousand Chu troops, along with the reorganized six hundred thousand surrendered soldiers, the nine Inborns in the camp, and the Inborn who had defected from Xu State, to Le Ling. Previously, in order to resist Chu¡¯s forces, all local troops in Leling County, including able-bodied men, had been drafted and sent to the front lines. The two prefectures and counties behind Sheqiu City became exceptionally vulnerable due to this, with over a dozen cities along the way lacking any military defense. Faced with the overwhelming advance of a million Chu troops, they couldn¡¯t even mount a resistance. As the army arrived, the city officials either fled or surrendered without a struggle, making for effortless conquests. In just ten days, the Chu army conquered the two prefectures and marched four hundred li to arrive beneath the walls of Le Ling City. Throughout their advance, they encountered not a single Xu force. Even the outskirts of Le Ling City were devoid of Xu defensive works; aside from houses with doors wide open, already evacuated of their owners, not a single inhabitant was seen, let alone a shadow of the Xu army. Only on the towering walls of Le Ling City could one see Xu soldiers, sparse in number and tense. This South Capital of Xu State was unprecedentedly vulnerable. On the desolate plains, where prosperity was no more, Heaven and Earth were steeped in a forbidding silence. Qingyangzi led his troops to the city¡¯s outskirts, observing the long-anticipated imperial capital of the Xu people with a piercing gaze. ¡°Commander, the scouts have reported back. All the streets and villages outside the city have been evacuated of Xu citizens. Apart from the defenders inside, there is not a living soul left,¡± someone reported hastily from behind. ¡°Empty, it seems that Xu State¡¯s monarch and officials are determined to retreat to their old home,¡± Qingyangzi nodded slightly upon hearing the report, then with a cold laugh said, ¡°But to think that a mere dead city can stop me is far too presumptuous. Order the troops to set up camp first, then surround and besiege Le Ling City from all sides, allowing no one to escape. If these Xu soldiers wish to stay, then they will get their wish. Not a single one will escape, they can all accompany the city in its burial.¡± After issuing the first command upon arrival, Qingyangzi glanced at Le Ling City one more time and turned to leave. Chapter 1131 - Chapter 1131 Chapter 457 Leling Taken Down ?Chapter 1131: Chapter 457 Leling Taken Down Chapter 1131: Chapter 457 Leling Taken Down The next day, just one day after Qingyangzi had arrived at Le Ling City, the two armies from the South and Southeast routes of the Le¡¯an Camp also quickly rushed over. ¡°I¡¯ve come to see the Commander-in-chief!¡± The commander of the South Route army, Lu Ning, the seventh prince of Chu State, paid his respects to Qingyangzi upon arrival and then explained, ¡°When the Xu People retreated, they left twenty thousand soldiers in their stronghold, Nanqing City, to cover their retreat. To deal with these people, I had to make some effort, which made me a step late in coming here, please punish me, Commander-in-chief.¡± The commander of the Southeast Route army nodded and said, ¡°I, too, was delayed by the Xu Army rear guard forces, which slowed our march to the rendezvous. Please punish me, Commander-in-chief.¡± The withdrawal of the Xu Army from the South and Southeast Routes wasn¡¯t without preparation. Upon receiving the news of the fall of Sheqiu City, Le Ling City side had already started to prepare for the evacuation. Therefore, during the ten days it took for Qingyangzi¡¯s forces to travel to Le Ling City, the two Xu armies began to plan their retreat. After several days of arrangements, both Xu armies set up a number of rear guard troops and ambushes along their respective front lines. These troops and ambushes might not have been very effective. However, every time an ambush appeared, if the Chu people wanted to pass the road with peace of mind, they would inevitably need to spend effort clearing the ambushers. Even if the cleaning process was swift, it would still take some time. As the ambushes became more frequent, happening five or six times, it could delay the Chu forces by half a day. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Along the way, they stationed some troops at important strongholds and fortresses, commanding the valuable positions to block the Chu army¡¯s pursuit. Overcoming these blockades was another trouble. This intermittent blocking and ambushing required only two or three thousand men to hold back the Chu pursuing army for one day, dragging it out until nightfall. By nightfall, the Chu army, having fought in pursuit all day, was already incredibly weary, and of course, they would need to rest and couldn¡¯t continue the pursuit. This bought them a whole night¡¯s worth of time to flee. One day and one night were enough for the two armies to escape back to Le Ling City. Initially, when the two armies of Le¡¯an Camp arrived abruptly, almost descending from heaven, they broke into Le¡¯an Prefecture. At the peak of their advance, they even reached the outskirts of Le Ling City. Le Ling City almost counterattacked desperately, pushing back the front line and reconstructing a new line of defense about two hundred li to the south and southeast to block the Chu army. A distance of two hundred li, if traveled non-stop and overnight, could be covered in one day and one night, enough for the two Xu armies to make it back under the walls of Le Ling City. It was the very short distance between the front line and the rear that gave the Xu People the audacity for this maneuver. Otherwise, in the event of hundreds of thousands of troops retreating, even with the greatest courage, they wouldn¡¯t dare to suddenly abandon their defensive line and flee desperately. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Initially, the Zhao people were disastrously defeated in the east and had over a million soldiers left, but ultimately less than half were able to retreat back to Hebei. This is the difficulty of withdrawal after a defeat. The enemy wouldn¡¯t simply let you escape. The Xu People¡¯s ability to pull off this miraculous evacuation was indeed a stroke of luck. By any standard, moving back two hundred li to reach Le Ling City doesn¡¯t count as leaving the battlefield; it¡¯s merely moving the defensive line back. And that is indeed the case. The Xu armies of the South and Southeast just moved the defensive line from two hundred li away to just beyond two hundred li at Le Ling. ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter, the Xu Army didn¡¯t escape; they just moved from one cage to the one we have here now.¡± Qingyangzi was an avatar of Lu Yuan, so how could he possibly blame his own son? Moreover, strictly speaking, the other side hadn¡¯t really made a mistake. The Xu Army didn¡¯t flee; they were still blocked outside Le Ling City, or rather, the opponent had actively retreated into Le Ling City, looking to replicate the previous evacuation plan. They used two hundred thousand people to buy time for the several million Xu State civilians who were retreating. Twenty thousand troops for several million people, even if they were elite, was considered a very worthwhile exchange. Two hundred thousand troops cannot revive once consumed; the loss is permanent. But several million civilians, given a decade to recover and propagate, could yield another fifty thousand troops. Given twenty years, even a million could be recruited. The wonder of population growth lies in this. In the North, in Xuzhou, despite being ravaged by the cold wave, they could at least sustain it for another decade or so. This time was sufficient for Xu State to complete another cycle of population replacement. As long as the population continued to grow and there was territory in hand, Xu State could accumulate strength once more, waiting for changes in the heavens and seeking opportunities to move south again. That¡¯s why. Xu State would rather give up two hundred thousand soldiers than the more than two million civilians who were retreating. The value of the two was simply not on the same level. ¡°But with Le Ling City in the way, the people in the rear can retreat in peace, which means several million people. If we really let them get back to Xuzhou, I fear they will become a serious threat to our Chu State in the future,¡± Lu Ning said, though not blamed, was still somewhat worried. As a prince of the Chu State, his interests were naturally tied to that of the Chu State. And because of Lu Yuan¡¯s identity as a Cultivator, many princes also knew in their hearts that they would not outlive their father, so they no longer had the ambition to compete for the throne. With the struggle for power gone and combined with the concepts brought over from Lu Yuan¡¯s former life, under his careful guidance, the relationships between father and children, and among brothers and sisters, were still quite good. Even if there were conflicts among some children, it was just due to differences in philosophy and personality, not rising to the level of wanting each other dead. Chapter 1132 - Chapter 1132 Chapter 457 Leling Taken Down_2 ?Chapter 1132: Chapter 457 Leling Taken Down_2 Chapter 1132: Chapter 457 Leling Taken Down_2 The atmosphere within the Chu State royal family is quite harmonious. Lu Ning, who grew up in such an environment, naturally exhibits a strong sense of belonging and responsibility to Great Chu and now naturally starts to consider the interests of Chu State. ¡°This isn¡¯t a big deal,¡± As an avatar who took on the role of a father figure, Qingyangzi couldn¡¯t help but feel gratified to see Lu Ning taking Chu State¡¯s affairs to heart so earnestly. He then smiled and said, ¡°Leling City is but a dead city. The army from Xu State entering the city is like tying their own hands and feet, trapping themselves in a prison with no way out. Now that all your forces have hurried here, along with my main army, our Le¡¯an Camp totals one and a half million soldiers beneath Leling City. How could a mere two hundred thousand soldiers from Xu State stand a chance?¡± Looking towards the distant city, Qingyangzi couldn¡¯t help but reveal a mocking smile, ¡°But we don¡¯t need to assault the city. Although we could break through it, the cost and time would be somewhat significant. We are in a hurry to pursue the people of Xu State and cannot afford to waste time here. So I¡¯ve decided that our original southern and southeastern forces, totaling five hundred thousand strong, will surround Leling City from all sides. Block all their escape routes and trap those two hundred thousand Xu soldiers within the city, preventing them from making any moves. As for me, I will lead the main force and bypass Leling to continue deeper and pursue the people of Xu State. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 They think they can retreat and move the civilians out of the way? How naive. Did they even ask the Commander? Qingyangzi laughed coldly, clearly disdainful of the foolishness of the Xu people. The opponent thinks they can stop a Chu army of over a million with just the city of Lelinga€¡±it¡¯s foolish to even consider it. Yes, according to common military sense, if an enemy base is at the rear, a large army bypassing it to penetrate deep into enemy territory risks collapse. That¡¯s why to ensure the safety of the army, military commanders generally don¡¯t take such risks. This danger is comparable to when Lu Yuan had just begun his career, and went on the Northern Expedition against Zhou Country, conducting stealth attacks a thousand miles behind enemy lines twice in succession. That truly was a step away from risking the entire army¡¯s annihilation. It was also the reason why Lu Yuan, after choosing to undertake the mission and ultimately achieving merit, was recognized as the first among generals beneath the Commander. Because that truly involved great risks but also led to great merits. Even after Lu Yuan rose to power, since the founding of the country, he had never again undertaken such dangerous actions in any campaign against others. Even he wasn¡¯t certain he could be so lucky each time. But can the current situation of the Xu people be compared to normal? Does Chu State not clearly understand the true state of affairs in Xu State? It¡¯s true that penetrating deep into enemy territory is dangerous. But to turn that threat into reality, you need to have the ability to realize the danger. The Xu army in Le¡¯an Prefecture indeed has a significant number. But their main force, one part of which is right before us, is trapped by the Chu army dying within Leling City, still dreaming of buying time. The other part is in Wuyan City, where they are currently under harassment by my true body, taking boats to cross the river, struggling to retreat toward Hebei. In the past ten days, of the million Xu soldiers in Wuyan City, already tens of thousands have retreated. The rest are being monitored by the Chu army, unable to move except to flee. This threat can also be disregarded. With these two armies gone, there will be no Xu forces left within the boundaries of Le¡¯an. Around Le¡¯an, the eastern Qingping County, which borders Le¡¯an Prefecture, is under the control of the Qingping Camp of the Chu army. With that camp there, there won¡¯t be any danger. And the last remaining direction, the North? The Xu people are swarming there to escape, a crowded mass of refugees hardly counts as a threat. As for the local militiamen in Le¡¯an Prefecture, a large number of able-bodied men have already been drafted into the military. Those militia forces have long been engaged in the war, now they¡¯re either trapped in Leling City or trapped in Wuyan City. Locally, it¡¯s mostly the elderly, women, and children left, and even if weapons were put into every hand, the threat to the Chu army would be limited, and could even be disregarded entirely. Under these circumstances, the so-called penetration into enemy territory naturally becomes inconsequential. The Xu people thinking a city like Leling could stop the Chu army is nothing but wishful thinking. It¡¯s not that the opponent¡¯s planning is ineffective. Indeed, it does have an effect, tying down five hundred thousand Chu soldiers and seven Inborn masters, which is not too shabby. But who would have guessed the Chu army¡¯s strength is so overwhelmingly superior? Even after leaving a hundred thousand people at the Sheqiu City and fifty thousand at Leling City, the Camp from Le¡¯an could still muster another million to pursue. Given such formidable strength, even the most cunning of strategists can only feel hopeless. For this is not a matter of schemes, but of sheer force overpowering, overt manipulation that doesn¡¯t even bother with deceit. In this scenario, either you block it, or you get crushed. And for the Xu people right now, it¡¯s a matter of not being able to hold back and getting crushed. ¡­ By mid-August, the Le¡¯an Camp, which had just arrived at Le Ling City, saw its three divisions of soldiers meet once more after being separated for several months. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 The next day, Camp Commander Qingyangzi, having left part of the forces to surround Leling, continued leading his troops past the city to pursue the fleeing Xu people. Within the two prefectures controlled by Xu State, where the Xu people were busy with relocation efforts, they could never have imagined that the Chu army would directly disregard Leling City and, risking danger, penetrate deep into their territory to continue their assault. What was even more unexpected was that Leling City made no response whatsoever, not even a single message got out. Strictly following Qingyangzi¡¯s orders, the fifty thousand-strong army and seven Inborn masters surrounding Leling City made sure it was tightly sealed, not a single soul was allowed out. Chapter 1133 - Chapter 1133 Chapter 457 Leling Taken Down_3 ?Chapter 1133: Chapter 457 Leling Taken Down_3 Chapter 1133: Chapter 457 Leling Taken Down_3 Even the three Inborn Grandmasters stationed in the city were under constant watch by Lu Ning and his men. Despite several attempts to leave the city, they were intercepted and could not escape. Under such circumstances, Qingyangzi pursued for three days and took over a prefecture. After another two days of pursuit and breaking through another prefecture, he reached the south bank of the Yellow River. During those days, even though the Xu People moved day and night, they only managed to take more than two hundred thousand people with them. The originally planned evacuation of over two million people completely failed under Qingyangzi¡¯s relentless pursuit. Qingyangzi successfully recaptured over two million inhabitants, preserving a vast amount of spoils for Chu State¡¯s victory in the Le¡¯an campaign. Meanwhile, Xu State could only watch as the two hundred thousand elite troops traded for two hundred thousand civilians wept bitterly on the riverbanks to the north of the Great River. After completely expelling Xu State, Chu State essentially took over the entire Le¡¯an Prefecture. At this point, in the whole territory of Le¡¯an, only the cities of Le Ling and Wuyan remained outside of Chu Army¡¯s control. However, the Xu Army in Wuyan City was busily preparing to flee. The Xu Army in Le Ling City had become a doomed force, unable to escape even if they grew wings. After taking those two cities, then driving out the Xu Army from Qingping County, Chu State would be able to fully control the entire Qingzhou region. The goal of the third Northern Expedition, the unification of Qingzhou, would then be achieved. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã0 Even beyond that, the annihilation of Wei Country and Zhao Country added extra glory to this victory. ¡­ At the end of the eighth month, Having just completed a brilliant pursuit, Qingyangzi left a large number of troops to defend Henan, keeping a close watch on the Xu People to prevent them from heading south again. He then led the remaining forces, escorting the just captured over two million Xu People, taking them back to their original location for resettlement. During the resettlement period, he selected some representative individuals, roughly a hundred thousand people, and escorted them to the foot of Le Ling City. These selected individuals were family members of the city¡¯s defenders, identified through the reports of Xu State officials captured during the pursuit. Hence, Qingyangzi specifically chose them and brought them directly to the bottom of Le Ling City, using these family members to threaten the city¡¯s defenders into giving up their resistance. He also announced a message. That was, their plan had failed, and not only were their families captured, but the entire Le¡¯an Prefecture had also been completely lost. These two hundred thousand people had become an isolated force, surrounded by Chu troops on all sides, with no other way of life but to surrender. This was a very ruthless psychological warfare strategy. As soon as Qingyangzi put it into play, it immediately achieved a significant effect. The Xu Soldiers inside the city, upon seeing their own kin, instantly became wavering in spirit. That very night, over a thousand Xu Soldiers who saw their family members climbed over the city walls to flee, coming over to the Chu Camp to surrender. By the next day, even after the Xu Army officers executed more than a hundred men in an attempt to intimidate the soldiers, they still were unable to stop the tide of surrenders. Because it wasn¡¯t just the low-level soldiers who were concerned for their parents and kin, but even the mid and low-ranking officers of Xu State were worried about their future. Unlike the high-profile nobles who had shipped their families to Hebei early on, many of these mid and low-ranking officers had families among the planned two million people to be evacuated. Many Xu Army officers, during the day, saw their own family members. With their families in another¡¯s grasp, how could they still have the heart to fight? Not to mention the situation in Le Ling City was clear to all. They were merely pawns, used to delay the Chu Army¡¯s advance and buy time for the civilians retreating behind them. Initially resigned to being sacrificial pieces while their families were held hostage, they had no choice but to grit their teeth and persist. Now that their families were out of Xu State¡¯s control and instead under Chu Army¡¯s power, The threat to them had shifted from Xu State to Chu State. Though the controller had changed, the ones held tight remained the same. Not wanting to die and yearning for their families, under this dual psychological assault, more and more Xu Soldiers began to desert and surrender in the following two days. In fact, due to the fear of military law, there were even incidents of group desertions. Once they ran, it was dozens, hundreds of men at a time, unstoppable. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Seeing this situation, the defending Commander of Le Ling City was all too aware that the will of the people was gone and all was lost. Even if he wanted to defend, the soldiers¡¯ hearts were no longer with him. A discordant garrison, conspiracies from within and without. No matter how capable he was, it was impossible to hold onto the city any longer. And so, on the fourth day, the three Inborns of Xu State in the city unexpectedly chose to flee. The three picked a direction and ran with all their might. Others in the city could surrender, but they were deep in the ties with Xu State. Not only were they the rulers of Xu State, but their families and clans had already moved to Hebei, Xuzhou earlier. In such a situation, there was no room for surrender. They wouldn¡¯t surrender either. The Inborns of the Xu People chose a direction and fled; those assigned to monitor the Inborns of the Xu Army within the city were only two, facing three desperate men breaking out was a difficult intercept. An Inborn intent on escaping at all costs, Unless surrounded by several times their number, or a Grandmaster intervenes, even a Second Realm Inborn can¡¯t stop a First Realm Inborn who is prepared. After a brief skirmish and before other Inborns of Chu State could arrive to help, the three had fled. In the end, as they watched their retreating figures, the two intercepting Inborns of Chu State could only sigh and return to camp to admit their fault to Qingyangzi. Fortunately, Qingyangzi also understood how difficult it was to stop an Inborn. So he did not blame the two, instead offering comforting words before sending them to rest. With the Commanders gone, the remaining Xu State forces inside Le Ling City, upon learning the fact, In absolute despair, they no longer had any reservations. The day after the Commanders fled, led by some of the remaining high-ranking officers inside the city, they opened the gates of Le Ling City and welcomed the Chu Army inside. With this, Xu State¡¯s South Capital officially fell into the hands of Chu State. The dream of Xu People¡¯s dominance in Qingzhou was completely shattered at this moment. Chapter 1134 - Chapter 1134 Chapter 458 Qingzhou Unified ?Chapter 1134: Chapter 458 Qingzhou Unified Chapter 1134: Chapter 458 Qingzhou Unified After the Chu Army hijacked the people being evacuated, the people of Xu State were devastated and terrified, and had essentially completely given up on this plan. Not having to relocate more than two million civilians, the large number of ships that were originally intended to support the evacuation plan were quickly diverted to Wuyan City and Qingping County. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 As for Le¡¯an Prefecture, it was finished. Now wasn¡¯t the time to hesitate, while Le Ling City still held on and there was still some opportunity to move as much of the military forces from Wuyan City and Qingping County as possible. Otherwise, once the Chu Army captured Le Ling City and over a million troops were freed up, it would likely be a problem for even those Xu forces to withdraw from these two places. Therefore, a large number of ships congregated in these two places, beginning to transfer soldiers and civilians day and night without rest, trying to move as many people as possible before the Chu Army arrived. With countless Xu State ships tirelessly at work, within a mere five days, when the Chu Army conquered Le Ling City, the Xu forces in Wuyan City had managed to withdraw another 150,000 people. The reason for such swift action was that the arrival of a large number of ships originally intended for transporting the population of Le¡¯an Prefecture greatly increased the number of ships transporting the Xu forces in Wuyan City. Seeing this, the leader of the Xu State navy simply issued an order, lining up over a thousand ships in a single file, connected with iron chains, turning it into a river pontoon bridge. More than three thousand ships drew close together, forming three columns, with gaps filled with wooden planks, thus creating a flat and wide bridge, eight zhang broad. A large number of Xu troops effortlessly and quickly crossed the great river via this bridge of boats. The efficiency of this method was incomparable to the previous mode of ships queuing up one by one to enter the port, waiting for the Xu Army to board and then leaving fully loaded, followed by the next batch of ships entering; it was much faster. Even though there were Chu forces nearby causing harassment, they still managed to move 150,000 people in five days. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Including those who had previously retreated, nearly 300,000 people from the Xu forces in Wuyan City had already escaped. Given the currently reinforced evacuation efficiency, in at most another twenty days, the remaining 700,000 people at the Wuyan defensive line could be completely withdrawn. However, the more people that withdrew, the fewer the remaining forces, and the weaker the strength at the defensive lines became. At that time, the people of Xu would not be able to defend against the Chu Army as tightly as they did now, and the defensive lines would inevitably have loopholes. If the Chu Army seized this chance for a fierce attack, it would be impossible for the Xu people to escape composedly. How many of these remaining 700,000 people could actually escape was truly hard to say. But as long as half could make it back, it would be a great gain for Xu State. Being able to withdraw six or seven hundred thousand people from the Wuyan Battlefield, even if these were only half of the peak forces at that battlefield, would still be a tremendous victory. Having already lost the entire Qingzhou, along with its population of thirty million, Xu State at this moment could withdraw any amount of military forces and civilians from the Qingzhou area, all for accumulating precious resources for the great war in the future. Therefore. The monarch and officials of Xu State who had escaped back to their old capital, Yan City, after resettling the court, initially mobilized the entire native strength, desperately backing the withdrawal of the Xu Army from Henan. The aim was to save as many people and horses as possible before everything settled down. It was a race against time, a gambit of resources. ¡­ In the forty-third year of Shenwu, the ninth month. Finally, some news came from Yuzhou. After two months of negotiations, which saw countless arguments and compromises, the four states of Tang, Xu, Zheng, and Jin finally formed an alliance. The four states declared that they would put aside past grievances, give up all lingering animosity, and form allies to jointly resist any enemy that threatened to invade their territories. The four states from the region of Yuzhou thus came together to form a small interest group, establishing a military alliance to cope with external pressure. They claim to resist those who dare to invade them, yet, they did not specifically identify the enemy. But everyone in the world could clearly see that their target was Chu State. Because, amongst the current states of the Nine Provinces, Liang, Wei, and Zhao had perished, and Xu State had just suffered a defeat, its power completely withdrawing from Qingzhou. Without several years of rest and recuperation, Xu State would be incapable of waging war. Thus, surveying the surroundings of Yuzhou, the only one with the strength, ability, and willingness to aggress was none other than Chu State. The military alliance of the four states was clear in who they stood against. However, despite their alliance, the four states were inwardly anxious. They weren¡¯t bold enough to call out Chu State by name, instead choosing to beat around the bush by speaking of enemies who dared to infringe upon them, too fearful to confront Chu State directly, which was evidence enough. Xu State had just been defeated. This primate ally, which had helped facilitate their reconciliation, had been completely crushed under the blow of Chu State. They had originally hoped for a force in Qingzhou that could help them contain Chu State and relieve some of their pressures. Now it seemed like a vain hope. Facing their precarious situation alone, the already disadvantaged alliance of the four states, without a strong ally, naturally felt even less confident in standing against Chu State. If not for the fact that Chu State could never give up the unification of Central State, due to a fundamental clash of interests that was a matter of life and death, the alliance of the four might have long sent messengers, rushing to submit and pay homage to Chu State. If they couldn¡¯t win, they could join and become a subordinate, which was always better than losing everything. Unfortunately. Chu State, which now controlled most of Central State and had subdued most of its strong enemies, possessing an absolute advantage, would not forsake the opportunity to completely unify Central State and settle for a tributary system of vassal states, which would leave tremendous risks for the future. Chapter 1135 - Chapter 1135 Chapter 458 Qingzhou Unified_2 ?Chapter 1135: Chapter 458 Qingzhou Unified_2 Chapter 1135: Chapter 458 Qingzhou Unified_2 ¡°` Although Lu Yuan was confident that with his lifespan, spending a hundred years, he could slowly resolve such a hidden danger. Yet at this point, at most it would take another year or two of effort and the loss of one to two million soldiers to completely solve the problem. Why bother dragging things out into the future and adding worry to his long years? Therefore, he was determined to deal with the four kingdoms of Yuzhou. There was no room for discussion. ¡­ As time flew, another month passed in the blink of an eye. By the end of September, the warfare in Qingzhou had gradually subsided and eventually ceased. After retreating for over a month, the Xu Army in Wuyan City was left with only three hundred thousand soldiers by mid-September and could no longer maintain a stable defense. The Chu Army broke through the opponent¡¯s interception and directly seized the ports behind Wuyan City, completely cutting off the city¡¯s retreat route. In desperation, the defenders in the city made a counterattack; however, they were soundly defeated by the well-prepared Chu forces, and the Xu State Head Marshal, an Inborn Grandmaster, was slain on the spot by the Lu Yuan Avatar. With their army disastrously defeated and their head marshal dead, the remaining two hundred thousand Xu soldiers were thrown into a panic. At this point, Qingyangzi also led a large force to arrive, and as the Chu military presence increased, these Xu soldiers lost the will to resist and ultimately chose to open the city and surrender. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Thus, Le¡¯an Prefecture was pacified. A few days after the capture of Wuyan City, good news came from Qingping County as well. After retreating for more than a month and relocating a large number of civilians from the territory, the remaining soldiers of the Xu Army in Qingping County found themselves in the same plight as the forces in Wuyan City. With tens of thousands left after the main force had gone, they were surrounded by Qingping Camp¡¯s one million-strong Chu Army. Stuck in their besieged city, they too chose to surrender. Meanwhile, Shouzhang City in Dongping County, which had been surrounded by Chu troops all the while, held out for several months without seeing any reinforcements and ultimately chose to open its gates and surrender. The three hundred thousand soldiers within the city, along with five Xu Country Innates, were smoothly incorporated into Chu State. The ease of this transition was mainly due to the fact that among the five Xu Country Innates in the city, four were barbarians from Xuzhou. These individuals had only pledged allegiance to Xu State the year before and were hardly considered core loyalists, so their level of devotion to Xu State was naturally not that high. Moreover, most of the Xu Army soldiers in the city were from these barbarian tribes and were seen as irregular troops of little regard in Xu State. Xu State also had little trust in these people. Otherwise, it wouldn¡¯t be that Shouzhang City had been surrounded for several months, and Xu State always subconsciously assumed that the defenders there had surrendered, never sending anyone to confirm the news. There were no rescue efforts either. At the core of this logic was a lack of trust in the barbarians, not believing they would fight to the death for Xu State. After all, only a year earlier, Xu State and these barbarians had been killing each other for tens or hundreds of years. How could such deep-seated enmity be so easily dissolved? This ultimately benefited Chu State. Suddenly having acquired three hundred thousand troops and five Innates, Lu Yuan¡¯s strength under his command was further enriched, creating an even more overwhelming posture compared to the remaining countries in the Nine Provinces. With Shouzhang City¡¯s surrender, the last vestige of Xu Army¡¯s power in Henan was eliminated, and Chu Army smoothly took control of Dongping County. With this piece falling into place, Qingzhou was officially unified, completing the Northern Expedition objective. In this conflict, not only did Chu Army capture Qingzhou, but they also eliminated nearly two million Xu troops and nineteen Inborn Grandmasters in six major battles including the battles of Xichang, Snake Hill, Wuyan, Leling, Shouzhang, and Qingping. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Almost in one fell swoop, Chu State eradicated sixty percent of Xu State¡¯s military potential. Though Xu State, towards the latter part of the great war, had urgently evacuated almost one million civilians back to the heartland of Xuzhou in Hebei, along with roughly one and a half million troops, even considering these figures, the total population of Xu State in Xuzhou was barely eleven million, barely maintaining the standard of a hegemony. However, thanks to the large number of evacuated troops, the number of adult males in Xu State was still impressive and the population structure was reasonably maintained, signifying that the state¡¯s vitality still existed. If a war mobilization were to occur again, based on the standard of one man per household, Xu State could still raise another two million soldiers, along with the seventeen Inborn Grandmasters who had escaped back. Xu State¡¯s strength was still not to be underestimated. Located to the north of the great river, it was considered a major threat to the heartland of Chu State. Fortunately, after suffering a grievous defeat in Qingzhou, not only did Xu State lose the majority of its soldiers and civilians, but its homeland also expended a vast amount of manpower and material resources on several occasions to assist Qingzhou. Having been in a state of war mobilization for the entire forty-third year of Shenwu, cultivation activities in Xu State were minimal. The reason it had continued to sustain itself was the same as Chu State; it depended on the savings from previous years, barely managing to supply the army¡¯s consumption. But Chu State had recuperated for thirty years, and fighting to this point, it was also exhausted and had to reduce its troops, actively controlling the scale of war in order to save money and provisions. Xu State, after years of war and desperate efforts the previous two years to transport money and provisions to assist Liang State, coupled with its own turmoil this year, could no longer bear the strain, even with substantial initial resources. Therefore, according to the intelligence sent by the Imperial City Office, after discussions and analyses with the domestic ministers, Lu Yuan had all but confirmed. Basing on the standard that three years of cultivation yields one year of savings, Xu State would need three years of time to accumulate a year¡¯s worth of military provisions. But Xu State had now relocated a large number of civilians from Henan, with a population exceeding one million people. ¡°` Chapter 1136 - Chapter 1136 Chapter 458 Qingzhou Unified_3 ?Chapter 1136: Chapter 458 Qingzhou Unified_3 Chapter 1136: Chapter 458 Qingzhou Unified_3 ¡°` These people¡¯s settlement will consume a vast amount of money and food, making it yet another continuously bleeding project. Therefore, at least within the next five years, Xu State will lack the strength and ability to interfere externally. As for the threat of Xu State to the north, Chu State can temporarily set it aside and handle it after they sweep through the enemies in Yuzhou. However, as a precaution, after the Northern Expedition against Xu had ended, Lu Yuan still left a six-hundred-thousand-strong force in the three Qingzhou prefectures originally held by Xu State, established a Xu State Camp there, and appointed Qingyangzi as the Camp Commander, with nine Inborns as his subordinates. From the name of this camp, it is clear that the enemy this force is designated to counter is the Xu State to the north. With six hundred thousand troops and ten Inborns, by relying on the great river¡¯s natural defenses and the series of heavy fortified lines left by Liang State and Xu State, even if Xu State attacks with full force, the Xu State Camp could adequately defend. Moreover, in addition to this, after recapturing Dongping, Le¡¯an, and Qingping prefectures and stabilizing them, Lu Yuan also began to dispatch officials to these three prefectures gradually, to establish official administrations at various levels, along with the county soldiers and militia system. Once the establishment of the third-tier local troops and local militia is complete, each military area can have at least thirty thousand soldiers and an Inborn to hold the fort. All these people combined constitute another hundred thousand soldiers and three Inborns. Qingyangzi, overseeing the Xu State Camp, also has the authority to mobilize these local troops in the event of an enemy invasion, thus further strengthening his power. With this dual layer of insurance, the threat from Xu State in the north is significantly alleviated. Therefore, after making these defensive arrangements, Lu Yuan also led his main army back to the Imperial Capital of Great Liang, ending the Northern Expedition before the onset of winter. The third Northern Expedition of Chu State thus concludes. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï ¡­ After returning to the Great Liang, Lu Yuan did not get a chance to rest. Following the Northern Expedition, Chu State achieved a wealth of gains, and naturally, this brought a barrage of affairs, pressing for his attention as the emperor. Foremost and most crucial was the handling of the great number of prisoners, as well as the surrendered soldiers from the mixed army captured during the Northern Expedition. This represented an unprecedented victory for Chu State in its campaign to annihilate Liang and defeat Xu. In the wake of victory laid one million and seven hundred thousand prisoners and defectors from Liang, as well as around one million and two hundred thousand from the Xu Army. All put together, nearly three million prisoners and defectors had become the largest source of instability within Qingzhou¡¯s borders. Like a powder keg, improper handling could lead to explosion. Chu State too lacked sufficient funds and food to sustain these three million people. Now, with the eradication of Liang State and the retreat of Xu Army, the only enemy remaining for Chu State within the borders of the Nine Provinces was the Four Kingdoms in Yuzhou. Though this enemy was powerful, compared to those Chu faced in the previous three Northern Expeditions, they were not much of a concern. After all, the combined population of these four kingdoms barely exceeded sixty or seventy million, and under extreme conscription, they could at most mobilize ten million soldiersa€¡±but not for long. Under normal conditions, even during war, the military strength of the four kingdoms would remain at about four to five million. As for Inborn Grandmasters, the four kingdoms together would have around sixty people. Dealing with this enemy, though somewhat troublesome, wasn¡¯t overly difficult. In the war next year, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t plan to invest too many troops or resources in the Yuzhou battlefield. Five million soldiers and a hundred Inborns would be the total military force for the fourth Northern Expedition. This was also the maximum number of troops the country¡¯s supply chain could support after three years of war. Yes, for this Northern Expedition, Chu State planned to take the elite route, intending to overcome the enemy with quality. ¡°` ¡°` With the meticulously selected elite five million from Chu State, bolstered by the numerous avatars of the powerful Inborn masters, even if they were only facing an opponent of equal military size from the Yuzhou Four Kingdoms, it was believed they could achieve an overwhelming advantage. Anyway, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t believe that the mixed army cobbled together by the opponent four kingdoms could withstand the elites he had gathered by leveraging the strength of the whole world. And if he planned to take the quality route, those previously used cannon fodder tactics would naturally be obsolete. Just as well. Now that Liang had been destroyed, and Xu State had been driven back to its original territory in Xuzhou, there were no more adversaries in Qingzhou territory. In this region, Chu State could also peacefully develop and recover the prefectures and counties ravaged by war. Especially the former territory of Liang, as Liang had perished, the native people of Liang within its borders had now become Chu people, citizens under Lu Yuan¡¯s rule. In such a case, using the people of Liang as cannon fodder like before when Liang still existed seemed somewhat inappropriate. Now there were no more people of Liang, only Chu people. If Lu Yuan were to use the former Liang people, now Chu people, as cannon fodder, he would be depleting his own strength. Moreover, completely depleting these captive Liang people would equate to directly destroying the last batch of quality population in Chu State¡¯s territory in Qingzhou. This would be a devastating blow to the recovery of local production. It would not be conducive to the future recovery and governance of Qingzhou. Similarly, the same applied to the Xu State captives over there. Xu State had already been driven back to Xuzhou, and the thirty million people within the three prefectures of its Qingzhou territory had become subjects of Chu State. And the large number of Xu Army captives captured by Chu State were essentially from these three prefectures of Qingzhou. Exhausting these people meant the death of fathers, sons, and brothers of the Chu citizens and a depletion of Chu State¡¯s strength. When Liang, Wei, Zhao, Xu, and other countries still existed, and to achieve victory in war, Lu Yuan was willing to sacrifice the future potential of the territories, piling up victories with the lives of captives. But now that the other countries had been annihilated and the Great War was won, such a low-benefit, low-return model was naturally undesirable. Therefore, after consideration, Lu Yuan released all of the three million captives captured during this Northern Expedition, along with the remaining captives from previous expeditions, totaling five million people. He allowed them to return to their hometowns and engage in production and construction, the value of which far exceeded that of five million purely consumptive captives. Let those who are professional handle the war. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 Having maintained such a large force, Chu State certainly wouldn¡¯t let the money and grains go to waste, now was the perfect time to make use of them. As for those conscripted civilians, even if they were nominally army troops, their effectiveness on the battlefield paled in comparison to that of a real army. Production and cultivation in the localities, that was their real duty. Having unified Qingzhou and taken possession of two thirds of Central State, Lu Yuan¡¯s mode of thinking had now shifted towards being the true ruler of the Nine Provinces. All under the heavens, is royal land. Everywhere within its bounds, are royal ministers. The civilians of the enemy nations are also my civilians. Even if they do not belong to me at this moment, once the enemy country is eliminated, they naturally will. This is indeed the heart of a Heavenly Son and the magnanimity of a king. ¡°` Chapter 1137 - Chapter 1137 Chapter 459 Post-War Tally ?Chapter 1137: Chapter 459 Post-War Tally Chapter 1137: Chapter 459 Post-War Tally Of the five million prisoners, Lu Yuan did not release them all at once, but instead, sifted through them. He kept those prisoners who were in their prime and had war experience, specifically the veteran soldiers. In the third Northern Expedition, even though Chu State made smooth progress and could be said to be unstoppable on several battlefields, whether it was counterattacking Wei Country, annihilating Liang, or expelling Xu State, Chu State would inevitably suffer some losses even in victory. About 600,000 casualties among the Chu army were unavoidable. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Moreover, next year Lu Yuan had decided to use five million elite troops for four Northern Expeditions; relying solely on Chu¡¯s current military strength, it would be quite strained to meet this target, and it might even be impossible. Before this year¡¯s four Northern Expeditions, Chu State had 6.18 million troops in the region north of the Yangtze River. After the Northern Expedition concluded, first the Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp withdrew 500,000 people and five Inborns, who headed south to Yangzhou to reinforce the homeland. Then there were losses of 600,000 troops across several battlefields. Now having seized the Qingzhou region and the four counties of Liang as well as the three counties of Xu State, establishing local government and county soldiers in these areas required 210,000 more people and seven Inborns. Just these three assignments alone took away 1.31 million troops and twelve Inborns. Excluding these, the forces remaining in Lu Yuan¡¯s Central State were only 4.87 million people and 104 Inborns. This amount of forces was just enough to meet the needs of the four Northern Expeditions. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? But don¡¯t forget, on the west side, Lu Yuan also had the Yongzhou Camp, needing it to guard against the Western region foreign tribes. In the North where Qingzhou was just seized, there was also the Xuzhou Camp, specifically to guard against the recently defeated Xu State, staying alert for the opponent¡¯s counterattack. Just these two locations would require 1.4 million troops and twenty Inborns. Additionally, now that Chu State fully occupied Qingzhou, the pirates who came from the East Sea and continually harassed the coastal areas of Central State had to be faced by Chu as well. The coastal stretch of Qing and Yu states, over tens of thousands of miles, was preyed upon by pirates who would come ashore to plunder and even attack the prefectures and counties, numbering in the tens or hundreds of millions. Originally, during the war or when these regions were enemy territories, Chu¡¯s forces could not manage everything and had to ignore these as secondary targets. But now, since the above regions all belonged to Chu State, Lu Yuan, as the ruler of Chu, naturally had the duty to ensure the security of the maritime borders and protect the hinterland populace. Therefore, he planned to imitate the homeland and set up a naval military expedition along the tens of thousands of miles of coastal borders in Qing and Yu states, specifically to combat those pirates and safeguard coastal peace. To protect tens of thousands of miles of maritime frontier, the number of people couldn¡¯t be too few; at least a million were needed, plus more than ten Inborns, just to ensure there was adequate defensive maneuverability. That became yet another focus for troop deployment. So, after such selecting and choosing, the troops Chu army could use for launching a Northern Expedition had become not so plentiful. Starting a new round of expansion was imperative, and no further delay was possible. And the best source for this expansion was, of course, the prisoners of the various nations who had just ended their wars and had sufficient battlefield experience. The militiamen and the old, weak, and sick forcibly conscripted by the other nations were certainly not what Lu Yuan was looking for; they were not his targets. What he valued were the elite forces that nations held back and veteran soldiers who had fought numerous tough battles. Over the years, through its southern and northern campaigns, Chu State had captured a large number of troops from various nations, which included both ragtag armies and elite forces. Lu Yuan¡¯s goal was to release the weak to relieve logistic pressure, restore local production, and balance the population structure. Then select the elites to supplement Chu¡¯s Forbidden Army, letting them fight for Chu State. ¡°With over five million prisoners, a careful selection should yield around a million elites to supplement the main Forbidden Army. Even those who are just shy of the mark could return to their hometowns to serve as local prefecture and county soldiers, relieving local law enforcement pressure,¡± Lu Yuan thought to himself, and he soon issued the decree. Release the prisoners, select the elites, expand the Forbidden Army. ¡­ Besides absorbing soldiers from the prisoners of various countries, Chu State also gained a great deal in terms of Inborn Grandmasters during this Northern Expedition. First and foremost were the Inborns from different countries who surrendered on the battlefield. From Liang, thanks to defectors, Chu State initially obtained the loyalty of five Liang Inborns, and after the fall of Liang, another five came to seek refuge. Just from Liang alone, Chu State gained a total of ten Inborns. Then there was Xu State, where several major battles led to seven Inborns from Xu, trapped and unable to escape, choosing to surrender to Chu State. That was another seven Inborns. Another was Immortal Yun County, which had Haiyun Pavilion, a local Immortal Sect in Yuzhou. After Chu State took control of the area, Lu Yuan directly ordered that all Inborns from Haiyun Pavilion must come out of seclusion and serve Chu State. Moreover, Inborns from Haiyun Pavilion who had entered the services of Zheng and Jin were also required to be recalled and join Chu under his command. This was undoubtedly an extremely harsh command. One might even say that it turned Haiyun Pavilion into mere fish on the chopping block, to be cut and molded at Chu¡¯s will. If it had been in the past, Haiyun Pavilion would have been indignant and stood up against Chu State outright. But times had changed, and today was not like the past days. The Cultivators of Haiyun Pavilion had already ascended from the Sea; their Inborn Grandmasters who served in the wars over the years had suffered considerable losses, and their strength had been weakened. In contrast, Chu State, with its three Northern Expeditions over the years, rose in prominence like the midday sun, increasingly becoming the hegemon of Central State, now possessing the stature of the Heavenly Son of the Nine Provinces. Chapter 1138 - Chapter 1138 Chapter 459 Post-War Tally_2 ?Chapter 1138: Chapter 459 Post-War Tally_2 Chapter 1138: Chapter 459 Post-War Tally_2 Faced with such a formidable empire, even Haiyun Pavilion, which had always floated independently, did not dare to offend. Especially since it was under Chu State¡¯s rule and, after seeing the precedent set by Dan Ding Path, Haiyun Pavilion was even more cautious about making any rash moves. Therefore, when Qingyunzi led his troops to surround Haiyun Pavilion, this Immortal Sect, after some struggling, ultimately did not dare to make a move and chose to submit. The School Leader, along with a group of Inborn elders and many disciples, joined the Chu camp. Then, under Qingyunzi¡¯s indication, they immediately issued the School Leader¡¯s decree, ordering the disciples to go to various countries to call back the sect members who had taken official positions, to pledge their loyalty to Chu State. It was humiliating, but to survive, that was the only choice left. But upon further reflection, Chu State was becoming more and more powerful with each passing day, and the unification of the world seemed just around the corner. Haiyun Pavilion¡¯s supported Zheng and Jin were weakening day by day, and it was uncertain when they would be annihilated. Jumping ship from these sinking vessels to Chu State¡¯s deep-sea juggernaut seemed undeniably like a prospect with a bright future. And it wasn¡¯t just Haiyun Pavilion; with Chu¡¯s continuous military expeditions south and north, Yangzhou¡¯s Purple Cloud Dao and Feishuang Tao, Qingzhou¡¯s Cang Long Way, and Yongzhou¡¯s Jade Toad Dao had also successively surrendered and contributed all of their strength, hadn¡¯t they? With these fellow Daoists leading the way, Haiyun Pavilion¡¯s submission was hardly a humiliation. After all, this was the norm for Chu State. To continue as an Immortal Sect under Chu¡¯s rule, one had to follow suit. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï It would be unusual for Haiyun Pavilion to receive special treatment. Thinking this way, the resistance in the hearts of the Pavilion¡¯s School Leader and elders lessened. With their disciples, they joyfully joined Chu State. ¡­ Haiyun Pavilion completely surrendered to Chu State. In total, six Inborn Grandmasters and more than seven hundred elite disciples became part of Chu State¡¯s strength. This was a matter of great joy. Not only did Chu State gain a great power, but it also dealt a blow to Zheng and Jin, as their own Inborn Grandmasters and numerous disciples abandoned them, joining the ranks of their enemy state. It laid the groundwork for next year¡¯s four bouts of Northern Expedition, kick-starting with good fortune. And this seemed to foretell the continuous good luck of Chu State before the New Year had even arrived. After Lu Yuan led his troops back to Liang, good news followed from the camps in Yongzhou and the Northern Expedition one after another. Some months earlier, Wei State¡¯s Monarch and Ministers had fled to Yan State, only to be attacked and annihilated by many Barbarians there; then a large tribe of Yanzhou Barbarians brought the heads of Wei State¡¯s officials to pledge allegiance to Chu State. From that moment, Lu Yuan saw an opportunity to subdue these Barbarians. Thus, he instructed Yongzhou camp¡¯s general manager Huang Xin to send people to make contact with the Yanzhou Barbarians and the grasslands to the south of Yan State to gather the Barbarian tribes and entice them to surrender to Chu State. Now, half a year later, the actions of the Yongzhou camp were a great success. Starting from July this year, a large number of Yanzhou Barbarians, attracted by Chu¡¯s enticements, led their tribes to migrate southwards, accepting registration as Registered Citizens, officially becoming a part of Chu State. By the present October, at the time of the first snowfall, a total of two million Barbarians from Yanzhou and the southern grasslands had chosen to leave the bitter cold of the North, accept resettlement, and become residents of Chu State. Chu State not only gained a large population but also gained the loyalty of three Barbarian Inborns, adding a significant number of top experts to its ranks. It wasn¡¯t just the Yongzhou Camp that was successful. In the Northern Camp, tasked with the same mission of going to Ji Province to gather the remnants of Zhao State and the Barbarians of Ji, Huang Lin, the northern camp¡¯s commander, also garnered substantial results after two or three months in the north. The Northern Camp had 400,000 soldiers, including ten Inborns along with Huang Lin. They faced the Barbarian tribes that had just annihilated Zhao State and were gradually wreaking havoc and expanding their presence in Ji Province. These Barbarian tribes once had a million strong army with just over ten Inborn Grandmasters. But after clashing with Zhao State, which had retreated to their old home in Ji, they obliterated that local power but paid a heavy price in return. Not only had they lost seven to eight hundred thousand soldiers, but eight Inborn Grandmasters had also fallen. Zhao State and the Barbarians were both heavily battered. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Despite such losses, as long as they could achieve victory and dominate Ji Province alone, the number of Barbarian Inborn Grandmasters might not be recoverable. But their numbers of soldiers could be restored after a decade of rest and by absorbing Zhao¡¯s immigrants. In fact, it was not only about recovery; to inflate their numbers twofold was easily within reach. However, Chu State did not give them the opportunity. No sooner had the Barbarians of Ji Province barely triumphed and captured Zhao¡¯s capital, Handan, than Chu¡¯s army arrived. The Barbarian tribes of Ji, after a year of fighting, had only three to fifty thousand soldiers left, and there were merely four Inborn Grandmasters remaining. Moreover, the army was exhausted from prolonged warfare, with troop morale, supplies, and reserves at critically low points. These forces could naturally not contend with the backing and well-prepared Northern Camp of Chu State. So when Huang Lin led his army there, just one battle was enough to break the recently victorious and morale-boosted Barbarian army. Decapitating over a hundred thousand, capturing tens of thousands, and two Barbarian Inborns died in battle right there. In the first clash, Chu¡¯s army nearly annihilated the last of Ji Province Barbarians¡¯ vitality. Chapter 1139 - Chapter 1139 Chapter 459 Post-War Tally_3 ?Chapter 1139: Chapter 459 Post-War Tally_3 Chapter 1139: Chapter 459 Post-War Tally_3 Having annihilated the opponent¡¯s main force, the remaining matters became much easier to handle. Huang Lin first led his troops to recapture Handan and then dispatched soldiers in various directions to reclaim Zhao country¡¯s cities. At the same time, he expelled and suppressed the Barbarians rampaging in Ji Province and gathered the local Zhao common people. It took a month, but the original territory of Ji State Zhao Country was finally stabilized. During this period, a minor episode occurred. After the fall of Zhao Country, not all of Ji Province had lost the power to resist; there were still some remnants of Zhao operatives resisting in the region. Among these remnants, there was a force entrenched in the eastern part of Ji Province, controlling about two prefectures¡¯ worth of land, with thirty thousand troops at its command, led by an Innate General of Zhao Country. ?¦Ï???.§ã0 This person, seeing Chu State helping Zhao Country resist the Barbarians, took the initiative to bring his territories and forces to surrender and join Chu State. With the help of these remaining forces of Ji Province Zhao Country, Huang Lin quickly took control of the situation in the former Zhao territory. This laid the groundwork for a foothold in the Ji Province of Hebei. After the situation had stabilized somewhat, Huang Lin left behind some troops to maintain local security in Ji Province and then personally led an army of three hundred thousand to continue northward, to subdue the remaining Barbarian tribes in Ji Province. In the previous battle, the Barbarians of Ji Province had been severely defeated by the Chu army and had already lost their elite forces. Now facing the main force of Chu¡¯s campaign, they were utterly powerless to fight back. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? In a month¡¯s time, the Barbarians of Ji Province were basically pacified. Of the two Inborn Barbarians who had originally fled, one was killed during resistance, while the other took the initiative to lead his tribe to surrender, causing no further trouble. Therefore, by the time it was September, Ji Province was controlled by Chu State. After taking control of the entire territory of Ji Province, Huang Lin conducted an inventory. This battle not only secured Ji Province but also netted a total of three million Zhao refugees and about four million Barbarians. The entire Ji Province, with its remaining seven million population and two Inborn Grandmasters, had all fallen into Chu State¡¯s control. Adding on the gains from the Yongzhou Camp, Chu State¡¯s action to gather Barbarians to the north secured a population of nine million and five Innates. Such gains were tremendously significant, no less impressive than the conquest of Liang. Having achieved these gains, what naturally followed was the need to assimilate them. For the nine million people acquired, Lu Yuan already had plans. Let¡¯s not discuss Yan State for the moment. There, Huang Xin merely sent people to entice the tribes of Yan State and did not send troops to conquer the local territories. Therefore, in Yan State, Chu State did not have actual territorial control. All that was needed there was to relocate the two million surrendered Barbarians into Central State¡¯s territory for proper settlement. The relocation site had already been determined. It was the territory of the four prefectures recently conquered from Liang. The original seven prefectures and six prefectures that had been used to settle immigrants a€¡± Henan, Nanyang, Jiangxia, Xingyang, East Prefecture, Jiying, East Sea, northern part of Guangling, and northern part of Xiangyang a€¡± had already surpassed a population of ten million each after three years of relocation and the local residents already there. Prefectures that received key relocations, such as Henan, Nanyang, Xingyang, each had populations exceeding fifteen million. This was no longer just a dense population but had become overcrowded. Therefore, the eastern part of Qingzhou, some parts of Yong and Yang provinces a€¡± the territories of these seven prefectures and six prefectures a€¡± had already reached saturation and would struggle to accommodate any more immigrants. Future immigrants from Yangzhou, as well as those from other states, will gradually move to the central and eastern parts of Qingzhou and the southern part of Yu State, these three regions. Among them, the central Qingzhou region surrounding Daliang would naturally be used to settle the core base of Chu State and the Chu people of Yangzhou. The remaining eastern part of Qingzhou and the southern part of Yu State, these peripheral regions, were designated for the settlement of immigrants from other states and the Barbarians. Although the world was united under one rule, it was still necessary to distinguish between those close and distant. Moreover, the Chu common people had paid a lot for the Northern Expedition over the past few years; now that victory had been achieved, they naturally deserved some consideration. The central areas close to the Imperial Capital had always been the most prosperous and wealthy, so of course, they should be reserved for our own people. The Barbarians who had submitted to Yan State were well-settled. And Ji Province had not been neglected. Ji Province, situated in the north and not within the boundaries of Central State, suffered the invasion of cold currents every year, with habitable areas increasingly shrinking. This territory was bound to be abandoned sooner or later. If Lu Yuan was gradually giving up Yangzhou¡¯s main territory, he naturally had no intention of developing Ji Province. In Ji Province, he planned to leave one million Barbarian common people, stationed at various strongholds and important cities. The remaining six million were all to be relocated to the eastern part of Qingzhou, which was the former Liang territory. Ji Province would be guarded by Huang Lin at the helm of the restructured Northern Army, which had been scaled down to just two hundred thousand troops and five Innates, stationed in Jizhou Army. The model was similar to that of Yangzhou and southwestern Lingnan. In the remaining four prefectures of Ji Province, each prefecture city would be garrisoned with fifty thousand troops, one Innate, and two hundred and fifty thousand common people, serving as the core defense force of that prefecture. In the eastern part of Ji Province, facing directly towards Xuzhou, this region would serve as the Army¡¯s headquarters, personally stationed by Huang Lin, with two Innates. Hmm, from this arrangement, it¡¯s not hard to see that the role of the Jizhou Army, as well as the south¡¯s four prefectures, has only one purpose. That is to expand Chu¡¯s northern borders, using the entirety of Ji Province as a buffer zone to guard against threats from Yan and Xu States. So that the three prefectures of Henan, East Prefecture, and Jiying, adjacent to Ji Province, could become completely peaceful rear areas and focus on development. With these troops and the remaining common people in Ji Province, Chu State could also maintain nominal control over Ji Province. Having one state and four prefectures also would provide a significant amount of Qi Luck to aid Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation. This was a way to turn waste into treasure, making full use of the resources at hand. With the reorganization of the Northern Army, the spared two hundred thousand troops and five Innates were directly incorporated by Lu Yuan into his central command for direct administration. The following year, he would need to muster an army of five million for the fourth Northern Expedition. At the same time, Yangzhou¡¯s main territory was increasingly plagued by sea raiders and Barbarians. There were too many places requiring troops, and at this moment, he also needed to apply arithmetic to extract military strength from various places to be utilised. Chapter 1140 - Chapter 1140 Chapter 460 Zone Adjustment ?Chapter 1140: Chapter 460 Zone Adjustment Chapter 1140: Chapter 460 Zone Adjustment Having dealt with the reorganization of the army and the matters of the Northern Border, time had already reached the eleventh month of winter. By this time, there wasn¡¯t much time left until the new year. Similarly, throughout Chu State, with the end of the year approaching, everyone started to become busy. The common folk were busy earning more money in order to buy enough new year goods for the winter to have a good celebration. The civilians from regions just recovering from war took this rare opportunity to sort out their meagre remaining possessions, calculating how to survive the cold winter. The officials in the government were also busy tallying up the year¡¯s achievements and losses, preparing for the year-end assessment and evaluation. Lu Yuan was also sorting out the accounts of the year along with a host of ministers, yet he could not help but take time to look at the report from southern Yangzhou. Or rather, it was a migration plan for the coming year, as well as a letter for help. Having dispatched five hundred thousand troops and five Inborn reinforcements this year, and having all the remaining Inborn from Feishuang Tao and Purple Cloud Dao take action, the pressure had been somewhat alleviated. However, the situation on the home front over there was still far from optimistic. The area that needed to be defended in Yangzhou was simply too big, too broad, too long. For example, Yangzhou has three defense zones. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï One is the East Sea maritime border, covering the coastal regions of Guangling, Linhai, and Jianan counties, with a coastline that stretches over ten thousand miles. Another is the Lingnan War Zone, encompassing Southsea, Yulin, and Jiuzhen counties, also spanning ten thousand miles and requiring an unknown number of soldiers to cover some areas. The last one is the Southwest War Zone, which is even larger, with a total area that includes seven or eight counties, amounting to half a state¡¯s territory. All three defense zones are so vast that they are practically limitless. In Central State, this would be roughly equivalent to Lu Yuan¡¯s first Northern Expedition when he opened up new battlefields within Guannei, Heyang, Eastern County, Liang County, the central part of Qingzhou, and the Yuzhou battlefield all at once. Only by adding up these six battlefields does the scale match the ongoing war in Yangzhou. Of course, Chu State is not like the countries of Central State, and the sea raiders and barbarians to the south are not Chu State. The strengths of both sides in Yangzhou, compared to those Lu Yuan faced during the Northern Expedition, have been correspondingly weakened, so the scale of the war is not as large. After two reinforcements led by Lu Yuan, the number of troops in Chu State¡¯s main territory had increased to two and a half million. In terms of Inborn Grandmasters, Yangzhou¡¯s two major Daoist sects provided eight Inborn, and Lu Yuan dispatched five Inborn back. Taking into account the original twenty-one Inborn, the number of Inborn in Yangzhou¡¯s main territory of Chu State had reached a scale of thirty-four. Meanwhile, the invading sea raiders and barbarians into Yangzhou currently numbered around five to six million, with approximately thirty to forty Inborn Grandmasters among them. Nor had either side deployed their full strength yet, so the extent of the war had not reached a fever pitch. However, the Southern Polar Poisonous Fire was rapidly closing in. At the southernmost tip of Jiuzhen county in Yangzhou, traces of the poisonous fires were already visible. The sea raiders and barbarians blocked even further south by Chu State need not be mentioned, as they were already adjacent to the fire, facing the threat of death at any moment. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï In such circumstances, these migrating barbarians were naturally pushed to desperation. According to intelligence sent back by Lu Yuan¡¯s avatar that had returned to the main territory of Yangzhou, since the second half of the year, the number of sea raiders and barbarians invading from the south had been gradually increasing. The growth rate was nearly fifty thousand people per month. In just this short half a year, the number of barbarian troops in the Southwest and Lingnan had swollen from the original three million to the current excess of six million, nearly doubling. Beyond that, though aided by Chu State¡¯s tight defenses and rapid support from the rear, so far, none of the cities and towns in Southwest and Lingnan had fallen. However, in the Lingnan Region, especially in the area of Jiuzhen county, there were already a large number of prefectures and counties abandoned by Chu State, now occupied by those migrating barbarians. These immigrants from the south immediately settled on the land out of Chu State¡¯s control, starting their own production on the spot. Even though there were troops stationed in Chu State¡¯s strongholds within Jiuzhen county, they could only manage self-defense against the barbarian migration tide numbering in the millions. So much so that Chu State¡¯s strongholds in Jiuzhen county were now encompassed by vast numbers of invading barbarian troops and were blocked within their walls, unable to even exit through the city gates. Not only in Jiuzhen county, In other areas of Lingnan and even in some regions of the Southwest, a large number of barbarians had infiltrated, settling in various areas abandoned by Chu State. As for how many prefectures and counties have been settled by barbarians, the Chu armies on both sides were unclear. There were simply too many barbarians. The Chu armies in Southwest Lingnan could only control the areas near the cities they occupied, with a radiating range of merely one or two prefectures at most. Beyond a distance of one or two prefectures, they would be outside the sight and safety of Chu State¡¯s control, completely beyond their grasp. And given the fact that in Southwest and Lingnan regions, there were at most only two strongholds per county, the coverage area of each county was at most three or four prefectures. Which means, within these two regions, Chu¡¯s army could only guarantee the safety of three to four prefectures within a county; the remaining areas were out of control. Once areas were out of control, given the current situation, they were essentially conceded to be under barbarian control. Thus, in a single county of the Southern Border, the present situation was that Chu State controlled one-third of the territory, while sea raiders and barbarians controlled two-thirds. The gap between the strengths of both sides had become significantly pronounced. What was more worrisome was, Chapter 1141 - Chapter 1141 Chapter 460 Zone Adjustment_2 ?Chapter 1141: Chapter 460 Zone Adjustment_2 Chapter 1141: Chapter 460 Zone Adjustment_2 The nomads who migrated northward took over the territory that Chu State had developed for thirty years, but even with their cultural and technological level, it was difficult for them to utilize it all. However, simply relying on the basic water conservancy facilities, these people could ensure a good harvest just by scattering seeds in the fields. With just a bit of attention to farming, they could easily sustain tens of millions of people. With grain secured, these Barbarians then put down roots in the territory of Yangzhou. In time, using this as a base, they would gradually encroach upon the land, and I fear it would take less than ten years for the entire southwest and Lingnan to be lost. Even the prefectures and counties at the heart of Yangzhou would suffer from infiltration, invaded by those Barbarians. When that time came, the spectacle of the Southern Barbarians moving north would reach its most climactic chapter. ¡°Although it will take me at most three years to unify Central State and pacify the various countries, these Barbarians are only just getting established in the territories of the southwest and Lingnan Region. If I were to mobilize the force of the whole world against them, they would have no chance of resistance. But their growing strength year by year, and their infiltration into Yangzhou, are very real and cannot be ignored. I do not wish to overlook this issue due to complacency and regret it when it¡¯s too late. Therefore, to be safe, it is indeed necessary to make some arrangements for the Southern Border.¡± Lu Yuan pondered in his heart, considering methods to break the situation. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? Next year, the fourth Northern Expedition will begin, and although I have just finished reorganizing and absorbing prisoners of war, selecting 1.2 million elite soldiers from over five million captives and incorporating them into the ranks of the Forbidden Army, it greatly increased the available military force at my disposal. But these troops are intended for next year¡¯s Northern Expedition and have already been assigned, so they cannot be redeployed. Now, after completing the reorganization of prisoners this winter and in light of the current situation, Lu Yuan has made some adjustments to the various military expeditions. Among them, the armies of the four northern expeditions, the Yongzhou Camp with 800,000 soldiers and ten Inborn, remain unchanged in composition, with Camp Commander Huang Xin. This camp¡¯s primary objective remains to guard against the Western region foreign tribes to the west and to lure the Yanzhou Barbarians to the north, securing the western frontier of Chu State. The newly established Jizhou Army consists of 200,000 soldiers with a total of five Inborns, under Camp Commander Huang Lin. This army is based in Ji Province, with its main task being to threaten and control Xu State from the western side, ensuring the safety of Chu State¡¯s northern border. In addition, similar to the Yongzhou Camp, it is responsible for luring Barbarians from Yan State, which it borders. Then there is the Xu State Camp centered around Le Ling City. This army originally consisted of 600,000 soldiers and ten Inborns. But with Huang Lin controlling Ji Province and able to threaten Xu State from the west, a large amount of Xu State¡¯s military force has been tied down in this region. To ensure domestic security, Xu State, facing the incursion of Chu¡¯s Jizhou Army that had crossed the great river into the northern lands, had to station a substantial number of troops in its western country to defend against Chu¡¯s aggression. Under such circumstances, the military force available to Xu State along the southern border of the great river was significantly reduced. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï Now within Xu State, after the end of the war and constrained by the lack of food and fodder, the country maintains a military force of around 600,000. One hundred thousand are stationed internally to maintain order. Three hundred thousand are deployed on the western frontier to guard against Jizhou Army. And the remaining two hundred thousand are positioned on the southern frontier, confronting Chu¡¯s Xu State Camp across the river. Two hundred thousand soldiers naturally pose little threat to Chu¡¯s Xu State Camp. The pressure on Chu¡¯s northern border in Qingzhou was greatly reduced in an instant due to the emergence of the Jizhou Army. Therefore, in light of this situation, Lu Yuan naturally made adjustments to the Xu State Camp, which originally bore the brunt of resisting the entire Xu State. The Xu State Camp¡¯s force of 600,000 was downsized to 300,000, with Dongping, Le¡¯an, and Qingping, each hosting 100,000 soldiers. The number of Inborn Grandmasters in the army was reduced to four, with one allocated to each prefecture and Camp Commander Qingyangzi reinforced alone to Leling City in Le¡¯an Prefecture. Thus, 300,000 soldiers and four Inborns made up Chu¡¯s main force for confronting Xu State in the northern border of Qingzhou. It may seem a bit meager. But considering that in the three prefectures of Le¡¯an, there are also 90,000 prefectural and county soldiers and three Inborn Grandmasters, who can mobilize a large number of local militias and recruit civilian forces into the army, when calculated carefully, the defense forces at Qingzhou¡¯s northern border are actually not weak, especially with the support of Ji Province¡¯s army to the north. At the very least, even with Xu State¡¯s full mobilization, it would be difficult to shake the pincer attack from the western and southern armies. The threat from Xu State Camp can almost be managed like this. These three great camps: Yongzhou Camp, Jizhou Army, and Xu State Camp constitute Chu State¡¯s border defense forces in Central State. Altogether, they utilize 1.3 million of Chu¡¯s soldiers, and nineteen Inborns. Beyond these three camps, excluding the prefectural and county soldiers that have been assigned to local defense forces, and after replenishing the elite from those who surrendered, Lu Yuan still has 5.37 million soldiers in the Forbidden Army and eighty-six Inborn Grandmasters. However, last year Chu State lured Barbarians, gaining six Inborns from Yan State and Ji Province, with the fall of Zhao State, one Zhao Inborn joined, ten Liang Inborns surrendered with the collapse of Liang State, and with Xu State¡¯s withdrawal to the north, seven Xu Inborns surrendered. Haiyun Pavilion¡¯s submission also brought six more Inborns. Thus, last year alone, in the northern lands of Central State, Chu State gained thirty new Inborn Grandmasters. Chapter 1142 - Chapter 1142 Chapter 460 Zone Adjustment_3 ?Chapter 1142: Chapter 460 Zone Adjustment_3 Chapter 1142: Chapter 460 Zone Adjustment_3 With these people included, Lu Yuan had as many as one hundred and sixteen Inborn Grandmasters directly under his command. Beyond that, in the twenty-three prefectures of Chu State¡¯s Central Province, each one now had an Inborn Grandmaster serving as the commandant, with ten thousand county soldiers, prefecture troops, and county troops at all three levelsa€¡±prefectures, counties, and townshipsa€¡±already in place. These local forces, added together, amounted to twenty-three Inborn Grandmasters and six hundred and ninety thousand regular local troops. However, the Central Province had just been settled, and everywhere there were the remnants of the enemy nations that Chu had vanquished, and with the continuous relocation of native Chu population, conflicts between immigrants and locals were erupting often. Therefore, these local troops could essentially only be used to maintain local order. Unless necessary, Lu Yuan would not call them up to participate in foreign wars. Interior affairs to the county soldiers, exterior encounters to the Forbidden army. This had been the state policy since the establishment of Changsha, and it had been in effect for almost fifty years. Lu Yuan had no intention of contravening it, nor was Chu State pushed to that extent. Thus, these local forces were mainly to be used for stabilizing Chu State¡¯s current territories in Central Province and would not partake in foreign wars. The Northern Expedition next year against Yuzhou would only require five million troops and one hundred Inborn Grandmasters. ¡°I now have five million three hundred and seventy thousand troops and one hundred and sixteen Inborns,¡± Lu Yuan thought. ¡°This already suffices to meet the needs of the four Northern Expeditions, even somewhat exceeding them. Therefore, from these troops, I can aptly reassign some for use elsewhere.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï ¡°Four Northern Expeditions will be enough with five million troops. The excess thirty-seven thousand troops are perfectly suited for serving as the coastal defense forces along the forty thousand li coastline of Central Province. Those East Sea pirates have become increasingly rampant these days. Constantly harassing the coastal borders of my Central Province, they must be contained. It¡¯s time to propose the establishment of the coastal Military Expedition.¡± Although relying on thirty-seven thousand men to defend a coast stretching over forty thousand li is admittedly a stretch, even full of holes. But considering that Chu State has already established a complete system of county soldiers in the localities and every prefecture in Central Province also has Inborn Grandmasters stationed there, With these local troops and the forthcoming Civil Group Volunteers system in place, coupled with the main forces of the Forbidden army in the Military Expedition en route by sea, a comprehensive coastal defense network can barely be organized. Completely eradicating the threat of East Sea pirates is unrealistic, But to dampen the opponent¡¯s brazenness and protect coastal safety, to prevent pirates from infiltrating the hinterland, this network should suffice. At present, Chu State is still on the path of unifying the world, devoting a great deal of effort to the unification cause, with no time to attend to other matters. Being able to cope with the threat of the sea pirates is already nearly enough. To fully resolve the issue, we¡¯ll have to wait until the entire Central Province is united before we can consider further actions.¡± ¡°So that¡¯s settled. For the establishment of the coastal Military Expedition, we¡¯ll provisionally set the number of troops at thirty-seven thousand. Ten Inborn Grandmasters will be allocated, which is just right since each of the nine coastal prefectures controlled by Great Chu will get one person. The remaining Inborn Grandmaster, as the Camp Commander, will be Huang Xuan. He himself will be responsible for coordinating overall, mobilizing forces from various prefectures and camps along the coast, and striking at pirates as needed. With these in place, for the time being, the East Sea frontier should be fine.¡± Having made this arrangement, Lu Yuan temporarily set aside his concerns about the threats at sea in Central Province. He then shifted his thoughts to Yangzhou¡¯s main territory that he had been contemplating earlier. The arrangements for Central Province were completed. Adjustments for Yangzhou, however, also needed to be made. ¡°First, the southwestern defense line at the very southern end of Lingnan.¡± Lu Yuan looked at the map of Yangzhou, at the southern position almost occupying half of Yangzhou in the southwest and Lingnan region, and he couldn¡¯t help but ponder. Today, in the southwest and Lingnan areas, apart from the few locals intentionally left to farm and supply the local garrisons, Most of the residents had been relocated to Central Province over the past two years and were now settled and had begun regular production. So, these two large areas were essentially military outposts, void of ordinary civilians. Initially, Lu Yuan had established two lines of defense there: one was intended as a barrier to block the invasion and infiltration of sea pirates and barbarians, And the second was to continue to occupy the area to gain territorial Qi Luck in name. But now. The first objective was semi-ruined due to the extensive infiltration of barbarians that the local defense lines were unfeasible to prevent and clear effectively. The second objective, too, diminished considerably following the barbarians filling the regions abandoned by Chu, reducing the Qi Luck provided by nominal territorial control. The Qi Luck now provided was only the original less than thirty percent, hardly worth mentioning. ¡°Since serving as a buffer zone defense line and offering Qi Luck are nearly half ineffective at present, It¡¯s time to abandon some areas in the southwest and Lingnan region.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s finger traced on the map, and eventually, he marked the southwest region including Nanzhao Country¡¯s former territories, Dali Country¡¯s former territories, Jianchuan, Chilih, and Kunhai¡¯s former three-nation regions, and in the Lingnan region, Jiuzhen, Yulin, and Through Sea¡¯s three prefectures, with Song Country¡¯s former territories. All the territories of these eight prefectures were heavily struck off by him, completely severed. ¡°These regions are all too far away from Great Chu¡¯s core areas in Yangzhou¡¯s main territory, For instance, places like Jiuzhen and Dali are four to five thousand li away from the capital Baling, difficult to communicate, hard to support. To continue defending, besides depleting military strength and consuming money and grains, it¡¯s utterly pointless. It¡¯s time to give up on them.¡± Lu Yuan decided to abandon the aforementioned areas and then retract the defense line, deploying troops pulled from the frontlines to places closer to the homeland and with more accessible and straightforward resources. Just this year, the relocation of the populace in Jianan and Qianzhong, two prefectures on the main territory, was almost complete. The two regions had been emptied, perfect for the troops retreating from the front to be stationed and defend, establishing a new defense line. These two prefectures not only lie close to the heartland of Chu and benefit from easy support from the rear, But they are also mountainous with many strategic points, making defense easier. A substantial number of Chu troops would be concentrated here. Compared to the previous situation where they were thinly spread everywhere, eager for coverage in every place resulting in a sieve-like situation, this new approach was infinitely better. So it was decided. Chapter 1143 - Chapter 1143 Chapter 461 The Fourth Northern Expedition ?Chapter 1143: Chapter 461: The Fourth Northern Expedition Chapter 1143: Chapter 461: The Fourth Northern Expedition As for the contraction of the defense zone in the homeland, Lu Yuan had been contemplating this idea since he had drawn troops from the Yuzhou Camp back to the homeland for reinforcement. But previously, he was preoccupied with the Northern Expedition and temporarily had no time to attend to this, only able to conceive plans in his mind and slowly make preparations. Now that the Northern Expedition had ended and the winter season for recuperation had arrived, he finally had some free time to make adjustments and handle the situation. The abandonment of the territories of the eight prefectures in the southwest and Lingnan was just the first step. By consolidating the above-mentioned regions, Chu State could potentially save about 1.15 million county soldiers, as well as 4.6 million people working on military agricultural colonies, and seven Inborn Grandmasters. Of course, these were theoretical figures. When defenses were initially established, in the southwest and Lingnan areas, Chu State indeed had that many troops. But now, it was already the third year of Chu State¡¯s Northern Expedition. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï After so much time had passed, the Barbarian and sea raiders invaded incessantly, especially fiercely this year. After so many wars, the troops and residents in the military agricultural colonies of the two defense zones, how much remained was really a question. Even Lu Yuan did not know the specific troop strength on the southern front at this time. In the cities in the south, the defending Inborn Grandmasters were ordinary Inborns cultivated and subdued by Chu State, apart from one Avatar newly transferred back from the Yuzhou Expeditionary Camp this year, there were no other Avatars of his. In such circumstances, the situation Chu State faced on the southern battlefield was actually similar to the situation Xu, Liang, and other states faced when confronting Chu State previously. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?0 They were blind, figuratively in the dark. So, though there were creatures like semi-Divine Blood Variants such as the wind eagles, timely communication with the front line was still exceedingly difficult. Not to mention obtaining real-time updates on the situation of various cities and clarifying their specific troop and supplies status. This was undoubtedly very dangerous. Because under such circumstances, Chu State in the southwest and Lingnan War Zones could experience what Xu State did in Shouzhang City before. Regarding whether that city still held out or had fallen to Chu¡¯s forces, there was complete ignorance. Even Lu Yuan, at this moment, could not ensure that the cities and strongholds in the two southern War Zones still remained in Chu State¡¯s hands. The situation had already turned grave. And it was precisely because of this that he had the thought to contract the defense line and move the defense region further back. ¡°This year, we already evacuated the people from Qianzhong and Jian¡¯an counties, as well as the southern parts of Yuzhang and Dongting counties. Thus, by next year, we shall begin evacuating the people of Hegu and Xichuan counties. These two western counties together have about twelve million people, just right for the third wave of relocations.¡± Compared to Linhai, Yuzhang, Dongting, and Xiangyang, which were only separated from Central State by a river, Hegu and Xichuan counties, which were further west, had evidently become the weakest links in Chun State¡¯s control within its main territory. Moreover, Hegu County was remote, situated on the highlands with barren land and a scant population to begin with; it really wasn¡¯t worth continuing to hold onto. Though Xichuan County boasted the Xichuan Plain, which produced bountiful grain and had a dense population of over ten million, it was a genuinely important source of finances and food. But the same problem persisted. Being on the border of the western frontier was Xichuan County¡¯s biggest weakness. After giving up on the vast area in the southwest, the significance of Xichuan County as a key rear position for that region diminished greatly as there was no longer a field of use for the food and supplies it produced. And without supplying the southwest, it was difficult for the food production of Xichuan County to traverse the surrounding mountains and be transported elsewhere. Apart from the water route directly to Dongting, which was relatively convenient, the other roads leading out of Xichuan County to the outside world were considerably difficult to travel. If supplies couldn¡¯t be transported out, and Xichuan County itself couldn¡¯t use up so much, then the massive production of grain and money would be wasted. Furthermore, being off to the side and far from the central government was another drawback. Thus, there wasn¡¯t much value in retaining Xichuan County. Therefore, this time, Lu Yuan was prepared to target Xichuan County as well for abandonment. ¡°Once the people from Hegu and Xichuan counties are relocated, the troops that were withdrawn from the southwest can directly be stationed in Xichuan County. Using Xichuan County as the core, we can secure the defenses south of Hanzhong and west of Dongting, establishing a western defense line. Then, taking Qianzhong County as the core, we can build a southwestern defense line that guarantees protection west of Dongting. Next, with South Sea Prefecture as the core, we can construct a southern defense line that safeguards the south of Dongting and Yuzhang. Finally, with Jianan County as the core, we can create a southeastern defense line that protects Yuzhang and Linhai. These four counties, with their four lines of defense, if managed well, can form a new defensive iron curtain, firmly blocking the invading Barbarians and sea raiders at the southern border of our homeland.¡± Lu Yuan was planning the defense strategy for Yangzhou¡¯s main territory. The four counties and four lines of defense were the new buffer zone he had prepared for the homeland. ¡°Now that the defensive region has shrunk from the original territory of nine counties to the current territory of four counties, the original stipulation of having two defensive strongholds per county can be appropriately relaxed to increase and station additional cities.¡± The greatest fatal factor in the Barbarians moving north and infiltrating the southwest Lingnan defense lines was due to too few defense strongholds per county in Chu¡¯s army, which couldn¡¯t cover the whole county and gave the enemy a chance to infiltrate. Now that the defensive territory has instantly contracted to less than half of the original area, unknowingly conserving substantial defensive forces, troops become instantly abundant. Thus it¡¯s also time now to strengthen the defense in the above four counties and the need for stationed cities and strongholds.¡± Chapter 1144 - Chapter 1144 Chapter 461 The Fourth Northern Expedition_2 ?Chapter 1144: Chapter 461: The Fourth Northern Expedition_2 Chapter 1144: Chapter 461: The Fourth Northern Expedition_2 ¡°Based on the limit that one city can only cover two prefectures at most, If I want to completely defend a county, one defense line would require at least five cities to be garrisoned. Only then can we ensure it won¡¯t be infiltrated by the Barbarians. But in reality, all I actually need to do is ensure that among the four defense lines, the area close to the hinterland is secured, preventing the Barbarians from crossing that region and infiltrating the rear. Among the four defense lines, those areas that are not adjacent to the rear can actually be somewhat abandoned. Just like Xu State previously, in order to block my forces, only stationed troops in Dongping County¡¯s central and southern cities, Xichang and Shouzhang, which covered only half the county¡¯s area, was enough to stop my central military expedition from advancing further east. With this line of thinking, for the four defense lines on home soil, each county only actually needs two to three strongholds, which is enough to control and cover the entire defensive region and ensure the safety of the homeland.¡± Lu Yuan, smoothing out his thoughts, slowly looked over the homeland map, and eventually marked red dots in three regions of Xichuan County close to Hanzhong County, close to Dongting County, and close to the Yangtze River waterway. For Qianzhong County, three red dots were marked on the two major cities on the east side close to Dongting County, as well as the county city. In South Sea Prefecture, three red dots were marked in the regions close to Dongting and Yuzhang prefectures, as well as the prefecture city of Nanhai City. Jian¡¯an County was the same, marking three red dots in regions close to Yuzhang and Linhai prefectures and the county city. So, for the entire defense line of the four prefectures, each prefecture has three cities to defend, making a total of twelve strongholds, which is enough to cover half the area of a county. ¡°Now we only need to defend twelve cities. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 With the military force we have at home, once we pull back the troops from the front line, We can ensure that each city has a garrison of one hundred thousand troops, and we can deploy an Inborn Grandmaster in each city.¡± Lu Yuan wrote down the troop deployment on the map, then looked at his plans, nodding with satisfaction, ¡°This way, with only one million and two hundred thousand troops and twelve Inborns, we can meet the basic defense needs of the four defensive regions. The remaining several hundred thousand troops can be deployed along the maritime defense lines of Guangling and Linhai prefectures to intercept pirates coming ashore, safeguarding our maritime borders. Or they can be reserved in the capital Baling for emergencies. However, to be on the safe side, the Inborn Grandmasters in these defense regions can be further strengthened. At home, there are already thirty-four Inborns. On my side, excluding the one hundred needed for next year¡¯s Northern Expedition, I happen to have six extra, which can just support the homeland. So the number of Inborns at home can reach a total of forty. Of these forty, ten can be deployed to Linhai and Guangling prefectures to deal with the pirates landing ashore. Six can be stationed in the capital Baling as a mobile force, ready to assist all places at any time. The remaining twenty-four can be evenly distributed to each city in the four defensive regions, ensuring that each has two Inborn Grandmasters. With one hundred thousand troops in a city, two Inborn Grandmasters, and about four hundred thousand settling civilians surrounding the city, who can also provide between fifty and eighty thousand Civil Group Volunteers, This power, as long as each defense line is somewhat secure, each stronghold within the county supports each other, and the rear is ready to assist at any time, is enough to guarantee the safety of the homeland.¡± After a thorough adjustment, Lu Yuan had no more doubts about his plans in the homeland, and he completely let go of his concerns. The current adjustments actually only meet the current needs. He was well aware that with the changing situation, that is, those Barbarian pirates gradually taking over the territory Chu State withdrew from, The threat they could pose once they were established on these lands would far exceed what it was now. At this moment, these Barbarians in the south, limited by logistical constraints, can only deploy five or six million troops in the southwest region of Lingnan. But if they were to take root there, then forty to fifty million Barbarian pirates coming ashore, with ample food and supplies, the troops they could mobilize later would be more than ten million. Of course, these are just theoretical numbers. In actuality, to mobilize an army of ten million, without a decade¡¯s worth of accumulation, is unthinkable. The most likely scenario for those Barbarians is to continue with four to five million troops and engage in warfare with Chu. This is the normal scale of sustained warfare that they, given their capacity, can support. Right now, those Barbarians, who can mobilize four to five million people, are in a desperate phase, which is unsustainable. But if they were to occupy the southwest and Lingnan regions abandoned by Chu State, which spanned eight prefectures, with the original foundation of Chu infrastructure, they could support thirty million people. If they lived a little tighter, supporting forty to fifty million people wouldn¡¯t be too difficult. And as long as they can sustain the entire Barbarian population, with a few years of additional cultivation and accumulation, they could then rely on these underlying strengths to engage in long-term warfare with Chu, deploying four to five million troops. Chu State¡¯s current withdrawal from the southwest and Lingnan indeed provides significant relief for border pressures. But this is trading space for time, using the cession of territories to temporarily satisfy the Barbarians and achieve a momentary stability. In the long run, it is undoubtedly fraught with endless troubles.¡± ¡°However, if we put aside Yangzhou for the moment and look to the long term, that is, the entire Nine Provinces of the world, Giving up the impoverished southwest and Lingnan to gain three to five years of stability, allowing time to smoothly manage the whole of Central State, This is undoubtedly a very profitable deal.¡± Lu Yuan had his own calculation in mind, ¡°As long as the four Northern Expeditions succeed and we conquer Yuzhang, not only will Great Chu gain the land of ten prefectures, but our population will also increase by thirty to forty million.¡± Chapter 1145 - Chapter 1145 Chapter 461 The Fourth Northern Expedition_3 ?Chapter 1145: Chapter 461: The Fourth Northern Expedition_3 Chapter 1145: Chapter 461: The Fourth Northern Expedition_3 This harvest is far more valuable than the mere trifle of Lingnan and the southwest. With Central State firmly under control, states like Xu, Tang, and Xu, after their devastating defeats, can only shrink back to their northern homelands and, relying on the natural moat of the great river, gasp for survival there. I only need to deploy a defense line along the river, and with one or two million people, I can ensure the security of the entire northern border of Central State. By then, following the Northern Expedition, at least three million men from Central State will be ready to rush back to the homeland to participate in the war against the southern Barbarians. To accomplish all of the above, at the fastest, it would take two years, and at the latest, three years to complete the arrangements. This period of time will be just enough for those Barbarians to have just gotten their footing in the south and achieved self-sufficiency in grain. With such strength, how could they possibly withstand my elite troops sweeping through the Nine Provinces? Lu Yuan is still very confident in the strength of his troops. In a place like Central State crowded with formidable enemies, the Chu army has been able to conquer the world, causing all nations to fall into disarray and defeat. How could the Barbarians, who have lost everything like homeless dogs and have no foundation, be considered a match for the Chu army, no matter how highly one thinks of them? Not to mention. After unifying Central State, the Chu State far surpasses the southern Barbarians in terms of the overwhelming quantity of Inborn Grandmasters. With just top-tier strength alone, the opponent¡¯s three to forty Inborn Grandmasters are no match for Chu State. This is a gap in national power, a force amassed by Chu over tens of years after sweeping across the world. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï It¡¯s not something that the Barbarians, who have been amassing power like nouveau riche by merging tribes and nations along their exile journey, can compare with. The matter of Yangzhou is pretty much settled like this. ¡­ After making plans for Yangzhou, Lu Yuan began personnel deployment. Huang Xuan assumed his position atop his horse and with the allocated staff and troops began preparations for the new maritime expedition. The six Inborn Grandmasters assigned to Yangzhou also set off for the south upon receiving their orders. With the strength of Inborn Grandmasters, although the winter snow is difficult to bear, it is not unbearable. It is still possible to travel through the wind and snow. Therefore, by the beginning of December, the six avatars that Lu Yuan specially called upon for timely communication with the homeland had already arrived in Baling City. Over in Qingzhou. The direct five million troops under Lu Yuan also began to move towards the border close to Yuzhou in the east, taking advantage of the slightly better weather and the pause in the snowfall. The majority of the hundred-plus Inborn Grandmasters needed for transfer had also arrived in advance at the border of Qing and Yu states or the southern part of Chu-controlled Yuzhou, positioning themselves early. For the fourth Northern Expedition next year, preparations have already begun on the Chu side. And naturally, this significant activity could not be hidden from the states of Yuzhou. Chu State had no intention to conceal it. After all, the annual Northern Expedition has become routine, and even if they did not mention it, the Four Kingdoms would still be on guard. So. As expected, after sensing the movement of Chu State. The Four Kingdoms of Yuzhou, already in alliance, immediately became tense. To prepare for the invasion of Chu State, they too began to recruit soldiers, mobilize personnel, gather supplies, and fortify city defenses, preparing for the Great War of the coming year. At the same time, some sent messengers to Xu State, hoping to seek aid from this potential ally who had previously mediated among the four of them. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï However, according to the spies Chu State had within the Xu court, Xu State flatly rejected the Four Kingdoms¡¯ appeal for help. This year, Xu State had just suffered a horrendous defeat, losing almost all of their national fortunes. Moreover, due to this unprecedented defeat, a fear of Chu has arisen within Xu State. From the low-level populace and army soldiers to the nobles, generals, and royal kin, there is a widespread fear of Chu State among the people of Xu. In their current state of dire defeat, with greatly diminished strength and a prevailing sense of fear, Xu State truly does not have the excess strength nor the will to engage in another battle with Chu State. Moreover, with Chu State¡¯s expansion into Ji Province, Xu is under great pressure. They are deeply afraid that the Ji Province Army is merely a forward post. When spring comes next year, Chu State could reinforce its Jizhou Army and then exploit the situation to invade the Xu homeland, completely annihilating Xu State. This is not an impossibility. Thus, with their own homeland under threat, Xu State hardly has the ability to spare any effort to help others. The hopes of the Four Kingdoms for Xu State to send troops are destined to be a futile dream. Chu State¡¯s fourth Northern Expedition next year will have to be resisted by them alone. Just as it was this year, when Xu State shouldered the full brunt of Chu State¡¯s might. Xu was unable to hold, and thus lost the entirety of Qingzhou, retreating back to its old home in Xuzhou. Although the Four Kingdoms Alliance is slightly stronger than Xu, whether they can withstand the forthcoming challenge will have to be seen on the battlefield. However, the current situation shows that they clearly lack confidence; otherwise, they would not seek help from Xu State, which has already suffered a miserable defeat. They might not be aware that Xu, having been so gravely beaten, even if willing to send troops, how much vigor could they possibly have left to help them? The situation is akin to making desperate measures in times of crisis. This winter of the forty-third year of Shenwu, in an atmosphere of peace and tranquility yet tinged with a smell of gunpowder, was spent in a state of nervous unease. Time flowed slowly, arriving at the forty-fourth year of Shenwu. In February, the beginning of spring, when all living things were reviving, and vitality was bursting forth. Just as the creatures that had hibernated for the winter were emerging from their burrows, barely having time to celebrate the arrival of spring, the earth was once again enveloped in the clamor of war. In the forty-fourth year of Shenwu, on the third day of the second month. Emperor Chu Luyuan ascended the altar in the grand capital to pray to the heavens, once again declaring the launch of the fourth Northern Expedition to subjugate Yuzhou. In the same month, after receiving the news, the Four Kingdoms of Yuzhou also held an alliance meeting in Yuzhou. Blood was sworn in kinship between the emperors of the Four Kingdoms, and they announced the formation of a United Army, to jointly resist the tyranny of Chu. The Great War between Chu State and the Four Kingdoms of Yuzhou officially began under the gaze of the entire world. Everyone was clear that the outcome of this battle would determine the fate of Central State. If Chu conquered, then Central State would be unified, and the Nine Provinces would all submit. If the Four Kingdoms prevailed, the world would be split in two, paving the way for endless chaos and strife. This decisive Great War, which would determine the destiny of the Nine Provinces, attracted the attention of people all over, all filled with anticipation, waiting for the outcome to unfold. Chapter 1146 - Chapter 1146 Chapter 462 Dividing Forces to Confront ?Chapter 1146: Chapter 462 Dividing Forces to Confront Chapter 1146: Chapter 462 Dividing Forces to Confront Yuzhou, at the border of the Tang, Xu, Zheng, and Jin Four Kingdoms, is Beigucheng. After the alliance meeting concluded, the four emperors gathered in a large living room within the city, sitting opposite each other, each with a solemn expression. ¡°The Chu people have finally come.¡± The Emperor of Zheng Kingdom had a worried look, his eyes showing thick fear that couldn¡¯t be concealed. Among the four nations, Zheng Kingdom was the weakest in strength and also bordered the largest area with Chu State. If one were to discuss whom the Northern Expedition of Chu State would threaten most, it would undoubtedly be Zheng Kingdom. With such a dire situation at hand, how could the Emperor of Zheng Kingdom not worry? ¡°The Chu scoundrels have already occupied the entire Qingzhou, and the southern part of Yuzhou is also under their control. In the whole Central State, two-thirds already belong to them. Their next target must be to capture Yuzhou and take full control of Central State. Them sending troops now had been anticipated. Aren¡¯t our four countries allied to deal with this very situation?¡± The newly crowned Emperor of Tang Kingdom spoke indifferently, glancing at the three others who, not long ago, were adversaries. Although Tang Kingdom had made peace with the three nations, they had fought for the past two years, causing the deaths of millions. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï To say there were no hard feelings would be an outright lie. Now, facing such a formidable enemy as Chu State, Tang Kingdom had no choice but to seek reconciliation in order to survive. But reconciliation and cooperation do not mean love and affection. Towards the three allies, Tang Kingdom still harbored doubts and suspicions. A sense of alertness had already surfaced in the hearts of all Tang people at the start of the alliance. Can these allies be trusted? Will they betray me? If they do betray me, how should I respond? How much effort should I put into resisting Chu State this time? These questions had been debated countless times within the Tang Kingdom¡¯s court. Regarding these issues, countless countermeasures had been studied. Now was the time to apply them. ¡°The focus isn¡¯t on whether Chu State will come or not, they have already arrived, and that can¡¯t be changed. What we need to discuss now is how to counter Chu State?¡± Emperor Jin smacked the table in annoyance, looking tense: ¡°The Chu army claims to have ten million soldiers, with three hundred Inborn warriors. Such a number is nearly equivalent to the entire population of Jin Country. Now, to confront an army of this scale with only the force of Jin Country is impossible. Even for our four nations cooperating, it is an extreme challenge. If we do not come up with a suitable plan now, by the time the Chu army comes and breaks through our cities, our land will be lost, and obliteration of our nations will not be far off.¡± Jin Country, like Zheng Kingdom, was one of the weakest among the four nations. Zheng Kingdom currently had a population of just over six million and a combined force of seven hundred thousand soldiers, with only eleven Inborn Grandmasters. Jin Country, although slightly better off, had a population of just over nine million after years of depletion, with one million soldiers and twelve Inborn Grandmasters. If this were before the chaos in the Nine Provinces, such strength would have sufficed to preserve oneself. But in today¡¯s world, after decades of turmoil in the Nine Provinces where countries have risen from chaos and annexations, a comprehensive military mobilization system and a logistics support system have been established, and the scale of warfare has gradually inflated. The strength of these two countries is merely equivalent to that of a smaller division of Chu State¡¯s military expedition. If faced with a larger theater-level campaign of two to three million soldiers from Chu arriving, it would certainly be enough to annihilate both nations. In such circumstances, how could Jin Country not panic? ¡°Emperor Jin is right. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The urgent task at hand is to quickly discuss how to resist and how to cooperate,¡± said the Emperor of Zheng Kingdom, nodding in agreement, then looking expectantly at the Emperors of Tang and Xu. With the combined strength of Zheng and Jin, they matched that of one Chu military expedition. This strength, even if pushed to the limit, couldn¡¯t withstand Chu State. Thus, to counter Chu State and preserve the dynasties of both nations, the only hope lay with Tang and Xu. These two ¡®big brothers¡¯ behind the scenes were their real reliance. The Emperors of Zheng and Jin Countries were well aware of this, so they did not skimp on their flattery in normal times, hoping that their ¡®big brothers¡¯ would lend them a hand in times of crisis. Now the crisis had arrived, wasn¡¯t it time for the ¡®big brothers¡¯ to step up? ¡°The Chu rogues are cruel and willful, prone to annihilate nations, destroy the Ancestral Temple, and sever lineages. Heaven does not pity us and allows such scoundrels to prevail, causing innocents to suffer and the ¡®Heavenly soldiers and weapons¡¯ to never cease. But for every foot the demon grows, the path of virtue grows a yard. In the world, there are always warriors of justice who cannot tolerate the brutish acts of Chu. We have risen and formed an alliance to counter Chu State, preserving a last refuge for the people of the world.¡± The Emperor of Xu Country, who had been silent until now and exuding an air of an Alliance Leader, spoke righteously: ¡°Chu State mobilizing troops is within expectations, and we need not panic. As previously discussed, we should hold our positions at the strategic passes and fortress gates that have been constructed. Tang Country will maintain a million-strong army to defend its own land in Yuzhou and will also allocate eight hundred thousand soldiers to assist Zheng Country in defending the western part of Yuzhou within its boundaries. The entire western region of Yuzhou will be Tang Country¡¯s responsibility. Zheng and Jin Countries¡¯ forces will primarily defend the southern part of Yuzhou, with both nations responsible for the southern warzone. I will lead an army of one and a half million from Xu Country myself, stationed here at Beigucheng as the reserve for the three armies, ready to assist the battles on either side at any time. If there¡¯s an emergency, we will immediately dispatch reinforcements to help. With the combined efforts of our four countries and the carefully constructed strategic passes and fortifications, what is there to fear from Chu State¡¯s ten million soldiers? We are well able to repel the enemy outside our nation¡¯s gates. Not to mention, they claim to have ten million, but how many there truly are remains to be seen.¡± Chapter 1147 - Chapter 1147 Chapter 462 Dividing Forces to Confront_2 ?Chapter 1147: Chapter 462 Dividing Forces to Confront_2 Chapter 1147: Chapter 462 Dividing Forces to Confront_2 Speaking of this, the Emperor of Xu Country revealed a cold smirk. ¡°Bluffing and exaggerating the scale of military troops is a common tactic used by countries in these chaotic years.¡± He himself had used it many times. Therefore, he judged others by himself. When Chu State claimed to have deployed ten million soldiers and three hundred Inborns, the Emperor of Xu Country simply didn¡¯t believe it. Cutting that number in half would be more like it. No, it should be halved and then halved again to be reasonable. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï ¡°The Emperor of Xu is right, the Chu thieves are just bluffing,¡± agreed the Emperor of Tang Kingdom, nodding earnestly before scoffing, ¡°You and I just had a great war for a year, last year in the Great War, my Great Tang deployed over three million soldiers, and you three nations together nearly had five million. The momentum was indeed grand. But after a year of wartime exhaustion, our treasuries have already been drained.¡± ¡°Now, my Great Tang can only muster half of last year¡¯s forces to contend with the Chu people.¡± ¡°The same goes for you.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï With Chu State¡¯s finances further exhausted this year, the number of soldiers they can deploy must be even fewer, perhaps only five to six million.¡± ¡°While my Tang Kingdom can put forth one point eight million soldiers, Xu Country one point five million, Jin Country one million, and Zheng Kingdom seven hundred thousand.¡± ¡°Together, the four of us sum up to five million troops.¡± ¡°Just in terms of military strength, we are already no weaker than the Chu thieves.¡± ¡°As for the Inborn Grandmasters?¡± ¡°The four of our countries together also have over seventy people, and our strength is certainly not weak.¡± ¡°The Chu thieves claim they have three hundred Inborns, but such a joke is barely worth laughing over.¡± ¡°Even before the Chu Country¡¯s Northern Expedition, it¡¯s questionable whether the entire Nine Provinces had three hundred Inborns.¡± ¡°Chu State has only occupied half of the Nine Provinces, how could they possibly dare to claim they have three hundred Inborns?¡± ¡°Yes, the Chu Emperor himself might truly have Immortal Techniques to create puppet avatars almost as powerful as Inborns.¡± ¡°But I simply do not believe that their capabilities are so limitless that they can endlessly replicate such avatar puppets.¡± ¡°That was something only those lofty Immortals had, in an era when Spiritual Energy was abundant and the great powers of Immortals still existed.¡± ¡°If the Chu Emperor truly had such abilities, he wouldn¡¯t need to resort to creating puppets. He could just use his Immortal Techniques to easily take my life.¡± ¡°Under the might of the Immortals, who would dare to disobey?¡± ¡°Wouldn¡¯t the Nine Provinces have simply submitted, without needing to endure the arduous task of seizing territories and expending countless lives to unify Central State, as they are now?¡± ¡°So, three hundred Inborns is nothing but a bluff.¡± ¡°In my opinion, if the Chu thieves are able to deploy a hundred Inborns this time, it would be their limit.¡± ¡°They might not even have a hundred Inborns.¡± ¡°With over seventy Inborns on our side, plus fortified cities to rely on, as long as we don¡¯t make the rash move of leaving the city to engage in reckless battles and instead defend cautiously, what can the Chu thieves possibly do to us?¡± The Emperor of Tang exuded his long speech, which had one underlying message. That is, Chu State is already at the end of its rope. Though powerful, they cannot penetrate thorough defenses. If they just hold on, endure the last bit of Chu State¡¯s Northern Expedition, they can safely get through this calamity. Once Chu State has depleted its last reserve, while its intrinsic potential might still be great, but to accumulate enough resources to launch another Northern Expedition, it would take at least three to five years, or even a decade of accumulation, something out of the question. And in three to five years, or even ten years time, they would naturally be able to further refine the defense systems of Yuzhou, truly turning the entire Yuzhou into an impenetrable fortress, untouchable by any outsider.¡± ¡°By then, even Xu State, which was nearly destroyed by Chu Country, will have mostly recovered its vitality.¡± ¡°When the time comes, their Four Kingdoms Alliance might just become a Five Kingdoms Alliance.¡± ¡°With Xu State¡¯s support, their military alliance¡¯s system will be further strengthened.¡± ¡°At that point, the certainty of standing against Chu Country would naturally be much greater.¡± ¡°All in all, the future is bright, and the prospects are promising.¡± ¡°The people of Chu are doomed to fail.¡± ¡°In the darkness, there must always be some hope and light.¡± At this moment, the Emperor of Tang was infusing a ray of light into the darkness that enveloped the Four Kingdoms Alliance, bringing hope to everyone. Indeed, as he finished speaking, the expressions on the other leaders, particularly the emperors of Zheng and Jin, looked much better. Chapter 1148 - Chapter 1148 Chapter 462 Dividing Forces to Confront_3 ?Chapter 1148: Chapter 462 Dividing Forces to Confront_3 Chapter 1148: Chapter 462 Dividing Forces to Confront_3 ¡°The Emperor of Tang isn¡¯t wrong,¡± Lu Yuan said. Although Chu State looks imposing, it might just be superficially bloateda€¡±intimidating in appearance yet not truly so. On their side, they seem at a disadvantage, with just a corner of Yu State against most of the world. But that¡¯s only on the surface. What they need to confront isn¡¯t the entirety of Chu State, but rather a Chu State that is exhausted and can only muster a fraction of its strength. The alliance of four kingdoms might not be able to defeat the entire Chu State, but to take on a weakened half of Chua€¡±surely that¡¯s manageable? With this thought, their minds became much more settled after a moment¡¯s reflection. ¡°Since none of you have any objections, let¡¯s proceed with the plan as originally decided,¡± the Emperor of Xu State said upon seeing the boosted morale after the Emperor of Tang¡¯s words, nodding with satisfaction. Then he rose, lifted the wine vessel in front of him, and declared, ¡°In unity, we stand against the tyranny of Chu. Gentlemen, empty this cup with me to witness our oath and celebrate the victory in the upcoming Great War.¡± ¡°To victory!¡± The other three emperors stood up and raised their cups to drink in unison. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï With the clinking of cups, the alliance of the four kingdoms of Yu State was officially formed following the Northern Expedition against Chu State, and they began to mobilize. ¡­ Just as Yu State began its urgent preparations, with troops steadily arriving at the front line and settling in various fortresses under the arrangement of Military Officers, the shadows of Chu¡¯s forces also started to slowly close in before this impregnable defense line. Their banners obscured the sun, stretching endless across the fields. Lu Yuan led the main force of his army to Yangxia County. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Being one of the earliest counties in Central State to fall into Chu hands, and the first in Yu State as well, Yangxia County, once an isolated outpost within Yu State with only sea routes for precarious communication with Chu proper, gained direct land access to the territories of Chu in both Yu State and Qingzhou after the Second Northern Expedition breached the east-west passage. Thus, as the bridgehead for Chu¡¯s eastward push into Yu State, Yangxia was naturally given significant attention for development by Chu. Throughout the past year, Chu had relocated two million people here, primarily consisting of Barbarians from Yan State and refugees from Wei Country. This was the policy of Chu. Developing the comparatively undeveloped and less hospitable land of Yu State couldn¡¯t possibly be assigned to the core population of Chu. It was these Barbarians and subjugated enemies who were the primary force tasked with taming these remote regions. However, for these Barbarians and Wei refugees, the chance to settle in the much-desired Central State without the cost of bloody conflict was already a dream too good to be true. Therefore, they didn¡¯t mind the hardships of pioneering new lands. Upon their arrival in Yangxia County last year, these immigrants began their land reclamation based on the existing villages and towns of the local population, gradually expanding and carving out new land for survival. A year later, their efforts were beginning to bear fruit. As Lu Yuan¡¯s army marched on, new immigrant villages emerged along the way, along with patches of freshly cultivated land scattered around these settlements. Though still primitive and wild, a hint of civilization was taking root. With continued perseverance and several more years to a decade of sustained development, and after two or three generations, this place would become a qualified Land of Fish and Rice, a source of wealth and provisions. The vast settled lands over in Qingzhou were developed in exactly this step-by-step fashion. On the Yu State front, they were merely advancing slowly, following the same footsteps. After inspecting the immigration work in Yangxia County and being very satisfied with how the immigrants fit into the local government work, Lu Yuan contentedly returned to the main camp and then convened a military meeting. This expedition aimed to defeat the Four Kingdoms and seize the entire territory of Yu State. A brief patrol of the immigration work was just a side matter. War was the main objective. However, just as with the immigration process, which had to be carried out in batches, under different situations, and using different strategies, so too was this fourth Northern Expedition a matter of great strategical consideration. The estimates from the Four Kingdoms were not wrong; Lu Yuan¡¯s Northern Expedition indeed comprised of five million soldiers and only a hundred Inborn Grandmasters. In terms of overall numbers, they were roughly the same as the enemy had estimated. Compared with the previous three Northern Expeditions, this one¡¯s scale could be considered modest. Therefore, how to effectively utilize this limited military strength to achieve maximum effectiveness became an essential consideration for Chu State. Upon synthesizing reports from the Imperial Secretariat and various intelligence gathered from the Four Kingdoms, Lu Yuan finally decided on a strategy of striking the strong and seizing the weak, focusing on a single direction regardless of the number of fronts. That is, to strike directly at the weakest link among the Four Kingdoms, to eliminate one enemy first, and to achieve a breakthrough on the iron wall defense line they had constructed in Yu State. Then, using that as a base, to expand continuously, and like a rolling snowball, ultimately forming a crushing force against the Four Kingdoms, securing a complete victory in this war. For this purpose, Lu Yuan divided his five million-strong army into four expeditionary forces. One force was the Tang Kingdom campaign, with one million soldiers and ten Inborns, commanded by Huang Yun. The target was to attack the land of Yu State occupied by Tang Kingdom from Qingping County. The main enemy was the million-strong army of the Tang Kingdom mainland. One force was the western campaign, with one million soldiers and ten Inborns, commanded by Huang Qing. The target was to attack the land of Yu State occupied by Zheng Kingdom from Jiaodong County. The main enemy was the eight hundred thousand-strong force sent by Tang Kingdom to assist Zheng Kingdom in its defense. One force was the southern campaign, with one million soldiers and ten Inborns, commanded by Qingyunzi. The target was to attack the land of Yu State held by Jin Country from Xianyun County. The main enemy was all million soldiers of Jin Country. The remaining force was the central main army led by Lu Yuan himself, which comprised two million troops and seventy Inborns. The goal was to simply attack Zheng Kingdom from the south of Yu State, starting from Yangxia County. The main enemy was the seven hundred thousand-strong army of Zheng Kingdom. Indeed, the distribution of these forces was quite straightforward. Lu Yuan used the three diversionary campaigns to contain Tang and Jin Countries. His own main force, on the other hand, was focused on consolidating power, primarily the advanced combat strength represented by the Inborn Grandmasters, to breach Zheng Kingdom¡¯s defensive lines and create a breakthrough, shattering the iron wall of the Four Kingdoms. ¡°I want to see, faced with the strike of my seventy Inborns, what can little Zheng Kingdom muster to resist?¡± On the battlefield at the front, Lu Yuan gazed at the extremely sturdy fortress constructed by Zheng Kingdom, a trace of contempt in his eyes. Then, with a sweeping gesture of his hand, he ordered the attack on the city. Accompanied by the mournful sound of a war horn, the beat of the war drums from the Chu army¡¯s large array resonated like thunder, as wave upon wave of yellow torrents began to close in on the fortress. And within this tide, several Inborn Grandmasters who had already concealed their identities moved with the army. The lethal killing move was already set in motion. If they remained still, all was calm; but once they moved, they were certain to kill. Chapter 1149 - Chapter 1149 Chapter 463 Dimensional Reduction Strike ?Chapter 1149: Chapter 463 Dimensional Reduction Strike Chapter 1149: Chapter 463 Dimensional Reduction Strike Fact proved that facing Lu Yuan¡¯s lethal strike, Zheng Kingdom indeed lacked the strength to resist. With seventy Inborn Martial Artists acting together. The most important fortress in the southern part of Zheng Kingdom, Yubi City, which stood in front of the Chu army in Yangxia County, didn¡¯t even hold for half a day; it fell straight into the hands of the Chu army under a wave of attacks. The two hundred thousand Zheng soldiers in the city simply couldn¡¯t withstand seventy Inborn Martial Artists. Seventy Inborn Grandmasters going all outa€¡±even if one only killed a thousand, that would be seventy thousand people dead. And in fact, the Chu soldiers didn¡¯t even need to lift a finger to help; just the seventy Inborn Grandmasters could clean out the entire Zheng army within Yubi City. Under the extreme capabilities of an Inborn Grandmaster, it¡¯s possible to kill two to three thousand people, or even three to five thousand. The saying that one man can rival an army refers to the Inborn Grandmasters. For the Chu army¡¯s seventy Inborns to take down a city in one day was simply not a problem. Facing this terrifying force, Yubi City couldn¡¯t hold, nor could Zheng Kingdom. Not only did they lose the two hundred thousand-strong army in the city, but even the three Zheng Inborns who acted as defending generals fell on the spot, each surrounded by a dozen opponents of the same level, at the moment the Chu army attacked. Yubi City, the most crucial southern fortress of Zheng Kingdom, fell effortlessly to the Chu army on the very day they launched their attack. It did not offer the slightest resistance. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The Four Kingdoms Alliance¡¯s estimation of the Chu army was indeed rational and correct. However, they overlooked the fact that while the Chu army might not be able to mobilize millions of soldiers due to lack of grain, mobilizing hundreds of Inborns was not a problem. An Inborn Grandmaster, no matter how much he could eat, could at most consume the food of a dozen people. Hundreds of Inborn Grandmasters would only amount to a few thousand people¡¯s worth of food. Chu State may not be able to support tens of millions of soldiers, but it can certainly support hundreds of Inborns. The Four Kingdoms Alliance¡¯s fantasy of opposing Chu¡¯s hundreds of Inborns with their own seventy Inborns faltered right from the start due to a fatal error. That is, the hundred Inborns of Chu and the seventy Inborns of the Four Kingdoms were fundamentally and in terms of strength, on different levels. Moreover, in defense and offense, the latter always holds more mobility, while the former is firmly fixed in position, only rigidly awaiting the enemy¡¯s arrival. Therefore, taking these two points into account, Lu Yuan was able to comfortably use a Detached Army to attract the major focus of the Four Kingdoms, making them afraid to move. He himself, on the other hand, could easily gather his main forces to breach the Four Kingdoms. The fall of Yubi City is the best example of this. And this was just the beginning, not the end. The example of Yubi City would reoccur in other locations, eventually causing the defense lines of the Four Kingdoms to falter one after another until they collapsed. Even more so, Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t afraid of the enemy seeing through his plans. After all, he was on the offensive. Even if the other side realized that Zheng Kingdom was the main direction of attack and then summoned their main forces for support, the true main force of Chu¡¯s Northern Expedition wasn¡¯t those slow-moving ordinary soldiers, but rather the aloof, swift-moving, and immensely powerful Inborn Grandmasters. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï If the main forces of the other countries were indeed drawn to Zheng Kingdom, then Lu Yuan could simply change direction and transfer the Inborn Grandmasters from the central Military Expedition to another. In this manner, dozens of Inborn Grandmasters moving together could still form an absolute advantage on one battlefield, achieving a significant breakthrough. With the power of an Inborn Grandmaster, moving them quickly is simply effortless. In two to three days¡¯ time, it¡¯s enough for an Inborn Grandmaster to traverse a thousand miles and complete a battlefield transfer. At the same time, on the Chu side, each Military Expedition camp had a Lu Yuan Avatar present, allowing any strength change on the enemy side to be immediately detected and communicated on the four Military Expedition battlefields. If the enemy appeared here, an adjustment could be made to another side; convenience was at its utmost. As for the enemy strengthening one side of the battlefield, could that overpower one route of Chu¡¯s Military Expedition and lead to dozens of Inborns launching a surprise attack on a Military Expedition camp? No need to worry about that either. For the other three Military Expeditions divided by Lu Yuan, including the Camp Commanders, all Inborn Grandmasters were his Avatars. And as for Lu Yuan¡¯s Avatars¡­ It is widely known that their strength is comparable to the Second Realm of the Inborn; among Inborn Grandmasters, they are certainly experts. One Avatar taking on three or four First Realm Inborns is no problem as long as it¡¯s for self-preservation. Ten Avatars on one Military Expedition route are enough to confront three to four dozen Inborns of the enemy. Even if the Four Kingdoms engage in Inborn mobility, they need to ensure there are at least ten Inborns at each battlefield to balance against Chu¡¯s top-level combat power and avoid exposing flaws in their defenses. Hence, even if the opponent mobilizes, with forty Inborns used across four battlefields, given the resources of the Four Kingdoms, at most, they could move thirty to cover a wide range on the overall battlefield. Even in reality, the number of people the other side could deploy might only be twenty. But whether it¡¯s thirty or twenty, at most, the Four Kingdoms Alliance could not gather more than forty Inborns on one battlefield. Forty Inborns, against ten Lu Yuan¡¯s avatars, although a formidable opponent, would still be within a manageable range. If a confrontation truly occurred, even facing a siege, one route of the Military Expedition would not be in great danger. And with a bit of luck, Lu Yuan¡¯s avatars might even be able to slay a few of the enemy¡¯s Inborns and gain considerable advantage. An entity capable of Four Qi Condensation, even a casually empowered Dao soldier, isn¡¯t something any ordinary mortal martial artist, who hasn¡¯t even entered the Immortal Sect, could contend against. Chapter 1150 - Chapter 1150 Chapter 463 Dimensional Reduction Strike_2 ?Chapter 1150: Chapter 463 Dimensional Reduction Strike_2 Chapter 1150: Chapter 463 Dimensional Reduction Strike_2 Lu Yuan had ample confidence in the avatar he had strengthened several times over. It was based on this confidence that he formulated a battle plan for the fourth and final Northern Expedition in Yuzhou, which would decide the fate of Central State, focusing on top-tier warriors as the breakthrough force. So far, the plan was progressing smoothly; Yu Bi City had fallen with ease. This first battle of the Northern Expedition had gotten off to a good start. a€| On the 20th day of the second month in the 44th year of the Shenwu era, Chu forces attacked Yu Bi City and captured it in one day, annihilating all two hundred thousand Zheng defenders within the city in a single morning. Three days later, the elite Chu forces surged into the heart of Zheng and besieged Gaoyang Prefecture¡¯s city. Because the arrival of the Chu army was so sudden, Gaoyang barely had time to react. The city only had a little over ten thousand prefectural soldiers and one Inborn warrior, who was extremely weak. In the end, under the joint attack of twenty Chu Inborn warriors, Gaoyang also fell within half a day; the defending commander was killed without being able to hold out for even a day. With the fall of the prefecture city, there were no more significant fortresses in Gaoyang Prefecture to halt the advance of the Chu forces. In just ten short days that followed, as the central military expedition¡¯s forces continued to arrive, various cities throughout Gaoyang Prefecture were breached in succession, rapidly leading to the collapse of the situation. After the Chu forces had seized most of Gaoyang Prefecture, the Tang forces that had been assisting in the defense on the western side were quickly surrounded before they could even react. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À¦Ï.§ã¦Ï A full two hundred and fifty thousand Tang soldiers were trapped within Gaoyang Prefecture, with no hope of escape. And Lu Yuan did not give them a chance to flee. After taking Gaoyang¡¯s city, he immediately led the various Inborn Grandmasters of the central military expedition at a breakneck speed to reinforce the western part of Gaoyang Prefecture. Just as the front-line forces had the Tang forces encircled there, Lu Yuan had already arrived with numerous Inborn warriors. There¡¯s not much to say after that. It was simply a repeat of the battle at Yu Bi City, with the Inborn Grandmasters as the spearhead and the main forces as the wingsa€¡±once they made their push, the local Tang forces were annihilated. Under the terrifying wave of the Chu¡¯s Inborn, these enemies couldn¡¯t mount any resistance at all and collapsed outright. This was the terrifying power of top-tier warriors in a world beyond the ordinary. In the first three Northern Expeditions, Lu Yuan¡¯s front had been stretched too wide, spanning tens of thousands of miles, facing too many enemies, having to deal with three or four hostile nations simultaneously. Accordingly, during those expeditions, the strength of Chu¡¯s forces was not concentrated but dispersed across various battlefronts, with each military expedition having only a few or a dozen Inborn warriors, unable to form a united front. However, by now, with the northern lands of Central State cleared of powerful enemies one by one, Chu had unified most of Central State. The only enemies left were the four kingdoms of Yuzhou. At this time, Chu only had to face one enemy, and the battlefield was confined to a single location. The strength that had been separated among avatars was now concentrated, capable of mobilizing hundreds of Inborns at once, and able to deploy dozens of them flexiblya€¡±the terrifying power of the Inborn after their consolidation became evident. Before this force, without any Cultivators to intervene, indeed no one could stand as a match. From the current state of the battle, the four kingdoms of Yuzhou were clearly no match for Chu¡¯s forces. Under the onslaught of the Inborn, the entire Gaoyang Prefecture, along with its five hundred thousand Zheng and Tang forces, only held out for half a month before they were completely conquered. Having captured Gaoyang Prefecture, Lu Yuan did not stop his advance. However, his direction of attack was not towards Pingchang Prefecture to the east of Gaoyang, which was the capital of Zheng, but that was not the main target of Chu¡¯s forces. Zheng had already been crippled. Relying solely on Zheng¡¯s power, they were no match for Chu, not even capable of defeating a single Chu military expedition. To such an enemy, Lu Yuan did not even give a second thought. Furthermore, now that Gaoyang Prefecture had been rapidly conquered and five hundred thousand soldiers vanished into thin air, the news would spread, and the entire Zheng would become terrified. By then, instead of taking the initiative to attack and fight Chu¡¯s army, they would likely be scared out of their wits, scrambling to gather troops and horses, and desperately holding out in Zhuxu City without daring to venture a step beyond its walls. And with Zheng¡¯s strength in Pingchang Prefecture, amounting to only four or five hundred thousand soldiers, such forces are insufficient even for defense, let alone daring to actively engage Chu¡¯s army. Therefore, all things considered, Zheng now lacked the power to confront Chu, the courage, and the opportunity as well. Chu need not concern themselves with them, as Zheng would hardly dare provoke them in the face of Chu¡¯s dread-inspiring might demonstrated by their destruction of a prefecture in half a month. The five hundred thousand strong army of Zheng in Pingchang Prefecture and their eight or nine Inborn Grandmasters were essentially negligible. Chu had no need to waste time eradicating them, and Zheng was not worth such effort from Chu. This enemy had become insignificant and could be left until the end, after defeating the true formidable foes, to be dealt with then. By that time, with the powerful enemies vanquished, Zheng alone might even come to surrender without needing Chu to attack. Chu had to conserve their precious energy and time for more pressing matters, striking at more powerful enemies. Like Tang Kingdom. If amongst the four countries of Yuzhou, Zheng was considered the weakest link and hence the easiest to breach, then after breaking through this weak point, the next most valuable target would undoubtedly be Tang Kingdom. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Among the four kingdoms of Yuzhou, Zheng was the weakest, so it was the easiest to subdue, and Chu chose it as the point of breakthrough. Jin Country was next in line, but Jin had concentrated all its forces within just two prefectures, about five hundred thousand troops per prefecture on average, quite formidable, with sufficient defensive forces. Moreover, Jin lay right next to Xu State, especially its capital, Changping City, which was only about five hundred miles from Beigu City, where Xu¡¯s one million reserve forces were stationed. Chapter 1151 - Chapter 1151 Chapter 463 Dimensional Reduction Strike_3 ?Chapter 1151: Chapter 463 Dimensional Reduction Strike_3 Chapter 1151: Chapter 463 Dimensional Reduction Strike_3 ¡°` With even the slightest stir in Changping City, the million-strong Xu army could arrive in an instant. At that time, Chu would have to face not only the Jin-Xu United Army but also the possibility of additional, endless reinforcements coming from Xu. Based on this point, Jin was clearly not a place that could be swiftly dealt with. Therefore, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t set his sights on Jin. After disregarding the Zheng Kingdom, he still had to strike first at that intimately familiar old friend, the Tang Kingdom. Why strike at Tang? Firstly, the Tang territory bordered Chu. Striking the opponent meant that Chu could be better supplied from the rear and avoid the risk of having their retreat cut off. By taking over Tang¡¯s territory, Chu could directly assimilate the benefits, which could be described as maximized. Secondly, Tang¡¯s military forces were too scattered. According to the negotiation amongst the Four Kingdoms, in this resistance against Chu, Tang was to provide an army of 1.8 million. Out of this 1.8 million, 1 million were to remain to guard Tang¡¯s own territory, while the remaining 800,000 were to be sent to the western borders of Zheng to aid in the defense against Chu. And the western border of Zheng was essentially just the western part of Gaoyang County. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Meaning that there should have been 800,000 Tang troops stationed in Gaoyang County to help the Zheng people in their defense. But as mentioned before, In a recent battle, although Chu¡¯s forces had surrounded and annihilated a detachment of Tang¡¯s army in the western region of Gaoyang County, The number of Tang soldiers extinguished was only 250,000. And there were only two Inborn Grandmasters among them. Far from the number Tang originally promised, it wasn¡¯t close at all in actuality. However, upon reflection, this was normal. After all, it was a war being fought for others. Tang might say one thing, but when it came to action, they naturally couldn¡¯t be expected to do their utmost. With their own lives at stake to defend someone else¡¯s land, did you really think others would be so kind-hearted? Besides, the Four Kingdoms of Yuzhou were not like Chu. On Chu¡¯s side, because all the major armies had a Lu Yuan Avatar, even within each county, including the national capital, there were Lu Yuan Avatars stationed. ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï Under such circumstances, communication throughout Chu, between central and local governments, and between the front line and the rear, was relatively smooth. When Lu Yuan issued an order, all regions and departments, both central and local, could well coordinate resources and troops, engaging in war mobilization. Thus, when Chu¡¯s army set out, unless obstructed by natural disasters, there were hardly any delays or omissions. But the other nations did not enjoy such a privilege. Deception within the ranks, embezzlement of military funds, misreporting of military intelligence, over-reporting the number of troops, exaggerating the strength of the enemy, poor communication, delays in deployment¡­ All such maladies that could be encountered in ancient feudal societies were, to varying degrees, present in the other nations. In such an environment, even though all nations had been tempered through the age of great contention and had undergone various reforms, it was inevitable that a multitude of absurd issues would arise. The fact that Tang¡¯s promised troops were fewer and delayed was not at all surprising. It would have been astonishing if the full contingent had shown up! This single incident of defending an ally showed the discord between the hearts of the Tang and Zheng nations, or rather, amongst all Four Kingdoms. As well as some of their shortcomings. So, based on this assessment and the interrogation of captured Tang troops, Lu Yuan could basically confirm that Tang had not yet prepared internally to fight such a war of defense for Wei. ¡°` The opponent might indeed be ready to mobilize a grand army of 1.8 million, without deceiving Zheng, Jin, and Xu in the Three Nations. But when it comes to mobilization, discussing whether it will be a one-time event or carried out in several batches over time becomes relevant. After all, if I mobilize 1.8 million people at once, that is 1.8 million people. If I split it into two or three times, 500,000 once, 600,000 another time, and 700,000 yet another time, the total is still 1.8 million. The number is correct, and I have kept my promise. You surely can¡¯t accuse me of breaking my word, can you? However, the significance and effect of mobilizing at once compared to several mobilizations are completely different. Take, for example, the 250,000 troops from Tang Kingdom that were to assist Zheng. With only an army of 250,000 and two Inborns, they were instantly overwhelmed by the Inborn encirclement of Chu State, powerless to resist. But if the opponent really had an army of 800,000 and six or seven Inborn Grandmasters, then even if the Chu army instantly gathered 60 Inborns, taking down the opponent instantly would not be so simple. It¡¯s feasible to hold out for five or six days, or even ten days. At the very least, holding on for three days is definitely possible. Perhaps with that amount of time, they could send word back and allow the various states to prepare. In times of war, even the slightest intelligence and momentary time differences can often decide the outcome of a battle, determining the survival or demise of a country. Regrettably, Tang Kingdom did not actively fulfill their agreement, thus missing this opportunity. Even Lu Yuan¡¯s keen observation of the reduced number of troops dispatched to cooperate with Tang¡¯s defense hinted that the opponent might not have been fully prepared for mobilization and was not adequately ready for war, revealing a significant vulnerability in their entire western defense. Thus, after breaking through Zheng, Lu Yuan did not hesitate to turn his guns around and aimed his next target at Tang Kingdom. As it turned out, his judgment was not wrong. As the Chu army moved northward from Gaoyang, due to their rapid advance, the defenders of Pingyang County to the north of Gaoyang, which belonged to Tang, were totally unprepared. They were taken by surprise when the Chu army burst in from the rear. The 300,000 troops of Tang in the county, along with four Tang Inborns, had no chance to react before Lu Yuan and his central military expedition wrapped them up like dumplings. After merely two days of intense battle, the Tang forces in this county were completely annihilated. A part of the army was then split to guard the captives and to attack the remaining prefectures and counties of Pingyang. Lu Yuan, leading numerous Inborns and a portion of elite troops, continued to push northward, directly invading the last county of Yuzhou under Tang control, Xihe County. This was also the main battlefield where Tang Kingdom¡¯s military expedition and Chu clashes occurred. A million Chu troops and ten Inborns were stationed at Tang Kingdom¡¯s military expedition. 700,000 Tang troops and twelve Inborns. The main forces of both sides were in a standoff on the Xihe battlefield. However, Lu Yuan, like divine soldiers descending from heaven, slaughtered his way from behind in a manner that Tang could have never anticipated. Along with Tang¡¯s expeditionary forces, he directly encircled Tang¡¯s main force at the front line of Yangcheng. The Tang army instantly fell into a critical moment of survival. And from that moment on, Tang¡¯s entire western battlefield completely collapsed. After Lu Yuan employed the Xiantian Cluster Tactics, the war against the Four Kingdoms of Yuzhou became akin to a lower dimensional attack, achieving unbelievably effective results. Chapter 1152 - Chapter 1152 Chapter 464 The Fall of Changping ?Chapter 1152: Chapter 464: The Fall of Changping Chapter 1152: Chapter 464: The Fall of Changping Fast, too fast. The Chu army broke through the entire Western defense line of the Four Kingdoms Alliance with an unexpected speed and in a single spirited charge. During this time, Zheng Kingdom had just begun to be shocked by the defense of Gaoyang Prefecture. Over there, Chu had already penetrated Pingyang Prefecture, cutting off the main force of Tang Kingdom, and surrounded their army of seven hundred thousand in Xihe County. The situation facing the Four Kingdoms Alliance deteriorated to an unsalvageably adverse extent. By the time the news reached back, Tang, Zheng, Jin, and Xu were all simultaneously horrified and in an uproar. No one knew how the Chu army managed to accomplish this. Lu Yuan, leading the Inborn Grandmasters with a group of elite troops, advanced rapidly with surprise attacks. They were too fast. So fast that the deserters they had defeated hadn¡¯t even managed to escape to the rear before the Chu forces got there first, occupying the enemy¡¯s rear positions. This meant the fugitive soldiers up front, who knew what was happening, couldn¡¯t extricate themselves from danger in time. They were intercepted and surrounded by the Chu army without being able to send even a fragment of information to the back lines. The high-level officials of the Four Kingdoms were completely in the dark about the situation at the front lines, having received not even a scrap of intelligence. All they knew was: Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Gaoyang had fallen, Pingyang had fallen, and Xihe County was besieged. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï In the blink of an eye, Chu had conquered three prefectures and annihilated the million-strong armies of Tang and Zheng, achieving an unimaginably brilliant victory. And the Western part of their four nations was left utterly defenseless. Vast territories were exposed before the Chu army, with the gate wide open. For a time, the Xu Army at Beigu City in the rear, ready to reinforce the Three Nations at any moment, was frightened into trembling, experiencing three shocks in a day. Upon receiving the news, the Emperor of Xu State immediately dispersed his army of one million five hundred thousand, building a new defense line around Beigu City to secure the Western and Southern territories of Xu State. At the same time, he urgently conscripted more troops domestically, not caring whether there was enough food and fodder; now, any increase in military strength was a means of self-preservation. The allies from Tang and Zheng were just too useless. An army of two to three million couldn¡¯t even hold a single Western defense line, allowing Chu to break through the entire Western front within a month. This left their side so passive that the whole of Xu and Jin states lay exposed before the Chu forces. Allies were unreliable; they could only rely on themselves. The Emperor of Xu State, realizing the truth too late, was filled with regret and could only make amends hastily to save the situation. Luckily, in his hands, he still had one million five hundred thousand troops already mustered, and with extra efforts in the country, another million could be conscripted within a month. With two million soldiers, he was able to hastily set up a defense that was enough to protect the entire Western region of Xu State and incidentally safeguard the Western part of Jin State. As long as the defense line was established, even if Zheng and Tang were defeated, his side would still have the capability to resist. He wouldn¡¯t be defenseless against Chu, like those two states, being beaten without the power to strike back. Jin State was similarly frightened into a cold sweat. But fortunately, Xu sent messengers in time to communicate with Jin, promising to ensure the safety of Jin¡¯s Western and Northern borders. With the old rival Xu State in place, Jin felt quite relieved. He had fought with Xu for decades and was very clear about the strength of this formidable foe. So, he had trust in Xu State¡¯s promises and believed that they wouldn¡¯t let him down. As for Zheng, due to their disappointing performance, neither Jin nor Xu believed in them anymore, nor did they think Zheng could survive for long under Chu¡¯s siege. So, without even sending a messenger, they subconsciously forgot about Zheng altogether. This also led to Zheng, lacking any support and receiving news of Chu¡¯s unstoppable advance through the Western defense line, losing their nerve. Just as Jin and Xu didn¡¯t believe Zheng could hold on, Zheng itself didn¡¯t believe it could withstand Chu¡¯s onslaught. For Zheng to survive, they desperately needed reinforcements. After waiting in vain for messengers from the other states, Zheng urgently dispatched its own messengers to seek assistance from the three nations. Then they spared no effort in conscripting strong men in Pingchang Prefecture to expand their military force as much as possible, strengthening the defenses of Zhuxu City, and resolutely defending it with all their might. The monarch and ministers of Zheng had made up their minds that before allies arrived, they would not set foot outside Zhuxu City. With the security of this strong city, they still had some confidence they could hold on. If they left the city, it would truly mean they had not the slightest confidence. Even the soldiers under their command would probably disperse halfway through the journey. Fighting until now, especially after Chu broke through Gaoyang in ten days, the soldiers of Zheng, upon learning the details and with the reputation from past days, had already developed a fear of Chu¡¯s military. It was not their cowardice to blame. The fall of the old capital and the loss of three prefectures in Southern Yuzhou was a huge defeat. Now with the recent setback of Gaoyang¡¯s ten-day collapse. Anybody would develop a fear after suffering two major blows in a span of just two or three years, especially against an enemy that had swept across the world. It wasn¡¯t just Zheng¡¯s forces that felt this way. Which of the surviving states of the Nine Provinces could face the Chu army without a trace of fear? This was the invincible reputation that Chu had forged over a full four years, using the corpses of Liang, Wei, Zhao, and other countries, step by step. Chapter 1153 - Chapter 1153 Chapter 464 The Fall of Changping_2 ?Chapter 1153: Chapter 464: The Fall of Changping_2 Chapter 1153: Chapter 464: The Fall of Changping_2 Under this aura of invincibility, any enemy who encountered the Chu army felt fear before the battle even began, diminishing their combat power significantly. This was the prevailing trend, the righteous path. And the Tang Kingdom, Zheng, Jin, and Xu, which Chu State temporarily neglected, were panicked and terrified to the point of fearing for their lives, when faced with the Chu army¡¯s groundbreaking move to swiftly conquer the entire western front. As for the Tang Kingdom, which was now the target of the Chu army and directly faced Chu State¡¯s unstoppable might, the anxiety and fear in their hearts were even more indescribable. ¡­ Imperial Capital of the Tang Kingdom, Gaoping City. Having just ended the alliance meeting, the newly enthroned Emperor of Tang returned to the palace, then immediately held a feast, calling upon singers and dancers to celebrate with the Group of Ministers. ¡°Gentlemen, this time our Four Kingdoms join forces, turning Yuzhou into a fortress as sturdy as iron. When the Chu thieves come west, we will ensure they beat their heads bloody against it.¡± The Emperor of Tang, seated upon the Dragon Throne, was deep in his cups, his face slightly flushed, as he raised his goblet and laughed, ¡°People always say that the Chu army is invincible. I, for one, don¡¯t believe this idea. Looking back on the past military exploits of the Chu army, they deceived the Wei Army by exploiting Wei Country¡¯s trust, luring the main forces of Wei out of the fortresses. Then, taking advantage of the main force¡¯s absence, they launched a surreptitious attack on Wei¡¯s defenseless homeland and thus succeeded in one fell swoop. The attack on Liang was done in the same manner. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï They first dispatched one expedition force to engage in a standoff with the main forces at the border of Qing and Yu, while the thugs of Chu led a large army to surprise-attack Liang¡¯s undefended Southern Territory, swiftly seizing control of Liang¡¯s western and southern regions and thereby gaining the momentum to sweep through Central State. The defeats of Wei and Liang were all due to the vulnerability within their countries, which the Chu thugs took advantage of. But now, our Four Kingdoms have come together, positioning heavy troops along the border territories. The deceitful and shameless tactics of the Chu thieves have long been known to all countries over the years, making it difficult for them to deceive anyone anymore. This time, with our stringent defenses, we will not give the Chu thieves any opportunities to employ their cunning schemes. I would like to see, without the advantage of surprise, how the Chu thieves will break through our fortifications and seize our lands? The western frontier of Yuzhou, a stretch of four thousand miles, has been turned by me into a thorny iron fortress. I¡¯ll make those Chu thieves beat their heads bloody, shattering their myth of invincibility. Let the world see. The world is not solely the domain of the Chu people. Our Tang army is also a fierce force in the world, capable of defeating the Chu army!¡± Although the previous Tang Emperor, who had been stubbornly fixated on Zheng, Jin, and Xu, had been overthrown by a coup carried out by the incumbent Monarch and Ministers of the Tang Kingdom, the overthrow of one emperor had not changed the haughty and arrogant character of the Tang people as a whole. With a population of over thirty million, the Tang Kingdom ranked among the upper middle classes among the major powers before the Chu¡¯s Northern Expeditiona€¡±just below Liang and Chu and not far behind Wei Country. In the vicinity of Tang, Xu and Xu, which had always had a population of only over twenty million, were a step behind Tang. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Zheng and Jin, with just over ten million each, were at the bottom of the major powers. All Four Kingdoms had a population and resources far inferior to those of Tang, which naturally caused them to feel intimidated and give way in their usual interactions with Tang, not daring to confront Tang head-on. In this context, Tang cultivated the illusion of being undefeated and supreme in the region, with all other kingdoms submissive. This was why Tang was so boldly dismissive of the threat from Chu State, and insisted on annexing several provinces in eastern Liang. Later they stood against the allied forces of the Three Nations, refusing to cede any ground. Because, in truth, they felt they were capable, able to subdue other nations and secure victory. Subsequent events also proved that Tang, faced with a siege by the Three Nations of Yuzhou, truly did not budge and withstood the assault without any compromise. This power had always been exclusive to the Supreme Dominator ranked first in the world. In the past, Liang had managed to fend off the incursions of Wei Zhao Xu and retain the entire Qingzhou. Lately, Chu had defeated several nations and seized most of Central State. Now Tang, having waged war against the Three Nations, does this not signify that Tang Kingdom too is among the strongest tyrants in the world? Equal in status to Liang and Chu. Past glories and the achievements of drawing against the Three Nations last year have filled the Monarch and Ministers of Tang with tremendous confidence, giving them a bizarre self-assuredness. They believe that it is only because they are far from Central State, the heart of the world, that they haven¡¯t taken part in the grand battle for dominance over the Nine Provinces, which is why the Tang army has remained in obscurity, unable to shine. Now that the attention of the Nine Provinces is focused on Yuzhou, Tang could use this battle as a springboard to rise up, using the invincible Chu army as a stepping stone. By defeating the Chu people and replacing them, to become the new Supreme Dominator of the world. This had become the aspiration of many Tang people. So when the Emperor¡¯s arrogant words were spoken, a wave of agreement instantly resonated among many ministers, with words of endorsement. ¡°Your Majesty is correct, though the Chu people are strong, we Tang people are no less.¡± ¡°Everyone fears the Chu like a tiger, but I simply don¡¯t believe this nonsense. We all have two shoulders and one head; can the Chu people fly to the sky?¡± ¡°Your Majesty, our Second Phase of troops is also fully assembled. With the Chu thieves confronting our mighty Xihe army at Changping City, I am willing to lead troops in support, and for Your Majesty, to crush the Chu thieves and gain the first victory for our alliance, enhancing the prestige of our nation.¡± The civil and military officers of Tang started to express their fervor enthusiastically. Amidst their pronouncements, it seemed as if the Chu was on the brink of defeat and the victory was within easy grasp. And nobody thought there was anything wrong with such assumptions. This confidence of Tang was born from the nation¡¯s longstanding strength and the aura of invincibility it held over its neighbors. Before suffering a devastating and memorable defeat, such conviction was sure to remain unchanged. This culture of hubris was carved deep into their bones. Chapter 1154 - Chapter 1154 Chapter 464 The Fall of Changping_3 ?Chapter 1154: Chapter 464: The Fall of Changping_3 Chapter 1154: Chapter 464: The Fall of Changping_3 ¡°` However, Lu Yuan and the Chu State he created have always enjoyed bringing change to others and spreading their own cultural glory ever since they started in Dongting. Under Lu Yuan¡¯s relentless persistence. The Miao people disappeared, the Yi people disappeared, and the Barbarians disappeared¡­ The Jianghu martial artists who liked private feuds changed their ways; the deeply entrenched aristocratic families of Jiangdong disappeared into smoke and dust; the local tyrants who continually annexed land were beaten with an iron fist; countless people were changed with the birth of Chu State. The current Tang Kingdom was no exception. Therefore, as the wine banquet was in full swing, hurried footsteps burst into the grand hall, and two guards supported a messenger, who was in a total disarray, as they walked in. This sudden incident dampened everyone¡¯s spirits and drew discontent from the monarch and ministers. But before they could react. A panicked and weak voice echoed in the grand hall. ¡°Report~ Xihe urgent news, Chu army has captured Pingyang County, surprise troops attacked Xihe. The Xihe army was caught off guard and blocked by the surprise troops of the Chu army. Now, seven hundred thousand troops are trapped in Changping City, the situation is critical, this humble one specially came to request reinforcementa€|¡± Having said that, the messenger who had run for three days and nights finally lost his will and fell into a deep sleep. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï In the grand hall, the previously spirited and eloquent monarch and ministers fell into dead silence. ¡°How could the Chu bandits aim for Changping City? And how did Pingyang County fall?¡± After a long silence, a sharp cry of alarm broke the stillness. ¡°These are chaotic words, disturbing our military¡¯s heart. Your Majesty, this official requests a thorough investigation of this person, to ascertain his identity; he must be a Chu spy.¡± Some people, refusing to believe it, said subconsciously. At this moment, someone stepped forward and searched the collapsed messenger, finding a token and looking at the letter for assistance. ?¦Ï??0.?¦Ï Their expression darkened: ¡°The token is genuine, and the handwriting is indeed that of the Gaoliang Marquis; the message is true.¡± The speaker was a good friend of the Gaoliang Marquis and the commander of the Tang army from Xihe, Lu Zhong. With his confirmation, everyone in the grand hall had no choice but to believe it. ¡°How could this be? How could this be?¡± ¡°These Chu bandits, could they truly be divine soldiers? Otherwise, how could they suddenly break through Pingyang and lay siege to Changping?¡± Just a moment ago, they were disparaging Chu State and looking towards the future, but now reality had taught them a lesson. Some couldn¡¯t handle the shock, doubting the very meaning of life. ¡°Your Majesty, regardless of how the Chu bandits did it, Changping is now in danger, with seven hundred thousand troops there, and the Gaoliang Marquis and others are also trapped; we must rescue them.¡± The person who had earlier volunteered to fight, the Wuyang Marquis of Tang, Yang Qingyuan, reacted swiftly and immediately volunteered: ¡°Right now, Gaoping City has gathered an army of five hundred thousand, and there are also six Inborn Grandmasters ready within the city. This official requests permission to lead this army at top speed to Changping City, to rescue the Gaoliang Marquis, repel the Chu threat from the south of Xihe, and protect our rivers and mountains.¡± The Tang Emperor, who finally came to his senses from shock, confusion, and panic, also reacted at this point. Upon hearing Yang Qingyuan¡¯s request, he immediately agreed, ¡°Let it be as Wuyang Marquis says, we entrust the five hundred thousand strong army from Gaoping City and the other five Inborn Generals all to Yang Qing. All matters regarding the supply of the expedition¡¯s supplies, and the provision of food and fodder by the prefectures and counties along the way, I will immediately decree all departments and local prefectures and counties to prepare thoroughly. The fate of Great Tang and the rise and fall of the army are all entrusted to you.¡± Despite still being puzzled about how the Chu people captured Pingyang County and became divine soldiers in Xihe. The crisis in Changping was pressing, with tens of thousands of troops trapped, and even the loss of Xihe County appeared imminent. All these risks were indeed real. If Tang did not want to lose these troops or Xihe County, a rescue mission was necessary. Yang Qingyuan solemnly accepted the mission: ¡°Your Majesty, rest assured, this official will lead the troops to repel the Chu bandits, secure Changping, and keep the invaders out of Xihe.¡± Hmm, even at this moment, Wuyang Marquis still had confidence in his troops against the Chu army. He intended to confront the Chu army on the battlefield and drive them out of Xihe County. It has to be said, Tang Kingdom¡¯s confidence indeed far exceeded that of other countries. Or perhaps. Because the Chu army acted too swiftly, causing Tang to be unclear of the details, a lack of intelligence led to a misjudgment of the situation. But no matter what. Under the pressure of Chu¡¯s advancing army, Tang began to desperately save itself. The Tang troops in Gaoping City started to move. However, mobilizing an army of five hundred thousand at such short notice was not so easy. The assembly of troops, the preparation of supplies, and the provision of logistics all required planning. So even though Yang Qingyuan was anxious, without these preparations completed, he couldn¡¯t immediately move out with his troops. As for taking light troops and hurrying to Xihe first? For a battle involving a million people, bringing just tens of thousands of light troops would be no more than serving oneself up to the Chu army on a platter, utterly ineffective. Only when tens of thousands of troops press forward can they pose a threat to the Chu army and lift the siege of Changping. When the number of troops reaches a certain scale, in the face of absolute strength, various conspiracies and tricks become truly non-threatening. This is also one of the reasons why Tang had been so confident previously. Because the strength of both sides had already exceeded a certain limit, enough to be immune to certain schemes. Previous sneak attacks of the Chu army were ineffective in the face of real strength. Yet, for some reason, methods that should not have worked were still effective for the Chu army? Even taking over Pingyang County and laying siege to Changping City? This caused the Tang government, top to bottom, to be utterly baffled. Even this confusion sowed unease in their hearts, casting a shadow over the rescue mission, with a bad premonition enveloping them. And that premonition soon came to pass. Just as the Tang troops in Gaoping City were preparing to set out. On the fifth day since the news from Changping City in the south reached them, another shocking and terrible news arrived. Changping City had been under siege for just five days; the Chu army attacked day and night and the defenders, inside and out, couldn¡¯t hold on, ultimately resulting in the city being conquered by the Chu army. The seven hundred thousand strong force at the Changping front was completely wiped out. Only two Inborn individuals from Tang managed to blend in with the chaos, found an opportunity to break out, and escaped back to Gaoping City. And they also brought back the truth about how the divine troops of Chu, as well as Gaoyang County, Pingyang County, and Changping City, fell so quickly. ¡°` Chapter 1155 - Chapter 1155 Chapter 465 Breaking Through the Four Kingdoms ?Chapter 1155: Chapter 465: Breaking Through the Four Kingdoms Chapter 1155: Chapter 465: Breaking Through the Four Kingdoms The Chu army breached Gaoyang, Pingyang, and Xihe Counties in one month, annihilating over 1.5 million troops from the Tang and Zheng kingdoms. Behind this glorious victory was the truth that as many as sixty or seventy Inborn Grandmasters were involved. Upon learning the truth that Chu State chose to focus such a large number of Inborn Grandmasters for a surprise attack to break through the entire western defense line, The people of Tang Kingdom, shocked by how quickly Changping City had fallen, could not help but feel a chill in their hearts. They had never imagined that in order to win, the Chu people would be so crazed as to break the previous conventions that existed between the Inborn Grandmasters of various nations and use the formidable combat power of the Inborn Grandmasters to massacre ordinary soldiers. What frightened them even more was that Chu State could actually assemble so many Inborn Grandmasters to achieve this effect of a surprise attack. That was as many as sixty or seventy Inborn Grandmasters! Just thinking about that number was enough to make one shudder. As they contemplated the terrifying force that would soon be descending upon Tang Kingdom and arriving at Gaoping City, the hearts of the Monarch and Ministers of Tang trembled uncontrollably. Because they knew that even if all of the remaining forces of Tang Kingdom were to band together, they were fundamentally no match for this strength. The current Tang Kingdom could perhaps assemble an army of one or two million by relying on its great national power, but after suffering three devastating losses on the entire western front, they had already lost sixteen Inborn Grandmasters on the battlefield. And the original number of Inborn Grandmasters in Tang Kingdom was only twenty-seven. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Having lost sixteen in an instant, the remaining number of Inborn Grandmasters was reduced to just eleven. Eleven Inborns, along with a million or so troopsa€¡±was this force capable of withstanding the seventy or more Inborn Grandmasters of Chu State and their elite army of over one million soldiers? After understanding the detailed strength of the Chu army, even the people of Tang Kingdom, no matter how confident they were, couldn¡¯t guarantee victory anymore in the face of continuous defeats and the bloody reality. All arrogance seemed so fragile and vulnerable in front of the iron fist of reality. Once their confidence had been shattered, the people of Tang Kingdom had a reactionary response, shifting from extreme confidence to extreme fear. Fear of the Chu people, fear of the Chu army, fear of Lu Yuan. ¡°The army must immediately halt its expedition and have Wuyanghou lead the troops from the Capital to set up a new defensive line around Gaoping City immediately,¡± was the first decree issued by the Tang Emperor after coming to his senses. With the Chu thieves possessing more than seventy Inborn Grandmasters and Changping City already being captured, it was estimated that Xihe County had also been occupied by Chu thieves, turning it into a dead zone. If they were to send people to Xihe County now, it would be like walking into a tiger¡¯s den or delivering fat meat to someone¡¯s doorstep. If they really did that, the Chu people might even laugh out loud. The Tang Emperor was not that foolish. He might be arrogant, but he was not stupid. And after such a painful and heavy blow, the loss of 1.25 million soldiers and the fall of sixteen Inborn Grandmasters, he had come to realize the terror of the Chu army. The Tang Kingdom had already lost most of its strength due to its previous arrogance. Even if the Tang Emperor despised and hated the Chu army in his heart, his kingdom¡¯s current situation no longer allowed for his capriciousness. Because if there were any mistakes in the next step, that could lead to the downfall of the nation. With the responsibility for the Ancestral Temple and Altars of Soil and Grain weighing on him, the Tang Emperor could not afford to be careless. And other Tang Ministers who had been jolted awake were now shrinking like quails, keeping their heads down, no longer daring to clamor for a decisive battle with the Chu army. Any clear-sighted person could see that Tang Kingdom was no longer a match for Chu State, and the Tang army couldn¡¯t beat the Chu army. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Continuing this way could lead to the actual fall of their nation. Thus, some changed their stance and began to make suggestions they would never have made before: ¡°Your Majesty, with the Chu bandits coming with such ferocity, relying solely on our Great Tang is certainly not an opponent for the Chu bandits. This minister pleads to be dispatched as an envoy to Xu State and Xu State to seek aid, asking them to send troops to our rescue.¡± The Tang Emperor, already extremely anxious and insecure in his heart, had already been considering this matter. It¡¯s just that he had spoken too confidently before and couldn¡¯t face losing face by bringing up the need for aid, When someone finally brought it up, he immediately agreed, ¡°Minister Ji speaks wisely. If that is the case, then the envoy mission to Xu State shall be entrusted to you.¡± After speaking, the Tang Emperor turned to another person who had been called in. ¡°Minister Zhang has always had good relations with Xu State. The mission as envoy to Xu State will be overseen by Minister Zhang.¡± ¡°Your servant obeys the decree.¡± The two Tang Ministers, who had significant relations with Xu and Xu States, solemnly accepted the command. ¡°The nation is in peril, and my safety is entirely in the hands of you two Loyal Subjects. I implore you to secure reinforcements to pull our Great Tang out of dire straits!¡± Mindful of his present predicament, the Tang Emperor couldn¡¯t help but shed tears. Seeing this, Ji and Zhang felt moved and bowed deeply in acknowledgement, ¡°Your Majesty, rest assured, if we fail to secure reinforcements during this mission, we shall embrace death in Xu (Xu).¡± The Tang Emperor, deeply moved, replied, ¡°My dear subjects, you do not need to do so. Even if there are no reinforcements, take care of yourselves. Great Tang will still rely on you in the future to assist me in our revival¡­¡± Even if reinforcements could be secured from Xu and Xu States this time, saving Tang Kingdom was just the beginning. When the Chu army marched north, they had pierced through the entire western defense line of Tang Kingdom in just one month, not only annihilating the main force of the Tang army above but also snatching the two counties that Tang Kingdom had developed in Yuzhou. Unlike other provincial overlords, Tang Kingdom did not immediately relocate its main population to Central State after securing a part of its territory. Chapter 1156 - Chapter 1156 Chapter 465 Breaking Through the Four Kingdoms_2 ?Chapter 1156: Chapter 465: Breaking Through the Four Kingdoms_2 Chapter 1156: Chapter 465: Breaking Through the Four Kingdoms_2 They had developed Central State, yet they did not neglect their homeland. Due to that inexplicable confidence, the people of Tang had deep affection for their Jingzhou Old Home. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Unless absolutely necessary, they were unwilling to relocate from their native land. This led to a large number of Tang citizens, including many high-ranking families, remaining in Jingzhou without moving. Consequently, even though Chu State had seized two provinces of Central State from Tang Kingdom, many of Tang¡¯s high-level officials were not panicked; while they were worried about the future of Tang and themselves, they remained generally stable. Since their families were still in Jingzhou, out of the enemy¡¯s reach, they naturally had no cause for fear and worry. And the Tang government treated the land they had conquered in Central State as just another county, without any special attention. This was evident from the fact that Tang, unlike other nations, had not established a secondary capital in the territories of Central State they occupied, showing their disregard for Central State. In short, thanks to Tang¡¯s unique sentiment and policies, the loss of Pingyang and Xihe counties, though a heavy blow, did not mean that Tang could no longer recover or turn the tide completely. The population of the two counties of Central State accounted for only two-fifths of Tang¡¯s total population, approximately fourteen million people, and this number included many who had been conscripted and perished in the armies that met their end in Yuzhou. Their loss was certainly painful for Tang. However, with three-fifths of their population still within the territory of Jingzhou, about twenty million citizens remained, signifying that the foundation was still intact. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï This was the confidence behind Emperor Tang¡¯s declaration that Tang would reinvigorate and rise again in the future. Even without the two provinces of Yuzhou, Tang was still a mid-tier hegemon in the world, with strength comparable to that of Xu State. Looking across the Nine Provinces, aside from Chu, no other nation dared claim to be stronger than Tang, not even Xu. With this confidence, even though Tang suffered a disastrous defeat and heavy losses, there remained a sense of determination and hope, wondering if they could start over in the future? Therefore, after sending two messengers to seek aid from Xu and Yu States, Emperor Tang, within Gaoping City, did everything in his power to enlist and expand his military strength as much as possible. He prepared for the upcoming defense battle of Jingzhou, determined to fight Chu¡¯s king and preserve the thousand-year heritage of Tang. The people of Tang in Jingzhou were busy with urgent tasks. However, what Emperor Tang and the others did not know was that all their efforts were in vain. Apart from wasting national strength, they were practically useless. Because the Chu army that they imagined would push northward in a mighty tide after breaking through Changping City and capturing Xihe County did not do so. After taking the entire Xihe County, they did not continue northward. Instead, they turned eastward, striking directly at the Central State territory of Xu, aiming for Emperor Xu¡¯s fortifications in Northern City. Lu Yuan did not immediately plan to eliminate Tang Kingdom. Though it was not impossible, it held little significance. His third Northern Expedition, from start to finish, had only one core goal: to seize the entirety of Yuzhou and unify the lands of Central State. By now, Tang had been driven out of Yuzhou, and they had no more territory in Central State at all. In the northern part of Jing, although there was still a vast territory and a large population, these factors no longer held much attraction for Chu. In terms of territory, Lu Yuan had already given up Yangzhou in his homeland, which was equivalent to several Jingzhou territories combined. In terms of population, though the remaining twenty million people of Tang were numerous and previously could have sustained a mid-tier hegemon, for Chu, which had just seized three counties in Yuzhou, bringing its total population to over two hundred million, just twenty million people represented only a fraction of Chu, hardly significant at all. Once Chu seized the remaining seven counties of Yuzhou, the population gap between Tang and Chu would widen even further. By that time, the small population of Tang would matter even less to Lu Yuan. A minor Jingzhou, a minor Tang Kingdom, were merely trivial profits. Not worth the efforts and expenses of Chu¡¯s military campaigns, nor the risk of significant casualties and depletion of supplies. Once Chu unified the entirety of Yuzhou and Qingzhou amidst Central State, and occupied the whole region of Central State, Lu Yuan only needed to set up defenses along the Central State borders. Enemies from east, south, west, and north would crash against these impenetrable walls on their own initiative. And that wasn¡¯t even necessary to wait for. Once Central State was pacified and border defenses established, Lu Yuan could also replicate the current Xiantian Cluster Tactics. Gathering groups of thirty to fifty idle Xiantians, he could then take care of each nation and tribe one by one. At that time, dealing with these disparate forces would be much easier than now. In his four Northern Expeditions, Lu Yuan faced the circumstance of several powerful kingdoms occupying a small area. Like Liang, Wei, and Zhao, nesting in a small part of eastern Qingzhou, Like Liang and Xu, nestled in the central and eastern parts of Qingzhou, Like the Four Kingdoms of Yu, nestled in the north and east of Yuzhou. Each time he aimed to seize a piece of Central State, even if it was only five or six counties in size, Lu Yuan had to confront several hegemonic nations and engage them in wars involving millions, even tens of millions, of soldiers. The hardships involved can only be imagined. Chapter 1157 - Chapter 1157 Chapter 465 Breaking Through the Four Kingdoms_3 ?Chapter 1157: Chapter 465: Breaking Through the Four Kingdoms_3 Chapter 1157: Chapter 465: Breaking Through the Four Kingdoms_3 But now Lu Yuan had swept away the rival warlords, and he was about to unify Central State. Those whom he defeated, likened to homeless dogs, would lose Central State, the pivotal platform that facilitated contact and alliances among the states, allowing them to assist each other and collectively resist Chu forces. Already divided among the states, separated by mountains and rivers, it would not be easy for the remaining forces of the Nine Provinces to unite once again. Just like when Lu Yuan attacked Xu State, at best they could only seek help from Tang Kingdom. Attacking Xu State, they could also only rely on Tang Kingdom for help, unable to reach Xu State across an entire major state. Because the journey was too long, and there wasn¡¯t enough time, even if Xu State wished to dispatch troops to help, just traveling there would take nearly half a year, if not more. By then, by the time the Xu Army arrived at the battlefield, it would all be over. Moreover. With such a great distance, would Xu State dare to send out its own army? Wouldn¡¯t they fear that while their army was deployed afar, Chu State could take advantage of the vulnerability and stage a sneak attack? Xu State was far from Xu Kingdom, but Chu State was separated from Xu State by only a river. Even next to Xu State, in Ji Province, there was a Chu military expedition, without even a single large river in between, directly bordering Xu State. In such circumstances, even with tenfold courage, Xu State would not dare to deploy its army from within the country. The once allies Xu State and Xu Kingdom, with their foundation of cooperation, had so much difficulty even trying to assist each other. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The Barbarian powers to the south of Yangzhou, the foreign tribes of the Western Regions to the west of Yong State, were all riddled with contradictions and maintain a complex force that was forcibly integrated during migrationa€¡±needless to say, their situation was even more dire. It was much easier for Lu Yuan to target them, compared to the ancient, systematically organized nations with interconnected marital ties and entwined interests passed down over hundreds of years. It was precisely because he saw this that Lu Yuan was not in a hurry to wipe out the other powers outside of Central State. Those were his prey destined for the platter, ducks at the mouth that could not fly away. Now, it was first necessary to eat what was being savored in the mouth, to swallow that deliciousness down the stomacha€¡±that was the proper course. And this deliciousness was naturally Xu State. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?0 In Yuzhou now, Zheng Kingdom had been crippled and was holed up within Zhuxu City, day by day in fear, not daring to step out. Tang Kingdom had been driven back to Jingzhou, and currently in Gaoping City, they were busily recruiting soldiers and preparing for an invasion by Chu State that did not exist. Among the four states, both the weakest and strongest had already been dealt with by Chu State. What remained was Xu State, lying to the rear with the best-preserved strength, which now stood out as a particularly glaring obstacle. In order to make things more pleasant for himself, Lu Yuan decided that the next target would be Xu State. ¡­ But just as Lu Yuan had resolved the Battle of Changping, at this time in Xu State, Emperor Xu had just decreed, taking Northern Solid City as the core, to reconstruct a defense line for Xu State. In the country, the imperial edicts calling for the mobilization of troops had been received and preparations had started, except that in regions far from Northern Solid City, the messengers were still en route. Therefore, at this moment, the real strength in Emperor Xu¡¯s hands was just that one hundred and fifty thousand well-assembled army. And the twelve Inborn Grandmasters stationed at Northern Solid City. Although this power was strong, it was clearly not sufficient to set up the entire defense line of Xu State. Xu State had three counties in Yuzhou. Even if we do not consider the hinterland that was already exposed to the striking range of Chu State, Xu State still had two counties in Yuzhou, which already bordered the control range of the Chu army. To defend two counties with one million and five hundred thousand people, looking at the examples from Chu State¡¯s previous three Northern Expeditions, everyone who did this met a very grim end. Xu State once again repeated this curse. The troops being levied from the rear had not yet arrived, and even the levying orders were still in the process of being transmitted. Meanwhile, Lu Yuan, having concluded the Battle of Changping, not only commanded the expeditionary army of Xu State to follow up with the main force from the rear. He personally led a large number of Inborn Grandmasters and a small contingent of elite troops to start raiding eastward relentlessly. His progress was extremely fast. Even before the Xu Army could arrive, he had already passed directly through Longquan County of Xu State along the main thoroughfare of Xihe County. This was the border between Tang Kingdom and Xu State. After the two countries formed an alliance, to show their sincerity, they both withdrew their stationed troops from the two counties. The western side was also defended by the Changping City fortifications. The safety of both Xihe and Longquan counties, according to the agreement of the Four Kingdoms, was originally the responsibility of Tang Kingdom. But now Tang Kingdom had been annihilated. Xu State, wanting to reconstruct a defense line exclusively their own, was temporarily unable to fully deploy due to time constraints and insufficient troop strength. Perhaps, after waiting another ten days to half a month, Xu State could recover and fill the defensive gap of Longquan County. But evidently, Lu Yuan also saw this excellent opportunity and seized it. The swarm of Inborn from Chu State, and the ten thousand elite Chu cavalry galloping on three horses each, rushed eastward before the Xu People could react, like arrows released from bowstrings, and barrelled into Longquan County. The people of Xu in this county were completely unprepared, and the entire county was directly breached, even the county city was seized in one fell swoop. The rear path of the Xu forces in Beigu City was thus cut off by Lu Yuan. They lost not only the path of retreat but even their supply lines were severed. However, this was not yet the end. After taking Longquan County, Lu Yuan merely left twenty Inborn Grandmasters to lead twenty thousand troops, waiting for the subsequent reinforcements to arrive. He led the remaining forty Inborn Grandmasters and eighty thousand elite cavalry to continue attacking towards the southeast. He then plowed through Wen City County of Xu State, all the way to the border between Xu and Jin. ¡°Your Majesty, the Jin Country¡¯s Jiaoxian County is just ahead. Crossing it, we¡¯ll be in the Great Chu¡¯s Xianyun County,¡± said the guide, pointing to the tranquil border town of Jin Country ahead and explaining to Lu Yuan. ¡°Is that so?¡± Lu Yuan paused his horse on a small hill, gazing at the distant small city, then slapped the back of his horse and laughed loudly, ¡°In that case, let¡¯s charge over, all the way to Xianyun County. I want to blast through the Four Kingdoms, terrify Yuzhou, and let them witness the divine might of Great Chu!¡± The thundering sound of iron hoofs, the Chu Emperor in golden armor leading the charge at the forefront. Behind him. Ten thousand cavalry followed, also clad in golden armor that shone resplendently under the morning sun. The earth itself trembled beneath the trampling of these golden armored iron cavalry. Chapter 1158 - Chapter 1158 Chapter 466 Desires to Surrender ?Chapter 1158: Chapter 466: Desires to Surrender Chapter 1158: Chapter 466: Desires to Surrender Chaos, total chaos. The Yuzhou battlefield had turned into a complete mess the moment the Chu army made its move. The fourth Northern Expedition of the Chu State, eagerly watched by the entire world, progressed wildly, like an out-of-control war chariot, with exhilarating speed. The Chu army set out from Liang in February and attacked Yu Bi City in March, initiating the first battle of the Northern Expedition. Up to this point, everything seemed normal. That was until Yu Bi City was breached in a single day and taken by the Chu army. After that, Emperor Chu Luyuan¡¯s army, as if it had a cheat code, broke through Gaoyang, Pingyang, and Hexi Prefectures in just one month, obliterating the main forces of Zheng and Tang, stationed in the western territory of Yuzhou, in a single stroke. By April, after annihilating the main Tang force, they turned eastward, invading the lands of the Xu State. Here, they replicated the scenario previously seen in Zheng and Tang. One day to break a stronghold, ten days to break a prefecture, one month to conquer a state. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï In just one month, the Chu army slashed through the Longquan and Wencheng Prefectures of the Xu State, then, without stopping, breached Jiaoxian Prefecture of Jin Country and successfully returned to the Xianyun Prefecture of Great Chu, where they met up with Qingyunzi¡¯s southern military expedition from Great Chu. In fact, before Luyuan¡¯s victorious army, which had crossed four kingdoms and broken through six prefectures, arrived at Jiaoxian, he had already mentally contacted his avatar Qingyunzi to coordinate and support the army¡¯s operations in the south. After all, having defeated Zheng, Tang, and Xu, crossing nearly ten thousand li, and traveling two months on the road, even iron men would be exhausted. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï Not to mention, the Chu army had been taking cities and fortresses all the way, and there were quite many counties and prefectures that had been broken through. In order to preserve these victories, troops had to be stationed along the way to guard them. After making such arrangements all along the way, by the time they arrived at Jiaoxian in Jin Country, Luyuan only had twenty Inborns and around thirty thousand soldiers left in hand. Frankly speaking, this strength was somewhat strained to break through Jin Country¡¯s meticulously crafted southeastern defense line. So at this time, Luyuan decisively played to his strengths and called for avatar reinforcements. After all, it¡¯s still himself, so it can¡¯t be considered bullying. Anyway, with the cooperation of the southern military expedition, the Jin army in Jiaoxian was annihilated by the Chu army in merely five days, and this place was also taken down. And the southeastern defense line of Yuzhou, led by Jin Country, was declared broken the moment Jiaoxian fell. After the loss of Jiaoxian, Jin Country was left with only its capital, Beijie City, in North Xiang County. By now, any clear-eyed person could see that Chu State had essentially won the war against the Four Kingdoms of Yuzhou. Because originally, the Four Kingdoms occupied about ten prefectures in the northern and eastern regions of Yuzhou. But after this battle, the northern part of Yuzhou fell to the Chu army with Gaoyang, Pingyang, and Hexi Prefectures taken first. Then they broke through Longquan and Wencheng Prefectures of Xu, as well as Jiaoxian of Jin. Luther, when the Chu central, western, and Tang troops arrive with the main forces, the remaining Zheng prefectures of Yidu and Pingchang, as well as the main forces of Xu at Beigu City, and Yuyang, the last prefecture Xu has in Yuzhou, will also be taken by the Chu army. Emperor Xu and the main Xu forces were also surrounded in Beigu City. Now, in the entire eastern part of Yuzhou, only Beigu City in Yuyang Prefecture and Jin¡¯s North Xiang County remain out of Chu control. In the northern part of Yuzhou, only Zheng¡¯s Imperial Capital, Zhuxu City, was left as a tough nut to crack due to the gathering of more than six hundred thousand Zheng troops and nine Inborns, so it was difficult to take action. The Chu side, not wanting to suffer too many casualties, simply surrounded but did not attack the city. Now, at Zhuxu City, the entire main force of the Chu western military expedition has gathered, totaling one million soldiers and ten Inborns, sealing the city tightly. It might be difficult for the western military expedition alone to take down this city. But to besiege and not let a single Zheng person escape from the city, that¡¯s still no problem at all. As long as the Zheng people inside the city are watched over, what¡¯s left is just waiting for the rest of the Chu main forces to win on other battlefields in Yuzhou and then return with the large army. At that time, taking down little Zhuxu City would certainly be a piece of cake. The ten prefectures in the north and east of Yuzhou would thus be left with only one prefecture and two cities not yet taken by the Chu army. But that¡¯s just a matter of time. When the Chu army slowly exerts power to take down these three places, it wouldn¡¯t require much effort. The downfall of the Four Kingdoms of Yuzhou was already counting down. And for Chu State to unify Yuzhou was also a foregone conclusion a€¡± effortlessly within reach. Next, all that¡¯s needed is to wait two to three months for the Chu army to consolidate control over the swiftly conquered territories, after which the main forces will be stationed throughout Yuzhou. The next round of the Chu offensive will then continue. That will be the moment for complete unification of Central State. However, perhaps there¡¯s no need to wait that long. ¡­ In Pingchang Prefecture, Zhuxu City. While Luyuan roamed unbounded across Yuzhou, a surging undercurrent was also brewing within this imperial city of Zheng Kingdom. When the Chu army successively took Yidu and Pingchang Prefectures before completely surrounding Zhuxu City, the news that the Chu army had annihilated the Tang main force and entered Xu, defeating the Xu army in succession, had already reached inside the city. The Zheng people inside were aware of the situation outside. Onlookers from the rest of the world, based on this, could infer that the Chu army had won the great war of Yuzhou. How could the high-level officials of Zheng, under the direct pressure of the Chu army and governing the state¡¯s politics, fail to see this? Originally the alliance of the Four Kingdoms of Yuzhou seemed imposing and strong; however, the Chu army also truly appeared to be at the end of its strong crossbow, visibly tired, and not as formidable as before. Chapter 1159 - Chapter 1159 Chapter 466 Desires to Surrender_2 ?Chapter 1159: Chapter 466: Desires to Surrender_2 Chapter 1159: Chapter 466: Desires to Surrender_2 This gave the people of the Four Kingdoms an illusion, that this battle might be worth fighting. The Chu army, may not be invincible after all. And as long as they won, the unbeatable legend of the Chu army would be shattered, and their current power and riches could be preserved. Their own families could continue to live in wealth and power in the land of Yuzhou. It was with this stroke of luck in mind that, before the Northern Expedition of the Chu army, the spies of the imperial security bureau were active in the Four Kingdoms, attempting to connect with aristocratic families and officials of various countries, urging them to rise in arms and coordinate within and without when the Chu army advanced. Confronted with this request, all these individuals who had secretly maintained good relations with Chu State either politely or directly expressed their refusal. Clearly, when it came to their own interests, they chose to side with their original country, standing against Chu State. As a result, although there was no outright breach, the relations between Chu State and the interest class of these Four Kingdoms rapidly cooled off, losing any semblance of cordiality. These individuals lost the best opportunity to abandon their sinking homeland and board the mighty ship of Chu. But fortunes change and retribution comes swiftly. The aristocratic families of the Four Kingdoms had just refused the enticements of Chu, when the Chu army defeated their homeland, sweeping across the whole of Yuzhou, and securing victory in this battle. Such immediate karma left everyone dumbfounded, unable to react. But no matter how they inwardly cursed the incompetence of the generals and soldiers of the Four Kingdoms for letting the Chu army defeat them so easily, the Chu army had already arrived, and furthermore, they had surrounded Zhuxu City. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï With the imminent threat of an enemy army, those who had just rejected the olive branch of Chu were forced to contemplate a very pragmatic question. That was, how to ensure their survival and, beyond that, retain a certain level of wealth and status in the new dynasty of Great Chu after the city was taken. However, their previous words of refusal had passed only three or four months ago and were still fresh in memory. The high-ranking officials of Zheng believed that Chu State surely had not forgotten so quickly about this matter. And as long as Chu remembered, the retribution from the Chu army after the city¡¯s fall would be inevitable. After all, they were just a group of desperate people with no value left to exploit. Chu had no reason to spare them or to share the post-victory power with them. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Unless they could do something that would force Chu to set aside past grievances and even to bestow rewards upon them. Only then, as an example for all under heaven, would Chu grant forgiveness for the past. Only then could they survive this catastrophe while maintaining their wealth and status. With this thought in mind, a group of high-ranking officials from the Zheng Kingdom quickly gathered inside Zhuxu City to secretly plot a major event. ¡­ Zhuxu City, Duke of Qing State¡¯s Residence. As one of the top families in the nation, the Duke of Qing State, Gao¡¯s clan, had always been at the pinnacle of Zheng¡¯s elite, sharing its rise and fall through many generations. Yet, such a supreme noble, endowed with immense wealth, now had to contemplate how to preserve their own well-being and the family¡¯s fortune before the sinking ship they were on went under. So, under persuasion from others, the current Duke of Qing State, Gao Mingsheng, summoned some friendly officials and military commanders with key authority, holding a small meeting. ¡°Gentlemen, we are all well aware of the situation Zheng now faces. At the same time, we also understand the progress of the Chu army in Yuzhou. The opponent¡¯s momentum to unify Yuzhou is unstoppable. Zheng cannot be saved. We are trapped within the city walls. Attempting to escape is mostly unlikely. Moreover, the entire Yuzhou and Central State are under Chu people¡¯s control. Even if we wanted to flee, where could we possibly go? In this critical moment of survival, we must consider the future for the sake of our lives and family fortunes, and for the ancestral temples and their incense. Otherwise, once Zhuxu City falls and the Chu army enters, we will all turn to dust and our entire lineage will be obliterated.¡± Duke of Qing State, Gao Mingsheng, didn¡¯t mince words, laying out the dire situation from the start. Just as he said, in such a perilous moment of life and death, there was no time for pretense. If they did not quickly come up with a solution, not only would they face death, but the lives of hundreds or thousands of their family members would also come to a tragic end. ¡°Duke, in the times we find ourselves, we have already displeased the Chu people. By failing to defect at the best moment, we have lost the initiative. Now if we wish to redress our faults and preserve our family¡¯s wealth, there is only one opportunity left.¡± Among the crowd, those who had already made up their minds and had communicated with the Duke of Qing State immediately spoke up following his address: ¡°There¡¯s only one way to save our lives at this point, and that is to surrender Zhuxu City. By submitting before the Chu army makes its move, Even though we may not be able to keep our wealth and status, we can still save our lives. And if the Chu people want to make a public display, to set a precedent for the world, then perhaps we might still be granted a minor official position. In the new dynasty afterward, we might still hold some power, not falling into complete obscurity.¡± Hearing these words, the rest showed varied expressions; some appeared distressed, some ashamed, but equally, there were those who were tempted. Seeing someone lead the way, those whose minds were swayed quickly spoke up to follow suit. Chapter 1160 - Chapter 1160 Chapter 466 Desires to Surrender_3 ?Chapter 1160: Chapter 466: Desires to Surrender_3 Chapter 1160: Chapter 466: Desires to Surrender_3 ¡°Duke, Officer Li is right; this is indeed our last chance to change allegiance. If we miss it, all will be lost,¡± ¡°Indeed, the Heavenly troops of Great Chu are sweeping through Yuzhou, and the forces of Zheng, Jin, Tang, and Xu of the Four Kingdoms cannot withstand them.¡± The momentum of Chu State¡¯s unification of The world has become clear. If we continue to stubbornly resist the Heavenly troops, we are merely seeking our own deaths and will leave nothing in the Historical Records but a reputation as a ridiculed and pathetic figure, with no other good end in sight.¡± The great trend of The world is right before our eyes. It¡¯s not that we are disloyal; it¡¯s merely recognizing the signs of the times, abiding by natural justice, and complying with the Heavenly trend,¡± ¡°To continue resisting the Chu army is a path leading only to death. It is time that we should make plans earlier.¡± Many people began to speak one after another; even those who were previously reserved and too proud to lose face followed suit in agreement. Seeing the consensus among the crowd, Duke of Qing State, Gao Mingsheng, let out a sigh of relief, glad that he would not have to give the signal by throwing his cup, prompting the hidden executioners nearby to emerge. To carry out a slaughter before surrendering. Once everyone was in agreement, he felt a mixture of joy and difficulty saying, ¡°Since all the gentlemen believe surrendering is feasible, then I, too, think that this is the great trend which we cannot defy. ¡°But what is the proper method for surrendering? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Do any of you have ideas? ¡°Should we advise His Majesty to surrender with us, or shall we privately open the gates and communicate with the Chu army?¡± As soon as this question was asked, someone immediately replied, ¡°We should naturally open the gates ourselves and reach out to the Chu army.¡± This response shocked everyone in the hall. For if they were to act according to these words, the merit of opening the gates and surrendering would belong only to them; the Zheng royal family would not get even the slightest share. In that case, while they might be safe, the royal house of Zheng would likely face the fate of being utterly annihilated.¡± To treat their former master in such a way, even though some present had marriage alliances with the royal family, Such an action was bound to be repugnant and unbearable. However, the person who spoke, knowing full well he might provoke such a Reaction, was prepared. Not waiting for the crowd to argue or question, he spoke up first: ¡°Duke, esteemed colleagues, think about ita€¡±if His Majesty takes the lead to surrender and open the gates, who, in this city, will get the greatest merit? ¡°Won¡¯t it be His Majesty, won¡¯t it be the royals? ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï ¡°After all, they would be the ones offering up a country to save their own lives, and even if the country only comprises one city, the merit is immense. ¡°In that case, His Majesty might retain his title as a noble, and the royals¡¯ wealth and status could be secured. ¡°At the very least, they could live as wealthy landlords in the city or the countryside. ¡°We, however, would be nothing but ministers of a fallen state, overshadowed by His Majesty¡¯s glory.¡± ¡°It¡¯s all because we were incapable, unable to support a Wise Monarch, thus leading to Zheng¡¯s demise and possession by Chu. ¡°These ministers of a fallen state, these incompetent people, do they have any merit to their name¡­ ¡°Let me ask you, if you were the Heavenly Son of Chu, or a member of the Group of Ministers of Chu, what kind of treatment would you extend to us? ¡°Afraid it would not be even the slightest official position; even our lives and fortunes would be in danger. ¡°We would inevitably be stripped of wealth by the Chu people, our ancestral properties mostly seized, and in the end, we might end up with nothing, unable to even protect our own lives.¡± ¡°Would you like to see such an outcome? ¡°If such a situation truly arises, then what would be the point of us surrendering and offering up the city now?¡± This series of analyses and rhetorical questions, like sharp swords, pierced into everyone¡¯s hearts. It laid out the gory reality for all to see. Which is to say, Supporting the Heavenly Son and surrendering offered them little benefit, and might not even save their lives. This is not what the group wanted to witness, nor was it the goal for holding this surrender meeting. After these words were spoken, complete silence fell over the hall. The few who wanted to object or reprimand opened their mouths but then said nothing. Duke of Qing State, Gao Mingsheng, was visibly moved, his gaze flickering. Seeing how his words silenced everyone, the man continued, ¡°So if we want to ensure the survival of our lives, even to earn some merit to secure a position in the New Dynasty and to continue our family¡¯s prosperity, ¡°Then we absolutely cannot let go of this final opportunity for the merit in surrendering and offering up the city, and we cannot let it go to His Majesty or to the royals. ¡°Only if His Majesty is tyrannical, blind to the signs of the times, and stubbornly resists the Heavenly troops of Great Chu, would we have no choice but to bind His Majesty and open the gates for surrender, to underscore our merit. ¡°This Zhuxu City, along with the 700,000 strong army and 400,000 civilians within, is our merit, our petition to Great Chu! ¡°With these, we can exchange for titles and status from Great Chu, ensuring our wealth and continuing our lineage.¡± ¡°Although by doing this, we will inevitably bear a bad name, becoming infamous as disloyal ministers and blamed by the people, ¡°This is still our only chance. ¡°Moreover, if His Majesty and the royal family still exist, then after we switch allegiance to Great Chu, with the former master still around, would we be loyal to the Chu Emperor or the old royalty? ¡°Would we listen to the old master¡¯s words or to the new master¡¯s commands? ¡°Ask yourselves, how could the Heavenly Son of Chu trust usa€¡±who have betrayed our old mastera€¡±and how could we cleanse everything, to start anew under Great Chu? ¡°Only by taking decisive action, leaving no loose ends, can we, despite the endless accusations, show our clear stance. ¡°The Chu Emperor might not trust us, who have betrayed our old master, but will think we have become loyal ministers with no other options, perhaps useful for dirty work, and not easily discarded. ¡°With our prior merits, we cannot speak of grandeur and opulence, but preserving our families should indeed be achievable.¡± ¡°With all said and done, what course to takea€¡±that is for the gentlemen to decide,¡± The hall was silent. This man had spoken very clearly, laying out all the advantages and disadvantages, and even the future prospects, giving them a direction to follow. If they acted according to this plan, protecting their own wealth and status in the future should pose no great problem.¡± ¡°Yet that involves betraying their old master, seeking glory at the expense of the old master, and the one being sold is even a relative.¡± Faced with this difficult choice, not everyone can make the disloyal act of betrayal without any psychological barrier. Not everyone is so shameless.¡± Chapter 1161 - Chapter 1161 Chapter 467 Unification of Central State ?Chapter 1161: Chapter 467 Unification of Central State Chapter 1161: Chapter 467 Unification of Central State ¡°` In the end, it was the Duke of Qing State, Gao Mingsheng, who convened the meeting, that slammed the table and said, ¡°Lord Yang is right, Your Majesty and we all must make a choice eventually. Since we have already decided to surrender, we should either not do it at all, or we should do it thoroughly. Betrayal tarnishes reputation no matter how it¡¯s painted, so let¡¯s not get hung up on the details.¡± At this point, he looked at the two military officers in the room, ¡°General Chen, you are in charge of the Palace Guard, so it¡¯s your job to control His Majesty and the numerous princes and consorts in the palace, preventing any trouble from them. General An, you command Qingyang Gate and the one hundred thousand troops nearby, all at your command. It will be you who opens the city gates to welcome the Chu army into the city. As for myself, I shall seek out the Chu State¡¯s Messenger in the city to discuss the matter of surrendering the city and to establish contact with the Chu army outside the city.¡± After making these arrangements, Gao Mingsheng looked at everyone with a solemn expression, ¡°Gentlemen, our properties, our lives, and our future prosperity all hinge on this moment. I hope you will all work with me to make one last effort for the future!¡± ¡°Your orders will be faithfully obeyed!¡± Everyone bowed in unison and answered with a thunderous response. Following the lead of the Duke of Qing State, they all cut their palms, swore blood oaths, and finalized the allegiance to the matter of surrendering the city, binding everyone together once and for all. Three days later. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Accompanied by a brief scuffle within the city, Zhuxu City¡¯s massive city tower finally thunderously descended. At Qingyang Gate to the east, which had been sealed for several months, a group of Zheng Kingdom officials and military officers led out a group of people dressed in royal robes and a group of soldiers who had laid down their arms, out of the city gate. Across from them, the well-prepared Chu army directly entered the city gate, took control of Qingyang Gate, and quickly spread into the city. On the twenty-first day of the fifth month in the forty-fourth year of Shenwu, Duke Zheng Qing, Gao Mingsheng, led the people of Zhuxu City, bound the emperor, and surrendered, handing over the Zheng Kingdom¡¯s Imperial Capital to Chu State. News of this reached Emperor Chu Luyuan, who was overjoyed and issued an edict to richly reward Gao Mingsheng, bestowing upon him the title of marquis. Those who followed in surrender also received, more or less, some titles or official positions as an example to the world. These Zheng Kingdom officials and major families managed to seize the opportunity before the last chance to jump ship. After making the right choice, they obtained the wealth they desired and preserved their lives and properties. However, the Zheng royal family and the Zheng Heavenly Son they had betrayed were sentenced to death by Luyuan on the charge of resisting the heavenly troops and failing to recognize the Heavenly Mandate. Hundreds of Zheng Emperor¡¯s direct royal family members were thus executed outside Zhuxu City. And those who supervised the executions were none other than those Zheng Kingdom officials, who had sought glory by betraying their lorda€¡±oh no, they should now be called officials and nobles of Great Chu. Thus, although Luyuan made use of these people, he did not fully trust them. He was still forcing them to further prove their loyalty, completely cutting off their way back. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? No one under the sky would ever employ these people who had betrayed their former masters and then personally killed them. For the people who surrendered to Zheng, no one would tolerate them afterward and any power leader would be quick to dispatch them. Chu State was their only way out. And only in this way could Luyuan rest assured using these traitors in the future. Although he didn¡¯t think highly of these people, to be cautious. Still, it was a right decision to use them to eliminate the remnants of the Zheng royal family. ¡­ With the fall of Zhuxu, Zheng Kingdom perished after nine hundred and thirty-seven years of existence. Zheng Kingdom became the first to be extinguished among the four kingdoms of Yuzhou. The news shocked all of Yuzhou. And the people of the world saw the first light of the great undertaking of unifying Central State, an achievement of the ancient Three Emperors, descending upon the Earth once again. After a hiatus of more than thirty thousand years, a united Immortal Dynasty was about to emerge on the Nine Provinces, dominating the Kyushu Ten Domain. This thought began to germinate slowly in the minds of many perceptive individuals. The concept of Chu as the orthodox ruler under heaven also took root in the minds of all with each resounding victory, and the impending unification of Central State. Once Chu State unified Yuzhou, that seed would sprout and envelop the hearts of all. After all. How could an empire that ruled all of Central State, reclaiming the territories of the ancient Three Emperors, not be considered orthodox? It could not be more legitimate. Great Chu is the Heavenly Mandate, the correct lineage, representing the great momentum. When considering Emperor Luyuan¡¯s identity as the last Cultivator in the Nine Provinces, many see him as a replica of the ancient Three Emperors, or rather, their successor. He is seen as the savior who will lead all beings through the calamities that have arrived in The Age of Dharma Decline. And Great Chu is the Immortal Dynasty founded by this Immortal Emperor, and Chu State is the true Immortal State. In times close to the end of The Age of Dharma Decline, people of the Nine Provinces, not unfamiliar and even having had personal encounters with matters of the Immortals. The recognition of an Immortal Dynasty built by an Immortal State is unprecedentedly fervent. Even the fact that Luyuan can still cultivate in The Age of Dharma Decline became a beacon of hope in the eyes of many. A hope for longevity and enduring prosperity. Since Emperor Chu could cultivate, it proved that, in fact, there were still opportunities for Cultivation in The Age of Dharma Decline. And if they were to join the Immortal Dynasty, become senior officials of the Great Chu Immortal State, and establish outstanding services, perhaps they would be rewarded with unique Cultivation secrets by Emperor Chu. Following this successor of the Three Emperors, this living Immortal Emperor, they could rule over the Great Chu Immortal State forever, for tens of thousands of years. ¡°` Chapter 1162 - Chapter 1162 Chapter 467 Unification of Central State_2 ?Chapter 1162: Chapter 467 Unification of Central State_2 Chapter 1162: Chapter 467 Unification of Central State_2 Though many people understood that the idea was insane, even delusional. But just the thought of it, that palpitation in their hearts, that impractical notion, would always compel some to unconsciously lean toward Great Chu, to grasp at the faint chance that was almost impossible. After Great Chu revealed its ambition to unify Central State and establish the Immortal Dynasty. The hearts and Qi Luck of the entire Nine Provinces began to gather toward Great Chu, toward Lu Yuan, frantically converging upon them either actively or passively. This was the trend of the great tide. Under the Heavenly Mandate, vast and mighty. Those who follow shall prosper, those who resist shall perish. The wonder of people¡¯s hearts and Qi Luck is nothing more than this. It was fully demonstrated by Lu Yuan and was in the hands of Great Chu. a€| The conquest of Zheng Kingdom by Great Chu soon showed its influence on the hearts of the world¡¯s people. On Lu Yuan¡¯s side, after Gao Mingsheng and others, who had just surrendered from Zheng Kingdom, were granted official titles and nobility. Under the control of Great Chu, this news had just began to spread in the nearby areas. Over there, Jin Country, still desperately holding onto North Xiang County, was suddenly startled. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã? The ministers of Jin Country had hardly reacted when the Emperor of Jin Country took the initiative to send a Messenger, rushing to Xianyun County to meet Lu Yuan and discuss the matter of surrendering the country. Well, Great Chu didn¡¯t even have to say anything, yet the Emperor of Jin Country voluntarily expressed his willingness to surrender. The reason was quite simple. The example of Zheng Kingdom was too tragic, and the fate of the Emperor of Zheng Kingdom as well as the entire royal family served as a stark warning to the Emperor and royal family of Jin Country. That is, as an emperor, you might be reluctant to give up your foundation and want to resist to the death. But the ministers beneath you may not be willing to die alongside you. Don¡¯t think about any grand imperial grace, those ministers and nobles who have been fed by Jin Country, to be thankful to you. Wasn¡¯t the Duke of Qing State, Gao Mingsheng, from Zheng Kingdom given enough grace and honor by Zheng Kingdom? ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï The Gao family had been associated with Zheng Kingdom for a thousand years, generation after generation sitting on the position of duke of the three nations, second only to the royal family in terms of nobility. But when disaster loomed over Zheng Kingdom, what did the Duke of Qing State do? He simply betrayed the emperor, even going so far as to personally take action, tying up the emperor and surrendering him to the city, and in the end, he even oversaw the beheading of the emperor and the royal family. In this process, though Gao Mingsheng was cursed by people, in secret and in public, how many scorned his actions? But he still did it. For the sake of his own life and fortune, for wealth and glory, he did not hesitate to betray his former master. Ultimately he successfully got on board, leaving the sinking ship that was Zheng Kingdom. The bloody example was right before their eyes. Moreover, within Jin Country, there had long been many ministers in collusion with Great Chu, covertly passing on messages. All these omens, along with the perfect example, were laid before the people of Jin Country. If you were the Emperor of Jin Country, what would you think? Would you continue to trust those ministers below? And if you didn¡¯t trust, what choice would you make in the end? Of course, not to trust, and to prioritize one¡¯s own safety first. Since it¡¯s all about betrayal, instead of being sold by those treacherous ministers, why wouldn¡¯t I, the emperor, personally do the selling? As the emperor, if I personally offered up a province of Jin Country, surely you, Great Chu, would not be too harsh on me, right? That¡¯s five thousand miles of land, several millions of people, several hundreds of thousands of soldiers, and the remaining eight Inborns. Such a huge asset, trading it for a chance to live is not too much, right? You, Great Chu, getting such a great benefit, I don¡¯t even yearn for a duke¡¯s position, at least grant me the title of County Marquis, right? If the above objectives can be achieved, then the lives and fortunes of the royal family of Jin Country, as well as the glory and wealth after surrendering to Great Chu, will also be assured. As for whether doing so will be regretted, whether it will feel indignant? There certainly would be such feelings. No matter how you look at it, it¡¯s a demotion from emperor to subject, the ruling territory changes from an entire country to a titular nobility without actual power, whether it is wealth or power, it is worlds apart compared to before the surrender. Anyone in such a position would feel regret and bitterness in their hearts. But what can be done with these feelings? The trend of Great Chu unifying the world was becoming increasingly clear. Everyone could see that the unification of Central State by Great Chu was unstoppable. Even Jin Country, even if they did not surrender, might not last two or three months. Maybe not even a single month. To not cash in one¡¯s last bit of capital before it¡¯s all gone, getting the best price for oneself. If you really end up with nothing, even if you want to surrender, Great Chu will no longer want you. The fate of Zheng Kingdom¡¯s royal family would then become the outcome for Jin Country¡¯s royal family. It was with this realization that the royals of Jin Country, the Heavenly Son of Jin Country, after discussion, still chose the most sensible option. In the forty-fourth year of Shenwu, on the eighteenth day of the sixth month. Intimidated by the fall of Zheng Kingdom, the Heavenly Son of Jin Country, together with the clan and the Group of Ministers, decided to surrender to Great Chu. Afterward, a Messenger was sent to meet with the Chu Emperor to discuss the surrender of the nation. In the end, facing the offer from the Chu Emperor, granting the Emperor of Jin Country a fief of Ten Thousand Households and the title of County Marquis for his surrender, as well as giving some important influential figures of Jin Country various minor roles, Baron Titles, and some official positions. Jin Country, realizing it truly did not have more capital to obtain better terms. Before Great Chu could no longer wait, already sharpening their swords, ready to restart the war, chose to open the city and surrender. The remaining seven hundred thousand troops of Jin Country, North Xiang County, and the eight Inborn Grandmasters, under the leadership of the Emperor of Jin Country, formally surrendered to Great Chu. Chapter 1163 - Chapter 1163 Chapter 467 Unification of Central State_3 ?Chapter 1163: Chapter 467 Unification of Central State_3 Chapter 1163: Chapter 467 Unification of Central State_3 With this, Jin Country perished, after a reign of a thousand and eight years. ¡­ Following Jin Country¡¯s capitulation and the ceding of North Xiang County, there were no longer any enemies to hinder Chu State in the southern region of Yuzhou. Consequently, Lu Yuan left Qingyunzi in charge of garrisoning North Xiang County to reorganize and absorb the remnants of Jin Country¡¯s forces. He himself, leading a well-rested grand army of eight hundred thousand, marched north toward Beigu City, where Emperor Xu was trapped. Accompanying him were the eight Innate generals who had surrendered from Jin Country, seven Innate generals from Zheng Kingdom, as well as his own personal Inborns, making a total of forty-eight Inborn Grandmasters. But this was still not the limit. Earlier, Lu Yuan had broken through the entirety of Yuzhou, leaving many Inborn Grandmasters in each of the prefectures and counties to stand guard. Now as he made his way back, leading a great army, he simply needed to station troops in various locations, and the Inborn Grandmasters who had been left to defend these areas could be gathered back into his fold. This was the collective of Inborn Grandmasters in Lu Yuan¡¯s hand, and its scale was poised to expand even further. At the same time, the three main military expeditions from Tang Kingdom, the Western front, and Central route had also been progressively deploying towards Beigu City recently. Once these military expeditions arrived, Lu Yuan estimated that by the time he reached Beigu City, he should have over a hundred Inborns under his command. Over a hundred Innatesa€¡±a truly staggering figure. With these individuals at his disposal, he wouldn¡¯t even need the approaching millions-strong Chu army. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Relying solely on these hundred Innates, he could wipe out the million-strong Xu Army in Beigu City without leaving a single survivor. Therefore, Having control of this force, Lu Yuan already decided to treat the conquest of Xu State as the final battle of his Northern Expedition. It¡¯s already the end of June; with winter approaching in October, there are only three months left. In such a timeframe, even if Lu Yuan continued to gather Innates and advanced using this conglomerate, his actions would be limited. After annihilating the Xu Army at Beigu City, at most he could go on to attack Xu State to the north. If everything went smoothly, the fall of Xu State might occur just as winter begins. And this fourth, and last, Northern Expedition could be declared finished as the winter sets in. Yes, this is the final Northern Expedition. Having subdued the four kingdoms of Yuzhou, Chu State has now unified Central State, and there¡¯s no other state or power on the entire land of the Nine Provinces that can match Great Chu. From this point forward, no force will merit the grand endeavor of Chu State mustering its national strength for a grand Northern Expedition. In the future, if there¡¯s a need to fight against Tang and Xu or the foreign tribes of the Western Regions, the barbarian tribes in the south, or the pirates at sea, it won¡¯t be necessary for Lu Yuan to personally take action, or mobilize the army of the whole country. It will only take one general to lead some Innate generals and to form a single military expedition for conquering. The Chu State¡¯s military expeditions were established explicitly for conquering other nations. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Previously, the enemies of Central State were all too powerful, almost all being mid to high-tier hegemonic states, hence Chu required several military expeditions to besiege and conquer them. Ultimately, it took several years to eliminate them. But now, Tang and Xu, which were originally mid to high-tier major states, had been weakened by Chu State and had fallen to mid to lower-tier status. To fight against these two states, Chu State would only need an enhanced version of a military expedition, which would be sufficient. Although the foreign tribes to the west and the barbarians to the south each have three major nations or large tribes formed along their migratory paths, their forces are limited as well. Each of these entities has a population of just over ten million, with no more than ten Innates. Such a scale can be easily managed by a standard military expedition. Regarding the pirates drifting at sea, whether in the East Sea region or the Southsea region, the environment makes it difficult for them to congregate. Countless pirates can only operate as scattered stars, each ship a separate unit. Even if they are able to assemble some fleets, their strength is far inferior to that of the continental powers with a land base. Dealing with them doesn¡¯t require a full military expedition; local garrison forces from the prefectures and counties are more than enough. With all formidable enemies wiped clean, what¡¯s left are but defeated stragglers and a Ragtag Army, hardly worth any concern. Thus, on this journey northward, Lu Yuan felt extremely relaxed. Beigu City couldn¡¯t stop him, and neither could Xu State. This northern advance was simply a matter of reaching out and picking the ripe fruit that was already his for the taking. Indeed, this advance proved to be a mere procession. Lu Yuan led the Chu army northwards, toward Beigu City, the core target. Along the way, the Xu soldiers from each encampment surrendered in succession. There were scarcely any who resisted. The reason for this was simple. Once Xu State received news that Jin Country had already surrendered, Emperor Xu, besieged in Beigu City, recognized one clear fact, however reluctant he may be. That was, the situation had become hopeless; the situation in Yuzhou truly couldn¡¯t be salvaged. Moreover, he had no desire to die, nor did he want to surrender like Chu had done. Therefore, before Lu Yuan¡¯s arrival, seizing the opportunity when Chu¡¯s siege around Beigu City was not yet fully tight and still had gaps, Emperor Xu, accompanied by core military personnel who were second and third-rate in strength and mostly mid to high-ranking officers, and escorted by about a dozen Inborn Grandmasters, Took advantage of a lapse on Chu¡¯s side and broke out of Beigu City. As for the remaining million or so soldiers in Beigu City, Though it pained his heart, Emperor Xu also understood that, under the siege of several million troops from Chu State, he could not take these men with him. Escaping with a few key officers and the help of Inborn Grandmasters in light travel could allow a small group to flee. But with over a million people, no amount of opportunities would suffice for escape. With the emperor gone and the senior officers of the military vanishing without a trace, The soldiers remaining in Beigu City were acutely aware that they had been abandoned. Under such circumstances, of course, few would be foolish enough to continue resisting. Upon Lu Yuan¡¯s arrival, all chose to surrender. Beigu City, Beigu City. This fortress, renowned for its formidable strength in the north, thus opened its gates to Chu without firing a single arrow. Faced with over a million prostrate Xu soldiers, Lu Yuan rode a tall steed into the mighty city. At that moment, as Chu¡¯s banner unfurled atop the city walls, the entirety of Yuzhou, the whole of Central State, was declared united. The era of the Immortal Dynasty¡¯s governance, a revival of the ancient Three Emperors¡¯ magnificent achievements, had officially begun. ¡°This era will be written by Chu State, will be written by me.¡± Lu Yuan stood atop the city wall, looking at the cheering soldiers outside, his heart filled with surging emotions. Chapter 1164 - Chapter 1164 Chapter 468 The Northern Expedition Ends ?Chapter 1164: Chapter 468 The Northern Expedition Ends Chapter 1164: Chapter 468 The Northern Expedition Ends ¡°` With Bei Gu City¡¯s fall, Central State was now unified. For Lu Yuan, the excitement and elation over this groundbreaking achievement lasted only a few days. Soon after, he was overwhelmed by a slew of tedious affairs, such as receiving the surrender of a million troops from Xu State and taking charge of the ten prefectures of Yuzhou, which diluted his passion. There were simply too many things to deal with. The Northern Expedition had been won too quickly, with such abundant spoils that even Chu State found it hard to digest. What was even more troublesome was that in addition to handling these matters, Lu Yuan also had to prepare for a new campaign. Despite the surrender of the million-strong Xu Army at Bei Gu City, their core generals and Inborn Grandmasters had escaped back to Xu State with Emperor Xu. Though Xu State had lost three prefectures in Yuzhou and suffered a significant loss of territory and population, it was severely weakened. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï But back in their homeland of Liang State, they still had some resources left. According to the Imperial Council, Xu State, like other states in recent years, had relocated a substantial portion of its population and assets to Central State. However, they likely still had a population of six to seven million remaining in Liang State. With this as a foundation, they might be able to gather a military force of a million strong with some effort. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Moreover, with the bulk of the Xu military officers and Inborn Grandmasters who had fled back with Emperor Xu, Xu State¡¯s strength remained formidable. If left unchecked, it would certainly cause more trouble in the future. With the mindset that being busy now would save effort later, it was better to wrap up everything at once rather than having to work harder in the future. After briefly organizing the surrendered troops from Bei Gu City and the affairs of Yuzhou, just ten days passed, and as soon as the situation in Yuzhou began to stabilize and the region saw initial peace, Lu Yuan immediately led his reorganized elite army of three hundred thousand, along with over a hundred Inborn Grandmasters. He continued on the northern campaign, following the trail left by the fleeing Emperor Xu and his men, heading towards Xu State in Liang State. Swift action is valuable in war, and deploying troops early rather than late is advisable. Otherwise, by the time Emperor Xu and his men could regroup and prepare their defense, summoning a large army, Even though they would still be no match for Lu Yuan, the tragic deaths and injuries suffered by the Xu Army in a drawn-out battle would be inevitable. Now that Central State was settled and the Nine Provinces¡¯ submission was merely a matter of time, Lu Yuan already saw himself as the sovereign of the world, viewing the people of the Nine Provinces as his own subjects and all the people of the world as his personal property. As he worked towards unification, saving even one life meant that Chu State¡¯s foundation would be that much richer in the future. Therefore, in the conquest of Xu State, the fewer people that died, the better. Breaking Xu must be fast! Embracing this concept, Lu Yuan¡¯s expedition was once again made up primarily of elites. The army rode swift horses, rotating among five steeds, covering five hundred miles in a single day, and arrived at the banks of the great river in just three days. Then, gathering civilian boats, he immediately led his troops across the river. Even because of the scarcity of boats, Lu Yuan left the three hundred thousand-strong army behind, leaving only a few avatars to supervise them as they followed slowly. He himself led three thousand cavalrymen and more than ninety Inborn Grandmasters who had crossed the river first, striking swiftly towards Xu State. The target was Xu State¡¯s Imperial Capital, Five Goat City. ¡­ As it turned out, Lu Yuan¡¯s haste was highly effective. As he led the army forward, they bypassed numerous prefectures and counties of Xu State, sweeping through amidst panic like the wind. Even as local officials dispatched messengers to urgently inform those further back, The messengers, despite their haste, were slower than the advancing Chu Army. Trailing behind, choking on dust and witnessing the disarray left in their wake, they could only heave sighs of exasperation. By the time the message was delivered, the Chu Army had already passed through the counties behind them, prompting yet another set of messengers and a new cycle of pursuit. In this game of catch-up, the Chu Army, like heavenly soldiers, arrived suddenly at Five Goat City before Xu State could even react. At this time, The return of the Xu State monarch and ministers to Five Goat City had been a mere three days earlier. Compared to Lu Yuan¡¯s relentless chase, these fleeing monarchs and ministers of Xu State had indeed traveled swiftly when escaping Yuzhou, fearing a pursuit by the Chu Army. However, once they reached Hebei in Liang State and no longer felt threatened by pursuers, they took some time to rest by the river. During this pause, they focused on assembling local troops, ordering the prefectures and counties along the river to increase their soldiers and strengthen river defenses. Only when the defensive line was somewhat fortified did Emperor Xu lead his high officials and generals back to Five Goat City. Without the threat of the Chu Army on the way back and fatigued from the journey, there was no need for them to rush. They rested well along the way, travelling leisurely in carriages and carts towards their country. This lackadaisical attitude resulted in Lu Yuan¡¯s force, even though they set off more than ten days later, They still caught up to the Xu State monarch and ministers at Five Goat City without much delay. The incredible pace had extraordinary effects. Because at that time, Emperor Xu and his court, who had just returned to Xu State, had barely recovered from their weariness and had come up with a plan to levy a large army within the country to confront the Chu Army. The plan had barely been drawn up, and the people of Xu State never anticipated that the Chu Army would pursue them with such urgency, leaving them no time to respond. Therefore, they were completely unprepared for the arrival of the Chu Army. At this point in Five Goat City, there were only the original one hundred thousand defenders and a mere eight Inborn Grandmasters assigned to the summer quarters. This level of strength obviously could not resist Lu Yuan¡¯s thirty thousand elite troops and nearly a hundred Inborn Grandmasters. Chapter 1165 - Chapter 1165 Chapter 468 The Northern Expedition Ends_2 ?Chapter 1165: Chapter 468 The Northern Expedition Ends_2 Chapter 1165: Chapter 468 The Northern Expedition Ends_2 Yes, the main force was still nearly a hundred Inborns. The severe gap in high-end combat power becomes more pronounced on the battlefield, especially in smaller scale battles. After pressing onward until reaching below Five Goat City. The city gates of the Xu State Imperial Capital remained open, and pedestrians inside and outside the city moved about unobstructed. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï This is the deep rear area, with a large army at the front and another stationed within the city. So, even though they had just suffered a terrible defeat which unsettled many hearts, the residents of Five Goat City, before the Chu army¡¯s arrival, had little worry about their own safety. Peace and tranquility still prevailed here. However, this tranquility was soon shattered. With just a single charge, to the shock of the defenders and pedestrians, the Chu army knocked them aside and charged straight into Five Goat City. Lu Yuan led the charge into Five Goat City, first splitting off several Inborns. Groups of three to five Inborns each took a few thousand troops under their command to seize various city gates and important government offices within the city. Then he led the remaining main force along the city¡¯s main thoroughfare, heading straight for the imperial palace. Capture the leader first to capture the thieves. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï The detached armies seized key locations within the city to stabilize the internal situation and seal off the city so that Xu people inside couldn¡¯t escape. The decisive battle lay with Lu Yuan¡¯s troops. Just by capturing or killing Emperor Xu and taking the imperial palace, the people of the entire Five Goat City, and even the entire Xu State, would become headless flies, no longer united. Then, using Five Goat City as a base, they would dispatch Inborn Grandmasters to take absolute martial control of the surrounding prefectures and counties. Lu Yuan would no longer need to act personally as, without the capital, Xu State would crumble on its own. They just had to wait for the follow-up forces to arrive, and the entirety of Xu State would be easily taken. With such an absolute advantage in high-end combat power, annihilating a large nation appeared so simple. ¡­ Destroy the deities if they stand in your way, slay the Buddhas if they obstruct. Although Lu Yuan hurried after his arrival to reduce the losses this war would cause¡­ in truth, once he entered the battlefield, he put aside his kindness and raised the butcher¡¯s knife. In the midst of battle, there are no young, no old, no women, no children, no commonersa€¡±there is only friend and foe. Any trace of mercy could become a fatal flaw that leads to one¡¯s own death. This was a lesson he had learned through several painful experiences since he first led an army. So, on his way to the imperial palace, regardless of who stood before him, anyone who dared to block the way faced death. With such decisive and ruthless action, it wasn¡¯t long before Lu Yuan cut through the entire city, reaching the outskirts of the imperial palace. His arrival was so swift that, even as he approached, the palace gates were still closed, and the Forbidden Army Guards, responsible for their defense, were still complacent and unaware of the turmoil within the city. The transmission of messages can be slow and delayed. When your speed exceeds the pace at which news spreads, the outcome is an enemy that unknowingly opens its arms to you. A pillar of Great Solar Divine Fire erupted, as Lu Yuan blasted open the shut palace gates, reducing dozens of nearby Xu Army Guards to ashes in the process. The army poured in, and the quiet palace became noisy and chaotic as the day of bloodshed began. Meanwhile, Emperor Xu, deep within the palace, remained utterly oblivious to everything happening in the city and to the startling changes within the imperial palace. He was lying in the arms of his favored consort, using her warm embrace to soothe the terror-induced exhaustion that had severely strained his mind and body these past days. So, when the great doors burst open¡­ and Lu Yuan, led by the guiding eunuch, charged into the bedchamber, the Xu Heavenly Son¡¯s disturbed and irate expression¡­ changed to one of shock and terror upon seeing the sudden arrival of the Chu soldiers. His emotions fluctuated so wildly that, compounded with his advanced age, he died instantly. Witnessing the emperor¡¯s death, which even with his experience Lu Yuan found utterly preposterous, he was speechless. He hadn¡¯t expected¡­ that the man he had planned to capture alive would die of fright on the spot. He had intended to use Emperor Xu¡¯s authority to command the surrender of Xu State¡¯s military forces across the land. Now it seemed that plan was unlikely to succeed. But it also wasn¡¯t a problem. With Five Goat City taken and Emperor Xu dead, the core of Xu State was now under Chu controla€¡±the enemy was essentially brain-dead. Dealing with such an opponent wasn¡¯t difficult; it would just require a bit more effort. Lu Yuan waved to have the consort, who was screaming in fear at the death of the Heavenly Son and the arrival of the Chu troops, dragged away for custody. After taking over the palace, he quickly issued orders. ¡°Detain all concubines, palace maids, eunuchs, and guards within the palace. Send people to seal off the treasury within the palace and the storehouses throughout the city. Thoroughly investigate those who stir up trouble during the turmoil. Anyone who dares transgress shall be executed without mercy.¡± The palace had fallen, and Five Goat City was in hand. Now that the strategic goal had been achieved, swiftly restoring order to the city was of utmost importance. The entire city, including its citizens and Xu State¡¯s resources, now belonged to Lu Yuan. He had no fondness for those who sought to profit from the chaosa€¡±such actions were essentially taking advantage of his situation. Such scoundrels, even if taken to Chu State, would be nothing but trouble. There was no need to keep them around. For Lu Yuan, it was a matter of eliminating them one by onea€¡±no mercy was to be shown. Chapter 1166 - Chapter 1166 Chapter 468 The Northern Expedition Ends_3 ?Chapter 1166: Chapter 468 The Northern Expedition Ends_3 Chapter 1166: Chapter 468 The Northern Expedition Ends_3 ¡­ After taking over Five Goat City, he controlled the local situation and persuaded a group of Xu State¡¯s officials to surrender, using them as puppets and guides thereafter. Lu Yuan then followed his own plan, starting from Five Goat City as the core, continuously dispatching troops to attack and take over various prefectures and counties of Xu State. While the troops marched on their campaigns, they also carried with them edicts sealed with the Xu State¡¯s imperial jade seal, issued in the name of the Emperor of Xu Country. These were meant to be tokens to persuade the local officials and defenders to surrender upon arrival. For those whose will to resist was not very strong, or those who were utterly loyal to the court or the emperor, this edict undoubtedly served as the ace up their sleeve. The former could realize that the Imperial Capital had fallen, and the emperor had surrendered. What was the point for them, as his subjects, to continue resisting? Unable to win and without the reason to fight, it was natural for them to choose surrender over resistance. As for the latter, the die-hard loyalists, as long as they cared about the safety of the emperor and the imperial family, not wishing to see their sovereign threatened, they too had no choice but to surrender. Thus, whether one was disloyal or loyal, the outcome was the same: surrender. As both outcomes led to surrender, the Chu army¡¯s takeover of the entire territory of Xu State was naturally smooth and effortless. Oftentimes, the arrival of the imperial edict followed by the actual sighting of the Chu army would be enough to confirm that the events were genuine, prompting the local Xu State¡¯s offices and military forces to open their gates and surrender. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Even if there were some ambitious individuals unwilling to give up their foundations and determined to resist, against the powerful strike of the dozen or so Inborn Grandmasters dispatched by Lu Yuan among the troops, they couldn¡¯t create any significant disturbance and were easily suppressed. The transition of Chu State taking over Xu State proceeded methodically, with only occasional ripples of resistance. Even after waiting for about ten days, as the subsequent arrival of more than two hundred thousand troops reached Hebei, the main force caught up. With a large number of Chu soldiers as the backbone, the takeover of Xu State by Chu became even smoother. As soon as the momentum was seen to be irreversible, countless people from Xu State, while feeling sorrow, also breathed a sigh of relief and surrendered cleanly to Chu. The whole process lasted nearly a month. On the seventh day of the eighth month, as the last Xu State fortress in Liangzhou lowered its banner and raised the flag bearing the Chu emblem, changing its allegiance, Chu State¡¯s absorption of the four Liang prefectures was officially declared complete. And at this moment, Xu State was formally announced to have perished, after an existence of 1,321 years. The fourth Northern Expedition of Chu State, during which Lu Yuan campaigned against four countries, thus declared the demise of the third. This campaign concluded with an unprecedented and resounding victory. As the news spread, the world, already shocked by Chu State¡¯s unification of Central State, received the news of Xu State being annihilated by a swift strike from Chu¡¯s army within a month and was further astonished. Particularly the Tang Kingdom adjacent to Xu State. Learning of Chu¡¯s forces crossing the river and Xu¡¯s swift fall, they were terrified out of their wits. One must know, this Northern Expedition targeted the four states of Tang, Xu, Zheng, and Jin. Originally, the Tang army had withdrawn from Yuzhou, and with the Chu army not pursuing, this greatly relieved the people of Tang, thinking perhaps the Chu army lacked the resources, or simply didn¡¯t value the regions outside of Central State and would not attack again. This belief had allowed them to spend a few months in peace. But now, with the Chu army suddenly striking Xu State and its immediate collapse, this bloody example unmistakenly informed the people of Tang. That is, you were mistaken. Retreating to Hebei does not mean safety. The Chu army will come for you regardless. And Xu State had ceased to exist; in this Northern Expedition, the sole remaining country subdued by the Chu army was Tang Kingdom. Being the final target of the Chu army, with the enemy close at hand, ready to strike at any moment, had utterly terrified everyone in Tang Kingdom. The horrifying reality had chilled the courage of everyone, from the top to the bottom of Tang Kingdom. Thus, to save their own lives, Tang Kingdom desperately began to recruit troops and then gathered everyone in the capital, preparing to muster all strength for a decisive defense of the Imperial Capital against Chu State. In their frenzy, in just one month, more than four million troops had amassed in the Tang capital. Given Tang Kingdom¡¯s national power, even with prior preparations, gathering so many people in such a hurried manner made the quality of these forces easy to imagine. Of those more than four million, even sturdy women were forcibly dragged in to serve as part of the forces. This sheer act of padding numbers revealed not only their madness but also the fear in their hearts. And this action was practically a catastrophic blow to Tang Kingdom¡¯s local production. Originally, after fleeing back to Jingzhou, Tang Kingdom could have recovered in three to five years, returning to its status as a mid-tier hegemon. But after this ordeal, let alone three to five years, it would take Tang Kingdom a decade or two to regain its vitality. Even without Lu Yuan lifting a finger, the opponent might fall into internal turmoil and slowly collapse on their own. The example of how Pre-Yue was annihilated wasn¡¯t a distant warning. a€| However, Tang Kingdom had evidently worried too much. In this Northern Expedition, Chu State had already taken ten prefectures of Yuzhou, and now four more from Liang State, totaling fourteen prefectures across Two Provinces. Combined, these territories were equivalent to a complete and vast province. For Chu State, it essentially meant an increase in territory by half. With such a sudden acquisition of so much land, plus the original large swaths of newly occupied territories, as well as continuous immigration projects in Yan, Ji, and Yangzhou¡¯s main territory, All these burdens meant that even with Chu State¡¯s size, it was somewhat overextended. So, after the annihilation of Xu State and the occupation of Liang territory, Lu Yuan had no further thoughts of expansion. He would not attack Tang Kingdom. Or rather, within this year, Chu State would not continue to expand. To eliminate Tang Kingdom, even if swiftly, would have to wait until next year at the earliest. And taking it slower, maybe in three to five years, after the newly acquired territories were assimilated, it would be normal to take action then. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Therefore, with the thirty thousand strong army he brought as a foundation, and after incorporating two hundred thousand from the Xu Army, they began to expand. Lu Yuan made his Avatar, Qingyunzi, the chief commander, and with nine Inborn subordinates, they established a Liang State Military Expedition to manage the five hundred thousand strong army there. Their duty was to suppress Liang State, while also monitoring and constraining Tang Kingdom¡¯s movements, in preparation for the future conquest of the Three Nations. After handling the aftermath, he, leading a retinue of Xu State prisoners and the spoils of this battle, began the triumphant journey southward. With Lu Yuan¡¯s withdrawal, this fourth Northern Expedition of Chu State also came to a triumphant close. a€| In the 44th year of the Shenwu era, Chu army conducted four Northern Expeditions. In the same year, Zheng, Jin, and Xu were annihilated, Yu and Liang were subdued, and Tang Kingdom fled to Jingzhou. Chu defeated powerful adversaries and unified the realm within Central State, heralding an era not seen since the Three Emperors of antiquity. The Three Emperors passed into legend, sung of by countless generations, and the Shenwu epoch belonging to the Chu Emperor, from this year forth, was officially underway. Chapter 1167 - Chapter 1167 Chapter 469 Shenwu Era ?Chapter 1167: Chapter 469 Shenwu Era Chapter 1167: Chapter 469 Shenwu Era Time flies, in the blink of an eye, ten years had passed. Great Chu, Guangling Prefecture, Jiangdu. In a tea house within the city, a group of weary peddlers and porters crowded around a small stall, drinking the coarse bitter tea, all looking towards the man at the center. Clad in a patched blue-cloth garment and sporting a goat beard on his chin, the Storyteller took a sip of tea to moisten his throat, then slapped down on the table, ¡°Yesterday, I left off mentioning how, in the forty-fourth year of Shenwu, the Emperor led his host of Primordial Divine Generals and Daoist Immortals to launch the fourth Northern Expedition to subjugate the Heroes of Yuzhou. Indeed, the Emperor truly lived up to his name of Shenwu. Facing him, the Heroes of Yuzhou crumbled like petals in the wind, and within merely three to four months, they were chased out of Yuzhou. They didn¡¯t even last half a year before they were completely obliterated by the might of Great Chu¡¯s celestial army. And that Pretender Emperor of Xu, thinking he had reached safety upon his escape back to Liang State, But the Emperor¡¯s stratagems were divine and foresighted. He had already anticipated the opponent¡¯s thinking, so after capturing more than a million Xu soldiers at Beigu City, he immediately went in tireless pursuit to the north. As an Immortal walking the earth, the Emperor naturally possessed Immortal Techniques. During his pursuit, he cast a cloaking spell on the entire army, obscuring the forms of tens of thousands of soldiers. Even under the broad daylight, ordinary people could not make out the army¡¯s presence. Thus, the Emperor led his celestial troops right on the heels of the Pretender Emperor of Xu, catching them completely unawares as they descended upon Five Goat City. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 The Pretender Emperor of Xu had unwittingly led the way, presenting his capital city on a silver platter. There¡¯s also an interesting tale about this. It¡¯s said that after leading the celestial troops of Great Chu into the city, the Pretender Emperor of Xu didn¡¯t realize the Emperor himself was following right behind. So he went to his harem, and in frightened desperation, sought to favor his beloved Concubine Zhen, hoping for some relief from the terror in his heart. But amid their passionate embrace, the troops of Great Chu stormed the palace and burst into his bedchamber. Frightened out of his wits by this, the Pretender Emperor of Xu died right atop Concubine Zhen, succumbing to sheer fright. Tsk tsk, to die atop warm fragrant jade, his end was rather nicer than that of other pretenders from various countries,¡± At this point, the Storyteller exclaimed with a tsk tsk. The rough men nearby caught on and burst into laughter, enlivening the atmosphere at once. They exchanged banter, each adding a sentence, beginning to imagine the scene for themselves. Everyone thought they were correct, narrating with such certainty as if they had witnessed it firsthand, nearly coming to blows over the dispute. Noticing the atmosphere turning sour, the owner of the tea stall quickly signaled the Storyteller he had hired, gesturing for him to defuse the situation. After all, if his stall was wrecked, he would have to pay dearly. Faced with the demands of his financier, the Storyteller dared not neglect them and, as the argument showed no signs of subsiding, he slapped the table again, saying, ¡°Gentlemen, gentlemen, calm yourselves. The Concubine Zhen of the Pretender Emperor of Xu is but one beauty from Liang State. In the vast world, there lie the Nine Provinces; and beyond the Nine Provinces, there are the Ten Domains. Though the lands of the Ten Domains no longer exist, The people of those domains have already moved to the lands of Great Chu. With the combined peoples of the Nine Provinces and the Ten Domains here, what beauty cannot be found? Hold off, and listen to how, after the Emperor unified the world, he went about subduing the various nations and tribes, bringing all under the sway of the Nine Provinces. And in the process, he discovered the beauties from all the states and domains, which were taken by the Divine Generals of Great Chu and presented to the Emperor.¡± Indeed, compared to squabbling, it¡¯s the story that¡¯s more enticing. Watching the Storyteller continue with the tales of Great Chu¡¯s unification of the realm, the crowd immediately ceased their disputes and quieted down to listen. Seeing that the crowd was no longer noisy, the Storyteller let out a sigh of relief, then slapped the table and said, ¡°But let¡¯s talk of the Emperor who, after conquering Xu, returned to Great Liang in triumph. For the next half a year or so, he remained in Great Liang, attending to the critical state affairs, governing the world. How astute and heroic was the Emperor? Under his rule, although it had not been even a year, the people of the recently conquered territories of Yuzhou had already settled down to peaceful lives, free from the turmoils of war. The land of Central State had returned to Chu. The earth was serene, and a peaceful and prosperous age had begun to unfold. Yet, who would have thought, at such a time, the Island Barbarians and Forest Barbarians of the south still knew not peace. Instead of living quietly, they invaded Great Chu¡¯s Yangzhou day after day, plundering and killing the frontier people. By the summer of the forty-fifth year of Shenwu, such behavior had reached its peak. ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï The regions south of the four prefectures of Jian¡¯an County, South Sea Prefecture, Qianzhong County, and Xichuan Prefecture, including the prefectures themselves, were occupied by those barbarians. The edge of the barbarian blade even appeared within Dongting Prefecture. Dongting Prefecture, as everyone knows, was the former center of the Imperial Capital, the location of the old capital Baling. Just like our Jiangdu, if Jiangdu had barbarians nearby, wouldn¡¯t the impact be significant? So, upon hearing the news, the Emperor flew into a towering rage, immediately mobilizing generals, dispatching an army of three hundred thousand, with sixty Divine Generals and True Persons. He appointed True Person Huang Xuan as the supreme commander, heading south to subdue the Forest and Island Barbarians¡­¡± This Storyteller, having first outlined the cause of the conflict, then added his own interpretation based on the news he had heard, began to vividly and animatedly describe to the crowd the various exploits of True Person Huang Xuan leading the army against the southern barbarians. These exploits inevitably included the vicious tactics of the barbarians from the south, their witchcraft, and poison arts, and how True Person Huang Xuan cast Immortal Techniques, the army¡¯s Divine Generals ingeniously overcame the enemy, and the soldiers of Great Chu showed their indomitable courage. Chapter 1168 - Chapter 1168 Chapter 469 Shenwu Era_2 ?Chapter 1168: Chapter 469 Shenwu Era_2 Chapter 1168: Chapter 469 Shenwu Era_2 There were the dangers and hardships of the Southern Border, with venomous insects everywhere and miasma rampant. The tumultuous waves of the Southsea, with unpredictable wind and rain, and all sorts of fantastical occurrences at sea. In summary. After arduous and unparalleled battles, and what could be called adventurous exploits, the Southern Expedition Army spent two years penetrating deep into the rainforest and amid the Southsea, and eventually managed to repel both the Forest Barbarians and the Island Barbarians. In the end, the Southern Expedition Army returned triumphantly with tens of millions of captured barbarians and numerous rare and exotic treasures. By the time he finished recounting these stories, an hour had already passed. The Storyteller¡¯s throat was dry and parched, and even after drinking several sips of water, the discomfort was unstoppable, and his throat still felt burning hot. So, he set down his wooden clapper, gave a respectful bow, and prepared to leave. But the audience, their interest piqued by his tales, found it hard to contain their excitement and were reluctant to let him go. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Even his employer, the owner of the tea stall, was enthralled by the story and did not want him to leave. Mainly because, during the storytelling, the audience had ordered quite a few more teas and snacks, earning him a good sum of money. Thus, he held onto the Storyteller and whispered a few words in private, gestured with his hands, and after several rounds of haggling, the two agreed on a price. Interest sways the heart. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Driven by money, the Storyteller¡¯s throat miraculously healed, and he continued, ¡°As I was saying, True Person Huang Xuan returned from subduing the Southern Barbarians to victory. After this great victory, Great Chu¡¯s Yangzhou became stable, and thus enjoyed a peaceful era. However, the world, apart from Central State and Yangzhou, had other areas that did not belong to Great Chu but were instead controlled by other countries and tribes. This era of peace did not last long. Just two years after the Southern Expedition, an uprising broke out in the West Side in Yong State. It turned out that the lands of Yong State were originally owned by Zhou Country, but later taken by Wei after its conquest, becoming Wei¡¯s territory. Yet after Great Chu¡¯s Northern Expedition, Wei was vanquished by Chu, and the Eastern lands previously held by Wei fell into Chu¡¯s realm. Now, one of Great Chu¡¯s six major cities, Luo Capital in Henan, was situated in Yong East. Since Chu¡¯s unification of the Central State, Yong East came to enjoy peace. Yong West, on the other hand, was home to the Western Regions foreign tribes who migrated westward. Like the Southern Barbarians, they were originally various small nations and tribes, forcibly amalgamated during their migration. Each had different natures, habits, and methods. Gathered together, one can imagine what that was like. Ever since they migrated to Yong West¡­¡± Originally, Lu Yuan and Wei went to war together, jointly attacking the barbarians in the southern parts of Yong and Yan States as well as the southern areas of the steppes. Chu¡¯s main adversaries at the time were the nations of Bahan Na and Mojilo, entrenched in the Helong region. Wei, on the other hand, was tackling Huotuluo Country, whose influence had penetrated the southern steppes and Yan State. However, Lu Yuan¡¯s primary objective was to draw out Wei¡¯s main force and then take the opportunity to launch a surprise attack on the enemy¡¯s undefended interior. Thus, the campaign in Helong was only a feint; after hastily repelling the barbarians of the Western Henan and Longxi districts, Lu¡¯s forces withdrew and turned to attack Wei directly. As a result, when Chu struck, the powers of Bahan Na and Mojilo located in the Yong West Region retained their full strength and suffered little damage. On the other hand, the then-mighty Huotuluo Country, unaware of the extent of Wei¡¯s resolve, emerged victoriously from a defensive battle and even annihilated the main force of the Wei Army. Nevertheless, this victory left them weakened by the heavy assault from Wei¡¯s main force and severely diminished in strength. Later, seeing their neighbor weakened and facing such a formidable enemy to the east, both Bahan Na and Mojilo immediately turned their forces to besiege Huotuluo, aiming to absorb it to strengthen themselves before turning eastward. Then, after eight years of warfare, faced with the assault of two powerful enemies, Huotuluo Country could no longer hold out and was completely defeated, swallowed up by both Bahan Na and Mojilo. Having consumed a nation of equal stature, both Bahan Na and Mojilo greatly increased their strength, each adding four or five million people to their populations. At this time, only these two countries remained in the entire Western Regions of the Nine Provinces. As the Two Countries were equally matched in size and strength, determining a victor between them seemed exceedingly difficult and potentially lengthy. Hence, upon the elimination of Huotuluo, the two immediately entered into an alliance, signing a pact and becoming Allies. They then upheld their initial agreement and began their eastward assault on Chu. However, these two nations had always been sequestered on the fringes of the Western Regions, engaged in their own affairs. The distinct appearance of the Western Regions tribes made them stand out in Central State, making it challenging to integrate and gather intelligence. Consequently, they were not well-informed about Chu¡¯s unification of the entire Central State or its subjugation of the Yangzhou Barbarians. Or, perhaps, even with the knowledge, they had no choice but to press forward. This was because earthquakes had begun to strike the Western Regions after eight years of their own infighting and now appeared on the lands of Yong State. If they did not advance eastward at this juncture, they feared being buried alive by the relentless earthquakes without even needing Chu to take up arms against them. Willing or not, these Western Regions tribes had to push east. But advancing at this time was like delivering themselves into Chu¡¯s hands. Lu Yuan simply removed a few hundred thousand troops, assigned several dozen Inborn masters, and imitating the strategies of the Southern Expedition, he easily resolved the conflict. The two great Western Regions countries fell in a single battle. The thirty million-plus population within their nations now belonged to Great Chu. Furthermore, after four years of recovery following Chu¡¯s unification, the country¡¯s strength had grown steadily, and with sufficient reserves accrued, it was ready to expand outward. Chapter 1169 - Chapter 1169 Chapter 469 Shenwu Era_3 ?Chapter 1169: Chapter 469 Shenwu Era_3 Chapter 1169: Chapter 469 Shenwu Era_3 ¡°` Thinking about how, rather than waiting for others to attack in the future, it would be better to strike now. Thus, after resolving the war in Yong State, Lu Yuan dispatched two armies consecutively, to subjugate Xu State and Tang Kingdom. At this time, having gathered the strength of almost half the world, the number of Inborn Grandmasters in Chu State had surpassed two hundred. Even after deducting those left to defend the homeland, each of the two northern countries could spare around sixty or seventy people. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? With such strength, the two countries naturally couldn¡¯t resist. They both fell within less than half a year. After the last two countries of the north were destroyed, the remaining barbarian forces in the north, faced with the military might of Great Chu, were terrified and came forward to surrender. Even the pirates far out in the East Sea, upon learning that the entire Nine Provinces had been unified, came ashore to submit and no longer dared to harass. The entire Nine Provinces were thus unified, with only one country and one power in the world, and that was Chu State. ¡°Ultimately, the emperor swept across the Kyushu Ten Domain, unifying the world under one rule, without any more chaos caused by wars, allowing all people to enjoy peaceful times. Even the four extreme calamities were mitigated as people continuously migrated, with populations from various states flocking to Central State, making this place increasingly populous and prosperous. This year, as living in the four extremes became increasingly intolerable, with people struggling to survive, only Central State remained a happy land. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Therefore, the emperor formally divided Central State into thirty-three provinces and established six capitals beyond these provinces. Apart from the Central Capital, Liang, the other five capitals served as frontier defenses for Central State, to settle the affairs of the world. In light of decades of suffering from wars, the entire world¡¯s troops were gathered to construct six great Magical Artifacts, which were placed in the six capitals for worship to secure the world¡¯s Qi Luck and bless peace for ten thousand years. Starting from this year, everyone says that the emperor has pacified the world, united the Kyushu Ten Domain, saved millions from peril, and inaugurated an era of great peace that will last for ten thousand years. Such achievements surpassed those of the Three Emperors of antiquity; Great Chu¡¯s reign shines with unprecedented splendor. The Group of Ministers jointly submitted a petition, and the people of the world collectively pleaded, to bestow the emperor with a noble title, calling him Shenwu the Great Emperor. This Great Chu was also revered as the Immortal Dynasty. The old calendrical system left by the Three Emperors was inadequate to mark events amidst the ruins of the four extremes and the turmoils of the Nine Provinces. Thus, after the unification of Central State, the emperor ordered his wise men to revise the calendar and determine a new era. Only this year did it finally take shape; the Grand Historian presented the calendrical system, and the emperor named it Shenwu. This is the Shenwu Era; starting from this year, it is also called the Shenwu period, and a new age began¡­¡± At this point, the Storyteller slapped the table, drawing a closing note to this legendary tale. Those nearby, captivated and intoxicated, were all immersed in the grand and majestic tales of Shenwu the Great Emperor and the ministers of the Immortal Dynasty unifying the world. As the Storyteller described vividly, everyone was so engrossed they couldn¡¯t help themselves. So much so that when the Storyteller finished the story, they were hardly aware of it. It wasn¡¯t until the teahouse owner personally came forward and gently reminded them that they finally snapped back to reality. Looking around, the Storyteller had disappeared without a trace. And by this time, the slanting sun had already brought dusk. They had listened to that story for an entire afternoon. Those who then came back to their senses started to panic, hastily gathering their things, preparing to get busy with their businesses before the night markets began. The stories of kings and generals were indeed fascinating and attractive. But to these ordinary folks, there was still a sense of distance, unable to truly understand and empathize. But there was one point in which the Storyteller was indeed correct. Nowadays, it was indeed an era of prosperity under the Immortal Dynasty, a time of peace. No wars or banditry, light Corvee Labor by the government, everyone had some land and home, storing plenty of grain and silver tales. Those villagers from outside the city were currently bringing the vegetables or trinkets they had produced into Jiangdu to sell. If times were not good, how could they be so comfortable? If it were ten years ago or even just five, when there were still wars in the world, they dared not even imagine living like this. Unification is wonderful, indeed. It¡¯s only with unification, with only one emperor in the world, that they could live well. If only Shenwu the Great Emperor, who is an Old Man above, a true Immortal, could be emperor forever. Having heard the entire story of the founding of the Immortal Dynasty, people nurtured a simple hope for the sagely and magnificent emperor, who couldn¡¯t possibly be any better. The crowd in the teahouse quickly dispersed. But the teahouse didn¡¯t close just yet; the owner tidied up the tables, and soon new customers arrived. With peace throughout the land and populations growing due to migration, the world had become filled with life. Particularly in Jiangdu. As one of the six capitals, its prosperity was unlike anything else, with no curfews to speak of. If daytime was bustling, then at night, with everyone coming out, business was even more booming. Tonight, the teahouse owner was going to make even more money! While these Jiangdu commoners began to hustle for their living¡­ ¡­ Inside the newly built royal palace in Jiangdu, Lu Yuan looked at the Magical Artifact staff laying in the vast hall before him and nodded in satisfaction. ¡°Not bad, not bad. The Heavenly Destiny Staff I fashioned from the essence of the southern troops I gathered has finally taken shape.¡± Lu Yuan touched the staff that took him three months to forge and felt an immense joy in his heart. Ever since the world unified, with soaring Qi Luck, his cultivation of the Taiping Dao Book skyrocketed countless times. Last year, he had already absorbed the last trace of Spiritual Energy Between Heaven and Earth, pushing his cultivation to the limit where it could no longer advance even a tiny bit. Thus, he achieved a Breakthrough to the Five Qi Towards Origin realm. As he had predicted, the remaining Spiritual Energy in the world indeed could not sustain his cultivation to become a True Person and condense the Human Dao Fruit. Therefore, when his cultivation could no longer progress, Lu Yuan turned to other means to enhance his strength. His Mana Cultivation could no longer be elevated. But there were other ways to strengthen his power, such as Magical Artifacts. For this reason, the three Magical Artifacts from the Taiping Dao Book that initially made Lu Yuan so envious were now on his agenda. ¡°` Chapter 1170 - Chapter 1170 Chapter 470 Magical Treasure Set ?Chapter 1170: Chapter 470: Magical Treasure Set Chapter 1170: Chapter 470: Magical Treasure Set Practitioner¡¯s Magical Treasures are divided into three levels: Magical Artifact, Immortal Artifacts, and Dao Artifacts. Each level is further divided into Upper Grade, Middle Grade, and Lower Grade. The three Taiping Artifacts refer to the Taiping Sword, Heavenly Destiny Staff, and Myriad Peoples Seal. These three are Upper Grade Magical Artifacts, Fortune Treasures, and have the potential to be upgraded to Immortal Artifacts in the future. In fact, Lu Yuan treated them as if they were Immortal Artifacts from the start. The confidence behind this comes from the tremendous Qi Luck gathered after he united the Central State. As the name implies, the most important aspects of Qi Luck Magical Artifacts are the two words: Qi Luck. The reality is the same. To refine Qi Luck Magical Artifacts, there is no need for materials that are extremely precious or high-grade; one only needs to refine them with Peaceful Dao Power that contains Qi Luck according to specific methods, giving them the capacity to contain and carry Qi Luck. Then, it is about venerating them and day after day, absorbing Qi Luck, continuously enhancing their power. The more Qi Luck a Magical Artifact carries, the stronger its might becomes. Once enough Qi Luck accumulates, it can actually improve the quality of the artifact, penetrating it into a treasure of Qi Luck, constantly elevating its grade. In the end. According to the record of Daoist theories, as long as they absorb enough Qi Luck, the potential of the three Taiping Artifacts can reach the level of Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Even though Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts are only considered average among Immortal Artifacts, considering the limit of cultivation in the Taiping Dao Book is Five Qi Towards Primordial, Magical Artifacts refined from a Dao Book of such caliber having this limit is already not bad. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï It must be known that even during the ancient times when Immortals manifested in the world, many Earth Immortals who had condensed the Earth Flower Dao Fruit might not have had a single Middle Grade Immortal Artifact. At this moment, Lu Yuan refining three Magical Artifacts all according to the standard of Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts is extravagantly luxurious, beyond anyone¡¯s imagination. Had he not been the ruler of the Nine Provinces, holding the worship of countless peoples of the world and possessing an endless supply of Qi Luck to draw from, he would not have dared to do such a thing. It¡¯s commonly said that the Shenwu Great Emperor surpassed the Three Emperors in achievements, with an unprecedented level of virtue and merit. But Lu Yuan knew well in his heart that although Chu State may have surpassed the ancient Three Emperors in actual ruled territory and population, in terms of strength, he is actually far from the Three Emperors. The ancient Three Emperors were all Earth Immortal True Persons, who had condensed the Earth Flower Dao Fruita€¡±Immortals in this world, directly ruling over the common folk. They had Immortals at their command, far stronger than just commanding Inborn Grandmasters like him by who knows how much. Thus, after becoming the ruler of the Nine Provinces, even though there were no enemies left in the world, and even the peaceful and prosperous era of the Shenwu Epoch unfolded under his leadership, a new and unprecedented era had begun. However, although the external enemies had disappeared, unseen enemies lurking in the shadows never ceased to exist. For example, the disasters at the four extremities of the Nine Provinces. Now, the four calamities at the extremities of Heaven and Earth are accelerating towards the Central State as the imbalance of Heaven and Earth worsens gravely. During ancient times, the Central State managed to withstand these calamities and kept the disasters outside its borders. But it¡¯s not the ancient era any more; tens of thousands of years have passed. With the turn of the ages, the Immortals of old have vanished. Whether today¡¯s Central State can resist the calamities as it did in ancient times is truly concerning. Should it fail to hold, how much could one person, who hasn¡¯t even become an Immortal and is only at Five Qi Towards Primordial, truly be of help? His strength is still not enough. And that¡¯s only the threat from Heaven and Earth. Lu Yuan is someone of a cautious disposition, or one might say, a conspiracy theorist. After learning the ancient secrets, he couldn¡¯t help but constantly wonder whether the Immortals who left the ancient world truly departed or only pretended to do so. They say that after they left, not a single one returned. Is it that they can¡¯t return, temporarily can¡¯t return, or have already returned but haven¡¯t revealed themselves? All these speculations may seem far-fetched, but you can¡¯t deny their possibility. If one day the pathway between the Immortal Realm and the Nine Provinces opens and Immortals really do return to the Nine Provinces, then they see this Chu Emperor who compares himself to the Three Emperors, ruling over the Immortal Dynasty for countless ages, what would these Immortals think? With the insight and perspective of Immortals, they would definitely see the abnormality in Lu Yuan. In a world bereft of Spiritual Energy, how can an emperor practice cultivation and live for tens of thousands of years? Doesn¡¯t that blatantly tell everyone he is an anomaly with great secrets and fortunes? If Immortals do return one day, the first to bear the brunt of it would be Lu Yuan himself. That¡¯s another threat. So, considering all these factors, Lu Yuan has always had a sense of crisis. That¡¯s why, even after uniting the world, he never ceased to strive for strengthening his power, in hopes that one day, he will have the ability to survive the upcoming calamities. Increasing his cultivation with his Qi Luck was for this very reason; now, refining the Taiping Artifacts as treasures of Qi Luck is the same. ¡°Actually, this still isn¡¯t enough. Even with the Taiping Artifacts and all of them refined into Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts, the gap between me and those Immortals still remains clear. Under the disparity of a Great Boundary, relying on a few Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts, I can at most deal with some Human Immortal True Persons, but it¡¯s absolutely impossible to leap two levels and contend against Earth Immortal True Persons. But the cultivation of each of the ancient Three Emperors wasn¡¯t just that of an Earth Immortal; they were among the best of Earth Immortals. Therefore, the most prudent method is still to elevate my Cultivation Realm, to break through to the Human Immortal Realm. Only then, with the aid of Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts, might I stand a chance against Earth Immortal True Persons.¡± Chapter 1171 - Chapter 1171 Chapter 470 Magical Treasure Set_2 ?Chapter 1171: Chapter 470: Magical Treasure Set_2 Chapter 1171: Chapter 470: Magical Treasure Set_2 ¡°` At this moment, I can barely say that, in the face of Immortals, I possess some power of self-preservation,¡± Lu Yuan caressed the Heavenly Destiny Staff for a while and was very clear about this realization in his heart. Crises had always existed. It was only because time had been short that they had not yet emerged. Even if the aforementioned crises were just unfounded worries on my part and didn¡¯t actually exist, in a world where Heaven and Earth could be exhausted and destroyed, nothing was eternal. Although Lu Yuan possessed the talent for immortality, he couldn¡¯t guarantee that his own longevity would truly endure forever. After all, he still didn¡¯t understand the origin of this talent. However, one thing was clear to him. That was, his talent might allow him to compete with the Nine Provinces world to see which would last longer? If he could indeed live longer, then when the Nine Provinces world collapsed if he didn¡¯t have enough strength to protect himself, he feared he would perish along with the world. For this reason alone, Lu Yuan resolved to further enhance his cultivation in order to transcend this world before its destruction. With nearly endless lifespan, he had a bright future ahead and did not plan to share a fate with it. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? ¡°The Taiping three-piece set has now been completed and settled in the three border capitols, where they are worshipped and absorb Qi Luck. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï With the current pace of worship, the three Magical Artifacts might reach the upper limits of Higher Grade Artifacts in about a hundred years. After a thousand years of worship, they could accumulate enough power to undergo a transformation to Lower Grade Immortal Artifacts,¡± Lu Yuan estimated the time needed and nodded slightly. A thousand years was a long time for him, but survivable nonetheless. With unlimited lifespan, trading a thousand years for three Immortal Artifacts seemed worth it. ¡°However, the Taiping three-piece set is only a smaller part of the plan; the real focus lies with three other Luck Artifacts of the external path,¡± Lu Yuan thought of the three Magical Treasures placed in the Liang and the other two neighboring capitols, a flicker of anticipation in his eyes. Since unifying the world, he tallied up the entire Central State, which consisted of thirty-three prefectures and six fortresses, delineating the future territorial scope of the Great Chu. Therefore, for convenient management, he designated the additional six fortresses as six capitols, each serving as a core to radiate influence throughout the realm and control Central State. In this way, aside from the direct jurisdiction of the Liang as the central capitol, managing the eight prefectures in the middle of Qingzhou, The remaining five capitols would be: Henan Prefecture¡¯s Luo Capital, managing the five western prefectures of Qingzhou; Guangling Prefecture¡¯s Jiangdu, managing the five eastern prefectures of Qingzhou; Xianyun Prefecture¡¯s Hai Capital, managing the southern five prefectures of Yu State; Plain Prefecture¡¯s Xindu, managing the northern five prefectures of Yu State; Qinghe Prefecture¡¯s Xiang Capital, managing the eastern five prefectures of Yu State. According to this division, once the entire Central State is fully developed and the population experiences a new explosion, The eight provinces under the direct control of the Liang capitol could have a population of up to two hundred million. Each of the other five capitols would also have a population size of around one hundred million. The entire Chu State in Central State could finally have a population of around seven hundred million. Using seven hundred million people to worship and support six Luck Artifacts was Lu Yuan¡¯s biggest investment for the future after the founding of Great Chu. ¡°After merging the world under one, I expanded the search for various Dao Laws and mystical treasures throughout the land, and also had the Immortal Sects and side paths offer up their cultivation techniques and heavenly treasures, ultimately obtaining thousands of Dao Law volumes and over a thousand mystical treasures. Among these Dao Laws and mystical treasures, the most precious and applicable in this era are the ¡®Imperial Emperor¡¯s Mystic Instrument Sutra¡¯ and the ¡®Secret Record of the Emperor¡¯s Fortune,¡¯ along with the Star Sea Ice Steel and Ghostly Sea Cloud Silk. Apart from these, the Great Dharma God statue I previously acquired from the Snow Plains Nomads is also an extremely precious Luck Artifacts, even the most valuable of all the treasures. The first two Dao Laws, in particular, are most suitable for me; they are both top-tier in the Fortune Dao, offered respectively by the Purple Cloud Dao and the overseas Giant Spirit Dao.¡± Both of these Daoist schools had researched the Way of Control Pneuma during the End of Dharma era but ultimately abandoned it. Nevertheless, they retained a wealth of Luck-related scriptures and continued to pass them down. ¡°The Imperial Emperor¡¯s Mystic Instrument Sutra,¡± gifted by Ziyun Dao, comes from an ancient emperor who, like Emperor Hua Guang, practiced the Fortune Dao and established an Immortal Dynasty in the vast expanse of Southsea during the establishment of the Immortal Dynasty. This Treasure-controlling Sutra is not a cultivation technique but a method for cultivators to control and wield Luck Artifacts. It¡¯s well known that practicing the Fortune Dao can lead to rapid success but at the cost of a shorter lifespan. In ancient times, there was no shortage of Spiritual Energy. Therefore, some cultivators who aspired to longevity, even though they were attracted by the power of the Fortune Dao, dared not practice it for fear of a shortened life. However, it seemed too wasteful to ignore such an advantageous path. After all, by then, communication between the Nine Provinces and the Immortal Realm had ceased, and the resources of this realm were starting to deplete, leaving many cultivators without wealth and searching for new ways to replace Spiritual Energy. Qi Luck thus caught everyone¡¯s attention at that time. The power of the Three Emperors of ancient times was so dominant that it made all Immortals and gods submit to them. Naturally, such strength could not be ignored. Thus, those with ambition started to find shortcuts. Human lifespan is limited and cannot withstand the backlash of Qi Luck, But heavenly treasures do not have a lifespan limit, or at least their usable lifespan is long enough to endure the consumption caused by the backlash of Qi Luck. If I, a human, cannot cultivate the Way of Control Pneuma, why not cultivate a Luck Artifact to bear the backlash, and then control the Artifact, thereby indirectly utilizing the power of Qi Luck? Following this line of thought, the ancient Grand Emperor who once ruled Southsea developed this Treasure-controlling Sutra. ¡°` Chapter 1172 - Chapter 1172 Chapter 470 Magical Treasure Set_3 ?Chapter 1172: Chapter 470: Magical Treasure Set_3 Chapter 1172: Chapter 470: Magical Treasure Set_3 Cultivators first select the appropriate spiritual materials, then, according to the rules of qi luck, design specific techniques to refine a powerful Life-bound Treasure. Once the Life-bound Qi Luck Treasure is born, according to the specific techniques used during its creation, a set of circuits for operating qi luck energy has already been laid out within the Treasure. This is akin to constructing an additional Dantian magic power system. Through the special methods in the Treasure-Controlling Sutra, the cultivator can become one with the Treasure, directly absorbing the Qi Luck Treasure into their body, and turning it into their second Dantian, or, to put it another way, their Second Dao Fruit, thus gaining an additional level of cultivation out of thin air. Once the second Dantian is successfully established, the next steps are straightforward. Simply by absorbing qi luck and refining the Qi Luck Treasure with Spiritual Energy, the Treasure can be made increasingly powerful. Reflected on the cultivator, this means that the cultivation level of the second Dantian becomes ever more profound, and the realm of the second Dao Fruit ascends rapidly. Through such external device methods, without having to endure the backlash of qi luck, cultivators can enjoy the benefits of rapidly enhancing their cultivation by practicing the Dao of Qi Luck. Of course. There are advantages to doing this, but there are also drawbacks. That is, when cultivating the second Dao Fruit, what is essentially being enhanced is the Qi Luck Treasure inside your body. So the life enhancement that comes with a realm breakthrough does not benefit the cultivator themselves. Even if your second Dao Fruit¡¯s cultivation level breaks through to the Immortal Realm, it will not increase your lifespan by the slightest. Your original realm determines how long you can live. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï No matter how many resources you spend and how hard you work to improve the grade of the Qi Luck Treasure, you are only contributing to the Qi Luck Treasure; you gain no benefits for yourself. This is akin to making a wedding dress for someone else. Of course. By taking advantage of the special characteristics of the Qi Luck Treasure to rapidly ascend in realm, cultivators can gain control of the combat power of higher realms sooner. When the time comes to nourish their own first realm of cultivation with this higher realm, that¡¯s another matter altogether. Specific circumstances have their pros and cons; it all depends on personal choice. As long as you are confident that you can sustain the rapid accumulation of the Qi Luck Treasure and find sufficiently powerful treasures to provide enough qi luck nurture, you can try this path. In the past, the Grand Emperor, with the resources of the entire Southern Sea Island Domain, successfully cultivated his second Dao Fruit and became a Heretical Earth Immortal, and was renowned for a time. If you can¡¯t do that, it¡¯s better to recognize reality sooner to avoid emptiness in the end. When your life limit arrives and you have not completed the advancement and accumulation of the Qi Luck Treasure, you really would have made a wedding dress for someone else. However, this is not a concern for Lu Yuan. He sits on the whole Central State and has enough resources to support the advancement costs of the Qi Luck Treasure. Under his rule, billions of people also generate endless qi luck, providing a constant supply for the Treasure. He can completely nourish these Qi Luck external devices. As for the cultivation increase of the external qi from not benefiting the transformation of life at its core? That¡¯s even simpler. Others may worry that their own lifespan can¡¯t match the second Dao Fruit of the Qi Luck external device. But Lu Yuan himself already has an unlimited lifespan; he doesn¡¯t need to worry about this issue at all. As long as the Second Dao Fruit is cultivated, it can be used indefinitely, and in reality, there is no difference from his own realm. Even conversely. Lu Yuan worries that the Treasure that bears the Second Dao Fruit will reach its usage limit and cannot be used for too long! Thus, his only concern is that the cultivation level raised by the Second Dao Fruit isn¡¯t high enough and doesn¡¯t have a long enough lifespan. The issues other people worry about, like nurturing resources and insufficient lifespan, are not problems for him at all. This is also why Lu Yuan believes that this secret method is the most suitable Dao Law for him after obtaining it. Because it perfectly complemented his talent for immortality, as well as the convenience of being the ruler of the Nine Provinces, and this cultivation technique, it was really too well-suited for him. It was as if it had been tailor-made for him. How could Lu Yuan not feel elated by this? So, after obtaining this External Tool Method, Lu Yuan created an Emperor¡¯s Crown using the Great Dharma God Statue, combined with other extraordinary treasures. Initially limited by the naive divine spirit within the statue, he was unable to utilize the massive amount of faith power it contained. Now, after his cultivation had reached Five Qi Towards Primordial, he easily subdued the limited intelligence of the divine spirit, erased and refined it, and created the most powerful External Tool Dao Fruit. Beyond that, Lu Yuan also used Ghostly Sea Cloud Silk and a large number of rare treasures to forge the Emperor¡¯s Imperial Robes. With Star Sea Ice Steel, combined with a large number of rare treasures, he crafted a war chariot used for travel, the Emperor¡¯s War Chariot. Thus, these three magical treasures, responsible for divine soul defense, external defense, and flight speed respectively, formed a systematic Emperor¡¯s set of equipment. All three items were External Tool Dao Fruits and could be used as a second Dantian. Of course, they could also serve as fundamental magical treasures for combat, with equally remarkable power. However, no one would do that. After all, cultivating an External Tool Dao Fruit is not easy. Even in ancient times, many immortals spent their entire lives without being able to refine a single one. If it¡¯s already difficult to create one External Tool Dao Fruit, who would refine several? Only someone with a problem in their mind, no longer seeking the Great Dao, would do such a thing. Lu Yuan was able to create three at once, primarily because he had an unlimited lifespan and controlled the entire Nine Provinces, which provided him with sufficient Qi Luck. He could, given enough time, forcibly cultivate three External Tool Dao Fruits. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? In ancient times, even if an immortal succeeded in refining a Human Dao Fruit, they could only live for three thousand years at most, so their lifespan was limited. In such circumstances, of course, they would want to cultivate an External Tool Dao Fruit as soon as possible, even before the time needed for a breakthrough to the next realm, in order to nourish themselves and elevate their own realm. But Lu Yuan had no such concerns. What¡¯s three thousand years to him? Let alone three thousand years, even ten thousand years would be worth it if he could cultivate an External Tool Dao Fruit comparable to an Earth Immortal Dao Fruit. He would still be making a profit. Now, with sufficient resources, refining three at once, he still felt like it was not enough. ¡°After all, the Immortal Cultivation World is so dangerous, having just one Dantian Dao Fruit always feels somewhat insufficient. Having three, if the magic power of one Dantian is exhausted, the next one can take over, and by rotating them, I could wear down an enemy. Or, turn the three Dao Fruits into three Avatars, and gang up for a direct beatdown, defeating the enemy with a flurry of punches. Furthermore, use the Dao Fruits directly as Avatars, just like I¡¯m doing now. Let the Avatars take on the adventures, do dangerous things. Even if there¡¯s a loss, it¡¯s just a wasted External Tool Dao Fruit. Although it hurts, at least there¡¯s no risk to life, and that¡¯s enough.¡± The always prudent Lu Yuan had already developed a mature plan for the future uses of the carefully crafted Emperor¡¯s Three-piece Set. In addition to the specialized attacking Taiping Three-piece Set. A complete equipment system that integrates offense and defense, with enhancements to speed and divine soul, has been formed. The future holds much promise. Chapter 1173 - Chapter 1173 Chapter 471 Apocalypse Carnival ?Chapter 1173: Chapter 471: Apocalypse Carnival Chapter 1173: Chapter 471: Apocalypse Carnival ¡°Aside from the ¡®Imperial Emperor¡¯s Mystic Instrument Sutra¡¯, the ¡®Secret Record of the Emperor¡¯s Fortune¡¯ is also quite good,¡± Compared to the ¡®Imperial Emperor¡¯s Mystic Instrument Sutra¡¯, which relies on the second Dao Fruit of external magical treasures, the ¡®Secret Record of the Emperor¡¯s Fortune¡¯ is a legitimate cultivation method. This method of controlling fortune was also from the ancient era of Emperor Xia Xi, a Human Emperor who ruled over the three domains of the north. This former emperor practiced the Way of Control Pneuma, his strength formidable. Although not as powerful as Emperor Xia Xi from the same period, he cultivated all the way to the Realm of Earth Immortal. Thus, the ¡®Secret Record of the Emperor¡¯s Fortune¡¯ is essentially a direct method of Immortal Method that points to the realm of Earth Immortal. For Lu Yuan, who had cultivated the ¡®Taiping Dao Book¡¯ to the realm of Five Qi Towards Primordial and had no further Dao Law to advance, this was undoubtedly the best method to switch to. Therefore, after obtaining this Dao Law, he had been transitioning his cultivation techniques for the past two years, converting his original Peaceful Dao Power into the ¡®Former Emperor¡¯s Skill¡¯, to align with this method. However, he had grown accustomed to practicing the ¡®Taiping Dao Book¡¯ previously. Similarly, Lu Yuan believed that his rise could not be separated from the aid of the ¡®Taiping Dao Book¡¯. And perhaps his Qi Luck was in harmony with the word ¡®peaceful¡¯. There was no other reason, just an innate intuition that made him feel that continuing to name it after ¡®peaceful¡¯ would allow for a smoother journey ahead. The intuition of cultivators often resonates with Heaven and Earth. Lu Yuan dared not ignore it. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï So even though he had obtained the ¡®Secret Record of the Emperor¡¯s Fortune¡¯, he directly renamed this Immortal Technique to ¡®Taiping Dao Book¡¯, making it the 2.0 version of the Taiping Dao Book. After renaming, his cultivation of the ¡®Taiping Dao Book 2.0¡¯ indeed progressed smoothly. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Now, after only two years, he had already converted nearly half of his Magic Power. At this rate, it would take at most another three to four years to complete the conversion. For a cultivator who was transforming his fundamental cultivation techniques, this was an extremely gratifying speed. ¡°Indeed, I seem to be naturally fated with ¡®peaceful¡¯, extremely in tune with these two characters,¡± Sometimes, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help thinking this in his heart. Forging Fortune Treasures and transitioning cultivation methodsa€¡±these two tasks were what he would focus on for the next hundred, thousand, even ten thousand years. Or to be more precise, the priority was the former. Because now, with no Spiritual Energy left between Heaven and Earth, even if Lu Yuan wanted to cultivate, he could not. Even the process of transitioning cultivation methods, with some loss of Magic Power involved, was indirectly affecting his Cultivation. ¡°Forging Fortune Treasures is the same,¡± Lu Yuan frowned at the thought of the extinction of Spiritual Energy: ¡°Currently, both the Taiping three-piece set and the Emperor¡¯s Three-piece Set have only been forged into initial forms, nourished by Qi Luck. In this process, it¡¯s essentially just adding potential to the six Magical Treasures, giving them more possibilities for the future. But fundamentally, potential remains potential; if it can¡¯t be developed, it will never have much impact.¡± Given the current conditions in the Nine Provinces, it¡¯s virtually impossible for the six Magical Treasures to transform into Immortal Artifacts. To truly transform the six Magical Treasures, they need a massive supply of Spiritual Energy for refinement, combined with the potential nurtured by Qi Luck, to achieve their ascension. When all is said and done, it really comes down to the issue of Spiritual Energy,¡± Lu Yuan sighed. The Way of Control Pneuma, such an extreme method, was created for a reason. It was conceived by those primordial gods and mighty beings during ancient times to address the dire straits of the lack of Spiritual Energy, as a shrewd workaround. But this method can only treat symptoms, not the root cause. In the ancient era, when Spiritual Energy was scarce, through the Way of Control Pneuma, those mighty beings indeed gained more channels for absorbing Spiritual Energy. But that was just an additional channel after all. The essence of the Way of Control Pneuma is to absorb Spiritual Energy, not to create it out of thin air. Now that there is no Spiritual Energy between Heaven and Earth, even if Lu Yuan has the Way of Control Pneuma and the External Tool Dao Fruit technique, he¡¯s like a skillful woman who cannot cook without rice, unable to advance further. At present, he can only ponder over potential, preparing for the future. ¡°For now, I can only take things one step at a time,¡± Lu Yuan shook his head, pushing these tumultuous thoughts aside, took one last glance at the Heavenly Destiny Staff placed on the altar, and then turned to leave. The Magical Treasures were forged and idle, and even legends about the six Fortune Treasures had been spread far and wide in the world, under various pretexts. As these legends become increasingly known by more people and gradually integrated into the culture of the Nine Provinces, becoming a symbol of the spirit of the people of Chu State, Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t even have to take action; the Qi Luck of the world would automatically converge towards the six Fortune Treasures. Afterward, the Magical Treasures would absorb Qi Luck on their own, without needing his excessive attention. Everything will be left to time, awaiting the results. ¡­ With the Magical Treasures on standby, Lu Yuan spent a few years completing the Magic Power transformation of the ¡®Taiping Dao Book 2.0¡¯. Having attended to the last of his concerns, he fell into a state of idleness. The world was already peaceful, and there was no longer any rival in the Nine Provinces. His good friend Sun Siwen and his leading disciple Zhou Qing, one in letters and the other in arms, had both moved to the capital Liang. With two such trusted Prime Minister and Grand General, there was almost nothing concerning the court that needed Lu Yuan¡¯s attention. In his boredom, he could only indulge in music and beauty, beginning the life of a negligent emperor. But one can only listen to music and enjoy the company of beauties for so long before tiring of it. Thus, after spending some days in the palace, Lu Yuan started to travel abroad, planning to take a good look at the world he had conquered. Chapter 1174 - Chapter 1174 Chapter 471 Apocalypse Carnival_2 ?Chapter 1174: Chapter 471: Apocalypse Carnival_2 Chapter 1174: Chapter 471: Apocalypse Carnival_2 The Heavenly Son¡¯s patrol was naturally a grand affair. Especially for Lu Yuan, who had now achieved fame and power and become the Emperor of the Immortal Dynasty, it was even more extravagant. Looking back through history, perhaps only during the times of the Three Emperors, with Immortals accompanying them, could anyone surpass him. After the Three Emperors, there was no one else to compare. During this process, Lu Yuan enjoyed himself immensely, basking in the limelight. Previously, due to various external crises, he had always been restrained and behaved with temperance. Now, having finally become invincible in the world and even conquered the entire world, he had become the supreme emperor. No one was his match anymore, nor could anyone threaten him. Under an unprecedented sense of security, the emotions that had been previously suppressed were released during this time. After years of cheering and submission, having patrolled the whole of Chu State, when he returned to Liang, Lu Yuan let out all his repressed emotions. His spiritual state of mind ascended to a new level. To say he had undergone a transformation might be an exaggeration, but to fully master the realm of Five Qi Towards Primordial was no longer much of an issue. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï However, still limited by the problem of Spiritual Energy, even though his spiritual state was sufficient, without external resources, Lu Yuan was still unable to make a breakthrough. Luckily, he was not in a hurry. If he couldn¡¯t make a breakthrough for the moment, then so be it. He saw it as an accumulation. Every bit of consolidation now was preparation for a future explosion. Perhaps when he had accumulated enough and the conditions were right, he might even pull off a feat of becoming immortal in one day, surpassing both the Person Flower and Earth Flower realms. He could take a giant leap to become a remarkable power among Immortals! As for why not the Sky Flower True Man? Lu Yuan was somewhat self-aware. In all ancient records, the strongest were only the Earth Flower True Man. There were no records of the Heavenly Immortal above Earth Flower. Even during resource-abundant times, neither the ancient Three Emperors nor many of their contemporaries could achieve it. Lu Yuan did not believe that he, in this era of scarce resources and vanished Spiritual Energy, could accomplish what his predecessors could not after struggling for tens of thousands of years. The predecessors were not necessarily inferior to the moderns. And the moderns were not necessarily superior to the ancients. Despite the advancement of the ages, wisdom has always been interconnected. Those whose realms were higher, who had cultivated for longer, who had lived for tens of thousands of years, had not achieved it. So why should he believe that he could surpass those chosen ones? Regarding these matters, Lu Yuan always maintained humility and did not become arrogant or complacent. Thus, for the elevation of his state of mind, he took it as a matter of course, settling down to accumulate slowly, waiting for the next transformation. Time, too, slowly passed by during this process of accumulation. ¡­ In the sixtieth year of Shenwu, a bitter cold wave descended upon the Border of Central State. It was separated from the border of Chu State by a great river. North of the river became a frozen wasteland, while south of the river remained the normal world; just a line apart, yet it seemed like Two Realms. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï This world-altering scene startled many. Some citizens of Chu State who lived by the southern bank of the river, looking at the terrifying snowstorm to the north, though it had not yet approached their homes, were frightened into migrating, not daring to stay longer. Fearing that the snowstorm would blow over in a night and freeze them into ice sculptures. Lu Yuan was also alarmed by this and had to end his years of quiet life, rushing from Liang to the great river to observe the situation of the northern cold wave. Then, his expression grew grave. ¡°This cold wave is still moving south¡­¡± After observing for several months on both banks of the river, watching the cold wave that slowly advanced southwards, inching a little further each day from the northern edge towards the center of the river, Lu Yuan¡¯s heart sank. Just as he had feared, after the balance of the Four Poles of Heaven and Earth was once again disrupted, the Natural Disasters did not stop at the outskirts of Central State but continued to brew and press closer. ¡°There is definitely a problem with this world.¡± Lu Yuan realized this in his heart, and a sense of crisis surged within him. ¡°In the ancient era, the disconnection between the Immortal Realm and the Nine Provinces Realm, the disappearance of Spiritual Energy, was just a sign. After tens of thousands of years of brewing, this disaster is finally erupting in my era, pushing the entire world to the brink of destruction. The Nine Provinces will either become a wasteland ravaged by Natural Disasters, or at the moment of the Four Poles¡¯ convergence, the conflicting forces of earth, wind, water, and fire will shatter everything, utterly returning it to nothingness. This world is no longer inhabitable.¡± Looking at the steadily approaching cold wave, although its progression was slow, moving only an inch southward each day, given the expanse of Central State, it would take hundreds or thousands, even ten thousand years for the cold wave to reach its heart, for the Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe to converge a€¡± an impossibility. A world¡¯s many millennia might be a mere blink of an eye. But to ordinary beings, ten thousand years could spell the rise and fall of a civilization. So even though the Nine Provinces were in the process of destruction, to Lu Yuan, there were still thousands to ten thousands of years as a buffer. ¡°The situation has not reached its worst. There might still be a chance to salvage it, or rather, an opportunity to escape and ascend to heaven.¡± At this moment, Lu Yuan thought of the Northern Dark City, located at the North Pole, the destination of the ascended cultivators of the Nine Provinces from before. Chapter 1175 - Chapter 1175 Chapter 471 Apocalypse Carnival_3 ?Chapter 1175: Chapter 471: Apocalypse Carnival_3 Chapter 1175: Chapter 471: Apocalypse Carnival_3 That place is the passage that leads away from the Nine States Realm, towards ascension to the Immortal Realm. It is also currently the only known exit out of the Nine States Realm. If one were to consider the most feasible method to survive this catastrophe, Lu Yuan could only think of the Northern Dark City. ¡°In a few days, when I have some spare time, I¡¯ll go to the Northern Dark City to have a look, to inspect the situation of this transportation array and see if it can still be used. If there is any problem, it would be good to attend to repairs in a timely manner. This last way of life must be well guarded.¡± Lu Yuan made up his mind that the backup route through the Northern Dark City must not encounter any problems. The trip towards the North was unavoidable. Fortunately, he had now achieved Five Qi Towards Origin, and his magic power was profound. Even though there was no more spiritual energy between Heaven and Earth, by infusing his own magic power, he should be sufficient to activate the array. ¡°Even if it really comes to the worst, I still have some treasures in hand, which also store quite a lot of spiritual energy. If necessary, I can destroy the treasures and extract the spiritual energy inside, to supply as energy.¡± Lu Yuan steeled his heart. Although it was truly a pity to destroy those rare treasures just like that. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï But in a dire situation, in order to survive, he could no longer care about that. After observing on both sides of the great river for half a year, confirming that the speed of the cold tide¡¯s advancement was indeed maintained at a southern push of one inch each day. Lu Yuan finally let go of his worries, and then he set off for his return. As the great river that divided Central State, its width was very broad; even the narrowest point between the south and north banks was over thirty miles. Given the current speed of the cold tide, advancing south by one inch daily, it would only encroach about ten feet closer each year. Based on the current speed of the tide, for this natural disaster to cross over the great river and reach the heartland of Chu State, it would take at least three to five hundred years at the soonest. There was still plenty of time, no need for panic yet. Even to stabilize the domestic sentiments, he chose not to disclose his discovery. It would be useless to do so. The world is heading towards destruction, and that is beyond the force of humans to stop. If the Immortals from ancient times were still around, there might be a chance to prevent or delay the catastrophe, albeit for a while. But the current Nine States Realm simply could not meet the conditions required for the birth of an Immortal. Even if the Immortals were still present, without spiritual energy for replenishment, upon depleting all their magic power, they could only fall to become mortals. This world can no longer be saved. Although it¡¯s a great pity, Lu Yuan was powerless and could only watch as these events unfolded. ¡°Fortunately, when this day comes, at the soonest it¡¯ll be a thousand years from now. By that time, my good friends, wife, disciples, and even grandchildren, will have long been dead. Everyone I know will have passed away; while this may seem cruel to me, for them, not having to witness the inevitable end, not having to feel that certain despair without any hope, it¡¯s also a blessing.¡± Lu Yuan decided to keep such a truth hidden and not to tell his friends and family. It was now the sixtieth year of Shenwu, and he himself was nearly a hundred years old. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 His good friend Sun Siwen was even over a hundred years old. With the lifespan of an Inborn Grandmaster, the latter also had only about forty more years to live. And his other sons, disciples, wives, and such were similarly only able to live for a few more decades. In less than a hundred years, he would become completely alone. By then, perhaps the bloodline of this body would still be flourishing and passed down. But after dozens or hundreds of generations have passed, how many of those nominally descendants of the Lu family truly share a close bloodline with oneself? With bloodlines diluted to the extreme, there isn¡¯t much affection to speak of, and just a nominal title separated by who knows how many generations hardly inspires any sense of identity in Lu Yuan. Even now, he felt little kinship toward his children¡¯s progeny, the various grandchildren and great-grandchildren who have sprung from them. Perhaps some mortal old folk might be overjoyed and content to see four generations under one roof in their twilight years, feeling that their bloodline and family legacy have been passed down. Thus, they would feel affection and content with those grandchildren. But as an immortal, Lu Yuan looks younger than many of his own grandchildren. Free from worries about lifespan, he naturally lacks any obsession over passing down his bloodline, and doesn¡¯t place any hope in his descendants for the continuation of his life¡¯s joys and satisfactions. In such a situation, it¡¯s natural that Lu Yuan would feel little affection toward those distant relatives. The longer he lived, the more indifferent his disposition became. When he first came across these ideas in certain Dao Law texts and legends, Lu Yuan was somewhat perplexed. But after nearly a hundred years of personal experience, witnessing descendants that seemed even older than himself, he gained a profound understanding. Time, indeed, is a knife. One slice, and there is an eternal separation between immortal and mortal. Therefore, except for those close to him, for whom he still harbors considerable affection, Lu Yuan had little attachment left for his later progeny, let alone the entire world¡¯s populace. All he wished was for those dear to him to depart from this world content and happy, and then he would bear the endless years that follow alone. The destruction of the Nine States Realm mattered not to him, so long as it didn¡¯t affect the people he cared for. Though cruel to ordinary mortals and his own future generations, he was powerless to change things under such circumstances. ¡°All I can do is prolong this Shenwu golden age, to extend this Doomsday Era peacefully for a while longer. So that more people, across more generations, can enjoy peaceful days. In that way, when the world¡¯s end comes, perhaps there will be less suffering. At the very least, they would have been happy once.¡± This, too, was the last tenderness in Lu Yuan¡¯s heart, in the face of helplessness. In the sixtieth year of Shenwu, a cold wave approached Central State. The Great Shenwu Emperor went to patrol in person, confirming that it stopped at the borders of Central State and did not expand further south. With the emperor¡¯s personal reassurance, the ministers and people across the world who had been in panic were suddenly at ease. Therefore, facing the earthquakes that hit the western borders of Central State, the poisonous fires in the Southern Territory, and the gales on the eastern seafronts over the next decade, the people of Great Chu, though anxious, were not unduly alarmed. For they too noticed that, just as the Great Shenwu Emperor had said, The frightening natural disasters, upon reaching the border of Central State, did not advance towards it. The speed of their encroachment toward Central State, a mere inch every day, was truly too slow. And the level of threat posed by the natural disasters was far too dangerous. Moreover, due to the fearsome nature of the Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe, aside from Lu Yuan, there were few who could withstand the natural disasters to come for a closer observation. Therefore, no one else discovered the true fact that the World¡¯s End was increasingly drawing near. Under the benevolent deception of the Great Shenwu Emperor, the entire Chu State, the whole of Central State, began an even more splendid and brilliant golden age amidst the surrounding calamities. The end times are upon us, the madness unending. In the face of destruction, the Nine Provinces began their final revelry. Chapter 1176 - Chapter 1176 Chapter 472 Severing Ties ?Chapter 1176: Chapter 472 Severing Ties Chapter 1176: Chapter 472 Severing Ties Time flies, in the blink of an eye, four decades have passed. Since Great Chu unified the Central State, with the Shenwu Emperor on the throne, and the Holy Emperor ruling the world, no one dared to harbor dissenting thoughts. The world was stable and thus entered a golden age. Under the emperor¡¯s governance, the common people lived peacefully, merchants and travelers prospered, and scholarly pursuits flourished. The ailments brought by thousands of years of warfare were resolved during this period. The custom of competing for martial prowess in the civilian world gradually dissipated. The once-common phenomenon of martial artists defying the law was curtailed by the stern crackdown from the imperial government, becoming increasingly rare. Major factions of Jianghu and the martial arts heroes slowly disappeared from view. Especially after the scarcity of the Divine Blood Elixirs, the path of Martial Arts became more arduous, and the emergence of new Inborn Grandmasters from among the younger generation became increasingly difficult. Apart from those forces that had deep roots and still possessed some Divine Blood Elixirs, there were no martial artists heard of who ascended to the Inborn rank. During the zenith of the nation, there were nearly three hundred Inborn masters. However, after a hundred years of Shenwu¡¯s reign, only a little over a hundred remained. Among them, most were avatars of the emperor. The top powers of the world were overwhelmingly dominated by the court; sixty-four avatars of the emperor were scattered across the provinces, firmly suppressing the vast lands of Great Chu. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Facing this fearsome force, the martial practitioners in the rural areas simply could not conceive the notion of rebellion. Indeed, because the world was too peaceful, studying martial arts became a fruitless endeavor once completed, with almost no opportunities available. The military and official positions were already filled to the brim, leaving no openings for external martial artists. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï On the contrary, those who studied for the imperial examination found many pathways to advancement through passing the tests. Therefore, the once prevalent custom of practicing martial arts among the people gradually ceased in the golden age of Shenwu, as people preferred to study poetry and seek companionship in the pleasures of life. The era of the imperial examination flourished. Through successive changes of officials appointed by examination, the political dominance of the aristocratic families that had engulfed the Nine Provinces was replaced by scholarly officials who rose from the lower classes. Interests shifted, and the nobility began to dissolve; the entangled local and central powers crumbled before the centralized government¡¯s might. A vast amount of land and wealth flowed from the hands of the aristocratic families to the common people. Then, under Lu Yuan¡¯s strict supervision, rather than re-concentrating, it was distributed more fairly among all the people of the world. Everyone had fields to till, homes to live in; the moderately wealthy could study for examinations, and the poor could become merchants to grow rich. Great Chu provided as many avenues for advancement as possible to everyone. As a result, the world began to be filled with vitality. This was the glorious Shenwu era, the world that everyone praised. As the executor appointed by the emperor, who personally guided all these changes, the renowned Shenwu minister had completed his lifelong aspirations, and his life gradually came to an end. In Liang, at the Prime Minister¡¯s residence, As soon as the news reached the palace, Lu Yuan immediately rushed to the mansion to see his old friend one last time. ¡°Your Majesty¡­¡± Sun Siwen lay on the bed, his hair and beard speckled with white, his face withered, the flame of life nearly extinguished within him. This bleak sight made it difficult to imagine that this was the same Shenwu minister who had been celebrated across the world for nearly a hundred years. Now, as he looked at his friend, who was also a Wise Monarch, Sun Siwen showed a mixture of regret and contentment: ¡°Your Majesty is still so young, it seems that cultivation and Dao seeking are indeed enviable. However, it is fine. This old minister has reached the end of his life and will have to go to Huangquan first and can no longer govern for Your Majesty. But with Your Majesty here, this Shenwu golden age, these people of the world, need not worry. To see the lifetime work that Your Majesty and I strived for continuing on, even in death, I have no regrets.¡± Even at this moment, Sun Siwen was still concerned about Great Chu and his good friend. ¡°Brother Sun¡­¡± Lu Yuan looked at Sun Siwen¡¯s frail body, a flash of pity crossing his eyes, almost bringing him to tears, but he held them back, simply holding his friend¡¯s hand, offering him the warmth and comfort of his presence. ¡°Your Majesty need not grieve for me, your old minister has lived long enough. My wife, children, even my grandchildren, all died before me. I miss them and wish to be with them again. It is just that I can no longer accompany Your Majesty, leaving Your Majesty alone in this world¡­ It might feel lonely, right¡­?¡± Sun Siwen managed a weak smile, his voice growing fainter, and his breath weaker: ¡°I dearly miss those days in town when Brother Lu and I would boil green plum wine, discussing grand matters together¡­¡± His intermittent words ceased without notice. In the half-closed eyelids of Sun Siwen, he seemed to be taken back to one hundred and thirty years earlier. The Nine Provinces were still there, Da Yue was still there. In a snowy expanse, a spirited Hunter youth, carrying a gift, knocked on the door of his own home, and amidst his overwhelmed joy, he made a request to study. That was the beginning of everything, how wonderful it would be if time could go back to those days¡­ Amid his reminiscence, Lu Yuan personally closed his friend¡¯s eyes, accompanying him through his last journey. ¡°Issue an order, posthumously bestow the title ¡®King Consort of the State¡¯ upon Minister Sun, bury him with the rites of a king, enshrine him in the Grand Temple, and erect temples in every province to allow the people to offer sacrifices.¡± Lu Yuan, holding back his sorrow, let go of his friend¡¯s hand, which was growing colder, and stood up to issue the decree. He then ignored the gathering crowd of Sun Siwen¡¯s sobbing great-grandchildren, and headed straight back to the imperial palace. There was no longer his friend, just a group of Sun¡¯s descendants who kept a wary distance from him, leaving Lu Yuan with one less person he held dear in this world, bringing him profound grief. Chapter 1177 - Chapter 1177 Chapter 472 Severing Ties_2 ?Chapter 1177: Chapter 472 Severing Ties_2 Chapter 1177: Chapter 472 Severing Ties_2 But time presses on, and death has its tally. When the time comes, everyone will eventually die. The death of Sun Siwen was like a beginning. Following him, within a span of just a few decades, Lu Yuan¡¯s friends and family, one after another, departed from this world. In the 107th year of Shenwu, his disciple Chu Wei passed away. Although called a disciple, Chu Wei, Li Liang, and the others were actually about the same age as Lu Yuan, some even older. So after Sun Siwen¡¯s departure, these people also soon reached the end of their lifespans. Within just two or three years, the original five true successor disciples had passed away one after another. In the 114th year of Shenwu, Lu Yuan¡¯s wife of over a hundred years, Lan Cai¡¯er also died. This empress, who initially thought to outlive Lu Yuan and then support her son¡¯s ascent to the throne, although later she abandoned that idea, ultimately did not live to see that day. Instead, it was Lu Yuan who sent her on her final journey first. The empress¡¯s death meant the world lost another person he valued the most. Lu Yuan was even more grieved and ordered the court to close for three days, the nation to mourn for three months. In the 120th year of Shenwu, Grand General Zhou Qing died. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Lu Yuan closed the court for several months, and after getting drunk for seven days in front of this disciple¡¯s tomb, he continued to visit the graves of his friends and wife to drink heavily and express his longing. In the 133rd year of Shenwu, the crown prince Lu He passed away, followed by the second prince Lu Hao the next year. Lu Yuan had them buried together with the empress so that the mother and her sons could reunite under the Nine Springs. Twenty years later, the remaining princes and princesses, a total of twenty-four, died in succession. By the end, Lu Yuan had grown numb; although his heart still ached, his emotions no longer fluctuated greatly, and he slowly returned to a state of calm. By this time, nearly all of his close friends and family in the Nine Provinces world had gone. Inside and outside the imperial palace, the only one still accompanying Lu Yuan was the spiritual woman who cultivated the divine method and had reached a lifespan of two hundred years. This barbarian¡¯s holy woman, with her long lifespan, had finally come out on top. After the former empress¡¯s death, she was supported as the legitimate consort and became the new empress of Great Chu, known as Empress Ling. But two hundred years of lifespan, even for an immortal, is not long. In the 181st year of Shenwu, Empress Ling had reached the end of her life. ¡°Your Majesty, after I am gone, please take carea€|¡± On her deathbed, after uttering her last words, the spiritual woman, still maintaining her beauty through divine power, closed her eyes. Lu Yuan held her hand, gazed upon her face, then turned away and closed his own eyes as if wishing to eternally remember her countenance. At this moment, Lu Yuan, who had grown accustomed to the constant departure of loved ones, found his feelings stirred once again. He knew that his last attachment in the world of the Nine Provinces had now been lost. From this moment on, even though millions of descendants from the Chu royal family had flourished, He was still truly alone. At this point in life, he felt immensely desolate; even as a being of longevity, he faintly harbored thoughts of loathing the world. No wonder those devoted to cultivating immortality and refining Dao preferred not to walk amid the mortal dust but to live in the mountains, seeking solitude and tirelessly pursuing their cultivation. Apart from wishing for a tranquil life dedicated to cultivation, they likely also wished to avoid entanglements in close relationships with too many people. Otherwise, to watch one¡¯s friends and family, unable to escape their designated lifespan and heavenly mandate, leave one by one, Is truly an unbearable affliction and torment to one¡¯s spirit. The cultivators of the heart must have also felt this way, thus they chose not to live amongst mortals. Alas, the sorrow of parting, Lu Yuan had tasted it to the full. a€| With the spiritual woman¡¯s departure, Lu Yuan¡¯s ties to the world of the Nine Provinces were nearly severed. Only his own creation, the Immortal Dynasty of Great Chu, an endeavor that carried the efforts and hopes of his friends, disciples, and family, still held some of his affection. But after nearly two hundred years of such a peaceful and prosperous age in Great Chu, the population had undergone wave after wave of explosive growth. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? By now, the population of Chu State had exceeded 1.5 billion. More than quintuple the number upon initial unification of Central State. The number of people had already far exceeded what the land could sustain. Had it not been for the continuous selection of superior grain varieties over the years, and even finding some cultivation techniques for seeds in various Immortal Technique texts, and personally using Immortal Techniques to create several high-yield grains, It¡¯s likely that the entire Immortal Dynasty of Great Chu would have collapsed under the immense pressure of an exploding population due to a shortage of grain. But even with the support of the Immortal Species, issues of overpopulation and insufficient grain were still the greatest hidden dangers during this golden age of Shenwu. Therefore, to address this problem, Lu Yuan had started to guide the common people in recent years to have fewer and later births, by strictly regulating marriage ages, and imposing heavy taxes on those who had many children, in an effort to reduce the population. This policy had been in effect for decades and had successfully curtailed the trend of population growth. Otherwise, according to estimates, if the growth continued unabated, the national population would now exceed two billion, not the current 1.5 billion. The fact that there are five hundred million fewer people than estimated shows the effectiveness of this policy. The common folk actually cooperated quite well. Due to a flourishing culture, after nearly two hundred years of governance under Great Chu, it could be said that illiteracy had been eradicated. Regardless of gender, everyone could read and write. With enlightenment spreading amongst the people and guidance from Lu Yuan, everyone understood that overpopulation would lead to self-destruction. Chapter 1178 - Chapter 1178 Chapter 472 Severing Ties_3 ?Chapter 1178: Chapter 472 Severing Ties_3 Chapter 1178: Chapter 472 Severing Ties_3 After two hundred years of development, some of the technological inventions that are applicable in this world had started to become widespread. People¡¯s lives were getting better and better, gradually taking on a form reminiscent of Lu Yuan¡¯s past life. In such circumstances, no one wanted to bring destruction upon themselves or their future progeny. Especially near Central State, where there were threats from natural disasters. Over a hundred years had passed, and the Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe that was initially only at the edges of Central State had now crossed the boundaries. Freezing waves had overtaken the great rivers, earthquakes had traversed the mountains, gales had climbed the shores, and poisonous fires had spread along the Yangtze River. Faced with the naked threat of approaching natural disasters, even the slowest of individuals had come to understand that the terrible catastrophes had not ceased. Instead, over the years, they continued to brew and develop, and they were now at the doorstep of their own homelands. What the emperor had said about the end of the disasters was nothing but a lie. Or rather, it could be said. That the emperor had not anticipated that things would develop to such an extent. The panic among the common people, under the threat of natural disasters, was once again ignited and spread. But by this time, all of the Inborn Grandmasters of the Great Chu, except for Lu Yuan, had died off. With his sixty-four avatars stationed in various locations, Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Just as a hint of chaos began to surface, it was immediately suppressed, and the local areas quickly returned to peace. After the turmoil, everyone was looking for a way out. But with surrounding lands sealed off by natural disasters and Central State being the only known haven in the Nine Provinces, they had no opportunity to expand their living space, no avenue for escape whatsoever. In despair, the people of Great Chu could only try to delay their own destruction as much as possible. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?0 With the passing of long years, they waited for a future that might not even hold any hope. Thus, with a grain crisis from within and natural disasters approaching from without, under these internal and external troubles, who would want to have too many children? Are they wanting to speed up their own deaths? The land available for survival was diminishing day by day. Having more people meant that when the natural disasters approached, the resources available for survival would become even scarcer. In the end, they could only head towards extinction at a faster pace. The population had to be controlled. This had become a consensus among everyone in Great Chu after being promoted. Therefore, with the support of the nation, the population of Great Chu, after a sharp increase, began to slowly fall. According to the imperial plan, the final population would stabilize at around one billion. This number ensured that every citizen of the empire had enough resources to avoid falling into poverty. It was the healthiest and most reasonable population structure. At present, both the imperial officials and the common people were striving towards this goal. And this was not fixed. The plan was to continue to adjust this number downward based on the rate at which the Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe consumed Central State and the consequent reduction in the habitable land. To always keep the population at a reasonable and balanced number. Though Great Chu had gone through a population crisis that nearly brought it to its knees, a crisis often comes with opportunities. Due to the rapid expansion of the population, what Lu Yuan had originally estimated would need a thousand years for six Luck Artifacts to transform into Spiritual Energy, assuming a population of seven hundred million, now had the support of a population more than double that size, and the supply of Qi Luck had doubled. The Taiping three-piece set and the Emperor¡¯s Three-piece Set, these six Magical Artifacts, had already reached the limits of Middle Grade Artifacts. Even the accumulation needed for their transformation into Immortal Artifacts had, after more than a hundred years of nurturing, made more than one-third progress. Especially the core, the Heavenly Crown, the embryo of the Immortal Artifact crafted from the statue of the Great Dharma God, had received far more Qi Luck nourishment than the other five artifacts because it was placed in the heavily populated Central Capital Liang, which also had the largest jurisdiction. Over two years ago, in the year 184 of the Shenwu era, it had already completed its accumulation and its core had transformed into the essence of an Immortal Artifact. With enough refinement from Spiritual Energy, it could be directly promoted to a Lower Grade Immortal Artifact. At this point, the route of the External Tool Dao Fruit that Lu Yuan envisioned was finally bearing fruit. In a sense, after the transformation of the Heavenly Crown was complete, he would possess the strength of an Immortal. By integrating the Heavenly Crown into his body, he could have an External Tool Dao Fruit comparable to a Human Flower Dao Fruit. However, that was only in theory. Because of the lack of Spiritual Energy, the transformation of the Heavenly Crown had not yet been completed, and this External Tool Dao Fruit could not yet be truly put to use. But even so, the transformation of the Heavenly Crown was a great joy and encouragement to Lu Yuan. If there was one, there could be a second. If the Heavenly Crown could accumulate and transform, it meant that this path was indeed viable. The other five Luck Artifacts could accumulate and transform along this same route, eventually achieving transformation. The fundamental strength and power in his hands were gradually increasing, which was certainly a cause for happiness. So under this happy event, the gloomy mood that had been shrouding Lu Yuan¡¯s heart, caused by the departure of friends and family, was considerably lightened. He then directed more of his energy towards governing the country, maintaining a sufficient and sustainable population to provide ample Qi Luck for his six Magical Treasures. Right now, the Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe had just reached the border of Central State, entering its lands. Given its previous rate of progression, even if there were chain reactions from the contact with the Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe that exacerbated the rate of encroachment, Central State was vast enough to endure another thousand years, which seemed achievable. A thousand years was enough for the six Luck Artifacts to transform into the essence of Lower Grade Immortal Artifacts. They might even advance to Middle and Upper Grade Immortal Artifacts, equivalent to an Earth Immortal Dao Fruit. Nine Provinces still had value to be utilized, objectives not yet achieved, and a future still to be anticipated. After his recent trip to Northern Dark City, where he confirmed that the Cross-boundary Teleportation Array was still usable and not damaged, Lu Yuan planned to accompany the Nine Provinces world and the Great Chu Immortal Dynasty he had established, through the last leg of their fates. It was also a way to leave an imperfect full stop to the most important scenery in his life. When this scenery ends, he would then Ascend to the Immortal Realm. He was ready. Chapter 1179 - Chapter 1179 Chapter 473 Ascension to the Immortal Realm ?Chapter 1179: Chapter 473 Ascension to the Immortal Realm Chapter 1179: Chapter 473 Ascension to the Immortal Realm Two hundred years into the Shenwu era, the Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe crossed the border and reached Central State. Eight hundred years into the Shenwu era, the natural disasters eroded the outer circle of prefectures and counties of Central State, and the territory of Great Chu Country shrank by nearly half, with the population dropping to five hundred million. The world, due to the proximity of disasters, began to grow anxious and frightened. One thousand years into the Shenwu era, the four great natural disasters converged, accelerating the erosion of Central State; only the core¡¯s last four prefectures remained intact. However, the order of the world was on the brink of collapse. If it weren¡¯t for the emperor who had spread his avatars across every prefecture and county, suppressing the people who were nearly driven mad by despair. I¡¯m afraid that Chu State would have destroyed itself before the disasters could strike. Even though order was maintained, the hearts of the people had completely lost hope. Meanwhile, as a large amount of territory was lost, the remaining three hundred million people of Great Chu had exceeded the carrying capacity of the land, and supplies began to run short. The lives of the lower-class people became difficult, with hunger and satiety becoming the norm. The golden age of Shenwu, from this moment, lost its luster. The term ¡°Cataclysm Era¡± had already appeared among the people. One thousand one hundred years into the Shenwu era, the Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe was nearly upon them, and all of Chu State was reduced to the land of just one prefecture, with a population of only ten million remaining. From this point on, feelings of anxiety, fear, madness, and despair spread uncontrollably among all the survivors. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï To seek release. Some, realizing that everything was beyond saving, completely gave up their last shred of hope. They decided to face death with their last bit of dignity intact, by voluntarily seeking their end. ¡°Your Majesty, your unworthy descendants will soon enter the cold tide to accept the judgment of the Heavenly Mandate. Not being able to serve in front of our ancestor is the sin of the descendants, I hope our ancestor will forgive us.¡± The last Prime Minister of Great Chu was also a descendant of Lu Yuan, separated by countless generations, a middle-aged man kneeling on the ground, bidding farewell to him in tears. After speaking, he realized that the emperor above his head, who had ruled Great Chu for thousands of years, was still silent, offering no response whatsoever. This last minister of Chu was utterly despondent. He could only weep and bow one last time before rising and leaving the grand hall to meet people waiting for him outside. The emperor had issued a final notice one month prior. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?0 The disaster that befell the world would completely envelop the Nine Provinces in at most one more year. And at that time, Chu State would also perish in the natural disasters. No one would survive. So within this vast despair, some who had completely lost hope about the future gathered together. Instead of waiting for the disaster to strike, they decided to find death themselves. These people didn¡¯t want to live a life worse than dogs for the sake of survival anymore, enduring hunger and cold, barely clinging to existence. They used up all their food allocations, living freely at the very end of their lives. Then they gathered in groups, making their way to the northern cold tide. After a thousand years of development, the cold tide in The North had reached a terrifying level. A normal person stepping into the land of the cold tide would almost instantly turn into an ice sculpture. This method, which preserved one¡¯s body without any pain, became the preferred way of suicide for everyone. Of course. There were also people who chose other methods like poisonous fires, earthquakes, gales, but those who chose these three paths were a minority and considered unusual. The empire¡¯s Prime Minister before me was also among those in despair. He would lead millions of citizens who had actively chosen this path to meet their deaths in the cold tide and face destiny¡¯s final judgment. And Lu Yuan chose to ignore this. Scenes like this had been too numerous to count since the eight hundredth year of the Shenwu era. Every year, a great number of people who could not bear the gradual approach of natural disasters, the slow descent of death, and the increasing hardship of life, chose to end themselves in despair. Only before, those who chose to end their own lives were ordinary people of lower and middle class. And now, it was his own bloodline descendant, the empire¡¯s Prime Minister. There was no difference. All he could do was use his immense martial power to maintain order amidst the spreading despair of the entire population. To ensure that those who still wanted to survive, those clinging to life, could have the security of order and live safely to the last. This was his final tenderness. It was also the duty of an emperor. ¡°However, it¡¯s already been one thousand one hundred years in the Shenwu era, and the arrival of the cold tide has taken so long?¡± In the empty and serene grand hall, a voice of resignation rose as Lu Yuan sighed, ¡°Maintaining it until now after a thousand years, it¡¯s indeed time to end.¡± His gaze passed through the doors of the grand hall and settled on The North. As if he could look beyond the endless winds and glaciers and see the Northern Dark City that had stood for ten thousand years. Only ten months remained for the lands of Central State. Within Chu State, following the departure of that bloodline descendant just now, only a few million people who still wished to live remained. And these few million people, with the impending disaster, would not be able to live much longer. Everything would inevitably head towards destruction. It was so with the Nine Provinces, as it was with Chu State. And he, the emperor, after protecting the empire for a thousand years, was also time to step down from this position and seek his own future. ¡°A thousand years of waiting, although due to the reduction in population and territory in the late stage, there was insufficient supply of Qi Luck, and the Taiping three-piece set only managed to be nurtured to the Inferior Immortal Artifact level. But among the Emperor¡¯s Three-piece Set, the Heavenly Crown successfully cultivated the Earth Immortal Dao Fruit, while the Emperor Robes and Emperor¡¯s War Chariot also possessed the Human Dao Fruit.¡± Chapter 1180 - Chapter 1180 Chapter 473 Ascension to the Immortal Realm_2 ?Chapter 1180: Chapter 473 Ascension to the Immortal Realm_2 Chapter 1180: Chapter 473 Ascension to the Immortal Realm_2 Although it was quite different from what I had initially anticipated, I still managed to achieve the goal, albeit reluctantly, by obtaining an Earth Immortal Dao Fruit. The remaining millions of people, even if I waited another half a year, wouldn¡¯t provide Qi Luck that was of much use to me anymore. Staying any longer, especially with the four great natural disasters converging, who knows what might happen; it¡¯s indeed unwise to linger.¡± Lu Yuan also felt some trepidation in his heart about the convergence of the four great natural disasters. If the four disasters were to meet and trigger the world¡¯s collapse, and he was at the epicenter of that catastrophe, things could indeed turn deadly. So, for the sake of safety, it would be best to set off now, when there¡¯s still ten months of cushion time before the collapse of Heaven and Earth begins, and head straight to Northern Dark City. Then, to activate the Formation Method and ascend to the Immortal Realm, that would be the best choice. ¡°The Prime Minister has left; it¡¯s time for me, the Emperor, to depart as well.¡± Patting himself down, Lu Yuan moved his body, which hadn¡¯t been exercised in several years. After standing up, he stepped out of the palace and took one last glance at his empire from atop the wall. Without any hesitation, he leaped up and headed north, toward the cold tide. However, as Emperor, he still had responsibilities. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Though he left, he still left behind an Avatar that looked exactly like him to sit in the palace. He himself could not stay with the remaining people and die with them. But as the Emperor Shenwu, to leave an Avatar behind to maintain the last vestiges of order in the empire and to protect the remaining subjects for one final journey, to witness the destruction of the empire and the world alongside them, that was still something he could do. As for the other Avatars, Lu Yuan had long since reclaimed them as materials, along with some treasures gathered over the years, preparing to take them with him as he left the Nine Provinces. To take those things away, Lu Yuan had specially expended his magic power to master the Mount Sumeru mustard seed technique, which was specifically for storage. The magic power within the Avatars had also been reclaimed to supplement his consumption. There was nothing left in this world to hold onto. ¡°Riding the wind away, to the Immortal Realm. Free and at ease, in pursuit of the Great Dao.¡± Humming a ditty he had made up on the spot, Lu Yuan ran swiftly through the blizzard, utilizing his light-body skills. With his Grandmaster-level Martial Arts cultivation, even if the heavenly cold tide was extremely dreadful, he could still hold up under the protection of his powerful True pneuma. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï At the same time, the Mount Sumeru space stored a great deal of refined food, which he could consume to replenish his strength and True pneuma. Therefore, it only took him six months. He crossed the northern snowfields, traversed the frozen sea, and arrived at the Arctic ice cap. Returning to Northern Dark City, everything was almost exactly the same as it had been a thousand years ago when he first arrived. The Instrument Track Formation Methods left by the ancients bore traces that had not faded much despite the arrival of natural disasters. A Formation that could remain unchanged for tens of thousands of years was a testament to the immense power held by the Immortal who descended to leave it behind in the ancient times. Though Lu Yuan had seen it once before, seeing it again still filled him with awe at that tremendous power. This time, however, he didn¡¯t come to admire it. After checking the Formation Method again and confirming that the Northern Dark City large array had not been damaged and was still intact, Lu Yuan went directly to the core of the Formation. He sat down cross-legged and rested briefly. Once his spirit had returned to its peak, he formed a hand seal and pointed at the core of the Instrument Track below. In an instant, the vast magic power of his Five Qi Towards Origin Realm, like a river released from its sluice gates, surged out. For ordinary Cultivators and mortals, this near-exhaustible magic power was now being desperately poured into the Formation. Under the infusion of magic power, the large array, which had been dormant, began to light up bit by bit, starting from Lu Yuan¡¯s position at the core, casting a faint blue glow. This blue light, with energy flowing in, started to spread rapidly outward from the core. In just a brief moment, after nine layers of Lu Yuan¡¯s magic power infusion, the entire large array was finally saturated with energy. Endless points of blue light, like stars, began to resonate with each other, and a ghostly, ethereal power started to descend within the Formation. As the descending power reached its apex, Boom! A sky-piercing pillar of light suddenly emerged at the core of the Formation, then shot straight into the sky, causing the wind and clouds of Heaven and Earth to undergo a massive change, and a vortex slowly opened, ripping apart the Heavenly Vault. Almost instantaneously, Lu Yuan¡¯s figure was engulfed in the pillar of light, and the shimmering white ghostly light, sweeping up his figure, soared from the ground, heading toward the portal that had opened in the sky. In a daze, as if the heavens and the earth were spinning, Lu Yuan felt light, his vision went dark, and then it felt like he was tossed into a washing machine, spinning rapidly. This spinning force was terrifying. His consciousness could barely enter it before it was torn to shreds. Fortunately, the blue light coursing through the pillar acted as a gentle force, enveloping his body and stabilizing him amidst the tumultuous forces, allowing him to remain unharmed. Therefore, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t dare to probe further and allowed the force to pull him towards that indistinct destination. ¡­ Between the Two Realms, space was traversed. Unaware of how much time had passed, it felt to Lu Yuan like the blink of a hundred years or the flicker of a moment. When his vision cleared, the ground beneath his feet became a verdant mountain ridge filled with the songs of birds and fragrant flowers. ¡°Is this the Immortal Realm?¡± Barely recovering consciousness, Lu Yuan immediately became vigilant, releasing his divine sense to carefully observe his surroundings. Chapter 1181 - Chapter 1181 Chapter 473 Ascension to the Immortal Realm_3 ?Chapter 1181: Chapter 473 Ascension to the Immortal Realm_3 Chapter 1181: Chapter 473 Ascension to the Immortal Realm_3 After thoroughly surveying the nearby ten miles with his divine sense and confirming there was no danger, he began to observe the surrounding environment. The ordinary mountains and wilderness were no different from those in the Nine Provinces Realm. This place was a valley, and judging from the dense vegetation near the valley, there were no traces of human activity. The sounds of insects and birds were everywhere, with the roars of wild beasts in the distance, indicating this was a primitive jungle. ¡°But is this the location of the other end of the teleportation array?¡± Lu Yuan looked down at the blue stone under his feet which was covered by wild grass, hiding the large-scale formation¡¯s instrument track, and fell into deep thought. His divine sense swept over the stone beneath his feet. The familiar formation¡¯s tracks were identical to those in Northern Dark City in the Nine Provinces Realm. It was clear that this was the other end of the teleportation formation. This cross-realm teleportation was luckily successful. Previously, in the Nine Provinces Realm, among the many speculations about the Immortal Realm, the ones considering the Immortal Realm to still exist and that there was no risk with teleportation seemed more reliable now. What made one curious was, if the teleportation array was intact, why had the connection between the Immortal Realm and here in the Nine Provinces Realm been severed? As Lu Yuan pondered this question, he couldn¡¯t help but feel puzzled and began to study the formation beneath his feet. He had been alive for over a thousand years. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? When he was in the Nine Provinces Realm, the empire was stable, and the golden age had lasted for several hundred years, with no significant matters requiring attention. Therefore, after his relatives departed one after another, he had no entanglements left, and Lu Yuan had become the emperor who relinquished his hold early, entrusting state affairs to his ministers, and dedicating himself to cultivation. In the passage of a thousand years, he not only mastered the ¡°Former Emperor¡¯s Qi Yun Secret Record¡± and the ¡°Imperial Emperor¡¯s Mystic Instrument Sutra,¡± two Immortal Techniques. He had also started to study the cultivation techniques and ancient texts left behind by the various grand Immortal sects of the Nine Provinces, as well as other classical relics he had collected. At the same time, he also started to delve into astronomy, divination, elixir medicine, talismans, and other skills. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? Although due to the lack of spiritual energy, he was reluctant to waste magic power by practicing them directly, so he stayed at the level of pure reading. However, for a Cultivator of Five Qi Chaoyuan, even if it was just pure reading and mental simulation, over the span of a thousand years, one could study any skill or cultivation technique to a very deep level. Therefore, Lu Yuan¡¯s skill in formation methods was actually not superficial but rather profound. Below the Immortals, hardly any cultivators could surpass him. After all, the lifespan limit of a Five Essence Qi Cultivator was only about eight hundred years. Even then, in those eight hundred years, one had to spend most of the time refining their cultivation and breaking through realms. The time available to dedicate to a particular skill was very limited for them. But Lu Yuan, with more than a thousand years behind him, with his cultivation already at the point where it could not be further advanced, had dedicated most of that time to study other cultivation arts and techniques. One was distracted by various interests, while the other was wholly focused. One was intermittent, like patchy fishing and drying nets, while the other studied earnestly, day in, day out. One might only be able to study for a hundred years, or even just a few decades or dozen years. But the other had a thousand years, and even with an average distribution of time for each skill, there would be two or three hundred years of study. Not to mention the resources invested, the time spent, and the level of dedication, Lu Yuan was far stronger than others at the same stage of realm, by an unfathomable margin. As an individual of longevity, the longer one lived, the more profound one¡¯s foundation became, and the gap between them and other cultivators of the same realm also grew larger. This was the best way to capitalize on longevity. ¡°The basic teleportation function is still here, but the positioning function that connects to the other teleportation array has failed. In other words, I cannot find the location of the Nine Provinces Realm anymore?¡± After studying the teleportation array underfoot for a while, Lu Yuan finally understood why the Immortal Realm had lost contact with the Nine States Realm. It turned out to be a matter of positioning; there were no coordinates left? ¡°This is really¡­unexpected¡­¡± Now that he understood the reason, he was at a loss for what to say for a moment. Over in the Nine States Realm, people had been desperately searching and had come up with countless conjectures, yet the reason was so simple and unadorned, it was extremely surprising. However, amidst the surprise, Lu Yuan pondered deeply and also discovered the problems implicit in this situation. That is, why did the Immortal Realm lose the coordinates of the Nine States Realm? Were they lost by accident? Or had the coordinates of the Nine States Realm shifted, rendering those of the Immortal Realm ineffective? Or had the Nine States Realm been deliberately hidden, not to be found by others? If it were the first two, then the problem wouldn¡¯t be too severe. But if it were the latter, there might be great secrets and terrifying implications behind it. As such, Lu Yuan only pondered for a moment before quickly stopping himself from thinking further. If there were any conspiracies involving a whole realm, they were not within his scope to explore or guess, being a cultivator who hadn¡¯t even become an Immortal yet. To recklessly probe into secrets beyond one¡¯s abilities is more likely to be a curse than a blessing. As someone who had endured a thousand years of longevity, Lu Yuan was no longer so rash. ¡°So whatever the reason might be, it has nothing to do with me now. Whether the Nine States Realm still exists is also in question. Maybe after the convergence of the Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe, it was destroyed outright. All causes and effects vanished. What meaning is there in exploring further?¡± Lu Yuan shook his head, casting these distracting thoughts from his mind, and then took a deep breath. Looking up at the unusual sight of six suns side by side in the sky, he adjusted the simple crown on his head, a phantasm of the Heavenly Crown, and a smile appeared on his face. ¡°What¡¯s most important now is that I¡¯ve arrived in the Immortal Realm, where there¡¯s an abundance of Spiritual Energy, and there¡¯s no longer any obstacle to further exploring the Immortal Method. I, can now become an Immortal!¡± As his words fell, the crown on his head emitted a dazzling array of light. The endless, astonishingly active Spiritual Energy Between Heaven and Earth suddenly turned into a tide, rushing madly toward the crown. The Heavenly Crown, starved for a thousand years, now thirsted like a gluttonous beast, crazily suckling at these flows of Spiritual Energy, absorbing it all into itself, nourishing the parched body. In an instant, the External Tool Dao Fruit, having accumulated enough and only lacking Spiritual Energy, underwent a transformation. Bound in destiny to this crown, Lu Yuan¡¯s aura began to rise steadily, vastly surpassing the limits of Cultivator of Five Qi Towards Origin, heading toward that profound and mystic domain. All sorts of Spiritual Energy gathered around him, conjuring wondrous visions that swirled and emerged incessantly near him. Dense and endless, they framed him in a divine presence. External Dao becoming Immortal, instant Ascension! This very scene, described in ancient texts, now quietly played out in this deserted little valley while no one else was aware. Henceforth, Between Heaven and Earth, there was one more External Tool Dao Fruit, one more Immortal. After a Passage of a Thousand Years of cultivation, relying on external objects, Lu Yuan had finally become an Immortal. In searching for Immortality, is this not endless joy! Chapter 1182 - Chapter 1182 Chapter 474 Heretical Path to Immortality ?Chapter 1182: Chapter 474 Heretical Path to Immortality Chapter 1182: Chapter 474 Heretical Path to Immortality The transformation of the Heavenly Crown¡¯s extraordinary vision lasted for three days. After absorbing a massive amount of spiritual energy and with hardly any obstructions, leveraging the accumulation of qi luck from countless people over the past thousand years. It directly broke through the bottleneck of a Human Immortal and condensed the Human Flower Dao Fruit. And the moment the Dao Fruit took form, a dangerous aura began to emerge within Heaven and Earth. As described in the ancient texts, the tribulation of becoming immortal was brewing. According to the records, those who seek to become immortal must pass through these trials and, if successful, enjoy longevity and transform into an immortal. If they fail, then under the number of tribulations, they turn to ashes. In ancient times, innumerable cultivators fell at this juncture. Almost six or seven out of ten cultivators trying to transcend would fall under these tribulations, truly a gateway of death. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Even though the External Tool Dao Fruit resulted from an external object becoming an immortal, it too could attain a Dao Fruit. Therefore, just as it transformed into an immortal, the heavenly tribulation arrived. Yet, it was not over. In terms of the foundation of the Heavenly Crown, the Human Flower Dao Fruit was only the beginning; the Earth Flower Dao Fruit was the ultimate goal. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Just when the tribulation within Heaven and Earth had barely started brewing. An even greater tide of spiritual energy surged, attracting almost all the spiritual energy from within a hundred miles radius towards the Heavenly Crown. And the aura of the Heavenly Crown was also expanding rapidly. This terrifying power instantly overwhelmed the brewing tribulations. Between Heaven and Earth, the vision manifesting spiritual energy directly crushed the tribulation of the Human Flower Dao Fruit. Before the tribulation even began, it ended. However, an even greater aura of tribulation closely followed, brewing anew between Heaven and Earth. After absorbing an entire month¡¯s worth of spiritual energy, the Heavenly Crown¡¯s thousand-year accumulation of essence slowly began to deplete. The aura of this External Tool Dao Fruit also climbed to the level of an Earth Immortal, barely surpassing the threshold. This was the limit of the Heavenly Crown. At this point, there was nothing more to add, nothing more to progress towards. Between Heaven and Earth, the Earth Flower tribulation that had been brewing for a month descended accordingly. Boom! The first to fall was the terrifying Thunder Tribulation. Nine heavy layers of purple-gold lightning plummeted from the Heavenly Vault, striking directly towards the Heavenly Crown. Watching the fearsome power of the heavenly thunder, Lu Yuan who had already let go of the crown and retreated a hundred miles away, couldn¡¯t help but turn pale. Fortunately, he had foreseen this and removed himself in time. Otherwise, if he were in the midst of the tribulation lightning, the Heavenly Crown might not have had any trouble due to its own strength. But he, a mere mortal who had not yet become an immortal, would likely have turned directly into ashes even with the External Tool Dao Fruit¡¯s protection. The strength of external objects and one¡¯s own strength were, after all, distinct. Otherwise, what would be the point of immortals undergoing such arduous cultivation? Just find heavenly treasures to aid these external objects in becoming immortal and take advantage for oneself, wouldn¡¯t that be better? There is, after all, a difference between the two. Although the heavenly tribulation was terrifying, Lu Yuan still had confidence in the Heavenly Crown. After all, the original form of this External Tool Dao Fruit was a relic left by the Great Dharma God, who once contended with the Three Emperors during the ancient era, a genuine Earth Immortal treasure. Even though the quality of the magical treasure had diminished over tens of thousands of years due to the lack of spiritual energy. But Lu Yuan had added many rare and exotic treasures to it during its reforging, thereby restoring some of its foundation. Furthermore, with the qi luck nourishment from billions of people over the past thousand years, the foundation and potential of the magical treasure had been raised above the level of an Earth Flower Dao Fruit. With such a basis, surviving the Thunder Tribulation was absolutely within reach. And indeed, it was so. After the nine layers of Earth Immortal Thunder Tribulation, the Heavenly Crown remained intact as before, even becoming all the more radiant and sacred after being tempered by the lightning. However, there are three tribulations to becoming immortal. To become a Human Immortal, one must weather the Thunder Tribulation. To become an Earth Immortal, on top of the Thunder Tribulation, one endures an additional Wind Tribulation. To become a Heavenly Immortal, the ancient texts are not explicit, but ancient cultivators speculate that there should be a Fire Tribulation. Or perhaps a different kind of tribulation altogether. But whatever the kind, the tribulation for Heavenly Immortals is certainly terrifying beyond measure. Otherwise, among the many prodigies of the Nine Provinces in ancient times, equal to the Earth Immortals, not a single Heavenly Immortal would have emerged. Now, the Heavenly Crown is about to form the Earth Flower Dao Fruit. It has already passed the previous Thunder Tribulation, hence the next tribulation is the Wind Tribulation. The Thunder Tribulation tests a cultivator¡¯s Divine Method and whether they can withstand external tribulations to achieve an immortal position. Therefore, if your Spells and Supernatural Powers are strong or you possess magical treasures, as long as you can withstand the Thunder Tribulation, you can smoothly become an immortal. But the Wind Tribulation is different. The Wind Tribulation arises out of nowhere, blowing directly inside the body of the cultivator, leaving you no chance to defend. This tests whether a cultivator¡¯s Dao foundation is solid. That is to say, is the Dao you cultivate powerful enough? The Wind Tribulation directly blows onto the Dao, with its manifestation simply taking the form of internal winds. If your Dao is steadfast and your path of cultivation is secure, this wind is as innocuous as a gentle breeze on your face, utterly harmless. But if there is a flaw in your Dao, something less than perfect, then even the slightest gap allows the wind to permeate everywhere. Coursing through your body, it causes your Dao to wither, your form to waste away. In the end, the more flaws in the Dao, the more tribulations the body endures. As vitality seeps away, so does the Dao, and the path to immortality is severed. Even the Divine Soul will collapse along with it, vanishing completely, with no hope for reincarnation. Therefore, the Wind Tribulation, which targets the Dao directly, is what immortals fear the most. Countless Human Immortals at the end of their lifespan dare not take this step. Chapter 1183 - Chapter 1183 Chapter 474 Heretical Path to Immortality_2 ?Chapter 1183: Chapter 474 Heretical Path to Immortality_2 Chapter 1183: Chapter 474 Heretical Path to Immortality_2 I fear losing the afterlife, and with it, all hopes for the future. However, the one facing the tribulation now is the Heavenly Crown, the External Tool Dao Fruit, not myself. Therefore, Lu Yuan naturally has nothing to fear. Moreover, he is confident in the Heavenly Crown. If one were to speak of the Dao achieved, the Heavenly Crown, this External Tool Dao Fruit, undoubtedly walks the path of the Fortune Dao. And if it¡¯s the Fortune Dao we¡¯re talking about, that happens to be Lu Yuan¡¯s strong suit. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï As the ruler of the Nine Provinces, Lu Yuan had, over the following thousand years, exclusively dominated Central State, governing hundreds of millions of people. The Qi luck of the entire Nine Provinces world converged upon him, which Lu Yuan then distributed among several Fortune Treasures. Receiving sustenance from a world for a thousand years, one can imagine how tremendous the absorbed Qi luck must be. Therefore, on the path of the Fortune Dao, not only has Lu Yuan walked it with unparalleled stability, but even the Fortune Treasures he has refined are deeply rooted and steadfast in the Great Dao. With such a firm foundation, favored by the world, if he still couldn¡¯t become an Earth Immortal, then he really wouldn¡¯t know who would qualify to become an Earth Immortal. Thus, utilizing his connection with the divine soul of the Heavenly Crown, he felt the Wind Tribulation emerge within this External Tool Dao Fruit, and as it swept past, Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï But it came swiftly and left just as quickly. The Wind Tribulation, like a gentle breeze grazing the face, passed through the Heavenly Crown and vanished into nothingness in the blink of an eye. The Second Tribulation, which countless Human Immortals feared like a tiger, was easily overcome under the profound foundation of the Heavenly Crown. And in the moment the tribulation dissipated, a joy of transformation spread from the Heavenly Crown. A blessing from Heaven and Earth, a higher form of great liberation and supreme freedom, also arose from nowhere. ¡°Hahaha¡­¡± Through the connection of his divine thoughts, Lu Yuan felt this exhilaration and couldn¡¯t help laughing out loud. He then rode the wind, flying straight towards the Heavenly Crown. At a distance, the External Tool Dao Fruit, sensing its master¡¯s joy, also flew towards him. In the blink of an eye, they covered a hundred li. The Heavenly Crown reverted to a simple Qing jade crown and settled upon his head, tying up Lu Yuan¡¯s hair. And a powerful force, at the moment of their contact, transferred directly from the Heavenly Crown to him. The Earth Flower Dao Fruit of an Earth Immortal, through the connection cultivated over a thousand years, became a part of Lu Yuan just like an organ of the body, at his disposal. Unprecedented power, unprecedented elation. A feeling of being one with Heaven and Earth nearly made him lose himself. If becoming a Human Immortal is a transformation due to personal power reaching its limit, then as an Earth Immortal, one can borrow the power of Heaven and Earth, control a part of the Earth¡¯s power, and employ its laws to create one¡¯s own domain. Therefore, an Earth Immortal is also known as a Fortune Immortal. With the domain of laws at one¡¯s control, one can turn a region into a Blessed Land. Cave Worlds, as described in the records Lu Yuan had seen, were not much elaborated upon, known only to be exclusive to Heavenly Immortals, wielding a part of Heaven¡¯s power. This is the origin of the Blessed Lands and Cavern Heavens. And now, with the Heavenly Crown, he has become an Earth Immortal, capable of turning a region into a Blessed Land, reigning supreme over that place. With a human body, controlling the mighty force of Heaven and Earth. Such Divine Powers, how can they not bring joy and exhilaration! ¡°The Heavenly Crown has now completed its tribulation and transformation. Since that is the case, I might as well let the remaining three Magical Treasures and two Dao Fruits also undergo their transformations.¡± During the Five Qi Towards Primordial, Lu Yuan¡¯s divine thoughts could reach ten li around him. Under the cover of his divine thoughts, everything was clear and nothing could hide. And with the breakthrough from Human Immortal, even if it¡¯s just an initial breakthrough, one¡¯s divine thoughts can cover a region of a hundred li. Moreover, based on this, all sorts of inconceivable methods and endless wonders arise. As an Earth Immortal, able to turn a place into a Blessed Land, the capabilities become even more terrifying. With just a thought from Lu Yuan, a thousand li around him could be transformed into his domain. Within this domain, no object could escape his observation and control, akin to the scrutiny of Heaven itself. If he wished for someone to die, then within the domain, that person must die. If he wished someone to live, then within the domain, that person, unless their lifespan had come to an end or they were under higher laws, could not die. The mystery of an Earth Immortal is evident from this. And now, as he released his divine thoughts, within a thousand li, everything became part of his Earth Immortal Blessed Land Domain. Therefore, the situation all around him also became crystal clear. ¡°Within a thousand li, there appears to be no traces of human activity. However, aside from wild beasts, there are some beings that have cultivated techniques, judging by their aura, could they be the legendary monsters?¡± Lu Yuan observed within his Blessed Land Domain at several regions situated at five hundred li, seven hundred li, and beyond nine hundred li. That turbid and utterly different force, unlike the Immortal Family Power, made him furrow his brows. But it was merely a frown, from the natural aversion of an Immortal cultivator to a certain aura, and he had no intention of attacking them. After a Passage of a Thousand Years of cultivation, Lu Yuan¡¯s nature had long since changed; he was not so extreme. As a traverser, his view on the differences between humans and monsters wasn¡¯t that serious either. There are good humans, and there are good monsters. Villains exist everywhere. And just as there is human goodness and monster goodness; there is human evil and monster evil. Differences in race naturally lead to different outlooks, making it challenging to define the two straightforwardly. ¡°Later, I can pay those monsters a visit to glean information about this world, then adapt accordingly based on what I learn, and decide on a code of conduct in this world.¡± Chapter 1184 - Chapter 1184 Chapter 474 Heretical Path to Immortality_3 ?Chapter 1184: Chapter 474 Heretical Path to Immortality_3 Chapter 1184: Chapter 474 Heretical Path to Immortality_3 ¡°` The monsters were all located hundreds of miles away. And judging from their demonic aura, these monsters¡¯ strength was not particularly formidable. They were essentially all in the process of condensing two or three levels of energy, or even just one level. The strongest among them could only condense up to four levels of energy at most. Not even reaching Five Qi Towards Primordial, they posed no threat to Lu Yuan, who had already become an Early Earth Immortal. With such levels of cultivation, the changes in the heavenly phenomena here could not be detected by them over there, the spiritual senses of those lesser monsters couldn¡¯t sense this place, naturally, they couldn¡¯t possibly disturb him. Therefore, Lu Yuan did not wish to pay them too much attention for the time being, but rather focus his attention on the transformation of the remaining Luck Artifacts. In the face of an unfamiliar world, especially the legendary powerful Immortal Realm, a place where great forces dominate, Lu Yuan felt an extreme lack of security in his heart. At this moment, he wished to enhance his own protective means by all possible methods. Therefore, after setting out his subsequent strategic plan, Lu Yuan took out the Emperor¡¯s war chariot and Emperor robes, began to draw upon their auras, and allowed these two External Tool Dao Fruits to start their tribulation. Just like the Heavenly Crown, upon accumulating enough energy, the two External Tool Dao Fruits effortlessly invoked the Heavenly and Earthly Aura, initiating their transformation and accumulation of power. Once the accumulation was complete, relying on a solid foundation and their inherently extraordinary materials, the two Magical Treasures easily survived the Thunder Tribulation and attained the Human Flower Dao Fruit. Even taking advantage of the breakthrough opportunity, they absorbed a great deal of Spiritual Energy, advancing greatly in the Human Immortal Realm. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 If one were to forcibly define a realm, then these two External Tool Dao Fruits would be at the mid-level Human Immortal stage. As for the Heavenly Crown, it belonged to the Early Earth Immortal stage. But this was not the limit. Very soon, the Taiping sword, Heavenly Destiny Staff, and Myriad Peoples Seal, collectively known as the Taiping three-piece set, also absorbed enough Spiritual Energy and began their transformation. However, since these three were merely Magical Treasures and not Dao Fruits, they did not undergo Thunder Tribulation. Once enough power was accumulated, they could easily transform into Immortal Artifacts. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? But these three treasures, after being eroded by Natural Disasters in the Nine States Realm, began to suffer from a scarcity of Qi Fortune. Therefore, to ensure a sufficient supply for the three Dao Fruit Magical Treasures, five hundred years after Shenwu, Lu Yuan stopped supplying Qi Fortune to the Taiping three-piece set. As a result, the three treasures¡¯ accumulation was not particularly ample. Eventually, when their level reached that of Middle to Lower Grade Immortal Artifacts, they ceased transforming. That was far from reaching the might of Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts depicted in the Taiping Dao Book. Nevertheless, acquiring three Lower Grade Immortal Artifacts was quite satisfying for Lu Yuan. Many Human Immortals, within their limited lifespan of three thousand years, if without ancestral accumulation or great fortune, might struggle their whole lives without having a Immortal Artifact at their disposal. Even many Earth Immortals only possess a few Lower Grade Immortal Artifacts, and not necessarily Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts. With Lu Yuan¡¯s Early Earth Immortal stage represented by the Heavenly Crown, wielding three Lower Grade Immortal Artifacts was quite fitting to his status, striking a proper balance, and fairly good at that. Moreover, apart from the three Immortal Artifacts, he also possessed two Human Immortal Dao Fruits. Over the years, he conducted many studies on the Immortal Technique records of the Nine Provinces, and from them, he deduced quite a few Avatar techniques. Now, by simply following these methods, he could separate two Souls from his body and infuse them into the two External Tool Dao Fruits. Instantly, he could obtain two Human Immortal Avatars, which added a few more tricks to his repertoire compared to other Earth Immortals, making him much stronger already. ¡°` Two mid-level Human Immortal avatars, although not comparable to an Earth Immortal, but in situations where the original body should not act, are the best helpers to free up hands to solve some simple matters. Having grown accustomed to using avatars in the Nine Provinces, Lu Yuan was quite satisfied with this. Therefore, after getting used to the strength of Earth Immortal Dao Fruit brought by the Heavenly Crown, he spent over a month absorbing the Heavenly and Earthly Aura, tuning his magic power to the peak of his current realm, and also amplified his Divine Soul to the pinnacle of the early Earth Immortal stage. Then he applied a Secret Technique he had long researched, using the power of the Earth Immortal Dao Fruit to split two soul seeds, directly crossing them into the Emperor Robes and Emperor¡¯s War Chariot. In an instant, the two Dao Fruit Magical Treasures, which were a bit sluggish before, became lively following the entrance of Lu Yuan¡¯s Divine Soul. After dancing in the sky, finally, a faint shadow surged out, and both Dao Fruits manifested magical bodies, revealing a face somewhat similar to Lu Yuan¡¯s. Looking at these two avatars, Lu Yuan scrutinized them carefully to ensure that everything was as planned and that there were no errors. Then his hands did not stop. With a flick of his sleeve, a vast array of rare and exotic treasures, stored in the space of his sleeve by the Qiankun Technique, poured out like water. Then, with the manipulation of an Earth Immortal-level magic power and Divine Soul, these exotic treasures and materials were instantly refined, turned into malleable shapes, and according to their different attributes and materials, integrated into the magical illusions of the two avatars. To fully harness the strength of the avatars, and even to further enhance his own power while also masking the essence to prevent outsiders from seeing the connection between the avatars and himself, it was necessary to put on a layer of a mask for the avatars. In the thousand years in the Nine States, Lu Yuan had already made a detailed plan for this. That was to refine two bodies, to contain the Dao Fruit, for the use of his avatars. Even if it meant fighting against enemies and having the bodies destroyed, as long as the External Tool Dao Fruit was intact and could escape in time, then in the future, another strong body could be cultivated, and a powerful avatar would be reborn. Thus, as long as the Dao Fruit still exists, the avatar lives on. Marvelous! Marvelous! While implementing this plan, Lu Yuan also made modifications in practice. It took him several months¡¯ time to finally refine the bodies of the two avatars. Looking at the two External Tool Dao Fruits, each merging into a body, the magic power within the Dao Fruits surged out, filling up what were essentially now Magical Treasure bodies. Two powerful presences appeared instantly. ¡°Not bad, not bad. Relying on the combination of Magical Treasures, these two avatars of mine have advanced beyond the foundation of the Dao Fruit, and now they can even rival late-stage Human Immortals.¡± Feeling the strength of the avatars, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but express his delight with a laugh. After ascending to the Immortal Realm, not only has the Heaven and Earth changed, but his own Cultivation strength has also skyrocketed countless times. Indeed, upon the thought of Ascension, I feel the vastness of Heaven and Earth. The pond in the Nine States Realm is too small; it¡¯s in a vast place like the Immortal Realm that suits Cultivation and Dao Seeking better. ¡°All matters are concluded; staying here any longer serves no purpose. It¡¯s time to go out and see what this so-called Immortal Realm is really like¡­¡± Lu Yuan waved his sleeve, storing the two avatars into the Qiankun space within his sleeve. Then, his form rose, turning into a streak of Escape Light, breaking through the sky. He flew towards the several spots hundreds of miles away, where Monster Qi was present. Exploring the Immortal Realm begins with these little monsters. Chapter 1185 - Chapter 1185 Chapter 475 Changqing Youxin ?Chapter 1185: Chapter 475 Changqing Youxin Chapter 1185: Chapter 475 Changqing Youxin In the thousand-mile radius nearby, there are a total of three places where demon energy exists. Among them, the most concentrated is located about five hundred miles from Lu Yuan. The monsters there, judging from their demon energy, have already achieved the Cultivation of Four Qi Condensation. Among the human Cultivators who have yet to become Immortals, they stand out, indicating they have reached a significant level of development. Therefore, to explore the details there, naturally, seeking the best is the way to go. How swift is the Escape Technique of an Earth Immortal¡¯s Cultivation? In just over ten breaths, Lu Yuan had traversed five hundred miles and arrived at the place where the demon energy was dense. During his flight, he did not conceal his tracks, so as soon as he arrived, he had already alarmed the monsters inside the Cave Mansion. Then, an elder emerged hurriedly. Behind him, timidly following, were five or six little foxes with shiny fur. Observing their bodies, they too possessed some demon energy, but it was not strong enough for cultivation, not even amounting to the Condensation of a single Qi. But judging by their terrified and fearful eyes, and the occasional flash of wisdom, it¡¯s clear that these little foxes are not lacking in intelligence. ¡®This seems to be a demon clan with a heritage.¡¯ Lu Yuan glanced at these fox demons and couldn¡¯t help but think this. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Monsters are generally referred to as all types of creatures that have succeeded in cultivation and awakened intelligence. But this is just a term used by the Human Race, with a certain degree of derogatory meaning for races that are not of their own kind. In fact, with monsters being so diverse in origin, from all corners of the earth, they obviously do not all belong to the same species, and it is hard for them to be united. For instance, a chicken that specializes in eating insectsa€¡±once it becomes an enlightened being and encounters an insect that has turned into a demona€¡±could the chicken demon coexist with an insect demon? That¡¯s clearly impossible. The chicken is specialized in eating insects, finding pleasure and sustenance in doing so. In such a case, for two different types of monsters to meet and not fight would be a good outcome already. How could they possibly live together and become friends? Even if some monsters can overcome this innate fear and hostility and coexist with each other, it would still be very uncomfortable. In time, conflicts will arise and eventually they will split apart. Therefore, monsters of different races that have become enlightened typically live alone according to their own characteristics and habits, and seldom interact with monsters of other races. And if one¡¯s race or lineage has developed over a long period of time, and many of the same species have cultivated into demons, that group will evolve into a demon clan. Just like the fox demons in front of us. They became enlightened, then took care of their offspring, allowing them to also become enlightened. Once several foxes became demons, they formed a fox demon clan. Stripping the term ¡®monster¡¯ of its pejorative connotations acquired over many years within the Human Race, it essentially just represents a path of cultivation that is different from the Immortal Method. Monsters and Immortals both can seek the Great Dao. Among the human Cultivators, aren¡¯t there various Daoist Paths and sects? Considering that monsters come from different species with diverse natures and habitats, their relationships are even more incompatible than water and fire. The above are some ancient records about the demon clans of the Nine Provinces. There are even some observations brought back by some ancient and powerful Cultivators from the Immortal Realm. These past years, as Lu Yuan had been preparing for his Ascension to the Immortal Realm, he read quite a bit to make some early preparations. Now, seeing this group of fox demons, he immediately recognized their true nature. ¡°Little demon pays respect to the Great Immortal!¡± While Lu Yuan was observing these fox demons, the green-robed elder from the fox clan was also observing him. However, the old fox demon didn¡¯t dare to look too much, only glancing briefly at Lu Yuan. Then, feeling the overwhelming Immortal Spirit surrounding him, much more alarm rose in his heart. Just now, he had only felt a terrifying aura approaching his Cave Mansion. The aura was so fearsome that even a slight sense of it was suffocating, making him incapable of harboring any thoughts of resistance. Thus, he did not dare to delay and hurriedly came out to face whichever fate, good or bad, was approaching. Now, seeing the newcomer and not fully understanding who he was, he almost instantly recognized that the other party was a True Immortal who had achieved success in the Dao. This is an Immortal! Just the thought of such a being standing before him made the old fox shiver all over. Not daring to show any disrespect, he immediately prostrated himself on the ground and began to worship. ¡°Oh, you recognize that I am an Immortal?¡± Lu Yuan looked at the old fox and chuckled lightly. ¡°The Great Immortal¡¯s pure energy pierces the heavens, and the Immortal Spirit lingers; it is not ordinary. Although I am a simple creature with limited sight and experience, I have heard of the signs of an Immortal and thus recognized the Great Immortal,¡± the Old Fox answered with utmost respect. Lu Yuan pondered upon hearing this. Since his Ascension to the Immortal Realm, he had been busy with his breakthroughs. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Several months had passed, either spent on the path of breaking through Heterodox realms or assisting Immortal Artifacts in their breakthroughs. Once all the Heterodox Dao Fruits and Immortal Artifacts had completed their breakthroughs, he immediately set out toward this Old Fox¡¯s Cave Mansion, with hardly any time to settle and refine his suddenly inflated Cultivation. As a result, a bit of his aura had inevitably leaked out. Now that he had been recognized by this Old Fox, it seemed quite normal. ¡®However, this is also a flaw. After inquiring about the situation, I will need to find a secluded place for Hidden Cultivation for a few years, until I fully control the Earth Immortal Cultivation, and then make other plans after I come out,¡¯ Lu Yuan thought to himself. But what he said was, ¡°You need not worry, I have come here just to ask a few things, and will leave after the questions. I have just arrived in this place and see that it¡¯s quite desolate. Within a thousand miles, apart from a few of you little demons, there appears to be no other intelligent beings.¡± Chapter 1186 - Chapter 1186 Chapter 475 Changqing Youxin_2 ?Chapter 1186: Chapter 475 Changqing Youxin_2 Chapter 1186: Chapter 475 Changqing Youxin_2 Why is this so? And where is this place, and in which direction is it located? Do tell me.¡± Upon hearing the Immortal before him speak thus, the Old Fox felt a sudden relief in his heart. It was good that he was not here to make trouble. Moreover, most human Immortals cultivated their moral character, and their natures were far purer than those of demon types. They were the true cultivators of the Immortal Method. Except for a few human Cultivators who were exceptionally hostile towards demon types, as long as demons did not commit evil, some human Cultivators would not arbitrarily kill them. The Old Fox had cultivated with success for hundreds of years and had traveled to many places in the world, so he had some knowledge of the ways of Immortals. Therefore, at this moment, he felt considerably more at ease. Once settled, he dared not neglect the Immortal and hurriedly replied, ¡°In response to the Great Immortal, this place is called Bo Yangling, located within the Youxin Country of the Evergreen Domain in the East China Continent. The main reason why there are so few intelligent beings here is that the humans who used to live in this region have been cleanly devoured by the local demons, ghosts, and monsters. Thus, no humans can be seen here. Moreover, two years ago, King Zuanfeng broke through a major fortified city near Youxin Country called Yunlan. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Now he has taken over the city with a hundred thousand humans and has started gathering troops within Youxin Country, causing chaos. Many nearby demons, lured by human blood food, flocked to join the grand affair, plotting big schemes. Here in Bo Yangling, there were originally over a hundred large and small demons. But after King Zuanfeng raised the banner to gather troops, basically all bloodthirsty demons ran off to Yunlan City to partake in the assault on Youxin Country¡¯s towns and borders. It¡¯s only an old demon like me, who, despite being a demon, has previously accompanied human scholars to study the classics and understand the principles of good and evil. Thus, since I began cultivating as a demon, I have always been in hidden cultivation in the mountain, absorbing the essence of the sun and the moon, never once performing acts that harm or injure humans. Faced with the tragic situation of Yunlan City, despite my sighs, I am powerless and unable to stop it. So, I could only lead my kin to shrink within this Cave Mansion, cultivating our minds in tranquility, out of the adage ¡®out of sight, out of mind.¡¯ The other few demons that remain in Bo Yangling are much like myself, pure in heart, devoted to arduous cultivation. They have never harmed anyone and did not join in the evil deeds this time.¡± The Old Fox, facing the Immortal, did not dare to deceive in the slightest. However, he also knew how dangerous it was to talk about demons eating humans in front of a human Immortal. Therefore, towards the end, he specifically mentioned his own virtues and even did not forget to look after a few neighbors, noting that they too were good demons. From this, it was evident that amidst danger, the Old Fox did not forget his fellow Daoists; his nature and temperament truly belonged to that of a good demon. In fact, there was no need for him to say it, for Lu Yuan could see for himself that the Old Fox¡¯s demonic energy was pure, indeed the result of dedicated cultivationa€¡±a sign of his purity. The Old Fox was not one of those demons who would eat humans. As a result, Lu Yuan believed what he said, nodding and stating, ¡°You have resisted the temptation of blood food and kept your true self, which indeed shows that you are dedicated to the Great Dao and possess a pure nature. You need not worry; as long as you do not commit evil or harm human beings, I will not harm you.¡± Some demons, due to their innate lack of intelligence, even if by chance they awaken their senses and become spirit monsters, their intelligence often remains incomplete, akin to three to five-year-old children, or even foolish imbeciles. However, paradoxically, as human beings are the most spiritually intelligent of creatures and born with innate intelligence, they are considered Innate Spirits. Such Innate Spirits are exceptionally precious. Many demons, ghosts, and other such beings covet them eagerly. When demons consume Innate Spirits, they can compensate for their own intelligence deficiencies and awaken their wisdom. After ghosts become Yin bodies, they are corroded by the foul Qi of Yin, and even if they originally possessed intelligence not inferior to humans, they inevitably become slow-minded and degenerate into the living dead. At that point, if they consume human souls, taking the Innate Spirits within living souls, they can maintain their intelligence or even enhance their soul bodies and increase their cultivation. Demon Cultivators are even fonder of using human souls and bodies for cultivation, or rather, they prefer to cultivate using all beings, it¡¯s just that among all beings, humans make the best material. These three types of beings, outside of the realm of Immortal cultivation, often have cases where they cultivate using humans to varying degrees. Initially, they might have had no choice. But once eating humans becomes a habit, akin to humans eating food, it will be ingrained in their bones, becoming an instinct. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? In the end, even if consuming humans confers no benefit, merely for the sake of satisfying a craving, they will be unable to resist eating humans. Therefore, for such habitually human-eating demons, ghosts, and monsters, the Cultivators on the human side, and some Divine Spirits worshipped by the Human Race, whenever encountered, will mainly be directly exterminated to remove future threats. But for demons like the Old Fox who cultivate in solitude, do not harm or injure humans, and live peacefully, The human side does not indiscriminately eradicate them. Either they are ignored, Or they become friends, forming good relations. Some demons who are friendly toward humans sometimes even aid humans in resisting those evil-doing demons, ghosts, and monsters. Just as the Old Fox said. Regarding the tragic state of Yunlan City, he too, could not bear it. He simply lacked the capability to resist those malevolent demons, ghosts, and monsters. Otherwise, if he possessed such power, he would not mind intervening to protect the human beings there. This is the good that comes from befriending those pure-hearted demons. Lu Yuan had come to understand this point from the ancient texts of the Nine Provinces, and he greatly agreed with it. Chapter 1187 - Chapter 1187 Chapter 475 Changqing Youxin_3 ?Chapter 1187: Chapter 475 Changqing Youxin_3 Chapter 1187: Chapter 475 Changqing Youxin_3 Therefore, towards some of the good demons, a friendly attitude is still maintained. Thus, seeing the Old Fox somewhat restless, he specifically spoke two words of comfort before continuing to ask, ¡°You just mentioned a King Zuanfeng, who broke through the Yunlan City of Youxin Country, and even began to dominate a territory, enticing demons, officially rebelling. With such actions, wouldn¡¯t the local Immortal Sects and Gods of Youxin Country intervene? And this King Zuanfeng, to make such a big stir, what kind of strength does it possess, and what are its origins?¡± According to the information Lu Yuan gathered from ancient texts, there are quite a few Immortal Sects within the Immortal Realm. In each Immortal Sect, there are many cultivators. Some powerful ones even have Immortals in the world, suppressing a territory. Also, in some cities and towns of the human race, there are Gods anointed by the Immortal Sects, responsible for managing the order of Yin and Yang, protecting the local people, and receiving incense offerings from the human race. Whether it¡¯s Immortal Sect cultivators, or Divine Taoism Divine Spirits, they¡¯re all endowed with extraordinary power, possessing great strength. With these Immortals around, how could they possibly tolerate such rampant demons? Logically, they should have taken action long ago, to eliminate these chaotic demons, ghosts, and monsters, restoring peace to the region. But at this time, the Gods of Youxing Country not only made no move, they even allowed the demons to wreak havoc, with a growing trend of becoming stronger. This really didn¡¯t make any sense. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï ¡®Could it be that the ancient texts I have read, having passed tens of thousands of years, are outdated and no longer up to date with the times?¡¯ Based on the information at hand, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but make such a guess. ¡°Returning to the Immortal,¡± Just as he was reflecting inwardly, the Old Fox continued, ¡°Since nine thousand years ago, when the Great True Person of the Evergreen Immortal Sect fell, and no new Great True Person was born, the Evergreen Domain has lacked the suppression of a Heavenly Immortal. Consequently, some sneaky figures that were originally hidden in the shadows, as well as some demons from other domains, and even some Immortal Sects dissatisfied with the Evergreen Immortal Sect, began to stir trouble. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Without the Great True Person, the Evergreen Immortal Sect, though having many True Persons within, was mostly made up of Human Immortals and Earth Immortals. Their strength, despite being not bad, no longer had a clear advantage over the rebelling demons and Immortal Sects. So, after nine thousand years of struggle, the Evergreen Immortal Sect gradually lost control of the Evergreen Domain, and the domain itself began to fall into chaos. In Youxin Country, originally there was an other court of the Evergreen Immortal Sect, with Immortal Sect Immortals preserving local peace. But three hundred years ago, a Great Demon from the nearby Lin Yi Country suddenly wreaked havoc in Youxin Country, slaughtering more than a dozen towns and devouring a million humans. This action caused turmoil in the country and angered the True Person of the Evergreen Immortal Sect¡¯s other court. Thereafter that True Person personally took action to seek out the Great Demon. After battles lasting dozens of days, the True Person from the Immortal Sect finally slew the Great Demon, eliminating this disaster. However, as the Great Demon had obtained the Dao Fruit and possessed strength not inferior to that of a Human Immortal, the Evergreen Immortal Sect¡¯s True Person was also seriously injured after slaying it. After returning to the other court, he endured for a dozen years before succumbing to his injuries and passing away, falling from immortality. Thereafter, the last True Person sitting in Youxin Country was gone. And the Evergreen Immortal Sect, due to years of decline, had no spare strength to send a new True Person to take over the other court. The other court here was left only with some Immortal Sect disciples who had not yet become immortal, along with Immortal Sect-appointed City God Spirits of Youxin Country, maintaining order. But those Immortal Sect disciples and City God Spirits, the strongest among them, were only at the Five Qi Towards Primordial realm. And within Youxin Country, there were several demons established at such realm. Upon hearing that Youxin Country no longer had a True Person sitting in wait, demons from other countries also flocked here. With a convergence of numerous demons, the local situation further deteriorated. Ultimately, after three hundred years of chaos, most of the human towns in Youxin Country were abandoned, and their power continuously waned. In Bo Yangling here, the nearby area with a thousand li radius, there were originally more than twenty towns and millions of people. But now, aside from seeing some ruins of towns, one can hardly find a trace of human inhabitation. The nearby City of Yunlan has become the largest town in the vicinity. The city also has a Yunlan City God keeping local order, deterring demons. However, even this Yunlan City God, a few years ago, could no longer withstand the pressure and was slain by the foreign King Zuanfeng. Eventually, the city was breached, turning into a haven for demons. As for King Zuanfeng, it is rumored to be a weasel spirit, adept at wind-based spells, its strength within the Five Qi Towards Primordial realm. Being an outsider, it had no foundation in Youxin Country. So after seizing Yunlan City and setting up a banner, it began to recruit and buy horses, planning to settle down here and expand its forces. A large number of demons are now heading to Yunlan City upon hearing the news, wanting to join under King Zuanfeng and continue attacking cities in Youxin Country and devouring a massive amount of blood food for their cultivation. If King Zuanfeng becomes powerful, the situation in Youxin Country may become even more difficult¡­ alas!¡± In the end, the demon-friendly Old Fox also thought of the terrifying scene of rampant demons, and couldn¡¯t help but sigh. Such hell on earth is something he does not wish to see. He then looked to the Immortal before him. This was an Immortal of the human race, though he didn¡¯t know why the other had come here. Arriving here, he was still unaware of the situation. But if the other was willing to take action, then Youxin Country could have a real person of the human race sitting in wait. The King Zuanfeng wreaking havoc now, as well as the other Demon Kings within the country, would not be able to stir any more disturbances. After all, the reason these rampant demons dared to be so reckless was precisely that Youxin Country lacked an Immortal in command. If an Immortal arrives here, a simple demonstration of Divine Powers would be enough to easily sweep away these demons and restore peace to the region. The only unknown is whether this unfamiliar True Person is willing to take action? In the end, although Youxin Country¡¯s situation is out of control, it is still officially part of the Evergreen Immortal Sect¡¯s territory. If an outsider True Person rashly intervenes, it could inadvertently encroach upon the Evergreen Immortal Sect¡¯s domain and become an enemy of this declining Great Immortal Sect. Whether this True Person is willing to take that risk, to save a country from disaster, is truly hard to say. Chapter 1188 - Chapter 1188 Chapter 476 Widely Building Vest Accounts ?Chapter 1188: Chapter 476: Widely Building Vest Accounts Chapter 1188: Chapter 476: Widely Building Vest Accounts Just when the Old Fox was silently speculating in his heart, Lu Yuan, having listened to his narrative, couldn¡¯t help but furrow his brow. He never imagined that just after his ascension to the Immortal Realm, the situation of the place where he found himself would be so dire. The ruling Immortal Sect of this area was declining, demons rampaged, and there was no shortage of ambitious figures a€¡° a true vision of chaotic times. If he were an ambitious person, he would undoubtedly be delighted to see such disorder and would be prepared to draw his sword and establish a great achievement. But when he was in the Nine Provinces, Lu Yuan had already undertaken a conquest and had been the ruler of a domain for over a thousand years. Now that the Nine States Realm had perished and he had ascended to the Immortal Realm, His thoughts were more focused on pursuing the Dao of cultivation, enhancing his own cultivation, and ensuring the protection of his Changsheng Dao Guo. As for ambitions of establishing great deeds, he had let go of them long ago. Therefore, hearing about the chaos here, Lu Yuan¡¯s first thought was that this place was dangerous and he wanted to avoid it. Not to see a world in chaos, with people suffering, and attempt to save them from dire straits. After all, he was merely an ascendant, and his ties to the people here were merely nominal kinship. Upon careful consideration, there was actually no relationship at all between the two sides. Although it was difficult to witness the common people suffering so deeply, he couldn¡¯t bear it. But to take up the dangerous task of wielding a sword three feet long to sweep across the land and exterminate demons, that was beyond his help. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Lu Yuan was not so saintly, nor was he such a bleeding heart. ¡®From the ancient records I have studied, the name of the Immortal Sect that ruled the connectivity region between the Nine States Realm and the Immortal Realm, was the Nine Spirits Sect.¡¯ This area was also known as the Nine Spirits Domain. The Immortal who crossed the boundary to propagate the Dao in the Nine States Realm, also belonged to the True Immortal rank of the Nine Spirits Sect. So, if one were to carefully trace it, the entire Dao legacy of the Nine States Realm actually belonged to a branch of the Nine Spirits Sect. But now that I have ascended and heard from this Old Fox that the ruling Immortal Sect here is the Evergreen Immortal Sect, As for the Nine Spirits Sect, it remains unmentioned. Is it that he does not know, or has the Nine Spirits Sect been eroded by time and completely vanished into the river of the ages? And the successor to the Nine Spirits Sect is the now declining Evergreen Immortal Sect?¡¯ Lu Yuan speculated in his heart. Regarding the Nine States Realm, based on his research in recent years, it could be roughly confirmed that it lost contact with the Immortal Realm seventy thousand years ago. And, considering the connection between the Nine States Realm and the Nine Spirits Sect, the severance of ties with the Immortal Realm essentially meant the end of relations with the Nine Spirits Sect as well. Now, combining this with what the Old Fox said, ¡®That is to say, perhaps the Nine Spirits Sect had perished as many as seventy thousand years ago. This grand sect that developed the Nine States Realm disappeared, and thus the Nine States Realm broke off contact with the Immortal Realm. After the extinction of the Nine Spirits Sect, the successor to the rightful rule of this area became the Evergreen Immortal Sect. Even the name of the Nine Spirits Domain was changed to Evergreen Domain, which is customary in the Immortal Realm. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? As for the reason for the extinction of the Nine Spirits Sect, it may be similar to the decline of the Evergreen Immortal Sect. It was because the Great True Persons within the sect fell with no successors to follow, unable to suppress the Qi Fate of a domain, thus leading to its eventual decline. It is just unknown what role the Evergreen Immortal Sect played during the fall of the Nine Spirits Sect.''¡± Lu Yuan made some deductions and vaguely glimpsed some ancient secrets. In the way of the Immortal, cultivators below the Five Qi Towards Primordial level are considered mortals. After condensing the Human Flower Dao Fruit, one is referred to as a True Person, also known as a Human Immortal. The Earth Flower Dao Fruit is also referred to as a True Person or alternatively, an Earth Immortal. But upon reaching the Heavenly Flower Dao Fruit, this realm undergoes a qualitative change from the Human Flower and Earth Flower Dao Fruits. Therefore, cultivators of this realm are granted a separate title, ¡®Great True Person¡¯, also called Immortal Venerate. In the Earth Immortal worlds, a power wanting to reach the pinnacle and rule a domain can only do so by having a Great True Person. Therefore, once sects like the Nine Spirits Sect and the Evergreen Immortal Sect, who had once ruled such a great domain, lost a Great True Person to uphold them, they gradually lost control of the domain. Just like after cultivators from the Nine Provinces ascended, with fewer and fewer strong individuals in the Immortal Dao, Lu Yuan, the last cultivator, could easily unify the Nine Provinces. In a world beyond the ordinary, it is the strongest one who suppresses everything, while any power below is merely a derivative of one¡¯s own strength. Thus, when the foundational source collapses, these massive derivatives naturally wither and die, returning to ordinariness. ¡®This Immortal Realm is indeed vast and powerful, with at least one Great True Person emerging from each domain. And above the territory boundaries, there are Region Continents; within a single Region Continent, according to the records, there are believed to be several domains. In other words, a single Region Continent harbors at least several Great True Persons. Throughout the entire Immortal Realm, Region Continents are not the only ones, as there are other Region Continents beyond East China. By this estimation, the entire Immortal Realm possesses a considerable number of Great True Persons. Dozens are likely, and even more wouldn¡¯t be surprising. Although within the Evergreen Domain, the Great True Person of the Evergreen Immortal Sect has fallen, and there is no longer the top-tier combat power to preside, Within the domain, according to this Old Fox, there are still many Earth Flower True Persons and a similar number of other old demons of the same realm.¡¯ Although I now possess the Outer Path Earth Flower Dao Fruit, my strength compared to those True Persons of the same realm who have lived for thousands of years is certainly lacking. The simplest point, I have only lived for a thousand years, while these individuals have lived for several thousand years, and during this time, they have had exchanges with many fellow cultivators and have been nurtured by the more advanced Immortal world environment of cultivation. Even on this point alone, they are far stronger than this Earth Immortal from a backwater place like me. Chapter 1189 - Chapter 1189 Chapter 476 Widely Building Vest Accounts_2 ?Chapter 1189: Chapter 476: Widely Building Vest Accounts_2 Chapter 1189: Chapter 476: Widely Building Vest Accounts_2 Moreover, the strength forcibly elevated by a Heterodox Dao Fruit definitely has a huge gap compared to that painstakingly cultivated by Earth Immortals of the Immortal Realm. From this point alone, there¡¯s another difference. So among the Earth Immortals, I might be the one with the fewest methods, shallowest foundation, and weakest strength¡­¡¯ Lu Yuan was very clear about his own capabilities. He was just a shoddy Earth Immortal, whose realm was boosted by relying on external objects. If he were to compare himself to those who had diligently cultivated to become Earth Immortals, he would certainly be far inferior. Otherwise, what would be the point of others cultivating for thousands of years? Was it all for loneliness? Cultivators who achieve a breakthrough to Human Immortal and acquire the Human Flower Dao Fruit can live for three thousand years. Breaking through to Earth Immortal allows one to live for ten thousand years. Breaking through to Heavenly Immortal, one can live for at least tens of thousands of years, and there might not even be a limitation on lifespan. As long as you can live, you can keep on living. The only thing that constrains a Heavenly Immortal is external factors. Therefore, Lu Yuan speculated that the fall of the Heavenly Immortals from the Nine Spirits Sect and the Evergreen Immortal Sect must have been due to some terrifying external forces interfering. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Even Heavenly Immortals couldn¡¯t withstand those external tribulations and ultimately fell. This shows just how dangerous the Immortal Realm can be. In such a challenging environment, he, a mere shoddy Earth Immortal who had cultivated for a thousand years, really didn¡¯t have the courage to stir up trouble. This was different from the Nine States Realm. In the Nine States Realm, Lu Yuan was the strongest among humans, free to do as he pleased without any risk to his life. The biggest threat to him was just the Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe of the Nine States Realm. But with the Ascension to the Immortal Realm as an exit strategy, Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t flustered back then; he could boldly unify the Nine Provinces and plan with composure. But in the Immortal Realm, those conditions no longer exist. He was not the strongest in the Immortal Realm, nor even the strongest in the Evergreen Domain. He also didn¡¯t have another world to fall back on, a place he could escape to at any moment. Without either option, it would take a clouded mind for Lu Yuan to dare cause upheaval in this world. Was he impatient for others to discover his secret, wanting to attract covetous looks? The Nine States Realm was the end of the Cultivation era, with only a few big cats and kittens who couldn¡¯t discover Lu Yuan¡¯s secret. But in a world populated by Great True Persons, and who knows if there are existences beyond Heavenly Immortals, he dared not jump around carelessly and expose his secrets. That would truly be courting death. It also did not fit with his own cautious personality. ¡®So, to be cautious, let¡¯s set a small goal. Before breaking through to the Heavenly Flower Great Real Person and achieving the status of Immortal Venerate, I need to be more low-key and absolutely avoid creating a stir in the Immortal Realm.¡¯ Lu Yuan made up his mind to act cautiously from now on. Then, looking at the expectant Old Fox before him, his thoughts began to whirl, ¡®However, I can provide some help for Youxin Country. They are of the Human Race, after all; I can¡¯t let those demons wreak havoc unchecked. Of course, it¡¯s impossible to take action personally, as that would pose the risk of exposure. But don¡¯t I still have two clones? These two clones, with strength equivalent to the late-stage Human Immortal, could easily sweep through Youxin Country no matter which one I dispatch. Moreover, pushing the clones into the limelight might allow them to act as my spokespersons, handling some matters I inconveniently can¡¯t, serving as my identities in the Immortal Realm. Meanwhile, I, the original, can just stay behind the scenes. Controlling the clones without anyone noticing and quietly focusing on cultivation and breakthroughs. Hiss¡­ Thinking this way, the decision to refine three External Tool Dao Fruits was indeed correct. Otherwise, it would be somewhat troublesome to continue moving around in the Immortal Realm while trying to stay low-key.¡¯ At this moment, Lu Yuan was immensely grateful for his previous decision. With three External Tool Dao Fruits, his identity in the Immortal Realm now had three layers. The outermost layer, naturally, consists of the two late-stage Human Immortal clones. This is also the identity that is public and used to travel in the Immortal Realm. Behind the clones lies his Earth Immortal Dao Fruit. This is reserved for when his clones are exposed, a second layer identity to dig into for anyone who looks deeper. Once others see through the Human Immortal clones, I can simply follow the example set by the Human Immortal clones¡¯ existence, refine another body for the Earth Immortal clone, and then push this second persona to the forefront to confuse others. At last, there¡¯s my original self. Using the two layers of clones for cover, I can hide in the shadows¡¯ shadows, utilizing the identities of the clones to gather various cultivation resources, and break through realms silently and unnoticeably. That way, I can endure for ten thousand years. Once the original¡¯s cultivation rises, breaking through Human Immortal, Earth Immortal, and possibly even Heavenly Immortal. Then, once others tear through the two outer masks and seek the ultimate secret, they¡¯ll be surprised to find the most dangerous boss hidden deepest of all. A Heavenly Flower Great Real Person, an Immortal Venerate reborn! With each layer of the mask that is pierced, the hidden hand behind it ascends one level of strength brought about by the Great Boundary. This kind of strength crushing due to a Great Boundary. Is it not surprising, unexpected, and frightening? ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï This layered concealment, creating multiple clones, and constructing numerous fronts, unquestionably fits Lu Yuan¡¯s taste perfectly, leaving him utterly satisfied. ¡®So, it¡¯s decided then.¡¯ Lu Yuan, following this inspiration, refined his plan in his mind, and made a decision, ¡®I¡¯ll first send out a Human Immortal clone to settle the demons causing chaos in Youxin Country, establishing an open identity for myself. Afterward, I can use this identity to tentatively contact the local forces. Based on their reaction and the additional information gathered by this identity, I will decide my next move. For my first step in exploring the Immortal Realm, let¡¯s follow this plan.¡¯ Chapter 1190 - Chapter 1190 Chapter 476 Widely Building Vest Accounts_3 ?Chapter 1190: Chapter 476: Widely Building Vest Accounts_3 Chapter 1190: Chapter 476: Widely Building Vest Accounts_3 After setting the plan, Lu Yuan looked at the old fox in front of him. Having just questioned him, he had learned all the information he wanted from the opponent. Continuing to interrogate the other party in these desolate mountains and forests would hardly yield more results. On the contrary, being in the company of a fellow Immortal like himself could make this demon who was friendly with the Human Race, along with the smaller demons behind it, tremble with fear, all ill at ease. So he said, ¡°I have learned about the nearby circumstances, thank you, Fellow Daoist, for the information. Seeing as you prefer a quiet life of cultivation, I won¡¯t bother you further, and now I bid farewell.¡± After giving a salute to the old fox, Lu Yuan did not trouble him further. With a leap, he transformed into a streak of Escape Light, flying toward the direction of Youxin Country, as pointed out by the old fox. Having already decided to establish a facade, a representative identity in the Immortal Realm, it was naturally time to take action. It just so happened. As the former Human Emperor and Shenwu Great Emperor of the Nine Provinces, Lu Yuan also felt some anger towards those demons that prey on humans for their blood. Previously, he was thinking of laying low, not wanting to stir up trouble. Hence, he didn¡¯t want to get involved in this matter. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? But now, with two layers of concealment and three identities, he had a need, so there was no need to endure any longer. First, he would eradicate these demons and slay that King Zhuangfeng who had broken through the City of Yunlan, stabilizing the entire Youxin Country. After that, he would make contact with the Evergreen Branch in Youxin Country. Through this Immortal Sect branch, he would test out the attitude of the Evergreen Immortal Sect behind it. At the same time, he would measure the gap in strength between himself, the Immortal Realm¡¯s demons, ghosts, and monsters, and his fellow Immortal Sect Cultivators. In the Nine States Realm, although Lu Yuan had cultivated all the way to Five Qi Chaoyuan alone with bitter efforts and barely had any confrontations with his peers. When it came to combat experience, it could be said to be very shallow. Now that his realm had increased, and with an Earth Immortal Dao Fruit backing him, it was a good opportunity to enrich his experience with confrontations at the Five Qi Chaoyuan and Human Immortal Realm levels. What? A confrontation at the level of Earth Immortal? That was too dangerous. As the weakest Earth Immortal, Lu Yuan knew without fighting that he probably wouldn¡¯t win against any cultivator of the same realm, be they Immortal or demon. Moreover, as one who always believed in the crushing power of higher realms, he would not engage with cultivators of the same realm until he was a Heavenly Immortal or had several Earth Immortal External Tool Dao Fruits as a foundation. As one who sought longevity, there was no need to contend with those of short lives over temporary superiority. Do you not see? After Lu Yuan outlasted the cultivators of the Nine Provinces, he became the unrivaled champion among mortals without lifting a finger. Though the Nine Provinces were a minor realm and not comparable to the Immortal Realm. The principle was the same. Here, he believed that as long as he could endure for a million years, or even just a hundred thousand years, he could reach the zenith of the Immortal Realm. Becoming a Heavenly Immortal should not be a problem. By then, the gap in realms would be so vast that he wouldn¡¯t need to fight; the mere release of his aura would make those Earth Immortals prostrate on the ground, addressing him as Immortal Venerate. This was the very definition ofa€| overpowering others with sheer strength, a path of great righteousness indeed. a€| After leaving Bo Yangling, Lu Yuan flew two thousand miles to the north, and finally, on the way, he saw some signs of human habitation. But the places he passed were still ruins and shattered walls, with large swathes of villages and towns ravaged by demons entering his view. Some of the common folk who had survived the calamity looked at their destroyed homes and lost relatives, each sitting on the ground, wailing in pain. And this behavior brought new dangers to them. For across the vast countryside, there were still minor demons and wandering ghosts left behind. Their strength was meager, not daring to follow those powerful demons to pursue King Zhuangfeng, to battle the Immortal Sect Cultivators and Chenghuang Yin Soldiers. But when it came to those defenseless commoners, these insignificant demons and ghosts felt no fear whatsoever, instead drooling at the prospect. Those powerful demons did not care for such paltry sustenance, but these minor ones were not so discerning. If they devoured dozens or hundreds of commoners, they could accumulate enough Innate Spirits to completely awaken their own consciousness. Then, their cultivation would proceed much faster than it was now. After enduring a few decades, they too could become powerful demons and then, with their own strength, ravage villages without dread and indulge in endless blood food. The immense temptation and natural inclination were prompting these demons and ghosts to start attacking the humans seen as delicious food. From this aspect, although the Immortal Realm was abundant in Spiritual Energy, it was a world where the extraordinary revealed holiness. If those ordinary humans were protected by the strong, it was all well and good. If not, their lives were more miserable than those of the commoners in the Nine Provinces Realm during the End of Dharma era, by many degrees. It was nothing short of a human purgatory. Therefore, the further north he flew, having seen many such tragic situations, Lu Yuan¡¯s emotions remained stable, but his killing intent towards those demons, ghosts, and monsters became increasingly intense. Along the way, he dealt with those minor demons and ghosts, killing over a hundred of them. Finally, as he was about to arrive at the City of Yunlan, he stopped five hundred miles outside the city, at the outskirts. Hiding his Escape Light, he descended from the clouds; Lu Yuan looked down from the air, gazing at the distant City of Yunlan. Merely by observing, he could see the demonic aura rising to the sky. The demonic winds, the Yin Wind ghosts, almost entirely enveloped the city and the surrounding dozens of miles. Even the Heavenly Vault was covered by thick dark clouds, making the place gloomily resemble a realm of ghosts. ¡°Thousands of large and small demons, ghosts, and monsters, probably all the demons within tens of thousands of miles around are gathered here,¡± he murmured. Lu Yuan carefully rotated his Divine Sense, cautiously using his Earth Immortal Divine Sense to investigate the details of the demons in the city. Although the Old Fox said that the strongest in the city was no more than King Zhuangfeng, with a cultivation comparable to a Cultivator of Five Qi Towards Primordial, no one could guarantee that among these demons, there wasn¡¯t another Great Demon hiding. Even if it was only a Great Demon at the Human Immortal level, it posed no threat to Lu Yuan, an Earth Immortal. To prepare an ostensible identity for him was merely an Avatar at the Late-stage Human Immortal. If a powerful Great Demon emerged and his Avatar couldn¡¯t handle it, that would be embarrassing. After all, he couldn¡¯t personally intervene with his secondary identity, could he? Wouldn¡¯t that blow his cover? So, for the sake of caution, it¡¯s always correct to lay down thunder in advance. Chapter 1191 - Chapter 1191 Chapter 477 Way of Numerlogy ?Chapter 1191: Chapter 477 Way of Numerlogy Chapter 1191: Chapter 477 Way of Numerlogy Inside the City of Yunlan, the scene at this moment was nothing short of hellish. Countless demons, ghosts, and monsters were constantly shuttling through the city, acting willfully and unrestrained. A large number of men and women of the Human Race were now blatantly displayed on the streets like livestock, being hawked by demons. Disemboweling, heart extraction, skinning, and deboning, and even after tormenting their victims, they would only be devoured by the demons at the height of their pain and fear. Or have their blood drawn and soul refined for the cultivation of sinister arts. In short, all sorts of unimaginable things, and even those you couldn¡¯t imagine, occurred here in massive quantities. The City of Yunlan originally had over a hundred thousand residents, and counting the nearby people within a thousand-mile radius, the total was no less than a million. But under the relentless consumption of thousands of demons, each eating scores or hundreds per day, the number of remaining humans had dwindled to less than a hundred thousand over these few short years. For the many demons who had grown accustomed to feasting openly on blood food, transitioning from luxury to frugality was undoubtedly hard to accept. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 Therefore, King Zhuangfeng, who had indulged himself in the city for several years, began to contemplate moving once more. The estate where the original city officials resided. The majestic and resplendent courtyard had changed ownership and was now occupied by a group of ugly and ferocious demons. At this moment, these demons were holding a lavish feast, each seated at their place, with various delicacies such as human hearts and livers laid out before them to enjoy. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï But even such indulgences were deemed insufficient by the ever-expanding appetites of the demons. Within the hall, over a hundred beautiful human maidens moved about, serving these demons while offering up songs and dances. From time to time, an impulsive and impatient demon would seize a girl beside him, and with a swift reach of his hand, he¡¯d scoop out her brain or heart to relish with glee. Or else¡­ Many indescribable scenes were unfolding at this very moment. And yet, each of these human girls appeared dazed or turned a blind eye to the events, continuing to sing and smile gracefully. Clearly, these people were under a spell, controlled by the sinister magic of the demons, having long lost their autonomy. ¡°Gentlemen, since we breached the City of Yunlan, we¡¯ve been squatting here for three years,¡± Observing that the atmosphere was at its peak, the sharp-faced man sitting at the head of the table, served by several of the most beautiful maidens, now twitched the yellow whiskers above his lips and swept his eerie green gaze over the assembled demons, lightly clearing his throat before saying, ¡°In these three years, we have lived a life of pleasure. Even the initial thirty-six demons who joined me have expanded to over a thousand, with countless aggrieved ghosts and strange creatures following us, making our presence increasingly more imposing. However, our army¡¯s daily consumption has been considerable. The millions of humans around Yunlan City have now been reduced to just a few tens of thousands. In another ten days or half a month, none will be left. Therefore, to find new human cattle for our brothers and also to secure more territory for ourselves, I am preparing to attack Sanhe City, guarded by the Evergreen Branch. This city is the most prosperous within Youxin Country, with no less than ten million humans residing within. If we can take this place, we needn¡¯t worry about lack of food for the next hundred years.¡± King Zhuangfeng addressed his horde with vehement enthusiasm, Sparing no effort with his rhetoric, he described a splendid future for the demons. Although he was a Demon King, revered by the thousands of demons, ghosts, and monsters in the city as King Zhuangfeng, After all, King Zhuangfeng was just a Great Demon at the Five Qi Towards Primordial level. Still a mortal body, not a Great Demon with a Dao Fruit. His cultivation at the Five Qi Towards Primordial level, despite being much stronger than other demons at the Gathering Three Qi or Four Qi Condensation stages, The difference between their strengths was not so vast as to be insurmountable. A dozen or so demons at the Four Qi Condensation stage could join forces and fight him to a standstill. Hundreds of demons at the Gathering Three Qi stage, forming an Array, were also no less formidable than him. In the city, aside from the majority of minor demons at the one or two levels of energy (Qi), there were over two hundred demons who had reached the Gathering Three Qi stage or higher. Among them, there were over thirty at the Four Qi Condensation stage. With strength came the right to speak. In the face of these demons, even King Zhuangfeng had to be polite and dare not offend. To get anything done, he had to negotiate with them. Otherwise, these demons might not be able to defeat you, but the vast world is so vast, If they don¡¯t stay for you, there will surely be a place for them elsewhere. If you truly offend these demons, and they simply choose not to serve you and walk away, what can you do to them? With thousands of demons rallying around him, that Zhuangfeng becomes a Demon King. But without followers to cheer for him, he¡¯s just another formidable demon of ordinary status. The once formidable presence that stirred a nation could instantly dissipate. This was something King Zhuangfeng naturally could not accept. So, in the past few days, for the demons who came to the City of Yunlan seeking refuge with him, regardless of their cultivation level, King Zhuangfeng tried his best to meet their needs and take good care of them. It was all to win over the hearts of the demons so more would support him. After nurturing the Demon heart for three years, King Zhuangfeng felt that the time was ripe, and with his hand of cards nearly spent, he finally spoke up, seeking to rally these fellows for a grand cause. But clearly, he had overestimated his own prestige and underestimated the scruples of those demons. When there were benefits, everyone was happy to call him a king. But without benefits or even when danger loomed, Chapter 1192 - Chapter 1192 Chapter 477 Way of Numerology_2 ?Chapter 1192: Chapter 477 Way of Numerology_2 Chapter 1192: Chapter 477 Way of Numerology_2 What are you exactly? After King Zuanfeng finished speaking, the numerous monsters exchanged looks with their oily green, pitch-black eyes that glittered with red and yellow lights, yet none of them spoke a word. The atmosphere suddenly turned cold. Seeing this, King Zhuangfeng¡¯s expression also became ugly. He had never anticipated that after sacrificing a million mortals and nurturing these creatures for three years, he would end up with such a result. This was truly hard to accept. Fortunately, among the monsters, there were still some who valued loyalty. Seeing the awkward silence, they tactfully said, ¡°King, although Sanhe City is prosperous and famous throughout Youxin Country, the city is actually an Evergreen Branch, guarded by the cultivators of Evergreen Immortal Sect. It is not so easy to conquer. Within the Other courts, there are currently three cultivators in the Five Qi Chaoyuan Realm and over a hundred Disciples of Immortal Sect.¡± Even the City God of Shanheshi, who is worshipped by tens of millions, possesses divine power on par with the Five Qi Towards Origin Realm. Under his command are over ten thousand Yin Soldiers and divine generals, powerful in strength, patrolling Sanhe City, which makes it difficult for us monsters to infiltrate. If we rashly proceed, I fear there may be unfavorable consequences.¡± The one speaking was a green wolf monster, one of King Zhuangfeng¡¯s subordinates. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï This monster was powerful, having already reached the pinnacle of Four Qi Condensation and was half a step into the Five Qi Chao Yuan Realm. Therefore, it had considerable prestige among the monsters in City of Yunlan. King Zhuangfeng also relied heavily on it, treating it as his right-hand man and even delegated hundreds of monsters for the opponent to command, showing great trust. Thus, at this time, the green wolf monster, remembering the favor he had received in the past, opened up to ease the tension. His words were very tactful. That is, what strength do we possess, and what strength does the Evergreen Branch have? Are we certain we are attacking Shanheshi to conquer territory and not to willingly march to our deaths? The reason these monsters were able to take down Yunlan and dominate the surrounding ten thousand li for three years was because of a remote location. This city is situated on the southern frontier of Youxin Country, ten thousand li away from the core of Youxin Country, which is the Northern Border Region where Sanhe City is. Within Youxin Country, there are also a dozen other groups of Demons Causing Chaos and even some fringe paths of the Human Race openly raising banners in rebellion against Evergreen Immortal Sect. It is these numerous rebellious forces that have strained the resources of the country¡¯s main Evergreen Immortal Sect. The Evergreen Branch responsible for suppressing Youxin Country has too many places to guard and protect. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï Eventually, they could only barely ensure the safety of a few tens of thousands of li around the core region where Sanhe City is located. Beyond the core area, they had to let go of and gradually abandon over half of Youxin Country¡¯s territory. It was under these circumstances that King Zhuangfeng found the opportunity to take down a major city and wreak havoc across thousands of li without anyone coming to suppress them. It¡¯s not that the Evergreen Branch didn¡¯t have the strength; it¡¯s merely that the distance was too great to manage. However, if they were to bring the fight to themselves, the Evergreen Immortal Sect would not mind coming to Eliminate demons and slay monsters, annihilate these wicked monsters, and retake Yunlan City. After all. On the surface, the strength of Youxin Country¡¯s Evergreen Branch and the affiliated Divine Spirits of Youxin Country¡¯s City God is several times more than that of Yunlan City. To take the initiative to attack is to surely lose; it truly is serving oneself on a platter. This is why after hearing King Zhuangfeng¡¯s words, the monsters all fell silent and the atmosphere chilled. We followed you for a better life, not to be led to our deaths. If you¡¯ve lost your mind and wish to go to Sanhe City to die, then go by yourself. Don¡¯t drag us into it. We haven¡¯t had enough of the good days; we¡¯re not looking for death. ¡°It turns out that what my brothers are worried about is this. It is I, big brother, who didn¡¯t clarify things beforehand.¡± After testing the loyalty of the monsters to himself, King Zhuangfeng¡¯s heart sank, but soon after the green wolf monster slightly eased the tension, he immediately laughed and took the initiative to explain, ¡°This attack on Sanhe City is actually not an action undertaken by us alone. Black Wind King from Heiliang Mountain, Spiritual Water King from Jiuqu River, Golden Feather King from Gaomuya, Sorrowful Ghost King from Kuqing City, and Three-Yin Ghost King from Sanyin City. These five Demon Kings and Ghost Kings will also join the Great War. By then, combining the power of our six houses, we can deploy six Demon Kings and Ghost Kings in the Five Qi Towards Origin Realm, gathering tens of thousands of demons to form a demon and ghost army. With such strength, what is there to fear from a mere Sanhe City!¡± Although he was dissatisfied with the earlier attitude of the monsters, King Zhuangfeng still couldn¡¯t do without them at this moment; he could only try to increase the stakes as much as possible to sway them. ¡°So that¡¯s the case.¡± ¡°To think that six Demon Kings and Ghost Kings would join forces; indeed, that should be enough to take down Sanhe City.¡± ¡°King, you should¡¯ve said so earlier, sparing us needless worry. Since the six houses have joined forces, we¡¯re on board with this.¡± ¡°Indeed, the King has been good to us over the years; we aren¡¯t the sort to be ungrateful. This time we will support the King, and together we¡¯ll enter Sanhe City and claim Youxin Country.¡± The monsters in attendance, hearing that their side held the advantage and that there should be great benefits from this expedition if all goes well, also changed their expressions and heated up. As if the events just moments before had never happened. ¡°With my brothers showing such support, let us take Sanhe City!¡± King Zhuangfeng, seeing everyone responding in unison, also stood up, grabbed the head of a human girl beside him, pried open her skull and, looking at the monsters below, he drank it all in one gulp. ¡°Conquer it!¡± ¡°For us!¡± The monsters, taking example from their leader, grabbed the human heads beside them and followed suit, downing them in one gulp. Chapter 1193 - Chapter 1193 Chapter 477 Way of Numerology_3 ?Chapter 1193: Chapter 477 Way of Numerology_3 Chapter 1193: Chapter 477 Way of Numerology_3 He wiped the fresh blood from the corner of his mouth and threw the head he held in hand to the ground. Watching the demons excitedly cheering, King Zuanfeng¡¯s face was filled with smiles, but his heart sneered coldly. ¡®Hmph, once I conquer Sanhe City and defeat the other few Demon Kings and Ghost Kings, monopolizing the entire Youxin Country¡¯s Qi Fate, after breaking through as a Great Demon. All these fence-sitting wretches before me, each and every one of them will be settled by me, to be stewed for my wine.¡¯ Demons are not limited to eating humans. For other species of demons, those shadowy and ghostly demon types, they also do not discriminate between flesh and vegetation. Even these demon ghosts and spirits, for demons, are sometimes even more enticing. At King Zuanfeng¡¯s level, he no longer needed the innate spirits of ordinary human beings to supplement his spirit intelligence. Eating humans had long since lost its benefit for him, and it was merely out of habit. But those demons ghosts and spirits, with their rich vital energy, strong bodies, and overflowing divine souls, if they could be consumed, even though they might not greatly increase one¡¯s cultivation, could still enhance some magic power and physical form. If lucky enough to consume rare demon types that could aid in cultivation, like the Spirit Demon or Mushroom Demon, or the Sheep Demon and Cow Demon that invigorate the blood and qi, then that would save several years, even decades, of arduous cultivation. If all the dozens of demon types below, those that have gathered three qi or four qi, could be consumed¡­ Without mentioning anything else, just in terms of cultivation, it would allow King Zuanfeng to ascend to the peak of Five Qi Towards Primordial, half a step into the threshold of becoming an immortal. ¡®It¡¯s a pity, for now, I cannot act yet, I still need these wretches to help me take down Sanhe City. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï The peak of Five Qi Towards Primordial is nothing, what I seek is to become an immortal, to become a Great Demon revered alone. Otherwise, like now, having an empty name as a Demon King means very little, many demons don¡¯t take it seriously in their hearts, they just don¡¯t see it worth mentioning. This kind of Demon King is not interesting at all to be. Only by becoming a Great Demon, becoming a Demon Immortal, can one truly be carefree and unrivaled. Thus, the Qi Fate of Youxin Country is something I must secure.¡¯ As King Zuanfeng calculated in his heart, the thought of taking down Sanhe City and grasping the benefits of Youxin Country set his heart ablaze. If we talk about those at the very bottom, those who have just managed to condense one qi or two qi, the inconsequential minor demons, and ghosts. They follow King Zuanfeng with the desire to eat more human beings, to snatch away more innate spirits, to make up for their own lack of spirit intelligence. But for those who had already become significant, whose spirit intelligence was complete, whose cultivation was at the level of gathering three qi or four qi, what they thought of was eating more Cultivator Spirits to plunder the opponent¡¯s cultivation, to enhance their own magic power, in preparation for breaking through to Five Qi Towards Primordial. Then, for King Zuanfeng who had already reached Five Qi Towards Primordial and had become a Demon King, his main goal was no longer the low-level needs of consuming ordinary mortals or divine Cultivator Spirits. It was to plunder the Qi Fate of an entire country, to prepare for his own Great Dao of becoming immortal. Yes, Qi Fate. In a world of immortal cultivation full of fantasy, where the Will of Heaven exists mysteriously, such a place naturally gives regard to cause and effect, blessings, and calamities in Qi Fate. Cause and effect are the numerous outcomes that a person, from birth, achieves through interactions with Heaven, Earth, and all beings. This is controllable; people can actively create causes and effects, though this is quite a test of one¡¯s manipulation skills and calculative abilities. Generally, those who are adept at this are crafty and sly. ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï In this regard, as long as one is alive, no one can avoid it, so I won¡¯t elaborate further. But blessings and calamities in Qi Fate, compared to cause and effect constantly being generated and concluded, appear to be much more profound. Blessings and calamities refer to luck and disaster. Qi Fate is merely the critical factor affecting these two points. If your Qi Fate is high, you can gain divine favor, which means good luck a€¡° sitting at home, treasures might even fall from the sky. Even when cultivating the Dao Law, you¡¯re more likely to have sudden enlightenments compared to others. When breaking through realms, you might receive a helping hand from the Heavenly Mandate, increasing the success rate significantly. If your Qi Fate is low, while not exactly despised by Heaven, you would still be reduced to the ordinary. Your fortune would be mediocre, and it would be harder to encounter any fortuitous events or good fortune. All beings in the world and the ten thousand spirits, to varying degrees, receive some divine favor and carry an element of Qi Fate. Thus, most fall into this norm and are considered common, with nothing particularly special about them. But if one were completely devoid of Qi Fate, it would be as if even Heaven despises you, and certainly your luck would be incredibly poor, with disasters following one after another. Drinking water could lead to choking, going out might mean encountering a meteorite falling from the sky, and with a turn of the head, someone might dislike you enough to want to kill you. Therefore, some people say that once Qi Fate is exhausted, there is no remedy. They are referring to that last category of people. In fact, the Fortune Dao that Lu Yuan cultivates is essentially a variation or derivation of this method of Qi Fate. Only the Way of Numerology directly seeks recognition from the Heavenly Path by gathering the power of Heaven and Earth, obtaining divine favor. Meanwhile, the Fortune Dao seeks to gather the power of all beings, gain the acceptance of the masses, and thereafter leverage Heaven and Earth to gain a somewhat weaker divine favor. In terms of difficulty, the Fortune Dao is undoubtedly simpler and easier to fulfill the requirements. Gather a population of a million, and you can begin the cultivation. Unlike the Way of Numerology, in the Immortal Realm, even the least you must do is conquer a great nation, seizing territory equivalent to two or three states of the Nine States Realm, just to get started a€¡° incomparably difficult. However, by taking the shortcut of the Fortune Dao, not only is the effect weaker, but there are also serious side effects. That is, backlash against one¡¯s lifespan. If you prematurely gain power that you shouldn¡¯t possess, naturally you must bear the consequences that this power brings. If the Ghost Kings of the Nine Provinces Realm hadn¡¯t been driven to desperation in ancient times, it¡¯s unlikely they would have created such a method with severe side effects. Ultimately, it all comes back to the impoverishment of the Nine Provinces Realm, which cannot compare to the wealth of the Immortal Realm; hence, they had to settle for underhanded practices. But in the Immortal Realm, Qi Fate is the orthodox method. Free from many drawbacks, as long as you meet the requirements, you can gather Qi Fate and receive its enhancement. It¡¯s akin to a cheat device left by the Heavenly Path for all beings of Heaven and Earth. The wonders of Qi Fate are so vital that they are sure to attract the coveting of many creatures. Within the Immortal Realm, apart from the Qi Fate that a being is born with, there are actually other methods to improve one¡¯s own Qi Fate. One is to find a treasure that can suppress Qi Fate, thereby keeping your own Qi Fate from falling and continually enhancing it to change your destiny. The other is to occupy a piece of the world and then exert Divine Powers to forcibly gather the Qi Fate of that land for your own enhancement. In this way, as long as one doesn¡¯t leave the domain they occupy, the cultivator can continuously enjoy the accumulated Qi Fate, becoming the Son of Heaven¡¯s Will of that region. This is why powers in the Immortal Realm are eager to occupy regions, spread methods, propagate Dao Law, and appoint City God Spirits. This is all to gather Qi Fate and secure valuable resources. Chapter 1194 - Chapter 1194 Chapter 478 The Beginning of Establishing the Path ?Chapter 1194: Chapter 478: The Beginning of Establishing the Path Chapter 1194: Chapter 478: The Beginning of Establishing the Path Previously, the entire Qi Luck of the Changqing Domain was monopolized by the Qing Immortal Sect, thriving for tens of thousands of years under the suppression of a Great True Person. But now that the Great True Person has perished, the Qing Immortal Sect can no longer suppress the Qi Luck of the whole Great Domain, naturally arousing the covetousness of others. King Zhuangfeng was one of those coveting the Qi Luck of this domain. King Zhuangfeng was well aware. If he relied solely on his current accumulation, even if he devoured all his demon subordinates, he was not confident he could condense the Dao Fruit and become a Great Demon. But with the blessing of Qi Luck and being favored by the Heavenly Mandate, the chance of becoming immortal would increase by threefold out of thin air. By then, when breaking through to become a Great Demon, the probability would be two to three times higher than now, almost as if a Human Immortal Dao Fruit was predetermined. This alone was enough to drive people mad. Therefore, even though he was annoyed with these blind subordinates, for the sake of competing for the Qi Luck of Youxin Country, King Zhuangfeng still had to cajole them. Without these subordinates to help, facing other Ghost Kings and Demon Kings with the same intentions coveting the Qi Luck of Youxin Country, he had no confidence that he could win against these demons. For the sake of the Great Tao, some temporary humiliations and displeasures could only be endured. Thus, with upper and lower demons all enticed by self-interest, the attack on Sanhe City was swiftly confirmed. But it was at this moment. ¡°Heha€¡±¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 All the demons were startled, and King Zhuangfeng was ready to scold, ¡°What¡­¡± But before he could finish, a sharp sword light flashed by, directly piercing through the bodies of all the demons present. ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Without any resistance, dozens of demons in the hall perished silently, their Divine Souls and True Spirits eradicated alongside. Leaving no possibility for reincarnation. Only King Zhuangfeng¡¯s demon soul was specially preserved, captured by a spell and sent flying toward the sky. ¡°Six Kings attacking the city, interesting. It seems that my arrival was quite timely.¡± City of Yunlan, above the sky. A purple-robed youth with a stern face slowly retracted the Taiping Sword in his hand, sheathing it and hanging it at his waist. His other hand opened and captured the speck of yellow light that came flying. This was none other than Lu Yuan, using an outer dao Immortal Artifact of the Emperor¡¯s War Chariot Dao Fruit Avatar, just created as a cover identity, the Taiping Sword Immortal named Che Shidao. He had infiltrated the city an hour earlier. Then, collaborating with his original body, after confirming that there was no other threat of the same level within the city, he struck cleanly and swiftly with one sword, resolving the crisis of over a thousand demons in the city. Against his Immortal Sword manipulated by a Human Immortal, those demons with a cultivation of Gathering Three Qi and below had no power to resist and fell one after another under the sword energy. They didn¡¯t even make a sound before they died unaware. By the time he had reached here, these were the last of the demons in the hall. ¡°But¡­ Qi Luck, huh?¡± As a Human Immortal, eliminating a few lesser demons couldn¡¯t make Lu Yuan feel much accomplishment; it was simply a matter of course. Rather, it was some of the things he had sensed during his divine consciousness search of the city that attracted his interest more. Qi Luck. Lu Yuan had some knowledge of this term from ancient books he had collected. However, the descriptions in the books only mentioned that Qi Luck was related to the Heavenly Path, and obtaining it could secure heavenly favor, described in a very mystical manner. But as to what specific functions Qi Luck had, the explanations were vague. Consequently, Lu Yuan had treated it merely as a metaphor for being favored by fate and didn¡¯t pay much attention to it. But just now, when his divine consciousness searched the city and he overheard from those thousand-odd demons, he heard a little about the mysteries of Qi Luck. ¡°According to those demons¡¯ chatter, this Qi Luck seems similar to the Qi Luck I cultivate, but appears to be even more mystical. However, the exact nature still needs further confirmation,¡± Lu Yuan recalled the words he had just overheard, a trace of excitement flickering in his mind, then he raised his hand and looked at the Divine Soul of King Zhuangfeng he was holding, a flash of light in his eyes, emitting a bright yellow light from his palm, he began to forcibly search through the other¡¯s memories. As someone who had been immersed in the study of Immortal Techniques for over a thousand years and possessed the Human Dao Fruit, of course, Lu Yuan knew how to soul search, and he was capable of performing such on an old demon at the Five Qi Towards Primordial stage. Nevertheless, performing a soul search would greatly drain the power of one¡¯s Divine Soul, the higher the cultivation of the searched soul, the more energy consumed. At the same time, the Divine Soul of the searched subject would endure tremendous pressure and pain, typically ending with the soul nearly collapsed and directly dissipated after the search. Moreover, excessive loss of Divine Soul power would lead to the cultivator¡¯s spirit being weakened or even severely damaged. Hence, unless necessary, cultivators generally refrained from soul searching. It would not only cause the searched soul to disintegrate, causing disharmony with the heavens, but also deplete one¡¯s own vitalitya€¡±unworthy if the return was insufficient. Of course. An old demon at the stage of Five Qi Towards Primordial was still within Lu Yuan¡¯s capacity to handle. Moreover, the information about Youxin Country in the mind of this Demon King, and the matter of Qi Luck he was interested in, were enough to motivate his action. The spell was activated, and all information from King Zhuangfeng¡¯s mind flooded into Lu Yuan¡¯s Divine Soul like a tide. Then, it was quickly sorted by his powerful Human Immortal-level mental force. Useless information was isolated to one side, directly barred at the gates of his Divine Soul. Useful information, however, was categorized and organized, then depending on importance, accessed for memories. With his eyes slightly closed, Lu Yuan¡¯s soul search continued for a while until the soul he held trembled uncontrollably and eventually collapsed, bringing the soul search to an end. Chapter 1195 - Chapter 1195 Chapter 478 The Beginning of Establishing the Path_2 ?Chapter 1195: Chapter 478 The Beginning of Establishing the Path_2 Chapter 1195: Chapter 478 The Beginning of Establishing the Path_2 ¡°Haha, I originally thought that once I left the Nine Provinces realm, it would be impossible to gather Qi Luck again in the Immortal Realm. But unexpectedly, I find that there exists something even more convenient and mysterious than Qi Luck here, with even greater effects¡­¡± With a flick of his hand, he completely extinguished the remnant shard of the Demon King¡¯s True Spirit, after causing the Divine Soul to shatter. Having finished reading the message he just received, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but burst into laughter, ¡°This is truly heaven aiding me. Discovering the wonder of Qi Luck, it seems I must take Youxin Country. And Sanhe City, I must save as well.¡± If before learning about Qi Luck, Lu Yuan¡¯s attitude towards Youxin Country had been one of tentative contact, indifferent to success or failure, without too much obsession, Then now, knowing that Qi Luck exists, he felt it was imperative to obtain Youxin Country. The reason was simple. As the avatar of the original self, Lu Yuan¡¯s Cultivation had also reached the Five Qi Towards Primordial realm. To condense the Dao Fruit and break through to Human Immortal was but a step away. Even without Qi Luck, relying solely on the foundation he had built up in the Nine Provinces realm over a millennium, along with the support of three avatars, he was more than ninety percent confident that he could condense the Human Dao Fruit. However, to do so step by step would require at least a hundred years. To a being of longevity, this time is but a blink of an eye. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Already having one Earth Immortal and the protection of two Human Dao Fruits, Lu Yuan had sufficient strength to guard himself and truly needed not be too anxious. But without long-term concerns, there will be immediate worries. Even though he hadn¡¯t interacted much with the Immortal Realm, based on current information, he could infer how vast this place was and how endless the emergence of strong cultivators was. In this powerful world, an Earth Immortal was only just enough to reach the threshold of the higher echelons. ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï There were many cultivators stronger than himself. At the same time, the Changqing Domain where he resided was also in turmoil, with ceaseless strife among humans, ghosts, monsters, demonsa€¡±it was fraught with danger. In such an environment, Lu Yuan felt an urgency he hadn¡¯t experienced in a long time and a strong sense of crisis bloomed in his heart. Out of a self-preservation instinct, he began to think of ways to enhance his strength as much as possible. But, limited by his own strength and because the Immortal Realm was far stronger than the Nine Provinces, It was impossible for him to repeat what he had done in the Nine Provinces and establish an Immortal Dynasty to harvest Qi Luck to improve his speed of Cultivation. Although it wasn¡¯t impossible, the risk of exposing his secret was too great. Moreover, in a world of Cultivation, directly managing with an Immortal Dynasty was far too ostentatious and did not fit Lu Yuan¡¯s character. So after Ascension, once he understood the situation of this realm, he suppressed the palpitations in his heart and did not entertain the idea of establishing an Immortal Dynasty again. After all, in a world where the Immortal Sects were mainstream, establishing a centralized Immortal Dynasty akin to the mortal world was plainly telling everyone that one was an outsider. The risk was simply too great. Although Lu Yuan harbored a sense of crisis, he wasn¡¯t truly facing danger at the moment and didn¡¯t need to take such a risk. But this trip to City of Yunlan had led him to discover the wonder of Qi Luck, and everything had changed. ¡°Since the mainstream practice in this world involves gathering Qi Luck to advance Cultivation, I shall let my avatar take the lead and take the entire Youxin Country, thereby gathering the Qi Luck of the nation to aid my original self¡¯s Cultivation. In this way, maybe in just ten years, my original self could also break through to Human Immortal and achieve the Dao Fruit.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s original self had already accumulated an extremely solid foundation. What he lacked was simply that his Magic Power wasn¡¯t enough, and his Cultivation had not yet reached the perfect stage of Five Qi Towards Primordial. Once he filled these gaps, he could attempt the breakthrough at any moment. On the path to becoming a Human Immortal, there really were no obstacles. But with the aid of Qi Luck and the favor of local heavenly intent, his speed of Cultivation and the success rate of his breakthrough would undoubtedly increase significantly. Even after the breakthrough, at the Human Immortal Realm, if one could be supported by the Qi Luck of a whole nation, the speed of Cultivation would be faster by several times, if not manifold, than other cultivators of the same realm. The benefits therein were enormous. It¡¯s no surprise that so many cultivators in the Immortal Realm, whether they be humans, demons, or ghosts, are tirelessly seeking to gather Qi Luck for themselves. Because Qi Luck is Cultivation, it is the Great Tao. Who wouldn¡¯t welcome the opportunity to enhance their Cultivation and break through to higher realms? Such a windfall, unknown, might be overlooked. But once known, there¡¯s no reason to miss out on it. ¡°Moreover, it¡¯s all being done by an avatar; my true self stays hidden behind the scenes, with very little risk of exposure. Even if danger comes, with the Earth Immortal Dao Fruit under the control of the original, that¡¯s another layer of protection. All I need is to use these ten years to complete the accumulation needed to break through to Human Immortal. Afterward, once my true self has become an immortal, everything will be as I wish, free and unfettered.¡± Once Lu Yuan¡¯s true self became immortal, he would have sufficient power to protect himself. A Human Immortal, although not as strong as an Earth Immortal at the high levels or as a Heavenly Immortal at the peak in the Immortal Realm, would still be considered a mid to high-level cultivator. Moreover, in Lu Yuan¡¯s possession was the peaceful suite of three, with three Great Immortal Artifacts in hand. With the backing of the three Great Immortal Artifacts, even as a newly minted Immortal, he could claim to have few rivals within the entire Human Immortal realm. Even if he were to encounter some Earth Immortals, with the power of the Immortal Artifacts, there was a good chance he could escape. In terms of safety, as long as he didn¡¯t actively seek death or become the target of a calculated plot, there was little danger. After all, Cultivation at the level of a Human Immortal was already considered high-level in the Immortal Realm. Not to mention a Human Immortal armed with three Immortal Artifacts, which would be exceedingly powerful. Chapter 1196 - Chapter 1196 Chapter 478 The Beginning of Establishing the Path_3 ?Chapter 1196: Chapter 478 The Beginning of Establishing the Path_3 Chapter 1196: Chapter 478 The Beginning of Establishing the Path_3 Thus, after becoming immortal, Lu Yuan was actually able to preliminarily release his Earth Immortal Dao Fruit and transform the Heavenly Son¡¯s crown into an Earth Immortal avatar, dispatching it to carry out tasks. ¡°By then, sending out the three avatars to occupy different territories and gather qi fortune, and then through the connection between avatars and my original body, providing cultivation to me, the original. With the support of one Earth Immortal and two Human Immortals, my original body only needs to find a safe place, hide in a remote corner, and with a few hundred years of cultivation, I can smoothly break through Earth Immortal. Even if I am not afraid of danger, the three avatars can also gather qi fortune while collecting qi luck, and following the example of the Nine Provinces, can once again start an Immortal Dynasty in the Immortal Realm, accumulating fortune. This way, my original body will cultivate with qi fortune, and the avatars will cultivate with fortune. Both the original body and avatars will make progress side by side, neither side will be delayed.¡± If the original body were to do it, Lu Yuan naturally would not dare to create an Immortal Dynasty, taking such a risk. But if all three avatars are separated, the worst outcome would be the loss of all avatars. Given that his original body has already become immortal, he can bear risks to this degree. Without the three avatars, it would only mean losing three high-level combat forces. But as I am already an immortal myself, as one of the top figures amongst Human Immortals, I do not lack strength. At this time, it is completely acceptable to take some risks with the three avatars. After all, if it succeeds, that would be three Great Immortal Dynasties in the Immortal Realm. The benefits that come with it are almost incalculable. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Just think of the ancient Nine Provinces world, those three Immortal Emperors who suppressed an era, and the emperors who were contemporaries of the three late emperors, one would know how great the benefits are if the way of Fortune Dao is successful? An Earth Immortal Dao Fruit is definitely within reach. Even the Earth Immortal pinnacle has a high probability of being achieved. And even Heavenly Immortal, if I make a big enough impact in the Immortal Realm, may also stand a chance. Compared to these gains, the risk of merely losing three avatars is not worth mentioning. ¡°So now, first send the Che Shidao avatar out to take over Youxin Country. Then use the Qi Luck of Youxin Country to help me break through to Human Immortal. After I become immortal, I¡¯ll find a safe place, hide away, and cultivate discreetly. Then I can send out the three avatars to establish Immortal Dynasties in different places, gather qi luck and fortune, and provide for the cultivation of both my original body and the three avatars.¡± Going over the plan in his mind, Lu Yuan nodded slightly, officially confirming it. ?¦Ï¦Í¨À0.§ã¦Ï At this moment, in the City of Yunlan below, with no demons present, the human beings who had been bewitched by magic or had already given up hope began to gradually realize this fact and started to make some noise. Seeing that no one was maintaining order and chaos might ensue. Lu Yuan thought for a moment, then waved his sleeve, scattering hundreds of points of light. Suddenly, where the points of light fell, burly men appeared, they were Yellow Turban Strongmen. With his current Cultivation as a Human Immortal, creating these Dao soldiers is much simpler than when he was in the Nine Provinces. Even the strength of the Yellow Turban Strongman, without scrimping on magic power, is much stronger than those Dao soldiers in the Nine Provinces. At this point, the Che Shidao avatar simply waved its hand, using the previously prepared Dao soldiers¡¯ seeds, and created hundreds of Yellow Turban Strongmen, each of their strengths not inferior to a Cultivator of Gathering Three Qi. And this was not the limit. If there were enough materials, with the magic power of Che Shidao¡¯s late-stage Human Immortal, he could even create hundreds of Yellow Turban Strongmen at the Five Qi Towards Primordial strength. Hundreds of Yellow Turban Strongmen at the Five Qi Towards Primordial level gathered together, if arranged into battle formations, even an ordinary Human Immortal would not dare to face their edge directly. Of course. To create hundreds of Five Qi Towards Primordial strength Yellow Turban Strongmen, the materials needed are incredibly few. Even if Lu Yuan plundered the entire Nine Provinces, he could not afford this kind of consumption. Right now, hundreds of Dao soldiers with the strength of Gathering Three Qi was already the limit. Fortunately, nowadays he relies on the strength of his avatar, not depending on those Dao soldiers. The Yellow Turban Strongman is just treated as a spell, used to deal with miscellaneous matters and not really relied upon. So there is nothing to be conflicted about. In the meantime, observing some commotion in the City of Yunlan, he released hundreds of Dao soldiers, and under their suppression and leadership, the situation was brought under control in an instant. ¡°Since the aim is to take over the entire Youxin Country, let¡¯s start with the City of Yunlan over there.¡± Seeing that the city had stabilized, Lu Yuan¡¯s avatar Che Shidao nodded in satisfaction. According to the plan, he now needs to pacify the entire Youxin Country in order to gather qi fortune. In the future, he would even need to establish an Immortal Dynasty to gather fortune. To achieve all of these, relying solely on himself is definitely not enough. To suppress the Qi Luck of a country, like the Zuanfeng Demon King, Che Shidao also needs other subordinates to assist, to fully control the whole Youxin Country and begin the collection of qi fortune. ¡°The Immortal Sects of this realm gather qi fortune by establishing Tao Inheritance in the local area, widely spreading Dao Law, establishing a nominal rule. And then, by establishing City Gods and Mountain and Water Gods at various towns and landscapes, using them to sort out Heaven and Earth to collect local qi fortune. That should be the most orthodox and convenient method for the Human Race to gather qi fortune.¡± Che Shidao looked thoughtfully at the many survivors who were gradually restoring order under the guidance of Dao soldiers, ¡°So if I want to plan the big picture, starting from now, I can try to set up Tao Inheritance and enshrine some divine spirits belonging to my path. However, establishing Tao Inheritance is easy to say, with the backing of the entire Nine Provinces, any classic teachings could be sufficient to establish a path in the Immortal Realm. But the method of enshrining divine spirits, there is no such inheritance in the Nine Provinces; I¡¯ll have to find it myself. It seems that contact with the native Immortal Sects of the Immortal Realm, as well as some local divine spirits from the last encounter, should not be delayed; it¡¯s time to promote it to the agenda.¡± Che Shidao combed through his thoughts, organizing the things that needed to be done next. To establish a sect, to build a Tao Inheritance; to enshrine divine spirits, to sort out Heaven and Earth; to subdue a country, to collect qi fortune. This first battle in the Immortal Realm, let it be started by him. Chapter 1197 - Chapter 1197 Chapter 479 The Reaction of Immortals and Monsters ?Chapter 1197: Chapter 479: The Reaction of Immortals and Monsters Chapter 1197: Chapter 479: The Reaction of Immortals and Monsters City of Yunlan had been reclaimed by the Human Race, and within the city, King Zuanfeng along with thousands of demons and ghosts all perished, none able to escape. Two months passed since this news, when Black Wind King, Spiritual Water King, Golden Feather King, Sorrowful Ghost King, and other five Ghost Kings had arrived as agreed to launch an attack on Sanhe City, only to find that King Zuanfeng and the demon forces from Yunlan City were nowhere to be seen. A few of the demon kings sent demons to Yunlan City to inquire, and that¡¯s when the truth came to light. Then, immense shock and unease ensued. Outside the City of Yunlan, in the great encampment of the demon coalition. After the news was brought back, several Great Demons and Ghost Kings quickly gathered together to discuss countermeasures. ¡°What happened? How could that guy Zuanfeng suddenly be killed by someone?¡± The speaker was Black Wind King, a Tiger Demon masterful in controlling ghosts and naturally adept at wielding gales. Later, he combined his enslaved ghosts with his Divine Powers of the wind, releasing them togethera€¡±the ghosts borrowing the force of the wind, clouds darkening the skies, and gusts of black wind howling, thus, he earned himself the title of Black Wind King. ¡°According to the little demon sent for reconnaissance, there are hundreds of Immortal Sect Cultivators in Yunlan City, currently gathering and resettling the remaining people and livestock. These cultivators, each with a Cultivation beyond the Gathering Three Qi, are notably strong. Above these cultivators, it¡¯s said that there is a leader whom all the cultivators in the city obey and respect highly. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï From the looks of it, this must be the disciples of some Grand Immortal Sect who also have their eyes on the territory of Youxin Country, hence they sent someone to get involved. Zuanfeng fell at their hands. However, we had already scouted the nearby countries¡¯ Immortal Sects, none of which should be free to meddle in the affairs of Youxin Country. This is precisely why we came here, aiming for a great undertaking. Now, an Immortal Sect suddenly appears. Was there a mistake in our previous intelligence, or has a new power infiltrated into this Southern Domain? And we¡¯ve had the misfortune of running into them, being taken as chickens for the slaughter.¡± Ghost King Sanyin, with his refined Scholar appearance, was famous for cunning schemes, known to be full of tricks. This time, among the demons sent to Yunlan City for reconnaissance, many were under Sanyin¡¯s command, and he had the deepest understanding of the situation there. Therefore, he took it upon himself to enlighten the gathered demon and ghost kings. However, his intelligence was flawed as he mistook Lu Yuan¡¯s enlightened Dao soldiers for Immortal Sect Cultivators. And Lu Yuan¡¯s avatar, Che Shidao, was perceived by him as the force of some Immortal Sect. It must be said that the art of commanding Dao soldiers mastered by one with the appearance of a member of the Human Race was indeed highly misleading at this time and place. This gave the demon and ghost kings a very strong misdirection. ¡°Never mind where those Human Race cultivators came from, they killed Zuanfeng and took over Yunlan City, clearly becoming our adversaries. They are the enemy and it is impossible for us to reconcile with them. Our immediate priority should be to assess the strength of those people in Yunlan City. Beyond the hundred or so Immortal Sect Cultivators with Cultivation above the realm of Gathering Three Qi, just how powerful is their leader? Is he the same as us, merely at the stage of Five Qi Towards Primordial? Or¡­ is he a True Immortal?¡± With a worried expression, Sorrowful Ghost King¡¯s voice trembled slightly as he spoke. The other Great Kings listening also shivered and fell silent. They were all too aware that if the visitor were merely at the stage of Five Qi Towards Primordial, even if there were hundreds of Immortal Sect Cultivators in Yunlan City with Cultivation all above Gathering Qi, and even if there were several leaders among them at the Five Qi stage, they would not be alarmed. This strength, though formidable, could still be handled if they, the demon and ghost kings, joined forces. The worst outcome would be that Youxin Country in the future would be divided into three realmsa€¡±controlled by their demon side, the Changqing Branch, and the newly entered forces from Yunlan City¡¯s Immortal Sect. They could still remain in Youxin Country and continue plotting for its fate. However, if a True Immortal were to arrive, then all would be lost, everything would be in vain. In a highest-level struggle of the Five Qi Towards Primordial realm, the sudden addition of an overqualified True Immortal would break all the equilibrium, sweeping all opponents out of the game. In the face of a True Immortal, they stood no chance of victory and would have to willingly cede Youxin Country. It was not just about being eliminated from the game. If a True Immortal were indeed to come, then all the demon and ghost kings present would have to immediately consider how they would save their own lives. ?¦Ï¦Í¨À¦Ï.§ã¦Ï For a Human Race Immortal, considering the backing of the Qing Immortal Sect and their shared identity as part of the Human Race, they might spare the disciples within the city from the Changqing Branch. But as for these demons who had brought misfortune to many and killed countless, certainly, there would be no mercy in their slaughter. They could not avoid exorcism and extermination. The best example was the disappearance of King Zuanfeng and thousands of demons from Yunlan Citya€¡± Not a single demon had escaped. Such merciless action clearly indicated the attitude of Yunlan City¡¯s Immortal Sect towards these demons. Therefore, if there truly was a True Immortal over there, they would need to find a way out and prepare to escape immediately. Otherwise, by the time the True Immortal made a move, it might already be too late to flee. ¡°How could a True Immortal, a being of such stature, lightly act? Even within various Immortal Sects, they are the School Leaders or Elder Taishangs, of whom there are no more than one or two per sect. Moreover, if Yunlan City¡¯s cultivators truly had an immortal, why would they hunker down there for months? Why not just lead their disciples directly after killing Zuanfeng to defeat demons and exorcise ghosts and exterminate us demons and ghosts right away?¡± Chapter 1198 - Chapter 1198 Chapter 479 Immortal Monster Reaction_2 ?Chapter 1198: Chapter 479 Immortal Monster Reaction_2 Chapter 1198: Chapter 479 Immortal Monster Reaction_2 ¡°` The other party didn¡¯t do so, which must mean they lack an Immortal. That¡¯s why after taking the City of Yunlan, they set up a deceptive formation and holed up there without making a move.¡± Among the several Demon Kings and Ghost Kings, the Golden Feather King had the most explosive temper. It was a Different Species eagle monster with an extraordinary bloodline, held itself in high esteem, and always saw itself as the king of the skies. Now seeing its companions being so cautious and timid, it couldn¡¯t help but express its dissatisfaction. Fortunately, it wasn¡¯t truly senseless. After speaking its mind, it immediately changed its tone and said, ¡°However, now that our alliance is without that Zuanfeng guy, facing Sanhe City, our advantage isn¡¯t as great as before. Defeating the Changqing Branch and taking over Sanhe City seems hardly possible now. Moreover, an unfamiliar Immortal Sect has taken position in the City of Yunlan, secretly spying on us, hoping to take advantage of our situation, which makes for a good plan. How can we let them have their way? In my opinion, we can no longer attack Sanhe City, nor can we capture it. The best course of action for us now is to first retreat to Stone Man Mountain over there, fortify our position against the mountain, and observe the situation. Once we clearly see which way the wind is blowing, then we can make our next move.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï When the Golden Feather King suggested this, it clearly had the plan to immediately escape Youxin Country should anything go awry. Hearing this, the other Demon Kings and Ghost Kings couldn¡¯t help but nod in agreement. ¡°What Golden Feather has said makes a lot of sense. For now, retreat is indeed the only way.¡± ¡°I support this proposal. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? First, we leave this problematic place, then we find a way to gather detailed information about the City of Yunlan before making any further plans.¡± ¡°Yes, yes, yes, let¡¯s withdraw first.¡± The Demon Kings and Ghost Kings, each chiming in, expressed their agreement with the retreat. ¡°Since everyone agrees, let¡¯s make a run for it, and let¡¯s do it now.¡± The Golden Feather King, seeing the consent of the demons, didn¡¯t waste any more words and immediately took action. ¡°Go!¡± The demons, not wanting to linger, followed the Golden Feather King to gather their subordinates, the lesser monsters and ghosts, ready to retreat. This joint attack on Sanhe City by the six kings ended no sooner than it began, due to the unexpected changes in the City of Yunlan, concluding rather abruptly. ¡­ It wasn¡¯t just the demons outside Sanhe City. Inside Sanhe City, besieged by the alliance of monsters, the incumbent master of the Changqing Branch, Zhang Yunlei, also furrowed his brows at the emergence of an unknown force in the City of Yunlan. ¡°Master, the information has been verified. There definitely is an unknown Immortal Sect in the City of Yunlan, but we have yet to determine which one it is. However, it has been confirmed that the demons, including Zuanfeng, have indeed been wiped out by this Immortal Sect.¡± A disciple of the Qing Immortal Sect was reporting the situation they had learned from their trip to the City of Yunlan to the master of their house. ¡°It seems the news is accurate then. With Zuanfeng dead and the City of Yunlan back in the hands of the Human Race, this is indeed an excellent turn of events for the political situation in Youxin Country. But this new Immortal Sect that has suddenly appeared¡­¡± Upon saying this, Zhang Yunlei¡¯s expression inevitably showed a trace of concern. Nowadays, Youxin Country is rampant with demons everywhere, claiming mountains as their strongholds and cities as their centers of rebellion. The citizens of the Human Race within the country have suffered a lot from this, with countless lives being lost to the demons. And as the backbone of defense for the country, their Changqing Branch, along with the City God Spirits in the country, are powerless to stop them, only able to watch as the situation slowly spirals out of control. Now, they are faced with an unprecedented crisis. The demons even allied themselves to initiate an offensive toward Sanhe City, aiming to seize control of Youxin Country. This is without a doubt an extremely dangerous signal. Despite facing the combined attack from the six Demon Kings and Ghost Kings within the country, Zhang Yunlei is confident that with the city-protecting formation set up in Sanhe City, along with the magical artifact treasures bestowed by the sect, they can defend the city from falling. He even has a glimmer of hope that he can repel the attacking Demon Kings and Ghost Kings. But that would only be a temporary solution. Youxin Country has no Immortals in charge, which is a well-known fact among the neighboring nations. More and more demons, upon hearing the news, are starting to come here. The arrival of King Zuanfeng was only three years ago. More Demon Kings and Ghost Kings will be drawn here by the news. Eventually, with a large number of demons converging, the balance of power between the demons and the Immortal Sect Cultivators, along with the City God Spirits, is bound to become unbalanced sooner or later. And since the Qing Immortal Sect has had no Great True Person for thousands of years, without a breakthrough by a new Earth Immortal becoming a Heavenly Immortal, there has been no way to fill the gap in their top-level strength. The long-standing vacancy of a Great True Person has led to the gradual decline of the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s control over the Changqing Domain. Over the last few thousand years, out of the thirty-nine nations in the Changqing Domain, seventeen have slipped from the control of the Qing Immortal Sect, taken over by other Immortal Sects or by demons. Of the remaining twenty-two nations, there are also nine, like Youxin Country, where the rule of the Qing Immortal Sect has become precarious, at risk of collapsing at any moment. ¡°` Chapter 1199 - Chapter 1199 Chapter 479 Immortal Monster Reaction_3 ?Chapter 1199: Chapter 479 Immortal Monster Reaction_3 Chapter 1199: Chapter 479 Immortal Monster Reaction_3 The Changqing Immortal Sect truly has effective control only over the core thirteen nations near the Mountain Gate. With past examples in mind, Zhang Yunlei couldn¡¯t help but wonder whether this foreign Immortal Sect, like those monsters and demons, coveted Youxin Country? ¡®Furthermore, the strength of this unfamiliar Immortal Sect is unknown. If there are no Immortals, it would be fine; introducing a third power into the mix would just drag them into the fray, offsetting those monsters and demons. Thus, the situation in Youxin Country could be maintained. But if they were to deploy Immortals, then Youxin Country might truly slip from the grasp of our Changqing Immortal Sect. However, even if it were to break away, in the end, Youxin Country would still fall into the hands of an Immortal Sect of the Human Race, and the tens of millions of citizens within might still be spared their lives. They wouldn¡¯t fall to the monsters and demons¡¯ schemes, which could also be considered fortunate.¡¯ Zhang Yunlei sighed in his heart, feeling quite pessimistic about the future of the sect in Youxin Country. Nevertheless, no matter what. As the ostensible ruler of Youxin Country and also a cultivator of the Immortal Sect, he must take a stand regarding the Immortal Sect from the City of Yunlan that had suddenly entered the fray. After contemplating, Zhang Yunlei summoned the head of the East Courtyard to discuss the matter. Within Youxin Country, the Changqing Immortal Sect had established branch residences, with the heads of each residence referred to as mansion lords, with Zhang Yunlei himself serving as one. Beneath the mansion lord, there were the North and West Courtyards, each governing the northern and western regions of the country, acting as deputies to the mansion lord. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Actually, according to the usual customs of the sect, there were originally four courtyards in Youxin Country: East, West, South, and North. But among them, the head of the East Courtyard, along with the former mansion lorda€¡±the Garrison Immortal of the Changqing Immortal Sect in Youxin Countrya€¡±had been killed in a grievous battle against the monsters. And the head of the South Courtyard, Zhang Yunlei himself, was hastily promoted to mansion lord, which led to the control of the South Courtyard slipping away without a cultivator of the Five Qi Towards Primordial to suppress it, and hence it was abolished. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Therefore, within Youxin Country, aside from the mansion lord residing in Shanheshi, only the North and West Courtyards remained. Currently, due to the siege of Sanhe City by a multitude of demons, the heads of both the North and West Courtyards had come to help, and were now in the city. As a result, when Zhang Yunlei issued his summons, Yao Chaoyun, the head of the West Courtyard, quickly arrived. ¡°Greetings, Fellow Disciple.¡± Though Yao Chaoyun and Zhang Yunlei did not share the same Master, both were disciples of the same generation within the sect and addressed each other as fellow disciples. ¡°Yao Fellow Disciple has arrived.¡± Zhang Yunlei gave a slight nod when the other arrived then relayed the situation regarding the City of Yunlan, making sure his fellow disciple understood the situation. He concluded with, ¡°With a foreign Immortal Sect coming to Youxin Country, whether we¡¯re willing or not, we must respond. Therefore, I wish to send you as a Messenger on behalf of our branch and the sect, to go to the City of Yunlan to meet the main authorities of that Immortal Sect and determine their intentions. We need to see their attitude toward our branch, whether it¡¯s good or bad so that we can prepare accordingly.¡± Zhang Yunlei looked apologetically at his fellow disciple. This diplomatic mission was not a pleasant one. If the unfamiliar Immortal Sect from the City of Yunlan harbored good intentions, then all would be well. But if they had evil intentions, then Yao Chaoyun¡¯s trip to the City of Yunlan could be walking right into a trap, possibly never to return. If it weren¡¯t for his position as mansion lord, with responsibilities to the sect¡¯s overall situation in Youxin Country, he would have definitely gone himself. But necessity demands, and burdened with heavy responsibilities, Zhang Yunlei could not afford to take risks. So now, he could only ask Yao Chaoyun, a fellow disciple of significance, to take his place and make the journey. Having heard the whole story and been entrusted by his senior fellow disciple, Yao Chaoyun couldn¡¯t help but frown, ¡°Going on a mission to City of Yunlan is not a problem; for the sake of the sect, I am willing to take this risk. However, senior brother, if the worst scenario you predicted comes true and there are Immortals in City of Yunlan, how should I deal with them? Is Youxin Country really going to be handed over to them?¡± Yao Chaoyun had been guarding Youxin Country for four hundred years. He was even born in Youxin Country. With the strength of a Five Qi Towards Primordial cultivator and a lifespan of eight hundred years, almost half of his life had been spent here. After the previous estate master fell, Yao Chaoyun, along with fellow disciples like Zhang Yunlei, had propped up the sect and the Human Race¡¯s presence in this region. In the three hundred years, day and night, he had racked his brains on how to repel demons and preserve the territory. It had nearly become his life¡¯s work. Therefore, he had quite an attachment to this land, and he really didn¡¯t want to give it up to outsiders. ¡°If it really comes to that, Youxin Country will have to be relinquished.¡± Seeing his junior fellow disciple¡¯s reluctant face, Zhang Yunlei said with a bitter smile, ¡°Actually, after Uncle Yunyang fell, the sect already considered giving up on Youxin Country. After I took over as the estate master, they even sent messages to ask me if we needed to evacuate. Because the sect truly had no new Immortals, not even new disciples to send over. If we were to continue defending, we could only rely on ourselves. But at that time, the area surrounding Youxin Country was plagued by demons. If we retreated, it would mean surrendering millions of the common people to the demons, sending them to their doom. How could I bear to see that happen? So, in the end, I replied to the sect, presenting the pros and cons, requesting to stay to protect Youxin Country. But now you see the situation, junior brother. The foreign demons are becoming more frequent, and they have even banded together to start attacking Sanhe City. In such a situation, even if we defend to the death, we won¡¯t be able to protect Youxin Country for long. At the most, in a decade or two, and certainly not more than a hundred years, Youxin Country will fall into the hands of the demons, and the citizens will become food for the demon¡¯s bloodlust. Rather than let Youxin Country be destroyed by our hands, it¡¯s better to give it up now to that foreign Immortal Sect. If the other party really has an Immortal to garrison the place, what harm is there in giving Youxin Country to them? As long as they can protect Youxin and safeguard the tens of millions of people, even if the country is no longer ours, we would still have served the people of Youxin well and lived up to our identities as disciples of the Qing Immortal Sect.¡± As a disciple of an Immortal Sect, Zhang Yunlei was indeed a person of firm principles and pure character. He had not fallen short in any aspect of the moral integrity expected of him. The conflicts over the Great Tao belong to the Great Tao, but the broader issues of race, the distinction between good and evil, and the right way must not be set aside. Since he no longer had the ability to protect the millions of people of Youxin Country, to take on the responsibility of subduing demons and securing peace, he might as well let go and let someone more capable take over. He couldn¡¯t, out of personal selfishness, drag tens of millions of the Human Race to their death. If he did so, even if Youxin Country could be temporarily protected, he wouldn¡¯t find peace in his conscience and would fall into a state of self-blame and guilt. There wouldn¡¯t be the slightest sense of accomplishment. Chapter 1200 - Chapter 1200 Chapter 480 Negotiation and Coercion ?Chapter 1200: Chapter 480 Negotiation and Coercion Chapter 1200: Chapter 480 Negotiation and Coercion ¡°On this journey to Yunlan, if they really want Youxin Country, junior brother can go ahead and promise them,¡± Once you return, I will report it inside our sect and inform them of this matter. Please let the School Leader and all the elders decide. I believe that given the current situation, our seniors in the sect will agree and will not ask us to defend forcefully. So, junior brother need not feel any psychological pressure. Your primary concern should be to preserve your own life at all costs. You must not act rashly out of pride,¡± Zhang Yunlei had lived with his junior brother for hundreds of years and was well aware of his temperament. He earnestly advised, ¡°The sect is in difficult times now, and the demons in the Changqing Domain are causing chaos in the world. It is indeed time for our righteous path to eliminate these monsters. At this moment, we must all keep ourselves safe so that we can serve the sect and all the people of the world to the best of our humble abilities. Junior Brother, take this to heart!¡± Having said all this, Yao Chaoyun had many feelings of reluctance in his heart but could not come up with a rebuttal. In the end, he could only bow and respond, ¡°Junior brother understands. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï I will not act impulsively and ruin the grand plan of our sect.¡± Zhang Yunlei breathed a sigh of relief and said with relief, ¡°As long as junior brother thinks this way, senior brother will be at ease.¡± Yao Chaoyun said, ¡°Senior Brother, unless there is anything else, I need to proceed to City of Yunlan as I bear this duty.¡± ¡°There¡¯s nothing more, junior brother. Take care on your journey.¡± Zhang Yunlei patted his shoulder and offered his blessings. Yao Chaoyun nodded and then turned to leave the door, took out a wine gourd, tossed it into the air, and it instantly grew several times larger. He leaped up and landed on the gourd, sitting cross-legged. ¡°Senior brother, I am off!¡± Leaving behind a long cry, the wine gourd turned into a streak of red light, heading towards the direction of City of Yunlan in the south. Zhang Yunlei watched the light disappear, standing silent for a long while. ¡­ ¡°Considering the time, the local forces of Youxin Country should also have reacted, right?¡± Just as the demons of Youxin Country and the Changqing Branch began to respond to Lu Yuan¡¯s sudden appearance, Inside the City of Yunlan, Lu Yuan also started to calculate the reaction time of these two forces. In the past several months, since he had taken over the City of Yunlan, he had not only sent an avatar named Che Shidao to manage the city¡¯s affairs but also led a group of Dao soldiers to start consolidating the local population and purging the demons. He had been waiting for the demons and Immortal Sects within Youxin Country to notice the changes in the City of Yunlan and to see their reactions. Indeed, Lu Yuan¡¯s primary strategy was one of inaction, to observe and respond to changes calmly. The main reason was certainly not fear of the demons. The demons in Youxin Country, how strong could they be? To take them down was merely a matter for Che Shidao¡¯s avatar with a single blow, which wouldn¡¯t take much effort. What truly made him cautious was the Changqing Immortal Sect behind the Changqing Branch. After all, the Changqing Immortal Sect is currently the sect with the strongest strength in the entire Changqing Domain, and it is also the nominal ruler of the whole Great Domain. According to what Lu Yuan had learned over this period, this sect, just in the strength they openly displayed, had four Earth Immortals and seventeen Human Immortals. This was still the overt strength of the Changqing Immortal Sect left after the Great True Person fell and nine thousand years of turmoil. How deep their hidden power was, nobody knew. But even ignoring their hidden strength, just the overt strength was already far beyond Lu Yuan¡¯s, far beyond his capability to confront. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Therefore, even though he had set his sights on Youxin Country and wanted to take action here and take over the country, he dared not act recklessly. Otherwise, if he angered the Changqing Immortal Sect and they sent out a few Human Immortals, his avatar would not be able to handle them. Even if his true self took action, against the four Earth Immortals of the Changqing Immortal Sect, he would still be powerless to resist. Considering the strength and because he was new to the Immortal Realm and to the Changqing Domain¡¯s situation, he naturally opted for the most cautious approach. That is, if the enemy does not move, I do not move. If the enemy moves, then I will decide whether to move based on the situation. After all, I have only taken the City of Yunlan and eliminated the demons here, and just settled down here. Throughout the process, there was no conflict with the Changqing Immortal Sect at all. Even if they wanted to blame, they have no reason whatsoever. With this in mind, there would be no grievances or conflicts between Lu Yuan and the overlord of the Changqing Domain. Negotiations for subsequent matters would also be easier. Whether it¡¯s posturing, creating threats and temptations, or intimidating, or peaceful negotiations, step-by-step probing, forcing out their bottom line, as long as he does not truly escalate the situation into a conflict with the Changqing Immortal Sect, even if his attitude is otherwise harsh, he need not worry about them sending someone to hunt him down. In terms of safety, there are no issues whatsoever. And as long as safety is not an issue, everything else is easily negotiable. ¡°During the previous period, numerous demons and other Immortal Sect Cultivators covertly infiltrated the City of Yunlan. Those intruders, I had my avatar and Dao soldiers deliberately let go, not encircling and annihilating them. This was to let them go back and inform their backing forces that I have arrived. With the capabilities of Cultivators, within a few days, even if they are somewhat slow, Sanhe City should also be aware of the situation and have discussed countermeasures. And given the attitude I have shown, the Changqing Branch should not directly show hostility or even refuse to communicate. If they are sensible, they should have already sent a Messenger to the City of Yunlan to communicate with me.¡± Chapter 1201 - Chapter 1201 Chapter 480 Negotiation and Submission_2 ?Chapter 1201: Chapter 480 Negotiation and Submission_2 Chapter 1201: Chapter 480 Negotiation and Submission_2 Lu Yuan pondered his plan, considering how to test the messenger from the Changqing Branch. He wanted to understand the extent of the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s attachment to Youxin Country, and then strategize on how to wrest control of the country from them. In his view, this was no simple matter. This was about the fate of a nation, a resource that could guarantee the continuous emergence of Immortals in a sect. Unless it was absolutely necessary, who would let go easily? The entire process was like walking a tightrope, cautiously testing the opponent¡¯s bottom line step by step. Then, seizing the opportunity, he would press his chips and crush the opponent in one fell swoop, taking over the entire Youxin Country. As he was deep in thought, Lu Yuan¡¯s expression shifted, for his avatar, Che Shidao, had sent back a message. ¡°The messenger from the Changqing Branch has finally arrived, huh?¡± After he received the images sent by his avatar, a slight smile appeared on his face. Looking up into the distance, his consciousness descended upon his avatar. At this moment. In the newly cleared backyard of a grand estate within the City of Yunlan, the avatar Che Shidao looked at the Immortal Sect Cultivator standing before him with a profound gaze. ¡°Yao Chaoyun of the Qing Immortal Sect, greeting the Immortal.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The worst-case scenario they had predicted had truly come to pass. The foreign Immortal Sect that had taken over the City of Yunlan indeed possessed an Immortal, making them a formidable Immortal Sect. Even in the Immortal Realm, the combat prowess of a Human Immortal was considered formidable, typically reserved for defending the Mountain Gate of a sect, and not easily deployed. Once deployed, it meant that the opponent¡¯s ambitions were significant, and they were approaching aggressively. ¡®It seems Youxin Country is truly beyond saving.¡¯ With this thought, a desolation arose in Yao Chaoyun¡¯s heart. ¡°No need for formalities. Friend Yao, what brings you from the City of Yunlan?¡± Che Shidao raised his hand slightly and asked with a friendly smile. As is customary in the Immortal Cultivation World, although there is a hierarchy in knowledge attainment, they usually address each other as Dao friends. Of course, out of respect for those who achieve more. Higher realms may address lower realms as Dao friends, but those of lower realms generally address those of higher realms as elders. ¡°Esteemed elder, our Qing Immortal Sect rules over Youxin Country, controlling the four key territories within the region. Hearing that the elder has reclaimed the City of Yunlan and cleansed it of demons, and as the local authority, I have specifically come to pay respects and express gratitude for your assistance,¡± Yao Chaoyun replied respectfully. However, the underlying message was clear, indicating Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s sovereignty over Youxin Country. Clearly, although the mansion leader Zhang Yunlei had hinted before his departure that it was possible to relinquish Youxin Country if necessary, with everything still unsettled, Yao Chaoyun still wanted to try and retain Youxin Country if possible. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï His speech, naturally, could not stop Che Shidao¡¯s probing. With a slight smile and a meaningful tone, Che Shidao said, ¡°The Qing Immortal Sect has established branches in Youxin Country, protecting this nation for tens of thousands of years, a deed truly admirable. Yet, for nearly nine thousand years, your sect¡¯s rule over the Changqing Domain seems somewhat troubled. Just look at Youxin Country, how such a vital southern stronghold like the City of Yunlan could fall into demon hands, making millions of our human race their blood food, perishing at the mouths of demons. Even Sanhe City would not have been preserved if I had not intervened this time. While your sect holds the name of ruler of Youxin Country, this role seems rather nominal. Such actions have led me to seriously doubt whether the branch here, led by you, Friend Yao, can truly protect Youxin Country.¡± Che Shidao did not mince his words, directly tearing down the last shred of face of the opponent, laying out the brutal facts on the table and striking right at Yao Chaoyun¡¯s heart. This merciless statement caused a slight change in Yao Chaoyun¡¯s expression. Indeed. The opponent had a very strong intent, coming specifically for Youxin Country. Yao Chaoyun¡¯s expression was grim, yet his tone remained neither servile nor overbearing as he clasped his hands and said, ¡°The esteemed elder need not worry about this. Our Qing Immortal Sect has a lineage of tens of thousands of years, producing Immortals generation after generation. Currently, it¡¯s just that demons rise frequently in various places, keeping many of our sect¡¯s Immortals busy quelling rebellions and pursuing Great Demons and Ghost Emperors; they simply can¡¯t be spared at the moment. Once demon-hunting is concluded, there will definitely be Immortals from our sect coming to secure Youxin and stabilize the region.¡± Facing the pressing Immortal before him, Yao Chaoyun could only bring up his sect in the hopes of intimidating the opponent. However, Che Shidao saw through the opponent¡¯s insecurity, directly saying with a smile, ¡°Well, your sect¡¯s demon-hunting seems to take quite some time. It has been three hundred years, and you still haven¡¯t managed to quell the demons and send Immortals to rule Youxin Country. You might have the luxury of time for such prolonged exorcisms, but the people of Youxin cannot wait. Thousands of years, to us, are but the blink of an eye, merely a moment passed during meditation. But for mortals, it represents the birth and rebirth of generations upon generations, and they cannot endure under the ravages of demons for so long.¡± Through this brief interaction, Che Shidao had seen through Yao Chaoyun¡¯s facade, also sensing the weakness behind him, of the Qing Immortal Sect. This sect, which nominally ruled the entire Changqing Domain, seemed truly exhausted from the turmoil and warfare of the past millennia, unable to pay attention to the fringes of its influence anymore. Even, it had considered abandoning some regions and shrinking its sphere of influence. Otherwise, the situation in Youxin Country and Yao Chaoyun¡¯s demeanor, even his appointment as the messenger sent by the Qing Immortal Sect, would not have been merely at the level of Five Qi Towards Primordial. Chapter 1202 - Chapter 1202 Chapter 480 Negotiation and Submission_3 ?Chapter 1202: Chapter 480 Negotiation and Submission_3 Chapter 1202: Chapter 480 Negotiation and Submission_3 If Qing Immortal Sect were truly confident, the one who came would be an Immortal, not just the head of a branch. Thus, after figuring out his opponent¡¯s cards, Lu Yuan¡¯s probing and the attitude he showed became much more aggressive and forceful. ¡°The demons within our country will be eradicated by us, the disciples of Qing¡­,¡± Yao Chaoyun still firmly insisted. But Lu Yuan interrupted him directly and said seriously, ¡°Friend Yao, this concerns the lives of tens of millions, or rather, hundreds of millions of people. In the past three hundred years, under your protection, Youxin Country has lost half its territory to demons. The tens of millions of civilians living on those lands have also perished as a result. This responsibility for losing territory lies entirely with your incompetence, which has led to our people of Youxin facing this disaster. Now, you still think the mistakes made weren¡¯t big enough, still blindly acting in your own interests. Are you truly determined to stubbornly drag the remaining tens of millions of the Human Race to destruction with you until you are satisfied? As cultivators of the Immortal Sect, is this the Tao you cultivate?¡± Lu Yuan spoke sharply, his voice like thunder, each word resonating like a bell, causing Yao Chaoyun¡¯s spirits to shake and his face to turn pale. He talked not of gain nor loss, but only of righteousness. In the face of the great righteousness of the Human Race, the Qing Immortal Sect indeed owed debts in Youxin Country. Youxin Country had supported Qing Immortal Sect for tens of thousands of years, but they, the disciples of the Immortal Sect, had failed to protect the people of Youxin, continuously losing territory to demons. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï This led to the downfall of the land and untold suffering for the people. Originally, Youxin Country only had Qing Immortal Sect, and they indeed had no extra strength to provide support, so they could still claim they did their best. But now, there¡¯s a new Immortal Sect taking over, and it has enough strength to annihilate the demons and protect Youxin Country. These powerless individuals coming to obstruct them now seem rather unreasonable. If Yao Chaoyun persists, it can only be seen as pure selfishnessa€¡±out of personal interest, risking dragging Youxin Country down with him. Of course. ?¦Ï??0.?¦Ï Such selfishness is contrary to the righteousness of the Human Race. But for Qing Immortal Sect, it is beneficial. It¡¯s a violation of major righteousness but not of minor correctness. If they value their own sect more, then of course they can ignore the interests of the entire Human Race of Youxin Country and continue their stubborn resistance. But at this point, it¡¯s clear that inside Qing Immortal Sect, they no longer support continued defense of Youxin. They¡¯ve long wanted to shed this burden, gather their forces, and guard their core territories. So, whether it¡¯s a major or minor issue, Yao Chaoyun can¡¯t justify his position. What¡¯s more important. Even if he wants to defend it stubbornly, even if the sect wishes to support him, they are practically powerless to reverse the situation now. Because inside the sect, they can, at most, give spiritual support, but they can¡¯t send actual reinforcements. And the Immortal on the other side evidently considers Youxin Country a must-have. With only the power of one branch, they are really unable to contend. If they really resist, they will still inevitably face the disaster of their Tao¡¯s destruction. And after their deaths, it still won¡¯t change the fate of Youxin Country falling. ¡®So, must we really give up¡­¡¯ Yao Chaoyun felt his heart bleed, and after weighing the pros and cons, he had to make a decision. He bowed to Che Shidao and asked, ¡°The senior speaks with courtesy; however, this place is still Qing Changqing Branch. Whether to give up, I still need to report to the sect and after discussing with the sect leader and elders, we can decide. May I ask the senior¡¯s Taoist name and the name of your sect? After I know, I will report it to our sect, for our elders to decide.¡± After weighing his options, Yao Chaoyun finally conceded reluctantly. Seeing this, Lu Yuan knew that he had succeeded halfway in securing a nominal peace between Changqing Immortal Sect and Youxin Country. The remaining half depended on whether the high echelons of the Changqing Immortal Sect were willing to make an enemy of a Human Immortal, himself, for a partially fallen small country. However, he estimated that they probably would not. Thus, Youxin Country had essentially fallen into his hands. Delighted, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t bother to hide his feelings and cheerfully said, ¡°I am Che Shidao of the Taiping Dao, and I serve as an elder of my sect. Inside our sect, there is another School Leader, whose cultivation is similar to mine, both of us Human Immortals. Friend Yao, you may take this matter back and report it within your sect, providing all the details.¡± Lu Yuan had previously had a premonition that he was aligned with the word ¡®Taiping¡¯. Acting under this name might attract heavenly favor. Thus, when establishing a facade in the Immortal Realm and setting up the Tao Inheritance, naturally, he also named it Taiping, hoping to receive an extra measure of heavenly favor. As for revealing another Human Immortal avatar, it naturally served to add bargaining chips and enhance his influence on his own side. After all, an Immortal Sect with one Human Immortal versus one with two Human Immortals, regardless of strength or depth, signifies different things. The deterrence it causes Outsiders and the weight the sect carries, between one Human Immortal and two, can even reach a difference of three to four times. It cannot be simply described as one plus one equals two. As expected. Hearing that Taiping Dao actually had two Human Immortals, besides the current Che Shidao here, there was also another School Leader, Immortal. Yao Chaoyun felt a sinking sensation in his heart. He knew if Taiping Dao only had one Human Immortal, the sect might grit its teeth and send a Human Immortal over to forcibly contest the ownership of Youxin Country. But if the opponent had two Human Immortals, the sect would need an equivalent number, or even three or four Human Immortals to intervene. Only then would they have full confidence in reclaiming Youxin Country. Wouldn¡¯t it be more cost-effective to dispatch three or four Human Immortals directly to other sects¡¯ lost territories, which lacked the suppression of Human Immortal power, or where only one Human Immortal was suppressing? Why bother coming to a Youxin Country that clearly had the excessive power of two Human Immortals and clash with Taiping Dao to the death? Once Taiping Dao revealed that they possess the strength of two Human Immortals, the fate of Youxin Country being abandoned was already sealed. ¡°Senior, rest assured, I will certainly convey this message,¡± Yao Chaoyun forced a slight smile, respectfully gave his salutations and said, ¡°Since Senior has expressed his wishes, I shall take my leave and report back to my sect.¡± Lu Yuan, having achieved his goal, was in a pleased mood and waved his hand, ¡°Go on.¡± ¡°Junior takes his leave.¡± Yao Chaoyun bowed and departed, walking toward outside the door. Once out of the city, he released his magical gourd, jumped on it, and ascended into the sky. Turning around, he looked back at City of Yunlan. After months of clearing, some of the remaining civilians outside and inside the city had been gathered. The city gradually regained a population of over a hundred thousand, revitalized by the supplies of grain Lu Yuan had brought from the Nine Provinces using the Qiankun Technique. But looking at this peaceful scene, Yao Chaoyun couldn¡¯t feel any joy, only feeling a great chill coming from over there. ¡°The days of Youxin Country are really about to change¡­¡± With a bitter smile, he directed his magical artifact; the gourd turned into a red light and headed toward Sanhe City. Chapter 1203 - Chapter 1203 Chapter 481 Preparation for Handover ?Chapter 1203: Chapter 481 Preparation for Handover Chapter 1203: Chapter 481 Preparation for Handover Throughout the journey, it took Yao Chaoyun only half a day to travel thousands of miles and return to Sanhe City. Upon entering the city, he immediately sought out his fellow disciple, Zhang Yunlei, to inform him of his mission. ¡°The Taiping Dao of Yunlan City actually has two Immortals?¡± After listening to his fellow disciple carefully recount the details of the mission, Zhang Yunlei couldn¡¯t help but express his astonishment. ¡°Indeed, it¡¯s unexpected, but the elder I met from Taiping Dao, Che Shidao, is certainly a True Immortal. Given his status, and the current circumstances, there¡¯s no need for him to deceive me, so the presence of two Immortals in Taiping Dao is without a doubt accurate.¡± Yao Chaoyun said helplessly. ¡°A sect with two Immortals is not trivial at all. What is the origin of this Taiping Dao, and why have we never heard of it before?¡± Zhang Yunlei frowned. In this Changqing Domain, he was somewhat familiar with all the sects, not to mention those with cultivators capable of the ¡®Five Qi Towards Primordial¡¯ technique. But among these traditions, he had never heard the name Taiping. The emergence of this Taiping Dao, possessing two great Immortals, indeed puzzled him. ¡°Perhaps they came from the Outer Territory.¡± Yao Chaoyun shook his head and offhandedly said, ¡°This Donghua Continent is vast, spanning numerous regions, and Changqing is but one of them. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? We cultivators, upon achieving something, have often traveled extensively. Didn¡¯t we, brother disciples, also travel through several nearby regions? Although Taiping Dao¡¯s involvement in Changqing Domain is quite sudden, there have been similar cases in the past, so it¡¯s not unusual. Perhaps in their original domain, they faced some troubles, thus they wanted to move a lineage here to secure a backup plan. Or they simply wished to expand their influence. Unable to find a suitable opportunity in surrounding regions and seeing Changqing in turmoil, they decided to make their move.¡± Yao Chaoyun held no favorable impression of this Taiping Dao, which suddenly emerged to compete for his territory. His speculations about them were thus somewhat malicious. ¡°Perhaps that really is the case.¡± Zhang Yunlei nodded in agreement, but then sighed sadly, ¡°However, since the other party has already shown their hand, revealing two Immortals, they are clearly determined to secure Youxin Country. With Immortals intervening, the situation in Youxin Country is beyond our control. I must also report back to the sect, allowing the School Leader and the elders to make a decision.¡± Having served as the master of the branch for three hundred years, Zhang Yunlei naturally felt attached to Youxin Country. Although he had long prepared to relinquish control of this territory, his heart still couldn¡¯t avoid feeling bitter when it actually came to it. Fortunately, he understood the bigger picture and quickly suppressed these emotions, then looking at his fellow disciple, he forced a smile and said, ¡°The sect is likely not to directly confront two Immortals. Handing over Youxin Country to Taiping Dao is a foregone conclusion. Fellow disciple, you too must be prepared. Perhaps the next decree from the sect will be to withdraw. You must also instruct the many disciples in the western courtyard to prepare for evacuation. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã? As for the City God Spirits of Youxin Country, over therea€|¡± At this point, Zhang Yunlei hesitated, then continued, ¡°They too can be notified to be mentally prepared.¡± Unlike them, the Immortal Sect cultivators, who could come and go freely and leave Youxin at any time, those City God Spirits, who can only ascend to godhood after death based on the worship of Youxin¡¯s common people, don¡¯t have such freedom. A City God resides in a place, and all his power and responsibilities come from his jurisdiction, the countless common people therein, and the faith represented by their incense offerings. Other nature spirits might need less incense, but are also constrained by the nature they embody and trapped by their own authority, unable to leave. Therefore, while the disciples of the Changqing Immortal Sect can simply leave, these City God Spirits cannot just run away. If they fled, they would lose their divine position, their incense offerings, and their authority, not only would their strength drastically decrease, but they would also transform from deities into wandering, malevolent spirits. A deity ranking above a Human Immortal, after leaving his jurisdiction and losing his divine position, might directly fall to the status of an old ghost at the level of ¡®Gathering Three Qi¡¯ or ¡®Four Qi,¡¯ unable even to maintain the level of ¡®Five Qi Towards Primordial.¡¯ Moreover, without the support of incense offerings, their minds eroded by dark energies, even against their will, they would instinctively become harmful ghosts. Eventually, in a spree of destruction, they would lose their true nature and be destroyed. For this kind of end, many divine spirits would rather die with their duties intact than degrade into spirits. So the Changqing Immortal Sect can evacuate the branch and recall all their disciples with a single decree, but these gods, with their homes and divine positions here, cannot run away. If Taiping Dao indeed comes to control Youxin Country in the future, these divine spirits, under Taiping Dao¡¯s rule, would inevitably have to switch allegiances and honor the new masters. Informing these spirits in advance allows them to be prepared, avoiding unintentional offenses against Taiping Dao, which could bring trouble later on. Or perhaps, taking advantage of the transition period before the official handover, they should acknowledge the new hierarchy early to prepare for the future.¡± Zhang Yunlei had battled alongside the local divine spirits of Youxin Country for three hundred years, forming friendships with many during their joint efforts to slay monsters and exorcise demons. Now, withdrawing himself felt somewhat like betraying his friends and comrades. Therefore, beneath these rules, he also wanted to secure an escape route for these old friends in advance. Chapter 1204 - Chapter 1204 Chapter 481 Handover Preparation_2 ?Chapter 1204: Chapter 481 Handover Preparation_2 Chapter 1204: Chapter 481 Handover Preparation_2 ¡°I am aware, and I will go and explain to them later,¡± Yao Chaoyun nodded without refusal. Like his elder, he had deep friendships with many of the City God Spirits in the country and naturally could not bear to see them face the fate of being purged. The Evergreen Immortal Sect can no longer shelter these Divine Spirits, and has even taken the initiative to abandon them. Since we are already in the wrong, there is no need to ask them to remain loyal to the sect. ¡°However, elder, while it¡¯s easy to inform those City God Spirits, whether or not the Taiping Dao is willing to accept them is another problem,¡± Yao Chaoyun expressed his worries, ¡°The local deities of Youxin Country are mostly consecrated by our Evergreen Immortal Sect, and many of them became gods after our sect disciples died. No matter how loyal they appear, they can¡¯t wash off the mark of being people of the Evergreen sect, making it hard for others to trust them. Moreover, the Divine Tao talismans of these Divine Spirits all originated from the Evergreen Sect. Even if we are willing to transfer these talismans, how can the Taiping Dao trust that we haven¡¯t left any trapdoors? A talisman charter not personally consecrated by oneself is never fully trustworthy. I¡¯m just afraid that while the deities of the country are willing to defect, the other party may not be willing to accept them.¡± If one regards this world as a software system, then each deity is an administrator. Within the permissions granted to them, they possess limitless power. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï What the Immortal Sects do is fill this world with their software systems and appoint their own administrators, which are the consecrated Divine Spirits. Now, within Youxin Country¡¯s domain, the Evergreen Immortal Sect, due to poor management, has had to desperately sell off its assets and retreat. The Divine Spirit system they originally established is being packed up and handed over to the incoming Taiping Dao. But how can one be sure that the system you¡¯re handing over doesn¡¯t have a backdoor, secretly hidden threats? All those administrators you appointed are relatives and followers of the Evergreen Immortal Sect, each one with connections to the old master. Who would dare keep these former vassals from the previous regime? Wouldn¡¯t you fear that they might collude with the old master and rebel when the Evergreen Immortal Sect calls upon them in the future? Putting himself in the shoes of the Taiping Dao, Yao Chaoyun would also not dare to continue employing these Divine Spirits in such crucial positions as the City Gods and Water Gods. That would be like handing over the control of one¡¯s own lifeline to an outsider. Na?¡¥ve, but not that na?¡¥ve. ¡°This is indeed a problem,¡± Reminded by his junior brother, Zhang Yunlei also realized this issue and frowned in deep thought before eventually saying, ¡°Many of these City God Spirits were my fellow disciples who became gods after death. They are our comrades and we cannot abandon them. I will report this matter along with my dispatch to the sect. Currently, under the rule of our sect, there is a lot of unrest in many countries, and many of the local City Gods and Water Gods have died in the successive wars, leaving vacancies. As we retreat, we might as well relocate all the Divine Spirits that are loyal to our Immortal Sect. We will find other places to offer them Divine offices. As for those who do not wish to leave, we¡¯ll let the sect transfer their Spirit Talisman Charters to the Taiping Dao. Whether the Taiping Dao accepts them or not will depend on their fate.¡± Zhang Yunlei was only human, not an Immortal. Doing so much was already the best he could manage. The fate of the remaining Divine Spirits who chose to stay behind was out of his control. ¡°Elder brother has done his best. The other Divine Spirits, once they know of this, will only be grateful and will have no complaints. You don¡¯t need to blame yourself,¡± Yao Chaoyun soothed. ¡°I hope so,¡± Zhang Yunlei shook his head with a wry smile, then said, ¡°The matter is settled then. Junior brother, you inform the disciples and pacify the Divine Spirits. I¡¯ll go and report this matter to the Sect Leader.¡± ¡°Understood,¡± Yao Chaoyun complied. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? As the two brothers reached an agreement and began to take action, News that the Evergreen Immortal Sect was retreating from Youxin Country and a foreign Immortal Sect, the Taiping Dao, was about to take over the country, Spread rapidly like a thunderclap on a clear day, swiftly throughout the entire Youxin Country. Numerous undercurrents surged as they began to stir at this moment. a€| While the outside world of Youxin Country was becoming unstable due to the sudden entrance of a powerful Immortal Sect, The instigator of it all, Lu Yuan, or rather Lu Yuan¡¯s avatar, Che Shidao, was too busy to be concerned with the outside turmoil, as he was occupied with another matter. It was the recruitment of disciples. Yes, the recruitment of disciples. The banner of the Taiping Dao had been raised, and during its initial promotion, it was done exuberantly, proclaiming the sect had two great Immortals and hundreds of disciples, asserting itself as a powerful Immortal Sect. Though from a factual standpoint, these boasts were not false. Lu Yuan did indeed possess two Human Immortal avatars and, with some effort, could even create hundreds of reasonably strong Dao soldiers. With these, one could not say it was a deception or a lie. However, compared to a real Immortal Sect, it was still far too lacking, and it could not even be considered a sect. The entire Taiping Dao was nothing more than a fa?¡ìade pulled together on a whim by an Ascending Human Emperor. But now that the reputation had been established and even Youxin Country was almost entirely bluffed into submission by the fa?¡ìade, Lu Yuan had no choice but to strive to transform the Taiping Dao banner into a substantial framework. At the very least, the basic form of an Immortal Sect had to be erected. It wouldn¡¯t do for an Immortal Sect to consist solely of one¡¯s avatars and Dao soldiers; with the School Leader being me, the elders being me, the disciples also mea€¡±playing the roles of hundreds by myself and performing the entire Immortal Sect, right? Chapter 1205 - Chapter 1205 Chapter 481 Handover Preparation_3 ?Chapter 1205: Chapter 481 Handover Preparation_3 Chapter 1205: Chapter 481 Handover Preparation_3 ¡°That¡¯s too outrageous.¡± Although it wasn¡¯t impossible to do so, and Lu Yuan had indeed already done so. But that was merely a temporary solution. For fear of being exposed later, and because he still cared about his reputation, at this point, he had no choice but to put on a show and recruit some disciples to make an appearance. Currently, as Lu Yuan had just ascended and had no one to utilize, he had no choice but to perform a sect by himself. However, the Immortal Sect of the future and the Taiping Dao of the future couldn¡¯t continue like this. If he truly had to play the role of hundreds of people alone, that would also be exhausting. When the master is busy, the disciples will bear the labor. That is the true manner of opening an Immortal Sect. Did you think conquering Youxin Country meant having people help manage it? Lu Yuan had never thought about being a corporate drone, single-handedly supporting a country. In that case, even if he was an Immortal, he would have to work tirelessly every single day, exhausting himself to death. If so, wouldn¡¯t his cultivation to immortality have been in vain? To be carefree and at ease is to be an Immortal. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? ¡°However, finding some qualified disciples is not that easy,¡± he said. ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Thinking of his avatar and its recent busy endeavors, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel speechless. ¡°This Che Shidao avatar has been busy for so long and has only now barely identified a dozen or so people as passable.¡± The system of Immortal cultivation in this world didn¡¯t have a traditional cultivation novel¡¯s spiritual root system, where only those with spiritual roots could cultivate. Here, in theory, everyone could become an Immortals. Even your time of cultivation was not too restricted. An eighty-year-old man, if taught by someone and with good innate talent, could still cultivate to the Dao and ascend to immortality. But this was only in theory. Because cultivation is constrained by lifespan. An old man, even if he manages to enter the path of cultivation, the remaining lifespan wouldn¡¯t support his breakthrough in cultivation to reach the next realm. Otherwise, the three barriers of the immortal path wouldn¡¯t kill so many cultivators, blocking them outside the path of immortality, watching helplessly as they die from aging. If old men could become immortals, either it was due to a miraculous fortune, reincarnation of a powerful being, or they had a remarkable background providing them with limitless resources. Only by fulfilling one of these three conditions could such a miraculous feat be achieved. Therefore, those fairy-tale like stories are just for inspiration; taking them seriously would be foolish. Normally speaking, cultivation still depends on qualification. This qualification includes bone roots and comprehension, fortunate encounters and Qi luck, special bloodlines, and profound backgrounds. Among these, the first factora€¡±bone roots and comprehensiona€¡±is the most tangible and common. Take Lu Yuan, for example; his body, in terms of comprehension and bone roots, had mediocre qualifications. According to the theories of the Immortal Realm, only those with mediocre qualifications had a slim chance of achieving the Five Qi Towards Primordial. Those with superior qualifications had a chance of becoming immortals. Even this theory was only achievable under the best circumstances. Normally, cultivators with mediocre qualifications could only hope to reach the stage of Gathering Three or Four Qi, ensuring that with diligent cultivation, they might attain minor success on the path of immortality. The less gifted might not even overcome the Gathering Three Qi stage. Only those with superior qualifications could confidently surpass the Gathering Three Qi stage, and with ample resources, aim for the Five Qi Towards Primordial and envisage the Dao of Immortals. As for those with inferior qualifications, Even if these individuals cultivate and have incredibly good luck, they can only achieve the Gathering of Three Qi at most. Such disciples are hardly valued by even slightly larger Immortal Sects; they are generally not included on the sect¡¯s roster. Only those minor Tao inheritances and traditions on the verge of extinction would indiscriminately take them in as disciples. And those who do not even qualify as having inferior qualifications, mere ordinary people, are completely without a chance on the path of cultivation; they need not be mentioned further. ¡°In these past two months, I had my avatar gather all the living people within ten thousand li around the City of Yunlan and brought them back here, eventually amassing over one hundred seventy thousand individuals. These days, I sent Dao soldiers among these survivors to choose, and among the young people under twenty, only thirteen had qualifications that barely reached the median level. There were none with superior qualifications. It¡¯s almost like finding one suitable disciple among ten thousand people. By this calculation, I fear it would take hundreds of millions of people to produce ten thousand disciples and fulfill my desire for the ¡®Myriad Immortals to Attend Court¡¯.¡± Since I am founding an Immortal Sect, as a Human Emperor who has ascended and been the ruler of a realm for over a thousand years, even now in the Immortal Realm, I should aspire for something.¡± Either I do not do it, or I do it well. Lu Yuan considers Taiping Dao as his own supportive arm, preparing to manage and build it just like Great Chu in the Nine Provinces. Hence, his requirements for recruiting disciples are exceptionally high. If not of median qualifications, without the hope of achieving the Gathering of Three Qi, they are not even considered; there¡¯s not the slightest intention of recruitment. A cultivator can only have the Five Elements achieve minor success within them and lay down the foundation of the Immortal Method, officially differentiating from mortals, and enjoy five hundred years of longevity, if they cultivate up to the Gathering of Three Qi. Those who manage to gather only one or two levels of Qi have shallow cultivation and can live for at most three hundred years, which some ordinary martial artists, practicing health-preserving methods and having some fortuitous encounters, could achieve. Thus, the difference between cultivators of these first two stages and mortals is not significant. Among the common folks in the Immortal Realm, those swindlers learning a few magic tricks often belong to these two stages. Whether an Immortal Sect has a tradition or not is also determined by whether it can surpass this threshold of Gathering Three Qi. At Qing Immortal Sect, as far as Lu Yuan knows, they only recruit disciples with median qualifications and above. Even those of median qualifications mostly can only stay in branch locations, without having cultivated to the level of Five Qi Toward Primordial, they do not qualify to go to the main Mountain Gate and be officially included on the sect roster. Only those disciples with superior qualifications, after several years of testing, are officially taken into Qing Immortal Sect. The other party rules over a territory as a Great Immortal Sect, so their requirements are higher; Lu Yuan cannot compete, nor dares to compare. ¡°But if I lower my requirements a bit, it¡¯s not too much to only include those of median qualifications on the sect¡¯s roster, is it?¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s requirements are not high. After all, Taiping Dao overtly has two Immortals presiding over it. Even his Dao soldiers, having demonstrated strength during external missions, all possess cultivation surpassing Gathering Three Qi. By these standards, median qualifications really are the minimum requirement. ¡°Well, having only a hundred seventy thousand people now and being able to select thirteen disciples from them isn¡¯t too bad. Once Youxin Country has been accepted, there will be tens of millions more people waiting for me to choose from. Even if those people are the leftovers from Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s selection, a careful screening should still uncover several hundred hidden gems. With a few hundred disciples, nurturing them for one or two hundred years, continuously recruiting newcomers during that period, should be enough to establish the framework of a major Immortal Sect.¡± As a being of longevity, Lu Yuan maintains a rather broad perspective. For those mortals, even for Immortals, one or two hundred years might seem like a long time. But for him, It¡¯s truly just a blink of an eye. Having endured over a thousand years in the realm of Nine Provinces, facing one or two hundred years in Youxin Country is merely a nap. Chapter 1206 - Chapter 1206 Chapter 482 The Stone Man Eliminates the Monster ?Chapter 1206: Chapter 482: The Stone Man Eliminates the Monster Chapter 1206: Chapter 482: The Stone Man Eliminates the Monster After coming to an agreement with Changqing Branch, and seeing that both sides had initially reached a consensus for a peaceful transition, Lu Yuan began the preliminary preparations for taking over Youxin Country. Recruiting disciples and strengthening the Immortal Sect was only the first step. After selecting a group of disciples, he had his avatar, Che Shidao, personally take action and head to Stone Man Mountain to prepare for the cleansing of demons there. Since Taiping Dao had taken City of Yunlan, all the demons and ghosts in Youxin Country saw the tides turning against them and retreated to Stone Man Mountain, watching the situation unfold from this border. By that time, Lu Yuan already regarded Youxin Country as his own territory to claim and had preliminarily opened up relations with Qing Immortal Sect. He certainly had no more reservations by this point and would not tolerate these demons wreaking havoc on his own land. Therefore, as soon as both sides finished negotiations and had initially stabilized City of Yunlan, he took action. However, despite his swift movements, the noses of those demons were even sharper. Before Changqing Branch sent messengers to City of Yunlan, a group of demons had already sensed that something was amiss. Therefore, even without confirmation of whether there were immortals in City of Yunlan, two of the five great Demon Kings and Ghost Kings of Youxin Countrya€¡±the Spiritual Water King and the Three Yin Ghost Kinga€¡±fled beforehand. Taking a handful of trusted followers, they directly abandoned the hordes of lesser demons and little ghosts and escaped into neighboring Youqing Country, their whereabouts unknown. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï By the time Changqing Branch sent messengers to City of Yunlan, the Sorrowful Ghost King also felt danger, fearing that Changqing Branch might ally with an outside Immortal Sect. Even if the newcomers weren¡¯t immortals, the combined force of the two major Daoist sects was enough to eradicate these demons and ghosts. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Realizing that Youxin Country¡¯s situation was beyond saving, he too fled. He ran to another neighboring country, Youshan Country, again without a trace. By the time Lu Yuan was free to deal with the demons on Stone Man Mountain, there were only two demons left there, the Black Wind King and the Golden Feather King. But the other lesser demons and little ghosts, after their own kings had left, did not follow but instead gathered around the two remaining kings. This was because these ghostly beings, still craving blood, were reluctant to leave the tantalizing world of Youxin Country and the inexhaustible supply of humans and livestock. Therefore, in addition to the two Demon Kings, there were still approximately five thousand demons and ghosts on Stone Man Mountain, still an impressive force. Without eliminating them promptly, letting them entrench themselves, they would sooner or later become a scourge to Youxin Country. Or rather, they were already a scourge at this point. And as for scourges, Lu Yuan naturally intended to root them out completely. ¡­ Stone Man Mountain. Since all the demons of Youxin Country had gathered here, this place had turned into a realm of demons and ghosts. The sky was filled with Yin Wind, the mountains shrouded in dark clouds, and the demonic energy nearly overwhelmed the entire mountain ridge. Others didn¡¯t need to enter the mountain; even from a distance, one could tell this place was a land of great evil, and it shook them to their core. And it was indeed the case. Those thousands of demons didn¡¯t come alone. Along with them were hundreds of thousands of captured human beings they had abducted along the way. Although the eastern part of Youxin Country had been ravaged by these demons for hundreds of years, by this point, there were still many humans remaining. A thorough search could still yield over a million people quite easily. And the remaining humans who had hidden for over a century were now under the tyranny of these demons, captured one after another. Therefore, on Stone Man Mountain, those thousands of demons were not short of blood food. They were even uncertain whether they would be able to remain in Youxin Country, hence casting aside the idea of a steady, moderate consumption. After all, why nurture human livestock if you¡¯re going to be driven out and leave them to benefit someone else? This bad deal was something even demons could calculate. Therefore, in their indulgence of blood food, they did as they pleased, enjoying whatever was most delightful. All previous hesitations were now absent. In just over two months after taking refuge in Stone Man Mountain, of the more than five hundred thousand people and livestock originally captured, only about two hundred thousand remained. Nearly a hundred thousand were consumed each month, a frightfully astonishing rate! For human beings, how could such a place not be a land of great evil? Atop the mountain, a customary banquet was currently in progress. ¡°Fellow beings, drink to your heart¡¯s content, eat with abandon. I¡¯ve ordered the butchering of over a thousand humans and livestock for our feast,¡± said Black Wind King from his throne, looking down at the fiendish demons and ghosts below, speaking boisterously. Since the other three Ghost Kings and Demon Kings had fled, the thousands of their followers left on Stone Man Mountain had become leaderless demons, without a king to follow. This piece of rich territory was naturally eyed by Black Wind King and Golden Feather King, who remained on the mountain and wanted to bring the followers under their own command. As mentioned before, These Demon Kings were nominally kings, but in essence, they were merely at the level of Five Qi Towards Primordial. They were far from the actual level of the Great Demons with Dao Fruit. Their claim to kingship was based on the gathering of followers. With demonic followers, they were kings. Without them, they were just ordinary evil demons. So in addition to their own strength, the number of demons under their command was also an important factor in determining a Demon King¡¯s power. This factor even outweighed their personal strength. Because no matter how strong a Demon King was, he was still only at the level of Five Qi Towards Primordial. But a few thousand lesser demons put together could take on several beings at this level. For every thousand demons under his command, it was as if he had gained one or two subordinates of the same realm, and with an additional three or five thousand, it was as if he had ten subordinates of the same realm by his side. Chapter 1207 - Chapter 1207 Chapter 482 Stone Man Eliminates Monster_2 ?Chapter 1207: Chapter 482: Stone Man Eliminates Monster_2 Chapter 1207: Chapter 482: Stone Man Eliminates Monster_2 This income alone is enough to make many Demon Kings covetous. ¡®Now under my command, there are already over two thousand demons. If I can gather these observing demons, my forces can break through three thousand. With such a grand army, placed in any country in the world, is a force that cannot be ignored. At that time, even if I can no longer stay in Youxin Country, I can lead these troops to another chaotic country and still carve out a new domain. No, with this power, directly sweeping a small country without an Immortal to oversee it and gathering the nation¡¯s destiny is not beyond reach. At that time, with the augmentation of destiny, after cultivating for a few hundred years, even for a Great Demon like me, it wouldn¡¯t be impossible to give it a try.¡¯ While Black Wind King was warmly entertaining these demons, his heart surged with intense passion. For their kind of wild demons, the best and most successful way to become immortal is to seize a country¡¯s destiny to nourish their cultivation. And to seize a country¡¯s destiny, first, one must gather followers. Without the help of other demons, what can you use to conquer a country? And yet he has not become immortal; he is only at the stage of Five Qi Towards Primordial and hasn¡¯t widened the gap from the ordinary demons. Without sufficient strength, there¡¯s no confidence. Therefore, to make demons work for them, these Demon Kings can only offer lucrative benefits and sweet talk them into joining. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï In these days. Black Wind King has been busily visiting here and there, exchanging feelings with the mountain demons, organizing grand banquets for them, ceaselessly day after day. Isn¡¯t it all to make these fellows support him and follow his lead? The same goes for another Demon King, Golden Feather King, who remained in the mountains. However, because of his background, the efficiency with which Golden Feather King can gather a crowd of demons is far less than his. The reason is simple. ?¦Ï???.§ã? The Golden Feather King is a Roc, a bird, a sovereign of the skies. Naturally, he isn¡¯t in the same group as the majority of demons originating from beasts, insects, and other creatures. You see. Those flying birds prey on the beasts and insects on the ground for food. From this perspective, they are not part of the same gourd. Therefore, amongst the mountain demons, the beast and insect type usually side with Black Wind King, who is also a beast. On the flip side, the ghosts, without as many concerns, all sided with Golden Feather King. The reason for this is also simple. Black Wind King is a Tiger Demon, known for commanding Ghosts. For the mountainous Ghosts to side with him would be akin to willingly submitting to enslavement, wouldn¡¯t it? Even if Black Wind King is concerned about his reputation and won¡¯t do such a thing, other ghosts following him would feel uncomfortable at heart and find it hard to join his side. Therefore, after more than two months of contention, approximately two thousand flying birds and ghosts chose to side with Golden Feather King. Meanwhile, nearly three thousand beasts and insects demons sided with Black Wind King. There¡¯s still several hundred neutrals left, currently being fervently contested by the two Demon Kings. ¡®But I shouldn¡¯t stay in Stone Man Mountain for much longer. Changqing Branch and that foreign Immortal Sect have maintained peace until now, they¡¯re most likely not going to fight anymore. When they join hands, neither I nor Golden Feather King will stand a chance. If I continue to stay here, there¡¯s only a dead-end path.¡¯ After a few more days, if those remaining demons in the mountains are still unmoved, I¡¯ll just leave.¡¯ Following a banquet, with the onslaught of numerous beasts and flocks, another hundred or so demons chose to pledge allegiance to Black Wind. However, despite gaining a considerable number of new followers, Black Wind was still not free from substantial worry. The other Demon and Ghost Kings had abandoned their followers early and ran without a trace. Only he and Golden Feather King remained, coveting the followers left behind by the previous Demon Kings, reluctant to leave. There¡¯s certainly a massive temptation at play. But their greatest reliance was still their innate Divine Powers. Golden Feather King was born a Roc and is a naturally dominant creature of the skies, riding on clouds and winds with ease. With a flap of his golden wings, he could instantly flee thousands of miles away; a few more flaps and he¡¯d be tens of thousands of miles away, beyond anyone¡¯s reach. Relying on this Divine Power, even when faced with a Human Immortal, as long as he wasn¡¯t caught off guard and his way wasn¡¯t blocked, Golden Feather King was eighty or ninety percent confident he could escape with his life. Black Wind, however, was born a Tiger Demon, and just by his name, it was clear he was adept at controlling Gale. Clouds follow the dragon, and winds follow the tiger. With a strong wind at his side, Black Wind¡¯s speed of flight was among the best of the demons. Compared with Golden Feather King, he was not far behind. It was precisely because of this confidence that even after other demons and ghosts had fled, they still dared to stay. The reason was their confidence in their own speed of escape. But as time passed, the longer they stayed, the less confident the two demons were. Although they were confident that they could escape from an Immortal, but after all, that would be facing an Immortal. There¡¯s a world of difference between mortals and Immortals, missing a single Dao Fruit means an abyss between them. Nobody knows what means an Immortal has, or whether their confidence will hold true. If they encounter an Immortal who can counter them, by the time they think about escaping, it might already be too late. And these days, Black Wind had an unyielding sense of unease weighed on his mind, a sense of irritation that he couldn¡¯t shake off. As a demon, fundamentally also a demonic cultivator, he naturally had bouts of intuition like a Cultivator. This premonition was undoubtedly a warning that disaster was about to strike. At this critical moment, it was pretty clear what this disaster was. It was the external Immortal Sect from the City of Yunlan. And the fact that even he felt foreboding proved that the strength of Yunlan¡¯s Immortal Sect was extraordinary, and there might be an Immortal among them. ¡°Immortals, ah¡­¡± After arranging for the recently recruited demons, Black Wind returned to his seat and sat down, lost in thought. Chapter 1208 - Chapter 1208 Chapter 482 The Stone Man Eliminates the Monster_3 ?Chapter 1208: Chapter 482: The Stone Man Eliminates the Monster_3 Chapter 1208: Chapter 482: The Stone Man Eliminates the Monster_3 He was a demon that had come to Youxin Country a hundred years ago, already the second batch to arrive. Yet now, after a century of arduous struggle and finally crippling Youxin Country, taking half its territory, there was a hope of conquering the country. But just then, a foreign Immortal Sect appeared and snatched away the fruits of their labor. Imagine the fury and unwillingness in Black Wind¡¯s heart. However, facing an Immortal, no matter how dissatisfied or resentful he was, he could only keep it inside and slink away dejectedly. ¡°After annexing three thousand clans, I shall immediately flee to Xiaye Country and start afresh there, making use of the last bits of my lifespan to revive my former glory and seize the chance to become immortal,¡± Black Wind planned. Xiaye Country, also a minor nation within the Changqing Domain, was separated from Youxin Country by about two countries. Like Youxin, demons ran rampant there, even the Changqing Branch had disappeared, and the influence of Changqing Immortal Sect had completely withdrawn, leaving it a true paradise for demons. And precisely because of that, This piece of ¡®fatty meat¡¯ had many demons drooling, having set their sights on it early on. The competition there, among demons, was particularly fierce. Originally, lowly Demon Kings like Black Wind had no right to contend for it. But with three thousand demon clans, Black Wind would also be considered a Great Demon King among demon kings. Naturally, he would have the right to join the competition. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï And the reason for his haste was that his lifespan was starting to run out. Humans have lifespan limitations, and so do all other ten thousand races and spirits. Even compared to the human race, the lifespan leader of all creatures, other races¡¯ lifespans are even shorter. For example, a tiger, even if it spends its life without illness or pain, can only live up to thirty years at most. Compared to the human lifespan of a hundred years, it is much shorter by many times. Black Wind, a tiger demon, had increased his lifespan with every realm breakthrough after becoming a monster. But this increase also followed certain rules. ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï The Heavenly Path is impartial and operates according to rules without any special exceptions for anyone. Humans multiply their lifespan by one upon reaching the first stage of Gathering Qi; by another multiple upon reaching the second stage. By two multiples for the third stage. By one multiple for the fourth stage. And two multiples for the fifth stage. Therefore, in the entire cultivation process, from the first stage of Gathering Qi to the stage of Five Qi Towards Primordial, there¡¯s only a total addition of seven times the years of one¡¯s age. A human cultivator at the stage of Five Qi Towards Primordial, without consuming life-extending spiritual medicine or practicing special cultivation methods, can live up to a maximum of eight hundred years. This rule applies equally to other races as well. In the process of cultivating to the stage of Five Qi Towards Primordial and breaking through five major realms, you can only add up to seven times your lifespan. So, this tiger demon, based on the maximum lifespan limit of thirty years, would live through five lifespan extensions upon reaching Five Qi Towards Primordial, leading to at most two hundred and forty years of life. This lifespan isn¡¯t even equal to that of a human cultivator at the second stage of Gathering Qi. The innate gaps between species become apparent on the path of cultivation. That¡¯s why for those powerful demons, the titles of a millennia-old demon or ghost are given, Because living for a thousand years is truly remarkable. On the human side, only Immortals can live up to a thousand years. And it¡¯s even less likely for other races. Being able to live for a thousand years, either as a result of achieving Human Dao Fruit or Earth Immortal Dao Fruit, how could this not be powerful? The term millennia-old demon signifies not just longevity but also terrifying power. Of course, The gap in lifespan is compensated by the speed of cultivation. When humans cultivate the Fortune Dao, it shortens their lifespan, but they gain an increase in cultivation speed. On the demon side, or other shorter-lived beings, there is a corresponding boost in cultivation speed. This is the slight compensation given by the Heavenly Path. What you lack in one place, you¡¯ll gain back in another. So Black Wind, this tiger demon, reached the stage of Five Qi Towards Primorial in under a hundred years, which would require human cultivators three to four hundred years of arduous work. But one hundred years to reach the Five Qi stage and another hundred years spent struggling in Youxin Country. Having wasted five-sixths of a two hundred and forty years lifespan, With only forty years left, if he didn¡¯t condense the Dao Fruit and achieve Demon Immortal, then Black Wind would inevitably face demise. How can he accept this? That¡¯s why he took the risk to stay on Stone Man Mountain, hoping to gather more followers and lead these demons to Xiaye Country, attempting that final struggle. Where the Dao resides, only death awaits. ¡°Heh, I didn¡¯t expect there to be demons on Stone Man Mountain that aren¡¯t afraid to die, daring to stay on.¡± Just as Black Wind was hardening his resolve, from above the dark clouds shrouding the mountain, an indifferent voice came. Immediately, a heart-shaking presence swept away the gloomy clouds that had enshrouded the peak for months, and sunlight followed, shining down. ¡°Not good, an immortal from Yunlan City is coming to kill us!¡± Black Wind, deep in thought, was startled by the voice and instantly realized what was happening. Feeling that terrifying presence and the imminent sense of death, it lingered in his heart. Without even having to face them, he knew that the approaching figures were immortals and that he was no match for them. With a long howl, a gust of black wind swept up, carrying the Black Wind King as he flew straight towards the direction of Youqing Country in the distance. Even faster than him, another big demon, the Golden Feather King in the mountains, had taken off in a flash of gold towards Youshan Country the moment the voice sounded. In the face of danger, these two demon kings reacted very swiftly. They didn¡¯t bother at all with the demons they had managed to gather; they just fled. Facing immortals, they had no thought of resistance whatsoever. However, they escaped quickly, but the avatar of Lu Yuan from Che Shidao moved even faster. Instantly after the Golden Feather King turned into a golden beam and fled, the Che Shidao transformed into a golden light as well, assuming the shape of a war chariot and pursued relentlessly. Lu Yuan had built the Emperor¡¯s War Chariot precisely for rapid travel, chasing enemies, and long-distance escapes. Therefore, speed was given special attention. The Avatar of Che Shidao, formed from the Emperor¡¯s War Chariot and among a group of immortals, indeed had some of the top-tier speeds. With the augmentation of a late-stage Human Immortal¡¯s realm, chasing a mere Five Qi Towards Primordial little demon with some speed-based divine powers was naturally as easy as reaching out and grabbing it. The Golden Feather King had only flown a moment when Che Shidao, wielding the Taiping Sword, appeared right in front of him, cutting off his escape route. Then, with a motion of the sword in his hand, he unleashed a slash of sword energy. The Golden Feather King, too late to react, could only watch as he flew straight into the sword light and was impaled by the sword energy. ¡°No!¡± With just one scream, this demon king who had roamed the skies for hundreds of years was slain in midair, his blood spraying into the heavens. After completing this step, Che Shidao returned to Stone Man Mountain. By this time, Black Wind had only just summoned the black winds, not even managing to fly off the mountaintop. Taking off at this moment meant voluntarily exposing his location, running straight into Che Shidao, who was returning. But in Black Wind¡¯s eyes, he had merely been stopped head-on. ¡°Great Immortal, spare my life, this little demon is willing to surrendera€¡±¡± Frightened out of his wits by the immortal suddenly appearing before him, Black Wind immediately cried out for mercy. However, Che Shidao did not even glance at him, and with a slash of his long sword, the sword light fell. Faced with the oppression of a major realm difference and within that major realm, additionally three minor stages of suppression, Black Wind, a mere little demon at the Five Qi Towards Primordial level, had no power to resist. Just like the Golden Feather King, he was instantly vanquished by the sword. Afterward, Che Shidao drew his sword and held it aloft in the sky, with the tip pointing downward from the mountain peak to the mountain center. ¡°Go!¡± Following a command, countless sword energies burst forth from the Taiping Sword, transformed into beams of sword light that showered upon the entire Stone Man Mountain. In a dazzling display of golden radiance, the demons wreaking havoc within the mountain were silently struck down by the sword energy, their lives snuffed out. Against a late-stage Human Immortal specializing in using an immortal sword to deal with those demons who weren¡¯t even at the Five Qi Towards Primordial level, it was indeed like mowing down grass. A sword swung down, and ashes were all that remained. Not only were their lives lost, but even their souls were scattered to the winds. One man, one sword, cleared the demonic hazea€¡±truly, he could be called a sword immortal. Once he had finished, Che Shidao sheathed his sword and then cast his divine sense over the area, frowning slightly at the remaining four to five hundred thousand surviving humans and the tragic scene within the mountain, muttering, ¡°These demons, they really deserved to die!¡± After spitting out those words, he waved his sleeve, descending with several tens of Dao soldiers. He couldn¡¯t help but clean up the aftermath. There were three hundred thousand of the Human Race left here; gathering and resettling them was also a troublesome affair. But now that Taiping Dao was just being established, with the new peace in Youxin Country, everything was waiting to be revitalized, and there was indeed a need for people to build up the infrastructure. ¡°The true self is hiding in Yunlan City living a carefree life, while I have to be here doing the tough work; life is too bitter!¡± With a sigh, Che Shidao also went down to start aiding in the relocation of the people. Chapter 1209 - Chapter 1209 Chapter 483 Changqing Comes to Immortal ?Chapter 1209: Chapter 483 Changqing Comes to Immortal Chapter 1209: Chapter 483 Changqing Comes to Immortal ¡°` Erasing all the demons from Stone Man Mountain took Che Shidao only a few breaths¡¯ time. However, dealing with the aftermath, gathering survivors, and relocating citizens took him nearly half a month; after several back-and-forths, he finally managed to move everyone to the vicinity of City of Yunlan. Once everyone had been moved back to City of Yunlan, the population in and around the city officially surged to over five hundred thousand people. The desolate scene within ten thousand miles nearby was finally contained, and a faint sign of rejuvenation could be noticed. Lu Yuan also took the opportunity to select more than twenty qualified disciples from the newly gathered citizens to join the sect. This brought the number of disciples in Taiping Dao to over forty. A sect flourishing with more than a hundred disciples was within reach. However, after returning, Che Shidao had no time to look after these disciples, as he was soon preoccupied with other matters. Because the Messenger from Qing Immortal Sect had arrived. It is said that Zhang Yunlei, the leader of Youxin Country¡¯s Changqing Branch, reported back to his sect after Taiping Dao made its appearance in Youxin Country and showed intentions of encroaching upon it. The high ranks of Qing Immortal Sect immediately took this very seriously. The reason being quite simple. Zhang Yunlei reported that this unfamiliar Immortal Sect called Taiping Dao, which had suddenly stationed itself in Youxin Country, actually had two Immortals. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã? These were two Immortals we¡¯re talking about! One must know, the entire Qing Immortal Sect only had four Earth Immortals and seventeen Human Immortals in existence. Having two Human Immortals in Taiping Dao was already quite remarkable. At the very least, if Qing Immortal Sect wanted to subdue the other party without sending out more than five Human Immortals or at least one Earth Immortal, it would be impossible. But with the current situation, in the thirty-nine countries of Changqing Domain, outside the thirteen core countries controlled by the sect, the remaining twenty-six were either overrun or clouded with the smoke of war. Since the fall of the Great True Person, Qing Immortal Sect had too many enemies to face. Inside the entire domain, and even beyond it, countless enemies required their surveillance and protection. At this time, for a Taiping Dao that held no great malice and was not a critical threat, they truly lacked the resources to pay much attention. Even to retreat a step, if they expelled Taiping Dao but couldn¡¯t dispatch an Immortal to remain in Youxin Country, this territory would still need to be abandoned later on. Rather than falling into the hands of monsters and demons, it might as well be handed over to a fellow Immortal Sect. At least this would safeguard the tens of millions of mundane humans remaining in the country. However, though Youxin Country could be handed over, whom it was given to had to be discussed thoroughly. Handing it over to an Immortal Sect that was friendly or even neutral to oneself was possible. But handing it over to an enemy that viewed one with enmity and harbored ulterior motives against the Qing Immortal Sect was absolutely unacceptable. If that were the case, it would be better to forsake those mundane humans and let the demons take Youxin Country, which would be slightly better for the sect. After all, those demons only coveted the blood and Qi of Youxin Country, not shaking the rule of Qing Immortal Sect in the Changqing Domain, and would not pose a threat to the sect¡¯s foundation. This was very important to an Immortal Sect. Therefore, determining the true identity of this foreign Taiping Dao, their attitude, and their actual strength was crucial. For this reason, for the handover, Qing Immortal Sect specifically dispatched a Human Immortal from within the sect to Youxin Country to take charge of this matter. And after this Human Immortal arrived in Youxin Country, he made no delays and directly headed for City of Yunlan. He coincidentally arrived when Che Shidao had finished eliminating the demons from Stone Man Mountain and was bringing back the last batch of citizens to the city. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï After announcing his intentions, he was quickly invited into the city. ¡°I am Yang Jihua of humble pedigree, I have the honor of meeting you, fellow Daoist.¡± The Human Immortal from Qing Immortal Sect appeared very young, resembling a youth in his early twenties, with a handsome face and an ethereal demeanor that immediately conveyed that he was a True Immortal of the Dao. However, at the level of Immortals, physical appearances are merely illusions. All those who have attained immortality, regardless of whether they are human, demon, ghost, or devil, do not judge by appearance but by their Dao Fruit, scrutinizing to what extent they have pursued the Immortal Method. That is the most important matter. After all, in the Immortal Cultivation World, it is only one¡¯s Cultivation level that forms the foundation of everything. If you can¡¯t Breakthrough Realms, you cannot wield greater strength, nor can you live longer. When time is up, no matter how resplendent and lively one is, eventually, they will turn to dust, with their Dao extinguishing in darkness. Therefore, upon meeting, Yang Jihua carefully scrutinized the sect elder from Taiping Dao, observing his countenance. And with this examination, he couldn¡¯t help but be shocked. Previously, when Yao Chaoyun visited Che Shidao, he could not discern the mysteries of a true Immortal as he was merely at the Five Qi Towards Primordial stage and had not yet become an Immortal. He only made a rough judgment that the other was indeed a True Immortal, and then he returned to report to his sect. When Qing Immortal Sect received the report and started assessing Taiping Dao¡¯s strength, they only considered the sect as a typical Immortal Sect. What¡¯s the status of a typical Immortal Sect? Even with a few Human Immortals and flourishing Qi, at most, the School Leader could have a deep cultivation, perhaps reaching the middle or late stages of Human Immortal level. And other Immortals were usually just at the early stage of Human Immortal. After all, the path of Cultivation towards becoming immortal is immensely difficult. For an average Cultivator, just becoming immortal exhausts their entire life¡¯s foundation. If they wish to continue onwards, without any miraculous opportunity or the support of an entire Immortal Sect, relying solely on one¡¯s own power makes it incredibly difficult to gather sufficient resources to continue Cultivation. In the absence of external aid, with only solitary and arduous Cultivation, one might spend a thousand years to breakthrough to the middle stage of Human Immortal, and that¡¯s if they are lucky. For most Human Immortals, their life¡¯s journey often ends just wandering in the middle stages of humanity, and they might not even break through to the middle stage, dying early in the initial stages of Human Immortal with unresolved aspirations. ¡°` Chapter 1210 - Chapter 1210 Chapter 483 Changqing Comes to Immortal_2 ?Chapter 1210: Chapter 483 Changqing Comes to Immortal_2 Chapter 1210: Chapter 483 Changqing Comes to Immortal_2 Thus, to ensure the strength of the high ranks within the sect, a sect can often only select one disciple for focused training. Once this disciple reached the level of a Human Immortal, the sect would have a high-level power in place, and once this objective was achieved, they would withdraw resources and let the Immortal find their own opportunities. The sect would then turn its attention to selecting another Immortal candidate and start training the second Immortal to ensure a continuous line of Immortals within the sect, flourishing indefinitely. There was a benefit to this approach. Generally, a Human Immortal only has a lifespan of three thousand years. By the time they become Immortals, most are already seven to eight hundred years old, and the time they have left to live is merely two to two thousand three hundred years. Thus, taking into account a training cycle of eight hundred years for fostering a Human Immortal. After becoming an Immortal, a Human Immortal can at most train three generations, giving them three chances to make mistakes. However, for a Cultivator to become an Immortal, the difficulty is immense. Their innate comprehension, accumulated foundation, various external calamities encountered along the path of cultivation, and even the Thunder Tribulation when becoming an Immortal could easily destroy those seeking Immortality. To successfully cultivate an Immortal on the first try, using all the resources of the sect, the chances of success are only twenty to thirty percent. Only by attempting two or three more times is there a higher chance to successfully cultivate an Immortal. Even three chances to correct mistakes do not entirely guarantee that there will definitely be an Immortal among the descendants. This happened after the fall of the True Person of the previous generation in Youxin Country. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Zhang Yunlei, Yao Chaoyun, and others governed this country for three hundred years, enjoying the Qi Luck of the country for three hundred years, yet they too failed to become Immortals. This was the case even for disciples of the Great Immortal Sect. Not to mention the inheritors of smaller Immortal Sects. After cultivating an Immortal, letting them fend for themselves seems inhumane and shortsighted. In reality, this is the survival strategy of those smaller Immortal Sects. Because most small Immortal Sects typically only occupy the Qi Luck of one country, at most two or three countries is the limit. Relying on the support of one, or at most two or three countries, to cultivate an Earth Immortal is not impossible, but it is incredibly slim. Looking back through history, out of a hundred Human Immortals, maybe only one or two could succeed in becoming Earth Immortals. Even in the Nine Provinces during the ancient times, those who became Earth Immortals were either the Three Emperors who dominated the Central State and commanded the respect of the entire world, the Human Emperors who occupied the vast north and south domains and whose influence extended into several adjacent states, or were Immortal Sects that had a heritage spanning tens of thousands of years, controlling numerous Cave Worlds and possessing profound foundations. From above, it can be seen that in the Nine Provinces during the ancient times, to nurture an Earth Immortal, one would need control over five or six states along with several Great Domains, exhausting almost half of the resources of the realm to stand a chance at succeeding. But even so, over seventy thousand years in the ancient era, the renowned Earth Immortals, totalling no more than ten. Included among them were the Three Emperors and the Human Emperors who exploited loopholes using the Way of Control Pneuma to achieve Earth Immortality. This demonstrates the difficulty. The realm of Earth Immortals is vast; this side of the Changqing Domain roughly covers one to two hundred thousand li, just about equivalent to two or three provinces of the Nine Provinces. If one also considers those Great Domains, the resources for becoming an Immortal in the Nine Provinces are just about equal to the minimum of three countries¡¯ worth of resources needed in Immortal Realm to support the cultivation of an Earth Immortal. In conclusion, cultivation requires resources. The birth of an Immortal also needs a foundation; it cannot occur out of thin air. Relying on the power of one or two to three countries to nurture a supreme Earth Immortal. The chances are too slim. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï So slim, it¡¯s almost impossible to achieve. And once you lose that gamble, with sect members failing to break through to Earth Immortal before their lifespan runs out. After your own demise, the sect would no longer have Immortals; at the very least, the Tao inheritance would fade, losing the Qi Luck of a country, with no chance of rising again. At worst, they might be directly eradicated, their paths completely destroyed. The cost is too great, and very few Immortal Sects dare to take that gamble. Passing down orderly, ensuring there are Immortals in every generation, hoping that future generations might encounter a heavenly change and seize a defiant opportunity, this is what most Immortal Sects choose to do. This is indeed the common choice made by most sects that only occupy a small country and have the Qi Luck of only one country. Thus, according to this philosophy, a typical Immortal Sect, accounting only for one country¡¯s influence, can at most have two Human Immortals. And these two Human Immortals, generally, are only in the early stages, with at most one elder having outstanding talent able to cultivate to the mid-level, but this is the limit. But what was he seeing now? ¡®The aura of this person, he discerns, is actually at the late-stage Human Immortal level!¡¯ When Yang Jihua saw Che Shidao¡¯s aura, he was frightened. The late-stage Human Immortal; this was not something any random Immortal Sect could cultivate. In most smaller Immortal Sects, where they only have early-stage and at most mid-level Human Immortals, suddenly a late-stage Human Immortal appears. This was truly too prominent, attracting attention. What was more alarming was, according to reports, this Che Shidao was merely an elder of Taiping Dao. Above Taiping Dao, there was still a School Leader. Traditionally, the cultivation level of the School Leaders of various Immortal Sects is often the strongest. Thus for Taiping Dao, that School Leader, even if not more advanced than Che Shidao, must be at least at the same level. One sect with two late-stage Human Immortals. ¡®Such an aura, is certainly not comparable to ordinary Immortal Sects, and with even minor successes, they could produce a Wanlongevity Immortal, ah!¡¯ Thinking of this, Yang Jihua was apprehensive and immensely wary. Wanlongevity Immortal; that was a title exclusive to Earth Immortals. Earth Immortals have a lifespan reaching ten thousand years, truly achieving eternal youth and longevity, far surpassing Human Immortals by far. Currently, Changqing Domain was experiencing frequent disturbances; their Qing Immortal Sect was already stressed dealing with rebels everywhere. Chapter 1211 - Chapter 1211 Chapter 483 Changqing Comes to Immortal_3 ?Chapter 1211: Chapter 483 Changqing Comes to Immortal_3 Chapter 1211: Chapter 483 Changqing Comes to Immortal_3 ¡°` At this moment, another Earth Immortal Sect emerging would undoubtedly become a major concern for the sect. For the Qing Immortal Sect, this is surely an undesirable development. Yang Jihua subconsciously thought about eliminating this hidden danger for the sake of his sect. Yet, as this thought arose, he immediately remembered that he was merely at the beginning stage of being a Human Immortal; his cultivation was far less than that of Che Shidao. Since Taiping Dao even had two late-stage Human Immortals, it meant that the previous assessment of their strength needed to be recalculated. Dealing with two early-stage Human Immortals, and dealing with two late-stage Human Immortals, would require a significant difference in the force deployed. ¡®Without Elder Earth Flower intervening or several other late-stage Earth Immortal senior brothers leading the effort, it would be impossible to eradicate Taiping Dao. But at this time, where could one find the manpower to spare? For this transfer, the sect begrudgingly dispatched me, a Human Immortal, which is only possible for a brief period. Later on, I must return to guard elsewhere and cannot linger long in Youxin Country. Moreover, Taiping Dao only sent one representative to Youxin Country; the location of the other School Leader remains unknown. Even if the sect does act, we could only capture Che Shidao. The other Taiping School Leader would slip through. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï If it¡¯s done, we would deeply offend a late-stage Human Immortal and the Immortal Sect behind him. If we cannot fully remove the threat, then there is no action to take. This Taiping Dao will most likely have to be let go.¡¯ Yang Jihua felt bitter in his heart. To watch a threat emerge and yet be powerless is extremely disheartening. What¡¯s more distressing is that such incidents have happened all too many times throughout the Changqing Domain. The Taiping Dao in front of him is just one among many such cases. Even when considering the degree of threat and the contradictions with the sect, Taiping Dao wouldn¡¯t even rank in the top five; it is merely mid-tier at best. For matters of urgency, this would be considered less pressing. ¡°I, Che Shidao, pay my respects to Daoist Yang.¡± While Yang Jihua was sizing up Che Shidao and feeling conflicted, Che Shidao, too, withdrew his assessing gaze. Although slightly surprised that Qing Immortal Sect had sent an Immortal for the negotiation of the handover, He thought of the latter¡¯s extensive operations with several Earth Immortals and over a dozen Human Immortals; sending one Immortal was not remarkable. After all, relinquishing a country is a matter of great profit, enough to warrant the movement of an Immortal. Moreover, a mere early-stage Human Immortal hardly caught his attention, so he didn¡¯t take it too seriously. What concerned Che Shidao more was the ownership of Youxin Country. After exchanging greetings, he went straight to the point, ¡°Daoist friend, has the Qing Immortal Sect come to a decision regarding Youxin Country?¡± Yang Jihua nodded slightly, ¡°Our sect received the message from the lord of the Youxin branch mansion and learned of your intentions; there is indeed room for negotiation. I am specifically dispatched here to handle this matter.¡± Che Shidao¡¯s expression showed understanding, ¡°May I know what the intentions of your sect are?¡± Yang Jihua said, ¡°What Daoist friend mentioned earlier does make sense. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï With demons causing chaos in Youxin Country, our Qing Immortal Sect governs too vast a territory and has too many places to tend to, making it hard to reach this place and invest many forces to stand guard. This is indeed problematic. Previously, we had considered giving up the country, but we could not bear the thought of delivering its billions of mortals into the hands of demons, and hence we have not let go. Now that someone has come forward to take over the responsibility, it actually relieves our sect of the burden.¡± He first rationalized the situation, easing the atmosphere slightly, before changing the topic, ¡°However, while I can give up Youxin Country, the successor can not become a hidden danger to our Immortal Sect, an enemy in the future. Otherwise, wouldn¡¯t that be akin to aiding the enemy? If our sect were to hand over Youxin Country to your door, can Taiping Dao guarantee not to be an enemy of Qing Immortal Sect in the future?¡± Yang Jihua¡¯s gaze was sharp as he stared at Che Shidao, seeking an answer from his eyes. Since Taiping Dao had the potential to become a force that might affect the balance of power in Changqing Domain in the future, He knew that now was the time to minimize its impact as much as possible. As the other party was seeking a favor, now was the perfect moment to use Youxin Country as a bargaining chip for favorable conditions, Such as swearing an oath on the Great Tao as a binding promise. ¡°Our Taiping Dao has migrated from the Outer Territory, has no past grudges with Qing Immortal Sect, and of course does not wish to be enemies. As for future matters, times change and so does the world; it¡¯s uncertain whether I will still be alive after a thousand years, so how can I guarantee too much? Indeed, it would be excessive to use the power of the sect to bind us with an oath of the Great Tao. A single country, which your sect can¡¯t even defend, isn¡¯t worth such a commitment from our sect.¡± Che Shidao shook his head, refusing to fulfill Yang Jihua¡¯s wish to make any sworn promises. As he said, A territory they couldn¡¯t hold onto didn¡¯t warrant him making a significant pledge with an oath of the Great Tao. Right now, I¡¯m negotiating amiably with your Qing Immortal Sect to avoid conflict and offer you respect. If you won¡¯t accept this gesture, Then later on, it¡¯ll be Taiping Dao taking action, just like other Immortal Sects and demons in the Changqing Domain, to forcefully claim Youxin Country. If I forcefully take it, what can you do? Today¡¯s Qing Immortal Sect is no longer as it was ten thousand years ago when the Great True Person was present. All this vast territory, an entire domain, If you, the descendants, haven¡¯t got the strength to hold it, don¡¯t blame others for taking it. While the various Immortal Sects uphold cultivation and character, and all Immortal Dao cultivators have commendable moral cultivation, That doesn¡¯t mean that the cruelties of the Immortal Cultivation World have vanished. It only means that when interests aren¡¯t threatened, superficial harmony can be maintained. But now, the ownership of Youxin Country calls into question the fundamental interests of two Immortal Sects, In such circumstances, naturally, each will use their strategies, showing their true capabilities. If Qing Immortal Sect lacks the strength to dominate a domain, other powers, like Taiping Dao, Will naturally pounce to take a bite of the territory you can¡¯t digest. If virtue does not match one¡¯s position, misfortune is sure to follow. That is the case right now. ¡°` Chapter 1212 - Chapter 1212 Chapter 484 The Secret of the Divine Method ?Chapter 1212: Chapter 484: The Secret of the Divine Method Chapter 1212: Chapter 484: The Secret of the Divine Method ¡°Surely, Friend Che, you can¡¯t expect to take possession of Youxin Country without giving anything in return.¡± Upon hearing the implied sarcasm and threat in Che Shidao¡¯s words, Yang Jihua¡¯s anger rose, and his expression grew colder, ¡°There are dozens of Immortals within our Qing Immortal Sect. Should we truly come to blows, your sect might not be able to bear it¡­¡± After contemplating for a moment upon hearing this, Che Shidao finally said, ¡°At most, I can represent our sect and promise that for a thousand years, we will not be enemies with Qing Immortal Sect.¡± In terms of a Human Immortal¡¯s lifespan, a millennium is already one-third of a lifetime. And to outsiders, the Che Shidao standing before them was a late-stage Human Immortal. Reaching this realm certainly means that his lifespan is already considerable, and he would not be that young anymore. His assurance of non-hostility for a thousand years equates to a promise that before he dies, his generation within Taiping Dao would not trouble Qing Immortal Sect. As for the generations that follow, their children and grandchildren will have their own fortunes. Once a person dies, there isn¡¯t much they can control anymore. Therefore, this promise actually holds great sincerity. Hence, upon hearing this promise, Yang Jihua¡¯s expression eased slightly, but he still asked, ¡°Friend Che is but an elder of your sect; can you really decide and promise on behalf of the entire sect?¡± Such matters of promising on behalf of a sect aren¡¯t very convincing unless personally assured by the School Leader himself. ¡°If Friend does not trust me, I can have Head Brother talk with you personally.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? In the face of doubt, he simply waved his hand, and a Jade Symbol flew from his grasp. Following a flash of light, a Transmission Shadow shot from the Jade Symbol, revealing a Daoist figure. It was another avatar of Lu Yuan, the same one manifested in Yi Dancheng with the robes of the Heavenly Son. Within Immortal Sects, naturally, there exists the art of Communication over thousands of miles. Even across a Great Domain, one can manifest images through magic and communicate in real-time. This was not a rare feat. Thus, upon seeing this maneuver, Yang Jihua was not surprised. However, looking closely, he saw that the Daoist Transmission Shadow was garbed in Taiping Dao attire, similar to Che Shidao¡¯s. And the aura emanating from the shadow indicated without a doubt the fluctuations of magic power typical of a late-stage Human Immortal. Che Shidao had not deceived hima€¡±Taiping Dao indeed had two Immortals, and their School Leader was also a late-stage Human Immortal. This Immortal Sect, which seemed to appear out of nowhere, was truly on the rise, blessed with Qi Luck, and bound for great prosperity. As Yang Jihua thought this to himself, Che Shidao in front of him had already explained the situation to Yi Dancheng. Then, the current School Leader of Taiping Dao nodded slightly toward Yang Jihua and with a cupped-fist salute said, ¡°I, Yi Dancheng, currently lead Taiping Dao. The assurance previously given to Friend by Che Shidao can indeed be honored by our sect. As long as Qing Immortal Sect agrees to cede Youxin Country, then for a thousand years, my Taiping Dao will definitely not become an enemy of your sect. If we violate this oath, may the heavens and humans forsake us!¡± Yi Dancheng, as the School Leader of Taiping Dao, made a sworn promise. A thousand years is nothing more than a trifle. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 Yi Dancheng and Che Shidao are both avatars created by Lu Yuan, merely tools made using the External Tool Dao Fruit. The real mastermind behind all this is none other than Lu Yuan himself. Even if after a thousand years, the two avatar Dao Fruits haven¡¯t managed to break through and become Earth Immortals with extended lifespans, then worst case scenario, they will simply cultivate a new front, replace the avatar bodies with fresh materials, and emerge anew with different facades a€¡± as though made newly from the oven. External Tool Dao Fruits also have a lifespan of use. According to the rules of Heavenly Path, they become a unique kind of Human Dao Fruit, likewise with a lifespan of three thousand years. And the calculation of lifespan begins from the day of becoming immortal. This means, both Human Immortal avatars possess lifespans of three thousand years. And the Earth Immortal avatar, even more so, lives for ten thousand years. Safely enduring a thousand years is truly inconsequential. Not to mention, Lu Yuan himself did not plan to create much turmoil; he simply wanted to claim some territory to develop properly. The terms proposed by Qing Immortal Sect aligned perfectly with his intentions. As for how to deal with Qing Immortal Sect after a thousand years once the promise has passed, that will depend on the results of his development. Who knows what will happen in a millennium? Seeing this, Yang Jihua finally eased his worried heart, and with a smile, he replied, ¡°Since School Leader Yi has made such a promise, I too can represent Qing Immortal Sect and agree to gift Youxin Country to your sect. We can proceed with the handover of the territory shortly.¡± As per the promise, a thousand years later, either the present School Leader of Taiping Dao and Che Shidao will have met their demise, turned to dust, and if so, a promise made by the deceased obviously cannot be upheld, or they will have become Earth Immortals, extending their lifespans to ten thousand years. And from the standpoint of an Earth Immortal, a mere country cannot match one¡¯s status. By then, it would be natural for Taiping Dao to want to acquire more territory, and it would be time for the sect to engage in a new round of negotiations with them. This no longer pertains to Yang Jihua, who is still only a Human Immortal. It would be up to the several Earth Immortal Elders within the sect to negotiate. Hearing this, Yi Dancheng nodded, ¡°As such, Friend may discuss the specific details with my disciple. The Transmission Shadow consumes a great deal of magic power, and I must not linger. Please understand.¡± With that, he cut off the Transmission Shadow. With Yi Dancheng gone, only the two of them remained. Yang Jihua turned to Che Shidao and brought out a luminous Jade Scroll, passing it over and saying, ¡°Friend Che, these are the Talisman Charters for the City Gods, Local Deities, Mountain Gods, Water Earls, and other Divine Spirits of Youxin Country. The Divine Spirits within the country, save for those transformed by disciples from our sect who will withdraw with us, are all detailed within this document. There are a total of three hundred seventy-five divine spirits listed on these Talisman Charters, please review and count them.¡± Having reached an agreement with Taiping Dao and secured their promise to ensure that the sect¡¯s domain remains peaceful for at least a millennium, Chapter 1213 - Chapter 1213 Chapter 484 The Secret of the Divine Method_2 ?Chapter 1213: Chapter 484: The Secret of the Divine Method_2 Chapter 1213: Chapter 484: The Secret of the Divine Method_2 The most fundamental goal had been achieved, and Yang Jihua didn¡¯t create any more difficulties; he began the handover work for Youxin Country very decisively. This was his purpose for coming here after all. To inspect Taiping Dao. To give up Youxin Country, to lessen the burden on his sect. To lead his disciples in retreat, returning to the sect. ?¦Ï???.§ã? Three tasksa€¡±the first, to inspect Taiping Dao, having seen Che Shidao and Yi Dancheng, he no longer had any doubts about the strength of this foreign Immortal Sect. Two late-stage Human Immortals, nearly half the heritage of an Earth Immortal Sect. If not necessary, they must absolutely not be provoked lightly. On this point, Yang Jihua had already decided that upon his return to the sect, he would report personally to the School Leader Uncle and several Elder Taishangs, to ensure the sect recognized Taiping Dao¡¯s strength and potential. This was no ordinary Human Immortal Sect. However, that was a matter for after the return. What needed to be done now was to complete the handover, to cut off Youxin Country, this festering sore, and give it away. Indeed, in the eyes of Changqing Immortal Sect, a territory like Youxin Country, which no longer had Immortals to garrison and couldn¡¯t maintain stable rule, was a festering sore. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? It did nothing but ooze pus, causing the sect to bleed continually here, with no other benefit at all. They had considered trying to heal and recover it, such as three hundred years ago, after the garrison Immortal of Youxin Country fell, when disciples like Zhang Yunlei from the Youxin Sub-court requested to stay within the country and fend off demons, and the sect agreed. The original intention was to see if among these Sub-court disciples, there were any who could use the opportunity from the fall of the Immortal and the free destiny of Youxin Country, to cultivate into Immortals. If someone could become an Immortal, then the current crisis in Youxin Country would naturally not matter much. Beneath an Immortal, unless another great demon or Ghost Emperor acted, no matter how numerous, those demons, ghosts, and monsters could not stir up any trouble. And their Changqing Immortal Sect could compensate for the loss of one Immortal by gaining another one back. This was an ideal situation for Youxin Country, for the Sub-court disciples, and for the sect as a whole. But the final outcome was clearly disappointing. Three hundred years had passed, the disciples of the Youxin Sub-court, despite enjoying the destiny of a country, still had no one who managed to become an Immortal. Zhang Yunlei and the rest proved to be of no merit. Now, this vast country had to be handed over to others. The sect¡¯s assets for someone to become an Immortal had just diminished by another portion. Alas! ¡®How could my Changqing Immortal Sect, which once dominated a region, have fallen to such a state?¡¯ Thinking of the various territories the sect had been continuously giving up over the years, Yang Jihua¡¯s heart ached. Watching the sect decline step by step was truly torturous for these loyal disciples. While Yang Jihua was grieving over the declining fate of the sect, Che Shidao had also received the Divine Method Talisman Charters, and then began to evaluate this Divine Method treasure. Due to the lack of legacies in the Nine Provinces regarding the Divine Method system of the Immortal Realm, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t know much about it either. After reaching the Immortal Realm, having understood the mysteries of destiny, he wanted to occupy a country and use that destiny to become Immortal. Hence, he developed a strong interest in the Divine Spirits that assisted Immortal Sects in organizing and consolidating destiny. However, Lu Yuan had only just arrived in the Immortal Realm, and at present, he had merely established a shaky foothold within the borders of Youxin Country. As for the situation outside Youxin Country, he had only learned a little through the soul-searching of some demons, which wasn¡¯t much of an insight. After all, those demons, even if they were Demon Kings at the stage of Five Qi Towards Primordial, were essentially just a Ragtag Army. Not being Immortals, nor coming from great clans, with no substantial background, how much could they possibly know of the hidden secrets of the Immortal Realm? They were just minor, wild demons. Therefore, even if Lu Yuan wanted to acquire knowledge of the Divine Method and learn how to confer Divine Spirits, he didn¡¯t know where to begin. To inquire from other Immortal Sects? That was indeed one way to go. But with no relations or reasons, why would others give you such secret methods? Even if they did give them, would you dare to use them? Aren¡¯t you afraid of hidden traps? Moreover, seeking help didn¡¯t align with the image of Taiping Dao that Lu Yuan had crafted. For an Immortal Sect, so powerful with two late-stage Human Immortals, to lack even a simple method for conferring gods was such an obvious flaw, completely irrational, and would invite suspicion. So, considering all of the above, in the early days when everything was just starting, Lu Yuan really didn¡¯t have a good way to acquire the method of conferring gods. He originally planned to settle Youxin Country first, and then slowly search and explore the Divine Method. With his own strength and almost endless lifespan, even if he couldn¡¯t find a secret method, he could study it himself, taking a few hundred or a thousand years to finally work it out. ¡°However, I didn¡¯t expect that before I even started to act, others would deliver it to my doorstep.¡± Making use of the connection with his Avatar, hiding somewhere in the city, having just instructed another Avatar to pose as Taiping¡¯s School Leader, Lu Yuan, looking at the Divine Method Talisman Charters in Che Shidao¡¯s hands, couldn¡¯t help but reveal excitement. His divine consciousness probed into it, and he immediately saw hundreds of different-sized, star-like rune spheres. Just by seeing them, information began to automatically transmit from within the Charters. ¡°So this is the mystery of the Divine Method, these rune spheres are the Symbols of the Great Tao depicted by Immortals after observing the trajectories of Heaven and Earth. Based on these runes that describe the principles of Heaven and Earth, one can extract the essence of a particular land or city, a particular mountain or water as a core, and then ask for Heavenly Path¡¯s approval to construct a Divine Position. With this Divine Position, one can then confer Divine Spirits of Heaven and Earth, enabling them to become divine.¡± Chapter 1214 - Chapter 1214 Chapter 484 The Secret of the Divine Method_3 ?Chapter 1214: Chapter 484: The Secret of the Divine Method_3 Chapter 1214: Chapter 484: The Secret of the Divine Method_3 At its core, the power of Divine Spirits stems from Heaven and Earth. Once recognized by the Heavenly Path and granted a sliver of authority, they possess extraordinary power within their domain, Their duty is still to assist the Heavenly Path and to manage Heaven and Earth. During this management process, they naturally use their authority to gather the scattered destiny of Heaven and Earth within their domain. By doing so, collecting level by level, amassing territory by territory, and gradually compiling, the destiny of an entire nation can be grasped. This is the reason Immortal Sects confer Divine Positions on Divine Spirits. They aim to use the authority these beings hold over Heaven and Earth to collect the scattered destiny. As for the Talisman Charters of Divine Method, they contain a bit of the true spirit of the Divine Spirits conferred with and the core of the Divine Position, controlling the lifeline of all conferred Divine Spirits. If any Divine Spirit dares to rebel, the Immortal Sect need only deploy the Talisman Charters of Divine Method, punish their True Spirit, and strip them of their Divine Position, easily toppling a Divine Spirit, capturing or slaying them. With the Talisman Charters in hand, as long as the Divine Spirits are from the conferred charter, their life, death, glory, and disgrace are all controlled by others, with no possibility of resistance. With such a countermeasure in place, it¡¯s no wonder that among the Divine Method, there are many gods greater than Immortals. Yet before the Immortal Sects, they still regard themselves as servants. It is not that they devalue themselves, but a fact that they truly are servants.¡± Lu Yuan, perusing the information within the charter, couldn¡¯t help but be moved. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Divine Method can indeed be mastered quickly; all you need is a powerful Divine Position and sufficient incense worship, and one can quite easily become immortal within a hundred years. Faring much better than the countless Cultivators who have to go through harsh trials and still may not succeed in becoming immortal. But success rests on the Divine Position, as does downfall. The precondition for such rapid progression is to first serve as a dog to the Immortal Sects, from then on having a master above you, never to be free again. The better or worse choice here simply depends on the individual. If you crave power and lifespan, then this path is naturally an option. If you wish to be free and unfettered, then you must cultivate slowly by yourself, betting on that slim chance of becoming immortal. Either way, Lu Yuan would not choose the Divine Method. Even knowing the mysteries of the Divine Method, he could entirely create a powerful Divine Position for himself, directly ascending in one leap to become a great god equal to an Earth Immortal. And even if the Divine Position is self-created, free of the constraints of the Immortal Sect, he would not wish to take this path. Because the Immortal Sect may be gone, but the Heavenly Path remains. The Divine Position is both power and responsibility. If you fail to fulfill the tasks of the Heavenly Path and do not perform your duties, you will be subject to heavenly condemnation and punishment. Offending the Qing Immortal Sect, Lu Yuan could simply leave and they would not be able to do anything about it. But if you offend the Heavenly Path, vast as the Immortal Realm is, there would be nowhere to escape. This point alone is enough to deter people. ¡°However, I won¡¯t walk the Divine Method, but cultivating a group of Divine Spirits to work for me still needs to be arranged. A bunch of subordinates who absolutely cannot betray me, this is truly wonderful for me,¡± Lu Yuan had been an emperor for over a thousand years. For an emperor, what kind of subjects are the best? Obviously, those who cannot betray you, whose life and death you can control, are the best. Compared to loyalty and competence, these take no significance. The human heart is unpredictable; whether one is loyal or treacherous, who knows what¡¯s real or false. As for ability. In the Divine Method, where capabilities are conferred, once you have a Divine Position, you have a realm. Having the incense worship provides you with magic power. They don¡¯t need any particular talents; the Divine Position and the incense support will provide the basic Divine Powers and magic power of that realm. There, you have ability. ¡°Rapid advancement, inability to betray, possessing basic strength; ignoring everything else, Divine Method is no doubt an excellent path, the best source for subordinates. The only downside is that Divine Spirits can only ensure their full strength within their own jurisdiction. Leaving their territory is like removing themselves from authority; the power of the Heavenly Path diminishes. The further they are from their jurisdiction, the greater their strength declines, and they become incapable of long-distance expeditions. This is also why Youxin Country, despite its numerous Divine Spirits whose overall strength is far superior to that of monsters, was still being pushed back by the demons at the Changqing Branch. Since Divine Spirits cannot leave their territories, their vast numbers cannot converge in one place to form a collective force. Scattered throughout Youxin Country, they are naturally defeated one by one. The eventual situation of half the country being overrun is hence unsurprising. Perhaps this is also one of the reasons why Divine Method cannot resist the Immortal Sects.¡± Considering how vast and longstanding the Immortal Realm is, Lu Yuan refuses to believe that through the years, there have been no Cultivators who created their own Divine Positions and shifted from Immortal Method to Divine Method. With such tempting power to ascend swiftly, how could no one be moved? But in the current Immortal Realm, Divine Method still subservient to Immortal Method must have its reasons. The inability of Divine Spirits to leave their territory is perhaps the greatest reason. Creating your own Divine Position might grant you rapid ascension, But once a god, you also enter a cage of your own making, unable to remove yourself. Trapped in one place, alone and weak, While other Immortal Sect Cultivators can call on friends and gather in groups to besiege you. After one round of that, who could withstand it? Immortals being above gods, from this point of view, is an inevitability. ¡°But I won¡¯t walk the Divine Method, so I needn¡¯t consider these.¡± Lu Yuan just reflects on this for a moment before moving on, no longer dwelling on it. How difficult it is to be a Divine Spirit is of no concern to him. With the time spent worrying about this, it¡¯d be better spent thinking about how to create his own secret Divine Method, which would be more useful. ¡°Now that I have the Talisman Charters of Divine Method, although I still don¡¯t have the specific method to confer Divine Spirits, with this as a reference, it should take about a hundred years to deduce the prototype, and subsequent slow refinement would complete it.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s original body controls the Dao Fruit of the Heavenly Son Crown, an Earth Immortal Dao Fruit; on top of that, he has his millennium of accumulation in the Nine Provinces. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï When he truly sets his mind to do something, results come quickly. After all, Divine Method isn¡¯t that difficult a thing. Once you see through its facade, the principle is just so, nothing extraordinary. Indeed, within the Immortal Realm, there isn¡¯t an Immortal Sect lacking their own secret Divine Method, Even some of the smaller Tao Inheritances with a longer legacy that have produced Immortals have mastered the method of conferring gods. This is also why Yang Jihua gave up the Talisman Charters of Divine Method so carelessly, In his view, it¡¯s worthless; others have it, it¡¯s commonplace, why hide and hoard it with such effort? Embarrassing! Chapter 1215 - Chapter 1215 Chapter 485 Taking Over Youxin ?Chapter 1215: Chapter 485 Taking Over Youxin Chapter 1215: Chapter 485 Taking Over Youxin ¡°There¡¯s no problem with this talisman. Thank you, Friend Yang,¡± After Lu Yuan had examined the Divine Method Talisman Charter, he put it away and expressed his gratitude to Yang Jihua with a smile. Since the other party had offered such a generous gift, both morally and logically, a word of thanks was still necessary. ¡°Now that Friend Che has no objections, I can rest easy,¡± Seeing that Lu Yuan had accepted the talisman charter, Yang Jihua breathed a sigh of relief, and a smile finally appeared on his face. Truth be told, although their Qing Immortal Sect had already relocated many of their core divine spirits, the remaining over three hundred divine spirits still occupied nearly twenty percent of the Divine Positions in Youxin Country. Such a large share being occupied by unrelated divine spirits would certainly be dissatisfactory to anyone. When handing over the Divine Method Talisman Charter earlier, he had been worried that Lu Yuan might take the opportunity to refuse to keep these remaining divine spirits. If that were to happen, their Qing Immortal Sect would be in a difficult position. ¡®It seems that Taiping Dao still has some kindness and righteousness; they didn¡¯t make things utterly difficult. From this, it seems that they truly intend to develop peacefully in Youxin Country and do not wish to stir up trouble.¡¯ Yang Jihua thought. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï After becoming divine spirits, they still had a limited lifespan. Although they could live somewhat longer than their original lifespan due to being soul-like ghost bodies nourished by the power of incense, they could at most only extend their lifespan by about ten to twenty percent. The highest rank among the spirits left behind in his Talisman Charter were at the stage of Gathering Four Qi, which according to the lifespan of Human Race cultivators, even with augmentation, would only live for seven to eight hundred years at most. The other spirits would live even shorter. Thus, when Taiping Dao agreed not to oppose the Qing Immortal Sect for a thousand years, it precisely covered the timeframe in which these venerable and younger members of the Qing Immortal Sect were naturally replaced. With these Qing Immortal Sect spirits remaining, Taiping Dao would not dare risk internal espionage to oppose Qing Immortal Sect before they were fully replaced. They could roughly gauge Taiping Dao¡¯s movements through the state of these leftover spirits. This was a balancing test by the Qing Immortal Sect to ascertain Taiping Dao¡¯s stance. Presumably, the other side also understood this point, which is why they readily agreed. After all, as long as Taiping Dao does not cause trouble, these leftover spirits will naturally obey orders and serve loyally. Even if Taiping Dao finds these holdovers displeasing, after a thousand years, it can naturally replace them with their own produced new spirits, making the entire Youxin Country their own. In such a serene and harmonious way, the complete transfer of power will be accomplished. No one¡¯s interests would be violated. As long as you harbour no ill intentions, why not agree to it? Having added this final layer of assurance with Taiping Dao, Yang Jihua, with his mind at ease and all matters settled, then saluted with folded hands, ¡°Friend Che, since you and I have sworn an alliance and the Divine Method Talisman Charter has been completely transferred, I have mostly taken care of the affairs in Youxin Country. My disciples of another residence and several evacuating divine spirits are already gathered in Sanhe City, beginning the evacuation process. Friend Che, you may now send people to take over Sanhe City. This Divine Method Talisman Charter will be highly regarded by the spirits deciding to stay in the country, establishing a master-servant relationship, and take charge in Youxin. From now on, Youxin Country will belong to Taiping Dao. I hope Friend Che will uphold this significant responsibility, not fail the millions of common folk in the country, clear the demonic influences, and return this land to peace, restoring it as a joyful place for the Human Race.¡± Yang Jihua offered his wishes and then bowed respectfully, saying, ¡°I still need to look after those transferring disciples and must report back to my sect early, which prevents me from staying long. Therefore, I will take my leave first.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan hurriedly returned the gesture, ¡°Take care, Friend Yang. May your journey be smooth.¡± Yang Jihua waved his hand and, after stepping out of the residence, his robe fluttered and he transformed into a streak of blue light, heading northward. A moment after his departure, from the rear yard of the residence, Lu Yuan, along with another avatar from Yi Dancheng, eventually emerged. ¡°The Qing Immortal Sect is known as a dominating power, but it has indeed declined within the Changqing Domain,¡± Watching the direction in which Yang Jihua disappeared, Lu Yuan, who had observed the conversation between the other party and his own avatar throughout, could not help but feel deeply moved. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Although in these negotiations, it seemed that the Qing Immortal Sect was aggressively pushing, not only forcing Taiping Dao to make a vow but also leaving behind 375 old divine spirits of Youxin Country as internal monitors and disruptors to restrain Taiping Dao¡¯s developments, if one thinks about it carefully, Taiping Dao, being new to the area, had no foundation in the Changqing Domain to begin with. As an outsider, establishing a foothold here requires a long time to operate covertly and accumulate sufficient foundation. Using a thousand years to establish an Immortal Sect in a country is really a very short time, even by standards of the Immortal Realm. So whether Lu Yuan took that oath or not, Taiping Dao would not have had the capacity to expand externally within a thousand years. Well, that is unless he used the Earth Immortal Dao Fruit and the other avatar from Yi Dancheng. As for the old spirits left by the other party, they are just a laughable fig leaf. A mere group of minor divine spirits, none even reaching the Five Qi Towards Primordial level, let alone once Taiping Dao¡¯s foundation in Youxin Country is stable, even now, eliminating them would merely be a matter of waving Lu Yuan¡¯s hand, hardly requiring much effort. The existence of these divine spirits genuinely only serves to confirm whether Taiping Dao harbours any harmful intentions towards the Qing Immortal Sect or not. Chapter 1216 - Chapter 1216 Chapter 485 Taking Over Youxin_2 ?Chapter 1216: Chapter 485 Taking Over Youxin_2 Chapter 1216: Chapter 485 Taking Over Youxin_2 Like a warning detector, they lived in harmony. If they died, it would mean that Taiping Dao was ready to make a move. They only served to give Qing Immortal Sect a buffer for prevention. Beyond that, there was nothing else they could do. In contrast, compared to the seemingly ludicrous conditions of the Qing Immortal Sect, Lu Yuan had completely obtained the title to take over Youxin Country from the opposition. This was nominally, the sovereign transfer of Changqing Domain¡¯s supreme lord, Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s sovereignty, recognized by Taiping Dao¡¯s occupation of Youxin Country. Regardless of how weak the current Qing Immortal Sect was, as long as this nominal title existed, then nobody could criticize the fact that Taiping Dao had taken over Youxin Country from them. Other Immortal Sects in Changqing Domain, and even those in the surrounding domains, however unwilling, had to acknowledge this point, admitting Taiping Dao¡¯s sovereignty over Youxin Country. From now on, this place would be Taiping Dao¡¯s territory. Other sects¡¯ cultivators, coming to Youxin Country, would have to consult with Taiping Dao. Otherwise, it would be considered an invasion, a contempt, a disrespect. Taiping Dao could justifiably kill them without any issues. Similarly, if Taiping Dao¡¯s cultivators went to other sects¡¯ territories, the same rules applied. This was one of the default unwritten rules of the Immortal Realm that Lu Yuan had understood after soul searching the memories of those demons. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï All major sects operated this way, respecting each other¡¯s boundaries without causing disruptions. Because this was a beneficial rule for everyone, breaking it would mean harming one¡¯s own interests. ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Unless one were irrational, who would engage in such a mutually detrimental act? Of course, apart from the tacit agreement between major sects, maintaining this rule hinged on another crucial factor. That was, the local sects were able to maintain control of the local situation. Only if you could ensure that this territory was yours and you had the ability to maintain order, making others follow your rules, then this rule held weight. Otherwise, as in the case of Youxin Country where demons rampaged and order collapsed. The original lords, Changqing Branch, had been unable to re-establish a new order, allowing the area to remain in chaos. Following the rules, others would then default to recognizing that Qing Immortal Sect had lost control over this territory. The rules followed by the larger sects were thus rendered invalid here. Because you lacked the strength to maintain the rules. In such circumstances, Lu Yuan came here and directly established Taiping Dao. Although this move embarrassed Qing Immortal Sect, it did not cross their bottom line. After all, their loss of control over Youxin Country was a fact that nobody could deny. If so, Qing having lost its country, the capable could take it over. Otherwise, one could not simply watch as our human territories were overrun by a horde of monsters, right? That sin would have been far greater. Since Lu Yuan adhered to all the rules, Qing Immortal Sect, after some deliberation, agreed so swiftly to relinquish sovereignty over Youxin Country to Taiping Dao. Now, an entire Youxin Country was handed over to Lu Yuan so easily, a significant boost from the default rules of the Immortal Realm. But no matter how much one talks, all rules fundamentally serve the strong. The ease with which Taiping Dao took over Youxin Country, the two late-stage Human Immortal avatars that Lu Yuan had released, was also crucial. Without this strength, even if you followed the rules, you wouldn¡¯t gain any benefits. The weak, in the presence of the strong, have never had a say. In this boundary of Youxin Country, Taiping Dao was the strong, Changqing Branch the weak, so through the sheer veil of the rules, the country changed hands. This is the meaning of the rules, the essence of the rules. To provide everyone a decent pretext, to avoid making things look too ugly. For this reason, Lu Yuan lamented the decline of Qing Immortal Sect. Because in their negotiations with him, they got merely a face-saving concession, without gaining any substantial benefits. Isn¡¯t that indicative of decline? ¡°Since Qing Immortal Sect has already withdrawn from Youxin Country, you should later go to Sanhe City and take over from those remaining old Divine Spirits, and first complete the nominal sovereignty transfer,¡± Lu Yuan, having reflected on the decline of Qing Immortal Sect, did not forget the essential tasks, turning his head to instruct his avatar, Che Shidao. ¡°No problem, I¡¯ll head there right away,¡± Che Shidao nodded and agreed readily. As an avatar, wasn¡¯t it his role to do the dirty work, the legwork for the main body? He had already grown accustomed to this over the past months. Thus, after receiving the order and making brief preparations, he immediately set off for Sanhe City. Now, with Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s forces withdrawn from Youxin Country, taking a large number of local Divine Spirits with them, the defenses of the entire Youxin Country suddenly fell into an unprecedented vacancy. Although not long ago, Che Shidao had just cleared the country, killing and driving away a large number of monsters. The country¡¯s environment had thus stabilized. Yet, this did not mean that there were no monsters left within Youxin Country. In many places, there were still some demons and spirits lurking, continuing to wreak havoc. These monsters, although scattered and spread over more than a hundred thousand miles of Youxin Country¡¯s territory, basically did not form a significant threat. But collectively, they numbered in the thousands. Leaving them in place to wreak havoc would surely harm Youxin and poison millions of commoners. Therefore, to prevent this catastrophe, Che Shidao, now the nominal and actual ruler of Youxin, must shoulder this responsibility. Chapter 1217 - Chapter 1217 Chapter 485 Taking Over Youxin_3 ?Chapter 1217: Chapter 485 Taking Over Youxin_3 Chapter 1217: Chapter 485 Taking Over Youxin_3 ¡°All these demons causing trouble around must be eradicated one by one.¡± To accomplish this task, the cooperation of the old gods, who are the local powers of Youxin Country, was indispensable. ¡°This is a good opportunity to observe and sift through the old gods in the countrya€¡±those who are submissive, those who are usable, those who are rebellious, and those who are incompetent¡­¡± On the way to Sanhe City, Che Shidao was thinking this in his heart. Although he agreed to accept the old gods from the previous dynasty, that didn¡¯t mean he could tolerate some divine spirits who, while eating his rice, did the enemy¡¯s work, playing both sides. ¡°I hope those old gods know their place and don¡¯t force my hand to tear up the last semblance of peace with the Qing Immortal Sect.¡± ¡­ After sending Che Shidao away, Lu Yuan pondered in the courtyard before instructing Yi Dancheng, ¡°With Youxin Country left to Che Shidao, I will personally oversee it here, there won¡¯t be any issues. Now that the situation with Qing Immortal Sect has been dealt with and the overall situation is determined, you can start acting too. Go to Qingyang Country to begin the preliminary work for establishing our sect.¡± After initially taking over City of Yunlan, and learning the subtleties of Qi Luck, Lu Yuan had made plans to create avatars and have Che Shidao and Yi Dancheng each take control of a country, letting the avatars enjoy Qi Luck while the original body benefited from the Qi numbers. Now that Che Shidao had taken Youxin Country, he had already accumulated the Qi Luck of an entire country. Lu Yuan had already secured his basic benefits. After another ten years or so of secluded cultivation, he would be confident in breaking through to become a Human Immortal. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï However, it would not work for his two avatars. Even if they survived until their 3,000-year lifespan was exhausted, solely sustained by the Qi Luck of one country, they would never be able to break through as Earth Immortals. If they couldn¡¯t break through as Earth Immortals and their time ran out, the meticulously cultivated External Tool Dao Fruits that were Che Shidao and Yi Dancheng would turn to ash. This would be a significant loss for Lu Yuan as well. Therefore, nurturing the two avatars into Dao Fruits akin to a Heavenly Son¡¯s regalia before the exhaustion of their lifespan was the only path forward. That brought up the issue. How many resources had Lu Yuan expended to cultivate the Heavenly Son¡¯s regalia to embody the foundation of an Earth Immortal? The first was the Qi Luck of the entire Nine Provinces. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? Although, in the later stages, only Central State remained of the Nine Provinces¡¯ world, and as the Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe threat persisted, its area continued to shrink. But in fact, after Lu Yuan unified the whole Nine Provinces, he had already received the Heavenly Mandate and the favor of Qi Luck from the entire world. No matter how much Central State shrank later, he always had a fixed and unchanged portion of the world¡¯s Qi Luck. With the support of the whole world, he was finally able to nurture the Heavenly Son¡¯s regalia into an Earth Immortal Dao Fruit. If one had to quantify with a concrete number the support that the nearly extinct world could provide, the Qi Luck generated by three small nations in the Immortal Realm was about comparable to a collapsing Nine Provinces¡¯ world. So, if Lu Yuan wanted to continue nurturing his avatars in the Immortal Realm and have them make further breakthroughs, conquering three small nations was the best approach. Of course, the two avatars already had their accumulated benefits and had broken through to mid-level Human Immortal status with the nurture of Nine Provinces. The late-stage Human Immortal strength of Che Shidao and Yi Dancheng was bolstered by Magical Treasures, not their inherent realms. From this point, some Qi Luck could be spared. Beyond Qi Luck, one could also harness the unique Qi numbers of the Immortal Realm, which further reduced the need for Qi Luck. But, no matter the reductions, the sustenance of at least two small Immortal Realm nations was still unavoidable. Therefore, if Lu Yuan wanted his two avatars to continue developing, he had to conquer another small nation to use as sustenance. And his target was set on Qingyang Country. The Changqing Domain, ruled by the Qing Immortal Sect, consisted of thirty-nine nations. Up to now, with Youxin Country already transferred to Taiping Dao, a total of eighteen nations had broken away from the control of Qing Immortal Sect, falling into the hands of other Immortal Sects or demons. Of the remaining twenty-one nations, eight were in similar situations to Youxin Country, where the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s rule was on the brink of collapse, and they were on the verge of being destroyed at any moment. The Qing Immortal Sect truly had effective control of only about thirteen nations near its Mountain Gate, Changqing Mountain, located in the central and eastern parts of Changqing Domain. In fact, even considering those eight unstable nations, the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s controlled territory in the Changqing Domain was limited to the central, eastern, and some of the southern small nations. Youxin Country was located in the southern part of Changqing Domain, essentially at the edge of the domain. All the territories under Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s control, according to the alliance oath, were naturally off-limits for Taiping Dao to further invade or seize. Such actions would not only bring heavenly punishment but would also push the other party into desperation. After all, the Qing Immortal Sect was the domain¡¯s hegemon, and if truly provoked, their fury would be more than Lu Yuan could currently withstand. One could not bully a simple person that way; it wasn¡¯t right to keep plucking a sheep for wool. Therefore, Lu Yuan shifted his gaze to the seventeen nations in the western, northern, and southern parts of Changqing Domain that had been abandoned by the Qing Immortal Sect and had fallen into the hands of other Immortal Sects or demons. Out of these, the western part had seven nations overseen by several powerful Immortal Sects. All small nations there were tightly controlled by these Immortal Sects with no room for outsiders to intervene. Within the Changqing Domain, the Immortal Sects opposing the Qing Immortal Sect were precisely them. Having the capability to confront Qing Immortal Sect for thousands of years and expanding their influence step by step, their strength was not to be underestimated. Lu Yuan had no interest in testing the sharpness of their Immortal Swords. With the west off-limits and the northern nations too far away, which also meant passing through the central area that was Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s territory, he had no way to intervene there either. Looking around, there were only the four nations to the west of Southern Domain near Youxin Country, no longer under the control of Qing Immortal Sect, that were suitable for Taiping Dao¡¯s expansion. Among these four nations, one was being infiltrated by a great Immortal Sect from the Western Domain, one was controlled by an Immortal Sect with an Immortal among them, and one had been transformed into a monster nation by a Great Demon, leaving no humans alive. Only Qingyang Country, under the control of three small Immortal Sects and with no Immortals within, was an appropriate target. Therefore, this time, Lu Yuan had chosen it. He planned to send Yi Dancheng there to open another Taiping Dao branch in Qingyang Country and establish another line of Tao Inheritance.¡± Chapter 1218 - Chapter 1218 Chapter 486 Righting Wrongs and Eliminating Evils ?Chapter 1218: Chapter 486 Righting Wrongs and Eliminating Evils Chapter 1218: Chapter 486 Righting Wrongs and Eliminating Evils Regarding the struggle for Qi Luck as a sovereign power, Lu Yuan did not intend to rush. First, he planned to push out two avatars, designed to distract and deceive others, to occupy two territoriesa€¡± that would be quite sufficient. There was no need to expand the territory all at once; that manner of greediness was unsightly and likely to provoke hostility from the surrounding forces. After all, there was only so much land; if you took more, I would have less. If the Taiping Dao took all the neighboring small countries, what would the western Immortal Sects and the Qing Immortal Sect think? Oh! We fight here, battling over a single country or territory to the death. While the Taiping Dao hides behind and scavenges for easy pickings. What does this make us look like? And what exactly are your intentions? Aaah, the classic scenario where the clam and the crane fight while the fisherman profits, huh? No one¡¯s a fool. Who would want to end up as someone else¡¯s stepping stone unless absolutely necessary? If it were truly discovered that the Taiping Dao had intentions of rising to power, it¡¯s likely that the big shots of the Changqing Domain would immediately cease fire. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 Then, they would join forces to first eliminate the outsider Taiping Dao, and only resume their great battle afterwards. Having experienced countless great wars in the Nine Provinces and later becoming an emperor for a millennium, Lu Yuan was all too familiar with these types of conflicts, both overt and covert. He would never believe that these True Immortals of the Immortal Sects, with traditions spanning tens of thousands of years and lifespans several times longer than his own, would fail to understand the gravity of the situation. This was exactly why Lu Yuan had always been very cautious about expanding in the Immortal Realm. Until now, he only intended to push out the avatars of Che Shidao and Yi Dancheng, donning the disguise of a Human Immortal, while the Earth Immortal Dao Fruit remained hidden behind the scenes, never revealing even a trace of its presence. He took the principle of being a trump card very seriouslya€¡± to remain low-key, concealed, and not show off. Even his true body, after a few years, would sever ties completely with the first and second avatar layers after utilizing the Qi Luck of Youxin Country to cultivate the Human Flower Dao Fruit and gain the strength to protect himself. Only by doing this could he ensure an absolutely safe and foolproof security. ¡°Compared with the Qing Immortal Sect and several western Immortal Sects, my substandard Earth Flower Dao Fruit has no advantage at all; we¡¯re not even in the same league in terms of strength. In such a case, it is best to develop surreptitiously, seize the benefits, and amass a fortune in silencea€¡± that is the righteous path. Youxin and Qingyang can provide a tremendous amount of Qi Luck and Qi Fate, enough to support my cultivation all the way to the Realm of Earth Immortal. Securing these two places ensures that neither I nor my two avatars have anything to worry about regarding resources for cultivation until we reach Earth Immortal status. We just need to accumulate for a few thousand years until both the avatars of Che Shidao and Yi Dancheng advance and I also break through Earth Flower. Then, in an instant, I¡¯ll have three substandard Earth Immortal avatars as well as my genuine Earth Immortal self. As the head of four Earth Immortals, this strength would be comparable to that of the Qing Immortal Sect. By then, who would dare to underestimate me within the whole Changqing Domain? Even if I aspire to vie for the position of domain overlord, I would have the right to do so. Time is on my side; there¡¯s no need to hurry.¡± Lu Yuan had a complete plan for the future. First, seize Youxin and Qingyang, and take their Qi Luck and Qi Fate. Then, over the course of a millennium, raise Yi Dancheng to Earth Immortal status and, in another millennium, do the same for Che Shidao. Since these two avatars have a limited lifespan, only three thousand years at most, they need to ascend to Earth Immortality before their lifespan runs out. And once both avatars become Earth Immortals, not only will their strength greatly increase, but their lifespan will also break the ten-thousand-year barrier. This opens up a considerably wider range of options and time for maneuvers. Two thousand years later, the development of the Taiping Dao should also be coming to fruition. The new generation of disciples within the sect may have accumulated enough to become Immortals. At this point, it will be appropriate to reveal one of the avatars, either Yi Dancheng or Che Shidao, and announce their ascension to Earth Immortal status. Then, leveraging this power, continue leading the Taiping Dao to expand outward, capturing a few more small countries, gaining the stature of an Immortal Sect deserving of an Earth Immortal. The other avatar will remain hidden behind the scenes, becoming the new trump card. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã0 By then, Lu Yuan¡¯s accumulation should also be close to completion, ready to attempt the breakthrough to the Earth Flower Dao Fruit. Furthermore, after the Taiping Dao becomes known as an Earth Immortal sect, with expanded territory and increased strength, gathering various heavenly treasures will become much more efficient. He can then collect materials, try to refine several more External Tool Dao Fruits, continue building more avatars, and wait for these avatars to break through to Earth Immortal. ¡°Thanks to my innate Endless Life talent, and the unparalleled advantage of the Way of Qi Fate, I can rapidly accumulate a vast number of powerful avatars. Even if I only occupy five or six small countries in the future, maintaining the scale of an average Earth Immortal sect, I could still, within a ten-thousand-year timeframe and before the lifespan of avatars like Che Shidao runs out, cultivate seven to nine Earth Immortal avatars. If there happens to be expansion during that period, then obtaining a dozen or more Earth Immortal avatars would be a piece of cake. With a dozen Earth Immortal avatars, as long as the Great True People of Changqing Domain do not interfere, I could dominate with ease. Or even more discreetly, during the accumulation process, I could release one or two Earth Immortal avatars to establish new sects under different names in some unclaimed territories of the Changqing Domain, seizing more territory in the process. The speed of accumulation and expansion would then become even faster. If there were any attempts at aggression, I could easily manage with one or two avatars secretly embedded among them, working together effortlessly to outmaneuver them.¡± From these plans alone, it is clear that time is on my side. Chapter 1219 - Chapter 1219 Chapter 486 Righting Wrongs and Eliminating Evils_2 ?Chapter 1219: Chapter 486 Righting Wrongs and Eliminating Evils_2 Chapter 1219: Chapter 486 Righting Wrongs and Eliminating Evils_2 Lu Yuan was well aware of this point. Therefore, at this time, he was in no hurry to jump in. He never intended to clash with those who possessed the combat power of a True Immortal. When expanding, he deliberately avoided countries with Great Demons and Immortals¡¯ sects and chose Qingyang Country, which lacked them. The purpose was to avoid unnecessary troubles and complications. Being immortal and possessing the Way of Control Pneuma, with the Immortal Realm having the Path of Fate, what an advantage this was. How foolish would it have to be to risk a confrontation? Lying low for now and then stretching out the time, the chance to achieve great things increased with each passing millennium. After accumulating ten thousand years, he would become unbeatable in Changqing. This Great Domain could henceforth be renamed Peaceful. Peaceful Domain. Listen, just the name itself is comforting. Yi Dancheng had left. Carrying its body¡¯s mission, it silently headed for Qingyang Country. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï According to the plan, it would lie low for ten years, figuring out the details of that place and making thorough preparations. Then, once the body in Youxin Country achieved immortality and gained the power to protect itself, it could split off an Earth Immortal Avatar as a second layer of disguise and as a fallback. Then, it would take direct action, topple the three Immortal Sects of Qingyang Country, and establish the second branch of the Taiping Dao in the Changqing Domain, or call it the head Mountain Gate. By then, Qingyang and Youxin, resonating remotely, the Taiping Dao could accumulate and develop over two thousand years, potentially sweeping the entire southern domain. Thus began Lu Yuan¡¯s plan to infiltrate the Changqing Domain. ¡­ While Lu Yuan arranged for Yi Dancheng to head to Qingyang Country. Meanwhile, Che Shidao had also reached Sanhe City. Riding the auspicious clouds, he flew to Sanhe City. He had just reached the city walls and had yet to descend when a mass of golden clouds converged around him, and hundreds of figures in golden armor or official robes, all dignified and imposing, bowed to him. ¡°Greetings, True Person.¡± The crowd of divine spirits loudly congratulated him, recognizing Che Shidao¡¯s identity from the True Person¡¯s visage previously issued by the Changqing Branch of the Taiping Dao. ¡°Are you the divine spirits assigned to remain in Youxin Country?¡± Che Shidao nodded slightly, looked around, and asked, ¡°Who is in charge now?¡± Among the many divine spirits, one with the strongest magical presence and the richest golden divine light stepped forward, ¡°I am Long Water River Lord, the leader of the gods here, and I have seen the True Person.¡± In Youxin Country, there¡¯s a major river called Long Water, which traverses the country east to west a€¡± a true mother river. As the lord of the Long Water River, he naturally is the leader of all river and lake gods within Youxin Country. Che Shidao scrutinized Long Water River Lord and frowned, ¡°As the god of Long Water, why is your divine power not at perfected gold, marked with flaws?¡± Since he planned to take control in Youxin Country, he had gathered information about it prior to the handover. In Youxin Country, there are three divine positions that can reach the realm of Five Qi Towards Primordial. First is Long Water River Lord, as the leader of the river and lake gods. Second is Mi Yun Mountain God, as the leader of all mountain gods. Third is Sanhe City Marshal, as the leader of all local and city gods. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï The three major divine spirits a€¡° one governing water, one mountains, and one people a€¡° all have enough authority and incense offerings to achieve the Five Qi Towards Primordial and perfect golden divine power. ¡°Perfected golden divine power¡± denotes the most significant and obvious distinction in a divine spirit¡¯s realm of power. From gathering one Qi to Five Qi Towards Primordial, the divine power is golden, the denser and purer the gold, the higher the magic realm. Once reaching Five Qi Towards Primordial, it is known as perfected golden divine power. Perfected golden divine power, advancing further, equals the Heaven Monarch level, transcending human immortals, turning from golden to cyan color, implying the favor of heavenly will. Cyan divine power also ranges from light to pure, the richer it is, the higher the cultivation and magic power. Above cyan is the purple divine power. From cyan to utmost purple, divine spirits are considered blessed by heaven, mighty on par with Earth Immortals, commonly referred to as Heaven Monarchs, lords by heavenly mandate. Each is a well-known great god of the Immortal Realm by the Divine Method. Purple divine power progressing further, is said to reach even higher realms, comparable to Heavenly Immortals. But in this flourishing Immortal Realm, such divine beings, surpassing Heavenly Immortals, have yet to appear. Thus, people are unsure about its true essence, with various speculations and no firm conclusions, and it isn¡¯t discussed further. Now, only referring to Youxin Country¡¯s present divine spirits as seen by Che Shidao, each one¡¯s golden divine power was mixed, even the best amongst them, Long Water River Lord, had clearly impure power with visible defects. This did not match his status as the chief of the water gods. ¡°Answering, True Person,¡± Facing the query, Long Water River Lord, with a sorrowful face said dolorously, ¡°Since the monstrous disturbances, the peace in my Youxin Country has vanished, and the region has increasingly become chaotic, showing signs of troubled times everywhere, Demons roam unchallenged, slaughtering villages, towns, and cities, making living beings suffer and turning thousands of miles of fertile land into wastelands. The majority of my jurisdiction over Long Water has been occupied by these demons, The human populace living above also fell victim to these demons. Thus, I failed to perform my duties over more than half of my jurisdiction. With more than half the incense offerings cut off from their source, With diminished authority and dwindling incense offerings, my perfected golden divine power could no longer be sustained. Therefore, although the divine position remains, my cultivation level has decreased, barely maintaining the peak of Gathering Four Qi, significantly weaker than before.¡± The majority of a divine spirit¡¯s strength comes from external forces, And these external forces are composed of their divine position¡¯s authority and the faith of incense offerings. This Long Water River Lord, having lost more than half of his jurisdiction, therefore losing half of his power and half of his incense, it is quite normal for his realm to fall from Five Qi Towards Primordial by one level. Chapter 1220 - Chapter 1220 Chapter 486 Righting Wrongs and Eliminating Evils_3 ?Chapter 1220: Chapter 486 Righting Wrongs and Eliminating Evils_3 Chapter 1220: Chapter 486 Righting Wrongs and Eliminating Evils_3 ¡°So that¡¯s how it is.¡± Che Shidao nodded slightly, acknowledging the other¡¯s statement, then glanced at the numerous Divine Spirits. Among the gods before him, quite a few were probably the unlucky ones whose divine power had fallen due to reductions in their domains and incense offerings. Their eagerness to greet him was probably not just to show off in front of their new master, but more so to borrow his power to reclaim their lost territories and retrieve their lost power. ¡°As of now, my Taiping Dao has taken over the entire Youxin Country from the Qing Immortal Sect and has established a Dao Inheritance Sub-court here to protect all local beings. Since you have chosen to stay, I shall not reject you but will generously accept you, allowing you to continue serving as gods in this place. However, let me make this clear first. If you respect my command, you shall follow my orders. From now on, whenever my Taiping Dao issues a decree, all gods, great and small within the nation, must comply without fail. You all shall also stick to your roles and not act recklessly, disturbing the peace within the region. Otherwise, under the divine decree, those who disobey will have their ranks stripped and their positions removed; their True Spirits will be punished, and they will not be let off easily.¡± Che Shidao looked at the gods with a stern tone and said harshly, ¡°Do any of you have objections?¡± ¡°We will strictly obey the True Person¡¯s commands and serve the Taiping Dao; whenever the upper sect issues an order, we will certainly follow it. If we dare disobey, the Immortal can punish us without us complaining,¡± they responded. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The many Divine Spirits of Youxin Country had been prepared for this when they chose to stay. Faced with the admonition from the upper sect, they all knelt and promised obedience, not daring to revolt at all. Seeing this, Che Shidao nodded in satisfaction: ¡°Since that is the case, I hereby command you, starting immediately, to proceed with purging demons from the mountains, rivers, cities, and wildlands across the country, and to rectify the chaos within the nation. Any demon, ghost, or monster causing chaos or doing evil should be killed. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Any cultivator using evil magic to harm people and disturb local harmony should be killed. Any false gods who, without being officially enshrined, occupy temples, deceive the populace, and privately enjoy offerings should be killed. These three harms are unforgivable. Of course, if there are benevolent monsters, righteous cultivators, or pure spirits, do not blindly kill them indiscriminately. Distinguish between good and evil, verify them, register them, and report up; they should be managed subsequently. In general, anyone causing unrest and affecting national stability should be removed. Those who benefit the locality and ensure national peace should be rewarded and managed hereafter. Do you understand?¡± Demons and monsters that kill people everywhere are the biggest source of local unrest and must be eliminated. Some cultivators who have learned a bit of magic and deceive and harm people everywhere for personal gain should also be eliminated. And some deities who take over temples without Taiping Dao¡¯s permission and receive offerings privately are encroaching on Taiping Dao¡¯s authority and must be eliminated as well. These three are considered the three scourges of Youxin Country by Che Shidao. Eliminating them will naturally bring peace to the nation. ¡°We obey your command!¡± Long Water River Lord had no objections at all and led all the spirits to take the order directly. Eliminating these three scourges is not only a major plan for the Taiping Dao to restore national peace and establish authority. For these Divine Spirits, it is also a great opportunity to reclaim their own authority and restore their divine power. For people, gods, and Immortals alike, this command is right; of course, no one would refuse or resist it. ¡°Very well, start the task immediately.¡± Seeing that there were no issues with the gods, Che Shidao waved his hand and said, ¡°If there are any problems, you can find me in Mi Yun Mountain, where I have set up the Youxin Sub-court of Taiping Dao for the Dao Inheritance.¡± The handover of Youxin Country was already completed, and the influence of Qing Immortal Sect had been completely withdrawn. At this time, Taiping Dao naturally needed to establish the Dao Inheritance and fill the void left by the other side. And an Immortal Sect, of course, could not be established within the mundane cities; such cohabitation of immortals and mortals is detrimental and useless. Previously, Changqing Branch had settled in Sanhe City because they were pressured by monsters, alone and vulnerable, and had to run there to join forces with the Sanhe City Marshal for self-preservation. The Sanhe City Marshal is now the last divine spirit with divine power at the Five Qi Towards Primordial level in the remnants of Youxin Country. Changqing Branch wanted to join forces with him to gather the power of Immortals and gods to combat the encroaching invasion of monsters. But the current Taiping Dao had already swept the monsters away, so such measures were unnecessary. Just as well. Another leading Mountain God, the Mi Yun Mountain God, was killed by monsters in a great battle a hundred years ago in Youxin Country. Thus, Mi Yun Mountain had since lost its Mountain God. As the country¡¯s leading mountain, rich in ethereal shapes and blessed by the configurations of Heaven and Earth, its Spiritual Energy is intense. Setting up the Taiping Dao¡¯s sub-court of Dao Inheritance there couldn¡¯t be more appropriate. The previous Changqing Branch was also located there. As for the Mountain God? Lu Yuan, needing to gather Spiritual Energy, certainly saw use for the Mi Yun Mountain God and would not simply dismiss and stop enshrining him. But a new candidate for Mountain God certainly had to be appropriately selected. He planned to choose a disciple from his sect who had faced external calamities and died tragically, and to enshrine him as the Mi Yun Mountain God. Having one of his own as the Mountain God of the mountain where the gate is located ensured loyalty, which was comforting. Not just for the Mi Yun Mountain God, Lu Yuan intended to gradually fill other vacant divine positions in Youxin Country in the same manner. Of course, there was no need to discuss this with these former gods of the previous dynasty. These individuals who were destined to be phased out were merely transitional after all. ¡°Yes!¡± The gods responded. Afterward, Che Shidao did not stay long and flew away on a cloud. The new Mountain Gate was under construction, and many tasks awaited. As the head of the Taiping Dao Youxin Sub-court, setting up the framework for the Dao Inheritance Sub-house was not an easy task. Even with the foundation left by the Qing Immortal Sect, which saved some effort, the wars spanning hundreds of years had mostly destroyed it there. With Taiping Dao now in charge of Youxin and having cleared out the monsters, initiating new measures to allow this tens of thousands of miles of barren land to flourish again was akin to recreating the mountains and rivers. He would be busy in the days to come. Chapter 1221 - Chapter 1221 Chapter 487 Moving to Miyun ?Chapter 1221: Chapter 487: Moving to Miyun Chapter 1221: Chapter 487: Moving to Miyun Taiping Dao relocated its sect and formally established a branch in Mi Yun Mountain, which was a significant event not only for Youxin Country but also for all the nations in the Southern Domain. After all, it was an Immortal Sect with an Immortal presiding, and this Immortal had already arrived in Youxin Country. Given the respect and strength of an Immortal, which neighboring country wouldn¡¯t take into account Taiping Dao¡¯s opinions before taking any action in the future? So when the news spread that Taiping Dao had ousted Changqing Immortal Sect and seized control over Youxin Country, all the powers in the Southern Domain were shaken. To make Changqing Immortal Sect yield was something no one else in the entire Changqing Domain could achieve, except for a few rebellious Immortal Sects in the Western Domain. The fact that Taiping Dao accomplished this proved its extraordinary nature, didn¡¯t it? Many forces were shocked by this, and at the same time, they felt wary and fearful of Taiping Dao. Of course, there were also many who were pleased. In this chaotic era plagued by demons, the presence of an Immortal Sect stepping forward to protect a nation of the Human Race was undoubtedly exhilarating and joyful for many Human Cultivators. The prosperity of the Human Path was a good thing for all the Human Race. Thus, in effect, Taiping Dao had already become a resounding banner for the Human Race¡¯s Immortal Sect in the territory of the Southern Domain. For such a rising star, there were, of course, many who sought to attach themselves and form connections. Yet, for the people in the Changqing Domain, Taiping Dao was too unfamiliar. They had never heard this name before and had no understanding of it. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?0 Situated in the Changqing Domain, it didn¡¯t even have a proper established Mountain Gate. This made it difficult for nearby powers, even if they wanted to visit, as there was no proper channel to do so. This was clearly detrimental to Taiping Dao¡¯s plan of infiltration and integration into the Changqing Domain. So for Lu Yuan, it was urgent to establish the branch in Youxin Country as soon as possible. Therefore, after accepting the submission of the divine spirits of Youxin Country and issuing the Order to Eliminate the Three Evils, he immediately urged his avatar, Che Shidao, to come to Mi Yun Mountain and begin establishing the branch. ¡­ Mi Yun Mountain. This was a great mountain that sprawled across the center of Youxin Country, extending thirty thousand miles and almost splitting Youxin Country in half. Only the plains on either side of the mountain range were passable. Additionally, there were some rivers and streams between the valleys that allowed for boat traffic. Such an extensive mountain covered a vast area, and around the mountain, lived millions of common people, with countless towns and villages built. Given the livelihoods of so many involved, it was impossible to indiscriminately claim the entire area. The Immortal Sects of the Immortal Realm were beings of the Way and weren¡¯t like the demons, who only knew to devour humans, disregarding their lives and deaths. So in the Immortal Cultivation World, the actual Mi Yun Mountain referred specifically to the highest peak in the mountain range and the four surrounding smaller peaks. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï These five peaks of Mi Yun were the true Mi Yun Mountain. A dwelling blessed by immortals, enriched with heavenly and earthly aura, where the Mountain God resides. The location where Taiping Dao intended to establish its branch was here. That day, a golden light came from the south, bringing with it auspicious clouds, and settled upon the crest of Mi Yun Mountain. Che Shidao swept his sleeve, placing over forty disciples onto the mountainside. He then let the enlightened Yellow Scarf Tao Soldiers lead them to find a place to stay. Once these disciples left, Lu Yuan appeared beside him, standing atop the peak, overlooking the entire Immortal Mountain. As his gaze swept across, he couldn¡¯t help but sigh, ¡°The palaces and towers here, the jade mansions of the immortals, have all been destroyed by demons, leaving only broken walls and ruins.¡± The sight of the overgrown weeds and collapsed palaces scattered across the mountain ridge was indeed a poignant one. ¡°Now that Taiping Dao has taken over Youxin Country, all surrounding forces are closely watching us. They haven¡¯t made a move yet simply because they aren¡¯t sure of our intentions and capabilities. That¡¯s why they haven¡¯t sent anyone over. But we can¡¯t delay this situation for too long. If it drags on, not only will the domestic sentiment be unstable, but the neighboring countries may also start to make their moves,¡± Che Shidao spoke from beside him. Not all beings, even demons, were pleased to see Taiping Dao take over Youxin Country. In fact, there were many who had their eyes on Youxin Country. West of the Southern Domain, some Immortal Sects in the Western Domain had begun to infiltrate the countries of the Southern Domain. In the Southern Domain, local Immortal Sects and demons that were relatively unrestrained by the dominant Changqing Immortal Sect started to get restless, seeking to expand their power. Just around Youxin Country alone, there were two Immortal Sects each with an Immortal and one Monster Nation with a Great Demon. Could it be said that these three forces had no intentions towards Youxin Country? They definitely did. In a world where a country represents Qi, and Qi represents cultivation, which Immortal Sect wouldn¡¯t think of expanding its territory once the moral facade was stripped away? It was just that previously, Youxin Country was under the authority of Changqing Immortal Sect, the leading Immortal Sect of the domain, and thus no one dared to act. As previously stated by Yang Jihua, even though Changqing Immortal Sect was in decline, it was not an entity that could be easily bullied. If truly angered, they could still muster several Human Immortals and even Earth Immortals. With this foundation, before the threat diminished, few dared to provoke them. Especially in the Southern Domain which never had any large forces; even the existing Immortal Sects and Monster Nations were small powers, each occupying a country with only one or two Immortals. Chapter 1222 - Chapter 1222 Chapter 487 Moving to Miyun_2 ?Chapter 1222: Chapter 487: Moving to Miyun_2 Chapter 1222: Chapter 487: Moving to Miyun_2 This strength could only allow these smaller factions to hold onto their own territories. If they wanted to expand further, they simply lacked the power to do so. A Human Immortal could only occupy one country, based on the tacit agreement framed by the current reality. Without more Human Immortals, even if you could seize a territory, it would end up like the Changqing Branch in Youxin Country which could hardly be defended due to the lack of Immortal-level martial power. In the end, it would result in continuous warfare, becoming a place for the sect to bleed continuously. Thus, only sects with more than two Immortals or demon nations had the surplus resources and strength to occupy more territories. Coincidentally, In this Southern Domain, there were exactly two Immortal Sects, each possessing two Immortals. One was located in Anyu Country to the southwest, known as Jintai Gate, and the other adjacent to Youxin Country, situated in Youshan Country at Xuan Turtle Mountain. Both of these Immortal Sects, each housing two Human Immortals, though only in the early to middle stages of their realm, were already a notch above other self-defending sects. In addition, at the intersection of the central and eastern parts of the Southern Domain in Jiuchuan Country, there resided a flood dragon that had established a Monster Nation there. Beneath the flood dragon, there was a dragon son who had also become an Immortal. Thus, the Jiuchuan Demon Country was also sharpening its swords, wanting to expand outward. The above three major forces all possessed the strength, motivation, and need for expansion. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Yet, within the entire Southern Domain, the range of choices available to them was rather limited. Although the Qing Immortal Sect had declined in strength and consequently lessened their control over the various countries within the Changqing Domain, relinquishing many territories, many demon nations in the region today had seized the opportunity to snatch up territories during the decline of the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s power and had established themselves. To this day, of all the nine countries in the Southern Domain, only Youxin Country was still under the control of the Qing Immortal Sect. The remaining eight countries included one Jiuchuan Demon Country and one Great Eye Kingdom, which were both demon nations with Great Demons present. Dominated by Immortal Sects were Youshan Country¡¯s Xuan Turtle Mountain, Anyu Country¡¯s Jintai Gate, and Qingyu Country¡¯s Bihu Palace, all of which harbored Human Immortals. Additionally, Qingyu Country had been infiltrated by the Western Domain Immortal Sect. All six of these countries had rulers, contained Immortal-level martial power within, and were unassailable by outsiders, making them unconquerable nations. Only Qingyang Country to the west, controlled by three smaller Immortal Sects, and Xiaye Country to the east, completely invaded by demons with no trace of human power, lacked Immortal-level forces and were coveted by others. However, even these two countries were not easily taken. Qingyang Country was located in the southwestern part of the Southern Domain, adjacent to Qing Yu and Anyu Countries. The Western Domain Immortal Sect and Anyu¡¯s Jintai Gate both had their eyes on this place, seeking to seize it to expand their own sect¡¯s power. Thereby, within this country, those three smaller Immortal Sects came under the influence and control of foreign powers, turning into puppets in the power struggle between Jintai Gate and the Western Domain Immortal Sect. Surrounding the ownership of Qingyang Country, how many tricks had these two major forces played? Currently at a standstill, no one could gain the upper hand, which was why up till now, no true ruler had been decided for this country, leaving it without an Immortal. In Xiaye Country, meanwhile, tens of small and large Demon Kings and Ghost Kings had taken over, turning it into a battleground plunged in chaotic wars. This country was the most lawless, completely devoid of any sovereign, where anyone could carve out a territory and claim dominance. Initially, the Black Wind Tiger Demon had thought of uniting the demons of Youxin Country to venture into this land to carve out a great undertaking. But that was merely wishful thinking. Essentially. Behind these ten plus Demon Kings and Ghost Kings were Youshan Country¡¯s Xuan Turtle Mountain and two dragon kings from Jiuchuan Demon Country. These two major forces were covertly manipulating the conflicts in Xiaye Country, continuously strategizing around the country¡¯s sovereignty. Indeed, you heard correctly, Youshan¡¯s Xuan Turtle Mountain controlled a group of Demon Kings and Ghost Kings, forming a battlefield with the Jiuchuan Demon Country. Previously mentioned, Among the demons and spectres, there were many benevolent ones with inclinations towards the human race. Among these anomalies, many creatures had been reclaimed by the Immortal Sects as protective spiritual beasts, and many spectres had been collected as guardian Dao soldiers. Officially recognized by the Immortal Sects, these spiritual beasts and Dao soldiers required no human flesh to maintain their sentience. Even their cultivation was based on Immortal Techniques, rather than the mainstream demonic arts prevalent among such monster and specter kind. With these sect-recruited spiritual beasts and Dao soldiers, Xuan Turtle Mountain supported a group of Demon Kings and Ghost Kings in Xiaye Country, contending with a group of malevolent demons under the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace for the country¡¯s ownership. Thus, within the nine countries of the Southern Territory, essentially every country had a ruler, or was a battleground for several factions, none of which could be considered peaceful or harmonious. Lu Yuan even doubted whether, within Youxin Country controlled by the Qing Immortal Sect, the constant demon invasions over the years and the inability of the sub-branches to subdue the demons, were indirectly influenced by various powers within the Southern Domain. After all, within this region, there were four factions with more than two Immortals. Potentially to be divided among them, there were only two countries. Even if a victor was determined between Qingyang Country and Xiaye Country, in the end, two forces would walk away disheartened, gaining no advantage. Would these losing forces not want to make other preparations? Even those other factions with only one Immortal, even if lacking the capability to expand, would they not harbor such desires? As long as this thought existed, there would be discontent and therefore actions would follow. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 And a Youxin Country that had already lost its ruling Immortal, and even left with only one territory within the Southern Domain, merely protected by a name, undoubtedly became an excellent target. Chapter 1223 - Chapter 1223 Chapter 487 Moving to Miyun_3 ?Chapter 1223: Chapter 487: Moving to Miyun_3 Chapter 1223: Chapter 487: Moving to Miyun_3 Let those Immortal Sects and Monster Nations invade Youxin Country, openly opposing Qing Immortal Secta€¡±they don¡¯t have the guts. But they do have the guts to continuously support some demons in entering Youxin Country, undermining the rule of Qing Immortal Sect and gradually usurping their power. The result is also seen. Over three hundred years, Changqing Branch has gradually lost control over the country. By the time Lu Yuan arrived in this country, those demons had even joined forces, attempting to overthrow the rule of Changqing Branch in one fell swoop. If it weren¡¯t for his intervention, Youxin Country might have become another Xiaye Country by now, a playground for demons. If no one was pulling strings behind the scenes to push a branch of Qing Immortal Sect to the brink, who would believe it? With that thought in mind. After Lu Yuan appeared and raised the banner of Taiping Dao wanting to take charge of this country. The quick agreement of Qing Immortal Sect might have been motivated by the thought of using this foreign sect to balance and retaliate against those hidden forces that were causing trouble. You want Youxin Country? Fine, I won¡¯t compete for it. But I won¡¯t give it to you either, preferring to give it to an outsider with no foundations than to you rebels. The Southern Domain has completely lost control. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï The last Youxin Country, surrounded by a pack of wolves, is hard to defend. Qing Immortal Sect had long harbored the thought of abandonment. They just couldn¡¯t let go of their pride and hadn¡¯t seen a fitting opportunity. Now that the Master of Taiping Tao had stepped forward, wanting to take over this mess, it actually suited their wishes. Using Taiping Dao to restrain the increasingly aggressive Immortal Sects and Monster Nations of the Southern Domain, while also using these sects and nations to retaliate against those who dared to stand out and seize their territory. These local snakes have made an effort for three hundred years, finally about to reap the benefits. Now, a newcomer comes along and takes the fruit directly. How could those local powers be willing? With Taiping Dao sticking their neck out at this time, there are definitely countless forces nearby, gnashing their teeth in hatred. They only refrain from attacking because they fear the presence of an Immortal in Taiping Dao. But if given the chance, they would certainly not mind stepping forward, delivering a blow, and pushing Taiping Dao into a desperate situation. Thus, the diplomatic situation of Taiping Dao is actually not so good, even dire. To say ¡°surrounded by enemies¡± would not be an exaggeration. That is also why Lu Yuan¡¯s side is anxious to establish a branch and set up a Mountain Gate. If he does not establish a strong footing quickly, and merely watches Youxin Country¡¯s chaos unfold, wouldn¡¯t that signal weakness to others? Those who bully the weak and fear the strong will pounce like tigers and wolves, tearing at you if they sense weakness. Only by displaying your own strength will the local snakes here feel fear and not dare to make careless moves. ¡°To found an Immortal Sect¡¯s Tao inheritance, one must first have an Immortal Mountain as a blessed land. With Mi Yun Mountain here, there¡¯s no need to worry about that. But having a Dao place isn¡¯t enough; the key is to build the Dao place into an Immortal Sect¡¯s framework.¡± Lu Yuan looked at his avatar and said in a deep voice, ¡°These ruined palaces and jade towers are nothing to speak of. Sending some Dao soldiers to clear them out and cut through mountains and stone, it won¡¯t take even one or two months to rebuild. However, it will not be so easy to refill the various spiritual medicines, spiritual plants, and unique treasures of Heaven and Earth that symbolize the sect¡¯s heritage. Without hundreds, even tens of thousands of years, there will be little to show for it. But these things can be gradually accumulated over time, no need to rush.¡± ¡°What¡¯s truly pressing right now is to rebuild the protective grand formation of Mi Yun Mountain. With such a formation to rely on, Taiping Dao will be able to shelter the entire Mountain Gate region, defend against outside invaders, and cultivate disciples in peace, gradually developing the sect.¡± An Immortal Sect has three core components. One is the top echelons of the sect, the Immortals. One is the junior disciples, the future roots. The last one is the powerful and durable mountain-protecting grand formation passed down through generations. A strong formation can ensure that even if there is a gap in the combat power of the Immortal Sect¡¯s higher-ups, the sect is protected for a long time, waiting for the next generation to grow and revitalize the sect. After the Garrison Immortal of Youxin Country died, the Changqing Branch relied on Mi Yun Mountain¡¯s mountain-protecting grand formation to contend with the country¡¯s demons for two hundred years. After the formation was breached and the Mountain Gate could no longer be defended, Youxin Country plummeted and could no longer be controlled. The influence of a powerful mountain-protecting grand formation on the rise and fall of a country and sect is evident.¡± ¡°I reviewed the terrain here and it quite matches a ¡®Five-Star Celestial Palace Formation¡¯ I once read about.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes sparked with understanding as he used his Earth Immortal¡¯s realm to observe Mi Yun Mountain¡¯s Earth Veins, and he continued, ¡°I will study it in the coming period and strive to adapt the Five-Star Celestial Palace Formation to the Earth Veins here, setting it up as the mountain-protecting formation. You take the opportunity, with those Divine Spirits, to clean up the country. Additionally, while you¡¯re at it, open the Mountain Gate wide, recruiting a batch of disciples back to the mountain. For Taiping Dao to gain a solid foothold in Youxin Country, even to operate the Changqing Domain, relying on just a few of us is insufficient.¡± ¡°We need more hands below us to grow our presence and serve as wings.¡± Che Shidao nodded, ¡°No problem, I¡¯ll take care of this.¡± These tasks were trivial matters, merely laborious, which he could handle without issue. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Isn¡¯t that what an avatar is for? Lu Yuan waved his hand, ¡°Also, if some guys reach out their hands here, don¡¯t hesitate, just cut them down. This Youxin Country is Taiping Dao¡¯s territory. I don¡¯t care what others have done here before; now, this is mine. Furthermore, you, being at the late stage of Human Immortal, can take this opportunity to deal with the demons to show off as well.¡± ¡°I¡¯d like to see whether those secretly scheming demons and monsters have the guts to snatch a late-stage Human Immortal¡¯s territory.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s face revealed a cold smile as he felt nothing but disdain for those local forces that had always resorted to dark and slippery tricks. Chapter 1224 - Chapter 1224 Chapter 488 Resentment with Dragon Palace ?Chapter 1224: Chapter 488: Resentment with Dragon Palace Chapter 1224: Chapter 488: Resentment with Dragon Palace Those sinister specters naturally lacked the courage. In Youxin Country, when Divine Spirits cleansed an evil monster because of the opponent¡¯s high strength, they were helpless and could only run to Mi Yun Mountain to request aid from the Immortal Sect¡¯s higher Immortals. Che Shidao angrily rose and followed the messenger to Lord Long Water¡¯s Mansion in the east. ¡°True Person, it is the Dragon Palace below.¡± Lord Long Water pointed at the wide and turbulent Long Water River, speaking resentfully: ¡°This Dragon Palace, originally my Dao ground, had to be abandoned because the Immortals of the Changqing Branch lost Mi Yun Mountain, and Youxin Country¡¯s influence had waned. I could not support it alone and had no choice but to retreat with them, giving up this Water Mansion. I had barely left when a Blackwater Snake took over the Water Mansion, self-proclaimed Lord Long Water Dragon, and foolishly claimed divinity here. Now that the True Person has flattened the groups of monsters with one sword and Taiping Dao presides over Youxin, the world has returned to peace. I was ordered to return to the Water Mansion, intending to expel this presumptuous Blackwater Snake. Who knew that when faced with an Immortal¡¯s decree, it dared to disobey, not only resisting but also beating me out when I went to argue the matter, sending soldiers to chase and kill me. True Person¡­¡± Lord Long Water knelt on the ground, crying sorrowfully, ¡°If it weren¡¯t for my few water-escaping Divine Powers and my speedy escape, I might¡¯ve been killed directly by that Blackwater Snake. Please, True Person, take action on my behalf!¡± Che Shidao furrowed his brow and asked, ¡°If this Black Snake could drive you to such a sorry state, its cultivation must be profound. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï What is its origin, have you ascertained it?¡± Lord Long Water replied, ¡°Reporting to True Person, that Black Snake¡¯s cultivation is at the level of Five Qi Towards Primordial, and it also has a bulge in its belly that somewhat resembles a transforming flood dragon, indeed possessing some true dragon bloodline. As for its origin, I am not clear. However, among the surrounding nations, those of the water type capable of having true dragon bloodlines have mostly gone to pledge allegiance to those two flood dragon kings of the Jiuchuan Country. Perhaps this Blackwater Snake has some connection with the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace.¡± Che Shidao¡¯s frown deepened, ¡°You mean to say, this Blackwater Snake, was sent by the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace?¡± On the brink of transforming into a flood dragon with true dragon bloodlines, it truly was difficult not to associate it with those two immortally transformed flood dragons of the Jiuchuan Country within the Southern Domain. Lord Long Water hurriedly denied, ¡°I dare not say so definitively, it¡¯s just a suspicion.¡± Che Shidao hummed lightly, then asked, ¡°Since this Blackwater Snake has the cultivation of Five Qi Towards Primordial and is likely a regional Monster King, why didn¡¯t it join forces with those other demons in the country to attack Sanhe City previously?¡± Lord Long Water answered, ¡°Previously, this Blackwater Snake occupied the Water Mansion and remained holed up at the bottom of Long Water River, never once emerging. So, we were actually unclear about its cultivation. We only saw that it could subdue many water monsters and dominated the vast Long Water River, and assumed the opponent had notable cultivation and Divine Powers, so we treated it warily and didn¡¯t provoke it. And the other various monsters, not being of water origin, had little interest in Long Water. So after trying to contact it twice and receiving no response, they ignored it. That is why the Blackwater Snake was able to occupy the Water Mansion and live leisurely below the radar for so long.¡± Hearing Lord Long Water describe it, Che Shidao¡¯s suspicions grew deeper. Staying hidden without showing off, it meant harboring ulterior motives, big schemes simmer manulistgerslation transtrogue¡¯ not interested in those less noteworthy demon kings, not wanting to mingle with those unsophisticated beings. This was a common issue among many born into prestigious and powerful families. When Lu Yuan was in the Nine Provinces realm, he had seen innumerable such cases. And if this Blackwater Snake indeed had a true dragon¡¯s bloodline and originated from the Monster Nation¡¯s Dragon Palace, its disdain for the less noteworthy Black Wind Demon King and other wild demons was quite justified. ¡°Well, since we can¡¯t ascertain clearly, just capture that little snake directly and ask it, and then the truth will be out.¡± Thinking it over, with still too little information, Che Shidao decided not to think further and prepared to take action directly. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï After all, it was just a Five Qi Towards Primordial water snake; even if it had a bit of true dragon¡¯s bloodline, how formidable could it be? Under the force of Immortal Technique and Divine Powers, it would still have to obediently comply. Thinking thus, he stretched out a large hand, and instantly the surrounding clouds gathered, forming a giant palm a thousand yards wide that covered the entire river surface. As his hand reached down, a vital energy palm immediately displaced the river water, reaching for the location of the underwater Dragon Palace and scooped towards it. Boom rumble. Clouds surged and waves rolled, directly severing the Long Water River, causing countless waves to explode and splash. Within the Water Mansion at the river bottom, numerous shrimp soldiers and crab generals, along with various water monsters, ran around in panic. But facing the giant hand that cut across the entire Long Water River, there was simply no effect. With a sweep of the hand, countless lesser monsters turned into blood foam, directly shattered by the powerful vital force. In this crisis, from beneath the Water Mansion came a thunderous roar, resonating like a dragon¡¯s song. Then a giant shadow, over twenty yards long, burst through the water waves under the collapsing Water Mansion, just before the hand could close, and bolted up toward the sky, attempting to escape into the distance. The adversary¡¯s escape speed was extremely quick, covering more than ten miles in an instant. However, Che Shidao was prepared and wouldn¡¯t let the opponent succeed. ¡°Want to escape? Stop right there,¡± he sneered coldly. Following that, with a flick of his finger, a streak of golden light flew out. Catching up from behind and striking the black shadow. With a bang, a burst of blood appeared! ¡°Aha€¡±¡± A distant black shadow cried out in pain, its swiftly running figure suddenly stalled, then fell from the sky. At this moment, after clearing out hundreds of water monsters from the river bottom, the gigantic cloud hand also rose to the surface. Chapter 1225 - Chapter 1225 Chapter 488 Making Enemies with Dragon Palace_2 ?Chapter 1225: Chapter 488: Making Enemies with Dragon Palace_2 Chapter 1225: Chapter 488: Making Enemies with Dragon Palace_2 With a swift motion, he brought the falling shadow right in front of him. Boom! The shadow hit the grounda€¡±a terrifying black snake with dark scales, a fierce body, a gaping mouth, and a few black whiskers around its snout appeared in everyone¡¯s sight. ¡°Immortal, spare my life, spare my life!¡± When the black snake was captured and returned, it dared not make any fuss and pleaded for mercy as soon as it spoke. This timidity, so aware of the situation, bore no resemblance to its appearance. The huge contrast made quite a few people smirk. Upon seeing this, Che Shidao couldn¡¯t help but laugh. ¡°You little snake, trying to escape in front of me, a True Person. Does it hurt after being hit by my Divine Power?¡± ¡°It hurts, it hurts so much¡­¡± The Blackwater Snake grimaced, blood oozing from the wound left by the Divine Power, and trembled, ¡°This small demon didn¡¯t recognize the Divine Powers of the Immortal, and foolishly tried to escape, I beg you to spare my life.¡± With its life in someone else¡¯s hands, the Blackwater Snake, even if it were a Demon King, showed no backbone at all. Not everyone can face death without fear. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã? Being defiant at such a time is either foolish, failing to understand the situation, or possessing integrity, not fearing death. Clearly, this Blackwater Snake was neither of these; it was merely a common monster that clung to life and feared death. ¡°If you want me to spare you, that will depend on your performance,¡± Che Shidao restrained his smile, then looked at the snake demon and asked seriously, ¡°I ask you, where are you from? Having come from Youxin Country, what are your intentions?¡± Hearing this question, the Blackwater Snake turned its yellow, turbid eyes and replied, ¡°True Person, this small demon is a wild snake from the mountains of Dongyang Domain that turned into a demon after enduring hundreds of years of harsh cultivation. Hearing about the turmoil in Changqing Domain and the kingdoms without rulers, I harbored greed and came to seize their fortunes, aspiring to become immortal. True Person, please see! Since arriving in Youxin Country, this small demon has never killed a person; instead, I gathered all the lesser water demons from the Changshui River, making them behave and preventing them from causing trouble. The gathering of demons previously that attacked Sanhe City, I directly refused to follow. If True Person does not believe me, you can ask the deities around if this is true? This small demon has only been diligently cultivating, aiming only to become immortal, never intending to cause chaos in the world. I implore you, Immortal, to have mercy and spare this small demon¡¯s life.¡± The numerous divine spirits of Youxin Country next to him all nodded slightly, confirming what he said was true. This Blackwater Snake, aside from seizing the Water Mansion and driving out the River God, truly hadn¡¯t committed any horrific deeds against heaven and earth. On the contrary, If it weren¡¯t for its restraints on the hundreds of water demons in the river, making them behave without causing trouble, given the previous chaos in Youxin Country, who knows what these water demons along the Changshui would have turned the place into. From this perspective, this Blackwater Snake indeed had some merits in pacifying the people. However, Che Shidao disregarded this, coldly laughing, ¡°At this point, you still dare to deceive me with your words? What kind of mountain wild snake possesses the bloodline of a True Dragon? What kind of mountain wild snake can restrain its predatory nature and even proactively control demons to behave? If not for some grand scheme, which demon would do such a thing? Not eaten people in Youxin Country? What about other places? With that bloody aura around you, do you really think you can fool me? It seems you truly no longer wish to live by concocting these lies. Oh well, it seems useless to question further; better to just flay and debone you, and use you to brew wine. The rest, once I obtain your Divine Soul, I will slowly interrogate you,¡± he said. As Che Shidao was about to take action, The Blackwater Snake, whose movement was restricted on the ground, was terrified out of its wits. It quickly cried out, ¡°True Person, wait, True Person, wait, this small demon will confess everything, confess everything.¡± However, Che Shidao no longer wished to waste words with it. With a flick of his finger, he directly cut off the demon¡¯s lifeline. Then with a gesture, he used a soul-capturing spell to extract the soul of the Blackwater Snake from its body and directly stored it in his sleeve, Prepared to interrogate it later. After finishing these actions, he then turned around, calm and composed, looking into the distance in another direction, and spoke loudly, ¡°Fellow Daoist has been watching for quite a while, still planning to hide and not show yourself, just spectate from the sidelines?¡± The deities nearby, just having witnessed Che Shidao executing the snake demon and extracting its soul, felt secretly alarmed. They realized that this Immortal was a person of fierce methods, difficult to deal with. They determined that they must be more cautious in their future interactions with him. Only when the Immortal suddenly spoke did they realize that someone had been observing them all along, which again startled them, and they quickly looked around, trying to discern where the person was. ¡°Hahaha¡­¡± A laughter echoed from afar, and then a Daoist in yellow robes, riding a lucky cloud, floated over. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The person was accompanied by pure air and a profound aura, with a presence so ethereal it was indescribable. Without a doubt, this was another True Immortal possessing Dao Fruit. ¡°Poor Daoist Zhu Zhenghe from Xuan Turtle Mountain, greets this fellow Daoist of Taiping Dao,¡± The newcomer declared his identity, gave a bow, then added with a slight apology, ¡°I have long heard that a Daoist from Youxin Country had swiftly rid the nation of the demons plaguing it for three hundred years, returning peace unto this land, truly a great deed of virtue. Even the Qing Immortal Sect has praised it immensely, voluntarily ceding the ownership of Youxin Country. Being from the neighboring Youshan Country at Xuan Turtle Mountain, having such a neighbor, I¡¯ve long wanted to meet you.¡± Chapter 1226 - Chapter 1226 Chapter 488 Making Enemies with Dragon Palace_3 ?Chapter 1226: Chapter 488: Making Enemies with Dragon Palace_3 Chapter 1226: Chapter 488: Making Enemies with Dragon Palace_3 ¡°` ¡°Previously, since the location of your Mountain Gate had not been established, it would have been inappropriate to visit you hastily.¡± ¡°This time, hearing that you had confirmed the site for your Mountain Gate, I thought it would be good to pay a visit, but it was pure chance that I arrived during this incident.¡± ¡°I hope you will forgive me for any presumptuousness.¡± With those words, Zhu Zhenghe explained why he had appeared here. In his speech, he expressed the goodwill of Xuan Turtle Mountain. However, Che Shidao just listened and didn¡¯t really believe his story. What coincidence to arrive just at that moment? If all such matters in the world were so coincidental, then coincidences would not be coincidences at all. The black snake had just chased away the Long Water River Lord, and then these people immediately showed up nearby. Zhu Zhenghe claimed to visit Taiping Dao, but the Immortal Sect¡¯s Mountain Gate was in Mi Yun Mountain, to the north of this Water Mansion. Youshan Country was northeast of Mi Yun Mountain. If they truly intended to visit, they could have headed directly west, so why did they take such a huge detour to come to this Water Mansion? Weren¡¯t they just hearing the wind and coming to have a look, poking around to investigate my strength? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï Having a neighbor suddenly appear next to oneself, especially an Immortal Sect with a True Immortal, Xuan Turtle Mountain¡¯s first reaction would hardly be welcoming, but rather caution and vigilance. ¡°How can one allow others to sleep soundly by the side of one¡¯s couch?¡± This is something many people understand. These current words are just an excuse to save face for everyone involved. Otherwise, if the truth were told and faces torn, it would be uncomfortable for everyone. Che Shidao did not pursue these matters, and seeing that Zhu Zhenghe had offered a way to deescalate, he went along with it. ¡°I am Che Shidao of Taiping Dao, and I greet you, friend Zhu.¡± He returned the courtesy, stated his identity, and then said with a smile, ¡°So it is a fellow from Xuan Turtle Mountain. I have long heard that Xuan Turtle Mountain is one of the most prominent Grand Fairy Doors in the Southern Domain of the nine nations. I have always wanted to pay a visit. I had not yet made my way to your door when you came first, sparing me much effort indeed.¡± Zhu Zhenghe laughed, ¡°Oh, is that so? After my visit to your Mountain Gate, why not come with me to Xuan Turtle Mountain? I will give you a grand tour. I do not boast, but Xuan Turtle Mountain has three great wonders renowned throughout the Changqing Domain. In the past, many fellow cultivators from various places made special trips just to enjoy the view.¡± Che Shidao had not expected the other party to be so accommodating. He was just being polite, and yet the man had seized the opportunity to invite him to Xuan Turtle Mountain. How could he possibly go? That was the opponent¡¯s stronghold; who knows how many traps were set up there? Certainly, Xuan Turtle Mountain harbored no small animosity toward Taiping Dao. If he really followed the man back to their Mountain Gate, entering their home ground, he would find it difficult to cope with whatever Zhu Zhenghe had in mind. Such risks would be foolish to undertake. Even though I am an Avatar, meant to test dangers, my life should not be wasted so carelessly. Therefore, Che Shidao tactfully declined: ¡°The matter is not pressing, we can speak of it another day. Now that Taiping Dao has just settled in Youxin Country, countless demons still skulk and sneak within our borders. Without clearing these hazards, how could we secure peace for the world?¡± ¡°` ¡°Since Taiping Dao has taken over the Heavenly Mandate of Youxin Country from Changqing Immortal Sect, it naturally falls upon us to protect our land and ensure the peace and safety of our people, so as not to fail the trust placed in us.¡± Inviting Che Shidao to Xuan Turtle Mountain was merely an offhand suggestion. Seeing that the other party didn¡¯t take the bait, Zhu Zhenghe simply smiled and took over the conversation. Then, changing his tone, he spoke with added gravity, ¡°I admire your concern for the world, my friend. However, when it comes to subduing monsters and eliminating demons, there are a few things I must warn you about, lest you offend someone without knowing and end up in danger.¡± Che Shidao furrowed his brows, ¡°If I have offended someone, I would ask you to speak plainly.¡± Zhu Zhenghe pointed at the ground to the corpse of the black snake, which had been drained of its soul, and said with a smile, ¡°Are you aware of the origins of this black snake? What it said earlier was indeed deceitful; its origins are not that of a common serpent from the mountains of Dongyang Domain. Its true identity is that of the third son of the Dragon King of Jiuchuan Demon Country, with the genuine bloodline of a flood dragon. Furthermore, its bloodline is extremely pure and rich. It was not far from transforming into a flood dragon and condensing the True Dragon Blood.¡± The cultivation practices of the demon clan differ greatly from those of the Human Race¡¯s Immortal Sects. Or it could be said that within the demon clan itself, each tribe has a myriad of bizarre cultivation methods; even those within the same tribe do not have a unified approach. Among the Human Race, this Tao Inheritance does have the realms differentiated by Five Qi Towards Primordial and Three Flowers Gathering Atop. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? However, those are merely representations of the realms. There are cultivators who do not follow this path of qi refinement, seeking other methods of becoming immortal. As long as one achieves immortality and longevity, that is considered the true path. On the other hand, or at least for the flood dragons of Jiuchuan Monster Nation, the path they follow revolves around condensing True Dragon Bloodline and ultimately transforming into dragons, thus attaining Dao Fruit. Zhu Zhenghe explained the flood dragons¡¯ cultivation method of Jiuchuan Demon Country and continued, ¡°This black snake is the third son of the old dragon from Jiuchuan Dragon Palace. In terms of favoritism, he comes second only to his elder brother who has already become a flood dragon. Even the purity of his bloodline is second only to his brother. Therefore, among the old dragon¡¯s offspring, if there were predictions about who is most likely to become a flood dragon, this son would undoubtedly be the prime candidate. And indeed this black snake has shown promise. It is said that in just two hundred years, it has reached the Five Qi Towards Primordial, its bloodline nurtured to perfection, revealing a bulge under its belly, indicating the tendency to grow dragon claws. ¡°All it needs now is to accumulate its foundational strength, allowing its bloodline to transform and turn into True Dragon Blood and it could become a flood dragon. As soon as it transforms into a flood dragon, that would be the attainment of Dao Fruit, and it could be called a Demon Immortal, ranking alongside us.¡± It is just that the fate of Jiuchuan Demon Country has already been consumed by that old dragon and his eldest son to support the two flood dragons, leaving barely enough remaining. To further support the third son in becoming a flood dragon would be even less feasible. Therefore, over these past years, the old dragon has set his sights on the fate of other nations.¡± You were asking why this black snake lurked at the bottom of the Long Water River in Youxin Country, causing neither waves nor showing its claws; what was its purpose? The truth is, it wished to see those demons ruin the foundation of Changqing Immortal Sect in this country, using the wild monsters as its pioneers, to take the brunt of any lightning strikes. Then, once the great deed was accomplished, and Youxin Country abandoned, it would then step in to pick the fruits of victory. It dared not outright seize Youxin Country, but had the guts to skulk behind other demons and pick up scraps. However, you suddenly stepping in, with Taiping Dao taking charge of Youxin Country, was akin to snatching food from the black snake¡¯s mouth. Now that you have killed this black snake, you have completely destroyed one of Jiuchuan Dragon Palace¡¯s most hopeful bloodlines to become a flood dragon. With the vengeance of blocking the path and killing an offspring, that old dragon will probably not let things lie. In the future, having him show up at your doorstep with his troops of shrimp soldiers and crab generals would be quite normal. Given the enmity you¡¯ve incurred, I would advise you to be more cautious in your future endeavors, to avoid any carelessness that might play into the enemy¡¯s hands.¡± Zhu Zhenghe showed concern while fanning the flames with his words, donning the guise of a well-meaning friend, offering a warning for your own good. Chapter 1227 - Chapter 1227 Chapter 489 Deterring Foreign Enemies ?Chapter 1227: Chapter 489: Deterring Foreign Enemies Chapter 1227: Chapter 489: Deterring Foreign Enemies ¡°Are they coming to attack?¡± Upon hearing Zhu Zhenghe¡¯s words, Che Shidao snorted coldly, releasing his previously restrained aura without reservation. The tremendous pressure of a late-stage Human Immortal forced many Divine Spirits present, including Zhu Zhenghe himself, to involuntarily step back a few steps, their faces drastically changing. ¡°If that old mudfish dares to come, it will be perfect to capture him and stew a mudfish soup,¡± he said. Observing the sudden change in Zhu Zhenghe¡¯s expression, Che Shidao spoke with a hint of mystery, ¡°My Taiping Dao has just relocated to the Changqing Domain, and I am worried about settling a small country. If that old dragon truly wishes to court death, we might as well kill him and conveniently take over Jiuchuan Country to establish another branch. Friend, what do you think of this idea?¡± Listening to this, it was unclear whether he was referring to the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace, their Xuan Turtle Mountain, or some other forces. Zhu Zhenghe¡¯s expression was slightly unpleasant. He had never expected that this newly relocated Taiping Dao would have a late-stage Human Immortal among its ranks. Such cultivation was not something that ordinary Immortal Sects could sustain. Even the current Che Shidao, reputedly only an elder of Taiping Dao and not the School Leader, made it all the more terrifying. Considering this, facing the veiled threats from the other party, Zhu Zhenghe could only force a smile and nod, ¡°What the friend says is true, with your cultivation, a mere old dragon is trivial. Previously, my warning seems to have been overly concerned, an unnecessary alarm. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Please do not laugh at me.¡± Overpowered by the situation, Che Shidao¡¯s sudden revelation of his cultivation had completely disrupted his plans. Originally, he had wanted to provoke a conflict between Taiping Dao and the Jiuchuan Demon Country. Regardless of who won or lost, Xuan Turtle Mountain could follow behind and reap considerable benefits. If even the snake at our feet can play the role of the opportune bird, why can¡¯t Xuan Turtle Mountain? Indeed, they cannot. Although there are many Immortal Sects and Monster Nations in the entire Southern Domain, most of the immortals and Demon Immortals are only in the early or mid stages, with none in the late stages. The two immortals of Xuan Turtle Mountain are merely at the early stages of Human Immortal. However, that old dragon of the Jiuchuan Demon Country, possessing true dragon bloodline, is indeed extraordinary. His cultivation has already reached the mid-stage of Human Immortal, making him the foremost in the entire Southern Domain. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 Due to this dragon¡¯s immense strength, Xuan Turtle Mountain is frequently at a disadvantage in their conflicts. Otherwise, for the struggle over Xiaye Country, why bother with supporting Spiritual Beasts and Dao soldiers? Why not send another branch directly and fight openly? Because they cannot overpower him, they can only support a proxy to minimize losses. The appearance of Taiping Dao, seizing many people¡¯s shares, is truly infuriating. However, a sudden addition of a force also brought new variables. Therefore, Xuan Turtle Mountain considered using this situation, letting Taiping Dao and Jiuchuan Demon Country fight, to lessen their own pressure. But it now seems that they thought too much. A mid-stage Human Immortal old dragon has already pressured all immortals in the Southern Domain, leaving them breathless. At this moment, a late-stage Human Immortal from Taiping Dao has arrived, which is even more like a dimension-reducing strike, unmatched by anyone else. ¡®The skies of these nine countries in the Southern Domain are likely to change!¡¯ As Zhu Zhenghe looked at the imposing figure of the Taiping Dao True Person, a sudden realization dawned in him. The shallow pond has suddenly welcomed a fierce dragon crossing the river, and how could they, the small fishes and shrimps living in the pond, withstand it? ¡°Ignorance is no sin; you need not worry, friend,¡± he said. Watching Zhu Zhenghe force a smile, Che Shidao sneered in his heart. This display of strength was per the instructions of the supreme being, intended to intimidate the local ill-intentioned. At this moment, it appeared that their otherwise unfriendly neighbor had been frightened. Such fear is beneficial, as it prompts careful consideration before acting. Xuan Turtle Mountain, though not very impressive in the entire Changqing Domain, is still one of the foremost powers in the Southern Domain. Right now, the initial show of force was to intimidate the other party to prevent them from creating trouble. With this in mind, Che Shidao looked at Zhu Zhenghe and waved his hand, ¡°As you have come to visit, and since I just rid us of that vile monster and am currently free, I might as well take you back to Mi Yun Mountain. Over there at the Mountain Gate, we have just made some space, it¡¯s a humble place but acceptable for hosting guests. If you do not mind, please come with me.¡± Zhu Zhenghe hurriedly waved his hand, ¡°No, no. I merely wanted to meet and see who my new neighbor was. Now that I have met you and witnessed your imposing manner, my wish is fulfilled. Since Mi Yun Mountain is still under construction, I shall not impose further. When your sect formally establishes the branch and officially opens the Mountain Gate, it will not be too late to visit then.¡± As a joke. Just as Che Shidao wouldn¡¯t dare to go with Zhu Zhenghe to Xuan Turtle Mountain, could Zhu Zhenghe dare to follow him to Mi Yun Mountain? His Xuan Turtle Mountain only has two Human Immortals, both at the early stage, and its current prominence is merely due to their numbers. If he took a risk and perished there, the flourishing scene of Xuan Turtle Mountain would be abruptly halted. Furthermore, his recent ascension to Human Immortal could lead to a situation where no successors are left, possibly causing issues with their lineage. Initially, it took Xuan Turtle Mountain a whole two thousand years to cultivate Zhu Zhenghe, producing only their second immortal. If he were to die, with only two to three hundred years of lifespan remaining for their School Leader, there is almost no possibility of cultivating a second Human Immortal. Chapter 1228 - Chapter 1228 Chapter 489 Deter External Enemies_2 ?Chapter 1228: Chapter 489: Deter External Enemies_2 Chapter 1228: Chapter 489: Deter External Enemies_2 For this reason, Zhu Zhenghe had always been careful and cautious in his travels across the world for all these years, never daring to venture into dangerous places lightly, and always prioritizing kindness in his interactions with others, with self-preservation as his foremost guiding principle. Che Shidao had a saying that spoke volumes. When Taiping Dao first arrived, considering the sect¡¯s strength, a small country was clearly insufficient to satisfy their appetite. Without taking over the territories of two or three small countries, they simply couldn¡¯t settle Taiping Dao properly. At this time, Taiping Dao deceived him into going to Mi Yun Mountain, then entered their lair, and suddenly launched an assassination, slaughtering him. With one less Immortal at Xuan Turtle Mountain and only an aging School Leader remaining, they could hardly cope. It probably wouldn¡¯t be long before Xuan Turtle Mountain would be destroyed, and Youshan Country would be annexed by Taiping Dao, smoothly achieving their expansion purposes. Throughout the whole process, only Xuan Turtle Mountain would suffer, while other surrounding forces would all breathe a sigh of relief. Because there was already someone to take the bullets, Taiping Dao had gained territory to settle in and would no longer scheme against others. Everyone else was safe. Though all these were just malicious speculations. At this moment, the elder from Taiping Dao across him didn¡¯t say much on the surface. But he knew clearly in his heart what he had done. Xuan Turtle Mountain had schemed against Youxin Country because of this matter, leading to a conflict of interests with Taiping Dao. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã0 Zhu Zhenghe would never be so foolish as to follow them to their lair, entrusting his life to outsiders¡¯ righteousness and kindness. Regardless of the possibility, he would not take such a risk. ¡°I see, that¡¯s truly a pity.¡± Seeing Zhu Zhenghe refuse, Che Shidao sighed somewhat regretfully. The other side had guessed correctly, he did indeed have some thoughts just now. Compared to Qingyang Country, which was not adjacent to Youxin and located in the complex political landscape of the Western Domain, neighboring Youshan Country, right next to it, was undoubtedly a better choice for Taiping Dao to establish a branch. Once this place was taken, the two countries could join forces, support each other in a mutually defensive position, and instantly stabilize their foothold in this Southern Domain. The only bit of trouble, was that Xuan Turtle Mountain had two Human Immortals, which were somewhat difficult to deal with. But the main trouble was still Zhu Zhenghe. Once he was removed, the remaining old Immortal with not much lifespan left, even if he stayed guarding the Mountain Gate and didn¡¯t venture out, wouldn¡¯t last long. After enduring a few hundred years, they could simply wear him down. When there were no Human Immortals left to guard, relying only on a protective mountain formation, how long could Xuan Turtle Mountain hold out? Sooner or later, it would just be another branch of Taiping Dao. However, by doing so, Taiping Dao¡¯s reputation would definitely be ruined. But Lu Yuan had already decided that after occupying territories of the two countries, for the next few thousand, or even ten thousand years, they would stay low and quietly develop. In such a scenario, amidst the external turmoil and the multitude of opinions, what use was it? I won¡¯t venture out, nor interact with anyone, so how useful are your opinions to me? Just ignore it. Unfortunately, the other side didn¡¯t fall for it. ¡°Since fellow Daoist still has demons to eliminate, I won¡¯t keep you any longer. There are some matters at my sect, so I will take my leave now.¡± Seeing Che Shidao¡¯s strange demeanor, Zhu Zhenghe felt an even greater sense of crisis. It felt like if he stayed any longer, disaster was imminent. He didn¡¯t dare linger and promptly bid his farewell. ¡°Farewell, fellow Daoist.¡± Che Shidao couldn¡¯t hold him back and could only utter a word, then watched him leave. ¡®This time, having intimidated Zhu Zhenghe, with him returning, and with the many former divine beings present, news of my cultivation reaching the late stage of Human Immortal should soon spread throughout the nine countries of the Southern Domain. Other humans and demons, hearing this news, likely won¡¯t dare to behave recklessly in Youxin Country any longer, and I can enjoy a period of peace. During this time, I¡¯ll exert some effort to clear the demons and monsters within the country, by then my true body should have also set up the protective mountain formation. When that happens, I can widely invite friends from Immortal Sects across the world, to come and pay their respects, and it¡¯s precisely in this Changqing Domain, that I will establish a sect. After all this, I can govern from a distance and hide in the mountains, finding peace at last.¡¯ As an avatar that had always been running errands, Che Shidao also harbored his ambitions. To steal a brief moment of leisure from life. To touch a thousand-year fish and comfortably reside at home as a hermit was indeed the correct way to utilize an avatar. The branch was established, and the disciples were recruited. The body would give him tasks, he would delegate them to the disciples, layer by layer, so it was as if I had nothing to do; the logic was perfect. Thus, the decision was made with pleasure. Thinking this in his heart, he looked at the many divine spirits beside him, and with a stern face, said, ¡°What are you still watching? Now that I have eliminated this black snake, aren¡¯t there other monsters throughout the nation? Can¡¯t you handle even a small matter? You always need me to take action; where is your sense of duty to defend your territories? I give you three months to clear all the demons, monsters, spirits, and shadows within the nation cleanly. Otherwise, whoever still has monsters within their jurisdiction, I shall indeed punish.¡± Seeing these sluggish and incompetent subordinates, possibly filled with numerous spies, Che Shidao¡¯s mood, which had just brightened, immediately fell. These guys were simply unusable. I even had to intervene personally for the removal of a minor monster. Compared to how I manage everything perfectly with no mistakes when given orders by the avatar myself. These subordinates fell far short. In the future, once there are enough manpower, I must replace all these wastes. Otherwise, my wish to rule effortlessly would never be fulfilled until my dying day. ¡°Yes, your subordinate will go handle it immediately.¡± Having just witnessed the majesty of the Immortal, the divine spirits, feeling guilty, didn¡¯t dare to retort. Upon hearing the command, they scattered like the wind, as if given a great reprieve. ¡°Such a bunch of incompetent fools.¡± Che Shidao, watching the retreating figures of these divine spirits, cursed softly and, too lazy to bother further, mounted the auspicious clouds and flew towards Mi Yun Mountain. Before leaving, he directly extinguished the soul of that black snake. Now that the opponent¡¯s origins were clear, there was no need to search its soul; keeping this snake¡¯s divine soul was utterly useless. Though the Divine Soul was not of much use, Che Shidao did take the corpse of the black snake, bringing it back with him. As previously mentioned, if he said he would stew the black snake, then it would definitely be stewed. ¡°A black snake of Five Qi Towards Primordial, of true dragon lineage about to transform into a dragon. Stewing it into soup would certainly be a great nourishment. My own cultivation is still hovering at Five Qi Towards Primordial, quite a distance from becoming immortal.¡± Just right to stew it into soup and consume, my cultivation is bound to advance by leaps and bounds. I offer up these things, the avatar is definitely pleased. By mentioning this on the side, I estimate that in the few coming months, I probably won¡¯t be assigned any tasks Until the expansion of the Mountain Gate, I can lie in the mountains, happily fishing.¡± Thinking cheerfully to himself, moments later, the silhouette of Mi Yun Mountain was already in sight. This new home in the Immortal Realm, I have arrived. ¡­ While Che Shidao was pondering how to slack off, Lu Yuan¡¯s other avatar from Taiping Dao, continuing westward from Yi Dancheng. After leisurely traveling and enjoying the scenery for nearly half a month, he finally left Youxin Country and reached the Great Eye Kingdom, which laid directly west bordering Youxin. For the past few centuries, Youxin had been plagued with monsters, chaos rampant, leaving the local commoners in deep misery, living in fear day and night. But fortunately, there were divine spirits and the Changqing Branch overseeing from above. Within the territories controlled by the Immortal Sect, some order and peace were still maintained. The people¡¯s days were tough, but at least they could carry on. However, the neighboring Great Eye Kingdom, bordering Youxin, had already become a hell on earth a thousand years ago. Because this nation is now known as the Great Eye Monster Nation. Yes, a thousand years ago, Great Eye had already fallen to monsters, turning into a paradise for demons. The human residents living there, amidst the demons, might survive momentarily, but what would their end be? Nothing more than like livestock bred by humans, raised by those demons for blood food, to be consumed at their leisure. In such a place, how could it not be a hell on earth? ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï But it was precisely because of this. That Lu Yuan, when initially choosing the second branch location for Taiping Dao, specially selected Qingyang Country. Among other reasons, it was because, once Youxin and Qingyang developed, with surplus strength in the future, he could directly obliterate this Monster Nation, and then unite the three kingdoms into one entity. Chapter 1229 - Chapter 1229 Chapter 490 Damu Slaying the Monster ?Chapter 1229: Chapter 490 Damu Slaying the Monster Chapter 1229: Chapter 490 Damu Slaying the Monster ¡°It is said that the ruler of the Great Eye Kingdom is a six-eyed man-eating spider, with two dominant eyes, immensely large, occupying half of its head, hence the name Great Eye. This Great Eye Kingdom has thus changed its name accordingly. Being famous for its pair of eyes, the divine powers of this monster spider mostly reside in those eyes. Legend has it that with a turn of its eyes, it can emit a soul-stirring ghostly light, bewitching the souls of men, leading them astray. In such moments, the spider could easily take the opportunity to devour its prey, enjoying the spoils of the hunt. If one wishes to eliminate this demon in the future, caution must be taken against those monstrous eyes.¡± Having entered the Great Eye Kingdom, the relaxed demeanor Yi Dancheng had while enjoying scenic mountains and waters abruptly tightened, and he began to strategize about the great demon in this nation. Although he considered his Late-stage Human Immortal combat abilities sufficient to traverse freely across the Southern Domain, the six-eyed spider demon in this monster nation was likely not his match. However, underestimating the enemy in strategy is one matter. Treating the matter seriously tactically is quite another. Inheriting the cautious nature of his original self, Yi Dancheng was also very careful in his actions, not unduly underestimating the opponent. After all, as a great demon that had attained Dao Fruit, surviving hardships to become immortal indicates its capabilities. In this world of cultivation, there are countless mysterious and strange divine powers and magical treasures. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Who knows how many? There might just be some that could restrain him. If one were careless and negligent, one might lose one¡¯s life here. Even if his original self later brought an Earth Immortal Dao Fruit to seek revenge and regain the External Tool Dao Fruit and the Heavenly Son¡¯s robe, creating another avatar, it would be another soul inhabiting the Dao Fruit, bearing another name, not him Yi Dancheng anymore. Of course. As an avatar, dying for the original self is a matter of course. If there truly was such a command from the original self, Yi Dancheng would not hesitate even for a moment; he would brave fire and water to carry out the task. But since there is no such command at the moment, for the sake of his own survival, it¡¯s better to play it safe. Just the thought made him smile wryly: ¡°However, to conquer this demon nation, it won¡¯t be until two thousand years later, after both Che Shidao and I have become Earth Immortals, and the original self has become Human Immortal with some real strength, that we will start our move. At that time, as an Earth Immortal, sweeping away this mere Human Immortal¡¯s great demon will be as easy as blowing off dust.¡± Many problems in the world are merely temporary. Once one has developed sufficiently over time, building a strong foundation and power, previous problems will no longer be considered as such. The demon problem of the Great Eye Kingdom is exactly so. The turmoil across the entire Changqing Domain is also the same. Though it might seem a mess at the moment, with Immortal Sects, Divine Spirits, demons, evil spirits, and heretical cultivators fighting relentlessly, it¡¯s only because the domain is lacking a Great True Person to suppress it that turmoil has arisen. One only needs to wait for the forces to compete and bring forth a new Heavenly Flower Great True Person, whose Heavenly Immortal status is sufficient to sweep away all troubles and restore peace to the domain. What Lu Yuan is doing now is striving to be that person who will end this chaotic era.¡± ¡°In short, a heavy responsibility and a long road lie ahead,¡± sighed Yi Dancheng softly, then mounted his donkey and continued on his journey. This trip to establish a new branch in Qingyang Country afforded him plenty of time. According to the original self¡¯s intention, before he could initiate action, he had to wait until the original self broke through to Human Flower True Immortal and was able to separate out an Earth Immortal avatar. Only with these two layers of protection greatly increasing security, could he act. The whole process, at its fastest, would also take six to seven years. Or even longer, as with the former gods of Youxin Country, whose capabilities were truly lacking, taking a sluggish pace in clearing out demons and other malign spirits, one could not say how long they¡¯d drag it out. According to the current situation, it might take another two or three years before these fellows could manage to settle the matter. Only after they have cleared out the demons and restored local stability can they fully perform their divine duties, sort heaven and earth, and collect Qi Luck for the Taiping Dao, offering it to the sect. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï And now in Youxin Country, the divine positions are mostly vacant, many divine posts unfilled, and they simply cannot perform their duties. The most optimistic estimate of the Qi Luck that can be contributed is at best twenty to thirty percent of the whole. While this amount of Qi Luck can¡¯t be said to be useless, it¡¯s also hardly enough to play a decisive role, The only good thing is that after reclaiming the entire Youxin Country and establishing formal rule over the region, Lu Yuan could again start to collect Qi Luck for his own cultivation. Relying on the Qi Luck of a whole country to fill in, along with the addition of Qi Luck, his cultivation speed will not fall much behind. Even at double the joy, the process could be even faster. He estimated that within five or six years, he could accumulate enough to break through to Human Immortal. This duration, though seemingly slow, is extremely fast compared to other cultivators who have spent hundreds of years stuck at the Five Qi Towards Primordial level, unable to advance further. For Lu Yuan to spend just five or six years to achieve Human Flower Dao Fruit is frightfully fast. Five or six years, in the blink of an eye, a cultivator¡¯s retreat could just pass by. But how many in the world can break through a great realm and transform from mortal to immortal just within the duration of a retreat? Moreover, since Lu Yuan¡¯s lifespan is now boundless, there¡¯s even less need to hurry. He has already made a strategic plan for ten thousand years, prepared to use tens of thousands of years to smooth his path towards becoming the Heavenly Flower Great True Person. With such an extended timeline, he cares even less about these five or six years.¡± ¡°So there¡¯s plenty of time, no need to rush the takeover of Qingyang Country. First, spend a year or two properly exploring this Great Eye Kingdom, probing the details of this neighbor, making some preparations for eradicating this country later on. Chapter 1230 - Chapter 1230 Chapter 490 Damu Slaying the Monster_2 ?Chapter 1230: Chapter 490 Damu Slaying the Monster_2 Chapter 1230: Chapter 490 Damu Slaying the Monster_2 ¡°After browsing around, it will take another three or four years to set up a layout in Qingyang Country and establish a separate residence.¡± Yi Dancheng had a very steady mindset, so the journey was quite to his liking. In this small country of the Immortal Realm, the territory is still very vast. In comparison to the Nine Provinces, it¡¯s almost a third of that size, with the Nine Provinces spanning more than a hundred thousand miles. Without using escape techniques to hasten his travel, Yi Dancheng simply rode a donkey at a leisurely pace. To cover the entire distance in one or two years, one could only travel in a straight line. Fortunately, he was not a rigid man. Riding a donkey for pleasure was just a pastime for him. On this journey, he encountered mountains and waters, and faced impassable natural dangers, he would use the Riding Clouds and Controlling Air technique to fly right over them. His main principle was to follow his heart and be free. And throughout this journey, what he heard and saw was indeed shocking. Even though the Great Eye Kingdom had been ruled by the Six-eyed Spider demon for over a thousand years, establishing a fairly stable order, this order was built on the division and subordination of various demons, each layer oppressing the one below, all based on strength. It was all about the survival of the fittest. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Great Demons ate smaller ones, the smaller ones ate spirits, and these spirits consumed humans. Humans, being at the bottom of the hierarchy, were treated entirely like livestock, reared within various city towns and villages. During festivals, they had to supply blood meals for the enjoyment of those demon masters. As for the methods of consumption, they were diversely grotesque and unbearable to witness. There were indeed some kind demons, similar to the old fox that Lu Yuan encountered right after his ascension, who harbored good feelings towards humans. But such demons were not mainstream nor influential; they could only protect some humans within their own territories from other demon harassments. However, under the hierarchical structure of feudal vassalage, the lower demons were required to make offerings to those above them, which meant paying tribute in terms of their lifetime as a form of taxation. Therefore, even with protection, they still inevitably had to send out some blood meals every year, suffering exploitation. All they could do was to abstain from consuming humans themselves and not partake in the exploitation. Living in such a kingdom, people truly lived like animals, facing a bleak existence unless they were fools, who lived their entire lives in blissful ignorance, until the moment they were to be slaughtered as food. As a human being, even if it was just a human avatar, Yi Dancheng naturally could not stand by and do nothing upon witnessing his kin suffer so grievously. So along the way, every time he saw demons that were harming and farming humans, he would unsheath his sword and cut them down without hesitation. He went wherever he saw trouble, killing all the way. He also encountered some kind demons along the road, and without being indiscriminate, he spared their lives. He comforted them with kind words and asked them to lead the rescued humans directly to the eastern Youxin Country to resettle. Now Youxin Country was just settling down and needed to rebuild everything. Even the previous half of the country had been devastated by demons into a desolate wasteland with no one to be seen for miles. Over in Che Shidao, they were still struggling with how to revitalize Youxin Country and develop this barren land! ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 As a good brother and the School Leader of Taiping Dao, Yi Dancheng felt it was necessary to lend a hand to his junior brother and give him a boost. Youxin Country lacked people, whereas the Great Eye Kingdom had them in abundance. If the two could complement each other, wouldn¡¯t everything be revitalized? With this philosophy in mind, he traveled from east to west, cutting a swath through tens of thousands of miles and exterminating hundreds of demons, even beheading several Demon Kings. In the end, he saved tens of millions of people, entrusting them to dozens of kind demons to coordinate with Youxin Country for their resettlement. For Immortals and demons, what¡¯s difficult for mortals, such as relocating millions of people, is merely a trifle in the face of Dao Law and Divine Powers. Relocating the people thus was quite easy. The unabashedly bold actions of Yi Dancheng naturally attracted the attention of all the demons in the Great Eye Kingdom. A number of Demon Kings along the way were enraged by his deeds and came to teach this audacious Immortal Sect Cultivator a lesson. Unfortunately, in the face of Human Immortal magic powers and the gap between Great Realms, those little Demon Kings at the Five Qi Towards Primordial level were nothing significant at all. Any who dared to come, every single one of them, was left without a survivor. After three Demon Kings perished in this manner, the interior of the Great Eye Kingdom finally came to its senses, realizing they were dealing with a tough contender. It must mostly be an Immortal, not so easy to manipulate. That¡¯s what I thought too. How brazenly one acts in the Monster Nation; if not for Immortal means, wouldn¡¯t they fear provoking the anger of the Great Demon ruling as Country Lord? In fact, the Country Lord of the Great Eye Kingdom, the Great Demon, really was enraged. In the central part of the Great Eye Kingdom, Cangliang Mountain. That day, Yi Dancheng was still riding his donkey, leisurely slaying demons along the way until he reached this place. There, a demon wind blew, blocking his path. ¡°Fellow Daoist, as you traveled through our country, slaughtering our ministers and capturing our blood food, haven¡¯t you gone a bit too far? Did you really think we¡¯re so easy to bully?¡± The Country Lord of the Great Eye Kingdom, the Great Demon known as the Six-eyed Spider, now blocked the way, his face ugly as he stared at Yi Dancheng. In the Immortal Realm, regardless of whether they¡¯re Immortals, Demons, ghosts, or gods, actually cultivate the Immortal Method. After achieving the Dao Fruit, they would add the character for ¡®Immortal¡¯ after their respective paths. Therefore, based on this point, Cultivators of different paths, even if not of the same species, would address each other as ¡®Fellow Daoist¡¯ as long as they didn¡¯t want to break ranks. Hence, at this moment, the Six-eyed Lord addressed Yi Dancheng as ¡®Fellow Daoist,¡¯ clearly not wishing to fully rupture their relations. After all, he was a fellow Human Immortal; reaching their stage of cultivation was not easy. Nobody wanted to, after the great difficulty of becoming immortal, have to fight to the death with others. With the effort it takes to fight, wouldn¡¯t it be better to enjoy life? This time, the Six-eyed Lord intercepted because Yi Dancheng had truly gone too far, severely threatening his rule over the Great Eye Kingdom, crossing the tacit line between those who walk the same path. Otherwise, for you, an Immortal Sect Cultivator, wanting to slay demons and promote righteousness, it all seems very normal. The Six-eyed Lord wouldn¡¯t mind if some other small monsters under his command were killed, be it a few or a dozen. That hardly counts for anything. But killing hundreds at once, including even three Demon Kings, and rescuing tens of millions of livestock and people, now that was over the line. If this were to go unchecked, would not all the demons under his command think their Country Lord incompetent, allowing an Immortal Sect Cultivator to wreak havoc in their domain, unable to protect his subordinates? In the end, would they not all scatter, seeking other places? He himself would then become a commander without an army, with no one to use. Without those demons and without this system of enfeoffment, with what would the Six-eyed Lord rule the Great Eye Kingdom, with what would he gather providence? Without providence, how could he continue to cultivate on the Immortal Path? The lifespan of a great number of demon species is far less than that of Human Race Cultivators. Although he, the Six-eyed Spider, was naturally a Different Species with much more lifespan than ordinary spiders, allowing him to live for thousands of years after becoming immortal, nevertheless, no amount of lifespan can compare to that of a True Immortal of the Human Race. The remaining lifespan of the Six-eyed Lord was now less than a thousand years. If he couldn¡¯t break through realms and achieve Earth Immortal status in these remaining thousand years, then he would indeed die when his lifespan was exhausted. Therefore, for him, Yi Dancheng¡¯s actions were destroying his Great Tao, an enmity that blocked his path, a hatred that threatened his life. If he continued to endure, his very life would be at risk. How could he simply let this go? Of course, although enraged, with the notion that becoming immortal is not easy and unwilling to take risks, the Six-eyed Lord did not arrive bellowing for battle but hoped to talk it over, to see if a peaceful resolution could be reached. He maintained the utmost restraint in the face of Yi Dancheng¡¯s provocations. However, Yi Dancheng really showed no appreciation for the Six-eyed Lord¡¯s kindness. Seeing the latter question him, he replied with a cold sneer, ¡°We, Immortal Sect Cultivators, are righteously heroic, it is our duty to subdue demons. You demons, a contemptible kind, dare to domesticate humans and livestock, committing such evil acts within the realm of the Human Race. You should have been aware that one day, someone will come knock on your door to eliminate you, the demon. Previously, other Immortal Sects in the Southern Domain of the various countries ignored you, they were incompetent, that is their business. Now that I have arrived, the principles of righteousness have also arrived. You come at just the right time. I had not planned to find you in your lair, but since you came to me, it¡¯s perfect to slay you, to eliminate the ringleader, and clear the demon miasma. To restore the Great Eye Kingdom to a clear and bright universe.¡± Yi Dancheng was filled with righteous energy and refused to share the sun and the moon with demons. Chapter 1231 - Chapter 1231 Chapter 491 Soul-gathering Divine Light ?Chapter 1231: Chapter 491 Soul-gathering Divine Light Chapter 1231: Chapter 491 Soul-gathering Divine Light ¡°Arrogant!¡± Seeing that he had already tried so hard to be accommodating, and yet the cultivator from the Immortal Sect across from him remained so unrelenting, even uttering such wild claims, the Six-eyed Lord could no longer bear it. ¡°Very well, very well, if you are so bent on seeking death, I will oblige you,¡± he said, unable to suppress a laugh of exasperation. Then, without wasting any more words, he reached out his hand and summoned a soul-cleaving great saber, wrapped in black demonic light, which hung in front of him, pointing towards Yi Dancheng. ¡°Had this been done earlier, wouldn¡¯t it have been better? It would have spared me the trouble of wasting words,¡± he said. Yi Dancheng, upon seeing this, let out a long howl, stretched out his right hand, and with a flash of golden light, a yellow wooden iron staff was grasped within his hands. Lu Yuan had in his possession three Immortal Artifacts. One of them, the Taiping Sword, had been bestowed to Che Shidao, and the Heavenly Destiny Staff to Yi Dancheng. The remaining one, the Myriad Peoples Seal, was kept by himself for personal protection. Therefore, Yi Dancheng dared to be so tough, and it wasn¡¯t just a capricious act. Beyond his own combat strength as a late-stage Human Immortal, having an Immortal Artifact in hand was also an important reliance. Indeed. When the Heavenly Destiny Staff appeared, the Six-eyed Lord¡¯s expression changed, showing a few more shades of wary and fear. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À¦Ï.§ã¦Ï He recognized it as an Immortal Artifact. In comparison, his soul-cleaving great saber, although he had nurtured it for a thousand years, was still lacking in depth and had not yet transformed into an Immortal Artifact. An Immortal Artifact, wielded in the hands of an Immortal in combat, had an effect that was not as simple as adding one plus one equals two. With the same level of cultivation, one who possessed an Immortal Artifact could almost face three opponents. This was the gap between having a weapon and not having one. ¡®That scruffy Taoist, to actually have an Immortal Artifact, no wonder he dares to be so arrogant. This battle will be difficult to win,¡¯ thought the Six-eyed Lord, feeling a heavy sense of dread within him. But he did not let it show on his face. Instead, he shouted loudly. ¡°Humph, you arrogant fool, eat my blade!¡± As he spoke, he pinched a spell with his hand, and magic power surged within his body, entering the great saber in front of him. Instantly, the soul-cleaving great saber trembled slightly; the black light swirling around it expanded countless times, becoming blindingly brilliant. Then, with a surge of black light, the soul-cleaving great saber turned into a thin beam, slashing towards Yi Dancheng at an unimaginable speed. A strong sense of danger washed over Yi Dancheng, causing his heart to skip a beat. ¡®This blade, though only at the level of a Magical Artifact, possesses such might that even I feel threatened. I wonder what kind of effort and Divine Powers this spider monster has used to refine it.¡¯ With this thought, he dared not be careless. He immediately pinched a spell with both hands, placing several protective spells upon himself. Then the Heavenly Destiny Staff swept forward, bringing with it the overwhelming might of heaven, and smashed directly toward the black light. But at that moment. A dark and murky light from afar approached rapidly, reaching him even before the soul-cleaving great saber had a chance to. The murky light arrived so swiftly that even Yi Dancheng, caught off guard, could not react in time. ¡®Disaster strikes!¡¯ He exclaimed inwardly, and then the murky light passed straight through his protective spells and made contact with his body. A heavy force of faintness enveloped his whole body and muddled his Divine Soul. In the haze, Yi Dancheng¡¯s movements slowed, his consciousness became sluggish, his whole frame frozen mid-air, unable to move. But the soul-cleaving great saber did not stop its advance, it continued to slash towards him. His form immobilized, the flying blade still approached. In such circumstances, most would face certain death. ¡°Haha, Taoist, now that you¡¯ve been struck by my Soul-gathering Divine Light, your death is certain,¡± the Six-eyed Lord laughed heartily from a distance, seeing his Divine Power take effect. In the past, he had relied on this Divine Power, combined with the soul-cleaving great saber, to defeat countless strong enemies. Even cultivators of the same realm had fallen by his hand, with at least two succumbing. The True Immortals from all the surrounding Immortal Sects knew of his methods and were extremely wary, not daring to provoke him. Only the Immortal Sect Cultivator who had appeared out of nowhere before him, who was in a rush to subdue demons and exorcise monsters, did not assess his own abilities before presuming to act as the agent of Heaven. ¡°Did you not think that I, Six-eyed Lord, have been able to dominate a nation for a thousand years and remain safe and sound to this day? ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Is this something that could be achieved merely through good luck?¡± he thought sardonically, sneering to himself. This reckless Taoist before him would soon become the third Immortal to meet his end by his hands. This was a good opportunity to add some color to his already illustrious reputation. Lest those under the sky should think he had lost the ability to wield his blade after hundreds of years of inactivity. However, as he laughed, his laughter gradually slowed, and his expression turned increasingly grim. Because right before his eyes. The soul-cleaving great saber, which intended to seize the chance to claim Yi Dancheng¡¯s life while he was immobilized, was met with opposition. But the Heavenly Destiny Staff in Yi Dancheng¡¯s grasp had a mind of its own. Even though its master could not control it, the Immortal Artifact autonomously flew out, emitting endless immortal light. Relying on the authority of an Immortal Artifact, it blasted the soul-cleaving great saber, strengthened by its master, away. Temporarily dispelling the threat, the Heavenly Destiny Staff flew back. Arriving in front of Yi Dancheng, it released a burst of yellow light. Together with its master, who had now awoken and was struggling to break free from the Soul-gathering Divine Light, it effortlessly escaped the bind. ¡°That was close!¡± After shattering the Divine Light and regaining control of his body, Yi Dancheng quickly grasped the Heavenly Destiny Staff and placed it before him, warily eyeing the distant Six-eyed Lord. He had been careless for a moment and had nearly fallen for the monster¡¯s ploy. The Soul-gathering Divine Light was indeed formidable; any ordinary person, unprepared for such a sudden strike combined with the soul-cleaving great saber¡¯s assault, would truly be unable to cope. Chapter 1232 - Chapter 1232 Chapter 491 Soul-gathering Divine Light_2 ?Chapter 1232: Chapter 491 Soul-gathering Divine Light_2 Chapter 1232: Chapter 491 Soul-gathering Divine Light_2 ¡°If it hadn¡¯t been for the Heavenly Destiny Staff that my true form bestowed upon me this time, even if I could endure this set of combo moves, I would still likely lose half my life,¡± Yu Dancheng pondered in his heart. He was at the mid-level Human Immortal realm, and with the Magical Artifact external body he wore, he could exhibit the battle power of a late-stage Human Immortal. For the same reason, relying on the body of the Magical Artifact external body, even if he took a direct hit, the inherent toughness of the Magical Artifact body meant he wouldn¡¯t suffer much damage. At most, his body would be largely destroyed, but the core External Tool Dao Fruit, which was the Heavenly Son robe, would not be harmed. Because its true form, the Heavenly Son robe, was not only a Dao Fruit but also essentially a Middle Grade Immortal Artifact, one rank higher than the Heavenly Destiny Staff in his hand. If a Middle Grade Immortal Artifact could be easily damaged, then it wouldn¡¯t be called an Immortal Artifact. Especially when it¡¯s the Heavenly Son robe, which is renowned for its defense. But regardless, he was still afflicted by the attack just now, and because of this alone, he had begun to hold some dread towards the Six-eyed Lord, daring not to disdain him as previously. ¡°I didn¡¯t expect your Soul-gathering Divine Light to be so sharp; I nearly fell for your trick,¡± Yu Dancheng looked at the Six-eyed Lord with a solemn expression, ¡°Since that¡¯s the case, I will no longer hold back. Take this move of mine.¡± He raised the Heavenly Destiny Staff toward the sky. ¡°Summon the thunder, fall!¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï No sooner had Yu Dancheng finished speaking than the sky began to stir with dark clouds. Within a radius of several dozen li, the sky abruptly came overcast. Countless flashes of lightning flickered and then transformed into spears of lightning that, following his guidance, shot toward the Six-eyed Lord. ¡°Stinking Daoist, don¡¯t get cocky!¡± Seeing the terrifying scene of the thunder coming down, as a living creature, the Six-eyed Lord trembled, feeling an innate fear for his life. But he still clenched his teeth and held on, not showing any sign of weakness. Instead, with a flash in his eyes, another Soul-gathering Divine Light shot out, flying towards Yu Dancheng. However, having learned his lesson from before, Yu Dancheng was already on guard. He had cast several layers of protective spells in advance, ensuring that even if the Soul-splitting Great Blade came again, it would not penetrate his defenses. He also added some calming and mind-clearing spells so that even if he couldn¡¯t block the Soul-gathering Divine Light, he would enhance his Divine Soul¡¯s resistance, aiming to break free sooner. The Taiping Staff also turned into a yellow light, roaming around the surroundings, guarding against external enemies. With three layers of protection, he now feared the Soul-gathering Divine Light not at all. ¡®And I don¡¯t believe it, can you keep using a Divine Power like the Soul-gathering Divine Light indefinitely?¡¯ Yu Dancheng prepared himself, and as the Soul-gathering Divine Light approached, he couldn¡¯t help but sneer. After exhausting the opposite side¡¯s Divine Power, he would slowly deal with the old monster. ¡®Then I must gouge out his eyeballs and refine them into a Magical Artifact, making that Soul-gathering Divine Light mine.¡¯ He was ruthless in his thoughts. Then the Divine Light arrived, and just like before, in a moment of disorientation, it immobilized Yu Dancheng. But prepared as he was, it took him scarcely half a breath to break the Divine Light and regain control over his body. Then, when he was ready for the Soul-splitting Great Blade, he saw no such weapon before him, no attack at all. Instead, the Six-eyed Lord was far off in the distance, a Soul-splitting Great Blade above his head, transforming into a Black Light, fleeing rapidly into the distance. This old monster, upon seeing the situation turn against him, decisively turned to flee. In fact, from the moment he saw the Heavenly Destiny Staff, the Six-eyed Lord had a premonition that he could no longer contend with his adversary. Driven by a shred of unwillingness, he hadn¡¯t given up but had tried to make a move. As he anticipated, with the Immortal Artifact protecting his enemy, even if he immobilized his opponent¡¯s Divine Soul, he could still cause no harm. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? His strongest trump card had been so easily countered. Although he still had some spells and Supernatural Powers, compared to the Soul-gathering Divine Light and the Soul-splitting Great Blade, they were infinitely inferior, not at all on the same level. Unable to breach the enemy¡¯s defenses, that stinking Daoist naturally had the upper hand. In such a case, what was there to fight for? Better to run early. Otherwise, was he to stay and be struck by lightning? Thus, without any hesitation, the Six-eyed Lord made a hasty retreat from a thousand li away. Living for a thousand years was evidently not without its reasons. Such survival instinct was extraordinary. While he was having his fun, launching two Soul-gathering Divine Lights at Yu Dancheng, Yu Dancheng, on the other hand, was seething with rage. Hit and run, where in the world was it so easy? ¡°Don¡¯t you flee!¡± Yu Dancheng shouted angrily, his Magic Power began to climb progressively. He had been concealing his Cultivation all along, controlling his Magic Power fluctuations at the Early-stage Human Immortal realm, aiming to confuse the enemy and lay a trap. By doing so when push came to shove, a sudden outburst would catch the enemy off-guard, securing a decisive advantage. But who knew this old monster would be so faint-hearted? He was just starting to fight and already running away. There was no longer any need to conceal his trump card, which had not yet been fully played. Yu Dancheng began to make his move with all his power, determined to catch the old monster. The dark clouds in the sky seemed to feel his rage. After receiving more Magic Power from the Heavenly Destiny Staff, they expanded rapidly, stretching from dozens of li in diameter to over a hundred. The gathered thunder and lightning became several times more formidable than before. ¡°Late-stage Human Immortal!¡± In front, the Six-eyed Lord, who was fleeing under the Soul-splitting Great Blade and braving the thunder and lightning, felt the surge of power from behind. He glanced back and saw Yu Dancheng unveiling his true strength and couldn¡¯t help but exclaim. Chapter 1233 - Chapter 1233 Chapter 491 Soul-gathering Divine Light_3 ?Chapter 1233: Chapter 491 Soul-gathering Divine Light_3 Chapter 1233: Chapter 491 Soul-gathering Divine Light_3 He never imagined that the foul Taoist priest would be so sinister. Clearly a late-stage Human Immortal cultivator, he had concealed himself as an early-stage, to deceive him. ¡®Fortunately, I escaped quickly, otherwise if I had really stayed to fight to the death with him, I might not even know how I died.¡¯ At this thought, he couldn¡¯t help feeling relieved. Being cautious was indeed the right approach, otherwise I would have fallen into his trap. With this thought, the Six-eyed Lord¡¯s escaping light speed increased even further. His cultivation was only at the mid-level Human Immortal stage. With this level of cultivation, fighting a late-stage Human Immortal, who also possessed an Immortal Artifact, no matter how you looked at it, there was no chance of winning. Staying would mean death. The only way of life was to flee back to his lair, using the Formation Method set up there to escape this disaster. However, it was not so easy for the Six-eyed Lord to escape. Although he had initially gained some advantage with a Soul-gathering Divine Light, he had run over a hundred miles. But Yi Dancheng reacted quickly. Seeing the monster flee, they immediately stopped concealing their cultivation and pursued with all their might. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï With a difference of one minor realm between them, and the Six-eyed Lord not being a demon known for escaping, although he had initially run for over a hundred miles, the distance slowly decreased, and after a few thousand miles, he was caught up by the latter. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ¡®Damn it, if I had one or two more Divine Lights, I wouldn¡¯t have been driven to such a desperate situation.¡¯ Watching Yi Dancheng getting closer and closer behind him, the Six-eyed Lord gritted his teeth in hatred and fear welled up in his heart. Yi Dancheng was right in thinking previously; his Soul-gathering Divine Light was indeed not limitless. Anyone would guess that. If a powerful divine ability like the Soul-gathering Divine Light could really be released endlessly, the Six-eyed Lord would have long ruled the Southern Domain, looking down upon all others. Why would the title of the number one master in the Southern Domain have fallen to that old dragon in Jiuchuan Country? There had to be some flaws in it. Actually, the Six-eyed Lord¡¯s Soul-gathering Divine Light could only be emitted twice. He was a Six-eyed Spider by nature, born with six eyes, each capable of nurturing Soul-gathering Divine Light, which was a talent-based divine power. But there were limitations to this divine power. Before becoming immortal, those six eyes were nothing special, at most making his perception a bit sharper. Yet after becoming immortal, two of those eyes underwent a transformation and nurtured Soul-gathering Divine Light. But the remaining four eyes remained ordinary. However, according to bloodline information obtained during the transformation, once he broke through to Earth Immortal and Heavenly Immortal stages, he could nurture two more Divine Lights respectively. Moreover, with each transformation, the power of the Soul-gathering Divine Light would multiply. All of these were matters after the realm breakthroughs. Now the Six-eyed Lord was only a mid-level Human Immortal, and the second breakthrough was far in the future. Thus, he could only use the two pairs of demonic eyes that could emit two Soul-gathering Divine Lights. He had already used both previously. Now, if he wanted to use it again, he could only wait until he returned, re-consuming magic power, and spend a few days re-cultivating them. That was only a distant solution, completely useless in the immediate crisis. ¡°I can¡¯t keep this up.¡± The Six-eyed Lord looked back, seeing Yi Dancheng approaching ever closer at this speed, and in a dozen more breaths, he would be caught. At that moment, Facing an enemy like a late-stage Human Immortal, plus an Immortal Artifact, he stood no chance. The threat of death was closing in. He gritted his teeth and finally, out of desperation, formed a spell with his hands, and a great amount of his magic power poured out. The Soul-splitting Great Saber above his head immediately brightened, enriched with a large amount of magic power, its power increased exponentially in an instant, crossing the Immortal-Mortal barrier, temporarily reaching the level of an Immortal Artifact. ¡°Go!¡± The Six-eyed Lord roared, with a pained heart, he drove the Soul-splitting Great Saber, slashing it towards the pursuers behind him. He then, without turning his head and after releasing the great sword, operated the remaining magic power within his body, implemented some Secret Techniques, and increased his speed once more, frantically running towards his lair. Meanwhile, Yi Dancheng, who was closely pursuing behind, was momentarily stopped by the incoming Soul-splitting Great Saber. He had to expend some effort and took three or four breaths to bring it under control. But by that time, the Six-eyed Lord had taken the opportunity to run over a thousand miles. From his perspective, only the remaining fleeing light was left in the sky, not even a shadow was visible. This place was just over three thousand miles away from the capital of the Great Eye Kingdom, which was also the Six-eyed Lord¡¯s lair. Since the opponent had run so far, it was fundamentally impossible to catch up. ¡°Damn it, this old demon, truly decisive and cunning, at a critical moment, he can even sever his tail to survive, he will definitely be a great enemy in the future,¡± Yi Dancheng muttered, resenting somewhat. However, sending him to attack a mid-level Human Immortal great demon¡¯s lair, even though he had an Immortal Artifact, he was not very confident. After careful consideration, Yi Dancheng decided to give up that idea. ¡°Enough. His Excellency only tasked me to take over Qingyang Country, he didn¡¯t mention to kill this great demon and seize the Great Eye Kingdom. Today¡¯s incident was just an accident. I¡¯ll let him live for a few more years; once I become an Earth Immortal, if this demon hasn¡¯t died yet, I will claim his life.¡± Yi Dancheng snorted, letting go of his killing intent, and then turned his head, looking at the great saber in his hand, finally showing some smiles, ¡°However, this time was not without gain. This Soul-splitting Great Saber is made of extraordinary material and has been cultivated by a great demon for a thousand years, with profound foundations. If it¡¯s slightly modified and takes a hundred years to exorcise the demonic energy, it would make a fine base for an External Tool Dao Fruit. His Excellency back there, just happened to be preparing to refine a few more External Tool Dao Fruits and was worried about lacking materials. This great saber coming at this time, just solved an urgent need. Given his Excellency¡¯s Earth Immortal Dao Fruit cultivation, this transformation time might only need just over a decade to complete. By then, to cultivate the External Tool Dao Fruit, more Qi Luck nourishment will be necessary, requiring the opening of new territories. Looking around the surrounding areas, which is the best land for development? It¡¯s here.¡± Yi Dancheng chuckled and anticipated a few things in his heart. If he could really use this great saber to persuade his Excellency, perhaps he wouldn¡¯t have to wait until he became an Earth Immortal. In about a decade, once the External Tool Dao Fruit is cultivated, it will be time for the Six-eyed Spider¡¯s demise. ¡°Offending me and thinking to escape? There¡¯s no such good deal.¡± He plotted with a bit of pettiness. Chapter 1234 - Chapter 1234 Chapter 492 Disciples of Dongyang ?Chapter 1234: Chapter 492 Disciples of Dongyang Chapter 1234: Chapter 492 Disciples of Dongyang ¡°` Despite having decided to deal with the Six-eyed Lord at a later time, Feng City couldn¡¯t help but chase after the Six-eyed Lord to Ji Mu City, his stronghold, clinging to a glimmer of hope. However, when Feng City arrived at Ji Mu City, what greeted his eyes was the activated City-protecting Formation, along with numerous anxious demon-beasts, standing guard at the city¡¯s strategic formation nodes. As for the Six-eyed Lord himself, he hid within the Formation, refusing to come out. ¡°Six-eyed, do you dare to come out and fight?¡± Feng City shouted down at the sealed city below. The sound stirred up commotion among the demon-beasts inside the city, but it quickly subsided. ¡°See what this is? Your beloved magical artifacts, don¡¯t you want to take them back?¡± ¡°Come out and fight me, what kind of ruler of a nation does this make you?¡± Feng City hurled a few more bouts of angry insults, attempting to provoke the Six-eyed Lord inside the city, but there was no response from the other side. No matter how much he cursed, the city remained calm. It went without saying, the old demon had made up his mind to act like a turtle pulling its head inside its shell. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 ¡°Old turtle!¡± Seeing this, Feng City cursed under his breath, losing all hope for the Six-eyed Lord to come out. Even though he let the Six-eyed Lord escape back to his lair, making it difficult to attack the old demon, Feng City didn¡¯t let him off the hook. This time he had been caught off guard and it was too late to pursue. While the Six-eyed Lord could run, the countless smaller demon-beasts within Great Eye Kingdom couldn¡¯t. ¡°Since this old demon has made up his mind to shrink back and not appear, there¡¯s no need for me to be courteous. All the lesser and greater demon-beasts inside Great Eye Kingdom, and all the human beings, this Cultivator shall take for himself.¡± Feng City snorted lightly, surveying the city below one last time before waving his sleeve and transforming into a light, flying toward the nearest demon stronghold. On his journey westward, Feng City had already cleared numerous demon-beasts along the way, rescuing tens of millions of human beings. But the elimination of demon-beasts and the rescue of humans accounted for less than one-tenth within Great Eye Kingdom, a mere drop in the ocean. Having now frightened the Six-eyed Lord into hiding in his lair, daring not to come out again, there were no more demon-beasts within Great Eye Kingdom that could stop Feng City¡¯s advance. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Thus, for the following months, Feng City rushed across various parts of Great Eye Kingdom. He successively eradicated over thirty groups of demon-beasts, both big and small, in the east and north, killed seven Demon Kings, and extinguished more than two thousand lesser demons. Almost single-handedly, he cleansed nearly half of Great Eye Kingdom of its demon-beasts. Upon hearing the news, the other demon-beasts in the kingdom either fled to Ji Mu City or left Great Eye Kingdom entirely, escaping far away. Feng City thus rescued nearly a hundred million humans from Great Eye Kingdom, virtually emptying the nation of its human population. In order to move these rescued people, he even had to contact his avatar, asking Che Shidao to dispatch all divine spirits under his command to come to Great Eye Kingdom to receive the populace and transport the rescued humans back to Youxin Country. Because of this matter, even the ongoing Three Calamities Purging operation in Youxin Country had to be temporarily halted. Everything was focused on resettling the people. After busying himself for over a month with the rescue of the northern and western populace, Feng City finally made a detour and entered the southern part of Great Eye Kingdom. By the time he reached the southern area, most of the demon-beasts had already fled. Those remaining either hid in the shadows, not daring to show their faces, or, the rare few who still occupied towns and brazenly enslaved the Human Race, were scarce, as rare as phoenix feathers and qilin horns. Thus, as Feng City made his rounds, he cleared only a dozen or so assorted minor demons, barely lifting a hand. On this day. He arrived in a place called Hong Feng City within Great Eye Kingdom. This was one of the three largest cities in the southern region. As Feng City approached, eradicating demons along his way, he heard that within this city, there was still a Demon King who fearlessly rallied over a hundred demon soldiers, intending to put up a desperate resistance in the city. This undoubtedly caught Feng City¡¯s attention, so he headed there. But upon his arrival, he noticed something amiss. ¡°Hmma€?¡± Feng City paused outside the city and looked at the crisscrossing sword lights in the distance, majestic as a newly risen sun, making the demon-beasts in the city visible and wiping them out under the sword energy. ¡°Is there another Immortal Sect Cultivator who has acted before me?¡± He was surprised to see this. Having been in the Immortal Realm for a while, Lu Yuan and his avatars had also encountered quite a few Immortal Realm cultivators. But as far as he could see, the disciples of various Immortal Sects minded only their own business, and he had never seen anyone take initiative in subduing demons or exorcising evil. Even not kicking someone when they¡¯re down and taking advantage of demons for their own gain would be considered model behavior. Therefore, seeing a cultivator actually eradicating demons in Great Eye Kingdom truly attracted Feng City¡¯s attention. ¡°Looking at these pure sword lights and sword energy, with a whiff of the Great Sun True Intent within them, this swordsmanship is extraordinary, certainly not from an ordinary disciple raised by any Immortal Sect. Where does this person come from? Among the surrounding Immortal Sects, I have never heard of one specializing in the sword arts in this Southern Domain. Could it be from the Western Domain?¡± Observing the increasingly grand sword light in the distance, Feng City was somewhat puzzled. He was certain that the cultivator using the sword lights was not from the Southern Domain. The nine countries of this Southern Domain might seem vast, but the many Immortal Sects here have actually been under the rule of the Changqing Immortal Sect for tens of thousands of years, suppressed without any chances to rise. It is only in the last two to three thousand years, with the severe decline of Changqing Immortal Sect and its weakened strength, that the local Immortal Sects have found a chance to emerge. ¡°` Chapter 1235 - Chapter 1235 Chapter 492 The Disciple of Dongyang_2 ?Chapter 1235: Chapter 492: The Disciple of Dongyang_2 Chapter 1235: Chapter 492: The Disciple of Dongyang_2 Some minor demons as well took advantage of this gap to rise up. Two to three thousand years, evidently, was not enough time for the local forces to accumulate any significant foundation. Neither were there any Sword Immortal Sects locally. And as for the sword light in the distance, observing its aura, it was clearly a true immortal seed, having perfected Five Qi Towards Primordial and not far from condensing the Human Flower Dao Fruit. If the Immortal Sects in the Southern Domain had such a true immortal seed, they would undoubtedly treasure them greatly. How could they allow such a person to be protected within the Mountain Gate, waiting to accumulate enough strength for immortality, and then let them go out to risk demon elimination? Just from this method of cultivation alone, this was not a true dragon that could have been raised by the hidden currents within the Southern Domain. It could not be a cultivator from the Southern Domain Immortal Sect, nor from the Qing Immortal Sect to the north, renowned for their Wood Series Taoist Law and not known for their sword skills. It was also unlikely that it would be a disciple from the Qing Immortal Sect. Therefore, the only possibility that remained was likely the Western Domain Immortal Sect. ¡°I heard that almost as soon as the Great True Person of the Qing Immortal Sect fell, the Western Domain Immortal Sect raised the banner of rebellion and truly fought against the Qing Immortal Sect with swords drawn. At that time, the Qing Immortal Sect had just lost their Great True Person and their strength was still at its peak, yet the Western Domain Immortal Sect did not flinch and still rebelled. Moreover, once they rebelled, it lasted until now. For nearly ten thousand years, neither side could do anything to the other. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï The depth of the Western Domain Immortal Sect¡¯s foundation can be seen from this. If a disciple from that sect had such an aura, it would certainly make sense.¡± Yi Dancheng speculated in his heart and then felt apprehension. The Western Domain Immortal Sect certainly had Earth Immortals, and not just one a€¡± otherwise, they couldn¡¯t have contended with the Qing Immortal Sect for so long. The other party had already infiltrated the Qingyu Country in the Western Domain. Between this country and the Great Eye Kingdom was the Anyu Country of the Jintai Gate and the Qingyang Country, which was Yi Dancheng¡¯s destination on this trip. At this time, the Western Domain Immortal Sect sending disciples to the Great Eye Kingdom to eliminate demons was a move that was definitely not made casually. Given Yi Dancheng¡¯s understanding of the Immortal Sects in the Immortal Realm these days, the other party sending disciples here was definitely a move with great intentions. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï ¡°Could it be that the Western Domain Immortal Sect has already stabilized Qingyu Country and, after establishing this outpost in the Southern Domain, is ready to start a large-scale infiltration of the entire Southern Domain?¡± Yi Dancheng couldn¡¯t help but think of this possibility and his face turned ugly. If the Western Domain Immortal Sect was really preparing to do so, then the one who would be directly impacted was his avatar, which was preparing to establish a branch of the Taiping Dao in Qingyang Country. And right after his avatar, there was Youxin Country. If the Western Domain Immortal Sect wanted to invade the Southern Domain, his main body over there wouldn¡¯t be able to escape either. ¡°With the strength of the Western Domain Immortal Sect, if they really wanted to take the Southern Domain by force, just the strength of my main body would be completely inadequate to stop them. Could it be that not only will I fail to keep Qingyang Country, but I¡¯ll also have to give up Youxin Country, which I have worked so hard for?¡± Yi Dancheng felt somewhat pessimistic. His main body indeed had an Earth Immortal Dao Fruit, but it was just a nominal Earth Immortal, the weakest of its realm. But at the Western Domain Immortal Sect, there were several Earth Immortals. In the event of a conflict, Lu Yuan would undoubtedly be at a disadvantage and was almost certain to lose. Furthermore, for the sake of caution, in the face of such a large force invading, he would not even make use of the Earth Immortal Dao Fruit for safety. Most likely, he would simply give up Youxin Country and look elsewhere to settle and make a home. After all, the Immortal Realm is vast, and Changqing Domain isn¡¯t the only place in turmoil. If one seeks a place to develop peacefully, they definitely could find one if they searched with diligence and spent some time. There is no need to confront the Western Domain Immortal Sect head-on here. ¡°Whether or not it is the Western Domain Immortal Sect¡¯s reach, going to test it out will reveal the hope that it¡¯s not as I have feared,¡± Yi Dancheng looked into the distance. Just then, in the distant Hong Feng City, that great sword light of the dawn had dissipated, the sky full of sword energy retracted, and there was no longer any demon aura in the city. In the time Yi Dancheng spent pondering, the sword cultivator in the city had already slain all the demons to near extinction. It should be noted that in the city there was a Demon King, also a Five Qi Towards Primordial existence, supported by over a hundred demons and bolstered by Formation Methods. Yet, in just a short moment, all the demons within the city were eradicated. ¡°What glorious and bright sword light, what a cultivator who eliminates demons,¡± With a long laugh, Yi Dancheng gathered his thoughts and, riding on a cloud, floated towards Hong Feng City. He did not hide his appearance and even deliberately revealed himself. So, the sword cultivator in the city quickly heard his voice and a ray of sword light shot out from the city and arrived before him. Upon seeing the newcomer¡¯s demeanor, the sword cultivator seemed slightly surprised and quickly bowed in greeting, ¡°Junior Li Ruoqing of Dongyang Mountain pays respects to the True Person.¡± Yi Dancheng took a good look at the sword cultivator in front of him, who was clad in a green Taoist robe and stood there distinguished; though a sword cultivator, his bearing was restrained, giving off a sense of gentleness as smooth as fine jade. Just like his sword energy at the dawn¡¯s first light, vast and unstoppable, yet it only brought brightness to disperse darkness without causing any sense of burning heat. ¡°A person like his sword, indeed a true sword cultivator,¡± he praised, then asked, ¡°Fellow Taoist, you are from Dongyang Mountain, would it be the Immortal Sect of Dongyang Domain?¡± Hearing this, Li Ruoqing nodded solemnly, ¡°It is indeed from the Dongyang Mountain of Dongyang Domain. I am a true disciple of the sect.¡± On hearing this, Yi Dancheng felt a sigh of relief. He had heard about Dongyang Mountain before. South of the Changqing Domain, there was a Great Domain known as the Dongyang Domain. As per the custom in the Immortal Realm, wherever an Immortal Sect ruled an entire Great Domain, they would often rename the domain after their own sect¡¯s name, to declare sovereignty. Chapter 1236 - Chapter 1236 Chapter 492 The Disciple of Dongyang_3 ?Chapter 1236: Chapter 492: The Disciple of Dongyang_3 Chapter 1236: Chapter 492: The Disciple of Dongyang_3 Thus, the master of the Dongyang Domain was naturally the controlling Immortal Sect of the region, the sword cultivation-centered Dongyang Mountain. Unlike Changqing Domain which had already seen the passing of a Great True Person, the Great True Person of Dongyang Domain had only achieved enlightenment 30,000 years ago, an age considered youthful, much like a teenager, for a Heavenly Immortal. Dongyang Mountain was like the rising sun at dawn, full of vitality and momentum. This was a considerably young Immortal Sect, led by a similarly young Great True Person. ¡°No wonder Li Ruoqing from Dongyang Mountain possesses such extraordinary sword skills, these are the true teachings from the Celestial sect. It would have been surprising if he lacked such skills.¡± In Yi Dancheng¡¯s heart, admiration was followed by a sense of relief. The fact that the other party was from Dongyang Mountain and not a disciple of the Western Domain Immortal Sect was indeed fortunate! Very fortunate! Now that Dongyang Mountain had just recently taken control of the Dongyang Domain, just 30,000 years ago, it was the time to consolidate their own territory and strengthen their foundation. In such a situation, they hardly had the energy to expand externally. Thus, there was no need to worry about Dongyang Mountain invading the Southern Domain to compete for territory with him. And it seemed that the Western Domain Immortal Sect was also focused on assimilating Qingyu Country; they likely couldn¡¯t spare much effort elsewhere for some time. When you think about it, it makes sense. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï They had been fighting against the Qing Immortal Sect for so long, exhausting a ruling Great Immortal Sect of a domain, depleting its strength significantly. They even relinquished control of nearly one-third of their territory, and most recently, even yielded Youxin Country to Lu Yuan, further declining in strength. The Qing Immortal Sect was already struggling. The Western Domain Immortal Sect, whose strength and resources were even lesser than those of the Qing Immortal Sect, was obviously in an even more difficult state. The Qing Immortal Sect was tied down by war and unable to control the Southern Domain, having withdrawn from this area. The Western Domain Immortal Sect naturally did the same. Being able to spare the energy to take over Qingyu Country was already their limit. Thinking about a major invasion of the Southern Domain, aside from whether they had the strength, even the Qing Immortal Sect wouldn¡¯t just sit by and ignore it. ¡°I was worrying too much.¡± Having realized all this, Yi Dancheng completely put his mind at ease. Then, looking at Li Ruoqing, free from the mesh of interests, he found the sword cultivator with a striking appearance more and more agreeable to the eye. He smiled and said, ¡°So you are from the Celestial sect, no wonder you are so remarkable, single-handedly eliminating the demons of a city, truly a role model for our generation of cultivators.¡± He praised him fervently, and then introduced himself, ¡°You¡¯re speaking to Yi Dancheng of Taiping Dao, who happens to be exorcising demons in Great Eye Kingdom, and it turns out I am on the same path as Brother Li.¡± ¡°So you are the Taiping School Leader.¡± Upon learning of Yi Dancheng¡¯s identity, Li Ruoqing was once again surprised and showed a look of admiration, then respectfully said, ¡°Junior only recently arrived in Changqing Domain, and had heard that the Leader of Taiping Dao was in Great Eye Kingdom, defeating the demonic king Six-eyed, forcing this Great Demon to stay cooped up within the capital city. Furthermore, he swept across the territories of the Great Eye Monster Nation, rescuing countless of our Human Race citizens. Upon hearing of these deeds, I was inspired and hurried to this country to follow. Unexpectedly, on the way here, just as I was clearing a den of demons, I encountered the Senior. It is indeed my great fortune!¡± ¡°Did Brother Li seek me out specifically?¡± Yi Dancheng was surprised to hear this, then sighed, ¡°Hearing of the demon extermination, you joyfully went to face it, fearing no hardship or disaster. In these times, to have such a public spirit and uphold the righteous path, there aren¡¯t many left. Brother Li¡¯s actions truly befit a disciple of Dongyang.¡± Great Eye Kingdom does indeed have a few great demons. Even with a Human Immortal like himself here, for a cultivator who has yet to become immortal to rush to a place rife with demons merely to exterminate them¡­ Just this courage alone is truly astonishing and admirable. Look at him and then look at the sects on the Changqing side. The comparison makes the superior and inferior clear. However, despite his praise, Li Ruoqing modestly replied, ¡°I am merely driving away demons and performing the duties of a disciple of the Immortal Sect. These demons disturb our Human Race and poison the world; they are a deep-seated enemy that cannot be ignored. The Senior standing up to eliminate demons from the world¡­ My ability to follow upon hearing of these deeds¡­ This proves that there are still those who are righteous in the world. If there are more people like the Senior and myself, what threat can these demons pose? The righteous path of the world is always guarded by someone. Certain matters always need someone to stand up and act.¡± Yi Dancheng, watching the righteous and spirited Li Ruoqing, sensed the unwavering will in the latter¡¯s heart and couldn¡¯t help but nod in agreement, ¡°Indeed, the righteous path will not perish; there will always be those who act heroically. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Isn¡¯t Brother Li just such a person?¡± After speaking, he saw Li Ruoqing trying to be humble again and, waving his hand, shifted the topic, ¡°Let¡¯s not talk about this anymore. Brother Li, did you come to Changqing Domain this time in search of an opportunity to become immortal?¡± Li Ruoqing nodded, ¡°Exactly. My cultivation has reached the ¡®Five Qi Towards Primordial¡¯ perfection, and my cultivation level is sufficient, but my state of mind is still lacking, unable to break through the Immortal Gate. My Master said that I have always been secluded in the mountain gate cultivating and lacking experience in the mortal world, hence my state of mind is insufficient. Therefore, he sent me down the mountain to travel the world, enhance my knowledge, and temper my state of mind in order to achieve immortality.¡± With Dongyang Mountain occupying the entire Dongyang Domain, a great domain¡¯s resources supported the possibility of its disciples becoming immortal. Just like the previously mentioned Youxin Country, an entire nation¡¯s essence was used by the Qing Immortal Sect to support Zhang Yunlei of Youxin Sub-court, which was indeed a resource for becoming immortal. Regrettably, Zhang Yunlei really did not live up to expectations, monopolizing a nation for a whole three hundred years and yet failing to become immortal. A declining Qing Immortal Sect was still able to provide such conditions to its disciples. Not to mention Dongyang Mountain, which is in a period of rise. Here in the Changqing Domain, the opportunity to become immortal, which many lower-ranking Immortal Sects and ordinary cultivators desperately seek, is so commonplace in the eyes of those great Immortal Sects. What they lack is not resources, but the ability to fully utilize those resources and possess the seeds of a true immortal. Chapter 1237 - Chapter 1237 Chapter 493 Damu in Trouble ?Chapter 1237: Chapter 493 Damu in Trouble Chapter 1237: Chapter 493 Damu in Trouble ¡°Good!¡± Yi Dan city praised with a smile, then said, ¡°With Brother Li¡¯s innate talent, just a bit more polishing, and soon you¡¯ll be able to achieve a perfect temperament. It seems it won¡¯t be long before I can address you as a peer.¡± Yi Dan city had no doubts about whether this junior could become an immortal. Under the Celestial Immortal Sect, with extraordinary aptitude and steadfast temperament, if he couldn¡¯t become an immortal, then who under heaven could? ¡°Senior overpraises me,¡± Li Ruoqing modestly replied with a smile, then seriously said, ¡°Although becoming an immortal is important to me, I won¡¯t become overly joyous because of it. Rather than that, I¡¯d prefer to purge this domain of demons, to uphold justice like you, Senior, and return to Heaven and Earth a state of peace. If I can really achieve this, then I won¡¯t have failed in my aspiration to seek immortality and the Dao.¡± Moved by his words, Yi Dan city said, ¡°If you truly harbor such lofty aspirations, then you should work even harder to advance your cultivation, achieve the Dao Fruit, and break through to the Human Immortal Realm. Only with greater strength can one accomplish more things. Those demons, each and every one of them is powerful and not to be trifled with. If you lack sufficient strength, how can you deal with them? Recklessly going to slay demons and exorcise evil, I¡¯m afraid you¡¯ll not only fail to defeat the demons, but you yourself will become their meal.¡± Li Ruoqing laughed and said, ¡°Senior speaks the truth, that¡¯s why I am striving hard to train and prepare to fight more demons, to hone my sword¡¯s edge, in hopes of breaking through to higher realms of the sword path. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Does Senior have other plans next? If you still intend to slay demons elsewhere, I am willing to follow behind and raise your banner, to add to your momentum,¡± he offered. Yi Dan city shook his head, looked at his resolute junior, and sighed, ¡°I don¡¯t have much planned for the time being. Previously, I fought with the lord of this Monster Nation, the Six-eyed Lord, and although I defeated him, I couldn¡¯t capture him. He escaped back to his stronghold in Ji Mu City. Ji Mu City has the protective Formation Method he built, and with the old demon hiding in the city refusing to come out, it¡¯s difficult for me to breach the formation and slay him. Since I can¡¯t eliminate the Six-eyed Lord, I have no choice but to relocate the people of the Great Eye Kingdom. I¡¯m moving them to the nearby Youxin Country to be sheltered by my Taiping Dao. With the protection of Taiping Dao, they should no longer suffer from the torment of demons. As for the Great Eye Kingdom, I can only temporarily abandon it and let the Six-eyed Lord have his way. This is a great regret.¡± Not being able to take advantage of the situation to eliminate the Six-eyed Lord was a significant regret in Yi Dan city¡¯s heart. At this point, he could only do his best to evacuate the populace and weaken the enemy¡¯s foundation. Having moved nearly a billion people of the Human Race from the Great Eye Kingdom and killed or driven away nearly half of the demons under the Six-eyed Lord¡¯s command, he had already severely damaged their strength. What¡¯s left is an empty Great Eye Kingdoma€¡± even if it remains under the enemy¡¯s control, it will struggle to rise to power. Even going forward, Yi Dan city plans to join forces with Che Shidao to regularly conduct sweeps in the Great Eye Kingdom. He intended to make this a routine activity of the Taiping Dao, and had already named it Great Eye Demon Extermination. He just didn¡¯t believe it. If they came month after month, year after year to sweep, could the Six-eyed Lord really remain content in that kingdom? The enemy¡¯s occupation of the Great Eye Kingdom was in pursuit of the kingdom¡¯s destiny, hoping to use it to break through the realm and become an Earth Immortal. But with Yi Dan city leading the Taiping Dao and cutting off the enemy¡¯s access to destiny, trapping the demon in Ji Mu City without leaving a trace of destiny for him, He didn¡¯t believe the enemy could remain complacent under such conditions. In the end, he would either come out and fight to the death with Yi Dan city, Or he would give up on the Great Eye Kingdom and seek a new foundation elsewhere. Anyway, there would no longer be a place for him in the nearby domain. ¡°That demon is sly, hiding in the city, relying on the formation to survive. It is also his fate not to perish here. Senior has done what could be done, even saving billions from the Great Eye Kingdom¡¯s Human Race. Your merits are immense, and you¡¯re respected by thousands. Senior, you need not blame yourself,¡± Li Ruoqing consoled. ¡°Knowing you understand is enough, Brother Li, there¡¯s no need for consolation,¡± Yi Dan city smiled and proceeded to ask, ¡°After I¡¯ve dealt with the affairs of the Great Eye Kingdom, I will retreat to the mountains for a period of cultivation and won¡¯t come out to roam for a while. What about you, Brother Li? I have no plans, where do you want to go?¡± Li Ruoqing originally wanted to follow him to continue slaying demons and exterminating evil, but Yi Dan city¡¯s next venture was to go to Qingyang Country and usurp the foundations of the three small Immortal Sects entrenched there. Such acts could hardly be considered righteous and honorable. Although in the Changqing Domain, such practices were typical and no longer surprising, Others, knowing this, might at best censure Taiping Dao with a few words, but they wouldn¡¯t stand against a Grand Fairy Door for the sake of three small Immortal Sects and step up to administer justice. So, taking Qingyang Country should pose no problem. But what has become common in the Changqing Domain, in the Dongyang Domain, in the eyes of Li Ruoqing of the Celestial Immortal Sect, might not be so normal. It¡¯s different over there where Great True Persons preside, the order within the domain is stable, unlike the everlasting chaos of the Changqing Domain, with its collapsed rituals and music and where the law of the jungle prevails. Things that people in the Changqing Domain can accept might not be acceptable to Li Ruoqing. Yi Dan city was quite fond of this junior and did not wish to sour relations with this disciple from Dongyang, ruining the pleasant relationship they had now. So some things were better left unseen by the other party, not involving him to avoid mutual embarrassment. That way, even if Li Ruoqing heard about it later, not having experienced it personally, he might be puzzled, but he wouldn¡¯t dwell on it too much; there would still be some leeway. Therefore, at this moment, he was thinking of sending Li Ruoqing away. Chapter 1238 - Chapter 1238 Chapter 493 Damu in Trouble_2 ?Chapter 1238: Chapter 493 Damu in Trouble_2 Chapter 1238: Chapter 493 Damu in Trouble_2 ¡°The senior plans to return to the mountain and can no longer continue to follow; it truly is a matter of regret.¡± Li Ruoqing felt considerable regret that he could not continue to follow this senior, whom he regarded as a paragon of righteousness. But since the senior had decided, there was nothing he could do about it. He could only sigh and then think about his own journey. After pondering for a while, Li Ruoqing responded, ¡°Since the demons in the Great Wood Country have been almost completely eliminated by the senior, my staying here serves little purpose, so I will not linger any longer. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï I have heard that in the Southern Domain of the Changqing Domain, aside from Damu, there is also the Xiaye Country where demons run rampant. I plan to go there to continue my journey through the world, eliminating monsters and demons.¡± The Xiaye Country is indeed the nation of the Xuan Turtle Mountain and the Jiuchuan Demon Country¡¯s Dragon Palace striving for control in the Southern Domain. This country is in utter chaos, lost from the hands of the Human Race long ago, devoid of any Immortal Sect or Divine Method, with only various monsters and ghosts standing tall. Within the country, a mix of powers intertwine; there are Spiritual Beasts and Dao soldiers supported by Xuan Turtle Mountain, various monster soldiers and generals dispatched by the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace, and Demon Kings from the outside world attracted by the news. The numerous forces are so entangled with each other that the word ¡®chaos¡¯ hardly does justice in describing the situation. Living in such a place, even those within Xuan Turtle Mountain¡¯s sphere of influence lead incredibly difficult lives. When Li Ruoqing first arrived in the Changqing Domain, he had heard about the disorder in Xiaye Country and the miserable state of the human inhabitants there. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï In fact, at the beginning, he had planned to travel there. However, en route, he heard news from the Great Eye Kingdom and decided to hasten his journey to follow the senior, hoping to contribute his modest strength and sweep through such a Monster Nation. But, he had obviously arrived too late. The Six-eyed Lord of the Great Eye Kingdom had suffered a crushing defeat and was now holed up within the capital city without emerging. Some of the demons outside the capital had also been nearly wiped out, leaving hardly any opportunities for Li Ruoqing to prove himself. Thus, hearing that Yi Dancheng had no other plans, he did not wish to stay any longer and decided to leave and continue on his own journey. ¡°The situation in Xiaye Country is not like the Great Eye Kingdom, for I have cleared all the Great Demons and their subordinates of monster soldiers and generals. Over there, there are no fewer than twenty Demon Kings. Moreover, these demons are backed by great powers, and there are Human Immortal cultivators as their support.¡± Brother Li, if you go there and wish to eliminate demons, you will inevitably affect the interests of these powers. Pushed into a corner, there might even be Human Immortals who will disregard their dignity and strike against you,¡± Yi Dancheng warned with good intentions upon hearing the other¡¯s plan. Although Li Ruoqing¡¯s strength was among the strongest in the realm of Five Qi Towards Primordial, or rather, below the Human Immortals, that ¡®strongest¡¯ was only relative to those below Immortals. When it comes to facing Immortals, one can see how easy it was for Che Shidao and Yi Dancheng to deal with those Demon Kings. The divide between Immortals and mortals is as vast as the heavens and the abyss. If an Immortal wishes to strike against a mortal, even if they are the strongest cultivator among mortals, they have no way to resist. In just a few moves, they could be easily taken down, such is the gap brought by a Great Realm. It¡¯s almost like being crushed. Even without an Immortal taking action, just the multitude of over twenty Demon Kings and Ghost Kings in Xiaye Country would be overwhelming; Li Ruoqing might not be able to defeat them even with his might if five or six, or perhaps more than a dozen, join forces. Others might not treat him as amiably and cordially as Yi Dancheng does. Not to mention the Jiuchuan Demon Country, which stands in opposition to the Human Race. Even taking into account Xuan Turtle Mountain, even as a fellow Immortal Sect, they might not show him any good will. Haven¡¯t there been those like Zhu Zhenghe with malicious intentions plotting against the Taiping Dao? In the Dongyang Domain, Dongyang Mountain indeed holds great authority, and Dongyang disciples traversing the domain go unchallenged. But outside the Dongyang Domain, upon entering other domains, the name of Dongyang Mountain might not hold the same sway. If it really comes to a clash with the core forces of Xuan Turtle Mountain, Zhu Zhenghe might not give face to Dongyang Mountain and might directly attack Li Ruoqing, which is not impossible. All in all, rashly going to such a perilous place is certainly not a wise move. ¡°Thank you for the warning, senior.¡± Li Ruoqing thanked Lu Yuan for his concern with a slight bow and a carefree smile, saying, ¡°However, upholding justice is what I hold dear in my heart, how could I shy away from danger for fear of it? I set out on this journey to temper myself, and naturally, I should seek out places that will temper me further. The danger of Xiaye Country only makes it more appealing to my heart. Using the blood of those demons to sharpen my sword, I intend to forge an invincible blade.¡± As a Sword Cultivator who has cultivated close to the brink of becoming immortal, Li Ruoqing certainly didn¡¯t lack an edge. Facing danger, he felt more defiant the more he was frustrated, embodying a sense of unyielding determination. However, fierce as he was, he was not foolish. Having declared his intent, he quickly added with a laugh, ¡°Moreover, I am a true disciple of the Dongyang, fully aware of the dangers of the outside world, unlike the safety of the Mountain Gate. Before setting out, my Master bestowed gifts upon mea€¡±if faced with a shameless Immortal, I am confident I can escape with my life. The True Person need not worry too much.¡± Yi Dancheng nodded slightly, ¡°If that is the case, then there is no problem.¡± Li Ruoqing was from the Celestial Immortal Sect, a background that was considered top-tier in the Immortal Realm. He certainly did not doubt the man¡¯s discernment. Since he said that his sect had bestowed treasures that could save him from an Immortal, it must be true. Li Ruoqing would not joke about his own life. Yi Dancheng did not inquire what that treasure was. After all, it was only meant for self-protection against Human Immortals, no matter how valuable it was, how high could its value be? Chapter 1239 - Chapter 1239 Chapter 493 Damu in Trouble_3 ?Chapter 1239: Chapter 493 Damu in Trouble_3 Chapter 1239: Chapter 493 Damu in Trouble_3 For Yi Dancheng, such treasures were of little significance. Moreover, it was not easy for him to take an interest in a junior, and he was not so dishonorable as to steal something from a junior. As an Immortal, Yi Dancheng still held a reputation to uphold. Since they both had clear directions to follow, and the demons in Hong Feng City had been eradicated, neither of them felt inclined to stay any longer. After their conversation, Li Ruoqing bowed and said, ¡°The demons here have been eliminated, and there are still hundreds of thousands of citizens in the city that I am not well placed to care for, so I must trouble you, senior. I must go to Xiaye Country, so I will take my leave first, Senior, take care.¡± Yi Dancheng chuckled, ¡°Leave this place to me, you might as well go ahead.¡± Having said that, he thought for a moment, then took out a Taiping Dao identity token from his sleeve, which had been given to him before departure by his principal, and handed it to Li Ruoqing, ¡°This is my Taiping Dao¡¯s Peace Command, specifically for those who have a good relationship with me. If Brother Li encounters any trouble in Xiaye Country, you can use this command to come to Youxin Country, where my brother, Che Shidao, is stationed. Hand this token over to him, and I cannot guarantee anything else, but as long as you do not provoke an Earth Immortal, our Taiping Dao will certainly protect you.¡± It was not often that one met a disciple of the Celestial Immortal Sect, especially one who was about to become an immortal. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Such a distinguished individual was not someone you come across every day. Seeing that he had yet to leap over the Dragon Gate to become a True Immortal, Yi Dancheng naturally seized the opportunity to make an investment. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï A single token, if it could earn the friendship of an immortal from the Celestial Immortal Sect, was undoubtedly a great gain. ¡°Thank you, senior,¡± Li Ruoqing took the token and did not refuse, expressing his gratitude. The Taiping Dao, being a local force, could provide him with additional safety for the tasks he needed to accomplish. Moreover, after interacting with Senior Yi Dancheng, Li Ruoqing found that they were compatible in temperament and was happy to maintain a good relationship with his senior¡¯s sect. The two thus reciprocated each other¡¯s gestures. Yi Dancheng waved his hand, ¡°No need to thank me. The road ahead is long and fraught with danger. Cherish your life above all else.¡± Li Ruoqing nodded, ¡°Junior acknowledges, I take my leave.¡± Having said that, he performed another bow, then expelled a sword pellet from his mouth, which transformed into a stunning sword light soaring towards the east. Watching the sword light disappear into the distance and eventually out of sight, Yi Dancheng withdrew his gaze. ¡°Truly an interesting junior,¡± he remarked with a sigh, then turned his attention to Hong Feng City below him, waved his sleeve, and several Yellow Turban Strongmen flew down into the city. There were still hundreds of thousands of people in the city who had just been rescued from the demons, and as their saviors, the Taiping Dao naturally had to do a good job resettling them. Li Ruoqing understood this, which is why he left this professional task to professionals. For relocating the citizens, there had already been a precedent set; they just needed to follow the procedure. Yi Dancheng spent three days relocating the citizens of Hong Feng City, while also clearing the surrounding ten thousand li of demons. Then, when the Divine Spirits from Youxin Country arrived to take over the work here, he continued his journey toward the western part of the Great Eye Kingdom. The demonic cleansing in the southern region had already been completed; now, apart from Ji Mu City, it was only the western region that had yet to be cleaned. This would be the last leg of his demon-exorcising journey within the Great Eye Kingdom. Once he had cleared the demons from the western region, Yi Dancheng was ready to move towards Qingyang Country to prepare for the opening of a second branch. He had already been delayed for nearly a year in the Great Eye Kingdom. The time spent was not short, and indeed, because of the significant actions he took, nearly moving a nation¡¯s population, he had drawn considerable attention early on. Now in the surrounding countries, as well as the entire Southern Domain, who didn¡¯t know that he had just come here and taken over Youxin Country¡¯s Taiping Dao from Changqing Immortal Sect, was a formidable figure. He had just arrived and seized an entire nation. Furthermore, the School Leader personally took action, causing the famed Six-eyed Lord of Great Eye Country in the Southern Domain to flee in panic, who is now holed up in the capital city, daring not to venture out. The Six-eyed Lord was no ordinary Great Demon. This was a demon of extraordinary lineage, a Mid-stage Human Immortal in cultivation, known for his Soul-gathering Divine Light that caused the entire Southern Domain to tremble. Countless immortals had fallen at his hands in the past. But now, such a ferocious demon, facing the School Leader of Taiping Dao, was no match at all, forced to hide in his lair, not daring to step out. To have driven this demon to such a state, the strength of that Taiping School Leader is imaginable. Now, within the Southern Domain, the reputation of the ¡°Dual Immortals of Taiping¡± had begun to spread. They were referring to Che Shidao and Yi Dancheng. With the spread of their tales, people in the Southern Domain already knew that the two immortals of Taiping Dao were both at the late stage of being Human Immortals. This level of cultivation was absolutely top-tier in the Southern Domain, even unparalleled. Unless the Changqing Immortal Sect and the Western Domain Immortal Sect took action, no local force could contend with Taiping Dao. With this level of strength, whether Taiping Dao was newly arrived or not yet stable, it was enough to induce tremors in others. All the immortal sects and forces in the Southern Domain were frightened by this. Even the old dragon from Jiuchuan Monster Nation, initially furious because his dragon son had been killed, bellowing that he would come to Youxin Country for vengeance, But once the news that Che Shidao was a late-stage Human Immortal and that the Taiping School Leader had defeated the Six-eyed Lord and was recklessly relocating human citizens in the Great Eye Kingdom reached him, The originally fierce old dragon instantly retracted his claws and quietly slunk back into the Dragon Palace, letting the clam girls continue playing music and dancing. Joking aside. Those were two late-stage Human Immortals, and even if the old dragon was overly confident, he wouldn¡¯t dare provoke such immortal sects. It wasn¡¯t called revenge; it was called delivering oneself to one¡¯s doorstep. He couldn¡¯t win; he really couldn¡¯t win. And as the original top cultivator of the Southern Domain, with the Jiuchuan Dragon King showing no more activity, the other forces became even quieter. But beneath this quiet, undercurrents stirred more violently due to the arrival of the Taiping Dao. However, by this time, the Taiping Dao had already emptied the entire Great Eye Kingdom, relocating nearly a hundred million human citizens back to Youxin Country and resettling them anew. The once desolate Youxin Country quickly flourished thanks to so many people arriving, saving several hundred years of recovery efforts. And the hero behind all this, Yi Dancheng, quietly left the Great Eye Kingdom after completing these tasks. Unbeknownst to anyone, he arrived in Qingyang Country. Chapter 1240 - Chapter 1240 Chapter 494 Immortal Selection Conference ?Chapter 1240: Chapter 494 Immortal Selection Conference Chapter 1240: Chapter 494 Immortal Selection Conference Qingyang Country, No Water City. Clang clang clang! Suddenly, a series of gong beats rang out in the city streets. ¡°Great joyous news! Great joyous news!¡± A high-pitched voice rose along the streets, accompanied by the beating of gongs, instantly spreading through the streets: ¡°Listen up, everyone, the Immortal Master from Qing Mountain Pavilion has sent people to our No Water City to recruit new disciples. Anyone at home, who is under the age of fifteen and has not participated in the last selection, can bring their children over for the Immortal Master to check their meridians. As long as they pass the selection, they will immediately enter the Immortal Sect. The City Lord will also bestow fields and houses to their families, along with a reward of a thousand silver taels. All the folks with children at home, bring them over. Gather at the square in front of the governmental office in the city center. Time is pressing, opportunities are limited, don¡¯t miss out!¡± Clang clang clang! ¡°Folks¡­¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã0 In the Water Joy Restaurant, at a window seat on the second floor. Li Dancheng opened the window and looked at the announcer passing by outside, curious. ¡°Has it already been ten years? Since the last time the Immortal Master came to select Immortal Species, a whole cycle of time has passed.¡± ¡°Last time, No Water City presented nearly a thousand young children, but not a single Immortal Species was selected, causing the City Lord to lose face in front of the Immortal Master. The taxes for these ten years were even punitively increased by ten percent. If we fail to select an Immortal Species again this year, according to the rules, the taxes will be increased to thirty percent. If that really happens, everyone¡¯s life these past ten years will truly become unbearable. People may even starve to death. The City Lord is also driven to desperation, thus offering such a hefty reward.¡± At the neighboring tea table, several guests discussed in agitation. ¡°Isn¡¯t that the truth?¡± Someone grumbled, slightly enviously, ¡°The last time, our neighboring Red Soil City only presented three hundred youths but selected two Immortal Species, truly lucky. Not only did their city gain two Immortal Masters, but the due taxes were also completely waived. They even received an additional ten percent subsidy. Where do you think that money came from, if not from us in No Water City? Using our money to support them, it¡¯s utterly infuriating. These years, whenever we encounter people from Red Soil City, us from No Water City can¡¯t even lift our heads, unjustly lowering ourselves. If we don¡¯t produce an Immortal Species this time, we¡¯ll truly never be able to turn this around.¡± ¡°What nonsense are you talking?¡± Hearing him speak like this, someone immediately retorted discontentedly: ¡°In preparation for the Immortal Selection Conference, the City Lord not only mobilized the four thousand qualified youths from within the city but also gathered more than ten thousand children and youths from over a hundred villages and towns outside the city. He even borrowed children from nearby towns and villages, adding up to a few thousand more. Altogether, there are over twenty thousand children and youths prepared; with so many people, even if it¡¯s one in ten thousand, we should be able to select at least two Immortal Species, right? So this time, we¡¯ll definitely produce an Immortal Species. If you don¡¯t understand, stop spreading discouraging nonsense.¡± Those nearby who heard this also cast disapproving glances their way. The previously speaking man, realizing he had drawn everyone¡¯s dissatisfaction, quickly slapped his mouth while repeatedly offering apologetic smiles: ¡°It¡¯s my fault for speaking poorly, look at my foul mouth, it deserves a slap.¡± Seeing this, the others nodded in satisfaction and ignored him. They then joyfully discussed again, with so many young men, just how many Immortal Species could they produce? ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï ¡°If you ask me, with over twenty thousand people, we should be able to produce at least two or three Immortal Species, right?¡± ¡°Two or three? That¡¯s not enough, at least ten are needed.¡± ¡°Nonsense! According to past practice, with good luck, one Immortal Species could emerge from every thousand people. We have been unlucky for ten years, this time it must be fortune¡¯s turn, and we should expect twenty or thirty Immortal Species.¡± ¡°If we really produce more than ten Immortal Species, it¡¯s likely that for the next hundred years, our No Water City¡¯s taxes could be waived.¡± ¡°Exactly, without the Immortal Sect taxes, our lives would become much easier.¡± ¡°Not just that! With more Immortal Species, the chances of producing Immortal Masters also increase. If we could have several more Immortal Masters, in the future, No Water City could manage its own rainfall. We wouldn¡¯t need to spend a lot of money every year to invite other Immortal Masters from Qing Mountain Pavilion to make it rain. That would truly be a blessing for future generations.¡± With these words, a feeling of agreement instantly resonated with everyone around. ¡°Absolutely! Absolutely!¡± The entire restaurant nodded in agreement. No Water City, No Water City, just by hearing the name of this city, one can tell what kind of place it is. That¡¯s right, this is a barren land where no rain falls. For the city¡¯s residents to survive and farm here, their only option is to invite an Immortal Master from Qing Mountain Pavilion to perform Immortal Techniques and bring them rain. But this way of summoning rain with Immortal Techniques is only a temporary solution. The next rainfall could last for at most a month, after which the local area would run out of water again, falling back into drought. Then, not only would vegetation struggle to survive, but the locals living here could also run out of water and die of thirst. So, whether for survival or for prosperity, people around No Water City must invite an Immortal Master to bring rain. But inviting an Immortal Master to bring rain isn¡¯t so easy. It requires having an acquainted Immortal Master willing to help. And each invitation for an Immortal Master costs a great deal of money. Each year, the people of No Water City have to give up one-third of their yearly harvest to invite an Immortal Master to bring rain. One-third of their harvest a€¡° that is a tremendously heavy expenditure. Chapter 1241 - Chapter 1241 Chapter 494 Immortal Selection Convention_2 ?Chapter 1241: Chapter 494: Immortal Selection Convention_2 Chapter 1241: Chapter 494: Immortal Selection Convention_2 Moreover, the local Immortal Sect, Qing Mountain Pavilion, which sheltered this place, also took nearly one-fifth of the income as taxes every year, another huge burden. In the previous ten years, they also faced penalties, with another ten percent added to their taxes. The City Lord¡¯s mansion over there also collected one-fifth of the taxes. When all was distributed down the line, the local common people had to hand over more than eighty percent of their annual income. What they could keep for themselves was less than twenty percent. How could this possibly be enough to live on? Therefore, for the past ten years, the local populace had lived in extreme hardship, their faces pale and malnourished, where not having enough to eat was the norm, and it was not uncommon for people to starve to death. Everyone was already hovering on the brink of starvation. It was precisely because of this. That the people of No Water City saw the selection of the Immortal Species this time as their only chance for a better life. Only if more Immortal Species were chosen would the Immortal Sect waive the taxes they had to pay and provide them with subsidies. The locals might then have the opportunity to produce an Immortal Master. After producing an Immortal Master, they wouldn¡¯t have to spend so much money to hire another Immortal Master to summon rain, and No Water City¡¯s expenses could be significantly reduced. At that time, the burden pressing down on everyone would vanish in a puff of smoke. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Even the taxes to be paid to the City Lord¡¯s mansion could be subsidized and offset by other cities. Like Red Soil City had been doing for the past ten years. All the harvests of the local common people could stay in their own homes. This would truly benefit the entire city and was also the driving force behind their eager preparation for the selection of Immortals. Because it represented hope for a better life. Listening to the whispers and discussions around him, Lu Yuan of Yi Dancheng took a sip of the locally famous bitter bamboo liquor and showed a thoughtful look on his face. ¡°Immortal Sects directly governing mortals, delineating them into cities, and harvesting resources through the collection of taxes. By adjusting the tax rates, they select their own talents, making everyone within their rule serve their purposes. Is this the Immortal Sect¡¯s means of control in Qingyang Country?¡± He pondered inwardly, gaining a deeper understanding of the management philosophy of the Immortal Sects here. To sum it up, there¡¯s one word a€¡± ruthless. Yes, ruthless. The Immortal Sect here treated nearly everyone like cash crops, harvesting them almost mercilessly, without leaving any leeway. The life of the common people under such rule was comparable to the time when Lu Yuan had just started out in the Nine Provinces, amidst the chaos of war and turmoil. It was even worse than those commoners. Because back then in the Nine Provinces, even if the countries exploited their people, they would at most take three-fifths or two-thirds of the harvest, still leaving enough food for survival. After all, wars were fought with populations and grain. In the chaotic world of the Nine Provinces, any ruler with a bit of foresight understood the importance of laying a solid foundation. They would not really push their own people toward death. Those who were so muddled in their thinking to do so all perished in the end. Like the former Wei Country. Yet in Qingyang Country, in the Immortal Realm, the rules that once applied in the Nine Provinces no longer held true. In the Immortal Realm, the true foundation for the Immortal Sects did not lie with those great masses of mortals, which seemed vast and inexhaustible, but with the strong cultivators whose Cultivation had reached Five Qi Towards Primordial, or even Immortals themselves. One with the possibility of becoming immortal, and one who had already become an Immortal a€¡± only such cultivators were valued by the Immortal Sects and represented their strongest force. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? In comparison, even those cultivators within the Immortal Sect who had Cultivation below Five Qi Towards Primordial seemed relatively insignificant. The reason is simple. A cultivator of Five Qi Towards Primordial could defeat more than a dozen at Gathering Four Qi, and hundreds at Gathering Three Qi. And those even lower than Gathering Three Qi, mere fledglings and miscellaneous cultivators, posed no threat at all to one of Five Qi Towards Primordial. What an enormous disparity in power? In an Immortal Realm where mighty power was concentrated in individuals, it truly was a case where one person could oppose a nation or a domain. And when this power was coupled with the exceedingly long lifespans, reaching hundreds or even thousands of years, it created an even more fearful exponential effect. Because of their protracted lifespans, those powerful cultivators deemed the lower-tier cultivators, in essence, no different from cash crops and not very valuable. If disciples perished within a century, though distressing, it wasn¡¯t considered a big deal. As long as one was still alive, as long as the sect¡¯s territories remained, and the mortals were still there, they could simply choose another batch of disciples and train them for another century. The framework of a sect would be constructed once again. A century, for an Immortal, was merely the duration of a meditation retreat. For a cultivator of Five Qi Towards Primordial, it just meant a few more periods of seclusion. With their lifespans of eight hundred or three thousand years, a century did indeed seem fleeting and not at all significant. As a result. Even those disciples below Five Qi Towards Primordial became replaceable cash crops, and the standing of mere mortals, who weren¡¯t even cultivators, goes without saying. Not treating humans as humans is not just an adjective here, but an ongoing reality. The lords of the Nine Provinces, when they pushed people to desperation, at least knew and had the capacity to rise up and fight to the death. But in the Immortal Realm, when the Immortal Sect pushed mortals to desperation, it truly meant that they neither had the strength nor even the thought to rebel would arise. The gap was just too large. Against someone intent on grinding you to dust, what could a mere ant do? Chapter 1242 - Chapter 1242 Chapter 494 Immortal Selection Convention_3 ?Chapter 1242: Chapter 494: Immortal Selection Convention_3 Chapter 1242: Chapter 494: Immortal Selection Convention_3 In Qingyang Country here, this is the relationship between Immortal Sects and mortals. If this year¡¯s celestial selection really fails to produce an Immortal Species, Qing Mountain Pavilion wouldn¡¯t mind at all directly extracting taxes exceeding one hundred percent, driving the tens of thousands of townspeople to their deaths. After all, these mortals can¡¯t resist and pose no threat. Even if driven to death, it¡¯s just one city¡¯s people. There are thousands of similar cities within Qingyang Country, with over a thousand under the control of Qing Mountain Pavilion; they truly do not care about the likes of No Water City. Should the people here perish, a new group can be relocated from elsewhere, and in a few years, it¡¯ll be a new city. Several hundred thousand ants wouldn¡¯t take more than a few years to replace; in the vast population of hundreds of millions under Qingyang Country¡¯s rule, it would only take a year or two, or even just a few months, to recover. It can¡¯t even be considered a loss. Maybe it¡¯ll even alleviate the pressure from an excessive population in the area. One should not doubt that Qing Mountain Pavilion, an Immortal Sect, could commit such acts. Just look at Changqing Domain, which began to collapse after the Great True Person died; the various Immortal Sects contending openly and covertly for their interests, losing their minds over it, and even colluding shamelessly with demons. These signs of moral decay and chaos have already revealed the darkness and cruelty of the sects here. Otherwise, how could the Monster Nations brazenly establish themselves, or the demon-infested chaos that plagued Youxin Country for hundreds of years, have emerged in this Southern Changqing Domain where Immortal Sects are abundant? It is only due to the indulgence and support of the local Immortal Sects that the situation has deteriorated to this extent. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.?¦Ï ¡°Compared to Dongyang Domain under the rule of Dongyang Mountain, where order is well maintained and morals are upheld, Changqing Domain, which has become a land of chaos, is truly fallible beyond measure.¡± Yi Dancheng couldn¡¯t help but recall the Dongyang disciple he had parted ways with not long ago. In contrast to the Immortal Sects here that are as wicked as demons, Li Ruoqing, a cultivator who upholds righteousness and is dedicated to subduing monsters and exorcising demons, is truly a refreshing current in the Immortal Cultivation World. Interacting with such people is truly like drinking sweet water, pleasurable and uplifted in spirit. They might be from neighboring domains, yet the cultivators produced are worlds apart, as different as two species. ¡°The Immortal Cultivation World in Changqing Domain is sick, lacking the suppression of a Great True Person, numerous ambitious villains rise, and the order is disrupted, with Sects beginning to resemble Demon Sects. The mortals of this domain are starting to live worse than livestock. This state of affairs is incorrect. And those cultivators are mistaken and in need of correction.¡± Yi Dancheng took a deep breath, his heart set with determination, ¡°That¡¯s why the Avatar is needed, why we avatars have come here to return this world to the right path. This is also the reason for my existence as a cultivator. Moreover, the local Immortal Sects of Qingyang Country act so perversely and deceitfully, like a Demon Sect, oppressing the people below. Such behavior is an outrage to the whole world! In subjugating them, I only need to raise the banner of righteousness; it would be heeding the Heavenly Path, punishing the tyrants, restoring rites and music, and ensuring peace in the world. It is a divine right and name indeed.¡± Originally, before coming to Qingyang Country, Yi Dancheng had some concerns that directly annihilating three Immortal Sects and monopolizing the country might be inexcusable in terms of reputation. But having seen the current living conditions of the ordinary people in cities like No Water City along the way, his concerns dissipated. While the various Immortal Sects in these chaotic times provide the most basic security for the locals, preventing them from becoming blood livestock bred by demons, as seen in the neighboring Great Eye Kingdom, The people of Qingyang Country are just slightly better off than those of the Great Eye Kingdom. Even excluding the fact that people of the Great Eye Kingdom can be used as livestock and directly consumed by demons, Because their food and cultivation resources are already being provided by mortals. The demons of the Great Eye Kingdom don¡¯t value the supplies necessary for human survival and are thus not inclined to exploit them. Over there, the demons actually prefer to let their bred mortals get plump and chubby, finding them tastier to eat that way. Therefore, in terms of quality of life, the mortals in the Great Eye Kingdom are better off, since they can keep all the harvests from their own farming, surpassing those of Qingyang Country. Because before cultivators in the Immortal Sect gather the Three Qi, they cannot abstain from grains. Those cultivators who are at the level of gathering one level or two levels of energy still need massive support from mortals during cultivation; they require a great deal of worldly wealth to sustain their cultivation. When a novice cultivator starts gathering one level of energy, they need the support of at least a thousand mortals through farming and management. When they reach the stage of gathering two levels of energy, this number soars to ten thousand people. Moreover, as their cultivation increases, the number of supporters required keeps growing, and it¡¯s quite common to need thirty to fifty thousand people before reaching the Three Qi stage. In such cases, if an Immortal Sect recruits disciples, a number of three to five hundred is manageable and doesn¡¯t excessively exploit the local populace. They might not even need to exploit at all; with a simple trick like bringing rain for the mortals, they could collect enough supplies for their disciples¡¯ cultivation. However, if this number were to increase to one or two thousand disciples, at least twenty million mortals would be needed to satisfy the operational needs of an Immortal Sect. If the number of disciples rose to ten thousand, without a hundred million mortals, the sect couldn¡¯t be sustained. For within an Immortal Sect, those who achieve Five Qi Towards Primordial are as rare as phoenix feathers and unicorn horns. Those who succeed in becoming immortal are hard to come by in a thousand years. Even reaching Gathering Three Qi is one in a thousand. The true majority and mainstream are those ordinary disciples who have gathered one level or two levels of energy, whose numbers are not recorded in the annals of true discipleship and who are simply cannon fodder to beef up the sect¡¯s presence. This is the most common reality in the Immortal Cultivation World. It is precisely because of them that the mortals of Qingyang Country lead such hard lives. ¡°The three local Immortal Sects, surrounded by three neighboring countries with Immortals, are besieged by powerful enemies. The three Immortal Sects themselves are also fraught with conflicts, accumulating countless grievances over the years that are impossible to resolve. Facing external threats and internal blood feuds, these conditions force the three sects to spare no effort to enhance their own strength. Even one more disciple at the level of gathering one Qi is valued, and for this, they are willing to ruthlessly exploit those defenseless commoners, pushing them to their deaths. This excess of cultivators is also a calamity for Qingyang Country. Once I settle in this country, I must make it a priority to reduce the inflated number of cultivators, alleviating the burden on mortals, so that long-term peace and stability may be achieved.¡± After this in-depth analysis, Yi Dancheng gained a better understanding of the problems in Qingyang Country. ¡°However, these issues can be addressed later, gradually resolved. Now, on my journey here, I¡¯ve only witnessed the state of affairs under the rule of a single sect, the Qing Mountain Pavilion. Here in Qingyang Country, there¡¯s also the Wind Thunder Fortress Yang Family in the southern part of our state, this cultivation family. And another force, primarily consisting of solitary cultivators, that occupies the northern part, Beidou Gate. I should first observe the situation of these two, whether they are as oppressive and perverse as the Qing Mountain Pavilion. If they are indeed the same, then when it comes time to subdue them in the future, I will have righteous cause, without the need for much concern.¡± With such thoughts in mind, Yi Dancheng finished his last cup of wine, left the money for the meal, and turned to leave the inn. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï There was a selection ceremony for Immortals being held in the city, an event he had long heard of. In Changqing Domain, the selection ceremony is almost the mainstream method for sects to recruit disciples. When in Rome, do as the Romans do. Now that Taiping Dao has been established, it will inevitably recruit disciples in the future. As the School Leader, it¡¯s only proper for me to see how the local sects recruit their disciples. I don¡¯t necessarily have to imitate entirely, but it is acceptable to learn a thing or two. Chapter 1243 - Chapter 1243 Chapter 495 Dark Cultivation ?Chapter 1243: Chapter 495 Dark Cultivation Chapter 1243: Chapter 495 Dark Cultivation The city square. A sea of people had gathered, packing the area to its limits, where children under the age of fifteen made up the majority. However, it was unusual that so many children and youngsters gathered together without playing or making noise, and even whispers were scarce. Despite the crowd, the square was eerily quiet. The tens of thousands present behaved this way for a simple reason. That was because the ones who would inspect them were Immortal Masters from the Qing Mountain Pavilion. With Immortals present, who would dare to act rashly? Even the most mischievous children had been repeatedly warned by their parents before coming not to cause trouble or speak, but to wait quietly. Otherwise, if they angered an Immortal and brought blame upon themselves, their entire family would be doomed. Faced with their parents¡¯ unprecedented instructions and the solemn atmosphere on the scene, even the boldest wouldn¡¯t dare to act out of line here. Instead, everyone had grown up hearing about the deeds of the Immortal Masters, knowing there existed in the world a kind of Immortal who could perform magic, control fire and water, fly through the sky and escape underground, summon clouds and rain, a being with immense power. Such beings would be selected each year from their midst and taken to Immortal Mountain to learn Immortal Techniques. They could become Immortals themselves. And by becoming Immortal, they would possess great strength and lead better lives. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?0 Given this chance to leap from humble origins to greatness, everyone harbored a thirst in their hearts. Thus, over twenty thousand youngsters quietly took on a solemn demeanor, unprecedentedly behaving themselves as they stood there. The only thing betraying their curiosity and longing were the pairs of eyes fixed on the two figures floating in the sky not far ahead, surrounded by radiant light, standing atop clouds. Being able to fly and accompanied by luminance, were those Immortals? Amazing! If only I could do the same. Witnessing such miraculous sights for the first time filled the young hearts with unparalleled yearning. Meanwhile, as they entertained these thoughts, two disciples from Qing Mountain Pavilion high in the sky were casually chatting as they looked down upon the mass of prospective candidates. ¡°Brother Wu, with over twenty thousand people here this time, it seems we will have a bountiful harvest and should exceed the task set by the sect,¡± said one younger disciple with a smile. Brother Wu shook his head, ¡°It seems like there are many, but few are of use. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? More than half of these people have been forcefully brought here from the outskirts and nearby villages and towns. Many of them have gone through the selection before. If they didn¡¯t pass the last time, what makes them think they can pass now? Only those children under ten are participating for the first time, and there is a possibility that an Immortal Species will emerge from them. But there are only five or six thousand of these children. This number only slightly increases the probability of finding an Immortal Species. We might be able to pick two or three Immortal Species, but that merely meets the minimum quota set by the sect. Junior Brother Wang, you¡¯re happy too soon,¡± Brother Wu responded. Upon hearing this, Junior Brother Wang frowned and said, ¡°Why bring so many useless people and waste our time? What is the City Lord of No Water City thinking?¡± As one of the Immortal Sect Cultivators within the Changqing Domain, Junior Brother Wang had become accustomed to a sense of superiority under such a system. He inherently regarded himself and ordinary mortals as different species. The only ones he deemed worthy of consideration were those with the qualifications for Cultivation, capable of becoming his peersa€¡±the Immortal Species. Hearing that the City Lord of No Water City failed to understand this, he felt a surge of anger. Seeing Junior Brother Wang¡¯s reaction, Brother Wu chuckled, ¡°No Water City didn¡¯t produce a single Immortal Species in the last selection. And the Immortal Species they did have in previous ones were our fellow disciples, who have long since perished in the conflicts with the Feng Lei Bao and Beidou Alliance in recent years. As a result, No Water City doesn¡¯t have a single Cultivator to protect it anymore; even for rainfall, they need to pay dearly for our services. Last year, they didn¡¯t reveal an Immortal Species, so the sect punished them with additional taxes. That¡¯s why their past decade has been quite difficult. Bringing in so many people this time is probably an act of desperation, hoping to increase the chances of finding Immortal Species,¡± explained Brother Wu, then added softly, ¡°But that City Lord indeed lacks tact. If we manage to find three Immortal Species this time and fulfill our task, we¡¯ll let him off. If there are less than three, it might be time to replace the City Lord. If there are none, it means that the land¡¯s fortunes are insufficient and the mortal bloodlines here are too poor to produce Immortal Species. We should directly report to the sect, eradicate this city, relocate people from elsewhere, and build a new city.¡± Though Brother Wu¡¯s words were mild, they carried a chilling coldness. Especially the mention of destroying the city made even the previously irate Junior Brother Wang tremble inside. He might have been dismissive of mortals, but his anger was only about wanting to dispose of a City Lord. Yet Brother Wu was contemplating the destruction of an entire city. That would mean killing hundreds of thousands of peoplea€¡±actions not even Demons would take. However, seeing his own elder brother¡¯s indifferent gaze, Junior Brother Wang eventually nodded and smiled, ¡°What Brother says is true.¡± Chapter 1244 - Chapter 1244 Chapter 495 Dark Cultivation_2 ?Chapter 1244: Chapter 495 Dark Cultivation_2 Chapter 1244: Chapter 495 Dark Cultivation_2 ¡°` What do mortals have to do with him? But if he offended Brother Wu, his own little life might not be guaranteed. On the surface, Qingyang Country had three major Immortal Sect powers, still under the control of the Immortal Sect, seemingly ordered. But that was only on the surface. Behind the scenes, one of the three major Immortal Sect powers was Qing Mountain Pavilion, which could be considered a pure Immortal Sect. This pavilion widely opened its Mountain Gate, recruiting disciples from outside, primarily following a master-disciple lineage. Another, the Wind Thunder Fortress¡¯s Yang Family, was a Cultivation Family, managing power mainly by cultivating pure-blooded family members, with core clansmen as the backbone. Then they held the Immortal Selection Conferences, where if they encountered mortals with outstanding qualifications, females were directly taken as wives, and males married into the family as sons-in-law, absorbing fresh blood through such means. The remaining one, the Beidou Alliance, claimed to be an alliance of independent cultivators, but in fact, it was an alliance of various powers besides Qing Mountain Pavilion and the Yang Family. Some sects were so fragmented that they did not even have cultivators of the Five Qi Towards Primordial level, small sects and clans, or rogue cultivators who by sheer luck, had found Immortal Method Inheritance lost to the outside world. These original Ragtag Armies were insignificant, always suppressed by Qing Mountain Pavilion and the Yang Family, unable to cause any trouble. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï However, from a few hundred years ago, an unknown external force began meddling, integrating these Ragtag Armies and building up the Beidou Alliance with connections and support among them. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?0 It wasn¡¯t clear whether they specifically nurtured, or dispatched messengers, but the Beidou Alliance unprecedentedly got its Five Qi Towards Primordial cultivators. And it wasn¡¯t just one, suddenly there were four or five of them. With this, the lack of top-tier combat power that the Beidou Alliance once suffered compared to the other two powers was immediately compensated for. A new power emerged in your own territory, founded by your own subordinates rebelling, to compete for food? How could one endure this! Therefore, upon discovering the Beidou Alliance, Wind Thunder Fortress¡¯s Yang Family and Qing Mountain Pavilion immediately joined hands to encircle and suppress these independent cultivators. But by that time, the Beidou Alliance had already become a significant force, not so easily eradicated. After several battles, with both sides suffering heavy losses and casualties, the two powers finally realized that they could no longer handle the Beidou Alliance. Continuing the fight would only drag them down to mutual destruction, benefitting others. In the end, they had no choice but to acknowledge the rise of this new power. Qingyang Country shifted from a hegemony of two powers to a tripartite stand-off, making the situation increasingly chaotic. After the establishment of the Beidou Alliance, although Qing Mountain Pavilion and the Yang Family did not continue to wage large-scale wars, they still engaged in petty battles annually and major ones every decade. Every dispute resulted in the death of dozens to hundreds of disciples. Merely these petty clashes had already caused significant losses to the three powers. On average, each one lost hundreds of people every year. This was a rather terrifying number. Even though each of the three powers had more than ten thousand disciples, they could not bear such losses and had to replenish with a large amount of fresh blood. Therefore, the Immortal Selection Conference held every ten years, recruiting thousands of people per event, became the primary channel for the powers to replenish their disciples. Similarly. In such a brutal war of attrition, ordinary Disciples of Immortal Sect like Brother Wu and Junior Brother Wang, selected from the Immortal Selection Conference with no particular background. Even though they had entered the Immortal Sect, learned the Immortal Technique, and wielded powerful forces they could once only dream of. Inside the Immortal Sect, they were still insignificant ants, cannon fodder. Not only did they have to handle a vast array of tedious tasks, but every two or three years, they also had to participate in a minor conflict, shedding blood and sacrificing their lives for the sect. This was also the purpose of the sect¡¯s cultivation of them. Otherwise, why would the sect teach you Immortal Technique and use vast resources to cultivate you if not to spread the Tao Inheritance and act out of selfless benevolence? If it were truly to spread the Tao Inheritance, then with so many elders and high-rankers in the sect, and their families having plenty of people wishing to join, when would it be your turn? It was precisely because they needed people to sacrifice their lives that they recruited ordinary folks. Of course, the three powers did not force disciples to march to their deaths. If they did that, they wouldn¡¯t be cultivating disciples but rather cultivating enemies. To give the disciples some hope, Qing Mountain Pavilion and others still provided some paths for promotion. If a disciple survived five sect conflicts, those ordinary disciples selected could then be converted to inner sect disciples. Once becoming inner sect disciples, they only needed to handle some internal affairs of the sect. Though still cumbersome, they no longer had to risk their lives out there. This was one way out. Alternatively, if you pursued diligent cultivation and broke through Gathering Three Qi, then with profound Cultivation, you could automatically become a true disciple of the sect and even choose one of the Five Qi Towards Primordial elders as your master, becoming part of the inner circle. This was yet another path to the heavens. Once a true disciple, they needed only focus on Cultivation without having to deal with mundane sect affairs. It was also the path most longed for by many ordinary disciples. Unfortunately. To breakthrough Gathering Three Qi on one¡¯s own required Superior qualifications, which were impossible without them. And those with Superior qualifications were one in ten thousand. Each Immortal Selection Conference, the number of those with such qualifications among the Immortal Species, could be counted on one hand. This was the path of geniuses, completely unattainable for the average person. Therefore, for most ordinary disciples, the most realistic path was to engage in the conflicts, survive five times, and become inner sect disciples. The Brother Wu before him had already participated in four such conflicts. It was said that he had slain no fewer than ten enemy cultivators and was indeed a formidable presence among the ordinary disciples. ¡°` Chapter 1245 - Chapter 1245 Chapter 495 Dark Cultivation_3 ?Chapter 1245: Chapter 495 Dark Cultivation_3 Chapter 1245: Chapter 495 Dark Cultivation_3 The opponent survived the next conflict, meeting the quota of five times and was sure to become an inner disciple. However, Junior Brother Wang had only participated in one sect conflict. But during that single time, he had nearly died, almost giving up his life. The next time he participates, whether he could survive was also unknown. It was precisely because of this. That he desperately worked to secure an opportunity to venture on a common task with Brother Wu. His purpose was to utilize this chance to build a good relationship with Brother Wu and strive to join Brother Wu in executing the sect conflict tasks next time. He wanted the renowned Brother Wu to lend him a hand during the conflict. Whether he lived next time would entirely depend on Brother Wu. In such a situation, he wouldn¡¯t offend Brother Wu just for some mortals. ¡°After all, the past Immortal Species of No Water City have all perished in sect conflicts and have no backing left. Without the protection of other fellow disciples, and merely tens of thousands of mortals, their deaths would mean little. Compared to the life of a true Immortal Master, making Brother Wu happy is most important.¡± Thinking this, Junior Brother Wang stopped troubling himself about those people. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï At this moment, as half a timing passed, all the children from No Water City who were candidates had already gathered. The City Lord of No Water City respectfully came to report, and then Brother Wu, with a friendly smile, allowed the other party to leave, showing none of the ruthlessness he had displayed when talking about killing and annihilating the city. Then, once the people left, Brother Wu turned back and said indifferently to Junior Brother Wang, ¡°Junior Brother, now that everyone has arrived, let us begin.¡± Junior Brother Wang hurriedly nodded, ¡°Yes, I¡¯ll start right now.¡± As he spoke, he waved his sleeve, and a spirit talisman painted by an elder of the sect flew out. Clasping his hands together to form a magical gesture, he channeled magic power into it. The runes drawn on the spirit talisman flashed brilliantly, emitting a tremendous wave of light from within the runes, sweeping over the crowd below. This was a rune spell used by the Immortal Sect in the Immortal Realm for large-scale root essence testing, with an accuracy exceeding 99 percent. The spirit talisman in Junior Brother Wang¡¯s hand was a large-sized one specially made by the sect, capable of testing fifty thousand people at once and was highly valued within the sect. Only elders at the Five Qi Towards Primordial level could craft it, and it was quite expensive. Normally for testing, a medium-sized spirit talisman would suffice. A medium-sized spirit talisman, which only disciples who had gathered Three Qi or more could forge, could test five thousand people. A small-sized spirit talisman, even an ordinary disciple like Junior Brother Wang, with ten or fifteen days of effort, could craft it, and it was practically worthless. It could only test five hundred people. According to the sect¡¯s rules, using a medium-sized spirit talisman required at least the detection of one Immortal Species to meet the standard. For a large-sized spirit talisman, there had to be at least three people. For small-sized spirit talismans, it didn¡¯t matter. However, typically going to a city would involve a few thousand people, so a medium-sized spirit talisman was usually used. Last time in No Water City, a medium-sized spirit talisman was used, and it tested several thousand people, yet not a single Immortal Species was found. For the Immortal Sect, this was considered a loss. It wasted the efforts of a true disciple, and possibly even that of a high-ranking official in the sect, which was a mistake. Even the testing disciple had to be accountable upon return. This was why, after the previous inspection, No Water City was fined ten percent of its taxes as a punishment. ?¦Ï¦Í¨À¦Ï.§ã¦Ï This time No Water City, thinking itself clever, brought over twenty thousand people, already exceeding the range of the medium-sized spirit talisman. And generally, the disciple presiding over the selection of Immortal Species for a grand meeting would only bring one large-sized spirit talisman, two medium-sized, and four small-sized talismans. No matter whether it was a medium or small Spirit Talisman, neither could completely assess the over twenty thousand people below. Only by using a large Spirit Talisman could it be sufficient. Yet, once it was used, if three Immortal Species weren¡¯t selected, it would be a loss for the Immortal Sect. In that case, the clever City Lord could only atone with his death. If not even one was selected, all the citizens of No Water City would also have to atone with their lives. This was why Brother Wu had spoken as he did earlier. Junior Brother Wang, having joined the sect only a few years ago, didn¡¯t understand the complexities within and thus couldn¡¯t comprehend. He simply mistook it for Brother Wu being naturally cruel, regarding ordinary people as ants, easy to kill at whim. ¡®However, this person is still sensible. Although he doesn¡¯t understand, he knows to follow orders without objection.¡¯ This kind of obedience has potential value for cultivation. Next time we participate in the sect¡¯s struggles, I can pull him up. Perhaps he can become my support within the sect in the future.¡¯ thought Brother Wu as he glanced at Junior Brother Wang, who was focused on manipulating the Spirit Talisman and conducting the assessment. As the light from the Spirit Talisman slowly swept across the square below, amongst the more than twenty thousand children, those who were touched by the light began to emanate a faint glow from their spiritual platform about three inches tall. As the light flickered, these children were subjected to a force of attraction from the Spirit Talisman, voluntarily floating towards the clouds where Brother Wu and Junior Brother Wang were. One, two, three¡­ As the light from the Spirit Talisman receded, all the Immortal Species who had been determined to have the right roots flew onto the cloud. Junior Brother Wang counted the number and excitedly reported to his older brother, ¡°Brother, there are five in total. We have exceeded our task. There will definitely be a reward from the sect.¡± Brother Wu glanced at the Immortal Species who had landed on the cloud, excited and fearful, and he nodded slightly, ¡°Mhm, not bad. No Water City is indeed fortunate this time. Let¡¯s go, bring the chosen ones back to the mountain and report to the elder.¡± ¡°Yes!¡± Junior Brother Wang nodded, then manipulated the Magical Artifact Cloud and flew in the direction of the Mountain Gate. The two didn¡¯t even think of talking more with the people of No Water City. They were just ordinary humans after all. They left countless hopeful humans behind, watching the enigmatic and mysterious Immortal Masters drift away. Meanwhile, the servants from the City Lord¡¯s mansion ran to the homes of those who had been selected as Immortal Species, wearing broad smiles and respectfully inviting them to a banquet at the City Lord¡¯s mansion. This selection event had at last brought a gleam of hope to No Water City. When these five Immortal Species grew up, it would provide a strong backing, certainly deserving grand celebration. As for the families of these five Immortal Species, they had become the key channel for maintaining No Water City¡¯s relationship with the future Immortal Masters. They must be valued. In a city-wide celebration, Yi Dancheng also slowly revealed his concealed form from high in the sky. He watched the two Cultivators from Qing Mountain Pavilion departing, deep in thought, ¡°It seems that within this Immortal Sect, the internal ruthlessness is severe. It rather has the air of a gangster¡¯s way of cultivation, unique to smaller sects, isn¡¯t it?¡± Such blatant exploitation of disciples as seen in Qing Mountain Pavilion, Yi Dancheng had never encountered in other Immortal Sects of the Immortal Realm. Changqing Immortal Sect and Dongyang Mountain need not even be mentioned. These Overlord Immortal Sects have disciples with integrity, still upholding the righteous creed of exorcising monsters and demons. The other Grand Immortal Sects with True Immortals might still not treat ordinary humans very well, but at least their disciples remain harmonious and friendly, not treating each other as mere ants. They still manage to maintain a semblance of Immortal energy. But small Immortal Sects like those in Qingyang Country clearly operate by the law of the jungle, treating even their disciples as crops to be harvested. This kind of gangster cultivation was something he was seeing for the first time. He couldn¡¯t help but feel astonished by it. Chapter 1246 - Chapter 1246 Chapter 496 Influence Diffusion ?Chapter 1246: Chapter 496: Influence Diffusion Chapter 1246: Chapter 496: Influence Diffusion Youxin Country, Mi Yun Mountain. ¡°Hmm, over at Yi Dancheng, they have already started to probe into Qingyang Country. Not bad, not bad, when the Immortal Sects over there engage in underground Cultivation like this, they are practically handing over their leverage to us. In the future, when Taiping Dao takes over that area, they can justifiably accuse them of crimes against the peoplea€¡±we¡¯ll have all the moral high ground.¡± Lu Yuan had just finished his monthly psychic contact with his avatar in Yi Dancheng and, after learning about the latest developments, he couldn¡¯t help but nod in satisfaction. He was quite pleased with this avatar. After taking a trip outside, not only had he cleared out the entire Great Eye Kingdom and brought back nearly a hundred million people of the Human Race to Youxin Country, revitalizing the desolate Youxin Country in an instant, but he also defeated the Six-eyed Lord, displaying the Divine Powers of the Taiping School Leader and greatly promoted the influence of Taiping Dao in the Southern Domain. ¡°And most importantly, the Soul-Cleaving Great Saber that was sent back¡­¡± Lu Yuan caressed the Magical Artifact that Yi Dancheng had sent back from the Great Eye Kingdom six months ago, which now shimmered with a faint golden light in his hand. ¡°After six months of remodeling and tempering, the numerous flaws from the initial spider¡¯s artifact creation have been corrected, and it has been transformed into a Luck Artifact. By now, having honed it with the Magic Power of the Emperor Immortal¡¯s Dao Fruit, it reached minor success, developing the prototype of an Immortal Artifact.¡± ¡°Now it only needs the Qi Luck of one country in the Immortal Realm for three hundred years to advance into a Human Immortal level External Tool Dao Fruit, in five hundred years it can reach mid-level Human Immortal, and in a thousand years, the late stage.¡± ¡°In my hand, I¡¯ll soon have another Human Immortal level combat asset.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 The materials for this saber were superb, its main body made up of several types of Immortal-grade Immortal Materials, in terms of rarity, already on par with the materials Lu Yuan scavenged from the entire Nine Provinces to construct Yi Dancheng¡¯s avatar. The reason for its failure to advance to Immortal Artifact was mainly because the legacy of the Six-eyed Lord was lacking and he wasn¡¯t very skilled in the art of artifact crafting. Thus, flaws occurred at the very foundation during the crafting of the Magical Treasure. Using the wrong methods to forge a deficient Magical Treasure would be absurd if it somehow produced the correct result. But Lu Yuan gathered the transmission of ancient great teachings throughout the Nine Provinces, and when it comes to profound foundations, perhaps only those Heavenly Immortal great sects surpassed him within the Immortal Realm. Therefore, compared to ordinary Immortal Sects, Lu Yuan¡¯s foundation is genuinely profound. He had also deeply explored all sorts of Cultivation crafts during the past thousand years. Otherwise, he wouldn¡¯t have been able to forge the Emperor¡¯s three-piece set and the Taiping three-piece set. Now, augmented by the Earth Immortal Dao Fruit and supported by the foundation of the Nine Provinces, it was simple to correct some mistakes related to the Soul-Cleaving Great Saber. It did not take much effort to complete the transformation of the original Magical Artifact into an External Tool Dao Fruit. The materials for this saber were almost comparable to those for the Emperor¡¯s suit. That is to say, If cultivated properly, this saber also has the potential to advance into an Earth Immortal Dao Fruit. Suddenly having such a potential-filled avatar as a backup, Lu Yuan was naturally very happy. Therefore, for the past six months, as soon as this saber arrived in his hands, he immediately started seclusion, dedicatedly refining the Soul-Cleaving Great Saber. ¡°Now, after my refinement using Earth Immortal Magic Power, this great saber is completely different from the original Soul-Cleaving Great Saber. Not only has its physical form and aura completely changed, but the crafting method is also entirely different, fundamentally transformed, so calling it the Soul-Cleaving Great Saber no longer suits. Since it is still crafted using the method of the Way of Control Pneuma as an External Tool Magical Treasure, in the same series as Yi Dancheng and the other Emperor¡¯s sets, let¡¯s call it the Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade from now on. The three-piece Emperor¡¯s set is now a four-piece set, and ideally, it should be expanded to one hundred and eight sets. If I can achieve this goal, although I dare not claim to dominate the Immortal Realm, having sufficient power to rule a domain is certainly within reach.¡± Lu Yuan has set another ambitious goal for his future self. To complete one hundred and eight pieces of the Emperor¡¯s set. This vision is enough to motivate him for tens of thousands of years. It could serve as a goal complementary to his journey towards becoming a Heavenly Immortal. ¡°The forging of the Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade has now concluded this phase. Next, it only needs the nurturing of Qi Luck, and when it accumulates enough, it will transform on its own. It doesn¡¯t require much of my attention anymore.¡± After touching the cold blade, Lu Yuan swept his sleeve and stowed it away. For now, he had no use for this Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade, nor did he have spare Qi Luck to sustain this External Tool Dao Fruit. Currently, in Taiping Dao¡¯s possession, there is only the territory of Youxin Country. This territory, with the help of Yi Dancheng, has welcomed nearly a hundred million people and has been redeveloped. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? This year, under his instructions, the avatar Che Shidao promoted some remaining old Divines to fill the high-level Divine Positions in various places, and also selected many reputable people from among the mortals to become low-level Divine Spirits. After such manipulations and supplements, thousands of Divine Spirits in Youxin Country, even including the land gods, were all in place. Although the entire Divine Method system is controlled by outsiders, not a single person from Taiping Dao itself, even if through Divine Talisman Charters, controlling these Divine Spirits is only enough to ensure they don¡¯t dare to rebel openly. What they think privately, no one can guarantee. But still, there¡¯s one thing to say. No matter how many outsiders there are now, those Divine Spirits have a lifespan limit. As long as they don¡¯t become Immortals, enduring a thousand years would be enough to see them all replaced. Chapter 1247 - Chapter 1247 Chapter 496 Influence Diffusion_2 ?Chapter 1247: Chapter 496: Influence Diffusion_2 Chapter 1247: Chapter 496: Influence Diffusion_2 The hidden dangers of now, if left unattended for a thousand years, would no longer be dangers. Lu Yuan would never let such worries bind his actions with too many concerns, ultimately causing him to choke and trip over his own steps. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï How foolish that would be. Just like at this moment. ¡°Now that all levels of divine spirits have taken up their posts, the Qi Luck throughout Youxin Country is converging towards me, like many streams flowing into a river. Even the Qi Luck of Youxin Country, with the population boost from Great Eye Kingdom, has surged to a hundred and fifty-six million people. Such Qi Luck could certainly sustain a Human Immortal.¡± Lu Yuan had not forgotten that his main purpose in creating many avatars and stirring up turmoil in the Immortal Realm by plotting against many small countries was something else. It was to enhance his own strength in order to protect his path to longevity in the future. In the face of fundamental strength, avatars, Taiping Dao, and Qi Luck are all insignificant. Only when one is strong in oneself is one truly strong. Even if the three External Tool Dao Fruits in his hand were useful, after being used for ten million years, they too would decay. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? Only infinite lifespan is eternal. Therefore, to make strength eternal, one could only enhance one¡¯s own strength, allowing strength to become eternal along with lifespan. This was his main purpose. All other external objects were merely illusions. ¡°Moreover, over at Yi Dancheng, they have been waiting for me to break through to Human Immortal so that we can launch new operations. The development of Taiping Dao has been hindered by the limits of my own strength. It really can¡¯t be delayed any longer.¡± Having decided, Lu Yuan then sent messages to his two avatars to manage external affairs. Then he began to gather his spirit, regulate his state, and commenced his closed-door cultivation in the secret chamber of Mi Yun Mountain. He would not emerge until he had become a Human Immortal. ¡­ Time flies, and in the blink of an eye, three years had passed. In the sky, several streaks of light flashed past quickly, sweeping over the village below, heading towards a large city nestled in a valley. As they approached the city, a faint golden light flashed by the bed, and several patrolling divine spirits manifested, blocking those streaks of light. One of the leading divine spirits shouted, ¡°Who goes there? This is Valley City. Any Cultivators from outside must report.¡± The several streaks of light descending towards the city did not force their way through but stopped in the clouds, ceased their light, and revealed several Daoist figures. The chief Daoist stepped forward and spoke amicably, ¡°We have heard that Bihu Palace¡¯s elder, Zuo Yunting, from Changqing Domain had been invited to attend the grand ceremony of Taiping Dao¡¯s new branch in Youxin Country. Here is the invitation.¡± ¡°So you are Immortal Masters from Bihu Palace.¡± Upon hearing this from the other party and seeing the invitation that served as proof, the divine spirit merely glanced at it briefly to verify its authenticity. Then his expression became solemn, and he said respectfully, ¡°The higher sect has already prepared lodgings in the city for you Immortal Masters to stay temporarily. You may choose to remain here to explore Valley City while waiting for the grand ceremony to begin. Or you can go directly to Mi Yun Mountain, where there are Immortal Masters from the higher sect to host you.¡± Bihu Palace is one of only three local Immortal Sects in the nine nations of the southern Changqing Domain that have Human Immortals. Although there is only one Human Immortal in this Immortal Sect, not as many as the two Human Immortals at Xuan Turtle Mountain and Jintai Gate, it is still one of the significant powers in the Southern Domain. Immortal Masters from such a sect are not easily offended. These divine spirits, though backed by Taiping Dao, are naturally born inferior to Immortal Dao cultivators, even of the same Cultivation Realm. Thus, they really couldn¡¯t muster much authority. ¡°Since we¡¯re here in Youxin Country, we might as well take a good look around.¡± Zuo Yunting, devoid of the pride typical of Immortal Sect cultivators and facing divine spirits of far lesser cultivation, was quite amiable, smiling, ¡°Since there¡¯s still more than a month until the grand ceremony starts, we indeed arrived early; we¡¯ll stay in the city and wait for the event to begin.¡± The lead divine spirit hurriedly said, ¡°If so, please follow me, Immortal Masters. We have prepared excellent residences in the city to ensure your satisfaction.¡± After saying this, he led the Bihu Palace cultivators to an elegantly arranged courtyard. ¡°This is where you Immortal Masters will be staying.¡± The divine spirit said enthusiastically, ¡°If you Immortal Masters have any other requests, you can directly summon a patrolling god and command them.¡± Zuo Yunting continued to nod with a smile, ¡°Understood, honored god, you may go about your duties; there¡¯s no need to pay too much attention to us.¡± ¡°Yes, then I shall take my leave first.¡± Seeing the other party say this, the patrolling god leader discreetly withdrew with his subordinates. Once they had left, among the cultivators following Zuo Yunting, someone spoke up, ¡°Uncle Master, why bother being so polite to a minor god? He¡¯s just a patrolling god with the Gathering Three Qi; how dare he show off in our presence.¡± In the Immortal Realm, the Immortal Dao is supreme. Divine spirits are merely servants bestowed by Immortal Dao cultivators. Though openly, no cultivator claims that divine spirits are their servants. However, in practice, they treat divine spirits as servants to be commanded at will. In such an environment, it¡¯s natural for Immortal Sect cultivators to disdain divine spirits. Chapter 1248 - Chapter 1248 Chapter 496 Influence Diffusion_3 ?Chapter 1248: Chapter 496: Influence Diffusion_3 Chapter 1248: Chapter 496: Influence Diffusion_3 ¡°` Therefore, seeing how polite my own martial uncle is towards a mere patrolling god, some disciples felt indignant. Zuo Yunting turned his head, observing several disciples with the same expression, and the smile on his face faded away as he spoke seriously, ¡°What is your level of cultivation? Aren¡¯t you also Gathering Three Qi, yet you look down upon a divine spirit of the same realm? Those unaware would think each of you has become a True Immortal, so grand is your tone. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?0 Do you truly believe yourselves to be Unrivaled in the World?¡± Dissatisfied and worried about his disciples¡¯ impetuous mentality, Zuo Yunting admonished them. ¡°Disciples dare not.¡± Seeing their martial uncle angry, regardless of whether they agreed or not, the disciples instinctively shrank back, not daring to talk back. But this was merely lip service; in their hearts, they were still resentful. Clearly aware of this, Zuo Yunting softened his tone after a few words and began to explain, ¡°I tell you, when you leave the sect and go into the outside world, you must not carry the temper you have inside with you. You should know that beyond the heavens there are heavens, beyond people there are people, and there is always a higher mountain. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Within Youqing Country, our Bihu Gate is naturally the first under the heavens, and no one in the entire country dares to provoke us. As arrogant as you are, as long as you do not provoke us elders within the gate, even divine spirits who have reached Five Qi Towards Primordial wouldn¡¯t dare to touch you, would they? But that is only within Youqing Country. Once out of Youqing Country, our Bihu Gate is no longer the first. In the entire Southern Domain¡¯s nine nations, among all forces that possess a True Immortal, including those Monster Nations, there are countless stronger than Bihu Gate, and our sect can only be ranked at the very bottom. Even the Great Eye Kingdom, which has been suppressed by Taiping Dao over and over in recent years, is much stronger than our Bihu Gate. Any of these numerous forces, no matter which one we provoke, would be a disaster that could topple the gate. Especially Taiping Dao. In recent years, they have occupied the whole of Youxin Country and developed it very prosperously. I recall my last visit here, already five hundred years ago. In these five hundred years, Youxin Country has been ravaged by demons, with its people suffering and the land left in tatters. And yet, as we traveled, what we heard and saw were villages and towns scattered everywhere. City Gods and local deities, gods of mountains and waters, each performing their duties. This Youxin Country has been thoroughly developed, forged into an impregnable stronghold. Now that their branch has been officially established here in the Southern Domain, they have firmly placed their feet here. It¡¯s no longer like before, without any foundation. And with the strength of Taiping Dao¡¯s two True Immortals, even if they have established a branch here and occupied only one country, stationing just one True Immortal here, the power of Taiping Dao will inevitably rise to be the foremost among all sects and nations. This is now the leading sect of the Southern Domain. In face of such a sect, The Great Eye Kingdom has shrunk back within its capital city, Xuan Turtle Mountain and Jintai Gate have retreated, and the old dragon of Jiuchuan Dragon Palace turns a blind eye to the pain of losing its children¡­ These True Immortals and Great Demons dare not provoke the sharp edge of Taiping Dao. Our Bihu Gate is even less capable, so how could we dare to provoke them? The divine spirits of Valley City, even those of Youxin Country, although insignificant, are backed by Taiping Dao and thus wear such a coat. As long as it is not ripped off, who would dare to provoke them? The miserable plight of the Six-eyed Lord of the Great Eye Kingdom is still vivid in my mind. Now every year, Taiping Dao goes into their country to sweep through it. Forced into hiding within the city, the Six-eyed Lord dares not come out. All their strongholds throughout the country have been eradicated. Though nominally in control of a nation, in reality, he is merely the lord of a single city. I suspect that the Six-eyed Lord will eventually be unable to stay and will choose to flee this place to settle elsewhere. This Monster Nation is unlikely to survive much longer and will sooner or later be seized by Taiping Dao. At that time, Taiping Dao will become the first power in the Southern Domain to occupy two countries. And this territory was snatched from a Great Demon. If we include Youxin Country, it was even taken from the hands of Qing Immortal Sect. That¡¯s the Qing Immortal Sect, after all!¡± Towards the end, Zuo Yunting¡¯s voice trembled slightly. Although the Qing Immortal Sect had materially declined, as the source of the name for the Great Domain of Changqing, to the various forces of this domain, the Qing Immortal Sect remains an unshakeable dominant force, a beacon-like presence. To this dominant Immortal Sect, even in decline, no one dares to provoke. Thus, even though Youxin Country had not had an Immortal presiding over it for three hundred years, none of the powers of the Southern Domain, whether gods or monsters, dared to take it over by force. In the entire Changqing Domain, only those rebellious Immortal Sects from the Western Domain dared to snatch food from the tiger¡¯s mouth of Qing Immortal Sect. But aside from the Western Domain Immortal Sects, no other power in any region dares to do so. Because those that did so in the past have all disappeared. Wiped out by the Qing Immortal Sect with thunderous force. Until the emergence of Taiping Dao. So when Taiping Dao took over Youxin Country, one can imagine the shock in the hearts of the Immortal Sects in the nine nations of the Southern Domain. It was almost as if the beacon had been extinguished. In its place, respect and wariness towards Taiping Dao grew. And this has intensified with the downfall of the Great Eye Kingdom. Taiping Dao must not be provoked a€¡° this has been etched in the hearts of smaller Immortal Sects like Bihu Gate. Therefore, on this trip to attend the ceremony, as soon as they entered Youxin Country, Zuo Yunting exercised utmost caution, not daring to step out of line in the slightest. Even towards those divine spirits who were once not held in high regard, he was extremely polite, fearing that he might offend Taiping Dao and bring disaster upon himself and Bihu Gate behind him. Seeing that his disciples were harboring resentment, he quickly admonished and soothed them, fearing they might act rashly due to pride and cause trouble. ¡°So it is. Martial uncle, it was reckless of us, thank you for the lesson.¡± After hearing Zuo Yunting speak, the disciples were moved and sincerely admitted their mistakes. And Zuo Yunting, regardless of whether they truly understood or were pretending, deemed that he had fulfilled his duty after imparting a lesson. He left them with one final admonishment: ¡°I have said what I needed to say, and if you still do not take it to heart and cause some trouble, your martial uncle will not protect you, nor will the sect. If Taiping Dao really starts to investigate, your martial uncle will show no mercy and will hand you over directly. Let it not be said that you were not warned.¡± ¡°` Chapter 1249 - Chapter 1249 Chapter 497 Jiuzhou Immortal Gate ?Chapter 1249: Chapter 497 Jiuzhou Immortal Gate Chapter 1249: Chapter 497 Jiuzhou Immortal Gate Just as guests like those at Bihu Palace¡¯s Zuo Yunting were rushing to Mi Yun Mountain after receiving invitations, the master of Mi Yun Mountain, Che Shidao, had already quietly left the mountain and arrived at a desolate location within Youxin Country. Bo Yangling. This was the location in the Immortal Realm where Lu Yuan ascended. It was situated in the southern part of Youxin Country, at the intersection of Changqing Domain and Dongyang Domain, surrounded by ranges of mountains, rarely visited by humans. In recent years, under the management of Taiping Dao, Youxin Country had rapidly recovered from previous chaos caused by demons, healing its wounds and beginning to flourish. However, this prosperity, under Lu Yuan¡¯s deliberate control, had conspicuously avoided the vicinity of Bo Yangling. The excuse used was that there were too many mountains, which were not suitable for development. The population relocated from the Great Eye Kingdom was settled in the plains instead, better revitalizing the vitality of Youxin Country. Thus, within Youxin Country, some of the more desolate mountainous areas still retained their appearance from the time when demons wreaked havoc, barely seeing any human activity, let alone having people visit. Even Divine Spirits were scarcely enshrined in such desolate places. The same excuse of a sparse population without incense support, unsuitable for the enshrinement of Divine Spirits, was used. In this way, not only were there no mortals near Bo Yangling, but not even a single Divine Spirit could be seen. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? The so-called place where not even a bird would defecate described such a location. ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï With neither mortals, incense, nor divine positions, all that met the eye were desolate mountains and fierce wildlife. Even Spiritual Energy was scarce. For such a region, not to mention mortals not visiting, even Divine Spirits, or even cultivators, would not spare it a glance; even if they passed by, they would not stop for a moment. This place was deliberately ignored by people. And the purpose of doing so, naturally, was to hide the only known path that might still lead back to the Jiuzhou Realm. It was also about creating a distraction-free environment suitable for handling some secretive affairs. For example, at this moment, in the distance, thunder roared and countless flashes of lightning streaked; silver dragons and snakes ravaged the clouds, then transformed into torrents that poured down toward the figure below. But faced with this thunder, the figure beneath the clouds was not at all panicked. With a seal in hand, he simply flipped it, and instantly, a beam of golden light burst forth, colliding unyieldingly with the torrent of thunder. As the golden and thunderous lights collided, heaven and earth trembled. Yet the person targeted by the thunder remained utterly calm, just holding the seal to counter the thunder, enduring this heavenly tribulation as it continued. The Thunder Tribulation, which countless cultivators fear immensely, seemed so trivial in his eyes, without a hint of fear. Finally, after the heavenly tribulation lasted for a while, the clouds in the sky finally dissipated. The thunder dispersed and a beam of golden light shot up to the sky, accompanied by a torrent of hearty laughter, stirring the weather within a hundred miles. However, by this time, the area within a thousand miles of Bo Yangling had long been deserted, without any mountain or water spirits, and some minor demons had also been cleared out, leaving no one to notice the disturbance. Even if someone occasionally intruded, Che Shidao was responsible for intercepting them. A Late-stage Human Immortal as a guardian, along with the breakthrough individual¡¯s Earth Immortal Dao Fruit, would suffice for self-protection even against an Earth Immortal. Security had been made as tight as possible. The golden light, from afar and soon up close, quickly descended in front of Che Shidao, revealing a graceful youthful figure. ¡°Congratulations to the original on breaking through to Human Immortal and achieving the Dao Fruit.¡± Che Shidao, acting as an avatar, thoughtfully congratulated the Lu Yuan in front of him. ¡°Haha, it¡¯s just Human Immortal,¡± Lu Yuan laughed loudly, waving his hand, ¡°I have the Earth Immortal Dao Fruit, and I hold the Immortal Artifact Ten Thousand People Seal, if I couldn¡¯t even transcend a single tribulation to become immortal, then no one in the world could become immortal.¡± Though he said this, the joy manifesting on his face could hardly be concealed. After cultivating for over a thousand years, he had finally become an immortal in one fell swoop. Even Lu Yuan, who had cultivated a millennium-old temperament and was a being of longevity, could hardly contain his excitement. This was about becoming an immortal. Picking stars, turning rivers, flying across skies, reversing Yin and Yang¡­ All these descriptions spoke of an Immortal¡¯s capabilities. And now, having become immortal and successfully crossing this threshold, this experience was something he had never had before when controlling the Earth Immortal Dao Fruit. The former was an external tool; one¡¯s own realm is fundamental. Now that his realm had risen, with Immortal Artifacts in his left hand and External Tool Dao Fruit in his right, his own strength robust, he grasped both, a sense of unparalleled security filling his heart. After rejoicing for a good while, Lu Yuan calmed his emotions and also used the Earth Immortal Dao Fruit to adapt and control his surging Magic Power. With the experience of controlling the power of the Earth Immortal Realm, managing the surge in Human Immortal Magic Power was nothing but a piece of cake. After all these tasks were completed, he finally had the time to ask, ¡°Now that I have become immortal, it¡¯s time to announce to the world the establishment of Taiping Dao. How is the preparation for the grand opening ceremony going?¡± According to the plan, once Lu Yuan had the means to protect himself, the original could remain behind the scenes, and the Earth Immortal avatar could quickly emerge, serving as the new second layer of protection. With the Earth Immortal avatar as a backup, Taiping Dao could then pursue a new expansion. After all, both Yi Dancheng and Che Shidao, these two avatars, were still waiting to breakthrough to Earth Immortal, urgently needing a great amount of Qi Luck and Qi Fortune for sustenance and to accumulate a foundation. Chapter 1250 - Chapter 1250 Chapter 497 Jiuzhou Immortal Gate_2 ?Chapter 1250: Chapter 497 Jiuzhou Immortal Gate_2 Chapter 1250: Chapter 497 Jiuzhou Immortal Gate_2 Now there¡¯s also the addition of the Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade; for this External Tool Dao Fruit to grow, it requires the accumulation of Qi Luck. This has led to Taiping Dao having no choice but to expand. Even Qingyang Country and Youxin Country, which were originally planned to be sufficient, are no longer enough, and it is necessary to add another small country to satisfy the needs of the three Avatars. These are issues that urgently need to be resolved after the development of one¡¯s own strength. ¡°Representatives from the three major Daoist sects of the Southern Domaina€¡±Xuan Turtle Mountain, Jintai Gate, Bihu Palacea€¡±have all sent emissaries to participate in the celebration. From the Qing Immortal Sect over there, True Person Yang Jihua, who had previously visited, also came as a representative of the Qing Immortal Sect to offer congratulations. The Giant Spirit Sect of the Western Domain, which has control over Qingyu Country, has also sent a True Person here to Mi Yun Mountain. Besides these, there are some minor Immortal Sects without any Immortals, too insignificant to mention,¡± Che Shidao summarized the recent happenings in a brief report. Hmm, he didn¡¯t mention the Great Eye Kingdom or the Jiuchuan Demon Country. In the Southern Domain territories, Taiping Dao¡¯s longstanding position is that Immortals and Monsters cannot coexist. For any Demon that harms humans, they maintain an unwavering determination to eradicate them, showing no mercy whatsoever. ¡°The Giant Spirit Sect has also come?¡± Upon hearing this sect¡¯s name, Lu Yuan¡¯s eyebrows slightly raised. ¡°Yes, they have come too.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï Purple Cloud Sect, Azure Dragon Sect, Danding Sect, Haiyun Pavilion, and other Immortal Sects of the Western Domain didn¡¯t wait for invitationsa€¡±they all sent representatives to observe the ceremony.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s brows furrowed deeper: ¡°So you¡¯re saying, all five major Immortal Sects of the Western Domain have arrived. These Jiuzhou Immortal Gates seem intent on forcing me to take a stand.¡± Yes, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates. Since planning to take Qingyang Country, it¡¯s inevitable for Lu Yuan to get to know the forces around this country and the internal situation of the country ahead of time. But upon investigating, problems arose. Inside Qingyang Country, the three major forcesa€¡±Qing Mountain Pavilion, Wind Thunder Fortress, Beidou Alliancea€¡±appear unaffiliated with each other and embroiled in incessant conflicts. However, in reality, these three forces are intricately intertwined, each with entangled interests, and all supported by major powers behind the scenes. Among them, Qing Mountain Pavilion, the legitimate Immortal Sect of Qingyang Country, has always been on good terms with Jintai Gate of neighboring Anyu Country. Disciples of the two sects frequently interact, referring to each other as fellow disciples. Even rumors suggest that thousands of years ago, Qing Mountain Pavilion was actually a covert lineage disciple of Jintai Gate, who established their own branch during a time when the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s control over Qingyang Country declined. This equates to Jintai Gate being a branch of Qing Mountain Paviliona€¡±they are essentially one family. As for the Yang Family of Wind Thunder Fortressa€¡±this is a homegrown Cultivation sect of Qingyang Country, initially under the jurisdiction of the Changqing Immortal Sect. Members of the family almost exclusively joined the local Changqing Branch, thus considered a clan within the sect. However, after the Changqing Immortal Sect withdrew from Qingyang Country, the Yang Family lost its backing and had to become independent. Over time, having inherited some of the Changqing Branch¡¯s legacy, they gradually established the grandeur seen today. But faced with the relentless pressure of external forces, the Yang Family sought external alliances for self-preservation. ?¦Ï??0.§ã0 Hence, over the recent millennium, the Yang Family dispatched numerous disciples to Qing Mountain Pavilion and Jintai Gate, in order to strengthen relationships with these two major Daoist sects. Later, as the Beidou Alliance rose, the Yang Family instead became fence-sitters, no longer sending large numbers of disciples to the two major Daoist sects and instead reverted to their previous independence. There are also rumors. When the Beidou Alliance was on the rise, the Yang Family covertly supported them, intending to use this to counteract Jintai Gate¡¯s infiltration. Moreover, the Yang Family seems to have ambiguous ties with the powers behind the Beidou Alliance, playing a double-faced role. As for the Beidou Alliance. Yi Dancheng became quite interested in this suddenly emerged force of scattered Cultivators upon arriving in Qingyang Country. After all, to rise against the tide under the watchful eyes of Jintai Gate without the backing of a strong force was something that no one would believe. And without understanding the origins of such a prominent force and making adequate preparations, Yi Dancheng couldn¡¯t rest easy accepting Qingyang Country. Therefore, after arriving in the country, considerable effort was made to conduct investigations. Finally, after research that lasted a year or two, results came through. The force behind Beidou Alliance was none other than the Giant Spirit Sect, which had burst in from the Western Domain into the Southern Domain, now occupying Qingyu Country. In fact, it wasn¡¯t difficult to determine that the Beidou Alliance was supported by the Giant Spirit Sect. After all, near Qingyang Country, there were only three powers: Jintai Gate of Anyu Country, Giant Spirit Sect of Qingyu Country, and the Six-eyed Lord of the Great Eye Kingdom. The Six-eyed Lord had limited strength, and the Great Eye Kingdom, with only one Great Demon, had no extra capacity for expansion and was not capable of reaching into Qingyang Country. Moreover, as a Great Demon, according to the typical actions of Monsters and Demons, the strategy to take over new territory usually involves sending a few Demon Kings or Ghost Kings to create havoc within the country. Only after the Immortal Gates of that country failed to hold on and collapsed completely, would the Great Demon step in and take over the country. This was the approach used against Youxin Country by the Monsters and Demons previously. However, this strategy only works on countries without an Immortal presence. Where there¡¯s an Immortal to suppress them, such tactics are ineffectivea€¡±no matter how many Demon Kings or Ghost Kings there are, as long as they haven¡¯t achieved immortality, they won¡¯t be able to cause any significant turmoil. Considering these factors, the Beidou Alliance, composed entirely of human Cultivators, obviously couldn¡¯t be the handiwork of the Six-eyed Lord. Chapter 1251 - Chapter 1251 Chapter 497 Jiuzhou Immortal Gate_3 ?Chapter 1251: Chapter 497 Jiuzhou Immortal Gate_3 Chapter 1251: Chapter 497 Jiuzhou Immortal Gate_3 However, when it came to power that could contend with the Golden Fetus Gate in the vicinity, only the Giant Spirit Sect remained. Therefore, even though the Beidou Alliance continuously denied having other forces manipulating them from behind, most surrounding powers had tacitly agreed that it was the Giant Spirit Sect that had fostered them to duel with the Golden Fetus Gate. The Golden Fetus Gate thought the same. Thus, even though they actually wanted nothing more than to dispatch an Immortal to slap those erratic solo cultivators to death, each time they thought of the Giant Spirit Sect behind their opponents, that thought would instantly evaporate. Bullying a few solo cultivators without an Immortal was, of course, very easy. But facing the Giant Spirit Sect behind such cultivators was not feasible. The Giant Spirit Sect was no ordinary power. It was a great Immortal Sect from the Western Domain, occupying the lands of both the Western and Southern Domains, with three Human Immortals in the sect, and the sect leader possessed a late-stage Human Immortal cultivation. In terms of sheer strength, it surpassed the Golden Fetus Gate. And that was just the strength of the Giant Spirit Sect alone. Beyond its own power, the Giant Spirit Sect was also a member of the Western Domain¡¯s Immortal Sects, part of the alliance formed by the Western Five Immortal Sects. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï The Western Alliance was capable of pitting itself against the Qing Immortal Sect and even holding its ground in conflicts lasting nearly ten thousand yearsa€¡±a mighty force indeed. Facing such an opponent, their willingness to engage you in a proxy war, playing by the rules within a designated chessboard, is a sign of respect. If you are oblivious and try to upend the chessboard, you¡¯re practically inviting death. The other Immortal Sects of the Western Alliance wouldn¡¯t even need to intervenea€¡±the Giant Spirit Sect alone could take down the Golden Fetus Gate. Indeed, the Golden Fetus Gate should feel lucky. Had the Western Alliance not been preoccupied with the Qing Immortal Sect, directing most of their strength to the main battlefield in the Central Region, let alone the Qingyang Country, even the Anyu Country they occupied would probably have been seized by the Giant Spirit Sect already. It was precisely because of this, in the struggle for Qingyang Country, the Giant Spirit Sect remained embattled and unable to spare efforts for new conquests. The Golden Fetus Gate was riddled with apprehensions, daring not to truly contend. Both parties could only continue to support their proxies here, manipulating the three major powers in a prolonged and muddled war lasting hundreds of years, resulting in a state where none of the residents of Qingyang Country could live in peace. Therefore, regarding the matter of the forces behind the Beidou Alliance, it was actually not any secret, just a bit of investigation would reveal ita€¡±it wasn¡¯t difficult to look into at all. The reason Yi Dancheng took nearly two years to clarify the forces behind the opponent was not to check if it was the Giant Spirit Sect behind them, but rather, what exactly are the real roots of the Giant Spirit Sect and the Western Domain Immortal Sects behind them? Because after Lu Yuan learned the names of the various Immortal Sects of the Western Domain, he felt an overwhelming sense of familiarity. Giant Spirit Sect, Purple Cloud Sect, Azure Dragon Sect, Cauldron Sect, Haiyun Pavilion¡­ Listen to these names of the Western Domain Immortal Sectsa€¡±aren¡¯t they familiar? Indeed they are familiar. Because swap these names around, and you have Giant Spirit Tao, Purple Cloud Tao, Azure Dragon Tao, Cauldron Tao¡­ Even the name of Haiyun Pavilion was simply unchanged, directly identical to the Haiyun Pavilion of Jiuzhou¡¯s Yuzhou, using the same name. If you say that these have no connections with Jiuzhou, Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t believe it at all. Thus, to verify his own thoughts, after discovering this in Yi Dancheng, he immediately dispatched this avatar to rush to the Western Domain to investigate the matter. And after Yi Dancheng¡¯s two years of investigations, especially sneaking observations on the disciples of the Western Five Immortal Sects, their Cultivation Dao Law, and the Tao Inheritance in comparison with those Immortal Sects he understood from the Jiuzhou world, were they the same? Previously, Lu Yuan had collected the Tao Inheritances of the entire Jiuzhou world. He had some familiarity and understanding of the inheritance of the various Immortal Sects of the Jiuzhou world, and had even practiced them. By simply observing the Dao Law practiced by various Immortal Sects, if there was even a slight similarity to the Dao Law of the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects, he could discern their origins. And indeed, upon inspection, it confirmed his suspicions. Though the appearance of some Dao Laws had evolved over tens of thousands of years and differed somewhat from those in the Jiuzhou world, the essence within had not changed, and even some of the Immortal Sects¡¯ Tao Inheritances and philosophies remained the same. The Dao Laws and Tao Inheritances practiced by the Western Five Immortal Sects were far too similar to those of the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects. Or to put it plainly, they were simply either an offshoot or another continuation of the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects in the Immortal Realm. Understanding this, Lu Yuan¡¯s grasp on the situation in the Changqing Domain instantly became clear. He finally understood why the Western Immortal Sects were locked in a near ten-thousand-year conflict with the Changqing Immortal Sect without a respite. The reason was simple. It was a war between the remnants of a former dynasty and the current regime. In Jiuzhou world, it was always recorded that in ancient times, some beings crossed worlds and introduced the Tao Inheritances and Immortal Techniques to Jiuzhou, leading to the prosperity of the Immortal Cultivation World of Jiuzhou. As for the immigrants, it was explicitly documented that they came from a major sect of the Nine Spirits Sect of the Immortal Realm. Who was the Nine Spirits Sect? They were the previous rulers of the Changqing domain, known as the Nine Spirits Domain seventy thousand years ago. It was only after the Changqing Immortal Sect rose to prominence, led by a Great True Person who unified the entire domain, that the regime was changed, and the name was altered to the Changqing Domain. Once this was explained, the relationship became very clear. The various Immortal Sects of the Jiuzhou world, in fact, originated from the Nine Spirits Sect; they are essentially branches or offshoots of the Nine Spirits Sect in Jiuzhou. But seventy thousand years ago, the Great True Person of the Nine Spirits Sect perished. Lu Yuan was unclear about the specifics, but ultimately, the Changqing Immortal Sect emerged victorious, achieving the monumental feat of changing the dynasty. The Nine Spirits Sect was swept away, becoming nothing more than a part of the past, leaving only a name behind. With the fall of the Nine Spirits Sect, the Jiuzhou world also began to succumb to the Dharma Ending Tribulation, gradually heading towards extinction. Thus, the ancient Immortals of Jiuzhou, seeking self-preservation, began one after another to head towards the Ascension route of Northern Dark City. The Ascension site, this was exactly the current Bo Yangling. Yes, it is on the edge of the Changqing domain. A group of Nine Spirits Sect disciples with a different Tao Inheritance, suddenly Ascending to the Immortal Realm, appearing right under their nose, what would the reaction of the Changqing Immortal Sect be? Drawing from Lu Yuan¡¯s past life experiences about how dynasties treated the remnants of former ones, it becomes very clear. Naturally, it¡¯s merciless killing. Chapter 1252 - Chapter 1252 Chapter 498 Changqing Situation ?Chapter 1252: Chapter 498 Changqing Situation Chapter 1252: Chapter 498 Changqing Situation ¡°` This is a struggle for the Tao Inheritance, a struggle for the Great Tao, and there is no room for turning back. The Qing Immortal Sect, which had already secured the dominant position in the Changqing Domain, couldn¡¯t possibly watch a group of remnants from the previous dynasty bounce around in its territory and slowly grow stronger. Otherwise, what should they do when these remnants grow strong enough to start a counterattack and try to recapture the sovereignty of the Changqing Domain? Should they just give it up? ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï If not, it would be a brutal fight, a calamity that would affect the entire domain. Moreover, the vast Changqing Domain has no country to spare. The Qing Immortal Sect itself still finds the spiritual energy provided by its own domain insufficient, and the cultivation resources far too scarce. How could they possibly share some with a group of remnants from the previous dynasty? And the cultivators from the Nine Provinces who ascended to the Immortal Realm, upon learning that their Supreme Immortal Sect, the Nine Spirits Sect, was destroyed and they were suddenly labeled as remnants of the old dynasty, to be hunted and killed, Also came to understand the marvelous nature of the spiritual energy in the Immortal Realm and the many ways it could help with the cultivation of the Great Tao. Do you think they would just swallow their anger and willingly give up? Therefore, from any perspective, there is simply no room for easing tensions between the ascended cultivators of the Nine Provinces and the Qing Immortal Sect, no possibility for reconciliation. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? The deathmatch between the two sides was thus inevitable. However, during the first sixty thousand years of the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s rule over the Changqing Domain, because the Great True Person of the rival side was still alive, the people of the Nine Provinces Realm simply could not defeat them, so they had no choice but to remain hidden. They may have even chosen to relocate to other domains to protect themselves and to avoid the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s pursuit. It was not until ten thousand years ago, when the rival Great True Person fell, and the Qing Immortal Sect lost the capability of a Heavenly Immortal to hold sway, That the ascended cultivators of the Nine Provinces immediately surged back, igniting a tremendous resistance war in the Western Domain. The war lasted for ten thousand years. As for why they chose not to start their uprising in the Southern Domain, which after all is the starting point for the Nine Provinces¡¯ cultivators¡¯ ascension to the Immortal Realm, Lu Yuan privately speculated that perhaps they wanted to hide such a secret place of ascension, to preserve their hope of returning to their homeland. Alternatively, with the spiritual energy of the Nine Provinces growing increasingly thin, the strength of successive generations of ascended cultivators continued to decline, By the time of Lu Yuan¡¯s era, the last generation of ascended cultivators from the Nine Provinces had become so destitute that they couldn¡¯t even achieve the cultivation necessary to condense a single breath of energy. Such ascended cultivators, even if they came from the same homeland and followed the same Tao, were actually not of much value anymore. Just look at how the Qing Immortal Sect only abandoned its last stronghold in the Southern Domain, Youxin Country, when Lu Yuan arrived, to understand that their previous control over the Southern Domain must have been extremely strong. Even in times of war, they maintained their influence there for nearly ten thousand years. In comparison, their presence over in the Western Domain might have been weaker, making it more suitable as a starting point for resistance. All these factors led to the Nine Provinces¡¯ Immortal Gates giving up their starting ground in the Southern Domain. ¡°However, with the Nine Provinces¡¯ Immortal Gate stabilizing its control over the countries of the Western Domain and the Qing Immortal Sect continuously in decline, and their strength swiftly diminishing, The latter must inevitably begin to seek expansion elsewhere to strengthen themselves. The infiltration of the Giant Spirit Sect into Qingyu Country of the Southern Domain is the best proof of this. The Western Domain¡¯s Immortal Gates have extended their reach beyond the Western Domain, expanding towards the surrounding three regions.¡± After several years of understanding, Lu Yuan had gained a clearer grasp of the situation in the Changqing Domain. The entire Changqing Domain consists of thirty-nine countries. And among these thirty-nine countries, they are divided into five regions: east, southeast, west, north, and center. Of these, the four peripheral regions each have nine countries. The central region, being the core, has only three countries. The Western Domain, with only nine countries, is divided among five Immortal Sects, meaning on average, not even two small countries can be assured for each Immortal Sect. This is clearly not enough for an alliance with three Earth Immortals and twelve Human Immortals. Therefore, as soon as they began their uprising and secured the Western Domain, the Nine Provinces¡¯ Immortal Gate actively pursued expansion outward. Once they ensured that the three central countries¡¯ battlefields had sufficient strength to resist the Qing Immortal Sect, the excess strength of the Nine Provinces¡¯ Immortal Gate began to infiltrate the northern and southern regions. But after years of infiltration, only the Southern Domaina€¡±the region with the weakest influence of the Qing Immortal Secta€¡±achieved a breakthrough. A thousand years ago, they successfully seized control of Qingyu Country. The central and northern regions, however, saw no progress at all due to the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s overwhelming strength. And because of this, Having breached the enemy¡¯s line and become the area most likely to break through the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s blockade and rapidly expand its territory, While attracting more allies to join the fight against the oppressive rule of the Qing Immortal Sect, the Southern Domain naturally became the second strategic area of utmost importance to the Nine Provinces¡¯ Immortal Gate after the Western Domain. Originally, the Nine Provinces¡¯ Immortal Gate¡¯s infiltration into the Southern Domain was not so urgent, Because as time passed, the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s control over Evergreen Jade was gradually weakening and was even about to fall below half. The regions of the west and south had effectively left the control of the Qing Immortal Sect. With these regions gone, the amount of spiritual energy and various cultivation resources that the Qing Immortal Sect could gather had drastically decreased. Over the past ten thousand years, despite such advantages and resources, they had failed to cultivate a second Great True Person. Now with half of those advantages and resources gone, the chances of birthing another Great True Person became even slimmer, And those chances are continuing to dwindle as the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s control over the various regions weakens. ¡°` Chapter 1253 - Chapter 1253 Chapter 498 Changqing Situation_2 ?Chapter 1253: Chapter 498 Changqing Situation_2 Chapter 1253: Chapter 498 Changqing Situation_2 By the time their controlled territory fell below half, according to the customs on the Immortal Realm side, without the support of at least twenty small countries, without the sustenance of half the territory¡¯s land, it was basically impossible for a Great True Person to be born. Cultivation talks about contending with heaven for fate; it inherently involves sacrificing the insufficient for the abundant. This is about resources. Without sufficient resources, what cultivation can you do, what way can you become? Sun Wukong also became the all-seeing, all-powerful Great Sage Equal to Heaven only after eating the peaches of immortality and the Golden Elixir of the Supreme Patriarch. Lu Yuan also relied on the offerings from the entire Nine Provinces Realm for his current foundation. The same is true on the side of the Immortal Realm. As of now, Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s actual control is merely over the land of twenty-one countries. Reducing it by another two or three countries would completely cut off this sect¡¯s chances of producing a Great True Person. From that moment on, a Qing Immortal Sect incapable of producing a Great True Person would also be unable to maintain its status as the hegemon of Changqing Domain and would become just like the Jiuzhou Alliance in the Western Domain, a common major sect on the side of the Immortal Realm. Instead of a domain overlord. On the other hand, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s strength would further enhance as time passed. Eventually, this gradual waxing and waning would turn the tide, leading to a comeback. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï Time was on the side of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, and of course, they were in no rush. However, this state of affairs was suddenly disrupted by the emergence of Taiping Dao. An obscure sect, which openly displayed the presence of two Late-stage Human Immortals, suddenly appeared in the Southern Domain, an area already regarded as their own backyard. Moreover, this sect exhibited quite a strong desire for expansion. It¡¯s like placing North Korea in South America. Could the United States sleep soundly? Tell me, how could Jiuzhou Immortal Gate sit idly by? The strength represented by two Late-stage Human Immortals was no small matter. Even if Giant Spirit Sect had three Human Immortals, they couldn¡¯t confidently claim victory over Taiping Dao in terms of True Immortal combat power. Not to mention, this was only the strength that Taiping Dao had openly revealed. If Taiping Dao said they had only two Human Immortals, did it really mean they had just two? The Immortal Sects on the side of Changqing Domain had never heard of the name Taiping Dao before, let alone knew where it sprang from. And Taiping Dao had not told them anything. Therefore, in the eyes of the various Immortal Sects of Changqing Domain, Taiping Dao was undoubtedly mysterious and posed a significant threat, compelling vigilance. Because no one was sure if Taiping Dao really only had two Human Immortals, as they appeared on the surface. If the opposing side had hidden a few more Human Immortals, or even an Earth Immortal, wouldn¡¯t sitting by and watching them secure a footing in Changqing Domain and grow steadily be like nurturing a tiger, courting disaster? ¡°Jiuzhou Immortal Gate can¡¯t just watch its neighbor transform from a group of subservient lapdogs into a Fierce Tiger.¡± ¡°And we, Taiping Dao, are that young tiger emerging among the lapdogs, prepared to devour these lapdogs and grow.¡± ¡°In fact, we don¡¯t even need to devour these lapdogs; we just need to lead them in repelling the invading wild dogs in the house, in other words, those demons and ghosts.¡± ¡°Then, as the young tiger grows by feasting on the wild dogs¡¯ corpses, those lapdogs, the Immortal Sects of the Southern Domain, eat the leftovers to grow. The alliance between the tiger that has grown and the now satiated lapdogs will instantly form a force not inferior to Jiuzhou Immortal Gate.¡± This trend is already showing signs of emergence. ¡°After the encounter at Yi Dancheng against the Monster Nation, hasn¡¯t Jintai Gate kept sending their True Immortal elders to exchange affections with you over the past two years?¡± Lu Yuan analyzed Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s intentions and then looked at Che Shidao with a smile, ¡°What¡¯s his purpose in doing this? Isn¡¯t it because Giant Spirit Sect¡¯s infiltration into Qingyang Country has put great pressure on Jintai Gate, making them somewhat uneasy? If Qingyang Country were to be taken down by Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, wouldn¡¯t Jintai Gate, being the closest, be the next target for expansion? This is a matter of life or death; they must respond.¡± In previous years, Jintai Gate¡¯s neighbors were either the already declining Evergreen Immortal Tracks or Qingyang Country, these small fries without even a True Immortal among them, or Monster Nations like the Great Eye Kingdom. None of these three neighbors were reliable; even managing not to kick them when they were down was considered decent behavior. The frontline barrier in the Southern Domain against the invasion of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was borne solely by Jintai Gate. Facing such a vast alliance of Immortal Sects, it would be a ghost of a chance that Jintai Gate wouldn¡¯t panic. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï They were surely seeking reinforcements. But previously, the various Immortal Sects of the Southern Domain were fraught with internal conflicts and faced various external threats. They simply had no spare capacity to aid them. However, things changed with the appearance of Taiping Dao. First, they seized control of Youxin Country from the declining Qing Immortal Sect. Then they robustly defeated the Six-eyed Lord, rescuing all the humans from the Great Eye Kingdom and nearly crippling this Monster Nation. Up to now, that Six-eyed Lord is still holed up in his lair in Ji Mu City, not daring to take even half a step outside. With this level of strength and the momentum of sweeping through the surrounding areas, it¡¯s enough to draw attention. Other Immortal Sects might flinch before fighting when facing Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, not daring to oppose them. But Taiping Dao, with such strength, might not necessarily fear Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. If they are willing to offer certain concessions, perhaps Taiping Dao could be persuaded to join forces with them to counter the invasion of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. This might be Jintai Gate¡¯s thinking. Lu Yuan concluded, ¡°So the other Immortal Sects of the Southern Domain might harbor apprehensions and jealously towards our Taiping Dao¡¯s expansion.¡± Chapter 1254 - Chapter 1254 Chapter 498 Changqing Situation_3 ?Chapter 1254: Chapter 498 Changqing Situation_3 Chapter 1254: Chapter 498 Changqing Situation_3 But Jintai Gate, already on the brink of life and death, would never think this way; rather, they felt fortunate. Because compared with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, it was clear that my Taiping Dao was at a disadvantage, and Jintai Gate was also a weaker group. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï After the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate destroyed Jintai Gate, the next force to border them would be my Taiping Dao. Under the principle of ¡®when the lips are gone, the teeth will be cold,¡¯ Taiping Dao had no reason not to help Jintai Gate. This was about forming an alliance that benefits both parties, where the weaker join forces against the stronger. It was just like the Sun-Liu alliance. To let Liu Bei be at the forefront, fighting Cao Cao to the death, Dong Wu was willing to cede Jingzhou. To have Taiping Dao face the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate head-on, Jintai Gate should also be willing to cede Qingyang Country. Let us border the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, confront the threat together, and fight side by side. You can go and meet with the True Person from Jintai Gate who has come to our place later, and have a good talk with him about cooperation. If possible, make sure to have them stand with us, maintaining a united front when facing the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, to amplify our influence. Also, you could try to contact the Changqing Immortal Sect and see if it¡¯s possible to gather their support as well.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï But origin does not dictate everything; interests dictate allegiances. Now, his Taiping Dao wanted the lands of the Southern Domain, having set their sights on Qingyang Country and considering it their own territory. And the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was looking to infiltrate the Southern Domain, also eying Qingyang Country. Both sides had direct conflicts of interest. By comparison, Jintai Gate was more likely to cede this territory in exchange for the support and protection of Taiping Dao. Because even if Taiping Dao did not step in, they most likely wouldn¡¯t be able to seize control of Qingyang Country. Rather than letting Qingyang Country fall into the hands of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, strengthening the enemy¡¯s strength, it was better to hand it over to a potential ally to bolster their own camp¡¯s strength. It was the same case with the Changqing Immortal Sect. The fact that they readily ceded Youxin Country was not only because they genuinely couldn¡¯t hold onto the territory, but also because they had the idea of supporting a rising new force to block the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s infiltration into the Southern Domain, while also helping to distract the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate in the south, thereby sharing their pressures on other fronts. The Changqing Immortal Sect must have also realized that their decline was inevitable and were already starting to plan for the future. Those territories which they could not control, they would rather hand over to others than benefit their rivals. The Chu and Han contended and unified the world in four years. At the end of Han, the Three Nations fought for a whole sixty years before reunifying. A tripartite structure is far more stable than a duel for power. The more factions involved, the more checks and balances, and the more entanglements. The immortals of the Immortal Realm, having lived for thousands or tens of thousands of years, understand this principle well. And Taiping Dao is the third force that Changqing Immortal Sect, is planning to support. The Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, perhaps seeing this, therefore at this celebration, five Immortal Gates came together. Their purpose, naturally, was to exert pressure. However, their plans were undoubtedly doomed to fail. Lu Yuan¡¯s strategy had long been set in stone. First, he would take Youxin Country, then Qingyang Country, and thereafter support the Earth Flower Avatars of Yi Dancheng and Che Shidao in becoming Earth Immortals, slowly cultivating more avatars. Step by step, he would accumulate strength and eventually sweep through the entire Changqing Domain, preparing to ascend to the status of a Great True Person. Now, several years down the line, the plan was progressing very smoothly. Youxin Country had already been taken, and with Jintai Gate actively fostering good relations, the chances of taking over Qingyang Country, with the help of this local Immortal Sect, were also quite high. Even the Great Eye Kingdom, which had been constantly purged and suppressed by Taiping Dao over the years, was facing increasing pressure, and the Six-eyed Lord had already shown some intention of relocating. This long-term purge might just need a few more years of persistence before the adversary would give up on the Great Eye Kingdom and move elsewhere. Then, Taiping Dao could also seize control of this nation. With Qingyang Country, Great Eye Kingdom, and Youxin Country linked together, Taiping Dao would leap to take control of three nations and rank among the Grand Fairy Doors. With such a vast prospect, a future within easy grasp, just because of a threat from the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect and a camaraderie with a fellow countryman, did you think Lu Yuan would back down? That would be far too optimistic. This is a battle for the path, and no one would give in. ¡°Moreover, how much strength can the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect currently spare to deploy to this Southern Domain area?¡± Lu Yuan was truly skeptical about the strength Jiuzhou Immortal Sect could spare. Even the Changqing Immortal Sect, due to prolonged war pressure, could no longer control the Southern Domain area. How much better could the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, being the weaker party, be? So what if Taiping Dao didn¡¯t give them face? No matter how furious the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect was, at most they could dispatch one, perhaps two Immortals, who were merely at the Human Immortal Realm. This level of strength wouldn¡¯t even bother Jintai Gate, let alone Taiping Dao. ¡°Now I have also broken through the Human Immortal Realm and have become an Immortal. The Earth Flower Avatar can also be dispatched to serve as a foundation for Taiping Dao. A force with an Earth Immortal can completely serve as the third powerhouse of the Changqing Domain, bearing the responsibility of protecting the entire Southern Domain of the Nine Provinces and maintaining local stability. As long as we can integrate the entire Southern Domain area, even if the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect loses its senses and truly declares war on Taiping Dao, I have absolutely no fear.¡± Lu Yuan was ready for a major battle with the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect over the control of the Southern Domain area. Initially, he wasn¡¯t clear about the situation in the Changqing Domain, so his actions were much more cautious and conservative. But now that he had seen the details and knew that the Changqing Immortal Sect actually supported his rise, and that within the Southern Domain area, there were also many local Immortal Sects that similarly wanted to see Taiping Dao rise, there was naturally no need to be so conservative; his actions could be slightly more aggressive. If it really became necessary, the second layer of hidden cards, the Earth Immortal Avatar, could step forward as a deterrent. As long as the true self remained hidden, it would suffice to stay secretive. After all, the worst scenario would merely involve the loss of three avatars, which he, the true self, was not prepared to present. If this side lost, he could simply flee elsewhere, accumulate strength again, and return another day. With an endless lifespan, Lu Yuan could afford this price and had time to spare. Chapter 1255 - Chapter 1255 Chapter 499 Recruiting Allies ?Chapter 1255: Chapter 499 Recruiting Allies Chapter 1255: Chapter 499 Recruiting Allies Mi Yun Mountain. Time flashed by, and several days passed in the blink of an eye. Suddenly, Lu Yuan, who had broken through to Human Immortal at Bo Yangling, had returned with his avatar Che Shidao for a while. The entire process, coming and going quietly, went unnoticed by anyone. No one would have thought that in the land of Youxin Country, just like that, without anyone being aware, a new Human Immortal had emerged. Lu Yuan¡¯s habitual caution prevented anyone from discovering his presence. Moreover, the celebration on Mi Yun Mountain was also proceeding in an orderly fashion during these days, becoming ever more lively with the arrival of numerous guests. However, as the date approached, the arriving guests were becoming increasingly complete. The undercurrents in Mi Yun Mountain began to surge more fiercely. Using this opportunity of the Taiping Dao¡¯s grand celebration, True Persons from various powers who might not see each other for decades or centuries began to move around frequently, calling friends and gathering allies. The various powers formed distinct groupings, delineating friends and foes, allies and adversaries, and eyeing each other with hostility. Here, four factions stood out as the most prominent. The Changqing Immortal Sect faction, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate faction, the pro-Taiping Dao faction, and the neutral faction. These four factions were intertwined and entangled with each other, opposing one another, and turning the grand ceremony of establishing a sect into a political arena of cunning and strategizing. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã? For many Immortal Sect Cultivators of a purer disposition, this was quite disheartening. However, as the host, Taiping Dao didn¡¯t mind at all; if anything, they seemed to relish it. That day, after busying himself for several days, tending to every visiting True Person and properly settling them, Che Shidao finally found some free time and then immediately went to the courtyard on the back mountain allocated for the Qing Immortal Sect. ¡°Friend Yang, we meet again. You still radiate the same grace,¡± said Che Shidao with a smile, greeting Yang Jihua, the representative of the Qing Immortal Sect he had met before. ¡°The same goes for Friend Che,¡± Yang Jihua didn¡¯t act arrogant and quickly returned the greeting, ¡°After several years apart, Friend Che has managed to restore Youxin Country to its former glory, not only regaining its prosperity of the past, but the sect¡¯s branch establishment also fully demonstrates the elegance of an Immortal¡¯s abode. It appears that Taiping Dao truly has profound foundations, not any ordinary Immortal Sect indeed.¡± In his words, Yang Jihua expressed his friendliness and made some subtle probes. If it¡¯s not an ordinary Immortal Sect, then it¡¯s naturally a powerful one. In the Immortal Realm, what kind of Immortal Sect can be considered powerful? There are generally two criteria, and meeting either qualifies as powerful. An Immortal Sect either occupies three minor countries, having three or more Human Immortals, or it boasts an Earth Immortal, possessing strength just beneath that of a Heavenly Immortal. These two criteria are essentially the same. Because controlling three minor countries is the minimum requirement for an Earth Immortal to arise in the Immortal Realm. Meeting the first criterion suggests that the Immortal Sect has the hope of producing an Earth Immortal, having the potential to become powerful. And if the second is met, with an Earth Immortal in existence, the sect¡¯s domain must extend beyond just three minor countries; otherwise, it couldn¡¯t sustain an Earth Immortal. So, in the end, it¡¯s the Earth Immortal that determines whether an Immortal Sect is grand or not. The first criterion is but a special respect for those Immortal Sects without an Earth Immortal but with the foundation capable of achieving one. Regardless of which criterion is met, a sect fulfilling the standards can undoubtedly be called grand. And only a Grand Immortal Sect has the slight qualification to join the game and participate in the contest for supremacy between the Qing Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates. Lu Yuan¡¯s earlier judgment wasn¡¯t wrong. Faced with the growing strength of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, the Qing Immortal Sect, the rapidly declining old overlord, was also getting restless. Seeing the rising momentum of Taiping Dao, they conceived the idea of support and alliance. The current probing was to sound out the other party¡¯s intentions. Che Shidao knew what the other party was referring to, so he chuckled, ¡°The prosperity of Youxin Country today is not solely my doing; the School Leader True Person has also exerted much effort. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï However, speaking of foundations, comparing with ordinary Immortal Sects, not to boast, but I am somewhat confident that our Taiping Dao can surpass the Southern Domain Immortal Gates.¡± Thinking of his master¡¯s command, Che Shidao was somewhat more candid in his speech at this moment. Hearing this, Yang Jihua noticed the implications in Che Shidao¡¯s words, his eyes lighting up, ¡°Oh, could it be that besides Friend Che and your esteemed School Leader, Taiping Dao has other Immortals?¡± Che Shidao laughed heartily, stroked his beard, and said with pride, ¡°I won¡¯t hide it from you, Friend Yang. In this generation, indeed, there are only the School Leader and I, two True Immortals. However, our master and the School Leader have an Elder Uncle above them. This Elder Uncle is not a mere Human Immortal like us but an Earth Flower True Man. Right now, our Elder Uncle is stationed at the Mountain Gate headquarters, temporarily unable to leave. Hence, he couldn¡¯t make it to the Changqing Domain. However, if we manage to carve out a place for our sect here in the Changqing Domain, expanding our territory and establishing a new base, making this region even larger than the original sect¡¯s domain, then I believe Elder Uncle would not mind staying here in the Changqing Domain for a long time.¡± Over there, the true body was already preparing to compete with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate over the land of the nine countries in the Southern Domain. Since all cards were to be laid on the table, with a real battle impending, it was natural to make full use of every means possible to strengthen our side¡¯s power. Showcasing one¡¯s strength to intimidate enemies and create psychological pressure was one aspect, offering up one¡¯s value to gain the support of powerful forces was another, and attracting more followers with formidable power was yet another. After becoming immortal, it has to be said, Lu Yuan was indeed a little more impetuous than before. Chapter 1256 - Chapter 1256 Chapter 499 Recruitment of Allies_2 ?Chapter 1256: Chapter 499 Recruitment of Allies_2 Chapter 1256: Chapter 499 Recruitment of Allies_2 But that did not matter. Because he believed that taking some risks that did not involve his own life, in exchange for excessive benefits, was worth it. Even if his trump cards were exposed at this moment, causing concern among various factions, it did not matter. With a lifespan of immortality and the advantage of Qi Luck and Qi Destiny, his speed of accumulating strength was absolutely stronger than others. With the conquest of the three nations in the Southern Domain, even the most optimistic estimates from the surrounding powers did not expect Taiping Dao to have one or two more Human Immortals after a thousand years. But in fact. For Lu Yuan, every thousand years could yield one more Earth Immortal. Compared to one or two Human Immortals, how much heavier does one Earth Immortal weigh? There¡¯s really no need for comparison, it¡¯s not even at the same level. If the local powers of Changqing Domain really estimated Taiping Dao with common vision, once Taiping Dao¡¯s accumulated background erupted, it would definitely turn them upside down. It was precisely because of this advantage that Lu Yuan decided to be a bit more aggressive. After all, the benefits were too great. Facing the whole Southern Domain, even someone as cautious as he couldn¡¯t help but be tempted. ¡°Oh, I didn¡¯t expect that within your sect, there actually exists an Earth Immortal!¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï He genuinely did not expect Taiping Dao to have an Earth Immortal. Originally, Yang Jihua and the School Leaders had only thought that Taiping Dao might still be hiding one or two Human Immortals. In some other distant Great Domain, they might also have the territory of one or two small countries. Adding this to Youxin Country from the Changqing Domain, and the Great Eye Kingdom which Taiping Dao was quickly infiltrating and about to conquer, they met the first criterion for a Grand Fairy Door, having at least three small countries. With such a foundation, they were barely qualified to be called a Grand Fairy Door. While Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had their hands full dealing with Yang Jihua¡¯s Qing Immortal Sect, it was almost enough for Taiping Dao to set up a stage for battle in the Southern Domain and have the potential to support them. But they never expected. The other party was not just some border-line Grand Fairy Door, but a truly powerful force with an Earth Immortal, at the top echelon of the current Changqing Domain, a true Great Immortal. This was undoubtedly beyond expectations. Even Yang Jihua, upon hearing this news, felt his heart skip a beat. Now looking at Che Shidao, his original pride completely dissipated, and he began to take him seriously. The Qing Immortal Sect had only four Earth Immortals after all. Taiping Dao having one Earth Immortal, though it was unknown how strong this Earth Immortal was, was enough to enable them to engage in equal dialogue with Qing Immortal Sect. In the Immortal Realm, strength was always the foremost. Without wielding the same level of power, no matter how eloquently you speak, you cannot get a person who holds higher power to truly regard you with respect. Previously, Taiping Dao, even with two late-stage Human Immortal Cultivators, would be seen by Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate as nothing more than a slightly stronger regular Immortal Sect. They were not considered a powerful force. But with this foundation, they were on the same level, able to sit equally among the Grand Fairy Doors. That was the harsh reality, such was the vast difference. ¡®However, Taiping Dao has such strength, yet still they traveled countless miles across several Great Domains, braving mountains and rivers to come and settle in my Changqing Domain. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï For an Immortal Sect with an Earth Immortal to do so indicates they also had great troubles in the Great Domain they were originally in. Either they met a sworn enemy, or the domain encountered some catastrophe that forced them to migrate. But whatever the case, since they have already migrated, it undoubtedly shows that they need to find a new foothold. From the current situation I can see, Taiping Dao has chosen Changqing Domain, currently without a Great True Person to preside over it and where my Qing Immortal Sect is in decline, as this foothold.¡¯ Finding a place for an Earth Immortal Sect to settle is not an easy task. At the very least, it requires more than three small countries to accommodate one. Even to be on the safe side, having five small countries would more normally guarantee that an Earth Immortal Sect could produce a second Earth Immortal within ten thousand years, ensuring an orderly succession and preventing the interruption of the Tao Inheritance. The other party was hiding and hoarding before, refusing to reveal their strength. Now they¡¯ve taken the initiative to mention this, it seems they have noticed the situation in Changqing Domain is quite favorable for Taiping Dao, so they can¡¯t help but move, ready to officially join the game, huh?¡¯ After the shock, Yang Jihua¡¯s mind was also constantly analyzing. From what can be seen at the moment, Taiping Dao is eyeing Youxin Country and Great Eye Kingdom. Beyond these two countries, there are four more countries nearby, namely Jintai Gate¡¯s Anyu Country, Xuan Turtle Mountain¡¯s Youshan Country, Bihu Palace¡¯s Youqing Country, and Qingyang Country which is currently unclaimed and in chaos. As an Immortal Sect, even if Taiping Dao is an Earth Immortal Sect, they probably would not want to go against the vast world and provoke widespread anger. It¡¯s unlikely that they would attack the three neighboring powers belonging to other Immortal Sects. Even Qing Immortal Sect, when the Great True Person was still present, did not directly destroy the Tao Inheritance of other smaller Immortal Sects. At most, they curtailed their territories, making them huddle within a small country, not allowing them to expand their influence within the domain. An overly domineering Immortal Sect, which neither suits the nature of Cultivators nor conforms to worldly conscience, runs the risk of falling into the demonic path. Or it could be said. Only those of the demonic sects would annihilate and bully to death, leaving no room for mercy when they see weakness. Chapter 1257 - Chapter 1257 Chapter 499 Recruitment of Allies_3 ?Chapter 1257: Chapter 499 Recruitment of Allies_3 Chapter 1257: Chapter 499 Recruitment of Allies_3 A true Cultivation sect wouldn¡¯t have acted this way. Previously, various sects in the Southern Domain had set their sights on Youxin Country and had the strength to seize it by force, yet they did not directly make their move. Instead, they chose to tolerate the demons, planning to completely sever the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s sovereignty here before entering the scene themselves. They aimed to perform a demon-subduing and evil-clearing act to restore peace and order to Youxin Country. Their goal was to occupy a position of moral righteousness. The Jiuzhou Immortal Gate spent nearly ten thousand years to occupy the entire Western Domain. The slow progress might also have been part of this process. Even Jintai Gate, before Jiuzhou Immortal Sect had infiltrated the Southern Domain, did not directly invade Qingyang Country to take it for itself, did it? Instead, they chose to support a local branch there, slowly expanding their influence and infiltrating the country. First, they became locals, and then it was the locals themselves who took the initiative to propose joining Jintai Gate. They added many procedures to what was essentially an annexation process, creating trouble for themselves. Were they foolish? Of course not. While this approach seems troublesome, sometimes, in the world, a layer of pretense is needed, just a fa?¡ìade to provide cover. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Otherwise, if everyone advocated the survival of the fittest, ¡®I am right because I am strong; I can kill at will¡¯, what kind of world would this be, the Immortal Realm or the Demon World? The various sects of the Immortal Realm, from ancient times till now, include many Heavenly Immortals and Great True Persons, and possibly even beings of higher realms. Since they chose to establish such an order and the successors are willing to adhere to it, it naturally shows that this order, this fa?¡ìade, serves its purpose. Lu Yuan understood this to some extent. So, after understanding this unspoken rule of the Immortal Realm, when facing Qingyang Country, he also didn¡¯t propose directly attacking these three sects and overtly seizing territory. Instead, he prepared to cast his strategy as ¡®punishing the sinners to save the people¡¯, using the pretext of restoring peace and prosperity to the country to subdue the three sects. ¡®I am doing it for the common people, for the sake of humanity.¡¯ Not because I covet your territory and thus come to plunder it. This facade, indeed hypocritical, But even as hypocritical as it is, it¡¯s still better than having no layer of deceit at all, blatantly displaying cruelty. This is probably why all cultivators who have mastered their unique powers voluntarily add a layer of restraint to their minds. Otherwise, succumbing to the allure of great power and acting impulsively would eventually lead them to ruin amid that power. The wisdom of cultivators perhaps lies in this. ¡®So Taiping Dao plans to take over Qingyang Country, which is indeed the only suitable location for them to seize. But seizing Qingyang Country would be equivalent to blocking Jiuzhou Immortal Gate from infiltrating into the Southern Domain.¡¯ If Taiping Dao really did this, they would have thoroughly offended the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Facing such a powerful alliance of Immortal Sects, even my Qing Immortal Sect feels enormous pressure, let alone Taiping Dao. If they want to establish themselves in this Southern Domain, they must gain the support of local powers. Among the many local forces, undoubtedly my Qing Immortal Sect, with the strongest strength and existing conflicts with the Western Domain¡¯s Immortal Sects, is the best candidate for alliance. This is really great¡­¡¯ Having understood these matters, Yang Jihua¡¯s mood greatly improved. Then, looking at Che Shidao, he said with a smile, ¡°Now that our sect is declining, without producing any Great True Persons for a long time, the Changqing Domain has been left without a leader, and the world has consequently fallen into chaos. Regarding this situation, the disciples of our sect are also quite heartbroken. However, with the rebels wreaking havoc in the Western Domain, invading our borders, our sect had no choice but to devote all efforts to quell the disturbances. This Southern Domain and other areas have also been left unattended, gradually falling prey to demons. Allowing the land of the human race to fall into the hands of demons is the wrongdoing of our Qing Immortal Sect. Initially, we always thought of making amends, but we lacked the strength to do so. If your sect is willing, then I, as the representative of our sect, can invite your sect to settle in the Changqing Domain, specifically in this Southern Domain. Among the nine nations of the Southern Domain, Great Eye Kingdom, Xiaye Country, and Jiuchuan Country are all under the control of demons. If you are able to eliminate these demons and expel the evil spirits, then the lands of these three countries are yours for the taking. The three sects within Qingyang Country have been waging endless wars for hundreds of years, causing the people of the country to live in misery and gradually turning from immortals into demons, descending into the demonic path. If you are willing, you could also admonish them, bringing this country back to the righteous path of the Immortal Sects. These four countries, plus Youxin Country, make a total of five nations, which should be enough for Taiping Dao to establish itself, right?¡± Perhaps feeling backed into a corner, Yang Jihua, after clarifying the intentions of Taiping Dao, also gave a strong response. He invited them not only in the name of the hegemon of Changqing Domain, but also endorsed Taiping Dao¡¯s subsequent expansion using his own sect. Even for the most problematic Qingyang Country, he found a pretext. The three local sects had fallen into the demonic path. In this way, when Taiping Dao took over Qingyang Country, it would not be an invasion, but rather a correction of chaos, rescuing the local people of the human race from the hands of demons. What a good pretext! Che Shidao was so moved by these considerate words that he could not help being touched, ¡°With such generosity from a fellow sect member, it would be ungracious of me to refuse. Rest assured, friend, since Qing Immortal Sect supports us so, Taiping Dao will not let you down. To rectify the chaos, subdue demons, and restore the order of the nine nations of the Southern Domain, making this place a land for our Immortal Sect of the Human Race. This cause is something Taiping Dao cannot shirk. Shortly, I will send a message back to the Mountain Gate, informing the School Leader, asking him to come and assist. With his assistance, the Great Eye Kingdom battle that the School Leader True Person is involved in is bound to make progress. With the School Leader¡¯s intervention, we can surely defeat the Six-eyed Lord and restore another nation for our Human Race.¡± Now that the Qing Immortal Sect had extended an olive branch, Taiping Dao naturally also needed to show its colors. ?¦Ï¦Í¨À0.§ã¦Ï Taking over the Great Eye Kingdom and advancing westward from the Southern Domain directly confronting the expansion direction of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was the best statement to make. Indeed. Hearing Che Shidao speak in this manner, Yang Jihua¡¯s face broke into a broad smile, ¡°Your sect truly is a major school of our Immortal Sect, dedicated to the righteous path, to subdue demons as its duty, I deeply admire you. The land of the nine nations of the Southern Domain, now secure, is entrusted to your sect.¡± Just like that. With both sides eagerly converging, Taiping Dao and Qing Immortal Sect, for their mutual benefit, finally came together. Chapter 1258 - Chapter 1258 Chapter 500 Integration of the Southern Domain ?Chapter 1258: Chapter 500 Integration of the Southern Domain Chapter 1258: Chapter 500 Integration of the Southern Domain With the support of the Changqing Immortal Sect secured, Lu Yuan lost all doubt about gaining control over the main power in the Nine Countries of the Southern Domain. As the nominal ruler of the current Changqing Domain, the Changqing Immortal Sect naturally carries a sense of legitimate justification. Now that it supported the Taiping Dao taking charge of the Southern Domain, it was tantamount to legitimizing the Taiping Dao¡¯s control over the Southern Domain, granting it the legal right to expand its influence in the region. This alone, for the major Immortal Sects that still needed to maintain some semblance of surface effort, was the greatest support they could provide to the Taiping Dao. Not to mention. Although the Changqing Immortal Sect had declined, it remained the overlord, still the strongest Immortal Sect in the Changqing Domain, and in the eyes of other sects within the domain, it was still that beacon of light. Having the tiger¡¯s skin of the Changqing Immortal Sect, some of the Immortal Sect forces in the Southern Domain, as long as it didn¡¯t involve their core strengths, would naturally lean towards and support the Taiping Dao. This was also a form of soft power. In summary, with the support of the Changqing Immortal Sect, there would be no problems internally when the Taiping Dao took over the Southern Domain, at least against other major forces in the region. As for externally? With the Changqing Immortal Sect in the central and northern parts of the domain, tying up a considerable amount of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s resources, it had already reduced their strength by eight to nine parts out of ten. The remaining one or two parts of strength, at most two or three late-stage Human Immortals, were insignificant for the current Taiping Dao. Even without Lu Yuan¡¯s Earth Immortal avatar taking action, just relying on the avatars of Che Shidao and Yi Dancheng was enough to stop the invasion of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Of course. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? For the sake of caution, Lu Yuan always made the most comprehensive plans possible, taking all potential dangers into full consideration. He liked to plan for the widest range of possibilities, a trait of his personality. Therefore, relying solely on his own strength was still somewhat inadequate. Uniting all the forces that could be united, consolidating all resources and public sentiment, and making oneself a solid whole before presenting a united fronta€¡±that was the way to be sure of victory in every battle. In concrete terms, after Che Shidao met with Yang Jihua of the Changqing Immortal Sect, he immediately invited the messenger from Jintai Gate, the elder Ouyang Yuan, a True Person from their sect. Ouyang Yuan came to Mi Yun Mountain with a special mission, so when he brought disciples from Jintai Gate and persistently sought an audience with Che Shidao. But at that time, Che Shidao was busy assisting the main body in breaking through to Human Immortal and had no time to deal with him. So he used the excuse of being occupied, and politely declined for the time being. Latter, once Lu Yuan had broken through to Human Immortal and returned to Mi Yun Mountain, Ouyang Yuan requested an audience once again at the first opportunity, but he was also first met by Yang Jihua and was once again denied. Being rejected twice in a row naturally left Ouyang Yuan with a sense of unrest. He couldn¡¯t help but suspect whether the other party had detected the intention behind his visit and was unwilling to confront the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, so they kept avoiding him. After all, as the power that had contended with the Changqing Immortal Sect for ten thousand years, and also the second largest force in the domain, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was undoubtedly an enormous presence for their minor Immortal Sects. To say nothing of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Just the Giant Spirit Sect within the Immortal Alliance, currently invading the Southern Domain, was an enormous presence for these Southern Domain Immortal Sects. After all, this was a sect with three True Immortals. In the Southern Domain, counting several hundred thousand years upwards, no sect had managed to produce three True Immortals due to the suppression by the Nine Spirits Sect and the Changqing Immortal Sect before. To them, isn¡¯t that an enormous presence? Even the currently flourishing Taiping Dao, despite having two late-stage Human Immortals, still falls short in numbers compared to the Giant Spirit Sect, doesn¡¯t it? If just the Giant Spirit Sect was this troublesome, there was no need to mention the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate standing behind it. It was precisely because they understood the strength of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and had personally experienced the pressure it brought for hundreds of years that Jintai Gate could comprehend the psychology and thoughts behind the Taiping Dao¡¯s reluctance. And then, that urgency began. The Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was simply too powerful, and the oppression it brought was too great. So great that it almost suffocated them. Now the time had come. As the infiltration of the Giant Spirit Sect into Qingyang Country intensified and their control over the country deepened, Jintai Gate was starting to feel it could no longer hold on. If they couldn¡¯t defend Qingyang Country, once this final buffer was gone, Jintai Gate would be directly bordering the Giant Spirit Sect. Then, the pressure from the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate would be directly transferred to Jintai Gate. At that point, they would face the even more strengthened Giant Spirit Sect, emboldened by their acquisition of Qingyang Country. Or perhaps more forces from the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, attracted by the interests of the Southern Domain and entering the fray. For Jintai Gate, this was undoubtedly a catastrophic disaster. If they couldn¡¯t withstand one Giant Spirit Sect, how could they bear the arrival of even more from the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate? Ouyang Yuan had discussed with the Head Brother of the sect, given the current situation of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s infiltration into the Southern Domain, if they did not actively defend themselves and resist the invasion. Short of one or two thousand years, or maybe three to four thousand years at most, Jintai Gate would perish amidst the invasion wave of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. That span of time is no more than the lifespan of one Human Immortal. ?¦Ï???.§ã? In other words, it was possible that he would witness the fall of Jintai Gate within his lifetime. The thought of the sect perishing under his watch left Ouyang Yuan restless, his heart full of anxiety. Despite his anxiety, the current situation in the Changqing Domain left him at a loss for effective countermeasures. Chapter 1259 - Chapter 1259 Chapter 500 Integration of the Southern Domain_2 ?Chapter 1259: Chapter 500 Integration of the Southern Domain_2 Chapter 1259: Chapter 500 Integration of the Southern Domain_2 The Qing Immortal Sect, which originally maintained order, had already declined and was no longer able to protect the survival of these small Immortal Sects. In the Southern Domain, where Demons frequently arose, the other two Immortal Sects in the region only thought of expanding their own interests, never considering the implication of ¡°when the lips are gone, the teeth will be cold.¡± It made sense too. Between Xuan Turtle Mountain and Bihu Palace and the Qingyu Country occupied by the Giant Spirit Sect, there were four countries: Anyu, Qingyang, Great Eye Kingdom, and Youxin. In the middle lay the powers of Jintai Gate, Six-eyed Lord, and Changqing Branch, none of which were easy to provoke. Even if the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate were powerful, to fight step by step to their doorstep would take at least four or five thousand years at the fastest, and possibly more than ten thousand years at the slowest pace. In such a long period of time, if they acted quickly, they might be able to expand into one or two small countries, multiplying their Sect¡¯s sphere of influence by one or two times. By then, each sect would have two or three True People, and their strength would be far greater than now. If they were lucky enough to expand into three small countries, then there would even be a possibility of producing an Earth Immortal True Person. The entire sect¡¯s status would be altogether different from before. At that time, even if Jiuzhou Immortal Gate expanded their reach, as long as they couldn¡¯t fully commit to attacking the Southern Domain, then relying on their enhanced strength after expansion would be sufficient to withstand. The end result would merely be dividing the Southern Domain with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Therefore, at this moment, with Xuan Turtle Mountain eyeing the nearby Youxin and Xiaye Countries, they aimed to elevate their own sect¡¯s status to the foundation of a Great Immortal Sect. Even Bihu Palace, although limited by strength, didn¡¯t seem to have any immediate expansion moves. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï But the fact that Youxin Country had descended into such chaos previously, to say that the Immortal Sect right next to Youxin hadn¡¯t done anything to add fuel to the flames would be unbelievable to anyone. In an era of collapsing propriety and order, every Immortal Sect was only looking out for their selfish interests, with their sights set solely on immediate gains. Those who could stand from the perspective of righteousness and look to long-term interests were very few and far between. Under such circumstances. Taiping Dao, which was an outsider with little interaction and few ties with the local Immortal Sects, was naturally reluctant to muddy the waters and support Jintai Gate against the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Because, rather than taking huge risks to confront Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, it would be more profitable to hide behind the scenes, quietly expanding their own strength and using the survival of Jintai Gate as a buffer to gain time for their own power growth. Moreover, Taiping Dao had already been doing so. Their continuous incursions into the Great Eye Kingdom over the past few years were clear evidence of this. With such considerations in mind, Jintai Gate naturally had to worry whether the hope they had struggled so much for would quickly be dashed. And after recent months of agony, Ouyang Yuan finally faced the time of fate¡¯s judgment. ¡®I hope Taiping Dao will see the big picture, not be like Xuan Turtle Mountain, those blinded by greed, considering only their immediate interests without foreseeing future disasters.¡¯ Approaching the sect¡¯s gate, he took a deep breath and prayed silently in his heart. ¡°Master Ouyang has arrived.¡± Unexpectedly for Ouyang Yuan, Master Che from Taiping Dao greeted him with great enthusiasm, ¡°I¡¯ve been busy with numerous affairs previously and have not had the opportunity to meet with True Person. I beg your forgiveness for any negligence. Now, as soon as those matters were handled, I immediately asked for True Person to come. Please, feel free to discuss whatever matters you may have with me.¡± Not knowing whether it was because he had self-deprecatingly positioned himself in a weaker stance for too long, facing Master Che¡¯s warm welcome, Ouyang Yuan felt unexpectedly flattered: ¡°I am not worthy, truly not worthy. I was presumptuous to have disturbed you several times before. I¡¯m grateful that Master is willing to see me.¡± Asking for others¡¯ help, he couldn¡¯t afford to put on any airs. Master Che smiled, aware of the other¡¯s embarrassment, and since he also had an agenda, he didn¡¯t beat around the bush and asked directly, ¡°What matters did True Person Ouyang wish to discuss during your several attempts to see me?¡± Ouyang Yuan was slightly startled, not expecting Master Che to be so forthright, but it suited his purposes. After considering his approach for a moment, he said, ¡°Does Master Che know of Qingyang Country?¡± Master Che nodded, ¡°I have heard somewhat of it. It¡¯s known that the country is full of Immortal Sects, with three factions constantly at odds, erupting into hundreds of Cultivator battles annually, resulting in countless deaths and injuries. Then, to compensate for their losses, they brutally oppress the citizens, continuously extorting the wealth of mortals, even committing mass slaughters. Such actions have veered away from the Immortal Method, degenerating to the path of Demons. All of Our Generation of Cultivators who hear of it are filled with contempt, wishing fervently to eliminate such tyranny, bring order out of chaos, and return to the country a just and clear world.¡± Upon hearing this, Ouyang Yuan was taken aback again; he never imagined that Master Che would immediately label the three Immortal Sects of Qingyang Country as having fallen to the path of Demons. In the Immortal Realm, this was undoubtedly pronouncing a death sentence on the other party. Knowing that, amongst Immortal Sects, Demons and Monsters are often mentioned together. And to see how the Immortal Sects regarded Demons and Monsters, one only needs to look at how Taiping Dao previously swept through Youxin Country and suppressed the Great Eye Kingdom, and how all the Immortal Sects¡¯ powers expressed their stance. Even sects like Xuan Turtle Mountain, whose interests were encroached upon by Taiping Dao, were compelled to outwardly call it good and express their support for Taiping Dao. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï To eliminate Monsters and Demonsa€¡±this is the natural justice of Immortal Sect Cultivators. Now that Taiping Dao directly branded the three Immortal Sects of Qingyang Country as having devolved into the path of Demons, didn¡¯t that mean that whoever went to suppress these three sects in the future would not need to worry about the usual under-the-table rules and etiquette? Chapter 1260 - Chapter 1260 Chapter 500 Consolidating the Southern Domain_3 ?Chapter 1260: Chapter 500 Consolidating the Southern Domain_3 Chapter 1260: Chapter 500 Consolidating the Southern Domain_3 ¡°` Simply killing them off is the simplest way. Nobody else can say anything against it. Because what I am doing is slaying monsters and eradicating demons, upholding righteousness, and doing the most correct thing in the world. As long as you¡¯re still a cultivator of the Immortal Sect and a member of the Human Race, you can¡¯t fault me. Therefore, the crimes that Che Shidao has accused the three Immortal Sects of Qingyang Country of are nothing short of severe. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï This made Ouyang Yuan feel somewhat embarrassed after hearing them, and he wanted to defend himself, ¡°Actually¡­ it¡¯s not that exaggerated. Inside Qingyang Country, like Qing Mountain Pavilion and Wind Thunder Fortress, they have profound inheritances, strict family rules and teachings, and there are many cultivators of true virtue.¡± ¡°It is only the Beidou Alliance, a bunch of heterodox wanderers and a mishmash, who knows how many there are with malicious intentions.¡± ¡°Such Immortal Sects are indeed the root of all evil, those who have fallen into the demonic path,¡± he continued. Qing Mountain Pavilion and Wind Thunder Fortress, one is an offshoot of Jintai Gate, and the other has many clan members within Jintai Gate; both are deeply connected to Jintai Gate. Ouyang Yuan couldn¡¯t help but defend his own people. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã? ¡°Is that so?¡± Che Shidao, however, did not indulge him and directly sneered, ¡°Yet the Changqing Immortal Sect over there also believes that this country is dominated by evil demons, with no true cultivators of the Immortal Sect left in the country.¡± Ouyang Yuan was taken aback, ¡°Changqing Immortal Sect?¡± Che Shidao nodded, ¡°Yes, Changqing Immortal Sect. Truth be told, the Changqing Immortal Sect is extremely dissatisfied with the current state of Qingyang Country. The Immortal Sects in the country have one after another fallen into the demonic path, greatly tarnishing the reputation of our Immortal Sects. Now, the Changqing Immortal Sect has invited our Taiping Dao to take charge of Qingyang to restore order from chaos, eradicate the demonic path, and reinstate the peace of the Southern Domain. Regarding this matter, I have already reported to the Sect Leader and passed the message up to my elder uncle. The Sect Leader and my elder uncle have both agreed to take over Qingyang Country. My elder uncle, the old man, has even started out and is on his way to the Changqing Domain. With him there, he will certainly sweep away the horde of demons and stabilize the Southern Domain.¡± Ouyang Yuan had never imagined that Taiping Dao had already reached an understanding with Changqing Immortal Sect and had even gained their support. From what the other party said, it seemed that Changqing Immortal Sect was planning to support Taiping Dao to become the leader of the Southern Domain region. The implications of this were far from ordinary; it was akin to handing over the sovereignty of the Southern Domain on a silver platter. Although he could somewhat understand why Changqing Immortal Sect would do thisa€¡±to curb the growth of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates¡¯ power while securing an ally for themselvesa€¡± Still, it was too exaggerated. Moreover, does Taiping Dao have the strength and the ability to take on this responsibility? The hints of immense information contained in these words shook Ouyang Yuan¡¯s spirit. But he still forced himself to calm down, grasped the key points, and then cautiously asked, ¡°I have always heard that your esteemed sect only has Friend Che and your School Leader as Immortals. I didn¡¯t expect that you two had another elder uncle. May I ask what is the esteemed name of your elder uncle and how profound is his cultivation?¡± Che Shidao answered with a smile, ¡°My elder uncle has mostly stayed at the sect and seldom ventured out, so we, the younger disciples, haven¡¯t widely proclaimed his name. However, since we have been cordially invited by Changqing Immortal Sect and Taiping Dao finds it difficult to decline, we have no choice but to trouble the old man. My elder uncle goes by the Taoist name Qing Guanzi, and he is Earth Flower True Man. Only with a great person like my elder uncle can this chaotic situation in the Southern Domain be settled. What does Friend think?¡± ¡°` ¡°Qingyang Country borders your honored sect, and my Taiping Dao has taken charge of this nation. Does Friend Che have any objections?¡± Earth Immortal True Person! Hearing the words of Che Shidao, Ouyang Yuan¡¯s heart trembled. He understood, he understood everything. No wonder the Qing Immortal Sect was willing to support and befriend Taiping Dao, ready to yield the sovereignty of the entire Southern Domain. Taiping Dao had an Earth Immortal True Person, such strength was completely beyond the scale of these smaller Immortal Sects. It already had sufficient qualifications to treat with the Qing Immortal Sect as an equal. Only a Taiping Dao of this caliber had the right to subdue the entire Southern Domain, to lead the nine countries, and to contend with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. In the face of such a Taiping Dao, in the presence of an Earth Immortal True Person, the local forces of the whole Southern Domain had no power to resist at all. Now with the support of Qing Immortal Sect, Taiping Dao¡¯s dominion over the Southern Domain was as good as settled, a trend that could not be defied. Realizing that the trend could not be opposed, Ouyang Yuan immediately changed his stance, speaking more humbly, ¡°It is a blessing for the people when Taiping Dao wishes to take charge of Qingyang, to restore order out of chaos. My Jintai Gate previously also wished to undertake this matter but was limited by insufficient strength and plagued by the deceitful, thus we never succeeded. Now that Taiping Dao is leading this effort, it couldn¡¯t be better. My Jintai Gate is willing to follow your esteemed sect, to contribute our modest efforts to the stability of the Southern Domain.¡± Facing the inevitable trend, Ouyang Yuan shifted his attitude quickly, directly expressing his loyalty to Taiping Dao. Che Shidao laughed heartily, ¡°It gladdens my heart that Friend Ouyang has such intentions. It shows that my path is not a solitary one.¡± After laughing, he waved his hand and said, ¡°Since Jintai Gate is willing to support this cause, then Friend Ouyang, please stay behind. I have also arranged to meet with the messengers from Bihu Palace and Xuan Turtle Mountain to discuss together, to consolidate the stability of the Southern Domain. Though we have the trust of Qing Immortal Sect, the Southern Domain is still our shared home, and you have a stake in it as well. To secure this place, we need the concerted efforts of everyone, to jointly contribute to the peace and stability of the Southern Domain.¡± Ouyang Yuan knew that the other party wanted to strike while the iron was hot and win over the entire Southern Domain Immortal Gate in one go. But with the support of Qing Immortal Sect and the formidable strength of Taiping Dao itself, the local Immortal Sects of the Southern Domain no longer had any ground for resistance. In the end, he could only force a smile and say, ¡°Friend Che is right; indeed, we must all work together for the peace of the Southern Domain.¡± As they were talking, the messenger from Bihu Palace, Zuo Yunting, had already arrived. Faced with the coalition of Qing Immortal Sect, Taiping Dao, and Jintai Gate, along with the pressure of an Earth Immortal, this weakest Immortal Sect of the Southern Domain naturally had no power to resist. On the spot, Zuo Yunting contacted the Sect Leader holding the fort back at his sect, and after Che Shidao and Ouyang Yuan moved him with feelings and enlightened him with reason, he very perceptively expressed his sentiments. He immediately declared support for Taiping Dao and emphasized his willingness to follow Taiping Dao and contribute his part to the great undertaking of stabilizing the Southern Domain. After dealing with Bihu Palace, the only Immortal Sect left in the Southern Domain was Xuan Turtle Mountain. Even though this sect had the most schemes and gained the most from the chaos of the Southern Domain, facing the alliance of the entire Southern Domain Immortal Gate and the coercion of Qing Immortal Sect and Taiping Dao¡¯s Earth Immortal, they had very little room to choose. When Che Shidao summoned the projection of Qing Guanzi to prove the presence of this Earth Immortal uncle, Zhu Zhenghe, the messenger from Xuan Turtle Mountain, no matter how reluctant he was in his heart, had no choice but to express the loyalty of Xuan Turtle Mountain before Qing Guanzi. Thus, before the formal confrontation with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Taiping Dao took a step ahead and smoothly completed the consolidation of the Immortal Sect forces in the Southern Domain. In this game, they took the lead by a move. Chapter 1261 - Chapter 1261 Chapter 501 Internal Dissension ?Chapter 1261: Chapter 501 Internal Dissension Chapter 1261: Chapter 501 Internal Dissension After securing the support of Jintai Gate, Bihu Palace, and Xuan Turtle Mountain, Che Shidao and the others unified their statements. They made an agreement. At the upcoming Mountain Gate opening ceremony, faced with the pressure from Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, the four sects would look out for each other, advance and retreat together, and jointly protect their interests in the Southern Domain. They also emphasized that Qing Immortal Sect would stand with them and express their support when the time came. This internal unity meeting was almost at its end. After all, everyone had just come together, and sects like Xuan Turtle Mountain had even been coerced into joining this circle. To say there was much friendship, well, there was not much at all. Friendship, such a thing, is always the result of interests plus time and constant interaction and communication. For the moment, Lu Yuan was not in a hurry, planning only to unify the Southern Domain in name first and then slowly build up his foundation over time, and in the process, sift and discern. Determine who could be trusted as one¡¯s own, who needed to be suppressed as dissenters, and who had to be completely eradicated as internal threats. He had plenty of time and could afford to wait. While Taiping Dao was maintaining calm, having just experienced an information baptism and being forced to take a stand once, the other three sects were not so composed. As soon as they left the meeting hall, Ouyang Yuan and the other two representatives exchanged glances without a word, and then each went their separate ways. Then, upon returning to their respective residences, they went straight to their rooms without the slightest inclination to wander around, content to stay put like homebodies. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï But this was only on the surface. Once in their rooms, the three of them very tacitly cast a concealing magic on their rooms to shield them from outside prying eyes. Then, each took out a spirit talisman, poured magic power into it to activate it, and as the runes flickered, projections of the other two appeared in their respective rooms. As sects with tens of thousands of years of inheritance in the Southern Domain, Jintai Gate, Bihu Palace, and Xuan Turtle Mountain had been neighbors for tens of thousands of years and, despite their contradictions, they had become deeply intertwined with interests over tens of thousands of years, each embedding within the other. In other words, they were thoroughly local powers, huddling together and seeking collective survival. In such an ecosystem, the important figures in these sects naturally had some standard methods of communication. Normally, as soon as people like Ouyang Yuan knew of Qing Immortal Sect and Taiping Dao¡¯s intentions, they would have communicated with each other first. They would wait until they had agreed upon a plan that was acceptable to all parties before moving forward in unity to resist Taiping Dao¡¯s invasion. However, Che Shidao had clearly anticipated this, so he did not give them the chance. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? After laying out his cards, he directly cornered Ouyang Yuan, forcing him to follow along and coerce another sect to make a statement. This bullying directly caught the other three sects off guard, and forced them to quickly take a stand in haste. But it was clearly not something that could satisfy everyone. Thus, having recovered a bit, they immediately got in touch privately to discuss countermeasures. After activating their communication talismans, the projections of Ouyang Yuan, Zhu Zhenghe, and Zuo Yunting appeared beside each other in their rooms. After exchanging glances, Zhu Zhenghe, representing Xuan Turtle Mountain, which had the most to lose and was also the most ambitious, spoke first, ¡°Gentlemen, what do you make of Taiping Dao¡¯s sudden advance into the Southern Domain?¡± Ouyang Yuan smiled, ¡°What can I make of it but welcome it?¡± Zhu Zhenghe frowned, ¡°Do you realize that if Taiping Dao truly establishes itself in the Southern Domain, with their strength, and with the support of Qing Immortal Sect, the rulers of Southern Domain will be them. We¡¯ve been waiting nearly ten thousand years, taking advantage of the decline of Qing Immortal Sect and the chaos of Southern Domain to finally break free from their control. Just as we tasted freedom for not even three thousand years, now we might have a new master over us. What, then, would all our efforts over these years amount to? Don¡¯t you wish for your sect to break free from the prison of tens of thousands of years and move beyond being confined to a single nation, to become a Grand Immortal Sect? Don¡¯t you desire for yourself, or someone from the next generation, to become an Earth Immortal True Person?¡± Out of the three sects, Xuan Turtle Mountain hated Taiping Dao the most. Because according to their previous plans, Youxin Country, very close at hand, would have fallen into the hands of demons within a hundred years. When that happened, as the only sect in the vicinity with a second Human Immortal, Xuan Turtle Mountain could naturally take control of Youxin Country under the guise of eradicating demons, cleansing the demons for its sect and expanding into a new territory. At the same time, they had deep roots in Xiaye Country after a thousand years of planning. With Youxin Country secure and their strength increased, they could then contest with the old dragon of Jiuchuan Demon Country for Xiaye, significantly increasing their chances of winning another country. With three nations in hand, Xuan Turtle Mountain would meet the basic criteria of a Grand Immortal Sect, and there would be hope for cultivating an Earth Immortal within their sect. Based on this, with a thousand years of growth, the leader of Southern Domain might very well be them. But now, all of these aspirations were washed away with the arrival of Taiping Dao. A thousand years of planning had come to naught. Now tell me, if you were in my shoes, would you be resign to rest in peace? However, the grievances in his heart were his alone to suffocate undera€¡±others neither could nor wished to understand them. Chapter 1262 - Chapter 1262 Chapter 501 Internal Dissension_2 ?Chapter 1262: Chapter 501 Internal Dissension_2 Chapter 1262: Chapter 501 Internal Dissension_2 Therefore, upon hearing Zhu Zhenghe¡¯s words, Ouyang Yuan sneered, ¡°Freedom? Do you mean the freedom where we lack protection, are bullied by foreign enemies, struggle to preserve our own heritage, find no aid, and where our Tao Inheritance gets extinguished overnight?¡± If that is indeed the case, then such freedom, I do not want either. I would rather our sect¡¯s inheritance be free of worries, able to continue for thousands and thousands of years, ensuring our ancestor¡¯s Tao does not end in my hands. As for making our sect rise and become a Grand Immortal Sect¡­ I¡¯m afraid it¡¯s just for the rise of your Xuan Turtle Mountain, for your True Person Zhu¡¯s path of an Earth Immortal.¡± Ouyang Yuan spoke without mercy, directly piercing through the other¡¯s deceitful facade. His Jintai Gate had borne the pressure of the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect for nearly a thousand years, now even more so pushed to the brink of Tao Inheritance¡¯s extinction. Over these thousand years, to survive and protect themselves, they had not ceased to help themselves, including seeking aid from two other Immortal Sects in the Southern Domain. But how did Xuan Turtle Mountain respond to them at that time? They completely ignored them, solely focusing on their own expansion. Back then, why didn¡¯t they think to speak of the Southern Domain¡¯s greater good or mutual support? Now that their own interests are compromised and they feel the pressure, they quickly become anxious, demanding that others oppose Taiping Dao for the benefit of Xuan Turtle Mountain. Where in the world is there such a good deal? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï ¡°Short-sighted! Short-sighted!¡± Hearing Ouyang Yuan¡¯s almost satirical words, Zhu Zhenghe was immediately furious, cursing twice, and said angrily, ¡°Today, by serving Taiping Dao as the master, we can indeed gain momentary peace. But if we truly let it establish its hold in the Southern Domain, once it grows strong, who can assure us it won¡¯t turn against us? Remember, ten thousand years ago, in the Western Domain¡¯s Nine Nations, there used to be six Immortal sects. But now, with those remnants of the Nine Spirits returning and taking over the Western Domain, where do the Tao inheritances of the six Immortal sects stand today? A lesson from history, a warning for the future. The bloody example lies before us, could you really believe that Taiping Dao is any better than those remnants of the Nine Spirits?¡± Hearing this, both Ouyang Yuan and Zuo Yunting¡¯s expressions slightly changed, clearly touched. But quickly, Ouyang Yuan still scoffed, ¡°Even so, that would be a matter of four or five thousand years in the future. It might even take over ten thousand years before such a day arrives. By that time, I would have long been dead, and Jintai Gate would have changed several generations of disciples. Such matters will have to be managed by later generations; I cannot concern myself so much. But if right now there is no Taiping Dao, then in a thousand years, my Jintai Gate would be extinguished. Rather than worrying about a potential problem ten thousand years later and neglecting the imminent peril within a thousand years, I choose to side with Taiping Dao.¡± Seeing how Ouyang Yuan was staunchly set on Taiping Dao regardless of what was said, not budging at all, Zhu Zhenghe grew even angrier, ¡°You¡­¡± At this moment, Zuo Yunting, seeing the two immortals about to perhaps start fighting, hurriedly interjected, ¡°Gentlemen True Persons, let us prioritize harmony. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 We are here to discuss, not to anger each other. We can talk things over slowly; let¡¯s not lose our temper.¡± However, his words were like lighting a keg of gunpowder. The two immortals immediately turned their heads, staring straight at him. Zhu Zhenghe directly asked, ¡°Don¡¯t just talk about us, what¡¯s the stance of your Bihu Palace? Do you intend to protect the interests of our local Immortal Sect, or are you also blindly loyal to Taiping Dao like Jintai Gate?¡± Ouyang Yuan didn¡¯t speak, but his expression also conveyed inquiry. Under the gaze of the two immortals, at this moment, being only a Five Qi Towards Primordial, Zuo Yunting, even if already considered the future seed of a True Immortal by his sect, still felt immense pressure. Looking around the room, there was no one who could relieve him of this pressure. Zuo Yunting swallowed, glanced at Zhu Zhenghe, but eventually shifted his gaze towards Ouyang Yuan, and spoke, ¡°According to the School Leader¡¯s wishes, our Bihu Palace also does not want the Southern Domain to continue in chaos and wishes to see this place return to stability. Thus, like Jintai Gate, our Bihu Palace chooses to follow Taiping Dao to maintain order in the Southern Domain.¡± Indeed, Bihu Palace also chose Taiping Dao. Hearing this, a smile immediately appeared on Ouyang Yuan¡¯s face, and his look towards Zuo Yunting softened. However, Zhu Zhenghe, seeing another betrayal, burst into angry laughter, ¡°Good, good, good, I didn¡¯t expect you people to be so short-sighted. Since that¡¯s the case, then let Taiping Dao take over the Southern Domain. I want to see, a few thousand years later, when Taiping Dao extinguishes your Tao inheritances, what your descendants will say about you ancestors inviting the wolf into the den at this moment. Truly it is impossible to scheme with such fools!¡± Zhu Zhenghe cursed loudly, waved his sleeve, and directly cut off the Transmission Shadow contact with the two. This made Zuo Yunting somewhat nervous, afraid of having gravely offended the immortal. But Ouyang Yuan assured, ¡°Don¡¯t be afraid, this is Mi Yun Mountain, and with Bihu Palace behind you, Zhu is merely helplessly raging. There¡¯s no need to pay him any mind. Give it a hundred years, when you and I become Tao companions, even if he is discontent, what can he do? This Xuan Turtle Mountain always says we are short-sighted, yet it doesn¡¯t see how the current circumstances are. With Taiping Dao having an Earth Immortal stationed and Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s strong support, even if we wanted to rebel, could we? Zhu Zhenghe still fails to see this point and wishes to unite us in opposition, which is utterly foolish. In my view, even if Taiping Dao really intends to unify the Southern Domain and extinguish our Tao thousands of years from now, the first to be targeted will be this ever restless, ignorant of heaven¡¯s will, Xuan Turtle Mountain.¡± Chapter 1263 - Chapter 1263 Chapter 501 Internal Dissension_3 ?Chapter 1263: Chapter 501 Internal Dissension_3 Chapter 1263: Chapter 501 Internal Dissension_3 Zuo Yunting gave a bitter smile, ¡°Let¡¯s hope so.¡± In fact, if possible, Bihu Palace, being the weakest among the three Immortal Sects and also a neighbor to Xuan Turtle Mountain, certainly wouldn¡¯t want to offend Zhu Zhenghe. But just as Ouyang Yuan said, under the current circumstances, the Southern Domain couldn¡¯t just be shaken by the alliance of their three minor Immortal Sects enough to change the dominance of Taiping Dao. Even if they had garnered the support of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate as external aid, it couldn¡¯t change this fact. This was the general trend; unless there was a change in the heavens, it was unstoppable. Moreover. Why would Bihu Palace want to stop it? If, like Jintai Gate, which actively sought self-salvation and even attempted to infiltrate Qingyang Country to expand its power. Then Bihu Palace, which had only one aging Human Immortal, barely capable of self-preservation, indeed had no capacity for expansion at all. Even if Zuo Yunting successfully became immortal within a hundred years. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï One nascent Immortal and one elderly Immortal, Bihu Palace would still remain the weakest among the three sects. And right beside them stood the formidable neighbor, Xuan Turtle Mountain. If they really drove away Taiping Dao, Xuan Turtle Mountain would likely be the first to suppress them, Bihu Palace. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Facing an Immortal Sect that had prospered for a thousand years, how could the declining Bihu Palace of a thousand years be an opponent? So in the subsequent expansion, it was most likely that Bihu Palace wouldn¡¯t gain much, not even the leftovers. Neither side offered any benefits, so why would he follow Xuan Turtle Mountain, risking the destruction of his own sect, to confront Taiping Dao and Changqing Immortal Sect head-on? Just because of a neighborly relationship with someone who bore ill will and had serious conflicts of interest? Xuan Turtle Mountain wasn¡¯t that influential. Under these circumstances, it was only natural for Bihu Palace to now side with Jintai Gate and lean towards Taiping Dao. As for whether Taiping Dao would swallow up their minor Immortal Sects after rising to power, Bihu Palace was unclear. But if Xuan Turtle Mountain rose and became the master of the Southern Domain. As neighbors for tens of thousands of years, and having witnessed the degrading morals in the Changqing Domain over the past ten thousand years, Zuo Yunting was especially clear that in such an environment, Xuan Turtle Mountain would definitely annihilate Bihu Palace. Never overestimate the morality of an Immortal Sect unrestrained by order in a chaotic world. Previously, when Youxin Country was in turmoil, Bihu Palace had a hand in it, although they only made small moves. The true cause of the chaos in Youxin Country was the handiwork of Xuan Turtle Mountain. Many disasters and demons were simply Xuan Turtle Mountain¡¯s tamed Spiritual Beasts, brought over from Xiaye Country and causing trouble here under a new name. Committing such deeds showed how low the other side would stoop. Though Taiping Dao was a stranger, at least it came from the outside, where the conditions in other domains were infinitely better than the chaos in Changqing Domain. One look at Li Ruoqing from Dongyang Mountain, and his temperament revealed the disparity between Changqing Domain and the outside world. With these comparisons, even without knowing the details of Taiping Dao, Bihu Palace trusted its morals more than those of Xuan Turtle Mountain. At least, after Taiping Dao arrived in Changqing Domain, it first eradicated the demons in Youxin Country, then it defeated the Six-eyed Lord of the Great Eye Kingdom, saving countless people from dire straits. Weren¡¯t these acts that demonstrated adherence to the Immortal Sect¡¯s righteous path, great deeds of slaying monsters and exorcising demons, more upright than Xuan Turtle Mountain¡¯s practice of raising demons? A gentleman looks at deeds, not intentions. No matter what Taiping Dao¡¯s true intentions were, judging from its actions up to now, it undoubtedly deserved to be called Disciples of Immortal Sect. Compared to some who only appeared virtuous, it was far superior. ¡°` Because of this. After a detailed comparison of the conduct of local Immortal Sects, Jintai Gate and Bihu Palace unanimously chose the outsider, Taiping Dao, choosing order. Previously oppressed, with no opportunity for development, both sects harbored resentment, feeling that the Qing Immortal Sect had deprived them of their right to grow. But now, with the Qing Immortal Sect gone and full freedom to run their own affairs, facing the outside world alone, they realized just how dangerous the outside world could be. Living under the protection of the Qing Immortal Sect had been so safe. No harassment, no oppression, and no one plotting against you. Although there was not much development, they could ensure generation after generation of Immortals, with a continuous legacy. Look at the present. Once independent, the external wolves pounced. The Immortal Sects of the Nine Provinces, the demons of various lands, and even Xuan Turtle Mountain¡­ All these internal and external enemies viewed Jintai Gate and Bihu Palace as plump fresh meat, always wanting to leap at them and take a bite. Under this constant surveillance by packs of wolves, one could imagine the immense psychological pressure these two Immortal Sects faced. For this celebration at Mi Yun Mountain, other Immortal Sects sent True Persons, so why didn¡¯t the School Leader of Bihu Palace, being so close, come in person? Wasn¡¯t it because it was too dangerous outside, and he dared not venture beyond the mountain gate for fear of ambush and dying out there? Should he die, Bihu Palace, lacking the protection of an Immortal, might not last much longer before it too perished. Only by staying at the sect headquarters, protected by the mountain¡¯s defensive formation, does a School Leader, a True Person of an Immortal Sect, feel truly safe. To drive an Immortal to such a state, one can glimpse the severity of the Southern Domain¡¯s environment. In such an environment, Jintai Gate and Bihu Palace naturally couldn¡¯t wait to restore order and safety. But the previously declining Qing Immortal Sect no longer had the ability to offer them protection. Their pleas went unanswered. In the end, to enhance their self-preservation, they could only join the hungry wolves, adding their own strength to the chaos of the Southern Domain in order to grab benefits. But now, with someone standing up and that person having enough strength, there was no need to dance with the wolves. Why not just seek refuge under a big tree and follow the lead of the strong, cheering six six six? If the big boss got meat, perhaps they too could get a sip of the soup. Even if it meant being exploited and paying protection money, it was better than living in constant fear of uncertainty, at least ensuring the most basic security. The willingness to take protection money sometimes can also be a stroke of luck. Jintai Gate and Bihu Palace¡¯s conflict with Xuan Turtle Mountain lay precisely in those terms. The former two just wanted to quickly find a boss to acknowledge and pay protection money to, in order to enjoy safety. The latter wanted to be the one collecting the protection money. But lacking the ability to provide safety, Xuan Turtle Mountain was an obstacle, preventing the other two from seeking refuge. Tell me, isn¡¯t such behavior detestable? You, Xuan Turtle Mountain, block our right to submit, committing a heinous crime that¡¯s simply intolerable. I¡¯m done playing with you; get lost! Because of the right to submit, the relationships within the three sects of the Southern Domain just collapsed. ¡°` Chapter 1264 - Chapter 1264 Chapter 502 Founding Celebration ?Chapter 1264: Chapter 502: Founding Celebration Chapter 1264: Chapter 502: Founding Celebration The three local Earth Immortal Sects of the Southern Domain, after a secret meeting, just like that, fell apart. However, this was not the end. After interrupting the meeting, Ouyang Yuan appeased Zuo Yunting, then immediately turned and walked out the door, returning to the reception hall to seek an audience with Che Shidao. Once they met, he immediately laid out everything that had just happened. ¡°Does Xuan Turtle Mountain have other intentions?¡± Che Shidao, watching Ouyang Yuan who had left and then returned not long after, revealed a kindly smile, ¡°Our sect is aware, and we will surely take precautions. The goodwill of Daoist friend and Jintai Gate toward our Taiping Dao will be remembered.¡± Having obtained what he wanted, Ouyang Yuan said with a delighted expression, ¡°We dare not ask for too much from your esteemed sect, we just do not wish to see vile figures like Zhu Zhenghe ruining the hard-won peace we are about to welcome.¡± Che Shidao smiled, ¡°Daoist friend, be at ease. Such petty figures cannot cause any real trouble.¡± Ouyang Yuan nodded, ¡°If that¡¯s so, I¡¯ve delivered the message, so I won¡¯t disturb Daoist friend any longer and will take my leave first.¡± ¡°I will see Daoist friend out.¡± Che Shidao stood up, sending off the ally who had actively shown goodwill, out the door. Without returning to his previous spot, he instead paused at the edge of Mi Yun Mountain, gazing into the misty verdant scenery as he relayed the information he had just received to his original body. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 ¡°We have only just set foot in this territory and are about to assume the posture of an Earth Immortal Sect, which is sure to offend many and infringe upon the interests of the local powers. Xuan Turtle Mountain is among those whose interests have been harmed, and they will naturally harbor resentment. I am aware of the situation now, there¡¯s no need to bother with them. As long as Xuan Turtle Mountain doesn¡¯t step forward to openly oppose us, we can just pretend to be unaware. When we have the leeway in the future, we can take our time dealing with this troublesome neighbor. Lu Yuan instructed his avatar after receiving the message. ¡°Yes, then I will go and prepare for the grand opening ceremony in three days,¡± Che Shidao acknowledged the command and immediately went to execute it. ¡°Go ahead.¡± Lu Yuan cut off the communication, then refocused his attention on a middle-aged man in front of him who possessed a dignified and rich presence. ¡°Not bad, not bad at all. After half a month¡¯s effort, this avatar has finally been perfected.¡± He looked at the result of his work over the past half-month, feeling extremely satisfied. Since becoming an Earth Immortal, Lu Yuan had returned to Mi Yun Mountain and had since been holed up in the most secluded and core chamber within the mountain, in seclusion. The main task was one thing: to separate the Earth Immortal Dao Fruit within his own body and then to create a new avatar based on this Dao Fruit. Following the precedents of Yi Dancheng and Che Shidao, to create a new avatar required an External Tool Dao Fruit, a part of one¡¯s own Divine Soul, and a body of Immortal Artifact grade. The first two were straightforward, as the Dao Fruit was readily available. As for the Divine Soul, with years of experience in the Nine Provinces, Lu Yuan was already quite adept at separating parts of his soul. It was only crafting a body of Immortal Artifact grade that proved to be challenging. It wasn¡¯t that he couldn¡¯t refine one. After all, possessing an Earth Immortal Dao Fruit, Lu Yuan had sufficient magic power, and with a thousand years of study in the Nine Provinces plus hands-on experience twice over, he also had the theoretical knowledge. Creating an Immortal Artifact grade body would be easy for him. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The main issue was a lack of materials. In order to refine the bodies for Che Shidao and Yi Dancheng, Lu Yuan had already used up most of the resources he brought from the Nine Provinces. And yet, the bodies he refined for the two avatars only just met the threshold of Immortal Artifacts. Now that these resources were depleted, the remaining materials were insufficient to craft a third Immortal Artifact grade body. To gather enough materials, Lu Yuan spent years expending great effort. He continuously sent out Che Shidao and Yi Dancheng to slay monsters and demons, to seek out hidden realms and secret treasures, and to scour secret stashes of valuable items from various places. They had turned the Great Eye Kingdom and Youxin Country upside down, and thanks to the contributions of thousands of demons and the discovery of over a dozen concealed cave mansions, they finally managed to gather enough materials. Then, half a year ago, he had barely managed to refine the third Immortal Artifact grade body. Although a newly minted Immortal Artifact grade body perfectly matched the power of a Human Immortal avatar, for an Earth Immortal grade avatar, such a body was a bit lacking. To meet the requirements of the Earthly Immortal Realm, the weak Immortal Qi of a body that barely met the Lower Grade Immortal Artifact threshold was insufficient. At least a top-tier Lower Grade Immortal Artifact level was necessary. Only then could the body offer sufficient protection for an Earth Immortal avatar and also enhance its power. At this time, a body at the threshold of a Lower Grade Immortal Artifact could only ensure that the Earth Immortal avatar could fully utilize its realm¡¯s magic power, meeting just the most basic functionality. Any thoughts of defensive enhancement were out of the question. ¡°Fortunately for me, the most basic functionality will suffice. After all, the Earth Immortal avatar is essentially a counterfeit Earth Immortal, the weakest of its kind within the same realm, incapable of defeating anyone. At this point, even if it¡¯s weaker, the impact isn¡¯t significant. It only needs to ensure the power of an Earth Immortal, capable of overwhelmingly crushing a Human Immortal, and that¡¯s sufficient. I¡¯m not out to fight peers of equal stature; I¡¯m going after the lowest ranks. In that case, it doesn¡¯t really matter whether I¡¯m built like a strong man or thin as a rail, the difference is negligible.¡± Lu Yuan viewed his avatar with a certain detachment and had a clear understanding of its purpose. Chapter 1265 - Chapter 1265 Chapter 502 Founding Celebration_2 ?Chapter 1265: Chapter 502: Founding Celebration_2 Chapter 1265: Chapter 502: Founding Celebration_2 This is not a product designed for confrontations with individuals of the same realm. Its positioning is to take advantage of those weaker, as an Earth Immortal avatar. As long as this criterion is met, it is considered a good avatar. At this moment, the avatar before me undoubtedly fulfills this criterion. ¡°Starting today, you shall be known as Qing Guanzi, the Elder Taishang of Taiping Dao, the martial uncle of Che Shidao and Yi Dancheng, the preeminent Earth Immortal True Person of the Southern Domain.¡± Lu Yuan instructed the avatar in front of him, ¡°You will preside over the sect¡¯s grand opening ceremony in three days. You shall also deal with those old folks from the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects.¡± ¡°Now is the time to let everyone in the Southern Domain know who truly rules this land.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Qing Guanzi nodded in affirmation, then his figure flickered and vanished from the room to make preparations. Lu Yuan stood up and strolled over to the door. The small pavilion, situated on the mid-mountain, was gently caressed by the mountain breeze. The thin mist carried a rich freshness of grass and trees, making one feel refreshed and pleased. Looking from here into the distance, Mi Yun Mountain, which had been under construction for several years, was brimming with various pavilions, towers, and buildings spread throughout the entire range of peaks. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Even the valleys had been planted with all sorts of spiritual flowers and herbs, as well as grains and rice meant for consumption. Above the fields of medicinal and spiritual plants, newly recruited disciples were diligently learning all kinds of knowledge under the guidance of their senior brothers. Some disciples, who had been in the sect for several years and had gathered a bit of magic power, were also maneuvering some of the sect¡¯s bestowed magical artifacts. They turned into streaks of light, shuttling back and forth between the peaks and valleys from time to time. Although everything was still rather rudimentary, the entire Mi Yun Mountain, the whole Taiping Dao, was already imbued with a thriving vitality and the burgeoning vigor of all things. This sapling, with just careful nurturing, would sooner or later grow into a towering tree. As the master of this tree, Lu Yuan too would rise along with it, reaching the exalted state of the Heavenly Flower Great Real Person. There is no end to the Dao, the Immortal Method is eternal. Lu Yuan looked up at the sky. The mountain mist obscured the sunlight, leaving only slivers of gold to fall through. ¡°One day, I will see the view from the cloud¡¯s summit.¡± With this resolve set in his heart, he turned back to the pavilion, then took out a jade slip and began to study the Dao Law. Taiping Dao has just started, and up to now controls only the land of Youxin. The Qi Luck and destiny produced by this country were all taken by Lu Yuan to nurture the Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade. This newly cultivated External Tool Dao Fruit actually has enough potential and the foundation of Immortal Artifacts. It was only lacking in heritage and the refinement technique was too poor, hence it had not yet become an Immortal Artifact. However, after Lu Yuan¡¯s recent refining and transformation, these were no longer issues. With the current conditions of the Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade, it will only need decades of nurturing with Qi Luck and destiny to achieve the Human Dao Fruit. This is another Human Immortal level combat power that is about to take shape in his hands and naturally warrants focused cultivation. Originally, the plan was to have an avatar solely enjoy the Qi Luck and destiny of Three Nations, to nurture them into Earth Immortals over a millennium. This can wait for now. Delaying for a few decades, given the current situation of Che Shidao and Yi Dancheng, with nearly three thousand years of lifespan each, is completely manageable. Right now, having another Human Immortal avatar is more important. As for Lu Yuan himself? He is not lacking in lifespan, and in critical moments, he can retrieve the Dao Fruit from his avatars to wield Earthly Immortal Combat Power. With no shortage of lifespan and security, there is naturally no need to compete with his avatars for resources during this entrepreneurial phase. Waiting ten thousand years before becoming an Earth Immortal is also feasible. But in reality, there is no need to wait that long. Once Taiping Dao controls the Southern Domain and subdues a few of the Demon Countries, it will effectively have dominion over the territory of five nations. To help a Human Immortal avatar achieve Earth Immortality, three nations were sufficient. Lu Yuan himself could monopolize two nations, drawing upon their Qi Luck and destinies among other resources, to feed his own cultivation. When he reaches the limit, he could simply adjust the sequence slightly a€¡° this concentrated resource breakthrough to Earth Immortal. If he is quick, maybe he could achieve Earth Flower True Man in just two or three thousand years. In terms of time, it isn¡¯t that slow. Even if Lu Yuan forewent his pride, he could oppress the affiliate sects and seize their resources to speed things up. Once he has the entire Southern Domain, there will be too many opportunities to manipulate. This is also why he is willing to take the risk and bring out his ace Earth Immortal avatar. The benefits are too great. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï ¡­ Time flashed by, and three days passed. Accompanied by auspicious clouds and celestial music drifting faintly in the air, In front of the main hall of Mi Yun Mountain, on the plaza, a large group of celestial maidens danced gracefully, followed by thousands of auspicious cranes. The grand celebration officially commenced. Having subjugated local Immortal Sects like Bihu Palace and Jintai Gate, these sects manifested an awareness of being junior members. After acknowledging their big brother, they immediately sent messages back to their own sects. Bihu Palace urgently allocated a group of musicians from within, and Jintai Gate selected some disciples skilled in singing and dancing with outstanding looks to perform and add grandeur to the celebration. Even Xuan Turtle Mountain, harboring ulterior motives, didn¡¯t fall behind, or rather, didn¡¯t dare to. As a sect famous for nurturing Spiritual Beasts, they also picked out quite a number of spiritual beasts to symbolize auspiciousness. The cranes soaring around the peak, for instance, were Xuan Turtle Mountain¡¯s contribution. The earnest attentiveness of the junior brothers towards their big brother was glaringly obvious on this grand occasion. Otherwise, with Lu Yuan¡¯s recent Ascension and Taiping Dao¡¯s humble beginnings, lacking in everything, putting together such a grand spectacle would have been beyond their capabilities. It was also because of the three junior sects, with their accumulated heritage of tens of thousands of years, that they could help their big brother create this scene. Chapter 1266 - Chapter 1266 Chapter 502 Founding Celebration_3 ?Chapter 1266: Chapter 502: Founding Celebration_3 Chapter 1266: Chapter 502: Founding Celebration_3 It wasn¡¯t just about being a little brother. As the newly recognized big brother by Taiping Dao, Yang Jihua from Qing Immortal Sect, to show support, obtained a wooden Immortal Artifact from within the sect. Using the power of the Immortal Artifact, he released a massive amount of woody essence, filling the entire Mi Yun Mountain. This transformed the mountain scenery into a blossoming paradise, forested shades establishing several marvelous phenomena of Heaven and Earth as a mark of celebration. For the big brother, for the allies, the Southern Domain Immortal Gate and Qing Immortal Sect had indeed given significant face, sparing no effort. And the outcome had been exceptionally outstanding. Indeed. It was not the scene before their eyes that stunned them, the arrivals were all from Immortal Sects, many of them True Immortals, who had lived hundreds or thousands of years, what scene hadn¡¯t they witnessed? What truly shocked them was the Southern Domain Immortal Gate and Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s attitude of support toward Taiping Dao. This scene didn¡¯t look like just aiding a neighboring outsider, even for their own folks, it wouldn¡¯t be much different, would it? Since when had Taiping Dao become so close to them? Many forces exchanged glances, their eyes revealing seriousness and joy at the same time. As for the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate from the Western Domain, upon witnessing this scene, regardless of their initial thoughts, their faces just turned ugly. Many from the Immortal Sects watched them with Schadenfreude. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Clearly, Taiping Dao had now leaned towards Qing Immortal Sect, creating, with Taiping Dao¡¯s banner, an integrated local force on the Southern side. Jiuzhou Immortal Gate in the Southern Domain now faced a strong competitor. For many who disliked Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, this was undoubtedly great news. However, as the targeted party, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate felt very uncomfortable and dissatisfied deep down. Looking at those gloating gazes, their look toward Taiping Dao people across turned fairly hostile. A thick scent of gunpowder was already permeating the air. ¡°Esteemed Daoist friends, thanks to everyone¡¯s help and Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s support, today Taiping Dao is able to establish a sub-branch here in Youxin Country. I sincerely thank you all in advance here,¡± Today was the grand day for the opening of the sub-branch; Yi Dancheng, who had always been out exploring secret immortal abodes and gathering materials, had rushed back just for this. As the Sect Leader, he delivered a speech. ¡°The Southern Domain is unfortunate, with demons rampaging. Those demons and evil spirits, boldly, in our world of the Immortal Method, publicly hold power, enslaving our Human Race citizens, calling them ¡®blood food.¡¯ Such outrageously cruel acts, in the Outer Territory, are simply unheard of. Therefore, having come from this domain, upon witnessing such a scene, my junior brother and I out of anger took action, annihilating the demons, reclaiming lost territory, restoring peace and tranquility to our Human Race¡¯s land. For this, Qing Immortal Sect has also recommended Youxin Country¡¯s merits to glorify our sect¡¯s virtue. Our sect has officially set up this sub-branch here, imparting the teachings across Mi Yun.¡± Yi Dancheng spoke loudly, announcing to the world the legal basis for Taiping Dao¡¯s establishment here in an upright and forthright manner. We are not seizing territory by force. We first drove out the demons, reclaimed the lost lands of the Human Race, and established great merit. Then, because of the merit, Qing Immortal Sect recommended the action of granting Youxin Country. The legal rationale for Taiping Dao establishing a sub-branch here thus arose. For the entire Human Race, for the whole Immortal Method, the righteousness of establishing this Tao Inheritance was more than sufficient. Therefore, as he completed these words, many messengers present, those close to Taiping Dao, all showed expressions of kindness and admiration. Even the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate over there, despite being antagonistic, remained silent without raising any objections. In the face of such righteousness, anyone with a shred of dignity couldn¡¯t utter a word against it. Of course, they wouldn¡¯t choose to fight under such adverse conditions. Witnessing this scene, Yi Dancheng nodded silently to himself. This celebration had not many invitees from the Taiping Dao. Mainly it was the Southern Domain Immortal Gate and the Changqing Immortal Sect who were invited. But inevitably, many uninvited guests showed up. For instance, having invited the Giant Spirit Sect, the latter brought along four other Jiuzhou Immortal Gates. Having invited the Changqing Immortal Sect, they brought along eight of their own subordinates. Thus, at this moment inside Mi Yun Mountain, nearly all sects of the Changqing Domain with True Immortals and higher powers had sent their messengers. And in doing so, they incidentally did Lu Yuan a small favor. After this declaration, with these people¡¯s endorsement, the foothold of the Taiping Dao in the Southern Domain was thoroughly solidified. Their silence now roughly equated to the entire Changqing Domain¡¯s sects recognizing the existence of the Taiping Dao. This significance was quite substantial. ¡°However, the Southern Domain is chaotic, and demons run rampant. My Taiping Dao, bearing this great responsibility, took charge of Youxin Country, becoming a part of the Southern Domain. Thus, we must shoulder the duty to cleanse the demonic chaos and restore peace to the Southern Domain by making a contribution. Many fellow sects of the Southern Domain and numerous Dao friends from the Changqing Immortal Sect have all invited us ardently, asking the Taiping Dao to eliminate demons and monsters, which makes it hard to decline.¡± After asserting legal and orthodox legitimacy, Yi Dancheng, seeing no opposition, continued, ¡°The School Leader has been diligently working day and night, deeply aware of our insufficient capabilities. We know that just relying on my brother and me, we absolutely cannot stabilize the Southern Domain. Therefore, after deliberation, we could only seek help from an elder. Hence, several months ago, I sent a message back to our sect, requesting our grand-uncle to come out of retirement to assist us. The grand-uncle also deeply understood the significance of his responsibility for upholding the Immortal Method and protecting the human race. He specially rushed here to take charge of the overall situation in the Changqing Southern Domain. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? My grand-uncle is Earth Flower True Man; with him here, we can surely eliminate the minor group of monsters and demons and restore stability to the Southern Domain. Now, I would like him, the esteemed elder, to meet with all the fellow Daoists.¡± After finishing, Yi Dancheng bowed to the fellow Daoists present and then stepped down. Then, under the watchful eyes of everyone, a majestic cloud floated from behind, and a dignified Daoist Leader arrived at the scene. ¡°I am Qing Guanzi, the Elder Taishang of the Taiping Dao, and I have met all the fellow Daoists.¡± Qing Guanzi¡¯s voice was smooth, but the immense aura of an Earth Immortal True Person was fully unleashed, overpowering the entire assembly. Wherever he passed, the expressions of many messengers present subtly changed, even those of the Human Immortals. The messengers from the Changqing Immortal Sect camp were fine; their sect had been informed beforehand and thus knew of this matter and stayed calm. But the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates, which had not heard the news before and were completely unprepared, were visibly disturbed and profoundly shaken. The sudden revelation of the Taiping Dao¡¯s strength made all their prior preparations useless. Initially, the intimidation by the Five Sects against a regular Human Immortal sect would have posed no problem. But facing an Earth Immortal True Person turned it into a joke. Not only would it be ineffective, but if it really happened, it might directly anger the other party, turning both sides into mortal enemies. After Qing Guanzi appeared, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates found themselves in a dilemma, caught between advancing and retreating. Chapter 1267 - Chapter 1267 Chapter 503 Tit for Tat ?Chapter 1267: Chapter 503: Tit for Tat Chapter 1267: Chapter 503: Tit for Tat ¡°Today, I was invited to come here specifically to secure the peace and stability of the Southern Domain, and to contribute a little of my modest power to prevent demons from wreaking havoc,¡± Qing Guanzi looked around and, seeing that everyone was awed, slowly retracted his aura and smiled, ¡°But I alone cannot attend to the entire Southern Domain. When the time comes, I will inevitably trouble my fellow Daoists to lend Taiping Dao a helping hand,¡± he said. As he spoke, he turned his gaze toward Ouyang Yuan, Zhu Zhenghe, and other envoys from the Southern Domain Immortal Gate. Under the scrutiny of an Earth Immortal True Person, the three hurriedly bowed deeply in respect. Ouyang Yuan even hastily said, ¡°We dare not, we dare not; True Person, just give your orders, and we at Jintai Gate will follow Taiping Dao¡¯s lead.¡± Even Zhu Zhenghe, who harbored his own schemes, did not dare to act rashly and obediently added, ¡°Xuan Gui Sect will do the same.¡± Zuo Yunting also chimed in from the side, ¡°Bihu Palace is no exception,¡± Qing Guanzi chuckled and said, ¡°Then I will have to trouble my fellow Daoists in the future,¡± In just a few exchanges, the dominant position of Taiping Dao had been established. The many observers from other Immortal Sects had varying expressions as they watched this scene unfold. However, most, especially Qing Immortal Sect, were quite pleased to see its success, as evident from the joyful expression on Yang Jihua¡¯s face. But things were even more troubling on the side of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. The sects of Jiuzhou exchanged glances, and the envoy from Purple Cloud Sect took a step forward. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? ¡°Daoist Yan Youyi from Purple Cloud Sect, I have met with True Person,¡± he greeted. After performing the courtesy, Yan Youyi, looking at Qing Guanzi, asked boldly, ¡°May I dare to ask True Person, does Taiping Dao wish to become the ruler of Southern Domain, unify these nine nations, and make all the Immortal Sects of Southern Domain bow before Taiping Dao?¡± Upon these words, everybody¡¯s complexion changed. No one expected that, even after an Earth Immortal had made an appearance for Taiping Dao, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate would still dare to challenge so blatantly. The tone suggested a direct accusation of Taiping Dao being overbearing. However, faced with the challenge, Qing Guanzi merely chuckled and responded, ¡°My friend misunderstands. Our Taiping Dao simply wishes, as a part of Southern Domain, to contribute to maintaining its stability and to the cause of subduing demons and monsters. ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï Isn¡¯t that the duty of us Immortal Sect Cultivators?¡± Yan Youyi sneered, ¡°Just for subduing demons and monsters? Then why demand that these Southern Domain Immortal Sects recognize you as their leader?¡± Qing Guanzi¡¯s expression remained the same, ¡°I merely sought mutual assistance among peers. Where does this talk of recognizing a master come from?¡± Yan Youyi sneered again, then pointing at Ouyang Yuan and others, said, ¡°Mutual assistance among peers? Are you referring to these shameless, opportunistic fellows rushing to cling to power? Their actions and words are nothing but like dogs recognizing a master, eagerly pledging loyalty, resembling nothing less than servants. I see no trace of peers cooperating,¡± This was outright insult. ¡°Arrogant!¡± ¡°Nonsensical and slanderous, stop defaming people!¡± Zhu Zhenghe and Ouyang Yuan, hearing Yan Youyi demean them in such a manner, could not hold back their reproach even though they knew his words held truth, as difficult as they were to hear. If they could endure this, from then on, they would carry the reputation of being mere household dogs for the rest of their lives. How could they face anyone after this spread throughout the entire Changqing Domain and became known by many of their fellow Immortal Sect Cultivators? Thus, even knowing that Yan Youyi was the envoy from Purple Cloud Sect, the strongest among the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, they had no choice but to stand up and confront him, However, for these smaller sects¡¯ True Persons, Yan Youyi hardly took them seriously. Regarding these angry outbursts, it was as if he had heard nothing, his gaze still fixed on Qing Guanzi, waiting for an answer. Qing Guanzi¡¯s face then lost its smile, becoming expressionless, ¡°Friend, you¡¯ve gone too far. We are all Daoists here; why would you belittle and slander one another so? Completely uncalled for and lacking in decorum.¡± Everyone could see that this Earth Immortal True Person from Taiping Dao, faced with repeated provocations from Purple Cloud Sect, was starting to get angry, Yet Yan Youyi remained relentless, merely persisting in his questioning, ¡°True Person, just tell us straight, does Taiping Dao, indeed, intend to become the ruler of the Southern Domain and turn the Southern Domain Immortal Sects into its vassals?¡± Qing Guanzi looked deeply at him and then said, ¡°Certainly not. Taiping Dao only wishes to slay demons and maintain the order of Immortal and human ways. Nothing more,¡± No matter what his true thoughts were, In this situation, how could Qing Guanzi possibly oblige him by openly admitting to such ambitions? Some things, Done privately, are one thing, To bring them out into the open, for everyone to hear, is quite another. Even if Taiping Dao did wish to rule over the Southern Domain, it could not be discussed openly, in public, A necessary facade had to be maintained. Upon hearing this, Yan Youyi clapped his hands, ¡°Good, then I¡¯ll hold True Person to his word. This land of the Southern Domain has no master. Taiping Dao harbors no ambitions to dominate it and won¡¯t coerce the various Immortal Sects into submission. Everyone present can bear witness, If Taiping Dao later makes a move against any Southern Domain Immortal Sect, that would be breaking their promise, admitting to having ambitions to dominate, and proving them to be duplicitous. All of us, as fellow Daoists of the Immortal Sect, are justified in condemning it.¡± True Person, my understanding is correct, right?¡± Qing Guanzi¡¯s expression cooled further, his anger mounting internally, but since the other party had been sticking to the rules, intertwining his arguments with what had been said, Qing Guanzi could not lash out. He only said, ¡°No problem. If there¡¯s nothing else you wish to ask, please return.¡± Seeing that further questioning would likely provoke a confrontation, Yan Youyi, faced with a True Person a Great Realm stronger than himself, did not dare to push too far. Having gained what he wanted, he then bowed and retreated, ¡°I have nothing more, thank you, True Person, for clarifying.¡± Chapter 1268 - Chapter 1268 Chapter 503 Tit for Tat_2 ?Chapter 1268: Chapter 503: Tit for Tat_2 Chapter 1268: Chapter 503: Tit for Tat_2 Once he retreated back into the crowd, Qing Guanzi looked around once more and asked, ¡°Fellow Daoists, are there any further questions? Speak them now, and I shall do my utmost to provide answers.¡± The crowd shook their heads, and no one came forward. The other sects were not part of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and were inevitably in conflict with Taiping Dao for interests. Their own strength was also formidable, so they didn¡¯t fear offending Taiping Dao. They had no grievances with Taiping Dao, and even held goodwill towards this foreign Immortal Sect that was willing to uphold order. Of course, they wouldn¡¯t go out of their way to offend them. Seeing that everyone remained silent, Qing Guanzi nodded, ¡°Since none of the fellow Daoists have any doubts, the celebration shall hereby come to an end. My Taiping Dao has prepared fine wine and a delicious feast to entertain you all. At the same time, a Tao Discussion Conference that will last one month will be held within Mi Yun Mountain, allowing us fellow cultivators to exchange Dao Law and further advance our cultivation together. It is not easy for us to gather, and to convene so many fellow Daoists is even more challenging. Should any Daoist wish to participate, please feel free to stay. Should you encounter any confusion in your cultivation, do not hesitate to seek me out if you don¡¯t mind. If I am capable, I will certainly offer my full assistance in providing answers without reservation. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? That will be all for my words. Fellow Daoists, please follow me,¡± he said. After Qing Guanzi finished speaking, he waved his sleeve, turning into a streak of light, and headed towards another location in the mountains prepared for the banquet. The many messengers hurried to follow. The following banquet was filled with laughter, light songs, and graceful dances, without a hint of displeasure. The many True Persons clinked their glasses, exchanging banter and jest, and the atmosphere immediately grew lively. Even the sects from Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, though they did not mingle much with the others, formed a small circle of their own and enjoyed themselves. When the banquet ended, the Tao Discussion Conference began. Most messengers chose to stay. As Qing Guanzi had said, though we reside in the same domain, many True Persons stay within their own countries and seldom venture out. Even if they leave their countries, they would normally linger around the borders. It could take hundreds or thousands of years for us to meet one another, and some have never seen each other before. In the disrupted and dangerous Changqing Domain, for the sake of their own safety and the preservation of their sect¡¯s inheritance, the frequency of True Persons journeying out has declined significantly compared to ten thousand years ago. An event like today, gathering more than a dozen True Persons and assembling all powers from within the domain, is exceedingly rare. Only a major event like the sudden rise of Taiping Dao, which is on the verge of becoming the overlord of the Southern Domain, could attract so many participants. After this event, another gathering of this magnitude within the Changqing Domain may not happen again for another ten thousand years. This underscores the rarity of this Tao Discussion Conference. Most spend time working in isolation, delving into cultivation within their sects. Who doesn¡¯t have some cultivation doubts they¡¯ve accumulated? Moreover, it¡¯s rare to have an Earth Immortal True Person willing to solve riddles and explain the Dao for the younger generation. Who wouldn¡¯t want to seek advice? Not everyone is like Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, with their abundance of Human Immortals and Earth Immortals to exchange Dao Law and consult about the Great Tao on a regular basis. The True Persons from the smaller immortal sects do not have that kind of resource. With Taiping Dao showing consideration for everyone¡¯s struggles and being willing to organize this event, it is a great opportunity. Such a precious opportunity is not to be missed by anyone. Therefore, the sects from Changqing Immortal Sect and Southern Domain Immortal Gate all chose to stay. Only Jiuzhou Immortal Gate left immediately after the banquet ended, taking the initiative to bid farewell and depart. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? They did not lack such resources. As a branch of the Heavenly Immortals, being from a well-founded family, they did not place much importance on the teachings of a mere Earth Immortal. They had no intention of lingering in the territory of a rival. Qing Guanzi only insisted they stay a while, but seeing their determination to leave, said no more and let them go. He also disliked these undesirable fellows intensely and would rather they leave. Out of sight, out of mind. It was exactly what he had hoped for. However, after the guests had departed, Qing Guanzi and his other two avatars immediately joined Lu Yuan. ¡°Jiuzhou Immortal Gate will not let this matter rest so easily; we must prepare in advance,¡± said the avatar of Qing Guanzi who had clashed with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate throughout the entire event. Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°I am aware of this. The intense reaction of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate today already indicates their unwillingness to accept the situation. The extent of their retaliatory measure is the only thing we do not know. Will they engage us in surreptitious skirmishes and resort to petty schemes? Or will they send out an Earth Immortal to face us in direct competition, and vie for dominion over the Southern Domain with real swords and spears?¡± The messenger from Dan city said, ¡°Given the current status of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, most of their strength is being contained by Changqing Immortal Sect, and they likely cannot spare an Earth Immortal True Person to deal with us. It¡¯s probable they¡¯ll engage in minor disruptions to entangle with us, slowing down Taiping Dao¡¯s control of the Southern Domain. However, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate originates from the Nine Provinces, with profound heritage. Nobody can guarantee they don¡¯t have some hidden trump cards or assassins up their sleeves. It¡¯s not impossible for them to dispatch an Earth Immortal now specifically to take control over the Southern Domain.¡± The Immortal Sects in the Nine Provinces consist of alliances of ascended cultivators stemming from ancient times to the present, nearly seventy thousand years in total. From the ancient times until just before Lu Yuan¡¯s ascension, there were more than twenty known forces of Earth Immortal prowess within the Nine Provinces. In essence, there are more than twenty Tao inheritances of Earth Immortals, including the founders of these Tao lineages and their successors, all of whom have ascended to this Changqing Domain. Although the entire ascension process was spread out over seventy thousand years, conducted in different batches. Chapter 1269 - Chapter 1269 Chapter 503 Tit for Tat_3 ?Chapter 1269: Chapter 503: Tit for Tat_3 Chapter 1269: Chapter 503: Tit for Tat_3 Even so, generation after generation of accumulation has endowed the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects with a foundation that is unimaginable. So if someone told Lu Yuan that another Earth Immortal True Person had appeared within the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects, he would not be surprised at all. Because they indeed have that foundation. At the same time, the entire Southern Domain is a great benefita€¡±an enticing piece of cake. Even Lu Yuan, who is usually cautious, was drawn to jump out and couldn¡¯t help but compete with the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect for it. Not to mention the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects, which have been leaping around for tens of thousands of years. If they were to use such hidden strength for the sake of Southern Domain, it would equally be unsurprising. All this is possible. Che Shidao added, ¡°Not just that. If the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects really decide to confront us directly, who the recently joined Immortal Sects within the Southern Territory would side with is also hard to tell.¡± The three Immortal Sects of Southern Domain, Jintai Gate and Bihu Palace, those two are relatively manageable. Their strength is either weak or they face a direct threat from the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, so the possibility of them defecting is smaller. But Xuan Turtle Mountain, which had its interests stolen by Taiping Dao and has been reluctant and wanting to turn their situation around, is almost certain to rebel. At that time, with them being next to Youxin Country, if they suddenly strike a blow, it would definitely make Lu Yuan¡¯s side extremely miserable. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Lu Yuan nodded, agreeing with these points, ¡°This indeed makes sense, we need to guard against not only the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect in the Southern Domain but also against Xuan Turtle Mountain and other Immortal Sects. We even have to be vigilant against those demons contacting the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect and causing chaos.¡± Now that the Taiping Dao has emerged and made their stance clear, which is to exterminate demons, those demons, who are targeted for elimination, definitely won¡¯t be on the same side as Taiping Dao. Next, these demons have only two options. Either turn around and escape the Southern Domain, going elsewhere to start anew, or stay and fight to the death against Taiping Dao. If the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects don¡¯t interfere in the affairs of the Southern Domain, then those demons, in order to survive, would definitely choose the first option. But if the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects do intervene, Having a powerful external force restraining Taiping Dao, what those demons would do becomes hard to predict. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Seeing the enemy generously, the odds are that they would stay, cooperating with the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects to disrupt Taiping Dao¡¯s rear. So don¡¯t be fooled by the current state where the Taiping Dao is establishing their sect in Changqing Domain and all the local Immortal Sects are coming to congratulate them, their prestige seemingly unrivaled. But behind the glory, there lies a great crisis. However, regarding these, Lu Yuan had already anticipated them and was prepared to deal with them. To wear the crown, one must bear its weight. In the world, there are no instances of only reaping the benefits without paying the price. If Taiping Dao is truly aiming to conquer the entire Southern Domain, naturally they have to face the various hardships and difficulties that will emerge in the process. Only by overcoming them one by one can they firmly secure their position. ¡°So in the coming days, we mainly have two things to do,¡± Lu Yuan looked at several of his avatars and made a plan, ¡°First, we should connect more with Jintai Gate, Bihu Palace, and such friendly Immortal Sects that we can pull to our side. They are close to our Taiping Dao, and their strength is not weak, collectively they have three Human Immortals. Getting their help, even if they cannot help us confront the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects, but assisting us in stabilizing the situation in the Southern Domain, and balancing out Xuan Turtle Mountain and those demon forces, is still doable. This is a force that we cannot afford to lose. Secondly, we on our side need to enhance our defenses, increase our strength as much as possible, and practice ¡®Inner Strength¡¯ well. Hardy iron is forged of oneself. Outsiders are ultimately unreliable, confronting the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, we still have to depend on ourselves. Over there at Yi Dancheng, the plan to take over Qingyang Country can be launched immediately. No time should be lost. While the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects have not reacted yet, we should first secure this country as our western barrier against the invasion of the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects. Qing Guanzi, after this Tao Discussion Conference, take a trip to the Great Eye Kingdom. If that Six-eyed Lord is still stubbornly resistant and waiting for death in Ji Mu City, then remove him while you¡¯re at it. Then, secure this country to provide central support for both flanks. We Taiping Dao will first secure the land of these three nations, connecting Qingyang, Damu, and Youxin into one whole, allowing each country to be guarded by an Immortal, creating a solid fortress. In this way, even if the enemy invades on a large scale, we can handle it with ease. If only we could endure the initial difficult two or three decades, then once Heavenly Son¡¯s Golden Blade also achieves the Human Dao Fruit, Taiping Dao¡¯s manpower will be much more ample, not as stretched as it currently is. This Southern Domain will ultimately be ours.¡± ¡°Yes,¡± All three avatars nodded after listening to the plan. ¡­ Meanwhile, on the other side. After leaving Mi Yun Mountain, the five True Persons of the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect were on their way back to the Western Domain when they also started a discussion. ¡°Taiping Dao must not be left alone!¡± On the flying Magical Artifact, several True Persons were each seated in meditation, and Yan Youyi took the initiative to speak, ¡°With an Earth Immortal True Person among them and two Late-stage Human Immortal True Persons as their main arms, their strength is not much less than our Purple Cloud Sect. If we allow them to stabilize in the Southern Domain and comfortably subdue the local three Immortal Sects, I fear that within a century, a colossal force will rise in the Southern Domain. Given the current close relationship between Taiping Dao and the Qing Immortal Sect, once the other side rises, they will surely become a great enemy to us. Currently, our Jiuzhou Immortal Sects, in the Northern and Central Domains, are struggling immensely just to fend off the Qing Immortal Sect. If another formidable enemy emerges in the Southern Domain at this time, threatening our flanks, the barely maintainable situation we now hold might immediately become unbalanced, dominated by the Qing Immortal Sect and Taiping Dao across the Changqing Domain. If so, the achievements of my ten thousand years of effort would flow eastward in a single moment, turning into nothing. This scenario must not be allowed to occur. Taiping Dao must not be left alone. Even if we cannot annihilate them, we cannot let them stabilize their footing in the Southern Domain; they must be driven out.¡± The other True Persons, upon hearing this, all had stern expressions, deeply agreeing. Chapter 1270 - Chapter 1270 Chapter 504 Nine Veins Dao Union ?Chapter 1270: Chapter 504: Nine Veins Dao Union Chapter 1270: Chapter 504: Nine Veins Dao Union The sudden entry of Taiping Dao truly caught Jiuzhou Immortal Gate off guard. Already in a disadvantaged position in the power struggle within Changqing Domain, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was struggling. Although they had formidable strength, with three Earth Immortals and twelve Human Immortalsa€¡±basically the foundation of a Heavenly Immortal sect, far surpassing ordinary Earth Immortal Sectsa€¡±their strength was still inferior compared to a true Heavenly Immortal Sect. Evergreen Immortal Sect had four Earth Immortals and seventeen Human Immortals. In terms of sheer strength, they were one notch stronger than Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. If it were not for the fact that among the three Earth Immortals of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, there was a late-stage Earth Immortal whose strength surpassed that of average Earth Immortals, bearing this flag of power, they would have been defeated in this struggle long ago. But even so, Evergreen Immortal Sect had only recently started to decline from its peak, and with the foundation of a Heavenly Immortal sect, they were still pressing Jiuzhou Immortal Gate hard. Forcing them to be confined solely to the Western Domain. After waiting for tens of thousands of years, they finally saw the collapse of Evergreen Immortal Sect¡¯s rule in the Southern Domain, giving Jiuzhou Immortal Gate a new direction for expansion and a glimmer of hope to break the status quo. Then Taiping Dao arrived. Not only did they devour the results of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s millennia of efforts, but they also blocked the gate, confining Jiuzhou Immortal Gate back to the cage of the Western Domain. They didn¡¯t just block their path but also showed hostility, starting to threaten from behind their arch-enemy, Evergreen Immortal Sect, baring their teeth as if ready to take a bite. Tell me, Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Obviously, you couldn¡¯t just swallow this affront. ¡°Taiping Dao is indeed a serious threat, yet they have Earth Immortal True Persons and two Human Immortals among their ranks, and now they¡¯ve even integrated the Southern Domain Immortal Gate. Their strength is not to be underestimated,¡± After listening to Yan Youyi, a True Person from Danding Sect, Xiang Huizhou said, ¡°Currently at Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Master Meng from our sect is stationed in the center of the domain, coordinating the warfare of the Three Nations to resist the two Earth Immortal True Persons from Evergreen Immortal Sect. Master Wang from Azure Dragon Sect is stationed in the Northern Border, shielding the Northern Domain. Master Ding from Haiyun Pavilion also needs to stay in the Western Domain to ensure the safety of our rear. All three Earth Immortal True Persons are indispensable in their current roles. Even if we could mobilize three or five Human Immortals, they are no match for Taiping Dao, which has an Earth Immortal. Driving them away is easier said than done.¡± Among the three Earth Immortal True Persons from Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, the strongest is undoubtedly Master Meng Jianshan from Purple Cloud Sect. This True Person has the strongest strength, having reached the late-stage of Earth Immortal, and is known alongside Changqing Immortal Yao Baojuan as one of the Changqing Immortals, regarded as having the stature of a Heavenly Immortal. Therefore, the various Immortal Gates of Jiuzhou all respect Master Meng as their leader, following his commands. The other two are Master Wang Chengfeng from Azure Dragon Sect and Master Ding Wanxuan from Haiyun Pavilion. Despite their early Earth Immortal cultivation, both True Persons have ordinary strength for their realm and are not particularly strong. But with the strength of Earth Immortals, they are honored alongside Master Meng as the ¡°Three True Ones of Jiuzhou,¡± signifying their profound magic power. But as Xiang Huizhou expressed, each of these three Earth Immortal True Persons is responsible for a different aspect of strategy, facing multiple enemies simultaneously, leaving them no room to address additional threats elsewhere. Dealing with Taiping Dao, they could only send some Human Immortals. Yet what use could a few Human Immortals be against Qing Guanzi of Taiping Dao? It would be nothing but a futile effort. Yan Youyi gritted his teeth and said, ¡°For all these years, our resistance against Evergreen Immortal Sect wasn¡¯t just relying on the power of our five gates. Other factions of Jiuzhou also offered their support. Now, we finally have the opportunity to seize the Southern Domain, defeat Evergreen Immortal Sect, and restore the authentic rule of Jiuzhou. But Taiping Dao has interfered, brutally cutting off this hope. How can we endure such a grave injustice? Upon our return, we can write to the three True Persons, asking them to invite other Jiuzhou factions to come to our aid. Our five gates have no strength left to confront Taiping Dao, but the other Jiuzhou factions might not be in the same situation. As long as we can persuade these allies to act, taking on Taiping Dao should not be a difficult task.¡± ¡°Ask for help?¡± True Person Duan Ming from Haiyun Pavilion looked slightly moved, hesitatingly said, ¡°That is indeed a good idea, but other Jiuzhou factions have already rebuilt their Mountain Gates in other domains and aren¡¯t keen to get involved in our restoration efforts. In past years, they only helped us to resist Evergreen Immortal Sect out of kinship, for we stem from the same realm. Their help was limited to preserving the Western Domain to prevent the annihilation of our lineages. To ask them to help us expand our territory and confront another Earth Immortal Sect, they would probably be reluctant.¡± Giant Spirit Sect¡¯s True Person Xiao Yizhi also nodded in agreement, ¡°We and the other Jiuzhou Immortal Sects may share a common origin, but we¡¯ve been separated for tens of thousands of years. By now, all that¡¯s left is a mere connection through incense offerings. Indeed, they¡¯re not necessarily willing to help us.¡± These True Persons were referring to the other ascended Jiuzhou Immortal Sects. Since their connection with the Immortal Realm was severed in ancient times, over seventy thousand years, dozens of Earth Immortals ascended from Jiuzhou, founding more than twenty distinct dao lineages in the Immortal Realm. Over tens of thousands of years, these ascended Earth Immortals have long since perished. Their legacies continued, yet many have also been extinguished. However, even with those gone, there are still quite a few that have survived. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Put together haphazardly, there are still nine sects that match the number of the Nine Spirits. Thus, these nine lineages are regarded by outsiders in the Immortal Realm as the new sprouts of the Nine Spirits Sect, the successors to the once-extinct Heavenly Immortal Sect, reviving its glory. Chapter 1271 - Chapter 1271 Chapter 504 Nine Veins Dao Union_2 ?Chapter 1271: Chapter 504 Nine Veins Dao Union_2 Chapter 1271: Chapter 504 Nine Veins Dao Union_2 Among the nine new branches, many have acknowledged this view and taken it upon themselves to restore the Nine Spirits Sect¡¯s teachings, tirelessly working towards this goal. Representing this group are, naturally, the five Immortal Sects that have openly rebelled within the Changqing Domaina€¡±Giant Spirit Sect, Purple Cloud Sect, Azure Dragon Sect, Danding Sect, and Haiyun Pavilion. After the fall of Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s Great True Person, they almost immediately returned to the Changqing Domain and engaged Changqing Immortal Sect in a fiercely active confrontation. However, just as some wish to revive the grand cause of their ancestors, naturally there are others who consider it unrelated to themselves, not wishing to recognize an ancestor who has been dead for seventy thousand years. The other four remaining Jiuzhou Immortal Gatesa€¡±Jade Toad Path, Radiant Emperor Dynasty, Wind and Thunder Path, and Heavenly River Secta€¡±took little interest in the revival of the Nine Spirits Sect. The Radiant Emperor Dynasty didn¡¯t even consider themselves part of the Nine Spirits Sect¡¯s lineage. The reason is simple. As the first Emperor of Jiuzhou, after Ascension, the Dynasty established by Emperor Hua Guang is famous for cultivating the Fortune Dao, pursuing a path different from all orthodox Jiuzhou Immortal Methods, a difference visible to the naked eye. If the paths are divergent, one cannot be considered part of the Nine Spirits Sect¡¯s lineage. Even back in the Jiuzhou Boundary, during the ancient times, cultivators of the Fortune Dao and those of the orthodox Immortal Method seldom got along, with both sides covertly opposing each other and often coming to blows. The two factions were simply not part of the same camp. Therefore, the Radiant Emperor Dynasty paid no heed to the affairs of the Nine Spirits Sect, or even those of the Changqing Domain. Upon Ascension to the Immortal Realm and learning the details here, Emperor Hua Guang chose to far flee across the sea, settling in a location two to three Boundary Domains away from the Changqing Domain, where he claimed a territory for himself, founded a new Immortal Dynasty, and has continued its legacy to this day. It became one of the well-known Immortal Dynasties in the Immortal Realm. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã? The remaining three, although not to the extreme of the Radiant Emperor Dynasty, only Heavenly River Sect considered itself a branch of the Nine Spirits lineage. In years past, when assisting these five Immortal Sects with their restoration, it was the Heavenly River Sect that contributed the most, on several occasions committing their forces to the battlefields of the Changqing Domain. Even now, there are still hundreds of disciples from the Heavenly River Sect active on the northern and central battlefields of the domain. This level of initiative was not much less than that of the five Immortal Sects themselves. The Jade Toad Path and Wind and Thunder Path, on the other hand, merely recognized themselves as Jiuzhou Immortal Gates, sharing merely a hint of kinship with the Nine Spirits Sect but hardly more than a familial relationship. They did not see themselves as one and the same, nor did they claim to be descendants of the Nine Spirits Sect. So, if you were to say they were part of the Nine Spirits Sect¡¯s lineage, these two Sects would disagree; but if you called them Jiuzhou Immortal Gates, they would happily concur. Therefore, out of a sentiment of camaraderie as fellow Jiuzhou Immortal Gates, the Jade Toad Path and Wind and Thunder Path didn¡¯t mind lending a hand. But to expect them to provide support as generously as Heavenly River Secta€¡±well, that was out of the question. It was merely a matter of neighborly fellowship. If you¡¯re in trouble, lending a hand is no issue. But to go beyond that, worrying about your needs and even your future developmenta€¡±that¡¯s asking too much. We¡¯re not your parents; you can¡¯t expect that much. This was also why Duan Ming and Xiao Yizhi were not very optimistic about Yan Youyi¡¯s proposal to seek aid from the other Jiuzhou lineages. In the past, when they had just returned home ready to restore the Nine Spirits Sect, conditions were most dire. The Purple Cloud Sect and other Jiuzhou Immortal Gates faced the danger of obliteration on several occasions. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï At that time, the Winds and Thunder Path, and other sects that did not wish to return, pinched their noses and reluctantly offered their strong support out of old neighborhood ties and various entangled interests. Even the Radiant Emperor Dynasty, upon hearing the news, symbolically dispatched forces to take part in the battle, providing some support out of neighborly consideration. It was precisely because of help from the other four Immortal Gates that Purple Cloud Sect and the rest managed to pull off the feat of directly facing off against a Heavenly Immortal Sect and forcibly taking over one quarter of a Great Domain¡¯s territory. It¡¯s not that the Changqing Immortal Sect was too weak; the enemy was just too strong. What they were facing was akin to nine powerful Immortal Sects with the heritage of Earth Immortals banding together to invade. One dominant power in the Great Domain, facing the war triggered by nine major forces, whoever it might be would be overwhelmed, and retreat was only to be expected. But things were no longer as they were ten thousand years ago. The Jiuzhou Immortal Gates had now firmly established themselves in the Western Domain and even had spare strength to expand further. Changqing Immortal Sect no longer possessed the strength and opportunity to annihilate the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates. And the other forces, having fought a war for ten thousand years, were also exhausted. It even began to affect the stability of their core territories. So over the past few thousand years, the Heavenly River Sect has scaled back the number of disciples it sends to the battlefield in the Changqing Domain; the Wind and Thunder Path and Jade Toad Path began to only provide supply support, and the Radiant Emperor Dynasty once again cut off contact. The four Immortal Gates almost unanimously reduced their support for sects like the Purple Cloud Sect. Everyone was tired of the fighting, unable to continue. In such circumstances, it was unrealistic to expect them to dispatch Earth Immortal True Persons to the Changqing Domain to help the Purple Cloud Sect in a war against a Great Immortal Gate. It was exceedingly difficult. If the Purple Cloud Sect and the others were in existential crisis, with the Changqing Immortal Sect and the Taiping Dao advancing into the Western Domain, threatening the very survival of the Jiuzhou lineage, perhaps then, it might be possible to persuade the others. But currently, there is evidently no such situation; the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates are still as stable as ever, thus naturally there is no reason to invoke assistance from them. Chapter 1272 - Chapter 1272 Chapter 504 Nine Veins Dao Union_3 ?Chapter 1272: Chapter 504 Nine Veins Dao Union_3 Chapter 1272: Chapter 504 Nine Veins Dao Union_3 Yet despite these concerns, Yan Youyi remained confident and undeterred, ¡°Convincing the Wind and Thunder Path and the Jade Toad Tao is indeed difficult, and I do not pin my hopes on them. What I¡¯m referring to is the Heavenly River Sect.¡± Xiao Yizhi frowned, ¡°But the Heavenly River Sect, like our Giant Spirit Sect, only has Human Immortals and no Earth Immortal True Person. Even if we could persuade them to join us, we would only gain two or three True Persons at most. It still wouldn¡¯t change the overall situation.¡± Among the other four Immortal Sects in the Nine Provinces. The Radiant Emperor Dynasty is the strongest, occupying a Great Domain with thirteen nations, and relying on the fast-track methods of the Fortune Dao, they¡¯ve managed to accumulate three Earth Immortals through sheer force of numbers. The Great Domain where the dynasty now resides, like the Changqing Domain, lacks a Great True Person to suppress it, and has fallen into an era of chaos and upheaval. Therefore, the Radiant Emperor Dynasty is actively striving to seize control of a Great Domain and cultivate a Heavenly Flower Great Real Person. This is also why they are not particularly interested in the war over here in the Changqing Domain. Why bother with yours when I have my own troubles? Moreover, compared to the Immortal Sect of the Nine Provinces in the Changqing Domain, the Radiant Emperor Dynasty located in another Great Domain clearly has a greater advantage and more opportunities for success. There is even less reason for them to abandon their main pursuit for a branch matter, to fight over the so-called ancestral grounds in their homeland. As for the other three Immortal Sects, the Heavenly River Sect, although the most active, lost their Earth Flower True Man in a major battle against the Changqing Immortal Sect three thousand years ago. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï He was slain by the enemy and died on the battlefield. Following that, the influence of the Heavenly River Sect plummeted. Having lost the protection of the Earth Flower True Man, they faced numerous challengers in their own Great Domain, and their position was at risk of decline. Yet the Immortal Sects of the Nine Provinces were actively protecting this staunch ally. After the fall of the Heavenly River Sect¡¯s Earth Flower True Man, several True Persons from the Nine Provinces Sects consecutively took turns standing in support of the Heavenly River Sect. Including Master Ding Wanxuan from the Haiyun Pavilion, this Earth Immortal went so far as to make frequent visits to the Heavenly River Sect to back them up. After several battles, the surrounding forces finally were made aware that the Immortal Sects of the Nine Provinces were unified, and even without an Earth Immortal True Person, the Heavenly River Sect still had strong support behind them. Thus, this dispute finally began to subside over the past thousand years. Next is the Wind and Thunder Path. The Wind and Thunder Path is an ancient grand sect, with even Lu Yuan having some connections to it. The first Immortal teaching he obtained, the Five Thunder Book, which was a family heritage passed down by his good friend Sun Siwen, came from this Wind and Thunder Path. Therefore, Lu Yuan can be said to have inherited some of the Tao of the Wind and Thunder Path. However, he only cultivated the Five Thunder Book for two or three years in the beginning. Latterly, due to the harsh conditions in the Nine Provinces, after acquiring the Way of Control Pneuma, he switched to cultivating the Taiping Dao Book directly, leaving the Five Thunder Book completely behind. But Sun Siwen¡¯s ancestor, Sun Qingyi, ascended to the Immortal Realm with the Purple Cloud Taoist Master through the Northern Dark City twelve hundred years ago. By then, he had already achieved the cultivation of Gathering Two Qi. Whether he succeeded in becoming immortal and whether he is still alive is unknown. If he is alive, he would likely have joined the Wind and Thunder Path. The topic has strayed somewhat. Getting back to the main point, with the Wind and Thunder Path¡¯s status as an ancient grand sect and having survived to the present, it naturally possesses considerable strength. Their ranks include one Earth Immortal and three Human Immortals, and they control six small nations, thus fitting the profile of a grand Immortal Sect. The other sect, the Jade Toad Tao, is significantly weaker, with only four Human Immortals and control over three small nations. It can only be said that they have the legacy of an Earth Immortal, but the chances of producing an Earth Flower True Person are slim. Therefore, among the other four Immortal Sects, the Radiant Emperor Dynasty is too distant and too preoccupied to care about them. The Heavenly River Sect, which has the best relationship with them, is also struggling to look after itself. The Jade Toad Tao is too distant and lacks the capability to help. The only capable sect, the Wind and Thunder Path, learning from what happened to the Heavenly River Sect, dares not to send out an Earth Immortal True Person to lightly involve themselves in the disputes of the major Immortal Sects. This is also the reason for the confusion of Xiao Yizhi and his group. Those who can help don¡¯t want to, and those who want to can¡¯t. Now, with Yan Youyi bringing up the Heavenly River Sect, does he truly not understand the problem? Unless¡­ Xiao Yizhi and the others thought of something, looking towards Yan Youyi with a mix of excitement and surprise. Seeing that the group had guessed the truth, Yan Youyi stopped being mysterious and laughed, ¡°My fellow Dao friends are right. The Heavenly River Sect¡¯s Huang Yuanxiu actually broke through his realm and condensed the Earth Flower Dao Fruit thirty years ago. However, considering the advantage of keeping a hidden card, and since Master Huang had just broken through the Great Realm and his strength was not yet stable, he decided to keep the news under wraps for safety reasons. This is critical information I received during our mission to the Southern Domain. Our School Leader Meng disclosed it to me so I would be well-informed and could act accordingly. That is also why I was so firm and fearless when facing Qing Guanzi previously. And why I now propose to expel Taiping Dao from our land. Because we truly have the strength to do so.¡± Xiang Huizhou from the Danding Sect expressed joyfully, ¡°So that¡¯s how it is, that¡¯s how it is. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï It¡¯s about time. Given the foundation of the Heavenly River Sect and three thousand years, it¡¯s indeed time for an Earth Flower True Person to emerge.¡± As an original Earth Immortal Sect, the Heavenly River Sect controlled the territories of four nations in their Great Domain, originally consisting of five Human Immortal True Persons. Now that one of these True Persons has become an Earth Flower, they have immediately regained the structure of one Earth Immortal and four Human Immortals within the ranks of the great Immortals. Their strength has almost undergone a qualitative change. For the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, which has always had good relations with the Heavenly River Sect, this is undoubtedly thrilling news. Duan Ming also happily remarked, ¡°Master Huang¡¯s condensation of the Earth Flower is truly a great fortune for us. With him, even if he¡¯s not strong enough to take to the battlefield right now due to his recent breakthrough and hence unable to confront Qing Guanzi of the Taiping Dao face to face, he could replace Master Ding to preside over the Western Domain, leading the followers of the Heavenly River Sect to protect our rear. Meanwhile, Master Ding can be freed up to lead our forces southward to expel the Taiping Dao from this land. The pressing crisis of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate would be resolved in an instant. What a stroke of luck! Heaven truly blesses the Nine Provinces!¡± Upon hearing this, Xiao Yizhi and the others all showed expressions of approval. Chapter 1273 - Chapter 1273 Chapter 505 Two Sects Cooperate in Defense ?Chapter 1273: Chapter 505: Two Sects Cooperate in Defense Chapter 1273: Chapter 505: Two Sects Cooperate in Defense ¡°Since Master Huang has become an Earth Flower, the matters in the Southern Domain should no longer be a major issue.¡± After feeling relieved, Xiao Yizhi no longer opposed or resisted expelling Taiping Dao. Instead, he actively said, ¡°After we return, we will immediately report to the leaders of our sects and request their assistance in inviting Master Huang. We strive to prepare for the expulsion of Taiping Dao within the next few years.¡± ¡°Good!¡± ¡°Exactly!¡± ¡°Let¡¯s do it this way.¡± The True Persons all nodded in agreement to this proposal. Finally, Yan Youyi made a final decision, ¡°In that case, let us each return to our sects and swiftly handle this matter.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± The True Persons each nodded, then with a flick of their sleeves, turned into several streaks of light, heading towards their respective Immortal Sects. With their return, the war preparations against Taiping Dao by the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect began in earnest from this moment. A great war engulfing the Southern Domain was brewing. ¡­ Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï The departure of the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect from the conference organized by the Master of Taiping Dao added a noticeable gloom. Many could discern the dissatisfaction harbored by the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect. The conflict of interests over the sovereignty of the Southern Domain between the two factions was palpable to everyone. Many could sense that a great battle for the Southern Domain might not be far off. Some looked forward to it, while others were worried, and yet others were indifferent. However, none of them openly expressed their feelings. Aside from the few Immortal Sects in the Southern Domain, everyone else was content to immerse themselves in the Tao Discussion Conference, absorbing whatever they could for their cultivation. The saying goes: ¡®If it¡¯s none of your concern, don¡¯t get involved.¡¯ That is exactly what was happening here. However, the Taiping Dao side could not possibly pretend nothing had happened. After sending away the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, under Lu Yuan¡¯s signal, Yi Dancheng immediately turned to consult with Yang Jihua on this matter. ¡°Friend Yang, seeing the attitude of the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, it seems they are quite displeased with our Taiping Dao taking over the Southern Domain,¡± Yi Dancheng said as the two met over tea and sat down. ¡°Those remnants of the Nine Spirits, each one rampant and debauched, greedy and unrestrained, are naturally of such character. Many Immortal Sects of the Western Domain have been devoured by them, disappearing from this world one by one. Now they have set their sights on the Southern Domain, wanting to annex this land, even at the cost of invoking demons, devoid of any moral bottom line.¡± ¡°As a follower of the righteous path, you lead your sect in upholding justice, subduing demons, and thwarting their invasion hopes.¡± As a disciple of Qing Immortal Sect, characteristically, Yang Jihua had a poor impression of the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, constantly referring to them as nefarious demons. At this time, Yi Dancheng, similarly an adversary with conflicting interests, nodded in agreement, ¡°You¡¯re right, friend. Those from the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect are all extremely greedy and act cruelly, certainly not easy people to deal with.¡± With a sigh, he continued, looking troubled, ¡°This time, by blocking their path, I fear that these Jiuzhou Immortal Sects will not rest easy. Seeing their hurried departure and harbored resentment, I¡¯m afraid they¡¯re gearing up for a major battle upon returning. Taiping Dao, being isolated and weak, faces the massive alliance of Jiuzhou and is indeed struggling to cope.¡± As Yang Jihua understood the implications of his words, he immediately assured, ¡°Friend, rest assured. Should the remnants of Nine Spirits dare to march into the Southern Domain against overwhelming public sentiment, as the master of Qing, our sect will certainly not stand by idly and will come to your aid.¡± Yi Dancheng shook his head, explaining seriously, ¡°Friend, you misunderstand my meaning. I don¡¯t mean for your sect to assist after the war breaks out. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Would it be possible for your sect to deploy a few True Persons now to stay in the Southern Domain and help with the defense?¡± ¡°This¡­¡± Hearing the request, Yang Jihua immediately showed a troubled expression, ¡°Friend Yi, as you know, my sect also faces disputes in the Central and Northern Domains.¡± ¡°Moreover, there are many unstable sects in our hinterland that require a show of force.¡± ¡°Thus, we even had to give up this Southern Domain.¡± ¡°We truly lack manpower.¡± This was actually quite reasonable. If Qing Immortal Sect had sufficient manpower, why would they give up such a promising land as the Southern Domain and hand it over to Taiping Dao? Did they not want this lucrative territory? Now that Taiping Dao was asking them to send a few True Persons, who does the Southern Domain really belong to, Taiping Dao or Qing Immortal Sect? Qing Immortal Sect supported Taiping Dao initially to pull an ally in the south, then leverage that ally¡¯s strength to deter Jiuzhou Immortal Sect. But if everything is done by themselves, then what is the purpose of Taiping Dao? This was inherently a contradiction. However, facing Yang Jihua¡¯s firm refusal, Yi Dancheng did not give up but continued, ¡°I understand that your sect¡¯s position is also tough, but stationing personnel permanently in the Southern Domain can also be greatly beneficial for your sect. ¡°By sending people to boost the strength of the Southern Domain, and joining forces with Taiping Dao, it will surely increase the pressure on Jiuzhou Immortal Sect¡¯s Southern Territory, restricting their power more extensively.¡± ¡°The more their forces are tied up here, the less they can spare for the Central and Northern battlefields.¡± ¡°This can alleviate the pressure on your sect in the other two battlefields.¡± ¡°Moreover, even though we, Taiping Dao, have nominally taken over Jintai Gate, Bihu Palace, and Xuan Turtle Mountain, three local Immortal Sects.¡± ¡°We are an external sect here and have not been established for long, and our interactions with the local sects are not deep, lacking much affection.¡± Chapter 1274 - Chapter 1274 Chapter 505 Two Sects Defend Together_2 ?Chapter 1274: Chapter 505 Two Sects Defend Together_2 Chapter 1274: Chapter 505 Two Sects Defend Together_2 Many people harbored dissatisfaction in their hearts. If the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate truly attacked, with their foundation and influence cultivated over tens of thousands of years, it¡¯s likely they could rally overwhelming support. Not only the local Immortal Sects, but even the long-rampant demons in the Southern Domain might emerge to respond. At that time, seeing enemies everywhere, how could we with only our single family¡¯s strength possibly maintain control? ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? At that point, let alone keeping hold of the Southern Domain, even preserving Mi Yun Mountain would be difficult. Therefore, to guard the Southern Domain with only our own family¡¯s strength is impossible. We must have an ally who is esteemed and influential in the Southern Domain, has a solid foundation there, and maintains profound connections with the local Immortal Sects, to stand by us and assist if we are to have any chance of defense. Looking over the entire Changqing Domain, the only person with such prestige is the Qing Immortal Sect. It¡¯s not that I am unwise; it¡¯s just that, except for the Qing Immortal Sect, I have to seek help from fellow daoists.¡± Yi Dancheng spoke earnestly and sincerely. Although powers like Jintai Gate have already started moving towards aligning themselves with the Taiping Dao, expressing their loyalty, that is solely the measure of their loyalty under the current circumstances. Now that the Taiping Dao is powerful, Jintai Gate has chosen to become its vassal. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï But if Jiuzhou Immortal Gate attacks, bringing greater force, how Jintai Gate would choose is hard to predict. Yes. Jiuzhou Immortal Gate watches Jintai Gate with covetous eyes, always thinking of annexing the sect. Even if they wanted to annex Jintai Gate, following due processes would still take at least a thousand years. But if they fiercely resisted and openly opposed the other party, the battlefield is merciless; a few magical duel encounters could result in the death of a couple of True Persons from Jintai Gate, causing the sect to immediately decline. It could get destroyed within a century. This is the sorrow of small sects. Lacking autonomy, lacking choices, all that remains is survival. Whoever could help them survive longer, they would support. Right now, compared to Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Taiping Dao promises a longer survival for Jintai Gate, so they have become little brothers to Taiping Dao. But, one day, if following Taiping Dao meant surviving for a shorter time than following Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, they would definitely switch to Jiuzhou Immortal Gate right away. This is precisely because Lu Yuan saw through this point, he never thought of trusting the loyalty of these local Immortal Sects of the Southern Domain. In such morally declined turbulent times, affection and loyalty are far too intangible. Nowhere near as substantial as power and interests. This is also why Yi Dancheng now insists on having the Qing Immortal Sect dispatch a True Person to be stationed in the Southern Domain permanently. Firstly, naturally, it is to bolster the strength on his side, to deter those with second thoughts from causing trouble. Secondly, it is to declare to them that with the backing of the Qing Immortal Sect, compared to Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, our side possesses greater strength. If you dare rebel, think carefully if you can withstand the consequences. Thirdly, it¡¯s because of the foundational ties the Qing Immortal Sect has managed within the Evergreen Domain over tens of thousands of years. Only by pulling in the Qing Immortal Sect and meeting the three conditions mentioned above can Taiping Dao hope to have a longstanding foothold in the Southern Domain region and withstand the pressure from Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. After hearing Yi Dancheng¡¯s reasoning, Yang Jihua also looked hesitant, obviously persuaded quite a bit, but still shook his head and said, ¡°What you say makes sense, but my sect is also struggling, with remnants of Nine Spirits externally and various factions internally ready to act; we truly cannot spare additional strength to help.¡± He could certainly hear that the other party spoke sensibly. But permanently deploying True Persons from the Qing Immortal Sect was not so easy. The Qing Immortal Sect had only four Earth Immortals and seventeen Human Immortals. Of these, two Earth Immortals were tied up in the central and northern battlefields, one needed to oversee the Eastern Territory. The headquarters at Mountain Gate also required an Earth Immortal positioned to coordinate responses from all directions. All four Earth Immortal True Persons had their duties and could not remove themselves. Meanwhile, the Qing Immortal Sect directly controls the core territories in the north, center, and east, which encompass thirteen nations. In each of these nations, at least one Human Immortal must be stationed to ensure stable borders. This occupies thirteen Human Immortals. Beyond the core territories, there are nine more nations controlled by vassal sects of the Qing Immortal Sect. Among these vassal sects, there are those fiercely loyal, those ambitiously aspiring, those with hidden agendas, and even those blatantly rebellious. The Qing Immortal Sect must also dispatch personnel to constantly patrol these areas, to solidify their rule. This requires at least two more Human Immortals. The remaining two Human Immortals are mobile forces, like the Earth Immortal stationed at the sect headquarters, ready to respond to emergencies anywhere. Under such conditions, they naturally couldn¡¯t be easily moved. Taiping Dao¡¯s wish for the Qing Immortal Sect to send a few Human Immortals to reside long-term can only draw upon these last two free Human Immortals. But if these were to be deployed, and any turbulence requiring urgent control thereafter emerged within the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s governed regions, there would be no extra manpower available. This is very risky. Once disturbances in one place spread, they could rapidly infect surrounding nations like a virus. Previously, the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s control over the Southern Domain was very stable. Why then did it collapse to the current state? Wasn¡¯t it because during the previous major battle with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, too many were killed or injured, leaving no mobile forces? Eventually, when demons invaded, the Qing Immortal Sect lacked the power to pacify them, unable to dispatch aid. This led to the area gradually becoming overrun by demons, with the local sects becoming restless and the situation becoming uncontrollable. Chapter 1275 - Chapter 1275 Chapter 505 Two Sects Defend Together_3 ?Chapter 1275: Chapter 505 Two Sects Defend Together_3 Chapter 1275: Chapter 505 Two Sects Defend Together_3 The lesson from the past is right before our eyes. Of course, Changqing Immortal Sect wouldn¡¯t dare to risk losing a large region again by employing such a risky tactic. Of course, there are also those who ask, since there are not enough movable True Persons, why not withdraw the True Persons who are garrisoning the various nations? This is certainly possible. In fact, Changqing Immortal Sect had already begun to recall the Garrison True Persons from the various nations. This necessitates a discussion of the wartime system that Changqing Immortal Sect has implemented to deal with the long-term war with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. As mentioned before, the territories currently controlled by Changqing Domain are concentrated in three areas: the Northern Domain, Central Region, and Eastern Territory, comprising a total of twenty-one nations. There are nine nations each in the Northern Domain and Eastern Territory, while the Central Region only has three. However, since it is the main battlefield, it bears the greatest pressure. Thus, to alleviate the pressure on the front lines of the various battle zones and to integrate the forces of the different regions, Changqing Immortal Sect implemented a system where one Earth Immortal leads, responsible for the warfare in one region, while also integrating all the forces there. That is to say, for the territory of the Northern Domain, an Earth Immortal is first dispatched to set up a battle zone there. Within the battle zone, under its jurisdiction are the nine nations of the Northern Domain, and all the Immortal Sects there, including the Changqing Branches and affiliated sects, are subordinated to the battle zone and are commanded by that Earth Immortal. Therefore, both theoretically and practically, the Garrison Immortals of Changqing Immortal Sect in the Northern Domain battle zone are already on the front lines, ready to enter the battlefield at any moment. They¡¯re already in the battle zone, what more could you want from them? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï As for the Central Region battle zonea€¡±the main battlefielda€¡±it only governs three nations and,certainly,cannot cope with the invasion from Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, even with an Earth Immortal stationed there. Therefore, to strengthen the main battlefield¡¯s power, Changqing Immortal Sect also brought the nine nations of the Eastern Territory under the jurisdiction of the Central Region battle zone. The Central Region battle zone thus has twelve nations under its jurisdiction. The Garrison Immortals and affiliated Immortal Sects within these nations all fall under the command of the Earth Immortal in charge of the zone and are always prepared to enter the battlefield. Therefore, while Changqing Immortal Sect appears to control three regions, in reality, all three are battle zones without a single peaceful area. Although it is not impossible to withdraw a True Person from these battle zones, it would undoubtedly weaken their strength and impact the frontline war against Jiuzhou Immortal Sect. This risk is even greater than directly withdrawing the movable True Persons, and Changqing Immortal Sect would be even less likely to do so. In the original Southern Domain region, Changqing Immortal Sect directly controlled six nations. But later, due to the pressing frontline warfare in the Central Region and Northern Domain, which grew increasingly fierce, they had to recall the Garrison Immortals from the Southern Domain, leaving it vulnerable. Eventually, demons seized the opportunity to invade the nations left undefended by the Garrison Immortals, and with no movable True Persons available from Changqing Immortal Sect to suppress the rebellion, the situation spiraled out of control and the entire Southern Domain was lost. This is a bloody lesson. Having entered the Southern Domain, Taiping Dao naturally understood this history. Even if they didn¡¯t, with sects like Jintai Gate eager to ingratiate themselves, their junior branches would certainly help their superiors to understand the situation. After all, what the juniors sought was stability in their regiona€¡±they certainly didn¡¯t want their superiors to repeat past mistakes and allow the Southern Domain, which was just beginning to show signs of stability, to descend into chaos again. Thus, Yi Dancheng was well aware of the concerns of Changqing Immortal Sect. Seeing Yang Jihua still troubled despite having said so much, he had no choice but to yield further, taking the initiative to say, ¡°There¡¯s no need to call for many True Persons. Even if only one True Person is sent, that would be good. As long as your sect can provide support in name and demonstrate the closeness between Changqing Immortal Sect and Taiping Dao, it would be enough to deter the Southern Domain Immortal Gate from acting rashly. Sending just one True Person should be possible, right?¡± Taiping Dao wanted to pull Changqing Immortal Sect to their side in order to unify the two sects, so that those harboring ulterior motives would face not just Taiping Dao but two sects when considering rebellion. Thus, when they contemplated taking action, the thought of simultaneously offending Changqing Immortal Sect and Taiping Dao would naturally instill fear in them, leading to hesitation. Rather than focusing solely on confronting Taiping Dao and relying on the support of Jiuzhou Immortal Gatea€¡±the risk might be substantial, but not overwhelming. This encouragement might prompt them to rebel. But with Changqing Immortal Sect involved, the situation would change dramatically. If Taiping Dao could achieve just that, it would be sufficient. Previously, they had simply wanted to find more allies to enhance their own strength and ensure more stability in the Southern Domain. If Changqing Immortal Sect lacked the capacity, then let it be. Gaining even a single person¡¯s support and being able to flaunt that influence was enough. ¡°One True Person?¡± Upon hearing Taiping Dao¡¯s reduced terms, a hesitant expression faded from Yang Jihua¡¯s face and he pondered for a good while before nodding and saying, ¡°If that is the case, it is feasible. However, I must first consult the School Leader to obtain permission before I can give you an answer.¡± Sending just one True Person, though painful, was nonetheless acceptable for Changqing Immortal Sect. Even with one fewer True Person, they would still retain an Earth Immortal and a Human Immortal within their sect, not exhausting all their movable forces. If any problems arose in the territory they governed, they would still have personnel available and would not be plunged into desperation. Yang Jihua was quite confident that upon reporting this condition to the sect, the higher-ups would agree. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Yi Dancheng responded with great joy, ¡°Then I must trouble you, fellow daoist. With your sect¡¯s help, the Southern Domain will have nothing to fear.¡± Yang Jihua smiled, ¡°We both need to help and support each other to get through difficult times. There¡¯s no need for such formalities between us.¡± With that, the preliminary intentions for a joint defense of the Southern Domain had been agreed upon. ¡­ It was at this moment. Within Mi Yun Mountain, the Tao Discussion Conference was still bustling. However, a ray of escaping light hurriedly approached from the west. After landing at the foot of the mountain and being announced, the anxious visitor was granted an audience with Che Shidao, bringing with them a token and a piece of news. ¡°Li Ruoqing in Xiaye Country was ambushed by a Ghost Emperor and dragged into Huangquan Underworld. Right now, he is barely protecting himself with the Immortal Artifacts given by his sect but cannot remove himself and won¡¯t last much longer, so he¡¯s asking you to come for help?¡± With the Taiping token in hand, Che Shidao gazed at the ashen-faced cultivator below, his expression grave after hearing the visitor¡¯s request. Chapter 1276 - Chapter 1276 Chapter 506 Yellow Springs Underworld ?Chapter 1276: Chapter 506 Yellow Springs Underworld Chapter 1276: Chapter 506 Yellow Springs Underworld For Li Ruoqing, Yi Dancheng was certainly memorable. Influenced by him, Lu Yuan and other avatars including Che Shidao also became aware of his existence. However, the man was wholeheartedly devoted to the righteous path, always wandering and seeking to subdue demons and eradicate monsters. After a trip to the Great Eye Kingdom, he plunged into Xiaye Country. This unwavering ambition was truly admirable. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï Therefore, those on the Taiping Dao looked favorably upon this disciple from Dongyang. In recent years, Lu Yuan had also been keeping track of his movements. The distance from Youxin Country to Xiaye Country through Youshan Country is not far, making it easy to gather information. According to his knowledge, Li Ruoqing had fared quite well since arriving in Xiaye Country. Upon his arrival in the country, he had killed several harmful demons, saving hundreds of thousands of people. Later, he displayed great power, successively slaying several Demon Kings that came for revenge, and with the sword in his hand, he carved out tens of thousands of miles of safe haven in Xiaye Country, now a den of demons, protecting millions of lives. The demons in Xiaye Country feared his reputation, dubbing him the Bloody Sun Sword Devil, to signify the depth of his killings. However, the people saved by Li Ruoqing revered him as the Haoyang Sword Immortal, viewing him as the hope of Haoyang. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Even from the surrounding countries, many hot-blooded disciples of the Immortal Sect and individual cultivators, upon hearing of his deeds, flocked to follow him. By now, Li Ruoqing had gathered nearly a hundred cultivators, leading them to battle against the demons in Xiaye Country, with increasing momentum. Behind Xiaye Country, the two major forces of Xuan Turtle Mountain had been impacted by the rise of Taiping Dao over the past two years. As a neighboring force, it had to divert more attention to the west. Due to this, it gradually lacked the energy to attend to the development in the eastern Xiaye Country. At this time, an Immortal Sect Cultivator dedicated to the righteous path stepped forward, helping to bear the pressure of the demons and containing Jiuchuan Demon Country, which was actually a blessing. Therefore, Xuan Turtle Mountain saw the rise of Li Ruoqing not as an enemy but welcomed it. Privately, they issued orders to the demons under their control, providing him with considerable assistance. As for Jiuchuan Demon Country, the two flood dragons from the Dragon Palace, although not bordering Taiping Dao, also felt the impact. The elder flood dragon¡¯s son, Black Snake, was directly slain by Che Shidao. After the rise of Taiping Dao, Jiuchuan Demon Country suffered more losses and damage than Xuan Turtle Mountain. Thus, as an outsider, Jiuchuan Demon Country was more sensitive and cautious about the rise of Taiping Dao. Seeing Taiping Dao smoothing out Youxin Country and continuously infiltrating the Great Eye Monster Nation in recent years, they keenly sensed the changing winds in the Southern Domain. Instinctively, they reduced their activity frequency. Their aim was to avoid drawing attention, lest Taiping Dao¡¯s focus shift toward them and make them a target. Hence, for self-preservation, Jiuchuan Demon Country also chose a low profile, lacking the spare energy to deal with Li Ruoqing. With the two major powers behind Xiaye Country no longer caring about its affairs, the greatest danger for Li Ruoqing in his quest to subdue demons and vanquish monsters naturally disappeared. Even though the local demons were numerous, they were no match against a Heavenly Immortal true disciple. Given the situation, even if he couldn¡¯t expel all demons or restore the legitimate rule of Xiaye Country, securing the reclaimed lands of the Human Race would still be manageable. But there are always exceptions. Just as Xiaye Country¡¯s situation was improving and everything seemed hopeful, an unexpected change occurred. ¡°Not long ago, the Ghost King of Greedy Ghost City in Xiaye Country planned to hold a birthday celebration, intending to use 800,000 humans as blood food to entertain visiting Demon Kings and Ghost Kings. Brother Li, harboring a sense of justice, could not bear to hear such news. Thus, he angrily took up his sword, prepared to storm Greedy Ghost City, slay the Ghost King, and rescue the million common folk there. We, too, had no choice but to follow. Upon reaching Greedy Ghost City, we joined Brother Li and engaged in a fierce battle with those demons, turning the sky dark and the ground bloody. In the end, Brother Li, superior in skill and wielding his sword, executed the Greedy Ghost King and slew a Demon King who had come to the gathering, causing many demons to flee in panic. We thus secured a victory in this great battle. However, just after our victory, as we prepared to gather the people and evacuate the city, the ground suddenly shook, and a gate to the Netherworld opened from the ground. A Ghost Emperor from the Yellow Springs escaped from it. We then realized that the Greedy Ghost King¡¯s birthday celebration was not just a celebration but also intended to use 800,000 live humans as a sacrifice to a Ghost Emperor of the Yellow Springs as an offering of allegiance. We had slain the Greedy Ghost King, but the Ghost Emperor was unaware and arrived according to timing, resulting in a direct confrontation. How could we be a match for a Ghost Emperor? In the end, it was Brother Li who deployed a sect technique, relying on a Pure Yang Sword Talisman and the force of Haoyang to repel the Ghost Emperor, delaying him. This provided us and the city¡¯s inhabitants time to evacuate. But after we withdrew, Brother Li was trapped by the Ghost Emperor. Even with the sword talisman¡¯s aid, he struggled to free himself. In the end, we could only watch helplessly as he was dragged by the Ghost Emperor into the gate to the Yellow Springs, entering the Netherworld Court.¡± The cultivator named Xiong Guoyi, simply bursting into tears, recounted the whole incident. Chapter 1277 - Chapter 1277 Chapter 506 Yellow Springs Underworld_2 ?Chapter 1277: Chapter 506 Yellow Springs Underworld_2 Chapter 1277: Chapter 506 Yellow Springs Underworld_2 He then kowtowed on the ground, beseeching, ¡°True Person, before Brother Li fell into misfortune, he entrusted the Taiping Order to me and asked me to come to Taiping Dao for help, which shows his trust in your sect. Now we have no means to deal with the Ghost Emperor and can only seek assistance from True Person. I beseech you to show mercy, use your Divine Powers, and save Brother Li from the netherworld so that he may see the light of day again.¡± After listening to the cause and effect, Che Shidao finally understood what was going on and couldn¡¯t help but frown and contemplate deeply. He truly hadn¡¯t expected that Li Ruoqing would run into such trouble. He had originally thought that as Li Ruoqing was hunting demons and vanquishing evil in Xiaye Country, only Xuan Turtle Mountain and Jiuchuan Demon Countrya€¡±who suffered direct lossesa€¡±had not laid a hand on him. Instead, it was the Ghost Emperor from Huangquan, separated from the Yang World by yin and yang, residing in another world, who took action against him. This was indeed unexpected. Similarly, it also highlighted the thorny nature of the situation. In the Immortal Realm, there are two worlds separated by yin and yang. There¡¯s no need to mention the Yang World, which is the world where Che Shidao and others live, dominated by living beings. As for the Yin World, in essence, it is not quite a real world but rather like a vassal of the Yang World. There are pure and turbid energies in the world, scattered between Heaven and Earth. In places where the pure energy is more abundant, spiritual energy is plentiful. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Such areas naturally change the surrounding heaven and earth to form relatively enclosed small spaces, known as Cave Worlds, revered by cultivators as blessed lands. In areas with more turbid energy, where the yin energy is dense, these also naturally transform heaven and earth to form enclosed spaces, which are known as Yellow Springs Underworlds. However, whether they are Cave Worlds or Yellow Springs Underworlds, such places where pure or turbid energy gathers are quite rare. In the Immortal Realm, they are actually not common. Within this Changqing Domain, combined, there are no more than ten such places. Among them, the Cave Worlds are even fewer, merely four, all occupied by those powerful Immortal Sects. As for the Yellow Springs Underworlds, currently, only three have been discovered: one in the Western Domain, one in the Northern Domain, and one in the Eastern Territory. Yes, none of the three Yellow Springs Underworlds are located within the Southern Domain. The Southern Territory had always lacked a Yellow Springs Underworld. Otherwise, if Li Ruoqing had known that the Gluttonous Ghost City was an entrance to the Yellow Springs Underworld, no matter how bold he was, he would not have sought death by going there. Because according to past precedents, within each Yellow Springs Underworld, there is at least one Ghost Emperor in existence. And a Ghost Emperor is a ghost cultivator who has attained a Dao Fruit, equivalent to a Human Immortal in the Immortal Sects. With such a powerful ghost immortal present, who would dare to be presumptuous near a Yellow Springs Underworld? Some Yellow Springs Underworlds with more turbid energy and a larger impact on space can even nurture Yamas, ghost cultivators more formidable than Ghost Emperors, comparable to Earth Immortals within Immortal Sects. Li Ruoqing is a man with a righteous heart, dedicated to subduing demons and vanquishing evil, but he is not unaware of the situation, nor is he foolhardy enough to seek death. If he had known there were Yellow Springs Underworlds inside the Gluttonous Ghost City, he would have steered clear and never approached it. Because you can¡¯t say that a ghost king at the doorway of the Underworld has no connection with the Ghost Emperors or Yamas inside; nobody would believe you. To trouble that ghost king is essentially tantamount to troubling the Ghost Emperora€¡±an outright suicidal path.¡± ¡®In the past, there had been no records of a Yellow Springs Underworld appearing in the Southern Territory, so Li Ruoqing was unguarded against it. Thus when a Yellow Springs Underworld appeared in Xiaye Country, he was caught off guard. In the end, for the sake of his fellow cultivators and the lives of tens of thousands of mortals in the city, he had no choice but to give up the chance to escape. Using the trump card given to him by his sect, he managed to hold back the Ghost Emperor. This is the real reason why this Heavenly Immortal¡¯s legacy couldn¡¯t escape. His noble nature and righteous heart truly command admiration. However, the sudden emergence of a Yellow Springs Underworld in Xiaye Country is not a good sign for the situation in the Southern Domain. The appearance of a fourth force brings complications not so easily managed. Damn it, at a time like this, to suddenly face such a changea€¡±it seems there really are no easy and good opportunities in the world. To conquer the Southern Domain was just getting started when trouble after trouble came like a deluge, as if the whole world was bearing down on you.¡¯ Che Shidao felt a tinge of bitterness in his heart, but did not show it. Looking at Xiong Guoyi, who was still kneeling below, he spoke soothingly, ¡°You may rise. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? There is no need to kneel continuously. Brother Li is a friend of our Taiping Dao, and the Taiping Order is personally issued by our Sect Leader. Our sect will naturally not stand by and do nothing. In a moment I will report to the Sect Leader and inform him about this matter. I believe a response will come soon. You have had a hard journey getting here. Go with the disciple to rest; we have already prepared a room for you within the sect.¡± Upon receiving the promise that Taiping Dao was willing to lend a hand, Xiong Guoyi¡¯s heart instantly relaxed, and he quickly expressed his gratitude joyfully, ¡°Thank you, True Person. Thank you, True Person.¡± Then, not daring to linger longer, he tactfully made his departure, following the Taiping Dao disciple who came to guide him towards the guest accommodations deep within the mountains. After he had left, Che Shidao did not delay, immediately conveying his thoughts to his true form, relaying the circumstances directly to him. It alerted Lu Yuan, who was leisurely reading through miscellaneous books in the back mountain and acquainting himself with various legends of the Immortal Realm. ¡°A Yellow Springs Underworld has emerged in Xiaye Country?¡± After digesting the message from his avatar, he could not help but be surprised and somewhat shaken. ¡°A newly emerged Yellow Springs Underworld, its origins unknowna€¡±if it was born in recent years, that¡¯s still manageable, and at most there would be one Ghost Emperor inside. But if it has been gestating for who knows how many years, already matured, and only recently became connected to the Yang World, that would be troublesome.¡± Chapter 1278 - Chapter 1278 Chapter 506 Yellow Springs Underworld_3 ?Chapter 1278: Chapter 506 Yellow Springs Underworld_3 Chapter 1278: Chapter 506 Yellow Springs Underworld_3 ¡°For an established Underworld like this, it¡¯s quite normal to produce a Ghost Emperor, let alone a Yama,¡± ¡°If it truly is this type of Underworld, then the situation in the Southern Domain that has just stabilized, I¡¯m afraid it¡¯s going to change immediately.¡± Lu Yuan was clear about his own strength. If he were only dealing with an Immortal Gate from the Nine Provinces, with the assistance of Qing Immortal Sect and the integration of the Southern Domain Immortal Gates, he still had the strength to fight the opposition. However, if at this time another Underworld appeared in the rear area, with a Yama within the Yellow Springs Underworld, then Taiping Dao would immediately fall into the awkward situation of fighting on two fronts. In such a case, let alone holding onto the Southern Domain, even personal safety would become an issue. If that were to happen, he might as well not stubbornly persist and just give up Changqing Domain, following the example of his predecessors like Emperor Hua Guang, to find a suitable place and settle anew. This broken Southern Domain, it¡¯s fine not to have it. ¡°Therefore, the urgent task at hand is to first clarify the details of the Yellow Springs Underworld of Xiaye Country, understand the situation of this newly emerged fourth force, and then make countermeasures.¡± As Lu Yuan thought this, he immediately contacted Yi Dancheng with his divine sense, instructing them to immediately find Yang Jihua again. At the same time, he also notified Che Shidao to send a message, to relay the news of Li Ruoqing¡¯s entrapment directly to Dongyang Mountain. The emergence of this Yellow Springs Underworld was not just a matter for Taiping Dao alone. As the overlords of the Changqing Domain, Qing Immortal Sect and Dongyang Mountain, as the sect of Li Ruoqing, both Immortal Sects were inextricably linked. He had no intention of shouldering all the responsibility alone. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï If he could call on friends and gather reinforcements, then of course all arrangements should be made. Otherwise, why would he ignore the advantage of having available help at hand? Would he be a fool? Over there at Yi Dancheng, after receiving the notification from his true self, the response was very swift. At this moment, he had just reached an agreement with Yang Jihua, and the two were discussing Tao while brewing tea in the mountains. As they were engaging deeply in conversation, Yi Dancheng¡¯s expression changed subtly; he set down his teacup and his smile faded. Seeing his demeanor, Yang Jihua couldn¡¯t help but ask, ¡°Brother Yi, what¡¯s wrong?¡± Yi Dancheng sighed, ¡°I won¡¯t hide it from Brother Yang. I just received a message from my junior brother that new trouble has arisen in our realm of the Southern Domain. If not handled properly, I fear the Nine Provinces may collapse.¡± Upon hearing this, Yang Jihua¡¯s expression became solemn, and he quickly questioned, ¡°What happened?¡± ¡°Previously, while I was exterminating demons in the Great Eye Kingdom, I encountered a true disciple from Dongyang Domain in the south¡­¡± Yi Dancheng slowly explained the circumstances, concluding, ¡°So now this Brother Li has been swept into the Yellow Springs Underworld that suddenly appeared in Xiaye Country by a Ghost Emperor that emerged there. The sudden appearance of such an Underworld in Xiaye Country, with the presence of a Ghost Emperor, isn¡¯t that a disaster? If it can¡¯t be dealt with promptly, once it spreads and in response to the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, I¡¯m afraid that the fall of the Southern Domain is just a matter of days.¡± After hearing the reasons, Yang Jihua also became grave, and his brows furrowed deeply, showing that he too realized the severity of the situation. Demons and monsters; these eight characters are what the Immortal Sect refers to those beings that do not follow our path, that are inharmonious with the Human Race and bear malice, the general term used for such different types. The consequences of these beings appearing on the human territory and becoming active without any restraint can be understood by looking at the current state of the Southern Domain. People cannot sustain their lives; it is a living hell. That describes it best. Previously, in this region of the Southern Domain, just having some Great Demons equivalent to the Human Immortals leading them, turned this place into such a state. Now, if a Yama equivalent to an Earth Immortal were to appear and unite those Great Demons, then in the entire region of the Southern Domain, the Human Race might as well wait for death. The appearance of a Yama has the same significance for the demons as the appearance of Taiping Dao has for the Immortal Sects. Both can integrate a region and form a strong power. Since Taiping Dao appeared, the Immortal Gates of the Nine Provinces have been restless. And now with the appearance of Yama, it¡¯s Taiping Dao and Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s turn to become restless. ¡°How could I allow someone else to sleep soundly by the side of my couch?¡± Yang Jihua slammed the table and declared resolutely, ¡°Evil ghosts wreaking havoc upon this world, the Underworld disturbing the Yang World, this is a calamity between Yin and Yang that must not be allowed to spread. The Yellow Springs Underworld of Xiaye Country must be eliminated early to prevent these malignant ghosts from causing harm.¡± This true person of Qing Immortal Sect immediately made his stance clear. An extermination, it must happen. The attitude was even more zealous than that of Taiping Dao. Yi Dancheng understood the urgency of the other party, because although the area of Xiaye Country was part of the Southern Domain, it was also the border between the Southern and Eastern Territories. In terms of geographical proximity, Xiaye Country bordered directly with the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s directly governed territory. If a Yama were to appear here, the threat to Qing Immortal Sect would be even greater than the threat to Taiping Dao. Should the Yellow Springs Underworld of Xiaye Country really take hold, the first to suffer would be Qing Immortal Sect. If things get serious, Qing Immortal Sect might even have to open a new battlefront specifically to fight against these ghost cultivators in a ghost extermination battle. The previously stable Eastern Territory and the last sanctuary of Qing Immortal Sect would also be affected by the war, no longer able to develop peacefully. Under such circumstances, how could the other party tolerate it? Therefore, it was imperative to extinguish it before the situation worsened. If they waited until it spread, it would truly become uncontrollable. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Seeing this, Yi Dancheng also nodded repeatedly, ¡°Brother Yi speaks truly. These ghostly beings, those gloomy dead things that shun reincarnation and linger in the world, are inherently violating the natural cycle of heaven. Such dead beings, the most hateful towards us living people, cannot be left alone. It¡¯s just that it¡¯s a newly emerged Yellow Springs Underworld, and we don¡¯t know their confidence level, how many Ghost Emperors they have, and whether there is a Yama among them? The Underworld is different from the Yang Worlda€¡±prosperous with turbid yin energy. As we cultivators of the clear and spiritual, going there, our magic power and divine powers will be reduced by a third right off the bat. The disadvantage in fighting them is too great. Although Taiping Dao wishes to eliminate them, I¡¯m afraid we might not have enough power.¡± Hearing this, Yang Jihua immediately said, ¡°We will not let Brother Yi¡¯s sect take on the burden alone. I will report back to the sect and ask Earth Flower True Man to mobilize, to join hands with your esteemed sect to exterminate the Yellow Springs Underworld and ensure that the malignant ghosts do not rampage.¡± Chapter 1279 - Chapter 1279 Chapter 507 Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony ?Chapter 1279: Chapter 507 Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony Chapter 1279: Chapter 507 Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony Given their own core interests were at stake, the Changqing Immortal Sect, this time, has finally shown willingness to proactively exert efforts, a far departure from their usual avoidance of issues. Upon hearing this, Yi Dancheng immediately smiled and said, ¡°With these words from Brother, I am now at ease. As soon as Earth Flower True Person from your sect arrives, Brother Qing Guanzi from Taiping Dao will also set out right away to exorcise ghosts in Xiaye Country.¡± Moreover, I have a plan. Isn¡¯t there a Tao Discussion conference happening on Mi Yun Mountain right now? It has gathered more than a dozen True Persons from various gates. In my view, all this talking is less useful than practical action. Your sect and ours could take the lead in organizing a ghost-exorcising ceremony, and lead all the True Persons together to go to Xiaye Country to exorcise ghosts. By doing this, we gather nearly half of the Changqing Domain¡¯s strength. Even if the Yellow Springs Underworld has Yama, what should we fear?¡± It¡¯s not only the Changqing Immortal Sect that Lu Yuan was eyeing, but also the few other Immortal Sect True Persons remaining in the mountains. After all, that¡¯s the strength of over a dozen Human Immortals that could be temporarily utilized, a decidedly formidable force. However, to get these individuals to join in the exorcism into Huangquan, relying on Taiping Dao would be impossible. Taiping Dao doesn¡¯t have the prestige or the capability, even with Qing Guanzi involved. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï Lu Yuan could at most persuade three Immortal Sects from the Southern Domain to join the movement, as for those brought by the Changqing Immortal Sect, there was nothing he could do. To mobilize those individuals, it had to be the Changqing Immortal Sect itself. ¡°Dispelling demons and defending the Tao is our duty as Immortal Sect cultivators. True Persons in the mountains, all belong to the Immortal Sect and inherently possess a heart for justice. I will go and speak to them about this matter soon, and I believe my fellow Daoists will not refuse,¡± Yang Jihua readily accepted Yi Dancheng¡¯s proposal. This time it was merely about exorcising ghosts. Not about making the Immortal Sect cultivators battle against the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Xiaye Country has seen the appearance of the Yellow Springs Underworld, but at most there is just one Yama. Though powerful, when compared to the entirety of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, it¡¯s just so-so. The joint effort of Changqing Immortal Sect and Taiping Dao this time would at least involve two Earth Immortals, and as for Human Immortals, including the messengers from the many sects in the mountains, at least thirteen or fourteen. With such strength, not to mention dispelling ghosts, even eradicating the Yellow Springs Underworld would be more than sufficient. After all, the Yellow Springs Underworld is just a gathering place for turbid energy, a derivative of Heaven and Earth, a small space attached to the Yang World. This kind of small space has limits in range, at minimum less than the expanse of one country in the Yang World, and at most it won¡¯t exceed the land of ten countries. Under normal circumstances, it¡¯s only one or two countries in size, which is the normal expanse of the Yellow Springs Underworld. Now that Taiping Dao has joined hands with the Changqing Immortal Sect and mobilizing so many true persons to exorcise ghosts, they are treating the Yellow Springs Underworld in Xiaye Country as if it were as large as the biggest Dark World of ten countries. This is clearly preparing for the enemy at a margin. However, even if they¡¯ve prepared more than necessary, the Immortal Sect still holds the advantage on this side. With such a significant advantage, combined with the natural enmity between humans and ghosts, the True Persons from the major Immortal Sects also do not wish to see a Yellow Springs Underworld rising in their vicinity. This would be more bothersome than the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate dominating the Changqing Domain. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï As long as the ghost-exorcising ceremony is proposed with Taiping Dao and Changqing Immortal Sect taking the lead, most True Persons are unlikely to refuse. ¡°Alright, since that¡¯s the case, the Immortal Sects from the northern and eastern territories shall be your responsibility to persuade. I will handle the Southern Domain,¡± Satisfied that Yang Jihua had no objections, Yi Dancheng nodded slightly, then continued, ¡°There¡¯s no time to delay. Taking advantage of the fact that the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate hasn¡¯t received the news yet, and for the sake of rescuing Brother Li as soon as possible, let¡¯s act immediately and settle this matter quickly.¡± The matter concerning the Yellow Springs Underworld in Xiaye Country is currently only known internally within this country, and at most, it has spread to a few neighboring countries. Although information travels fast in the Immortal Realm, to spread it out wide, reaching the Western Domain, would still take two to three days at the fastest. And by the time the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate receives the news, deliberates on it, and gathers personnel, another day or two will be needed. Thus, for Taiping Dao and Changqing Immortal Sect, they are currently left with at least three to four days where Jiuzhou Immortal Gate would not intervene. Therefore, if they do not want to face external interference and wish to resolve this matter as soon as possible, This three to four-day window is their best opportunity. Otherwise, if they delay, and once the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate gets the message and responds, To loudly gather various Immortal Sects and mobilize more than a dozen True Persons to exorcise ghosts under the watchful eyes of strong enemies, it wouldn¡¯t be so easy. Just like in the past, Every time Changqing Immortal Sect mobilizes personnel, even just one or two True Persons under the strict surveillance of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, it immediately draws attention. If a slightly greater number of Immortals is mobilized, suspicions arise whether they are preparing to wage war or incite conflict at the front line. The Jiuzhou Immortal Gate there would immediately gather corresponding personnel in response, reinforcing the front line as a countermeasure. So for Changqing Immortal Sect, gathering several True Persons at one time is not an easy task. A slight mishap could trigger a new large-scale war with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Thus, to avoid such incidents, both Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate have been very cautious about mobilizing forces too frequently or densely, to avoid misunderstandings by the opponent. This time, gathering so many Immortals at Mi Yun Mountain, Was mainly because Taiping Dao established their Tao Inheritance, where various Immortal Sects gathered at Mi Yun Mountain, thus sending out True Persons as messengers, which was a special occasion. That¡¯s why Changqing Immortal Sect was able to gather so many True Persons. Chapter 1280 - Chapter 1280 Chapter 507 Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony_2 ?Chapter 1280: Chapter 507 Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony_2 Chapter 1280: Chapter 507 Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony_2 Similarly, in response, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate also sent out five True Persons. Both sides sent a considerable number of True Persons this time, partly due to the display of power by the Taiping Dao. But it was not without reason that both sides were wary of each other, distrustful of the gathering of so many True Persons, which was why they sent people over to monitor. In any case, after ten thousand years of war, the Immortal Clans of the Changqing Domain that survived were extremely sensitive to the situation and danger. Any disturbance would alert the various Immortal Sects. At this time, the gathering of the True Persons from various Immortal Sects in Mi Yun Mountain was already a pre-screened situation. It had been confirmed by the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate that it was merely a celebration and nothing sinister. Even from the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s side, if it wasn¡¯t for the fear of the alliance between the Taiping Dao and Qing Immortal Sect, they wouldn¡¯t dare to linger in enemy territory, and they would have stayed in Mi Yun Mountain for the Tao Discussion Conference. This was a secure assembly. As long as Yi Dancheng didn¡¯t act foolishly by moving so many True Persons toward the Western Domain, it wouldn¡¯t provoke an excessive reaction from the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Thus, the numerous True Persons gathered in Mi Yun Mountain now constituted a reasonable and mobile force. ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï As long as it was not directed against the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, they could use this formidable power at will before the others reacted. This power, whether used for subduing demons or for entering Yellow Springs to expel ghosts, would face no obstructions. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Lu Yuan had also proposed this suggestion to Yi Dancheng only after realizing this point. Yang Jihua also realized this, which was why he agreed so readily. It was rare to have an opportunity to freely use so many True Persons without causing a fierce reaction from the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. If they didn¡¯t take the opportunity to clear some potential issues from their backyard and lay out their precautions, that would truly be foolish. An opportunity lost is lost forever. Before the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate could react, they had to seize this opportunity, otherwise it really would expire and become invalid. Beyond not wanting to waste the opportunity, even for the sake of rescuing Li Ruoqing, both sides indeed had to act quickly. On Lu Yuan¡¯s side, it was out of admiration for Li Ruoqing as a person, and a desire to foster good relations with Dongyang Mountain behind him, that he was eager to rescue. But this did not mean that the Qing Immortal Sect lacked interest in the benefits of rescuing Li Ruoqing. After all, this was a Heavenly Immortal true transmission, backed by a Great True Person. Dongyang Mountain was a rising regional overlord with strength far surpassing that of the fading Qing Immortal Sect. Now, the true disciple of the other party had come to Chinese Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s territory to travel, but an incident had occurred. Tell me, shouldn¡¯t the Qing Immortal Sect, as the host, bear some responsibility? Even if Dongyang Mountain was reasonable and wouldn¡¯t blame them, the Qing Immortal Sect could not pretend to be unaware and had to consider this powerful neighbor¡¯s attitude. Otherwise, if the neighbor became angry, they wouldn¡¯t need to act personallya€¡±just showing some hostility and giving a little support to the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate would be enough trouble for the Qing Immortal Sect. When a person is down on their luck, any additional pressure can be deadly. The Qing Immortal Sect had been unfortunate for nearly ten thousand years, and through this continuous decline, they had deeply experienced this truth. So instinctively, there was a consciousness to avoid risks. It was fine not knowing initially. But now that they knew of Li Ruoqing¡¯s identity, then this true disciple of Dongyang Mountaina€| Must be saved! And he must be saved quickly; they absolutely could not let him die at the hands of the Ghost Emperor. Even if he were already dead, they would have to kill the Ghost Emperor before Dongyang Mountain could blame them, to provide an explanation. For survival¡¯s sake, even a strong clan like the Qing Immortal Sect sometimes had to make compromises. Once both sides reached a consensus, Yang Jihua and Yi Dancheng immediately took action. One went to seek the Immortal Sects of the Northern and Eastern Territory, and the other went to the Southern Domain Immortal Sect to prepare and facilitate the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony. But before mobilizing, Lu Yuan held a brief meeting first. ¡°This Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, with Qing Guanzi leading in the Southern Domain as the Taiping Dao¡¯s representative, and accompanied by Che Shidao. After you head to Xiaye Country and finish the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, clearing out the ghosts of Yellow Springs Underworld, the local demons are likely to be cleared out as well. Che Shidao will then stay in that country, establishing a new branch for the Taiping Dao.¡± Lu Yuan looked towards Che Shidao, giving the instructions. The latter nodded, ¡°No problem, I will handle it.¡± Establishing a branch was a minor issue; Che Shidao had built up such frameworks single-handedly in Mi Yun Mountain in Youxin Country. Now going to Xiaye Country was merely repeating what he had previously done. But establishing a new branch meant several more years of busy work, which made him somewhat troubled. After arranging Che Shidao¡¯s tasks, Lu Yuan then looked towards Qing Guanzi, saying, ¡°This time, you are representing the Taiping Dao and the Southern Domain Immortal Gate. You are also one of the two Earth Flower True Men leading this Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, so you have a great responsibility. I have only two requests for you. One, completely pacify the Yellow Springs Underworld and eradicate all the ghosts there, ensuring it does not become a hidden threat to the Southern Domain. Two, if there is an opportunity, catch the rabbits along with the scorching grass. Bring the many True Persons attending the ceremony and take care of the two flood dragons from the Jiuchuan Demon Nation as well.¡± Chapter 1281 - Chapter 1281 Chapter 507 Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony_3 ?Chapter 1281: Chapter 507 Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony_3 Chapter 1281: Chapter 507 Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony_3 In the Southern Domain now, the only Monster Nation still resisting the rampaging demons is Jiuchuan Demon Country. It¡¯s a rare opportunity; let¡¯s deal with them first to avoid chaos behind us when we clash with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate in the future.¡± Yes, now in the Southern Domain, there¡¯s only one Monster Nation left. Great Eye Kingdom, which had been resisting stubbornly in Ji Mu City, heard the rumours deliberately spread by Taiping Dao. That was the news about Qing Guanzi, Earth Flower True Man. Eventually, during the Taiping Dao¡¯s Dao Law Assembly, he quietly left with a few trusted followers and abandoned Ji Mu City, fleeing from the Great Eye Kingdom. In the city, the remaining three thousand demons also scattered in all directions after their leader fled. Great Eye Kingdom, once in its prime, vanished into thin air after more than three years of Taiping Dao¡¯s attacks. However, Taiping Dao is currently hosting the Dao Law Assembly, and too many things are drawing their attention, leaving no time or energy to take over this country for now. Moreover, the hundreds of millions of citizens of Great Eye Kingdom had been relocated cleanly during the successive attacks by Taiping Dao in recent years. Even if we were to take over the country now, making it prosperous again would not be a short-term achievement. This is followed by a series of troublesome matters. Regardless, with the extinction of Great Eye Kingdom, Jiuchuan Demon Country is now the only Monster Nation still flying its flag in the Southern Domain. Speaking of which, those two flood dragons from the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace are really stubborn. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Knowing about the presence of an Earth Immortal from Taiping Dao, they still insist on not leaving. It¡¯s unclear if they truly aren¡¯t afraid of death. Or do they have some kind of reliance? Thinking even if Taiping Dao has an Immortal, they can still hold their ground in Jiuchuan Country, unharmed by the adversary. However, whether it¡¯s one reason or the other, as the newly-promoted overlord of the Southern Domain, Taiping Dao cannot tolerate a demon openly establishing a kingdom on its territory. Jiuchuan Demon Country must be eliminated. If those two flood dragons won¡¯t leave, then they must be killed. This time, having mobilized so many Immortal Sects and True Persons, it¡¯s perfect to use the momentum of the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony to take them down. ¡°Yes, I will discuss it with the Changqing Immortal Sect and try my best to facilitate this. Eliminating these demons not only benefits the Southern Domain but also prevents them from spreading into the territories ruled by Changqing Immortal Sect.¡± Qing Guanzi nodded in agreement, ¡°They should not refuse.¡± After making the arrangements, Lu Yuan finally looked towards Yi Dancheng, ¡°Since we¡¯ve nearly finished discussing everything, you should go and mobilize the Southern Domain Immortal Sects. I demand only one thing, that each of the three Immortal Sects from the Southern Domain must provide one True Person, which including the two from my Taiping Dao, makes exactly five Immortals. If anyone is unwilling to contribute, then they are colluding with demons, a disgrace to their Immortal Sect. It¡¯s a good opportunity to deal with these troublemakers first. I would like to see if anyone dares to make a move at this time.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s words were specifically aimed at Xuan Turtle Mountain. As Jintai Gate and Bihu Palace, judging by current signs, support Taiping Dao and are also willing to maintain stability in the Southern Domain. The only one not acting properly is Xuan Turtle Mountain. In fact, he quite wished that Xuan Turtle Mountain would defy orders at this moment and refuse to participate in the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony. This would provide a perfect moral justification to use the prior evidence of supporting demons in Xiaye Country against them, directly accusing Xuan Turtle Mountain of long knowing about the Yellow Springs Underworld in Xiaye Country and colluding with the ghosts there. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï With the charge of colluding with demons, Lu Yuan planned to deal with them decisively. Although this would weaken the strength of the local Immortal Sects in the Southern Domain, making the forces available to Taiping Dao in the future confrontation against the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect fewer. However, to repel external forces, one must first secure internal stability. First purge the internal strife, integrate the hearts of the people, and unite top and bottom in resisting external enemies. This is obviously much better than having disharmony inside, with people holding others back. Moreover, settling matters with Xuan Turtle Mountain earlier also saves trouble later when seeking various convoluted excuses to take action against them. It also considered a simplification of matters. It is just unknown whether Xuan Turtle Mountain, over there, would foolishly make a move at this time. Common sense says, for the most part, it would not. In fact, the final outcome was just as such. After holding a minor meeting internally within Taiping Dao and having reached a consensus, Lu Yuan¡¯s three avatars then also took their own actions. After Yi Dancheng located the other three Immortal Sects of the Southern Domain, explained the situation in Xiaye Country, and stated that Taiping Dao was prepared to collaborate with Qing Immortal Sect to hold a Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony to completely eradicate the ghosts of Yellow Springs Underworld, the representative from Jintai Gate, Ouyang Yuan expressed on the spot that his alliance was willing to participate. Although Bihu Palace only had one True Person, faced with the demands from two major Daoist sects and the prevailing trends, they ultimately dared not refuse and expressed their agreement. As for Xuan Turtle Mountain, they had been secretly manipulating Xiaye Country. With such an incident occurring there now, it almost amounted to a fire in their own backyard. It not only severely threatened the safety of Xuan Turtle Mountain¡¯s rear but also caused them a serious reputation and trust crisis. Just as Lu Yuan had said, If such an incident occurred in your territory, and you had a history of supporting demons, it is difficult not to make others suspect whether you really were in collusion with the Yellow Springs Underworld? Zhu Zhenghe, although always reluctant to see Taiping rise, also recognized that his sect was facing a crisis. If they didn¡¯t take action against the Yellow Springs Underworld early to end this crisis and extract Xuan Turtle Mountain from it, dragging the matter out, they definitely wouldn¡¯t rendezvous well at their sect. Therefore, faced with the demands from Taiping Dao and without reflecting for too long, Zhu Zhenghe expressed his agreement. This Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, led by Taiping Dao and Qing Immortal Sect, was expected to mobilize fourteen major and minor Immortal Sects, deploying more than fifteen True Persons, including two Earth Immortals With such formidable strength, eradicating a Yellow Springs Underworld was undoubtedly more than enough, For them in Xuan Turtle Mountain to participate, with so many fellow paths for support, the risk was not considered too high. Even if Taiping Dao intended to target them, under the watchful eyes of many, they would have to consider their reputation and not act too disgracefully. The risk was deemed controllable. Given this, there was no need to act petty, avoid issues, and refuse to take responsibility. The mobilization of the Immortal Sects on the Southern Domain¡¯s side, with the successive support from three Immortal Sects, was thus also deemed completed. For Qing Immortal Sect over there, matters were even simpler. They were originally a higher sect, and the various Immortal Sects under them belonged within the jurisdiction of Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s two major battle zones. At this time, with an order from the higher sect, many subordinates, who dared to refuse? Naturally, they responded in succession. With preparations completed on both sides, this Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony that affected much of the Changqing Domain also auspiciously commenced. Chapter 1282 - Chapter 1282 Chapter 508 Meeting in Xiaye ?Chapter 1282: Chapter 508: Meeting in Xiaye Chapter 1282: Chapter 508: Meeting in Xiaye After both sides completed their mobilization, Yi Dancheng met again with Yang Jihua to confirm the number of cultivators each side planned to dispatch. This operation needed to be carried out swiftly rather than slowly, and with precision rather than in large numbers. Therefore, only True Immortals at the level of Human Immortals and above would take action; cultivators below the level of Immortals would not be brought along. It wasn¡¯t just because many mouths make a noisy meal, but also because those with lower cultivation were more likely to cause complications; they didn¡¯t want to take any unnecessary risks. Consequently, the final count of personnel dispatched by both sides was confirmed as eleven Human Immortals and one Earth Immortal from the Changqing Immortal Sect. Which meant that on the side of Mi Yun Mountain, including Yang Jihua, ten messengers from the Northern and Eastern Immortal Gates, all Human Immortals, would participate in the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony. In addition, the Earth Immortal who presided over the headquarters of the Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s mountain gate would also bring the last flexible Human Immortal to Xiaye Country to meet up with the forces of Taiping Dao on this side. In this way, the entire Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony would involve fifteen Human Immortals and two Earth Immortals. In terms of strength alone, it was equivalent to half of the Changqing Immortal Sect. It was precisely because of such strength that all the True Persons participating in the ceremony had great confidence in their success, with hardly any worries. After all, If half of the Changqing Immortal Sect couldn¡¯t eliminate a Yellow Springs Underworld, then the strength of those ghosts would be overly exaggerated. Even in the recorded history of the entire Changqing Domain, there had never been such an occurrence. So with this in mind, what was there to fear? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Fighting alongside the two Earth Flower True Men, they would just need to kill all of those demons and ghosts. The chaotic situation in the Changqing Domain, with demons rampant, had long been an eyesore to many. They simply hadn¡¯t had the opportunity to address it due to the circumstances of the past. Now that the time had come, it was an excellent chance to sweep away all the turmoil and restore peace in the domain. Therefore, on that day, after the details of the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony were confirmed, Yang Jihua coordinated with the inner workings of his sect and ensured that the Earth Immortal True Man from his sect had already set off. On the side of Mi Yun Mountain, there was no delay either. ¡°Fellow Daoists, the matter of exorcising ghosts is urgent, please follow me,¡± said Qing Guanzi, looking at the assembled multitude of True Persons before him. With a long howl, he turned into a streak of green light and headed west. The various True Persons, already prepared for their journey, immediately took action upon Qing Guanzi¡¯s command, transforming into streaks of light and following him in succession. For a time, the entire sky was painted with the lights of the True Persons, like an extraordinary scene, colorful and beautiful to behold. At the peak in the mountains, Lu Yuan gazed at this spectacle, slightly transfixed. This rare sight of a group of Immortals setting out deeply imprinted on his mind, igniting within him a longing and desire. ¡°One day, my Taiping Dao will also have a gathering of True Ones, with thousands of Immortals paying homage,¡± he said in a low voice. Without lingering, Lu Yuan turned and returned to his cave mansion. With the drastic changes in the situation, the development plans he had originally set were becoming somewhat outdated and had to be amended to match the changing landscape. For example, Lu Yuan had only planned to gradually develop through controlling the territories of Qingyang, Damu, and Youxin Countries for ten thousand years before turning his attention toward contesting for the Changqing Domain. But now, with the emergence of the Yellow Springs Underworld in Xiaye Country and the grand Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony on the horizon, by the end of the ceremony, Xiaye Country would likely have been cleared out, and even Jiuchuan Demon Country next door could potentially be taken with ease. With that, all territories in the Southern Domain not under the control of an Immortal Sect would be in the hands of Taiping Dao. Having the land of five countries at his disposal, Lu Yuan would have access to an immense wealth of resources, enabling him to set aside three countries to ensure that one of his avatars meets the minimum requirements for breakthrough, while satisfying his own cultivation needs and accumulating resources for the Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade to break through the Dao Fruit of a Human Immortal. The singular path of development had transformed into a tripartite expansion. ¡°With the pace of my current cultivation, monopolizing the Qi Luck and destiny of Youxin Country alone, I should be able to break through to the mid-level of Human Immortal in about two hundred years, and reach the late stage of Human Immortal in about three hundred years. Once I have reached that stage, it¡¯s very difficult to advance further just by diligent cultivation. ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï I must rely on external forces, which is to say more cultivation resources, to continue progressing. And the best resources for cultivation are naturally Qi Luck and destiny. So from this point on, I¡¯ll use the destiny and Qi Luck of the three countries to accumulate magical power, refine my realm, and ultimately achieve the perfect state, at which point I can attempt to break through to Earth Immortal. Of course, to be on the safe side, when my avatar and I are ready to break through, we naturally will enjoy the Qi Luck and destiny of all five countries to the fullest extent, aiding the breakthrough.¡± These were Lu Yuan¡¯s new plans, adjusted according to the changing circumstances. So now, he too needed to cultivate. No longer could he leisurely enjoy tea and read books, spending his days in carefree ease as he had before. Fortunately, while cultivating, feeling the rise in magical power and undergoing a gradual transformation, gaining strength, was an addictive sensation. Lu Yuan did not find it monotonous. Cultivation for him was quite motivating. However, he wasn¡¯t completely engrossed in cultivation; in addition to his practice, he also spared a part of his attention to monitor the safety of Mi Yun Mountain. Qing Guanzi and Che Shidao had already joined the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony and headed for Xiaye Country. After their departure, to prepare in advance for the war with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Yi Dancheng went ahead to Qingyang Country. This country bordered the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s front outpost in the Southern Domain, the Qingyu Country, serving as the border line between the two opposing forces. Chapter 1283 - Chapter 1283 Chapter 508 Meeting in Xiaye_2 ?Chapter 1283: Chapter 508: Meeting in Xiaye_2 Chapter 1283: Chapter 508: Meeting in Xiaye_2 In the future, when the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate plans to invade the Southern Domain, the first country to be crossed will be Qingyang Country. This is the front line of the great war between the two sects. In this situation, Lu Yuan certainly had to properly manage this country and transform it into a fortress that acts as a solid reliance to shield the rear. Therefore, taking advantage of the fact that the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had not yet made a move, Yi Dancheng took the initiative and prepared to take over this country in advance. Then, he established branch courtyards on site, constructed a Dharma array, and started building the front-line battlefield. The leader of Taiping Dao would henceforth be permanently stationed here, personally supervising the front-line combat. It could be called the Cultivation version of ¡°The Emperor Defends the State¡¯s Gates.¡± To aid in this matter, before departing for the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, Yi Dancheng had already communicated with Ouyang Yuan and reached a consensus. The two forces operated by Jintai Gate in Qingyang Country, Qing Mountain Pavilion and Wind Thunder Fortress, would actively cooperate with Taiping Dao to take over the country and help eliminate the scattered Cultivator forces supported by Jiuzhou Immortal Gate like the Beidou Alliance. The two sects would make their utmost efforts to cooperate, striving to turn Qingyang Country into an ironclad defense before the war began, making it a formidable fortress to block Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. If you ask why Jintai Gate is so cooperative? It comes down to its geographical location. The Qingyu Country controlled by Jiuzhou Immortal Gate borders two countries in the Southern Domain. One is Qingyang Country, and the other is Anyu Country. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.?¦Ï Yes, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate has two routes for a deeper incursion into the Southern Domain, and Anyu Country, where Jintai Gate is located, is one of them. If Qingyang Country remained as disorganized as it is, relying on three local weak Immortal Sects, it naturally could not pose a threat to Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Among these sects, there are even puppet forces supported by Jiuzhou. If a real battle were to break out, they would only need a decree to easily conquer the entire Qingyang Country and change its allegiance. Once Qingyang Country was taken down, the only obstacle left for Jiuzhou Immortal Gate to advance further into the Southern Domain would be Jintai Gate. Without taking down Anyu Country, Jintai Gate¡¯s continued existence would threaten Qingyu and Qingyang, regardless of whether they liked it or not. So even for the security of their rear, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate would need to thoroughly clear the path forward. In their view, the existence of Jintai Gate had become an actual error. Errors should be corrected. Jintai Gate also recognized this point, so facing the impending war, it began to actively prepare. For them, finding an ally and building a mutually supportive and inter-supportive battlefield fortress near Anyu Country was undoubtedly the most effective method. With Taiping Dao in Qingyang Country, no matter how much this newly promoted overseer of the Southern Domain was prepared to invest here. As long as Taiping Dao¡¯s flag was raised, it would naturally become a target that attracts firepower, drawing the attention of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Most of the pressure on Jintai Gate¡¯s side would be shared by Taiping Dao. How could they possibly refuse such a favorable situation? Not to mention the two vassals within Qingyang Country, even considering that Taiping Dao had just arrived and lacked reliable manpower, Jintai Gate had already proactively suggested that they could provide a batch of loyal sect disciples to help Yi Dancheng defend Qingyang Country. Yi Dancheng naturally would not refuse such active support from his junior. Taiping Dao indeed lacked manpower. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Although on the surface, they declared themselves as a grand sect in lands beyond their domain. In reality, the entire Taiping Dao was made up of Lu Yuan¡¯s three Avatars and about a hundred or so Dao soldiers. With such a setup, they naturally could not support the facade of a grand sect. At this moment, making use of the junior sect¡¯s power was also a good thing for Taiping Dao. As for the risk of someone exposing their true situation? It didn¡¯t matter. In the Immortal Realm, regardless of how morally upright everyone claimed to be, in reality, it was still a case of the survival of the fittest, honoring strength above all. As long as the strength of Taiping Dao¡¯s three True Immortals was genuine, the other ordinary disciples who were not True Immortals were inconsequential. This had been stated before. As long as the True People at the top remained, those ordinary disciples, given a hundred years of cultivation, would just come to them naturally. Just like leeks, after one harvest, another grows, endless in supply. As long as Taiping Dao¡¯s True Immortals remained, others could not afford to underestimate them. At most, the absence of lower-level disciples might cause others to secretly speculate whether Taiping Dao had encountered some significant event that led to the breach of their entire sect. Maybe these True People were just survivors who fled to the Changqing Domain after a great disaster. But thinking this way only further highlighted the extraordinary origins of Taiping Dao, didn¡¯t it? A group of survivors possessing such strength. What then was the sight of Taiping Dao at its peak? Just the thought of it would make one wary and apprehensive, dare not provoke. As for seeking the powerful forces that caused the disaster for Taiping Dao, forcing them to eradicate these remnants? Lu Yuan stated that there truly was such a disaster that drove him to the Changqing Domain. Only, it was not another powerful Immortal Sect as they imagined, but simply a natural disaster of the Jiuzhou realm. Now, it was not even known if the Jiuzhou realm still existed. If you are interested, you are welcome to travel to Jiuzhou, and as long as you can return alive, even if it means wandering again, Lu Yuan would accept it. The condition is that you can find the Jiuzhou realm. After all, Jiuzhou realm had ascended so many cultivators, including dozens of Earth Immortals. So many predecessors had failed to do so, and he did not believe that any Immortal Sect in the current Changqing Domain could achieve it. Chapter 1284 - Chapter 1284 Chapter 508 Meeting in Xiaye_3 ?Chapter 1284: Chapter 508: Meeting in Xiaye_3 Chapter 1284: Chapter 508: Meeting in Xiaye_3 In short, Lu Yuan was not particularly afraid of being exposed regarding matters that might reveal his true identity. In comparison, what concerned him more was to defend and maintain control over the territories he currently possessed. This was the reason why, at the same time as the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, Yi Dancheng started actions against Qingyang Country without worrying about the emptiness of Mi Yun Mountain. It was all to seize the time and to lay out plans in advance. Fortunately, the emptiness of Mi Yun Mountain was only apparent to outsiders. Others did not know that within the mountain, a Lu Yuan was hiding, along with a True Immortal. Plus, with the Formation Methods that Mi Yun Mountain had been deploying for a long time, if some daredevil brashly intruded, he wouldn¡¯t mind sending the intruder to the netherworld. Adding another target to this Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony. a€| While Yi Dancheng had just begun its movements, Qing Guanzi and the others, who had set off earlier, had already arrived in Xiaye Country at this time. ¡°Is this Xiaye Country?¡± On the border, Qing Guanzi ceased his travel by magic, looked into the distance intently, observing the atmosphere ahead. All that could be seen was a vast land, much barren, and amid the autumn winds, there seemed to be the wailing of aggrieved spirits. Between mountains, rivers, and towns, demonic and ghostly auras dominated. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Countless demons strutted arrogantly through the streets and alleys, feasting on human hearts and lungs while laughing and joking, oozing a casual demeanor. What was once a paradise on Earth had been turned into this by those demons and devils. After only a few glances, Qing Guanzi snorted coldly, ¡°Rampant with demons, the common folk suffer greatly. This place is indeed a living hell. With people living in such suffering, it¡¯s no wonder that Huangquan exists.¡± The many other Masters present nodded in agreement, their faces showing indignation. As members of the Human Race, seeing these demons abuse their fellow people stirred a reaction not just from their stance but also from the Immortal Method they practiced. They couldn¡¯t possibly have any positive impression. ¡°What you¡¯ve said is true. The world has become so chaotic nowadays, all because of these demons, and even more so because of those who have indulged such creatures. These beastly spirits are all great enemies of our race and must be eradicated,¡± said one of them. At that moment, a loud laugh came from afar, and then a streak of green light swept towards them, landing in front of everyone. It revealed a carefree True Immortal with a handsome appearance, dressed in a green Taoist robe, a smile playing on his lips. This True Immortal glanced around at everyone, his gaze finally settling on Qing Guanzi. He raised his hand in greeting and said with a smile, ¡°Are you Elder Qing Guanzi of Taiping Dao? I am Song Xiren, the Elder of the Qing Immortal Sect. It¡¯s a pleasure to meet you.¡± While speaking, Song Xiren observed Qing Guanzi¡¯s demeanor, and couldn¡¯t help but silently mutter to himself, ¡®Both Person Flower and Earth Flower blooming atop his head, indeed an Earth Immortal Cultivation. But this Earth Flower of his is only one petal open, though it seems to be shining with golden light and colorful brilliance. But why do I have this feeling that it¡¯s all show and no substance, as if filled with dross inside? As though its Inborn development was incomplete? Is his foundation unstable, or has he recently suffered from some grievous injury to appear in this state?¡¯ The fact that Qing Guanzi was the weakest among Earth Immortals was ultimately something that couldn¡¯t be hidden. Previously, in front of other Human Immortals, he could conceal his true nature somewhat by using his superior realm to suppress others. But when facing another of the same realm of Earth Immortal, the opponent only needed to observe the aura of his Dao Fruit to discern the true extent of his abilities. At this time, Song Xiren had guessed Qing Guanzi¡¯s situation quite accurately. He knew that this Earth Immortal of Taiping Dao might have some issues. But even so, he didn¡¯t say anything. Regardless of whether the other party¡¯s foundation was damaged or if they had suffered some injury, the strength of the realm was genuine. With an Earth Flower Dao Fruit within him, even though weaker, he was still an Earth Immortal, a whole lot stronger than others and entitled to discuss the Tao with Song Xiren on an equal footing. Understanding that was enough. ¡°Greetings to Master Song,¡± said the many other Masters present, who recognized this Elder of the Qing Immortal Sect and hastily paid their respects upon his arrival. ¡°Greetings to you, Fellow Daoist Song,¡± replied Qing Guanzi, returning the greeting and sizing up the newcomer. He, too, was observing the other¡¯s demeanor. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 But upon this glance, he was inwardly shocked, because the two Tao Fruit Flowers atop the other¡¯s head were blooming luxuriantly, each with six petalsa€¡±a sign of an extremely stable foundation. Unlike him, although his Person Flower had three petals and a firm foundation, his Earth Flower had only one petal, barely meeting the requirements of an Earth Flower Dao Fruit. The difference in the Dao Fruit Flowers of the two of them seemed only two petals apart, yet their foundations were worlds apart. After becoming immortal, the cultivation process can actually be discerned from the Tao Fruit Flowers above one¡¯s head, which reveal a person¡¯s potential and foundation. A True Immortal¡¯s Dao Fruit is the condensation of a cultivator¡¯s Essence, Qi, and Spirit, encompassing their Magic Power, Divine Powers, and comprehension of the Great Tao. It is the fruit of a lifetime of arduous cultivation, hence it is called a Dao Fruit. The more complete a cultivator¡¯s Essence, Qi, and Spirit are, and the more they comprehend about Magic Power, Divine Powers, and the Great Tao, the more perfect and stable the Dao Fruit they can condense. Normally, if one of the threea€¡±Magic Power, Divine Powers, or Great Taoa€¡±reaches the level of an Immortal, they can condense a Dao Fruit and become a True Immortal. However, becoming an Immortal based solely on one aspect results in a Dao Fruit Flower with just one petala€¡±a weak foundation and an incomplete Tao. Although they can become immortal, it is the weakest form of an immortal. After becoming immortal, there¡¯s no path forward, and that constitutes an inferior Dao Fruit. If they can become immortal based on two aspects, condensing two petals of the Dao Fruit Flower, their foundation is passable, but still, something is missing. After becoming immortal, they can continue to refine their cultivation within that realm, but there¡¯s a limit. Usually, they encounter a bottleneck in the middle or late stage of that realm, and it becomes difficult to break through and ascend to the next level of the Immortal Realm. Only those who become immortal based on all three aspectsa€¡±completing the Dao Fruit Flower with three petals, with full Magic Power, Divine Powers, Great Tao, and their Essence, Qi, and Spirit in perfect harmonya€¡±have the most stable foundation and the possibility to ascend to a higher Great Realm. Take Qing Guanzi for instance. At the Human Immortal level, his Dao Fruit had three complete petals, which allowed him to break through to Earth Immortal. But after reaching the Earth Immortal level, because he had only enhanced his Magic Power to the Earth Immortal level relying on his past Qi Luck, without gaining any insight into Divine Powers or the Great Tao, he couldn¡¯t condense a Dao Fruit Flower. Thus, he could only produce one petal of the Magic Power flower and had an incomplete Dao Fruit. Unless he could supplement the other two aspects, he would essentially be stuck in the early stages of Earth Immortal. Chapter 1285 - Chapter 1285 Chapter 509 The Three Statutory Evils ?Chapter 1285: Chapter 509: The Three Statutory Evils Chapter 1285: Chapter 509: The Three Statutory Evils Yes, after bearing the Dao Fruit, one can still slowly replenish the foundation of the Dao Fruit. However, this replenishment process requires a considerable amount of energy and time. It¡¯s possible to be busy for three to five thousand years and only be able to make up for one aspect of it. There are quite a few Immortals who could not complete this replenishment before the end of their lifespan drew near. And completing the replenishment is merely the starting point. After that, one must cultivate magic power and advance one¡¯s cultivation, which takes even more time. How could common True Immortals have so much time to spare? Therefore, those with unstable foundations are generally regarded in the Immortal Realm as having reached the end of their Dao. At most, they can only enhance their magic power within their current realm. The possibility of breaking through to a higher level and ascending to a higher path, however, is nonexistent. Before Qing Guanzi had completed repairing his damaged foundation, it was impossible for him to advance any further. But the person before him, Song Xiren, with three perfect petals of the Earth Flower Dao Fruit, exhibits signs of profound understanding in both magic power and Divine Powers. With such a foundation, it is sufficient to support him in launching an assault towards becoming a Heavenly Immortal. Moreover, Song Xiren himself has already achieved mid-stage Earth Immortal cultivation, surpassing ordinary Earth Immortals, which speaks to the depth of his foundation. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ¡®Given his imposing presence, I¡¯m afraid he has received key training from the Qing Immortal Sect, treated as a seed of the Heavenly Flower Dao, fully supported. Even if one day he fails to condense the Heavenly Flower, he will at least be a late-stage Earth Immortal, not to be underestimated.¡¯ Qing Guanzi gazed at the other¡¯s Dao Fruit, lost in thought. The highest cultivation within Qing Immortal Sect naturally belongs to their School Leader, who is at the late-stage Earth Immortal level. But it is to be feared that after several thousand years, the lifespan of Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s School Leader is nearing its limit, and despite the time spent, he still hasn¡¯t managed to break through that barrier, evidencing a lack of fortune to become a Heavenly Flower Great True Person. In such a situation, in order to maintain the inheritance of the sect, Qing Immortal Sect naturally needs to look for an alternative. To ensure that after the incumbent School Leader falls, a new person can take over the burden and carry the banner in opposition to the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Now it seems that the chosen successor is none other than Master Song before me. Come to think of it, it makes sense. If Song Xiren can replace the School Leader and sit in the sect for a long time, his status and identity must be extraordinary, exceeding that of other Earth Immortals. This is the treatment due to an heir to the School Leader. Because on this side of the Immortal Realm, unless the life force is intercepted by branch temples, it all converges towards the Immortal Sect headquarters. Only at the sect headquarters, with the life force of the entire Changqing Domain at one¡¯s disposal, would someone have the privilege to break through to the Heavenly Flower. Therefore, under normal circumstances, the leaders of various Immortal Sects rarely leave their headquarters, the intent being to cultivate exclusively with the life force. It¡¯s a symbol of the identity of the School Leader. ?¦Ï??0.?¦Ï Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s School Leader, by ceding both the sustenance for cultivation and this symbol, has made the support and importance he places on it obvious without words. With such thoughts in mind, Qing Guanzi¡¯s estimation of Song Xiren increased slightly. Unless something unexpected happens, this person is most likely to be the future School Leader of Qing Immortal Sect. Taiping Dao is currently in a honeymoon phase with Qing Immortal Sect, and this relationship is set to continue for thousands of years to come. Establishing a good relationship with him at this time could undoubtedly bring many benefits to the future position of Taiping Dao. ¡°Just now, I heard from a fellow Daoist who expressed considerable indignation at the current state of rampant demons in Xiaye Country and wishes to pacify it. Coincidentally, I share the same thought,¡± While Qing Guanzi was deep in thought, Song Xiren also spoke up, ¡°The land of our Human Race Immortal Sects, won by our ancestors as they cleared thorns and brambles from the Wilderness, should we just relinquish it to the demons? The situation that has arisen in Xiaye Country, the situation in Southern Domain, the local Immortal Sects here, including our Qing Immortal Sect, we bear an indelible guilt.¡± He glanced at Zhu Zhenghe, Ouyang Yuan, and others, a trace of coldness flashing in his eyes. If it was said that their Qing Immortal Sect fought against the demons with all the strength they had, and ultimately could not overpower them, forcing them to reluctantly leave Southern Domain, it could be seen as having the will but lacking the strength, a fault not of their own making. But the local Immortal Sects in Southern Domain actively reached out to conspire with the demons, eagerly delivering the territory that belonged to Qing Immortal Sect into the hands of demons. Now that Southern Domain has become this way, the demons are to be credited for thirty percent, Jiuzhou for another thirty percent, but the lion¡¯s share of forty percent lies squarely with the three great Immortal Sects of Southern Domain. As for such verminous traitors and criminals, how could Song Xiren hold any good impression of them? Zhu Zhenghe and the others also knew the reasons underlying the situation, so they naturally lowered their heads in the face of the True Person¡¯s barbed words, not daring to talk back. Fortunately, Song Xiren did not dwell on this as after all these individuals had now become vassals of Taiping Dao. Since the two sects were in a period of cooperation, it was not appropriate to upset the big picture over past grudges. Therefore, after merely mentioning it, he continued, ¡°Due to various reasons in the past, even seeing the continuous rampages of demons, we were powerless to intervene. Now that an opportunity has arisen today, with all of us True Immortals gathered here, let¡¯s seize this chance to amend our past errors. I propose that we join forces and before holding the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, we first sweep through Xiaye Country. We shall thoroughly cleanse the demons here, leaving not one behind, and restore peace to Xiaye Country.¡± Qing Guanzi had not expected that, even before he could raise the matter, Song Xiren had already articulated the words he intended to say. With the other party being so considerate, what more could he say? So he immediately replied, ¡°Indeed, what Song Daoist friend said is correct. Since we have come, we cannot merely focus on exorcising ghosts. Not only the Yellow Springs Underworld of Greedy Belly City, but all the various demons in Xiaye Country must be eliminated without exception. Chapter 1286 - Chapter 1286 Chapter 509 The Three Statutory Evils_2 ?Chapter 1286: Chapter 509: The Three Statutory Evils_2 Chapter 1286: Chapter 509: The Three Statutory Evils_2 It¡¯s not just Xiaye Country, but I feel that the two evil dragons from the neighboring Jiuchuan Country must also be eradicated. How dare these mere monsters establish a nation and claim sovereignty on the lands of the Human Race? They clearly do not take us, the Immortal Sects, seriously. Of the three great demon nations in the Southern Domain, the Great Eye Kingdom has already been pacified by my Taiping Dao, and Xiaye Country is currently being cleansed. How can the last one, the Jiuchuan Demon Country, stay out of this affair?¡± Taking advantage of the situation, Qing Guanzi brought out the tasks assigned by his true form under the guise of subduing demons and eliminating monsters. Upon hearing these words, all the True Persons exchanged glances with each other. None of them were fools; they were well aware that Taiping Dao wanted to use this opportunity and the gathered strength of everyone to help them eradicate the demons and monsters in the Southern Domain. It was essentially using a public matter for private gain. However, subduing demons and eliminating monsters is the righteous path of Immortal Sects. According to the rules, Immortal Sect disciples, when they come across demons committing evil and have the strength to stop them, should indeed intervene and eliminate them. This is the obligation of all, and it cannot be said that it is none of our concern and solely Taiping Dao¡¯s private affair. But forcing everyone to get involved in this way will inevitably leave some feeling displeased. After all, they had come here to exorcise ghosts, not to subdue demons and eliminate monsters. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï It was the existence of the Yellow Springs Underworld, which affected their safety, that made them willing to contribute. As for those two evil dragons in the Jiuchuan Demon Country? They¡¯ve been quietly residing in the Dragon Palace for thousands of years, never causing trouble, just being homebody monsters, posing no threat to anyone. Why would we risk our lives to provoke them, just for the sake of Taiping Dao? Among those present, there were not only members from the Southern Domain Immortal Gate who were part of the Taiping Dao camp and needed to give face to Taiping Dao. The Immortal Sects from the Northern and Eastern Territories did not follow Taiping Dao, so why should they help you out? Therefore, as soon as Qing Guanzi¡¯s words were spoken, the atmosphere became somewhat chilly, with nobody responding. The few Immortal Sects from the Southern Domain looked at each other, and among them, Ouyang Yuan opened his mouth, preparing to smooth things over for their new leader. But before he could speak, Song Xiren was the first to laugh and say, ¡°What Brother Qing Guanzi says is right, killing the demons of Xiaye Country is to subdue demons and eliminate monsters. Killing the evil dragons of Jiuchuan Demon Country naturally falls under the same category. After all, it¡¯s all demon-slaying, without differentiating between this country or that. Since we¡¯re here, let¡¯s simply eliminate them all together to prevent future troubles. It¡¯s better than leaving them be and later regretting the problems they cause.¡± Taking into account the need to resist Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, and even the upcoming war between Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate in the Southern Domain, this was indeed not the time to leave other demons and monsters around to cause trouble for Taiping Dao from behind. After all, Changqing Immortal Sect has already promised to send True Persons to reside permanently in the Southern Domain to help Taiping Dao stabilize the region. From this perspective, maintaining the security of the Southern Domain also falls under the responsibility of Changqing Immortal Sect and aligns with their interests. Song Xiren, of course, had no reason to oppose. Seeing the True Persons showing some reluctance, he immediately helped his new ally out of the awkward situation. And with his stance, the many juniors from the Northern and Eastern Territories naturally followed suit. ¡°Master Song is correct, subduing demons and eliminating monsters is our duty. Why differentiate between this nation or that?¡± ¡°Exactly, since we¡¯re already here, it doesn¡¯t matter to kill one or two more evil dragons.¡± ¡°We are willing to follow the two True Persons to cleanse the Southern Domain of demonic influences.¡± Many True Persons spoke in agreement, and the atmosphere immediately became more relaxed. Seeing this, Qing Guanzi did not mind the previous awkwardness and immediately clapped his hands, laughing, ¡°Since all the fellow Daoists agree to this proposal, let us settle it this way. This Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony will start with the demons of Xiaye Country, focus on the Yellow Springs Underworld at Greedy Belly City, and finally end with the Jiuchuan Demon Country. After resolving these three threats of the Southern Domain, this Dharma Assembly shall be declared complete.¡± Strike while the iron is hot. Qing Guanzi took this opportunity to set the tone for the three matters directly. Song Xiren couldn¡¯t help but smile at this Tai Shang Elder from Taiping Dao, finding his fondness for taking advantage a bit speechless. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? But he cooperated, saying, ¡°Then let¡¯s do as you say, eliminating the three threats will mark the conclusion of the Dharma Assembly.¡± After speaking, fearing that Qing Guanzi might bring up other matters, attempting to mix public and private business, he quickly added, ¡°Now that we have set our goal, and with time being of the essence, let¡¯s not delay. Unexpected changes could occur if it drags on too long. Let¡¯s take action immediately. Xiaye Country is not large, spanning a total of around one hundred fifty-six thousand li, and here we have seventeen True Persons. It is ideal that each takes responsibility for ten thousand li. Everyone can choose a location, pick a spot you wish to go to, and start eliminating those demons and monsters, then reconvene at Greedy Belly City. As for the surroundings of Greedy Belly City, which involves the Yellow Springs Underworld, Brother Qing Guanzi and I will take the lead and head there to supervise.¡± In Xiaye Country, aside from the Yellow Springs Underworld that suddenly appeared around Greedy Belly City with a True Immortal-level Ghost Emperor making an overt presence, The rest were just a bunch of minor demons and monsters. The strongest among them were only at the Five Qi Towards Primordial level, relatively weak Demon Kings and Ghost Kings. In fact, there might not even be as many of these Demon Kings and Ghost Kings as True Immortals present. Therefore, for the task of clearing these demons and monsters, Song Xiren wasn¡¯t too concerned. He simply allowed the other True Persons to deal with them as they saw fit, as long as they did not cause delays. ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°We will follow the True Person¡¯s decree.¡± Upon hearing the command, all the True Persons present complied. Song Xiren gave a slight smile, then looked at Qing Guanzi and raised his hand, saying, ¡°Brother, let us two go to Greedy Belly City first.¡± Qing Guanzi waved his sleeve, ¡°Good!¡± Upon saying that, the two Earth Immortal True Persons took the lead and flew towards Greedy Belly City. Chapter 1287 - Chapter 1287 Chapter 509 The Three Statutory Evils_3 ?Chapter 1287: Chapter 509: The Three Statutory Evils_3 Chapter 1287: Chapter 509: The Three Statutory Evils_3 The remaining True Persons, watching the two Emperor Immortals leave in a streak of light, glanced at each other and, in a flash, they transformed into streaming rays of light, heading in the directions they each desired. Zhu Zhenghe was one of them. The direction he chose was towards the west, close to the territory of Youshan Country. As he flew, his heart ached. ¡°Hosting a Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony is one thing, but why drag us into subduing demons and exorcising monsters?¡± ¡°That Master Song, always stirring up unnecessary trouble; the Qing Immortal Sect has already withdrawn from the Southern Domain, yet he still interferes. And that Taiping Dao, using the Dharma Assembly as a cover to pursue their own selfish aims, utterly shameless, the most shameless of them all!¡± Zhu Zhenghe constantly cursed under his breath, filled with resentment. However, it wasn¡¯t without reason. What was the situation in Xiaye Country previously? It was a battleground for supremacy between Xuan Turtle Mountain and Jiuchuan Demon Country, each supporting their own Demon Kings and Ghost Kings in an open and secret struggle for dominance. In other words, for Xuan Turtle Mountain to sustain such a long contest in the Xiaye Country, their influence there was naturally not ordinary. And indeed it was so. At least one-third of the Demon Kings and Ghost Kings in Xiaye Country were aligned with Xuan Turtle Mountain. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï These Demon Kings and Ghost Kings were the Spiritual Beasts and Dao soldiers they had released, cultivated with great care to be the foundation of the sect. Now Song Xiren and Qing Guanzi, with a word here and a comment there, were set on exterminating all the demons and monsters in Xiaye Country. Wasn¡¯t that akin to killing the Spiritual Beasts and Dao soldiers of Xuan Turtle Mountain? And on top of that, vanquishing demons and exorcising monsters was indeed the righteous path of the Immortal Sects. Even knowing that such actions would harm the interests of Xuan Turtle Mountain, Zhu Zhenghe still could not voice his objections; he even had to agree with a smile. How could he possibly be happy about this? Therefore, as soon as he left with the others, his pent-up anger and resentment burst forth. But even so, Zhu Zhenghe didn¡¯t have much time to dwell on these emotions. Because he needed to find Xuan Turtle Mountain¡¯s demons and monsters before the other True Persons carried out their exorcisms and exterminations, and allow them to retreat in advance, to escape this imminent catastrophe. ¡°The spiritual messages have been sent out; the Spiritual Beasts and Dao soldiers from our sect should have received them by now. I hope they can make it in time to escape from this place. May the loss to Xuan Turtle Mountain this time be minimized, and may we preserve more of our vitality,¡± he thought. Zhu Zhenghe flew toward the closest location of his sect¡¯s Spiritual Beasts, praying silently in his heart, then couldn¡¯t help but curse again, ¡°That Taiping Dao, truly a disaster. Ever since they arrived, our sect has never encountered any good fortune, utterly detestable.¡± While he was cursing to himself, the targets of his curses, Qing Guanzi and Song Xiren, had already arrived in Greedy Belly City. ¡°Is this Greedy Belly City?¡± Qing Guanzi looked at the deserted city below, furrowing his brow slightly. Below, the streets of the city were empty, void of any sign of life. Not only were there no living people, but even the monsters and demons had vanished without a trace. No, to be more precise, some traces were left behind. Because on the streets within the city, there were quite a few desiccated and lifeless remains, both human beings and demons alike, each one having lost its soul and had its essence blood sucked dry. Without a doubt, all living beings in the city had perished. ¡°Stealing souls and sucking the essence blood are the methods of ghosts,¡± Song Xiren also observed the situation below and couldn¡¯t help but comment, ¡°Not just humans, even demons were harmed. These ghosts from Huangquan are relentless; they don¡¯t just target humansa€¡±they spare no living creature, or rather, they do not let any living being escape. Their ferocity exceeds even that of demons.¡± In the hands of demons, humans may still serve as livestock to ensure a supply of blood; there exists a slim chance of survival. But in the clutches of ghosts, it¡¯s all about soul-sucking and blood-draining, an undoubted death sentence. The hatred of those undead for the living is almost ingrained in their souls, impossible to eradicate. This situation is particularly dire in the Yellow Springs Underworld, where living humans are non-existent. For the ghosts there to survive and maintain their sanity, they can only devour and slaughter each other, consuming one another. What kind of temperament can you expect from those who emerge from such a terrible environment? Only those ghosts that have mingled among humans and fed sufficiently on human souls to regain their sanity turn out to be better off. Because food is plentiful and there is no need to struggle for survival, they naturally become less aggressive. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã0 A full granary enables one to observe decorum. Although describing the relationship between ghosts and humans in this way is somewhat abstract, the principle is the same. Well-fed, the ghosts are no longer hungry; with emotional needs and in a good mood, they are naturally more willing to reason with humans. Don¡¯t believe me? Look at those unfinished tales of human and ghost affection; don¡¯t they occur only among the living? In the Underworld, do you see ghosts falling in love with humans? A human in such a place is like a sheep in a den of starving wolvesa€¡±simply unable to survive, let alone entertain love. Even romances in the human world, The love between a female ghost and a Scholar typically persists only with the misfortune of other humans as a backdrop. Ghosts definitely need to feed on humans; since they don¡¯t eat you, then others must sustain their existence. Or perhaps both must be met. Some are less scrupulous, engaging in romance while concurrently consuming youa€¡±such ghosts also exist. In that regard, Song Xiren saying that ghosts are more ferocious than demons, indeed makes sense. ¡°What you say is true, Fellow Daoist; precisely because of this, the Yellow Springs Underworld must be eradicated. If we allow the gathering of ghosts within to escalate and become influential, they will become a great enemy to all living beings. The entrance to the Yellow Springs Underworld is right here, inside this city.¡± Qing Guanzi activated his Dharma Eye and scanned the interior of Greedy Belly City time and again, but unable to find anything, he gave up, turned around, and asked, ¡°My knowledge of Huangquan is limited, and I have never encountered it before. I couldn¡¯t find it; do you, Fellow Daoist, have any findings?¡± Hearing this, Song Xiren couldn¡¯t help but laugh, ¡°It¡¯s normal that Fellow Daoist cannot find it. We refer to the Yellow Springs Underworld as Yin World, distinguishing it from the Yang World in which we reside. Hence the term ¡®Two Realms.¡¯ Since they are two separate worlds, ordinary Divine Powers naturally cannot penetrate the barrier between these worlds. Special means are required to bridge the Two Realms and locate the entrance to the Yin World. This matter was already on my mind when I arrived, and I came prepared; Fellow Daoist need not worry.¡± Chapter 1288 - Chapter 1288 Chapter 510 The Gate of the Yin World ?Chapter 1288: Chapter 510: The Gate of the Yin World Chapter 1288: Chapter 510: The Gate of the Yin World Previously in the Changqing Domain, there were three Yellow Springs Underworlds that appeared one after another. At that time, the Qing Immortal Sect was still the overlord of the Changqing Domain, so naturally these three Huangquan were also managed by them. As for how to enter the Yin World, the sect had long had detailed records, and even Song Xiren himself had visited the Huangquan Underworld helmed by the Qing Immortal Sect many times and was quite experienced in this matter. Upon hearing Song Xiren¡¯s account, Qing Guanzi couldn¡¯t help but ask with curiosity, ¡°Oh, to enter the Yellow Springs Underworld, I wonder what conditions are needed?¡± The original realm of the Nine Provinces was just a small world, and therefore, there were no such special Yin World existences as Yellow Springs Underworlds that are dependent on a large world. Hence, in ancient times, those Immortals who traveled between the Immortal Realm and the Nine Provinces didn¡¯t mention the Yellow Springs Underworlds much. After all, even within the Immortal Realm, such a thing is considered quite rare and not commonly seen. Many cultivators could potentially go their entire lives, right up to the moment of their final transformation, without ever having any dealings with the Yellow Springs Underworld. Therefore, related records naturally became extremely rare. By the time it reached Lu Yuan¡¯s generation, even though he had gathered knowledge from across the world and obtained all existing collections in the realm of the Nine Provinces, the information he ultimately got about the Yellow Springs was still very sparse. Only some immortal anecdotes were passed down as mythological stories. They were far removed from their original true forms. Thus, Lu Yuan was indeed very unfamiliar with the Yellow Springs Underworld. He just knew of its existence, but the specifics were unclear to him. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï As an Avatar, Qing Guanzi knew even less than his original self. Now that he had a chance to find out more, he was naturally quite curious. ¡°It¡¯s actually no secret,¡± Song Xiren smiled and didn¡¯t keep it to himself, generously saying, ¡°Taiping Dao has already taken charge of the Southern Domain, and your sect, as the ruler of this land, naturally has the responsibility to maintain the order here. Now that the Yellow Springs Underworld has emerged in the Southern Domain, it¡¯s beneficial for my fellow Daoist to understand more about the Yin World so as to better suppress it. I will certainly not withhold knowledge regarding the Yin World; If you have any questions, I shall share all I know. The Yin World depends on the Yang World but also operates independently. Usually, it conceals itself, remaining unknown to outsiders. There are in fact various methods to travel to the Yin World. The most common one is to practice the Ghost-divination Technique, Those who divine the ghosts are also divining the path to the netherworld. That is, through Taoist Techniques, one finds a path to the Yellow Springs Underworld from the connection between the Yin and Yang Worlds. Our Immortal Sect has always had the Thirty-Two Heavenly Gang Skill and the Seventy-Two Earth Evil Skill. Among them, the Ghost-divination Technique from the Earth Evil Skill can penetrate the Netherworld Court, allowing free travel within it. However, such techniques are rarely seen due to the scarcity of the Yin World. Unless there is a need to communicate, most Immortal Sects generally do not get involved, hence they are not commonly seen. In the Changqing Domain, only our Qing Immortal Sect and those Nine Provinces rebels practice it, because there are Yellow Springs Underworlds within our territory. If my fellow Daoist wishes to learn, I have the Changqing Ghost-divination Skill here to offer. You can study it privately.¡± As he said this, Song Xiren swept his sleeve, and a jade slip flew out, landing in front of Qing Guanzi. Upon seeing this, Qing Guanzi hurriedly waved his hands, ¡°A unique technique from your honorable sect, I dare not ask for it, it¡¯s improper, improper.¡± Song Xiren shook his head, ¡°This technique is not particularly precious; it is only rare because it is special. Besides, so many sects across the world have it, it¡¯s a common technique, not an exclusive one. Furthermore, the Yellow Springs Underworld has appeared in Xiaye Country, and Taiping Dao bears the responsibility of suppression. If you do not possess a method to enter and exit the netherworld, how can you fulfill your duties? It is for the welfare of the people of the world, not for personal gain. Just based on this point, my fellow Daoist should accept it.¡± With the argument made to this extent, Qing Guanzi had no choice but to accept it. He took the jade slip, conveyed his divine sense into it, and immediately a tidal wave of recorded information surged towards him. ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï But as Earth Flower True Man, the information of just one Taoist Technique was not difficult for him. In just a few breaths¡¯ time, he had read through the entire technique and gained a superficial understanding of it, grasping the subtleties. While he wouldn¡¯t claim to be an expert, with a bit of time, he would be able to execute it. Song Xiren was righta€¡±this was one of the most commonly used and most popular Ghost-divination spells. It wasn¡¯t complicated or difficult. At the level of an Earth Immortal, just a single reading would enable one to employ it. After understanding the entire technique, Qing Guanzi also came back to his senses, then looked at Song Xiren and made a respectful gesture, ¡°The Ghost-divination Technique of your esteemed sect is indeed profound and enlightening. I am deeply grateful for your generosity in sharing it and shall never forget it.¡± ¡°It¡¯s just a mere technique,¡± Song Xiren waved his hand, and without being proud or taking credit, seeing that the other party had learned the technique, he continued, ¡°Besides the Ghost-divination Technique, there are a few other methods to enter the Yin World. One is to receive recognition from the Yin World, or to carry the Qi of the Yin World, which means you have a connection to the Yin World. Thus, no special methods are needed, and you can naturally enter it. This is also why those ghosts from the Underworld can come and go from the Yellow Springs as they please. Because they are inherently connected to the Yin World, it¡¯s as if they carry a key with them, which allows them to open the door to the Yin World whenever they wish. If we capture the Yin World, we can also harness its Qi to create a Magical Artifact or Talismans that could act as keys to this particular Yin World.¡± Chapter 1289 - Chapter 1289 Chapter 510 The Gate of the Yin World_2 ?Chapter 1289: Chapter 510: The Gate of the Yin World_2 Chapter 1289: Chapter 510: The Gate of the Yin World_2 ¡°However, that could only be done once we had breached the Yellow Springs Underworld, which is not possible at this juncture.¡± ¡°Another method involves waiting for a special time. The Yin World clings to the Yang World, operating according to the rules of the Yang World. When the rules of both sides meet, contact and overlap naturally occur.¡± ¡°So, we only need to wait for this time, when the Yin and Yang realms intersect, and a natural entrance will appear, allowing us to enter.¡± ¡°This just requires waiting for the right time.¡± ¡°If we¡¯re lucky, the intersection of Yin and Yang could happen in the next moment. If not, it may take thousands or even tens of thousands of years, with no guarantee.¡± ¡°The probability of success is too low, so basically, no one chooses this path to enter the Yin World.¡± ¡°The above three methods are the mainstream ways for someone from the Yang World to enter the Yin World.¡± ¡°There may be other paths, but I am unaware of them.¡± ¡°Fortunately, with these three methods available, they¡¯re enough for our use,¡± he said. Song Xiren modestly introduced all the known methods one by one. After listening, Qing Guanzi couldn¡¯t help but admire deeply, ¡°Having heard friend¡¯s explanation, I now understand the methods to explore the mysteries and have truly broadened my knowledge.¡± Song Xiren smiled, ¡°These are just some obscure pieces of knowledge. In fact, compared to entering the netherworld beneath Huangquan, the ghosts residing in the Underworld are more difficult to handle.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï How much suppression will we face after we enter?¡± This Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony required them to delve deep into Huangquan. As Song Xiren had put it, these living cultivators, upon entering the Yin World, would face severe suppression, greatly diminishing their strength. How severe would this suppression be? And how strong were the ghosts in the Yin World? How many were there? These were very real and urgent questions. It concerned the safety of these True Persons once they entered the Yellow Springs Underworld later on. Matters of life and death must be approached with caution. ¡°I have never entered this Yin world and am unclear of the specifics inside. If I were to speculate, you wouldn¡¯t trust me, it would be misleading to both you and myself,¡± said Song Xiren. Song Xiren shook his head, avoiding boastfulness, and said after careful thought, ¡°However, according to the records in my sect¡¯s archives and my previous experiences with several Yin Worlds, newly-born Yin Worlds tend to have a shallow foundation due to less discharged turbid qi and impurity they receive.¡± ¡°A Yin World born less than ten thousand years ago is unlikely to nurture a Yama, a ghost of such caliber that could be considered the ruler of a realm.¡± ¡°However, there are exceptions.¡± ¡°If a certain area is especially chaotic, with too many living beings dying and too much accumulated turbid and impure qi, then it might lead to a newly-opened Yin World being extremely powerful from its inception.¡± ¡°In such cases, it may not take thousands of years before a Yama emerges to unify the Underworld.¡± ¡°Thus, the strength of this Yin World depends on when it was born and how much turbid and impure qi it has gathered.¡± ¡°The turmoil in Changqing Domain started ten thousand years ago, when a Great True Person from my sect passed away, leaving no Heavenly Immortal to suppress it.¡± ¡°And in the thousands of years since, the Southern Domain has also been in chaos, with three countries even being occupied by demons; the situation, in fact, is not that good.¡± Song Xiren did not elaborate further, but with a gentle tap, moved on. Chapter 1290 - Chapter 1290 Chapter 510 The Gate of the Yin World_3 ?Chapter 1290: Chapter 510: The Gate of the Yin World_3 Chapter 1290: Chapter 510: The Gate of the Yin World_3 ¡°` After all, to delve deeper into the subject would be to recount the long, millennia-long history of decline of the Qing Immortal Sect, which was a vulnerable point steeped in blood and tears for them, revealing it would be tantamount to tearing off a scar. But Qing Guanzi had already discerned the underlying meaning in their words. That was to say, the Changqing Domain had already been in chaos for ten thousand years, which actually met the requirements for a Yin World that had formed over the same amount of time. And even if this Yin World wasn¡¯t born ten thousand years ago but was a product of the last few thousand years, the Southern Domain here has also been in turmoil for these few thousand years, with a variety of demons and monsters taking turns in power, and the Immortal Sects engaging in all sorts of overt and covert struggles, leading to countless deaths and significant incidents. These factors could also satisfy the requirements for a Yin World to gather a large amount of filthy and turbid qi during its birth. In any case, although it was unlikely, there was still a slim possibility that a Yama, comparable to Emperor Immortals, might appear in the Underworld below. It was precisely for this reason that the Qing Immortal Sect attached such importance to this matter this time, even sending over the successor to the next School Leader to personally participate in this Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony. A Yama, no matter how important, could not be overestimated. ¡°As for how much suppression we may face in the Yin World?¡± Song Xiren continued, ¡°Under normal circumstances, the suppression shouldn¡¯t be too significant, and the higher one¡¯s cultivation, the less restraint one experiences. Mortals below the level of True Immortals may face over fifty percent suppression. But when one reaches the level of a Human Immortal, it is possible to borrow the power of Heaven and Earth, and in each place, by simply manipulating the laws of Heaven and Earth, one can obtain the natural advantage of the terrain. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï With this advantage offsetting the suppression, it can be contained to around twenty percent, allowing a Human Immortal to exert over eighty percent of their combat prowess. When one becomes an Earth Immortal, it becomes even possible to replace the laws of Heaven and Earth with one¡¯s own Immortal Method, artificially creating a Boundary Domain that aligns with one¡¯s own strength. At this time, the suppression from the Yin World becomes even smaller. We can exert over ninety percent of our strength within the Yin World. As for Heavenly Immortals, they transform their method into the Heavenly Path, completely changing the rules of the realm. Being in the Yin World not only lifts the suppression but also allows them to suppress those ghostly beings in turn, establishing an even greater advantage. Moreover, only one Yama can be nurtured within a Yin World. Given the situation in the Yin World of Xiaye Country, even if a Yama has emerged, its Cultivation time wouldn¡¯t be long, equating at most to an early-stage Earth Immortal, and its strength couldn¡¯t be too formidable. Therefore, Fellow Daoist, if you join me below, our combined effort can easily face a Yama of the same realm. Even with slight suppression, we would still have the upper hand. Even if we can¡¯t slay it, to emerge unscathed and leave this realm is still without problem. Not to mention, the existence of a Yama is still an unknown. It¡¯s more likely that the Yin World below will have just one or two Ghost Emperors, with strengths not surpassing that of a Human Immortal. Those would be even simpler to handle,¡± said Song Xiren, perceiving Qing Guanzi¡¯s apprehensions and offering reassurance. ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï In reality, if the risk of this mission were indeed so great, how could he have come here? The Qing Immortal Sect wouldn¡¯t have allowed their next School Leader to risk his life in a dangerous place. His presence here indicated that the risks of the Yin World in Xiaye Country were not substantial and were within controlled, safe bounds. It was just that Qing Guanzi was not aware of this fact, having too little understanding of the Yin World and only hearing those exaggerated tales, which was what caused some panic. After hearing Song Xiren put it this way, Qing Guanzi finally had a better understanding of the general situation of the Yin World. Feeling reassured, he then said with a smile, ¡°If that¡¯s the case, this Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony should undoubtedly result in swift success.¡± As soon as he finished speaking, a streak of light flew from the distance, and an Immortal from the Eastern Territory arrived before the two of them, giving them a polite bow. ¡°I have seen the two True Persons.¡± Seeing someone arrive, the two of them also ended their discussion. Looking toward the newcomer, Song Xiren asked with a smile, ¡°No need for formality, Fellow Daoist. Have you returned having cleansed the area of demons?¡± The newcomer nodded, ¡°Indeed, where I was situated, there were approximately over three hundred lesser monsters, scattered across several areas. A few spells, and they were all cleared.¡± ¡°Excellent!¡± Song Xiren applauded and praised, ¡°Subduing demons and eradicating evil is our duty. Fellow Daoist has practiced these noble deeds; the Immortal Path is not solitary.¡± As they spoke, several other Immortals from near Greedy Belly City began to arrive one after another. Just as the person from before had said. To a True Immortal, dealing with lesser monsters that weren¡¯t even Immortals was truly as easy as flipping one¡¯s hand, not at all difficult. With many True Persons taking action, in a moment¡¯s work, they could cleanse a whole nation of all big and small demons. And so it was. In less than a quarter of an hour, the many True Persons who had separated returned to Greedy Belly City. Seeing that everyone had arrived, Song Xiren didn¡¯t delay any further, saying with a laugh, ¡°Since all Fellow Daoists have returned from demon extermination, one of the three evils of this Dharma Assembly has been eradicated. We¡¯ve had our appetizer, so let¡¯s move on to the main course. I will now open the gate to Huangquan, and all Fellow Daoists will accompany me into the Underworld to commence the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony.¡± With those words, Song Xiren raised his hand to form a seal, and immediately a hazy light shot out from his hand, entering directly into the ground beneath the city. Even whilst conversing with Qing Guanzi earlier, he had already surveyed the surrounding environment, probing for the entrance to the Yin World using his ability to communicate with the spirits, gaining some insights. As he cast the spell now, it was incredibly precise and took effect immediately. As soon as the hazy light entered the ground, the surrounding Heaven and Earth became heavier in an instant. A cold yin aura emanated from within the city. Infinite filthy qi gushed forth, mingling with gusts of Yin Wind, opening a gateway on the ground and unlocking the door to the Yin World. Seeing this, the surrounding True Persons frowned and cast a Purification Light to keep the murky Yin Qi at bay. ¡°Fellow Daoists, the gate to the Yin World is open, let¡¯s go in,¡± said Song Xiren, ceasing his spell and looking back at the group to address them, then taking the lead and flying into the portal. Having gained understanding earlier, Qing Guanzi no longer feared the Yin World and followed in haste. The other True Persons, seeing the two Earth Immortals proceeding without concern, had nothing more to say. Transforming into streaks of light, they all surged into the gate to the Yin World. This marked the moment when the immortals cleared the human realm of monsters, then turned to enter the shadows to drive out demons, truly a testament to the genuine cultivation of the Immortal Sect. ¡°` Chapter 1291 - Chapter 1291 Chapter 511 Ghost City Formation Network ?Chapter 1291: Chapter 511 Ghost City Formation Network Chapter 1291: Chapter 511 Ghost City Formation Network Having entered the Yin World, the entire feeling of Heaven and Earth was different. Qing Guanzi leaped out from the Yin and Yang Gate, steadying his form and looking around cautiously, but suddenly felt much relieved on seeing the silhouette of Song Xiren ahead. That fellow Daoist is still here, and nothing has happened, which means this place is temporarily safe. That is good. ¡°Fellow Daoist Song, where is this place?¡± Composing himself, Qing Guanzi looked at Song Xiren ahead, who seemed to already have some understanding of this place, and asked. The latter shook his head, ¡°I¡¯m not clear about where this is. Although the Yin World is small compared to the Yang World, like countless tiny stars, each being inconsequential, when compared to any particular part of the Yang World, it¡¯s still immensely vast. The smallest of the Yin Worlds spans thousands of miles. A slightly larger one stretches over several hundred thousand miles, comparable to a small country in the Yang World. I just checked, and this Yin World seems to have come into existence not long ago, probably not more than three thousand years. But even so, given the thickness of the dark and turbid air here, it must also be about sixty or seventy thousand miles in size. Even for me, it¡¯s not easy to fully grasp its features in a short time.¡± After becoming immortal, a Human Immortal can, in a single thought, manipulate the corresponding rules of Heaven and Earth within a hundred miles, using the great power of Heaven and Earth for oneself. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã0 Therefore, the limit of a Human Immortal¡¯s Divine Sense starts at a hundred miles and can reach up to two or three hundred miles when cultivation is perfect, several times stronger than at the beginning. Upon reaching Earth Immortal, one can transform the laws cultivated into a domain. With a mere thought, the domain covers a thousand miles, within which one can manipulate the forces of the domain as if commanding the Heavenly Path, being almost omnipotent within the capability of the domain. Song Xiren, being a mid-stage Earth Immortal, has a domain that covers much more than in the early stages, reaching up to fifteen hundred miles. But even so, he couldn¡¯t fully cover the Yin World, not even a fraction of it. In such a circumstance, it was naturally impossible for him to understand the situation here right upon arrival. Being able to discern this much already was extremely valuable. Qing Guanzi realized the difficulty of his question and gave an awkward smile before shifting the topic, ¡°With only sixty or seventy thousand miles, isn¡¯t it true that this Yin World couldn¡¯t possibly give rise to a Yama? Perhaps not even a Ghost Emperor, except for the one that appeared initially in Greedy Belly City?¡± In the Immortal Realm, the area of a small country is at least a hundred thousand miles. Ordinary countries are generally about fifteen to sixteen thousand miles, and twenty thousand miles is not rare. It is widely known that for a cultivator of the Five Qi Towards Primordial stage wanting to become immortal, the best shortcut is to have control over the fate of a country. Hence, becoming immortal with the resources of a country has become one of the default conditions in the Immortal Realm. Though the Yin World differs from the Yang World, both belong to the Immortal Realm; the Yin World is even a vassal of the Yang World, with generally similar rules. If this Yin World is only sixty or seventy thousand miles wide, it¡¯s roughly half the size of a country in the Yang World. With such limited space and resources, how many true dragons can lively shallow waters nurture? It¡¯s likely having one previous Ghost Emperor was already the limit of this realm, and that was sheer luck. With these limited resources, even if another Ghost Emperor were to emerge, the existing one would probably not allow it. After all, he too needs to cultivate. The resources he occupies are only equivalent to half of those needed by a Human Immortal to cultivate in the Yang World, and even those are barely sufficient. If another person were to share them, they might as well not cultivate at all and just lie flat together. Moreover, normally in the Yin World, if there is only one Ghost Emperor, he reigns supreme. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 If another one were to appear, then the concentrated power would have to be shared. How many intelligent beings would tolerate such an occurrence? Only if a Yin World was large enough from the start, or if many ghosts grew up together, balancing each other out and avoiding a dominant power, would there be multiple Ghost Emperors coexisting. Clearly, this is not the case here. Given the resources here, at most they could support one Ghost Emperor. Since this Ghost Emperor has already appeared, naturally it also means other competitors have been defeated. The king wins, the loser perishes; the world is cruel like that. But for Qing Guanzi and his companions, this was undoubtedly good news. The powerful Yin World they had envisioned was nonexistent upon their actual arrival. The enemy they needed to face turned from the highest Yama into just a single Ghost Emperor. This difficulty in their journey suddenly shifted from hellish to extremely simple. Anyone would feel a surge of joy in this situation. Song Xiren smiled and nodded, ¡°Just as you thought, fellow Daoist, this time our mission to expel ghosts only requires us to deal with that one Ghost Emperor. Once he is gone, the Dharma Assembly can be notably successful.¡± As he said this, his gaze wandered around. At this time, the many True Persons accompanying had also arrived in the Yin World and gathered around the two of them. Song Xiren¡¯s words were not only in response to Qing Guanzi but also meant for everyone to hear. To set their minds at ease. Indeed, hearing the two True Persons talk like this, the expressions of the others eased and relaxed significantly. No Yama, just a Ghost Emperor equivalent to a Human Immortal. With such an enemy, it¡¯s not just about the two Earth Immortals present; even if just three to five of them teamed up, one punch and one kick each would be enough to finish it off. With that being the case, what is there to fear? They should just begin this shoulder to shoulder. Qing Guanzi noticed the shift in everyone¡¯s thoughts and, seizing the moment, said, ¡°Since that¡¯s the case, we don¡¯t need to be too cautious. Just like the previous time in Xiaye Country when we cleared out the monsters, let¡¯s divide into groups of two or three and spread out within this Yin World for a thorough sweep.¡± Chapter 1292 - Chapter 1292 Chapter 511 Ghost City Formation Network_2 ?Chapter 1292: Chapter 511 Ghost City Formation Network_2 Chapter 1292: Chapter 511 Ghost City Formation Network_2 ¡°Clear out all those ghosts along the way.¡± ¡°If you encounter the Ghost Emperor on the way, immediately send out a signal, and we will rush to your aid.¡± ¡°Resolve the situation here in the shortest time.¡± Having said that, he paused, then remembered another purpose of this Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, and added, ¡°Right, previously, a disciple of Dongyang Mountain sacrificed himself to protect hundreds of thousands of citizens of Greedy Belly City and numerous fellow cultivators from the Ghost Emperor. He was ultimately dragged into this Yin World. If any of you fellow cultivators see him, please save his life, lest he falls victim to the ghosts.¡± Song Xiren nodded in agreement, ¡°Indeed, such righteous heroes who steadfastly adhere to the righteous path should not die here.¡± The two reached a consensus, setting the tone for the mission. Seeing this, the many other True Persons exchanged glances and all answered in unison, ¡°We will carefully follow the commands of the two True Persons.¡± Afterward, the True Persons each found one or two familiar fellow cultivators to form small teams and flew off in different directions towards various parts of the Yin World. As for Song Xiren and Qing Guanzi, they headed towards the center of the Yin World. That place, where the turbid energy and Yin energy were the strongest, was the most likely location of the Ghost Emperor. As leaders, although they were certain there weren¡¯t many risks in this world, they still remembered their responsibilities and didn¡¯t leave everything to their subordinates. They actively took on the greatest risks and tasks themselves. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï Traveling through the Yin World, what met their eyes was a gray, foggy sky. It was somewhat like night, but there was no moon visible in the sky, only a desolate emptiness filled with bleak, pale Yin clouds that enveloped the entire world. ?¦Ï??0.?¦Ï On the ground, there were endless Yin Winds, blowing from unknown origins, from all directions. Even the ground beneath them occasionally let out nameless Yin Winds, truly making them impossible to guard against. These Yin Winds were not ordinary winds but somewhat similar to the nameless winds that blew from within an Immortal when they achieved the Earth Flower Dao Fruit. However, that nameless wind was formless and insubstantial, merely a concept similar to wind, and it only blew within the Immortal, targeting the Immortal¡¯s Dao Fruit. Failure to withstand it meant dissolution of the Dao and death. These winds of the Yin World, however, emanated from the outside world, tangible and substantial, affecting one¡¯s Divine Soul Body. Under the erosion of the Yin Wind, a person¡¯s vital energy and divine soul would be constantly waning. If it continued for a long time, the outcome would be a decline in vital energy and the dispersal of the soul. This wind targeted not only the living but also the souls in the Yin World. And because they lacked the protection of a physical body, the damage from the Yin Wind to these souls was even more severe. A typical newly-formed soul, upon being blown upon twice by the wind, would directly disperse into nothingness, becoming part of the Yin Wind itself. Therefore, as Qing Guanzi and his companion traveled, they barely saw any souls wandering outside, making the wilderness of the Yin World even more desolate than that of the Yang World. ¡°This Yin Wind of the Yin World is actually the turbid energy expelled by the Yang World into the Yin World,¡± he explained. ¡°It¡¯s just that this turbid energy is far too dense and hasn¡¯t had the chance to dissipate into Yin energy and spread throughout Heaven and Earth in the form of Qi.¡± ¡°That¡¯s why to us, this breath of Heaven and Earth feels too advanced and difficult to endure.¡± ¡°We Immortals, when confronted with the energy of Heaven and Earth, feel discomfort, not to mention ordinary souls. ¡°Even though the turbid energy is a nutrient for them, its level is too high, and without having been dissipated, they cannot absorb it at all.¡± ¡°Once the turbid energy passes through, not only are they unable to absorb it, but they also become nutrients themselves, absorbed by the turbid energy.¡± ¡°Thus, one can see many souls blown apart by the Yin Wind formed from this turbid energy, disintegrating on the spot and turning into Yin Wind themselves.¡± ¡°Only ghosts with cultivation and divine powers are sturdy enough in their soul bodies to have methods to cope and can survive amidst the Yin Wind. ¡°However, even then, they cannot endure for long, and a prolonged existence outside this wilderness is unsustainable.¡± On the way to the center of the Yin World, Song Xiren, noticing that Qing Guanzi was somewhat perplexed, voluntarily explained the characteristics of the Yin World to him. ¡°Therefore, in order to survive in the Yin World, some local souls, after observing the patterns of the Yin Wind, would establish settlements in regions that are forever free from the Yin Wind, that is, points that don¡¯t connect with the Two Realms of Yin and Yang.¡± ¡°When these settlements grow in size, they evolve into Ghost Cities, inhabited by Ghost Kings.¡± ¡°Among those Ghost Kings, if there¡¯s a powerful one who can defeat the others and conquer the settlements, then they can link them together, forming a whole that includes many special nodes of the Yin World.¡± ¡°Because the locations of these individual city settlements are isolated dead zones of the Yin World, they theoretically have a restraining and weakening effect on Yin energy.¡± ¡°Linking together many cities situated in such dead zones, and connecting various City-protecting Formations even minimally, can create a Formation that covers a large area of the Yin World.¡± ¡°With this Formation Method, the Ghost Kings can directly weaken the Yin Wind formed from the turbid energy, diluting it into a state that is absorbable for them, between turbid and Yin energy.¡± ¡°If one were to draw an analogy, it would roughly be like the Essence of the Sun and the Water of the Moon formed from high-grade spiritual energy within our Immortal Sects. ¡°At equal amounts, the Essence of the Sun refines with an efficiency and yield tens to hundreds of times that of regular spiritual energy and also possesses special functions that can aid in cultivation.¡± ¡°Relying on such means, Ghost Kings of the Yin World can extract Water of Huangquan from the Yin Wind.¡± ¡°This spiritual water, though detrimental and useless for my Immortal cultivation, might be used in cultivating some special Divine Powers.¡± ¡°But for those ghostly beings, consuming this spiritual water for cultivation not only increases their Magic Power but also boosts their success rate for Breakthrough Realms by several fold.¡± Chapter 1293 - Chapter 1293 Chapter 511 Ghost City Formation Network_3 ?Chapter 1293: Chapter 511 Ghost City Formation Network_3 Chapter 1293: Chapter 511 Ghost City Formation Network_3 For the barren Yin World, this was almost the best path for local ghosts to achieve the status of a True Immortal. ¡°Fellow Daoist, look ahead. There is a city in the Yin World. Take a closer look, is there a formation inside? Is this formation connected to other major formations?¡± The two were passing through the area when a city¡¯s outline appeared in the distance. It was not very large, only about ten miles in circumference, but it was the first place they had encountered where ghostly souls were active. This naturally drew attention. Qing Guanzi fixed his gaze and saw that the city¡¯s main structure was made of walls inscribed with Wind-controlling Techniques. The Yin Wind blowing from outside the city hit the walls and was immediately blocked by a large amount of Wind-blocking Runes on the outside. Even within the city, a large Wind-controlling Formation had been established, creating a safe sheltered area. With the strength of this formation, even if it encountered a powerful storm made of Yin Wind, it would withstand it. However, the primary ability of these formations was merely to block Yin Wind. Beyond that, their protective capabilities were minimal, only resisting attacks from ghosts below Three Qi. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Against ghosts with Four Qi or higher, they were somewhat inadequate. This was reasonable, though. In such a barren place as the Yin World, which the Yang World used as a dumping ground for waste, being able to gather resources, build such a city, and equip it with a city-protecting formation was already the limit. To expect more, making it stronger, was difficult for people. However, Qing Guanzi didn¡¯t place much importance on the city¡¯s formation; his attention was still on the seemingly imperceptible connection between this formation and Heaven and Earth. Yes, the connection. With his divine sight, he could clearly see that the formation within the city continually emitted a kind of spiritual energy radiation, acting like a node in a network and extending filaments that spread towards the outside world. Above the external world, there were other radiation points that also extended filaments, connecting with these city formations. Qing Guanzi had not noticed this before. It was only after being reminded by Song Xiren that he suddenly became aware of it. Many formations were connected, supporting a massive network that almost covered the entire Heavenly Vault. The infinite Yin Wind falling from the sky was intercepted by this network before it hit the ground, channeling a large amount to a certain place. According to Song Xiren, it was probably being used to refine the waters of Huangquan. And he himself was just within the coverage area of this network. Fortunately, this network was only aimed at intercepting Yin Wind, its ability being more towards interception rather than preemptive attacks. Otherwise, they would have been detected and immediately faced an attack from formations that encompassed the entire Yin World the moment they stepped into the Yin World. After understanding the environment they were in, Qing Guanzi couldn¡¯t help but feel fortunate, ¡°Such a tight network, and it is fortunately not a Kill Array.¡± Song Xiren looked at him with a relieved expression and laughed, ¡°Fellow Daoist, you now understand the peculiarities of the Yin World, right? There is no need to be overly frightened, because the Yin World is barren and resources are scarce. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? Even though such great formations can be built, imbuing them with great power is very difficult. Being able to block Yin Wind is already the limit. In terms of how much lethal power it possesses, it¡¯s not outstanding. For us True Immortals, the only thing we need to guard against are the ghostly beings of the Yin World that use formations to gather large amounts of impure Qi and Yin Wind to assault our bodies and Divine Souls. But there¡¯s also no need to worry too much, as within our Immortal Sect, we have numerous spells and Supernatural Powers to isolate Yin Wind, as well as various Magical Treasures to resist this kind of tactic. So, faced with some purely isolated Yin Worlds, we do not have to be overly concerned about external factors, such as formation methods and Magical Treasures, being harmful to us. The only thing we need to be wary of are those ghosts who have obtained Dao Fruit, like the Ghost Emperor and Yama. Those ghostly beings, with just their Cultivation, can pose a threat to us, being truly formidable enemies.¡± Song Xiren provided slight reassurance for a moment, then remembered something else and added, ¡°Of course, this is just in closed-off Yin Worlds. If it is one of those Yin Worlds that has been conquered by us, brought under our administration, or has always been communicative with the outside world, it¡¯s not included in this advice. With resources supplemented from the outside world, the Yin World¡¯s domain-wide formations can be transformed from pure interception arrays to grand formations with multiple functions such as interception, slaughtering, alarm, and support. That would be the real Heavenly Net. Outsiders stepping into it will find themselves caught in its deadly traps, and even we Earth Immortals, if not careful, might perish. Fellow Daoist, if you ever visit such a Yin World in the future, you still need to be extremely cautious and not be careless.¡± Qing Guanzi listened and nodded solemnly, ¡°I understand, thank you for the reminder, Fellow Daoist.¡± Seeing him understand the importance, Song Xiren nodded slightly, then smiled, ¡°Since we have discovered the Ghost City of the Yin World, finding the center of this realm has also become much simpler.¡± ¡°Following the connections of the city¡¯s formations to where the Yin Wind is directed, we should be able to find its core.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s hurry and clear the ghostly beings from this city, then go look for the Ghost Emperor.¡± As he spoke, Song Xiren took out a Green Jade, and threw it toward the Ghost City ahead. The jade flew to the top of the city and immediately burst into bright green light, celestial light pouring down, and before the city¡¯s ghostly souls could react, they were turned into ash by the celestial light. In just the space of a breath, thousands of ghostly souls within the city were swept clean. After doing this, Song Xiren gestured with his hand to retrieve the jade, then turned and said, ¡°This city has been cleared, let¡¯s move to the next one.¡± Qing Guanzi nodded, following the other toward the nearest city within the grand formation network, closer to its core. Along the way, they encountered seven more Ghost Cities, directly casting spells to clean them up before continuing on their journey. It took them flying ten thousand miles to finally trace the marks and arrive at the core of the great formation of the Yin World. A huge city spanning hundreds of miles, and within the city, a blazing sun soared into the sky, manifested by Sword Intent, entered their sight. Chapter 1294 - Chapter 1294 Chapter 512 Subduing Ghosts to Save People ?Chapter 1294: Chapter 512: Subduing Ghosts to Save People Chapter 1294: Chapter 512: Subduing Ghosts to Save People ¡°We¡¯re here,¡± Qing Guanzi looked at the scene ahead, particularly when he saw the Soaring Sword Qi, his face couldn¡¯t help but brighten: ¡°There¡¯s still Sword energy in the city, Brother Li is still alive and entangled with the Ghost Emperor.¡± Song Xiren nodded slightly: ¡°As expected from Dongyang Sect, to engage with a True Immortal for nearly a day as a mere mortal, even if he was bestowed treasures, it is indeed no small feat.¡± Indeed, although a lot had been accomplished during this Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, it started with Li Ruoqing and others going to Greedy Belly City to rid it of ghosts, followed by a grand battle with a host of demons. Then the Ghost Emperor appeared and swept Li Ruoqing into the Underworld. Next was Xiong Guoyi coming to Mi Yun Mountain to seek help, then reaching a consensus with Taiping Dao and Qing Immortal Sect, until now as the Immortals cleared the demons from Xiaye Country and stormed into Huangquan. All these events, in reality, had taken place in less than a day. The reason for this efficiency was, naturally, the Flying Escape Technique of Cultivators and the swift and convenient communication methods. From Xiaye Country to Mi Yun Mountain, it was merely a hundred thousand li. With Xiong Guoyi¡¯s Five Qi Towards Primordial cultivation, flying at full speed to reach Mi Yun Mountain and ask for help took merely half a day. Once Qing Guanzi received the news, he directly communicated with Yang Jihua who, with a single spell, could contact Song Xiren tens of thousands of li away. After just a few communications, the details of the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony were hammered out. Upon rushing to this place, with the True Immortals¡¯ Flying Escape Technique, the entire process didn¡¯t even take a Timing. So adding everything up, even if counting from the Ghost Emperor¡¯s appearance at Greedy Belly City, the whole duration had only been about five to six Timings. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï The efficiency of Immortals at getting things done, when determined, was indeed this rapid. And precisely because of this, The past conflicts between Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had placed such great emphasis on timing and Time. Because as soon as there¡¯s even the slightest movement on your end, the other side can instantly receive the news and react accordingly, the entire process never exceeding a Timing. In such a situation, without assured victory or favorable timing, it is truly difficult to achieve any surprise effect. Your opponent will not give you an opportunity. The successful holding of this Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony was also due to utilizing the founding celebration of Taiping Dao, which resulted in a slight oversight by Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. But even so, Qing Guanzi and others couldn¡¯t afford to delay for too long. Otherwise, once Jiuzhou Immortal Gate responded, things wouldn¡¯t be as easy as they are now. Therefore, having confirmed their arrival at the correct place, Qing Guanzi looked at the battlefield ahead, which was already declining and the Sword energy beginning to dissipate, and immediately said: ¡°Since we¡¯ve found the principal, let¡¯s not delay any longer, and take action immediately to drive out the ghost and save people.¡± Song Xiren nodded, ¡°We can take action now, but in the process, Friend Daoist, you may spare the Ghost Emperor¡¯s life.¡± Qing Guanzi asked in confusion, ¡°Why so?¡± Song Xiren knew that this Daoist friend was indeed not very knowledgeable about the matters of the Yin World, so he explained carefully: ¡°Friend Daoist, do you really think that by holding this Dharma Assembly and killing this Ghost Emperor, or even purging the Underworld of its numerous ghosts and rescuing Brother Li, that everything will be concluded?¡± Qing Guanzi didn¡¯t understand: ¡°Isn¡¯t this the end?¡± Song Xiren shook his head: ¡°Of course it¡¯s not the end. The Yin World has already been born, as a mechanism for Heaven and Earth to dispel turbid qi, a manifestation of the operation rules of Heaven and Earth. From the moment of its creation, the Yin World has been impossible to destroy.¡± At least, it cannot be destroyed by anyone less than a Great True Person. And with so much turbid and Yin qi here, there will naturally be an attraction for ghosts to gather. Even if you eradicate all the ghosts in the Yin World today, considering the multitude of Yin spirits throughout the world, constantly being born, it is truly an endless task. In no time at all, tens of millions more ghosts will congregate here. After a few hundred years of strife among them, perhaps a new Ghost Immortal will emerge. Endure a few thousand years, and there might even be a Yama. Then, Friend Daoist, are you going to hold another Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony? ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Will those remnants of Nine Spirits give you the opportunity?¡± After hearing this, Qing Guanzi finally came to a realization, then furrowed his brows and said: ¡°According to what Friend Daoist suggests, this indeed poses a hidden danger that cannot be ignored. You want me to spare this Ghost Emperor¡¯s life, could it be that he holds the solution to this issue?¡± Having been the hegemon of the Changqing Domain for tens of thousands of years, Changqing Immortal Sect had previously suppressed and pacified three Yellow Springs Underworlds, gaining rich experience. For years within their domain, there had been no reports of disturbances arising from Yin World ghosts, which indicates the effectiveness of their methods in resolving such troubles. Thus, Qing Guanzi earnestly sought advice. ¡°This Ghost Emperor, indeed, can solve this hidden danger. Or rather, such a Ghost Emperor is needed to help resolve it.¡± Song Xiren affirmed with a nod, and then said: ¡°Ghosts cannot be eradicated entirely, as long as there are living beings in the world, the spirits of the dead will continue to emerge in an unending stream. Blocking is impossible, so one must resort to dredging.¡± Since ghosts cannot be eradicated, then there¡¯s no need to do so. Or rather, why should we? Life and death are natural, Yin complements Yang, this is the cycle of natural law, the Great Tao.¡± We, as Cultivators, seek to abide by the Heavenly Path, not to defy it. Just as we need the energy of Heaven and Earth to fuel our cultivation, we establish Divine Methods to ordain Divine Spirits on behalf of Heaven, Allowing these gods to assist Heaven and Earth, to sort out the energy veins, and to maintain better operation of Heaven and Earth. If the very existence of this Yin World represents a channel through which Heaven and Earth expel turbid qi, then it indicates that it is reasonable. We should not try to stop it. Instead of obstructing, why not emulate the system of City Gods in the Yang World, and directly ordain divine spirits for the Yin World as well? Establish an Underworld Yamen just like the City Gods in the Yang World, set a hierarchy of respect and order, and define clear duties.¡± Chapter 1295 - Chapter 1295 Chapter 512 Subduing Ghosts to Save People_2 ?Chapter 1295: Chapter 512: Subduing Ghosts to Save People_2 Chapter 1295: Chapter 512: Subduing Ghosts to Save People_2 ¡°` Then shall we leave a group of Yin Gods to help Heaven and Earth process the turbid qi and aid us in managing the yin spirits? In this way, these Yin Gods would be bound by our Talisman Charters, their lives held in our grasp, dare not to rebel. With divine spirits supervising yin spirits, constrained within the confines of the Yin World, they would be unable to escape. We control the Yin Gods, who in turn manage the yin spirits, the process harming no one. Yet the order between Yin and Yang realms would thus be established. The living shall not infringe upon the dead, and the dead shall not infringe upon the living, each in their place, in harmonious order, also the principle of natural justice. However, to ensure all this, to maintain the order of the Yin World, it is necessary to leave behind a powerful Yin God to act as the master of the Netherworld Court and suppress the throngs of ghosts. Although it is most reliable to cultivate a trustworthy person to take up this position of Yin God, it is the most assured. But now, I reckon you, Brother Li, do not have much time or energy to nurture such a person. The most expedient and reliable method would be no other than to subdue a powerful Ghost Immortal, take their Divine Soul, place restrictions, grant a divine office, and use them for our purposes. Not only would this resolve our immediate dilemma, but it would also yield the strength of a True Immortal for free, enhancing our own foundation. With Divine Method Talisman Charters at hand, there is no fear of their rebellion. First, deal with the pressing matters at hand, use it for a few thousand years, and once its lifespan ends, it¡¯s not too late to replace it. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï With your lifespan, Brother Li, surely you aren¡¯t afraid that you can¡¯t outlast a mere Ghost Immortal, correct?¡± Having finished his piece, Song Xiren looked towards Qing Guanzi with a smile brimming with intent. In his bid to win Taiping Dao as an ally, he truly laid his cards on the table. He not only revealed the intricacies but also guided them step by step on how to establish the Netherworld Court system, additionally seeking ways to strengthen his ally¡¯s power, and pre-empted any potential pitfalls. In terms of due diligence, even parents could do no better. The sincere commitment of the Qing Immortal Sect towards Taiping Dao was truly beyond reproach. Qing Guanzi understood this and was moved to say after the other had pointed out the key points: ¡°Brother Li has assisted me so, I truly do not know how to repay you. Today¡¯s kindness, our Taiping Dao will surely bear it in mind, and dare not forget.¡± Song Xiren waved his hand dismissively: ¡°Our alliance was formed exactly for mutual support through adversities. If you really wish to thank me, just firmly hold onto this Southern Domain. Don¡¯t let those remnants of the Nine Spirits seize this treasured land and become a major threat to my Qing Immortal Secta€¡±that would be the best gratitude.¡± Though Taiping Dao currently appears to possess an Earth Immortal and two Human Immortals, which seems quite commendable and with a foundation of a large sect, That is all there is to it. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? A large sect against the union of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, comprised of five large sects, honestly does not seem as impressive. And that¡¯s without mentioning that the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate is further backed by four other Immortal Sects born of the same origin. This implicit force is even more formidable. Even the Qing Immortal Sect feels pressured facing the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, often being pushed back. For Taiping Dao, with merely three True Immortals, confronting this force indeed seems weak and at constant risk of being obliterated. The Qing Immortal Sect truly values this newly emerged ally capable of sharing their burden and does not wish for them to perish prematurely. Previously, it was agreed to deploy a permanent True Immortal to help Taiping Dao consolidate the Southern Domain. Now, another suggestion to subdue a Ghost Immortal and establish the Netherworld Court is given. All of these actions are aimed at strengthening Taiping Dao¡¯s power, so that they can better resist the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and share the burden placed upon the Qing Immortal Sect. Hence all this comes with a price. Now, Song Xiren is offering so much to Taiping Dao in hopes that in the future, on the battlefield against the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, they will exert greater effort, shed more blood, and doggedly stand their ground. I offer resources and knowledge; you pay with blood and life. It¡¯s a sort of equal exchange in a sense. As for whether Taiping Dao will agree to subdue the Ghost Emperor and appoint him as master of the Netherworld Court, neither True Person mentioned it. Facing two mighty Earth Immortals, what room does a mere Human Immortal have to refuse? Under the absolute suppression of realm and strength, even the chance for a Human Immortal to commit suicide is nonexistent in the presence of Song Xiren and Qing Guanzi. From the moment they stood there and found that Ghost Emperor¡¯s true body, the outcome was already predetermined. As the two conversed, the immense Sword Intent in the distance simply grew dimmer, and the towering force gradually dwindled to within the city, only managing to hold a corner, barely protecting itself. Seeing this, Qing Guanzi and Song Xiren had nothing more to say. Song Xiren looked into the distance, saying: ¡°Brother Li seems to be unable to hold on any longer. We should make our move quickly to capture the Ghost Emperor and rescue him.¡± Qing Guanzi nodded and volunteered: ¡°Since this is a matter concerning my Southern Domain, allow me to act. Brother Li, please wait here; I shall return shortly.¡± Having just received so much help from Song Xiren and being the host, Qing Guanzi felt uncomfortable asking more from his guest at this time. After all, against a Ghost Emperor at the Human Immortal Realm, even though he himself was a superficial Earth Immortal, he could still overpower an opponent of this level. Song Xiren had no objections. He wasn¡¯t particularly concerned about a mere Ghost Emperor. Since his ally wanted to demonstrate their power, he might as well let them have their way and save himself the effort. So he said with a smile: ¡°Then I shall eagerly observe Brother Li¡¯s Divine Powers.¡± Qing Guanzi nodded, without much ado, his form drifted as he moved toward the distant Ghost City. ¡°` Chapter 1296 - Chapter 1296 Chapter 512 Subduing Ghosts to Save People_3 ?Chapter 1296: Chapter 512: Subduing Ghosts to Save People_3 Chapter 1296: Chapter 512: Subduing Ghosts to Save People_3 In the blink of an eye, he arrived at the heart of the battlefield. Now that he was closer, he could clearly see a hundred-zhang-wide sword energy that continuously emitted scorching sunlight, incinerating and destroying everything that drew near. Not far away, thousands of ghost creatures howled and gathered, forming a thick dark cloud. Gusts of black wind swept through, bringing to mind the term ¡°wails of ghosts and howls of gods.¡± Behind the hordes of ghost creatures, a hundred-zhang-tall giant shadow dressed in an emperor¡¯s garb sat calmly atop the dark cloud. At this moment, the shadow was exhaling dense black smoke, wrapping up numerous ghost creatures and turning them into wave after wave of tides, constantly crashing towards the sword energy. As soon as the two forces approached, the shadowy ghost creatures were instantly incinerated by the sword energy. But after incineration, the sword energy dimmed a notch, clearly having consumed a fair amount of its power. From this situation, it seemed that in another hour or two, this powerful sword energy would be completely exhausted by the endless ghost creatures. However, being able to force a Ghost Immortal to avoid direct confrontation with just a sword energy showed that the swordsmanship of Dongyang Mountain was indeed extraordinary. ¡°Looking at that Sword Intent, it almost becomes a rule unto itself. This is definitely not something a Human Immortal who still relies on the rules of Heaven and Earth could condense; instead, it must be the handiwork of some Earth Immortal adept in swordsmanship. For an Earth Immortal True Person to bestow such sword energy for protection, this Li Ruoqing must hold no low status on Dongyang Mountain. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï Coming here to save him was indeed the right move. Through this affair, my Taiping Dao might be able to forge quite a bond with Dongyang Mountain.¡± Qing Guanzi thought this way, his hands not slowing down. Upon nearing the scene, the Ghost Emperor below finally noticed someone approaching. But before the other could react, a golden seal flew out from Qing Guanzi¡¯s sleeve. The seal took flight, and under the influence of magic power, it swelled against the wind. In the blink of an eye, it grew hundreds of zhang large, overshadowing the entire sky of the battlefield. The dazzling seal revealed four large characters on its bottom ¨C ¡°Myriad Peoples Peaceful.¡± It was indeed the Myriad Peoples Seal from Lu Yuan¡¯s three Peaceful Immortal Artifacts. Before setting out for the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, considering the highest possibility of encountering an Earth Immortal equivalent to Yama and having to battle in an opposing powerful environment, Lu Yuan, for safety reasons, had bestowed his personal Myriad Peoples Seal for Qing Guanzi to carry for self-protection. Now, in order not to lose face in front of his peers and also to show off his own strength as much as possible, Qing Guanzi directly employed the Immortal Artifact, ready to display his skills in front of Song Xiren. And facing the full force of an Earth Immortal wielding an Immortal Artifact, a Ghost Emperor with no defenses at all, naturally stood no chance. The Myriad Peoples Seal did not even employ its inherent Divine Powers, merely smashing downwards once, it directly shattered the hundred-mile dark cloud and scattered the souls of tens of thousands of ghost creatures within. The Ghost Emperor seated on the dark cloud stumbled from the impact, his Dharma aspect collapsed, and he plunged straight down from the sky. Then, halfway through his fall, a golden light from the Myriad Peoples Seal captured the Ghost Emperor, who had been shaken out of the Dharma aspect, in mid-air. That was the Light of Humanity. Manifesting the Qi Luck, which had been sustained for a thousand years by the entire Nine Provinces, it recorded the whole world¡¯s rise and fall. Concentrating the will of over a hundred billion people from the Great Chu Dynasty for a thousand years, it was majestic and profound beyond compare. Any person illuminated by this light is as if oppressed by a whole dynasty¡¯s world, and if they cannot resist, they are unable to escape the fate of being suppressed. This was especially true for those ghostly and undead beings. Facing this most regal and overwhelming Light of Humanity, it was like encountering a nemesis, Inborn to lose thirty percent of one¡¯s Strength, utterly suppressed. Just like now. A seal slammed down, scattering the horde of ghostly souls, the Ghost Emperor fell to the ground, utterly powerless to resist. Once the Light of Humanity shone on him, the Ghost Emperor was as good as captured. The entire process was as smooth as flowing clouds and water, with not the slightest hindrance, so simple and easy that it was hard to believe. ¡°Fellow Daoist possesses such marvelous Divine Powers, such wonderful Magical Treasures.¡± After Qing Guanzi wielded the seal and suppressed the Ghost Emperor, Song Xiren then gracefully arrived, took a look at his fellow Daoist, focusing on the Magical Treasure in his hand, and couldn¡¯t help but praise, ¡°Such a heavy treasure of humanity, truly a demon-eliminating tool. With this in hand, there will be no more worries in this part of the Yin World.¡± Song Xiren had not expected that his fellow Daoist would be able to take down the Ghost Emperor so swiftly. Though there were factors such as a surprise attack, Great Realm suppression, and the use of Immortal Artifacts involved. There was also the fact that the Ghost Emperor came from the countryside, possessed few powerful Divine Powers and magical spells, and lacked Magical Treasures and broad experience, hence his Strength likewise belonged to the lowest class among Human Immortals, making him easy to bully. With these multiple factors stacked together, such miraculous effects were achievable. Possibly, being able to suppress a ghostly Immortal so cleanly and efficiently could indicate that this fellow Daoist¡¯s Strength was not as weak as his apparant Realm suggested. At the very least, when wielding an Immortal Artifact, he still could display formidable combat power. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï This showed that facing the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Taiping Dao could still put up a fight, and would not collapse at the first blow. Having this assurance was enough. Qing Guanzi modestly smiled, ¡°I merely relied on the power of my Realm and Magical Treasure, I dare not accept such high praise from my fellow Daoist.¡± Although taking down the Ghost Emperor went smoothly, it was only because the opponent was too weak, and he had ambushed with a Magical Treasure. He was well aware of his own Strength. He wouldn¡¯t become arrogant and lose himself over a couple of compliments. Even with a Magical Treasure to rely on, facing true powerhouses of the same Realm, who¡¯s to say they wouldn¡¯t have Magical Treasures as well? Considering the heritage of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and the Qing Immortal Sect, Qing Guanzi did not believe he could outcompete them. Therefore, he knew it was necessary to keep a low profile where it¡¯s due. And while the two conversed, the city below, amidst the sudden turn of events, finally began to react. Everything had happened too suddenly, catching everyone off guard. By the time the ghostly beings in the city woke up and saw their Ghost Emperor, once high above, now being casually captured by the two Immortals in the sky as if he were a mere toy. In an instant, their morale crumbled, and they desperately fled towards and out of the city. Below, within the sword energy, they now became aware of the changes outside. Suddenly, the strong Sword Intent exploded, turning into a torrent of sword energy, sweeping in every direction. The numerous remaining fleeing ghosts were swept away by the sword energy, instantly turning to ash, their wails disappearing. Then, a green figure flew out from within, landing before the two True Persons. ¡°Li Ruoqing of Dongyang Mountain, greets the two True Persons.¡± A resolute and restrained youth bowed to the two True Persons, gratefully saying, ¡°Thank you, True Persons, for exorcising the ghosts, or this junior¡¯s life would have been in peril. I will remember this life-saving grace forever and dare not forget it.¡± Chapter 1297 - Chapter 1297 Chapter 513 Do You Wish to Live ?Chapter 1297: Chapter 513: Do You Wish to Live? Chapter 1297: Chapter 513: Do You Wish to Live? ¡°` Although unclear which sect the two True Persons hailed from, their intervention in exorcism and capture of the Ghost Emperor, and subsequently saving me, were unquestionably real. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï This alone proved they were one of our own. Therefore, Li Ruoqing was sincerely grateful to the two True Persons, but after his gratitude, he was somewhat puzzled and asked, ¡°May I know why the two True Persons have come here?¡± ¡°This is Song Xiren from the Changqing Immortal Sect; this True Person is Qing Guanzi from the Taiping Dao. This morning, Xiong Guoyi came to us with the Taiping edict seeking help. Upon hearing the news, the School Leader of Yi Dancheng of Taiping Dao personally met with True Person Qing Guanzi and requested his involvement in subduing the Ghost Emperor of Xiaye Country in Huangquan. True Person Qing Guanzi understands the significance of Yellow Springs Underworld to the stability of the Southern Domain and discussed it with our Changqing Immortal Sect. Ultimately, our two sects decided to hold a Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony to purify Huangquan and drive out the evil spirits.¡± Song Xiren placed great importance on this true successor of Dongyang Mountain and patiently explained before glancing at him and smiling, ¡°On the way to this dharma assembly for exorcising ghosts, we also took the opportunity to save you, a talented individual of the Immortal Sect. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? In this year and month, it¡¯s rare to find someone with such a righteous heart. When one appears, we naturally cherish them and cannot allow anything untoward to happen to them. We, the seniors, are relying on juniors like you to promote the spirit of chivalry and uphold the name of our Immortal Sect!¡± Song Xiren, who is now over four thousand years old, achieved his path just as the Changqing Domain was entering the final phase of peaceful and stable years before complete collapse. At that time, the Changqing Immortal Sect was relatively strong and still had control over the domain, with the South, North, Central, and Eastern Territories under its influence. Even the Western Territory had two local Immortal Sects that were resistant to the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and steadfastly loyal to Changqing Immortal Sect at that time. Back then, although the traditional decorum of the Changqing Domain had begun to crumble, it hadn¡¯t yet completely deteriorated to chaos. The basic order was still in existence. The Immortal Sects cooperated with each other, watching over one another and jointly maintaining the path of righteousness. The situation where demons blatantly ruled over a country had not yet occurred. Throughout the Changqing Domain, the Immortal Method was prosperous, the spirit of chivalry prevailed, and the orthodox path was still mainstream. For Song Xiren, who had lived through that era, the nostalgia was overwhelming. He deeply despised the current state of deteriorated decorum, rampant demons, and disordered humanity and constantly yearned to change the atmosphere, right the wrongs, and return to the proper path. But he was powerless. Three thousand years ago, after a decisive battle between the Changqing Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, the Immortal Sect suffered heavy losses with many True Persons and Earth Immortals falling, devastating their strength. To this date, they had not recovered their vitality. The decline in control over the Changqing Domain had continued, ultimately leading to the current state where evil was on the rise and righteousness was on the wane. In such conditions, seeing a selfless, righteous junior like Li Ruoqing, even though he was from outside the domain, Song Xiren greatly appreciated and valued him. Because in him, he saw the former Changqing Domain, the glorious days of the Changqing Immortal Sect, and his younger self. Furthermore, his actions indeed affected and influenced the people of the Changqing Domain, transforming the local customs towards a better direction. This was also beneficial for the Changqing Immortal Sect. Any ruler would naturally wish to see a stable order. Only those with ambitions like the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Xuan Turtle Mountain, who haven¡¯t grasped any leverage, would desire chaos, seeking opportunities to fish in troubled waters. Therefore, Song Xiren could only feel fondness, not aversion, towards Li Ruoqing, both publicly and privately. ¡°For the junior me to prompt the two venerable True Persons to take such grand action, I am truly anxious and fearful.¡± Upon hearing that the two True Persons had come for his sake, even initiating a Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, Li Ruoqing was greatly shocked, and immediately anxious and moved: ¡°For such a debt of gratitude, I truly do not know how I could ever repay¡­¡± ¡°There¡¯s no need for such sentiment.¡± Seeing Li Ruoqing finally lose his composure, becoming somewhat at a loss, Qing Guanzi smiled and said, ¡°Exorcising monsters and demons is our duty. The emergence of the Yellow Springs Underworld in Xiaye Country and the Ghost Emperor leaving the Yin World to openly disturb the Yang World are matters that disrupt the balance between yin and yang, and upon learning of these, we, of course, would not stand idly by. On the contrary, we should thank you for uncovering this hidden danger in advance. Had these ghosts remained hidden, secretly building their strength, and suddenly causing mayhem without us being prepared, that truly would lead to chaos in the world and a disaster for all living beings. From this standpoint, your contribution is not small and sufficiently offsets the favor we conferred by saving you. Moreover, when my nephew Yi previously bestowed the Taiping edict upon you, it essentially extended an unconditional promise to assist you once. Now, your good friend has come bearing the edict, requesting our aid. Our intervention to save you is also fulfilling a promise and maintaining the reputation of Taiping Dao; it¡¯s only to be expected, and there¡¯s no need for thanks.¡± Speaking voluntarily of a favor dilutes its significance. Better now to be generous, giving the other some peace of mind, letting gratitude take root in his heart and be remembered, which is more effective. Qing Guanzi had no expectation of receiving significant recompense from the other. Since Taiping Dao had already decided to establish itself in the Southern Domain, it naturally aimed to cultivate good relations with neighboring territories. The neighbors to the north and east, which are the Changqing Immortal Sect, are already our allies. The western Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, despite stemming from the same source, is unaware of this, and Lu Yuan has no intention of explaining it to them. ¡°` Chapter 1298 - Chapter 1298 Chapter 513 Do You Wish to Live_2 ?Chapter 1298: Chapter 513 Do You Wish to Live?_2 Chapter 1298: Chapter 513 Do You Wish to Live?_2 The interests of the Southern Domain are too significant, no Immortal Sect of the Nine Provinces would simply hand them over just because we hail from the same place. Without reconciling these interests, Taiping Dao and the other side cannot possibly be at peace; they are destined to be enemies. The remaining area to the south is the Dongyang Mountain, located outside of the domain. It is also the strongest neighbor of Taiping Dao. Towards this neighbor, Lu Yuan harbors no extravagant hopes that they would form an alliance with the Changqing Immortal Sect, like his own. That would be unrealistic. How could an illustrious Heavenly Immortal Sect lower its status to form an alliance with an Earth Immortal Sect? In the Dongyang Domain, an Earth Immortal Sect is similar to Jintai Gate in relation to Taiping Dao, merely a vassal of Dongyang Mountain. They don¡¯t have the strength to qualify as allies. Lu Yuan harbored no such delusion. All he wished for was that, in the future, regarding matters involving Taiping Dao, someone within Dongyang Mountain, like Li Ruoqing, could put in a good word for him, leaving a positive impression among the higher-ups, which would suffice. Sometimes, the slightest bias can change the political leanings of a great sect. Especially in critical moments. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? In simpler terms, Lu Yuan was cultivating a pro-Taiping Dao faction within Dongyang Mountain. And the object of his investment and cultivation was none other than Li Ruoqing before him. So young, with a profound background, great strength, a heart of chivalry, and possibly becoming immortal within a century, ascending to the high ranks of Dongyang Mountain. No matter how you look at it, he¡¯s a stock with the highest potential. Who else would be worth investing in, if not him? To put it bluntly, others might want to invest in him, but he might not even spare them a glance! Disciples from such major forces lack nothing in resources, heritage, or background a€¡± they have the best of everything and certainly do not value the trivial offerings from outsiders. To talk solely about money would be an insult to whom? The connection Taiping Dao has with him relies not on money but on the demon hunting done in the Great Eye Kingdom by Yi Dancheng, aligning with the righteous heart of this Heavenly Immortal and thus forming a rapport. What sustains this relationship is sentiment, not finance. Understanding this, Qing Guanzi, when facing Li Ruoqing, naturally would not talk about favors, but rather about heroism and the righteous path. Isn¡¯t Song Xiren, the veteran beside him, also spotting this point, talking endlessly of heroism and the proper path, lavishing praise on the other¡¯s words and actions, without bringing up his contributions? Look, this is the steadiness of a seasoned Immortal Sect elder. As a newly promoted elder, Qing Guanzi felt the need to learn from his seniors. Otherwise, it would be challenging to establish relations with juniors later on. Facing such tactics from two seniors, Li Ruoqing, though just starting out, was neither naive nor a simpleton. They were genuinely sincere, acting from the heart without seeking any benefit; such truthfulness and nature could be felt even by someone as stubborn as stone. The gratitude he felt need not be mentioned. ¡°Predecessors¡­¡± Li Ruoqing opened his mouth, a surge of warmth and shame in his heart, unsure of what to say. ¡°All right, let¡¯s not speak further on this matter. Now that you¡¯re safe, you should rest for a while. In the battle earlier, you must have depleted much of your magic power and Divine Sense. It would be good to recover and readjust.¡± Qing Guanzi, noticing the other¡¯s discomfort and seeing the ghosts scattering throughout the city, said considerately, ¡°There are still many spirits in the city. Song Dao and I need to clean up, so I won¡¯t keep you any longer.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Upon hearing this, Li Ruoqing nodded solemnly, not saying any more. Great favors are beyond thanks. Having received such monumental kindness from the two seniors today, as he had mentioned earlier, he can only engrave this debt in his heart. Speaking more would only seem insincere. How could he possibly repay the favors of two Earth Immortals? All he can do is wait until his own ascension to immortality, which will be the time for repayment. Understanding this, Li Ruoqing stopped dwelling on the matter. He found a place within the city to sit down and began his meditation to recover. Qing Guanzi was right. After a great battle against numerous demons and a standoff with a Ghost Emperor, even with the support of a sword talisman bestowed by his elder, he barely managed to hold on. But crossing such a Great Realm, it was not so easy to bridge the gap. After fighting for half a day, Li Ruoqing was thoroughly exhausted, his spirit drained to the brink of collapse. It was only sheer willpower that had kept him going until now, first out of a sense of gratitude for the life-saving help, then out of respect for the coming seniors. But having expressed his stance and knowing his benefactors, as his willpower faded, he felt profoundly weary. Both his body and soul cried out in agony. He truly needed to rest and recuperate. If this state continued for too long, overdrawing his potential, it could hinder his foundation for the Great Tao in the future. After reassuring and soothing Li Ruoqing, the true disciple of Dongyang, and watching him start to rest and recover in the city, Qing Guanzi thoughtfully added another layer of magical protection to ensure he would not be disturbed by any external spirits, thus ensuring his safety. Then, looking at Song Xiren beside him, he said, ¡°Song Dao, with the Ghost Emperor now captured, this Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony can be considered a success. The other sect members are still scattered throughout the Yin World, shall we send a message for them to gather here so we don¡¯t waste more effort?¡± For Taiping Dao, the greatest threat in this part of the Yellow Springs Underworld was the Ghost Emperor they now held captive. Other ordinary spirits, regardless of their numbers, posed little danger. They had even decided that, after recruiting the Ghost Emperor, the Underworld would establish a Netherworld Court in the future, which would certainly need a large workforce. This naturally meant drawing from those same spirits. Chapter 1299 - Chapter 1299 Chapter 513 Do You Wish to Live_3 ?Chapter 1299: Chapter 513: Do You Wish to Live?_3 Chapter 1299: Chapter 513: Do You Wish to Live?_3 Those common ghosts, from this moment on, were no longer a threat but rather a resource that could be utilized in the future. Just like the City Gods of the Yang World, which City God did not have a large number of civil and military officials and wandering deities under their command to assist them? Or hundreds to thousands of Yin Soldiers to use? ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 These subordinate Divine Spirits and Yin Soldiers, if well utilized, could also become an extremely strong force. For the Taiping Dao, which currently had few disciples and was short of personnel, integrating the ghosts of this underworld and transforming them into Yin Gods and Yin Soldiers of the Netherworld Court would undoubtedly enhance its foundational strength in an instant and establish a structure for the Netherworld Court. Once the Netherworld Court was established, it could be brought into use immediately. It wasn¡¯t just the Netherworld of Yin World; Taiping Dao had already taken over the Great Eye Kingdom, and soon Xiaye Country and Jiuchuan Country would also be taken down consecutively. In these three places, monsters had been rampaging, claiming mountains as kings for a long time. The original systems of City God Spirits and Mountain-Water Spirits had also been destroyed, none remained. Taking over these three nations, Taiping Dao naturally needed to invest in governance, not only involving the relocation of the populace but also the restoration of vitality to the human realm. The systems of City Gods, Mountain and Water Gods, and other Divine Methods also needed to be re-established. This area again required a large number of personnel. Taiping Dao was just an empty framework and definitely could not supply personnel. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï The ultimate solution could only fall on the currently available resources at hand. The native Divine Spirits of Youxin Country could solve part of the need, but their numbers were limited and couldn¡¯t be too many. Being able to settle about one-tenth of them was already the limit. The remaining large vacancies still needed to be filled with new personnel. In regard to this aspect, Lu Yuan could only think of having Jintai Gate, Bihu Palace, and their affiliated Immortal Sects provide some personnel. Then, from those monsters and ghosts, recruit a portion of those of pure nature and usable qualities to take over the roles. Among the monsters, there were also good ones. Like the fox demon he encountered when he ascended; it did not harm people and only wanted to peacefully cultivate. Even when Yi Dancheng was exterminating monsters in the Great Eye Kingdom, he also encountered many monsters that protected the Human Race. These monsters were then enlisted by him and later placed in various locations in Youxin Country, becoming Mountain Gods, Water Gods, and even City Gods. This was also considered achieving a righteous path and finding a way out. This experience was quite commendable and could certainly be promoted and used in later stages! In this Netherworld, there were millions of ghost souls, a vast number. These ghost souls had always stayed in the Netherworld previously and hadn¡¯t had the chance to go out and commit evil or harm lives. Though in this part of the Netherworld, they themselves were fiercely homicidal, each one cruel and excessively cunning ¨C definitely not good ghosts. But these ghost souls were so ferocious because they were striving to survive. The environment of the Netherworld was just that harsh. The barren land, and omnipresent Yin Wind drove them to desperately fight with other ghosts for survival, sustaining themselves by consuming each other. If Taiping Dao could solve this problem, that is, through appointing Divine Spirits and providing public grain bestowed by Heaven and Earth, and introducing human incense as a subsidy, giving many ghost creatures new sustenance for survival, they wouldn¡¯t need to kill each other to live. It seems that not so many ghosts would be willing to risk their souls being dispersed, going so far as to kill ghosts or people. With the laws of the Netherworld Court above and the deterrent force of the Immortal Sect, order would naturally be established, and the multitude of ghosts would be educated. These millions of ghost souls could thus be transformed into a large number of Yin Gods and Yin Soldiers, becoming a usable force for Taiping Dao. When the time comes, a few hundred thousand could be left in Yin World to establish the structure of the Netherworld Court. The remaining majority of ghosts could be relocated to various nations of the Yang World, where the powerful ones could become various levels of City Gods and Mountain-Water Gods, and those with lesser strength could directly become Yin Soldiers. The situation of the shortage of Divine personnel in various countries of the Yang World for Taiping Dao would be resolved in one stroke. The benefits were so great, of course, it was tempting. Therefore, after Qing Guanzi understood the system of the Netherworld Court, he urgently contacted his main body and then received instructions from Lu Yuan. After taking down the Ghost Emperor, he immediately enlisted the numerous ghosts of the Netherworld. These were not any evil ghosts; they were clearly good employees for Taiping Dao. As they were all insiders, naturally there was no need to continue fighting and killing. Now, for every ghost soul that died, Taiping Dao would lose a great number of subordinates; it was a loss of its own interests and strength, and naturally, it could not continue like this. Those who had previously dispersed to seek out and drive away ghosts certainly had to be recalled immediately, asking them not to kill anymore. Qing Guanzi, who already viewed the evil ghosts as his own property, felt his heart ache at the thought of his property rapidly slipping away. He was indeed reluctant. ¡°This Ghost Emperor is now in my possession; there is no more resistance in the Yin World, and it is indeed time to end this Dharma Assembly.¡± Song Xiren noticed Qing Guanzi¡¯s ulterior motives, found it slightly amusing in his heart but did not counter the other¡¯s wishes, nodding and saying, ¡°I will send the message now, calling all True Persons to assemble.¡± With that, he extended his hand and pinched, a ray of spiritual light flew from his fingertips towards the clouds, and then exploded into countless stars, scattering in all directions. This was a communication spell agreed upon with many True Persons. The news of their grand accomplishment here would be delivered to each True Person through these lights. Having done this, Song Xiren looked towards Qing Guanzi and smiled, ¡°The message has been sent, the True Persons will soon arrive, Li Ruoqing has also been rescued, and the great plan for the Yin World is set; this Dharma Assembly is almost achieved. Distinguished companion, it¡¯s time to start establishing the Netherworld Court.¡± As he spoke, his gaze turned towards the Ghost Emperor held captive in Qing Guanzi¡¯s hand, transformed into a small ball and imprisoned. Qing Guanzi also understood the other¡¯s intention, his eyes shifted to the Ghost Emperor in his hand, and he spoke in a mild tone, ¡°Given the current situation, you know well. I have pacified this realm, and you are now a prisoner in my hands, your life and death controlled by me. However, my sect is indeed in need of people, which is why I spared your life and did not directly disperse your soul just now. Make your choice now. Do you wish to live? Tell me your answer.¡± The gazes of the two True Persons fell upon the Ghost Emperor imprisoned in the palm, immediately intensifying the pressure, causing its soul to tremble. Chapter 1300 - Chapter 1300 Chapter 514 Establishing the Netherworld Court ?Chapter 1300: Chapter 514 Establishing the Netherworld Court Chapter 1300: Chapter 514 Establishing the Netherworld Court ¡°The little demon is willing to surrender, the little demon wants to live!¡± Under the pressure of two Earth Immortal True Persons, the Ghost Emperor, already held in their grasp, naturally had little to say and kneeled promptly. The speed was so fast there wasn¡¯t a hint of hesitation. But one couldn¡¯t really blame him. Anyone facing two Earth Immortal True Persons, unless they wished to die, would likely adopt the same attitude. This Ghost Emperor had fiercely fought his way out from amongst numerous demons, obtained the Immortal Method, and emerged through hardships. At this moment, when the bitter had turned to sweet and it was time to enjoy glory, how could he willingly die? ¡®Alas, I should not have gotten carried away back then. Having become an immortal, I swaggered off to the Yang World, inevitably bringing disaster upon myself. It would have been better to stay hidden in this Yin World, ruling as king. Although it was a bit harsh and cold, at least there was no worry about my life, and I could enjoy freedom. Unlike now, I am a prisoner, and my life is controlled by others. I regret my past choices!¡¯ The Ghost Emperor lamented thus in his heart, and regarding his future circumstances, he now hoped only to keep his life and no longer held any other hopes. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Qing Guanzi looked at the willing submission of the Ghost Emperor with some astonishment, not expecting that someone who was the ruler of a realm would surrender so quickly, which was really unexpected. However, the other¡¯s swift surrender was also a good thing for him. Under the Divine Method¡¯s Talisman Charter, regardless of whether the other party harbored any malice, once included in the Talisman Charter, hereafter their life was controlled by others and there was no longer any turning back. ¡°Since you want to live, I will give you a path to survive.¡± Since things were progressing smoothly, Qing Guanzi slowly said, ¡°I have taken control of this Yin World. To ensure the order between Yin and Yang is maintained and to prevent what happened previously, when you led a host of ghosts to invade the Yang World, I plan to regulate this place. I intend to establish the Netherworld Court here, appoint Yin Gods and Yin Soldiers, establish its institutional order, stabilize the Yin World, and bring it under the jurisdiction of my Taiping Tao Sect. In this Netherworld Court, there is still a vacancy for the lord of the Netherworld Court, to lead myriad gods and ghosts and to manage the Yin World on behalf of the Taiping Tao Sect. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï This position of God Lord, not having extraordinary strength, cannot subdue the myriad ghosts. You possess the Dao Fruit of a True Immortal and your strength is sufficient. Would you be willing to take on this role?¡± The Ghost Emperor never expected that after all the twists and turns, things would come full circle. It seemed he wouldn¡¯t have to suffer any humiliation or worry about being oppressed and exploited, and could happily be the ruler of his own realm. Oh, wait, I should say the lord of the Netherworld Court. Leading myriad gods and ghosts, wasn¡¯t this what he was doing originally? Being from a remote place, the Ghost Emperor was not familiar with the divine system of the Netherworld Court, since the only way he had ever had contact with the outside world was within Xiaye Country, which had long been devoid of divine spirits. His only impression of divine spirits was based on what demons had told him. The strength of divine spirits was formidable, but they couldn¡¯t leave their territories at will and had to follow the commands of the higher Immortal Sect, serving as guardians and protectors. From this description, it seemed divine spirits weren¡¯t very free and their status was not very high. But one must also consider the powers of divine spirits. If these were expanded to governing a realm, leading the gods and ghosts of a realm, then even with an Immortal Sect above him, in this Yin World, the Ghost Emperor would still be below one and above ten thousand ghosts. As long as he did not defy the Taiping Tao Sect or offend his superiors. Being a constrained ruler of a realm like this could still be tasteful and free. After all, he had already become a prisoner. In this status, to end up with such treatment, in the former circumstance of the Yin World, was unthinkable. The Ghost Emperor treated his former competitors ruthlessly, extracting their souls and tormenting them for hundreds of years. Would they continue retaining them, even entrusting them with important responsibilities? In the traditionally law-of-the-jungle Yin World, this was absolutely impossible. Now being able to keep his life and continue to serve as the leader of the Yin World, wasn¡¯t that an enormous stroke of luck? Once he thought it through, everything made sense. ¡°This little demon is willing to take on the role, willing to serve the Immortal,¡± The Ghost Emperor was still as smooth and compliant as ever. Qing Guanzi looked at him and his expression remained unchanged: ¡°Good, if that¡¯s so, then offer a strand of your Main Soul, swear an oath of the Great Tao, open up your spirit and accept my appointment.¡± When he heard this demand, the Ghost Emperor was slightly taken aback, not expecting that accepting this divine office would come with these conditions. Surrendering his Main Soul, swearing the Great Tao oath, opening up his spirita€¡±any of these three actions would cost someone half their life. Combining all three together left no room for discussion. Within the Immortal Realm, basically no one could turn their fate around. From then on, everything would be manipulated by someone else, becoming an absolute slave with no freedom anymore. For any cultivator, this was hard to accept. But upon careful consideration, he had already fallen to this state. To keep his life without paying a price, how could that be possible? Isn¡¯t it just three minor restrictions? If it were the Ghost Emperor dealing with a defeated enemy, his demands would be even greater. Chapter 1301 - Chapter 1301 Chapter 514 Establishing the Netherworld Court_2 ?Chapter 1301: Chapter 514 Establishing the Netherworld Court_2 Chapter 1301: Chapter 514 Establishing the Netherworld Court_2 The Immortal and the Sect leader, as long as there¡¯s a command, braving boiling water and walking through fire, even a minor ghost wouldn¡¯t hesitate. Heaven¡¯s Path bears witness, Inner Demons attend and salute. If I ever betray my oath, my Dao will decline, and I will die with my soul scattered.¡± After taking the oath, Ghost Emperor Chen Hongyuan immediately opened his mind, waiting for the Immortal to set up the restriction. As for Qing Guanzi on the other side, upon receiving a portion of Chen Hongyuan¡¯s main soul, he directly transitioned it into the divine talisman charter of Taiping Dao. Previously, upon receiving the divine talisman charter of Youxin Country from Yang Jihua, Lu Yuan began to study it immediately. After several years, he made some achievements. The divine talisman charter of Taiping Dao before him was one of the outcomes. Although it wasn¡¯t as perfect as that of Qing Immortal Sect, it still possessed the basic functions. To confer Divine Positions upon deities and control various gods, it was more than sufficient. Just like at this moment. Transferring Chen Hongyuan¡¯s main soul into the charter, Qing Guanzi immediately followed the fixed ritual procedure within the talisman charter, beginning to sense Heaven and Earth, to connect with the Heavenly Path, and gathering the netherworld divine office of this place. As an Earth Immortal True Person, with a single thought, he could create a blessed land. His connection with the Heavenly Path was indeed profound. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Moreover, previously, the divine talisman charter had already left a name with the Heavenly Path, opening the channel for conferring deities. With one thought at this moment, Heaven and Earth instantly responded. Under the dual effect of the Earth Immortal Dao Fruit and the authority of the divine talisman charter, the divine position of the Netherworld Court¡¯s master immediately emerged within the charter. Born alongside it were countless divine offices of the Netherworld Court, totaling tens of thousands, all bestowed by the Heavenly Path. Qing Guanzi merged Chen Hongyuan¡¯s Divine Soul with the divine position of the Netherworld Court¡¯s master, which was tantamount to reporting his name and identity upward to the Heavenly Path. Telling the Heavenly Path, this is the person who is to assume the Netherworld Court¡¯s master. And the response from the Heavenly Path was very direct. Within the divine talisman charter, the divine position of the Netherworld Court¡¯s master immediately changed the name to Yichuan Heavenly Son. It appears that in the eyes of the Heavenly Path, this netherworld is known as Yichuan. As a ruler of a realm under the Heavenly Son, he naturally belongs to the traditional lineage of Heavenly Sons. He shepherds the people on behalf of Heaven, a child of Heaven. Yichuan Heavenly Son, the Heavenly Path formally recognized Chen Hongyuan¡¯s identity. With Heaven¡¯s acknowledgment secured, Qing Guanzi removed the part that contained Chen Hongyuan¡¯s main soul from Yichuan Heavenly Son¡¯s divine position, separated it, and left it within the charter as control. This part is the most core aspect of the divine position. With it in hand, one can easily strip the other party of their divine position and control the other party¡¯s Divine Soul. This is the most critical means to control a deity and must not be taken lightly. Having secured the core, Qing Guanzi removed the bulk of the divine position from the charter, and a dash of golden light flew towards Chen Hongyuan, directly entering his unprotected soul. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? The power from the divine position quickly took root in his soul with his cooperation. The magic power of Chen Hongyuan¡¯s soul flowed like a river pouring in, crazily surging into the divine position. The overwhelming momentum seemed as if it would drain him completely. This sudden change startled him, shaking his spirit, and he almost instinctively wanted to expel the divine position. But fortunately, in the next moment. The magic power of the soul that surged into the divine position was quickly expelled. After being transformed by the divine position, his original soul magic power became Divine Strength, which began to reform Chen Hongyuan¡¯s soul and spirit, transforming him from a ghost into a deity. Borrowing the chicken to lay eggs, this is also how the divine position controls a deity. No matter your previous Cultivation, once the divine position enters your body, it directly devours most of your realm, and then it reforms you. That way, even if you later voluntarily strip off the divine position, your own magic realm has already been bound to the divine position, and you can¡¯t get it back at all. Without the divine position, the realm of a deity plummets dramatically. Chen Hongyuan, despite currently being at the True Immortal realm with a Human Dao Fruit, Once this reform is complete and the divine position is stripped away, he will immediately fall from True Immortal to a mere mortal. Even because the divine position devoured too much of the soul, leading to a deficiency in his Divine Soul and an unstable foundation, he no longer has the possibility to become immortal again. The cost is so substantial that it would make any deity tremble. Having once climbed to the peak, to fall again, and with no possibility of climbing back up, this kind of situation is not something everyone has the courage to endure. After this round of Divine Strength transformation, even though Qing Guanzi assured that he would not use the Divine Soul core in the charter to directly end Chen Hongyuan¡¯s life, The latter would probably be unwilling to let go of the divine position voluntarily. The divine position is a gift from the Heavenly Path, naturally infinite in wonder. In just a short moment, Chen Hongyuan¡¯s soul magic power had transformed into Divine Method magic power, thoroughly colored by the divine position. ¡°Yichuan Heavenly Son pays respect to the Immortal.¡± Having completed the transformation of his soul and the conversion of magic power, before he even had time to feel the difference, Chen Hongyuan suddenly realized that more than a dozen True Immortals had appeared around him without warning. This sudden change startled him once again. With no time to think, under the gaze of many True Immortals, he quickly knelt down before Qing Guanzi to display his loyalty. ¡°Rise,¡± Qing Guanzi looked at the transformed Chen Hongyuan and finally showed a hint of a smile: ¡°Since you have accepted the investiture from my Taiping Dao and received the Yichuan Heavenly Son¡¯s divine position, you are now one of Taiping Dao¡¯s own. We¡¯re all family here, no need for excessive formality. These are fellow sect members from the Immortal Sect; you should also greet them.¡± Pointing to the numerous True Persons who had come over upon receiving the message from Song Xiren after Chen Hongyuan accepted the divine position, Qing Guanzi said. Chapter 1302 - Chapter 1302 Chapter 514 Establishing the Netherworld Court_3 ?Chapter 1302: Chapter 514: Establishing the Netherworld Court_3 Chapter 1302: Chapter 514: Establishing the Netherworld Court_3 ¡°` With the guidance of the superior Immortal, Chen Hongyuan finally heaved a sigh of relief. He hurriedly stood up and bowed towards the multiple True Persons around him, ¡°Chen Hongyuan, a minor god, has seen the True Persons.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not something I dare claim credit for, I am Yang Jihua of the impoverished path, and I have met Chen Daoyou (Taoist friend Chen).¡± ¡°The impoverished path¡­¡± The many True Persons present did not put on any airs towards Chen Hongyuan, who had been subdued by Qing Guanzi and had already transformed from a ghostly Immortal to a divine Immortal. They politely returned the gesture. After all, he was an entity with the same Dao Fruit as them, belonging to the ranks of the Human Immortals. The only thing was that this person had been unlucky, catching the attention of two Earth Immortals, and could not help but be shackled, entering the Divine Method, henceforth having his life and death in the hands of others, a pitiful existence indeed. But even though the other party was in servitude, they say you must look at the master before striking a dog. The master of the person in question, Earth Immortal Qing Guanzi, was right before their eyes; who would dare to be disrespectful? ¡°Ladies and gentlemen, now that Chen Hongyuan has joined our Taiping Dao, this stretch of the Yin World of Yichuan can be considered pacified. In this Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, two of the three scourges have been eliminated. Our journey is one step closer to completion and it is indeed an occasion for congratulations and delight,¡± said Qing Guanzi. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Seeing the various Immortals familiarize themselves with Chen Hongyuan, Qing Guanzi exchanged glances with Song Xiren beside him and said, ¡°But now is not the time for celebration. The last of the three scourges, the Jiuchuan Demon Country, has yet to be pacified, and those two malevolent Jiaolong in the Dragon Palace still lurk and refuse to leave. We must redouble our efforts and, taking advantage of the current successful momentum, enter the Jiuchuan Country again to eliminate these two Jiaolongs, thus concluding the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony on a perfect note.¡± Previously, when the news of the Earth Immortals within the Taiping Dao spread, all demons in the Southern Domain with any sense began packing their bags, preparing to flee for their lives. The Six-eyed Lord of the Great Eye Monster Kingdom directly abandoned his lair and fled to parts unknown. The monsters of the Xiaye Country, such as the Gluttonous Ghost King, began to frantically clear out the human blood food below, planning to indulge in a feast before their departure to avoid waste. These monsters were all quite astute, knowing that they could not oppose the Taiping Dao, so they planned to flee. Only the two malevolent Jiaolong of the Jiuchuan Demon Country remained squatting within the Dragon Palace, immovable as mountains, as if completely oblivious to the outside world. But how could that be possible? In the Xiaye Country, many monsters supported by the Jiuchuan Demon Country received the message. How could their backing organization possibly be unaware? Since the strength of the Taiping Dao was already clear, but the enduring Monster Nation remained without any movement, if they did not actively seek death, the only explanation would be that these two malevolent Jiaolongs have some sort of reliance, confident that even faced with the Earth Immortal True Persons, they would be sufficiently self-protective. This was undoubtedly not a very good sign. So out of caution, Qing Guanzi naturally wanted to take advantage of the presence of many True Persons gathered here to eliminate this hidden danger beforehand. With two Earth Immortals and fifteen Human Immortals present. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Against such power, even if the Jiuchuan Demon Country had some reliance, or even if they had brought a Great Demon at the level of an Earth Immortal, they would not dream of escaping to the heavens. This matter, Qing Guanzi had already discussed with Song Xiren. This future School Leader of the Qing Immortal Sect was equally concerned about the unusual behavior of the Jiuchuan Demon Country. Barely had the ghostly troubles in the Yin World of Yichuan been resolved, than having right after that, the Jiuchuan Demon Country stirring up another monster problem. The upheaval caused by a Great Demon leading the Earth Immortal, its threat was not in the least bit less than the emergence of Yama from the Yellow Springs Underworld. Given that the safety of the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s rear was at stake, Song Xiren had no choice but to be cautious. Therefore, after Qing Guanzi spoke, Song Xiren nodded and added, ¡°True Person Qing Guanzi has spoken rightly. Since we are now making smooth progress, we should strike while the iron is hot and remove the last scourge, so the Dharma Assembly may end sooner.¡± Seeing this agreement from the many True Persons, they immediately bowed and said, ¡°We will carefully follow the orders of the two True Persons.¡± Isn¡¯t it just eliminating monsters? With two True Persons leading the way, how difficult could it be to slay two malevolent Jiaolongs? And to be honest, they had previously cleared the monsters from Xiaye Country and then continued to purge spirits after entering the Yin World. After two consecutive actions, the many True Persons had only eradicated some minor monsters and spirits; for them, it was not even a warm-up. The Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, initially expected to possibly involve a grueling battle, turned out to be rather mild when actually faced with the situation on the ground. This completion was truly disappointing. Many who were itching for a fight were feeling uncomfortable, eager to find a demon for a proper battle. Now there was a Jiuchuan Demon Country that exactly met the wishes of these people. And those cautious and prudent True Persons, after experiencing two easy tasks, began to relax a bit, feeling that this Dharma Assembly might all proceed smoothly without any danger. After all, the gap in strength was evident, and it was not so easily bridged. Those two malevolent Jiaolongs from Jiuchuan Demon Country, it was unimaginable what abilities they had that could overcome their own faction. Bearing this thought, the many True Persons naturally had no aversions to going to the Jiuchuan Demon Country. Seeing that everyone agreed, Qing Guanzi nodded slightly, then looked towards Che Shidao who had come along and instructed, ¡°Nephew Che Shidao, the Yin World of Yichuan has just been pacified, and this place¡¯s Netherworld Court still needs to be established. It must be overseen by someone from our sect. You needn¡¯t follow this time in the monster eradication in Xiaye Country. We others are sufficient. Stay in this Yin World, assist Chen Hongyuan, and establish the Netherworld Court. Here is the Divine Method Talisman Charter from our sect. I will bestow it upon you first, to be used for the ennoblement of Divine Spirits.¡± Qing Guanzi passed the Divine Method Talisman Charter in his hand to Che Shidao with a wave of his hand. The Yin World has just been pacified, and this place urgently needs someone to stay. The Taiping Dao cannot be at ease without arranging one of their own here. After all, one more or one less Human Immortal doesn¡¯t make much difference to the monster eradication campaign in the Jiuchuan Demon Country, as long as their two True Persons arrive it will suffice. The Taiping Dao cannot be at ease without arranging one of their own here. After all, one more or one less Human Immortal doesn¡¯t make much difference to the monster eradication campaign in the Jiuchuan Demon Country, as long as their two True Persons arrive it will suffice. The Taiping Dao cannot be at ease without arranging one of their own here. After all, one more or one less Human Immortal doesn¡¯t make much difference to the monster eradication campaign in the Jiuchuan Demon Country, as long as their two True Persons arrive it will suffice. ¡°` Chapter 1303 - Chapter 1303 Chapter 515 Xiaye Courtyard ?Chapter 1303: Chapter 515: Xiaye Courtyard Chapter 1303: Chapter 515: Xiaye Courtyard Qing Guanzi and the others departed, and the Yin World, which had been bustling with immortals and radiant with splendor, suddenly quieted down once more. Within the empty Underworld, after such a Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, nearly half of the evil spirits from Huangquan were gone, and the rest hid themselves, not daring to show their faces again. The vast Ghost City before me, as the hordes of ghosts fled, became desolate as well. ¡°Master Che.¡± Chen Hongyuan, who had just switched affiliations, looked at the grand elder from the Immortal Sect beside him and asked respectfully, ¡°What should we do next?¡± After such a beating, Chen Hongyuan had come to understand that there were always higher heavens and superior people. Compared to the vast outside world, the Yin World he inhabited was insignificant, no different from a remote corner. He had only made a splash outside and attracted two Earth Immortals, and more than a dozen Human Immortals. This grand spectacle had terrified the Ghost Emperor, who had always been hiding in Huangquan. Even now, he was still fearful. He was nothing but a ghost cultivator who had just become immortal and could hardly compare to those True Immortals with long-standing traditions and powerful Dao Law. The difference was as stark as that between an obscure college and a top-tier university. Although both were called colleges, could they be the same? Take Master Che before me, for example, his aura so deep, his presence so formidablea€¡±it was like comparing the bright moon to the glowing sun, the gap was just too great. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã0 In terms of realm, they were on entirely different levels. And indeed, it was true. Che Shidao was closer to the Late-stage Human Immortal while Chen Hongyuan was merely an Early-stage Human Immortal; they were separated by two minor realms, which translated to multiple times the difference in strength. Even within the Human Immortal Realm, the disparity was striking. Chen Hongyuan felt that even if three or five of himself were to join forces, they would still be no match for the True Person before him. Respect arises from strength; the other party was stronger than him, and he, accustomed to the law of the jungle, naturally didn¡¯t dare to be rash. Even though Qing Guanzi had already left, he still behaved, utterly submissive. ¡°As the Ghost Emperor of Huangquan for so many years, you must have some capable spirits at your command, right?¡± Master Che fiddled with the Divine Method Talisman Charters in his hand, his divine senses examining the countless Divine Positions that had been added. He spoke indifferently, ¡°Although a sweeping purge has taken place, our cease-fire was swift. There should still be several hundred thousand souls left in the Yin World. Gather these and select the useful ones, then report their names to me, and I will consecrate each Divine Position. Take this structure of the Netherworld Court and review it. Once all the Yin Gods are in place, lead them in establishing the Netherworld Court and officially assume your post.¡± After he spoke, Master Che flicked the Divine Method Talisman Charters, and a stream of divine light containing the information about the Netherworld Court flew into Chen Hongyuan¡¯s mind. It must be said that the Heavenly Path¡¯s comprehensive services were thorough indeed. In granting Divine Positions, it also provided comprehensive rules for the operation of the Netherworld Court. All the details and provisions were clear and well-defined. Once you accepted a Divine Position, you knew what you should and shouldn¡¯t do, with a clear delineation of rights and responsibilities. This considerate service saved Taiping Dao from the trouble of building a new system from scratch. Now, all that was required was to consecrate the Divine Spirits, and they were ready to be used. After receiving the complete structure of the Netherworld Court, Chen Hongyuan also roughly understood the scope of his authority, which, compared to before, had scarcely diminished at all. Furthermore, with the authority granted by the Heavenly Path, his personal power had even increased. Realizing this, Chen Hongyuan became proactive: ¡°Yes, I will immediately summon my former subordinates to serve the Immortal Sect.¡± ¡°Hmm, go ahead!¡± Master Che nodded slightly, gestured with his hand, and let the other proceed on his own. His main task was essentially to use the Divine Method Talisman Charters to consecrate the Divine Spirits and recruit these ghosts for Taiping Dao. Beyond that, he was there to serve as a formidable force dispatched by Taiping Dao during the early establishment of the Netherworld Court, overseeing the Yin World to intimidate these newly-subjugated Yin Gods. Apart from this, there was no need for him to intervene much in the specific operations of the Netherworld Court. In fact, he was largely unable to intervene. The Yin Gods were bound by rules set by the Heavenly Path. They knew their duties and prohibitions, and the consequences of failing to fulfill their responsibilities. The consecrated Divine Positions would monitor them autonomously. There was no need for Taiping Dao to administer punishment or reward to those unsatisfactory Yin Gods; the Heavenly Path had already taken action first. To be precise, The first superiors of the many Divine Spirits were actually the Heavenly Path, followed by the various Immortal Sects, and only then their direct superiors. However, the Heavenly Path is a broad concept that operates according to basic rules. As long as you don¡¯t oppose it, Heaven won¡¯t care about your surname. So in practice, the true masters of the Yin Gods were the Immortal Sects that consecrated them. And this was convenient for the various Immortal Sects. They didn¡¯t need to worry too much about management. With the nearly absolute fairness of the Heavenly Path as a constraint, the Divine Spirits could self-regulate. All the sects needed to do was to periodically collect the offerings from the Divine Spirits and, when necessary, summon these Divine Spirits to fight for them. Such convenience and ease, which deserved commendation for the Heavenly Path. No wonder every Immortal Sect, given the opportunity, would arrange their own Divine Spirit system. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Who wouldn¡¯t love such convenient, self-sustaining laborers who could even enter the battlefield without pay? After all, Lu Yuan fell in love with the Divine Spirit system as soon as he learned of it. The Taiping Dao¡¯s Divine Method Talisman Charter, perfected within just three years, serves as the best proof. Chapter 1304 - Chapter 1304 Chapter 515 Xiaye Manor_2 ?Chapter 1304: Chapter 515 Xiaye Manor_2 Chapter 1304: Chapter 515 Xiaye Manor_2 ¡°It¡¯s not that I truly value it, otherwise how could results come so quickly?¡± ¡°Establishing a system, even with a template to copy, is not something that can be easily mastered.¡± ¡°Without putting in a significant amount of effort, how could one suddenly take over a hundred thousand divine positions?¡± ¡°This is all the result of advance preparation and hard work.¡± Chen Hongyuan became busy. Che Shidao merely checked the other party¡¯s work and then didn¡¯t pay much more attention. After giving a couple of orders, and saying that if there is anything to come directly to him at the Greedy Belly City in the Yang World, he also left this realm. Even for immortals, places like the Yin World can be quite uncomfortable to stay in. That constant feeling of being suppressed, with the Yin energy flowing loudly beside onea€¡±it¡¯s truly too unpleasant for cultivators. It¡¯s like someone who has gone to high-altitude areas suffering from a lack of oxygen, meanwhile, the surrounding air is mixed with a large amount of toxic waste gas. Every breath feels like half of one¡¯s life is being taken away. But you have to breathe in that sparse oxygen within the waste gases for survival¡¯s sake. The feeling of a slow death, or rather, the sensation of life ebbing away every moment, is not something anyone would like. Although the environment of the Yin World won¡¯t be fatal for a True Immortal like Che Shidao, one would not feel comfortable in such an environment either. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Anyway, it¡¯s just about presiding over the Yin World. Whether it¡¯s inside the Netherworld Court or at the doorway, there¡¯s not much difference. As long as one is present and does not delay the work, it¡¯s all good. ¡°Besides, my avatar instructed me to preside over Xiaye Country by establishing a branch here and to take charge of Taiping Dao¡¯s affairs in the eastern part of Southern Domain. This barren region is also a problem to restore. And over at Jiuchuan Monster Nation, after Qing Guanzi and the others have driven out those two evil flood dragons, the country will likely be thrown to me once it is taken. That adds another country¡¯s land to my responsibilities, and I have even more affairs to deal with. Curse it, why is it that everyone has an avatar, but Qing Guanzi gets to be an Elder Taishang, who just sits and receives worship, occasionally lifting a finger to work? Me and Yi Dancheng, however, have to bustle about, working ourselves to death. Not only do I have to manage the nation¡¯s development, oversee the Netherworld Divine Method, handle the sect¡¯s branch offices, eliminate monsters and demons, deal with foreign affairs¡­ All sorts of miscellaneous tasks are pushed onto the two of us, yet the avatar and Qing Guanzi can enjoy leisurely lives. It¡¯s so unfair.¡± After leaving the Yin World and returning to Xiaye Country, feeling the comforting abundant spiritual energy and looking at the vast land, Che Shidao did not feel much joy. Just the thought of the myriad of tasks he had to undertake made his entire being start to feel worn out. Previously, in Youxin Country, he had already been busy for three years. Just as he managed to set up the sect¡¯s framework and thought he could rest for a good few decades, he was transferred here to start anew. Even if an avatar is made for doing this, such exploitation is unbearable. ¡°Someday I¡¯ll overturn this bird avatar and be my own master!¡± Muttering a curse in his heart, Che Shidao turned and looked at Li Ruoqing, who had come out with him, and said with a smile, ¡°Brother Li, the monsters of Xiaye Country have been eliminated by us, and peace has been restored here. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Now is the time when everything awaits rejuvenation. Taiping Dao plans to establish a branch here, preside over this nation, and ensure local stability. I wonder if Brother Li could recommend a place? Also, those fellow Daoists by your side, if any wish to enter my sect, you could also recommend a couple. Taiping Dao is in dire need of people, and our Mountain Gate is open to all. As long as one is devoted to the righteous path and has a pure character, they can enter my sect and become my disciples. You may share this with your fellow Daoists, so they are informed.¡± Although he cursed his original self for not being responsible, the task at hand still had to be done. Now Che Shidao began to enthusiastically organize the establishment of a branch within Xiaye Country. For this purpose, he sought Li Ruoqing¡¯s advice in particular. The other party had been in Xiaye Country for three years, during which he eliminated monsters and demons and rescued countless commoners. He even attracted numerous fellow Daoists from Immortal Sects, leading many cultivators to travel thousands of miles to follow him. This demonstrated Li Ruoqing¡¯s ability and charisma. With the assistance of such a local authority, Taiping Dao¡¯s efforts to establish the branch here would surely be much reduced. And by letting the other party recommend fellow Daoists to join Taiping Dao¡­ It will not only provide many cultivators with loose cultivator backgrounds with a good opportunity and give Li Ruoqing an explanation to his followers¡­ But it will also allow Taiping Dao to gain a large number of reliable personnel, killing two birds with one stone. After all, those who have come to the Monster Nation fearlessly with Li Ruoqing, to slay monsters and demons for the sake of the common people, their character alone is enough to prove their reliability as cultivators. Taiping Dao accepting these individuals wouldn¡¯t have to worry about inappropriate elements undermining its reputation. Furthermore, given Li Ruoqing¡¯s personality, having him recommend fellow Daoists means that he would likely not suggest any unsuitable candidates. ¡°The turmoil in Xiaye Country has been due to the lack of a True Immortal to suppress it. It is indeed fortunate for the local commoners that a True Person is willing to establish a branch and preside here,¡± said Li Ruoqing, feeling happy upon hearing Che Shidao¡¯s words, and moved by the trust placed in him to recommend sect members and disciples. In the current age, when various Immortal Sects recruit disciples, they exclusively select innocent children from the mortal realm, personally bring them back to the sect, and nurture them from childhood, thereby establishing a sense of belonging to the sect in the disciples. This is also the guarantee of the disciples¡¯ loyalty to their sect. To consider already grown adult loose cultivators who have learned Dao Law is virtually outside the consideration of Immortal Sects. Chapter 1305 - Chapter 1305 Chapter 515 Xiaye Other Courtyard_3 ?Chapter 1305: Chapter 515 Xiaye Other Courtyard_3 Chapter 1305: Chapter 515 Xiaye Other Courtyard_3 The reason is simple. First, every few years, Immortal Sects regularly select qualified disciples within their jurisdiction. If there were any qualified candidates, they would have already been recruited, not overlooked in the wild. Those who get overlooked are mostly those with insufficient talents or temperaments; no one wants them, and they have no choice but to become independent cultivators. Such people are naturally disdained by the Immortal Sects. Second, independent cultivators are a mixed bunch, and many among them are demonic cultivators with dubious character. Recruiting such people would only tarnish the sect¡¯s morals and reputation. Third, outsiders are not trustworthy. Who knows if there are spies planted by other sects among them? If a spy were recruited, whether he steals the sect¡¯s techniques and magical treasures, communicates with outsiders, or turns traitor in times of crisis¡­ For any sect, the harm could be unimaginable. In summary, selecting qualified disciples from independent cultivators is almost as difficult as extracting gold from feces. With their own sources of disciples, the sects have absolutely no need to bother recruiting these uncertain independent cultivators. It was only because Taiping Dao had just arrived in this region and had just established its sect that it considered recruiting from independent cultivators due to a lack of manpower. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? However, even so, it wasn¡¯t easy for ordinary independent cultivators to enter the doors of Taiping Dao. After all, Taiping Dao is an Earth Immortal Sect and among the Immortal Sects, it is a Grand Fairy Door. Just in terms of threshold, it belongs to the major Immortal Sects, a leader of the righteous path. Even if such a sect were to prospect in feces for gold, it would insist on the true gold. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï By saying this now, Che Shidao was undoubtedly delegating the selection power to Li Ruoqing. If Li Ruoqing intended, it was entirely feasible for him to plant spies within Taiping Dao or to infiltrate morally dubious individuals amongst the candidates. That Taiping Dao would do so could only mean that they had utmost trust in him. ¡®Previously, when chatting with Brother Xiong and others, I often heard them talk about the hardships of independent cultivators who lacked the backing of a sect. Brother Xiong and the others always expressed their longing to become Disciples of the Immortal Sect. It¡¯s just a pity that they lacked the talent to qualify for selection. Or perhaps, by some twist of fate, they had practiced methods from other paths and inherited Tao from other families before the sect¡¯s selection of disciples, ultimately missing the opportunity to join. If I can now find them a proper path and help them join Taiping Dao, becoming people of an Earth Immortal Sect, there is no doubt that I would have found them a way out. Perhaps several hundred years from now, it might be possible to see a True Immortal among these cultivators. Given Brother Xiong and others¡¯ character and strength, without the need to demand particular temperaments or inheritance from other Tao, they are sure to be chosen. With these disciples of Taiping Dao helping, stabilizing the situation in the Southern Domain will surely become much easier.¡¯ Thinking thus in his heart, Li Ruoqing looked at Che Shidao, moved and spoke solemnly, ¡°True Person has let me recommend some cultivators to join under Taiping Dao. This task is indeed a grave responsibility, making me truly anxious and alarmed. But True Person trusts me when I say that within my explanation in Xiaye Country, there indeed are people with pure character and outstanding strength. If True Person is impressed by them, I can compile a list, allowing them to come and meet one by one for your esteemed sect to choose. As for the location to establish another branch in Xiaye Country, I recommend Cangwu Mountain. This place is regarded as the premier blessed land in Xiaye Country, with abundant Spiritual Energy and exceptional natural features, making it an excellent location for the fairy dwellings. Previously, Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s branch in Xiaye Country was also built here. True Person could just take it over and restore it to its original state.¡± Having been involved in Xiaye Country for three years, Li Ruoqing had become very familiar with the country¡¯s details. There was no way around it. To survive in a hostile environment surrounded by demons, you must understand the local customs and geography; otherwise, survival would be impossible. This was also burdensome labor necessary for survival. Che Shidao laughed and said, ¡°Since Brother Li recommended it, how could I not trust it? Since Cangwu Mountain is an annexe of the Changqing Immortal Sect, being favored by this sect indeed speaks well of it. I shall choose this place for the annexe of the Taiping Dao as well.¡± As for those fellow cultivators you mentioned, feel free to recommend them, let them come to Cangwu Mountain, and take the entrance test. As long as they pass, I can decide to enroll them all into the annexe, to be disciples under me.¡± If there are outstanding ones, including them in the true transmissions is also possible.¡± True transmission disciples, within the Immortal Sects, are considered heirs to the Tao inheritance, cultivated as seeds of a True Immortal. Li Ruoqing, standing before us, holds a status of merely a true transmission disciple within Dongyang Mountain. The promise of true transmission from Che Shidao undoubtedly gives many individual cultivators a chance to ascend to True Immortality. For many individual cultivators struggling to even learn a single spell due to fragmentation in their Tao inheritance, this indeed is a path to the heavens. Of course, a promise is just a promise. In the various Immortal Sects, often there are severala€¡±even a dozena€¡±true transmission disciples. In a typical sect, reaching the Five Qi Towards Primordial realm usually suffices to earn a status of true transmission. Yet, among the many true transmissions, only one or two, sometimes none, eventually become immortal. If there is indeed someone among these individual cultivators with astounding talent and heaven¡¯s favored geniusa€¡± facing such a talent, Lu Yuan would indeed be willing to offer a nation¡¯s Qi Luck to cultivate a True Immortal for his sect, considering it a worthwhile investment. Typical True Immortals, in terms of power, far surpass those mass-produced Qi Luck Dao Fruits, with significantly greater strength and wider authority. If one could truly cultivate such an individual, it would be extremely valuable. This business is not a loss. But if there is no such person, then I¡¯m sorrya€¡± at most you get a true transmission status. If you want immortal resources, go find your own fortune.¡± The sect does not have the surplus to wager on uncertain ordinary true transmissions. Rather than gambling on those, better to honestly follow Lu Yuan¡¯s plan, producing stable Qi Luck Dao Fruits to help several avatars achieve Earth Immortality! That way at least there¡¯s a safety net, and they are all his own avatars, so no need to worry about loyalty issues. Essentially, Che Shidao has only issued a blank checka€¡±one which exchanges based on fate. But even so. Having such a promise is still enough to make one joyful. Because this implies that from an originally hopeless situation, a slight crack has been openeda€¡±a chance to attain immortality has been revealed. For a cultivator, this is more important than anything. Li Ruoqing excitedly said, ¡°True Person, rest assured, among my fellow cultivators, many are highly skilled in magic and exceptionally talented, and they will definitely not disappoint the True Person.¡± Che Shidao smiled and nodded, ¡°In that case, I look forward even more to the arrival of your fellow cultivators. Those who dare to uphold righteousness and rush to this place will certainly not be mediocre. There is no time to delay. The demons of Xiaye Country have just been cleared, and the people urgently need to be settled. We should first go to Cangwu Mountain, establish the annexe, found the Tao inheritance, recruit manpower, and prepare to handle this matter.¡± Li Ruoqing respectfully replied, ¡°Yes, I will faithfully follow the True Person¡¯s command.¡± Then, under his lead, the two transformed into a stream of light flying towards Cangwu Mountain. Chapter 1306 - Chapter 1306 Chapter 516 Development Path ?Chapter 1306: Chapter 516 Development Path Chapter 1306: Chapter 516 Development Path After the True People had left, the School Leader of Taiping Dao, Yi Dancheng, also went to Qingyang Country. The departure of these individuals quickly restored tranquility to Mi Yun Mountain. Meanwhile, good news continuously arrived from various Avatars. Xiaye Country had been conquered, the Yin World had been pacified, and the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony initiated by Taiping Dao had almost achieved perfect success. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?0 Even on Yi Dancheng¡¯s side, a swift victory was reported soon after his departure. Upon his arrival in Qingyang Country, the School Leader of Jintai Gate personally took action, accompanying the supreme sect leader for a visit to the country. With the cooperation of Jintai Gate, the local power in Qingyang, both Qing Mountain Pavilion and Wind Thunder Fortress wisely chose to submit and turn their coats, surrendering control of their territories. The remaining Beidou Alliance was caught by surprise in a sudden attack by the two True People. Under thunderous sweeping assaults, all its key members were now slain. The remnants, pursued and mopped up by the disciples of Qing Mountain Pavilion and Wind Thunder Fortress. Beidou Gate, formerly one of the three big heads, had been effortlessly annihilated by the strike of the two True Immortals. Another true case had once again proven just how fragile mortals were in the face of True Immortals. However, this sudden move by Taiping Dao soon caught the attention of the Giant Spirit Sect from neighboring Qingyu Country. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? The True Person guarding Qingyu Country, upon noticing Taiping Dao¡¯s actions, immediately rushed to Qingyang Country in an attempt to halt Taiping Dao¡¯s operations and save the Beidou Alliance. A disagreement between the two parties quickly escalated into combat. Yet this individual was merely an Early-stage Human Immortal. How could he be an opponent against Yi Dancheng, who was equivalent to a Late-stage Human Immortal, and another Early-stage Human Immortal, the School Leader of Jintai Gate? After a brief confrontation, this True Person from the Giant Spirit Sect was severely wounded and fled, seeking refuge in an alternate residence within Qingyu Country. Hiding within the protective mountain array, he dared not venture out again. Despite gaining the upper hand and securing Qingyang Country, this conflict had exposed the ambitions of Taiping Dao. The Giant Spirit Sect¡¯s True Person who had fled, had already sent an urgent message back to the sect headquarters, informing them of the situation and requesting emergency support. Now, the Messenger of the Giant Spirit Sect who had come to attend the opening ceremony of Taiping Dao and left ahead of time, had, upon receiving the news, urgently made his return. Joining the True Person stationed in Qingyu Country, they both positioned themselves at the border between the Two Countries, on guard against an invasion by Taiping Dao. The Giant Spirit Sect was also hastily redeploying its disciples, sending them to Qingyu Country. A major conflict between the two sects seemed imminent. Meanwhile, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate behind the Giant Spirit Sect had likely received the news by now, and it remained uncertain if they would send reinforcements. With such tension brewing in Qingyang Country, Yi Dancheng naturally couldn¡¯t return, and Lu Yuan had no plans for his return either. At this moment, this Avatar was urgently expanding the protective mountain array of Qing Mountain Pavilion as a foundation to construct a True Immortal-level defensive array. Intending to use it as a base, he planned to establish Taiping Dao¡¯s stronghold in Qingyang Country. The future offshoot of Taiping Dao in Qingyang Country was confirmed to be situated at Qing Mountain Pavilion¡¯s sect location. As for everyone in Qing Mountain Pavilion, according to the agreement with Jintai Gate, they would continue to remain at Qing Mountain Pavilion, assisting Taiping Dao in completing this war against the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. After the war, they would have two options. One was to return to the main branch, which means going back to Jintai Gate. Or, they could join the Qingyang offshoot of Taiping Dao and become disciples of the offshoot. Similar choices were also given to the clan members and disciples of Wind Thunder Fortress. Overall, to ensure a smooth transition of power in Qingyang Country, Taiping Dao and Jintai Gate had offered very generous terms. It afforded the opportunity for local cultivators in these minor states to suddenly become disciples of a Great Immortal Gate, elevating their status considerably. Such treatment could only be for the preparation of the war with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, otherwise, it would not exist. In Qingyang Country, preparations for war were being made in full swing. Meanwhile, back at Mi Yun Mountain, Lu Yuan also had to start contemplating a question, which was, after conquering Youxin Country, Great Eye Kingdom, Xiaye Country, Qingyang Country, and with Jiuchuan Country about to fall into their hands as well, how should Taiping Dao develop in the future? Or to put it differently, which model should Taiping Dao adopt? Although Taiping Dao had been established for three years now, the number of newly initiated disciples was still quite low, totaling just over two hundred people to date. The reason for such scarcity primarily lay in Lu Yuan¡¯s change in strategy. After investigating, he found that the rules governing the Immortal Realm were different from those in the Nine Provinces. It wasn¡¯t about having more people but having stronger individuals. In this transcendent world, numbers could not provide an absolute advantage, or indeed any advantage at all. For an Immortal, no amount of mortals, or cultivators below the Immortal rank, had any significance. A hundred cultivators at the Five Qi Towards Primordial stage cannot kill a True Immortal. However, a True Immortal can slaughter a hundred cultivators at the Five Qi Towards Primordial stage. The disparity is so immense that it leads to an intense sense of powerlessness for low-level cultivators when facing those of higher realms. Having personally experienced this, Lu Yuan swiftly revised his habitual strategy formed in the Nine Provinces, which was to overwhelm with numbers. He adapted to the Immortal Realm¡¯s policy of selecting the cream of the crop. Or rather, he emulated the recruitment conditions of the great Immortal Gates here, favoring only the elite and not settling for mediocrity. After interacting with the True People who had come to celebrate and trading insights through his Avatars, Lu Yuan gradually came to understand the customary practices by which various Immortal Sects recruited disciples. Chapter 1307 - Chapter 1307 Chapter 516 Development Path_2 ?Chapter 1307: Chapter 516 Development Path_2 Chapter 1307: Chapter 516 Development Path_2 Apart from a few Immortal Sects which keep their Mountain Gates wide open, allowing anyone who is not too lacking to join, most Immortal Sects only accept disciples with superior qualifications; even those may not be enough, as stringent requirements of character must be met before one can be admitted. For many Immortal Sects, superior qualifications are the ticket to entry. Whether more conditions are added depends on how plentiful the sect¡¯s resources are and how strong it is. The more resources and strength an Immortal Sect has, the stricter the requirements for recruiting disciples, resulting in fewer members. Take the Qing Immortal Sect, for example, which suppresses the entire Changqing Domain. Even though it¡¯s now in decline, it still occupies twenty-one countries within the domain and remains the undisputed hegemon. Yet, such a Great Immortal Sect only has, in total, three hundred true disciples and five thousand sect members. The total number barely exceeds that of the three minor Immortal Sects in Qingyang Country. The Immortal Sects over there might not have a single True Immortal, but which one doesn¡¯t have more than ten thousand disciples? But would anyone think that these minor Immortal Sects are stronger than the Qing Immortal Sect? Of course not. Therefore, the weaker the Immortal Sect, the more it tries to increase its number of disciples to appear powerful and to boost its influence. The stronger Immortal Sects have fewer disciples and don¡¯t need such superficial displays; they always keep their size within a limited scope. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? The reason is simple: to concentrate resources for major endeavors. Having sufficient resources, they focus these resources on a select few truly exceptional individuals, maximizing the cultivation of genuine talents. Otherwise, dispersing the resources among all disciples would mean that everyone receives extremely limited benefits. In a cultivation environment that demands resources, each disciple would lack what they need, leading to difficulties in cultivation, and despite excellent qualifications, they would struggle to succeed. And a disciple who can¡¯t succeed signifies an inability to Breakthrough Realms; the inability to Breakthrough Realms means they cannot wield higher powers. Without higher powers, such low-level disciples are no different from ants to those at higher realms, who could wipe them out with a wave of a hand, rendering them utterly useless to the sect. As mentioned before, a sect¡¯s real core consists first of Immortals and secondly those who have the potential of becoming immortal, such as those in the Five Qi Towards Primordial phase. Beyond that, even if you¡¯re at the Gathering Four Qi level, you¡¯re insignificant to a sect. If you¡¯re not immortal, you¡¯re as insignificant as an ant. The Immortal Realm is just that cruel. And thus, Lu Yuan changed his strategy. The idea of recruiting disciples went from welcoming tens of thousands of cultivators to aspiring for three hundred True Immortals under his leadership. Though the number of people seemed to decrease, the quality was significantly enhanced. Originally, tens of thousands of cultivators were merely mortals. But three hundred True Immortals are genuinely Immortals. The former, no matter how grand the spectacle, won¡¯t attract a second glance from outsiders, who might even find them noisy. The latter, regardless of how low-key, would inspire reverence and fear as soon as others learn the details. The gap between the two is immense. Embracing this approach, Lu Yuan, who aspired to one day rename the Changqing Domain to the peaceful domain and become the next Great True Person, naturally gravitated toward the developmental path of the current ruler, the Qing Immortal Sect. This meant setting high entry requirements for recruiting disciples, starting with superior qualifications and adding stringent temperamental demands to ensure that the minimum achievement of future disciples would be Five Qi Towards Primordial, with a considerable chance of becoming a True Immortal. Only such disciples are worthy of joining the Taiping Dao. The reason is simple. It¡¯s because Lu Yuan will need a lot of strong enforcers to maintain his rule and hegemony in the Changqing Domain in the future. You might ask, doesn¡¯t he have Avatars? Why rely on these disciples? It¡¯s because the cost of creating Avatars is very high. To refine a Qi Luck Dao Fruit, the minimum requirement is enough precious materials to refine an Immortal Artifact to create a Dao Fruit embryo. Then, to transform a Dao Fruit embryo into a true Dao Fruit, it needs the nourishment of a country¡¯s Qi Luck and fate for at least several hundred years to metamorphose into an Immortal. The total investment in refining a Dao Fruit is several times, or even double, the cost of nurturing a True Immortal. True Immortals are common, but materials of Immortal Artifact quality are not. At this Dharma Assembly, Mi Yun Mountain saw the arrival of more than a dozen True Immortals, yet among these Immortals, only a few possess Immortal Artifacts, not even eighty percent. Within this eighty percent, most are Immortal Artifacts passed down through the sect, belonging to the sect¡¯s property, not privately owned. The remaining twenty percent belong to entire sects that do not have a single Immortal Artifact. This shows just how rare Immortal Artifacts are in the Immortal Realm. And it makes sense. Within the Immortal Realm, resources are finite. As generations of predecessors have continuously exploited these resources, the total amount is on a declining trend. Even though many resources can regenerate, the rate of regeneration cannot keep up with the pace of exploitation. As the Immortal Method prospers and the number of Immortals grows, the demand for resources also increases. Limited resources distributed among infinite Immortals inevitably leads to every Immortal receiving less and less. The Immortal Method has been in existence in the Immortal Realm for countless years. Over such a long stretch of time, no matter how profound the foundation of the Immortal Realm, it cannot withstand endless exploitation. Chapter 1308 - Chapter 1308 Chapter 516 Development Path_3 ?Chapter 1308: Chapter 516 Development Path_3 Chapter 1308: Chapter 516 Development Path_3 By now, the resources accumulated in the past were essentially exhausted. The remaining resources born each year were also controlled by powerful sects, divided directly by the Immortals within those sects as soon as they appeared, never finding their way out. It became normal for some lesser sects, which fared worse, to possess not even a single Immortal Artifact. This was because they couldn¡¯t find a way to collect those resources. Even now, a sect possessing Immortal Artifacts could hardly say they would own them for long. True Immortals all have lifespan limits, and it¡¯s impossible for them to exist forever. Immortal Artifacts naturally have usage lifespans as well. Once these lifespans are exceeded, the Immortal Artifacts decay. Or, if fate is less kind, and they don¡¯t reach decay, the Immortal Artifacts could get damaged during fights their owners engage in, becoming prematurely scrapped. Taking these realities into account, it is evident that crafting an Immortal Artifact in the Immortal Realm is not an easy feat at all. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï It¡¯s very, very difficult. When Yi Dancheng had previously taken the Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade from the Six-eyed Lord, in a sense, it was indeed a stroke of great fortune. Under normal circumstances, if the Immortals of a sect do not possess Immortal Artifacts, those Demons with little heritage are even less likely to own any. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï The fact that the Six-eyed Lord had one just shows that he truly had considerable fortune to come across such an opportunity to create a nascent form of an Immortal Artifact. This is innate good luck, unattainable by envy. Otherwise, how could this Demon become Immortal and monopolize a kingdom? Achieving this is not merely a matter of ability, but fortune plays a crucial role as well. In the Immortal Realm, the measure of a person¡¯s strength partly lies in their Mana Cultivation and partly in their fortune, but there has never been a doctrine of strength alone. Your power may be formidable, but what if a meteor falls from the sky? If Heaven intends to strike you down, wouldn¡¯t you be afraid? This assistance, then, comes from Heaven. Cultivation demands compliance with Heaven and response to humanity. For those favored by Heaven, one naturally wouldn¡¯t oppose them directly, maintaining a certain respect instead. Otherwise, should Heaven place the blame on them, not everyone could bear it. From this viewpoint, the mainstream cultivators today who possess Immortal Artifacts either have a rich heritage or are simply fortunate, neither of which is universally applicable. This situation undoubtedly imposed considerable restrictions on Lu Yuan¡¯s plan to extensively create Avatars. He too wished to create as many Avatars as possible, but that requires a multitude of Immortal Artifacts. Without Immortal Artifacts to serve as the Dao Fruit nascent form, how could there be any Avatars? Even if Immortal Artifacts are available, they only ensure the creation of Human Immortal Avatars. To create Earth Immortal Avatars, one would need Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts or higher. This presents another limitation. Lu Yuan¡¯s three Avatars were barely capable of achieving Middle Grade Immortal Artifact potential, using up the last of the entire Nine Provinces Realm¡¯s foundation. This kind of method is not replicable. Like the latter Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade, it only had the foundation of a Lower Grade Immortal Artifact unless it received more cultivation, enhancement with more immortal-grade materials, undergoing an upgrade afterward. For the rest of its life, it could only revolve around the Human Immortal level. Considering these material limitations, the Avatars that Lu Yuan could create in the future were destined not to be numerous. Otherwise, if this path truly had no restrictions, in the ancient ages of the Nine Provinces realm, the paths of Immortal Artifacts as Dao Fruits would have flourished long ago. It might just be relegated to the Southern Border, where the strongest could at best claim the title of Human Emperor. That¡¯s unsustainable, consuming too much resource, was destined not to be widely promoted. And with the depletion of resources, it would gradually weaken. As Taiping Dao¡¯s influence in the Southern Domain expanded, manpower also became scarce, and Lu Yuan had spent the last two years trying to collect some Immortal-grade materials but ultimately failed to find any. He gradually realized the difficulties and returned to reality. That is, the path of creating Avatars could only be conducted on a small scale. Concentrate resources to create a few core Earth Immortal Avatars to lead the sect. The remaining high-ranking ordinary roles, the usual Human Immortals, could raise some ordinary disciples to serve as regular fighters. This would be the optimal solution for maximizing resource utilization. It wasn¡¯t necessary for him to control everything, just to control those few at the core of the sect handling the highest military power. As long as the Earth Immortals were his people, some Human Immortal disciples, even if some harbored different intentions, faced with a power spanning a Great Realm, could not stir any trouble. In the end, should Lu Yuan become a Heavenly Immortal and take control of the ultimate military power, the gap of two Great Realms would make his position as stable as Mount Tai. No need to mention further. Those disciples painstakingly trained by these sects, who eventually become Immortals and have the bond of previous mentorship, what are the chances they would betray their sect? Not everyone is heartless. These disciples, raised within the sect, educated by the sect, accessing the sect¡¯s resources, surrounded by familiar fellow disciples and respected mentors, find the sect their home. Who could betray their own home? Even if there are such individuals, they would be a small minority. If they really did, they would also have to face the world¡¯s contempt. The cost of betrayal is too high; with emotional bonds added, there is hardly any need to worry about betrayal. Of course. Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t purely focused on quality over quantity. He needed both quality and quantity. Specifically speaking, at Mi Yun Mountain, the headquarters of Taiping Dao, the disciples here would follow a quality-based approach. If not a True Immortal seed, they wouldn¡¯t qualify to enter. But in the various branch offices under the sect¡¯s jurisdiction, the focus would be on quantity. Recruit as many qualified disciples as possible to expand the number of sect disciples. Then, from these qualified disciples, select the elite, the True Immortal seeds, to be sent to Mi Yun Mountain for focused cultivation. Through this layered selection, a promotion system is built. Taiping Dao would then have enough manpower available and wouldn¡¯t suffer from resource dilution that impedes producing True Immortals, effectively killing two birds with one stone. As for the potential downsides of this approach later on, that would have to be addressed as they come. As long as Lu Yuan could control the topmost forces of the sect, even if mistakes occurred during development, corrections could be made directly. With absolute power to suppress, there was no worry about loss of control. In a world where great power is concentrated in an individual, having power is just so straightforward and practical. Chapter 1309 - Chapter 1309 Chapter 517 Jiuchuan Dragon Palace ?Chapter 1309: Chapter 517 Jiuchuan Dragon Palace Chapter 1309: Chapter 517 Jiuchuan Dragon Palace Just when Lu Yuan had determined the future development path of the Taiping Dao, on the other side, Qing Guanzi was also leading various True Persons and had arrived at the Jiuchuan Demon Country. The great river surged, flowing eastward. The name of the Jiuchuan Country, originating from the Changqing Domain, comes from nine rivers converging, flowing into this country, forming a great river that leads directly into the East Sea, hence the name. The Jiuchuan River, having gathered the waters of all rivers in the domain, became the largest river in Changqing, stretching across tens of thousands of miles and spanning several dozen countries. At its widest, it spans hundreds of miles, and mortals navigating by boat could cross it in a day. The grandeur and spectacle of this river are unmatched by ordinary rivers and streams. ¡°Such magnificent waters!¡± Upon seeing the Jiuchuan, Qing Guanzi couldn¡¯t help but exclaim, ¡°No wonder those two vile flood dragons resist leaving this country; with such river waters, if I were of the aquatic tribes, I too would not want to depart.¡± Being an avatar of Lu Yuan, Qing Guanzi possessed the experiences of his original self, and his perspective was far from shallow. During his time in the Nine Provinces, to gather various foundations and explore mysteries, Lu Yuan had traversed the entire realm, visiting all ten domains of the Nine Provinces. In the process, he saw countless splendid landscapes and beautiful scenes. He had even witnessed cataclysms like the disasters at the Four Extremes. After arriving in the Immortal Realm, he had visited several countries. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? Yet such experiences, compared to the vastness of the entire Immortal Realm, were still quite limited. Just like now, seeing the Jiuchuan River, as wide as hundreds of miles, almost like a grand lake, was the first for Qing Guanzi. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 The reaction he had upon seeing it was merely to marvel, truly worthy of the scale of the Immortal Realm. Only such a great river could easily appear. ¡°It is precisely because of such grand river waters that this blessed land must not be allowed to fall into the claws of those vile flood dragons. If they linger here, absorbing the spiritual essence of heaven and earth and nourished by the Jiuchuan, they will eventually become a force. Once they rally the aquatic tribes and spread along the Jiuchuan throughout the entire Changqing Domain, all the territories of the Human Immortal Sects would be in constant battle, and no place would be peaceful.¡± Standing beside, Song Xiren heard these reflections, his expression solemn. The Jiuchuan water system stretched across the entire Changqing Domain, with thirty-nine countries within the domain almost all connected by its waters. With the capabilities of the aquatic tribes, using the water system, they could reach anywhere in the domain overnight. This crucial hub, occupied by two flood dragons, was like handing over their lifeline to others. For the various Immortal Sects, this was naturally unacceptable. Upon hearing this, various True Persons nodded in agreement. In their sects¡¯ territories, all were connected to the Jiuchuan through water systems, some of which were directly concentrated around the main channel of the Jiuchuan. If we talk about threats, these people are undoubtedly the most affected. Their active response this time was not without seeing the hidden dangers, hoping to seize this opportunity to resolve them together. ¡°The two vile flood dragons within Jiuchuan Country reside in the water mansion of the Dragon Palace at the riverbed.¡± Qing Guanzi also agreed with Song Xiren¡¯s view and thus suggested, ¡°If we all attack together, or if you and I take action, the commotion might be too large, I fear those two vile flood dragons might notice the adverse situation and directly escape using water evasion techniques. Once they decide to flee and occupy the geographical advantage, it would likely be impossible to stop them. Moreover, fighting these aquatic tribes in the water is ultimately disadvantageous for us, let¡¯s devise a plan to force them out.¡± As soon as these words fell, a Daoist robed in white stood out from the crowd, stepped forward, and said, ¡°Two True Persons, mere two snakes in the river, do not warrant your esteemed effort. I am willing to fight, delve into the Water Mansion, and capture these two demons for the True Persons to judge in front of the assembly.¡± The speaker was none other than the master of Chishui Mansion in the Eastern Territory, Kong Huaiguang. From the name of the sect to which this person belonged, it could be seen that he hailed from an area associated with water, presumably skilled in water-based Dao Law. Indeed, it was so. Chishui Mansion was located in Yunbo Country of the Eastern Territory, within which ran one of the Chishui, part of the nine rivers of the Changqing Domain. Yes, one of the major waters flowing into the current Jiuchuan was from Yunbo Country¡¯s Chishui. And Chishui Mansion, with its Mountain Gate situated in a bend of Chishui, was to say, starting from Jiuchuan and following Chishui upstream, the Mountain Gate of Chishui Mansion would be the first to be hit, inevitably encountered. As a force located in the same water region, the threat from Jiuchuan Dragon Palace should be deeply felt by Chishui Mansion. Initially, with only his own sect¡¯s power, even though he felt the threat from Jiuchuan Dragon Palace, limited by insufficient strength, there was nothing he could do but accept it. But now, with two Earth Immortal True Persons taking the lead, mobilizing nearly half of the Immortal Sects in the Changqing Domain, and nearly twenty True Immortals taking action to eliminate demons in Jiuchuan Country, with such a powerful backing, what was there to fear? Therefore, as soon as Qing Guanzi initiated the conversation, Kong Huaiguang was the first to step forward, volunteering for this opening battle. ¡°With True Person Kong taking action, success is surely within reach. We entrust this task to you.¡± Seeing Kong Huaiguang willingly volunteer for battle, Song Xiren immediately smiled and nodded. Kong Huaiguang¡¯s strength was indeed considerable, his cultivation was at the mid-level of Human Immortal, and with an Immortal Artifact in hand, his strength was among the stronger ones within the ranks of Human Immortals. Moreover, his sect was located in the midst of the river waters, already renowned throughout the domain for its water-based Dao Law. In a battle in the water, there would be no disadvantage in terms of location. Even if he were to confront that old dragon in the water, it wasn¡¯t necessarily a foregone conclusion that he would be at a disadvantage. Next to him, Qing Guanzi also nodded slightly, not objecting, but added, ¡°It¡¯s wonderful that True Person Kong is willing to take action. However, within the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace, apart from that old dragon, its wicked offspring has also grown into a Great Demon. Chapter 1310 - Chapter 1310 Chapter 517 Jiuchuan Dragon Palace_2 ?Chapter 1310: Chapter 517 Jiuchuan Dragon Palace_2 Chapter 1310: Chapter 517 Jiuchuan Dragon Palace_2 The True Person, alone, would inevitably be at a disadvantage facing two monsters. It would be more prudent to find another person to accompany the True Person into the water.¡± As Qing Guanzi spoke, his gaze fell upon Pei Yongxiu, the School Leader of Bihu Palace. This was the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, a joint effort of both the Taiping Dao and the Qing Immortal Sect. At this moment, Kong Huaiguang, as a subject of the Qing Immortal Sect, had already volunteered, taking on the task. Hence, Taiping Dao, as one of the initiators, naturally could not stand idly by; it was time to contribute. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï And among the Southern Domain faction, as the leader, he, of course, could not demean himself by taking action lightly. Among the three True Persons accompanying him, the most skilled in water Dao Law was naturally Bihu Palace, also of the same sect, located underwater and known for its Water Palace. Pei Yongxiu noticed the intent in the senior True Person¡¯s gaze, smiled wryly in his heart but understood the meaning, and did not dare refuse, spontaneously stepping forward and saying, ¡°Fellow True Persons, I am also willing to fight, to capture the evil flood dragon on behalf of our fellow daoists.¡± Upon hearing this, Qing Guanzi clapped his hands and laughed heartily, ¡°Excellent, excellent, excellent! With True Person Pei accompanying True Person Kong, I believe we won¡¯t even need to lift a finger this time to subdue those two malevolent flood dragons.¡± Pei Yongxiu¡¯s compliance undoubtedly testified to Taiping Dao¡¯s influence over Bihu Palace, which greatly pleased and delighted him. If all the sects of the Southern Domain were like this, then Taiping Dao¡¯s foothold here would be very secure. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã0 ¡°Since the combatants have been chosen, let us settle the battle this way.¡± Seeing that Qing Guanzi had also picked a candidate, Song Xiren looked towards Kong and Pei and spoke, ¡°True Persons Kong and Pei, I entrust this task to you.¡± ¡°We will not let True Person down.¡± Kong and Pei answered in unison, then exchanged a glance, each transforming into a streak of light as they flew into the river¡¯s depths. Watching their figures disappear into the deep waters. Song Xiren turned back to address the group of True Persons, ¡°Fellow daoists, True Persons Kong and Pei have gone to eliminate the monsters, so let us wait here for a moment until their return.¡± Qing Guanzi said with a smile, ¡°At this moment, your suggestion is good. The scenery of the Jiuchuan River is indeed beautiful. The Dharma Assembly earlier ended too quickly, so why not continue now? Exorcising demons from the river and debating the Dao by the river will also be an excellent tale.¡± ¡°Haha, should Friend Qing Guanzi be so inclined, how could I refuse to join?¡± Song Xiren laughed loudly, then with a sweep of his sleeve, the river water churned, and droplets separated from the river, rising into mid-air, forming seating arrangements. With another wave of his hand, an array of fresh fruits, delicacies, and heavenly drinks adorned the area. Bright lights flickered as celestial maidens emerged to perform music and dance. Having arranged all this, Song Xiren addressed everyone, ¡°Please, take a seat, let us enjoy the music and dance, and await the good news.¡± As an Earth Immortal, and the future School Leader of the Qing Immortal Sect, with so many fellow daoists around, Song Xiren was extremely confident about the flood dragon elimination in the Jiuchuan River. After all, they were but two minor dragons at the Human Immortal level. Facing such an assembly, could they possibly stir any trouble? If things went smoothly, perhaps it would be just as Kong Huaiguang had stated. Without the need for these Earth Immortals to act, he and Pei Yongxiu could apprehend the two vile flood dragons and bring them back for questioning. After all, among peers of equal rank, unless encountering unique bloodlines like that of the Six-eyed Lord, True Immortals of the Immortal Sect, who possess long traditions and have cultivated various Dao Law Divine Powers, are indeed superior in magical combat than those Great Demons lacking heritage and with rudimentary abilities. If the True Immortals have heritage and Immortal Artifacts, complemented by techniques specifically developed for those artifacts, their combat ability could easily be amplified several times. Such an advantage is even greater against those Great Demons that rely solely on brute strength. Although the two dragons from the Dragon Palace had some True Dragon blood, it was only a trace. Without becoming True Dragons, they are mere hybrids, not purebred Different Species. In terms of the rarity of their blood, they do not compare to the Six-eyed Lord. Kong and Pei¡¯s sects have a tradition spanning tens of thousands of years, which is quite extensive. And both possess inherited Immortal Artifacts, which adds to their combat capabilities. Just by visible Strength alone, the odds were good that they could capture the two stray Hybrid Flood Dragons. ¡°By True Person¡¯s command.¡± All the True Persons saluted in unison, not hesitating, and after agreeing, found their seats and settled in. They shared Song Xiren¡¯s thoughts, none believing that the two malevolent flood dragons below the river could create any waves against their might. However, with the strength of Kong and Pei, this wasn¡¯t something that could be done in a short amount of time. Waiting idly was not ideal, it was better to continue the debate on the Dao. This time, the debate was joined by Master Song, an even more prominent figure. He was a senior True Person of the Qing Immortal Sect, the very next School Leader, a strong figure among Earth Immortals, renowned as having the stature of a Heavenly Immortal. Such a personage, being much more formidable than Qing Guanzi, Offered an opportunity right now, to seek his advice and guidance on cultivation issues would be an immense fortune. The many True Persons present were all eager, not wanting to miss out. To speak bluntly, Compared with the Great Tao, those two evil flood dragons were of little concern to the many True Persons present. They might well become just a spectacle, with the daoists demonstrating their Dao Law Divine Powers to the excitement of the audience. Thus, consensually and gladly, the atmosphere on the river surface became very spirited. Just as the many True Persons were eagerly anticipating their turn to approach the two Earth Flower True Men and seek their teachings, In the depths of the Jiuchuan River, as True Persons Kong and Pei descended further, their streaks of light pierced the quietude, immediately alerting the local residents. Chapter 1311 - Chapter 1311 Chapter 517 Jiuchuan Dragon Palace_3 ?Chapter 1311: Chapter 517 Jiuchuan Dragon Palace_3 Chapter 1311: Chapter 517 Jiuchuan Dragon Palace_3 Inside the Dragon Palace. Pearl lights and treasures shining, lamps ablaze with splendor. Occupying the entire main trunk of the Jiuchuan River, the wealth amassed over the years has made the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace famous throughout the world. Within this palace, however, dwell two flood dragons, both powerful demons with formidable strength, and they have the advantage of the Water Mansion¡¯s favorable location. It was innate for an ordinary person, unaccustomed to water, to lose a third of their strength in river battles with them. People feared these factors, and thus could only look on with envy, not daring to act rashly. The two flood dragons of the Dragon Palace had thus been able to occupy the Jiuchuan River and Jiuchuan Country for a millennium, enjoying a long period of peace. But these leisurely days, amidst the recent changes in the Southern Domain¡¯s situation, were finally starting to become unsustainable. The rise of the Taiping Dao had caught the attention of the two flood dragons of the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace, especially since the sect had begun by killing their sons and brothers. But considering the strength of the opponent, they had to swallow their grievances, just as others have been cautious of the Dragon Palace in the past, they too were wary of Taiping Dao and chose to remain silent. They thought that matters would settle there. After taking over Youxin Country, the Taiping Dao was busy annexing the Great Eye Kingdom, hardly having the time and energy to trouble them. And in the end, the facts proved it to be so. After seizing Youxin Country, the Taiping Dao indeed calmed down for two years, except for occasional sweeps of the Great Eye Kingdom; they earnestly stayed within their own country, busily managing their affairs. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? After a brief period of upheaval, the Southern Domain seemed to be returning to tranquility. But who would have known that a few days ago, things took a turn. Suddenly, from Mi Yun Mountain over there, news spread that the external Immortal Sect Taiping Dao was actually presided over by an Earth Immortal True Person, establishing it as a Great Immortal Sect. Moreover, that Earth Immortal had come to the Southern Domain and publicly declared an intention to purge the demons, restoring peace to the Southern Border. The meaning behind this was cleara€¡±it was aimed at them, the demons. Announcing this was nothing but a way for them, the great demons, to wisely take the hint and leave on their own, sparing the True Person the trouble of dealing with them. The Six-eyed Lord of the Great Eye Monster Nation caught onto this and thus took the initiative to leave. But the Great Eye Monster Nation had already been swept clean by Taiping Dao, leaving only Ji Mu City still holding out. The Six-eyed Lord complained that staying in the city was like being imprisoned, making it senseless to continue being king. But Jiuchuan Country was different. To start with, Jiuchuan¡¯s expansive territory was not even worth mentioning. This place, blessed with river advantages and far richer than the Great Eye Kingdom, had billions of tamed humans alone, triple the number of the Great Wood Country. Beyond that, in addition to Jiuchuan Country, there was also the Jiuchuan River which connected the nine great rivers of the Changqing Domain. The benefits brought by this single river alone were equivalent to those of one or two small countries. Furthermore, as flood dragons were among the leaders of the water tribes, their Dragon Palace¡¯s rule over the Jiuchuan River enabled them to easily subdue and command the water creatures within, ensuring their obedience. The Dragon Palace, with control over both Jiuchuan Country and the Jiuchuan River, reaped benefits on par with those Great Immortal Sects occupying three or four smaller countries. Yes. With a river and a nation within its command, the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace in theory possessed the foundation to give birth to an Earth Immortal. When it came to this fortress, the interests entangled with Jiuchuan Country could not be simply encapsulated by a small country. The reason the old flood dragon in the palace had managed to break through to the mid-stage Earth Immortal, becoming the foremost True Immortal dominating the Southern Domain, was precisely because of this foundation that far surpassed other Immortal Sects. His ability to cultivate a great demon offspring was also due to this same reason. So, how could the Dragon Kings of Jiuchuan, whose ascent to becoming Earth Immortals was at stake, willingly relinquish their hold? Even though they knew Taiping Dao possessed an Earth Immortal, they did not succumb to flight but were prepared to begrudgingly hold on, to try and preserve. Though unwilling to leave, the old dragon wasn¡¯t hot-headed enough to think of fighting to the death recklessly. He had his reliance, after all. To fend off the Earth Immortal from Taiping Dao, taking advantage of the Dharma Assembly happening these past few days, the old dragon urgently called for a powerful reinforcement, to serve as his trump card. But for the sake of secrecy and to achieve a surprising effect, he had kept this trump card hidden, even from the many water demons of the Dragon Palace, who were not made aware. ?¦Ï??0.§ã? ¡°Where is the Jiuchuan Dragon King?¡± A majestic and resounding voice instantly spread throughout the Dragon Palace. Upon reaching the entrance of the Water Mansion, facing the flickering formations, Kong Huaiguang did not dare to advance but stopped at the edge of the formation, shouting into the interior, ¡°I, Kong Huaiguang of Chishui Mansion, along with fellow sect members, have specifically come to pay our respects to your mansion!¡± The voice from outside the Dragon Palace rattled the numerous water demons inside, who began to panic. The news of Taiping Dao¡¯s intention to cleanse the Southern Domain of demons had spread throughout the nine countries of the Southern Domain in just a few days. As vassals of the Dragon Palace and Water Mansion, and with connections to the Jiuchuan aquatic systems, they were much more informed than the average person. They were well aware that their Dragon Palace was a thorn in the side of Taiping Dao, which would inevitably come to strike them down. Now that someone was knocking at the door, and from the sound of it, they clearly meant no goodwill. Had the forces of the Immortal Sect already advanced so quickly? This thought crossed the minds of many water demons, who began to contemplate fleeing. After all, compared to Taiping Dao¡¯s Earth Immortal, their own Dragon King and Crown Prince were obviously no match. In the Dragon Palace, the incumbent Dragon King Qingyuan Ye, upon hearing that voice, immediately proceeded with his son Qing Yuanlian to a palace deep within. ¡°Father, the Immortal Sect is attacking,¡± said Qingyuan Ye, leading his son into the palace. After they knelt and paid their respects to a dignified man above, he expressed his worry, ¡°How should we respond?¡± ¡°Since I am here, the Jiuchuan Country will still be yours, no one can snatch it away,¡± the man above snorted confidently, ¡°I don¡¯t know where that Taiping Dao came from, but relying on one Earth Immortal, they dare to act so arrogantly right after arriving. It¡¯s just an Earth Immortal, Who isn¡¯t an Earth Immortal? I, Qing Yuanchen, would like to see what means they have, daring to claim they can grasp the whole Southern Domain so easily.¡± Yes. The reliance of Qingyuan Ye, the Dragon King of the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace, was exactly his father, the present Qing Yuanchen, a great demon at the Earthly Immortal Realm. Chapter 1312 - Chapter 1312 Chapter 518 Qingyuan Dragon Clan ?Chapter 1312: Chapter 518 Qingyuan Dragon Clan Chapter 1312: Chapter 518 Qingyuan Dragon Clan ¡°With my father here, a mere Taiping Dao Earth Immortal is naturally no match,¡± Qingyuan Ye wholeheartedly agreed with his father¡¯s words, without a hint of dissent. Qing Yuanchen laughed heartily, ¡°Well said. Those human race Immortal Sects, how can they compare to the long heritage of our Qingyuan Dragon Clan, or match the nobility of my bloodline? Since Jiuchuan River has been taken by you, it now belongs to our Qingyuan Dragon Clan, as our clan property. If outsiders want to take it, fine, but they must show their capability. If they win, why not let them have it? Ye Er, take Lian Er out with you and give a proper lesson to those arrogant folks from the Immortal Sects outside, let them know the might of the Qingyuan Clan. Don¡¯t worry, I will be watching from here. If that shameless Earth Immortal from Taiping Dao makes a move against you, I will personally stop him and teach him a lesson. Go and fight with confidence. If you can kill those arrogant ones, don¡¯t hesitate, just strike to kill. I¡¯ll take care of everything.¡± The True Dragon father of Qingyuan Ye spoke with extreme arrogance, showing no regard for the Immortal Sects even while on their territory. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï It¡¯s evident how confident he was. And indeed, he had every reason to be confident. Contrary to what the outside world speculated, that the old flood dragon of Jiuchuan Dragon Palace was an obscure Hybrid Dragon Descendant with no significant background. Qingyuan Ye actually had a substantial origin and a profound background. He was born into the Qingyuan Dragon Clan of the East Desolate Inner Sea, belonging to the noble bloodline of True Dragons, a flood dragon from birth. Born as an Immortala€¡±how many clans in the world can compare to such bloodline? The fact that the Qingyuan Dragon Clan could produce such offspring shows their power. And it was indeed so. The Qingyuan Dragon Clan was the overlord of the East Desolate Inner Sea. Their position there was roughly equivalent to the status of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates in the Changqing Domain. They might not rule over the entire sea, but they were one of its tyrants. In the Immortal Realm, there are many Region Continents, some directly connected by land, while others are separated by vast seas. The seas that divide these Region Continents are, depending on their geographical location, divided into relatively independent Sea Areas. And the Sea Areas are vast, often several times or even ten times larger than a single Region Continent. Even though marine resources are not as abundant as those of the continents, the sheer size of a Sea Area can make it comparable to a Region Continent. And the East Desolate Inner Sea is one such region. Being the overlord in a Sea Area that could match a Region Continent, given the current situation where a single continent could contain a dozen or more domains, the Qingyuan Dragon Clan¡¯s volume was equivalent to controlling two or three Great Domains in the Donghua Continent. The strength of this clan was thus apparent. Even compared to Dongyang Mountain, the Qingyuan Dragon Clan was clearly a notch stronger. Indeed, it was so. Within the Qingyuan Dragon Clan, there were as many as three Dragon Ancestors whose strength could match that of a Heavenly Immortal. The number of True Dragons beneath them exceeded twenty, and there were hundreds of flood dragons. Such strength, within the Donghua Continent, was unmatched even by ordinary Heavenly Immortal Sects. It was fortunate that the East Desolate Inner Sea was vast, with few Sea Areas bordering Donghua Continent, many more bordered other Sea Areas, the insides of which were occupied by various Sea Clans, lacking unity. Forget about expanding outward; these clans were already at war with one another. Even for the Qingyuan Dragon Clan, much of their efforts were not focused on the land, which did not resonate well with them, but rather on battling other dominant clans within the East Desolate Inner Sea. The forces they could spare to interfere with Donghua Continent were just those True Dragons like Qing Yuanchen, living in the Sea Areas bordering the continent. Even those who came to the Changqing Domain were only from Qing Yuanchen¡¯s lineage among these True Dragons. It¡¯s the same old story. The East Desolate Inner Sea was too vast, even the areas bordering Donghua Continent were immense. Such a vast region required too many members of the Dragon Clan for defense. Everyone had their own interests and matters to attend to, with no time to concern themselves with you. As long as the conflict doesn¡¯t reach into the East Desolate Inner Sea itself, who cares if your expansion on land fails and you get driven back? Even if you get killed on land, at the Qingyuan Dragon Clan¡¯s side, at most, they would mourn for a while, but they would not take further action. Revenge? That¡¯s impossible. An Immortal Sect capable of killing a True Dragon already represents significant strength. Not to mention the cost of seeking revenge against such a force. Just consider the Donghua Continent, within which there are Heavenly Immortals in various Great Domains. You Sea Clans, why leave your own home to stir trouble on our shores, as if those Great True Persons don¡¯t exist? Qingyuan Dragon Clan, indeed, is an overlord in the sea, and stronger than the ordinary Heavenly Immortal Sects. But compared to the Immortal Sects of an entire continent, a mere Dragon Clan is nothing. In the face of fundamental racial duties and Tao Inheritance conflicts, the Great True Persons of the various Immortal Sects have not refrained from uniting to deal with external demons. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï If you push the Immortal Sects of Donghua Continent too hard and provoke their apprehension, it wouldn¡¯t take all of them to acta€¡±just a few allied Immortal Sects from the major coastal Great Domains would be enough trouble for the Qingyuan Dragon Clan. The boundary between the sea and the land has always been clear. That is, I won¡¯t invade your territory in the sea. And you shouldn¡¯t come ashore to disturb my life. Everyone minds their own business, both the Human Race and the Sea Clans, living in peace without disruption. If you insist on coming, and then get killed, it¡¯s because you were not strong enough, and you just have to accept it. If you then come seeking revenge, it¡¯s like not knowing when to stopa€¡±it¡¯ll just show you the might of the Immortal Sects¡¯ methods. So, unless the Qingyuan Dragon Clan wants to provoke a great war between the Sea Areas and the Region Continents. Chapter 1313 - Chapter 1313 Chapter 518 Qingyuan Dragon Clan_2 ?Chapter 1313: Chapter 518 Qingyuan Dragon Clan_2 Chapter 1313: Chapter 518 Qingyuan Dragon Clan_2 Otherwise, the struggle for dominance over Jiuchuan Country would be limited to only Qing Yuanchen¡¯s lineage and the local Immortal Sects of the Southern Domain. Everyone would rely on their own means to fight for the ownership of this country. Nevertheless, Qing Yuanchen was extremely confident about his victory. The reason was very simple. Coming from the Qingyuan Dragon Clan, a formidable force even among Heavenly Immortals, and facing a minor Immortal Sect led by an Earth Immortal who was merely a Human Immortal, the two sides were not on the same level in terms of Divine Powers, Dao Law, or stratagems and insights. It was like the gap between the son of a wealthy family and an ordinary person. Just from this perspective, Qing Yuanchen saw no reason he would lose to an Earth Immortal from the Taiping Dao. And with such a father to rely on, one can imagine how substantial Qingyuan Ye¡¯s background must have been. No wonder he refused to leave despite the implicit threats from the Taiping Dao, insisting on staunchly defending Jiuchuan Country. It wasn¡¯t a death wish but a display of genuine confidence. It¡¯s known that the True Dragon bloodline is among the most powerful of the water tribes throughout the world. How could such bloodlines casually fall into oblivion? It¡¯s known that to become a dragon, one must at least reach the level of an Earth Immortal. Even a lesser flood dragon must achieve the Human Dao Fruit. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï As for those further down the line, even if they possess some True Dragon bloodline, it would be very diluted. By name alone, they wouldn¡¯t even have the right to bear the word ¡°dragon¡±. Therefore, merely looking at this point, the fact that Qingyuan Ye could become a flood dragon and also turn his son into a flood dragon, alongside a Blackwater Snake in their lineage that also showed signs of becoming a flood dragon¡­ All bore the bloodline of flood dragons in their household; they had almost created a Dragon Clan. This feat was astonishing as though exceeding the heavens. Managing to accomplish this, by mere personal effort, was beyond explanation. Especially for a race like the Dragon Clan, which places great emphasis on bloodline. The consecutive emergence of flood dragons within two generations alone signifies that Qingyuan Ye¡¯s bloodline is extraordinary. Otherwise, how could his descendants easily revert to their ancestral bloodline and transform into flood dragons? Keep in mind that many descendants with True Dragon bloodlines, once their blood becomes diluted, might not become flood dragons even if they become True Immortals in their lifetime. More likely, they take on immortal forms in their original mundane manifestations. Rather than an ordinary snake, turtle, fish, or shrimp, becoming a dragon or flood dragon upon becoming immortal. Situations like this are not unheard of in the world, but they are rare. Those who can become flood dragons are more likely to have rich bloodlines to begin with, so they cross the threshold of becoming immortal in one leap. But the majority have diluted bloodlines, unable to coalesce the visage of a flood dragon, and must become immortals with all sorts of bizarre shapes; that¡¯s the norm for these dragon descendants. The Jiuchuan Dragon Palace having two flood dragons within two generations, and with younger generations continuously showing signs of becoming flood dragons¡­ For such a situation, anyone with a slight understanding of the Dragon Clan would realize that their bloodline is far from simple. Within the Dragon Palace, or perhaps Qingyuan Ye himself, must surely possess the direct bloodline of True Dragons, and it could even be from the first generation, not one removed. That is to say, he likely had a True Dragon father. A True Dragon, that is already an Earth Immortal. But unfortunately, the Changqing Domain is not near the sea. In the past, with thriving Immortal Ways and few monster threats, it has only been in these last two or three thousand years that demons began to proliferate. So the various Immortal Sects¡¯ knowledge of demons and True Dragons still resides within their sect records. Especially for Immortals who have grown up in recent generations, like the current dire situation in the Changqing Domain, many have not set foot outside the Mountain Gate from the moment they joined until they became Immortals. Remaining in seclusion within the Mountain Gate, they dare not venture out after reaching Immortality for fear of encountering ambushes from enemies. Under these circumstances, all the True Persons understand what True Dragons are but having never truly seen or interacted with one, it¡¯s difficult to clearly discern the difference between a first-generation flood dragon and one a generation removed. Along with the recent tendency towards chaos and isolation, the understanding of external information has been obstructed. Combined with the deliberate low profile of the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace¡­ Many a True Person from various Immortal Sects, unaware of Qingyuan Ye¡¯s true origins, simply regarded him as a hybrid flood dragon with somewhat good luck, which explained their lack of surprise. As for the Qing Immortal Sect? To be frank, for years, they had been preoccupied with fighting against the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects, bearing most of the pressure from the west. Battling the remnants of the previous dynasty for nearly ten thousand years had resulted in countless deaths. Their sect disciples, as soon as they achieved a bit of proficiency in their cultivation, were rushed to the front lines to engage in deadly combat with the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects, leaving them no energy to care about other things. Take Song Xiren, who despite reaching Dao Fruit during a stronger period for the Qing Immortal Sect, faced a Jiuzhou Immortal Sect that was receiving more aid from other allies at that time. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Four to five thousand years ago, the battles between the two were even fiercer and more brutal. Especially three thousand years ago, during a decisive battle between the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects and the Qing Immortal Sect, both sides lost four Earth Flower True Persons and nineteen Human Flower True Persons on the spot. A single battle claimed twenty-three Immortals, practically wiping out a generation. This resulted in so many deaths and such depletion of resources for all involved that they lacked the strength to continue, leading to a temporary cessation of hostilities. This has led to the current situation, where from the outside, aside from the occasional demons causing chaos, the Changqing Domain seems relatively peaceful, and not that intensely war-torn. But this is just on the surface. The Jiuzhou Immortal Sects and the Qing Immortal Sect have merely ceased hostilities temporarily due to their lack of manpower and the realisation after ten thousand years of conflict that neither could overcome the other. If you show any weakness that others can exploit, both parties will certainly not hold back. Therefore, even with a somewhat stable situation, the Qing Immortal Sect dares not let their disciples wander freely. Fearing that once they leave, they could be targeted by the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect and ambushed outside. Or that the mass departure of disciples could leave the sect vulnerable to a surprise attack by the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, resulting in heavy losses. For either of these reasons, it has been determined that disciples of the Qing Immortal Sect, apart from within the Changqing Domain, rarely have the chance to travel elsewhere, at most, they could roam around nearby but wouldn¡¯t venture too far. For important top-level combat forces like Song Xiren, they were even more so considered national treasures, not to be deployed lightly. Lower-ranking disciples might have the chance to travel, but for a True Immortal like him, that would be absolutely impossible. This also meant that his understanding of the Dragon Clan could only come from texts. As for whether he had ever seen any, the answer was no. Regarding Qing Guanzi¡­ It had been less than two years since Lu Yuan¡¯s ascension, and the world was in The Age of Dharma Decline; he hadn¡¯t even had the chance to learn about True Persons from texts. All these reasons had led to the unfamiliarity of the true beings attending the Dharma Assembly with the two flood dragons from the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace. Even so. For their first battle, the two true beings selected Kong Huaiguang and Pei Yongxiu, putting together a force that was strong but still within the capabilities of the two flood dragons to contend with. And all the True Persons were not far away, ostensibly holding a Dharma Assembly and celebrating with dancing and singing. In reality, though, they kept the situation below under constant surveillance. At the first signal, they would be ready to react immediately and rush to support. With two Earth Immortals and the strength of Kong and Pei themselves, there was no need to worry about any issues. The situation was overall under control. On the surface, such arrangements showed no obvious flaws. Both True Persons had made the best decisions within their scope of understanding. However, the reality of the situation had clearly exceeded their knowledge. The flood dragons from the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace were not any ordinary hybrids, but direct descendants of a True Dragon, and they had even invited their True Dragon ancestor to join. The arrival of an Earth Immortal True Dragon instantly led the situation toward a somewhat uncontrollable direction. But at this moment, Kong Huaiguang and Pei Yongxiu, who had ventured deep into the Dragon Palace, were unaware of this. After issuing his challenge, Kong Huaiguang waited outside with Pei Yongxiu for the Dragon Palace¡¯s response. They didn¡¯t have to wait long. Upon receiving commands and support from his father, Qingyuan Ye hesitated no longer. Full of confidence, he led his son and flew out of the Dragon Palace, charging straight toward the two Immortal Sect True Persons. Chapter 1314 - Chapter 1314 Chapter 519 River Duel ?Chapter 1314: Chapter 519 River Duel Chapter 1314: Chapter 519 River Duel ¡°What business does this Human Cultivator have, coming to my Dragon Palace?¡± Qingyuan Ye, accompanied by his son, had arrived at the doorway of the Dragon Palace and did not proceed further. Positioned within the protective grand formation, they addressed Kong Huaiguang and his companion from outside. As they spoke, he also surveyed the two True Persons opposite him. After a few glances, his heart involuntarily tightened slightly. The reason was that among the two visitors, there was one Mid-level Human Immortal, whose cultivation was the same as his own. Moreover, he recognized this person as an old adversary. ¡®I don¡¯t know how Taiping Dao managed to convince these people to let this old coot from Chishui Mansion come to trouble me. Could it be because of a few years ago, when I sent Xiao Liu to Chishui River and stole a water mansion from Chishui Mansion? Truly petty and despicable, it was just a water mansion, after all! Is there a need to bear such a grudge!¡¯ Qingyuan Ye pondered internally, feeling an increasing aversion towards Kong Huaiguang before him. Both were forces within the waters, one occupying Chishui and the other Jiuchuan. In the past, they had struggled openly and secretly for the sovereignty over the Chishui River. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 Even earlier, the two had sparred a few times. The rival, relying on a Fixed Water Treasure Pearl, directly impaired most of Qingyang Ye¡¯s Divine Powers, causing him considerable losses and discomfort. Now, when these two foes met again, naturally, neither showed the other a good expression. ¡°What do you mean ¡®your¡¯ Dragon Palace?¡± Kong Huaiguang, upon seeing Qingyuan Ye emerge and recalling their past few confrontations, sneered and said, ¡°This Jiuchuan Country is the land of our Human Race, and Jiuchuan River belongs to our Human Race as well. Previously, you took advantage of our unpreparedness, seized this river, and built a palace here, daring to claim it as ¡®Dragon Palace¡¯ and treating this place as your own land. But did you really think that no one would deal with your actions? Now that Taiping Dao has established a sect in the Southern Domain and proclaimed their law throughout The World, all nine countries of the Southern Domain have submitted upon hearing it. Only your Jiuchuan pseudo-nation still stubbornly resists the Heavenly Mandate, acting like a ridiculous clown. Now I, a True Person, come with the decree of Taiping Dao, ordering you to surrender the Dragon Palace, kneel down and come out to submit. In doing so, you may still remain a Spiritual Beast and preserve your life. Otherwise, under my treasure bead, I will definitely send you to Huangquan for a visit.¡± Backed by two Earth Immortal True Persons and with his target being to draw Qingyuan Ye out this time, Kong Huaiguang spoke with little politeness. He deliberately aimed to provoke his opponent by any means possible. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Indeed. Hearing Kong Huaiguang¡¯s provocative words, Qingyuan Ye immediately became furious and retorted, ¡°Foolish old fool, every time we have fought you have been defeated by me, only clinging to life by relying on Magical Treasures. And now, after finding a master, you dare to bark madly before me? See how I capture you, you¡¯ll be just right to accompany my drink tonight!¡± Qingyuan Ye bellowed and transformed into a streak of blue light, rushing towards Kong Huaiguang. Although he knew that his opponent was infuriating him to draw him out. By acting so, he was completely falling into the other¡¯s scheme. Yet, with his father backing him, Qingyuan Ye believed that even if some accident happened, there wouldn¡¯t be much of a problem; his father would rescue him. With that in mind, why tolerate this scruffy Taoist¡¯s provocation? Go straight up and beat him to death with one tail, settling new and old grudges together, would that not be delightful! ¡°Ha ha, bring it on, this True Person is certainly not afraid of you!¡± Watching Qingyuan Ye charge over, Kong Huaiguang laughed loudly, took out a Deep Blue Treasure Pearl, cast a divine light towards the other, and exclaimed, ¡°Poor Dao has never tasted dragon meat, which is said to be the most delicious along with phoenix marrow. I hope my fellow Daoist won¡¯t begrudge offering some!¡± ¡°Arrogant! Want to eat dragon liver? First, eat my Heavy Water!¡± Qingyuan Ye, angered by these words, turned green in the face, cursed without wasting more words, and simply opened his mouth to spit out, and a dark gloomy water bead flew out. The moment this water appeared, the surrounding river water slightly trembled, and even the space seemed to twist a bit. At the same time, a powerful absorbing force centered on the water bead crazily devoured everything around it. As the supreme lord of the desolate sea, the Qingyuan Dragon Clan had always inherited a Divine Power called Absorbing Heavy Water. Simply put, it was able to absorb the powers of Heaven and Earth and turn it into an entity with absorbing power. Then, using this entity as a base, it continuously absorbed external water, compressing it within the entity. The more water it absorbed, the heavier this entity became, and it could even inversely enhance the entity¡¯s absorbing power, creating a force field of disruption. When the entity absorbed enough external water to reach its limit, this Divine Power would be preliminarily perfected, possessing the force of ten thousand jun, known as One Yuan Heavy Water. Hurling this water towards an enemy could destroy mountains and ravage lands, breaking through all defenses. Furthermore, by utilising the Absorbing force field, it could disrupt the spiritual mechanisms, preventing the enemy from using the powers of Heaven and Earth effectively, greatly diminishing their Dao Law and Divine Powers, or even completely stopping them from casting spells. Indeed, it was a fearsome Divine Power. And that wasn¡¯t even the limit. Above One Yuan Heavy Water, there were Second Yuan, Third Yuan¡­up to Nine Yuan. Among them, Yuan One to Three were achievable within the Human Immortal Realm. Yuan Four to Six were achievable within the Earth Immortal Realm. Yuan Seven to Nine were achievable within the Heavenly Immortal Realm. With each advancement to the next Yuan, the weight of this kind of water and the power of the Absorbing force field would more than tenfold. Moreover, the spans between Yuan Three to Four, and Yuan Six to Seven, the increase was by a hundredfold. Reaching the topmost Nine Yuan Heavy Water, legend had it that upon its release, the heavens could be split, and Heaven and Earth might collapse. However, this description remained only a theory within the hereditary texts of the Qingyuan Dragon Clan; despite eons of inheritance, to this day, no one had ever refined Nine Yuan Heavy Water. Chapter 1315 - Chapter 1315 Chapter 519 River Duel_2 ?Chapter 1315: Chapter 519 River Duel_2 Chapter 1315: Chapter 519 River Duel_2 Even the Eight Yuan Heavy Water has never been mastered by anyone. Several of the Dragon Ancestors within the clan have barely managed to cultivate the Seven Yuan Heavy Water, but beyond that, there were almost no paths left for further cultivation. The reason is quite simple. This method of cultivating Absorbing Heavy Water requires continuously absorbing external water to enhance one¡¯s own gravity and Absorbing Field. In the beginning, the cultivation of this technique was relatively easy and didn¡¯t consume much water. However, in the later stages, even just cultivating the Six Yuan Heavy Water would require at least ten billion times the water of a Single Yuan Heavy Water, that is, a hundred billion Jiuchuan water. Perhaps this doesn¡¯t mean much to everyone; to give an example from Lu Yuan¡¯s previous life on the Blue Planet, emptying the entire Indian Ocean would still not be enough to cultivate Six Yuan Heavy Water. And as for the Seven Yuan Heavy Water, sacrificing the entire Blue Planet wouldn¡¯t even come close. This illustrates how much water it consumes. From this, it can be inferred that to cultivate the supreme Nine Yuan Heavy Water, it might be necessary to sacrifice the water from nearly half the sea areas in the Immortal Realm to have a chance of success. Although the Immortal Realm is vast and much larger than the Blue Planet, perhaps one region could be equivalent to the entire Blue Planet. But similarly, with the Immortal Realm being so large, there are naturally even more powerful beings. Your Qingyuan Dragon Clan thinks to drain the water of a whole region to cultivate your Divine Powers, do you really think others will not intervene? Especially in the oceans. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 Water is fluid; if you draw from here, others will get less over there. This is equivalent to infringing upon the interests of other races, and naturally, others will not sit idly by. Moreover, seeing your Qingyuan Dragon Clan depleting the waters of the great sea to cultivate your Divine Powers, won¡¯t others worry that, once you have succeeded, you¡¯ll come knocking on their doors, seeking trouble? Therefore, to sum up, for the Qingyuan Dragon Clan, typically each Dragon Clan member, after achieving Dao, cultivates up to the Seven Yuan Heavy Water, and that¡¯s considered the limit. Going beyond to cultivate the Eight Yuan Heavy Water or Nine Yuan Heavy Water is too costly. Not only can they not afford it themselves, but others would also not allow them to truly cultivate such self-serving Divine Powers. If they stubbornly pursued it, it could lead to a siege by myriad clans and result in the extinction of the Qingyuan. However, these are concerns for Dragon Ancestors who have reached the Heavenly Immortal Realm. For Qingyuan Ye, who is currently only in the Human Immortal Realm, such thoughts are too distant, and he doesn¡¯t even dare to hope for it. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï He hasn¡¯t indulged in such groundless dreams. Ever since he became immortal, he has been dedicated to the arduous task of cultivating this bloodline Divine Power. After more than a thousand years, he has finally broken through the Single Yuan limit and entered the realm of Two Yuan Heavy Water. At this moment, when the Two Yuan Heavy Water is released, it possesses the weight of one hundred thousand juns. Although such a forceful Heavy Water cannot cause Heaven and Earth to shatter, it is more than enough to overturn rivers, overturn seas, and destroy enemies. Now, as soon as it is released, the entire bottom of Jiuchuan River begins to churn turbulently. Countless currents reverse, bringing with them immense forces, madly surging towards the Heavy Water. True Persons Kong and Pei, caught in the undercurrents, are slightly unsteady. But their reactions are quick, they emit a Purification Light from their bodies, quickly isolating the pulling force and stabilizing their postures. But this is not the end. After the Two Yuan Heavy Water is unleashed, it heads straight for Kong Huaiguang. Along the way, it continuously pulls the river¡¯s water, forming a massive wave that, like a world-turning tide, strikes directly at him. Confronted with this towering momentum formed by countless river waters, Kong Huaiguang is calm and unhurried, not showing the slightest sign of panic. With a slight flicker of the Treasure Pearl in his hand, a dark blue brilliance drifts out, quickly merging with the river¡¯s currents. In an instant, wherever the blue light passes, the originally wildly surging, shaking river water immediately calms down. A force of tranquil stability fights against the pulling force within the water, slowly driving it out and regaining control over the river¡¯s flow. This is the Chishui Mansion¡¯s treasure of the sect; ten thousand years ago, when the Great True Person of Changqing Immortal Sect was still alive, the Mansion Master of that generation traveled to the East Sea and chanced upon this pearl in a Water Mansion, discovering its ability to fix water. Overjoyed upon this discovery, he quickly took the Treasure Pearl back to his sect. After a thousand years of consecration, the Fixed Water Treasure Pearl was eventually forged. This Treasure Pearl can fix all the waters of the world, preventing the creation of waves and the rise of undercurrents. It can flatten massive waves in the sky or stabilize giant whirlpools at the bottom of the sea, truly one of the top-grade treasures in water. Ever since the Chishui Mansion obtained this treasure, they have never been defeated in water-based confrontations. With the Treasure Pearl, using its ability to fix water, they could even fight against Earth Immortals in the water, avoiding utter defeat. It is indeed a true treasure of the sect. When the Two Yuan Heavy Water encounters this pearl, its Absorbing Field is immediately nullified by a great deal, and even the Heavy Water, which comes with the power to tear down mountains and split the earth, sees its momentum halted, its speed reduced by over half. The Fixed Water Treasure Pearl stabilizes all the waters of the world, and this includes the Two Yuan Heavy Water. Though it possesses the force of a hundred thousand juns and can churn seas, faced with the pearl¡¯s stabilizing power, it also has to fade in comparison. And having lost the Absorbing Field and the force of its heavy pressure, the Two Yuan Heavy Water, though still formidable, is greatly reduced in threat. For the two True Persons, it¡¯s like a turtle crawling, unable to exert any significant effect. ¡°Damn it, that accursed pearl again,¡± Qingyuan Ye muttered as he watched his most powerful Divine Power, like always, being countered by the enemy. Anger ignited in his heart. This Fixed Water Treasure Pearl, to a cultivator like him who specializes in water Dao Law, is just too great a restraint. Any water-based Divine Power, in the presence of this Fixed Water Treasure Pearl, will see its power greatly diminished. Chapter 1316 - Chapter 1316 Chapter 519 River Duel_3 ?Chapter 1316: Chapter 519 River Duel_3 Chapter 1316: Chapter 519 River Duel_3 During a duel of magic, it felt as though one¡¯s hands and feet were cut off, and the weakening constraints were suffocating enough to make one yearn for death. Knowing that one¡¯s spells and supernatural powers were mostly ineffective against someone with the Fixed Water Treasure Pearl, Qingyuan Ye simply abandoned that idea. He shifted his form and directly transformed into his true shape, a giant green dragon of a hundred lengths, fiercely moving through the water. The immense dragon fixed its gaze on Kong Huaiguang, opened its bloody maw wide, and roared, ¡°Do you think that just because you have that broken pearl, I cannot do anything to you? Even without using divine powers, the physical prowess of my Dragon Clan alone can tear you to shreds.¡± With a long howl, the green dragon broke through the water and became a giant beast, charging at the annoying figure opposite with its sharp claws ready to tear. ¡°Father, I¡¯m here to help you!¡± Behind the green dragon, Qing Yuanlian saw his father being forced into his original form and hurriedly did the same as before, revealing his true form and roaring as he prepared to join the fray. However, as soon as he moved, a streak of blue light flew toward him with swift speed, piercing through the heavy water and heading straight for him. Qing Yuanlian was startled and quickly rolled to dodge, but he was still a step too latea€¡±blue light collided with his dragon scales, shattering several of them and drawing a trail of blood. ¡°Owa€¡±¡± He cried out in pain and hurriedly spat out his own refined Two Yuan Heavy Water to surround himself with its capturing field, casting several protective spells before he finally stabilized somewhat. Only then did he see that what had struck him was a Blue Spirit Shuttle. This shuttle now moved through the water like a fish, smooth and swift, gleaming with a faint blue light, elusive and unfathomable. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï This was an Immortal Artifact from Bihu Palace, the Piercing-Water Shuttle, designed specifically for thrusting in water, and it was exceedingly sharp, capable of penetrating most defenses. ¡°This duel is two against two. If you think to bully us with numbers by joining your father, then you must pass me first,¡± Pei Yongxiu said, appearing in front of Qing Yuanlian with a smile on his face. Seeing this from a distance, Kong Huaiguang couldn¡¯t help laughing loudly, ¡°Old mudfish, in our previous encounters, you always had the advantage of numbers, bringing your son to fight me. I was outnumbered, and just now you had the upper hand several times. Now that I have a companion by my side and your son can¡¯t come over, it¡¯s just you. I¡¯d like to see where you can run this time.¡± As he spoke, he threw the Fixed Water Treasure Pearl, seizing the distant Two Yuan Heavy Water. With a flick of his fingers casting a spell, his robes surged and a torrent of red water inundated half the riverbed, sweeping towards Qingyuan Ye in his true dragon form. In a one-on-one fight, Kong Huaiguang was not afraid of his opponent and was confident he could take him down. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 ¡°Enough!¡± However, at that moment, from within the Dragon Palace, an angry voice resonated. Watching his son and grandson getting beaten embarrassingly by Immortal Sect True Persons while he had been watching from behind, Qing Yuanchen finally couldn¡¯t stand it anymore. He cried out loud, and a mysterious light shone from within the Dragon Palace, instantly breaking the mysterious light emitted by the Fixed Water Treasure Pearl and restoring the motion to the subdued riverbed. Then the mysterious light sped forth, striking the Fixed Water Treasure Pearl, causing the treasure to cry out and its luster to dim in an instant. ¡°Great Demon of the Earthly Immortal Realm!¡± Kong Huaiguang, witnessing this scene, no longer concerned about his precious pearl, swiftly pulled it back and turned his head to shout to Pei Yongxiu, ¡°Something¡¯s not right. We need to retreat, Daoist friend!¡± Before the words finished, he had already transformed into a mysterious light and shot up from the riverbed, heading towards the river¡¯s surface. As for Pei Yongxiu, he didn¡¯t need the reminder. As soon as he sensed something was amiss, he had already steered the Piercing-Water Shuttle, escaping even earlier. This shuttle wasn¡¯t just used for killing; it was an unparalleled treasure for fleeing as well, with its tremendous speed. As the two True Persons made their escape, they did not forget to send messages, alerting others outside about the situation here, informing two Earth Immortal True Persons. So, as Qing Yuanchen prepared to pursue the fleeing True Persons, A voice drifted down from above the river. ¡°Fellow Daoist is also an Earth Immortal with a status to uphold, why stoop to striking at the younger generation?¡± Following the voice, a Giant Green Staff pierced through the water layers, standing firm before the Dragon Palace like the Pillar Holding Up the Sky, blocking that shameless, bullying figure. Song Xiren¡¯s figure walked down step by step from above the water, hovering before the giant staff, his eyes fixed on Qing Yuanchen, who had emerged from the Dragon Palace with a face full of bewilderment. At this time, Qing Guanzi was also maneuvering the Myriad Peoples Seal, the Gold Seal exuding endless brilliance, the will of the people manifested, and at that moment, it began to suppress the once again turbulent river. Both True Persons looked at the True Dragon of the Earth Immortal Realm opposite them, their eyes filled with surprise, confusion, and a touch of relief. Chapter 1317 - Chapter 1317 Chapter 520 The Evil Dragon Flees ?Chapter 1317: Chapter 520: The Evil Dragon Flees Chapter 1317: Chapter 520: The Evil Dragon Flees ¡°` Despite already having considered it before, the fact that the two flood dragons from Jiuchuan Demon Country were still refusing to leave meant they certainly had something to rely on. Perhaps they had some powerful Magical Treasures and thought they could compete against an Earth Immortal. Or there might be some formidable Formation Method here that wasn¡¯t afraid of being attacked by an Earth Immortal. The Immortal Realm was vast, filled with all sorts of powerful Magical Treasures and Divine Powers, and it was not unusual for some to turn the tide against the stronger. It was precisely for this reason that Qing Guanzi and Song Xiren, the two True Persons, had always been on guard against these possibilities. Choosing to act first, they also sent Kong and Pei to probe the situation instead of taking action themselves. Little did they know that this probe would draw out such a big fish. The backing of Jiuchuan Dragon Palace turned out to be neither Magical Treasures nor Formation Methods, nor any Divine Powers, but a true Earth Immortal Great Demon with strength at the level of an Earth Immortal. This outcome was indeed beyond both of their expectations. Thus, after the surprise, came the relief. Fortunately, this was a joint operation between Qing Immortal Sect and Taiping Dao, with both factions deploying two Earth Immortal True Persons, followed by fourteen Human Immortals. Otherwise, if any one of them had come here to exorcise the monsters alone, facing the ranks of Jiuchuan Dragon Palace, they would probably have had difficulty gaining any advantage. Especially for Qing Guanzi, as a lesser Earth Immortal, he was basically unable to defeat anyone in the same realm. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï If he had to face off against this Earth Immortal True Dragon, let alone exorcising the monster, if he managed to escape without being utterly routed, it would have already been an impressive feat. And if he were indeed routed, the prestige that Taiping Dao had built up in the Southern Domain would likely be thoroughly lost. The various Immortal Sects in the Southern Domain that had begun to rally around Taiping Dao, upon seeing that it couldn¡¯t even deal with Jiuchuan Dragon Palace, would likely become disheartened and immediately dissolve. For Taiping Dao to maintain its foothold in this region afterward would be exceedingly difficult. As for Song Xiren, he was relieved that he had come along and discovered the strength of Jiuchuan Dragon Palace ahead of time. Otherwise, such a demonic force with an Earth Immortal Great Demon would have been nesting in the hinterland behind Qing Immortal Sect, akin to a mine waiting to explode at any moment, constantly threatening the surrounding peace. Now, having discovered it in advance and at such an opportune moment, there was no doubt that it was the best time to resolve this hidden danger. Being able to deal with such a major threat so quickly naturally brought joy and relief. Just as the two True Persons were caught in their turbulent thoughts, Qing Yuanchen on the other side had also suppressed the shock in his heart, steadied his mind, and spoke out, ¡°Who are you, daring to meddle in my affairs?¡± Despite facing two Earth Immortal True Persons, Qing Yuanchen did not show any weakness and maintained a tough stance. After all, they were all Earth Immortals. Even though the other side had more people and one of them was a bit higher in realm, At most, he was outnumbered and might be unable to defeat them. But if he chose to flee, there wouldn¡¯t be any problem. In the Immortal Realm, all those who had survived countless tribulations to become immortal had one or two formidable Divine Powers, didn¡¯t they? Within the same realm, even if there was a gap in Cultivation, to say that one could easily kill another was not impossible but incredibly rare. Aside from those truly favored by heaven, unbeatable in their own tier, the usual situation in the Immortal Realm was that one could be defeated but not killed. Just like the previous battle at Yi Dancheng with the Six-eyed Lord, with strength at the late stage of Human Immortal, the opponent, at the early stage of Human Immortal, was almost two minor realms below. Yet, in the end, the monster, relying on its natural Divine Powers and the power of its Magical Treasures, managed to escape. The Qingyuan Dragon Clan, with its Heavenly Immortal lineage, inherited all sorts of Divine Powers and Secret Techniques, and the endless rare treasures of the seaa€¡±as well as their natural bloodline talentsa€¡±lacked for nothing in their heritage. With all these as his backing, Qing Yuanchen didn¡¯t fear facing off against two Human Race True Persons of the same realm in the slightest. After all, they couldn¡¯t possibly kill me; at worst, I would just flee far away. Why should I back down? Faced with such an attitude, Qing Guanzi and Song Xiren exchanged a glance before stepping forward and saying, ¡°Fellow Daoist is oppressing a Human Race True Immortal on our Human Race¡¯s land, yet now you blame us for meddling in your affairsa€¡±it seems a bit unreasonable, doesn¡¯t it?¡± The other party was, after all, an Earth Immortal Great Demon, and it seemed they had a deep connection with the two flood dragons from Jiuchuan Dragon Palace. From this, it seemed likely that they were of the same ilk. This also indicated that these flood dragons and dragons were not ordinary wild monsters; there had to be a legacy behind them. And to nurture a True Dragon at the level of an Earth Immortal meant that this legacy was by no means weak. Currently, with Qing Immortal Sect and Taiping Dao facing the threat from Jiuzhou Immortal Gate externally and numerous monsters and potentially two-faced Immortal Sects internally stirring trouble, With troubles both within and without, it was inadvisable to provoke any more powerful enemies. Hence, unless it was necessary, both sides did not wish to initiate a dispute and thus maintained a friendly demeanor. ¡°What Human Race¡¯s land?¡± Qing Yuanchen, however, laughed disdainfully in response to their goodwill: ¡°All I know is that for a thousand years, this place has belonged to my child. It¡¯s your Immortal Sects that have taken advantage of your strength to forcibly take it over. Now that I¡¯ve come here, I intend to properly entertain you shameless bullies who prey upon the weak. To teach you a lesson that the land of my child isn¡¯t so easily taken. If you¡¯re sensible, leave at once. Otherwise, under my Divine Powers, I wouldn¡¯t mind adding two more wronged spirits.¡± Seeing that the other side was so unreasonable, Song Xiren¡¯s expression turned cold: ¡°This land has always belonged to the Human Race since ancient times; it was only a thousand years ago that you took advantage of unrest within the Human Race to seize it. ¡°` Chapter 1318 - Chapter 1318 Chapter 520 The Evil Dragon Flees_2 ?Chapter 1318: Chapter 520: The Evil Dragon Flees_2 Chapter 1318: Chapter 520: The Evil Dragon Flees_2 ¡°Now that the master has come knocking on your door, you bandits better retreat quickly, instead of counter-attacking unscrupulously.¡± ¡°Fellow Daoist here is persisting stubbornly, could it be that you really think the swords in our Immortal Sect¡¯s hands are not sharp?¡± Qing Yuanchen gave him a sidelong glance, his tone cooling a few degrees, ¡°Your sword is sharp, but mine is no less so. Why, do you want to make a move?¡± Qing Guanzi clenched the Gold Seal in his hand and sneered, ¡°Since the Daoist friend has come seeking a beating, it would be rude of us not to satisfy your request and have a little sparring session.¡± As he spoke, he twirled the Gold Seal, the power of the Myriad Peoples Seal within it boiled, scorching the surrounding river water and assuming an offensive stance. ¡°The two True Persons, we have come.¡± Just at this moment, Kong Huaiguang and the other who had just fled, returned with several True Persons and re-entered the fray. The many True Persons had just arrived at the scene, to see the tense standoff before them, and each of them instantly went on alert. Some were exhibiting their Divine Powers while others were wielding their Magical Treasures, various immortal lights shone brightly, their auras merging into one, forming a mighty force bearing down on the opposing side. Seeing the Immortal Sect¡¯s momentum suddenly grow, Qing Yuanchen¡¯s arrogant expression finally began to wane. Facing two Earth Immortal True Persons, he was not afraid and still confident he could escape. But now with the addition of fourteen Human Immortals, so many people gathered together, cooperating with each other, forming magical arrays, and with so many Immortal Artifacts, it was almost equivalent to another Earth Immortal. The Immortal Sect¡¯s side, thus, amounted to three Earth Immortals, among which was a Mid-stage Earth Immortal whose realm surpassed his own. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Facing such an assembly, even he had to start being cautious. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Because the number had caused a qualitative change, two fists against four hands might still claim to fight evenly, managing to not fall behind. But if there was indeed another pair of hands for a sneak attack from behind, no matter how forceful it was, it would be fatal. The True Persons from the Immortal Sect now possessed the strength that posed a threat to his life. ¡®Wasn¡¯t it said that the only one who wanted to unify the Southern Domain was the Taiping Dao? How come there are now two Earth Immortals and over a dozen Human Immortals, so many True Immortals¡­ How exactly did the Taiping Dao gather them all together? Is a mere Taiping Dao really this powerful? With so many people, I can still manage, even if I cannot win, I would be able to escape. But for Ye Er and Lian Er, and my many grandchildren, I fear they would not be able to avoid disaster.¡¯ Qing Yuanchen¡¯s heart began to thump, and his face eased considerably, ¡°It¡¯s all a misunderstanding, a misunderstanding, the two Daoist friends have misunderstood. His Highness was only joking just now, and had no intention of usurping the territory of the human race. It¡¯s just that I was a little upset seeing you all charging over in such a fury. I am aware that Jiuchuan Country belongs to the human race. My son settled here because he saw that a thousand years ago this place was in turmoil, unable to bear seeing the local populace being harmed by those demonic cultivators, thus he acted to calm the chaos. The local citizens showed great enthusiasm, which is why he stayed. Now, since you, my fellow Daoist friends, have settled the internal strife and want to reclaim this country, our family has no reason to obstruct, and will naturally give way.¡± ¡°My Qingyuan Clan of the Eastern Wild Seas has always kept to ourselves and not interfered with the Immortal Sects of the Donghua Continent, and even more so, we have never had any conflicts with the Changqing Domain. There¡¯s no need for our two families to reach the point of drawing swords at each other, let¡¯s be amicable, let¡¯s be amicable.¡± Qing Yuanchen, at last, recognized the situation and began to soften his stance. There was no choice. This place was within the Changqing Domain, their territory. Faced with a threat to his own life, and to the lives of his sons and grandsons, to remain firm could provoke them to really take action. Once a fight broke out, regardless of the outcome, his side would not be the ones to benefit. However, he did not submit completely. In choosing to reconcile, he also reminded them of his own background and status, indicating that he too had support. Otherwise, if the other side were truly ruthlessly inclined to strike, he had no confidence that he could save his life, let alone the lives of his progeny. ¡°So it turns out to be a friend from the Qingyuan Dragon Clan. I am Song Xiren from the Changqing Immortal Sect, and this is Qing Guanzi from the Taiping Dao. It is our pleasure to meet a Daoist friend like you.¡± Upon hearing Qing Yuanchen¡¯s declaration of his heritage, Song Xiren felt a sudden realization. As a native Immortal Sect of the Donghua Continent and a regional overlord, he was certainly aware of the Qingyuan Dragon Clan, the sea¡¯s dominant force that had been their neighbors for countless eons. The stakeholder was a power even more formidable than the Changqing Immortal Sect at its peak. That this group of dragon descendants might hail from the Qingyuan Dragon Clan and possess such strength was, indeed, not surprising. Nonetheless, Song Xiren was not overly intimidated. Just as stated above. Even though the Qingyuan Dragon Clan is formidable, it remains the overlord of the seas and cannot stretch its might onto shore. In the Donghua Continent, the Human Immortal Sects are the ones in charge. If they really wish to extend their reach to the shore, meddling in affairs here, they must first see if the Great True Persons here agree to it. Song Xiren may not be clear about other matters. But he knew that if a Great Demon of Heavenly Immortal Level were to act against the Qing Immortal Sect, the surrounding Immortal Sects like Dongyang Mountain would certainly retaliate. The reason is simple: it is not the turn of monsters and demons to be rampant on the land of the Human Immortal Sects. This has been an unspoken agreement maintained over countless years by generations of Immortal Sects. It is the foundation that enables the Human Race to establish itself and thrive in the Donghua Continent to this day. With this reliance, even when facing the princes and descendants of the Qingyang Dragon Clan, Song Xiren is fearless. After exchanging greetings, he immediately asked, ¡°My friend, did you mean to acknowledge that this place belongs to our Immortal Sect and are willing to withdraw?¡± Qing Guanzi also looked over. Jiuchuan Country is the last unsettled Demon Nation in the Southern Domain; if it cannot be taken, it would be like having a ticking time bomb in the backyard of Taiping Dao. This is something he could never accept. Although Qing Guanzi is not yet clear about the origin of the Qingyuan Dragon Clan, judging from Song Xiren¡¯s attitude, it must be a quite powerful Dragon Clan, at least no weaker than the Qing Immortal Sect, and most likely another Heavenly Immortal Level force. Yet even facing a Heavenly Immortal force, if they are unwilling to withdraw from Jiuchuan Country, a battle has to take place. Without unifying the entire Southern Domain, Taiping Dao cannot solidify its current position. If the position is not secure, the territories already held cannot be maintained, and, sooner or later, will be slowly lost. If that is the case, it is better to fight it out. If they win, they will take Jiuchuan Country. If they lose, Lu Yuan might as well grab his bucket and run away, as he would have no prospects anyway and there would be no need to waste time. Faced with two aggressive True Persons, Qing Yuanchen¡¯s face twitched slightly, yet he replied with a smile, ¡°Indeed, you haven¡¯t said anything wrong, this is the territory of the Immortal Sect, and we are willing to withdraw.¡± As he spoke, he almost gritted his teeth to pieces. This kind of frustration, Qing Yuanchen had never faced before since he was born. In the past in the oceans, as the overlord of the East Sea, when had the true dragons of the Qingyuan Clan suffered such treatment? Wherever they went, they reigned supreme without restraint. This time, a moment of carelessness led him into the heart of human territory, forcing him into such a perilous situation where he had to suffer this humiliation. What frustrated him even more was that, after getting confirmation, Qing Guanzi pressed on with the victory and immediately asked, ¡°Since you are willing to go, may I ask when you will leave? I would like to prepare to take over.¡± Urging like this was somewhat unsightly. But facing a benefit about to be seized and to prevent complications from arising over time, Qing Guanzi could no longer concern himself with such niceties. The first thing was to send away the Buddha in front of him. ¡°Now, I will leave now,¡± said Qing Yuanchen, teeth clenched, glaring coldly at Qing Guanzi, etching this annoying person into his memory. He then turned to his son, who had been scared into silence by the Immortals and obediently made no noise, and said angrily, ¡°What are you still dawdling for? Summon all your wives and descendants; others have already come knocking at our door, so why stick around shamelessly? Follow me.¡± As he scolded the son who caused these troubles, in his words, Qing Yuanchen also took a veiled jab at Qing Guanzi. However, the latter pretended not to hear and remained unperturbed, simply waiting for the others to move out. ¡°Yes, your son will take care of it right away,¡± replied Qingyuan Ye, jolted into action. He hurried back to the Dragon Palace to pack up his home. It didn¡¯t take long before all the princes and descendants in the Dragon Palace, along with pearl maidens and clam ladies, even the turtle stewards and crab generals, were gathered and ready to leave. A large group of monsters assembled, all acting obedient in the presence of many Immortals, displaying none of the arrogance they once had in the Jiuchuan Demon Country. ¡°Shameful wretches,¡± Qing Yuanchen sweepingly glared at the subordinates from the Dragon Palace, snorted coldly. Then, without bidding farewell, under the gaze of numerous True Persons, he flicked his sleeves, rolled up the gathering of monsters into a light, and directly left this place of heartache. Chapter 1319 - Chapter 1319 Chapter 521 The Entry of the Independent Cultivator ?Chapter 1319: Chapter 521: The Entry of the Independent Cultivator Chapter 1319: Chapter 521: The Entry of the Independent Cultivator Qing Yuanchen fled with his dragon offspring, leaving the vast Dragon Palace suddenly empty. Watching the undignified retreat of the other party, Song Xiren waited until they were out of sight before turning around and laughing, ¡°Qing Guanzi, my friend, although we failed to eliminate the two flood dragons, the Qingyuan Dragon Clan has left. With the scourge gone from Jiuchuan River, it is as good as recovered. Have your people tidy up the aftermath and eliminate the remaining demons in Jiuchuan Country and this nation is yours to claim. This Dharma Assembly has, after all, concluded perfectly.¡± On hearing this, Qing Guanzi snapped out of it and hurriedly expressed his gratitude: ¡°I must thank you, Song, and all the other True Persons who assisted. Without everyone¡¯s help, we, the Taiping Dao, would have struggled to reclaim Jiuchuan Country from the Qingyuan Dragon Clan on our own. The kindness of all the True Persons¡¯ assistance is something I and all members of Taiping Dao will forever hold in our hearts and never forget.¡± As he spoke, Qing Guanzi deeply bowed to all the True Persons present, to express his thanks. The many True Persons quickly dodged, not daring to accept an Earth Immortal¡¯s bow. Song Xiren stepped forward to lift him, smiling, ¡°This Dharma Assembly was, after all, jointly initiated by our two factions to eliminate the menace of demons in the Southern Domain. It¡¯s not just Taiping Dao¡¯s concern, but also the duty and benefit of us in the Changqing Immortal Sect. Moreover, all the incidents we encountered along the way illustrate just how dire the situation in the Southern Domain has become. The Yellow Springs Underworld and the Qingyuan Dragon Clan, these two major hazards, are demons that will become a much greater threat if not dealt with in time. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Now that we have detected them early and removed them ahead of time, it is indeed a fortuitous event for us. This is an affair that benefits the entire Changqing Domain and is also in our own interests, so there is no need for thanks.¡± Qing Guanzi¡¯s face showed emotion: ¡°Regardless, I have noted the kindness of all the True Persons.¡± ¡°Ah!¡± Song Xiren waved his hand, not wishing to continue with the formalities, and then said, ¡°Now that the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony has concluded and the menace of demons in the Southern Domain has been resolved, restoring peace here, there¡¯s no need for us to sit idle any longer. It¡¯s a perfect time to reconvene the Dao Law discussion as a celebration. The Southern Domain is only beginning to stabilize and cannot be left unattended for the moment. We will utilize the Dao Law discussion to continue our presence here, deterring those harboring malicious intents and itching for action. Thus, we can celebrate our victory and maintain deterrence at the same time, achieving two goals with one action. Qing Guanzi, my friend, I have not yet visited Taiping Dao¡¯s Mountain Gate. Surely you won¡¯t refuse a visit from me and other True Persons to Mi Yun Mountain, right?¡± Song Xiren looked at Qing Guanzi with a teasing expression, conveying his thoughts through his gaze. That is to say, just after the Qingyuan Dragon Clan left, it¡¯s uncertain if they might circle back. Moreover, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate there is also lying in wait, with tensions high near the border of Qingyang Country with Taiping Dao, ready to erupt at any moment. Under such external circumstances, it is undoubtedly extremely detrimental to Taiping Dao. It can even be said to be hanging by a thread. For this newly supported ally, Song Xiren was genuinely worried, fearing that in the blink of an eye, something might go wrong and they¡¯d be crushed. So, since there were so many people gathered for this ceremony, he might as well use the pretext of the gathering to bring everyone to Mi Yun Mountain and support Taiping Dao. ?¦Ï???.§ã? Two Earth Immortals and more than a dozen Human Immortals all converginga€¡±it would be interesting to see if anyone dared to provoke them. Especially Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, to see if they had the courage for another decisive battle with them on Southern Domain¡¯s soil. Qing Guanzi quickly grasped the elder brother¡¯s implied meaning, busily responding: ¡°Of course not, Song and all True Persons, you are welcome to stay in Mi Yun Mountain as long as you like; I wouldn¡¯t dare to refuse. Please, everyone please follow me back to Mi Yun Mountain, and we shall reconvene the Dao Law discussion.¡± Upon hearing this, Song Xiren laughed heartily: ¡°Haha, then we shall impose without reservation.¡± ¡°We¡¯ll be troubling Taiping Dao.¡± ¡°Our thanks for your trouble.¡± With the two True Persons setting the schedule, the other True Persons naturally did not dare to object, echoing along. Seeing this, Qing Guanzi nodded slightly: ¡°Follow me, my fellow True Persons.¡± Having said that, he led the way, followed by the many True Persons, towards Mi Yun Mountain. ¡­ As Qing Guanzi and other True Persons returned victorious, on the other side in Xiaye Country, Li Ruoqing also led many fellow cultivators to the Taiping Dao branch there. Cangwu Mountain. In the newly chosen branch of Taiping Dao within this Mountain Gate, Li Ruoqing, who had not long departed, came with over thirty Cultivators to pay a visit. ¡°Master Che, all the fellow Cultivators behind me have been fighting demons alongside me in life and death situations in Xiaye Country for the past two years. These fellow Cultivators are all committed to the righteous path, with hearts resolutely fixed on the Dao. Their character and spirit are truly the finest of choices. Through these two years of demon-slaying, they have gathered detailed knowledge of Xiaye Country¡¯s affairs, no less than the locals. If True Person wishes to establish a branch and broadly open the gates here, there are no more suitable disciples than these Cultivators.¡± After meeting with Master Che of Che Shidao, Li Ruoqing began talking non-stop, vigorously recommending his fellow Cultivators. After speaking at length, he turned around to the group behind him and said, ¡°Fellow Cultivators, this is the True Person of Taiping Dao¡¯s Che Shidao, Master Che, who will establish the branch in Cangwu Mountain and take charge of Xiaye Country. Quickly, follow me and greet him.¡± ¡°We, the juniors, pay our respects to Master Che.¡± The cluster of scattered cultivators, rather nervous upon meeting a True Immortal of the Grand Fairy Gate for the first time, quickly saluted Master Che following Li Ruoqing¡¯s cue. ¡°Very well, get up, please rise,¡± said Master Che as he carefully examined these Cultivators, realizing that each one¡¯s Cultivation was not weak. About one-fifth were at the level of Five Qi Towards Primordial, and the rest were also above the stage of Gathering Three Qi. Chapter 1320 - Chapter 1320 Chapter 521 The Entry of the Independent Cultivator_2 ?Chapter 1320: Chapter 521: The Entry of the Independent Cultivator_2 Chapter 1320: Chapter 521: The Entry of the Independent Cultivator_2 This level of cultivation, even if placed within an Immortal Sect, would be that of a core elite disciple. For these independent cultivators to have cultivated to this point alone, without unimaginable effort and determination, enough luck and opportunities, they simply couldn¡¯t have reached where they are today. That Li Ruoqing recommended these people, it¡¯s clear that he hasn¡¯t treated this matter perfunctorily, but rather he has truly put his heart into it. Thinking of this, Che Shidao laughed heartily and said, ¡°All of you are talents of our Immortal Sect, seeing you, I know that the righteous path has its successors, and my heart is greatly comforted.¡± After commending them, he looked at the crowd and said, ¡°Since you have come here with Brother Li, I presume you are aware of my intentions. My Taiping Tao has swept away demons, established a foothold in the Southern Domain, seized Youxin, Damu, Qingyang, Xiaye, and Jiuchuan countries in one go and founded four institutions in a single breath. To fill such vast lands and re-establish an order that has been in ruin for a thousand years, we inevitably need a lot of manpower. Being new here, my Taiping Tao lacks personnel, thus there is an urgent need to recruit talents and employ those with wisdom. By order of the School Leader, I will be in charge of Xiaye and Jiuchuan countries, as well as the affairs of Yichuan¡¯s Yin World, and I am even more in need of people. Since all of you have come here, let me ask, are you willing to join the Taiping Tao and become disciples of the Cangwu Mountain¡¯s separate courtyard?¡± Previously, the conditions and treatment offered by the Taiping Tao had already been explained by Li Ruoqing to everyone. Upon arriving here, the cultivators naturally had their allegiances, with those intending to join the Taiping Tao. Hearing Che Shidao¡¯s question now, each of them suppressed their excitement, bowed down together, and formally saluted, ¡°Disciple wishes to join the Taiping Tao, and begs the True Person to take us in.¡± Che Shidao, seeing the figures bowing down before him, laughed heartily, ¡°Very well, very well, since this is the case, I, as a True Person, will take charge and accept you into the sect, granting you all the status of inner sect disciples.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã0 The first is the registered disciple. Such disciples are usually only taught minor techniques, cultivating a branch of the Dao Law of the sect, not part of the core group. The second is the inner disciples. These disciples can cultivate the orthodox Great Dao that leads directly to becoming immortal, practicing powerful Divine Powers that complement the Dao Law, regarded as the core backbone. The third is the true disciples. Apart from all the benefits of the previous inner disciples, they can also practice the core inheritance of the orthodox Great Dao within the sect. Such core inheritances are basically the highest inheritance within an Immortal Sect of a particular kind. For smaller Immortal Sects, there usually are only one or two such inheritances, so only a True Immortal School Leader would hold them. In larger Immortal Sects, there are several, handled mainly by the True Immortals within the sect. There are even some inheritances that lead directly to the Earth Immortal. As for sects of Heavenly Immortals, that goes without saying. From the description above, it is clear who holds these core inheritances. They are essentially the true high-level members of an Immortal Sect. Therefore, disciples practicing such techniques are mostly under the tutelage of a True Immortal, becoming their named disciples, and are called true disciples. Like Li Ruoqing, he is a practitioner of the core inheritance of Dongyang Mountain, with a True Immortal Master above him, a true disciple of that sect. Such a status of disciple is basically cultivated with the prospect of them becoming True Immortals, and their numbers in each Immortal Sect are also not too many. Each lineage inherits it to maybe a dozen or so people. Even in large Immortal Sects, the total doesn¡¯t exceed a hundred people. A status like this, being the true core of the sect, of course, isn¡¯t bestowed casually. Therefore, for Che Shidao to grant these independent cultivators who have sought refuge the status of inner sect disciples, is already quite commendable. At least he did not just hand out registered disciple statuses perfunctorily, but gave them the status of inner disciples, considering them as one of their own. Usually, when independent cultivators join an Immortal Sect, even if they are accepted, they are only given the status of registered disciples, and then used as hard labor to toil to the bone. In the end, after they have been squeezed dry and have established a lot of merit, they might be rewarded with the status of an inner disciple, which they have earned with their blood, sweat, and life. The identity that they had to risk their lives for in the past is now granted upon joining, and, furthermore, as an inner disciple of a large Immortal Sect, the independent cultivators are too surprised to object. The many independent cultivators thanked him in unison, repeatedly kowtowing, ¡°Disciple greets the True Person and thanks the True Person for his grace of acceptance. From now on, disciples will loyally serve and go through fire and water for the sect to repay this kindness.¡± Che Shidao is a True Immortal, and only true disciples are eligible to be his disciples. The Immortal Sect is also strictly hierarchical. Everyone is merely an inner sect disciple and lacks the qualification to call the other person Master. They are not even qualified to call them Uncle-Master or Elder, so they can only address them as True Person. However, compared to before, when referring to themselves, they indeed can switch from junior to disciple now. For them, this is also a significant progression. ¡°Hahaha, no need for excessive formalities, all of you rise,¡± Che Shidao raised his hand slightly and used his magic power to lift everyone up, then looked at them with a smile and said, ¡°Since you have joined my discipleship, you are now disciples of the Taiping Dao. According to the sect rules, every inner sect disciple can choose to study one of the sect¡¯s Dao Laws. Within this sect, there are seventy-two lesser Dao Laws and twelve superior Dao Laws. This is the jade scroll listing the names of the martial arts techniques, which includes all types of Dao Laws along with descriptions. You may take it and read carefully, thoroughly contemplating it. After selecting, come to me to exchange the Dao Law.¡± After Che Shidao finished speaking, he flicked his sleeve, and dozens of streaks of light flew out. The jade scrolls listing the Taiping Dao¡¯s martial arts techniques, already prepared, landed among the many newly inducted disciples. When Lu Yuan was in the Nine Provinces, he had once collected the foundations of all the Immortal Sects of that realm. Whether it was the existing Immortal Sect Tao Inheritances or the sects that had vanished in ancient times, he had scoured through them all. The Dao Law inheritances that he ultimately obtained were simply innumerable. He had organized all of these to serve as a foundation for himself. Arriving in the Immortal Realm and after understanding the existence of the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, to avoid exposure, Lu Yuan had cut down some Dao Laws related to the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect over the past two years. He had also changed the appearance of some Dao Laws that could be associated with the Nine Provinces, giving them a completely new look. Ultimately, after streamlining them, there were seventy-two lesser methods and twelve superior methods. These eighty-two Dao Laws are what Taiping Tao Sect presents as its inheritance and foundation to outsiders in the Immortal Realm. The many disciples quickly put away the jade scrolls and then stood up to thanks, ¡°Thank you, True Person, for imparting the Dao Law.¡± Che Shidao gave a slight smile and explained, ¡°Don¡¯t be deceived by the word ¡®lesser¡¯ in the Taiping Dao¡¯s lesser Dao Laws. In actuality, each of the seventy-two lesser Dao Laws can directly lead to the path of becoming immortal, capable of reaching the realm of a Human Immortal. In other ordinary Immortal Sects, these could all be considered the core of true teachings. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 Of course, since your cultivations are still low, to prevent the Dao Laws from being lost outside, the Dao Laws bestowed upon you only include the first and middle volumes. The subsequent volumes on becoming immortal will not be granted until you break through to the Immortal Realm. As for the superior Dao Laws of this sect, they even more directly point to the Earth Immortal Great Dao and are not to be imparted except to the true inheritors.¡± At this point, Che Shidao looked at the many new disciples he had excited to no end, and said with deep meaning, ¡°The same words apply as before. Our sect has just been established in the Southern Domain, everything is yet to be built, and it is precisely the time when we are in need of people. If you assist this True Person in properly managing these two countries and one realm, then for those with outstanding merits, I will not be stingy in promoting them. For those outstanding individuals, this True Person will directly make exceptions to accept them, admitting them into our ranks and turning them into true inheritor disciples of our sect. If you hold an ambitious heart and are dedicated to serving the sect in the future, all will have the opportunity of becoming immortal. Our Taiping Dao currently has only three True Immortals, yet we possess the lands of five nations. With abundant resources and excess destiny, nurturing a few more Immortals would not be an issue. Strive and persevere.¡± In order to get these new disciples to serve the Taiping Dao wholeheartedly, Che Shidao was now directly deploying a huge move, offering the bait of inheriting the true teachings and the chance of becoming immortal. As expected. Upon hearing this, the faces of the many disciples showed signs of being moved. The excitement was so strong it was nearly impossible to hide. One after another, they hastily said, ¡°We will heed the True Person¡¯s instructions and will do our utmost for the sect, diligently tending to our duties.¡± With the opportunity of becoming immortal right in front of them, no one could remain calm. Chapter 1321 - Chapter 1321 Chapter 522 Guarding the Separate Courtyard ?Chapter 1321: Chapter 522 Guarding the Separate Courtyard Chapter 1321: Chapter 522 Guarding the Separate Courtyard After a brief motivation of the new disciples, Che Shidao continued, ¡°Now that our Cangwu Mountain Branch is newly established and everything is simple, I won¡¯t conduct any entrance ceremony. These are your identity jade cards, along with the disciple robes of our Taiping Dao.¡± There are two jade cards, one main and one duplicate. You must drip your essence blood into both cards and leave a strand of your soul split, recording your own identity and qi. Then, you keep the main card for your own identity recognition. The duplicate card must be handed in and recorded by the sect, to serve as a backup. With this duplicate card, the sect can monitor your safety status at any time through the essence blood and divine soul you leave behind, and promptly be aware of the disciples¡¯ conditions. Through this, if you encounter danger while out, the sect can also be informed and send people to rescue you.¡± After finishing speaking, Che Shidao waved his sleeve and distributed the prepared jade cards and robes to the disciples. ¡°Thank you, True Person.¡± The disciples hurriedly took them and then bowed in respect. Che Shidao nodded slightly, ¡°There¡¯s no need for thanks. First, record the information on the jade cards and then hand over the duplicates.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Che Shidao swept his hand to collect the duplicate cards, then smiled, ¡°Our Mountain Gate still has not been rebuilt, and the various pavilions and halls left by the previous Changqing Branch have largely fallen into disuse and are unusable. I will not assign Cave Mansions to you for now.¡± You may choose any place on the mountain to reside for now, then spend the next few days getting acquainted with the environment of Mountain, interacting with your fellow disciples, and selecting the Dao Law you wish to cultivate. In ten days, come seek me for guidance, and I will coach you for a month, helping you master the Dao Law quickly. Once the Dao Law is learned, I will then take you out for some real-world experience. My Martial Uncle, also the Elder Taishang Qing Guanzi, of our sect, just recently cleared the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace along with many True Persons, driving out the evil flood dragons and took control of Jiuchuan Country. Yet, the expulsion of those two flood dragons leaves many demons still within Jiuchuan Country. These minor monsters and demons are neglected by my Martial Uncle and the others, but as junior disciples, we cannot let them run wild.¡± I have been tasked with overseeing Xiaye and Jiuchuan, two countries, and Jiuchuan Country is under my jurisdiction as well. I absolutely cannot tolerate any demons causing chaos within my territory. Since you have joined my sect, you should follow our law. Hereafter, it is your duty to exterminate demons to maintain the righteous path of our Immortal Sect and to protect the civilians of our Human Race. All new disciples must participate in this upcoming Jiuchuan demon extermination mission. I will hold a Jiuchuan Demon Extermination Conference, and all who partake will be rewarded according to their merits during the conference. For the one who ranks first, I will grant the inheritance, as encouragement.¡± ¡°Do you all understand?¡± Upon hearing about the rewards of the conference, especially the first-place prize of inheriting disciple status, each disciple was thrilled beyond measure. This inherited status could be considered an opportunity for becoming immortal. If one could achieve it, and then receive cultivation from the sect, provided one was diligent and possessed sufficient innate talent and fortune, It was not impossible to become an immortal in the future. This immense opportunity standing before them, naturally no one could remain calm. ¡°We understand devoutly!¡± The disciples shouted in unison, clearly expressing their intent. ¡°Good, you may now go down and take a good look at Cangwu Mountain, which will be your home from now on.¡± After assigning the disciples and discussing some rules of the sect and upcoming schedules, Che Shidao had nothing more to say. He waved his hand, letting everyone disperse. Then he turned his gaze to Li Ruoqing, ¡°Brother Li, please hold for a moment.¡± ¡°True Person, we will take our leave.¡± Seeing this, the other disciples left appropriately, not disturbing the two individuals. Once only the two of them were left, Li Ruoqing then took the initiative to bow and thank Che Shidao, ¡°Master Che, thank you for accepting all my comrades. I will remember this kindness.¡± Seeing those who had struggled side by side with him through life and death now obtaining a promising path forward, Li Ruoqing was naturally filled with immense joy. Thus, his gratitude towards Che Shidao, who facilitated this, was profound. ¡°You are too polite, Brother. If anything, it is I who should be thanking you. You have recommended so many gifted individuals to our Taiping Dao, solving my problem of being short-handed. This is all due to your contributions.¡± Che Shidao waved his hand, unwilling to take the credit, chuckled, and then eagerly said, ¡°If there are still others by your side who have not joined other Immortal Sects, feel free to recommend them here. I govern two countries and a realm, and there are many complicated matters that require a lot of manpower to handle. Even these thirty-plus people are not enough. You don¡¯t need to worry too much, Brother Li. As long as they are suitable, just recommend them, and I can accept them.¡± Hearing this, Li Ruoqing immediately responded, ¡°If True Person still needs disciples, I have some comrades who can later come to meet True Person.¡± Che Shidao laughed heartily, ¡°That couldn¡¯t be better, then I¡¯ll trouble you, Brother.¡± To manage two countries and a realm well, a significant amount of manpower was indeed needed. For all the local mountain, water, and city god spirits, Che Shidao had already instructed Chen Hongyuan to select usable ghosts from the Yin World. Once the ghosts were ready, he could then appoint divine spirits and put them to their posts. With hundreds of thousands of ghosts from the Yin World, there were more than enough to fill the two countries and one realm, and there was even surplus to support other countries under the Taiping Dao¡¯s control. Chapter 1322 - Chapter 1322 Chapter 522 Guarding the Separate Courtyard_2 ?Chapter 1322: Chapter 522 Guarding the Separate Courtyard_2 Chapter 1322: Chapter 522 Guarding the Separate Courtyard_2 So in this regard, he needn¡¯t worry too much. After a few days, when the ghost spirits are counted and reported, the divine offices can be distributed and the Divine Method system for the Two Countries can be established. However, merely having divine spirits is not enough for the rule of the areas under Taiping Dao. Because the strength of the divine spirits is limited by their divine offices, they can only fully exert their power within their own jurisdiction. Once they leave their jurisdiction, the strength of a divine spirit will rapidly decline. The further they are, the more significant the decline in strength. Even within the network of Taiping Dao, the transfer of divine spirits between different jurisdictions will weaken their strength to varying degrees. Limited by these circumstances, when a certain area erupts in turmoil and the local divine spirits are unable to cope, urgent outside support from forces other than divine spirits is required. This is where the guarding disciples in the various branch courtyards of the Immortal Sect come into play. With divine spirits guarding the areas, and branch courtyard disciples as mobile forces, support can be provided anywhere at any time. This system forms the foundation of the rule over the various countries governed by each Immortal Sect. And to maintain such a system, ruling a territory of hundreds of thousands of miles naturally requires a lot of personnel. Just in terms of divine spirits like those in charge of mountains and rivers, thousands of minor and major divine spirits are needed; including the divine soldiers under the spirits, the Divine Method system in one country alone needs fifty to sixty thousand organized divine soldiers. As for the core branch courtyard disciples, even though they are elite forces, the number still needs to be maintained above three hundred to sufficiently intimidate locally. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Remember, these three hundred disciples refer to the elites with cultivation levels of Gathering Three Qi and above, not the riffraff who barely manage one or two levels of energy. Under the jurisdiction of Che Shidao, including just the Yang World¡¯s Two Countries, ten thousand divine soldiers are needed for each, which adds up to twenty thousand Yin Gods. This number can easily be filled with the several hundred thousand ghost spirits from the Yin World. But for the six hundred disciples in the two branch courtyards of Jiuchuan Country and Xiaye Country, that would be difficult for him. The difficulty does not lie in his inability to gather so many people. Although Jiuchuan and Xiaye had long suffered under the tyranny of demons, with the local civilians living lives of utter misery, these demons didn¡¯t just kill everyone they saw or slaughter every city. Even in a place like Xiaye Country, where demonic chaos was rampant, many demons still kept large numbers of humans as livestock for blood in their territories. If it¡¯s an area controlled by demons of Xuan Turtle Mountain, the human civilians there have an even easier life, some of them not even used as blood food, continuing to live in peace. And in a united Monster Nation like Jiuchuan Country, order has already been established, and the human race is sustainably bred and exploited but not randomly slaughtered, meaning more people survive. Therefore, although Che Shidao hasn¡¯t conducted a detailed census in Jiuchuan and Xiaye, based on past knowledge, the crude estimate of the population is at least not less than one hundred fifty million people. If there are more, reaching two hundred million is also not impossible. With so many people, even with a recruitment criterion of one in ten thousand, more than ten thousand disciples of medium qualifications can be selected. Even for those with superior qualifications, choosing a few thousand is not difficult. The issue is that while there are enough disciples who meet the entry requirements, after these disciples are admitted, cultivating them to at least the minimal deployable cultivation of Gathering Three Qi would take at least a hundred years. Given the current situation of Taiping Dao, where large new territories have no one to guard them, they need disciples who can be immediately mobilized and sent to fill the gaps. There isn¡¯t a hundred years to wait for these disciples to mature. Faced with this shortage of manpower, Lu Yuan decided to address it from three aspects after discussions. One is to enlist disciples from the Immortal Sect forces of Wind Thunder Fortress and Qing Mountain Pavilion, which were integrated from Qingyang Country, and select suitable candidates from these disciples to grant them inner court disciple status and incorporate them into the branch courtyards. According to the reports from Yi Dancheng, it is estimated that seven hundred disciples with cultivation levels of Gathering Three Qi or higher can be selected from these two Immortal Sects. With these people alone, the jurisdiction of Qingyang and Damu under Yi Dancheng can be fully staffed. There is even excess capacity to support one hundred additional disciples to other branch courtyards. Therefore, the western territories under Taiping Dao currently need not worry. And in Mi Yun Mountain, located in Youxin Country, where Taiping Dao headquarters is based, Lu Yuan¡¯s approach is to refine more Yellow Turban Strongmen to boost the base mobility forces at the headquarters. Currently, through his urgent empowerment, the number of Yellow Turban Strongmen in Mi Yun Mountain has expanded to four hundred, more than sufficient to handle the situation in Youxin Country. This is the second route for expanding manpower. However, after reaching four hundred Dao soldiers, the materials Lu Yuan had collected over the years for slaying demons and dispelling evil were almost completely used up. In the short term, without a further source of materials, it won¡¯t be possible to continue expanding the number of Yellow Turban Strongmen. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Additionally, Mi Yun Mountain also has about two hundred and thirty new disciples, who will also serve as the future foundation of the sect and are receiving concentrated training from Taiping Dao. And these numbers will continue to increase gradually, eventually stabilizing around five hundred. Five hundred disciples is the total Lu Yuan has set for Mi Yun Mountain. Lastly, over in Xiaye Country, what Che Shidao is currently doing is to enlist some scattered cultivators who followed Li Ruoqing. Chapter 1323 - Chapter 1323 Chapter 522 Guarding the Separate Courtyard_3 ?Chapter 1323: Chapter 522 Guarding the Separate Courtyard_3 Chapter 1323: Chapter 522 Guarding the Separate Courtyard_3 In the past two years, influenced by the reputation of Li Ruoqing, around three hundred cultivators came to follow him in exterminating demons and monsters. Among these three hundred-plus individuals, many were disciples from other Immortal Sects, traveling abroad, totaling about eighty. Naturally, these cultivators could not possibly join Taiping Dao. Of the remaining two hundred or so, most had low Cultivation, having only gathered one or two levels of energy, and their talent was subpar, failing to meet the entry requirements. Such individuals also had to be excluded. After these two rounds of selection, about eighty people remained who met the criteria. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï This time, in order to fulfill the entrusted task and not disappoint the trust of Che Shidao, Li Ruoqing recommended only those he considered exceptionally outstanding. Therefore, after reviewing these thirty or so individuals, Che Shidao was extremely satisfied and directly accepted them into the sect. However, this did not mean that the remaining forty or so were poor and unusable. During the initial stages of establishing a foundation, Taiping Dao¡¯s requirements for disciples were not high; as long as they were usable, it was sufficient. If the remaining individuals met the requirement of Gathering Three Qi and their character passed muster, Che Shidao did not mind accepting them into the sect. After all, what he needed were merely laborers and fighters. As long as they met the conditions to serve in such roles, what harm was there in granting them the status of inner sect disciples? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï The modest treatment of an inner sect disciple, for a Taiping Dao that already dominated five countries, was still affordable. It was not as if they were true disciples, who needed significant resources and efforts for development; nurturing a useless one would be a substantial loss. Compared to this, taking early control of the territories of five countries and developing their resources to nurture more True Immortals for Taiping Dao was of critical importance. Gathering Li Ruoqing¡¯s remaining forty or so fellow cultivators and then receiving some disciples from Qingyang Country, the original being sent a hundred Yellow Turban Strongmen over. With these additions, the number could nearly reach four hundred people. Distributing them between Jiuchuan and Xiaye countries, each sub-branch could manage about two hundred people. Although this was somewhat less than the normal demand, it was just barely sufficient. After all, this area was in the rear of the Southern Domain and did not border the frontline battlefield of the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect; it was relatively more peaceful overall. As long as the local demons and monsters were thoroughly eliminated, there would be no disorder to worry about. Moreover, the Netherworld Court still had Chen Hongyuan, the Heavenly Son of Netherworld. Although his divine office restricted him within the Netherworld, making a short trip out to nearby Xiaye Country in the Netherworld was still feasible. This was also the combat power of a Human Immortal, which could be considered as an emergency force to be called upon when necessary in Xiaye Country. As for Jiuchuan Country, Che Shidao planned to relocate there after the Demon Extermination Conference and personally oversee the Jiuchuan River. This river, commanding the water system of the Changqing Domain, was as important as two or three smaller countries. Leveraging this, the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace had raised two flood dragons. Such a critical location naturally had to be controlled by Taiping Dao without neglect. So after sorting out things here in Xiaye Country, Che Shidao would personally come to this place to ensure this major river was well managed on behalf of the original. Moreover, as Jiuchuan Country was the easternmost territory of Taiping Dao, such boundary locations indeed required a True Immortal to be stationed. Despite every arrangement stretching resources thin, causing all sub-branches to take on heavy responsibilities and be exceedingly busy, During these founding years, there was no other choice. They had to endure through this century, and after a hundred years, when the new disciples had grown and Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade had achieved his Dao Fruit, manpower would be much more plentiful, and there would be no need to stay so busy. For now, they would endure. Chapter 1324 - Chapter 1324 Chapter 523 The Arrival of the Immortal Dongyang ?Chapter 1324: Chapter 523: The Arrival of the Immortal Dongyang Chapter 1324: Chapter 523: The Arrival of the Immortal Dongyang Mi Yun Mountain. After Qing Guanzi led numerous True People back to the sect, life in the mountains became lively once again. Debates on the Dharma, accompanied by singing and dancing, with immortal music ringing in the ears and the sound of Dao resonating endlessly. This time, returning with a great victory, and with Earth Flower True Man delivering a lecture, there was one more distinguished person than previously. And this addition was none other than the future School Leader of the Qing Immortal Sect. The spirits of all the True People were lifted countless times more than before. Thus, the atmosphere for debating the Dao began with unparalleled intensity. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 However, while the many True People were engaged in passionate discussions, outside Mi Yun Mountain, a majestic and brilliant celestial light arrived, catching the attention of many. ¡°Who is the visitor?¡± Song Xiren, who was seated at the highest place among the crowd, turned to look at Qing Guanzi upon witnessing this scene. As the host of this place, he naturally turned to him to inquire about the newcomer¡¯s identity. ¡°I do not know either.¡± Qing Guanzi shook his head helplessly and said, ¡°I have never seen this celestial light before, and truly do not know who it could be. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 However, judging by its aura, it is absolutely one of our peers, and of no ordinary origin.¡± Although the identity of the visitor was unclear, the commotion they caused and the extraordinary phenomena surrounding them revealed that they too were an Earth Immortal True Person. And among Earth Immortals, they were of the kind with profound cultivation. Even Qing Guanzi had a faint feeling that the visitor¡¯s foundation might be even more profound than that of the future School Leader of the Qing Immortal Sect sitting beside him. For the sense of pressure he felt from the visitor was greater than from Song Xiren. With such a foundation, it was impossible for the visitor to be an Earth Immortal from any minor sect or school; they definitely originated from a major Heavenly Immortal sect without a doubt. ¡°Do you also not know the identity of the visitor, Dao friend?¡± When Song Xiren heard Qing Guanzi¡¯s words, he couldn¡¯t help feeling slightly disappointed. In fact, Qing Guanzi was not wrong in his sensationa€¡±the foundation of the Earth Immortal flying towards them was indeed more profound than his own. As the party concerned, Song Xiren could clearly feel a significant gap between himself and the newcomer. The only slight advantage he had was probably that he was at the mid-stage of being an Earth Immortal, while the visitor was only at the early stage, making his cultivation a notch higher. But this minor advantage was hardly something to be proud of. For it only meant that he had lived a bit longer and had more time for cultivation, which was why his cultivation was higher. Given the visitor¡¯s equal foundation, as long as they had enough time, they would gradually catch up with this small gap. As the future School Leader of the Qing Immortal Sect, Song Xiren was always reputed in the Changqing Domain as a seed of a Heavenly Immortal, the most likely to achieve the status of a Great True Person in the next five thousand years. With his disposition, he was not complacent about this status, but some degree of pride was inevitably present in his heart. However, at this moment, the one aspect he valued mosta€¡±his foundationa€¡±was being surpassed by another. To claim he did not feel a sense of loss would be impossible. Fortunately, his Dao heart was firm, and he did not feel demoralized. After briefly adjusting his attitude, he stabilized his emotions. While the two were conversing, the visiting Earth Immortal had already arrived at the gates of Mi Yun Mountain. ¡°May I inquire if the friends from Taiping Dao are here? I am Wang ShiZhou from Dongyang Mountain, specifically coming to visit.¡± In front of the Mountain Gate, amidst the celestial light, stood an imposing figure in golden robes, saluting Mi Yun Mountain from mid-air. ¡°A True Person from Dongyang Mountain?¡± ¡°So it¡¯s Dongyang Mountain.¡± The many True People in the mountains, hearing the visitor reveal their sect, couldn¡¯t help but engage in widespread discussion. Song Xiren looked at Qing Guanzi with a gaze filled with confusion and inquiry, whereas the latter¡¯s eyes flickered with a hint of relief. Seeing Song Xiren¡¯s confusion, Qing Guanzi explained, ¡°I must tell Dao friend that when I first heard about the affairs of Huangquan, the Ghost Emperor of Xiaye Country, I lost my composure for a moment, thinking that there might be Earth Immortal Yamas in the Yin World, feeling unable to cope. So, in addition to asking for assistance from your esteemed sect, I also passed the message on to Dongyang Mountain to the south. After all, Brother Li is a direct disciple of Dongyang Mountain, and I thought that if he encountered danger, I should also inform them, to see if they could send assistance. Now counting the time, it has been almost half a day since I dispatched the message. Even though Dongyang Mountain is in another domain and tens of thousands of miles away from here, this much time is about right for the message to have been delivered, and for their people to have arrived.¡± Upon hearing this, Song Xiren chided, ¡°If Dao friend had already requested aid from Dongyang Mountain, why did you not mention it earlier? We could have prepared to welcome them accordingly, instead of being caught off guard like this.¡± Although the Qing Immortal Sect and Dongyang Mountain, both sects, were seen by outsiders as dominant powers of a single region. That was only the surface. The Qing Immortal Sect belonged to a declining trend with no Great True Person, whereas Dongyang Mountain was on the rise, with a Heavenly Immortal at the helm, making them incomparable. If one were to draw an analogy, the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s relationship with Dongyang Mountain was akin to Taiping Dao¡¯s status compared to their own. Although it appeared as though both sects were on the same level, the actual disparity between them was as vast as differences between two levels of hierarchy. Given the enormous gap in standing, Song Xiren had to be cautious and maintain a certain level of humility when dealing with Dongyang Mountain. Qing Guanzi responded, ¡°I was not sure if Dongyang Mountain would come, and I did not expect them to arrive so early, hence my oversight. Now is not the time to discuss this. Brother Wang is waiting outside; we should promptly go to greet him, so as not to seem negligent.¡± ¡°We should indeed go to receive him.¡± Song Xiren stood up and then addressed the present True People, ¡°Fellow Dao friends, with a True Person from Dongyang Mountain visiting, as the host, let us all go to greet him together.¡± Chapter 1325 - Chapter 1325 Chapter 523 Dongyang Immortal Arrival_2 ?Chapter 1325: Chapter 523 Dongyang Immortal Arrival_2 Chapter 1325: Chapter 523 Dongyang Immortal Arrival_2 ¡°Yes.¡± All the True Persons echoed in unison, then rose from their seats, following the two True Persons to the doorway. ¡°I, Qing Guanzi of the Taiping Dao, Elder Taishang, pay my respects to Brother Wang.¡± Upon reaching the doorway, Qing Guanzi took the lead in greeting Wang ShiZhou who had been waiting there for some time. Wang ShiZhou sized up Qing Guanzi before him and was slightly surprised; he hadn¡¯t expected that there was an Earth Immortal within Taiping Dao. Upon seeing the many True Persons behind him, especially upon seeing Song Xiren, the surprise in his eyes deepened even more. This gathering of over a dozen True Persons was an uncommon sight even within Dongyang Mountain, and particularly unexpected within a lesser-known sect. ¡°I¡¯ve seen Brother Dao.¡± Thinking this, Wang ShiZhou also returned the greeting, then stood up and said, ¡°I am Li Ruoqing¡¯s Master. I had just received a message from your sect and learned that the child Ruoqing has been abducted by the Ghost Emperor of the Yin World to Huangquan, and I rushed over immediately.¡± As he spoke, he looked at the numerous True Persons behind Qing Guanzi and his heart tightened as he said, ¡°The gathering of so many Dao friends here, could it be they are all here because of that Ghost Emperor from the Yin World? ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï To mobilize so many True Persons, is there perhaps someone of Yama¡¯s caliber in Huangquan?¡± In Wang ShiZhou¡¯s view, mobilizing two Earth Immortals and over ten Human Immortals meant that the ghost creatures of the Yin World¡¯s Huangquan must be extremely formidable. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï And with Li Ruoqing being abducted by such formidable ghost creatures, even with the protective magical treasures he had bestowed, it would be hard to resist. Having delayed so long, he feared for the life of his own disciple. Upon recalling the journey and that the sword talisman he had bestowed had already been triggered and had completely lost connection, a bad premonition rose in his heart. Seeing that Master Wang from Dongyang Mountain seemed to have misunderstood, Qing Guanzi quickly said, ¡°Brother Dao, you have misunderstood. We have already been to the Yin World, and there is no Yama in Huangquan. We gathered here initially thinking that Yama existed in the Yin World, hence the large assembly. But upon entering Huangquan, we only found a Ghost Emperor who was the one that abducted Li Ruoqing. Thus, we intervened and subdued this ghost, calming that part of the Yin World. As for Brother Li, he has already been rescued and is currently with a group of companions in Xiaye Country, helping our sect¡¯s True Person Che Shidao in restoring the livelihood of that nation. If Master Wang wishes to see his own disciple, I can immediately send a message to my nephew Che to have Brother Li come and meet.¡± Qing Guanzi had not anticipated that Li Ruoqing, whom he had befriended only through chance, would have such an illustrious background. Not only was he under the Celestial Immortal Sect, but he was also the doctrine disciple of an Earth Immortal, a status far surpassing that of ordinary disciples. However, on second thought, for Li Ruoqing, there were truly no barriers to achieving the status of a True Immortal. It was only that his mental state was somewhat lacking. Once his character was perfectly refined, he could become immortal at any moment. For such a character destined to become immortal, ordinary Human Immortals certainly did not have the qualifications to accept him as a disciple. Only an Earth Immortal True Person was suitable to be his Master. Only suitable to continue guiding him after he achieved immortality. From this perspective, it was quite reasonable that Li Ruoqing¡¯s Master was an Earth Immortal. It turned out that in doing this, Taiping Dao had fortuitously reaped great benefits. Having previously befriended him, and now having rescued Li Ruoqing, the goodwill between the two was exceedingly profound. Even if this could not sway Master Wang at present, it would certainly be enough to influence Li Ruoqing. If anything arose in the future, calling upon this Master Li, could his Master remain indifferent? It is evident that today, with Li Ruoqing encountering trouble, Master Wang, as his Master, had hurried over in haste. This clearly indicated how important this disciple was to him. By taking hold of Li Ruoqing, he had also secured a hold over Master Wang. Perhaps, even thousands of years later when Master Wang passed away, with the protection of a Master, Li Ruoqing would still have a great chance to achieve that of an Earth Immortal, becoming a strong ally himself. This investment of goodwill by Taiping Dao was indeed immensely profitable and enormously rewarding. How could one not rejoice? As he was feeling happy, Wang Shizhou, upon hearing the news of his apprentice¡¯s safety, finally let go of the anxiety he had been carrying and a smile flickered across his face. However, Master Wang did not show it outwardly and quickly waved his hand, ¡°No need to trouble yourself, Master. Since Ruoqing is unharmed, that is enough; there¡¯s no need to disturb him anymore. I had him travel to temper his character. This one experience should give him some insights, so let him continue his trials under the guidance of Master Che of your esteemed sect. There is no need to inform him of my visit here.¡± As for Brother Qing Guanzi, I must thank you and all the fellow Daoists present. If it weren¡¯t for your intervention, Ruoqing¡¯s safety would have been uncertain. I, poor Daoist, thank you all.¡± Wang Shizhou gave a deep bow to Qing Guanzi and the others, expressing his gratitude. ¡°We dare not accept such thanks,¡± The latter hurriedly stepped back and said, ¡°Exorcising demons is our duty. The Ghost Emperor was rampaging within my territory; naturally, it was our responsibility to eliminate it. Brother Li previously helped us with a demon, which already made us feel indebted. Saving him was only right.¡± Wang Shizhou shook his head, ¡°Regardless, a life-saving grace is a life-saving grace. If fellow Daoists ever need help in the future, feel free to come to Dongyang Mountain. As long as it is within my power and does not violate the sect¡¯s rules, I will do my utmost without shirking.¡± Like Li Ruoqing, Master Wang is also a person of deep sentiment and loyalty. He regards those who have helped him as true friends and keeps them close to his heart. Seeing this, the True Persons present naturally felt delighted. Having the connection with a True Person of Dongyang Mountain, who is an Earth Immortal, was a tremendous boon for them. Even if in the future, they might not have anything that would trouble Master Wang, having this connection would make it much more convenient for their disciples to travel and train in Dongyang. With this thought, everyone was even more pleased with their participation in the Dharma Assembly. They were not only able to eliminate a potential danger but also had the opportunity to hear the teachings of two Earth Immortals, and now they had made the acquaintance of a True Person from Dongyang Mountain. The many benefits from this were truly beyond their expectations. ¡°We can talk about these matters later.¡± Qing Guanzi suppressed the joy in his heart, not wanting to appear as if he was currying favor, and did not continue in that direction but instead extended an invitation, ¡°Brother Wang, this is Master Song Xiren of the Qing Immortal Sect; it was Master Song who initiated this drive to expel ghosts in Xiaye Country with me. Now that the Dharma Assembly has successfully concluded, we are organizing a celebration Tao Discussion Conference. Each Daoist will discuss Dao Law and exchange insights. Since you are here, Brother Wang, would you like to join us and share your understanding of the Great Tao with us?¡± Qing Guanzi was also quite looking forward to the Tao Discussion Conference. He had just entered the realm of Earth Immortals and was still not deeply versed in many of the deeper and more profound aspects of this state, and at times was completely unaware. He had just had a brief exchange with Song Xiren, and in a few words, the latter had given him considerable guidance. The critical insights he had been struggling to understand suddenly became clear. The benefits of discussing with fellow Daoists and receiving guidance from elders were indeed immensely valuable to him. Therefore, upon encountering a genuine True Immortal from an Immortal Sect, he naturally felt inclined to seek some advice. After the introductions, Song Xiren also hurriedly greeted Wang Shizhou: ¡°Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s Song Xiren, it¡¯s a pleasure to meet you, fellow Daoist.¡± ¡°So it¡¯s from the Qing Immortal Sect, I¡¯ve long heard of Master Song¡¯s reputation. Wang Shizhou of Dongyang Mountain greets you.¡± Hearing Song Xiren¡¯s identity, Wang Shizhou finally understood. It explained why the other could possess the cultivation of a Mid-stage Earth Immortal and be the upcoming School Leader of the Qing Immortal Sect. Even though he was from the Dongyang Domain, he had heard about this neighbor but hadn¡¯t met him until now. Now that they finally met, Wang Shizhou had no intention of looking down on him, but instead humbly said, ¡°It¡¯s my fortunate to discuss Dao Law with fellow Daoists from the Qing Immortal Sect and Taiping Dao. If fellow Daoists don¡¯t mind my modest cultivation, I would be honored to participate in this Dharma Assembly.¡± On hearing this, Qing Guanzi laughed heartily, ¡°In that case, fellow Daoist, please follow me into the mountain. The banquet is prepared in the sect, and we are just waiting for you to take your seat.¡± He stepped forward, took Wang Shizhou¡¯s hand enthusiastically, and led him into the sect. The other numerous True Persons also followed in a crowd, all returning to Mi Yun Mountain. Chapter 1326 - Chapter 1326 Chapter 524 Earth Dragon of Ten Thousand Auras ?Chapter 1326: Chapter 524: Earth Dragon of Ten Thousand Auras Chapter 1326: Chapter 524: Earth Dragon of Ten Thousand Auras Another venerable guest arrived at the Dao Law Conference, immediately bringing glory to the entire Mi Yun Mountain; the anticipation among the many True Persons for the Immortal of Dongyang Mountain to lecture on Dao was palpable. Wang ShiZhou, surrounded by a crowd of people, truly experienced the feeling of being a welcomed guest. However, at the same time that Mi Yun Mountain bustled with excitement, thousands of miles away in Qingyang Country, the atmosphere had gradually become solemn. Qing Mountain. This mountain was originally Qingyang Country¡¯s most prestigious, occupied by the largest Immortal Sect in the country, Qing Mountain Pavilion, as their sect residence. But all this changed by the break of day today. In the eyes of the ordinary disciples of Qing Mountain Pavilion, a True Immortal from Taiping Dao unexpectedly took over their dwelling, declaring the annexation of the entire Qing Mountain Pavilion. And their own School Leader and many elders seemed to offer no resistance whatsoever; they complied and accepted this change quite docilely. The reason was simple. Apart from the Taiping Dao¡¯s True Immortal that arrived, the School Leader True Person of Jintai Gate had also come along, expressing support for Taiping Dao. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï It was common knowledge that Qing Mountain Pavilion, though nominally an independent Immortal Sect, in reality, was a branch derived from Jintai Gate, akin to a satellite division unrecognized formally. Jintai Gate and Qing Mountain Pavilion were essentially one and the same. Now, as Jintai Gate, their parental sect, did not oppose or prevent this, what could Qing Mountain Pavilion do as a dependent branch with its main support taken away? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? Under the immense pressure of both Taiping Dao and Jintai Gate, a mere Immortal Sect that shrank within one nation had no room for resistance. Unable to resist, the only option left was to accept. However, in truth, many disciples of Qing Mountain Pavilion, even the elders and the School Leader, harbored little to no reluctance toward the takeover by Taiping Dao; some were even pleased with this development. Think about it. To be the School Leader or elder of a small regional sect seemed majestic, with hundreds of disciples clustering around you, seemingly invincible. It looked good on the surface, but that was just an illusion. In reality, Qing Mountain Pavilion was overshadowed by Jintai Gate. Any external actions and diplomacy could not be decided autonomously; they had to be cleared with their superiors. Essentially, Qing Mountain Pavilion was merely a puppet. But that was not the end of it. If Jintai Gate sent disciples over, no matter the cultivation level, even an inner sect disciple could outrank the disciples of Qing Mountain Pavilion. If a direct disciple came, even the School Leaders and elders of Qing Mountain Pavilion had to bow their heads to them. Given such a state of affairs, how meaningful could the role of their School Leaders and elders be? The only real advantage may have been that, as local influentials, they could exploit their territory to gather numerous cultivation supplies. But as disciples of the Immortal Sect, with their fixed monthly quota of cultivation supplies, the quantity might be less compared to what they could scavenge on their own. However, Immortal Sect disciples, in addition to regular supplies, also had access to the powerful teachings of the sect, guidance from True Immortals, higher quality Cave Worlds, and the status of Immortal Sect disciples when abroad. Taking all these into account, it may well be that the lot of a marginal sect¡¯s School Leaders and elders was no better. And this only compared to ordinary Immortal Sects with one or two Human Immortals. Should it be a Grand Fairy Door with Earth Immortals, the disparity in treatment would be even more astonishing. An inner sect disciple of a Grand Fairy Door, when outside, held a stature more prestigious than the School Leader or elder of a sect like Qing Mountain Pavilion. And now, by pledging allegiance to Taiping Dao, every cultivator in Qing Mountain Pavilion, from the School Leaders to the common disciples, had the chance to switch alliances and join a great sect. For these sects that had thrown in their lot with them, Taiping Dao offered rather generous terms. School Leaders and elders of the level of Five Qi Towards Primordial, were all granted the status of direct disciples. Those with Gathering Three Qi or above in cultivation were given the status of inner sect disciples. Those with lower cultivation levels could become affiliated disciples. In summary, Taiping Dao provided a place for the tens of thousands of disciples from Qing Mountain Pavilion, which could be described as extremely generous. With such conditions, it was no wonder that everyone from Qing Mountain Pavilion was so eager and receptive to the idea of joining Taiping Dao without any resistance. Even though, at a glance, for the peaceful annexation of Qingyang Country, Taiping Dao seemed to have paid a hefty price by incorporating 20,000 cultivators from both Qing Mountain Pavilion and Wind Thunder Fortress. But for Taiping Dao, the cost wasn¡¯t substantial. Firstly, the majority of the newcomers, accounting for over 99% of the personnel, those affiliated disciples, were not really a burden to Taiping Dao. For these individuals, the terms of treatment remained largely as they were originally, equivalent to the benefits they enjoyed as disciples of Qing Mountain Pavilion and Wind Thunder Fortress. At most, since they had just joined and it was wartime, Taiping Dao distributed a couple of extra bonuses. But for Taiping Dao, which had already occupied five countries and possessed vast resources, this was virtually insignificant. A mere drop in the bucket. Furthermore, these affiliated disciples were destined to be cannon fodder in the looming great battle. They might die by the hundreds or thousands from a single shockwave during combat with True Immortals. Even if they did not encounter True Immortals, in large-scale conflicts involving cultivators with Gathering Three Qi or even Five Qi Towards Primordial, those with one or two levels of energy would not make much of a difference. Their main utility would be to draw enemy fire, drain opponent¡¯s Divine Powers, and serve purely as a means of weakening and disruption. Chapter 1327 - Chapter 1327 Chapter 524 Ten Thousand Furious Earth Dragons_2 ?Chapter 1327: Chapter 524: Ten Thousand Furious Earth Dragons_2 Chapter 1327: Chapter 524: Ten Thousand Furious Earth Dragons_2 The battle had just begun when these individuals became the fastest to be consumed. According to estimates from Yi Dancheng, if a war truly broke out with the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, it would not take two or three months for more than twenty thousand registered disciples to die off by over ninety percent. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï In the end, probably only about one or two thousand would remain. Or perhaps none at all. Toward such cannon fodder destined to be expended, he was still very lenient. Thus, after taking over Qing Mountain Pavilion and Wind Thunder Fortress, he immediately issued an order to increase the supply quota for these disciples. He raised their treatment to more than three times the original. Since these individuals wouldn¡¯t survive longer than two months anyway, distributing what was originally six months¡¯ worth of their quota in these two months gave him no loss or additional expenses. These cultivators, originally meant to be cannon fodder in the internal struggles within Qingyang Country, could not escape their fate as cannon fodder, even after taking on the identity of registered disciples in a grand sect. The logic is very simple: if small immortal sects looked down on them, how could a grand sect possibly regard them highly? Even if they were accepted now, it was only out of courtesy and necessity for manpower. Once they were used up, these consumables would naturally disappear. As Lu Yuan¡¯s avatar, Yi Dancheng naturally inherited the cruelty of the past Chu Emperor, viewing the loss of lives during wars with indifference. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Just numbers, not worth fussing over. The fate of those registered disciples was thus settled. The next echelon, Gathering Three Qi, also known as the inner disciples, had different treatment. Currently, Taiping Dao was in dire need of usable manpower; the expendables with one or two levels of energy were useless, so they could be freely consumed. But ascendants who had reached Gathering Three Qi represented a leap in strength and were somewhat usable; naturally, their treatment was different. Yi Dancheng treated them as if they were his own disciples. In Anyu and Great Eye Kingdoms, there was no shortage of people, but in the realms governed by Che Shidao like Xiaye and Jiuchuan, manpower was severely lacking. Che Shidao had already contacted him, requesting Yi Dancheng to retain some competent disciples for deployment after the war to help establish systems in the two countries. Over there, they were desperate for manpower; as long as someone had reached Gathering Three Qi, he was not pickya€¡±they were all needed. Being avatars with the same origin sent by their original selves to carry out the hard and fatigue-laden tasks, Yi Dancheng and Che Shidao shared a common enemy and assisted each other. He naturally valued the requests from his old brother. Therefore, in this war, Yi Dancheng had no intention of using these inner disciples as cannon fodder but wanted to save as many as possible for later use. To put it quite frankly, if in this battle, too many inner disciples died, even if Qingyang Country could be saved in the end, not having enough inner disciples would pose a problem for Yi Dancheng wishing to establish systems in Qingyang and Great Eye Kingdoms. Hence, even if not for his brother, for his own future peace of mind, he could not allow too many to die. Therefore, regarding the deployment of these inner disciples, Yi Dancheng only had them stationed within Qingyang Country, tucked within key strongholds, sheltering inside the protective mountain formations, and simply holding their ground using the formations. After all, these ordinary inner disciples couldn¡¯t play much of a key role in this grand war. Hiding within formations, relying on the power of formations, a group comprising five or six Gathering Three or Four Qi inner disciples, leading a few hundred registered disciples, might be able to match the strength of a Five Qi Towards Primordial cultivator. If they were deployed, then without hundreds of Gathering Three Qi or several Gathering Four Qi, they wouldn¡¯t be able to confront a Five Qi Towards Primordial cultivator. As cultivation progresses, the disparity between each great realm becomes increasingly vast. In such a massive war, the role of these ordinary disciples is limited, making it meaningless to waste them needlessly. It would be better to save them for maintaining public order in the future. Letting them defend based on formations allows them to exert a greater effect. Therefore, regarding this matter, Yi Dancheng specifically selected over one hundred key nodes of spiritual veins within Qingyang Country, configuring squads based on one Gathering Four Qi cultivator, five Gathering Three Qi cultivators, and two hundred Gathering One or Two Qi disciples for each group. He dispatched one hundred squads to various selected nodes, setting up ritual platforms on-site, constructing formations, and establishing defense posts. These one hundred groups of ritual platforms, once connected, would form a grand formation enveloping the entire Qingyang Country, known as the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation, capable of mobilizing the country¡¯s earth energies to transform into dragon veins and defend against enemies. This was a formation method Lu Yuan collected from ancient texts across the Jiuzhou realm, passed down and organized by him, still usable. According to the texts, once deployed, this formation could transform the earth energies into a celestial dragon spanning three provinces; spanning nine provinces, it could transform into the king among dragons. The celestial dragon is easy to understanda€¡±it¡¯s simply the dragon vein embodiment with Human Immortal strength. And the king among dragons can also be called the king among immortals. In the Nine Provinces realm, during the ancient times, only the Three Emperors who practiced the Fortune Dao and several Human Emperors were able to be called kings among the group of immortals. Without exception, they all possessed the strength of Earth Immortals. In the Nine Provinces realm, the land of three provinces covered an area equivalent to a small country in the Immortal Realm. The territory of the Nine Provinces was the size of three small countries. This meant that a Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation laid out by a small country could reach the level of an immortal formation and fend off general Human Immortals. A Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation created by three small countries could resist Earth Immortals. The power of this formation was naturally extraordinary. For Lu Yuan, he was planning to use this as his trump card and as the foundation of his confidence in confronting the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. After all, the arrangement of formations by the three countries could give the Taiping Dao side another Earth Immortal-level dragon vein formation spirit. However, due to the limitations of the formation, this formation spirit could not leave the range of the formation and could only move within the area covered by the formation, which was a significant restriction. Yet, for the Taiping Dao, they did not need to take the initiative to strike; they only needed to defend their current territories and block the invasion of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. They simply had defensive needs, not offensive ones. Thus, the defects of the formation spirit were not considered defects at all. By comparison, having an additional Earth Immortal combat power could even influence the outcome of the battle for the Taiping Dao. The importance of this formation thus need not be mentioned further. Lu Yuan had already instructed Yi Dancheng to begin setting up the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation in the three countries west of Taiping Dao-controlled Southern Domain, namely Qingyang, Damu directly under the rule, and Anyu Country where Jintai Gate is located. He planned to use these three countries as a base to link into one large formation and manifest a king among dragons. However, setting up this formation required a lot of manpower. Based on one hundred foundational points per country, three countries would require three hundred foundational points. This formation foundational point, that is, a magic altar, the minimum requirement to maintain activation is at least five cultivators who have gathered Three Qi, along with one cultivator who gathers morale, to be sustainable. This is the current configuration of small teams that Yi Dancheng has sent out. However, he has added an additional two hundred nominal disciples who have gathered one or two levels of energy over this standard. These disciples actually wouldn¡¯t be much help. But at least they possess some magic power and basic spells, and sending them to various magic altars to assist would still be viable. Even somewhat darkly, at critical moments, they could be used to bear the brunt of formation backlash, serving as excellent buffering material. This is the purpose of Yi Dancheng¡¯s inclusion of nominal disciples in the teams. When the formation operates at its peak, the burden on the cultivators maintaining each magic altar node is also very heavy. Having more people to share this burden decreases the pressure they face. As for whether those who come to share are capable of enduring this, that is no longer considered. But even calculating based on the minimum configuration, to completely set up three hundred magic altars, Taiping Dao would need at least three hundred cultivators who have gathered Four Qi and one thousand five hundred cultivators who have gathered Three Qi. Yi Dancheng, having incorporated cultivators from Qing Mountain Pavilion and Wind Thunder Fortress, urged them to consolidate; currently, they were barely enough to maintain the formation for Qingyang Country alone. Although they could still muster an additional two hundred Three Qi and Four Qi disciples, it was not enough to complete the setup for Damu country. For Jintai Gate in Anyu Country, there was no need to worry, as they had enough disciples to cover all the magic altars within the country. But beyond that, there wasn¡¯t much extra capacity to support elsewhere. The magic altars in Damu country were still vacant. Regarding this, Lu Yuan could only let Yi Dancheng first dispatch the surplus manpower to go to Damu country to construct whatever magic altars they could. Then from his side, he would issue a conscription order to Bihu Palace and Xuan Turtle Mountain, the two vassal sects. To draw sufficient manpower from these two immortal gates. This is a war that affects the entire Southern Domain, and it¡¯s unreasonable to expect all battles to be fought only by Taiping Dao and Jintai Gate. Bihu Palace and Xuan Turtle Mountain must also take up their responsibilities and help share the burden. That is the only reasonable way. Chapter 1328 - Chapter 1328 Chapter 525 Julings Response ?Chapter 1328: Chapter 525 Juling¡¯s Response Chapter 1328: Chapter 525 Juling¡¯s Response Bihu Palace and Xuan Turtle Mountain, each Immortal Sect had six to seven hundred disciples, excluding the newly initiated ones, and the rest of them generally had Cultivation levels above Gathering Three Qi. Moreover, among the numerous disciples, there were not a few who practiced Five Qi Towards Primordial, with each sect having about twenty to thirty such individuals. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï This level of strength, among the many average Immortal Sects, was considered mid-tier, the standard level. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t need them all to be mobilized, merely half the members from one sect would suffice to fill the vacancies in the Great Eye Kingdom. And that was indeed his plan. Regarding the matter of the Immortal Sects of the Southern Domain taking turns to guard the front line, Qing Guanzi had already gone to discuss this with the True Persons of the two sects who had come to the conference. It seemed that it would not be long before this matter was settled. With this pace, by the time the disciples from various sects arrived in succession. In as short as three days or as many as seven days, the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation that covered the Three Nations would be assembled. By then, unless the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate exerted its full strength to attack, this land of the Southern Domain would also be secured like a fortress of gold. Taiping Dao here would firmly establish its footing. However, before that, they still had to survive the initial few days, and even if the grand formation was established, they would still have to confront Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Without a fight, who would know what their true strength was? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï If Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was not painfully defeated and made to realize that they could not conquer Taiping Dao, how could they willingly concede? After all, in this Immortal Realm, strength was the ultimate language. ¡­ While Taiping Dao in Qingyang Country was actively preparing for war, Giant Spirit Sect in Qingyu Country was also hurriedly responding to this suddenly erupted war. Phoenix High Mountain. This was the premier Immortal Mountain in Qingyu Country, originally controlled by an Immortal Sect that shared the name with this mountain, serving as its Mountain Gate. But since Giant Spirit Sect began to intervene in the Southern Domain, everything had changed. First, the School Leader True Person of Phoenix High Mountain encountered an ambush by nefarious cultivators during an excursion, returning to the sect with severe injuries. Then came successive attacks on numerous authentic disciples of Phoenix High Mountain who were journeying outside, with barely one-tenth making it back to the sect. Following that, a large group of demons started blocking the entrance to Phoenix High Mountain, completely severing the sect¡¯s external ties. The frustrated School Leader of Phoenix High Mountain, dragging his injured body, violently lashed out at the demons. Among those demons, there were unexpectedly two Great Demons. The School Leader had just left the Mountain Gate when he immediately fell into an ambush, jointly slain outside the gate by the two Great Demons. Subsequently, Phoenix High Mountain experienced a drop in morale amongst the disciples after losing their School Leader and was breached by the two Great Demons leading the horde of demons. The entire sect was turned into blood food for the demons, nobody was spared. An Immortal Sect that had been passed down for tens of thousands of years was thus extinguished. As Phoenix High Mountain met its demise and Qingyu Country lost the protection of a True Immortal, slipping towards becoming a realm of demons. It was precisely at this moment that He Yang, the School Leader True Person of Giant Spirit Sect, traveled here. Seeing the fall of the Immortal Sect and the havoc wreaked by demons, the suffering of common folks moved him to act. He took on the two Great Demons in a fierce battle. After a harsh fight, he finally repelled the two Great Demons and regained control of Phoenix High Mountain. Afterward, to prevent such an event from happening again and to protect Qingyu Country, as a member of the Immortal Sect, True Person He decided to take responsibility. He then summoned more aid from his sect and designated a fellow apprentice to station there, establishing a branch at Phoenix High Mountain. Since then, the Phoenix High Mountain branch of Giant Spirit Sect has been entrenched within Qingyu Country, enduring to this day for over a thousand years. And Qingyu Country, without anyone realizing when, became a territory of Giant Spirit Sect. This entire process outlines how Qingyu Country changed its rulership, experiencing the full event. On the surface, it seemed like Phoenix High Mountain was simply unlucky, encountering a band of roaming demons that ultimately led to the sect¡¯s demise. But in reality, everyone is not a fool; who cannot see the trickery in the entire ordeal? Why would the School Leader of Phoenix High Mountain encounter nefarious cultivators on a trip, and how could such cultivators dare to attack a True Immortal, even managing to win in the end? Since when were outside nefarious cultivators so formidable? And not long after the School Leader of Phoenix High Mountain encountered the nefarious cultivators, Great Demons knocked on their door, surrounding the entire sect. Were those demons so well-informed? They arrived just as the injuries occurred. Or were they actually in league with the nefarious cultivators? And just after the demons devastated Phoenix High Mountain, the School Leader of Giant Spirit Sect arrived, claiming he just happened to be in the area a€¡± could it really be such a coincidence? When viewed separately, the events might seem less suspicious, and one might conclude that Phoenix High Mountain was simply unfortunate. But when combined, the flavor changes. Any clear-eyed individual could see that there was definite deceit involved. The entire fall of Phoenix High Mountain was evidently manipulated by Giant Spirit Sect, coveting the territory. Simply because Jiuzhou Immortal Gate wanted to invade the Southern Domain, it had to pass through Qingyu Country, and Phoenix High Mountain blocked their path, sealing its doomed fate from the start. Moreover, Giant Spirit Sect executed the operation swiftly, smoothly progressing through the entire sequence. Before others could react, Phoenix High Mountain was annihilated, the summoned demons were driven away, establishing the de facto occupation of Qingyu Country. But even if others wanted to do something about it, they couldn¡¯t find a grievance party and struggled to respond in time. Just the same, the efficiency of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s operation ultimately led to others¡¯ wariness. Chapter 1329 - Chapter 1329 Chapter 525 Julings Response_2 ?Chapter 1329: Chapter 525 Juling¡¯s Response_2 Chapter 1329: Chapter 525 Juling¡¯s Response_2 Take Jintai Gate for instance. After witnessing the fate of their once-familiar neighbor, Phoenix High Mountain, how could Jintai Gate not panic in the face of Giant Spirit Sect invading the Southern Domain, occupying Qingyu Country, and becoming their new neighbor? The lesson was right in front of them; the bones of Phoenix High Mountain hadn¡¯t even gone cold yet. Wouldn¡¯t Jintai Gate fear becoming the next Phoenix High Mountain? And the answer is, of course, they were afraid. So, when Taiping Dao emerged in the Southern Domain, Jintai Gate, feeling threatened by Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, immediately gravitated towards them, volunteering to be the pawn in Taiping Dao¡¯s struggle against Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Such submissive behavior was not without reason. Because if they didn¡¯t cling to Taiping Dao now, once Jiuzhou Immortal Gate repelled Taiping Dao, Jintai Gate would be the next to suffer. This was about survival, not merely a case of one¡¯s lips being cold when their teeth fall out. They had no choice but to be earnest. But as Jintai Gate put their heart into it, it was Giant Spirit Sect¡¯s turn to suffer. With such a local snake on their side, Taiping Dao effortlessly took over the entire Qingyang Country before their rivals could react. The forces of Taiping Dao swiftly established a new branch in this territory. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Qingyang and Anyu, these two neighboring countries, thus became interlocked like the sides of an angle, forming an iron barrier, staunchly blocking Jiuzhou Immortal Gate from further infiltrating the Southern Domain. If they didn¡¯t take advantage of Taiping Dao¡¯s current unstable foothold to drive them out of Qingyang Country, they feared that once Taiping Dao became firmly established, they would have to abandon any hope of ever claiming an inch of land in the Southern Domain. As such, when the news of Taiping Dao seizing Qingyang Country reached them, Giant Spirit Sect responded swiftly, immediately dispatching the recently returned Xiao Yizhi from Mi Yun Mountain to provide support and strengthen local defenses. ¡°Fellow disciple, cough cougha€| What does Purple Cloud Sect have to say?¡± The head of the Phoenix High Mountain branch of the Giant Spirit Sect, Sun Yuecai, asked his fellow disciple with a pale face. ¡°School Leader has already notified Master Meng about the changes here and requested aid. Now, Master Meng is aware and urgently mobilizing reinforcements to support us. If everything goes well, once Master Huang of the Heavenly River Sect arrives to take over for Master Ding at Haiyun Pavilion in the Western Domain, Master Ding will personally lead the reinforcements here to help us counter Taiping Dao. With Master Ding¡¯s intervention, Taiping Dao will surely have to regurgitate everything they¡¯ve swallowed today. Daring to snatch from the bowl of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate a€¡° do they really think they have the teeth for it?¡± Xiao Yizhi snorted coldly, his anger towards Taiping Dao unconcealed. He then turned to his junior brother with concern, ¡°Junior brother, you were just injured by the scoundrels of Taiping Dao. You should go back and rest now, meditate and heal. It¡¯s still some time before Master Ding¡¯s arrival. We have to wait for Master Huang to settle the affairs of the Heavenly River Sect and arrive in the Western Domain. At best, the whole process might take two to three days; there¡¯s still time before the big battle begins. During this interval, junior brother, you should focus on recovering from your injuries to prepare for the battle in a few days. Here at Phoenix High Mountain, your senior brother is watching over things. I won¡¯t let those Taiping Dao scoundrels take advantage of any gaps.¡± Although Giant Spirit Sect was barely regarded as a major Immortal Sect, what enabled them to maintain this status was their possession of three countries and the only three True Persons in the sect. If any of the three fellow disciples met with misfortune, the rising momentum of Giant Spirit Sect would instantly plummet. Falling from the status of a major sect to that of an ordinary one. With Jiuzhou Immortal Gate as a backer, Giant Spirit Sect needn¡¯t worry about their Tao Inheritance being extinguished by outsiders during their vulnerable times. But if this period of momentum was disrupted, to recover their vitality would require tremendous effort and time. In an era when Jiuzhou Immortal Gate is on the rise and actively expanding, Giant Spirit Sect was adamant not to fall behind. Thus, protecting the sect¡¯s only three True Persons was their utmost priority. This task even took precedence over Qingyu Country. Because without a True Person, they wouldn¡¯t have the strength to defend, and losing Qingyu Country was inevitable a€¡° Giant Spirit Sect would still be destined to lose this place. But if Qingyu Country was lost and the three True Persons remained, with their strength, they could slowly wait for opportunities to try and reclaim it or carve out new territory elsewhere. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï This is the principle that ¡°if you lose the land but keep the people, both can be restored; if you lose the people, the land is irretrievable.¡± Hearing his fellow disciple¡¯s concern, Sun Yuecai nodded. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, elder brother, I understand the priorities and won¡¯t risk myself unnecessarily. Now that you¡¯re here, I¡¯ll leave Phoenix High Mountain in your care and go into seclusion to heal. In a few days when Master Ding arrives, you and I, side by side with other fellow disciples from various sects, will give those Taiping scoundrels a good fight. I¡¯m determined to avenge today¡¯s humiliation.¡± Sun Yuecai was particularly dissatisfied with being cowardly beaten by those of Taiping Dao with higher Cultivation and the aid of Immortal Artifacts, causing him to retreat injured. What skill is there in bullying the weak? What skill is there in exploiting external tools? Have the guts to send someone with equal Cultivation, without relying on external tools, to fight one-on-one and see who wins! Oh, of the mere two Human Immortals in Taiping Dao, both have late-stage Cultivation, and none match his early-stage state, so forget it, never mind. Chapter 1330 - Chapter 1330 Chapter 525 Julings Response_3 ?Chapter 1330: Chapter 525 Juling¡¯s Response_3 Chapter 1330: Chapter 525 Juling¡¯s Response_3 But since the Taiping Dao had made the first move, Master Ding and many other fellow disciples from different sects shouldn¡¯t blame them if they also resorted to bullying the weak by flaunting their treasures. Since becoming an immortal, Sun Yuecai had never suffered such humiliation and injustice, and he couldn¡¯t pacify his thoughts without seeking revenge. Xiao Yizhi laughed heartily, ¡°Fellow disciple, don¡¯t worry. When the time comes, I¡¯ll join you. The School Leader has bestowed upon us an Immortal Artifact to suppress our sect. With the aid of the Immortal Artifact and our combined strength, we will give Yi Dancheng a good fight.¡± Sun Yuecai nodded, then added, ¡°Not just Yi Dancheng, but also Jintai Gate. This sect has been troubling us since our sect entered the Southern Domain. Both overtly and covertly, they have been obstructing us from continuing into Qingyang Country. Initially, due to concerns about our reputation and because the strength of our Jiuzhou Immortal Sect had not yet recovered, we had been enduring and refraining from taking action against them. Now, three thousand years have passed, and the wounds from the last great battle have healed. We and the four other families have recovered and have the extra capacity to continue expanding outside. This time, Jintai Gate has voluntarily sided with the Taiping Dao and has openly become our enemy, giving us the perfect excuse and reason. Once we defeat the Taiping Dao, we will directly request Master Ding¡¯s guidance to eradicate Jintai Gate as well. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï That will show the other Immortal Sects what happens to those who oppose our Jiuzhou Immortal Sect!¡± Xiao Yizhi nodded in agreement, ¡°What the fellow disciple said is right. As of today, there is really no reason to keep Jintai Gate around. It¡¯s time to eradicate them. Even if this battle doesn¡¯t completely drive away the Taiping Dao, destroying this sect will allow us to fully claim the western part of the Southern Domain, sharing the region equally with the Taiping Dao. The Taiping Dao, after all, is a Grand Fairy Door with an Earth Immortal, not so easily bullied. This time Jiuzhou Immortal Sect is not mobilizing its full strength, just sending Master Ding. Even if we win, it won¡¯t be possible to entirely annihilate or drive the enemy away. They were aware of this. So the best possible future scenario would likely be the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect and the Taiping Dao each occupying half of the Southern Domain, one in the west and the other in the east. The western part, namely the territories of Qing Yu, Qingyang, Anyu, and Damu countries, was Jiuzhou Immortal Sect¡¯s established target. After seizing these locations, they would probably negotiate peace with the Taiping Dao. As for whether the Taiping Dao would accept, that was no longer their concern. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï If need be, they would continue the fight, as they were not afraid to do so. As the two were envisioning this future, the Jade Pendant Xiao Yizhi was carrying lit up. It was a specially made Voice Transmission Jade Charm from the Giant Spirit Sect. Noticing it, he picked it up, and a message immediately transmitted through. After listening, Xiao Yizhi¡¯s expression turned grim. Seeing this, Sun Yuecai quickly asked, ¡°Fellow disciple, what happened? Did the School Leader send a message?¡± The other drew a breath, gritted his teeth, and said, ¡°The School Leader just sent a message. Not long ago, a Yin World appeared in Xiaye Country. A Ghost Emperor emerged from Huangquan in the Yang World. Upon receiving the news, the Taiping bird, along with several True Persons originally from the Mi Yun Mountain Dharma Assembly, took advantage of our oversight and held a Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony. Within just a few hours, they cleared Xiaye Country of demons and subdued the Ghost Emperor, pacifying the Yin World. They even took the opportunity to drive away the two flood dragons from Jiuchuan Country, taking over that country as well. Now, the Taiping Dao has completely eradicated the demon menace from the Southern Domain, leaving them free of future concerns.¡± Hearing about what had transpired in such a short time at the Great Plain Path, Sun Yuecai was also somewhat astonished. Once he had absorbed this information and realized what had occurred, his good mood vanished instantly. Chapter 1331 - Chapter 1331 Chapter 526 The Offense and Defense Shift Forms ?Chapter 1331: Chapter 526: The Offense and Defense Shift Forms Chapter 1331: Chapter 526: The Offense and Defense Shift Forms ¡°` Everything had fallen into chaos, complete disarray. Actually, with the powerful enemy of Qing Immortal Sect to contend with, the capacity of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates to allocate forces to deal with Taiping Dao had been very limited. What could be confirmed so far was that the commander of this grand battle was Earth Flower True Man Ding Wanxuan of Haiyun Pavilion, that much was certain. Beneath him, his fellow disciples, Sun Yuecai and Xiao Yizhi of the Giant Spirit Sect, would naturally participate in the battle. In addition, it was possible that another two or three True Persons would be summoned from the Western Domain, along with about three thousand ordinary disciples to join the fight. A deployment of one Earth Immortal, four or five Human Immortals, and over three thousand ordinary disciples. They would naturally have the upper hand against Taiping Dao¡¯s forces of one Earth Immortal, two Human Immortals, and at most a thousand disciples. Of course, compared to Taiping Dao, the forces mobilized by Jiuzhou Immortal Gate could only be said to have a slight advantage. On the defensive, defeating Taiping Dao was not a sure thing. But Taiping Dao had problems of its own internally. Xiaye Country and Jiuchuan Country both suffered from numerous Demons Causing Chaos. Among them, the two flood dragons from Jiuchuan Dragon Palace had considerable strength, and could not be ignored as a threat. Additionally, the Southern Domain Immortal Gate had Xuan Turtle Mountain, which harbored animosity towards Taiping Dao; thus, discord was already present within Taiping Dao¡¯s ranks. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã? If enticed a bit by the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate side, the aforementioned two parties might just cause trouble, and at a critical moment, stab Taiping Dao in the back, dooming them instantly. Therefore, with external forces of their own stronger than those of Taiping Dao, and two significant internal threats, once the war began, an internal and external pincer movement, coupled with Taiping Dao¡¯s recent arrival in the Southern Domain and unsteady foothold¡­ Wouldn¡¯t they almost certainly secure victory in this war? But now¡­ ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Taiping Dao, under the pretext of a Dharma Assembly, had suddenly joined forces with Qing Immortal Sect during an oversight on the part of Jiuzhou Immortal Gates and staged the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, causing quite a stir. Annihilating Xiaye Country, subduing Huangquan in the Yin World, expelling the malicious flood dragons, reclaiming Jiuchuan Country. The achievements of a single Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony had completely reversed the situation that was unfavorable to them; before the war even started, they had resolved all their internal issues. By now, with no internal ties holding them back, Taiping Dao could concentrate all of their efforts and focus solely on confronting Jiuzhou Immortal Gates. Even at Xuan Turtle Mountain, given that Taiping Dao had secured their internal strengths with a resounding victory and prestige at its peak, it was questionable whether they would dare to rebel. At present, it seems that they dare not. If Xuan Turtle Mountain dares not rebel, then under the compelling righteousness of Taiping Dao, its forces must be used against Jiuzhou Immortal Gates. All three local Immortal Sects of the Southern Domain, without any uncertainties, would be harnessed by Taiping Dao. Taking into account these various sects, as well as the powers Taiping Dao already possesses, just for the battle in the Southern Domain, the forces they could bring to bear would amount to one Earth Immortal, seven Human Immortals, and around four thousand ordinary disciples. Just from a comparison of nominal strength, Taiping Dao had already surpassed the expeditionary force of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates. Still holding the defensive advantage, their chance of victory had grown even larger. And all of these drastic changes hinged on the recently concluded Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony that had lasted less than six hours. In just this brief period of time, they had shifted from a favorable position to one of disadvantage. How could the emotions of fellow disciples Xiao Yizhi and Sun Yuecai be anything but troubled? It took a while for Xiao Yizhi to fully process the bad news internally. Taking a deep breath, he spoke with a solemn expression, ¡°Taiping Dao has already pacified the Southern Domain and even colluded with Qing Immortal Sect. As of now, their next School Leader is within Mi Yun Mountain. According to reports from our spies in the Southern Domain, the True Persons from the previous Dharma Assembly are still there and have not departed. At this moment, within Mi Yun Mountain, there are at least two Earth Immortals and more than ten Human Immortals gathered. Taiping Dao¡¯s strength in the Southern Domain, before the support of the True Persons from Qing Immortal Sect leaves, is beyond what we can shake.¡± Now, the force Taiping Dao has amassed in Mi Yun Mountain is more than double that of their expeditionary force to the Southern Domain. Such a vast disparity not only diminishes their chance of advancing into the Southern Domain, but if Taiping Dao were to launch a major counteroffensive and even seize Qingyu Country, it would be considered merciful on their part. In fact, Jiuzhou Immortal Gates are now indeed contemplating how to preserve Qingyu Country. Sun Yuecai asked unwillingly, ¡°What about Qingyu Country then? And what about my Phoenix High Mountain branch? Xiao Yizhi replied, ¡°According to the School Leader, Master Ding has already set off in advance and is on his way here. In about another hour, he should arrive. Upon his arrival, Master Ding will take both of us to help set up defenses on Phoenix High Mountain. We must also work with Master Ding to construct the defensive arrays for Qingyu Country. After deliberation by the leaders of the sects, they have decided to use Qingyu Country as the front line and have Master Ding stay here persistently. Just like the battlefields in the Northern and Central Domains, from now on, we will be locked in prolonged confrontation with Taiping Dao here in Qingyu Country of the Southern Domain. As for our rear in the Western Domain, Master Huang of the Heavenly River Sect will help take care of it.¡± Yes, although it¡¯s reluctant to admit. But Jiuzhou Immortal Gates also have to accept the fact that it seems they cannot quickly defeat Taiping Dao and seize the control of the Southern Domain. It isn¡¯t just about not being able to seize control, but in the Southern Domain hereafter, they may no longer advance an inch of territory. ¡°` Chapter 1332 - Chapter 1332 Chapter 526 The Offense and Defense Shift Forms_2 ?Chapter 1332: Chapter 526: The Offense and Defense Shift Forms_2 Chapter 1332: Chapter 526: The Offense and Defense Shift Forms_2 In turn, they had no choice but to open up a new defensive line here in Qingyu Country and prepare for a long-term confrontation with Taiping Dao. To prevent the enemy from breaking through the Southern Domain into the Western Domain, threatening their rear and hinterland. The speed of this change of situation, even for an Immortal, was somewhat difficult to withstand. As for Sun Yuecai, the lord of the Phoenix High Mountain Prefecture, he certainly did not want to see his domain become the frontline battlefield. Not willing to switch between offense and defense, he couldn¡¯t help but ask again, ¡°What about the Northern Domain and Central Domain battlefields? With Qing Immortal Sect having drawn so many True Persons to the Southern Domain, the forces available for those two battlefields will definitely be much reduced. Can Master Meng and Master Wang seize the opportunity to launch an attack and see if the other two battlefields can achieve a breakthrough? Even if we cannot break through, we could force Qing Immortal Sect to redeploy those who have been called to the Southern Domain back to their original posts. This way, we here could naturally regain the advantage.¡± Xiao Yizhi shook his head, ¡°I¡¯m afraid that will be very difficult. The forces Qing Immortal Sect has drawn this time are only True Persons from their subordinate Immortal Sects and only a part of those True Persons at that. ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï Each subordinate sect with more than two True Persons still has one remaining to garrison the sect. Meanwhile, inside the Qing Immortal Sect, apart from dispatching one Earth Immortal and one Human Immortal to the Southern Domain, the rest of the headquarters, as well as the Garrison Immortals of the various countries, were not utilized. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Even without recalling those sent here to the Southern Domain, Qing Immortal Sect can still deploy at least three Earth Immortals, twenty Human Immortals, and about ten thousand disciples on the battlefields of the Northern and Western Domains. Whereas on these two battlefields, we can muster at most three Earth Immortals, ten Human Immortals, and no more than four thousand ordinary disciples. The enemy and us, we still hold an inferior position to the enemy¡¯s advantage. To achieve a breakthrough over there, we would need Qing Immortal Sect to make a foolish move or for some major event to occur. Under normal circumstances, it is simply impossible.¡± Regarding the battle situation in the Central and Northern Domains, Xiao Yizhi was still not very optimistic. In fact, in those two battlefields, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s confrontation with Qing Immortal Sect had always been at a disadvantage. After all, Qing Immortal Sect is the incumbent overlord of Changqing Domain, controlling most of the resources within the domain. These remnants of the former dynasty that make up Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, although now rekindling from the ashes and occupying quite a bit of territory, still only have the nature of rebels. A band of rebels facing the imperial army, how could they possibly gain an advantage before completely overturning the world? In the previous ten-thousand-year war, during the first five thousand years, it was basically Jiuzhou Immortal Gate causing disturbances everywhere, instigating rebellion in some place, only for Qing Immortal Sect to immediately come and besiege them, snuffing them out in a flash. Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, after retreating, would immediately flee from Changqing Domain, hiding in another domain to lay low. Once the dust settled, they would immediately rush back to Changqing Domain to cause trouble, picking a place to rebel again. As the overlord of a domain, Qing Immortal Sect carried a political significance too great and couldn¡¯t act like Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, dispersing and chasing into other domains. If they made a move, they might be seen as invaders provoking other Overlord Immortal Sects. If a conflict arose with other Overlord Immortal Sects in the absence of a Great True Person, that could truly spell disaster. With so many concerns, faced with the hit-and-run tactics of these bandits, Qing Immortal Sect felt deeply disgusted. Yet, they had no better method of response and could only defensively hold their ground in their domain. But as the saying goes, a thief can¡¯t be on guard for a thousand days. With such continued harassment, Qing Immortal Sect, having great wealth and strength, could still endure. However, the ordinary small Immortal Sects under their rule began to falter due to the long-lasting battle for security. First were the weakest Immortal Sects of the Western Domain, which one by one were eliminated by Qing Immortal Sect over the five thousand years of guerrilla security warfare. Then the local Immortal Sects of other domains, seeing that Qing Immortal Sect not only failed to effectively contain Jiuzhou Immortal Gate but allowed their subordinate Immortal Sects to be continually destroyed, began to lose faith. Durign this process, the prestige of Qing Immortal Sect itself also gradually collapsed. Eventually, the subordinate Immortal Sects slowly started to harbor differing intentions, losing trust in Qing Immortal Sect. And so, a dark undercurrent arose within the Changqing Domain, and numerous ambitious individuals rose up, gradually causing chaos. Qing Immortal Sect itself, amidst the internal turmoil, had to divide their attention to stabilize the situation, monitoring those subordinate Immortal Sects that might revolt. ¡°` They couldn¡¯t fully focus on countering the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and failed to quash it in its nascent stage. As a result, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate gradually gained a foothold in the battered Western Domain and slowly occupied many territories. By the time the Qing Immortal Sect realized the situation and wanted to extinguish the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate once more, it was already too late. The Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had grown into a force to be reckoned with, and the other four Immortal Sects from outside the domain also provided vigorous support. In collaboration, the Nine Veins Dao Union established countless strong Formation Methods in the Western Domain using innumerable heavenly treasures, turning this place into an impregnable fortress. After several major battles resulting in countless deaths and injuries, the Qing Immortal Sect still failed to recapture the Western Domain. Ultimately, after a decisive battle every three thousand years, they completely lost the nine nations of the Western Domain, leading to the current political landscape within the region. Even though they retreated in defeat, the Qing Immortal Sect still maintained a size nearly three times that of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. With the number of True Immortals among their disciples, their overall strength remained far superior to that of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. The so-called Northern and Central Domain battlefields of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate are, in fact, regions near the West bordering the North and the Center. They connected the nations within these regions to form a continuous stretch, setting up two super-large formations that have been maintained in operation for a long time to resist the continuous counterattacks from the Qing Immortal Sect for three thousand years. The actual tactic is essentially the same as the one Lu Yuan used in Qingyang, Anyu, and Damu, where he established a super-large formation, the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation. It¡¯s a self-preservation strategy selected when one is at a disadvantage against the enemy. It was by relying on these grand formations and the support from the external four veins of the Dao Union that the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate managed to withstand the long-term warfare against the Qing Immortal Sect. Now you are already on the defensive, hoping to counterattack. Let¡¯s not even mention that in the face of the two super-large formations in the Western Domain, the Qing Immortal Sect has also set up two super-large formations to counter them. Without these formations, with fewer people and lesser strength than the enemy, what are you going to fight with? It¡¯s simply an unwinnable battle. The reason Qing Immortal Sect couldn¡¯t annihilate the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate is because your Turtle Shell is too tough, and you keep getting continuous support from outside. Even with the intent to wear them down, you still can¡¯t exhaust these rebels. It¡¯s not that the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate can truly defeat the Qing Immortal Sect on the battlefield. It was precisely because of this deadlock that once the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s rule collapsed in the Southern Domain, these two factions placed such high importance on the ownership of the Southern Domain. On the side of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, they saw a new direction of breakthrough after being besieged and blocked for a long time, offering hope to reverse the current disadvantage. The Qing Immortal Sect doesn¡¯t want the territory they lost to benefit their enemy, only to become a bullet shot at themselves in the future. Therefore, when Taiping Dao, this outsider, emerged. These two major factions anchored onto Taiping Dao and rekindled fierce opposition. Because the Southern Domain has become a critical factor in breaking this stalemate at this moment. Whoever controls the Southern Domain will gain the advantage in the Changqing Domain. Neither side wants the opponent to capture it, ultimately benefiting Taiping Dao, this outsider. This is the current complex situation within the Changqing Domain. ¡°Anyway, let¡¯s just stay here peacefully and wait for Master Ding to arrive,¡± Xiao Yizhi consoled his junior brother, who appeared unwilling to accept the situation, ¡°Junior brother doesn¡¯t have to worry too much. Once the great formation of Qingyu Country is built, even several Earth Immortals will find it difficult to break through the formation. The annex on Phoenix High Mountain will surely remain safe.¡± Indeed, once the formation is completed, this place is truly secure, but it also means Giant Spirit Sect will lose its channel for outward expansion. Not only does the channel disappear, but the spokesperson for Qingyu Country will switch from Sun Yuecai to Ding Wanxuan, whose cultivation is that of an Earth Immortal, effectively stripping him of his authority. However, it¡¯s not good to voice these concerns and disrupt the unity. Sun Yuecai mustered a forced smile: ¡°Thank you for the consolation, elder brother. I understand, no worries.¡± Xiao Yizhi nodded and sighed, ¡°Since that¡¯s the case, let¡¯s prepare to welcome Master Ding¡¯s arrival.¡± At this juncture, Sun Yuecai¡¯s so-called retreat for healing was naturally no longer valid. Whether the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate would engage in a major battle with Taiping Dao is still uncertain. For now, their primary mission is to ensure the security of the southern part of the Western Domain. As for the rest, it can wait. ¡°` Chapter 1333 - Chapter 1333 Chapter 527 Four Shocking Formations ?Chapter 1333: Chapter 527: Four Shocking Formations Chapter 1333: Chapter 527: Four Shocking Formations Just as Xiao Yizhi had guessed, consolidating the entire Southern Domain under Taiping Dao indeed enabled them to devote all their energy to dealing with the invasion from the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. On their side, they urgently called upon Earth Flower True Man Ding Wanxuan to preside over Qingyu Country. At Taiping Dao, when the sect commanded the disciples to be conscripted and taxed for the war effort, Bihu Palace and Xuan Turtle Mountain were exceedingly cooperative. Facing Taiping Dao, which had de facto unified the Southern Domain, especially now that Mi Yun Mountain harbored great immortals like Song Xiren and Wang Shizhou, even rebellious forces like Xuan Gui Mountain dared not make any rash moves. The moment the order was issued, True Person Zhu Zhenghe from Xuan Turtle Mountain, who was attending a Dao Law conference in the mountains, immediately contacted his school leader, instructing the sect to promptly prepare personnel for deployment. Moreover, Zhu Zhenghe was very cooperative about the command to mobilize him personally, always responding with a smile and not daring to refuse in the slightest. As the previous discussions indicated, a Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony truly changed a lot. Taiping Dao firmly secured the position of overlord in the Southern Domain. From now on, unless they encountered some major setback, or if a significant upheaval occurred within Taiping Dao, such as Qing Guanzi suddenly falling, the status of Taiping Dao would be unshakeable. Under his authority, all the forces in the Southern Domain could only tuck their tails and prostrate at his feet. Time flies, like a flowing river. Three days had swiftly passed. In these three days at Mi Yun Mountain, songs and dances continued joyously, numerous true persons exchanged Daoist techniques, earnestly advancing their skills and greatly enjoying themselves. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 The front-line warfare seemed not to affect the people here. Or rather, with so many true persons present, everyone was actually not worried about the front lines. Since there wouldn¡¯t be any issues, even if problems arose, they were capable of resolving them, ensuring that the situation wouldn¡¯t spiral out of control. In that case, why not make merry while they could? In front-line regions like Qingyang Country, the atmosphere grew increasingly tense, and the scent of war smoke began to slowly spread. The participating disciples from Xuan Turtle Mountain and Bihu Palace, totaling seven hundred, had by then all arrived at the frontline. With the arrival of these reinforcements, the number of disciples under Yi Dancheng¡¯s command, each with at least Three Qi, officially reached two thousand. Breaking it down, this was enough to meet the needs of four hundred formation nodes. And constructing the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation, covering all three nations¡¯ nodes, only required three hundred. Dispatching the four hundred squads to fill all the formation nodes, they would still have one hundred squads left over, thus they were more than sufficiently equipped in terms of manpower. So, once everyone was assembled, Yi Dancheng disbanded the original groups from Qing Mountain Pavilion, Wind Thunder Fortress, and Jintai Gate, mixing them to form four hundred new squads. Each of these squads perfectly represented someone from each faction. Although they all belonged to Taiping Dao, the disciples from each sect had different interests and demands. Letting them supervise each other, to keep checks and balances, ensured that no squad, belonging to a single faction, would secretly cause trouble for Taiping Dao. As for the remaining one hundred squads, Yi Dancheng divided them into three main teams. One of these, comprising forty squads, was stationed at Qing Mountain under Yi Dancheng¡¯s direct jurisdiction. The other two teams, each consisting of thirty squads, were stationed respectively in Anyu Kingdom and Great Eye Kingdom, soon to be led by the appointed Garrison Immortals from Taiping Dao in each nation. The primary responsibility of these three main teams was to provide timely replacement and rotation to any node squad that encountered an issue, ensuring that all three hundred nodes of the great formation were continuously maintained, keeping the formation operational without faults. In essence, they were the reserve forces. Following these arrangements, as the formation nodes across Great Eye Kingdom were successively established, this last piece of the puzzle was put into place. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï The grand formation that covers the Three Nations, the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation, finally, on that day, erupted majestically into place. When the formation was established, its energy soared high into the sky, celestial radiance fell, and infused into the formation. The Earth Veins surged with myriad energies, and the echoing voices of heaven and earth¡¯s dragon chants resonated continuously, their mighty presence spreading in all directions. This grand commotion immediately attracted countless onlookers. Within Dongyang Mountain. The numerous true persons, who were discussing Dao over drinks, upon sensing the sudden surge of energy from the east, couldn¡¯t help but put down their wine cups, halt their actions, and look towards that direction with slight astonishment. Wang Shizhou scrutinized the celestial phenomena filling the sky, hearing the perpetual dragon chants by his side, his expression grew solemn as he turned to Qing Guanzi next to him, ¡°Fellow Daoist, could there be some anomaly in the west?¡± Since there was some distance, and he wasn¡¯t inspecting it up close, Wang Shizhou temporarily didn¡¯t realize that these were signs of a formation manifesting. Thus, from his preliminary observation, feeling an energy rise equivalent to his own level from that direction, coupled with the dragon chants, he thought there might be a Great Demon, a True Dragon of Earth Immortal rank, wreaking havoc over there. Although a guest, having enjoyed conversations with Taiping Dao and many fellow Daoists from Changqing Domain over the past two days, he naturally felt concerned about troubles arising in Taiping Dao¡¯s neighboring areas. Later, without realizing it, his hand reached back to his waist and grasped the Immortal Sword he carried, ready to draw it at Qing Guanzi¡¯s request to exterminate demons with his flying sword. As a member of a Sword Cultivator sect, Wang Shizhou¡¯s actions were just this straightforward. Practicing Dao, drinking wine, slaying demonsa€¡±such were the joys of life, encompassed within. The numerous true persons also turned their gaze inquiringly. Qing Guanzi laughed heartily, ¡°Fellow Daoists, no need for panic, this is a defensive formation set by our sect, the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation. Right after Taiping Dao stabilized the Southern Domain, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate has been aggressively pressing and humiliating us.¡± Chapter 1334 - Chapter 1334 Chapter 527 Four Shocking Formations - Part 2 ?Chapter 1334: Chapter 527: Four Shocking Formations ¨C Part 2 Chapter 1334: Chapter 527: Four Shocking Formations ¨C Part 2 In recent days, a large formation of troops was assembled, gathering thousands of cultivators at the western border of our sect, posing a severe threat to our sect¡¯s safety. Therefore, for self-protection, our sect had no choice but to establish a great formation in the western region to resist the invasion of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. This is defense for self-preservation, the formation once set, manifested anomalies, and it was not caused by any demonic dragons. Please rest assured. After a short while, once the formation is completely stable, these anomalies will disperse and return to tranquility.¡± All formation methods undergo a process of activation and adjustment after their establishment. For a super formation like the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation, which covers tens of thousands of miles across the Three Nations, the various coordination issues that arise after construction are even more significant. At this moment, it is merely the incomplete integration of various nodes of the formation that is causing the leakage of energy, resulting in various anomalies. Once all the nodes are interconnected, all spiritual power will converge, not a bit of strength will leak, and naturally, it will become smooth and restrained, returning to peace. This is just a normal phenomenon. However, upon hearing this explanation, many True Persons had varied expressions. The True Persons from each Immortal Sect in the Changqing Domain were surprised to hear that the Taiping Dao had silently established a super formation. And judging by its momentum, so astonishing, it must be a formidable formation capable of resisting Earth Immortals, just like those in the battlefields of the northern and central regions. ¡®With this formation protecting the Southern Domain, the invasion by the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate this time will likely end in failure. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï It seems that the Taiping Dao has now firmly secured its foundation. The master of the Southern Domain is now them.¡¯ Many True Persons harbored such thoughts. If previously, there were any uncertainties on the Southern Domain¡¯s side in facing the forceful invasion of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Then with the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation established, the Taiping Dao has effectively gained the combat power of an Earthly Immortal, in addition to the one Earth Immortal and seven Human Immortals already present in the Southern Domain. Even if the many True Persons who came to aid were to leave, relying solely on the Southern Domain¡¯s own strength would be sufficient to withstand the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Not to mention, they have not yet left. Counting Master Song, their side is equivalent to having three Earth Immortals and more than twenty Human Immortals. With such strength, even if the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate were to focus its efforts on attacking and ignore other battlefields, it is feared that they would not succeed in taking over the Southern Domain, even if they broke their heads in the attempt. In such a situation, how could one say that the Taiping Dao has not firmly secured the position of master of the Southern Domain? ¡°So it was a formation anomaly.¡± Upon hearing Qing Guanzi¡¯s explanation, Wang ShiZhou¡¯s face relaxed, and he then sighed, ¡°Alas, we cultivators of the Immortal Sect should support each other, jointly slay demons and maintain the righteous path of Heaven and Earth. Now, however, we are killing each other, fighting over personal gains, and have become sworn enemies. At this point, we are even forced to set up great formations to guard against fellow cultivators. This decline of customs and disruptions of harmonies truly grieves the heart.¡± As a person coming from a normal Immortal Domain, Wang ShiZhou frankly found the chaos on the Evergreen Jade side quite intolerable. We are all from the same Immortal Sect, on the same team. What issues cannot be discussed openly, why must we resort to fighting and killing? If there¡¯s really that excess energy, why not venture into those unexplored Wilderness lands and fight against demons to open up new territories for the Human Race? Isn¡¯t that a more meaningful endeavor than infighting? It¡¯s just a pity. Not everyone shares his way of thinking. Here in the Changqing Domain, the preference clearly is for internal strife over external expansion. ¡°Daoist Wang speaks the truth. We fellow cultivators of the Immortal Sect should indeed support and assist each other, not turn blades on one another, self-slaughtering.¡± Hearing Wang ShiZhou¡¯s words, Song Xiren next to him immediately nodded in agreement, then angrily said, ¡°But there are some who suddenly rose from nowhere, claiming to be descendants of the Nine Spirits Sect, stirring up trouble in my Changqing Domain, and competing with my Immortal Sect for sovereignty. This disturbance has lasted ten thousand years. It has turned the Changqing Domain into a land rife with battles, where demons run rampant, countless Immortal Sects have been destroyed, and untold sins have been committed. These remnants of the Nine Spirits only know of reviving the Tao Inheritance, yet they do not realize that the Nine Spirits Sect was obliterated seventy thousand years ago. It wasn¡¯t my Qing Immortal Sect that extinguished their Tao Inheritance. Our sect merely restored order from chaos in that time of turmoil in the region, swept clean the demons from various places, carrying the wishes of the common people, and reestablished a new order, thus earning the righteousness to dominate the Changqing Domain. These remnants, unaware of the bigger righteous cause, only know conflict over territory, destroying sects, allying with demons, and committing acts harmful to the common people. To still claim the legitimacy of an Immortal Sect, it¡¯s likely they have turned to evil, fallen into the demonic path.¡± As for the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, the Qing Immortal Sect has always held an extreme aversion. Seizing the opportunity, they couldn¡¯t help but denounce the other party¡¯s misdeeds in front of outsiders. ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï And from the current practical situation in the Changqing Domain, what Song Xiren said was indeed not wrong. The chaos currently within the domain fundamentally stems from the malicious incitement of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, even taking active participation, which triggered it all. Otherwise, without this external threat. With the stature of the Qing Immortal Sect, even without a Great True Person presiding, with several Earth Immortals alive, and more than twenty Human Immortals, the domain would still maintain its stability. Even if it were to decline, it could last tens of thousands of years, gradually settling into obscurity in a relatively peaceful and stable environment. It wouldn¡¯t be like now. In just a short ten thousand years, transitioning from prosperity to decline, to the point of nearing total collapse. Such rapid decline, isn¡¯t it the doing of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate? Of course, all the above is just in theory. A regular Overlord Immortal Sect, consistently declining from its peak, indeed needs tens of thousands of years. Chapter 1335 - Chapter 1335 Chapter 527 Four Shocking Formations_3 ?Chapter 1335: Chapter 527: Four Shocking Formations_3 Chapter 1335: Chapter 527: Four Shocking Formations_3 But under normal circumstances, when you lose the decisive deterrent power and control vast interests you cannot protect, how could outsiders possibly let you continue to possess them? Thus, from the moment you begin to decline, it¡¯s inevitable that packs of wolves pounce all at once. A look at the history of the Immortal Sects of East China Continent after they¡¯ve lost a Great True Person to preside over them shows nothing but invasions from enemies and instability within; then, beleaguered by internal and external troubles, they are completely destroyed in a short period. So it¡¯s true, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate initiated the war, and indeed, it is their sin. But even without the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, some other Immortal Sect would stand up to challenge the status of the Changqing Immortal Sect. This is unavoidable. However, for those involved, regardless of whether others might challenge or not, you¡¯re the first to step out and do this, and thus you become the most hated. Therefore, it makes sense that the Changqing Immortal Sect detests the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. As for Song Xiren¡¯s view, Wang ShiZhou found it difficult to judge, and could only lightly say, ¡°The fellow Daoists of Jiuzhou have indeed done wrong by stirring up strife and plunging the Changqing Domain into chaos with their unsanctioned use of arms. However, there is no doubt that they are an orthodox Immortal Sect, which is recognized by all major Immortal Sects across the Great Domains. To say that they have fallen into the demonic path is somewhat excessive.¡± The Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s Nine Spirits Tao Inheritance is also a highly respected name throughout the Donghua Continent. Firstly, the alliance of the nine great Immortal Sects is a force to be taken seriously anywhere it is mentioned. The two major branches of this allied force, like the five Immortal Sects of the Western Domain here, and the Radiant Immortal Dynasty, have each secured considerable sovereignty within their respective Great Domains. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Especially the Radiant Immortal Dynasty, within its Domain, is on the verge of claiming sovereignty over that domain. Now, they only lack the emergence of a Great True Person to suppress the Domain¡¯s fortunes and officially establish their overlordship. With such Strength, many Immortal Sects in the Donghua Continent now regard the Radiant Immortal Dynasty as a Heavenly Immortal force and treat it as an Overlord Immortal Sect. The Immortal Sects of the Western Domain, though slightly less influential, have already shaken the hegemony of the Changqing Immortal Sect and show an unstoppable momentum. As for the other Nine Spirits branches, they each possess considerable Strength within the various Great Domains, all bearing the weight of a Grand Immortal Sect, not to be taken lightly. To confront such a powerful alliance of Immortal Sects, even the likes of the Heavenly Immortal force of Dongyang Mountain cannot afford to offend them rashly. If in the future, one of either the Western Domain Immortal Sects or the Radiant Immortal Dynasty ascends to become a true Heavenly Immortal force, Wouldn¡¯t they, Dongyang Mountain, have offended a formidable enemy? Thus, even though he disapproved of the chaos in the Changqing Domain, Wang ShiZhou would not commit such unwise acts. ¡°Alright, alright, let¡¯s not trouble our guest with these grudges and spoil the elegant mood,¡± Seeing the atmosphere grow somewhat awkward, Qing Guanzi promptly stepped in to ease the tension, ¡°I, Taiping Dao, have established this grand formation simply for self-defense and hold no thoughts of aggression. So long as the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate does not attack us forcefully, can my fixed grand formation move to their doorstep? ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï It¡¯s better not to fight if we can avoid it. Living peacefully, discussing the Tao over wine every day, seeking understanding of Heaven and Earth, probing secrets and mysteriesa€¡±isn¡¯t that a carefree life?¡± Seeing the other side giving him meaningful glances, Song Xiren chimed in, ¡°Exactly, exactly, what Qing Guanzi, my fellow Daoist, said is true. Let¡¯s not talk about these issues. Come, let us all drink together.¡± Wang ShiZhou also added, ¡°The two Daoist friends are right, I was being overly sensitive just now, I¡¯ll take the first penalty drink.¡± And so, amidst the interplay of glimmering lights, the awkwardness dissipated. While they could still talk and laugh here at Mi Yun Mountain, Over in Qingyu Country, opposite Qingyang Country, a flurry of hectic activity, panic, and confusion reigned on Phoenix High Mountain, unavoidable upon seeing the huge commotion across the way. Master Ding Wanxuan, who had arrived here just a couple of days ago, found himself unable to sort out the local defenses before having to face the heavy blow dealt by Taiping Dao right out the gate. A difficult question now lay before him. That was, should they still strike at Taiping Dao or not? Chapter 1336 - Chapter 1336 Chapter 528 Turning to Peace ?Chapter 1336: Chapter 528: Turning to Peace Chapter 1336: Chapter 528: Turning to Peace Should we still attack Taiping Dao or not? That¡¯s the question. Currently, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect has already risen to prominence. They had boasted loudly and mobilized disciples, gathering so many cultivators, thinking of invading the Southern Domain. However, by this time, the Taiping Dao had taken advantage of their lack of response and dealt with the inner threats first. Then, continuing with Qing Immortal Sect and its affiliated sects, gathered at Mi Yun Mountain, they forced them to avoid making any significant moves. For instance, taking advantage of the moment right after everything had just ended and Taiping Dao was still stabilizing, they could launch a direct attack. This again missed several days of opportunity. Now, the super formation built by Taiping Dao stands before them. The soaring anomaly, spreading the sweeping dragon¡¯s roar, shook the entire Southern Domain to its core. With things having progressed to this stage, for Jiuzhou Immortal Sect to think about attacking Taiping Dao, it¡¯s no longer as simple as it was three days ago during the opening ceremony of Taiping Dao. Inside Phoenix High Mountain. The reinforcements from Jiuzhou Immortal Sect had already arrived, with a few True People leading the meeting in the convocation hall of the other courtyard. At this time, the far-reaching dragon¡¯s roar filled the sky, bursting with spiritual energy, instantly attracting everyone¡¯s attention. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Xiao Yizhi, looking towards the disturbance coming from the east, watched for a while, could not help but turn around, and asked Master Ding Wanxuan, who was seated at the head, ¡°True Person, has Taiping Dao¡­ established a super formation?¡± His voice trembled slightly. What a super battle entails, any cultivator from Jiuzhou Immortal Sect knows all too clearly. Over these thousands of years, they had been able to establish a firm foothold in Changqing Domain and gradually encroach on the entire Western Domain of the Nine Provinces, all thanks to those two super formations. And now, a super formation in the Southern Domain appeared right before his eyes, and it seemed to have been led by the master of Taiping Dao. The impact of this on the hearts of Jiuzhou cultivators was simply indescribable. ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï ¡°It appears so,¡± Ding Wanxuan replied. He rose from his seat and walked outside the door, gazing at the distant anomaly of the dragon¡¯s roar with a solemn expression. As an Earth Immortal True Person, he could see clearer than the other Human Immortals who were still in a state of shock and uncertainty. He could clearly discern that the formation in the distance was definitely a super formation like the Earth Immortal formation, covering multiple nations without a doubt. Precisely because he had seen through the details, he felt even more grave, ¡°First, they held a Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, and then they built this super formation. Taiping Dao has undertaken significant actions, coming with aggressive momentum and considerable schemes.¡± Beside him, Duan Ming from Haiyun Pavilion, who had come with Master Ding, couldn¡¯t help but express his concern when he heard his master speak this way, ¡°Master, with Taiping Dao building such a formation, our path to the Southern Domain has been cut off. If we still want to move southward, we would have to force our way through the formation. But to attack such a formation without several Earth Immortals participating, it¡¯s likely to be fruitless. Our Jiuzhou Immortal Sect currently has only you, Master, who can make a move; breaking through this formation seems difficult.¡± Duan Ming spoke very realistically. Although Jiuzhou Immortal Sect had recently gained the strength of one more Earth Immortal, Master Huang from Heavenly River Sect, who had broken through the Earth Flower Dao Fruit, and was able to extend into new territories, originally with this strength, taking down the entire Southern Domain should have been straightforward. But with the rise of Taiping Dao, now the situation in the Southern Domain, one Earth Immortal seems somewhat inadequate. Especially now, with Taiping Dao having built a super formation, a massive dragon cry tent has already stretched between the Southern and Western Domains, isolating the two regions. To break through this region, just look at Qing Immortal Sect, who had also been hindered by a similar barrier previously. How could things be so easy? And without being able to break the great formation¡¯s barrier, Jiuzhou Immortal Sect¡¯s intent to attack the Southern Domain could only go around. Given the geographical positions of both sides, the routes to bypass would only be two. One is to the north, through the territory of Qing Immortal Sect in the Central Domain, passing through there to the south, which could directly reach Xuan Turtle Mountain in Youshan Country. But given the relationship between Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, daring to pass there would likely provoke an attack, how could they possibly let you through? Not to mention, in the Central Domain, Qing Immortal Sect has already established a super formation, you won¡¯t be able to pass through there either. The other direction is to the south, which is by going through Dongyang Domain, and from Dongyang Mountain¡¯s territory, detour to Mi Yun Mountain in Youxin Country. That¡¯s even more unrealistic. Dongyang Mountain itself does not wish to get involved in these messy affairs of Changqing Domain. In Changqing Domain, they have been cautious about attracting the attention of Dongyang Mountain, fearing that this behemoth might suddenly set its sights on its neighboring territories. If that were the case, facing the heavy pressure from Dongyang Mountain, both Jiuzhou Immortal Sect and Qing Immortal Sect might as well surrender. Everyone would lose in that scenario. So this route, too, is impassable. If all the routes a€¡° upper, middle, and lower a€¡° are impassable, then how can Jiuzhou Immortal Sect proceed to attack Taiping Dao? Could it be that they really have to fiercely contest this newly established super formation? If so, leaving aside whether it can be taken down, Jiuzhou Immortal Sect has to consider how many lives they are willing to sacrifice to pay this price.¡± ¡°Indeed, True Person, though we have only one Earth Immortal, and among our Human Immortals, merely four, and as for ordinary disciples, only three thousand. With such strength, originally wanting to defeat Taiping Dao was already a stretch; now that the adversary has added a great formation, it has become even harder, nigh impossible.¡± Chapter 1337 - Chapter 1337 Chapter 528 Switching from War to Peace_2 ?Chapter 1337: Chapter 528 Switching from War to Peace_2 Chapter 1337: Chapter 528 Switching from War to Peace_2 ¡°For the current plan, perhaps it would be advisable to ask Master Huang for help and request him to rush more reinforcements here; there might be a chance to break through this formation,¡± he said. Upon hearing this, the other True Persons also began to speak up. Listening to the commotion around him, Ding Wanxuan¡¯s expression turned stern as he exclaimed, ¡°Has the mere emergence of a formation from Taiping Dao scared you all witless? Why is everyone in such a panic?¡± ¡°We are frightened, True Person; please forgive us.¡± Seeing Master Ding¡¯s anger, everyone promptly ceased speaking and bowed, not daring to say more. ¡°Hmph.¡± Ding Wanxuan snorted coldly. Seeing that no one else spoke, he then said, ¡°Master Huang must stay in the Western Territory to protect our rear and ensure our security. This matter is crucial to the foundation of Nine Provinces and his duty is significant; we must not arbitrarily request his intervention, so do not bring this up again.¡± He emphasized that point before continuing, ¡°However, the establishment of the Earth Immortal formation by Taiping Dao is indeed a significant influence, already affecting the balance of power between us and them in the Southern Domain, and it must be addressed seriously. I will seek counsel with Master Meng of the Purple Cloud Sect regarding this unexpected turn of events. We, several Earth Flower True Men, will come up with a solution together. You all need not concern yourselves with these matters¡­¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Taiping Dao has already taken a step ahead in terms of their own defense. We cannot afford to fall behind at every step. Taiping Dao has already secured their western defenses. We must also preemptively secure the safety of our eastern entrance. Do you understand?¡± ¡°Yes, we are aware,¡± they responded in chorus. Master Ding nodded, then waved his hand and said, ¡°Since you are aware, then proceed to act. Now, I must go find Master Meng.¡± ¡°We shall take our leave,¡± said the True Persons, who quickly bowed and withdrew. In a flash, as everyone withdrew, only he remained. Ding Wanxuan pondered for a long time and eventually let out a deep sigh. He then took a Jade Symbol from his sleeve, infused it with magic power, and activated it. A beam of light shot from the Jade Symbol and shortly thereafter, a figure materialized before him. In the apparition was a handsome middle-aged mana€¡±none other than the current School Leader of the Purple Cloud Sect, Meng Jianshan, one of the two Great Immortals of the Changqing Domain. Once Meng Jianshan materialized, he looked at Ding Wanxuan and puzzled, asked, ¡°Junior Brother Ding, why have you summoned me? What has happened?¡± ¡°Brother Meng,¡± Ding Wanxuan gave a bow before explaining, ¡°The situation is thus¡­¡± He then relayed the recent developments in the Southern Domain truthfully. He concluded, ¡°With the strength currently at my disposal, there is no possibility of urgently challenging Taiping Dao¡¯s grand formation. Next, whether to fight or to negotiate, I need guidance from you, Brother Meng.¡± After listening to Ding Wanxuan, Meng Jianshan fell silent, not answering immediately. Furrowing his brows in thought for a while, he finally sighed, ¡°The situation in the Southern Domain has changed so rapidly, it¡¯s truly unpredictable. Previously, when Taiping Dao announced they had Earth Flower True Men, we really should have realized it then. How could a Grand Fairy Door with an Earth Immortal be so easily dealt with? In the end, it was because all of us were reluctant to give up the prosperous Southern Domain; we were blinded by interests, leading you to bring people here and create this deadlock. Pure-hearted and unmovable like a mountaina€¡±our cultivation is still not enough.¡± Hearing his elder brother say so, Ding Wanxuan hesitated and asked, ¡°Brother, do you mean¡­ we should give up on continuing to vie for the Southern Domain?¡± Meng Jianshan nodded, ¡°Indeed, I do think that. Since we can no longer take down Southern Domain, continuing to fight stubbornly against Taiping Dao will only bring needless deaths and no benefits. Rather than persisting, it would be better to withdraw early. After all, if we truly delve into it, we and Taiping Dao don¡¯t really have much animosity. It¡¯s only in the past few days, due to the issue of ownership over the Southern Domain, that this conflict arose. ?¦Ï??0.§ã? But this is merely a minor disagreement, not even amounting to a conflict. Besides standing against each other, our members and those of Taiping Dao have never even had a small skirmish; we truly have not formed any deep grudges.¡± ¡°If we stop here and send someone to negotiate peace with Taiping Dao to alleviate relations, we might also avoid a war.¡± ¡°Brother, I¡¯ve thought it through.¡± ¡°The Qing Immortal Sect can use the Southern Domain to cozy up to Taiping Dao. Why shouldn¡¯t we do the same and draw them to our side?¡± ¡°You must understand that as of now, the Qing Immortal Sect still dominates the Changqing Domain.¡± ¡°Even for the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, facing this sect, we can only just ensure our own survival.¡± ¡°Now, with us standing firm here, the Qing Immortal Sect, under pressure, has yielded the Southern Domain to Taiping Dao with the intent to use them to balance against us.¡± ¡°From this perspective, Taiping Dao¡¯s quick establishment in the Southern Domain is partly due to our efforts.¡± ¡°Should they be sensible, they would understand that without us, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, the Qing Immortal Sect would have regained control over the entire Western Territory.¡± ¡°At that time, could they still tolerate the existence of such a colossal entity as Taiping Dao in the Southern Domain?¡± ¡°Even without considering these long-term strategies, just focusing on the current benefits.¡± ¡°Giving up the Southern Domain was already the limit for the Qing Immortal Sect; they couldn¡¯t possibly offer Taiping Dao more advantages.¡± ¡°But if they were to join hands with us, it would be different.¡± ¡°As long as Taiping Dao unites with us to destroy the Qing Immortal Sect, we could offer them more.¡± ¡°In the hands of the Qing Immortal Sect are the Northern, Central, and Eastern Domains; we could share these territories with Taiping Dao.¡± ¡°Even a split would be possible.¡± ¡°These benefits are foreseeable.¡± ¡°Together with Taiping Dao, we both find ourselves at a disadvantage against the Qing Immortal Sect.¡± ¡°When facing a strong neighbor, it¡¯s a wise choice for two weaker parties to unite for self-preservation.¡± ¡°From this perspective, there¡¯s also a need for us to cooperate.¡± ¡°So, regarding Taiping Dao, no matter how you look at it, their emergencea€¡±though it robbed us of the Southern Domain and blocked our path of expansion, much to our resentmenta€¡±¡± ¡°Once you disregard that, their emergence also represents a great opportunity to break the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s stalemate that has lasted thousands of years.¡± ¡°Without external influence and relying solely on us, even with the support of other Taoist sects, it would be difficult to defeat the Qing Immortal Sect.¡± ¡°Enduring this struggle, it might take thousands or even tens of thousands of years to determine a victor.¡± ¡°But now, with Taiping Dao involved, if we can win them over, our combined strength would at least balance, and we would no longer be at a disadvantage when facing the Qing Immortal Sect.¡± ¡°After allowing Taiping Dao to develop in the Southern Domain for two to three thousand years, and once one or two more Earth Immortals emerge from their ranks, the balance of power between us and the Qing Immortal Sect will be in our favor.¡± ¡°Then, when we battle the Qing Immortal Sect again and destroy it, fulfilling the long-standing desire to restore the great enterprise of the Nine Spirits Tao Inheritance, perhaps this generation might accomplish what our ancestors wished for.¡± Meng Jianshan slowly articulated his thoughts, becoming noticeably excited when he spoke of reviving the Nine Spirits Tao Inheritance.¡± ¡°Ever since our ancestors ascended to the Immortal Realm, with the Nine Spirits Sect Tao Inheritance obliterated and the Nine Spirits Domain usurped by the Qing Immortal Sect.¡± ¡°Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, considering itself the main branch of the Nine Spirits Sect, has made its life¡¯s work to destroy the Qing Immortal Sect, reclaim the Changqing Domain, and rebuild the Nine Spirits Sect.¡± ¡°This desire has been passed down from generation to generation and has now become almost like a faith, a kind of obsession.¡± ¡°And this age-old obsession has finally seen a glimmer of hope in the hands of Meng Jianshan¡¯s generation.¡± ¡°Since we¡¯ve already been unable to seize the Southern Domain, if we turn hostile against Taiping Dao now, forcing them to side with the Qing Immortal Sect, that barely visible hope might be completely shattered.¡± ¡°This is something Meng Jianshan cannot accept.¡± ¡°Therefore, to avoid such a scenario, and also for the sake of fulfilling the generational aspiration, making some temporary compromises and concessions, and using half of the control over the Changqing Domain in exchange for an alliance with Taiping Dao, are acceptable.¡± Having heard Meng Jianshan¡¯s reasoning, Ding Wanxuan was moved: ¡°Brother, you make a solid point. If Taiping Dao was wooed by the Qing Immortal Sect, we, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, naturally can woo them as well.¡± ¡°Since we can¡¯t defeat the opposition now, it might be good to try this path.¡± ¡°So, should we cease hostilities and then dispatch a messenger to negotiate peace with Taiping Dao?¡± Meng Jianshan shook his head: ¡°There¡¯s no hurry for that. Negotiating peace and joining forces with Taiping Dao are matters of great importance. Let¡¯s first consult with Friend Huang and discuss it with him. Asking for their opinions and making a decision afterwards won¡¯t be too late.¡± Ding Wanxuan said, ¡°Indeed, we should ask the other Taoist friends too; I was too hasty. I¡¯ll contact them right away.¡± Meng Jianshan nodded, ¡°That would be best.¡± Chapter 1338 - Chapter 1338 Chapter 529 Great Prosperity in the Southern Domain ?Chapter 1338: Chapter 529 Great Prosperity in the Southern Domain Chapter 1338: Chapter 529 Great Prosperity in the Southern Domain After the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation was established, the Dharma Assembly at Mi Yun Mountain continued for ten more days. During this period, besides Wang Shizhou from Dongyang Mountain, who sensed something amiss in the Southern Domain and preferred not to get overly involved in local affairs, and left the assembly prematurely on the fifth day, the remaining members of the Changqing Immortal Sect and its affiliated True Immortals stayed in the mountains under the leadership of Song Xiren, showing strong support for Taiping Dao. However, after spending ten consecutive days, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect had already set up a new formation in Qingyu Country. Yet, the previously rumored large-scale assault on the Southern Domain by Jiuzhou Immortal Sect never materialized. By then, everyone had realized the situation. Jiuzhou Immortal Sect saw that Taiping Dao had established a formidable formation and was supported by many True Immortals from the Changqing Domain, understanding they wouldn¡¯t gain any advantage, and thus opted to retreat. Seeing this turn of events, the many True Immortals prepared to leave as well. Ever since the rise of Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, the Changqing Domain had been in chaos, with demons from other domains arriving sporadically to cause havoc. The two flood dragons from the Qingyang Dragon Clan were prime examples of this. Therefore, all the True Immortals were concerned about the safety of their own sects. They feared that if they left, their sects would be vulnerable to any malevolent demons that might seize the opportunity to destroy them completelya€¡±a situation that would leave them wailing in regret. Now, to support Taiping Dao, numerous True Immortals had already been away for ten days. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï This was hard to imagine in the past. If it weren¡¯t for the rapid turn of events, plus the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony and the stand-off with Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, they would never have stayed in the Southern Domain for so long. In fact, when they came to participate in the ceremony, they had originally planned to stay for just one day, at most not exceeding three days. Now, having stayed this long had already deviated from many people¡¯s plans. ¡°Qing Guanzi, now that the True Immortals from all sects are thinking of returning, I can¡¯t very well insist on them staying,¡± ¡°Moreover, my prolonged absence has left Changqing Mountain vulnerable, which is not a prudent situation. Now we must depart.¡± That day, Song Xiren found Qing Guanzi and mentioned their departure, ¡°This time I shall take the Immortals from various sects away, but as previously agreed with your sect, our sect will leave one True Immortal here to assist your sect in defending the Southern Domain. Nephew Yang will stay here and await your orders. If you have any instructions, just command him, I have already told him to treat you as he would his master and not to be negligent.¡± As the first Changqing Immortal Sect Immortal to make contact with Taiping Dao, Yang Jihua had been to the Southern Domain several times and was quite familiar with many True Immortals of Taiping Dao, barely forming a significant relationship. Even the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony was made possible only with the full support of the other party. Just on that basis, Taiping Dao owed them a favor. Leaving him in the Southern Domain was a measured choice made by Song Xiren after careful consideration. Sure enough, upon hearing this, Qing Guanzi was immediately delighted, ¡°With Daoist Yang here, I am sure that the Southern Domain will be secure.¡± The Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation had now been set up. But among the three core locations of the formation, Qingyang Country had Yi Dancheng personally overseeing one and Jintai Gate was watching over another in Anyu Country, both places manned by True Immortals, so safety was not a concern. Only the site in the Great Eye Kingdom remained undecided on who the presiding True Immortal would be. For such an important location, crucial to the western border¡¯s security of Taiping Dao, ideally, it should be a trusted person, preferably a True Person originating from Taiping Dao to oversee it. However, Taiping Dao currently only had three officially recognized True Immortals, each already assigned their tasks and unable to be spared. It was simply not possible to send additional personnel to the Great Eye Kingdom. Since it was not feasible for Taiping Dao to provide the necessary manpower, their only option was to consider their affiliated sects. And in choosing to mobilize from the affiliated sects, Taiping Dao had only two options: One was to use the manpower of Jintai Gate, and the other was to make use of Xuan Turtle Mountain¡¯s resources. Borrowing from Jintai Gate was the safest option. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï Given the relationship between Jintai Gate and Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, it was absolutely impossible for them to defect, making them the best candidates for maintaining the formation core. However, the issue was that of the super large formation¡¯s three formation cores, one had already been allocated to Jintai Gate. Now, to give another core to the same group, while Taiping Dao controlled only one, then whose formation was the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation truly considered to be? Although the possibility of Jintai Gate betraying Taiping Dao was very slim, and betrayal did not align with their interests, the mere possibility meant that Taiping Dao could not afford to take the risk. If one formation core was destroyed by the enemy, as long as the remaining two were secure, then the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation, although greatly diminished in power, could still barely maintain, continuing to exert fifty to sixty percent of its capability, even against Earth Immortals, temporarily holding up while buying time for the recovery of another core. This scenario would still ensure a controllable situation. However, if two formation cores were destroyed by the enemy, then such a super large formation could nearly be declared a total loss. A Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation with only one core left would have capabilities equivalent only to that of a Human Immortal. Facing the attack of Earth Immortal True Persons, it could be breached in a few strikes; even facing several Human Immortals, with a bit more effort from them, this formation could be easily broken. In confrontations among Grand Fairy Doors, such an ordinary fairy formation would be utterly useless. Therefore, ensuring the security of at least two of the formation cores in the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation, ensuring that no more than one core would be compromised, had become the critical essence to maintaining this formation. Chapter 1339 - Chapter 1339 Chapter 529 Great Prosperity in the Southern Domain_2 ?Chapter 1339: Chapter 529 Great Prosperity in the Southern Domain_2 Chapter 1339: Chapter 529 Great Prosperity in the Southern Domain_2 ¡°` Just from this aspect alone, Taiping Dao cannot assign the defense of the Formation Core in the Great Eye Kingdom entirely to Jintai Gatea€¡±it¡¯s not about distrusting their loyalty. But such a principle issue must be approached with caution. Reliance should be on systems of maintenance, not so-called loyalty and emotion. The human heart is too illusory. Since Jintai Gate cannot be used, what remains is Xuan Turtle Mountain, given this sect¡¯s conflicting interests with Taiping Dao, as well as its subtle schemes throughout history. The loyalty of this sect is not at all trustworthy. If one day a war between Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate breaks out, and Xuan Turtle Mountain proactively detonates the formation and turns on us, then at the same time, the Mountain Gate behind us also rises in rebellion, echoing the betrayal from within and without. Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t be surprised at all by Xuan Turtle Mountain doing such a thing. This ambitious underling¡¯s current subservience is nothing more than an illusion borne of a significant disparity in strength and Taiping Dao¡¯s refusal to give them a chance. If one day Taiping Dao reveals a weak spot, they would certainly seize the moment to rebel. That is without question. Facing such a latent mine, even if Lu Yuan wished to utilize it, he¡¯d be extremely cautious. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Between Jintai Gate and Xuan Turtle Mountain, he has been hesitant about which sect should dispatch a True Person to take action. Sometimes he even considers letting both sects send a True Person to oversee the Great Eye Kingdom together, having them monitor each other. Could this make things somewhat better? But this approach isn¡¯t foolproof either. When faced with genuinely treasonous subordinates, no amount of surveillance can guard against someone with malice triumphing over the one with none, and the guardian is very likely to fall prey. And should the guardian fall, regardless of which side suffers the loss, it means that Taiping Dao has one less True Immortal-level strength. This would make the consequences of their rebellion even greater. And if it comes to pass that both factions wish to revolt together, it would be utterly hopeless. This is no less unstable. Sigh, so many concerns over merely choosing a guardian. When all is said and done, it¡¯s all because Lu Yuan¡¯s Taiping Dao was established too recently, its core manpower was not sufficiently developed, and they truly lacked reliable individuals. Lean on a mountain, and the mountain will collapse. Trust an outsider, and there will inevitably come a day when they are unreliable. This is Taiping Dao¡¯s greatest problem at present. Jintai Gate now sides with Taiping Dao due to interest conflicts with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. But if Jiuzhou Immortal Gate changes its strategy, abandons its past aggressive stance, and chooses instead to share the Southern Domain with the Southern Domain Immortal Gate, it becomes difficult to say whether Jintai Gate would remain reliable. As for whether the substantial benefits promised by such a large power can be trusted at this point, that¡¯s not a worry. The Immortal Realm has too many mutual constraining methods. Just like how Taiping Dao controls the Netherworld Court of Yichuan with Chen Hongyuan, the Heavenly Son of the Netherworld, as long as one is willing to pay the price, mutual trust can always be established. Jintai Gate, Xuan Turtle Mountain, and even Bihu Palace all have the potential to be swayed by Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. This is also the root of Lu Yuan¡¯s distrust of them. However, at this juncture, if Yang Jihua of the Changqing Immortal Sect were to be sent to oversee the Great Eye Kingdom, then there would be no problems. If there¡¯s even a chance of reconciling the conflict and returning to good terms with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate among the three Immortal Sects of the Southern Domain, then such a possibility is utterly nonexistent for the Changqing Immortal Sect. Historically, there are no examples of the current Imperial Court reconciling with the remnants of the former regime. Moreover, sending Yang Jihua to guard the Great Eye Kingdom is actually a show of trust, Taiping Dao¡¯s way of expressing goodwill towards the Changqing Immortal Sect. Look, I¡¯ve entrusted such an important position to your person, this shows how much trust I have in youa€¡±it¡¯s my lifeblood. After I¡¯ve gone to such lengths, shouldn¡¯t you support me even more, and provide more assistance? From this perspective, this is also a fine choice. ¡°` The decision is made, Yang Jihua, you will be the guardian of the Great Eye Kingdom. Having made up his mind, Lu Yuan then informed his avatar. Afterwards, Qing Guanzi, having seen off many who had come to attend the Dharma Assembly, sought out Yang Jihua, who had stayed behind, and shared his thoughts with him. The latter immediately said, ¡°If the True Person is willing to place his trust in me, then I am willing to give it a try. As long as I am still alive, the Formation Core of the Great Eye Kingdom will certainly not be lost, and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates, even more, will not dream of stepping one foot into the Great Eye Kingdom.¡± Yang Jihua¡¯s attitude was very clear and very determined. That is to say, he was resolutely set on resisting the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates, ready to fight them to the death. This result did not surprise Qing Guanzi and also gave him satisfaction. ¡°Then the Great Eye Kingdom will be entrusted to Daoist Yang,¡± he said with a smile. He then took out a Dharma seal and handed it to Yang Jihua, ¡°This is the guardian seal of the Great Eye Kingdom. With this seal, Daoist friend can command all the disciples of the Immortal Sect within the Great Eye Kingdom and act on behalf of our Taiping Tao.¡± ¡°The peace and stability of the Great Eye Kingdom¡¯s territory, along with the safety of the Southern Domain¡¯s western border, are in your hands.¡± Yang Jihua respectfully received the Dharma seal and earnestly said, ¡°Jihua will not disappoint True Person¡¯s trust, nor will I shirk my duty and mission.¡± Thus, with the transfer of the Dharma seal completed, the matter of appointing the guardian of the Great Eye Kingdom came to a conclusion. Now that the guardians for the three Formation Cores of the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation had been decided and the three guardians had taken up their appointments, the security of the Southern Domain¡¯s western territory was entirely secured. With such an Earth Immortal formation in place, if the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates wanted to invade the Southern Domain, they would first have to face this enormous sky-covering formation. With the opponent¡¯s strength, it would be absolutely impossible to break through this formation without the intervention of at least two or three Earth Immortals. And with the current strength of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates, it¡¯s completely out of the question to dispatch so many Earth Immortals. Therefore, shortly thereafter, the western side of the Taiping Tao would also be completely safe. At least for the next thousand years, before the strength of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates could make further advances, Taiping Tao¡¯s western domain is safe. As for a thousand years later? By that time, Taiping Tao would have already firmly established itself in the Southern Domain, and even between the Earth Immortal True Persons, a new one might arise from either Che Shidao or Yi Dancheng. With two Earth Immortals seated firmly within Taiping Tao, even if the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates enhanced their strength, in terms of accumulating power, they would still be far inferior to Lu Yuan. With ample Lifespan to expend, compared to other cultivators, Lu Yuan¡¯s speed of building up strength is exceedingly fast. It is with ample confidence that he believes he can survive between the two great powers, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates and the Changqing Immortal Sect, finding advantages on both sides. And thus, with Taiping Dao formally taking charge, under the protection of the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation, the Southern Domain finally shook off the chaos it had suffered for thousands of years. Demons, once ubiquitous, were purged in round after round of cleansing campaigns led by the Immortal Sect alliance headed by Taiping Dao. Many evil demons were either jointly exterminated by the disciples of the Immortal Sect or were so frightened that they fled the Southern Domain entirely. The remaining kind-hearted and good demons were also reined in and appointed as local Mountain Gods and Water Gods, integrated into Taiping Dao¡¯s governing structure. The substantial purging of these destabilizing elements instantly made the Southern Domain exceptionally clear and peaceful, transforming it once again into a serene paradise. Even the genuine heirs of Immortal Sects felt brave enough to travel within the region, seeking mountains and making friends, enhancing their knowledge and experience. No longer did they have to worry like before, fearing that once they left the Mountain Gate, they wouldn¡¯t travel a thousand li before being robbed and killed. Even the True Immortals lived in constant fear every day, never daring to relax their vigilance. Now, this atmosphere has gradually dissipated with Taiping Dao¡¯s deterrence and deep governance. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 The customs of the Southern Domain were also gradually changing. From cultist brigands being rampant, it shifted towards a flourishing Immortal Method and a populace admiring virtue. The Immortal Sect disciples no longer guarded against and killed each other, and the local divine Spirits of mountains and waters were consecutively reestablished. Towns that had been ruined by the ravages of demons were resettled by mortals once more. The wave of order swiftly swept across the entire Southern Domain, covering it completely. The traces of demons and evil paths were gradually heard no more by the people of the Southern Domain thanks to the crackdown by the stationed Immortal Cultivators and Divine Spirits. A great era of prosperity for the Southern Domain, led by Taiping Dao, thus began. And during all this acclaim and praise, the rule of Taiping Dao over this region seamlessly transitioned into its next hundred years. Chapter 1340 - Chapter 1340 Chapter 530 Sect Heritage ?Chapter 1340: Chapter 530 Sect Heritage Chapter 1340: Chapter 530 Sect Heritage A hundred years later, Mi Yun Mountain. After a century of development, Mi Yun Mountain, now the headquarters of Taiping Dao¡¯s Mountain Gate, had already changed its appearance compared to a hundred years ago. Since becoming the ruler of the Southern Domain, Lu Yuan had the nations under Taiping Dao¡¯s control guarding their territories and continuously transporting the recently generated Earth Vein aura from each country to Mi Yun Mountain. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï In the Immortal Realm, underground there are countless rivers of Earth Veins, which continuously produce Earth aura. Earth aura can moisturize fertile soil, grow mountains, and even nurture certain treasures of Heaven and Earth. Some cultivators who practice special cultivation methods can also use Earth Veins for cultivation. Many formations are also based on various Earth Veins, utilizing their nearly inexhaustible Earth aura to link up and thus form a massive source of energy. For example, the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation previously set up by Taiping Dao uses the Earth Vein¡¯s Earth aura. Therefore, for many cultivators, the Earth Vein¡¯s aura is a very precious resource. Now, Lu Yuan had gathered all the Earth Veins together, pouring them all into Mi Yun Mountain, with the aim of strengthening the mountain¡¯s foundation, allowing this Mountain Gate of Taiping Dao to become even more magnificent and unshakable. Thus, over the course of a hundred years, Mi Yun Mountain had indeed become much more rugged, shooting up nearly a hundred zhang, a leap and bounds increase in height. Although the growth rate has slowed down nowadays, its width and mass are also slowly increasing. If this continues, in ten thousand years, it would be another towering Immortal Mountain, a distinguished Cave World within the Changqing Domain. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Meanwhile, Mi Yun Mountain¡¯s protective formation had also benefitted from the increase in the mountain¡¯s Earth Vein aura, becoming even more unfathomably powerful. For instance, the protective formations of the mountain gates of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s Purple Cloud Sect and Changqing Immortal Sect, two major Daoist sects, are both claimed to have the power to kill an Earth Immortal. Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s mountain protection formation is even said to be capable of blocking a Heavenly Immortal. As for these two Immortal Sects boasting thus, let¡¯s not discuss whether there¡¯s any truth to their claims. But what they rely on is the accumulation of new Earth aura from the Earth Veins in their respective regions, which they have been absorbing for tens of thousands of years. It is by relying on this constant replenishment and nourishment of Earth aura that the Earth Veins under their Mountain Gates are comparable to the Earth Veins of multiple countries, thus providing a sufficient foundation to set up such powerful formations. What Taiping Dao is currently doing is merely following in the footsteps of its predecessors, adopting a strategy to increase its foundation. And from this, one can see the gap between those ancient and profound Great Immortals and the ordinary Immortal Sects. It¡¯s not just a gap in occupied territory and top-level combat power. It is also a gap akin to the underlying depth of the Mountain Gate¡¯s Earth Veins. Without closing this implicit gap, even if you momentarily catch up in top-level combat power, in others¡¯ eyes, you would still be nothing more than a nouveau riche. What Taiping Dao needs to do now is erase the impression of being a nouveau riche in the eyes of others, slowly solidify its foundation, and secure its position as the overlord of the Southern Domain. And as it stands, Taiping Dao¡¯s efforts have been very successful. In addition to the Mountain Gate becoming more imposing, over the past century, Taiping Dao¡¯s disciples have gradually increased in number. Previously, Lu Yuan had established that Taiping Dao would take the elite route, accepting only disciples with exceptional innate talent. Therefore, over the years, even after several expansions and a manifold increase in numbers, aside from special circumstances like incorporating Qing Mountain Pavilion and cultivators from Xiaye Country. The disciples that were subsequently recruited went through multiple rounds of selection, and only the finest were admitted into the sect. All these disciples who entered had exceptional constitutional fitness and excellent comprehension. Among their peers, any of them could be called a little genius. With such talent, and the backing of the grand foundation of Taiping Dao in cultivation, with plentiful cultivation resources, suitable cultivation methods, and even True Immortals to give them guidance. Their cultivation speeds were like flying on a sword, rapidly ascending at an astonishing pace. In less than a hundred years, the first batch of disciples had already broken through the Gathering Three Qi phase. Some of the more outstanding ones had even broken through the Gathering Four Qi phase and began to strike towards the Five Qi Towards Primordial realm. Taiping Dao recruits a new group of disciples every ten years. The second and third batches of disciples, although they joined later, have many supremely talented disciples who have broken through the Gathering Three Qi phase. Just combining these three batches, the number of disciples who have broken through the Gathering Three Qi phase has already exceeded three hundred. These three hundred disciples, if dispatched, would be enough to set up a smaller sect in a minor country. Within Taiping Dao, apart from these disciples who had already achieved something, there were many more who had joined in the last few decades, totaling around eight hundred. In a few more decades, these newer disciples would also become the pillars of Taiping Dao, just like their senior brothers. As for their senior brothers, by the time they grow up, perhaps they would have already reached the Five Qi Towards Primordial state and begun their assault on the Immortal Realm. It could happen that in another two to three hundred years, a True Immortal would emerge among Taiping Dao¡¯s young disciples. All of the above are just the core disciples that Taiping Dao is focusing on cultivating. In the Immortal Sects like those in the neighboring Qingyang Country and scattered cultivators elsewhere, many talents have emerged in recent years as well. Initially, in order to counter the invasion of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Taiping Dao, due to a shortage of manpower, had no choice but to hold its nose and directly take in a large number of disciples from smaller Immortal Sects and scattered cultivators, to expand its forces. In this wave of expansion, a large number of cultivators with low qualifications, even those whose characters were not up to standard, and with cultivation levels of only Gathering one or two Qi, also became nominal disciples of Taiping Dao. Chapter 1341 - Chapter 1341 Chapter 530 Sect Heritage_2 ?Chapter 1341: Chapter 530 Sect Heritage_2 Chapter 1341: Chapter 530 Sect Heritage_2 After the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate chose to retreat, these cannon fodder, originally planned to be consumed in the war, managed to escape disaster and successfully survived. Lu Yuan was also helpless about this situation. Fortunately, sustaining some lower-level cultivators only consumed a small amount of Spiritual Energy and a large amount of mundane food, which wasn¡¯t a great pressure for the Taiping Dao, which controlled the entire Southern Domain. Moreover, most of the lower-tier disciples had poor innate talent, and in their lifetime, if they could reach Gathering Two Qi, they would have basically reached their limit. A cultivator at Gathering Two Qi could at most live for three hundred years. To the Taiping Dao, this period of time was merely a blink of an eye. As it turned out. Just a century had passed, and the initially gathered over twenty thousand lower-tier recorded disciples had already reduced by half. A large number of cultivators at Gathering One or Two Qi, unable to Breakthrough Realm and in despair, unwillingly succumbed to meditation and passed away. The burden on the Taiping Dao instantly halved. And the remaining half, without having made any breakthroughs in realm, were also getting along in years. Estimating that a little over a hundred years would clear out all the recorded disciples. By then, the Taiping Dao would also be able to rid itself of these burdens and return to the status of a normal Immortal Sect. Although a large number of lower-tier disciples were eliminated, among these people, quite a few heroes had emerged. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 Anyway, there were more than twenty thousand cultivators, and although most had low innate talent, there were always some with acceptable talent and remarkable comprehension. Some were extremely lucky, stumbling upon opportunities right after leaving home, obtaining relics left by predecessors, or finding Heaven and Earth Spirit Materials, truly transforming themselves and soaring to the skies. Under the number of twenty thousand, the probability of such types of disciples appearing was still quite high. Those who stood out from the bottom-tier recorded disciples, in this past century, including every possible category, the Taiping Dao had roughly gathered around four hundred people. These were all accepted as inner disciples by the Taiping Dao and could be considered to have finally made it through. The remaining ten thousand or so, although basically the leftovers, could potentially surge once more, possibly adding another hundred inner disciples. These were grassroots heroes who had fought their way out from the bottom-tier recorded disciples. As for those who already had a Cultivation of Gathering Three Qi or above, who were given the status of inner disciples and even true inheritance disciples upon joining, there was no need to mention them. After joining the broader platform of the Taiping Dao and gaining access to more abundant resources. These elite disciples had, more or less, improved one or two Cultivation realms within this century. The ones at Gathering Three Qi had upgraded to Gathering Four Qi or even Five Qi Towards Primordial. Those at Gathering Four Qi utilized the hundred years to accumulate depth, striving to refine their Divine Souls towards turning into Immortal Souls, a large number becoming Five Qi Towards Primordial. As for those who were already at Five Qi Towards Primordial, some had sat in meditation and passed away due to reaching the end of their Lifespan. But more of them were preparing to become immortal. Five Qi Towards Primordial cultivators, in order to become immortal and form the Dao Fruit, had to surmount three challenges. That is, their Magic Power had to reach the requirements of the Immortal Realm, their Divine Powers had to reach the requirements of the Immortal Realm, and their Enlightenment of the Great Tao had to reach the Immortal Realm requirements. Only by transforming one¡¯s Essence, Qi, and Spirit into that befitting an Immortal, could they form the Dao Fruit. Here, Essence represents Magic Power, Qi represents Divine Powers, and Spirit represents Enlightenment of the Great Tao. If a cultivator satisfies any one of these three, they can attempt becoming immortal. However, the success rate of cultivators who only meet one requirement for the Immortal Realm when attempting to become immortal, will be very low. They essentially have a one or two percent chance of forming the Dao Fruit. If they want to increase their chances, they can only take the route of balanced development. Meeting one criterion provides a ten to twenty percent chance of success; satisfying two criteria, there is over a fifty percent chance; satisfying all three, there is a ninety percent chance or more. However, for most cultivators, after they reach Five Qi Towards Primordial, they are generally around three hundred years old. With the Eight hundred years lifespan at Five Qi Towards Primordial, they only have about five hundred years left to accumulate and reach the Immortal Realm requirements for their Essence, Qi, and Spirit. And five hundred years, for most ordinary geniuses, is just about enough to reach the Immortal qualifications in one aspect of Essence, Qi, and Spirit. Of course, there are cultivators who manage to fulfill more than two criteria. For example, among the three requirements of Essence, Qi, and Spirit, the Qi aspect, which is Divine Powers, tends to be less challenging to develop into Immortal Realm ability. It¡¯s merely a Divine Power that can compete with that of an Immortal. Cultivators who strive to achieve Five Qi Towards Primordial, if they are willing to put in the hard work and study diligently, still have a very high success rate. ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï If all goes well, they might be able to cultivate a Divine Power of the Immortal Realm within a couple of hundred years. Then naturally, they would use most of the remaining time to tackle the other two aspects. However, Essence, which represents Magic Power, and Spirit, which represents Enlightenment of the Great Tao, are much more difficult to attain. One transforms your body into that of a True Immortal, while the other turns your Divine Soul into the soul of a True Immortal. Laying a full foundation for these two aspects requires an unimaginable amount of effort and resources. Without sufficient family background, most people simply cannot meet these conditions. If Lu Yuan were willing to sponsor a disciple and provide them with an enormous amount of resources, indeed, they could accomplish these things. But the problem is, with so many resources, why wouldn¡¯t he use them to refine a new Avatar for himself? Isn¡¯t that more attractive? Why should he help those ordinary disciples? So, apart from those true disciples who have all the hopes of a sect pinned on them, other ordinary true disciples generally don¡¯t receive such treatment. And in Taiping Dao, with the option of using Avatars, it¡¯s even less likely that such treatment would be available. Those true disciples who wish to become Immortals can only rely on themselves to fight and put in the effort. Apart from basic entitlements, Lu Yuan is not going to offer much help. However, human potential is immense. Even without much assistance from the sect, some disciples, who originally had considerable family resources or had accumulated quite a bit, such as former school leaders, clan leaders, and elders from Qing Mountain Pavilion and Wind Thunder Fortress, or some disciples who have traveled abroad and are incredibly fortunate, have, over the course of a hundred years, managed to fulfill the requirements for one aspect of Essence, Qi, and Spirit, reaching the basic criteria for Gathering Dao Fruit. Lu Yuan has granted seven such individuals the status of true disciple in total. These seven satisfied disciples are now striving hard to complete sect missions, accumulating contributions in order to exchange for an opportunity provided internally by the sect to Breakthrough into the Immortal Realm. Indeed, to motivate disciples and cultivate talent, Lu Yuan has long made available in the sect the chance to obtain a national fate, with provisions for a hundred years. Given a hundred years, disciples with great potential and talent can typically break through to become an Earth Immortal. Those who cannot achieve this breakthrough can only blame their own lack of destiny, not others. The requirement for obtaining this opportunity is to complete enough contributions and then use those contributions to submit an exchange request to the sect. Of course, Lu Yuan is not running a charity. Even though all his disciples are his own people, clear accounts need to be kept between brothers, and he will not be taken advantage of. For those Five Qi Towards Primordial disciples wanting to exchange for such an opportunity, they would generally need to serve the sect diligently for more than two hundred years before they could meet the requirements for exchange. Two hundred years to meet the minimum requirements for Qi Divine Powers, two hundred years of dedicated service, followed by a hundred years to breakthrough, so for those disciples, they must achieve Five Qi Towards Primordial by the age of three hundred at the latest in order to have a chance at a single shot at the Immortal Realm. This criterion itself has already weeded out many disciples. In the ranks of Five Qi Towards Primordial disciples, perhaps only two or three out of ten can meet these conditions. This is also a measure Lu Yuan has taken to prevent a future where there are too many disciples striving for Five Qi Towards Primordial, all coming to him to exchange for a chance at Immortality, and subsequently leading to an overuse of the national fate of small countries under his control, which would in turn affect his own Cultivation. He has set a restriction in advance. With this limitation in place, it can be roughly ensured that only one or two small countries are exchanged by those qualified disciples over a long period, while the majority of small countries remain under his control for the Cultivation of himself and his Avatars. If those disciples turn out to be disappointments, then all the more so can he enjoy all of the national fate to himself, Of course, that is not what Lu Yuan wants to see. After all, he also wishes to cultivate more successors to add more strength to his subordinates. Otherwise, he would not have opened up such a path to advancement. In terms of cultivating talent, he is serious. And the heritage of Taiping Dao¡¯s sect, along with the accumulation at the Mountain Gate and the growth of the disciples, is slowly being established. Chapter 1342 - Chapter 1342 Chapter 531 Changqing Goes to War ?Chapter 1342: Chapter 531 Changqing Goes to War Chapter 1342: Chapter 531 Changqing Goes to War For those seven disciples who had already met the conditions for becoming immortal, Lu Yuan left them to their own devices. He decided to let them earn their merits first. Grinding away for three hundred years, whether they could ascend in the end, all depended on Heavenly Mandate. If there were one person to overcome the tribulation and become an Immortal, then the sect would gain an Immortal for free. If not, it wouldn¡¯t make much of a difference. Because at this time, Taiping Dao no longer lacked True Immortals. Or more accurately, no longer lacked Immortals of the Human Immortal Realm. ¡­ Mi Yun Mountain, inside the council hall. That day, after a hundred years, the True Persons stationed around Mi Yun Mountain gathered once again within these walls. The surroundings of the great hall had been cleared of all non-essentials, and aside from the True Persons themselves, not a single disciple remained on the entire mountain peak. Lu Yuan sat atop the main seat, looking down at his Avatars and said, ¡°Recently, Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate have been engaging in frequent skirmishes in Central and Northern Domain. Many cultivators from both sects have perished or been injured, and the conflict is escalating to the point where it¡¯s becoming uncontrollable, evolving into the likelihood of a new war.¡± Given how things are looking, it might not be long before these two major sects trigger another grand war among the Immortal Sects.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï But this peace did not last long. Although Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had to halt its expansion due to the rise of Taiping Dao and temporarily lay low, Changqing Immortal Sect, on the other hand, started to become more active since they had Taiping Dao as an ally, which took a lot of pressure off them from Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, reducing their available manpower. Starting from fifty to sixty years ago, Changqing Immortal Sect would frequently initiate provocations against Jiuzhou Immortal Gate on the battlefields of Northern and Central Domain. From time to time, they would send capable disciples deep into enemy territory to carry out assassinations and sabotage. Even though these individuals were quickly caught by Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s Earth Immortal formation surveillance and swiftly dealt witha€¡±unable to cause any significant damage or impacta€¡± the persistent conflicts gradually intensified the atmosphere between the two sects. And thus, a prelude to war began to form within the entirety of Changqing Domain. As time went by, after fifty to sixty years of spreading, that anticipation of an impending war, the premonition of an oncoming storm, had become palpable to everyone. Especially in the last two years. The Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had even broken out in numerous battles involving over a hundred cultivators each. In the context of Immortal Sects, where it is common to have only five to six hundred disciples, this was equivalent to a small-scale war. Continuing with this trend, in two or three years, conflicts involving thousands or even ten thousand participants could potentially break out. Under such conditions, as the third dominant force that had risen in the Changqing Domain in recent years, Taiping Dao naturally could not remove themselves from this impending clash between the two sects and choose to remain neutral. In fact, the pressure from both Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had, both overtly and covertly, started to reach us in recent years, with the aim of forcing Taiping Dao to take a stance. This left Lu Yuan with no choice but to gather his many Avatars to discuss and outline a plan for response. After listening to what he, the original self, had to say, Qing Guanzi, an Avatar with the highest cultivation among them, also spoke up, ¡°These few days, Song Xiren has been continuously sending me communication talismans, evoking the old ties from the past Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, emphasizing the close relationship that Taiping Dao has developed with the Changqing Immortal Sect over the years.¡± He also somewhat hinted at matters regarding Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, mentioning the conflicts with the Changqing Immortal Sect alliance in recent years. Although he didn¡¯t state it explicitly, what he meant was clear; he wanted us to take a side. He expects Taiping Dao to fully cooperate with Changqing Immortal Sect in this conflict and join them in launching an attack on Jiuzhou Immortal Gate.¡± The relationship between Song Xiren and Qing Guanzi started from the time of the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony. One of them is the successor School Leader of Changqing Immortal Sect, and the other, the incumbent Elder Taishang of Taiping Dao, both being of Earth Immortal cultivation. In terms of identity, status, or strength, they were on relatively equal footing. Since Taiping Dao had settled down in Changqing Domain and Changqing Immortal Sect, as the current leader in the region, wanted to ensure internal stability and maintain good relations between the two sects, both individuals naturally needed to remain friendly. Therefore, over the past hundred years, the two had constantly exchanged letters, sharing life experiences and cultivation insights, forging a not-so-shallow relationship. Thus, when Changqing Immortal Sect was about to initiate a large-scale war, Song Xiren naturally used the regular correspondence to subtly present his request, hoping that Taiping Dao would support Changqing Immortal Sect. After Qing Guanzi finished, Yi Dancheng, sitting beside him, also said, ¡°Recently, He Yang, the School Leader of the Giant Spirit Sect from Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, has also been in frequent communication with me. He relates the grievances suffered at the hands of Changqing Immortal Sect on the battlefields of Northern and Central Domain.¡± Additionally, he stressed the analogy, ¡°If the lips are gone, the teeth will be cold,¡± pointing out that both Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate are at a disadvantage against Changqing Immortal Sect. For now, Changqing Immortal Sect chooses to yield to Taiping Dao to neutralize them, but once they are gone, Taiping Dao will be the next target for extermination. Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, too, hopes to form an alliance with us to counter the aggressive Changqing Immortal Sect.¡± Ever since Meng Jianshan, the previous School Leader of Purple Cloud Sect, set the tone for reconciling with Taiping Dao back then, a large-scale debate had taken place within Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï There were many for and against the war, but mainly, the latter held the majority. Chapter 1343 - Chapter 1343 Chapter 531 Changqing Goes to Battle_2 ?Chapter 1343: Chapter 531 Changqing Goes to Battle_2 Chapter 1343: Chapter 531 Changqing Goes to Battle_2 After decades of quarreling, they finally succumbed to the immense external pressure brought about by the alliance of Taiping Dao and the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect. Especially about fifty or sixty years ago, the Evergreen Immortal Sect, deviating from its defensive stance of thousands of years, began to actively invade the Western Domain, showing an intention to reignite a great war and take the opportunity to eliminate the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect. Facing a crisis of survival, inside the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, they eventually reached a consensus. That was to reconcile with Taiping Dao and improve their relationship, striving to convince them to join forces against the Evergreen Immortal Sect. There was no choice, the pressure the Evergreen Immortal Sect placed on the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect was too great. Before Taiping Dao came into the picture, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect could hold its own against the Evergreen Immortal Sect, and although there was a notable difference in strength, the gap was not substantial at the top tier of combat power, that is, among the Earth Immortal True Persons. One had three, the other had four. In a head-to-head battle, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect might not win, but relying on the Earth Immortal formation for defense, they were still unafraid of the Evergreen Immortal Sect. But everything changed after Taiping Dao arrived in the Southern Domain. In order to guard against the threat from Taiping Dao coming from the south, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect had no choice but to also build an Earth Immortal formation in the Southern Domain and station an Earth Immortal True Person there to counter Taiping Dao¡¯s pressure. Real Person Ding Wanxuan from Haiyun Pavilion is still in Qingyu Country! Thus, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect had one less Earth Immortal True Person available to them internally. While Real Person Huang Yuanxiu from the Heavenly River Sect did come to help, defending the rear of the Western Domain for the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, the relationship between his Heavenly River Sect and the surrounding Immortal Sects wasn¡¯t particularly good. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Huang Yuanxiu couldn¡¯t stay in the Western Domain for long, having to return to the Heavenly River Sect from time to time to deter the hostile forces surrounding his own sect. With such back and forth travel, it was inevitable that the defense between the Heavenly River Sect and the Western Domain would become flawed. Therefore, over the past hundred years, whether the Evergreen Immortal Sect was behind it or not, the Heavenly River Sect and a long-standing rival Grand Fairy Door in its vicinity began to fray, and conflicts arose between the two Immortal Sects. To ensure the safety of the Heavenly River Sect, Huang Yuanxiu had no choice but to leave the Western Domain and return to his sect to personally fend off the invasion from the hostile sect. With his departure, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect¡¯s last reserve force depleted as well. Thus, on the battlefield against the Evergreen Immortal Sect, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect could only ensure the basic requirement of having one Earth Flower True Man in the Earth Immortal formations at the front lines of the Western Domain and the Northern Domain. Ordinarily, an Earth Immortal formation defended by one Earth Immortal, supplemented by several Human Immortals, and assisted by thousands of ordinary disciples, would be sufficient to maintain stability in one direction. But that is based on the enemy knowing that you still have reinforcements that can be drawn from the rear, enabling stability. Now, with no reinforcements and no further strength to draw from the rear, everything has changed for the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect. One Earth Immortal, together with an Earth Immortal formation, under normal circumstances, would face an attack from two or three cultivators of the same level without falling at a disadvantage. Against such defense, there¡¯s virtually no chance of breach unless facing over three opponents of the same level constantly attacking day and night without giving the defender a moment to breathe. Fortunately for them, the Evergreen Immortal Sect just happened to have four Earth Immortals, in their engagements against the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect on two battlefields, and besides one battlefield that requires an Earth Immortal to hold back the enemy, they could just gather three Earth Immortals at the other battlefield for deployment in the war. Even beyond the three Earth Immortals, they could still add over twenty Human Immortals and tens of thousands of ordinary disciples as regular forces. This overwhelming advantage immediately fulfilled the requirement to breach an Earth Immortal formation defended by a single Earth Immortal. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 In fact, the Evergreen Immortal Sect had already met this requirement earlier. But back then, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect still had an Earth Immortal in reserve who could support either of the two front lines at any time. Furthermore, they even had the support of the Heavenly River Sect, who came to their aid. With these external distractions, it was naturally impossible for the Evergreen Immortal Sect to gather enough forces to break through the formations on the front lines. But now. The Jiuzhou Immortal Sect¡¯s reserve Earth Immortal was detained by Taiping Dao in the Southern Domain, unable to move. The Heavenly River Sect itself was embroiled in its own conflict, similarly unable to provide assistance. The two major emergency mechanisms of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates were completely neutralized. At this point, the Evergreen Immortal Sect could launch a massive invasion with a real chance of success. It was precisely because of this that, just after the crisis of Taiping Dao in Yue was resolved. The Jiuzhou Immortal Gates immediately started preparing and brewing their counter-offensive plan after returning. Now, after decades of preparation, they finally were ready for battle, hence Song Xiren reaching out to Qing Guanzi, hoping the latter would support their proposal for war against the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates. On the other side, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates, having sensed the emergence of war, proactively showed goodwill to Taiping Dao and proposed an alliance. These two powers were so eager because Taiping Dao held the key influence on the outcome of the upcoming great war. If Taiping Dao chose to help the Evergreen Immortal Sect, that goes without saying. Even if Taiping Dao did nothing and just continued to hold its ground in the Southern Domain, tying down Ding Wanxuan, the Earth Immortal, The Evergreen Immortal Sect could then choose one of the two battlefields in the Northern or Central Domain as a breakthrough point, concentrate the full strength of the sect, and forcibly breach the enemy¡¯s defenses to advance into the Western Domain. Once they broke through into the Western Domain, the Evergreen Immortal Sect could recover a large territory, rebuild their reputation, and once again assert control over the entire Changqing Domain. Of course, the direct annihilation of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates was unrealistic. After all, in other places, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates still had two Earth Immortal formations. Even if one formation was breached, the Earth Immortals within, along with other True Immortals, could retreat to the other two formations. For the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates, the worst outcome would be to retreat to one formation¡¯s range, where the three Earth Immortals, relying on that formation and the area of three small countries covered by it, could fend off the large-scale invasion of the Evergreen Immortal Sect. Although this would greatly weaken the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates and even render nearly ten thousand years of victories useless, it would still ensure their survival. However, at least six countries in the Western Domain would have to be ceded back to the Evergreen Immortal Sect. The above are the results if Taiping Dao supports the Evergreen Immortal Sect. But if it supports the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates, the outcome would be different. If Taiping Dao supported the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates, then Ding Wanxuan, who had been pinned in the Southern Domain, could directly extricate himself and become a top-tier reserve force once again. Even if the Evergreen Immortal Sect amassed sufficient strength and fiercely attacked a front, with Ding Wanxuan rushing over for reinforcements, they would still have no way to breach any formation. Their war preparations for decades would most likely, as in the past several thousand years, end in failure. At the same time, the threat Taiping Dao originally posed to the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates would, due to the shift in stance, turn into a threat to the Evergreen Immortal Sect. Therefore, in the Evergreen Immortal Sect¡¯s southern regions, the sect would have to leave behind an Earth Immortal or even build an Earth Immortal formation to fend off an invasion from Taiping Dao. With one fewer Earth Immortal, the Evergreen Immortal Sect may not even be able to gather enough force to breach an Earth Immortal formation. This so-called counter-attack plan would naturally be declared a failure. Therefore. In the current situation of the Changqing Domain, no matter which side Taiping Dao leans towards, it could tip the balance of victory, deciding the outcome of the battle. Given such an important role, the two powers of the Evergreen Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gates, of course, could not overlook it and naturally sought to woo Taiping Dao in every possible way. As a result, Taiping Dao faced a dilemma. That is, in this war, whom should they support? This was also the reason Lu Yuan summoned all his avatars together. He seized this opportunity to organize all his forces to cope with the rapidly changing situation. ¡°Everyone has heard the full story; both the Evergreen Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates want to draw us in and gain the support of Taiping Dao,¡± After the two avatars responsible for liaising with the Immortal Sects had spoken, Lu Yuan looked at the others and asked, ¡°So for this occasion, how should we respond, whom should we support?¡± Chapter 1344 - Chapter 1344 Chapter 532 A Compromise ?Chapter 1344: Chapter 532: A Compromise Chapter 1344: Chapter 532: A Compromise ¡°Of course we must help the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect!¡± As soon as Lu Yuan¡¯s words fell, among the avatars below, Che Shidao was the first to speak, ¡°Now the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect is weak, if we don¡¯t help them, they will inevitably be defeated by the Qing Immortal Sect, and even expelled in one fell swoop. If there is no Jiuzhou Immortal Sect to contain the Qing Immortal Sect, once it reunifies the Western Domain, and then holds the east, west, north, and middle lands in its hands, would it really tolerate us having supremacy in the south? How can someone sleep soundly on the side of the bed? Back when we were in the Nine Provinces, we could not tolerate those regional warlords. Now placed in the Immortal Realm, using ourselves as the measure, how can we hope that the Qing Immortal Sect would tolerate us? Not to mention, upon close examination, what kind of relationship do we even have with them? A mere hundred years, for Earth Immortals with a lifespan of tens of thousands of years, how deep can such a relationship be? Initially, our two factions came together merely to oppose the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect; that¡¯s the only reason we joined forces. Now, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect no longer poses a threat to us, and the declining effect that the Qing Immortal Sect has on us is almost gone. For them, we have shielded the threat from the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect in the south, serving as their shield from disasters, which is sufficient to repay the favor of their initial assistance. It has simply been a mutually beneficial correlation, gathered together for profit. Their current actions have threatened our survival, naturally, we need not comply with them; we should immediately stop them to prevent a major disaster. My Taiping Dao, compared to either the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect or the Qing Immortal Sect, is far too weak to contend with any of them. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? The reason we can establish ourselves in the Southern Domain is that the two Immortal Sects constrain each other, unable to deal with us with all their might. We have only one Earth Immortal, while the other two, each have more than four Earth Immortals? Once they free up their hands and send three or four Earth Immortals, even with the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation, we simply cannot withstand them. Then, we can only end up being swept out the door. In summary. The current tripartite situation is, for us, the best scenario. No matter who tries to disrupt it, we must retaliate. If the Qing Immortal Sect wants to annihilate the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, then we will stop them. Conversely, if the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect wants to eliminate the Qing Immortal Sect, likewise.¡± Che Shidao¡¯s position was explicit, that is, before Taiping Dao gathers enough strength, the current balance among the three must not be broken. The balance in the Southern Domain can be broken. Taiping Dao has expansion ambitions too. But all these are predicated on the assumption that Taiping Dao has sufficient strength to partake in this feast of dividing up the Changqing Domain and relishing its spoils. And not to become the feast, divided by others. As for when exactly we would qualify, naturally it¡¯s when Che Shidao and the lords of Yi Dancheng each become Earth Immortals, then we would be qualified. Even if we are not in a hurry, we could wait until the main body achieves the state of Earth Immortal. Then, Taiping Dao, with four Earth Immortals, would be equal in the top-tier strength of Earth Immortals to both the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect and the Qing Immortal Sect. At that point, we would truly have the standing to sit on equal terms with these two dominant forces. Taiping Dao could then ally with one side to eliminate the other, having enough strength to safeguard its conquests. We need not worry about being betrayed with the classic ¡®crossing the river and demolishing the bridge, using the death of a hare to cook the dog.¡¯ Without meeting this condition, even if the Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Sect offer great terms now, it¡¯s still just an empty promise, as elusive as flowers in the mirror and the moon in the water. All realizations are built on others¡¯ adherence to their word. Such charity, which others can retract at any time, simply cannot be relied upon. ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï ¡°Indeed, I also agree with supporting the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect.¡± At that moment below, a gold-robed Daoist also nodded in agreement. This man was Jin Qingyue, transformed from the Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade, Lu Yuan¡¯s fourth True Immortal avatar. The Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade, an item of Dao Fruit Immortal Artifact, originally had the basis of an Immortal Artifact. Previously, it encountered unsuitable handlers and poorly executed refining methods, which damaged much of its essence, hence it couldn¡¯t achieve the level of an immortal-grade item. Once in Lu Yuan¡¯s hands, reforged with the Nine Provinces¡¯ heritage of tool refinement methods, it was transformed into a Dao Fruit Immortal Artifact. Later, it was supplemented by the destiny of five nations in the Southern Domain. Eighty years ago, it had successfully replenished its essence and transcended the calamities to become an immortal. Thus, another True Immortal was added within Taiping Dao. The emergence of a True Immortal, Jin Qingyue, also caused many sects within the Changqing Domain to be uncertain. Because Jin Qingyue, who suddenly became an immortal, was not a recently inducted disciple of Taiping Dao but appeared abruptly, just like a True Immortal. Many speculated that this might be the foundation of Taiping Dao; this Immortal Sect from the Outer Territory might be secretly harboring a group of elite disciples as seeds. Possibly even several hidden True Immortals as a latent reserve. This speculation directly caused many Immortal Sects to pay even more attention to Taiping Dao. In the nearly hundred years, the smooth development of Taiping Dao, with no one daring to wreak havoc in the Southern Domain, can also be attributed to the prestige brought about by the sudden immortal transformation of Jin Qingyue. And Jiuzhou Immortal Sect and Qing Immortal Sect now so actively courting Taiping Dao is also influenced by these factors. However, Lu Yuan did not respond to any external speculations; Taiping Dao only developed quietly, emphasizing stability. Even Jin Qingyue, who had just become an immortal, was sent to Xiaye Country after his transformation, there assisting Che Shidao in guarding the eastern part of the Southern Domain. Chapter 1345 - Chapter 1345 Chapter 532 A Compromise_2 ?Chapter 1345: Chapter 532: A Compromise_2 Chapter 1345: Chapter 532: A Compromise_2 This watch lasted for eighty years, until now when he finally returned to the Mountain Gate with the Che Shidao. It could be said that in the eyes of the outsiders, Jin Qingyue was also a very mysterious Immortal. ¡°I also agree to support the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate.¡± After both Avatars had expressed their positions, Yi Dancheng, who had always been responsible for communicating with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, also spoke up, ¡°Based on my understanding of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate at present, if we truly don¡¯t help them, they are very likely to not be able to hold on. The best outcome is that they would be greatly defeated by the Qing Immortal Sect and then retreat to a corner of the Western Domain, severely weakened in vitality. And without the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate to stand in their way, the next target of the Qing Immortal Sect would probably be to turn their guns around and go after us, the Taiping Dao. So, even for our own sake, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate must be saved.¡± As the Taiping Dao¡¯s leading general responsible for western affairs, Yi Dancheng had no small amount of dealings with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate over the past hundred years. He even sent out quite a few spies to deeply infiltrate the Western Domain and probe the details of the other side. After a hundred years of in-depth study, he could be said to have a profound understanding of the affairs of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. But precisely because he understood too deeply, he knew the true strength of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, and that they currently lacked the strength to resist the Qing Immortal Sect. And if the weakened Taiping Dao wanted to continue to exist in the Changqing Domain, what they needed to do was to support the weak against the strong. A hundred years ago, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was dominant, so the Taiping Dao allied with the Qing Immortal Sect to confront them together. Now, it¡¯s the Qing Immortal Sect that is dominant, so it would only make sense to promptly turn the tide and choose another camp to confront the Qing Immortal Sect. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï The only potential issue was that doing so was somewhat unethical. After all, a hundred years ago, it was the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s vigorous support that allowed the Taiping Dao to stabilize its foothold in the Southern Domain so smoothly. Now, just after a hundred years, you immediately turn your back on them, which is somewhat hard to justify. However, when it comes to interests, the likes of face don¡¯t warrant mention. At present, concerning the fundamental interests of the Taiping Dao, how could the mutual benefits established by use of each other serve as a leash restricting the Taiping Dao¡¯s actions? Keeping the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate in existence is essential for the Taiping Dao¡¯s survival; without the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, the Taiping Dao would also find it hard to exist. That is a principle that any discerning person can see. If you, the Qing Immortal Sect, dare to attack the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, disregarding the taboo of the Taiping Dao, clearly not considering the interests of the Taiping Dao, then why should I continue to care about your face? Should I really, for the sake of empty gestures, watch you grow in strength and then turn back to devour me in the future? Yi Dancheng was not that foolish. ¡°Yi Dancheng makes sense, for our own sake, we really should save the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate.¡± After listening to several Avatars¡¯ narratives, Lu Yuan nodded in agreement and then turned to another Avatar who had yet to speak, asking, ¡°Qing Guanzi, what do you think?¡± Qing Guanzi had always been responsible for dealings with the Qing Immortal Sect, and now that they needed to make a diplomatic stance toward the Qing Immortal Sect, his opinion was naturally indispensable. The latter didn¡¯t immediately answer upon hearing the inquiry but pondered for a long while before slowly saying. ¡°The Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, of course, should be helped.¡± Like the many other Avatars, Qing Guanzi was also inclined towards the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, so he emphasized this point first. But soon, he changed his tone, ¡°However, although we should help the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, it doesn¡¯t mean that we have to completely fall out with the Qing Immortal Sect and become enemies with them. There are still many methods to find a middle way, that can both help the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and maintain a semblance of peace with the Qing Immortal Sect.¡± Qing Guanzi suggested another path, a compromise solution. ¡°Compromise¡­¡± Upon hearing this proposal, Lu Yuan was slightly startled, but as the main body, he quickly grasped the meaning behind his Avatar¡¯s words, saying, ¡°You mean, to alleviate the pressure of the Taiping Dao on the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate in the southwestern part of the Southern Domain. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Then, with the threat lifted, allow Ding Wanxuan, who is stationed there, to leave and rush to support the other two battlefields of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, right?¡± The current crisis faced by the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was to a large extent because the rise of the Taiping Dao had tied down a lot of their focus. Especially the containment of an Earth Immortal True Person, Ding Wanxuan, which kept him stuck in the Southern Domain, rendered immobile. If the Taiping Dao, on its own initiative, were to lift its threats against the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and show goodwill, then the signaled Jiuzhou Immortal Gate could naturally reassign Ding Wanxuan and use him to reinforce other battlefields. With new backup forces in place, the current crushing posture that the Qing Immortal Sect had formed on a certain battlefield against the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate would naturally be rebalanced due to the arrival of new forces. With the power balance restored, the Qing Immortal Sect would naturally be unable to breach the defense lines of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and pose no threat. In doing all this, the Taiping Dao could avoid taking a stance and avoid conflict, thus resolving the imbalance of power brought about by its own entry into the fray. Only by doing so, although not openly falling out, the Taiping Dao¡¯s honeymoon period with the Qing Immortal Sect would effectively be over. From then on, the two would become strangers, and even more drastically, future armed confrontations might become a possibility. But by that time, for the Taiping Dao, it would be merely a return to the situation of a hundred years ago, pulling the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate along to confront the Qing Immortal Sect again. As long as it isn¡¯t oneself who first breaks the peace, and it isn¡¯t the Taiping Dao whose reputation suffers, then the impact is not significant. Chapter 1346 - Chapter 1346 Chapter 532 A Compromise_3 ?Chapter 1346: Chapter 532: A Compromise_3 Chapter 1346: Chapter 532: A Compromise_3 This tactic of seizing advantageous conditions and pitting one party against another was already overused by Lu Yuan back in his days in the Nine Provinces. Back then, after forging an alliance with Yue to attack Zhou, the two soon turned against each other. After a joint campaign with the lords of Pre-Yue against the southwestern barbarians, it took less than two years for them to turn their weapons against each other. All these experiences were no different from the present situation. Old tactics. ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right, it¡¯s about reconciling with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and then showing goodwill by withdrawing the heavy troops at the border,¡± he said. Qing Guanzi nodded affirmatively, elaborating on his thought, ¡°The crisis of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate stems from a lack of reserve forces. We just need to allow them to regain new reserve forces, then their current crisis will naturally be resolved without us having to lift a finger. And if their crisis resolves on its own, then the schemes of the Qing Immortal Sect will naturally fall apart. There¡¯s no need for us to be the villains in this situation. This way, we can save face for both parties without giving outsiders the impression that our Taiping Dao is ungrateful and repays kindness with enmity. It also preserves the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, preventing the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s schemes from succeeding. Isn¡¯t this a perfect solution?¡± Qing Guanzi¡¯s proposal was like a stroke of genius, resolving all the difficulties that the Taiping Dao faced at the moment. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan laughed heartily and clapped his hands, ¡°What a perfect solution. Indeed, why should we be the villains? Let them fight it out themselves; they will settle these matters on their own. All we have to do is ensure that neither side can defeat the other.¡± Then he stood up and paced back and forth in the hall. After a few laps, he stopped and continued, ¡°So, isn¡¯t the Qing Immortal Sect currently preparing for a great war and short on manpower? They even came to ask Taiping Dao for help. Alright, I¡¯ll accommodate them. You, Yi Dancheng, as the School Leader, order Jin Qingyue to go to the Great Eye Kingdom and take over its defense. Justify it by saying that Master Yang from the Qing Immortal Sect, who has been staying in my Southern Domain for a century, is weary from defending the Great Eye Kingdom and that Jin Qingyue should replace him. With an additional True Immortal, the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s campaign in the Western Domain should have a better chance of success.¡± Before the war begins, first drive out the people from the Qing Immortal Sect from the Southern Domain. This undoubtedly demonstrates the position of the Taiping Dao. But it¡¯s still done under the guise of a shift rotation, even helping the Qing Immortal Sect in the war with more manpower, so no one can criticize it. It also leaves the Qing Immortal Sect no grounds to object or refuse. After all, you asked for people, and I¡¯ve given you people, just that I¡¯m returning those you lent to me. As for the people of the Taiping Dao? I¡¯m sorry, but the Taiping Dao has too lean a foundation; the true masters I have can hardly cover the territories I own. It¡¯s already tough enough to fend for ourselves, let alone spare more True Masters to fight your war. That¡¯s the reality. Surely the Taiping Dao can¡¯t be expected to fight to the death and bleed for your cause? There¡¯s no such logic. If the Qing Immortal Sect dares to ask, then the Taiping Dao can quite simply turn its face against them, making things even easier and more convenient.¡± Having made this first arrangement, which essentially declared its stance to the outside world, Lu Yuan continued with the planning, ¡°Next, Qing Guanzi, you too, under the pretense of reassigning Jin Qingyue, announce a tour to the eastern part of the Southern Domain to inspect the affairs of Xiaye, Jiuchuan, and even Yichuan of the Yin World. Stay on that side until the conflict between the Qing Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate has ended. Wait there till the war is over.¡± For the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, the real threat from the Taiping Dao was actually just Qing Guanzi. Now that Lu Yuan was proactively transferring Qing Guanzi away to the east, he was also sending a signal to the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate indicating that the Taiping Dao wouldn¡¯t employ this Earth Immortal. Even though for an Earth Immortal, the distance to Xiaye or Jiuchuan isn¡¯t far, But Qing Guanzi¡¯s move from west to east, shifting from being close to the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate to near the core territories of the Qing Immortal Sect, is not just about changing the distance. It¡¯s a shift in the direction from which he poses a threat to the powers of the two immortal sects. He doesn¡¯t even have to take action; having an Earth Immortal there is a deterrent that can¡¯t be ignored. Now if the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate is afraid of Qing Guanzi¡¯s deterrence, wouldn¡¯t the Qing Immortal Sect be scared as well? So, the Taiping Dao doesn¡¯t have to make a move. Simply shifting the position of their Earth Immortal is already a help to the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. At the same time, the Taiping Dao has only moved a position. Qing Guanzi, under the guise of patrolling, heads to Xiaye and other places, moving within his own domain. You surely can¡¯t stop someone from moving within his own home, can you? There¡¯s no such logic. This is also a way of not openly breaking with the Qing Immortal Sect while showing support for the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate.¡± ¡°Lastly, it¡¯s your turn, Yi Dancheng,¡± Lu Yuan looked at this avatar, declaring, ¡°As the leader of the Taiping Dao, what kind of situation is it that you¡¯ve been out and not coming back? ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï You¡¯ve been in Qingyang Country for a century, and after setting up that branch, it¡¯s time for you to retire with your achievements and return to the sect to enjoy your peace. So, hand over the affairs of Qingyang Country. Then directly order Ouyang Yuan from Jintai Gate to go to Qingyang Country to take over the defense, replacing your position. And leave the command of the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation to Jin Qingyue. The district encompassing the three nations will all be managed by you, taking over the original tasks of Yi Dancheng.¡± Weakening the manpower of the Taiping Dao in the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation is the third step to reduce the threat to the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate.¡± I¡¯ve called back the School Leader and am retaining only one True Master inside the formation. Having done this much, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate should believe that the Taiping Dao has no ill intentions toward you, right? If they still don¡¯t trust us enough to reallocate Ding Wanxuan, then it can only be said that the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate deserves to be destroyed. The Taiping Dao can¡¯t save them anymore. Worst comes to worst, Lu Yuan can just run away too; it¡¯s just a matter of starting over, and he can afford the loss. ¡°That¡¯s the plan; you should understand now,¡± Having made all the arrangements, he looked toward his avatars, asking, ¡°Any objections?¡± ¡°None, we follow your command.¡± The avatars, in unison, responded. Then, each avatar, following the original¡¯s plan, scattered from the Mountain and went to their assigned domains. They also carried with them the various decrees of the Taiping Dao and the subtle attitudes conveyed to the outside world. In this internal turmoil, the Taiping Dao made its choice. Chapter 1347 - Chapter 1347 Chapter 533 The Immortal is Old ?Chapter 1347: Chapter 533: The Immortal is Old Chapter 1347: Chapter 533: The Immortal is Old Great Eye Kingdom. However, the usually low-key Jin Qingyue, upon arriving in this kingdom with the appointment of the Taiping Dao¡¯s Sect Leader and meeting the incumbent, Yang Jihua, after hearing the purpose of Jin Qingyue¡¯s visit, couldn¡¯t help but say, ¡°Do you intend to replace me?¡± Jin Qingyue solemnly said, ¡°Not to replace, but to succeed. Your sect has recently been fighting more fiercely with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Your Sect Leader Master Song has recently sent multiple letters to our Elder Taishang, speaking of the urgent situation at the front line and the lack of manpower. Thus, after consulting with our Sect Leader, Elder Taishang decided to assign me to the Great Eye Kingdom to take over your duty of guarding. This way, you can remove yourself and return to your sect to participate in the frontline battles.¡± At this point, Jin Qingyue, with a hint of embarrassment on his face, said, ¡°Originally, given the friendship between our sect and yours, when your sect is at war with another, especially against the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, our sect would have definitely provided assistance regardless. Alas, our sect is currently short of manpower, including myself, we only have four True Immortals. With such manpower, even merely guarding the Southern Domain feels barely sufficient. As much as we want to help, we truly are unable. Now, I can only rush here from the rear to assume your duty so that you, a True Person of noble status in your sect, can return to the sect without being tied down here. I hope you can understand the modest capabilities of our sect,¡± Jin Qingyue said. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï Jin Qingyue recounted some phrases entrusted by Lu Yuan, now using all of them as pretexts. The emotions and expression of embarrassment in these words would make anyone feel touched upon hearing them. Taiping Dao and the Changqing Immortal Sect indeed are close allies, inseparable friends. However, upon hearing all this, Yang Jihua only felt as if he had swallowed a fly, utterly nauseated. As a True Immortal who had lived for over a thousand years, how could he not understand the implications in the other¡¯s words? That is, Taiping Dao doesn¡¯t want to get involved in this war. It¡¯s not just about not wanting to get involved; there is also an undertone of dissent, not wanting to see Changqing Immortal Sect attacking Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Otherwise, Jin Qingyue wouldn¡¯t have come here. Taiping Dao sounds nice, claiming to free up more manpower for Changqing Immortal Sect by sending someone to take over my position, allowing me to return to the sect and contribute. But don¡¯t you see, does my Changqing Immortal Sect lack just one True Immortal? According to Yang Jihua¡¯s knowledge, just in this battle alone, more than twenty Human Immortals from within the sect were mobilized. And all four Earth Immortal True Persons were also deployed. Additionally, over twenty thousand disciples capable of Gathering Three Qi would also become part of the grand army participating in this war. In a war of this scale, having one more or one less Human Immortal doesn¡¯t make much difference. It might not even affect the outcome of a single local battlefield. In such a situation, what significant role could Yang Jihua play if he returned to the Mountain Gate? Instead, his presence in the Southern Domain could still serve as a symbol of the close relations and strategic alliance between Taiping Dao and Changqing Immortal Sect. ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Showcasing to outsiders that the two families remain as close as one, united against others. But now Taiping Dao wants him to leave. Feigning concern for the allies¡¯ difficulties is false; what is true is their rush to sever ties with Changqing Immortal Sect, planning to withdraw and betray. Although Taiping Dao hasn¡¯t outright betrayed, such behavior is undoubtedly akin to betrayal. It just spares a bit of face for both parties, making it a little less embarrassing. As the betrayed party, even after having overseen the Great Eye Kingdom for a hundred years, Yang Jihua felt like all his efforts were as good as feeding a dog. The feelings of anger and disgust need no further explanation. However, as the envoy of Changqing Immortal Sect sent openly to Taiping Dao, despite extreme outrage and dissatisfaction, he couldn¡¯t just vent impulsively. Since Taiping Dao hasn¡¯t outright torn their faces off, but instead chose to keep some leeway, it is clear they also don¡¯t want to clash openly with Changqing Immortal Sect and still wish to maintain peace. This was crucial for Changqing Immortal Sect, who were about to engage Jiuzhou Immortal Gate in a massive battle. For Taiping Dao to choose to stand by idly in this battle was certainly infuriating. But the fact that they didn¡¯t directly side with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was a blessing in disguise. Otherwise, if Taiping Dao were to resist alongside Jiuzhou Immortal Gate against Changqing Immortal Sect, they wouldn¡¯t even need to fight this battle. Just like the past several thousand years, they would just keep to their territories, being nothing more than withdrawn turtles. However, with Taiping Dao remaining neutral, Changqing Immortal Sect still had a slim chance of victory. Therefore, Yang Jihua suppressed his rage, barely managing a smile, and said, ¡°So that¡¯s how it is; I really ought to thank your sect for its considerate understanding. I am aware of your sect¡¯s difficulties; not being able to spare manpower to join this battle is understandable. Now that I can extricate myself, it is already a joyous occasion. Since you are to assume the duty of guarding the Great Eye Kingdom, I shall hand it over to you, allowing you to take over as soon as possible¡­¡± Out of consideration for the bigger picture, Yang Jihua had to grit his teeth and swallow his anger. But he didn¡¯t want to suffer further; he just wanted to complete the handover quickly and then immediately return to his sect to inform the School Leaders about this change in the Southern Domain. Taiping Dao¡¯s sudden change of attitude, even showing signs of betraying the alliance, was indeed major news for Changqing Immortal Sect. Without prompt response, they feared they would suffer greatly later. ¡°Then I¡¯ll trouble you to do so,¡± Jin Qingyue, seeing the other¡¯s attitude and understanding Yang Jihua¡¯s thoughts, didn¡¯t bother him further and immediately nodded in coordination. This matter, after all, was handled unscrupulously by Taiping Dao; it was better to get him out sooner to avoid further awkwardness between them. Chapter 1348 - Chapter 1348 Chapter 533 The Immortal is Old_2 ?Chapter 1348: Chapter 533: The Immortal is Old_2 Chapter 1348: Chapter 533: The Immortal is Old_2 Although it was just an avatar, his skin wasn¡¯t naturally that thick. Thus, with mutual coordination, Yang Jihua only took a moment to hand over all the affairs of the Great Eye Kingdom. Then he directly tendered his resignation, ¡°I¡¯ve entrusted everything to you, my fellow daoist. I am concerned about the sect, and will not stay any longer, farewell.¡± Having said that, he didn¡¯t wait for a response, directly transformed into a stream of light, and headed north. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Leaving Jin Qingyue in stunned, bitter laughter. On his way back, Yang Jihua also sighed in his heart. ¡®Alas, this attack on the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, many in the sect did not agree. Several Great Uncles even believed that as the master of Southern Domain, Taiping Dao, despite being our ally, definitely wouldn¡¯t agree with our sect¡¯s plan to unify the Changqing Domain. It is in the best interest of Taiping Dao to keep our sect and the remnants of Nine Spirits in constant conflict, allowing it to benefit from both sides uninvolved. Once this balance is disrupted, regardless of who the victor is, Taiping Dao will not be able to survive alone. Given this, forcibly pushing this agenda, Taiping Dao is very likely to waver. Their sending someone to drive me away today, with such a clear intention to distance themselves, makes it very obvious. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï The predictions of a few Great Uncles have already come true. Unfortunately, the Sect Leader would not heed the advice and insisted on launching the large-scale war, ultimately leading to today¡¯s outcome. Taiping Dao has become inconsistent, changes have occurred in Southern Domain, the outcome of this war is bleaka€|¡¯ While Yang Jihua spoke, he couldn¡¯t help but sigh in his heart. Regarding the betrayal of Taiping Dao, they were not fools; the Changqing Immortal Sect had anticipated this the moment they initiated the war. Thus, at that time, many high-level members of the sect were opposed. They believed the time wasn¡¯t right. Yet, their Sect Leader, one of the two highest cultivation individuals in the Changqing Domain, Yao Baojuan, the Changqing Immortal, together with Meng Jianshan of Purple Cloud Sect, were adamant about proceeding with this matter. As the Sect Leader, and the one with the strongest cultivation in the sect, his strength and moral authority were sufficient to override the many opposing voices and forcefully push the war forward. This ultimately led to the war which, although unfavorably viewed by all, still commenced. And Yao Baojuan, the reason he went against the trend and forcefully pushed this matter, was very simple. He couldn¡¯t wait any longer. As the third Sect Leader of Changqing Immortal Sect after the Great True Person passed away, Yao Baojuan had taken over the leadership from his Master, and it has been roughly seven thousand years since then. When his Master was in charge, although the Changqing Immortal Sect lacked a Great True Person, it was still the overlord of Changqing, with the entire realm firmly under the sect¡¯s control. Although the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate often rebelled, it usually involved one or two countries and was swiftly defeated by the responsive Changqing Immortal Sect, driving them out within a few months. The realm was still stable, and the Changqing Immortal Sect was still thriving, unmatched in its prestige. But once the position of Sect Leader was passed to Yao Baojuan, everything changed. First, the frequency and scale of rebellions by the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate began to increase continuously. Then, the various affiliated Immortal Sects, especially those in Western Domain, were one by one eliminated by the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate during rebellions. All the Immortal Sects throughout the Changqing Domain suddenly became jittery and frightened. The rule of the Changqing Immortal Sect over the realm suddenly became unstable. This chaotic era lasted two thousand years, then quickly worsened. Five thousand years ago, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate even openly occupied small countries within the realm and bravely challenged the Changqing Immortal Sect. Regrettably, facing this situation, when the Changqing Immortal Sect sent people to quell the rebellion, they could not overcome their adversaries. The reason was simple: amid the realm¡¯s chaos, with all the affiliated Immortal Sects jittery, those affiliated Immortal Sects, fearful of being the next to be eliminated, simply dared not hand over their True Immortal disciples to the Changqing Immortal Sect for participation in the war they convened. Unable to mobilize its vassal forces, the manpower Changqing Immortal Sect could utilize was instantly reduced by half. This also led the numerous vassal forces, having not been mobilized, to become a potential threat. The Changqing Immortal Sect couldn¡¯t just ignore these vassals lurking in the background and remain indifferent. It had to leave some forces behind to watch over these vassals to ensure they dared not make any moves. In this back and forth, the forces Changqing Immortal Sect could muster were significantly reduced. With the small handful of forces left, facing the prepared Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, they naturally struggled to manage. After several battles where both sides suffered heavy casualties, the Changqing Immortal Sect returned slightly defeated, while the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate took advantage of the victory, swept across Western Domain, occupied several countries there, and built a massive Formation. Then, relying on this Formation as a basis, they firmly established their foothold in Western Domain. And the subsequent developments need not be elaborated further. When the Changqing Immortal Sect reacted and counterattacked, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, fully prepared, thwarted their offensives several times. Later, as support from various factions arrived, with the backing of the other four veins, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate began to turn the situation around and launched a counter-offensive. Eventually, after several decisive battles and a devastating war three thousand years ago, the current structure of the Changqing Domain was established. This also marked the beginning of the great decline of the Changqing Immortal Sect. From the above, it¡¯s not difficult to see that from the time Yao Baojuan assumed the position of Sect Leader, the once immensely prosperous Changqing Immortal Sect was rapidly on the decline, step by step in his hands. Yao Baojuan watched helplessly as the foundation handed over by his Master was squandered step by step by his own hands. Chapter 1349 - Chapter 1349 Chapter 533 The Immortal is Old - Part 3 ?Chapter 1349: Chapter 533: The Immortal is Old ¨C Part 3 Chapter 1349: Chapter 533: The Immortal is Old ¨C Part 3 And through this process, as the Sect Leader of Changqing Immortal Sect, the pain and self-reproach in his heart need not be mentioned. To face one¡¯s ancestors with no dignity after death, that was speaking of him indeed. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Of course, his Master and the Great True Person who founded their sect had both died without leaving behind any souls, so he needn¡¯t worry about really meeting his Master and ancestors after death and being scolded by them. But just because no one blamed him didn¡¯t mean he didn¡¯t blame himself. It also didn¡¯t mean that he didn¡¯t want to rejuvenate the foundation of the sect that he himself had led to ruin within his remaining years. Facing the aggressive stance of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, the declining Changqing Immortal Sect could only retreat step by step. To have preserved the existing foundation at that time was fortunate enough; Yao Baojuan dared not dream of rejuvenation. But the emergence of Taiping Dao and the breaking of the existing pattern gave him a sliver of hope. A sliver of hope to take advantage of the situation, annihilate the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, reclaim the Western Domain, and once again revitalize the sect. And this hope, as his lifespan gradually approached its end and his time become increasingly limited, turned into an obsession he could not let go of. Yao Baojuan had been the Sect Leader for seven thousand years, and he was already two thousand years old when he achieved the rank of a Late-stage Earth Immortal. Having become an Earth Flower at two thousand years old, he spent several hundred years tempering himself before taking over his Master¡¯s position and becoming the Sect Leader of Changqing Immortal Sect. So now, Yao Baojuan was over nine thousand years old. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 Given the maximum lifespan of ten thousand years for an Earth Immortal, he had only about two to three hundred years left to live. It was precisely because he felt his life would not last much longer, and he would soon meet his Master. Therefore, Yao Baojuan wanted to do more for the sect at the end of his life and take away the calamity he had fostered before he died. In this way, he could barely fulfill his Master¡¯s trust and the sect¡¯s expectations. Otherwise, after his death, the next generation¡¯s Song Xiren would still not have grown up, and without a Late-stage Earth Immortal, the Changqing Immortal Sect would be even more suppressed by the Purple Cloud Sect¡¯s Meng Jianshan. Afterward, there may no longer be any hope for the sect¡¯s revival. The current situation, with Taiping Dao entering the fray, is a rare opportunity that comes once in ten thousand years. If he did not take this chance to eliminate their great enemy and resolve the hidden dangers for the sect, Yao Baojuan would truly be discontent. To die with such regret would be to die with eyes wide open. Inside the Changqing Immortal Sect, all the True Persons also knew about their Sect Leader¡¯s obsessions and unwillingness to give up, and although each of them opposed it, they could not bear to stop him. How could they let the Sect Leader, who had served for seven thousand years, die with such profound regret? And, to be honest. Didn¡¯t any of the many Changqing Immortal Sect disciples harbor a desire to rejuvenate the sect and restore its dominance in their territory? Many knew that for the present Changqing Immortal Sect, this was truly the last chance for revival. If they missed this opportunity, the chance for Changqing Immortal Sect to rise again would become almost impossible. And their own sect might, within the next ten thousand years, disappear in the river of history like those past regional overlords and have its Dao inheritance wiped out. Rather than disappearing silently in utter despair, It would be better to fight to the death while there was still hope and light to be seen. What if they won the gamble? This thought, though wishful, indeed appeared in the hearts of many True Persons of Changqing Immortal Sect. So, in the face of their Sect Leader¡¯s resolute attitude, they chose to tacitly agree, opposing yet cooperating. This contradictory state of mind was also difficult. Therefore, amidst the conflicting feelings within Changqing Immortal Sect, the great battle in the Western Domain, after decades of preparation, had arrived at the time to fully ignite the fireworks of war. And the backlash from Taiping Dao arrived as quickly as everyone had anticipated. ¡°Sigh, I hope the Sect Leader hasn¡¯t made a mistake this time, May the protection of Changqing Immortal bless us, may our Changqing Immortal Sect emerge victorious, reclaim the Western Domain, and revitalize the foundation of our sect. Even¡­ even if it doesn¡¯t succeed, may we still be blessed to continue our Dao inheritance and keep the incense of the Immortal Venerate burning.¡± Having flown for nearly an hour, Yang Jihua¡¯s thoughts were tumbling, and he couldn¡¯t settle down. In the end, he could only pray silently to the already perished Changqing Immortal Venerate in his heart. It was said that after a Great True Person perishes, they do not immediately die. Their Heavenly Immortal Daoist Fruit, merging with the heavens, is indestructible as long as the heavens remain, thus said to be immortal. So many Great True Persons, even in death, are believed to watch over everything on earth from the heavens. Whether the rumors were true or not, if it was widely circulated in the Immortal Realm, there must be some truth to it. With no help available, Yang Jihua could only turn to his ancestors for help, seeking the blessing of a departed sect Great True Person. After finishing his prayers. Approaching the imposing Changqing Mountain, he suppressed the sigh in his heart, revitalized his spirit, and flew straight in. ¡­ Just as Yang Jihua left the Southern Domain and returned to Changqing Mountain, In the Southern Domain, in Qingyu Country, Ding Wanxuan of Haiyun Pavilion, who was stationed there, also received this news. ¡°Yang Jihua has left, and was personally sent away by Taiping Dao¡­¡± Ding Wanxuan, looking at He Yang who had hurriedly arrived to report the matter, frowned, ¡°What is Taiping Dao¡¯s purpose in doing this?¡± He Yang said, ¡°According to my communication with Yi, the School Leader of Taiping Dao, they do not wish to get involved in this conflict, nor do they want to see our Jiuzhou Immortal Gate suffer a major defeat that would allow Changqing Immortal Sect to dominate alone. This would be disadvantageous for Taiping Dao. However, they also don¡¯t want to openly break with Changqing Immortal Sect due to past relations and the sect¡¯s strength. So they sent away Yang Jihua and transferred the School Leader of Yi, as well as the Taiping Dao Elder Taishang, who took the opportunity to leave Mi Yun Mountain and head to Xiaye and Jiuchuan, two countries. This action is meant to show peace towards Jiuzhou and to lessen the pressure on us in Qingyu Country, allowing Master Ding the freedom to leave and to support the two battlefields.¡± He Yang relayed exactly what had been discussed during his communication with Yi Dancheng. Chapter 1350 - Chapter 1350 Chapter 534 Nine Provinces Prepare for War ?Chapter 1350: Chapter 534 Nine Provinces Prepare for War Chapter 1350: Chapter 534 Nine Provinces Prepare for War ¡°Don¡¯t want to get involved?¡± Upon hearing He Yang¡¯s explanation, Ding Wanxuan let out a sneer and said coldly, ¡°He isn¡¯t disinterested in joining the battle, but rather hopes to watch Jiuzhou and the Qing Immortal Sect fight to the death. Ideally, they¡¯d weaken each other, and then he can swoop in for the fisherman¡¯s benefit.¡± Inside Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, the relationship with Taiping Dao had already been easing for dozens of years. But this doesn¡¯t mean that the contradictions between the two powers have disappeared. Nor does it mean that there are none within Jiuzhou Immortal Sect who are dissatisfied with Taiping Dao. The current reconciliation, in the eyes of the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect members, is more like a temporary alliance under the city walls. Once they have annihilated the Qing Immortal Sect, the humiliation they have suffered today will sooner or later be avenged. This stream of thought is widely popular inside Jiuzhou Immortal Sect and is really no secret at all. Taiping Dao, for its part, is also somewhat aware of this. It¡¯s just that Jiuzhou Immortal Sect needs the stability in the south, and Taiping Dao also requires safety in the west, with both sides having a need for a secure border. So even though they can¡¯t stand each other, both parties always play nice just to maintain an appearance of peace. At He Yang¡¯s side, he nodded and said, ¡°True Person is right, Taiping Dao indeed intends to sit back and watch the tigers fight. How should we respond on our side then?¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? Without old Qing Guanzi breathing down our necks, I can free up my hands to deal with those archenemies from Qing Immortal Sect. Why shouldn¡¯t we accept such good intentions?¡± At this moment, getting through the current crisis is most important for Jiuzhou Immortal Sect. As for the matter of Taiping Dao, it can be slowly resolved later on. There¡¯s no hurry. Meng Jianshan, in initiating the peace with Taiping Dao, did so in the hope that, whenever Jiuzhou was in trouble, Taiping Dao would turn a blind eye and choose to stand aside, right? This time, Taiping Dao¡¯s initiative to withdraw troops has already fulfilled the purpose that Jiuzhou Immortal Sect needed. This is no loss. ¡°In that case, how should we arrange the defense of Qingyu Country?¡± Seeing Ding Wanxuan speak in such a manner, He Yang nodded, promptly asking, ¡°Taiping Dao only left a Human Immortal who has recently achieved Dao Fruit in Great Eye Kingdom. Should we respond the same way on our side?¡± Taiping Dao has already shown their goodwill, and Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, whether willing or not, should also respond in kind. Otherwise, if they only deploy a Human Immortal on this border, and you continue to press with heavy troops, what does that imply? Do you intend to launch a sneak attack while I¡¯m showing friendliness and the border is undefended? If we don¡¯t reciprocate favorably, it can easily cause a diplomatic conflict, leading to Taiping Dao¡¯s annoyance and the withdrawal of their redeployed forces. Jiuzhou Immortal Sect certainly wouldn¡¯t be able to withstand that. Hearing this, Ding Wanxuan could not help but ponder for a long while before speaking, ¡°How about this: the great formation here will only retain Nephew Master Sun and Nephew Master Xiao. Nephew Master Sun will continue guarding Qingyu Country, while Nephew Master Xiao shall return to the Giant Spirit Sect Mountain Gate. The two of them will maintain the Earth Immortal formation here. As for you, Nephew He, will join me at the front line to take part in the great battle against Qing Immortal Sect.¡± Taiping Dao nominally sent only Jin Qingyue to guard the formation. But underneath Jin Qingyue, there are two other Human Immortals from the Jintai Gate aiding her. So essentially, within the Ten Thousand Aura Earth Dragon Formation, there are still three True Immortals, and the strength hasn¡¯t been reduced by much. If Jiuzhou Immortal Sect wants to respond equally, ideally they should also leave behind three True Immortals. However, first, at this time of difficulty, when they are in a life-and-death crisis, their situation and status are actually not as good as Taiping Dao¡¯s. Facing Taiping Dao¡¯s initiative, Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, being at a disadvantage, certainly doesn¡¯t have the privilege for equal treatment. They need to show more goodwill in return for the assistance at this time. Second, facing the invasion of a powerful enemy, Jiuzhou Immortal Sect truly has a shortage of manpower, with both the northern and central domains urgently needing reinforcements. As a result, Ding Wanxuan specifically extracted He Yang as well. He Yang has now reached the late stage of Human Immortal status and is one of the few among the second generation of immortals in Jiuzhou Immortal Sect who has the chance to become an Earth Immortal. Transferring him to the front line, though not as good as myself, an Earth Immortal, could still significantly enhance the strength of the front line. Moreover, transferring him would further signal to Taiping Dao that we have no intention of invading the Southern Domain, otherwise the two strongest individuals here wouldn¡¯t have left directly. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï ¡°Yes, I shall comply with Uncle Master¡¯s command.¡± He Yang, hearing these arrangements, had no objections and readily accepted the order. Ding Wanxuan waved his hand, ¡°Since there are no issues, then go and handle the handover. Afterwards, join me in heading to Tianmen River to meet with Brother Meng.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Upon hearing this, He Yang took leave. ¡­ While Ding Wanxuan dealt with Taiping Dao¡¯s friendly gesture, far away, tens of thousands of miles distant, in Tianmen Country located in the most eastern part of the Western Domain, the waters were already rippling, qi surging, with white mist covering tens of thousands of miles of the sky. The entire world was obscured by a foggy realm. In the midst of this fog, a majestic river from the west arrived in the east and then turned to the south, resembling Tianmen and sprawling across the misty expanse. That was Tianmen River, also the source of the name of the nation of Tianmen. Chapter 1351 - Chapter 1351 Chapter 534 Nine Provinces Prepare for War_2 ?Chapter 1351: Chapter 534 Nine Provinces Prepare for War_2 Chapter 1351: Chapter 534 Nine Provinces Prepare for War_2 The rosy clouds were faint, and the purple haze was thick. As the clouds that blanketed the entire Tianmen River approached the central oasis islands, the sunlight that had been obscured by the mist finally penetrated the clouds. Shining down from above, it dyed the mist purple and transformed it into a swirling purple aura. Within the purple aura, streaks of multicolored brilliance could occasionally be seen flashing by, revealing fleeting figures bustling to and fro, disappearing in the blink of an eye. Now and then, one could also witness celestial lights that stirred Heaven and Earth, accompanied by rosy clouds, arriving from afar and sinking into the purple mist. Without a doubt, here was another True Immortal. With so many Cultivators and True Immortals gathered, the islands enveloped in this purple aura were naturally extraordinary. Indeed, this was the headquarters of the Purple Cloud Sect, the foremost Immortal Sect in the Western Domain. In the heart of the islands, where the confluence of stars surrounded the central moon and the purple aura was densest, a large island possessed a terrace by the river, where at this moment celestial light shone brightly and several figures converged. And all the gathered figures were looking up towards one person at the highest point, a person clad in purple robes. At that moment, someone bowed from below and said, ¡°Master Meng, today the Qing Immortal Sect from over there has sent another three squads of a hundred each, penetrating deep into our grand formation to seek opportunities for sabotage. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï These people have already been dealt with cleanly, yet seven of our magical altars within the formation have been breached by them, resulting in the deaths of seventeen disciples. This is already the eleventh invasion from them in the past few months. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï In previous years, the Qing Immortal Sect would only venture deep into our formation once or twice a year, but now it happens once or twice a month, more than ten times the frequency of before. Such a significant change suggests that they can no longer contain themselves, and the onset of full-scale warfare is indeed not far off.¡± Another person added, ¡°At the Northern Domain battlefield, news has also arrived from Master Wang¡¯s location. In recent times, Qing Immortal Sect has similarly increased their infiltration invasions there. Just two days ago, presences of True Immortals even approached outside the formation, attempting to penetrate into it. Fortunately, they were discovered by the True Person guarding that place and were promptly expelled. The fact that they are already using True Immortals to probe our defenses indicates that a formal offensive is close at hand. Moreover, judging by the actions of the Qing Immortal Sect in this period, it seems that they have mostly focused their main offensive direction towards Master Wang¡¯s location. They seek to find weaknesses in Jiuzhou and create an opening for a breakthrough.¡± The power of True Immortals is highly significant in any Immortal Sect, including the Qing Immortal Sect, being an immensely important force. The loss of any one would be lamented for hundreds of years. Now that they are resorting to wield such forces, the signs of an impending war are as obvious as they can be. And since the presence of the True Immortal-level forces was detected in the direction of the Northern Domain, one can naturally infer that Jiuzhou Immortal Gate is preparing to launch their main offensive there. This also matches the predictions made by Jiuzhou Immortal Gate previously. Because for Qing Immortal Sect, the Northern Domain is indeed the most suitable breakthrough point. The reason is simple. Compared to Meng Jianshan, who is in the late stage of an Earth Immortal, Wang Chengfeng of the Azure Dragon Sect, who is only in the early Earth Immortal stage, is undoubtedly much easier to deal with. It allows Yao Baojuan, the traditional rival of Meng Jianshan and the School Leader of the Qing Immortal Sect, to engage Meng Jianshan in the Central Domain. Then, the remaining three Earth Immortals of Qing Immortal Sect, leading the main force, could attack the Northern Domain, engaging in a classic strategy of avoiding the strong and attacking the weak. This move by the Qing Immortal Sect has indeed struck a sore spot for Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Because facing the major invasions from them, the Northern Domain would indeed not hold up if only Master Wang Chengfeng was to withstand it alone. If countermeasures are not prepared, this battle would be in jeopardy. Thus, after hearing the reports from both battlefields, someone urgently said below, ¡°Master Meng, with the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s menacing advance and the war clearly on the verge of breaking out, how should we respond? Please give us your guidance!¡± However, facing everyone¡¯s urgency, Meng Jianshan at the top simply smiled faintly and raised his hand, gently sweeping it downwards, ¡°Do not panic, everyone. Even if the sky were to fall, we old fellows will still be there to hold it up. There¡¯s no need for such haste.¡± With these words, even though the attendees were anxious, seeing Meng Jianshan¡¯s composure also steadied their minds somewhat, and they quickly said, ¡°We¡¯ve lost our composure, please forgive us, True Person.¡± Meng Jianshan waved his hand dismissively, choosing not to delve into it, and continued, ¡°I know you all are very anxious about Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s impending attack and think that just Master Wang and I alone may not be enough to counter the four Earth Immortals of Qing Immortal Sect, hence the panic. But as for these matters, we have long been prepared. As early as decades ago, when Qing Immortal Sect showed signs of stirring up conflict again, we already sent envoys to Taiping Dao in the Southern Domain for peace talks. Just now, Junior Brother Ding has sent back news, he has reached an agreement with Taiping Dao. They have promised that during this war, they will not aid Qing Immortal Sect. Of course, they won¡¯t help us either. They will maintain neutrality in this conflict, not taking action against any party. Moreover, as a gesture of sincerity, Taiping Dao is also willing to voluntarily withdraw their forces from the great formation in the southwestern part of the Southern Domain, lightening our defensive burden in the south. And their Earth Immortals will also head to the eastern part of the Southern Domain, near Qing Immortal Sect, to patrol and allay suspicions. Now, with no threats in the south of Jiuzhou, Junior Brother Ding has already indicated that he will soon bring Nephew He to Tianmen River to assist us. With Junior Brother Ding¡¯s arrival, even if Jiuzhou were to focus all their might in the attack, they won¡¯t succeed in breaching our grand formation or invading our land. Our foundation in the Western Domain will remain secure and untroubled.¡± Meng Jianshan conveyed the uplifting news he had just received to the many True Persons present. He knew that these juniors had been under a lot of pressure these years, constantly worrying about the future of Jiuzhou. Chapter 1352 - Chapter 1352 Chapter 534 Nine Provinces Prepare for War_3 ?Chapter 1352: Chapter 534 Nine Provinces Prepare for War_3 Chapter 1352: Chapter 534 Nine Provinces Prepare for War_3 At this moment, what was desperately needed was a piece of good news of sufficient weight to ease everyone¡¯s pressure. And the news of reaching a non-aggression pact with Taiping Dao was undoubtedly weighty enough. Indeed. Upon hearing this great news, the faces of the True Persons, who had been frowning with worry, instantly changed, and they began to beam with joy. Even the most reserved among the True Persons couldn¡¯t help but curl the corners of their mouths into a slight smile. ¡°Taiping Dao has reached an agreement with us?¡± ¡°I¡¯ve said it long ago, Taiping Dao and our Nine Provinces are interdependent. If we fall, they can¡¯t survive either. If they are sensible, they should join hands with us to fight against Changqing Immortal Sect.¡± ¡°With Taiping Dao no longer hindering us, Master Ding will arrive soon, and our Jiuzhou Immortal Gate will have three Earth Flower True Men at our disposal. Relying on the great formation, those small Changqing rebels will undoubtedly suffer a crushing defeat, with no return this time!¡± ¡°Now we truly have nothing to worry about.¡± The True Persons below, one after another, excitedly voiced their joy. Perhaps because of the repression they had felt for so long, their words took on an uncharacteristically emotional tone. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Fortunately, Meng Jianshan understood and didn¡¯t reprimand them much. Instead, he waited for everyone to vent their emotions before continuing, ¡°It¡¯s good that we¡¯ve reached an agreement with Taiping Dao, but that merely stabilizes our southern front, freeing Junior Brother Ding from being confined to Qingyu Country. Taiping Dao has merely promised not to take action against us, not to send troops to aid us. We still have to rely on ourselves to fight this war and repel the invasion of Changqing Immortal Sect. The battle has not yet started, the enemy has not yet retreated, and here you are, so pleased as if we¡¯ve already won the war!¡± Out of a desire to care for his juniors, Meng Jianshan still offered a bit of admonishment. ¡°We are filled with trepidation!¡± The True Persons, realizing their earlier impropriety, quickly begged for forgiveness. ¡°We shall reflect on ourselves in the future.¡± Meng Jianshan snorted softly, moving past the issue and bringing the conversation back to the main point, ¡°Since Junior Brother Ding will soon be here, and Changqing Immortal Sect also seems likely to launch an official attack very soon, we must also make preparations in advance to welcome the great battle.¡± Issue my command!¡± Meng Jianshan¡¯s tone became sharp, and his gaze swept over the people below, all the True Persons stood up and waited in silence. ¡°Effective immediately, all disciples of the Nine Provinces are to rigorously guard their respective magical platforms. Patrol Cultivators in each region are to double their inspection efforts. Cultivators stationed at Tianmen River are to assemble at their posts, always ready for battle. All True Immortals, aside from those with existing duties, are to come to Feixia Island for secluded cultivation, ready to respond to orders at a moment¡¯s notice. Carry out this legal order immediately upon receiving it. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Those who dare defy will be dealt with by the sect¡¯s rules!¡± Meng Jianshan¡¯s voice thundered with authority, reaching into the heart of everyone present. ¡°We shall strictly adhere to the True Person¡¯s legal orders!¡± Everyone bowed in unison, echoing his command. ¡­ Just as the numerous cultivators of the Nine Provinces, by the Tianmen River, began actively preparing for battle upon receiving the good news from the south, Yao Baojuan, who was stationed on the opposite side of the Tianmen River in Longquan Kingdom, at the heart of Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s domain on the battlefield, also received information from Song Xiren, a junior who was staying behind at the sect. ¡°Taiping Dao has chosen to stand by, leaning towards the remnants of the Nine Spirits¡­¡± Yao Baojuan put down the recently extinguished Communication Jade Charm, his expression indifferent, he sighed softly, ¡°As my junior brothers predicted, Taiping Dao would not stand by idly while Changqing Immortal Sect annihilates the remnants of the Nine Spirits. Should I insist on deploying troops, they would surely react. Although they have not declared war on me, their withdrawal of troops from the Western Domain border is in itself support for those Nine Spirits remnants. Without Taiping Dao¡¯s involvement, those remnants can now fully confront my offensive; Ding Wanxuan is probably already rushing back from the Southern Domain. An attack now means facing off against three Earth Immortals from the Nine Spirits remnants. But luckily, although Taiping Dao hasn¡¯t supported me, they haven¡¯t opposed me either. This neutral stance of the Southern Domain, although disappointing, is actually not too bad. Having a Taiping Dao as a buffer in the south allows me to commit fully to the decisive battle against the Nine Spirits remnants. Even without outside help, by consolidating the full strength of my sect, I can annihilate the enemy. This battle must shatter these rebels, ensuring that those already dead are completely eradicated. I will personally correct the mistakes I have made in the past.¡± Yao Baojuan murmured to himself, his will to fight undiminished by setbacks, in fact, it grew even stronger. Even though the situation has changed, with Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s advantage shifting from significant to marginal, an advantage, however small, is still an advantage, and not impossible to fight with. Changqing Immortal Sect alone possesses four Earth Immortals and seventeen Human Immortals. If we include the forces from the nine subordinate Immortal Sects, there are an additional fourteen Human Immortals. So, the hand held by Yao Baojuan is four Earth Immortals and thirty-one Human Immortals. On the other side, the Nine Provinces has only three Earth Immortals and thirteen Human Immortals. With nearly a twenty Human Immortal advantage in numbers, these could effectively be considered the equivalent of having an additional Earth Immortal. As long as Yao Baojuan is willing to accept substantial casualties, by leveraging the Human Immortal advantage, it is not impossible to breach the Northern Domain¡¯s grand formation. However, that would mean his Human Immortals would inevitably suffer significant losses. After all, using Human Immortals as Earth Immortals means paying a price for obtaining strength beyond a Great Realm. Regardless of the battle¡¯s outcome, Changqing Immortal Sect will be severely weakened. This is quite a difference from the original expectation of an easy victory. ¡°But if I can obliterate the Nine Spirits remnants or drive them out, allowing Changqing Immortal Sect to reclaim our dominance, then even if many die, it will be worth it.¡± Yao Baojuan took a deep breath, making up his mind, ¡°As the School Leader, now is the time for me to shoulder the responsibility and bear the pressure.¡± With that thought, he stood up, retrieving the Communication Jade Charm and sending out a message. He then proceeded toward the place where decisions were made. With Taiping Dao having indicated their last uncertain factor, and the Nine Spirits remnants already mobilizing for war, Changqing Immortal Sect must not fall behind. Now that everything has been settled, it¡¯s time to launch the decisive battle and put an end to it all. Chapter 1353 - Chapter 1353 Chapter 535 Two Sects Go to War ?Chapter 1353: Chapter 535 Two Sects Go to War Chapter 1353: Chapter 535 Two Sects Go to War The next day. The morning light began to emerge, night had not yet faded, and the sky was dimly lit. This was the moment when yin and yang intersected, and perhaps far off on the horizon, to the east of the great river, countless lights sparked to life, beams of immortal light shot towards heaven, twinkling at the edge of the sky. One could see streaks of escaping light flying over, with radiance of four colors complementing each other, and at this moment before sunrise, they looked like stars illuminating the sky. Across the wide Tianmen River, an immortal shine descended, covering the entire river surface, casting over it a layer of dreamlike illusion. This massive commotion instantly awaked everyone from the Nine Provinces on the opposite shore of Tianmen Country. One by one, cultivators who had been prepared in advance, upon sensing the slightest movement, immediately sought out their senior fellow disciples and gathered at various posts, watching the sky with vigilant eyes. Having rushed over from the Southern Domain just the previous day, Ding Wanxuan had also found his elder brother, and together they watched for any changes unfolding. Ding Wanxuan looked up at the sky, where what seemed to be stars made up of numerous cultivators¡¯ escaping lights. Just from what he could see, there were no fewer than ten thousand people on the opposite side. Just for this battlefield alone, Qing Immortal Sect had made such a massive investment. Seeing this, he couldn¡¯t help but say with a solemn expression, ¡°Elder brother, it looks like Qing Immortal Sect can no longer restrain themselves, they are about to make a move.¡± Meng Jianshan¡¯s demeanor, however, remained calm, not showing much panic. He simply glanced at the celestial phenomenon shining with group stars, nodded casually, and said, ¡°Now that Taiping Dao has already made its stance clear, Qing Immortal Sect no longer has any concerns holding them back, and it¡¯s only natural for them to act.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï At this point, although he regarded Qing Immortal Sect with importance, he was no longer anxious or fearful. ¡°Qing Immortal Sect is making such a grand display; they must be planning to launch a fierce attack on our formation method without a doubt.¡± Seeing his elder brother so composed, Ding Wanxuan¡¯s own tension eased considerably. After calming down a bit, he said, ¡°The opponent has many treasures and methods specifically designed to break formations; we have suffered losses from them in the past. Our formation method is just maintaining normal operation and hasn¡¯t been fully activated; I¡¯m afraid it¡¯ll be difficult to handle an assault. We should immediately send orders for disciples at all points of the formation to start channeling their Spiritual Power, fully activate the formation nodes, and keep the formation at peak performance.¡± In the Immortal Realm, there are all kinds of formation methods that can make use of the power of Heaven and Earth or the power of all beings to exhibit various mighty abilities. And naturally, there are all sorts of treasures and methods specifically developed to break these formations. Although the Earth Immortal formation is powerful, once set in motion, even an Earth Immortal would find it difficult to shake. But this doesn¡¯t mean it¡¯s foolproof. Without vigilance and constant attention to the formation¡¯s changes, mobilizing its power, and wholeheartedly responding to external attacks, any negligence could potentially lead to its breach. Of course. Given the vastness of the Earth Immortal formation, even if it were breached, it would only destroy some of the nodes in a particular area, causing that segment of the formation to fail and reducing the overall power of the formation. To break through a formation that stretches across three nations in one fell swoop is not such an easy task. Without a prolonged effort of day and night assaults, spending several months, or even several decades, it¡¯s very difficult to completely break an Earth Immortal formation. Of course, this is assuming that the strengths of both sides are not too dissimilar, and no absolute advantage has been secured, which is why it would require so much time. If one side has an absolute advantage, possessing several times more strength, as Qing Immortal Sect had planned before, with three or four Earth Immortals besieging one formation. Then, within ten days or so, it would be possible to break an Earth Immortal formation. However, with Ding Wanxuan¡¯s arrival, Qing Immortal Sect naturally no longer possesses such strength. So what he mentioned was about being gradually weakened by the opponent, slowly depleting the strength of the formation. Otherwise, through long-term attrition over the years or even decades, it¡¯s possible for the opponent to break through this formation. If they do not prepare and respond in time, and wait until they are under attack, they could suffer a great loss. ¡°What you say is correct, junior brother. Since the opponent has already started the war, we should not think about conserving the strength of the Earth Vein anymore.¡± In agreement with Ding Wanxuan¡¯s suggestion, Meng Jianshan nodded his approval, ¡°Send the order down, let all disciples immediately energize the formation method to its utmost, draw on the Earth Vein¡¯s power from beneath the three nations to maintain the formation¡¯s operation. At the same time, within all the blessed lands and Spirit Veins in the formation, all Spiritual Energy is now regulated, with priority given to maintaining the operation of the formation method. Anyone who, without permission, uses the Earth Vein and Spiritual Energy within the formation will be treated as a traitor and a spy and will be executed without mercy.¡± Meng Jianshan issued the order to activate the formation for wartime. Given the immense power of the Earth Immortal formation, the energy required to maintain its operation was naturally huge. And ordinarily, a formation relies on three main sources of energy supply. The first is the most common Earth Vein energy, which depends on the power of mountains and rivers, using the entire land as a support. The second is the Spirit Vein¡¯s Spiritual Energy, which is derived from extracting the Spirit Veins cultured in various blessed lands and consuming the Spiritual Energy within them to power the formation. The final source is celestial forces, which align with the Heavenly Vault, the sun, moon, and stars to draw upon the power of the celestial bodies, thereby maintaining the formation. Among the three types of energy supplies, the first is the most reliable and abundant because cultivators reside within the land, nourished by it, and are closest to it, making the land¡¯s power most dependable. However, Earth Vein energy often represents the foundation of a land. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Though profound, if it¡¯s overexploited, it will also suffer. Excessive consumption of Earth Vein energy can lead to barren lands, with flora and fauna struggling to survive, depriving mountains and rivers of their spirit, and even causing various natural disasters. Chapter 1354 - Chapter 1354 Chapter 535 Two Sects Go to War_2 ?Chapter 1354: Chapter 535 Two Sects Go to War_2 Chapter 1354: Chapter 535 Two Sects Go to War_2 The spirit veins rooted above the earth veins might also slowly disintegrate and vanish due to the scarcity of geographical advantages, failing to meet the conditions for their existence. Therefore, although earth veins are lengthy and profound, an excessive depletion can ruin an entire region. Although it could recover in the future, that period would be counted in tens of thousands of years. It was akin to mortgaging the future. Of course, given the depth of the earth, even an Earth Immortal formation fully extracting from the earth veins each for more than a hundred years, would still struggle to deplete them entirely. This sustainability is still quite reliable. This is also why many formations choose earth veins as their energy supply. The second type, the energy of spirit veins, is the purest and can maximize the power of the formations. However, the spiritual energy in various blessed lands¡¯ spirit veins, which cultivators usually absorb for cultivation, is still insufficient. Using it to power formations makes it even scarcer. Using this type of energy, formations often couldn¡¯t last a few years before the spiritual energy was exhausted, the spirit veins depleted, and the formations destroyed. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Once the spirit veins are depleted, they¡¯re gone for good. For cultivators who absorb spiritual energy for cultivation, this essentially means losing their means of progress. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï And for spirit veins to reappear, it would require Heaven and Earth to re-nurture them, which could take countless millennia. Even then, they might not reappear at the original location but could surface anywhere randomly. Thus, unless in an emergency, cultivators generally seldom use spirit veins as energy sources for formations. Because by doing so, even if they win against their enemies, they¡¯ve lost their futurea€¡±a loss greater than the gain. As for the third type, the power of the sun, moon, and stars, this causes the least damage. Because for cultivators, only when practicing certain special techniques or refining specific magical artifacts do they need to collect the essence from these celestial bodies to aid their cultivation. Normally, there¡¯s little demand for it. Moreover, the formations resonating with the stars and collecting their power essentially borrow the celestial afterglows, which are the dispersed energies naturally falling toward the earth, causing no harm to the stars themselves. The role of the formation is merely to make the celestial afterglow that was evenly falling to the earth be slightly biased, opening a special channel directed specifically toward the location of the formation. This method of capturing energy is naturally harmless. However, likewise, since it only involves collecting some dispersed energies, the energy obtained is relatively less. Relying on the power of these celestial bodies to maintain the operation of an Earth Immortal formation is utterly impossible. Unless you have stored enough power from the stars within the formation in advance to satisfy its operational needs for a period. But even then, it¡¯s only for a limited time. A normal formation, even with reserved star power, could generally only sustain one or two years, and not for a prolonged period. This type of energy is more transient than that from spirit veins and is also not as pure. Under normal circumstances, it can only serve as a supplementary source when the first two types of energy are insufficienta€¡±better than nothing. In summary, activating an Earth Immortal formation, or even any formation, inflicts severe damage on the earth veins. Therefore, in normal circumstances, Immortal Sects in various regions with any foresight would not permit maintaining any formation for long on their lands. Some more extreme ones won¡¯t even allow the establishment of any formation other than their own protective formations. Those who defy this rule, if discovered, face execution. The Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, with its significant size and scope, would not go to such extremes, but also would not waste resources casually. Thus, previously, although there had always been conflicts with Qing Immortal Sect and even some localized battles had erupted, even so, before officially launching a war, the Earth Immortal formation on the side of Tianmen Country remained in a state of partial activation and partial operation. It only ensured that in the event of a powerful enemy¡¯s invasion, it could immediately activate all defenses after taking damage and fight with full strength. The energy required was only a tenth of its loaded state, which is the bare minimum. However, this was just a standby status. Now that the enemy had already arrived at the doorstep, maintaining this status was certainly not possible. Therefore, Ding Wanxuan and Meng Jianshan had issued orders for full activation of the formation, shifting to wartime command. As the two discussed, at that moment above the Tianmen River, a figure stepped through the heavenly lights, walking in mid-air and landing before the two formations. ¡°Where is Meng Jianshan, come out and face me!¡± But it was Yao Baojuan, the leader of Qing Immortal Sect, who called out across to the Tianmen Country side, his voice booming and spreading across both banks of the river, heard for thousands of miles. In the center of the river, the Purple Cloud Sect side naturally heard it immediately. ¡°Junior brother, it seems this School Leader Yao still wants to say something before we start fighting,¡± Meng Jianshan turned his head upon hearing his old rival¡¯s voice and smiled at Ding Wanxuan beside him, ¡°Junior Brother should go and set up the formation first. I¡¯ll go out to meet him and see what he has to say?¡± Ding Wanxuan nodded slightly, ¡°Take care, senior brother.¡± ¡°I¡¯m off then!¡± Meng Jianshan laughed heartily, then his figure shifted and he transformed into a wisp of purple mist, wafting up into the sky, heading towards the source of the voice. Seeing this, Ding Wanxuan didn¡¯t linger and immediately turned to leave, summoning the other True Persons within the formation. The Qing Immortal Sect had already made their move. The senior brother was going to meet School Leader Yao, which could perhaps delay them with a few words. He needed to hurry and fully activate the entire formation. Otherwise, once the enemy attacked, it would be too late to react, and if some parts of the formation were broken, they would stand to suffer some losses. Chapter 1355 - Chapter 1355 Chapter 535 Two Sects Go to War_3 ?Chapter 1355: Chapter 535 Two Sects Go to War_3 Chapter 1355: Chapter 535 Two Sects Go to War_3 This battle is indefinite in length, and as one of the three leaders of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Ding Wanxuan has always been frugal and careful in managing resources to avoid waste. At his urging, the numerous True People who had hastily arrived on the island received their orders and quickly dispersed to various parts of the magic formation, commencing their actions. Before long, with the successive activation of magic altars throughout the area, what initially started as merely clouds obscuring the western bank of Tianmen River now churned violently, transforming into layers of cloud waves that howled as they spread towards the rear. In just a few rolls, they had blanketed the entire area surrounding Tianmen, including the Three Nations nearby. The heavens and earth within tens of thousands of miles were now completely shrouded by the sea of clouds. The mist continued to stretch towards the Heavenly Vault, acting as a bridge between Heaven and Earth, spanning above the Tianmen River. A huge canopy was set up in an instant. The east and west sides of the great river were thus isolated from each other. At this time, Meng Jianshan had also arrived outside the formation to meet with Yao Baojuan. ¡°I¡¯ve met Friend Yao,¡± Though the two sides had already started fighting, as a leader of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Meng Jianshan maintained his composure and did not resort to vulgar shouting. Instead, he gave a slight bow to the other party before smiling and saying, ¡°Before the armies, I wonder what advice Friend Yao has for me by calling me here?¡± Yao Baojuan looked at his age-old foe, particularly irritated by the other¡¯s annoying smile, and suppressed the urge to attack immediately, huffing coldly, ¡°I dare not call it advice. Today, I called you out solely because of the innocent lives at stake and the spirits of Heaven and Earth that I could not bear to harm unduly. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï I just wanted to ask if you would be willing to retreat from the Changqing Domain immediately and return the land unlawly seized in the Western Domain. In doing so, we might still avoid this battle between us. Otherwise, if a great war ensues, with lands shattered and the natural order overturned, the Western Domain ravaged to ashes, all would be the fault of the Nine Spirits Sect.¡± Knowing full well that the other party would not accept his proposal, such a large-scale war that mobilized so many people and required such lengthy preparations inevitably needed a publicly stated cause. Expelling the invaders, reclaiming ancestral land, and ensuring peace within the domaina€¡±these were the reasons the Qing Immortal Sect gave for the war. Therefore, at the outset of war, Yao Baojuan did not choose a surprise attack. Though that might have offered some initial advantage by breaking through some of the opposite bank¡¯s formations, it would also seem underhanded and sly. If there was to be a fight, it should be forthright and honorable. With such massive preparations on both sides, with everything at stake, there was no chance of an amicable resolution. Gaining such a small advantage would be insignificant to the overall situation. Instead, it¡¯s better to be open and direct, presenting clear challenges and formally declaring war so that both sides can fight a fair battle. In the end, whichever side won or lost would command respect. Moreover, even though the Changqing Domain is in complete disarray, the Immortal Sects within the domain and their cultivators are still fundamentally aligned with the orthodox Immortal Method. The pursuit of a just cause matters to them. Having a good reason bolsters the morale of one¡¯s own people. All these factors combined led to Yao Baojuan¡¯s probe before the battle commenced. ¡°Ha! Ridiculous,¡± Meng Jianshan, hearing the other¡¯s words, couldn¡¯t help but scoff coldly: ¡°This entire Great Domain was originally the territory of the Nine Spirits Sect, it was just stolen by you Changqing rebels seventy thousand years ago. Now as the descendants of the Nine Spirits return, you thieves not only refuse to return the ancestral land but also have the audacity to accuse us in turn. Why shouldn¡¯t it be you leaving the Nine Spirits Domain? Absolutely laughable! If you truly care about the lives of the common folk and the spirits of the mountains and rivers, then you should lead the entire Qing Immortal Sect away from the home you have stolen. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 That would be the true act of goodness. And your Qing Immortal Sect could preserve your Taoist inheritance and avoid a catastrophe. Otherwise, a thief blaming the rightful owner only appears shameless.¡± In the dispute over the Taoist inheritance of the entire Changqing Domain, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and the Qing Immortal Sect were both uncompromising. And upon closer inspection, both sects had legitimate claims to the domaina€¡± one as its former owner returning home, the other as its current declining ruler. Both were owners, albeit at different times. This led to the surrounding domains maintaining a position of objective neutrality towards the conflict over the Changqing Domain, which is effectively the war between the Qing Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. The neighboring Heavenly Immortal sects didn¡¯t intervene much. The reason is simple. These Heavenly Immortal sects are currently neighbors with your Qing Immortal Sect, and over these seventy thousand years, they¡¯ve developed deep relations. But it was only for those seventy thousand years. Before that time, when the Nine Spirits Sect was still around, the neighboring Heavenly Immortal sects similarly had deep relations with the Nine Spirits Sect. Seventy thousand years is a long time. However, once one reaches the realm of a Heavenly Immortal, they are essentially free of Lifespan restrictions. As long as one does not encounter external calamities, it is theoretically possible to live until the end of time a€¡° until the destruction of the world. Many Heavenly Immortals, however, face various tribulations on their path of Cultivation; should they fail to overcome one, they inevitably perish. Therefore, there are Great True People within the Qing Immortal Sect who lived only for sixty thousand years before they passed away. It wasn¡¯t that their Lifespan was only sixty thousand years, but rather, they encountered an unforeseen calamity and died. Lu Yuan¡¯s Innate Endless Life talent is similar to the inherent property of eternal life possessed by a Heavenly Immortal. That is why he is confident that he can achieve Heavenly Immortal status. Having already broken through the limitations of a ten-thousand-year Lifespan as an Earth Immortal, Lu Yuan possessed some Heavenly Immortal qualities in advance, which made ascending to Heavenly Immortal status far easier for him than for ordinary Earth Immortals. Chapter 1356 - Chapter 1356 Chapter 535 Two Sects Go to War_4 ?Chapter 1356: Chapter 535 Two Sects Go to War_4 Chapter 1356: Chapter 535 Two Sects Go to War_4 It was like getting half a ticket in advance, or owning half of a Heavenly Immortal Taoist Fruit, with such an advantage, advancing towards Heavenly Immortal was simple, wasn¡¯t it? Therefore, given the infinite lifespan characteristic of Heavenly Immortals, the time a Heavenly Immortal could live was actually quite long. In Eastern Huazhou, among all Heavenly Immortals, there were both the likes of Great True Person Changqing, a short-lived ghost who had lived for sixty thousand years. There were also some who had lived for tens to hundreds of millions of years, ancient relics from times immemorial, surviving to this day. They simply could endure. For those Great True Persons who had lived more than sixty thousand years, it was hard to be concerned in their eyes. Who mattered more, the Nine Spirits Great True Person from seventy thousand years ago, or the long-dead Great True Person Changqing from these past seventy thousand years? Both were their Taoist friends, they had relationships with both sides, and they had been neighbors for a long time as well. Similarly, the Great True Persons on both sides were all gone. Thus, in a situation with no entangling interests and where both sides mattered equally, the other Heavenly Immortal sects naturally found it inappropriate to intervene in this matter. Even if you wanted to intervene, you had to consider the views and opinions of other Great True Persons who favored the Qing Immortal Sect or the Nine Spirits Sect. The entanglements were too complex. Even for the Great True Persons, it wasn¡¯t easy to get overly involved, so taking no sides and turning a blind eye was best. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï It wasn¡¯t as if foreign demons were invading; it was just a struggle between the old and new masters, an internal family matter. Why meddle so much? They weren¡¯t people with nothing better to do; no one wanted to get involved in these troubling affairs. And so, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and the Qing Immortal Sect, based on this, had fought within their domain for tens of thousands of years without much external interference. As long as they didn¡¯t spread the flames of war outward, affecting the neighboring areas, nobody really wanted to intervene. But enough had been said about these matters, their throats were dry from discussing broken principles over tens of thousands of years; Yao Baojuan had absolutely no intention of continuing the debate with the other party. Having decided to take action, Yao Baojuan, seeing such a response from the other party, asked indifferently, ¡°So, it seems we can¡¯t talk it out then?¡± Meng Jianshan sneered, ¡°There was never much to talk about in the first place. The battle has already come to the door a€¡° why say so much? You and I both know, no one can back down. If you want this Western Domain, then it must be seized by the sword in hand!¡± ¡°Fine, that suits me perfectly!¡± Yao Baojuan nodded slightly, having issued the challenge and performed the necessary formalities; he was too lazy to keep up the pretense. No sooner had he spoken, than his robe billowed, releasing a beam of green light from his hand. Against the wind, it expanded, and in the blink of an eye, it transformed into a sky-supporting giant tree. The branches of the giant tree spread rapidly, soon growing numerous limbs, a vast crown, hanging over the sky. Behind him, tens of thousands of cultivators, transformed into countless beams of immortal light, now settled on the limbs and crown, blending instantly as one with it like so many leaves. A breeze of immortal wind passed, shaking the shadows of the trees. In this space between Heaven and Earth, endless mystical forces surged towards the sky-supporting giant tree. This was the Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s formation-breaking weapon, the Middle Grade Immortal Artifact capable of uniting the power of ten thousand immortals, seizing the mechanisms of Heaven and Earth, and appropriating the spirit of myriad beingsa€¡±the Changqing God Wood. ¡°Haha, well met! I will wait for you in this formation, to see if your immortal tree can break my grand formation!¡± Seeing that the opponent had made a significant move, Meng Jianshan noticed it was a display of the foundational strength of a Heavenly Immortal sect, superior to an Earth Immortal¡¯s Middle Grade Immortal Artifact. Faced with such a sharp magical treasure, even though he was an Earth Immortal, he dared not withstand it head-on. So, dropping a harsh line, he twisted and retreated back into the formation, placing himself under its protection. And the moment his words fell, a limb from the giant tree unfurled behind him, slightly trembling and transforming into a massive whip tens of thousands of yards long, fiercely lashing towards the formation ahead. Smashing onto the cloud-covered expanse, it instantly stirred up countless tempests. Amidst the surroundings, the sound of thunder immediately erupted. With that sound, the great battle between the Changqing Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had officially begun. Chapter 1357 - Chapter 1357 Chapter 536 The Birth of Whales and Fallen Objects ?Chapter 1357: Chapter 536: The Birth of Whales and Fallen Objects Chapter 1357: Chapter 536: The Birth of Whales and Fallen Objects Mi Yun Mountain. ¡°Has the Changqing Immortal Sect already started fighting with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate?¡± But as the two neighbors to the north and west had already officially started the war at Tianmen River, Lu Yuan over here was also rushing to Yi Dancheng and learned of this news. Yi Dancheng nodded, ¡°Yes, this is the message from the Giant Spirit Sect, just one hour ago, these two Immortal Sects had already gone to war.¡± Although Yi Dancheng had returned to Mi Yun Mountain from Qingyang Country in order to signal peace to the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, this did not mean that his contact with them had been cut off. The channels of communication between Taiping Dao and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, or rather with the Giant Spirit Sect, have always been there. Even though He Yang left, his two junior brothers are still in Qingyu Country. This piece of news was conveyed by Sun Yuecai, who was left by the Giant Spirit Sect to guard Qingyu Country. The purpose of the other party sharing this news was also very clear. It was to let Taiping Dao know of this development, and to understand that the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, now that the great war had started, was no longer able to spare the manpower to launch an attack on the Southern Domain. That is to say, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate no longer posed any threat to the Southern Domain, to Taiping Dao. It was also an act of goodwill on their part. As they were talking, Lu Yuan¡¯s expression suddenly changed, and in his mind, he received the message from Qing Guanzi who was patrolling over at Jiuchuan Country, transmitted through the spiritual connection between the avatar and the true self. ¡°Qing Guanzi over there has also received a transmission from the Changqing Immortal Sect. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã? They have already gone to war with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate.¡± After Lu Yuan received the message, he then informed Yi Dancheng beside him. Upon hearing this, the latter said, ¡°Both sides have notified us, so it seems that the battle has truly started in the north. Now that neither of the two major Daoist sects can afford to be distracted, we should be safe in the Southern Domain before the end of the war. During this period, what should we do?¡± Typically, when two strong neighbors are preoccupied, it naturally presents a good opportunity to expand one¡¯s own reach. Many forces would take advantage of this time to do things that were previously restrained by others and difficult to accomplish. Such as territorial expansion or internal cleansing. When left undisturbed, these two things are the best ways to build up strength. ¡°We don¡¯t need to do anything, just focus on our development,¡± Lu Yuan said directly, ¡°The interests we, Taiping Dao, have fought for are already large enough, so large that we have become bloated to the point of indigestion. Now, if we continue to be greedy for more, even if we can gain more benefits while the Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate are too preoccupied to give us much thought, it¡¯s only short-term. Once the two sects have finished fighting and decided a victor, no matter the result, they will turn back and focus their attention on the Southern Domain once again. By then, if they are dissatisfied with us, whatever we have swallowed will eventually be forced out by them. Having already occupied half of the Southern Domain, Taiping Dao has aroused the wariness and attention of these two sects. If we continue to expand our strength, it will no longer be wariness and attention, but suppression and hostility instead.¡± How can one allow others to sleep soundly by the side of one¡¯s own couch? A Taiping Dao with an Earth Immortal already poses a threat to both the Changqing Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, causing their wariness and unease. However, with only one Earth Immortal compared to the three or four from the opposition, Taiping Dao is still much weaker and unable to pose a significant threat. Even if they were to join one of the factions, it would be difficult to completely eliminate the other side. It is precisely because of this weak strength, which cannot overturn the overall situation, yet poses enough of a threat that no one can easily eliminate them, that Taiping Dao can serve as a balance and buffer between the two camps. Based on these factors, this is why the two major Immortal Sects would tolerate the existence of Taiping Dao and agree to turn a blind eye. However, if Taiping Dao does not know how to restrain itself and continues to expand outward, then the attitudes of the two Immortal Sects will no longer be as friendly as they are now. A Taiping Dao that occupies five small countries while integrating other small Immortal Sects within the Southern Domain is a slightly threatening weak neighbor. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 But a Taiping Dao that has unified the entire Southern Domain would be a southern hegemon that has bared its sharp teeth. Looking at the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, which has unified the entire Western Domain, its strength and threat become apparent. The Changqing Immortal Sect, having already suffered the consequences of underestimating them, and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, having proven its potential, naturally would not allow a second instance to unfold similarly. They are now fighting so desperately, even stirring up a great war, not sparing any effort. What they want is to decide the next master of the Changqing Domain between themselves, the new and old masters. It¡¯s not about fighting a battle that leaves both sides weakened and benefits an outsider who sits by watching. Thus, in a situation where neither the Changqing Immortal Sect nor the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate can do anything about each other, Taiping Dao can survive in the Changqing Domain. Because both parties need a buffer and an external force as a compromise between them. This is the fundamental reason for Taiping Dao¡¯s existence. But this buffer and external force should not be too strong, strong enough to threaten the survival of both sects, strong enough to surpass them. Otherwise, it would invite suppression and destruction. This is a matter of fundamental principle and is not up for discussion. Although the other two Immortal Sects have not openly stated this, through interactions over the past hundred years, Lu Yuan has also more or less sensed this underlying line. Therefore, in his actions and affairs, he also follows this, not attempting to cross the boundary. Chapter 1358 - Chapter 1358 Chapter 536 The Birth of Whales and Fallen Objects_2 ?Chapter 1358: Chapter 536: The Birth of Whales and Fallen Objects_2 Chapter 1358: Chapter 536: The Birth of Whales and Fallen Objects_2 Thus, over the past centuries, the two other Immortal Sects and the Taiping Dao have also coexisted peacefully. Even in this great war, the two Immortal Sects did not conspire to first eliminate Taiping Dao and then fight each other. This was because both sects were aware that after this battle, they would each suffer heavy losses. Even with the remaining strength, they would still be stronger than Taiping Dao. Taiping Dao could not challenge their status after the war, naturally, this posed no threat; and for a non-threat, there was no need to be excessively concerned. It can be said that it was precisely because Taiping Dao was weak that it managed to avoid this war and was tacitly allowed by the other two to remain uninvolved. Of course, besides being weak, Taiping Dao had also behaved very stably and honestly over the past century, not stirring up trouble anywhere, which gave the impression of being friendly. This impression was also very important. Since they had already reaped the benefits of being seen as weak and honest, then until their true strength was sufficient to break all of this, enough to challenge the status of the other two sects and face their threats. Lu Yuan naturally would not actively disrupt this relatively advantageous stable situation, taking himself out of his comfort zone to meet the real challenges outside. That would not be bravery, just foolishness. ¡°In the Western Domain, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate has two Earth Immortal formations. After we released Ding Wanxuan, the Qing Immortal Sect no longer had overwhelming strength over Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. With those formations, even if a victor is decided between Earth Immortals and Human Immortals, it is difficult to achieve a victory in war. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï This war won¡¯t end quickly unless all the formations are completely destroyed. Even if the formations are destroyed, the defenders might find a way to repair them quickly, or set up new formations behind the older ones. With such layered defense, a country defending a formation one after another, I believe it will be decades, if not a century, before any outcome emerges.¡± Having stated his stance, Lu Yuan continued analyzing, ¡°Therefore, for us, it is about using this buffer period during the war to quickly accumulate our strength, to enhance our foundation. To be ready for the new distribution in the Changqing Domain after the war.¡± This great war, although not equally matched, roughly was on the same level. And wars between powers of similar strength always result in heavy casualties on both sides. Having commanded countless battles in the Nine Provinces, Lu Yuan understood these wartime norms very well. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Thus, after this war, regardless of who wins or loses, heavy casualties on both sects were certain. Because he had not experienced wars in the Immortal Realm before, not even witnessing True Immortal battles more than twice. Hence, Lu Yuan could not directly estimate, how many would die from both sides? But conservatively estimating, each of the two sects would lose one Earth Immortal, five to six Human Immortals, and several thousand ordinary disciples of the Immortal Sect for certain. The reason is simple. Because the last time, which was three thousand years ago during the decisive battle to determine the ownership of the nine nations of the Western Domain and the current Changqing Domain layout, both sects lost two Earth Immortals each. From the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate side, those who died were Earth Immortals from the Heavenly River Sect and the Danding Sect. Back then, including the Heavenly River Sect, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had only four Earth Immortals, and they lost half of them in an instant. This major loss, it was not until now, three thousand years later, with Wang Chengfeng of the Canglong and Huang Yuanxiu of the Heavenly River Sect becoming Earth Immortals, that they finally recovered. On the Qing Immortal Sect side, three thousand years ago before that decisive battle, there were five Earth Immortals. Following the battle, two fell on the spot. Later, another Earth Immortal, due to injuries from that decisive battle and being older, depleted his Lifespan early and perished prematurely. So in total, the loss for the Qing Immortal Sect actually involved the fall of three Earth Immortals, slightly worse than the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. It was precisely because of this that for the first half of these three thousand years, both the Qing Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had only two Earth Immortals each. On the highest level of combat capability, the strength was in a state of equilibrium. And while the Qing Immortal Sect had more Human Immortals, facing the defensively positioned Jiuzhou Immortal Gate protected by the Earth Immortal formations, they could do little. In the later half, when the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s strength recovered, and the Sect gave birth to two more Earth Immortals, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had also regained their strength. Their recovery was even faster. Because they now had four Earth Immortals, the manpower lost during that decisive battle had been fully recovered. Even their mid to high-tier Human Immortals, due to the expansion after that war where the Jiuzhou Immortal devoured the nine nations of the Western Domain and even expanded slightly into the Southern Domain, had greatly increased resources. The number of Human Immortals was several more than three thousand years ago, and their strength was considered enhanced. On the other hand, from Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s perspective. Though three thousand years had passed, the top-level combat power lost too much, and even now it has not fully recovered. Compared to the previous five Earth Immortals, now there are only four, one less than before. Moreover, the territories under their control, compared to three thousand years ago, have completely lost the entire Southern Domain during this prolonged period of weakness. Compared to the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, the Qing Immortal Sect is experiencing a decline while the other is rising. Now relying on being a large and established sect, this period of decline has not had a significant impact, and the Qing Immortal Sect can still control the situation, maintaining most of the Changqing Domain. Chapter 1359 - Chapter 1359 Chapter 536 The Birth of Whales and Fallen Objects_3 ?Chapter 1359: Chapter 536: The Birth of Whales and Fallen Objects_3 Chapter 1359: Chapter 536: The Birth of Whales and Fallen Objects_3 ¡°` But if Time were to pass for even longer, for instance, several hundred years more, Yao Baojuan would reach the end of his lifespan and perish. Then, the Qing Immortal Sect would suffer the loss of yet another Earth Immortal, and the strongest one at that. Without Yao Baojuan, the Qing Immortal Sect would have only three Earth Immortals left, compared to the four at the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, one less. This had never happened before in the tens of thousands of years of conflict between the two. For the Qing Immortal Sect, it was an unimaginable disaster. Because this signified an imbalance of power between them, indicating that the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had officially surpassed the Qing Immortal Sect in strength. When we were stronger, it was already difficult to halt the aggressive expansion of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Now weaker than our opponent, wouldn¡¯t they be able to annihilate us soon? For the Qing Immortal Sect, this was hard to accept. And the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had indeed already demonstrated this point. During these three thousand years of peace, they were the first to recover their pre-war strength, while their opponents were still weakened. Therefore, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate began to infiltrate the Southern Domain and started expanding within the Changqing Domain, displaying a strong aggressiveness and threat. If not contained, letting the opposition acquire more territory and resourcesa€| Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? This new round of decisive battle between the two was not least because Yao Baojuan and the many True Persons of the Qing Immortal Sect saw this coming. They realized that if they didn¡¯t do something, they would be at a significant disadvantage in the future and would ultimately be destroyed by the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. That¡¯s why they made an early counterattack before Yao Baojuan¡¯s death, while their own side still held some advantage. In this great war, they actually did not seek to completely eliminate the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, but only to replicate the decisive battle of three thousand years ago, which would be enough for them. As long as they could once again take down two Earth Immortals from Jiuzhou, even if they themselves lost two Earth Immortals, it would still be a gain. Because Yao Baojuan, who was already determined to die in this battle, would not live much longer anyway. To take with him the young Jiuzhou Earth Immortals, severing their future, was certainly a win. Furthermore, the new generation of the Qing Immortal Sect had already been retrained and was growing up, many of whom were promising talents. These individuals did not participate in this decisive battle, but rather were arranged by the Qing Immortal Sect to stay in the rear as the core force, defending their homeland. After this generation died in the battlea€| Within a millennium, a new generation would rise up and become Earth Immortals, carrying the sect¡¯s new banner. The new generation of Earth Immortals is growing up. Then, the preservation of the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s Tao Inheritance for the next few thousand years wouldn¡¯t be an issue. Yao Baojuan, in dying, would also fulfill his greatest concerns and wishes and could face the ancestors and his Master after death. By disrupting the rising trend of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate before the imbalance of power, and replicating the decisive battle from three thousand years ago, they would restore the balance between the two sides. this was the primary motivation for the Qing Immortal Sect to initiate this great war. However, this move by the Qing Immortal Sect inadvertently also helped Taiping Dao. If the outcome was as the Qing Immortal Sect hoped, then both they and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate would lose two Earth Immortals each, and the ones to die might well be old powerhouses such as Yao Baojuan and Meng Jianshan, late-stage Earth Immortals. Then the greatest threat that these two Daoist sects posed to Taiping Dao would instantly diminish by a great deal. Within the same Great Realm, cultivators in the later stages could usually easily resist several initial-stage cultivators. In more outrageous cases, they might even dominate over a dozen initiates. Regarding Lu Yuan, even if both the avatars of Yi Dancheng and Che Shidao, as well as his true self, all became Earth Immortals, and with Qing Guanzi already at the Earth Immortal stage, Taiping Dao might have four Earth Immortals, essentially quadrupling its strength. ¡°` ¡°` But even with such strength, if the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate or the Qing Immortal Sect were to send a late-stage Earth Immortal Grand cultivator, they would still easily overpower the Taiping Dao in a fight. One person could suppress an entire sect. This absolute disparity in strength was also the reason why Lu Yuan dared not provoke these two major Daoist sects. There was no way around ita€¡± the gap was too large. If you can¡¯t win, you just can¡¯t. If you provoke them, you would just get killed. He wasn¡¯t looking to die, so naturally, he wouldn¡¯t do such unwise things. ¡°After this battle, I estimate that Yao Baojuan, Meng Jianshan, and other longstanding powerful figures who only have a few hundred to a thousand years of lifespan left, will most likely sustain heavy injuries and fall prematurely due to the excessive loss of vitality in this battle. Even among the newly promoted Earth Immortals of the two families, I expect one or two will perish. In the end, the better-off sect may retain three Earth Immortals, while the unfortunate ones might have only two; or both might be left with only two. And their respective Human Immortals would likely suffer casualties over half. The two dominant powers of the Changqing Domain will see their strength halved after a single battle. Our Taiping Dao, which initially had a gap of six to seven times their strength, would suddenly see the gap shrink to only two or three times. And the strongest amongst the Changqing Domain would shift from being late-stage Earth Immortals like Yao Baojuan to mid-stage Earth Immortals from the intergenerational figures like Song Xiren. Although a mid-stage Earth Immortal cultivator is still strong, their oppression over us is far less than that of a late-stage Earth Immortal. They originally thought that even if their strength greatly diminished after the battle, having two or three Earth Immortals left in their sect, including a mid-stage, would still make their power several times greater than that of our Taiping Dao, and we would still struggle to pose a threat to them. And in a thousand years, we might have accumulated some strength, but they would have already restored their power in these two or three thousand years. By comparison, they would still hold the advantage. They would also be able to use this advantage to suppress us, and we would still find it difficult to threaten them. It was with this mindset that they felt confident to engage in a great war without worry for the future. But what they don¡¯t realize is that the true foundation of our Taiping Dao lies in the expedited method of the Fortune Dao. Now that we have the territories of five nations and even the name of the Southern Domain, our speed of gathering Qi Luck has increased exponentially compared to before. When we only had three nations, it might have taken a thousand years for us to reach immortality through the Fortune Dao. But now, with five nations and a domain, it would only take three hundred years for one of the three of us to become an Earth Immortal. Within a thousand years, all three of us could achieve Earth Immortal status. If we can seize this window of opportunity and, within the thousand years after this war, cultivate you, Che Shidao, and even myself to become Earth Immortals, then the Taiping Dao may be able to take this chance to leap to become the Immortal Sect with the most Earth Immortals in the entire Changqing Domain. Even though none of us four are mid-stage cultivators, with the advantage of numbers, we could still hold our own without falling behind in contention with the other two sects that have yet to recover. By then, we would truly unify the entire Southern Domain, and even advance to further expand our territory. The power dynamics of the Changqing Domain would shift from the original struggle for supremacy between two powers, with one merely making up the numbers, to a genuine tripartite balance of power, all competing for the Central Plains.¡± Lu Yuan looked at Yi Dancheng as he spoke of the new strategy that he had formulated over the years, amidst the atmosphere of warfare between the two sects. As the saying goes, the fall of one mighty whale gives rise to myriad beings. The two major immortal gates within the domain are declining due to their battle for dominance, presenting a perfect opportunity for the Taiping Dao and others lying in wait, seeking a chance to grow stronger. Lu Yuan was waiting for that moment. ¡°` Chapter 1360 - Chapter 1360 Chapter 537 Disciples Travels ?Chapter 1360: Chapter 537 Disciples¡¯ Travels Chapter 1360: Chapter 537 Disciples¡¯ Travels Having decided to lie low for a while, Lu Yuan led the Taiping Dao in that very direction. To say he was merely lying low was not entirely accurate; Lu Yuan simply had no intention of getting involved in the wars to the north, nor did he intend to pursue further expansion in the Southern Domain, or, to be precise, within the Changqing Domain. However, he remained very active in seeking opportunities in other directions. For instance, on this day. Upon finishing his daily cultivation at Mi Yun Mountain¡¯s Yi Dancheng, Xiao Jingyi, his eldest disciple, approached him just as he stepped outside the door, reporting, ¡°Master, Junior Brother Yang has returned from his travels and has brought back Dark Frost Iron to present to the sect.¡± Xiao Jingyi was a disciple Yi Dancheng had taken in ten years ago, and he was one of the seven within the Taiping Tao Sect who had already met the requirements to ascend to Human Immortal status. His origins lay with the Qing Mountain Pavilion¡¯s elder position, a faction that had been assimilated. But that was all in the past. After joining the Taiping Dao, Xiao Jingyi became a true disciple and rapidly rose through the ranks to become the leading disciple of School Leader Yi Dancheng, promising a future bright as brocade. ¡°Dark Frost Iron, I remember that is one of the higher-ranked Immortal-grade materials listed in the sect¡¯s reward records.¡± Yi Dancheng recalled the details of Dark Frost Iron and nodded in approval, ¡°Very good, very good. That Yang Xiuan was able to find this treasure and is willing to offer it to the sect is truly comforting. Order the Task Hall to record his meritorious deed in accordance with the rules, and issue all his rewards, we must not let down those who contribute to the sect.¡± Ever since the emergence of true disciples like Xiao Jingyi, who had already met the requirements for becoming immortal and were only short of securing a nation¡¯s Qi Luck for nourishment in preparation for ascension, Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Among many tasks, aside from the usual demon elimination and regular patrolling duties, what drew the most attention was the task of gathering various Immortal-grade materials to present to the sect. These tasks not only offered the highest contribution points but also, in some sense, could be completed the fastest. As long as you have sufficient Immortal-grade materials, handing in a few could quickly meet the requirements for exchanging a nation¡¯s Qi Luck. In less than two years, they could amass the resources needed for ascension. The true disciples would then have an extra two or three hundred years to meet the other requirements for becoming immortal. Among the three criteria of Magic Power, Divine Powers, and the Great Tao of the Immortal Method, relying solely on one for ascension ultimately had a high success rate, but the foundation laid would be the shallowest. Those with some ambition would not be content with just one criterion. With enough time, everyone would want to cultivate one or two more Dao Fruits to approach the Immortal Realm with a deeper foundation. So when these rewardable tasks were announced, all the disciples within the sect who felt they could make the leap to the Immortal Realm were instantly abuzz. The fastest to react were naturally Xiao Jingyi and others who had been the upper echelon of a sect or clan and controlled the heritage of a cultivation family or Immortal Sect. Despite Qing Mountain Pavilion and others being regional minor Immortal Sects or families, they had inherited traditions for thousands of years. ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï Over such lengthy periods, the accumulated cultivators within these gates and families reached several hundreds of thousands. Among these hundreds of thousands of cultivators, there were always some lucky ones who ventured out, found various treasures, and then brought them back to their sects or families. Some spent thousands of years cultivating a wealth of rare materials. The cumulative gains from generation to generation, even though much was used, still left a very profound foundation to this day. Previously, in order to win over these minor Immortal Sects without seeming too greedy, Taiping Dao left most of the cherished belongings of these sects to their original owners, which meant the higher-ups of these sects. So people like Xiao Jingyi were actually quite wealthy. After the reporting of tasks, for their own path to immortality, they handed over their precious collections to the sect in exchange for a massive amount of contribution points. Compared to those disciples with a scattered cultivator background, they were already a step ahead. ¡°Yes, Master,¡± Upon hearing the instructions from his Master, Xiao Jingyi hurriedly agreed and after a moment of hesitation, he bowed respectfully and requested, ¡°Master, I¡¯m still lacking quite a few contribution points to exchange for the Qi Luck of a nation. If I stay within the sect to perform tasks, at the very least it would take a hundred years to meet the requirements. I¡¯m already close to five hundred years old, and I have less than half of my lifespan remaining. I wish to travel for a while to explore and unearth secrets, to seek Immortal Treasures for the sect, and to earn contribution points for myself. I have failed in my filial duties by not being able to serve you, please grant your permission, Master.¡± When Qing Mountain Pavilion merged into the Taiping Dao, as an elder within the Pavilion, Xiao Jingyi did receive a share of its resources. But truth be told, his share wasn¡¯t much. Out of it, there were only two pieces that qualified as Immortal-grade materials. With this offering, Xiao Jingyi had only met half of the requirement needed to exchange for a nation¡¯s Qi Luck. To gather the rest, if he were to perform just the usual sect tasks, it would take at least a hundred years. Yet Xiao Jingyi was already nearing five hundred years of age, and if he spent another hundred years on tasks, he would only have two hundred years of his lifespan lefta€¡±by no means enough to cultivate another requirement for becoming immortal. He had only satisfied the criterion of Divine Powers for immortality. Whether it was Magic Power or the Great Tao, he was far from fulfilling either. Chapter 1361 - Chapter 1361 Chapter 537 Disciples Journey_2 ?Chapter 1361: Chapter 537 Disciple¡¯s Journey_2 Chapter 1361: Chapter 537 Disciple¡¯s Journey_2 However, merely becoming immortal with divine powers had an extremely low success rate; Xiao Jingyi did not have the confidence that he would surely become an immortal, so he thought of making more preparations. Actually, after the sect issued a reward for immortal materials, like him, many fellow disciples with some family resources, after contributing their own immortal materials, still found it hard to make up the rest for the contribution exchange. They then took up missions one after another, venturing out to explore, hoping to come across favorable opportunities. But until now, among those who had gone on such journeys, only Yang Xiuan had returned with gains. Yang Xiuan was the clan leader of the Yang Family of Wind Thunder Fortress. After joining Taiping Dao, he had taken most of the family¡¯s foundation with him. Therefore, for this immortal material reward mission from the sect, he brought out four immortal materials in one go, fulfilling most of the requirements. Having journeyed out again, he successfully returned and handed over a piece of Dark Frost Iron. With this contribution, Yang Xiuan definitely satisfied the requirements for exchanging a nation¡¯s Qi Luck. And the other party was younger than Xiao Jingyi, with more than 300 years of lifespan left. With such a long lifespan, even deducting a hundred years for becoming immortal, if he put in some effort, he could actually cultivate another requirement for becoming immortal. At that time, the probability of his becoming an immortal would greatly increase. Perhaps in three hundred years, he could witness the other party becoming immortal and address him as True Person. Such an opportunity naturally made Xiao Jingyi envious. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Thus, he, who had previously hesitated about whether to journey out, was finally decided by seeing the encouragement from his fellow sect members, and that was to go out. If he did not go out and merely relied on biding time within the sect, even though he could wait for an opportunity to attempt entering the Immortal Realm, likely he could only end up failing midway through the path of becoming immortal. Going out to try his luck would give him more opportunities, and even if he failed to achieve results, he could still return to the sect and endure the hardship again. He had a sufficient lifespan; traveling out for a hundred years and returning would still leave him enough time to perform tasks, enough time to make an attempt on the Immortal Realm. The worst case would just be returning to the current state. Considering this, what was there to hesitate about? He decided to go out and do it. ¡°If you have such lofty ambition, then as your master, I naturally support you,¡± Watching his disciple who came to seek permission, Yi Dancheng smiled and praised, then thought for a moment and took out a spirit talisman from his bosom, ¡°This is a Gold Shield Spirit Symbol I have refined, in face of danger, activate it to summon a gold shield to protect you. Even faced with a True Immortal, it can defend against one or two attacks, vying for a chance for you to escape. Since you wish to travel, as your master, I have nothing else to give, so I¡¯ll give you this talisman.¡± ¡°Thank you, Master!¡± Seeing this, Xiao Jingyi immediately expressed his joy and thanks. Yi Dancheng waved his hand, ¡°No need for such formalities, since you¡¯re going out to travel, you should go back and prepare now.¡± ¡°Yes, then I won¡¯t disturb Master any longer, I¡¯ll take my leave first.¡± The latter quickly withdrew. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï After he left, Yi Dancheng thought for a while, then turned around and went to find his true body to report this matter. Lu Yuan, upon hearing this, couldn¡¯t help but nod in satisfaction, ¡°The disciples are all eager to travel out, and someone has already successfully brought back Immortal Treasures?¡± Having disciples offer various kinds of immortal materials to exchange for merits was his idea. The goal was simple, to leverage the advantage of the Dao Fruit of Qi Luck, to cultivate as many avatars as possible, specifically Earth Immortal avatars. Until now, with Taiping Dao¡¯s current level, ordinary Human Immortals no longer played a big role. Looking at the current battle between Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, it was clear that a dozen Human Immortals together were not as reliable as a single Earth Immortal. And for the future dominance of the Changqing Domain, Taiping Dao could only rely on Earth Immortals. Thus, ordinary Human Dao Fruit was no longer of much use to him. Lu Yuan¡¯s main task now was to produce more, like Yi Dancheng and Che Shidao, who had the potential of Earth Immortal Dao Fruit Immortal Artifacts. In this regard, Jin Qingyue, who came later, actually fell short by a lot. Because the potential of Jin Qingyue¡¯s original body, that is, the Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade, was actually only at the level of a Human Immortal, and a lower quality one at that. In the future, it would probably just reach mid-level Human Immortal, with extremely limited power. Such an avatar certainly would not meet Lu Yuan¡¯s requirements. Hence, his plan at this stage was to collect more materials, and then refine the Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade, raising its potential to the level of an Earth Immortal. Although he had already refined an avatar, it still couldn¡¯t change the fact that Jin Qingyue was a Dao Fruit Immortal Artifact. Since it was an Immortal Artifact, it of course could be re-refined to enhance its quality. But to do so, it would definitely require a lot of materials. Since Lu Yuan had previously used up his family resources to modify the Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade, and now was penniless, of course, he couldn¡¯t do this. Therefore, he turned his attention to the disciples of the sect. Taiping Dao already had several thousand disciples by now, among them both those with rich family resources and those with exceptional Qi Luck. Extracting from these people was still capable of yielding quite a bit of essence. Not a few years had passed since he had already collected quite some materials. Although far off from upgrading Jin Qingyue greatly, he had already taken a not so small step towards this goal. Waiting for another five to six hundred years, or perhaps a thousand years, would be about enough to gather everything. By then, Lu Yuan¡¯s hand would have an additional Earth Immortal avatar, which naturally brought joy. Therefore, seeing this, Lu Yuan continued to instruct, ¡°Since the disciples all like to go out, and it¡¯s even become a trend, then let¡¯s make it a rule. Let all disciples who have reached the Five Qi Towards Primordial state must go out to travel for a hundred years.¡± Chapter 1362 - Chapter 1362 Chapter 537 Disciples Journey_3 ?Chapter 1362: Chapter 537 Disciple¡¯s Journey_3 Chapter 1362: Chapter 537 Disciple¡¯s Journey_3 ¡°Let them go out and seek treasures for the sect,¡± ¡°Even those below the Five Qi Towards Primordial can be encouraged to travel more, rather than always staying in the sect. ¡°What can you possibly achieve from constantly working behind closed doors? ¡°Out there lies a vast world of opportunities, various Immortal mansions, Heaven and Earth¡¯s spiritual objects, all waiting for the young ones to claim them. ¡°If they don¡¯t go out and try their luck, how will they know if they are not the fated ones?¡± ¡°It just so happens that the North is bustling with activity, and Taiping Dao doesn¡¯t have any particular enemies; it¡¯s unlikely that anyone would target our disciples specifically if they travel. ¡°The situation is much safer than before, so there¡¯s even less reason to hide in the Mountain Gate. ¡°That being the case, when you go back, tidy up and polish this message and pass it down.¡± Yi Dancheng nodded, ¡°Yes, I will prepare upon my return, and the notice can be sent out in two or three days.¡± As an avatar, its interests naturally aligned closely with the original body¡¯s; it also hoped for more companions to rely on in future conflicts. Facing this request, there was no reason to refuse and was fully supportive with both hands and feet. Having discussed the disciples¡¯ travels, Lu Yuan then asked, ¡°How has the battle in the North been progressing recently? How many from the Qing Immortal Sect have died, and how many of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s magic formations have been broken?¡± As time passed, twenty years had elapsed since the conflict between Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate began. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Although so much time had gone by, the great war in the North hadn¡¯t finished yet, and it felt as though it had only reached the midway point, with the climax still to come. Of course, this was the situation from a broader perspective. In the eyes of outsiders, the war in the North had already become extremely intense, even brutal. ¡°The state of war remains unchanged from before. Last year, Qing Immortal Sect launched a fierce attack on the Northwestern region of Red Maple Country, and at the cost of a thousand disciples and a Human Immortal, they managed to conquer nearly half the country¡¯s territory, breaking through thirty-three of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s magical altars in one stroke. But then, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate restored the thirty-three altars in the rear and recovered their great formation. While Qing Immortal Sect gained some ground, they still couldn¡¯t completely break through Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s defensive formations in the North, and the two sides remain deadlocked,¡± Yi Dancheng laid out the latest developments on the battlefield, ¡°As for the battlefield in the center of the region, Yao Baojuan and Meng Jianshan fought another major battle. Both sides employed their tactics well, but neither gained the upper hand and eventually both withdrew with injuries back to their formations. Qing Immortal Sect tried to push the frontline but was quickly repelled, failing to take over any territory of Tianmen Country. It ended in a stalemate.¡± Lu Yuan lamented, ¡°Another thousand cultivators dead, plus a Human Immortal. Including these, Qing Immortal Sect has lost seven Human Immortals and four thousand cultivators over these twenty years, right?¡± Truth be told, the two major Daoist sects in the North are truly deserving of their dominant status. Over the years, as Lu Yuan watched the fierce battles unfold in the North from the safety of the South, he could sense their brutality. And it filled him with fear and trepidation. Look, a Human Immortal, in any ordinary Immortal Sect, would be the pillar of the sect, the strongest expert. But on the battlefields in the North, they are merely charge commanders, leading troops to fight to the death. And when they fall, several die together, and those spearheads have perished by the thousands. And these casualties are just the beginning. It¡¯s terrifying to imagine how many more will die if the battle reaches its peak period, or even when the war ends. In comparison, with the resources at my disposal, if I were to participate in the Northern battlefield, I feel like just a few battles, maybe lasting three to five years, would completely deplete them. This struggle between Immortal Sects is indeed brutal. It¡¯s too costly; too costly indeed,¡± he sighed repeatedly in his heart. ¡°Indeed, seven True Persons have died,¡± Yi Dancheng confirmed with a nod, and then explained, ¡°However, of the deceased True Persons, only three belonged to Qing Immortal Sect, the rest were True Persons from affiliated Immortal Sects. Of the four thousand cultivators who died, only half were from Qing Immortal Sect. In this regard, Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s losses are actually not that significant; excluding Earth Immortals, they¡¯ve only lost one-sixth of their sect¡¯s strength. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? To lose only one-sixth of their manpower after twenty years of combat, Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s foundation remains very deep. On the other hand, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, which has the entire Western Domain as its territory and barely any vassals, has also lost three True Persons in twenty years of warfare and over a thousand disciples have fallen. This loss isn¡¯t much better than that of Qing Immortal Sect. Continuing this way, it is Jiuzhou that will likely be worn down first.¡± Although Jiuzhou Immortal Gate is on the defensive and has the advantage of the terrain, Qing Immortal Sect ultimately has much more strength. Moreover, for cultivators who possess various Immortal Techniques and Divine Powers that can alter Heaven and Earth, geographical advantage is significant, but such extraordinary abilities are sufficient to make up for many disadvantages. One magical formation can have many effects but cannot solve all problems. Like now, with Qing Immortal Sect willing to endure twice the casualties to exchange for victory, there¡¯s not much Jiuzhou Immortal Gate can do. This is the disparity in strength.¡± Lu Yuan shook his head, ¡°Qing Immortal Sect is hurting themselves to harm the enemy. They¡¯re using the lives of their vassals and their own deep reserves to wear down Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. However, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, focusing solely on the five main Jiuzhou sects, indeed cannot outlast Qing Immortal Sect. But behind them, the other four Jiuzhou Tao Inheritances stand ready. If the Western Domain really reaches the point of exhaustion, the other sects certainly won¡¯t just stand by; they will send support. As to who can outlast whom in this war of attrition, it¡¯s difficult to say.¡± This current situation is not unprecedented. Just depending on the five sects of the Western Domain, they definitely can¡¯t beat Qing Immortal Sect, but with the entire Jiuzhou Tao Inheritance, the power dynamics could shift. Even excluding the Radiant Immortal Dynasty, which has become increasingly indifferent towards the Jiuzhou Sects, the combined strength of the remaining eight Tao Inheritances is actually enough to match Qing Immortal Sect. Considering these factors, Lu Yuan isn¡¯t very optimistic about the progress of Qing Immortal Sect.¡± Chapter 1363 - Chapter 1363 Chapter 538 Immortal Venerate Speaks ?Chapter 1363: Chapter 538 Immortal Venerate Speaks Chapter 1363: Chapter 538 Immortal Venerate Speaks ¡°Qing Immortal Sect may not outlast the Nine Provinces, but at present, its power remains strong. In the past two decades, with relentless attacks every day, they have broken through numerous defenses of the Nine Provinces, and the territories they have plundered together are nearly the size of a country. Among the nine countries in the Western Domain, the Nine Provinces have already lost one. As for the losses suffered by the Qing Immortal Sect, they are just over six to one.¡± Upon hearing what the avatar had to say, Yi Dancheng couldn¡¯t help but speak, ¡°With a six to one advantage over their nine to one, even if we were to fight until we lost more than half of our forces and ceased hostilities due to exhaustion, the Qing Immortal Sect could still take two more countries, while the Nine Provinces would lose three countries in this war. After losing more than half of its soldiers, the Qing Immortal Sect could station troops on the spot, construct magical formations, and still hold onto the territories won. Moreover, after the great battle, the Nine Provinces wouldn¡¯t have much remaining strength to counterattack. If the Qing Immortal Sect follows this strategy, then even if they cannot annihilate the Nine Provinces in this Western Expedition, they can still heavily damage their vitality and greatly expand their own territories. With such a significant victory, the opposing side would also achieve its goal, having weakened the Nine Provinces and strengthened themselves, which cannot be considered a defeat. If the Nine Provinces are unwilling to submit and gather their forces to retake their lost lands after their crushing defeat, then the Qing Immortal Sect can simply sit within their magical formations and wait for the enemy¡¯s attack. Their current situation could then be reversed to reoccur. The Nine Provinces would have to sacrifice a large number of lives in order to break their magical formations. Within a few years, the remaining forces of the Nine Provinces would likely be depleted. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? And with a large number of cultivators dead, the Tao Inheritance of the Nine Provinces would naturally cease to exist, and the Qing Immortal Sect would likely be able to break through the Western Domain and return to its dominant position. If the Nine Provinces do not launch a counteroffensive, they would still suffer the painful loss of three countries, likewise a heavy loss. The loss of three countries for them, an increase of three countries for Qing Immortal Sect. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï As this gain and loss continue, even though the Qing Immortal Sect might suffer heavy losses now, with these newly acquired territories, they will surely recover in a thousand years and be stronger than the Nine Provinces. The challenging situation they face today would then be resolved. The planning of the Qing Immortal Sect thus comes to fruition.¡± Yi Dancheng presented another strategic goal for the Qing Immortal Sect, which is that they don¡¯t necessarily need a complete victory; even a partial victory, even if it is bought with lives, can already be considered a win. After all, what they fear is not the current Nine Provinces but the future Nine Provinces. Currently, the Nine Provinces are in a rising period, while the Qing Immortal Sect is in a period of decline. The reason they can maintain an advantage now is only due to their deep heritage. But this heritage will one day be exhausted, and the Nine Provinces will eventually grow to a day when they cannot be contended with. If they do not take advantage of the current situation to break the rising momentum of the Nine Provinces, it will be a significant threat in the future. Thus, the Qing Immortal Sect resolutely sent out their troops. So in this war, they actually do not need a complete victory; a partial victory, even one bought with lives, is enough to serve their purpose. The Nine Provinces, without three countries and with most of their manpower dead, even if they survive in the end, will lack the strength to contend with the Qing Immortal Sect for at least the next five thousand years. Securing a five-thousand-year buffer period for future generations is already enough for Yao Baojuan, the current School Leader of the Qing Immortal Sect. It took him five thousand years to lose the dominant position of the Qing Immortal Sect in the Changqing Domain, which was his fault. Now, he intends to personally make amends for this mistake. To fight for another five thousand years for future generations, to give them enough time and resources to correct the current faults. Children have their own luck. If he, the sinful School Leader, can achieve this before his death, he would also have some dignity to meet the Master and the Ancestors. This is also the greatest obsession in Yao Baojuan¡¯s heart. ¡°What you said is also true, it is not necessary for the Qing Immortal Sect to have a complete victory; achieving a partial victory is also a win,¡± After listening to his Avatar¡¯s words, Lu Yuan thought for a moment and nodded, ¡°However, no matter whether they win completely or partially, as long as we can grow according to the plan within a thousand years, their hard fight today will ultimately be making a wedding dress for us. Over a hundred and twenty years have passed, and nourished by the Way of Control Pneuma, I have broken through from the early stage of a Human Immortal to a mid-level Human Immortal, significantly advancing my cultivation. You and Che Shidao, over these hundred some years, must be close to completing your accumulation and breaking through to the late-stage Human Immortal, right?¡± The biggest feature of the Way of Control Pneuma is its extremely fast speed of cultivation. By burning life, one year can be equivalent to other people¡¯s five or six years, or even a dozen years. Lu Yuan has ascended to the Immortal Realm, and from the day of becoming immortal until now, it has been one hundred and twenty years. His rate of cultivation is about eight times that of peers at the same level. With the amplification of fate from the Immortal Realm, he can add another two or three times, which means his cultivation speed is roughly ten times that of ordinary people. In other words, with sufficient resources, he has spent about twelve hundred years advancing from the early stage of a Human Immortal to the mid-level. Frankly, this speed can only be considered as below average among ordinary Human Immortals. However, Lu Yuan himself only has average potential, and due to a lack of Spiritual Energy in the Nine Provinces, he was always starved during cultivation, which is like being malnourished since infancy, and his Dao Fruit was not very stable when he became immortal. This led him to spend a lot of time making up for his foundation after becoming immortal. That he now has such a rate is already quite extraordinary. For other True Persons from Immortal Sects who are not the focus of cultivation, after becoming immortal, they might remain at the early stage until death. Those who reach mid-level are few and far between. In this sense, the fact that Lu Yuan was able to burn his lifespan and advance to the mid-level state in just over a hundred years is unimaginably fast from other people¡¯s perspectives. It¡¯s almost like a dream. Going to sleep for a nap, one could only imagine such a thing in a dream. Therefore, Lu Yuan is actually satisfied with the progress of his cultivation. Nevertheless, his advancement in cultivation is merely that, and he does not feel overly delighted about it. Chapter 1364 - Chapter 1364 Chapter 538 Immortal Venerate Speaks_2 ?Chapter 1364: Chapter 538 Immortal Venerate Speaks_2 Chapter 1364: Chapter 538 Immortal Venerate Speaks_2 As a practitioner of the conserving path, Lu Yuan has always adhered to a principle of caution. He would avoid taking the stage himself if possible, and for dangerous tasks, sending an avatar would suffice. Why should he, the great original body, personally take action? Hence, he was not in a hurry regarding his own cultivation level. After all, even if he became an Earth Immortal, Lu Yuan had no intention of going to the front line to confront his peers in combat. With his longevity Dao Fruit almost ensuring him a position as a Heavenly Immortal, he could eventually become a Great True Person simply by enduring through his lifespan. With such a vast future ahead of him, why risk the blades and arrows, fighting desperately with others like a reckless man? It would be losing his dignity for nothing. Since he did not intend to take the stage personally, the one who could act was only the avatar. Since it was always the avatar doing the risky tasks, it was only natural to prioritize the cultivation of the avatar. The original body could stay hidden behind the scenes, not having to show up or go to the front line in the future. Being in the safety of the rear, protected by so many avatars, it was natural for his cultivation level to advance at a slightly slower pace. Therefore, over the years, of the resources from the nine countries in the Southern Domain occupied by Taiping Dao, aside from one country used by Lu Yuan for cultivation, a portion was given to Jin Qingyue after several decades. When Jin Qingyue became immortal, the remaining Qi Fortune of the four countries was evenly shared between Yi Dancheng and Che Shidao for their use. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï Receiving the support of two countries each, their cultivation had naturally progressed extremely swiftly over the past hundred years or so. As for Qing Guanzi, he was already an Earth Immortal. And as a Middle Grade Dao Fruit Immortal Artifact, without more materials to enhance his own quality, his cultivation level could not be advanced by any further. Although a Dao Fruit Immortal Artifact has many advantages, its own quality is also the greatest constraint, inherently having an upper limit. Unlike ordinary immortals who, theoretically, can infinitely improve themselves given enough resources and time. This was a kind of regret in its own right. After all, in the world, nothing is truly perfect. Upon being asked, Yi Dancheng pondered and replied, ¡°I have now grasped the threshold of the late-stage Human Immortal; I estimate that in another three to five years, I should be able to break through the barriers and step into the late-stage realm. Che Shidao over there should be similar.¡± With the focused resources of Taiping Dao, his cultivation level indeed advanced rapidly, from an actual mid-level Human Immortal bolstered by the power of magical treasures to the combat strength of a late-stage Human Immortal. Soon, he would truly become a late-stage Human Immortal. This was a rather remarkable progress. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Hearing this, Lu Yuan could not help but laugh loudly, ¡°Just three to five years, they will flash by in the blink of an eye. Once you and Che Shidao achieve late-stage Human Immortal, you can then start advancing towards becoming Earth Immortals. If you two receive the support of two more countries for two hundred years, you should be able to reach the perfect stage of Human Immortal. Then, taking charge of four countries alone for another two hundred years, benefiting from their support and contemplating the Earth Immortal Great Dao, you should also be able to achieve the Earth Flower Dao Fruit. In this way, it will take at most six hundred years for you two to succeed in becoming immortals one after another. And six hundred years later, the many disciples under us, traveling abroad, may have also gathered numerous precious materials, and I will have elevated Jin Qingyue to the quality of an Earth Immortal as well. By then, it would take him another two to three hundred years to achieve Earth Immortality. When he becomes immortal, we¡¯ll still have a hundred years until our millennium ascension period. By that time, I may have also reached the perfect stage of Human Immortal and could attempt to achieve Earth Immortality. If it really comes to that, with our Taiping Dao being a sect with five Earth Immortals, won¡¯t the Changqing Territory be ours for the taking?¡± It has to be said that after gaining dominance in the Southern Domain, Taiping Dao indeed acquired the foundation of an emperor. With this foundation, Lu Yuan¡¯s ambitions went directly from achieving ten Earth Immortals in ten thousand years to five Earth Immortals in a thousand years. This rate of accumulation has increased fivefold. And all of this was thanks to the Qing Immortal Sect. Had it not been for their substantial assistance in the beginning, where would Lu Yuan have found the justification and the strength to quickly conquer the Southern Domain? Qing Immortal Sect, such good people! He could not help but exclaim this in his heart. However, despite the appreciation, he had no choice but to regard this good brother as a future formidable adversary and began scheming against them from this moment on. There was no other way. This struggle for the Great Tao, the position of a Heavenly Immortal, was right before him. As long as Lu Yuan wished to become a Great True Person, it was impossible to give up the hegemony of the Changqing Domain and hand it over to someone else. As cultivators, although they also value righteousness and friendship, such courtesy is worthless compared to the Great Tao. Any person in his position, even someone as sincere as Li Ruoqing, would not forsake the Great Tao for the sake of righteousness. Because in the eyes of immortals, the Tao takes priority over righteousness. The Tao is the foundation, while righteousness is just a derived and trivial offshoot. If the foundation does not exist, how can the branches and leaves survive? The Immortal Path cherishes self-interest; this saying, which has been circulating in the Immortal Realm for many years, has already clearly explained the nature of cultivators. Therefore, after outlining the grand plan, Lu Yuan definitively summarized, ¡°Time is on our side, whether the Qing Immortal Sect wins or loses in this battle, and regardless of whether the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate is gravely weakened in the end, it doesn¡¯t signify much. As long as in a millennium, all of us can become Earth Immortals, then the overall situation will be determined. Even if the two sects come to their senses, set aside past grievances, and unite against us, they will not be able to curb the rise of Taiping Dao. We cultivate the Fortune Dao, and our accumulation of strength is much faster than theirs. At most, these two sects can contend with us for two or three thousand years before they will each collapse, a fate that has been sealed from this moment. This is the convergence of the right time and the right conditions. Now, let us continue to lie low, build up strength, and wait to make our move after a thousand years.¡± Having made his determination, Lu Yuan then ended the discussion with his avatar. Chapter 1365 - Chapter 1365 Chapter 538 Immortal Venerate Speaks_3 ?Chapter 1365: Chapter 538 Immortal Venerate Speaks_3 Chapter 1365: Chapter 538 Immortal Venerate Speaks_3 Taiping Dao, continuing to hold a steady position in the Southern Domain, quietly observed the raging war to the north, waiting for the right moment. ¡­ While Taiping Dao was evaluating the northern warfare, far away, tens of thousands of miles away in Dongyang Mountain, a discussion concerning the war in the Changqing Domain was also underway. Dongyang Mountain, a major sect dominating a region, now had a Great True Person presiding, its momentum as rising as the morning sun, brimming with vitality, its future beyond measure. Logically speaking, for such a major sect, the minor disputes of neighboring neighbors should not be of much concern. To the north, there were no Heavenly Immortals; the battles between Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, heated as they were, were merely minor skirmishes among Earth Immortals. For a Heavenly Immortal Great True Person, watching such skirmishes was like watching ants fight, without the slightest interest. Even if a clear victor emerged from the north, producing a Chosen One who achieved the Heavenly Flower Dao Fruit and ascended to the status of a Great True Person, While certainly noteworthy, for other Heavenly Immortal major sects, it simply meant one more peer; for Dongyang Mountain, it merely meant one more neighbor. The impact was actually not significant. Since the birth of Immortal Sects, at the level of Heavenly Immortals, conflicts between two Great True Persons were generally rare. In Donghua Continent, for nearly a million years, there had been no reported conflicts at the Heavenly Immortal level. Among ordinary Immortal Sects, frequent battles were common, but at the level of Heavenly Immortals, such things suddenly disappeared, no longer heard of. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? It was as if the once fierce and combative cultivators, upon becoming Great True Persons, began to cultivate their morality and became peaceful and non-aggressive. Their entire personalities changed. Regarding this, within Donghua Continent or even within the Immortal Realm, mortals, immortals, ghosts, monsters, and demons all had their own speculations and discussions. But those Great True Persons kept their mouths sealed, not disclosing the reasons, leaving others to speculate. Various arguments were hotly debated among the masses, debated for many years without a convincing consensus ever being reached. It seemed that only by oneself becoming a Great True Person, becoming a Heavenly Immortal, could one truly understand the truth. But achieving the status of Heavenly Immortal, how difficult is that? In the entire Donghua Continent, the total number of Heavenly Immortals was barely more than ten. In comparison, there were over a thousand Immortals and millions of cultivators. Becoming an Immortal was already difficult, let alone becoming a Heavenly Immortal, which was even more so, almost a far-fetched luxury. ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Hence, the reasons behind the dramatic change in the nature of each Heavenly Immortal also remained unanswered. But one thing was certain to everyone. That is, conflicts among Heavenly Immortals were rare, and their enthusiasm for territorial expansion was also extremely weak. Every Great True Person seemed only interested in maintaining their own domain, never thinking of expansion. Even if their neighbor was as vulnerable as Changqing Domain, lacking a Great True Person and utterly defenseless, absorbing them had never crossed their minds. This peculiar phenomenon just appeared so outlandishly. Thus, whenever a Great True Person fell, many aspiring to Heavenly Immortality from various factions would swarm together, fighting to establish a dominion for themselves to earn a Heavenly Immortal Dao Fruit. Now, the two major powers in Changqing Domain were able to battle unreservedly for nearly ten thousand years, precisely because of this inexplicable reason, without fear of being annexed by Heavenly Immortal powers like Dongyang Mountain, thus focusing on their strife for supremacy. Otherwise, with a Great True Person watching next door, no matter how courageous they were, they would not dare to encroach near the other. But now, this Great True Person of Dongyang Mountain, who usually didn¡¯t pay much attention to his neighbors or show much interest in expanding territory, had emerged from two years of seclusion, learned of the conditions to the north, and summoned several of his disciples to inquire about the northern warfare. Inside Dongyang Great Hall, the Great True Person of Dongyang, Shi Junyang, called a few of his disciples and after gaining a rough understanding, turned to Wang Shizhou who had previously had dealings with the north, and asked, ¡°Shizhou, have the Jiuzhou and Changqing factions in the north resumed hostilities?¡± Wang Shizhou had once traveled to Changqing Domain to rescue his disciple Li Ruoqing, and during that time, he stayed in Taiping Dao¡¯s territory and formed a friendship with the next School Leader of Changqing Immortal Sect, Song Xiren, over several days. Since then, over the past hundred-plus years, Song Xiren had frequently corresponded with him through letters. Since the war resumed twenty years ago, even though he was on the front line, Song Xiren had sent several letters discussing battlefield matters, thus Wang was substantially informed. Not to mention, on Taiping Dao¡¯s side, Qing Guanzi had also shared many secrets from the front line as stories with his fellow daoist. Thus, upon hearing his Great True Person¡¯s question, Wang Shizhou immediately stepped forward and replied, ¡°Immortal Venerate, from twenty years ago, the Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate started an all-out war again.¡± Now the war has raged for twenty years, both sides have lost ten Human Immortals and numerous disciples, thousands in number, both suffering tremendous losses. Moreover, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate has had many of its formations broken, losing nearly a region¡¯s territory, and is now in decline.¡± Changqing Immortal Sect thereby boosted their morale and is now preparing to launch an even fiercer offensive; within the next five or six years, the final decisive battle between the two sects is expected.¡± Wang Shizhou combined the information from his two friends and truthfully answered. Upon hearing this, Shi Junyang couldn¡¯t help but sigh: ¡°The slaughter on the battlefield, the infighting within the Immortal Sects, I find it unfortunate.¡± Seeing this, Wang Shizhou, curious, asked, ¡°Immortal Venerate usually secludes himself for cultivation and seldom concerns himself with the affairs of the sect, let alone the Outer Territory. The two sects in the north have been fighting for ten thousand years, yet Immortal Venerate hardly ever inquired about it before. Why, upon emerging from seclusion this time, did you begin to inquire about it, does this northern battle involve our Dongyang Mountain?¡± With these words, several of Wang Shizhou¡¯s fellow disciples also curiously looked towards their Great True Person. To prompt Immortal Venerate to speak, there must be something special about this battle in the north. Otherwise, given Immortal Venerate¡¯s temperament, even if the two sects were fighting fiercely enough to turn the entire Changqing Domain into wasteland, he would not spare it a second glance. Yet now he had spoken up and specifically called them to ask about it, which was indeed unusual. How could this not make the disciples curious? Chapter 1366 - Chapter 1366 Chapter 539 The Method of Variolation ?Chapter 1366: Chapter 539: The Method of Variolation Chapter 1366: Chapter 539: The Method of Variolation ¡°Indeed, there has been a change of events.¡± In the face of his disciple¡¯s curious inquiry, Shi Junyang didn¡¯t hide or hold back. He chuckled lightly, readily answering, ¡°Mainly because after I emerged from my own Cave Mansion, returning to this Immortal Realm, I had a sensation. Observing the secrets of Heaven, I discovered that within the Changqing Territory, there unexpectedly appeared the aura of an old friend who was believed to be seated in meditation and passed away. Thus, out of curiosity, I simply inquired.¡± An old friend¡¯s aura? And one that was already seated in meditation and passed away. The implications behind this truth indeed caused a great stir in the hearts of several people in the hall. What kind of person was their Immortal Venerate? The ones he could call old friends from a lifetime, after much thought, could only be other True Persons. Yet, the Immortal Venerate said that it was the aura of a Great True Person who had already passed away that reemerged. Doesn¡¯t this suggest that a certain Great True Person who had previously died has come back to life? The sudden appearance of a Great True Person right beside their own domain, how could it not make everyone feel their minds shake? Wang ShiZhou swallowed hard and asked with difficulty, ¡°Immortal Venerate means to say, a Great True Person has emerged in the Changqing Territory?¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Shi Junyang shook his head: ¡°No, I only said there was an aura that appeared. I never said my old friend was resurrected. It seems that my old friend left behind some legacy or Magical Treasures within the Changqing Territory that later generations have unearthed. Therefore, it led to the appearance of my friend¡¯s aura, making me sense it and become aware of this matter. There is still no Great True Person in the north, you should not panic. Furthermore, even if a Great True Person appears, they will not invade another domain casually. With me here in this domain, what have you to fear?¡± After glancing at his disciples, Shi Junyang understood their thoughts and couldn¡¯t help but admonish them. ¡°We were panicked, Immortal Venerate, please forgive us!¡± Hearing the Immortal Venerate¡¯s admonishment, the disciples hastened to bow and ask for forgiveness. ¡°Enough.¡± Shi Junyang waved his hand and then, after thinking for a moment, added, ¡°In that Changqing Territory, if someone can benefit from the legacy of my old friend, their future will be boundless. With the current conflict between the Nine Spirits and Changqing, the emergence of such a time is surely a mystic response from Heaven. It seems that although there is no Great True Person in the Changqing Territory at the moment, perhaps within the next ten thousand years, a Great True Person should emerge. By then, I shall have another peer, which would be a great fortune.¡± Upon saying this, Shi Junyang¡¯s face revealed a hint of a smile. Although he wasn¡¯t very fond of going out, nor did he wish to interact too much with others, Seeing his peers of the same realm increasing in number brought him a kind of consolation. It proved his path was not solitary; the Immortal Method was thriving. At his level, facing the realm above Heavenly Immortals, there is still no clear conclusion within the Immortal Realm. Nor has anyone heard of the existence of those who have reached this realm. Moreover, due to the differences in individual cultivation paths, which are often incompatible with each other like water and fire, it¡¯s hard to refer to each other¡¯s practices. Therefore, every Great True Person is groping upward alone, fumbling in the dark to forge a new path. The process is arduous. If you encounter the slightest hurdle and fail to surpass it, calamity would descend immediately. This is also the reason why the Great True Persons in the Changqing Territory fell so quickly. Because he made an error while probing forward in the cultivation of the Heavenly Immortal path, he thus succumbed to calamity. And this calamity is actually quite simple. The realm of Three Flowers Gathering is also known as the three realms of an Immortal. The Human Immortal Realm in the Great Tao is about learning and imitating, as well as applying it. To put it simply, it means being able to borrow the power of Heaven and Earth from the Dao one cultivates. The Earthly Immortal Realm is about mastering and merginga€¡±mastering a Dao of Heaven and Earth through study and integrating one¡¯s own Cultivation into it, drawing upon this Great Tao of Heaven and Earth to nourish and enhance one¡¯s own Dao. Upon reaching the Heavenly Immortal Realm, after one¡¯s own Dao has absorbed enough nourishment from Heaven and Earth, it then separates again from the Great Tao of Heaven and Earth, becoming independent. But how easy is this step? If you have already merged with Heaven and Earth, even drawing sustenance from it, and have become one with Heaven and Earth, Then your desire to separate is seen by Heaven and Earth as rebellion, as self-harm. Of course, they would not agree. Thus, a Heavenly Immortal who wants to separate their Dao to become independent has to use force, to separate forcefully from Heaven and Earth. But even at the level of a Great True Person, when facing the vastness of Heaven and Earth, one is still as insignificant as dust, with no ability to contend. However, if one cannot become independent, then one is doomed to remain Earth Immortal, forever constrained by the rules of Heaven and Earth, living ten thousand years only to fade away inconsequentially. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Only by gaining independence, breaking free of the constraints of the rules of Heaven and Earth, and relying on one¡¯s own Dao for eternity, will the Dao not perish nor will the fruit be incomplete, and Lifespan will naturally be boundless. This is the secret to the Heavenly Immortal¡¯s immortal longevity. To break away from the rules of Heaven and Earth, to seize control of one¡¯s own Dao Fruit, is to enjoy eternal freedom. With such a temptation at hand, naturally countless predecessors have continued to search for the path to independence. Through the persistent exploration and summarization of those before them, a relatively mature approach has emerged, though the road ahead remains unknown. It is naturally very difficult to contend alone against the entire Heaven and Earth, but if one only contends with a small part of it, then the task is much easier. The concrete method involves occupying a domain, then merging oneself with the Great Tao of Heaven and Earth and gathering it within the domain, transforming it to cover one¡¯s own Dao. Next, one performs a secret method to sever most of the domain¡¯s connection with Heaven and Earth, preventing it from receiving too much support from Heaven and Earth. Then, a cultivator who wishes to become a Heavenly Immortal may attempt, in this restricted area, to gradually extract their own Dao and concentrate on their Heavenly Immortal Taoist Fruit. Chapter 1367 - Chapter 1367 Chapter 539 The Method of Smallpox_2 ?Chapter 1367: Chapter 539 The Method of Smallpox_2 Chapter 1367: Chapter 539 The Method of Smallpox_2 And as long as a trace could be extracted, then the Heavenly Immortal Taoist Fruit would initially form, and the position of Great True Person would also be certified. From then on, the path of one¡¯s self would be independent, unrestrained by Heaven and Earth, enjoying boundless Lifespan. At the same time, with absolute control over the Great Tao extracted, one could harness the full power of this path, naturally surpassing those ordinary Earth Immortals who only control the Tao of Heaven and Earth and could only rely on their meager authority to summon a fraction of this power. Simply put, it¡¯s like members, administrators, and group owners a€¡± three different identities corresponding to a single Great Tao, each possessing different permissions. Within a Great Tao (group), members (Human Immortals) can only enjoy the most basic permissions, which they must share with other members. Administrators (Earth Immortals) could, on this basis, obtain more permissions, mobilize more resources, and sanction those with lower levels of authority. The group owner directly controls the entire Great Tao and can decide what to do with this group, doing as they wish. And under the group, other members or administrators have no power to resist. To deal with them, it¡¯s just a matter of flicking one¡¯s finger, simply kicking them out of the group. Translated to the Immortal Realm, it becomes seizing their Great Tao with a single thought and destroying their cultivation. It has long been rumored in the Immortal Realm that cutting off the three flowers atop the head and breaking the five qi within the chest are seen as the greatest punishment and torture to any cultivator, with all cultivators greatly fearing this. Here, it refers to the deterrence of the Great True Person, a Heavenly Immortal, over the lower-level cultivators. When fighting peers, at worst they kill you and take your life, and in many cases, you could even escape. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã? But facing a Heavenly Immortal, they would directly ruin your Dao Fruit and destroy your cultivation, making thousands of years of hard work vanish in an instant. They would leave you alive, only to watch yourself plummet from Immortal to dust, making your existence worse than death. For many cultivators, this punishment is deemed unbearable, preferring to die with their cultivation intact rather than witnessing their Great Tao crumble and be worth less than ants. This is an unacceptable form of extreme punishment. The immense power of the Great True Person is thus evident. But although no longer restricted by authority and having directly become the group owner, one could not rest easy yet. This is because the Great True Person only took advantage by exploiting a loophole, stealing the Dao Fruit from Heaven and Earth, and managed to barely control such power. Facing Heaven and Earth, as long as the Heavenly Path detects the loophole and seals it back, it means breaking through the deceptive defenses set by the Great True Person and merging that domain¡¯s Heaven and Earth back with the Immortal Realm¡¯s. The Dao Fruit of the Great True Person would naturally be consumed instantly by the might of Heaven and Earth, and merge back with Heaven and Earth as one. Once merged back into one, having lost the independent Dao Fruit, the Great True Person would naturally be subject to the constraints of Heaven and Earth again, and the originally infinite lifespan of the Heavenly Immortal Dao Fruit would naturally burst. The ten-thousand-year limit of Heaven and Man would descend again, and for the Great True Persons whose Lifespan generally exceeded ten thousand years, their souls would instantly return to the netherworld, causing their physical demise. Therefore, the inspection by Heaven and Earth is also referred to as tribulation by the Great True Persons of this realm. How to avoid such tribulations has thus become the primary consideration of every Great True Person, and from this, numerous methods of Avoiding Tribulation have emerged. Although the methods vary, they also share some commonalities. For example, the reason a single domain¡¯s Heaven and Earth serves as the basis of this independent Dao Fruit, and why it is just one domain, is the result of continuous exploration by predecessors to find the optimal volume. Becoming a Heavenly Immortal requires the territory of one domain, which is the most widely recognized standard. The area of a domain¡¯s Heaven and Earth, just the right size, can essentially accommodate a complete Heavenly Immortal Dao Fruit. In terms of gathering the required territory of Heaven and Earth for the Great Tao, it does not exceed too much, preventing the force of Heaven and Earth from being too strong and causing too much resistance when separating the Dao Fruit, leading to failure. It is also not too small, preventing one¡¯s own path from exceeding the Heaven and Earth too much, ultimately causing the dispersal of the Great Tao and rendering the Heavenly Immortal Dao Fruit incomplete. Thus, the range of a domain is the most universally applicable scope confirmed by predecessors after continuous summarization. Based on this range, various Region Continents of the Immortal Realm, and even the various Sea Areas, autonomously divided up their own domain boundaries, passing them down from generation to generation, ultimately forming today¡¯s structure of the Immortal Realm. Of course, depending on the abundance or scarcity of their own Great Tao, each Great True Person also adjusts the range from which they separate Heaven and Earth to fit the most compatible state. The ways of each Great True Person differ, and the quantity of the Great Tao each achieves also varies, so it is difficult to set standards; this will not be elaborated upon further. Anyway, a Great Domain is confirmed to satisfy the needs of almost all Great True Persons. At most, a Great True Person makes adjustments and modifications within the Great Domain according to their needs. As previously described, in order to face the least resistance from Heaven and Earth when separating one¡¯s own Great Tao, each Great True Person strives to make the domain of Heaven and Earth they separate just large enough to accommodate their own Great Tao. Similarly, the lesser the Heaven and Earth they separate, the less likely it is for the Heavenly Path to detect it during its operational surveillance. A person would not notice a change in a single strand of hair on their own body, and naturally, the Heavenly Path would not either. Possibly, if you put a mole on the basis of the hair, and grow a dark hair from it, As long as it is within the visible range, it becomes hard not to notice abnormalities on it. This way, how to make oneself like a hair and not a noticeable dark hair has become a compulsory lesson for each Great True Person. This returns us to the initial question. How to minimize one¡¯s separation of Heaven and Earth as much as possible to avoid attracting the attention of Heaven and Earth has thus become the Art of Avoiding Tribulation. Chapter 1368 - Chapter 1368 Chapter 539 The Method of Smallpox_3 ?Chapter 1368: Chapter 539: The Method of Smallpox_3 Chapter 1368: Chapter 539: The Method of Smallpox_3 This gave rise to the perception of many lower-ranking cultivators in the Immortal Realm. That is, all the Great True Persons generally stayed within their own territories, hardly ever stepping out of their respective domains. They also strictly ordered their disciples not to expand the sect¡¯s territories into other domains. It was as if, in an instant. The cultivators who had previously fought ruthlessly for control of a domain and, after finally securing one, became Great True Persons themselves. Suddenly underwent a dramatic change in personality. From being aggressively ambitious, they turned to cultivating their morals and being good to others. They not only refrained from causing disturbances themselves, but strictly prohibited those around them from causing trouble as well. This immense contrast, naturally, led many people to gossip and harbor doubts. But only the Great True Persons themselves understood that this was not because they did not want to expand, but because they could not. In this realm, there was not only the concept of ¡°destiny¡±, but also of ¡°cause and effect¡±. If your sect members conquered the territory of another domain, that conquered territory would naturally become bound by destiny and cause and effect with you. Once connected, the forces of Heaven and Earth of that territory would unconsciously gravitate towards you, increasing the attention from the Heavenly Path towards you. The Great True Persons might have already been trying to limit their contact with the Heaven and Earth of this realm as much as possible to separate themselves from the Great Tao. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Now, those disciples under them were actively attracting more forces of Heaven and Earth to themselves, didn¡¯t that inadvertently make it more difficult for them to separate from the Great Tao? Attracting more attention from the forces of Heaven and Earth was effectively inviting calamity for the Great True Persons who wished to remain as unnoticed as possible, wasn¡¯t it? In light of all this, what do you think the Great True Persons would do? They would lay down arms in favor of culture, keep a close watch on their disciples to prevent them from wandering everywhere, and emphasize the cultivation of moral character and temperament, teaching them to know shame, uphold righteousness, and become pure in nature. They would not think of expansion, war, plunder, or annihilating entire families and clans every day. They would also delineate various unspoken rules in the Immortal Realm, stipulating that one must not casually destroy another sect, that one must adhere to the righteousness of the Dao, and that violators would be attacked by all under the heavens, among other things. All these were restraints and protections set by each Great True Person for his own disciples, for themselves, and for others. And the effects were indeed significant. In the Changqing Domain, which had turned chaotic, no Immortal Sect dared to openly destroy the Tao lineage of another sect. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Even a sect as brutal as the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, if seeking expansion, could only covertly use the hands of demons to provide cover for their actions. This was the effect of these rules and constraints in action. Once the mainstream culture of the Immortal Realm was established, each Great True Person could finally breathe a sigh of relief. They no longer had to worry about their disciples attracting disasters to them. They could peacefully hide at home and slowly detach from the Great Tao that had merged into the Heaven and Earth of their enclosed domain. After all, even though the Great Tao was now limited to an enclosed domain, disentangling from the Heaven and Earth within that domain was still no easy task. As was the case with Shi Junyang, who had been a Great True Person for tens of thousands of years now. Yet the Dongyang Great Tao that he managed to detach from within the Dongyang Domain was less than one ten-thousandth of the Great Tao of his domain. It could take tens of millions, or even a hundred million years to fully detach from it. Because of the prime example. In the Donghua Continent, there was a Heavenly Immortal who had already lived for a million years; despite striving for hundreds of thousands of years, he had not been able to achieve this great feat. And within the entire range of the Immortal Realm, no one had ever heard of someone who had successfully completed this journey. The difficulty of the process was evident. But however difficult, there was at least a path. That was certainly much better than the utterly despair-inducing life of an Earth Immortal, who lived only to die at ten thousand years. Even if they could only roam within one domain, and the entire process felt like being in prison, it still meant immortality, an unlimited lifespan, and cultivating alongside Heaven and Earth. Other Earth Immortals dream of being confined in such a prison, yet they don¡¯t even have the opportunity. The path to drawing boundaries as a prison in front of them had been figured out through the deaths of countless cultivators of the Immortal Realm over many long years. It was theoretically feasible and practically doable, but it was the only viable path that had yet to reach its end. This path had indeed aided the Great True Persons in achieving the state of heavenly blossoms, freeing them from the limits of their lifespans and granting them mastery over higher levels of power. Just this point alone was enough for numerous Heavenly Immortals to follow one after another, staking their entire lives on it. However, on this uncertain path, a person searching alone is ultimately isolated. If one could have more companions on this path of exploration, it would provide more motivation and confidence. Quite simply. If the number of people becoming Great True Persons increases, and more cultivate this path, perhaps someone will come out with a result, truly separating all their great paths and liberating themselves completely between heaven and earth? If such an exceptional talent indeed appears, especially for seekers like Shi Junyang, it would illuminate the path ahead. The followers then could walk this path, achieving twice the result with half the effort. And those like him, who are currently seeking the path, could see the hope of achieving it. Even if it only increases a bit of hope or viability, it¡¯s still good. Just this point alone was enough to make him exceedingly joyful for having more fellow paths. Thus, contemplating this, Shi Junyang looked at the disciples below and said, ¡°Since the Changqing Domain is to produce a Great True Person, to avoid hindering his achievement, from today on, my Dongyang Sect disciples shall not set foot in this domain for the next ten thousand years, until this Great True Person succeeds in his cultivation. We will just watch the emergence of Heavenly Immortals quietly from the south. This is a decree, once passed down, if a disciple violates it, he will immediately be expelled outside the door, no longer a disciple of my Dongyang Sect.¡± To avoid karmic entanglements and to ensure the safety of this soon-to-emerge fellow, Shi Junyang began taking some preventative and restrictive measures. ¡°Yes, we will strictly obey the command!¡± Wang ShiZhou and others, facing such earnest words from an Immortal Venerate, all sobered up and solemnly responded. ¡°Hmm, if that¡¯s the case, there is nothing more, you may all leave, I will continue my seclusion.¡± Shi Junyang nodded slightly, then began to dismiss the people. ¡°We take our leave.¡± Seeing this, the disciples also bowed and left. After everyone had left, Shi Junyang sat on the cushion for a while, pondering over this matter and murmured, ¡°Taoist Jiuling, seventy thousand years ago, you encountered a tribulation and left this world in haste. Now reemerging, I do not know who it is that has garnered your favor, receiving such legacy. In Donghua Continent, it has been fifty thousand years since a new fellow has appeared, I truly look forward to this new fellow, hoping he can join us in avoiding calamities together. This method of achieving Dao by guarding a domain is too lonely and arduous¡­¡± In the great hall, the sound gradually returned to tranquility. The scene today at Dongyang Mountain was also playing out within Donghua Continent, where many other Heavenly Immortal sects formerly associated with Nine Spirits Sect commenced similar actions. As the instructions from various Great True Persons were passed down, the outsiders heading to Changqing Domain for travel gradually decreased until no more people from the grand Immortal sects came. However, for the forces within Changqing Domain, they really had no time to be concerned with these matters. Nor did they have the inclination to care. The Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Changqing Immortal Sect fought more fiercely, both sides suffering heavy casualties, driven to a frenzy. In such circumstances, they would prefer fewer outsiders coming to avoid affecting the war. As for the Taiping Dao, Lu Yuan was also wholeheartedly focused on training avatars and besides daily cultivation, he constantly pushed his disciples to travel and bring back Immortal Treasures to refine Dao Fruit Immortal Artifacts. Busy in the midst of it all, he too had no energy to pay attention to these minor issues. Thus, this coordinated action by the major Immortal sects, aside from the major Heavenly Immortal sect knowing, barely garnered any attention. And so it remained unseen. Chapter 1369 - Chapter 1369 Chapter 540 Intent to Fight a Decisive Battle ?Chapter 1369: Chapter 540 Intent to Fight a Decisive Battle Chapter 1369: Chapter 540 Intent to Fight a Decisive Battle Time flies. While the major Heavenly Immortal sects from the outside world did not intervene, and the two inner sects fought each other relentlessly, and Taiping Dao quietly focused on development, ten years had blinked past. In those ten years, Yi Dancheng of Taiping Dao and Che Shidao, unbeknownst to outsiders, quietly advanced through the Late-stage Human Immortal. Several disciples from Taiping Dao, who had traveled abroad, returned to their sect with numerous rare treasures. Lu Yuan¡¯s plans for accumulation and development were steadily progressing. Similarly, in the north, after thirty years of warfare, the Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate were finally facing their decisive battle. Tianmen River. This river, once a grand river in the Changqing Domain, was now broken into sections, turning into several smaller rivers, completely losing its former grandeur. Cultivators who mastered Immortal Techniques and possessed various Divine Powers, who could manipulate stars and overturn seas, for those grand beings, such marvels were merely trivial. At Tianmen River, one of the main battlefields, the two strongest cultivators of the region, Meng Jianshan and Yao Baojuan, were clashing. With the powers of Late-stage Earth Immortals, second only to the Great True Persons among the Heavenly Immortals, they fought heedlessly. Not to mention a mere Tianmen Rivera€¡±they could level hundreds of thousands of miles into flat land if they wished. Not to mention, under their command, there were several Human Immortals and tens of thousands of cultivators. Though these followers¡¯ Strength wasn¡¯t comparable to Earth Immortals, they could form formations that temporarily wielded the power of Earth Immortals. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Scattered across various locations, their Spells and Divine Powers could easily demolish areas several miles wide. Human Immortals, with a mere wave of their hand, could turn hundreds of miles into scorched earth. Such massive destructive power had, over thirty years of war, turned the Tianmen River and its banks into an apocalyptic landscape. The mountains and rivers shattered, peaks collapsed, stretches of barren land lay waste, not a blade of grass growinga€| Scenes like these could be seen everywhere near the two great battle arrays. Fortunately, both sects had some bottom line; although they fought ruthlessly, they deliberately avoided areas inhabited by mortals. In places where battles were frequent, they even relocated the mortals to the rear, keeping them away from the battlefield. Thus, although the war was brutal, it was confined only among cultivators. For ordinary people, the damage wasn¡¯t substantiala€¡±only a few hundred thousand weren¡¯t able to retreat in time and perished. The last shred of decency of the Immortal Sects was preserved by these individuals. However, after fighting continuously for thirty years, both sides were exhausted, with innumerable disciples dead or injured. At this point, it was difficult for both to continue. Within Longquan Kingdom. A massive, celestial tree stood within the kingdom, its vast canopy covering the Heavenly Vault, allowing sunlight to reach the ground only through gaps between branches and leaves. The canopy even dropped branches downward, forming a thick barrier, sealing off the eastern bank of Tianmen River, and protecting Longquan Kingdom behind it. Even after thirty years of war, this Green Wood Immortal Array remained as stable as Mount Tai, showing no signs of weakening. The strength of this formation was no different from thirty years ago. In fact, over these thirty years, no one had attacked this place. Because Jiuzhou Immortal Gate simply lacked the Strength. They were short of both troops and manpower, already struggling just to defend. How could they spare force for a counterattack? ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? It should be noted that the attacking side, facing an enemy supported by a formation, would have to endure several times the casualties. Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was already in such a dire state; they lacked the capability to attack. However, the stability of the Green Wood Great Array seemed like a good thing. But for those hiding within this formation, it was quite the contrary. Because they were the attackers. If the enemy didn¡¯t approach, they would have no choice but to assault the enemy¡¯s formation across the bank. To attack an already established array would inevitably lead to heavy casualties. Over these thirty years, countless disciples from Changqing had their blood spilled over Tianmen River and their souls buried on the western bank. Just like now, within the Purple Cloud Sect¡¯s formation on the western bank, a brief and intense skirmish was drawing to an end. A group of bedraggled figures, under the protection of several Immortals, managed to escape the great array, hastily retreating into the Green Wood Immortal Array. Once back within their own territory, many cultivators finally stopped, catching their breath. The leading True Persons counted their ranks, each face filled with sorrow. But before they could lament, they saw in the distance within the large array, a tremendous roar as a gigantic green tree, carrying a person, flew back. Behind the tree, a mass of clouds pursued, and more clashes followed. Finally, amid the shaking tree shadows, a figure staggered back into view. The crowd hurriedly gathered around. ¡°School Leader.¡± The leading True Person, bowing to the returning Yao Baojuan, reported, ¡°In this array-breaking attempt, we lost over a hundred disciples. Only about eighty came back. Among the True Immortals, Junior Brother Yuan received minor injuries, and Junior Brother Tian is severely wounded; he won¡¯t be able to join the battle for several months.¡± While he spoke, the True Person Tian, unable to suppress his cough, coughed twice. The crowd looked over and saw his face pale as gold paper, his breath weak, his aura mostly dissipated. It was clear at a glance that he was gravely injured. ¡°Ahem, ahema€|¡± Yao Baojuan, following with his own cough, listened to the report. After glancing at the many retreating soldiers, he said in a weak voice, ¡°No need for more words. Let the disciples rest for now. The other True Persons, follow me back. We¡¯ll summon the others for a meeting; I have an important matter to discuss.¡± Chapter 1370 - Chapter 1370 Chapter 540 Intent to Fight a Decisive Battle_2 ?Chapter 1370: Chapter 540 Intent to Fight a Decisive Battle_2 Chapter 1370: Chapter 540 Intent to Fight a Decisive Battle_2 ¡°Yes.¡± All the people quickly nodded and then went about their own duties. Yao Baojuan led his people back to their residence in the Longquan Kingdom, entered the grand hall for discussions, and took his seat at the head. The other True Persons who accompanied him also took their seats after a gesture. Then, as they awaited other True Persons to arrive, everyone took the opportunity to recuperate. Those who were injured healed, those who needed to recover their energy did so, and before Yao Baojuan spoke, no one said a word. After a while, the remaining True Persons who had been left to hold the fort arrived one after another. After performing courtesies, and with everyone assembled, Yao Baojuan glanced at the people below. At this moment among those seated below, there were only five True Immortals left. And this number, thirty years ago, was ten. Thirty years had passed, and of the original ten True Immortals, only half remained. It wasn¡¯t just the True Immortals, even the ordinary disciples, those who were part of Longquan Kingdom that day, numbered eight thousand. But as the war had progressed, only three thousand remained. The wounds inflicted upon the Changqing Immortal Sect by the war had been so cruel. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 At this point in the conflict, the side of the Longquan Kingdom, Changqing Immortal Sect could hardly hold on any longer. Thinking of this, Yao Baojuan sighed in his heart, then stood up, looked at the five True Persons below, and said solemnly, ¡°My fellows, since our Changqing Immortal Sect engaged the remnants of Nine Spirits in battle, it has been thirty years. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? In these thirty years, we have lost five True Persons and five thousand disciples, our casualties exceeding half already. Today, we entered the enemy¡¯s formation again, destroying more than a dozen magic altars, but only killing forty or fifty of their disciples, while we lost half of our own number. If we continue like this, another ten years of battling will not break the enemy¡¯s grand formation, and Tianmen Country will not fall to us. And after another ten years, of the remaining three thousand disciples under our command, and even among those present here today, I fear less than a tenth will survive. It¡¯s better to die in a meaningful battle now while we still have some strength left than to perish senselessly like this.¡± As he reached this point, Yao Baojuan¡¯s tone intensified, and he said through gritted teeth, ¡°I am resolved. We will rest and recuperate for three months, allowing our disciples and yourselves to heal and recover. Once we have tended to our injuries, we will launch the decisive battle three months from now. All three thousand five hundred disciples of Longquan Kingdom, you five Human Immortals, plus myself as an Earth Immortal, will all come out of the nest to battle against those remnants of Nine Spirits. This battle, we plan to win or die. We swear not to retreat until the opponent¡¯s grand formation is broken. It¡¯s the same for all those under my command: those who dare to retreat in the battle against the remnants of Nine Spirits shall be executed without mercy!¡± The resolute tone and the killing intent in Yao Baojuan¡¯s words made all present shiver. Everyone felt the determination of the School Leader and had no doubt about his resolve to carry it out. Despite this, there were still those who could not help but come forward and persuade, ¡°School Leader, we have been fighting for thirty years now. The grand formation of the remnants of Nine Spirits on the opposite shore has been half destroyed by us. Tianmen Country, which they control, has also been mostly taken by us. Now, if we just persist in attacking for another ten years, at most one or two more True Immortals and a thousand disciples will perish, but we will be able to completely take the country. By then, we in the South Route battlefield will also claim a kingdom. As for the North Route battlefield, Master Song and the others have almost seized both the Red Maple and Black Fish countries. If we continue our efforts, in ten years, maybe we can conquer one more country. The advantage still lies with us. Continuously wearing them down, Nine Provinces will surely be the first to falter. We are indeed struggling, but the remnants of Nine Spirits are struggling even more. We still have five True Immortals and three thousand five hundred disciples. But they only have two True Immortals and about a thousand disciples left. This small number of people is even having difficulty maintaining the Earth Immortal formation. If we just grit our teeth and hold on, withstanding our current losses, in less than ten years, the opposing side will run out of disciples. Their formation, lacking defenders, will fall apart without an assault. Victory is within sight. Why the hurry? School Leader, please reconsider!¡± This True Person earnestly tried to persuade. Just as he said, the Changqing Immortal Sect was facing difficulty, but the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was in even deeper trouble. Continuing this war of attrition, while it meant mutual depletion of lives, still held a significant advantage for them due to their profound foundation. It was the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate that was really stretched thin. By now they had almost reached their limit of endurance. With the Earth Immortal formation, upon which they relied, about to fall apart due to lack of maintenance, victory was within reach. To engage in a decisive battle with the enemy at this time seemed far from a wise decision. ¡°Alas, I know what you say is reasonable, and to decide the battle after ten more years would indeed be the best time.¡± In response to the advice, Yao Baojuan looked at the many True Persons below, whose eyes held anticipation and pleading, yet he could only smile bitterly, ¡°It¡¯s just that I really can¡¯t wait for ten more years, cough cough¡­¡± With that, he felt a wave of tightness in his chest, and the magic power that had just calmed within him began to surge again. Hastily stopping his speech, he closed his eyes and focused on his divine soul, struggling to stabilize his breathing. After a while, he managed to calm the magic power inside him and suppress the injuries that wracked his body. Coming back to his senses, he saw the many True Persons below looking up at him with concern in their eyes. He couldn¡¯t help but sigh deeply, ¡°You see, I have suffered serious injuries. My divine soul and body are scarred beyond measure. Even employing secret methods, I cannot suppress or delay them any longer. In my current state, it¡¯s not just ten years I can¡¯t wait, even three more years would likely be too much. And once I am gone, there will be no one in Longquan Kingdom capable of holding back that Meng Jianshan. If so, even if you could wait until the Jiuzhou formation breaks, without an Earth Immortal to lead, and even if Brother Song sends another Earth Immortal from over there, who could possibly oppose them?¡± Chapter 1371 - Chapter 1371 Chapter 540 Intent to Fight a Decisive Battle_3 ?Chapter 1371: Chapter 540 Intent to Fight a Decisive Battle_3 Chapter 1371: Chapter 540 Intent to Fight a Decisive Battle_3 ¡°` Among the late-stage Earth Immortals, Grand cultivators like me and Meng Jianshan are the only ones within the Changqing Domain. If I leave, he will be invincible in the world. Now is the time to take advantage of my presence and engage him in a decisive battle to end this war. If we wait until I¡¯m gone, I fear the achievements we have made in the last thirty years will be in vain.¡± As Yao Baojuan spoke, his voice also carried a trace of desolation. With his original lifespan, he actually had over three hundred years left to live. But to resolve the threat from the Nine Provinces before the end of his life, he felt compelled to initiate this war. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 And for the sake of this war, he had no choice but to repeatedly venture into danger personally, leading his disciples into the heart of the enemy¡¯s formation. By his own strength, he held off the majority of the power of both Meng Jianshan and the formation, buying time and opportunities for other True Person disciples to break the enemy¡¯s formation and eliminate the disciples within their battle platforms. Yet his own strength was only comparable to that of Meng Jianshan; after nearly ten thousand years of fighting, neither had gained the upper hand. Even with the help of the Changqing God Wood, a Middle Grade Immortal Artifact, he could achieve a slight advantage, but against the power of the enemy¡¯s formation, the going was tough. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã0 He managed to endure this far by constantly overtaxing his lifespan and using such Secret Techniques, even squeezing the potential of his Immortal Artifacts to their limits. However, this method of overspending is ultimately unsustainable. In just thirty years, his remaining lifespan of over three hundred years has almost been expended. Even without overtaxing his life, Yao Baojuan can now live at most three more years. The True Persons below said that at the current rate of expenditure, if they hold out, the remnants of the Nine Spirits will collapse without a fight in ten years. But can he truly last ten more years? Without using Life-Burning Secret Art, he doesn¡¯t even have that long to live. But to continue the war of attrition, to break into the enemy¡¯s formation, to shatter their battle platforms, and to keep up the fight, how could it be possible without him desperately holding off Meng Jianshan and the formation? And if he wants to hold on, he can only continue to consume the little lifespan he has left. But Yao Baojuan is already clear that he only has enough life left for one more attack. Even this opportunity for an offensive cannot be delayed for too long, otherwise, if it takes too long, his remaining lifespan may not support the consumption of the Life-Burning Secret Art. In that case, it would truly be a point of no return. ¡°School Leader¡­¡± The many True Persons below had never imagined that their School Leader was injured to such an extent. One by one, they couldn¡¯t help showing sorrow, crying with red eyes. ¡°There¡¯s no need to be sad. To die for the great cause of the sect is a worthy end for me.¡± Yao Baojuan waved his hand to stop the crying, and spoke with composed resolve, ¡°My body won¡¯t hold out much longer. I can only use these three months to try and recover as much as possible from my injuries and then, in the best condition I can muster, seek out Meng Jianshan for a final showdown. This time, I will do my utmost to try and take him down with me. You all must do everything possible to eradicate those remnants of the Nine Spirits. The more remnants we kill now, the more peaceful years our disciples will have in the future. And the sooner we can restore the great cause of our sect, the less resistance we will encounter. Thinking of our future disciples and the sect¡¯s Tao Inheritance, three months from now will be the time for our decisive battle with those remnants. At that time, I will also send a message to Junior Brother Song to have him prepare on his side and coordinate an attack with me. After this decisive battle, regardless of victory or defeat, this war will have to end. We no longer have the strength to continue the offensive. What¡¯s left is to hold our ground, assimilate the regained territories of the Western Domain, and slowly lick our wounds and recover our strength.¡± ¡°` As for the remaining forces of Nine Spirits over there, whether they wish to continue, that¡¯s up to them. After all, we are guarding the grand formation, no matter if it comes to battle or peace, for the next thousands of years, it will only be them attacking.¡± Now, the Changqing Immortal Sect has reaped considerable rewards in warfare, and though we have indeed lost more than half of our disciples over the past thirty years, we have also achieved tremendous victories. Much of Tianmen Country, almost the complete territories of Red Maple and Black Fish Countries, carving into the land of the Three Nations, and one-third of the Western Domain, have all been taken by the Changqing Immortal Sect. The territories of the Jiuzhou remnants have directly shrunk by the expanse one Great Immortal Sect covered, substantially contracted, with severe loss of strength. In fact, from this moment on, the strategic goal that Changqing Immortal Sect had initially established, to weaken the strength and potential of Jiuzhou, has already been accomplished. With the loss of the lands of the Three Nations, Jiuzhou¡¯s chances of giving birth to Great True Persons have diminished by a portion. At the same time, with such a loss of disciples and kin, without over a thousand years¡¯ time, any thoughts of recovery are in vain. Especially for True Immortals, it could well take two thousand years to return to the status quo ante. Oh, that¡¯s incorrect. Now that they have even less territory, this period of recovery might have to be extended further, possibly up to three thousand years, and that¡¯s not certain. And with fewer disciples and fewer True Immortals, Jiuzhou¡¯s likelihood of giving birth to Earth Immortals has naturally diminished as well. This places them at a competitive disadvantage in terms of potential against Changqing Immortal Sect. The only regret. Is that after thirty years of warfare, many people and Immortals have died on both sides, yet not a single Earth Immortal has perished. Instead, it is on our side where Yao Baojuan, our strongest Earth Immortal, is barely holding on. Hence, he plans to rectify this final regret before his death. Either he will drag Meng Jianshan down with him, or at the very least, inflict a severe injury that would take his adversary decades to recover their vitality. And Meng Jianshan is not much younger than him, only five or six hundred years his junior. If Yao Baojuan is close to his limit, the other side isn¡¯t faring any better. If they survive this battle, at most they can only cling to life for another one or two hundred years. In a worse case, they might die within decades. This too can be considered as taking the other side down with him. With the resources of the Changqing Immortal Sect, even if Yao Baojuan were to die, relying on the remaining people to withstand Meng Jianshan for several decades to a hundred years, dragging it out until the opponent¡¯s death, is also feasible. And this is only the battlefield here. Song Xiren on the other side, is also preparing for a decisive battle. In the northern battlefield, several of Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s Earth Immortals have been significantly injured. But the Immortals of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate are not in much better condition, with several Earth Immortals also heavily wounded. Once the decisive battle commences, with both sides blinded by rage, the likelihood of Earth Immortals perishing is present. This confrontation is destined for both sects to again sacrifice tens of thousands of disciples, over a dozen Human Immortals, and at least two Earth Immortals. Only with such blood of Immortals, the violent calamity of this conflict cannot be quelled, thus bringing this war to an end. And the True Persons below, upon hearing these words, could not help but choke up and said, ¡°Yes, we will follow the School Leader, fighting to the death against those remnants of Nine Spirits, in the battlefield.¡± The True Immortals who had previously perished were only a minority belonging to the Changqing Immortal Sect. Most of the rest were from those vassal Immortal Sects. And after thirty years of bloody warfare, nearly all the True Persons from these vassal Immortal Sects have been killed off. On the side of Longquan Kingdom, only the direct line True Immortals of Changqing Immortal Sect are left. These individuals are, naturally, unwaveringly loyal to the Changqing Immortal Sect. Even now, well aware that in three months, their fate is uncertain, they are still prepared to battle for the sake of the sect. Chapter 1372 - Chapter 1372 Chapter 541 Battle Commences ?Chapter 1372: Chapter 541 Battle Commences Chapter 1372: Chapter 541 Battle Commences Having decided to prepare for the final battle, the members of the Changqing Immortal Sect naturally began their preparations. On that day, restorations were underway in the Longquan Kingdom, and upon receiving the orders from the School Leader, Song Xiren immediately began making arrangements at the northern battlefield. At both battlefields, the Changqing Immortal Sect was silently preparing. Of course, in order not to expose their plans, both locations continued their usual daily skirmishes, engaging in small-scale battles along their respective fronts as was routine. The battlefield was still cruel, it was just that battles involving True Persons were fewer, or even non-existent. However, this was normal. After all, after a great battle, it was common to take several months to half a year to recover, heal from injuries, and then fight again. It had already been thirty years since the war began. Even a sect as deeply established as the Changqing Immortal Sect could not withstand the loss of hundreds of disciples and the falling of several True Persons. By now, both sides were unsustainable. After each great battle, the rest periods became longer and longer. Hence, pausing the fight for three months wasn¡¯t surprising and wouldn¡¯t attract attention. With the Changqing Immortal Sect carefully covering up and deceiving those outside, it was naturally easy without much difficulty. After all, Yao Baojuan¡¯s health condition was a secret. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 Unless he revealed it, who could know? And without knowing the situation, it was very difficult for outsiders to respond accordingly and guard against the major actions of the Changqing Immortal Sect. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï Seizing this gap, Yao Baojuan ordered the True Person disciples in the Longquan Kingdom to guard the Green Wood Immortal Array while he took the opportunity to return to the sect. In the treasury, he took out all the remaining reserves. He then personally went to the Black Fish Country. Upon arriving there, Song Xiren personally came out to greet him, and after leading him in and taking their seats, Song Xiren asked, ¡°Senior Brother, seeing that you have come in person, is there something important as the great battle approaches?¡± Yao Baojuan nodded slightly, ¡°This battle concerns the rise and fall of our Changqing Immortal Sect for the next five thousand years. As the School Leader, it is my duty to be cautious and to worry day and night. Therefore, after much consideration, I have decided to make more preparations before the battle. For this reason, I specifically returned to the sect to collect some reserves that were originally set aside for the sect¡¯s revival to use in this battle.¡± As he spoke, he waved his sleeve, and numerous streaks of light flew out, landing before Song Xiren. Yao Baojuan pointed to these streaks of light and said, ¡°Here are seven Immortal Artifacts, five of which are Lower Grade and two are Middle Grade. These are all the reserves I have accumulated over the past seven thousand years since I took the position. Junior Brother, you also have one Middle Grade Immortal Artifact, and some other True Persons in our sect have a few Lower Grade ones. I have calculated it all, and with these artifacts that I brought, it just suffices for you and two other Junior Brothers, as well as some other junior disciples to each have one Immortal Artifact in hand. With these Magical Treasures as support, you will have the upper hand during the magical battles against those remnants of the Nine Spirits, and your chances of survival will greatly increase. Take these treasures, distribute them, and tell the other Junior Brothers and disciples not to hesitate to use the Immortal Artifacts in battles with the enemy. If necessary, it is permissible to destroy an Immortal Artifact to save a life. As long as you survive, there will be hope for the future.¡± Yao Baojuan gave many earnest instructions. Actually, the number of Immortal Artifacts at the disposal of the Changqing Immortal Sect was also not large. During the previous thirty years of war, he had already taken out over seventy percent of the Magical Treasures from the sect¡¯s treasury. All were distributed and used by the sect¡¯s disciples and elders. But how intense were the battles between the two sects? Decades of war had seen surviving Cultivators involved in dozens to hundreds of magical battles. Especially the True Persons, as the absolute forces, participated in every major battle. When they fought fiercely, employing a variety of methods, the battles became even more brutal. Often, after one or two major battles, their Immortal Artifacts would be damaged. After four or five battles, an Immortal Artifact could be declared spent. Thus, although many Immortal Artifacts had been distributed previously, under the wear and tear of numerous battles, not many remained. Only a few individuals, as main combatants who received continuous replenishments from the sect, still held an Immortal Artifact as a protective treasure. As for the others, they had to fight empty-handed, relying purely on Spells and Supernatural Powers. Just like this, those without Magical Treasures to protect themselves had their mortality rates greatly increased. Previously, considering that after the great battle, the Changqing Immortal Sect needed to preserve the current battle gains and face a long recovery period and numerous risks and crises, Yao Baojuan had to leave some reserves within the sect for future recovery and survival. However, in recent days, he had been feeling increasingly restless. He always felt that the future fate of the sect might not turn out as he wished; that it wouldn¡¯t be reborn from the ashes and revitalize after this critical battle. Something else might happen to their fate. As a Cultivator, such sudden premonitions often correspond to future events. Yao Baojuan naturally could not ignore this. Moreover, as he was close to passing away, his decisiveness was actually much weaker than in his younger days. So, after much deliberation, he still decided to make more preparations. Because Yao Baojuan felt that the reason for this unease was mostly due to the potential unexpected outcomes of the battle. The sect might struggle to rejuvenate if the loss was too severe in this battle, leading to the loss of too many personnel. Chapter 1373 - Chapter 1373 Chapter 541 Battle Commences_2 ?Chapter 1373: Chapter 541 Battle Commences_2 Chapter 1373: Chapter 541 Battle Commences_2 Just like the great war that took place three thousand years ago. Too many people from the sect died then, from the old generation, the middle-aged generation, to the young generationa€¡±three generations suffered heavy losses, and as a result, the sect had not been able to recover its vitality for three thousand years. And now, as this war has progressed, there are already faint signs of reliving the defeat that occurred three thousand years ago. Having experienced that painful lesson previously, he naturally became vigilant and dared not be careless again. Therefore, he decided, regardless of whether there was a future or not, to first get past this current difficult situation. If everyone dies, even if they have fought for a future, there will be no one left to inherit it. Instead of that, it would be better to expend some of the sect¡¯s potential future strength to ensure more people survivea€¡±this, in turn, unexpectantly might create even more future opportunities. This was the reason he had brought the treasures with him. To let more people survive, he was willing to consume the foundations of the sect¡¯s future revival. ¡°In addition to these seven Immortal Artifacts, I¡¯ve also brought Jade Restoring Pills, Soul Stabilizing Pills, Green Liquid Water¡­ these elixirs. They will allow you to promptly recover magic power during combat, heal injuries, stabilize the divine soul, and amplify magic power as well as enhance the might of various spells. There are also the Immortal Sect¡¯s Qingmu Talismans, Jinmu Talismans, and other such charms which are advantageous for this battlea€¡±I¡¯ve brought them all out as well.¡± These, too, you should distribute amongst the disciples.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Actually, there was no need to say much. As someone in the higher echelons of the sect and the next School Leader, Song Xiren had seen and used all these treasures before and knew their effects well. But perhaps because he was getting older and nearing the end of his life, Yao Baojuan¡¯s temperament had become more dawdling; he could not help but indulge in an old man¡¯s habit of rambling on, saying quite a lot. Song Xiren did not rush him, simply listening quietly by the side, occasionally chiming in with a few words. Because he knew, this might be the last time he saw his senior brother. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï After his senior brother returned, he would have to protect the sect with his life until the very end. Not knowing how long he spoke, Yao Baojuan finished recounting some past events and repeated some secret matters of the sect that had already been entrusted to him. Looking at the sky, it had unknowingly grown late. Seeing this, Yao Baojuan couldn¡¯t help but apologize, ¡°Look at me, senior brother, talking until it¡¯s almost evening. I just can¡¯t help but be verbose in my old age, please forgive me, junior brother.¡± Song Xiren sincerely said, ¡°It¡¯s fine, junior brother loves listening to senior brother speak.¡± Yao Baojuan sighed, shook his head, then stood up: ¡°Even if you like it, senior brother won¡¯t be able to speak for much longer. Time is already running short, I secretly came out, especially keeping it from Meng Jianshan. This matter can¡¯t be kept under wraps for too long, if I don¡¯t return soon, I¡¯m worried something will go wrong over at Longquan Kingdom. I must take my leave now. I¡¯ve said what needs to be said, junior brother, you are wise, make your own decisions.¡± With these words, he bowed deeply to the junior brother in front of him, solemnly saying, ¡°Senior brother doesn¡¯t have many abilities. The legacy passed down by our ancestors and the Master has declined to today¡¯s state under my hand. This School Leader has been utterly incompetent. Today I even have to exchange my life for a future. But while I can die, the foundation of the Qing Immortal Sect cannot be destroyed by my hands, and even less so by the future. Your talent, junior brother, is ten times greater than mine, and you are younger than I am, with good years ahead of you. Senior brother is incapable, and can only depart first. After my departure, the future and hope of Qing Immortal Sect will be in junior brother¡¯s hands. Please forgive senior brother¡¯s selfishness and continue to carry on with the Qing Immortal Sect, leading it to a better future with the mess I have left behind. If one day you manage to revive the sect, please let me know so that even if my soul returns to Heaven and Earth, senior brother can rest in peace.¡± ¡°Senior brother¡­¡± Upon seeing this, Song Xiren promptly came forward to assist his senior brother. After standing up, Yao Baojuan patted his shoulder, took a long, deep look at his junior brother without saying more. He turned into a streak of fleeing light and left the place. This departure marked a divide between life and death. ¡°Take care!¡± Song Xiren let the remaining words in his throat spill out, bowing toward the direction his senior brother had left in, and it was a long while before he got up. ¡­ After bidding farewell to his junior brother, Yao Baojuan returned to Longquan Kingdom. Upon his return, he distributed the remaining magical treasures, elixirs, and spirit talismans among the True Persons there, instructing them to take them back, refine them well, and familiarize themselves with them in advance to prepare for the upcoming decisive battle. He himself also selected a few powerful magical treasures and spirit talismans to slowly nurture, preparing for the battle with Meng Jianshan. The days that followed were very quiet. Aside from some minor conflicts that occurred occasionally between the two battlefields, nothing major happened. Time passed like flowing water, and three months came quickly. With the arrival of the date for the decisive battle, the atmosphere at both battlefields also grew increasingly tense. This was not because the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect on the other side had discovered Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s intention to fight a decisive battle. It was mainly because, after three months of recuperation, following convention, the cultivators on both sides, no matter how many injuries they had, should have almost fully healed by now. And once the injuries had healed, naturally, hostilities would resume. War means death, and both sides, no matter who they were, felt the tension. Nobody wanted to die. Therefore, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect began preparing for another coming battle, staying alert. However, their preparations, though numerous, were only for a common attacka€¡±enough to deal with a battle involving a few True Persons and several hundred cultivators. Such preparations, although significant, seemed insufficient when faced with the decisive battle that the Qing Immortal Sect was about to initiate. Chapter 1374 - Chapter 1374 Chapter 541 Battle Commences_3 ?Chapter 1374: Chapter 541 Battle Commences_3 Chapter 1374: Chapter 541 Battle Commences_3 This was precisely Yao Baojuan¡¯s intended goal. Feints within feints, nine truths for one falsehood. Indeed, he was marshaling forces on his side under the guise of preparing for a major conflict. But the true strategic objective was known only to him and the few high-ranking members within the sect whom he trusted. With this tactic, even if there were spies from the Nine Provinces among his followers, they couldn¡¯t discern his true intentions. Led astray by previous examples, the intelligence gathered by the Nine Provinces could only be mistaken. And with mistaken intelligence came incorrect responses. When war truly descended, these mistakes would become fatal flaws for the enemy. Today, a drizzle marked the rainy season, with overcast skies obscuring the sun and a persistent, fine rain driven by a slightly chilly breeze sweeping across the land. The moist earth on either side of the Tianmen River carried a hint of cold. Though this was weather unsuitable for commoners to venture out, it posed no obstruction for cultivators capable of flying through the heavens and burrowing into the earth. With just one spell, a cultivator could alter the weather instantaneously, transforming wind and rain into a clear day, cold into warm breezes. Such was the allure of cultivation. Thus, the expedition proceeded as usual, following standard protocol. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï ¡°This time, I will lead the charge with Nephew Yuan and Master Sun by my side. We will select two hundred disciples to accompany us, making an ordinary offensive as usual, in order to mislead the remnants of the Nine Spirits. Once we have attracted their attention, Nephew Tian will then lead two other fellow disciples along with the remaining one thousand and eight hundred in a flanking maneuver to breach another part of their formation. During this time, I will do my utmost to create opportunities for you, so you can find the weak points in the enemy¡¯s array, allowing us to achieve greater victories. The remainder, one thousand and five hundred disciples, will continue to stay and defend our Tianmen and Longquan positions, maintaining the Green Wood Immortal Array. In this way, even if we face defeat on this venture, the formation will remain intact, preserving our previous victories and allowing Master Song sufficient time to react,¡± Yao Baojuan repeated the battle plan before his audience of True Persons. ¡°Yes, we understand.¡± The True Persons nodded, solemnly accepting the command. ¡°Then, let us begin,¡± Yao Baojuan declared, seeing that everyone was prepared. ?¦Ï???.§ã? With a wave of his sleeve, he soared towards the opposite shore. The True Persons behind him immediately sprang into action according to the plan, each leading their disciples forth. In an instant, hundreds of fleeing lights shot out, chasing his figure and charging into the great formation on the opposite shore. ¡°Meng Jianshan, come and meet your match!¡± Brandishing his magical treasure to carve a path, Yao Baojuan, who had been the first to breach the enemy¡¯s ranks, hurled it, killing several startled and scattering Jiuzhou Immortal Sect disciples, then called out loudly without further attention to the others. ¡°Why so anxious, my friend? I am on my way!¡± A booming voice responded from afar, and soon Meng Jianshan¡¯s figure was rapidly approaching. ¡°Haha, good!¡± Yao Baojuan laughed heartily, his magical treasure transforming into a massive Qingmu and smashing towards his opponent: ¡°Take this hit from my magical treasure first!¡± Meng Jianshan didn¡¯t dare to slack off, flicking his sleeve and releasing a violet scarf that unfurled into a mist of purple energy, entwining itself around the incoming giant tree. The two Earth Immortal True Persons were immediately locked in battle. Meanwhile, the other True Persons and disciples who had accompanied Yao Baojuan took advantage of the duel to attack the closest magical arrays and altars, each finding their own opponents. The Jiuzhou Immortal Gate disciples within each altar began to activate their defenses, preparing for the onslaught. The cultivators in charge of the formations drew upon their power, pressing down upon the invading cultivators. Additionally, a group of mobile forces sought out the invaders, directly engaging the enemy. The battle, from its very inception, had escalated to its most intense state. Simultaneously. Dozens of thousands of li to the north, Song Xiren, having finished dictating the battle plans, led his fellow disciples into the fray against the Jiuzhou formations. In the north and the south, the two battlefields ignited the flames of war. The decisive battle had begun. Chapter 1375 - Chapter 1375 Chapter 542 Post-War Spoils Sharing ?Chapter 1375: Chapter 542 Post-War Spoils Sharing Chapter 1375: Chapter 542 Post-War Spoils Sharing ¡°` When news of the decisive battle in the north reached Lu Yuan, it was already three days later. At that time, the decisive battle between Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had already concluded. What came back was merely the outcome of this battle. ¡°What, the battle has ended?¡± Looking at Qing Guanzi, who had hurried back with those from Yi Dancheng, and the details both provided concerning the intelligence from Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Lu Yuan could not help but rise to his feet in shock. Just like Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, who was fooled, Taiping Dao had also been deceived by Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s actions. And they were even worse off. That was because to avoid stirring up trouble, Lu Yuan had always restricted his disciples from traveling to other areas of the Changqing Domain over the years, advising them to either travel elsewhere or within the Southern Domain. ¡°Do not go to the other two sects¡¯ territories to prevent conflicts that could draw the fire of war upon Taiping Dao and bring trouble upon ourselves.¡± Regarding the outcome of this battle, Taiping Dao mainly gained information from the two participating sects that had connections with them, who reported the progress on the battlefield in real-time. Although Lu Yuan had an understanding of the general course of the great battle due to relationships on both sides, he did not have to worry about either side concealing information. But it was common for the parties not to conceal information while possibly delaying some critical information by several days or even a month. Hence, there was a delay in some key intelligence. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? As in this case. Both Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, to prevent Taiping Dao from intervening at the moment of the decisive battle and aiding the other side, had unanimously chosen to conceal the battle and not relay the news to Taiping Dao. Only now, after the battle had finished, did they each send back messages informing of the final outcome. Thus, only three days after the battle did Lu Yuan belatedly become aware of the event, making it too late for him to react. ¡°Yes, according to intelligence from Changqing Immortal Sect, their School Leader Yao Baojuan, in the Tianmen decisive battle, sacrificed his life to kill Meng Jianshan by detonating three Magical Treasures, including one Middle Grade Immortal Artifact. At the same time, they mobilized over two thousand disciples from Longquan Kingdom, along with five True Persons, all plunging into the formation Meng Jianshan presided over.¡± Qing Guanzi was the first to receive the news, due to Changqing Immortal Sect delivering information the fastest, so he had the spare time to rush back from Jiuchuan Country to report in person, ¡°Because Changqing there had concealed the news too well, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was unprepared, and not long after the battle started, Meng Jianshan was directly entangled by Yao Baojuan, overwhelmed with three Magical Treasures, various Spirit Talismans, and other assorted mystical treasures to the point of disarray. Shortly after the battle, he sustained no minor injuries. The other participants from Changqing Immortal Sect then used a vast number of Magical Treasures and Spirit Talismans, as well as treasures specifically designed to break formations, upon entering the formation. With these, they suppressed the Earth Immortal formation and seized the opportunity to ambush and kill the Jiuzhou cultivators within the town. The Jiuzhou cultivators, outnumbered, were killed in large numbers on the spot. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Although eventually, as the formation began to operate, it slowly suppressed those formation-breaking treasures and started slaughtering the intruders. The Jiuzhou cultivators also suffered over a hundred casualties. Yao Baojuan, while the formation was malfunctioning, grievously wounded Meng Jianshan by self-destructing three Magical Treasures, nearly murdering him. Had the formation not recovered in time, granting him considerable assistance, Meng Jianshan might have been slain right there and then. However, with the formation¡¯s support, Meng Jianshan¡¯s strength surged, and with some breathing space, he finally came to his senses and began using the formation¡¯s power to confront his formidable foe. On the side of Yao Baojuan, after one failed burst attack, they were left with depleted resources. Even he, due to the excessive use of Secret Techniques and after the surge of power had dissipated, was hit with various backlashes, severely reducing his Strength. In the end, he barely held out in a fight with Meng Jianshan for a while longer, but due to the excessive backlash and grave injuries, he perished on the spot. Nevertheless, even though Yao Baojuan died, Meng Jianshan was not much better off. Rumors say that at the end of the battle, Meng Jianshan had lost a hand and a leg, the Tao Fruit Flower on his crown was shattered into pieces, and he was hanging by a thread, exhibiting signs of impending doom. In fact, apparently, it was true. After killing Yao Baojuan, Meng Jianshan did not continue to pursue other Changqing Immortal Sect cultivators within the formation but directly retreated to the back to recuperate in his Cave Mansion. Rumors say he has gone into seclusion, and there has been no word from him since, leaving his condition uncertain. As a result of this battle, Changqing Immortal Sect, having lost School Leader Yao Baojuan, two True Persons, and over eight hundred disciples, returned to Longquan Kingdom led by three True Persons with only over a thousand disciples, in utter disarray. Then they just held their ground within the formation, refusing to venture out. Now, Song Xiren has personally rushed back from the north to Longquan Kingdom to fortify this position, on guard against a counterattack from Jiuzhou Immortal Gate.¡± Qing Guanzi finished reporting the Tianmen battlefield news and then paused, giving Lu Yuan some time to digest the information before continuing, ¡°As for the northern battlefield, Song Xiren, leading two Earth Immortals, nine True Persons, and five thousand cultivators, also fiercely attacked the Jiuzhou formation. Like the Tianmen battlefield, they used a multitude of Immortal Artifacts, Magical Treasures, Spirit Talismans, and the like. Many cultivators even sacrificed their lives for stronger Divine Powers by utilizing numerous Secret Techniques. With such a do-or-die approach, Changqing Immortal Sect, at the cost of losing one Earth Immortal True Person, four Human Immortals, and three thousand disciples, decisively defeated Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. ¡°` Chapter 1376 - Chapter 1376 Chapter 542 Post-War Spoils Division_2 ?Chapter 1376: Chapter 542 Post-War Spoils Division_2 Chapter 1376: Chapter 542 Post-War Spoils Division_2 The commander of the battlefield in the northern region of the Nine Provinces, the School Leader of the Azure Dragon Sect, True Person Wang Chengfeng, who was at the mid-stage cultivation of an Earth Immortal, was slain on the spot by Song Xiren¡¯s formation. Most of the Jiuzhou Earth Immortal formation up north was broken. Besides the already conquered territories of Red Maple and Black Fish, another one, Shuangyan Country, was taken. And the Changqing Immortal Sect, taking these three countries as a base, reinforced the formation again, leaving only one remaining Earth Immortal, True Person Luo Yuping, leading the troops to defend this location without continuing the offensive against the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate.¡± After recounting the situation on both battlefields, Qing Guanzi made his final summary, ¡°Therefore, after this great battle, the Changqing Immortal Sect has greatly damaged its strength. Among the high-level cultivators, only two Earth Immortals remain, one in mid-stage, and one in early stage. There are also only eight Human Immortals left, less than half of the past. As for the lower-level disciples, only about six thousand remain. The overall strength is roughly only a quarter of what it was before the war. Such a loss is even more brutal than the showdown between two sects three thousand years ago. After this battle, it would take the opponent no less than three thousand years to recover their vitality.¡± Before the outbreak of the war, the nominal strength of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was four Earth Immortals, seventeen Human Immortals, and about twelve thousand lower-level disciples from various branches and the main body of the sects. In addition, among the vassal sects, there were also fourteen Human Immortals and about twenty thousand ordinary disciples. So the total strength of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was four Earth Immortals, thirty-one Human Immortals, and thirty-two thousand disciples. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï To date, only two Earth Immortals, eight Human Immortals, and six thousand disciples remain. This loss, coupled with the fall of Yao Baojuan, a late-stage Earth Immortal Grand cultivator, can truly only be said to be a quarter of what it was before the war. After hearing these war reports and summaries, Lu Yuan was simultaneously shocked and couldn¡¯t help but lament, ¡°The Changqing Immortal Sect fought so fiercely in this battle, with even the School Leader risking his life. It seems they were determined to suppress the rising momentum of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Although their goal has been achieved, and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate has suffered considerable losses, the Changqing Immortal Sect isn¡¯t much better off. Without so many Earth Immortals, Human Immortals, and even ordinary disciples, and with the recent expansion into four countries in the Western Domain, just managing these territories will consume a considerable amount of time. In the coming three thousand years, the Changqing Immortal Sect indeed won¡¯t be able to recover its vitality and will lack the strength to expand further. However, in their view, the trade-off of the current grievous losses for a beautiful future should be deemed profitable. After all, with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate weakened, and my Taiping Dao small, and with such large gains this time, they could outlast us even in a contest of time. Wait another three thousand years, and once the Changqing Immortal Sect has regained its vitality, perhaps they could fight another decisive battle. Not only targeting the Nine Provinces, they may even think about taking us, the Taiping Dao, down in the process. At that time, they could directly unify the Changqing Domain and revive their sect once more.¡± Lu Yuan understood the intentions of the Changqing Immortal Sect perfectly well. And he had never regarded them as unwaveringly reliable allies. The relationship between the two has always been one of mutual use and competition. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã? Just as he was now making preparations for a low-profile development, aiming first to gather five Earth Immortals. Then with a significant increase in strength, he planned to overthrow them in a thousand years. The Changqing Immortal Sect likewise wanted to bet on the future, hoping for a surge in strength after three thousand years to overthrow the entire Changqing Domain. Human nature is always the same. Immortals, being human as well, cannot avoid it. Lu Yuan had no particular feelings about this; having understood the situation of the Changqing Immortal Sect, he then turned his attention to Yi Dancheng and inquired, ¡°Now that we¡¯re clear on the Changqing Immortal Sect, how is the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate doing now?¡± Yi Dancheng had also digested the information about the Changqing Immortal Sect, compared it with what they had learned on their side, and then answered, ¡°The information from the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate is roughly the same as that from Changqing. On the Tianmen battlefield, Meng Jianshan slew Yao Baojuan and repelled the Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s offensive, preserving this region of territory. However, news regarding Meng Jianshan¡¯s severe injuries did not spread from the Nine Provinces. But piecing together information from both sides, it seems likely that it¡¯s true. Out of confidentiality and to stabilize morale, the Nine Provinces kept the news under wraps, preventing it from being publicized. However, I can¡¯t make out exactly how severe Meng Jianshan¡¯s injuries are. I can only say it¡¯s probably very serious. Taking into account his lifespan, after such an injury, even if he can save his life and heal his wounds, he probably won¡¯t have much time left.¡± Yi Dancheng first updated on the situation with Meng Jianshan. It¡¯s inevitable; after the death of Yao Baojuan, within the entire Changqing Domain, there remained only Meng Jianshan, the Changqing Immortal. As the current number one expert in the Changqing Domain, in a world where individual might could affect the rise and fall of a sect, a Grand cultivator like Meng Jianshan naturally attracted the most attention. But there¡¯s no need to worry too much about him. Given his current condition of severe injuries, along with the high likelihood of a short remaining lifespan, he basically won¡¯t live much longer. Probably in a few decades, a hundred years, or even in just ten or so, news of his passing could be heard. Such a soon-to-be past prime expert isn¡¯t worth too much concern. Therefore, after briefly covering his situation and making a preliminary estimate, Yi Dancheng quickly moved on to the next aspect, ¡°Aside from Meng Jianshan, in this Battle of Tianmen, the Nine Provinces also lost another True Person and about three hundred disciples. After the battle, on the Tianmen battlefield, the Nine Provinces were left with only one Earth Immortal, one Human Immortal, and around a thousand disciples.¡± Chapter 1377 - Chapter 1377 Chapter 542 Post-War Spoils Division_3 ?Chapter 1377: Chapter 542 Post-War Spoils Division_3 Chapter 1377: Chapter 542 Post-War Spoils Division_3 Under the circumstances of Meng Jianshan¡¯s grievous injuries and seclusion, this handful of people could barely maintain the Earth Immortal formation, relying on the Formation Method to defend against the attacking Qing Immortal Sect a€¡° there was certainly no surplus strength for a counterattack. Therefore, within the Tianmen region, the overall situation was essentially settled; before the cessation of hostilities between the two sects, there wasn¡¯t likely to be any change. As for the northern battlefield, Wang Chengfeng, a mid-stage Earth Immortal True Person, fell, alongside the deaths of three Human Immortals and approximately fourteen hundred disciples. At this time, only Ding Wanxuan was left with two Human Immortals and the remaining thousand or so disciples defending the north. These remnants of the Nine Provinces were currently hastily constructing major formations at the rear, repairing the already-breached defensive methods. From their actions, it appeared they were focusing on defense, with no intention of mounting a counterattack. After all, following the great battle, the Nine Provinces were left with only a dying Supreme Immortal, a recently advanced Earth Immortal, three Human Immortals, and less than three thousand ordinary disciples. Compared to before the war, their strength had been severely diminished, even more so than Qing Immortal Sect; once Meng Jianshan perished, they would likely be left with less than one-fifth of their pre-war strength. In such a situation, they simply didn¡¯t have the strength to counterattack. If they insisted on initiating warfare again, it would be tantamount to depleting their last vestige of resources, which would truly lead them to self-annihilation.¡± Before the war began, Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s openly declared strength consisted of three Earth Immortals, twelve Human Immortals, and around ten thousand ordinary disciples. Fighting up to the present, only one usable Earth Immortal, three Human Immortals, and three thousand disciples remained. Frankly speaking, with this strength, even maintaining control over the remaining territories of the Nine Provinces was somewhat daunting. Not to mention launching a counteroffensive. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã? After all, although the Nine Provinces suffered grievously, losing four countries¡¯ territories, they still retained territories of five countries in the Western Domain and one a€¡° Qingyu Country a€¡° in the Southern Domain. The Jiuzhou Immortal Gate still held territories of six countries within the Changqing Domain, which was not an insignificant size, even surpassing the Taiping Dao to some extent. However, similarly, after the war, they too would face the same dilemma as Taiping Dao, which was how to fill in these territories. According to the basic requirement of one Human Immortal per country, six countries would need at least six Human Immortals. But now, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was left with only three Human Immortals; even when including one Earth Immortal and the dying Meng Jianshan, they were short by just five individuals. One of these six countries was now unoccupied, and soon this would likely become two. Simply speaking, how to properly manage these territories to avoid the situation encountered by Qing Immortal Sect in the Southern Domain, where the lack of adequate manpower and neighboring enemies¡¯ covetous glances, ultimately led to demons wreaking havoc and the loss of their lands, is something that Jiuzhou Immortal Gate would need to consider carefully. However, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate has other Tao Inheritances providing silent support. The Heavenly River Sect is one that goes without saying, possessing one Earth Immortal and three other Human Immortals, all capable of shedding blood to support the Western Domain. Additionally, the Wind and Thunder Path and the Yuchan Tao, who are not particularly concerned about the Nine Spirits Sect¡¯s revival, included within the Wind and Thunder Path one Earth Immortal, three Human Immortals, and a few affiliated sects. Including their vassals, they controlled territories equivalent to six small countries and could mobilize more than ten True Immortals. The other, Yuchan Tao, though significantly weakened in strength, also had four Human Immortals and controlled three small countries. For these two Tao Inheritances, it wasn¡¯t that they had little interest in reviving the Nine Spirits Sect, but they did not intend to involve themselves in the Changqing Domain¡¯s war. However, if the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate within the Changqing Domain was on the brink of extermination, they would not just stand by idly; they would lend a hand to save them. They need not exert too much effort; if each sent one or two Human Immortals, that would suffice to resolve the current predicament of the Nine Provinces. So, while the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate may seem in dire straits at the moment, in reality, they had not yet reached a point of life-or-death desperation. Qing Immortal Sect had also recognized this fact. ¡°` Having achieved considerable success in the great battle, they immediately ceased hostilities and stopped advancing. The reason for this was fear of attracting the attention of other Daoist paths in the Nine Provinces, which might send reinforcements to provide support. Otherwise, if several factions joined forces, even if the Changqing Immortal Sect could withstand it, the end would likely be a reversal of the previous great war. It would turn into the Nine Provinces taking offensive and the Changqing Immortal Sect defensive; after the battle ended, they would become the current Nine Provinces, and the Nine Provinces would become the current Changqing Immortal Sect. Even worse, they might not survive this ordeal and could be directly annihilated. With such concerns, even after a great victory, Changqing Immortal Sect didn¡¯t dare go too far. ¡°So, according to the above situation, the final result of the Changqing Battle is a tragic defeat for the Nine Provinces, losing four nations and retreating to the Western Domain. The Changqing Immortal Sect also won a pyrrhic victory, in the end only able to secure the territory they have taken and slowly licking their wounds. Both Sects would have no choice but to enter peace talks and conclude this war. In the next three thousand years, it is unlikely that these two Sects would initiate any conflicts again. If unchallenged, the Changqing Domain would once again welcome a prolonged period of peace.¡± Lu Yuan comprehensively assessed all the situations and made his final conclusion. ¡°If there are no surprises, that should be the case.¡± Qing Guanzi nodded in agreement with this view. However, Yi Dancheng thought for a moment and added, ¡°On the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s side, after this devastating defeat and substantial loss of strength, they might seek us out to form an alliance to jointly resist the Changqing Immortal Sect.¡± Inspired by this, Qing Guanzi quickly said, ¡°Indeed, the losses of the Changqing Immortal Sect are not small either. Moreover, with their current strength, they can at most hold the north and west just to safeguard their recent gains and suppress the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. But for the south, those lands near our Taiping Dao, their power is insufficient. They can only rely on Human Immortals, forming Earth Immortal formations, to cope with us. But to completely defend against us? That¡¯s easier said than done. Now with the change in the situation, we are actually the greatest threat to the Changqing Immortal Sect. Considering this point, they may also send envoys to negotiate an alliance and friendship with us. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Through these negotiations, perhaps we could gain some benefits from the Changqing Immortal Sect without losing a single soldier. After all, they have not only seized the lands of four nations from the Nine Provinces but also took the opportunity to purge all the Immortal Sects under their command. Nine vassal Immortal Sects, all True Immortals, and even the disciples of those sects, were thoroughly defeated on the battlefield. Suddenly, Changqing Immortal Sect has gained the territories of these vassal nations. This time they claim to have expanded by four nations, but including these vassals, they have actually expanded over the territory of thirteen nations. Such great benefits cannot all be theirs to keep, surely? For Taiping Dao to claim one or two nations doesn¡¯t seem unreasonable. Considering the situation for the stability of the Southern Domain, they are likely to agree.¡± Qing Guanzi, based on his understanding of the Changqing Immortal Sect, made a sly suggestion. Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but laugh heartily: ¡°Qing Guanzi is right, although Taiping Dao did not participate in the battle, our non-participation is the greatest contribution to this great war. Changqing Immortal Sect has gleaned so much; they can¡¯t expect to swallow it all. They must leave some crumbs through their fingers, to share with us onlookers. Otherwise, who would want to be their neighbor in the future, or yield to them in everything? This matter I leave to you; if messengers from the Changqing Immortal Sect arrive, you¡¯ll be in charge of negotiating and communicating with them, ensuring the success of this endeavor.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Qing Guanzi accepted the order. ¡°` Chapter 1378 - Chapter 1378 Chapter 543 Change of Era in the Nine Provinces ?Chapter 1378: Chapter 543 Change of Era in the Nine Provinces Chapter 1378: Chapter 543 Change of Era in the Nine Provinces After discussing with several of his avatars, Lu Yuan had roughly figured out Taiping Dao¡¯s stance after the war. Once the main attitude was determined, Lu Yuan entrusted the matters to Qing Guanzi and Yi Dancheng, letting them handle the situation. He was still in a hidden state at present, and no one in the outside world had noticed his existence. The official heads of Taiping Dao were still those few avatars. As the real person, Lu Yuan was like an invisible man, not needing to show his face at all. However, he was also considering whether he should pick an appropriate time to step out and come to the forefront. Now, within Changqing Domain, both Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Changqing Immortal Sect had suffered severe losses in strength after the brutal war, far from their former peak. The apparent strength of these two Immortal Sects, although still many times stronger than Taiping Dao, was now only two to three times its size. But this gap was no longer enough to make Taiping Dao feel suffocated and crushed when facing them. Previously, each of the two powers had a late-stage Earth Immortal grand cultivator, and several Earth Immortals and more than a dozen Human Immortals. Just a fraction of their power could crush Taiping Dao. Back then, it was in such an environment that Lu Yuan was constantly worried, unable to sleep or eat in peace. But now. A great battle took place, three Earth Immortals perished, more than thirty Human Immortals died, and tens of thousands of cultivators were killed in action. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 This tremendous loss could be said to have depleted the essence of the Immortal Sects in Changqing Domain. Their deaths also led to the collapse of the great mountain looming over Taiping Dao, finally starting to crumble. The shadow that enveloped them gradually dissipated, revealing some sunlight. The forces that could once have easily crushed Taiping Dao with a flick of their wrist. Now, even if they exerted all their strength, they could not do anything to Taiping Dao. Currently, Taiping Dao openly boasted an Earth Immortal and three Human Immortals. Its affiliated sects also possessed five Human Immortals, and there was a Ghost Emperor in Yichuan¡¯s Yin World. Counting these, that made one Earth Immortal and nine Human Immortals. Once Meng Jianshan of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate died, with the loss of their strongest combatant, Taiping Dao¡¯s apparent strength could even surpass that of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Even compared to Changqing Immortal Sect, Taiping Dao was only one Earth Immortal short. But in terms of other Human Immortals and the number of ordinary disciples, they were not weak at all, equally matched in power. Under these circumstances, unless these two archenemies joined forces, either one of them attempting to attack Taiping Dao would not get any advantage. Even a slight misstep could lead to a disastrous defeat. Don¡¯t doubt this possibility. Without Meng Jianshan, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was already weaker than Taiping Dao. They were not only unable to defeat Changqing Immortal Sect, but even when facing the rising power of Taiping Dao, they were at a disadvantage. Jiuzhou Immortal Gate resembled Shu Han after the disastrous defeats in Jingzhou and Yiling, no longer possessing the momentum of once controlling two provinces and the Northern Expedition to the Central Plains. They had fallen to the point of pleading for peace with Dong Wu. But speaking of which, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate indeed resembled Shu Han. Previously, they not only occupied the entire Western Domain but also extended their influence into the Southern Domain, quite similar to how Shu Han had occupied parts of State Yi and Jingzhou. Changqing Immortal Sect also resembled Cao Wei, with control over three regions in Changqing Domain and most of the Boundary Domain. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï The only difference from the Three Nations was that Taiping Dao, somewhat similar to Dong Wu, didn¡¯t backstab Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. To some extent, it even helped them, exerting its influence in the south to distract many of Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s forces. This allowed Jiuzhou Immortal Gate to attempt its Northern Expedition and then clash with Changqing Immortal Sect at the battlefields of Hanzhong and Xiangyang, resulting in a pyrrhic victory for both sides. In the end, both suffered heavy losses and their national power was greatly diminished. However, Changqing Immortal Sect, with its deeper foundations and larger size, managed to endure to the final victory and swallowed Jingzhou and Hanzhong. Leaving only Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, which retreated to the State Yi, starting to desperately seek help from all directions to preserve themselves. Yes. After the terrible defeat, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had already begun sending Messengers to request external assistance. And the surrounding forces responded very quickly. First and foremost, naturally, came the Heavenly River Sect. Although Huang Yuanxiu was still constrained at home, locked in a standoff with a formidable enemy unable to leave, he still endeavored to allocate two Human Immortals and a thousand disciples urgently to the Western Domain to assist Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Both Jade Toad Path and Wind and Thunder Path, upon seeing Jiuzhou Immortal Gate on the verge of annihilation, finally stopped being bystanders and remembered to lend a hand to their fellow Immortal Sect. These two Immortal Sects also dispatched two Human Immortals and five hundred disciples each to stand by their compatriots. All this happened within a short span of three days. For Taiping Dao and Changqing Immortal Sect, it was just a blink of an eye. When they looked back, they saw Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, which had been previously beaten and was in dire straits. Now it had managed to stand up once again. With four more Human Immortals and two thousand cultivators added to Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, it suddenly became strong and regained its momentum. Although still far from its former power, it had changed from being weaker than Taiping Dao to being strong enough to hold its own against them. Just like Zhuge Liang managing Shu, from the brink of national destruction after a major defeat, it became strong enough to embark on a Northern Expedition, in such a short amount of time. Except Zhuge Liang relied on his ability and hard work to reorganize and build a foundation from scratch. Chapter 1379 - Chapter 1379 Chapter 543 Nine Provinces Regime Change_2 ?Chapter 1379: Chapter 543 Nine Provinces Regime Change_2 Chapter 1379: Chapter 543 Nine Provinces Regime Change_2 As for the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, they simply called for reinforcements. This was really¡­ After Lu Yuan understood the assistance Jiuzhou had obtained, his heart immediately felt like he had bitten into a lemon, brimming with envy. He entertained the thought of announcing his own origins from Jiuzhou, to see if he could attract some reinforcements from the other Immortal Sects. Then with the reinforcements, he could crush the Qing Immortal Sect and unify the Changqing Domain. In doing so, taking advantage of the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s weakened state after a great battle, it might indeed be possible to eliminate them in one fell swoop and take control of the entire Changqing Domain. However, Lu Yuan abandoned this idea as quickly as it came to him. Because there were significant problems with it. First and foremost was the issue of identity recognition. You say you come from Jiuzhou, but would others believe you? Alright, even if you could prove that you really were from Jiuzhou, at most that would only prove you were from the same realm, maybe just a fellow townsman. But between townspeople, when they meet, it is not necessarily with tears in their eyes. The one who might stab you in the back, who might deceive you most cruelly, could often be your fellow townsman. The cooperation among the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects now is based on the friendship built over tens of thousands of years, struggling and hiding together under the oppression of the Qing Immortal Sect. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï They truly share the highs and lows, the hardships together, having built a foundation of mutual trust through repeated tribulations and calamities. Looking at the five Jiuzhou Immortal Sects in the Western Domain, they are even showing a trend of merging into a single Sect. And other independent Sects like the Wind and Thunder Path and Jade Toad Tao are also able to lend a hand in times of crisis. The Heavenly River Sect even seems to have signs of actively joining this merging trend. These situations did not arise from mere claims of being fellow townsmen, they cannot be explained that easily. The trust built over tens of thousands of years of mutual assistance, overcoming numerous difficulties together, that is the main factor. As for the Taiping Dao¡­ Only in existence for a little over a hundred years, with even less time since establishing connections with Jiuzhou. Previously, there were even conflicts of interest that almost led to war. Under this background, under these circumstances, how could the Taiping Dao rely on the mere status of a fellow townsman to become as close as family with the others? Speaking harshly¡­ Even if the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects were willing to accept the Taiping Dao as a fellow townsman, willing to treat them as brothers and family, could Taiping Dao trust them? Trust is mutual. If the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects can¡¯t trust Taiping Dao, similarly, Lu Yuan also does not dare to trust these townsmen. The nature of those Jiuzhou Sects was something he had experienced firsthand when he was in Jiuzhou. Even the Feishuang Tao, who dared to undermine Chu State when they were clearly allied. Although this is the Immortal Realm, not Jiuzhou, The environment here in the Changqing Domain is even more hostile than in Jiuzhou. In such an environment, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects that grew and prospered, if you say every single one of them is honest and kind, I¡¯m afraid nobody would believe it. A matter of trust is a major obstacle to cooperation between the two sides. And besides trust, the issue of interests cannot be ignored. Cooperating with Jiuzhou to annihilate the Qing Immortal Sect is indeed a fine idea, with great feasibility. But what after that? Who would be the lord of the vast Changqing Domain? How would the control over the more than twenty countries governed by the Qing Immortal Sect be divided up in the end? Relying on Jiuzhou¡¯s strength to achieve this goal would ultimately be external force. Compared with them, Taiping Dao¡¯s position is at a disadvantage. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Therefore, the final distribution of benefits would naturally favor the other side. Even stepping back a bit, Even if Jiuzhou regards Taiping Dao as one of its own, but among family, even close brothers demand a clear account. Previously, the nine countries of the Western Domain, along with Qingyu Country in the Southern Domain, the five Jiuzhou Immortal Sects, also divided up their territories to achieve a near-equitable balance. But here comes the problem. Should Lu Yuan go through all this effort to lead the Taiping Dao to destroy the Qing Immortal Sect only to end up sharing the spoils of the Changqing Domain equally with those Jiuzhou Immortal Sects? If it comes to that, it would be better not to fight at all. If not engaged in battle, he would still remain the Lord of the Southern Domain and could take advantage of the weakened state of the Qing Immortal Sect to carve a few pieces off of them, gaining a great advantage. If handled properly, the territory controlled by the Taiping Dao, including its vassal states, might even exceed ten countries. But the Changqing Domain in total has only thirty-nine countries. Averaging it out, dividing it among a few Immortal Sects, cooperating seems even less appealing. And if not dividing equally, on what basis would they cooperate with you to destroy the Qing Immortal Sect? With an unequal split, after the Qing Immortal Sect is annihilated, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects would be in a dominant position, why would they share the Changqing Domain with you, allowing you to reap the greater rewards? Just these issues of trust and interest dissuaded Lu Yuan from the thought of immediate cooperation with the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects. However, he hadn¡¯t completely abandoned the idea. Collaboration with the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects was still necessary. Otherwise, even if the Taiping Dao were to annihilate the Qing Immortal Sect in the future, those Jiuzhou Immortal Sects would not submit, and the Taiping bird would not be willing to hand over its hard-won fruits of victory. In the end, the situation would turn into the current state between the Qing Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects, entangled and battling for over ten thousand years. This, of course, did not align with Lu Yuan¡¯s interests. Therefore, to avoid this scenario, he naturally had to proactively make a change. Chapter 1380 - Chapter 1380 Chapter 543 Nine Provinces Regime Change_3 ?Chapter 1380: Chapter 543 Nine Provinces Regime Change_3 Chapter 1380: Chapter 543 Nine Provinces Regime Change_3 From being an outsider, he transformed himself into one of their own, just like those from the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Using his origins from Jiuzhou, he established relationships with other Jiuzhou Immortal Gates, becoming one of their insiders. Thus, everyone became insiders, and the Changqing Domain naturally became the home turf of Jiuzhou. Shamelessly, Lu Yuan could even directly rename his sect the Nine Spirits Sect and take up the banner of reviving the Tao Inheritance. Faced with such a situation, those Jiuzhou Immortal Gates would have no reason to attack the Taiping Dao. If they insisted on attacking, they themselves would lose the justification. And without that justification, they could no longer rally all Jiuzhou Tao Inheritances against the Taiping Dao. The only ones who would really have issues with the Taiping Dao would be the current Five Sects of the Western Domain and perhaps add the Heavenly River Sect. As for others like the Jade Toad Tao, Wind and Thunder Path, and the Radiant Immortal Dynasty, these sects were not very interested in reviving the Nine Spirits Sect. In their eyes, the Taiping Dao, which perhaps had revived the Nine Spirits Sect, was more pleasing than the neighbors who had been known for tens of thousands of years but demanded money, grain, and soldiers from them every year. Who was the legitimate successor and who was the ambitious one under such pretense became a judgment that was very intriguing. Maybe, to get rid of this burden sooner, the Wind and Thunder Path and other Jiuzhou Tao Inheritances might even help the Taiping Dao suppress sects like the Purple Cloud Sect that were unwilling to accept defeat. This sounded a bit like a fantasy. But upon careful analysis of both sides¡¯ positions and interests, and with cautious maneuvering, it wasn¡¯t necessarily impossible. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï It wasn¡¯t just those sects that didn¡¯t care about the revival of Nine Spirits Sect. Even within the current Five Sects of the Western Domain. As long as the Taiping Dao could prove that it was part of the Jiuzhou Tao Inheritance and an insider, carrying the flag of the Nine Spirits Sect. Then perhaps, Lu Yuan could instead absorb them, effectively strengthening his own power. Even if he couldn¡¯t absorb them, by seizing the moral high ground, he could also gain an advantage over the Five Western Domain Sects. Just like an emperor reducing the power of vassals, seizing the initiative. Supported by both strength and moral high ground, throwing out a few bones, such as the ownership of lands in the Western Domain, or offering some territories as bait. Under such circumstances, why worry about not being able to divide and dissolve the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate from within? So, while cooperation was feasible, Such cooperation must, must be led by the Taiping Dao, with other Jiuzhou Immortal Gates supporting it to move forward. ?¦Ï¦Í¨À0.§ã¦Ï And to hold this leadership position, the Taiping Dao needed to have strength superior to the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates, or to any sect within Jiuzhou, and also hold significant influence within the entire Jiuzhou Immortal Gate coalition. Only then would Jiuzhou seek out the Taiping Dao for acknowledgment of heritage, begging for cooperation with the Taiping Dao. And by possessing both power and the initiative, as well as an origin from Jiuzhou, the Taiping Dao, after taking control of the Changqing Domain, would prevent the entire Jiuzhou Immortal Gates from uniting against it. Even potentially, conversely, divide and weaken them. It was considering these far-reaching future plans that Lu Yuan thought, might he step forward appropriately? Because at the moment, he actually had a very good opportunity to prove his background. ¡°Meng Jianshan came out of seclusion today and released a message, planning to hold an alliance meeting in ten days, to pass the Alliance Leader¡¯s seal to Ding Wanxuan of Haiyun Pavilion. Also, along with the alliance meeting, a succession Dharma Assembly will be held, passing on the position of the School Leader to the last remaining True Person in the Purple Cloud Sect, the Real Mystery Taoist?¡± Fifteen days after the decisive battle, Lu Yuan, having just heard the sudden change in Jiuzhou from the hurriedly arrived Yi Dancheng, could not help but look shocked. ¡°Yes, it is said that after Meng Jianshan came out of seclusion, although he stabilized his injury and repaired his broken body, most of his magic power was lost. The second Tao Fruit Flower on his head directly shattered, leaving only a few roots, nearly dropping to the Earth Flower cultivation. Moreover, his appearance changed from the original black hair and youthful looks to a wrinkled, old, and frail look. Everyone is saying that his vital essence is injured, his Lifespan greatly reduced, and he might not live for a few more years. And Meng Jianshan¡¯s actions are all confirming this point.¡± Yi Dancheng, undoubtedly the person in charge of Jiuzhou intelligence affairs for the Taiping Dao, at this moment, continued effortlessly with some unimportant insider information and various intelligence analyses: ¡°This emergence from seclusion shows his impatience to hand over power. Whether it¡¯s relinquishing the Alliance Leader¡¯s command or passing on the Sect Leader¡¯s position, it all shows his dire situation and that he might not live much longer. So, he wants to pass on as much power as possible while he is still alive and capable. This is essentially preparing for his final affairs.¡± Yi Dancheng concluded with a sigh. Previously, Meng Jianshan was known alongside Yao Baojuan, both called the Changqing Immortals. Three thousand years ago, both were seen as likely to become Heavenly Immortals. Yet three thousand years later, neither of the two immortals managed to truly become Heavenly Immortals, still trapped in the Domain Flower Realm. Now, a great battle had led both immortals toward their end. This scene of heroes in their twilight years, out of luck, truly caused one to sigh. ¡°Meng Jianshan won¡¯t live much longer. It was already predicted previously, and now it¡¯s just a prophecy fulfilled, hardly worth mentioning.¡± After listening to the report, Lu Yuan slightly shook his head, not saying much more, but his attention shifted elsewhere: ¡°But you said, the position of Sect Leader of the Purple Cloud Sect is about to be passed to Real Mystery?¡± Real Mystery was a quite ancient yet familiar name. Over a thousand years ago, at the time in the Jiuzhou realm, when Lu Yuan first attended the Inescapable Meeting, he was among the crowd looking up to this person. And now, more than a millennium later, both had ascended successively. Originally, he thought there wouldn¡¯t be any more intersections. But after Lu Yuan arrived in the Changqing Domain and engaged with the power of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, collecting information about the other party, he discovered this old acquaintance was still alive. This Purple Cloud Taoist Master, after his ascension, surprisingly hadn¡¯t died. Instead, over this millennium, he continuously climbed upward, successfully attaining the position of True Immortal, survived the previous great war, and lived to this day. Chapter 1381 - Chapter 1381 Chapter 544 Succession Ceremony ?Chapter 1381: Chapter 544 Succession Ceremony Chapter 1381: Chapter 544 Succession Ceremony It seems normal upon reflection. Lu Yuan had gathered the essence of the entire Nine Provinces realm, and after his ascension to the Immortal Realm, he was able to produce three True Immortal avatars in one go, ultimately achieving his current fortunes. At that time, although Purple Cloud Tao didn¡¯t have conditions as favorable as his, it had been the leader of the Yangzhou Immortal Sect for tens of thousands of years, so naturally, there was some foundation. That foundation, previously in the Nine Provinces realm, might have been unusable due to the lack of Spiritual Energy. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï But once in the Immortal Realm, it turned worthless into treasure. From original waste, it became a Heaven and Earth treasure that could be transformed. With these foundations, it¡¯s not surprising that Daoist Real Mystery and other Nine Provinces cultivators could produce one or two Immortals. It¡¯s just that the lucky one happened to be Zhen Xuan. Moreover, as the last Daoist from Purple Cloud Tao to ascend, choosing to join Purple Cloud Sect afterward might also have garnered some preferential treatment from this Grand Fairy Door. This likely also played a part in his becoming immortal. Of course, even though he recognized this old acquaintance, Lu Yuan had always remained hidden, and with the Dao seeking low-profile development, he had not made contact. He merely watched the other¡¯s developments over the years, waiting for the day to utilize the relationship between the two. Who would have thought? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï After only a hundred years, someone who ascended from the Jiuzhou would now be about to take the position of the School Leader of Purple Cloud Sect, which once held the title of the leader of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. The extraordinary shifts in the world¡¯s affairs are truly lamentable, the unpredictable nature of fate. And with such a new School Leader in the Purple Cloud Sect, he in fact provides the best endorsement for Lu Yuan¡¯s Nine Provinces identity. The two sides know each other. Especially since Lu Yuan had face-to-face contact with Daoist Zhen Xuan back in the day, conversing and receiving guidance from him. These connections could all serve as evidence of his background. Now with Zhen Xuan on the verge of becoming the leader of Purple Cloud Sect, coupled with its status among the Five Sects of the Western Domain, plus the fact that he was also one of the few remaining True Persons in the Western Domain. In the light of one another, Zhen Xuan¡¯s status was now second only to Ding Wanxuan following Meng Jianshan¡¯s death. As long as he could establish contact with this person, it would be extremely beneficial for Taiping Dao¡¯s integration into the Nine Provinces in the future. Considering this, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but instruct, ¡°From now on, you can pay attention to adjust contact with Zhen Xuan, maintain a good relationship with the Purple Cloud Sect, allow them to feel close to us, it will be of great use in the future.¡± Yi Dan of Yi Dancheng nodded, ¡°Understood. It just so happens that the Nine Provinces Immortal Gate has sent us an invitation to observe their alliance insignia handover ceremony and the Sect Leader¡¯s succession ceremony. I can go and observe the ceremonies as a messenger of the Taiping Dao. During the ceremonies, I will try to make contact with Zhen Xuan.¡± Lu Yuan waved his hand, ¡°Then it¡¯s settled. You go to the Western Domain, make contact with Zhen Xuan, and also probe Meng Jianshan to see how many more years this Great Immortal will live. Observe Nine Provinces¡¯ current strength and confirm whether they still intend to engage in warfare.¡± Although the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had just suffered a devastating defeat, retaining only one-fifth of its strength. But thanks to generous assistance from other Immortal Sect lineages in Jiuzhou, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate quickly regained momentum, with significantly enhanced strength. Although the strength they¡¯ve regained is not yet a threat to Taiping Dao and Changqing Immortal Sect. It remains unclear whether the other Nine Provinces Immortal Sects will offer more aid to the Western Domain. Although the likelihood is small, it is still essential to clarify the current strategic attitude of the Nine Provinces Immortal Gate. Because Changqing Immortal Sect saw that Jiuzhou was quickly regaining strength, they too have become anxious these days. Not only have they accelerated the construction of large formations on the two borders, but they have also desperately pulled away the remaining few assistants from the rear, gathering another eight hundred people. All these personnel were moved to the front line, prepared for an attack from Jiuzhou. This also reignited the smell of gunpowder along the borders of both powers, an aura of an impending storm brewing. However, both sides had just finished a battle, with too many deaths, and even if willing, a combat restart would be difficult. Hence, both parties only faced off on the border, building magical arrays and making some defensive moves. Actual provocative attacks did not occur. Even the frequent small-scale border skirmishes of the past, where small units would be dispatched to sabotage, have ceased. There was no help for it. Everyone was out of men, and now, even such minor raids resulting in casualties were unbearable. Peace had become the mainstream consciousness for both parties. Yet, just after the battle, with deep-seated enmity, neither could bring themselves to lose face and seek peace. Most likely, it would end with mutual standoffs on the frontier, a state of war-readiness for a few hundred years. Then, once peace endured, and both sides regained some vitality, they could slowly return to a more normal state of peace as before the war. At present, true peace was still far away. However, Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had no choice but to be dragged down by war, continuing to mobilize troops, fortify positions, and tie up significant resources and energy. But for Lu Yuan¡¯s side, there were not so many concerns. Relations between Taiping Dao and the two powers were neither very harmonious nor bad, with only a slight degree of trust. Therefore, he only needed to confirm whether Jiuzhou Immortal Gate might have intentions to attack Taiping Dao (which was unlikely), and then simply raise his guard a bit. Chapter 1382 - Chapter 1382 Chapter 544 Succession Ceremony_2 ?Chapter 1382: Chapter 544 Succession Ceremony_2 Chapter 1382: Chapter 544 Succession Ceremony_2 The remaining energy and resources could be invested in development without being hampered by war. The overall atmosphere and security of the Southern Domain were still considerably safeguarded. Hence, Lu Yuan only instructed Yi Dancheng to prioritize building a good relationship with Zhen Xuan, pay more attention to Meng Jianshan, and only then probe the intentions of Nine Provinces, making it the last priority task. Armed with these missions, Yi Dancheng soon bid farewell to Mi Yun Mountain, and with several disciples, headed towards Nine Provinces. This time, he was going to stay in the Western Domain for a few days, mainly to seize this opportunity to establish good relations with the True Persons of various branches, especially those of the Wind and Thunder Path, Yuchan Tao, and Heavenly River Sect outside of Changqing Domain. These True Persons from other domains of different sects were the main targets Taiping Dao intended to attract. How the future struggle for the orthodox leadership of Nine Spirits Sect would play out and how much influence could be wielded among the branches in Nine Provinces would entirely depend on these individuals. If the relationship with them were well-managed, Taiping Dao¡¯s later efforts to take control of the entire Changqing Domain would be halved in difficulty. This diplomatic mission was significant and severely tested Yi Dancheng¡¯s ability to charm and negotiate; the burden on his shoulders was not light. Fortunately, at present, Taiping Dao operated in the shadows, and Nine Provinces was not aware of Taiping Dao¡¯s origin and background. Considering the current circumstances faced by the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, they should feel happy about Taiping Dao¡¯s overtures and unlikely to be too guarded. This mission should not be hard to complete. After Yi Dancheng departed with the mission, not long thereafter, Qing Guanzi returned. He brought back news that following Nine Provinces, Changqing Immortal Sect also planned to hold an inheritance ceremony. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Song Xiren was ready to upstage Nine Provinces; on the same day they celebrated, he would officially take over as the School Leader of Changqing Immortal Sect, not willing to be outdone by a bit. The date for the ceremony was now set, and invitations from Changqing Immortal Traces had been sent out to invite friendly sects to witness the occasion. As a nominal friend and a significant power within Changqing Domain, Taiping Dao naturally could not be omitted; thus, an invitation was sent to them. The recipient of the invitation was, of course, Song Xiren¡¯s good fellow practitioner, Qing Guanzi. Not only Qing Guanzi was invited. In the Southern Domain, Jintai Gate, Xuan Turtle Mountain, and Bihu Palace, the three leading Immortal Sects, had also received the invitations. Now these three sects¡¯ School Leaders had personally arrived at Mi Yun Mountain to consult Taiping Dao on whether to attend the ceremony. They came with an attitude of absolute deference to Taiping Dao, something unimaginable before. Indeed, it was no surprise that these three sects changed their attitude so quickly. After experiencing the recent war, everyone clearly saw how all the sects formerly affiliated with Changqing Immortal Sect were treated as cannon fodder, completely consumed in the war. From the Northern, Central, and Eastern Territories, a total of nine sects, fourteen True Immortals, and twenty thousand cultivators. Such a large number of people were pushed to the front line to fight a deadly battle against Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. By the end of the battle, most of these people had perished, especially the True Immortals not one survived. Only about a thousand ordinary disciples, according to the rumors, survived. But what can you expect from these broken and defeated survivors to uphold the prestige of nine sects? Moreover, Changqing Immortal Sect had just emerged victorious from a great battle and was in urgent need of replenishing its strength. Under such circumstances, could they possibly overlook these nine pieces of rich territory within their domain? You should know, the initial rise of Nine Provinces was partly due to many sub-sects within Changqing Immortal Sect becoming unstable and starting troubles. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï To keep an eye on these ambitious dissidents, Changqing Immortal Sect had to retain a large number of personnel on the home front, leading to insufficient forces to suppress rebellion at the front lines, gradually allowing Jiuzhou Immortal Gate to grow stronger. The catastrophic defeat in that decisive battle three thousand years ago was also majorly due to internal instability. Over these three thousand years, by continuously contracting their power and giving up areas that were difficult to control, such as the Southern Domain, and gradually focusing on internal management, Changqing Immortal Sect finally stabilized the Northern, Central, and Eastern Territories, integrating their forces for a united external front. This decisive battle, through utilizing wartime measures, sent those sub-sect-men to their deaths, reducing internal threats within their territory. Such an advantageous situation, why would Changqing Immortal Sect not utilize it and give it up? In fact, some pragmatic individuals among the surviving cultivators from those nine sects have already begun to spontaneously submit requests, seeking to pledge their sects to Changqing Immortal Sect, converting their sect into a subdivision. However, since the war had just ended and these nine sects were ostensibly the meritorious sub-sects of Changqing Immortal Sect, it would seem too unseemly to consume their sub-sects immediately after the war, so they had not agreed yet. But it was apparent to everyone. The absorption of these sub-sects by Changqing Immortal Sect was only a matter of time. After all, these were the lands of nine nations; faced with such immense interests, who could remain unmoved? Possibly in a few decades or a century, the Northern, Central, and Eastern Territories might suddenly experience ¡°Demons Causing Chaos,¡± wreaking havoc in the region. During this period, these nine severely weakened sects might just accidentally be destroyed by demons, eradicating all their descendants. Then Changqing Immortal Sect would hastily arrive, drive away the demons, and, looking at the scattered corpses and the ruined sect, shed tears. After gathering the corpses and performing the rites, they would decide, for the sake of the people, to honor the deceased¡¯s will, protect the land, and incidentally establish a subdivision there, bringing the nation under their sect¡¯s control. Chapter 1383 - Chapter 1383 Chapter 544 Succession Ceremony_3 ?Chapter 1383: Chapter 544 Succession Ceremony_3 Chapter 1383: Chapter 544 Succession Ceremony_3 As previously discussed, such methods of expanding territory were already mastered by the various Immortal Sects in the Changqing Domain. A complete set of procedures, repeated a few times, could easily take down nine Immortal Sects. Those who favored surrender saw this, which was why they hurriedly and anxiously offered their allegiance. Surrendering at this moment, with a sect¡¯s entire foundation at stake, even for the sake of saving face, the Changqing Immortal Sect would treat them favorably, granting them high regard. With these rewards, those who surrendered might even have the chance to contend for Immortal status in the future. Moreover, by joining the Changqing Immortal Sect, one becomes a disciple of a grand sect, and their status changes instantly. With such an exit strategy, their future wouldn¡¯t be too bleak. But if they stubbornly resisted, continuing to protect their sect inheritance without yielding, then what awaited them would be demons attacking and the destruction of their sect. Currently, under this grand trend, none of the nine families could remain unaffected. Those unwilling to surrender yet wanting to protect their sect inheritance saw this too. Hence, even before the war ended, maybe even while it was ongoing, when the True Persons of these families were not yet dead, they were already aware that they were most likely unable to escape calamity, sensing Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s intent to take advantage of them. From that time, these families had already started arranging escape plans. Many sent Hidden Vein disciples, scattered to different places, directly escaping from the Changqing Domain to seek a new paradise where they could re-establish their Tao inheritance. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? After the war, these remaining disciples, those unwilling to surrender, also prepared to follow the previous Hidden Vein disciples, escaping overnight from the Changqing Domain to establish a new lineage elsewhere. ¡°There¡¯s always a place for the worthy elsewhere.¡± The Changqing Domain is no good place either, with constant warfare, and this time it was particularly brutal, which scared many. Many people, after the war, already harbored thoughts of fleeing. And the Changqing Immortal Sect, for their part, maintained a default stance on this, turning a blind eye, letting these people leave. Just as everyone expected, the Changqing Immortal Sect had no intention of sparing these nine Immortal Sects. It was an open secret, evident to any bystander. Thus, at this moment, those outside of the surrender faction were willing to leave on their own, which spared them the hassle. With everyone gone, only those who surrendered remained; even the plot of demons causing chaos was unnecessary, they could simply accept allegiance, saving time and effort. As for those stubborn individuals who were neither willing to surrender nor leave, there were both the surrender faction and demons to deal with them. Internal strife and demon attacks, two methods, there was always one that suited the situation. Faced with the now bared sharp teeth of the Changqing Immortal Sect, these almost-caught ducks couldn¡¯t fly away. Unless there¡¯s an external formidable enemy, who forcibly punches and snatches a duck leg from its mouth, enacting a seizing from the tiger¡¯s mouth. And this was precisely what Taiping Dao intended to do. Therefore, seeing Qing Guanzi coming to report, Lu Yuan instructed, ¡°Remember the last Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, accompanied by Song Xiren, among the True Persons was one from Red Creek Valley and one from Flying Mist Mountain. Back then, you and the two True Persons had quite an enjoyable conversation and managed to establish a significant relationship. This time you attend the succession ceremony of the Changqing Immortal Sect, take the opportunity to talk to Song Xiren, mention how much you care for these two True Persons. Now with so many from the Changqing Immortal Sect gone, their strength is insufficient to cover the entire territory and maintain stability within the domain. ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï These two Immortal Sects also suffered heavy losses, struggling to defend themselves against demons. Now that both True Persons are gone, you inevitably share their concerns and are willing to step forward and help protect their sects.¡± ¡°Use this opportunity to test Song Xiren and see whether he is willing to agree,¡± Lu Yuan instructed. Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain, two Immortal Sects, were right at the border of the Eastern Territory adjoining the Southern Domain. By asking Qing Guanzi to deliver this message to Song Xiren, Lu Yuan naturally wanted to seize the lands of these two sects and two countries from the latter. Qing Guanzi replied, ¡°Yes, once I meet Song Xiren, I will mention this matter to him.¡± Lu Yuan nodded and sneered, ¡°After you¡¯ve told him, observe his attitude. If he is willing, then let it be. If he is not and refuses to share any benefits, then after you return, we will lead our troops northward and station them in Jiuchuan Country. I want to see if, facing the restored strength of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and increased pressure on his western borders, he dares to compete with me here in the south once more?¡± Changqing Immortal Sect has recently conquered lands spanning four countries from the Western Domain. Inside its own borders, there are the rich lands of nine countries ready to be devoured. Such great benefits won¡¯t be too much to swallow. Taiping Dao following behind, nibbling at the leftovers and taking over two countries, surely that wouldn¡¯t be too excessive? This time, sending Yi Dancheng to Jiuzhou, instruct him to actively forge connections and ingratiate himself with the True Persons of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Apart from laying the groundwork for future grand plans, it also unmistakably served the purpose of intimidating Changqing Immortal Sect through this stance. Changqing Immortal Sect has been fighting against Jiuzhou for thousands of years. There must surely be insiders within the two sects. Yi Dancheng¡¯s active attitude within the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate will surely be reported back to Changqing Immortal Sect by those insiders. Faced with Taiping Dao, which seems to be joining forces with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and having just ended a wara€¡± even losing their School Leadera€¡± wouldn¡¯t Changqing Immortal Sect feel pressured? On the southern side, Taiping Dao is also coordinating its efforts by stationing troops at the border. With this two-pronged approach, unless Song Xiren has lost his mind, he couldn¡¯t possibly refuse the demands of Taiping Dao. It¡¯s highly likely that he will obediently cede the territories of the two countries, handing over Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain to Taiping Dao. This is an open stratagem. It¡¯s exploiting your illness to carve off your flesh; what could you possibly do about it? After laying out his plans and thinking of his three younger brothers, Lu Yuan added, ¡°As for Jintai Gate and Xuan Turtle Mountain, since Changqing Immortal Sect has invited them, bring them along with you as well.¡± Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s ruthless methods towards its own vassals had thoroughly frightened these three Southern Domain Immortal Sects. It made them grateful that they had escaped from Changqing Immortal Sect in time and joined Taiping Dao. Otherwise, like this time when the great battle commenced and had they still been vassals of Changqing Immortal Sect, they would have certainly met cannon fodder fates. At this moment, they couldn¡¯t help but think of the treatment meted out to the nine northern Immortal Sects, which were about to be annexed. A grim example lies right in front of them. The three Southern Domain Immortal Sects couldn¡¯t help but feel empathy and concern. Thus, towards Changqing Immortal Sect, which caused all this, they naturally harbored immense hostility. Similarly, to avoid meeting the same fate themselves, they began to ingratiate themselves zealously with their current superior, Taiping Dao. Each one desperately proving their worth to avoid being used as cannon fodder should Taiping Dao come into conflict with others in the future. Then afterward, to be used up and discarded entirely. Such an ending would indeed be tragic. No one wanted to face such a fate. The three Immortal Sects also began, in their own ways, to actively save themselves. Chapter 1384 - Chapter 1384 Chapter 545 Changqing Dilemma ?Chapter 1384: Chapter 545 Changqing Dilemma Chapter 1384: Chapter 545 Changqing Dilemma Changqing Mountain. Since 70,000 years ago when the Changqing Immortal established his domain and set up the Changqing Taoist System, this mountain has always been the ancestor of the myriad immortal mountains within the domain, the source of the Dao Law. After 70,000 years of management, gathering the earth veins of thirty-nine countries and accumulating the vitality of ten thousand years, Changqing Mountain had grown to ten thousand zhang high, stretching tens of thousands of li, with the mountain itself being a country. Such an immortal mountain, naturally, attracted countless cultivators desiring to refine their qi, drawing numerous people to cultivate in seclusion here. Indeed it was so. The widely circulated ¡°Records of Changqing Mountain¡± contain a phrase that aptly describes the flourishing scene of immortal cultivation in Changqing Mountain. ¡®Gathering talents from the ten domains within the sea, drawing the finest of Heaven and Earth, grasping the blessings of the realm, harboring endless treasures, receiving the homage of ten thousand immortals.¡¯ In just one sentence, it had vividly narrated the past splendor of Changqing Mountain. To translate, it means Changqing gathered all the talents from the Region Continent, thus favored by Heaven and Earth, monopolizing the realm¡¯s blessings, possessing countless rare treasures, receiving homage from ten thousand immortals. This was not an exaggeration, but a description of facts from ten thousand years ago. While the Changqing Immortal was still alive, Changqing Mountain was exactly as described. However, all this slowly became a thing of the past and dissipated with the wind following the demise of the Changqing Immortal. In recent centuries, the Changqing Immortal Sect couldn¡¯t even gather talents from within the Changqing Domain, let alone from the entire Region Continent. The absence of a new Great True Person in nearly ten thousand years also indicated that the Changqing Immortal Sect had lost the favor of the Heavenly Path. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The opportunities within the domain were divided among three groups: Changqing Immortal Sect, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, and Taiping Dao. The inflow of various rare treasures also dwindled, and the treasury gradually emptied. Without people, without Heavenly Mandate, without opportunities, without treasures, naturally, the strength declined and it could no longer invite ten thousand immortals to pay homage. The domain was hence in great chaos. The decline of the Changqing Immortal Sect, from the abovementioned record, was vividly demonstrated. But even a dying camel is bigger than a horse. Although the Changqing Immortal Sect was in decline, without the grand occasion of ten thousand immortals paying homage, it was still the number one Immortal Sect in the domain during its decline, with over a thousand cultivators residing within the mountain gate, the atmosphere still remarkable. But this was the appearance before the war. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï At least, after the war broke out with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, most of the defending cultivators in Changqing Mountain were pulled away, many of whom died on the frontline. Recently, due to the recovery of strength in Jiuzhou, the atmosphere on the frontline had become tense again, with frequent frictions between the two sects. To enhance the frontline strength, the Changqing Immortal Sect had no choice but to extract more personnel from the sect, pulling away another hundred people. These few rounds of personnel extraction had quickly turned the once bustling Changqing Mountain, where immortals gathered and Qingyun soared, chillingly silent. Only over a hundred people remained in the sect, each with their own duties, not only to manage all affairs and properties within but also to guard against external stealth attacks, the responsibility of which cannot be simply described. A hundred days without sleep, that¡¯s what this place was about. The decline of Changqing Mountain had reached its peak at this time. Fortunately, in recent days, this situation had been reversed. Although the previous Head Teacher had passed away, the succession within the sect was organized early on, and the successor was determined. Immortal Yao had departed, but Master Song was still here. After stabilizing the frontline operations, Master Song returned to the Mountain Gate, immediately started to stabilize the morale, and began preparations for the succession ceremony, ready to take over as the Head Teacher, to continue controlling the hearts of the people under the heavens. As the victor of this great war, although the Changqing Immortal Sect suffered great losses in troops and severe casualties, with its strength reduced to a quarter and its vitality severely drained, outwardly, the Changqing Immortal Sect had greatly defeated Jiuzhou, capturing four countries firmly expanding its territory. In the process, although the Head Teacher was killed, Yao Baojuan, before his death, had inflicted severe damage on Jiuzhou¡¯s leaders, leaving them not far from death. And after the war, the Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s strength remained substantial, with two Earth Immortals, eight Human Immortals, and six thousand cultivators stationed on the frontline, pressing Jiuzhou so hard they dared not make a move. In the rear, there were also a few thousand disciples left behind, totaling three to four thousand people. The entire Changqing Immortal Sect, despite such losses, still had profound depth, able to muster ten True Immortals and over ten thousand cultivators. Moreover, Jiuzhou¡¯s previous core strength, the Azure Dragon Sect¡¯s Wang Chengfeng, this Mid-stage Earth Immortal cultivator, had perished in the conflict with the Changqing Immortal Sect. Another influential figure, Meng Jianshan, was also critically injured and dying, unlikely to live much longer. After his demise, Jiuzhou would be left with only one Early-stage Earth Immortal, Ding Wanxuan. Maintaining neutrality, tucked in the Southern Domain, Taiping Dao¡¯s Elder Taishang, Qing Guanzi, was also only an Early-stage Earth Immortal. On the other hand, the Changqing Immortal Sect still had Song Xiren and his junior brother, totaling two Earth Immortals. Especially Song Xiren, with the death of Wang Chengfeng and the fall of Meng Jianshan. As a Mid-stage Earth Immortal, he would soon become the foremost expert of the entire Changqing Domain. It was foreseeable that he alone could suppress the entire domain with his strength in the future. With his strength, together with the remaining power of the Changqing Immortal Sect and the spoils of war taken from Jiuzhou, as well as the imminent reaping of those nine affiliated sects, all these factors combined, no matter how you look at it, suggest that in the next five thousand years, the Changqing Immortal Sect was on a trajectory of great prosperity. Under such circumstances, the Changqing Immortal Sect organizing the succession ceremony, the neighboring friendly forces were naturally happy to come and support the event. However, those Heavenly Immortal Sects, due to orders from the Great True Person, still did not come but sent gifts to express their sentiments. Chapter 1385 - Chapter 1385 Chapter 545 Changqing Dilemma _2 ?Chapter 1385: Chapter 545 Changqing Dilemma _2 Chapter 1385: Chapter 545 Changqing Dilemma _2 Unfortunately, they not only didn¡¯t come to Qing Immortal Sect, they also didn¡¯t go to Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Both parties were equally indifferent, none wanting to come to the Changqing Domain. Regarding this, the Qing Immortal Sect had some dissatisfaction, but they were unable to voice anything and could only endure it. Without Great True People, even though the Qing Immortal Sect bore the name of a Heavenly Immortal Sect, it was merely a monkey in a cap in the eyes of those real Heavenly Immortal major sects, no different from a clown. Song Xiren was aware of this point and naturally dared not have any objections. However, he was relieved that the other sects didn¡¯t come. Those fellows wouldn¡¯t have been able to help him anyway. But from the Southern Territory, the Taiping Dao still had people come this time, which truly gave Song Xiren a sigh of relief. At the present time, the Qing Immortal Sect might have seemed to achieve a great victory and harvested abundant fruits of war, announcing a future of five thousand years of prosperity. But only he, the person in charge, knew the situation of the sect was like oil on a raging fire, precarious and endangered every day. The strength of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate recovered extremely quickly, the various branches of the Nine Spirits in the Outer Territory were restless and on the verge of forming a United Army to attack Qing Immortal Sect together with the five Immortal Sects of the Western Territory. Now, the four nations in the Western Territory just seized by Qing Immortal Sect were aflame with war again, the great formations had just been repaired, and it looked like they were about to be fought over once more. The pressure on the borders was immense, and the battlefield was on the brink of ignition. As someone about to become School Leader, how could his heart not be anxious? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï To preserve the recent victories on the western front and to fend off a potential counterattack from Jiuzhou, Song Xiren recently had no choice but to draw out over a thousand disciples from various nations in the rear and send them to the front line to assist. With these people gone, the vast area spanning the Central Territory, Northern Territory, and Eastern Territory, with twenty-one nations, was left with fewer than three thousand disciples. Averaging out, each nation¡¯s stationed disciples were only left with around a hundred. And among them, there wasn¡¯t a True Immortal presiding. The emptiness of the defense was akin to mere window paper, easily pierced through by anyone. At such a time, if anyone harbored ulterior motives, merely mobilizing a thousand cultivators, without even needing a True Immortal, could completely stir up chaos in the rear. The demons who caused trouble in the Southern Territory back then, if they were to come to the Northern, Central, and Eastern Territories, they would probably immediately raise flags in rebellion and claim sovereignty. The only thing fortunate was that. Now Qing Immortal Sect had just achieved a significant victory, shattering Jiuzhou¡¯s main force, and its fame spread throughout the neighboring territories. Moreover, the ferocity of the warfare in the Changqing Domain, along with the news of victory, was widely disseminated. Nearby power factions, those slightly informed, were all shocked and apprehensive. At this time, between Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, both powers are showing signs of clashing again, this place seems set to become a meat grinder once more. Before such a deadly battleground, who would be foolish enough to come here and cause trouble? The waters of the Changqing Domain were too deep, too terrifying. Even Grand cultivators at the late-stage of Earth Immortal could die, several Earth Immortal True Persons and dozens of True Immortals, and tens of thousands of cultivators were lost. Such losses, even for those Heavenly Immortal major sects, were nearly akin to catastrophic annihilation. Haven¡¯t those Heavenly Immortal sects already strictly ordered their disciples not to enter the Changqing Domain? The disciples of those Great True People were so cautious. Other minor sects and factions, not to mention rogue demons, where would they get the courage to create chaos there? Thus, after this war fermented. Not only those under Heavenly Immortal sects dared not come to Changqing Domain but also these common Immortal Sects, demons, and ghosts, etc., didn¡¯t dare either. The current Changqing Domain was a warzone. Outsiders who went there might very well be treated as spies and enemies, directly executed without discussion. Instances like this, in these decades of war, have happened quite a lot. Faced with the two fiercely clashing parties, if other sects¡¯ people got killed, they could only swallow their grievances silently, not daring to utter a word. Otherwise, could they really fight back? With the intensity of the warfare here, who would dare to come and court death? Therefore, with such a reputation, the Changqing Domain had now become a forbidden zone. Until the reputation is shattered, and others realize the weakness here, the current situation can still be maintained. For the short term, there was no need to worry about external threats. But while external threats might not come, internal troubles could not be ruled out. The front lines lacking troops, the rear left vacant, both areas were as perilous as a stack of eggs. Given such a critical situation, it was inevitable that some ambitious individuals would become restless. Inside the Changqing Domain, there wasn¡¯t only Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Seated in the south, removed from the fray, the Taiping Dao, watching the drama unfold by itself, had always preserved its strength! Although the Taiping Dao was supported by Song Xiren, and he had a good relationship, even a rather deep friendship with Qing Crown Guanzi, the Elder Taishang from the other party. But precisely because of this, he understood the Taiping Dao. This Immortal Sect, which seemed to have sprung from nowhere but developed rapidly, was definitely not as weak as outsiders thought. Just look at their developments in recent years. Taiping Dao established a sect in the Southern Territory, how many years has it been? In less than two hundred years, their sect had added a True Immortal. Such speed, even if it was because the Taiping Dao had gained the Southern Territory and plundered quite a bit of resources, receiving support from five nations, was still extremely astonishing. Keep in mind, three thousand years ago after that decisive battle, Qing Immortal Sect, with four territories in the North, Central, and Southern, governing thirty nations, directly ruling fifteen, Even with such strength, three thousand years later, they only managed to recover to four Earth Immortals and seventeen Human Immortals. On average, that was only one True Immortal every one hundred and fifty years. That included those surviving True Immortals; if counting only the up-and-coming ones, it was only one True Immortal every two hundred years. Chapter 1386 - Chapter 1386 Chapter 545 Changqing Dilemma _3 ?Chapter 1386: Chapter 545 Changqing Dilemma _3 Chapter 1386: Chapter 545 Changqing Dilemma _3 But one must realize, what scale is the Qing Immortal Sect? And what scale is Taiping Dao? With a difference of almost threefold, they managed only to achieve a cultivation result that was nearly the same, or rather, Taiping Dao was even slightly superior. Doesn¡¯t that make the situation clear? Taiping Dao has not only strength but also potential. With such a neighbor, anyone would have trouble sleeping and eating. Under normal circumstances, when faced with an existence like Taiping Dao, the Qing Immortal Sect would naturally have nothing to say, and would directly suppress and eradicate them. However, the timing of Taiping Dao¡¯s emergence was too perfect. It just so happened that both the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and the Qing Immortal Sect had restored their strength, and both sides were eager to expand their territories and reclaim their lost lands. Add to that the accumulated blood feud. The contradiction between the two had long been irreconcilable, and the signs of a great war had already been brewing before the arrival of Taiping Dao. The arrival of Taiping Dao in the Southern Domain, which was just a buffering area, ignited the fuse of this war. Even without Taiping Dao, the war would still have happened, only it might have been delayed for another century or two until both sides were better prepared to launch it. The root of it all, from the establishment of the Qing Immortal Sect 70,000 years ago to the return of Jiuzhou 10,000 years ago, nurtured the seeds of hatred. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Faced with such an ancestral enemy, unless one side is annihilated, there is simply no way to resolve it. The only slight easing would be for both sides to have a large-scale battle like they are having now where thousands or tens of thousands die, where everyone is killed and both sides can no longer fight, only able to quietly lick their wounds. Then, before the wounds heal, there can be peace for a few thousand years. The Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and the Qing Immortal Sect both knew this and had done so, jointly promoting this war for their respective interests. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 But now, after the war, both parties inevitably entered a period of weakness and injury. So during the healing period, how to survive the scrutiny from the outside world became a problem that both sides had to face. How to ensure that one can safely recover from injury, waiting for the next peak period to arrive? Faced with this problem, the two sects unspokenly looked to the South. The Southern Domain, under the rule of Taiping Dao, with an Earth Immortal, three Human Immortals, and three affiliated Immortal Sects. People from the outside were scared by the tragic state of Changqing Domain and did not dare to come to cause trouble. But the people within the Changqing Domain might not necessarily think the same. Taiping Dao, which retained its peak strength at this moment, could cause a drastic change in the current situation if it decided to move, whether it went west or north. Supporting either side could potentially lead to the complete annihilation of the other. Especially since both were in a period of weakness, with strength almost on par with Taiping Dao, the weight of influence the latter could bring was much greater than before the war. One word could build a nation, one word could destroy a sect. This is the current state of Taiping Dao. ¡°Taiping Dao is willing to send someone to my Qing Immortal Sect, which shows that they are still willing to communicate with us. It hasn¡¯t developed any enmity towards my Qing Immortal Sect because we¡¯ve defeated Jiuzhou Embroidering River, even grabbing half of the Western Domain. Of course, there would definitely be some wariness and vigilance. Thus, they would attend my succession ceremony on the one hand and send the School Leader to the Nine Spirits¡¯ remnants on the other, dealing with both houses at the same time. Is this move trying to keep options open and wait to bargain?¡± Inside the Qing Immortal Sect, upon receiving the news of Qing Guanzi¡¯s arrival, Song Xiren went to greet him while he couldn¡¯t help but speculate about the other party¡¯s intentions. Just as Lu Yuan had previously guessed. The Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and the Qing Immortal Sect had been at odds for ten thousand years, and both had long been infiltrated with countless spies. All sorts of information from both sides had been sieved through by these spies, and any slight disturbance was immediately known to the other side. Therefore, the information about the School Leader of Taiping Dao attending the celebration in Dan city, and which people he had contact with during the celebration, as well as some more public topics, was thoroughly known by the Qing Immortal Sect. Song Xiren was crystal clear about Taiping Dao¡¯s demonstrated closeness to the Nine Spirits¡¯ remnants at the Western Domain celebration. To be honest, when he learned of this, he was both shocked and angry. The importance of Taiping Dao has already been mentioned above and need not be repeated. If they sided with the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, it would be an inconceivable disaster for the Qing Immortal Sect. Once Taiping Dao joined the battlefield, any advantage that the Qing Immortal Sect had gained would likely crumble instantaneously. Not only would they have to spit out what they had consumed, but they would probably also lose a large part of their own territory. For the Qing Immortal Sect, which was finally seeing a chance for revival, it would be an unacceptable blow, like falling from the clouds to the dust. So, upon learning of this, Song Xiren also immediately began to act. He promptly prepared a similar succession ceremony and specifically invited Taiping Dao to attend, sending the invitation directly to his good friend, Qing Guanzi. This was to gauge Taiping Dao¡¯s attitude, attempting to win them over. At this moment, Qing Guanzi choosing to accept the invitation and even coming personally to Changqing Mountain, undoubtedly felt the signal of goodwill and decided to accept. Taiping Dao did not side with the severely weakened Jiuzhou Immortal Sect because of the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s victory, still leaving a channel open, willing to interact with the Qing Immortal Sect. The relationship between the two parties had not yet reached a situation of complete hostility where they must cross swords. Everything was still negotiable. ¡®Just don¡¯t know, what price will have to be paid to pacify Taiping Dao and win over my good friend? They are already the master of the Southern Domain. Satisfying Taiping Dao¡¯s appetite will not be so easy; it¡¯s going to cost quite a lot this time.¡¯ Song Xiren lamented internally, then went outside to see Qing Guanzi waiting at the doorway and quickly mustered a smile, ¡°Qing Guanzi Daoist, your visit honors us; I apologize for the late reception, forgive me, forgive me¡­¡± Regardless of what he thought inside, facing this ¡®good neighbor,¡¯ this ¡®good Daoist friend,¡¯ Song Xiren had to suppress his emotions and try his best to win favor. Chapter 1387 - Chapter 1387 Chapter 546 New Era ?Chapter 1387: Chapter 546 New Era Chapter 1387: Chapter 546 New Era Several days later. Mi Yun Mountain. ¡°My avatar, I have successfully fulfilled the mission. Song Xiren is willing to cede Leshan and Anyang to Taiping Dao and hand over the Immortal Sects of Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain for our protection.¡± Upon his return from Changqing Mountain, looking travel-weary, Qing Guanzi brought back this good news. ¡°Really? It seems that Changqing Mountain also felt the pressure and chose to concede.¡± Lu Yuan looked at his excited avatar and couldn¡¯t help but smile. He had anticipated that the Changqing Immortal Sect would opt to withdraw, so it wasn¡¯t much of a surprise. Yet, acquiring two countries without deploying a single soldier or warrior indeed brought joy. ¡°Now that Leshan and Anyang belong to our sect, Changqing Immortal Sect has also provided the documents ceding the sovereignty of these two countries.¡± After sharing the good news, Qing Guanzi began to ponder how to administer the new territories, asking, ¡°How should we govern these two countries now? The Immortal Sects above them, Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain, should we keep them or destroy them?¡± Changqing Immortal Sect only ceded the sovereignty of these two countries, but this sovereignty was merely administrative. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? The real masters of these countries were still the two Immortal Sects: Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain. Now, the sovereignty cession by Changqing Sovereign only transferred their supreme command over these sects to Taiping Dao. Other than the supreme command, the other powers still belonged to the local forces of the two countries, namely Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain. To solidify control over these two countries, Taiping Dao could not overlook these two Immortal Sects. The decision had to be made now: whether to keep these two sects as vassals, much like Xuan Turtle Mountain and Jintai Gate, or eradicated them to take direct control. ¡°These two Immortal Sects don¡¯t even have a True Person among them; what virtue or ability do they have to possess two countries?¡± Hearing his avatar¡¯s query, Lu Yuan scoffed coldly, ¡°Send someone over to notify these two sects about the change in their supreme command and then ask if they would like to pledge allegiance to us. If they are willing to surrender, then spare these members of the Immortal Sects, reorganize them locally and establish branches of our Taiping Dao in these two countries. If they refuse, get someone to go to Xuan Turtle Mountain and inform Zhu Zhenghe and his senior about Leshan and Anyang being vulnerable to Demon chaos. Now that these two countries are under Taiping Dao¡¯s jurisdiction, let them lead their Spirit Beast Gods there to patrol. To prevent the Immortal Sects under my rule from being obliterated by demons. Tell them that I¡¯ve entrusted this task to them; they¡¯ll understand what I mean.¡± If Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain had any Immortals, they would indeed hold some value for Taiping Dao. Considering that three Emperor Immortals and thirty to forty Human Immortals had just perished in the Changqing Domain, the numbers of True Immortals dramatically decreased, creating a scarcity of Immortals among the sects. The value of a Human Immortal now, compared to before the war, had increased manifold. If Taiping Dao could attract a living Human Immortal, it would be equivalent to two or three from before the war, making them valuable for persuasion. Offering up two countries as appeasement wasn¡¯t a significant issue. However, these two Immortal Sects, now devoid of True Immortals and with their disciples reduced to one or two hundred, mostly low-level cultivators in the initial stages and possibly lacking anyone in the Five Qi Towards Primordial stage¡­ With such meager strength, whence came the face to occupy two countries? A man is not guilty for being ignorant, but he is guilty if he harbors a jewel. Currently, Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain were like children holding gold in a busy market, devoid of the strength to preserve their ancestral legacy and thus cannot blame others for being ruthless. Now Taiping Dao was the real master of these two countries. Their previously loyal masters from Changqing Immortal Sect had already betrayed them. As a newcomer with no relations to them, Taiping Dao naturally didn¡¯t feel obliged to be polite. To devour them completely, taking all without reservation. So why choose Xuan Turtle Mountain for this dirty job? Naturally, they have a prior record. In previous cases like Youxin Country and Xiaye Country, the presence of Xuan Turtle Mountain was seen everywhere. Taiping Dao, having just been established with insufficient disciples, let alone other Spirit Beasts, couldn¡¯t even find suitable candidates to feign being demons. But Xuan Turtle Mountain was different. They specialized in fostering Spirit Beasts, and had gathered Ghost Kings as Spirit Gods among them; sending these Spirit Beasts and Ghost Kings would perfectly impersonate demons and ghosts. They also had experience, making them well-suited for the job. If truly determined, they could wreak havoc in a well-established Immortal Sect. Let alone two weakened sects barely hanging on. ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï Of course. Employing Xuan Turtle Mountain for this task wasn¡¯t just because they were suitable; it was also to let them show their allegiance. Currently, the power dynamic had become quite clear. The Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Changqing Immortal Sect in the north had both declined greatly following the recent war. Formerly, the quite weaker Taiping Dao, which had also faced the potential threat of destruction, rode the tide, securing the dominant power in the Southern Domain. One couldn¡¯t be certain of the distant future. But within the next 3000, or even 5000 years, Taiping Dao was set to be the decisive authority in this region of the Southern Domain. With the secured position of Taiping Dao and the actions of Changqing Immortal Sect in the north breaking the courage of the smaller Immortal Sects in the Southern Domain. Thus, whether for survival or for future betterment, the three Immortal Sects in the Southern Domain began to fervently ally themselves with Taiping Dao. Chapter 1388 - Chapter 1388 Chapter 546 New Era_2 ?Chapter 1388: Chapter 546 New Era_2 Chapter 1388: Chapter 546 New Era_2 ¡°Previously, you disregarded me, now I won¡¯t let you reach for me.¡± Like Jintai Gate, actively aligning and even committing manpower to desperately help Taiping Dao defend the Nine Provinces, the old man secured his position as the master of the Southern Domain. This, of course, goes without saying, he¡¯s definitely someone who can be treated well as a meritorious vassal. Places like Bihu Palace, though not very proactive, didn¡¯t cause trouble either and were obedient when facing orders. Considering his honest dealings, it¡¯s possible to let him off. Places like Xuan Turtle Mountain, always discontented and scheming in the dark, ambitious from the start, were never our own. Reluctantly at first, and now seeing the situation not good, they come to seek refuge, but what kind of fortune is this? However, considering that our side still lacks in strength and indeed needs manpower to bolster our influence, we must also look after the feelings of the other two junior sects, to prevent them from grieving over the fall. After going through what the Changqing Immortal Sect did, slaughtering and squeezing the vassal sects, all sects within the Changqing Domain are now extremely nervous. Any small movement causes a great panic. Before this great battle, if Taiping Dao wanted to destroy Xuan Turtle Mountain, Jintai Gate and Bihu Palace would not have said a word. Because they all knew the hidden motives of Xuan Turtle Mountain. This was a rebellious faction. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Not aligning with Taiping Dao and being eliminated by Taiping Dao was normal. They would even applaud it. After all, Xuan Turtle Mountain, before Taiping Dao arrived, had been conspiring to dominate the Southern Domain and had long-standing grievances with the two sects. If Taiping Dao wanted to eliminate this sect, it would be considered as avenging them, giving them a sense of relief. But now it¡¯s different. After seeing the sad plight of the Immortal Sects in Northern, Central, and Eastern Territories, despite previous grievances, as vassal Immortal Sects, Jintai Gate, Xuan Turtle Mountain, and Bihu Palace were already tacitly on the same side. This wasn¡¯t merely smoothing over grievances with a laugh, but a necessary tactic for survival and self-preservation. No one wanted to follow in the footsteps of those vassal sects under Changqing Immortal Sect. If Taiping Dao oppressed Xuan Turtle Mountain too harshly, or even wiped them out directly, it would definitely frighten the other two houses. Under such circumstances, causing such a situation, Jintai Gate and Bihu Palace might directly revolt or flee with their sects. If this actually happened, then losing these three vassal sects and five True Immortals in one go, Taiping Dao¡¯s influence would plummet, losing nearly one third of its strength. At this moment, because Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had suffered too many casualties and their strength was greatly reduced post-battle, just evening out the playing field, this would be instantly disrupted. Originally, as the three houses¡¯ strength was becoming closer, without these three vassal sects, Taiping Dao would be reverted to the weakest of the three. This would let the neighbors to the west and north laugh out loud, mocking Taiping Dao¡¯s foolishness. The two countries¡¯ territory recently conceded by Changqing Immortal Sect could also immediately spur new troubles. Therefore, for the sake of soothing Ning People and stabilizing the overall situation, despite his disapproval of Xuan Turtle Mountain, Lu Yuan still had to reluctantly take them in as a dog. But for them wanting to be his dog, they couldn¡¯t just show up at the Doorway barking a few times to be let in. If you don¡¯t go out to bite for me and bring back some bones, what use are you? Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain, these two Immortal Sects, were the two bones Taiping Dao threw to Xuan Turtle Mountain, two prey items. Only by killing them would Xuan Turtle Mountain prove their worth. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? With this stain, they also held a handle in Taiping Dao¡¯s hands. In the future, wishing to control them would then have a perfectly good excuse. As an Immortal Sect, how can they masquerade as demons and attack other fellow sects without reason? Just this one charge was enough to manipulate Xuan Turtle Mountain at will. With this leverage in Taiping Dao¡¯s hands, if they¡¯re not fully committed and harbor other intentions, Lu Yuan could directly act and squash this deceitful player. This was the strategem of using people. Having conveyed his intentions, Lu Yuan waved his hand, ¡°Go then, first see if Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain are willing to surrender. If not, send Xuan Turtle Mountain to take action. The matters of the Western Leshan and Northern Anyang, let¡¯s handle it this way.¡± ¡°Yes, I¡¯ll go do it.¡± Qing Guanzi nodded and immediately withdrew. The opportunity to surrender had already been given to Xuan Turtle Mountain, Red Creek Valley, and Flying Mist Mountain. Whether they chose to be dogs was up to them. Regardless, Taiping Dao¡¯s will must be enforced. The entire Southern Domain, including the two newly acquired East Territories, could only prosper if compliant and perish if rebellious, and could not resist. Now, as the openly recognized first sect in the territory, even Changqing Immortal Sect had to yield to the momentum of Taiping Dao, ceding two countries. What could other minor and uninfluential sects do? Behave as dogs, and they might live. If they resisted stubbornly, they would just be annihilated. Thus, with Lu Yuan¡¯s orders passed down, Taiping Dao began a new round of integrating its controlled territories. Striving within this short accumulation of budget time, to forge the ten countries under its control into an ironclad unit. And the entire Changqing Domain, along with Changqing Immortal Sect ceding two countries, soothed Taiping Dao and quickly stabilized again. As long as Taiping Dao did not make trouble in the south, Changqing Immortal Sect could concentrate on the west, putting all their efforts into dealing with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Jiuzhou Immortal Gate at this time, although they had received support from other external sects, was rapidly recovering in strength. Chapter 1389 - Chapter 1389 Chapter 546 New Era_3 ?Chapter 1389: Chapter 546 New Era_3 Chapter 1389: Chapter 546 New Era_3 But these three factions, apart from the Heavenly River Sect, Wind and Thunder Path, and Jade Toad Path, were all reluctant to exert much effort to support the Western Domain Five Sects. In reality, they only sent some manpower to ensure the inheritance of the Five Sects was not extinguished. To expect them to send troops and exert effort, risking heavy casualties to attack the Earth Immortal formation of the Changqing Immortal Sect, was merely wishful thinking. The only one willing to make an effort was the Heavenly River Sect, whose School Leader, Huang Yuanxiu, was also tied down by powerful enemies nearby and could hardly spare many people. In such a situation, the Nine Provinces had only regained enough strength to defend themselves against the Changqing Immortal Sect, but to say they had a strong ambition for advancement would be an overestimation. Thus, in the stable situation of Taiping Dao, without any additional variables, the two Immortal Sects, despite having many thoughts, had to suppress them. They guarded their current borders and began a prolonged standoff. Meanwhile, Taiping Dao started making the most of the situation between the two sects, reaping considerable benefits. After gaining the lands of two countries from the Changqing Immortal Sect and obtaining benefits from this great war, Taiping Dao, which had a somewhat stiff relationship with Changqing Immortal Sect, instantly began to ease. Qing Guanzi, following Lu Yuan¡¯s directions, started to communicate frequently with Song Xiren, often visiting the Changqing Immortal Sect for diplomatic exchanges. The main focus was to create a harmonious environment, stabilize the other party¡¯s emotions, so that the Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s attention continued to be directed westward, keeping an eye on the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Otherwise, if they turned southward, although Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t afraid, a confrontation between the two sects would greatly drain his energy. This would be disadvantageous for Taiping Dao, which was currently accumulating strength and rapidly developing. Therefore, engaging in peaceful diplomacy was quite necessary. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Not just Qing Guanzi, but over at Yi Dancheng as well, following Lu Yuan¡¯s directives, was thriving in the Western Domain. Now with the Nine Provinces having suffered a crushing defeat, not only losing territory but also having many disciples killed, they were at their weakest. At such a moment, building good relations with their neighbors and seeking support from Taiping Dao became particularly important. Therefore, faced with the proactive overtures from Taiping Dao, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate responded positively, sensing the implied intentions. Both sides rapidly fostered good relationships and formed a deep friendship. The remaining three Human Immortals and two Earth Immortals of the Western Domain Five Sects all met one by one with Yi Dancheng, who even, despite his severe injuries, summoned Meng Jianshan, who was bedridden. The other supporters from three external sects, four True Persons, all were personally met and befriended by Yi Dancheng according to the desires of his true self, with a focus on bonding with the True Persons from the Wind and Thunder Path and the Jade Toad Path. As for the main purpose of the trip, which was to bond with Zhen Xuan, who had just taken over as the School Leader of the Purple Cloud Sect, he made it a priority to cultivate a good relationship. This newly appointed Zhen Xuan was somewhat overwhelmed by the favor. After all, although Meng Jianshan was still alive, the supreme power of the Western Domain Five Sects had already been transferred to Ding Wanxuan. The original prestige and power of the Purple Cloud Sect were gradually diminishing, and it was estimated that soon after Meng Jianshan¡¯s death, it would degrade to an ordinary Immortal Sect. In the future, the land of the Western Domain would welcome the era of the Haiyun Pavilion. As the School Leader of Haiyun Pavilion, Ding Wanxuan would steer the big ship of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and continue to move forward. A great war, countless deaths and injuries, not only buried the decay of the past but also ushered in a new era full of hope. So it was for Changqing Immortal Sect, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, and Taiping Dao. The three major forces within the domain began to silently develop in their own ways. Time flew by, and nine years passed. In that year, Yi Dancheng, who was conducting diplomatic visits in the Western Domain, sent back news. The seriously injured Meng Jianshan, who had stubbornly refused to leave, finally could no longer hold on. In September of this year, after an autumn rain, he finally died in his own cave mansion. The entire Purple Cloud Sect mourned deeply, all donning mourning clothes. Having already taken over the power of the Western Domain, Ding Wanxuan, upon receiving the news, ordered a Dharma Assembly throughout the territory to pray and mourn for this former Alliance Leader and Changqing Immortal. The death of Meng Jianshan also marked the complete end of the first ten-thousand-year era since the fall of the Great True Person of the Changqing Domain. During this ten thousand years, the Changqing Immortal Sect declined, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate rose, and the two shared the world, causing instability within the domain. And leading all this, stirring up the situation, were Yao Baojuan and Meng Jianshan. Now these two True Persons had passed away one after the other, and the title of Changqing Immortal became a symbol of memory. History turned a page and became the past. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? The next ten thousand years, the next era, officially began. In this new era, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and the Changqing Immortal Sect still stood against each other. But now, to its south, a new force, Taiping Dao, had risen. Lu Yuan joined this new era, stirring up the situation with Taiping Dao, guiding the future direction. Changqing lost the deer, and the world chased after it. In the next ten thousand years, heroes of my generation should rise, take charge of a domain, and become revered as Great True Persons. Upon receiving this news, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but reflect on these thoughts. Then he continued to focus on cultivating in seclusion, diligently accumulating strength. The following year, news came from the north that after a thirty-year war and a ten-year standoff. The Changqing Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate finally couldn¡¯t hold on any longer and signed a peace treaty on the banks of the Tianmen River, officially halting the fighting. After the fierce turmoil, a period of peace finally dawned in the Changqing Domain. A prosperous era of peace unfolded. Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan immediately assigned more disciples to go out and explore for treasures. At the same time, he instructed Che Shidao to set aside all mundane affairs and dedicate himself entirely to cultivation. After acquiring the two countries of Leshan and Anyang, Lu Yuan directly handed over the Qi Luck of these two countries to his avatar to use. Now, after ten years, Che Shidao¡¯s cultivation had progressed rapidly. He estimated that within another hundred years, he might attempt to break through to become an Earth Immortal. Now that peace had been established in the north and the Changqing Domain had entered a prosperous era, all the Immortal Sects began their active recovery period. At this moment, whoever could first accumulate strength would seize the initiative in the next ten thousand years and lead the new era. Lu Yuan did not want to fall behind, Taiping Dao also could not afford to fall behind, they had to be more diligent. The new era had already begun. Chapter 1390 - Chapter 1390 Chapter 547 Undercurrents of the Human Heart ?Chapter 1390: Chapter 547 Undercurrents of the Human Heart Chapter 1390: Chapter 547 Undercurrents of the Human Heart Two hundred years hurried by, in the blink of an eye. Mi Yun Mountain. ¡°Brother Xiao, wait for me.¡± Xiao Jingyi steered the flying boat towards the direction of the Mountain Gate, as a streak of escaping light rapidly approached from behind and descended towards him. He turned his head for a glance, recognizing a familiar facea€¡±it was his junior fellow disciple, Yang Xiuan. ¡°Brother Xiao, it¡¯s been a hundred years. Is everything well with you?¡± Yang Xiuan landed on the flying boat, looking at Xiao Jingyi, he couldn¡¯t help but raise his hand in a salute. ¡°Junior Brother Yang.¡± Looking at Yang Xiuan, Xiao Jingyi didn¡¯t dare to presume, and hurriedly returned the salute, ¡°I am well, how about you, Junior Brother?¡± During the conversation, he was sizing up the other party. As a cultivator, the journey of cultivation is a process of ceaselessly perfecting one¡¯s own life. After undergoing the three transformations in becoming immortal, a cultivator¡¯s state will evolve towards perfection. Therefore, those with profound cultivation are, unless they deliberately maintain it, usually exceedingly beautiful; there are none that are ugly. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Despite this, there is still a distinction between the levels of handsomeness. However, the Yang Xiuan before him gave Xiao Jingyi a sense of perfection, and he couldn¡¯t help but be startled. For this state, he had only seen it in those who are True Immortals. ¡®This Junior Brother Yang, I heard that in recent years, he has already exchanged the fate of a whole country from the sect and began his assault on the Immortal Realm. Observing his aura now, could it be he has already touched this threshold and is about to become immortal?¡¯ Xiao Jingyi thought to himself. Yang Xiuan had previously mentioned that he was once the head of the Yang Family of Wind Thunder Fortress, and after pledging loyalty to Taiping Dao, he became a true heir disciple of the sect. Two hundred years ago, the other party had gathered enough Contribution Points through dedicating family fortune to meet the requirement for exchanging a country¡¯s fate. But he did not use it immediately; instead, he spent another hundred years in fresh cultivation until finally, thirty years ago, he cultivated his magic power to the level of a True Immortal, in addition to his Divine Powers. It was only at that time that he finally began his assault on becoming immortal. He exchanged Contribution Points for the fate of Xiaye Country and formally started his assault on the Immortal Realm. Now, thirty years have passed. His Essence, Qi, and Spirit are perfected, his bodily aura overflows, clearly resembling that of a True Immortal. This person, he might truly become immortal. With this thought, Xiao Jingyi¡¯s heart filled with lament. Previously, he had requested from his Master to travel abroad, hoping to seize chances like his fellow disciples, exploring secrets and presenting treasures to the sect in exchange for Contribution Points. But his fortune was not favorable. In the two hundred years, he ventured out many times, but the gains were meager. Originally, he thought he would find treasures within a few decades to exchange for Contribution Points and, like Yang Xiuan, would use the remaining Lifespan to diligently cultivate in seclusion, hoping to develop another True Immortal Dao Fruit to increase his success rate in his assault on the Immortal Realm. Now, all these plans have come to nothing. Not to mention a few decades, Xiao Jingyi, due to wasted time traveling, had to spend a full two hundred years to gather enough Contribution Points to exchange for a country¡¯s fate. This pace was even slower than if he had earnestly performed tasks within the sect to accumulate Contribution Points. But now it was too late for regrets. He had squandered two hundred years, with only a hundred left in his Lifespan. Time was running short. Therefore, ten years ago, Xiao Jingyi applied to the sect to exchange for the fate of Anyang Country, and there, in seclusion, he attempted to break through to the realm of a True Immortal. But whether it was due to insufficient accumulation or the past failures affecting his mindset, his decade of secluded cultivation bore little fruit. Relying solely on this one Divine Powers Dao Fruit to attempt becoming immortal was exceedingly difficult. With the current situation, even if he cultivated another ninety years, the chances of success seemed bleak. If he failed this time, even if he survived the tribulation of becoming immortal, the remainder of his Lifespan would not last more than two years. He was growing old without having achieved anything, while his junior brother before him was so youthful and spirited, with a bright future in the Great Tao. Such a comparison filled Xiao Jingyi¡¯s heart with a bitter and desolate taste. ¡°Junior brother is alright too.¡± Yang Xiuan, seeing the miserable state of his senior brother, secretly smiled to himself, and then purposely congratulated, ¡°I have not yet congratulated Brother for the recent retirement of the School Leader True Person, who has dedicated himself to deep cultivation in preparation for breaking through to the Realm of an Earth Immortal. With the innate talent and foundation of the School Leader, this retreat will surely lead to the achievement of the Earth Flower Dao Fruit, and a Lifespan that spans tens of thousands of years. ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï As the School Leader¡¯s chief disciple, your status will naturally rise along with the School Leader¡¯s breakthrough, and in the future, you will be the successor of an Earth Immortal¡¯s true teachings. At that time, I hope Brother will be able to look out for me.¡± The Yang Family of Wind Thunder Fortress and Qing Mountain Pavilion, although they previously were both local Immortal Sects of Qingyang Country, and even had many connections, counting as half of one¡¯s own people, even among one¡¯s people, there were grievances. Originally, the Yang Family of Wind Thunder Fortress wanted to be independent, while Qing Mountain Pavilion helped Jintai Gate with the takeover. Yang Xiuan, as the head of the Yang Family, had to maneuver through difficult situations, enduring many humiliations along the way. Among those who bullied him was the current Xiao Jingyi. Fortunately, Heaven eventually took notice, Taiping Dao arrived, and in one go, both Qing Mountain Pavilion and the Yang Family were taken in by the sect, turning from semi-affiliated partners to fellow disciples outright. Without the support of Jintai Gate, Qing Mountain had no power left to fear, and the Yang Family finally need not worry about them. So, some past grievances, once they become fellow disciples of the same sect, came to light. Conflicts occasionally arose between the two factions of disciples. Of course, now that everyone was part of the same family, with Taiping Dao¡¯s oversight, they dare not go too far, limiting themselves to verbal spats upon encounters. But even so, whenever conflicts arose between the two factions of disciples, it was often those of Qing Mountain Pavilion who had the upper hand. Chapter 1391 - Chapter 1391 Chapter 547 Undercurrents of the Human Heart_2 ?Chapter 1391: Chapter 547 Undercurrents of the Human Heart_2 Chapter 1391: Chapter 547 Undercurrents of the Human Heart_2 The reason is quite simple. Behind the people of Qing Mountain Pavilion stood Xiao Jingyi, their formidable backer. To outsiders, the highest level of Taiping Dao nowadays was naturally Elder Qing Guanzi. This Elder Taishang was of Earth Immortal Cultivation, the strongest in the sect and the mainstay. In the Immortal Cultivation World, where strength is the center of everything, those with higher cultivation are naturally the ultimate authority. However, Elder Taishang was a simple man, and he usually wouldn¡¯t concern himself with Sect affairs outside of his deep cultivation, nor did he take on any more disciples. Thus, to the average disciple, he was merely a figure of legend, someone they could never really come into contact with. Since Elder Taishang didn¡¯t involve himself in matters, naturally, the affairs of the Sect were handled by the School Leader. But who was the Taiping Dao¡¯s School Leader? It was none other than the master of Brother Xiao standing before us, Venerable Yi of Yi Dancheng. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? And Venerable Yi had only taken one disciple under his wing, who was Xiao Jingyi. However, as School Leader with myriad responsibilities, occupied by managing numerous affairs and often visiting other sects in the Nine Provinces, he could not possibly oversee everything in detail. Thus, many tasks were delegated to his disciples to handle. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Consequently, Xiao Jingyi seized the opportunity to monopolize many powerful positions within the Sect, becoming the true leading disciple in name and fact. And being the School Leader¡¯s leading disciple means he was the foremost among all the sect¡¯s disciples. With this status and the power in his hands, it was extremely easy for Xiao Jingyi to manipulate situations to suppress the disciples of other factions. Under his maneuvering, whenever there was a conflict between the factions of Wind Thunder Fortress and Qing Mountain Pavilion, the former was often at a disadvantage. Once or twice might not be a big deal, but after dozens or even hundreds of times, the animosity between the two sides naturally intensified. Gradually, their rivalry took on the tone of irreconcilable enemies. The higher-ups, such as those from Yi Dancheng, were naturally aware of these struggles among the disciples below. But they didn¡¯t care much. Let them fight it out; in the eyes of Taiping Dao, if one doesn¡¯t become a True Immortal, they are worthless. Even their own disciples were merely tools. If they performed well, they could stay; if not, they would be directly taken to task, without any hesitation. As long as Xiao Jingyi did his job well, favoring someone was no issue. Over the years, Xiao Jingyi had performed quite well despite his personal desires; he organized Sect business efficiently, saving Venerable Yi a great deal of trouble, naturally satisfying him. A bit of indulgence was, therefore, not particularly significanta€¡±it could be seen as a reward. Once a disciple becomes a True Immortal, their perspective and status are naturally different from those of mortals. What binds and constrains mortals appears in a different light at the Immortal level. Moreover, with people like those from Yi Dancheng holding sway, the struggles of those at the lower levels could not affect the True Immortal. Instead, allowing them to compete against each other might have a motivating effect. It all depends on one¡¯s perspective. Therefore, considering all the aforementioned reasons, the current scene unfolded as it did. With the downfall of his arch-enemy clear to him, Yang Xiuan wouldn¡¯t pass up the chance to speak mockingly of the situation. He hinted not only that he was faring better himself, but also suggested that his opponent¡¯s power was about to be stripped away soon. As mentioned before. Venerable Yi, who had been the School Leader of Taiping Dao for three hundred years, was about to abdicate and pass on the leadership to someone else. And Xiao Jingyi, being Venerable Yi¡¯s disciple, without the identity of the School Leader¡¯s disciple, still thinking of securing the position of the Sect¡¯s leading disciple? It¡¯s simply impossible. The power that he held would dissipate like smoke with the ascension of the new School Leader. As for whether Venerable Yi, in seclusion and deep cultivation, could truly achieve the status of Earth Immortal, this didn¡¯t really matter much. If Venerable Yi could become an Earth Immortal, that would be excellent news. Having an additional Earth Immortal in the Sect would double its strength, and as a disciple of Taiping Dao, Yang Xiuan would share in the glory and felt happy about it. But what does this have to do with Xiao Jingyi? The latter was Venerable Yi¡¯s disciple, and it seemed Venerable Yi might also have the signs of a breakthrough to Earth Immortal. But could Xiao Jingyi wait that long? Let¡¯s take them, for example. Yang Xiuan perfected his Divine Powers and made full preparations, but his final attempt to break through to the Immortal Realm would still take a hundred years of accumulation and readiness. Breaking through the level of a Human Immortal is already such a long and arduous process. The Realm of Earth Immortal, being more mysterious and far surpassing that of a Human Immortal, would only be more difficult. Even with Venerable Yi¡¯s exceptional innate talent, without several hundred years, it¡¯s feared it would be impossible to make the breakthrough. Then the question arises. Could Xiao Jingyi wait for several hundred years? It¡¯s feared he couldn¡¯t even wait a hundred years. With his visibly decrepit spirit and lack of ambition, let alone his advanced age, how could he even think of breaking through Human Immortal? It¡¯s feared he¡¯d die of old age within a century. Even if we assume that, by some stroke of good fortune, he did manage to breakthrough to Human Immortal, it wouldn¡¯t make much difference. Yang Xiuan was confident that in several decades, he too could achieve the status of a True Immortal. By then, they would both be True Immortals, both high-level members of the Sect. Even if the other had an Earth Immortal as a master, it wouldn¡¯t be possible to treat him poorly. Taiping Dao wasn¡¯t limited to just one Earth Immortal, and Venerable Yi wasn¡¯t unreasonable; he wouldn¡¯t indulge his disciples in causing chaos. Thus, he had no fear at all. ¡°My Master is blessed with immense fortune, and will surely achieve the status of Earth Immortal,¡± Xiao Jingyi, hearing Yang Xiuan¡¯s words, flashed a hint of anger in his eyes but still bowed respectfully towards the Mountain Gate and said, ¡°As for junior brother, it seems that your fate is not insignificant either; perhaps in the future, you might well become an Immortal, with no need for this elder brother¡¯s help. From now on, it is the new School Leader who will make decisions within the Sect; elder brother might as well ask permission from the Sect to enter seclusion and deep cultivation, in preparation for breaking through to the Immortal Realm. If junior brother truly wants to use connections, it is better to seek out the new School Leader; finding favor with the School Leader is what matters.¡± Chapter 1392 - Chapter 1392 Chapter 547 Undercurrents of the Human Heart_3 ?Chapter 1392: Chapter 547 Undercurrents of the Human Heart_3 Chapter 1392: Chapter 547 Undercurrents of the Human Heart_3 Yang Xiuan listened to these words and actually nodded in agreement, smiling, ¡°Brother Xiao is truly worthy of being a School Leader¡¯s disciple, seeing more clearly than your junior brother. We disciples indeed should pay a visit to the new Sect Leader.¡±> However, speaking of which, this new Sect Leader has appeared in the sect just like Uncle Jin previously did, suddenly announced as an elder in the sect without any prior signs. Although I am aware that the new Sect Leader must also be part of the hidden strength of our sect, I am utterly clueless about the Sect Leader¡¯s preferences. As the School Leader¡¯s disciple, do you have any inside information? If so, please enlighten your junior brother, I would be extremely grateful,¡± he said. Just as Xiao Jingyi said, with a new Heavenly Son comes new courtiers. If one wants to build connections within the sect, they need to seek out the new Sect Leader. And Yang Xiuan was indeed entertaining this thought. With Xiao Jingyi being the highest-ranking disciple, Qing Mountain Pavilion¡¯s backing within the sect changed to Yi Dancheng. Another faction within the sect, consisting of disciples of loose cultivator origins, has now pledged allegiance to Master Che, who heavily utilized loose cultivators. Another individual, True Person Jin Qingyue, like Elder Taishang, was overly low-profile, did not accept disciples and was a loner. This left Yang Xiuan without anyone to rely on within his backing faction, Wind Thunder Fortress, effectively bullied in all corners of the sect. Although he was about to become an immortal and would be able to hold up his own piece of the sky soon, Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? Which one of the several True Persons in the sect could not suppress him? Talking about the new Sect Leader who suddenly appeared, it¡¯s said his cultivation is also very deep, not much less than School Leader Yi¡¯s. With such a person now also holding the title of Sect Leader, even if I were to become an immortal, I would not dare to offend him. And I had no intentions of doing so. Thinking that I would become an immortal and thus a loner myself, I considered seeking someone to rely on. And of course, this newly emerged Sect Leader without much of a trusted foundation was the obvious choice. ¡°I have been in seclusion all these years, never leaving, and it was not until I received a message from the sect about at least holding a succession ceremony that I would come out of seclusion. If my junior brother is not clear about these things, how could I be?¡± Xiao Jingyi, seeing through the other¡¯s intentions, sneered, ¡°Instead of asking me, junior brother, you might as well join me sooner in entering the mountain to meet the new Sect Leader. By then, won¡¯t you know what the new Sect Leader likes? I have other business and can¡¯t accompany you in this conversation any longer.¡± His own backing was about to retreat, and his lifespan was nearing its end, leaving Xiao Jingyi in no good mood and with no time to bother with this annoying fellow. After saying this, he waved his sleeves and flew towards the Mountain Gate ahead. ¡°You¡¯re right, who exactly is this suddenly emerged Sect Leader Lu Yuan?¡± Yang Xiuan looked towards the distant Mi Yun Mountain, muttering to himself, then also mounted his flying light and headed forward. ¡­ Meanwhile, inside the mountain, in the guesthouse specially reserved for receiving messengers from other sects, messengers from Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had begun to discuss. ¡°Is it true what True Person Zhen Xuan said? Do you really know Taiping Dao¡¯s new Sect Leader, and they also hail from the Nine Provinces?¡± In the room, Danding Sect Leader Zhang Yunxuan, upon hearing what his senior brother said, couldn¡¯t help but rise in astonishment, excitement flickering across his face. Zhang Yunxuan was a True Person freshly nurtured by Jiuzhou Immortal Gate in the past two hundred years. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Since he was relatively inexperienced and not as senior, Master Zhen Xuan of Purple Cloud Sect had brought him along to observe the ceremonies at Taiping Dao. The goal was simple, to build and deepen relationships with Taiping Dao. In recent years, with the end of the wars and the dawn of a prosperous era, the three sects within Changqing Domain have been developing and recuperating rapidly. Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, for instance, had fostered a True Person like Zhang Yunxuan. The Changqing Immortal Sect was even more remarkable; with the four nations of the Western Domain taken from the Nine Provinces and the spoils from the absorption of their vassal sects, compounded with their existing heritage, their strength had recovered at an astounding rate. In just two hundred years, they had raised three True Immortals. This rate of development was truly frightening. As a fierce competitor to Changqing Immortal Sect, the Nine Provinces was naturally under great pressure upon seeing this development. At such a time, to ensure their own safety, they had to woo more allies to share the burden. The only possible ally left to woo within the Changqing Domain was Taiping Dao. This was the reason Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, despite being short-staffed, still sent two True Persons for the change of leadership at Taiping Dao. However, Taiping Dao was no simple entity. While outwardly it seemed they had yet to mature, with many newly recruited disciples still growing, the origins of the sect were quite mysterious, and their hidden strength was unfathomable. More than two hundred years ago, a True Person Jin Qingyue had suddenly emerged. Now, after more than two hundred years, another, Lu Yuan, had appeared out of the blue. What¡¯s more, this Lu Yuan was about to take over Yi Dancheng¡¯s position as Sect Leader, becoming the new Sect Leader of Taiping Dao. The successive emergence of two unfamiliar True Persons, previously unheard of, inevitably led to suspicions that Taiping Dao had many more hidden strengths. Therefore, when the news spread, both Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Changqing Immortal Sect were extremely shocked and deeply apprehensive. The visible strength of Taiping Dao alone had previously caused both factions much distress. Now, with evidence of even more depth to the sect, they could not help feeling even more wary and guarded. This time Jiuzhou Immortal Gate sent so many True Persons not only to express sincerity but also as a sign of their apprehension. But at this moment, Master Zhen Xuan from Purple Cloud Sect mysteriously told Zhang Yunxuan that he knew the new Sect Leader of Taiping Dao, who apparently came from the same Nine Provinces as they did. This earth-shattering news naturally left the new True Person greatly shaken and unable to contain himself. ¡°I can¡¯t be certain if he is the Lu Yuan I know. However, the name and appearance of this new Sect Leader of Taiping Dao are strikingly similar to the Lu Yuan I remember,¡± True Person Zhen Xuan actually shook his head, also somewhat uncertain and puzzled, ¡°The last group of Immortal Sect Cultivators from the Nine Provinces made a pact to cross the sea for Ascension together. And that King of Chu, Lu Yuan, though a cultivator, lingered in the world¡¯s wealth and status and did not follow. Yet, with his capabilities, if he were to ultimately unite the Nine Provinces and harness their power, it¡¯s possible he could ascend once more. Upon detailed calculation, he and I are of the same age. After more than a thousand years, if he is still alive at this time, he is undoubtedly a True Immortal. And with his background in the Nine Provinces, becoming a True Immortal should rank him not among the ordinary. But I do not know why, if he really did ascend, why didn¡¯t he seek out our Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, instead joining Taiping Dao?¡± With these words, True Person Zhen Xuan, too, expressed a sense of confusion and bewilderment. Chapter 1393 - Chapter 1393 Chapter 548 The Second Earth Immortal ?Chapter 1393: Chapter 548: The Second Earth Immortal Chapter 1393: Chapter 548: The Second Earth Immortal For King of Chu, Lu Yuan, those cultivators from various northern states and domains within the Nine Provinces, as well as those from overseas domains who had ascended last, perhaps understood little about him. Cultivators from Qing, Yang, and Yong, especially those from Yangzhou, were definitely impressed. The majestic demeanor of the King could not be called an unprecedented rarity, but it was indeed a rarity encountered only every few centuries. After all, in this End of Dharma era, to rise against the current and achieve cultivation of condensed vitality solely through one¡¯s own strength was virtually unimaginable. People from various sects and Immortal Sects could not figure out how the King of Chu had achieved this. Thus, in their eyes, the King himself was shrouded in a mysterious aura. Many believed that perhaps the King of Chu was the person of Heavenly Mandate pushed forth by accumulated Qi Luck right before the apocalypse of the Nine Provinces. The intention was to use such a ruler to save the fate of the Nine Provinces. But the world of the Nine Provinces was already too decayed, rotten to the bonea€¡±beyond saving. Even though the King had exceptional innate talent and was favored by the world, consolidating his cultivation into a single vitality was not enough to save it. In this doomed era, the King was also unwilling to ascend and leave with thema€¡±likely constrained by Heaven and Earth, too deeply intertwined to sever his ties. Thus, the King was unable to ascend and never would. This was the general opinion many cultivators arrived at after understanding the King¡¯s rise and observing his actions. ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã0 However, this consensus was merely speculation formed after analyzing the man; it was never definitively proven. Whether the King truly was a man of Heavenly Mandate was unclear to anyone. Whether he genuinely coveted the power of the Nine Provinces, unwilling to abandon the mortal world and ascend, was also unknown. Whether the King would actually, as he said, wait a few more decades to unify the world before ascending, remained uncertain. But one thing everyone could be sure of: Considering the last of the resources of the Nine Provinces, if truly gathered together, the King might indeed rouse a great formation and ascend from the Northern Dark City to the Immortal Realm. With such a possibility, it was enough to cast doubt on whether current Lu Yuan was truly the King of Chu, Lu Yuan. ¡°First, let¡¯s not worry about why he did not come to our Western Domain and instead clarify whether this Lu Yuan is indeed the same Lu Yuan,¡± Zhang Yunxuan did not delve into his elder brother disciple¡¯s confusion but urged, ¡°If Taiping Dao¡¯s new School Leader, Lu Yuan, really is the King of Chu, Lu Yuan of the Nine Provinces, then he and our Jiuzhou Immortal Sect share the same lineage, making us one family. If the School Leader of Taiping Dao is part of our family, doesn¡¯t that make Taiping Dao part of our family too? Among the three major factions in the Changqing Domain today, Qing Immortal Sect is the strongest. And our Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, although recovering in recent years, suffered horrendously in a battle two hundred years ago, damaging our foundation. Recovery has been extremely difficult. As a result, we are now even inferior to Taiping Dao. Among the three Immortal Sects, we from the Jiuzhou are the weakest! Remember that three hundred years ago, Taiping Dao, known as the Master of the Southern Domain, was still subservient to us from Jiuzhou. Yet now they are equals and have even surpassed us. This state of affairs is a disgrace to our ancestors in Jiuzhou. But if we could ally with Taiping Dao and make them part of Jiuzhou, our strength could instantaneously return to pre-war levels. Normally, it would take three to five thousand years for us to recover our vitality, but with Taiping Dao, restoration could be immediate. By uniting the Western and Southern Domains, drawing the power from both sects, we might even eliminate Qing Immortal Sect and completely unify this domain. And all of this is possible as long as Lu Yuan is King of Chu, Lu Yuan.¡± The importance of having a School Leader from Taiping Dao who originated from Jiuzhou for the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect was beyond imagination. We might unite two sects to conspire over the Great Changqing Domain. Or we could provide significant support for Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, strengthening the bond between the two sects. After all, both are from Jiuzhou, and even within Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, there are people who knew you, a fellow countryman. Considering this relationship, wouldn¡¯t you favor Jiuzhou Immortal Sect in external affairs just a little? As Zhang Yunxuan said, Now among the three Immortal Sects, Qing Immortal Sect is the strongest, Taiping Dao is second, and Jiuzhou Immortal Sect has become the weakest. There is only one Earth Immortal among the Five Sects of the Western Domain, and even after cultivating Zhang Yunxuan, there are only four Human Immortals. Including other branches, there are only eight Human Immortals. In contrast, there is already one Earth Immortal and four Human Immortals in Taiping Dao. Among its subordinate sects, there are five Human Immortals. Even the former School Leader of Taiping Dao, Yi Dancheng, is now attempting to achieve Earth Immortal status, stepping down from his position to make way for the unprecedented Lu Yuan. Yi Dancheng and the people of Jiuzhou were well acquainted, and everyone from Jiuzhou knew well his talent and cultivation. The opponent definitely had the potential to become an Earth Immortal. If his current retreat succeeds, in another three to five hundred years, he might become an Earth Flower True Man. By then, Taiping Dao would boast two Earth Immortals. With such strength, Jiuzhou would be left far behind. Now Jiuzhou Immortal Sect is at its weakest, so weak that they even had to be subservient to Taiping Dao. And they should indeed be subservient. After all, the Five Sects of the Western Domain now control only the territories of six nations. Yet Taiping Dao has already secured the territories of ten nations. Just from the potential of their territories, they already surpass them. Chapter 1394 - Chapter 1394 Chapter 548 The Second Earth Immortal_2 ?Chapter 1394: Chapter 548 The Second Earth Immortal_2 Chapter 1394: Chapter 548 The Second Earth Immortal_2 Seeing the current flourishing development of Taiping Dao, it might surpass them in three thousand years, replacing the previous position of the Nine Provinces. The Nine Provinces would become what Taiping Dao was before the war, and Taiping Dao would become what the Nine Provinces were before the war. The situation had already reversed, and the people of the Nine Provinces had no choice but to make an effort to change. Among the numerous changes, transforming Taiping Dao into the Nine Provinces Immortal Sect was undoubtedly the best. It would not only enhance their strength but also not worry about excessively damaging their own interests. On the contrary, they might even benefit more from the merger of the two sects. Such a wonderful opportunity naturally made Zhang Yunxuan eager. Anyone would be tempted by this. ¡°You¡¯re right, if we could co-opt Taiping Dao, it would be a tremendous boon for us in the Nine Provinces.¡± Zhen Xuan was no fool and could see these points. He paced back and forth in the room and finally gritted his teeth, ¡°After the festival, I will stay at Mi Yun Mountain under the pretense of sect exchanges. I¡¯ll find an opportunity to meet with Lu Yuan, the new leader of Taiping Dao. At that time, I¡¯ll take the chance to test him. To see if this person is the Lu Yuan I know. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï If he is, then I¡¯ll see what his intentions are.¡± Confirming Lu Yuan¡¯s identity was important, but not crucial. After all, even if he truly was King Lu Yuan of Chu, and you were both from the same locale, both hailing from the Nine Provincesa€¡± If you clarify all this, then what? Just because you are from the same place, does he have to stand with you? Countrymen meeting countrymen might wipe away tears in mutual recognition but might also stab you in the back. Even blood brothers can quarrel enough to break down walls. Let alone fellow countrymen. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Lu Yuan¡¯s identity from the Nine Provinces only gave them an excuse and a channel to get closer to Taiping Dao, but it did not mean they could commandeer Taiping Dao. To make Taiping Dao join the Nine Provinces, what benefits can you offer them? Taiping Dao is now stronger than the Nine Provinces; they would be foolish to abandon their independence and great advantages to mix with a group of fallen houses like yours. So, the matter was not so simple. However, even if they couldn¡¯t facilitate the merge of the two sects, leveraging their shared regional origins to foster relations, it was still beneficial for the Nine Provinces Immortal Sect. The previous relationship between Taiping Dao and the Nine Provinces Immortal Sect, cultivated over hundreds of years, could only be categorized as fairly good, merely acquaintances. But adding the layer of shared hometown would instantly elevate it to that of countrymen. The trustworthiness between mere acquaintances and countrymen is self-evident. Thus, confirming identity first, then probing intentions, was the optimal choice. ¡°Elder Brother has considered this thoroughly; let¡¯s proceed as you suggest.¡± Zhang Yunxuan also understood these points and nodded in agreement. Zhen Xuan then cautioned, ¡°Before I ascertain his intentions, this message must not leak. We cannot reveal any clues on our end; the disciples should not be told. Otherwise, if the Qing Immortal Sect finds out, it will complicate matters.¡± Zhang Yunxuan nodded, ¡°Yes, I understand. I will be careful and won¡¯t let it slip.¡± The identity of Lu Yuan of Taiping Dao was an excellent strategic asset. If used well, it could prove extremely beneficial in the future. For example, if they leveraged Lu Yuan¡¯s identity to forge a good relationship with Taiping Dao, while the Qing Immortal Sect remained oblivious to this, Then in future conflicts between them and the Qing Immortal Sect, having a countryman in Taiping Dao could catch Qing Immortal Sect off guard, possibly crushing them instantly. Moreover, it was also a problem whether Lu Yuan wanted to reveal his identity. If you rashly point out his background, it might cause his displeasure. Not only would that fail to improve the relations between both sides, but it might even worsen your standing with Taiping Dao, amounting to a loss rather than a gain. As for not telling the disciplesa€¡± That was naturally the traditional cunning of both the Nine Provinces Immortal Sect and Qing Immortal Sect, with both sides deeply infiltrated by the other, essentially becoming a sieve. It was unclear whose disciples might be spies sent by the other. You inform a disciple today, and tomorrow, the Qing Immortal Sect may already know. It was inevitable. In the world of Immortal Sects, there were too many ways and means to plant a spy within a rival. Even though all sects have the wisdom to screen for traitors, they are indefensible against such tactics and stratagems. There¡¯s only the saying, ¡®A thief for a day, but no guard against a thief forever.¡¯ In reality, Taiping Dao was no better off. Since the rise of Taiping Dao in the Southern Domain, both the Nine Provinces Immortal Sect and Qing Immortal Sect began to pay more attention to this new neighbor. Taiping Dao, having just established itself here, had recruited many people over the years. Among those new disciples, it was unclear how many were spies. News about Taiping Dao had long been leaked out; it was akin to being naked in front of both neighbors. Although Lu Yuan was about to assume the position of sect leader, he had never met an outsider before, and Zhen Xuan didn¡¯t know what he looked like. His name and appearance were known to Zhen Xuan, of course, through spies within his sect. Ah, Taiping Dao, compared to the other two sects, was no better. Secrets could not be kept within the sect. Fortunately, Lu Yuan relied on several of his own avatars. The core members who managed affairs were also the Yellow Turban Strongmen he personally transformed. Those new disciples might betray Taiping Dao, But his avatars and Yellow Turban Strongmen had absolutely no possibility of betrayal. Chapter 1395 - Chapter 1395 Chapter 548 The Second Earth Immortal_3 ?Chapter 1395: Chapter 548 The Second Earth Immortal_3 Chapter 1395: Chapter 548 The Second Earth Immortal_3 Thus, the information leaked out was all unimportant peripheral details. The real core content had always been kept secret, never discovered by outsiders. And Lu Yuan only focused on these cores; he didn¡¯t pay much attention to minor details. In the Immortal Realm, strength was revered. As long as his Avatars and he himself were handled well, no amount of chaos could overturn the heavens. With one slap, all disorder would be quelled. He had no fear. At the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, when the undercurrents began stirring over Lu Yuan¡¯s identity, inside Mi Yun Mountain, the would-be School Leader Lu Yuan was seen sitting on the School Leader¡¯s seat, smilingly watching Yi Dancheng, whose temperament had greatly changed, lavishing praise on him. ¡°Not bad, not bad. Yi Dancheng, you truly did not disappoint my expectations. You are the first to cultivate the Earth Flower Dao Fruit, becoming my second Earth Immortal Avatar.¡± Yes, Yi Dancheng standing below had already altered the level of his life, undergoing a transformation and leap to become an Earth Immortal True Person. Another Earth Immortal had emerged within Taiping Dao. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï However, Yi Dancheng was very humble, ¡°This is all thanks to your care, my original self. If you hadn¡¯t entrusted all the Qi Luck of Taiping Dao¡¯s five countries to me over the past two hundred years, I couldn¡¯t have broken through so quickly.¡± He was speaking the truth. Since Taiping Dao had obtained Le Mountain and Anyang from two countries, their territory had expanded. Therefore, Lu Yuan, with a grand gesture, gathered the resources of the five countries to focus on nurturing Yi Dancheng. Yi Dancheng was already at the late-stage of Human Immortal cultivation, but he hadn¡¯t had enough foundation accumulated to challenge the Earthly Immortal Realm. But Lu Yuan¡¯s concentration of resources from the five countries had filled that gap. After accumulating for over a hundred years, Yi Dancheng met the requirements to challenge Earth Immortal fifty years ago. Then after thirty years of dedicated cultivation, at the very desolate location where Lu Yuan had ascended, Yi Dancheng broke through to Earth Immortal, unnoticed by anyone. He then spent another twenty years in seclusion to consolidate his new realm. Inside Taiping Dao, there was now officially another Earth Immortal. But to the outside world, Yi Dancheng¡¯s breakthrough was kept a tightly guarded secret by Lu Yuan. The speed at which Taiping Dao was producing Earth Immortals was unnaturally fast. This fact couldn¡¯t be revealed; otherwise, it would attract attention and potentially lead to deadly dangers. Though with the current state of the Changqing Domain, essentially no one could kill him. But even if nobody could kill him, it could still cause others to become wary and hostile. If Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate knew the strength of Taiping Dao, especially their rapid production of Earth Immortals, these two Immortal Sects would definitely not sit still. They would likely join forces immediately to suppress Taiping Dao. Even direct warfare was a possibility. Especially on the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate side, since they and Lu Yuan were both from the Nine Provinces, the Immortal Realm¡¯s Nine Provinces lineage still held Radiant Immortal Dynasty. If Yi Dancheng¡¯s matter was exposed, they might be able to deduce through clues that Taiping Dao was cultivating the Way of Qi Luck. Lu Yuan certainly did not want to experience the embarrassment of being completely exposed. Moreover, to complete the development plan he had set, he couldn¡¯t afford to be high-profile. Hence, the details of Yi Dancheng¡¯s breakthrough needed to stay hidden. Even to prevent discovery by others, he had to create an excuse to resign from the position of School Leader, enter seclusion under the pretense of breaking through Earth Immortal, and completely avoid contact with others. In this way, since he wouldn¡¯t be seen or interact much with outsiders, the secrets of Taiping Dao would naturally remain undiscovered. Although Yi Dancheng had to retreat due to his breakthrough, this also greatly assisted Lu Yuan. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? At the very least, it gave him a strong foundation of confidence. With Yi Dancheng, Taiping Dao now had two Earth Immortals. If Yi Dancheng and Qing Guanzi joined forces, along with the Earth Immortal formation, even Song Xiren, who was gradually gaining popularity as the number one expert in the Changqing Domain, wouldn¡¯t hope to gain any advantage. Within the Changqing Domain, Lu Yuan now stood in an invincible position. As long as he wasn¡¯t foolish enough to leave Mi Yun Mountain of his own accord, essentially, no one could kill him unless Heavenly Immortals emerged. With his safety greatly assured, he also had no need to continue hiding and being an invisible figure in the shadows. Previously planned actions, such as using his Nine Provinces origins to align with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, could now be put on the schedule and executed. Just perfect. Now that Yi Dancheng had broken through to Earth Immortal and required seclusion to maintain secrecy, he could step forward, take over the position of School Leader, and proudly announce to the world that he, Lu Yuan, was the new School Leader of Taiping Dao. This was also a bait, using his identity to lure those with intentions. For example, those still alive from the Nine Provinces who knew him. Now that the bait was laid out, he hoped it wouldn¡¯t be long before the fish bit. Lu Yuan was full of anticipation. ¡°I concentrated resources on you because I wanted you to break through the threshold, and you¡¯ve fulfilled my task. That¡¯s excellent.¡± While Lu Yuan was contemplating, he kept talking, and after praising Yi Dancheng, he turned to another, Che Shidao: ¡°Now that one has broken through to Earth Immortal, I will direct the Qi Luck resources of these five countries to you. Your primary task in the next two hundred years is to become the next one to break through to Earth Immortal. You can do that, right?¡± These years, although Yi Dancheng had taken up most of the resources, Lu Yuan had not neglected the nurturing of Che Shidao. Those disciples had already exchanged the Qi Luck of the remaining two countries with their contributions. But though the Qi was gone, the Qi Luck remained. For those practicing the Way of Qi Luck, while skills and techniques were just a bonus, Qi Luck was the foundation of the Great Tao. Lu Yuan and Yi Dancheng each took the Qi Luck of the remaining country. Now after two hundred years, Lu Yuan had reached the pinnacle of mid-level Human Immortal, nearly touching the edge of late-stage Human Immortal. And Che Shidao had gone a step further, already touching the threshold of the Earthly Immortal Realm. Now all he needed was a massive accumulation of resources to push through this phase change and break through the barrier. Two hundred years were enough for this third Avatar to achieve the status of Earth Immortal. ¡°With the resources of five countries, I am certain to become an Earth Immortal within two hundred years,¡± assured Che Shidao, facing the expectations of his original self. ¡°Good, then I¡¯ll await the day you achieve Earth Immortal,¡± responded Lu Yuan with a laugh. Chapter 1396 - Chapter 1396 Chapter 549 Diplomatic Checks and Balances ?Chapter 1396: Chapter 549: Diplomatic Checks and Balances Chapter 1396: Chapter 549: Diplomatic Checks and Balances The next day. As messengers of the various invitations gradually arrived at Mi Yun Mountain, the prearranged date also approached. The Succession Ceremony for the new School Leader of Taiping Dao was officially underway. However, since Taiping Dao had only recently established a foothold in the Changqing Domain, its foundations were extremely shallow, and it really didn¡¯t have much of a relationship with the numerous surrounding Immortal Sects. The celebration was organized without inviting too many Immortal Sects, extending invitations only to familiar ones like Changqing Immortal Sect, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Dongyang Mountain, and a few others around the Changqing Domain¡¯s periphery, where any with Cultivation above the level of True Immortal were just sent an invitation, and that was all. As for whether the others would come or not, that was unclear. But on the day of the ceremony, looking at the list of more than thirty Immortal Sects that had come to offer congratulations, Lu Yuan knew that many had come. Those who could come from the list of invitees had basically all come. ¡®It seems that my Taiping Dao is starting to be seen as on par with Changqing Immortal Sect in the eyes of the surrounding sects,¡¯ he thought atop the Immortal Platform, as he coordinated the handover of the School Leader¡¯s seal with Yi Dancheng and surveyed the many guests below. Only during the time two hundred years ago, when Song Xiren succeeded the leadership of Changqing Immortal Sect, was there such grandeur. And as for the Succession Ceremony for Ding Wanxuan to take over as the Alliance Leader of the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects organized by Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, that was far more meager. Apart from the sects of Jiuzhou itself and the Immortal Sects which were vassals that had to attend, none of the other independent sects cared to bother with them. The reason for this was simple. The surrounding Immortal Sects actually despised Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and regarded it as a force of rebellion. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï No matter how righteous the banner that Jiuzhou waved, calling for the revival of the Nine Spirits Sect¡¯s Tao Inheritance, to reclaim their ancestral lands and whatnot. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï No matter how noble these reasons were, they couldn¡¯t change one fact, and that was that Changqing Domain was thrown into chaos by them, with fractured lands and rampant demons causing the people to be displaced, and countless Immortal Sects¡¯ inheritances exterminated. All these atrocities were committed by Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. And these actions, to those surrounding domains that stood secure, to those Immortal Sects that strictly adhered to the righteous path, seemed nothing short of heretical and offensive. All those who benefit from the status quo tend towards stability. Only with stability can one¡¯s interests be inherited. And the actions of Jiuzhou were doubtlessly disrupting this stability. Today, Jiuzhou could disturb one domain, eradicate an Immortal Sect, wreak havoc on a country. If such behavior was not stopped, but rather highly praised, then what would prevent others from copying this model in their own domains tomorrow? Who could feel secure? Wouldn¡¯t they fear that their own Sect¡¯s Tao Inheritance might also be extinguished? Thus, the disdain for Jiuzhou was actually an instinctive response from each Immortal Sect, sparked by their own moral stances and survival needs. Furthermore, it goes without saying that Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had already begun to infringe upon their interests. Heavenly River Sect, Yuchan Tao, Wind and Thunder Path, Radiant Immortal Dynasty a€¡° had any of these Jiuzhou sects not been actively expanding in their domains? And those Immortal Sects whose interests were harmed by their expansion, could they not harbor enmity and resentment? Previously, the reason why Heavenly River Sect could not extricate itself from the great battle was that it was entangled by hostile Immortal Sects. Why did those sects view Heavenly River Sect with enmity, throwing stumbling blocks its way? Was it not because they had been bullied by Heavenly River Sect? And why did Yuchan Tao and Wind and Thunder Path not want to get involved in the mess of the Changqing Domain? Was it not because these two sects had also noticed the hostility of the surrounding Immortal Sects and, to avoid inciting collective wrath, refrained from waging war, and actively localized themselves to mitigate the grudges with the other sects? All these reasons were why the surrounding Immortal Sects despised Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Under such an atmosphere, tell me, who would look favorably upon these sects of Jiuzhou? To say they were despised by people and hated by dogs would not be an exaggeration. However, Taiping Dao, unlike Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, was held in a different regard. In the eyes of the surrounding powers, although the origins of Taiping Dao were mysterious and its sudden rise was inscrutable, its actions had won the admiration and satisfaction of many. Think back to when Taiping Dao first arrived in the Changqing Domain, what was the situation like in the Southern Domain? Demons roamed freely, the people were suffering, each Immortal Sect had fallen into evil ways, and humanity was lost. Not only did they not contemplate eradication of demons to maintain the righteous path, but they also mingled with the demons, joining them in harming other Immortal Sects and the common people. Such conduct was contemptible and urgently demanded rectification. Yet when it actually came to taking action to remove these reprobates and restore the righteous path of the Immortal Sects, no one wished to step forward. Taiping Dao was different. Upon its arrival, it purged the demons of Youxin Country and then, through a single Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony, brought peace to the entire Southern Domain. It restrained the sects within from straying, and with demons either fleeing or perishing, the whole atmosphere was purified. In the three hundred years that followed, Taiping Dao always upheld stability, never actively sought disputes, and maintained peace with its neighbors. Unlike Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, which oppressed and swallowed up their vassal sects, Taiping Dao chose to protect dependents like Jintai Gate instead. Such behavior, committed to the Tao, peaceful and law-abiding, upholding righteousness, and shielding the weak, with two other local neighbors as contrast, seemed to the surrounding Immortal Sects like the model of an Immortal Sect, a saint among men. With such a good neighbor present, who could dislike them? Chapter 1397 - Chapter 1397 Chapter 549 Diplomatic Balance_2 ?Chapter 1397: Chapter 549 Diplomatic Balance_2 Chapter 1397: Chapter 549 Diplomatic Balance_2 Therefore, Taiping Dao¡¯s reputation had always been quite good. Moreover, in recent years, Taiping Dao frequently sent disciples out to travel. During their travels, they constantly eliminated monsters and demons, upheld the righteous path, and left behind a good name in various domains. The neighboring Immortal Sects also had a very favorable impression of the disciples from Taiping Dao. All these factors combined meant that Taiping Dao was held in very high regard. That so many people came to offer their congratulations at the Succession Ceremony was a testament to Taiping Dao¡¯s favorable position in everyone¡¯s hearts. ¡°Esteemed fellow Daoists, I am entrusted by the Head Brother and esteemed by the Elder Taishang to assume the position of School Leader¡­¡± Under the watchful eyes of the True Persons, Lu Yuan received the Great Seal, then, with one hand holding the Seal, he looked at the audience and delivered his succession speech. After a lengthy speech of several thousand characters, he finally stopped, feeling like he still had much left to say. He had spent too many years secluded in the shadows, engaging in Closing Door Cultivation, and aside from a few avatars, he hadn¡¯t had the chance to chat with anyone. After a few hundred years, he had grown somewhat stifled. Now, seizing the opportunity, he couldn¡¯t help but speak at length. Fortunately, all the True Persons were patient and listened attentively to what he had to say. Especially Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, being neighbors, they were extra attentive to the policies and guidelines of the next School Leader of Taiping Dao. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Although Lu Yuan¡¯s succession words were long-winded, some of his remarks did hint at the future attitudes of Taiping Dao. In summary, the message was one of stability. No changes, no innovation, and no disturbance to the status quo; he intended to follow the previous School Leader¡¯s governance philosophy, continuing to develop Taiping Dao peacefully without getting involved in external conflicts. Upon hearing this, everyone breathed a sigh of relief. Taiping Dao¡¯s current strength and status affected the entire dynamics of the Changqing Domain. If the new School Leader of Taiping Dao were someone who liked to stir things up and sought great achievements, then these hard-won peaceful years might soon face turbulence again. Currently, both Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Sect were in a period of strength recovery, and none of them wanted to see any changes to the current structure. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Even delegates from other Immortal Sects in surrounding domains were pleased and comforted by the governance philosophy of Taiping Dao¡¯s new School Leader. Truly worthy of the name Taiping Dao, their actions always aimed for peace. That¡¯s the way it should be. What good comes from fighting and killing? To seclude oneself within the Mountain Gate, exchange Dao Law with fellow disciples, explore the path of immortality. When weary, go out to seek wonders, make friends with other Daoists, travel the world, soar to the heavens or burrow into the eartha€¡±that is what Immortals should do. Sects like Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, who only know slaughter, have already deviated from the proper path of Immortal Sects and are veering towards the evil path. Such people are despised by many of their peers. ¡°I am delighted to assume the position of School Leader at a time when so many esteemed Daoists have come to celebrate. On this auspicious and wonderful day, it is fitting for us to discuss the Dao together. I am willing to hold a Dharma Assembly, to exchange Dao Law within the mountains, to progress together, and to seek the path of immortality. If the esteemed Daoists do not mind, I invite you all to join this grand occasion.¡± After finishing his prepared speech, Lu Yuan extended the invitation at the conclusion. As someone who had suddenly emerged, although he had assumed the position of School Leader of Taiping Dao, the Immortals from various parties around him were not at all familiar with him. And as a School Leader, it was inevitable that he would deal with various forces in the future; how could he carry out diplomatic affairs if he did not recognize anyone and was not familiar with them? What better opportunity than this Succession Ceremony to invite everyone to stay and discuss the mysterious Dao and partake in Immortal Technique together? By organizing a Dharma Assembly, he could become acquainted with the True Persons and establish good relationships. He could also use this opportunity to talk to some people and promote some cooperation. Thinking this way, Lu Yuan¡¯s gaze drifted toward one side. The Real Mystery Taoist, standing a short distance to his right, was watching him closely. Their gazes met, and the latter revealed a friendly smile, his eyes filled with a probing interest. Lu Yuan did not respond much; instead, he turned to look at another side, where Yang Jihua, the messenger from Qing Immortal Sect, was curiously looking at him. This former newcomer to Qing Immortal Sect had remarkably survived the previous great battle and was fortunate to live on. And after over three hundred years of trials, Yang Jihua had also made rapid progress. Not only had his Cultivation broken through to Mid-level Human Immortal, but his renown had also widely spread within the Changqing Domain. Everyone praised him as an Earth Immortal Seed, and in a thousand years, he had the potential to achieve the status of Earth Immortal. Song Xiren indeed treated Yang Jihua as a key figure to cultivate, entrusting him with heavy responsibilities and allocating three nations for him to govern over the years. The fate of the three nations could nourish an Earth Immortal. It was clear what Qing Immortal Sect intended for him. They hoped he would become the next Earth Immortal, a new pillar for the sect. Sending such a person as an emissary to Taiping Dao, Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s attention to Lu Yuan, the new School Leader, was very evident. They wanted to strengthen the relationship, deepen the alliance between the two sects. Think about it. Who was Yi Dancheng, the previous School Leader of Taiping Dao? He was a close friend of the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, often making trips to the Western Domain, visiting his Jiuzhou fellow Daoists there. He even traveled beyond the domain to socialize with True Persons from other branches of Jiuzhou. All his actions clearly demonstrated his preference for Jiuzhou. With such a School Leader, it was only natural for Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou to grow closer, with relations continually becoming more intimate. Seeing this gradual convergence of the two sects, how could Qing Immortal Sect not be anxious? Chapter 1398 - Chapter 1398 Chapter 549 Diplomatic Checks and Balances_3 ?Chapter 1398: Chapter 549: Diplomatic Checks and Balances_3 Chapter 1398: Chapter 549: Diplomatic Checks and Balances_3 If it weren¡¯t for the fact that Taiping Dao¡¯s stabilizing force, Elder Taishang Qing Guanzi, and the incumbent School Leader Song Xiren of Changqing Immortal Sect were close confidants with an intimate relationship, able to soothe the heart of Changqing Immortal Sect, at this point, the two sects might have already been rife with conflict, on the verge of coming to blows. Qing Guanzi acted as the lubricant, easing the increasingly dry camaraderie between them, maintaining superficial stability. But no lubricant, however slick, could solve all issues. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï In recent years, the relationship between Changqing Immortal Sect and Taiping Dao had also gradually become more distant. The most obvious example was the disciples of Taiping Dao who ventured out had rarely visited the territory of the Changqing Immortal Sect in the north anymore. Not just at the top tiers, even at the grassroots level, the two Immortal Sects had been drifting apart. This trend had caused great worry and unease among the higher echelons of Changqing Immortal Sect. They had always wanted to make some changes. Otherwise, if Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate were to join forces, collaborating against them, the situation would be quite unfavorable. But with Yi Dancheng of Taiping Dao, leaning towards Jiuzhou, as the leader, even if Changqing Immortal Sect wanted to improve relations, it was very troublesome, fraught with difficulties. Some actions hadn¡¯t even been taken before they were prematurely doomed. Therefore, despite their eagerness, they could only contain it and wait for an opportunity. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Fortunately, heaven helps those who help themselves. It didn¡¯t take very long, just over three hundred years, and the opportunity truly arrived. Yi Dancheng intended to step down, passing the leadership to another, to focus on cultivating in solitude, attempting to breakthrough to Earth Immortal. Although the prospect of such a Jiuzhou-leaning individual later achieving the breakthrough and becoming an Earth Immortal was not good news for Changqing Immortal Sect, the difficulty of such a breakthrough was immense, with hardly one in ten Human Immortals succeeding. Even if everything went smoothly, it would be difficult without several hundred to nearly a thousand years. Yi Dancheng¡¯s potential issue was a matter for the future. However, the new School Leader of Taiping Dao was a concern for now. As long as they could grasp this new School Leader, establishing a good relationship, the current trend of Taiping Dao drawing closer to Jiuzhou Immortal Gate might be turned around. Under the new leadership, might they take a harsh turn and lean towards their Changqing Immortal Sect? With this thought, Yang Jihua came. This True Person, prominently nurtured by Changqing Immortal Sect and with close relations to Taiping Dao, was here to accomplish it all. ¡°School Leader Lu, I am Yang Jihua; might I have a word in private?¡± Upon seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s gaze turning towards him, Yang Jihua stepped forward and took the initiative to extend an invitation. Opportunities and allies couldn¡¯t be waited for. To seize an opportunity, to win over allies, one had to make the first move. Before the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s deceivers could confound him, he intended to befriend this new School Leader, making him one of their own. That¡¯s what Yang Jihua thought. ¡°Master Yang¡¯s reputation precedes him, and I have long wanted to meet with True Person. How could I decline True Person¡¯s invitation?¡± Hearing the invitation, Lu Yuan glanced at Zhen Xuan in the distance, who still hadn¡¯t made a move, and scoffed in his heart, deciding to give him a shock. If the fish doesn¡¯t bite the bait, let it be hungry and acquire the sense of crisis; that¡¯s when it will take the initiative. And Yang Jihua was precisely such a medium. Let Zhen Xuan see that he was leaning towards Changqing Immortal Sect and see if that made him anxious. Although he decided to gradually foster good relations with Jiuzhou, relations with Changqing Immortal Sect couldn¡¯t be neglected either. It was still essential to maintain a harmonious relationship with them until fully developed. And so it was. Under Zhen Xuan¡¯s watchful eye, Lu Yuan and Yang Jihua, laughing and talking, headed towards a secluded place. Chapter 1399 - Chapter 1399 Chapter 550 All Are Poor Bastards ?Chapter 1399: Chapter 550 All Are Poor Bastards Chapter 1399: Chapter 550 All Are Poor Bastards Crystal clear springs and stream water, with the valley profound and serene. After more than three hundred years of gathering earth¡¯s energy, Mi Yun Mountain had become increasingly majestic, with heavy layers of lush greenery and countless spectacular sights emerging. Leaving the cloud platform he was previously on, Lu Yuan brought Yang Jihua to a quiet place within the mountain, where they admired the beautiful scenery while discussing confidential matters. The two walked in the mountain for a long time without speaking. Lu Yuan watched the scenery contentedly. After he had arrived in this world, his first identity was that of a mountain hunter, truly a son of the great mountains. However, the turbulent changes later had step by step pushed him to where he was today, far removed from his past self as a single person. Though people change, this did not affect his looking back at the past. Occasionally, walking in the mountains, finding a stream, brewing tea on a blue stone while watching the landscape, and roasting one or two game animals a€¡° these were moments filled with fond memories. In recent years, he had been in seclusion, and by now, his cultivation had reached the late-stage Human Immortal. Only a little was missing before he could advance to the Human Immortal Peak and rush towards the Earth Immortal realm. According to the plan, once Che Shidao broke through to Earth Immortal, the next to attempt the breakthrough would be Lu Yuan himself. Now everything was on the right track, and his pressure had been greatly reduced. Although he had more leisure time to enjoy the scenery. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï And at this moment, he was setting up a lure, aiming to fish for the Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. I had the advantage and the initiative, so naturally, there was no need to speak first. Beside him, Yang Jihua had no spare time to enjoy the surrounding beauty but was lost in thought. It seemed he had something to say. Lu Yuan waited patiently. After a while, the other party finally spoke, ¡°School Leader Lu, how do you¡­ view the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate?¡± Perhaps considering the increasingly close relationship between Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate in recent years, or maybe because it had only been a peaceful two hundred years since the last great war had inflicted too much trauma. So, unusually, Yang Jihua did not address Jiuzhou Immortal Gate as ¡®the remnants of Jiuzhou¡¯ but instead used a more neutral term. Of course. To call Jiuzhou Immortal Gate by its name was, in a way, to separate it from the Nine Spirits Sect. This was considered politically correct within the Qing Immortal Sect. ¡°Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, our friends in Taiping Dao as well¡­¡± Lu Yuan did not hesitate and immediately responded, then seeing the slight change in Yang Jihua¡¯s expression after hearing his answer, he quickly added with a smile, ¡°Of course, Qing Immortal Sect is also a dear friend of our sect. Both of your sects have helped us in times of peril when Taiping Dao was just established. Especially your sect, which has offered quite a lot of support. Two hundred years ago, Daoist Yang even helped our sect to reside in the Great Eye Kingdom, ensuring our peace. These bonds of friendship have always been cherished by our sect, we dare not forget.¡± Lu Yuan conveyed his goodwill. And mentioning these past events, Yang Jihua¡¯s complexion indeed improved substantially. Indeed. If the relationship and mutual feelings were to be considered, from a visible standpoint, Qing Immortal Sect and Taiping Dao indeed seemed closer. Not to mention the help provided by Taiping Dao when they just established their Tao inheritance. Just take the recent ceding of Leshan and Anyang, two kingdoms a€¡° this was a generous gift. Just these benefits alone made the contributions of Qing Immortal Sect to Taiping Dao exceed those of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate by who knows how much. From this perspective, the two truly seemed closer. Yang Jihua quickly replied, ¡°School Leader Lu is correct, our two sects, ever since the establishment of Tao inheritance by Taiping Dao at Mi Yun Mountain, have always been in frequent communication and exchange. These are the origins of our bond. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Although in recent years, there has been a slight estrangement between our two families, the friendship remains, something we should not forget. In my view, we should put aside past grievances and work together to maintain the stability within Changqing Domain, thus not failing our mutual acquaintance.¡± Lu Yuan nodded in agreement, ¡°Daoist Yang is right. Since the establishment of our two sects, we have always been on good terms. Such bonds of friendship must indeed be maintained continuously.¡± Upon hearing this, Yang Jihua, however, sighed, ¡°School Leader Lu speaks truly, our two sects indeed should be closer. However, the actions of your sect in recent years have caused me great concern. Your previous School Leader, Daoist Yi, visited Jiuzhou Immortal Gate every year, traveling to the Western Domain hundreds of times over two hundred years. But the number of visits to Changqing Mountain last year did not exceed the count of one hand. Such favoring one over the other inevitably causes concern in our sect. Whether your sect has already allied with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and is conspiring against our sect.¡± Yang Jihua did not mince his words, directly expressing his dissatisfaction. In dealing with Qing and Jiuzhou Immortal Sects, Taiping Dao indeed went too far. Everyone was neighbors, so why should they engage with others and not with us? Was it a slight? ¡°Daoist friend worries too much.¡± Lu Yuan, slightly embarrassed, had previously only instructed Yi Dancheng to become close with Jiuzhou, to bring their relationship as close as possible. Then this avatar made annual visits to Jiuzhou, and as a leader of a sect, spent more time in the Western Domain than at Taiping Dao. Such behavior was indeed outrageous. No wonder the Qing Immortal Sect felt such concerns, breeding deep anxieties. Anyone would be restless under such circumstances. But such actions had very effective results. Thanks to the closeness of Taiping Dao, with the efforts of Yi Dancheng, the impression and affection of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate for Taiping Dao soared like flying swords, rising at an incredible speed. By now, some Taiping Dao disciples traveling to the Western Domain, due to the close relationship between the two sects, even referred to Jiuzhou Immortal Gate disciples as fellow disciples. Chapter 1400 - Chapter 1400 Chapter 550 All Are Poor Bastards_2 ?Chapter 1400: Chapter 550 All Are Poor Bastards_2 Chapter 1400: Chapter 550 All Are Poor Bastards_2 ¡°` This kind of relationship was previously unique within the internal affairs of the Immortal Sects among the Nine Provinces. Now that Taiping Dao has also partially joined, it indicates the effectiveness of Yi Dancheng¡¯s diplomatic efforts. That is why Lu Yuan knew that doing so had great disadvantages and could easily provoke the antagonism of Evergreen Immortal Sect. Yet he never called a halt, allowing Yi Dancheng to continue. It was because Taiping Dao gained far more from this situation than it lost. Weighing the two sides, it naturally chose the one with the greater benefits. However, this behavior has continued until now, and the relationship with the Immortal Sects of the Nine Provinces has grown extremely close. Being able to call each other ¡°fellow disciples¡± is already the limit. For the relationship between the two sides to make any further breakthroughs, Lu Yuan would have to declare his origins and switch the allegiance of Taiping Dao to the Nine Provinces, so that the two could be as close as family. Otherwise, the current state is as far as it can go. Although Lu Yuan had already decided that in the future he would join the Nine Provinces¡¯ camp to better occupy Changqing Domain, at this time, he was not ready and had no immediate thoughts of joining the other side. Maintaining the status quo was about right. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 To delve further would be excessive. So, he changed his policy, from the original extreme closeness to the Nine Provinces to a more moderate position, staying close to both sides. Such a pivot had good reasons behind it. The previous School Leader was close to the Nine Provinces, while the current one was close to Evergreen Immortal Sect. Each side had someone who was close, so neither was left owing the other. With the previous School Leader¡¯s efforts, the current disciples of Taiping Dao naturally had better relations with the Immortal Sects of the Nine Provinces. As such, Lu Yuan, being the current School Leader, could accordingly be more inclined towards Evergreen Immortal Sect. With him in charge, it would give Evergreen Immortal Sect a hope for future change, ensuring that if they could secure his support, after a few hundred or thousand years, they could dissipate the influence Yi Dancheng previously brought, making Taiping Dao lean more towards Evergreen Immortal Sect. Simply put, Yi Dancheng represents the past, while Lu Yuan represents the future. Stabilize the Immortal Sects of the Nine Provinces with the past, and entice Evergreen Immortal Sect with the future. This two-pronged approach and balancing act could be said to be quite masterly. ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Indeed, it is worthy of someone who was an emperor for a thousand years; an ordinary person couldn¡¯t play this game. Following this line of thought, Lu Yuan at this time naturally expressed as much goodwill as possible, hinting to Yang Jihua that he was inclined towards the Nine Provinces. ¡°Previously, Yi Elder had indeed gone a bit too far. As the School Leader, he favored the Nine Provinces due to personal preferences, causing our neighbors to worry. This was a mistake of our Taiping Dao.¡± Lu Yuan first expressed his apology and then swiftly changed the subject, ¡°However, there has been much discussion about this matter within our sect, with differing opinions. After consultation, Yi Elder decided to retreat for closed meditation and no longer interfere with management affairs, handing the position of School Leader to this humble one to make amends for these mistakes. I, having never had dealings with the Nine Provinces or Evergreen Immortal Sect before, have no relations with either side, and naturally can maintain a steady, impartial stance. Taoist does not need to worry about which side our Taiping Dao will favor. From now on, under my governance, both sides will be treated equally; no one will be elevated above the other. Taoist can rest assured of this. Of course, regarding the goodwill of your sect, especially the previous assistance, both myself and the sect have always remembered it at heart and have not forgotten. If Taoist has any needs in the future, just send a message to our Taiping Dao. As long as it is within our power, we will surely help if we can, without daring to refuse.¡± Lu Yuan subtly hinted at the reason for the change of leadership in Taiping Dao this time, leading Yang Jihua to think about internal discord. At the same time, he touched upon the affection between the two sides, subtly expressing his inclination. Naturally, the counterpart was not a stupid person and immediately understood the meaning behind the words. Yang Jihua immediately said, ¡°With Lu School Leader leading Taiping Dao, Taoist as well as our sect naturally believe that in the future, Taiping Dao will treat Evergreen and the Nine Provinces justly. The friendship between our two sects will also scale new heights. If Taoist Lu is willing, I would like to cordially invite you and your disciples to visit Changqing Mountain. It is fitting, with the new succession of the School Leadership of Taiping Dao, for our two sects to visit each other. Having Taoist Lu visit our sect would surely delight our School Leader¡¯s uncle, who will warmly welcome you and not disappoint Taoist Lu.¡± Perhaps after witnessing the grandeur of Yi Dancheng with a large group of disciples visiting the Western Domain each year over the past two hundred years, Evergreen Immortal Sect had become somewhat envious, and Yang Jihua made the invitation. As for those who had been led astray by Yi Dancheng previously, they had given up hope on them, but from now on, they must not let go of the disciples led by the new School Leader. If they couldn¡¯t hold onto the past, they had to seize the future. Our Evergreen Immortal Sect will not lose to anyone, especially not to that sworn enemy. ¡°This¡­¡± However, facing Yang Jihua¡¯s invitation, Lu Yuan appeared to be troubled and hesitant, saying, ¡°Taoist Yang, just to be clear, it¡¯s not that I don¡¯t want to go to Evergreen Immortal Sect. It¡¯s just that I have just taken office and there are many things that need my attention within the sect, leaving me no leisure time. Moreover, many disciples of the sect have their own important responsibilities. To earn their chance at becoming immortal, they also travel outside throughout the year, seeking seclusion and mystery, looking for heavenly treasures to present to the sect. I¡¯m not embarrassed to say, Taiping Dao previously suffered a catastrophe, and the sect is rebuilding from ruins. All our previous foundations have been consumed in the disaster. To this day, those of us fortunate enough to survive and come to Changqing Domain have nothing left but our lives, not even half an item filled with immortal energy in our hands.¡± ¡°` Chapter 1401 - Chapter 1401 Chapter 550 All Are Poor Bastards_3 ?Chapter 1401: Chapter 550 All Are Poor Bastards_3 Chapter 1401: Chapter 550 All Are Poor Bastards_3 As the School Leader, I stand empty-handed, forced to battle others with nothing but my bare hands. The depths of poverty make my heart shudder with fear and worry. In order to revitalise our sect, I had no choice but to instruct our disciples to seek treasures abroad to enrich our sect¡¯s foundation. This opportunity also served to provide our disciples with a channel for cultivation and advancement, offering them a chance at becoming immortal. It¡¯s not that I do not wish to guide our disciples to traverse the Changqing Mountain, but since the mountain is a hereditary estate of your revered sect, we, who are outsiders, dare not covet anything from there. Yet, when our disciples venture out, they must also return with something. The path to immortality is long and life is short; they wish to seize the chance for longevity and immortality within their limited lifespan. As a School Leader, how could I bear to delay them?¡± Lu Yuan expressed his grievances and frustrations to Yang Jihua with a pained face. However, in waiting to hear this, what I understand from the words of this new School Leader of Taiping Dao is straightforward. That is, he wants me to come over and offer some travel funds as a courtesy first. No money? Then I¡¯m not interested in visiting Changqing Mountain. But the sorrowful grievances mentioned by Lu Yuan do hold some truth. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The disciples of Taiping Dao who travel abroad are primarily motivated by treasure hunting and the pursuit of wealth. You, Changqing Immortal Sect, hold tight to Changqing Mountain, guarding every grass and tree, unwilling to let outsiders take anything. Whoever dares to pick a leaf or flower would face direct confrontation from your disciples. It¡¯s not just about Changqing Mountain; the Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s domineering behavior extends to all the territories under their control. They share not even the slightest benefit with outsiders. Whether it¡¯s cave mansions, secret realms, treasures, or spiritual medicines, anything that originates from their territory remains their property. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 Outsiders who dare take anything are essentially stealing from their family. Under such circumstances, why would Taiping Dao¡¯s disciples, eager to grow rich, willingly visit Changqing Immortal Sect? Why in recent years have more and more disciples of Taiping Dao been traveling to the Outer Territories? They travel around the Southern Domain and, at worst, venture to the Nine Provinces territory in the Western Domain. But no one visits the territories of the Changqing Immortal Sect. Isn¡¯t the reason obviously due to the selfish and repulsive behavior of the Changqing Immortal Sect? If you share nothing with me, why should I bother to support you? Making friends, achieving overwhelming responses, involves spending money. Without spending money, the disciples of Taiping would not support you for free. Instead, it¡¯s the Nine Provinces that, due to their recent decline and lack of strength, urgently need external allies. They typically turn a blind eye to the activities of Taiping Dao disciples exploring their territory. As long as nothing excessive is done, they generally do not intervene. Whatever treasures those disciples find, they can keep for themselves. And on Taiping Dao¡¯s part, they also reciprocate. When they discover a hidden cave mansion, they often invite some Nine Provinces disciples to join the treasure hunt. Whatever is found during these expeditions is split equally among all, ensuring everyone benefits. Such is the practice in the Outer Territories. So why do so many attend this celebration? Because Taiping Dao knows how to maintain relationships; they ensure to share any found benefits with the hosts. Through mutual giving and receiving, relationships naturally strengthen. It¡¯s no wonder that the disciples from Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Taiping Dao can refer to each other as fellow disciples. Isn¡¯t it only natural to call each other brothers when you let me prosper and I give you benefits? The only distasteful thing is the selfish Changqing Immortal Sect that aims to monopolize everything. In saying this, Lu Yuan implied his dissatisfaction with the practices of the Changqing Immortal Sect. Upon hearing this, Yang Jihua¡¯s face flushed slightly, and he stammered, ¡°My friend speaks wisely, life is short, and the immortal path is long. I understand the earnest desire of your disciples to pursue immortality. So, I will pass a message to the School Leader, prepare significant gifts for your junior disciples as encouragements. They won¡¯t consider their visit to our Changqing Immortal Sect a wasted trip. In the future, should your disciples wish to travel within our territory, they may do so freely, exploring various mystic mansions. Whatever they find, Changqing Immortal Sect will claim no part; it shall all belong to your junior disciples.¡± Yang Jihua was aware that his sect wasn¡¯t handling things well. After all, various treasures and mystic mansions scattered between Heaven and Earth are heritages left by ancestors to their descendants. If we delve into it, the rights to these items do not belong to Changqing Immortal Sect; they¡¯re merely located within our nominal territory. According to the customs of the Immortal Realm, such inherited treasures rightfully belong to whoever finds them. The most one could do, in good faith, is to gift a portion to the local ruler after discovering the treasure. Taiping Dao operates this way, hence other Immortal gates consider them respectable and hold them in high regard. However, Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s approach of hoarding found treasures and giving nothing away clearly stirs up aversion. Even Lu Yuan, wishing to amend policies and improve relations with Changqing Immortal Sect, couldn¡¯t help but voice his concerns. Their actions were simply excessive. Changqing Immortal Sect, too, had their reasons and unspoken hardships. Being an ancient sect that had existed for tens of thousands of years, they were well aware that their conduct appeared unseemly. But the massive losses they sustained in the previous war were just too severe. Not only was the death toll staggering, but the sect¡¯s treasures were nearly depleted. Previously, Yao Baojuan had mobilized all the sect¡¯s resources during the critical battle, distributing all spiritual objects and magical treasures to the sect¡¯s disciples, all of which were worn down in the war. As a result, once the war concluded, the Changqing Immortal Sect barely had any immortal artifacts left to its name. Not to mention immortal artifacts, even the ordinary magical artifacts used by the disciples were few and far between. And let¡¯s not even start on the various spiritual elixirs, materials, and necessary cultivation supplies. Though Changqing Immortal Sect now held vast territories, it was all just ballooning up with nothing inside a€¡° they had become destitute and were struggling to lift the lid off the pot. In such circumstances, in order to replenish their funds, they naturally had to ruthlessly seek out wealth. This led to the policy of preventing outsiders from treasure hunting within their territory and confiscating any found treasures. In the end, everyone was impoverished. Chapter 1402 - Chapter 1402 Chapter 551 Giving Gifts One by One ?Chapter 1402: Chapter 551: Giving Gifts One by One Chapter 1402: Chapter 551: Giving Gifts One by One Changqing Immortal Sect had already become penniless, a fact that Lu Yuan was clear about. But no matter how poor the other party was, they had a foundational strength, and even a broken ship could squeeze out a few nails. His goal was to strike a deal, allowing the disciples under his sect to explore treasures in the Changqing Domain by getting the Changqing Immortal Sect to lift its ban. Currently, nearly two-thirds of Changqing Domain was occupied by Changqing Immortal Sect, and these areas were all sealed off, forbidding outsiders from entering. Such a huge benefit lay right under his nose, yet he couldn¡¯t touch it; you can imagine how uncomfortable Lu Yuan felt. Hence, he took advantage of this opportunity to negotiate closeness with Taiping Dao by using the condition of lifting the Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s seal in exchange. Seeing Yang Jihua soften, Lu Yuan immediately said with joy, ¡°Taoist friend, you are really too polite. Our two sects have a relationship and should naturally interact more, how could it be tainted by mere gifts? However, since Taoist friend has been so generous, as the School Leader, I cannot neglect my disciples¡¯ fortune and will shamelessly accept it first. Next time, Taoist friend should also bring your disciples and followers to my Mi Yun Mountain. At that time, I will prepare a generous gift in return and ensure it reaches the Changqing disciples without letting Taoist friend suffer a loss.¡± Once he had the bamboo rod in hand, Lu Yuan¡¯s attitude improved markedly. The other side had already apologized and promised to lift the ban; they had conceded. Since he had achieved his goal, there was no need to linger; it was better to wrap things up while ahead. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? As for the reciprocity he had promised, those were just words. Could they really be the same as actions? If Changqing Immortal Sect was sensible, they should realize that this was about buying friendship with money and that there would be a cost. Now, by spending some money in exchange for friendship with Taiping Dao and the School Leader, was it not the other side that gained? ¡°Taoist Lu is too courteous. Since it¡¯s said to be a gift for the younger generation upon meeting, then it remains a gift. Once given, there is no logic in taking it back. Although Changqing Immortal Sect is strapped for cash these days, we¡¯re not lacking to the extent that we miss a few coins. Taoist friend, please accept it with ease.¡± Yang Jihua looked at the face of Taiping Dao¡¯s new School Leader, who longed for wealth, and couldn¡¯t help but smile bitterly in his heart, knowing that this time he had truly bled money. In the past two hundred years, despite Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s efforts to amass wealth, their gains were modest. Even though they occupied most of the Changqing Domain, all the revenue combined was only barely enough to create two or three Lower Grade Immortal Artifacts. Now that he had agreed to Taiping Dao¡¯s terms, he reckoned he would have to spit out half of these gains. Had he known this would happen, he would have been better off not imposing a ban in the first place, allowing outsiders to come and search freely. By letting outsiders search, they could also get a share. Moreover, with their home advantage, outsiders might not necessarily be more successful than them in their own territory. Instead, now, attempting to steal chickens only to lose rice, they hadn¡¯t gained much benefit but turned themselves into something both people and dogs despised; why bother with such a hassle? Well, it was time to let it go. The short-sightedness of the past could only be compensated now by paying double. Fortunately, amending it now was not too late. The previous School Leader of Taiping Dao had retired, and while the incumbent had not been in contact for long, from the limited understanding so far, he seemed to be quite a greedy person. A greedy person is generally someone with fewer principles. However, at the same time, having no principles also meant there was an absolute bottom line. As long as he was well-fed, he would fall to that side. Although this kind of relationship sustained by benefits is often criticized and not considered truly sincere or reliable, Once the benefit disappears, the relationship also vanishes. But no one can refute that as long as the benefit persists, the relationship also continues. As long as Changqing Immortal Sect can keep delivering benefits to Taiping Dao, winning over this greedy hound, then they can turn it into a loyal friend, ready to serve them. ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Though the consumption is significant, it is straightforward. With some giving, they could win the friendship of Taiping Dao. As for whether Taiping Dao, being unrestrained by principles, might be bought over by the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and turn against them, Ha!¡­ Yang Jihua scoffed inwardly. It wasn¡¯t that he was arrogant but rather that he couldn¡¯t see how the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, with territory left in only six nations, could compete with Changqing Immortal Sect, which had twenty-three nations. Such a vast gap in scale doomed the fact that he could offer more to Taiping Dao. With underlying wealth, they could use money to hammer Taiping Dao down on their side, turning it into one of their own. If Jiuzhou Immortal Gate didn¡¯t vie with them for Taiping Dao, all the better. If they did come forward, it would be playing right into Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s wishes. Given Jiuzhou¡¯s current destitute appearance, their limited resources would need to be used to compete for Taiping Dao. Then, the savings they had to recover their strength would diminish even further. With their loss and his gain, it would take Jiuzhou even longer to recover its strength. After several hundred years, Changqing Immortal Sect could drag Jiuzhou Immortal Gate down. As for whether catering to Taiping Dao by both sides might lead to fattening it up, That was a concern, but overall, Changqing Immortal Sect could still accept it. Taiping Dao¡¯s foundational strength was clear for all to see, and even if fattened by both sides, it had its limits ¨C it could never surpass Changqing Immortal Sect. At most, in a few thousand years, with the support of both Immortal Sects, Taiping Dao could stand equal to Changqing Immortal Sect. After that period, once the benefits transferred from both sides were used up, Taiping Dao would decline again, reverting to its former status. Moreover, Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate were different; there were no fundamental conflicts with Changqing Immortal Sect. Although there were some conflicts of interest, they could coexist in the same realm. Chapter 1403 - Chapter 1403 Chapter 551 Giving Gifts One by One_2 ?Chapter 1403: Chapter 551: Giving Gifts One by One_2 Chapter 1403: Chapter 551: Giving Gifts One by One_2 Unlike the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, controlled previously by remnants of the Nine Spirits Sect in the Changqing Domain, and fundamentally at odds with itselfa€¡±where one of the sects had to die off to determine the new ruler of the domaina€¡± it was clear that the Changqing Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect could not coexist. But the Taiping Tao Sect was able to thrive alongside these two sects. Starting from this premise, the Changqing Immortal Sect would rather fatten the Taiping Tao Sect than let benefits slip to the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect. It seemed that with the recent change in School Leader, the Taiping Tao Sect realized that letting the former School Leader, Yi Dancheng, indulge the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect¡¯s antics had produced nothing noteworthy in two hundred years. Instead, it had cost them dearly, turning them into a big fool. Feeling that they had lost too much, they replaced him with a greedy School Leader who planned to change strategies and start reaping benefits for the sect. Um¡­ Thinking about it, although he had unwittingly acted on behalf of the Taiping Tao Sect, compensating for their losses and playing the fool, when viewed from another angle, he needed allies, and the Taiping Tao Sect needed wealth. Both sides got what they needed, and the interests complemented each other. No one was at a loss. ¡°Taoist Lu¡¯s kindness is well noted,¡± he acknowledged after receiving benefits. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Lu Yuan then gave his promise, ¡°After this Dharma Assembly, I shall bring my sect¡¯s disciples to visit Changqing Mountain. We apologize in advance for any disturbances and hope for your understanding.¡± Yang Jihua laughed heartily, ¡°Excellent! I will send word back to the Purple Cloud Sect, to have everything prepared early. We¡¯ll definitely make room for your visit.¡± Thus, this exchange of interests was tacitly settled between Lu Yuan and Yang Jihua. With the dirty deals done, Lu Yuan took Yang Jihua back to the original celestial platform. At this moment, the celestial platform had few Immortals left. While the two had left, the True Persons who came for the celebration had already found their respective Taoist companions. Led by the people from the Taiping Tao Sect, they went to various places on Mi Yun Mountain to discuss the Dao on their own. In the Immortal Realm, discussing the Dao at such assemblies often served two purposes. One, as the name suggested, was to discuss the Dao and advance collectively in cultivation. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? The other was as an exchange platform, providing a means for various True Persons to complete exchanges of interests. Lu Yuan and Yang Jihua¡¯s meeting was of the latter kind. Now back at the celestial platform, those remaining were purely devoted cultivators who cared nothing for their surroundings and only wished to exchange insights on the Dao. Of course, there were also some intent observers waiting. For instance, Zhen Xuan, who had been keeping an eye on Lu Yuan, still waited on the celestial platform. Seeing Lu Yuan and Yang returning, his gaze instantly shifted over. The two noticed him, and Yang Jihua gave the man a meaningful look, displaying a challenging expression. He then smiled, bade farewell to Lu Yuan, knowing that his newly recruited ally was about to meet with the messenger from Jiuzhou. Deciding not to be a third wheel and potentially upset his new-found friend, since he was confident in his own sect¡¯s financial resources, Yang Jihua was not particularly worried. The more confidence he displayed at this moment, the more it could provoke the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect. If he could truly force them to compete in financial power with him, pouring countless treasures into what seemed like the bottomless pit of the Taiping Tao Sect, it would be enough to make him laugh even in his dreams. With such malicious thoughts in mind, Yang Jihua turned to seek other True Persons on the celestial platform for discussions. Having decided to change his strategy and use his sect¡¯s deep resources to court alliances in the vicinity, not just the Taiping Tao Sect, but other surrounding Immortal Sects also needed some appropriate wooing. Even if he could not pull them into his camp to confront the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect together, improving previously strained relationships and boosting the somewhat tarnished reputation of the Changqing Immortal Sect was also a good choice for them. ¡°Change starts with me at this exact moment.¡± Yang Jihua, determined to rejuvenate his sect, was pushing forward. And as he left, Zhen Xuan, possibly growing impatient, immediately approached. ¡°Taoist Zhen Xuan of Purple Cloud Sect, greets Taoist Lu.¡± Zhen Xuan introduced himself upon approaching. ¡°Taiping Tao Sect¡¯s Lu Yuan, greets Taoist Zhen Xuan.¡± Lu Yuan responded with a smile and a graceful gesture of greeting. ¡°I wanted to visit you earlier, but seeing Taoist Lu with Taoist Yang stepping out, I didn¡¯t want to intrude and just waited here.¡± After exchanging greetings, Zhen Xuan initiated the conversation with a smile, ¡°However, you two were gone for quite a while, leaving me in quite a long wait. I wonder what matters could have engaged both Taoists so deeply and taken so much time.¡± The Elder Daoist lightly probed with his conversational tone. ¡®Truly an Old Fox.¡¯ Lu Yuan glanced at him and muttered inwardly, yet his face maintained an indifferent smile, ¡°Nothing much, just that Taoist Yang has prepared a significant gift and invited me to visit Changqing Mountain. I could not decline, so I agreed to visit after the Dharma Assembly, bringing along my sect¡¯s disciples.¡± Fishing, of course, wasn¡¯t limited to just one. Yang Jihua wanted to leverage financial resources to drag the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect along, filling the endless depth that was the Taiping Tao Sect. Lu Yuan wanted the same. Previously, for two hundred years, the Taiping Tao Sect had granted enough honor and benefits. It was now time for payback. Now he laid out the transactions of both sides openly and fairly. It was to see how the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect would respond. ¡°So that¡¯s it. The Taiping Tao Sect and the Changqing Immortal Sect have always had a long-standing, deep mutual relationship. It¡¯s only right for both sides to interact with each other.¡± Chapter 1404 - Chapter 1404 Chapter 551 Giving Gifts One by One_3 ?Chapter 1404: Chapter 551: Giving Gifts One by One_3 Chapter 1404: Chapter 551: Giving Gifts One by One_3 The Real Mystery Taoist listened to Lu Yuan¡¯s words, his expression changed for a moment, but then he quickly steadied his mind and laughed, ¡°It¡¯s just that the previous School Leader of your sect was also intimately acquainted with the Jiuzhou. Our disciples engaged with each other amicably and always referred to each other as fellow disciples.¡± ¡°Taoist Lu has just ascended to power, and you need to make diplomatic visits around, fostering good relationships with the various Immortal Sects. ¡°Since you have to travel around, why limit yourself to just one place? ¡°After you have gone to the Changqing Immortal Sect, why not take a detour and also make a trip to the Western Domain? All sects of Jiuzhou are ready and waiting to welcome you.¡± The Real Mystery Taoist probed Lu Yuan¡¯s attitude again, wanting to know how he viewed the relationship between the Changqing Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. And Lu Yuan didn¡¯t hold anything back; he was straightforward when the other party wanted an answer, ¡°Ah, that won¡¯t do. Although I very much want to visit the Western Domain, but¡­¡± He slightly modified the rhetoric he had used for Yang Jihua previously and repeated it to Real Mystery. After finishing, he paused, summarizing, ¡°It¡¯s not that I don¡¯t want to come, it¡¯s just that I am truly overwhelmed with affairs. My disciples are busy treasure hunting and we simply can¡¯t find the time. This trip to Changqing Mountain is also due to the fervent invitation of Taoist Yang, who even offered a precious gift so generously that I couldn¡¯t decline out of courtesy. ¡°I am already aware of your kind intentions. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ¡°Our two sects share a long-standing friendship, the sentiment of which is held in our hearts. Why should we dwell on outward expressions of formality or tangle over whether or not to pay a visit?¡± Lu Yuan emphasized the words ¡®gift¡¯ and ¡®courtesy¡¯ with a stronger tone. He did not say it out loud, but the implication was clear. That is, he wanted benefits. ¡°You pay up, and we¡¯ll be friends. If not, who wants to bother with a poor relation!¡± When Real Mystery heard this, he couldn¡¯t help but twitch, finding it unbearable how direct the other party was in asking for benefits. He was inclined to leave on the spot. But then he considered the close relationship between Taiping Dao and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate over the years; the two sides had been nearly inseparable, almost like one family. The previous words weren¡¯t wrong. Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou even referred to each other as fellow disciples. Such a good relationship, with a little effort, could turn Taiping Dao into an ally. Abandoning these ties now would mean wasting the gains of the past two hundred years, wouldn¡¯t it? Not only would it be wasting the gains, but those originally part of us might even be pulled away by the Changqing Immortal Sect, joining the ranks of our arch-enemies. This drastic change was not something everyone could accept. Nor was such a diplomatic loss something the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate could afford. The two parties were too entangled to simply cut ties. The sunk cost was far too high. Like right now. Taiping Dao could afford to stay neutral, not caring whether to foster good relations with Jiuzhou. But could Jiuzhou? No. With rapid thoughts churning in his mind, Real Mystery quickly weighed the pros and cons and made a decision. ¡°Taoist Lu jests. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï With such closeness between our sects, how could I let you come all this way for nothing?¡± Despite the hurt in his heart, Real Mystery forced on a bold face, ¡°Is it just a mere gift we¡¯re talking about? Though Jiuzhou may be small, we won¡¯t let our friends down. You just come, and I will ensure that the sect prepares a generous gift for you, to be bestowed upon the younger generation, thus fulfilling our sects¡¯ sentiments.¡± While speaking, a spasm crossed Real Mystery¡¯s heart. It may sound grand, but how well was the true state of Jiuzhou¡¯s foundations known to him? Despite two hundred years of development and support from several other sect branches, restoring some vitality to the Five Sects of the Western Domain, this bit of vitality was insignificant compared to the past. The most obvious example. In the two hundred years of recovery and development, within the Changqing Domain, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had become the weakest of the three sects. Doesn¡¯t that reveal their plight? But now, at such a trying time, would-be friends from Taiping Dao sought to kick them while they were down, cutting them with a blade. This wasn¡¯t merely cutting flesh, it was cutting their future. Yet, ironically, for the sake of their own future, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate couldn¡¯t refuse and had to accept the painful deal. Because the benefits brought by Taiping Dao were far more significant than the flesh being cut away. After this cut, it was feared a hundred years of development would go down the drain. However, to retain Taiping Dao, this was a necessary cost, and despite his reluctance, Real Mystery had no choice but to bear it. ¡®Damn it. With the installation of Taoist Lu, Taiping Dao has put a vampire in power, what a disgraceful oversight.¡¯ Real Mystery cursed inwardly. As for Lu Yuan himself, upon hearing this, he immediately adopted a smile, ¡°Your kindness is truly overwhelming, how could I ever repay such a consideration?¡± He displayed an embarrassed expression, pacing back and forth, and after hesitating for a moment, he finally sighed, ¡°Alright then, since all of this stems from your good intentions, and indeed, the relationship between Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou runs deep, it wouldn¡¯t be proper to decline. I will go. ¡°Once I¡¯ve gone to Changqing Mountain, I will immediately bring my disciples to the Western Domain for a visit. ¡°It¡¯s an imposition, and I hope you won¡¯t mind,¡± said Lu Yuan. Real Mystery waved his hands dismissively, ¡°It is our honor for Taoist Lu to come, how could we mind? I will have the sect prepare a generous gift right away, and we¡¯ll be waiting for your arrival.¡± Lu Yuan nodded in agreement, ¡°Rest assured, Taoist friend. I will definitely come.¡± With the transaction now agreed upon, the previously slightly tense atmosphere immediately relaxed. Real Mystery then engaged Lu Yuan in further conversation for quite a while, his words containing some probing questions, but they were all managed one by one. Eventually not asking further, he then shifted to reminiscing about the camaraderie and past exchanges between the two sects to deepen the sentimental bond. Feeling that it was about time, he took the initiative to take his leave. But before leaving, Real Mystery still looked back, suddenly asking, ¡°Previously when I saw Taoist Lu, I felt a sense of familiarity, as if your voice and features were strikingly similar to those of a good friend of mine, almost identical. ¡°However, this friend of mine should have passed away over a thousand years ago. ¡°But I just can¡¯t forget him, and today, seeing Taoist Lu, I had the illusion that perhaps you are the reincarnation of that friend. ¡°Although it¡¯s presumptuous to say this, I still want to ask, have you ever felt this way?¡± Real Mystery still couldn¡¯t suppress his curiosity about Lu Yuan¡¯s identity and asked him then. ¡°Your genuine concern is truly commendable,¡± Lu Yuan replied with a smile, providing a vague answer, ¡°I also feel a sense of kinship with Taoist friend, perhaps as you said, we knew each other in a past life?¡± Before deciding on revealing his identity, he wasn¡¯t about to give Jiuzhou a definite answer. Nor would he admit to his true identity. Let them guess if they wanted to. As long as he didn¡¯t confirm it, everything remained conjecture. This vague and flexible approach suited him just fine. Chapter 1405 - Chapter 1405 Chapter 552 Gathering Immortal Materials ?Chapter 1405: Chapter 552 Gathering Immortal Materials Chapter 1405: Chapter 552 Gathering Immortal Materials ¡°Is that so?¡± Lu Yuan appeared before Zhen Xuan with a calm expression and a smile brimming with meaning, leaving Zhen Xuan¡¯s heart tumultuous, uncertain whether the other party was acknowledging the truth or merely being polite. The man before him, School Leader Lu, was drastically different from the King of Chu from his initial impression. This drastic difference was not about appearance. The two men¡¯s appearances were not entirely identical, but they were almost indistinguishable, as though carved from the same mold. Judging only from this aspect, the two of them could be considered the same person. But in other respects, such as temperament, aura, magic power, divine soul, and so on, they were entirely different. How heroic was the initial King of Chu? Rising from a Hunter in times of chaos, he quelled the rebellion in a province and established a foundation for the feudal lords. Thereafter, he founded a nation and claimed sovereignty, pushing back the Zhou People in the north and pacifying the barbarians in the west. Commanding a million strong, holding half the province¡¯s territory, he was a hero of the world, renowned for his dominant rule. Back then, the King of Chu had an edge that could not be hidden, dominating the world and intimidating those who dared not gaze upon him. His rage made the feudal lords tremble, his peace subdued the world. But now, School Leader Lu, his sharpness concealed, was indifferent to fame and fortune, his words tactful and devoid of grand ambitions. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? The personalities and temperaments of the two men were as different as night and day. Their divine souls and auras seemed like two different beings. The Dao Law they cultivated was also dissimilar, with a vast difference in the nature of their magic power. In truth, apart from their identical appearances, they were essentially two different people. This stark divergence was one of the reasons Lu Yuan daringly stepped forward into the public eye. In terms of appearance, he had no intention to change it. Regarding temperament, he had transformed from a sovereign emperor to a carefree immortal wandering eternity, influenced over the centuries. The original temperament, once intentionally repressed, would naturally vanish, to be replaced by another. As for the magic power, after uniting the Nine Provinces, he had long since changed his main cultivation method, giving the Taiping Daoist Method a major upgrade, changing it right from the roots. The magic power cultivated from the new Taiping Daoist Method was, of course, a different one. And with the foundation of the cultivation method altered, influenced by this change, especially when he broke through in his cultivation and transformed into an immortal, his divine soul and aura naturally underwent a metamorphosis. After the transformation was complete, he was at a different level of existence, naturally distinct from his past. And these differences, when put together in sum. Apart from his unchanged appearance, everything else about Lu Yuan, inside and out, from skin to bone, from body to soul, had already become another person. Under such circumstances, as long as he did not acknowledge it, others naturally could not confirm his true identity. This was also what led to Zhen Xuan¡¯s current hesitation. ¡®Could it be, as I previously speculated, that the current School Leader Lu is the reincarnated being of the former King of Chu? Having failed to escape the calamity of the Nine Provinces, he fell during the End of Dharma era. Ultimately, his soul was lucky enough to be reincarnated into the Immortal Realm, then entered the Taiping Tao Sect, achieving what he has today?¡¯ Such a conjecture involuntarily arose in Zhen Xuan¡¯s heart, surprise and doubt mixing within him. Because it was possible. Within the Immortal Realm, most beings would have their souls dissolve into the ether, Between Heaven and Earth, after their passing. A minority might be collected by various domains of the Yin World, entering the Underworld to become wandering ghosts. However, there were also those with successful cultivation or the lucky ones who could retain a sliver of their true essence, with their divine souls not extinguishing after dissolution. They would reconvene their spirit, and under the cycles of the Heavenly Path, they would reincarnate and live a second life. In the Immortal Realm, basically becoming a True Immortal meant ensuring the indestructibility of the True Spirit, allowing for reincarnation. And with so many inhabitants in the Immortal Realm, across such a vast population, naturally, there were lucky individuals; among billions, there would be one or two who might have the fortune to reincarnate and restart life. If the King of Chu, Lu Yuan, was lucky enough, even if his cultivation was insufficient, it was possible for him to live a second life. After all, he was a person of great Qi Luck, likely having gathered the last of the Nine Provinces¡¯ Qi Luck. With such a foundation, preserving the True Spirit to live a second life wasn¡¯t too phenomenal. Given the King of Chu¡¯s Lifespan, a thousand years or so would have passed since his reincarnation up to now. A thousand years were enough, as long as one could enter a Great Immortal Sect. With the innate talent and foundation carried by the reincarnated soul of the King of Chu, achieving what School Leader Lu has today would be quite reasonable. In the end, the last Qi Luck of a world is also extraordinary. ¡®However, if that really is the case, my initial idea to foster an alliance with School Leader Lu, as a fellow from the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, just got more challenging. If he were the King of Chu, we could share a connection as fellow countrymen. But if it is a reincarnated being, not even incense affinity would be possible to cling to, so how much favor could I expect from him?¡¯ After the True Spirit reincarnates and is reborn, that is completely a different person. The soul, memory, personalitya€¡±all are reshaped anew, impossible to be like the past life. Just like a broken sword being reforged, melted into molten metal, and reforged anew. The two cannot be the same sword. The same goes for the reincarnation of the True Spirit. This was also the worst possible outcome for Zhen Xuan. ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter whether Daoist friend is my old companion or not, I am willing, and I also wish to be friends with Daoist friend. My Purple Cloud Sect, as well as the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, feel the same. I have prepared a place for you within my Mountain Gate, waiting for Daoist friend¡¯s visit.¡± Regardless of whether he was right or wrong in his guess, Zhen Xuan decided to first win over School Leader Lu. Improving relations with the Taiping Dao was the most crucial. Everything else would come later. ¡°Daoist friend, I also wish for the Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou to maintain good relations for generations to come, without resorting to conflict.¡± Lu Yuan nodded with a sincere smile. Nonsense. He had been courting Jiuzhou all these years, what else for? Chapter 1406 - Chapter 1406 Chapter 552 Immortal Materials Gathered_2 ?Chapter 1406: Chapter 552 Immortal Materials Gathered_2 Chapter 1406: Chapter 552 Immortal Materials Gathered_2 It wasn¡¯t just for the future, so that after he had taken over Changqing Domain, he could ensure a peaceful submission from all Jiuzhou sects without them coming to attack him? If not for this goal, why bother to put in so much effort, and even compromise oneself? ?¦Ï??0.§ã? It surely wasn¡¯t just out of sheer boredom. ¡°I solemnly remember.¡± Zhen Xuan felt the sincerity in Lu Yuan¡¯s words and was deeply moved, performing a profound bow. By this point, the conversation was nearly finished. As the host and the one celebrating his Dharma Assembly, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t possibly dedicate all his time to Yang Jihua and Zhen Xuan. He needed to consider the other Immortal Sect messengers who had come to the assembly. So, the two of them each made their goodbyes. As the often-disliked Jiuzhou messenger, Zhen Xuan didn¡¯t bother trying to awkwardly ingratiate himself with the fellow True Persons who weren¡¯t his type. Instead, he made a detour to visit Yi Dancheng, planning to renew the relationship with the former incumbent School Leader and to gauge the future stance of Taiping Tao Sect through him. Despite having already received some hints from Lu Yuan that he didn¡¯t harbor animosity toward the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and even showed some goodwill, this goodwill was bought with money. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï However, relationships purely built on financial grounds remain stable during richness like Mount Tai, yet are most prone to collapse when money runs out. When it comes to financial power, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate certainly couldn¡¯t outpace Changqing Immortal Sect. After all, the scale of influence between the Two Countries was far too large. Since they couldn¡¯t compete with money, they had to compete with favors instead. In this regard, Zhen Xuan still had some confidence. Over the past two hundred years, under the strong advocacy of Yi Dancheng, the relationship between Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Taiping Tao had grown rapidly, almost becoming as close as family. Although it seemed that this School Leader Yi had stepped down because of this, he was still Taiping Tao¡¯s first School Leader established in Changqing Domain, who paved the way and built the sect from scratch, and his influence within the sect needed no explanation. Even if he had stepped down now, nobody believed he was truly powerless or without influence. As long as he could secure this person¡¯s cooperation, leveraging the old School Leader¡¯s influence, even if Taiping Tao¡¯s policies were to lean toward Changqing Immortal Sect in the future, he could hold onto some steering control to prevent a complete estrangement from Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. This was also why Zhen Xuan was willing to present Lu Yuan with a grand gift, spending money to bring him to their sect. The money wasn¡¯t for Lu Yuan to spend, but for Yi Dancheng. Jiuzhou Immortal Gate wanted to make a statement, showing that their friendship wasn¡¯t entirely without value. Feeling guilty for implicating Yi Dancheng, they were willing to provide some compensation. This grand gift was that compensation. And with this compensation, Yi Dancheng¡¯s situation in Taiping Tao would naturally improve considerably. This was crucially beneficial for maintaining this steadfast ally of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Having decided to visit Yi Dancheng, Lu Yuan also went to entertain other messengers. Busy in the mountains for half a month, the Dharma Assembly finally concluded, and messengers from various factions bid their farewells and departed, bringing quiet back to the mountains. However, Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t free to rest. According to the agreement, he was set to make a trip to Changqing Mountain to engage in a friendly exchange with the Changqing Immortal Sect. This visit was definitely happening. They had already prepared a grand gift, just waiting for him to come and collect it. Given the situation, he couldn¡¯t just stand on ceremony; he needed to make haste and go. Thus, after the assembly, he rushed off to Changqing Mountain. There on Changqing Mountain, he was warmly received by members of Changqing Immortal Sect. Song Xiren, who had just recently earned the title of Changqing Immortal and was now the School Leader of Changqing Immortal Sect, even personally came out to greet him. With an Earth Immortal welcoming a Human Immortal, it showed immense respect to Lu Yuan. Otherwise, even though both were School Leaders of their respective sects, theoretically equal in status, in the Immortal Realm, it¡¯s the realm of cultivation, not the position, that determines one¡¯s rank. With the gap between their realms laid out, it wasn¡¯t something that could be easily reconciled. Well aware of this, Lu Yuan reciprocated the gesture. On the spot, he decided that the two sects would henceforth share resources and information. He would continue sending disciples to travel north, making this a fixed standard to be maintained over time. He likewise welcomed disciples from Changqing Immortal Sect to travel to the Southern Domain. He hoped these travel exchanges would help the sects grow closer day by day. Song Xiren expressed great satisfaction with this agreement. Previously, the relationship between Jiuzhou and Taiping Tao became remarkably good, almost becoming like fellow disciplesa€¡±what was the reason? Apart from Yi Dancheng¡¯s annual visits, the most crucial aspect was continuous travel by the disciples of Taiping Tao to the Western Domain year after year. Through these frequent grassroots exchanges, the relationship between the two sects improved. Now with Lu Yuan, the current School Leader, visiting them, and with scores of disciples set to make regular visits, it was entirely possible to replicate the Jiuzhou experience and win over the favor of Taiping Tao disciples through repeated interactions. As exchanges become more frequent, over several hundred years, the two sects could naturally grow as close as family, referring to each other as fellow disciples. You¡¯ve bought the goodwill of all Taiping Tao disciples, needing only to win over at least the majority, or even half, to achieve Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s goals. If we¡¯re talking about the present, it¡¯s people like Lu Yuan who are in focus. But these middle and lower-rank disciples are the future. Securing them means securing the future. Even for people like Yi Dancheng and Lu Yuan, who currently wield significant power and authority within their sects, their time is now. Chapter 1407 - Chapter 1407 Chapter 552 Immortal Materials Gathered_3 ?Chapter 1407: Chapter 552 Immortal Materials Gathered_3 Chapter 1407: Chapter 552 Immortal Materials Gathered_3 ¡°` But in the end, they were only individual Human Immortals, and Human Immortals could live for a maximum of three thousand years. Having calculated the Lifespan of the past two School Leaders of Taiping Dao using their Cultivation, it wasn¡¯t difficult to deduce that these two could at most live a thousand more years. Especially in the case of Yi Dancheng, who had cultivated to the late stages of a Human Immortal, it was possible that he wouldn¡¯t even reach a thousand years. His voluntary abdication in favor of someone more capable might have been due to his recognition of this fact, hence he wanted to make one last effort to break through to the Realm of Earth Immortal while he still could. However, such breakthrough attempts often had low success rates. And the outcome was mostly likely vanishing into the cycle of life and death. Thus in the eyes of Changqing Immortal Sect and others like Lu Yuan, Yi Dancheng was likely to only make waves for a thousand more years at most. After that period, the two of them would die. But a thousand years later, would Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate have only recovered half their strength? Nowhere near enough to recover their peak and begin expanding once again. If planning to expand, they would have to wait for two or three thousand years, for the next generation. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï And this next generation, of course, refers to the incessant flow of individuals coming to Changqing Mountain to exchange knowledge. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? By securing their loyalty, they could grasp the future of Taiping Dao. To the likes of Lu Yuan and Yi Dancheng, their value wasn¡¯t actually that high. Unless they could break through to Earth Immortal. But that was extremely difficult, certainly not something easily achieved. Of course, even if by some fluke the two managed to break through to Earth Immortal, it wouldn¡¯t matter much. As long as Changqing Immortal Sect held onto the next generation, they could still promote a large faction of allies within Taiping Dao in the future. With the help of these allies, they could plot plenty of advantages. During their next offensive against Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, they could use this to balance the faction within Taiping Dao close to Jiuzhou, ensuring their neutrality once again. As long as this was achieved, it would be sufficient for Changqing Immortal Sect. And Lu Yuan, naturally, saw through it all, guessing what Changqing Immortal Sect had in mind. But he did not care. According to common sense, these disciples were indeed the future of Taiping Dao. But the core backbone of Taiping Dao had always been him and his few Avatars, never the disciples. These disciples, even if they grew up, would at best be one or two, or maybe three or four Human Immortals. Such power, even if completely swayed by outsiders, would not be able to shake him and his Avatars, who were destined to become Earth Immortals. Thinking they could use these disciples to influence Taiping Dao¡¯s decisions was wishful thinking. Moreover. Changqing Immortal Sect wanted to wait for these disciples to grow and scheme for two or three thousand years into the future, but did they even have that much Time? According to Lu Yuan¡¯s plan, it would be a maximum of a thousand years before he would initiate the war to unify Changqing Domain. Would a thousand years be enough for these disciples to grow? Certainly not. From this perspective, Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s scheming was all in vain. With these conditions in place, he wasn¡¯t worried at all about his disciples being swayed or corrupted. On the contrary. Using some insignificant disciples to exchange for the significant gifts now and the continual benefits in the future, provided by Changqing Immortal Sect. Letting Changqing Immortal Sect continuously bleed to support Taiping Dao. It¡¯s hard to find such a big sucker in this era. Therefore, after the visit, Lu Yuan contentedly accepted the generous gifts from Changqing Immortal Sect. Materials enough to forge more than one Immortal Artifacts were pocketed by him. The reason for giving Immortal Artifacts materials was naturally because the tasks that Lu Yuan had set over the years were always to collect only Refining Materials, and other treasures had scarce rewards. When the disciples handed them in, it was a loss every time. As Time went on, everyone saw that Taiping Dao only wanted treasures for refining and showed little interest in other items. If they wanted to bring gifts this time, to win over Taiping Dao, of course, Changqing Mountain would cater to their preferences. After being wined and dined in Changqing Mountain for a month, Lu Yuan reluctantly left and then with his disciples, turned westward. Ready to claim his next big gift from the Western Domain. In the Western Domain, Lu Yuan naturally received a warm reception from the five Immortal Gates of the Western Domain. However, although the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was enthusiastic, their gifts seemed quite meager compared to those from Changqing Mountain. The Refining Materials they contributed could only make up half an Immortal Artifact, far less than Changqing Immortal Sect. From this, it was evident that compared to Changqing Immortal Sect, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had indeed declined. Their foundation in all aspects had fallen behind. No wonder that in these years of recovery and development, they were ranked last, even falling behind Taiping Dao. After spending half a month in the Western Domain, Lu Yuan finally concluded his inaugural journey, then with the gifts from the two Immortal Gates, returned to Mi Yun Mountain. But upon his return, he didn¡¯t rest and immediately summoned Jin Qingyue, planning to cultivate this exceptionally obscure and inconspicuous Avatar. Now compared to Yi Dancheng, who had already become an Earth Immortal, Che Shidao, who was breaking through to Earth Immortal, and even himself, in the late stage of Earth Immortal. Among himself and all his Avatars, Jin Qingyue, who was only in the late stage of Human Immortal, had undoubtably become the weakest link in terms of power. The weakness of this Avatar was constrained by his original foundation, which could only support him up to this point. To advance further, it would be necessary to use more materials to thoroughly enhance the Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade. Over the past two hundred years, Taiping Dao had collected enough materials for one Immortal Artifact. With this trip, he plundered from Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, bringing back materials for two more Immortal Artifacts. A total of three Immortal Artifacts materials, although each batch could only refine the most basic Lower Grade Immortal Artifacts. But combined, and with the original level of the Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade, it was enough to barely elevate its foundation to Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts, equating to the Earth Immortal level. Once that occurred, the weakest link among Lu Yuan¡¯s Avatars would be comprehensively strengthened. By then, his true self and the four Avatars would all have ascended to Earth Immortal. With five Earth Immortals in Taiping Dao, in the Changqing Territory, who could rival them? ¡°` Chapter 1408 - Chapter 1408 Chapter 553 Breakthrough to Earth Immortal ?Chapter 1408: Chapter 553 Breakthrough to Earth Immortal Chapter 1408: Chapter 553 Breakthrough to Earth Immortal Upgrading the Emperor¡¯s Gold Blade was a straightforward process. Lu Yuan had already gained experience from refining the other three pieces of the Emperor¡¯s Qi Luck Dao Fruit Immortal Artifacts. Repeating the process this time was nothing more than a facile task. It only took about a year for him to complete the upgrade of Jin Qingyue. The process went exceptionally smoothly, without any hiccups. He even saved quite a bit of surplus materials, which he then coupled with others from the treasury, and crafted another new Qi Luck Dao Fruit Immortal Artifact. Due to the scarcity of materials, the newly forged Dao Fruit was merely a small Jade Pendant, with a rather shallow foundation, barely making it to the level of an Immortal Artifact. Such a new Dao Fruit Immortal Artifact was of course only in its initial form and was definitely going to be strengthened later on, just like Jin Qingyue. Thankfully, there was still plenty of time ahead; with several hundred years remaining before Lu Yuan would initiate the great war in a thousand years. In this extensive period, by harnessing the entire power of the Taiping Dao and collecting Immortal Materials from all over the world, it should be possible to upgrade this new Emperor¡¯s Jade Pendant to an Earth Immortal Dao Fruit. Lu Yuan was confident in this. So he divided a portion of his Divine Soul once more and infused it into the Emperor¡¯s Jade Pendant, creating a new Avatar named Jade Brocade and then concluded this artifact-refining session. With this artifact refinement, the Taiping Dao gained an additional Earthly Immortal potential in Jin Qingyue and an Early-stage Human Immortal in Jade Brocade, achieving a tremendous harvest. However, Lu Yuan did not intend for Jade Brocade to make his debut immediately. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The Taiping Dao had been established for just over three hundred years, and already Jin Qingyue and two other Human Immortals had emerged, the birth rate of Human Immortals was indeed a bit too rapid. Considering future strategies and to also confuse the enemy, it was essential to maintain some level of concealment. Therefore, he planned to keep Jade Brocade hidden for another two to three hundred years before assessing the situation and deciding when to make an appearance. Or, if necessary, he might keep this Avatar concealed indefinitely, waiting for the opportune time, such as after the commencement of the war with Changqing Immortal Sect, to deploy him on the battlefield. At a critical moment, this new force would catch the opponents off guard. Don¡¯t look at it as just an Avatar. But if it can be cultivated successfully to the Earth Immortal Realm as Lu Yuan envisioned, then on a certain battlefield, the addition of one Earth Immortal could be decisive. The rise and fall of a battle, and even the survival of the Changqing Immortal Sect, are often determined by such details. Thus, taking Jade Brocade, Lu Yuan quietly went to Bo Yangling, the desolate mountain specially retained from the past, and covertly transcended the Human Immortal Tribulation. He then left him at Mi Yun Mountain, to cultivate in secret alongside him. Yes, it was a discreet cultivation. Although he had already taken over as the School Leader, Lu Yuan¡¯s governing policy had shifted from the frequent diplomacy of Yi Dancheng to a more reserved and conservative approach. He too needed to focus diligently on his cultivation now. Che Shidao was already breaking through to the Earthly Immortal level, and it was estimated that in a century or two, he would successfully attain the Earth Immortal Dao Fruit. This was also the time frame Lu Yuan had for himself. After one or two hundred years, he too would be challenging the Earth Immortal level. In order to break through the Earthly Immortal level perfectly and ensure greater certainty during his tribulation, he of course needed to focus on cultivation and strengthen his foundation. When breaking through to Earth Immortal, a solid foundation was the most important. During the Thunder Tribulation of Human Immortals, Divine Powers and Dao Law are put to the test. This is why so many cultivators specialize in Divine Powers at the Five Qi Towards Primordial stage, each one aiming to advance through their Divine Powers. Not only because Divine Powers are the easiest to master, but also because they are the most utilized during the Thunder Tribulation. As long as one has strong Divine Powers to withstand the Thunder Tribulation, they can successfully break through the ordeal and attain the Immortal Realm. This is why becoming an Immortal through Divine Powers is so popular. However, when reaching the Earthly Immortal Realm, overcoming the Earth Immortal Wind Tribulation is no longer about just one Divine Power. It requires a combination of Divine Powers, Magic Power, and Divine Soula€¡±Essence, Qi, and Spirita€¡±without any of them lacking. Only when all three are perfect and the Dao foundation is stable, can one withstand the internal winds without having their Dao Fruit eroded or destroyed. Instead, they utilize the Wind Tribulation as a means of cultivation to transform and become Immortal. But if the Dao foundation is unstable, then the Dao Fruit dissolves, and the body along with the Divine Soul is scattered by the wind, ultimately vanishing into nothingness. Not a trace is left, the entire person wiped from existence. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The severity of the Wind Tribulation is precisely why there are so many Human Immortals in the world, yet so few Earth Immortals. Often it takes thirty or forty, or even fifty or sixty Human Immortals to produce a single Earth Immortal. Hm, you might question why, during the last great war, the Nine Provinces had only about a dozen Human Immortals but three Earth Immortals, whereas the Changqing Immortal Sect had over thirty Human Immortals and yet four Earth Immortals. Does this ratio seem off? First, understand this: Earth Immortal cultivators can live for ten thousand years. While Human Immortal cultivators only live for three thousand years. So, if you stretch the timeline to ten thousand years and rotate the three-thousand-year Human Immortals within this span, You would realize that in these ten thousand years, there have already been three or four rounds of Human Immortals. Therefore, after three or four rounds, the Changqing Immortal Sect accumulated those four Earth Immortals. Similarly, the Nine Provinces accumulated three Earth Immortals after three or four rounds. Even considering that many Human Immortals actually live just over two thousand years and could have their lifespans significantly reduced by severe injuries, This generational shift would need to be even greater. By this calculation, after rotating three or four, or even four or five rounds, and with each round counting twenty or thirty people, the totals add up, aligning with the observed ratio. Chapter 1409 - Chapter 1409 Chapter 553 Breakthrough to Earth Immortal_2 ?Chapter 1409: Chapter 553 Breakthrough to Earth Immortal_2 Chapter 1409: Chapter 553 Breakthrough to Earth Immortal_2 Of course. Actually, many Human Immortals, especially those lingering in the early to middle stages, are quite few in number when it comes to reaching the late stage and aiming for a breakthrough to become an Earth Immortal. From this perspective, the proportion isn¡¯t really that high, perhaps four or five late-stage Human Immortals might produce one Earth Immortal. However, those who are able to cultivate to the late stage of a Human Immortal are without exception the elite chosen from among thousands, carefully selected and nurtured seeds of various sects and factions. These individuals are already geniuses, and it takes several geniuses for one to become an Earth Immortal. It also indirectly illustrates the difficulty of breaking through to the Earth Immortal realm. Given the difficulty of breaking through to become an Earth Immortal, Lu Yuan of course needed to make thorough preparations. Now was not the time to let his Avatar attempt the breakthrough to Earth Immortal. If the Avatar failed in breaking through to Earth Immortal, at worst it would mean the loss of a Soul Splitting and a Middle Grade Immortal Artifact. Although this loss was severe, with Lu Yuan¡¯s foundation, he could still afford it. After all, his Lifespan was unlimited; endure a few thousand years, and he could recoup these losses. It was precisely because he had such assurance that he could allow his Avatar to attempt the breakthrough without any concerns. But if it were up to him personally, that simply wouldn¡¯t do. Life only comes once, and since his own Lifespan was nearly infinite, he naturally didn¡¯t need to rush into attempting the Earth Immortal breakthrough unprepared like other Cultivators, driven by the impending end of their Lifespan. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.?¦Ï Without being fully prepared, without having his Essence, Qi, and Spirit, the three foundational elements, honed to an incomparable firmness, approaching perfection, Lu Yuan would absolutely not recklessly try to break through to Earth Immortal. So although he said two hundred years, if he doesn¡¯t meet the requirements within two hundred years, and feels that his grasp is not sufficient, Lu Yuan could still wait another two hundred years, or even two thousand years. After all, his Avatars had already broken through to Earth Immortal, each with a Lifespan of many millennia, giving him plenty of time for a slow breakthrough. Time was still abundant, there was no need to rush. But that didn¡¯t mean he would become negligent. His usual Cultivation still required diligent effort. Being able to break through to Earth Immortal a day earlier was naturally better than later. In this day and age, being a Human Immortal was not secure enough; only by breaking through to Earth Immortal could one say they were truly safe within the Changqing Domain. Previously, relying on his Avatars to shield him from the elements had indeed been safe. But there were always times when the Avatars could not cover everything. Lu Yuan had never entrusted his wealth and life entirely to his Avatars. Personal strength was the true foundation. Having only recently become strong enough to contemplate breaking through to Earth Immortal and with preparations not yet complete, he dared not attempt the leap. That¡¯s why he had allowed the expendable Qi Luck Dao Fruit, which wouldn¡¯t be too painful to lose and wouldn¡¯t endanger his life, to attempt the breakthrough to Earth Immortal, to protect his own path. But now that he himself had the qualifications to attempt the Earth Immortal breakthrough, it was natural to prepare and also to elevate his own strength. The power in one¡¯s own hands is what¡¯s real. Having battled through hurdles and progressed step by step to where he was now, Lu Yuan knew this well. Therefore, after returning to Mi Yun Mountain, he calmed down and stopped making any big moves or wandering about carelessly. He delegated most matters within the sect to various subordinate disciples, letting them go and handle those affairs. Except for some important matters, he generally did not intervene. Most days, he dedicated his time to secluded Cultivation. This attitude, sustained over a decade, also made surrounding powers observing Taiping Dao breathe a sigh of relief. The new School Leader¡¯s ascension seemed not to have affected Taiping Dao¡¯s consistent policies; the sect continued to maintain a stable and peaceful development path without aggressive ambitions for expansion. However, at the same time, this new School Leader was not as active as the previous Leader, not moving about as much. This also meant that winning him over would be more difficult than before. Influencing Taiping Dao became harder than before as well. For the outside world, this truly had its pros and cons. The good thing was, although Lu Yuan became a homebody, he still kept his previous promises. Every year, he would send out a group of disciples to travel within the territory of Qing Immortal Sect. Accompanying the disciples of Qing Immortal Sect, they roamed together through the Western Domain, Northern Domain, Central Domain, and Eastern Territory, adventuring across the world in search of treasures. In this process, through adventure after adventure, the relationships between disciples of the two sects gradually accumulated and warmed quickly. The relationship between the two sects, which had been showing signs of drifting apart, began to mend again under the guidance of Lu Yuan¡¯s policies, returning to the trend of allies. As for the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t cut off contact abruptly either. After all, they had given him a fine Gift, and although it was not as much as that from Qing Immortal Sect, it was still substantial. Therefore, if there were disciples in his sect who wished to travel within the Jiuzhou region, he wouldn¡¯t stop them. But that was the extent of it; unlike with Yi Dancheng, he did not encourage, let alone directly send out, such initiatives. Even regarding the Qing Immortal Sect, Lu Yuan was not planning to stay involved for long. He intended to continue sending out disciples for exchange activities for fifty years, before putting a stop to it. The gift they had given was worth only that much. If they wanted Taiping Dao to send more people for exchanges later, of course, that would be finea€¡±Lu Yuan would welcome it, but they would have to pay. Under his new leadership, everything was so free, all was transactional, as long as the price was right. Taiping Dao¡¯s friendship could be bought. Taiping Dao¡¯s stance could be bought. Taiping Dao¡¯s alliances could be bought. As long as you could pay. Otherwise, if you thought you could benefit without giving anything in return, you were dreaming. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Now that Jin Qingyue had been upgraded once again, and the Jade Brocade had been crafted, Lu Yuan¡¯s accumulated family fortune of over three hundred years had once again been entirely invested. Chapter 1410 - Chapter 1410 Chapter 553 Breakthrough to Earth Immortal_3 ?Chapter 1410: Chapter 553 Breakthrough to Earth Immortal_3 Chapter 1410: Chapter 553 Breakthrough to Earth Immortal_3 At this moment, he was utterly destitute. As long as it could make money, he had also started to have no bottom line. If the offer was generous enough, even selling the entire Taiping Dao to someone else was not a problem. After all, what he valued were only himself and a few avatars, not the sect of Taiping Dao. As long as he and his avatars remained, they could establish a base anywhere. The sect was just an empty shell. However, even if it was just an empty shell, it wouldn¡¯t be easy for an outsider to buy it. In the Changqing Domain, no one could afford the price. Outside of the Changqing Domain, those Heavenly Immortal sects might be able to afford it but purchasing it would cost them heavily. Therefore, it was still priceless which made Lu Yuan quite regretful. After all, he estimated that projects like buying disciples for external training with money wouldn¡¯t last long. The Jiuzhou Immortal Sect might bleed once to maintain relationships. The Qing Immortal Sect, being wealthy and significant, might purchase it two or three times to cultivate an atmosphere close to that of Taiping Dao to accumulate goodwill. But after those few times, even if the two sects had more money, they wouldn¡¯t likely be the big spenders again. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Thus, this project wouldn¡¯t make money in the long run. It could only let Taiping Dao make a fortune once, plumping up its shriveled purse. To make a lot of money in the future, they still had to rely on the disciples below, traveling all over the world to earn foreign exchange for the sect. That is the primary channel for obtaining Immortal Materials. Under this stable and greedy policy, Taiping Dao had safely passed another four hundred years in the Changqing Domain. In the Mi Yun Mountain, inside the School Leader¡¯s Cave Mansion. In a brightly lit room, several figures were sitting cross-legged. The outer circle consisted of five figures, completing a circle, guarding the one in the center. Lu Yuan sat in the center, with five avatars surrounding him, while he himself had his eyes tightly closed, his mind completely immersed within his body, cautiously resisting the gradually rising Wind Tribulation. Yes, at this moment, he was undergoing the Wind Tribulation, striving towards the Realm of Earth Immortal. After achieving the Human Immortal Realm, he had undergone harsh Cultivation for seven hundred years and had finally reached this step. For this step, Lu Yuan had also made full preparations. The experiences of Qing Guanzi, Yi Dancheng, and Che Shidao, his first three avatars when they broke through to the Earth Immortal realm, had shown him the way forward. The suffering of seven hundred years in the Way of Control Pneuma was equivalent to the accumulation of seven thousand years of a regular Cultivator, establishing a robust foundation for him. All the scriptures of countless Immortal Sects in the Nine Provinces, various Divine Powers and Dao Laws, and secrets for breaking tribulations, had stacked up a wealth of resources for him. At this point, his Essence, Qi, and Spirit had reached perfect completion, his Dao Law and Divine Powers could progress no further, and he was able to pull various tribulation-breaking secret techniques effortlessly at his fingertips, aided by the experience of his first three avatars. With all these supports, his preparation for breaking into the Earth Immortal realm was lavish. Unprecedented and likely unsurpassed. Perhaps this was what was meant for Lu Yuan at this time. A gentle breeze originated from within his lungs, brushing over his organs, bringing along a cool sensation. Lu Yuan didn¡¯t feel the painful sting recorded in the scriptures and experienced by his previous three avatars. It was as if a clear stream was brushing over, providing only a refreshing comfort. The soft wind rippled, nourishing his body and Divine Soul, allowing them to absorb nutrients and evolve. It felt like an instant, yet also like millennia. As the soft breeze emerged from nowhere and swept through his entire being, washing his body and Divine Soul clean, it disappeared into nothingness. And Lu Yuan himself, after this wind, fell into transformation. The robust foundation he built allowed the Wind Tribulation to cause him no harm; instead, the purification and transformation it brought were wholly embraced and absorbed. At this moment, the power of the Wind Tribulation acted as a primer, allowing the sufficient accumulation of foundational essence to begin transforming from quantity to quality. Above Lu Yuan¡¯s head in the celebratory clouds, the sturdy and vivid Human Flower Dao Fruit had now produced a seed, which spread to the neighboring clouds, a tender sprout emerging quickly absorbing the surrounding clouds, rapidly flourishing. ?¦Ï??0.§ã0 Over the hundreds of years accumulated, the clouds that had stretched several meters quickly shrank and collapsed, turning into nutrients feeding the new seed. Only when the whole cluster of celebratory clouds had reduced to one-fifth of its original size did this shrinking trend stop. The new seed had absorbed enough nutrients; a flower more spectacular than the Human Flower bloomed above Lu Yuan¡¯s head, yielding a new fruit. The Earth Flower Dao Fruit had been achieved! Not only was it achieved, but it had also reached perfection. When Qing Guanzi first met Song Xiren, his fundamental essence was seen by the latter; the Earth Flower atop his head had only one petal open, indicating an unstable foundation and exhausted potential, marking the lowest level of an Earth Immortal with no further advancement. On the other hand, Song Xiren had three flowers in full bloom, with a solid foundation and the potential to reach the Heavenly Immortal realm. Yet now, Lu Yuan¡¯s Earth Flower, similarly with three petals, and the size and color surpassing Song Xiren from before. You must know, at that time, Song Xiren was already at the mid-stage of the Earth Immortal realm. Just after breaking through, his fundamental essence surpassed that of Song Xiren, who had been intensively nurtured by the Qing Immortal Sect and regarded as a seed for a Heavenly Immortal. It went without saying how incredibly stable Lu Yuan¡¯s foundation was. Everything a Cultivator in the Human Immortal Realm could do at their limit, over these seven hundred years, he had accomplished all, filling up every flaw, making his foundation unprecedentedly perfect. At this moment, these efforts had finally turned into the fruits of his labor, blooming into the most stunning Dao Fruit Flower. ¡°Hahaha, I have achieved Dao!¡± After Lu Yuan regulated the dramatically increased Magic Power within his body and stabilized his realm, he couldn¡¯t help but stand up and laugh heartily. Since transmigrating and until now, from the Jiuzhou Realm to this Immortal Realm, it had been a total of one thousand nine hundred years, not yet two thousand years. He had finally achieved the Earth Immortal Realm, reaching the lifespan of ten thousand years typical of this Domain Flower Realm. Although this ten thousand-year lifespan meant little to him who sought immortality and deathlessness. But the Cultivation that arrived with this lifespan, along with the powerful strength accompanying this Cultivation, greatly delighted him. Only as an Earth Immortal would one be considered high-ranking in this Immortal Realm. In times when Heavenly Immortals were in seclusion and all cultivated in hiding, Earth Immortal Cultivators already topped the entire Immortal Realm. And now, he, Lu Yuan, was among them. Cultivating immortality and refining Dao, achieving longevity and a carefree existence, thus far, he had finally made some accomplishments. Chapter 1411 - Chapter 1411 Chapter 554 The Grand Plan for Unification ?Chapter 1411: Chapter 554: The Grand Plan for Unification Chapter 1411: Chapter 554: The Grand Plan for Unification ¡°Congratulations to the master for achieving the status of Earth Immortal!¡± When Lu Yuan burst into laughter, the five avatars surrounding him also congratulated him in unison. ¡°Joy for all! Joy for all!¡± Lu Yuan reined in his laughter and, looking at the avatars around him, said cheerfully, ¡°Now that I have become an Earth Immortal, with the Earth Flower Dao Fruit within me, there are no more threats in this Changqing Domain.¡± For an Earth Immortal cultivator, as long as one doesn¡¯t stubbornly resist, even when facing a late-stage Earth Immortal grand cultivator intending to flee, no one could stop them. The reason several Earth Immortals fell during the great battle between Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was because neither sect had an escape route. Behind them stood their sect, and to take a step back was to willingly give up the defensive line. If the enemy were to push forward, even if one could flee back to the sect and survive for a moment, the destruction of the sect would be just a matter of time. For those of the Immortal Realm who hold the transmission of the sect inheritance more dearly than their lives, they would rather die than allow the enemy to breach their borders. That¡¯s why several Earth Immortal cultivators fell on the battlefield. It wasn¡¯t that they couldn¡¯t escape; rather, they didn¡¯t want to ¨C they couldn¡¯t. But for Lu Yuan, these concerns were irrelevant. To him, Taiping Dao was only a means to an end, created to help him advance his great cause and reach higher pinnacles. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï At most, it was just a conveniently used tool. Since it was a tool, it could naturally be discarded. Allowing oneself to be constrained by a tool, to the point of risking one¡¯s life, would be foolish. Faced with a choice between his life and Taiping Dao, he wouldn¡¯t hesitate to abandon Taiping Dao and choose his own life. As long as the green mountains remained, there would be no fear of running out of firewood. To establish Taiping Dao and develop it to its current scale took Lu Yuan less than a thousand years. The sole purpose of creating Taiping Dao was to take advantage of the chaos in the Changqing Domain, seeking opportunities to seize control and accumulate capital for his assault on the Heavenly Immortal realm. However, if that objective was unachievable, even threatening his own life, Lu Yuan would not hesitate too much to decisively abandon the sect, wisely choosing to forsake it. He had a long lifespan, and countless time in the future to slowly wait for opportunities to choose his next target for conquest. The world was vast, not to mention the whole Immortal Realm; even just Donghua Continent alone had more than a dozen domains. Currently, there were two to three domains on Donghua Continent immersed in chaos. The lifespans of the Great True Persons varied, and no one knew when one of those seemingly immortal Great True Persons might suddenly face catastrophe and perish. Nevertheless, Lu Yuan felt that, as long as he patiently waited, over a span of a hundred thousand years, he was quite likely to encounter the fall of one or two Great True Persons. And when that moment came, with his hundred thousand years of meticulous preparation, seizing a domain in the wake of a Great True Person¡¯s fall would be almost a certainty, without any complications. With such a future in sight, he naturally would not engage in a bitter struggle over a domain with some Earth Immortals whose lifespans barely reached ten thousand years. That would be too foolish. Unlike those commoners of the Immortal Sect, he wasn¡¯t indoctrinated from childhood with the mindset that the sect was home and its care depended on all. Receiving the sect¡¯s favor over the years developed a strong sense of belonging in many, some of whom would gladly die for their sect, naturally able to lay down their lives for the Tao inheritance. On the contrary. The transmission of Tao Inheritance of Taiping Dao was all thanks to Lu Yuan himself; his disciples were recipients of his favor. Without his protection, would the current disciples of Taiping Dao be able to enjoy the status of overlords in the Southern Domain, traveling unhindered throughout the world, freely moving around within the territories of Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate? That was all Lu Yuan¡¯s grace. He had provided his disciples with Dao Law, origins, resources, and prestige, not the other way around. When it came time to abandon them, he would not hesitate too much. It was the sect that nurtured them, and when the sect needed them, these disciples naturally had to repay the sect with their lives, repay himself. The cause and effect in this situation must not be confused. Therefore, sorting out this layer, the difference between Lu Yuan and the Earth Immortals of other Immortal Sects was naturally immense. Possessing an endless lifespan gave him sufficient confidence. And without excessive psychological burdens, he could abandon his sect at any time. When combining these two factors, the constraints that other Immortal Sect Earth Immortals had simply didn¡¯t exist for Lu Yuan. Others dared not flee; he could escape without a second thought. The tragedies that befell Yao Baojuan and Meng Jianshan would not occur with Lu Yuan. And it was precisely for this reason that he said no one in the Changqing Domain could threaten him anymore. Because by the time the threat really emerged, he would have already fled posthaste. Learning about the situation in the Immortal Realm initially, he was always anxious, fearing that a day would come when an Earth Immortal would kill him, making Lu Yuan constantly cautious and not daring to be careless. Now, with the improvement in his cultivation, the threat that was once weighing on his heart vanished like smoke in the air. It naturally made him feel extremely elated. But Lu Yuan didn¡¯t get carried away by his joy. After a moment of exhilaration, he turned his gaze to an avatar next to him: ¡°Now that I¡¯ve broken through to Earth Immortal, I can vacate quite a few of the resources I previously occupied. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï I will relinquish control of the Three Nations to you. Chapter 1412 - Chapter 1412 Chapter 554 The Grand Plan for Unification_2 ?Chapter 1412: Chapter 554: The Grand Plan for Unification_2 Chapter 1412: Chapter 554: The Grand Plan for Unification_2 Jin Qingyue, strive to breakthrough to Earth Immortal within a hundred years.¡± His gaze fell on Jin Qingyue. Taiping Dao actually controlled the lands of seven nations. This time, when Lu Yuan broke through to Earth Immortal, in order to increase his assurance, he had purposely chosen the downtime period following the exchange of a disciple for a nation¡¯s Qi Luck, even refusing the exchange requests of many new disciples over the past several decades. His purpose was to use all the Qi Luck from these seven nations for his own enjoyment. The breakthrough went so smoothly this time partly because of the accumulation of resources. Now that the breakthrough was complete, these resources could naturally be freed up. Allocating the lands of three nations for his next avatar¡¯s breakthrough was perfectly reasonable. ¡°Yes,¡± Jin Qingyue replied. These four hundred years were a period of accumulation for Lu Yuan, and after being sufficiently prepared, he had smoothly broken through to Earth Immortal. Similarly, the four hundred years were also Jin Qingyue¡¯s period of accumulation. After building a firm foundation and reaching the potential of an Earth Immortal four hundred years ago, he had now reached the late stage of Earth Immortal, perfect, and could sprint towards the Earth Flower Dao Fruit. Now that this original form of Lu Yuan had already become an Earth Immortal, the three old avatars, Qing Guanzi, Yi Dancheng, and Che Shidao, had also broken through to Earth Immortal early. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Among the five avatars in his hands, only Jin Qingyue and Jade Brocade remained. These two avatars had been out for seven hundred years, which was no short period of time and only less than a hundred years shorter than the other three avatars. Except for when Taiping Dao was first established and Jin Qingyue missed it, he hadn¡¯t missed any major events afterward. It was only natural not to mistreat such an established avatar and let him breakthrough together. As for Jade Brocade, over these four hundred years, Taiping Dao had also gathered a fair amount of Immortal Materials. Fifty years ago, Lu Yuan had taken the time to give this fifth avatar a minor upgrade. Transforming him from originally just at the threshold of the early stage of Human Immortal to now capable of developing to the foundation of mid-level Human Immortal. Now fifty years had passed, and with the immense boosting of Qi Luck, Jade Brocade was also at the cultivation of a mid-level Human Immortal. However, after reaching this realm, he had hit a potential bottleneck. Before another potential upgrade, it would be quite difficult to continue breaking through. Thus, this avatar temporarily didn¡¯t need Qi Luck or Qi. Not only Jade Brocade didn¡¯t need it. Apart from Jin Qingyue, the other avatars also didn¡¯t need it. For the same reason as Jade Brocade, their potential had reached its limit, and unless they used Immortal Materials to refine and improve the quality of their Qi Luck Dao Qi, a breakthrough was basically impossible. But Qing Guanzi and the others had already become Earth Immortals, which was the level of Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts. Such grade of Immortal Artifacts, even among those Heavenly Immortal Sects, were extremely limited in number, not exceeding the digits of two hands. At this moment, Lu Yuan could produce four Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts level Dao Fruits, which relied on scouring the entire foundation of the Nine Provinces realm, in addition to the accumulation from breaking through the Immortal Realm over the past few centuries and plundering from Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Based on scraping the barrel, deceiving and tricking, he had managed to gather this current foundation. And after these foundations were exhausted, looking at Jade Brocade was evident. In four hundred years, he had only raised this avatar to the mid-level of Human Immortal. To elevate him to late-stage Human Immortal, it was estimated that another four to five hundred years would be needed to gather enough Immortal Materials for the next minor upgrade. As for upgrading to Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts to reach the potential necessary for breaking through to Earth Immortal, it was even more uncertain how long that would take. If there were no unexpected gains, then given the current rate of accumulation, it might be another thousand or even two thousand years before accumulating enough foundation. Time was too long. And that was only upgrading from Lower Grade to Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts. When it comes to upgrading the quality of Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts, the resources required needn¡¯t be mentioned. Perhaps reforging several Earth Immortal avatars like Qing Guanzi, merging all Dao Fruit avatars might just create a middle-stage Earth Immortal avatar. Although theoretically speaking, a mid-stage Earth Immortal avatar could fight three or four early-stage Earth Immortals. In terms of combat power, this was not a loss. And compared to early-stage Earth Immortal, a mid-stage Earth Immortal also attained a higher level of power, which should be considered a gain. But could this calculation really be made this way? For the current wars in the Immortal Realm, an early-stage Earth Immortal cultivator, accompanied by a few Human Immortals and one or two thousand ordinary cultivators, could set up a large formation sufficient to withstand a mid-stage Earth Immortal. If it¡¯s just defense and positional warfare, as long as they are in a defensive state, there¡¯s practically no difference between early-stage Earth Immortal cultivators and mid-stage Earth Immortal cultivators. That raises a question. Lu Yuan had three Earth Immortal avatars, able to establish three Earth Immortal formations, capable of opening up three battlefields. In other words, they could be used as three mid-stage Earth Immortal cultivators. But if replaced by one mid-stage Earth Immortal cultivator, no matter how capable he was, he couldn¡¯t possibly split himself into three. With the existence of something like a large formation, the gap between early and mid-stage Earth Immortal cultivators had been significantly reduced. Of course, this refers to the scenario where the early-stage Earth Immortal cultivator defends using the large formation while the mid-stage Earth Immortal cultivator attacks. If the roles were reversed, the gap would widen even further. A large formation hosted by a mid-stage Earth Immortal cultivator could possibly withstand attacks from seven or eight early-stage Earth Immortals. The amplification of a formation to cultivators works both ways. Chapter 1413 - Chapter 1413 Chapter 554 The Grand Plan for Unification_3 ?Chapter 1413: Chapter 554: The Grand Plan for Unification_3 Chapter 1413: Chapter 554: The Grand Plan for Unification_3 ¡°Whoever defends has the advantage.¡± And for Lu Yuan, when he was preparing to unify the Changqing Domain and eliminate the Changqing Immortal Sect in the future, he naturally assumed an offensive posture. But speaking of offense, it did not mean attacking just one place. With so many Earth Immortal Avatars at his disposal, he could deploy them broadly, divide his forces, and attack the Changqing Immortal Sect from several directions. Given the strength of the Changqing Immortal Sect, they now had only two Earth Immortals left. One of them had to remain to guard against the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate in the Western Domain. The number left to resist the invasion of the Taiping Dao was, at most, a single Earth Immortal. Even if this Earth Immortal was Song Xiren, a mid-stage Earth Immortal who was known as the number one cultivator in the Changqing Domain at present, he had no good way to face multiple assaults from the Taiping Dao. Lu Yuan could adopt the strategy of building strong camps and engaging in protracted warfare, erecting a large formation for each army, and relying on the formations to push forward step by step. With this approach, each army, upon hearing of Song Xiren¡¯s attempt to intercept, could immediately retreat into the formation, using it to defend against the enemy and contain him. While other troops could advance, seizing the enemy¡¯s territory in other directions unprotected by an Earth Immortal. Thus, the path facing Song Xiren would defend and contain, while the others took the opportunity to break through. Under the strategy of simultaneous advances, as long as each army¡¯s defense was insured, they could steadily whittle away, and in a few hundred years, completely swallow up the entire Changqing Immortal Sect. However formidable Song Xiren might be, he was only one man. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï The number one cultivator of the Changqing Domain, what of it? Faced with the human wave tactics of the Taiping Dao, he¡¯d still have to swallow his hatred. So from this perspective alone, three or four early Earth Immortals were definitely more useful than a single mid-stage Earth Immortal. And that was just one aspect. It had already been mentioned before. All Immortal Artifacts, after being refined into Dao Fruit Immortal Artifacts, began to have their own lifespan constraints, just like regular cultivators. The lifespan limit for those from Yi Dancheng was ten thousand years. After ten thousand years, even if they were the actual Immortal Artifact bodies, they would age and pass away just like ordinary cultivators. So, a mid-stage Earth Immortal Artifact and a cultivator in the early Earth Immortal stage had no difference in terms of usable years. Since improving by a minor realm did not extend lifespan, it was naturally better to refine several more Immortal Artifacts, making the most of the rare materials within the limited usage period. Even if he had enough Avatars, instead of turning them into Immortal Artifacts, he could also save them to replace other Avatars that would deteriorate later. For Lu Yuan, from his current perspective, there was no need to enhance his Avatars once they reached the Earthly Immortal Realm. However, his own cultivation, without the constraints of a lifespan, could safely be improved. ¡°The lands of the Three Nations can satisfy the cultivation needs of an early Earth Immortal. But moving up, to reach mid-stage Earth Immortal requires more territory than the Three Nations. That is, it requires at least the lands of four countries to produce a mid-stage Earth Immortal. And for late-stage Earth Immortals, it takes the lands of nine or more countries to nourish and give birth.¡± Lu Yuan recalled the sayings that circulated within the Immortal Realm, and to his Avatars he said, ¡°Now, the territory controlled by my Taiping Dao spans seven nations. These lands can support my cultivation up to a point slightly above mid-stage Earth Immortal. To break through to late-stage Earth Immortal would be impossible. Therefore, once I break through to mid-stage Earth Immortal, due to resource limitations, that will be the ceiling for my realm. At that time, if I wish to further advance my cultivation, I would have no choice but to expand and seize more territory, ensuring Taiping Dao¡¯s domain encompasses more than nine nationsa€¡±that would enable a breakthrough to late-stage Earth Immortal. In other words, when I cultivate to the mid-stage Earth Immortal, reaching the limit set by our current territory, even if it¡¯s just for further advancement, I would have to wage war. Considering my current realm, to cultivate to mid-term Emperor Immortal, maxing out the potential of the land of the seven nations, would take at most a thousand years. Shorter perhaps. It might be six or seven hundred years. By then, whether I want to or not, we¡¯d have to wage war.¡± Lu Yuan laid out his plan. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Cultivation always relied on various resources. And as one¡¯s cultivation increased, the need for more and higher-quality resources grew accordingly. This pyramid-like structure of resource demands meant that every cultivator, to progress further, had to compete and fight with others. If Lu Yuan didn¡¯t wish to merely remain a mid-stage Earth Immortal, idling away in this world, he had no choice but to constantly strive upward and compete for resources. This was the competition for the Great Tao, where not to advance is to fall back. ¡°So during the time my cultivation reaches its limit, the Taiping Dao must start preparing for war in all aspects.¡± Lu Yuan spoke in a stern tone, his gaze fixed on those present, ¡°Song Xiren is a mid-stage Earth Immortal, and to counter him, I too must break through to mid-stage Earth Immortal. In the coming time, I will devote myself entirely to secluded cultivation, and I won¡¯t be able to give much thought to sect affairs. As such, to better coordinate resources, I will later pass on the position of School Leader to Jade Brocade, allowing him to take my place as the third School Leader of the Taiping Dao.¡± With that, Lu Yuan turned to Jade Brocade, ¡°Your duty, upon succeeding as School Leader, is to continue urging the disciples to scavenge for Immortal Materials, preparing for your subsequent realm advancement. Additionally, my Taiping Tao Sect currently controls the territory of seven nations, has one mountain and six affiliate courtyards, totaling four thousand cultivators. This number is too low. Faced with the impending war, it¡¯s not enough, far from enough. Thus, your other major responsibility is to double the number of our sect¡¯s disciples within these six to seven hundred, or a thousand years, before the outbreak of war. At the very least eight thousand cultivators, preferably tens of thousands, or even more, is your second major task. Don¡¯t have any concerns, go ahead and recruit disciples. If outsiders question it, just pass it off as too many disciples traveling and the sect lacking hands, hence the expansion. Also, send more disciples to travel and seek treasures. The Taiping Dao has always done this over the years, and using this excuse, even if others are wary, it will not raise too much suspicion. You can be assured in doing this.¡± Lu Yuan arranged his grand plan for unification. Chapter 1414 - Chapter 1414 Chapter 555 Pure Inside ?Chapter 1414: Chapter 555 Pure Inside Chapter 1414: Chapter 555 Pure Inside ¡°Yes, I understand and will diligently prepare for it in the future,¡± Jade Brocade replied with a solemn expression, nodding earnestly when faced with his own body¡¯s request. His pressure would not be light this time. Firstly, let¡¯s talk about collecting Immortal Materials, and then getting myself to level up; needless to say, that¡¯s directly related to my own benefit, and I must focus on it. But to collect enough Immortal Materials to upgrade to an Earth Immortal within a mere thousand years is not so easy. To achieve this goal, there are only two methods. Either I do as my main body did previously, taking advantage of the opportunity of the new Sect Leader¡¯s appointment to visit Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and harvest there once more. Or to dispatch more disciples, to send more people to travel the outside world, as the more people that go out, the larger the base number, and correspondingly, the more gains can be made. Just by increasing the number of disciples by two or three times, I might be able to gather enough Immortal Materials. ¡®However, Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate have already been harvested several times these years; this time it will be difficult to scrape together anything more. But as the new Sect Leader, I should be able to collect something under this guise, which will count as income anyway. As for recruiting more disciples, I must act fast, preferably doubling the number within a hundred years, enlarge the base first, and then send everyone out. With twice the disciples, even if the gains from searching and exploring are not doubled, an increase of twenty or thirty percent should still be possible.¡¯ Jade Brocade pondered this in his heart, having already considered the policies and guidelines for his tenure. Meanwhile, Lu Yuan continued to instruct, ¡°As for you, Yi Dancheng, after I step down, you can make an appropriate comeback. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï There¡¯s no need to come to the fore, but just be active behind the scenes, influencing things inside the sect. The main objective is to reestablish communication with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. War is imminent, and Jiuzhou as an ally must be won over. You will be in charge of this task, to make the sect¡¯s relations with Jiuzhou heat up again. However, you must also pay attention to moderation, not like when you were Sect Leader previously, almost merging the two houses together, which would alert Qing Immortal Sect. Jade Brocade, you may discuss with Yi Dancheng and coordinate on this matter. To create the illusion that I, as the Sect Leader, have failed in internal struggles and discreetly resigned. Then, Yi Dancheng, as the first School Leader wants to return and competes with you, the third School Leader, for power, thus confusing outsiders. However, this struggle must not be overdone, it only needs to be superficial, not too genuine. Give outsiders an indistinct, hazy impression, and those with intentions will imagine the rest themselves. It must be clear that the internal conflict within Taiping Dao is just a fa?¡ìade, intended to lower the guard of outsiders. Your main goal, Yi Dancheng, is to maintain and heat up the relationship with Jiuzhou appropriately. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? As long as we keep it intimate, once I break through to Earth Immortal, I will personally visit the Western Domain, to talk with Ding Wanxuan and Zhen Xuan, to personally promote the reunion of the two sects.¡± Over the years, thanks to Lu Yuan¡¯s strategy of favoring those who provided funds, Taiping Dao¡¯s relations with both Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate began to trend towards equilibrium, neither warm nor chilly, maintaining a friendly state. Originally, this was also not bad. In the eyes of Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, as long as Taiping Dao wasn¡¯t swayed by the other, it was a win for them. Taiping Dao effectively acted as a lubricant and a buffer zone between the two sects, significantly easing conflicts within Changqing Domain. Also thanks to Lu Yuan¡¯s policies, Changqing Domain had spent four hundred peaceful years without any major negative impact from conflicts. Both Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate have, due to Taiping Dao¡¯s friendly strategy on both sides, gained a mediator, and relations have greatly eased. Therefore, owing to these achievements, Lu Yuan, as the Sect Leader, has a very high reputation externally. Outsiders all believe that he brought peace, that Taiping Dao brought peace. Taiping Dao, as its name suggests, has always strived for a peaceful effort. Thus, outsiders have a highly favorable impression of Taiping Dao. Then would such a good person be disliked by anyone? Of course, there would be. When some benefit, it¡¯s natural for others to suffer. On both sides of Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, generations deep blood feuds exist, and over tens of thousands of years, countless bloody battles have been fought with innumerable deaths. Does anyone truly desire peace? Within the two sects, who knows how many people are itching to go to war immediately and then annihilate the opposition to avenge their fellow disciples and brothers. Then within Taiping Dao, with exchanges with both factions, it naturally tends to split into two camps. Even though this division isn¡¯t very obvious yet, it¡¯s just a sign for now. But if it continues, an ideological split occurs, and they become completely incompatible, a total division into two camps is possible. Because their interests conflict. On one side, familiar with Jiuzhou, profiting from Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. On the other side, familiar with Changqing, profiting from Qing Immortal Sect. Then there are the relationships built through these beneficial interactions, along with their emotional ties, so opposing each other is a foregone conclusion. The reason why no chaos has broken out thus far is firstly, the oversight of elders like Lu Yuan above, for those ordinary disciples who aren¡¯t even Immortals cannot stir up trouble. Secondly, although these disciples may show bias in their outward stance, they are, after all, raised by the sect, and their sense of belonging to Taiping Dao and the sect is extremely strong. Chapter 1415 - Chapter 1415 Chapter 555 Pure Inside_2 ?Chapter 1415: Chapter 555 Pure Inside_2 Chapter 1415: Chapter 555 Pure Inside_2 He truly regarded this place as his mentor¡¯s abode, as his very own home. In such a situation, when conflicts arose between the two sides, it was like brothers quarreling. No matter how fiercely they argued, they wouldn¡¯t tear down their home. Above, there were parents; in the middle, brothers and sisters; and below, the grandchild¡¯s generation! When a real crisis occurred, brothers could still stand together, united against outsiders. But this unity could only be maintained for now. Given enough time, continuing to split along the current trajectory was not out of the realm of possibilitya€¡±brothers fighting within the walls, each clamoring to go their separate ways. It must be said that over the years, the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s repeated expenditures to fund exchanges with Taiping Dao disciples had indeed been effective and well worth the cost. They didn¡¯t just bribe the higher-ups of Taiping Dao, which included Lu Yuan. They also selected standout individuals from those disciples during their travels, secretly supplying various benefits, namely, all sorts of Immortal Materials. Allowing them to return to their sect with Immortal Materials to complete tasks, thereby earning Contribution Points and gradually climbing the ranks within Taiping Dao. By now, a considerable portion of the disciples sponsored by the Qing Immortal Sect had reached the middle levels within the sect, holding significant sway among the true disciples. Now, many of these disciples, who were inclined toward Qing Immortal Sect, had submitted applications to their sect, expressing their desire to exchange for a nation¡¯s fate, with the aim of breaking through to the Immortal Realm. ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï The only reason they had been temporarily rejected was that Lu Yuan had been focusing on his breakthrough to Earth Immortal status in recent years. Now that he had completed his breakthrough, apart from the fixed resources required for his own and Jin Qingyue¡¯s cultivation, there were still many quotas within the sect that could be allocated for disciples to exchange. Thus, a new wave of Human Immortals within Taiping Dao was likely to emerge very soon. According to Lu Yuan¡¯s estimate, among these people, one or two Human Immortals should arise. And should Human Immortals emerge, especially those with political inclinations, they might not betray Taiping Dao, but it was impossible for them not to have an influence on the sect¡¯s policy direction. After all, a Human Immortal, in any sect, even a Heavenly Immortal sect, would be considered part of the upper echelon. In the sects within the Changqing Domain, that was undoubtedly a high-ranking position, capable of influencing a sect¡¯s decisions. One or two Human Immortals alone wouldn¡¯t have a significant impact. But once numbers grew, to three or four, or even five or six, Confronted with the collective attitude of these individuals, even Lu Yuan would have to consider how to make his decisions. This was no joke. Taiping Dao had been established for over 700 years. In these 700-plus years, five or six generations of disciples had come and gone, with the combined number of those who had joined or died reaching twenty to thirty thousand. So many disciples, along with Taiping Dao¡¯s continued offering of Immortal Materials in exchange for Contribution Points, and the pathway to becoming immortal by exchanging a nation¡¯s fate, Over 700 years, more than ten disciples had exchanged a nation¡¯s fate. Among them, two had successfully ascended. One was Yang Xiuan from Yang Family, who had joined in Qingyang Country, and the other was Yu Shipei, who had been recruited as a child and raised as a core disciple of Taiping Dao. These two new Human Immortals were the fruits of Taiping Dao¡¯s 700-year existence. In comparison, setting aside the level of cultivation, Taiping Dao had only six True Immortals within it, including Lu Yuan and his Avatar. In fact, there were two additional True Immortals, making up a full quarter of the proportion. However, Lu Yuan¡¯s Avatar, limited by the lack of Immortal Materials, was essentially fixed in number and unlikely to continue to grow. But those disciples were an unending stream, and the number of True Immortals they could contribute would keep rising. Now it was a quarter, but with two or three more, it would be half. With even more, they would make up the majority. Occupying the majority of True Immortals, even if they were just Human Immortals, was no small matter. Their impact on Taiping Dao was immeasurable and had to be taken seriously and with caution by Lu Yuan. It wasn¡¯t that he feared these sect¡¯s Human Immortals, but rather that they were high-level fighting forces of the sect, and under them, a considerable number of disciples had been influenced, forming a kind of interest group. Dealing with them wasn¡¯t impossible, but doing so would greatly weaken Taiping Dao¡¯s strength. This was something Lu Yuan, on the verge of launching a great war, really didn¡¯t want to see. Therefore, seeing the trend, he decided it was time to intervene. He couldn¡¯t let this situation continue; otherwise, if those disciples influenced by outside forces gradually gained footing, it would truly become an internal threat to Taiping Dao, turning into a chronic problem. Then, it would truly become a case of Taiping Dao spending money to help outsiders raise their disciplesa€¡±a complete and utter loss. However, directly purging these individuals also wasn¡¯t quite appropriate. Punishing disciples without any cause could easily unsettle those within the sect, severely damaging morale and loyalty, and might trigger even bigger chaos. Moreover, after dealing with these people, news spreading outward could lead to increased wariness from related groups on the outside. How would the Nine Provinces sects view you if you purged those aligned with them? How would Qing Immortal Sect view you after cleaning house of those close to them? Thus, both sides posed difficulties and neither was easy to handle. So, straightforwardly, Lu Yuan grew tired of dealing with it and decided to solve the problem from its root. Starting now, he would install a new School Leader, allowing the new leadership to regulate the matter. By recruiting a large number of new disciples without significant external interests, he aimed to dilute the influence of Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate within the Taiping Tao Sect. Chapter 1416 - Chapter 1416 Chapter 555 Pure Inside_3 ?Chapter 1416: Chapter 555 Pure Inside_3 Chapter 1416: Chapter 555 Pure Inside_3 Then, the focus was to grasp the thoughts and behaviors of these new disciples, ensuring that they wouldn¡¯t get too involved with the two sects outside and become unable to distinguish priorities, forgetting which side they belonged to. This was an excuse ready-made. Both Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate knew well what they had done. Taiping Dao was almost infiltrated through like a sieve. Thus, Taiping Dao, sensing the crisis, took the initiative to clean up insidea€¡±no, this wasn¡¯t really cleaning up but rather perfecting the safety mechanisms and stabilizing the morale internally. Faced with such actions, who could raise any objections? Therefore, this was the perfect time to introduce a new Sect Leader, which seemed very clever. They directly pushed away from Taiping Dao¡¯s internal dissatisfaction with the current situation in the sect, believing it was Lu Yuan¡¯s policies and actions as Sect Leader that had led to all this. Then, just like the previous Sect Leader from Yi Dancheng, after high-level decisions, Sect Leader Lu was ousted. They promoted someone with no background, Jade Brocade, who had also maintained a hidden identity until now, and placed him in charge of spearheading this internal cultural reformation. Look, look, what a perfect excuse, what a justifiable reason. From the outside, seeing Taiping Dao taking such measures, one wouldn¡¯t feel they were overbearing; instead, one might even feel sympathy. After all. Taiping Dao was almost becoming Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate¡¯s version of Taiping Dao. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Now that they wanted to escape this infiltration and become independent and pure, what was wrong with that? Outsiders wouldn¡¯t blame Taiping Dao or think it was overdoing it. On the contrary, they would feel displeased with Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, thinking those two had gone too far. Taiping Dao was friendly with you, maintaining peace and stability in the Changqing Domain, and this is how you repay them? If this infiltration continued, wouldn¡¯t Taiping Dao simply have to change its allegiance and split into two, each changing its name? Taiping Dao would also have its legacy severed, completely consumed by you. Over thousands of years of conflict, Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate didn¡¯t have good reputations. Especially since similar events had already unfolded in many other sects. And any sect where such events had happened had by now vanished into smoke and were annexed by outsiders. The lesson of the past was still clear before our eyes. In these major ethical and moral issues, outsiders could understand Taiping Dao¡¯s actions. Even Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, guilty in their consciences, didn¡¯t dare to voice any opposition about this matter. This was the cleverness of changing the Sect Leader. It must be said, Lu Yuan really excelled at strategizing through changing Sect Leaders whenever faced with indecision. Even now, having the former Sect Leader step in to govern was considered from multiple angles. Given the deeply entrenched problems within Taiping Dao, if one didn¡¯t resort to drastic measures like scraping the bone to heal wounds or cutting the flesh, Then the only option would be to create more fresh blood to replace the rotten flesh and guide the parts that were already diseased. After all, they were to get close to outsiders, so instead of getting close to Qing Immortal Sect, why not choose Jiuzhou? As Lu Yuan considered, in the future, Taiping Dao was to merge with Jiuzhou, becoming one family. Since they would all be one family, maintaining good relations with Jiuzhou was crucial. Disciples getting close to Jiuzhou shouldn¡¯t be a problem. After all, Jiuzhou and Taiping Dao had one goala€¡±to destroy Qing Immortal Sect and take over this Great Domain. Overall, both sides shared the same interests and objectives. As for the distribution of benefits after killing Qing Immortal Sect, that would have to be negotiated during the battle, each relying on their own tactics. However, considering the various arrangements made by Lu Yuan over the years, as well as the strength accumulated by Taiping Dao after starting the war, and their shared origins with Jiuzhou, All these factors combined. Taiping Dao should have no problem stabilizing the other four branches of Jiuzhou Immortal Gates outside of Changqing Domain. And for the five sects in the Western Domain whose interests were harmed, Lu Yuan was confident he could stabilize one or two of them, and the real potential adversaries to Taiping Dao were just those two or three Immortal Gates. But with most of Jiuzhou Immortal Gates already stabilized by Taiping Dao, would these few dare to make a move against Taiping Dao? To note, by the time Lu Yuan made his move, Taiping Dao would essentially have six Earth Immortals and about ten Human Immortals under its direct command or as vassalsa€¡±a formidable force. Although the five sects of the Western Domain were strong, with only about half of their strength available, how much could they really do against Taiping Dao? Needless to say, they definitely wouldn¡¯t dare. At that time, Lu Yuan only needed to throw out a few bones after destroying Qing Immortal Secta€¡±that is, offer a few countries as compensation to those Western Domain Immortal Gates to placate them, and that would basically settle them. He even had already thought about which places to give out. For instance, the four countries taken by Qing Immortal Sect from the Western Domain, adding one or two countries from either the Southern or Northern Domain. Allocating one country per Immortal Sect, and giving one sect an additional country, treating it as a target for support and using it to divide Jiuzhou Immortal Gates. With external military deterrence and internal division of interests, a mix of carrot and stick, how could these old sects not be dealt with? And once the Changqing Domain was unified, maintaining this stable situation for a couple thousand years. With Lu Yuan¡¯s strength and resources, either he would become a Heavenly Immortal capable of suppressing the entire Changqing Domain and completely resolving all future problems, Or, using these territories to increase his Avatars to ultimately over ten, all Earth Immortals. At the same time, relying on Qi Luck, his cultivation was very likely to reach Late-stage Earth Immortal, and at its peak. Ten Earth Immortals, plus an unmatched Earth Immortal oneself controlling a domain, wouldn¡¯t that be easily accomplished? And with no one daring to resist, just surviving another few thousand or tens of thousands of years, he should be able to become a Heavenly Immortal. In either scenario, Jiuzhou Immortal Gates couldn¡¯t turn the tide, nor could the Changqing Domain stir any waves. And all of this would begin right now, with the change of Sect Leader, transforming the sect¡¯s culture. Chapter 1417 - Chapter 1417 Chapter 556 The Third Change School Leader ?Chapter 1417: Chapter 556: The Third Change School Leader Chapter 1417: Chapter 556: The Third Change School Leader Taiping Dao had changed its Sect Leader again. When this news spread, it immediately stirred up a new round of ripples in the surrounding areas. ¡°What happened?¡± Inside Changqing Mountain, when Song Xiren heard the news from the south about Taiping Dao, he was greatly shaken, ¡°Lu Yuan had been the School Leader for only four hundred years, how could he have been overthrown all of a sudden? Previously, Yi Dancheng too, had only held the position for three hundred years before being replaced. Now Lu Yuan as well. That Taiping Dao, in just seven hundred years, had changed two Sect Leaders so frequently, it¡¯s almost child¡¯s play, truly a way to chaos.¡± At this moment, Song Xiren¡¯s heart was filled with an unspeakable national curse, wanting to burst out. And Yang Jihua, who was below reporting the news, also nodded in agreement, clearly concurring with his own Sect Leader¡¯s words. ¡°Taiping Dao has had three Sect Leaders in less than a thousand years since its establishment. With such political instability, its demise must be imminent,¡± reflected Yang Jihua. The reason the two of them held such a view had to do with the current state on the side of the Immortal Realm. From the perspective of mortals, Yi Dancheng was Sect Leader for three hundred years, and Lu Yuan for four hundred years. Such durations were equivalent to the rise and fall of a dynasty in the mortal world, naturally lengthy. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.?¦Ï But if you consider this timeframe in the Immortal Cultivation World, three hundred years and four hundred years are indeed long but not excessively so. The simplest example, a Cultivator who has gathered two Qi, can live for three hundred years. One who has gathered Three Qi can live five hundred years. A Gathering of Four Qi lasts six hundred years, and Five Qi Towards Primordial yields an eight hundred-year lifespan. The time Yi Dancheng served as Sect Leader was merely the lifespan of the most basic cultivator in the Immortal Realm, one who had gathered two Qi. To those of Five Qi Towards Primordial Cultivators, the tenure of that Sect Leader was less than half their own lifespan. As for Lu Yuan, governing for four hundred years was just half of the lifespan of a Five Qi Towards Primordial Cultivator. This meant that the two Taiping Dao Sect Leaders, together covering seven hundred years, had not even outlasted a single Cultivator of Five Qi Towards Primordial. Now another new Sect Leader is being appointed. So a cultivator who had joined Taiping Dao from the beginning and had been cultivating all the way to Five Qi Towards Primordial, had already experienced three Sect Leaders, truly qualifying as an elder through three reigns. A mortal Cultivator was able to experience three reigns within a sect with Earth Immortals. And with three Sect Leaders, the current emperor, the retired emperor, and the previous retired emperor, the Three Emperors coexisting, each Sect Leader had their own confidants, cultivated their own factions within the sect, and even held the righteous cause of the Sect Leader. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï There is only one sun in the sky, and only one ruler in a nation. Now Taiping Dao has three suns and three rulers; just think, how chaotic could it be inside? Even if we make a concession, a Cultivator of Five Qi Towards Primordial who has experienced three reigns, being the strongest force below the Immortals, the backbone and future of a sect, facing orders from three different Sect Leaders, whom should he obey? Each Sect Leader had shown him kindness, and he had sworn loyalty to each in turn, calling each one ¡°Sect Leader¡± and receiving their teachings and encouragement. Then one day, if these three Sect Leaders turned against each other, how should he choose? This is just one Cultivator in a neutral position; imagine how difficult his position and stand would be in the future. And for the confidants cultivated by each of the three Sect Leaders, the situation would be even less optimistic. Divided into factions and undermining each other, such a situation would certainly occur. This alone is destined to create instability within Taiping Dao. And this is just the position of the mortal disciples below. Above mortals, there are also True Immortals. Inside Taiping Dao, in the recent years, several True Immortals had also been born. Like that Jin Qingyue and Lu Yuan, who appeared out of nowhere, as well as the reclusive Taiping Dao Cultivator Yu Shipei, who is set to succeed Lu Yuan as the new Sect Leader. There were also Yang Xiuan and Yu Shipei recruited and cultivated from the local area after Taiping Dao entered the Southern Domain. All of these people were Human Immortals and could live for three thousand years. Given Taiping Dao¡¯s current pattern of replacing a Sect Leader every three to four hundred years, in a span of three thousand years, one could experience up to ten Sect Leaders. A Human Immortal is to be an elder through ten reigns. This¡­ truly, let¡¯s not even talk about how chaotic that would be. Just think, how many Human Immortals could there be in Taiping Dao? Over seven hundred years, Taiping Dao has altogether cultivated five Human Immortals. Thus, calculated over three thousand years, Taiping Dao might, with some luck, bring up nearly thirty Human Immortals. Subtracting some who succumb to the end of their lifespans, in the end, nearly half of the True Immortals within Taiping Dao could be Sect Leaders. Well, this calculation assumes that becoming a Sect Leader is already an indication of the strongest talent within the sect and will likewise receive the sect¡¯s utmost support for cultivation, assisting them to become Earth Immortals and thus greatly expanding their lifespans to ten thousand years. Just like the first Sect Leader of Taiping Dao, Yi Dancheng, he has been in seclusion trying to break through to the Realm of Earth Immortal for a full four hundred years. Four hundred years, although no news has come through about achieving the status of Earth Immortal. But on the flip side, no news is actually good news. Because this means the other party is still alive, still hopeful of challenging for Earth Immortal, rather than perishing under the Wind Tribulation during the breakthrough. As long as he doesn¡¯t die, Taiping Dao always has the hope of adding an Earth Immortal, with a Human Immortal Peak Cultivator every day. Yi Dancheng was already so. The one who had been Sect Leader of Taiping Dao for four hundred years, Lu Yuan, was equally extraordinary. From the current overt information, this Sect Leader Lu¡¯s cultivation was also profound, already in the late-stage of Human Immortal. Chapter 1418 - Chapter 1418 Chapter 556 The Third Change School Leader_2 ?Chapter 1418: Chapter 556: The Third Change School Leader_2 Chapter 1418: Chapter 556: The Third Change School Leader_2 With such cultivation, enduring a few hundred more years, he could equally attempt to advance to Earth Immortal. Both preceding School Leaders were extraordinary, thus, the jade brocade of this third successor naturally couldn¡¯t be underestimated, and people tended to regard him on par with the previous two leaders. To have three such outstanding figures appear consecutively, the flourishing Qi Luck of the Taiping Dao was truly startling. However, if generation after generation of School Leaders could maintain such an extraordinary presence, then it was also possible that one day, ten School Leaders would simultaneously hold sway. By then, three thousand years later, ten School Leaders with profound cultivation would still be alive, while other Human Immortals with shallower cultivation would pass away as their years advanced. At that time, the number of True Immortals within the Taiping Dao would be about twenty, with ten of them being former and incumbent School Leaders. Then there would also be a vast force, grown and developed over three thousand years of successive leaders. Just think about it. Such a scene, how would the division inside the Taiping Dao look like? Everyone is a School Leader, even if I am the predecessor or the predecessor of predecessors, I¡¯m still your elder, and perhaps my cultivation is even higher than yours. Would you dare to control me, the current leader? When I issue a decree, would you, the junior School Leader, heed it? Disobey, and that would be disrespecting your elders and destroying the legacy. Obey, and where would the dignity of the incumbent leader stand? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Without dignity, how could a School Leader manage the sect, or exert authority over the world? ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï It¡¯s probably no different than being a clay idol or a rubber stamp. All these incidents have happened before in the long history of the Immortal Realm. The eventual outcomes were always accompanied by sect division or destruction due to internal strife; in short, none ended well. Precisely because the frequent change of School Leaders posed such a great risk, the leaders of various sects nowadays are usually appointed for life. From the day they take office, they serve until death, and they do not abdicate until they achieve seated meditation. The first School Leader of Qing Immortal Sect, the Changqing Immortal, served for sixty thousand years before falling. The second leader, Song Xiren¡¯s Senior, held the position for three thousand years until his lifespan ended. The third leader, Yao Baojuan, served for five thousand years before perishing on the Tianmen Battlefield. Now the fourth, Song Xiren, has already been in place for seven hundred years. If nothing unexpected happens, he would likely hold his position until death, likely for another four thousand years or so. Looking at the four leaders of Qing Immortal Sect, what does this tell us? This is orderly succession, internal stability. By contrast, the Taiping Dao with a change every three hundred or four hundred years, has turned its esteemed School Leader into a farce, what dignity is left! It¡¯s no wonder that Song Xiren upon hearing this news would bluntly say that the other party was following the path of strife. ¡°Don¡¯t worry about whether the Taiping Dao is on the path to self-destruction for now. As long as Qing Guanzi is alive, with this Earth Immortal suppressing them, those former leaders underneath him won¡¯t be able to cause any trouble as long as they have not become Earth Immortals. Once an Earth Immortal, with an elder¡¯s mediation, no storm would arise in the short term. At least a thousand years of peace should be guaranteed.¡± Although he felt that the Taiping Dao wasn¡¯t far from internal chaos, this ¡®not far¡¯ was from the perspective of an Earth Immortal. For an Earth Immortal with a lifespan of ten thousand years, a thousand years didn¡¯t really seem that long. And for an Immortal Sect that speaks of ten thousand years as the standard for transmission, a thousand years is even shorter. So for a short time, the Taiping Dao wouldn¡¯t descend into chaos, and even if it did, with its scale and foundation, it could maintain its legacy for a few thousand years. But all of these were matters for a thousand, or even several thousand years in the future. However, the change in leadership of the Taiping Dao was certainly a matter of great interest to the Qing Immortal Sect, as the attitude of their neighbors to the south was related to their own border security and was not something they could afford to take lightly. Therefore, after completing the above summary, Song Xiren continued, ¡°Now that a new School Leader has ascended in the Taiping Dao, with each new sovereign comes his courtiers; upon a new ruler assuming power, new policies are always issued. Judging from the succession of the former leader Lu, the Taiping Dao¡¯s change to a new leader likely indicates internal dissatisfaction with the incumbent¡¯s policies, prompting them to seek reforms by changing the leader. The first School Leader of Taiping Dao was impeached and fell from power because he was too intimately allied with the remnants of the Nine Spirits. The second leader, Lu, according to our spies within the Taiping Dao, was rumored to be impeached for displeasure due to his collection of benefits from us and those Nine Spirits remnants. This caused confusion among the sect disciples, who only recognized Qing Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates, with no regard for Taiping Dao. Having the Taiping Dao infiltrated like a sieve stirred dissatisfaction among other True Persons, leading to the impeachment of leader Lu. Now, viewing it from this angle, when this new Jade Sovereign takes office, his policy approach will likely be to purify the internal ranks and sever ties with us and the remnants of the Nine Spirits.¡± Upon reaching this point, Song Xiren felt a mix of complex emotions, both reassured and indescribably uneasy. The plan to corrode and infiltrate the Taiping Dao had been personally set and executed by him. And the effectiveness of the implementation was evident; the news of the Taiping Dao changing leaders had barely spread before he learned of the internal reasons the very next day. It showed that the Taiping Dao was truly infiltrated like a sieve, utterly incapable of keeping secrets. In other words, Lu Yuan¡¯s downfall could be said to have been directly and indirectly caused by them. A School Leader who could be easily won over and bought with money had just been brought down by them. Chapter 1419 - Chapter 1419 Chapter 556 The Third Change School Leader_3 ?Chapter 1419: Chapter 556: The Third Change School Leader_3 Chapter 1419: Chapter 556: The Third Change School Leader_3 Then, they replaced him with someone determined to reform, to conduct an internal purge, and to change the governing policies to possibly antagonize the new School Leader. ¡°What is this all about?¡± And yet, they couldn¡¯t speak a word against it. Because, from the perspective of Taiping Dao, no one could ignore such chaos within the sect. Otherwise, if all the sect disciples were to side with Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, what would Taiping Dao stand for? Would it belong to the Taiping or to Changqing and Jiuzhou? Such matters concerning the legacy of the sect were beyond negotiation. And the people inside Changqing Immortal Sect had their own skeletons in the closet and dared not say much. If they really dared to meddle too much, it would essentially be an excessive provocation, forcing Taiping Dao into warfare with them. Once the news got out, they would be the target of public scorn and revulsion. Although Song Xiren had thick skin, it wasn¡¯t enough for him to bully others, snatch their properties and then claim that he was doing them a favor. Besides, no one would believe him even if he said so. And importantly, they had already committed their actions, Taiping Dao knew about it and had thus made a targeted response. Now, the matter was how to handle this situation. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï ¡°School Leader, Taiping Dao is fully aware of our actions. At this point, denying or hiding is hardly possible. The best course of action would be to send a Messenger to congratulate their new School Leader on his ascension and express our goodwill. First, let¡¯s stabilize Taiping Dao and maintain our current relations,¡± he suggested. Below, Yang Jihua began to offer strategies: ¡°I am willing to go to Taiping to gauge the attitude there and shape our future strategies.¡± Given Yang Jihua¡¯s history, during the past two School Leaders of Taiping Dao, he had been sent there numerous times and had even fought side by side with them, sharing a deep relationship. In some ways, he was regarded as a friendly foreign guest by Taiping Dao, a friend across two realms, nearly as close to them as their own people. Now that the third School Leader of Taiping Dao had come into power, sending him was most appropriate. Taiping Dao might act against other members of Changqing Immortal Sect, but they would definitely spare Yang Jihua; it was all about face. ¡°Good, then you go to Taiping Dao to test the waters,¡± Upon hearing his nephew volunteer, Song Xiren instantly approved and directly commissioned him: ¡°You will serve as our Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s Messenger, attend the succession ceremony of Taiping Dao¡¯s School Leader, and gather intelligence. I will prepare a generous gift for you to bring as both a congratulatory offering and an apology.¡± When Lu Yuan had initially taken office, Changqing Immortal Sect had brought a significant gift, which had won them the friendship of the counterpart. And then, Changqing Immortal Sect began to infiltrate the Taiping Dao, corrupting them through and through. Although the current efforts of Jade Brocade were to purge any foreign spies from both within and without Taiping Dao, suppressing the infiltration of Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, offering gifts was never frowned upon. Bribing someone into silence was still a favorable gamble. If they could resolve this disaster with some wealth, it would undoubtedly be a great joy for Changqing Immortal Sect. And if they could further corrupt this new School Leader, that would be even better. Of course, the likelihood was low. But that didn¡¯t hinder Song Xiren from attempting. Without trying, who could predict the outcome? After all, the worst outcome was still better than not offering a gift; so, there was no need for hesitation. ¡°Yes, I understand,¡± Yang Jihua nodded in agreement. He was very familiar with these dealings, having personally been the chief in corrupting Taiping Dao for the past centuries. Doing it again now would be easy for him. ¡°That¡¯s settled then, you may go and prepare.¡± Song Xiren waved his hand, dismissing everyone around him. After Yang Jihua left, the hall was left with only him sitting on the empty School Leader throne, and he couldn¡¯t help but sigh. ¡°Taiping Dao, Taiping Dao, when I initially allowed them to establish themselves in the Southern Domain, was it a mistake or not? But now, it¡¯s useless to dwell on it. At the moment, I should first contemplate how to smoothly get through three thousand years. As long as we endure these three thousand years, my Changqing Immortal Sect will be able to recover its vitality. Even if the Taiping Dao and the remnants of the Nine Spirits join forces, what fear would I have?¡± The Changqing Immortal Sect held nearly two-thirds of the Changqing Domain; with such a massive size, all it needed was to drag out the time. Relying on its foundation, it could slowly wear down the other two Immortal Sects. That was precisely why. Song Xiren, now, wished most that no turmoil would arise in the Changqing Domain again. Any disturbance would disrupt the recovery process of the Changqing Immortal Sect, bringing unpredictable results to the current situation. As the one with shoes on, as the person currently controlling the most benefits, Song Xiren, of course, did not want to see those barefoota€¡±Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou Immortal Gatea€¡±stir up trouble. Thus, upon hearing that Taiping Dao had changed their School Leader and would likely become hostile towards him, He not only didn¡¯t think about how to stop any targeted actions, but his immediate thought was to spend money to pacify. This might seem somewhat cowardly, but it was the most convenient and cost-effective option for the Changqing Immortal Sect at the moment. Otherwise, could you really fight a battle against Taiping Dao? Let¡¯s not talk about whether you could win. Even if you could win, after one battle, the Changqing Immortal Sect would likely be extinguished too. If it meant dragging down his sworn enemies, those remnants of the Nine Spirits to their deaths, Song Xiren could reluctantly accept it, as it would also mean avenging a great enmity. But as for Taiping Dao, with no grievance or enmity, why bother? Thinking about possibly benefiting his enemies in the end made him feel even worse. ¡°Stabilize, first stabilize this time period, time is on my side.¡± Song Xiren clenched his teeth, suppressing his frustration. After hastily addressing the changes in Taiping Dao. Elsewhere, reactions to this matter also stirred countless discussions and responses. Among them, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, just like Changqing Immortal Sect, responded immediately, sending a Messenger to probe the attitude of the new School Leader. The remaining unrelated neighboring forces also, amidst shock, cursed the Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, disgusted and despised by their unscrupulous actions. Taiping Dao was such a good Immortal Sect, yet it was bullied by these two to the point of almost splitting internally, even having to appoint a new School Leader. Such major events were all thanks to those two sects. The impression of the Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate worsened among the various Immortal Sects. Meanwhile, alongside their condemnations, they also started to inspect their own sects to see if there were spies from other sects or signs of such schisms. The tragic state of Taiping Dao instantly alerted many Immortal Sects, making them start to be vigilant. Amidst all the sympathy and sighs, the future of Taiping Dao also garnered much attention. Many were speculating whether Taiping Dao could stabilize and reorganize internally. What exactly was the character of this new Jade Sovereign, and what were his policy directions? ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Could he fulfill his responsibilities? If this Jade Sovereign also failed, then maybe, in two or three hundred years, Taiping Dao would have to appoint a new School Leader again. If truly so, then Taiping Dao having changed four School Leaders in a thousand years would be unprecedented in the history of the Immortal Realm. If it really happened, and was spread widely, no matter the final outcome for Taiping Dao, it would be destined to be ¡®recorded in history.¡¯ Because of this, the succession of the School Leader in Taiping Dao, along with the story of three changes of School Leaders, suddenly captivated countless people¡¯s interest, spreading far and wide. Chapter 1420 - Chapter 1420 Chapter 557 Yang Yu and the Second Immortal ?Chapter 1420: Chapter 557 Yang Yu and the Second Immortal Chapter 1420: Chapter 557 Yang Yu and the Second Immortal Outside, when the succession of the School Leader of Taiping Dao caused ripples in the world, Inside the Taiping Tao Sect, certain undercurrents were also stirring. Little Spring Peak. In recent years, Taiping Dao had given rise to quite a few new True Immortals. Among these new True Immortals, the most famous native of the Southern Domain was naturally led by Master Yang, who became immortal three hundred years ago. Master Yang, whose real name was Yang Xiuan, originated from the Yang Family of Wind Thunder Fortress in the former Qingyang Country. But ever since the Yang Family merged into Taiping Dao, the name Wind Thunder Fortress naturally ceased to exist. However, the entity that was the Yang Family still existed within Taiping Dao. Over the years, as Yang Xiuan achieved the status of a True Immortal, the influence of the Yang Family within Taiping Dao gradually prospered. To this day, the Yang Family boasted over a hundred members as inner disciples of Taiping Dao, and three of them were listed among the true inheritors. Moreover, as the family head, Yang Xiuan, already a True Immortal, created a faction within Taiping Dao with his own clansmen as the backbone. Many of the Yang Family, as well as cultivators who had married into the family and some disciples who had gathered for the sake of fame, totaling several hundreds, now gathered under Yang Xiuan¡¯s leadership. And these people were mockingly referred to as ¡°Yang Family¡± by many disciples within the sect. From this title, it wasn¡¯t difficult to discern the disdain that many disciples who were loyal to Taiping Dao had at their core. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?0 They considered the Yang Family to be leeches, now parasitizing within Taiping Dao and slowly displaying signs of usurpation. Nonetheless, facing this potential danger, many people were anxious and concerned. But the higher-ups of Taiping Dao had remained inactive, instead watching these phenomena spread and fester, to the severe disappointment and outrage of many. Especially, the ¡°Yang Family,¡± in the past few years, had also received support and solicitation from the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates of the Western Domain, absorbing many disciples inclined towards the Jiuzhou of the West. The faction¡¯s momentum became increasingly unstoppable. It caused even greater concern. The wise and loyal among Taiping Dao grew more worried, and many directly sought an audience with the School Leader to state the maladies, only to be met with disregard and reprimand. So, even more members of the sect lamented the situation. They could only watch helplessly as Taiping Dao grew more prosperous but internally more fragmented, falling into a vicious cycle of stronger growth yet mounting peril. Slowly waiting for the sect to head towards ruin. However, when all hope seemed lost, A glimmer emerged. The higher-ups of Taiping Dao finally took notice of the chaos within the sect and initiated a response. The irresponsible School Leader, who only had his sights on making money, was finally deposed by the upper echelons. A new School Leader, carrying a weighty responsibility, was about to take office to steer a reform within the sect. For a moment, countless disciples loyal to the sect cheered enthusiastically and spread the news, feeling a surge of exhilaration. But at the same time, some calculative individuals began to panic. When the news that a new School Leader was about to succeed spread, Yu Shipei, a part of the sect¡¯s high echelons and someone who had learned of this only just now, rushed to find his senior brother. ¡°Elder Brother Yang.¡± After being received into the mountain, Yu Shipei saw Yang Xiuan and, with a hint of panic on his face, quickly asked, ¡°Elder Brother, have you heard the sect is getting a new School Leader?¡± Yu Shipei was a True Immortal who had broken through a hundred years ago, and in terms of seniority, he was one of the most junior among the True Immortals of Taiping Dao. Moreover, he was said to be a True Immortal independently nurtured by Taiping Dao since he was a child. But in reality, his origins and background were highly dubious. ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï Because Yu Shipei came from Leshan Country, yes, the very Leshan which, along with Anyang, was one of the two countries that had been reluctantly ceded by the Changqing Immortal Sect under the coercion of Taiping Dao. He joined the local branch of Taiping Dao in the fifth year after Leshan Country was ceded. Because of his superior innate talent, he was highly regarded by the local branch and received focused cultivation. After cultivating for a hundred years, he managed to Gather the Three Qi. Thus, he was ordained as an inner disciple and recommended to the Mi Yun Mountain headquarter of the sect for further cultivation. Another three hundred years passed, and Yu Shipei¡¯s cultivation advanced swiftly, quickly reaching the realm of Five Qi Towards Primordial, ready for a try at breaking through to the Immortal Realm. In accordance with the sect¡¯s customs, he traveled abroad to collect various Immortal Materials, accumulate contributions, and prepared to exchange a nation¡¯s Qi Luck for his breakthrough. The place he chose to travel was within the jurisdiction of Changqing Immortal Sect. And after just over a hundred years of travel, Yu Shipei had collected several rare Immortal Materials, offering them to the sect and meeting the contribution requirements to exchange for a nation¡¯s Qi Luck. Without hesitation, once his contributions were sufficient, he immediately made the exchange, choosing the Qi Luck of Leshan Country, hoping to be aided by the Qi Luck of his homeland in his breakthrough. Perhaps he really did receive the favor of his hometown. After only closed-door cultivation for a bit more than sixty years, Yu Shipei emerged and successfully became a True Immortal. And thus, after Yang Xiuan, he became the second native of the Changqing Domain to achieve True Immortality within Taiping Dao. However, there were always rumors among the sect regarding his breakthrough. They said that Yu Shipei¡¯s breakthrough didn¡¯t only leverage the Qi Luck of Leshan Country, but also that of another country close to Leshan within the jurisdiction of Changqing Immortal Secta€¡±Bi Yuan Country. Furthermore, when he was traveling within Changqing Immortal Sect territory, the Immortal Materials he obtained were supported and funded directly by the Changqing Immortal Sect. Otherwise, why would he alone encounter fortune after fortune while so many disciples who traveled within Changqing Immortal Sect territory over the years came back with little to show? Chapter 1421 - Chapter 1421 Chapter 557 Yang and Yu, the Two Immortals_2 ?Chapter 1421: Chapter 557 Yang and Yu, the Two Immortals_2 Chapter 1421: Chapter 557 Yang and Yu, the Two Immortals_2 But only after a little over a hundred years, had he gathered so many Immortal Materials to directly break through to immortality? In addition, the place where Yu Shipei originated was under the domain of the former Qing Immortal Sect, and the time he joined Taiping Tao Sect happened to coincide with the change of rulers in Leshan Country. It was hard not to suspect whether Yu Shipei was actually a spy deliberately planted within Taiping Tao Sect by Qing Immortal Sect. However, such suspicions circulated only in private. All sorts of claims were mere conjecture, with no solid evidence. And Yu Shipei had dutifully and responsibly carried out tasks for the sect over the years without making any mistakes. Based on assumptions alone, it was of course impossible to take down a True Immortal. Thus, this Master Yu continued to live a carefree life within Taiping Tao Sect, and like Yang Xiuan, he had also won over a group of cultivators from Leshan and Anyang countries, forming a faction of the Eastern Territory. And centering around this Eastern Territory faction, he began to recruit cultivators born in Xiaye and Jiuchuan countries, creating a regional interest group that came to be known as ¡°Yu¡¯s Faction,¡± which together with Yang Xiuan¡¯s ¡°Yang¡¯s Faction,¡± were regarded as the two major scourges within Taiping Tao Sect. Such actions by Yu Shipei were actually a major reason why others suspected him of being a Qing Immortal Sect spy. Otherwise, why would he promptly establish a ¡°Yu¡¯s Faction¡± leaning towards Qing Immortal Sect, when Yang Xiuan had already formed a ¡°Yang¡¯s Faction¡± leaning towards Nine Provinces? Moreover, the two factions were constantly battling each other. Yang Xiuan and Yu Shipei, when meeting face to face, would always sneer and mock each other with chilly sarcasm, showing no goodwill and being as incompatible as fire and water. By their actions, weren¡¯t they treating Taiping Tao Sect as a battleground for the rivalry between the Nine Provinces Immortal Sect and Qing Immortal Sect? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï They turned what was once a great Southern Domain sect into a place filled with suspicious gloom, where members doubted each other, disciples¡¯ hearts were estranged, creating a chaotic mess. But, those were the past events. In normal times, both factions, each with its own inclination, naturally fought tooth and nail. But when a blade hung overhead, not discriminating and about to sweep both factions away in one stroke. Faced with the rumor of an overwhelmingly forceful new School Leader. Yu Shipei could no longer care about much else, and after hearing the news, sought out Yang Xiuan to discuss how to respond. ¡°I am aware.¡± Looking at the frantic Yu Shipei, Yang Xiuan maintained a calm demeanor and lightly spoke, ¡°What¡¯s the rush, Junior Brother Yu? The new School Leader is ascending to his position; we just have to congratulate him, what is there to fear?¡± Toward Yu Shipei, Yang Xiuan refrained from being sarcastic. In the past, the two of them had only clashed over conflicting interests and differing stances, fighting until they were red in the face. But now it was a matter of life and death, with both trapped on the same tightrope; any internal strife would truly be self-destructive. Yet, upon hearing these words, Yu Shipei was still not reassured and remained anxious: ¡°Of course I am aware that we need to offer congratulations to the new School Leader as he takes office, but why exactly is the new School Leader here, Elder Brother Yang surely knows, doesn¡¯t he?¡± Yang Xiuan glanced at him and calmly replied, ¡°To purge the chaos within the sect, to strike against the spies among us, and to mend the suspicions among the disciples. The new School Leader ascends to address these matters.¡± Yu Shipei hastily said, ¡°If Elder Brother understands this, why can you sit here so at ease?¡± Yang Xiuan asked with curiosity, ¡°Why shouldn¡¯t I be at ease? If the new School Leader wishes to clean up the chaos within the sect, that¡¯s good; Taiping Tao Sect has indeed become overly tumultuous, and as the School Leader seeks to resolve it, it¡¯s only right for us to cooperate. As for rooting out the spies within the sect, I am not a spy, what would I be afraid of? And if the above two points are addressed well, the suspicions among the sect¡¯s disciples will naturally be eliminated. Brotherly affection and harmony will be restored among the fellow disciples, which is a blessing; we certainly should support this. Junior Brother, why this urgency? Could it be you don¡¯t want to see these things resolved? Or could it be that you are the spy?¡± Yang Xiuan asked with a slightly accusing tone. Unlike Yu Shipei, who was riddled with suspicions, Yang Xiuan¡¯s background was clear and transparent, fearing no investigation. The reason he had formed a faction in the past was to support his clan, and since the previous School Leader Lu did not object, he created ¡°Yang¡¯s Faction¡± for his benefit. At the heart of this logic was helping the clan prosper while using the clan¡¯s influence to secure more resources for his future cultivation. Essentially, it was about kinship and cultivation. As for leading ¡°Yang¡¯s Faction¡± towards Nine Provinces Immortal Sect, that naturally related to their core basea€¡±it was located adjacent to the Western Domain and Nine Provinces, which also provided benefits. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï And in Yang Xiuan¡¯s heart, there lay a touch of gratitude. Yes, gratitude. Initially, Yang Xiuan had contributed all of his accumulated stores to the sect, obtaining a large number of Contribution Points, but it still fell short of exchanging for a country¡¯s fate. At that time, he decided to travel outside to find additional means. But with so many cultivators adventuring in the outside world, and local Immortal Sects acting as the powers in their regions, thousands of cultivators under the sky all hoped to strike their fortunes by exploring mysteries and hidden places. Such adventures for treasure were competitive and scarce; why should you be so lucky? Yang Xiuan had barely been outside for a few decades before he was able to find a vast amount of treasures, amassing enough Contribution Points. It could not have been just good luck; of course, some assistance from outsiders was part of it. For instance, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, which neighbored his territory and with whom he had some contact during his time in Wind Thunder Fortress from the Yang Family, proactively reached out in his time of need, offering their help. It was with Jiuzhou¡¯s help that Yang Xiuan was able to smoothly obtain Immortal Materials and with them exchange for a country¡¯s fate, thus breaking through to True Immortal status. It could not be denied that Jiuzhou played a significant role in his ascension to immortality. Chapter 1422 - Chapter 1422 Chapter 557 Yang and Yu, the Two Immortals_3 ?Chapter 1422: Chapter 557 Yang and Yu, the Two Immortals_3 Chapter 1422: Chapter 557 Yang and Yu, the Two Immortals_3 Therefore, after he became an Immortal, he reciprocated generosity, holding a considerable favoritism towards the Nine Provinces. But these biases were all within controllable limits. He did not betray the interests of his sect or disclose its core secrets to the Nine Provinces; he simply fostered good relations with the cultivators there, along with the disciples who depended on him. And these actions were openly supported or tacitly allowed by the previous two School Leaders. In short, Yang Xiuan had not acted inappropriately. Even if the sect were to investigate his actions, at most they would give a verbal reprimand after looking into it; they couldn¡¯t really do anything to him. Now that the sect does not allow disciples to have too obvious an external bias or to form cliques that cause actual divisions within the sect, then he would just stop showing such preferences. Over the years, he had helped the Nine Provinces a lot and had repaid the kindness of being given treasures. As for not forming cliques, this too was possible. After becoming an Immortal, with a lifespan of three thousand years, Yang Xiuan¡¯s sense of Clan loyalty was not as strong as it had been before his ascension. After all, Immortals and mortals are really two different species, with two different sets of ideals. The lifespan of a mortal, even that of a cultivator among mortals, is far too short when compared to a True Immortal. Even cultivators who have achieved the state of ¡®Five Qi Towards Primordial¡¯ only have lifespans equivalent to a quarter of that of a True Immortal. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï And if we were to talk about ordinary mortals, over the course of a True Immortal¡¯s life, his descendants might propagate through a hundred or two hundred generations. With such continuous propagation through generations, aside from sharing a surname, among those who claim to be descendants, how much of their blood is truly his? Under these circumstances, as each close relative dies, even if they come from the same Clan, it becomes very hard to feel much for the descendants who are separated by countless generations. In contrast, it is indeed the cultivation of his own sect and those fellow disciples advancing together on the Daoist Path, and those mentors who educated him diligently, who are closer to him. Because they can accompany him from the beginning to the end, their relationship spanning his long life, which is far more important than mere kinship. If they had to choose between their Clan and their sect, most would probably choose the latter. And now, Yang Xiuan, just over a thousand years old, had already seen his children¡¯s lifespans come to an end. However, some from his grandchildren¡¯s generation and great-grandchildren¡¯s generation were still alive. With these somewhat close descendants around, he wasn¡¯t completely cut off from familial affection. But without direct offspring, relying solely on some grandchildren, it is difficult to say whether his heart could be completely tied down. After all, he had only been the head of the Yang Family for three to four hundred years. But as a disciple of the Taiping Dao, he had been one for seven hundred years. Between the two, which has a higher sense of belonging is, of course, his life as a disciple of the Taiping Dao. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Now, if the sect wants to reform and strengthen itself, as someone who has deeply benefited from the sect, and even relied on the sect to become an Immortal, Yang Xiuan certainly has no reason to refuse. In fact, deep down, he might even be pleased. The chaos within the sect, although he had played a part in it, was the result of the overall turmoil, a reluctant conformity. It is not that he truly wanted to bring down the Taiping Dao. It is important to distinguish between primary and secondary contradictions. Therefore, in light of all this, Yang Xiuan felt some remorse in his heart, but only minor remorse, with no great regret. Deep inside, he had never thought of betraying the sect. The sect had shown him kindness by nurturing him and affection by guiding him on his Daoist Path. These kindnesses are enough for him to spend a lifetime repaying. How could he possibly betray them! However, Yang Xiuan could guarantee that he himself had a clear conscience, but as for this Junior Brother Yu, how he really felt was quite another matter. The countless rumors from the outside world, he knew them all too well. Compared to himself, who came from a clean background, Yu Shipei was obviously full of dubious points, with an origin that seriously warranted suspicion. Especially now. In the face of the sect¡¯s reform, this person was so flustered, it looked more and more like he had a problem, hiding a big secret in his heart. Thinking of this. Yang Xiuan¡¯s heart gave rise to vigilance, and as he looked at the other, he wondered whether he should take him down and then send him to the new School Leader for interrogation. ¡°Elder Brother Yang, how can you slander me like this?¡± Faced with Yang Xiuan¡¯s heart-piercing words, Yu Shipei¡¯s complexion changed dramatically, his face showing anger, ¡°The sect has nurtured me, plucked me from among mortals, brought me back to the sect, taught me the Dao Law, only then did I have today. I am not without feelings, how could I possibly be emotionless? The great kindness of the sect in this life and this world is difficult to repay, how dare I betray it? The reason I¡¯m panicked is merely because previously I was blinded by selfish desires, formed cliques, and fought with Elder Brother Yang, which led to the sect descending into this chaos. Conscious of my past wrongs, afraid the sect would blame and punish me, I wanted to consult with Elder Brother on how to redress my faults. But instead, Elder Brother, you harbor such suspicions against me, what do you take your Junior Brother for?¡± Yu Shipei showed a tragic and indignant expression, a look of someone who was unreasonably suspected and overwhelmed with outrage. And Yang Xiuan, watching his expression, stared carefully for a long time but still struggled to discern whether the other was acting or truly showing his emotions. After consideration, he had to let it go. Whether the other was treacherous or loyal, it was up to the new School Leader to investigate and deal with it. Even if the School Leader didn¡¯t care, there were many fellow disciples and uncles above, and higher up was Elder Taishang, right? It was not his place, as a mere Cultivator from the lower ranks of the sect, to meddle. Upon this thought, his face finally softened, showing a hint of apology, ¡°Junior Brother, do not take offense, it was Elder Brother¡¯s haste and panic that made me speak without filter. If I have hurt you, Junior Brother, I hope you can forgive me.¡± ¡°I know there are many rumors within the sect, causing many to doubt me, but my heart has always been true, always with the sect. Elder Brother having these doubts is quite normal; I don¡¯t blame you. But the sincerity of my heart is as clear as daylight, and the sun and moon can bear witness. In time, Time and Heaven will prove my heartfelt loyalty to the sect.¡± Yu Shipei, speaking from a heart filled with sorrow, expressed his grievances and then cried out, ¡°It¡¯s just that I think of the sect, long to be close to the sect, but the sect has never given me the chance. During this change of School Leader, such a major event, you and I were the last to learn, along with those disciples who were of the same batch. As True Immortals of the sect, are we not even to be consulted about the change of School Leader? The sect treats us as though we are outsiders. But for major issues, several successive School Leaders and the hidden elders within the sect discuss among themselves, yet we who are from the local Changqing Domain are kept out. We are all disciples of the Taiping Dao, so why are we treated differently? This change of School Leader, too, brought forth a School Leader from the hidden veins that I had never heard of, how many more things within the sect are being kept from us? How much longer must we wait, and what must we do, to earn the sect¡¯s trust?¡± Yu Shipei voiced his dissatisfaction, venting years of resentment towards the sect. And as Yang Xiuan listened to him speak this way, his demeanor also changed, feeling a pang in his heart. A knot that lay across the hearts of all disciples of the Taiping Dao was revealed in these words. Chapter 1423 - Chapter 1423 Chapter 558 The Hidden Vein Divide ?Chapter 1423: Chapter 558: The Hidden Vein Divide Chapter 1423: Chapter 558: The Hidden Vein Divide Among the many disciples of Taiping Dao, the Inner and Outer Sect disciples, who were at the bottom, might not have noticed anything. However, the true disciples and even more so the True Immortals could sense, to a greater or lesser extent, that there was an invisible barrier separating them from a closer relationship with the sect. And this barrier was the hidden lineage disciples. Indeed, with the successive emergence of Jin Qingyue, Lu Yuan, and the recently appointed School Leader Jade Brocade, who were all True Immortals, it had become known to the world that within the Taiping Tao Sect there was a hidden lineage unknown to others. These hidden lineage disciples all possessed exceptional innate talent and extraordinary strength. If they did not come forth, they remained unnoticed, but once they did, they were regarded as True Immortals. And the higher-ups within the Taiping Tao Sect only trusted these secretive disciples. Otherwise, they wouldn¡¯t have appointed these previously unknown hidden lineage disciples as School Leaders for two consecutive terms. In fact, it might not have just been the last two School Leaders. Given the wretched state of Taiping Dao when they first arrived in the Changqing Domain, without a single disciple below them, only a few True Immortals provided support. It was hard not to suspect that the original sect of Taiping Dao had suffered some kind of catastrophe and had been destroyed. And if the sect had been destroyed, then these disciples who had fled to the Changqing Domain probably did not wield identities that were entirely legitimate. Most likely, they were Immortal Sect disciples specifically hidden in the shadows, responsible for reestablishing the Tao inheritance in the event of great disaster. Such hidden lineage disciples were established by almost every Immortal Sect of any significant scale. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? They aimed for the strategy of ¡°a crafty rabbit has three burrows,¡± always keeping an ace up their sleeve. Just like the Taiping Dao now, which quickly reestablished itself after the destruction of its original sect and laid down a significant foundation in the Southern Domain. From this perspective, the likes of Yi Dancheng, Che Shidao, and Qing Guanzi were probably hidden lineage disciples as well. Like Jin Qingyue, Lu Yuan, and Jade Brocade, they were from the hidden lineage and part of the same group. As for the sect established by these hidden lineage disciples in the Southern Domain, it was nothing more than a shell constructed for the purpose of listing on the market. Think about it. Those hidden lineage disciples hailed from the Outer Territory, and they might even come from another Region Continent. Indeed, after the rise of Taiping Dao, many were curious about this sect that suddenly appeared, especially the two major Daoist sects of the Nine Provinces and the Changqing Domain, who paid even more attention to this neighbor. However, years of investigation by various forces didn¡¯t reveal any major sects with Earth Immortals in East China Continent that had been destroyed. Within a continent or a domain, the demise of any major Earth Immortal sect would be known to all, and its destruction would be enough to shake an entire continent. If such a thing had happened, the Immortal Sects of East China Continent would have certainly heard about it. Since they hadn¡¯t heard anything about it, there could only be one answer: Taiping Dao was not an Immortal Sect native to this continent but had fled from another continent to seek refuge here. Only this could explain why nobody had ever heard of Taiping Dao before. Similarly. ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Following this logic, one could also clearly explain why there was such an invisible barrier within the Taiping Tao Sect. Those hidden lineage disciples who came from the same continent and were fellow countrymen naturally felt closer to each other. They were the true ¡°own people.¡± And the Taiping Dao that was established in the Southern Domain was to those hidden lineage disciples merely an assembly of strangers from a foreign land. Even if these strangers were disciples they had recruited themselves, they ultimately lacked that certain closeness compared to their countrymen. And maybe even less so. In the eyes of those hidden lineage disciples, were the people of Taiping Dao now truly considered part of their sect? Let¡¯s not forget, Taiping Dao was established by a group of hidden lineage disciples who had fled catastrophe. They had not hesitated to leave their own continent, traveling to the far-off Donghua Continent, where they changed their names and forged a new identity, reestablishing a Taiping Dao. Their purpose, was it not to evade their former enemies? Since they were evading enemies, those enemies would certainly be searching for them. Although Taiping Dao has escaped to Donghua Continent and even reestablished its Mountain Gate here, who can guarantee that those enemies would not find them? It goes without saying the strength of an enemy capable of threatening a sect with such a powerful hidden lineage. If those enemies were to come seeking them out, the current strength of Taiping Dao would stand no chance. So, for these lost dogs. The present was nothing more than a temporary rest. If a formidable enemy were to come chasing, they¡¯d likely once again abandon their current foundations and continue their escape. In this way, Taiping Dao was nothing more than a disposable tool. Its only function now was to use Taiping Dao to control the Southern Domain, and to use this territory as leverage to help the hidden lineage disciples who had managed to escape rebuild their strength and accumulate resources. This was a tool to aid in cultivation. For such a tool, the owner could not possibly invest any real emotion; at best, they would maintain it well when it was of use, and perhaps upgrade it in due time. Nothing more than that was wishful thinking. Thus, considering all this, the existence of an invisible barrier within Taiping Dao actually made a lot of sense. The four thousand disciples within the sect, including Yang Xiuan and Yu Shipei, were also just tools, easily disposable when necessary. So when Taiping Dao decided it was time for a change of School Leader, those from the hidden lineage would simply discuss it among themselves and make the decision. Chapter 1424 - Chapter 1424 Chapter 558 The Hidden Veins Part_2 ?Chapter 1424: Chapter 558: The Hidden Veins Part_2 Chapter 1424: Chapter 558: The Hidden Veins Part_2 Yang Xiuan and Yu Shipei, two True Immortals who would be part of the absolute upper echelon in any sect, possess both the right to make proposals and decisions. Yet they didn¡¯t catch even a hint of a warning breeze, being directly overlooked by others. This kind of attitude toward True Immortals is naturally an immense disrespect, even an insult. In any other Immortal Sect, such an act could lead to estrangement and disloyalty, or even incite internal strife. But if one sees them as mere tools, what then of True Immortals? Good tools need no thoughts of their own, they simply obey their master¡¯s commands, and perform their designated roles. Do you also wish to offer suggestions to your master, turn the heavens upside down? This discriminatory treatment, even outright prejudice when practiced against any True Immortal, is intolerable. It was precisely because of this that when Yu Shipei lamented in sorrow and indignation, Yang Xiuan also felt a deep chill in his heart, thoroughly displeased. He did harbor some personal ambitions, but he was also supportive of the sect and desired to contribute to its prosperity. Yet he had the will to serve, with no path to do so. The Immortal Sect did not need your strategies or suggestions; being a good tool and following orders was all that was required. Anyone would feel aggrieved being met with such cold treatment despite their burning zeal. But what¡¯s more perverse is that this exact situation had befallen the two of them. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï This Yu Shipei, it¡¯s hard to say whether he is loyal or treacherous, but if he indeed betrayed the sect, the reasons behind it can hardly be disentangled from being treated as an outsider. After all, if the sect itself doesn¡¯t regard you as one of its own, why should you foolishly remain loyal to the sect? Am I not considered an outsider? Then I might as well outright join the outsiders. The current chaos within Taiping Dao is hard to separate from these factors. The policies led by those of the hidden lineage are truly disheartening. ¡°What nonsense are you talking about, junior brother?¡± However, despite the bitterness in his heart, owing much to the sect, Yang Xiuan couldn¡¯t be swayed by a few words. He immediately reproached, ¡°The alternation of the School Leader is naturally up to Elder Taishang and the other senior masters. How could it be the turn of us juniors to interject? What, do you also wish to rule over the seniors? If the elders in the sect haven¡¯t let us in on the discussion, they must have their reasons. As juniors, we should simply obey and not harbor resentment.¡± Yang Xiuan still defended the sect. The sect had merely not let him participate in the highest decisions, not included him in the core circle. But all the other cultivation support he received was exactingly provided, without any shortfall. His achievements today could not have been made without the help of the sect. How could he bear to resent the sect for such trifling grievances? Moreover, his words were not without reason. Although there was a divide between those of the hidden lineage and the disciples of Taiping Dao, the seniors among them truly possessed great seniority. Whether it is Jin Qingyue, the Jade Sovereign, or the incumbents, each one is at least a Mid-level Human Immortal. Those with such cultivation have lived for over a thousand, perhaps even two thousand years. By virtue of their Lifespans alone, they are our seniors. As juniors, even for the sake of filial piety, we cannot judge our elders or decide their fate, this simply isn¡¯t right. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The sect not informing these two True Immortals, while it contains elements of distrust, also conforms to the Rites. Cultivation may strive for freedom, but it also emphasizes respecting teachers and valuing the way. No one wants their disciples to be those who betray their masters and ancestors. Even from this perspective, they couldn¡¯t blame the sect. ¡°Senior brother is correct, it was my lapse.¡± Hearing Yang Xiuan¡¯s reprimand, Yu Shipei realized the impropriety in his words and hurriedly admitted his mistake. But despite his admission, he could not help but add, ¡°However, senior brother mentioned that we shouldn¡¯t criticize our seniors, as it would violate the tradition of respecting teachers and valuing the way, which is true. But as time flows, our senior uncles will eventually pass on. After a few hundred or a thousand years, when the leadership of the School Leader is passed down again, won¡¯t it be the turn of the next generation? By that time, are we also not concerned? Should we also not be informed?¡± Yu Shipei clearly harbored deep resentment for being excluded from the core circle, immensely unwilling to accept it. Even now, despite invoking the seniority of the uncles to pressure him, he had not given up. Yang Xiuan furrowed his brow, glanced at his junior brother who continued to spout grievances, and interrupted, ¡°That will be an issue for later. Trust that when the senior masters gradually emerge from seclusion, allowing more Talented Scholars to support the sect, one day the current system will be reformed. By then, we might also be valued by the sect, put to use by the seniors. And with all this talk, junior brother, are you implying you bear grudges against the seniors, the School Leaders?¡± Yang Xiuan¡¯s tone was stern, eyeing the resentful face before him; it seemed as though if the other made any wrong response, he was ready to apprehend him and deliver him to the sect. After all, Yu Shipei¡¯s continuous outbursts today were indeed audacious, lacking respect for his superiors, rebellious and impious. How it looked, he didn¡¯t seem like someone loyal. Now he doubted more than ever that the other might be a spy from the mortal realm. Seeking him out at this time, it was likely that he was pegged as a spy from the Nine Provinces, trying to collude. His current words were most likely a probe. If he agreed, perhaps even grander schemes would soon follow. But since his response just now was too blunt, the other probably sensed that he was not on the same side. Now trying to make him slip up seemed somewhat difficult. Chapter 1425 - Chapter 1425 Chapter 558 The Hidden Veins Part_3 ?Chapter 1425: Chapter 558: The Hidden Veins Part_3 Chapter 1425: Chapter 558: The Hidden Veins Part_3 Indeed, upon hearing his words, Yu Shipei¡¯s expression changed, and he hurriedly said with a smile, ¡°Senior Brother is joking. The sect has been so kind to me, how could I harbor any resentment? It¡¯s just that I¡¯ve been yearning to serve the sect, yet unable to find the way, thus I spoke out of turn.¡± Yang Xiuan¡¯s face softened somewhat, ¡°Junior Brother wishes to serve the sect, and there is not a place where that cannot be done. How can you find no way? We should just wait quietly in our Cave Mansion, for the sect will have arrangements for us in the future. Why the rush?¡± ¡°Senior Brother is right, Junior Brother has learned his lesson.¡± Embarrassed upon hearing this, Yu Shipei quickly rose to his feet and performed a ritual bow, ¡°I¡¯m deeply enlightened by Senor Brother¡¯s instruction today, and my heart no longer harbors any doubts. Just as Senior Brother instructed, we disciples should just quietly await our elders¡¯ commands. To be diligent is already serving well. ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Since it¡¯s so, I won¡¯t impose any longer. I¡¯ll return to my Cave Mansion and wait for the sect¡¯s summons. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Speaking with Senior Brother today has cleared up many of my confusions. Junior Brother is profoundly grateful and thanks you, Senior Brother.¡± Yang Xiuan stood up, helped him to his feet, ¡°We are fellow disciples; why speak of such formalities? All is for the sect.¡± Afterward, he personally saw the other out of the Cave Mansion. Watching the departing figure of his Junior Brother, he muttered to himself, ¡°Junior Brother Yu, what are you truly thinking?¡± Thinking back on the scenes that had just unfolded, a wave of concern rose in Yang Xiuan¡¯s heart. This Junior Brother, who had always been a puzzle, seemed to truly harbor dual allegiances, just as the rumors said. With someone like this in the sect, could it truly remain peaceful in the future? Yang Xiuan was filled with melancholy. ¡°No, I must report this to the Sect Leader so that he is aware. Regardless of whether this Yu surnamed individual has a problem, it¡¯s best to take early precautions.¡± After much deliberation, he decided to set aside his personal safety for the sake of the sect¡¯s interests and to report the matter. As for his own safety, he couldn¡¯t care less. Just as he had said earlier, he could not repay the great kindness of the sect; at this moment, he could only sacrifice himself. With these thoughts, Yang Xiuan left his abode again, heading toward the School Leader¡¯s residence. Meanwhile, after departing, Yu Shipei flew a distance and couldn¡¯t help but stop his fleeing light to look back at the distant Little Spring Peak with an extremely ugly expression. ¡°Old coot, acting all high and mighty, do you really think you¡¯re some loyal retainer? Aren¡¯t you the same as me, forming cliques and taking bribes? Now you put on a self-righteous face but play the teacher to me, the sheer shamelessness.¡± He couldn¡¯t help but curse quietly. This encounter had been intended as a plea for help, to increase his influence; after all, with many on one¡¯s side, one can get through tough times. Who would have thought he¡¯d come away with nothing but frustration? Not only had he failed to achieve his goal, but he had also been thoroughly chastised and had lost all face. How could Yu Shipei not harbor resentment toward such treatment? At this moment, his hatred for Yang Xiuan, whom he had contended with for nearly a hundred years, had only deepened. And thinking of his current situation only unsettled him further. ¡°If you don¡¯t appreciate what is given to you, then let¡¯s see how well this loyal dog fares in the future!¡± With a cold huff, Yu Shipei flung his sleeve and flew towards his Cave Mansion on his fleeing light. Now, without being able to recruit allies and with a new School Leader about to take office, the first major crisis he would have to weather on his own. ¡­ ¡°Is that so? Junior Brother Yu sought you out, and even said such things?¡± Lu Yuan looked at Yang Xiuan, who had come to report, with a calm demeanor. ¡°Yes, School Leader, Junior Brother Yu had plenty of grievances when he visited my residence. It¡¯s not that I¡¯m trying to sow discord; it¡¯s just that based on his words and expressions, he is full of dissatisfaction. I¡¯m worried about what he might do, so I felt I had to report to the Sect Leader.¡± Yang Xiuan looked at the soon-to-be-former School Leader before him, with not a trace of disrespect on his face, showing utmost propriety. In truth, he naturally wanted to seek out the new School Leader. But that Jade Sovereign was shrouded in mystery, beyond the rumors that he was about to assume the position of School Leader, there was no further information available. So much so that he had no idea where to find him. Out of necessity, he had come to see Lu Yuan. Fortunately, although Lu Yuan¡¯s policies in recent years had led to the division within the Taiping Dao, it was undeniable that the strength of the Taiping Dao had skyrocketed during his four hundred years of rule. It was just a matter of people¡¯s hearts not being unified. In terms of contributions, he was second to none. Such a person surely couldn¡¯t have any issues, and there was no need to doubt his loyalty to the sect. He was after all one of the ¡®hidden lineage¡¯ people. Everyone in the sect could betray, but those of the hidden lineage would not, this much was beyond question. Thus, Yang Xiuan dared to come and report the matter to Lu Yuan. ¡°I¡¯ve taken note of this.¡± Lu Yuan looked deeply at Yang Xiuan below, nodded slightly, and then waved his hand, ¡°Enough, as for the issues concerning Nephew Yu, the sect will deal with it internally. You needn¡¯t worry further, you may leave now.¡± Yang Xiuan, hesitant upon hearing this, but after a glance into the Sect Leader¡¯s profound eyes, trembled slightly in his heart and bowed his head, ¡°Yes, your disciple obeys and will take his leave now.¡± After bowing, he left. Once he was gone, Lu Yuan sat in his original place, his face contemplative. ¡°One from the Nine Provinces, one from Changqing, and now one comes to me to accuse the other. Yang Xiuan and Yu Shipei, which of you is treacherous and which is loyal?¡± He muttered to himself. As the Sect Leader, he was of course clearly aware of the two major factions in the sect. The powers that backed these two had grown precisely because he had allowed them to expand. Now, with the news of the new School Leader¡¯s succession spreading, the two major factions immediately became agitated. There were even those who came running to report on the other. As for what Yang Xiuan had said, Lu Yuan struggled to ascertain whether it was true or false. Who can know the truth when hearts are hidden behind flesh? Unless one resorts to searching souls. ¡°Never mind, regardless of who is the spy, or if both are spies, they¡¯re just two Human Immortals and of no consequence. Let the Jade Brocade who is taking office slowly deal with their hearts.¡± Lu Yuan shook his head, unwilling to ponder further. The grand scheme of the Taiping Dao has always been in his hands. Even if those two Human Immortals, along with over a thousand of their disciples behind them, were to cause a commotion, how much of a stir could they really create? As long as his plans were carried out, with six Earth Immortals presiding over the sect and a righteous cause behind them, suppression would be effortless. These concerns were but trifling ailments. Unworthy of fear! The current unrest amongst the sect members, the anxiety of both major factions, the worries of Yang Xiuan and the others, in reality, are just the fears of those below. Lu Yuan had never taken these to heart. His previous indulgence was just to confuse the Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Now as he was about to close the net, it was time to start dealing with the small fish before capturing the big ones. Their role was fulfilled, and now there was no need for their existence to continue, influencing the hearts within the sect. As for who was loyal or treacherous, the net spread would soon reveal the truth. Chapter 1426 - Chapter 1426 Chapter 559 Severing Ties and Secret Cultivation ?Chapter 1426: Chapter 559: Severing Ties and Secret Cultivation Chapter 1426: Chapter 559: Severing Ties and Secret Cultivation As the date of the new School Leader¡¯s ascension approached, Immortal Sect Messengers from the north and south of Tiannan and all corners of the regions began to arrive at Mi Yun Mountain one after another. For a moment, Mi Yun Mountain became bustling with gathered Immortals. Among the Messengers, some True Persons who hadn¡¯t been seen for a long time also took the opportunity to meet and discuss the Tao, drink and play merrily. And some of those with intentions also took the opportunity to walk around the Mountain. In the Cave Mansion of the Taiping Dao School Leader. Lu Yuan looked at Yang Jihua who had come to pay a visit and, to preempt the other party¡¯s speech, he said, ¡°Friend Yang, I know what you want to say, but I¡¯m about to no longer be the School Leader of the Taiping Dao. Without this position, even if I wanted to help you, I would be powerless.¡± ¡°School Leader Lu, why do you say so?¡± Yang Jihua, looking at the somewhat cold Lu Yuan, couldn¡¯t help but smile bitterly with helplessness. He came to the Southern Domain with a heavy responsibility, and the first thing he did after arriving at Mi Yun Mountain was to visit Lu Yuan. Although this School Leader Lu was about to step down soon, he had been in the position for four hundred years and still held the position, with all the power in his hands not a bit lacking. Moreover, even after stepping down, with his strength and experience, his status within Taiping Dao wouldn¡¯t be poor. It could not be ruled out that he could still control a lot of power and exert influence behind the scenes. The School Leader was merely stepping down, not losing power; in the Immortal Realm, as long as one¡¯s cultivation remains, everything else remains. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã? It¡¯s not like mundane Dynasties where losing an official position means losing everything. So, if he could persuade him, even if it was just to open a small opportunity, it could bring great benefits to Changqing Immortal Sect. This was also the reason Yang Jihua sought Lu Yuan immediately after arriving. He believed that the other party would definitely not be willing to step down easily and give up the vast power at hand. As long as there¡¯s a hint of reluctance, facing the olive branch extended by Changqing Immortal Sect, there might be a chance to grasp it. And once he took the bait, his own purpose would be achieved. But looking at it now, this route seemed to be impassable. ¡°I know what you¡¯ve been doing within my Taiping Dao over the years; people like Yu Shipei have countless ties with Changqing Immortal Sect behind the scenes. Yet I know about these and still do not interfere, why is that?¡± Lu Yuan looked at the slightly flustered Yang Jihua, and spoke indifferently, ¡°Because this School Leader wants to develop Taiping Dao, to grow Taiping Dao. Former School Leader Yi¡¯s governance was too biased towards one side, even to the point of harming the interests of Taiping Dao, and had been close with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. It caused Taiping Dao to develop for three hundred years, yet still marking time, without much progress. Thus, when I took over, I opened our doors wider, allowed more people to join, allowed more people to be valued, let more people have a broader Heaven and Earth for development. Therefore, I took a moderate and balanced approach, made friends with all parties, allowed the disciples to develop on their own, and interact with outsiders. This was to leverage the strength of the external world to help the disciples grow, to enhance the strength of our Taiping Dao. As a result, in four hundred years, the strength of Taiping Dao rapidly flourished, branches spread across the Southern Domain, with four thousand inner disciples and no less than eighty direct disciples. Among those disciples, even two True Immortals emerged. These are the achievements of my governance. Likewise, such development couldn¡¯t have come without the help of your sects and others. For this, I¡¯ve always been grateful, and I would like to offer my thanks here.¡± Lu Yuan gave a bow to Yang Jihua to express his gratitude. If it weren¡¯t for the opponent¡¯s desperate corruption of Taiping Dao¡¯s disciples, offering a large number of benefits, various heavenly treasures, elixirs, and fortuitous adventures sent wave after wave. How could the growth of those young disciples of the Taiping Dao have been so rapid? In just a mere seven hundred years, they raised two True Immortals. Although with the heritage of Taiping Dao, occupying the territory of seven nations, raising two True Immortals in seven hundred years is only the norm. But one must know. Taiping Dao held seven nations, of which more than ninety percent of the heritage was occupied by Lu Yuan and his Avatars. For seven hundred years, the resources of five nations were continuously enjoyed by them. Occasionally, they would release one nation to their disciples for a mere hundred years before taking it back. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï The real heritage that Taiping Dao invested in cultivating disciples was actually only equivalent to that of an ordinary Immortal Sect occupying one nation. And how hard is it for those ordinary Immortal Sects to raise a True Immortal? Often a thousand years would pass without producing a True Immortal. Yet, with the same resources, Taiping Dao only took a short seven hundred years to raise two True Immortals. Such efficiency is simply astonishing. How did this achievement come about? Lu Yuan didn¡¯t put heart into cultivating disciples; it couldn¡¯t be that the disciples cultivated themselves, right? There must have been someone who made sacrifices. Who made the sacrifices? Naturally, it was Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Changqing Immortal Sect. They spent their own wealth to help his sect raise disciples; such selfless dedication moved people to tears. Now Taiping Dao has four thousand disciples and two True Immortals, all thanks to those two neighbors, all good people indeed. As for those who helped, naturally, Lu Yuan was grateful. They are the heroes in the revival of Taiping Dao. However, after expressing gratitude, his expression turned cold again, ¡°While I¡¯m grateful to you in my heart, I¡¯m also equally indignant at your actions. You helped the revival of Taiping Dao, and I remember this help deeply. But the original intention of your help was to corrupt Taiping Dao, to buy over our disciples, to have them serve as your insiders, betraying the interests of Taiping Dao. Chapter 1427 - Chapter 1427 Chapter 559 Severing Ties and Secret Cultivation_2 ?Chapter 1427: Chapter 559: Severing Ties and Secret Cultivation_2 Chapter 1427: Chapter 559: Severing Ties and Secret Cultivation_2 For four hundred years, disciples within the Taiping Tao Sect, due to their differing stances and the different forces backing them, had become as incompatible as fire and water, as if they were sworn enemies. By now, the sect was on the verge of splitting apart. All this current situation, Taoist Yang, can be credited to your efforts.¡± Upon hearing this, Yang Jihua broke into a cold sweat. He detected a hint of murderous intent in School Leader Lu Yuan¡¯s words. Indeed, anyone whose sect had been so meddled with would feel enraged. How could one not hate the mastermind behind the scenes? And unfortunately, the person responsible for the current chaos in the Taiping Tao Sect was his Qing Immortal Sect, was he, Yang Jihua himself. It was entirely reasonable for Lu Yuan to harbor the intent to kill him. ¡°Taoist Lu, please listen to my explanationa€|¡± Yang Jihua thought of the consequences of turning against Taiping Tao Sect and about his own safety, and hurriedly began to salvage the situation. But he was cut off mid-sentence by Lu Yuan. ¡°That¡¯s enough, Taoist Yang, no need to say more.¡± Lu Yuan stopped him from speaking, his expression stern, ¡°I won¡¯t kill you, after all, in these four hundred years, you have indeed been of great help to the Taiping Tao Sect. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Even if there were other motives, it doesn¡¯t negate the fact that you¡¯ve been helpful to the Taiping Tao Sect. Moreover, our two sects have had close interactions in the past, and Taiping Tao Sect¡¯s establishment in the Southern Domain couldn¡¯t have been achieved without Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s support. With these old graces and kindnesses in mind, I can overlook some past unhappiness. It¡¯s as if our accounts are now settled.¡± Upon hearing this, Yang Jihua felt a rush of relief and quickly expressed his gratitude, ¡°What you say is true, our friendship is extraordinary, how could I possibly harm you? We can bury the slight past misunderstandings and start afresh, as if we are meeting each other anew, purely establishing a sincere friendship.¡± He still didn¡¯t want to give up on drawing Lu Yuan and Taiping Tao Sect to his side. Lu Yuan, however, just smiled, ¡°These words you say to me, are now useless. After I step down as the leader, I will retreat to the sect for closed-door cultivation deep in the mountains, no longer venturing outside. Just like Senior Brother Yi, not becoming an Earth Immortal, I shall not leave seclusion. The future affairs of Taiping Tao Sect will be managed by Junior Brother Yu. He will govern the sect and lead its future development. If you wish to start anew with Taiping Tao Sect, go find Junior Brother Yu. He¡¯s going to be the future leader. However, with Junior Brother Yu¡¯s temperament and the heavy responsibility the sect has laid on him, it would mostly be futile to seek him out. Junior Brother Yu is here to reform the sect. Under his leadership, the sect will purify itself and focus on internal development, and will not engage in active external interactions like Senior Brother Yi and I did. Taiping Tao Sect aims to rid itself of influences from external sects, including Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Until this goal is achieved, it won¡¯t be easy for you to win him over.¡± Lu Yuan glanced at Yang Jihua, with a mocking look in his eyes. ¡°How can this be, how can this be?¡± After hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s words and seeing his attitude, Yang Jihua¡¯s heart turned cold. He knew that the current School Leader Lu Yuan had no need to lie to him. When he said seeking him out would be futile, it definitely would be. Everyone would be in seclusion, no longer showing up or dealing with sect matters; what use would seeking him out be? Perhaps, after the leadership transfer ceremony ends, he might never see Lu Yuan again, as he would be in deep seclusion. This had precedence within the Taiping Tao Sect. The previous leader, Senior Brother Yi, after stepping down, wasn¡¯t he in deep seclusion inside Mi Yun Mountain? And for four hundred years, he had neither shown himself nor had any news come from him. This long-term disconnection and complete disappearance from the outside world caused intense speculation, suspecting that Senior Brother Yi might not have succeeded in becoming an Earth Immortal and had perished under the Wind Tribulation, completely fallen. After all, even though achieving Earth Immortality is difficult, within four hundred years, there should be some result. But with Taiping Tao Sect never sending out any news or showing any movements, it was hard not to suspect that they were covering something up. And what would be worth covering up? Naturally, it would be the death news of Yi Dancheng. This was a top-tier Human Immortal Peak expert who once served as the first leader of Taiping Tao Sect. Both his strength and status were of extreme importance. Losing such a person, Taiping Tao Sect could almost be said to have lost a pillar, with its strength reduced by a signifiant margin. Out of practical considerations, if Yi Dancheng really died, Taiping Tao Sect naturally had motivations to conceal it. However, all these were mere speculations. Without confirmation, speculations remain just that. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï And unless one harbored immense grievances against Taiping Tao Sect, no one would be fool enough to verify these matters and draw mortal enmity with Taiping Tao Sect. Thus, this matter wasn¡¯t brought up publicly, only discussed in private. And now, Lu Yuan, saying he too, like Yi Dancheng, after stepping down would directly go into deep seclusion, hiding in the mountains and ceasing to care about external affairs, This revelation literally dropped Yang Jihua¡¯s jaw, stunning him. The only thought remaining in his mind was, has Taiping Tao Sect gone mad? True Immortals are crucial combat power, let alone Human Immortals, each one is incredibly precious, able to make a decisive impact on a region or nation. Ordinary sects with a Human Immortal would do everything possible to maximize their capability, working them to the bone. Not to mention, sending them out as a national defender is a must, right? But what about Taiping Tao Sect? As for Elder Taishang, needless to say, being an Earth Immortal True Person, he of course needed to remain in the sect to ensure the Mountain Gate¡¯s protection. Chapter 1428 - Chapter 1428 Chapter 559 Severing Ties and Quiet Cultivation_3 ?Chapter 1428: Chapter 559 Severing Ties and Quiet Cultivation_3 Chapter 1428: Chapter 559 Severing Ties and Quiet Cultivation_3 Then, as the School Leader, he had to stay at the sect and wouldn¡¯t leave easily. This meant there were always two people who could not move. Following the previous instance at Yi Dancheng, after resigning, he secluded himself at the Mountain Gate, and another True Immortal was wasted. Now, Lu Yuan was doing the same, making Taiping Dao lose another usable True Immortal. Currently, Taiping Dao had a total of eight True Immortals, and suddenly four of them were unavailable, leaving only four to be sent on missions. You must know, Taiping Dao now possessed territories of seven nations. Even if those four were all sent out, one to guard each nation, they couldn¡¯t cover their own domains. In such a situation, with Taiping Dao already short-handed, to cut off another arma€¡±what kind of thought process was this? He just couldn¡¯t understand it, really couldn¡¯t. To Yang Jihua, a Taiping Dao making such a decision must be truly insane. And to try to ally with such madmen, he himself seemed to have gone mad. How could he possibly think of allying with these madmen? With this thought in mind, after talking to Lu Yuan for a few moments and confirming that the other party really intended to resign and never come out again, Yang Jihua completely gave up. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï He also confirmed that there was indeed a madness running through all of Taiping Dao. Otherwise, it was hard to understand why they would do such things. So he left, disappointed. Here, he hadn¡¯t achieved his goal, and most likely Taiping Dao couldn¡¯t be won over either. His mission was a direct failure; how could he not be disappointed? Lu Yuan watched him leave, seeing the dejected figure and smiling coldly to himself. The conversation had been an intentional blow to the other¡¯s confidence while also severing ties cleanly with Qing Immortal Sect. By now, with his breakthrough to Earth Immortal, Lu Yuan finally had the power to defend himself in these troubled times. And with his breakthrough, Taiping Dao now had four Earth Immortals, and soon there would be five, six. Speaking a bit more aggressively, he now even had the strength to start a war with Qing Immortal Sect and even held some chances of winning. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? He didn¡¯t act now mainly because he wanted to wait for his cultivation to improve a bit more, to reach mid-stage Earth Immortal, to grow strong enough to defeat Song Xiren. He would wait for Jin Qingyue and Jade Brocade to become Earth Immortals, further strengthening the top combat power, turning all potential into strength. He would wait for the disciples under him to further expand, making the war machine of Taiping Dao even more substantial. It was for these reasons that Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t immediately moved against Qing Immortal Sect. But not acting now didn¡¯t mean doing nothing at all. Now, making some strategic preparations for the future war was necessary. Lu Yuan first brought up the misconduct Qing Immortal Sect had inflicted on Taiping Dao, explicitly stating the other party initiated the dishonor, and the fault was theirs. Then using these faults, he directly erased the years of help that the other party had provided to Taiping Dao, thus eliminating any obligations. Otherwise, if Taiping Dao acted against a benefactor, it would sound terrible once spread. Outsiders might even rank Taiping Dao, together with Jiuzhou and Changqing as the third sect. How bad was the reputation of those two sects in the outside world now? Lu Yuan saw it very clearly. He certainly didn¡¯t want his Taiping Dao to end up like those sects, despised by the world. Therefore, it was very necessary to establish the moral high ground first, to sever the relationship. Firstly let the world know, it was Qing Immortal Sect that acted unjustly first, and then Taiping Dao, pressured by past kindness, chose to endure and swallowed the loss. But by doing this, the favor was completely written off. Having taken this step, if Taiping Dao fought against Qing Immortal Sect in the future, there would be no more psychological or moral burdens. This seemed troublesome and old-fashioned. But in an era where Immortal Sects in the outer Changqing Domain still cared about reputation, it was necessary. As long as one did not want to sever ties with the world, these efforts for appearances were essential. Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t reached the point where he was invincible in the world; he wasn¡¯t even a Heavenly Immortal, so of course, he wouldn¡¯t rashly break these rules. There was no benefit in doing so. Fortunately, the Qing Immortal Sect wasn¡¯t any good either; in recent years, they hadn¡¯t acted decently and had actively reached out to Taiping Dao. They also caused turmoil in Taiping Dao, making surrounding Immortal Sects aware of the situation. They themselves provided Taiping Dao with an excuse, allowing Lu Yuan to easily make a separation. I¡¯m crying, what a good person he is. As for beyond the separation, Lu Yuan voluntarily revealed that he wanted to go into seclusion, which meant keeping a low profile. Now, Taiping Dao harbored many secrets; Earth Immortals were emerging one after another within it, and if this were exposed, it would definitely shock the entire Changqing Domain. Even the entire Donghua Continent would be astounded. After all, these were not one or two Earth Immortals but suddenly four, soon even six. If this news spread, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t know how the Immortal Sects outside the domain would react. But the two Immortal Sects within the Changqing Domain would definitely be extremely shocked and then do everything to suppress and guard against Taiping Dao. At that time, even if Lu Yuan wasn¡¯t afraid, it would severely slow down the progress of his plans. To avoid these troubles, it was necessary to hide before the formal start of the plan. He and Yi Dancheng, as the School Leaders who were usually reluctant to, had to often interact with the outside world. With the status of Taiping Dao, they might sometimes have to meet with other Earth Immortals. For Lu Yuan with his Earth Immortal cultivation, concealing his status from Human Immortals who were a Great Realm below him wasn¡¯t difficult and could be easily done. But hiding from those of the same level, the same category of Earth Immortals, wasn¡¯t so easy. A slight carelessness would lead to exposure. Therefore, to avoid this, he and Yi Dancheng both chose to enter Closing Door Cultivation after breaking through to Earth Immortal, hiding deep in the mountains and avoiding meeting people. I¡¯ve hidden myself away and don¡¯t meet with people, so of course, there¡¯s no possibility of exposure. Handily, Yi Dancheng¡¯s succession and abdication provided Lu Yuan with an excellent excuse. Now following his abdication, he adopted the same practice directly, turning it into a system, creating a precedent. This way, it directly masked the past, making outsiders unable to guess the reason and could only watch Taiping Dao going mad. How perfect is that. Even not just he and Yi Dancheng, but also Che Shidao, who had been stationed in Jiuchuan Country for years, had been hiding in the Water Mansion Dragon Palace, performing Closing Door Cultivation inside. Beside showing up every few decades to make an appearance, there were no other actions, contentedly becoming a cultivator of hardships. This was also to hide the fact that they had broken through to Earth Immortal. For the sake of keeping a low profile and hiding their strength, Lu Yuan forcefully turned himself and many avatars into a bunch of homebodies. All hiding at home, unwilling to show their faces. Luckily, their stance succeeded in keeping them hidden, and even earned praise from the outside world. Many people believed that each and every True Immortal of Taiping Dao was a true cultivator dedicated to the Dao, enduring solitude, enduring hardships, truly deserving of being called seeds of True Immortals, destined for greatness. This non-contentious, single-minded cultivation, stable development stance, also allowed Taiping Dao¡¯s reputation to grow rapidly in recent years. This was something Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t anticipated before and counted as an unexpected pleasure. Chapter 1429 - Chapter 1429 Chapter 560 Recommending Reforms ?Chapter 1429: Chapter 560: Recommending Reforms Chapter 1429: Chapter 560: Recommending Reforms After seeing off Yang Jihua, it wasn¡¯t long before Lu Yuan had another visitor. ¡°Taoist Lu.¡± Zhen Xuan¡¯s aged face was full of smiles as he entered and began to chat endlessly about trivial matters regarding his years as Sect Leader, resembling someone visiting friends and relatives. Lu Yuan listened for a while, and seeing that the other party was reluctant to get to the point, he impatiently said, ¡°Taoist Zhen Xuan, have you come to me just to talk about these things?¡± Compared to Yang Jihua, his attitude towards this old fellow was somewhat better. There was no helping it, the main strategy of the Taiping Dao was to ally with the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect in the future to eliminate the Qing Immortal Sect and unify the Great Domain. Under this strategic policy, naturally, he had to maintain a good relationship with the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect. Thus, for the past four hundred years, Lu Yuan outwardly appeared impartial between the Qing Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, siding with whoever offered more money. But privately, aside from official duties, Lu Yuan kept his distance from the Qing Immortal Sect and favored the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect. He focused on one, with the lower and middle ranks mainly from Qing Immortal Sect, and the upper echelons from Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, balancing it so that neither side felt cheated. Over four hundred years, he and Zhen Xuan had formed no small friendship. Because of this, Zhen Xuan was now able to talk about these trivial matters with Lu Yuan. ¡°Why the hurry, Taoist Lu? I am here to bond with you, and you seem to have no patience for it.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Your sect is changing leaders again after just four hundred years, with you about to retire and the new Sect Leader never having been spoken of before, I don¡¯t know his temperament or his attitude towards Jiuzhou. So, I specially came to seek guidance from you.¡± Not only was the Qing Immortal Sect worried about the Taiping Dao changing its leader, Jiuzhou was equally concerned. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Indeed, people from both sides had come. ¡°I knew you were here for this matter.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan selectively relayed part of what he had said to Yang Jihua earlier, ¡°My Junior Brother Yu is assuming the position of Sect Leader to cleanse the internal atmosphere and mend the divisions among the disciples.¡± He briefly mentioned the responsibilities of the Jade Brocade, then cautioned, ¡°He is different from me, not someone who can be swayed by money and possessions. If you wish to interact with him in the future, it must be strictly official business, without ulterior motives.¡± Upon hearing this, Zhen Xuan¡¯s face fell, ¡°Ah, Taoist Lu, our two sects have shared a friendship for seven hundred years, why must we be so distant? Calculating everything so precisely harms our relationship and also brings many inconveniences. Is there really no other way?¡± Lu Yuan shook his head, ¡°What can I do? The sect has already made a decision, this matter simply cannot be changed or stopped. Moreover, once I retire, I will be like Elder Brother Yi, entering secluded cultivation and disengaging from external affairs. I won¡¯t be able to manage future matters either.¡± ¡°Ah, you are going into seclusion?¡± Just like when Yang Jihua heard the news that Lu Yuan would enter seclusion, Zhen Xuan was also visibly shocked and could hardly understand why he would do this. However, after the shock passed, Zhen Xuan quickly responded with urgency,¡±Elder Brother Yi entered seclusion four hundred years ago and has not emerged since. Now you are also entering seclusion, and we do not know when we might see each other again. With the new Jade Sovereign of Taiping Dao being difficult to deal with, and the real connections between our Jiuzhou and your sect being mostly just you and Elder Brother Yi, who have both gone into seclusion, who shall we Jiuzhou turn to when we need to discuss matters with Taiping Dao in the future? Surely we can¡¯t just handle everything on an official basis with the Jade Sovereign, as you said. How would we get things done then?¡± Many matters, if put forth bluntly and handled in an entirely official manner, cannot be accomplished. Negotiations need to be conducted privately. Such is the way of the world. The rapid warming of relations between the Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou over the years wasn¡¯t achieved by adhering strictly to official business. The close relationships between the previous Sect Leaders, Yi Dancheng and Lu Yuan, and the high ranks of Jiuzhou were also crucial factors. Now, with the Taiping Dao changing its leader and the previous leaders entering seclusion one after the other, this effectively severed the high-level communication between the two sects. How could they maintain their relationship? What? You say Yang Xiuan also has good relations with Jiuzhou, this True Immortal of Taiping Dao could also be considered high-level. That¡¯s not considered high-level, it¡¯s not something you can just claim, it depends on his influence over the sect¡¯s decisions. Considering the current situation, Yang Xiuan was late even to learn about the change in leadership. Let alone having proposal and voting rights, he doesn¡¯t even have the right to observe. How is this high-level? Zhen Xuan, who was quite familiar with the internal mechanisms and systems of the Taiping Dao, naturally couldn¡¯t count on him. Hearing Zhen Xuan¡¯s complaint, Lu Yuan thoughtfully said, ¡°What you say does have merit; our two sects have deep ties that indeed shouldn¡¯t become estranged so suddenly.¡± He pondered a moment then said, ¡°Here¡¯s what you can do, if Zhen Xuan Taoist you encounter any issues in the future, you can seek out my Elder Brother Che in Jiuchuan Country, he can discuss matters with you. Although Junior Brother Yu is the new Sect Leader, Elder Brother Che¡¯s tenure and his ability to speak on some matters within the sect still count. Should you seek him out, as long as the matter is reasonable, Elder Brother Che won¡¯t disregard it. I will also speak to Elder Brother Che about this before I enter seclusion, asking him to look after things.¡± After his own and Yi Dancheng¡¯s retreat, promoting Elder Brother Che to the forefront was Lu Yuan¡¯s next plan. Chapter 1430 - Chapter 1430 Chapter 560 Recommendation for Reform_2 ?Chapter 1430: Chapter 560 Recommendation for Reform_2 Chapter 1430: Chapter 560 Recommendation for Reform_2 Or perhaps, it would be inaccurate to say he was thrust into the limelight; his role was simply to act as a smokescreen, to befuddle the world. After all, Che Shidao¡¯s cultivation had already reached the level of an Earth Immortal, and he, too, was not suited to public exposure, which would make it easy for others to see through him. And this avatar, in recent years, had established the persona of an ascetic cultivator. Spending his days in deep cultivation within the Dragon Palace, he might not emerge even once in a decade. Lu Yuan pushed this person forward also to use this point to push back against the outside world¡¯s infiltration into Taiping Dao. After all, Compared to a School Leader who could frequently visit and had a wide network of friends, An ascetic cultivator who rarely met others and had an aloof personality was obviously not so approachable. Facing such a person, would you dare to bother them with a visit unless it was a matter of great importance? If you bothered them when there was no real issue, and annoyed them, then you could forget about doing business in the future; you wouldn¡¯t even be able to get through the door. Minimal contact with others also helped to prevent one¡¯s strength from being exposed. Having such a person, Lu Yuan could maintain close contact with the outside world and block those annoying individuals; he really put a lot of thought into it. ¡°Friend Che?¡± Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s recommendation, Zhen Xuan recalled but realized that there wasn¡¯t much impression of Master Che in his mind. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The only understanding he had of the person was from seven hundred years ago, when Master Che, along with Master Qing Guanzi and Venerable Yi, had swept through the Southern Domain and participated in the Ghost-Exorcising Ceremony. But after the ceremony, Master Che had stayed put in Jiuchuan Country for a full seven hundred years. Apart from attending a few festivities for Taiping Dao, he had never stepped out. He had settled in Jiuchuan Dragon Palace, comfortably living the life of a homebody. So, in recent years, as Yang Xiuan and Yu Shipei rose to prominence within Taiping Dao, their reputations were unmatched for a time. But Master Che seemed to have vanished without a trace, unknown to others. Which led to Zhen Xuan, had it not been for Lu Yuan¡¯s recommendation, scarcely being able to recall this person at the moment. To be this low-key was truly remarkable. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã0 Regardless of how low-profile the person was, Lu Yuan was right about one thing: within Taiping Dao, Master Che held seniority. In the eyes of outsiders, as one of the original three founders, Che Shidao¡¯s position in Taiping Dao was only second to Qing Guanzi and Yi Dancheng. Even Lu Yuan, who had been the School Leader for four hundred years, could not confidently claim superiority over him. If he could make inroads with this person, then there would definitely be no issue in continuing to exert influence over Taiping Dao in the future. With Master Che around, even the newly appointed Jade Sovereign, no matter how insensitive, would still have to show some courtesy. Thinking this, Zhen Xuan looked at Lu Yuan with excitement, ¡°If friend truly can persuade Master Che, then the bonds between our two families will surely be without worry.¡± While saying this, Zhen Xuan resolved to make more trips to Jiuchuan Country in the future to court this key individual. Really now. Such a pivotal person had escaped their attention for seven hundred years. A real oversight. But then, this was also to blame on Master Che¡¯s exceedingly low profile. Or rather, even if outsiders wished to make contact with the low-profile Master Che, there was no way to do so. It was only because Lu Yuan was intending to retreat into secluded cultivation that an opportunity arose. Otherwise, even if Zhen Xuan wanted to meet him, it would likely prove difficult. With such a rare opportunity at hand, it was essential to seize it tightly. Among the eight True Persons of Taiping Dao, the significance of Yang and Yu need not be mentioneda€¡±they were inconsequential. Among the remaining six, Qing Guanzi was high above, and this True Person kept close only with Master Song of the Qing Immortal Sect, completely independent from those below. With this True Person available, the Qing Immortal Sect had no worries about communication with Taiping Dao. Would Qing Guanzi really ignore a letter from Master Song? That side had the simplest way to disrupt plans. On the contrary, in Jiuzhou, without the influence of Yi Dancheng, just as they were getting to grips with Lu Yuan, they were about to lose him. The setbacks, one after the other, would have caused any ordinary person to give up long ago. Only because the fate of Jiuzhou hung in the balance did they have to invest their utmost care here. Now spotting a loophole, to maintain the alliance with Taiping Dao, they had to scramble and worm their way into favor. Watching Zhen Xuan¡¯s excited demeanor, Lu Yuan said with a beaming smile, ¡°Rest assured, friend, with my word, Elder Brother Che will certainly grow close to you.¡± Promoting Zhen Xuan was not just for the aforementioned reasons; there was another. And that was to further deplete the resources of Jiuzhou by exposing this avatar. Facing such a low-profile and reticent person, wouldn¡¯t Jiuzhou have to go to greater lengths to win him over? Let¡¯s not even talk about sentiments; how much in terms of mystic artifacts and Immortal Materials would they have to offer up eagerly? And as more gifts were given, naturally, Jiuzhou¡¯s resources would dwindle. Despite his willingness to work with Jiuzhou to destroy the Qing Immortal Sect, in this cooperation, there needed to be a primary and secondary party. Naturally, he preferred to take the lead. Thus, to prevent Jiuzhou Immortal Gate from making trouble and retaliating, they first had to weaken the ¡°younger brother,¡± ensuring they lacked the strength to revolt. Pushing an avatar forward and opening a channel to drain Jiuzhou, letting them willingly leap into it, was the most favorable outcome. Look, wasn¡¯t Zhen Xuan already taking the bait? Feeling somewhat smug, Lu Yuan then discussed Che Shidao¡¯s matters with Zhen Xuan, boosting the old fellow¡¯s confidence as much as possible. So that he would spend even more, investing heavily in Che Shidao. And as dusk approached, with reluctance, he finally saw his guest off. Chapter 1431 - Chapter 1431 Chapter 560 Recommending Reforms_3 ?Chapter 1431: Chapter 560: Recommending Reforms_3 Chapter 1431: Chapter 560: Recommending Reforms_3 And as the Messenger left, Lu Yuan finally found peace; no one else came to disturb him. After all, unlike the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and the Qing Immortal Sect, and Taiping Dao, whose interests were narrowly intertwined, others couldn¡¯t afford to pay constant attention. To other neighboring sects, Taiping Dao appointing a new School Leader was just another piece of news, not affecting their interests. There was naturally no need to specially acknowledge a School Leader who was about to step down. With that spare time, it would be better to focus on the new School Leader, wouldn¡¯t it? Time flowed by, and soon the date of the succession ceremony arrived. In front of many attending Messengers, Lu Yuan officially passed the position of School Leader to Jade Brocade. Then, in front of everyone, he announced his plans to enter seclusion for cultivation. Amidst the crowd¡¯s astonishment, the ceremony came to an end. As the Messengers left one after another, Jade Brocade officially took control of Taiping Dao, and following the foundation laid by the first School Leader and the accumulation by the second, he ushered in the sect¡¯s third era, the peak. The first step towards the peak involved the reorganization of internal discipline. Upon taking office, Jade Brocade¡¯s first act burned inward. Teaching Great Hall. Jade Brocade summoned many true disciples, as well as the two True Persons, Yang Xiuan and Yu Shipei. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? ¡°Fellow disciples, having been elected by Elder Taishang and many of you, I, as the True Person, assume the position of School Leader, governing the sect,¡± Jade Brocade¡¯s commanding voice resonated through the hall, eyes sweeping over those present, tone stern. ¡°My sole purpose in accepting this role is to rectify the internal atmosphere of our sect and to regulate the behavior of our disciples. Over the years, our sect has prospered more and more, even giving rise to two True Immortals. Yet with prosperity comes the potential for distractions. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Some have been misled by external possessions, influenced by outsiders, and their hearts have drifted from the sect, leaning towards these outsiders. If this continues, will they still be disciples of Taiping, or will they belong to someone else? And worse, not only being influenced by outsiders, these individuals have formed factions within the sect, assisting foreign masters and inciting conflict within our walls. This has filled our honorable sect with chaos and pollution. This is how our sect¡¯s morale is deteriorating. What are they aiming for? Do they wish to divide Taiping Dao? Such acts have become a serious threat to the sect¡¯s lineage, to our stability, causing the disciples to grow distant and restless, each seeking shortcuts. This behavior cannot be allowed to continue. Therefore, my first decree as School Leader is to strictly forbid our disciples from becoming overly involved with cultivators from other sects. Normal interactions, I don¡¯t mind. But if these interactions involve personal gains, accepting favors from others, betraying our sect¡¯s interests or speaking on behalf of others, I will intervene. The law does not apply retroactively, so I will not pursue past matters. But from this day forth, those who dare to violate this prohibition will be dealt with as traitors, and punished severely!¡± The ominous words reached everyone¡¯s ears. Jade Brocade¡¯s gaze settled especially on Yang Xiuan and Yu Shipei, frightening both True Persons so much that they trembled, their faces turning pale. Everyone knew that although the new School Leader did not name names, the implied targets were the two of them. The reason they were not directly called out this time was out of consideration for their status as True Immortals and key fighters for the sect; they had been spared punishment. But if they dared to repeat their offenses in the future, they would truly have to experience the Immortal Execution Platform in the sect. In the face of the great cause of the sect, even Immortals are not beyond execution. And with this decree issued, the sweeping reforms within Taiping Dao officially commenced. Chapter 1432 - Chapter 1432 Chapter 561 Suppressing the Sect ?Chapter 1432: Chapter 561 Suppressing the Sect Chapter 1432: Chapter 561 Suppressing the Sect Jade Brocade, School Leader in his first year, issued the Legal Order to Pure Wind, restricting disciples from interacting with other sects to maintain internal purity. After the order was issued, internally and externally, it created an uproar. Inside the sect, countless disciples were shaken with fear, while outsiders engaged in heated discussions. However, to address the situation, Jade Brocade paid no heed and personally selected a group of elite disciples (in reality, the three hundred Yellow Turban Strongmen forged by Lu Yuan) to patrol both inside and outside the sect and its various branches, to enforce the Pure Wind action and implement the order. In that month itself, more than thirty disciples who didn¡¯t obey the order were caught by the patrolling disciples and brought back to the sect. Then, on that same day, Jade Brocade issued the decree to enforce sect rules, and all these people were sentenced to have their Cultivation abolished and executed, as an example to others. The order sent shockwaves throughout the sect. Many disciples in the sect feared, secretly united, and collectively wrote to the sect, expressing their camaraderie and requesting pardon. Even going so far as to find the True Immortals of the sect. Since the disciples captured were originally from ¡°Yang Sect¡± and ¡°Yu Sect,¡± naturally, people from these two factions sought out Yang Xiuan and Yu Shipei to lead, asking these two True Persons to persuade the Sect Leader. However, faced with the visiting disciples, Yang Xiuan immediately announced his retreat at Little Spring Peak, sealing off the mountain and refusing to see outsiders. He had decided to become a shrinking turtle. Many from ¡°Yang Sect¡± seeing this, could not help but curse intensely, heartbroken by the act of betrayal. Yang Xiuan¡¯s reputation among the disciples plummeted instantly, tarnished to the point of being mocked as a shrinking turtle, a person without credibility. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 And with the faction leader of ¡°Yang Sect¡± gone, they also suffered a heavy blow. More than half of the internal disciples simply vanished, following Yang Xiuan either by announcing their retreat or going out to wander, trying to avoid the storm and daring not to get involved anymore. A portion of the stubborn ones still clung together, unwilling to disperse like that. But they did not dare to directly confront the sect or disobey the sect¡¯s prohibitions. So, other than secretly congregating, they also avoided contacting outside cultivators and reduced the frequency and duration of their travels. However, there were some who were reluctant to accept this. Seeing Yang Xiuan not daring to come forward, they turned to ¡°Yu Sect,¡± changed their allegiance, and ran to Yu Shipei¡¯s command. Yu Shipei had also been fearful of the sect¡¯s prohibition, daring not to oppose the order from the new School Leader, But seeing Yang Xiuan shrink away, crumbling in reputation and despised by the masses, he too felt intimidated. He was someone who liked to be praised and feared losing that more than anything. If he retreated, and then caused the disciples to curse and abandon him, reducing his reputation, it would be more unbearable than death. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 Moreover, aside from his reputation, he also had skeletons in his closet. As outsiders speculated, Yu Shipei¡¯s smooth breakthrough to True Immortal could not possibly rely solely on his abilities; his talents and luck weren¡¯t that good, so external support was undoubtedly involved. But unlike Yang Xiuan, the external support for Yu Shipei was too deeply and excessively influenced by the backers, and he was sunk too deep in this mud, unable to remove himself. For instance, When Yu Shipei initially went to Taiping Dao¡¯s Leshan Branch, being introduced and accepted there, it was Changqing Immortal Sect arranged for all. His entry under Taiping Dao was orchestrated by Changqing Immortal Sect. The subsequent involvement with them clearly ran deep. Thus, whereas Yang Xiuan could sever ties with Nine Provinces, Yu Shipei could not. His years of contact with Changqing Immortal Sect, receiving their support, any leakage of evidence of these liaisons would undoubtedly constitute treason and betrayal of the sect. If Yu Shipei dared sever ties with Changqing Immortal Sect or leaked just a shred of evidence, it would place him in mortal danger. Then neither the sect nor the outside world would harbor him. Such a vast Heaven and Earth, yet not a spot for him to stand. Therefore, despite his fear and regret, facing the sect¡¯s prohibition, he still had to brace himself and tough it out. And this time, facing the newly appointed Sect Leader of Taiping Dao and the rigorously announced prohibition, throughout the entire process, Changqing Immortal Sect, without a bit of promise from Taiping Dao to open new channels, was clearly the most severely affected. In Nine Provinces, there was still Che Shidao which could communicate and potentially influence Taiping Dao. At Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s end, although there also lay Qing Guanzi, this Elder Taishang of Taiping Dao often secluded himself and generally disregarded sect affairs. And being the supreme authority of Taiping Dao, during negotiations about how to undercut Taiping Dao¡¯s influence in his presence, did you really think he couldn¡¯t draw his sword? Thus, although there were communication channels between Changqing Immortal Sect and Taiping Dao, these channels were only sufficient to maintain the most basic communications. Thinking of using them to achieve some not-so-public objectives was out of the question. Therefore, driven to desperation, Changqing Immortal Sect urgently sought to find a new channel of influence within Taiping Dao. And as per the custom in Immortal Realm at that time, anyone above a True Immortal must surely be among the high echelons of the sect with advisory and voting rights on various decisions. Although Taiping Dao, among the ranks of Immortal Sects, seemed somewhat special. Chapter 1433 - Chapter 1433 Chapter 561 Suppressing the Sect_2 ?Chapter 1433: Chapter 561 Suppressing the Sect_2 Chapter 1433: Chapter 561 Suppressing the Sect_2 ¡°` Within this sect, aside from those disciples of the hidden veins, other disciples, even if they become True Immortals, have extremely limited influence. At most, they are considered an enhanced version of the true inheritance disciples, far from reaching the status of an elder. Yang Xiuan and Yu Shipei, after attaining the status of True Immortals, were indeed conferred the title of elder but just in name without any real power. They were always outside the core circle. However, Yang Xiuan and Yu Shipei were well aware of these issues and had even explained them to their backers, but outsiders, even after hearing this, would measure by their own yardstick and only find it absurd. They would think that these two individuals simply didn¡¯t want to do the work and were deliberately making excuses. Or perhaps, Taiping Dao might indeed have these issues, but surely they weren¡¯t as severe as these two exaggerated. As for what the truth truly was, people only believed their own experiences and what they saw. Moreover, even if the facts were indeed as Yu Shipei had said, Changqing Immortal Sect currently didn¡¯t have a better option. If this chess piece wasn¡¯t effective, they still had to forcefully push it forward at this time. Therefore, regarding the issue with Yu Shipei, Changqing Immortal Sect obviously only trusted their own experiences and what they had seen. Within their own sect, True Immortals, although not the highest-ranking, still had considerable rights. And Taiping Dao had also officially granted Yang and Yu the position of elder, with all the honorable treatment one could ask for. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Combining these two factors, it seemed they only had the option of opening new channels through Yu Shipei. The combined pressure from sect disciples and from influential figures from outside forced Yu Shipei to step forward at this time. He had to raise this flag and directly confront the new School Leader. But as mentioned earlier, the true core of Taiping Dao consists only of Lu Yuan and Lu Yuan¡¯s avatars, also known as the hidden vein disciples to outsiders. Other native-born disciples, regardless of how high their cultivation was, wouldn¡¯t have much influence unless they could become Earth Immortals. Even if they became True Immortals, their influence was insignificant. Faced with Jade Brocade, who carried the will of Lu Yuan and all his avatars, a mere Yu Shipei, despite having some strength, couldn¡¯t shake the School Leader¡¯s authority. Keep in mind, In the past, both Yi Dancheng and Lu Yuan, when they assumed the position of School Leader, were met with nothing but respect and unconditional obedience from others in the sect. A few avatars working together meant that no one dared to stand out and cause trouble. The authority of Taiping Dao¡¯s School Leader had been thoroughly established through the past two School Leaders. Now, for such a minor figure as Yu Shipei to dare to stand up against such authority, one really wonders who had given him the courage. If one wants to challenge Taiping Dao¡¯s authority, it¡¯s not impossible, but you need enough strength and to bring enough benefit to the sect. Otherwise, who would indulge you? Clearly, Yu Shipei didn¡¯t possess such strength or benefits. He was merely a Human Immortal. Faced with someone who dared to challenge his authority, Jade Brocade, fully authorized by Lu Yuan, of course, showed no mercy and immediately threw a heavy punch. The decree was issued: Yu Shipei is relieved from his position as elder of Taiping Dao and is punished with a hundred years of confinement in Mi Yun Mountain¡¯s Cold Wind Valley to atone for his actions. Jade Brocade issued his second decree after taking office. The second fire was lit, and a first cut was made at an elder, dealing directly with a True Immortal. When the news spread, it immediately caused a great stir. No one expected Taiping Dao to be so merciless with one of its own elders. Keep in mind that in the eyes of outsiders today, among the eight True Immortals in Taiping Dao, excluding the high and mighty Elder Taishang Qing Guanzi, the other seven are merely Human Immortals. Yet now, out of these seven True Immortals, Taiping Dao directly dealt with one. Though this handling merely stripped the elder of his position and confined him. For a True Immortal, that was still a severe punishment. The lifespan of a True Immortal is just three thousand years. Now to be confined for a hundred years in a place made specifically for punishment like Cold Wind Valley, it¡¯s akin to suffering a hundred years of torment. Even for a True Immortal, that¡¯s enough to give them a hard time. Taiping Dao¡¯s Cold Wind Valley is by no means a pleasant place. It was created by Lu Yuan gathering a massive amount of Earth Vein¡¯s qi on Mi Yun Mountain. As many gathered Earth Veins clashed, with their qi struggling to blend and rejecting each other. To manage this discordant Earth qi, a special place was chosen to expel these harsh energies, thus forming Cold Wind Valley. Inside Cold Wind Valley, with the rampant Earth qi, the spiritual energy is unstable, various other energies run rampant, and one simply cannot cultivate by absorbing the Heavenly and Earthly Aura. Not only is cultivation impossible, but one even has to focus on resisting the mix of Earth qi to prevent the invasion and damage to one¡¯s Immortal body and Divine Soul. In such an environment, danger always lurks, and one cannot even sleep peacefully. Having Yu Shipei walk through there, spending a century before coming out again, it¡¯s likely that, at the least, his cultivation would greatly diminish, his lifespan would be substantially reduced, and even his foundation could be damaged. Such a severe punishment, how could it not be awe-inspiring and terrifying? A True Immortal has been punished this severely. The disciples below, how dare they disobey the orders of the sect, and how could they expect a good outcome? And so it was. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï But when Yu Shipei received the sect¡¯s decree and learned of his punishment, He was instantly so frightened that he harbored thoughts of fleeing. ¡°` Chapter 1434 - Chapter 1434 Chapter 561 Suppressing the Sect_3 ?Chapter 1434: Chapter 561 Suppressing the Sect_3 Chapter 1434: Chapter 561 Suppressing the Sect_3 If he really had to live in Cold Wind Valley for a hundred years, he would lose half of his life and even possibly lose hundreds, if not thousands, of years of his Lifespan. His arduous Cultivation was for the sake of achieving longevity and untroubled freedom. Yet now, he was confined; to speak nothing of freedom, even his longevity was almost taken away. No Cultivator could accept such an outcome. However. Yu Shipei looked at the person in front of him, who had come to announce the School Leader¡¯s Legal Order, and the surge of ruthlessness that had just risen up in his heart was suddenly doused with cold water and rapidly subsided. ¡°Yu disciple, will you follow the School Leader¡¯s decree?¡± Jin Qingyue looked at Yu Shipei, whose expression was changing and whose eyes were flickering, and asked in an indifferent tone. He wasn¡¯t worried at all about this fellow before him causing any trouble. Although he had not yet broken through to the Earth Immortal stage, he was already a Cultivator at the peak of Human Immortal. With such Cultivation, dealing with a recently ascended Early-stage Human Immortal of just over a hundred years was effortlessly manageable. Not to mention, they were currently within the sect at Mi Yun Mountain, protected by a Formation Method, and as Lu Yuan¡¯s Avatar, he had the highest authority over the sect-defense Formation. If the other party wanted to resist, he could instantly mobilize the Formation¡¯s power to suppress him. The Taiping Dao¡¯s sect-defense grand Formation was that of Earth Immortal caliber, far beyond what a mere Human Immortal could resist. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã? In terms of his own Cultivation strength as well as Formation power, Yu Shipei had no room for resistance. Of course. ?¦Ï???.§ã? Yu Shipei was unaware of all this. His main reluctance to resist stemmed from sensing the danger of Jin Qingyue before him. His intuition as a True Immortal informed him that if he dared to resist, the teacher uncle before him would instantly transform into a ferocious beast, devour him alive, and tear him to shreds. Never underestimate the intuition of a Cultivator, especially that of a True Immortal. Yu Shipei had received countless pieces of assistance from his intuition throughout his growth and had survived many close brushes with death by relying on it. Of course, he believed his intuition. Moreover, there was another point that corroborated his intuition. That was, among the various teacher uncles and elders of the hidden lineage, not a single one of them who stood in the limelight until today was weak. At the founding of Taiping Dao, the three True Immortals of the hidden lineage, Qing Guanzi was an Earth Immortal, and Yi Dancheng and Che Shidao, these two who were Late-stage Human Immortals at the time, personally took part in the founding battle. Powered by their own Divine Powers, they personally drove away the encountered Monsters and Demons, laying the foundation for what was to come. The second School Leader, Lu Yuan, ascended to the position as a Mid-level Human Immortal, and upon retirement as a Late-stage Human Immortal, began to use breaking through to Earth Immortal as a pretext, shutting himself away in closed-door Cultivation. The Incumbent School Leader, Jade Brocade, although only an Early-stage Human Immortal, as the leader of Taiping Dao, no one saw him as a common Human Immortal. Everyone believed that at his pace, maybe within two or three hundred years, he could reach Mid-level Human Immortal, and within a thousand years, possibly advance to Late-stage Human Immortal, like the previous leaders, and strive toward Earth Immortal. Then there was Jin Qingyue, the teacher uncle before him. Six hundred years ago, he was already an Early-stage Human Immortal. Now after six hundred years, the official Cultivation level being Mid-level Human Immortal, still higher than his own. But in these years, Yu Shipei had seen other Mid-level Human Immortals, and not one could compare to the current teacher uncle. Only those at the Late-stage Human Immortal level could exude the same threatening presence as the teacher uncle now. Therefore, in Yu Shipei¡¯s view, the teacher uncle before him was either already a Late-stage Human Immortal, having quietly Cultivated there without others¡¯ knowledgea€¡±this might sound exaggerated, but compared to many hidden True Persons of Taiping Dao, it was actually quite normal. Or the teacher uncle had nearly reached that stage of Late-stage Human Immortal and possessed extraordinary combat ability, capable of matching Mid-level Human Immortals and combating Late-stage Human Immortals, being a master of Dao Fa Sheng. But no matter which was the case, he stood no chance against this teacher uncle. While inside Mi Yun Mountain, unable to defeat the teacher uncle swiftly, any thought of escape was also unrealistic. Unable to win, unable to fleea€¡±if he really resisted, the result would only spell death. Yu Shipei had gone through innumerable hardships and spent seven hundred years to finally become a Human Immortal and enjoy his carefree life. He didn¡¯t want to die. He still had a bright future ahead and more than two thousand years of life to livea€¡±how could he throw his life away here? Thus, after weighing the pros and cons and assessing the current situation. Facing Jin Qingyue, Yu Shipei knelt down smoothly. ¡°Disciple has violated the School Leader¡¯s command and brought disgrace to the sect. I am grateful to the School Leader¡¯s grace for sparing my life and am eternally indebted. I am willing to obey.¡± He dared not resist and chose to plead guilty. ¡°Good, you know what¡¯s good for you, saving me the trouble of acting.¡± Jin Qingyue looked at Yu Shipei, who was kneeling in front of him, trembling, and a trace of satisfaction finally appeared on his cold face. If it weren¡¯t for the fact that this person was a True Immortal, considered a good battle force that could be quite useful in the future, He would have instantly struck down and ended the life of someone who had committed such an error without bothering with these formalities. Fortunately, he was sensible and did not resist. Otherwise, even if he pitied the other¡¯s strength, to uphold the School Leader¡¯s authority and sect rules, he would have had no other choice but to kill him. Thinking this, Jin Qingyue continued, ¡°Release your defenses and let me imprison your Magic Power and Divine Soul, and come with me to Cold Wind Valley.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Yu Shipei shuddered again but dared not resist, compliantly releasing all his defenses and allowing the teacher uncle to control his life. Jin Qingyue, unceremoniously, imprisoned his Magic Power and Divine Soul, took control of his life, and grabbing him, headed straight to Cold Wind Valley without delay. This unexpected trip was to apprehend this True Immortal who had erred. Once he had dealt with him, he still had to return to continue his closed-door Cultivation. The original being had already entrusted the Qi Luck and fortunes to him, just waiting for his breakthrough to Earth Immortal. With his own future at stake, Jin Qingyue was naturally focused. Compared to that, he hardly had the time to attend to a mere Human Immortal who had made a mistake. If it weren¡¯t for the original and many other Avatars being either in closed-door Cultivation or in hidden Cultivation, unable to spare the time, And with Jade Brocade as the School Leader not suitable to intervene directly, It inevitably fell to him to handle the matter. Chapter 1435 - Chapter 1435 Chapter 562 The Rise and Fall is Evident ?Chapter 1435: Chapter 562: The Rise and Fall is Evident Chapter 1435: Chapter 562: The Rise and Fall is Evident Jin Qingyue really didn¡¯t want to make this trip; it was such a waste of time. But there was no other way. His Avatars were still too few, and the local True Immortals nurtured by Taiping Dao over these years were too disappointing and difficult to trust. When it came down to it, they could only conscript their own strong men. What a bitter reality. Sighing, Jin Qingyue threw the bothersome fellow into Cold Wind Valley, confining him there. Then he dusted off his hands and returned to his seclusion, undisturbed by any dust. However, in the outside world, as his actions confirmed the punishment of True Immortal Yu Shipei by Taiping Dao, the previously clamorous voices, as if choked, suddenly stalled, and everyone found themselves at a loss for words. No one had expected Taiping Dao to actually be serious. They were so ruthless with their own sect¡¯s True Immortals, striking without pity as soon as there was talk of it. These were True Immortals, after all. Inside Little Spring Peak, Yang Xiuan, who had been in seclusion to avoid this event, felt a surge of relief upon hearing the news. He had not dared to involve himself in this affair because he clearly understood that despite being a True Immortal, he held little standing within the sect. To stand out and openly oppose the School Leader would definitely not end well. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? If the School Leader were truly ruthless, taking down two True Immortals from the peripheral lineages was not out of the question. After all, he and Yu Shipei were merely early-stage Human Immortals. Within the whole sect, they were not considered particularly important in terms of combat strength. What propped up Taiping Dao were those many mid- and late-stage Human Immortals from the hidden lineages. With these people remaining inactive, the early-stage Human Immortals like him, no matter how many were lost, would not affect the overall strength of the sect. Given Taiping Dao¡¯s increasingly prosperous state, within a few hundred years, new Human Immortals would be born and quickly fill the vacancies left by the two of them. He really wasn¡¯t that important. Yang Xiuan clearly recognized this, so when faced with the turmoil outside, he decisively chose to be subdued. Looking at the situation now, this decision was indeed extremely correct. Yu Shipei could not see the situation clearly, thinking that the sect would accommodate him because he was a True Immortal, and brazenly challenged the School Leader¡¯s authority. Well, what became of him now? Directly taken to Cold Wind Valley for punishment, to be confined for a hundred years, even stripped of his position as School Leader. After a hundred years, even if he were still alive, he would most likely be crippled. Such a promising future, ruined in an instant; how unwise. Seeing his peer¡¯s plight, Yang Xiuan was even more determined to not leave his seclusion until the storm had passed, unless commanded by the School Leader. Seclusion was better. It allowed one to cultivate character and improve one¡¯s cultivation, avoiding disasters. Staying put honestly was better than any other action. And if he was subdued, then those who had been making noise, upon seeing Yu Shipei¡¯s fate, were even more frightened. Unlike Yang Xiuan, who had been hiding all along, these people were directly involved. Even Yu Shipei¡¯s decision to resist the School Leader was motivated by their incitement. Now that Master Yu was punished, what good could come to them? One by one, the disciples involved quickly quieted down and hid back in their Cave Mansions, hoping to avoid attention. Some even discussed whether they should just defect from the sect and flee. Otherwise, staying on considering the current situation meant their lives were truly at risk. But before their plans could even start, a heavy blow from above struck them, landing a severe blow. ¡°Upon investigation, many disciples within the sect have been secretly colluding with various parties, inciting unrest among the disciples, and conspiring with external bandits, attempting to undermine the sect¡¯s foundation. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Such rebels, regardless of their status, will be executed without exception if they are involved!¡± After dealing with Yu Shipei, the leader, the third action taken by Jade Brocade since taking office was immediately directed towards those involved disciples. He rounded up all the core members of ¡°Yu sect¡± and those who broke the first Legal Order during this period, arresting more than three hundred of them. Then, in front of the whole sect on the Immortal Execution Platform, he executed them publicly without mercy, one by one. Looking at the blood-spattered Immortal Execution Platform, where the heads of over three hundred people rolled on the ground like balls, everyone watching felt a shudder, enveloped by an overwhelming chill. These were over three hundred cultivators. Including the earlier arrest and execution of more than thirty people, there were nearly four hundred killed in total. To think that Taiping Dao only had around four thousand cultivators. Now, they had killed one-tenth in one fell swoop. The scale of this proportion, if it spread, was likely to cause an uproar throughout the entire Region Continent. Yes, the entire Region Continent. Although there are two or three Great Domains in today¡¯s Donghua Continent that are in chaos and turmoil, most of the other regions are stable, with rare conflicts and Cultivation Sects coexisting peacefully, seldom witnessing vendettas. Under such circumstances, killings are rare. Even in those chaotic Great Domains, like Changqing Domain, due to the limitations of the sect¡¯s True Immortals, most come from the sect¡¯s disciples. These ordinary disciples are the foundation of the Cultivation Sects. Even if these disciples made mistakes, as long as they did not betray the sect and cause rebellion, most Immortal Sects, out of consideration for preserving their own strength, would not bring themselves to execute those involved directly. Most likely, they would be disciplined and then allowed to redeem themselves through service, or even ignored altogether, turning a blind eye to those who broke the sect¡¯s rules, opting to overlook their actions by default. Chapter 1436 - Chapter 1436 Chapter 562 The Rise and Fall is Evident_2 ?Chapter 1436: Chapter 562: The Rise and Fall is Evident_2 Chapter 1436: Chapter 562: The Rise and Fall is Evident_2 Under such circumstances, while disciples of the various Immortal Sects who violate the sect rules also face harsh consequences, it rarely endangers their lives. Because of the unstable situation and the great demand for strength in numerous wars, it is not allowed for those sects to inflict too much damage upon their own power. The more disciples die, the more it equates to voluntarily weakening one¡¯s own strength, exposing one¡¯s vulnerabilities to the enemy. With hungry wolves nearby, showing weakness would only lead the Wolf Pack to swarm and shred you into pieces before feasting on your remains. As long as one does not wish to die, then each Immortal Sect would only actively strengthen its own power, absolutely refraining from weakening it. The relationship between a sect and its disciples is mutually reinforcing, resulting in a balanced equilibrium. It is precisely because of this balance that the disciples within the Taiping Tao Sect dared to connect so openly, even nominating Yu Shipei as their leader and brazenly confronting the sect. It is because this force, which makes up a large portion of the sect¡¯s strength, led these people to believe that even if the upper echelons were furious, they would not dare to deal with them. After all, there is safety in numbers. This time, the Taiping Dao executed as many as four hundred disciples. These were all core members of the rebellious faction; beyond them were many ordinary members and peripheral members. All these people together constituted a ¡°Yu Sect¡± that at its peak had over a thousand disciples. And leading them was a True Immortal. This represented a tremendous force equating to one-quarter of the entire sect¡¯s disciples, and an eighth of its True Immortals. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Such force, when placed within any sect, would be enough to arouse the wariness and attention of every high-ranking member. Even the School Leader of the sect, facing this force, had to tread carefully and avoid offending them too much, fearing that one false step might trigger a civil war within the sect. That would spell disaster. Every member of the ¡°Yu Sect¡± thought this way, and fueled by this confidence, they took actions against the sect. Afterward, everyone knew the outcome. Who could have anticipated that the Taiping Dao would indeed dare to act. How could they dare? What were they thinking? Did they not fear, that by causing their disciples to turn against them? Did they not fear, that by killing so many, they would alienate the sect¡¯s disciples, severing their loyalty and commitment to the sect? Did they not fear, that losing so much of their own strength, would lead to attacks by external enemies? Amongst all options, the Taiping Dao chose the most aggressive one, which came with the greatest future repercussions. Following this choice, the effect was excellent, as striking as erecting a pole and seeing its shadow instantly. But when this choice was actually made, it still caused everyone around to inhale sharply in shock. While everyone¡¯s hearts were trembling, there was also a shared sense that the Taiping Dao was truly mad. They truly did not fear. And in fact, the Taiping Dao really was unafraid. Firstly, at the very core of a sect¡¯s power, at the level of True Immortals, the main reliance of the Taiping Dao was Lu Yuan and his Avatars. Compared to the six predetermined Earth Immortals, these mere two Human Immortals were as insignificant as a hair of nine oxen, not even amounting to one percent. Even if Yang Xiuan and Yu Shipei were completely eliminated, he would just feel a slight regret, and then there would be no more aftermath. Previously, for hundreds of years, the Taiping Dao survived without these two. Now, with Lu Yuan and his avatar even stronger than before, there was even less reason to believe that the sect couldn¡¯t survive without these two. Yang Xiuan had done well, but in the heart of the sect, these two people really didn¡¯t matter. With or without them, the situation was much the same; they had no significant impact on the bigger picture. In such a situation, of course, they could not possess any status, let alone interfere with sect decisions. The sect does not need them to operate, but without the sect, they couldn¡¯t even become immortals. The weight of each side was clear at a glance. Yu Shipei just couldn¡¯t see this, which is why he met with punishment and was confined. Yang Xiuan had a clear understanding, playing the ostrich, and thus he remained safe up to this point. Ultimately, one has to recognize one¡¯s place and then make choices. Even if one becomes immortal, it is no exception. The above concerns only the level of True Immortals. As I¡¯ve said before, an Immortal Sect, in contrast to the true top-tier combat power, namely, outside the True Immortals. The ordinary mortal disciples underneath are essentially just chives, which, after being cut, do not take decades or hundreds of years to grow back quickly. Even disciples who are considered True Immortal seeds and inheritors could be raised in fives or six hundred years anew. For True Immortals with a lifespan of three thousand years, even if every harvest is a thorough culling, they could reap five or six batches in their lifetime, at the very least. So for Lu Yuan, even if he were to exterminate all four thousand disciples of the sect in one go and then raise a new batch of disciples, it would only be a matter of five or six hundred years. Five or six hundred years was precisely the time in his plans to make a move against the Qing Immortal Sect, which suited him just fine. He had plenty of time to wait for the growth of new disciples. If there really was a need to overturn everything and start again, he wouldn¡¯t mind paying such a price. Lu Yuan granted Jade Brocade the authority to recruit disciples openly, which, in essence, already provided the authorization. Should it really come to the last step, clearing out all disciples and pursuing a true sense of purification and rebirth isn¡¯t necessarily out of the question. He could support his avatar in doing so. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 However, if that were the case, within these five or six hundred years, the Taiping Dao might have significantly fewer disciples traveling abroad. Without people traveling outside, the sect¡¯s collection of refining immortal materials would lose a major source of income. Chapter 1437 - Chapter 1437 Chapter 562 Rise and Fall Suddenly_3 ?Chapter 1437: Chapter 562 Rise and Fall Suddenly_3 Chapter 1437: Chapter 562 Rise and Fall Suddenly_3 Thus, for Jade Brocade to advance to Earth Immortal within these mere few hundred years, the difficulty would accordingly increase. This was, in a way, a consequence of massive slaughter. Therefore, in dealing with those rebels this time, Jade Brocade only dealt with the ringleaders and those core members, sparing the ordinary members and peripheral participants from excessive involvement. Killing too many people would not only damage the strength of the sect but also harm his own interests. Jade Brocade still depended on his disciples to go out and gather materials for his advancement. If all these people were killed, his own date of advancement would also be endlessly delayed. He would have to be foolish to engage in such acts that hurt others without benefiting himselfa€¡±acts that were painful for the victims but satisfying for the enemies. The current extent was quite adequate. Killing one-tenth of the people was enough to deter the hearts of the rest. With the remaining people not daring to offend again, the increasingly rampant behaviors of forming cliques and colluding with enemies within the sect could naturally be curtailed and controlled. In this way, the first step in Taiping Dao¡¯s plan to purify its internal ranks was also completed. In fact, this approach had indeed worked extremely well. Shaken by those four hundred heads, Taiping Dao had sternly warned the other disciples within the sect at the almost empty cost of an entire subsidiary courtyard. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? Seeing the familiar faces of fellow disciples, with whom they had often shared drinks and discussed the dao, even traveled togethera€¡±yesterday still full of laughter, only to become cold corpses the next day, displayed as a disgrace on the sect¡¯s pillars. It was no exaggeration to say that everyone was terrified. Not only were they terrified, but a considerable number of people also developed negative emotions like disheartenment, disgust, hatred, and confusion. What the outsiders had speculated had come to pass. Taiping Dao¡¯s decisive killings had been very effective, but the repercussions were also quite significant. Four hundred people had been killed, and because of various relationships involving fellow disciples, close elders, and even clan members, nearly two-thirds of the sect was inwardly repulsed and dissatisfied with this decision of the sect. They were just too scared to voice it out. However, various forms of passive resistance, such as negligent work, silent opposition, and even harboring ill intentions, were inevitable. The three measures that Jade Brocade had implemented since his tenure had been extremely effective, but the side effects were also significant. Soothing the scattered and resentful morale of the people within the sect alone was a headache-inducing problem. Fortunately, Lu Yuan had already provided a solution for this issue. Recruitment on a large scale. After the killing of four hundred people, scaring those within the sect into fear and silence, and leaving the outside world speechless, Jade Brocade sheathed his butcher¡¯s knife and offered his sweetness. He reassigned those who had caused the turmoil to idle positions, either to be sidelined or to be expelled from the sect to travel outside and search for treasures for him, fully using them as tools and making the most out of waste. He then seriously selected and screened a group of disciples from among those unaffected, who were loyal to the sect and not involved with the troublemakers, offering them resources and job preferences, promoting their use. Based on these people, he embarked on large-scale recruitment of disciples across various subsidiary courtyards and the sect¡¯s headquarters. The first round of recruitment brought in four thousand people. Yes, that was the clever number, four thousand new disciples. Why choose this number? Jade Brocade was clear in his heart that it was the order from the true master, to double the number of disciples within a thousand years, before the sect went to war with Changqing Immortal Sect, to meet the demands of the war. Now, four thousand was just the beginning. Once these people started to grow initially, and if the resources could keep up, he planned to start a new round of expansion. But these were just his inner thoughts, and all of Taiping Dao¡¯s core plans were kept secret. The people outside, they had no idea of Lu Yuan¡¯s plans. Belonging to Taiping Dao, right after they had just killed people, they promptly recruited another four thousand disciples, immediately imbuing the act with a very political flavor. To all outsiders, it seemed that Taiping Dao, after a purge, had completely lost trust in those old disciples within the sect. These old disciples were too entangled with the outside worlda€¡±too many of their friends and family, along with their fellow disciples and masters, had been killed by Taiping Dao. Although they were from the same sect, in some sense, they were also enemies. Such disciples were certainly not ones Taiping Dao dared to rely on. Yet to directly kill these old disciples or expel them from the sect would lead to a devastating loss of strength for Taiping Dao, and that aftermath would be even more dire. So, after much deliberation, recruiting a batch of new blood and then sidelining those old disciples with questionable loyalty, sending them away to collect dust, became the best choice. To abandon those problematic disciples and then to recruit a batch of new ones, using the remaining unquestionable disciples to teach the newly initiated. In this way, after three to five hundred years, By the time those abandoned old disciples had died off and the new disciples had grown up, Taiping Dao would have completed a cycle of replacement. It purified the inside and strengthened the sect. The only cost was that during this replacement period, Taiping Dao would face greater financial strain. But that was nothing much of a concern. They were just some mortal disciples who had not yet attained immortality. With the current size of Taiping Dao, to say nothing of doubling, even a two or threefold increase could be sustained. So, for Jade Brocade, this matter posed no pressure at all. And for Taiping Dao, Using the excuse of replacing disciples, they also successfully deceived the public, using a smokescreen to cover up Taiping Dao¡¯s covert troop expansion. After all, the rationale was just too legitimate and powerful. No one would suspect that Taiping Dao¡¯s frantic recruitment of new disciples, following a large number of internal betrayals, was anything but well-intentioned. Even the Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate surrounding Taiping Dao had no slightest alertness or pressure towards this development. On the contrary, Seeing Taiping Dao in such internal disorder, these two sects that had been constantly extorted were elated. In their hearts, they just felt that those who engage in evil will ultimately bring about their own destruction. Taiping Dao was suffering from divine retribution for their many misdeeds, and it was well deserved! Did they really think they could take advantage of me so easily? Now let them see that by taking my things into their home, they¡¯ve also brought me into their household. Now their home is in turmoil, the children are in strife with their parents, and disciples have begun killing their masters. Taiping Dao is completely paralyzed. A sect, thus weakened for five to six hundred years. Taiping Dao missed out on five to six hundred years of development time, and the momentum that was booming was instantly halted, allowing the other two sects to gain five to six hundred years. No, with this loss and their gain, the time they secured might be even longer. ?¦Ï???.§ã? Originally, Taiping Dao was the fastest in accumulating strength compared to the other two sects. But now, having been severely damaged, before the disciples in the sect were replaced, before the next generation grew up, Taiping Dao could only mark time or even regress. Whereas, Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate could seize the chance to develop, reopening the gap between them. The former situation with Qing Immortal Sect being the strongest, Taiping Dao next, and Jiuzhou in the last place, might just have to change. History was about to return to its rightful place. The era of Taiping Dao was characterized by both its vigorous rise and its sudden demise. An internal purge had completely destroyed the rising momentum of Taiping Dao. Many outsiders couldn¡¯t help but think this way in their hearts. Chapter 1438 - Chapter 1438 Chapter 563 No Successor ?Chapter 1438: Chapter 563: No Successor Chapter 1438: Chapter 563: No Successor Changqing Mountain. When the news of Taiping Dao¡¯s massive slaughter arrived, the inside of the Changqing Immortal Sect was also terrified, completely shocked by the opponent¡¯s boldness and ruthlessness. No one had expected Taiping Dao to be so ruthless toward themselves, nor for the extent of their severance from the outside world to be so severe. Then, after the shock, came fear. As the main force behind the ¡°Yu Sect¡± protest, the Changqing Immortal Sect was deeply involved. The losses they suffered were also the greatest. And with this event¡¯s failure, Taiping Dao¡¯s internal cleanup targeted them as the most hated. Meanwhile, the Changqing Immortal Sect also suffered the heaviest losses in this event. Not only was Yu Shipei¡¯s future, their biggest chess piece within Taiping Dao, destroyed, but many spies they had planted over the years were also wiped out among those four hundred heads. There might still be some that slipped through the net, but under the terror of countless lost lives, even if those spies were given more courage, they dared not continue dealings on such a dangerous front with Changqing Immortal Sect. Disobeying Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s orders was merely losing some benefits, at most getting punished by the sect for past actions. After all, the new School Leader had decreed that past actions would not be pursued, but any recurrences after the decree would be met with absolute death. The small fish that slipped through were not deeply involved with Changqing Immortal Sect, so even if their actions were exposed, it would not endanger their lives. Under such circumstances, they¡¯d be foolish to continue binding themselves with Changqing Immortal Sect. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï The blood of those four hundred fellow sect members on the Immortal Execution Platform was still flowing, and the numerous heads stared down at them with open eyes. No one wanted to become one of them. The ¡°Yu Sect¡± had completely collapsed within Taiping Dao. With this series of knockout blows, the influence of Changqing Immortal Sect within Taiping Dao was almost completely eradicated, leaving nothing behind. This situation naturally caused the leading Changqing Immortal Sect to start panicking. ¡°School Leader, all of our planted agents within Taiping Dao have been wiped out, and those who were missed also dare not contact us anymore. Yu Shipei is also imprisoned, suffering punishment in Cold Wind Valley. In this way, from top to bottom, all our connections in Taiping Dao have been completely severed. Without them, influencing Taiping Dao in the future will be difficult.¡± After receiving the news, Yang Jihua, who was responsible for Taiping Dao affairs, hurriedly came to meet Song Xiren. ¡°Why panic?¡± Song Xiren looked at his disciple, whom he had specially nurtured, and scolded discontentedly, ¡°I¡¯ve told you many times, stay calm in the face of events, always maintain your composure to adapt to any changes. Have you turned a deaf ear to what I¡¯ve said?¡± Rebuked like this, Yang Jihua¡¯s expression changed, and he quickly apologized, ¡°Disciple is discomposed, please forgive me, uncle-teacher.¡± Song Xiren snorted softly, ¡°Good that you realize your mistake, remember not to do it again next time.¡± Yang Jihua obediently nodded, ¡°Yes.¡± Seeing his demeanor, Song Xiren sighed internally, somewhat disappointed. Over the years, he had high hopes for Yang Jihua, taking out the territory of the Three Nations from Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s control and tilting a plethora of resources to cultivate him. Cultivating a True Immortal with three nationsa€¡±what kind of treatment was that? That was Earth Immortal treatment. Yang Jihua now, along with the other two True Immortals inside Changqing Immortal Sect, were being cultivated as future Earth Immortal seeds, each allocated the vital essence of three nations, and a tremendous amount of resources were invested in their cultivation. To Song Xiren, these were his successors. Yao Baojuan, the former Sect Leader, had died, and before his death, had nurtured Song Xiren, the Heavenly Immortal seed. Now that he was the Sect Leader, it was naturally time to pick up the responsibilities of Sect Leader again, not only to develop the sect and restore strength, but also to cultivate an excellent next generation of successors for the sect, to inherit the legacy of past Sect Leaders. Although through the last decisive battle, Changqing Immortal Sect had taken the four nations of the Western Domain and seven nations of the Northern and Eastern Territories, altogether eleven nations. Including the thirteen nations originally controlled, Changqing Immortal Sect altogether had territory in twenty-four nations, nearly two-thirds of Changqing Domain, almost returning to its previous height of prosperity. When the former Changqing Immortal Venerate was in power, he did not occupy the entire Changqing Domain, leaving a dozen or so Immortal Sects as vassals within the domain. Regarding this matter, there had always been rumors outside suggesting that Changqing Immortal Venerate¡¯s achievement in the path of Heavenly Immortal was too shallow and flawed, incapable of even holding two-thirds of a domain, and that his foundation was weak. This is why, after becoming a Great True Person, he perished under a tribulation after just sixty thousand years. Weak strength and foundation might have been the reasons for Changqing Immortal Venerate¡¯s early demise. But these were just rumors, never verified. Other Great True Persons in different domains did not comment on this, and it was just among the Earth Immortals that such rumors circulated. The matters regarding Changqing Immortal Venerate could not be verified. But now, with Changqing Mountain having regained its peak territory, in terms of factual scope and foundation, it had already surpassed the coalition of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Taiping Dao. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï But Song Xiren was aware in his heart, though Changqing Immortal Sect had a strong foundation, it was merely larger in scale; its entire foundation had not yet transformed into strength. Chapter 1439 - Chapter 1439 Chapter 563 No One to Succeed_2 ?Chapter 1439: Chapter 563 No One to Succeed_2 Chapter 1439: Chapter 563 No One to Succeed_2 ¡°To consolidate the territories of these twenty-four nations would take at least five thousand years to fully develop and reach saturation,¡± he mused. At its peak, the Changqing Immortal Sect had ten Earth Immortal True Persons under the command of the Changqing Immortal Venerate. These individuals were collectively known as the Ten Immortals of Changqing and were renowned far and wide. Throughout the entire Donghua Continent, they were figures of considerable renown. Should they manage to return to such past glory, with ten Earth Immortals at their disposal, who in the whole Changqing Territory would be able to contend with them? The Jiuzhou Immortal Gate? The Taiping Dao? Merely jumping clowns, easily quashed with a wave of the hand. But all these were merely aspirations in his heart. Song Xiren was fully aware that for a sect as deeply rooted as the Changqing Immortal Sect, neither the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate nor the Taiping Dao could afford to sit idly by and watch them steadily develop, transforming their deep foundations into strength. For if the Changqing Immortal Sect ever came close to reviving its former glory, Then both the Jiuzhou and the Taoping Dao¡¯s Immortal Gates would surely have no means of survival. Faced with the choice of their demise or the enemy¡¯s, anyone with normal intelligence would make the correct decision. So, once the power of Jiuzhou was restored to a certain extent, the Taiping Dao would need to develop the territories of the Southern Domain they occupied. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Once both Immortal Gates regained strength, they would undoubtedly join hands and launch a war against the Changqing Immortal Sect, aiming to curb and weaken their recovery. Between these three Immortal Sects, the weak allied against the strong, creating a triadic balance. This outcome had been inevitable since the Taiping Dao entered the scene. Song Xiren was clear about this, which is why he had been tirelessly preparing for the inevitable, another decisive battle that was bound to come. Among these preparations, recruiting more disciples and nurturing more newcomers to restore the number of True Immortals in the Changqing Immortal Sect was crucial. Through his efforts, in seven hundred years, six new True Immortals had joined. The number of Human Immortals in the Changqing Immortal Sect had been restored to fourteen. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Post-war, Song Xiren chose three potential True Immortals, including Yang Jihua, from the surviving eight Human Immortals, nurturing them as Earth Immortal Seeds. Now, seven hundred years later, with ample resources dedicated to them, the growth of individuals like Yang Jihua had been exceptionally rapid. Take Yang Jihua, for instancea€¡± Seven hundred years ago, he was merely a newcomer who had just entered the Human Immortal Realm. But now, he had reached the pinnacle mid-stage of Human Immortal, just one step shy of advancing to the late-stage Human Immortal and beginning his sprint towards Earthly Immortal Realm. According to Song Xiren¡¯s estimation, if all went well, in another thousand yearsa€¡±around when this Nephew Yang will be approximately one thousand eight hundred years olda€¡±he should be able to coalesce the Earth Flower Dao Fruit and stand alongside him as an Earth Immortal True Person. Not yet two thousand years old and breaking through to Earth Immortal, such innate talent was indeed exceptional among True Immortals. The other two, though slightly behind Yang Jihua in terms of cultivation progress, were similarly impressive; in about a thousand years, they could attempt the Earth Immortal Realm. However, their chances of success were somewhat lower. Given that they were older than Yang Jihua and had weaker foundations, Song Xiren would be content if even one of them achieved Earth Immortal status. If two out of the three managed to do so, that, coupled with himself and another fellow disciple, would be enough to restore the Changqing Immortal Sect to its four Earth Immortals¡¯ glory within a millennium. Even Song Xiren himself, after a thousand years, would likely have reached the late stages of Earth Immortal. By that time, he would only be seven thousand years old. He would still have three thousand years, a term he could use to attempt reaching Heavenly Immortal. However, one knows himself best. Though dubbed a potential Heavenly Immortal, deep down he knew that with his qualifications, reaching such heights was absolutely beyond him. Most likely, like his own senior fellow disciple, he would be trapped at the pinnacle of Earth Immortal and die when his lifespan ended. But Song Xiren never harbored thoughts of dying bedridden, withering away in obscurity. He much preferred to emulate his senior, spending his last moments in life on the battlefield, taking down a formidable enemy, shedding his last drop of blood for the rise of his sect. Such a death on the battlefield would truly live up to his esteemed reputation. And that time was quickly approaching. According to Song Xiren¡¯s deductions, within a maximum of two thousand five hundred yearsa€¡±three thousand years since the last decisive battlea€¡±the Taiping Dao and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate would join forces and launch a new decisive battle against the Changqing Immortal Sect. And should matters escalate swiftly, upon witnessing Yang Jihua and the other two achieve Earth Immortal status in a millennium, both sects might move even sooner. With less than two thousand years of development, the Changqing Immortal Sect had already produced four Earth Immortals. If given more time, how much more formidable would they become? Once they soared to new heights, who could control them? Such a powerful sect cannot exist within the Changqing Territory. Therefore, whether it takes as long as two thousand five hundred years or as short as a thousand years, a major war affecting the entire Changqing Territory was inevitable. The peaceful days wouldn¡¯t last much longer, and a new war was destined to come. And before this war, Song Xiren needed to be well-prepared. Training more True Immortals and recruiting more disciples was merely the groundwork. Cultivating a qualified successor to lead the sect¡¯s development after his death was of the utmost importance. Because after this decisive battle, as long as the Changqing Immortal Sect wasn¡¯t defeated and could maintain its current territories, the next Head Teacher of Changqing would be the one to re-unify the Changqing Territory. A thousand years later, Song Xiren surely would have reached the late-stage Earth Immortal. By then, whether the war started immediately or could be delayed by a few more thousand years, he would have adequate lifespan to afford the delays. Chapter 1440 - Chapter 1440 Chapter 563 No One to Succeed_3 ?Chapter 1440: Chapter 563 No One to Succeed_3 Chapter 1440: Chapter 563 No One to Succeed_3 And among the Nine Provinces and Taiping Dao, Ding Wanxuan is still just roaming in the early stages of Earth Immortal, a thousand years from now at most he¡¯ll merely reach the mid-stage Earth Immortal. That old turtle from Taiping Dao, with a damaged foundation and exhausted potential, will never be able to breakthrough the early Earth Immortal stage in his lifetime, posing no threat. Now, within the entire Changqing Domain, his Cultivation stands unrivaled. And it will be even more so in a thousand years. By then, with the Cultivation of a late-stage Earth Immortal, employing various secret methods and drawing upon the reserves of his Lifespan and potential, he could exchange for a vast amount of combat power. Song Xiren was confident that he could take away three or four Earth Immortals from both the Nine Provinces and Taiping Dao. As for other sect¡¯s Earth Immortals, risking their lives in exchange, he should be able to take another one or two. By that time, these two sects would lose at least four Earth Immortals, or as many as five or six. Not to mention whether the other side would have so many Earth Immortals to lose by then, even if they managed to muster those numbers with the help of various branches of the Nine Provinces. Losing so many Earth Immortals at once, these two sects would essentially be ruined. After the battle, if they could have one Earth Immortal left, that would be considered good. Ordinary disciples and Human Immortals would mostly perish. But the Qing Immortal Sect, relying on its vast scale, would surely be able to survive at least two Earth Immortals, even if they fought at the cost of their lives, and even more Human Immortals and ordinary disciples. After the battle, even if the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Taiping Dao weren¡¯t destroyed, they would surely be confined to a corner, retreating to a corner in either the Southern or Western Domain, guarding a two or three-nation Territory as they awaited death. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The Qing Immortal Sect, however, could leverage the remaining strength to recover more Territory and further enhance its own foundation. In another thousand years, with some recovery in strength, they could continue to strike and thoroughly eliminate the remnants of the two sects that had been disabled by battle. By that time, the ancestral wishes of the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s predecessors to reunify the Changqing Domain would be accomplished. However, that day, decided to meet his end on the battlefield, Song Xiren was doomed not to see it. This great endeavor could only be left to the next School Leader to accomplish. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï For a successor like this, who upholds the will of three generations, bears the thousand-year legacy of the sect, and is destined to start a new era, perhaps even becoming the next Great True Person of the Qing Immortal Sect, Song Xiren would of course need to carefully select and cultivate. Otherwise, if any unfilial descendant should emerge and the great situation exchanged for with the lives of the past three generations of School Leaders, along with countless predecessors, were to collapse, then he would truly be unable to rest in peace even after death. Therefore, cultivating an outstanding successor to complete the final step of reviving the sect after his death became Song Xiren¡¯s utmost concern. The importance of this task surpassed all else. Because at this point, with his disregard for death, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Taiping Dao were actually no longer capable of causing any significant turbulence. Previously, Qing Immortal Sect had won against Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and its supporting Nine Provinces, using only half of the Changqing Domain. Now, with two-thirds of the Changqing Domain, facing a declining Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and even with Taiping Dao added, the advantage was even greater. This battle, as long as they don¡¯t get careless and are willing to pay the price, victory was certain. At least from the current situation, Song Xiren could not see the possibility of his own defeat. Therefore, he was not concerned with what was happening to Taiping Dao, but only with how Yang Jihua dealt with the issue, only with the skills his Nephew exhibited in handling it. Because the successor Song Xiren had chosen was this Nephew Yang before him. It wasn¡¯t that he regarded the other party so highly, but that, as it stood, the best candidate for the next School Leader of Qing Immortal Sect was this person. Currently, among Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s Earth Immortal True Persons, there¡¯s only Song Xiren and another junior brother, who were already too old, by the time they fight the next decisive battle, even if they didn¡¯t die on the Battlefield. They would likely meet their deaths from natural age before the sect could launch a campaign for unification. The great task of unifying the Changqing Domain could not possibly be completed by their generation. Among the next generation, besides Yang Jihua, the other two Earth Immortal Seeds, as mentioned before, simply lack a strong enough foundation to hope for more than becoming an Earth Immortal. When they reach the Domain Flower Realm, they would probably only roam around the early stages at most; even if they push it, they would only make it to the mid-stage. Moreover, whether they could survive the next war was also a question. Only Yang Jihua, with a decent foundation and talent, held the hope of breaking through to the late-stage Earth Immortal, and even had a slim chance of brushing against the edge of Heavenly Immortal. Only a late-stage Earth Immortal School Leader would have the strength to support the great task of unifying the Changqing Domain, and after recovering the entire Changqing Domain, withstand the pressures from all sides and protect the sect¡¯s continued legacy. This was also the reason he chose Yang Jihua. As for the disciples of the next generation. In these seven hundred years, among the new breakthrough Human Immortals and even True Disciples who had yet to achieve True Immortality, Song Xiren had naturally identified many talents. There were also several Heavenly Immortal seeds. But as it was said before, time was too short. Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Taiping Dao wouldn¡¯t give Qing Immortal Sect much time to develop. Before the next decisive battle starts, these new disciples¡¯ Cultivation would at most be in the late-stage Human Immortal. Not even Earth Immortals, how could they support the Immortal Sect? These people are the future, but before the future arrives, even the Heavenly Immortal Seeds don¡¯t count for much. Song Xiren could not rely on them. These talented individuals were left for Yang Jihua, for the next School Leader to count on. His job was only to pave the way and teach the future School Leader well. But now it seemed, although the other party performed adequately in daily affairs, he tended to panic and act rashly during major events, which was certainly not the temperament befitting one in a high position. Handing the sect over to Yang Jihua was not an ideal choice. But if not him, who else within the sect could be utilized? The older generation was on the verge of withering, the middle generation was incompetent, and the new generation had yet to grow. Qing Immortal Sect, at this moment, might seem in full glory with boundless potential for the future. But in reality, it had already fallen into a dire situation with a gap in talent, lacking suitable candidates. At this time, even if Song Xiren was dissatisfied with Yang Jihua, he had no choice but to pick the lesser evil, forcefully promoting him to use the higher-standing position. Because apart from him, other options were even worse. Thinking of this, Song Xiren needed to exercise patience, adopting a gentler tone as he said, ¡°Is it not simply Taiping Dao killing their own people? Their self-destruction and fratricidal acts are actually beneficial to us, are they not? Why are you in such a hurry? Instead of being flustered, you better think about how our Qing Immortal Sect should respond to this incident, how to maximize the expansion of our own interests from this situation. Isn¡¯t this better than your anxious anticipation? Jihua, I have always valued and nurtured you with care, and I¡¯ve entrusted you with the affairs of Taiping Dao; this is my trust in you. You have the ability to handle this matter well. Think carefully about what should be done now, then tell me your answer.¡± Song Xiren patiently and kindly counseled, taking on the role of a Teacher. Chapter 1441 - Chapter 1441 Chapter 564 Plan to Punish the Heart ?Chapter 1441: Chapter 564: Plan to Punish the Heart Chapter 1441: Chapter 564: Plan to Punish the Heart ¡°School Leader, I believe that in today¡¯s era, since our relationship with the high ranks of Taiping Dao is beyond salvage, we can try to start from the grassroots level.¡± Feeling Song Xiren¡¯s earnest gaze upon him, Yang Jihua forced himself to calm down and after a moment of contemplation, he cautiously answered, ¡°Isn¡¯t Taiping Dao now ostracizing those rebellious disciples in the sect? In order to replace them, they are even willing to directly recruit four thousand disciples, intending to give the entire sect a thorough purge. It¡¯s true that under Taiping Dao¡¯s strict defense, we indeed find it difficult to interfere with these new disciples. But it¡¯s different for those who are ostracized. This time, Taiping Dao directly executed four hundred disciples and punished over a thousand, and there are even more than two thousand people implicated through association with these errant disciples. Inside the entirety of Taiping Dao, a full three thousand people have been affected by this incident. And these people can no longer be trusted by Taiping Dao, nor can they regain the attention of the sect, they are destined to be abandoned. Are these people really content with being abandoned, replaced by others? That is certainly impossible. Hence, we just need to exploit this point, to entice those three thousand discarded and abandoned individuals, to continue transforming them into our power, and soon enough we will be able to cultivate the pieces that were cleared out today.¡± At this point, Yang Jihua paused for a moment and sneered, ¡°Taiping Dao thinks that by discarding these people and imposing strict prohibitions, they can slowly replace them and complete the circulation of blood within the sect, which is laughable. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï No one likes to be a failure, and even less so to give up their path to becoming an Immortal. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï By doing this, Taiping Dao will only drive these people into a corner, pushing them to side with us. Taiping Dao doesn¡¯t want them, but we do. Taiping Dao won¡¯t cultivate them, but we will. Whatever Taiping Dao plans to do, we will simply do the opposite. Do they really believe that mere prohibitions can stem the tide of human hearts? Before the Great Tao, how could mere life and death threats obstruct Our Generation of Cultivators? Those prohibitions won¡¯t kill the human spirit; as long as we can provide sufficient guidance and offer ample benefits, those who no longer have prospects in Taiping Dao will naturally gravitate towards us. Once enough of these people gather, and once they grow under our cultivation, Then within Taiping Dao, a faction centered around us, with the goal of resisting the tyranny of the Taiping Dao high ranks, will be declared formed. Taiping Dao believes it has deterred the hearts of people, but what they have done is not radical enough. Let¡¯s not forget, those discarded and set aside people are also disciples of Taiping Dao, possessing the identity of insiders. Even if they are not trustworthy, as long as these people do not openly raise the banner and oppose Taiping Dao in broad daylight, Then Taiping Dao will never be able to truly deal with them. And as long as these people exist, Taiping Dao will be divided within, never able to unite. Once we cultivate these people, whether we use them to turn the tides in our favor during a decisive future battle with Taiping Dao, Or let them cause havoc within Taiping Dao, forcing them into an unending internal consumption. Or even combine both strategies. Should we manage this, it will be an inexhaustible benefit for our Qing Immortal Sect.¡± Yang Jihua spoke in a muted voice, with a calm tone, articulating the heart-wrenching words that could split a sect. This time, they were indeed caught off guard by Taiping Dao, their seven hundred years of hard work wasted in an instant. But likewise, Due to Taiping Dao¡¯s ¡°decisive¡± actions and the clearing out of the pieces they had cultivated with difficulty, they quickly fostered over three thousand new pieces for outsiders. The loss of four hundred people resulted in the gain of three thousand. After this round of events, it is hard to say whether the Qing Immortal Sect has won or lost. ¡°Haha, the nephew speaks well, Taiping Dao thinks it has prevailed, yet it has provided us with a bridal gown.¡± Watching his good nephew, who had calmed down under his guidance and immediately proposed a countermeasure, Song Xiren couldn¡¯t help but laugh heartily, ¡°Taiping Dao has recruited four thousand new disciples this time, so what? He has four thousand newcomers, but within the sect of Taiping Dao, there are equally three thousand dissatisfied old members. He doesn¡¯t want these old members, but we do. As long as we hold onto these old members, then half of the people within Taiping Dao will be leaning towards us. We don¡¯t even have to try too hard; we just need to pick a few exceptional individuals among these old members, cultivate them, and they will themselves resist the despotism of Taiping Dao. Those who bear deep grudges against the Taiping Dao upper echelons, we don¡¯t need to incite them; they will seek their revenge on their own. After that, whether Taiping Dao infights or their high ranks react swiftly with a thorough purge, Taiping Dao will have no peace in the days to come.¡± Taiping Dao has already killed four hundred people this time; four hundred bloody heads have already caused disaffection within their ranks and struck fear in the outside world. If Taiping Dao were to undertake another major purge now, and cleanly dispose of the remaining three thousand, Then those four thousand new disciples who had just entered the sect, and subsequent newcomers to Taiping Dao, will inherently bear a shadow, a mistrust towards the sect upon learning of these events. Perpetual mutual suspicion is inevitable. At the same time, executing an entire sect in one fell swoop, even if Taiping Dao had its reasons, would be considered unduly harsh in the eyes of the world outside and trigger widespread indignation. Chapter 1442 - Chapter 1442 Chapter 564 Plan to Punish the Heart_2 ?Chapter 1442: Chapter 564: Plan to Punish the Heart_2 Chapter 1442: Chapter 564: Plan to Punish the Heart_2 Once the news spread, the image of Taiping Tao Sect as a victim and its previously good reputation among other Cultivators would be completely destroyed. Taiping Tao Sect would be seen just like Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, having their reputations thoroughly tarnished and being viewed as fallen and corrupt. Such a severe blow would be enough for Taiping Tao Sect to struggle significantly. If Taiping Tao Sect did not clean up those resentful, rebellious disciples, then Qing Immortal Sect only needed to foster them openly to cultivate a force of rebellion within Taiping Tao Sect itself. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï The harm caused by this wouldn¡¯t be too great immediately. But sustained over time, it could destroy the entirety of the sect and overturn their founding principles. Having chosen this path, Song Xiren could well wake up laughing in his dreams. Thus, no matter the choice, they were comfortably sitting back, fishing, and not in a hurry at all. This was also why, when Song Xiren heard the news from Taiping Tao Sect, he was not even slightly panicked. Because he had anticipated it all. Ever since Taiping Tao Sect initially began accepting favors from Qing Immortal Sect, starting to allow external forces to infiltrate the sect, Song Xiren had commenced his scheming for today. He hadn¡¯t predicted, though, that the situation would escalate to its current extent. Taiping Tao Sect had numerous methods to slowly cleanse its internal ranks. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï But none of these methods were used by Jade Brocade. The newly appointed School Leader had chosen the most problematic method among all. In this act, Song Xiren only wanted to saya€| Brilliantly done. If he didn¡¯t know that Jade Brocade couldn¡¯t possibly be an outsider-sent spy, he¡¯d have thought he was planted there by others to sabotage from within. With these three devastating blows struck, whether the enemy was harmed was unclear, but Taiping Tao Sect was already being roasted over the flames, which Song Xiren knew all too well. The other party had already been so proactive; thus, he naturally couldn¡¯t just watch idly. It would be far too undermining of their intentions. To follow up by adding fuel to the fire, making it burn fiercer, ideally reducing Taiping Tao Sect to ashes, would not fail to support the assistance provided by this Jade Sovereign. ¡°But Uncle-Master, the interior of Taiping Tao Sect is already like a powder keg; just a nudge would blow it wide open. However, in our hands, we also lack the fuse to ignite the fire. Although the disciple has thought of how to strike at Taiping Tao Sect, implementing it lacks a channel. Moreover, Taiping Tao Sect just issued a ban against excessive contact between its disciples and those from other sects, and at this time, even if we wanted to pull in those old members, they probably wouldn¡¯t dare to contact us.¡± Despite some delight at Taiping Tao Sect¡¯s foolish actions, Yang Jihua realized the difficulty in executing this plan after his initial joy. Merely some prohibitions indeed couldn¡¯t stop those old members within Taiping Tao Sect who wanted to advance. In pursuit of the Great Tao, these old members were not afraid of death. As long as Qing Immortal Sect could offer benefits to aid them in their quest for immortality, they could naturally win these people over. But the four hundred heads that Taiping Tao Sect had just taken were not for nothing. With these beheadings as deterrence, it would be quite challenging for Qing Immortal Sect to pull these old members to their side, at least in the short term. After all, these people wanted to achieve immortality, not seek death. It wouldn¡¯t be possible to continue to act riskily and provoke trouble at this critical juncture. Without a good channel for contacting the outside world beforehand, it would be very difficult for Qing Immortal Sect to reach these people. Moreover, even after reaching them, contemplating the method and channel to circumvent Taiping Tao Sect¡¯s prohibitions was also thought-worthy. Having learned from previous lessons, Taiping Tao Sect would undoubtedly scrutinize the interactions between their disciples and the external world closely. If they were not secretive enough and did not provide a legitimate reason, even if they wanted to offer favors, they couldn¡¯t deliver them to the desired hands. Even if they succeeded in delivering them, the recipients might not survive to enjoy them. How to develop this channel and strike a balance within it was a matter worthy of in-depth study. With Yang Jihua¡¯s current capabilities and control over resources, it was clearly impossible for him to achieve these. ¡°Ha ha, this matter is simple,¡± Song Xiren laughed heartily, then slowly said, ¡°In these recent times, I received a message from Master Zhou in the Eastern Desolate Domain, stating that a mysterious abyssal mansion has appeared in the inner seas of the Eastern Desolate, suspected to be a legacy left by an ancient demon clan from the Black Abyss. The area impacted by this mansion is vast, and after being revealed, nearly half the region. Even the dragon clans and demon clans of the Eastern Inner Seas cannot consume this mansion whole. Now, in the nearby sea regions and continents, all significant powers with any channel have heard of this news. Countless individuals are drawn by the news, with many True Immortals heading towards that secret mansion. And the numerous Cultivators beneath them are even more countless. With such a grand occasion, how could we of Changqing Domain be absent? All these years, Taiping Tao Sect has been searching for various Immortal Materials, wishing to craft Immortal Artifacts, right? A mansion left from ancient times, harboring unknowable Heavenly and Earthly treasures within, gaining even a little from there would exceed numerous exploration endeavors vastly. I do not believe that, upon hearing this news, Taiping Tao Sect could remain unmoved. Those abandoned within their ranks, upon hearing this news, could they remain unmoved? Since they¡¯ve already been forsaken, rather than living a lonely old age, why not risk their lives for a chance at the secret mansion, a struggle for an opportunity to become immortal? We only need to wait at the secret mansion. When exploring, connecting with those from Taiping Tao Sect, we can naturally avoid detection. Then, whatever the outcome for those in the secret mansion, we only need to prepare a significant gift for those we select to back. Chapter 1443 - Chapter 1443 Chapter 564 Scheme of Heart-Extermination_3 ?Chapter 1443: Chapter 564: Scheme of Heart-Extermination_3 Chapter 1443: Chapter 564: Scheme of Heart-Extermination_3 ¡°` Let them harvest enough in the secret treasure vault, and that will be enough. Through such an adventure, those who return from the treasure vault with bountiful gains can¡¯t be criticized by anyone. Once their gains from the exploration have been assimilated, in another three to five hundred years, a few more True Immortals would potentially emerge among those old adventurers. With new True Immortals taking their stand, those old figures who were forsaken, as long as they are not fools, will naturally gather under these True Immortals. Having experienced this calamity, these people should also have grown wiser and would not, as before, openly and foolishly challenge the sect¡¯s higher-ups. As long as they learn to compromise and conceal their ambitions, without violating the sect rules, then Taiping Dao can¡¯t touch them. Thus, a thorn would be forever embedded in the heart of Taiping Dao, always ready to deliver a fatal blow.¡± Facing his own nephew, Song Xiren did not bother to conceal anything and laid out a newly conceived scheme. After listening, Yang Jihua couldn¡¯t help but show excitement, and after a moment of thought, he added, ¡°Uncle-Master¡¯s plan is good, but it can still be perfected. Since we are going to do it, we might as well do it thoroughly. We¡¯ve had a falling out with Taiping Dao this time, but we haven¡¯t completely torn our faces; it¡¯s still necessary to maintain a superficial peace. The Yang Xiuan, supported by the remnants of Nine Spirits, seems to have gotten wind of something in advance and took the initiative to lay low, avoiding this disaster. This also kept those remnants of Nine Spirits on good terms with Taiping Dao, which is unacceptable. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï We have suffered a loss and those remnants of Nine Spirits should not expect to have it easy either. The candidates we send to contact those old figures must not be our openly known people. Let¡¯s have our spies who are planted among the remnants of Nine Spirits to actively invite people from Taiping Dao, taking them to the secret treasure vault in Black Abyss. The entire process of enticing and bribing can be handled by these spies, while we completely extricate ourselves from involvement. In this way, if any issues arise later, it can all be traced back to the remnants of Nine Spirits, without implicating us. If Taiping Dao and they fall out, it would be even better. Such internal strife within both sects, whether they end up fighting or not, will breed mutual suspicion and distrust. It would then be difficult for them to join forces in the future.¡± Yang Jihua was also quite cunning, presenting such a malicious and odious strategy. But to Song Xiren, it was a cause for great joy, feeling that his nephew had finally been cultivated successfully. He immediately clapped his hands, ¡°Good, let¡¯s proceed as you¡¯ve suggested; I leave the matter to you, see to it that it¡¯s done well.¡± Yang Jihua clasped his hands and accepted the command, ¡°As you wish, School Leader.¡± ¡­ In the following days, the plotting of the Changqing Immortal Sect, under the leadership of Yang Jihua, was swiftly executed. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The Changqing Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, old adversaries of the Nine Provinces, had been infiltrating each other for over ten thousand years, and were as leaky as a sieve. Taiping Dao was originally no different. But after this recent purge, this trend was quickly curbed. However, a greater side effect was also taking effect. During these days, a rumor began to spread within the Changqing Domain a€¡± on the Eastern Desolate Inner Sea, a Black Abyss secret treasure vault had emerged. The owner of that vault, the Black Abyss demon clan, was an ancient, powerful group with Heavenly Immortals as their mightiest members, who once dominated the Sea Areas. A legacy treasury left behind by such force was certainly extraordinary. Rumors said that inside the vault, there were countless treasures and profound heritage from ancient times, all hidden within. Simply acquiring some of those would give people a chance at becoming immortal. Naturally, the news stirred the hearts of many. But no one is a fool. Everyone is aware that there may really be great opportunities within that vault. But precisely because of these opportunities, there are also an extraordinary number of eyes set upon it. Rushing in search of treasure, especially within the territory of the Sea Clan, the likelihood of finding riches isn¡¯t great, but the chance of losing one¡¯s life is eight or nine out of ten. In such a situation, even if they¡¯re green with envy, very few are willing to rush in and meet their demise. Unless one has little lifespan left or one¡¯s prospects are already exhausted and they wish to take a chance on fate. Coincidentally, Taiping Dao has just such three thousand individuals with no future left and nothing but their lives to lose. So when their old friends from across the Nine Provinces started coming forth, taking the initiative to be the first to brave the dangers and starting to gather companions to form teams to explore the Black Abyss vault. The Taiping Dao¡¯s old figures, already in despair, were immediately set in motion. After all, staying in the sect didn¡¯t earn them trust or favor; they still had to endure surveillance and their movements were restricted. Rather than that, better to risk their lives and fight for a chance at immortality in the Black Abyss vault. So when the people of the Nine Provinces showed up, over a thousand of the three thousand old figures responded immediately. Over a thousand people formed exploration teams, based on different circles, and headed for the Black Abyss in a mighty procession. As for these matters, Taiping Dao, which had already issued a ban, chose to turn a blind eye. The reason was simple. Jade Brocade coveted the treasures inside the Black Abyss vault. He was still far lacking the Immortal Materials necessary for his promotion to Earth Immortal, which, if he had to accumulate them himself, would take who knows how long? But if he could gain something from the vault, maybe one exploration would be enough to gather what he needed. And what to do about those disciples going to explore, the old figures abandoned by oneself? What should be done will be done, of course. As long as these people still wish for immortality, they definitely need the fate resources provided within Taiping Dao. Taiping Dao only wants the materials for refining. Although these treasures are precious, they are not the most valued by many Cultivators. The sect does not need their other gains, just some external objects. Even if these disciples bear hatred in their hearts, they would not jeopardize their path to longevity. If they really gain something valuable in the vault, especially related refining immortal materials, they will surely bring them back to the sect, to exchange for a nation¡¯s fate resources. With this reliance, Jade Brocade was not at all anxious. But while he was not anxious, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate sensed the scent of conspiracy amid this event. ¡°` Chapter 1444 - Chapter 1444 Chapter 565 Nine Provinces Dilemma ?Chapter 1444: Chapter 565 Nine Provinces Dilemma Chapter 1444: Chapter 565 Nine Provinces Dilemma When various rumors about the Black Abyss Secret Mansion swirled among the outside world, the sudden large-scale search by disciples under his command for members of the Taiping Tao Sect to hunt for treasures in the Black Abyss Secret Mansion quickly caught the attention of the Nine Provinces¡¯ upper echelons. Haiyun Pavilion. Upon discovering this, Zhen Xuan had rushed here to seek out Ding Wanxuan, the leader of the Nine Provinces, to discuss the matter. ¡°Uncle Master, recently the news of the Black Abyss Secret Mansion has caused quite a stir, inciting unrest among the people in this domain. Even our own disciples have been unable to restrain themselves, starting to gather their friends and heading to the Eastern Barbarian Inner Sea to explore the Secret Mansion.¡± Zhen Xuan slowly expressed his observations, followed by a worried tone, ¡°If it were just that, it would be fine. Disciples of our sect risking danger in pursuit of the Dao shows great courage and is worthy of our encouragement and comfort as their elders. However, these disciples, once there, sought companionship with members of the Taiping Dao Sect who just underwent the execution of four hundred immortals and were strictly forbidden by the Taiping Tao Sect. Moreover, these were the same members who had been punished, considered rebels by the Taiping Dao, and already abandoned. Even if they had overly close dealings with the Taiping Dao in the past and made many friends there, we had already warned our disciples during the great purge in Taiping Dao, instructing them not to associate with Taiping Dao disciples at this time. Yet now, these people, despite being instructed within the sect, have openly defied the elders¡¯ admonition. At such a sensitive time, what do these disciples mean by acting this way, what are they trying to achieve?¡± Zhen Xuan¡¯s voice carried considerable annoyance as the disciples¡¯ defiant and self-centered behavior clearly infuriated him. ¡°Is that so?¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï These days, I have been busy communicating with several Dao friends from the Outer Territory about the appearance of the Black Abyss Secret Mansion. I haven¡¯t paid much attention to the movements of those disciples inside the sect. Tell me, is this the doing of those from the Qing Immortal Sect?¡± The emergence of the Black Abyss Secret Mansion can almost be described as the grandest event in nearly thirty thousand years in the surrounding Region Continent and Sea Areas. That is, after all, the heritage left by a Celestial Immortal Great Clan! Throughout the history of the Immortal Realm, any such heritage, if fully developed, could at least create one or two Earth Immortals. The stronger ones might even produce some Tribulation Crossing Treasures that help achieve Celestial Immortal status, a once-in-millennia opportunity. Countless Earth Immortals, unique and outstanding in their era, have fallen at the last hurdlea€¡±the Celestial Immortal Tribulation. Those Chosen wished to obtain a Tribulation treasure during their tribulation, yet could not. Now, with the appearance of this Secret Mansion, possibly containing Tribulation Crossing Treasures, who knows how many cultivators, stuck before the Celestial Immortal Tribulation and afraid to step forward, will go mad for it. By now, countless Earth Flower True Men with aspirations towards Celestial Immortality must have headed towards that Black Abyss Secret Mansion, right? Ding Wanxuan, currently just an Early Earth Immortal, also knew his own limits, understanding that he was not destined to break through Earth Immortal status in this life. So, he did not entertain such fantasies, lacking any interest in those Tribulation Crossing Treasures; those were not for him to covet. However, he was quite interested in the opportunities for Earth Immortals and Human Immortals. Now, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate is having a hard time. After losing the Western Domain¡¯s four nations, Jiuzhou¡¯s territory had shrunk by two-fifths, leaving only land of six nations. Honestly, to support five Immortal Sects on this much territory is extremely challenging. Initially, each of our Immortal Sects could at least sustain the volume of a Grand Fairy Door. But now, with five Immortal Sects sharing six nations, averaging one sect per nation, that¡¯s merely the standard of a regular Immortal Sect. Never mind Grand Fairy Doors, ensuring their own heritage continues is strenuous enough. Look at the Qing Immortal Sect, look at the Taiping Dao, how well and how fast have they grown in recent years? Then look at usa€¡±it¡¯s truly pitiful. For seven hundred years, possessing the lands of six nations, with the heritage of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, we¡¯ve only managed to cultivate two new Human Immortals. This is truly disappointing. It also made everyone realize that the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate is truly in decline. As for those rumors outside, as the current leader of Jiuzhou, Ding Wanxuan was well aware of them. But what could he do? When Brother Meng handed Jiuzhou over to him, their five Immortal Sects were already in a disastrous defeat. With two-fifths of the territory lost and so many lives perish, these faults were not his doing. Though as one of the leaders of Jiuzhou at the time, Ding Wanxuan unavoidably bore some responsibility, but it was secondary at most; the primary blame still lay with Meng Jianshan. It was Brother Meng who had led Jiuzhou to this state. And Ding Wanxuan was just a scapegoat. However, although he was a scapegoat, Ding Wanxuan hadn¡¯t completely resigned himself to fate and was always thinking of overturning the situation to make a comeback. Thus, over the years, he had also actively developed the sect. Under his guidance, although Jiuzhou had achieved scant results at the Human Immortal levela€¡±only adding two new Human Immortalsa€¡± Among regular disciples, there had been numerous geniuses emerging from Jiuzhou Immortal Gate over the years. These disciples, with outstanding innate talent, became the richest foundation of Jiuzhou. Chapter 1445 - Chapter 1445 Chapter 565 Nine Provinces Dilemma_2 ?Chapter 1445: Chapter 565 Nine Provinces Dilemma_2 Chapter 1445: Chapter 565 Nine Provinces Dilemma_2 They lacked no talent, no effort, no innate talent, no comprehension; the only thing they lacked was resources. As long as the resources were sufficient, Ding Wanxuan was confident that, within a century, the Nine Provinces could yield another three to five True Immortals. This was the greatest achievement he had accumulated after seven hundred years of diligent effort, nurturing and recovering the Nine Provinces. However, having an achievement was one thing, but making it bear fruit was not so easy. It was still the same issue, the Nine Provinces had too little territory, resources too scarce, while there were too many people and too many Immortal Sectsa€¡± there was simply not enough to go around. With the lands of six nations divided among five Immortal Sects to maintain internal balance and to ensure succession, Ding Wanxuan had to allocate one nation to each sect to pacify the people. And after this division, only one nation¡¯s worth of resources was left to train new disciples. How many new talents could one nation nurture? There was a reason that only two True Immortals had emerged from the Nine Provinces over these years. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã0 Conversely, using the resources of one nation to cultivate two True Immortals over seven hundred years was nothing short of a miracle. Word of this spread, and there was none who did not admire Ding Wanxuan¡¯s capabilities in training disciples. As the new Alliance Leader, he had done very well. What? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Why hadn¡¯t the five nations that had been allocated cultivated new talents? Were the five Immortal Sects incompetent? Certainly not. Although the lands of the five nations were divided among the five Immortal Sects, this division was only nominal. The actual usage rights of these lands had long been planned. Due to the current decline of the Nine Provinces and the severe scarcity of resources, they could only implement an elitist strategy to survive. Using limited resources, they cultivated the most outstanding talents. And as the Alliance Leader and the only Earth Immortal, the apparent leader of the Nine Provinces, Ding Wanxuan naturally needed focused cultivation. Otherwise, facing other Immortal Sects like Changqing Immortal Sect and Taiping Dao in the future, having a leader who couldn¡¯t fight would be not only embarrassing but also dangerous. This was a world where might concentrated in a single individual; the one with the highest cultivation level could dominate everything. If Ding Wanxuan couldn¡¯t fight, then the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was doomed to be destroyed. Thus, whether he liked it or not, whether the other Immortal Sects of the Nine Provinces liked it or not, cultivating Ding Wanxuan was their only choice. Therefore, apart from deliberately setting aside resources for nurturing new talents with one nation¡¯s worth of land. The remaining nominally divided five nations¡¯ lands, three of which were given to Ding Wanxuan, provided him with the basic resources needed for an Earth Immortal¡¯s cultivation. Over seven hundred years, Ding Wanxuan concentrated on leading the broad directives of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and diverted the rest of his energy to enhance his own cultivation as much as possible. He had endured seven hundred years of arduous cultivation and had vaguely touched the threshold of the mid-stage Earth Immortal. He felt that possessing seven to eight hundred years, he should be able to reach mid-stage Earth Immortal. Considering the time he spent lingering in the early stage after breaking through to Earth Immortal, he had used about two thousand years to reach mid-stage Earth Immortal. Do not think this duration was long. Compared to Lu Yuan, who took merely a few hundred years to cultivate from Human Immortal to Earth Immortal, and then from early Earth Immortal to mid-stage Earth Immortal in a few more hundred years, there was an unfathomable difference. But you must know, Lu Yuan and his cultivation were supported by ¡°Qi Luck¡±. Once this support was activated, it would equate to several times the cultivation speed of another cultivator in the same realm. For Lu Yuan, five hundred years was equivalent to five thousand years for others. His Avatars, too, due to being fruits of the Qi Luck Dao, had virtually no bottlenecks. As long as they could elevate their own quality and then accumulate enough Qi Luck, a breakthrough could be achieved by accumulation. The whole process had hardly any difficultiesa€¡±he just had to endure the time and build up his foundation. This was incomparable. Ding Wanxuan, with just the basic resources of three nations and spending two thousand years, broke through a minor realm. Among the Earth Immortals, he already possessed exceptionally outstanding innate talent. After all, an Earth Immortal had a lifespan of ten thousand years, and the Earthly Immortal Realm only had three phases: early, middle, and late. Advancing one stage every two thousand years, you could complete the journey in six thousand years. Even subtracting the two thousand years to cultivate from mortal to Earth Immortal, that would still leave two thousand years to attempt reaching Heavenly Immortal. From this perspective, Ding Wanxuan could already be called a Heavenly Immortal seed. In terms of innate talent, he was not inferior to the leader of the Changqing Immortal Sect, Song. Were it any other Earth Immortal, even given the same resources, it would be impossible for them to break through one realm in two thousand years like the two of them had. It was precisely because of this innate talent that Meng Jianshan had initially designated Ding Wanxuan as the successor, entrusting the Nine Provinces to him, believing in his capabilities. But no matter how talented, one still needed time and resources to grow. Ding Wanxuan, holding the lands of three nations, had been enduring and striving; within a thousand more years, he would be able to initially mature. He was indeed living up to Meng Jianshan¡¯s expectations. And he was not only focusing on himself but, like Brother Meng, he was also attending to the growth of subsequent generations. Apart from nurturing those direct disciples, Ding Wanxuan had also chosen a successor from among the remaining Human Immortals. This successor was none other than Zhen Xuan, who was sitting before him. There was no choice, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, after the post-war and following the death of Meng Jianshan, was left with only one Earth Immortal and three Human Immortalsa€¡±a true decimation to merely a handful of significant figures. Even after seven hundred years of development, only two more Human Immortals had emerged, bringing the total number of True Immortals, including Ding Wanxuan himself, to just six. Chapter 1446 - Chapter 1446 Chapter 565 Nine Provinces Dilemma_3 ?Chapter 1446: Chapter 565 Nine Provinces Dilemma_3 Chapter 1446: Chapter 565 Nine Provinces Dilemma_3 Under these circumstances, his options for choosing a successor were limited. Among the candidates, those who were cultivators with ascended backgrounds possessed extraordinary aptitude, strength, and temperaments. in addition, there was Brother Meng¡¯s junior, the head of the Purple Cloud Sect, who held a special status within the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates. All these factors combined, there was no one more suitable than Zhen Xuan among the Five Sects. Zhen Xuan did not disappoint his expectations. When Ding Wanxuan had first decided to cultivate Zhen Xuan, his Cultivation was only at the mid-level Human Immortal stage. Now, seven hundred years had passed, and with the support of the Two Countries¡¯ destinies, Zhen Xuan¡¯s Cultivation had soared at an astonishing speed, and he had now broken through to the late stage of Human Immortal. And within the late realm, he had progressed exceedingly far, almost reaching the threshold of Earth Immortal. Judging by the current momentum, in another three hundred years, when Zhen Xuan was two thousand three hundred years old, he would be able to attempt to charge at Earth Immortal. With seven hundred years to rush, and with the full cultivation support from Jiuzhou, given his aptitude, within a millennium, as long as he didn¡¯t encounter extremely bad luck, Zhen Xuan was bound to break through to Earth Immortal. By then, Jiuzhou would have another Earth Immortal, sweeping away the current decline. With another Earth Immortal to share the burden, the pressure Ding Wanxuan was currently shouldering would be greatly reduced, and he would not need to be so grieved. With two Earth Immortals, they could oversee two Earth Immortal formations, which, with one formation covering the Three Nations, would be just enough to encompass all of Jiuzhou¡¯s territories. With the formations as support, Jiuzhou¡¯s security situation would be greatly relieved, and the immediate crisis of survival would be resolved. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï In this way, even if the Qing Immortal Sect were to launch a large war again, they would not be passive. With sufficient confidence, they could engage in battle with them. This was also why Ding Wanxuan was determined to concentrate resources on cultivating both himself and Zhen Xuan. Because he needed to break through to mid-stage Earth Immortal, only then could he rely on the formation to confront Song Xiren, that monstrous genius. And Zhen Xuan also needed to break through to Earth Immortal, so that he could coordinate with himself on the battlefield and hold back other Earth Immortals of Jiuzhou. If they couldn¡¯t achieve this goal, then the next decisive battle would come, and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate would really be annihilated. Compared to the life and death survival of Jiuzhou, some cultivation of juniors could only be put aside. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï First, resolve the crisis of existence, then consider future development. This matter of prioritization could not be confused. However, while it was clear there was a strategic plan for priorities, it did not mean that Ding Wanxuan had completely neglected the juniors. If he truly didn¡¯t care, he would not have specifically reserved a whole country to provide juniors with a limited channel of ascension and invested heavily in cultivating the true disciples to reserve talents for the sect. Therefore, over these years, aside from Jiuzzhou¡¯s fixed resources, Ding Wanxuan had also been striving to explore new channels for resource acquisition. In this respect, Taiping Dao had set a good example for him. He constantly sent disciples out to travel, to seek the hidden and explore mysteries, looking for new resources from those Cave Mansions and secret realms. The Changqing Domain might be out of resources, but other places had them! After broadening his horizons, Ding Wanxuan was extremely supportive of his disciples going out to find resources. The breakthrough to True Immortal required the destiny of a whole country, but this was not fixed and unchangeable. For breakthrough realms, what cultivators needed were resources. It was just that various resources were hard to find, their acquisition unpredictable, making it difficult to ensure a stable output. Relying on these was fundamentally unreliable in guaranteeing a sect¡¯s effective succession. Thus, after discovering the ingenious use of destiny, the various sects treated it as a stable resource entry and developed numerous ingenious methods using destiny as a breakthrough resource. Destiny was merely one of the auxiliary channels and resources for cultivators¡¯ breakthrough to True Immortal, and not the only channel or resource. Various treasures produced by heaven and earth could also aid cultivators¡¯ breakthroughs, albeit with great difficulty in finding them and instability. But now, as Jiuzhou was scant in resources, unable to support too many disciples With no solutions from within, they could only look externally. Although the treasures from various Cave Mansions and secret realms were not stable in production, it was better than nothing. Given the current difficult situation, to provide the disciples with hope was already good enougha€¡±there was no room for other complaints. Therefore, Ding Wanxuan was one hundred percent supportive of the policy of going out with Taiping Dao¡¯s disciples for adventures and explorations. Similarly, after hearing about the Yuan Mansion¡¯s secrets, he was immediately tempted by this massive resource production site. The treasures from external Cave Mansions and secret realms were always limited. Many solitary cultivators and sect disciples had already gone to compete for them. Now with the addition of Taiping Dao and his Jiuzhou Immortal Gates, the situation was akin to too many wolves and not enough meat, with insufficient to go around. In recent years, the few disciples who had gone out and managed to bring back any gains were few and far between. The acquisition of resources was becoming increasingly scarce, and this had already caused Ding Wanxuan considerable worry. Suddenly, there was the emergence of a Heavenly Immortal secret mansion, which was fantastic news. He had not planned to compete with others for those Heavenly Immortal resources, and he didn¡¯t hold much hope even for Earth Immortal resources. Ding Wanxuan was merely in the early Earth Immortal stage himself; competing with other Earth Immortals for resources was too difficult and too risky. He needed to look after the entire Jiuzhou Immortal Sect and could not take that risk. But going for some Human Immortal resources, that should be no problem, right? Over these years, with himself governing, the Jiuzhou disciples had a rough time, and life was hard, which always made Ding Wanxuan feel guilty. He was constantly thinking about how to compensate those unfairly treated disciples. Now with the emergence of the Yuan Mansion, there was an opportunity. As long as he could obtain some resources from this mansion, even if only managing to seize a share of Human Immortal fortune, that would be a tremendous gain for Jiuzhou at present. The Human Immortals in the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates were too few in number. There were merely five, hardly enough to support the current situation. Continuing like this, being left far behind by the Qing Immortal Sect and Taiping Dao was inevitable. If efforts were not made, even if they could withstand the next attack from Qing Immortal Sect, Jiuzhou would only slowly decline, something Ding Wanxuan could not accept. Therefore, in recent days, upon hearing the news of the Yuan Mansion, he had been constantly planning for it. Continuously communicating with some good friends, contemplating whether it was worth the risk to make the trip and try their luck over there. It was precisely because he had been focusing on this that he paid less attention to the affairs of the sect. Leading to such a significant event within the sect, it was only now, through Zhen Xuan¡¯s report, that he came to understand the full details. This was indeed a lapse in his responsibilities as the Alliance Leader. Fortunately, Zhen Xuan lived up to his favor, acting reliably and sensibly. Before coming, he had thoroughly investigated the details of the situation, and when asked, he immediately answered, ¡°Indeed, there is the shadow of the Qing Immortal Sect in this matter. According to the investigation by my disciple nephew, those who invited the Jiuzhou disciples, the leaders among them, were all the ones we have been suspiciously observing or confirmed as Jiuzhou traitors. This matter cannot be separated from those treacherous Qing sect members. They simply wished to use this action to damage our relations with Taiping Dao, the traitors truly detestable!¡± Zhen Xuan couldn¡¯t help but curse at this point. Chapter 1447 - Chapter 1447 Chapter 566 Grafting ?Chapter 1447: Chapter 566 Grafting Chapter 1447: Chapter 566 Grafting ¡°So it seems that the large-scale invitation of disciples from our sect to join the Taiping Dao Sect in traveling was orchestrated by the Qing Immortal Sect,¡± he concluded. After listening to the narrative, Ding Wanxuan couldn¡¯t help but stroke his beard and ponder. Zhen Xuan coldly huffed, ¡°Exactly, this operation was all the work of spies. Otherwise, why would disciples loyal to us risk infuriating the Taiping Dao and insist on venturing into the perilous Black Abyss at this time, effectively gambling with their lives? What normal person would do such a thing?¡± The incident at the Black Abyss Secret Mansion had caused such a stir that every True Immortal in the world was alerted. Moreover, the location of the secret mansion¡¯s emergence was within the East Desolate Inner Sea, home to powers like the Qingyuan Dragon Clan and several other Heavenly Immortal-level forces. People from the Donghua Continent who wished to gain advantages there first had to get past these Sea Demons of the Sea Clan. For the True Immortals, breaking through the blockade and entering the Black Abyss Secret Mansion might not be too difficult. However, for cultivators below the level of a True Immortal, attempting to breach countless Sea Demons¡¯ defenses and venture deep into enemy territory in search of treasures¡­ It was akin to a lone rider charging into an army of thousands, a truly fatal endeavor. Even if a large number of cultivators charged together, increasing the likelihood of breaking through, the chances, although higher, were still not without significant obstacles. Surely, many would die in the process. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï While ¡°nine deaths and one life¡± might be an exaggeration, ¡°six or seven deaths and three or four survivals¡± was close to reality. That was just for breaking through the Sea Clan¡¯s blockade. On the way to the expedition, encountering other Immortal Sect Cultivators and those demonic cultivators from the evil paths would inevitably lead to conflicts. Once inside the secret mansion, facing other adventurers seeking opportunities as well as the True Immortals who had entered with them, and the various dangers present within the mansion¡­ After numerous battles, of ten people who set out on the expedition, whether even one would return was uncertain. Faced with such odds of death, despite the great allure of the Black Abyss Secret Mansion, many would sober up and start to ponder if it was truly worth it. A moment of careful consideration would discourage more than ninety percent of people. Furthermore, with the orders issued by Zhen Xuan and other high-ranking members within the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, and with guidance from their mentors, disciples were even less likely to disregard the high death rate and the interests of their sect to join others from the Taiping Dao in the sea expedition. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Therefore, those who could still undertake this were driven by motives more significant than their own lives and the interests of their sect, leading them to engage in such detrimental actions. Looking over the entire Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, looking over the entire Changqing Domain, only the Qing Immortal Sect could drive these disciples to such reckless abandon. Only as spies with major leverage held by the Qing Immortal Sect over them, or perhaps from the start, their allegiance lay with the Qing Immortal Sect, could they make such a choice at this time. Not to mention, amongst those disciples who traveled, many had already had their identities exposed and were on file at the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Just by looking at these individuals¡¯ behaviors and actions, it was already nearly certain that they were undoubtedly spies. Even if some might have been misunderstood, these individuals, at this moment, disregarding their sect¡¯s interests to pursue this matter¡­ Whether out of foolishness, unaware of the consequences, or out of malice, caring only for themselves, or perhaps deceived by the spies, foolishly getting on board. Either way, there was no need to keep such individuals. ¡°As you said, this time our various sects from Jiuzhou have about two hundred people running to connect with the Taiping Dao, joining them in the sea expedition. Our Jiuzhou sect members, even after seven hundred years of recuperation, have only managed to rebuild up to four thousand disciples. Now, suddenly two hundred spies spring up, showing how deeply infiltrated and fraught with longstanding corruption, turning us virtually into a sieve,¡± said Ding Wanxuan. Having confirmed that those were spies, even though Ding Wanxuan had long suspected the situation within his own sect, he couldn¡¯t help but feel heartbroken. Two hundred spies out of four thousand people was a ratio of one in twenty. And that was just those exposed on the surface, disposable pawns pushed forward by the Qing Immortal Sect. In the shadows, who knows how many more there were, those hidden faces being spies arranged by the Qing Immortal Sect. Ding Wanxuan felt that among the remaining people, at least a hundred more were deeply undercover spies. Moreover, these spies, not yet sacrificed, clearly held higher value, possibly having infiltrated their upper echelons in terms of identity, position, and strength. He had to consider deeply that over these seven hundred years, the two Human Immortals they had cultivated, whether there were hidden agents of the Qing Immortal Sect among them. After all, the incident with the Taiping Dao was still vivid in his memory. That Master Yu, who was detained, emerged as the Taiping Dao underwent a major purge, and various details became public, revealing him as a puppet propped up by the Qing Immortal Sect. Moreover, in a bid to establish a faction for the Qing Immortal Sect, he almost incited a rebellion within the Taiping Dao with his ¡°Yu Faction.¡± Had it not been for the decisive actions of the new School Leader of the Taiping Dao, who suppressed the uprising by killing four hundred people and detaining Yu Shipei, the Taiping Dao¡¯s current state would be unimaginable. With such a precedented example vividly before him, as an old rival that had been in conflict with the Qing Immortal Sect for over ten thousand years, constantly infiltrating each other, Ding Wanxuan held little confidence in his own sect¡¯s situation. Chapter 1448 - Chapter 1448 Chapter 566 Grafting_2 ?Chapter 1448: Chapter 566 Grafting_2 Chapter 1448: Chapter 566 Grafting_2 ¡°Since our defeat seven hundred years ago that lost us control of four countries, our lives have truly been hard in recent years. Disciples within our sects find no way forward and are desperate for Dao heart, thus outsiders with just a little temptation can easily sway their hearts and lead them to betrayal. Changqing Immortal Sect has used this to their advantage, having thus been able to foster so many spies within our ranks. It is a limitation of being Inborn, our foundations are flawed, not because of poor management or failure to properly teach our disciples. School Leader, you need not blame yourself too much, as long as we strive forward and lead Nine Provinces to rise again, our disciples will have hope and naturally won¡¯t be beguiled by external matters. ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï At that time, our sect will be much purified, and the disciples will naturally realign their hearts with us.¡± True Person Zhen Xuan watched his Uncle Ding blame himself and could not help but speak comforting words. He had seen his uncle¡¯s effort in recent years for the future of Nine Provinces. Since their School Leader fell, leaving the mess to Uncle Ding, his uncle had labored day and night for the survival of Nine Provinces, leading it out of an existential crisis over seven hundred years to a slight revival. The efforts and pressure he must have endured are unimaginable. True Person Zhen Xuan, being groomed as the next Alliance Leader of Nine Provinces, felt the difficulties even just dealing with menial tasks alongside Ding Wanxuan. As someone within the core circle who knew the details, he naturally did not think his uncle incompetent for Nine Provinces¡¯ current state. As mentioned, it is a limitation of being Inborn, our foundations are flaweda€¡±to have brought this near-sinking ship this far and managed to slowly repair and restore it during the journey is nothing short of miraculous. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Could anyone expect more from Uncle Ding? He seriously isn¡¯t the Heavenly Immortal Great True Person! ¡°Sorting out people¡¯s hearts is a matter for later.¡± Ding Wanxuan waved his hand, ¡°You need not comfort me, I am aware of the current predicament in Nine Provinces. Our urgent priority is not to manage these inner heart issues, but to keep the sect moving forward. Otherwise, should we follow Taiping Dao¡¯s path, conduct mass purges to consolidate loyalty within the sect? Look at Taiping Dao¡¯s current situation: half of the sect¡¯s disciples have turned into rebels, becoming disloyal and distant from the sect. Now those spies within our ranks, with just a little persuasion, immediately cause agitation among the ranks and lead them toward the dark abyss. If they succeed in their schemes, Taiping Dao might never have peaceful days ahead. We are even worse than Taiping Dao now! If we were to do the same, I fear we would not need Changqing Immortal Sect to attack us, we would fall into internal chaos and perhaps perish amid our own conflicts.¡± ¡°Uncle, what you say is very true.¡± True Person Zhen Xuan nodded profoundly then asked, ¡°It is not advisable to purge our disciples recklessly, but what about those spies so overtly performing traitorous actsa€¡±should we just let them be? If there really are no actions taken, the remaining righteous disciples might see and follow suit, leading to an uncontrollable situation.¡± Inside Nine Provinces Sects, while there are many spies turning it porous like a sieve, there also exists a supervisory system, with established sect rules and laws specifically for monitoring and punishing the traitors. Thanks to this system, disciples inside Nine Provinces have a fear of siding with external enemies. Leveraging this fear, when faced with offers from Changqing Immortal Sect, they naturally hesitate and resist. This reliance allowed the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, even in these tough times, to maintain a degree of independence and keep most of their disciples¡¯ loyalty, continuing their resistance against Changqing Immortal Sect. But if we don¡¯t maintain this system now, other disciples hesitating over external offers will see these unpunished actions. Their hesitation might immediately lessen, potentially leading them straight into the enemy¡¯s arms. Thus, like rolling snowballs, the trend of defection might quickly prevail within the sect. The very foundation of Nine Provinces Immortal Sect could be destabilized, and the sect could collapse from within, crumbling without a fight. Such a severe consequence is unbearable. ¡°Of course, these individuals must be dealt with.¡± Ding Wanxuan¡¯s tone grew stern, emphasizing, ¡°I only meant not to adopt Taiping Dao¡¯s method of extensive purges, but I did not say to forego punishing those traitors. If they dare to stand forth openly, carrying the banner of our Nine Provinces while acting against its interests, then they must understand the consequences of their actions. You mentioned that of those who have come forward, many have irrefutable evidence against them already, solidly establishing them as spies. We should publicly disclose this evidence, formally identify them as traitors along with their crimes and announce their execution. And for those who have joined them but for whom the evidence is still insufficient, deem them as misled by spies, and apply the same sect disciplinea€¡±imprisonment and forced labor but no killing. Publish these punishments within the sect to warn other disciples not to repeat these offenses, or they too will face execution next time. This incident should stop here, without further purges, to pacify the hearts within the sect. Adhering to this standard should suffice to deter and contain the current unrest in our ranks.¡± Ding Wanxuan knew that Changqing Immortal Sect, by suddenly revealing over two hundred spies to disturb them, had created chaos. Chapter 1449 - Chapter 1449 Chapter 566 Grafting_3 ?Chapter 1449: Chapter 566 Grafting_3 Chapter 1449: Chapter 566 Grafting_3 This is not just about sowing dissent between Taiping Dao and the Nine Provinces Immortal Sect, but also about using these people as thorns, embedded in one¡¯s own heart, constantly reminding oneself that the sect is already rotten to the core. Inside the Nine Provinces Immortal Sect, countless spies of the Qing Immortal Sect were lurking, still hiding and waiting for opportunities, ready to bite him at any moment. It was precisely to use such a heart-wrenching strategy, forcing oneself to turn to the Jade Sovereign of the Taiping Dao, to create guilt by association within the sect, scattering one¡¯s own supporters and ruining the sect. Therefore, with the current situation, one couldn¡¯t afford to widen the scope of the crackdown; it was necessary to deliberately limit it, ensuring it did not affect too many people. As long as one could restrain oneself, even if there were other spies hidden within the sect, as long as the loyalty of most disciples could be stabilized, the sect would not descend into chaos. If the sect did not descend into chaos, the spies would have no opportunity, even if they wanted to make a move. This was what is known as countering action with inaction. Zhen Xuan also agreed with this approach, but still couldn¡¯t help asking, ¡°But uncle master, those spies and traitors have already left the sect and, together with those Taiping Dao disciples, have gone to the Black Abyss Secret Vault. Everyone has fled, and even if we wanted to deal with them, we have no one to target. Now, if we announce their crimes, as long as they¡¯re not out of their minds, they surely won¡¯t come back. Even those criminals who were not sentenced to death may never return.¡± Ding Wanxuan sneered, ¡°The point is for them not to come back. By announcing their crimes on our side, those who are guilty, as long as they¡¯re not fools, will of course not come back to seek death. Similarly, by facing sect punishment and not daring to return, they inadvertently confirm their own crime of betraying the sect. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Thus, those for whom we lack sufficient evidence to sentence to death can also be directly convicted, identified as traitors. The disciples within the sect, their eyes are all watching. Who is right, who is wrong, who is guilty, who is innocent, and whether the sect is just, all can be clearly discerned. Through this incident, on the contrary, we can gather support, using these betrayals to unite those disciples who are loyal to the sect, to counter the increasingly scattered and unstable morale.¡± Zhen Xuan frowned, ¡°This may indeed unite the disciples¡¯ hearts, but doesn¡¯t this let off the criminals too easily? Allowing them to flee unpunished sets a bad example for others who are faltering.¡± Ding Wanxuan was indifferent, ¡°Of course not. Don¡¯t forget what place Black Abyss is. These people have sought their own death by going there; it¡¯s only right we accommodate them. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï They think by escaping the sect, they¡¯ll be safe. But by leaving the sect, they are in fact losing the protection of the sect¡¯s rules. Within the sect, to act against them, one has to consider the opinions of other disciples and maintain the dignity of the sect¡¯s rules. But outside, chaos reigns, and killing is rampant. They have actively gone into that massacre, so if they aren¡¯t left in the Black Abyss, wouldn¡¯t it be a waste of their desperate efforts? Once they are dead, let a few survivors return to the sect, and when people within the sect learn of it, they will naturally understand the consequences of betraying the sect.¡± Ding Wanxuan was full of murderous intent, obviously not planning to show mercy, prepared to launch a combination of moves. First, announce the crimes, covering oneself with a veneer of righteousness, while ensuring not to expand the scope of the crackdown excessively, to stabilize the hearts of the people. Then, deal with those traitors with schemes, using their deaths as a deterrent to future offenders, making people dare not to commit the same errors. This combination will ensure the sect¡¯s stability for hundreds of years. After briefly explaining his plan, Ding Wanxuan then looked to Zhen Xuan and said, ¡°You need not concern yourself with this matter; I will handle it personally, ensuring those people fall in Black Abyss at an appropriate cause and effect. You only need to take care of one thing, and that is to select some loyal and reliable people within the sect. Then have them continue the work started by those traitors, leading the Taiping Dao disciples into the Black Abyss for exploration.¡± Zhen Xuan was stunned, not quite understanding his uncle master¡¯s intention, ¡°Thisa€|¡± Ding Wanxuan smiled, ¡°Those Qing vermin, under our name, have taken the Taiping Dao traitors and fled to Black Abyss. I suspect they are mostly trying to support these traitors so that they continue to exist and resist within the Taiping Tao Sect and use them to sow discord within the Taiping Dao. Since the matter cannot be undone and our losses have already occurred, of course, we must remedy it as much as possible and gain some benefits. They are using our banner, aren¡¯t they? Then we will respond in kind. We will send disciples proactively to get in touch with those of Taiping Dao, confuse their spies with our people, a mix of true and false. Just muddy the waters, and we can fish in troubled waters. In this way, efforts by the Qing Immortal Sect to support those Taiping Dao traitors end up merely preparing a splendid bridal gown for us. With no resources spent on our part, we take over the pawns painstakingly cultivated by the Qing Immortal Sect. How could we miss such an excellent opportunity?¡± He fully understood. Zhen Xuan had never imagined that his uncle master would come up with such a plan to transfer the flowers and replace the nest. This was indeed¡­ brilliant. He immediately patted his chest and said, ¡°Uncle master, rest assured, I will handle this matter properly and turn those wavering Taiping Dao people lured by the spies into our own people from the Nine Provinces.¡± ¡°That¡¯s the matter settled then; I trust you to handle it,¡± Ding Wanxuan nodded. Then he said, ¡°Also, later take a trip to Taiping Dao, go to the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace to find Friend Che and communicate about this incident. Make it clear to Taiping Dao that we too were passive, that it was the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s spies remaining within our sect who, to provoke strife, committed these acts. Both our Nine Provinces and Taiping Dao are victims of the chaos caused by the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s spies, and should stand together against the infiltration and persecution by the Qing Immortal Sect. In short, we need to soothe Taiping Dao, not letting them think we are instigating trouble, and redirect as much blame as possible towards the Qing Immortal Sect, understood?¡± Zhen Xuan replied, ¡°Yes, I understand; I will visit Jiuchuan Dragon Palace and meet with Friend Che shortly.¡± In the midst of conversation, he couldn¡¯t help but feel fortunate. Fortunately, Taoist Lu had provided the Nine Provinces with such a connection to Friend Che before stepping down. Otherwise, with the occurrence of this kind of event, their case would truly be indefensible. Their relationship with Taiping Dao would likely worsen dramatically in an instant. It was indeed a stroke of luck. Chapter 1450 - Chapter 1450 Chapter 567 A Great Gift Comes ?Chapter 1450: Chapter 567 A Great Gift Comes Chapter 1450: Chapter 567 A Great Gift Comes After discussing with Ding Wanxuan, Zhen Xuan swiftly took action. The meeting had just ended and he immediately set to work, implementing the strategies they had devised. First, he announced the crimes of the spies, then after meting out their punishments, inside the Nine Provinces sect, it indeed caused an uproar. No one had expected that within their own sect, there would be so many moles. Previously, fellow disciples who had been chatting and laughing with them, as well as senior and junior brethren, in the next moment, were outed as enemies from rival sects. The reversal was so great, the contrast so stark, that many from the Nine Provinces developed a feeling. That was, could their Jiuzhou Immortal Gate be the next Taiping Dao? Just thinking about the miserable state over there at Taiping Dao, numerous disciples of the Nine Provinces shuddered with anxiety. Fortunately, they soon found that the sect had no intention of widening the scope of implication. After simply revealing the identities of the spies, the upper echelons of the Nine Provinces did not delve further, only strictly ordering the disciples not to commit the same mistake, otherwise, they would face severe and relentless punishment. And in this matter, everyone naturally supported the decision. Once it became clear what had happened, the disciples remaining within the Nine Provinces sect naturally harbored deep resentment against those spies who had maliciously instigated discord between Taiping Dao and the Nine Provinces, causing divisions within. Had they been in the sect, just daring to show their faces would likely have resulted in them being immediately apprehended and sent to the sect for punishment. Unable to capture the main culprits for the time being, this still ignited a fire of resentment in all of the Nine Provinces disciples against those traitorous spies. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Many began to grow vigilant, observing their surroundings, suspecting and probing their fellow disciples for signs of being undercover spies. After all, no one was a fool. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï A little thought was enough to realize that the two hundred people exposed now were only expendable pawns, not the total sum of spies. There must be more, bigger fish still hidden within the sect, covertly lurking, desiring to destroy the entire Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. For many disciples who were deeply grateful to the sect and loyal to it, this was absolutely intolerable. Thus, riding on this wave of sentiment, unity quickly formed within the abbey, and even though the higher-ups did not call for it, the lower-ranking disciples took the initiative in commencing a purging operation. They conducted an internal self-investigation targeting possible spies. It was quite effective, to say the least. Some spies, either careless or naive, were indeed rooted out during this operation and handed over to the sect for discipline. This success boosted the morale of the sect¡¯s disciples, and it also allowed many more to clearly see just how rotten the sect had become from within. Therefore, a more thorough self-investigation and heightened alertness and vigilance began to slowly establish themselves among the sect¡¯s disciples. Through the influence of this event, the entire Jiuzhou Immortal Gate managed to consolidate its people¡¯s hearts and strike fiercely against the activities of those spies. After this, the Nine Provinces would not need to worry about the issue of internal spies for three hundred years. This initiative, under Zhen Xuan¡¯s leadership, could be declared perfectly concluded. However, having finished these tasks, he did not rest for a moment, but rather rushed straight to the Jiuchuan Dragon Palace to meet Che Shidao. During these days, while the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had been undergoing rounds of investigations, the renegades from Taiping Dao who were abducted by those Nine Provinces disciples had already left the Taiping Dao¡¯s sect. Those people were gone and naturally could not be called back. The deed was done; it had become a reality that was now difficult to reverse. Even if the Taiping Dao was now aware that the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was experiencing similar chaotic situations and was undergoing an internal cleansing, Considering previous actions, the relationship between the two sects had irreversibly deteriorated. It didn¡¯t matter whether the Nine Provinces was wronged or not because Taiping Dao indeed became more chaotic due to the actions of your disciples. I don¡¯t care whether those troublemakers were spies from other sects. I only know that when they came, they bore the flag of the Nine Provinces and indeed were disciples of the Nine Provinces. Just this fact alone is enough to make Taiping Dao detest the Nine Provinces. Thus, in these days, under the deliberate instigation by Jade Brocade, more voices within Taiping Dao began to view the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate with hostility. Those loyal to Taiping Dao started to look upon the Nine Provinces with disdain and enmity. But, likewise, Those abandoned by Taiping Dao, who had been punished, also quickly gravitated towards the Nine Provinces upon seeing their situation. There before them were many examples, more and more of Taiping Dao¡¯s castaways started to seek out disciples of the Nine Provinces, forming groups to venture towards the Black Abyss. Even if they couldn¡¯t find companions from the Nine Provinces, they would gather a few close friends to form an expedition team and set out for the Black Abyss on their own. In short, With deliberate encouragement, the three thousand castaways from Taiping Dao began to approach the Nine Provinces and initiated a massive exploratory expedition to the Black Abyss. Three thousand cultivators, harboring hopes of turning their lives around, headed toward the Eastern Desolate Inner Sea. In the future, they would either perish there, becoming skeletal remains on the journey of exploration, Or return bountifully, laden with Immortal Materials, to exchange for a chance at becoming immortal with their sect. Whether they live or die, become immortal or remain mortal, would all be determined by this expedition. And as a beneficiary, Jade Brocade was pleased to witness such a scene. Taiping Dao was also pleased to see it. Chapter 1451 - Chapter 1451 Chapter 567 A Big Gift is Delivered_2 ?Chapter 1451: Chapter 567 A Big Gift is Delivered_2 Chapter 1451: Chapter 567 A Big Gift is Delivered_2 Anyway, the only ones who will profit in the end are them, those who think they have outsmarted everyone, can¡¯t even begin to imagine the consequences of supplying refining immortal materials to the Taiping Dao. Even if you can cultivate a few Human Immortals by offering up immortal materials, what good will that do? With what you offer, I can turn around and cultivate even stronger avatars, gaining a loyal battle force that will never betray me. Even those who offer immortal materials, if they end up becoming immortals, will still be disciples of the Taiping Dao. If the Taiping Dao¡¯s strength was just what it seems on the surface, then these people, whose relationship with the Qing Immortal Sect is unclear, Indeed, as the other party wishes, they may become pawns embedded within the Taiping Dao, secretly holding back or even directly rebelling. But what if the Taiping Dao¡¯s strength is different? Once Lu Yuan¡¯s plan is complete, that will be six Earth Immortals, a force that eclipses Changqing, elevating them a level above the other Immortal Sects in the region. Then, if the Taiping Dao allies with the Nine Provinces and completes the Nine Provinces convergence, the two sects united would simply crush the Qing Immortal Sect with overwhelming advantage. Under such circumstances, no one would think that the Qing Immortal Sect could turn the tables. Those who are now in cahoots with them, if they don¡¯t wish to seek death for themselves, will take the initiative to cut ties with the Qing Immortal Sect and devote themselves to being faithful Taiping Dao disciples. In this way, as long as they can ensure their own absolute power, it will mean a double harvest for the Taiping Dao. The insiders nurtured by the Qing Immortal Sect are a gain, and the immortal materials they bring are also a gain. I don¡¯t have to do anything, just give a little push, and others will eagerly bring two great gifts, such a windfall, even winning a gamble doesn¡¯t compare. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Therefore, with regard to the increasingly intense Black Yuan turmoil and the wavering hearts of the sect¡¯s disciples, Jade Brocade does not seek to manage or prevent it, but instead adopts a laissez-faire attitude and even actively pushes it in the shadows. Thanks to his efforts, over ninety percent of those three thousand renegades have run off to Black Yuan. Only a handful of timid and cautious ones remain huddled within the sect, apparently resigned to their doomed fate, content to accept it. And for these people, Jade Brocade pays them no mind. Just three to five hundred individuals, just a few more mouths to feed. The great cause of the Taiping Daoist school is vast, they can afford this bit of resources. Keeping them around, they might even be used to catch more fish, bringing more benefits to the Taiping Dao in the future. Already anticipating an enormous profit, he isn¡¯t concerned about this small issue. However, before indulging in those grand gifts, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had already sent over a significant gift. Jiuchuan Dragon Palace. ¡°Master Che, this is the situation. Like you, we in the Nine Provinces were unaware of the actions of those traitors until after their deeds were done, and then we came to a realization. Immediately after, we dealt with it decisively, convicting those who should be convicted, executing those who should be killed, and our sect began an unceasing investigation, rooting out many spies. All of this is the machinations of the Qing Immortal Sect, aimed at sowing discord between our two sects, creating rifts, and turning us against each other. Doing so allows them to stand alone on the outside, taking advantage of our faults, waiting until they¡¯ve accumulated enough strength to deal with us all at once.¡± After presenting the note of homage and Lu Yuan¡¯s token, Zhen Xuan, who had been welcomed into the Dragon Palace, dispensed with the initial pleasantries and began to complain immediately: ¡°Now, our Nine Provinces¡¯ strength has declined greatly, and it¡¯s already hard enough just to preserve ourselves, let alone provoke outsiders. The Taiping Dao and us are allies; only by joining hands can we stand firm in the Southern Domain under the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s pressure. Without either of our sects, it would be difficult to withstand the Qing Immortal Sect. Surely Master Che understands this logic. Under such circumstances, we would have to be out of our minds to offend your sect and stir up this trouble. Now, your School Leader Jade Sovereign lacks a full understanding of us and therefore has some misconceptions, thinking that these events are our doings. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï But Master Che, with your enlightened wisdom, should be able to see the truth behind it all. I have come here with no other demands, only hoping that Master Che could speak on our behalf to clear up these misunderstandings. It is better to resolve enmities than to create them. Our two sects have had no misunderstandings for seven hundred years, and during the time of your previous two School Leaders, we were even closely allied. We sincerely do not wish to see such amity destroyed on our watch. Master Che, please consider wisely.¡± Having said that, Zhen Xuan laid out numerous pieces of evidence before Master Che, for the latter to scrutinize. Master Che listened to his explanation and examined the evidence which, according to these proofs, indeed showed that what the other side was saying was correct. It was the Qing Immortal Sect that was behind all this scheming. However, despite this, he did not immediately agree but showed a troubled expression: ¡°What True Person Zhen Xuan says is right, and there is no issue with the evidence; it is indeed unbecoming for us to be hostile. But currently, it is Junior Brother Yu who has the authority in our sect. He is the School Leader, and I am merely the head of a mere branch. When it comes to the decisions made by the School Leader, I find it hard to contradict them; should I openly intervene, it could be construed as challenging the School Leader¡¯s authority. The fate of my nephew Yu is still fresh in my mind; he¡¯s still blowing in the winds of Cold Wind Valley. For me to interfere in this matter is truly difficult.¡± Listening to these obviously evasive words, Zhen Xuan didn¡¯t panic but instead took out a pouch from his chest and presented it to Master Che, earnestly saying, ¡°I certainly wouldn¡¯t want to make things difficult for you. As long as you can accomplish this for our Nine Provinces, I am willing to offer the contents of this pouch to you as a token of gratitude for your troubles.¡± Chapter 1452 - Chapter 1452 Chapter 567 Grand Gifts Arriving_3 ?Chapter 1452: Chapter 567 Grand Gifts Arriving_3 Chapter 1452: Chapter 567 Grand Gifts Arriving_3 For the method to get along with Taiping Dao, the outside world has pretty much figured out a routine over the years. That is, no matter how significant the matter, as long as you are willing to give gifts, big gifts, then everything can be smoothed over. Despite not knowing why, the fact is, the people from Taiping Dao are all after money. At the very least, every single one of the higher-ups in Taiping Dao is after money. Too peaceful, too impoverished, perhaps just like the name of this sect, these refugees from who knows where are all terrified of poverty. Now focused solely on making money, they have cast aside all else. Because of this, Taiping Dao has been ridiculed by outsiders more times than can be counted. ?¦Ï??0.§ã0 But similarly, this also provided outsiders with numerous opportunities on how to interact with Taiping Dao. It doesn¡¯t matter if you have offended them. It doesn¡¯t matter if there are conflicts of interest. As long as you are willing to pay, to Taiping Dao, everything is negotiable. And it¡¯s for this reason that this time, despite the relations between Jiuzhou and Taiping Dao having soured to such an extent, Zhen Xuan and the others aren¡¯t too worried. Based on Taiping Dao¡¯s past behavior, they are confident that money can resolve this issue. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï But if it¡¯s just a matter of spending money, it will inevitably lead to a massive loss. Jiuzhou¡¯s currently strained finances, if they bleed this time, will make the future even tougher. Fortunately, although Taiping Dao is greedy, what they covet are only the treasures used for artifact refining. They¡¯re not much interested in various other items that could enhance cultivation or even assist in transcendence. This has led to much speculation among outsiders. They suspect that the cultivation methods of the hidden vein disciples of Taiping Dao might be inclined towards the ¡®Double Life with Artifacts¡¯ style, where one could enhance their own cultivation by improving the grade of magical treasures. That¡¯s why Taiping Dao is so obsessed with refining treasures. But these are only guesses. There¡¯s never been concrete evidence to definitively prove this is the case. However, at this moment, Zhen Xuan was actually grateful for Taiping Dao¡¯s particular interests. For the Immortal Sects of Jiuzhou, what they truly value are the treasures that can enhance the cultivation of their disciples and assist in breaking through realms. Although they also value refining materials, these are not their highest priority. Indeed, a True Immortal without magical treasures would be at a huge disadvantage, perhaps with no chance of victory, when fighting others. But such disadvantages can be offset through Formation Methods, Spirit Talismans, Divine Powers, and various other strategies. However, if your cultivation is insufficient, if you haven¡¯t become a True Immortal, then no matter how many strategies you have, you won¡¯t be able to utilize them. Just this point alone is enough for countless cultivators to deprioritize the need for refining materials. So, from this perspective, Taiping Dao and other Immortal Sects actually don¡¯t have too much conflict over resources. That¡¯s also a reason why the outside world has such a good impression of Taiping Dao. Who wouldn¡¯t like a neighbor that doesn¡¯t compete with them for cultivation resources and only asks for some extraneous items? The Jiuzhou Immortal Sect felt the same way. It would pain them to give their cultivation resources to the Great Plain Path. But if it¡¯s just some external items used for fabricating magical treasures, then the degree of reluctance is much less. That¡¯s why the greatly embarrassed Jiuzhou Immortal Sect is willing to present such a generous gift as a bribe to Che Shidao. Because what¡¯s given away is not their core interest. ¡°Friend, there¡¯s no need for thisa€|¡± Che Shidao looked at the Qiankun pouch in front of him with some displeasure. However, after seeing the number of Immortal Materials inside, he immediately changed his tone, ¡°Sigh, since friend goes to such lengths, and with Junior Brother Lu¡¯s prior entrustment in mind, I really can¡¯t refuse. Rest assured, I¡¯ll return to the sect soon to meet with Junior Brother Yu. Our two families have always been close, with seven hundred years of friendship between us. What is there that we can¡¯t talk through? Leave this matter to me, and I will help you resolve it.¡± Che Shidao patted his chest with a face full of righteousness. Zhen Xuan was overjoyed and hastily bowed, ¡°With True Person¡¯s assistance, we¡¯ll have no worries.¡± Having struck a deal, the two then engaged in more exchanges, with Che Shidao even hosting a banquet complete with clam-maiden performances to entertain Zhen Xuan. After several rounds of toasting, their rapport also rose quickly. After days of song and dance, Che Shidao saw Zhen Xuan off. At the Dragon Palace doorway, watching the departing figure, his gaze lingered reluctantly before retracting. Then, taking a pouch from his sleeve and giving it a glance with his divine sense, a smile reappeared on his face. This time, to win him over and secure the friendship with Taiping Dao, Jiuzhou Immortal Sect really poured out a large sum. The contents of the pouch, if all refined into Immortal Artifacts, could produce two Mid-Grade Immortal Artifacts. A contribution not to be taken lightly. ¡°With such a generous gift, plus the loot that those disciples brought back from the Black Abyss, the resources for Junior Brother Yu¡¯s Jade Brocade to advance to a Middle Grade Immortal Artifact are nearly complete. This Qing Immortal Sect is really so kind. Creating such a pomp, they have saved us hundreds of years of hard work. If Taiping Dao succeeds in the future, they undoubtedly deserve first credit.¡± Che Shidao wore a look of self-satisfaction, obviously very pleased. Then, he too left the Dragon Palace. Although the connection between him, his main body, and avatars was such that with a mere thought, the events here could be communicated to the original and Jade Brocade. But considering the enormity of the issue and considering Jiuzhou¡¯s large gift, it was necessary to deliver it timely to Jade Brocade, so the original could assist with another artifact advancement. So, a trip to the sect was still required. Moments later, bringing along the Immortal Materials obtained from Jiuzhou, Che Shidao met with Lu Yuan on Mi Yun Mountain. Also present was Jade Brocade. ¡°Really, Jiuzhou Immortal Sect voluntarily backing down is good.¡± Lu Yuan received the pouch with Immortal Materials, a smile on his face as he praised, then he looked at Jade Brocade, ¡°Since Jiuzhou is so understanding, don¡¯t make it difficult for them this time; let¡¯s just let it pass. The internal affairs of the sect can wait. This is the Immortal Material we received, with the addition of some from the storeroom, should be nearly enough for another upgrade for you, taking you to the Late-Stage Human Immortal. I, as the School Leader of Taiping Dao, am only at the Early-Stage Human Immortal; how can that be reasonable? You must reach Late-Stage Human Immortal at the very least.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Jade Brocade nodded in agreement. Chapter 1453 - Chapter 1453 Chapter 568 Cave World Secret Mansion ?Chapter 1453: Chapter 568 Cave World Secret Mansion Chapter 1453: Chapter 568 Cave World Secret Mansion He dismissed the incident involving the abduction from the Nine Provinces as a closed case, and Lu Yuan immediately started the next topic. ¡°Now, the news about the Black Abyss Secret Realm is spreading like wildfire around the area. I heard that the entire Donghua Continent is in turmoil over it. Should we, from the Taiping Dao, also get involved?¡± Lu Yuan looked at his two avatars and asked proactively. Regarding the Heavenly Immortal¡¯s secret mansion, the Taiping Dao had shallow roots and originally knew nothing about it. Later, to collect Immortal Materials for refining, Lu Yuan continuously encouraged his disciples to venture out and explore. To seek treasures more effectively, it was natural to start understanding related knowledge and intelligence. Especially after annexing the countries of Leshan and Anyang and completely seizing the inheritance of the Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain sects, the Taiping Dao¡¯s heritage in the Immortal Realm finally deepened. Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain, both were sects in the Changqing Domain, with nearly a hundred thousand years of legacy that rose during the convergence of Nine Spirits and Changqing. Because of their initial right choice, these sects flourished along with the Qing Immortal Sect until today, despite numerous storms and trials. Unexpectedly, these two sects were not destroyed in the catastrophe seventy thousand years ago. However, because of their long-standing loyalty to the Qing Immortal Sect, they met their demise at the hands of the Taiping Dao, which was deeply regrettable. However, now was not the time to criticize flaws of the Qing Immortal Sect, and the mention was mainly to make a point. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï With these two ancient sect inheritances, Lu Yuan now lacked no common knowledge, certain superficial secrets, and even some in-depth knowledge about the Immortal Realm. At this time, the great treasure trove that was the Heavenly Immortal Secret Mansion entered his sight. In the archives of Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain, many of their forebearers had ventured into the Heavenly Immortal Secret Mansion to seek treasures and adventure. Among them, some never returned, while a lucky few managed to obtain inheritances there, soaring to great heights and transforming directly from mortals to True Persons. Others received substantial benefits and made significant advancements in their Human Immortal Realm cultivation, becoming renowned experts. Therefore, there truly was a wealth of benefits inside the Heavenly Immortal Secret Mansion. Both sects have ample recorded travelogues and archives to corroborate this. Moreover, these accounts only cover the explorers from the two sects. Outside of them, countless other explorers from various places also received immense benefits within the mansion. Even this isn¡¯t the limit. The explorers from Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain were merely mortal cultivators at best, not surpassing the Human Immortal level. Such explorers were only middle to low level within the treasure-seeking teams. Above them were the Earth Immortal True Persons, who were the main force in treasure seeking. The main benefits in the Heavenly Immortal Secret Mansion were largely taken by these individuals. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Those Earth Immortals feasted on meat, Human Immortals drank soup, and mere mortal cultivators, if entered, merely got to smell the aroma. From the records Lu Yuan saw, those mansion treasure-seeking adventurers from both sects frequently mentioned this, saying the mansion¡¯s benefits were taken by Earth Immortals, leaving them only scraps others did not care for, their words filled with bitterness and resentment, reflecting the deep obsessions of these ancestors. But this indirectly proved just how much benefit a Heavenly Immortal Mansion held. A group that gathered mere scraps still achieved such gains, even nurturing True Immortals. Then, what about those Earth Immortals who took all the main benefits? How extensive would their harvest be from one visit to the mansion? It must be said, faced with such promising prospects, Lu Yuan, this crafty old fox, also felt his heart stir. This wasn¡¯t a sudden impulse. Mainly because with Taiping Dao¡¯s current strength, they truly qualified to reach out for the Heavenly Immortal Secret Mansion. Currently in the Taiping Dao, besides Lu Yuan himself, Jin Qingyue who was striving to become an Earth Immortal, and Jade Brocade who was working to enhance her own qualities, the other avatars of Lu Yuan including Qing Guanzi, Yi Dancheng, and Che Shidao, had already become Earth Immortals. If these three Earth Immortals joined forces, there weren¡¯t many places in the Immortal Realm they couldn¡¯t venture to, except perhaps storming a Heavenly Immortal dojo. Surely just a Heavenly Immortal Secret Mansion didn¡¯t count among them. With this power in hand, Lu Yuan naturally did not want to miss out on these benefits and thought about getting involved. ¡°From the messages passed down, and from the records left by the inheritances of Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain, what they call the Heavenly Immortal Secret Mansion is actually a Cave World created by a Heavenly Immortal, a small world attached to the Immortal Realm. These small worlds vary in size, but the smallest are also as big as several countries in the Immortal Realm. The larger ones can be as vast as a dozen countries. These Cave Worlds depend on the Heavenly Immortal; as long as the Heavenly Immortal exists, the Cave World exists, but if the Heavenly Immortal perishes, so does the Cave World. That Black Abyss Secret Mansion was one such Cave World left behind by a demon clan Heavenly Immortal who fell tens of thousands of years ago. Now that the Heavenly Immortal has died, that small world from Void had trouble sustaining itself, and was eventually captured by the Immortal Realm and merged. As usual, it¡¯s just been discovered as a secret mansion. Before long, this small world will be assimilated by the Immortal Realm and dissipate completely, transforming into nourishment. It will reappear on the edge of the Immortal Realm in a different form, existing as a newly developed territory.¡± As one of Lu Yuan¡¯s avatars, Jade Brocade naturally shared the memory of the original and detailed knowledge regarding the legacies of Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain. Chapter 1454 - Chapter 1454 Chapter 568 Cave World Secret Mansion_2 ?Chapter 1454: Chapter 568 Cave World Secret Mansion_2 Chapter 1454: Chapter 568 Cave World Secret Mansion_2 He recalled the records in his mind and the data he had collected in recent years, and couldn¡¯t help but add, ¡°Therefore, if one wishes to explore the Black Abyss secret vault, speed is of the essence; otherwise, once this small world is digested by the Immortal Realm, it will disappear completely.¡± The so-called Heavenly Immortals are indeed the Celestials of Dong Tian. They are not only beings who replace the way of Heaven and Earth with their own. More than that, they open up their own Dong Tian small worlds with their Dao. Within their Dong Tian, the Heavenly Immortal is the master of the world, omnipotent. However, just like the Heavenly Immortals who cannot leave the Immortal Realm and need to maintain their territory defensively, like prisoners, confined to a specific area, relying on the Immortal Realm to exist, The small worlds created by the Heavenly Immortals cannot exist independently in the chaotic void either. These small worlds must rely on the protection of the Immortal Realm to exist independently. Once the Heavenly Immortal who created the small world perishes, the conditions for the small world¡¯s independent existence are no longer met. After resisting for a period of time, it will gradually be pulled and captured by the Immortal Realm, falling into it and eventually being completely digested, becoming new nourishment for the Immortal Realm¡¯s growth. This process of nurturing Heavenly Immortals to open up small worlds and then harvesting them after they have developed for a while is a beneficial supplement to the Immortal Realm¡¯s continuous development. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï The Immortal Realm today can be so vast and boundless that one cannot find its edge. From the beginning of the Immortal Realm¡¯s establishment, countless Heavenly Immortals have persistently created worlds and then had them harvested by the Immortal Realm, which has played a crucial role. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.?¦Ï The current emergence of the Black Abyss secret vault is nothing but a manifestation of this cyclical process. ¡°Even as venerable as a Heavenly Immortal who creates a world, one cannot evade the fate of destruction and the fall of that world. Just like the Black Abyss secret vault, so too must the Changqing Immortal who perished in the fall of the Changqing Domain, and the Changqing Domain he created. Even the Nine Provinces world, which previously seemed permanent, now that I have come to the Immortal Realm and learned more, also appears to be a small world created by the Nine Spirits Sect¡¯s Nine Spirit Celestial Noble. Because of the fall of the Nine Spirit Celestial Noble, the path to the Nine Provinces world from the Immortal Realm was severed. The Nine Provinces benefitted from the existence of the Northern Dark City and still held a sliver of chance to reach the Immortal Realm. The decline of the Nine Provinces towards The Age of Dharma Decline is probably the process of being continuously captured by the Immortal Realm. The silent demise of the world must be the result of successful capture. Just like the current Black Abyss secret vault, forcibly descended into the Immortal Realm, becoming a secret vault for others to explore, until it ultimately perishes and is devoured by the Immortal Realm.¡± Che Shidao, reflecting on his memories of the Nine Provinces and comparing them with the Immortal Realm, couldn¡¯t help feeling fortunate. In fact, after Lu Yuan¡¯s Ascension to the Immortal Realm, he had always been investigating and speculating about the origins of the Nine Provinces and its connection to the Nine Spirits Sect. There was no choice; there were simply too many mysteries and issues involved. For instance, there had always been legends in the Nine Provinces of powerful beings from the Immortal Realm crossing into the ancient Nine Provinces to preach and leave behind various legacies. Now it seems that the powerful being who came to preach was most likely the Nine Spirit Celestial Noble. Then the questions arise. Why would the Nine Spirit Celestial Noble choose to preach in the Nine Provinces, and how did he locate the Nine Provinces? And later on, the Nine Provinces suddenly lost contact with the Immortal Realm and slowly headed towards extinction. What is the connection between this and the destruction of the Nine Spirits Sect, and the fall of the Nine Spirit Celestial Noble? When I first Ascended to the Immortal Realm, I was aware that there must be some connection to the Nine Spirits Sect. But as to the specifics of that connection, it was not clear due to the lack of information. Later, after receiving the legacies of Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain, in addition to the rise of the Taiping Dao, the information and levels I came into contact with also increased. An improvement in my scope of knowledge finally allowed me to connect these dots and determine the true relationship between the Nine Provinces world and the Nine Spirit Celestial Noble. This was a Dong Tian small world created by the Nine Spirit Celestial Noble. So as long as the Nine Spirit Celestial Noble lived, the Nine Provinces thrived. With his death, it was doomed to extinction. The relationship between the two is that straightforward, yet deeply intertwined. And for Lu Yuan, after clarifying these relationships, what remained was only a feeling of fortune. Although he wasn¡¯t clear on how exactly the Immortal Realm captures these Dong Tian small worlds and digests them, He did know that if he had remained in the Nine Provinces when the Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe had completely descended, which is when the Immortal Realm was gradually capturing the Nine Provinces, he wouldn¡¯t have escaped the fate of being captured along with the world by the Immortal Realm. If one is carried along as the world is captured by the Immortal Realm, It¡¯s impossible to imagine what disasters could befall those within the small world during such a process. But one only needs to think: If a disaster that even the world cannot escape befalls, what could be the fate of the beings within it? Looking at what happened to the remaining beings in the Nine Provinces world at the moment before it was captured, it becomes clear. As the world is captured, the lives within it cannot escape death. If Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t escaped swiftly, if he hadn¡¯t left before the world was completely captured, even though he was then Five Qi Towards Primordial, the world¡¯s strongest Cultivator, and the only one, he would likely not have escaped the fate of death. Even if he had somehow dodged the fate of death, After the Nine Provinces world was captured and pulled into the Immortal Realm, it would still become a secret vault, waiting for the many powerful beings of the Immortal Realm to come and explore. Chapter 1455 - Chapter 1455 Chapter 568 Cave World Secret Mansion_3 ?Chapter 1455: Chapter 568 Cave World Secret Mansion_3 Chapter 1455: Chapter 568 Cave World Secret Mansion_3 When the time came for the Secret Mansion to open, countless Mid-stage Earth Immortals poured in. What would their attitude be upon seeing Lu Yuan, the only survivor in the world? In such an Age of Dharma Decline, to still be alive and to have cultivated to the level of Five Qi Towards Primordial was a major curiosity. Just thinking about it revealed a big problem. This sole survivor definitely harbored a great secret, possessing tremendous opportunities. To be able to cultivate to the level of Earth Immortal, those cultivators could not possibly be pure as Lotus. Each of them, though not utterly malicious, could not truly be considered benevolent. What would happen to Lu Yuan if he fell into their hands could be easily imagined. One wrong step would be a deadly trap. Being able to grasp that last thread of opportunity before the deadly trap ensnared him, and escaping from stagnant waters to the vast ocean of the Immortal Realm was undoubtedly the right choice. It could be said that all his luck in this lifetime erupted in that moment. Only then was he able to escape from such a desperate situation. It¡¯s no wonder that Che Shidao was feeling so fortunate at this moment, reminiscing about the past. ¡°Now, since our Ascension over seven hundred years ago, Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Then absorbed and obliterated by the Immortal Realm. Nine Provinces, presumably, no longer exists.¡± Lu Yuan also reminisced about the past, his voice couldn¡¯t help but carry a tone of melancholy considering the fate of the Nine Provinces. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï The worlds of Cave Heavens captured by the Immortal Realm appeared randomly. Because the space is boundless and undefined, Heavenly Immortals and Great True Persons create small worlds beyond the Immortal Realm. The locations of these Cave Heavens have no definite positions. Their connection to the Immortal Realm is simply through special channels created by Heavenly Immortals and Great True Persons. This channel acts like a door, just open it and you can go through. It doesn¡¯t require a fixed path to reach another world. Just like a wormhole, a channel connects two locations, essentially leaping through space rather than a fixed directional connection. Even some powerful beings in the Immortal Realm speculate that the spatial positions Between Heaven and Earth are just what beings perceive them to be. In reality, the entire Immortal Realm doesn¡¯t have clear spatial divisions; it¡¯s fundamentally non-existent. There is no east, west, south, or north, no up, down, or sides. What you think is flying straight might actually be continuously turning; it¡¯s just not perceived that way. Only this can explain why the Immortal Realm is so vast that even Heavenly Immortals and Great True Persons cannot find its edge. Because there simply is no edge. All these are just misconceptions stemming from conceptual misunderstandings. Hence, the worlds forged by the Heavenly Immortals seem to have fixed positions and connected channels. But in truth, the locations of these worlds might not be what one expects. Like a twisted sheet of paper pierced by a needle, linking everything the needle penetrates, even beyond the paper, through this needle. It sounds mysterious, and indeed, it is. Because such statements are merely some inferences made by these Heavenly Immortals and Great True Persons based on what they know about the Immortal Realm. These Heavenly Immortals and Great True Persons can¡¯t guarantee their observations are accurate. Nor can they ensure that the conjectures based on these uncertain perceptions are correct. Under such results, the inferences drawn are bound to be mysterious, aren¡¯t they? It¡¯s all a matter of faith; believe it or not. And under such uncertain spatial perceptions, a small world, captured by the Immortal Realm and appearing not in the expected position but far off, is reasonable. So, although the Nine Provinces were captured, their failure to appear in the Changqing Domain is quite normal. Because the positions of the two points are not necessarily as expected, naturally, they wouldn¡¯t appear where one might think. Che Shidao knew this principle as well, but he didn¡¯t delve into the speculative theories of space, instead focusing on immediate gains and following the words of his original self: ¡°The Nine Provinces Realm must have been destroyed by now, likely leaving no trace behind; this has long been ordained, there¡¯s no need to say more. But similarly, by looking at the Nine Provinces Realm, one can infer just how affluent the Black Abyss Secret Mansion is. Before our Ascension, you had crafted six Immortal Artifacts, among which was the Qing Guanzi, a Qi Luck Dao Fruit almost equivalent to Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts. Even so, it turned out to be the fruit of countless predecessors from Nine Provinces who had scavenged who knows how many cycles. And before our Ascension, your Cultivation was only at Five Qi Towards Primordial, which left many areas of the disaster-prone Nine Provinces Realm out of reach. Also, limited by the depletion of Heavenly and Earthly Aura, our exploration of various places for treasures was far from thorough; we could only make a rough sweep. What we obtained was definitely not everything, perhaps only a minor portion. From this perspective, even if the Black Abyss Secret Mansion is like the Nine Provinces Realm, scavenged by countless predecessors in The Age of Dharma Decline. The remaining wealth could amount to several Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts. And that¡¯s just involving magical treasures. Other various spiritual objects and rare resources wouldn¡¯t be far behind. No wonder the sect records of Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain claim that even a thin sip from such a mansion could make one a True Immortal. With our past experiences, merely having skimmed and sipped from the final reserves of the Nine Provinces Realm, now you and these Avatars of ours exist. Even those like Zhen Xuan who, being the last batch of ascendant cultivators from Nine Provinces, didn¡¯t even sip the soup but merely smelled its aroma, isn¡¯t there now a Human Immortal like Zhen Xuan among them? Just by observing these examples, one can see the benefits of the Black Abyss Secret Mansion.¡± Having said so much, the underlying message of Che Shidao was clear, that being his support for exploring the mansion. The stakes inside were simply too great. Even if they could only secure a small piece, it could help Lu Yuan construct another Earth Immortal Avatar. Just for this reason, it should not be missed. ¡°You make a reasonable point, the benefits of the Black Abyss Secret Mansion are too significant to let pass.¡± Having heard what Che Shidao said, Lu Yuan nodded in agreement, then closed his eyes and pondered for a while before speaking, ¡°In that case, let¡¯s join in the excitement. After all, Qing Guanzi, Yi Dancheng, and you are now staying inside the Taiping Dao, having nothing much to do. Standing idle is as good as doing something. It would be just the right time to venture into the Black Abyss Secret Mansion, with the three of you Earth Immortals teaming up. Even though many eyes are set on the mansion, you have enough strength to snatch a piece among the tigers and wolves. Let the three of you undertake this exploration. As for the affairs of the Taiping Dao, with me here, nothing will go wrong; there¡¯s no need to worry.¡± Three Earth Immortals, even though they are the weakest, when united, signify a profound implication. Early-stage Earth Immortals dare not contend. Mid-stage Earth Immortals could then be confronted. Upon encountering a Grand cultivator in the late-stage of Earth Immortal, the three of them together can ensure safety. And Heavenly Immortals would not regard a mere mansion highly. Thus, Lu Yuan sending out three Earth Immortal Avatars, even if they couldn¡¯t gain much from the Black Abyss Secret Mansion, the Avatars were unlikely to encounter any risks. Basic security assurance still remained. Given that, naturally there¡¯s no need to hesitate; just go ahead and do it. ¡°Yes, I shall not fail this mission!¡± Che Shidao replied loudly upon receiving the order. And for the other two Avatars, Qing Guanzi and Yi Dancheng, Lu Yuan also telepathically communicated, issuing notices. All complied. With this, the Taiping Dao was now indeed making its entrance into the turmoil of the Black Abyss. Chapter 1456 - Chapter 1456 Chapter 569 Recruit New Replacing Old ?Chapter 1456: Chapter 569 Recruit New Replacing Old Chapter 1456: Chapter 569 Recruit New Replacing Old After confirming the exploration of the Black Abyss, Che Shidao quickly took action. Once he had gathered Qing Guanzi and Yi Dancheng, who had rushed over after receiving the message, Lu Yuan bestowed upon them the three Taiping Immortal Artifactsa€¡±the Taiping Sword, the Heavenly Destiny Staff, and the Myriad Peoples Seala€¡±temporarily giving these to the three Avatars. Although the three Late-stage Earth Immortal Avatars joined hands for this trip to the Black Abyss, and thus faced no risk to their lives, mere reliance on the three Early Earth Immortal Avatars to stand out in the secret chamber and suppress the multitude of surrounding powerhouses, thereby achieving significant gains, was absolutely wishful thinking. With the emergence of the Black Abyss secret chamber, cultivators from nearby states and domains flocked to the area, and the demons and ghosts could not remain idle. Among the explorers who rushed there, there were likely scores of Earth Immortals, including numerous Late-stage Earth Immortal powerhouses. With so many competitors, it wouldn¡¯t be simple for the three Avatars to snatch benefits, akin to taking food from a tiger¡¯s mouth. Hence, to give them a better chance of overcoming others in treasure hunting and secure more favorable outcomes, it was essential to enhance the strength of the few Avatars. Over the years, Lu Yuan¡¯s Taiping three Immortal Artifacts had been nurtured by Qi Luck, significantly improving their foundational quality. As of now, each had reached the superior level of Lower Grade Immortal Artifacts, equivalent to the Late-stage Human Immortal for Cultivators. Although they didn¡¯t match up to Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts, they were passably sufficient for an Earth Immortal, undoubtedly better than being unarmed. With the three Immortal Artifacts in hand, Che Shidao and his companions could boost their combat strength by several times, amounting to a considerable enhancement in their capabilities. Now that Lu Yuan was stationed in Mi Yun Mountain, coiled up in his lair, no one dared to provoke Taiping Dao at this time. Without the need for battle, keeping the three Immortal Artifacts idle would be a wastea€¡±it was better to bestow them and prevent the artifacts from gathering dust. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? For Che Shidao and the other two, receiving the Immortal Artifacts naturally brought great joya€¡±having enhanced their own strength and further secured their safety was a good thing. Without a doubt, they expressed boundless gratitude as they finally embodied their true selves, then set off on their treasure-hunting adventure, delighted. After seeing off Che Shidao and the others, Lu Yuan had no other pressing matters and continued to seclude himself for cultivation in his mountain cave. Currently, the world remained tranquil, with the Changqing Domain enjoying peace. Even the rivalry between Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had simmered down in recent years, leading a quiet existence without inciting events publicly. When disciples from the two sects met, although still showing animosity, they no longer resorted to drawing swords immediately. Seven hundred years had passed, enough for a new generation to prevail even among mundane cultivators measured by the Five Qi Towards Primordial realm. For those in lower realms, it went through two or three generations or even more. With the continuous change in personnel, those who had experienced the bloody battles between the two sects in the Western Domaina€¡±battling fiercely and causing rivers of blooda€¡±were either rare lucky ones who became immortal or had long perished, no longer existing between Heaven and Earth. For the new generation of disciples, without firsthand experience, relying solely on teachings and descriptions propagated by their seniors and sects, even if Divine Powers could record the cruelty of those battlefields and the blood feud between the two sects, beyond the initial shock upon seeing such records, what else could remain? Without empathy or deep-seated grudges, expecting these disciples to hold extreme animosity towards the other was hardly feasible. Nevertheless, owing to these educational efforts and indeed due to significant conflicting interests between the two sects, the extent of hatred among the disciples from both sects was hard to define. But mutual disdain was certain. While they might not immediately engage in combat upon meeting, showing scorn, exchanging insults, or outright ignoring each other had become commonplace. ?¦Ï???.§ã? But that was about it. Normally, they would only resort to fighting over significant benefits, such as discovering treasure together. Otherwise, conflicts were unlikely. And with these two largest ¡®powder kegs¡¯ within the domain not igniting, other areas remained stable too. Overall, the atmosphere in Changqing Domain continued to flourisha€¡±a prosperous and peaceful scene thrived. All three sects were diligently accumulating strength and tapping into their potential. Since their own territories were yet to be fully explored, none had the leisure to concern themselves with external affairs. Even if they became restless and determined to stir trouble, efforts were made in areas similar to the espionage episodes involving Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, and not by instigating open conflicts, as that served no one¡¯s interest. In such a general atmosphere, after handing over the position of School Leader to Jade Brocade, Lu Yuan naturally could enjoy peace, focusing solely on his cultivation without concerns. No one wanted to cause trouble, nor could theya€¡±minor sect affairs were managed by Avatars, leaving him to govern effortlessly and be a contented Heavenly Son. Like now, even though Che Shidao and the others had left, reducing much of Taiping¡¯s high-end combat power, the outside world remained oblivious. No one noticed this, and even if they did, upon seeing the direction the group headed, they could guess they were off to the Black Abyss for treasure hunting. And then? There was no further. Even if an Earth Immortal accompanied by two Late-stage Human Immortalsa€¡±an assembly of such strengtha€¡±that even if Song Xiren personally intervened, they could at most force them to retreat but not succeed in killing them, offending them fatally without achieving a kill would result in Changqing Immortal Sect bearing the brunt of Taiping Dao¡¯s furious vengeance later. Currently, Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s strength had not reached its own zenith. Although possessing a strong foundation, it had yet to convert it into combat power. It was essentially a mass without quality, bloated yet hollow. Chapter 1457 - Chapter 1457 Chapter 569 Replace the Old with the New_2 ?Chapter 1457: Chapter 569 Replace the Old with the New_2 Chapter 1457: Chapter 569 Replace the Old with the New_2 At this moment, facing the united front of Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Changqing Immortal Sect had no substantial advantage, both sides were merely equal. The potential for conflict rose, unpredictability loomed large, and the outcome was difficult to foresee. With self-development advantages and substantial untapped potential compared to the other two, Song Xiren was the least willing to initiate war and the most eager to maintain the current peace and stability. Because the longer time dragged on, the more advantageous the situation became for him. Occupying two-thirds of the Changqing Domain, if only time was consumed, Changqing Immortal Sect had no fear of the other two families. Under such circumstances, even if the departure of Qing Guanzi and others was discovered, and Taiping Dao¡¯s main forces were away, leaving their gates empty, Changqing Immortal Sect would not attack Mi Yun Mountain. Because it would be meaningless. To the outside world, the core of Taiping Dao was Qing Guanzi, Yi Dancheng, and Che Shidao. Originally owning nothing, they came to the Southern Domain and within a poverty-stricken situation, it took only seven hundred years to establish Taiping Dao as it is now. Since the three of them, in such circumstances, started from scratch and achieved what they have now. Seven hundred years have passed, and their strength and foundation have further advanced; building another Taiping Dao would naturally not be difficult. As long as these three did not die, destroying a single Taiping Dao and breaching Mi Yun Mountain meant nothing. They could easily establish it again at any moment. Not to mention, even without these three individuals, the present Taiping Dao and Mi Yun Mountain were safeguarded by the Earth Immortal formation, with five True Immortals and thousands of disciples supporting them. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? With these foundations, even when facing the full onslaught of Changqing Immortal Sect, they could rely on the formation to hold out for several months, providing enough time for Qing Guanzi and the others to return for backup. Once these three returned, it was naturally impossible for Changqing Immortal Sect to have any chance of conquering the Southern Domain. Thus, no matter how one calculated, attacking Taiping Dao at this time was an arduous task that was unappreciated and endlessly problematic. Unless Song Xiren had gone mad, he would not possibly instigate conflict with Taiping Dao. The same logic applied to Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Jiuzhou Immortal Gate wouldn¡¯t initiate hostility with Taiping Dao at this time either. Not long ago, they even sent significant gifts to Che Shidao to resolve misunderstandings. Neither Changqing nor Jiuzhou wished for chaos, thus Taiping Dao naturally had no worries. With Taiping Dao at ease, Lu Yuan naturally had no concerns and could enjoy his leisurely days. However, although this main body could indulge in leisure, acting as a hands-off manager, Jade Brocade, burdened with all affairs, was not having such an easy time. As the main battle force comprised three avatars had gone out, and even though outsiders were unaware, or even if they became aware, they would not act against Taiping Dao, What outsiders thought was their concern. But as the School Leader, Jade Brocade could not think this way. During this most vulnerable time for Taiping Dao, he must devise every possible means to ensure that nothing went amiss internally. Therefore, after returning and pondering thoroughly, Jade Brocade issued another edict: That was to continue expanding the discipleship. On top of the existing base, another four thousand disciples were to be recruited. The number of Taiping Dao¡¯s disciples would then be expanded to over twelve thousand in one fell swoop. This grand move immediately staggered the outside world. One must realize that the prior number of Taiping Dao¡¯s disciples was only four thousand. But not long ago, the order was given to recruit another four thousand disciples, and the mere selection of qualified candidates was a challenging task. With Taiping Dao¡¯s recruitment standards, only those with superior qualifications were allowed entry. Even though Taiping Dao possessed control over the populous Southern Domain of over a billion, Persons with superior qualifications were also one in a million. To select those with superior qualifications from over a billion mortals, screening everyone might produce at most a couple thousand candidates. Among them, if you exclude those of advanced age, bad temperament, or other defects, the number of disciples that could be recruited would be even less. Perhaps only five or six hundred. Taiping Dao managed to gather four thousand disciples over seven hundred years, selecting qualified candidates year after year to accumulate such numbers. Now, gathering four thousand qualified disciples in a short amount of time was no easy feat. Even at Taiping Dao¡¯s current size and pace, it would take about a hundred years. Of course, if standards were lowered and superior qualifications were not strictly required, it would not take a hundred years but possibly just one or two to gather these people. However, such disciples had virtually no hope of becoming immortal, even attaining the Five Qi Towards Primordial would be difficult. To send them to the battlefield would hardly consume a few of the enemy¡¯s Dao Law spells. Even Lu Yuan¡¯s arrival would be useless. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Lowering the standards was out of the question, but it also presented a problem to gather so many people at once. Taiping Dao governed over seven nations with vast territories, just maintaining local security required at least fifteen hundred disciples. If they were to staff the headquarters of the sect and the six subsidiary institutes fully, it would need four thousand disciples. Yes, that¡¯s four thousand. Previously, to remain secure and reduce its threat level, avoiding the vigilance of outsiders, Taiping Dao only fulfilled basic manpower needs without further expanding its disciple count. They maintained around four thousand disciples, feigning weakness strategically to confuse outsiders. However, now, with Lu Yuan and several avatars successively becoming Earth Immortals, and Jin Qingyue and Jade Brocade rapidly catching up, Not much time remained before Taiping Dao would launch the war to unify the Changqing Domain. The original disciples were not reliable and could not be heavily relied upon. Now, recruiting new disciples and training them from the ground up would also take around four or five hundred years. Chapter 1458 - Chapter 1458 Chapter 569 Old Out New In_3 ?Chapter 1458: Chapter 569 Old Out New In_3 Chapter 1458: Chapter 569 Old Out New In_3 In preparation for the great war that was to come, it was necessary to recruit more people now and start training them immediately. Thus, those four thousand disciples had to be fully recruited. Not only did these four thousand need to be recruited in full, but also another newly ordered four thousand had to be completed. Disciples from within the sect, who had been infiltrated by outsiders, had already been lured by spies from the Qing Immortal Sect among Jiuzhou Immortal Gates and ran off to the Hei Yuan Secret Mansion. These people thought well; having no opportunities within the sect, they ventured into the Eastern Desolate Inner Sea to try their luck. But did they ever think if the Eastern Desolate Inner Sea was a good place to go? That place was the territory of the Sea Clan, teeming with countless monsters, and these Sea Demons were not easy to encounter. Even on the seas of the Eastern Desolate, numerous islands were inhabited by large numbers of loose cultivators and peripheral sects. These peripheral cultivators, coexisting with demons, had no basic moral constraints like the disciples of the Immortal Sects in East China, and their actions had no limits. The cultivators of the Eastern Desolate Sea were similar to the portrayal of nefarious cultivators in those underworld cultivation novels Lu Yuan had read in his previous life, each one murdering, looting, searching corpses for treasures, driven solely by profit, similar to evil cultivators. Going to such a place, those True Immortals were still okay, having extremely strong personal strength; even if they encountered demons or nefarious cultivators, they could protect themselves. But those ordinary cultivators did not have that kind of strength. In the East Sea, they had to guard against demons as well as evil cultivators. One can never know if the person who warmly greeted you would stab you in the back the next moment in a murderous robbery. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã? Those disciples of Taiping Dao who were lured away had grown up in the peaceful and stable era of Changqing Domain, enjoying seven hundred ¡°peaceful days.¡± Even if they were wary, in terms of experience and worldly encounters, they were undoubtedly like naive rabbits compared to the East Sea cultivators. Fighting with these people was indeed an unpredictable outcome. All this was just the difficulties they would face on the way to the Hei Yuan Secret Mansion. Once inside the Hei Yuan Secret Mansion, with interests in front, who cares if you¡¯re from the orthodox Immortal Sect? Each cultivator competes with one another, fighting for their lives in a ruthless struggle. In such a fierce competitive environment, the death rate becomes even more horrifying. More than two thousand cultivators being lured away, it¡¯s feared half would die on the way to Hei Yuan, and the majority of the remaining half would perish upon arrival; scarcely one in ten might return alive. The death of these individuals was not important, but the positions they vacated had to be filled. Given this situation alone, Taiping Dao had to rapidly expand its manpower. Time changed too swiftly. The emergence of the Hei Yuan Secret Mansion disrupted Taiping Dao¡¯s gradual plan for disciple replacement. If an exploration mission resulted in the deaths of over two thousand people, Taiping Dao¡¯s grassroots disciples would be almost decimated. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The remaining few could not support the entire sect¡¯s structure. Even if the newly recruited disciples were inadequate and required extensive training, there was no time to consider much anymore. Even just to fill the numbers, they had to gather the people to maintain the basic facade of the sect. As for within the jurisdiction, insufficient qualified candidates not being able to provide enough disciples wasn¡¯t a big problem. The fact that Taiping Dao couldn¡¯t gather so many people in the region it ruled was indeed the truth, and there was no solution to that. But it wasn¡¯t just Taiping Dao¡¯s region in the entire world; the entire Changqing Domain and East China were available for selection. Even if the Changqing Domain was under the influence of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Qing Immortal Sect, if they didn¡¯t want to see the current situation of disciples being extensively infiltrated happening again, they couldn¡¯t select disciples. However, outside the Changqing Domain, in the East China, there were over a dozen Great Domains. In these places, Qing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had no influence. They could not intervene or influence civilian affairs in those places, effectively eliminating the possibility of their infiltration. With such a vast territory, was gathering four thousand, no, eight thousand qualified disciples not very easy? However, even though there were so many qualified candidates worldwide, nor just anyone could recruit them. According to the Immortal Realm¡¯s customs, in the regions ruled by various Immortal Sects, any mortal with cultivation potential, regardless of their potential¡¯s level, were considered each respective Immortal Sect¡¯s property. They were the potential cornerstone of an Immortal Sect, and outsiders were not allowed to interfere. Occasionally stealing one or two disciples that met their desires was tolerable if the numbers were small, and other Immortal Sects could turn a blind eye and treat it as a favor. But if it came to extensive recruitment, it was a naked act of provocation and akin to declaring a war. Of course, the above is only if you recruited disciples without others¡¯ consent. If you could gain the consent of the local Immortal Sect, then recruiting some disciples from their territory wasn¡¯t really an issue. After all, even if all qualifying disciples in your own region were recruited, it was only empty for a short time. With the speed of human reproduction, in just about twenty years, or even ten years, a new generation would be born with new potential cultivators. Such a short window of ten to twenty years, for any Immortal Sect, was merely the time for meditation, hardly significant. The cost of this wasn¡¯t enough to cause any heartache. But, when there¡¯s no close relationship, even if the cost isn¡¯t significant, why should others help you? Without good relationships, people won¡¯t give you face, so what can you do? At this time, the good reputation Taiping Dao had painstakingly maintained for seven hundred years, the continuous external interactions, dispatching disciples to exchange with other Immortal Sects, showed its benefits. Among neighboring domains, countless Immortal Sects were on good terms with Taiping Dao. Jade Brocade alone was able to confirm that more than thirty Immortal Sects would likely agree to Taiping Dao¡¯s request to recruit disciples from their territories. Among these Immortal Sects, Dongyang Mountain led the way. With the relationship previously established with True Person Wang ShiZhou of Dongyang Mountain, such a minor request wouldn¡¯t be refused. Securing Dongyang Mountain meant securing the Dongyang Domain. Having a large domain as a talent pool, Taiping Dao might gather four thousand disciples in one go just from this place. Coupled with a few other friendly Immortal Sects, a mere eight thousand disciples was nothing to worry about. Chapter 1459 - Chapter 1459 Chapter 570 Arms Race ?Chapter 1459: Chapter 570 Arms Race Chapter 1459: Chapter 570 Arms Race Recruiting new disciples quickly proceeded as planned. As previously mentioned, the reputation of Taiping Dao was exceptionally good. Thanks to years of diligent management, no nearby sect was displeased with Taiping Dao. Thus, when the messengers of Taiping Dao visited to convey this request and presented a Gift, each request sect quickly agreed without much hesitation. Special thanks are due to Li Ruoqing, a cultivator of the righteous path who was once saved by Taiping Dao and, after years of cultivation, became a cultivator reaching the state of becoming immortal and acquiring Dao Fruit six hundred years ago as Human Flower True Person. In the following six hundred years, he returned to the Mountain Gate to assist his Master in handling sect affairs. Over the past six hundred years, Master Li had become known in the Dongyang Domain for his fair and honest dealings, and even Lu Yuan occasionally heard of his renown. Not only was he excellent in handling affairs, Li Ruoqing was also true to his name of talent. Supported by Dongyang Mountain and his own efforts, coupled with his talent, Li Ruoqing made rapid progress in the Human Immortal Realm after breaking through to True Immortal. It took him only five hundred years to advance to mid-level Human Immortal, and now he was sprinting toward late-stage Human Immortal. At this rate, perhaps in another thousand years, he would become an Earth Immortal True Person. Outstanding in handling political affairs and strong in cultivation with a powerful backing, Li Ruoqing was truly a favored child of heaven. His position within the sect was climbing daily, placing him among the top three among Human Immortals, earning him a high and influential position. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï With such a figure supporting them, it was naturally very easy for Taiping Dao to recruit disciples from the Dongyang Domain. In fact, after receiving the request from Taiping Dao, Li Ruoqing wasted no words and immediately sought his Master, who handled the sect¡¯s general affairs, and had Wang ShiZhou agree to this. Wang ShiZhou himself had a good impression of Taiping Dao since visiting Mi Yun Mountain, where he formed a substantial friendship with Qing Guanzi and kept in touch regularly through letters. Now that his disciple wanted to repay a kindness, Wang ShiZhou naturally wouldn¡¯t object. After brief consideration, he agreed to the request. He also presided over a major council within the sect and persuaded several fellow disciples to cooperate as well. With that, the issue with Dongyang Mountain was fully resolved. With the cooperation of Dongyang Mountain, Taiping Dao¡¯s disciple recruitment in Dongyang Domain naturally went very smoothly. In just three short months, under the direct leadership of Jin Qingyue, the matter was concluded, and he successfully returned with five thousand new disciples from Dongyang Domain. With Dongyang Mountain setting an example, the other sects in surrounding domains that had good relations with Taiping Dao naturally found it even less problematic. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï If Dongyang Mountain didn¡¯t refuse and chose to facilitate Taiping Dao, why would we go out of our way to be the villains? Taiping Dao¡¯s strength was also formidable, and in recent years, it had grown even more powerful, standing among the upper echelons of the Great Immortals. Such a promising Immortal Sect wouldn¡¯t easily be offended unless absolutely necessary. After all, it was only the right to recruit a generation of new disciples, which would recover in a few years, hardly a major issue. Now, Taiping Dao was making a polite request and presenting gifts, fulfilling all the necessary formalities. There was nothing lost on their part, so naturally, everything was easily agreed upon. Thus, besides the Dongyang Domain, thirty-seven more Immortal Sects in the surrounding domains agreed to Taiping Dao¡¯s request to recruit a group of new disciples within their jurisdictions. Seeing the situation progress so smoothly, with no sects from the surrounding areas refusing, Jade Brocade was filled with joy, realizing the rare opportunity. Missing this chance would make it awkward to request again in the future. Therefore, he decided to go all in if he was to act at all. After collecting disciples from Dongyang Domain, he dispatched Jin Qingyue to travel to various domains again to recruit eligible disciples within the consenting sects. He also gave clear instructions. This recruitment had no upper limit. From all domains, anyone meeting Taiping Dao¡¯s disciple requirements could be admitted into the sect. In summary, recruit as many people as available. Initially, when he took office as School Leader, the mandate given by his deity was to increase the sect¡¯s disciple count to at least eight thousand before launching the war for unification. Unlimited growth was also permitted. Now, with the addition of five thousand new disciples from Dongyang Domain and casual recruitment from other domains, the target of eight thousand disciples was almost securely met. But this would only ensure the most basic quantity. Given Taiping Dao¡¯s current scale, after initially filling the quota of eight thousand disciples, continued recruitment and considering the replacement of deceased disciples, the numbers could gradually increase so that by the time of war, Taiping Dao could have amassed up to about fifteen thousand disciples. Fifteen thousand disciples would be sufficient to sustain a major battle. Yet Lu Yuan¡¯s goal was aimed at the entire Changqing Domain; his concern was not merely winning a battle but also managing and stabilizing the domain post-victory. Changqing Immortal Sect currently controlled twenty-three nations; Taiping Dao directly governed seven nations. With these territories, after the war, Taiping Dao¡¯s domain would be around thirty nations. To manage these thirty nations¡¯ territories, at a rate of five hundred disciples per nation, at least fifteen thousand disciples were necessary. Fifteen thousand disciples, this number, matched exactly with the number of disciples Taiping Dao would have during the war, seemingly enough. Chapter 1460 - Chapter 1460 Chapter 570 Arms Race_2 ?Chapter 1460: Chapter 570 Arms Race_2 Chapter 1460: Chapter 570 Arms Race_2 The problem is, these are the quantities at the start of the war. A great war means people will die. How many died when Changqing Immortal Sect fought against the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate? After a battle, each faction lost more than two-thirds of its power. Taiping Dao wanted to eliminate Changqing Immortal Sect, and the casualties were estimated to be about the same, not much less. After the battle, out of fifteen thousand disciples, if five thousand survived, that would be considered good. Five thousand disciples clearly are not enough to govern the lands of thirty nations. Even maintaining basic public order would be insufficient. Therefore, we need to recruit more people, many more people. The more prepared we are now, the greater the chances of Taiping Dao winning the decisive battle in the future. Also, given the size of Taiping Dao, it can actually afford to support so many people. It¡¯s just a matter of needing resources for some mortal cultivators, which is nothing for a Grand Fairy Door. With the production of a single nation¡¯s land providing just the basic resources, it can support two thousand cultivators with Gathering Three Qi. The lands of the seven nations of Taiping Dao, plus the tributes from three affiliated sects, can supply fifteen thousand disciples on their own. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Apart from its own production, Lu Yuan also encouraged disciples to travel and seek cultivation resources and income from external sources. With this measure, supporting an additional three thousand disciples wouldn¡¯t be a problem. Moreover, this is the consumption at the peak when Taiping Dao¡¯s disciples have reached their limit. Before the number of these disciples reached this limit, before their cultivation reached the peak, their consumption of supplies would not be so high. This extreme peak will come in four hundred years. It¡¯s then that these new disciples will begin to touch the realm of Five Qi Towards Primordial, reaching the mortal limit, and that¡¯s when the pressure on basic supplies will be at its highest. Before this limit, Taiping Dao still has four hundred years to stockpile basic cultivation supplies to meet the needs of those rapidly expanding disciples. In fact, Taiping Dao has been doing this stockpiling work for the previous seven hundred years. After seven hundred years of accumulation, Taiping Dao had already stockpiled enough supplies to support ten thousand people practicing for three hundred years. By adding another four hundred years of reserves, they should be able to extend this duration to around four hundred years. By then, the reserves of Great Plain Path would be sufficient for twenty thousand people to use for two hundred years. That means, with Taiping¡¯s current reserves and future production of supplies, it can support twenty thousand people cultivating until six hundred years later. Six hundred years later, Taiping Dao would be about ready to launch a great war. It also coincides with the time when a cultivator cultivates from the beginning to the brink of entering the Immortal Realm. By launching a great war then, those cultivators approaching the realm of Five Qi Towards Primordial would fight desperately even for their own paths. Because the lands of the seven nations of Taiping Dao clearly cannot satisfy the resources needed for twenty thousand disciples to become immortal. Only by conquering the land of thirty nations and merging with Changqing Immortal Sect, and reducing some population through war, would there be enough resources to supply the cultivation needs of up to twenty thousand disciples. In this respect, even to maintain the enthusiasm of the disciples to participate in the war after it starts, Taiping Dao needs to recruit more people now. Without pushing these sect disciples to a desperate situation, who knows whether they would be willing to fight and die for their sect. Only by aligning their interests with the sect and uniting against outsiders can they unleash their strongest war potential. Regarding this tactic, when Lu Yuan was previously in the Nine Provinces, he had used it more than once as the Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe approached. With the invasion of the Southern Polar Poisonous Fire, he mobilized a vast army of tens of millions from the entire Chu State for the Northern Expedition. Achieving such a feat with just a nation and a province shows his adeptness. Now mobilizing the entire sect is just a small test. Under the future arrangement of Jade Brocade, after obtaining Lu Yuan¡¯s agreement, Jin Qingyue had to temporarily set aside his own cultivation and exhaustedly run around the surrounding regions. It took him a full year to finally complete these tasks. And the harvest was tremendous. After a trip out, Jin Qingyue brought back seven thousand disciples. ?¦Ï??0.§ã? Including the five thousand disciples gathered from the Dongyang Domain, this recruitment drive increased Taiping Dao¡¯s disciples by a total of twelve thousand. Besides, within the sect, there were also the previous thousand old disciples. Outside the sect, over two thousand people went to explore the Black Abyss, and it was estimated that two to three hundred, or possibly even four to five hundred, would survive and return. So in the end, within just two years, the number of Taiping Dao¡¯s disciples had rapidly expanded to fourteen thousand. This is an astonishing number. For comparison, Changqing Immortal Sect in the north, after years of recovery and occupying twenty-three nations, currently has only about thirteen thousand disciples. The Jiuzhou Immortal Sect in the west, holding six nations, has even fewer, just five thousand. Taiping Dao, with just seven nations, already has more disciples than Changqing Immortal Sect, supporting nearly the same number of sect members with less than a third of the territory. This kind of operation is simply insane. When Jiuzhou Immortal Sect received the news, they almost thought Taiping Dao wanted to start a new war. So they hurriedly rushed to expand their number of disciples. Changqing Immortal Sect did the same. They too thought, could it be that their series of actions had provoked Taiping Dao? Chapter 1461 - Chapter 1461 Chapter 570 Arms Race_3 ?Chapter 1461: Chapter 570 Arms Race_3 Chapter 1461: Chapter 570 Arms Race_3 At that moment, he was contemplating revenge. Otherwise, why would he suddenly expand by twelve thousand disciples? How could a small Taiping Dao afford to support so many people? Both Immortal Sects, anxious and flustered, sent their Messengers to inquire about the reasons at Taiping Dao. However, faced with their inquiries, Taiping Dao naturally denied everything. The reason given was simply that the opportunity was too rare to pass up. The disciples within the Changqing Domain could not be trusted, so they took this opportunity to recruit more disciples, to avoid future troubles. At the same time, in recent years, there had been a significant loss of disciples due to expeditions, making it necessary to recruit more people to compensate for these losses. Regardless of whether others believed it or not, once these reasons were given, Jade Brocade no longer met with the Messengers from the two sects and busied himself with administrative affairs. Suddenly recruiting twelve thousand new people required arranging accommodations, assigning teachers, teaching appropriate techniques, allocating various resources, issuing tasks, and so on. There was simply too much to do; he had no time to consider the opinions of outsiders. What did it matter if the others did not believe? Would they dare to start a war with Taiping Dao? Currently, Taiping Dao was only recruiting disciples; this was an internal affair, and outsiders had no right to intervene. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï As long as Taiping Dao did not initiate war, the other two families would certainly not strike first. However, this action could easily cause unease in the other two families, prompting them also to react. But speaking of which, Even if Taiping Dao did not actively expand, wouldn¡¯t the other two Immortal Sects expand their own influence? Now, after seven hundred years of peace, the power of the Evergreen Immortal Sect had swollen to surpass that of both Taiping Dao and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. If the opposition¡¯s growth was left unchecked, it would only be a few years before Taiping Dao and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, even if they joined forces, would not be able to contend against it. Under these circumstances, taking advantage of the fact that they still had the strength to fight, engaging in a decisive battle with the Evergreen Immortal Sect to curb their expansion was an inevitable outcome. Considering the speed of the Evergreen Immortal Sect¡¯s growth in strength, this decisive battle should occur within five to six hundred years and was a consensus among the three parties. At this time, Taiping Dao¡¯s expansion by recruiting more disciples could be seen as a result of the aforementioned reasons and also as preparation for the war five or six hundred years later. The other two sects, in fact, did not need stimulation from Taiping Dao; they had probably already secretly prepared for expanding their sect¡¯s strength. Taiping Dao stepping forward now merely stripped everyone¡¯s pretense and brought the matter into the open. Thus, after seeing the attitude of Taiping Dao, the other two Immortal Sects immediately realized what Taiping Dao was concerned about. Therefore, apart from leaving behind Messengers to continue trying to appease Taiping Dao, Upon receiving the news, Evergreen Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate followed Taiping Dao¡¯s lead and immediately began recruiting disciples within their own territories. Although by this time, the qualified disciples within the territories of the surrounding Immortal Sects had already been swept up by Taiping Dao. However, those outsiders had always had poor relations with the two sects, and they did not expect to recruit from outside. After all, with the large scale of the Evergreen Immortal Sect, spanning twenty-three nations, a single sweep could gather two to three thousand disciples. Continuing to expand recruitment over a few hundred years, by the time the war started, they could muster up to thirty thousand disciples. As for the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, although they had a very small territory, just six nations, they had the support from various factions outside the domain, giving them a considerable base for recruiting disciples. However, given their capacity, they genuinely could not afford too many disciples; reaching ten thousand disciples before the war would be their limit. By the time of the decisive battle, the situation would likely be ten thousand from Jiuzhou, twenty thousand from Taiping Dao, and then facing thirty thousand from Evergreen Immortal Sect. On both sides, the number of lower-level disciples maintained a state of equally matched powers. As for the high-level combat power, each would depend on their own methods. Taiping Dao was confident in this regard. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? And throughout the entire Changqing Domain, following the outbreak of the spy chaos in Taiping Dao and the subsequent recruitment and cleansing of disciples, an arms race had commenced among the three sects. Everyone knew war was coming. Everyone was anticipating that war. Everyone was preparing for that war. In this common understanding, the formerly friendly atmosphere among Taiping Dao, Evergreen Immortal Sect, and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate quickly faded. Tensions between the sects grew gradually, a hostile and tense aura spreading throughout the domain. The short-lived peace was already tolling its departure bell. An atmosphere of an approaching storm weighed on everyone¡¯s hearts. And in this environment, above the Inner Sea of the Eastern Wilderness, the tumultuous Black Abyss Secret Mansion completely disappeared from Heaven and Earth ten years later. Those who had gone exploring began to return one after another. Of the two thousand six hundred plus disciples that Taiping Dao had been tricked into sending, or had sent voluntarily, only three hundred returned. These three hundred all returned laden with treasures, and upon arriving at the sect, immediately five of them presented a large amount of treasures in exchange for contributions, applying for a breakthrough to True Immortal. Facing these wealth-bringing disciples, even though he knew their gains were somewhat unnatural, far exceeding the norm, Jade Brocade still chose to agree with a smiling face, and Lu Yuan even took out the qi fortunes of three nations he had cultivated, arranging to fulfill the needs of these individuals. The main thing was to uphold honesty and trust. Chapter 1462 - Chapter 1462 Chapter 570 Arms Race_4 ?Chapter 1462: Chapter 570 Arms Race_4 Chapter 1462: Chapter 570 Arms Race_4 While the three Avatars of Che Shidao followed these disciples back. Together, the three Earth Immortals, protected by Immortal Artifacts, had indeed made a name for themselves in the Black Yuan expedition. Because Che Shidao and the others concealed their identities and aura, outsiders did not know who the three were, and they were even given the moniker ¡°The Three Immortals of Black Yuan.¡± One could imagine how much the three had gained. In fact, because they did not fight over Tribulation Crossing Treasures or cultivation resources, focusing solely on robbing refining materials. The many Earth Immortals who entered the secret treasury with them, after seeing the three¡¯s strength and realizing it did not threaten their core interests, did not deliberately make things difficult for them. During this treasure hunt in the secret treasury, more than 70% of the refining immortal materials were snatched away by the three Avatars, truly a great harvest. Lu Yuan had already taken stock, and considering the contributions of those disciples as well as the gains of the three Avatars, this haul was already sufficient to enhance Jade Brocade to Middle Grade Immortal Artifacts and then refine two more Earthly Immortal level Avatars. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Such gains were simply beyond reproach. After receiving the materials, he immediately began working to enhance the quality of Jade Brocade and forge new Dao Fruit Avatars. There were at most six hundred years left before the decisive battle. To cultivate several Avatars to the Earthly Immortal Realm in such a short time was an urgent matter, even with the aid of Qi Luck and fortune. Even within Taiping Dao, Qi Luck and fortune were somewhat insufficient at this time. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï After all, with Jin Qingyue, Jade Brocade, and the two other Avatars about to emerge. To satisfy the needs of four mighty Avatars, even allocating them as one Avatar per Three Nations, would require the resources of twelve nations. The seven nations under Taiping Dao¡¯s control were simply not enough. To solve this problem, Lu Yuan did not care about losing face and directly ordered vassals like Jintai Gate, Xuan Turtle Mountain, and Bihu Palace to contribute their Qi Luck and fortune. This move immediately drew much criticism and affected the previously good reputation of Taiping Dao. However, the decisive battle was imminent, and the effort to unify the Changqing Domain was about to begin. At such a critical juncture, all available resources had to be utilized. Reputation and the like were insignificant as long as they could secure the final victory. Wasn¡¯t all the previous effort in building and maintaining the sect aimed at having resources to use at this moment? For the sake of his Avatars, he could only trouble these vassals for a while. At most, after unifying the Changqing Domain, he would not destroy them but continue to uphold their sects¡¯ Tao Inheritance as compensation. That should be a sufficient reward. Driven by this, the development of Taiping Dao advanced rapidly. Five years later, Lu Yuan¡¯s two new Avatars, Huang Xuan and Huang Yun, were born. Seventy years later, Jin Qingyue burst forth, adding another Earth Immortal to Taiping Dao. Three hundred years later, Jade Brocade had accumulated enough to smoothly break through to Earth Immortal. Four hundred years later, Lu Yuan successfully advanced to Mid-stage Earth Immortal. Upon reaching this state, his cultivation was almost at the limit of what Taiping Dao could support, and even with the boost of Qi Luck and fortune, the progression of his cultivation began to slow down. So, as was customary. And also to mobilize for the final battle, Taiping Dao announced to the world, once again, that they were about to change their School Leader. The chosen candidate for the new School Leader was Huang Xuan, one of the newly forged Avatars. As the news spread, the surrounding Immortal Sects, while shaken, began to feel somewhat numb. Taiping Dao changing its School Leader was the norm, after all. But regardless of what others thought, in response to Taiping Dao¡¯s invitation, the various Immortal Sects cooperated and sent Messengers to observe the ceremony. Chapter 1463 - Chapter 1463 Chapter 571 Revealing the Trump Card ?Chapter 1463: Chapter 571 Revealing the Trump Card Chapter 1463: Chapter 571 Revealing the Trump Card Mi Yun Mountain. Several centuries had passed since the last Jade Brocade succession ceremony. Now, because another such ceremony was about to take place, the area swiftly bustled with activity once more. It couldn¡¯t be helped; Taiping Dao needed a new School Leader, and the neighboring Immortal Sects dared not decline the invitation to attend and pay their respects. After all, over these four hundred years, Taiping Dao had become increasingly prosperous. Ever since the Jade Sovereign of Taiping Dao formulated the strategy to openly invite disciples into the sect, the number of disciples had soared as if on a flying sword. In just a short four hundred years, the disciples¡¯ numbers within Taiping Dao had ballooned to twenty thousand. And this number had not ceased growing; it still slowly increased. This was a truly terrifying development. To be honest, the outside world had racked their brains trying to figure out how Taiping Dao managed to sustain so many people. After all, Taiping Dao spanned only the lands of seven nations, and even when counting its three vassals, it had just a domain of ten nations. With such modest means, how could they afford to support so many? Many speculated that it would only be a matter of years before Taiping Dao might crumble from financial insolvency. These were the limited judgments they made due to a lack of information. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Indeed, based on Taiping Dao¡¯s output alone, it would not have been possible to support such a number of disciples. Yet, during that secret expedition to the Black Abyss, the three Avatars sent by Lu Yuan from Che Shidao had brought back more than just refining Immortal Materials. As Avatars of Lu Yuan, they deeply understood the current predicament of Taiping Dao. It wasn¡¯t just the higher echelons that lacked Immortal Materials for creating more Avatars. The lower ranks also faced an impending great war, which necessitated a swift expansion of the army, leading to a shortage in basic supplies. Therefore, during their adventure in Yi Dancheng, they did not merely snatch top-tier strategic Immortal Materials. They also aggressively hoarded ordinary Cultivation supplies rated below Immortal level, stripping the land wherever they went, as if they wished to scrape off a layer of the earth itself. The scavenging by the three Avatars precisely avoided the treasures coveted by other Cultivators of the same level. This allowed them to swiftly seize Immortal Materials not deemed essential by others, thereby freeing their hands to avoid competing for Earth Immortal-level Cultivation supplies and disaster-averting treasures. Thus, they had more time to compete with Human Immortals and mortal Cultivators for ordinary Cultivation supplies. Faced with the shameless bullying from the three Earth Immortals, those Human Immortals and mortal Cultivators were naturally no match for them and retreated one after another. Other Earth Immortals, even if indignant and disdainful at heart, would not engage in battle over common resources with three peers of equal strength. It simply wasn¡¯t worth it. Such common resources didn¡¯t require deliberate searching within the secret realm; their families produced them year after year. For the exceedingly wealthy Earth Immortals, these valuable yet not-so-prized items were practically insignificant. It was only Taiping Dao, newly established and facing immense external pressure, constantly preparing for war, that valued these ordinary resources. Therefore, in the face of Taiping Dao¡¯s bullying tactics, other Earth Immortals merely turned a blind eye, choosing not to stand up for those Human Immortals and mortal Cultivators. This led to the situation where Che Shidao and his cohorts faced practically no worthy opponents when plundering Human Immortal-level and mortal-level resources. They reigned supreme, sweeping the area clean. When the secret expedition concluded years later, the trio returned not only with refining Immortal Materials disregarded by their Earth Immortal peers but also a vast trove of fundamental supplies. After the return of Che Shidao and the others, Lu Yuan became aware of the size of the Cave World in the Black Abyss. This was a small world, significantly larger than the Nine Provinces, roughly equivalent to the combined area of six minor nations within the Immortal Realm. Six isolated minor nations had amassed resources for countless years, and even though over ninety percent was wasted through continuous circulation within the world, The remnants still represented an uncountable amount. In any case, the supplies that Che Shidao and his two companions brought back represented only a fraction of what the secret realm produced, yet it was comparable to the total output of the seven nations under Lu Yuan¡¯s rule over approximately five hundred years. With this additional income, Taiping Dao could maintain its status and continue to expand the number of disciples, even though it had already exceeded the limit with twenty thousand people. With Taiping Dao¡¯s resources, even keeping up the current rate of expansion, they could only continue to support their needs for another three hundred years. Riches in hand, peace in mind. Therefore, regardless of the many chaotic rumors from the outside world, Lu Yuan and the Taiping Dao high echelon remained unperturbed. Even if others predicted their downfall, Taiping Dao would carry on its expansion, recruiting more disciples, and the various benefits for disciples within the sect were distributed punctually and thoroughly, without fail. Such strong actions naturally greatly strengthened the confidence of the disciples, calming those who had begun to worry and panic due to the external rumors. After all. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï If the rumors had merely predicted that Taiping Dao would crumble in a year or two, or even in thirty or fifty years, or at most a hundred years, Then the targeted individuals, the people of Taiping Dao, might still panic for a while. But if such doomsaying persisted for a hundred or two hundred years, or even three to four hundred years, continuing until the present day. Chapter 1464 - Chapter 1464 Chapter 571 Reveal the Hidden Cards_2 ?Chapter 1464: Chapter 571 Reveal the Hidden Cards_2 Chapter 1464: Chapter 571 Reveal the Hidden Cards_2 If anyone still believes in that theory, they must have a problem with their brain. Four hundred years, even for a cultivator who had gathered the Three Qi, was nearly a lifetime for others. People had listened to the collapse theory their entire lives, yet Taiping Dao had not only not collapsed but had instead grown increasingly prosperous and powerful. In the face of hard facts, no one wanted to be the fool who got slapped. And this was only speaking from the perspective of the lower-ranking disciples. At the higher levels, Taiping Dao¡¯s strength had continuously grown stronger over these four hundred years. Not to mention the avatars of Lu Yuan. Just take the local disciples, among those who had previously come from the Black Abyss Secret Vault, five had returned and applied to exchange for a country¡¯s fate. Later, three more completed their accumulation and requested the sect for an exchange, preparing to break through to the Immortal Realm. Out of these eight, six directly failed and perished under the tribulation of becoming immortal. However, two succeeded in overcoming the tribulation, cultivated their Dao Fruit, and became the new generation of Human Immortals. Even among those disciples that Taiping Dao gave up on, there emerged two more Human Immortals. Of course, they had to thank the Changqing Immortal Sect for their generous support. Apart from these individuals, among the initial group of older disciples, those who were still loyal to Taiping Dao, another three had applied to exchange their fate quantity to undergo tribulation. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Eventually, one succeeded and became a Human Immortal. Thus, in these four hundred years, aside from Lu Yuan¡¯s avatars, Taiping Dao had produced three new Human Immortals. This was purely Taiping Dao¡¯s own essence. To outsiders, aside from these three Human Immortals, including Huang Xuan who was being prepared by Lu Yuan to assume the position of School Leader, Taiping Dao had produced four Human Immortals in four hundred years. An average of one every hundred years, an alarming rate. Currently, just visibly, Taiping Dao had Qing Guanzi, an Earth Immortal. In addition, there were Che Shidao, Yi Dancheng, Lu Yuan, Jin Qingyue, Jade Brocade, Huang Xuan, Yang Xiuan, Yu Shipei, and the three True Persons who had emerged in these four hundred years, totaling eleven Human Immortals. As for Huang Yun, Lu Yuan had treated him as a hidden agent, prepared to remain undercover until an opportune moment to strike, catching opponents off guard. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï But even without counting him, a count of one Earth Immortal and eleven Immortals still solidly placed Taiping Dao at the pinnacle below the Heavenly Immortal Sects among the grand Immortal Sects. Even compared to the former Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Taiping Dao was only slightly lacking in foundation at the Earth Immortal level. Just one or two more Earth Immortals emerging would place Taiping Dao almost on par with the former Jiuzhou. With Taiping Dao¡¯s current momentum, no one doubted whether Taiping Dao could cultivate more Earth Immortals. Some even suspected in their hearts that Taiping Dao might have already secretly cultivated Earth Immortals, considering the innate talents of the former Sect Leaders Yi Dancheng and Lu Yuan. All those who had ever interacted with them firmly believed that these two definitely had the potential to be Earth Immortals. Even figures like Yang Jihua of Changqing Immortal Sect and Zhen Xuan of Jiuzhou, who were slightly inferior to these two, had recently been rumored to be close to breaking through to Earth Immortal status. But even more promising were Yi Dancheng and Lu Yuan. In recent years, having retired from their positions, they had been reclusively living in the mountains without any news coming out. Such behavior was extremely unusual. It was difficult not to suspect that Taiping Dao was deliberately concealing its talents and hiding its strength. After all, the current situation in the Changqing Domain was clear to everyone; the clouds of war were densely gathered, and conflict could break out at any moment. It made sense for Taiping Dao to conceal its strength at this time in preparation for war. Therefore, considering this, outsiders would unconsciously raise their estimation of Taiping Dao¡¯s strength a notch higher. And believed that aside from Qing Guanzi, Taiping Dao likely had hidden at least one more Earth Immortal. If such speculation were true, Taiping Dao would not just be one of the top grand Immortal Sects but would breach the threshold of Heavenly Immortal Sects. Similar to the former Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, capable of contending with rulers like Changqing Immortal Sect, vying for dominance over a Great Domain. After a thousand years of development, starting from establishing a sect at Mi Yun Mountain, what now presented to the world was such a powerful Taiping Dao. Additionally, with the increasingly intense smell of gunpowder in Changqing Domain and increasingly unstable regional circumstances, being one of the three great powers in the domain, how could Taiping Dao¡¯s change of leadership not attract external attention and probing? Indeed, the Immortal Sects surrounding Changqing Domain remained calm about this matter. After all, it didn¡¯t concern them; no matter how fiercely the war in Changqing Domain raged, it wouldn¡¯t reach them. But the other two Immortal Sects within the domain, Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, couldn¡¯t sit still and had to inquire into the full story. As for these two, Lu Yuan simply treated the messenger from Changqing Immortal Sect normally, hosting him together with other Immortal Sect messengers according to protocol. No blame could be placed on him. Over the years, as the three Immortal Sects continuously engaged in arms races, relations between Taiping Dao and Changqing Immortal Sect had swiftly deteriorated. Plus the impact of previous spy chaos, the relationship between the two couldn¡¯t be said to be as hostile as fire and water, but it certainly couldn¡¯t be as close as before. That Taiping Dao didn¡¯t show them disdain was already quite good. To expect better treatment was simply wishful thinking. Changqing Immortal Sect also understood this and knew their current relationship with Taiping Dao was very poor and that conflict might break out at any moment. Therefore, the messenger sent to Mi Yun Mountain this time was not the old friend of Taiping Dao, Yang Jihua, but another unknown ordinary Human Immortal. Chapter 1465 - Chapter 1465 Chapter 571 Reveal the Hidden Cards_3 ?Chapter 1465: Chapter 571 Reveal the Hidden Cards_3 Chapter 1465: Chapter 571 Reveal the Hidden Cards_3 There¡¯s no way around it, the Changqing Immortal Sect is afraid too. Now that the relations between the two sects are so poor, if they were to send Yang Jihua over again, and Taiping Dao shamelessly took the opportunity to kill Yang Jihua¡­ Then the Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s successor, painstakingly cultivated over a thousand years, would be lost. The Changqing Immortal Sect would also be facing the issue of discontinuity in succession. Even if they won the upcoming decisive battle, without a qualified successor, it¡¯s feared that the hard-earned victory might slowly fade away due to a lack of successors. If it really came to that, Song Xiren probably wouldn¡¯t rest in peace even in death. Therefore, although doing so would exacerbate the relations between the two sects and make the situation within the domain even tenser, The Changqing Immortal Sect didn¡¯t send Yang Jihua out, but casually appointed a messenger to come and probe for information. After all, war had already become inevitable. They only needed to confirm when Taiping Dao would take action, what kind of personality the next School Leader had, and then bring back this intelligence for the sect to respond accordingly. They needn¡¯t worry too much about anything else. On Taiping Dao¡¯s side, they were well aware of this and thus treated the opposing messenger as a common one, not bothering to warmly chase the cold tail. However, apart from the common messengers, Lu Yuan alone gave a grand reception to the messenger from the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Zhen Xuan. Upon his arrival, he was immediately invited to Lu Yuan¡¯s Cave Mansion for a personal reception. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Inside the Cave Mansion. Lu Yuan¡¯s Cave Mansion, located on a scenic green mountain in Mi Yun Mountain, has many beautiful sights. He chose a bamboo grove and entertained the guest with tea brewing in the courtyard. Once the fragrant tea was ready and they had each been served, Zhen Xuan, who had been absorbed in thought and silent since he came in, finally couldn¡¯t hold back and spoke, ¡°Taoist Lu, you¡¯ve been in seclusion in these mountains all these years with no word escaping; I honestly thought you might emulate Venerable Yi and completely disengage from worldly affairs. I was surprised that you invited me for the succession ceremony. What matter prompted this exception?¡± As Zhen Xuan finished speaking, his gaze was keenly fixed on Lu Yuan, waiting for a reply. Lu Yuan knew what Elder Daoist was thinking and had no intention of being mysterious. He simply smiled and said, ¡°My Taiping Dao¡¯s School Leader, having retired into seclusion, while has set regulations in recent years, never stated that after the School Leader enters seclusion, one mustn¡¯t go out. Previously, Brother Yi and I were unwilling to go out, solely focusing on the Tao, not wanting external matters to disturb our inner peace. This does not mean that we can¡¯t have contact with the outside world. Moreover, when we retired into seclusion at that time, we said that unless we became Earth Immortals, we would not leave seclusion. While this is a shackle, it is also motivation. As long as this is achieved, the barrier can be broken through.¡± Upon hearing this, Zhen Xuan caught the meaning in the other¡¯s words, his pupils contracted, and he exclaimed, ¡°Taoist Lu, have you reached the threshold and cultivated the Earth Flower Dao Fruit?¡± The corners of Lu Yuan¡¯s mouth slightly curved, as he released a bit of the restrained aura on his body. The Earth Flower, which had been concealed above his head, bloomed open, startling onlookers. The extraordinary aura of the Earth Immortal Realm couldn¡¯t be faked at all. Zhen Xuan had already seen this manifestation numerous times among many Jiuzhou Earth Immortals. Now with a simple recognition, he knew it to be true. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? However, upon confirmation, he couldn¡¯t help but feel bitter, ¡°Indeed, with Taoist Lu¡¯s innate talent, it would be unreasonable for you to have no progress in these four hundred years. It¡¯s only logical for you to have achieved the status of Earth Immortal now. In the future, I must respectfully address Taoist Lu as a senior. Since you have become an Earth Immortal, then Venerable Yi, who has been in seclusion for eight hundred years, must have also achieved Earth Immortal status by now, right?¡± Over the recent years, Zhen Xuan and Yang Jihua¡¯s reputations rose in the Changqing Domain. Both had cultivated to the late stages of Human Immortal and were just one step away from the realm of Earth Immortal. That was why there were rumors spreading about their impending breakthrough to Earth Immortal. Under external adulation, they even garnered a nickname, the ¡®Twin Truths of Changqing¡¯, far outshining the past renown of Yi Dancheng and Lu Yuan. They were seen as the next leaders of the Changqing Domain for the upcoming five thousand years. And Zhen Xuan himself, influenced by this, while still able to maintain his core, inevitably developed some conceit, Believing that even if he wasn¡¯t as good as Lu Yuan, the difference was marginal. But now, upon seeing the other¡¯s true cultivation, he understood just how far his thoughts were from reality. While he was still basking in the glory of the ¡®Twin Truths of Changqing¡¯ title, The other had already become an Earth Immortal. His title¡¯s ultimate goal had now become Lu Yuan¡¯s current starting point; the gap was so large that they were no longer on the same level. And even more striking for him was that the first-generation School Leader of Taiping Dao, together with Qing Guanzi, an Earth Immortal, had built the present Taiping Dao¡¯s Yi Dancheng. Back then, the School Leader¡¯s reputation and limelight even exceeded that of Lu Yuan. Now that Lu Yuan had become an Earth Immortal, where could Yi Dancheng possibly fall short? Indeed. After he asked with mixed feelings, Lu Yuan nodded affirmatively, ¡°Taoist friend guessed right; not just me, Brother Yi has now also achieved Earth Immortal status.¡± Hearing this confirmed response left Zhen Xuan at a loss for words. Lu Yuan had become an Earth Immortal, Yi Dancheng as well, and now coupled with Qing Guanzi, Taiping had three Earth Immortals. Underneath them were nine Human Immortals. Looking at this strength, compared to a thousand years ago, before the decisive battle of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Taiping Dao now holds no less power. Their only disadvantage might be the lack of a transcendental powerhouse, without cultivators like Yao Baojuan and Meng Jianshan, who were in the late stages of Earth Immortal. They fall short ever so slightly at the top of the power hierarchy. However, likewise, After that decisive battle, both Yao Baojuan and Meng Jianshan perished; in the current Changqing Domain, among the three Immortal Sects, there are no longer such grand cultivators who have the power to determine the outcome of a battle. The strongest is only Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s Song Xiren. But even Song Xiren, only a mid-stage Earth Immortal, at most, can contend with Taiping Dao¡¯s three Earth Immortals and doesn¡¯t have an overwhelming advantage. In this regard, after offsetting Song Xiren, the Changqing Immortal Sect is stronger than Taiping Dao only by an additional Earth Immortal and a few Human Immortals. This situation is not much different from that of the initial battle between Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Merely, the roles have been reversed. Taiping Dao, after years of development, has successfully risen to power. Meanwhile, Jiuzhou has declined after the war, becoming what Taiping Dao was back then. ¡®So the current Taiping Dao, showing off their foundation, aims to ally with Jiuzhou to jointly confront Changqing Immortal Sect?¡¯ At this thought, Zhen Xuan couldn¡¯t help the idea from emerging in his mind. Chapter 1466 - Chapter 1466 Chapter 572 Revealing Identity ?Chapter 1466: Chapter 572: Revealing Identity Chapter 1466: Chapter 572: Revealing Identity Zhen Xuan was a man of action. Having harbored suspicions in his heart, upon seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s candid demeanor, he naturally wouldn¡¯t conceal his curiosity and directly asked his question. Lu Yuan admitted frankly, ¡°Fellow cultivator¡¯s thoughts are correct. I indeed wish to align with your sect to jointly defeat the Evergreen Immortal Sect, thwarting their rising momentum.¡± The current situation had become extremely clear. The strength of the Evergreen Immortal Sect was rapidly accumulating. The longer time dragged on, the greater their advantage and the more difficult their position would be to shake. And for Taiping Dao and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, if they did not want to end up crushed by the overwhelming power of the Evergreen Immortal Sect eventually, then the best method was to take action now while the opponent had yet to fully develop, interrupting their growth trend. This was how the tense atmosphere in the Changqing Domain had come about. All three Immortal Sects were fully aware of each other¡¯s intentions. It wasn¡¯t something one could deny just by wishing to deny it. The belief of the other party was also needed. Originally, an alliance between Taiping Dao and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate to face a common enemy was not a problem. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 After all, it was only natural for the weaker to unite. But now, with the reveal of Lu Yuan¡¯s and Venerable Yi¡¯s cultivation from Yi Dancheng, the situation had instantly changed. What was once a union of the weak against the strong suddenly became a matter of two strong versus one weak. At this time, as the weaker party, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate forming an alliance with another second strong party to contest the strongest, involving strategic risks that were completely different. With two weaker parties against a strong one, when everyone¡¯s strength was similar, there was no need to worry about being annexed by an ally once the strong party was defeated. But in an alliance between a weaker and a stronger party, opposing another strong party, the weaker one must worry whether, after the other strong party was eliminated, they themselves would then be devoured by their own strong ally. These examples were all too common throughout the history of the Immortal Realm. As the weaker party, Zhen Xuan really had to consider this. However, what confused him was why Taiping Dao, with this strength, had revealed its hand. Wouldn¡¯t it have been better to keep it hidden? With a weaker identity, forging an alliance with Jiuzhou would not raise the ally¡¯s concerns. At the same time, keeping Lu Yuan and Venerable Yi hidden until a critical moment would undoubtedly have a greater effect and impact. By revealing oneself now, not to mention jointly confronting the Evergreen Immortal Sect, even the prospect of forming an alliance had become an issue. This truly baffled him. After pondering, Zhen Xuan couldn¡¯t help but ask, ¡°Fellow cultivator is so frank, disclosing the hidden cultivation of your sect¡¯s experts and Venerable Yi without reservation to me. Aren¡¯t you worried that by learning of this, it will affect our two sects¡¯ alliance? The strength of each sect is so formidable, just like my sect in the past. Back then, when your sect faced a decisive battle with the Evergreen Immortal Sect, you chose to stand by and reap the benefits. With the situation now reversed, aren¡¯t you concerned that Jiuzhou might do the same, watching from the sidelines as Taiping Dao and the Evergreen Immortal Sect fight to the death, so we can pick up the pieces? After all, there¡¯s a precedent set by your sect. We just need to follow suit without any concerns.¡± Zhen Xuan spoke his true thoughts. With the current strength of Taiping Dao, they could completely hold their own against the Evergreen Immortal Sect. As long as he made Taiping Dao¡¯s full capabilities known, in an instant, Taiping Dao would become the number one concern for the Evergreen Immortal Sect, facing their greatest hostility and oppression. With this target in front, Jiuzhou would just need to sit back and watch the drama unfold. Perhaps after the two sects had battled, they could imitate Taiping Dao, exhausting the victor further until the winner was forced to concede a portion of their gains. Without deploying a single soldier or paying any price, they could share in the spoils of victory. Such a tempting scenario was hard for anyone to resist. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ¡°Wanting to profit as the fisherman requires taking both strength and the situation into account. A thousand years ago, the decisive battle between your sect and the Evergreen Immortal Sect erupted over millennia of accumulating conflict, reaching a critical point, hence the battle. This war wasn¡¯t sparked just because of Taiping Dao¡¯s emergence. Whether Taiping Dao existed or not, this battle would have occurred. The only difference was that Taiping Dao¡¯s appearance hastened the war, creating more favorable conditions. Therefore, between the Evergreen Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, this battle was inevitable. It was decided by your millennia of enmity and the struggle for dominance over the Changqing Domain. With these underlying conditions, the battle broke out. But between us, Taiping Dao, Jiuzhou, and the Evergreen Immortal Sect, there is no such ancestral vendetta, no war driven by hatred. Our only conflict is the struggle for dominance over the Changqing Domain. But this dominance is not a necessity for Taiping Dao. We are not Jiuzhou, with the Tao Inheritance of the Nine Spirits Sect, obligated to carry on the previous teachings and revitalize the entire lineage. Thus, having to battle with the Evergreen Immortal Sect over the entirety of the Changqing Domain. Taiping Dao doesn¡¯t carry this burden; we don¡¯t have a core interest conflict with the Evergreen Immortal Sect, only some territorial disputes. But these are secondary issues, negotiable. To revive its sect, the Evergreen Immortal Sect does not necessarily need to occupy the entire Changqing Domain. They need only more than two-thirds of the territory. This would be sufficient for them to produce a Great True Person, to maintain their hegemony, imposing their authority over other sects within the domain.¡± Chapter 1467 - Chapter 1467 Chapter 572 Revealing Identity_2 ?Chapter 1467: Chapter 572 Revealing Identity_2 Chapter 1467: Chapter 572 Revealing Identity_2 As for my Taiping Dao, we only need the Southern Domain to sustain the size of our Grand Immortal Sect. Therefore, we just need to reach a consensus with Changqing Immortal Sect to maintain our current size beyond the Southern Domain, and that should be enough to achieve a military balance with Changqing Immortal Sect. As long as they ensure their absolute advantage, they don¡¯t necessarily have to annihilate Taiping Dao. After all, even when Changqing Immortal Sect was at its most prosperous, it didn¡¯t occupy the entire territory of Changqing Domain. It left a dozen countries for other Immortal Sects to establish their Tao inheritance. As long as we can affirm this consensus and give up the ambition of dominating, Taiping Dao and Changqing Immortal Sect can naturally maintain peace. On the contrary, for Nine Provinces¡­¡± Lu Yuan said all this at length and then looked at Zhen Xuan with an indifferent tone, ¡°After Taiping Dao makes concessions to Changqing Immortal Sect, without us as their allies, can you with your little strength possibly be a match for Changqing Immortal Sect? Or even more ruthlessly, if you harbor the thought of profiting from a fisherman¡¯s fight, we may as well join forces with Changqing Immortal Sect to wipe out Nine Provinces first, completely removing the instability and threats within Changqing Domain. In that way, with you gone, Changqing Domain would stabilize. Once Changqing Domain is stable, Changqing Immortal Sect can be at ease. And as Taiping Dao submits this declaration of allegiance, in both reason and emotion, they would no longer have a reason to target us. Taiping Dao and Changqing Immortal Sect could then coexist peacefully and without incident. You think that after the strength of Taiping Dao is exposed, it will become the origin of calamity. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï But what you don¡¯t realize is that as long as Taiping Dao steps back, this strength will not only cease to be a calamity, but become the foundation for negotiating terms with Changqing Immortal Sect. As long as we do not desire the entire Changqing Domain and just help Changqing Immortal Sect eradicate you, not only will Taiping Dao not suffer any losses. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï It is quite possible that after eliminating you, we could also smoothly take back Qingyu Country and unify the entire Southern Domain. Changqing Domain is large enough to accommodate a great sect of Heavenly Immortals and a Grand Immortal Sect, but it cannot accommodate both Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. If you do not join forces with me, Taiping Dao has at worst lost the opportunity to vie for supremacy, but Jiuzhou Immortal Gate will have to face the consequences of annihilation. As for weighing what is more or less important, I would think you could make the correct choice.¡± Having said all this, Lu Yuan picked up his tea and took a sip, not continuing further but quietly waiting for the other party to digest it. Zhen Xuan, who had been listening, had already turned pale and his expression was ashen. Because he found that everything was indeed as Lu Yuan had said. Between Taiping Dao and Changqing Immortal Sect, there really weren¡¯t that many conflicts. Nine Provinces and Changqing Immortal Sect had deep-seated conflicts over the restoration of the Tao inheritance, the struggle between the remnants of the former dynasty, and the current ruling power, the core interests entangled, leaving no room for negotiation. Moreover, with the enmity forged through ten thousand years of bloodshed, reconciliation was now out of the question. However, Taiping Dao was not in such a situation. For Changqing Immortal Sect, Taiping Dao was equivalent to a vassal nation bordering the Central Plains Dynasty that occupied a corner of the territory. It was just that, this vassal nation was now unruly, colluding with a bunch of remnants from the former dynasty, trying to invade the Central Plains and overturn their own rule. That¡¯s why it had to be reprimanded. But if this vassal state ceased its disturbances and chose to submit obediently and pay regular tribute, Then, for the Central Plains, there would naturally be no need to launch a distant expedition to annihilate this vassal state. After all, for a great sect of Heavenly Immortals, territory is not about having more, but rather having just the right amount. The people of Changqing Immortal Sect who wanted to become Heavenly Immortals had to occupy only those areas that could just accommodate their Heavenly Immortal Taoist Fruit, avoiding too much entanglement with Heaven and Earth, lest they cannot disengage. Excessive territory, for those who already aspire to become Heavenly Immortals, is only a burden, a load. The more they occupy, the more difficult it is to overcome the Celestial Immortal Tribulation, the more entangled with Heaven and Earth they become, and the lower the chance of becoming a Great True Person. Didn¡¯t the former Changqing Immortal Venerate do just that, directly giving up almost half of the Changqing Domain, controlling only the territory of twenty-seven countries, and then achieved the Heavenly Immortal Taoist Fruit? The Tao inheritance of Changqing Immortal Sect, inherited from Changqing Immortal Venerate, has such a successful path, and as long as they¡¯re not foolish, they wouldn¡¯t rashly change it, but simply copy the successful answer. So the bottom line for Changqing Immortal Sect is the territory of twenty-seven countries in Changqing Domain. As long as they can secure this, then they can accept handing over the remaining territory to outsiders. And coincidentally, Taiping Dao, including the three tributaries, controlled merely ten countries. The territory of thirty-nine countries in Changqing Domain minus twenty-seven leaves twelve countries spare, so theoretically, Taiping Dao could still expand by a couple of countries. These two countries¡¯ worth of interest could entirely be ceded by Changqing Immortal Sect in exchange for Taiping Dao¡¯s assistance in wiping out Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Therefore, Changqing Immortal Sect and Taiping Dao joining forces does have common interests, a core driving force. Taiping Dao doesn¡¯t necessarily have to ally with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate; teaming up with Changqing Immortal Sect would be just the same. The difference between the two is that allying with Jiuzhou would yield greater benefits but also carry greater risks. Teaming up with Changqing Immortal Sect, on the other hand, would be about sacrificing our own future, but it¡¯s relatively safer and the benefits are smaller. However, regardless of which it is, Taiping Dao would gain advantages. Now if Nine Provinces, due to the dramatically increased strength of Taiping Dao, refuses the generosity of Taiping Dao¡¯s proposed alliance, it would be the same as pushing Taiping Dao out themselves. Chapter 1468 - Chapter 1468 Chapter 572 Revealing Identity_3 ?Chapter 1468: Chapter 572 Revealing Identity_3 Chapter 1468: Chapter 572 Revealing Identity_3 The Taiping Dao naturally had no need to be too cautious. They could simply join hands with the Changqing Immortal Sect to annihilate the Jiuzhou, first reaping the benefits and then putting an end to this turmoil. Neither side would suffer losses, only the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates would perish. What Lu Yuan said was correct; in terms of their relationship with the Changqing Immortal Sect, the Taiping Dao and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates really had entirely different distinctions. ¡°My fellow Daoist, what are you talking about? Our two sects share a bond as strong as iron. What was said before was merely in jest. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï How could we of Jiuzhou possibly betray the Taiping Dao?¡± Having understood these intertwined interests, Zhen Xuan immediately changed his tune, putting on a flattering smile, ¡°The Changqing Immortal Sect is our archenemy; our feuds with them are irreconcilable. It is a great favor that the Taiping Dao is willing to join forces with us to strike down this sect. Our Jiuzhou Immortal Gate will eternally carve this kindness in our hearts. When does your esteemed sect plan to initiate the campaign? Tell me a specific date, and after I return, I will make preparations to join forces with your esteemed sect.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? The Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou are inherently united; why should we create such strife over things that have yet to occur? First, we join forces to extinguish the Changqing Immortal Sect and then divide up the Changqing Domain. The rest, we can discuss after the battle. Moreover¡­¡± He paused then, looking at Zhen Xuan with a meaningful expression, ¡°Moreover, the Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou also share a connection, not entirely without basis. We, in a certain sense, could be regarded as descending from the same source, as kin. This is precisely why I chose to ally with your side instead of seeking out the Changqing Immortal Sect. What I value is this bond of ¡®incense kinship.¡¯ My friend from Jiuzhou, I hope you won¡¯t let down my good intentions.¡± Hearing these words, Zhen Xuan was stunned, looking at Lu Yuan with a mix of astonishment and uncertainty. He could discern the meaning behind the other¡¯s words, which was hinting that the Taiping Dao, this Immortal Sect, also originated from Jiuzhou, hence both belonging to the same source. If this were true, then this True Person Lu before him was undoubtedly the King of Chu from before. His earlier guess was correct; Lu Yuan was the King of Chu, and the King of Chu was Lu Yuan. The other had eventually ascended to the Immortal Realm and walked the path to this day. Considering this identity, the true nature and depth of the Taiping Dao sect were worth pondering. However, such implication was too astonishing. Zhen Xuan dared not confirm it outright, and hesitantly asked, ¡°What do you mean by this, my fellow Daoist?¡± Lu Yuan smiled and simply hinted, ¡°Why not consider, what is the name of the new School Leader of my Taiping Dao?¡± ¡°The new School Leader¡­ Huang Xuan¡­¡± As Zhen Xuan repeated the name, it struck him like a thunderbolt, and a lightning flash of realization surged through his mind. Lu Yuan and Huang Xuana€¡±these two names were known to all in the ancient Jiuzhou. One was a famous world general, as well as the King of Chu, and the other, the foremost general under the King of Chu¡¯s command. Such combined identities and names, aside from the people from the ancient Jiuzhou, were impossible for others to know. That these names now appeared in the Taiping Dao could only indicate that this Lu Yuan before him and the soon-to-be School Leader of the Taiping Dao, were indeed the Chu King and the famous general Huang Xuan of Jiuzhou. These two were also descendants of Jiuzhou, tied together with him. The Taiping Dao giving shelter to these two, and perhaps more from Jiuzhou, indicated that the sect¡¯s foundation was deeply entangled with Jiuzhou. ¡®Wait, the Taiping Dao, the Taiping Dao¡­¡¯ At this moment, Zhen Xuan couldn¡¯t help but recall the cultivation technique given by the Dan Ding Path to the King of Chu at the start of his rise. The Taiping Dao Book, a tradition dating back to the ancient Taiping teachings, had been modified by the Dan Ding Path in later periods and bestowed to individuals such as Chi Mingzhu and Lu Yuan. Chi Mingzhu, who had also possessed this technique, had sparked the first rebellion in the Da Yue Dynasty, raising the banner of righteousness in Jian An County and striking the first bell for Da Yue¡¯s downfall. As the foremost Immortal Sect of Yue Country, Zhen Xuan had a deeply ingrained memory of this, which he hadn¡¯t forgotten even after more than two thousand years. Practicing the same cultivation technique, and the sect bearing the same name, made it difficult for him not to draw a connection between the Taiping Dao of the Immortal Realm and the ancient Taiping teachings of Jiuzhou. ¡®However, the ancient Taiping teachings, if I remember correctly, were destroyed during the ancient years in the Jiuzhou Realm for their involvement in the Human Emperor¡¯s strife, eradicated by the ancient Emperor Xia Xi, and known to have perished, never ascending to the Immortal Realm amongst those ancient major sects. What is the connection between the Taiping Dao of the Immortal Realm and the Taiping teachings of Jiuzhou Realm? Could it be the disciples who survived the destruction of the ancient Taiping teachings, who fled to the Immortal Realm afterward, and hiding their identities far from the Donghua Continent, passed down the Tao Inheritance? Given the relationship of the ancient Taiping teachings with other ancient Jiuzhou Immortal Sects, both sides bearing grudges, it indeed seems plausible they couldn¡¯t mix. Lu Yuan, because he had received the inheritance of the Taiping teachings, did not seek out the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect after his ascension but instead traced the legacy of the Taiping teachings. This was the reason why there had been no word from him on this side after his ascension. But why, having moved far away, has the Taiping teachings returned? Did they encounter difficulties elsewhere, as rumors from outside suggest, facing the calamity of their sect¡¯s extermination, compelling them to flee back to their ascension homeland? And if Lu Yuan truly inherited the Tao Inheritance of the Taiping teachings, then he must be practicing the Fortune Dao, similar to the Radiant Immortal Dynasty? If that were the case, with the rapid cultivation speed of the Fortune Dao, it would make sense for him to achieve Earth Immortal status much earlier. But how did he manage to control the backlash of the Fortune Dao? Was it a secret technique left by the ancient Taiping teachings?¡¯ As more questions rose in his mind, Zhen Xuan¡¯s heart grew increasingly doubtful, but one thing he could be sure of: the Lu Yuan before him was undoubtedly the Chu King of Jiuzhou. Just as the other had said in his words, whether it was Lu Yuan or the Taiping Dao, at their core, they were of the Jiuzhou Tao Inheritance. The Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou were indeed from the same source and naturally should unite together. If the two sides were to engage in internal conflict, that would be the utmost transgression. Chapter 1469 - Chapter 1469 Chapter 573 Slow Attack, Urgent Attack ?Chapter 1469: Chapter 573: Slow Attack, Urgent Attack Chapter 1469: Chapter 573: Slow Attack, Urgent Attack After clearing the multitude of thoughts in his mind, Zhen Xuan felt greatly exhilarated, naturally delighted at having gained a quite reliable ally. Thus, looking at Lu Yuan, he couldn¡¯t help but complain, ¡°So it turns out you are my old friend, Prince Chu, you really kept me in the dark.¡± However, Lu Yuan just raised his hand, making a silencing gesture, and shook his head, ¡°Now there is no more King of Chu, only Taiping Dao¡¯s True Person Lu Yuan. Taiping Dao is not part of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, but an inheritance of the Immortal Realm. My friend, do not mistake it.¡± Although he indirectly revealed his true identity and also the stand of Taiping Dao, Lu Yuan never thought about openly standing out and joining the large collective of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Now the name of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had become thoroughly sullied in the surrounding domains. Taiping Dao¡¯s good reputation, Lu Yuan was not willing to ruin it by mixing with Jiuzhou and destroying it overnight. Moreover, even without mentioning those things, the complete integration of Taiping Dao with Jiuzhou would bring no benefits to Lu Yuan. One should know that within Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, a concept of equal governance was followed. In the Western Domain, the territory of the five immortal sects was collectively owned, even if nominally assigned to you. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï In fact, the sect could forcefully requisition it for the collective use of the entire immortal sect. Thus, if Taiping Dao joined this collective, according to the rules of the sects of the Western Domain, it would have to share its control over the land of the seven kingdoms. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Taking on a host of subordinates would not bring any significant benefits but would require giving up more advantages to pacify and attract the hearts of the subordinates. Such a losing deal was foolish to consider. Now things were good as they were. Let the Five Sects of the Western Domain carry the burden of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, while Taiping Dao modeled itself after the Radiant Immortal Dynasty, ostensibly considering itself an independent force, not part of the Nine Spirits Sect¡¯s inheritance. Privately, however, it acknowledged some connections and preserved a trace of incense affection. This kind of distant yet close relationship was the best. This way, what belonged to Jiuzhou was Jiuzhou¡¯s, and what belonged to Taiping Dao was Taiping Dao¡¯s, and the two did not interfere with each other, each developing on their own, thus avoiding so many conflicts of interest. Zhen Xuan discerned Lu Yuan¡¯s meaning, and his excited expression paused slightly, knowing he was despised by others, he could hardly be happy. But one knows one¡¯s own affairs best. Now, the entire Jiuzhou Immortal Gate combined did not equal the strength of Taiping Dao. Expecting others to give up their independence to join Jiuzhou and share their benefits was clearly impossible. Taiping Dao was not such a foolish benevolent patron. Jiuzhou as it currently stood neither had the qualifications nor the bulk that would allow a major immortal gate like Taiping Dao to join. For now, maintaining a tacit understanding, keeping an underground alliance, was already the best choice. ¡°Let it be, if Taiping Dao looks down on us, there¡¯s no need to force things. It¡¯s not bad to have them as an independent Jiuzhou branch similar to Wind and Thunder Path, Jade Toad Path, to support us from the outside.¡± Zhen Xuan sighed inwardly, but quickly perked up again. No matter what, this time having learned the true identity of Taiping Dao and secured such a reliable ally for Jiuzhou was an unexpected delight. With this kind of relationship in place, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Taiping Dao could set aside their concerns and wholeheartedly unite against their enemies. With the combined strength of the two sects, they already equaled the Qing Immortal Sect. On Jiuzhou¡¯s side, pushing further, pulling more reinforcements from places like Heavenly River Sect, Wind and Thunder Path, and Jade Toad Path, the alliance on this side would then be able to surpass the strength of the Changqing Immortal Sect from a frontal perspective. Such a situation, since Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had pushed into the Changqing Domain, had never occurred before. At this moment, because of the emergence of Taiping Dao, the people of Jiuzhou genuinely saw a hope, a hope to annihilate the Changqing Immortal Sect. This time, even if they could not wipe out the Changqing Immortal Sect in one fell swoop, defeating the opponent and launching a major counterattack, regaining the lost ground of the Western Domain, was also not a problem. ¡°What you said is true, I was confused. You are True Person Lu, and Taiping Dao is simply Taiping Dao, unrelated to Jiuzhou.¡± Zhen Xuan tactfully changed his words, then turned his head to address a core issue, ¡°However, Taoist Lu, your sect allying with our Jiuzhou to oppose the tyranny of the Changqing Immortal Sect, what form should this alliance take? When will we start the war against the Changqing Immortal Sect? How will we coordinate once we engage with the Changqing Immortal Sect? After the battle, how should the territory seized from the Changqing Immortal Sect be divided? Regarding these, I wonder what guidance Taoist Lu can offer?¡± The identity of Taiping Dao¡¯s origin in Jiuzhou was merely a solid basis of trust between Taoiping Dao and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. But this basis couldn¡¯t be eaten as food. Now that Taiping Dao was unwilling to blend in with Jiuzhou and wanted to stand alone, the issues of benefits between the two needed to be cleared up first. Taiping Dao didn¡¯t want to suffer losses, and neither did Jiuzhou. Thus, it would be better to clarify these matters before the war started, to avoid dragging through various issues of interest between each other after the war ended, potentially breaking the fragile trust that had been hard to build. Concerning these matters, Lu Yuan had long prepared his response and now directly answered, ¡°This is our first cooperation between our two sects, and even if there are some connections, the relationship is ultimately distant, unrealistically desiring to be as close as a family. Therefore, from my perspective, this alliance should merely be nominal.¡± Chapter 1470 - Chapter 1470 Chapter 573 Slow Attack and Rush Attack_2 ?Chapter 1470: Chapter 573 Slow Attack and Rush Attack_2 Chapter 1470: Chapter 573 Slow Attack and Rush Attack_2 ¡°Our two families should jointly announce an alliance and besiege Changqing together.¡± ¡°There¡¯s no need to distinguish between a leader and a follower. Both families are the main force, each leading their sect¡¯s cultivators to attack from the Southern Domain and the Western Domain, setting off two routes to subdue Changqing.¡± ¡°Each family is responsible for their own front, without needing to concern themselves with the other, thus avoiding various disputes.¡± ¡°As for the date of the battle, I lean towards two hundred years from now.¡± ¡°By now, the strength of Changqing Immortal Sect has become increasingly difficult to contain.¡± ¡°Another four hundred years have passed, and the opponent has accumulated and launched a thin attack, adding six new True Persons, with the number of Human Immortals in their sect having reached as many as twenty.¡± ¡°In another two hundred years, I fear another two or three might be added.¡± ¡°Moreover, the Earth Immortal Seeds nurtured by the Changqing Immortal Sect, such as Yang Jihua and others, currently possess even more profound cultivation, and rumors have been constantly spreading in the outside world about their breakthrough to Earth Immortal.¡± ¡°I am very worried. If we drag this out for another three to five hundred years, these individuals will all become Earth Immortals.¡± ¡°By then, with four or five Earth Immortals in hand, and over twenty Human Immortals as wings, the Changqing Immortal Sect would have completely recovered its strength. I¡¯m afraid that even if our two sects joined forces, we would be unable to do anything against them.¡± ¡°Hence, the sooner we can start the battle, the better.¡± ¡°Two hundred years is already the most suitable timing.¡± ¡°Within this period, the chances of Yang Jihua and the like breaking through to Earth Immortal are extremely low.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï It¡¯s your choice.¡± When Lu Yuan said this, he looked meaningfully at Zhen Xuan. Whether or not having an additional Earth Immortal would indeed have a significant impact on both the enemy and us. After all, it is the highest combat power known to us all. One more could influence the outcome of a battle for one side. Especially for the Changqing Immortal Sect, which is at a disadvantage. At this time, they have only two Earth Immortals. If they were to go to war with Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Lu Yuan here could muster three Earth Immortals on the surface. In actuality, though, he could deploy eight. On the Nine Provinces side, besides Ding Wanxuan in the Western Domain, Master Huang from the Heavenly River Sect in the other external domains is certain to take part in this battle. Although in the last major battle between Nine Provinces and Changqing Immortal Sect, Huang Yuanxiu of Heavenly River Sect was restrained by an opposing sect and left in his own sect, unable to support the battlefield at Changqing. However, after more than a thousand years, the Earth Immortal from the sect that had restrained Heavenly River Sect had already ceased to live, and although they had also cultivated a new Earth Immortal to take over, they were still newcomers with insufficient strength, now busy securing their own position, with no strong intentions to expand their influence, currently in a phase of contraction. Moreover, the development of the Heavenly River Sect in recent years has been exceedingly strong. Having only the territory of four countries, the Heavenly River Sect spent thousands of years of fortune and foundation to cultivate Huang Yuanxiu into an Earth Immortal. In the short term, it is impossible to cultivate a second Earth Immortal. But without an Earth Immortal, the Heavenly River Sect is not short of Human Immortals. After accumulating over the years, the number of Human Immortals in the Heavenly River Sect has reached six, ranking in the upper-middle tier among the large Immortal Sects. It was also because their archenemy chose to shrink back that they did not dare to contend too aggressively due to the rapid growth of the Heavenly River Sect¡¯s strength. The enemy retreated to their home, not daring to come out. Under such circumstances, the Heavenly River Sect no longer posed a threat, and Huang Yuanxiu naturally had his hands free to participate in this battle. As for the Wind and Thunder Path, with territories spanning six countries, it is already an extremely powerful sect. At the time when Lu Yuan had just ascended, this sect only had one Earth Immortal and three Human Immortals because the School Leader of Wind and Thunder Path was not content with being just an ordinary Earth Immortal. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? He monopolized the resources of five countries within his sect, taking over more than eighty percent of the resources for his own cultivation. Doing so indeed yielded results. After cultivating for thousands of years, the School Leader of Wind and Thunder Path, who was no more than four thousand years old, had reached the mid-stage of Earth Immortal with the accumulation of massive resources. And within this realm, he had taken a long stride forward. But by this time, he had almost reached his limit. Flood dragons cannot be raised in shallow waters. Wind and Thunder Path, with only the land of six countries, could not support this person¡¯s advancement very far with its resources. Now, like Lu Yuan, constrained by the lack of resources, he has reached the limit as a senior cultivator at the mid-stage of Earth Immortal. To continue to cultivate upward, one must have even more resources. Like the former Meng Jianshan, he could become a Grand Cultivator because he leveraged the entire power of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Back then, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, with the territory of nine countries in the Western Domain plus one country in the Southern Domain, managed to nurture a Late-stage Earth Immortal, a True Dragon. It was the whole Jiuzhou Immortal Gate that pushed Meng Jianshan to the position of Changqing Immortal. With the backing of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Meng Jianshan had such an accomplishment. Even though Wind and Thunder Path also belongs to one of the Nine Provinces branches, it is somewhat detached from Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Although they are known as one branch, they are, in fact, two separate entities. In such a case, to seek the support of Nine Provinces to help them become a Grand Cultivator is quite a beautiful dream. Therefore, upon realizing that he had reached the limit of his cultivation, even though he was unwilling, the School Leader of Wind and Thunder Path had to stop further secluded cultivation, relinquishing the resources he had monopolized and returning them to the people in his sect. Chapter 1471 - Chapter 1471 Chapter 573 Slow Attack and Rush Attack_3 ?Chapter 1471: Chapter 573 Slow Attack and Rush Attack_3 Chapter 1471: Chapter 573 Slow Attack and Rush Attack_3 Thus, over the past few centuries, the Wind and Thunder Path, already possessing a strong foundation, burst forth with its inherent potential after securing ample resources. In just six to seven hundred years, the Wind and Thunder Path added eight new Human Immortals. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? There was even an Old Immortal who, taking advantage of the momentum, broke through to become an Earth Immortal, adding another top combatant to their ranks. Therefore, the current Wind and Thunder Path has two Earth Immortals and ten Human Immortals. Their strength is so formidable that within the many Grand Fairy Doors, it is ranked in the first tier. As for Yuchan Tao, although it only has the territory of the Three Nations, is smaller in scale, and resource-scarce, after years of accumulation and frugality of the entire sect, it successfully cultivated a new Earth Immortal, two thousand years after the previous one passed away. The sect now boasts one Earth Immortal and three Human Immortals. The sect¡¯s strength has successfully leaped from that of a mere gatekeeper of a grand sect to the standard of a normal Grand Fairy Door. So, excluding the distant and least amiable Radiant Immortal Dynasty, the remaining lineages of the Nine Provinces: the Western Domain Five Sects have one Earth Immortal and seven Human Immortals. The Heavenly River Sect has one Earth Immortal and six Human Immortals. Wind and Thunder Path has two Earth Immortals and ten Human Immortals. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Yuchan Tao has one Earth Immortal and three Human Immortals. All together, that amounts to five Earth Immortals and twenty-six Human Immortals. It is no exaggeration to say that such strength has already surpassed the Qing Immortal Sect. Even Lu Yuan, having completed his development plan and activating the entire Taiping Dao, could at best only be evenly matched with the opponent. After all, the strength of his Avatars is too weak; among the group of Earth Immortals, they are the least impressive. Even though the majority of the opponents are newly ascended Earth Immortals, when it comes to actual strength, they are still marginally stronger than those Avatars. Moreover, besides the newcomers, Ding Wanxuan and the School Leader of Wind and Thunder Path, both possess the cultivation of a mid-stage Earth Immortal and are not weak. Although Lu Yuan himself is also a mid-stage Earth Immortal, and one with a deep foundation at that, still, facing two opponents, the outcome remains uncertain. Even though he is overpowered, he is still only barely able to contend with the not fully united Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. This shows just how profound the foundation of the various lineages of the Nine Provinces that have converted their potential into true strength must be. It¡¯s only because these Immortal Sects each have their own interests, and are distributed from Tiannan to Southsea, scattered across different domains, and have disunited hearts, that they cannot integrate and exert their strength collectively. Otherwise, the Qing Immortal Sect alone would have been annihilated by the various lineages of the Nine Provinces long ago. But even a fragmented Jiuzhou, which can only mobilize part of its power, exhibits a strength that no ordinary Grand Fairy Door can withstand. Except for those Heavenly Immortal Sects, there is no one among the Grand Fairy Doors that can contend with them. Various forces neighboring the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates are now laying low, not daring to provoke the flourishing momentum of the Nine Provinces. Even Lu Yuan, who is about to possess the combat power of eight Earth Immortals, clearly has enough power to annihilate the Qing Immortal Sect by himself, but he still has to woo the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, incorporating himself as part of the Nine Provinces identity and one of their own. What is the reason for this? It is nothing but a wariness of the formidable strength of this united Jiuzhou. Excluding the Radiant Immortal Dynasty, the alliance of Jiuzhou alone has five Earth Immortals and twenty-six Human Immortals. If the Radiant Immortal Dynasty were included, then those numbers would double. With such a powerful force watching from the sidelines, it is unrealistic for the Taiping Dao to shake them off and consume the entire Qing Immortal Sect by itself. Not to mention anything else. Just speaking of war, Huang Yuanxiu of the Heavenly River Sect would definitely join the battle. Given the two Earth Immortals of Wind and Thunder Path and their formidable strength, they would likely provide, out of face and sentiment, at least one Earth Immortal. Add the Western Domain Five Sects to that, and that equates to a minimum of three Earth Immortals as a foundation. As for the Human Immortals, gathering a dozen or so True Persons from the various Immortal Sects is a simple matter. As for ordinary disciples, countless are available. Casually, they could gather twenty or thirty thousand people to form a massive army of cultivators. This would still be an army held back by the Nine Provinces in terms of their full potential. With such an army lurking beside them, it¡¯s impossible for the Taiping Dao to ignore them. Having an alliance between the Nine Provinces and Qing Immortal Sect to collectively attack the Taiping Dao is out of the question. But having the Nine Provinces cause trouble on the side, preventing the Taiping Dao from accomplishing their goals, is not a problem. It might not necessarily achieve something, but assuredly can spoil plans. Such an entity is one anyone would appease and placate. For Lu Yuan to use his Nine Provinces identity and directly become one of their own is an extremely clever tactic. Without a special heritage, one simply couldn¡¯t execute such maneuvers. But precisely because he can perform such tactics, once Jiuzhou¡¯s guaranteed participation of three Earth Immortals and fifteen Human Immortals comes into play, combined with the power of the Taiping Dao, even just openly with three Earth Immortals and nine Human Immortals, an alliance between the two can certainly spell doom for the Qing Immortal Sect. Given the current strength of the Qing Immortal Sect, two Earth Immortals and twenty-one Human Immortals, they simply cannot resist the allied assault of the two sects. The date for the war, whether two hundred or three hundred years from now. Maintaining the current number of Earth Immortals or adding one more, won¡¯t change the outcome at all. The only difference is with the existing strength, the Qing Immortal Sect, facing the attack of the two sects with only two Earth Immortals, might be able to crumble swiftly, possibly falling within a mere three to five years. But if the opponent had one more Earth Immortal, it might take longer, maybe a century, to extinguish them. From a big picture perspective, of course, it¡¯s better to attack sooner. The longer it is delayed, the more losses incurred and the greater the uncertainties. But from a personal standpoint, it might be in one¡¯s interest to attack slower. Take Zhen Xuan, for example, if he waits until he has become an Earth Immortal before attacking. Then his status could shift from an Earth Immortal Seed cultivated with focus by the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, to one of the top tiers of the Immortal Sect, independently responsible for a part of the battlefronta€¡±not impossible. In the war to annihilate the Qing Immortal Sect, he could gain more merit and reap more benefits. Even for Lu Yuan, delaying for another three hundred years might allow him to gather the Qi Luck from forcibly annexed territories, reach ten nations¡¯ worth of land, and break through to become a late-stage Earth Immortal, a Grand Cultivator. However, doing so would mean that the resources for Huang Xuan and Huang Yun to break through to Earth Immortals would be forcefully taken by him. Then, during the battle, Taiping Dao might not have eight Earth Immortals but only six. This, too, is a downside. But with the strength of a Grand Cultivator leading the war, the benefits can easily outweigh the lack of two Earth Immortals. So, whether to delay the attack or rush into it, both options are acceptable to Lu Yuan. The final decision on how to proceed will depend on his fellow Jiuzhou natives. Chapter 1472 - Chapter 1472 Chapter 574 Recognizing Ancestors and Returning to the Clan ?Chapter 1472: Chapter 574: Recognizing Ancestors and Returning to the Clan Chapter 1472: Chapter 574: Recognizing Ancestors and Returning to the Clan ¡°The suggestion you¡¯ve made is indeed wise.¡± After a long silence, Zhen Xuan finally digested Lu Yuan¡¯s words and began to speak, ¡°However, the matter of the alliance launching war is ultimately of great importance. I am merely the leader of the Purple Cloud Sect within the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, and although I hold some authority, I cannot decide this matter alone. This issue still needs to be reported to Uncle Ding and discussed together with the leaders of the other sects. After reaching a conclusion, I will be able to reply to your sect.¡± During the conversation, Zhen Xuan¡¯s heart was filled with turmoil. For his personal gain, he naturally wanted to delay for another hundred years, until after he had become an Earth Immortal before commencing war. Not only would he gain more benefits then, but considerations for his personal safety were also extremely crucial. On the surface, the alliance between Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had already surpassed the strength of the Qing Immortal Sect. Even if this battle wouldn¡¯t annihilate the enemy, severely crippling them was certainly feasible. It might be possible to win, but that didn¡¯t mean it would be easy to defeat the enemy. In the last great battle, both sects had lost more than two-thirds of their strength, and countless among Zhen Xuan¡¯s fellow disciples from the same generation had died, leaving only him alive. If another great war were to start, even though he, as a key successor being cultivated by the Immortal Sect, would receive some degree of resource allocation and protection, he couldn¡¯t be sure of his safety after joining the battle. Going to the battlefield, he might still die. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Especially as a key figure cultivated by Jiuzhou, he was more likely to be targeted by the Qing Immortal Sect. Although protected, the threats he faced were greater too, and balancing these out, his safety could perhaps be even worse. Normally, under such circumstances, Zhen Xuan should just stay back and avoid participating in the war. But as a key successor cultivated by Jiuzhou, deeply indebted to his sect, whether it was to repay the sect for their kindness or to take over the position of Jiuzhou Alliance Leader legitimately in the future, he couldn¡¯t just avoid the battlefield. Since he couldn¡¯t avoid it either way, he naturally had to face the war with stronger strength. Therefore, whether he became a Human Immortal or an Earth Immortal was crucial. From this perspective alone, Zhen Xuan hoped to delay joining the battle by three hundred years. With three hundred years as a buffer and the full support of Jiuzhou, he was absolutely confident in breaking through to Earth Immortal. But if the time was shortened to just two hundred years, that wouldn¡¯t even be sufficient to complete his accumulations. If his strength was insufficient and he still rashly tried to break through, not only would the chances of success be very low but the risk of death would also be greater. Instead of that, he might as well take a risk on the battlefield! But if he really delayed it by three hundred years, his personal safety would indeed be secure; however, the risks and losses Jiuzhou would face after entering the war would inevitably be much greater. Qing Immortal Sect had deep roots and controlled two-thirds of the Changqing Domain, possessing an abundance of various resources. Over the years, they had been actively preparing for war, the number of disciples recruited had swelled to thirty thousand, and this number was still increasing. If calculated based on a single nation¡¯s limit to support two thousand disciples, in twenty-three nations¡¯ territory, they could cultivate forty-six thousand disciples. Even if this limit is hard to reach, delaying by another three hundred years to allow the enemy to cultivate forty thousand disciples would be easily achieved. With a base number of forty thousand disciples and additional careful cultivation for the war¡­ Even if prolonged by only one hundred years, Qing Immortal Sect might have two to three more Human Immortals. And among peers like Yang Jihua, the three focused Earth Immortal candidates of the Qing Immortal Sect being cultivated, with some good luck, all three might become Earth Immortals. Even normally, it might be possible for two to become Earth Immortals. And at the very least, there will be one Earth Immortal. So on the surface, while it seems like a delay of one hundred years, in reality, the number of Qing Immortal Sect disciples could increase by five thousand to ten thousand. Overall cultivation strength could rise from consolidating one energy level to two levels of energy. The number of Human Immortals might increase by two or three. The number of Zhen Xuans might increase by one to three. And even this is just the apparent, deducible cost. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï With an additional one hundred years and the abundant resources of the Qing Immortal Sect, they might also possess various potent Spirit Talismans and Immortal Artifacts which could have substantial effects on the battlefield. Personal and sectarian interests were thereby ruthlessly laid before Zhen Xuan. He too was confused and in turmoil, finding it hard to make a decision. Fortunately, this was not for him alone to decide. Therefore, in the end, he chose to take this matter back to the Western Domain, to discuss and decide together with his fellow disciples and Uncle Ding. ¡°That¡¯s wise, the matter is indeed too significant for you to decide alone.¡± Seeing Zhen Xuan¡¯s troubled face, Lu Yuan did not expect an immediate decision from him, as he lacked the authority to make it. Thus, he nodded and said, ¡°However, once you return, please try to reach a decision as soon as possible. This way, both our sects can adjust according to the two scenarios and prepare for the war. Once you have reached a conclusion, please inform me as soon as possible.¡± The stakes involved in annihilating Qing Immortal Sect and taking over the entire Changqing Domain were too significant. Arguably, whether Lu Yuan could successfully become a Heavenly Immortal depended on this gamble. If he missed this opportunity, it was uncertain how many years it would take to encounter another unclaimed territory like the Changqing Domain. Although his lifespan was long enough to wait. Having a long lifespan doesn¡¯t indicate remaining alive until the end of it. Chapter 1473 - Chapter 1473 Chapter 574 Recognizing Ancestors and Returning to the Clan_2 ?Chapter 1473: Chapter 574: Recognizing Ancestors and Returning to the Clan_2 Chapter 1473: Chapter 574: Recognizing Ancestors and Returning to the Clan_2 Earth Immortal cultivation in the Immortal Realm was only considered to be part of the second tier. Even among Earth Immortals, Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation was not at the very top of the batch. Under normal circumstances, with his level of cultivation, there wouldn¡¯t be any risks, and his life would be secure. But besides the normal, there were also times that weren¡¯t normal. If he encountered a Heavenly Immortal who took an interest in him, or a major battle between Heavenly Immortals, or some other kind of risk, his Earth Immortal cultivation wouldn¡¯t be able to withstand it. Back when he was in the Nine Provinces Domain, wasn¡¯t Lu Yuan ¡°Unrivaled in the World¡± as well? Yet facing the Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe, facing dangers that enveloped the entire world, he still had to run when it was time to run. If he ran too slowly, he would have laid down his life right there. Now in the Immortal Realm, Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t reached the point of being ¡°Unrivaled in the World.¡± An Earth Immortal, when looking across a single domain, wasn¡¯t a top expert. Not to mention across an entire Region Continent, or even the whole Immortal Realm. Only by becoming a Heavenly Immortal could one say that they were immune to 99.9999%¡­ of the dangers of the world. When facing danger, they would have enough means to escape. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã0 Being one day earlier in becoming a Heavenly Immortal meant that much more of a guarantee for the safety of his life. This wasn¡¯t because Lu Yuan wanted to dominate the world, but because he wanted to give himself more means to escape. There was no way around it; ever since crossing over, he had been constantly driven by crises, from survival crises to chaotic world crises, to world-ending crises. Lu Yuan had walked step by step, encountering so many dangers. It¡¯s good to live a long life, but the longer you live, the greater the likelihood of encountering danger. Just like the current situation in the Changqing Domain. If his cultivation had been lower, during the time of his Ascension, he might have been devoured by the monsters rampaging through the newly established states. Even if he could avoid the monsters, what about the Immortal Sect wars that later affected the whole domain? With battles that could destroy the heavens and split the earth, how many innocent beings were caught in the crossfire? When immortals fight, mortals suffer. If you don¡¯t have some level of cultivation, you have no way to defend against danger; you can¡¯t always count on luck, right? To survive longer, Lu Yuan could only do his best to enhance his means. It was all out of compulsion. ¡­ After revealing his identity to Zhen Xuan and settling some details about the alliance, the formal matters were mostly concluded. Once it was confirmed that they were on the same side, their relationship naturally became much closer in an instant. Then, quite naturally, to further strengthen their bond, they began to talk about some stories from the Nine Provinces. Mostly, it was Zhen Xuan asking and Lu Yuan answering. There was no helping it; as someone who left the Nine Provinces earlier, Zhen Xuan was very concerned about the subsequent fate of the Nine Provinces. Lu Yuan, on the other hand, modified his story slightly, hiding some information related to his ¡°Golden Finger,¡± and then told the other party the general outline of events. When Zhen Xuan heard that Chu State had ultimately unified the world, seizing the entire Nine Provinces, and then before the world could even begin to enjoy a peaceful and prosperous era, it faced the approaching Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe, causing the entire world to totter in the wind and rain, Zhen Xuan felt both a sense of emotion and a sorrowful sigh. ¡°After the fall of the Nine Spirit Celestial Noble, the Nine Provinces Domain began to decline, ultimately entering oblivion with our generation; it had persisted for quite a long time. It¡¯s fortunate that you, fellow Daoist, were able to leave that hellish abyss before the world¡¯s oblivion.¡± As a senior member of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate in the Immortal Realm, Zhen Xuan naturally understood the real reason why the Nine Provinces and the Immortal Realm had severed their connections. The Cave World wasn¡¯t any secret; just in the Donghua Continent alone, there were more than ten Heavenly Immortals, and each had essentially created their own Cave World. The beings in some of these Cave Worlds even frequently came out to travel. Just like in the ancient years, when the Nine Spirit Celestial Noble was still alive, those powerful beings often came out and exchanged with the Immortal Realm. Even on the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s side, though the Changqing Immortal had already fallen, the Changqing mini-world he created still had a passage to the Immortal Realm. Every thousand years or so, a group of native cultivators from the Changqing domain would ascend. The most recent Ascension was just two hundred years ago. At that time, Lu Yuan had personally witnessed this event. However, the foundation and strength of the Changqing Domain seemed to be far from comparable to that of the Nine Provinces Domain. Outside rumors said that the size of the Changqing Domain was only comparable to the scale of a small country in the Immortal Realm, and its foundation was indeed too poor. This kind of small world, even if it could produce some cultivators, was doomed not to be very strong. Producing an Earth Immortal was impossible; being able to produce one or two Human Immortals was already the limit. In fact, during the Ascension from the Changqing Domain five hundred years ago, the one who ascended was merely a Mid-level Human Immortal, truly very weak. This Human Immortal had already joined the Qing Immortal Sect, becoming one of their members. In this upcoming battle, the Taiping Dao might have the opportunity to clash with this fellow Ascender. An Ascender battling another Ascender; it sounds quite interesting. But Lu Yuan had absolutely no interest in it. The circumstances on both sides were different. He was already an Earth Immortal now, with his sights set on the goal of Heavenly Immortal. That mere Mid-level Human Immortal, he only felt surprise when he first heard about it, but afterwards, he didn¡¯t really take it to heart. ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï The difference in their levels was too great, and even with a similar origin, they were no longer on the same path. After catching up with a fellow countryman and strengthening the newly formed friendship, Zhen Xuan left with a heavy heart and a multitude of concerns, departing Lu Yuan¡¯s Cave Mansion. The time for the change of the School Leader of the Taiping Dao was approaching. As the date drew near, more messengers from various Immortal Sects were arriving in the Changqing Domain. Zhen Xuan represented the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate from the Western Domain, and naturally, at this time, messengers from the other three Jiuzhou Immortal Gates outside the domaina€¡±the Heavenly River Sect, Wind and Thunder Path, and Jade Toad Patha€¡±had also come. Chapter 1474 - Chapter 1474 Chapter 574 Recognizing Ancestors and Returning to the Clan_3 ?Chapter 1474: Chapter 574: Recognizing Ancestors and Returning to the Clan_3 Chapter 1474: Chapter 574: Recognizing Ancestors and Returning to the Clan_3 The Taiping Dao, in earlier years when relations with the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects were intimate, had also drawn closer to these several Immortal Sects. Even reaching across several Great Domains to the Radiant Immortal Dynasty, Taiping Dao took advantage of the pretext and sent Messengers there several times to build a relationship. Anyway, for these fellow countrymen, Lu Yuan also put great effort into winning them over. The effectiveness of this win-over, at this time, was apparent. Except for the distant Radiant Immortal Dynasty, whose relationship was not particularly close and who was busy contending for the title of Great Domain Overlord, with no one coming. The other three Immortal Sects each dispatched a True Immortal. Just in time. They had just established relations with Taiping Dao, included them within the system of the Nine Provinces, and were preparing to launch a major counterattack against the Evergreen Immortal Sect. Such a significant endeavor could not be accomplished by a single Zhen Xuan, or even a lone Western Domain Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Those three Ally Sects were also to be won over. In the future when deploying troops, their support and contribution were indispensable. ¡°Taiping Dao actually originates from Jiuzhou as well?¡± When Zhen Xuan found the envoys of the other three Immortal Sects and informed them of what had happened, the envoy from Heavenly River Sect couldn¡¯t help expressing in shock, ¡°Is it true or false? Have you verified it clearly? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Isn¡¯t it possible that Taiping Dao is deceiving us?¡± Several successive questions could prove the unrest in the questioner¡¯s heart. Zhen Xuan declared categorically, ¡°There is absolutely no falsehood in this matter. I personally confirmed Lu Yuan¡¯s identity; he is undoubtedly the King of Chu. Moreover, the affairs of the Jiuzhou boundary and some secrets between him and me, some matters of the Jiuzhou boundary, can all be spoken of by this person, everything matches up.¡± Had he not been sure of Lu Yuan¡¯s identity, he would not have come to find these individuals. At this moment, the envoy from Jade Toad Tao pondered, ¡°Our sect¡¯s archives do indeed record that since the ancient times of Jiuzhou boundary, after this sect was annihilated, it seems that in the following years, the descendants of Taiping Dao emerged one after another. However, they often didn¡¯t flourish for a few years before silently disappearing. Back then there were rumors that this was because the exposed individuals from Taiping Dao, after scavenging enough Qi Luck in the Jiuzhou boundary, ascended directly to the Immortal Realm. It¡¯s just that once in the Immortal Realm, we from the various paths of Jiuzhou have never seen anyone from Taiping Dao, so we thought the rumors were false. Now thinking about it, if Lu Yuan is indeed the last descendant of Taiping Dao, it¡¯s normal that after his Ascension to the Immortal Realm, he didn¡¯t seek us out but instead found Taiping Dao. And if he could find Taiping Dao, this means that actually, Taiping Dao still left some clues in the Jiuzhou boundary, allowing later generations to find them in the Immortal Realm. Taiping Dao in the Immortal Realm, having kept its traces hidden all these years, probably didn¡¯t want to get involved with our orthodox descendants, just like the Radiant Immortal Dynasty. The few Jiuzhou Immortal Sects practicing the Fortune Dao, are clear that while nominally from the same Jiuzhou, they consider themselves to be from a different Tao Inheritance. They are the founders of the Tao, not descendants of the Nine Spirits. This is why the Radiant Immortal Dynasty moved to another domain, and Taiping Dao did even more, leaving the Donghua Continent directly, which is somewhat extreme but still conceivable after careful thought. What¡¯s curious is that, having left, they are now still returning to the Donghua Continent. Seeing the forces they¡¯ve brought back, they appear to have the strength of a Grand Immortal Sect. Then in their original stronghold, their strength would definitely be stronger, perhaps stronger than the current strength of their three Earth Immortals. To force such a Taiping Dao, to abandon their home and business and flee back to their homeland in disgrace. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 It seems like in the other Region Continent, they must have faced the suppression of a Heavenly Immortal. I guess over there, like the Radiant Immortal Dynasty, Taiping Dao contended with others for the position of a Domain Overlord, but ultimately lost. Facing the suppression of a new Heavenly Immortal, they had to flee far away once again to save their lives, returning to their native land.¡± Faced with this inference by the Jade Toad Tao envoy, Zhen Xuan and the others pondered and then nodded in agreement. Indeed. From the current information, after the verification of Taiping Dao¡¯s identity, the origin of the other party and the motivation for returning to Jiuzhou can only be most consistent with this theory. Thus, everyone also accepted the fact of Taiping Dao¡¯s origin from Jiuzhou. The only regret is that Taiping Dao belongs to those who established their own sect in defiance, like the Radiant Immortal Dynasty, and it would be difficult to be wholeheartedly united with them. However, even so, we are all one family, even those who are separated are still family, sharing the same lineage. If there were conflicts before, it doesn¡¯t matter; what can¡¯t be settled between brothers? Now that both sides have reconciled, we are still one family. Having confirmed this point is enough. Isn¡¯t it so that after assimilating the truth, the envoy from Wind and Thunder Path said excitedly, ¡°If Taiping Dao is truly an Immortal Sect from Jiuzhou, then with their help, the great undertaking of annihilating the Evergreen Immortal Sect may be accomplished in our generation.¡± Although in recent years, Wind and Thunder Path and Jade Toad Tao have gradually grown distant from the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects, slowly tending towards separation. But that was due to fighting for tens of thousands of years, constantly seeing no hope for success, leading to disillusionment. Now, once again, there is hope to complete the great cause of the forebears; even for those elders in their Sects who had fought and bled for this cause, they, as descendants, must also exert their efforts. Not to mention. Should Jiuzhou be rejuvenated, these Grand Immortal Sects, if they rejoin, will instantly become Heavenly Immortal Sects. The transformation brought by this status contains countless benefits, which they cannot resist. Even if they don¡¯t want to rejoin, once Changqing Domain is taken, and Jiuzhou is resurrected, their own Sects will have the support of a Heavenly Immortal Sect behind them. For the safety and status enhancement of their own Sect, this is also of extraordinary significance. Both personally and publicly, helping Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou win this battle, they all should support. ¡°So it seems, are you all willing to accept Taiping Dao into Jiuzhou?¡± Seeing everyone¡¯s stance, Zhen Xuan couldn¡¯t help asking. ¡°Of course!¡± ¡°No doubt.¡± ¡°To have one more compatriot, we naturally rejoice.¡± The envoys from the three Immortal Sects each made their stance clear. And with their consensus established, the issue of Taiping Dao returning to its roots and merging into Jiuzhou was settled. Joining forces with two sects, the first step in overthrowing the Evergreen Immortal Sect was officially successful. Taiping Dao took a critical step towards becoming a Heavenly Immortal Sect. Chapter 1475 - Chapter 1475 Chapter 575 Alliance Negotiations ?Chapter 1475: Chapter 575 Alliance Negotiations Chapter 1475: Chapter 575 Alliance Negotiations Having resolved the issue of his identity, Lu Yuan¡¯s alliance with the Nine Provinces naturally followed suit. With the endorsement and facilitation of the four Messengers who had come to attend the celebration, Lu Yuan quickly established connections with the Western Domain of Jiuzhou and the Outer Territory of Jiuzhou. Needless to say, upon news of his background with Taiping Dao reaching back, it immediately caused a stir among the upper echelons of the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects. No one had expected that their neighbor was actually from their own hometown. This unexpected truth brought joy and surprise in equal measure. Regardless, once the facts were confirmed, the leaders of the various Jiuzhou Immortal Sects reached a consensus to accept. To accept Taiping Dao into Jiuzhou, and to accept the proposal for the United Army to deploy. Especially Ding Wanxuan. Upon receiving the information sent back from Mi Yun Mountain, he made a decisive decision to delegate full authority to Zhen Xuan to negotiate the alliance. He instructed his old friend Lu Yuan to make every effort to win over Taiping Dao and to further strengthen ties with Jiuzhou. Meanwhile, he summoned the School Leaders of the various sects that remained in the Western Domain to come together and discuss this sudden turn of events. It wasn¡¯t about whether to bring Taiping Dao into Jiuzhoua€¡±that was a given, as no one would refuse such a strong ally joining their ranks. Their discussion revolved around the issues raised by Lu Yuan, such as when to deploy troops, how many troops to deploy, and the methods of deployment, among other things. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï The question of whether or not to go to war wasn¡¯t even a consideration for Jiuzhou. Facing an existential threat and the chance to annihilate a great enemy, no one wanted to miss this once-in-a-millennium opportunity. War was inevitable. The only point worth discussing was who would lead and who would follow in this joint military operation. When was the deployment date? How would the two sides coordinate? How would the division of interests be calculated, and so on? However, after much discussion, the Western Domain¡¯s Immortal Sects actually produced no concrete plan of action. Earlier Lu Yuan had made it very clear. Given the relationship between Jiuzhou and Taiping Dao, even though they could reluctantly come together based on being from the same realm, this union was still at a rudimentary level, born out of a forced sense of identity due to mutual interests. To say that there was significant affection between the two sides, or that they truly regarded each other as their own, was not necessarily true. Given this reality, deep cooperation between the two was simply impossible. To state the simplest point: With the armies joined, if they were to deploy together, would Taiping Dao follow Jiuzhou¡¯s lead, or would Jiuzhou follow Taiping Dao¡¯s? It¡¯s likely that neither side would accept the other¡¯s command. Forcing one side to submit to the other would only alienate allies and possibly lead to a bitter separation, with no good outcome. Rather than that, it was better to follow what Lu Yuan had proposed: both sides to deploy their own troops and lead their own sect¡¯s forces, attacking the Qing Immortal Sect from two different directions independently. After all, once united, Jiuzhou and Taiping Dao¡¯s combined strength already surpassed that of the Qing Immortal Sect. Even if they were to split their forces, given the vast territory of the Qing Immortal Sect, they would have to divide their own troops into two groups to resist the powerful enemies. If one¡¯s own forces were divided, the opponent would have to do the same. Thus, the strength of the Qing Immortal Sect would also be halved, effectively maintaining the advantage over Qing Immortal Sect on two fronts. What? If Qing Immortal Sect did not split their forces but concentrated its main strength to attack one front with their troops, No matter how many routes come at me, I focus on one. If that were the case, Taihang Tao and Jiuzhou would be laughing even in their dreams. With the strength of Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou, even operating independently, they were not something the Qing Immortal Sect could easily overcome in a short time. An Earth Immortal formation in name could resist an Earth Immortal, but without an Earth Immortal presiding, only a few Human Immortals maintaining the formation, resisting an Earth Immortal leading a massive army could at best last a few days. Certainly no more than a month. But if an Earth Immortal were presiding over the formation, it would be sufficient to withstand attacks from several peers of the same level and endure for several months or even several years. Formations are powerful, but the strength and upper limit of a powerful formation¡¯s effectiveness ultimately depend on the individual. If the opponent does concentrate troops to counter one front, the likely outcome is that the army on that front would stop its assault, relying on the Earth Immortal formation to stand fast and await reinforcements. Meanwhile, the troops on the other front would take advantage of the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s empty defenses and lack of an Earth Immortal presiding over the formation, advancing swiftly. Taking the opportunity when the enemy¡¯s rear is unguarded, they would wreak havoc and occupy land extensively. This way, even if the other front achieves no tangible results, the Qing Immortal Sect has its main force tied down, and its rear is essentially doomed. Without a rear guard, a lone force would only have destruction ahead of them with their entire territory fallen. Thus, the choices left to the Qing Immortal Sect were limited to two. Either distribute what few Earth Immortals they had left on two fronts to maintain stability and delay defeat as long as possible, or disregard everything and concentrate all forces on a strong offensive along one path, betting on that less than one in ten chance of victory. Regardless of their choice, the fate of the opponent was worrisome. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Looking over at the United Army, facing an enemy stubbornly holding out, they would gain a significant advantage on both fronts and, with their overwhelming strength, gradually wear down the opposition. Against an enemy¡¯s reckless advance, a single front would also be self-sustaining, securing the opportunity and time for the other side. Chapter 1476 - Chapter 1476 Chapter 575 Alliance Negotiations_2 ?Chapter 1476: Chapter 575 Alliance Negotiations_2 Chapter 1476: Chapter 575 Alliance Negotiations_2 With this in mind, the decision of the United Army to divide forces, with each commander leading their troops independently, was undoubtedly far stronger than if they had combined into a single force. Therefore, regarding this point, the Nine Provinces side had discussed briefly and chose to agree. Once they confirmed how to join forces, the remaining issue of the deployment date also progressed swiftly. In fact, there was no need for much consideration. On their own, the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects were indeed lacking in strength, far from being a match for Taiping Dao and Changqing¡¯s adversaries in their minds. But if they pulled in the other hereditary lines, then even the current Taiping Dao would not measure up to the entire Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Not to mention the still-recovering Qing Immortal Sect. Initially, the other hereditary Immortal Sects didn¡¯t really want to get involved in the war over there, because of the heavy losses suffered in repeated failures. Together with the absence of any hope, they grew disheartened and were unwilling to join. But now, with Taiping Dao added to the mix, the dawn of eradicating Changqing Immortal Sect suddenly appeared. Therefore, the other hereditary Immortal Sects naturally could not refuse the opportunity to fulfill their ancestors¡¯ long-cherished wishes. Just like the Jiuzhou Messengers who went to Mi Yun Mountain, as soon as they understood the identity and intentions of Taiping Dao, they immediately declared their stance, choosing to support it. The Immortal Sects behind them would also undoubtedly fully support it, with no deviation in attitude. Now, although Taiping Dao had already joined Nine Provinces and were nominally one of them, Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï The Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects and the other hereditary lines were like blood brothers who had not yet split the family assets. Great Plain Path, on the other hand, was like a cousin who had already divided their inheritance. When it came to choosing between helping blood brothers or cousins, it was not a difficult decision to make. Therefore, Immortal Sects like Wind and Thunder Path, Heavenly River Sect, Yuchan Tao, even if they participated in the war, would only join the forces of the Western Domain Sects and would not likely join Taiping Dao. And with the reception of these Immortal Sects¡¯ troops, the Western Domain Sects, currently the weakest faction, would suddenly rise to become the most powerful of the three parties within the Changqing Domain. Since they had such strength, there was naturally no need to delay time, waiting for Zhen Xuan and the younger generation to grow. Even if these younger generations made breakthroughs, they would only add one Earth Immortal, a few Human Immortals. For this war, it would not have much impact. But if Changqing Immortal Sect gained one or two more Earth Immortals, the impact on the outcome of the war would be significant. For Nine Provinces, that could mean several more Earth Immortals dead, dozens of Human Immortals, tens of thousands of disciplesa€¡±a price they were not unwilling to pay. After all, it was a great opportunity to eradicate Changqing Immortal Sect and fulfill their ancestors¡¯ long-cherished wish; if the goal could be achieved, the death of some people was inconsequential. But these people could have lived, so why should they pay the price for the mere benefit of a few juniors? Therefore, without the need for further discussion, between deploying troops after three hundred years or two hundred years, Nine Provinces chose the latter. To deploy troops after two hundred years. Even more so, they were already considering advancing the war time further. Advance it to one hundred and fifty years later, a hundred years later, or even now. Taiping Dao already had three Earth Immortals, and with a bit of effort, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate on their side could also muster three Earth Immortals, or even four. Other Human Immortals and ordinary Cultivators were even more numerous. With such strength, even if they attacked Changqing Immortal Sect immediately, they would be more than enough to eradicate the opposition. On the contrary, the longer the delay, the greater the variable, which could lead to unpredictable consequences. However, Lu Yuan on his side naturally opposed an immediate attack. If they attacked Changqing Immortal Sect now, although they would have a great chance of victory, even able to completely destroy the opposition, Taiping Dao was not yet prepared. Six Earth Immortals of Taiping Dao versus eight Earth Immortals made only a one-third increase in the top-tier strength. But for the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, it was about a similar top-tier strength gap to nearly double the top-tier strength gap. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï With five Earth Immortals for the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and only six for Taiping Dao, the gap was not significant, and considering the difference in minor realms, they may even be at a disadvantage. But if it was eight versus five, considering the forces that could be brought to the Changqing Domain battlefield, that would be nearly double the top-tier strength gap. The difference implied between identical strength and double the gap goes without saying. This was a struggle for dominance over the Changqing Domain battlefield. It concerned the division of benefits and the battle for influence in the Changqing Domain after the war. Dealing with fundamental self-interest, Lu Yuan could not possibly yield. Facing the demand from the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate to deploy troops immediately, he outright refused. The reason was that Taiping Dao was not yet prepared; he had just made a breakthrough and his realm was not stable; he could not immediately join the battlefield and needed one or two hundred years to adapt. At the same time, various supplies for the war within the sect had not been fully gathered and required some time to prepare. Essentially, the main strategy was to delay. However, Huang Xuan and Huang Yun had both reached the Late-stage Human Immortal realm; though they had only just broken through, their foundations had long been solid, and they already had the accumulation of strength. If they fully mobilized the resources of Taiping Dao to help these two break through to Earth Immortal, it really wouldn¡¯t take two hundred years; perhaps one hundred years would be enough for both to make the breakthrough. The main reason Lu Yuan wanted to delay for two hundred years was that after his own breakthrough to Mid-stage Earth Immortal, he could continue climbing for a while, making his own strength even stronger. Chapter 1477 - Chapter 1477 Chapter 575 Alliance Negotiations_3 ?Chapter 1477: Chapter 575 Alliance Negotiations_3 Chapter 1477: Chapter 575 Alliance Negotiations_3 However, this level of power was far from the gap between the early Earth Immortal and the mid-stage Earth Immortal. So for him, it was not necessary to increase his cultivation by that much. After all, with the resources of Taiping Dao, it was impossible to support his growth to the late-stage Earth Immortal. It would require mobilizing the resources of the entire Southern Domain and conscripting three vassals to make it possible. But to break through the late-stage Earth Immortal was not something that could be achieved in a short time. Even with the rapid advancement rate of the Fortune Dao, it would take at least five hundred years to accumulate enough. Dragging it out for five hundred years, the Changqing Immortal Sect would have developed to an unforeseen level. By that time, even if Jiuzhou Immortal Gate joined forces, many variables would appear in the battle. This was undoubtedly a negative trend for Lu Yuan. So after much consideration, he eventually chose to compromise. A mere slight increase in cultivation would not affect his strength by more than ten percent. This slight enhancement was not even as significant as having an Immortal Artifact in hand. There was not much significance in boosting his cultivation to the limit supported by his current resources. Thus, for the proposal from the Nine Provinces¡¯ side, Lu Yuan actively shortened the timeline. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï From initially planning to start the war two hundred years later, he reduced it to one hundred years later. That was the time for his last two avatars to break through to Earth Immortal. The original two hundred years was indeed a bit too late and insecure. If Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s Yang Jihua and others acquired deeper accumulation or took more risks, it was indeed possible for them to break through to Earth Immortal in just two hundred years. That would add a strong adversary for him. Two hundred years was not safe enough. Waiting a hundred years was definitely no problem. Lu Yuan had seen Yang Jihua and knew his opponent¡¯s details. It was impossible for him to break through Earth Immortal in one hundred years. The opponent was merely a common Earth Immortal and barely qualified as a Chosen one, but only in the ordinary sense. He was not someone with an unfair advantage like himself. A hundred years later, the Changqing Immortal Sect would still only have the two Earth Immortals they had now. By then, with his side bringing out eight Earth Immortals and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate bringing three to four Earth Immortals, the mere two Earth Immortals of Changqing Immortal Sect, even if Song Xiren had reached late-stage Earth Immortal by then, would not be able to stir up any trouble. This battle, after Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou joined forces, had already determined the winner. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Thus, on the issue of deployment time, the two parties also reached a consensus to start the war a hundred years later. Alliance relations, deployment methods, and deployment dates were all agreed upon between Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou. The only thing left was the issue of post-war benefit distribution. The territory of twenty-three nations within Changqing Immortal Sect was a vast land that neither Taiping Dao nor Jiuzhou Immortal Gate wanted to cede. Once the two sects decided to join hands, Changqing Immortal Sect no longer had any hope of resistance. Thus, how to divide these spoils of war naturally became the most concerning topic for both parties. But the distribution of benefits was the most enticing and also the most difficult. No one wanted to suffer losses, nor did anyone want to give in. Eventually, the result was argued back and forth heatedly, even to the point of cursing, almost coming to blows, but it also led to a result that could convince all parties. On Taiping Dao¡¯s side, given that they had three Earth Immortals, they believed their strength was unmatched among the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates. Even leading this joint deployment indirectly positioned them as the de facto Alliance Leader. Therefore, they naturally deserved the largest share of the spoils. However, this claim was naturally not acceptable to Jiuzhou. They believed that they had greatly weakened Changqing Immortal Sect in the previous major battle, injuring their vitality so severely that they had not yet recovered, which was the opportunity for this deployment. In that respect, they believed they merited great recognition. Moreover, they had five Immortal Sects, with numerous personnel, directly occupying half of the current alliance of ten Jiuzhou Immortal Sects. Based on this contribution alone, they believed they deserved at least two-thirds of the post-war territories. And the other few Immortal Sects outside the domain, while they had little interest in the lands of Changqing Domain, also implicitly supported the five sects of the Western Domain, believing that they deserved the larger share. After all, from what was apparent, although Taiping Dao had allied with them, the main military force was definitively them in the two-way army. The most convincing point was that their Earth Immortals surpassed those of Taiping Dao in cultivation, not to mention the number of Human Immortals and ordinary cultivators was far greater. In both quality and quantity, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was stronger. As the main force, they naturally held more say and more rights to distribute the spoils. And their insistence wasn¡¯t entirely a show of force. Taking on the main force¡¯s responsibility naturally meant taking on the main risks. Being the arch-enemy of Changqing Immortal Sect, even if Taiping Dao allied with Jiuzhou, Changqing Immortal Sect would strike at Jiuzhou Immortal Gate first. They had to bear more pressure and losses; therefore, taking more was only natural. However, this argument could not convince Lu Yuan either. Lu Yuan aimed for most of Changqing Domain to strive towards becoming a Heavenly Immortal. If he let the other side take two-thirds of Changqing Immortal Sect, wouldn¡¯t he be making the bridal dress for others? Rather than that, he might as well not fight at all. Neither side could convince the other, and Lu Yuan also did not want to reveal his strength now to cause fear in the other party. So after arguing for several years, both sides took a step back and chose to let strength and luck determine the final results of the battle. Since both sides were independent, they might as well fight their own battles; the territories they conquered would belong to the conquerors. They decided not to worry about post-war distribution, aiming to claim more land purely based on ability during the war. What you conquer is yours. What if, in the process of conquering the territories, they encountered more resistance from Changqing Immortal Sect? Then you could only blame your bad luck; it was not meant to be. In the Immortal Cultivation World, luck was part of strength; if you couldn¡¯t handle it, you couldn¡¯t blame others. This plan, mixing strength and luck, was not the best, but it was acceptable to both sides. Jiuzhou believed they were stronger and could mobilize more forces, gaining more advantages in capturing territories later. But Lu Yuan also thought himself stronger. Taiping Dao visibly had three Earth Immortals, but covertly they had eight. Those hidden five Earth Immortals were the strongest trump cards. At critical moments, playing these cards could turn the tide of battle and seize territories. Jiuzhou thought they were stronger and had gained more advantages. Little did they know, their competitor was stronger, more insidious, and more tenacious. Signing this alliance agreement now would only lead them to regret it later. After the final arrangements for the distribution of benefits were settled, Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou¡¯s alliance agreement, after sporadic discussions spanning eight years, was finally officially signed. Between the two sects, they officially began preparing for the war. After all, there were only ninety-two years left until the century-long deadline. Time was running out. Chapter 1478 - Chapter 1478 Chapter 576 Northern Expedition to Changqing ?Chapter 1478: Chapter 576 Northern Expedition to Changqing Chapter 1478: Chapter 576 Northern Expedition to Changqing After Taiping Dao and the Nine Provinces formed an alliance, neither side was in a hurry to announce their alignment. The news that Taiping Dao had merged with the Nine Provinces was only circulated among the higher echelons of the sects; apart from the School Leaders, no one else was aware. At the current stage of war preparations, and with a considerable amount of time before the actual commencement of hostilitiesa€¡±it was prudent to keep the alliance a secret from the Changqing Immortal Sect for as long as possible, even if only to confuse them. The longer the enemy was preoccupied, the less prepared they would be for the decisive battle. And the shorter the preparation time they were given, the less sufficient their preparation would be. Insufficient preparation on the enemy¡¯s part essentially meant thorough preparation on their own side. The shorter the enemy¡¯s reaction time was, the longer their own preparation time became. With these accumulating factors, once the war began, they could certainly surprise the Changqing Immortal Sect. Nevertheless, while both sides endeavored to keep their alliance hidden, preparing for a war that would span an entire domaina€¡±mobilizing supplies, assembling personnel, and making all sorts of tactical preparationsa€¡±wasn¡¯t something that could be easily concealed. Although the Changqing Immortal Sect had not received news of the alliance between Taiping Dao and the Nine Provinces, they could easily deduce, based on the considerable mobilization of the two, that preparations for war were underway. And whom might these two sects be targeting for war? ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Was that even a question? It was definitely themselves. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Therefore, it was inevitable that they, too, began to make preparations and mobilizations. However, the preparations made by the Changqing Immortal Sect were much slower and on a smaller scale compared to those of Taiping Dao. The reason was simple. A great war was about to erupt in the Changqing Domaina€¡±this was a consensus among all parties. However, the timing of this war¡¯s outbreak was speculated by each party to be in about five to six hundred years, or three to four hundred years at the earliest. Even the most aggressive estimates did not foresee anything before two hundred years had passed. This estimate was based on the accumulation of strength and recovery stages of Taiping Dao, the Nine Provinces, and the Changqing Immortal Sect. After three or four hundred years, Taiping Dao would likely reach a limit of its strengths. If delayed any further, they would collapse from exhaustion of resources without the need for an external attack. Thus, a war initiated by Taiping Dao at this point was plausible to everyone. In five to six hundred years, the Nine Provinces would have likely reached their peak, while the strength amassed by the Changqing Immortal Sect during that time would have attained a terrifying level. If delayed further, the Changqing Immortal Sect, after having recharged for fifteen to sixteen hundred years, would unleash all its prior accumulations in full force. Their numbers of Human Immortals and Earth Immortals likely would surge uncontrollably. At that point, their ascent would truly be unstoppable. Even if Taiping Dao allied with the Nine Provinces, they would stand no chance against them. The extinction of these two sects would just be a matter of time. Thus, to prevent that scenario from unfolding, engaging in battle after five to six hundred years was already the latest timeline conceivable. As for the possibility of going to war in two hundred yearsa€¡±it was essentially what was previously discussed, coinciding with the critical time when new Earth Immortals were emerging in the Changqing Immortal Sect. Initiating a decisive battle at this juncture also made perfect sense. Additionally, considering all the above factors, a relatively accurate prediction could already be made about when the decisive battle within the domain would erupt. It could be as soon as in two hundred years or as late as in five hundred yearsa€¡±with the clash between the three Immortal Sects impending. Regardless of whether the battle occurred sooner or later, this timeline excluded any possibility of a battle in one hundred years. No, now it was less than a hundred years. Given this situation, based on the information openly gathered, it was logical for the Changqing Immortal Sect to misjudge. As for why Taiping Dao and the Nine Provinces were already preemptively preparing for this decisive battle so swiftly, this was also simple to understand. They had no choice. Who could blame them, especially when compared to the Changqing Immortal Sect, which was far too powerful? Relying on their twice-as-large mass compared to their enemies, the Changqing Immortal Sect could proceed regularly, and just one year of their preparation equaled three to four years of the enemy¡¯s. While Taiping Dao and the Nine Provinces required two hundred years to gear up for the war, the Changqing Immortal Sect side would only need about forty to fifty years of preparation. This is the advantage of a mighty nation over a smaller one. The same principle applied in the realm of immortals, from a Heavenly Immortal Sect to a Grand Fairy Door. Therefore, the Changqing Immortal Sect could afford to prepare leisurely, continuing to accumulate their strength while getting ready for the war. Eventually, as the war neared, a few more decades of preparation would suffice for them to manage the conflict. However, Taiping Dao and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate could not afford that luxury. Hence, their initiating preparations a century or two in advance, although surprising at first, made sense after some reflection. Accordingly, facing the unusual actions of both sects, although the Changqing Immortal Sect remained vigilant, they were not overly cautious. They remained oblivious to the imminent danger. For such a situation, Lu Yuan and the Nine Provinces were naturally delighted. In fact, Lu Yuan¡¯s choice to advance the timeline of the battle was partly influenced by the current situation. He wondered if he might attempt deception to mislead the Nine Provinces. He didn¡¯t harbor much hopea€¡±at the end of the day, the relationship between the three sects had always been adversarial, particularly disadvantaging the Changqing Immortal Sect. Under such circumstances, deceiving them seemed an immense challenge. Yet, perhaps the other side had been faring too well these years, grown too quickly, and developed an inflated sense of themselves. Maybe they had grown complacent or careless, or perhaps it was something else¡­ Regardless, their sluggish preparations allowed Lu Yuan¡¯s somewhat immature plan to be smoothly implemented, trapping them in his stratagem. Chapter 1479 - Chapter 1479 Chapter 576 Northern Expedition to Changqing_2 ?Chapter 1479: Chapter 576 Northern Expedition to Changqing_2 Chapter 1479: Chapter 576 Northern Expedition to Changqing_2 This is simply too good. Grateful, Lu Yuan hastened the war preparations for Taiping Dao. He was no longer hoarding resources or advancing his cultivation. The resources freed up within the sect were then equally distributed to Huang Xuan and Huang Yun. Neither of them let Lu Yuan down, their cultivation speed was extremely fast. At this rate, without needing a hundred years, perhaps in just another seventy or eighty years, they might become Earth Immortals. The top tier combat strength had already taken shape, with Taiping Dao having eight Earth Immortals before the war, there should be no problems. As for Human Immortals, having one more or one less made no significant impact on the battle situation. Lu Yuan had given up on cultivating this tier of cultivators. Although the disciples of Taiping Dao, sensing the impending war atmosphere, had accumulated enough contributions and began to request the exchange of a country¡¯s worth of vitality for a breakthrough to True Immortal before the battle to add a layer of security for themselves. But all these requests were denied by Lu Yuan. Taiping Dao had already accumulated enough strength. His Avatars were almost fully manifested, and the remaining Immortal Materials offered by some disciples could not even amount to one Earth Immortal Avatar. Even if it were possible, there was no longer time left to cultivate an Earth Immortal Dao Fruit. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï The time for the showdown was approaching, and all resources had to be concentrated for maximum benefit. Using the limited resources to cultivate his own two Avatars into Earth Immortals was clearly far more valuable than cultivating two or three more Human Immortals. As for whether this would break trust with those disciples, dampen their enthusiasm, and lead them to no longer actively contribute refining Immortal Materials, One could only say that Lu Yuan could not afford to care so much anymore. After all, if he won this battle, Taiping Dao would acquire most of Changqing Domain and he could then anticipate breaking through to Heavenly Immortal. Once a Heavenly Immortal, he would be among the top Great True Persons of the Immortal Realm, and with the strongest combat power, aside from avoiding the heavenly tribulations, he would virtually have no dangers to worry about. Avatars and such would become completely meaningless. If he lost, then for thousands, tens of thousands, or even tens of thousands of years, he could forget about aspiring for Heavenly Immortal. The badly wounded Taiping Dao would enter a lengthy period of recovery. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Such a long span of time was enough to offset the impact of this matter. Through the passage of time, relying solely on the sect¡¯s production, they could still amass a number of Avatars later on. Right now, Lu Yuan valued the contributions of his disciples simply because he sought quick results. If there was no urgency, extending the timeline, those contributions from disciples would become insignificant. In any case, Lu Yuan, commanding the power of eight Earth Immortal combatants, had set his sights higher, only considering forces of the same level as worthy, and completely disregarding the lesser Human Immortals. However, Lu Yuan still valued some lower tier disciples. By now, after four hundred years of accumulation, the number of Taiping Dao¡¯s disciples had reached a scale of twenty thousand, hitting the limit of the sect¡¯s potential. Expanding further, even relying on the original reserves, would be unsustainable. But now, Lu Yuan had brought forward the date of the decisive battle, so the original reserves naturally did not need to be as large. Amongst the many reserves, he could afford to allocate some for recruiting more new disciples. Although the newly recruited disciples would find it difficult to achieve much in the short span of less than a hundred years, By the time the battle starts, at best they might only be capable of Gathering Two Qi. They wouldn¡¯t even qualify as cannon fodder. However, with the battle at hand, Lu Yuan could not afford to concern himself with that much. Qing Immortal Sect, which stands against them, now had a disciple count that had expanded to thirty thousand, and the number was still increasing. Such a mass of cannon fodder was putting certain pressure on Lu Yuan. Therefore, he decided to keep up with the number of his own cannon fodder. Twenty thousand cannon fodder was still too few. The number was insufficient, far from enough. Taiping Dao had to deal not just with Qing Immortal Sect; after defeating them, they also had to balance the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and face the many tasks and pressures. There was simply too much to handle. To accomplish these tasks, relying on a few Earth Immortals was not enough. Ordinary disciples were also needed to fill the ranks, serving as wings and cannon fodder. Therefore, in preparation for the battle, Lu Yuan ordered the recruitment of another five thousand new disciples. With Taiping Dao¡¯s territory, gathering this many people was naturally not enough. For this, they even had to relax the requirements a bit, no longer insisting on superior qualifications. Those with medium qualifications could also be selected. In any case, all were cannon fodder. Lu Yuan did not expect them to achieve greatness. As long as they could fulfil the role of cannon fodder by cultivating to Gathering Three Qi, that would be sufficient. This decisive battle was aimed at destroying Qing Immortal Sect. Although Lu Yuan had made many preparations and even allied with Jiuzhou to act together, eliminating the opponent was not so simple. After all, it was an Immortal Sect of a Heavenly Immortal, dominating two-thirds of a Great Domain. Even now in its crippled state, its strength could not be extinguished so easily. To annihilate them, Lu Yuan could not be sure how long it would take. But referring to the last great war, it might take as short as twenty or thirty years, or as long as a hundred years or more. Especially in a sect-destroying war of no quarter given, it would not be surprising for it to drag on even longer. If it were only three to fifty years, then the batch of disciples currently being recruited naturally could not contribute much. Chapter 1480 - Chapter 1480 Chapter 576 Northern Expedition to Changqing_3 ?Chapter 1480: Chapter 576 Northern Expedition to Changqing_3 Chapter 1480: Chapter 576 Northern Expedition to Changqing_3 But if it dragged on for over a hundred years, those people would almost reach the stage of Gathering Three Qi, and just in time, they could serve as fresh cannon fodder for the new force on the front line. Lu Yuan viewed these five thousand people as a reserve force. Moreover, it was not just these five thousand people; besides the urgently recruited disciples, the intake of new disciples in Taiping Dao would proceed as usual. The motto was an unending and ever-growing source. Strategic military force (Earth Immortal), conventional military force (twenty thousand old disciples), and reserve military force (new disciples) all underwent a certain degree of adjustment. The preparations on the personnel side were more or less complete. Having completed the personnel preparations, Lu Yuan also began to extensively open the Sect¡¯s treasury, taking out various resources and treasures, and then mobilizing the disciples to massively produce various combat equipment such as spirit talismans, magical artifacts, and formation methods at the Sect. Some large-scale flying boats, patrol celestial palaces, war puppets, and other strategic equipment were also personally participated in by Lu Yuan and a few of his avatars for the manufacturing. To gear up for the upcoming war, the entire Taiping Dao had turned into a rapidly operating machine. It wasn¡¯t just Taiping Dao. Over there in the Nine Provinces, various supplies and labor had also been mobilized, with everybody making final preparations for this ultimate battle. ¡­ Time flies, and in the blink of an eye, the appointed century had passed. Mi Yun Mountain. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? Inside the Teaching Great Hall, Lu Yuan, who hastily replaced Huang Xuan as the incumbent School Leader before the war, sat at the head, with his few avatars automatically split into two rows and seated. And further down, on the left were five local Human Immortals nurtured over the years by Taiping Dao. On the right were five True Persons from Jintai Gate, Xuan Turtle Mountain, and Bihu Palace. It had been one thousand three hundred years since Lu Yuan¡¯s Ascension into the Immortal Realm from Taiping Dao. Such a lengthy period, even for Human Immortals, was nearly half their lifespan. For these several affiliated Immortal Sects, one thousand three hundred years was enough for a power transition and a rotation of old and new within their Sects. The previous School Leader of Xuan Turtle Mountain had died of old age five hundred years ago. Afterwards, Zhu Zhenghe took over the position of School Leader of Xuan Turtle Mountain, continuing to lead the Sect in loyalty to Taiping Dao. However, due to previous dishonesty of this junior Sect, over the years, Lu Yuan had imposed some oppressions on Xuan Turtle Mountain. Specifically, it involved requisitioning their Qi production to nurture his own people. Thus, Xuan Turtle Mountain fell into a state of scarcity of resources. After the death of the previous Human Immortal, they had been unable to cultivate a second Human Immortal for a long time. Now, only Zhu Zhenghe remained as a Human Immortal, and their strength had weakened. At Jintai Gate, the previous old School Leader also passed away, with Ouyang Yuan succeeding the position. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? However, compared to Xuan Turtle Mountain, Jintai Gate remained loyal to Taiping Dao all this time, which won Lu Yuan¡¯s favor. Therefore, the resource pressure on them wasn¡¯t as severe as that on Xuan Turtle Mountain. Taking this opportunity, Jintai Gate had managed to cultivate a new Human Immortal besides Ouyang Yuan, thereby passing on the mantle smoothly. As for Bihu Palace, this Sect that never had much presence, finally made a significant move after three thousand years, producing a new Human Immortal one hundred and fifty years ago. However, the current School Leader of Bihu Palace was already very old, aging two thousand seven hundred years. Additionally, some lingering injuries had further reduced his lifespan, and he was on the verge of decay, with an aura of decline that could not be concealed. Anyone could see that this person¡¯s life would not last much longer. So, although they gained another Human Immortal, for Bihu Palace, it didn¡¯t significantly enhance their strength. The other party had merely cultivated a successor before dying. Above are the current statuses of the three smaller Sects of Taiping Dao. ¡°School Leader, by the command of the higher Sect, over these years, my Jintai Gate has been expanding the recruitment of disciples, and now, across the whole Sect, we have two thousand cultivators. Among them, Twelve at Five Qi Towards Primordial, three hundred at Gathering Four Qi, and one thousand at Gathering Three Qi, with the rest at first or second level of Qi.¡± ¡°School Leader, after receiving the higher Sect¡¯s command, my Xuan Turtle Mountain has also been expanding the recruitment of disciples over the years, and now there are one thousand eight hundred cultivators in total. Among them, ten at Five Qi Towards Primordial, two hundred at Gathering Four Qi, and one thousand one hundred at Gathering Three Qi, with the rest at first or second level of Qi.¡± ¡°School Leader, my Bihu Palace now has two thousand cultivators. Among them, thirteen at Five Qi Towards Primordial, three hundred at Gathering Four Qi, and one thousand one hundred at Gathering Three Qi, with the rest at Gathering either One or Two Qi.¡± Ouyang Yuan, Zhu Zhenghe, and others, then started to report their internal Sect statuses to Lu Yuan successively. ¡°Hmm, combined from the three Sects, five thousand eight hundred persons, four thousand of whom are at Gathering Three Qi or above, and there are also five True Immortals. These are all eligible individuals; you have done well and haven¡¯t let me down,¡± Lu Yuan said, nodding in satisfaction as he looked at them. With a major battle imminent, not only would Taiping Dao¡¯s disciples be on the battlefield, but these junior Sects naturally wouldn¡¯t be an exception. Though he didn¡¯t plan to use them purely as cannon fodder, to die en masse at the frontline, as affiliates, they still had duties to fulfill. The presence of these additional five thousand-plus cultivators and five Human Immortals right before the war indeed added a substantial force. All these efforts of nurturing these junior Sects for over a thousand years weren¡¯t in vain. ¡°School Leader, there¡¯s also news from Jiuzhou Immortal Gate,¡± After the junior Sects had finished reporting, Yi Dancheng stepped forward, reporting his own work results: ¡°They have also mobilized a large army, now assembled in the Western Domain, comprising twenty thousand cultivators, fifteen Human Immortals, and three Earth Immortals. Among these three Earth Immortals are Ding Wanxuan, the School Leader of Azure Dragon Sect, and Gu Huaiyuan, the School Leader of Wind and Thunder Path, both being Mid-stage Earth Immortals, and they will participate in this great battle. They are already arrayed and ready for deployment, just waiting for our signal.¡± Today¡¯s meeting was the final mobilization before the battle. Seeing that the Nine Provinces were also prepared and his own junior Sects were ready, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t delay any further. He stood up, drew the Taiping Sword from his waist, and with a swing of the sword towards the north, commanded, ¡°By the order of this School Leader, deploy troops, head north to conquer Changqing!¡± ¡°At your command!¡± All the Immortals below, hearing this, promptly fell in line, bowing to take the order. Chapter 1481 - Chapter 1481 Chapter 577 Responses from All Parties ?Chapter 1481: Chapter 577: Responses from All Parties Chapter 1481: Chapter 577: Responses from All Parties The army set out, especially an army of cultivators, naturally filled the sky with immortal light. As soon as Taiping Dao made its move, the entire world received word. Especially in the Western Domain of the Nine Provinces Immortal Gate, aligning with Taiping Dao in dispatching troops, this pushed the atmosphere to its peak. Everyone knew that a war affecting the entire domain and even unprecedented in seventy thousand years had officially erupted. Changqing Mountain. When the news of Taiping Dao and Nine Provinces announcing their campaign against the Qing Immortal Sect reached them. Song Xiren, who received the news, immediately summoned the True Persons from various places to discuss how to handle the situation. ¡°It¡¯s impossible, absolutely impossible!¡± Inside the council hall, a True Person from the Qing Immortal Sect still found the sudden outbreak of war unbelievable. ¡°How dare a mere remnant of the Nine Spirits and Taiping Dao provoke our Qing Immortal Sect? How many cultivators do they have? ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï How many True Immortals? It¡¯s just over a thousand years since the last great war ended, where did they get the courage to provoke a war?¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Just like this moment. Even with the incident already laid out before everyone, some still found it hard to accept. It wasn¡¯t that their spirits were weak; the situation had simply arisen too abruptly, and Qing Immortal Sect was altogether unprepared for war. ¡°Now the news of Taiping Dao and the remnants of the Nine Spirits joining forces has spread throughout the entire domain, even neighboring regions have heard of it. The proclamations issued by both parties have already been delivered to us, how could this be false?¡± Some who remained calm below now spoke with unpleasant expressions. ¡°The alliance between Taiping Dao and the remnants of the Nine Spirits to resist us was anticipated. The only surprise is the timing of their action, which has come one or two hundred years earlier. The main issue isn¡¯t this. The important thing is that the strength employed by Taiping Dao and Nine Provinces this time is far greater than they previously revealed.¡± Beside him, Yang Jihua also gritted his teeth: ¡°Indeed, Taiping Dao has really hidden their strength well. We originally thought they had at most concealed just one Earth Immortal in Yi Dancheng. We never expected that even Lu Yuan had silently become an Earth Immortal. A mere Taiping Dao now actually has three major Earth Immortal, one more than our Qing Immortal Sect. Well, how wonderful. They had such strength yet concealed it deeply, obviously harboring ulterior motives. It appears they have accumulated enough strength and can no longer contain it, which is why they¡¯ve sought the remnants of the Nine Spirits to challenge us.¡± The outside world always had many speculations about the strength of Taiping Dao. But even the highest estimates only ever suspected that Yi Dancheng, who had been in seclusion for a thousand years, had become an Earth Immortal. After all, based on ordinary people¡¯s estimates, Yi Dancheng was at the late stage of Human Immortal cultivation before his seclusion. Normally, a person reaching this realm, even if extraordinarily talented, would be nearly two thousand years old. Now that he had secluded himself for over a thousand years, according to his lifespan, he had surpassed the limit of a Human Immortal. The fact that Taiping Dao had not announced his death only confirmed that he had become an Earth Immortal. He was only kept hidden to avoid drawing attention. This treatment was also given to Che Shidao. However, Che Shidao had always been low-profile over the years and rarely appeared before outsiders. When appearing, he presented himself as someone on the verge of his end, aged and weak. Moreover, since he always referred to Yi Dancheng as his senior brother and displayed a lower level of cultivation publicly, it created a mistaken impression among outsiders that Che Shidao was a few hundred years younger than Yi Dancheng. From this deduction, Che Shidao would be about two thousand seven to eight hundred years old now, still a bit away from death. Therefore, he did not attract too much attention from outsiders. But Lu Yuan was different. To outsiders, Lu Yuan had always seemed young. Aside from Zhen Xuan and others from his hometown, knowing that Lu Yuan was now over two thousand six hundred years old, he wasn¡¯t actually young. To others, Lu Yuan seemed around two thousand years old. At this age, a typical genius would be at the late stage of Human Immortal, and it would take another five to six hundred years of effort to reach the Earth Immortal Realm. So, to outsiders, Lu Yuan becoming an Earth Immortal was rather unanticipated. But precisely because of this lack of preparation, the shock of Lu Yuan suddenly revealing his Earth Immortal cultivation had an especially strong impact on the Qing Immortal Sect. With two Earth Immortals in Taiping Dao, the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s defense in the south would only require one Earth Immortal to lead, setting up one or two Earth Immortal formations, supplemented by several Human Immortals and tens of thousands of cultivators. Naturally, they could counter two with one and keep the enemies outside the national borders. But if there were three Earth Immortals, the situation would resemble the last time Qing Immortal Sect attacked Nine Provinces. In one battlefield, Taiping Dao could gather a force far exceeding the defenders, using three to one, forming numerical and strength advantages, and focus on breaking through at one point of defense. For Qing Immortal Sect to resist such an enemy, unless Song Xiren, a cultivator nearing the late stage of Earth Immortal, personally took action. Using his far superior strength at that level, to stop the three cultivators from Taiping Dao could barely maintain the balance in one battle scenario. But the problem was, the Qing Immortal Sect could not achieve this. ¡°Enough with the noise!¡± Hearing the chaos below, Song Xiren could no longer hold back and shouted angrily to quiet everyone. Then he said, ¡°Taiping Dao¡¯s harboring of malicious intentions and our failure to detect them in time is our oversight. As the School Leader, I must take the primary responsibility.¡± Chapter 1482 - Chapter 1482 Chapter 577 Responses from All Parties_2 ?Chapter 1482: Chapter 577: Responses from All Parties_2 Chapter 1482: Chapter 577: Responses from All Parties_2 Particularly, my failure to notice that they would strike prematurely is indeed my responsibility. But now is not the time to assign blame, the focus is on how to cope with this catastrophe. The enemy has already launched their attack. Taiping Dao, of course, is a formidable threat, but judging by the strength they have shown, they have only mobilized twenty thousand cultivators, ten Human Immortals, and three Earth Immortals. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Although their strength is great, it is still inferior to those remnants of the Nine Spirits. Those remnants of the Nine Spirits have also deployed twenty thousand cultivators, fifteen Human Immortals, and three Earth Immortals. On the surface, their strength doesn¡¯t differ much from Taiping Dao, but whether it¡¯s Human Immortals or Earth Immortals, the True Immortal cultivation of the Nine Spirits remnants is still a notch above Taiping Dao. Taiping Dao is tough to deal with, yet these remnants of the Nine Spirits are even more ferocious. If we don¡¯t stop them, the millennia of foundation of our Qing Immortal Sect will be destroyed in our hands.¡± During his speech, Song Xiren¡¯s heart was also trembling. Honestly, before today, he could never have imagined that the situation would deteriorate to this extent. What virtue and ability do I or Qing Immortal Sect have? To be targeted by both Taiping Dao and the remnants of the Nine Spirits. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Combining both sects, there are six Earth Immortals, twenty-five Human Immortals, and forty thousand cultivators. Such a grand force; even the Qing Immortal Sect at its peak was nothing more. And now, such a powerful force is mine to confront. Yet the strength I have at hand is even inferior to that of the Qing Immortal Sect during the last decisive battle. In that battle, although the Qing Immortal Sect was also in decline, there were still four Earth Immortals, including one late-stage Earth Immortal grand cultivator. On the side of Human Immortals, there were also more than twenty, and just as many cultivators. If I had that strength now, I would have no fear of Taiping Dao and the remnants of the Nine Spirits. But unfortunately, I do not. So, how to deal with these two large armies has become the problem that must be addressed immediately. Especially the one led by the remnants of the Nine Spirits. Ding Wanxuan and Gu Huaiyuan, these two are mid-stage Earth Immortals, and even if their cultivation is not as advanced as Song Xiren¡¯s, when they join forces, they can match him in combat. And there¡¯s also Huang Yuanxiua€¡±this School Leader of the Heavenly River Sect has also chosen to battle as usual. With such an early Earth Immortal cultivator joining them, the three together would be too much even for Song Xiren. Thus, the situation has reached its worst. A slight miscalculation, and the entire Qing Immortal Sect could be obliterated. Faced with their School Leader¡¯s questioning, the crowd fell into a silence, and after a while, several old Earth Immortals stepped forward, saying bitterly, ¡°School Leader, the enemy is powerful and their momentum fierce. With just our one sect¡¯s strength, I¡¯m afraid we cannot repel them. The only strategy now is to delay as much as possible, hoping that Elder Brother Yang and the others can also break through to Earth Immortal. By increasing our sect¡¯s top-level combat power, we have a chance to stop the enemy¡¯s advance. Until then, all we can do is fight to the death.¡± ¡°Indeed, any countermeasures now are meaningless. Isn¡¯t Taiping Dao and the remnants of the Nine Spirits rushing to attack our sect precisely because they fear that Elder Brother Yang and the others will soon become Earth Immortals? Therefore, they chose this critical moment to launch a premature assault, with the aim of disrupting our sect¡¯s ascension. The more they do this, the less we should accommodate their wishes. On the front line, the enemy is indeed overwhelming, and we are difficult to face. But just because we can¡¯t defeat them doesn¡¯t mean they can easily conquer us. Over the years, our sect has always been preparing for war, and within our territory, every mountain, river, and city has a Formation Method set up. We can immediately establish more than a dozen Earth Immortal formations if needed. We can entirely resist step-by-step, relying on our vast territory and numerous cultivators, resisting the invasion at every river, every mountain, and every city. As long as we are willing to pay the price, delaying for decades is not a problem at all. As long as Elder Brother Yang and the others can break through to Earth Immortal during this time, everything we have lost today can be gradually taken back. First, we must get through the current predicament and preserve our sect¡¯s legacy. With our sect¡¯s foundation, a minor defeat today doesn¡¯t count for much. In the thousands and tens of thousands of years to come, we can slowly settle accounts with these two offending sects.¡± In the face of the sect¡¯s peril, everyone in the Qing Immortal Sect was contributing their wisdom to continue the legacy at this time. And soon, the answer was reached. It was to consume with human lives. By making many sacrifices, they could buy time for Yang Jihua and the others. The current weakness of the Qing Immortal Sect comes from the lack of top-level combat power, the Earth Immortal level. As long as this shortfall is made up, then with their vast foundation, even if they cannot win against the combined forces of Taiping Dao and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. But if it¡¯s just defense, to preserve their own territory is no problem at all. ¡°Good, let¡¯s do as you suggest.¡± After listening to the ideas of his many nephews, Song Xiren made his decision, ¡°Spread my command, all the Earth Immortal formations in the front line nations, activate them all. Each country¡¯s Formation Method is to be presided over by the Garrison Immortals. The entire sect shall be divided into two battlefields. One is the western battlefield, to counter those remnants of the Nine Spirits, with myself commanding in person. The other is the southern battlefield, to face Taiping Dao, with Junior Brother Zhang as the Commander. At the same time, nations to the rear must immediately mobilize disciples, ready to support the front line at any moment. And one line back from the two battlefields also needs to be ready to activate Formation Methods and recapture any lost territories at any time.¡± Chapter 1483 - Chapter 1483 Chapter 577 Responses from All Parties_3 ?Chapter 1483: Chapter 577: Responses from All Parties_3 Chapter 1483: Chapter 577: Responses from All Parties_3 In addition, all other branches must immediately open wide their mountain gates and recruit new disciples from among the common folk. Since we plan to trade lives for time, it is destined that there will be heavy losses, and we must have enough lives to fill the gaps. Currently, within our sect, there are only thirty thousand disciples, which is far from enough. Pass my order, recruit another ten thousand disciples. If the numbers are insufficient, the requirements for entry can be relaxed. Those disciples with average aptitude can also be admitted. As long as they can hold off the enemy, we can¡¯t afford to care about anything else. Do you understand?¡± Song Xiren issued numerous decrees in one breath, making detailed arrangements for the war. And those within the hall, also answered in succession: ¡°We obey the order!¡± With the calamity of the sect¡¯s annihilation hanging over their heads, everyone was bound together with the Purple Cloud Sect on the same boat. Whether out of sentiment or self-interest, no one could shirk or retreat any longer. ¡°Nephew Yang, in this war, you do not need to participate for now. Just stay within Changqing Mountain, and commit all your efforts to breaking through to Earth Immortal. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? Our sect here will delay as much as possible for you, to strive for that opportunity. The rise and fall of the sect now rests in your hands. You must break through to Earth Immortal as quickly as possible.¡± Song Xiren¡¯s gaze turned to Yang Jihua and the other two. These few were the Earth Immortal Seeds he had personally selected, and much hope was placed on them. Now they represented the hope of saving the Purple Cloud Sect. The strategic layout of the sect now revolved around these three. ¡°Rest assured, School Leader. We will certainly break through to Earth Immortal and not let down the expectations of the sect.¡± Feeling the weight of many gazes upon him, Yang Jihua felt a heavy burden on his shoulders, a multitude of pressures rushing over him, making him feel almost breathless for a moment. But at this point, it was not something he could escape even if he wanted to. The entire sect was ready to die for them; as the persons in question, no matter how great the pressure, they had to grit their teeth and march forward. ¡°Good!¡± Song Xiren stood up, slapping the table, and looked at everyone, declaring loudly: ¡°Gentlemen, the survival of Changqing lies upon our shoulders. To not let down the high expectations of our ancestors, the foundation laid by our sect¡¯s founders, let us follow me to battle against the enemy!¡± ¡°Willing to die for the sect!¡± ¡°Willing to follow the School Leader into battle!¡± ¡°Let¡¯s fight the enemy with all we¡¯ve got!¡± The crowd below shouted in unison. The massive ship that was the Purple Cloud Sect, with the coming of war, also hastened its advance. ¡­ Leshan Country. As the vanguard post for Taiping Dao to penetrate into the Eastern Territory, an Earth Immortal Array Method was erected here at the very first moment of the war. Thus, when Lu Yuan led his troops to this place, they could directly enter and be stationed within the formation, without the need for additional preparations. Correspondingly, Leshan Country¡¯s adversary, several Eastern Territory countries bordering this area, also shone with Immortal light at the same time. An Earth Immortal formation soared into the sky, blocking the path of the Southern Domain¡¯s great army. Not just here, but also in the Southern Domain near the central region, that is to the north of Jiuchuan and Xiaye countries, the central territory¡¯s Three Nations had likewise established grand formations, sealing off Taiping Dao¡¯s northern thrust. Hence, when Lu Yuan led his troops to the front line, this was the situation he faced. Leshan Country branch. When Lu Yuan led his troops into this country, Taiping Dao¡¯s branch here naturally became requisitioned as the advance command post for the great army. And the first military meeting of the great army was convened here as well. Once everyone had gathered, Lu Yuan commenced this meeting. ¡°Gentlemen, our great army has now reached the front line. In order to stop us, the Purple Cloud Sect has set up two lines of defense. One is right in front of us, to the north of Leshan and Anyang countries, in the Three Eastern Territory countries adjacent to the two countries, where the enemy has established an Earth Immortal formation. According to the intelligence we have now, the person presiding over that formation is another Earth Immortal of the Purple Cloud Sect besides Song Xiren, Zhang Xiuzhu. This person is an Early Earth Immortal, but has been in this realm for about two thousand years, and is estimated to be just a step away from Mid-stage Earth Immortal. We must not underestimate his strength. Besides him, in the three neighboring countries, there are two Human Immortals from the Purple Cloud Sect guarding each, and within the countries, thousands of Cultivators are guarding the Formation Methods. The enemy¡¯s defensive force is not to be underestimated. The other line of defense lies within the central territory¡¯s Three Nations. The central territory itself is adjacent to the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. However, after the last great war, the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate was defeated and a vast territory in the Western Domain was taken by the Purple Cloud Sect. So what was originally a front line closely adjacent to Jiuzhou gradually also became the rear, only bordering our Southern Domain. Therefore, for this Northern Expedition, to break through from the central territory, expecting the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate to cooperate from the side, before they recover their old territory, is impossible now. We have to rely on our own abilities if we want to take this place. In the central territory battlefield, the enemy has similarly set up defenses in each of the nations within the line, with the arrangement of two Human Immortals and a thousand Cultivators per nation. The above are the two battlefields in the Eastern and Central Territories, that we now face.¡± Lu Yuan looked at everyone, slowly explaining the current situation. Then without waiting for everyone to respond, he directly instructed: ¡°Though the enemy is strong, they only have one Earth Immortal and cannot look after two battlefields. So, I, as the School Leader, have decided to personally command the army on the Eastern Territory battlefield, with five Human Immortals under Taiping Dao and ten thousand Cultivators as a flanking force, to restrain the enemy before us. Then, led by Uncle Qing Guanzi and Brother Yi Dancheng, with five True People from Jintai Gate, Bihu Palace, and Xuan Turtle Mountain, and ten thousand disciples from Taiping Dao and the three sects, will act as the main force, attacking the central territory battlefield. The main forces¡¯ tasks are twofold; one is to break through the defenses before us as much as possible. The other is to try and attack Tianmen Country, to attempt to coordinate with Jiuzhou, jointly breaching the Tianmen River defenses, and allowing the two allies¡¯ great armies to become united as one.¡± To the west of the central territory¡¯s Three Nations lies Tianmen River and Tianmen Country. This land was originally belonging to the Ziyun, the location of the other sect¡¯s base. Unfortunately, in the last great war, Jiuzhou was defeated and lost this land to the Purple Cloud Sect. But it also stopped there. Behind Tianmen Country, still within Jiuzhou¡¯s control, lies the Ziyun sect¡¯s new base location. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? So, in theory, Taiping Dao just needs to break through Tianmen Country to connect its territory with Jiuzhou on the front line. The two allied armies can then gather in one place. Accomplishing this would naturally increase the strategic pressure on the Purple Cloud Sect immensely. Lu Yuan¡¯s maneuver struck right at the enemy¡¯s vitals. The once undefeated Jiuzhou Chu Emperor, now in the Immortal Realm, remained undiminished in his brilliance. ¡°Yes, we will follow the order!¡± The assembly of True People below, faced with this issue-free arrangement, all accepted the order accordingly. Chapter 1484 - Chapter 1484 Chapter 578 Intense Battle ?Chapter 1484: Chapter 578 Intense Battle Chapter 1484: Chapter 578 Intense Battle The military strategy had been decided, and the army immediately set out. Qing Guanzi and Yi Dancheng, following the set strategy, immediately led the armies of Jintai Gate, Bihu Palace, and Xuan Turtle Mountain, which were vassals, towards Xiaye Country. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï According to the arrangement, they would launch an attack here in the central domain, trying to break through the frontline defenses while coordinating with allies to open up the Tianmen River basin. It could be said that the Northern Expedition army of Taiping Dao was the most important on this route. Yet, such an important force consisted, besides the two leading Earth Immortal True Persons, mainly of three vassal Immortal Sects. Although the strength of Jintai Gate, Bihu Palace, and Xuan Turtle Mountain was decent, it was clearly a notch below the main force of Taiping Dao. Moreover, the army was made up of several factions, which meant there was discord and hidden agendas, making it difficult to unite their efforts. No matter how one looked at it, the composition of this army was not reasonable. The decision for such an arrangement was certainly not because Lu Yuan was out of his mind or deliberately creating a trap; there clearly was a deeper meaning. If forced to explain, to an outsider, it seemed like Taiping Dao was deliberately using up its vassals. Yes, it was consuming its vassals. Jintai Gate, Bihu Palace, and Xuan Turtle Mountain, with their current strength, had five True Persons and six thousand cultivators. This massive power, not considering the Earth Immortals, was already equivalent to one-third of Taiping Dao¡¯s regular forces. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.?¦Ï As the boss, it was impossible for Taiping Dao not to be worried about vassals becoming so powerful. Moreover, these three ¡°younger brothers¡± controlled the three nations of the Southern Domain, with territories nearly half the size of Taiping Dao¡¯s, which was a significant chunk of interest. Power attracts jealousy, and interests tempt hearts. The overwhelming strength of the three Immortal Sects, combined with significant interests, had inevitably led Taiping Dao to envy and guard against them. Thus, deploying them to the central domain battlefield as the main force, and slowly wearing down the three vassals through fierce battles, where they would all die, was an excellent method of boiling frogs in warm water. This wasn¡¯t even baseless speculation; there were precedents to follow. More than a thousand years ago, during the decisive battle between Qing Immortal Sect and the Nine Provinces, Qing Immortal Sect had used this method to gradually reduce its nine vassals on the battlefield. Then, as soon as the war ended, they immediately started to annex those nine Immortal Sects. The two nations, Leshan and Anyang, which Lu Yuan currently occupied, had been forcibly obtained through diplomatic negotiations from Qing Immortal Sect. The original masters of these two countries, Red Creek Valley and Flying Mist Mountain Sects, had long vanished into the river of history. Over a thousand years had passed, and no one atop these two nations remembered the names of those sects. With such a bloody example before them, especially as vassals within Changqing Domain where, apart from Taiping Dao, Qing Immortal Sect, and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, only these three small Immortal Sects existed. Jintai Gate, Bihu Palace, and Xuan Turtle Mountain couldn¡¯t help feeling anxious. Nor could outsiders help speculating upon seeing such arrangements. However, because of this, Qing Immortal Sect, in view of the central domain battlefield where the Taiping Dao army was deployed, became very cautious. There was no way around it; they were clearly coming to expend cannon fodder. Since their forces consisted of vassals, they wouldn¡¯t feel distressed and could afford to expend them mercilessly. Moreover, the more disciples from the three sects died, the happier they would be. And the more deaths there were, the more intense the war would become. Regarding the casualties of the attacking side, except for the people from Jintai Gate, Bihu Palace, and Xuan Turtle Mountain, no one cared. But for the defending side, which was the Qing Immortal Sect, they were all their own people. The more deaths on the battlefield, the more it meant weakening their own power, and they couldn¡¯t help but proceed with caution. Hence, after the news that Taiping Dao had split into two groups spread and the enemy¡¯s arrangements were learned through spies placed inside, Zhang Xiuzhu, the Commander of the southern defense line of Qing Immortal Sect, immediately rushed to the central domain battlefield to personally resist this Taiping Dao force. As for the enemy force led by Lu Yuan, they had no choice but to leave it to the local branch to defend, commanding their disciples to defend staunchly. Lacking a peer Earth Immortal to lead, resisting an attack by an Earth Immortal was bound to be difficult, with heavy casualties. Even with the backing of an Earth Immortal formation, the Eastern Territory frontline wouldn¡¯t last long; perhaps in just three to five years, the enemy would break through the formation. But there was no choice; lacking enough top-level combat strength, Qing Immortal Sect could only grit its teeth and hold on, using heavy casualties and territory to slowly buy time. After mobilization, Qing Immortal Sect was ready to bear these costs. By now, Zhang Xiuzhu could only trust the determination of the younger generations. After all, compared to the Eastern Domain, the central domain battlefield he was in was more critical. Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate alone brought so much pressure to Qing Immortal Sect. Now, in their resistance, they could only fight with all their might, holding on desperately. In doing so, they could just manage to maintain the battle line without a total collapse. But achieving this was already their limit. If Taiping Dao managed to break through the Tianmen River basin and connect their army with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, then they really wouldn¡¯t need to fight anymore. Chapter 1485 - Chapter 1485 Chapter 578 Intense Battle_2 ?Chapter 1485: Chapter 578 Intense Battle_2 Chapter 1485: Chapter 578 Intense Battle_2 Facing the confluence of two large armies, the enemy could gather more troops and form a force far surpassing the Qing Immortal Sect at one battlefield, aiming for a direct breakthrough. The Qing Immortal Sect faced this force without any possibility of resistance. And without the ability to hinder them, the outcome of this great war was also directly determined. Therefore, this situation absolutely could not occur. The Tianmen River area could not suffer any loss. Zhang Xiuzhu had to block Taiping Dao and prevent them from converging with the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. For this, even if the entire central defense line was lost, it was a sacrifice worth making. If the three nations of the central region were lost, at the rear, Qing Immortal Sect still had more territories and could form more defensive lines at any time. But if Tianmen River was lost, then all was lost. Which mattered more was very clear in Zhang Xiuzhu¡¯s heart. Thus, when Lu Yuan¡¯s strategy was made public, Qing Guanzi and the two avatars of Yidancheng, leading a group of distressed and apprehensive subordinate cultivators, attacked the central battlefield. The Qing Immortal Sect also immediately mobilized heavy troops, with the Commander himself reaching the front lines in the central region to start a direct confrontation. Even Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, upon hearing the strategy of Taiping Dao, surprisingly made some coordination. After communicating with Lu Yuan and receiving an affirmative response from his end, Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï In an instant, armies from three sides gathered at Tianmen River, and the Northern Expedition war ignited its first battle there. However, regarding this battlefield¡¯s situation, Lu Yuan, after delegating the main forces, let the two avatars act on their own without paying much attention. His focus, unlike what outsiders speculated, was not primarily on converging with Jiuzhou. Contrary to what others thought, the current battlefield in the Eastern Territory was his main target. ¡­ Leshan Country. As Qing Guanzi¡¯s army moved, Lu Yuan¡¯s side certainly did not remain idle. He had dispatched all five of his Taiping Dao Human Immortals, each commanding two thousand cultivators, and then let them lead these disciples to the front line, waiting for opportunities to attack the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s defenses. Undoubtedly, such an arrangement naturally allowed his subordinates to slack off. Without upper-level supervision, it was difficult for those below to sincerely launch attacks. The opposing defensive line was not easy to break. An Earth Immortal formation in each nation, defended by a Human Immortal and two thousand cultivators. Though there were no Earth Immortals, even so, such combat power wasn¡¯t something ordinary people could tackle easily. Lu Yuan not taking action himself and letting Human Immortals lead disciples in attack meant they could fight for a hundred years and probably still not break through the enemy¡¯s defense. Clearly, This move was interpreted as deliberately holding back by others, as Taiping Dao intentionally preserving strength to avoid exhausting their core forces. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Therefore, facing the attacking disciples of Taiping Dao, the disciples of Qing Immortal Sect also did not go all out. Both sides cooperated, engaging in fierce battles that would cause mountains to collapse and heaven and earth to lose color. But upon closer inspection, there were not many casualties. Even though it was a major battle involving thousands of cultivators, only about ten to a few dozen died each day, which was minimal casualties. Compared to the last battle Qing Immortal Sect had with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, where the attackers would lose hundreds each time they penetrated deep into enemy lines, Sometimes, even Human Immortals would fall. Compared to that, the battle in Leshan Country was like child¡¯s play. It indeed was child¡¯s play. Just looking at the commanders of the five forces Lu Yuan assigned this time would tell. Not to mention Yang Xiuan whose roots lay in Jiuzhou. But Yu Shipei and the other three Human Immortals, except for one who was a direct disciple cultivated by Taiping Dao, the rest all had backgrounds connected to Qing. These people all had murky relations with Qing Immortal Sect, and it could even be established that they were spies planted by Qing Immortal Sect within Taiping Dao, with highly questionable identities. With three such individuals placed in commanding roles in the five forces, if they were to fight fiercely, that would be surprising. The defending generals of Qing Immortal Sect, clearly aware of this, Facing their own planted spies, obviously held back, and both sides cooperated, idly going through the motions. This was also quite normal. War meant death, especially a war between cultivators, where poor control could lead to the complete destruction of one¡¯s divine soul, a fate worse than death. With such high risk and low reward, any sane person would dislike it. Moreover, with this conduct, the higher-ups of both sects, be it Zhang Xiuzhu of Qing Immortal Sect or Lu Yuan of Taiping Dao, neither imposed any penalties. Both also tacitly chose to turn a blind eye. Thus, there was no penalty for slacking off. The cultivators on the front line openly and unapologetically slacked off without any concerns. Overall, with the tacit cooperation of both sides, the entire Eastern Territory battle zone became a performative joke in the eyes of outsiders. Regarding this, Jiuzhou was extremely dissatisfied, having sent several communiqu??s asking this side to hasten the attack speed. During this time, Jiuzhou¡¯s advancement speed in the northern front of the Western Domain was not looking good. Although Jiuzhou gathered a large number of troops and possessed strong strength, being comparable to Qing Immortal Sect and ranking second in similar grand battles, it could almost be said they had given it their all. Chapter 1486 - Chapter 1486 Chapter 578 Tense Battle_3 ?Chapter 1486: Chapter 578 Tense Battle_3 Chapter 1486: Chapter 578 Tense Battle_3 ¡°` However, faced with this powerful threat, Song Xiren had indeed risked his life. Within just a few months of battle at the front line, each side had deployed over ten thousand troops in the Northwestern battlefield of the Western Domain, including more than twenty Human Immortals risking their lives in fierce combat. It could be said that the battlefield over there was anxious from the moment the battle started, with both sides fighting fiercely until their eyes turned red. Even Song Xiren, was forced by three Earth Immortals from Nine Provinces, to personally step onto the battlefield and exhaust all of his sect¡¯s resources. He even resorted to using several Life-Burning Secret Techniques, just barely blocking the experts of the same level. Yet even so, it was hard to disguise the declining momentum. Having fought for half a year, according to messages from the front line, Nine Provinces had already suffered over two thousand cultivator casualties, and a True Immortal had also fallen. Ding Wanxuan, the leader of Nine Provinces, even incurred some minor injuries. The losses for Nine Provinces were indeed heavy. But correspondingly, for the Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s side, there were over a thousand casualties, and two Human Immortals were seriously injured, expected not to recover for several decades. At first glance, this seemed a lot lighter compared to the losses of Nine Provinces. But don¡¯t forget, this was under the defensive advantage of Changqing Immortal Sect, protected by a grand formation. Normally, with grand formation protection, especially an Earth Immortal formation, the casualties of the defenders are typically only a fourth or a fifth of the attacking side, or in the worst case, one-third. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Now, the casualty ratio between the two sides had become half, clearly indicating the immense pressure on the defending side. This was not the end yet. As the main pillar against the enemy¡¯s top experts, Song Xiren, because he had used too many secret techniques, had likely shortened his lifespan by at least a hundred years, further exacerbating his already limited lifespan. Even the defensive lines of Changqing Immortal Sect had been pushed back significantly, losing nearly a third of a small country¡¯s territory. Fortunately, the Changqing Immortal Sect had a vast territory, profound heritage, and abundant resources. As soon as the front line lost its defenses, reinforcements from the rear filled the gaps. The formations prepared at the rear were reconnected with those lost at the front line, reestablishing a complete Earth Immortal formation that appeared once again before the Nine Provinces¡¯ army. By such means, Changqing Immortal Sect barely maintained their battle lines. But clearly. As Nine Provinces continued to attack, waiting for Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s disciples to die with no timely replacements, Or if Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s northern territory was lost, unable to rebuild formations from the rear, Or if Song Xiren¡¯s lifespan was entirely consumed, no longer able to withstand three opponents of equal calibre. Any of these three weaknesses, if breached, would lead Changqing Immortal Sect to face defeat. It could be said, compared to Lu Yuan casually participating in the Eastern Territory battlefield, the Northwestern battlefield in the Western Domain exhibited fiercely aggressive and unstoppable tactics. But despite the impressive battle achievements, all of this was achieved at the cost of human lives. With the entire Nine Provinces uniting, though the force was strong, after removing Taiping Dao and Radiant Immortal Dynasty, the territory of the remaining eight sects only amounted to barely twenty countries. This small territory, no matter how much they exploited their soldiers and waged war, could at most support forty thousand cultivators. In reality, apart from the Nine Provinces Immortal Gate in the Changqing Domain, other Immortal Sects outside the domain were unlikely to devote all their resources to training ordinary disciples. Therefore, the total number of disciples from the other eight Immortal Sects was now only around thirty thousand two hundred people. These disciples could not all be deployed in the war; like the Heavenly River Sect and Wind and Thunder Path and other Immortal Sects outside the domain needed people to maintain order and defend their territories. Summing it up, this time, the Nine Provinces United Army was able to gather twenty thousand cultivators, straining their limits to possibly squeeze out another five thousand reinforcements. Then they could do no more; any more, and they wouldn¡¯t be able to defend their own strongholds. Having compiled these statistics, it should be recognized that the war potential of Nine Provinces was limited. Once these potentials were exhausted, the attack could no longer proceed. Now that the war had barely lasted half a year, Nine Provinces Immortal Gate had already lost more than two thousand cultivators and a Human Immortal, which was almost a tenth of their regular forces. Yet this had happened in less than a year. While the current battle achievements look impressive and the fighting exhilarating, all of this was bought with human lives. When human lives were insufficient to sustain this, such powerful attacks would naturally have to stop due to a lack of sustainability. Not to mention, Nine Provinces actually couldn¡¯t afford such severe losses either. Thus, when the opponents turned around and saw their own side fighting to the death while their allies were merely spectating from a distance, could their hearts not be angered? Right now, they are just sternly demanding, but if Lu Yuan continues to delay, the other side might just give up and even straightforwardly retreat their troops. Seeing this situation, Lu Yuan could no longer afford to delay. Although planning to initially wear down Nine Provinces to reduce their future competitive edge against him, obviously, the other side was not foolish. Upon realizing Taiping Dao¡¯s intentions, Nine Provinces had already started to fight back. Continuing this matter would not just be attritional but might irreversibly offend them, turning them from allies into sworn enemies. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Left with no choice, Lu Yuan had to forcefully order that the two battlefields in the Central and Eastern Territories immediately launch fierce attacks on their current enemies. Any negligence would be met with execution. Once orders were issued and after making an example by executing some traitors, even Taiping Dao felt the pressure. Under such compulsory orders, the intensity on the two battlefields surged instantly. Even spies bought by Changqing Immortal Sect didn¡¯t dare to slack off or go easy on the battlefield. Battlefields are ruthless. If you dare to go easy here, the other side certainly will not. Holding back means handing one¡¯s life over to the enemy. On the battlefield, spies also didn¡¯t dare to do such things. Under the pressure from allies and high-order sect officials, the intensity of the war between Taiping Dao and Changqing Immortal Sect quickly escalated to a critical state. Consequently, all battle lines of Changqing Immortal Sect began to face emergencies globally. After Lu Yuan took matters seriously, a slight unveil of Taiping Dao¡¯s heritage made the enemy feel somewhat overwhelmed. ¡°` Chapter 1487 - Chapter 1487 Chapter 579 The Depletion of Troops ?Chapter 1487: Chapter 579: The Depletion of Troops Chapter 1487: Chapter 579: The Depletion of Troops Eastern Territory front line. A sword light traveled southward, invoking the azure and yellow energies of heaven and earth, with a vast and domineering will, pounding heavily onto the green formation ahead. The formation resisted the sword light with all its might but eventually failed to hold, torn open by a gap. ¡°Follow me and kill!¡± Lu Yuan roared to the sky and charged forward, leading his soldiers with sword light racing, heading straight into the formation. Behind him, three immortal lights trailed, leading thousands of fleeing lights, following him into the fray. Humming sounds filled the air! Lu Yuan wielded the Taiping Immortal Sword in his hand, from which thousands of sword energies flew out, rampaging within the formation, destroying everything in their path. In the blink of an eye, dozens of Changqing disciples who couldn¡¯t escape were affected by the sword energy and lost their lives in an instant. ¡°Taiping seize, cease your arrogance!¡± Far away, a True Person from the Changqing Immortal Sect, in charge of the formation, saw the scene of his disciples being slaughtered indiscriminately; his face turned red with rage, and fire seemed to burst from his eyes. With an angry roar, the power of the surrounding formation gathered towards him, instantly boosting his cultivation to the level of an Earth Immortal. The Earth Immortal formation, renowned for standing against Earth Immortals, was naturally extraordinary. This method of using the power of the formation to enhance oneself and thereby increase combat power was one of the finesse uses of the Earth Immortal formation. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? With a temporary increase in strength, the True Person from the Changqing sect found himself eligible to clash with Lu Yuan. However, it was quite obvious. How could this borrowed strength compare to the magic power someone had earnestly cultivated? After no more than a hundred exchanges, having used dozens of Divine Powers, the Changqing True Person soon found it difficult to keep up. The magic power in his body was disrupted by his opponent, and the realm temporarily attained through the formation also began to slowly dissipate due to continuous damage to the formation. This Human Immortal struggled to control the Earth Immortal Power, comparable to that of an Earth Immortal, due to insufficient cultivation. ?0¦Í?0.?¦Ï His magic power was wasted in the clash because he could not restrain it. ¡°Two Senior Brothers, aid me!¡± Seeing a crisis approaching, the Changqing True Person, fear flashing in his eyes, couldn¡¯t help but shout loudly. ¡°Do not panic, brother, your Senior Brother is here!¡± ¡°School Leader Lu, take this move!¡± At this moment, at two places in the formation where Immortals from Two Countries were stationed, the Garrison Immortals of Changqing, having slightly dealt with some invading disciples of Taiping Dao, also hurried over to join their Junior Brother against the enemy. Instantly, three more temporary Earthly Immortal Combat Powers appeared on the scene, placing Lu Yuan in a three-to-one predicament. ¡°Haha, this is wonderful! As if I would fear you!¡± Lu Yuan laughed heartily at this development and once again charged forward, sword in hand. He was already at the mid-stage Earth Immortal cultivation; dealing with three who barely possessed Earth Immortal Power thanks to the formation method was no cause for fear. It wasn¡¯t just him; even the Avatars of Qing Guanzi, though their power as avatars was substandard, were still differentiated by various levels of hierarchy. Obviously. The Dao Fruit Immortal Artifacts of the avatars were much stronger than these formation-based Earth Immortals, who lacked even Dao Fruit. If the avatars could dominate these lesser foes, for Lu Yuan, it was even easier. Forget fighting one against three; he could defeat a succession of Immortals with ease. However, Lu Yuan did not intend to breach the defenses of the Qing Immortal Sect so quickly, as breaking through the Eastern Territory¡¯s defenses did not benefit him at this time. Therefore, when exchanging blows with the three controllers from the Changqing Immortal Sect, he consciously held back and did not go all out. He merely kept his display of magic power and divine powers to the level just above that of a newly advanced Earth Immortal, just enough to match the three substandard Earth Immortals. This way, to outsiders, it appeared as if he and the three formation-based Earth Immortals were evenly matched, exchanging blows back and forth. After about an hour of fighting, estimating that the opponents could not hold out much longer. Lu Yuan flicked his Immortal Sword, repelling the three in front of him, then sheathed his sword and said to his opponents, ¡°Today¡¯s fight has been exhilarating, but the day grows late, and we should return for our evening practices. Let us cease battle for now. We shall continue another day.¡± Saying that, he didn¡¯t continue to attack but kept a vigilant watch on the three in front of him to prevent any sneak attacks. However, the three True Persons from the Changqing Immortal Sect were indeed at the end of their tether. If the fight continued, they would be drained of their Divine Powers and would no longer be able to control the force of the formation. At that point, even without Lu Yuan to fight, the backlash from the formation alone could take their lives. Hearing Lu Yuan offering to cease battle, the three truly breathed a sigh of relief in their hearts, unable to continue the fight. While they were inwardly thankful for their luck, they kept up a tough exterior and replied, ¡°We¡¯ll let you go for today. You go and recover your magic power, so no outsider can say we took advantage of you with our numbers. If you wish to fight another day, then come; we will accept the challenge.¡± Lu Yuan looked at the three still putting on a tough front and found it somewhat amusing but did not expose them, instead, he nodded solemnly, seeming very agreeable. Both sides stood off for a moment, then, seeing that most of the Taiping Dao disciples who had entered with him had nearly all withdrawn. He didn¡¯t insist on staying longer, waved his sleeve, and said, ¡°My fellow Daoists, we shall part ways for now!¡± With those words, he turned into a sword light, disappearing into the horizon and leaving the formation. Once Lu Yuan was gone, the expressions of the three staunch Changqing True Persons collapsed in an instant, turning somber. Chapter 1488 - Chapter 1488 Chapter 579 Depleted Forces_2 ?Chapter 1488: Chapter 579 Depleted Forces_2 Chapter 1488: Chapter 579 Depleted Forces_2 ¡°Senior Brother, Lu Yuan¡¯s sword skills have become increasingly formidable in recent days. I¡¯m afraid he¡¯s treating us as whetstones for honing his own swordsmanship, with all of us serving merely as his foils.¡± ¡°I have noticed this as well, but given the current situation, the fact that the enemy is willing to treat us as whetstones is already good news. Haven¡¯t you realized that every time we face off against him, Lu Yuan always holds back and never gives his all, leaving a sense of unfinished business. If he truly gave it his all, I fear that even with the aid of formations, we wouldn¡¯t be able to withstand him. Now he wants to use us to sharpen his sword skills, which is why he hasn¡¯t immediately broken through the great formation, allowing us to hold out a bit longer on the front line without suffering an immediate defeat. Although it is somewhat frustrating for us, this is a favorable situation.¡± ¡°I¡¯m afraid that Lu Yuan not only wants to use us as whetstones but also wishes to wear down the Nine Spirits remnants using our Qing Immortal Sect. After all, compared to our sect and those Nine Spirits remnants, Taiping Dao may have three Earth Immortals, but they still fall short compared to us, hmph. Both our sect and the Nine Spirits remnants have Mid-stage Earth Immortals among us, while the three Earth Immortals of Taiping Dao are only at the early stage. Among the Earthly Immortal Combat Power, Taiping Dao is the weakest. Without addressing this weakness, even if those traitors win this battle, they would have to yield most of the spoils to the two Earth Immortals of the Nine Spirits remnants. Without weakening us and the Nine Spirits remnants, even if Taiping Dao were to break through our defensive line, what other benefits would there be aside from drawing our sect¡¯s main force over and engaging in a fight to the death with them? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï They are probably waiting for the School Leader on that side to decide the fate of those Nine Spirits remnants. As long as the School Leader can take down one Mid-stage Earth Immortal from the Nine Spirits remnants, an immediate power balance could be achieved between Taiping Dao and the Nine Spirits remnants. If they manage to take down two Earth Immortals from the Nine Spirits remnants, then Taiping Dao would lead the alliance in the future. With such an opportunity before them, it¡¯s no surprise that Taiping Dao is tempted.¡± Among the three, the eldest True Person coldly snorted. Now, it has been the tenth year since the three sects began the war. Over these years, each Immortal Sect has deployed substantial forces to the front-line battlefields, with all fighting fiercely. Take, for example, this Eastern Territory¡¯s battle zone. Over the course of ten years, Taiping Dao has deployed fifteen thousand disciples to the front line, with a direct casualty count of five thousand. And not just ordinary disciples. Even two Human Immortals from Taiping Dao have died here in the past two years. It¡¯s unclear whether it was intentional targeting or mere coincidence; the two Human Immortals who died from Taiping Dao happened to be Yu Shipei and another True Person with a Changqing background. Those two True Persons from Changqing Immortal Sect, whom we cultivated with great effort and at a considerable cost, weren¡¯t able to contribute much in return before they were consumed by the cruel war. Why did Lu Yuan not care about these spies back then? Simply because he knew that once the war broke out, life and death would not be in one¡¯s own hands. A Military Order issued, and those who dared to disobey would be executed on the spot. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï Those who didn¡¯t dare defy would obediently follow orders and then continuously rush to the most bitter, tiresome, and dangerous battlefields. Treating these people as beasts of burden and using them a few times would nearly finish them off. Spies like Yu Shipei were slowly eradicated by such means. Not only did they fail to cause significant damage to Taiping Dao, but they also used their own lives to fight for the sect and established outstanding military achievements. Over ten years, Taiping Dao in the Eastern Territory suffered not only the loss of five thousand disciples and two True Persons but also secured the land of a nation, further expanding their territory to the north. Now in the Eastern Territory, Taiping Dao has occupied the lands of three nations, with a third of the Eastern Territory under Lu Yuan¡¯s control. As a result of this, The Earth Immortal Array Method of Taiping Dao was directly constructed within the Eastern Territory, completely separating from the rear Southern Domain and moving the entire battlefield to the front line. These were the gains from ten years of fierce struggle. Not just in the Eastern Territory but also on the central battlefield, avatars like Qing Guanzi reaped immense rewards. Without accounting for the casualties of vassals, Qing Guanzi and Yi Dancheng treated disciples from Jintai Gate, Bihu Palace, and Xuan Turtle Mountain as mere cannon fodder. At any sign of danger, they would drive the disciples from the three sects to the front. With the Human Immortals being True Persons of the three sects, the commanding generals could only be Ouyang Yuan, Zhu Zhenghe, and others. Every time they stormed the great formation in the central region, Qing Guanzi and Yi Dancheng, as Earth Immortals and both avatars of Lu Yuan with a tacit understanding, worked seamlessly together, naturally facing little risk. Facing Zhang Xiuzhu, who had amplified his Strength to Mid-stage Earth Immortal with the Formation Method, even if they were not a match, they could retreat unscathed after a fight. But for people from the three sects like Ouyang Yuan, when confronted with the furious Changqing disciples full of hatred, luck wasn¡¯t on their side. Over ten years, they fought in the central region more than a hundred times. Nearly every month, they would launch an attack on the opponent¡¯s defensive array. After numerous battles, almost all of the Cultivators from the three vassal sects of Taiping Dao were wiped out. From the initial five thousand vassal disciples sent to the front line, less than three hundred remained alive. Only two True Persons from the three sects survived to this day. Ouyang Yuan and a young True Person from Bihu Palace, Qiu Mingzheng. As for another newly ascended True Person from Jintai Gate, and the School Leader of Xuan Turtle Mountain, Zhu Zhenghe, as well as the old School Leader from Bihu Palacea€¡±all had died on the battlefield. Chapter 1489 - Chapter 1489 Chapter 579 Depleted Forces_3 ?Chapter 1489: Chapter 579: Depleted Forces_3 Chapter 1489: Chapter 579: Depleted Forces_3 ¡°` Not just those vassals. Even the direct disciples of Taiping Dao, over these years, had lost two thousand in the Central Territory battlefield. Even Qing Guanzi and Yi Dancheng, due to constant combat, had suffered some minor injuries and were not at their peak. It can be said. On the two battlefields of the Eastern and Central Territories, Taiping Dao had truly exerted its fullest efforts, and they were not slothful. The death of twelve thousand cultivators, along with five True Persons, served as the best evidence. Such casualties, even in the previous grand battle between the Nine Provinces Immortal Gate and the Qing Immortal Sect, were no less severe. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Bear in mind, it had only been ten years since the fighting started. To have such heavy casualties in just ten years, it was hard to imagine what the scene would look like if the war were to drag on for several more decades, or even a century, until the final stages of battle. It seems that all three fighting parties would not be able to withstand it. In truth, Taiping Dao was already beginning to struggle to cope. Originally, Lu Yuan only had ten Human Immortals at his disposal. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Now, with half of them dead, only five Human Immortals remained on the front lines, making the True Persons leading the troops increasingly scarce. The scarcity of True Person commanders reflected on the battlefield, with Taiping Dao¡¯s assaults becoming weaker and weaker. Each breakthrough on the battlefield grew smaller and smaller. Gradually, it became somewhat unmanageable. Therefore, after capturing one country in the Eastern Territory and another in the Central Territory, Lu Yuan slowly had to slow down the pace of his attacks. He could no longer attack as aggressively as in the early stage. And for this move by Taiping Dao, even if it was seen by the Nine Provinces side, they couldn¡¯t really comment. After all, Taiping Dao was still a newly established sect, and their foundational strength was indeed weaker. Now that so many had died, it was too inconsiderate not to allow them some time to recuperate. Precisely because of this point, there had been the previously mentioned scene, where Lu Yuan and the three Formation Master holders of the Qing Immortal Sect sparred peacefully, each holding back in their strikes. It wasn¡¯t that neither side wanted to fight, but rather that both were struggling to do so. Taiping Dao had suffered heavy casualties, and as the defending side, Qing Immortal Sect had also suffered significant losses. Over these years, during their confrontations with Taiping Dao, they had lost five thousand disciples and two Human Immortals. In their battles against the Nine Provinces Immortal Gate, they had also lost six thousand disciples and three Human Immortals. The Nine Provinces Immortal Gate had suffered a total loss of ten thousand cultivators and five Human Immortals. It can be said, all three sides were somewhat unable to continue fighting. Now, on the various battlefields, all three sides consciously relaxed their offensive pace and began a brief period of recuperation. The Nine Provinces Immortal Gate had already started urgently rallying disciples from the rear, with a new batch of five thousand reinforcements hurrying towards the front lines. However, even with this new batch of reinforcements arriving, the forces of the Nine Provinces on the front lines would only number fifteen thousand. A fair bit reduced compared to the peak of twenty thousand when the war began. Simultaneously, the number of Human Immortals remained only at ten. While there were no losses among the Earth Immortals, after fighting for ten years, facing off against the desperately fighting Song Xiren, the weakest cultivator of Heavenly River Sect, Huang Yuanxiu, was gravely injured in one battle. He was currently severely wounded, his strength merely forty or fifty percent of his full capability, and he had to retire to closed-door cultivation at the rear, temporarily unable to participate in the battle. Facing such circumstances, the eight Immortal Sects of the Nine Provinces had no choice but to urgently recruit disciples across their territories. According to the messages passed down, they were expected, within three years, to urgently recruit ten thousand newcomers to the sect. And in every subsequent year, they would maintain the pace of recruiting three thousand new disciples. Besides this. They also selected fifteen direct disciples with sufficient cultivation and exceptional contributions from the front lines, arranging for them to return to the rear, to begin their breakthrough to the True Immortal realm. For Zhen Xuan, an Earth Immortal Seed, special arrangements were made within the Nine Provinces, assigning five countries¡¯ resources to him, to aid in his achievement of Earth Immortal. Out of the Twenty-one countries of the Nine Provinces Immortal Gate, aside from the recently conquered territory on the front lines which couldn¡¯t provide resources during the war period. Each of the remaining original countries was filled with people, almost all resources being exploited. Clearly, the dire state of losing five Human Immortals on the front lines in ten years had alarmed the Nine Provinces Immortal Gate. Whether for the sake of heritage or to replenish the high-level military strength on the front line, they were forced to find ways to compensate for their loss of strength. To grow while at war was the reluctant choice they made. Not just them, the Qing Immortal Sect was also desperately recovering its strength. The Qing Immortal Sect originally had thirty thousand veteran disciples, but now, eleven thousand of them had perished, with five Human Immortals lost, just like the other two sects. Such a loss, even with the size of the Qing Immortal Sect, was gradually becoming too much to bear. Fortunately, before the war began, Song Xiren had urgently ordered the sect to recruit ten thousand new young disciples to replenish the front line losses. Now, ten years later, these ten thousand newcomers had entered cultivation, reaching the realm of Gathering One Qi. Though this realm was merely the entry to the Immortal Path and not very useful, That was only for now. Given another hundred years, under no-cost-spared growth acceleration, most could reach Gathering Three Qi, and by then, they could be used on the front line. Even at the extreme, they didn¡¯t need to reach Gathering Three Qia€¡±if they achieved the cultivation of Gathering Two Qi and were stacked in numbers, they could still be put to use. At the very least, they could maintain the operation of the great formations. And as long as they could manage this, it was enough for the Qing Immortal Sect. Thus, facing the current shortage of troops, after taking a breath, Song Xiren once again issued a decree, ordering the twenty countries still under their control to immediately begin recruiting new disciples. In the future, they planned to consistently add new forces to the sect at the budget of five thousand new disciples each year. He no longer wished for the ability to fully nurture these new disciples. He just sought to cultivate as many usable individuals as possible in the shortest time. Even if it was merely reaching Gathering Two Qi. The attrition of this war was far greater than imagined. The demand for cannon fodder was also increasing day by day. For this reason, the Qing Immortal Sect, in order to survive, had no choice but to adapt and lower their recruitment standards for new disciples repeatedly. ¡°` Chapter 1490 - Chapter 1490: Chapter 580: Waiting for the Enemy to Die Chapter 1490: Chapter 580: Waiting for the Enemy to Die ¡°Mindlessly recruiting new disciples is just a temporary solution to the basic troop shortage,¡± ¡°Even that relief isn¡¯t immediate; it requires a process.¡± ¡°Even for training the most basic fodder troops who gather two levels of energy, it takes a process to elevate their cultivation with a massive infusion of resources and various secret methods after a new disciple is initiated.¡± ¡°At the fastest speed, from start to finish, it also takes thirty to forty years to see any effect.¡± ¡°So no matter if it¡¯s the ten thousand new disciples recruited before or the five thousand new disciples recruited every year now, to make them useful, we still have to wait at least another twenty years.¡± ¡°For the Changqing Immortal Sect, twenty years is a long time indeed.¡± ¡°In times of war, every minute and second are worth fighting for.¡± ¡°One slow step could very well mean a crushing defeat.¡± ¡°That¡¯s why Song Xiren can only hope that the nineteen thousand veteran disciples remaining under his command can hold on for another twenty years until the next batch of new disciples are ready to be of use.¡± ¡°In this way, with a continuous stream of newcomers, the Changqing Immortal Sect could just barely ensure a supply of troops, avoiding a shortage of available soldiers.¡± ¡°In order to overcome this difficult shortage of troops, Song Xiren had no choice but to desperately find new strength from other areas, to fill the gap left by the lack of basic troop strength.¡± ¡°The only solution was naturally to consider the Human Immortals.¡± ¡°To be frank, although the Changqing Immortal Sect lacked in various ways among the lower and middle-level cultivators as well as among the top Earth Immortals,¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï ¡°It led to many serious losses after the war began.¡± ¡°But in the higher echelons of Human Immortals, the Changqing Immortal Sect was the most confident among the three Immortal Sects.¡± ¡°It couldn¡¯t be helped, who asked their number of Human Immortals, even before the war started, to have already reached twenty-two?¡± ¡°Such a number was directly the first among the three.¡± ¡°This also meant that every time a Human Immortal perished on the front line, the Changqing Immortal Sect was able to fill the vacancy immediately, ensuring the front lines never faced a scarcity of Human Immortals.¡± ¡°Having fought for ten years, facing fierce attacks from two sects, the Changqing Immortal Sect only lost territory in three countries but still managed to maintain the overall stability of its defense lines.¡± ¡°The valiant struggles of these high-ranking Human Immortals are undoubtedly contributions that cannot be ignored.¡± ¡°However, no matter how many Human Immortals there are, there will always be a shortage after continuous losses.¡± ¡°As of today, the Changqing Immortal Sect has already lost five Human Immortals, and the number within the sect has decreased to seventeen.¡± ¡°And among these seventeen, three¨Csuch as Yang Jihua¨Cwho stayed behind and are fully committed to striving for the Earth Immortal Realm, must be subtracted.¡± ¡°So the Changqing Immortal Sect on the front line, in reality, only has fourteen Human Immortals left.¡± ¡°And these fourteen have to take care of four battlefronts in the Eastern Territory, Central Territory, Northwestern Western Domain, and Eastern Western Domain.¡± ¡°According to the standard of one Earth Immortal formation per battlefront, with three Human Immortals per formation, just the four formations alone would require twelve Human Immortals.¡± ¡°Leaving only two to spare.¡± ¡°Because of the scarcity of Human Immortals, in recent years, on the battlefield in some less critical zones, the Changqing Immortal Sect has already given up on the rigid stipulation of having two Human Immortals per country.¡± ¡°Places such as the Eastern Territory and Central Territory, managed by Taiping Dao, have already reduced their formations to three Human Immortals each.¡± ¡°Only the Northwestern Western Domain frontline, which Song Xiren is responsible for and faces fierce attacks from three Earth Immortals from the Nine Provinces, does one insist on two Human Immortals per country, six Human Immortals per formation.¡± ¡°It¡¯s strictly by stacking human lives that have blocked the three Earth Immortals.¡± ¡°And precisely because the Changqing Immortal Sect has gathered the most strength here, with all formations operating at full capacity, their strength is far greater than in the other areas.¡± ¡°So although the Nine Provinces launched the most violent offensives on the Northwestern Western Domain battlefield and gathered the greatest force,¡± ¡°Faced with the steadfast defense of the Changqing Immortal Sect and Song Xiren¡¯s continuous desperate efforts, the gains here were lesser than Taiping Dao¡¯s.¡± ¡°For the entire duration of the war, they¡¯ve only taken over one country¡¯s land, which can be seen as Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s retaliation against their archnemesis.¡± ¡°I¡¯d rather cede territory to Taiping Dao than to you, my mortal enemy.¡± ¡°But now, even if the Changqing Immortal Sect wanted to stack up lives, it¡¯s somewhat difficult to do so at this point.¡± ¡°After all, without people, even if you want to stack them, you can¡¯t find anyone.¡± ¡°So increasing the number of Human Immortals is already a matter of utmost urgency.¡± ¡°Regarding this, just like the Nine Provinces, aside from Zhen Xuan and a few others who didn¡¯t touch the nine countries they needed to break through to Earth Immortal,¡± ¡°The Changqing Immortal Sect also selected eleven disciples and arranged for them in the remaining eleven countries, letting them aim for the Human Immortal Realm.¡± ¡°When these people break through successfully, even if only half succeed, it will greatly alleviate the current scarcity of Human Immortals that the Changqing Immortal Sect faces.¡± ¡°The Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and the Changqing Immortal Sect, both are using this intermission to vigorously restore their strength.¡± ¡°Taiping Dao isn¡¯t idle either, of course.¡± ¡°Lu Yuan also arranged to begin restoring power within his sect.¡± ¡°However, unlike the other two sects, he didn¡¯t make a big show of expanding the recruitment of disciples among the lower levels.¡± ¡°Thanks to the accumulation of the past few centuries, Taiping Dao¡¯s number of lower-level disciples have become exceedingly rich.¡± ¡°A total of twenty thousand veteran disciples, five thousand new disciples, plus six thousand cultivators from affiliated Immortal Sects are available.¡± ¡°All together, that makes up thirty-one thousand cultivators.¡± ¡°By now, on the front lines of Taiping Dao, including the affiliates, the dead and wounded amount to only eleven thousand.¡± ¡°Up to this point, there are still twenty thousand troops available.¡± ¡°Even with the reduction of those five thousand new disciples who are not ready for use, there are still fifteen thousand people left.¡± Chapter 1491 - Chapter 1491 Chapter 580 Waiting for the Enemy to Die_2 ?Chapter 1491: Chapter 580 Waiting for the Enemy to Die_2 Chapter 1491: Chapter 580 Waiting for the Enemy to Die_2 Lu Yuan had begun to deploy those new disciples in various rear areas, sending them to each country to simply maintain local order. After all, in the local areas, there were still a large number of netherworld divine spirits assisting in maintaining order. Ordinary law enforcement could be handled with these divine spirits present. Taiping Dao only needed to arrange some disciples to do some superficial work, and there shouldn¡¯t be any major problems. After all, in the rear, Lu Yuan had left behind avatars like Huang Xuan, Huang Yun, Jin Qingyue, and Jade Brocade to watch over the home base. With four Earth Immortal avatars present, and also a Ghost Emperor Chen Hongyuan in the Yichuan netherworld court, they could help Taiping Dao suppress local unrest. With so much power arranged, there was no need to leave many cultivators in the rear; order could still be maintained stably. Therefore, apart from the five thousand new disciples, Lu Yuan reassigned the remaining old disciples and the residual cultivators from vassal Immortal Sectsa€¡±a total of fifteen thousand peoplea€¡±all to the front line. Among them, ten thousand were distributed across the most intense battlefields in the central domain. On Lu Yuan¡¯s side, only five thousand were left. While the number of troops was less than when the war began, the opposing Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s forces had also diminished. Comparing the two, it was still his side that held some advantage. Therefore, in the short term, Taiping Dao¡¯s forces were still considered ample and wouldn¡¯t be too scarce. And if fodder was really needed, those five thousand new disciples were actually enough. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï After ten years of bloody battles, Taiping Dao had already made its stance clear, showing its attitude. In the following war, Lu Yuan was no longer planning to continue such aggressive assaults; he couldn¡¯t maintain them anyway. Immortal Sects like Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Changqing Immortal Sect, even now, still held the land of twenty countries each, with vast rear areas providing them an unending supply of resources. But Taiping Dao couldn¡¯t. Even including the newly conquered territories of two countries and their three vassals, Taiping Dao now controlled only the land of eleven countries. And among these eleven countries, the newly occupied two were unusable. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï In reality, Taiping Dao only had the resources of the original nine countries to utilize, which was less than half of the other two factions¡¯. Using half the resources to compete with the other two factions in a war of attrition was clearly not going to work. To defeat them, Taiping Dao had to find another way. And that path, Lu Yuan had already found. His own avatars were the greatest reliance for claiming victory in this battle. However, even now, after ten years of bloodshed, both Changqing Immortal Sect and Jiuzhou Immortal Gate still retained their strong forces and hadn¡¯t been wounded in their vitalities. The simplest proof was that up until now, among the three powers, not a single Earth Immortal had perished, proving that this battle hadn¡¯t reached its peak. There was still some time to wait before the decisive battle arrived. So now was not the best moment to reveal one¡¯s true strength. Just as those three True Persons from Changqing Immortal Sect were thinking, Lu Yuan was waiting for the fall of an Earth Immortal from Jiuzhou Immortal Gate on the northwestern frontline of the domain. With Song Xiren¡¯s strength, even facing three opponents alone, he could at the very least, take one Jiuzhou Earth Immortal down with him. And judging by the two kinds of hatred, since he had to take an enemy with him, it had to be the most valuable one. Among the three Jiuzhou Earth Immortals, who was the most valuable enemy for Changqing Immortal Sect? That would, of course, be Ding Wanxuan, the incumbent Alliance Leader of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate from the Western Domain. Whether assessed by hatred or strength, Ding Wanxuan, nominally the leader of Jiuzhou, was the highest-ranked among Taiping Dao and the Jiuzhou alliance. Killing this individual would not only cause Jiuzhou internally to lose a widely respected Alliance Leader. Taiping Dao, which had just issued a declaration to join forces with Jiuzhou, would also completely lose the ability to check and balance due to the absence of a strong Earth Immortal on Jiuzhou¡¯s side. At least in the Changqing Domain, Taiping Dao would tower over all other Jiuzhou Immortal Sects, directly suppressing them. At that point, just the internal power struggles alone would be enough to send Taiping Dao and the various Jiuzhou Immortal Sects into turmoil. And once Jiuzhou fell into internal strife, it was hard to say how much strength they could muster to oppose Changqing Immortal Sect. Even if they continued to attack Changqing Immortal Sect for the sake of avenging the Alliance Leader, the pressure they could exert under the conditions of internal strife would at least be halved. With this respite, Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s chances of overcoming this crisis would greatly increase. This crisis would be more or less resolved. Though this solution was extremely costly, even if external enemies were fended off in the end, one¡¯s own side would be greatly weakened. But for the sake of preserving one¡¯s existence and the sect¡¯s heritage, it was already a huge stroke of fortune for Song Xiren and Changqing Immortal Sect. One couldn¡¯t hope for much more. So, according to the current overt strengths of the three Immortal Sects, the best and most feasible strategy for Changqing Immortal Sect was to kill Ding Wanxuan. And Song Xiren was undoubtedly working towards this goal. Over these ten years, he had continuously utilized secret techniques, desperately squeezing his potential and trading lifespan to fight to the death with the opposition. What was all this for? Of course, it was to slay those few Jiuzhou Earth Immortals on the battlefield. Among the three Jiuzhou Earth Immortals, Ding Wanxuan was the one most targeted. If not for Ding Wanxuan¡¯s cultivation, which was also quite decent among Earth Immortals, and the care of his two fellow disciples. He would likely have already died under Song Xiren¡¯s targeted attacks. Nevertheless, even so, Ding Wanxuan had been forced to become increasingly cautious on the battlefield, always on guard against Song Xiren¡¯s targeting. Chapter 1492 - Chapter 1492 Chapter 580 Waiting for the Enemy to Die_3 ?Chapter 1492: Chapter 580 Waiting for the Enemy to Die_3 Chapter 1492: Chapter 580 Waiting for the Enemy to Die_3 The other two Jiuzhou Earth Immortals also had to divert their attention to take care of him. Previously, Huang Yuanxiu was severely injured while protecting Ding Wanxuan, being deceived by Song Xiren and thus fell into a trap that left him heavily injured. This forced Jiuzhou to lose a major combat force in a short period of time. On the northwestern front, the battles between several Earth Immortals from two sects had completely escalated, with both sides fighting desperately. At this point, an Earth Immortal was already heavily injureda€¡±this was a very clear signal. The last decisive battle between Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Evergreen Immortal Sect started with the heavy injury of an Earth Immortal, gradually leading to the death of an Earth Immortal. Now, with this trend in the battle, the death of the first Earth Immortal seemed imminent. This first deceased Earth Immortal was most likely one of the three Jiuzhou Earth Immortals, including Ding Wanxuan. They were probably aware of this. Therefore, they consciously slowed down the intensity of their attack, becoming more cautious and wary of taking risks. Having achieved the Earth Immortal Realm with great difficulty, they were only one step away from annihilating Evergreen Immortal Sect and revitalizing the Nine Spirits Tao Inheritance. No one wanted to be the one who paid the ultimate price for success. As the highest authorities, they were actually more fearful of death. Yet, in the Immortal Cultivation World, the highest authorities were often also the ones with the strongest strength; in battles, as the strongest, they could hardly avoid participation. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Pushed by the circumstances, they had no choice but to enter the battlefield and fight desperately. But the affairs of the battlefield could not be avoided if you wished to. Song Xiren, pushed to a desperate corner, had already started to fight recklessly. How could he possibly let these enemies off the hook? Before leaving, he wouldn¡¯t rest in peace without taking one or two people with him. Facing this do-or-die attack from the current strongest cultivator in Changqing Domain, the price Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had to pay would certainly not be light. And among these four Earth Immortals, before the result of the death battle emerged, Lu Yuan had no intention of stepping out to steal the spotlight. For him, It was good news no matter which of these four people died. If Song Xiren died, Evergreen Immortal Sect would be left with only Zhang Xiuzhu. This person, merely an Early Earth Immortal with mediocre talent, was hardly a major threat. He thought wiping out these remnants of Evergreen Immortal Sect would be as easy as lifting his hands. If Ding Wanxuan of Jiuzhou died, that would be even better. Without this leader, faced with the powerful Taiping Dao, the Western Domain Immortal Sects would have no power to resist. Even if Zhen Xuan also achieved the Earth Immortal Realm, it would not change the outcome. As for the Jiuzhou Immortal Gates from outside the domain, To them, whether Taiping Dao or the Five Sects of the Western Domain, it was all Jiuzhou. The only difference, perhaps, was the closeness of relationships, some closer, some more distant. But as long as the grand aspiration of revitalizing the Jiuzhou Tao Inheritance was fulfilled, for these people, who led the Jiuzhou Tao Inheritance didn¡¯t really matter. After all, they didn¡¯t plan on moving into Changqing Domain and joining the revitalized Jiuzhou family. Those people in the lands outside the domain also had large family businesses that weren¡¯t easily abandoned. So, who was in charge of Jiuzhou didn¡¯t matter; what mattered was the revival of Jiuzhou. With Taiping Dao being the strongest, able to lead Jiuzhou toward revival, then let Taiping Dao take charge. For them, it was all the same. Based on this belief, if Ding Wanxuan died, it would be the greatest help to Lu Yuan. Without him, the severely depleted Western Jiuzhou would be reduced to a vassal, obediently subjugated to Taiping Dao, with no possibility of resistance. Taiping Dao would then exploit this opportunity to control the entire Changqing Domain and complete the unification. Of course, While hoping for Ding Wanxuan¡¯s death, Lu Yuan also had moral boundaries. He wouldn¡¯t do anything underhanded or deliberately harm the opposition. He simply chose to watch and wait for Song Xiren to kill them. If successful, good; if not, then let it be. Even if Ding Wanxuan didn¡¯t die, it wouldn¡¯t matter. Song Xiren taking away the other two Jiuzhou Earth Immortals would still be beneficial to him. Lu Yuan was wary of Jiuzhou, not the Jiuzhou within Changqing Domain, but the Jiuzhou outside Changqing Domain. Merely the Five Sects of the Western Domain posed no threat to Taiping Dao. Only with the additional three sects from outside the domain did they become a threat to Taiping Dao¡¯s power. So, if he could weaken the strength of the three external sects, letting Song Xiren take away Gu Huaiyuan, Huang Yuanxiu, and others, it would also be equivalent to striking at the external three sects. When these three sects suffered heavy losses, licking their wounds in the shadows wouldn¡¯t be enough; naturally, they would no longer have the resources to interfere in the power struggle for Changqing Domain. Without external interference, Taiping Dao would only have to deal with the Five Sects of the Western Domain. Subduing the Western Five Sects, even if they still had Ding Wanxuan, facing Taiping Dao with its eight Earth Immortals, they would stand no chance. Taiping Dao just needed to display its true strength, and it would basically win without a fight. As long as they could dominate their opponents and secure the sovereignty of Changqing Domain. Then, once everything settled down and after managing affairs for over a thousand years, the power in Lu Yuan¡¯s hands would surely be far greater than now. Perhaps, he might even have become a Heavenly Immortal by then. Even if the external Jiuzhou regained its strength, facing Taiping Dao, which had grown into a colossal entity, even if they wanted to interfere, they wouldn¡¯t have the strength to do so. So, for Lu Yuan at this moment, he didn¡¯t really need to do much; he just needed to wait. Wait for Song Xiren to lead the Earth Immortals of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate to their deaths, and the final fruit of victory would be delivered into his hands. In such a scenario, Taiping Dao naturally wouldn¡¯t need to use many disciples. He didn¡¯t need so many cannon fodders. The reason for maintaining such a large number of disciples at this moment was mainly to sustain the front-line battlefield. To perform superficial tasks, creating an illusion for outsiders that Taiping Dao was trying hard but wasn¡¯t strong enough to break through the enemy¡¯s defenses, meant to deceive both the enemy and their own allies. Now, it seemed that this deceptive tactic was quite effective. Lu Yuan used five Human Immortals and tens of thousands of cultivators¡¯ lives to gain the trust of outsiders. Now, what he needed to do was to continue maintaining this illusion. And to maintain this illusion, the fifteen thousand disciples on the front lines were already sufficient. Even if there were deficiencies, there were still five thousand new disciples who could be called upon any time as cannon fodder. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï For Taiping Dao, there was no longer a need to recruit disciples on a large scale. In fact, even if Lu Yuan wanted to recruit massively, he no longer had the capacity to do so. Chapter 1493 - Chapter 1493 Chapter 581 Thirty Years Later ?Chapter 1493: Chapter 581: Thirty Years Later Chapter 1493: Chapter 581: Thirty Years Later Previously, it was said that compared to the other two factions participating in the war, Taiping Dao¡¯s territory and heritage were considerably weaker. Under such circumstances, even if Lu Yuan desired to expand his army, he couldn¡¯t surpass them. Previously, Great Plain Path had managed to expand its number of disciples to twenty thousand in just a few hundred years. This was achieved by having many friends and plundering many outstanding disciples from other Outer Territories like Dongyang Domain, thereby satisfying their own needs. However, such a thing is feasible only once. People cannot favor you in the same manner a second time. Hence, if Taiping Dao wanted to continue recruiting disciples, they could only dig into their own territory. With their own territory, even if the newly conquered Two Countries were included, picking out sufficiently superior disciples from just eleven countries was challenging. As for lowering the standards, Lu Yuan had previously recruited five thousand cannon fodders, most of whom were disciples with average qualifications. He had already lowered the standards. Having scoured once already, even if he now wanted to recruit again and relax the criteria to include average qualifications, it was still hard to find enough cannon fodder. Moreover, Taiping Dao was not lacking in cannon fodder now, nor was there a need to choose disciples with poor qualifications just to fill numbers. The existing twenty thousand disciples were enough to meet Lu Yuan¡¯s needs, support Taiping Dao, and fight through this war. What he needed to do now was not blindly expand the army but to restore the normal system, gradually recruit qualified disciples, and allow the eye-catching financial deficit of the sect to slowly return to balance. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Therefore, Lu Yuan only ordered the gradual recruitment of qualified disciples with superior abilities, returning to the elite route. Even with the current territory of Taiping Dao, only recruiting disciples with superior qualifications, it was nearly possible to select five hundred qualified disciples a year from the eleven countries. Although the number was slightly less, accumulating year by year, only ten years were needed for five thousand disciples. In a hundred years, that would be fifty thousand disciples. Emphasizing a steady, slow accumulation, by the time the great war ended, the number of disciples in the rear of Taiping Dao might once again reach thirty thousand. With thirty thousand disciples available, even if the Changqing Domain was conquered, Taiping Dao wouldn¡¯t worry about lack of manpower. Having enough cannon fodder for the war, Lu Yuan was truly not in a hurry regarding the disciple issue. The disciple issue, after all, was just a minor detail. The main issue for Taiping Dao now was actually on the Human Immortal front. Outwardly, there were only five Human Immortals in Taiping Dao at the front line, struggling to maintain two battlefronts, which already stretched them thin. But behind the scenes in Taiping Dao, there were four hidden lineage Human Immortals, including Huang Xuan and Huang Yun, who were Lu Yuan¡¯s avatars. These individuals, all strong, could be deployed to the battlefield. Once these individuals joined the front line, the precarious manpower shortage of Taiping Dao would naturally be solved. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï But this was only an outsider¡¯s viewpoint. Lu Yuan had deliberately held these avatars back, not letting them join the front linea€¡±not because outsiders assumed he was removing dissidents and preserving the strength of hidden lineage disciples. His true intention was to conceal the strength of these avatars, then deploy them when the right moment arrived. Think about it. When the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Qing Immortal Sect at the front line suddenly lost several Earth Immortals, with both sides greatly weakened and vitality severely damaged. At that time, if Taiping Dao suddenly called these four Earth Immortals from the rear to the battlefield, what would be the impact on the battlefield? Four Earth Immortals acting together in the later stages of the war would create an unstoppable force, an invincible situation. This was the trump card in Lu Yuan¡¯s hand; how could he possibly use it until the decisive moment? As for letting them hide their strength, squandering time on the battlefield? That too was unrealistic. Currently, on the battlefield, those Human Immortals managing the grand formations, with their strength augmented, could rival Earth Immortals. Even if they only possessed the power of Earth Immortals but lacked their depth and heritage, this did not change the essence of it being an Earth Immortal-level power. Although these Earth Immortals were intercepted by Lu Yuan, occasionally, some Earth Immortals would still target those Human Immortals for sneak attacksa€¡±a tactic used by both sides. Previously, one of the Human Immortals from Taiping Dao had died in such a situation. Then, facing an Earth Immortal¡¯s sneak attack alone, would you dodge or not? If you dodged, escaping from an Earth Immortal, you would have to reveal your true abilities, thereby exposing your strength. If you did not dodge, even as a peer expert, facing someone else¡¯s strike carelessly could also be fatal. If not fatal, surviving an attack by an Earth Immortal would nonetheless be problematic and equally revealing. For these avatars, deceiving some Human Immortals was not much of an issue. But truly encountering an Earth Immortal, even one as weak as they come, still carried significant risks. This concerned Lu Yuan¡¯s future grand plan. If at this time, without the other two sects being weakened, he exposed his trump card, the situation Taiping Dao would face might not be joining forces with Jiuzhou to attack Qing Immortal Sect. Instead, the other two sects, realizing Taiping Dao¡¯s sinister intentions, might temporarily join forces to turn against Taiping Dao. Do not think that just because Taiping Dao had returned to Jiuzhou, and both were supposedly on the same side now. Yet even within a family, when you are clearly planning against your own, it still causes anger. Not to mention, this so-called family member had run away from home for tens of thousands of years and had only now returned. Chapter 1494 - Chapter 1494 Chapter 581 Thirty Years Later_2 ?Chapter 1494: Chapter 581: Thirty Years Later_2 Chapter 1494: Chapter 581: Thirty Years Later_2 Taiping Dao and the Nine Provinces had joined forces to attack Qing Immortal Sect. Each was acting on their own, with mutual distrust evident from their actions. Therefore, considering only this aspect, these avatars couldn¡¯t be moved. No matter how tumultuous the outside world might be, or how stormy the internal discussions were, regarding his own avatars, Lu Yuan had to stand by his opinion and place them at the rear, guarding the ancestral lands. However, this remaining surplus of combat power, for the sake of the grand plan, could not be sent to the battlefield. Relying solely on the five Human Immortals at the front line, even with the support of Lu Yuan and Qing Guanzi, Earth Immortals, it would be very difficult to assume major responsibilities. Reinforcing the front-line battlefield was imperatively necessary. To resolve this issue, Lu Yuan had no choice but to follow the practice of the other two sects, selecting from the elite disciples at the front line those with the highest military achievements and sufficient contributions to be stationed at the rear battlefield, allowing them to focus on breaking through to True Immortal. Excluding the two newly occupied but not yet properly managed small countries, including vassals, the Great Plain Path had a territory of ten countries at the rear, where a total of ten disciples could be placed. After selecting these individuals, he made each swear a great oath to the Heavenly Path and a vow to their own inner demons, vowing to never betray Taiping Dao, and then arranged for them to move to the rear. Setting up such binding measures before the breakthrough might seem inconsiderate, but it was actually quite normal and part of the customs of the Changqing Domain. It couldn¡¯t be helped. The Changqing Domain had always been a place rife with deception and betrayal. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 All the major Immortal Sects were sending spies to one another, completely lacking in any sense of security. Even Taiping Dao, the newcomer, had been infiltrated internally like a sieve, a sight alarming to behold. Faced with such a severe situation, to ensure the purity within one¡¯s own ranks, the reliability of upper echelons, and to guarantee that the resources spent weren¡¯t cultivating ingrates, certain necessary measures of restriction and assurance became unavoidable. Before funding disciples in becoming immortal, making them swear oaths bound by the Heavenly Path and vows restrained by their own inner demons was just the most fundamental step. Other methods included entrusting one¡¯s Divine Soul to the sect, life fates entwined with the sect, and binding interests with the sect. In summary, below True Immortal, perhaps an Immortal Sect could not guarantee that its disciples were without issues. But once a disciple reached True Immortal status, even if they originally had motives, they would eventually become problem-free under the layers of constraints and bindings. These binding methods were not impossible to circumvent or break. In fact, as long as one was willing to pay the price, any restraint in the Immortal Realm could be circumvented or broken. Did not the greatest constraint in the worlda€¡±the backlash against the Heavenly Immortal for opposing the Heavenly Patha€¡±get evaded by those Great True Persons through the method of circumscribing themselves within defined limits? Hence, nothing was invulnerable to subversion; the right method and sufficient cost were all that were needed. But it was precisely this cost that stumped countless individuals. To help a Human Immortal circumvent and break the restraints they carried, the price paid was enough to support one, or even more Earth Immortals. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Let¡¯s ask, can the value of a mere Human Immortal, no matter how great, compare with an Earth Immortal, or even more Earth Immortals? Undoubtedly, it cannot. No one would pay such a high price for a Human Immortal. If someone truly did, then their enemies would probably go mad with laughter. Using a Human Immortal to directly burden the opposition with so much of its resources was roughly equivalent to an enemy losing one or two Earth Immortals. What? If the enemy was willing to pay such a high price, it must mean that the person in question possessed significant value. If this were the perspective of a Heavenly Immortal sect, perhaps it would be applicable. After all, the size of those sects warranted that a highly valued Human Immortal might indeed bring greater benefits. But in the Changqing Domain, who didn¡¯t know whom? Which Immortal Sect didn¡¯t know that a Human Immortal could hold so much value? It simply didn¡¯t exist. Thus, though these restrictions, in theory, were circumventable, in reality, to those Human Immortals, they were almost as unavoidable. Since they could not avoid them, they had to dutifully accept their fate. Therefore, in the Changqing Domain, anyone who wished to become immortal, before receiving the sect¡¯s support, had to first undergo a set of restrictive measures. After becoming immortal, they were further bound by deeper ties. These bindings were sufficient to ensure that a Human Immortal could not betray or rebel against their sect. Thus, for those like Yu Shipei, whose nature was problematic at a glance, when faced with the sect¡¯s order to retreat for punishment, they could only do so. When commanded to charge into battle and fight to the death at the front lines, they could only comply. Rebellion was impossible. Obeying orders held a chance of survival, but rebellion, with various forms of backlash striking down, would mean he would be the first to die. Similarly, for the other vassal Immortal Sects, the disciples who had yet to become True Immortals were better off, carrying fewer restraints. But those who had already attained True Immortal status, even if they were School Leaders themselves, wouldn¡¯t find their constraints disappearing with a change of status. On the contrary, upon becoming a School Leader, their binding with the sect deepened even further. Thus, as long as Lu Yuan had a firm grip on their Immortal Sects, then for the sake of their sect¡¯s survival and interest, completely aware that their actions were counter to what they upheld, these vassal True Immortals also had to obediently follow orders. Even if ordered to march to their deaths, they could only proceed. As for whether this approach was too rigid and foolish, and whether the vassals were too naive? It was indeed rigid and foolish, but without such rigidness and foolishness, those vassals would have died much sooner. Chapter 1495 - Chapter 1495 Chapter 581 Thirty Years Later_3 ?Chapter 1495: Chapter 581: Thirty Years Later_3 Chapter 1495: Chapter 581: Thirty Years Later_3 ¡°If you¡¯re not rigid, and you don¡¯t create more restrictive measures, someone could send a spy, support them to become the top echelon of the sect, and then turn around to lead the sect in allegiance to those Grand Immortal Sects, selling out the entire sect.¡± ¡°That would be an even greater loss.¡± ¡°Conversely,¡± ¡°If there are more constraints, despite making it easier for the noble minds to take advantage with their fair-sounding arguments,¡± ¡°in times of no war, the whole sect can still continue to operate and pass on its legacy according to these rigid rules.¡± ¡°Following the customary practices of the Changqing Domain.¡± ¡°There would only be a major battle every three to five thousand years.¡± ¡°By executing these rules, one only needs to be cautious during the arrival of the great battle every three to five thousand years. Other than that, the sect would still be fine.¡± ¡°For smaller Immortal Sects, to bet their current tranquility on the future, three to five thousand years from now, may seem short-sighted.¡± ¡°But it¡¯s the best option they have after weighing the lesser of two evils.¡± ¡°Using various sect rules to constrain the True Immortals within, and using the inheritance of others¡¯ Tao to constrain those vassal True Immortals, these are the strategies that have become popular in the Changqing Domain after thousands of years of war.¡± ¡°And in practical terms, these measures have indeed played a significant role.¡± ¡°The last time Changqing Immortal Sect used this tactic, it trapped and killed nine of its vassals.¡± ¡°Now, Lu Yuan is also using these methods, keeping a firm grip on his three major vassals.¡± ¡°As for whether or not to trap these vassals to death, he has not yet made a decision, intending to leave it all to fate.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Chapter 1496 - Chapter 1496 Chapter 582 The Battle and Fall of the Two Immortals ?Chapter 1496: Chapter 582: The Battle and Fall of the Two Immortals Chapter 1496: Chapter 582: The Battle and Fall of the Two Immortals Red Maple Country. This nation is home to myriads of red maples, hence its name. Its territory lies in the northwest of the Western Domain, bordering the Northern Domain, and was originally the land of the Danding Sect. However, in the last Changqing Battle, the Nine Provinces were defeated, and this country, along with Tianmen, Black Fish, and Shuangyan, fell into the hands of the Qing Immortal Sect. But this time, in the great war, the Nine Provinces allied with Taiping Dao, already overwhelming the Qing Immortal Sect on the battlefield, pushing them to retreat step by step, and continuously moving the territory to the north and east. As of now, the countries Black Fish and Shuangyan have already been reclaimed by the Nine Provinces. Thus, the front line of the Nine Provinces has advanced to Red Maple Country, where they confront the Qing Immortal Sect. On this day, the mighty army of the Nine Provinces approached the border of Red Maple, and opposite them in formation, the Qing Immortal Sect also amassed five thousand troops for the clash. ¡°Fellow disciples, Red Maple Country is the very edge of our northwest territory. Once we take down this country, all of our northwestern lands will have been reclaimed. The border with the Qing rebels will return to its division before the last war. Pushing further north from here means seizing their land to enrich our own. Every inch we take strengthens us. The Qing rebels¡¯ foundations are weak in the northern border, where over half of the subjugated Immortal Sects they had destroyed are located. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Their tyrannical acts have already led to widespread resentment in the northern territory, with everyone wishing to rebel against them. Now that we, leading the Righteous army, have arrived, we shall be unstoppable, sweeping through the northern domain.¡± Before the battle, Ding Wanxuan gathered the other two Earth Immortals and, in front of many disciples, gave his final rally. ¡°Elder Brother Ding is right. After forty years of hard battles, the Qing scoundrels have been losing continuously and are no longer in their former glory. All we need is a little more effort, just a gentle push, and we can break the enemy and restore the Nine Spirits¡¯ dominion over the world.¡± ¡°The day we shatter Qing will be today. We, the disciples of the Nine Provinces, must encourage each other!¡± Beside him, Huang Yuanxiu and Gu Huaiyuan both nodded continuously, offering words of encouragement. ¡°Well said, the time to obliterate Qing is now.¡± Ding Wanxuan laughed heartily, ¡°Issue the Commander¡¯s orders, this time we will not break Qing or vow to return!¡± As his words ended, over ten thousand Cultivators below shouted in unison, ¡°We will not break Qing, we vow not to return! We will not break Qing, we vow not to return!¡± The voices of countless Cultivators resounded in unison, shaking the four fields, making the whole Red Maple Country tremble involuntarily. Seeing that the military spirit was ready for use, Ding Wanxuan immediately commanded, ¡°Advance!¡± In an instant, ten thousand Cultivators below flew into the sky, numerous trails of light illuminating the Heavenly Vault, with the clouds reflecting dazzling brilliance. And in the midst of this starry glimmer, Ding Wanxuan and the other two led the charge, plunging directly into the opposing formation and initiating the attack. The grand formation of Red Maple Country. Song Xiren was patrolling among the various ritual platforms, meticulously inspecting every rune junction, ensuring there were no oversights. These tasks typically did not require his attention, minor matters that the servants would handle. But as the School Leader, and also the Commander of the Qing Immortal Sect in this great territorial war, Song Xiren outwardly appeared as powerful as ever, not showing the slightest concern for the unfavorable situation at hand. However, all of these were just superficial efforts made to stabilize the morale of those below. With such a heavy responsibility, facing an unprecedented foe, the Qing Immortal Sect had come to a dangerous predicament like never before since its founding. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? For Song Xiren, facing the greatest pressure, it was impossible not to have any worry or panic in his heart. Yet as the School Leader, these emotions could never be shown. Since he could not display them, he could only keep them bottled up inside. And keeping them bottled up without relief could lead to problems over time. Although his will was strong, these emotions would not affect his decision-making, but his behavior was inevitably influenced by them. Like constantly inspecting every detail of the defensive line over and over, patrolling formations that had already been checked countless times and were without any real issues. This had become a habit for Song Xiren after the battle had started. A profound sense of insecurity led him to constantly find comfort in various minor details to strengthen his own convictions. It also served as a reminder to his disciples, making it clear to them how seriously the School Leader took these matters, and that they could not be negligent. Indirectly, it also boosted the morale of the troops. And thanks to this, the disciples of the Qing, under Song Xiren¡¯s command, performed their duties faithfully and dared not be careless. This attentiveness was one of the reasons why the Qing Immortal Sect could withstand the fierce offensives of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate over the years. At this moment, Song Xiren, like always, was patrolling a certain area of the great formation. The disciples responsible for this area followed him respectfully and attentively, presenting him with details from all around. Song Xiren listened, occasionally picking a few to verify, and seeing that everything was in order, he nodded repeatedly, quite satisfied. With the disciples so diligent, how could they fail to repel the enemy and defend their legacy? But just at this time, from afar came the chorus, ¡°We will not break Qing, we vow not to return!¡± This eight-worded chant, repeated several times, echoed throughout the entire Red Maple Country, clearly audible to all. All the Cultivators in the formation couldn¡¯t help but change their expressions upon hearing it. ¡°School Leader¡­¡± The disciple following by his side was shaken by the chanting, his spirit disturbed, and he said tremblingly, ¡°Those Jiuzhou Cultivators¡­¡± Song Xiren¡¯s expression also changed momentarily, but quickly returned to normal, though with contracted pupils, revealing his own lack of tranquility. Seeing his nearby disciples looking fearful, he immediately scoffed, ¡°What¡¯s there to panic about? It¡¯s just the rebels coming back for more, haven¡¯t we seen this for the past forty years?¡± Chapter 1497 - Chapter 1497 Chapter 582 The Battle and Fall of the Two Immortals_2 ?Chapter 1497: Chapter 582: The Battle and Fall of the Two Immortals_2 Chapter 1497: Chapter 582: The Battle and Fall of the Two Immortals_2 ¡°Issue my ordera€¡±all disciples, hold your positions, and operate the Formation Method with full strength to resist the enemy invasion. ¡°Those villains dare to seek death, then I shall fulfill their wish and personally send them to Huangquan.¡± Song Xiren issued commands rapidly. And the numerous disciples in the formation, after an initial panic, quickly calmed down. As Song Xiren said, they had been fighting for forty years, and their strategies and experiences were well-honed; they were no longer novices. It was merely a momentary rush that had caught them off guard and caused the brief chaos. At this moment, the School Leader had given his orders, and the many disciples swiftly moved according to the original regulations and contingency plans, opening up their defenses and lying in wait for the enemy¡¯s attack. Looking across the positions inside the formation, everyone was in place, waiting for the enemy to strike. Song Xiren wanted to do more, but then saw three figures flying towards the formation from outside, touching it briefly before breaking through directly. All his previous plans were instantly discarded. The newcomers were Ding Wanxuan and his two allies. Upon seeing his nemesis, Song Xiren¡¯s anger soared, and he flew towards them to intercept, shouting, ¡°Old thief Ding, hiding for thirty years and finally daring to show up. You¡¯ve come at the perfect moment, come and meet your death!¡± In the last thirty years, each sect had been covertly recuperating, and although there were small skirmishes at the front line, they only involved lesser disciples clashing and at most one or two Human Immortals leading them. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?? As for Earth Immortals, there was a tacit agreement not to deploy them. This had forced Song Xiren to put on hold his plan to kill Ding Wanxuan, waiting until today. ¡°Ha-ha, old thief Song, you have waited painfully for me, and I, too, have waited painfully for you. Today will surely be your death!¡± From afar, Ding Wanxuan, upon hearing Song Xiren¡¯s provocation, did not show any weakness, immediately responding and cursing, ¡°My two junior brothers, with such evil beings, there¡¯s no need to speak of benevolence or righteousness, let¡¯s kill him together!¡± After speaking, Gu Huaiyuan and Huang Yuanxiu, positioned by his side, skillfully flanked Song Xiren from left and right, following Ding Wanxuan and converging on him. Watching this familiar scene unfold, Song Xiren internally cursed them for their despicableness, yet he had no choice but to summon his strength and carefully fend them off. Facing three alone, even with his Cultivation, a slight mistake could cost him his life. Now he was the sole pillar of the Qing Immortal Sect; if he were to fall, the entire sect would collapse. Having not yet completed his responsibility, Song Xiren dared not die. Similarly, Ding Wanxuan and his two companions, who were combating him, were also very cautious and well-coordinated, not daring to relax in the slightest. Their opponent was the foremost cultivator of the Changqing Domain, who through years of life-and-death trials, despite using Secret Techniques numerous times to squeeze his Lifespan and severely impair his foundation, had moved from possibly achieving the Heavenly Immortal level to now having no chance at all. However, although his foundation was damaged, the repeated use of Secret Techniques had also granted him considerable strengtha€¡±his Cultivation had advanced far beyond what it had been at the outset of the war. If previously Song Xiren was far from the Late-stage Earth Immortal level. Now, he was just a single step away from that realm. Just a mere fraction forward would elevate him to a Grand Cultivator. At that point, facing a Grand Cultivator, even three together would no longer be a match for him. Engaging with such a person, how could the three dare not be careful? They neither dared to pressure him excessively, risking his breakthrough in a life-or-death moment, nor could they easily let him slide, always looking for an opportunity to kill him before he grew stronger. This dilemma was indeed excruciating. As the leading Earth Immortals began their fight, the countless cultivators behind each side also moved, engaging in combat. This set the scene for another climax in this great battle, marking the start of its second phase. Once the news of this battle spread to other battlefields, the Western Territory frontline, the Central Battlefield, and the Eastern Territory battlefield also each launched their offensive. The entire Changqing Domain was once again engulfed in fierce fighting, pushing this war quickly towards its peak. Time flies, time escapes. After forty years of war, Ding Wanxuan leading the main forces of the Nine Provinces launched a fierce attack on Red Maple Country, reigniting the Earth Immortal battle. Other battlefields in the domain promptly followed suit, each initiating combat. In the forty-first year, Qing Guanzi and Yi Dancheng, together with Zhang Xiuzhu, fought in the Central Territory; during the clash, Lu Yuan urgently left the Eastern Territory battlefield and secretly arrived to catch Zhang Xiuzhu off guard. The trio, joining forces, severely wounded him. Zhang Xiuzhu retreated with serious injuries, and Taiping Dao took the opportunity to sweep through the Central Territory, capturing three nations. Thus, the Changqing defense line retreated to the territory of Eastern Domain, fully abandoning the Central Territory battlefield. In the Central Territory battle, Taiping Dao captured two countries sequentially, securing their first major victory since the Northern Expedition. That same year, influenced by the battle in the Central Territory, Taiping Dao had captured vast areas of the Central and Eastern Territories. According to the original alliance agreement, these territories seized by Taiping Dao would ultimately belong to Taiping Dao. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 Seeing the allies reaping significant gains, the Nine Provinces side became restless. To vie for future dominance in the Changqing Domain, after deliberation, the trio led by Ding Wanxuan eventually had Huang Yuanxiu step forward. He decided to perform a Secret Technique, sacrificing his own Lifespan and potential to reduce his lifespan by a thousand years and temporarily enhance his Strength to the Mid-stage Earth Immortal level, in exchange for powerful force within that realm. Chapter 1498 - Chapter 1498 Chapter 582 The Battle and Fall of the Two Immortals_3 ?Chapter 1498: Chapter 582: The Battle and Fall of the Two Immortals_3 Chapter 1498: Chapter 582: The Battle and Fall of the Two Immortals_3 Ding Wanxuan and Gu Huaiyuan, influenced by this, decided to follow suit. They each shortened their lifespans by a hundred years, boosting their strength to the peak of the mid-stage Earth Immortal, a Realm similar to Song Xiren¡¯s. Ultimately, the Earth Immortals from the Three Nations of Jiuzhou, each at a grievous cost, achieved strength comparable to Song Xiren. Thus, the three joined forces, and during a customary exchange with Song Xiren, they suddenly launched a surprise attack, catching him off guard. Song Xiren, unprepared, was trapped by the three and instantly found himself in jeopardy. At this critical moment, Song Xiren had no choice but to also resort to an emergency secret technique, gaining the strength of a late-stage Earth Immortal grand cultivator at a terrible cost. Only then, under the combined assault of the three peak mid-stage Earth Immortals, did he manage to carve a bloody path and retreat to the rear. Ding Wanxuan¡¯s group wanted to pursue but were stopped by other Earth Immortals from the formation of the Qing Immortal Sect. Seeing such a good opportunity slip away, the trio became furious and vented their wrath on the other disciples within the formation. Thus, even with the presence of three other main formation holders who were temporarily elevated to Earth Immortal strength and several thousand Qing sect disciples, they still couldn¡¯t withstand the powerful enemy. Eventually, after a massacre, the large formation of the Qing Immortal Sect in the Western Territory was declared destroyed. Five thousand disciples were completely lost, and the lands of Red Maple and Tianmen were reclaimed by Jiuzhou, restoring the territory in the West. Even more, taking this opportunity, the grand army of Jiuzhou continued northward in the Northern Territory and seized another nation. Following Taiping Dao, Jiuzhou also achieved a more glorious victory. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 The power of the Qing Immortal Sect, after these two battles, completely withdrew from the Western and Central Territories, forced to shrink back to the safety of the Northern and Eastern Territories. Even these territories faced encroachments by neighboring countries taken by Taiping Dao and Jiuzhou. The once-great Qing Immortal Sect, which had controlled two-thirds of the Changqing Domain, was now reduced to a shadow of its former self during Yao Baojuan¡¯s leadership. As the cost of achieving this great victory, Huang Yuanxiu was severely wounded and had retreated to close from public view after the battle. Early in the war, Huang Yuanxiu had been severely injured while saving Ding Wanxuan. Although he had recuperated for thirty years, what were mere decades to an Earth Immortal for healing wounds? This time, already dragging a gravely wounded body, Huang Yuanxiu used the secret technique to drastically reduce his lifespan by a thousand years, exacerbating his condition. After the battle, Huang Yuanxiu was unable to endure any longer and had to retreat and temporarily recuperate. As to when he could recover, that was unclear, but he certainly couldn¡¯t participate in the battle during this period. Of course, it wasn¡¯t impossible for him to fight while injured. However, fighting in such a state not only meant his condition was not optimal and he couldn¡¯t exert his full strength, even a minor injury during the battle could be tolerable for a normal Earth Immortal. But for Huang Yuanxiu, it could be fatal. In short, this Earth Immortal¡¯s condition was now very dire, and he was hardly able to fight again. In the subsequent fights of Jiuzhou, unless something unexpected happened, he would be hard to rely upon. Yet for the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, successfully causing Song Xiren to flee wounded, seizing three nations, regaining lost Western Territories, and pushing the front line to the North, this was already a major victory. Compared to this, being temporarily without Huang Yuanxiu was an acceptable situation. Most importantly, through this battle, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect had regained a flag from Taiping Dao, significantly boosting their prestige and reversing their previous decline. As the old Jiuzhou, seeing the new Taiping Dao winning continuously on the battlefield and achieving so many victories put them under significant pressure. Their resolve to pay such a price this time, partly stemmed from a desire to reclaim their standing before their juniors. Finally, their wish was fulfilled. After 43 years of warfare, having achieved victory, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, led by Ding Wanxuan, continued to press into the Northern Territory. After two years of fierce fighting, they seized another nation. In the forty-fourth year, Taiping Dao¡¯s Lu Yuan and Qing Guanzi combined their forces, intensively deploying troops to attack the Eastern Territory and captured another nation. In the forty-fifth year, Jiuzhou seized another nation. Song Xiren, previously wounded and having fled, still hadn¡¯t shown himself. By then, the Qing Immortal Sect in the Northern Territory had only six nations left, and seven in the Eastern Territory, a total of only thirteen nations remaining, with their strength increasingly declining. In the forty-sixth year, a confident Ding Wanxuan once again assembled a mighty army of ten thousand men, marching north for further conquest. However, at that moment, Song Xiren, having withdrawn for several years, finally made an appearance, his figure emaciated, his hair gray, looking as though he wouldn¡¯t live much longer. But in contrast to his appearance, his aura was deep and profound, clearly having reached the late-stage Earth Immortal realm as a grand cultivator. Not only him, but Yang Jihua, who had also been secluded for a long time after the war, unexpectedly appeared at Song Xiren¡¯s side. While his cultivation seemed somewhat unstable, it was undeniably at the Earth Immortal realm. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? After nearly fifty years of closed-door cultivation, under the existential threat to his sect, Yang Jihua finally overcame the challenges, attained the Earth Flower Dao Fruit, and became an Earth Immortal True Person. When the Qing Immortal Sect suddenly made a move, it was with a late-stage Earth Immortal grand cultivator and a new Earth Immortal. Such a move was something outsiders had never anticipated. According to Ding Wanxuan and others¡¯ expectations, after Song Xiren¡¯s previous severe injuries and escape, it would take him decades to suppress his injuries and make a move again. But unexpectedly, he completely disregarded everything. He sacrificed all his remaining lifespan with the most ruthless means to achieve a breakthrough to a late-stage Earth Immortal. And the cost was that he could only live for three more years. Furthermore, at the critical moment of the sect¡¯s crisis, the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s fortune suddenly surged, allowing Yang Jihua to successfully overcome his trials and achieve Earth Immortality. Thus, at this moment, the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s strength had finally reached its peak. The counterattack began. In the autumn of the forty-sixth year, the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s Song Xiren and Yang Jihua suddenly made a move, attacking the unsuspecting Jiuzhou Northern Expedition army. During the battle, Yang Jihua, along with other Earth Immortals from the formation, desperately stalled Gu Huaiyuan, creating an opportunity for their School Leader to engage Ding Wanxuan alone. Finally, in a desperate fight, Ding Wanxuan couldn¡¯t withstand the onslaught and was slain by Song. The Alliance Leader of Jiuzhou fell in this battle. Then, dragging his severely injured body, Song, along with Yang Jihua and others, continued to besiege Gu Huaiyuan. But ultimately, running out of oil, he died of old age during the battle. Thus, Gu Huaiyuan seized this chance to break through the encirclement, severely wounded. With this battle, both Changqing and Jiuzhou suffered the fall of their kings. Both leaders of the Immortal Sects died in this conflict. This great Changqing Battle had at last reached a turning point. Chapter 1499 - Chapter 1499 Chapter 583 The Time Has Come ?Chapter 1499: Chapter 583 The Time Has Come Chapter 1499: Chapter 583 The Time Has Come Su Yun Country. When the news of the decisive battle in the northern domain reached him, Lu Yuan was in the midst of leading his troops to conquer this nation. In recent years, the Qing Immortal Sect had been in decline, its territory continually lost, on the verge of becoming the least of the three sects. But Lu Yuan did not allow pride to cloud his judgment; instead, he became even more cautious. For he knew that the quieter the enemy, the more likely they were plotting something significant. It was impossible for the Qing Immortal Sect to be so easily conquered, and Song Xiren had only been severely injured and fled, not utterly dead. How could he, still alive, stand by and watch as they continually seized what remained of the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s lands without doing anything about it? Yao Baojuan, when his Lifespan was nearing its end, was able to stand forth and with his life, secure five thousand years of development rights for the Qing Immortal Sect. Although this developmental right was directly broken by Lu Yuan¡¯s sudden emergence. But that was beyond human control. Who could have anticipated that there would be someone like Lu Yuan, capable of creating so many Avatars? Even with such overwhelming dominance, it could not obscure Yao Baojuan¡¯s willingness to sacrifice for the sect. If Yao Baojuan could do this, then today¡¯s Song Xiren was naturally capable of the same. As a long-standing neighbor, Lu Yuan had no doubt about the dedication Song Xiren harbored for the Qing Immortal Sect. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Should the need arise and the opportunity present itself, Song Xiren would undoubtedly not hesitate to exchange his own life for the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s ability to withstand this war. Do not be surprised, such is the ethos within the Immortal Realm. Those disciples, brought up by the sect from a young age, who have received countless benefits and possess numerous affections for their sect, are driven to such actions by their loyalty. Why was Lu Yuan so sure? It was because, within the Taiping Dao Sect, there were also many such disciples. The Taiping Dao had been established for nearly two thousand years, a duration surpassing over half the lifetimes of Human Immortals. For those below the level of a True Immortal, it encompassed almost the entire lives of those who grew up within the sect. Under such circumstances, through the loyalty education of the Taiping Dao, naturally, a multitude of disciples arose who supported the sect and were willing to sacrifice for it. Especially after Jin Qingyue¡¯s reforms, which directly eradicated countless spies and recruited a large number of disciples with simple, clean backgrounds from outside the domain, the sect had a significant reserve of talents. These disciples, unchanged by external factors, each bore loyalty to the sect as if it were their own family. They would willingly shed their blood for their family without the sect even asking; they would take initiative themselves. In fact, not only these disciples from outside the domain. Even those native disciples affected by the reforms, and even some problematic ones, proved exceedingly loyal and reliable during this great war. Although their backgrounds and identities were problematic, after all, the Taiping Dao had nurtured them for hundreds of years, trained them for hundreds of years. Human nature is not akin to that of grass and trees, devoid of emotion. These people, while their foundations were impure and external forces interfered with them, still had some whose hearts lay with the Taiping Dao and who could not betray their sect. Some, overwhelmed by guilt, fought even harder for the sect, striving to achieve merit on the battlefield to cleanse themselves of their wrongdoing. In summary, it was after seeing the numerous things these loyal sect disciples had done for the sect. That is why Lu Yuan was convinced that Song Xiren¡¯s reluctance to appear was certainly due to planning something significant. Because if those disciples who had been trained by the sect for hundreds of years could do this, Then Song Xiren, who had been cultivated by the Qing Immortal Sect for seven thousand years, was certainly capable. Seven thousand years, such a profound length of time he had spent within the Qing Immortal Sect. ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï How could a man such as he tolerate the destruction of his own home at his own hands? If it must be destroyed, then let it fall after his own death, at the hands of others. Before then, he would rather lose his own life than let such a thing occur. Precisely because Lu Yuan understood this, the more tranquil the Qing Immortal Sect appeared, the more alert he remained in his heart. To avoid the enemy¡¯s major moves from landing on his head. For years, Lu Yuan had been cautiously controlling the speed of his advancements. Each new campaign was launched at those remote and less critical areas that did not involve the core of the Qing Immortal Sect, to avoid agitating the enemy. Even for the sake of safety, he had not appeared on the battlefield for several years, entrusting all campaign matters to his two Avatars, Qing Guanzi and Yi Dancheng. The public excuse was constant years of campaigning, suffering an injury that required him to recuperate. To lend credibility to this claim, Lu Yuan had even deliberately revealed a flaw during the last campaign, allowing those Formation Method Earth Immortals to injure him. After all, with his mid-stage Earth Immortal strength, being careful ensured that such low-quality Formation Method Earth Immortals could not cause him much harm. His plan proved effective, as outsiders believed the story. After all, in the eyes of outsiders, Lu Yuan was merely a newly ascended Earth Immortal, a neophyte of merely a hundred or two hundred years. Already having a fragile foundation, and after years of unceasing warfare, it was normal for him to be injured. So, no one was surprised by the Incumbent School Leader of the Taiping Dao withdrawing to seclude himself and heal. The Nine Provinces quickly accepted it, and the Qing Immortal Sect was even more thrilled, believing they had achieved yet another victory. Chapter 1500 - Chapter 1500 Chapter 583 The Time Has Come_2 ?Chapter 1500: Chapter 583 The Time Has Come_2 Chapter 1500: Chapter 583 The Time Has Come_2 Because after Lu Yuan had withdrawn and went into seclusion, on the Eastern Territory front line, the offensive of Taiping Dao notably slowed. Qing Guanzi and Yi Dancheng seemed also to be intimidated by the fact that Lu Yuan had been injured. When making moves on the front line, they became increasingly careful and cautious, holding back their strength to ensure safety. Such a posture was indeed safe. But the offensive momentum of Taiping Dao was instantly slowed. Over these years, Jiuzhou Immortal Gate had fought three battles and triumphed in all, capturing five countries in one go. Taiping Dao, however, had fought only two battles and only gained three nations¡¯ territories. This comparison clearly showed the declining momentum of Taiping Dao. What was shown to the outsiders was the rumor actively released by Taiping Dao. After nearly fifty years of fighting, Taiping Dao had lost nearly twenty thousand soldiers, and their military strength was nearly exhausted; not only the upper echelons were unable to continue fighting, but the lower ranks also lacked the capacity. By now, although Taiping Dao was still holding on and had not retreated, In reality, they were just gritting their teeth and trying to maintain the current battle lines. Currently, Taiping Dao was unable to advance but had enough to defend itself. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï It still had a deterrent effect, but the threat had greatly reduced. This was reflected in Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s reaction, their attention towards Taiping Dao had clearly dropped a level. Aside from maintaining the necessary defensive forces on the front line, they had redirected more reserve forces to the western line to resist the increasingly eastward, unstoppable arrogance of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. And Taiping Dao was quietly ignored due to the joint efforts of both sides. Thus, Lu Yuan managed to dodge this disaster. So, when the news arrived, while he felt relieved, he couldn¡¯t help but reflect, ¡°I never expected Song Xiren to be so resolute, and the counterattack from Changqing Immortal Sect came so swiftly. After this defeat, Jiuzhou lost Ding Wanxuan, and Gu Huaiyuan fled. Together with Huang Yuanxiu, who had previously been heavily injured and went into seclusion. Now Jiuzhou still nominally has two Earth Immortals, but both are seriously injured, and at most, they can exert forty to fifty percent of their usual strength, far from their peak condition.¡± At his side, Qing Guanzi, who also received the news and hurried over, couldn¡¯t help but say, ¡°Jiuzhou has suffered a severe blow and its strength is greatly damaged; it is doubtful they can resist Changqing Immortal Sect any further. It¡¯s hard to say whether they can even preserve their current conquests, let alone continue to advance. Although Changqing Immortal Sect succeeded in killing Ding Wanxuan, Song Xiren also died; it was merely a pyrrhic victory. Both Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Changqing Immortal Sect have been weakened, far from their past power. Even if these two sects come together now, they are no match for us. The opportunity we¡¯ve been waiting for has arrived. Should we take action now?¡± Following him, Yi Dancheng, who also heard this, immediately objected, ¡°This proposal is unwise. Right now, Jiuzhou has merely suffered a heavy blow, but they still hold the countries they previously occupied. If we act now, are we supposed to just hand over the three Northern Territories to them? Even after we engage, if a battle breaks down and Changqing Immortal Sect expands its territory in the North alongside Jiuzhou seizing our outlets. Should we also acknowledge the territories they occupy according to the covenant? If we acknowledge that, having lost most of the Northern Territory, would conquered Central, Eastern, and Southern Territories be enough for our master to break through to Heavenly Immortal? If not, are we to directly turn against them and strike, opening another battle with Jiuzhou Immortal Gate? Or should we choose to merge with them, giving up some sovereignty to integrate into the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate system? Whichever choice we make, there will be losses for us. Rather than that, we might as well wait a bit longer. Jiuzhou now, having suffered a terrible defeat with the two remaining leaders, Huang Yuanxiu and Gu Huaiyuan, both heavily injured and in poor condition. A forced move might result in backlash, leading to direct fall on the battlefield. Looking at Changqing Immortal Sect, the two remaining Earth Immortals, whether Yang Jihua or Zhang Xiuzhu, are in much better shape than those in Jiuzhou. Their involvement might as well, at the cost of severe wounds, drag Huang Yuanxiu and Gu Huaiyuan to their deaths. Neither needs to be completely annihilated; just one more death, and the currently maintainable situation in Jiuzhou might instantly collapse. Then, Jiuzhou might seize the chance to counterattack, possibly regaining the previously lost Northern and Western Territories directly. And Jiuzhou, in such a dangerous situation, the condition worsening, might immediately plunge into a crisis. When that happens, they will likely come to us, asking us to intervene. Thus, without exerting any effort, the leadership of Jiuzhou would be handed over to us at Taiping Dao. Wouldn¡¯t this be far better than seizing Jiuzhou by force or voluntarily merging with them?¡± Yi Dancheng, deservedly the avatar with the most interactions with Jiuzhou, analyzed the situation thoroughly. His remarks laid out all the potential issues and weighed the pros and cons of each option clearly. After listening, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but clap his hands, ¡°Alright, then as Yi Dancheng suggested, regarding this matter, let¡¯s not make any moves for now and continue to observe. Here in Su Yun Country, let¡¯s also slow down the new offensive being prepared, and for the time being, don¡¯t attract the attention of Changqing Immortal Sect, allowing them to keep focusing on Jiuzhou. Here in the Eastern Territory, let¡¯s create a safe rear environment for them, enabling the other side to continue consecutively launching battles to reclaim lost territories. However, we can start making some preparations.¡± Chapter 1501 - Chapter 1501 Chapter 583 The Time Has Come_3 ?Chapter 1501: Chapter 583 The Time Has Come_3 Chapter 1501: Chapter 583 The Time Has Come_3 Issue orders for those such as Huang Yun in the rear, apart from retaining Jin Qingyue to sit at Mi Yun Mountain and watch over the rear to guard against any disturbances in the Nine Provinces. The other four should rush to the front line and join us. Although we are stationary here, we must also be ready to attack Changqing Mountain and determine the fate of the heavens in one battle.¡± Lu Yuan made his arrangements. He continued to observe while being ready to attack at any moment. In this significant affair, the Taiping Dao still chose to hide. To the outside world, this appeared as if the Taiping Dao had been terrified by the brutality of the battle, causing its three Earth Immortals to shrink back in fear, not daring to provoke the Changqing Immortal Sect any further. Because of this, they even forcibly halted their battle preparations, choosing to stay put and fortify their position. Such actions naturally elicited laughter from outsiders. The severely battered Nine Provinces cursed loudly, denouncing the Taiping Dao¡¯s cowardice. They also repeatedly sent messengers, demanding that the Taiping Dao immediately launch an attack in the Eastern Territory to alleviate their military pressure in the Northern Territory. However, ignoring these external voices, Lu Yuan acted as if he was unaware, leading the members of the Taiping Dao to continue acting like shrinking turtles. To make it even more convincing, he took several steps backward, such as withdrawing troops, further strengthening the defensive formation of the occupied areas, and severely handling some disciples in his sect who advocated aggression, among other actions. After executing these actions, the outside world became even more convinced that the Taiping Dao had truly chickened out. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? The Changqing Immortal Sect, after observing for several months and finally confirming that the Taiping Dao dared not attack, felt disdain in their hearts but also finally breathed a sigh of relief. The Taiping Dao was frightened and dared not attack. Whether the enemy truly dared not attack or was faking it, based on their behavior over these months, the preparations they had made for a new round of war were undoubtedly ruined. Next, if they wanted to provoke a war again, they would either face the dilemma of inadequate preparation or spend a few more months to reaccumulate enough preparations to launch a war. Whichever case, the Changqing Immortal Sect would have enough time to make a buffering response to deal with any difficulties from the Taiping Dao. In summary, the situation was very favorable, and they could consider launching a full assault. Therefore, after recently achieving a great victory in the Eastern Territory, Yang Jihua, with Zhang Xiuzhu¡¯s support, hurriedly announced his succession to the new position of School Leader in Changqing Mountain. He conducted a simple succession ceremony and then stayed in the Eastern Territory battlefield, personally guarding against the Taiping Dao. The newly promoted School Leader, who had just broken through and had an unstable foundation and who had suffered losses in the previous war, was left in the rear. Zhang Xiuzhu, who had a long-established foundation, was in peak condition, and boasted considerable strength, personally rushed to the Northern Territory, leading the desperate effort of the tens of thousands of cultivators gathered by the Changqing Immortal Sect, launching the first round of counter-attacks since the war started. Faced with the surging offensive from the Changqing Immortal Sect, the recently defeated Nine Provinces could hardly muster much force to resist. Previously ambushed by the Changqing Immortal Sect, not only had Ding Wanxuan died. Following the escape of Gu Huaiyuan, the tens of thousands of cultivators from the Nine Provinces who had accompanied them on the Northern Expedition were slaughtered mercilessly by the grief-stricken and outraged Yang Jihua. Nearly five to six thousand cultivators from the Nine Provinces died at the hands of this Earth Immortal. The remaining two to three thousand were chased down and killed by the disciples of Changqing. Ultimately, only about two thousand managed to escape back to the rear. These survivors, combined with the cultivators left behind, could only manage to barely reestablish a weak defensive line among the nations of the Northern Territory. Thus, facing the formidable counteroffensive of the Changqing Immortal Sect, Gu Huaiyuan, who had retreated to the rear, had no choice but to brace himself, stand out, and personally intervene to resist Zhang Xiuzhu. But Lu Yuan, severely injured, could not sustain long in combat with Zhang Xiuzhu, soon choosing to escape once again. Without him, an Earth Immortal, to block the way, how could mere Formation Earth Immortals stand a chance against a seasoned Earth Immortal? In the end, Zhang Xiuzhu spent months breaking through the territories of the Three Nations in the northern part of Nine Provinces, slaughtering over four thousand disciples from Nine Provinces, and reclaimed the entire northern territory. The outcome of this battle shocked Nine Provinces instantaneously. As for Gu Huaiyuan, having faced two consecutive crushing defeats, his mind was thrown into complete disarray. He could not care for much else, and to avoid dying on the battlefield himself, he dragged his dying body back to Wind and Thunder Path, declaring he would no longer meddle in the Changqing conflicts. However, though he dreaded death, he still had some principles. After escaping, he did not completely abandon Nine Provinces. He still let the new Earth Immortal within his sect lead the hastily gathered two thousand cultivators from his sect to urgently march towards the Western Domain for reinforcements. At the same time, in Yuchan Tao, the Earth Immortal school leader of that sect, seeing the perilous situation of Nine Provinces, finally put aside personal prejudices and stepped forward. He personally led three thousand cultivators to rush to the Western Domain. Even Huang Yuanxiu, after learning about the current situation of Nine Provinces, despite his severe injuries, broke out of his seclusion, chose to take up the heavy burden, and came forward to support Nine Provinces. He also scrambled from his own sources to send a thousand cultivators, to replenish the heavily lost armies of Nine Provinces on the battlefield. With the efforts of these three Earth Immortals and the arrival of six thousand new reinforcements, after consolidating with some of the remaining defeated troops of Nine Provinces, they finally regrouped over ten thousand cultivators in the Western Domain. Then, led by the three Earth Immortals, at the border between the Western and Northern domains, they set up a new line of defense. Zhang Xiuzhu, leading his victorious troops, attacked this defense line several times, losing over a thousand soldiers and even losing a Human Immortal, but ultimately failed to break through. The counterattack of the Changqing Immortal Sect was forced into a deadlock. The dark shadow of the disastrous defeat of Nine Provinces finally began to fade somewhat, stabilizing their position. But good fortune never comes in pairs, and misfortune does not come singly. Just when Nine Provinces was breathing a sigh of relief, bad news suddenly came from the rear. Zhen Xuan, who had been rigorously preparing to break through to Earth Immortal with the thorough support of Nine Provinces. After hearing the news that his rival Yang Jihua had become an Earth Immortal first, and that Ding Wanxuan had been ambushed and killed by the Changqing Immortal Sect. This true person, Zhen Xuan, couldn¡¯t help but waver. In his seclusion, he attempted a forced breakthrough to Earth Immortal, eager for quick success. But his unstable spirit was invaded by inner demons, causing him to fall directly during the Wind Tribulation. With the fall of Ding Wanxuan, the hope of Nine Provinces rising was shattered with the death of Zhen Xuan. Since then, facing the decline of mature true persons, with only some newly emerged true persons remaining, the five sects of the Western Domain truly entered an era of unprecedented decline. Without a new Earth Immortal to take charge, relying only on some external branches of support, Nine Provinces could preserve its inheritance, but without a strong figure of equal standing, it also lost its voice. In this competition with Taiping Dao, vying for the dominion over the Changqing domain, the Western Domain Immortal Sects had utterly failed. And at this stage, although neither Huang Yuanxiu nor Gu Huaiyuan had died, Lu Yuan¡¯s awaited opportunity had truly arrived. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Therefore, he decided it was time for the Great Plain Path to take action. Chapter 1502 - Chapter 1502 Chapter 584 Taking Over the Nine Provinces ?Chapter 1502: Chapter 584: Taking Over the Nine Provinces Chapter 1502: Chapter 584: Taking Over the Nine Provinces The war had lasted for forty-eight years, winter. At the front line of Su Yun Country. ¡°My Lord, a message has come from the Nine Provinces; they¡¯re asking us to dispatch troops and launch an attack from the Eastern Territory to alleviate the pressure they¡¯re facing in the Western Domain.¡± Lu Yuan was stationed at Yi Dancheng, brimming with excitement as he brought news from the Western Domain: ¡°The five sects of the Western Domain have jointly issued a statement that if we are willing to take action, they are ready to recognize us as the lead, and thereafter, they will only follow the Taiping Dao. In addition to this, other sects such as the Heavenly River Sect, Wind and Thunder Path, and Yuchan Tao have also chosen to default. In particular, Wind and Thunder Path; Gu Huaiyuan has been scared out of his wits. He privately contacted me, indicating that if we are willing to act and quickly end this war, they will support us becoming the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate Alliance Leader. As for Yuchan Tao, their School Leader also doesn¡¯t want to get involved in the Changqing battlefield anymore. Our two sects joined forces and fought fiercely at first, but now we are at a stalemate, and even in the battlefield there, we are at a disadvantage. Too many have died; far more than when the war began and each sect was optimistic. Now, because their own strength has been greatly diminished, the sects near Yuchan Tao have started to stir. The reputation of Jiuzhou Immortal Gate in the surrounding areas is really not good. Seeing their plight, many Immortal Sects that have old grudges with them want to take advantage of their misfortunes. Previously, when we joined forces, our momentum was overwhelming, and we made the Qing Immortal Sect retreat in defeat, scattering their forces. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 When other Immortal Sects saw this, even if they had their own ideas, out of awe for our momentum, they dared not act. But now that the Nine Provinces have retreated and their momentum has plummeted, it¡¯s become difficult to suppress other sects. The environment around Yuchan Tao is really bad. They are eager to extract themselves and wish to lead their troops back to ensure the safety of their home base. Right now, with the Qing Immortal Sect pressing hard on the front line, if Yuchan Tao withdraws their forces, the Nine Provinces will certainly not be able to withstand the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s attack. It¡¯s likely that as soon as they retreat, they would face destruction on their heels. So they stay put, in a situation resembling being on the back of a tiger and finding it hard to dismount, unable to move. However, their grim situation does not allow the School Leader of Yuchan Tao to leave their sect for a long time, which has put them in a dilemma. Therefore, Yuchan Tao has also contacted me, hoping that we of Taiping Dao could send an Earth Immortal to the Western Domain to hold up the battlefield there and help the five sects of the Nine Provinces to stop the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s offensive. If we can achieve this, then Yuchan Tao will support us in becoming the new Jiuzhou League Leader. As for the Heavenly River Sect, although their situation is not great, they are the most supportive of the Nine Provinces¡¯ revival cause. Now that we have finally seen the fruits of battle and the hope of eliminating the Qing Immortal Sect, they are the last ones willing to withdraw. Huang Yuanxiu, even when seriously injured, still said he could go to the battlefield and courageously fight to the death with Zhang Xiuzhu of the Qing Immortal Sect. They still want to keep fighting. So when Huang Yuanxiu contacted me, he also hinted that as long as we of Taiping Dao continue this war, leading Jiuzhou Immortal Gate and Qing Immortal Sect to fight on. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Then they would also support us to become the new Alliance Leader, and the Heavenly River Sect would be willing to heed our command. Now, the three sects outside the Nine Provinces territory have all expressed their support for our control over the entire Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Inside Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, there is also no opposition, and they welcome us as well. The time has come for us to completely unify the Nine Provinces; it is time for us to begin the unification of the Changqing Domain.¡± Yi Dancheng spoke in one breath, reporting to Lu Yuan the results of his efforts over the past few days. Since the fall of Ding Wanxuan a year ago, he had been tasked with opening up relations in the Nine Provinces, trying to take control of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate when they were in decline. Now, after more than a year of effort, he had finally achieved a major success. The entire Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, along with the various veins of the outer Nine Provinces, has all expressed their welcome for Taiping Dao to take over the Nine Provinces. The only opposition was not against Taiping Dao taking over the Nine Provinces, but against ending the war. Regarding those like the Heavenly River Sect, who are obsessed with war, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t know what to say. But one thing he could be certain of, that as long as he followed their wishes and was able to destroy the Qing Immortal Sect, completing the long-standing wish of the entire Nine Provinces system, the Heavenly River Sect would undoubtedly become his biggest supporter later on. Taiping Dao within the Nine Provinces would also have a stable and reliable ally. This was definitely something to rejoice over. With the Heavenly River Sect there, once Taiping Dao revealed its strength and gained control over the entire Changqing Domain. Even if the Immortal Gates of the outer Nine Provinces were extremely dissatisfied with Taiping Dao¡¯s hidden strength, any subsequent actions they might want to take, the Heavenly River Sect would also likely oppose and meddle, becoming a troublemaker for the outer Nine Provinces. Even if they did not oppose and remained neutral, it would be a great support for Taiping Dao. As for the other Immortal Gates in the Changqing Domain, a bunch without even an Earth Immortal left, and even Human Immortals, after successive devastating defeats in the war, only two remained in their declined state. What sort of say could these people have? Why should their opinions matter? Honestly, with just those two Human Immortals and barely more than three thousand Cultivators remaining, their strength was not even comparable to a vassal Immortal Sect under Taiping Dao before the war. The Immortal Gates within the Changqing Domain were truly in decline following the present era of Ding Wanxuan and after the future death of Zhen Xuan. Chapter 1503 - Chapter 1503 Chapter 584 Taking Over the Nine Provinces_2 ?Chapter 1503: Chapter 584: Taking Over the Nine Provinces_2 Chapter 1503: Chapter 584: Taking Over the Nine Provinces_2 Whether they could rise again in the future was a question. Even if they could rise again, without four to five thousand years of recuperation, they would not be able to regain their strength. Moreover, if Lu Yuan truly unified the Changqing Domain, would he really allow such a strongly independent and separatist force as the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect to emerge within his own ranks, within his own territory? That was certainly impossible. Since they had pushed him to become the Jiuzhou League Leader, holding such a prestigious and high position, of course, he would not hold it in vain. Since Jiuzhou had already declined, might as well let them fall completely. It was simply too much to have six Immortal Sects within a single Great Domain. How could one tolerate others sleeping soundly by one¡¯s couch? It would be better to turn into one sect with five subsidiary lineages. With absolute strength in his hand and holding the highest prestige, his opponents being so weak, Lu Yuan was confident in assimilating these Jiuzhou Immortal Sects. Therefore, after listening to the attitudes of the other Jiuzhou Immortal Sects, Lu Yuan no longer hesitated and decisively declared, ¡°Good, with their recognition and support, there will be no problems for me to take over Jiuzhou and unify the Changqing Domain.¡± Yi Dancheng said excitedly, ¡°The situation has progressed to this point, my lord, can we dispatch our troops now?¡± With the unification of the Changqing Domain at hand, nearly two thousand years of planning were about to come true, and whether it was Lu Yuan or his avatar, they were all boiling with excitement. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï Lu Yuan said solemnly, ¡°Of course, you can. Relay my order that Taiping Dao formally accepts the invitation from Jiuzhou, joins them, and takes over as the Alliance Leader. Let this news be made known to the world.¡± Yi Dancheng nodded, ¡°Yes, I will take care of it!¡± Hence, with the full cooperation from Jiuzhou¡¯s side and with Taiping Dao well-prepared, as soon as they made their move, the other party chose to surrender. Messengers from all five sects of the Western Domain came, but compared to the grandeur when they first sent messengers to Taiping Dao, this time their presentation was quite pitiful. All five school leaders had arrived; after all, to meet the Alliance Leader, each sect¡¯s decision-maker had to be present in person to complete the oath-taking ceremony. However, out of these five school leaders, except for the leaders of the Azure Dragon Sect and Haiyun Pavilion, who were of True Immortal cultivation, the other three sects had fallen to such a state that they could only rely on a leader with the cultivation of Five Qi Towards Primordial to perform a facade. This was a far cry from the past when most of their leaders were of Earth Immortal realm. ?¦Ï???.§ã? The extent of Jiuzhou¡¯s decline was hard to believe, especially given that less than two thousand years ago, they had been a powerful Immortal Sect with three Earth Immortals and more than ten Human Immortals. It was true; the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect had fallen. Aside from the five sects of the Western Domain, sects like the Wind and Thunder Path and the Heavenly River Sect also had their highest frontline commanders attending the ceremony. Since it was wartime, everything was kept simple. Taiping Dao convened with Jiuzhou, made blood vows with various sects, swore oaths to Heaven and Earth, and after taking their mutual oaths, they formally established the league covenant. From then on, Taiping Dao smoothly ascended to the position of Jiuzhou League Leader. After the oath-taking ceremony, Lu Yuan, who had now become the Jiuzhou League Leader, asked the leaders of the sects to stay behind to discuss military affairs. Conference hall. ¡°Jade Toad Tao Master, I know your sect is unstable in its rear, and you are anxious to leave; this is a natural sentiment that I can understand. But the war has reached a critical point, and we have managed to fight our way to the stronghold of Changqing Immortal Sect, achieving an advantage that hasn¡¯t been seen for over ten thousand years. The long-cherished wish of our ancestors relies on us during this critical moment; how can we simply give up?¡± Lu Yuan looked at Fu Baopu, the leader of the Jade Toad Path who subtly revealed the notion of withdrawing troops after forming the alliance, and earnestly advised, ¡°Now that my Taiping Dao has taken over the position of the Jiuzhou League Leader, we naturally bear the responsibility of fulfilling the legacy of our predecessors, leading Jiuzhou to battle Changqing Immortal Sect to the death. I have decided that in three days, we will launch a new offensive against Changqing Immortal Sect, leading ten True Immortals and tens of thousands of cultivators from my sect to fiercely attack the Eastern Territory. This time, we will not retreat until Changqing Mountain is broken. However, such a great battle cannot be won by Taiping Dao alone, even if we are fearless and eager to fight on the battlefield; extinguishing Changqing Immortal Sect is not easy. To achieve this great ambition, we need the combined efforts of all the Jiuzhou sects. In this great battle, my Taiping Dao will take the lead, acting as the main force. The other five sects from the Western Domain, as well as your honored sects from the external territories, need only serve as a feint, launching a deceptive attack in the Northern Territory to help contain some of Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s forces. There¡¯s no need to be too serious or fight too fiercely; will this do?¡± Although the strength in his hands was already enough to annihilate the Changqing Immortal Sect in one battle, after all, they have been the overlords of the Changqing Domain for over seventy thousand years, with exceptional foundations. Even a leaking ship has three pounds of nails. Facing such a Heavenly Immortal Sect, it¡¯s better to be cautious. During battle, to bring in some allies, even if merely for a distraction, to help attract some firepower, is worth it. Accustomed to being prudent, Lu Yuan was, as always, planning to secure his position before taking action. ¡°It¡¯s true, what Alliance Leader Lu said is right. The venerated spirits of our ancestors from Jiuzhou are watching us, day and night, hoping we will vanquish the Changqing Immortal Sect and revive the Nine Spirits Tao Inheritance. Now, we finally see the hope of success, yet you talk of giving up and withdrawing our forces. If we really withdraw, what was the purpose of all the battles we have fought before? For this battle, the Jiuzhou sects have suffered nearly a hundred thousand casualties among disciples and lost twenty-eight True Immortals. Chapter 1504 - Chapter 1504 Chapter 584 Taking Over the Nine Provinces_3 ?Chapter 1504: Chapter 584: Taking Over the Nine Provinces_3 Chapter 1504: Chapter 584: Taking Over the Nine Provinces_3 Even Elder Brother Ding had perished on the battlefield. Having paid such a heavy toll and borne such a great price, at this juncture, could retreat be as simple as declaring it? Whoever retreated would be betraying the deceased fellow disciples, betraying the ancestral masters of generations past, betraying the entirety of the Nine Provinces. Whoever dared suggest withdrawal would be branded a traitor, and would become an enemy of mine, Huang Yuanxiu!¡± After Lu Yuan had spoken, Huang Yuanxiu immediately echoed his sentiments with vigor. Judging by his stern tone, it was clear he was dead serious. Should Fu Baopu truly dare to call for a retreat, he might well come to blows with him on the spot. The School Leaders of the Five Sects from the Western Domain, each with relatively modest strength, did not dare to speak in front of their seniors. But by their expressions, it was obvious that they agreed with continuing the fight. This was understandable. Given the current strength of the Five Sects from the Western Domain, if the reinforcements from the other territories withdrew, they alone, even with the newly acknowledged Taiping Dao as their big brother, would struggle to fend off Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s assault. At that point, Taiping Dao might remain unaffected, possibly even able to continue controlling territories in the Central and Eastern Regions and holding onto their spoils of war. But it would be difficult for the Five Sects from the Western Domain. Without the help of other forces, Taiping Dao would naturally prioritize its own preservation, only offering aid to the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects if they had any strength to spare. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï Theoretically, for Taiping Dao to secure the Central and Eastern Territories, it would suffice to assign an Earth Immortal to guard each location. They should be able to divert another Earth Immortal to help in the Western Domain. However, the current momentum of Qing Immortal Sect showed signs of a turn from adversity to prosperity; after being suppressed to the limit, the sect¡¯s Qi Luck began to surge. Now only Yang Jihua had become an Earth Immortal, but if this dragged on for several decades or centuries, the other two True Persons of Qing Immortal Sect in seclusion might also break through to Earth Immortals. Should that come to pass, the number of Earth Immortals in Qing Immortal Sect would swiftly return to four. These four Earth Immortals need only leave one to defend their Eastern Territory homeland while the other three could participate in the Western Domain battlefield. By then, facing one against three, even if Taiping Dao sent an Earth Immortal as reinforcement, they would likely struggle to withstand the enemy¡¯s onslaught. And if Taiping Dao could not hold firm, the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects, with their few remaining strong figures, would stand even less chance against Qing Immortal Sect after its rise. Should such a scenario unfold, the demise of the Five Sects from the Western Domain would likely be a matter of hours or days. If not for this dire situation they faced, they certainly would not have so readily conceded, setting aside their pride and humbling themselves before Taiping Dao. All was driven by the imperative of survival. Thus, after having paid such a price, they were naturally extremely dissatisfied with Yuchan Tao¡¯s inclination to retreat. But compared to everyone present, they were of lesser status and the least powerful, without any right to speak. So, they could only express their displeasure with their eyes, daring not to voice it. But even without speaking, the combined influence of these sects¡¯ spokesmen, despite being relatively weak in strength and Cultivation, still exerted substantial pressure on Fu Baopu due to their past renown and mutual affection. Seeing that Taiping Dao, Heavenly River Sect, and the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects, one after another, were resolved to continue the battle, facing such a prevailing sentiment. The hesitant Earth Immortal from Wind and Thunder Path, Lu Luoxian, finally spoke out. ¡°Friend Fu, since all the fellow Daoists wish to engage in another battle, and the current situation, although slightly disadvantageous on the Western Domain battlefield, has not led to a complete routing, and the front line is still being held. Furthermore, with our arrival as reinforcements, our strength on the Western Domain battlefield has been restored, ample enough for another battle with Qing Immortal Sect. Moreover, the main force of this next fight will be led by Alliance Leader Lu¡¯s Taiping Dao, with the rest of us serving as flanking forces to distract the enemy on secondary battlefields. Such tasks are not too arduous. Even if unsuccessful, we can retain our strength without suffering too great a loss. Therefore, there is indeed no need to give up. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Let us all make one more effort to fight those Qing traitors. If, in the end, we are truly unable to hold our ground, it will not be too late to withdraw then. What do you think, Daoist friend?¡± Lu Luoxian also represented the stance of Wind and Thunder Path, indicating a willingness to keep fighting. The usual stance of Wind and Thunder Path had been like Yuchan Tao¡¯s, generally reluctant to get involved with affairs in the Changqing Domain. Their participation this time had been spurred by the hope of annihilating Qing Immortal Sect, ending a grudge of seventy thousand years in one fell swoop. Now, after such a devastating loss in a single battle and still not victorious, Wind and Thunder Path should have also chosen to withdraw according to past practice. But who would have thought that Wind and Thunder Path¡¯s Qi Luck would have risen in recent years, bringing forth two Earth Immortals to their fold? Now that Gu Huaiyuan had returned to their stronghold, with an Earth Immortal like him in place, even if injured, he could still deter the surrounding areas and secure Wind and Thunder Path¡¯s foundations. Yuchan Tao did not enjoy such circumstances, which is why Fu Baopu did not want to risk further, prioritizing the preservation of strength and wishing to withdraw. But now, seeing that all the Allies, even the usually aligned Wind and Thunder Path, did not want to retreat but to keep fighting, confronted by this overwhelming trajectory, Fu Baopu no longer had the heart to isolate himself from the Nine Provinces and thus could not persist in his call for retreat. In a state of helpless compromise, he could only agree with a nod, ¡°Since none of the Daoist friends wish to retreat, let us continue the fight. However, I must state frankly: if there is no progress after this war, then Yuchan Tao must withdraw. At that time, none of the Daoist friends will be allowed to stop me!¡± ¡°Agreed!¡± Lu Yuan, seeing that everyone had assented to his views, could not help but laugh heartily and promptly responded, ¡°Rest assured, friend Fu. If we do not prevail in this war and you wish to withdraw, I will not obstruct you.¡± Speaking thus, he took a sweeping look around and proclaimed, ¡°Since this Daoist friend has consented to another battle, I now formally issue the decree as the Jiuzhou League Leader: all the Immortal Sects of the Nine Provinces, rise again for the Northern Expedition. To fight once more against those Changqing traitors!¡± ¡°By the Alliance Leader¡¯s command!¡± ¡°To fight once more against those Changqing traitors!¡± ¡°Northern Expedition!¡± All the True Persons and School Leaders present, upon the Alliance Leader¡¯s command, accepted their charge solemnly. And with that order delivered, the Nine Provinces commenced another offensive for the Northern Expedition. Chapter 1505 - Chapter 1505 Chapter 585 Scorched Earth Policy ?Chapter 1505: Chapter 585: Scorched Earth Policy Chapter 1505: Chapter 585: Scorched Earth Policy The Nine Provinces had decided to conduct a Northern Expedition, involving the movement of two large armies. Naturally, the scale of this action could not go unnoticed. Thus, as soon as the news broke, the Changqing Immortal Sect in the north, through spies planted in both sects, became privy to this development. Upon hearing such significant news, Yang Jihua, who had just succeeded as the School Leader, became somewhat panicked and immediately summoned his uncle, Zhang Xiuzhu, to discuss countermeasures. ¡°Uncle, Taiping Dao has just secured the position of Jiuzhou League Leader, and Lu Yuan is full of pride and ambition. He announced the continuation of the Northern Expedition as soon as he took over. The two armies of the Nine Provinces are once again mobilizing, attacking us from the northern and eastern territories. Moreover, this campaign, initiated by Lu Yuan soon after his appointment as League Leader, is precisely when he intends to make a significant impact to consolidate loyalty among his followers. Given this relation, Taiping Dao will undoubtedly exert themselves to the utmost in this Northern Expedition. I fear they won¡¯t be like the previous few attacks, where they shirked their duties under the guise of confusion. The two Northern Expeditionary armies of the Jiuzhou, the eastern front under Taiping Dao, boast three Earth Immortals and over ten thousand cultivators. The western front, the United Army of Jiuzhou, also has three Earth Immortals and over ten thousand cultivators. However, our Changqing Immortal Sect only has you and me as Earth Immortals. Moreover, after several major battles recently, before we could start our counterattacks, we suffered from numerous defeats and lost several nations. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?0 Even though we made a recovery attempt, the death toll was substantial in regaining lost territories. After successive wars, casualties have reached forty to fifty thousand. The reserves accumulated by the previous School Leader have been nearly depleted. As of now, I can gather at most thirty thousand cultivators, among whom the quality is mixed, with most only having gathered one or two levels of Qi. Those who have gathered Three Qi are less than five thousand. As for Human Immortals, aside from two brothers who are still in closed-door training, there are only a mere seven in our entire sect. With such strength, how can we possibly resist the United Army of Jiuzhou?¡± Yang Jihua looked deeply troubled, his mind somewhat in disarray from the shocking news. Although he had led the sect to launch a counterattack soon after his ascension and had swiftly recovered all the lost territories of the northern domain, dealing back-to-back defeats to the United Army of Jiuzhou and greatly boosting his prestige, Yang Jihua didn¡¯t allow pride to cloud his judgment and become arrogant. He understood clearly that the current victory was merely the result of the previous School Leader, Song Xiren, who exchanged his own life for these achievements. Had it not been for Song Xiren killing Ding Wanxuan, which left the Jiuzhou in the Western Territory leaderless, and then continuously heavily injuring Huang Yuanxiu, Gu Huaiyuan, and others, causing the Jiuzhou Earth Immortals to lose their nerve, and Zhen Xuan of the Jiuzhou, overwhelmed by the disastrous news, failing to break through to Earth Immortal realm and dying from the backlash of the Wind Tribulation, resulting in the loss of a successor for Western Jiuzhou, only then was the United Army of Jiuzhou severely weakened, allowing him to claim significant victories. But this was merely an illusion. Regaining the northern lost territories wasn¡¯t much of an achievement. It was only because Jiuzhou was in disarray that they failed to organize sufficient defensive forces, allowing him to seize the opportunity. Such circumstances were definitely not sustainable. Once Jiuzhou regrouped, given Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s current weakened state, they would be helpless against them. The more victories they achieved, the faster Changqing Immortal Sect might face decline and extinction. With too many forces committed to the attack, once the momentum could not be sustained, a large portion of their vital force would be lost in the offensive. When the enemy launched their counterattack, the forces available for defense would be reduced. The reality was just so. After launching the counterattack, the victories of Changqing Immortal Sect did not last long. After the initial panic of losing the northern domain, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, with reinforcements from various sectors arriving, quickly stabilized their defenses. With three Earth Immortals personally overseeing the front line in the Western Territory, leading over ten thousand cultivators, they established a solid defensive line, effectively blocking the Changqing forces outside the Western Territory. Zhang Xiuzhu led tens of thousands in several attacks, but aside from losing thousands of soldiers and even losing a Human Immortal, the gains were negligible. Even though Zhang Xiuzhu was a veteran Earth Immortal, he was only in the early stage of that realm. While his strength was quite good among the early Earth Immortals, facing three immortals of the same rank at once, especially when they were within a formation that enhanced their powers, he couldn¡¯t gain the upper hand. In such circumstances, with the enemy focusing solely on defense, Zhang Xiuzhu could do little; he simply couldn¡¯t get through to them. ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Forcefully attacking only resulted in heavy losses and a retreat with their tails between their legs. As long as they didn¡¯t underestimate the enemy and act rashly, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect, united, would have no issue holding a domain like the Western Territory. But this wasn¡¯t the gravest danger. Even previously, when Jiuzhou occupied the Western Territory, they were still at a disadvantage against the Changqing Immortal Sect, which controlled most of the Changqing Domain, posing at most a minor threat. But the current Jiuzhou was not just limited to the Western Territory army. To Changqing Immortal Sect, the real critical danger lay in Taiping Dao, which now occupied the entire Central and Southern Territories and had deeply penetrated the Eastern Territory, with their forces aimed directly at Changqing Mountain. This was the lethal threat that needed urgent resolution. Compared to Taiping Dao, the already withdrawn and disheartened Western Territory army posed markedly less of a threat. Changqing Immortal Sect had only defeated a Western army, severely damaging only half of the enemy¡¯s forces. The Eastern Land Army, however, remained at their peak, with minimal losses. Faced with such a formidable enemy and having only achieved minor victories, Yang Jihua, despite his broader ambitions, could not afford to feel triumphant. Treading on thin ice, vigilant and cautious, assiduously working day and night, he dared not let down his guard. Chapter 1506 - Chapter 1506 Chapter 585 Scorched Earth Policy_2 ?Chapter 1506: Chapter 585 Scorched Earth Policy_2 Chapter 1506: Chapter 585 Scorched Earth Policy_2 These are his current state of mind. And now, one more thing is addeda€¡±panic, confusion, utterly disorienteda€¡±this is Yang Jihua¡¯s state after hearing about the Nine Provinces¡¯ Northern Expedition once again. Because just as he had said above. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? The enemy has six Earth Immortals and twenty thousand troops. These forces are divided into two routes, each with three Earth Immortals and ten thousand cultivators. This also means that in the face of the attack, the Changqing Immortal Sect also has to split its forces to resist the enemy from both routes. If the enemy simply had a greater number of cultivators, that wouldn¡¯t be much of a problem. Although the number of cultivators in the Changqing Immortal Sect has reduced by quite a bit, and their elites have suffered heavy losses, they still have thirty thousand cultivators. Even if the quality is poor, diluted with too much water, they can still barely manage to put up a defense relying on the Formation Method. The focus is still on the number of Earth Immortals where the disparity with the enemy is far too great. They only have two Earth Immortals; splitting them up, one person would be responsible for one route of enemies, meaning each would have to face three Earth Immortals of the same level. Facing three with one, especially when one of the three is an Earth Immortal like Yang Jihua, who has just recently had a breakthrough and even suffered some minor injuries, in less than ideal condition. With such strength facing the enemy, he really couldn¡¯t imagine how to fight? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï Even if they were in a defensive position, capable of temporarily boosting several Formation Method Earth Immortals to help with the Earth Immortal formation, the hope for victory was still too faint. Previously, when Yang Jihua launched a counterattack, he hoped to rely on the overwhelming momentum to scare off the United Army of the Nine Provinces. As long as he could scare off those Immortal Sects from outside the region, then even if the Taiping Dao combined the Western Domain Immortal Sect, they would at most maintain the current situation and it would be very hard to achieve more. But who would have thought that, faced with the crisis, the Taiping Dao urgently assumed the position of the Nine Provinces¡¯ League Leader and then quickly consolidated the people¡¯s hearts and once again launched a Northern Expedition. This completely unraveled the many efforts Yang Jihua had made before. Without scaring off the Nine Provinces from outside the region, the strength of the Nine Provinces remained intact. And because it was the Taiping Dao that took over as the League Leader, the interests of the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate were integrated, and their power could be exerted in unison, no longer in the previously scattered and unaligned state. In such a state, the Nine Provinces were even stronger than before Ding Wanxuan¡¯s death. But their Changqing Immortal Sect was not as strong as they were before Song Xiren¡¯s death. This increase and decrease had made the situation much worse. If before the war, the Changqing Immortal Sect was in imminent danger, then now, the crisis is just a matter of moments. A clever wife can¡¯t cook without rice. Owning significantly less strength and facing such a strong enemy, even with Yang Jihua¡¯s temperament, he couldn¡¯t help feeling lost and didn¡¯t know what to do. As the School Leader, he originally took over and led the sect to several victories, thinking it was the beginning of the sect¡¯s revival. But barely a year later, the situation took a sharp turn for the worse. Looking back, Yang Jihua instantly realized that he had immediately gone from being the mainstay of revival to becoming a monarch of a nation on the brink of destruction. This huge contrast could drive a less stable person insane. At this moment, he was only feeling lost and disoriented, not outright giving up, thinking actively about salvation, was already sufficient to live up to his status. ¡°School Leader, faced with the current situation, I also don¡¯t have any good solutions.¡± Facing the expectations of his School Leader nephew, as the oldest elder and the person with the highest cultivation in his sect, Zhang Xiuzhu felt an immense pressure. But reality was laid out in front of them. The Changqing Immortal Sect had run out of fuel, and there simply wasn¡¯t any strategy that could turn things around. No matter how painful it was in their hearts, or how unwilling they were, facing the bloody reality, they could only lament helplessly. All he could say was, ¡°Now, we can only resist step by step, hold on until the end, and keep resisting the enemy over every country and every piece of land. Just hold on for another thirty or fifty years, the other two nephews might also be able to make a breakthrough to Earth Immortal in times of crisis, just like the School Leader. Then, the current crisis we¡¯re facing would be resolved instantaneously. Even if not, the Nine Provinces are the aggressors, and we can defend with our formation, even with lesser strength, we can still engage in one or two battles with them. Now we have already recaptured the nine countries of the Northern Territory, and in the Eastern Territory, with the exception of the three countries occupied by the Taiping Dao, we still have six countries¡¯ land. With a total of fifteen countries, if we set up defenses layer by layer and fight to the death, those Nine Provinces traitors won¡¯t take these territories without losing tens of thousands of lives. They might have more Earth Immortals, so what? I refuse to believe they have thirty to fifty thousand lives to throw away. Once the Nine Provinces¡¯ cultivators are all defeated, just a few Earth Immortals won¡¯t be able to hold the territory even if they capture it. As long as we keep holding on, there¡¯s still hope.¡± As he spoke, Zhang Xiuzhu¡¯s heart bled. He knew that while the method mentioned could work, it also entailed further depleting the sect¡¯s foundation. The Nine Provinces, being the attacking side, inevitably sustained losses. If they continue to resist with the land of fifteen countries, one day they will exhaust the troops of the Nine Provinces. But similarly, with such staunch resistance, the Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s casualties won¡¯t be trivial either. The enemy ultimately had more Earth Immortals and held the advantage in top-level combat power. And in the Immortal Realm, it¡¯s the top-tier cultivators who are the deciding factor. With such an advantage on the enemy¡¯s side, even if their forces were wiped out and they couldn¡¯t fight anymore, they could still deal a heavy blow to the Changqing Immortal Sect. In the end, both sides would likely be severely wounded and would have to cease hostilities. Chapter 1507 - Chapter 1507 Chapter 585 Steadfast Walls, Scorched Earth_3 ?Chapter 1507: Chapter 585 Steadfast Walls, Scorched Earth_3 Chapter 1507: Chapter 585 Steadfast Walls, Scorched Earth_3 But a truce is vastly different for the attacking side and the defensive side. In the Nine Provinces, a truce meant there were no more forces to use, making it difficult to maintain the offensive; they were unable to continue the fight. However, being unable to continue did not mean they had to relinquish the territory they had previously conquered. It simply meant the other side could not advance any further. So, the territories lost previously also meant that after the truce, the Changqing Immortal Sect would not be able to reclaim them. Since the Nine Provinces had exhausted themselves, they were similarly depleted. Being barely able to block the enemy and struggling to continue surviving to maintain their inheritance was already considered quite an achievement. Thinking about counter-attacking also depended on whether they had the strength to do so. And with the current strength of the Nine Provinces, for the Changqing Immortal Sect to exhaust the enemy¡¯s forces, they would have to lose at least half their territories to achieve that goal. What¡¯s left of their territory in the end, who knew if they could even retain three to five countries? The Changqing Immortal Sect was far too weak at this point, causing Zhang Xiuzhu, who proposed this plan, to have very little confidence in his heart, not daring to claim how much heritage they could preserve. Now, he did not harbor too many hopes; everything focused on guarding their heritage and keeping the sect alive. Everything else could be discussed after weathering this calamity. ¡°Alright, then as Uncle-Master has said, if the Nine Provinces want to destroy us, then before we die, we must also knock out a tooth from their mouth.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 Hearing Zhang Xiuzhu¡¯s suggestion, he gritted his teeth and said, ¡°I want to see, with the great foundation of my Changqing Immortal Sect laid out here, if they have the teeth to chew it down.¡± Just like that. In response to the Nine Provinces¡¯ renewed Northern Expedition, the Changqing Immortal Sect was ready for a scorched-earth defense, a desperate resistance, risking mutual destruction. Then, they allocated responsibility for areas based on the different strengths and resolve of the enemy¡¯s two main forces. Since the troops of the Western Territory of the Nine Provinces were disunited and one of the three leading Earth Immortals, Huang Yuanxiu, was seriously injured and relatively weaker in strength, Yang Jihua, an Earth Immortal who had just broken through and still bore some injuries, was assigned to resist this force. While the complete and forceful Taiping Tao Sect, from the same Immortal Sect as their army, would be opposed by the veteran Earth Immortal, Zhang Xiuzhu. Though the two were responsible for different directions, their goal and strategy were the same, to delay as long as possible. Following this strategy, the Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s forces were quickly deployed in both the northern and eastern territories. At the same time, on the side of the Nine Provinces, after three days of brief adjustments, the two-pronged Northern Expedition forces officially declared their campaign. The decisive battle determining the fate and ownership of the Changqing Domain then commenced. ¡­ Su Yun Country. When Zhang Xiuzhu led the main forces of the Changqing Domain to this country to set up defenses against the army of the Taiping Tao Sect, On the other side, leading all the main forces of the Taiping Tao Sect, Lu Yuan was making the final arrangements before the battle. Or rather, he was arranging for his Avatars. In this Northern Expedition battle, the Taiping Tao Sect had mobilized three Earth Immortals, ten Human Immortals, and tens of thousands of cultivators on the surface. Let¡¯s not discuss those cultivators, who were merely cannon fodder. But among the Human Immortals, apart from six nurtured by the Taiping Tao Sect, the remaining four were avatars masquerading as Earth Immortals, all Lu Yuan¡¯s. As for vassals like the Jintai Gate? They had been consumed on the battlefield during the previous thirty years of war. Now, in the Southern Domain, besides the Qingyu Country occupied by the Giant Spirit Sect, there were no more small Immortal Sects lefta€¡±only the vastly dominant Taiping Tao Sect. In times of war, everything becomes cruel. Those weaker smaller Immortal Sects were often the ones to perish first. Even without Lu Yuan¡¯s deliberate targeting, merely fulfilling the obligations of a vassal became intolerable for them, and they perished in the war. This common pattern of chaos warrants no further mention. Without those affiliated True Persons, the Taiping Tao Sect¡¯s own direct line of True Persons were already sufficient. Although during the previous battles, the True Persons within the Tao Sect had suffered many casualties, undergoing several replacements, now there were only six left. Such a small number was obviously not enough for a significant campaign. And Lu Yuan didn¡¯t plan to rely on them to win this war. Hence, he did not call these individuals to the meeting but gathered his Avatars for a small internal conference. ¡°Now that my Taiping Tao Sect has unified the Nine Provinces, the Immortal Sects of the Western Territory have been weakened to the extreme and can no longer pose a threat. The external provinces of the Nine Provinces also support us, and we no longer have internal concerns. Therefore, in this northern assault, we need not think about reducing the strength of these allies anymore; it¡¯s completely unnecessary. Retaining their forces also leave us a fallback position. Put bluntly, we have extra shields before our death. The Changqing Immortal Sect has profound heritage, unknown to anyone what secret weapons they have hidden. After all, the Changqing Immortal only died over ten thousand years ago. Facing the unknown, the best method is to leave the unknown utterly unknown, never seeing the light of day or being declared to the world.¡± Lu Yuan looked at his multiple Avatars, laying out his offensive plans, ¡°Therefore, this offensive must be swift. So swift that before the Changqing Immortal Sect can react, we will have breached their sect, destroyed their Tao inheritance, and killed all their disciples. That way, everything becomes a fait accompli; without people, no matter how many secret moves they have, they cannot be executed. Some hidden dangers are thus eliminated without battle.¡± Facing the potential hidden strengths of the Changqing Immortal Sect, Lu Yuan¡¯s approach was to make sure their hidden moves remained hidden forever. All troubles and issues ultimately stem from those who raise them. Eliminate the people, and those issues and troubles cease to be issues and troubles. Barbarians invade, plundering everywhere, causing great suffering to the frontier citizens, and increasing the pressure on border defenses. Then relocate all those frontier people, leaving a thousand miles desolate; let the Barbarians have no one to kill, nothing to plunder. Calamities descend, and the local citizens face both fire and flood. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Then relocate the citizens from the areas afflicted by calamity; then no matter how dire those places become, they won¡¯t affect the citizens who have already moved. This was Lu Yuan¡¯s method when he was the Chu Emperor, facing the appearance of the Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe; it was his solution to deal with a series of barbarian migrations and disasters. Now the situation was different, and the enemy was different. But the principle remained the same. With a slight adjustment, in this place, it would fit perfectly as a countermeasure against the Changqing Immortal Sect. Chapter 1508 - Chapter 1508 Chapter 586 Decapitation Tactics ?Chapter 1508: Chapter 586 Decapitation Tactics Chapter 1508: Chapter 586 Decapitation Tactics ¡°This time, the one coming to stop us is Zhang Xiuzhu from the Qing Immortal Sect, an old rival. Everyone is very familiar with his character and strength, so there is no need to say more. Let us first talk about the deployment of forces for the Northern Expedition.¡± When Lu Yuan was speaking, he waved his hand, and a phantom light emerged, transforming the geography of nine countries in the Eastern Territory. Then he pointed to a location in the middle of the Eastern Territory and said, ¡°Here is Su Yun Country, where Zhang Xiuzhu leads his troops at our military barracks. In this place, the Qing Immortal Sect has stationed six thousand cultivators and one Human Immortal. At the same time, on both sides of Su Yun Country, the countries of Dongxu and Dongyu each have five thousand cultivators guarded by one Human Immortal respectively. These three central nations are united, having built an Earth Immortal formation, blocking our continued advance toward the northeastern region of the Eastern Territory. Under normal circumstances, if we wish to lead a large army towards the rear of the Qing Immortal Sect, we must first break through these three nations¡¯ line of defense. Otherwise, with such a defensive line in the way, even if we dispatch small troops to sneak attack the enemy¡¯s rear, Even though some damage could be caused, the manpower is extremely limited, making it hard to achieve significant results. Even with results, it would not be possible to establish a stable footing in the rear of the Qing Immortal Sect. This is why the Qing Immortal Sect heavily guards this area. Because guarding here is enough to block the enemy from outside.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? Now, the strength of our Taiping Dao is clearly not normal compared to a typical Grand Fairy Door. Other grand fairy doors may be able to deploy a small army, but at most this means carrying the enemy along, supplemented by three to five Human Immortals and dozens of Five Qi Towards Primordial disciples. ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Such an elite squad is sent to harass and sabotage the enemy¡¯s rear to shake their morale. But that is the extent of what such a small army can achieve. The enemy in the rear region also possesses an Earth Immortal formation which can be activated immediately upon the enemy¡¯s approach. However, since the formation is not presided over by a Human Immortal but instead operated by disciples who have not become immortals, its power is limited, at most enough to deal with some Human Immortals but helpless against Earth Immortals. Even with one Earth Immortal, no matter how potent, it is hard to shake such a vast area. But our Taiping Dao is different. Other grand fairy doors have limited numbers of Earth Immortals, at most two to three, or maybe four to five at most. But our Taiping Dao, counting me and all of you avatars, has as many as eight Earth Immortals. This Northern Expedition has even called upon seven Earth Immortals to participate. With so many top-level Earth Immortals, some tactics that ordinary grand fairy doors can¡¯t accomplish, our Taiping Dao can indeed attempt. Based on this, I have formulated a beheading tactic and a cooperation tactic of pincer movement from front and back. First, on the frontline battlefield, to bind the main forces of the Qing Immortal Sect, Qing Guanzi, Yi Dancheng, and Ia€¡±the three of us exposed Earth Immortalsa€¡±will continue to command the army at Su Yun Country to attract the main forces of the Qing Immortal Sect, that is, Zhang Xiuzhu. Then Che Shidao, Jade Brocade, Huang Yun, and Huang Xuan, the four of you, will traverse gaps in the battlefield, cross the frontline, and directly rush towards Changqing Mountain¡­¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s hand swept backward, pointing to a region located at the junction of the Northern and Eastern Territories, behind the country of Dongxu. ¡°This here is Changqing Mountain, located in the northeastern part of Changqing Country in the Eastern Territory, adjacent to the Northern Territory, serving as the hub between the two regions, and also the headquarters of the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s Mountain Gate. If you take this place, you will directly uproot the old nest of the Qing Immortal Sect. Based on the information currently scouted, at Changqing Mountain, the Qing Immortal Sect has left only one Human Immortal to guard. Inside Changqing Mountain, two thousand disciples are stationed, and in various places of nearby Changqing Country, another two thousand disciples are deployed. Changqing Mountain, being the core base and old nest of the Qing Immortal Sect and claiming to be the number one Immortal Mountain in the region, has a protective mountain formation built over seventy thousand years. Depending on the stored terrestrial and spiritual energy inside the mountain, once Changqing Mountain¡¯s protective formation is activated, its power far surpasses that of an ordinary Earth Immortal formation, allegedly able to withstand a Heavenly Immortal at its peak. But this has always been a legend since the Changqing Immortal unified the Changqing Domain, Changqing Mountain has never faced an invasion from external enemies, so naturally, no one has confirmed it. Not to mention, the legendary power is said to be achievable only when the formation operates at its peak. Today¡¯s Changqing Mountain, let alone activating the formation to its peak, even that remaining Human Immortal and four thousand disciples, if they can bring out one-tenth to one-fifth of this formation¡¯s power, that would be impressive.¡± Lu Yuan scoffed disdainfully. Changqing Mountain¡¯s protective mountain formation might indeed have terrifying power, capable of blocking a Heavenly Immortal. But no matter how formidable a formation is, if you cannot activate and operate it, it is useless. Just look at the Earth Immortal formations most frequently used in various battles today. A complete Earth Immortal formation, to operate fully, requires at least a hundred ritual platforms set up throughout a country, each ritual hall either follows the elite route, manned by a Five Qi Towards Primordial cultivator alone supporting one platform, Or it wins by quantity, centering around cultivators who have gathered three to four levels of energy as the core backbone, matched with a large number of cultivators who have gathered one to two levels of energy, gathering two to three hundred people to maintain one ritual hall. For a formation that spans three countries, ideally, it is maintained by three hundred Five Qi Towards Primordial cultivators, which is the most efficient and straightforward way. But this is bound to be impossible to realize.¡± Chapter 1509 - Chapter 1509 Chapter 586 Decapitation Tactics_2 ?Chapter 1509: Chapter 586 Decapitation Tactics_2 Chapter 1509: Chapter 586 Decapitation Tactics_2 At the start of the war, after a thousand years of recuperation, the various powers could perhaps muster three hundred ¡°Five Qi Towards Primordial¡± cultivators to construct a formation. For decades, the number of cultivators in the Changqing Domain had diminished by at least a hundred and fifty thousand due to the war. In the face of such a reduction of elites, the current battlefield, with the exception of Taiping Dao still adhering to an elite strategy, Sects like the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect and the Changqing Immortal Sect had already begun to lower their recruitment standards, drafting a great number of cultivators in the first or second phase of cohesion and seeking victory through sheer numbers. Under these circumstances, sects had no choice but to employ a strategy of using a few elites in conjunction with a multitude of cannon fodder in order to meet the demands of sustaining each Earth Immortal formation. Like the united front of Su, Dongxu, and Dongyu Countries against the Changqing Immortal Sect, it was with three thousand elites paired with more than four times cannon fodder, totaling sixteen thousand individuals, that a defensive line was established. So many people were needed just to barely construct and maintain the operation of an Earth Immortal formation. Compared to the start of the war when it took only three to five thousand people to sustain a large formation, the difference was incalculable. It was evident to what extent the quality of Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s soldiers had declined and been diluted. And if the quality of the soldiers at the vanguard was already like this, Then it wasn¡¯t hard to imagine what the four thousand disciples protected behind the lines at Changqing Mountain might be like. It could only be worse, certainly not better than the front line. With four thousand disciples of even poorer quality, it would be a struggle not just to keep a Heavenly Immortal Array operational, but even an Earth Immortal formation. With so few and such poor quality, were they to be placed on the front line, it¡¯s estimated they would barely fill the inside of a formation, covering half a small country. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï Lu Yuan estimated that they could sustain an Earth Immortal formation on Changqing Mountain, considering the mountain¡¯s powerful protective formation, which might indeed be extraordinary and capable of unleashing formidable power with only a few disciples. He estimated generously, aiming high for a possible outcome. Otherwise, by common reasoning, these four thousand people would only amount to the standard of a Human Immortal Array, and an average one at that. The above details the very foundational requirements necessary to establish and operate a large formation. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï Beyond maintaining the operation of a formation, there are even higher pursuits to aim for. That is to equip the formation with a custodian for each main Formation Core. Take the Earth Immortal formation of the opposing Changqing Immortal Sect for example. Within the formation of the Changqing Immortal Sect in Su, Dongxu, and Dongyu Countries, a Human Immortal was placed at the Formation Core of each country to coordinate the operations of the formations. These Human Immortals responsible for the Formation Cores could gather the power of the formations of a whole country unto themselves, temporarily enhancing their own strength, with the potential to ascend up to the level of an Earth Immortal. This is also where those Earth Immortals of the formations come from. However, these formation Earth Immortals, while possessing the strength of an Earthly Immortal Realm, lacked the corresponding level of cultivation and couldn¡¯t fully harness that power, marking them as the flimsiest of the flimsy. Even an Avatar like Qing Guanzi could easily handle three to five at once, illustrating just how insignificant these formation Earth Immortals really were. But despite the subpar caliber of these formation Earth Immortals, the strength they gained was undeniably real. However inferior an Earth Immortal might be, they were still an Earth Immortal. Three formation Earth Immortals together could confront the weakest Earth Immortal like Qing Guanzi, which somewhat justified the reputation of the Earth Immortal array. Hence, every sect that could afford it would make arrangements for a Human Immortal to oversee each Formation Core. Like those on the other side. Even now, as the Changqing Immortal Sect found itself in dire straits and short-handed, on the two battlefields facing Taiping Dao and the United Army of the Nine Provinces, the Earth Immortal formations on the very frontline still each had a Human Immortal assigned to their Formation Cores. This demonstrates their emphasis on the custodians of the Cores. However, these Earth Immortal formations equipped with Human Immortal custodians at the Formation Cores were still not the complete form of an Earth Immortal array. After ensuring the functioning of the basic elements of the formation and coordination of the Cores, the centerpiece was yet to come. That would be the true custodian of an Earth Immortal formation. To unleash the greatest power of an Earth Immortal formation, ordinary Human Immortals simply do not possess the capability. They lack the necessary level of cultivation and magic power to fully wield and channel the might of the whole formation. Those Human Immortals overseeing the Formation Cores can at best perform as formation Earth Immortals. To the average cultivator, it might appear impressive, but in the eyes of a true Earth Immortal, it¡¯s just a joke. To fully utilize the power of an Earth Immortal formation, at the very least it needs to be overseen by an Earth Immortal to achieve this. Like the opposing Zhang Xiuzhu, who was merely an early-stage Earth Immortal, at most lingering in this realm for a longer period and slightly more experienced. His actual strength still revolved within this level. Under normal circumstances, he would stand no chance against three early-stage Earth Immortals, even against the likes of Qing Guanzi at an early stage; a draw would be rather good already. But sheltered within the Earth Immortal formation, bolstered by the power of the formation, Zhang Xiuzhu, originally only at the early stage of Earth Immortal, instantly ascended a level in strength, displaying the capacity of a mid-stage Earth Immortal. And he was not just any mid-stage Earth Immortal; his strength was decently ranked. In this situation, three ordinary early-stage Earth Immortals entering the formation to challenge the opponent, lacking a small realm, would stand absolutely no chance. Even factoring in Lu Yuan, a mid-stage Earth Immortal cultivator, bringing along two Avatars within the great formation, they would at most manage self-preservation, merely holding their ground for a draw. Chapter 1510 - Chapter 1510 Chapter 586 Decapitation Tactics_3 ?Chapter 1510: Chapter 586 Decapitation Tactics_3 Chapter 1510: Chapter 586 Decapitation Tactics_3 It is simply impossible to defeat the opponent. And if you replace them with three early-stage Earth Immortals of the commonplace variety, it would be even worse. At most, they might save their own lives, but a draw would be out of the question. Therefore, an Earth Immortal formation has three different states. To maintain the operation of the most basic magical platform, coordinate various Formation Cores, and preside over the entire formation. With each progressive state, the formation¡¯s power could increase more than tenfold. An Earth Immortal formation already has such high requirements. Not to mention the even more powerful Heavenly Immortal formations. Even though a Heavenly Immortal formation starts from a higher base, once activated, it can also exhibit considerable power. But this power is probably just on the level of a mediocre Earth Immortal. Those four thousand disciples left behind at Changqing Mountain, even if they could activate the formation, would only be at this level. Even if we estimate a bit higher and include their guarding Human Immortal capable of sustaining a Formation Core, at best he is just an ordinary early-stage Earth Immortal. This level of strength is sufficient to deal with partial forces dispatched by major Immortal Sects. Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s arrangement for those left to guard their lair must have been the result of careful consideration, the best choice they could make. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï It is no small feat to achieve this with limited manpower. But under normal circumstances, while this arrangement can handle small groups of elite enemies, it is clearly insufficient against someone like Lu Yuan who exploits loopholes. ¡°With the cultivators left behind at Changqing Mountain, even if they activate the formation, at most they can only block one Earth Immortal. But you have four Earth Immortals, and if all four of you act together, even a partly activated Great Immortal formationa€¡±let alone a Heavenly Immortal formationa€¡±would absolutely be unable to stop you. So as long as you seize the opportunity, before the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s forces on both front lines can react, and quickly break through the formation, you can take down Changqing Mountain. That way, even if Changqing Mountain has some hidden depths or powerful trump cards, it¡¯s highly unlikely that a mere Human Immortal could make use of them, or even be privy to such secrets. Thus, no one will be able to employ any earth-shattering tactics hidden within the Mountain. All those capable of doing so are currently stationed on the front lines in the Eastern and Northern Territories.¡± This is also why Lu Yuan, despite having so many Avatars, still chose to take down Changqing Mountain first. Because though his forces are strong, the enemy is no fool. Seeing so many Earth Immortals on your side, Zhang Xiuzhu would never engage in a fight to the death with you in Su Yun Country; that would be unwinnable. To survive, the only option would be to flee to Changqing Mountain and then use its Heavenly Immortal formation to contend with the enemy. At that point, a Heavenly Immortal formation, even if not fully activated by Earth Immortals, could exhibit power equivalent to a late-stage Earth Immortal or even stronger with ease. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Faced with such a tough nut to crack, even if Lu Yuan summoned all eight Earth Immortal Avatars, it would be exceedingly difficult to take it down. Without preparing for a siege lasting hundreds or thousands of years, it would be impossible to conquer Changqing Mountain. And if the battle were drawn out that long, then the Five Sects of the weakened Western Domain might slowly recover their strength. Figures from the Nine Provinces Immortal Gate outside the domain, like Huang Yuanxiu and Gu Huaiyuan, would have long since healed their injuries. The compromises made due to injuries would likely lead to more unexpected developments. After all, Taiping Dao hiding their true strength and loafing on the battlefield is something that the old powers of the Nine Provinces would certainly not be pleased with. And if these individuals act up, Taiping Dao might have to face Changqing Mountain on the front line while dealing with the flames of discontent from the old Nine Provinces at home. At that time, caught between difficulties from the front and rear would be enough to make one wish for death. Of course, such a situation must not be allowed to occur. Therefore, taking Changqing Mountain first, cutting off the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s retreat, and then turning back to face their main forces on the front line is undoubtedly the most cost-effective choice. Moreover, with the strength of Taiping Dao, orchestrating such a maneuver is highly feasible. This was the reasoning behind Lu Yuan¡¯s strategy of a decapitation strike. ¡°Let¡¯s set aside Yang Jihua at the Northern Territory front line for now; the United Army of the Nine Provinces will contain him. But Zhang Xiuzhu in Su Yun Country, I will ensure he is firmly ensnared here, with no chance to remove himself. Once you have taken Changqing Mountain, depending on the situation, you can leave one or two people behind to guard and block the enemy¡¯s reinforcements. The rest, maybe two or three, can urgently return to join forces with me for a pincer attack against the enemy across. Gathering together five or six Earth Immortals, Zhang Xiuzhu, no matter how capable, will not be able to stand against us and will surely die here.¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s tone was chilling as he sentenced Zhang Xiuzhu to death. Take down Changqing Mountain, cutting off the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s retreat. Then turn back to crush Su Yun Country¡¯s Changqing forces, thus eliminating two-thirds of the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s main strength. These two tasks, if accomplished quickly, might even be completed within a single day. In one day, even if news travels fast in the Immortal Realm, the moment Taiping Dao captures Changqing Mountain, Yang Jihua in the Northern Nine Provinces would have already received the news that the lair was lost. But as life-and-death enemies for tens of thousands of years, even if they wish to respond, they cannot act before dealing with the immediate threat. Whether the Nine Provinces make a quick breakthrough to seize territory or Yang Jihua rapidly disengages and retreats, neither objective can be achieved within a day or two. With a day or two as a buffer, Lu Yuan can take his time to lead the Taiping Dao forces in stabilizing the entire Eastern Territory. Then, after securing this territory, to march northward, hunting for the bandit Yang in the Northern Territory. By then, facing the combined forces of two armies, tens of thousands of Cultivators, and over a dozen Earth Immortals, even if Yang Jihua possesses sky-reaching abilities or inherits the entire legacy of the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s Qi Luck, the absolute gap in strength would make it difficult for him to overturn the situation. Either he would be annihilated in the Northern Territory, or he would have to follow the example of the old Nine Provinces and escape far away to another domain. First, to flee this deadly place, and then take refuge outside the domain, licking his wounds in darkness and slowly waiting for the right moment to rise again as the decline of the Nine Provinces sets in. An entire cycle repeats itself. It remains to be seen what Yang Jihua will choose. But Lu Yuan¡¯s side has already made its choice, heading toward a bright path of its own. A surprise decapitation attack, turning back to launch a pincer strike, a hunt to the north. Taiping Dao has settled on this plan. Chapter 1511 - Chapter 1511 Chapter 587 The Decisive Battle with Su Yun ?Chapter 1511: Chapter 587: The Decisive Battle with Su Yun Chapter 1511: Chapter 587: The Decisive Battle with Su Yun Rosy clouds filled the sky, and silence enveloped everything. Suddenly, a pale golden hue lit up between heaven and earth, as a golden aurora occupied the skies, casting its light over the distant Su Yun Country. Accompanied by a series of explosions, the massive formation that obscured the heavens had already been breached by dozens of huge holes. Thousands of cultivators had gathered here, each displaying their specialties. In groups of three to five, they formed combat squads and, under the leadership of True Immortals, followed these gaps into the great formation. Meanwhile, inside the formation, on various magic platforms that were prepared in advance, the Changqing disciples, upon seeing the enemy enter, immediately, without hesitation, unleashed the spells they had readied towards their foes. For a time, fierce battles erupted within the formation, centered around the magic platforms as bases. The Changqing disciples, stationed at the magic platforms, carefully controlled powerful divine powers through the formation, bombarding the invading enemies with boulders, fireballs, and water waves. The Taiping Dao disciples were not outdone. While dodging and defending against the attacks from the opposite side, they also showcased their techniques, some releasing scorching fireballs, some transforming into gorgeous petals, and others assuming the form of a mighty dragon to whip up tornadoes, using every means to slay the enemies before them. The battlefield was in chaos, but both sides were silently calculating the other¡¯s advantages and weaknesses, constantly preparing the most appropriate attacks. This Changqing Battle had already lasted fifty years. Through the long war, all those still alive had honed strong combat instincts in the face of life and death. Even a novice, under the earnest teachings and influence of the old, had gained a not insignificant understanding of war through the environment. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 Now on the battlefield, they too were fighting desperately for their survival. As the battle intensified, the collision and dispersion of various spells and divine powers made the spiritual energy within the formation grow denser, the laws chaotic, warping the entire space. Suddenly, a cultivator dressed in white appeared amidst the fighting crowd. He pinched a magic formula, and behind him, a huge formation emerged, radiating intense light, drawing in the chaotic spiritual energy around him and transforming it into brilliant beams shooting toward the enemy. These beams, formed from the residual spiritual energy of already chaotic and uncontrollable spells, converted by the formation, turned into astonishingly lethal attacks. Each transformed beam could warp space, destroy mountains and rivers. Wherever it passed, cultivators were struck dead on the spot. In just a brief period, three of the Changqing disciples¡¯ magic platforms were breached by the white-clothed cultivator, and hundreds of cultivators perished under the light. The remaining living cultivators, seeing this, trembled, and upon seeing the divine light turning toward them, they scattered like startled birds and animals, running and dodging to the sides. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 In this awe-inspiring scene, a chill air subtly swirled. Around the white-clothed cultivator, two more figures emerged. One wielding a sword, with a wave, unfurled myriad sword energies, shredding all physical and ethereal things. The other holding a seal, with a simple toss, the divine seal turned into a giant mountain, while moving, shaking heaven and earth. Faced with the mighty prowess of the trio, the Changqing cultivators within the formation had no resistance and directly collapsed and fled. ¡°Taiping scum, cease your madness!¡± Upon seeing this, from behind the formation, an angry shout was heard. A blue-clothed middle-aged cultivator holding a piece of Jade Bamboo, with dazzling light, quickly made his way over. It was Zhang Xiuzhu, the Mid-stage Earth Immortal who was defending Su Yun Country. ¡°Haha, good timing!¡± Leveraging the divine light formation while slaughtering his enemies, Lu Yuan, upon seeing Zhang Xiuzhu coming at him, could not help but laugh out loud. Then, with a push of his hands, a yellow staff appeared out of thin air. Grasping the staff, Lu Yuan swung it backward, and under the empowerment of the Heavenly Destiny Staff, the might of the divine light formation behind him surged instantly. Its potency nearly doubled on its original basis. Countless beams shot out from the formation, pouring toward Zhang Xiuzhu on the opposite side. Such divine powers had surpassed the level of an Early Earth Immortal. It was clear he must be a Mid-stage Earth Immortal cultivator to do so. Now, with the decisive battle at hand, it was time to reveal all cards. There was no longer any need for Lu Yuan to continue hiding and shielding his true cultivation. To gain time and create opportunities for Huang Xuan and others who were stealthily attacking Changqing Mountain, Lu Yuan unleashed all his strength, pouring everything he had into the battle with Zhang Xiuzhu, aiming to drag his opponent here and prevent him from leaving. Seeing this, Zhang Xiuzhu, advancing toward Lu Yuan, couldn¡¯t help but change his expression. Looking at Lu Yuan, whose aura had skyrocketed and whose might had surged dramatically, he found it difficult to judge whether it was the effect of the staff in his hand or if Lu Yuan was truly a Mid-stage Earth Immortal. But the situation at hand gave him no time for further speculation. Seeing countless divine beams coming toward him, Zhang Xiuzhu also shouted and, with a flourish of the Immortal Bamboo in his hand, it grew upon catching the wind, transforming into a hundred-feet-tall Immortal Bamboo. The bamboo swayed, and spiritual energy surged around it, inhaled and exhaled by the Immortal Bamboo. The green leaves that it spat out clashed with the divine beams. With every inhalation and exhalation, a brilliant collision of divine light and bamboo leaves took place, causing the entire battle line to pause momentarily. After being bolstered by the formation method, Zhang Xiuzhu¡¯s strength was also enhanced to that of a Mid-stage Earth Immortal, and in terms of magic power alone, he was considerably stronger than Lu Yuan, who had just entered this stage. Chapter 1512 - Chapter 1512 Chapter 587 The Decisive Battle with Su Yun_2 ?Chapter 1512: Chapter 587: The Decisive Battle with Su Yun_2 Chapter 1512: Chapter 587: The Decisive Battle with Su Yun_2 Even when faced with Lu Yuan¡¯s full strength, Zhang Xiuzhu easily blocked it with a gesture. Seeing himself at a disadvantage against Zhang Xiuzhu, Qing Guanzi, who was watching the battle from the side, no longer hesitated. With a fierce wave of his hands, an immense pressure instantly rushed towards them. It was the mountain formed by the Myriad Peoples Seal, falling from the distant sky towards Zhang Xiuzhu. The ground and mountains around its path trembled slightly. The nearby battlefield fell into silence. Some cultivators who were fighting along its path were caught off guard, and all were swallowed by this oppressive force, crushed to dust by the mountain. Not just him. On the other side, Yi Dancheng also held the Taiping Sword and quickly rushed over here. Faced with Zhang Xiuzhu, who was incredibly powerful within the Formation Method, the two avatars decisively chose to join forces with their true self to face the enemy. Seeing the other two Earth Immortals, wielding Immortal Artifacts, they knew that even though the strength they displayed was far less than his and Lu Yuan¡¯s, these were still two formidable forces not to be ignored. Even with the aid of the formation, Zhang Xiuzhu couldn¡¯t help but feel wary. Such a lineup could pose a threat even to him within the formation. If he handled it poorly, there was a chance he could be slain within it. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï His life was at stake, so Zhang Xiuzhu dared not be careless. Especially considering the current situation of the Changqing Immortal Sect, he was even less willing to take risks. ¡°Formation Cores, heed my command and join forces with me to face the enemy!¡± Since the enemy had already summoned reinforcements, Zhang Xiuzhu naturally wouldn¡¯t be foolish enough to try to fight three against one. This was his home ground. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï He could call for reinforcements as well. ¡°As Uncle-Master commands!¡± From the distance, the three Changqing Human Immortals guarding the Formation Core of Three Nations heard the call and immediately flew out, each with a majestic aura rushing over here. With the aid of the formation¡¯s temporary boost, each of them could wield the power of the Earthly Immortal Realm. And now, due to their inability to fully control this power, excess magic power leaked out, causing Heaven and Earth to lose color and strange phenomena to emerge. From appearances alone, they seemed even more imposing than their side, quite intimidating. With three reinforcements arriving, even if their strength wasn¡¯t much, they already posed a threat to an Earth Immortal. With this, Lu Yuan and his companions dared not underestimate them. Standing by their side, they could share some of the pressure, distracting the enemy. At this point, Zhang Xiuzhu, who was already fiercely engaged in battle with Lu Yuan and the other two, felt his pressure greatly reduced. But even with the pressure lessened, he still had to remain cautious and wholeheartedly focused on facing the three powerful enemies, not daring to be distracted by anything else. The two sides fought in this way for who knows how long. Until the colors of the mountains and rivers faded, and night fell. Inside the great formation, Lu Yuan continued to lead his avatars without retreat, entwining in a desperate struggle with Zhang Xiuzhu. And since their leaders did not retreat, the others from Taiping Dao naturally did not dare to leave. So, the thousands of Taiping sect cultivators who had rushed into the formation, even though they were now being slowly pushed back by the Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s defenders and law forces, gradually regaining ground and continuously inflicting casualties on over two thousand Taiping cultivators¡­ Those Taiping cultivators could only grit their teeth and continue to withstand. Fortunately, although they suffered heavy losses, the Changqing Immortal Sect was not having an easy time either. Earlier, Lu Yuan suddenly attacked, taking advantage of the weaker, wantonly slaughtering. Many Changqing cultivators were poisoned by his hand, with nearly a thousand dead. Many key altars within the formation were directly breached, creating a vacuum in one area, which Taiping disciples took advantage of to enter and kill more enemies, further expanding their victory. At this moment, those Changqing disciples, relying on the geographic advantage of the formation, had regained their footing and even recovered some of the lost altars. But their cultivation was ultimately too weak. Most could only gather one or two levels of energy, and even with the power of the formation, they could scarcely face the elite Taiping disciples. But that was only in places protected by the formation¡¯s power. Outside these areas, they were just weaklings and easily reverted to their true form upon being attacked by Taiping disciples. With this constraint in place, those disciples of the Changqing Immortal Sect certainly did not dare to move freely. Every time they launched a counterattack, they had to wait for the formation¡¯s power to arrive. But with their cultivation, without the direction of Human Immortals or Earth Immortals above them, the ordinary disciples below could only coordinate with each altar in their respective regions, communicate, and operate the formation together in order to do so. As such, with all these processes, the strength and timing of the formation power they could mobilize were significantly weaker and more limited. Targeting this aspect, even in a disadvantageous position, the Taiping Dao disciples were still able to hold their ground against the enemy. The enemy wanted to drive them out of the formation, completely encircle the already damaged large formation, and trap Lu Yuan and the other two inside; they wouldn¡¯t be able to achieve this tonight. Regardless of whether they could win later on, for now, the thousands of Changqing Immortal Sect¡¯s defending cultivators were dragged here, unable to move. From Lu Yuan in Taiping Dao, down to the lowest level cultivator, they were all fighting fervently for the interests of their sect. Lu Yuan too had abandoned his past cautious temperament and showed his mettle when it was time to risk it all. Previously, he was simply playing it safe, unwilling to take risks for minor gains. But that didn¡¯t mean he had become a complete turtle, shrinking inside his shell, afraid to make a move. Chapter 1513 - Chapter 1513 Chapter 587 The Decisive Battle with Su Yun_3 ?Chapter 1513: Chapter 587: The Decisive Battle with Su Yun_3 Chapter 1513: Chapter 587: The Decisive Battle with Su Yun_3 How to put it, after all, he was originally a hunter from the mountains, and he still possessed the necessary ferocity; it was just that his edges were now hidden, like a dragon concealed in the abyss, having been nurtured and raised. At this moment, when the sword left its sheath and the dragon roared into the heavens, a radiant brilliance shone forth, capturing the hearts of all. Zhang Xiuzhu deeply understood this point. For now, even though he had the help of three Human Immortals guarding him, he found it difficult to gain the upper hand against Lu Yuan and his two companions. After fighting for so long, neither side could overpower the other, with attacks and counterattacks continually exchanged. What made him even more uncomfortable was that, on the opposite side, Lu Yuan, as the battle became more intense, seemed to be honing his skills, gradually shedding his rustiness and revealing ever-sharper ferocity. His capability in combat seemed to visibly improve with each passing moment, becoming much stronger than before. Naturally, this was no surprise. Since Lu Yuan had started his career, he had been a great general competing for supremacy in the world. As a general and a power leader, even when competing directly, he led thousands of troops, commanding his soldiers in battle against enemies. When facing elite enemies one-on-one, he usually let his skilled subordinates handle it or sent an avatar in his place. The opportunities for him to personally take action were extremely rare, almost nonexistent. Even when he did personally fight, it was usually against opponents significantly weaker than him, overpowering them with brute strength. That was just an overwhelming situation, which naturally did not offer much in the way of training opportunities. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï However, Lu Yuan had some foresight in this regard; he had previously created numerous avatars, and now had several through which, by experiencing combat against others, he could learn a lot through direct mental connection. But this kind of connection, after all, lacked the depth of personally taking action; it couldn¡¯t compare to personal, firsthand experience. Thus, despite being an Earth Immortal, due to various factors, Lu Yuan¡¯s combat experience was at most theoretically rich, but practically lacking. Now, finally having two avatars to coordinate and protect him, and facing a worthy adversary on the opposite side, he was given a strong opportunity to refine his skills. This allowed Lu Yuan¡¯s thousands of years of accumulated theoretical knowledge, along with the combat experience of hundreds of avatars, to be applied practically. In such circumstances, with each passing minute and second, his theoretical knowledge was quickly tested in practice and then improved upon. Repeatedly doing so, wouldn¡¯t his strength rapidly advance, at least in terms of battle experience? Translated into reality, this was like the enemy breaking through in the heat of battle, rapidly becoming much stronger. Although his strength did not double, it did increase a bit. For Zhang Xiuzhu, who had to handle all this, the more they fought, the more desperate he felt inside! And in this despair. Suddenly, a Jade Symbol flew from his body, glowing briefly as if some message was being conveyed. Lu Yuan, on the opposing side, noticed this and immediately realized that it was his avatars taking action. The cultivators left at Changqing Mountain were beginning to seek reinforcements from here. Realizing this, he immediately intensified his attacks, not giving Zhang Xiuzhu a chance to read the information in the Communicating Jade Talisman. With dozens of spells cast, and Divine Powers colliding, the Jade Symbol hadn¡¯t even completed its task before it turned into ash in the aftermath of their clash. Seeing the enemy¡¯s urgency, how could Zhang Xiuzhu not understand that something serious had happened? Furthermore, seeing that the Communicating Jade Talisman was the one connecting him with Changqing Mountain, his main base, he immediately had a bad feeling. But at this moment, amidst the dangerous battlefield, even though he was worried, he had no time to ponder deeply. Fortunately, at Changqing Mountain, they had made full preparations; the forces left there were enough to handle an attack from an Earth Immortal. Even if Taiping Dao had hidden another Earth Immortal and sent him to attack Changqing Mountain simultaneously, against a well-prepared sect, he definitely would not fare well. As long as they could hold out, sending some reinforcements back would ensure that lesser forces couldn¡¯t stir up any trouble. On the contrary, if something were to go wrong here, and he were to perish, even if Changqing Mountain could hold its ground, losing yet another Earth Immortal, the Qing Immortal Sect would indeed be powerless to recover, only becoming a skeleton in the tomb, slowly waiting for death. With this thought in mind, Zhang Xiuzhu no longer pondered further and simply mustered his spirit, continuing to confront Lu Yuan and the others. Matters that follow would be dealt with later. Right now, the priority was to deal with the current crisis and to repel the enemy first. Thus, several Earth Immortals continued to confront each other for a moment. After some time, in the distant sky behind, a beam of communication light rushed toward the battlefield quickly. It was from Changqing Mountain, unable to reach here, hence they sent a signal to inquire. But this communication light, having traveled over mountains and rivers, had just gotten close to the battlefield of several Earth Immortals when before it could emit a warning, it was instantly destroyed by Lu Yuan, who was already prepared. Seeing this situation, Zhang Xiuzhu became even more convinced that the Taiping Dao had definitely planned a big conspiracy against Changqing Mountain. However, the more it seemed so, the less he dared to act rashly. In the rear, there were previously arranged safeguards and sufficient strength for self-preservation. Even if it was difficult to confront the invasion of the Taiping Dao, holding out for a while should be feasible. But on his side, if he showed even a slight sign of shrinking back or fear, it might be the collapse of the entire battle line, the death of thousands of cultivators, and the total breakdown of the situation in the Eastern Territory. Then, the great army of the Taiping Dao could directly take advantage of the situation and surround Changqing Mountain. Such consequences were unbearable for him. Therefore, even if his heart was filled with worry and unease, Zhang Xiuzhu could only grit his teeth and continue. And this was exactly what Lu Yuan hoped for. In two consecutive actions, he did not hesitate to reveal his intentions just to sever this man¡¯s contact with the outside. What was this for? Of course, it was to prevent Zhang Xiuzhu from learning the true situation, allowing fear to arise in him, and thus making him flee at the first sign of trouble. Currently, the battle between them was evenly matched, but they were far from having an advantage. If Zhang Xiuzhu decided to leave, Lu Yuan could not stop him. To prevent this man from escaping, he could only make his actions more obvious, plainly telling the opponent that he intended to cause trouble. Indeed. His impatient behavior naturally caused the opponent¡¯s worry, but it also led the opponent to judge that his side might be insufficiently strong and unable to take down Changqing Mountain immediately. Therefore, he could only delay as much as possible on the battlefield of Su Yun Country to buy more opportunities for the surprise attack squad deep in the rear. This gave Zhang Xiuzhu an illusion that the rear could still hold out, but it was actually here that was crucial to the war. As long as he could quickly repel Lu Yuan and rush to support the rear in the shortest time, the crisis at Changqing Mountain would naturally be resolved. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 Should here collapse, the situation would be irretrievable. Under this illusion, Zhang Xiuzhu gave up his last chance of survival and continued to grit his teeth and persevere. Meanwhile, Lu Yuan, feeling increasingly joyful deep inside, intensified his attack, his moves growing increasingly fierce. In the depths of his heart, he laughed with delight. The enemy had taken the bait and was doomed. Chapter 1514 - Chapter 1514 Chapter 588 Breaking Through Changqing Mountain ?Chapter 1514: Chapter 588: Breaking Through Changqing Mountain Chapter 1514: Chapter 588: Breaking Through Changqing Mountain Time reversed six hours. At this moment, the sun had just set, and the darkness was still very faint, but the moon-white in the Heavenly Vault was already vaguely visible. Under such a cusp of day and night, Huang Xuan and his companions had quietly arrived at Mountain foot of the Changqing Mountain. The woods were deep, vast, and boundless. This primeval forest was always seen as forbidden terrain by the villagers nearby, who dared not trespass too frequently. Even though there were often tales of reclusive immortals in the Mountains, and many mortals had witnessed streaks of light flashing across the sky, with the traces of Immortals barely discernible, it was all the more reason for the commoners to revere the Mountain even more and feared offending the Immortals by entering rashly. Even the Hunters who lived off the Mountain only dared to roam within ten miles of its outer edge. Venturing deeper was something they hesitated to do. For this reason, due to the limited human activity, vast swaths of the formidable Changqing Mountain were wild and untamed. Aside from the few Cave Mansions cultivated by Cultivators and some signs of civilization, most places were occupied by wild beasts and birds. In fact, this was rather fitting, for those who dwell in the Mountain are called Immortals. For a novice Cultivator, during the initial stage of Cultivation, it is indeed necessary to concentrate and settle one¡¯s spirit, far from worldly temptations, in order to quickly enhance one¡¯s Cultivation within the limited Lifespan and evolve towards longevity. Otherwise, with the disciples too entangled in the worldly affairs, their minds and energies scattered, blinded by desires, who would have the peace of mind for dedicated cultivation? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Therefore, to ensure disciples could focus on cultivation before their determination was sufficient, every Immortal Sect would set up simple illusory formations near their domain to prevent commoners from entering the deep mountains and disturbing the Sect. This is also the origin of many folk myths and tales of encountering strange events, Immortals, or spirits in the mountains. Of course. Such illusory formations were only effective against commoners with no cultivation. Any Cultivator who had cultivated some Magic Power and condensed some Divine Sense could see through them and not be misled. This was an intentional strategy by the Immortal Sects. After all, they simply wanted to use the formations to avoid commoner disturbances, not to block fellow Cultivators. If you use simple illusory formations to stop commoners, other Cultivators will understand since everyone does it that way, and no one will complain. But if you use formations to stop Cultivators, that¡¯s likely to offend someone. Should a Cultivator enter Changqing Mountain unawares and suddenly encounters your illusory formation, the harm might be minimal, but it would certainly be annoying. Of course. Changqing Mountain, as well as the territories of the various Immortal Sects in the Immortal Realm, are domains with respective owners. Other Cultivators, unless under urgent circumstances, would not rashly intrude as that would be seen as a provocation. To be mistaken as an intruder or an enemy could easily lead to being killed on the spot. This kind of offense is something outsiders usually wouldn¡¯t commit, and owners would prefer not to either. However, that being said. If one were truly preparing for external enemies, a single illusory formation would not be of much use. Illusory formations can trap and confuse the enemy, but they cannot kill the enemy. While they can act as a barrier against intrusion, clearly they aren¡¯t the best option. Moreover, setting up illusory formations across the vast Changqing Mountain and keeping them active at all times, even those that only prevent Cultivators below the level of a True Immortal, would be immensely costly. Even for a power like Qing Immortal Sect, it would be unbearable to cope with such expenses. The most cost-effective strategy was to set up simple illusory formations on the outskirts with the help of Heaven and Earth¡¯s power, at low to no cost, to stop commoners. Then, within the core territory of the Mountain Gate, more emphasis would be placed on setting up Defensive Arrays or even Kill Arrays, to guard the most important areas at the smallest expense. This was the common practice among many Immortal Sects. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? Qing Immortal Sect was no exception. Except, as the former hegemon owning the entire Changqing Mountain and after operating for tens of thousands of years, their periphery had become overly extensive. And the Sect¡¯s actual territory had also become overly large. A mountain spanning tens of thousands of miles was the periphery of Qing Immortal Sect. The regions within the Mountain, spanning tens of thousands of miles and encompassing thousands of peaks, were their core territory. The area between the periphery and the core was also considered the general territory, and it was dotted with many Changqing Cultivator¡¯s Cave Mansions, sprinkled like stars across the landscape. Each of these Cultivator Cave Mansions had a variety of Formation Methods arranged by their owners. Even some Formation Methods were interconnected under the Integrated control of the Mountain Gate, forming linked compound formations, which were equally formidable. These Cave Mansion formations were the true first line of external defense for Qing Immortal Sect. If outsiders wished to infiltrate Changqing Mountain, the first obstacle they had to overcome was these Cave Mansion formations. Thus, when Huang Xuan and the others easily passed through the periphery¡¯s illusory formations and arrived at Changqing Mountain, what caught their eyes were the tens of thousands of formations of varying sizes and affiliations. ¡°A Changqing Mountain has always been known as the leading mountain in the Changqing Domain, and the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s foundation is profound, far surpassing us from Taiping Dao and the Nine Provinces. But such rumors, even if accompanied by vestiges, are ultimately shallow experiences. Only at this moment, upon seeing with my own eyes, do I truly acknowledge the veracity of the tales!¡± After carefully observing the landscapes within thousands of miles with his Dharma Eye, Huang Xuan couldn¡¯t help but exclaim in astonishment. Before his eyes, within a mere expanse of thousands of miles, there were over three hundred Cave Mansions, each guarded by a Formation Method, with varying sizes and degrees of power. The smaller ones could only stop enemies who had condensed one or two levels of energy, while the larger formations could withstand one or two attacks from a True Immortal. Chapter 1515 - Chapter 1515 Chapter 588 Breaking Through Changqing Mountain_2 ?Chapter 1515: Chapter 588: Breaking Through Changqing Mountain_2 Chapter 1515: Chapter 588: Breaking Through Changqing Mountain_2 What¡¯s more remarkable is that these formation methods, powered by the Earth Vein Qi as their energy source, faintly connected as one, forming a compound array of small arrays nested within larger ones. If someone were to preside over the various Cave Mansions, the formation method in the land of a thousand miles, in an instant, could transform into a Kill Array capable of Immortal Execution. Although it could only execute Human Immortals, it was still rather terrifying. You must understand, this is the foundation of the formation method of the Cave Mansion within the land of a thousand miles. Just with this area, which is only one percent of the peripheral Cave Mansion formation methods, it can exhibit such power; if the entire area of tens of thousands of miles of Cave Mansion were connected. Such power, even Earth Immortals would find arduous to handle. ¡°Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s foundation is indeed formidable. Unfortunately, no matter how strong the foundation is, if it cannot be utilized, it is wasted.¡± Following closely, Che Shidao looked at the distant scenery and couldn¡¯t help but laugh, ¡°Look at this land of a thousand miles, among so many Cave Mansions, there isn¡¯t even a single cultivator. Over three hundred Cave Mansions, all empty, akin to a realm of ghosts. With no one to manage, these Cave Mansion formation methods, no matter how good, are essentially useless. Let alone stopping the enemy, I fear they haven¡¯t even noticed that we have already infiltrated this place.¡± As he spoke, he pointed towards the distant mountains, his expression relaxed. The other Avatars heard this and all nodded in agreement. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï At Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s own stronghold, there were only four thousand cultivators in total, including just one Human Immortal. From these, two thousand cultivators were distributed across Changqing Country to guard against small groups of invading enemies. With local Yin Gods assisting them, ordinary invading cultivators, and even Human Immortals, would struggle to escape this surveillance network. Once someone entered Changqing Country, they naturally couldn¡¯t hide. However, such vigilance, even with Yin Gods¡¯ cooperation, had its own limits. For Earth Immortals, it was almost a joke. As long as they didn¡¯t want to be discovered, even if standing right in front of these people, they wouldn¡¯t be able to detect an enemy¡¯s presence. Facing an unconventional surprise attack team sent out by Taiping Dao, consisting solely of Earth Immortals and leaving no weak links. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? The surveillance measures prepared by Qing Immortal Sect were essentially ineffective. Thus, the effectiveness of such vigilance was practically nullified. After sending away those two thousand, effectively blind cultivators, what truly remained at Changqing Mountain were just those two thousand cultivators and the leading Human Immortal. But in the area encompassing a thousand miles of Cave Mansion, even by the most basic requirementa€¡± one Cave Mansion per cultivatora€¡± More than three hundred people would be needed just to fill them. And what resulted was merely a formation method capable of blocking Human Immortals. Not to mention how this approach, regardless of the massive manpower cost and low cost-effectiveness, To think of filling the tens of thousands of Cave Mansion formation methods outside to fully activate them and reach the level to counter Earth Immortals, Qing Immortal Sect simply didn¡¯t have enough personnel. And if we couldn¡¯t activate all the Cave Mansion formation methods, activating a single region alone wouldn¡¯t be very effective. Instead, it would be more dangerous for the disciples to run around outside. Rather than that, it would be wiser to withdraw the people into the core area and concentrate manpower to defend the core. Thus, this led to the scene Huang Xuan and others were observing. In a region of tens of thousands of miles, tens of thousands of Cave Mansions, tens of thousands of formation methods, all were essentially in vain, empty inside, without a single person in sight. This allowed the four of them to easily reach this place without any interference along the way. Hearing the conversation between the two, Jade Brocade couldn¡¯t help but say, ¡°Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s choice just shows that the Lord¡¯s strategy is extremely correct. Not drawing Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s main force to the Front Line, keeping them dragged in Su Yun Country. If they had let those ten thousand plus Changqing Cultivators on the Front Line escape back to Changqing Mountain, then these tens of thousands of Cave Mansions might have turned into an iron wall, firmly blocking us outside of Changqing Mountain¡¯s core. With the enormous scale of these interlocked arrays fully activated, even if the four of us joined forces, even with the Lord and all other Avatars, we couldn¡¯t handle it. And with Changqing Mountain¡¯s accumulated foundation, relying on the massive Earth Vein Qi stored underground, maintaining such a formation for hundreds of years would be no problem. Then, our goal to take down Changqing Mountain would truly be as difficult as reaching the heavens.¡± Being someone who had been a School Leader, he first focused on Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s resources. The Earth Vein Qi accumulated over seventy thousand years was undoubtedly Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s biggest reliance, the capital they could use to continue resisting when cornered. And now, they were fortunate enough to arrive here before this capital could be utilized and nip it in the bud. It was definitely the most fortuitous matter. ¡°Jade Brocade is right, Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s main force has been deceived to the Front Line, leaving their rear defenseless, certainly providing us an opportunity that is hard to come by in a lifetime.¡± Lastly, Huang Yun spoke seriously, ¡°Over there, our Lord is already clashing with Zhang Xiuzhu, desperately keeping him tied to the Front Line. Each passing second, more die at the Front Line, and the situation worsens. Since we¡¯ve already arrived here, let us resolve this situation quickly, take down Changqing Mountain, and then return to support the Lord.¡± As Avatars, as long as they were not too far apart, they could share consciousness with Lu Yuan to some extent. And since Changqing Mountain was right behind Su Yun Country, the distance between them did not exceed a hundred thousand miles, well within their range of connection. Chapter 1516 - Chapter 1516 Chapter 588 Breaking Through Changqing Mountain_3 ?Chapter 1516: Chapter 588: Breaking Through Changqing Mountain_3 Chapter 1516: Chapter 588: Breaking Through Changqing Mountain_3 So at this moment, as long as he used his mind to sense and obtained permission from his main body, they could also be aware of the battlefield conditions over there. Sensing the situation now, he knew that the battle was tense, and there indeed was no room for delay here. The other three avatars, upon hearing this, also nodded in agreement. Then Huang Xuan said, ¡°Now that all the Changqing cultivators in the mountains have shrunk back to their core area, it saves us the trouble of searching and clearing them out. I just looked over it, the core area of Changqing Mountain is about ten thousand miles in size. It has also activated its formation method, but this formation is only in its initial state, and can only block some Human Immortals. For Earth Immortals, although it somewhat hinders them, to fully react and elevate the formation method to a level that can contend with Earth Immortals would take a moment. Encountering an Earth Immortal, this brief moment, relying on that hindrance, might indeed be dragged out. But with the four of us taking action together, breaking through this defense will not take a moment, merely several breaths. Since that¡¯s the case, there¡¯s no need to worry about anything more. Everyone choose one, find a direction, and head separately into the killing formation. After breaking the formation, there¡¯s no need to do anything else, just kill. Let us first eradicate all these Changqing cultivators; without people, no matter what other measures they have, they won¡¯t be able to use them. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Changqing Mountain will naturally fall into our hands.¡± Huang Xuan¡¯s killing intent was soaring, displaying the demeanor of a veteran of the battlefields. ¡°Well then, I¡¯ll attack from the south.¡± ¡°Good! I¡¯ll take the east.¡± ¡°I¡¯ll start from the west, let¡¯s get cracking!¡± The three avatars, after listening to the arrangement, had no objections, each chose a direction, and then headed alone towards the core ahead. As for Huang Xuan, he chose the last remaining direction, the north. A few breaths later. The avatars sensed each other to confirm everyone was in position; then without hesitation, they immediately took action. Boom! In an instant, under the pitch-black night sky, accompanied by a huge burst of magic, the core formation method of Changqing Mountain was invaded by formidable enemies. Numerous cultivators in the mountains were instantly awakened. The formation method in the core area was also swiftly activated, and transformed towards its limit state that could be controlled. Meanwhile, the stationed Human Immortal immediately took out a Communication Jade Charm and started to report the situation here to the front line. However, before the charm could connect, the communication signal quickly faded away. Aside from the message that went through to Yang Jihua in the northern domain, the closest front line in Su Yun Country had already lost contact with this place, completely unable to reach Zhang Xiuzhu. This Human Immortal anxiously tried several times, only to see the outer formation method, after a tremor, being breached by the enemy. ¡°No, how is this possible? Why are there so many Earth Immortals!¡± Watching this scene, the stationed Human Immortal¡¯s eyes revealed disbelief and despair. However, the reality was right before his eyes, leaving no room for disbelief. Because this side¡¯s formation, even if attacked by an Earth Immortal, should have lasted a while. But now, only a dozen or so breaths had passed, and it was already broken. This certainly wasn¡¯t something a mere Earth Immortal could achieve, it had to be several Earth Immortals acting together, there¡¯s no other way this could have happened. Having lost the protection of the large formation, relying on just these few people, they couldn¡¯t defend Changqing Mountain. Even at this moment, they no longer had a chance to survive. Changqing Mountain, this sect that had established its Tao Inheritance here and had never been breached, couldn¡¯t be defended. Realizing this, amidst his guilt and pain, the stationed Human Immortal took out a Golden Charm from his chest and, while the several Earth Immortals were not paying attention this way, secretly sent it out. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Conveying the message here to the nearest Su Yun Country. Then. Attracted by this act, Huang Xuan chased over and with a backhand slap, killed the leading Human Immortal. This was just an Early-stage Human Immortal, who had only just stepped into the Immortal Realm. With his cultivation, killing such a feeble Immortal was enough with a single slap. And following this person¡¯s death, the last possibility of resistance in Changqing Mountain was completely declared extinguished. ¡­ Forty-eight years into the Northern Expedition, Taiping Dao breached Changqing Mountain, killing two thousand cultivators. Qing Immortal Sect thus declined; this battle decisively set the overall situation. Chapter 1517 - Chapter 1517 Chapter 589 Punish Zhang Xiuzhu ?Chapter 1517: Chapter 589: Punish Zhang Xiuzhu Chapter 1517: Chapter 589: Punish Zhang Xiuzhu Facing the sudden attack of four Earth Immortal True Persons, Changqing Mountain was utterly unprepared and barely held on for less than a quarter of an hour before its defenses were completely shattered. Over two thousand cultivators stationed in the mountain were swiftly cleaned up by Huang Xuan and his group. The Human Immortal staying behind didn¡¯t even manage to mount a resistance and was directly killed with a single palm strike. By the time the battle ended, this mountain had already been completely overtaken. ¡°Given the urgency of the situation, now that this place has been taken over, I will stay here to guard against other Changqing cultivators who might return to reclaim it. You three, hurry to support our main body, exterminate Zhang Xiuzhu, lead the army, and come to wrap up the aftermath,¡± Huang Xuan said to the other gathered avatars. ¡°Understood!¡± The other three expressed no objections, nodded, and immediately flew off towards Su Yun Country. Watching them leave, Huang Xuan turned back to look at the now deserted Changqing Mountain and didn¡¯t idle. Taking a coffin from the treasury of Changqing Mountain, he gathered some materials and immediately waved his sleeve, creating over a hundred Yellow Turban Strongmen in an instant. He then instructed, ¡°We must immediately take our formation flags, disperse in all directions, and set up the Ring Star Formation.¡± Changqing Mountain extended for tens of thousands of miles, and even just the core area was ten thousand miles wide. Such a vast area couldn¡¯t possibly be covered by Huang Xuan alone. Nor did he intend to cover it all. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? His duty was just to hold out through the night, and then wait for his main body to arrive with the large army, at which point Changqing Mountain would naturally fall completely. Therefore, he only needed to have some Yellow Turban Strongmen set up some perimeter formations to detect any outsiders entering. Huang Xuan just needed to stay at the center. As long as he could determine the direction from which outsiders were entering, he could immediately mobilize to eliminate the intruders. ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Naturally, these hastily set up perimeter formations could only contend with some cultivators of lower cultivation. For instance, those who had not yet achieved immortality would find it hard to evade detection. However, some True Immortals, or even those powerful cultivators on the verge of becoming immortal with the Five Qi Towards Primordial, if prepared, could easily bypass the formations. But if only a few people managed to evade the formations, even if they could penetrate deeper into Changqing Mountain, their numbers would be too few to make any significant impact. Even if they could seize the opportunity to stir some trouble unknown to Huang Xuan, limited by their strength and numbers, the threats posed by such covert actions would be limited. Thus, he only needed to block the major groups of people, such as the two thousand Changqing cultivators scattered across Changqing Country. As long as he intercepted most of them, even if a few slipped through, it wouldn¡¯t matter much. At this stage, the Qing Immortal Sect was already beyond saving. Even the reason Huang Xuan stayed here was just as a precaution to make some preparations. It wasn¡¯t necessary per se. After directing the numerous Yellow Turban Strongmen to set up the Ring Star Formation, Huang Xuan patrolled Changqing Mountain once more to confirm that no stragglers were left. He then instructed the strongmen to continue guarding the various formation flags while he returned to the center of Changqing Mountain, where he would stay and be prepared to respond to any situation from all directions, quietly waiting for his main body to arrive with the large army. ¡­ In Su Yun Country. After everything in Changqing Mountain had settled, Huang Xuan and the others immediately contacted Lu Yuan through divine thought with the news. His response was clear-cut. Upon learning that Changqing Mountain had been taken, he deliberately slowed down the intensity of his confrontation with Zhang Xiuzhu, no longer battling as fervently as before. This change was naturally perceived by Zhang Xiuzhu as the enemy exhausting their strength and struggling to hold on. Seeing this, he was instantly overjoyed. He hurried to wrap up matters on his end so he could send someone back to investigate the situation at Changqing Mountain. Zhang Xiuzhu, with his magic power also spent by more than half, voluntarily increased his attack frequency, recklessly unleashing various powerful spells and supernatural powers. This sudden increase in offensive pressure naturally placed Lu Yuan under immense strain. The effect was immediate, forcing the three Earth Immortals from Taiping Dao to start faltering and gradually struggle to maintain their ground. The other three cooperating Changqing Formation Earth Immortals noticed their elder¡¯s actions and realized that the decisive moment had arrived. Thus, disregarding their own exhaustion, they crazily channeled the power of the formation to aid their elder in repelling these Taiping Dao Earth Immortals. Facing such a fierce onslaught, Lu Yuan and his group began to falter for real. What had been a feigned defeat slowly turned into a real one, but rather than feeling disheartened, Lu Yuan felt even more elated. If the enemy had suddenly increased their strength so significantly, the price they paid was also substantial. Loss of magic power was typical, but those three Formation Earth Immortals maintaining such an offensive likely began to overdraw their foundational lifespan, which granted them this strength. However, such overdrawing was bound to be unsustainable. Perhaps after another hour or so, these individuals would completely burn out, literally being dragged to death. Those unfit for positions they occupy, must suffer the consequences. As a Human Immortal wanting to wield the power of an Earth Immortal, how could one not pay a price? Even though most of that price was shared by the formation and other cultivators within it. But the remaining portion, for those Human Immortals, was an unbearable burden. They could barely hold on for a short time. Over a longer period, it would be lethal. Now, with three hours having passed since the battle truly began. Chapter 1518 - Chapter 1518 Chapter 589 Punishing Zhang Xiuzhu_2 ?Chapter 1518: Chapter 589: Punishing Zhang Xiuzhu_2 Chapter 1518: Chapter 589: Punishing Zhang Xiuzhu_2 ¡°` The two sides had been clashing from noon until the current evening, from daylight into the dark of night, both parties were nearly at the brink of exhaustion. Not only were Lu Yuan and the other Earth Immortals tired, the ordinary disciples below, one by one, their magic power was waning, gradually unable to withstand the counterattacks of the Qing Immortal Sect, being beaten back step by step. Under these circumstances, perhaps it wouldn¡¯t be long before the disciples of Taiping Dao would be driven out from the Formation Method, and this offensive would end in failure. If the disciples of Taiping Dao couldn¡¯t hold on, how much better could the cultivators of Qing Immortal Sect be? Even though they had Formation Methods to assist them, reducing their magic power consumption significantly and allowing for moments of exhaustion to retreat and recover behind the formation, sustained combat had still placed great pressure on their spirits and bodies, leaving them at a mere thirty to forty percent of their peak condition. And for those Earth Immortals dealing with Lu Yuan and his two companions within the Formation Method, it was even more so the case. Forcibly utilizing the strength of a Human Immortal to bear such immense power, these three had long since surpassed their own limits of endurance, with both body and Divine Soul operating in overdrive, already on the verge of collapse, struggling to hang on. ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï The only reason they had not retreated by now was the formidable enemy before them; they dared not fall back and were merely gritting their teeth and holding on out of desperation. But this tightly drawn string could snap at any moment. To continue to stretch this taut state even tighter was akin to gambling with their lives, risking a self-destructive death at any time. Lu Yuan, naturally, was pleased to see this develop. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï The more desperately these individuals fought now, the quicker and more profoundly they would die later. And if these three Human Immortals perished, then nearly half of the core strength of the Qing Immortal Sect would instantly crumble. After finishing off Zhang Xiuzhu, half the strength of the Qing Immortal Sect would be thoroughly annihilated. Such an opportunity to weaken the enemy¡¯s strength, he certainly wouldn¡¯t stop. On the contrary. Seeing the three Earth Immortals of the Formation begin to fight with all they had, Lu Yuan even more actively coordinated, making his own retreat seem quicker. With his two Avatars, he began to fight while retreating, heading towards the edge of the Formation, putting on an appearance of attempting to flee to draw in the other side to pay an even greater price. This indeed proved remarkably effective. Seeing that the enemy was about to be routed, the three Earth Immortals of the Formation, who had initially flagged a bit after their outburst, now surged back to full strength. They must have used some Secret Technique to again spur their own latent potential. Even Zhang Xiuzhu had a slight burst in strength; his previously somewhat depleted magic power now quickly replenished, as if blessed by a refreshing rain. It was apparent that he too had begun to employ Secret Techniques. And this would further exacerbate the already dire state of the opposition. Continuously dealing with the ferocious onslaught of his opponents, Lu Yuan felt a slight movement in his heart and subtly glanced toward the north. In that pitch-black night sky, beyond what the eyes could see, at this moment, there were already three figures quietly approaching the Battlefield. It was the Avatars of Che Shidao and others from Changqing Mountain, who had hastened over and were now in contact with his divine consciousness. Although the Reinforcements had already arrived, Lu Yuan did not immediately act, instead instructing his three Avatars to lurk around the Battlefield, beginning to make preparations. This time, attempting to surround and kill Zhang Xiuzhu, who was an Earth Immortal situated within a great formation ¨C this was his home ground. To take down this man, even if six Earth Immortals acted together, there was still a risk of failure. If Zhang Xiuzhu were to escape and return to Changqing Mountain, even with Huang Xuan guarding there, complications could still arise. At this critical juncture, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t want any problems to arise last minute. Therefore, he directly ordered the three Avatars that rushed over, to infiltrate the local Formation Method while unobserved. They were to slightly infiltrate and alter the surrounding grand formation, to turn this place into a cage that precluded any possibility of Zhang Xiuzhu¡¯s escape. With the cultivation levels of the three Avatars, along with Zhang Xiuzhu, the main controller of the great formation, and the three Human Immortals seated at the Formation Core having been drawn away, more Qing disciples from below had also left their stations, continuously driving out the invading cultivators of Taiping Dao. It could be said that right now, from the base-level formation platforms to the various Formation Cores, and up to the heart of the Formation Method, Su Yun Country¡¯s Earth Immortal formation was in a state completely uncontrolled. The sole reason it still maintained operation was due to the formation¡¯s inherent function. And under such conditions, it was the best opportunity for an outsider to invade. Capitalizing on this opportunity to directly reverse the ownership of the grand battle and seize it for personal use was but a mere flick of the wrist. As it happened. The three Avatars of Lu Yuan all inherited his knowledge and vision, and their cultivation realms were extremely high; solving such an ordinary Earth Immortal formation presented no difficulty at all. In just a moment, they would be able to snatch some control over the formation. By then, with that bit of control, they would be able to seal this space completely, cutting off Zhang Xiuzhu¡¯s escape route. Upon receiving the order from their original self, the three Avatars quickly sprang into action. Lu Yuan, to buy them time, slightly launched a counterattack, appearing as if he was unwilling to simply accept defeat and making a final stand. This further stimulated Zhang Xiuzhu and the others. The hope of expelling the invading enemy was just in sight, and the peril of their sect being invaded loomed over them every moment. In this critical Time, the four True Persons of Qing Immortal Sect began to fight with reckless abandon, putting their lives on the line. Their strength grew stronger and stronger, but their conditions worsened and endurance dropped. Lu Yuan¡¯s pace, meanwhile, kept shifting further back, approaching the edge of leaving the territory of Su Yun Country. ¡°` Chapter 1519 - Chapter 1519 Chapter 589 Punishing Zhang Xiuzhu_3 ?Chapter 1519: Chapter 589: Punishing Zhang Xiuzhu_3 Chapter 1519: Chapter 589: Punishing Zhang Xiuzhu_3 At that moment, in the back, Huang Yun and others who were infiltrating the Formation Method had finally seized control of the formation and slightly modified it. From its original defense design, they altered it into an entrapment formation. With just a thought, they could change heaven and earth, isolating the area completely. ¡°Ha ha, now is the time, take action!¡± Upon receiving the message, Lu Yuan, no longer delaying, burst into laughter and issued the command to proceed. Upon hearing this, Zhang Xiuzhu¡¯s face, which had been excited about defeating the enemy, instantly changed. A bad premonition emerged from his heart. But he couldn¡¯t afford to contemplate further, as troubles had already arisen behind him. Suddenly, the surrounding formation shifted, light columns shot skyward, and several nearby altars were activated to their fullest potential. The light columns interconnected, instantly forming a solid barrier, and above in the heavens, these light screen barriers also surfaced. In a blink of an eye, this place became a prison. He found himself trapped here. Realizing this, Zhang Xiuzhu felt a sudden tightness in his chest; his spirit wavered under the heavy blow, almost causing him to cough up blood. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í¨À?.§ã¦Ï ¡°Who are you, and why are you assisting Taiping Dao?¡± He shouted at the strange Earth Immortals behind him who had suddenly acted and trapped him. ¡°Pfft! Pfft! Pfft!¡± At that moment, several explosions sounded nearby followed by a cloud of blood mist. Turning around, he saw that Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s Earth Immortals from the photos had succumbed to shock, their spirits shattered, and their energy dispersed without support. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Unable to control the tremendous force, they were directly blasted into pieces, dying on the spot. Lu Yuan¡¯s earlier delay now laid bare its effectiveness. The opposing side, having lost three Earth Immortal level strengths in one breath, was severely damaged instantly. Zhang Xiuzhu completely fell into an isolated predicament. ¡°Ha ha ha, Daoist Zhang, don¡¯t you know who the newcomers are?¡± Seeing the situation was secured and to further dismay the enemy, unsettling his spirit, Lu Yuan chuckled, ¡°Previously, had you not received a distress letter from Changqing Mountain, and knew that there was a fire in your backyard? Exactly, these three here are Earth Immortals from my Taiping Dao. And at Changqing Mountain, one Earth Immortal remains deployed. Your sect¡¯s nest has been taken by us, your retreat path utterly severed, no hope of turning the tide. Today, Qing Immortal Sect shall perish here. If you know what¡¯s best, end yourself and spare the further torment. I will erect a monument and preserve your legacy, leaving a trace of incense for future generations, fulfilling our years of struggle.¡± Lu Yuan laid out one brutal reality after another, exposing them bloodily in front of Zhang Xiuzhu. Hearing all this, Zhang Xiuzhu, who had been struggling to hold on, could no longer hold back. ¡°Impossible!¡± With a long cry, blood spewed out, his body staggering, his spirit completely broken, and the backlash from previously used secret techniques finally erupted. ¡°Take action!¡± Seizing the moment, Lu Yuan¡¯s eyes gleamed, and with a wave of the Taiping Staff in his hand, a ray of divine light shot towards the opponent. The other five avatars, deploying martial arts and Divine Powers, swiftly followed, unleashing their attacks on Zhang Xiuzhu. ¡­ That night, the six Earth Immortals of Taiping Dao besieged Zhang Xiuzhu of Qing Immortal Sect, executing him in Su Yun Country. The Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s army of over ten thousand was also annihilated. Subsequently, Lu Yuan led his army northward, taking over Changqing Mountain, stirring the entire realm. Chapter 1520 - Chapter 1520 Chapter 590 Strategy of Dividing Forces ?Chapter 1520: Chapter 590: Strategy of Dividing Forces Chapter 1520: Chapter 590: Strategy of Dividing Forces Changqing Mountain. ¡°Nearly a thousand years have passed, and I didn¡¯t expect to return here so soon.¡± When Lu Yuan led his army and arrived at this location, looking at the towering mountain piercing the clouds, he couldn¡¯t help but express his emotions. By then, the battle for Su Yun Country had already ended. Facing his and five avatars¡¯ joint attack, and being cut off from the formation method, preventing any further harnessing of its power to enhance their cultivation. Suffered from the backlash of secret techniques, and reverting to his initial Early Earth Immortal state, Zhang Xiuzhu faced the siege of six equally strong cultivators and naturally couldn¡¯t create any significant disturbance. After desperately resisting for a short moment, he was demolished by several Divine Powers, not even a trace of his body remained. With his death, the remaining Changqing cultivators from Su Yun Country were also at the end of their strength. Eventually, with the Commander dead and the morale of the troops greatly shaken, Lu Yuan led his avatars to personally step in and annihilate them completely. Then, without taking time to rest or tally the military achievements, he only left behind the avatar Qing Guanzi to handle the aftermath here. He himself urgently led five thousand cultivators, along with the remaining avatars, rushing towards Changqing Mountain. Now, having arrived here, less than a Timing had passed since Huang Xuan and others had captured Changqing Mountain. In less than a Timing, Taiping Dao had accomplished the feat of capturing Changqing Mountain and laying siege to Zhang Xiuzhu, the speed of which was remarkably fast. Beside him, Che Shidao shook his head, ¡°With the speed of our accumulation, it took nearly a thousand years to pacify Changqing Mountain, which was actually somewhat slow. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï If we really wanted speed, we could have attempted this three or four hundred years ago. However, to be safe, we waited until now.¡± Lu Yuan smiled upon hearing this, ¡°Indeed, everything is for the sake of being cautious. Therefore, although we have now captured Changqing Mountain, this Northern Expedition battle cannot yet be considered fully settled. Yang Jihua is still leading the army outside. Those from the Nine Provinces who hear of our victory, I do not know how they will react. To be prudent, it is not yet time to be pleased with ourselves; we must quickly solidify our gains before the enemy can react. That way, even if they want to do something, we can respond at our leisure.¡± ¡°The main body speaks wisely, now is indeed the time to strike swiftly against the slow.¡± At this time, Huang Xuan, who had previously stayed behind guarding the mountain, also arrived and immediately said upon hearing their conversation, ¡°During the Timing I was guarding, some Changqing cultivators from within the Changqing Country realized that something was amiss here and came to the mountain to investigate. Although I moved quickly and extinguished all cultivators who entered the mountain, leaving no survivors, just that alone does not guarantee that the news won¡¯t continue to be concealed. The two thousand Changqing cultivators within Chang Country will soon realize something is wrong and discover the truth. If these two thousand disperse, they could be our biggest hidden threat and risk in ruling the Changqing Domain in the future. If we handle it improperly and let them escape to outside the territory, it might become another Jiuzhou Immortal Gate. Our urgent priority should be to act first while they are still uncertain of the truth and preemptively eliminate them. Then we can divide a fraction of our troops to sweep through Eastern Territory and Northern Territory, taking control of the territory first. The main body will continue leading the main army towards Northern Territory, to join the forces laying siege to Yang Jihua¡¯s troops. With these concurrent actions, Changqing will be extinguished with no possibility of a comeback. Moreover, the lands of Northern Territory and Eastern Territory will also fall under our control, solidifying the grand situation of Changqing. ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Even if those from the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect harbor grievances, facing a situation already set, they will be unable to resist.¡± Hearing this suggestion, Lu Yuan clapped his hands, ¡°Well said, we indeed need to act swiftly now.¡± Saying this, he paced two steps on the spot, deep in thought for a while before saying, ¡°Since we need to split our forces in two directions, targeting Yang Jihua as well as these territories of Eastern and Northern Territories, we will certainly need a considerable number of troops. Having just fought the battle of Su Yun Country, the original ten thousand troops of the Northern Expedition I led have already suffered heavy losses. After a roll call, besides the five thousand cultivators I led to Changqing Mountain, only at most three thousand remain, led by Qing Guanzi to handle the aftermath in Su Yun Country. Moreover, these three thousand are mostly injured, and without several months to a year, they will not be able to recover to their peak condition. A single battle caused the loss of two thousand and wounded three thousand. That three thousand in Su Yun Country still needs to divide forces to occupy the Three Nations there, clean up the remnants of Changqing Immortal Sect, and handle the deities of the Netherworld Court. Relying on those three thousand wounded to accomplish these tasks is already quite difficult, and Qing Guanzi is under great pressure, so let¡¯s not withdraw any more troops from his command. Those three thousand should remain in Su Yun Country.¡± Lu Yuan made arrangements, and all the numerous avatars nodded in agreement. The battle of Su Yun Country, while appearing exhilarating and thorough, required a tremendously heavy price. To mention nothing else, just the period when Lu Yuan, in an attempt to deceive Zhang Xiuzhu, was still forcing a fight despite being on the verge of retreat, unknowingly cost the lives of so many disciples on the battlefield. This time, the army of over ten thousand directly suffered more than half in casualties, much of which was due to this cost. Even now, the five thousand at Changqing Mountain were barely selected from that group of exhausted troops as capable fighters. Having picked out those able to fight and wanting to task the three thousand wounded in Su Yun Country with achievements such as expansion and conquest would be excessively harsh, treating people as less than human. Chapter 1521 - Chapter 1521 Chapter 590 Strategy of Dividing Forces_2 ?Chapter 1521: Chapter 590: Strategy of Dividing Forces_2 Chapter 1521: Chapter 590: Strategy of Dividing Forces_2 Lu Yuan, although often ruthless in pursuit of his goals and profits, was never inhumane to this extent. Of course, if there was a real need, regardless of whether they were wounded, as long as they could still move and cast spells, they would have to be sent to the front lines. However, Taiping Dao was clearly not desperate to such a degree, and Lu Yuan was not so short of hands that he needed to exploit the situation. ¡°Leave the Su Yun Country over there to Qing Guanzi. But aside from those frontlines in the Three Nations, there¡¯s also Changqing Country at the core of another three nations behind in the Eastern Territory. Now that Changqing Mountain has been taken, we can¡¯t ignore these territories. As Huang Xuan said, the two thousand Changqing Cultivators within Changqing Country must be swiftly dealt with. On the local level, those Divine Spirits belonging to Changqing Mountain¡¯s Netherworld Court also need to be uprooted and cleansed. For these Yin Gods, I can set a standard: those too deeply entangled with Changqing Mountain must be exterminated. But for those with lesser or no significant affiliation, if they are willing to surrender and submit, we can consider recruiting them and put them to use in a demoted capacity. Moreover, after years of war, Taiping Dao has also tried to minimize losses, but still, nearly thirty thousand cultivators have died or been injured. These martyred souls have already been assigned to some of the newly occupied territories, where they act as the City God Spirits for mountains and rivers, becoming the roots and feelers of our Dao, deeply embedded in local affairs. This time, with the conquest of the lands in the Eastern and Northern Territories, gaining at least a dozen nations, on average, there need to be at least four to five thousand Yin Gods for us to firmly manage and sort through each nation. With thirty thousand valiant spirits, and by recruiting and persuading a number of local Divine Spirits, with around thirty to fifty years of governance, we should be able to assimilate these newly occupied territories.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 Now that we have the matter of Su Yun Country, we might as well take it as a model. Following the standard of an Earth Immortal formation, assign a large army to every three nations, led by an Earth Immortal who will be responsible for cleansing the areas. As for the number of troops to be led¡­¡± Lu Yuan pondered for a moment before saying, ¡°In recent years, Taiping Dao has been recruiting a thousand disciples annually to replenish the numbers we¡¯ve lost. Over thirty years, the rear has recruited more than thirty thousand new disciples. These new disciples, while generally weaker in cultivation and only having consolidated one or two levels of energy, are still usable. Not having them join the main battlefield, but tasking them with clearing local Yin Gods, capturing stray Changqing disciples, and maintaining local order, is just barely workable. Issue my orders: divide the fifteen nations of the Northern and Eastern Territories into five battle zones, where each zone is responsible for three nations. From the rear in the Southern Domain, dispatch twenty thousand new disciples to come to the front line. Then divide these disciples into five groups, each led by an Earth Immortal, with a thousand per nation allocation; each Earth Immortal will lead three thousand, responsible for one battle zone. Disperse those three thousand wounded cultivators from Su Yun Country as well, divide them into five groups of six hundred each, and assign them to each battle zone. In this way, each zone will have one Earth Immortal, six hundred veteran disciples, and three thousand new disciples. With this strength, we could even manage to set up a rudimentary Earth Immortal formation. Thus, upon arrival in the area, immediately take over the altars established by Qing Immortal Sect, make modifications, and then quickly establish the Earth Immortal formations, ensuring they are activated. I don¡¯t expect you to repel very powerful enemies, just clear and control the area, and if a strong Earth Immortal enemy invades, delay them for a moment. That way, with a bit of time to react, I¡¯ll come immediately with reinforcements.¡± At the moment, Taiping Dao had just defeated the main force of Qing Immortal Sect and taken Changqing Mountain, achieving victory in this battle. But this victory was not complete. Throughout the regions of the Northern and Eastern Territories, a large number of Netherworld Court Divine Spirits still loyal to Qing Immortal Sect remained, as did many Changqing Cultivators who had fled from various battlefields. Even Yang Jihua¡¯s army of tens of thousands from Changqing Country still occupied territory in the Northern Domain. All these local forces, along with Yang Jihua¡¯s main force, were obstacles that Taiping Dao must remove to gain control of the nations in the Northern and Eastern Territories. Especially Yang Jihua¡¯s main force, Lu Yuan was sure they had received news of the fall of Changqing Mountain. At this moment, faced with such dire news, Yang Jihua might lead his army back to launch a counterattack on Changqing Mountain, stand and fight to the death to hold the Northern Territory, or perhaps lead his army far away, retreating outside Changqing Domain. All these were possibilities. Regardless of which option the enemy chose, Yang Jihua and his tens of thousands-strong army had become the greatest destabilizing factor in Lu Yuan¡¯s rule over Changqing Domain. Before eliminating this threat, Taiping Dao advancing into the Northern and Eastern Territories must ensure sufficient defense forces remain in local areas. Otherwise, if the defending forces are insufficient against an Earth Immortal leading tens of thousands, the enemy might just easily pierce through our lines. Particularly because in various places, there¡¯s a significant presence of Qing Immortal Sect remnants, and the enemy might coordinate internal and external attacks, making such defenses all the more necessary. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 An Earth Immortal, six hundred veteran disciples, and three thousand new disciples, paired with a rudimentary Earth Immortal formation is the result of cutting down to the absolute essentials. It cannot be reduced any further. Anything less simply can¡¯t stabilize the regions. Regarding this arrangement, the many avatars had no objections. Although they were somewhat lackluster Earth Immortals, they were still bearers of Dao Fruit and weren¡¯t the same as those formed from formations. Chapter 1522 - Chapter 1522 Chapter 590 Strategy of Dividing Forces_3 ?Chapter 1522: Chapter 590: Strategy of Dividing Forces_3 Chapter 1522: Chapter 590: Strategy of Dividing Forces_3 ¡°` Even with Yang Jihua¡¯s strength, they should be able to hold their own even if outmatched, but they could also last for a while. If they coordinated with the Formation Method, they could even counterattack. Relying on myself alone was actually enough to deal with Yang Jihua. Moreover, considering they could contact my main consciousness at any time to call for reinforcements, it would be even more stable than Mount Tai. The main body made such arrangements, which were very prudent and in line with their personalities. ¡°Besides leaving troops to clean up the scattered forces of the various countries, our Northern Expedition army still has five thousand old disciples and five thousand new disciples left, just enough to form a new Northern Expedition army. I will personally command this army and rush to the Eastern Territory to join with the United Army of the Nine Provinces in encircling and suppressing Yang Jihua. As for coordinating with the Nine Provinces and other matters, Yi Dancheng, you will be responsible for communicating with them. It so happens that, after divvying up the forces this time, there¡¯s one person who will be available, so you will follow me with the main force of the Northern Expedition to campaign against Yang Jihua.¡± Lu Yuan looked towards Yi Dancheng. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï On Taiping Dao¡¯s side, the contact with the Nine Provinces had always been handled by this avatar. Taking him along would make liaising with the Immortal Sects of the Nine Provinces much easier and more convenient. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Yi Dancheng nodded, ¡°Yes, I will communicate with them immediately.¡± Then Lu Yuan turned to Huang Xuan, ¡°Since you previously stationed yourself at Changqing Mountain, I will entrust you with this area and the three nations near Changqing Mountain in the Eastern Territory.¡± Huang Xuan answered the call, ¡°Yes, I will ensure this area is secure.¡± Lu Yuan nodded and looked towards the rest, ¡°Additionally, there are four more armies. Besides Qing Guanzi from Su Yun Country, you others discuss amongst yourselves and decide where you will go.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± All the avatars agreed. After completing the strategic arrangements for what followed, Lu Yuan¡¯s army took position in Changqing Mountain. He didn¡¯t stop there; he himself remained within the mountain, providing central support. The five thousand strong army that he had brought was stationed in places within the mountain rich in Spiritual Energy, offering many cultivation elixirs seized from Changqing Mountain and distributing them to the disciples to help them recover more quickly. The orders to move troops had already been sent telepathically to Jin Qingyue, who was in charge at Mi Yun Mountain. She was already making arrangements. The twenty thousand reinforcement cultivators from the rear would be able to arrive at Changqing Mountain within a day at most. By then, Lu Yuan would be leading the troops on the campaign. As the main force of the campaign, those five thousand cultivators under him couldn¡¯t afford to remain in such an exhausted state, so of course, they needed to quickly regain their combat strength. Of course. While the army was resting, it didn¡¯t mean they were doing nothing. Huang Xuan and the other five avatars were all dispatched by Lu Yuan to various parts of Changqing Country to eliminate the scattered two thousand Changqing Cultivators. This was also a significant hidden danger that, as Huang Xuan said, needed to be cleared away as quickly as possible. After all these arrangements were made, Lu Yuan finally had some free time to properly rest and recover. Especially since he had fought all day, particularly in his confrontation with Zhang Xiuzhu, the pressure had been immense. The earlier retreat wasn¡¯t just a pretensea€¡±it was because he really couldn¡¯t hold on any longer. Although he didn¡¯t get injured due to being cautious, the wear and tear on his mind and magic power was substantial. Now he, too, urgently needed time to rest and recover. As for his disciples below him, there was even less need to mention it. Once the rest orders were passed down, everyone found a Cave Mansion to enter seclusion, restoring their condition and magic power as much as possible before setting out again. This moment of rest was only temporary. Everyone was clear that the next deployment would not be far off. If they wanted to survive in the war, they had better enhance and recover their strength as much as possible. ¡°` Chapter 1523 - Chapter 1523 Chapter 591 Sitting and Waiting for Death ?Chapter 1523: Chapter 591 Sitting and Waiting for Death Chapter 1523: Chapter 591 Sitting and Waiting for Death Northern Territory. Changqing Immortal Sect front line. When the message from the rear reached him, Yang Jihua, who was leading the troops to resist the invasion of the Nine Provinces United Army, was completely stunned. ¡°It¡¯s impossible, this simply can¡¯t be true!¡± After hearing about the urgent call for help from the Human Immortal guarding Changqing Mountain via the Communicating Jade Talisman, Yang Jihua was so scared that he blurted out, ¡°How could I not know what Taiping Dao and the Nine Provinces are up to? Currently, managing to mobilize six Earth Immortals on two battlefields is already their limit, how could they possibly find another four Earth Immortals? It¡¯s fake, this is definitely fake. Tell me, which evil force are you, daring to deceive me here?¡± Yang Jihua did not want to and was scared to believe the message was true. However, the development of the world and the arrival of events did not revolve around his will. As he struggled with disbelief, the Human Immortal on the other end of the Communication Jade Charm had just started to explain a few words when a bout of explosions and fierce shouting occurred. Following a loud shake, the communication was suddenly cut off. Attempts to re-establish communication with the other side were fruitless, as they could no longer be contacted. There were only two explanations for this situation. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï One, the Communication Jade Charm was too distant and had exceeded the communication range. Two, the other Jade Symbol was destroyed, thus contact was naturally no longer possible. Though Changqing Mountain was far, at over 200,000 miles away, this did not exceed the range of the Communication Jade Charm. Combining this with the prior message, it left only one conclusion, that on the other side, Changqing Mountain, something grave had indeed occurred. Someone was invading Changqing Mountain, and the enemy was powerful, suspected to include four Earth Immortals. Most likely, the Human Immortal left in charge had already met with misfortune. After pondering this message and situation, a mixture of unease and fear swiftly climbed to its peak inside Yang Jihua. If something happened to Changqing Mountain, then even if he managed to hold off the Nine Provinces United Army here, what point would there be if their base was lost? Everything would be over. Realizing the grim situation, Yang Jihua could not afford to contemplate deeply about where those four attacking Earth Immortals from Changqing had appeared from. Now, he had to consider how to deal with this unexpected development. Should he immediately return to the rescue? Or should he stay here because the situation was unclear and keep the army on its guard to respond to developments? Or perhaps, while the enemy had not yet attacked here, should he take the army and flee? These three choices represented three possible futures for Changqing Immortal Sect. Yet none of the futures were what Yang Jihua wanted, nor were they something Changqing Immortal Sect could withstand. Thus, even though he was not lacking in decisiveness, he still found himself hesitating in the face of this choice. ¡°Perhaps the situation isn¡¯t that bad. I should first check with Master Uncle Zhang. He is near Changqing Mountain, and Su Yun Country is not far from the sect. He likely has received the message by now and has already led his troops back for the rescue. With Master Uncle Zhang¡¯s strength and the support of a sizable army, as long as he can make it back to Changqing Mountain in time, we will surely drive the strong enemies back and save our sect.¡± Yang Jihua murmured to himself, constantly trying to think positively. ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï He then took out the Communication Jade Charm and started to contact Zhang Xiuzhu. The Communication Jade Charm flickered with a gentle light, seeing this, he breathed a sigh of relief because it meant that the other Jade Charm was intact and could still be contacted. But although he could now reach the other party, there was no response from the other side, and he could not get through at all. ¡°That¡¯s right, Master Uncle Zhang must have received the message by now and he should be back at the sect fighting those strong enemies. Naturally, he can¡¯t attend to me during the battle. This is a good sign!¡± Thinking this way, Yang Jihua¡¯s heart eased slightly. Now, not fearing the lack of response from the other side, but afraid of not being able to contact anyone at all. Zhang Xiuzhu not answering his message now was better than him answering. Because this indicated that the other side was taking action, trying to turn the tide. With this thought, Yang Jihua temporarily stopped his attempts to continuously call the other side. The other party might be engaged in a life and death battle; he couldn¡¯t go there to help, and it had to be accepted. He must not distract his Master Uncle with such matters. If his action led his Master Uncle to be distracted and thereby brew irreversible consequences, Yang Jihua would never forgive himself. Yet although he stopped calling Zhang Xiuzhu, Yang Jihua wasn¡¯t doing nothing, just sitting here waiting. Now, he had to engage with the Nine Provinces United Army, those beaten and dispirited troops. Although this time he was only leading a feint attack, the enemy still had tens of thousands of troops and three Earth Immortals. Even if only a fraction of their force was used against them, it represented a considerable threat. The Nine Provinces United Army might not take it seriously and fight lackadaisically. But if Yang Jihua¡¯s side did not resist seriously, their defense might be broken, and the battlefield could be breached. Just today, during the day, he had just ended a major battle with an Earth Immortal from the opposite side, with both sides now exhausted of their magic power, merely withdrawing to recuperate. In this tense situation, unless Yang Jihua was willing to abandon these tens of thousands of troops and even the entire Northern Territory, there was no way he could leave. However, could he afford such losses? Clearly, he could not. With such a turning point occurring at Changqing Mountain, the entire situation in the Eastern Territory, including Zhang Xiuzhu¡¯s army, could potentially collapse. If he failed to save Changqing Mountain, then the whole grand strategy of Changqing Immortal Sect would crumble. By then, the ten thousand troops he commanded could become the last remnants of Changqing Immortal Sect. Chapter 1524 - Chapter 1524 Chapter 591 Sitting Ducks_2 ?Chapter 1524: Chapter 591 Sitting Ducks_2 Chapter 1524: Chapter 591 Sitting Ducks_2 ¡°To preserve the Tao inheritance and even to plot a revival hereafter, I can only rely on this power in my hands.¡± ¡°For just this reason, Yang Jihua must protect the military forces at hand.¡± Therefore, he cannot leave, and he cannot even show any intention of wanting to leave, lest he shake the morale of the troops. But just because he cannot leave does not mean others cannot. Worried for the situation back home, Yang Jihua could not rest at ease; after much contemplation, he decided to call on one of the three Human Immortals under his command. ¡°Changqing Mountain might have met with an unexpected event, seemingly attacked by a formidable enemy. Now, Master Uncle Zhang has already led troops to reinforce and is engaging the enemy, unable to contact me promptly. I have no idea what the situation is like over there. Take this Communication Jade Charm and hurry back to Changqing Mountain. You don¡¯t need to join the battlefield. Just observe the situation from the side and then report back to me in a timely manner. The survival of the sect¡¯s legacy is now in your handsa€¡±do you understand?¡± Yang Jihua quickly briefed the disciple who had rushed over and gave his swift directives. The Human Immortal never expected that his School Leader would call him over to deliver such dire news. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Yet, within that brief message, the perilous circumstances facing Changqing Immortal Sect became crystal clear. As a True Immortal of the Sect, he could not shirk his duty in the face of the Sect¡¯s crisis, immediately responding with resolve, ¡°School Leader, rest assured. I will delve deep into Changqing Mountain to ascertain the state of our Sect.¡± After accepting the mission, the person hurriedly departed. Once he was gone, Yang Jihua pondered further and then summoned two more disciples who possessed the true transmissions, giving them each an urgent command: ¡°The front line is dire, and we¡¯re short-handed. The enemy¡¯s offensive in the Nine Provinces has intensified lately, instability is already evident on multiple fronts. You two must quickly go to the countries of Qingque and Li, and summon Brother Zhou and Li Er. Tell them to exit their closed-door cultivation immediately, and rush to the northern front lines of our territory to gather with me and resist the invaders.¡± Now that Changqing Mountain had encountered a crisis, although Zhang Xiuzhu had gone to remedy it, the enemies numbered four Earth Immortals, not to mention three Earth Immortals from the Taiping Dao at the Su Yun Country front line, plus the tens of thousands of hostile forces. Faced with such a situation, Yang Jihua lacked confidence in whether Zhang Xiuzhu could withstand and recover from the defeat. To be safe, he could only summon the two brothers first, who were in closed-door cultivation in the rear, focusing on their breakthrough to become an Earth Immortal. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? This way, if Changqing Mountain indeed met with disaster and the worst-case scenario unfolded, With himself and the two brothers present, in addition to the tens of thousands of troops on hand, even if they had to retreat from Changqing Domain, there would still be an opportunity for resurgence later on. On the contrary, If he left the two brothers in the rear still, should Taiping Dao seize Changqing Mountain, the brothers would remain oblivious until the enemy arrived at their doorstep, likely falling victims to foul play. Just considering their safety, it was time to call them back. Of course, even though he had made this decision, to stabilize morale and to contain information, Yang Jihua did not reveal the true situation to the disciples below; the pretext he used to call people over was simply that the front line was in urgent need. He knew that such news could not be kept secret for long. But until something conclusive happened with Changqing Mountain, he did not want any disturbances here to affect Changqing Mountain. He already felt guilty that he was unable to return for assistance, feeling unworthy of the title of School Leader. At this time, he absolutely could not afford to cause any further trouble for Master Uncle Zhang, who was making efforts to salvage the situation. ¡°Yes, School Leader.¡± The disciples below, hearing the serious tone of their School Leader, could sense that something seemed amiss. After all, they too were on the front line. How could they not know the situation here? Although the current situation was somewhat adverse, it was far from the point of needing to call out the two valued brothers upon whom the Sect¡¯s hopes hinged from their seclusion. It seemed unnecessary to call them out under these circumstances. Clearly, something had happened, prompting the School Leader to make this decision. Moreover, this turn of events was unfavorable to Changqing Immortal Sect. But they were loyal to the Sect and also quite astute, not stepping forward to expose the truth during this time, avoiding making moves that could compromise the greater situation. After receiving their orders, they quickly set off, headed toward the two countries. ¡°I¡¯ve done everything I can do now. Master Uncle Zhang, Changqing Mountain, the Sect, it¡¯s all in your hands¡­¡± Standing under the night sky, Yang Jihua gazed at the pale crescent moon, his heart heavy with worry, silently praying. ¡­ Meanwhile, while Yang Jihua was feeling unsettled and indecisive due to the changes at Changqing Mountain, Over at Changqing Mountain, Lu Yuan¡¯s several Avatars had already purged the Changqing Cultivators within the borders of Changqing Country. Two thousand Changqing Cultivators, save for a few dozen who had escaped too swiftly to pursue, All had fallen at the hands of a few Earth Immortal Avatars. After all, Lu Yuan had mobilized five Earth Immortal Avatars this time; these beings were spread out over the expanse of more than one hundred thousand miles in Changqing Country. On average, each Avatar only had to oversee two to three thousand miles. With the perception of an Earth Immortal, capable of scrying a thousand miles with efficiency, Sweeping through their own assigned regions was a matter of moments. Even because their efficiency was so high, the Human Immortal Yang Jihua had sent to scout the situation at Changqing Mountain ultimately, unknowingly, collided with Huang Yun who was clearing the area. And then there was no afterward. A Human Immortal encountering an Earth Immortal head-on, no matter how skilled, couldn¡¯t escape fate. Easily dispatching this person, and then through soul-searching, Huang Yun learned Yang Jihua had come to know of the troubles at Changqing Mountain, yet he still had not chosen to flee. Chapter 1525 - Chapter 1525 Chapter 591 Sitting Ducks_3 ?Chapter 1525: Chapter 591 Sitting Ducks_3 Chapter 1525: Chapter 591 Sitting Ducks_3 ¡°` He was fantasizing that the late Zhang Xiuzhu was still fighting against the tide, feeling that Changqing Mountain still had a chance. This news¡­ really¡­ Was so thrilling. Lu Yuan had always worried that once Yang Jihua realized something was amiss, he would simply flee. But now he hadn¡¯t fled; instead, he chose to hold his ground. Wasn¡¯t that the same as waiting for death? Therefore, after receiving this intelligence from Huang Yun, Lu Yuan immediately ordered Yi Dan city, which had just completed its cleanup task, to send a messenger overnight to the northern frontier, to contact the Nine Provinces United Army and urge them to launch an immediate attack on Yang Jihua. The excuse was very easy to find. They could simply say that the Taiping Dao had dispatched a flanking force that was currently launching a night raid on Changqing Mountain. But because the enemy was defending tightly, they could not take it down for the moment, but Changqing Mountain¡¯s defenses were already shaken. Another fierce attack for a period, and it would surely fall. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Now Zhang Xiuzhu at the Su Yun Country¡¯s frontline was fully engaged by the Taiping Dao, preventing the main army here from returning to aid Changqing Mountain. The only concern was that on the northern frontier, Yang Jihua would immediately rush back to assist after receiving word. To not miss this opportunity, the Taiping Dao strongly hoped that the Nine Provinces United Army would launch an attack, holding down Yang Jihua¡¯s forces to cooperate with the Taiping Dao in taking down Changqing Mountain. Look, listen. The Taiping Dao¡¯s surprise attack on Changqing Mountain was real. The front line of Su Yun Country, where Lu Yuan was doing his utmost to hold Zhang Xiuzhu in check, was also true. Then, with these two true events as evidence, the Taiping Dao¡¯s hope that the Nine Provinces United Army would launch a feint attack naturally became reasonable. Lu Yuan hadn¡¯t lied; he had merely embellished the outcome of a battle that had already ended, adjusting the timeline to the present and informing his allies. Such news, composed entirely of truths, could not be more genuine. Even in the face of truth-detecting magic, there would be no fear of being scrutinized. Speaking of which, one must mention the purification achievements of Lu Yuan over the years. During the years of war, Lu Yuan sent all those within the Taiping Tao Sect who had been infiltrated by external forces and were somewhat unreliable, straight to the frontline, to fight in the most perilous places. Over the course of more than forty years, the Taiping Dao, once infiltrated like a sieve, had been cleansed round after round, practically sweeping out all the spies. Whether they were from the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate or the Qing Immortal Sect. War is the best furnace, capable of purifying away all impurities. By now, the disciples remaining on the Taiping Dao¡¯s frontline were mostly cultivators born outside the Southern Domain, with loyal identities, all reliable. And those local disciples who posed a risk and were not so dependable. They were now heeding Lu Yuan¡¯s orders, rushing from the Southern Domain toward Changqing Mountain! In this way, they managed to create a time lag, successfully deceiving both the Nine Provinces and Yang Jihua, leaving them unable to grasp the true situation at Changqing Mountain. Of course. Some disciples had still escaped from Changqing Mountain, and on the frontline of Su Yun Country, the Taiping birds hadn¡¯t killed all the Changqing Cultivators either. Although these fleeing Changqing Cultivators were currently trying desperately to escape for their lives, not yet able to pass along the news. But given the speed at which cultivators flee, wouldn¡¯t Nine Provinces and Yang Jihua both be clear on the situation after an hour or two? But hadn¡¯t Lu Yuan already begun reaching out to the Nine Provinces? While the enemy was still in the dark, let them start fighting each other first. Once the fighting started, it wouldn¡¯t be so easy for them to stop as they pleased. Even if they unraveled the truth, and neither side wanted to continue fighting, it would already be too late. It wouldn¡¯t be possible for the two sides to cease hostilities within six hours. In fact, fighting for a whole day was normal. In this manner, Lu Yuan could secure some more time, and the reinforcements coming from the Southern Domain would also arrive. The five thousand exhausted disciples of Changqing Mountain would have mostly recovered by then. He could then directly lead his forces toward the northern domain. By then, the exhaustedly fighting forces of the Nine Provinces and Yang Jihua, faced with the Taiping Dao¡¯s well-rested army, would have no power to resist. Capturing Yang Jihua and compelling the Nine Provinces to submit would all be achieved today. ¡°Time is of the essence; Yi Dan city, take advantage of the fact that the Nine Provinces have yet to respond and quickly go fool them.¡± Lu Yuan urged. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï ¡°` Chapter 1526 - Chapter 1526 Chapter 592 Hunting in the Northern Domain ?Chapter 1526: Chapter 592: Hunting in the Northern Domain Chapter 1526: Chapter 592: Hunting in the Northern Domain North of the domain, the Camp of the Nine Provinces United Army. ¡°The Taiping Dao launched a surprise attack on Changqing Mountain and is currently besieging it. The Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s defenses are tight, making it difficult to break through. They¡¯re requesting our side to coordinate resources, to delay Yang Jihua¡¯s speed in aiding Changqing Mountain?¡± When the Messenger from Yi Dancheng arrived and brought this news, Huang Yuanxiu immediately summoned Lu Luoxian and Fu Baopu to discuss the matter. Upon hearing this, Lu Luoxian immediately asked, ¡°Is the Taiping Dao¡¯s surprise attack on Changqing Mountain true or false? Could this be another deceit aimed at us?¡± No wonder he had such thoughts. It was because Taiping Dao had been holding back all along, letting them and the Qing Immortal Sect fight to the death, resulting in heavy losses for them, while Taiping Dao simply stepped in to reap the benefits. Such behavior was indeed dishonorable, and the distrust towards Taiping Dao by the Nine Provinces had its reasons. ¡°It¡¯s unlikely to be false; I¡¯ve just received a report from a spy we planted in the Qing Immortal Sect. They say that suddenly, a large number of Taiping Dao cultivators appeared in Changqing Country, and a True Immortal among them started slaughtering the Changqing Cultivators on a massive scale. Now, the entire Changqing Country is in chaos. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? I also sought to contact other spies for confirmation, only to find that communication with many agents around Changqing Mountain has been cut off. Trying to reach them now is impossible; we don¡¯t know if they¡¯ve met with misfortune. From these reports and anomalies, it¡¯s clear that Changqing Mountain has indeed been invaded, and even Changqing Country has been affected. The Taiping Dao must have really sent a force to steal upon the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s lair. And considering the intelligence we have at hand, the surprise force they¡¯ve dispatched is not weaka€¡±they might indeed have the chance to take Changqing Mountain.¡± Huang Yuanxiu organized the clues and replied with a hint of excitement in his tone. From the signs at hand, Taiping Dao seemed to have indeed staged such a major operation, and the lair of the Qing Immortal Sect was on the brink of being overrun. Although it was unclear how Taiping Dao managed to deceive Zhang Xiuzhu at the Su Yun Country¡¯s front line and move such a large force behind them, the fact was right in front of them. For Huang Yuanxiu, who had always advocated for striking the Qing Immortal Sect, it was naturally the best news since the war began. ¡°Since the matter is true, we, being part of the Nine Provinces, should fully exert ourselves and assist the Taiping Dao in breaking through Changqing Mountain. Initiating a temporary offensive to tie down Yang Jihua is all that¡¯s needed. We were bound to battle them anyway; moving now is nothing out of the ordinary. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? On the contrary, if we can use this opportunity to shatter Changqing Mountain and topple the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s stronghold, then perhaps this war could quickly subside within a few days. I wouldn¡¯t have to delay for long, wrestling with the enemy over each country and territory with endless casualties. Weighing it up, the losses would be even smaller.¡± Having confirmed the accuracy of the information, Fu Baopu also chose to support. Seeing this, Huang Yuanxiu decisively approved, ¡°Good, if neither of my junior brothers has any objections, let us deploy troops. Let¡¯s agree to Taiping Dao¡¯s request and battle Yang Jihua again tonight.¡± As someone who actively favored warfare, any opportunity to strike at the Qing Immortal Sect was met with Huang Yuanxiu¡¯s full support. The reason he hadn¡¯t immediately sent troops was due to the need to consider the opinions of the other two allies; now that consensus had been reached, there was nothing further to discuss. To hell with it! That night, the Nine Provinces United Army ignited the fervor of seven thousand troops, led by three Earth Immortals, and they launched a night assault north of the domain. Under such abrupt circumstances, Yang Jihua could only curse the Nine Provinces for their despicable treachery while urgently mobilizing troops to resist. He had just dispatched a Human Immortal, and with one of the three Formation Cores of the Earth Immortal formation left unguarded, this reflected on the battlefield, as the power of the Earth Immortal formation was inevitably reduced. Moreover, instead of the three Formation Method Earth Immortals, there were now only two. This made the resistance against Huang Yuanxiu¡¯s assault even harder for Yang Jihua¡¯s side. In contrast, Huang Yuanxiu, upon realizing his opponent was one Formation Method Earth Immortal down, was filled with even more joy. The enemy would not lie. The ironclad evidence before his eyes was sufficient to prove that the Taiping Dao was indeed launching a fierce attack on Changqing Mountain. Yang Jihua¡¯s side had even heard news and sent back a Human Immortal, most likely to return and rescue their stronghold. Otherwise, faced with such a fierce attack from them, they wouldn¡¯t conceal and withhold their strength. The fact that they were now lacking people only indicated that indeed something had gone wrong with the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s rear. This news was most welcome. Therefore, it was even more imperative not to let the enemy get away. The longer they held Yang Jihua¡¯s troops, the more pressure would be lifted from Taiping Dao¡¯s forces at Changqing Mountain. Thus, even if Changqing Mountain couldn¡¯t be taken in the end, if Taiping Dao¡¯s flanking force managed to cause disorder and significant damage to the Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s rear, the campaign would still be considered a success. And if they could breach Changqing Mountain, the war could be concluded earlier, defeating the Qing Immortal Sect with the least expense. This was a win-win situation, and with the glimmer of victory ahead, Huang Yuanxiu and his forces naturally put in their full support. Consequently, the offensive from the Nine Provinces, led by several commanders, became increasingly fierce. Gradually, they gained some of the momentum that Lu Yuan had previously exhibited in Su Yun Country, battling to the death to hold back Zhang Xiuzhu. Given the hatred between the Nine Provinces and the Qing Immortal Sect, both sides indeed had the motivation to fight on. Under such a relentless attack from his foes, Yang Jihua was under immense pressure. Chapter 1527 - Chapter 1527 Chapter 592 Hunting Grounds North_2 ?Chapter 1527: Chapter 592 Hunting Grounds North_2 Chapter 1527: Chapter 592 Hunting Grounds North_2 ¡°` He was far from as strong as Zhang Xiuzhu. Previously relying on the power of the formation, he could barely elevate his strength to the mid-stage Earth Immortal level, barely stepping over that threshold. But now that he had dispatched one of his Human Immortals, and with one fewer True Immortal to anchor the formation core, the formation¡¯s power instantly diminished significantly, and many problems arose in its operation. As a result, the augmentation the formation could offer him also reduced considerably. At this time, even with the power of the formation added, he could not even reach the mid-stage Earth Immortal strength, but only maintain at the limit of early Earth Immortal. Although this strength was not weak, for an ordinary cultivator of this cultivation, even facing three opponents at once, they could still cope. But Yang Jihua¡¯s situation was clearly not normal. He, just like those formation Earth Immortals, now possessed strength that exceeded his own level, which he also could not fully control. Such artificially inflated realm, was destined to be substandard. Originally elevated to the mid-stage Earth Immortal, even if it was substandard, one could still crush opponents with sheer volume. But now that his level had fallen, even if still inflated, he was no longer able to face three adversaries of the same level. After a period of combat, Yang Jihua obviously began to struggle. The two formation Earth Immortals assisting him were even more inflated and thus under greater pressure. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï After fighting for just over an hour, both were finding it difficult to hold on, having sustained many injuries and were nearly forced to leave the battlefield. The mere absence of one Human Immortal had brought the situation to such a dire state, filling Yang Jihua with regret. Had he known this would happen, he would not have dispatched that Human Immortal and would have sent a true disciple instead. After all, it was just to scout information, and Five Qi Towards Primordial cultivation was almost sufficient. Even if one was not secure enough, sending several more would do the job. But now that the decision had been made, it was too late for regrets. Who could have anticipated that Jiuzhou would react so quickly, and that they would indeed cooperate so well with Taiping Dao, willing to launch a new offensive so soon after the last battle had ended? The enemy was already at his doorstep; now was not the time to worry about Changqing Mountain, but how to preserve himself and the defense line before him was the most urgent matter. Otherwise, if his side was defeated, and tens of thousands of troops fell at this point, or even if he himself died here. Then even if Changqing Mountain was saved, what use would it be? Survival came first; other things could wait. Faced with the combined attack of three peers of the same level, and gradually being driven into a corner, Yang Jihua, now fighting for his own survival, also began to fight desperately. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï All his energy was focused on dealing with enemies, to the point where he could not spare even the slightest distraction, utterly unable to consider anything else. As for Yang Jihua and his two companions. They noticed that the balance of strength was already tilting. It seemed that they wouldn¡¯t need to wait for Changqing Mountain to fall; they could defeat the enemies in front of them first. Originally, they just intended to coordinate in combat, but as the fight progressed, their intentions changed in an instant. If they could win by themselves, why depend on others? Although Taiping Dao and they had already united as one, even becoming the Jiuzhou League Leader, the alliance was only in name. Thanks to various previous events and Taiping Dao¡¯s recent arrival, to say there were no rifts between them would be utter nonsense. One does not need to bake bread to be spirited. As the old guard of Jiuzhou, they didn¡¯t want to lose face in front of newcomers and sought to save some embarrassment. Not to mention, with the previous agreement, within the whole United Army, the territory gained in this battle would belong to those who seized it. This agreement was not nullified just because Lu Yuan became the Alliance Leader. Even for the sake of this agreement, they had sufficient interest in seizing more territory to compensate for the heavily damaged Western Jiuzhou. Taiping Dao was already powerful enough. To cope with this power, they needed the eight Immortal Sects to unite to counter it. If the other side grew stronger, swallowing the entire Northern and Eastern Territories, even bringing in the Radiant Immortal Dynasty would not be enough to contend with Taiping Dao. By that time, facing a dominant Taiping Dao, being the Jiuzhou League Leader gave them the legitimacy to do whatever they wanted to them. Huang Yuanxiu and others would not even have a good reason or strength to resist. Perhaps the Heavenly River Sect, Jade Toad Sect, and other Immortal Sects from outside the territories could avoid Taiping Dao¡¯s infiltration by virtue of their external position. But the other five Sects of Western Jiuzhou, those Immortal Sects left within Changqing Domain, would not be so lucky. They would probably end up being suppressed and gradually infiltrated by Taiping Dao, eventually being devoured one by one. Although they all knew that any Immortal Sect that unified the territories would do the same, Seeing old friends of tens of thousands of years coming to such an end, Huang Yuanxiu and others found it unbearable. To prevent this from happening, they had no choice but to put in more effort in this war. To win more territory for the Western Five Sects, allowing them enough resource foundation to support their later restoration and rise. In this way, when their strength had recovered somewhat, with the support from sects like the Heavenly River Sect from outside the territory, they could also block Taiping Dao¡¯s infiltration and assimilation. This sounded similar to Jiuzhou Immortal Sect¡¯s current resistance against Changqing Immortal Sect, but in essence, it was different. Firstly, Huang Yuanxiu and his allies didn¡¯t intend to confront Taiping Dao directly, nor did they plan to overthrow Taiping Dao. They were all Jiuzhou, having finally seized Changqing Domain after considerable effort, and restored Jiuzhou¡¯s foundation. ¡°` Chapter 1528 - Chapter 1528 Chapter 592 Hunting Grounds North_3 ?Chapter 1528: Chapter 592 Hunting Grounds North_3 Chapter 1528: Chapter 592 Hunting Grounds North_3 At this moment, no one wanted to start another internal war. Individuals like Huang Yuanxiu would never commit such a historical sin; they simply could not bear such responsibility. The only reason they harbored such thoughts was that they did not want sects like Ziyun to meet an end where their legacies would be severed. As for the dominance of Changqing Domain, as long as Taiping Dao still flew the banner of Nine Provinces and recognized themselves as part of Nine Provinces, it didn¡¯t matter if they conceded power. As long as this status could be maintained, sects from beyond the territories such as Heavenly River Sect would already be satisfied. So, after witnessing the hope of defeating Yang Jihua and securing victory in this battle, Huang Yuanxiu and the others grew even more serious in their efforts. While Yang Jihua was being careful on defense, they launched their attacks wholeheartedly. Gradually, what was a coordinated fight turned into a full-scale siege. The situation on both sides grew increasingly tense; as their forces waned, the United Army of Nine Provinces simply called in cultivators who were recuperating in the rear to return to the battlefield. ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Every bit of available strength was put to use. Faced with the increasingly invested Nine Provinces United Army, Qing Immortal Sect had no choice but to bite the bullet and push forward in defense of their lines. Fortunately, they had the Formation Method as support. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.?¦Ï Even though their strength was lesser than their attacking opponents, and even though the Formation Methods had been somewhat weakened, Apart from the top-level Earth Immortals, who were greatly affected, the impact was relatively minor among their lower-ranking cultivators. Therefore, amongst the upper echelons like Huang Yuanxiu and Yang Jihua, the scales of war tilted further; they were even close to deciding the outcome. But among the mid and lower ranks, the battle was still intense, with neither side able to secure a decisive victory. At this time, some news from Changqing Mountain in the rear actually continued to reach both fronts. But in such a fierce battle, neither Yang Jihua nor Huang Yuanxiu and the others had any energy to spare for such concerns. They didn¡¯t even have the time to listen to the news. The disciples who received the messages didn¡¯t have the courage or the strength to run onto the battlefield of several Earth Immortals to notify them of the news. And since they were unaware of the news, the war, naturally, did not stop. As night fell and morning came, the darkness receded, and daylight began to break. In the blink of an eye, they had fought through the night, and even well into the day, the conflict showed no signs of abating; they fought throughout the morning. Until the sun was high in the sky. Although the disciples below still had not decided a victor, both sides were stubbornly holding on. But at the top, Yang Jihua, his two Formation Earth Immortals no longer at his side, was disheveled, his energy waned, struggling to hold on. At this decisive moment, in the distant East, a fleet of Immortal Vessels approached at high speed, surrounded by rosy clouds and auspicious mist. Under the brewing storm, atop a massive Immortal Vessel, a banner bearing the word ¡°peaceful¡± fluttered in the wind, so strikingly visible. After a night of rest and after gathering reinforcements from the Southern Domain, Lu Yuan split his many Avatars, sending them to claim territories in the Northern and Eastern Domains. He himself, along with the forces from Yi Dancheng, led an organized army of ten thousand, aboard dozens of Immortal Vessels, majestically hurried towards this battlefield. ¡°Haha, my fellow seniors, it seems like I¡¯ve come at just the right time! I¡¯ve caught the last opportunity to hunt down the Rebel Head in Changqing!¡± Lu Yuan, looking at the nearly concluded battlefield ahead, had his eyes light up, and he burst into laughter, projecting his voice across the battlefield. This grand movement also instantly caught the attention of both parties on the field. In that moment, everyone¡¯s expressions changed. Whether from Changqing or Nine Provinces. No one expected Taiping Dao to arrive here, ready to join the hunt in the North! Chapter 1529 - Chapter 1529 Chapter 593 Yang the Immortal Flees for His Life ?Chapter 1529: Chapter 593: Yang the Immortal Flees for His Life Chapter 1529: Chapter 593: Yang the Immortal Flees for His Life ¡°Why has he come?¡± ¡°Why are the troops of Taiping Dao here?¡± These were the first thoughts that sprung to mind for Huang Yuanxiu and Yang Jihua when Lu Yuan and the Taiping Dao¡¯s troops arrived on the battlefield. But immediately after, they realized there could only be one explanation for Taiping Dao¡¯s presence here: Changqing Mountain had fallen. It was only after taking down Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s stronghold that Taiping Dao could spare the forces to come here. However, the number of people Taiping Dao had brought seemed excessive. Huang Yuanxiu and others tacitly stopped fighting after Lu Yuan entered the scene. They then looked back to the east. Nearly a hundred Immortal Vessels were seen, along with countless cultivators riding alongside, each controlling their own light streaks, serving as an escort. Even a brief glance was enough to estimate that the personnel Taiping Dao had deployed this time numbered in the tens of thousands. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? Wasn¡¯t it said that Taiping Dao only had a small force attacking Changqing Mountain? Your small force amounts to tens of thousands! Or rather, these are the survivors of the ten thousand troops after conquering the solid fortress of Changqing Mountain. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï The size of Taiping Dao¡¯s so-called ¡°small force¡± was unreasonably exaggerated. What¡¯s more critical was how such a large force could sneak past Qing Immortal Sect and the front-line army of Su Yun Country. Was Zhang Xiuzhu blind? In any case, the arrival of Taiping Dao here, with such force, conveyed a message and significance that was too terrifying. So terrifying that both the United Army of Nine Provinces and Qing Immortal Sect found it hard to believe and accept. However, while they were shocked still, Lu Yuan was not. Seeing the sides cease fighting, he immediately called out, ¡°Why do my three senior brothers hesitate? Join me quickly in taking action, let¡¯s kill Yang Jihua together!¡± With that, Lu Yuan raised his Taiping Staff, and behind him a myriad of lights bloomed, divine glows spilling forth like water, streaking towards Yang Jihua. Simultaneously, with a flick of his other hand, a golden sword light like a rainbow, wrapped in sharp sword energy, slashed towards Yang Jihua. This time, he held nothing back. His assault was with the full power of a mid-stage Earth Immortal, coupled with two Immortal Artifacts, all aiming to kill the enemy. Yi Dancheng, who had followed suit, did the same. Hefting the Myriad Peoples Seal, he channeled his magic power and smashed it towards Yang Jihua. This display of strength no doubt stunned Huang Yuanxiu and the others again. They couldn¡¯t understand how Lu Yuan, who was said to have just broken through to Earth Immortal, had suddenly leaped to the level of a mid-stage Earth Immortal. But regardless of the shock in their hearts, now that Taiping Dao had taken action under these circumstances, Huang Yuanxiu and the others had no choice but to follow suit. Divine Powers emanated from their Immortal Artifacts, raining down upon Yang Jihua. Thus, the battlefield that had just calmed down was once again engulfed in combat. Yang Jihua faced a sudden surge in pressure. He had already been struggling to withstand the attacks from Huang Yuanxiu and the other two. Now with mid-stage Earth Immortal Lu Yuan and early Earth Immortal Yi Dancheng joining in, Yang Jihua found it even harder to hold on. Within a few exchanges, his defenses were broken. Had he not dodged quickly, he might have been wounded on the spot. ¡°You resort to outnumbering the fewer, despicable!¡± Yang Jihua retreated dozens of miles, evading the attacks from the five enemies, and cursed bitterly. Then he did not try to tough it out; he turned around and slipped into the formation method, opting to hide. ¡°Scoundrel, where do you think you¡¯re running!¡± Seeing this, Lu Yuan and the others certainly wouldn¡¯t let him escape, igniting their light streaks and chasing after him. A mere Earth Immortal Array Method posed no resistance against the combined strength of the five of them. Even deeply entrenched in the array, their united power could break it, posing no threat. However, as they charged into the formation, looking around, aside from the Changqing Cultivators manning various law platforms with panicked expressions, Yang Jihua¡¯s figure had long disappeared. ¡°Speak, where did Yang Jihua run off to?¡± Grabbing a Changqing Cultivator at random, Lu Yuan demanded. Faced with the majesty of an Earth Immortal, the mere mortal had no resistance and replied in terror, ¡°The School Leader, he went north!¡± ¡°Damn it, Yang Jihua is trying to escape!¡± Hearing ¡°north,¡± Lu Yuan¡¯s heart tightened. If Yang Jihua ran further north, he would be outside their territory, in the beyond. Yang Jihua saw the situation was unfavorable and couldn¡¯t hold against their five, so he took off. It made sense. With Taiping Dao¡¯s arrival, Changqing Mountain had likely already been captured. And with such a large force at their disposal, it¡¯s possible that Zhang Xiuzhu was also in trouble, with the front-line army of Su Yun Country probably in dire straits. Now in the northern battlefield here, Qing Immortal Sect faced a pincer attack from both Taiping Dao and the United Army of Nine Provinces, with no hope of turning the tide. The complete defeat of their entire army was foreseeable. With Changqing Mountain lost and both battlefields a debacle, Qing Immortal Sect had already played all its cards, and maintaining dominance within the territory was no longer possible. Under such circumstances, even with great reluctance, the most correct choice for Yang Jihua to preserve his life and Tao inheritance was to flee. ¡°My senior brothers, Yang Jihua is an Earth Immortal. Today, as we crush his sect, as the Head Teacher of Changqing, he will surely harbor deep hatred in his heart. Such a formidable enemy, if not entirely eradicated, will surely be a major threat to us in the future. I fear tens of thousands of years later, today¡¯s situation in the Nine Provinces may replay! Please follow me in pursuit to kill him.¡± Lu Yuan, realizing the opponent¡¯s intent, immediately turned around to speak to Huang Yuanxiu and the others. ¡°Alliance Leader¡¯s words are wise; this man must not be spared!¡± ¡°We must kill him today!¡± Huang Yuanxiu and the others really had no time to think of anything else and immediately agreed. They understood clearly. If they let Yang Jihua escape, for Taiping Dao, it would merely leave a hidden danger. Chapter 1530 - Chapter 1530 Chapter 593 Yang Xians Flight_2 ?Chapter 1530: Chapter 593 Yang Xian¡¯s Flight_2 Chapter 1530: Chapter 593 Yang Xian¡¯s Flight_2 After taking over most of the Changqing Domain, the might of Taiping Dao had formed, just like the past Changqing Domain; a mere Mid-stage Earth Immortal posed no significant threat. Even when facing the entire Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, Changqing Immortal Sect, having occupied most of the Changqing Domain, only felt concerned and did not think it was on the brink of life and death. However, it was different for the others beyond the domain. They were not as established as the Taiping Dao. The Heavenly River Sect, which supported Huang Yuanxiu from Four Nations, had only managed to nurture a sole Mid-stage Earth Immortal. In terms of foundation and strength, it was far inferior to the Taiping Dao. Such a foundation, if targeted by a Mid-stage Earth Immortal with constant harassment, would mean an uneasy future for the Heavenly River Sect. An unabashed, limitlessly devious Mid-stage Earth Immortal could cause unimaginable destruction. And Yang Jihua, who had already had his sect annihilated, was hardly believable to have any restraint left. Heavenly River Sect could not tolerate the harassment of a Mid-stage Earth Immortal, and naturally, the Jade Toad Path and Wind and Thunder Path were not much better off. Therefore, upon realizing that Changqing Immortal Sect was defeated and the battle was nearing its end, Lu Luoxian and Fu Baopu both promptly understood Yang Jihua¡¯s lethal potential. At this moment, they separately declared their support to pursue and kill this man to death. Thus, five Mid-stage Earth Immortals quickly united their attitudes, chase, to the end of the world if necessary, they must kill him. But just when they decided to chase, inside the formation, those still alive Changqing disciples had also reacted, realizing that their sect was mostly finished. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.?¦Ï Some collapsed from this acknowledgement, but others were filled with anguish. As the Changqing Immortal Sect had existed for tens of thousands of years and nurtured disciples for so many seasons, naturally, some were willing to fight to death. Some disciples, truly loyal to their sect during this crisis, disregarded their own lives, valiantly stood before Lu Yuan and others. The sect was beyond salvation, yet they wanted to preserve the last hope for their sect. To keep the flame of Changqing alive and pass it on. Therefore, the School Leader must leave; they absolutely could not let these Jiuzhou rebels endanger the life of the School Leader. With that resolute thought, countless Changqing disciples swarmed forward, falling one after another, blocking the path pursued by Lu Yuan and his group. Although a normal Changqing disciple was insubstantial to a Mid-stage Earth Immortal, merely like ants, easily extinguished with a breath, the sight of hundreds and thousands of Changqing disciples amassing, though still posing little threat, was akin to hordes of mosquitoes, incapable of causing harm but sufficiently nauseating. Especially since they could take advantage of the formation method, akin to insects in a rainforest, naturally providing an obstructive layer. To clear them and pave a path, Lu Yuan and his group had to spend a considerable amount of time. Speaking of escaping the formation and encircling from the outside, not to mention a massive formation spanning across Three Nations and covering hundreds of thousands of miles, could five Mid-stage Earth Immortals seal it entirely? And if one direction had only one Mid-stage Earth Immortal, Even if they encountered Yang Jihua, if he was determined to escape, even Lu Yuan, a Mid-stage Earth Immortal, would find it hard to stop him. Only together could five Mid-stage Earth Immortals have a chance to encircle and possibly defeat him. However, clearly, Yang Jihua was also aware of this and didn¡¯t give Lu Yuan and the others a chance. He directly hid within the formation, concealed his presence, and used countless disciples and the entire formation as a barrier to create an escape route for himself. Therefore, once they realized they could not catch him, anger naturally burgeoned in the hearts of Lu Yuan and his group. And then, seeing one Changqing disciple after another recklessly blocking their path like moths to a flame, the desire to kill inside them could not be suppressed any longer. ¡°No need to chase anymore, the delay has been too long, and it¡¯s enough for Yang Jihua to have escaped the Changqing Domain. Chasing now, we won¡¯t even see a shadow.¡± Lu Yuan had fought within the formation for a while and then ceased his rapid flight, not continuing forward. Then, looking at another wave of approaching Changqing disciples, his eyes glinted viciously, ¡°Since these fellows so eagerly seek death, let¡¯s oblige them. If we can¡¯t kill Yang Jihua, killing these remnant followers of Changqing Immortal Sect is still a gain. Destroy them, and let Changqing Immortal Sect vanish completely!¡± As he spoke, Lu Yuan waved his large sleeve, and the divine light and sword energy accompanying him no longer maintained the solidity required when clashing with another Mid-stage Earth Immortal, transforming into a finer and more scattered state. This state posed no harm to a peer expert. But for those mortal cultivators, any slight bit of sword energy or divine light could be fatal. At this moment, sword energy like threads, the divine light shabby, scattered nearby. In an instant, hundreds of Changqing cultivators within a thousand miles perished under the sword energy and divine light. Having let Yang Jihua escape, Huang Yuanxiu and his group also harbored frustration. Facing Yang Jihua, they felt the greatest pressure. At that moment, looking at those who obstructed his major plans, rage arose from his heart. Alongside Lu Yuan, without any mercy, they fiercely attacked the disciples of Changqing. ??¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Facing the slaughter unleashed by five Mid-stage Earth Immortals, the remaining thousands of Changqing cultivators instantaneously faced an imminent catastrophe. For those mortal cultivators, even opposing a Human Immortal was an unwinnable battle. Against Earth Immortals, their divine might was utterly unpredictable. At that moment, as five kinds of divine might rotated through, they had absolutely no way to resist. In just a short moment, facing the targeted attack by Earth Immortals, most of the remaining Changqing cultivators were killed. Countless disciples of Changqing cried out for their mothers and fled in all directions, trying to escape the hellish disaster within the formation. However, on the outskirts, the disciples of Taiping Dao and the United Army of Nine Provinces had already set up layers of blockades around the formation. Those few groups of Changqing disciples that managed to escape did not even have time to feel relieved before they ran headlong into the encirclements. Then, under the surrounding attack of the Nine Provinces and Taiping disciples and under the painful blows of the Human Immortals outside, they one by one desperately lost their lives. By the time the formation finally shattered, unable to maintain itself and utterly dissipated into mist, Not a single disciple of Changqing was left alive in the northern front of the Three Nations. In fact, there weren¡¯t just no live disciples of Changqing left. Even the divine spirits of the underworld in the area had been vented upon by Lu Yuan and his associates, leaving them completely eradicated. At that moment, all demon-like atmospheres were swept away. Truly, the scene was bleak yet utterly cleansed. It was only then, after having completely exterminated the Changqing cultivators, that Lu Yuan and his associates finally felt some relief, feeling somewhat better. Huang Yuanxiu and the others finally had the leisure to calm down and, looking at Lu Yuan, couldn¡¯t help but ask the question that had been weighing on their minds, ¡°Alliance Leader, did you lead the troops here because Changqing Mountain has been breached?¡± Lu Yuan sheathed his Immortal Sword and tied it back to his waist; upon hearing the question, he showed a smile, ¡°I just have to thank Elder Brother Huang. If it weren¡¯t for Elder Brother holding off Yang Jihua, I wouldn¡¯t have been able to breach Changqing Mountain. It¡¯s all thanks to the help of my senior brothers that we could achieve this victory; your junior brother here expresses his gratitude!¡± Lu Yuan bowed to Huang Yuanxiu. Although Taiping Dao had already breached Changqing Mountain, previously asking for reinforcements was just a ruse to deceive Huang Yuanxiu and the others, and this news surely couldn¡¯t be concealed forever. But regardless of the true situation, Taiping Dao had already determined that it was Huang Yuanxiu and his fellows who first held off Yang Jihua, followed by their own breach of Changqing Mountain. Anyone with objections could come to Mi Yun Mountain to discuss the matter. The eight Mid-stage Earth Immortals of Taiping Dao would reason with them thoroughly. Lu Yuan believed that Huang Yuanxiu and his fellows would ultimately understand. Moreover, the United Army of Nine Provinces indeed helped him this time. Had it not been for their cooperation, the annihilation of the last tens of thousands of Changqing cultivators in the northern domain would certainly not have been so straightforward. Otherwise, upon receiving the news, even if Yang Jihua couldn¡¯t take tens of thousands of people away, the possibility to take a few hundred to a thousand core disciples to flee or even to salvage some treasures as foundational assets for the sect¡¯s revival would have been viable. Had he really succeeded in escaping like that, it would have truly become a major threat. Unlike now, where Yang Jihua, completely alone, fled in a sorry state. He had no time to take anyone with him, no time to retrieve any treasures, no time to take anything with him. Even though only he managed to escape, merely a Mid-stage Earth Immortal alone, powerful though his cultivation might be, it would be difficult for him to stir up any more storms. In the future, even if Yang Qihua thought about causing trouble, he wouldn¡¯t pose a threat to Taiping Dao. At most, it would be the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate of Heavenly River Sect, hanging alone and vulnerable, that might suffer headaches; but what does that have to do with Taiping Dao? Even if they felt sorry and sympathized with them, sending some people over to assist, as previously Jiuzhou from outside the domain supported Western Jiuzhou, and offering help would be the extent of it. For Taiping Dao, that would be insignificant. In any case, from today onwards, during the lifetime of Lu Yuan, Yang Jihua and the legacy he left in Changqing Immortal Sect, would no longer pose any trouble for him. As for after his death? After my death, why worry about the deluge? Once I¡¯m gone, whether it¡¯s called Taiping Dao or Nine Provinces, it would have no meaning. Lu Yuan certainly wouldn¡¯t care about such posthumous issues. Chapter 1531 - Chapter 1531 Chapter 594 The Trend Has Settled ?Chapter 1531: Chapter 594 The Trend Has Settled Chapter 1531: Chapter 594 The Trend Has Settled Looking at Lu Yuan, who appeared sincere in his thanks, Huang Yuanxiu and the others remained silent. The Alliance Leader before them spoke very sincerely, and his gratitude was more than apparent, but they still felt they had been made fools of. By responding to Taiping Dao¡¯s request to attack Yang Jihua, they were likely duped again. Although from the outcome and practical benefits, their action to eliminate Yang Jihua¡¯s army also served to protect their own interests. However, from the perspective of the final distribution of benefits, they had exerted great efforts but hadn¡¯t gained even the slightest reward. If this wasn¡¯t being fooled, then they didn¡¯t know what was. After a moment of silence, Huang Yuanxiu finally harbored a sliver of hope and asked, ¡°Alliance Leader, you led a great army here, a crowd of ten thousand, advancing without obstacle. May I ask if Zhang Xiuzhu of Su Yun Country has already been defeated by the Alliance Leader?¡± Regarding how Taiping Dao managed a surprise attack on Changqing Mountain with ten thousand men, Huang Yuanxiu harbored many speculations, but those were merely personal opinions and ultimately not conclusive. The specifics had to be asked about from the person involved. As things had already come to a resolution and Taiping Dao had reaped all the benefits, Lu Yuan saw no need to conceal anything further. Upon hearing the inquiry, he slightly lifted his robes and proudly declared, ¡°Indeed, after breaking through Changqing Mountain, our surprise forces from Taiping Dao then turned back to Su Yun Country. Together with our leader, they ambushed Zhang Xiuzhu and killed him on the battlefield. Now not only is Changqing Mountain broken, but the more than twenty thousand troops of Changqing Immortal Sect in the Eastern Territory have also been wiped out by us.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï That was a Great Immortal and more than twenty thousand cultivators. Typically, one Grand Fairy Door would approximate that strength. Yet now, Taiping Dao spoke of their annihilation so casually. This caused similar sects like Heavenly River Sect and Yuchan Tao to feel immensely shaken. Huang Yuanxiu knew that the reason Lu Yuan spoke and presented himself this way was to intimidate people like himself. After all, with Changqing Immortal Sect vanquished, their historical ambition for Nine Provinces could be said to be completely fulfilled. If external enemies were gone, what remained in Nine Provinces could only be internal foes, right? With these circumstances, it was only natural for Taiping Dao to become cautious toward them. Previously, even before Changqing Immortal Sect had fallen! They too had harbored guarded feelings toward Taiping Dao. In the end, the stakes were too high, trust too low; Taiping Dao joined Nine Provinces too late. Mere one to two hundred years were simply not enough to establish sufficient mutual trust, which had led to the current situation. However, it must be said, after admitting this, faced with these remarkable achievements, Huang Yuanxiu and the others were truly intimidated. ¡°Alliance Leader¡¯s divine might, in just one day and night, swept away the Changqing rebels, truly convincing us fully. Once this matter spreads, it is bound to become widely known across the seas, showcasing the prestige of our Nine Provinces.¡± Huang Yuanxiu having processed the news, voluntarily expressed his attitude. Resistance was no longer an option. Since Taiping Dao came from the same source as they did, letting Taiping Dao reap the biggest fruits of this battle wasn¡¯t too bad; it meant the spoils didn¡¯t flow into the fields of outsiders. For these sects from outside the territories, they never really planned to covet the lands of Changqing Domain. Their previous persistence with the Five Sects of Western Domain was merely due to closer relations, striving to help these old friends reap more benefits. Now that the competition was too strong, they couldn¡¯t withstand the pressure; even profound relationships couldn¡¯t outweigh their own interests. To avoid trouble for themselves, they could only temporarily give up on these old friends. Of course, Huang Yuanxiu and his colleagues still had some principles and dignity. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Despite showing they didn¡¯t want to cause trouble, they still made an effort in the end and asked, ¡°Alliance Leader has pacified the Eastern Territory, but there are still many remnants of Changqing scattered across the lands of Nine Countries. These are hidden dangers that should be swiftly eliminated. Under our command, we still have several thousand warriors capable of battle. The three of us are also still willing to fight. We wish to assist the Alliance Leader in pacifying the Northern Territory, thoroughly eradicating the remnants of Changqing, to bring peace to the region.¡± At this critical juncture, Huang Yuanxiu still wanted to try and see if he could secure the last bit of territory for Nine Provinces. He didn¡¯t ponder too much, hoping that if he could secure one or two countries, it would suffice as an accomplishment. But such an ideal situation had already been anticipated by Lu Yuan, who now, appearing devoted to official duties, immediately responded with a smile, ¡°There¡¯s no need for my seniors and fellow Nine Provinces colleagues to trouble yourselves. After taking Changqing Mountain and eliminating Zhang Xiuzhu, I immediately mobilized disciples from the Southern Territory, deploying forces along six routes to capture the countries of Eastern and Northern Territories and concurrently converge on Yang Jihua. It has been quite some time since then. By now, my Taiping Dao disciples likely have already gone to the Eastern and Northern Territories to eliminate the remaining Changqing rebels. The fifteen countries controlled by Changqing Immortal Sect should now all be ours as well. My seniors and disciples, having fought hard for a day and night, must be exhausted. You all have contributed significantly. As the Jiuzhou League Leader, how can I bear to see you continue to work so hard? This is not appropriate, not appropriate. My seniors should take your disciples and rest for now, and watch how my Taiping disciples will eradicate the remaining Changqing rebels.¡± Lu Yuan directly countered Huang Yuanxiu¡¯s words. As he spoke, coincidentally, a fleet of Immortal Vessels appeared in the distance, approaching them. From the banners they flew, it was clear they were cultivators from Taiping Dao. Huang Yuanxiu, from a brief glance, could tell that the number of soldiers in that force was no less than a thousand. Upon their arrival here, they were stopped by outer disciples for questioning before being allowed to proceed. Chapter 1532 - Chapter 1532 Chapter 594 The Trend Has Taken Shape_2 ?Chapter 1532: Chapter 594 The Trend Has Taken Shape_2 Chapter 1532: Chapter 594 The Trend Has Taken Shape_2 Then they dispersed to various locations in the area, taking over the Changqing Branch that had already been cleared, as well as the offices of the Netherworld Court. Seeing how adept they were, it was clear that they had long planned for this and were not acting hastily. Given the situation as observed, if what Lu Yuan said was true, with the Taiping Dao soldiers divided into six routes, then sweeping through the fifteen nations of the Northern and Eastern Territories was indeed not a difficult task. What made him reflect more deeply was the strength demonstrated by the Taiping Dao in this operation. The Taiping Dao deployed five armies to suppress the Northern and Eastern Territories, with each army on average being responsible for three nations. To suppress a nation¡¯s territory, there had to be at least one Human Immortal leading the troops, right? Otherwise, how could they maintain stability in the area? For the fifteen nations, wouldn¡¯t there need to be fifteen Human Immortals? Just like the Taiping Dao troops that had arrived here, their leader was a True Person. If the other routes were all equipped to this standard, then the hidden strength of the Taiping Dao was not to be underestimated. After all, if calculated by this standard, those five armies would equate to five Earth Immortal formations. If the Taiping Dao had the strength to deploy five such formations, then even if all eight sects of the Nine Provinces were to band together, they would probably hesitate to confront such a tough nut to crack. This was a true disparity in strength, a gap too large to bridge. Yet even this was the limit of Huang Yuanxiu¡¯s imagination. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? At this time, being fresh from the battlefield, he had not yet had a chance to return, and therefore had not received the news from various parts of the Changqing Domain on the front line. If he were to know that the Taiping Dao in charge of the five armies were not the fifteen Human Immortals he had imagined but five Earth Immortals, He would likely be even more terrified. Because this meant that the disparity wasn¡¯t merely in strength, but the two sides were not even on the same level. The Taiping Dao had eight Earth Immortals; when all eight sects of the Nine Provinces combined, they only had four. The Taiping Dao could also mobilize forty thousand disciples, whereas their numbers combined did not even reach twenty thousand. Just from the numbers on paper, the Taiping Dao was already double that of the Nine Provinces. In practical terms, when it came to the forces that could be employed on the battlefield, with the Heavenly River Sect and the Yuchan Tao having to be concerned about their rear, the Taiping Dao¡¯s strength was three to four times that of the United Army of the Nine Provinces. This gap was not just a disparity but an outright crush. Huang Yuanxiu did not yet know this, so for the moment, he only felt a fearful anxiety. But once he returned and learned the truth, He would be even less likely to dare any opposition and would subsequently follow the orders of the Alliance Leader with utmost deference. In short, Even without a full grasp of the entire truth, based solely on the strength that the Taiping Dao had revealed, Huang Yuanxiu and the other Immortal Sects from beyond the domain had already chosen to give way to the overwhelming force of the Taiping Dao. After Huang Yuanxiu had thought through the situation, he immediately responded with understanding, ¡°The Alliance Leader¡¯s consideration for us is truly touching and shaming. Since the Alliance Leader has spoken thus, we can only accept with a thick face and follow orders respectfully.¡± Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan burst into laughter, ¡°Elder Brother Huang, rest assured, at most in three days, there will be good news from all over, and we can calmly wait here.¡± Clearing up some remnants of the Changqing Immortal Sect was actually a task that could be completed in one day. But to bestow titles on the various Divine Spirits, sort out the Netherworld Court systems of the nations, and take over and refurbish the various altars left by the Changqing Immortal Sect, To complete the above tasks, at least three days were required. Only after finishing the aforementioned work could the Taiping Dao say they had initially cleared and taken control of the Northern and Eastern Territories into their hands. Now that Yang Jihua had been driven away, he had become a dog that had lost its home, a bird startled by the mere twang of a bowstring. Before finding a safe haven, he would not dare to return to the Changqing Domain. The other Immortal Sects beyond the domain were taking a wait-and-see approach to this great battle in the Changqing Domain. Until the dust had firmly settled, they would not likely come to interfere. The only potential instability was these fellows from the Nine Provinces. Therefore, to avoid any ripples, it was necessary to keep Huang Yuanxiu and the others within sight, under close watch. Huang Yuanxiu read between the lines of Lu Yuan¡¯s words but he was at the mercy of circumstances and could only respond with a wry smile, ¡°The Alliance Leader is greatly advanced in cultivation, reaching Mid-stage Earth Immortal at such an age, truly admirable. Now that the rebel Changqing has been defeated, our longstanding wish has also been fulfilled. Now that we have this spare time, we should concentrate on pursuing the Dao. Our own cultivation is shallow, and we hope the Alliance Leader will not stint his teachings and provide us with guidance.¡± Lu Yuan waved his hand generously, ¡°We are all from the Nine Provinces, considered as one school. Since my fellow senior brothers wish to seek advice, naturally, I will not keep secrets. I believe it would be best to simply hold a Dao exchange tea meeting here while we are in high spirits. We can share our cultivation insights with each other and await the war report.¡± ¡°Good!¡± ¡°Agreed!¡± Huang Yuanxiu and the others all nodded, expressing no objections. And so, Lu Yuan, pulling several Earth Immortals with him, began to discuss the Dao right at the border between the Western Domain and the Northern Territory. By keeping these few individuals occupied, the remaining Nine Provinces Immortal Gates, even though manned by some Human Immortals, could no longer stir up any trouble against Lu Yuan¡¯s various avatars. With the last obstacle swept away, the unstoppable momentum of Taiping Dao sweeping through the Changqing Domain could no longer be halted. Following the plan laid out previously, Huang Xuan¡¯s avatars, each leading their own troops, launched wave after wave of purges against the Changqing cultivators and local Divine Spirits within their jurisdiction. Facing the direct intervention of Earth Immortals, the remaining Changqing remnants stood no chance and could hardly fight back. In just over half a day, before nightfall, the fifteen nations across the Northern Territory and Eastern Territory had been purged. During the operation in Changbai Country of the Northern Territory, Huang Xuan even captured another Earth Immortal Seed of the Qing Immortal Secta€¡±the Master Li who was in seclusion there. Master Li, deep in his secluded cultivation, was completely unaware of what was happening when Huang Xuan suddenly stormed his Cave Mansion. And then, without any surprises, While in seclusion, to be suddenly attacked by an Earth Immortala€¡±Master Li, under the backlash, was killed on the spot by Huang Xuan in just a few blows. ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Thus, another future hope of the Qing Immortal Sect was lost. However, when the Jade Brocade received information from captured Changqing disciples and located the Cave Mansion of Master Zhou, who was in seclusion in the Qingque Country of the Northern Territory, they discovered it was already empty. Master Zhou had left just before their arrival. The escape of such a person greatly vexed Jade Brocade. However, when news reached Lu Yuan, he was not particularly concerned. After all, it was only a peak Human Immortal. Now that the Qing Immortal Sect had lost the entire Changqing Domain, whether that Zhou surname Master could become an Earth Immortal without the sect¡¯s resource support was still a matter of speculation. And if not an Earth Immortal, a mere Human Immortal was hardly a worry. Even if he, by chance, did become an Earth Immortal, adding to Yang Jihua, they would only amount to two Earth Immortals. Faced with the overwhelming force of Taiping Dao, they still could not pose a threat. Perhaps it would be more troubling for Huang Yuanxiu and the others. A blade that doesn¡¯t hit oneself doesn¡¯t hurt; of course, Lu Yuan felt no pain. With Yang Jihua and Master Zhou no longer leading the resistance, the foundation of the Qing Immortal Sect in the Changqing Domain quickly collapsed under the thorough purging of Lu Yuan¡¯s five avatars. By the second day, aside from a few scattered fish that slipped through the net, there was no longer any sight of the Changqing banner within the entire domain. Simultaneously, the divine spirits slain in past battles of Taiping Dao were swiftly filled by the avatars, taking over the local Netherworld Courts with the cooperation of the subdued Yin Gods. A Divine Method system belonging to Taiping Dao thus rose from the ground in the Northern and Eastern Territory and was established. With the cooperation of these divine spirits, the systematization of local Qi Luck collection and land purification was quickly put into place. In essence, Taiping Dao became the master of these two regions. With sovereignty established, taking over the remaining altars of the Qing Immortal Sect became a simple and effortless task. In just one day¡¯s time, a total of one thousand six hundred fifty-seven altars across the fifteen nations of the Northern and Eastern Territories were under Taiping Dao¡¯s control. Furthermore, the various avatars, following Lu Yuan¡¯s prior instructions, immediately set about establishing basic Earth Immortal formations upon seizing control of the altars. With ample manpower, the aid of Yin Gods, and the ability to mobilize abundant resources, establishing some simplified versions of the Earth Immortal formations was naturally a breeze for the avatars. All the groundwork had already been laid by the Qing Immortal Sect. What they needed to do was to pare down and make some minor modifications, all of which were simple and easy tasks. In just under half a day, the goal was achieved. So, by the afternoon of the third day, with the establishment of five simplified Earth Immortal formations in both territories, the fifteen nations of the Northern and Eastern Territories were finally and firmly in the hands of Taiping Dao. The grand strategy of Lu Yuan in the Changqing Domain had at last been realized. Chapter 1533 - Chapter 1533 Chapter 595 Pacifying the Nine Provinces ?Chapter 1533: Chapter 595 Pacifying the Nine Provinces Chapter 1533: Chapter 595 Pacifying the Nine Provinces Three days later, at the northern border of the domain. ¡°Alliance Leader, the situation in the Changqing Domain is now settled, with the remnants of Changqing completely eradicated; there are no longer any battles within this domain. We have been dispatched and out in the field for several decades, and the affairs of the sect await with urgency, requiring immediate attention. As things have temporarily quieted down, we shall not linger longer in the domain and hereby bid farewell to the Alliance Leader.¡± After receiving news that Taiping Dao had secured its control over the entire Changqing Domain, Huang Yuanxiu and others, who had been exchanging cultivation insights here for several days, finally stopped hesitating and immediately applied to Lu Yuan for leave. During these days of cultivation exchange, although they had greatly benefited from each other¡¯s insights and had made substantial gains, it did not mean that Huang Yuanxiu had become completely ignorant of the outside world. To their shock, Taiping Dao boasted eight Earth Immortals, and at this moment, they had stationed themselves throughout the Changqing Domain, rapidly constructing defensive lines in the north, center, south, and east of the domain, swiftly assimilating the newly captured territories. When this intelligence was transmitted to them via secret methods, Huang Yuanxiu¡¯s heart nearly jumped out of fright. Although he knew that Taiping Dao and Lu Yuan must have withheld some information, he had never imagined that the concealment would be to such an extent. Eight Earth Immortalsa€¡±such strength was something that even some of the Heavenly Immortal sects with shallower foundations might not possess. Yet Taiping Dao, still only a grand sect, had already amassed such resources. The truth, when it spread, immediately caused an uproar in the surrounding areas. Not only were the cultivators of the Nine Provinces shocked and amazed, but even the nearby Immortal Sects, regardless of their size, including the Heavenly Immortal sects, were astonished. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï As for Yang Jihua, who had just managed to escape and found a temporary resting place outside the domain, he was so horrified upon hearing of Taiping Dao¡¯s strength that he fled. Although he had already escaped the Changqing Domain, Yang Jihua still dreaded Taiping Dao¡¯s grip on power and dared not linger near the Changqing Domain. He was already crossing multiple domains, heading relentlessly northward. Whether he intended to flee the Donghua Continent altogether or to find a secluded place in the far north to lie low and stay hidden was unclear. In any case, once Taiping Dao stopped hiding its true strength, with such a strong foundation, it had deterred all those with malicious intentions. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Both within and outside the domain, no one dared to provoke Taiping Dao for the time being. Taiping Dao could proudly declare that it had firmly secured its position as the overlord of the Changqing Domain. Now, all that was needed was for Lu Yuan to continue breaking through to Heavenly Immortal status, to become a Great True Person, and he could then rightfully claim the title of overlord, roaming freely between Heaven and Earth. Similarly, now knowing the truth, Huang Yuanxiu and others had only to make a slight comparison between themselves and Taiping Dao to clearly realize that they were simply not of the same caliber as the sect. When the disparity was so great, they no longer dared entertain any thoughts of bargaining or causing disputes. All they wanted now was to leave the Changqing Domain, which had become treacherous, as quickly as possible, and retreat to their own bases, no longer concerning themselves with matters here. The waters of Taiping Dao ran too deep for them to fathom. To get involved would mean nothing but drowning along with it. After a great battle, the Five Sects of the Western Domain were almost crippled, with only a handful remaining. The three sects from outside the domain were also severely weakened, no longer possessing the strength or confidence to confront Taiping Dao. Even at the peak of the Nine Provinces¡¯ eight sects, if they joined forces, it was uncertain whether they could prevail against Taiping Dao¡¯s current strength. Not to mention now, when they were critically drained of vitality. Confidence stems from strength. Having no strength themselves, Huang Yuanxiu and his companions made a choice that was quite perceptive. In response to this, Lu Yuan was very satisfied. It was best when everyone was wise to the situation, knowing their own place. That made things much easier. Otherwise, if they failed to recognize their position and stubbornly stayed on to make a fuss, it would compel Taiping Dao to take drastic measures. Now, if you come happily and go happily, leaving some dignity for one another, the world becomes a better place. ¡°Do you brothers wish to leave?¡± Lu Yuan was always willing to show consideration to those who knew the score. His face appropriately showed a hint of reluctance as he concernedly said, ¡°Won¡¯t you stay a little longer? These days, I¡¯ve greatly enjoyed discussing the Tao with you brothers, and I have gained a lot. It would be wonderful if you could stay a while longer and we could study the Great Tao together, and perhaps one day jointly reach the status of Heavenly Immortal.¡± Huang Yuanxiu shook his head: ¡°No, there are too many pressing matters within the sect. As the school leader who has been away from the sect for nearly half a century, I have already failed in my duties. Now that the battle is over, indeed I cannot stay outside any longer. Alliance Leader, your persuasion is unnecessary, my decision to leave is final.¡± Lu Yuan showed an expression of regret: ¡°Indeed, the affairs of the sect are important. If that is the case, then I shall not keep you any longer.¡± Huang Yuanxiu nodded, then turned to leave. Hesitating for a moment, he still turned back and asked, ¡°Alliance Leader, now that the Changqing Domain has been stabilized and all the elders of the Five Sects of the Western Domain have perished, there is no one to take charge. May I ask what decision you have made, Alliance Leader?¡± After all, they had been comrades in arms for thousands of years. As for the descendants of his comrades, Huang Yuanxiu still couldn¡¯t bring himself to be completely indifferent. He couldn¡¯t help but inquire about the future of the Five Sects of the Western Domain. Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan immediately replied solemnly: ¡°Friend Huang, rest assured, the Five Sects of the Western Domain and I both hail from the Nine Provincesa€¡±we are not only sect fellows but also share the bond of kinship. In this Northern Expedition, we made an oath of alliance and fought to the death together on the battlefield against the Changqing rebels.¡± Chapter 1534 - Chapter 1534 Chapter 595 Pacifying the Nine Provinces_2 ?Chapter 1534: Chapter 595 Pacifying the Nine Provinces_2 Chapter 1534: Chapter 595 Pacifying the Nine Provinces_2 All of these people were my junior kin in robes. Elder Brother Ding once had many dealings and a close friendship with my Taiping Dao. True Person Zhen Xuan was even an old acquaintance of mine. Now that they are no longer here, as for the descendants of the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects, I will naturally take extra care to protect them so that they are not bullied by outsiders. This is after the Northern Expedition against Changqing; the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects have already recovered the lost territory of the Western Domain. Including the territories they hold in both the Western and Northern Domains, it just makes up ten countries. As the current Jiuzhou League Leader, I intend to equally divide these ten countries among the Five Sects, allowing each to establish their foundation and enjoy a peaceful existence. If Elder Brother Huang is willing, you could also send people over to assist, support the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects, and help them recover quickly so they have the strength to protect themselves.¡± After annihilating the Changqing Immortal Sect, Taiping Dao now occupies territories spanning twenty-nine countries within the entire Changqing Domain. Judging from the usual practices of the Great Immortals from other families in the Donghua Continent, occupying half of a Great Domain is generally enough to support a Heavenly Immortal. Even Heavenly Immortals with more profound foundations do not occupy much more than half a domain. Lu Yuan possesses the Dao Fruit of longevity and feels that when he becomes a Heavenly Immortal, his foundation should be deeper than that of an ordinary Great True Person. But the territory he currently occupies is already over seventy-five percent of the Changqing Domain. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã? Such a large territory, no matter how you look at it, is enough to accommodate the Dao Fruit of Heavenly Immortal. Even stepping back a bit, even if this territory is not enough, Taiping Dao shares the same origin with Jiuzhou, and I myself even bear the title of Jiuzhou League Leader. When the time comes, if I wish to call upon the territory of the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects for my use, wouldn¡¯t that be as simple as speaking a word? Thinking about it, facing the request of a Great True Person, let alone asking the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects to surrender their territories, even if they were asked to fully integrate and merge into Taiping Dao, they would be more than pleased in their hearts. In the end, the connection between Taiping Dao and the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects is indeed profound. Essentially, they can be considered as one power. It¡¯s just that within this power, each branch maintains a strong independence. But if a force from any branch becomes truly strong enough to cross class boundaries, then the other branches, for the sake of hopping on this train and crossing together, will most likely not oppose but will proactively seek to merge. And for Lu Yuan of Taiping Dao, ascending to Heavenly Immortal represents just such an opportunity for the Cultivators of the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects to cross class boundaries. It¡¯s not just the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects, even Huang Yuanxiu and the other External Jiuzhou forces, would be willing to offer their own foundations to lend him a helping hand if Lu Yuan truly needs it. After all, for these thousands of years, the highest ideal in the hearts of all the factions of Jiuzhou has been to recreate the glory of the Nine Spirits Sect, dominate a domain, and give rise to another Heavenly Immortal, has it not? Even the Radiant Immortal Dynasty, far away in another domain, refrains from meddling in the affairs of the Changqing Domain because they believe that they already have the advantage in their own domain. Starting afresh there and striving to dominate that domain brings far better chances than coming here to the Changqing Domain and clashing head-on with the Changqing Immortal Sect, which still maintains rule. Isn¡¯t it much more worthwhile? The Radiant Immortal Dynasty also considers itself part of Jiuzhou, it¡¯s just that their perceived lineage origins and policy directions are different from those in the Changqing Domain. So from the above description, it¡¯s clear that if Taiping Dao truly produces a Heavenly Immortal, then all branches of Jiuzhou will definitely support it with all their might. Because this aligns with their overall ideals and interests. With this foundation in place, bestowing a mere ten countries to the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects is actually not much of a matter. After all, no matter what, they also exerted their strength in this great war. For the Northern Expedition, the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects lost Ding Wanxuan, their only Earth Immortal, seven Human Immortals, and a total of twenty thousand Cultivators. It can be said that every inch of territory was steeped in their blood. Without their bloody struggle, it would not have been so easy for Lu Yuan to defeat the Changqing Immortal Sect. They are all heroes of the Northern Expedition and deserve compensation. Allowing them to recover their ancestral lands is the reward Lu Yuan has granted. ¡°The Alliance Leader is noble and righteous, we hold you in high esteem!¡± Hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s promise, Huang Yuanxiu¡¯s heart immediately lightened. When you think about it, the other party has already obtained the greatest benefit from the Northern Expedition; there really is no need to cling to the bit of territory belonging to the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects. If one were to forcibly demand it, it would be a loss of dignity. Taiping Dao will soon be the dominant power of a domain, already among those who have made it ashore; it¡¯s truly unnecessary to lose face. Moreover, since Lu Yuan has already promised, he will allow him to send people to help. ?0¦Í??.?¦Ï This essentially equates to inviting the External Jiuzhou to supervise, showing his straightforward intention not to harm or ensnare the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects. With this promise, that is already enough. With a sense of relief and resolution, Huang Yuanxiu and the army from the External Jiuzhou swiftly departed from the Changqing Domain. After they left, the incumbent spokespersons of the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects a€¡° several School Leaders a€¡° also came to bid farewell to Lu Yuan. However, compared with Huang Yuanxiu, they were much more restrained and apprehensive. It can¡¯t be helped. It¡¯s still a matter of strength. Right now, the combined strength of the entire Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects amounts to only two Human Immortals, and there are fewer than three thousand Cultivators. This level of strength really doesn¡¯t inspire confidence to stand tall in front of Taiping Dao. Likewise, they are even more concerned that Taiping Dao will take advantage of the situation to annihilate their legacy, forcibly absorbing the entire Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects. Although Huang Yuanxiu, before leaving, had already told them that Taiping Dao would ensure their legacy, without hearing the promise directly from Lu Yuan, it is still impossible for them to truly be at ease. Chapter 1535 - Chapter 1535 Chapter 595 Pacifying the Nine Provinces_3 ?Chapter 1535: Chapter 595 Pacifying the Nine Provinces_3 Chapter 1535: Chapter 595 Pacifying the Nine Provinces_3 Fortunately, Lu Yuan had no interest in making fun of these pitiable people. Seeing them come to bid farewell, he spoke words of comfort, ¡°There is no need for worry. We all hail from the same lines of the Nine Provinces, and I have amicable relations with your elders. You are my apprentices, and we are all family. After you return, devote yourselves to Cultivation, manage your internal affairs, and nurture your disciples. It won¡¯t take hundreds of years for your sect to flourish once again. If you encounter any difficulties, feel free to seek me out at Mi Yun Mountain, and I will offer whatever help I can without reservation. Remember, Taiping Dao stands with you.¡± At this moment, Lu Yuan showed the benevolence of an elder and embodied the responsibility of his position. Indeed, this approach had significant effects. The School Leaders of the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects all relaxed their expressions and teared up after hearing Lu Yuan¡¯s assurance. It hadn¡¯t been easy. Today, with their sects greatly weakened, they finally saw a glimmer of hope for preserving their heritage. Although this promise was merely a verbal commitment from the Alliance Leader Lu. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï But this was the best treatment they could ask for under their current circumstances. Who could blame them for being too weak? ¡°We thank the Alliance Leader for your concern. We will dutifully guard our borders and will heed Taiping Dao¡¯s commands from this day forward, daring not to disobey.¡± Several apprentices at this time also knew to respond appropriately. That is, from now on, to faithfully serve as Taiping Dao¡¯s loyal followers. While it may sound somewhat disgraceful, given Taiping Dao¡¯s current prosperity, it will undoubtedly become akin to a Heavenly Immortal sect in the future. Since we all come from the same source, serving one¡¯s own family is not shameful at all. Others, who wish to flatter a Heavenly Immortal, don¡¯t even have the means to do so! The cultivators of the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects eventually returned to their homes, happy and contented. Having fought for forty-eight years, heaven knows, no one could fathom the humiliation and pain they had endured. It was a grief that spanned nearly two to three generations. Ding Wanxuan represented one generation, Zhen Xuan and his peers another, the generation of True Immortals below Zhen Xuan another, and the several generations of School Leaders from various sects yet another. Beneath them, there were disciples with even lesser Cultivation. Counting carefully, by the end of the Northern Expedition, Zhen Xuan and the two generations before him had been completely wiped out. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Two to three generations following him had also largely perished. The existing cultivators of the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects had seen their spiritual ancestors, masters, fellow disciples, apprentices, grand-apprentices, and great-grand-apprentices all perish, almost breaking the lineage. Even they, during the war, might have faced death at any moment. The pressure and pain in their hearts can only be imagined. Thankfully, all of this ended with the fall of the Qing Immortal Sect. They could finally return to their sects, to a life dedicated to Cultivation, seeking mysteries, taking on disciples, free and at ease. Though they did not gain much from this great war, the lion¡¯s share taken by Taiping Dao, They had at least reclaimed their lost territories. And with the distant war, peace finally came. Being alive to witness the arrival of peace was the greatest hope held by many cultivators from the Western Domain¡¯s Five Sects. Without experiencing a war that spreads across a domain, one can never truly comprehend the horror and pain of war. The cultivators of the Five Sects, now deeply understanding the nature of war, might eventually regain their power and spark new ambitions. But for now, they had no desire to discuss grand schemes or the legacy of their ancestors. They only wished for peace. Just that simple. Chapter 1536 - Chapter 1536 Chapter 596 Oath of Splendid Light ?Chapter 1536: Chapter 596 Oath of Splendid Light Chapter 1536: Chapter 596 Oath of Splendid Light The so-called eternal greenery ended, unity within the territory. The Nine Provinces were ruled, the world submitted. After the annihilation of the Qing Immortal Sect, along with the subjugation of various sects in the Nine Provinces, Taiping Dao¡¯s rule over the Changqing Domain was thoroughly established. And as Lu Yuan continuously sent disciples to the northern, eastern, and central territories of the domain to establish branch courtyards, officially beginning the governance over those areas, the foundation became even more deeply ingrained and refined. With the eight Earth Immortals of Taiping Dao stationed in the four corners, directly controlling the territory, and the various branches of the Nine Provinces serving as wings, forming a defensive barrier. The surrounding powers, whether they were rulers of Immortal Sects or rogue cultivators, none wanted to provoke this newly risen overlord. Not only did they not wish to provoke, but the neighboring Immortal Sect powers, upon witnessing that Taiping Dao achieved the final victory over the Changqing Domain, Although all were somewhat astonished that it was Taiping Dao, this recently emerged power, which successively defeated both Changqing and the Nine Provinces and laughed last. However, regarding this outcome, they had no dissatisfactions and quickly communicated their acceptance. Even the distant Radiant Immortal Dynasty, upon hearing the news of Changqing¡¯s unification, sent an Earth Immortal as a Messenger to express congratulations to Taiping Dao. Of course, it was just congratulations. As for recognizing Taiping Dao¡¯s status as the Jiuzhou League Leader along with the other Nine Provinces Immortal Sects, showing submission to Lu Yuan, that was wishful thinking. Lu Yuan had no such delusions about that. Because the Radiant Immortal Dynasty and the Jiuzhou Immortal Sect were no longer on the same path, nor were they beings of the same level. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Lu Yuan still remembered, when he had first Ascended to the Immortal Realm, he heard of the Radiant Immortal Dynasty¡¯s existence as an entity that already occupied the territory of thirteen nations, with three Earth Immortals in its ranks. This strength was clearly a cut above the rest within the Nine Provinces at the time, an existence in a league of its own. And now, nearly two thousand years later, the Radiant Immortal Dynasty made a significant breakthrough in the domain¡¯s power struggle a thousand years ago. To date, according to the Messenger sent by the Radiant Immortal Dynasty, they now possess twenty countries and five Earth Immortals, becoming the ruler of half the domain. Other powers within that domain, facing the Radiant Immortal Dynasty¡¯s advancement, can now only band together to barely withstand the assault. But a prolonged defense is sure to fail. This situation can only be maintained temporarily; given enough time, it is inevitable that it will fall apart. The Radiant Immortal Dynasty currently occupies twenty nations with control over half the domain; in terms of strength and size, it is only lacking nine countries compared to Taiping Dao. As for the number of Earth Immortals. The eight Earth Immortals on Lu Yuan¡¯s side were essentially his Avatars, each one of them at the lowest end of Earth Immortals. The Radiant Immortal Dynasty didn¡¯t have such a cheat like him. Their Earth Immortals were genuinely achieved, one solid step at a time. Among those five Earth Immortals, they weren¡¯t merely at the Early Earth Immortal stage; two were also in the mid-stage. Even the incumbent Radiant Immortal Emperor, a Grand cultivator of the Late Earth Immortal stage, was of that level. With such strength, the five Earth Immortals of the opposing side, in terms of quality, were far superior to those of Taiping Dao. And both parties cultivate the Fortune Dao. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï The path of cultivation that Lu Yuan follows, the methods of Taiping Dao, couldn¡¯t be concealed after the arrival of the Radiant Immortal Dynasty¡¯s Messenger. The secret of Taiping Dao also cultivating Qi Luck was instantly unveiled. Now that both practice the Fortune Dao, it¡¯s like an open book; each knows the other¡¯s strength and weakness. Immortal Sects like theirs, which follow extreme methods, could resort to extreme measures under extreme conditions. It¡¯s possible for them to churn out one or two more Earth Immortals in a short period. If it came down to comparing the number of Earth Immortals, it¡¯s still unclear who would triumph, Taiping Dao, or Radiant Immortal Dynasty! So, facing such a formidable force that in terms of size and strength was not inferior to his own, Lu Yuan never expected that by virtue of being the Jiuzhou League Leader, he could command the Radiant Immortal Dynasty and make them submit to him. All respect comes from strength. Faced with an emissary from the Radiant Dynasty whose power was not less than his own, Lu Yuan acted with extreme restraint, moving towards respectful and equal courtesy, showing great enthusiasm and welcome. This wasn¡¯t because he wanted to ingratiate himself with the other party, but rather a strategic choice forced by the situation. It couldn¡¯t be helped, seeing as Taiping Dao had just recently risen, now ostensibly dominating one domain, and seemingly a newly-promoted overlord. But this was merely a superficial glory. In the shadows, Yang Jihua, leading the remnants of Changqing Domain, was still hidden, constantly plotting a revival and counterattack. Although the surrounding Immortal Sect powers expressed their recognition of Taiping Dao¡¯s dominance, who could tell if any of these sects had good relations with, or sympathized with Qing Immortal Sect. Even if this friendship and sympathy were unlikely to translate into direct action against Taiping Dao, especially since Taiping Dao had been fighting to the death with Qing Immortal Sect for some time previously. If they were going to emerge, they would have done so by now. When the situation was unclear, no one came forward. Now that the grand scheme is settled, it¡¯s even less likely for anyone to escape. But without directly taking action, they could still cause trouble behind the scenes, and with the size of a Heavenly Immortal Sect, that would be enough to give Taiping Dao considerable trouble. Even without a Heavenly Immortal Sect, if some Grand Immortal Sect wished to specifically target Taiping Dao, Acts such as ambushing Taiping Dao¡¯s disciples traveling abroad, cutting off Taiping Dao¡¯s communications with the outside world, and other such tricks, would certainly be enough to cause Lu Yuan considerable headaches and annoyance. Chapter 1537 - Chapter 1537 Chapter 596 Oath of Radiance_2 ?Chapter 1537: Chapter 596 Oath of Radiance_2 Chapter 1537: Chapter 596 Oath of Radiance_2 The above troubles are merely the evident and conceivable ones. Moreover, could the Changqing Immortal have left behind any hidden schemes? With the title of a Nine Provinces¡¯ successor, Taiping Dao sieged the entire Changqing Domain. Could it really establish a connection with the ancient Nine Spirits Sect and, as if fated, face its causal constraints? If the Nine Spirits Celestial Noble truly managed to reincarnate through the body of Taiping Dao, then facing the return of the king, the Nine Spirits Celestial Noble, Lu Yuan would truly be in tears. These methods at the level of Heavenly Immortals are beyond Lu Yuan¡¯s realm, and he cannot fathom the opponent¡¯s strength. But even though this threat cannot be estimated, it has always posed a hidden danger, menacing the peace of Taiping Dao. Amidst various internal and external troubles, Taiping Dao seems stable on the surface, but even Lu Yuan doesn¡¯t have a solid grasp on the actual situation. For him, the only choice is to take one step at a time, and to try to delay as much as possible, just another two or three thousand years. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 By that time, even if he hasn¡¯t become a Heavenly Immortal, he would certainly be a Grand cultivator at the pinnacle of Earth Immortal. With strength in hand, naturally, there¡¯s also the confidence to face dangers. And in order to drag out more time, Taiping Dao naturally also needs to scheme various techniques and continuously strengthen its own strength. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Among all these strategies, securing the domain to enhance one¡¯s own power is just one type. Finding a powerful ally to secure external support is also a method, and an extremely effective one at that. After all, cultivating Inner Strength requires time for gradual growth. But the strength of an ally is readily available and can be utilized immediately. And when looking at various allies, none are more suitable than the Radiant Immortal Dynasty, which shares a deep connection with Taiping Dao and has relatively matching strength. Choosing them as allies perfectly aligns with Taiping Dao¡¯s interests. At the same time, the obstacles and difficulties in forming an alliance are significantly less. And this need for an alliance is not just on the part of Taiping Dao; the Radiant Immortal Dynasty also has their requirements for seeking allies. Taiping Dao has already unified the Changqing Domain and urgently needs to solidify its base to secure its position. The Radiant Immortal Dynasty, too, has unified half a domain and is rising as an emerging Overlord. For them, how to achieve final victory and safeguard the fruits of their victory is similarly an urgent issue to address. Among the many solutions, choosing Taiping Dao as an ally is undoubtedly the simplest and most cost-effective option. The two families come from the same source and share a deep relationship. Their strengths are comparable, and an alliance between them wouldn¡¯t leave either side at a loss. Both are dominators of a domain, of a similar stature. Together, they pose a significant deterrent to any other forces itching to make a move. If an alliance between the two families could be facilitated, even if none of the Overlord Immortal Sects possessed a Heavenly Immortal Level Being, to outsiders, it would still be almost as intimidating as a Heavenly Immortal Sect. This alliance would undoubtedly be greatly beneficial in improving the current harsh living conditions of both families. Based on this practical need for mutual benefit, Lu Yuan¡¯s approach to forming an alliance with the Radiant Immortal Dynasty is both logical and reasonable. And from the Radiant Immortal Dynasty¡¯s perspective, they responded positively. In fact, the Radiant Immortal Dynasty suddenly dispatched a Messenger, partly to celebrate Taiping Dao¡¯s occupation of the Changqing Domain and the fulfillment of a dreams several tens of thousands of years old for all Nine Provinces followers. The more important reason, however, is that they recognized the immense value of Taiping Dao, a fellow from the Nine Provinces, as a significant external support. As such, it would help to suppress their internal enemies within their domain. Externally, it would serve as a deterrent to those who are restless. This would greatly relieve the pressure currently faced by the Radiant Immortal Dynasty. Therefore, after receiving news of Changqing¡¯s unification and conducting an in-depth examination of Taiping Dao, they swiftly sent a Messenger. It¡¯s all driven by interests. In a situation where both parties are keen, the alliance between Taiping Dao and the Radiant Immortal Dynasty naturally progressed swiftly. Soon, the two sides reached a preliminary consensus, and had agreed on some mutual obligations for the alliance. Then, with the joint efforts of both, Lu Yuan and the incumbent Radiant Immortal Emperor chose a domain within an Immortal Sect, closely associated with the Nine Provinces between their forces, to host an alliance meeting on borrowed grounds. Although unable to invite a Great True Person as a witness, they did invite the current head of the other party to attend the ceremony. At the same time, various friendly Immortal Sects also sent Messengers to witness this covenant. Finally, under the watchful eyes of dozens of Immortal Sects within the Donghua Continent, the two sects currently at the height of their influence, Taiping Dao and Radiant Immortal Dynasty, formally forged an alliance. This alliance, birthed originally from the remnants of the Nine Spirits lineage, had, on this very day, given rise to two Overlord Immortal Sects. It was not a fresh tale in the annals of the Immortal Realma€¡±that a sect had fallen only for its successors to rise from the ashes, rebuild the Tao Inheritance, and prosper the sect anew. Indeed, there had been precedents in the Immortal Realm¡¯s past history. But the simultaneous burgeoning of two Immortal Sect lineages, to such an extent, was unprecedented. At least, within the Donghua Continent, there had never been rumblings of such an occurrence until now. Nowadays, the appearance of such a spectacle among the various lineages across the Nine Provinces was considered an extraordinary first. And, this unprecedented shock naturally brought with it an unprecedented deterrence. You should know, After reaching their level of power, Heavenly Immortal sects generally refrained from intervening in external affairs and from forming alliances with outsiders. In the Donghua Continent, among its numerous domains, there exist over ten Great True Persons. Yet all of these Great True Persons kept to their own domains, the door closed and inaccessible. Although their disciples did venture out to broaden their horizons, they were merely limited to acquiring experience and generally did not meddle too extensively in the affairs of Immortal Sects from the Outer Territory. Under such circumstances, forming deep bonds and shared-fate alliances with Immortal Sects from the Outer Territory was even more implausible. It had become a consensus that Heavenly Immortal Sects were independent entities. At most, interaction between Heavenly Immortal Sects occurred silently and on a larger scale, in which they would move in concert. But actual alliances, considering their personal circumstances, were essentially impossible. Thus, it had become common knowledge that Heavenly Immortal Sects, or, more precisely, domain-overlords that they represented, did not form alliances with one another. But now, Taiping Dao constituted a domain overlord, and although Radiant Immortal Dynasty fell somewhat short, they still occupied half a domain¡¯s territory, and if pushed to define them, could also pass for a domain overlord. Two such overlords had now publicly allied themselves with one another. Even though these two overlords were devoid of any Great True Persons, Under normal conditions within the Immortal Realm, those of the Great True Person¡¯s caliber would scarcely take action personally. The highest martial representatives of a Heavenly Immortal Sect were, after all, merely Earth Immortals. In this respect, whether it was Taiping Dao or Radiant Immortal Dynasty, they were not inferior in conventional military strength to those Heavenly Immortal Sects. Their union equated to the alliance of two Heavenly Immortal Sects; there was no difference. Especially to those forces inferior to Heavenly Immortal Sects, Taiping Dao and Radiant Immortal Dynasty were considered almost on par, both extraordinary in their presence. And just like that, When two extraordinary entities joined forces, the resulting deterrence to the outside world was unparalleled. After all, as far as Lu Yuan knew, subsequent to the formation of the alliance, even those Immortal Sects formerly harboring animosity toward Taiping Dao, Be they insignificant sects without even a True Immortal, or Overlord Immortal Sects possessing Heavenly Immortals, simultaneously ceased any hostile actions against Taiping Dao at the very same time. Even some forces with lesser hostility had begun actively sending Messengers to Mi Yun Mountain, seeking to turn hostility into friendship with Taiping Dao. The environment facing Taiping Dao eased considerably in an instant. With the Radiant Immortal Dynasty as a powerful ally, the two sects supported each other and had finally found their footing in the Immortal Realm. So, under favorable circumstances, after unifying the Changqing Domain and forming an alliance with Radiant, the following year, Lu Yuan formally sent out invitations from atop Mi Yun Mountain to all great Immortal Sects of the Donghua Continent, preparing to follow the customs of the Immortal Realm and officially rename their domain, from Changqing to Taiping. To change the ruling of the Taiping Dao over their domain, from de facto unity to a unity of name and reality. To consign the name Changqing to history, letting it rest forever within the annals of time. From this point forward, the land of thirty-nine nations within the domain would be called Taiping, not Changqing. He, Lu Yuan, upon ascending to the rank of Great True Person, would officially adopt the title of Taiping Immortal Venerate. For both name and instrument must not be acquired from another. This was the establishment of status. Chapter 1538 - Chapter 1538 Chapter 597 Domain Peaceful ?Chapter 1538: Chapter 597 Domain Peaceful Chapter 1538: Chapter 597 Domain Peaceful According to the customary practice in the Immortal Realm, whenever the sovereignty of a Great Domain changes hands, the name of the Great Domain can be replaced with the name of the new ruler¡¯s power. Therefore, Taiping Dao renaming the Changqing Domain was actually quite normal and did not exceed the expectations of outsiders. Because this is something every Overlord Immortal Sect does. If there¡¯s something surprising, it¡¯s that Lu Yuan was in such a hurry; he had just defeated the Qing Immortal Sect and had not even firmly secured his position before he started changing the domain¡¯s name the next year. In the original expectations of the masses, Taiping Dao was supposed to maintain the current state for a while and wait until a Great True Person emerged from their ranks, firmly securing their position as the overlord. And then, they would announce to the world that the hegemony of the Changqing Domain had been replaced, which would make their claim legitimate. To outsiders, Lu Yuan¡¯s hasty actions appeared somewhat arrogant. Your Taiping Dao has indeed achieved victory, but it¡¯s just that you¡¯ve defeated the Qing Immortal Sect. The incumbent leader of Qing Immortal Sect, Yang Jihua, is still alive, constantly thinking about restoration from outside! Within this Donghua Continent, it¡¯s unknown how many people resent the parvenu-like Taiping Dao and the Radiant Immortal Dynasty, always thinking about secretly tripping them up. In short, until Taiping Dao produces a Heavenly Immortal, their hegemony in the Changqing Domain cannot be considered stable and could be subverted at any time. Taiping Dao is now happily celebrating, but if a few hundred years pass and Yang Jihua returns, or other strong enemies invade, whether Taiping Dao can withstand them remains uncertain. At this time, with the enterprise not yet solid, they¡¯re rashly boasting their achievements and changing the Great Domain¡¯s name, which only a complete victor could claima€¡±what is this if not arrogance and self-conceit? Overall, many Immortal Sects that received invitations from Taiping Dao felt like putting a crown on a monkey, elevating an unworthy one to fame. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Some who disliked the rise of Taiping Dao were secretly plotting, looking forward to the day they would see Taiping Dao knocked into the dust and become a laughingstock. Even Immortal Sects like Dongyang Mountain, which favored Taiping Dao, like Li Ruoqing and Wang Shizhou, felt anxious when they received the invitation. Concerned that their friends were blinded by the current victory and had made an ill-suited move. Even within the Nine Provinces, those who had just allied with Taiping Dao such as Radiant Immortal Dynasty, Heavenly River Sect¡¯s Huang Yuanxiu, and Yuchan Tao¡¯s Gu Huaiyuan sent letters asking Lu Yuan if he was being a bit too hasty and expressed their concerns. Regarding Taiping Dao¡¯s domain name changing action, this time, from external enemies to internal allies, nobody really saw it favorably. Facing such massive opposition and still pushing for this change, the pressure on Lu Yuan as the person involved was naturally imaginable. However, contrary to what outsiders speculated, Lu Yuan¡¯s persistence in changing the domain name was not out of a desire for glory or being blinded by smooth progress; he had his compelling reasons. Letting the legitimate part govern the distinction of high and low, only then can everyone submit internally and outsiders willingly follow. This means that only when legitimacy is established can one clearly differentiate the noble from the base, get subordinates to serve for the sake of rank, and attract outsiders to join. Though Taiping Dao now unified Changqing Domain, they only exercised control over it in practice and not in name. Such a rule, as long as it still bears the name of Changqing Domain, remains day by day the role of a rebellious usurper, illegitimate and unsmooth in speech. Now Taiping Dao is like a minister controlling the power of a nation, possessing all the rights of an emperor, lacking only the title of Heavenly Son. Without striving for the throne, one remains a servant, not a lord. Not being the lord means a continuous risk of being depowered and risks associated with being attacked for rebellion. Those following him can never settle in wealth and cannot work peacefully. And the solution to these problems is only one, to abolish the Heavenly Son, pass on the mandate, and establish a New Dynasty. In the Immortal Realm, this means changing the domain name after eliminating the previous overlord and starting a new era for the Great Domain. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? Of course, Lu Yuan, in overthrowing Qing Immortal Sect with military power, practiced an imperial method and established his base all by his own strength, never submitting to or relying on Qing Immortal Sect¡¯s power. Thus, his actions were not regarded as those of a rebellious usurper, nor did he need to worry about being attacked for rebellion. But continuously bearing the name of Changqing Domain, even though he founded the nation, using the previous dynasty¡¯s name still seemed improper, like a monkey adorned in silk. If it were just this, it might still be bearable. A little reputation lost, as long as the substantial benefits are secured, losing face is tolerable. But what made Lu Yuan intolerable was that the vast Changqing Domain he had hard-fought for, the land of thirty-nine nations, because of a mere issue of naming, caused a direct loss of twenty percent of the Qi Luck provided to him. Yes, a full twenty percent. Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation nowadays mainly relied on two resources: Qi Number and Qi Luck. Among these, Qi Number is the fixed output of the mountains and rivers¡¯ geography, constantly provided as long as Divine Spirits helped sort out the Earth Vein, which didn¡¯t worry Lu Yuan. But Qi Luck was different. The output of Qi Luck depends on the size of the territory occupied, which determines how much Qi Luck is provided. Chapter 1539 - Chapter 1539: Chapter 597 Domain Peaceful_2 Chapter 1539: Chapter 597 Domain Peaceful_2 ¡°One aspect is whether the intelligent beings on your territory are under your rule and how they recognize you; this too can generate Qi Luck.¡± ¡°Another aspect is outsiders¡¯ opinions of you, whether they acknowledge your status and name, which can also provide a portion of Qi Luck.¡± ¡°Lastly, it¡¯s whether Heaven and Earth recognize your rule¡ªthis is also a significant source of Qi Luck.¡± ¡°To summarize, the generation of Qi Luck comprises four aspects: territory, population, status, and recognition.¡± ¡°But now, Lu Yuan¡¯s territory is known as the Changqing Domain¡ªits people see themselves as inhabitants of the Changqing Domain, and the outside world also acknowledges it as such.¡± ¡°Even the Heavenly Path recognizes this place as the Changqing Domain.¡± ¡°In such circumstances, the Changqing Domain naturally has a large portion of its Qi Luck siphoned off by the Qing Immortal Sect.¡± ¡°Therefore, Lu Yuan busied himself, fighting tooth and nail to establish the current situation.¡± ¡°Yet that now-defunct Qing Immortal Sect, by virtue of a name it left behind, can claim nearly twenty percent of the Qi Luck.¡± ¡°How can Lu Yuan accept this reality?¡± ¡°That¡¯s a full twenty percent of Qi Luck, which, for him, is almost equivalent to reducing his cultivation speed by one and a half times.¡± ¡°Yes, for Lu Yuan, the mainstream resources of Qi figures in the Immortal Realm are far less useful than Qi Luck.¡± ¡°After all, his ¡®Golden Finger¡¯ is the Dao Fruit of longevity, which, paired with the Way of Control Pneuma that relies on a life-consuming cultivation method, could be described as a perfect match.¡± Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï ¡°Together, they effortlessly elevate his cultivation speed to a level that even others who also cultivate the Way of Control Pneuma are left dumbstruck.¡± ¡°The fact that Lu Yuan achieved his current accomplishments in a mere three thousand years is undoubtedly due to the instrumental role of the Way of Control Pneuma.¡± ¡°Compared to such a foundation for attaining Dao, Qi figures, though beneficial, are lacking in many aspects.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not that Qi figures are bad; it¡¯s just that this channel of cultivation is not a good fit for Lu Yuan, so it has to be relegated to a secondary priority.¡± ¡°For that reason, it further highlights the importance of Qi Luck to Lu Yuan.¡± ¡°Thus, the loss of an entire one and a half times of his cultivation speed makes the twenty percent of diverted Qi Luck even more intolerable to him.¡± ¡°To reclaim this Qi Luck, he is forced to take actions that, in the eyes of outsiders, seem like dangerous hubris and blinded by avarice.¡± ¡°But it¡¯s not that Lu Yuan has become arrogant; the stakes are just too high for him to act otherwise.¡± ¡°Moreover, taking such action is actually in line with the interests of the Taiping Dao.¡± ¡°In the Immortal Realm, might makes right.¡± ¡°If your cultivation is high and your strength is great, then others will submit to you, and whatever you do is considered right.¡± ¡°Lu Yuan¡¯s goal in recuperating the lost Qi Luck is to enhance his cultivation speed and increase his strength.¡± ¡°By any standard, this aligns with the qualities a normal cultivator should possess.¡± ¡°Placed in his position, any cultivator would make the same choice.¡± ¡°As for all the rumors and gossip from the outside¡­¡± ¡°As long as I increase my cultivation rapidly enough, then the various malicious remarks will naturally transform into praises singing my glory.¡± ¡°My current haste in changing the realm¡¯s name will be seen as the sagacious and precocious deeds of a mighty and enlightened ruler, to become a parable passed down in Donghua Continent.¡± ¡°As my cultivation rises, all those targeted attacks will collapse on their own, completely dissipating.¡± ¡°When I attain Dao, there will be no enemies left in the world, only allies.¡± ¡°Lu Yuan has always had a clear vision of reality.¡± ¡°It is precisely because of this clarity that he can audaciously take actions that shock outsiders without reservation.¡± ¡°He knows what he needs and where his foundation lies; he won¡¯t be swayed by public opinion like ordinary people.¡± ¡°The current Chu Emperor, today¡¯s Master of Taiping Tao, has achieved such feats in both Nine Provinces and the Immortal Realm because he is no ordinary person.¡± ¡°Once clear about what he wants, Lu Yuan, following his own ideas and seemingly ¡°stubbornly¡± for his own preferences, proceeded with the renaming ceremony.¡± ¡°Amid the lively discussions and mocking gazes of the world, the elaborate celebration to change from the Changqing Domain to the Taiping Domain grandly commenced, and then grandly concluded.¡± ¡°Other than leaving behind a ¡®Taiping name change¡¯ anecdote for many to jest about in their leisure, the Taiping Dao left little else in the eyes of outsiders.¡± ¡°However, at the moment, the anecdote is more of a source of laughter.¡± ¡°But Lu Yuan believes.¡± ¡°As he continues to make breakthroughs and ultimately attains the status of a Great True Person, all mockery will fade away.¡± ¡°The meaning of this anecdote will shift from its current sarcasm to become one of commendation, undergoing a complete reversal.¡± ¡°And all that¡¯s needed is for him to succeed.¡± ¡°¡­¡± ¡°Time flies; in the blink of an eye, two hundred years have passed.¡± ¡°As time marches on, the ¡®Taiping name change¡¯ incident has become relatively distant in the minds of many cultivators.¡± ¡°Even for Human Immortals, two hundred years represent one-fifteenth of their lifespan¡ªa significant period.¡± ¡°And for Earth Immortals, it¡¯s one-fiftieth.¡± ¡°Any joke, discussed over one-fiftieth of one¡¯s time, will also wear thin.¡± ¡°For many cultivators, mocking the Taiping Dao is amusing.¡± ¡°But living their own lives well holds more meaning.¡± ¡°So after observing the Taiping Dao¡¯s presumptuous action, yet with no follow-up moves and continued oblivion¡­¡± ¡°People also turned their attention away, and aside from some who had vested interests, they no longer paid attention to what the Taiping Dao was doing.¡± ¡°The world is vast, and even Donghua Continent is but a grain of sand in the grand scheme of things.¡± Chapter 1540 - Chapter 1540 Chapter 597 Domain Peaceful_3 ?Chapter 1540: Chapter 597 Domain Peaceful_3 Chapter 1540: Chapter 597 Domain Peaceful_3 The Donghua Continent was vast, and even the Taiping Domain was just a corner of it. Although Taiping Dao was all the rage, when compared to the entire continent, to the whole world, it was merely a trifle. When not involving their own interests, most people merely watched with an amused mindset, hardly taking it seriously. Once Taiping Dao ceased providing amusement, those amused onlookers, naturally, shifted their focus and sought other entertainments. Especially since in these two hundred years, Taiping Dao unified the Changqing Domain and renamed it the Taiping Domain and subsequentially saw the birth of two Earth Immortals. Displaying a flourishing and extraordinary momentum. Facing this Immortal Sect that commanded ten Earth Immortals, even if the outside world was full of criticism, it had to acknowledge them at this point. With such strength as Taiping Dao¡¯s, even renaming a domain seemed quite reasonable. Strength altered perspectives. Taiping Dao just gained two Earth Immortals and continued to demonstrate a thriving development, which already shut many people up. This state of affairs brought Lu Yuan considerable satisfaction in his heart. All the hard work did not go wasted, as he generously emptied the treasury to use all the Immortal Materials seized after conquering Qing Immortal Sect to create two new Avatars. Within two hundred years, he had nurtured them into new Earth Immortals. Such arduous effort indeed was not in vain. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Not only did it directly silence the outsiders, but it also significantly boosted the morale of Taiping Dao, enhancing its influence even further. As a result, the Qi Luck produced by Taiping Dao also rode the wave, climbing a good portion higher. Consequently, Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation progress also experienced a considerable boost beyond his original expectations. Today marked another critical breakthrough. ¡°In recent days, I¡¯m going into seclusion to break through to the late-stage Earth Immortal. Each of you, guard your respective territories, suppress the petty and trivial, and protect the Taiping Domain well for me. In no more than a hundred years, I shall break through and become a Grand cultivator.¡± Lu Yuan summoned his nine Avatars to give them his instructions. After two hundred years of cultivation, nourished by the resources of the whole Taiping Domain, his cultivation had soared. He had completed the entire progress of the mid-stage Earth Immortal in just two hundred years. ?0¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Now he had touched the edge of the late-stage Earth Immortal. Once he had broken through this realm, Lu Yuan would officially join the first ranks of cultivators below Heavenly Immortals and would qualify to be called a Grand cultivator. The Changqing Immortal, Meng Jianshan, and Yao Baojuan, who once held the same rank, were only at this level. Now, two thousand years after their deaths, he was about to step into this rank as well. Once a Grand cultivator, Taiping Dao would possess a genuinely top-notch combat force and could barely suppress a Region Continent. The currently somewhat disingenuous name change would be greatly alleviated. After all, a Grand cultivator is only a step away from the Great True Person. With Lu Yuan reaching this level and coupled with the size and resources of Taiping Dao, he undoubtedly became one of the beings in the Donghua Continent with the highest hope of becoming the next Great True Person. Such a prospective Great True Person, no matter who, had to be treated with ample respect. Because no one knew if, in a thousand years or so, the person might break through that barrier and become a Heavenly Immortal. If you offend a future Heavenly Immortal, and they remember you, you might as well prepare your coffin in advance, ending things for yourself and leaving a complete body behind. A Grand cultivator is the final step before a qualitative change. Lu Yuan was about to enter this realm. Chapter 1541 - Chapter 1541 Chapter 598 Fire Chief ?Chapter 1541: Chapter 598 Fire Chief Chapter 1541: Chapter 598 Fire Chief Years flew by like a fleeting dream, the world changing beyond recognition. In the blink of an eye, another century had passed. Atop the Rear Mountain of Mi Yun, Lu Yuan stood leaning on a railing, his hand supporting him as he gazed into the distant sea of clouds. He couldn¡¯t help but sigh, ¡°After three hundred years of arduous cultivation, today¡¯s Mountains of Mi Yun finally possess a bit of the Changqing charm.¡± Beside him, Yi Dancheng couldn¡¯t help but laugh, ¡°In these three hundred years, the nine of us have labored day and night, expending great amounts of Magic Power and effort, continuously transferring the Earth Vein from Changqing Mountain to Mi Yun Mountain. Now, Mi Yun Mountain rises more than twenty-seven thousand feet high, unmatched in majesty within the domain and standing as the tallest mountain. Mi Yun Mountain has absorbed the essence of Changqing Mountain, its present charm is only to be expected.¡± Since the destruction of Qing Immortal Sect, Lu Yuan, despite being tempted, dared not relocate his sect to this place. For no one was certain what schemes the Qing Immortal Sect had left behind in its millennia-old Mountain Gate or how many traps had been laid in secret. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Moving the sect here would mean shouldering too many dangers and unknown risks. Therefore, to eliminate such threats and to consolidate their foundation, Taiping Dao had adopted a scorched earth strategy against the conquered Changqing Mountain. Wary of Qing Immortal Sect, and without knowing what countermeasures the enemy had left, Lu Yuan had simply decided to uproot them entirely, disregarding their hidden cards. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï The specific operation involved sparing no cost and enduring great losses, desperately draining Changqing Mountain of its Earth Vein, and transferring it over to Mi Yun Mountain. Without sufficient nourishment from the Earth Vein, Changqing Mountain quickly crumbled and collapsed, transforming from a magnificent peak tens of thousands of feet high to the ordinary large mountain of today, merely six thousand feet tall. The once abundant Earth Vein Qi within the mountain soon grew thin. Even so, Taiping Dao did not relent. According to the original plan, Lu Yuan intended to completely drain Changqing Mountain of its Earth Vein, reducing this once-renowned mountain of the domain to flat ground, turning it into a name that existed only in memory. Without this mountain to rely on, whatever traps the Qing Immortal Sect had set inside would now amount to nothing. All problems had been dealt with, presenting a thorough resolution. Indeed, subsequent events proved that Lu Yuan¡¯s approach was wise. During the process of draining Changqing Mountain, numerous lethal arrays were revealed within the mountain, and even mountain spirits and nefarious demons sealed in the rock came to light, as did a passage to a strange, otherworldly place of utter desolation. All these were monumental crises, even for an Earth Immortal, and had Lu Yuan not decisively drained the mountain, given the subtlety with which these mechanisms were hidden, even a thorough search with the mountain¡¯s Earth Vein Qi as cover would¡¯ve likely failed to disclose these perils. Instead, now was the time, Directly stripping away the Earth Vein, these sinister schemes were left without foundation and inadvertently exposed themselves. Thus, the prepared Lu Yuan, along with several powerful Avatars, proceeded to systematically eliminate them. Reflecting on that time and the eradication of those hidden evils, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but feel fortunate. Had it not been for his astute decision during the conquest of Qing Immortal Sect to split his forces and, taking advantage of the enemy¡¯s vulnerable home base, stealthily seize Changqing Mountain, He could secure this strategic location with little effort. Otherwise, had Zhang Xiuzhu and Yang Jihua escaped back to Changqing Mountain and fortified their position, With the mountain¡¯s strength, the numerous fearsome arrays within, the portals to other realms, the sealed demons¡­ With all these measures in place, even if Lu Yuan rallied the entire force of the Nine Provinces, conquering this mountain would likely incur a heavy toll. To say the least, losing one or two, or even three Avatars would seem an ordinary occurrence. And without even considering these, had he carelessly moved his sect to this very mountain, Then the fleeing Yang Jihua could¡¯ve returned to Changqing Mountain using these traps and set all the hidden dangers off. Thus, the unsuspecting Taiping Dao could have easily fallen and lost Changqing Mountain once again. Alongside that, possibly losing several Avatars and thousands upon thousands of disciples. These were the perils that once lurked within Changqing Mountain. Fortunately, Lu Yuan had taken precautions in advance, this time deploying a decisive measure that eradicated them all. Not only did it eliminate the threat of Changqing Mountain, but it also significantly strengthened his foundational territory of Mi Yun Mountain. Although only a few hundred years had passed, the present Mi Yun Mountain had risen more than twenty-three thousand feet high, becoming one of the most renowned peaks within the Changqing Domain, gaining accolades far and wide. Naturally, Changqing Mountain¡¯s contribution was indispensable. By sabotaging Changqing Mountain¡¯s foundation, they quickly compensated for the deficiencies of Mi Yun Mountain, resulting in its current prosperity. This aggressive protective strategy, though costly and with significant damage to Changqing Mountain, wasting about forty percent of the Earth Vein Qi accrued over tens of thousands of years in the transfer, For Lu Yuan, anything that couldn¡¯t be used was meaningless. Better to destroy it rather than keep it as a potential threat looming over them. Better to demolish it and, from the ruins, seek useful materials to build his towering bastion. Ruin Changqing to fortify Mi Yun. That had been the long-standing policy of Lu Yuan since uniting the peaceful domain more than three hundred years ago. He referred to it as ¡°North Vein to South,¡± treating it as a grand project, mobilizing the entire strength of Taiping Dao, with even his nine Avatars fully committed to advancing the endeavor. Chapter 1542 - Chapter 1542 Chapter 598 Fire Brigade Captain_2 ?Chapter 1542: Chapter 598 Fire Brigade Captain_2 Chapter 1542: Chapter 598 Fire Brigade Captain_2 By now, the project was more than halfway completed and was finally approaching its conclusion. ¡°According to the current progress, the North Vein to South project is 90% complete. The remaining over six thousand zhang of Changqing Mountain is expected to be completely drained in about twenty years. By then, all of the Earth Vein Qi will be exhausted, and Changqing Mountain will cease to exist. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? The original site will become a plain, and because the Earth Vein Qi will be depleted, it will exist as a desert for over a hundred years. Only when the Earth Vein Qi nourishes the area again, will this place regain some life. If there isn¡¯t any external intervention in the future, Changqing Mountain will never reappear and will forever disappear from history.¡± Serving as the chief commander of the North Vein to South project during Lu Yuan¡¯s seclusion, Yi Dancheng was adept at overseeing the progress of the project he was responsible for. At this time, after coming out of seclusion, he was reporting his work. ¡°Not bad, to achieve such progress in a hundred years, I am very satisfied.¡± Lu Yuan synchronized his Avatar¡¯s memory and couldn¡¯t help but nod in satisfaction and praise aloud. Before his seclusion, the project had only progressed by half. Now coming out of a hundred years of seclusion, the remaining forty percent had advanced. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã0 Only the final touches remained now. Such rapid progress, of course, was satisfying. Yi Dancheng, upon receiving these praises, simply smiled faintly, not taking much heed, and then asked, ¡°Master, you¡¯ve been in seclusion for a hundred years and have now successfully broken through to a Late-stage Earth Immortal status among Grand Cultivators. Such good news should be celebrated. Should we hold a ceremony to announce it to the world to boost morale and deter the petty foes?¡± Lu Yuan nodded, ¡°I haven¡¯t made an appearance in a hundred years, and there¡¯s slackness and speculation outside. I fear that those with intentions are already restless to act. Although for these lurking fellows, I don¡¯t take them to heart. If they dare show up, we will directly suppress them. But now, as Taiping Dao is in a phase of rapid development, all my energy and time is better spent on cultivating my Inner Strength for greater enhancement of my strength. Instead, it would be a waste to spend time on these fellows, which would be somewhat counterproductive. Engaging with these nuisances only plays into their hands, making myself disgusted. Instead, if we can emit a dangerous aura to scare them off, securing a temporary peace would be much preferable. Get down there and prepare for a celebration, and proclaim the news of my cultivation breakthrough to the world. I want to see if, after my breakthrough to a Grand Cultivator, there is any fool daring enough to provoke me and pull at the tiger¡¯s whiskers!¡± As Lu Yuan spoke towards the end, his tone already carried some murderous intent. Over the years, ever since unifying the domain, Taiping Dao hadn¡¯t just quietly passed a few centuries. In the early days, disciples of Taiping Dao being deliberately ambushed and killed was not worth mentioning. Within the Taiping Domain, various demonic rebels frequently arose, causing disasters and keeping the internal situation unstable, which was routine. Anyway, with the strength of Taiping Dao, such tactics and rebellions could be quelled instantly as soon as they surfaced, posing no real threat. What truly bothered Taiping Dao were the harassment tactics targeting its allies, namely the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects. After the last Northern Expedition, although Qing Immortal Sect had been wiped out, other Jiuzhou Immortal Sects like the Heavenly River Sect were severely weakened. Gu Huaiyuan, Huang Yuanxiu, and other Earth Immortals all suffered heavy injuries, taking over a hundred years to recover their strength. Their underling Human Immortals also suffered heavy losses. Not only were most of them lost, but some True Persons who returned from the campaign also carried injuries, not in peak condition. As for the ordinary disciples, as the most basic cannon fodder, their loss was even greater. After the battle, the disciples of all Jiuzhou Immortal Sects were essentially entirely rotated. Although the number of disciples post-war was quickly replenished, the quality had dropped significantly. In such a situation, the long-term weakness of the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects was inevitable. And those hidden enemies precisely seized this opportunity. While the Jiuzhou provinces were weak, they sneak attacked various strongholds of Jiuzhou Immortal Sects, wreaking havoc within their territories. How the chaos of demons was stirred up in the Changqing Domain back then, those enemies of Jiuzhou were now replicating it. Regrettably, having just experienced a major battle, the Jiuzhou Immortal Sects were in a period of weakness, struggling to handle these insurgencies comprehensively and decisively. Often, as one fire was extinguished here, another would immediately ignite elsewhere. In their frantic responses, they became exhausted from running about. Even more, they were often caught off guard while on the move, with the fire-fighting cultivators being ambushed and killed en route. After a few such instances, the external Jiuzhou Immortal Sects like the Heavenly River Sect, Jade Toad Path, and Wind and Thunder Path started showing signs of collapse. As for the Five Sects in Western Domain, due to their proximity to Taiping Dao, they could always receive prompt support and care from Taiping Dao. Those external enemies, after causing a few disturbances in Yuxi, encountered rapid reinforcements from Taiping Dao. Especially Lu Yuan¡¯s several Avatars, upon detecting danger, took nearby positions immediately, ready to suppress any disturbances. Those sneaky nuisances often hadn¡¯t even begun causing trouble before they were discovered by Lu Yuan¡¯s Avatars and completely extinguished in their infancy. After several such tests and being beaten bloody, Chapter 1543 - Chapter 1543 Chapter 598 Fire Brigade Captain_3 ?Chapter 1543: Chapter 598 Fire Brigade Captain_3 Chapter 1543: Chapter 598 Fire Brigade Captain_3 The enemies outside had finally learned their lesson. They dared not disturb the peaceful Western Domain anymore, allowing the Five Sects there to settle down. But with the peaceful Western Domain now free of trouble, the other domains outside of it within the Nine Provinces Immortal Sect could no longer hold up. Among them, the Wind and Thunder Path was doing slightly better. This sect had Gu Huaiyuan and Fu Baopu, two Earth Immortals, providing enough high-end strength, and the sect¡¯s territory was not large, just enough to manage effectively. Although the external enemies had caused quite a disturbance over there, they had not yet been able to form a significant force, and the situation remained under control. However, the situation for Jade Toad Path and Heavenly River Sect was much more tragic. Especially the latter, Heavenly River Sect. In the last Northern Expedition, the United Army of the Nine Provinces had Huang Yuanxiu making the greatest effort and sacrificing the most. Similarly, the Heavenly River Sect suffered the heaviest losses. Even among all the Earth Immortals, Huang Yuanxiu was the most severely injured. As a result, the Heavenly River Sect became the weakest after the war. The sect¡¯s regular strength was decimated, only a tenth remaining. It was not just about protecting the sect; even maintaining its basic rule became perilously unstable. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Therefore, when faced with harassment from external enemies, the performance of the Heavenly River Sect was the most embarrassing. Three out of the four countries under its jurisdiction had fallen and become lands of demons. The remaining disciples in the sect lost most of their numbers while suppressing the demonic chaos. The remaining two Human Immortals were also ambushed and slaughtered in the process of fighting the fires. Even when Huang Yuanxiu heard this news and furiously emerged from seclusion to seek revenge on the demons, He himself was attacked by an unknown Earth Immortal. Already severely injured, he nearly fell to the Earth Immortal¡¯s assault on the spot. Had it not been for the sect being close by, allowing Huang Yuanxiu to retreat back to the Mountain in time, and relying on the Mountain¡¯s protective formation, The Dao inheritance of Heavenly River Sect might have been wiped out. Even so, today, the area controlled by Heavenly River Sect was reduced to only the country where Mountain Gate was located. But even this small controlled area was unstable, with demons periodically causing trouble. And Heavenly River Sect could only watch, powerless to quell the disturbances. It was only after Taiping Dao received the news that Lu Yuan urgently dispatched two avatars to assist Huang Yuanxiu, helping him repel the demons and reassess the territorial control. One Avatar stayed with Heavenly River Sect for a hundred years until new Human Immortals were raised and Huang Yuanxiu had recovered from his injuries before leaving. And for Jade Toad Path and Wind and Thunder Path, Lu Yuan also frequently sent avatars to extinguish fires. These were the circumstances faced by Taiping Dao in consolidating the peaceful Western Domain during the first hundred years. Fires ignited everywhere in the External Nine Provinces. Taiping Dao became like a fireman, having to respond to emergencies from the outside while also guarding against fires in its own backyard. Everything was tense and unstable. It was then that Lu Yuan cultivated two more Earth Immortal avatars, boosting the prestige of Taiping Dao and increasing its availability of high-end strength, allowing them to dispatch more forces. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï This made the external enemy demons wary, temporarily deterring them from causing further chaos. Thus, all of the Nine Provinces Immortal Sect finally stabilized for more than a hundred years. But now, as Lu Yuan went into seclusion again for a hundred years and the School Leader of Taiping Dao had not been seen for a long period. External enemies started harboring numerous thoughts. Over these hundred years, not just in the External Nine Provinces but even within the peaceful Western Domain, there were again disturbances caused by demons. Clearly, someone was not willing to remain quiet. At such times, it was necessary to release the news that Lu Yuan had become a Grand Cultivator to deter those nuisances. Chapter 1544 - Chapter 1544 Chapter 599 The Path of the Heavenly Immortal ?Chapter 1544: Chapter 599 The Path of the Heavenly Immortal Chapter 1544: Chapter 599 The Path of the Heavenly Immortal Regarding the grand cultivator celebration for himself, Lu Yuan simply gave the order and handed it off to his avatars to take care of it. He himself continued to concentrate on his cultivation, having no time to bother with these mundane affairs. Even if it weren¡¯t for the purpose of assisting his old neighbors from the Nine Provinces and deterring petty nuisances to keep them from bothering him, he wouldn¡¯t have wanted to hold the celebration at all. For following the breakthrough, he found himself beset by troubles and was in urgent need of dealing with them. Lu Yuan had already reached the late-stage Earth Immortal realm. Although he had just recently broken through, at this time, the Earth Immortal Realm was pretty much as far as one could go. Even if one were to continue cultivating, it would only result in an increase in magic power and a slightly higher level of cultivation. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï But the Great Tao of his personal cultivation had reached a perfect state at the moment of breakthrough into the later stage. By this step, it could actually be called a Dao Fruit. This Dao Fruit was no different from a Heavenly Immortal Taoist Fruit, and Lu Yuan¡¯s Taoist Fruit of longevity existed just like this. It was a realization and enlightenment that only emerged upon reaching the perfection of Dao Fruit after his breakthrough as a grand cultivator. And while Dao Fruits were virtually alike, why then was the disparity between an Earth Immortal and a Heavenly Immortal so vast? Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Here, we must address the issue of the sovereignty of Dao Fruits. The so-called Realm of Earth Immortal is none other than mastering and merging with one of Heaven and Earth¡¯s ways, imbuing one¡¯s own essence into the fabric of Heaven and Earth, becoming one with the Great Tao. In this state, within Heaven and Earth, as long as one doesn¡¯t exceed the scope permitted by the Heavenly Path, a cultivator can make unlimited use of this way of Heaven and Earth, which can be said to possess infinite might. But because of the limitation within Heaven and Earth and the restrictions of the Heavenly Path, such a True Immortal can only be referred to as an Earth Immortal and is far from enjoying absolute freedom. If this were the only issue, it would already be acceptable. Being able to merge with the Tao and enjoy the scenery within the limits of the Heavenly Path is something most cultivators can live with. But the Heavenly Path is not generous. It allows you to merge with the Tao because it wants to use your power to strengthen its own Great Tao. It does not want you to be a parasite forever leeching off of itself. Therefore, when a cultivator reaches the realm of an Earth Immortal, they begin the journey of helping the Heavenly Path to perfect its own Great Tao. Starting from the early Earth Immortal stage, using one¡¯s own cultivation and insights to merge with the way of Heaven and Earth, until the late Earth Immortal stage, when one¡¯s insights are exhausted and completely integrated with the way of Heaven and Earth. With the completion of this process, the role of an Earth Immortal for the Heavenly Path essentially becomes nil. For the Heavenly Path, an Earth Immortal is useless at this point, and it¡¯s time to discard them. Hence, the Heavenly Path imposes a limit; the maximum Lifespan for a cultivatora€¡±or to say, for an Earth Immortala€¡±cannot exceed ten thousand years. Upon reaching ten thousand years of age, the Earth Immortal must perish. No secret method to extend one¡¯s Lifespan or consumption of life-extending heavenly treasures can break this limit. When Time comes, death is inevitable. This is the Heavenly decree for your demisea€¡±how can anyone outlive it? Lu Yuan, at this moment, was confronted with just such a predicament. There was no helping it; although the breakthrough to the late stage of Earth Immortal was a joyous occasion, along with the breakthrough, Lu Yuan had abruptly realized that his joy had been premature. This late-stage Earth Immortal was not so easily attained. With the attainment of this realm, the tribulations and calamities associated with it had also arrived. Once his Dao Fruit became perfect, the Great Tao cultivator he had followed would also be marked in the eyes of the Heavenly Path. Now that the Heavenly Path had noticed him, the ten-thousand-year limit inevitably loomed. Currently plagued by disaster, struggling for his very survival, he truly did not wish to deal with those trifles. The key was to think about how to break the situation. Now, Lu Yuan faced only two paths. First, he could either abandon the Dao Fruit that he had painstakingly cultivated, discard his cultivation, and relinquish his Earth Immortal Great Dao to the Heavenly Path, while relying on his own Dao Fruit of longevity to cling to a tenuous existence. In this way, no longer found on the Heavenly Path¡¯s list, it would naturally no longer concern itself with him, and he could continue to live freely and indefinitely. But having struggled in his cultivation for more than two thousand years, enduring countless hardships to finally reach his current realm, how could Lu Yuan willingly give up? Think of it, any cultivator faced with such a choice, unless it¡¯s the very last moment, would not take this road, would they? Even some cultivators wouldn¡¯t even think of it; this option isn¡¯t even on their list of choices. Because relinquishing your Dao Fruit and descending from the Earth Immortal Realm, losing the Lifespan advantage brought by this realm, to become a Human Immortal or even a mortal, would mean immediate death. To be devoured and assimilated by the Heavenly Path leads just as well to death. Death awaits either way, so why not die with dignity, with a bang? Lu Yuan had this option only because he possessed a Dao Fruit of longevity and was essentially already ¡®ashore.¡¯ Even if he lost this new path to safety, the loss, although severe, wouldn¡¯t be a total loss for him, thus it remained bearable. The Immortal Realm is vast, filled with cultivators as numerous as the stars, with many chosen ones among them. Whether other Earth Immortals might find a similar path like his own is highly probable. Therefore, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t say that others couldn¡¯t take this road. But regardless of whether they could or couldn¡¯t, it was a choice of last resort. No one would choose it unless absolutely necessary. And if that path was not an option, then the only remaining solution, which also represented the mainstream choice among the many Earth Immortals of the Immortal Realm, was to become a Heavenly Immortal. Chapter 1545 - Chapter 1545 Chapter 599 The Path of the Heavenly Immortal_2 ?Chapter 1545: Chapter 599 The Path of the Heavenly Immortal_2 Chapter 1545: Chapter 599 The Path of the Heavenly Immortal_2 Since that thieving Heaven showed no regard for sentiments, performing such a thankless task as slaughtering the donkey after it finished milling, the Earth Immortals, being the ones being slaughtered, naturally wouldn¡¯t be polite either. They simply defied their mother of Mountain, carving out their own domain and proclaiming themselves kings over their own land. With their own territory in tow, they directly withdrew from the control of the Heavenly Path and became their own carefree kings of the Mountain. By detaching themselves from the order of the Heavenly Path, the rules of Heaven could naturally no longer descend upon those sovereign Heavenly Immortals. And the Great Tao painstakingly cultivated by the Heavenly Immortals themselves would naturally belong entirely to them, allowing them to use it without reservation within their own carved-out domain. This was far stronger than the Earth Immortal Great Dao, which was restricted by the Heavenly Path, castrated again and again to avoid harming Heaven and Earth. One was a complete Dao Fruit, while the other was sovereignty controlled by others, a Dao Fruit castrated and thrown asidea€¡±could they be the same? Of course not. So countless Earth Immortals, upon reaching the perfect stage of Earth Immortal and becoming aware of the limitations of Heaven and Earth, the very first thing they thought and did was to rebel and become independent. In the Immortal Realm, it was equivalent to sealing off a domain and proclaiming sovereignty on one¡¯s own. That¡¯s also why Great True Persons were addressed as Immortal Venerates. Because they were truly the supreme rulers of a domain, who could compare to them within their own territories, weren¡¯t they indeed venerates above the Heavenly Path¡¯s? But this practice of shutting doors and declaring oneself king was fine when played quietly behind closed doors. The Immortal Realm was vast enough, and the Heavenly Path had too much territory to govern; the world even saw new Region Continents birthed at every moment. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã0 Under such circumstances, the Heavenly Path could only supervise the overall situation, truly unable to take care of every aspect of the world. So while the Heavenly Immortals each carved out their domain, as long as they didn¡¯t stand out and proclaim it widely, causing a well-known uproar, then the Heavenly Path sitting at the world¡¯s center would find it very difficult to notice that a few of its own hairs were no longer its own. This was the foundation for the many Heavenly Immortals to carve out their domains and declare sovereignty on their own. The Heavenly Path hadn¡¯t noticed, so they become the fish that slipped through the net, able to continue their carefree existence as their own kings of the Mountain. But if the Heavenly Path did notice, then it would mean the shattering of their domain, the reclamation of the Dao Fruit, and the eventual fusion of the Heavenly Immortals into it. Against the will of the entire Immortal Realm, a Heavenly Immortal that amounted to but a single hair of the world had no capacity to resist. The regular forces had arrived; some mountain bandits unworthy of being seen in the open were wiped out, and that was nothing out of the ordinary. Knowing well that their identity was problematic, unregistered, a rebel unseen by light, Heavenly Immortals from Immortal Sects across various Region Continents each kept a very low profile. Once becoming kings of the Mountain, they stayed within their lairs, never venturing out, each securely becoming a homebody, engaging in extended cultivation, often not appearing for thousands of years. By keeping such a low profile, or rather, surviving the ordeal, in the several Region Continents nearby East China that Lu Yuan knew of, the one Heavenly Immortal who had been the longest in hiding had already been off the grid for over a million and three hundred thousand years. It was said that this Heavenly Immortal now no longer shows himself within his own Great Domain; regarding the matters of his sect, he was indifferent and allowed things to run their course. He had completely withdrawn into his own created microcosm, embodying his own Heavenly Path within it, continuously playing with those little beings, thoroughly enjoying himself in the microcosm. Sometimes, even to observe the evolution of civilizations, he would close off for tens of thousands of years at a timea€¡±such lengths of time in the Immortal Realm were equivalent to the lifespan of some short-lived Heavenly Immortals, like that of Changqing Immortal. This speaks to the unconventionality of that Great True Person. And the consequences of such actions, for his Immortal Realm sect, meant utter self-abandonment. Because no one was in control, his sect went through several splits internally, with the serious ones even sparking wars within the domain. The intensity of which was no less than the Northern Expedition war that had just ended in the peaceful Region. Even so, that long-lived Heavenly Immortal didn¡¯t intervene. As long as his subordinates didn¡¯t act excessively, meaning to stir up external conflicts that might attract the attention of the Heavenly Path, they could all perish, yet he wouldn¡¯t bother with them. A matter of seclusion after all. His disciples were many generations removed, as long as they still revered him as their ancestral master, maintaining the closure of the Great Domain on his behalf, then everything was of no concern to him. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 It was merely internal strife, descendants fighting each other. In the eyes of the Great True Person, perhaps this strife, this chaos, was also part of a game? Given the temperament of that Great True Person, it¡¯s very possible that several of those internal conflicts within his sect were personally instigated by him, all for amusement. Don¡¯t disbelieve it, this possibility is quite high. Think about it. As children, mortals have all played games, such as pitting two anthills against each other or tossing a bug into an anthill and watching them fight, while they themselves took turns pouring water and lighting fires, thoroughly enjoying themselves! Great True Persons and the cultivators below the level of Heavenly Immortals are essentially two different species. In some sense, they could even be referred to as the Heavenly Path. Creating small worlds within a domain of the Immortal Realm, they can exercise the powers of the Heavenly Path. How does this differ from the true Heavenly Path? It is only a matter of the size of the territory they govern. If a Great True Person were to enter the perspective of the Heavenly Path, then observing their own created sect would it not be just like humans watching ants fight, identical in amusement? The difference is merely that humans tease ants, while the Heavenly Path teases cultivators, the species being played with is just of a higher order. So, it seems as if Heavenly Immortals are staking their claims, confining themselves as if in prison. But think about it from another angle. They have created their own Cave World, possessing an entire world to play with; whether this counts as imprisonment is a matter of perspective. Anyway, Lu Yuan thought, back when he was in the Nine Provinces, he never felt that Heaven and Earth were too narrow. Those Nine Provincial Regions were just as vast, filled with endless opportunities. And that was not even the limit. Cave Worlds that have been managed for a long time can also grow larger and larger. Ultimately surpassing a domain of the Immortal Realm, and although it had never appeared near the Region Continent adjacent to East China, such rumors have persisted within the Immortal Realm. There¡¯s no smoke without fire. Since such rumors exist, one would think that in reality, there must have been instances of it happening. If this is true, then those who focus on cultivating their world, making it larger and more expansive, could eventually escape the protection of the Immortal Realm and stand alone amidst chaos. In that case, forming their own realm, wouldn¡¯t they have completely escaped the control of the Heavenly Path? Perhaps this is why so many Heavenly Immortals turned into homebodies, maybe for this very reason. With rumors as a foundation, and with the personal experience of growing and strengthening their own small worlds as a factual support. For those Heavenly Immortals who lack other choices, this path, although it has no visible end, also because it has no end, always maintains the hope of success. This path to transcendence, just having this is enough. It is enough to move countless Heavenly Immortals. ¡°So, what I need to do now,¡± he said, ¡°is to start preparing to isolate the peaceful domain from the Immortal Realm. This step isn¡¯t too difficult. In fact, within the peaceful domain, there is the isolation formation array left by the fallen Changqing Immortal which is still operational. Even these isolation arrays were not created by Changqing Immortal but were left by the former Nine Spirits Celestial Noble; the latter merely inherited the legacy. I just need to follow in the footsteps of the predecessors, modify this formation array a bit, and take control into my own hands, and it can be used immediately.¡± Lu Yuan reflected upon his conquest of Changqing Mountain, plundering various books and inheritances from within it, which included descriptions of such formation arrays cutting off the domain from the Immortal Realm. This was not any big secret. In the Immortal Realm, any Grand Fairy Door with a bit of historical legacy would more or less be privy to these secrets. The methods to become a Heavenly Immortal were common knowledge among many Earth Immortals. ¡°So, a method of isolation isn¡¯t key. After separating the domain from the Immortal Realm, how to gather one¡¯s own Dao Fruits from the hands of the Heavenly Path and concentrate them within the formation array. At the same time, using one¡¯s own Dao Fruits to permeate the domain, transforming a large area into one¡¯s own practice ground, and completely seizing control. Finally, relying on the Great Domain to create a piece of Cave World as a vessel for the Dao Fruits. These three steps are key to achieving the status of a Heavenly Immortal.¡± Lu Yuan pondered over the cases of numerous Grand cultivators in the Immortal Realm who had attempted to ascend to Heavenly Immortal over the years, his expression growing solemn. Chapter 1546 - Chapter 1546 Chapter 600 The Three Trials of the Heavenly Immortal ?Chapter 1546: Chapter 600 The Three Trials of the Heavenly Immortal Chapter 1546: Chapter 600 The Three Trials of the Heavenly Immortal ¡°According to the information I¡¯ve gathered, nine out of ten grand cultivators are stopped at the first barrier, that is, the process of collecting their own Dao Fruits from the Heavenly Path and concentrating them in one region,¡± Lu Yuan analyzed the problem at hand. The reason for failure at this first barrier is not that retrieving one¡¯s own Dao Fruit from the Heavenly Path is exceedingly difficult. In reality, it isn¡¯t difficult at all. How vast is the Heavenly Path? Though the Dao Fruits refined by cultivators are recorded in the hands of the Heavenly Path, they are, after all, just recorded by name. It¡¯s like a farmer planting a seed in the field and, come next year, harvesting the ripe grain. To the Heavenly Path, each of these Earth Immortals is like a seed that it has sown. All it has to do is to harvest them regularly after the ten-thousand-year period. To think the Heavenly Path would constantly monitor the growth of these seeds and stare at them, preventing them from escaping, is an overconcern. A farmer won¡¯t pay special attention to the growth of a single stalk of rice. Even if one stalk goes missing at harvest time, the farmer mostly wouldn¡¯t care. They would simply think that this stalk of rice spoiled during growth or died on its own. The same principle applies to the Heavenly Path. Therefore, for some grand cultivators who wish to secretly take back their own stalk of rice, it¡¯s not very difficult. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.?¦Ï Just be a little cautious, don¡¯t be too showy as a thief, and basically, you won¡¯t draw the attention of the Heavenly Path or be discovered. The issue is that the realm of late-stage Earth Immortals, although they count as grand cultivators, still has limited capacity. To a Dao Fruit, they are akin to ants. Previously, by borrowing the power of the Heavenly Path, an ant could move this Dao Fruit, bringing out its might. Now, if you don¡¯t rely on the Heavenly Path and want to move a Dao Fruit with your own strength, it¡¯s extremely difficult, nearly impossible. To accomplish this, you have to chip away bit by bit, moving the Great Tao within your own capability. To use an analogy, it¡¯s like an ant not trying to move a whole stalk of rice at once but instead moving a single grain at a time, breaking the entire stalk into countless pieces and moving it bit by bit. Such small movements are less likely to catch the attention of the Heavenly Path. They also remain within one¡¯s capacity to endure, without the risk of bursting oneself. Though convenient, this method greatly lengthens the time required. Moving an entire stalk of rice at once might only take several decades. But moving countless grains of rice, the total time expended naturally multiplies by tens or hundreds of times. To the best of Lu Yuan¡¯s knowledge, within the Donghua Continent and several surrounding regions, the record for the fastest grand cultivator to complete this step took one thousand and twenty-three years. And that grand cultivator was a rare Chosen One of the continent, seen only once in a million years. In the end, he achieved the status of Great True Person, but now a million years have passed, and that Heavenly Immortal has long since fallen. Such cases, therefore, are bound to be exceptional and cannot be replicated. ¡°Excluding these once-in-a-million-years Chosen Ones, the remaining examples, the slightly faster ones, also take two thousand years. The slower ones take three thousand years. Some never even complete this step before their lifespan is exhausted. Because most grand cultivators are already seven or eight thousand years old by the late-stage Earth Immortal achievement. At such an advanced age, they simply do not have enough lifespan to push through this first barrier. The reason most grand cultivators are stopped is their breakthrough comes too late, and they lack the necessary remaining lifespan.¡± At this thought, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help feeling fortunate. ¡°Luckily, all along my path of cultivation, I¡¯ve followed the route of Qi Luck, and my progress has been extremely fast. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Now that I¡¯ve broken through to grand cultivator, I¡¯m just over three thousand years old, absolutely too youthful among my peers. Even in the entire Immortal Realm, cases like mine are a rarity, let alone on the Donghua Continent where I¡¯ve never heard of such. So, even if my pace at this barrier is the slowest, taking three thousand years to collect Dao Fruits, that would only consume less than half of my remaining Heavenly Path lifespan. Afterward, I still have four thousand years to continue breaking through the remaining two barriers.¡± It must be said that the longevity Dao Fruit and the Way of Control Pneuma have allowed Lu Yuan to exploit a loophole of the Heavenly Path. The restriction of lifespan for Earth Immortals by the Heavenly Path doesn¡¯t account for how many times an Earth Immortal uses the Life-Burning Secret Art to advance consume their lifespan, depleting the ten-thousand-year cap and then taking their life early. It simply sets a fixed quota; you can only live up to ten thousand years in the world. Exceed that limit, and your life will be taken. And if it¡¯s less than ten thousand years, no matter how many secret techniques you¡¯ve used or how much actual lifespan you¡¯ve consumed, even if it surpasses the ten-thousand-year limit, it¡¯s none of the Heavenly Path¡¯s concern. It¡¯s just like planting a seed and then agreeing to harvest it regularly after ten thousand years. How this seed grows during its life, how outstanding it becomes, whether it matures and dies earlya€¡±all of this is of no concern to the Heavenly Path. So even if you use the Life-Burning Secret Art and your actual lifespan extends beyond ten thousand years, as long as you can replenish what you¡¯ve lost, the Heavenly Path won¡¯t interfere. Just don¡¯t exceed the run cycle of ten thousand years. Lu Yuan refers to this predetermined lifespan as the Heavenly Path lifespan. Chapter 1547 - Chapter 1547 Chapter 600 Heavenly Immortal Three Challenges_2 ?Chapter 1547: Chapter 600 Heavenly Immortal Three Challenges_2 Chapter 1547: Chapter 600 Heavenly Immortal Three Challenges_2 It was precisely because of such a mechanical and rigid mechanism that he found room to maneuver. To be frank, the actual lifespan Lu Yuan had consumed along his cultivation journey had long exceeded ten thousand years. He had practiced for three thousand years, yet the actual lifespan expended, even after his later cultivation increased and his resistance to the Way of Qi Luck greatly improved, was relatively less. Still, the lifespan he had ultimately lost was around twenty thousand years. By heavenly standards, he should have long been dead. But the heavenly path does not concern itself with actual lifespan, so even though he had lost more than the ten thousand year threshold, relying on the replenishment of the longevity Dao Fruit, he was still lively and excessively youthful. Even by combining the Way of Qi Luck with the longevity Dao Fruit, he had broken through to become a grand cultivator in merely three thousand years, saving himself a vast amount of heavenly lifespan in the process. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï Those grand cultivators in the Immortal Realm, even those with exceptional innate talent, like the Great True Person mentioned before who took a thousand years to pass the first stage. Generally, their breakthrough to grand cultivator status would also exceed five thousand years. More ordinary geniuses often break through at six or seven thousand years of age. For even more average individuals, it is seven or eight thousand years before they break through, or they only do so at the brink of death. Lu Yuan did it in just three thousand years, a pace undoubtedly surpassing countless predecessors. This afforded him a great deal of flexibility for later maneuvers. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 ¡°After breaking through the first stage and retrieving the Dao Fruit, what remained was to use the Dao Fruit to infiltrate the Immortal Realm inversely, to wrest control of a domain from the hands of the heavenly path. This control is key to a cultivator¡¯s future leverage of the Dao Fruit. Without the assistance of the heavenly path, for a grand cultivator to control their own Dao Fruit is like an ant trying to shake a tree, utterly overestimating oneself. Thus, even though they have reclaimed their Dao Fruit, restricted by their own capabilities, they cannot directly control it. At this time, if they wish to continue harnessing the power of the Dao Fruit, they must employ a new channel to leverage its strength. This channel is the Great Domain seized from the Immortal Realm. Harnessing the power of Formation Methods, feel the connection between the Great Domain and the Immortal Realm, then use the force of the formations to mobilize the entire domain, and with the realm¡¯s power pry open the Dao Fruit, thus harnessing its power. In specific terms, the process involves using a Formation Method to transform the Great Domain into a war chariot, and then use the stolen Dao Fruit as the engine¡¯s energy source, with the grand cultivator as the driver of the chariot. After such a conversion, as long as the chariot stands, meaning the structure of the Great Domain remains intact, the grand cultivator can continually harness the power of the Dao Fruit, propelling the chariot in the desired direction. Hence, the second stage involves constructing a chariot of one¡¯s own, and then making this chariot gradually compatible with the energy of the Dao Fruit, inciting it to burn fuel or conduct electricity as intended, achieving a harmony between the two. Otherwise, an oil vehicle conducting electricity or an electric vehicle burning oil would result in nothing other than both the vehicle and its occupant perishing. This stage, in its difficulty, is in fact not too greata€¡±the primary concern is attentiveness. Step by step, through careful trial and error adjustments, one can always match the chariot to the energy source, allowing the Dao Fruit and the Great Domain¡¯s formations to adapt and fuse with one another, becoming unified. This process is also time-consuming and without shortcuts. On the Immortal Realm¡¯s side, just like the first stage, the Chosen one would need to spend a thousand years, a regular genius two thousand years, and an average person three thousand years.¡± The process for a grand cultivator to break through to Heavenly Immortal is, overall, just as monotonous and tediousa€¡±rarely involving any clever tricksa€¡±highlighted by the passage of time. But it is this passage of time that stops more than ninety-nine percent of grand cultivators. Not to mention the Chosen one encountered once in a million years who can complete two stages in two thousand yearsa€¡±which really lacks relevance. Consider the more ordinary once in ten thousand or one hundred thousand years geniuses; to break through two stages would require two thousand plus another two thousand years, at the very least totaling four thousand years to complete. This step alone is beyond the reach of many average grand cultivators. Those who only reached grand cultivator status at six or seven thousand years old simply do not possess enough heavenly lifespan to complete both stages. Even finishing the first stage is already a minority achievement. Those who complete both are an even smaller minority; perhaps only two or three out of a hundred grand cultivators can do so. The method to break through to Heavenly Immortal is laid out for all to see, available for anyone to attempt. Yet precisely because the conditions are laid bare, so many grand cultivators are driven to despair. ¡°` ¡°I have about seven thousand years of Heavenly Dao Lifespan left, and even if I proceeded at the breakthrough speed of an ordinary Grand Cultivator, it would take at most six thousand years to wear down two barriers. Of course, I possess the Longevity Dao Fruit; with this readily available Dao Fruit as aid, whether it¡¯s stealing back the Qi Luck Taiping Dao Fruit I am currently cultivating from the Heavenly Path, or assisting the Qi Luck Dao Fruit and the Taiping Domain to match, the process and speed will be much stronger than those ordinary Earth Immortals without any foundation. So, even if my innate talent is somewhat lacking, my final speed should at least be on par with those once-in-ten-thousand-years geniuses, managing to complete these two steps in four or five thousand years. In the end, I should still have two to three thousand years left to attempt the final barrier. That is, to create a Cave World to harbor the Dao Fruit.¡± Possessing a Longevity Dao Fruit as a reliance, Lu Yuan undoubtedly had many advantages at the starting phase compared to those Earth Immortals without any foundation. This was also where his confidence in challenging for the status of Heavenly Immortal lay. After all, for ordinary Earth Immortals, even for those Chosen ones who appear only once in a million years, by the time they reach the third barrier, they would have only two to three thousand years of Heavenly Dao Lifespan left. By relying on the Longevity Dao Fruit, to be able to compare with those Chosen ones is already very impressive. Keep in mind that those Chosen ones, those who reach the level of Grand Cultivator and rely on their own immense innate talent, basically all achieve the status of Heavenly Immortal with ease. For Lu Yuan to have such conditions, his own chances of becoming a Heavenly Immortal are much stronger than those Grand Cultivators beneath the Chosen ones. With such favorable conditions, what is there not to be content with? Even if he failed along the way, he still had the fallback of the Longevity Dao Grains and a second chance to attempt ascension. This was akin to being able to reload a save in a game; as a player, Lu Yuan¡¯s mentality and confidence far surpassed that of Grand Cultivators who had only one chance. ¡°The third barrier, creating a Cave World to harbor the Dao Fruit, is actually akin to creating an engine to extract the power of the Dao Fruit, providing energy to the war chariot. The so-called harboring of the Dao Fruit is but a method to stably acquire the power of the Dao Fruit. Also, by creating a Cave World, there is the function of isolating the induction of the Heavenly Path so that it does not discover the existence of the Dao Fruit. The Cave World is a structure that not only blocks the signal induction but also stably extracts energy, acting as an aid for the war chariot, allowing the Cultivator to steal and control the core of the Dao Fruit. Only by using a Cave World to harbor the Dao Fruit can one use the power of a small world to block the induction of the Heavenly Path. Only then can one use the power of a small world to manipulate the power of the Dao Fruit. It is only at this third step of breaking through to become a Heavenly Immortal, the creation of the Cave World, that true skill and difficulty are required. Creating a world, even if it is a small world, is still an act of creation. Even with supports like the Formation Method and the Dao Fruit, and with the backing of the Immortal Realm, it is not something easily accomplished. At this step, only those with overflowing innate talent can create a Cave World. Even for those Chosen ones who appear only once in a million years, they too face the possibility of failure in this act of creation. Those who had passed the first two barriers and defeated ninety-nine percent of their peers, when they reach this step, still more than ninety percent are stopped in their tracks. Especially those with insufficient lifespan, pressured by time, who can only hastily attempt to create a world with inadequate preparation, are doomed to achieve less than satisfactory results. They can only rely on luck, hoping to fortunately succeed. And even if they do succeed by chance, the resulting small world will have grave defects and hidden dangers. The early demise of many Great True Persons is mostly due to their imperfectly created Cave Worlds that cannot harbor the Dao Fruit for long, eventually causing it to fall out of the small world, be discovered by the Heavenly Path, and end with resentment. Thus, this step is the most perilous. The one thing worth being grateful for is that when I reach this step, I will have ample time. With two to three thousand years to spare, I have enough time to slowly plan for creation, unlike those Grand Cultivators with little lifespan who have to start trying without any preparation at all. Just on this point alone, the Cave World I create will have a much higher success rate and also be more perfect, capable of sustaining the Dao Fruit for a much longer time.¡± The three barriers to becoming a Heavenly Immortal, lifespan may not be the sole criterion, but it is absolutely the most important one. Without lifespan, even a Chosen one is like a skilled woman unable to cook without rice. With this, Lu Yuan has already inherently surpassed many Grand Cultivators. ¡°` Chapter 1548 - Chapter 1548 Chapter 601 Cultivation Charm ?Chapter 1548: Chapter 601 Cultivation Charm Chapter 1548: Chapter 601 Cultivation Charm ¡°` ¡°And there¡¯s my longevity Dao Fruit, now that I¡¯m a grand cultivator, I can mobilize some of the Dao Fruit¡¯s power. When the time comes to retrieve the Taiping Tao Fruit, that will be two Dao Fruits. With the power of two Dao Fruits, creating a Cave World, my starting foundation will be twice as strong as other grand cultivatorsa€¡±an effect that is more than the sum of its parts. The success rate could also be doubled at least. This final challenge in creating the world should not become an obstacle for me, and I should be able to smoothly overcome it.¡± Lu Yuan analyzed the three challenges of becoming a Heavenly Immortal and couldn¡¯t help but breathe a sigh of relief. Having an extra longevity Dao Fruit from the start was like being born in Rome. Certainly much stronger than those cultivators born as mules. Even now, at the stage of becoming a Heavenly Immortal, the golden finger brought with me through time travel still played a huge role. Though by now, he had started to doubt whether his so-called time travel was even real? After all, Lu Yuan¡¯s longevity Dao Fruit seemed to be an original product of the Immortal Realm. It was something that simply couldn¡¯t be connected with his previous life on Earth. But this secret of his origins was still far from him. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??0.§ã? Before becoming a Heavenly Immortal, he temporarily didn¡¯t have the energy to delve into it. For now, all he could do was keep it in mind, acting as if he hadn¡¯t noticed anything. The urgent task at hand was to quickly overcome the three challenges of becoming a Heavenly Immortal before the Heavenly Path reclaimed his Dao Fruit, to step out of its control and become a Heavenly Immortal first. He currently still had the opportunity, much stronger than those grand cultivators who could only gaze at the three challenges in despair. With such an opportunity at hand, if he still didn¡¯t strive hard and ended up failing, he would surely regret it endlessly in his heart. No one who could succeed the first time would ever want to try a second time. The taste of failure was not pleasant to endure. ¡­ Time flowed, and in the blink of an eye, it was time for Lu Yuan¡¯s celebration as a grand cultivator. Given Taiping Dao¡¯s current status, as School Leader, the implications of Lu Yuan¡¯s breakthrough to grand cultivator were self-evident. To everyone paying attention to Taiping Dao, it was almost as if they were saying that Taiping Dao now had a potential Heavenly Immortal. A grand cultivator already had a complete Dao Fruit, no different from that of a Heavenly Immortal, the only difference being the extent of control. Lu Yuan reaching this realm signified that he was now qualified to strive for Heavenly Immortal. Especially given School Leader Lu¡¯s age, which left the world in astonishment. As Taiping Dao rose to prominence, Lu Yuan, the most celebrated and distinguished School Leader in the sect¡¯s history, naturally drew most of the attention from outsiders. Therefore, his origin was no secret after being investigated by those with ulterior motives. Simply by clarifying his identity as a cultivator who ascended from the Nine Provinces, and then estimating Zhen Xuan¡¯s actual age, one could easily deduce School Leader Lu¡¯s true age. He was just over three thousand. Such a terrifying age was enough to make one cluck one¡¯s tongue and even drop one¡¯s jaw in amazement. Looking across the entire Donghua Continent, whether there was anyone like him in ancient times is unclear, but certainly, in the recorded history, there had been no one as young as Lu Yuan to reach the grand cultivator realm. Now that such an individual has suddenly emerged, how could it not cause shock and even fear among the world? Even though everyone was aware that School Leader Lu cultivated the Fortune Dao, the rapid speed of his cultivation definitely consumed a significant amount of his innate lifespan. His actual lifespan loss was probably around five to six thousand years, maybe even more. The Way of Control Pneuma burns lifespan and seems to exploit a loophole in the Heavenly Path. But such a loophole is not something just anyone can exploit. Your lifespan is reduced, although it can be partially recovered through cultivation of various Longevity Secret Methods and the consumption of longevity treasures. But whether it¡¯s the various Longevity Secret Methods or longevity treasures, they either have strict conditions or are limited in quantity, and even can¡¯t be reused. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Even for someone of Lu Yuan¡¯s caliber, as the master of an Overlord Immortal Sect and ruler of a region, who can mobilize countless resources for his use, After his lifespan reduction, according to outsiders¡¯ estimations of Taiping Dao, at best he could only regain a thousand years of lifespan, any more would be too much even for an Immortal Sect to bear. In the Donghua Continent, there is the Radiant Immortal Dynasty, the most apparent example for reference. As an Immortal Sect that also specializes in the cultivation of the Fortune Dao, the foundations of the Radiant Immortal Dynasty in the Immortal Realm run deeper, with a history spanning tens of thousands of years. Moreover, as an Immortal Sect that specializes in the cultivation of the Way of Control Pneuma, the cultivators of the Radiant Immortal Dynasty have a massive demand for longevity. The effort and cost they put into researching and cultivating various Longevity Secret Methods and longevity treasures far exceed those of other Immortal Sects. Naturally, the foundation of longevity of such an Immortal Sect goes without saying. Yet even such a sect, specializing in longevity, the historical Immortal Emperors of the Radiant Immortal Dynasty were generally grand cultivators. But the highest recorded Immortal Emperor only managed to recover eight hundred and twenty-one years of lifespan after the loss due to Fortune Dao. Now, Lu Yuan with his extraordinary innate talent, is clearly stronger than any of the historical Immortal Emperors of the Radiant Immortal Dynasty. Taiping Dao also controls an entire region and can mobilize more resources than the Radiant Immortal Dynasty. Plus, considering the relationship between the two, he could receive some help from the Radiant Immortal Dynasty and obtain a large number of longevity treasures and Secret Techniques. But even with all these advantages accounted for, in outsiders¡¯ views, Lu Yuan at best could extend his lifespan by a thousand yearsa€¡±any more than that would be virtually impossible. ¡°` Chapter 1549 - Chapter 1549 Chapter 601 Cultivation Charm_2 ?Chapter 1549: Chapter 601 Cultivation Charm_2 Chapter 1549: Chapter 601 Cultivation Charm_2 But even if he could only regain a thousand years of lifespan, for a Grand cultivator, having an extra thousand years was an unimaginable opportunity. Taking into account Lu Yuan¡¯s remaining lifespan, outsiders estimated that this Taiping Dao School Leader should still have three to four thousand years to strive for Heavenly Immortal status. The three barriers to becoming a Heavenly Immortal, in the nearby Donghua Continent, take a thousand years each to break through at the quickest. Of course, such speed was undoubtedly reserved for the Chosen ones. The problem was, in the eyes of outsiders, even if by using some cunning methods, Lu Yuan becoming a Grand cultivator in three thousand years was a defiance of the heavens. Throughout ancient and modern times, those who achieved such a feat were none other than the Chosen ones. And each Chosen one who managed to reach the step of Grand cultivator, in the end, nearly all achieved Heavenly Immortal status. Therefore, Lu Yuan = Chosen one = Heavenly Immortal; such an equation was easily concluded in most people¡¯s hearts. A character like a Chosen one, who had also reached the step of Grand cultivator and had the support of an Immortal Sect that dominated a region, along with countless allies to provide assistance, All these conditions combined, it looked like the standard template for a great being¡¯s rise. If he couldn¡¯t become a Heavenly Immortal, then that truly defied all reason, baffling everyone. Bathed in endless auras and the focus of outsiders, Lu Yuan was already equivalent to a Heavenly Immortal. Naturally, no one dared to offend a Heavenly Immortal. Although the other party had not yet achieved that status, it was only a matter of time; perhaps in another three thousand years, the Donghua Continent would gain another Great True Person. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï By then, facing this Taiping Immortal Venerate, if one had offended him at this time, and he sought retribution later, even if one had a Great True Person as a backing, most likely one would not survive. To a Great True Person, disciples and followers were merely hopes. When they secluded themselves for tens of thousands of years, their disciples below would die off in many generations. To such beings, the so-called disciples and successors were no different from mayflies in human eyes, lives that were to die within a single day. And peers of the same level as Great True People were those who could compete in longevity with oneself, who could truly be called ¡°people¡± in the same sense as oneself. When a person approached you, and that person was also your neighbor, then made a request saying, ¡°I want to crush a bug in your house because it bit me.¡± Would anyone refuse? Upon weighing the pros and cons for just a moment, no Great True Person would refuse. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Therefore, even with the support of an Immortal Sect that has achieved Heavenly Immortal, when facing a Great True Person, one must consider the consequences carefully. You have to think whether your own Great True Person would be willing to make an enemy of a peer for you, For a mere bug that existed for only a moment in your own life, to offend a potential lifelong enemy. Just this point alone, the so-called Great True Person backing becomes utterly meaningless. And without a backing, bereft of support, how many would dare to provoke a Great True Person? Once Lu Yuan released the news of his breakthrough as a Grand cultivator, the deterrent effect was undoubtedly like that of a nuclear bomb. Everybody knew that even if the other party had a nuclear bomb, they currently couldn¡¯t reach them directly; at best, they could only be invincible within their own territory, impenetrable to outsiders. But no one dared to wager that in three to five thousand years, the other party wouldn¡¯t develop missile technology, and that nuclear bomb wouldn¡¯t be dropped at their own doorstep alongside a missile. Lu Yuan¡¯s breakthrough as a Grand cultivator was like having a nuclear bomb. Before his success, or failure in the breakthrough, no one wanted to come knocking to test the might of the nuclear bomb. Neither did anyone want to offend him during this period and invite a formidable enemy they could not contend with. Thus, in an instant. When the celebration was successfully held, and Lu Yuan, in the presence of many Messengers from the Immortal Sects, exhibited his Cultivation as a Grand cultivator, there was even a long silence on the spot for a time. Even though they had known about the news in advance and had prepared their hearts, The shock brought by hearing and seeing firsthand was completely different. For the many Messengers, experiencing Lu Yuan¡¯s suffocating momentum and seeing his excessively young face, along with his vitality-filled breath, All served to constantly remind them that he was an extremely young, yet terrifyingly powerful being. Witnessing such a Chosen one before their very eyes, whether as seniors, peers, or juniors, the pressure in the hearts of the many Messengers was self-evident. On that day¡¯s celebration, countless people, regardless of their true feelings, put on smiles and respectfully offered their congratulations. Then they pulled out all the stops, beginning to ingratiate themselves with Lu Yuan. Those who had past grudges spared no effort to resolve them, even if it meant paying a steep price. Those without past grievances offered up valuable gifts, which could not be refused; they came fawning over him as if their lives depended on it. Those who had always been on good terms also presented costly gifts, all the while reminiscing about old times to reinforce their bonds. Those great personages who had seemed untouchable to the lowest-level cultivators, were now prostrating before Lu Yuan, becoming the ones they once overlooked, eagerly groveling to someone who would soon become an unreachable and exalted Great True Person. There was no helping it. Now everyone was a True Immortal, an Earth Immortal, or a grand cultivator, and it was still possible for them, in front of Lu Yuan, who was also still a grand cultivator, to barely manage a conversation with a fellow Daoist. But wait three to five thousand years, when he will have risen high and achieved the status of a Great True Person, then among the gathering today, who among them would dare to seek rapport with a Heavenly Immortal? Do you think you¡¯re worthy? An insignificant existence akin to a worm, using your fleeting one-day lifespan to relate to a human being who could live a hundred years? It¡¯s laughable to even think about it. In a single day, even the most sentimental person, who might treat a worm as a pet, would hardly have time to build a connection, would they? Why not take advantage now, while everyone is on the same level, before thoughts and perspectives shift, to strengthen relationships? Once someone undergoes a life-altering leap, there won¡¯t even be an opportunity to forge those ties. Thus, this strange scene unfolded. After having witnessed Lu Yuan¡¯s strength firsthand, the Taiping Dao, once universally reviled over the past three hundred years, everyone¡¯s enemy, suddenly became everyone¡¯s source of praise and camaraderie. One Immortal Sect after another hustled to curry favor with Lu Yuan. In front of these people, Lu Yuan merely hinted at his annoyance with the troublemaking demons and evil cultivators. The many envoys of the Immortal Sects immediately beat their chests in solidarity. Such demonic heretics are a great evil in the Immortal Realm. How could they let them run rampant and tarnish the righteous path? Once they returned, they swiftly mobilized their sect¡¯s forces and manpower to join forces with Taiping Dao to exterminate those heretics. The change in strength and status brought with it benefits that, during the celebration, came knocking on their door. This is why, in the Immortal Realm, countless cultivators exhaust every effort and even if they know they cannot break through, still strive to enhance their cultivation. Because all cultivators understand that even the slightest improvement in cultivation will immediately bring them benefits within the Immortal Realm, perhaps even more than they expect. The allure of cultivation was evident at this moment. The celebration lasted only three short days, and Lu Yuan, citing the need to stabilize his cultivation after a recent breakthrough, took leave and did not appear again. But no one took issue with that. The powerful always have their privileges, and every action, even those that defy the rules, tends to be interpreted favorably. They just regretted not being able to get closer to School Leader Lu, even if just for a bit longer, even if only to speak a few more words. To be remembered by him, to gain some familiarity, could prove useful later on and would bring them great fortune. With the protagonist gone, this grand cultivator celebration did not continue for much longer. After a seven-day stay, completing a ten-day visit, the envoys began to leave one after another. And once the celebration ended, and everyone had gone back, all the Immortal Sects started to act on their promises to Lu Yuan. Throughout the Donghua Continent, thousands of Immortal Sects banded together and promptly launched a vigorous campaign to eradicate demons and uphold the Dao Law. Lu Yuan¡¯s impressive display of Divine Powers, making its debut, gave the cultivators of the Donghua Continent a minor shock within the Immortal Realm. Chapter 1550 - Chapter 1550 Chapter 602 Retrieving the Dao Fruit ?Chapter 1550: Chapter 602: Retrieving the Dao Fruit Chapter 1550: Chapter 602: Retrieving the Dao Fruit To give face to Taiping Dao and please the future Great True Person, the Immortal Sects of the Donghua Continent really went all out. Faced with the onslaught from so many Immortal Alliances, the monsters and demons, as well as the evil cultivators and demonic leaders who used to wield power in some chaotic and remote areas, immediately met with disaster. Even Yang Jihua, a remnant of the Qing Immortal Sect, was surrounded and purged by some who wished to curry favor with Taiping Dao or were eager to cut ties with their past comrades. This time, with insiders leading the way, Yang Jihua¡¯s various strongholds throughout the Donghua Continent no longer had any place to hide. With the cooperation of the local forces, these remnants were quickly eradicated. Even Yang Jihua himself was ambushed and attacked on several occasions, barely escaping traps that nearly cost him his life. If it weren¡¯t for the significant heritage he carried from the Qing Immortal Sect and his shrewdness, he might not have survived. But even having escaped the pursuit, he dared not linger in the Donghua Continent any longer. Despite his resentment, he ultimately had no choice but to take dozens of his fellow disciples and flee to another continent, leaving behind this place of sorrow. The issue that had plagued Taiping Dao and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate for hundreds of years was thus temporarily resolved. If it were to arise again, it would not be until tens of thousands of years later. At this time, Lu Yuan could finally stop worrying about this issue and focus on his cultivation, sprinting on his path to becoming a Heavenly Immortal. The three barriers to becoming a Heavenly Immortal are each difficult to overcome. Take the first barrier, for example, gathering Dao Fruits from the Heavenly Path is a laborious task. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï Gathering Dao Fruits wasn¡¯t too difficult for Lu Yuan, though. He only tried a few times and successfully gathered the first thread of the Great Tao, achieving a good start without encountering any difficulties. This confirmed that the first barrier, as recorded in legends, was not very difficult; it merely required perseverance. Regarding the scrutiny of the Heavenly Path, after observing for a while, Lu Yuan realized that in the vast Immortal Realm, his Dao Fruit was like a drop in the ocean. To stealthily take this drop, he chose to move it in batches, thus minimizing the commotion. Under such circumstances, as long as he was careful, there was no need to worry about being discovered. If the Heavenly Path did catch him, then one would have to consider whether there was an issue on their part. Whether it was bad luck or being too showy. In any case, given Lu Yuan¡¯s cautious nature, he didn¡¯t need to worry about safety issues. Compared to security concerns, what he should consider more was the issue of efficiency. After several trials of transporting Dao Fruits, Lu Yuan had come up with a rough estimate of his efficiency. Each transport of the Dao Fruit, including the initial observation, selection and division of the Dao Fruit, the choice of transport route, and the speed etcetera, took roughly three months. With each transport, he moved about one ten-thousandth of the entire Dao Fruit. ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã¦Ï This amount was the most suitable volume for him, determined after experimental testing within the limit of his capabilities. Therefore, four times a year, one ten-thousandth each time, it would take approximately two thousand five hundred years to transport the entire Dao Fruit. Hmm, alright, this timeframe is quite consistent with Lu Yuan¡¯s modest talent. Contrary to outside speculation, Lu Yuan was no Chosen one; he was merely a cultivator with ordinary aptitude. In fact, according to common sense, someone with his mediocre abilities should not have reached this step, not even becoming a True Immortal. Lu Yuan¡¯s arrival at this point was all thanks to exploiting the system and his own efforts. So, although his innate talent was lacking, based on this efficiency and his remaining seven thousand years of Lifespan, he had sufficient time to grind through the three barriers. Of course, in actual execution, Lu Yuan would definitely not take so long to break through the first barrier. After all, he had only recently broken through to become a Grand cultivator. At this realm, it is simply said that one¡¯s realm has reached its limit, and unless one breaks through to Heavenly Immortal, there can be no further growth. However, this doesn¡¯t mean that Lu Yuan¡¯s Cultivation cannot be improved. In the Immortal Realm, realm is realm, Cultivation is Cultivation, Divine Soul is Divine Soul, Divine Powers are Divine Powers; although interconnected, these aspects cannot be broadly generalized. Lu Yuan¡¯s breakthrough merely meant his realm had reached its limit. Yet, his Magic Power, Divine Soul Immortal Body, Divine Powers, and Immortal treasures, among other aspects, experienced a rapid growth period after the realm breakthrough. Once these areas grow to their limits, which is the maximum capacity of the current realm, Lu Yuan¡¯s Strength is expected to increase by more than twice compared to now. With a bit of luck, it could even triple. After he grows stronger, when Lu Yuan resumes transporting Dao Fruits, both the speed and volume per transport will naturally increase significantly. Even if it does not match the rate of increase in Strength, doubling or tripling, it would still mean doubled efficiency. Of course, a normal Grand cultivator would take about four to five thousand years to reach this peak state, only achieving this Strength before the arrival of their ten-thousand-year Lifespan. This is consistent with the basic principle of the Immortal Realm that the older one gets, the stronger they become. But let¡¯s not forget, which path is Lu Yuan on? It is none other than the Fortune Dao, notorious for its costly demands on life. Having spent his life¡¯s Qi Luck, if the speed of Cultivation was not fast, that would simply be wasting it. With Lu Yuan¡¯s actually infinite lifespan, as long as he is not limited, using the Way of Control Pneuma, Cultivating to his current limit would only take about a thousand years. Chapter 1551 - Chapter 1551 Chapter 602 Retrieving the Dao Fruit_2 ?Chapter 1551: Chapter 602: Retrieving the Dao Fruit_2 Chapter 1551: Chapter 602: Retrieving the Dao Fruit_2 ¡°`html Faster, even in six or seven hundred years, it could be achieved. The speed of the Life Burning Technique is indeed this fast. Therefore, to reach his peak state, Lu Yuan just needed to use the Life Burning Technique. He didn¡¯t have to, like other grand cultivators, rely on time to slowly increase his cultivation strength. At most, he¡¯d wait a millennium, and his current efficiency would double. By then, the span of two thousand five hundred years could be shortened to just seventeen or eighteen hundred years. This was only the first barrier where one needed to accumulate strength over time. Upon reaching the second barrier, once Lu Yuan achieved his peak state, it would take just twelve or thirteen hundred years to grind through it. The efficiency would be even faster. Moreover, Lu Yuan was still a novice; he had only just begun to transport the Dao Fruit a few times for verification purposes. Once he became skilled with more experience from hundreds of thousands of transports, his efficiency would naturally increase even further. The more one does something, the more proficient one becomes. By that time, the period it would take to accomplish tasks might even be further reduced by a few hundred years. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? Calculating this way, the time Lu Yuan needed to break through one barrier might indeed be compressed to around a thousand years. This speed, it seems, is not much different from the Chosen ones who emerge once every million years as told in legends. Just thinking about it, Lu Yuan could guess that once the speed of his breakthroughs spread, the rumors within Donghua Continent about him being a Chosen one would become more firmly established and convince more people. This truly was¡­ beyond words. Fortunately, such rumors weren¡¯t a bad thing for him. Being confirmed as a Chosen one, the deterrence he posed to outsiders became stronger. The more afraid of him the outsiders were, the less likely they would dare make a move against Taiping Dao, and the more peaceful his life would be. No matter how one looked at it, this was a good thing. Therefore, besides expressing a bit of emotion, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t pay much attention to these matters. Of course, it made him happy to have a quick breakthrough speed. Even though he had a lifespan of seven thousand years and could afford to take it slower to break through the three barriers, being able to break through earlier, or to clear the earlier barriers sooner to have more time and options for creating his own Cave World, was beneficial. ¡°Given the current pace, after I improve my strength and experience, grinding through the first two barriers will probably take about two thousand five hundred years, at most not exceeding three thousand years. So, the time left for me to break through the third barrier, which is to create a Cave World, should be over four thousand years. With four thousand years to create a world, there probably aren¡¯t many within the Immortal Realm who have such an allowance; if not just me, then it won¡¯t exceed the number of fingers on two hands. With such ample time, even though I can¡¯t compare with those Chosen ones in innate talent, unable to instantly create a world through enlightenment, relying on time to gradually refine the plan, trying several times, preparing multiple schemes, I should also be able to create a Cave World, right?¡± Having concluded yet another Dao Fruit transport, Lu Yuan was resting and reflecting on the problems of breaking barriers, pondering thus. For the three barriers to Heavenly Immortality, the first two could be ground through with time. So, he was not in a panic. But the third barrier would test one¡¯s talent and the elusive luck. Unfortunately, Lu Yuan had never been confident in his own talent. It couldn¡¯t be helped. Anyone who had always been of average innate talent, a mediocre figure compared to geniuses, would naturally feel insecure. Lu Yuan was still doing better. With the support of longevity Dao Fruit and the Way of Qi Luck, his confidence was much stronger than that of most average figures. But for some grand cultivators without his conditions, reaching this step and facing those three barriers of Heavenly Immortality, they would probably be downright distressed. Therefore, in terms of innate talent, Lu Yuan was never confident. Thus, regarding his ability to create a Cave World, he also lacked assurance, still within the realm of uncertainty. Fortunately, though doubting his talent, Lu Yuan has always had great confidence in his own luck. If his luck weren¡¯t good, even with cheats, it would be impossible to reach this point, escape from the cage of the Nine Provinces, struggle all the way in the Immortal Realm, and become the master of a domain, a grand cultivator known throughout Donghua. This is not something that can be explained or achieved simply through hard work and cheats. ¡°` Some necessary luck is also indispensable. Lu Yuan reflected on his past and had to admit that his luck, even if it wasn¡¯t the kind favored by heaven, was at least not cursed with bad fortune. Therefore, creating a Cave World should not have any adverse effects due to luck, which gave him some peace of mind. With talent and luck as the two key elements compared, one bad and one good, they could arguably cancel each other out. With these two factors neutralized, what remained to influence his breakthrough was his own solid strength. With the strength of his peak state, he planned over four thousand years, using the simplest method to create the most perfect world. This was Lu Yuan¡¯s strategy for breaking through the third barrier. Whether he would succeed or not, he wasn¡¯t entirely sure, but he was somewhat confident. There are no regrets on the Immortal Path. Having come this far, one would not be content without at least attempting it, no matter what. Everything would depend on what followed. ¡­ Following the path he had planned for himself, Lu Yuan walked steadfastly and diligently. Day after day, he moved the Dao Fruit, and during the transportation, he had to divide his attention to cultivate his magic power and Divine Powers. It was as if he was back in the days when he was still a Hunter, surrounded by dangers in the Field and Jianghu, desperately cultivating to improve his strength for self-protection. No, he was even more desperate than before. Back then, as a mere mortal, cultivating for seven or eight Timing a day was the limit. Any more than that could lead to sudden death, and he had to reserve Time for rest and sleep. But now, he was a Grand cultivator, an Earth Immortal. The sleep that mortals needed, Lu Yuan had long since stopped requiring. He could spend all twelve Timing a day without sleep, using cultivation in place of rest. Then, after cultivating (resting) and regaining his energy, he would immediately get to work and move the Dao Fruit. Under the pressure of a ten-thousand-year Lifespan from the Heavenly Path, Lu Yuan once again felt the crisis of life and death. So, the salted fish that had been idle for over a thousand years began to struggle for survival once again. With his tireless efforts, the efficiency of transporting Dao Fruit naturally increased rapidly. In just six hundred and fifty-one years, Lu Yuan completed the entire Grand cultivator stage of his cultivation, increasing his own Cultivation by 2.8 times compared to when he first broke through, approaching the threefold increase he had initially estimated. Also, after over three thousand rounds of transportation, he became skilled and calculated the most efficient carrying techniques, pushing his personal efficiency to the limit. Both factors combined meant that the Dao Fruit, which initially would have taken two thousand five hundred years to move, ended up only taking one thousand four hundred and seventy-six years for Lu Yuan to fully transport back, wresting control of his Great Tao from the Heavenly Path. At this time, it had been less than one thousand five hundred years since he broke through to Grand cultivator status. In less than one thousand five hundred years, Lu Yuan had already broken through the first barrier of the Heavenly Immortal. Such efficiency, though not as good as the Chosen ones, was impressive indeed. However, adhering to the idea of keeping a low profile, although Lu Yuan had broken through the first barrier, he still chose to quietly make a fortune without showing off too much. It was just the first barrier, after all. There were still the second and third barriers to come. Until the end, until he became a Heavenly Immortal, any achievement gained now was just like foam on the water or the moon reflected in a pond, illusory. Being too ostentatious now, attracting attention, who knows what trouble might come? Lu Yuan, used to being cautious, only planned to give himself a small fifty-year break in response to the joy of breaking through, to allow his body and mind, tired for over a thousand years, to rest well. ?¦Ï??0.§ã¦Ï Then he could start work on breaking through the second barrier. With the mindset prepared to work as an ox or horse before achieving the status of a Heavenly Immortal, Lu Yuan was ready to endure hardship. The saying goes: strive to be an ox or horse, become one, surpass them, and march toward success. That was the way. He didn¡¯t wish to show off, but during his vacation, someone came looking for him. From Dongyang Mountain in the south, Wang ShiZhou, who had not been seen for a long time, came in person, bringing a message from the Great True Person of Dongyang. Chapter 1552 - Chapter 1552 Chapter 603 Ive Been Exposed ?Chapter 1552: Chapter 603 I¡¯ve Been Exposed Chapter 1552: Chapter 603 I¡¯ve Been Exposed Mi Yun Mountain. After Wang ShiZhou arrived, Lu Yuan gave great importance to this esteemed guest, going so far as to specially make an exception to leave his seclusion and meet him. However, after they had both sat down and tea was served, and the other party explained his reason for coming, Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help but be astonished. ¡°Master Shi wants to see me?¡± Lu Yuan looked at Wang ShiZhou, his face full of surprise. ¡°Yes, School Leader Lu, our Immortal Venerate wishes to meet Taoist Lu and has specifically sent me to the peaceful region to extend this invitation,¡± Wang ShiZhou said with certainty, nodding affirmatively. However, with this affirmation, the doubts and hesitations in Lu Yuan¡¯s mind only increased. ¡°Although I have had some interactions with your sect before, they have mainly been friendly relations with Cultivator Wang, and I don¡¯t have much of a connection with the rest of the Dongyang Mountain folks. As for Master Shi, I have only heard of his name and never had the opportunity to meet him. Why would such a person know of me and send you to invite me?¡± Lu Yuan expressed his confusion. ¡°Taoist Lu, you are being too modest.¡± Wang ShiZhou looked at the youthful and handsome School Leader of Taiping Dao standing before him, who still exuded a vibrant aura, and said with a hint of envy, ¡°Taoist Lu is now the prestigious School Leader of Taiping Dao, a ruler of a region, whose status is immensely honorable. Moreover, presently being a Grand Cultivator, your innate talent, strength, and divine powers are among the top in the Donghua Continent. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ??¦Í??.§ã¦Ï You are only a step away from the realm of a Heavenly Immortal. For a person like Taoist Lu, whenever the Great True Persons come out of seclusion, they would naturally hear of you. The Immortal Venerate of our sect heard of Taoist Lu¡¯s name and was deeply moved, hence he specifically sent me to invite you to Dongyang Mountain. This is merely after hearing about a young prodigy and wanting to meet and witness your grace!¡± In order to persuade Lu Yuan, Wang ShiZhou was giving it his all, almost to the point of flattering without any regard for his dignity. However, despite these sugar-coated bullets, Lu Yuan remained unmoved, his expression unchanged, even falling into silence. Seeing his reaction, Wang ShiZhou¡¯s face twitched, knowing that the other party did not believe his words and instead became more suspicious. Considering his own mission, he sighed inwardly, knowing this was indeed a bit too much. He then said helplessly, ¡°I know this might seem inappropriate, but this is the request of the Great Immortal Grandmaster. Even if it seems wrong, I must still extend the invitation. School Leader Lu, please do not misunderstand, Dongyang Mountain truly has no ill intentions. Based on my relationship with your sect, Taoist Lu should know that I bear no malice towards your sect. Moreover, before I left, the Great Immortal Grandmaster also mentioned that if Taoist Lu has any doubts, you need not rush over, and he will not force you. Taoist Lu could wait until you break through to Heavenly Immortal and become a Great True Person before visiting the Great Immortal Grandmaster. With Taoist Lu¡¯s talent, becoming a Heavenly Immortal is merely a matter of three to five thousand years. For the Great Immortal Grandmaster, it¡¯s merely the duration of one seclusion, so it¡¯s insignificant.¡± Hearing this, Lu Yuan, who had been silent all along, finally showed a change in expression. He bowed towards the south, ¡°Thank you, Great Immortal Grandmaster, for your understanding.¡± Then he turned to Wang ShiZhou, sincerely saying, ¡°Cultivator Wang, it is a critical moment for me as I strive to break through to Heavenly Immortal, a matter crucial for both my personal cultivation journey and the rise or fall of our sect. Many things are not decisions I can make impulsively. Before attaining the status of Great True Person, no matter what happens, I will not leave Dongyang Mountain. This is not disrespect towards the Great Immortal Grandmaster but a consideration for safety. After all, in this world, who knows how many eyes are watching me, just waiting for me to show a weakness they can exploit. Until I become a Heavenly Immortal, I cannot consider myself safe. The visit to the Great Immortal Grandmaster will have to wait until I have achieved the status of Heavenly Immortal and can meet him as an equal. I hope you understand.¡± Now, the rise or fall of Taiping Dao almost entirely hinged on Lu Yuan alone; he was the hope for the entire sect¡¯s advancement. ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?? If he were to be killed, even if it didn¡¯t completely destroy Taiping Dao, it would certainly break its current ascending momentum. It would take thousands, if not tens of thousands, of years for Taiping Dao to cultivate another Grand Cultivator. Whether this future Grand Cultivator could match Lu Yuan, a Chosen One appearing once every million years, was also uncertain. If acquiring such a figure were easy, they wouldn¡¯t be called Chosen Ones. Perhaps without Lu Yuan, the fortunes of Taiping Dao would be exhausted, and in the future, not only Grand Cultivators but even Earth Immortals would gradually diminish, transitioning from prosperity to decline. Finally, like the Qing Immortal Sect, it would wither, declining and perishing over ten or twenty thousand years. With such high stakes, it was naturally enticing. Over the years, Lu Yuan had received many invitations, all requesting him to leave the peaceful region to visit other domains. How many were sincere and how many were scheming was truly hard to assess. But one thing was certain. Among these invitations, there may have been genuine fools. But more often, they definitely bore ill intentions. Thus, for such clear tricks, Lu Yuan directly refused. Those who were frequent inviters were even scolded by him in person, and if not scolded directly, then through letters, before cutting off all ties. His stance was so resolute, directly rejecting all invitations outside the door. This matter should now be well known across the Donghua Continent. In such circumstances, Dongyang Mountain still sent Wang ShiZhou, an old friend of Taiping Dao, to personally invite Lu Yuan to meet an unfathomable Heavenly Immortal. Truly, Lu Yuan didn¡¯t even know what to say. The other side was overly confident, thinking that with a Heavenly Immortal¡¯s invitation, Taiping Dao would definitely not dare to refuse. Chapter 1553 - Chapter 1553 Chapter 603 Ive Been Exposed_2 ?Chapter 1553: Chapter 603 I¡¯ve Been Exposed_2 Chapter 1553: Chapter 603 I¡¯ve Been Exposed_2 ¡°` Still thinking that the relationship between the two sides was really so good that sending Wang ShiZhou would be enough to hoodwink him. If these were indeed their thoughts, then Lu Yuan could only say they had overestimated him and underestimated others too much. With his cautious and steady nature, let alone being some Great True Person, let alone a good friend. Before his own life, everything else would have to take a back seat. Faced with an existence that could determine his life or death, Lu Yuan would absolutely not allow himself to be in the enemy¡¯s lair. To entrust his safety to a so-called admirer, a Great Immortal Grandmaster who wanted to meet him. If the other party really wanted to force the issue, even if it were a Heavenly Immortal, he would have to fight. At worst, he¡¯d lose and then flee for his life. The Immortal Realm is vast and limitless, with endless opportunities. If Donghua Continent couldn¡¯t contain him, other places surely could. When the time comes to make a comeback somewhere else and become a Great True Person, he would find a way to return for revenge. Holding the Dao Fruit of longevity, what Lu Yuan feared least was waiting. So, it had come to this, where he would have to give up all the results of his efforts over thousands of years in an instant, returning to square one. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï But for the same reason, this meant that he had made a great enemy. From now on, if Lu Yuan didn¡¯t kill the Great True Person of Dongyang Mountain and destroy his Tao Inheritance, he would never rest. Fortunately, this extreme situation had not come to pass. That Great Immortal Grandmaster of Dongyang Mountain did not aggressively force Lu Yuan to meet him. Instead, he was given a grace period, and even if he became a Heavenly Immortal, it wouldn¡¯t be too late to meet him. Such accommodating words eased Lu Yuan¡¯s mind and also made him start to believe that the other party truly had no malice. That he simply wanted to meet him out of pure curiosity. A senior who, upon seeing a standout junior, became curious and therefore wanted to meet this prodigy of Donghua Continent, touted as the day¡¯s Chosen One, once in a million years? Lu Yuan couldn¡¯t help making such a guess in his heart. Wang ShiZhou smiled bitterly, ¡°I understand your concerns, friend. It surely seems as though Dongyang Mountain has ulterior motives in seeking you out at this time. If I were in your shoes, I would have my doubts too. I¡¯m aware of your situation, friend, and can empathize. Anyone in your position would choose to be cautious; it¡¯s only sensible, and I bear no grudge. ?¦Ï¦Í??.?¦Ï It¡¯s just that not being able to persuade you this time will likely disappoint the Great True Person when I return.¡± Hearing this, Lu Yuan was moved and stood up to bow deeply, ¡°Friend, your understanding touches me deeply; I am truly embarrassed. I have been rude this time. I apologize for any offense, Wang ShiZhou, and I will make amends in the future.¡± At this moment, he truly believed that the other was without ulterior motives. Otherwise, with Wang ShiZhou¡¯s status, there was no need for such humility and repeated apologies. The other could have easily coerced him into going to Dongyang Mountain by using a Heavenly Immortal¡¯s decree, forcing him to submit. In that case, if he succeeded, he would have fulfilled the Great True Person¡¯s command. If not, it would be painted as the Taiping Dao¡¯s defiant arrogance, showing contempt for an Immortal Venerate, giving grounds to report Lu Yuan and request the Great Immortal Grandmaster to punish and discipline the Taiping Dao. Any of these actions would have been more effortless and imposing. For Wang ShiZhou to achieve his goal, he could have chosen this path; there was no need for forbearance or generosity. As for the subsequent extension granted by the Great Immortal Grandmaster, a slight embellishment or personal interpretation could have completely altered its nature. Otherwise, how did the term ¡®deceive and manipulate¡¯ come about? Such behavior by the other party could only mean that they truly considered the Taiping Dao a friend, with no malice, and therefore were so reasonable. Nonetheless, this stirred up Lu Yuan¡¯s curiosity about the Great Immortal Grandmaster of Dongyang Mountain whom he had yet to meet. He was somewhat eager to know why the other wished to meet him. Don¡¯t give me any nonsense about wanting to meet a junior! While Donghua Continent is not large, there are more than ten Great True Persons, and if you include the nearby Sea Areas and Region Continents, there are even more Great True Persons. With so many Great True Persons, even if many are in seclusion, there are still no less than ten who are active in the world. In Lu Yuan¡¯s current reputation within neighboring Boundary Domains, anyone with a bit of information would have heard of him. After all, he is hailed as the one most likely to become the next Heavenly Immortal in the coming tens of thousands of years. Even if the Great True Persons are indifferent and don¡¯t care about life below that of a Heavenly Immortal, they should still take notice of their peers, right? They could be neighbors for a short tens of thousands of years or up to millions of years. In the future, they would see each other often, and it would be good to know each other¡¯s names for greetings. Thus, at the very least, Lu Yuan¡¯s name was known by no fewer than ten Great True Persons. Yet none of those Great True Persons, despite having heard of him, had come forward to meet him. They all understood that now was not a good time for introductions. It was only the Great Immortal Grandmaster of Dongyang Mountain who had made this impolite request. To say there was no reason behind it, Lu Yuan wouldn¡¯t believe it even if he were beaten to death. After much thought, being watched by a Great True Person endlessly without understanding why was unsettling. Lu Yuan considered carefully and finally voiced his concern, ¡°Friend, what exactly does your sect¡¯s Great Immortal Grandmaster want with me? Do not use those empty phrases to placate me; I want to hear the truth.¡± Seeing Lu Yuan¡¯s insistence on clarity and peace of mind, Wang ShiZhou knew he couldn¡¯t put his mind at ease without a clear explanation. ¡°` Chapter 1554 - Chapter 1554 Chapter 603 Ive Been Exposed_3 ?Chapter 1554: Chapter 603 I¡¯ve Been Exposed_3 Chapter 1554: Chapter 603 I¡¯ve Been Exposed_3 Hesitating for a moment, Wang ShiZhou gritted his teeth and said: ¡°Actually, why the Great Immortal Grandmaster wishes to see you is something that we inside Dongyang Mountain are also puzzled about, unclear of the reason. The Great Immortal Grandmaster simply made the request for us to follow through without explaining much. As juniors, we dare not interfere or inquire about the affairs of the Great Immortal Grandmaster. Therefore, even though there¡¯s a lot of speculation in the Mountain, and many people are opposed, I had no choice but to come to Mi Yun Mountain. However, even though the Great Immortal Grandmaster did not explain, internally, we still have some speculations.¡± Saying that, Wang ShiZhou looked at Lu Yuan, his eyes flashing with inquiry and curiosity, and continued: ¡°More than two thousand years ago, which was around the time of the last decisive battle between the Qing Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, when Friend Yao and Friend Meng perished, the Great Immortal Grandmaster left his seclusion. At that time, the Great Immortal Grandmaster summoned us to inquire about the affairs of the Changqing Domain to the north. During the inquiry, it was mentioned that an old friend¡¯s aura had appeared in the northern Changqing Domain, which evoked a response in the Great Immortal Grandmaster. However, when we pressed for details then, the Great Immortal Grandmaster did not elaborate much. He only said it wasn¡¯t about the rise of a new Great True Person, but maybe an old friend¡¯s aura manifesting, possibly leaving behind some legacy. Previously, upon hearing this, we only thought it might be either the legacy of the Nine Spirit Celestial Noble or the Changqing Immortal, left behind for the future. After all, looking back hundreds of thousands of years in the Changqing Domain, there is only these two who are qualified to be called old friends of the Great Immortal Grandmaster. But now, with the fall of the Qing Immortal Sect and the Jiuzhou Immortal Gate being annexed by your sect, no anomalies have appeared, which obviously don¡¯t fit the conditions of that old friend. Neither of them could possibly gain the legacy of a Great True Person. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.§ã¦Ï ?¦Ï¦Í??.?? On the other hand, under the lead of Taoist Lu, Taiping Dao has been gradually moving towards prosperity, and even unified the Changqing Domain, renaming the domain Taiping. Now, it is widely rumored outside that you, within three thousand years, have become a Grand cultivator, a Chosen one that appears once in a million years. From any perspective, you fit the conditions of the old friend¡¯s legacy more.¡± Wang ShiZhou paused, staring at Lu Yuan, and said earnestly: ¡°Taoist Lu, I dare to ask if you really have had a fortuitous encounter and obtained the legacy of that Great True Person? You asked me for the reason, and this is all I can think of. You have gained the legacy of the old friend of my Great Immortal Grandmaster, which is why it caught the attention of the Great Immortal Grandmaster, wanting to meet the successor who has inherited his old friend¡¯s mantle, to be reminded of the person upon seeing the object. Taoist Lu, do you think this is reasonable?¡± Hearing these questions, Lu Yuan¡¯s heart suddenly skipped a beat, as if struck by thunder, and he was stunned. Only one thought was in his mind. Damn it, my identity as a traverser has been exposed, caught by someone, and I¡¯ve blown my cover. Because his experiences and achievements indeed closely resembled what Wang ShiZhou speculated. His own rise to power indeed relied on a treasure of a Great True Person level, the Dao Fruit of longevity. This Golden Finger looks exactly like a product that was transformed from an Immortal Realm Dao Fruit. ¡®So my traversal and Golden Finger are actually a game specially conjured up for fun by a Great True Person? And I am the one who has been selected, whether fortunately or unfortunately? Could it be that my traversal is a predefined illusionary game?¡¯ Lu Yuan thought so and immediately felt a chill. It was very possible. To fabricate a set of memories for someone, change their body, this was something Lu Yuan could already accomplish with his current abilities. Even throwing it into a small world and carefully planning it out, it might be possible to execute the plan even under the eyes of a Heavenly Immortal. The only difficulty was that he couldn¡¯t produce a Dao Fruit that was entirely independent from the Heavenly Path. But this seemeda€| for a Great True Person, to be within their capabilities, right? Lu Yuan guessed uncertainly. Chapter 1555 - Chapter 1555 Chapter 604 The Peril Comes from People ?Chapter 1555: Chapter 604 The Peril Comes from People Chapter 1555: Chapter 604 The Peril Comes from People Regarding his own memory and the issue with the Golden Finger, Lu Yuan eventually did not delve too deeply. It¡¯s not that he¡¯s carefree and uninterested in these issues. It¡¯s really that these topics are somewhat beyond him now. With things as they are now, even knowing that there is a problem with his memory and the Golden Finger, what can he do at this point? Lu Yuan could not possibly give up the Dao Fruit of longevity. Once abandoned, no one knows what consequences it could lead to. One must know, in order to cultivate the Way of Control Pneuma for a peaceful life previously, he desperately drained his own lifespan, the amount spent is unknowable. Outsiders think Lu Yuan has extraordinary talent, just spending about four to five thousand years of lifespan, and still having three to four thousand years left to live. But insiders know their own affairs. Doesn¡¯t Lu Yuan himself understand? He is no chosen one, but just an ordinary person with average aptitude. To reach this point, Lu Yuan has already overspent at least twenty thousand years of his lifespan, possibly even more, the exact number is unclear. These costs would have killed him if he bore them himself. He still survives now because the Dao Fruit of longevity has taken on all those costs, preventing the backlash from reaching him. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï ?¦Ï¦Í??.?0 But if the Dao Fruit of longevity was gone, it¡¯s unclear whether the costs borne by it would fall back on him. If indeed transferred back to him, then there¡¯s no playing around anymore. Better arrange one¡¯s own coffin and wait for death peacefully. So just from this point alone, Lu Yuan could not possibly give up the Dao Fruit of longevity. Regardless of whether there are issues with this fruit, for the sake of his life, he cannot abandon it and must maintain the status quo. Moreover, whether the Dao Fruit can be given up is just wishful thinking. If it¡¯s a Heavenly Immortal of great power that has arranged a game for Lu Yuan, then as a chess piece, before transcending the board (becoming a Great True Person), does he really have the power to resist? In any case, Lu Yuan believes that if he truly set up any game board, it would definitely be well-prepared, certainly not leaving any possibility for the chess piece to turn over. And thinking about it, he, a Grand cultivator, has this confidence, let alone a Great True Person. If he now chooses to follow the set game board, as a game participant and chess player, the mastermind might continue to push him upwards. If he dares to resist, he is likely to face immediate suppression, or even direct annihilation. Angering a Heavenly Immortal, the outcome might be even worse than being merged by the Heavenly Path. Instead of this, why not pretend to be ignorant and let everything maintain the current state! Yes, living in such ignorance is suffocating, with fate not controlled by oneself. But in this world, who truly has freedom? During the times in Nine Provinces, a Four-pole Heavenly Catastrophe cost the world billions of people fighting, ultimately doomed to perish alongside the world. The recently ended Changqing Nine Provinces Great War, Northern Expedition battle, Changqing, Nine Provinces, and peaceful factions fought incessantly, with countless generations perishing on the battlefield. Even Meng Jianshan and Yao Baojuan, who were heads of their sects and Grand cultivators, couldn¡¯t avoid death. Going back further, figures like Nine Spirit Celestial Noble and Changqing Immortal of Great True Persons could not escape the fate of their Dao disappearing. From this, it can be seen that the commoners of The world, from mortals to Immortals, cannot control their own lives. The fate of mortals is controlled by cultivators. The fate of cultivators is controlled by Immortals. The fate of Immortals is controlled by Heavenly Immortals. The fate of Heavenly Immortals is controlled by the Heavenly Path. The Heavenly Path is then controlled by the Immortal Realm. As for who controls the Immortal Realm, Lu Yuan is unclear. He has always striven to climb higher, so that the beings and layers controlling him are fewer, and he might have a bit more freedom. As for completely transcending? If it were the initial traversing, initial cultivation period, Lu Yuan might still dream about it. Later, after seeing the vastness of Heaven and Earth and the vastness of the world, he stopped thinking about such lofty matters. Being realistic as a human, actually is quite nice. Now, having realized his problems, Lu Yuan only thinks about how to live a bit longer, how to complete this chess game, and let the mastermind behind let him leave. Resist? Lu Yuan wants to, but that¡¯s most likely death. Surrender, and the chances of survival might even be a bit higher. Well, said and done, it¡¯s just that he¡¯s not capable enough and is afraid of dying. ¡®However, whether there is someone behind manipulating this is still just speculation, and the worst speculation at that. Whether it¡¯s true is still hard to say. Maybe in the end, it might turn out that everything is wrong? My transmigration is real, the Golden Finger has no issue, and everything is fine. As for¡­ as for that aura of an old friend of the Dongyang Mountain Great True Person, maybe it just means that I am from the Nine Provinces Realm, the last cultivator to ascend from this small world, tainted by quite a bit of the aura of Nine Spirit Celestial Noble?¡¯ Lu Yuan cut off all speculations there. Regarding what follows, no need to delve deeper. And not delving deeper, for the few issues raised by Wang ShiZhou, of course, no need to reply either. ¡°Ha-ha, Taoist Wang said it exaggeratedly. If I really had the legacy of a Heavenly Immortal, wouldn¡¯t I be aware of it? That¡¯s never been the case. Your sect¡¯s Great Immortal Grandmaster wanting to meet with me, is probably just out of curiosity, wanting to see such a junior as myself.¡± Lu Yuan laughed out loud, casually changing the subject. Hearing this, Wang ShiZhou also immediately laughed and said: ¡°What Taoist Lu said is true, I¡¯m jumping at shadows. Heavenly Immortal legacy, if it was so easy to obtain, the Immortal Realm having so many Great True Persons, wouldn¡¯t have been unheard of. I misspoke, my mistake.¡± Chapter 1556 - Chapter 1556 Chapter 604 Peril Caused by People (Part 2) ?Chapter 1556: Chapter 604: Peril Caused by People (Part 2) Chapter 1556: Chapter 604: Peril Caused by People (Part 2) Wang ShiZhou repeatedly bowed, expressing his apologies. But as he spoke, it was clear in his heart that he did not believe it; otherwise, he would not have said what he did afterwards. There is no love without reason in the world; every benefit has been priced from the beginning. As a Great True Person who has cultivated all the way up to Heavenly Immortal, you wouldn¡¯t really think of them as naive, would you? Lu Yuan, with the aid of the Golden Finger, has gone through so much. Not to mention those Great True Persons who have reached their current position entirely through their own efforts. Thinking of taking advantage of these people can only show one¡¯s utter ignorance of what death means. Wang ShiZhou is indeed honest, and he specially reminded Lu Yuan, fearing that he might not understand the gravity of the situation. However, that was the extent of it. If Lu Yuan were truly involved with that Great True Person, and if that Great True Person had a past with his own Great Immortal Grandmaster, not even with ten thousand times the courage would Wang dare to mess with that individual¡¯s plans. That would not be saving a friend; that would be courting death. Moreover, his relationship with Lu Yuan was clearly not that good. Those who reach the level of Earth Immortal, would all become proficient in a particular skill, wisely protecting themselves. For Wang ShiZhou to do as much as he did, he was already very kind-hearted. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.?¦Ï ¡°Wang Daoist friend, you are too kind; you have a good heart.¡± After hearing these words, Lu Yuan¡¯s heart grew heavier, but a brighter smile appeared on his face. After this issue was settled, the two did not continue on this topic and instead reminisced about old times and exchanged their insights on cultivation. As a Grand cultivator whose reputation has risen in recent years, many are curious and skeptical about Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation. Many people believe that achieving the breakthrough to Grand cultivator so quickly means that even if one¡¯s realm is high, other aspects of cultivation will have inevitably fallen behind. In the Immortal Realm, there are also some extreme cultivators who completely abandon all external practices and focus solely on maximizing their realm within their limited lifespan. Cultivators like these, although their realm advances quickly, tend to know very little and have deficiencies in areas like Magic Power, Divine Powers, Magical Treasures, Formation Methods, Elixirs, Talismans, and so on. This is normal. A cultivator¡¯s Lifespan is limited. If one spends time on one aspect, naturally less attention is given to others, and the effort invested also decreases. It¡¯s normal not to be able to focus on everything. Each cultivator would usually master a few supplementary skills aside from their main realm. And those extreme cultivators would simply abandon these supplementary skills altogether. Lu Yuan managing to become a Grand cultivator in just three thousand years, in the eyes of outsiders, exemplifies someone who has abandoned side skills to focus on realm cultivation. Otherwise, even for a Chosen one, it would be terrifying to accomplish the cultivation of both realm and side skills to perfection within three thousand years. It would hardly be any different from being born with innate knowledge. However, after a thorough exchange with Lu Yuan, Wang ShiZhou found that this School Leader Lu was even more of a prodigy than the rumors suggested. There¡¯s no need to talk about his realm; he is genuinely a Grand cultivator, and his Late-stage Earth Immortal cultivation is no fluke. Through their exchange, Wang ShiZhou also gained a lot. As a grand cultivator and essentially in the reserve force of Heavenly Immortals, there are not many like him in the Donghua Continent, not surpassing the number of twenty. And Dongyang Mountain, in recent years, has had a somewhat declining Qi Luck, not having even one. Furthermore, with the secluded nature of the Heavenly Immortal sects and their tendency not to interact with the outside, it made it difficult for Wang ShiZhou to find a Grand cultivator to seek advice from on normal days. What, a Great True Person? What standing do you have to waste the time of Great True Persons? Not to mention, those Great True Persons who might be in seclusion for thousands of years at a time, leaving their disciples with little to no opportunity to seek guidance. At this time, to have a relatively good relationship with Lu Yuan and to be able to consult with him was naturally a rare opportunity and a delight for Wang ShiZhou. Just after a few days of exchange, Wang ShiZhou had gained a great deal, resolving many of his usual perplexities and offering him many answers regarding the direction of his future path. It¡¯s not to say that he has found a clear way, but he certainly now has more choices. Aside from the gains in Dao Law and realm, what surprised Wang ShiZhou even more was that Lu Yuan¡¯s accomplishments in other side skills were also significant. Although these attainments are rather superficial, compared to his Grand cultivator¡¯s cultivation, they only reached the realm of a Mid-stage Earth Immortal. But do not forget, this is a Grand cultivator who is three thousand years old. To become a Grand cultivator at the age of three thousand and to additionally manage side techniques, one can imagine how difficult that is. Fortunately, the realm of Taoist Lu¡¯s side techniques is still at the level of a Mid-stage Earth Immortal, and it¡¯s just barely reached that level, which is quite shallow. Otherwise, if the realms of these side techniques were as high as his own realm, then Wang ShiZhou would truly be shocked to his core. Because the person born with knowledge has truly appeared before him. However, even so, Lu Yuan¡¯s achievements in both internal and external cultivation and the advancement of his side techniques are shocking enough. It made Wang ShiZhou only sigh that such a Chosen one, who appears only once every million years, is indeed terrifying. He also considers himself to have outstanding talent; otherwise, he could not possibly have been noticed by Dongyang Mountain and come this far. But compared to Lu Yuan, he might as well be a blockhead. ¡®However, it is precisely such a character who is favored by a Heavenly Immortal and granted inheritance.¡¯ During their exchange, Wang ShiZhou couldn¡¯t help but think this way. After such thoughts, he felt much more balanced in his heart. His gaze towards Lu Yuan also carried a bit of sympathy. The other party is a once-in-an-era genius, but he has been targeted by a Heavenly Immortal; although this has facilitated his growth, the final outcome remains uncertain. The intentions of that Heavenly Immortal will directly determine Lu Yuan¡¯s future. If things go wrong, it¡¯s possible that the other party might face his demise before even confronting him face to face. On the other hand, someone mediocre like himself, under the protection of Great Immortal Grandmaster, though it¡¯s difficult to reach the realms of a Heavenly Immortal, and becoming a Grand cultivator is the utmost limit. Yet, he may live a safe life for ten thousand years, which is a kind of happiness as well. After changing his way of thinking, Wang ShiZhou¡¯s feelings of imbalance were significantly alleviated. Even feeling a bit of sympathy towards Lu Yuan when facing him. Although such a shift in thought was well concealed, what kind of person is Lu Yuan? ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã¦Ï He naturally noticed it, but did not take it to heart and continued to converse and laugh as usual with the other party. After a month or so, having sufficiently satisfied Wang ShiZhou¡¯s curiosity, Lu Yuan felt it was about time and began to bid his guest farewell. Subtly bringing up that he had to continue cultivation, he was preparing to resume seclusion. Wang ShiZhou, though reluctant, was not one to overstep boundaries. In the end, he could only express his gratitude and take his leave. ¡°Thank you, Taoist brother, for the hospitality these past days. Taoist Lu, please be at ease. After I return, I will explain your difficulties to Great Immortal Grandmaster, to ensure that he does not blame you.¡± At the moment of parting, Wang ShiZhou once again assured Lu Yuan. ¡°Then, I will leave everything in Taoist Wang¡¯s hands.¡± Lu Yuan expressed his gratitude to Wang ShiZhou. After exchanging farewells, the engagement between Dongyang Mountain and Taiping Dao came to a complete close. After sending Wang ShiZhou away, Lu Yuan returned to his Cave Mansion and reflected on the events of these past days. The joy he had originally felt from breaking the first barrier of becoming a Heavenly Immortal was instantly gone. Because of an invitation from a Great True Person of Dongyang Mountain, he now found himself with a Sword Hanging above the Head, not knowing when it might fall. Such a situation would make anyone¡¯s mood far from beautiful. That Lu Yuan could still keep his composure and not collapse in despair was already commendable. ¡°Whether it¡¯s an overthought or the truth, it¡¯s not something I can deal with at the moment. Even if I need to solve it, facing a threat at the level of a Heavenly Immortal, I need to reach the same level as a Heavenly Immortal to cope. So, overthinking is useless; better to focus on improving my cultivation.¡± Inside the Cave Mansion, Lu Yuan encouraged himself, then immediately decided to end his vacation and begin focused cultivation. Time is pressing, and there are more crises. Faced with so many dangers, I can no longer afford to slack off. Cultivation, I must cultivate. Improving cultivation is the true path. After reaching the level of a Heavenly Immortal, all will be revealed. At that time, whether it is human or ghost, whether it is risk or peril, I will face it head-on. Chapter 1557 - Chapter 1557 Chapter 605 I am the Heaven ?Chapter 1557: Chapter 605 I am the Heaven Chapter 1557: Chapter 605 I am the Heaven After understanding his current situation, Lu Yuan became even more diligent in his cultivation. Having ended his holiday, he devoted himself entirely to integrating the Taiping Tao Fruit into the peaceful domain and began his sprint towards the second stage of being a Heavenly Immortal. The so-called second stage of becoming a Heavenly Immortal is essentially a grueling task. After reclaiming the Dao Fruit, a cultivator must first cleanse the Heavenly Path¡¯s residual traces within the Dao Fruit, making it completely private, severing any connections with the Heavenly Path from then on. Only at this step, does the Dao Fruit truly belong to the cultivator. Once truly in control of the Dao Fruit, the next step for the cultivator is to merge and bind their Divine Soul¡¯s essence with the Dao Fruit, making the two completely one. From then on, the Dao Fruit is the cultivator, and the cultivator is the Dao Fruit; the two are indistinguishable. To achieve this, the cultivator is considered to have merged with the Tao; oneself is a Great Tao. But this is just the beginning. Merging with the Tao ensures that a cultivator can fully control and use the Great Tao, but this Great Tao has already been completely severed from the Heavenly Path and the Immortal Realm by previous cuts. Without the support of the Heavenly Path and the Immortal Realm, a single Dao Fruit is like a rootless tree, with no soil to sustain itself. It can neither stand firmly, nor last long. If this state is sustained for a long period, the Dao Fruit will, like a fish out of water, gradually die of thirst and starvation, the Great Tao will wither, and the Dao Fruit will collapse. And when the Dao Fruit is gone, the cultivator, who has merged with it, naturally cannot escape the same fate. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?0.§ã? Destruction together is the only outcome. Thus, after separating from the Heavenly Path and the Immortal Realm, if a cultivator wants to preserve their Dao Fruit and their life, they must find a new place for the Dao Fruit to reside before it withers. However, there¡¯s no need to hurry too much with this step. After all, the Dao Fruit is a transformation of the Great Tao, and its resilience and tenacity are not easily destroyed. Even if it were to wither, it would be an exceedingly long process. Consider the Nine Provinces¡¯ Cave World, which relies on the Dao Fruit; even after its creator, the Nine Spirit Celestial Noble fell, it still maintained itself for seventy thousand years with the support of the Dao Fruit¡¯s power before it headed towards destruction. A derivative of a Dao Fruit possesses such strong vitality. Let alone the Dao Fruit itself, as the source of everything, its robust and powerful nature goes without saying. In simple terms, even if left without support, Lu Yuan¡¯s Taiping Tao Fruit could also independently last over a million years without perishing. With such a lengthy period, what can¡¯t be achieved? Of course, there¡¯s no need to worry about the Dao Fruit not holding up and thereby killing him. In fact, what should be a concern is not the Dao Fruit, but the cultivator himself. Because once a cultivator enters the Earthly Immortal Realm, they are targeted by the Heavenly Path, entering a countdown to harvest a ten-thousand-year lifespan. If the cultivator cannot become a Heavenly Immortal within this ten-thousand-year limit, even if they temporarily retrieve the Dao Fruit from the Heavenly Path, they still cannot escape the fate of the Great Tao being taken back and perishing once their lifespan ends. Therefore, what needs urgent attention is not the Dao Fruit, but the cultivator. After separating from the Heavenly Path, even waiting a few thousand or tens of thousands of years is not a significant concern for the Dao Fruit. After all, by enduring till the ten-thousand-year limit, if the cultivator fails, the old master, the Heavenly Path, will take back the Dao Fruit. It¡¯s all about serving; who to serve doesn¡¯t really matter! But cultivators cannot afford to endure this. The three stages to becoming a Heavenly Immortal, each fraught with peril, require utmost effort to break through. The threat of the Heavenly Path constantly draws closer, and before clearing these stages, not a single moment can be wasted. Among the group of Grand cultivators, someone like Lu Yuan, who can afford a fifty-year holiday after breaking through one barrier, would not even dream of such a luxury. Others are fighting every minute, wishing they could split it into two to use, still finding it insufficient. For Lu Yuan, having the luxury to waste time like this, it¡¯s because he has an additional seven thousand years, enough to gradually break through three barriers. This naturally eliminates the need to rush, allowing him to proceed slowly. He could even afford to spend a hundred years adjusting his mindset after breaking through. But others don¡¯t have this luxury; they must immediately embark on a frenzied sprint to breakthrough after advancing beyond a Grand cultivator. But now, Lu Yuan knows the hidden dangers he faces, although he didn¡¯t say anything when previously discussing with Wang ShiZhou. But as the one directly facing the danger, how could he possibly not have thoughts? Pressured by the crisis, he naturally developed an urgent need for strength. Advancing to Heavenly Immortal earlier would grant him the strength to face the crisis sooner. And if, in the end, there truly were issues, facing perilous encounters upon breaking through to Heavenly Immortal, that would also mean early death and liberation. No need to continue bearing the heavy psychological pressure in fear like now. With a heavy heart, Lu Yuan began the cleansing of his Dao Fruit. With the Longevity Dao Fruit as an aid, cleaning the Taiping Tao Fruit was not particularly challenging for him. It was just some residual essences of the Heavenly Path. The Heavenly Path of the Immortal Realm is so vast, having far too many places and issues to manage. Lu Yuan stole such a significant Dao Fruit from their hands unnoticed. ?¦Ï???.§ã0 Now, merely cleaning the stolen Dao Fruit, there certainly wouldn¡¯t be any problems. The only trouble is that washing the Dao Fruit might be a bit tiring. Based on Lu Yuan¡¯s personal experience, in order to cleanse the Taiping Tao Fruit thoroughly, he used his Divine Sense to inspect tirelessly, day and night, repeatedly using his Divine Soul¡¯s magic power to cleanse every strand, every thread of the Dao Fruit. Chapter 1558 - Chapter 1558 Chapter 605 I Am the Sky_2 ?Chapter 1558: Chapter 605 I Am the Sky_2 Chapter 1558: Chapter 605 I Am the Sky_2 ¡°` It took a full hundred years of effort before Lu Yuan could cleanse his Taiping Tao Fruit of the Heavenly Path¡¯s aura. After the cleansing, Lu Yuan was left utterly drained in spirit and soul. Describing someone as overdrawed and withered is exactly the state he was in at that time. This also meant that although he did not want to waste Time, his body and divine soul truly did not permit it, and in the end, he had to rest for another ten years after cleansing the Tao Fruit before he could fully recover. After cleaning the Tao Fruit, having removed the aura of the Great Tao that belonged to the Heavenly Path, the subsequent fusion with the Dao became much simpler. Without the Heavenly Path¡¯s aura as an obstacle, Lu Yuan wanted to merge his divine soul and magic power with the Tao Fruit, and there was no obstruction at all. You only need to refine the Tao Fruit like refining Magical Treasures, slowly nurturing the Tao Fruit, then making it responsive like an extension of one¡¯s own body, and that¡¯s it. For Lu Yuan, who already had a wealth of experience in refining Avatars, this wasn¡¯t a particularly difficult task. Refining Avatars is a form of refinement, as is refining Tao Fruits. The only difference is that previously the entity fused with the Magical Treasures was Lu Yuan¡¯s Soul Splitting. Now, the Magical Treasures have become the Tao Fruit, and the entity that needs to fuse with it has also become his own Main Soul. The materials differ, but the form and steps are the same, so it¡¯s not a problem. With his past experience, Lu Yuan spent just over a decade making some adaptive planning for the refining technique, process, steps, and model. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï Then he started, and in a few months, he had already reached basic proficiency. Finally, after eighty-three years of getting the basics down, he achieved major success in refining; the Tao Fruit merged with the Divine Soul and was entrusted to the Great Tao. ¡°From now on, I am the Dao, and the Dao is me, inseparable from each other. Hahaha¡­¡± Inside the Cave Mansion, Lu Yuan, now unified with the Dao, was experiencing the nearly boundless Taiping Avenue, feeling the profound state after fully integrating with the Tao Fruit, and couldn¡¯t help but burst out laughing. Only after truly possessing a Tao Fruit could he realize how superficial his previous use of the Power of Tao Fruit was. He also finally understood why, despite both having Tao Fruits, the gap between a Heavenly Immortal and Earth Immortal was as vast as the heavens and the abyss. It¡¯s like with an army, the authority of an Earth Immortal can only mobilize one person. But a Heavenly Immortal can command the entire army, mobilizing the power of ten thousand for their own use. How vast is the difference between one soldier and an army of ten thousand? It¡¯s not simply a difference of one and ten thousand times; it¡¯s an exponential expansion. The gap being so immense, it¡¯s no wonder that Heavenly Immortals can easily overpower Earth Immortals. Because from the perspective of the Dao, the two aren¡¯t even the same species; Inborn, they exist on entirely different dimensional levels. After laughing for a while, Lu Yuan stopped, gathering his scattered thoughts. ¡°This is merely the integration with the Tao Fruit, and I have already widened the gap in quality and quantity between myself and those Earth Immortals. ?0¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Yet, this is just the second barrier on the path to becoming a Heavenly Immortal, and only the first half of the second barrier at that. What follows is finding a place for the Tao Fruit, to give leaves branches, wood roots, and roots earth, to firmly establish the foundation, which marks the completion of the second barrier. After the second barrier, one must create a Cave World to carry the Heavenly Path. Compared to those Heavenly Immortals, I am still lacking in two levels. Although it might be clich?? to say, with my current state, I can indeed only be considered a Half-step Heavenly Immortal. There¡¯s a gap with Earth Immortals, and while I possess some characteristics of a Heavenly Immortal, I am still lacking. If I were to truly confront a Heavenly Immortal, at best, I could manage to exchange a few moves from originally having no power to resist, to having a back-and-forth. But after those moves, the Tao Fruit without a source of power to replenish it would quickly wither and collapse due to the rapid depletion of the Power of Tao Fruit. Having merged with the Tao Fruit, I would have no choice but to die along with it. So compared with those legitimate Heavenly Immortals, I¡¯m still out of my league, truly incomparable.¡± After a moment of deep thought, Lu Yuan shook his head repeatedly, waking entirely from the joy of his breakthrough. The more control one has, the more one knows; the more one knows, the more one fears. Now that he has only stepped into the second barrier, Lu Yuan has felt the disparity between himself and those Heavenly Immortals. He has also become clearer that if there really were a Heavenly Immortal who had laid out plans against him, with his current self, he would absolutely not be able to resist. Even now, having fused with the Dao, he would not be able to withstand. Because he is still lacking two whole levels! ¡°` Unless he, too, could become a Heavenly Immortal, stand on the same dimension as his adversary, and then use the power of the same level to contend against the opponent. Otherwise, Lu Yuan was simply no match for a Heavenly Immortal. Similarly, it is for this reason that the gap between an Earth Immortal and a Heavenly Immortal is so vast. Then, a Heavenly Immortal who has mastered a Dao Fruit compares with the Heavenly Path that possesses countless harvested Dao Fruitsa€¡±is it not just like the difference between an Earth Immortal and a Heavenly Immortal, missing one, or even several Yuan? An Earth Immortal cannot rebel against a Heavenly Immortal, nor can Lu Yuan, who is at half-step Heavenly Immortal, rebel against a Heavenly Immortal. And how could Heavenly Immortals possibly rebel against the Heavenly Path? Understanding all this, Lu Yuan could finally comprehend why each Heavenly Immortal, despite possessing such tremendous power, having fused with the Dao, and even having created worlds, still chooses to demarcate their territory defensively, constructing a prison for themselves and confining themselves within the narrow boundaries of a domain, daring not to venture out. It¡¯s not that they do not wish to, but really because if the Heavenly Path catches this unregistered being, they would be utterly powerless to resist, facing only death. Between death and imprisonment, it seems many would be able to make a wise choice. After realizing how insignificant he was, Lu Yuan started the second phase of cultivation with an even greater sense of reverence. Fusing with the Dao is only the beginning of the second phase; after the fusion, it¡¯s about finding a vessel for the Dao. And according to the customs of the Immortal Realm, this vessel naturally is the Taiping Domain. However, the Taiping Domain is a part of the Immortal Realm, the soil of the Immortal Realm; if you wish to occupy it blatantly, it will inevitably attract the attention of the Heavenly Path. If anyone were to lose any part of their body, no matter how minuscule, and it occurred suddenly, they would feel that something was amiss. Even the bite of a mosquito causes pain, doesn¡¯t it? The same logic applies to the Immortal Realm. Thus, for a cultivator to successfully draw blood from the body of the Immortal Realm, they naturally have to, like a mosquito, first secrete anesthetic toxin to numb the senses of the Heavenly Path. Only then can they take a bite and extract a piece of territory like the Taiping Domain from the body of the Immortal Realm. And this toxin used to numb the Heavenly Path, at this moment, does not require Lu Yuan¡¯s personal preparation; the previous masters of the Taiping Domain had already prepared it for him. It is the shielding formation that spans the entire Great Domain. Previously, since deciding to rush towards becoming a Heavenly Immortal, Lu Yuan had begun to organize and master the domain¡¯s shielding formations, and now, nearly two thousand years have passed, and he has already completed this task. Now, with the need at hand, he could immediately activate the formation to temporarily block the Heavenly Path¡¯s perception of this place. And he did exactly that. Thus, once the entire Taiping Domain was cloaked by a layer of formation, completely isolated from the outside world, the people across the Donghua Continent were immediately aware. The School Leader Lu of Taiping Dao has now reached the second phase of Heavenly Immortal, starting to find a vessel for the Dao Fruit. The news spread and naturally caused a great commotion. Amidst the bustling discussion, the rumors of Lu Yuan as the Chosen One only deepened in people¡¯s belief. Otherwise, how could someone become a Grand Cultivator and reach this stage in just over seventeen hundred years? This is the speed of the Chosen One. And amidst the discussions, Time began to flow again; in the blink of an eye, another eight hundred years passed. After such a long period, inside the Donghua Continent, aside from a few interested individuals, hardly anyone spoke of the affairs of the Taiping Domain anymore. An issue, no matter how topical, being discussed for eight hundred years, would also grow tiresome. Moreover, over these eight hundred years, the Taiping Domain had been continuously sealed off, and outsiders simply could not enter beneath the shielding formation. Anyone who dared to trespass into the formation never came out again. This place had become a de facto dead zone. Yet, in this isolated island, cut off from the world, on this day, the sky was resplendent, the clouds thin and the azure sky clear. Suddenly, Heaven and Earth underwent drastic changes, and the cosmos seemed to invert. Various marvels surged forth, causing the numerous beings within the domain to feel heart palpitations, subconsciously feeling as if they had been transported to a different Heaven and Earth. A voice echoed within their hearts: ¡°I am the Heaven!¡± Those familiar with it could tell that this was the voice of Lu Yuan, the current School Leader of Taiping Dao and Immortal Venerate. Chapter 1559 - Chapter 1559 Chapter 606 The Supreme Within the Realm ?Chapter 1559: Chapter 606: The Supreme Within the Realm Chapter 1559: Chapter 606: The Supreme Within the Realm ¡°` The moment Lu Yuan¡¯s voice resounded across the Taiping Domain, the entirety of Mi Yun Mountain was abuzz. Outsiders might not be aware of the significance of the voice that echoed in the hearts of all beings. But for the disciples of Mi Yun Mountain¡¯s Taiping Dao, it wasn¡¯t necessary for others to recognize it. However, there was one within the sect for whom failing to recognize it would be a grave sin. ?0¦Í??.§ã¦Ï This person was their wise and brave Sect Leader with extraordinary strength and renowned throughout the Immortal Realm, the grand cultivator Lu Yuan. Do not consider such praise to be an exaggeration. In fact, to Taiping Dao today, Lu Yuan is indeed that important. His personal abilities and reputation justify such accolades. Looking across the Donghua Continent today, there is not a single person beneath the rank of Heavenly Immortal who dares claim to match him. Such distinction, a little praise is not flattering, it¡¯s merely stating facts. Moreover, for Lu Yuan himself, he needs this praise and flattery. The path of cultivation he practices is the Fortune Dao, and the source of Qi Luck for the Fortune Dao partly derives from people¡¯s hearts. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Thus, the more people praise him, it represents, in a certain sense, the direction of people¡¯s hearts. And when people¡¯s hearts are with him, naturally, Qi Luck will come rolling in. This is undoubtedly greatly beneficial to Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation. For this reason, he has even specifically issued a decree requiring that disciples within the sect with a cultivation below the Gathering Three Qi must undergo one day of education on the Sect Leader¡¯s deeds annually. Those below the rank of True Immortal must undergo a day¡¯s learning every ten years. And for those above the rank of True Immortal, having gone through the previous two phases of learning, their heartfelt admiration for Lu Yuan is certainly ample. Even if it is not sufficient, superficially, they must at least appear to be wholehearted. Not only the Taiping disciples. Lu Yuan has also issued orders to the various branch offices in different regions, commanding them to mobilize local Netherworld Court Divine Spirits to promote the belief in the legendary Taiping Immortal Venerate, which is to say, Lu Yuan himself. Fully mobilizing the reverence and affection for him among the common folk to gather the Qi Luck of the mortals. With one hand on cultivators and the other on mortals, capturing both the Immortal and mortal realms, the people¡¯s hearts and Qi Luck within the Taiping Domain are firmly grasped by Lu Yuan. He has even commanded the Five Sects in the Nine Provinces of the Western Domain, as the Alliance Leader, to enforce the same regulations. Facing the now fully-established and soon-to-be Heavenly Immortal Alliance Leader Lu Yuan, the Five Sects of the Western Domain dare not rebel. As for this directive, they have executed it resolutely and completely. Out of a submissive mindset, they implemented it to the point of excess, leading to some shocking incidents. It forced Lu Yuan to issue a decree after finding out, admonishing them not to be too extreme. In summary, these two regulations have become the established customs of the Taiping Domain, to be adhered to as the primary sect rule of Taiping Dao and persistently enforced. If one wishes to thrive within the Taiping Domain, whether you¡¯re an Immortal or a mortal, you must adhere to the requirements of these regulations. Judging by the current trend, it is highly probable that in the future, it will become a custom of Taiping Dao, spreading throughout the entire Taiping Domain. Likewise, as a result, the new generation of Taiping disciples, who grow up learning yearly about the extraordinary deeds of the Taiping Immortal Venerate. Having seen so many preserved images left by the Taiping Immortal Venerate, they are certainly more than familiar with their Sect Leader¡¯s voice and appearance. It is an essential test within the sect; if someone doesn¡¯t learn well, they will be considered ideologically deficient. At the lightest, they would face disciplinary penalties, or at worst, they might even be expelled. Under such a reward and punishment system, it would be abnormal for someone not to recognize Lu Yuan¡¯s voice. Therefore, when the phrase ¡°I am Heaven¡± echoed throughout the Taiping Domain. The mortals below might just feel a moment of trance, thinking they heard a hallucination. Even if they realize that everyone around them also has hallucinations, they might just think it¡¯s a haunting or that a deity has manifested. But to the cultivators among the Taiping disciples, they could already faintly sense the presence of the Heavenly Path. Hence, after Lu Yuan¡¯s voice appeared, their hearts could not help but be stirred. Because they discovered that their Sect Leader¡¯s voice was different from what they had previously seen in the preserved images and illusions. The previous voice, although also majestic and ethereal, inspiring awe. It was still within the realm of their acceptance and had not exceeded the norm. But the voice now had undergone a complete transformation and made a quantum leap. The sensation it brought to them was akin to the palpitations and terror of comprehending the Heavenly Path during their cultivation, vast and boundless, making one unable to perceive its limits. Their own Sect Leader had actually given them the sensation of the Heavenly Path. The significance contained therein is clearly understood by these cultivators. Taiping Dao today is no longer the fledgling and foundationless small Immortal Sect it was at the beginning. The current Taiping Dao reigns as a regional overlord, controlling countless resources. Especially after annihilating Qing Immortal Sect, it plundered the latter¡¯s accumulations of tens of thousands of years, enriching the originally shallow accumulations of Taiping Dao immensely. As various inheritances followed, the eyes of the educating disciples naturally broadened. Under elite education within the sect, some knowledge about Heavenly Immortals began to be understood by ordinary disciples. Therefore, they are now clear that their Sect Leader possessing the majesty of the Heavenly Path indicates that he has already broken through the second stage of the Heavenly Immortal realm and is well on his way on the path to becoming a Heavenly Immortal. ¡°` Chapter 1560 - Chapter 1560 Chapter 606 The Supreme Within the Realm_2 ?Chapter 1560: Chapter 606: The Supreme Within the Realm_2 Chapter 1560: Chapter 606: The Supreme Within the Realm_2 ¡°For School Leader, congratulations!¡± ¡°For Immortal Venerate, congratulations!¡± Inside Mi Yun Mountain, after a brief silence, countless cheers burst forth in an instant. Everyone was excited, thrilled that their School Leader had surpassed another Heavenly Immortal barrier, taking a solid step further on the road to becoming a Heavenly Immortal. Out of the three Heavenly Immortal trials, the School Leader had already conquered two. All that remained was one more breakthrough in the Cave World, and he could ascend to the realm of Heavenly Immortals, becoming a Great True Person, a Great Immortal Grandmaster. As members of the Celestial Immortal Sect, their status naturally soared alongside, making the dominance of Taiping Tao Sect even more secure, hereafter truly named for thousands and tens of thousands of years. Immortals never perishing, the sect never falling. As part of the sect, they too benefitted immensely, whether in terms of reputation or advantages, they indeed obtained it all. The sect disciples¡¯ reverence for the School Leader instantly erupted, each feeling proud to be under the School Leader. Moreover, the Qi Luck that Lu Yuan received from that side also started to surge massively. The way of Qi Luck is such: The stronger you are, the more you can boost the confidence of your subordinates, and the more confident your subordinates are, the more Qi Luck they can feedback to you. With such a positive cycle, as long as no major setbacks occur, it¡¯s almost impossible to interrupt. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï¦Í?¦Ï.§ã0 Coincidentally, Lu Yuan had not faced any setbacks in his journey. Or rather, while there were difficulties, they did not stop him; instead, he overcame them and thereby gained even greater benefits. With this breakthrough to Heavenly Immortal, it is just so. With each barrier broken, the confidence transmitted to his followers increases, and subsequently, the feedback they provide him also increases. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã? At this moment, some are directly addressing Lu Yuan as Immortal Venerate. One must know that in the Immortal Realm, the title of Immortal Venerate is generally reserved exclusively for Heavenly Immortals. Now, by calling Lu Yuan Immortal Venerate, they undoubtedly affirmed that the School Leader will surely become a Heavenly Immortal, or that his personal prestige is already comparable to that of a Heavenly Immortal. However, these disciples also had some constraints; they knew the School Leader wasn¡¯t truly a Heavenly Immortal yet. So, before the title of Immortal Venerate, they did not add a ¡°Great,¡± using only Immortal Venerate as the title. This also counts as a kind of burying their heads in the sand in some sense. And it¡¯s precisely these disciples who are gradually pushing Lu Yuan, giving him more Qi Luck, assisting him towards charging on the Heavenly Immortal path. Not only the disciples of Taiping Tao Sect are boiling. Upon understanding the changes in the School Leader¡¯s strength, those True Immortals within the Taiping Tao Sect also immediately took action. It is now precisely the two-thousandth year of the Taiping era, two thousand years since Taiping Tao Sect obtained the hegemony of Changqing Domain and changed its name. Two thousand years, for the older generation of Human Immortals from the past, was the end of their lives; they had even seen the passing of a generation. Two thousand years, for those cultivators below the level of True Immortal, it has been nearly three generations. Three generations changing, in reality, means several hundred batches of disciples being replaced. So many people, under the resource accumulation controlled by Taiping Tao Sect after obtaining the Changqing Domain, untold talented individuals have emerged. Two thousand years, even though Lu Yuan had appropriated a vast amount of resources from Taiping Tao Sect to maintain his cultivation, it was still enough to allow Taiping Tao Sect to birth countless strong warriors. Now, there are a total of sixty-nine Human Immortals within Taiping Tao Sect. Above Human Immortal, besides Lu Yuan¡¯s nine Avatars, there are also three more native cultivators who have ascended to Earth Immortal. The flourishing Qi Luck of Taiping Tao Sect, after winning the hegemony, began to exhibit robust development. Everything was like those newly rising Heavenly Immortal sects in the Immortal Realm, which, in the first tens of thousands of years of establishing the sect, would undergo explosive growth. Using a suffocatingly powerful force to prove their own strength. Only later, once they became strong, would they slowly abandon this nouveau riche-style growth, switching to a more inwardly restrained and ordered foundation and legacy. Like Dongyang Mountain, which back when it first became a Heavenly Immortal sect, had boasted about having a hundred thousand immortal cultivators, three hundred True Immortals, and twenty-four Earth Immortals. What a mighty reputation it had? But now, the number of cultivators at Dongyang Mountain has reduced to less than twenty thousand, and there are less than a hundred True Immortals, less than ten Earth Immortals. Compared to its peak period, how much weaker has it become? Even so, outsiders still believe that the Dongyang Mountain of today is stronger than when it was first founded. The reason is simple; Dongyang Mountain has withstood the test of time. Tens of thousands of years have passed, yet it still remains the master of the Dongyang Domain, still the hegemon, and still prosperous. Compared to that, Although the Taiping Dao now controls a region, and has begun to flourish, hosting fifty thousand cultivators and sixty-nine Human Immortalsa€¡±aside from Lu Yuan, there are also twelve Earth Immortals. This is only the accumulation of two thousand years of development. If given another ten thousand years, this number could double again, only then reaching the limit of the Taiping Domain. Yet, even at that limit, outsiders would not consider the Taiping Dao equal to those Celestial Immortal Sects. Unless Lu Yuan became a Heavenly Immortal. But even if Lu Yuan became a Heavenly Immortal, unless he endures tens of thousands of years proving himself not short-lived, others would still look down on him compared to those veteran Heavenly Immortals. After all, The previous master of the Taiping Domain, the Changqing Immortal, has proven with a bloody example: Even a Heavenly Immortal is not guaranteed to live for centuries like that old turtle in the Region Continent. Among Heavenly Immortals, there are also those who die young. Dying hurriedly after only sixty thousand years. Then leaving behind a declining sect, which was usurped within ten thousand years. With such a predecessor as an example right before them, as successors, it¡¯s hard for others not to compare Taiping Dao with it. Therefore, if the Taiping Dao wants to prove itself now, it must first achieve extreme strength, using absolute power to deter the surrounding people. Then, over time, cultivate a prestigious demeanor worthy of an Immortal Family. Hearing the words ¡®Taiping¡¯ should inspire longing and acknowledgment of being one of the top Immortal Sects. Achieving these two objectives would truly solidify the Taiping Dao¡¯s standing in the Immortal Realm. And as the higher-ups in the sect, those True Immortals within the Taiping Dao have deeply tied their interests to the sect. Or rather, they themselves represent the power of the sect. The stronger the sect, the greater their power; the greater their power, the more resources they can access; the more resources, the smoother their cultivation. Thus, whether the sect is strong affects their path and whether they can advance further. And the strength of the sect relies on whether Lu Yuan can smoothly break through to Heavenly Immortal. Lu Yuan¡¯s cultivation is once again tied to their futures. In such a situation, how could the True Immortals of Taiping Dao not care about their School Leader¡¯s cultivation? Almost upon sensing the School Leader¡¯s breakthrough, the Human Immortals quickly gathered towards the Cave Mansions of those Earth Immortals who were closely related to them within the sect. Then, after meeting with these Earth Immortals, they went together to look for Qing Guanzi, Yi Dancheng, and others, either elder by generation, or previous School Leaders, who held high status. Under their leadership, they proceeded towards the region of Lu Yuan¡¯s secluded meditation. The reason for this hierarchical gathering and reporting was, of course, because Lu Yuan¡¯s seclusion area had already been designated a forbidden area within the sect. If unrelated individuals dared to approach, even Earth Immortals would be executed without exception. The only exceptions were Qing Guanzi, the elder of Taiping in public, or Yi Dancheng, Jade Brocade, and other former School Leaders. Only these highly esteemed and truly reliable insiders, who would never betray their own, are trustworthy. They are publicly credible and authoritative. Privately, of course, it¡¯s because these are all avatars of Lu Yuan himself; he trusts only them. The public identity is merely a cover to deceive outsiders. Similarly, Only these avatars who can communicate with him at any time can stay in contact with Lu Yuan timely, knowing whether it is the right time to visit. If Lu Yuan does not wish to see certain individuals, these few avatars could also find various excuses to outright refuse them, sparing him the trouble. Between these internal and external aspects, using a few avatars to form a communication channel is indeed brilliant. Chapter 1561 - Chapter 1561 Chapter 607 Gathering of the Immortal Dynasties to Pay Homage ?Chapter 1561: Chapter 607: Gathering of the Immortal Dynasties to Pay Homage Chapter 1561: Chapter 607: Gathering of the Immortal Dynasties to Pay Homage Purple Sun Peak. This is where Lu Yuan¡¯s Cave Mansion is situated, the heart of the mountain in the rear of Mi Yun Mountain. The mountain¡¯s defense formation of the Taiping Dao, its most crucial node, is located right here, akin to the Formation Core. Such a key location could not be entrusted to just anyone for defense by Lu Yuan. Only he and his Avatars were deemed reliable enough to guard it. To have such a Formation Core location secured under the protection of the entire formation¡¯s might. After two thousand years of accumulation, especially after draining the entire Earth Vein from Changqing Mountain, the Earth Vein of Mi Yun Mountain has now become incredibly profound. Over the years, besides his own devoted seclusion, Lu Yuan kept his various Avatars from idleness. Instead, they honed their skills by studying the layout of Changqing Mountain, and began constructing a Heavenly Immortal formation also within Mi Yun Mountain. However, how powerful is a Heavenly Immortal formation! It cannot be comprehended without a profound realm of understandinga€¡±how could mere Earth Immortals grasp it thoroughly? Qing Guanzi, Yi Dancheng, and the other nine Avatars have pondered for two thousand years and still have not fully understood it, managing to learn only a little from the surface. Even so, this little has allowed Mi Yun Mountain¡¯s defensive formation to become one of the top Earth Immortal formations. Even Grand cultivators at late-stage Earth Immortal level could not disturb it. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï???.§ã¦Ï Lu Yuan has felt the might of the formation, and is well aware that it has surpassed the Earth Immortal level, and is on the verge of breaking through the first barrier of a Heavenly Immortal. Which means recapturing the Dao Fruit from the hands of the Heavenly Path. Although cultivators at this level have not merged with the Dao Fruit, the Dao Fruit is still in their own hands and no longer restricted by the Heavenly Path. Thus, they can wield the Power of the Dao Fruit, which can be several times stronger than that of an ordinary Grand cultivator when pushed to the extreme. In other words, without a Grand cultivator who has broken through the first barrier of a Heavenly Immortal, cultivators below this realm would have no hope of breaking through Mi Yun Mountain¡¯s defenses. Just a rough formation engineered by a few Avatars possesses such might. ??¦Í?¦Ï.§ã¦Ï Lu Yuan could well imagine what the complete Heavenly Immortal formation at Changqing Mountain must have been like. Even with the situation at Changqing Mountain back then, people like Yang Jihua could not fully activate the formation. But if the cost were of no concern, bringing the formation to the level of Taiping Dao¡¯s present mountain defense formation would be entirely feasible. With such might, even if the strength of the Taiping Dao had to face the combined forces of the entire Jiuzhou Immortal Gate, it would likely be difficult to shake Changqing Mountain. Considering the various hidden traps and dangers that Lu Yuan had previously dismantled at Changqing Mountain, had these all exploded at once, it is feared that not to mention breaching Changqing Mountain, they might well have suffered a devastating defeat. Thinking back now to the decision of launching a stealth attack on Changqing Mountain, it seems incredibly fortunate. Every time Lu Yuan observes the grand formation at Mi Yun Mountain, he can¡¯t help but feel relieved. Given the terrifying power of the formation present at Mi Yun Mountain, the defense capabilities of the Formation Core at the heart of the stronghold can be well imagined. As the central point of the grand formation, it is naturally protected by multiple layers of the formation¡¯s power. Here lies not only the strongest defense. But also, to protect the Formation Core from being suddenly assaulted and decapitated by the enemy, the strongest Kill Array within the entire formation has been set up here. Ordinary Grand cultivators coming here without precautions could likely be caught by the Formation Method Kill Array. With that strength of the formation, which is several times stronger than an ordinary Grand cultivator, it is highly dangerous even for Grand cultivators to face. This is also why Lu Yuan feels safe cultivating here and why many cultivators of the Taiping Dao Sect dare not come uninvited. Because of this Kill Array, apart from Lu Yuan who has broken through the second barrier of a Heavenly Immortal, no other cultivator within the Taiping Dao Sect can handle it. Even Grand cultivators might lose their lives facing this Kill Array. For those Earth Immortals within the Taiping Dao Sect who have only early-stage strength, carelessly wandering here without permission and triggering the Kill Array¡¯s defensive response, would find no mercy from the heavens or the earth, and could end up losing their lives. With such levels of protection, Lu Yuan naturally cultivates at ease, without fear that someone might sneak in with malicious intent. It¡¯s not just about this one layer of Formation Core defense. Near the main Formation Core of Purple Sun Peak, there are more than ten other peaks serving as auxiliary Formation Cores and situated in all directions. These surrounding auxiliary Formation Cores are also manned by Earth Immortals from the Taiping Dao Sect. Should any issue arise here, the signal from Purple Sun Peak can summon support from all corners in an instant. Such a response truly calls forth a formidable array of assistance. The True Immortals within the Taiping Dao Sect, understanding the severity here, dare not cause trouble at this place. Wishing to meet with the School Leader, they can only ask to see Yi Dancheng, Qing Guanzi, and others first. For it¡¯s only those who are authorized to open the Formation Core area of the core. Without them, outsiders wouldn¡¯t have the means to see Lu Yuan. Leading a group of True Immortals, Qing Guanzi and others arrived at Purple Sun Peak. Upon using the command talisman, and forming the specific Spell, the peak shrouded in a faint golden light suddenly surged with golden radiance, and then a small opening wide enough for three people to walk abreast appeared. ¡°Gentlemen, follow me inside!¡± With the command talisman retracted, Qing Guanzi turned back to look at the Immortals following him and said indifferently, then took the lead flying towards the opening. Seeing this, the Immortals also hastened to control their flight lights, following closely behind. Chapter 1562 - Chapter 1562 Chapter 607 Gathering of the Immortal Dynasties to Pay Homage_2 ?Chapter 1562: Chapter 607: Gathering of the Immortal Dynasties to Pay Homage_2 Chapter 1562: Chapter 607: Gathering of the Immortal Dynasties to Pay Homage_2 ¡°` Soon, everyone arrived outside Lu Yuan¡¯s Cave Mansion. Qing Guanzi had already communicated with the master, so upon arrival, he immediately called out loudly, ¡°We seek an audience with the School Leader!¡± The followers behind him rose to echo the call and bowed toward the direction of Lu Yuan¡¯s Cave Mansion. ¡°Come in.¡± After waiting for a while, the tightly closed doors of the Cave Mansion, accompanied by a creaking sound, slowly opened, and Lu Yuan¡¯s voice came from inside. Thus, Qing Guanzi led the Immortals through the door. Passing through a short corridor, the Immortals arrived at the center of the mountain belly, where, at the top of the cave, there was no cover, directly connecting to the outside mountaintop, allowing light to pour in through this skylight. Inside the cave, numerous spirit herbs and spirit flowers were planted, and some small spiritual beasts industriously took care of these spiritual plants. At the heart of the cave was a spring, gushing forth and forming a stream, flowing straight out of the cave mouth towards the back of the mountain. And Lu Yuan, at this moment, was beneath a small pavilion at the very east of the Cave Mansion, resting upon a small couch made of green stone by the spring, smiling warmly at them. ¡°What brings you all here?¡± Lu Yuan asked with a rather joyful tone. Seeing his mood, the visiting Immortals felt their last bit of uncertainty vanish. Source: Webnovel.com, updated on ?¦Ï??¦Ï.?¦Ï With the School Leader in such good spirits and willing to meet them during his seclusion, it must certainly prove that he has indeed made significant progress in his cultivation, breaking through another Heavenly Immortal checkpoint. Qing Guanzi, who had already sensed this, now smiled and said, ¡°Hearing of the School Leader¡¯s Immortal sound, we knew of the great advancement in cultivation, one step closer to the path of Heavenly Immortal. Such joyful news is a celebration for the entire sect. Thus, we have led the Immortals here to meet the School Leader, to offer our congratulations. Wishing the School Leader eternal blessings and longevity equal to the heavens.¡± ¡°Wishing the School Leader eternal blessings and longevity equal to the heavens.¡± Many Immortals there, a vast sea of them, followed in congratulation. Upon hearing this, Lu Yuan burst into hearty laughter, then raised his hand pointing at them and said, ¡°You all are indeed well-informed. True, after several hundred years of secluded cultivation, this School Leader¡¯s cultivation has progressed further. I have now broken through the second checkpoint of the Heavenly Immortal, harmonized with the Dao, and taken complete control over the entire Taiping Domain. Now, the heavens of the Taiping Domain are no longer governed by the Heavenly Path but by me. In this land, I am the heaven.¡± Lu Yuan repeated the sentence that came from his heart when he had previously broken through, his tone nonchalant but his aura of dominance naturally emerging. The many Immortals present, upon hearing this, couldn¡¯t help but be joyfully submissive, admiring him from the depths of their hearts. I am the heaven. This short phrase represents the dream every cultivator has pursued since stepping onto the path of Immortality. Yet, in the Immortal Realm, countless cultivators are as numerous as fish in the sea. Over the long years of the Immortal Realm, tens of thousands of years pass, countless generations of cultivators come and go. In each Region Continent, even with rapid changes, it often still takes tens of thousands of years to produce a Heavenly Immortal. Sometimes, it may take hundreds of thousands of years without a single Heavenly Immortal emerging. ?¦Ï¦Í??.§ã0 Looking at the Taiping Domain, two Heavenly Immortals have ascended in just sixty thousand years. Now approaching eighty thousand years, it seems that Lu Yuan, the Taiping Immortal Venerate, is about to be born. Such a frequent pace is extremely rare and curious within the Immortal Realm. The outside world, considering these circumstances, even suspects that the Taiping Domain is either at a geographically disadvantageous location or plagued with misfortune, having cursed to death two Great True Persons. And now, the current School Leader of Taiping, whose momentum is at its peak, even has a great chance of becoming a Heavenly Immortal. But in the end, it is unknown whether he can evade the fate of his two predecessors and live beyond one hundred thousand years, not becoming another short-lived Immortal Venerate. Donghua Continent, and even the Bordering Domains around it, have debates about this, each with their own arguments. ¡°` Regarding this, Lu Yuan had heard something about it, and felt quite annoyed but speechless inside. Had the cultivators in the Immortal Realm not been lacking in confidence to live as long as a Heavenly Immortal, Lu Yuan would have even suspected that they might actually open a betting pool, to gamble on whether he could live beyond a hundred thousand years. But since mouths are on others¡¯ faces, they can say whatever they want, how could he control that? As long as they don¡¯t say it to his face, he couldn¡¯t stretch his hand so far. Besides, there is no need to take too much to heart the discussions of some short-lived species. Now they are shouting with glee, but wait a few thousand, even tens of thousands of years, who knows how many times the grass on their graves would have been replaced. And by that time, even if he has not become a Heavenly Immortal, with the Dao Fruit of longevity in hand, Lu Yuan would still be living well. With that in mind, why bother competing with these people for temporary anger? But while Lu Yuan does not care about those outside voices, the outside world cannot ignore him, this Grand Cultivator who has already touched the edge of being a Heavenly Immortal. Just like the numerous True Immortals of Taiping Dao in front of him, after hearing from their own School Leader¡¯s acknowledgment of his breakthrough, every single one of them showed joy and once again bowed deeply, saying: ¡°We congratulate the School Leader!¡± Among them, a newly broken-through Earth Immortal of Taiping Dao, Cao BenShan, went straight to the point: ¡°Bursting through the Heavenly Immortal barrier, this is a joyous event for all of Taiping Dao, it should be greatly celebrated, announced to the world, to let the people know the grace of our Taiping Dao. This student requests a grand celebration, to widely invite Immortal Sects, to bolster the prestige of our sect!¡± As a newly advanced Earth Immortal, Cao BenShan, both nominally and substantively, is already among the top-tier echelons of Taiping Dao. However, precisely because he has become one of the top echelons in name, he knows very clearly about the division between hidden and visible veins that has always been rumored within the sect, and just how distinct that division is. He is already an Earth Immortal and also considers himself loyally devoted to the sect, but when interacting with the senior Earth Immortals in the sect, he could still feel a clear sense of boundary. Those Earth Immortals born from hidden veins, or to put it bluntly, from the School Leader¡¯s lineage, have formed their own small circle and have their own circles of communication. And an Earth Immortal like him who comes from Taiping Realm¡¯s local roots, whenever he tries to approach them, these hidden vein Earth Immortals, although very polite to him and friendly in attitude, treat him as a fellow sect member. But if he wants to step further into a closer relationship, then sorry, it cannot be done. No matter how hard they try, an invisible dividing line stands firmly there. Stopping those Taiping Cultivators who wish to enter the circle of the hidden veins from going any further. This kind of tacit exclusion naturally makes many Taiping Cultivators feel disappointed, and then develop a pursuing mentality and yearning. The harder it is to obtain, the more they want it. Therefore, after overcoming himself, Cao BenShan, one of those cultivators who longed for the hidden vein circle, began striving to really become a core part of Taiping Dao to enter this circle. And in his mind, the best way to enter this circle is to kneel and flatter the true power speaker of Taiping Dao at present, also the master of both hidden and visible veins, the School Leader Lu Yuan himself. So, half out of respect and half trying to please, Cao BenShan offered the above proposal. And his proposal also made other True Immortals who wanted to get closer to the circle of the hidden veins show a regretful and tempted look, thinking if they should follow suit. Fortunately, before they could make up their minds, Lu Yuan had already given the response: ¡°There¡¯s no need for such extraordinary preparations. Right now is a critical moment for my breakthrough to Heavenly Immortal status. Currently, I have broken through two gates, only one left. At such a time, it¡¯s not suitable to come into contact with too many outsiders, to avoid complications. Moreover, I have already sealed off the region to shield against the Heavenly Path. Now that I have not yet achieved the status of Heavenly Immortal, it is also not appropriate to open the Formation Method, as this carries the risk of alerting the Heavenly Path, unfavorable to me. If we truly want to hold a grand celebration and invite the Immortal Sects, let¡¯s wait until I become a Heavenly Immortal. Then with the dignity of a Great True Person, we can celebrate lavishly. But Cao Shizhu also has a devoted heart, and what you say makes sense. My breaking through yet another Heavenly Immortal gate is indeed a great joy. We should indeed celebrate, let the sect, and even the whole region, know about this matter, to encourage our people and deter the petty. Let¡¯s do it this way: no need for a grand celebration, you all organize a small celebration, with the scale limited within our Taiping Dao, as well as those few from the Western Domain, the Nine Provinces fellow paths, and various Netherworld Divine Methods. Just our own people, celebrating will be enough. This task will be given to you, Cao Shizhu, to organize.¡± Although Lu Yuan rejected the proposal, he also felt Cao BenShan¡¯s earnest affection. In order not to hurt the other party¡¯s feelings, as well as to appease, he made the final arrangement. And this arrangement also had his other intentions included.